■*>'-J« 



•o 



^^O*. 



Ay « 












ov 



AN 

ENCYCLOPAEDIA 



OF 



GARDENING? 



COMPRISING THE 



THEORY AND PRACTICE 

/ / O 



HORTICULTURE, FLORICULTURE, 
ARBORICULTURE, 

AND 

LANDSCAPE-GARDENING, 

INCLUDING 

ail tBe latent 3Improt>ement0 ; 

A GENERAL HISTORY OF GARDENING IN ALL COUNTRIES ^ 

AND A STATISTICAL VIEW OF ITS PRESENT STATE, 

WITH SUGGESTIONS FOR ITS FUTURE PROGRESS, IN THE 
BRITISH ISLES. 



By J. C. LOUDON, F.L.S. H.S. &c. 



ILLUSTRATED WITH 

MANY HUNDRED ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD BY BRANSTON, 



LONDON: 

PRINTED FOR 

LONGMAN, ilEES, ORME, BROWN, AND GREEN, 

PATERNOSTER-EOW. 

1826. 



London ; 
Prinied by A. & R. Spottiswoode, 
New- Street- Sqaare. 




S\ PREFACE. 



The term Encyclopaedia, applied to a single art, is meant to convey 
the idea of as complete a treatise on that art as can be composed at 
the time of its pubhcation. No art has been more extended in its 
objects, or improved in its practices within the last fifty years than 
Gardening. During that period numerous books have been written 
in various departments of the subject ; but in no work has the whole 
Art of Gardening been included. The only books which have any 
pretensions to completeness are the Gardener's Dictionaries : but 
though some of these are copious on the culture of plants, and 
others, in botanical description ; yet in none is the subject of design, 
taste, and the arrangement of gardens, adequately treated of ; and 
scarcely any thing is contained in these books, either on the History 
or Statistics of Gardening. In the voluminous edition of Miller's Dic- 
tionary, by Professor Martyn, though the title announces " the addi- 
tion of all the modern improvements of landscape-gardening," there is 
not an article bearing that title throughout the work ; nor a single 
quotation or abridgement from the writings of Wheatley, G. Mason, 
Price, Repton, or any modern author, on the art of laying out 
grounds. 

The Encyclopaedia of Gardening now submitted to the public 
treats of every branch of the Art, and includes every modern im- 
provement to the present year. 

Though this work, like every other of the kind, can only be consi- 
dered as a compilation from books, yet, on various subjects, especially 
in what relates to Gardening History and Statistics, it was found ad- 
visable to correspond with a number of persons both at home and 
abroad. The favours of these Correspondents are here thankfully 
acknowledged ; and their farther assistance, as well as that of every 
Reader willing to correct an error or supply a deficiency, is earnestly 
entreated, in order to render any future edition of the work as per- 
fect as possible. 

Besides modern books, it became necessary to consult some com- 
paratively ancient and scarce works only to be met with in par- 
ticular collections. Our respectful acknowledgments are, on this 

A 2 



iv 



PREFACE. 



account, due to the Council and Secretary of the Linnsean Society ; 
to the Council and Secretary of the Horticultural Society ; to Robert 
Brown, Esq. the possessor of the Banksian library ; and to William 
Forsyth, Esq., whose collection of British works on Gardening is more 
than usually complete. 

It remains only to mention, as a key to this work, that to save 
room, the prenoms and other additions to names of persons are not 
inserted; only contracted titles of the books referred to are given; 
and the names of gardens or country residences are mentioned, Avith- 
out, in many cases, designating their local situation. By turning to 
the General Index, the names of persons will be found, with the 
addition of their prenoms and other titles, where known, at length ; 
and there the abridged titles of books are also given complete, and 
the names of residences, accompanied by that of the county or 
country in which they are situated. The botanical nomenclature 
which has been followed is that of Sweet's Hortus Suburbanus Lori' 
dinensis, with only one or two exceptions ; the reasons for which are 
given where they occur. The systematic names of insects, or other 
animals, or of minerals, are generally those of Linnaeus : some ex- 
ceptions are also noted. In various parts of the work etymological 
and other explanations will be found, which, to one class of readers, 
may be unnecessary. But it is to be considered that we address 
ourselves to Practical Gardeners as well as to the Patrons of Gar- 
dening ; and our opinion is, that to enhghten, and generally to raise 
the intellectual character of the former, will ultimately be found the. 
most efficient mode of improving them in their profession, and thus 
rendering them more truly valuable to the latter. 

By referring to the Kalendarial Index, those parts of this work 
which treat of Garden Culture and Management may be consulted 
monthly, as the operations require to be performed ; and by recourse 
to the General Index, the whole may be consulted in detached por- 
tions, as in a Dictionary of Gardening. 

Although this second edition forms a less bulky volume than the 
first, yet it contains considerably more printed matter ; besides above 
a hundred new engravings. These important additions we have been 
enabled to make by printing all those parts of the work which may be 
considered as of secondary importance, in a smaller type than that of 
the general text. 

J. C. L. 

Bay!<mitcr, April S, 1824. 



CONTENTS. 



PART L 

GARDENING CONSIDERED IN RESPECT TO ITS ORIGIN, PROGRESS, AND PRESENT 
STATE AMONG DIFFERENT NATIONS, GOVERNMENTS, AND CLIMATES. 



BOOK I. 

HISTORY OF GARDENING AMONG ANCIENT 
AND MODERN NATIONS. 

Chap. I. Page 
Of the Origin and Progress of Gardening in the 
earliest ages of Antiquity, or from the 10th 
century before the vulgar aera to the found, 
ation of the Roman Empire - - 3 

I. Of the fabulous Gardens of Antiquity - ib. 

II. Jewish Gardens. B.C. 1500. - - 4 

III. Phseacian Gardens. B.C. 900. - - ib. 

IV. Babylonian or Assyrian Gardens. B.C. 

2000. - - - - 5 

V. Persian Gardens. B. C. 500. . . 6 

VI. Grecian Gardens. B. C. 300. - - ib. 

VII. Gardening in the ages of Antiquity, as 

to Fruits, Culuiary Productions, and 
Flowers - - - 7 

Chap. II. 

Chronological History of Gardening, from the 
time of the .Roman Kings, in the sixth cen- 
tury B. C. to the Decline and Fall of the 
Empire in the fifth century of our aera - 9 

I. Roman Gardening as an Art of Design and 

Taste - ... ib. 

II. Roman Gardening considered as to the Cul. 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 13 

III. Roman Gardening in respect to its Pro. 

ducts for the Kitchen and the Dessert ib. 

IV. Roman Gardening considered in respect 

to the Propagation and Planting of Tim- 
ber.trees and Hedges . - - 14 

V. Roman Gardening as a Science, and as to 

the Authors it produced - .15 

Chap. III. 

Chronological History of Gardening, in conti. 
nental Europe from the Time of the Romans 
to the present Day, or from A. D. 500 to A. D. 
1823. - . . - 16 

I. Of the Revival, Progress, and present State 

of Gardening in Italy - . ib. 

1. Italian Gardening, in respect to Design 

and Taste . . - ib. 

2. Italian Gardening in respect to the Cul. 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 21 

3. Italian Gardening in respect to its Products 

for the Kitchen and the Dessert - 23 

4. Italian Gardening, in respect ro the plant. 

ing of Timber.trees and Hedges . 24 

5. Italian Gardening, as empirically practised 25 

6. Italian Gardening, as a Science, and as to 

the Authors it has produced . . ib. 

II. Of the Revival, Progress, and present State 

. of Gardening in HoUand and Flanders . 26 

1. Dutch Gardening, as an Art of Design and 

Taste . . . ib. 

2. Dutch Gardening, in respect to the Cul. 

- ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 29 

3. Dutch Gardening in respect to the Cul. 

. ture of Fruits and Culinary Vegetables • 31 



4. Dutch Gardening, in respect to the plant. 

ing of Timber-trees and Hedges - 31 

5. Dutch Gardening, as empirically practised 32 

6. Dutch Gardening, as a Science, and in re. 

spect to the Authors it has produced . S3 

III. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardening in France . - ib. 

1. French Gardening, as an Art of Design 

and Taste ... ih. 

2. French Gardening, in respect to the Cul- 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 39 

3. Frencli Gardening, in respect to its horti- 

cultural Productions . - 40 

4. French Gardening, in respect to the plant. 

ing of Timber-trees and Hedges - 41 

5. French Gardening, as empirically prac- 

tised . . -42 

6. French Gardening, as a Science, and as to 

the Authors it has produced - - 43 

IV. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardening in Germany - - i6. 

1. German Gardening, as an Art of Design 

and Taste - . - ib. 

2. German Gardening, in respect to the Cul. 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 47 

3. German Gardening, in respect to horticul. 

tural Productions - . 49 

4. German Gardening, as to planting Timber. 

trees and Hedges . . - 50 

5. German Gardening, as empirically prac. 

tised .... ib. 

6. German Gardening, as a Science, and as to 

the'Authors it has produced . . 51 

V. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardening in Switzerland . .52 

VI. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardening in Sweden and Norwav . 53 

VII. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardening in Russia . . 55 

1. Russian Gardening, as an Art of Design 

and Taste 

2. Russian Gardening, in respect to the Cul. 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 59 

3. Russian Gardening, in respect to its horti- 

cultural Productions - - ib. 

4. Russian Gardening, in respect to the Cul- 

ture of Timber-trees and Hedges . 60 

5. Russian Gardening, as empirically prac- 

tised . - . ib. 

6. Russian Gardening, as a Science, and as 

to the Authors it has produced - 61 

VIII. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State 

of Gardening in Poland - - ib. 

IX. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 

Gardenhig in Spain and Portugal . 63 

1. Spanish Gardening, as an Art of Design 

and Taste . . .64 

2. Spanish and Portuguese Gardening, in re. 

spect to the Culture of Flowers and 
Plants of Ornament . .65 

3. Spanish and Portuguese Gardening, in re. 

spect to its horticultural Productions and 
Planting . . -66 

X Of the Rise, Progress, and present state of 
Gardening in European Turkey - ib, 

A 3 



CONTENTS. 



Chap, IV. Page 
Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of 
Gardening in the British Isles - - 68 

I. British Gardening, as an Art of Design and 

Taste - . - .69 

1. Gardening in England, as an Art of De- 

sign and Taste - - - ib. 

2. Gardening in Scotland, as an Art of Design 

and Taste - - - 80 

3. Gardening in Ireland, as an Art of Design 

and Taste - - - 82 

II. British Gardening, in respect to the Cul- 

ture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament 83 

1. Gardening in England, in respect to the 

Culture of Flowers and the Establishment 
of Botanic Gardens - - 84 

2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to the 

Culture of Flowers and the Establish- 
ment of Botanic Gardens - - 86 

3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to Flori- 

culture and Botany - - - - 87 

III. British Gardening, in respect to its horti- 

cultural Productions - - - . 88 

1. Gardening in England, in respect to its 

horticultural Productions - - ib. 

2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to its 

horticultural Productions - - 91 

3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to its hor- 

ticultural Productions - - 92 

IV. British Gardening, in respect to the plant- 

ing of Timber-trees and Hedges - ib. 

1. Gardening in England, in respect to the 

planting of Timber-trees and Hedges - ib. 

2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to the 

planting of Timber-trees and Hedges - 93 

3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to the 

planting of Timber-trees and Hedges - 94 

V. British Gardening, as empirically practised ib. 

VI. British Gardening, as a Science, and as to 

the Authors it has produced - - 96 



Chap." V. Page 

Of the present State of Gardening "in Ultra- 
European Countries - - - 97 

I. Syrian, Persian, Indian, and African Gar- 

dens of modem Times . - 98 

II. Chinese Gardening . . loi 

III. Gardening in Anglo-North America, or 

the United States and British Provinces 104 

IV. Gardening in Spanish North America, or 

Mexico - _ . 106 

V. Gardening in South America . -107 

VI. Gardening in the British Colonies, and in 

other Foreign Settlements of European 
Nations - /j^ 

BOOK 11. 

GARDENING CONSIDERED AS TO ITS PRO- 
GRESS AND PRESENT STATE UNDER DIF- 
FERENT POLITICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL 
CIRCUMSTANCES. 

Chap. I. Page 
Gardening as affected by different Forms of 
Government, Religions, and States of Society 110 

I. Gardening as affected by different Forms of 

Government and Religions . _ m 

II. Gardening as affected by different States of 

Society - - . ib^ 

Chap. II. 

Gardening as affected by different Climates, 
Habits of Life, and Manners . . 112 

I. Influence of Climate, in respect to Fruits, 

culinary Plants, Flowers, Timber-trees, 
and horticultural Skill - . 113 

II. Influence of Climate and Manners on Gar- 

dening, as an Art of Design and Taste - 114 

III. Of the Climate and Circumstances of Bri- 

tain, in respect to Gardening - -118 



PART II. 

GARDENING CONSIDERED AS A SCIENCE. 



BOOK 1. 

THE STUDY OF THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 

Chap. I. Page 
Origin, Progress, and present State of the Study 
of Plants - - - 120 

Chap. II. 

Glossology, or the Names of the Parts of Plants 122 
Chap. III. 

Phytography, or the Nomenclature and De- 
scription of Plants - - - 123 

I. Names of Classes and Orders - - ib. 

II. iNames of Genera - - - ib. 

III. Names of Species - - -124 

IV. Namesof Varieties and Subvarieties -125 

V. Descriptions of Plants - - - 126 

VI. Of forming and preserving Herbarians - 127 

VII. Of Methods of Study - - -128 

Chap. IV. 

Taxonomy, or the Classifications of Plants - 26- 

I. The Hortus Britannicus arranged according 

to the Linnsean System - - ISO 

II. The Hortus Britannicus arranged according 

to the Jussieuean System - - 135 

Chap. V. 

Vegetable Organology, or the external Struc- 
ture of Plants - - 138 

I. , Perfect Plants - - - ib. 

1. Conservative Organs - - ib. 

2. Conservative Appendages - - ib. 

3. Reproductive Organs - - 139 

4. Reproductive Appendages - - ib. 

II. Imperfect Plants - - - 140 

1. Filices, Equisitaceae, and Lycopodineae - ih. 

2. Musci - - - ib. 

3. Hepaticae - - - 1*1 

4. Algae and Lichenae - - ib. 

5. Fungi - n . . 1-142 



Chap. VI. Page 
Vegetable Anatomy, or the internal Structure 
of Plants - _ . 142 

I. Decomposite Organs , . ib. 

II. Composite Organs - . . 144 

III. Elementary or Vascular Organs - 146 

Chap. VII. 

Vegetable Chemistry, or primary Principles of 
Plants - - . - 147 

I. Compound Products . , . ib. 

II. Simple Products - _ - 157 

Chap. VIII. 

Functions of Vegetables - . Zlid, 

I. Germination of the Seed . _ 158 

II. Food of the vegetating Plant - . 160 

III. Process of Vegetable Nutrition - -165 

IV. Process of Vegetable Developement -172 

V. Anomalies of Vegetable Developement -177 

VI. Of the Sexuality of Vegetables - -181 

VII. Impregnation of the Seed _ . 182 

VIII. Changes consequent upon Impregnation 183 

IX. The propagation of the Species - - 184 

X. Causes limiting the Propagation of the Spe- 

cies - - - . 186 

XI. Evidence and Character of Vegetable Vi- 

tality - . . 187 

Chap. IX. 

Vegetable Pathology, or the Diseases and Casu- 
alties of Vegetable Life - . 191 

I. Wounds and Accidents - . n,, 

II. Diseases - - _ 192 

III. Natural Decay - - . 195 

Chap. X. 

Vegetable Geography and History, or the Dis- 
tribution of Vegetables relatively to the Earth 
and to Man - _ . 195 

I. Geographical Distribution of Vegfetables - 197 

IL Physical Distribution of Vegetables - ib. 

III. Civil Causes affecting the Distribution of 

Plants . - .302 



CONTENTS. 



vii 



IV. Characteristic or Picturesque Distribution 

of Vegetables - - - 203 

V. Systematic Distribution of Vegetables - 205 

VI. Economical Distribution of Vegetables - 206 

VII. Arithmetical Distribution of Vegetables - ib. 
VIIL Distribution of the British Flora, indige- 
nous and exotic - - ib. 

Chap. XI. 

Origin of Culture, as derived from the Study of 
Vegetables - - - - 214 

BOOK II. 

OF THE NATURAL AGENTS OF VEGETABLE 
GROWTH AND CULTURE. 

Chap. I. 

Of Earths and Soils - - - 217 

I. Of the Geological Structure of the Globe and 

the Formation of Earths and Soils - ib. 

II. Classification and Nomenclature of Soiid - 219 

III. Of discovering the Qualities of Soils - 221 

1. Of discovering the Quahties of Soils by 

means of the Plants which grow on 
them - _ . . ib. 

2. Of discovering the Qualities of Soils by 

chemical Analysis - - - ib. 

3. Of discovering the Qualities of a Soil 

mechanically and empirically - - 222 

IV. Of the Uses of the Soil to Vegetables - 223 

V. Of the Improvement of Soils - - 226 

1. Pulverisation ... ib. 

2. Of the Improvement of Soils by Compres- 
sion - . . .228 

3. Of the Improvi ent of Soils by Aeration 

or Fallowing - . . ib. 

4. Alteration of the constituent Parts of Soils 229 
, 5. Changing the Condition of Lands, in re- 
spect to Water - . . 231 

6. Changing the Condition of Lands, in re- 

spect to Atmospherical Influence . 232 

7. Rotation of Crops - .233 

Chap. IL 

Of Manures - . , . 234 

I. Of Manures of Animal and Vegetable Origin 235 

1. The Theory of the Operation of Manures 

of Animal and Vegetable Origin - ib. 

; 2. Of the different Species of Manures of 

Animal and Vegetable Origin . 236 

, 3. Of the fermenting, preserving, and apply- 
ing of Manures of Animal and Vegetable 
Origin - - .241 

II. Of Manures of Mineral Origin . .243 
L 1. Theory of the Operation of Mineral Ma. 

nures • - - - ib 

2. Of the different Species of Mineral Ma. 

nures - . .244 

Chap. IIL 

Of the Agency of Heat, Light, Electricity, 
and Water, in Vegetable Culture . - 249 

I. Of Heat and Light - . . ib 

II. Of Electricity . . - - 253 
IIL Of Water . - . . ib. 

Chap. IV. 

Of the Agency of the Atmosphere in Vegeta. 

tion - - - - 254 

I. Of the Elements of the Atmosphere - - ib. 

II. Ofthe Means of prognosticatingthe Weather 264 
HI. Of the Climate of Britain - -266 

BOOK III. 

MECHANICAL AGENTS EMPLOYED IN GAR- 
DENING. 



Chap. I. 

Implements of Gardening . - - 269 

I. Tools - . ib. 

II. Instruments - - - 272 
1 Instruments of Operation - . ib. 

2. Instruments of Direction - -278 

3. Instruments of Designation - -280 

III. Utensils . . .282 



1. Utensils of Preparation and Deportation - ib. 



Page 

2. Utensils of Culture - - - 283 

3. Utensils of Protection - . 286 

4. Utensils for entrapping Vermin - 287 

IV. Machines ... ib. 

1. Machines of Labor - .288 

2. Machines for Vermin, and Defence against 

the enemies of Gardens - - 292 

3. Meteorological Machines - - 293 

V. Various Articles used in Gardening Oper- 

ations - 295 

1. Articles of Adaptation - - ib. 

2. Articles of Manufacture - - 297 

3. Articles of Preparation - - ib. 

Chap. 1L 

Structures used in Gardening - - 298 

I. Temporary or Moveable Structures . ib. 

1. Structures Portable, or entirely Moveable ib. 

2. Structures partly Moveable - - 300 

II. Fixed Structures - - - 303 

III. Permanent Horticultural Structures . 310 

1. Ofthe Principles of Design in Hot-houses 311 

2. Forms of Hot-house Roofs . . 314 

3. Details of the Construction of Roofs, or 

the glazed part of Hot-houses . - 318 

4. Glazing of Hot-house Roofs - - 31P 

5. Walls and Sheds of Hot-houses - - 322 

6. Furnaces and Flues - - - 323 

7. Steam Boilers and Tubes . - 326 

8. Trellises - - - - 328 

9. Paths, Pits, Stages, Shelves, Doors, &c. - 329 

10. Details for Water, Wind, and Renewal of 

Air - - .331 

IV. Mushroom-houses - - 332 

V. Cold Plant-habitations - - 334 

Chap. IIL ; 
Edifices used in Gardening - - ib. 

I. Economical Buildings . - - ib. 

II. Anomalous Buildings - - 339 

1. Of the Ice-house and its Management - ib. 

2. Of the Apiary and the Management of 

Bees . . - - 341 

3. Of the Aviary, and of Menageries, Pisci. 

naries, &c. - _ - 346 

III. Decorative Buildings - - 348 

1. Useful Decorative Buildings - - ib, 

2. Convenient Decorations - - 355 

3. Characteristic Decorations - - 360 

f Chap. IV. 
Of the Improvement of the Mechanical Agents 
of Gardening . . - _ 361 

BOOK IV. 

OF THE OPERATIONS OF GARDENING. 1 

Chap. I. 

Operations of Gardening, in which Strength is 

chiefly required in the Operator - - 363 

I. Mechanical Operations common to all Arts 

of Manual Labor - - - ib. 

II. Garden-labors on the Soil - - 364 

III. Garden-labors with Plants - - 367 

Chap. II. 

Operations of Gardening in which Skill is more 
required than Strength ... 369' 

I. Of transferring Designs from Ground to 

Paper or Memory - - - ib, 

II. Of transferring Designs from Paper or 

Memory to Ground ... 373 

1. Transferring Figures and Designs to plane 

Surfaces - - ... ib. 

2. Tranferring Figures and Designs to irregu- 

lar Surfaces - . - - 375 

3. Of the Arrangement of Quantities - 377 
IIL Of carrying Designs into Execution - 378 

Chap. III. 

Scientific Processes and Operations - - 38* 

1. Preparation of fermenting Substances for 

Hot-beds, Manures, and Composts - ib. 

II. Operations of Propagation - - 387 

1. Propagation by natural Methods - - ib. 

2. Propagation by Layering - - 388 

3. Propagation by Inarching - - 390 

4. Propagation by Grafting _ - 391 

5. Propagation by Budding . \ - 397 

6. Propagation by Cuttings ^ m - 399 



viii 



CONTENTS. 



Page 

III. Operations of Rearing and Culture - 401 

1. Sowing, Planting, and Watering - ib. 

2. Transplanting - - -402 

3. Pruning . . - 406 

4. Training - - - 411 
i). Blanching - - 415 

IV. Operations for inducing a State of Fruit- 

fulness in barren and unblossoming TYees 
and Plants - - . ib. 

V. Operations for retarding or accelerating 

Vegetation - - . 418 

1. Operations for retarding Vegetation - ib. 

2. Operations for accelerating Vegetation - 419 

VI. Operations to imitate warm Climates - 423 

VII. Operations of Protection from Atmospher- 

ical Injuries ... 424 

VIII. Operations relative to Vermin, Diseases, 

and other Casualties of Plants and 
Gardens - - - 426 



Page 

1. Of the Kinds of Vermin most injurious 

to Gardens - . .426 

2. Operations for subduing Vermin - 436 

3. Operations relative to Diseases and other 

Casualties ... 437 

IX. Operations of Gathering, Preserving, and 

Keeping - - .438 

Chap. IV. 

Operations relative to tlie final Products de- 
sired of Gardens, and Garden-scenery . 443 

I. Of the Vegetable Products desired of Gar- 

dens ... 444 

II. Of the Superintendence and Management 

of Gardens - - . 445 

III. Of the Beauty and Order of Garden- 

scenery - - - • - 451 



PART III. 

GARDENING AS PRACTISED IN BRITAIN. 



BOOK 1. 

HORTICULTURE. 

Chap. I. Page 
The Formation of a Kitchen-garden . - 455 

I. Situation - . , . ib. 

II. Exposure and Aspect ... 456 

III. Extent - - . . .457 

IV. Shelter and Shade - - - 458 

V. Soil - - . - .460 

VI. Water - - - - . 463 

VII. Form - . - . .464 

VIII. Walls 465 

IX. Ring-fence and Slip ... 472 

X. Placing the Culinary Hot-houses and 

Melonry - - . . ib. 

XI. Laying out the Area - . . 473 

Chap. II. 

Of the Distribution of Fruit-trees in a Kitchen- 
garden ..... 476 

I. Of the Selection and Arrangement of Wall 

Fruit-trees - - 477 

II. Of the Selection and Arrangement of 

Espaliers and Dwarf-standards - . 479 

III. Of tall Standard Fruit-trees in a Kitchen. 

garden ..... 480 

IV. Fruit-shrubs - . - . 4«1 

Chap. III. 

Of the Formation and Planting of an Orchard, 
subsidiary to the Kitchen-garden . . 482 

Chap. IV. 

Of the general Cultivation and Management 
of a Kitchen.garden - - - 485 

I. Culture and Management of the Soil - ib. 

II. Manure 486 

III. Cropping . . . .487 

IV. Thinning . . . - 489 

V. Pruning and Training - - 490 

VI. Weeding, Stirring the Soil, Protecting, 

Supporting, and Shading - - 493 

VII. Watering - - . . ib. 

VIII. Vermin, Insects, Diseases, and Accidents 494 

IX. Gathering and Preserving Vegetables and 

Fruits, and sending them to a Distance 495 

X. Miscellaneous Operations of Culture and 

Management ... ib. 

Chap. V. 

Of the general Management of Orchards - 496 

I. General Culture - - - ib. 

II. Pruning Orchard-trees . - . 497 

III. Of gathering and storing Orchard-fruits - 499 

IV. Of packing Orchard and other Fruits for 

Carriage - - - - 501 

Chap. VI. 

Construction of the Culinary Forcing Struc- 
tures and Hot-houses - . -502 



Page 

I. Of the Construction of the Pinery . -502 

II. Of the Construction of the Vinery - 506 

III. Construction of the Peach-house - 506 

IV. Construction of the Cherry-house and Fig- 

house ... 510 

V. Of Constructing Hot-houses in Rangesr - ib. 

VI. Construction of Culinary Pits, Frames, and 

Mushroom-houses - . ib. 

VII. Details in the Construccion of Culinary 

Hot-houses . - - 512 

Chap. VII. 

Of the general Culture of Forcing Structures 
and Culinary Hot-houses - - 513 

I. Culture of the Pinery - -514 

1. Varieties of the Pine and General Mode of 

Culture - - - . ib. 

2. Sou - . . - ib. 

3. Artificial Heat - - - 515 

4. Propagation of the Pine-apple - 516 

5. Of rearing the Pine-apple in the Nursing 

Department - - . , - 517 

6. Succession Department - - 521 

7. Fruiting Department - - 525 

8. General Directions common to the Three 

Departments of Pine-apple Culture - 531 

9. Compendium of a Course of Culture - 537 

10. Recent Improvements in the Culture of 

the Pine-apple - - 538 

II. Of the Culture of the Vinery - -541 

1. Of the General Culture of the Grape in 

Vineries ... ib. 

2. Of particular Modes of cultivating the 

Grape, adapted to particular Situations 553 

3. Of Gathering and Keeping forced Grapes 556 

4. Of the Insects and Diseases attendant on 

forced or Hot-house Grapes - * 557 

III. Culture of the Peach-house - - 558 

IV. Of the Culture of the Cherrv-house - 563 

V. Of the Culture of the Fig-house - -566 

VI. Of the Culture and Forcing of the Cucum- 

ber - - - - - 569 

VII. Of the Culture of the Melon - - - 580 

VIII. Forcing the Strawberry in Hot-houses, 

Pits, and Hot-beds - - - 588 

IX. Forcing Asparagus in Pits and Hot-beds 590 

X. Forcing Kidneybeans ... 592 

XI. Forcing Potatoes - - - 593 

XII. Forcing Peas - - - 595 

XIII. Forcing Salads, Pot-herbs, &c. - - 596 

XIV. Culture of the Mushroom - - ib. 

Chap. VIII. 
Horticultural Catalogue.— Hardy Herbaceous 
Culinary Vegetables 



I. The Cabbage Tribe 

1. White Cabbage 

2. Red Cabbage 

3. Savoy 

4. Brussels Sprouts 

5. Borecole 

6. Cauliflower 

7. Broccoli 



- 607 

- ib. 

- 610 

- U>. 
. 611 
. ib. 
. 612 

- 614 



CONTENTS. 



8. Of Insects which infest the Cabbage 

II. Leguminous Plants 

1. Pea - - - 

2. Garden-bean 

3. Kidneybean 

III. Esculent Roots 

1. Potatoe 

2. Jerusalem Artichoke 

3. Turnip ... 

4. Carrot - 

5. Parsnep - 
I a Red Beet 

7. Skirret ... 

8. Scorzonera, or Viper's Grass 

9. Salsify, or Purple Goat's Beard 

10. Radish 

IV. Spinaceous Plants 

1. Spinage - 

2. White Beet 

3. Orache, or Mountain Spinage 

4. Wild Spinage 

5. New Zealand Spinage 

6. Sorrel . - . . 

7. Herb-patience, or Patience-Dock 

V. Alliaceous Plants 

1. Onion - 

2. Leek . - - - 

3. Chive 

4. Garlic - . - 

5. Shallot . . . - 

6. Rocambole - - 

VI. Asparaginous Plants 

1. Asparagus - - 

2. Sea-kale - - - 

3. Artichoke - 

4. Cardoon, or Chardoon 

5. Rampion . - - 

6. Hop - ... 

7. Alisander, or Alexanders 

8. Bladder-Campion 

9. Thistle 

VII. Acetarious Plants 

1. Lettuce - - - 

2. Endive 

3. Succory, or Wild Endive 

4. Dandelion - 

5. Celery . _ . - 

6. Mustard . - - . 

7. Rape . . - 

8. Corn-Salad, or Lamb-Lettuce 

9. Garden-Cress - - . 

10. American Cress 

11. Winter Cress - - - 

12. Water- Cress 

13. Brook-lime 

14. Garden rocket 

( 15. Scurvy-grass . . - 

16. Burnet - 

17. Wood-Sorrel 

18. Small Salads 

VIII. Pot-herbs and Garnishings 

1. Parsley - 

2. Purslane 

3. Tarragon - - 

4. Fennel 

5. Dill 

6. Chervil . _ . 

7. Horse-radish 

8. Indian Cress, or Nasturtium 

9. Marigold, or Pot-marigold 

10. Borage 

IX. Sweet Herbs 

1. Thyme 

2. Sage 

3. Clary . - . ' 

4. - Mint - 

5. Marjoram - - 2 

6. Savory 

7. Basil - I 

8. Rosemary 

9. Lavender 

10. Tansy - 

11. Costmary, or Alecost 

X. Plants used in Tarts, Confectionary, 

Domestic Medicine 

1. Rhubarb 

2. Pompion and Gourd 

3. Angelica 

4. Anise 

5. Coriander 

6. Caraway 

7. Rue 



Page 
Tribe 617 
. 618 
- ib. 



ib. 

630 
631 



ib. 

ib, 
641 
642 

ib. 

ib. 
643 

ib. 

ib. 
648 
650 
651 
652 

ib. 
653 

ib. 

ib. 
654 

ib. 
655 
656 
657 

ib. 
660 

ib. 



ib. 
662 

ib. 
663 

ib. 

ib. 

ib. 
664 

ib. 



ib. 
ib. 
666 



- ib. 



- ib. 

- ib. 



. ib. 

- 670 

- ib. 
. 671 
. ib. 
. 672 

- ib. 

- ib. 

- 673 
and 

. ib 
. ib. 
. 674 

- 676 

- ib. 

- ib. 



8. Hyssop - - .677 

9. Chamomile - - ib. 

10. Elecampane - . - ib. 

11. Licorice ■ - . 678 

12. Wormwood ... ib. 

13. Blessed Thistle - - ib. 

14. Balm - - . ih. 
XL Plants used as Preserves and Pickles - ff79 

1. Love.Apple - - ib. 

2. Egg-Plant - - - ib. 

3. Capsicum - - - 680 

4. Samphire, three Species of different Orders 

and Genera - - - ib. 

XII. Edible Wild Plants, neglected, or not in 

Cultivation . - - 681 

1. Greens and Pot-herbs from Wild Plants - ib. 

2. Roots of Wild Plants edible - - 682 

3. Leguminous Wild Plants edible - - 683 

4. Salads from Wild Plants - - ib. 

5. Substitutes for Chinese Teas from Wild 

Plants - ... ib, 

6. Wild Plants applied to various Domestic 

Purposes i - - - ib. 

7. Poisonous Native Plants to be avoided in 

searching for edible Wild Plants - 684 

XIII. Foreign hardy herbaceous Culinary Ve- 

getables, little used as such in Britain - 684 

XIV. Edible Fungi . - - 685 

1. Cultivated Mushroom - - ib. 

2. Morel - - -686 

3. Truffle, or Subterraneous Puff-ball - ib. 

XV. Edible Fuel - . _ ib. 

Chap. IX. 

Horticultural Catalogue. — Hardy Fruit-trees, 
Shrubs, and Plants - - - 687 

I. Kernel-Fruits - - - 688 

1. Apple 

2. Pear . . - 

3. Quince 

4. Medlar 

5. True-Service 

II. Stone-Fruits 

1. Peach 

2. Nectarine 

3. Apricot 

4. Almond 

5. Plum . - - 

6. Cherry 

III. Berries 

1. Black, or Garden Mulberry 

2. Barberry 

3. Elder 

4. Gooseberry 

5. Black Currant 

6. Red Currant 

7. Raspberry 



8. Cranberry 

9. Strawberry 

IV. Nuts 

1. Walnut 

2. Chestnut 

3. Filbert 

V. Native, or neglected Fruits, deserving Cul- 

tivation . - - 745 



- ib. 

- 703 

- 710 

- ib. 

- 711 
. ib. 
. ib. 

- 718 

- 719 

- 721 

- 722 

- 725 

- 728 

- ib. 

- 730 

- 731 

- ib. 

- 735 

- 736 

- 737 
. 738 

- 739 

- 742 

- ib. 

- 743 
744 



677 



Chap. X. 

Horticultural Catalogue. — Exotic Fruits h - 746 

I. Exotic Fruits in general Cultivation - 747 

1. Pine-apple - - - > . ' ib. 

2. Grape- Vine - - - 748 

3. Fig . . . . 759 

4. Melon - - - -763 

5. Cucumber - . 764 

II. Exotic Fruits, Iwell known, but neglected 

as such - - - I - 765 

1. Orange Tribe - - - ib. 

2. Pomegranate . . 777 

3. Olive .... ib. 

4. Indian Fig, or Prickly Pear - - 778 

III. Exotic Fruits little known, some of which 

merit Cultivation for their Excellence 
or Rarity - - .779 

IV. Exotic Esculents, not hitherto cultivated 

as such - 785 

Chap, XL 

Horticultural Productions which may be ex. 
pected from a first-rate Kitchen-garden ma- 
naged in the best Style , . .787 

I. January • "V . ib. 



xii 



CONTENTS. 



Page 

II. Commercial Gardens . . - _ 1052 

III. Public Gardens .... 1057 

Chap. III. ' 
Topographical Survey of the British Isles 

in respect to Gardening - - 1060 

I. Gardens and Country- Residences of Eng- 

land 1061 

II. Wales . - - - 1084 

III. Scotland ... . 1086 
IV Ireland 1093 

Chap. IV. 

I. Of the Literature of Gardening - -1097 
1. British Works on Gardening - - 1099 

II, Of the Literature of Gardening in Foreign 

Countries ... 1115 

1. Works on Gardening published in France, 

exclusive of Translations - - ib. 

2. Works on Gardening published in Ger. 

many, including Denmark and Swit- 
zerland, exclusive of Translations - 1122 

3. Works on Gardening published in Italy, 

exclusive of Translations - - 1128 

4. Works on Gardening originated and 

published in Holland, exclusive of 
Translations ... 1129 

5. Works on Gardening, published in Sweden, 

Norway, and Iceland, exclusive of 
Translations ... ib. 

6. Works on Gardening, published in Po- 

land and Russia - - 1131 

7. Works on Gardening, published in Por- 

tugal and Spain - ' ib. 

8. Works on Gardening, published in North 

America - . . ib. 



Of the Professional Police, and Public Laws 
relative to Gardeners and Gardening - 1131 

BOOK II. 

OF THE FUTURE PROGRESS ^ GARDENING 
IN BRITAIN. 

Chap. I. Page 
Of the Improvement of the Taste of the 
Patrons of Gardening - . - 1133 

Chap. II. 

Of the Education of Gardeners - -1135 

I. On the degree of Knowledge which may be 

attained by Practical Men, and on the ge- 
neral Powers of the human Mind, as to 
Attainments - ib. 

II. Of the Professional Education of Gar- 

deners - - - 1136 

III. Of the Intellectual Education which a 

Gardener may give himself, independ- 
ently of acquiring his Profession - 1138 

IV. Moral, Religious, and Physical Education 

of Gardeners - - - 1141 

V. Of Economical Education, or the general 

Conduct and Economy of a Gardener's 
Life - - - 1143 

KALENDARIAL INDEX - - 1147 

GENERAL INDEX . - 1165 



ENCYCLOPAEDIA 



OF 



GARDENING. 



THE earth, Herder observes, is a star among other stars, and man, an improving 
animal acclimated in every zone of its diversified surface. The great mass of this 
star is composed of inorganic matters called minerals, from the decomposing surface of 
which proceed fixed organic bodies called vegetables, and moving organic bodies called 
animals. Minerals are said to grow, or undergo change only ; vegetables to grow and 
live ; and animals to grow, live, and move. Life and growth imply nourishment ; 
and primitively, vegetables seem to have lived on minerals ; and animals, with some 
exceptions, on vegetables. Man, supereminent, lives on both ; and, in consequence 
of his faculty of improving himself and other beings, has contrived means of increasing 
the number, and ameliorating the quality of those he prefers. This constitutes the 
chief business of private life in the country, and includes the occupations of housewifery, 
or domestic economy, agriculture, and gardening. 

Gardening, the branch to which we here confine ourselves, as compared with agri- 
culture, is the cultivation of a limited spot, by manual labor, for culinary and orna- 
mental products ; but i-elative to the present improved state of the art, may be defined 
the formation and culture, by manual labor, of a scene more or less extended, for 
various purposes of utility, ornament and recreation. 

Thus gardening, like most other arts, has had its origin in the supply of a primitive 
want ; and, as wants became desires, and desires increased, and became more luxurious 
and refined, its objects and its province became extended ; till from an enclosure of a few 
square yards, containing, as Lord Walpole has said, " a gooseberry-bush and a cab- 
bage," s'jch as may be seen before the door of a hut on the borders of a common, it has 
expanded to a park of several miles in circuit, its boundaries lost in forest scenery, — 
a palace bosomed in wood near its centre ; the intermediate space varied by artificial 
lakes or rivers, plantations, pleasure-grounds, flower-gardens, hot-houses, orchards, and 
potageries : — producing for the table of the owner and his guests, the fruits, flowers, 
and culinary vegetables, of every climate of the world ! — displaying the finest verdant 
landscapes to invite him to exercise and recreation, by gliding over velvet turf, or po- 
lished gravel walks, sheltered, shady, or open in near scenes; or with horses and chariots 
Along rides and drives " of various view" in distant ones. 

From such a variety of products and objects, and so extended a scene of operations, 
have arisen the diflferent branches of gardening as an art ; and from the general use 
of gardens, and of their products by all ranks, have originated their various kinds, and 
,the different forms which this art has assumed as a trade or business of life. Gardening 
is practised for private use and enjoyment, in cottage, villa, and mansion gardens ; — 
for public recreation, in umbrageous and verdant promenades, parks, and other scenes, 
in and near to large towns; — for public instruction, in botanic and experimental 
gardens ; — for public example, in national or royal gardens ; — and for the purpose of 
commerce, in market, orchard, seed, physic, florists', and nursery gardens. 

To aid in what relates to designing and laying out gardens, artists or professors have 
arisen ; and the performance of the operative part is the only source of living of a niir- 
merous class of serving gardeners, who acquire their art by the regular routine of a^s 
prcnticeship, and probationarv labor for some years as journeymen. 

B 

1 



The products of the kitchen-garden form important articles of human food for all 
ranks of society ; and furnish the chief luxuries of the tables of the rich, and a main 
support of the families of tlie poor. One of the first objects of a colonist on arriving 
at a new settlement is to plant a garden, as at once a proof of possession, and a pledge 
of immediate enjoyment ; and indeed the history of the civilisation of mankind bears 
evidence, that there are few benefits which a cultivated people can bestow on savage 
tribes, greater than that of distributing among them the seeds of good fruits and olerj 
aceous herbs, and teaching them their culture. 

The pleasure attending the pursuit of gardening is conducive to health and repose 
of mind ; and a taste for the enjoyment of gardens is so natural to man, as almost to be 
universal. Our first most endeanng and most sacred associations, Mrs. Hofland ob- 
serves, are connected with gardens ; our most simple and most refined perceptions of 
beauty are combined witli them ; and the very condition of our being compels us to the 
cares, and rewards us with the pleasures attached to them. Gardening has been the 
inclination of kings and the choice of philosophers. Sir Vv'^illiam Temple has observed ; 
and the Prince de Ligne, after sixty years' experience, affirms, that the love of gardens is 
the only passion which augments with age : " Je voudrois," he says, " ^chauffer tout 
I'univers de mon gout pour les jardins. II me semble qu'il est impossible, qu'un m^- 
chant puisse I'avoir. II n'est point de vertus que je ne suppose a celui qui aime a 
parler et a faire des jardins. Peres de famille, inspirez la jardinomanie a vos enfans." 
{Menioires et Lettres, torn, i.) 

That which makes the cares of gardening more necessary, or at least more excusable, 
tlie former author adds, is, that all men eat fruit that can get it ; so that the choice is 
only, whether one will eat good or ill ; and for all things produced in a garden, whether 
of salads or fruits, a poor man will eat better that has one of his own, than a rich man 
that has none. 

To add to the value and extend the variety of garden productions, new vegetables 
have been introduced from every quarter of the globe ; to diffuse instruction on the sub- 
ject, numerous books have been written, societies have been established, and premiums 
held out for rewarding individual merit ; and where professorships of rural economy 
exist, gardening may be said to form a part of public instruction. 

A varied and voluminous mass of knowledge has thus accumulated on the subject 
of gardening, which must be more or less necessary for every one who would practise 
the art with success, or understand when it is well practised for him by others. To 
combine as far as practicable the whole of this knowledge, and arrange it in a syste- 
matic form, adapted both for study and reference, is the object of the present work. 
The sources from which we have selected, ai'e the modern British authors of decided 
reputation and merit ; sometimes recurring to ancient or continental authors, and occa- 
sionally, though rarely, to our own observation and experience; — observation in all 
the departments of gardening, chiefiy in Britain, but partly also on the Continent ; and 
experience during nearly twenty years' practice as an architect of gardens. 

With this purpose in view, Gardening is here considered, in 

Part Book 

I. As to its origin, progress, and C 1. Among the different nations of the world. 

present state, (_ 2. Under different political and geographical circumstances. 

C 1. The study of the vegetable kingdom. 

IT As a spienrp fniindpd on J ^- ^"'^^ ^^^'^y natural agents of vegetable growth and culture. 

, 11. As a science tounded on - ^3 ^^^^^ ^j^^ mechanical agents employed in gardening. 

C 4. The study of the operations of gardening. 



rl. The practice of horticulture. 
J 2. The practice of floriculture. 



III. As an art, comprehending j - P-;;^;- '^'^^^e. 

C 4. The practice of landscape gardening. 

- IV. Statistically in Britain - H' l"" P^L^^^^t ^tate. 

i. 2. As to its future progress. 

A Kalendarial Index to those parts of the work which treat of culture and manage- 
ment, points out the operations as they are to be performed in the order of time and of 
the season : and 

A General Index explains the technical tei-ms of gardening ; gives an outline of the 
culture of every genus of plants, native or introduced in British gardens ; and presents 
an analysis of the whole work in alphabetical order. 



I 



PART 1. 



GARDENING CONSIDERED IN RESPECT TO ITS ORIGIN, PRO- 
GRESS, AND PRESENT STATE AMONG DIFFERENT NATIONS, 
GOVERNMENTS, AND CLIMATES. 

1. The history of gardening may be considered chronologically, ox in connection with 
that of the different nations who have successively flourished in different parts of the 
world ; i)Qlitically, as influenced by the dilForent forms of government which have pre- 
vailed ; and geographically., as affected by the different climutes and natural situations of 
the globe. The first kind of history is useful as showing what has been done ; and what 
is the relative situation of different countries as to gardens and gardening ; and the 
political and geographical history of .this art affords' interesting matter of instruction as 
to its past and future progress. 



BOOK I. 

HISTORY or GARDENING AMONG ANCIENT AND MODERN NATIONS. 

2. The chronological history of gardening may be divided into three periods ; the ages 
of antiqvity, commencing with the earliest accounts and terminating with the foundation 
of the Roman empire ; the ancient ages, including the rise and fall of the Roman empire j 
and the modern times, continued from thence to the present dsty. 



Chap. I. 

Of the Origin and Progress of Gardening in the earliest ages of Antiquity, or from the 
lOth century before the vulgar cera to the foundation of the Roman Emjnre. 

3. All ancient history begins with fable and tradition ; no authentic relation can reach 
farther back than the organisation of the people who followed the last grand re\ olution 
sustained by our globe. Every tiling which pretends to go farther must be fabulous, 
and it is only the primeval arts of war and husbandry which can by any means go so fai% 
The traditions collected by Herodotus, Diodorus, Hesiod, and some other authors, when 
freed from the mythological and mysterious terms in which they are enveloped, seem to 
carry us back to that general deluge, or derangement of the surface strata of our globe, 
of which all countries, as well as most traditions, bear evidence. As to gardening, these 
traditions, like all rude histories, touch chiefly on particulars calculated to excite 
wonder or surprise in ignorant or rude minds, and accordingly the earliest notices of 
gardens are confined to fabulous creations of fancy, or the alleged productions of princes 
and warriors. To the first may be referred the gardens of Paradise and the Hesperides ; 
and to the others the gardens of the Jews, Babylonians, Persians, and Greeks. 

Sect. I. Of the fabulous Gardens of Antiquity, 

4. The fabulous gardens of antiquity are connected with the religions of those times. 
These religions have been arranged by philosophers [De Paw's Dissert.) in thi-ee divisions ; 
Barbarism, Scythism, and Helenism. To the latter belong the Hebrew, Greek, and 
Mahomedan species. Each of these has its system of creation, its heaven and its hell, 
and, what chiefly concerns us, each system has its garden. The garden of the Jewish 
mythology is for the use of man ; that of the Grecian polytheism is appropriated to the 
Gods ; and the Mahomedan pai-adise is the reward held out to tlie good in a future 
state. 

5. Gan-eden, or the Jewish Paradise, is supposed to have been situated in Persia, 
though the inhabitants of Ceylon say it was placed in their country, and according to the 
Rev .''Dr. Buchanan {Researches in India, Sec), still point out Adam's bridge and Abel's 
tomb. Its description may be considered as exhibiting tlie ideas of a poet, whose object 
was to bring together every sort of excellence of which he deemed a garden susceptible ; 
and it is remarkable that in so remote an age (B. C. 1600) his picture should display so 
much of general nature. Of great extent, watered by a river, and abounding in timber 
and woodiness, paradise seems to have borne some resemblance to a park and pleasure- 
grounds in the modern taste ; to which indeed its amplified picture by Milton has been 
thought by Walpole and others to have given rise. When Adam began to transgress in 



4 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part L 



the garden he was turned out to till the ground, and paradise was afterwards guarded by 
a miraculous sword, which turned every way to meet trespassers. (See Genesis ii. 3. ; 
Bishop Huet on the Situation of Paradise, 1691, 12mo. ; Burnet's Theory of the Earthy 
book ii. chap. 2. ; Sicklers Geschichte der obst cultur, See. 1801. 1 Band.) 

6. The gardens of Hesperides were situated in Africa, near Mount Atlas, or, accord- 
ing to some, near Cyrenaica. They are described by Scylax, a geographer of the sixth 
century, B. C, as lying in a place eighteen fathoms deep, steep on all sides, and two 
stadia in diameter, covered with trees of various kinds, planted very close together, and 
interwoven with one another. Among the fruit-trees were golden apples (supposed to be 
oranges), pomegranates, mulberries, vines, olives, almonds, and walnuts ; and the orna- 
mental trees included the arbutus, myrtle, bay, ivy, and wild olive. This garden con- 
tained the golden apples which Juno gave to Jupiter on the day of their nuptials. They 
were occupied by three celebrated nymphs, daughters of Hesperus, and guarded by a 
dreadful dragon which never slept. Hercules carried off the apples by stratagem, but 
they were afterwards returned by Minerva. What finally became of the nymphs of the 
garden, or of the apples, we are as ignorant as we are of the fate of paradise, or the tree 
" in the midst thereof," which contained the foi-bidden fruit, and of which, as Lord 
Walpole observes, " not a slip or a sucker has been left behind." 

7. The pro7nised garden of Mahomet, or the heaven of his religion, is said to abound 
in umbrageous groves, fountains, and Houri, or black-eyed girls : and the enjoyments, 
which in such scenes on earth last but for a moment, are to be there prolonged for a 
thousand years. 

8. Dr. Sicklers ojnnion of these gardens is, that Eden and Hesperides allude to, or are 
derived from, one original tradition. Paradise, he considers as a sort of figurative 
description of the finest district of Persia ; and he traces various resemblances between 
the apples of Eve and of Juno ; the dragon which never slept, and the flaming sword 
which turned every way. Some very learned and curious speculations on this subject are 
to be found in the introduction to his Geschichte der obst cultur. With respect to the 
paradise of Mahomet, it is but of modern date, and may probably have been suggested 
by the gardens described in " Solomon's Song," and other poems ; though some allege 
that the rural coflfee-houses which abound in the suburbs of Constantinople gave the first 
ide^ to the prophet. 

Sect. II. Jewish Gardens. B. C. 1500. 

9. King Solomon'' s garden is the principal one on record ; though many others belong- 
ing both to Jewish princes and subjects are mentioned in the Bible. Solomon was at 
once a botanist, a man of learning, of pleasure, and a king. The area of his garden 
was quadrangular, and surrounded by a high wall ; it contained a variety of plants, 
curious as objects of-^atural history, as the hyssop, (a moss, as Hasselquist thinks,) 
" which springeth out of the waU ;" odoriferous and showy flowers, as the rose, and the 
lily of the valley, the calamus, camphire, spikenard, saffron, and cinnamon; timber-trees, 
as the cedar, the pine, and the fir ; and the richest fruits, as the fig, grape, apple, palm, 
and pomegranate. [Curtii Sprengel Historia Rei herbance, lib. i. c. 1.) It contained water 
in wells, and in living streams, and, agreeably to eastern practices, aviaries and a seraglio. 
The seraglio Parkhurst supposes was at once a temple of worship and of pleasure, and he 
quotes the words of Ezekiel (xiii. 20.) in their literal translation: " lam against, saith 
the Lord, your luxurious cushions, wherewith ye ensnare souls in the flower-gardens." 
Ashue or Venus was the deity who was worshipped by a company of naked females : Dr. 
Brown (Antig. of the Jews,) describes the mode of worship ; and concludes by lamenting 
that depravity in man, which converts the beauties of nature into instruments of sin. 
The situation of Solomon's garden was in all probability near to the palace, as were those 
of his successors, Ahasuerus and Ahab. {Esther vii. 8,) 

10. We know little of the horticulture of the Jews ; but like that of the eastern nations 
in general, it was probably then as it still is in Canaan, directed to the growing of 
cooling fruits, to allay thirst and moderate heat ; aromatic herbs to give a tone to the 
stomach, and wdne to refresh and invigorate the spirits. Hence, while their agricultural 
produce was wheat, barley, rye, millet, vetches, lentils, and beans, their gardens produced 
cucumbers, melons, gourds, onions, garlic, anise, cummin, coriander, mustard, and various 
spices. Their vineyards were sometimes extensive : Solomon had one at Baalhamon 
which he let out at 1000 pieces of silver per annum. {Cant. viii. 11, 12.) 

Sect. III. PhcBacian Gardens. B, C. 900, 

11. The garden of Mcinous, the Phaeacian king, was situated in an island of that 
name, by some considered Corfu, in the Ionian sea, and by others, and with more reason, 
an Asiatic island. It is minutely described by Homer in the Odyssey, and may be 
compared to the garden of an ordinary farm-house in point of extent and fonn ; but in 
respect to the variety of fruits, vegetables, and flowers cultivated, was far inferior. It 



UoOK 1. 



GARDENS OF ANTIQUITY. 



3 



embraced the front of the palace ; contained something less than four acres, surrounded 
by a hedge, [the first, as Harte remarks, which we read of in history,) and interspersed 
with three or four sorts of fruit-trees, some beds of culinary vegetables, and some borders 
of flowers ; it contained two fountains or wells, the one for the use of the garden, and the 
other for the palace. ' 

12. 2'he gardens of Laertes, described in the same work, appear to have been similar to 
the above in character and extent, use being more studied than beauty ; and vicinity to the 
house or palace, for the immediate access of the queen or housewife, being a greater 
desideratum than extent, variety of products, or prolonged recreation. 

13. The reality of the existence of these gardens is very doubtful. They are by many 
ranked with those of Adonis {Virg. Georg. ii. 87.), Paradise, Hesperides (^Virg. JEn. 
iv. 484.), and Venus [Ali Bey's Travels, vol. i.), and considered with them as mere 
creations of the fancy. Sir W. Temple is of opinion that the principal gardens of Ionia 
may have had some resemblance to those described by Homer, as lying in the barren 
island of Phagacia ; but that the particular instance stated as belonging to Alcinous is 
wholly poetical. {Temple's Works. Essay on Gardens.) Gov get rejects altogether the 
idea of Phajacia being an European isle, and considers the Pha;acians as a Greek colony 
in one of the islands of Asia. [Origine de Loix, ckc. torn. iii. 174.) 

Sect. IV. Babylonian or Assyrian Gardens. B. C. 2000. 

14. The gardens of Cyrus at Babylon {Plin. xix. 4.), or of the kings pf Assyria, 
or, according to Bryant [Anal, of Ancient Mythology, vol. iii. p. 100.), of the chiefs of 
the ancient people called Semarim, were distinguished by their romantic situations, great 
extent, and diversity of uses and products, and were reckoned in their days among the 
wonders of the world. 

15. The form of these gardens was square, and, according to Diodorus and Strabo, each 
side was four hundred feet in length, so that the area of the base was nearly four acres. 
They were made to rise with terraces constructed in a curious manner above one another, 
in the fonn of steps, somewhat like those of the Isola Bella in the Lago Maggiore in Italy, 
and supported by stone pillars to the height of more than three hundred feet, gradually 
diminishing upwards till the area of the superior surface, v/hich was flat, was reduced 
considerably below that of the base. This building was constructed by vast stone beams 
}ilaced on pillars of stone, (arches not being then invented,) which were again covered 
with reeds, cemented with bitumen, and next were laid a double row of bricks united 
by cement. Over these were laid plates of lead, which effectually prevented the moisture 
from penetrating downwards. Above all was laid a coat of earth, of depth sufficient for 
plants to grow in it, and the trees here planted were of various kinds, and were ranged 
in rows on the side of the ascent, as well as on the top, so that at a distance it appeared 
as an immense pyramid covered with wood. The situation of this extraordinary effort 
was adjoining or upon the river Euphrates, from which water was supplied by machinery 
for the fountains and other sources for cooling the air and watering the garden. [Dr. 
Falconer's Historical View of the Gardens of Antiquity, &c. p. 17.) 

16. llie prospect from these elevated gardens was grand and delightful. From the upper 
area was obtained a view not only of the whole city, and the windings of the Euphrates, 
which washed the base of the superstructure three hundred feet below ; but of the cul- 
tivated environs of the city and surrounding desert, extending as far as the eye could 
reach. The different terraces and groves contained fountains, parterres, seats and 
banquetting-rooms, and combined tiie minute beauties of flowers and foliage, with 
masses of shade and extensive prospects ; — ■ the retirement of the grove in the midst of 
civic mirth and din ; — and all the splendor and luxury of eastern magnificence in art, 

'with the simple pleasures of verdant. and beau,tiful nature. " This surprising and la- 
borious experiment," G. Mason observes, " was a strain of complaisance in King 
Nebuchadnezzar to his Median queen, who could never be reconciled to the flat and 
naked appearance of the province of Babylon, but frequently regretted each rising hill 
and scattered forest she had formerly delighted in, with ail the charms they had presented 
to her youthful imagination. The King, who thought nothing impossible for his power 
to execute, nothing to be unattempted for the gratification of his beloved consort, de- 
termined to raise woods and ten-aces even within the precincts of the city, equal to those 
by which her native country was diversified." [Essay on Design, &c. p. 9.) 

17. An elevated situation seems in these countries to have been an essential re- 
quisite to a royal garden ; probably because the air in such regions is more cool and 
salubrious, — tlie security from hostile attack of any sort more certain, — and the 
prospect always sublime. " When Semiramis came to Chanon, a city of Media," ob- 
serves Diodorus Siculus (lib. ii. cap. 13.), "she discovered on an elevated plain, a 
rock of stupendous height, and of considerable extent. Here she formed another para- 
dise, exceeding large, enclosing a rock in the midst of it, on which she erected sumptuous 
buildings for pleasure, commanding a view both of the plantations and the encampment," 

B 3 



6 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



Id. The existence oj these gardens^ however, is very problematical. Bryant {Ancieiit 
Mythology) gives his reasons for disbelieving the very existence of Queen Semiramis, who, 
Dr. Sickler says, was not a queen, but a {heyschldferinn) concubine. Bryant acknowledges, 
however, that paradises of great extent, and placed in elevated situations, were with great 
probability ascribed to the ancient people called Semarim. Quintus Curtius (lib. xv. 
cap. 5.) calls these gardens " fabulous wonders of the Greeks:" and Herodotus, who 
describes Babylon, is silent as to their existence. Many consider their description as 
representing a hill cut into terraces, and planted ; and some modern travellers have fan- 
cied that they could discover traces of such a work. The value of such conjectures is 
left to be estimated by the antiquarian ; we consider the description of this Babylonian 
garden as worth preserving for its grandeur and suitableness to the country and climate. 

Sect. V. Persian Gardens. B. C. 500. 

19. The Persian Kings xvere very fond of gardens, which, Xenophon says, were 
cultivated for the sake of beauty as well as fruit. " Wherever the Persian king, 
Cyrus, resides, or whatever place he visits in his dominions, he takes care that the 
Paradises, shall be filled with every thing, both beautiful and useful, the soil can 
produce." {Xen. Memorab. lib. v. p. 829.) The younger Cyrus was found by Ly- 
sander, as Plutarch informs us, in his garden or paradise at Sardis, and on its being 
praised by the Spartan general, he avowed that he had conceived, disposed and adjusted 
the whole himself, and planted a considerable number of trees with liis own hands. 
Cyrus had another paradise at Celena;, which was very extensive, and abounded in wild 
beasts ; and we are informed that the same prince " there mustered the Grecian force* 
to the number of thirteen thousand." [De Cyri Exped. lib. i.) 

20. A paradise in the Island of Panchcea, neai- the coast of Arabia, is described by 
Diodorus Siculus, as having been in a flourishing state in the time of Alexander's 
immediate successors, or about B. C. 300. It belonged to a temple of Jupiter .Try- 
philius, and had a copious fountain, which burst at once into a river, w^is cased with 
stone near half a mile, and was afterwards used for irrigation. It had the usual accom- 
paniments of groves, fruit-trees, thickets, and flowers. 

21. The grove of Orontes in Syi'ia, is mentioned by Strabo (lib. x\i.) as being in his 
time nine miles in circumference. It is described by Gibbon as " composed of laurels 
and cypress, which formed in the most sultry summers a cool and impenetrable shade. 
A thousand streams of the purest water issuing from every hill preserved the verdure of 
the earth, and the temperature of the air ; the senses were gratified with harmonious 
sounds, and aromatic odours ; and the peaceful grove was consecrated to health and joy, 
to luxury and love." [Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, chap, xiii.) 

22. In Persian gardens of a more limited description, according to Pliny and other Ro- 
man authors, the trees were arranged in straight lines and regular figures J and the mai'gins 
of the walks covered with tufts of roses, violets, and other odoriferous flowering plants. 
Among the trees, the terebinthinate sorts, the oriental plane, and, what may appear to 
us remarkable, the nan-ow-leaved elm, (now called English,' but originally, as Dr. 
Walker and others consider, from the Holy Land), held conspicuous places. Buildings 
for repose , banqueting, voluptuous love ; fountains for cooling the air, aviaiies for 
choice birds, and towers for the sake of distant prospect, were introduced in the best 
examples. 

Sect. VI. Grecian Gardens. B. C. 300. 

23. Tlie Greeks copied the gardening of the Persians, as they did tlieir manners and 
architecture, as far as the difference of climate and state of society would admit. 
Xenophon, a Greek philosopher of the fourth century before Christ, admired the gardens 
of the Persian prince Cyrus, at Sardis ; and Diogenes Laertius informs us that Epicurus 
delighted in the pleasures of the garden, and made choice of one as the spot where he 
taught his philosophy. Plato also lays the scene of his dialogue of beauty on the 
umbrageous banks of the river Ilissus. In the first eclogue of Theocritus, the scene 
is laid under the shade of a pine-tree, and the beauty of Helen is compared to that of a 
cypress in a garden. It would appear from this and other circumstances, that the love 
of terebinthinate trees, so general in Persia, and the other eastern countries, was also 
prevalent in Greece ; and the same flowers (made choice of for their brilliant colors 
and odoriferous perfumes) appear to have been common to both countries. Among 
these may be enumerated the narcissus, violet, ivy, and rose. [Historical View, &c. 
p. 30. etseq.) There are many curious observations on this subject in-Stackhouse's edition of 
Theophrastus. Loi-d Bacon, in his Essay on Gardens, and G. Mason, already quoted, 
concur in considering gardening as rather a neglected art in Greece, notwithstanding the 
progress of the sister art of architecture, which gave rise to the remark of the former, 
" that when ages grow to civility and elegancy, men come to build stately sooner than 
to garden finely, as if gardening were the greater perfection." 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF ANTIQUITY. 



7 



24. The vale of Tejnpdy however, as described in the third book of iElian's vari- 
ous history, and the public gardens of Athens according to Plutarch, prove that their phi- 
losophers and great men were alive to the beauties of verdant scenery. The aeadeinus 
or public garden of Athens, Plutarch informs us, was originally a rough uncultivated 
spot, till planted by the general Cimon, who conveyed streams of water to it, and laid it 
out in shady groves, v/itli gymnasia, or places of exercise, and philosophic v/alks. 
Among the trees were the olive, plane, and elm ; and the two last sorts had attained to 
such extraordinary size, that at the siege of Athens by Sylla, in the war with Mithridates, 
they were selected to be cut down, to supply warlike engines. In the account of these 
gardens by Pausanias we learn, that they were highly elegant, and decorated with temples, 
altars, tombs, statues, monuments, and towers ; that ainong the tombs were those of 
Pirithous, Theseus, CEdipus, and Adrastes; and at the entrance was the first altar 
dedicated to love. 

25. The 2)assages of the Greek writers which relate to gardens have been amply illustrated 
by the learned German antiquarian Bffiltinger {Racemazionen zur Gartenkunst der 
Allen) ; on which it may be remarked, that the qualities chiefly enlarged on are, shade, 
coolness, freshness, breezes, fragra,nce, and repose -— elFects of gardening which are felt 
and relished at an earlier period of human civilisation than picturesque beauty, or other 
poetical and comparatively artificial associations with external scenery ; for though 
gardening as a merely useful art may claim prioi'ity to every other, yet as an art of 
imagination, it is one of the last which has been brought to perfection. In fact, its 
existence as such an art, depends on the previous existence of pastoral poetry and 
mental cultivation ; for what is nature to an uncultivated mind ? 

-Sect. VII. Gardening in the ages of Antiquity, as to Fruits, Culinary Productions, and 

Flowers. 

26. The first vegetable productioyi which attracted maris attention as an article of food, 
is supposed to have been the fruit of some tree ; and the idea of removing such a tree to a 
spot, and enclosing and cultivating it near his habitation, is thought to be abundantly 
natural to man, and to have first given rise to gardens. All the writers of antiquity agree 
in putting the fig at the head of the fruit-trees that were first cultivated. The vine is the 
next in order, the fruit of which serves not only for food, like that of the fig, but also for 
drink. Noah the Jewish Bacchus, and Osiris the Bacchus of the Egyptians and Greeks, 
are alike placed in the very first age of the postdiluvian world. The almond and pome- 
granate were early cultivated in Canaan (Gen. xliii. 5. 11- and Numb. xx. 5.), and it 
appears by the complaints of the Israelites in the wilderness, that the fig, grape, pomegra- 
nate, and melon, were known in Egypt from time immemorial. 

27. The first herbage made use of by man, would be the most succulent leaves or stalks 
which the surface around him aflPorded ; of these every country has some plants which are 
succulent even in a wild state, as the chenopodeae. Sea cale, and asparagus, were known to 
the ,Greeks from the earliest ages, and still alsound in Greece, the former on the sandy plains, 
and the latter on the sea shores. One of the laws of Solon prohibits women from eating 
crambe in child-bed. Of the green seeds of herbage plants, the bean and other legu- 
minoseae wei-e evidently the first in use, and it is singular that Pythagoras should have 
forbidden the use of beans to his pupils because they were so much of the nature of flesh ; 
or, in the language of modern chemistry, because they contained so much vegeto-animal 
matter. 

28. The first roots, or rootlike parts of plants made use of, must have been some of the 
surface bulbs, as the onion, {Nunib. xi. 5. ) and the edible crocus [C. aureus,- Fl. Grcec) of 
Syria. T 'nderground bulbs and tubers, as the orchis, potatoe, and earthnut, would be 
next discovered : and ramose roots, as those of the lucerne in Persia, and arracacha (Ligus- 
ticum sp. ?) in Mexico, would be eagerly gnawed wherever they could be got at. Bulbs of 
culture, a^ the turnip, would be of much later discovery, and must at first have been found 
only in temperate climates. 

29. The use of plants for preternatural, religious, funereal, medical, and scientific pur- 
poses, like every other use, is of the remotest antiquity. Rachel demanded from her 
sister the mandrakes {Mandragora officinalis, W.) (^o-. 1. from the Flora Grceca), whose 
roots are thought to resemble the human form, which Reuben had brought from the fields ; 
impressed, as she no doubt was, with the idea of the efficacy of that plant against sterility. 
Bundles of flowers covered the tables of the Greeks, and were worn during repasts, be- 
cause the plants, of which they consisted, were supposed to possess the virtue of preserving 
the wearer from the fumes of wine, of refreshing the thinking faculty, preserving the 
purity of ideas, and the gaiety of the spirits. Altars were strewed with flowers both 
by Jews and Greeks ; they were placed on high places, and under trees, as old clothes 
are still sacrificed on the trunks of the Platanus in Georgia and Persia. God appeared 
to Moses in a bush. Jacob was embalmed, in all probability, with aromatic herbs. 

B 4 



8 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Parx L 



Arfstotle's materia medica was chiefly plants. 
Solomon wrote on botany as a philosopher, and 
appears to have cultivated a general collection, 
independently of his plants of ornament. 

30. Floivers, as decorations, must have been 
very soon used on account of their brilliant colors 
and smell. The Greeks, Theophrastus informs 
lis, {Hist. Plant, lib. vi. c. 5.) cultivated roses, 
gilly-flowers, violets, narcissi, and the iris ; and 
we read in Aristophanes [Acharn. v. 212.), that 
a market for flowers was held at Athens, where 
the baskets were very quickly disposed of. From 
the writings of other authors, we learn that a con- 
tinual use was made . of flowers throughout all 
Greece. Not only were they then, as now, the 
ornament of beauty, and of the altars of the gods, 
but youth crowned themselves with them in the 
f&tes : priests in religious ceremonies ; and guests 
in convivial meetings. Garlands of flowers were 
suspended from the gates in times of rejoicing ; 
and, what is still more remarkable, and more 
remote from our manners, the philosophers them- 
selves wore crowns of flowers, and the warriors 
ornamented their foreheads with them in days of 
triumph. These customs existed in eveiy part 
of the East. There were at Athens, as after- 
wards at Rome, florists, whose business it was to 
weave crowns {coronnriai) and wreaths of flowers. 
Some of these crowns and garlands were of one species of flower; others of different 
species ; or of branches of peculiar plants, relating to some symbolical or mythological 
idea. Hence the term, coronaiice, was applied to such plants as were consecrated to those 
uses, and of which some were cultivated, and others gathered in the fields ; but the name 
was applied to all such as were distinguished by the beauty or fragrance of their flowers. 
(Curt. Spreng. Hist. R. Herb. lib. i. & ii. ; Paschalis de Coronis, lib. x. ; Sabina by 
Bcettinger, in Man. Mag. Jan. and Feb. 1819. ; T/ieophi-astus by Stackhou^e, &c.) 

31. The first implemeiit used in cidtivating the soil, all antiquarians agree, must have been 
of the pick kind. A medal of the greatest antiquity, dug up in the island of Syracuse, 
contained the impression of such an implement {fig. 2. a). Some of the oldest Egyptian 

2 _ 

w 





hieroglyphics liave similar representaffotls '(b) ; and Eckeberg has figured what may be 
considered as the primitive spade of China (c). In the beginning of the sixteenth cen- 
tury, when Peru was discovered by tlie Spaniards, the gardeners of that country had no 
other spade than a pointed stick, of which the more industrious made use of two at a time< 
{d) The Chinese implement bears the highest marks of civilisation, since it has a hilt or 
cross handle, and a tread for the foot ; and consequently supposes the use of shoes or 
sandals by the operator, and an erect position of his body. The Roman spade {ligo), 
those of Italy {zaj^jm), and of France {beche), are either flattened or two-clawed picks, 
which are worked entirely by the arms, and keep the operator constantly bent almost to 
the ground; or long-handled wooden spatulae also worked solely by the arms, but with 
the body in a more erect position. Both kinds equally suppose a bare-footed operator, 
like the Grecian and Peruvian gardeners, and those of France and Italy at the present day* 



Boot I. 



GARDENS OF THE ROMANS. 



9 



S2. It is said that the broicsing of a goat gave the first idea of pruning the vine, as chance^ 
^^hich had set fire to a rose-tree, according to Acosta [Histoire Kat. des Indcs), gave 
the first idea of pruning the rose. Theophrastus informs us that fire was applied to the 
rose-trees in Greece to enrich them, and that without that precaution they would bear no 
flowers. 

33. The o)-igin of the art of grafting has been very unsatisfactorily accounted for by 
Pliny and Lucretius, Tlie crossing, rubbing, and subsequent growing together of 
two branches of a crowded tree or thicket, are more likely to have originated the 
idea ; but Avhen this was first noticed, and how grafting came to be used for the 
amelioration of fruits, will probably ever remain a secret. 3Iacrobius, a Roman author 
of the fifth century, according to the taste of Iiis time, says, Saturn taught the art to the 
inhabitants of Latium. It does not appear to have been known to the Persians, or the 
Greeks, in the time of Homer, or Hesiod ; nor, according to Chardin, is it known to the 
Persians at this day. Grafting M as not known in China till very lately ; it was shown 
to a few gardeners by the INIissionarics, as it was to the natives of Peru and South 
America, by the Spaniards. Some, however, infer from a passage in Manlius, that 
it may have been mentioned in some of Hesiod's writings, which are lost. 

34. The culture of fruits and culinary plants must have been preceded by a considerable 
degree of civilisation. ]Moses gave some useful directions to his people on the culture of the 
vine and olive. For the first three years, they are not to be allowed to ripen any fruit ; the 
produce of the fourth year is for the Lord or his priests ; and it is not till the fifth year 
that it may be eaten by the planter. This must have contributed materially to their 
strength and establishment in the soil. The fruit-trees in the gai-dens of Alcinous were 
planted in quincunx ; there were hedges for shelter and security, and the pot-herbs and 
flowers were planted in beds ; the whole so contrived as to be irrigated. Melons in Persia 
■were manured with pigeon's dung, as they are to this day in that country. After being 
sown, the melon tribe produce a bulk of food sooner than any other plant; hence 
the value of this plant in seasons of scarcity, and the high price of doves' dung during 
the famine in Samaria (2 Alngs, vi. 25.), when a cab, not quite thi-ee pints of corn mea- 
sure, cost five pieces of silver. 



Chap. II. 

Chronological History of Gardoiing, from the time f the Boman J^ngs, in the sixth century 
B. C, to the Decline and Full of the Empire in the fifth centwy of our cera. 

33. Gardening among the Romans we shall consider, 1. As an art of design or taste ; 
2. In respect to the culture of flowers and plants of ornament : 3. As to its products 
for the kitchen and the dessert : 4. As to the propagation of timber-trees and hedges : and 
5. As a science, and as to the authors it has produced. In general it will be found 
that the Romans copied their gardening from the Greeks, as the latter did from the 
Persians, and that gardening like every other art extended with civilisation from east to 
west. 

Sect. I. Boman Gardening as an Art of Design and Taste. 

36. The first mention of a garden in the Boman History is that of Tarquinius Super- 
bus, B. C. 534, by Livy and Dionysius Halicarnassus. From what they state, it can 
only be gathered tliat it was adjoining to the royal palace, and abounded M ith flowers, 
chiefly roses and poppies. The next in the order of time are those of Lucullus, situated 
near Baia?, in the bay of Naples. They were of a magnificence and expense rivalling 
that of the eastern monarchs ; and prociu-ed to this general, the epithet of the Roman 
Xerxes. They consisted of vast edifices projecting into the sea ; of immense artificial 
elevations ; of plains formed where mountains fomierly stood ; and of vast pieces of 
water, which it was the fashion of tliat time to dignify with the pompous titles of Kilus 
and Euripus. Lucullus had made several expeditions to the eastern part of Asia, and 
it is probable, he had there contracted a taste for tliis sort of magnificence. Varro 
ridicules tliese works for their amazing sumptuosit^' ; and Cicero makes his friend Atticus 
hold cheap those magnificent waters, in comparison with the natural stream of the river 
Fibrenus, where a small island accidentally divided it. [De Legibus, lib. ii. Lucullus, 
how ever, had the merit of introducing the cheriy, the peach, and the apricot from the 
East, a benefit which still remains to mankind. {Plutarch in vita Luculli ; Sallust ; and 
Varro de Re Rtistica.) 

37. Of the gardens of the Augustan age of Virgil and Horace, generally thought to be 
that in which taste and elegance were eminently conspicuous, we know but little. In a 
garden described by the former poet in his Georgics i^lib. iv. 121.), he places only 



10 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



chicory, cucumbers, ivy, acanthus, myrile, narcissus, and roses. — Both Virgil and Pro- 
pertius' mention the culture of the pine-tree as beloved by Pan, the tutelar deity of 
gardens ; and that the shade of the plane, from the thickness of its foliage, was particu- 
larly agreeable, and well adapted for convivial meetings. The myrtle and the bay they 
describe as in high esteem for their odor ; and to such a degree of nicety had they 
arrived in tliis particular, that the composition or mixture of odoriferous trees became a 
point of study ; and those trees were planted adjoining each ether, wliose odors assimi- 
lated together. Open groves in hot countries are particularly desirable for their shade, 
and they seem to have been the only sort of plantation of forest-trees then in use. From 
Ci^iero and the elder Pliny, we learn that the quincunx manner of planting them was 
very generally adopted ; and from Martial, that the manner of clipping trees was first 
introduced by Cneus Matins, a friend of Augustus. Statues and fountains, according to 
Propertius, came into vogue about the same time, some of them casting out water in the 
way Oi' jets-d'eau, to occasion surprise, as was afterwards much practised in Italy in the 
dawn of gardening in the sixteenth ceiitui^. 

38. The gardeyis and pleasure- groimds of FUny the consul are described at lengtli 
in his Letters, and delineations of their ichnography have been published by Felibien 
in 1699, and by Castell in 1728. Some things, which could only be supplied by the 
imagination, are to be found in both these authors ; but on the whole their plans, 
especially those of Castell, may be considered as conveying a tolerably correct idea of 
a first-rate Roman villa, as in the Laurentinum, arid of an extensive country-residence, 
as in the Thuscum. 

39. The Villa Laurentinum was a winter residence on the Tiber, between Rome 
and the sea ; the situation is near Paterno, seventeen miles from Rome, and is now 
called San Lorenzo. The garden was small, and is but slightly described. It was 
surrounded by hedges of box, and where that had failed, by rosemary. Tliere were 
platforms and terraces; and figs, vines, and mulberries were the fruit-trees. Pliny 
seems to have valued this retreat chiefly from its situation relatively to Rome and the 
surrounding country, which no walls, fortresses, or belt of wood, hid from his view. On 
this region he expatiates with delight, pointing out all " the beauty of his woods, his rich 
meadows covered with cattle, the bay of Ostia, the scattered villas upon its shore, and 
the blue distance of the mountains ; his porticoes and seats for different views, and his 
favorite little cabinet in which they were all united. So great Avas Pliny's attention in 
this particidar, that he not only contrived to see some part of this luxurious landscape 
from every^ room in his house, but even while he was bathing, and when he reposed him- 
self! for he tells us of a couch which had one view at the head, another at the feet, and 
another at the back." {Preface to Malthus's Introduction to Girardiiis Essay, 8cc. p. 20.) 
We may add with Eustace and other modern travellers, that the same general appear- 
ance of woods and meadows exists there to this day. 

40. Fliny's Thuscum, or Tiiscidan Villa (fg. 3.), now F^-ascatif was situated in a 
natural amphitheatre of the Apennines, whose lofty summits were then, as now, crowned 
with forests of oak, and their fertile sides richly covered with corn-fields, vineyards, 
copses, and villas. Pliny's description of this retreat, though well known, is of import- 
ance, as showing what was esteemed good taste in the gardens and grounds of a highly 
accomplished Roman nobleman and philosopher, towards the end of the first century, 
under the reign of Trajan, when Rome was still in all her glory, and the mistress of the 
world in arts and in arms. 

41. ^ general tour of the Tusculan Gardens is given by Mai thus and Dr. Fal- 
coner. Their extent, Malthus thinks, may have been from three to four acres, and 
their situation round the house. 

Beginmng there, the xystus or terrace (5), says the author of the Historical Essay, is described as in 
the front of the portico, and near to the house ; from this descended a lawn covered with acanthus or 
moss (13), and adorned with figures of animals cut out in box-trees, answering alternately to one another. 
This lawn was again surrounded by a walk enclosed with tonsil evergreens sheared into a variety of forms. 
Beyond this was 3» place of exercise (2), of a circular form, ornamented in the middle with box-trees 
sheared as before into numberless different figures, together with a plantation of shrubs kept low by clip - 
ping. The whole was fenced in by a wall covered by box rising in different ranges to the top. 

Proceeding from another quarter of the house, there was a small space of ground, shaded by four 
plane-trees (7), with a fountain in the centre, which, overflowing a marble basin, watered the trees and 
the verdure beneath them. Opposite to another part of the building was a plantation of trees, in form of 
a hippodrome (6), formed of box and plane trees alternately planted, and connected together by ivy. Be- 
hind these were placed bay-trees, and the ends of the hippodrome, which were semicircular, were formed 
of cypress (8). The internal walks were bordered with rose-trees, and were in a winding direction, which 
however terminated in a straight path, which again branched into a variety of others, separated from one 
another by box-hedges ; and these, to the great satisfaction of the owner, were sheared into a variety of 
shapes and letters (10), some expressing the name of the master, others that of the artificer, while here and 
there small obelisks were placed, intermixed with fruit-trees. 

Further on was another walk, ornamented with trees sheared as above described, at the upper end of 
which was an alcove of white marble shaded by vines, and supported by marble pOlars, from the seat of 
which recess issued several streams of water, intended to appear as if pressed out by the weight of those 
which reposed upon it, which water was again received in a basin, that was so contrived as to seem al- 
ways full without overflowing. Corresponding to this was a fountain, or jet d'eau, that threw out water 
to a considerable height, and which ran off as fast as it was thrown out. An elegant Dftarble summer- 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF THE ROMANS. 



II 



house opening into a green enclosure, and furnished with a fountain similar to that last described, fronted 
the above. Throughout the walks were scattered marble seats, near to each of which was a little fountain ; 
and throughout the whole small rills of water were artificially conducted among the walks, that served to 
entertain the ear with their murmurs as well as to water the garden. {Historical View, &c. p. 53. ; Pliny's 
Epistles, b. v. letter 6. j Felihien, Plans et Descr. j CasteWs Villas of the Ancients.) 



42. The details of the Tusculan Villa are thus given by Castell. {Fig. 3.) 



(13) 



Villa, or house. 

Gestatio, or place of exercise for chariots. 

Ambulatio, or walk surrounding the terraces. 

The slope, with the forms of beasts cut in box. 

The xystus, or terrace, before the porticus, and on the 

sides of the house. 
The hippodrome, or plain so called, on the north side of 

the house. 

Plane trees on the straight bounds of the hippodrome. 
Cypress trees on the semicircular bounds of the hippo- 
drome. 

The stibadium and other buildings ill the garden. 
Box cut into names and other forms. 
The pratulura, or little meadow in the garden. 
The imitation of the natural face of some country in the 
garden. 

The walk, covered with acanthus or moss. 



(14) 
(15) 
(IC) 
(17) 
tl8) 
(19) 
(20) 

21) 
(22) 
(iiS) 
(24) 
(25) 
•2C) 

27 



The meadows before the gestatio. 

T'he tops of the hills, covered with aged t rees. 

The underwood on the declivities of the liills. 

Vineyards below the underwood. 

Corn-fields. 

The river Tiber. 

The temple of Ceres, built by Must ius. 

The farmery. 

Vivarium, or park. 

Kitchen-garden. 

Orchard. 

Apiary. 

Cochlearium, or snailery. 
Glirarium, or place for dormice. 
Osier-ground. 
Aqueduct. 

{Villat of the Ancienls, p. 3^1., and Plate Thuscum, 




43. That the style of Pliny's villas gave the tone to the European taste? in gardening up 
to the end of the lYth century is sufficiently obvious. It is almost superfluous to remark, 



12 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



observes the autlior of the Historiml View, tlie striking resemblance which Pliny's 
gardens bear to the French or Dutch taste. The terraces adjoining to the house ; the 
lawn declining fronn tlience ; the little flowei-garden, with tlie fountain in tlie centre ; 
the walks bordered with box, and the trees sheai-ed into whimsical artificial fonns ; toge- 
ther with the fountains, alcoves, and summer-houses, form a resemblance too striking to 
bear dispute. " In an age," observes LordWalpole, " when architecture displayed all its 
grandeur, all its purity, and all its taste ; when arose Vespasian's amphitheatre, the 
temple of Peace, Trajan's forum, Domitian's bath, and Adrian's villa, the ruins and 
vestiges of which still excite our astonishment and curiosity ; a Roman consul, a polished 
emperor's friend, and a man of elegant literature and taste, delighted in what the mob 
now scarcely admire in a college-garden. All the ingredients of Pliny's garden corre- 
spond exactly with those laid out by London and Wise on Dutch principles ; so that 
nothing is wanting but a parterre to make a garden in the reign of Trajan serve for the 
description of one in the reign of King William." — The open country round a villa was 
managed, as the Roman agricultural writers inform us, in the common field system lately 
prevalent in Britain ; there were few or no hedges, or other fences, or rows of trees, but 
what was not under forest was in waste, with patches of fallow or corn. Thus it appears 
that the country residence of an ancient Roman, not only as to his garden, as Lord Wal- 
pole has observed, but even as to the views and prospects from liis house, as Eustace 
and Mai thus hint, bore a very near resemblance to the chateau of a French or German 
nobleiiian in the 18th century, and to not a few in France and Italy at the present day. 
— The same taste as that displayed by Pliny appears to have prevailed till the fall of the 
Roman empire ; and by existing in a faint degree in the gardens of religious houses 
during the dark ages, as well as in Pliny's writings, has thus been handed down to 
modern times. 

44. The progress of gardening amo7ig the Homans was much less than that of architecture. 
Professor Hirschfield remarks (Theorie des Jardins, torn. i. p. 25. \ that as the descriptions 
of the ancient Roman authors make us better acquainted with their countiy-houses than 
with their gardens, and as the former appear more readily submitted to certain rules than 
the latter, we are apt to bestow on the gardens the reputation which really belongs to the 
country-houses, and give the one a value which does not belong to tlie other. The 
different manner in whicli the ancients speak of country-houses and of gardens, may 
lead us to judge which of the two objects had attained the highest degree of perfection. 
The descriptions of the first are not only more numerous but more detailed. Gardens are 
only mentioned in a general manner; and the writer rests satisfied with bestowing appro- 
bation on their fertility and charms. Every country-house had its gardens in the days 
of Pliny ; and it is not too much, taking this circumstance in connection with the re- 
marks of Columella, to hazard a conjecture that even the Romans themselves considered 
their gardens less perfect than their houses. Doubtless the Roman authors, so attentive 
to elevate the glory of their age in every thing concerning the fine arts, would have en- 
Varged more on this subject, if they had been able to produce any thing of importance. 
To decide as to the perfection which a nation has attained in one of the arts, by their 
perfection in another, is too hazardous a judgment ; the error has been already committed 
inregai-d to the music of the ancients, and must not be repeated in judging of their gardens. 
The Romans appear in general to have turned their attention to every thing which 
bore the impression of grandeur and magnificence ; hence their passion for building 
baths, circuses, colonnades, statues, I'eservoirs, and other objects which strike the eye. 
Besides, this taste was more easily satisfied, and more promptly, than a taste for plant- 
ations, which required time and patience. In all probability the greater number contented 
themselves with the useful products of the soil, and the natural beauty of the Wews, 
bestowing the utmost attention to the selection of an elevated site commanding distant 
scenery. — Cicero (De Legg. iii. 15.) informs us that it was in their country- villas that 
the Romans chiefly delighted in displaying their magnificence ; and in this respect, the 
coincidence in habits between ourselves and that gi'eat people is a proud circumstance. 

45. The Roman taste in gardens has been condemned as winatural ; but such criticism 
we consider as proceeding from much too limited a view of the subject. Because the 
Roman gardens were considered as scenes of art, and treated as such, it does not follow 
that the possessors were without a just feeling for natural scenery^. AVhere all around 
is nature, artificial scenes even of the most formal description will please, and may be 
approved of by the justest taste, from their novelty, contrast, and otlier associations. 
If all England were a scattered forest like ancient Italy, and cultivation were to take 
place only in the open glades or plains, where would be -tlie beauty of our parks and 
picturesque grounds ? The relative or temporaiy beauties of art should therefore not be 
entirely rejected in our admiration of the more permanent and absolute beauties of nature. 
That the ancient Romans admu-ed natural scenery with as great enthusiasm as the 
moderns, is evident from the writings of their eminent poets and philosophers ; scarcely 
one of whom has not in some part of his works left us the most beautiful descriptions 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF THE ROMANS. 



of natural scenery, and the most enthusiastic strains of admiration of all that is grand, 
pleasing, or romantic in landscape ; and some of them, as Cicero and Juvenal, have 
deprecated the efforts of art in attempting to improve nature. " Whoever," says 
G. Mason, " would properly estimate the attachment to rural picturesque among the 
heathen nations of old, should not confine their researches to the domains of men, but 
extend them to the temples and altars, the caves and fountains dedicated to their deities. 
These, w^ith their concomitant groves, were generally favorite objects of visual pleasure, 
as well as of veneration." (^Essay on Design, p. 24.) 

Sect. II. Roman Gardening Considered as to the Culture of Flowers and Plants of 

Ornament. 

46. Flowers ivere rare in Roman gardens under the kings, and during the first ages of 
the republic. But as luxury began to be introduced, and finally prevailed to a great de- 
gree, the passion for flowers became so great that it was found necessary to suppress it by 
sumptuary laws. The use of crowns of flowers was forbid to such as had not received 
the right to use them, either by the eminence of their situation, or by the particular per- 
mission of the magistrates. Some acts of rigor towards offenders did not hinder their 
laws from being first eluded, and at last forgotten, till that which was originally a distinc- 
tion became at last a general ornament. Men the most elevated in dignity did not hesitate 
to set up that elegance of dress and of oiniament which is repugnant to the idea of a war- 
like people ; and Cicero, in his third harangue against Verres, reproaches this proconsul 
with having made the tour of Sicily in a litter, seated on roses, having a crown of flowers 
on his head, and a garland at his back, 

47. The Floralia, or fower feasts, were observed on the last four days of April ; they 
were attended with great indecency, but they show that the common people also carried 
a taste for flowers to excess. {Flint/, xiii. 29. ; Tertullian. Opera.) 

48. The luxury of flowers under Augustus was carried to the extreme of folly. Helio- 
gabalus caused his beds, his apartments, and the porticoes of his palace to be strewed with 
flowers. Among these, roses were the sort chiefly employed, the taste for that flower 
being supposed to be introduced from Egypt, where, as Athenaevis informs us, Cleopatra 
paid a talent for tlie roses expended at one supper ; the floor of the apartment in which 
the entertainment was given, being strewed with them to the depth of a cubit. This, how- 
ever, is nothing to what Suetonius relates of Nero, who spent upwards of four millions of 
sesterces, or above thirty thousand pounds, at one supper, on these flowers. From Horace 
it appears that roses were cultivated in beds ; and from Martial, who mentions roses out 
of season as one of the greatest luxuries of his time, it would appear that it was then the 
caprice, as at present, to procure thejn prematurely, or by retardation. Columella enume- 
rates the rose, the lily, the hyacinth, and the gilly-flower, as flowers which may embellish 
the kitchen -garden ; and he mentions, in particular, a place set apart for the production 
of late rose,3. Pliny says, the method by which roses were produced prematurely was, 
by watering them with warm water when the bud began to appear. From Seneca and 
Martial it appears probable they were also forwarded by means of specularia, like certain 
culinary proauctions to be afterwards mentioned. 

49. Scientific assemblages of plants, or botanic gardens, appear to have been unknown to 
the Romans, who had formed no regular system of nomenclature for the vegetable king- 
dom, Pliny informs us that Anthony Castor, one of the first physicians at Rome, had 
assembled a number of medical plants in his garden, but they were, in all probability, for 
the purposes of his profession. Between 200 and 300 plants are mentioned in Pliny's 
History, as used in agriculture, gardens, medicine, for garlands, or other purposes, and 
these appear to be all that were known or had names in general use. {Pliny, Nat. Hist, 
lib. xii. — xxvi. inclusive.) 

Sect. III. Roman Gardening in respect to its Products for the Kitchen and the Dessert, 

50. The term Hortus in the laws of the Decemviri, which are supposed to be as old as 
the establishment of the Romans as a people, is used to signify both a garden and a 
country-house, but afterwards the kitchen-garden was distinguished by the appellation 
Hortus Pinguis. Pliny informs us, that a husbandman called a kitchen-garden a second 
dessert, or a flitch of bacon, which was always ready to be cut ; or a sal lad, easy to be 
cooked and light of digestion, and judged there must be a bad housewife (the garden 
being her charge) in that house where the garden was in bad order. 

51. The 2^fincipal fruits introduced to Italy by the Romans, according to Hirschfield 
(Theorie des Jardins, vol. i. p. 27.) and Sickler {Geschichte, 1 Band.), are the fig 
from Syria, the citron from Media, the peach from Persia, the pomegranate from Africa, 
the apricot from Epirus, apples, pears, and plums from Armenia, and cherries from 
Pontus. The rarity and beauty of these trees, he observes {Theorie des Jardins, 
vol. i. p. 27.), joined to the delicious taste of their fruits, must have enchanted 
the Romans, especially on their first introduction, and rendered ravishing to the sight, 



14 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



gardens which became insensibly embellished with the many productions which were 
poured into them from Greece, Asia, and Africa. 

52. The fruits cultivated by the Rommis, in the summit of their j)owerf are described by 
Pliny (lib. xv.), and with the exception of the orange and pine- apple, gooseberry, cur- 
rantj and raspberry, include almost all those now in culture in Europe. 

Of kernel fi-uits they had, apples, twenty-two sorts at least : They had rovmd berried and long-berried sorts, one so long that 
sweet apples {melimala) for eating, and others for cookerj'. They it was called dactylijes, tlie grapes being like the fijigers on the 
had one sort without kernels. Of pears, they had thirty-six hand. Martial speaks favorably of the hard-skinned grape for 



kinds, both summer and winter fruit, melting and hard ; some eating. Of Jigs, they had many sorts, black and white, large 

wera called libralia : we have our pound peeu-. Of quinces, and small ; one as large as a pear, another no larger than an 

they had three sorts, one was called chrysometa, ft-om its yeUow oUve. Of mulberries, they had two kuids of the black sort, a 

flesh ; they boiled them with honey, as we mate marmalade. larger and smaller. Pliny speaks also of a mulberry growing 



Of services, they had the apple-shaped, the pear-shaped, and a on a briar ; but whether tliis means the raspberrv, or the 

small kind, probably the same as we gather w^ild. Oi medlars, common brambleberrj-, does not appear. Straivberrics'ihey iia.A, 

two sorts, larger and smaller. - but do not appear to have prized : the climate is too warm to 

Of stone fruits, they had peaches, four sorts, including nec- produce this truit in perfection, unless on the hUls. 

tarines, apricots, almonds. Of plums, they had a multiplicity Of njiis they had hazel-nuts and hlberds, which thev roasted; 

of sorts, black, white, and variegated; one sort was called beech, rnast, pi.staria, &c. Of walnuts they had soft-shelled 

asinia, from its cheapness ; another damascena, which bad and hard-ahelled, as we have. In the golden age, w hen n^en 

much stone and little flesh : we may conclude it was what we lived upon acorns, the gods lived upon wahiuts ; hence the 

now call prmies. Of cherries, they had eight kinds, a red one, name Jiigluns, Jvvis Glaus. Of chestnuts, they had six sorts, 

a black one, a kind so tender as scarcely to bear any carriage, some more easily separated from tlie skin than "others, and one 

a hard-fleshed one (duracina), Uke our Bigarreau, a small one with a red skin ; they roasted them as we do. 

■with bitterish flavor (laurea), like our little wild black, also a Of leguminous fruits, the carob bean, ceratonia sUiqua. 

dwarf one not exceeding three feet high. Of the o/i re, several Of resinous or tereUinthinate fruits they used the kernels of 

sorts. four sorts of yme, including, as is still the case in Tuscanj, the 

Of berries they had grapes. They had a multiplicity of these, seeds of the Scotch pine, 

both thick-skinned (duracina) and thin-skimted : one vine QtamirhHacemis fruits, they had the gourd, cucunCvr, 

growing at Rome produced 12 amphorae of juice, S4 gallom. nitlon, in great variety. 

53. The grape mid the olive Were cultivated as agricultural jn-oducts with the greatest at- 
tention, for which ample instructions are to be found in all the Roman writers on 
Geoponics. Some plantations mentioned by Pliny are supposed still to exist, as of olives 
at Terni and of vines at Fiesoli. Both these bear maiks of the greatest age. 

54. The culinary vegetables cultivated by the Romans were chiefly the following : 

Of the hrassica tribe, several varieties. Cabbages, Columella Of the alliaceous tribe, the onion, and garlick of several sorts, 
says, were esteemed both by slaves and kin^. Of sullacis, endive, lettuce, and chicory, mustard and others. 

Of leguminous plants, the pea, bean, and kidney-bean. Of pot and stved herbs, pai-sley, orache, alisanders, dittander. 

Of esculent roots, the turnip, carrot, parsnip, beet, skirret, elecampane, fennel, and chervil, and a variety of others, 
and radish. Mushrooms, ar.A fuci were used; and bees, sujiUs, dormice. 

Of spinaceous plants, they appear to have held at least sorrel. &c. were cultivated in or near to their kitchen gardens, in ap- 

Otasparaginous plants, aisparagus. propriate places. 

55. The luxury of forcing vegetable productions it would appear had even been at- 
tempted by the Romans. Specularia, or plates of the lapis specularis, we are informed by 
Seneca and Pliny, could be split into thin plates, in length not exceeding five feet (a 
remarkable cuxumstance, since few pieces larger than a fifth of these dimensions are now 
any where to be met with); and we learn from Columella (lib. xii. cap. 3.), Martial 
(lib. viii. 14. h 68.), and Pliny (lib. xix. 23.), that by means of these specularia, Tiberius, 
who was fond of cucumbers, had them in liis garden throughout the year. They were 
grown in boxes or baskets of dung and earth, placed under these plates, and removed to 
the open air in fine days, and replaced at night. Sir Joseph Banks (^Hort. Tr. i. 148.) 
conjectures, from the epigrams of Martial referred to, that both grapes and peaches were 
forced ; and Diiines Barrington supposes that the Romans may not only have had hot- 
houses, but hot-Avalls to forward early productions. Flues, Sir Joseph Banks observes 
(Hort. Tr. i. 147), the Romans were well acquainted witli ; they did not use open fires in 
their apartments, as we do, but in the colder countries at least, they always had flues under 
the flooi-s of their apartments. Lysons found the flues, and the fire-place from whence 
they received heat, in the Roman villa he has described in Gloucestershire. Similar flues 
and fire-places were also found in the extensive villa lately discovered on the Blenheim 
estate in OxfordsTaire. In Italy the Romans used flues chiefly for baths or sudatories, 
and in seme of these which we have seen in the disinterred Greek city of Pompeii, the 
walls round the apartment are flued, or hollow, for the circulation of hot air and smoke. 

56. The luxury of ice in cooling liquors was discovered by the Romans at the time 
when they began to force fruits. Daines Barrington notices this as a remarkable circum- 
stance, and adds, as a singular coincidence, the coeval invention of these arts in England. 

Sect. IV. Roman Gardening considered in respect to the Propagation and Planting of 
Timber-trees and Hedges. 

57. The Romans propagated trees by the methods noiv in common use in our nurseries. 
Fruit-trees were generally grafted and inoculated ; vines, figs, and olives raised by cuttings, 
lasers, or suckers ; and forest-trees generally propagated by seeds and suckers. 

58. TIho\i^\ forest-trees were reared with great care round houses in the city {^Hor, Ep* 
i. 10. 22.), yet it does not appear clear that they were planted in masses or strips expressly 
for useful purposes. They were planted in rows in vineyards on which to train the vine ; 
and the sorts generally preferred were the poplar and the elm. Natural forests and 
copses, then, as now, supplied timber and fuel. Trees which do not stole (arbores cceduce), 
were distinguished from such as being cut over spring up again {succisce repullulant) : of 
the former class was the larch, which was most in use as timber. Pliny mentions a beam 
120 feet long and 2 feet thick. 



Boor I. 



GARDENS OF THE ROMANS. 



59. WUloxvs were cultivated for binding the vines to the trees that supported them ; 
for hedges ; and for making baskets ( Virg. G. ii. 4. 36.) : moist ground was preferred for 
growing them, Udum snlictuni. 

60. Hedges were of various sorts, but we are not informed what were the plants 
grown in those used for defence. Tliey surroimded chiefly vineyards and gardens ; for 
agriculture was then, as now, carried on in the common or open field manner. 

Sect. V. Roman Gardening as a Science, and as to the Authors it pt'oduced. 

61. The gardening of the Romans ivas entirely emjnrical, and carried on with all 
the superstitious observations dictated by a religion founded on polytheism. Almost 
every operation had its god, who was to be invoked or propitiated on all occasions. " 1 
will write for your instruction," says Varro to Fundasius, " tliree books on husbandry, 
first invoking the twelve dii consentes." After enumerating the gods wliich preside over 
household matters, and the common field operations, he adds, " adoring Venus as the 
patroness of the garden, and offering my entreaties to Lympha, because culture is 
drought and misery without water." The elements of agriculture, he says, are the same 
as those of the world — water, earth, air, rvnd the sun. Agriculture is a necessary and 
great art, and it is a science which teaches what is to be planted and done in every 
ground, and what lands yield the greatest profit. It should aim at utility and pleasure, 
by producing things profitable and agreeable, &c. 

62. Lunar days were observed, and also lucky and unlucky days, as described by 
Hesiod. Some things, Varro observes, are to be done in the fields while the moon is 
increasing ; others on the contrary when she is decreasing, as the cutting of corn and 
underwood. At the change of the moon pull your beans before daylight ; to prevent 
rats and mice from preying on a vineyard, prune the vines in the night-time : sow vetches 
before the twenty-fifth day of the moon, &c. " I observe these things," says Agrasius, 
(one of fifty authors who Varro says had written on husbandry, but whose writings are 
now lost,) " not only in shearing my sheep, but in cutting my hair, for I might become 
bald if I did not do this in the wane of the moon." 

63. Religion and magic were also called in to the aid of the cultivator. Columella says 
that husbandmen who are more religious than ordinary, when they sow turnips, pray 
that they may grow both for themselves and for their neighbours. If caterpillars attack 
them, Democritus affirms that a woman going with her hair loose, and bare-footed, 
three times round each bed will kill them. Women must be rarely admitted where 
cucumbers or gourds are planted, for commonly green things languish and are checked 
in their growth by their handling of them. 

64. Of vegetable j^hysiology they seem to have been very ignorant. It was a doctrine 
held by Virgil, Columella, and Pliny, that any scion may be grafted on any stock ; and 
that the scion partaking of the nature of the stock, had its fruit changed in flavor accord- 
ingly. Pliny mentions the effect of grafting the vine on the elm, and of drawing a vine 
shoot through the trunk of a chestnut ; but modern experience proves that no faith is to be 
given to such doctrines, even though some of these authors affirm to have seen what 
they describe. 

65. Equivocal generation was believed in. Some barren ti-ees and shrubs, as the 
poplar, willow, osier, and broom, were thought to grow spontaneously ; others by 
fortuitous seeds, as the chestnut and oak ; some from the roots of otlier sorts of trees, as 
the cherry, elm, bay, &c. Notwithstanding the ignorance and inaccuracy which their 
statements betray, the Romans were aware of all our common, and some of our uncom- 
mon practices : they propagated plants as we do ; pruned and thinned, watered, forced, 
and retarded fruits and blossoms, and even made incisions and ringed trees to induce 
fruitfulness. 

66. There is no Roman author exclusively on gardenijig, but the subject is treated, more 
or less, by Cato, Varro, Virgil, Pliny, and Columella. 

Cato and Varro lived, the former B. C. 150, and the latter B. C. 28 : both wrote treatises on rural affairs. 
Be Re Rustica ; but, excepting what relates to the vine and the fig, have little on the subject of gardens. 

Virgil's Georgics appeared in the century preceding the commencement of our eera. Virgil was born in 
Mantua about B. C. 70 ; but lived much at Rome and Naples. He appears to have taken most of his 
ideas from Cato and Varro. 

Pliny's Natural History was written in the first century of our £era. Pliny was born at or near Rome, 
and lived much at court. The twelfth to the twenty-sixth book inclusive are chiefly on husbandry, gardens, 
trees, and medical plants. 

The Rural (Economy of Columella is in twelve books, of which the eleventh, on Gardening, is in verse. 
He was born at Gades, now Cadiz, in Spain, but passed most of his time in Italy. 



16 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Paht I. 



Chap. III. 

Clironological History of Gardening, in co7itinental Europe from the Time of the Romans 
to the j)resent Day, or from A. D. 500 to A. D. 1823. 

67. The decline of the Roman Umpire commenced with the reign of the emperors. 
The ages, Hirschfield observes, which followed the fall of the republic, the violence 
committed by several of the emperors, the invasion of the barbarians, and the ferocity 
introduced by the troubles of the times, extinguished a taste for a country life, in pro- 
portion as tliey destroyed the means of enjoying it. So many injuries falling on the 
best provinces of the Roman empire, one after another, soon destroyed the countrj'- 
houses and gardens. Barbarism triumphed over man and the arts, arms again became 
the reigning occupation, superstition allied itself to warlike inclinations, and spread 
over Europe a manner of thinking far removed from the noble simplicity of nature. 
The mixture of so many different nations in Italy did not a little contribute to corrupt 
the taste ; the possessions of the nobles remaining without defence, were soon pillaged 
and razed, and the earth was only cultivated from necessity. Soon afterwards the first 
countries were considered those where one convent raised itself beside another. Arclii- 
tecture was only employed in chapels and churches, or on warlike forts and castles. 
From the establishment of the ecclesiastical government of the Popes in the eighth to the 
end of the twelfth century, the monks were almost the only class in Europe who occu- 
pied themselves in agriculture ; many of these, carried away by their zeal, fled from the 
corruption of the age, and striving to overcome their passions, or indulge their gloomy 
humor, or, as Herder observes, to substitute one passion for another, retired into 
solitary deserts, unhealthy valleys, forests, and mountains ; there they labored with 
their own hands, and rendered fertile, lands till then barren from neglect, or in a state of 
natural rudeness. 

68. Thus the arts of culture were preserved by the monks during the dark ages, Tlje 
sovereigns, in procuring pardon of their sins by bestowing on the monks extensive tracts 
of country and slaves, recompensed their activity as rural improvers. The monks 
of St. Basil and St. Benedict, Harte inforaas us, rendered many tracts fertile in Italy, 
Spain, and the south of France, which had lain neglected ever since the first incursions of 
the Goths and Saracens. Others were equally active in Britain in ameliorating the soil. 
Walker ( Essays) informs us that even in the remote island of lona, an extensive estab- 
lishment of monks was formed in the sixth centur^^ and that the remains of a corn-milj 
and mill-dam built by them still exist ; and indeed it is not too much to affirm, that 
without the architectural and rural labors of this class of men, many provinces of Europe 
which at present nourish thousands of inhabitants would have remained deserts or 
marshes, the resorts only of wild beasts, and the seminaries of disease ; and architecture 
and gardening, as arts of design, instead of being very generally diflfused, would have 
been lost to the greater part of Europe. 

69. At length the dawn of light appeared ivith the art of printing, Luther, and Hen. VIII, 
Commerce began to flourish in Italy and Holland, arts of peace began to prevail, and 
the European part of what was formerly the Roman empire gradually assumed these 
political divisions which it for the greater part still retains. We shall take a cursoiy 
view of the progress of gardening in each of these states, from the dark ages to the present 
day. 

Sect. I. Of the Revival, Progress, and 2)resent State of Gardening in Italy. 

70. The blessings of peace and of commerce, the remains of ancient grandeur still 
existing, and the liberty which some cities had acquired through the generosity and splerL- 
dor of some popes and princes, united with other causes in the revival of the arts in Italy 
rather than in any other country. 

SuBSECT. 1. Italian Gardeni7ig, in respect to Design and Taste, 

71. The earliest notice of Italian gardening is in the work of Pierre de Crescent, a 
senator of Bologna. He composed in the beginning of the fourteenth century a work 
on agriculture, M'hich he dedicated to Charles II. king of Naples and Sicily. In the 
eighth book of this work the author treats of gardens of pleasure. These he divides 
into three classes ; those of persons of small fortune ; those of persons in easy circum- 
stances ; and those of princes and kings. He teaches the mode of constructing 
and ornamenting each ; and of the royal gardens observes, that they ought to have 
a menagerie and an aviary ; the latter placed among thickets, arbors, and vines. Each 
of the three classes ought to be decorated with turf, shrubs, and aromatic flowers. 

72. Gardening, ivith the other arts, zvas revived and jmtronised by the Medici family in the 
beginning of the sixteenth century, and the most celebrated gardens of these times, as 
Boscoe informs us, were those of Lorenzo de Medici, and of the wealthy Bernard Bu- 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN ITALY. 



17 



cellai. They were in the geometric and architectural taste of those of Pliny, and served 
as models or precedents for other fannous gardens which succeeded them till within tlio 
last sixty years, when, as Eustace observes, a mixture of the modern or natural-like 
manner was generally admitted. 

73. The taste for distributing statues and urns in gardens is said to have been revived 
about the beginning of the sixteenth century by Cardinal D'Este, from the accidental 
circumstance of his having formed a villa on the site of that of the emperor Adrian, 
near Rome, where finding a number of antiquities, he distributed them over the newly 
arranged surface. Tliis mode was soon imitated by Francis I. of France, and afterwards 
by tlie other countries of Europe. Gardens of plants in pots and vases, began to be 
introduced about the same time, and were used to decorate apartments, balconies, and 
roofs of houses as at present. 

74. About the end of the sixteenth century, the celebrated Montaigne travelled in Italy, 
and has left us some accounts of the principal gardens of that age. He chiefly enlarges 
on their curious h5'draulic devices, for which tlie garden of the Cardinal de Ferrara at 
Tivoli was remarkable. {Jour, en Ital. torn, ii.) 

75. About the beginning of the seventeenth century, i' Adamo, a poem, was written and 
published at Milan in 1617, by G. B. Andi-eini, a Florentine. Tiie prints, Warton 
observes, [Essay on Pope,) tliat are to represent paradise are full of dipt hedges, square 
parterres, straight walks, trees uniformly lopt, regular knots and carpets of flowers, groves 
nodding at groves, marble fountains, and water-works. Tliis may be considered as a poetic 
assemblage of the component parts of a fine Italian garden in the seventeenth century. 

76. After the middle of the seventeenth century, the celebrated Evelyn, the author of 
Sylva, visited Italy, and has described a nmnber of its principal gardens. 

At Genoa he saw the palace of Ilierov.ymo del Negro, " on the terrace or hilly garden, there is a grove of 
stately trees, amoig which are sheep, shepherds, and wild beasts, cut very artificially in a grey stone ; 
fountains, rocks, and fish-ponds. Casting your eyes one waj^, you would imagine yourself i« a wilder- 
ness and silent country j sideways, in the heart of a great city." 

At and near Florence, he says, there are more than a thousand palaces, and country-houses of note. 
He particularises those of Boboli at the ducal residence (now the palace Pitti), in the town, which stitl 
exist and are kept in tolerable order. 

In and near Rome, he mentions those of the Borghese family, and of Cardinal Aldobrandini at Frascati, 
" surpassing, in my opinion, the most delicious places I ever beheld for its situation, elegance, plentiful 
waters, groves, ascents, and prospects." He admires several hydraulic conceits, some of which still exist, 
and also that " of a copper ball, supported by a jet of air issuing from the floor, and continually 
dancing about." 

At Tivoli he visited the palace and gardens of Este, v^rhich are mentioned with similar encomiums. 

Of the palaces and gardens of Lombardy, he observes, " No disgrace in this country to be some gener- 
ations in finishing their palaces, that, without exhausting themselves by a vast expence at once, they may 
at last erect a sumptuous pile." " An Italian nobleman," Forsyth remarks, " will live on a crown a day, 
but spend millions for the benefit of posterity, and the ornament of his country." 

At Vilmarini, near Vicenza, he found an orangery, " eleven score paces long, full of fruit and blossoms. 
In the centre of the garden, a magnificent wire cupola, supported by slender brick piers, and richly covered 
with ivy. — A most inextricable labyrinth." {Memoirs by Bray, vol. i. 75 — 207.) 

77. In the beginning f the eighteenth centxiry Italy was visited by Volkman, a German 
traveller, whom Hirschfield considers as deserving credit, and a good judge. He repre- 
sents the Italian gardens as inferior to those of France in point of superb alleys, lofty dipt 
hedges, and cabinets of verdure ; but, he adds, that they please the greater part of tra- 
vellers from the nortii of Europe, more than the French gardens, from the greater variety 
of plants wliich they contain, and their almost perpetual luxuriance and verdure. 
Among the fine gardens, he includes those of Venerie, StupigJii, and Fig7ie de la Reijie, 
near Turin, which do not appear to have been visited by Evelyn. The beauties of most 
of the gardens near Rome, he considers as depending more on their situations, distant 
views, classic remains and associations, luxuriant vegetation, and fine climate, than on 
their design, which, he says, exhibits " all the puerilities of the French taste, without its 
formal grandeur." (Nackrichten von Italien, 1 ster band.) 

78. About the middle of the eighteenth century the English style of gardening began to 
attract attention in Italy, though partly from the general stagnation of mind, and partly 
from the abundance of natural beauty already existing, it has never rrjade much progress 
in that country. " Unfortunately," observes Eustace {Tour, i. 426.), a traveller abun- 
dantly partial to Italy, " the modern Romans, like the continental nations in general, are 
not partial to country residence. They may enjoy the description or commend the 
representation of rural scenes and occupations in books and pictures ; but they feel not 
the beauties of nature, and cannot relish the calm, the solitary charms of a country life." 
The Italians in general, he elsewhere adds (i. 98.), have very little taste in furnishing a 
house, or in laying out grounds ta advantage.' — Notwithstanding these remarks, and the 
known paucity of specimens of landscape gardening in Italy, an Italian author of 
eminence. Professor Malacarne of Padua, has lately claimed for Charles Imanuel, first 
Duke of Savoy, the honor of having invented and first displayed an English garden or 
park in the neighbourhood of Turin ; and which park he proves by a letter of Tasso, 
that iK>et wished to immortalise " as much as he could," in the well-known stanza of his 
Jerusalem, which Chaucer copied, and which Warton and Eustace suggest as more 

C 



J8 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



likely to have given the first idea of an English garden, than Milton's description of 
Paradise. {New Mon. Mag. for July \%20. ; Pindemonte su i Giardini Inglese, Verona, 
1817.) 

79. Of the iJresent state of gardening in Italy, as aji art of design, we shall submit a 
slight sketch, partly from writers of the present century, and partly from our own inspec- 
tion in 1819. The grand object of an Italian nobleman is to produce a huge pile of 
architecture, externally splendid, and to collect a gallerj- of pictures and statues. The 
furnishing of this pile for domestic use, or even the internal finishing of great part of it, 
he cares little about ; and the park or gardens are inferior objects of attention. The 
Romans, when at the highest point of power, seem to have had exactly the same taste, as 
may be gathered from their writings, and seen in the existing ruins of the Villa Adriana, 
near Tivoli, and many others. 

80. A^ear Turin, the palace and gardens of Venerie still exist, but are only remarkable 
for extent, and for an old orangery nearly six hundred feet in length. The surface of the 
park is in-egular, and the trees distributed in avenues, alleys, and geometrical figures ; 
the grounds of some of the numerous white villas near the city are romantic, and 
command extensive prospects ; but ver^' few aspire to the character of fine gardens. 

81. At Genoa the best garden is that of Sig. di Negro, situated within the city. It 
is elevated, in-egular, and singularly varied ; rich in views of the town, the sea, and the 
mountains ; abounds in fruits, botanical riches, shady and open walks, turrets, and 
caves. There is one large cave in which dinner-parties are frequently given by the pro- 
prietor ; and once a year, we believe on his birth-day, this grotto is decorated with 
some hundreds of religious puppets in gilt dresses, accompanied with pictures of saints, 
sculls, crucifixes, relics, tapers, and lamps. This forms a part of tlie gardener's business, 
who preserves these paraphernalia through the rest of the year in a sort of museum. 
We mention the circumstance as characteristic of the Italian taste for spectacle, so different 
from that of the English. The gardens of Hipolito Durazo, and of Griraaldi, are 
more extensive, but less select than those of S. di Negro. Like them they are singularly 
varied in surface, and rich in marine views. The whole coast from Savonna to Genoa, 
and from Genoa to Nervi, is naturally very irregular, and abounds in beautiful gardens, 
abundantly stocked with orange trees, partly in pots, and in the warmest situations trained 
against walls, or planted as standards. We ^isited many of these gardens, and the only 
general fault seemed to be the want of order and keeping ; properties which are essential 
to the full effect of every style in every country. 

82. The gardens of Lombardy are the most luxuriant in vegetation, not only in Italy, ^ 
but perhaps in Europe. The climate is not so favorable for the perfection of tlie grape 
and the orange as that of Naples, nor for the production of large turnips and succulent 
cabbages as that of Holland ; but it possesses a medium of temperature and humidity 
between the two climates which is perhaps favorable to a greater number of vegetable 
productions, than any one climate on the face of our globe. There are few princely 
gardens in tliis kingdom, but many of moderate size well stocked with trees and plants 
of ornament, and sometimes neatly kept. 

The gardens of the Brenta still retain marks of their ancient celebrity. 

The extent and beauty of those of the Isola Bella (fgA.^, have been greatly exaggerated by Eustace, 
and other travellers. The justest description appears to us to be that of Wilson. " Nothing," he says, 
" can be so noble as the conversion of a barren rock, without an inch of earth on its surface, into a 
paradise of fertility and luxury. This rock, in 1640, produced nothing but mosses and lichens, when 
Vitaliano Boromeo conceived the idea of turning it into a garden of fruits and flowers. For this purpose, 
he brought earth from the banks of the lake, and built ten terraces on arches, one above the other, to the 
top of the island on which the palace is posted. This labor has produced a most singular pyramid of 
exotics and other plants, which make a fine show, and constitute the chief ornament of this rniracle of 
artificial beauty. The orange and lemon trees are in great luxuriance, and the grove of laurels ^,L. nobilis) 
is hardly to be equalled any where in Europe; two of them in particular are said to be the largest 
known in existence." {Wilson's Tours, vol. iii. p. 449.) 




At Monxa, the royal residence, near Milan, is the finest garden scenery in Italv. The park contains 
upwards of 3000 acres, of a gently varied fertile surface. It is chiefly laid out in the regular st3'le; but 
contains also an English garden of considerable extent and beauty. It is well watered, and the walks are 
not 80 numerous as to disturb the unity and repose of the scenes. The culinarv, 'flower, botanic, and 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN ITALY. 



fruit gardens, orangeries, and hot-houses, are all gootl, and as well managed as the penuriousness of the 
present vice-king will admit. Very fine avenues lead from this residence to Milan. The whole was begun 
m Beauharnois' time, under the direction of Sig. Villaresi, one of the most scientific gardeners in Italy, 
and is still managed under his direction, but with greatly diminished resources. 

There are various gardens jjointed out to strangers as English, veramente Ltglese, near Milan, and also 
at Verona, Vicenza, Brescia, Porta, &c. ; and Buonaparte caused a small public garden to be made in 
Venice. " In many of the villas on the lake of Como," Wilson observes, " it is most delightful to behold 
the lofty crags frowning over the liighly cultivated gardens, v/itli hot-houses of exotic plants, neat terraces, 
aJid ornamental summer-houses, subduing the natural wildness of the situation." Most of those which 
we visited were too much ornamented, and too full of walks, seats, arbors, and other ornaments, for that 
rejjose and simplicity which, according to our ideas, is essential to an English garden. Art, in most of 
these gardens, is as much avowed as in the French style; whereas, in the true English garden, though art 
is employed, yet it is not avowed and ostentatiously displayed ; on the contrary, the grand object is to fol- 
low the directions of the Italians themselves, and study that the art " cite tuttofa, nulla n scopre." 

83. At Florence, the ducal gardens of Boboli are the most remarkable. They oc- 
cupy two sides of a conical hill, and part of a bottom, and consist of three parts ; a 
botanic and exotic garden close to the palace Pitti and tlte celebrated museum ; a kitchen- 
garden, near the hill top ; and, a geometric garden which occupies the greater part cf 
the hill. The scene abounds in almost every ingredient of the style in which it is 
laid out. The ground being very steep, almost all the walks slope considerably ; but a 

, few, conducted horizontally, are level, and serve, if the expression be admissible, as rest- 
ing v/alks. There are abundance of scats, arbors, vases, planted with agaves and 
orange-trees ; and a prospect tower on the summit, from which, as well as from many 
other points, are obtained fine views of Florence and the environs. In the lower part or 
bottom is a handsome basin of water, with'^an island and fountains in the centre, verged 
with a marble parapet ornamented with vases of orange-trees, and surrounded by 
shorn hedges and statues. On the whole, nothing has been spared to render these gardens 
complete of their kind, and the effect is perhaps as perfect as the situation, from its irre- 
gularity and steepness, admits of. Tlie public promenade to the Cassino, deserves notice 
as among the best in Italy. It consists of shady avenues, extending for several miles on 
a flat surface near the Arno, varied by occasional views of villas and distant scenery. 
The trees are chiefly elms and chestnuts. There are numerous private gardens round 
Florence, but none of them rejnarkable. The fortuitous scenery of Vallombrosa and 
other romantic situations, are the grand attractions for strangers. On mount Fiesol« 
and thence to Bologna, are some country-seats witii lodges, and winding approaches, 
which, considering the arid soil, are highly beautiful, and come the nearest to those 
of England of any in the warmer regions of Italy. The Tuscans, Sigisraondi ob- 
serves {Agr. Tosc), are the more to be condemned for having neglected gardening, since 
their countryman, Proposto Lastri, has rendered De Lille's poem in Italian in a style 
equal to the original. But the gens d leiir aise, and the nobles, he says, have no love of 
rural nature, and only come into the country after vintage to shoot for a few days, and 
indulge in feasting. They come in large parties with their ladies, and in a few weeks 
expend what they have been niggardly laying aside during the rest of the year. He men- 
tions the Chevalier Forti at Chiari, and Sig. Falconcini at Ceretto, as having delightful 
gardens ; adding that the country-seats of the Luquois are in the best taste of any in Italy. 

84. The villas of Rome, Forsyth observes, are to this day the " ocelli Italia;." Their 
cassinos generally stand to advantage in the park, light, gay, airy, and fanciful. In the 
ancient villas the buildings were low, lax, diffused, and detached. In the modern, they 
are more compact, more commodious, and rise into several stories. In both, the gardens 
betray the same taste for the unnatural, the same symmetry of plan, architectural groves, 
devices cut in box, and tricks performed by the hydraulic organ. [Rem. on Italy, 173.) 
A few cardinals, he elsewhere observes, created all the great villas of Rome. Their riches, 
their taste, their learning, their leisure, their frugality, — all conspired in this single 
object. While the eminent founder was squandering thousands on a statue, he would 
allot but one crown for his own dinner. He had no children, no stud, no dogs to keep ; he 
built indeed for his own pleasure, or for the admiration of others ; but he embellished 
his country, he promoted the resort of rich foreigners, and he afforded them a high intel- 
lectual treat for a few pauls, which never entered into his pocket. This taste generally 
descends to his heirs, who mark their little reigns by successive additions to the stock. 
How seldom are great fortunes spent so elegantly in England ! How many are absorbed 
in the table, the field, or the turf! Expenses which centre and end in the rich egotist 
himself ! What English villa is open like the Borghese, as a common drive to the whole 
metropolis? {Rem. on Italy, 216.) 

The Villa Borghese is the most noted in the neighbourhood of Rome. It has a variety of surface 
formed by two hills and a dell, and a variety of embellishments, cassinos, temples, grottoes, aviaries, 
modern ruins, sculptured fountains, a crowd of statues, a lake, an aqueduct, a circus ; but it wants the 
more beautiful variety of an English garden ; for here you must walk in right lines, and turn, at right 
angles, fatigued with the monotony of eternal ilex.. {Remarks, 8ic. 216.) Eustace says these gardens are 
laid out with some regard both for the new and the old system, because winding walks are to be found 
intersecting the long alleys. This is true ; but the whole is so frittered down by roads, walks, paths, and 
alleys, and so studded with statues and objects of art, as to want that repose, simplicity, and massive 
appearance, essential, at least, to an Englishman's idea of an English garden. Simplicity, however, is 
a beauty less relished among the nations of the continent than in this country, and less relished by the 
Italians than by any other continental nation. 



HISTORY OF GARDEU^ING. 



Part I. 



The Villa Panfdi displays the most, architectural gardens of any about Rome. Here, as Forsyth ob- 
serves, laurel porticoes of ilex, green scutcheons, and dipt coronets, are seen vegetating over half an acre; 
theatres of jets d'eau, geometrical terraces, built rocks, and measured cascades. 

^ nu7nber of other villas might be enumerated ; bxit as far as respects gardens, the description, if faithful, 
might be tiresome and monotonous. Even Eustace allows, that " howsoever Italian gardens may diifcr in 
extent and magnificence, their principal features are nearly the same ; the same with regard to artificial 
as well as natural graces. Some ancient remains are to be found in all, and several in most of them. They 
are all adorned with the same evergreens, and present, upon a greater or less scale, the same Italian and 
ancient scenery. They are in general much neglected, but for that reason the more ruriil." {Classical 
Tour, vol. i. chap. 18.) 

85. -At Frascati, Belvidere, a villa of Prince Borghese, commands most glorious pros- 
pects, and is itself a fine object, from the scenic effect of its front and approaches. Be- 
hind the palace is an aquatic stream, which flows from Mount Algidus, dashes pre- 
cipitately down a succession of terraces, and is tormented below into a variety of tricks. 
The whole court seems alive at the turning of a cock. Water attacks you on every side ; 
it is squirted in your face from invisible holes ; it darts up in a constellation of jets d'eau ; 
it returns in misty showers, which present against the sun a beautiful Iris. Water is made 
to blow the trumpet of a centaur, and the pipe of a Cyclops ; water plays two organs ; 
makes the birds wai-ble, and the muses tune their leeds ; sets Pegasus neighing, and all 
Parnassus on music. " I remark," says Forsyth, " this magnificent toy as a speci- 
men of Italian hydraulics. Its sole object is to surprise strangers, for all the pleasure 
that its repetitions can impart to the owners is but a faint reflection from the pleasure of 
others." 

86. At Naples the gardens possess the same general character as those of Rome, though, 
with the exception of Caserta, they are less magnificent. 

The royal gardens at Porfici are chiefly walled cultivated enclosures, abounding in oranges, figs, and 
grapes, with straight alleys and wooded quarters entirely for sliade. There is one small department, of a 
few perches, devoted to the English taste; but it is too small to give any idea of that style. There is also 
a spot called La Favorita, in which, says Starke {Letters, ii. 125.), the present king has placed swings 
and wooden horses, or hurly-burlies, (such as are to be seen at our fairs), for his own particular amusement, 
and that of his nobility. The approach to this garden is through the palace court, great part of which is 
occupied as a barrack by troops. Tlie filth and stench of this court is incredible; and yet it is overlooked 
by the windows of the king's dining-room, who sat down to dinner, on his return from the chace, as we 
passed through the palace on the 2d of August, 1819. We know no scene to which it could be compared, 
but that of the court of some of the large Russian inns in tlie suburbs of Petersburgh, 

The gardens of Prince Leopold at Villa Franca almost adjoin those of the king. They are less extensive, 
but kept in much better order by a very intelligent German. The orange-groves anil trellises in both 
gardens are particularly fine ; and in that of Prince Leo]X)ld, there is a tolerable collection of plants. 
There is in Naples a royal garden, in the geometric style, combining botany and some specimens of the 
English rnanntr, which is now enlarging, and has the advantage of an elevated situation and fine marine 
views. 

The Chiaja is a public garden on the quay, used as a promenade. The outline is a parallelogram, the 
area arranged in three alleys, with intermediate winding walks, fountains, rock-works, basins, statues, 
parterres v/ith and without turf, and oranges, flowers, &c. in pots. It is surrounded by a parapet sur- 
mounted by an iron fence, and contains cassinos for gambling, cafes, baths, taverns, &c. The view to the 
bay, and the breezes thence arising, are delightful. It is justly reckoned one of the finest walking prome- 
nades in Italy. 

Extensive gardens of pots and boxes are common on the roofs of the palaces, and other houses in Naples. 
Viewed from the streets they have a singular effect, and from their beauty and fragrance, from the fresh 
breezes in these elevated regions, and the comparative absence of that stench with which the lower atmo- 
sphere of Naples is almost continually charged, they are very agreeable to the possessors. 

87. The royal residence of Caserta is about seventeen miles from Naples. The palace, 
in which, as Forsyth observes, the late king sought grandeur from every dimension, is 
situated in an immense plain, and is a quadrangle, the front of which is upwards of seven 
hundred feet long. It was begun in 1752, roofed in 1757, but is not yet, and probably 
never will be finished. The park extends from the palace to a range of mountains at two 
miles distance, some of which it includes. It may be said to consist of four parts ; open 
pasture, almost without trees, near the palace ; woody scenery, or thick groves and copses, 
partly near to, but chiefly at a considerable distance from, the palace ; mountainous scenery 
devoted to game and the chace, at the extreme distance ; and an English garden on one 
side, skirting the mountains. There are besides, St. Lucio a large village, a silk-manu- 
factory, a farm, &c.; all of which are described by different tourists ; minutely by Vasi, 
in his Guide to Naples and its Environs, — and plans of the whole are given by L. Van- 
vitelli, in his Disegni del Reale Palazzo di Caserta. 

The cascade and canal of Caserta constitute its most remarkable feature, and that which renders this 
park, in our opinion, the most extraordinary in Europe. The water is begun to be collected above thirty 
miles' distance among the mountains, and after being conducted to a valley about five miles from Caserta, 
is carried over it by an aqueduct consisting of three tiers of arches, nearly two hundred feet high, and 
two thousand feet long. The volume of water is four feet wide by three and a half feet deep, and moves, 
as near as we could estimate, at the rate of one foot in two seconds. Arrived at the back of the mountain 
Gazzano, a tunnel is cut through it, and the stream bursting from a cave about half way between the base 
and the summit, forms a cascade of fifty feet directly in front of the palace. The waters are now in a large 
basin, from which, under ground, tunnels and pipes proceed on two sides, for the purposes of supplying 
the lakes or rivers in the English garden, the fish-ponds, various jets d'eau, and for irrigation to maintain 
the verdure of the turf. From the centre of this basin proceeds a series of alternate canals and cascades of 
uniform breadth, and in a direct line down the slope of the hill, and along the plain to within a furlong or 
little more of the palace. Here it terminates abruptly, the waters being conveyed away under ground for 
other purposes. The effect of this series of canals and cascades, viewed from the garden-jfront of the palace, 
or from the middle entrance-arch, through that " long obscure portico or arcade which pierces the whole 
depth of the quadrangle, and acts like the tube of a telescope to the waters," is that of one continued sheet 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN ITALY. 



21 



of smooth or stagnant water resting on a slope; or of a fountain which had siuklciily burst forth and 
threatened to inundate the plain ; but for this idea the course of the water is too tame, tran(iuil, and regu- 
lar, and it looks more like some artificial imitation of water than water itself. In sh>)rt the effect is still 
more unnatural than it is extraordinary ; for though jets and fountains are also unnatural, yet they pre- 
sent nothing repugnant to our ideas of the nature of things ; but a body of water seemingly reposing on a 
slope, and accommodating itself to the inclination of the surface, is a sight at variance with the laws of 
gravity. Unquestionably the cascade at the extremity is a grand object of itself; but the other cascades 
are so trifling, and so numerous, as in perspective, and viewed at a distance, to produce this strange effect 
of continuity of surface. As a proof that our opinion is correct we refer to the views of Caserta, which are 
got up by the Neapolitan artists for sale ; had these artists been able to avoid the appearance in question, 
even by some departures from truth, there can be no doubt they would not have hesitated to do so. A 
bird's-eye "view of tliis canal, in Vanvitelli's work {fig. 5.), gives but a very imperfect idea of the reality, as 
seen from the surface of the ground, and especially from the palace and lower parts of the park. 



5 




Forsyth seems to have paid little attention to this water, having been chiefly struck with the palace. 
Eustace says, " The palace is one of the noblest edifices of the kind in Europe ; the gardens extensive, re- 
gular, but except a part in the English style, uninteresting. From a reservoir on the mountain Gazzano, 
the water is precipitated down the declivity to the plain, where, collected in a long straight canal, it loses 
its rapidity and beauty, and assumes the appearance of an old fashioned stagnant pool." {Tour in Italy, 
vol. i. p. 602.) Wilson says, the cascade of Caserta might have been made the finest of its kind in the 
world ; but it has been spoiled by»a love of formality, which has led the copious stream drizzling over regvi, 
lar gradations of steps into a long stagnant canal. {Tours, &c. vol. ii. p. 217.) 

The English garden of Caserta was formed by Grasffer, a German, author of a Catalogue of Herba- 
ceous Plants, who had been some time in England. He was sent to the king of Naples about 1760, by 
Sir Joseph Banks, and has formed and preserved as perfect a specimen of English pleasure-ground as any 
we have seen on the continent. The verdure of the turf is maintained in summer by a partially concealed 
system of irrigation ; and part of the walks were originally laid with Kensington gravel. Every exotic, 
which at that time could be furnished by the Hammersmith nursery, was planted, and many of them form 
now very fine specimens. Among these the Camellias, Banksias, Proteas, Magnolias, Pines, &c. have attained 
a large size, and ripen their seeds. There is a good kitchen and botanic garden, and extensive hot-houses, 
chiefly in the English form ; but now much out of repair. Indeed this remark will apply to the whole 
place, excepting the palace. Grseffer laid out the gardens of the Duke de San Gallo, at Naples, and various 
others. He was not liked by the peasants of St. Lucio, who, taking the advantage of him, when thrown 
from a cabriolet, stabbed him mortally before he could recover himself, in 1816. 

88. In Sicilij are some gardens of great extent. A fev/ are mentioned by Swinburne ; 
and an account of one belonging to a Sicilian prince, remarkable for its collection of 
monsters, is given in Brydone's Tour. 

SuBSECT. 2. Italian Gardening' hi respect to the Culture of Flowers and Plants of 

Ornament. 

89. Flowers apjiear to have been little cultivated by the Ilaliaiis previously to the lOlh 
century. The introduction of the Christian religion as a national worship, though at 
present favorable, was at first adverse to the use of flowers. Tertullian and Clement of 
Alexandria, in tlie second century, inveighed against their use with all their eloquence : 
and tlie rites of religion, then carried on in gloomy vaults, were not, as now, accom- 
panied by bands of music, statues, pictures, and enriclied altars decorated with flowers. 
P. de Crescent in the beginning of the fourteenth century, mentions only the violet, lily, 
rose, gilly-flower, and iris. Commerce began to flourish in the century wliich succeeded, 
and various plants were introduced from the Eastern countries, by the wealthy of Venice 
und Genoa. 

C ?, 



22 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Pakt I. 



90. Tlie earliest private botanic garden was formed at Padua, by Gasi>ar de Gabriel, 
a wealthy Tuscan noble, at considerable expense. It was accomplished in 1525 ; and 
though not a public institution, it was open to all the curious. To this garden suc- 
ceeded, that of Corner at Venice, and Simonetta, at Milan ; those of some convents at 
Rome, and of Pinella, at Naples, with others enumerated by botanical historians. 
(C. Spreng. Hist. lib. iu. ; Holier s Bib. Bot. 21.; Tiraboscln s Stor. del Litt. Ital. ; Gesjier^ 
Hort. German.; Steplianus de Re Hortense.) 

91. The first jmblic-.batanic garden established in Europe was that of Pisa, begun, accord- 
ing to Deleuze, in 1543, by Cosmo de Medici; and of which Ghini, and Cesalpin, cele- 
brated botanists, were successively the directors. Belon, a French naturalist, who was 
at Pisa in 1555, was astonished at the beauty of the garden, the quantity of plants it con- 
tained, and the care taken to make them prosper. In 1591 the number of new plants 
was found so far accumulated as to render a larger garden necessary, and that space of 
ground was fixed on which is the present botanic garden ; two borders were destined for 
ornamental flowers, and a green-house was formed for such as \TCre too tender for the 
open air. In the beginning of the eighteenth century, a great accession was obtained to 
the garden by the double flowers of Holland, then introduced in Italy for the first time. 
(Calvio, Hist. Pisani.) The example of Pisa was soon imitated by other cities and univer- 
sities in Italy and Germany. In 1545, (not 1533, as stated by Adamson— see Deleuze,) 
the public botanic garden of Padua was agreed on by the senate of Venice. It contained 
in 1581 four hundred plants cultivated in the open air, besides a number kept in pots to 
be taken into houses or sheds during winter. The garden of Bologna was next estab- 
lished by Pope Pius the Vth ; then that of Florence by the Grand Duke ; and afterwards 
that of Rome. Fi-om that time to the present day, the numbers of botanic gardens have 
been continually increasing, so that there is now one belonging to almost every principal 
city in Italy ; an exertion the more remarkable, as botanic gardens in that countiy are 
proportionably more expensive than in England, from the necessity of conveying a stream 
of water to them, and forming a regular system of irrigation. 

92. A taste for fiowers ayid ornamental plants has thus become general in Italy ; and at the 
same time the means of gratification afforded, by the superabundant plants and seeds of 
these gardens being given away, or sold at very moderate prices to the curious. About 
this time also the Dutch made regular exchanges of their bulbous roots for the orange- 
trees of Genoa and Leghorn ; and the double night-smelling jessamine was introduced 
at Pisa from Spain, and so highly prized as to have a centinel placed over it by the 
governor. (^Evelyn.) The use of flowers, it is probable, was never entirely laid aside in 
Italy as ornaments to female dress ; but in the progress of i-efinement their application ir» 
this way became more general, and more select soi-ts were chosen ; they became in de- 
mand, both gathered in bouquets, and with the entire plants in pots ; they were used as 
household ornaments both internal and external ; and the church, thinking that what 
pleased man must be pleasing to the gods ; or conforming to the taste of the times, and 
desirous of rendering religion as attractive as possible to the multitude, introduced flowers 
as decorations of altars and statues, and more especially in their fetes and processions. 
Pots and boxes of orange trees, pomegi-anates, bays, oleanders, myrtles, and other plants, 
are now let out by the day, for decorating the steps and approaches to altars, or sold for 
ornamenting roofs, balconies, virandas, courts, yard?, passages, halls, staircases, and even 
shops and warehouses in most of the large towns of Italy. Notwithstanding this there is 
a recent instance on record of a lady residing in Rome, commencing a law-suit against 
her neighbour, for filling her court-yard with orange-trees, the smell of the flowers of 
which was by the other considered as a nuisance. 

For the church the white lily {Lilium ccindidujji) is in great demand, with which the Madona, or 
Madre di Dio, is decorated as an emblem of her virginity. The typha ( T. latifolia) is much used when 
in seed to put into the hands of statues of Christ, being considered as the reed with which the soldiers 
handed him a sponge of vinegar. In Poland, where the typha has not been easily procured, we have seen 
leeks in the flower-stalk used as a substitute. The rose," the stock-gilly-flower, the jessamine, &-c. are 
next in demand, and are used in common with such others as are presented gratis, or offered for sale, as 
decorations indiscriminately to the crowd of statues and pictures of saints which decorate the churches, 
to private houses, and as ornaments of female dress. 

On occasions of public rejoicing flowers are also much used in Italy. Favorite princes and generals are 
received into towns and even villages through triumphal arches decorated with flowers, and the ground is 
also sometimes strewed with them. The lives of Buonaparte, Murat, and Beauharnois, afford many 
examples. The Emperor of Austria made a tour of Italy in 1819, and though every where disliked, every 
where walking on a mine ready to explode, he was in many places so received ; and at the famous cascade 
of Marmora, near Temi, a slight arcade, 300 yards in length, was formed to guide the steps of the imperial 
visitor to the best point of view. It was covered with intersecting wreaths of flowers and foliage, and the 
sides ornamented with festoons of box, myrtle, and bay. At IVIiian, a very gay city, flowers are greatly 
prized, and in the winter season are procured from the peculiarly warm and ever verdant gardens between 
Genoa and Nervi. A louis-d'or, we were informed, is sometimes paid for a single nosegay. During the 
carnival the demand is great throughout Italy. 

93. Florists' fiowers, especially the bulbous kinds, do not succeed well in the dry warm 
climate of Italy. Fine varieties of the hyacinth, tulip, ranunculus, auricula, polyanthus, 
&c. are soon lost there, and obliged to be renewed from more temperate countries. 
They excel, however, in the culture of the tuberose, which forms an article of commerce 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN ITALY. 



23 



at Genoa, as does the paper narcissus (iV. orientalis) at Naples. In roses, jessamines, 
oleanders, oranges, they also excel ; and also in most single flowers not natives of cold 
climates. Sig. Villaresi, already mentioned, has raised from seeds of the Bengal rose 
{Rosa indica), impregnated promiscuously with other roses, upwards of fifty distinct 
varieties, many of which are of great beauty, and very fragrant. In general, flowers 
and ornamental plants are most in demand, and cultivated to the greatest degree of 
perfection in Lombardy, of which the flower-markets of Milan and Venice aiFord most 
gratifying proofs. Many of the Chinese, New Holland, and some of the Cape trees 
and shrubs, thrive well, and blossom luxuriantly in the open air in the warmer regions, 
as in S. di Negro's garden, at Genoa, and those of Pisa and Caserta. Evelyn says, 
he saw at Florence, in 1664, a rose grafted on an orange-tree ; the same tricks are still 
passed off with the rose, jessamine, oleander, myrtle, &c. at Genoa, and even in some 
parts of Lombardy. 

94. The taste for Jloxoers and plants of ornament is rather on the decline than otherivise in 
Italy. Much depends on the taste of the princes in this as, in every other matter, and 
unfortunately those of Italy are at present mere ciphers. The king of Naples knows 
no pleasures but those of the table, the seraglio, and the chace. For the latter enjoy- 
ment, the Pope has kindly given him a dispensation to hunt on Sundays. The Pope is 
debarred from pleasure by his office ; the grand Duke of Tuscany has some taste for 
plants, but more for a heavy purse ; his relation, the vice-king of Lombardy, is more a 
priest than a prince ; though he has some fondness for succulent exotics, of the common 
sorts of which, he has a large collection. The king of Sardinia is an old man, and a mere 
king Dei gratia. 

SuBSECT. 3. Italian Gardening in respect to its Products for the Kitchen and the 

Dessert. 

95. The Italian fruits are nearly those of the Romans, to which they have made but few 
additions, if we except the orange and the pine-apple. The orange is supposed to have 
been introduced between the time of Pliny and Palladius ; it is the fruit in which they 
excel, more fiom climate and soil than science. There are supposed to be nearly a hun- 
dred varieties of this fruit in Italy ; but in the orange-nurseries at Nervi, it is not easy 
to make out more than forty or fifty distinct sorts. These have mostly been obtained 
from seeds. They have not the Mandarine orange, nor some varieties of shaddock (C. 
decumana), which we possess. The most regular and systematic orange-orchards are at 
Nervi ; and the largest trees around Naples, at Sorenta, Amalphi, &c. The more rare 
sorts are kept in conservatories at Rome, and the largest house, and best collection, 
is that of the Borghese. At Florence and Milan, all the sorts required to be housed 
during winter, but at Hieres and Nice in France, and at Genoa and Nervi, they stand 
the common winters in the open air. 

96. The stone fruits in which they excel are the peach and cherry. There are above twenty varieties of 
peaches cultivated in the neighbourhood of Rome and Naples j and these fruits, grown on standard trees, 
as apples and pears are in this country, arrive at a very high degree of perfection. They have few sorts of 
apricots and nectarines, and not many plums ; but their Regina Claudia, or gages, are excellent. Cherries 
are everywhere excellent in Italy, especially in Tuscany. The Milan or Morella cherry, is noted for its 
prolific qualities, and for having a consistency and flavor somewhat resembling the Morchella esculcnta, or 
morel. 

97. The chief berry of Italy is the grape : their varieties are not so numerous as in France or 
Spain; and are, for the most part, the result of long growth on one soil and situation. Vineyard grapes 
are indifierent to eat in most parts of Lombardy, and in the best districts are equalled if not excelled by 
muscats, sweet-waters, muscadines, and other sorts grown in hot-houses in this country. The grape is, 
the only berry that thrives in Italy. It is not kept low as in France; but elevated on trellises near 
houses and in gardens (fig. 6.), and trained 

to long poles or trees in the fields. Collec- 
tions of gooseberries from Lancashire have 
been introduced at Leghorn, Genoa, and 
Moiiza; and, grown in the shade, they thrive 
moderately at the gardens of the latter 
place. Tlie currant, the raspberry, and the 
strawberry, tliough natives of the Alps 
and Apennines, do not thrive in the gar- 
dens, but are brought to market from the 
woods ; and so is the black mulberry, which 
is there cultivated for the leaves, as hardier 
than the white, and which Sigismondiat 
at one time considered as a fruit elsewhere 
unknown. 

98. Kernel-fruits in general, especially 
pears, are excellent in the north of Italy ; 
Lut indifferent in the warmer regions. 
Services in considerable variety abound in 
Piedmont, and part of Lombardy. 

99. The pine-apple is cultivated in a few 
places in Italy, but with little success, excepting at Florence and Milan. There are a few in the Royal 
gardens at Portici, but v/eak, yellow-leaved, and covered with insects. The few grown in the Pope's 
garden, and in one or two other villas near Rome, are little better. By far the best and greatest quantity 
are in the vice-royal gardens of Monza. The last king of Sardinia sent his gardener, Brochicri, to England 

C 4 




21 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



to study their culture. He returned, and in 1777 published a tract on them, with a plan of a pit for their 
reception; and in this way they are universally grown in Italy. Such, however, is the exhalation pro- 
duced in this dry climate from leaves so full of pores, as are those of the pine, and such the want of 
attention to supplying large pots and plenty of water, that the plants are generally of a pale sickly hue, 
and the fruit of very small size. 

100. Of the Melon tribe, the variety in Italy is endless, of every degree of flavor, from the richness of the 
cantaleupe, to the cool, icy, sub-acid taste of the citrouille or water-melon. Too little care is bestowed in 
selecting good fruits for seeds, and in preventing hybridism from the promiscuous intercourse with sur- 
rounding sorts of cucumis ; and, hence, seeds sent from Italy'to this country are little to be depended on, 
and generally produce varieties inferior to those of British growth. There are a few sorts of cucumbers, 
and though there are a great number of gourds and pompions cultivated, the sorts, or conspicuous 
varieties of both, are less numerous than in this country. Italian cucumbers are never so succulent as 
those grown in our humid frames by dung-heat. 

The love-apple, egg-plant, and capsicum, are extensively cultivated near Rome and Naples for the 
kitchen ; the fruit of the first attaining a larger size, and exhibiting the most grotesque forms. It is 
singular, that in Sicily this fruit, when ripe, becomes sour, and so unfit for use, that the inhabitants are 
supplied with it fromNaples. 

101. Want of de7na7id for the fi uits of the northern climates precludes their production. Were it other- 
wise, there can be no doubt means would soon be resorted to, to produce them in as great perfection as we 
do their fruits here ; all that is necessary, is to imitate our climate by abstracting or excluding heat, and 
supplying moisture ; but luxury in Italy has not yet arrived to the degree adequate to produce this effect. 

102. Of culinary vegetables, the Italians began with those left them by the Romans, and they added the 
potatoe to their number as soon as, or before, we did. They now possess all the sorts known in this country, 
and use some plants as salads, as the chiccory, ox-e)'e daisy, ruccola, or rocket {Brassica criica, L.), which 
are little used here. The turnip and carrot tribe, and the cabbage, savoy, lettuce, and radish, thrive best 
in the northern parts; but the potatoe grows well every where, and the Italian autumn is favorable to the 
growth of the cauliflowers, and broccolis, which are found of large size at Rome, Florence, and Bologna, 
in the months of September and October ; and very large at Milan, all the summer and autumn. The le- 
guminous tribe thrive every where ; but in some places the entire pod of the kidney-bean is so dry and 
hard, as to prevent its use as a substitute for peas. In short, though the Italians have the advantage over 
the rest of Lurope in fruits, that good Is greatly counterbalanced by the inferiority of their culinary vege- 
tables. Much to remedy the defect might be done by judicious irrigation, which in the south of Italy, and 
even in Lombardy, is so far necessary as to enter into the arrangement of every kitchen-garden. Shading, 
blanching, and change of seed will effect much ; but the value of good culinary vegetables is not known 
to the greater part of the wealthy Italians. 

103. Horticulture has made little progress in Italy. It is not in Italy, Simond observes, 
that horticulture is to be studied ; though nowhere is more produced from the soil by 
culture, manure, and water ; but forcing or prolonging crops is unknown ; every thing 
is sown at a certain season, and grows up, ripens, and perishes together. The variety is 
not great ; they have only three or four sorts of cabbage, not more of kidney-beans, and 
one of pea ; the red and white beet, salsify, scorzonera, chervile, sorrel, onion, schallot, 
Jerusalem artichoke, are in many parts unknown : but they have the cocomera, or water- 
melon, everywhere. In Tuscany and Lombardy, it is raised on dung, and then transplanted 
in the fields, and its sugary icy pulp forms the delight of the Italians during the whole 
month of August. Though they have walls round some gardens, they are ignorant of 
tlie mode of training trees on them. {Agr. Tosc. ) 

SuBSECT. 4. Italian Gardening, in reqtect to the i^lanting of Timber-trees and Hedges. 

104. The self-soivn forests of the Alps and Apenriines are 
the chief resources of the Italians for timber ; and timber- 
trees are chiefly propagated for parks, public walks, and 
lining the great roads. Tlie vine is still, in many places, 
trained on the poplar and elm {Jig. 7.); but in Tuscany 
and Lombardy, where the culture is deemed superior, the 
common maple {A. campestre) and flowering ash (Ormis 
europeBa) are preferred. [Sigismondi, Agr. Toscan. ; Chateau- 
vieux, Lettres, &c. 1812.) The most common tree for 
every other purpose is the narrow-leaved elm, which lines 
the road from Rome to Naples, for upwards of twenty miles 
together. Near Milan, the Lombardy poplar is a great deal 
used; but a late author, Gautieri {Bello Ivjlusso del Bosclii, &c. 1817,) argues in favor 
of cutting down, rather than planting in the Milanese plains. The finest avenues and 
public equestrian promenades in Italy are those around Milan and at Monza ; the trees 
are of various sorts, as the tulip-tree, platanus, lime, acacia, melia zederach, various oaks, 
chestnuts, beeches, &;c. ; they were planted in Beauharnois' time ; and such is the rapidity' 
of vegetation in this climate, that already the tulip-trees produce blossoms, and in seven 
years more the effect will be complete. The sorts are every where mixed, in order that 
the failure or defective growth of one species may have a chance of being compensated 
by the growth of that, or of those adjoining ; or that if a malady were to attack one sort 
of tree, it might not lead to continuous defalcation. Most of those trees were planted 
by Villaresi, who, before the late political changes, had constantly under his direction not 
fewer than three thousand men for public and royal improvements. 

105. The timber-trees of the native forests of Italy are chiefly oak, chestnut, and beech ; the 
undergrowths are of numerous species, including the arbutus, ilex, and myrtle. This 
class of forests skirts the Alpine mountains, and covers, in many places, the Apennine 
bills. In higher regions the larch abounds, and in sheltered dells the silver fir. The 




Book I. 



GARDENING IN ITALY. 



25 



stone and cluster pine arc confined to the lower regions, as the hills of Tuscany, tlie 
vales of Arno, Tiber, &c. 

106. Hedges are in general use in Italy, but are very imperfectly formed and managed. 
In Lombardy the hawthorn is a good deal used ; but in Tuscany, the States of the 
Church, and those parts of the Neapolitan territory which are hedged, the rhamnus j)ali~ 
urus is the prevailing plant, mixed, however, with the pyracantha, pomegranate, myrtle, 
asparagus retrofractus, and with wild roses, brambles, hazels, reeds, &c. seldom without 
gaps and lioles, open or filled up with dead bushes or reeds. The willow alone oft<.>n 
forms a hedge in Lombardy, where the shoots are valuable for tying up the vine. 

SuBSECT. 5. Italian Gardening, as empirically/ j)ractised. 

107. Gardens in Italy are common to the rural class of citizens. It is a general remark of 
travellers, and of acknowledged truth, that the state of cottage gardens indicates the state 
of the cottagers ; and those of Italy confirm the justness of the observation. Almost 
tJie only plants grown in them are gourds and Indian corn. In Tuscany and Lombardy 
some of the cabbage tribe, the kidney-bean, and occasionally the potatoe are to be seen, but 
rarely any thing else. The gardens of the farmers are somewhat better, especially in the 
northern districts, where they often contain patches of hemp, potatoes, parsnips, lettuce, 
and some flowers and fruit-trees. The gardens of small proprietors are still better 
stocked ; those of wealthy bankers and merchants are generally the best in Italy. ITie 
gardens of the more wealthy nobles are only superior by their extent, and are dis- 
tinguished as such, by having more or less of an accompanying park. The gardens of 
the convents are, in general, well cultivated, and rich in fruits and cuHnary vegetables, 
with some flowers and evergreens for church decorations. The priests assist in their 
cultivation, and some of these men are much attached to gardening. 

108. For commercial jmrjyoses gardening is chiefly practised by market-gardeners, who also 
grow flowers, act as orchardists, and often make wine. There are hardly any nurseries 
for trees and shrubs in Italy, if we except those for orange-trees at Nervi, and two small 
ones for general purposes at Milan. Those who form new gardens are chiefly supplied 
from France, or from their friends, or from private gardens ; most of which last sell 
whatever they have got to spare. 

109. The operative part of gardening in Italy is performed more by labourers than by regu- 
lar apprentices and journeymen ; and thus good practical gardeners are more the result 
of accident than of design. The great defect of both is the want of a taste for order and 
neatness. The Italians are particularly unskilful in the management of plants in pots, 
and especially exotics, which require protection by glass. These are put into houses 
with upright or slightly declining glass fronts, and opaque roofs ; there they remain 
during a winter of from three to five months ; want of light and air renders their leaves 
yellow and cadaverous ; and when they are taken out they are placed in the most exposed 
parts of the garden, often on parapets, benches, or stages. Here the sudden excess of 
light soon causes them to lose their leaves, which they have hardly time to regain before 
the period arrives for replacing them in the conservatory or hot-house. We know of few 
exceptions to this censure, excepting at Monza, and Caserta, where they are kept in 
winter, in glass-roofed houses, as in England, and placed out in summer under the shade 
of poplars or high walls. Dr. Oct. Tazetti, professor of rural economy at Florence, 
who lectures in a garden in which specimens are displayed of the leading sorts of Italian 
field and garden -culture, acknowledged the justness of this remark. 

110. The artists or professors are of two classes. First, The architects, who adopt the rural 
branch of their art, {architetti rustici,) and who give plans for parks, chiefly or almost 
entirely in the geometric style, to be executed under their direction, and that of the head 
gardener. Secondly, The artist-gardeners, (artisti giardinieri,) who are generally the 
gardeners, or directors of gardens, of some great establishment, public or private, and 
who give plans for gardens, chiefly in what is there considered the English manner, and 
for kitchen-gardens ; and as in England, either direct, by occasional visits, or undertake 
by contract, their execution and future occasional inspection. 

SuBSECT. 6, Italian Gardening, as a Science, and as to the Authors it has produced. 

111. By the establishment of professorships of botany and botanic gardens, in the sixteenth 
century, the Italians have materially contributed to the study of the vegetable kingdom, 
without some knowledge of the physiology of which, the practice of gardening must 
be entirely empirical. Malpighi is considered the father of vegetable physiology in Italy. 
It must be confessed, however, that the scientific knowledge of the Italians is chiefly 
confined to their professors and learned men : the practical gardener is yet too ignorant 
either to study or understand the subject; too much prejudiced to old opinions to re- 
ceive new ideas ; and, partly from climate, but chiefly from political and religious slavery, 
too indifferent to wish to be informed. Some exceptions must be made in favor of such 
gardeners as have been apprenticed in botanic and eminent gardens, or under intelligent 
Germans, who are here and there to be found superintending the gardens of the nobles. 



26 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part J:' 



The bastardising of the cucumis tribe, by proximity, and the striking phenomena of the 
male and female hemp, have introduced some vague ideas of the sexuality of vegetables ; 
but the use of leaves, by far the most important knowledge which a gardener can possess, 
seems no where understood by ordinary master-gardeners. Grafting and layering are 
practised without any knowledge of the effects of the returning sap, or of the exclusion 
of air and light. Nothing can be worse than the practice of budding orange-trees at 
Nervi ; to be convinced of which, it is only necessaiy to compare the plants imported 
from thence, with those brought from Malta or Paris. The culture of the vine, the olive, 
and the fig, belongs to the rural economy of the country ; that of the vine is abundantly 
careless, and the practice of the caprification of the tig, though laughed at by the pro- 
fessors, is still followed in various places near Rome and Naples. 

112. Religions and lunar observances are still followed by the gardeners in most parts of 
Italy. With the Romans it was customary before any grand operation of agriculture 
was undertaken, to consult or invoke the god of that department, as of Flora, Pomona, 
&c. and to pay attention to the age of the moon and other signs. A good deal of this 
description of ceremony is still carried on in general economy, by the priests and 
farmers, and gardening has not yet entirely thrown off the saine badge of ignorance 
and religious slavery. Many gardeners regulate their sowings of kitchen-crops by the 
moon, others call the priests to invoke a blessing on large breadths of any main crop ; 
some, on minor occasions, officiate for themselves, and we have seen a poor market- 
gardener at Savonna muttering a sort of grace to the virgin over a bed of new-sown 
onions. Father Clarici, a priest who published Istona e Culture delle Piante, &c. so 
late as 1726, countenances most of these practices, and describes many absurd and foolish 
ceremonies used for procuring good crops, and destroying insects. 

113. Of the Italian authors on gardenijig, few or none are original. Filippo Re has 
written a great many books, and may be compared to our Bradley. Silvo Sigismondi, 
of Milan, has written a work on English gardening, resembling that of Hirschfield, of 
which it is, in great part, a translation. Clarici is a very copious writer on culinary 
gardening, and the culture of flowers ; and the most approved writer on the orange 
tribe is Gallesio of Savonna. 

Sect. II. Of the Revival, Frog7-ess, and present State of Gardeniyig in Holland aiid 

Flanders. 

114. Gardening ivas first brought to a high degree «/* ^)er/ec^to?i Holland and the 
Nethei'lajids. The crusades, in the twelfth century, are generally supposed to have 
excited a taste for building and gardening in the north of Europe. But from Ste- 
phanus and Gesner, it appears that a taste for plants existed among the Dutch, even 
previously to this period. It is to be regretted th.at scarcely any materials are to be 
found from which to compose such a history as this interesting circumstance requires. 
Harte (^Essays on Agriculture) conjectures that the necessities arising from the original 
barrenness of the soil (that of Flanders having been formerly like what Arthur Young de- 
scribes Norfolk to have been nearly a century ago), together with a certain degree of 
liberty, the result of the remoteness of the situation from kings and priests, may have 
contributed to improve their agriculture ; and that the wealth acquired by the commercial 
men of Holland, then the most eminent in the world, enabled them to indulge in 
countiy-houses and gardens, and to import foreign plants. To this we may add, 
that the climate and soil are singularly favorable for horticulture and floriculture, the 
two departments in which the Dutch are most eminent. 

SuBSECT. 1. Dutch Gardening, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

115. The Dutch are getierally considered as having a particular taste in gardening, yet 
their gardens, Hirschfield observes, appear to differ little in design from those of the 
French. The characteristics of both are symmetry and abundance of ornaments. The 
only difference to be remarked is, that the gardens of Holland are more confined, more - 
covered with frivolous ornaments, and intersected with still, and often muddy pieces of 
water. The gardens of Ryswick, Houslaerdyk, and Sorgvliet were, in the beginning 
of the last century, the most remarkable for geometrical beauty of form, lichness in trees 
and plants, and careful preservation. It is singular, our author observes, that the Dutch 
are so fond of intersecting their gardens with canals and ditches of stagnant water, 
which, so far from being agreeable, are muddy and ugly, and fill the air with unwhole- 
some vapours. Yet they cany this taste, which has no doubt originated in the nature 
of their country, to the East Indies; and the numerous country houses belonging to 
the Dutch settlement in Batavia are all furnished with gardens and canals like those 

in the neighbourhood of Amsterdam ; as if to render the unwholesome air of that 
country still more dangerous. Every field is there crossed by a canal ; and houses on 
eminences are surrounded at great expense by moats and draw-bridges like those of the 
Hague. Such is the influence of habit, and the lo^-e of coimtry ; and, therefore, how-. 



Book 1. 



GARDENING IN HTOLLAND. 



27 



ever at variance with local circumstances, and sometimes even with utiHty, it cannot be 
altogether condemned. 

116. Grnss!/ slopes and green terraces and walks are more common in Holland than in any 
other country of the continent, because the climate and soil are favorable for turf; and 
these verdant slopes and mounds may be said to form, with their oblong canals, the 
characteristics of the Dutch style of laying out grounds. 

117. Hague, the Versailles and Kensington of Holland, and in fact themost magnificent village in Europe, 
contains two royal palaces with their gardens in the ancient style. Evelvn, in 1641, describes them as 
" full of ornament, close walks, statues, marbles, grottoes, fountains, and "artificial music;" and of the 
village he says, " beautiful lime-trees are set in rows before every man's house." Sir J. E. Smith {^Toitr 
on Ihc Continent, vol. i.^ described them in 17S3, the one garden as full of serpentine and the other as full 
of straiglit lines. In 1814, these gardens had lost much of their former beauty, partly from age and decay, 
but principally from neglect. Ja.co\> ^Travels in Germany'' , in the same vear, found them formal and 
crowded with high trees. Xeill, in 1817, found in them nothing becoming royalty. 

lis. At Broeck and Alkmaar the ancient style is still maintained 
in its puriry in the villa gardens. 31. Seterveldfs garden near Utrecht 
is also a carefully preseryed specimen. Here the grand divisions of the 
garden are made by tall thick hedges of beech, hornbeam, and oak, 
and the lesser by yew and box. There are ayenue walks, and berceau 
walks, with openings in the shape of windows in the sides, verdant 
houses, rustic seats [^fig. 8.\ canals, ponds, grottoes, fountains, statues, 
and other devices ;" and," adds the horticultural tourist, "we were 
struck with this circumstance, that every thing in this garden has its 
most exact counterpart : if there be a pond, or walk, or statues, or a 
group of evergreens, on one side ; the same may, with confidence, 
be predicted on the other side of the garden ; so that the often quoted 
couplet of Pope, ' Grove nods at grove, &c.' can no where be better 
exemplified." -^Hort. Tour, £49.} 

119. At Brussels, among other curiosities, Evelvn mentions a hedge 
of Jets d'eau, lozenge-fashion, surrounding a parterre ; and " the park 
within the walls of the city furnished with whatever mav render it 
agreeable, melancholy, and "country-like." It contained a stately 
heronry, divers springs of water, a'rtificial cascades, walks, grottoes', 
statues, and root-houses." This park was considerably enlarged some 
years ago ; the then decayed root-houses, grottoes, and more curious water-works removed, and the 
whole diyided by broad sanded paths, and decorated with good statues, seats, fountains, and cafes for 
refreshment. 





120. The modern, or JSnglisJi style of gardening. Sir 
J. E. Smith informs us, was "quite the fashion" in 
Holland, in 17S3; but neither the surface of the 
ground, the confined limits of territorial property, nor 
the general attention to frugality and economy, are 
favorable to this style. Some attempts, on a small 
scale, may be seen from the canals, but we know 
of no extensive parks and pleasure-grounds in this 
manner. 

121. An example of a Flejnish garden in theEnglish 
style {fig. 9.) is given by Kraft; it is of small size, 
but varied by the disposition of the trees, rustic 
ieats, and raised surfaces; and surrounded, as Dutch 
md Flemish gardens usually arc, by a canal. It was 
laid out by Charpenticr, gardener to the senate of 
France, in the time of Napoleon. 

122. The villa of .1/. Bertrand of Bruges is thus noticed in the Caledonian Horticidtural 
Tour : — 

It has extensive grounds, and is flat, but ivell varied by art. \Miere the straight walks cross each 
other at right angles, the centre of the point of intersection is shaped into an oblong parterre, resem- 
bling a basket of flowers, and containing showy geraniums in pots, and gaudy flowers of a more hardy 
kind planted in the earth. 

So:i:e tilings are in very bad taste. At every resting-place, some kind of conceit is provided for sur- 
prising the yisitant : if he sit down, it is ten to one but the seat is so contrived as to sink under him ; 
if he enter the grotto, or approach the summer-house, water is squirted from concealed or di.^guised 
fountains, and lie does not find it easy to escape a wetting. The dial is provided with several gnomons, 
calculated to show the corresponding hour at the chief capital cities of Europe 3 and also with a lens so 
placed, that during sunshine, the priming of a small cannon falls under its focus just as the sun reaches 
the meridian, when of course the cannon is discharged. - 

T/ie principal ornnment of the place consists in a piece of water, over which a bridge is thrown ; at one 
end of the bridge is an artiticial cave fitted up like a lion's den, the head of a lion cut in stone peeping 
from the entrance. Above the caye is a pagoda, which forms a summer-house three stories high. At 
the top is a cistern which is filled by means of a forcing-pump, and which supplies the mischievous fountains 
alrendy mentioned. 

Tlic'lirtle lavcns near the mansion-house are decorated with many small plants of the double pome- 
granate, :-\vcct bay, laurustinus, and double myrtle, planted in large'ornamented flower-pots and in tubs. 
These plants are all trained with a stem three or four feet high, and with round bushy heads after the 
manner of pollard willows in English meadows. The appearance produced by a collection of such plants 
is inconceivably stifi, to an eye accustomed to a more natural mode of training. Eight American aloes 
{Agave Americana", also in huge Dutch flower-pots, finish the decoration of the lawn, and it must be 
confessed, harmonize verv well with the formal evergreens just described. A very good collection of 
orange-trees in tubs was disposeil along the sides of the walks in the flower-garden : two of the myrtle- 
leaved variety were excellent specimens. All of these were pollarded in the style of the evergreen plants. 

The soil of' the place, being a mixture of fine vegetable mould, resembling surface peat-earth, with a 
considerable proportion of white sand, seems naturally congenial to the growth of American shrubs ; and. 



28 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



indeed, rhododendrons, magnolias, and azaleas thrive exceedingly. In the open border of the flower- 
garden we saw dahlias in great vigour and beauty. 

Several kinds of tender plants were plunged in the open border for summer, particularly the Peruvian 
heliotrope {Heliotropium Peruvianum), the specimens of which were uncommonly luxuriant, and, being 
now in full flower, spread their rich fragrance all around. The European heUotrope {H. Europceum) is 
likewise not uncommon in the flower-borders. 

In the fruit-garden we first saw pear and apple trees trained en pyramide or en quenouille e. pre- 
serving only an upright leader, and cutting in the lateral branches every year. 

The hot-houses cover the north side of the fruit-garden. In the centre is a stove or hot-house for the 
most tender plants ; on each side of this is a green-house for sheltering more hardy exotics during 
winter ; and at each extremity is a house partly occupied with peach-trees, and partly with grape vines. 
In the space of ground before the houses are ranges of pine pits and melon frames. One frame is dedi- 
cated to a collection of cockscombs {Cclosia critata), and these certainly form the boast of M. Bertrand's 
garden ; they are of the dwarfish variety, but large or strong of their kind, and in brilliancy and variety 
of colour, they can scarcely be excelled. 

123. The villa of M. Meulemeester and the place of Marieleerne, in the neighbourhood 'of Ghent, are 
described, but they were both in very bad order, though tolerably laid out, and having a good many hot- 
houses, 

124. The villa ofM. Hopsomere is remarkable for three acres covered with groups of American plants of 
great size and in the highest degree of luxuriance. An irregular piece of water expands itself among the 
groups, and forms numerous bays, islets, sinuosities, &c. The surface is generally of turf, but in some 
places in earth, with edgings of heath to the walks; the walks are without gravel; and the gardener, as in the 
other places visited, was wretchedly habited, without shoes or stockings, and could not read. {Hort. 
Tour, 74.) 

125. The seat of Madame VUain Quatorze (Jig. 10.), like most of the others mentioned, 
and villas in general in this country, is interspersed vv^ith water, and the boundary of the 
demesne, instead of being a wall, hedge, or belt of plantation, is a broad canal, over 
which of course is seen the adjacent country. The grounds are of considerable extent, 
and include a farm, pleasure-ground, kitchen and flower garden. A plan of a part of 
the grounds round the house has been given in the horticultural tour, in which the fol- 
lowing objects are indicated : — 



A hot-house for exotic plants, (a) 

An aviary with shrubs for the birds to perch upon, (i) 
Gardener's room, (c) 

Green-house. Entrance by flight of wooden steps. {</) 
Stove for exotic plants, (e) 
Dry stove. (/) 

Picture-gallery of a considerable height. It has an arched 
roof, and is lighted from the top. {g) 
Dwelling-house, (/i) 

A large mirror is placed at the end of the passage. Lamps 
are suspended from the ceilings of the house, gallery, green- 
house, and stoves, at different places (+). When lighted, 
the whole line, from the one extremity to the other, must be 
reflected by the mirror. (0 



Grape and peach' houses. Peach trees are planted at the 
back wall of each, and vines at the front, {/c, k) 
Pits for green-house and stove plants. (/, /, /, /) 
Pits for melons, cucmnbers, and o'.her tender plants, (m m) 
Large bam. (n) 
Stable and cow-houses, (o) 
Part of the kitchen-garden. (;;) 
Part of the pine-apple stoves. (7) 

(-om fields, and a crop of Indian com, wheat, hemp, &c. (r) 
The principal floor of the house and the picture gallery are 
upon the same level, but there is a rise ot a few stei)S to tlie 
Hoors of the stove and grreen-house, which are elevated above 
the ground more than nine feet. 




Ii " II 


L ..... . pt^fe^Url^ 


1 J: 1 


mmUlmrTil i |SJ- • ' 






E 








11: 


















1 














126. The place of M. Smetx is the finest near Antwerp. It was laid out in 1752 partly in the Dutch and 
partly in the English taste, and contains at present, scenes of tonsile evergreens, vistas, canals, lakes, 
secret water-works, caves, tOmbs, a lawn with a flock of stone sheep, a shepherd and dogs, dwarfs, a 
drunkard, and other paltry contrivances. There are, however, good span-roofed hot-hou.ses, rustic 
seats, fine exotic trees, especially the purple beech (which here seeds freely, and comes purple from the 
seed), catalpa and liquidamber, fine collections of dahlias, asclepias tuberosa, and lilium superbum, 
in extensive groups ; and on the whole " as many natural beauties as can be expected in a flat 
country, and instances of good taste and judicious management more than counterbalanced by those 
of an opposite description." {Hort. Tour, 110.) 

127. The villa of M. Caters de Wolfe near Antwerp is remarkable for two elegant curvilinear hot-houses, 
erected by Messrs. Bailey of London, and glazed with plate glass. Their effect surpa'sses any thing 
of the kind on the continent. A rich collection of the choicest exotics has lately been procured from 
the Hackney nursery. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN HOLLAND. 



20 



128. T/ie gardens round Rotterdam are generally many feet below the level of the canal. On the 
Cingle, a public road which surrounds the city are, a continued series of garden-houses nearly a mile in 
extent; these miniature villas {lust hvfa) being separated from each other only by wooden partitions, which 
are generally neatly painted. To these the citizens with their wives retire on Sunday to smoke and take 
coffee. {Uort. Tour, &c. 127.) 

129. The palace-garden at Haerlevi formerly occupied by King Louis, and originally the property of the 
celebrated banker, Hope, is in no respect remarkable as to design ; but pines are grown there better 
than in most gardens in Holland, and strawberries are successfully forced. 

130. The Bug d' Are mberg's seat uearEnghien, like many others in Flanders and Holland, was ruined during 
the excesses of the French revolution ; but the Duke is now restoring it, and has begun with the gardens 
rather than with the house. Extensive hot-houses are erected and many new fruit-trees planted. The finest 
part of the park was not injured, and the horticultural tourists visited the celebrated temple of the grande 
etoile. " This temple is of a heptangular shape, and at the angles on every side are two parallel columns 
placed about a foot apart. From the seven large sides proceed as many broad, straight, and long avenues 
of noble trees, affording rich prospects of the distant country in all these directions ; and from the seven 
angles, and seen between the columns, proceed an equal number of small and narrow alleys, each ter- 
minated by some statue, vase, bust, or other ornament. The temple is surrounded by a moat lined with 
polished marble. The old orange-grove is situated at the end ot the avenue. It is one hundred and 
seventy feet long, and twenty-seven feet wide, and contains one hundred and eight orange-trees in tubs, 
many of them, as is the case in different old family-seats of the Netherlands, presents from the kings of 
Spain 200, 300, and 400 years ago. The trees shov/ straight stems of six or eight feet, and globular 
heads, from which, according to continental practice, protruding shoots and blossoms are pinched off as 
soon as they appear, for culinary and perfumery purposes. {Hort. Tour, 324. 372.) 

SuESECT. 2. Dutch Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and Plants of 

Ornament. 

131. The taste for fowers so prevalent in Holland, is thought to have originated with 
their industry early in the twelfth century, the study of flow ers being in some degree 
necessary', as affording patterns for the ornamental linen and lace manufacturers. Lobel, 
in the preface to his Histoiredes Plantes, 1756, states, that the taste for plants existed among 
the Flemings during the crusades, and under the dukes of Burgundy ; that they brought 
home plants from tlie Levant, and the two Indies ; that exotics were more cultivated 
there than any where else ; and that their gardens contained more rare plants than 
all the rest of Europe besides, till, during the civil wars which desolated this country 
in the sixteenth century, many of their finest gardens were abandoned or destroyed. 
Holland, Deleuze observes, had at the end of the seventeenth century, a crowd of dis- 
tinguished botanists : and was then, as during the century preceding, the country the 
most devoted to gardening. (Discours sur Vetat ancien et moderne de V Agriculture et 
de la Botanique dans les Pays Pas. Par Van Hulthem, 1817 j Extrait du Discours pro- 
nonce, ^c, a Gand, par M. Cornelissen, 1817.) 

132. The botanic garden of Leyden was begun in 1577, thirty-one years after that of Pa- 
dua. It was confided to Cluyt, a celebrated botanist, afterwards to Bontius, and in 1592, 
L'Ecluse, from Frankfort, was appointed professor of botany. In 1599 they constructed 
a green-house, and, in 1633, the catalogue of the garden contained 1104 species. At 
this time the magistrates, the learned men, and the wealthy citizens were occupied in fa- 
cilitating the progress of botany, and the introduction of new plants. A ship never left 
the port of Holland, Deleuze observes, the captain of which was not desired to procure, 
wherever he put into harbour, seeds and plants. The most distinguished citizens, Be- 
verning, Favel, Simon de Beaumont, and Rheede, filled their gardens with foreign plants, 
at great expense, and had a pleasure in communicating those plants to the garden of 
Leyden. This garden, in Boerhaave's time, who, when professor of botany there, neg- 
lected nothing to augment its riches and reputation, contained [Index alter Plant. 1720.) 
upwards of 6000 plants, species and varieties. Boerhaave here exemplified a principle, 
wliich he laid down (Elementa Chemia) for adjusting the slope of the glass of hot-houses, 
so as to admit the greatest number of the sun's rays, according to the latitude of the 
place, &c. These principles were afterwards adopted by Linnaeus at Upsal, and by most 
of the directors of botanic gardens in Europe. It was in this garden, about the begin- 
ning of the eighteenth century, that the geranias and ficoidiae, and other ornamental 
exotics were first introduced from the Cape. The garden of Leyden was visited by Sir 
J. E. Smith in 1786 {Tour, &c. vol. i. p. 11.), who observes, that it had been much en- 
larged within the last forty years, and was now about as large as the Chelsea garden. 
In 1814 it appeared rather neglected; many blanks existed in the general collection of 
hardy plants, and the hot-houses were much out of repair. It contains, however, some 
curious old specimens of exotics, as Clusius's palm (Chamerops humilis), twenty feet 
high, and upwards of 225 years old ; a curious ash, and various other trees and shrubs, 
planted by Clusius. A new garden, in addition to the old one, and a menagerie, are 
in progress. In this new garden the walks are laid with a mixture of peat-moss and 
tanners' bark reduced to powder. Leyden, Deleuze informs us, was, for more than fifty 
years, the only city in Holland where there was a botanic garden ; but before the middle 
of the seventeenth century, they were established in all the provinces. 

133. The botanic gardens of Amsterdam and Groningen merit particular notice The former was under 
the direction of the two Commelins, John and Caspar, and was the first garden in Europe that procured 
a specimen of the coffee-tree. A seedling of this tree was sent to Paris in 171-1. Two seedlings from this 
plant were sent to Martinique in 1726, and these the Abbe Raynal observes {Hist, de Commerce, tome xvi. 
ch. 20.) produced all the coffee-trees now cultivated in the French colonies. This garden still contains 
many remarkable specimens of Cape and Japan plants. [Jlort. Tour, 218.) 



so 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Paut I. 



134. The garden of Grontngen was begun by Henry Hunting, a zealous botanist and learned man, wlio 
had spent eight years travelling in the different countries of Europe, establishing correspondences between 
botanists and cultivators. He spent the greatest part of his fortune upon his garden; but, in 1641, the 
states of Groningen, thinking so useful an establishment ought to be under tlie protection of the republic, 
purchased it, and appointed him [)rofessor. The catalogue of this garden, published in 1646, contains 
about 1500 plants, without comprehending more than 600 varieties ; 100 of pinks, and 150 of tulips. 
Henry Munting was succeeded by his son, Abraham, esteemed for his posthumous work, Phytographia 
Curiosa. Both these gardens are still kept up, but without that enthusiastic ardor which distinguished 
the citizens of Holland, when imder more auspicious political circumstances than they are at thfe present 
time. 

135. The Antwerp garden was formerly one of considerable repute in the Low Countries. In lo/ 9 a cata- 
logue of this garden was given by Dodoens {Floi-iim et Coronarium arb. Hist.) which contained a consider- 
able number of plants, including a great variety of tulips and hyacinths. 

136. The garden of Cliffcj-d, near Haerlem, of which Linneeus published the histon,', was the most cele- 
brated in 1737. Clifford got all the new plants from England, and corresponded with the botanists of every 
country. Boerhaave gave him the plants of the Leyden garden ; Siegesbeck sent him those of Russia ; Haller, 
those o'f the Alps; and Burman, Roell, Gronovi'us, and Miller, sent him portions of the seeds which they 
received from different parts of the world. This garden had four magnificent hot-houses ; one for the 
plants of the Levant and the south of Europe, one for Africa, one for India, and one for America. 

137. The botanic garden of Utrecht was founded in 1630, and contains several palms and other exotics, 
brought there at that time. It is still kept in tolerable order, but displavs no kind of scientific arrange- 
ment. {Hort. Tour, 244.) 

138. The botanic garden of Ghent, established by Buonaparte in 1797, is, in the present day, the richest 
and best garden of the Netherlands. The area is about three acres : it has a considerable collection of 
hardy herbaceous plants, arranged after the Linnsean method ; a pleasure-ground, in which the trees and 
shrubs are distributed in natural families, and so as to combine picturesque effect ; an excellent rosary, 
chiefly trained in the tree manner; and a range of houhouses, in part with glass roofs. In the pleasure- 
groun'd the busts of eminent botanists are distributed with good effect ; and on the large boxes of palms, 
and other exotics, are marked the name of the donor, or the year in which the plant or tree was originated, 
or introduced to the garden. On the whole, it is more complete than any garden we have seen south of 
the Rhine, excepting that of Paris. 

139. The royal botanic gai-den of Brussels has a good collection of orange-trees ; but in all other respects 
is of a very inferior description. 

140. The private botanic gardens of Van Schenen and Dr. Daaler, at Antwerp, are mentioned with ap- 
probation in the Horticultural Tour, (p 121.) 

141. The botanic garden of M.Pannentier, mayor of Enghien, is not only the richest in the low countries, 
but, perhaps, in Europe. In 1817, Neill and his companions considered it as only exceeded in exotics by 
the collection at Kew, or at Messrs. Loddiges. 

142. Festivals of Flora are held twice a year, at midsummer and midwinter, by the 
Agricultural Society of Ghent, and others. The plants are exhibited for three days. " By 
a pleasing fiction, the plants alone are said to be comjietitors, and the successful plant is 
said to be crowned." The reward is an honorary medal. (Hort. Tour, Sec. p. 5-21.) 

143. Florists' Jloivers began to be objects of commerce in Holland, about the beginning of 
the seventeenth century. Double flowers were then first noticed, or brought into repute, 
which may be said to have created a new aera in gardening, and certainly laid the found- 
ation in Holland of a considerable commerce : — the more valuable, as it is totally inde- 
pendent of political or civil changes, and founded on the peculiar qualities of the soil and 
climate for growing bulbous roots. The flcrimania, as it is termed by the Frencli, ex- 
isted in the highest degree among the Dutch, from the beginning to the middle of the 
seventeenth centurj-. Many noted instances are on record, of the extravagant sums given 
for flowers possessing certain qualities agreed on by florists as desiderata, and established 
about this time as canons of beauty. Hirschfield states, tliat in the register of the city of 
Alkmaar, in the year 1637, they sold publicly, for the benefit of the Orphan Hospital, 
120 tulips, with their oflfsets, for 9000 florins ; and that one of those flowers, named the 
Viceroy, was sold for 4203 florins. "When we consider the value of money at this remote 
period, these sums appear enormous, a florin at that titiie in Holland (Anderson s His^ 
tory of Ccjnmerce) being the representative of nearly an English bushel of wheat. 

144. The commercial fower-gardcns or bloe?nesferies of Haerlem have long been the most 
celebrated for bulbous-rooted flowers. The name of Van Eden has been noted for upwards 
of a century; and there are now four gardens occupied by diflferent members of this 
family, celebrated florists. That of Voorhelm is of equal antiquity and celebrity. Of 
the gardens of both families, and of several others, accounts will be foimd in the Horti- 
cultural Tour. The most extensive and best m.anaged is said to be tliat of Schneevoght, 
lately a partner with Voorhelm. 

145. The flonmanists, Bosc observes, were much more numerous towards the middle 
of the last century than at this moment (1809 . " One does not now hear of twenty 
thousand francs being given for a tulip ; of a florist depriving himself of his food, in order 
to increase the number and variety of his anemonies, or passing entire days in admiring 
the colours of a ranunculus, the grandeur of a hyacinth, or trembling, lest the breatli of 
an over-curious admirer should hurt the bloom of an auricula." The general price of 
choice bulbs now, it is observed in the Horticultural Tour, varies from three to ten 
guilders (a guild. = I5. Sd.) ; a few kinds are valued at from ten to twenty guilders ; 
and the most select, new, and consequently rare, varieties, seldom fetch more than from 
twenty to 50 guilders. Among the most precious at this time are, the Universal Con- 
queror, Pompe Funebre, and Charbonier Noir, with yellow groimds ; Louis X VL and 
Toilette Sup^rieure, with wliite grounds, and the price of them is one hundred guilders 
{£S 2s. 6d.) a bulb. (Hort. Tour. jp. 195.) 



Book 1. 



GARDENING IN HOLLAND. 



31 



SuBSECT. 3. Dutch Gardening in respect to the Culture of Fruits and CulinarTj Vegetables. 

146. The Dutch and Flemings are eminent as fruit-gardeners, but, as Harte observes, 
they are better operators than writers, and having at the same time a good deal of the 
spirit of gens de ?nelier, we have almost nothing to offer in the way of historical inform- 
ation. Those gardens, which Gesner and Stephanus inform us were so richly stocked 
with flowers early in the sixteenth century, would, no doubt, be equally so with fruits 
and legumes. One of the earliest books on the horticulture of the Low Countries, is 
that of Van Osten, published about the end of the seventeenth century. They appear at 
that time to have had all the fruits, now in common cultivation, in considerable variety, 
excepting the pine-apple, which Miller informs us was introduced about that' time by Le 
Cour, of Leyden, from the West Indies, although not mentioned by Van Osten or Com- 
melin. It is generally said, that about the same period all the courts in Europe were supplied 
with early fruits from Holland. ^B^nard admits (quoted in Repertory of Arts, 1802,) that 
this was the case with the court of France, so late as the reign of Louis the Fourteenth. 
Miller informs us that Le Cour paid great attention to gardening, and especially to the 
culture of wall-fruits, and that he tried the effects of different kinds of walls and modes 
of training. Speechly, early in the eighteenth century, made a tour in that country, 
chiefly to observe the Dutch mode of cultivating the pine and the grape ; they forced, he 
informs us {Tr. on the Vine), chiefly in pits and low houses, and produced ripe grapes 
of the sweet-water kind in March and April. The Low Countries are celebrated for 
good varieties of the apple and pear. The supplies of these articles sent to the markets 
of Brussels, Antwerp, and Amsterdam, are equal, if not beyond any thing of the kind to 
be met with elsewhere in Europe. The climate of Flanders suits these fruits ; that of 
Holland is rather adverse to flavor, from its moisture ; but peaches, pines, and melons 
attain a larger size than in France. Tournay is so much celebrated for its pears, that the 
Ghent Society, in 1816, offered a prize for " the best explanation of the causes of the 
superiority in size, beauty, and flavor, of the pears grown at Tournay." (Hort. Tour, 333.) 
Forcing in pits and frames, is carried to great perfection in Holland, and melons and 
pines are, at the present time, sent to the London and Paris markets, and sold for very 
moderate prices. 

147. The culinary vegetables of Holland are l)rought to great perfection. All the plants 
of culture, and especially the cabbage tribe, turnip, onion, carrot, &c. are grown to 
a large size, and very succulent. Of plants edible in their natural state, as the parsley 
and other herbs, and the fungi, they have excellent varieties. For leguminous crops the 
climate is sometimes too moist. Brussels is noted for the greens or sprouts, which bear 
the name of that town ; and Van Mons informs us {^Hort. Trans, iii. 197.) that they are 
mentioned in the market regulations of that city so early as 1213. The Caledonian 
Tourists, in 1817, found the markets of Ghent and Amsterdam better supplied with 
culinary vegetables than any in Holland. The cauliflower was excellent. 'l"he Dutch 
also excel in asparagus, carrots, and purslane. 

148. Forcing-houses have been long in use in Holland, but the date of their introduc- 
tion we have not been able to learn. It is singular that they are not once mentioned in 
the early editions of Van Osten, published from 1689 to 1750 ; but Adanson [Families 
des Plantes, Preface,) writing about the latter period, speaks of the hot-houses of the 
Dutch in terms which evidently refer to forcing-houses. Orangeries, and botanic houses, 
we have seen, (133.) were in use so early as 1599. Within the last twenty years the demand 
for forced productions has greatly diminished in Holland. Summer, or what are called 
main crops, are now chiefly attempted, both in public and private gardens ; but after the 
annexation of Holland to France, and since its subsequent union with Flanders, tlie 
spirit for enjoyments of even this sort, has declined with the means of procuring them. 

SuBSECT. 4. Dutch Gardening, in respect to the planting of Timber-trees and Hedges. 

149. Planting is not very general in Holland. In a country so thickly peopled, and 
so conveniently situated in respect to marine commerce, it is not likely that much 
ground would be devoted to merely useful plantations. In the more inland parts of 
Flanders, there are natural forests and extensive copses ; these have been, and continue 
to be kept up, and in some cases increased in extent by planting land too poor for culti- 
vation. In Radcliff's Agricultural Survey of that country, some account will be found 
of their management. We observed, in 1819, some belts and clumps forming, in the 
English manner, on some waste lands near Cambray, and that the Duke of Wellington was 
planting on his estate at Waterloo. Between Aranagoen and Rhenen, a tract of land, 
several miles in extent, and no better in quality than Bagshot-heath, is planted with 
Scotch firs, Weymouth pines, beech, and birch; and many hundred acres adjoining 
have been sown with acorns for copse, and enclosed with thorn hedges. 

150. Avenues, hedge-rows, and ozier-holts, are the principal plantations of the Dutch. 
In tliese they excel, and the country in consequence resembles a series of gardens. 



32 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Pari I. 



AvenuS^ trees, chiefly elms and oaks, are trained for eight or ten years in the nursery , 
re]Deatedly removed so as to become furnished with numerous fibrous roots, and pruned 
so as to have clean smooth stems from ten to fifteen feet high. Avenues, being public 
property, are under the care of proper officers. Judging from the vigorous growth 
of the trees, and the manner in which they are pruned, these officers seem to under- 
stand their business, and to do their duty. In Rotterdam, on the quays, are perhaps the 
finest trees in Holland : they are narrow-leaved elms, upwards of fifty feet high, with 
clear stems of twenty-five feet, and upwards, of a century old. At the Hague are re- 
markably fine Hmes in the Mall, on the road to Scheveling ; and oaks, elms, and beeches, 
round the palace called the House in the Wood, The hornbeam is a very common 
plant for the garden-hedges. Every plant in the row or hedge is trained with an 
upright stem, and the side shoots are shorn so closely, that we often find hedges of six 
or eight feet high, not more than eighteen inches wide at base, contracted to six 
inches wide at top. These hedges receive their summer shearing in July, by which time 
scarlet runners are ready to shoot up from the garden side of their base, which in the 
course of two months, cover the hedge with their fresh, verdure and brilliant blossoms, 
and present a good crop in Octol)er and the beginning of November. The Dutch have 
also very excellent field-hedges of birch and' willow, as well as of all the usual hedge- 
plants, and the gardeners are particularly dexterous at cutting, training, and shearing them. 
The deep moist grounds on the banks of their estuaries are particularly favorable for 
the growth of the willow, and the hoops of two years' growth from the Dutch willow (a 
variety of Salix alba, with a brownish bark,) are in great esteem in commerce. Their 
coraiuon basket willows {S. viminialis) are also excellent, 

SuBSECT. 5. Dutch Gardening, as empiricalli/ practised. 

151. Happily the use of gardens is iinivej'sal in the Netherlands j and of the Dutch and 
Flemings it may be truly said in the words of Lord Temple, " that gardening has been 
the common favorite of public and private men ; a pleasure of the greatest, and a care of 
the meanest, and indeed an employment and a possession, for which no man there is 
too high nor too low." The gardens of the cottagers in these countries are undoubtedly 
better managed and more productive than those of any other country ; no man who has 
a cottage is without a garden attached ; often small, but rendered useful to a poor family 
by the high degree of culture given to it. Every available particle of matter capable of act- 
ing as manure is assiduously collected, and thrown into a neat ridge, cone, or bed, which 
is turned over frequently ; and when sufficiently fermented and ameliorated, applied to 
the soil. The plants in general cultivation in the cottage-gardens ai-e the cabbage tribe, 
including Brussels sprouts, the white beet for the leaves and stalks, the parsnip, carrot, 
yellow and white turnip, potatoe, the pea, bean, and kidney-bean ; the apple, pear, and 
currant, and in some places, the vine trained over the cottage, are the fruits ; and double 
stocks, rockets, wall-flowers, pinks, violets, roses, and honey-suckles, the leading flowers 
and plants of ornament. It is almost unnecessary to add, that the gardens of the trades- 
men, farmers, citizens, private gentlemen, and princes, rise in gradation, in extent, riches, 
and high keeping. 

152. The 2^rincipal nurseries, Jlorists^ gardens, and marhet-gardens are in the neigh- 
bourhood of Amsterdam, Haerlem, and Antwerp. These gardens formerly supplied 
trained trees, vines, and all the most valuable plants to Britain, and other parts of 
Europe ; and the florists still continue to monopolise the commerce of bulbous roots. 
Great part of the fruit-trees sent by London and Wise from their nursery at Brompton 
Park, in tlie beginning of the 18th century, were previously imported from Holland; 
many of them reared in large wicker-baskets, were sent over in that state, and produced 
fruit the first year after final planting. Justice (^Brit. Gard. Dir.) gives credit to the 
Dutch nurserymen for accuracy and punctuality ; he mentions Voerhelms and Van 
Zompel as tradesmen which he could recommend ; and it is remarkable, that the same 
establishment (Voorhelm and Schneevooght) is the most eminent at this day. Garden- 
seeds, for which Holland has long been celebrated, are chiefly grown by the market- 
gardeners and small farmers round Haerlem. Roses are extensively grown at Noord- 
wyck, between Leyden and Haerlem, for the apothecaries, and the dried leaves are sent 
to Amsterdam and Constantinople. The sorts are, the Dutch 100-leaved and the com- 
mon cabbage rose. A striking characteristic of Dutch fruit and forest tree nurseries is 
the length of time the trees are trained in the nursery. They are so often removed there, 
as to have a large fasciculus of fibrous roots, and the fruit-trees commonly bear for a year 
or two before they are sold, at least for local planting. Ready-grown hedges and shrubs, 
of various sizes and shapes, may be purchased ; and as they have been transplanted every 
third year, like the trees, there is little risk of their not succeeding. At Brussels, pro- 
fessor Van Mons has established a fruit-tree nursery, which he calls Pejnniere de la Fide- 
lite, in which are grown upwards of 800 new varieties of pear, raised by himself and M. 
Duquesne of Mons, since 1 803, besides new varieties of the other hardy ffuit-trees. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN FRANCE. 



1 53. The operative gardeners in Holland are for tlie most part apprenticed, and serve 
as journeymen before they are employed to undertake the care of gardens where several 
liands are employed ; but so general is horticultural knowledge, that every labourer is 
considered as capable of cropping and dressing an ordinary tradesman or farmer's garden. 

15-1. Tliere dire few or no ar List- garde tiers in Holland. Eminent practical gardeners are 
employed to lay out walled kitchen-gardens ; and artists from Paris, generally called in 
to lay out parks or pleasure-grounds of more than ordinary extent. 

SuBSECT. 6. Dutch Gardening, as a Science^ and in res2)ect to the Authors it has 

produced. 

155. Horlicidture as a science, has been less cultivated in the Netherlands tlian in 
Italy or France. The botanists of the country were not among the first to advance the 
study of physiology, nor has any of their practical men appeared with tlie science of a 
Quintiney or a Miller. " The patience and riches," Bosc observes, " which produced 
so high a degree of florimania in Holland, might have been usefully employed in ad- 
vancing vegetable physiology; but science owes nothing to the Dutch in this branch." 
At the present time, when science is so rapidly and so universally spread, the learned 
in the Netherlands are unquestionably on a footing with those of other countries ; a proof 
of which may be derived from the remarks of Van Mons, Van Marum, and other Dutch 
and Flemish coiTespondents of our Horticultural and Linna^an Societies. The ma- 
jority of working gardeners may be considered as nearly on a par with those of this 
country in point of science, and before tliem in various points of practice. 

156. The Dutch and Flemings have few authors 07i gardening, and the reason may be, 
the universality of practical knowledge in that country. Commelin and Van Osten are 
their principal authors. Tlie former published the Hortus Amstelodamus, in 2 vols, 
folio, in 1697, and suTasequently a small work on orange-trees; and Van Osten, who 
was gardener at Leyden, published his Dutch Gardener about 1710. Various French 
works on gardening have been printed at tlie Hague, and other parts of Holland. 

Sect. III. Of the Rise, Progress, ayid present State of Gardening in Fraiice. 

157. Three ceras mark the gardening of France ; that of Charlemagne, in the eighth ; 
of Louis XIV., in the middle of the seventeenth ; and that of the Revolution, at the 
end of the eighteenth centuries. The first introduced the best fruits, and spread the use 
of vineyards and orchards ; the second ^vas marked by splendor in design ; and the third 
by increased botanical and scientific knowledge. 

SuBSECT. 1. French Gardening, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

158. ThoM^ the gardening of Charlemagne in the eighth century was chiefly of the useful 
kind, yet he is said (see Nigellius) to have had a noble palace at Ingleheim, on the Rhine, 
supported by a hundred columns of Italian marble. This could hardly be erected, 
without an accompanying and decorative garden, though the frugal habits of that prince 
might prevent an extravagant display of design. From the Hortulus of Walafrid, pub- 
lished in the loeginning of the ninth century, it appears that gardens were in these times 
made only within the walls of castles and monasteries. 

159. Previously to the sixteenth century, any notices of gardening in France chiefly 
relate to other branches than that under consideration. At the end of this century, 
Francis the First built the palace of Fontainbleau, and introduced there some traits of 
the gardening of Italy. Stephens and Liebault published their Maison Rustique 
about this time ; the early editions contain little on the subject of design, farther than 
directions for forming avenues, arbors, and flower-gardens. 

160. In the beginning of the seventeenth century, Hirschfield observes, the gardens of 
France consisted only of a few trees and flowers, some plots of turf, and pieces of 
water ; the whole, he adds, according to their own accounts, " totally deprived of taste, 
and completely wild and neglected." 

161. About the middle of the seventeenth century, and in the second year of Louis thfa 
Fourteenth's reign, PVance was visited by Evelyn, who makes the following remarks on 
the gardens in and near Paris : — 

The garden of the Tuilleries " is rarely contrived for privacy, shade, or company, by groves, plantations 
of tall trees, especially that in the middle, being of elms, and another of mulberries. There is a iabjiinth 
of cypress, noble hedges of pomegranates, fountains, fish-ponds, and an aviary. There is an artificial echo, 
redoubling the words distinctly, and it is never without some fair nymph singing to it. Standing at one 
of the focuses, which is under a tree, or little cabinet of hedges, the voice seems to descend from the 
clouds ; at another, as if it were under ground. This being at the bottom of the garden, we were let into 
another, which, being kept with all imaginable accurateness as to the orangery, precious shrubs, and rare 
fruits, seemed a Paradise." 

St. Germains en Lay. " By the way I alighted at St. Cloes, where, on an eminence near the river, the 
archbishop of Paris has a garden, for the house is not very considerable, newly watered, and furnished 
» with statues, founUins, and groves ; the walks are very fine ; the fountain of Laocoon is in a large square 
pool throwing the waternear forty feet high, and having about it a multitude of statues and basins, and 
is a surprising object ; but nothing is more esteemed than the cascade, iaWwg from the great steps into 



34 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Pari I. 



the lowest and longest walk from the Mount Parnassus, which consists of a grotto, or shell house, on the 
summit of the hill, wherein are divers water-works, and contrivances to wet the spectators." 

Cardinal Richelieii's villa at Ruell. " The house is small, but fairly built in form of a castle, moated 
round. The offices are towards the road, and over-against them are large vineyards walled in. Though 
the house is not of the greatest size, the gardens about it are so magnificent, that I doubt whether Italy 
has any exceeding it for varieties of pleasure. The garden nearest the pavilion is a parterre, having in 
the midst divers brass statues, perpetually spouting water into an ample basin, with other figures of tha 
same metal ; but what is most admirable is the vast enclosure, and a variety of ground in the large garden 
containing vineyards, corn-fields, meadows, groves, (whereof one is of perennial greens), and walks of vast 
lengths, so accurately kept and cultivated, that nothing can be more agreeable. On one of these walks, 
within a square of tall trees, is a basilisk of copper, which, managed by the fountaineer, casts water near 
sixty feet high, and will, of itself, move round so swiftly, that one can hardly escape wetting. This leads 
to the Citroniire where is a noble conserve of all those rarities; and at the end of it is the arch of Con- 
stantine, painted on a wall in oil, as large as the real one at Rome, so well done, that even a man skilled in 
painting may mistake it for stone and sculpture. The sky and hills, which seem to be, between the arches, 
are so natural, that swallows and other birds, thinking to fly through, have dashed themselves against the 
wall. At the fartherpart of this walk is that plentiful, though artificial, cascade, which rolls down a very steep 
declivity, and over the marble steps and basins, with an astonishing noise and fury ; each basin hath a 
jette in it, flowing like sheets of transparent glass, especially that which rises over the great shell of lead, 
from whence it glides silently down a channel, through the middle of a spacious gravel-walk, terminating in 
a grotto. Here are also fountains that cast water to a great height, and large ponds, two of which have islands 
for harbour of fowls, of which there is store. One of these islands has a receptacle for them, built of vast 
pieces of rock, near fifty feet high, grown over with moss, ivy, &c. shaded, at a competent distance, with 
tall trees ; in this the fowls lay eggs and breed. We then saw a large and very rare grotto of shell-work, 
in the shape of satyrs, and other wild fancies j in the middle stands a marble table, on which a fountain 
plays in forms of glasses, cups, crosses, fans, crowns, &c. Then the fountaineers represent a shower of 
rain, from the top, met by small jets from below. At going out, two extravagant musketeers shot us with 
a stream of water from their musket-barrels. Before this grotto is a long pool, into which ran divers 
spouts of water from leaden escallop basins. The viewing this Paradise made us late at St. Germains." 

St. Gerinaim. " The first building of this palace is of Charles V. called the Sage ; but Francis I. (that 
true virtuoso) made it complete. Speaking as to the style of magnificence then in fashion, which was with 
too great a mixture of the Gothic, as may be seen of what there is remaining of his in the old castle, an 
irregular piece as built on the old foundation, and havhig a moat about it. It has yet some spacious and 
handsome rooms of state, and a chapel neatly painted. The new castle is at some distance, divided from 
this by a court, of a lower but more modern design, built by Henry IV. To this belong six terraces, built 
of brick and stone, descending in cascades, towards the river, cut out of the natural hill, having under 
them grandly vaulted galleries ; of these, four have subterraneous grots and rocks, where are represented 
several objects, in the manner of scenes, and other motions by force of water, shown by the light of torches 
only ; amongst these is Orpheus, with his music, and the animals which dance after his harp ; in the 
second, is the king and dolphin (dauphin) ; in the third is Neptune sounding his Trumpet, his chariot 
drawn by sea-horses ; in the fourth, Perseus, and Andromeda ; mills, hermitages, men fishing, birds 
chirping, and many other devices. There is also a dry grot to refresh in, all having a fine prospect towards 
the river, and the goodly country about it, especially the forest. At the bottom is a parterre ; the upper 
terrace near half a mile in length, with double declivities, arched and balustered with stone of vast and 
royal cost. In the pavilion of the new castle are many fair rooms well painted, and leading into a very 
noble garden and park, where there is a pall-mall, in the midst of which, on one of the sides, is a chapel 
with a stone cupola, though small, yet of a handsome order of architecture. Out of the park you go 
into the forest, which, being very large, is stored v/ith deer, wild boars, wolves, and other wild game. 
The Tennis-court, and Cavalerizzo for the maneged horses, are also very observable." 

The Count de LiancourVs palace, in the rue de Seine, " is well-built. Towards his study and bed- 
chamber joins a little garden, which, though very narrow, by the addition of a well-painted perspective, 
is to appearance greatly enlarged ; to this there is another part, supported by arches, in which runs a 
stream of water, rising in the aviary, out of a statue, and seeming to flow for some miles, by being arti- 
ficially continued in the painting, where it sinks down at the wall. It is a very agreeable deception. At 
the end of this garden is a little theatre, made to change with divers pretty scenes, and the stage so ordered 
that figures of men and women, painted on light boards, and cut out, are by a person who stands under- 
neath, made to act as if they were speaking, by guidmg them, and reciting words, in different tones, as the 
parts require, &c." 

A pretty garden at Caen, " planted with hedges of alaternus, having at the entrance a screen of an ex- 
ceeding height, accurately cut in topiary work." 

The gardens of the Luxe7nbourg are near an English mile in circumference. " The parterre is, indeed, 
of box, but so rarely designed' and accurately kept cut, that the embroidery makes a wonderful effect to 
the lodgings which front it. The walks are exactly fair, long, and variously descending, and so justly 
planted witli limes, elms, and other trees, that nothing can be more delicious, especially that of the horn- 
beam hedge ; which, being high and stately, buts full on the fountain." {Metnoirs, vol. i. 40 — 52.) 

President Maison's palace and gardens, " between St. Germains and Paris. The palace is environed by 
a dry moat ; the offices underground ; the gardens are very excellent, with extraordinary long walks, set 
with elms, and a noble prospect towards the forest, and on the Seine towards Paris. Take it altogether, the 
meadows, walks, river, forest, corn-ground, and vineyards, I hardly saw any thing in Italy to exceed it. 
The iron gates are very magnificent." {Memoirs, p. 239.) 

162. The French taste in laying out gardens may be considered as having been settled 
and confirmed by Le Notre during the reign of Louis XIV. Le Notre's taste and style, 
Daines Barrington observes, continued in full repute for upwards of a century ; and 
appears to have been in general vogue so late as 1771, fifty years after the introduction 
of the modern style in England. Hovi^ever remarkable this may appear, it is a fact which 
does not admit of a doubt ; for Millin, the editor of the Journal Encydopedique, in a 
critique on the translation of Wheatley's Observations on Modern Gardening, published 
that year, after the most liberal encomiums on the work, expresses his doubts as to how 
the modern style would be received in France, where he adds, " Le Notre's school is 
still followed, and every rich proprietor is anxious that his garden, if it does not resemble, 
shall at least recall to his mind those of the court, at Versailles, Trianon, Meudon, 
Sceaux, or Clugny." 

163. Le Notre was the most celebrated gardener that probably ever existed. If Le Notre, 
observes Hirschfield, had been born under any other monarch than Louis the XIV., his 
taste v/ould, in all probability, never have spread, or his name been known to posterity. 
But that age, in which a feeling for the fine arts had begun to awake in men's minds, 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN FRANCE. 



together witli the personal character of this monarch, was favoraJble to pomp and 
brilliancy. The nation and the court wished to be dazzled and enchanted by novelty and 
singularity ; and though there certainly was nothing in Le Notre's manner that had not 
before been displayed in Fmnce and Italy, and with the exception of parterres, even by 
the Romans, yet the grand scale and sumptuous expense of the plans surpassed every 
thing before seen in France, and produced precisely the desired end. His long dipt 
alleys, triumphal arches, richly decorated and highly wrought parterres ; tiis fountains 
and cascades, with their grotesque and strange ornaments ; his groves, full of architecture 
and gilt trellises ; his profusion of statues and therms; all these wonders springing up 
in a desert-looking open country, dazzled and enchanted every class of observers. Le 
Notre v/as educated an architect, and had attained his fortieth year before ho finished his 
first work in the rural department of his profession, the garden of Vaux le Vicoinpte, 
afterwards V. le Villars, and nov/ (1823) Vaux Praslin. The king, enchanted v/ith 
this decoration, made Le Notre his controller-general of buildings and director of gardens, 
loaded him with presents, gave him a patent of nobility, and made him Knight of the order 
of Saint Michael. His principal works are Versailles, v/hich cost nearly 200 millions 
of francs ; Trianon, Meudon, Saint Cloud, Sceaux, Chantilly, and the celebrated terrace 
of Saint Germains. The gardens of the Tuilleries, the Champs Elys^cs, and many otiiers 
were either ■ formed by him or improved from his designs. In 1678 he went to Italy, 
where he furnished the plans of several gardens, particularly those of the villas Pamphili 
and Ludovisi. England, Sweden, and all Europe adopted his ^manner. He died in 
1700. {Hirsc/ifield, torn. V. 293.) 

1 64. The gardens of Versailles, the grand effort of Le Notre, have been so frequently 
described, and are so generally known, that we shall only quote one or two opinions 
concerning them. Hirschfield considers them not as models of taste, but as models of 
a particular class or character of gardens. Gray the poet was struck with their splendor 
when filled with company, and when the water-works were in full action. Lord 
Kaimes says they would tempt one to believe that nature was below die notice of a 
great monarch, and therefore monsters must be created for him as being more astonish- 
ing productions. Bradley says, " Versailles is the sum of every thing that has been done 
in gardening." Agricola, a German author, declares {Phil. Treat, on Agr. Trans, by 
Bradley,) that the sight of Versailles gave him a foretaste of Paradise. Our opinion 
coincides with Gray's : " Such symmetry," as Lord Byron observes, " is not for soli- 
tude." During the Revolution, it was proposed that the palace and gardens should be 
sold as national property ; but M. Le Roy, the architect, greatly to his honor, stepped 
forward and represented that the palace might be usefully employed for public purposes, 
and the garden rendered productive of food for the people. " This satisfied the citizens : 
a military school was established in the palace ; and by planting some of the parterres 
with apple-trees, and others with potatoes, the garden was saved." Niell was in- 
formed, that by calculation the v/ater-works of Versailles, which are not played off 
oftener than eight or ten times a-year, cost 2001. jjer hour. There is an orange-tree 
here " seme in 1421," and thirty feet high. (Hurt. Tour, 409. et seq.) 

165. Le Notre's successor was Dufresnoy, controller of buildings ; his taste differed 
considerably from that of his predecessor, and he is said to have determined on inventing a 
style different and more picturesque. He preferred unequal surfaces, and sometimes at- 
tempted these by art. His style had something of the modern English manner, but 
his projects were rarely carried into execution. He was accused of being two ex- 
pensive ; but it is more probable that the chief objection to his taste was the continued 
prevalence of that of his predecessor. However, he constructed, in a style superior to 
that of Le Notre, the gardens of the Abb6 Pajot, near Vincennes, and in the Faubourg 
Saint Antoine, two other gardens of his own, now known under tlie names of Moulin, and 
of Chemincreux, Marly has been erroneously attributed to Dufresnoy, but it was 
constructed from the plans of the architect Drus^, controller of the works at St. Ger- 
mains, The garden of Bagnolet is the principal vv^ork of Desgodetz, a relation of Le 
Notre. Chapelle d'Isle and the brothers Mansard, and other architects, at that time 
constructed several gardens in France, but on the general plan of that of Le Notre. 
Millin considers Dufresnoy as an artist of much greater genius than Le Notre, and 
more attached to natural beauties, though less known by his talent for designing gardens 
than by his comedies. 

166. The English style of gardening began to pass into France, after the peace of 
1762, and was soon afterwards pursued with the utmost enthusiasm. Hirschfield af- 
firms that they set about destroying the ancient gardens, and replanting them in the 
English manner, with a warmth more common to the mania of imitation than the genius 
of invention. Even a part of the gardens of Versailles were removed, as De Lille la- 
ments {Les Jardins, 4th edit. p. 40.), to make way for a young plantation d VAngloise. 
Dufresnoy, as we have already stated, had been bold enough to depai-t from the f&rmer 
style, and Gabriel Thouin, in the preface to his Plans Raisonnes des Jardins, &c. (1818) 

D 2 



36 



HISTORY OF GARDENING 



Part I. 



says, this artist gave the model of natural gardens on a piece of ground which belonged 
to him in the Faubourg Saint Antoine, already alluded to, and thus fixed the principles 
of natural (that is, English} gardening in France about the commencement of the last 
century. Laugier is the first French author who espoused tlik English style of garden- 
ing in his Essai sur r Architecture, published in 1753 ; and next in order Prev6t, in his 
Homme dii Gout, published in 1770. About the same time, the first notable example 
was preparing at Ermenonville, the seat of Viscount Girardin, about ten leagues 
from Paris. An account of this place was Avritten by Girardin himself in 1775, and 
published in 1777. It was soon after translated into English by D. Malthus, Esq. 
and is well known foj- its eloquent descriptions of romantic and picturesque scenes. 
Morel observes, in his Theorie des Jardins, published in 1766, that very little had been 
done previously to 1766: he mentions Ermenonville, as to which he had been con- 
sulted, and the Due d'Aumont's park at Guiscard, and a seat near Chateau 
Thiery, chiefly laid out by him. Soon after IMorel's work, Delille's celebrated poem, 
{Les Jardins,) made its appearance, and is perhaps a more unexceptionable performance 
than The English Garden of Mason. The French, indeed, have written much better 
on gardening and agriculture than they have practised, — a circumstance which may be 
accounted for, from the general concentration of wealth and talent in the capital, where 
books are more frequent than examples ; and of professional reputation in that country, 
depending more on what a man has written, than on what he has done. It does not ap- 
pear that English gardening was ever at all noticed by the court of France. 

167. Ermenonville {fig.ll.), still in the Girardin family, but now rather neglected, appears to have been 
laid out in a chaste and picturesque style, and in this respect to have been somewhat different and superior 

11 




to contemporary English places. The chateau (a) was placed on an island in the lake, near the village {b). 
Among other objects in the grounds were Rousseau's cottage (c) ; his tomb in the Island of Poplars (rf) ; 
that of the landscape-painter Mahler, who had assisted Girardin in designing the improvements in an 
adjoining island [e) ; a garden in ruins (/), and the grand cascade (g). Useless buildings were in a great 
degree avoided, and the picturesque effect of every object carefully considered, not in exclusion of, but in 
connection with their utility. There is hardly an exceptionable principle, or even direction referring to 
landscape-gardening laid down in the course of Girardin's Essay ; and in all that relates to the pictu- 
resque, it is remarkable how exactly it corresponds with the ideas of Price. Girardin, high in military 
rank, had previously visited every part of Europe, and paid particular attention ;to England, and before 
publishing his work, he had the advantage of consulting those of Wheatley, Shenstone, G. Mason, aixi 
Chambers, from the first of which he has occasionally borrowed. He professes, however, that his object 
is neither to create English gardens, nor Chinese gardens, and less to divide his grounds into pleasure- 
grounds, parks, or ridings, than to produce interesting landscapes, " ^^a^rsages interessans," &c. He re- 
ceived the professional aid of J. M. Morel, the Kent of France, who afterwards published Theorie des 
Jardins, and probably that of his guest Rousseau, who seems to have composed the advertisement to 
his book. Magellan, in the Gazette Litteraire de F Em-ope for 1778, in giving some account of the last 
days of Rousseau, who died at Ermenonville, and was buried in the Island of Poplars {d) there, informs us, 
that Girardin kept a band of musicians, who constantly perambulated the grounds making concerts some- 
times in the woods, and at other times on the waters, and in scenes calculated for particular seasons, so 
as to draw the attention of visitors to them at the proper time. At night they returned to the house, 
and performed in a room adjoining the hall of company'. Madame Girardin' and her daughters were 
clothed in common "brown stuff, en amazoncs, with black hats, while the young men wore " habilleT/ienis 
le plus simple et le plus propres i les /aire confondre avec Ics enfans du campagnards," &c. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN FRANCE. 



37 



ICS. WateteVs garden, the Moulin joli^ the next example of the English style in France, is of a very 
different description from Ermenonville. Watelet is the author of an Essai sur les Jardins, which an- 
jiearod in 1774. His garden was situated in the suburbs of Paris, on the Seine, and contained about four 
acres, varied by buildings, grottoes, temples, and inscriptions, and was, on the whole, more in the Chinese 
style, than in that of Kent or Shenstone. The author, who professes to take utility for the basis of his 
art, seems to have felt something wanting, in this i)articular,- to his temples and altars, and is ridiculed 
by Hirschfield {Theorie des Jardins, torn. i. p. 168.) for proposing occasionally " de faire paroitre aiipres 
les temples, et les autels, les arcs de triomphe, ^c. une troupe de pantomimes, vetues suivant Ic costume neces- 
saire, iinitant des certmonies, faisant dcs sacrifices, allant porter des offrandes," Scc. The Prince de Ligne 
admired Watelet 's garden almost as much as that of Girardin, though in so different a style. After de- 
scribing it, lie says, " Allex-y, incredules. . . . Meditezsur les inscriptions que le gout y a dictees. Meditez 
avec le sage, saupii-ez avec Vamant, et benissez Watelet." (jVew. et Lettres, Scc. 2o0.) The object of such 
as attempt English gardening in France on a small scale is still more to imitate the garden of Watelet, 
than the " passages interessans" of Girardin. 

169. other English or mixed gardens ivhich existed before the Revolution, the garden 
cf Mouceau, the property of the Duke of Orleans, was laid out by Blaikey, a British 
landscape-gardener resident in France, in a romantic and irregular style. Blaikey also 
formed some scenes in the Petit Trianon, especially in the lower part of the grounds, now 
occupied by ruins, water, and a cottage, and in their kind very picturesque. It was here 
that the queen of Louis XVI. used to entertain her guests habited as a shepherdess ; 
that the citizens used to holdi fetes champeires during the Revolution ; and that Napoleon 
made a residence for Maria Louisa. Having reverted to the Bourbons, it is now com- 
paratively neglected and dilapidated. (Hort. Tour, 406.) Bagatelle, in the Bois de 
Bologne, formerly the retreat of Count d'Artois, and the Duke of Orleans's park at 
Raincy, were laid out, in 1779, in the same taste, and by the same artist. The Jardin 
de ilfarfite?//" was planted by the Chevalier Jansin, an Englishman. {Ed. Encyc.yiW 

De Lille cites the gardens of Belceil, the chateau of the Prince de Ligne. Montreuil, a 
garden of the Princess Gremen^ ; JNIaupertuis, a garden of the Marquis de Montes- 
quieu, with a beautifully varied surface, abundance of wood and Avater, and a desert 
after the manner of Mereville. He mentions several others, all of which are figured in 
Hecueil des Jardins, 16 cahiers, folio, and m^ost of them described by Hirschfield (tom. i. 
Sc v.), who considers Mereville and Ermenonville, as the two best specimens of Englisli 
gardening in France. 

Mereville, the seat of M. La Borde, was one of the most considerable in France, and was laid out im. 
mediately before the Revolution under the guidance of Robert, a famous landscape-painter. The chateau 
stood on a terrace, and commanded a distant prospect over a marsh originally of little interest. But the 
wall of this terrace was covered with artificial rock-work, a river farmed in the marsh with a bridge and 
cascade. The general surface was raised by earth, and on the right and left of the view from the house 
were raised considerable hills of earth, the one surmounted by a column 120 feet high, serving as a prospect- 
tower, and the other by a Doric temple of 17 columns. At the base of one hill was a magnificent grotto 
and rocks, and near the other stables in the character of Gothic ruins. Various buildings were erected in 
other parts of the grounds ; one to the memory of Captain Cook, and another to that of M. Laborde's two 
sons, who perished in the voyage of La Peyrouse. Every hardy exotic tree was planted, and many of them, 
as the tulip-tree, ailanthus, sophora, &c. grew with great vigor and flowered luxuriantly. Many millions 
of francs were expended on this place, which for some years past has been falling into decay and has been 
lately sold in lots. 

One of the finest modern parks in France is that of D'Argenson near Vienne. Mathews {Diary 
of an Invalid) considered it superior to any thing of the kind he had seen in France or Italy, and says it re- 
minded him of his native,Wye, audits picturesque banks. 

170. English gardening during the consulate was little attended to, Malmaison, the 
residence of Josephine, was laid out avowedly in the English style by Blorel, and greatly 
altered and improved by Blaikie and the English resident gardener, Hudson ; and richly 
stocked with trees and shrubs from London. Since that time little has been done on an 
extended plan ; and one may travel from one extremity of the kingdom to the other, 
without seeing any scene having the general external appearance of an English park. 
The works of this kind which are executed, are on a very limited scale, and crowded 
with walks and ornaments. Most of them may be called fanciful, ingenious, and pretty, 
but few are simple and grand. {Dulatire Desc. des Env. de Paris, and Hort. Toitr, 557. 
et seq. ) All that a Frenchman considers necessary to form a Jardin Anglois, Blaikie 
states to us, is crooked walks. Blaikie went to France in 1776, remained there during 
the Revolution, and has been employed by all parties. The directory employed him to 
plant the Tuilleries with potatoes, and never paid him for the sets ; and the national 
assembly in 1792, appointed him commissioner for the establishment of a botanic garden 
at Versailles, but he declined the employment. This venerable artist is still employed in 
all the eminent cases in France, Holland, and the south of Germany. 

171. The French revolution, however favorable to the progress of society, by the 
emancipation of energies and intellects, and by the general subdivision and distribution 
of property, has, as was to be expected, been injurious to gardening as an art of design ; 
but if once the nation were politically content, a few years of quiet and prosperity, by en- 
riching some and impoverishing others, would end in grouping property in more unequal 
masses ; and the superfluous wealth of the opulent would be employed as before, under 
the advantages of much more skill to display, and taste to approve what is beautiful or 
excellent. 

D 3 ' 



38 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



172. Ulth r^ard to the present state of landscape-gardening in France, the royal gar- 
dens, the Tuilleries, Versailles, St. Cloud, and tlie Trianons, are still kept up in a 
respectable style. Ermenonville is in possession of tlie son of its creator, who, being 
friendly to the Buonaparte family, -was made a president during the reign of a hundred 
days, and is consequently at present not in favor at court. The grounds are still shown 
to strangers, but their effect, and the order in which they are kept, are far inferior to w hat 
one is led to expect from the description in the Essai sur la Composition des Pat/sages, 
&c. and from what, as we were informed (in 1815, and again in 1819), actually was the 
case half a century ago. We saw no reason to admire the turf, which Sir J. E. Smitli 
informs us (Tour, &c.) had been, in 1786, about two years under the care of an intelli- 
gent Scotch gardener, and who, he says, " assured us, and indeed what we saw con- 
firmed it, tliat the superior beauty of our British grass-plots to those of other countries is 
principally owing to management, and not to soil and climate." The lawns of Girardin, 
and of the king in the grounds we have enumerated, are, we fear, sad proofs of the fallacy 
of this gardener's opinion, and of the unsuitableness of dry arenaceous soils and warm 
climates for those " velvet lav/ns" which are at once the greatest beauty and the charac- 
teristic of English gardening in England. The finest lawns in and around Paris are 
•watered every summer evening, when it has not rained 
during the day, e. g. that of the Palais Royal. 

173. In the veighbmirhood of Parrs are various Chinese and Eng- 
lish gardens which might be mentioned ; what they call Chinese 
gardens differ from their English or (as G. Thouin calls tliem,> 
natura) gardens, in being still more frittered down by walks, and 
ornamented by Chinese-looking ornaments. One of the prcttic'st 
town-gardens in France, and which it is but justice to say, is un- 
equalled by any cf the kind in Britain, is that of Bourseau, in 
Paris, {Hue Mont Blanc,) about an acre in extent It is described at 
length in the Horticultural Tour. 

: 174. Near Lyons is Hermitage, a villa cf Guilliard St. Etienne, 
much spoken of in the guides, and by French tourists. It is of small 
extent, on the rocky umbrageous banks of the Saone, and thickly set 
with statues, busts, rustic seats {fig. 12.), and every sort of garden or- 
nament, with a museum. It is mucii too theatrical for a garden, and 
gives more the idea of whim in the proprietor than of any thing else. 
A situation of so much natural beauty, required at the utmost, only 
as much art as was sufficient to mark its appropriation by man. 

175. Arourul MontpeOer and Marseilles, there is nothing in the 
wav oflandscai>e gardening worth mentioning. 

176. The plan of the residence of General Lomet at Agen [Jig. 13.) is given by Kraft {Plans de plus heaur 
Jardifis, &c. pi. 17.) It is situated on a hilly spot bordering the river, and contains in a very small space a dwell- 
ing-house [a), poultry-yard (6), in the pavilions of which (c, d) are the coach-houses, stables, rooms above for 
the coachman and stable-boys, and the gardener. There is a green-house {e), cart-shed, and warehouse, let 
off to townsmen (/), a flower-garden [g], principal entrance and avenue (A, T, temple of Flora (A-.). Roman 
temple and bath terrace covered with an arbour (m), a vine plantation trained on an arcade trellis in the 
Italian manner l/i), a terrace for orange-trees wath a green-house underneath (o), parterre {p), miniature 
fields of barley, wheat, beans, &c. {q), kitchen-garden {r), numerous monuments and statues [s, s), an 
orchard (t), and a lake (m). Kraft says, it contains the greatest variety of picturesque views, but has 





Book I. 



GARDENING IN FRANCE. 



89 



rather too many winding walks. It was laid out by 
the architect, Kleber, who afterwards became the 
celebrated general of that name, and was murdered 
by a mameluke in Egypt. Kleber seems to have been 
fond of rustic buildings, with which this garden 
abounds in the greatest variety of form and dimen- 
sions, from the gardener's house, to that of the 
bees, and the shelter for peacocks. 

177. There is a very pleasing English garden at 
Vitry, the property of Citizen Wenner, in which as 
much is made of a small spot as can well be done. It 
was laid out by Charpentier already mentioned. 

178. The gardenof the postmaster at Altkirch {fig. 
14.), in Alsatia, is described by Kraft as a singularly 
beautiful spot. Beyond the basin of water is an am- 
phitheatre of shrubs and trees which is intersected 
by shady walks leading to a mount containing the 
grandest prospects of the Rhine and the Alps. 

179. Public gardens or promenades are numerous 
and well arranged in France as in most countries on 
the continent : the demand for these arises from the 
social habits of the people and the mildness of the 
climate ; and their growth, even in the middle of 
the cities, as in the Tuilleries and Boulevards of 
Paris, and the street avenues of Bourdeaux, Lyons, 
Marseilles, Montpelier, &c. is not impeded by the 
smoke of coal. What can be a greater luxury in a 
city than such a garden as that of the Tuilleries 
situated in its centre, — its open scenes of gaiety 
and bustle, the distant hum of men heard in the 
stillness of its thick and shady groves, its length- 
ened perspectives of trees, vistas, statues, fountains, 
its coffee and refreshments, its music and dancing 
on certain occasions, — and finally, that sprinkling 
of mind thrown over the whole by the scattered 
stations of those who hire out chairs and periodical 
literature ? 



14 




SuBSECT. 2. French Gardening, in respect to the Culture cf Flowers and Plants of 

Ornament. 

180. A taste for Jlowers was introduced to France from Holland, after that country had 
established commercial relations with the Levant and the south of Europe. (Deleuze, 
Recherches, &c.) Charlemagne loved gardens, and was most particular in giving directions 
to his gardeners. In his Capitulaire de Villis et Curtis, he enumerates the sorts of plants 
which he desires may be grown in all his gardens. This list, however, excepting the 
rose and the lily, is entirely medicinal ; and these too, were probably used as drugs ; for 
tlie greatest beauty, in barbarous times, is utility. 

181. It was in the thirteenth century that ornamental plants began to be introduced to 
France as such. The crusades had brought to notice the gardens of the infidels in Egypt 
and Syria ; the Christians invaders could not avoid being struck with their beauty, imitated 
their plans, and imported tlieir productions into Europe. 

■ 182. The sixteenth century, however, had arrived before the culture of flowers was attempted. 
Botany now began to become a science, independent of medicine. Gardens were con- 
structed, destined for curious and beautiful plants ; and the discovery of America, and 
the passage to the Indies, augmented their number. Travellers collected seeds, which 
they sent home to their respective countries ; great care w^s bestowed on such as appeared 
the most ornamental ; of some flowers,' double varieties were produced, and the colors 
and size of others, varied by culture, till advancing, by degrees, they at length became 
an object of luxury, and trade and caprice, fashion and variety, gave incredible prices for 
some of these productions ; for in what, observes Deleuze, will extravagance not inter- 
mingle. Henry IV. had a taste for flowers : his gardener, Jean Robin, published a ca- 
talogue of plants in 1610, in which the passion flower and crown imperial are mentioned, 
the former as newly imported, and the latter as rare. In 1635, the varieties of tulips, 
ranunculuses, and anemones, in the Jardin des Plantes, exceeded that of the species in 
1800. Evelyn mentions, in' 1644, {Memoirs, i. 52.) a M. Morine, who from an ordinary 
gardener had become one of the most skilful persons in France, who had a rare collection 
of shells and flowers, and above 10,0,00 sorts of tulips alone. This florimania seems to 
have declined and given way to a taste for exotics, during the reigns of Louis the Fifteenth 
and Sixteenth, which has ever since continued to prevail. 

183. The study of botany began to be cultivated in France at an early period, and has 
since attained great consideration in that country from the labors of Adanson, the two 
Jussieus, Mirbel, Humboldt, and De Candolle. The first botanic garden was formed in 
1597, at Montpelier in Henry the Fifth's reign, through the representations of Belon. 
In the following year it contained 1300 distinct species, the greater part gathered in the 
neighbourhood. 

The garden of Paris {Jardin des Plantes) was founded by Louis the Thirteenth, in 1626, and finished iw 
1634, after, as La Brosse the first director remarks, " eighteen years of prosecution, and six of culture." 

D 4 



I 



4d HISTORY OF GARDENING. Pakt I. 



The subsequent history and description of this garden, at different epochs, are given by Adanson, Jussieu, 
and Thouin. It was visited by Sir J. E. Smith, in 1786, who observes that, " it used, in summer, to be the 
evening walk of literary people, and even of persons of fashion ; and was, besides, frequented all day long 
by students of both sexes. Here ladies might be seen at close study dissecting flowers, and reading their 
descriptions ; nor is it at all unusual, at Paris, for the fair sex to attend scientific lectures in considerable 
numbers. The collection of plants is generally reckoned inferior to that of Kew; it contains, however, 
many plants not in England, mostly from Peru and the Levant." The garden has been greatly enlarged 
and much improved since 1786, and now includes departments which may be considered, as far as Vegetables 
are concerned, schools of horticulture, planting, agriculture, medicine, and general economy. It contains 
some fine old exotics, sugar-canes from which a loaf of sugar was made and presented to the Empress 
Josephine, a munificent patroness of gardens, and a few palms which belonged to Francis I. In different 
volumes of the Annates da Musee, may be seen plans and descriptions of the garden, with the modes of 
instruction pursued by Professor Thouin. There can be no question of its being the most scientific and 
best kept garden in Europe, and an admirable horticultural and botanical school ; and in our opinion, 
the ChevaUer Thouin, its director, and the professor of rural economy, has an equal claim to superiority 
as a scientific gardener. 

Tfie botanic garden of the Trianon, a.ccox:A\Tigto'Dc\euze, was established by Louis XV. at the suggestion 
of the Duke de Noailles, for the display of exotic trees, and a general collection of plants, for the amusement 
of the royal family. Here B. de Jussieu disposed, for the first time, the plants in the order of natural 
families. The botanic department of this garden is at present in a state of neglect. 

The flower-garden of Mahnaison in the time of Josephine was among the richest in Europe. Various 
botanical collectors were patronised, some jointly with Lee of Hammersmith. The seeds brought home 
by the navigator, Baudin, were here first raised and described by Ventenat in the Jardin de la Mal- 
maison, in 1803. In 1813 Bonpland published the first volume of Plantes rares cultivees a Malmaison, 
which ruined him, and compelled him to seek an asylum in America. This garden, though comparatively 
neglected, contains some fine exotic trees as standards in the open ground, and protected in winter by 
moveable houses. Among these are Magnolia grandiflora and an orange-tree as large as they grow in 
Spain. In the hot-Jiouses are many fine exotics, and the original bulb of that splendid plant, Brunsvigia 
Josepliints, which in 1817 measured two feet and a half in circumference, and produced a head of flowers 
three feet and a half diameter. The hot-house here contains a rack-work covered with exotics and 
watered by a concealed pipe. {Hort. Tour, 403.) 

There a re various botanic gardens established in the provinces of France, which maintain a regular corre- 
spondence with that of Paris as the common centre. Each of these gardens, has, as it were, the care of the 
botany and horticulture (for these are not separated) of a certain district, and when any new or valuable 
plant is increased in the Paris garden, it is immediately distributed among the provincial gardens, to be by 
them cultivated and increased, and distributed among the nursenmen and practical gardeners. Since 
1813, those provincial gardens have suffered for want of funds; and most of them are but indifferently 
kept up. We could not help being struck with this in viewing the very well contrived new garden at 
Marseilles, almost without plants. The richest provincial garden for its size, and the best in order, after 
that of Paris, appeared to us (in 1819) to be that of Toulon. That of Rouen contains the original plant of 
the hybrid lilac {Syringa Rotho?nagensis), named Varin, after the gardener v/ho, about 1787, raised it 
from seed. 

Herb or phi/sic gardens are more common in France than in Britain. Plantsform a much more important 
part of the Materia Medica of the hospitals and French physicians, than in this country, and their use is 
very popular among the lower orders. The herbaristsof Paris occupy a particular lane, where they offer 
great variety of dried plants for sale. 

SuBSECT. S. French Gardening, in resj^ect to its horticultural Productmis. 

1 84. The hardy fruits of France only exceed those of Britain by the olive, the fig, the 
jujube, pomegranate, and a few others little cultivated. Nature, Professor Thouin ob- 
serves, (Essai sur VExjwsition, j^-c. de V economie rurule, p. 55.) has only given to France, 
the acorn, the chestnut, the pear, the wild apple, and some other inferior fruits. Every 
thing else which we have, agreeable or useful, is the product of foreign climates, and we 
owe them in great part to the Phoenicians, Greeks, Carthaginians, Romans and Saracens. 
The less ancient acquisitions are those of the crusades, or of accidental travellei-s. The 
vine, the peach, the fig, the mulberry, tlie cherry, and the olive, were doubtless intro- 
duced to France by the Romans ; the orange by the Italians ; and the pine-apple by the 
Dutch. Apples, pears, and plums, are the fruits recommended for cultivation by 
Charlemagne, in his Capit. de VilUs et Curtis, &c, prepared about the end of the eighth 
century, and referred to by Montesquieu, as a chef-d'mivre of prudence, good adminis- 
tration, and economy. The Abbe Schmidt informs us, (Mug. Eucijc.) that this 
monarch, who had domains in every part of France, gave the greatest encouragement to 
the eradication of forests, and the substitution of orchards and vineyards. He was on 
terms of intmiate friendship with the Saracenic prince, Haroun al Raschild, and by that 
means procured for France the best sorts of pulse, melons, peaches, figs, and other fruits. 
He desires that fennel, rosemary, sage, rue, wormwood, and above sixty other pot-herbs 
and medicinal plants, should be cultivated : one of these which he calls anthyllis (thought 
to be the house-leek) was to be planted before the gardener's house, probably as being 
vulnerary. 

185. Early in the sixteenth century, it would appear they had at that time all the 
fruits now in use, excepting the pine-apple. (^Oliv. de Serres, and Steph. and Lieb.) Some 
remarks on the state of horticulture at the end of this century are given by Benard 

■{Mem. de la Soc Agr. du Seine et Oise, 1801,) and L. Deslongchamps. {JBon Jard, 
1817-18.) Blaikie (169, 170.) informs us, that about 1779 only three sorts of melons 
were grown in France, the netted or Maraiche, and two large sorts of poor flavor. 
Blaikie introduced the cantaleupes, which are now the prevailing sorts. The pine-apple 
has never been successfully cultivated in France, it becomes sickly from exhalation, 
and produces small fruit as in Italy. (99.) But France excels all other countries in 
pears and plums, and produces excellent peaches. 

186. The culinary vegetables of France have not been increased from the earliest 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN FRANCE. 



41 



period of horticultural history, with the exception of the sea-cale and the potatoe. In 
salading and legumes they far excel most countries ; but in the cabbage tribe, turnips, 
and potatoes, they are inferior to the moister climates of Holland and Britain. 

187. ' A sort of forcing seems to have commenced in France towards the end of the 
sixteenth century. B^nard informs us, that arcades open to the south were first erected 
in Henry IVth's time, for accelerating the growth of pease at St. Germains en Laye ; 
and that, in the end of the reign of Louis XIV., Fagon, at the Jardin des Plantes, 
constructed some hot-houses with glass roofs, which he warmed with stoves and furnaces 
for the preservation of tender plants; and which gave rise to all the hand-glasses, frames, 
and hot-houses subsequently erected in France. Melons and early cucumbers had been 
hitherto grown on beds of dung, and covered at night with loose straw; early salading 
was raised in pots and boxes exposed to the sun during day, and placed in sheds or 
arbors during night. But Richard Senior, observing what Fagon had done, built for 
himself at St. Germains, and afterwards for Louis XV. at Trianon, hot-houses, in which 
were seen, for the first time in France, peaches, cherries, plums, strawberries, bearing 
fruit in the depth of winter. In the Ecole Potagere, written by Combles about the year 
1750, are the details relative to these buildings. There is still, however, very little 
forcing in France, and almost none in the market-gardens. Pease, potatoes, asparagus, 
kidney-beans, salads, &c., are seldom or never forwarded by other means than by plant- 
ing in warm situations under south walls, and grapes or peaches are never covered with 
glass. Melons and seedling plants of different sorts are forwarded by beds of dung, 
generally without the addition of sashes and frames. 

188. French horticulture received a grand accession of theoretical and practical know- 
ledge from the writings of Quintinye. Jean de Quintinye was born at Poictiersin 1626, 
put to school among the Jesuits, took lessons in law, and afterwards travelled to Italy 
with Tambonneau. Here his taste for agriculture began, or greatly increased. He 
applied to its study as a science, and, on his return, Tambonneau committed his gardens 
to his care. He attracted the attention of the court soon afterwards, and was made 
director of several of the royal gardens during the reign of Louis XIV. He laid out a 
jardin potager of thirty acres at Versailles ; the inhabitants of which, Neill observes, 
seem to have imbibed from him a taste for horticulture and botany, the " Confreres 
de St. Fiacre," (the tutelar saint of horticulturists,) or gardener's lodge, held here^ 
being the oldest in France. (Hort. Tour, 4:14.) Among other works, Quintinye wrote 
The comj^lete Gardener, translated by Evelyn, and abridged by London and Wise. He 
died in 1701. After his death the king always spoke of him with regret, and Switzer 
says, assured his widow, that the king and she were equally sufferers. Quintinye, in 
his work on fruit-trees, has developed a system of pruning, which has not yet been 
surpassed by that of any other author. Before his time the culture of wall, or espalier 
trees, was little attended to ; gardens had been generally surrounded by high hedges, but 
for these were now substituted walls of masonry, or of earth en pise. The pruning of 
peach and pear trees is now well understood in France, and horticulture on the whole is 
making rapid advances. 

SuBSECT. 4. French Gardening, in respect to the j^lctnting of Timber-trees and Hedges. 

189. Planting for jiroft has never been extensively ^^'''^^^ti^^d in France, owing to the 
abundance of natural forests in every part of the kingdom. These forests were much 
neglected till within the last thirty years ; but they are now (being mostly national pro - 
perty ) under a more regular course of management ; their limits defined by fences, and 
the blanks filled up from the national nurseries. The roads of France being also kept 
up by government, much attention is paid to lining them with rows of trees. In 
some places, as in Alsatia, the walnut, cherry, apple, pear, and other fruit-trees are used ; 
in other districts the elm, oak, or poplar, are employed ; and in the south, we frequently 
find the mulberry, arid sometimes the olive. The resinous tribe are rarely planted but 
for ornament ; the oak, elm, beech, and Spanish chestnut, are the chief sorts used to fill 
up blanks in the natural forests. 

190. The idea of cultivating and naturalising foreign trees in France was first pro- 
jected by Du Hamel in the time of Louis XV. He procured many seeds from 
America, raised them in tlie royal nurseries, and distributed them among his friends. 
A vast plantation of exotic tree s was "then made at St. Germains en Laye by the 
Mareschal de Noailles. Lamoignon naturalised on his estate at Malsherbes a great 
number of these trees, and at the age of eighty -four, Deleuze obsei-ves, saw every where 
in France plants of his own introduct'on. 

191. Hedges are not in general u^e in France; the plants employed in field-hedges, 
in the northern parts, are the liaw horn, birch, or a mixture of native shrubs, as 
hazel, briar, laburnum, &c. In Lai guedoc the most common plant is the wild pome- 
granate. In ornamental hedges t' ey have attained great perfection ; for these the 



42 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



favoiite plants are the yew, the hornbeam, and the box j and for tall hedges, the lime 
and elm. 

SuBSECT. 5. French Gardening, as empirically practised. 

1 92. The use of gardens is very general in France. Few cottagers are without them, 
and in the northern districts, they commonly display a considerable degree of neatness, 
and some fruit-trees and flowers. The southern parts of the country are the least civi- 
lised; there the gardens of the laboring class are less attended to, and gourds or melons, 
and Indian corn, as in Italy, are the chief articles grown. The gardens of the or- 
dinary citizens and private gentlemen in France, are greatly inferior to those of the 
same class in Holland or Britain ; they are seldom walled round, and rarely contain 
any arrangements for foreign or tender exotics. A green-house, indeed, is a rare 
sight, and there does not seem to exist the slightest desire for enjoying any vegetable 
production eithei- earlier or later than their natural seasons. There are few wealthy 
men in France at present, and consequently few first-rate gardens ; the best are in the 
northern districts, and belong to princes of the blood, bankers, and other opulent citi- 
zens. Those of the Dukes of Orleans and Bourbon, of Perigord, Laffite, and De- 
laborde, may be included in this class ; though they are far inferior to many citizens' 
seats and gardens in England. 

193. There are excellent market-gardens in the neighbourhood of Paris, where, by 
force of manure and daily waterings, the oleraceous tribe are brought to a large size 
and very succulent quality. Figs, for the market, are grown by a particular class of 
fruit-growers at Argenteuil ; grapes at Fontainbleau, peaches at Montreuil, and cherries 
at various villages to the east of Paris. There are numerous florists who devote 
themselves exclusively to the culture of flowers, and supply the market with roses, 
lilies, stocks, and the more common greenhouse plants and orange-trees. The latter are 
very neatly grafted, and otherwise well managed. In the winter time forced flowers 
are exposed for sale, and also summer flowers which have been dried in stoves, and 
preserve their color perfectly. The same thing is done with aromatic herbs, and some 
pot-herbs, as parsley, chervil, &:c. 

194. There are few nnrseries 'in France ; the best are at Paris, and are chiefly occupied 
with the culture of fruit-trees and ornamental shrubs. They excel in the culture of the 
rose, of which they have upwards of 300 sorts, which form, to a small extent, articles of 
foreign commerce. The two best provincial nurseries are those of Audibert at Tonelle, 
in Languedoc, and Sedi at Lyons. Vallet's at Rouen is celebrated for orange-trees, 
and Calvert and Co.'s (Englishmen) at Bonne Nouvelle, near the same place, equally so 
for roses ; Vilmorin is the agricultural seedsman, Noisette the Lee, and Cels of Mont 
Rouge the Loddidge of Paris. France long supplied a great part of Europe with 
fruit-trees, from the celebrated nursery of the fathers of the Chartreux, near the 
Luxembourg, established in the time of Louis XIV. and including eighty acres. That 
establishment does not now exist ; but Ville Herv^, the son nf its former manager, has 
the care of the collection of fruit-trees and vines in the national garden of the Luxem- 
bourg. The extensive collection of grapes in this garden was formed by Chaptal, the 
celebrated chemist, when minister of the interior, with a view to ascertain the best sorts, 
and distribute them in the provinces, and the fruit-trees were brought by the elder Herv^ 
from the Chartreux. [Preface to the Catalogue of the Lnxembourg Garden, 1814 ; Cours 
d" Agriculture, &c. art. Vigne.) When Blaikie went to France in 1776, there was not a 
nursery for trees and shrubs in the kingdom. About Vitry only a few of such forest~trees 
were cultivated as were used in avenues, and so few fruit-trees that the sorts were not 
tallied ; the cultivators like the oraTnge nurserymen at Nervi (95.) recognising the few 
sorts by the leaves and bark. 

1 95. The operative gardeners in France are, in general, very ignorant. Few of them 
have learned their art by regular application, or the customary engagement of apprentice- 
ship. At Paris they are poorly paid, and work much harder than the same class in 
England. Evelyn, in 1644, informs us, that the work of the royal gardens was all done 
in the night-time, and finished by six or seven in the morning, in order, no doubt, that 
nothing offensive might meet the eyes of the great of these times. Happily such a chasm 
does not now exist between the rich and the poor ; but still, partly for the same reason, 
but principally to avoid the mid-day sun, the great part of the work, in most private 
gardens, is performed from three to nine o'clock in the morning, and again from six to 
nine in the evening. The great recommendation of a French gardener is, to be able to 
conduct a garden ci bon marche ; and the greatest to prune trees d la Montrenil. 

196. Of artists in gardening [artistes jardiniers, architects des jardins,) there are a num- 
ber in France, chiefly resident in Paris. Blaikie, already mentioned, and Gab. Thouin, 
brother to the professor, and author of Plans Raisojines des Jardins, &c. (1818) may be 
reckoned the most eminent. Girardin, Morel, and De Lille may be considered as liav- 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN GERMANY. 



43 



ing established the principles of gardening in France, as an art of design and ttiste ; but 
it does not appear clear that the artists in general have caught their principles. 

SucsECT. 6. French Gardening, as a Science, and as to the Authors it has produced. 

197. The science of gardening is well understood in France among the eminent gar- 
deners and professors ; perhaps better than in any other country. Quintinyeand Du Hamel 
applied all the physiological knowledge of their day to the treatment of fruit and forest 
trees ; and the theory of grafting, of healing wounds, and of artificial excitements to 
fruitfulness, was explained in their works. Buflbn, Magnal, Parent, and Rosier, Aubert 
de Petit Tliouars, Bosc, and above all Professor Thouin, have brought tlie whole science 
of chemistry and of botany to bear on the various parts of gardening and rural economy, 
which they have treated in various works, but especially in the ISfouveau Cours d' Agricidture, 
(14 vols. 8vo.) published in 1810. 

198. The court and national gardejiers have, for the last thirty years, been men eminent 
for scientific and practical knowledge ; who have received a regular education, and rank 
with other crown officers. It is not there as in England, where the royal situations have 
always been occupied by mere empirical practitioners, recommended by some court 
favorite, or succeeding by the common chances of life. 

1 99. Tlie great mass of operative garderiers in France, both as masters and labourers, are 
incomparably inore ignorant both of gardening, as a science, and of knowledge in general, 
tlian the gardeners of this country ; few of them can read : and the reason of this ignorance 
is, that there is no demand for good master-gardeners. The pupils and apprentices of the 
Jardin des Plantes are mostly sent to manage the provincial botanic gardens, or to the few 
proprietors who have first-rate gardens. The cliief of them are foreigners, who return to 
Germany or Italy, Indeed, where there is no forcing, and few plants in pots, scientific 
gardeners are less necessary; the management of fruit-trees in France being reduced to 
mere routine. 

200. The French authors on gardening are very numerous, but Quintinye is their most 
original and meritorious writer on horticulture, Du Hamel on planting, and Girardin and 
D'Argenville on landscape-gardening. Their works on flowers are chiefly translations 
from the Dutch. 

- Sect. IV. Of the Rise, Progress, and present Stale of Gardening in Germany. 

201. The Germanic confederation, as arrajiged in 1815, includes the empire of Austria, 
the kingdoms of Prussia, Bavaria, Saxony, Hanover, Wurtemburg, and Denmark, be- 
sides various dukedoms and free towns. ITie materials which we have been able to collect 
for so extensive a field, are exceedingly scanty ; and, indeed, it appears from Hirschfield, 
that gardening made little progress in Germany till the seventeenth century. At present, 
the taste for our art there is very considerable, and seems to have received a new stimulus 
from the recent peace. Gardens," Madame de Stael observes, " are almost as beauti- 
ful in some parts of Germany as in England ; the luxury of gardens always implies a 
love of the country. In England, simple mansions are often built in the middle of the 
most magnificent parks ; the proprietor neglects his dwelling to attend to the ornaments 
of nature. This magnificence and simplicity united do not, it is true, exist in the same 
degree in Germany ; yet in spite of the want of wealth, and the pride of feudal dignity, 
there is every where to be remarked a certain love of the beautiful, which sooner or later 
must be followed by taste and elegance, of which it is the only real source. Often, in the 
midst of the superb gardens of the German princes, are placed ^olian harps, close by 
grottoes, encircled with flowers, that the wind may waft the sound and the perfume to- 
gedier. The imagination of the northern people thus endeavours to create for itself a 
sort of Italy ; and during the brilliant days of a short-lived summer, it sometimes attains 
the deception it seeks." [Germani/, chap. i. ) 

SuBSECT. 1. German Gardening, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

202. The French style of gardening has prevailed in Germany from the earliest period 
of history or tradition. The German architects, observes Hirschfield in 1777, in making 
themselves masters of the gardens, as well as of the houses, tended to spread and per- 
petuate the prejudice. " A singular and deplorable Gallomania pervaded Germany from 
the prince to the peasant, which neither irony, patriotism, nor productions which sliow 
the force of our natural genius could destroy ; ' ainsi font les Franqois ; voila ce que jai 
vu en France ; these words were suflScient to reduce the German to a mere copyist, and 
in consequence we had French gardens, as we had Parisian fashions. Our nobles gave 
the first example of imitation, and executed on their estates little miniatures of Versailles, 
Marly, and Trianon. But now (1777)," he adds, "tlie Aurora of judgmentand good taste 
begins to arise in our country, and the recitals of the happy changes made in England in 
the gardents, has prepared the way for the same revolution in Germany. However, we 



44 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



cannot complain of the suddenness of that revolution, and tliat the imitation of the English 
taste spreads too rapidly ; it appears, on the contrarj-, that we begin to tliink for ourselves, 
and reflection proceeds much slower than mere imitation. "We may meet perhaps here 
and there several copies of the British manner, perhaps even of the Gliinese style ; but 
we expect to see the Germans inventing and combining for themselves, and producing 
gardens stamped mththe impression of national genius." {T/ieorie des Jardiiis, torn. i. 83.) 

205. The climate and circumstances of Germany are less favorable to landscape-garden- 
ing than Britain. Meyer, a scientific practical gardener and author, who studied his art 
in the royal gardens at Paris, and afterwards spent some time in England, viewing the 
principal countrj'-seats, is of this opinion. {Pom. Franc. 1776.) He considei-s grounds 
laid out in the ancient style, as " insipid and monotonous, from their regularity', and only 
calculated to produce sadness and enimi. If their aspect strikes at the first glance, it fa- 
tigues and tires at the second, and certainly is revolting and disgusting at the third." 
He admires EngUsh gardens in England, but states three objections to their introduction 
in GeiTQany. The inferiority of the pasturage, the expense and want of space, and the 
necessity and advantage of attending to the culture of legumes and fruits. A mixed 
style is what he prefers, and what he adopted in the episcopal gardens which he laid out 
and managed at Wurzburg. 

204. 27ie first example of an English garden in Gcrmayiy, according to Reichard (Beise 
durch Deutschland, &c.), was the Garten der Schwobber, in "Westphalia, in-the neighbour- 
hood of Pyranont. It was laid out about the year 1 750, with_winding walks and clumps, 
and a rich collection of rare trees and plants. Hinuber's English garden at Hanover, 
and that of Marienwerder in its neighbourliood, were begun about the same time ; and 
soon after was commenced the splendid example exhibited by field-marshal Lacy, at 
Dornbach, near Vienna, and which, it is said, originated in the family connections of that 
warrior with England. It was finished in part by an English gardener, in 1770, at an 
expence of half a million of florins. Its picturesque ^^ews and distant prospects are much 
and deserv'edly admii-ed ; but on the whole, as an English garden, it owes much more to 
nature than to art. After this, the new taste, as Hirschfield remarks, became general in 
the empire. The most noble example of a garden in the ancient style in Germany, is 
that of Schoenbrunn, at "N^'ienna ; and of an English garden, according to our idea of 
what that ought to be, at Dronningard, near Copenhagen. Having given a general idea 
of the history of this branch of gardening in Germany, we shall now submit some slight 
notices of the art under the diflerent governments of the empire. 

205. Austria. Francis the First, about the middle of the seventeenth century, laid out or 
greatly enlarged the gardens of Schoenbrunn, after the plans of Steckhoven, a Dutch artist. 
These gardens occupy a plain and a long ridge or hill near the capital, and are much ad- 
mired for their extent and simple, though fomial grandeur. They are inferior to those 
of Peterlioft' and "\^ersailles in respect to fountains, and to those of Sans Souci and Lodo- 
visi for statues and antiques ; but for simple massive grandeur, for shade and verdure, 
and all the more simple beauties of the ancient style, they are, we believe, superior to 
any gardens now existing in Europe. 

The Aiigarten (eye-garden, or garden of pleasure) is a public promenade in the suburbs of Vienna. It 
is a square spot of ten acres, surrounded by an elevated broad terrace-walk, commanding extensive views ; 
and the area is planted and subdivided by walks. At the entrance is a magnificent coffee-house. It was 
formed during the reign of the benevolent emperor Joseph, whose particular wish it was, that it should be 
open to every class of citizens. 

The Prater, or meadow, is an extensive public promenade of a different description, and suited both for 
promenades en cheval and aii j^i^d- It forms part of an island in the Danube, and consists of an artificial 
grove used as a tea-garden ; an avenue as a course for carriages, but chiefly the scattered remains of an 
aiKient forest of oaks and thorns used for walking, and for exhibiting all manner of fetes. "We consider it 
the most agreeable scene of the kind on the continent. Here, in the siuumer evenings, all Vienna is as- 
sembled ; the imperial family mix familiarly with the people, and Francis the Third, unattended, and in 
the plainest garb, selects his table and rush-bottomed chair, and calls for his coffee and segar, like any 
other citizen. Economical in his administration, frugal in his personal expenses, and exemplary in his 
morals, he has nothing to fear from a personal familiarity with his subjects. Both the Prater and the gar- 
den were planted with full-grown trees ; for Joseph II. as'Pezzel, his biographer, informs us, wished to see 
the effect of all his improvements. 

The imperial gardens of Luxembourg are extensive, avowedly English, and display a good deal of our 
manner ; but more, as we have elsewhere observed {Ed. Enq/c. art. Landscape G.), in the taste of Brown 
than of Kent. 

206. In Hungary, Hirschfield, in 1783, says there are only the gardens of Esterhaz, a 
seat of Prince Esterhazy, worthy of notice, and that they were chiefly indebted to the 
beauty of the palace for their attractions. Dr. Townson, in 1793, mentions Count Vetzy 
as laying out his grounds in the English style, aided by a gai-dener who had been some 
time in England. The gardens of Count Esterhazy of Galantha, at Dotis, he considers 
very fine ; and those of the Bishop of Eslau, at Felcho-Tarkan, as romantic. Dr. 
Bright {Travels, 1815) mentions Kbrmond, the property of Prince Balhyani, as " con- 
taining a very handsome garden in the French taste, with considerable hot-houses and 
conservatories." Graaf Brunswick of INIarton Yassar, had passed some time in Eng- 
land, and his garden was laid out in the English stjde. Tlie favorite mansion' of Prince 



Book T, 



GARDENING IN GERMANY. 



45 



Esterhazy is Eisenstadt ; the palace has lately been improved, and the gardens, which 
were laid out in 1754 in the French taste, were, in 1814, transforming in the English 
manner. ( IVavels in Hungary, 346. ) 

207. At Dresden, the royal and principal private gardens exhibit nothing remarkable 
in the way of art. They were formed chiefly during the electorate of Frederick Augus- 
tus, King of Poland, and are remarkably confined, and by no means interesting in 
detail. The situation and environs of Dresden every one feels to be delightful ; but 
there is perhaps no city of the same rank on the continent equally deficient both in 
ancient and modern gardens. [Ed. Encyc. art. Latidscape Gard.) 

208. Prussia. Almost all the geometric gardens of Prussia were formed during the 
propitious reign of Frederick II. 

The Thiergarten at Berlin is the most extensive. It is a sort of public park or promenade, on a flat 
surface, and loose arenaceous soil, intersected by avenues and alleys, pierced by stars and pates (Voi/c, 
varied by obelisks and statues, and accommodated with public coffee-houses, sheds for music and rural 
f^tes, and open areas for exercising troops. 

The ancient gardens of Sans Souci at Potsda?n are in the mixed style of Switzer, with every appendage 
and ornament of the French, Italian, and Dutch taste. Various artists, but chiefly Manger, a German 
architect, and Salzmann, the royal gardener, (each of whom has published a voluminous description of his 
works there,) were employed in their design and execution ; and a detailed topographical history of the 
whole, accompanied by plans, elevations, and views, has been published by the late celebrated Nicholai 
of Berlin, at once an author, printer, bookbinder, and bookseller. The gardens consist of, 1. The hill, on 
the summit of which Sans Souci is placed. The slope in front of this palace is laid out in six terraces, 
each tqn feet high, and its supporting wall covered with glass, for peaches and vines. 2. A hill to the 
east, devoted to hot-houses, culinary vegetables, and slopes or terraces for fruit-trees. 3. A plain at the 
bottom of the slope, laid out in Switzer's manner, leading to the new palace ; and 4. A reserve of hot- 
houses, and chiefly large orangeries, and pits for pines to the west, and near the celebra-ted windmill, of 
which Frederick could not get possession. 

The Sans Souci scenery is more curious and varied, than simple and grand. The hill of glazed terraces 
crowned by Sans Souci has indeed a singular appearance ; but the woods, cabinets, and innumerable 
statues in the grounds below, are on too small a scale for the efrect intended to be produced ; and on the 
whole distract and divide the attention on the first view. Potsdam, with its environs, forms a crowded 
scene of architectural and gardening efforts ; a sort of royal magazine, in which an immense number of 
expensive articles, pillared scenery, screens of columns, empty palaces, churches, and public buildings, as 
Eustace and Wilson observe, crowd on our eyes, and distract our attention. Hirschfield, who does not 
appear to have been a great admirer of Frederick, and who, as the Prince do Ligne has remarked, was 
touched with the Anglomania in gardening, says, in 1785, " according to the last news from Prussia, 
the taste for gardens is not yet perfect in that country. A recent author vaunts a palace champetre, 
which presents as many windows as there are days in the year : he praises the high hedges, mountains 
of periwinkle, regular parterres of flowers, ponds, artificial Qxotioes, jets d'eau, and designs traced on a 
plain." {Theorie, &c. torn. V. 366.) 

209. The principal examples of the English style in Prussia are the royal gardens at 
the suinmer residence of Charlottenburg, near Berlin, begun by Frederick the Great, 
but chiefly laid out during the reign of Frederick William II. They are not extensive, 
and are situated on a dull sandy flat, washed by the Spree ; under which unfavorable 
circumstances, it would be wonderful if they were very attractive. In one part of these 
gardens, a Doric mausoleum of great beauty contains the ashes of the much-lamented 
queen. A dark avenue of Scotch fii-s leads to a circle of the same tree, 1.50 feet in 
diameter. Interior circles are formed of cypresses and weeping-willows ; and within 
these, is a border of white roses and white lilies (^Lilium, candidum). The form of tlie 
mausoleum is oblong, and its end projects from this interior circle, directly opposite the 
covered avenue. A few steps descend from the entrance to a platform, in which, on a 
sarcophagus, is a i-eclining figure of the queen : a stair at one side leads to the door of a 
vault containing her remains. 

210. The garden of the palace of the Heiligense {Jig. 15.) is avowedly English, and is 
in much better taste than that at Charlottenburg. The palace is cased externally with 

15 




46 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



marble ; it is in a chaste style of Grecian architecture, and praised by Wilson ( Tours on Lhe 
Conlinent, 1820), as one of the best pieces of architecture in Prussia. It is built close to 
the lake, and the kitchen is placed in an island, disguised as a temple, and connected by 
a subaquarian passage. Those sumptuous works were the joint productions of the coun- 
sellor Langhans, professor Hirschtield, and the architect Gontard, during Frederick 
William II. 's reign. 

211. Count Schuleiiburg's garden, near Freycnwalde, was laid out when Harris, author of Henrus, was 
envoy at Berlin, and that philosopher is said, by Hirschfield, to have rendered the count some assistance; 
but so transient are these things, that we were unable (in 1813) to find out its site. 

212. Denmark. The gardens of Marienlust, near Elsineur, which occupy the same 
space as those in which Hamlet's father was murdered, and those of the Prince Frede- 
Tick, near the city, may be considered tlie Greenwich and Hyde Parks of Copenhagen. 
Hirschfield mentions Ashberg, on the lake Pleon, as one of the finest residences in 
Denmark in his time, and enumerates nearly a dozen others as seats of great beauty. 

Dronningard may be considered as one of the best examples of the English style. It is an extensive 
park, the late residence of an eminent Danish banker, De Conninck, about sixteen miles from Copenhagen. 
The grounds are situated on a declivity, which descends to a natural lake of great extent,whose circuitous 
shores are verged with rich woody scenery, and country-houses. The soil here approaches more to a 
clayey loam than is general on the continent ; and the climate being cold, the turf is happily of a deep tone of 
green, and close texture. The oak and beech abound in these grounds, as well as firs, and a number of 
exotics. Buildings are not too frequent ; but there are several, and among them a hermitage, to which 
one of the family actually retired, on occasion of a matrimonial disappointment, and lived there for several 
years, till roused and restored to active life by the dangers of his country. There are numbers of small 
spots round Copenhagen, of considerable beauty, in which something of the English style has been imi- 
tated ; but in none of the gardens of the court has it been avowedly introduced. 

213. There are viany celebrated gardens in so extensive a country as Germany, that we can- 
not find room to particularise. The royal gardens of Munich, Stuttgard, and Hanover, 
the gardens of Baden, Hesse Cassel, Hesse Damistadt, Saxe Gotha, Weimar, Worlitz, 
Schweitzingen, and other places, are well deserving notice. Most of them will be 
found described in Hirschfield's work, or noticed in the Lettres et Pensees of the Prince 
de Ligne ; and the most modern are described in the Ahnanach du Jarditiage, a periodical 
work, published at Leipsic ; or, in the Gardener s Magazine, a quarterly periodical work 
in the German language. Indeed, tliere are specimens of English gardening, more or 
less extensive, in or near the capital towns of every state in Germany ; but, by far the 
greater number are of a very inferior description. From the arid soil and limited ex- 
tent result bad turf and an air of constraint ; and from too many buildings and walks, 
a distracting bustle and confusion. They are crowded with winding sanded paths con- 
tinually intersecting each other, little clumps, and useless seats or temples, and very fre- 
quently resemble more the attempts of mimics or caricaturists, than imitators of our taste. 
On the continent, indeed, the defects of the English style are more frequently copied 
than the beauties ; which, we presume, arises from the circumstances of few of those who 
lay out such gardens, having had a proper idea of the end in view in forming them, viz. 
a painter-like effect in every case, where it doe's not interfere with utility, or some other 
preferable beauty ; and, in many cases, an entire allusion to natural scenery. It is dif- 
ficult for a person of limited education and travel to form a distinct idea of what English 
gardens really are. The foreigner can seldom divest himself of the idea of a very limited 
and compact space as requisite for this purpose ; the reverse of which is the case with all 
our best scenes of picturesque beauty. The English gardens in the vicinity of Dresden, 
Brunswick, Hamburgh, Prague, Toplitz, Leipsic, and other places, have given rise to 
those remarks, in which even those professedly English in Prussia might be included. 
There are some exceptions which might be pointed out at Cassel, Stutgard, (for views of 
these gardens, see V Almanack du Jardinage,') Weimar, not unlike Kensington gardens, 
(see Description du Pare de Weimar, et du Jardinde Tieffurth, Erfurt, 1797,) the park of 
Fiirstenstein near Breslaw, Mergentheim, Worlitz, praised by the Prince de Ligne, and 
the walk at Munich, laid out by Count Eumford. {Ed. Encyc. art. Lajidscape Gard.) 

214. The Duke of Baden's gardens at Schweitzingen {fig. 16.), between the Rhine and the Mayne, are 
considered by Kraft as the most delightful in Germany. They cover a surface of about 300 acres, and con- 
tain the ancient castle of the Marquises of Baden (1). " The marc^uisate of Baden," says KratT:, " having 
progressively and considerably increased by means of a numerous lamily, wings were obliged to be built on 
each side, divided into apartments. The hot-houses, which form the'wings (2, 2), have been much in- 
creased. In front and more advanced, is the garden, in the French style, executed on a circular plan. 
In the middle of the avenue are four grass plots, bordered and enamelled with flowers. In the middle are 
little basins with fountains, one of which (3) throws the water sixty-seven feet high. On the right and 
left are plantations of odoriferous shrubs, orange-trees, embellished with statues and vases of the finest 
marble. Farther on are discovered the gardens, called the groves, situated on the right and left, laid out 
in different forms, and embellished with a number of figures, vases, statues, the temple of Minerva 
(4), the great rock surmounted by a figure of Pan (5), and Venus bathing (6). Higher up is the garden of 
the large grove, ornamented with numerous figures (7, 7, 7, 7), altars, tombs, urns, &c. Shady walks 
lead to the great basin (8), the gates leading to which have groups of figures on the pedestals (9, 9). The 
Grand Duke reserves the grand basin for the amusement of his family, par des petites navigations. A 
very magnificent Turkish mosque (10) is erected on the left Here begins the picturesqtie garden, with 
aitificial hills, vales, and slopes ; many different sorts of trees ; a temple of Mercury in ruins (ll)j and va- 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN GERMANY. 



47 



rious walks, leading through shrubberies to the right, till you arrive at the nursery-garden (12). From 
thence, crossing the canal, you arrive at the temple of Apollo (13), built of costly marble. In the garden 
behind, are rocks with allegorical figures, subterraneous caves and caverns ; at one side a family bath of 
marble (14), aviaries (15), cabinets, pleasure-garden, and basin for aquatic fowls (16& 17) ; small buildings, in 
the form of monuments (18), serving as cabinets of natural history, museums, a laboratory, &c. ; a pictu- 
resque garden and temple (19) ; a Roman aqueduct (20), supplied by a water-engine (21), a ruined aque- 
duct (22) ; the offices for the administration of the garden, with its appurtenances (23) ; a large theatre 
(24) ; residence of the director -general (25) ; of the inspectors of the garden (26) ; of the inspectors of the 
forest (27) ; of the huntsmen (28) ; of the foresters (29). Besides all these things and many more, there is 
a fruit-garden (30) ; kitchen-garden (31) ; private orangery (32) j area for greenhouse plants in summer (S3); 
and lofty water-engine for conveying water to the castle (34). 

16 




TTte Ducal gardens of Saxegotha are remarkable for their fine laf^ms, and for a ruined castle, which was 
first built complete, and then ruined expris, by firing cannon against it. 

SuBSECT. 2. German Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and Plants of 

Ornament. 

215. Floriculture was but little attended to in Germany, previously to the intro- 
duction of botanic gardens ; but on the establishment of these, plants of ornament were 
eagerly sought after in most of them : that of Altorf was famous for orange-trees, and 
that of Copenhagen for bulbous roots. 

216. The earliest private botanic garden in Europe, next to those of Italy, is said (^Keith's 
Botany, p. 18.) to have been one formed by William, Landgrave of Hesse, early in the 
sixteenth century. Since that period more private botanic gardens have been formed in 
Germany than in any other continental country. At Carlsrouhe, the Prince of Baden 
Dourlach formed a botanic garden in 1715, in which, in 1737, there were 154 varieties 
of oranges and lemons. Many might be named from that period to the present : the 
latest is that of the Prince of Salm-Dyck. It was laid out in 1820, by Blaikie, of 
St. Germains ; and is calculated to contain all the hardy plants which can be procured, 
arranged in groups, according to the Jussieuean system. The prince is advantageously 
known, by his works on succulent plants. 

217. The frst public botanic garden in Germany, according to Deleuze {Annates du 
Musee, torn. 8.), was established by the Elector of Saxony, at Leipzic, in 1580; this 
magistrate having undertaken the reform of public instruction throughout his dominions. 

Those ofGiessen, Altorf, Rintel, Ratishon, Vim, andJenna, soon followed. In 1605, Jungerman, a cele- 
brated botanist, obtained one for the university, which the landgrave had just founded at Giesstni. After 
having disposed of it, he went to Altorf, and solicited the same favor for this city. The senate of Nuremberg 
agreed to hia wishes in 1620, although the country was then a prey to the disasters of war. Jungerman, 



48 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Paet T. 



named Professor, gloried in the prosperity of a university which he looked upon as his work, and in 1635, 
he published the catalogue of the plants he had collected". Ten years afterwards they constructed a green- 
house, and the garden of Altorf {Prcf. to the Nurembei-g Hesperidcs) was then the most beautiful of Ger- 
many. That which Ernest, Count of Shawenbourg, established in 1621, at Kintel, in AVestphalia, also ac- 
quired much celebrity. Those of Ratisbon and Ulm are of the same epoch. From 1555, when the univei- 
sity of Jenna was founded, the professors of botany, during the summer season, took the students to the 
country to herbalise. They soon found it would ^e much more advantageous to collect in one place the 
plants they wished them to be acquainted with, and tlie government constructed a garden in 1629. The 
direction of it was given to Rolfine, who has left a curious work on plants, containing a history of the 
principal gardens of Europe of his time, 

Leipsic, towards the end of the seventeenth century, the garden of Gaspard Bose was celebrated. 
He introduced many American plants, and among others the dwarf almond. 

21S. At f'iciina and Frankfort, L'Ecluse prosecuted the study of botany, and enriched the gardens at 
those places wiih an immense number of plants. Maximilian II., \<ho occupied the imperial throne from 
156-t to 1576, seconded his views, and caused a magnificent garden to be constructed at Vienna for the 
plants which he collected, charging his ambassadors at Constantinople and other countries, to procure new 
plants ; and giving tlie care of the garden to L'Ecluse. Rodolph II., who succeeded Maximilian, also en- 
riched this garden, of v. hiCh Sweert published a catalogue [Floritegium) in 1612. 

Tlie Schoeiibrunn botanic garden was begun with tlie palace, in 1753, by the Emperor Francis I. He de- 
sired that that establishment should be wortliy of the imperial magniticcnce, and that it should extend the 
domain of botany, in bringing together vegetables then unknown in Europe. By the advice of Van 
Swieten, he procured tv. o celebrated florists, tlie one from Leyden and the other from Delft. The first, 
Adrian Steckhoven, directed the construction of the hot-houses ; and the second Van der Schott, brought 
all the plants which he could collect in the gardens and nurseries of Holland. Thus the lirst year they 
were in possession of many curious species ; but this was only a step towards the end they had in view. 
The Emperor proposed to the celebrated Jacquin to go Co the Antilles. This botanist departed in 1754, ac- 
companied by Van der Schott, and two Italian zoologists, employed to procure animals for the menagerie 
and the museum. These travellers visited Martinique, Grenada, St. Vincent, St. Eustace, St. Christopher, 
Jamaica, Cuba, Curaccao, and other places. In 1755 they sent home their first packages, and in 1756, Van 
der Schott arrived with a collection of trees and shrubs almost all in good condition. The trees were five 
or six feet high, and many had already borne fruit ; they were taken up with balls, and the earth envelopetl 
with leaves of bananas, tied by cords of Hibiscus tiliaceus. Thus packed, one with another, they weiglied 
100 lbs. . These vegetables, and the water necessary to water them, formed the greater part.of the cargo of 
a vessel which had been forwarded from Martinique for Leghorn. From Leghorn the plants were trans- 
ported on the backs of mules, and placed in tlie plain ground in the hot-houses built to receive them. The 
third and the fourth quantities came in tlie same manner. The fifth and sixth arrived from Caraccas, by 
Amsterdam. At last Jacquin left Havannali, and conducted to Schoenbrunn the last collection in 1759. 
During this time presents and purchases were received from other countries, and in projiortion as the. 
plants increased, they built hot-houses and orangeries, of a grandeur suitable to the plants destined to grow 
in them. One range is 270 feet long, and 30 feet high within ; another above 300 feet long, and about the 
same height ; and .there are three more ranges, each about 2-iO feet long. 

An accident in 1780 caused the loss of most of the plants of the great hot-house. Van der Schott being 
sick, the gardener who supplied his place, forgot, during a very cold night, to light the stoves. Perceiving 
it in the morning, he thought to remedy the evil in making a very brisk fire. This sudden change of tem- 
perature caused many of the trees to perish, whose trunks were of the thickness of the arm. To repair 
this loss, Joseph II. engaged the naturalists to undertake a new voyage. Professor Mtester was named 
chief of the expedition, with Dr. Stupiez, for a companion ; the gardeners Bose and Bredemyer, and the 
draftsman Mol. They went direct to Philadelphia, visited the United States, Florida, and'Xew Provi- 
dence, sent home a large collection, and Bose afterwards got charge of the garden of Schoenbrunn. 

The hot-houses of Schoenbrunn, To wnson observes {J'oi/age in Hungary), are the most spacious that 
have yet been constructed in Europe; the trees of the tropics there develope their branches in full 
liberty, and bear flowers and fruits. The most rare palms, the Cocos nucifera, the Caryota ureas, the 
£laes guinensis, grow there with vigor. The Corypha unibraculifera extends its large leaves for twelve 
feet round, and birds of Africa and America there fly from branch to branch among the trees of their 
country. Jacquin pubhshed successively three great "works, illustrating the plants of these gardens, viz. 
Hortus Schoen., looms plant. rarioru?ii, and Fragmenta Botanica. We found these gardens in 181-1 in 
suitable order ; but the edifices requiring renovation. It is difficult for a mere European traveUer to 
form any idea of the grandeur of the palms sending out their immense leaves from the capitals of their 
column-like trunks. 

There are at Vienna two other public botanic gardens j the one formed in what was a large gravel-pit 
exclusively devoted to the plants of Austria ; and the other of smaller extent, attached to the university, 
and devoted to a small general collection. Considerable compartments in the gardens of Princes 
Lichtenstein, and Schwartzenberg, in Leopoldstadt, are devoted to the culture of ornamental plants 
systematically arranged. 

The botanic garden of Pesth was established in 1812, and enlarged in 1815 ; it was placed under the 
direction of the professor Kitaibel, known in the scientific world as the author of Plantce rariores 
HungaruE. 

2iy The botanic garden of Dresden is small ; but is rich in exotics lately procured from England, and 
carefully managed by Traugott Seidel. 

The botanic garden of Berlin was established in the time of Frederick II. and is one of the few gardens 
in which the arrangement of the plants is iffccording to their native habitations. It has lately been greatly 
enriched by Link and Otto; as have those of Munich, Stuttgard, Baden, Hesse, and most others in 
Germany, by their respective directors and gardeners. 

The botanic garden of Kbnigsberg, was enlarged and re-arranged in 1812, and deserves notice for its 
singularly varied surface, and agreeable recluse walks. 

The botanic garden of Copenhagen was established before 1640. It was rich in hardy plants and trees, 
about the end of the last century, but is at present rather neglected. Sperlin in 1642, and Pauli in 1653, 
published catalogues of this garden. 

220. The taste for jytants in Germany is vei^y considerable among the higher classes ; and 
not only public bodies but piivate gentlemen, and princes of every degree, spend a much 
greater proportion of their income, in the encouragement of this branch of gardening, 
than is done by the wealthy of England. Since the restoration of tranquillitj', this taste 
has rtjceived a new stimulus by the opportunity afforded of procuring plants from 
England. Among the lower classes, however, a taste for flowers is less popular in 
Germany than in Italy, Holland, and France ; probably owing to their frugal habits, 
and comparatively sober enjoyments. 



Book I. 



GARDENiNa IN GERMANY. 



49 



SuBSECT. 3. German Gardening, in respect to horticultural Productions. 

221. In all probability horticulture was first introduced to Germany by the Romans^ 
and afterwards i-evived by the religious houses. The native fruits and culinary plants 
of Germany are the same as those of France, already enumerated. In the museum of the 
arsenal in Dresden, are still preserved, and shown to strangers, the gardening tools with 
which Augustus the Second, Elector of Saxony, worked v/ith his own hands. This 
magistrate died in 1566. He is said to have planted the first vineyard in Saxony, and 
to have greatly increased the varieties of the hardy fruits. 

222. The more common fruits of Germany, the cherry, the pear, the plum, and the 
apple, are natives, or naturalised in the woods. Good varieties would no doubt be 
brought from Italy by the monks, who establislied themselves in Germany in the dark 
ages, and from the convents be introduced to the gardens of the nobles, as the latter 
became somewhat civilised. This would more especially be the case with those pro- 
vinces situated on the Rhine, where the genial soil and climate would bring them to 
greater perfection, and, in time, render them more common than in the nortliern districts. 
Dr. Diel, however, a native of the best part of this tract of country [Nassau Dietz)^ 
complains {Obst. Orangerie in Scherben, 1st hand.), so late as 1804, that apples, pears, and 
cherries, were most commonly raised from seeds, and planted in orchards, without being 
grafted. 

223. Tlie finer fruits only thrive in the south of Germany, the apricot appears to have 
been some time introduced in Austria and Hungary, and produces well as a standard in' 
the neighbourhood of Vienna. The peach is most commonly grown against walls. The 
mulberry produces leaves for the silk-worm as far north as Frankfort on the Oder, but 
ripens its fruit with difficulty, unless planted against walls. The vine is cultivated as far 
north as the fifty-second degree of latitude, in vineyards, and somewhat farther in gardens. 
The fig, to nearly the same extent, against walls, its branches being every where protected 
in winter ; it is, however, a rare fruit in Germany. At Vienna it is kept in large tubs 
and boxes, and housed during winter in the wine-cellars. 

224. The jnne-apj^le, Beckman informs us, was first brought to maturity by Baron 
Munchausen, at Schwobber, near Hamelin. The large buildings erected by the baron for 
this fruit, are described in the Nuremberg Hesperides for 1714. It was ripened 
also by Dr. Kaltschmidt at Breslaw, in 1702, who sent some fruit to the imperial 
court. At present there are very few pineries to be found throughout the whole empire. 

In Austria the best varieties of hardy fruit-trees are said {Brighfs Travels) to haye been introduced 
from Holland, by Van der Schott, about the middle of the seventeenth century ; but many of them must have 
been in the imperial gardens long before this period, from the connection (Si Austria with the Netherlands ; 
yet Meyer, in 1776, speaking of fruits, says, that " the age of Schoenbrunn will be for Franconia what that 
of Louis the Fourteenth was for France." The Rev. J. V. Sickler, in Saxegotha, Counsellor Diel, at Nassau 
Dietz, and Counsellor Ransleben, at Berhn, have established, within the last fifty years, fruit-tree nurse- 
ries, where all the best Dutch, French, and English varieties may be purchased. Diel and Ransleben 
prove the sorts, by fruiting the original specimens in pots in, a green-house. Sickler has fruited an 
immense number of sorts in the open air, and published descriptions of them in Der Teutsche Obst. 
Gartner ; a work of which 48 volumes have already appeared. 

In Hanover George XL, after establishing an agricultural society, is said to have introduced the best 
English fruits about 1751. 

In Saxony the Earl of Findlater resided many years, and planted a vineyard at his country-seat in the 
neighbourhood of Dresden, said to be the most northerly in Germany. He introduced flued walls, and 
trained the best sorts of English peaches and apricots on them. The whole of his horticultural efTorts 
and his chateau were destroyed by the French army in 1813, for no other reason than his being an Eng- 
lishman. A public walk and seat at Carlsbad remain to commemorate his taste and public spirit. 

At Potsdam the best fruits were introduced by Frederick II., who was passionately fond of them, 
and cultivated all the best Dutch varieties on walls, espaliers, under glass, and in the open garden. He 
was particularly fond of pine-apples, of which he grew a great number in pits ; and is censured by an 
English traveller (Burnett), because, on his death-bed, he made enquiries after the ripening of one of them, 
of which he expected to make a last bonne bo^eche. Potsdam and Schwobber are the only parts of Germany 
where forcing has ever been practised to any extent. There are now in the royal gardens of Prussia, 
excellent pine-apples reared under the care of the director Linne, who has visited England. 

At Weimar, the chief proprietor of the Landes Industrie comtoir, and author of a work on potatoes, has 
an excellent garden and extensive hot-houses where he raises the finest fruits. The whole, Jacobs ob- 
serves {Troiiels, 1819, 332.), is kept in excellent order. 

In Hungary horticulture has been much neglected, but fruit-tree nurseries were established there by 
government in 1808, and subsequently by private gentlemen. Plums, Dr. Bright informs us^ are culti- 
vated in order to make damson brandy. The Tokay wine is made from the variety of grape figured and 
described by Sickler, in his Garden Magazine of 1804, as the Hmgarianblue. The soil of the Tokay vine- 
yards is a red brown clay, mixed with sand, incumbent on a clayey slate rock ; and it is observed by a 
Hungarian writer quoted by Dr. Bright, that " in proportion as the soil is poor and stony, and the vine 
feeble, the fruit and wine, though small in quantity, become more excellent in their quality." Tokay 
wine is made in the submontane district which extends over a space about twenty miles round the town 
of that name. The grapes are left on the plants till they become dry and sweet, they are then gathered 
one by one, put in a cask with a perforated bottom, and allowed to remain till that portion of the juice 
escape, which will run from them without any pressure. This, which is called Tokay essence, is generally 
in very small quantity. The grapes are then put into a vat and trampled with the bare feet; to the 
Equeezed mass is next added an equal quantity of good wine, which is allowed to stand for twenty-four hours, 
and is then strained. This juice, without farther preparation, becomes the far-famed wine of Tokay, 
which is difficult to be obtained, and sells in Vienna at the rate of 12/. per dozen. The Tokay vineyards 
are chiefly the property of the emjieror. 



50 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



In Denmark, notwithstanding the severity of the climate, they succeed in bringing to a tolerable degree 
of perfection most of the best sorts of fruits. Glass frames, portable canvass covers, and mats, are used to 
protect the blossom of the more tender trees against walls ; and the hardier sorts, as the apple and cherry 
ore, in spring, before the blossom expands, watered every night, in order at once to protect and retard it 
by an envelope of ice. This ice is again thawed off before sunrise by copious waterings. 

225. The culinary vegetables of Germany are the same as those of Britain ; but they 
are without the greater part of our best varieties. The Brassica tribe and edible roots 
arrive at greater perfection there than in France. The popular sorts are the field-cabbage and 
the borecoles ; they are used newly gathered, and boiled and eaten with meat, in broths 
or soups, and pickled in the form of sour kraut for winter use. The potatoe, kidney- 
bean, onion, and lettuce, are also in general use ; and the first gardens possess all the 
oleraceous and acetaceous vegetables grown in France and Holland. 

SuBSECT. 4. German Gardening, as to jilanting Timber-trees and Hedges. 

226. Planting as a matter of jirojit has been little attended to in Germany from the num- 
ber and extent of the native forests. In some districts, however, Pomerania for example, 
barren sandy tracts are sown with acorns and Scotch pine-seeds, chiefly for the sake of 
fuel and common husbandry timber. Much attention, as Emmerich informs us {Culture 
of Forests), and as appears by the number of German works on Forsttvissenschaft, is in 
general paid to the management of forests already existing ; as far as we have been able 
to observe, this extends to filling up vacancies by sowing, and occasionally draining and 
enclosing ; thinning and pruning are little attended to in most districts. The oak, the 
beech, and the Scotch pine, are the prevailing native trees of Germany. 

227. Rows of trees along the public roads are formed and preserved with great care, 
especially in Prussia. The mulberry is the tree used in some of the warmer districts, 
and in other places the lime and the elm ; the Lombai'dy poplar is also common hear 
most towns of Germany, especially Berlin, Dresden, and Leipzic. Some attention is 
every where paid to public avenues ; and the highways being, as in France, generally 
kept up by the government, improvements can be executed promptly and with effect. 
Tliere being, in general, no accompanying hedges, and the trees being trained with naked 
stems to ten or fifteen feet high, according to the lowness or exposure of the situation, 
little injury is done to the materials of tlie road in wet weather. The breeze passes 
freely between the stems of the trees. The traveller and his horses or cattle are shaded 
during sunshine, and sheltered during storms ; and the man of taste is furnished with a 
continued frame and foreground to the lateral landscapes. 

228. Hedges, though not general in Germany, are used on the Rhine and in Holstein, 
the plants generally hawthorn, but sometimes hornbeam or a mixture of native shrubs. 
Hungary is the most backward province in respect to planting and hedges, as well as to 
every thing else. A hedge there is rare ; and there are scarcely any public avenues be- 
yond Presburg. Existing woods are subjected to a sort of management for the sake of 
the fuel they afford, and for their produce in timber and charcoal for the mines. 

SuBSKCT. 5. German Gardening, as em^nrically practised. 

229. The use of gardens is as general in the best districts of Germany as in England ; 
but in Hungary and some parts of Bohemia, Gallicia, and Prussia, many of the low^er 
orders are without them, or if permitted to enclose a few yards of ground near their 
wooden hovels, they seem too indolent and indifferent, or. too much oppressed by the 
exactions of their landlords, to do so. The cabbage tribe, and cliiefly red greens, and 
the potatoe, are the universal plants of the cottage-gardens of Germany ; lettuce, pease, 
onions, and turnips, with some other sorts, and the common fruit-trees, are introduced in 
some districts. Flowers are not very general, but the rose, thyme, and mint, are to be 
seen in many places, and a variety of ornamental plants in the better sort of cottage- 
gardens. 

230. Farmer s gardens, as in most countries, are a little larger than those of the 
lowest class of cottagers ; but inferior in point of order and neatness to that of the man 
who lives in his own cottage. 

231. The gardens of the hereditary families are not, in general, much attended to ; their 
appearance is too frequently that of neglect and disorder. Cabbage, potatoes, apples, 
and pears, and perhaps a few onions, are the produce expected from them ; these are cul- 
tivated by a servant, not always a gardener, and who has generally domestic occupations 
to perform for the family. It will readily be imagined that, in such an extensive country, 
there are innumerable exceptions ; in these, the gardens are better arranged, and the pro- 
duce of a more varied description. Next to the gardens of the princes or rulers, the best 
are those of the wealthy bankers and citizens. These are richly stocked with fruit-trees, 
generally contain hot-houses, and are liberally kept up. Some of them contain collections 
of exotics. The best private gardens in Denmark belong to this class, and the remark 
will apply in the vicinity of all towns and cities in proportion to their rank as com- 
mercial places. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN GERMANY. 



51 



232. There are very few good gardens in Huvgary; that of Prince Esterhazy, the greatest 
proprietor of that country, is extensive, abounds in hot-houses, and contains a very full 
collection of plants. The prince has an English gardener, whom he sends frequently to 
this country to collect whatever is new. 

233. The German princes and rulers are in general attached to gardens, and have very 
considerable ones at their principal residences ; some of these have been mentioned, and 
various others might be added. These gardens are under the direction of intelligent men, 
who, in general, have spent part of their time in botanic gardens ; and, in many cases, 
have studied or practised in Holland, or in the Paris gardens. 

234. There are market-gardens near most large towns, but nurseries are mucli less com- 
mon. There are extensive gardens of both sorts at Hamburg ; but the best fruit-tree 
nurseries are supposed to be those of Sickler and Diel already mentioned. There is a 
good nursery at Wurtzburg, in Franconia, established by Meyer ; one at Frankfort on the 
Oder, and three at Vienna. In most places, the principal market-gardeners propagate a 
few fruit-trees for sale. 

235. The operative part of gardening, in the better classes of gardens, is performed by 
men, who have, agreeably to the general custom in Germany, not only served an appren- 
ticeship, but travelled and worked for a certain time in different parts of the country, or 
of other countries. 

T?ie term of apprenticeship is tliree years and a half, and for travel three years, unless the apprentice is 
<he son of a master-gardener ; in which case, the term for travel is reduced to one year. All apprentices 
must be able at least to read and write, and are taught to draw, and furnished with written secrets in 
gardening by their master, during the term of apprenticeship. "When that is completed, the youth is initi- 
ated into what may be called the free-masonry of gardening, and, being furnished with a pass- word, he pro- 
ceeds from one town to another, till he can get work. Till this happens, his pass-word, and also a passport from 
tlie gardeners' society of the place where he was initiated, procures for him, at every Gartner herberge, or 
gardeners' lodging-house, lodging and food, and as much money as will supply his wants till he arrives at 
the next inn of a similar description. In this way he may walk over the whole of the German empire, 
Denmark, and a part of Holland, at the general expense ; the numerous ramifications of the society ex- 
tending over the whole of this immense tract. Such institutions exist for every trade in Germany, but being 
disliked by the governments, and being politically considered of an arbitrary and injurious nature, are now 
on the decline. On his return from probation, the travelled journeyman is entitled to take a master's 
place ; and very commonly he continues travelling till he hears of one. The regular German gardener is 
a careful, neat-handed, and skilful workman ; and, if allowed sufficient time, or assistance, will keep a 
garden in good order, and produce all the crops required of him in their proper seasons. 

236. The artists or architects of gardens, in Germany, are generally the Land baumeister, 
or those architects who have directed their attention chiefly to country-buildings. Where 
only a kitchen or flower-garden is to be formed, an approved practical gardener is com- 
monly reckoned sufficient. It occasionally happens, that a nobleman, who wishes to lay 
out an extensive garden, after fixing on what he considers a good gardener of some edu- 
cation, and capable of taking plans, sends him for a year or two to visit the best gardens 
of England, Holland, or France. On his return, he is deemed qualified to lay out the 
garden required ; which he does, and afterwards attends to its culture, and acts as a 
garden-architect ( Garten baumeister) to the minor gentry of his neighbourhood. 

SuBSECT. 6. German Gardening, as a Science, and as to the Authors it has produced, 

237. The Germans are a scientific people : they are a reading people, and in conse- 
quence the science of every art, in so far as developed in books, is more generally known 
there than in any other country. Some may wish to except Scotland ; but, though the 
Scotch artisan reads a great deal, his local situation and limited intercourse with other 
nations, subject him to the influence of the particular opinions in which he has been edu- 
cated : he takes up prejudices at an early period, and with difficulty admits new ideas 
from books. On the other hand, the Germans of every rank are remarkable for liberality 
of opinion : all of them travel ; and, in the course of seeing other states, they find a 
variety of practices and opinions, different from those to which they have been accustomed ; 
prejudice gives way ; the man is neutralised ; becomes moderate in estimating what 
belongs to himself, and willing to hear and to learn from others. 

238. There are horticultural societies and jyrofessorships of rural economy in many of the 
universities ; one or two gardeners' magazines, and almanacks of gardening ; and some 
<iminent vegetable physiologists are Germans. Even in Hungary, it appears (Bright's 
Travels), a Georgicon, or college of rural economy, has been established by Graff* Festetits 
at Keszthely, in which gardening, including the culture and management of woods and 
copses, forms a distinct professorship. The science of France may be, and we believe is, 
greater than that of Germany in this art, but it is accumulated in the capital ; whereas, 
here it emanates from a great number of points distributed over the country, and is conse- 
quently rendered more available by practical men. The minds of the gardeners of France 
are, from general ignorance, less fitted to receive instruction than those of Germany ; 
their personal habits admit of less time for reading ; their climate and soil require less 
artificial agency. The German gardener is generally a thinking, steady person ; the 
climate, in most places, requires his vigilant attention to culture, and his travels have en- 

E 2 



52 HISTORY OF GARDENING. Part I. 

larged liis views. Hence he becomes a more scientific artisan than the Frenchman, and is 
in more general demand in ether countries. Some of the best gardens in Poland, Russia, 
and Italy, are under the care of Germans. 

239. The Germans have produced few original authors on gardening, and none that can 
be compared to Quintinye or Miller. They have translations of all the best European 
books ; and so vigilant are they in this respect, that even a recent and most useful work on 
exotic gardening, by Gushing, hardly known in England, has not escaped the Leipsic 
book-makers. Hirschfield has compiled a number of works, chiefly on landscape-gar- 
dening ; J. V. Sickler and Counsellor Diel have written extensively on most departments 
of horticulture, especially on the hardy fruits. (^Sulzers Theory of the Fine Arts ; 
Ersches Handhiich,Sx.c. 2 Band. \ Abth.) 

Sect. V. Of the Rise, Progress, and j^resent State of Gardening in Sxdtzerland. 

240. Extensive gardens are not to be expected in a country of comparative equalisation 
of property, like Switzerland ; but no where are gardens more profitably managed or more 
neatly kept, than in that country. " Nature," Hirschfield observes, " has been liberal to 
the inhabitants of Switzerland, and they have wisely profited from it. Almost all the 
gardens are theatres of true beauty, without vain ornaments or artificial decorations. 
Convenience, not magnificence, reigns in the country-houses ; and the villas are distin- 
guished more by their romantic and picturesque situations, than by their architecture." 
Pie mentions several gardens near Geneva and Lausanne ; Delices is chiefly remarkable 
because it was inhabited by Voltaire before he purchased Ferney, and La Grange and 
La Boissier are to this day well known places. Ferney is still eagerly visited by every 
stranger, but with the chateau of the Neckar family, that of the Empress Josephine, of 
Beauharnois, and others, eulogised in the local guides, pre- 
sent nothing in the way of our art particularly deserving of 
notice ; though their situations, looking down on so mag- 
nificent a lake, the simplicity of their architecture, and the 
romantic scenery by which they are surrounded, render 
them delightful retirements, and such as but few countries 
can boast. The villa-gardens excel in rustic buildings 
{fig. 17.) and arbors ; and are, for the most part, a mixture 
of orchards on hilly surfaces, cultivated spots, and rocks. 
However insignificant such grounds may look on paper 
{fig. 18.), in the reality they are pleasing and romantic. Tlie public promenades at 
Berne are most beautiful, and kept with all the care of an English flower-garden. Swit- 

18 zerland has the pecu- 

liar advantage of pro- 
ducing a close turf, 
which in most places, 
and particularly at 
Lausanne and Berne, 
is as verdant as in 
England. Harte 
says great part of the 
Pays de Vaud is like 
the best part of Berk- 
shire ; and indeed 
every one feels that 
this is the country 
most congenial to an 
Englishman's taste 
and feelings. 



241. The first botajiic garden which appeared in Sivitzerland was that of the celebrated 
Conrad Gesner, at Zurich, founded before the middle of the sixteenth century. He had 
not, Deleuze observes, sufficient fortune to obtain much ground, or to maintain many 
gardeners ; but his activity supplied every thing, and he assembled in a small spot what 
he had been able to procure by his numerous travels and extensive correspondence. Public 
gardens were, in the end of this century, established at Geneva, Basil, and Berne, and 
subsequently in most of the cantons. The first of these gardens at present is that of 
Geneva, lately enlarged and newly arranged under the direction of that active and highly 
valued botanist, Decandolle. The garden of Basil is rich in the plants of all the moun- 
tainous regions which lie around it, including the Tyrol and Piedmont. A taste for 
flowers is perhaps more popular in Switzerland than in Germany ; for though fi-ugality is 
not less an object in every branch of rural economy, yet real independence is more gene- 





Book I. 



GARDENING IN SWEDEN AND NORWAY. 



55 



ral ; a poor man here, as Burns used to say, has generally some other estate than that of 
sin and mise-n/ ; some little spot that he can call Ijis own, and which he delights to cultivate 
and ornament. Speaking of Zurich, Simond observes {Tour, &c. 1819, p. 404.), " Haer- 
lem excepted, there is not a town where more attention was ever paid to fine flowers : 
many new plants, as the Hortensia, Volkameria, &c., are here grown in perfection. The 
taste for flowers is particularly displayed on the occasion of the birth of a child. When the 
news is carried about to all the relations and friends of the family ; the maid is dressed 
in her best attire, and carries a huge nosegay of the finest flowers the season afibrds. 

242. Hortictdture is carefulli/ jn^nctised in Switzerland; vineyards are formed as far 
north as Lausanne ; and the apple, pear, plum, cherry, and wal- 
nut are common on every farm ; the three first are in every cottage- 
garden. The filbert, gooseberry, currant, raspberry, and strawberry 
are natives ; but only the filbert, raspberry, and strawberry are com- 
mon in the woods and copses. In the sheltered valleys of this country, 
the apple and the pear are most prolific. Stewed pears is a common 
dish among the cottagers in autumn ; the fruit is also dried, and in 
winter forms an excellent soup ingredient. The cabbage, the potatoe, 
the white beet grown for the leaves as spinach, and their foot-stalks 
as chard, and the kidney-bean for haricots and soups, are the popular 
vegetables. Particular attention is paid to bees, which are kept in 
neat rustic sheds {Jig. 19.), or the hives carefully thatclied with bark 
or moss. 

243. There is little or no forest planting in Sivitzerland, but hedges of hawthorn are not 
uncommon. The walnut is there a very common high-road tree in the autumnal months, 
and furnishes the pauper traveller with the principal part of his food. Poor Italians have 
been known to travel from Naples and Venice to Geneva on this sort of fare. They 
begin with Indian corn and grapes^ v/hich they steal from the fields, till they arrive at 
Milan, and the rest of the road they depend on walnuts, filberts, and apples. 

Sect. VI. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of Gardening in Sweden and Norway. 

244. Gardening is patronised hy the higher classes, and practised round the principal 
towns of Sweden and Norway. *' All the Swedes with whom I have ever met," observes 
Hirschfield, *' whether elevated by birth, or enlightened by education, were estimable 
friends of beautiful nature and of gardens." Sir J. E. Smith {Lin. Trans., vol. i.) ex- 
presses' an equally high opinion of this people. Mediocrity of circumstances, a poor court, 
political liberty, and a varied and comparatively unproductive country, seem to have 
contributed to give a more thinking turn to the Swedish nobles, than in countries natu- 
rally prolific. Their immense public works, canals, harbors, and excellent roads, careful 
agriculture, extensively worked mines, botanic gardens, literary institutions, and scientific 
authors are proofs of what we assert. 

245. The ancient style of gardening appears to have been introduced to Sweden, at least 
previously to 1671 ; for Hermand, who published his Regnum Suecia in that year, men- 
tions the gardens of the palace as well as the Vivarium, or park. The gardens, he says, 
were used for delight and recreation. They lay between the Palatium and Vivarium, 
and the latter contained some wooden buildings, in which were kept lions, leopards, and 
bears. This garden and park appear to have been formed by Gustavus Adolphus, about 
1 620., Charles the Twelfth procured plans from Le Notre, and had the trees and plants 
sent from Paris. It is remarked by Dr. Walker, as a curious fact, that though tlie yew- 
tree is a native of Sweden, those plants of this species sent from Paris, to plant Le Notre's 
designs, died at Stockholm the first winter. 

246. The mixed style is exemplified in Haga, formed on a rocky situation, about the 
middle of the eighteenth century, by Gustavus III., with the assistance of Masretier. It 
is the Trianon of Sweden. The approach is a winding walk through rocks and luxuriant 
verdure. Drottningholm is a royal palace, formed by the same prince on the island of 
that name. The gardens are in a sort of Anglo-Chinois manner, but as far as art is con- 
cerned, in no respect remarkablei Both these gardens are surrounded or intermingled 
with water, rocks, Scotch pirie, spruce fir, arid buildings, forming a picturesque assem- 
blage of saxatile and verdant beauty. There are son*ie confined spots laid out in the 
English taste, chiefly by British merchants in the neighbourhood of Gottenburg, as there 
are also near Christiana and Tronijem, in Norway ; but it may be remarked, that this 
style is not \ikely to be generally adopted in either country, because they already possess 
much greater beauties of the same kind, which it is our aiin to create, and with which 
those created would not bear a comparison. 

247. A taste for flowers is not popular in Sweden ; if a farmer or cottager has any spare 
room in his garden, he prefers rearing a few plants of tobacco. But the study of every 
branch of natural history is in rejiute among the higher classes and literati j and the ce- 

E 3 




54 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



lebrity of the Swedish botanists, and of the Upsal garden, is universal. It was difficult, 
Deleuze observes, to form vegetable collections in the nortliern countries ; but industry 
can conquer obstacles, and the more precautions necessary to secure the plants from the 
vigor of the climate, the more will culture be perfected. 

248. The botanic garden of Upsal was founded in 1657, under the auspices of King 
Charles Gustavus, and by the attention of Olaus Rudbeck. This learned man, seconded 
by the credit of the Count of Gardie, chancellor of the academy of Upsal, and who had 
himself a fine botanic garden at Jacobsdahl, obtained funds necessary for the construction 
of a garden and green-house, and to collect foreign plants j and he augmented its riches 
by the gift he made of his own garden in 1662. The progress of this establishment 
may be seen by comparing the three catalogues given by Rudbeck in 1658, 1666, 1685. 
The latter enumerates 1870 plants, among which are 630 distinct species of exotics. 
{Bib. Banksiana.) In 1702, the fire which consumed the half of the city of Upsal, re- 
duced the green-house to ashes, and the garden was in a deplorable condition till 1740, 
when its walls were rebuilt. Two years afterwards the botanical chair and the direction 
of the garden were given to Linnaeus ; and the university, undoubtedly excited by that 
reformer of natural history, took charge of all the necessary expenses for the acquisition 
and preservation of plants. Linnaeus, feeling how essential it was to be assisted in all the 
details of culture, obtained Diderich Nutzel, a clever gardener, who had visited attentively 
the gardens of Germany, Holland, and England, and who had then the charge of that of 
ClifFort, in Holland. He there constructed new green- houses, intended for plants of 
different climates; and he solicited successfully the principal botanic gardens of 
Europe for specimens. Soon after, several of his pupils, whom he had excited with enthu- 
siasm for botany, went across the seas to collect seeds and specimens ; and many tropical 
plants, first grown at Upsal, were sent from thence to the southern countries of Europe. 

The description and plan of the garden of Upsal may be seen in the Ama-nitatcs Academiccs. (Dissert 7. 
t. i. p. 172.) Linnceus, in 17-18 and 1/53, published the catalogue of the plants cultivated there, and since his 
time, others have appeared, containing the additions which hav« been made by his successors. In 1804, 
the large orangery, built by Linnzeus, was found to be considerably out of repair, and was taken down and 
rebuilt. A magnificent lecture-room and museum was at the same time added. The ceilings of these 
rooms are supported by columns, which being hollow, are used as flues, and thus afford an elegant and 
effectual means of heating the air. On the whole, the garden is respectably kept up; and many hardy 
plants, natives of North America in particular, are found here in greater luxuriance than in France or 
Germany. 

249. In horticulture the Swedes are considered as successful operators ; but their short 
summers are adverse to the culture of many sorts of fruits and culinary vegetables in the 
open air ; and there is not yet sufficient wealth to admit of forcing, or forming artificial 
climates to any extent. The apple, pear, and plum ripen their fruits in the best districts, 
especially in warm situations ; but where the better varieties are grown, they are always 
planted against walls, and protected, as in Denmark. The Rubus c/ianuemorus, or cloud- 
berry (fig. 20.), is very common in 
Lapland; its fruit is delicious, and 
sent in immense quantities, in autumn, 
from all the north of the Gulf of 
Bothnia, to Stockholm, where it is 
used for sauces, in soups, and in mak- 
ing vinegar. Dr. Clarke was cured of 
a bilious fever, chiefly from eating 
this fruit. There are a few forcing- 
houses near Gottenburg and Stockholm 
for peaches and vines ; and one or two 
instances of pines being attempted in 
pits near the capital and in East Goth- 
land. The borecoles, red and green, the 
rutabaga and potatoe are the popular 
vegetables ; but the best gardens have most of the Dutch and English varieties of the 
culinary tribe. , 

250. The towns and cities of Norway, Dr. Claite informs us {Scandinavia, ch. 17. 1806), 
were formerly supplied with culinary herbs from England and Holland ; but gardening 
became more general after the publication by Christian Gartner of a manual adapted to 
Sweden. Now all sorts of vegetables are common round Tronijem. The gardens of the 
citizens are laid out in the Dutch taste, and full of fruits and flowers. Of these are enu- 
merated, apples, pears, plums, cherries, strawberries, cabbages, cauliflowers, turnips, cu- 
cumbers, potatoes, artichokes, lupines, stocks, carnations, pinks, lilies, roses, and many 
other garden-flowers. In the garden of the minister of Enontekis {Jig. 21.), a village 
situated 287 miles north of Tornea, and perhaps the best garden in Lapland, Dr. Clarke 
found pease, carrots, spinach, potatoes, turnips, parsley, and a few lettuces. The tops of 
the potatoes were used boiled, and considered a delicate vegetable. 




Book I. 



GARDENING IN RUSSIA. 



56 




251. Planting is little wanted in Sweden-, for seedling Scotch pines, spruce firs, and 
birch, rise up in abundance -wherever old ones have been cut down. Enclosures in Swe- 
den, as in Switzerland, are most frequently made of stone or of wood. Trees are planted 
along the roads in several places, and especially near Stockholm. The lime, the birch 
and the ash, or trembling poplar, are the species used. 

Sect. VII. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of Gardening in Ricssia. 

252. The histoiy of gardening in Russia is very different from that of any of those 
countries which have yet come under review. Peter the Great sought, by one giant stride, 
to raise the character of liis nation to a level with that of other countries ; and, by extra- 
ordinary effort?, inti-oduced excessive refinement amidst excessive barbarism ; asembled 
magnificent piles of architecture in a marsh, and created the most smnptuous palaces and 
extensive parks and gardens, in the bleak pine and birch forests which surrounded it. As 
a man of Cronstadt rhymes, 

" Built a city in a bog, 

And made a Christian of a hog." 
Nothing can be more extraordinary in the way of gardening, than these well-known 
facts, that a centiuy ago there was scarcely such a thing, in any part of Russia, as a 
garden ; and, for tlie last fifty years, there have been more pine-apples grown in the neigh- 
bourhood of Petersburg than in all the other counti-ies of the continent put together. 

SuBSECT. 1. Russian Gardeyiing, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

253. Riissian gardening, as an art of desigji, began, like every other art, with Peter 
the Great. This emperor's first effort was made in 1714, when the gai-den of the sum- 
mer-palace, on the banks of the Neva, in Petersburg, was laid out in the Dutch taste. 
But the grandest and most superb garden, in the geometric manner, is that which he con- 
structed soon afterwards, about thirty wersts from the city, on the shores of the gulf. 
This imperial residence, as far as respects the gardens, has been justly called the Versailles 
of Russia ; and the Prince de Eigne, an excellent judge, gives the preference to its water- 
works. The whole was originally designed and laid out by Le Blond, a pupil of Le Notre, 
and for some time court architect of St. Petersburg, This, with the other suburban 
palaces and gardens, have been minutely described by Georgi, and more generally by 
Storch, from whom we select the following outline : — 

25i. Peterhqffl in respect to situation, is perhaps unrivalled. About five hundred fathoms from the sea- 
shore this region has a second cliflF, almost perpendicular, near twelve fathoms high. Bordering on this 
precipice stands the palace, therebj- acquiring a certain peculiar prospect over the gardens and the gulf, to 
the shores of Carelia and St. Petersburg, and to Cronstadt. It was built in the reign of Peter the Great 
by the architect Le Blond, but has received, under the succeeding monarchs, such a variety of improve-' 
ments, that it has become a sort of specimen of the several tastes that prevailed in each of these ffiras, the 
influence whereof is visible in the numerous architectural ornaments, wliich are all highly gilt. The inside is 
correspondent with the destination of this palace; throughout are perceptible the remains of antiquated 
splendor, to which is contrasted the better taste of modern times. The gardens are more interesting by 
their peculiar beauties. The upper parts of them, before the land-side of the palace, are disposed into 
walks, plantations, and parterres, which acquire additional elegance by a large basin and canal, plentifully 
furnished with fountains of various designs and forms. The declivity before the back-front of the palace 
towards the sea has two magnificent cascades, rolling their streams over the terraces into large basins, and 
beneath which vast sheets of water^ we walk as under a vault, without receiving wet, into a beautiful grotto. 
The whole space in front of this declivity, down to the sea-shorr, is one large stately garden in the old- 
fashioned style, and famous for its jcts-d'eau, and artificial water- tvorks. Some of them throw up columns of 
water, a foot and a half in diameter, to a height of two and a ha)f or three fathoms. A pellucid canal, lined 
with stone, ten fathoms wide, running from the centre of the palace-fagade into the gulph of Finland, divides 
these gardens in two. In a solitary wood stands the summer-hc use, called Monplaisir, which among other 
things is remarkable for its elegant kitchen, wherein the Empress Elizabeth occasionally amused herself 
in dressing her own dinner. In another portion of the gardens, close to the shore of the gulf, stands a 
neat wooden buildint;, fomicrly a favorite retreat of Peter the Great, as he coidd here have a view of 

E 4 



56 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Pakt I. 



Cronstadt and the fleet. The bath is likewise worthy of observation, situated in the midst of a thlcfcgt 
"We enter a large oval space, enclosed by a wooden wall, without a covering at top, but open to the sky, 
and shaded by the surrounding trees. In this wall are chambers and recesses furnished with all that con- 
venience or luxury can require to that end. In the centre of this area is a large basin, surrounded by a 
gallery, and provided with steps, rafts, and gondolas : the water is conducted hither by pipes, which fill the 
basin only to a certain height." — These gardens still exist, and the water-works are kept in tolerable re- 
pair. There is adjoining a small specimen of English gardening, laid out by Header, once gardener at 
Alnwick castle in Northumberland, and who is author of The Planter's Guide. 

255. At Fetrowka, near Moscow, is the principal private ancient garden in Russia. 
The hedges and alleys are chiefly formed of spruce fir, which are shorn, and seem to 
flourish under the shears. It contains also a labyrinth, and a turf amphitheatre, on which 
the proprietor, Comte Razumowski, had operas performed by his domestic slaves. 

Sophiowski, in Podolia, is a magnificent residence of the Countess Potocki, laid out by a Polish archi- 
tect, Metzel, in the manner of Switzer. It has a magnificent terrace or promenade, and extensive ave- 
nues, conservatories, and gardens. 

256. The first attempt at the modern style of gardening in Russia was made by Catherine, 
about 1778, at Zarskoje-selo, at that time enlarged and re-laid out. llie gardener 
employed was Busch, a German, and father of their present superintendant. The gor- 
geous magnificence of this residence is well known. " A natural birch forest, on ground 
somewhat varied, forms the ground-work of the park and gardens. The gate by 
which they are approached, is an immense arch of artificial rock-work, over which is 
a lofty Chinese watch-tower. The first group of objects is a Chinese to'wn, through 
whicli the approach leads to the palace ; a building, which, with its enclosed entrance, 
court, offices, baths, conservatories, church, theatre, and other appendages, it would seem 
like exaggeration to describe. The rest of the garden-scenery consists of walks, numer- 
ous garden-buildings, columns, statues, &c. with bridges of marble and wood, a large 
lake, and extensive kitchen-gardens and hot-houses." The following more detailed 
description is from the pen of Storch already mentioned. 

257. Zarskoje-selo, the famous summer-residence otCatherine the Second, is situated in an open plea- 
sant region, diversified by little hills, meads, and woodlands. The space of the whoVe domain contains 
four hundred and twenty thousand square fathoms. This princely seat owes its origin to Catherine the 
First, and its enlargement and embellishment to Elizabeth ; but it is indebted for its completion in ele- 
gance and taste, and the greater part of its present magnificence, to the creative reign of Catherine the 
Second. We are now in a small wood within sight of the palace. On the left we have the park wall, and 
before us the entrance on the Petersburg side. It consists of two portals, composed of blocks of sand- 
stone, in the form of rocky fragments, over one of which is a Chinese watch-house. By this passage we 
enter the foregrounds of the palace, having the gardens to the right, and a Chinese village to the left, 
through which the way leads over a Chinese bridge to the park. Before us lies the road to the little 
neighbouring town Sophia, which goes through a colossal gate of cast-iron. The court of the palace forms 
an amphitheatre of buildings opposite the grand parade, closed on each side by an iron palisade. 

The gardens are laid out in the English manner : among their curiosities that admit of a description, the 
following objects may principally be recorded. A small temple containing a collection of antique and modern 
statues ; a solitude for dinner-parties like that in the hermitage ; a magnificent bath ; a coach-hill, similar to 
that at Oranienbaum ; picturesque ruins ; a small town to commemorate the taking of Taurida, &c. Two 
artificial lakes are connected by a running stream, crossed by an arched bridge, covered at the top by a 
roof resting on two rows of marble columns, on the model of the bridge at Stowe. On one of the islands on 
these lakes stands a Turkish mosque, on another a spacious hall for musical entertainments. In a thick 
shrubbery we come upon a pyramid in the Egyptian form, in the vicinity whereof are two obelisks. 

This inajestic sanctuary of ar< and nature, continues Storch, is at the same time a magnificent temple of 
merit. Formed of the rocky foundations of the earth, here the monuments of great achievements tower 
towards the skies, fearless of the destructive vicissitudes of time. A marble obelisk reminds us of the 
victory near Kagul, and of the victor Romanzoff Zudunaisky. To the Dey of Tschesmi, and the hero 
Orlof Tschesmenskoy, a marble column on a pedestal of granite is devoted. A grand triumphal arch 
proclaims the patriotic ardor of Prince Orlof, with which he faced rebellion and the plague in the 
capital, and quelled them both. The victory in the Morea and the name of Feador Orlof are handed 
down to posterity by a rostral column. — Plain and gigantic as the sentiments of the heroes whose memories 
are perpetuated in these masses of rocks, they stand surrounded by the charms of Nature, who softens 
her majesty through the veil of artless graces. 

258. Paulowsky presents the best specimen of the English style, in the neighbourhood 
of the Russian capital, or indeed in the empire. It was begun during the reign of 
Catherine, in 1780, from a design said to have been furnished by the celebrated Brown, 
from a description sent him by Gould, an Englishman, the gardener of Potemkin, and 
finished afterwards during the reign of Paul. This place possesses considerable variety 
of surface, and a varied clothing of wood, the Scotch jjine and aspen being natural to these 
grounds, as well as the birch. Near the palace, there is a profusion of exotics of every 
description, including a numerous collection of standard roses, which, with some of the 
American shrubs, require to be protected with straw and mats during winter. The 
Chevalier Storch has given a very interesting description of these gardens, in his Brief e 
iiher Paulo^osky, &c. 1802. 

259. The gardens of Potemkin, a man whose mind, as the Prince de Ligne has ob- 
served, contained mines of gold and steppes, and one of the most extravagant encouragers 
of our art that modern times can boast, were of various kinds, and situated in different 
parts of the empire. The most extensive gardens of this prince were in the Ukraine; 
but the most celebrated were those belonging to the palace of Taurida, now an imperial 
residence in St. Petersburg. The grounds are level, with several winding and straight 



l3ooK I. 



GARDENING IN RUSSIA. 



57 



canals, and walks, adorned with numerous buildings, a rich collection of exotics, and most 
extensive hot-houses of every description. Their grand feature, in Potemkin's time, was 
the conservatory, or winter-garden {^Jig. 22.), attached to the palace. The plan of this 



part of the building is that of a semicircle, embracing the end of a saloon, nearly 300 feet 
long. It is lighted by immense windows, between columns, has an opaque ceiling, 
and is at present heated by common German stoves. It is too gloomy for the growth 
of plants, but those grown in the glass sheds of the kitchen-garden are carried there, sunk 
in the ground, and gravel-walks, turf, and every article added, to render an illusion to a 
romantic scene in the open air as complete as possible. The effect was, after all, it is 
said, never satisfactory but when illuminated. This palace, the original exterior of 
which was in a very simple style, and the interior most magnificent, is said to have been 
the design of Potemkin, but it was entirely re- modelled at his death by Catherine, used 
as barracks by Paul, and is now very imperfectly restored. [Ed. Encyc. art. Landscape 
Gardening. ) 

Tliis winter-garden or conservatory, so much spoken of, is tlms described by Storch : " Along one 
side of the vestibule is the winter-garden, an enormous structure, disposed into a garden, only separated 
from the grand hall by a colonnade. As, from the size of the roof, it could not be supported without 
pillars, they are disguised under the form of palm-trees. The heat is maintained by concealed flues placed 
in the walls and pillars, and even under the earth leaden-pipes are arranged, incessantly filled with boil- 
ing water. The walks of this garden meander amidst flowery hedges, and fruit-bearing shrubs, winding 
over little hills, and producing, at every step, fresh occasions for surprise. The eye of the beholder, when 
weary of the luxuriant variety of the vegetable world, finds recreation in contemplating some exquisite 
production of art : here a head, from the chisel of a Grecian sculptor, invites to admiration ; there a 
motley collection of curious fish, in crystal vases, suddenly fixes our attention. We presently quit these 
objects, in order to go into a grotto of looking-glass, which gives a multiplied reflection of all these won- 
ders, or to indulge our astonishment at the most extraordinary mixt-ure of colors in the faces of an 
obelisk of mirrors. The genial warmth, the fragrance and brilliant colors of the nobler plants, the volup- 
tuous stillness that prevails in this enchanted spot, lull the fancy into sweet romantic dreams; we imagine 
ourselves in the blooming groves of Italy ; while nature, sunk into a death-like torpor, announces the 
severity of a northern winter through the Avindows of the pavilion. In the centre of this bold creation, 
on a lofty pedestal, stood the statue of Catherine II., surrounded by the em.blems of legislature, cut in 
Carrara marble. It has been thrown out of the building on its being made into barracks." 

The gardens at Potemkin's other residences, as well as many imperial and private gardens in Russia, 
were laid out by Gould, a pupil of Brown. Sir John Carr relates an anecdote on Gould's authority, which 
was confirmed to us, in 1813, by the present gardener. Call, his successor, and deserves a place here. In 
one of the prince's journeys to the Ukraine, Gould attended him with several hundred assistants, destined 
for operators, in laying out the grounds of Potemkin's residence in the Crimea. Wherever the prince 
halted, if only for a day, his travelling pavilion was erected, and surrounded by a garden in the English 
taste, composed of trees and shrubs, divided by gravel- walks, and ornamented with seats and statues, all 
carried forward with the cavalcade." On another occasion, " having accidently discovered the ruins of 
a castle of Charles XII. of Sweden, he immediately not only caused it to be repaired, but surrounded by 
gardens in the English taste." {Carres Baltic, &c.) 

260. The most extensive seats laid out in the modern style, in the neighbourhood of 
Moscow, are those of Gorinka, a seat of Count Alexy Razumowsky {Jig. 23.), and 
Petrowka, a seat of Petrowsky Razumowsky. The former is remarkable for its botanical 
riches, and an immense extent of glass. The grounds are of great extent, but the sur- 
face flat, and the soil a dry sand. A natural forest of birch and wild cherry clothes the 
park, and harmonises the artificial scenes. The mansion, built by an English artisan, is 
highly elegant ; and the attached conservatories and stoves, and decorated lawn, form 
a splendid and delightful scene, unequalled in Russia. 




23 



58 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Pakt I. 



261. Petrowka contafns both an ancient garden, already referred to, and a krge extent of 
ground, laid out in the modern style, and adorned with buildings, from designs by Signor 
Camporezi. There is some variety of surface, abundance of birch and fir woods, with 
some oaks and aspens interspersed, and a large piece of water. Among the ornamental 
buildings is a cotton-manufactory, in actual use as such. The practice of introducing 
manufactories as garden-buildings, is very general in Russia, and almost peculiar to that 
country. 

262. Among other gardens near Moscow may be mentioned those of Count Alexy 
Razumowsky, and of Paschow, in Moscow ; of Zaritzina (Jig. 24.), a singular Turkish 
palace, built by Potemkin for Catherine ; of Astankina Count Cherem^tow, Peckra, 
Prince Galitzin, and various others, which would well bear description. In general, ex- 
tent, exotics, and magnificent artificial decorations are more the object of the modem style 



24 




in Russia, than scenes merely of picturesque beauty. We think this may be accounted 
for, partly from the general want of refinement of taste in that country, and partly from 
its inaptitude for that style. The nobles of Russia, suddenly rendered aware of being 
distanced in point of civilisation by those of most other European countries, are resolved 
not merely to imitate, but even to surpass them in the display of wealth. The most 
obvious marks of distinction, in refined countries, are necessarily first singled out by 
rude and ambitious minds, and large magnificent houses and gardens are desired, rather 
than comfortable and elegant apartments, and beautiful or picturesque scenes ; since, as 
every one knows, it is much more easy to display riches than to possess taste ; to strike 
by what is grand, tlian to charm by what is beautiful. 

263. Around Petersburg and Moscow are several public gardens and various private ones, 
which their owners, with great liberality, convert into places of public entertainment, to 
which all the people of decent appearance are at liberty to come. Tlie country-seats of 
the two brothers Nariskin deserve our particular notice, as being frequented on Sundays 
by great numbers of the higher classes. A friendly invitation, in four different lan- 
guages, inscribed over the entrance to the grounds, authorises every one, of decent 
appearance and behaviour, to amuse himself there in whatever way he pleases, without fear 
of molestation. In several pavilions are musicians, for the benefit of those who choose 
to dance ; in others are chairs and sofas, ready for the reception of any party who wish 
to recreate themselves by sedate conversation, after roaming about with the great throng ; 
some parties take to the swings, the bowling-green, and other diversions ; on the canals 
and lakes are gondolas, some constructed for rowing, others for sailing ; and if this be 
not enough, refreshments are spread on tables, in particular alcoves, and are handed 
about by persons in livery. This noble hospitality is by no means unenjoyed ; the con- 
course of persons of all descriptions, from the star and riband, to the plain well-dressed 
burgher, forms such a party-colored collection, and sometimes groups so humorously 
contrasted, that for this reason alone it is well worth the pains of partaking once in tlie 
ainusement. (^Storclis Petersburgh, p. 441.) 

264. In the country parts of Russia, hundreds or even thousands of miles may be 
gone over without meyting with any country-seat worth mentioning. The nearest to 
Moscow, southwards, which we have seen, is that of Sophiowski, in Podolia, 1000 wersts 
distant. 



Book 1 



GARDENING IN RUSSIA. 



59 



SiJBSECT- 2. Eussia7i Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and Plants 

of Oryiament. 

265. Dutch Jloiver-roots, %vould doubtless be introduced in the imperial gardens with 
tlie Dutch taste in design ; and soon after copied by such of the nobility as could afford 
to copy in matters of this kind. It was reserved, however, for Catherine the Second to 
give the first impulse to this taste, by establishing at Petersburg, the first public botanic 
garden in 1785, for the use of the academy of sciences. Another was soon after formed 
for the medical college. 

266. The botanic garden of the lauversity of Moscotu was founded by the present 
emperor, in 1801, but was unfortunately destroyed by the French in 1812; at which 
time the university was burned down. Botli, however, are now restored to their original 
splendor. 

267. The first private botanic garden formed in Russia was that of Count Dimidow, 
begun during Peter tlie Great's reign. It was chiefly devoted to native plants ; but 
still the hot-houses for exotics occupied more than one acre of ground. Two botanists 
were sent to travel over the whole of Asiatic Russia. In 1 786 a catalogue was pub- 
lished, when the collection amounted to 4363 species or varieties, exclusive of 572 
varieties of fruit-trees, 600 varieties of florists' flowers, and 2000 species which had not 
flowered. " Une seule anecdote,^' says Deleuze, " will prove how eager Dimidow was to 
enrich his garden. Being at Rome, in 1773, he found in the gai-den of the Petits Au- 
guslins del corso, the handsomest orange-tree he had ever seen. Tlie monks did not wish 
to part with it, and he was obliged to employ a good deal of money and influence to over- 
come their scruples. Having succeeded, he caused the tree, which was planted in the 
open air, to be taken up with an immense ball, put in a large box, set on a carriage made 
on purpose, and transported to Moscow." (Annales, Sec. torn. ix. 174.) 

268. The botanic garden of Gorinka, already mentioned, presents tlie most extensive 
private establishment not only in Russia but perhaps in the world. The great extent of 
glass has been already mentioned. When we saw these hot-houses, in 1814, tliey were 
much injured by the French ; but the whole gai'den is now, Ave understand, completely 
reinstated. Dr. Fischer, its director, is a well known botanist, and corresponds witli 
most botanical cultivators in Europe. A catalogue of this garden was published by Dr. 
Redowsky, in 1804. {Bib. Banks.) Its proprietor having lately died, this gai'den will 
probably share the fate of many others. 

There are other private botanic gardens near Petersburg and Moscow ; and good collections of orna- 
mental plants at Pawlowskvand Gatschina, both imperial residences. The Baron Rahl has an extensive 
range of hot-houses, devoted chiefly to orange-trees and tender plants; and many of the Dutch and 
German merchants cultivate flowers in the gardens of their summer-residences, on the Strelna road, at 
Petersburg. Excepting however among the first of the nobility, and the wealthy foreign merchants, 
ornamental culture of every description is quite unknown in Russia. The taste of the ordinary nobleman 
is too gross ; the peasant is out of the question, and there is no middle class in the empire of the Tzars. 

269. The climate of Bussia is adverse to fioyiculture. Dr. Howison remarks {Caled. 
Mem. iii.), " tliat tliere is scarcely any plant, or flowering shrub, which can resist the 
intense frost and cold of the winter in Britain, to be found out of doors in Russia ; and, 
at times, even the hardy whin-bush is destroyed." He says, the gai'dener, in the 
Tauridon palace, Call, showed him " lilac-trees, laburnums, diiTerent varieties of thorn, 
whin-bushes, &c. growing in large wooden tubs, filled with earth, and which were 
preserved there all winter, witli the intention of being sunk in the borders of the garden, as 
soon as the weather should grow warm enough to admit of it. In the gardens of tlie 
villas and country-houses of the higher classes of Russians and foreigners settled in the 
country, in the short period of a week from the disappearance of the winter, a beautiful 
and rich display of shrubs and flowers in full blow, consisting of liydi'angea, various 
species of geranium and myrtle, wall-flower, carnation, &c. become visible. All these 
are, in like manner, reared in hot-houses. As their bloom fades, fresh plants are brought 
from the conservatory to replace them, thus keeping up an artificial garden, as it may be 
called, during the ■\\'hole warm season ; and when the cold weatlier begins again, the 
whole are removed and replaced in the green-house." 

SuBSECT. 3. Russian Gardening, in respect to its horticultural Productions. 

270. Dutch and German fruits were introduced to Russia with the Dutch and French 
taste in gardening, by Peter the Great. With the English style, Catherine introduced 
English gardeners and English fruits. Before this period, the wild pear, the wild cherry, 
the black currant, the cranbeny, and the strawberry must have been almost the only 
fruits seen in aboriginal Russia ; all these may be gathered in the woods. The apple is 
abundant in the Ukraine, and a century ago, as at present, may have been sent to 
Moscow for the use of the higher classes. At present, the imperial family, and a few, 
perhaps six or eight of the first nobility, enjoy almost all the European fruits in tolerable 
perfection, chiefly by the influence of glass and fire heat. The quantity of pines and 
grapes grown in the neighbourhood of Pctersbu)-g, is indeed an astonishing feature in its 



60 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



horticulture. Pines, grapes, and peaches, being grown so as to ripen in August and 
September, enjoy, in these months, abundance of sun, and nearly equal in flavor 
those grown in England or Holland ; but the apple, pear, cherry, and plum, being in 
that part of the empire considered as only half hardy fruits, rarely ripen in the open 
air so as to be fit for the dessert ; and are generally planted in houses, or against walls, 
and brought forward by glass. About Petersburg the branches of the cherry-tree are 
protected by burying in the soil, as the French do those of the fig-tree, in the fruit-gardens 
of Argenteuil. The climate being less severe about Moscow, the hardier fruits ripen 
somewhat better in the open air, but still far inferior to what they do at Edinburgh, which 
is in the same parallel of latitude. We have seen apples, pears, cherries, &c. fit to eat, 
in the hot-houses of the imperial gardens at Tzaritzina, in April, but without flavor. 

271. Alinost all the horticulture of Russia is contained in Moscow and around Peters- 
burg ; elsewhere scarcely any sort of fruit-tree is to be found but the wild pear. Kitchen- 
gardens are rare, even in Podolia, a very fine Polish province in the Ukraine, with a 
deep rich soil, level surface, and favorable climate. The only fruits a Russian peasant 
or minor Russian nobleman can taste are the wild pear (groutchkt/), dried or green, the 
strawberry, and the cranberry. Of the last, a cooling acid beverage is made by infusion 
in water. 

272. If any culinary vegetables were known in Russia, before the beginning of the 
last century, it could only have been the dwarf, ragged-leaved brown kale and the mush- 
room ; the potatoe is but lately introduced, and that only in a few places. Many of 
the peasants refuse to eat or cultivate this root, from mere prejudice, and from an idea 
very natural to a people in a state of slavery, that any thing proposed by their lords must 
be for the lord's advantage, and not for tlieirs ; thus the fiirst handful of food thrown to 
untamed animals operates as a scare. 

The example of the court, and the number of foreigners employed in the Russian service, civil and military, 
in their literary institutions, and established as medical or commercial men in the towns, will, no doubt, 
gradually introduce a variety of culinary plants. The late war may also have had some influence, by giving 
the, till then, untravelled noble a taste for the comforts of Germany and France ; but, unfortunately, the 
Russians are averse to a country life, and will continue to be so till they acquire a taste for domestic 
enjoyments and rural recreations. Dr. Howison {Me7n. of Caled. Hart. Sac. vol. iii. 77.) has given "an 
account of the most important culinary vegetables cultivated in the interior of the Russian empire." Of 
these, the cucumber, melon, yellow turnip, radish, and bulbous celery, were introduced from Germany, 
and are known but to a few. The remaining sorts mentioned are, the variegated cabbage, introduced 
from the South Sea Islands; mustard, from Sarepta, near the Chinese wall ; and an onion from Chinese 
Tartary. These were introduced by Hasenkampf, of the late Russian embassy to China. The English and 
German court-gardeners grow abundance of all our best vegetables, and contrive to prolong the season of 
some of them, as cauliflowers, celery, cabbage, &c. by earthing them in cellars. A succession of salad- 
ing is kept up in hot-houses, during winter, and even the first crops of all the common oleraceous and 
acetaceous plants are reared under glass and by fire heat in some of the best gardens. In Storch's 
Petersburg (chap, iv.), the dependence of Russia on foreign countries for her culinary vegetables and 
fruits is amply detailed. In the Crimea, according to Mary Holderness, horse-radish, asparagus, carrot, 
dock, sorrel, nettles, capers, and mustard, are gathered wild, and used as pot-herbs. Cabbages are cialti- 
vated, and they attain a great size : onions, pompions, water-melons, and capsicum, are also grown, 
{Notes, &c. 125.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Russian Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Timber-trees and Hedges. 

273. Forest or hedge planting is scarcely known in Russia. There are yet abundance 
of natural forests for timber and fuel, and in the northern parts where no system of pas- 
turage can take place, enclosures are not now, and probably never will be, of any use. 
Hedges are in usie in the gardens of the capital, and of the city of residence. The time 
Is not yet come for planting the sides of the high-roads, though that would be a grand 
feature of improvement. In some governments, towards the south, this has been partially 
done in a few places, by stakes of the silvery-leaved, or Huntingdon willow (Salix alba), 
but the trembling poplar, birch, and lime, are the proper trees for the northern parts, and 
the cherry, alder, sycamore, oak, elm, walnut, &c^ may be introduced in advancing 
southwards. - 

SuBSEGT. 5. Russian Gardening, as empirically pmctised. 

274. The very limited use of gardens in this country has been already noticed. Few are 
to be seen attached to the isbas, or log-houses of the boors, and not, many to the rich 
privileged slaves, or the native freedmen of the towns. There is no such thing as a Rus- 
sian farmer ; every proprietor farms the whole of his own estate by means of his slaves 
and an agent. The greater part of these proprietors have no gardens, or if they have, 
they are wretched spots, containing a few borecoles, and but rarely potatoes or 
legumes. The use of gardens is, therefore,' almost entirely confined to the imperial 
family, the highest class of nobles, and a few foreigners, who have settled in the principal 
cities. 

275. There are nurseries established in different districts by government, especially in 
Courland and the Ukraine. In the Nitika nursery, in the Crimea, apple, pear, peach, 
almond, vine, fig, olive, and pomegranate plants are propagated under Stevens, a Ger- 
man, and sold at low prices. 

\ 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN POLAND. 



61 



276. The head operative gardeners of Russia are almost all foreigners or sons of 
foreigners. Sometimes a nobleman sends a slave as an apprentice to a gardener, for his 
own future use ; but generally the assistant labourers are mere Russian boors, slaves of 
the lord ; or other slaves who have obtained permission to travel and work on their own 
account for a few years. These boors make very tractable labourers ; for the Russian is 
imitative and docile, to a high degree. They require, however, to be excited by interest 
or fear. The freed slaves on the government estates in the Ukraine, Mary Holderness 
informs us [Notes on the Crimea, &c. 1821.), dig sitting and smoking. 

277. The garden-artists of Russia are the English or German head-gardeners attached 
to the establishment of the emperor, or of some eminent noble. Gould, Potemkin's 
gardener, was the Brown of Russia in Catherine's time. This man had a character in 
some degree analogous to that of his master ; he lived in splendor, kept horses and women, 
and gave occasionally entertainments to the nobility. A few years ago he returned to 
England, and died at an advanced age in 1816, at Ormskirk in Lancashire,- his native town. 

A foreigner once established as head-gardener to the emperor, or any of the first nobility in Russia, 
becomes in some degree a despot, like his master, and unless he commits very gross errors indeed, his 
conduct is never enquired into, nor docs he lose his place but with life, or return home. He is not very 
liberally paid, but he enjoys every comfort the state of society there affords ; lives in a house that would 
be reckoned a considerable mansion in England, and has abundance of servants, and a carriage and 
horses, at his command. His country, and its broad cloth, procure him the respect of the nobles, and the 
dread of the slaves ; the former he may render tributary by presents of seeds, and the latter he may kick 
and boat at pleasure. If at any time he goes too far, a few radishes to the police-bailiffs, or a few peaches, 
or a melon, to the chevaliers their masters, will restore every thing to harmony. 

SuBSECT. 6. Russian Gardening, as a Science, and as to the Authors it has produced. 

278. Science of evert/ kind stagnates in Russia. However adroit the foreign gar- 
deners may be, in adapting practices to the climate, it can hardly be expected, in the 
circumstances in which they are placed, that they should increase the knowledge brought 
with them. Separated from their friends, surrounded by strangers using a language 
with which they never become familiar, without the means of procuring new books, and 
rarely coming in contact with intelligent gardeners or naturalists; much of the know- 
ledge they carried with them, is unavoidably forgotten or neglected. We regret to add, 
that it has been remarked by various travellers, that even the moral sense of Englishmen, 
who settle in Russia, becomes in time contaminated by the baneful influence of Russian 
manners. The want of common honor and honesty which pervades all ranks of the 
natives in Russia, from the first minister to the meanest slave, is incredible. One won- 
ders at first, how such an immoral state of society can exist ; but the refined moral habits 
of civilised nations, like their refinements in cookery and dress, may all be traced to the 
simple principle of self-preservation : and as a savage can put up with a homely fare 
and a coarse garb, so it would appear a barbarous people may hang together by a sort of 
tattered moral principle. 

279. We know of no original Russian author on gardening. There is a poem. On 
Gardens, by Samboursky, translated into the French language by Masson de Blamont : 
there is also a poem on glass, by the Russian poet Lomanosow, which, as containing a 
eulogium on hot-houses, may be considered as belonging to this subject. Some transla- 
tions have been published in German ; and various papers on botanical, physiological, 
and agricultural subjects, appear from time to time, in the Transactions of the Imperial 
(Economical Society. 

Sect. VIII. Of the Rise, Progress, and j)resent State of Gardening in Poland. 

280. Gardening, as an art of design, was introduced into Poland by the electoral kings 
about the end of the seventeenth century, and especially by Stanislaus Augustus, the third 
elector. 

281. In respect to gardens in the geometric style of design, the most ancient royal ex- 
ample is the Jardin Electoral de Saxe. It was never completed, and is now a public 
garden. Le Jardin KraszinsJd is another public garden ; but by far the most remarkable 
is that of Lazienki, or the Bath, formed by the last king, on the site of an ancient park, 
at Ujasdow, within the suburbs of the city. At the beginning of the reign of Stanislaus, 
in 1764, it was a marshy wood, planted with alders, with some canals and other stagnated 
pieces of water, near which was a grotesque edifice, called the Bath, and from which this 
park takes its name. 

The palace of Lazienki {fig. 25.), a beautiful piece of Roman architecture, from the designs of Camsitzer, 
a German artist, is placed on an island in a considerable piece of water. It consists of a centre and two 
wings. The centre is placed in the middle of a narrow part of the lake, and the wings are on opposite 
shores, and joined to the centre by arches with orangeries over. The entrance is by a carriage -portico, in 
one of the wings, to which you arrive without seeing the lake ; and on entering the orangery, its first effect 
is surprising and delightful. On the north shore of this lake is an open amphitheatre of stone with its 
orchestra on the brink of the water ; and near the margin an island of trees, which served as the prosce- 
nium. This theatre was at all times open to the public ; and in addition to theordinary exhibitions, ships and 
naval engagements were occasionally exhibited. The gaiety which reigned here during the first years of 
the reign of Stanislaus, the singular effect of the illuminations, the ships, and the resounding of the music 



62 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Taut I. 



in the woods, are still recollected by some of the oldest inhabitants of Warsaw, and spoken of with feelings 
of regret. The grounds were not extensive, nor, excepting near the palace, much ornamented : tliey con- 
sisted of a number of broad green alleys, crossing each ot'ier at right angles ; of smaller covered paths, 
leading to open circles of turf for dances and music, and for tents and booths on extraordinary occasions. 
In several places coffee-rooms and ice-cellars were established, and still remain ; and there are two pavilions 
for the king's mistresses ; and another, which served as a seraglio, for strangers or visitors of the king : the 
three being connected with the palace by arbor-like paths, or arcades of trellis work, covered by creepers. 

25 




One thing deserves to be remarked as to these gardens, which is, perhaps, not to be found in any others 
in Europe. Pedestals, as if for placing statues, were ranged in different parts of the grounds, particularly 
along the broad walk leading from the palace to the amphitheatre. On these pedestals, on extraordinary 
occasions, selected Uving figures, male and female, dressed in character, were placed, and taught to main- 
tain certain attitudes, after the manner of the representations called Tableaux, and which are sometimes, 
though rarely, produced in private circles at Paris and Vienna on days when theatrical amusements are 
forbidden. It is not to be wondered at that so luxurious a king should have wanted decision of character, 
lost his honor, kingdom, and, in short, every thing worth having. In 1813 this seat was nearly in the 
state in which it was left by Stanislaus j but we understand it has since undergone several changes. 

282. The jmncipal private garden in the ancient style was that of Villaneuve, the 
property of Count Stanislaus Pototcky, a few miles from the capital, but now modernised. 
Judging from the excellent views of these gardens, painted by B. Cannaletti, and now in 
the zamosk, or castle, in Warsaw, they must have been elegant of the kind. At Cracovie 
there are the remains of a geometric garden, of a few acres, laid out by Marshal Loudon, 
when Austrian governor of that city ; one of a convent of some extent, and a small public 
garden. But in the south of Poland, and especially in Gallicia, tlie only thing remark- 
able as to design in gardens, is the powerfully walled enclosures of the convents and 
religious houses, in some of which are venerable orchards, broad grass-walks, mossy trees, 
and curious sun-dials. 26 

283. English gardening was introduced into Poland hy the Princess 
Isabella Czartorysfca, at Pulhawa. This lady, highly accomplished, of 
great taste, and much good sense, had been a considerable time in 
England. She carried to Poland a gardener. Savage, and with his 
assistance, and that of Vogel and Frey, artists of Warsaw, she laid out 
Pulhawa, between 1780 and 1784, and published in Polish (Mysli 
Rozne o Sposobie Zakladania Ogrodow) a work with plates, on English 
gardening, in 1801. The situation of Pulhawa, like almost every other 
with which we are acquainted in Poland or Russia, is flat and sandy ; 
but is somewhat relieved by the Vistula. On the brink of this river, on 
a wooded bank, stands the house, a plain Grecian building, wliich with 
the grounds are described by Burnet, in his view of Poland, (chap. xi. ) 
There are several decorative buildings, and statues (Jig. 26. ) ; de- 
tached clumps of shrubs are more frequent in these gardens tlian 
would be admitted by a good taste in England ; but all Poland is a 
natural forest ; and as the grand object of improvement in every country, is to obtain 
applause by the employment of art and expense, artificial forms, from their rarity, are 
better calculated for this purpose than such as are more universally beautiful, but so 
common locally as to want the charm of novelty, — or whose beauties are too refined to 
be generally understood. Thus clumps in Poland may be as much esteemed as groups 
are in England, on the same principle, that, in a wild country, butcher-meat is more 
esteemed than game, because the latter is the common food. 

Zamoyst the seat of Count Zajnoski, and Villaneuve the residence of Count Potocky, are also examples of 
the modern style. The first are of limited extent, but the latter, near Warsaw, are very extensive, and 
were laid out chiefly from the designs of Princess Czartoryska. 

The gardens of General Benningsen, near Wilna, were in a mixed style, surrounded by oak and pine 
forests. They were destroyed during the retreat of the French army in 1812. 

Those of Colonel Lachanitzki, at Poniemenia, on the banks of the Niemen, at Grodno, are not extensive, 
" but contain more romantic and picturesque scenery than any garden we have seen in Poland. 

284. The oldest botanic garden in Poland is that of Wilna, founded by CaUierine, soon 
after the dismemberment of that country ; the most thriving is that of Cracovie, placed in 
1812 under the direction of Professor Oestricher, a zealous botanist. A garden was also 
begun about 1810, in Warsaw, on the steep banks of the Vistula. Of the original 




Book I. GARDENING IN SPAIN AND PORTUGAL. 63 



Warsaw garden, of which a catalogue was published towards the middle of the last cen- 
tury, we could, in 1813, procure no account. Count Benningsen had an excellent 
botanic garden at his seat near Wilna, which, as already observed, was destroyed and the 
chateau burned down in 1812. It was rich in hardy plants. At Pulhawa the Princess 
Isabella Czartoryska has a considerable collection, and used frequently to send her 
gardener (Savage), lately deceased, to England to procure the newest exotics. 

285. A fewjiowers are cultivated in some of the wealthier citizens' gardens, around War- 
saw, and a few in gardens of the conventual institutions ; but in a general point of view, 
they are as uncommon in Poland as in Russia. In both countries a few may occasionally 
be seen on market-days, which have been gathered in the fields, and brought in by the 
peasants ; these are purchased by the minor nobles to decorate their rooms, by the monks 
to display on their altars, or by devotees to present to the virgin or the image of their 
patron saint. The floors of the higher classes, in Poland, are often strewed with the 
leaves of the Acorus calamus, which abounds in the marshes of that country. In some 
districts, towards Courland, the spray of the spruce fir is used for this purpose ; a practice, 
as Mary Woolstonecraft has remarked, common in Sweden and Norway. 

286. The horticulture of Poland is at a very low ebb : excepting in a few of the noble- 
men's gardens and those of the richest monasteries, there was till lately no vegetable but the 
kohl rabi, and no fruit but the apple, pear, and cherry. Towards the sea-coast, and on 
the borders of Austria, there is greater variety. The potatoe is now in more general use 
in Poland than in Russia, though a slight prejudice still exists against it, from its having 
been introduced by the Germans. The cucumber is cultivated in many places for salting, 
or preserving by barrelling and sinking the barrel in their wells. In some places, the 
common carnation poppy is grown for the seed, which taken when beginning to ripen, 
and strewed on a sort of milk-porridge, or milk-paste, made from the meal of buck-wheat, 
or Polish millet [Dactylon sanguinale), is reckoned a delicacy. Bees are kept by some of 
the freed men or minor nobles. The Polish hives and mode of taking the honey, to be 
afterwards described, are exceedingly simple, and never requiring the death of the insects, 
seem preferable to any mode of bee-culture yet devised by the bee-masters of other coun- 
tries. Hirschfield mentions, that the gardens of Prince Casimir Poniatowski, elder 
brother of the last king, contained at one time 5000 annanas, in a range of hot-houses 600 
feet long. In 1813, the only pines grown in Poland, were a few at Pulhawa, and some 
grown by a German, who rented the hot-houses belonging to the late king's establishment 
at Warsaw. Only one or two instances then existed of vines and peaches being grown 
near the capital, but there were abundance of these and other fruits at Pulhawa and 
Zamoyst, and some few at Villaneuve. The Polish noblemen have gained in every kind of 
knowledge from having been so long a period in the French service ; and since the re- 
establishment of peace, they have set about agricultural and gardening improvements, 
with a considerable degree of energy. 

287. Planting in Poland is but little required for purposes of utility. Some public 
avenues have been formed near Warsaw and Posen ; and the elm, one of the best avenue 
trees, thrives at both places. There are scarcely any hedges in the country, excepting in 
gardens and near towns. 

288. Original Polish authors on gardening are not to be expected : but translations of 
various works on rural economy were pointed out to us in the library of the Dominicans, 
at Grodno ; but the only Polish work on gardening, which may be considered as original, 
we believe to be Mi/sli Rozne o Sposobie Zakladania Ogrodow, &c. 1808; or, " Various 
Thoughts on the Manner of planting Gardens," by Princess Isabella Czartoryska. 

Sect. IX. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of Gardening in Spain and 

Portugal. 

289. The love of gardens, or of rural life, it is alleged by Hirschfield, is far from being 
general in Spain : not however from lightness of character or bad taste, but from a kind 
of supineness which cannot be better described than by calling it Spanish. This supine- 
ness is the more incomprehensible, as the country, though desert and uncultivated in 
many places, is yet full of natural charms in others, thus indicating as it were a field of 
exertions for the hand of man. In many provinces, Puente informs us, one may travel 
several leagues without seeing a tree, and according to the same author, the environs of 
Madrid neither present pavilions nor country-houses, and it was not till towards the end 
of the eighteenth century that they began to repair the roads around the capital, and 
border them with trees. 

290. The Arabs of Spain attended to agriculture, translated and commented on the 
ancient authors, and though they occupied themselves more particularly in the study of 
medicine and botany, they did not neglect the culture of gardens. Many of them 
travelled to their brethren in Asia, to pursue natural history, and bring plants to Europe. 
Ebn-Alwan has left us a list of plants in the garden of Seville, in the eleventh century, 



64 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



which are more numerous than those which were cultivated by the Greeks and Romans. 
The recent substitution of a representative for a despotic government, so happily brought 
about (1820), can hardly fail of acting as a stimulus to exertion in our art, in common 
with every other. 

SuBSECT. 1 . Spanish Gardening, as an Art o/" Design and Taste. 

291. The oldest garden in Spain is said to be that of the Moorish palace of Alcazar, 
near Seville ; the greater part of this palace was constructed by Peter tlie Cruel, between 
the years 1353 and 1364, who exactly copied the Arabian style of the ancient part of the 
edifice ; and the remainder was erected by Charles V. The outside of the Alcazar is 
miserable in its appearance, but the first court after entering the gate has a very grand 
eflPect ; the part looking into that court is purely Arabic in its style, though ascertained 
to have been constructed since the conquest by the Christians. The courts are orna- 
mented with marble fountains, and are well shaded with corridors, supported by marble 
pillars. The garden of the Alcazar is said to have been laid out by the Moors, and is 
preserved in its original state. It contains walks paved with marble, parterres laid out 
with evergreens, and sliaded with orange-trees. In many parts of it there are baths, 
supplied by marble fountains from an aqueduct, and they have a contrivance for ren- 
dering the walks one continued fountain by forcing up small streams of water from 
minute pipes in the joinings of the slabs, which in this climate produces a most grateful 
eflfect. As a specimen of an Arabian garden in its original state, this is an interesting 
object, and we naturally associate with it recollections gathered from the Eastern 
writers ; especially from the Song of Solomon, in which the descriptions very well agree 
with this garden ; for, in addition to the other circumstances, it is completely walled 
round, and is secluded from every one, except the inhabitants of one part of the palace. 
{JacoVs Travels in the Soidh of Spain.) 

292. The remains of a reputed Moorish garden still exists at Grenada, another residence 
of the Arabian kings. It is situated on the Serra del sol, or mountain of the sun, occu- 
pies above twenty acres, is covered with wood cut into quarters by straight and winding 
walks, and interspersed with fountains ; the latter sometimes ostentatiously displayed, 
and at other times secreted so as to escape notice till they are brought to play on the 
spectator, and raise a laugh at his expense. Sir John Carr mentions that they take a 
particular delight in playing off these reversed showers which rise from the principal 
walks and places of repose, against the ladies. Several of these fountains, and many of 
the walks were foraied by Charles V., so that excepting certain venerable cypresses, and 
the old palace, no odier part can with certainty be traced to the days of the Moorish 
kings. 

293. In the beginning of the fifteenth century, soon after the union of Spain under one 
monarch, Charles V. made considerable improvements, and formed gardens and foun- 
tains at diflferent palaces, of which little now remain. 

294. In the beginning of the seventeenth century, under the reign of Philip IV. were 
laid out the finest gardens in Spain, These arc the gardens of the Escurial in Madrid, 
of Ildeplionso in its neighbourhood, and of Aranjuez near Toledo. Evelyn in 1667, 
being anxious to receive some account of them, writes to the Earl of Sandwich, then the 
English ambassador at Madrid, who answers him in such a way that Evelyn was " ex- 
ceedingly affected with the descriptions, and greatly instructed in many particulars." 

The gardens of the Escurial adjoin the palace from which you descend to them by vast terraces and stairs 
of marble varied by fountains. The garden, or rather park below, is of great extent, and the compart- 
ments formed by the intersection of the alleys, are filled with different sorts of fruit-trees. This is the gene- 
ral outline, and for the details of the statues, fountains, treUis-work, basins, &c. we must refer the reader 
to Thompson's Description of the Escurial y or the art. Escurial, in the Encyc. Brit. 

The garden of Ildephonso is situated around a summer-house, or Chateau de plaisance of that name; 
and here nature and art, says P. Caimo {Lettres d'un vago Italiano, Sec), combine to spread their respec- 
tive beauties, and render this garden as magnificent as agreeable. Fountains, jets-d'eau, canals, temples, 
covered seats, cabinets, bowers, grottoes, labyrinths, pastures, hedges of myrtle and laurel, are so distributed 
as to produce the best effect. The water is collected in streams from the surrounding mountains, and 
made to unite in a torrent which precipitates itself into an immense reservoir. Hence, from this abundant 
source, the fountains are as powerful as numerous, and no species of artificial ornament is omitted that 
can embellish a garden. The alleys are very long, some of them three fourths of a league. Most of them 
are kept shorn on the sides forming a thick close surface from the ground to the summits of the trees, and 
statues are placed at regular distances. 

The garden of Ildephonso occupies a ridge, rising to the south, and falling both to the east and to the 
west. Near the palace it is laid out in the old taste, with clipped hedges and straight walks, highly adorned 
and refreshed with numerous fountains; but in proportion to the distance it becomes more wild, rill it ter- . 
minatcs in the uncultivated and pathless forest, where the craggy rocks appearing among oaks and pines, pre- 
sent a striking contrast with the works of art. This garden, Townsend observes, is delightful for its walks, 
which although shady, are neither damp nor gloomy ; and if it be true that beauty is founded on utility, this 
place will always deserve to be admired. In the present day, it is not uncommon to build the mansion in the 
middle of a field, open and exposed to every wind, without shelter, without a fence, wholly unconnected 
with the garden. Near the habitation all is wild; and art, if any where, appears only at a distance. In all 
this we can trace no utility, nor will succeeding generations discover beauty. On the contrary in the gar- 
den of St. Ildephonso, we find every thing, which in a sultry season is desirable ; a free circulation of air, 
a deep shade, and refreshing vapors to absorb the heat ; whilst from its contiguity to the mansion the 
access to it is easy, and at any time these comforts may be instantly enjoyed ; yet without their numerous 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN SPAIN AND PORTUGAL. 



6S 



fountains, the clipped hedges, and the narrow xvalka, the circulation would be less rapid, the shade lees 
deep, and the refreshing vapor would be wanting. {Tmvnsend's Travels in Spain, i. 360.) 

Of t/te palace and gardens of Aranjuez, Baretti observes {Tour in 1776, vol. ii.), " that a poet would 
say, that Venus and Love had here consulted with Catullus and Petrarch, in order to construct a country- 
residence worthy of Psyche, of Lesbia, of Laura, or of some Infanta of Spain." The park, which is several 
leagues in circumference, is intersected by alleys, three, and even four miles in length; these alleys are 
formed of double rows of elms, and are sufficiently wide for four carriages to drive abreast. On each side, 
between the rows of trees, is a canal kept clear by a continual stream which passes through it. This water 
has contributed to render the trees of an enormous size and thick verdure from top to bottom. The com- 
partments, or islands, formed by the alleys and the canals, are covered with copse, and occupied with deer, 
wild boars, hares, rabbits, pheasants, partridges, and other wild animals and birds, which are regularly fed 
by certain shepherds or attendants, and have incredibly multiplied. This park, like the garden of Eden, 
is divided by a river (the Tagus), and what is remarkable and prince-like, it is without surrounding walU, 
but verges into an open hilly country. The palace is near the centre of the park, on the margin of the 
river, and both banks are united by a bridge of five arches. In front of the palace is an immense cir- 
cular level lawn, ornamented with four trees in its centre. On the whole, according to Baretti's description, 
this must have been the finest park in the old style in the world. 

295. Of jyrivate gardens, a few are mentioned by Townsend, and Sir John Carr, some 
as belonging to British merchants, and situated round the principal sea-ports, and a few 
to Spanish nobles in the interior. At the Retiro, near Malaga, a seat of Count Villacasa, 
and formerly a royal residence, are gardens in the Moorish style, with straight cypress 
walks, and excellent water-works. The archbishop of Valencia has a countrj'-house and 
beautiful gardens at Puzol, near the city. The hermitages of Montserrat, near Tarra- 
gona, abound in oak, olives, ash, elm, box, myrtle, eglantine, jessamine, rosemary, 
lavender, thyme, and other aromatic shrubs and plants, tastefully disposed among tlie 
rocks and declivities, by the hand of nature, with very little assistance from man. 

Granjas, the seat of Don Ramon Fortuny^ near Tarragona, appears to be in good taste, combining the 
ancient style with the cultivation of the orange, fig, vine, olive, and other fruits, and with an accidental 
mixture of rocks and picturesque scenery. A very interesting engraving of this peculiar and beautiful 
residence is given by Sir John Carr, in his travels in Spain ; the doors of the dining-room, he informs us, 
open into a small garden, the walls-_of which are covered with myrtles, jessamines, and rosos, and the view 
is over an orchard of olives, oranges, and pomegranates. In the centre of the garden are grotesque water- 
works. We are not aware of any attempt to introduce the modern style of landscape-gardening in this 
country. 

296. Gardening in Portugal is very little attended to as an art of taste. Travellers 
mention a few villas belonging to merchants in the neighbourhood of Lisbon ; and, as 
usual, there are some avenues or public walks near the town. Montserrat, near Cintra, 
a seat of the. late eminent merchant, Beckford, was formed at immense expense by a na- 
tive of Cornwall for M. de Vismes, and further improved by the former gentleman. It 
is laid out in the geometric style ; abounds in inequalities, stairs, terraces, statues, and 
orange-trees. Of late, we are informed, it has been much neglected. Repton (Frag, on 
Lands. Gard. 1815,) gives an engraving of a plan which he had sent out to Lisbon, for 
laying out a small garden in the modern style. 

SuBSECT. 2. Spanish and Portuguese Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Flowers 
and Plants of Ornament. 

297. The study of plants is of great antiquity in Spain. This study was introduced 
by the Arabs ; there was a considerable collection of plants at Seville early in the 
eleventh century ; and half the common plants of the country, Harte informs us, have 
names derived from the Arabic. The succeeding seven centuries present a blank in this 
branch of gardening histoi-y. According to Deleuze, the taste shown for botany in Spain 
and Portugal, at the beginning of the sixteenth century, declined with tlie sciences ; 
and that country where they had been cultivated when the rest of Europe was in a state 
of barbarism, appeared to sink into apathy, after having shone with the greatest ecl^t 
under Charles the Fifth and Emanuel of Portugal. 

298. The public garden of Madrid was established in 1753. Ferdinand the Sixth gave 
its direction to his first physician, Don Joseph Sagnol. He bought the private garden of 
Don Joseph Queer, who cultivated at home a great number of foreign plants : he named 
this botanist professor, and added Don Jean Minuart. At the same time, he an-anged 
instructions for travellers going to America, and ordered them to bring home seeds, and 
to add the indication of the climate, and the nature of the soil where they collected them. 
They also sent travellers with particular orders to make collections of vegetables. It is 
from these treasures that the royal garden of Madrid has become the nursery of the plants 
of Peru, Mexico, and Chili ; and from thence they have been sent to other gardens of 
Europe. The same king, Sir J. E. Smith informs us (Suppt. Encyc. Brii. art. Botany), 
invited Linnseus, with the offer of a large pension, to superintend a college formed for the 
purpose of making new enquiries into the history of nature and the art of agriculture. 
Linnaeus, as appears by his correspondence, recommended Loefling. 

299. A taste for flowers and plants of ornament is not very general in Spain, thougli 
odoriferous flowers, as the jessamine, the orange, &c. are said to be in repute with the 
ladies ; and various sorts are grown in tlie conventual gardens of the priests, for official 
decorations in churches and oratories. 

300. The botanic garden of Coimbra in Portugal was founded in 1773. 



66 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



SuBSECT. 3. Simrdsh and Portuguese Gardenings in respect to its horticultural 
Productions and Planting, 

301. Horticulture has made but little progress in Spain. The earliest of the few- 
Spanish authors who have written on gardens, is Herrera, whose book on rural economy- 
appeared early in the seventeenth century. It contains a treatise on gardens [De las 
Huertas), in which he distinguishes only two sorts; one for " delight and provision for 
the house," and the other for supplying the public market. Private gardens, he says, 
need not be extensive ; those for selling vegetables and fruits should be near a town or 
village, and well supplied with water. He gives directions for cultivating the vine, fig, 
olive, apple, pear, and the common culinary plants. Of these, the soil and climate are 
peculiarly favorable to the alliaceous and cucurbitaceous tribes, some sorts of which, as the 
onion and winter-melon, form articles of foreign commerce. 

302. The fruits of Spain are more numerous than those of any other European country. 
Besides all those of Italy, native or acclimated, Spain possesses the date, tamarind, and 
various fruits of the West Indies. The varieties of the grape, fig, melon, and orange 
are numerous, and many of them excellent. The pine-apple is little cultivated in 
Spain ; but is grown in a few places, in tl>e southern provinces {Jacob), in the open air. 

303. Culinarij herbs and roots are not much attended to in Spain. Onions and garlic 
are in universal use ; and the sweet potatoe {Convolvulus batatus) is cultivated in various 
places. The British residents import their potatoes from their native country. 

304. Forcing is unknown in Spain, but there are hot-houses for plants at Madrid, and 
at Coimbra and Montserrat in Portugal. 

305. Planting timber-trees or hedges is scarcely known in either Spain or Portugal. 

Sect. X. Of the Rise, Progress, and present State of Gardeyiing in European Turkey. 

306. Of Turkish gardening, when the country was under the Romans, nothing is 
known. The Roman taste would pass to Byzantium when the seat of empire 
was removed there in the fourteenth century by Constantine ; but as to its history when 
the rest of Europe was enveloped in ignorance and superstition, very little is known. 
The numerous Greek authors on rural matters (Geoponici), who wrote between the 
fourth and fourteenth centuries, do little more than copy Columella and other Latin 
georgical writers ; they mention very few plants as ornamental, and treat chiefly of 
agriculture, vineyards, and poultry. 

307. The modem taste for gardens in Turkey is materially influenced by their national 
character, and the nature of the climate. Gardens of taste are considered places of shade, 
repose, and luxurious enjoyment ; not of active recreation, or a varied display of verdant 
scenery. " For some miles round Adrianople," Lady M. W. Montague'observes, in 1717, 
" one sees nothing but gardens. The rivers are bordered with fruit-trees, under which 
the citizens divert themselves in the evenings ; not in walking, which is not a Turkish 
pleasure, but in seating themselves on a carpet spread on the turf, under the thick shade 
of a tree ; there they take coffee, and smoke amidst vocal or instrumental music, groups 
of dancing females, and other sports.'* 

308. The gardens of the sidtan at Constantinople acquired a degree of celebrity through 
the letters of Lady M. W. Montague, to which, it appears from subsequent authors who 
have examined them, they are by no means entitled. These gardens were visited by Dr. 
Pouqueville in 1798, and it is generally allowed that he has described them with as little 
imagination and as much accuracy as any writer. The grand seignior's gardener was then 
a German, a native of Rastadt, by name Jaques, whose salary was 6000 piastres a -year. 
He conducted Dr. Pouqueville and his companion between the first and second ram- 
parts of the town, which form tlie natural fortifications of the seraglio on the side to the 
sea. 

T}ie palace is, properly speaking, a town within itself, having its walls crowned with battlements, and 
its bastions and its gates, like an old fortified place. Dr. Clarke says, that the seraglio occupies the whole 
site of the ancient Byzantium ; and Pouqueville, that the present manege is placed where there was a hippo- 
drome at the time of the lower empire ; so that the destination of the place has not been much altered for 
the last fifteen hundred years. The first garden they saw was a place enclosed on three sides, with a 

Ealisade, the fourth side being formed by the rampart. It was filled with shrubs ; such as early roses, 
eliotropes, and others, distributed in clumps, with several beams, and a great deal of rubbish lying about. 
At last they arrived at the entrance of the sultan's garden. 

The gateway to the garden is of white marble, about fifteen feet high, by four wide, 'decorated with 
columns, in a very bad taste. A treillage, twenty-five feet high and fifteen wide, extremely massy, forms 
cross, running each way, from one side to the other of the garden, dividing it into four equal divisions. 
In the centre of the cross, it forms a dome over a small basin of white marble, in which is a^'rf-rfVfliM 
Jaques ordered some of the men to naake it play, but the water did not rise above six feet. It was, indeed, 
an exhibition much below mediocrity- The four squares formed by this cross, are planted with flowers, and 
in the middle of each are basins again, with jets-d'eau quite in miniature. That to the left, as we entered, 
appealed the most singidarof them. After the water has risen to the height of about four feet, it divides 
like a parac-ol, and each stream falls upon a shell, upon the circuit of the basin, which again divides it 
into an infinite number of still smaller stream.-, ,<?carcely bigger than threads. We contemplated this chef, 
d'osuvrc for some minutes, and thought it very pretty for amusing children. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN EUROPEAN TURKEY. 



67 



Tlie trvillagey a work truly Gterman, seems, from its solidity, calculated to brave the injurlea of time fbr 
a long series of years. It is covered with jessamine, which perfumes the whole garden ; and, to say the 
truth, it has no difficult task to perform, for the enclosure is so small, that there can hardly be said to be 
sufficient space for the air to circulate freely. To the right, which is the side towards the sea, the treil- 
lage leads to the kiosque of the grand seignior, called Jeni-kiosque, the new pavilion. Three circular steps 
lead up to it, which occupy, in the semicircle they form, the portion of the kiosque that projects into the 
garden. 

A number of cages, with canary-birds, were hanging about ; these little creatures sung charmingly, and 
had been taught to draw water. About fifteen paces from this kic?sque, running along the same rampart, 
is a terrace of about fifty feet in length, and twelve in breadth, adorned with flowers, which has lately 
been turned into a conservatory. 

The largest garden, to which they descended from the terrace, is a hundred and twenty paces long, and 
fifty broad- At the eastern extremity is a hot-house, where Jaques was cultivating a number of foreign 
plants and flowers with great care. The hot-house was Uttle better than a shed ; under it were a number 
of benches, rising in a stage one above the other, with the flov/er-pots ranged upon them. Among the 
plants, some from Abyssinia and the Cape held a distinguished rank for their superior fragrance. An- 
other garden, or rather a terrace, raised flve-and-twenty feet high, which looks down upon the garden 
just quitted, contained nothing but a red and parched soil, with a few withered plants. 

An aviary had been made by order of the Sultana Valide ; and this, according to the ideas of the Turks, 
is the most curious thing upon the terrace. " I quitted this dismal garden," says Dr. Pouqueville, *' this 
kiosque of Hassan Pasha, perfectly free from the chimeras with which my imagination had been pre- 
viously filled. I had formerly read the letters of Lady Montague, and I seriously believed that I 
was to find walls incrusted with emeralds and sapphires j parterres enamelled with flowers ; in short, the 
voluptuous palace of Armida ; but her account is drawn from the sources furnished by her own brilliant 
imagination." — We quitted the burning garden to visit the haram. The haram of the sultan — the 
promised paradise. Lady Montague was now about to triumph. 

The garden of the haram is a square very ill kept ; it is divided from east to west by a terrace. It was 
here that the feast of tulips was formerly held ; but this has been long abolished. According to all ap- 
pearance it must have been a very poor thing ; but the pens of romance-writers can embellish objects the 
most ordinary, and make them appear of prodigious importance. Some clumps of lilacs and jessamine, 
some weeping willows hanging over a basin, and some silk-trees, are the only ornaments of this imaginary 
Eden ; and these the women take a pleasure in destroying as soon as the flowers appear, by which their 
curiosity is excited. 

A plan of these gardens is given by Kraaft [fig. 27.), from which little can be gathered but that tliey 
abound in trees and buildings, and are surrounded by a formidable walL 




309. Various opinions have existed as t<r the sultan's garden. Thornton, autlior of a late 
work on Turkey, arraigns Dr. Pouqueville for not being more dazzled with the magni- 
ficence of the haram, and for thinking that Lady Mary Wortley Montague has rather, in 
her descnphons of eastern luxury and splendor, painted from a model formed bv her 
own brilliant imagination, than from reality. But it is certain, H. M. Williams observes 
that Dr. Clarke's testimony is a strong confirmation of Dr. Pouqueville's. Indeed there 
IS so striking a similarity in the accounts given by the two doctors, that each stronaly 
supports the truth of the other, and both lessen extremely the ideas we have hithett« 

F S 



68 



HISTORY OP GARDENING. 



Part I. 



been led to entertain of the luxury and magnificence that reigns in the grand seignior's 
seraglio. (PouquevUle's Travels, translated hy H. M. Williams.) 

310. Floioer-gardening, « When the Turks," observes Deleuze, " by the taking of Con- 
stantinople, had given stability to their empire, they devoted themselves particularly to 
the culture of flowers." Belon, in 1558, speaks with admiration of the gardens which he 
saw among them. " There are no people," he says, " who delight more to ornament 
themselves with beautiful flowers, nor who praise them more, than the Turks. They 
think little of their smell, but delight most in their appearance. They wear several sorts 
singly in the folds of their turban ; and the artisans have often several flowers of different 
colors before them, in vessels of water. Hence gardening is in as great repute with them 
as with us; and they grudge no expense in procuring foreign trees and plants, especially 
such as have fine flowers." Busby, ambassador at Constantinople in 1550, has the same 
remarks, and adds, that they frequently give flowers in presents ; and that, though very 
avaricious in other things, they do not hesitate to pay dear for them. 

311. Of the horticulture of Turkey little is known, or how far the Use of gardens is 
general. " Tlie capital of the Turkish empire," T. Thornton observes {Present State of 
Turkey, 22.), "though the soil in its immediate vicinity is barren and ungrateful, 
receives from the neighbouring villages, and from the surrounding coasts of both the seas 
which it commands, all the culinary herbs and fruits of exquisite flavor which the most 
fastidious appetite can require. On the shores on both sides of the Bosphorus the 
ground forms a chain of schistous hills, covered with vineyards and gardens, and 
beautiful trees and shrubs ; and tlie valleys, which are exceedingly fertile, are in the highest 
state of cultivation." 

Of the botany and gardening of the Morea some account is given by Dr. Pouqueville. {Travels in 1798.) 
" This country, formerly a part of Greece, is rich in vegetable productions, but at present proportionably 
poor in cultivation. There is no great variety cultivated in the gardens ; the ground in general is iH 
prepared; the Greeks are unacquainted with the spade, and only use a mattock for turning it. Spinach 
and artichokes, which will even grow naturally without cultivation, are among the best culinary veget- 
ables. Cabbages and cauliflowers grow to a prodigious size ; they have also very good carrots. Beans 
and French beans are produced in such abundance, that they might become an object of exportation ; but 
the seeds of both are much smaller than ours in France. The lettuces are small; and the celery never 
will be good while, as at present, they do not eartli it up. The tomatoes are very fine, as is the fruit 
yielded by the melongena. The melons, water-melons, and gourds, are not to be exceeded in any part of 
the world. Mint, balm, fennel, parsley, and other herbs, abound in the gardens. The orchards are well 
furnished with almonds, oranges, lemons, citrons, peaches, pears, apricots, quinces, cherries, pomegranates, 
medlars ; they have also the arbutus, the service-tree, and the carob-tree ; all these might be improved, if 
more pains were taken in cultivating them." (p. 204.) The account which this author, and also Dr. Hol- 
land {Albania and Greece, Sec. 1812 and 1815), gives of the plants, the timber, and the fruit-trees, natives 
of the Morea, is highly interesting; he regrets that he could not occupy himself more with the subject, 
adding, that a botanist might compose a work worthy of the age in which we live, in undertaking a 
complete Flora Peloponnesica, 



Chap. IV. 

Of the Rise,' Progress, and present State of Gardening in the British Isles. 

312. That gardening was introduced to Britain hy the Romans, there can be but little 
doubt. According to Strabo, writing in the fourth century, " The people of Britain 
are generally ignorant of the art of cultivating gardens, as well as of other parts of agri- 
culture" (lib. iii. p. 200.) ; but Tacitus, half a century afterwards (A. D. 79), informs 
us, that " the soil and climate were very fit for all kinds of fruit-trees, except the vine and 
the olive ; and for all plants and edible vegetables, except a few, which were peculiar to 
hotter countries." {Vita Agric. cscp.-SLVsr.) Afterwards they found different parts of the 
country not unfit for the vine ; and wine was made in England towards the end of the 
third century, under the Emperor Probus. The remains of Roman villas discovered in 
diflferent parts of the country may be considered as existing evidence that Roman gardening 
was established, both as an art of taste, and of vegetable culture, by the generals and other 
members of the government. Pliny expressly states, that cherries were introduced into 
Britain about the middle of the first century : they had been brought to Italy by Lucullus 
only a century before. 

313. Modern British gardening seems to have received its first stimulus during the 
reign of Henry VIII. ; a second powerful impulse in the time of Charles II., with the 
splendid style of Le Notre ; again, with the introduction of the modern style during the 
reign of Geo. II. ; next, in the early part of the reign of Geo. III. with the plants of 
North America, and finally through the establishment of the Horticultural Society during 
the regency. 

314. The outline of gardening history here submitted will be found amply illustrated 
by the literature and topography of British gardening in Part IV., and indeed by all 
the other chapters on the statistics of British gardening; 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



Sect, I. JBrilish Gardening as an Art of Design and Taste. 

315. Of British gardening, as an art of taste, nothing is known for the first thousand 
years of our asra. With the eleventh century commences some notices as to England ; 
with the fifteenth, a few indications as to Scotland ; and with the seventeenth century, 
some hints as to the state of our art in Ireland. 

SuBSECT. 1. Gardening in England, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

316. Roman landscape-gardening was lost in England when that people abandoned 
Britain to the Saxons in the beginning of the fifth century ; but as it had revived in 
Fi-ance under Charlemagne, it would probably be re-introduced into England with the 
Norman Conqueror, in the end of the eleventh century. 

317. Henry I. (llOO), the third king after William the Conqueror, had, according to 
Henry of Huntingdon {^History, lib. 7.), a park (Jiabitationem feraruvi) at Woodstock; 
and it may not be too much to conjecture, that this park was the same which had sur- 
rounded the magnificent Roman villa, whose extensive ruins, occupying nearly six acres, 
have been recently dug up on the Duke of Marlborough's estates in that neighbourhood. 
Blenheim, the first residence in Britain, or perhaps in Europe, in respect to general grandeur, 
may in this view be considered as the most interesting in point of its relation to antiquity. 

318. In the time of Henry II. (1154), Fitzsteven, it is observed by Daines Barrington, 
states, that the citizens of London had gardens to their villas, " large, beautiful, and 
planted with trees." In De Cerceau's Architecture, published in the time of Henry III. 
there is scarcely a ground-plot not laid out as a parterre or a labyrinth. 

319. During Henry V.'s. reign, in the beginning of the fifteenth century. King James I. 
of Scotland was a prisoner in Windsor castle for several years. In the poem written by 
that monarch he gives the following account of a royal garden there : — 



**Now was there maide fast by the touris wall 
A garden faire, and in the corneris set 

Ana herbere grene, with wandis long and small 
Railit about, and so with treeis set 
Was all the place, and hawthorn hedges knet. 

That lyfe was non, walkyng there for bye 

That myght within scarce any wight espye. 

The Quair, by King 



" So thick the bewis and the leves grene 

Beschudit all the alleyes that there were. 
And myddis every herbere might be sene 
The scharp grene swete jenepere, 
Growing so fair with branches here and there. 
That as it semyt to a lyfe without, 
The bewis spred the herbere all about." 

ICS I. of Scotland, published by Lord Woodhouselee. 



320. Towards the end of the fifteenth century, Leland, in his Itinerary, states, that at 
« Wresehill Castelle, in Yorkshire, the gardeins within the mote, and the orchardes 
without, were exceeding fair. And yn the orchardes, were mountes, opere topiaris, 
writhen about with degrees like cokil shelles, to com to the top without payn." [Itinerary, 
&.C. p. 60.) Such a mount still exists at the castle inn at Marlborough, not ascended 
by steps or degrees, but by a winding path. It is covered with ancient yeAv-trees, no 
longer o])ere topiaris. Leland also mentions the gardens at Morli, in Derbyshu-e, and 
some others of less note in the northern counties. 

321. During the reign of Henry VII., Holingshed informs us, that large parks or 
circumscribed forests of several miles in circumference were common. Their number in 
Kent and Essex alone amounted to upwards of a hundred, (p. 204.) The Earl of Nor- 
thumberland had in Northumberland, Cumberlatid, and Yorkshire, twenty-one parks, and 
5771 head of red and fallow deer. He had also parks in Sussex, and other southern 
counties. These parks were formed more from necessity than luxury j tenants for land 
being then not so readily obtained as in later times. 

322. During the reign of Henry VIII. the royal gardens of Nonsuch were laid out 
and planted. " At Nonsuche," says Hentzner, " tliere were groves ornamented with trellis- 
work, cabinets of verdure, and walks embowered with trees, wdth columns and pyramids 
of marble. Two fountains that do spout water, the one round the other like a pyramid, 
on which are perched all over, small birds that spout water out of their bills." These 
gardens are stated, in a survey taken in the year 1650, above a century after Henry's 
death, to hav« been cut and divided into several alleys, compartments, and rounds, set about 
with thorn-hedges. On the north side was a kitchen-garden, very commodious, and 
surrounded with a wall fourteen feet high. On the west was a wilderness severed from 
the little park by a hedge, the whole containing ten acres. In the privy-gardens were 
pyramids, fountains, and basins of marble, one of which is " set round with six lilac-trees, 
which trees bear no fruit, but only a very pleasant smell." In the privy-gardens were, 
besides the lilacs, 144 fruit- trees, two yews, and one juniper. In the kitchen-garden 
were seventy-two fruit-trees and one lime-tree. Lastly, before the palace, was a neat 
handsome bowling-green, surrounded with a balustrade of freestone. " In this garden," 
observes Daines Barrington, " we find many such ornaments of old English gardening, 
as prevailed till the modern taste was introduced by Kent." 

F 3 



70 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Parx I. 



Jbtmpton-caurt was laid out about the middle of thU reign, by Cardinal Wolsey. The labyrinth, one 

of the best which remains in England, occupies only a quarter of an acre, and contains nearly half a mile 
of winding walks. There is an adjacent stand, on which the gardener places himself, to extricate the 
adventuring stranger by his directions. Switzer condemns this labyrinth for having only four stops, and 
gives a plan for one with twenty. Daines Barrington says {Archteolog.), that he got out by keeping close, 
to the hedge. 

323. During Elizabeth's reign^ Hatfield, Lord Treasurer Burleigh's, Holland -house, 
and some otlier old seats were laid out. Of Hatfield, Hentzner says, the " gardens are 
surrounded by a piece of water, with boats rowing through alleys of well cut trees, and 
labyrinths made with great labor ; there are jets-cVeau and a summer-house, with many 
pleasant and fair fish-ponds. Statues w^ere very abundant. The Gardejiei''s Labyrinthy 
published during this reign, contains plates of " knotts and mazes cunningly handled 
for the beautifying of gardens." 

324. During the reign of James I. the gardens of Theobalds and Greenwich were 
formed or improved. The garden at Theobalds, Mandelso, a traveller who visited 
England about 1640, describes as " a large square, having all its walls covered with 
fillery (trellis- work), and a beautiful Je^-rf'eau in the centre. The parterre hath many 
pleasant walks, part of which are planted on the sides with espaliers, and others arched 
over. Some of the trees are limes and elms, and at the end is a small mount, called 
iha Mount of Venus, which is placed in the midst of a labyrinth, and is upon the whole 
one of tlie most beautiful spots in the world." {Voyages de Mandelso, tom. i. p. 598.) 
Lord Bacon attempted to reform the national taste during this reign, but apparently 
with little immediate success. He wished still to retain shorn trees and hedges ; but 
proposed winter, or evergreen gardens, and rude or neglected spots, as specimens of wild 
nature. " As for tlie making of knots or figures," says he, " with divers colored earths 
— they be but toys. I do not like images cut out in juniper or other garden-stuff — they 
are for children." {Essay on Gardens.) Sir Henry Wotton says, "the garden at Lord 
Verulam's was one of the best he had seen, either at home or abroad." Lawson's A^ew 
Orchard was published in 1626; he gives directions also for parterres and labyrinths. 
A curious idea is given of the taste of these times in what he says of the latter. " Mazes 
well framed a man's height may, perhaps, make your friend wander in gathering berries, 
till he cannot recover himself without your help." 

325. During the commonwealth a Janua Trilinguis was published at Oxford, in which 
we are informed, that " gardening is practised for food's sake in a kitchen-garden and 
orchard, or for pleasure's sake in a green grass-plot and an arbor." As to the formation 
of the latter, the author adds, " the pleacher {topiarius) prepares a green plat of the more 
choice flowers and rarer plants, and adorns the garden with pleach-work ; that is, with 
pleasant walks and bowers, &c. to conclude with purling fountains, and water-works." 
(chap. 32.) We learn also from this comprehensive author (Commenius) the ancient use 
of parks. We are told, " the huntsman hunteth wild beasts, wliilst he either allureth 
them into pitfalls, and killeth them, or forceth them into toils ; and what he gets alive 
he puts into a park." (chap. 37.) 

326. During the reign of Charles II., landscape-gardening received a grand impulse. 
This monarch, we are informed by Daines Barrington, sent for Perault and Le Notre ; 
tlie former declined coming to England, but the latter planted Greenwich and St. 
James's Parks. Charles planted the semicircle of Hampton Gourt ; the beginning, as 
Switzer informs us, of a grand design never completed. Lord Capel and tlie Earl of 
Essex are mentioned by Switzer as eminent encouragers of gardening during this reign. 
The latter sent his gardener. Rose, to study the much celebrated beauties of Versailles ; 
£Hid on his return he v/as appointed royal gardener. 

Chatsworth [fig. 28.}, the magnificent seat of the Duke of Devonshire, was laid out in this reign ; and 
It IS conjectured, from a design from the same artist. {Beauties of England and Wales. Derbyshire.) Waller 
the poet formed his residence at Beaconsfield about the same time. The grounds there being very irre- 
gular, he has been at considerable labor in reducing the parts near the house and banquetting-room to 
regular slopes and levels, harmonising with an oblong basin or canaL It is but justice to the memory of 
this amateur, who was undoubtedly a man of taste in his day, that, in the more remote scenes, no appear- 
ance of art is discernible, or seems ever to have been intended. Their dry, ragged-edged paths, conducted 
through the natural woods, form a fine contrast to the artificMal scenes at Prior's Park. 

Garden-buUdings^ Daines Barrington conjectures, were first erected in England during this reign by 
Inigo Jones, at Beckett near Farringdon. There a banquetting-room is placed on a point of land project- 
mg into a lake, and is surrounded with a broad base, or platform, protected by a parapet-wall, and 
shaded by the far-projecting eaves of the building- It consists of one apartment with a ceUar below : and 
the covered platform, or base, is supposed to be for ths purpose of angling. 

327. Evelyn, the well-known author of Sylva and other gardening books, flourished 
during this reign. In his memoirs {jmblished by Bray, 1818) are the following remarks 
on the gardens of England, in respect to taste and style : — 

Wooton, in Surrey, 1652, the residence of his father he describes as, for woods and waters, among 
the most natural and magnificent examples which England afforded "till this late and universal lux- 
ury ot the whole nation since abounding in such expenses." 

" Gave my brother some directions about his garden, which he was desirous to put into some form, for 
Which he was to remove a mountain overgrown with large trees and thickets, and a moat within ten 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 71 



28 




yards of the house :" this his brother " succeeded in doing, by digging down the mountain, and flinging it 
into a rapid stream, which carried away the sand, filled up the moat, and levelled that noble area where 
now the garden and fountain is." 

Groom' s-bridge near Tunbridge, " a pretty melancholy place." 

1654. Ladi/ Brook's garden at Hackney, " one of the neatest and most celebrated in England.*" 
Caversham, Lord Craven's," Berkshire. " Goodly woods ffeUing by rebels." 

Cashiobury {fig. 29. ), Lord Essex, Hertfordshire. " No man has been more industrious than this noble 

29 



72 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



lord (E5ssex) jn planting about his seat, adorned with walks, ponds, and other rural elegancies." — " The 
gardens are very rare, and cannot be otherwise, having so skilful an artist to govern them as Cooke, who 
is, as to the mechanical part, not ignorant in mathematics, and pretends to astrology. There is an excellent 
collection of the choicest fruit My lord not illiterate beyond the rate of most noblemen of this age." 

Wilton, Lord Pembroke's, Wiltshire. " The garden, heretofore estoemsd the noblest in England, is a 
large handsome plain, ^vith a grotto and water-works, which might be made much more pleasant were 
the river that passes through cleansed and raised ; for all is efiected by mere force," &c. 

Hampton Park, IMiddlcsex, " formerly a flat naked piece of ground, how planted with sweet rows of lime, 
trees, and the canal for water now near perfected ; also the hare-park. In the garden is a rich and noble 
fountain, with s>Tens, statues, 8cc. cast in copoer by FaneUi, but no plenty of water. The cradle-walk of 
hornbeam in the garden is, for the perplexed twining of the trees, very observable. There is a parterre 
which they call Paradise, in which is a pretty banquetting-house set over a cave or cellar." 

16G2. A citizen's garden. " One Loader, an anchorsmith in Greenwich, grew so rich as to build a house 
in the street, with gardens, orangeries, canals, and other magnificence, on a lease. His father was cf the 
•ame trade, and an anabaptist." 

BushneWs Wells at Enstone. " This Bushnell had been secretary to Lord Verulam. It is an extraor- 
dinary solitude. There he had two mummies, and a grot, %vhcre he lay in a hammoc hke an Indian. 
Hence we went to Ditchley, an ancient seat of the Lees," &c. — Bushnell's gardens and water-works 
etill exist, and are shown as curiosities to strangers. 

Ham House, and garden of the Duke of Lauderdale, Middlesex, "inferior to few of the best villas of 
Italy itself, tlie house furnished like a great prince's ; the parterres, flower-gardens, orangeries, groves, 
avenues, courts, statues, perspectives, fountains, aviaries, and all this at tlie banks of the sweetest river 
in the world, must needs be admirable." 

Wansted House, Essex, {Jig. 50.) " Sir Josiah Child's prodigious cost in planting walnut-trees about his 
soat, and making fish-ponds some miles in circuit in Epping-forest, in a barren spot, as oftentimes th»jsc 

30 




suddenly monied men for the most part seat themselves." — In 1822 this magnificent seat was reduced to a 

mere mass of materials, through the improvidence of "VVellesley Long Pole, who became possessed of it bj 
marriage. The house was sold in lots, and the ground let in small portions on building leases. 

Sir Henry Capcll's orangery and tni/rtitieum at Kew, " most beautiful and perfectly well kept. He was 
contriving very high palisadoes of reeds to shade his oranges during the summer, and painting these reeds 
in oil " 

Althorp, Lord Northampton's, Northamptonshire. " The iron gate opening into the park of very good 
work, wrought in flowers, painted in blue, and gilded." 

Bcddington, the seat of the Carews, Surrey, now decaying, " heretofore adorned with ample gardens, and 
tlie first orange-trees that had been seen in England, planted in the open ground, and secured in winter 
only by a tabernacle of boards and stoves, &c. standing a hundred and twenty years. Large and goodly 
trees, and laden with fruit, now in decay, as well as the grotto and fountains. The cat-Inets and other 
curiosities in the house and abroad being nov/ fallen to a child under age, and only kept by a servant or 
two from further dilapidation. The estate and park about it also in decay." 

Marsden, Surrey. " Originally a barren waiTen, bought by Sir Robert Clayton, who built there a pretty 
house, and made such alteration by planting, not only an infinite store of the best fruit, but so changed the 
natural situation of the hills, valleys, and solitary mountains about it, that it rather represented some 
foreign countrj' which could produce spontaneously pines, firs, cypress, yew, hclly, and juniper ; they were 
come to their perfect growth, %vith walks, &c. among them." . ' 

Alburie Howards, Surrey. " Found the garden exactly done to the design and plot I had made, with the 
crj'pt through the mountain in the park, SO perches in length. Such a Pausilliipe (alluding to the grot of 
PausOippo at Naples) is no where in England besides. The canal was now digging, and the vineyard 
planted." — This cryiit was in part remaining in 1816, but stopped up at the further end. 

Swalloufield, Lady Clarendon, Berkshire. " Lady C. skilled in the flowery part, my lord in diligence of 

Elanting. Water flagged with calamus, all that can' render a cotmtry-seat delightful, and a well furnished 
brary in the house." {Mem. by Bray, i. 462.) 

328. During the same reign (Charles II.) notes were made on some of the gardens round 
London by J. Gibson, -which have been subsequently published in the Archteologia. 
(vol. xii.) Many of those mentioned by Evelyn are included, and spoken of in nearly the 
same terms by Gibson. Terrace-walks, hedges of evergreens, shorn shrubs in boxes, and 
orange and myrtle trees are mentioned as their chief excellencies. The parterre at Hampton 
Court is said to resemble a set of lace patterns. Evelyn himself is said to have a " pleasant 



Book I. 



(JABDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLESy 



73 



villa at Deptford, a fine garden for walks and hedges, and a pretty little green-house with 
an indifferent stock in it. He has four large round philareas, smooth-clipped, raised on a 
single stalk from the ground, a fashion now much used. Part of his garden is very 
woody and shady for walking ; but not being walled, he has little of the best fruits." 

329. During the reign of William and Mary, gardening, Switzer says, arrived at its 
highest perfection. King William, Daines Barrington inlForms us, gave vogue to dipt 
yews, with magnificent gates and rails of iron, not unfrequent in Holland, and about 
this time (see Huetiana) introduced into France, and, in reference to the opaque stone- 
walls which they supplanted, called there dairs-voyees. The most extensive iron screens 
of this sort in England, next to those of Hampton Court, were formed by Switzer, at 
Leeswold, in Flintshire, laid out by that artist in a mixed style, or what is called 
Bridgeman's first manner. Hampton Court being at this time the actual residence of 
the royal family, the gardens underwent considerable improvement. An elegant alcove 
and arched trellis were added at the end of one of the alleys, and four urns placed before 
the principal part of the house, supposed by Daines Barrington (Archceologia) to be the 
first that were thus used in England. Towards the end of this century, vegetable sculp- 
tures, and embroidered parterres, were probably in their highest vogue, a conjecture 
confirmed by the works of Le Blond, James, Switzer^ &c. published during this and the 
following reign. Sir William Temple's Essay on the Gardens of Epicurus appeared 
about the same time. His picture of a perfect garden, is that of a flat, or gentle de- 
clivity of an oblong shape, lying in front of the house, with a descent of steps from a 
terrace, extending the whole length of the house. This enclosure is to be cultivated as a 
kitchen-garden and orchard. Such a garden he found at Moor Park, Hertfordshire, 
laid out by the Countess of Bedford, celebrated by Dr. Donne, " the sweetest place, I 
tliink, that I have seen in my life, before or since, at home or abroad." Lord Walpole, 
in his enthusiasm for the modern style, observes on this description, that any man might 
form as sweet a garden, who had never been out of Holborn. — It has long since been 
destroyed, and its place occupied by lawn and trees. 

330. During Queen Anne's reign the principal alteration mentioned by Daines Bar- 
rington, as having taken place in the royal gardens, was that of covering the parterre 
before the great terrace at Windsor with turf. Switzer mentions, that her Majesty finished 
the old gardens at Kensington, begun by King William. Wise, who had been apprentice 
to Rose, and succeeded him as royal gardener, turned the gravel-pits into a shrubbery, 
with winding walks, with which Addison was so struck, that he compares him to an epic 
poet, and these improved pits as episodes to the general effect of the garden. Wise and 
London afterwards turned nurserymen, and designers of gardens, in which last capacity 
they were nearly in as great demand as was afterwards the celebrated Brown. To 
London and Wise, as designers, succeeded Bridgeman, who appears to have been a more 
chaste artist than any of his predecessors. He banished vegetable sculpture, and intro- 
duced wild scenes and cultivated fields in Richmond park ; but he still dipt his alleys, 
though he left to their natural growth the central parts of the masses through which they 
were pierced. Blenheim, Castle Howard, Cranbourne, Bushy Park, Edger, Althorpe, 
New Park, Bowden, Hackwood, Wrest, and indeed almost all the principal noblemen's 
seats in the ancient style, were laid out during this, the preceding, and part of the latter 
reigns, or between the years 1660 and 1713. Blenheim was laid out by Wise in three 
years ; Wansted and Edger were the last of London's designs. (Switzer.) 

331. During the reign of George I. nothing of consequence appears to have been done 
to the royal gardens ; though, near the end of it, Vanbrugh was appointed surveyor of 
the waters and gardens of the crown , but continued only a year or two in ofiice. 

332. During the reign of George II. Queen Caroline enlarged and planted Kensington 
Gardens, and formed what is now called the Serpentine River, by uniting a string of 
detached ponds. Tliis was a bold step, and led the way to subsequent changes of taste. 
Lord Bathurst informed Daines Barrington, that ke was the first who deviated from the 
straight l^ne in pieces of made water, by following the natural lines of a valley, in widen- 
ing a brook at Ryskins, near Colebrook ; and that Lord Strafford thinking that it was 
done from poverty or economy, asked him to own fairly, how little more it would have 
cost him to have made it straight. From Lord Walpole's correspondence (published 
1819) we learn that Queen Caroline proposed to shut up St. James's Park, and convert 
it into a noble garden for the palace of that name. When her Majesty asked Lord 
Walpole's father what it might probably cost, he answered " only three crowns." 

Cannons, the magnificent seat of the Duke of Chandos, is one of the principal places laid out in the 
ancient style during this reign. We are ignorant of the name of the French artist who gave the design, 
but the execution was superintended by Dr. Blackwell, a physician and agriculturist of some note. The 
Duke is mentioned by Miller, as one of the principal encouragers of gardening. As far as we have been 
able to learn, the last extensive residence laid out in the ancient style, in England, was Exton Park, in 
Rutlandshire, then the property of the Earl of Gainsborough, the Maecenas of his age. It was finished 
about the year 1730. Kent had already returned from Italy, and been employed as a painter and architect, 
and he began to display his genius a few years afterwards as a landscape-gardener. 



74 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



333. In this irief outline of tJie progress of the ancient style in England, we have not 
had room to notice numerous fine gardens formed by private individuals, preferring rather 
to notice what had been done in the gardens of the court, which, as they generally lead 
the fashion in every country, may be considered as a tolerably exact index of the state of 
a nation's taste. The reader who is desirous of tracing more minutely the progress of 
tliis branch of gardening among the landed proprietors of England, will find himself 
amply gratified by consulting The Beauties of England and Wales ; a work in which is 
exhausted every source of antiquarian and topographical research, up nearly to the present 
time. The histories of gardening, by Lord Walpole and Daines Barrington, and the 
prefaces to the gardening works of Miller and Switzer, may also be referred to. 

334. The modern style of landscape- gardenijig was introduced during the early part of 
the eighteenth century. The origin of this style, and by whom and where it was first 
exliibited, have given rise to much discussion, and various opinions and assertions. 

T7ie continental nations in general assert that we borrowed it from the Chinese ; or with Gabriel Tliouin 
and Malacarne, deny us the merit of being the first either to borrow or invent it, by presenting claims of 
originality (166. and 78.) for their respective countries. Gabriel Thouin asserts {Plans Raisonnes, preface, 
&c.) that the first example was given by Dufresnoy (166.), a Parisian architect, in the Faubourg Saint 
Antoine, in the beginning of the eighteenth century. The claims of Malacarne of Padua, in behalf of 
Charles I. Duke of Savoy, about the end of the sixteenth century, have been already adverted to. In as 
far as literature is concerned, we think that Tasso's claim to priority is indisputable. "(See Dissertaxione su 
i Giardini Inglese, by Hippolyto Pindemonte, Verona, 1817, or a translation of part of it by us in the 
Kcw Monthly Magazine, Feb. 1820.) Deleuze, the historian of botany and ornamental plants, {Annates du 
Musee, torn. viii. 1806,) endeavours, at some length, to prove that the new style of gardening arose from 
the necessity of finding room for the great number of ornamental shrubs and trees introduced from Ame- 
rica, during the first half of the eighteenth century. Boettinger, in his Racemazioneiii zur GarienJcunst 
der A/ten, &c. carries us back to the descriptions of the grotto of Calypso by Homer, the vale of Tempe 
by iElian, and of Vaucluse by Petrarch. 

335. British authors are of various opinions as to the origin of the modern style. 

The poet Gray {Life and Letters, &c. Letter to Mr. How, dated 1763) is of opinion, that " our skill in 
gardening, or rather laying out grounds, is the only taste we can call our ovm ; the only proof of original 
talent in matters of pleasure. This is no small honor to us ; since neither France nor Italy have ever 
had the least notion of it." 

Wai-ton and Lord Walpole, the former in his Essay on Pope, and the latter in his History of Modern 
Gardening, agree in referring the first ideas to Milton ; and Warton adds, that the Seasons of Thomson 
may have had a very considerable influence. 

George Mason, the author of an Essay on Design in Gardening, which appeared in 1768, and is one of the 
earliest prose works on the modern style, states, that " were only classical authorities consulted, it would 
hardly be supposed that even from the earliest ages any considerable variation in taste had ever prevailed." 
{Essay on Design, Sec. p. 27.) Speaking of the Chinese style he says, " little did Sir William Temple 
imagine, that in not much more than half a century, the Chinese would become the nominal taste of his 
country ; or that so many adventurers in it would do great justice to his observation, and prove by their 
works, how difficult it is to succeed in the undertaking. Yet to this whimsical exercise of caprice, the 
modern improvements in gardening may chiefly be attributed." {Essay on Design, &c. p. 50.) No man 
could be a more enthusiastic admirer of the classics, a warmer patriot, or a more rigid critic, than this 
author ; and it appears from another part of his work {Discussion on Kent, p. 105.) that he was well aware, 
when he wrote the above passage, that the origin of the modern style was generally traced to Kent. That 
he should derive it from our attempt at the Chinese manner, we consider as a proof of candor and 
impartialitj'. 

Mason the poet states, in a note to the English Garden, that " Bacon was the prophet, Milton the herald, 
of modern gardening; and Addison, Pope, and Kent, the champions of true taste." The efficacy of 
Bacon's ideas, G. Mason considers to have been " the introduction of classical landscapes," though this 
does not very clearly appear from his essay, the object of which seems to be, to banish certain littlenesses 
and puerilities, and to create more variety, by introducing enclosures of wild scenery, as well as of culti- 
vation. The title of champion, applied to Addison, alludes to his excellent paper in the Spectator, No. 414. 
" On Uie causes of the pleasures of the imagination arising from the works of nature, and their sui)eriority 
over those of art," published in 1712 ; and when applied to Pope, it refers to his celebrated Guardian, 
No. 173. published the following year. Boettinger, however, affirms that the bishop of Avranches had 
thrown out similar ideas, previously to the appearance of the Spectator. (See Huetiana, Pensee 51. 
" Beautes naturelles preferahles aux beautes de I'art y" and p. 72. " Des jardins d la mode.") 

The Rev. Dr. Alison, author of the Analysis of Beauty, seems to consider the modem stjle as derived 
from our taste for the classic descriptions of the poets of antiquity. " In this view," (alluding to the pro- 
gress of art from the expression of design to the expression of variety and natural beaut}-,) he observes, 
*' I cannot help thinking that the modern taste in gardening (or what Walpole very justly, and very em- 
phatically, calls the art of creating landscape,) owes its origin to two circumstances, which may, at first, 
appear paradoxical, viz. to the accidental circumstances of our taste in natural beauty being founded upon 
foreign models ; and to the difference or inferiority of the scenery of our own country to that which we 
were accustomed peculiarly to admire." 

Eustace, the Italian tourist, considers Tasso's garden of Armida as more likely to have given rise to the 
English style than any classical work, or even the Paradise of Milton. 

Our own opinion inclines to that of G. Mason, without doubting that examples of wild scenery, with 
walks, may have been exhibited long before both in Italy and this country. The general progress of ideas 
in matters of taste and refinement, required the creation of such a style ; and the highlj'-cultivated state 
of the country, the accoimts of Chmese gardens, and the descriptions of the poets, would aU conspire to 
its production. 

336. The jn-incijjles of modern lajidscape-gardening were unquestionably first laid down 
by English writers. It is allowed on all sides, that Addison and Pope " prepared for 
the new art of gardening the firm basis of philosoplucal principles." Addison's paper on 
Imagination, Avas published so early as 1712; and Pope's celebrated Guardian on Ver- 
dant Sculpture, in 1713. Pope attacked the verdant sculpture, and formal groves of the 
ancient style, with the keenest shafts of ridicule ; and in his epistle to Lord Burlington, 
laid down the justest principles of art ; the study of nature, of the genius of the place, 
and never to lose sight of good sense. 



Book I. 



GARPENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



75 



S37. The Hrst examples of modem landscape-gardening were given by Pope and Addi- 
son. In so far as was practicable on a spot of little more than two acres, Pope practised 
what he wrote ; and his well-known garden at Twickenham contained, so early as 1716, 
some highly picturesque and natural-like scenery ; accurately described by various con- 
temporary writers. Only the soil of Pope's garden now remains. (See Beauties of 
England and Wales. ) Addison had a small retirement at Bilton, near Rugby, laid out 
in what may be called a rural style, and which still exists, with very little alteration be- 
sides that of time. 

338. The first artists who practised in the modern style, were Bridgeman and Kent. 
Bridgeman was the fashionable designer of gardens in the beginning of tlie 18th century, 
and may be considered as having succeeded to London and Wise, London having died 
in 1713. Lord Walpole conjectures Bridgeman to have been " struck and reformed" 
by the Guardian, No. 173. He banished verdant sculpture, and introduced morsels of 
a forest appearance in the gardens at Richmond ; " but not till other innovators had 
broke loose from rigid symmetry." But it was reserved for Kent, the friend of Lord 
Burlington, says Daines Barrington, to carry Pope's ideas more extensively into execu- 
tion. It was reserved for him *' to realise the beautiful descriptions of the poets, for 
which he was peculiarly adapted by being a painter ; as the true test of perfection in 
modern gardening is, that a landscape-painter would choose it for a composition." Kent, 
according to Lord Walpole, appeared immediately after Bridgeman began to make in- 
novations on the old style. Among these innovations the capital stroke was the destruc- 
tion of walls for boundaries, and the introduction of ha-has ; — the harmony of the lawn 
with the park followed. Kent appeared at this moment, and saw that all nature was a 
garden ; " painter enough to taste the charms of landscape, bold and opinionative enough 
to dare and to dictate, and born with a genius to strike out a great system ; from the 
twilight of imperfect essays, he realised the compositions of the greatest masters in paint- 
ing." " Kent," continues his lordship, " was neither without assistance nor without 
faults. Pope contributed to form his taste ; and the gardens at Carleton House were 
probably borrowed from the poet's at Twickenham." 

339. The origin and establishment of the modem style of landscape-gardening in England 
appears thus to have been effected by Addison, Pope, Bridgeman, and Kent. 

The various deviatiotis from rigid uniformity, or more correctly, the various attempts to succeed in the 
Chinese manner, appear to have taken a new and decisive character under the guidance of Kent, a circum- 
stance, in our opinion, entirely owing to his having the ideas of a painter ; for no mere gardener, occupied 
in imitating the Chinese, or even Italian manner, would ever have thought of studying to produce pictu- 
resque effect. Picturesque beauty, indeed, we consider to have been but little recognised in this country, 
excepting by painters, previously to the time of Pope, who was both a painter and a poet. The continued 
approbation of the modern style, as purified from the Chinese absurdities, originally more or less introduced 
with it, and continued in many places long after Kent's time, we consider to be chiefly owing to the cir- 
cumstance of the study of drawing and landscape-painting having become a part of the general system of 
education ; and thus, as Alison observes, our taste for natural beauty was awakened ; " the power of 
simple nature was felt and acknowledged, and the removal of the articles of acquired expression, led men 
only more strongly to attend to the natural expression of scenery, and to study the means by which it 
might be maintained or improved." 

340. The adoption and extension of the modern style in England may next be con- 
sidered. The means which led to its popularity in Britain, and indeed over the whole of 
Europe, were the examples of artists and authors, to which it gave rise. 

341. The country-seats in which the modern style was first employed are described by 
Shenstone, G. Mason, and Wheatley, in their works on gardening, and incidentally by 
some other authors. 

Stowe appears to have been the first extensive residence in which the modem style was adopted. 

Lord Cobh am seems to have been occupied in re-modelling the grounds at Stowe, about the same time 
that Pope was laying out his gardens at Twickenham. His lordship began these improvements in 1714, 
employing Bridgeman, whose plans and views for altering old Stowe from the most rigid character of the 
ancient style to a more open and irregular design, are still in existence. Kent was employed a few years 
afterwards, first to paint the hall, and afterwards in the double capacity of architect and landscape-gar- 
dener ; and the finest buildings and scenes there are his creation. The character of Stowe is well known : 
nature has done little ; but art has created a number of magnificent buildings, by which it has been at- 
tempted to give a sort of emblematic character to scenes of little or no natural expression. The result 
is unique ; but more, as expressed by Pope, " a work to wonder at," than one to charm the imagination. 
The friends of Lord Cobham seem to have considered him as the first who exhibited the new style to his 
country, if we may judge from the concluding lines of an epitaph to his memory, placed in the garden,— 

ET ELEGANTIORI HORTORUM CULTU HIS PRIMUM IN AORIS ILLUSTRATO PATRIAM ORNAVIT, 1747. 

Woburn Farm, near Weybridge, in Surrey, is supposed to have been one of the first small places, where 
the new system struck out by Kent was adopted, Sonthcote, says G. Mason, possessed a genius in many 
respects well suited to the purpose, but was rather too lavish of his flowery decorations. The extent 
of the grounds was one hundred and fifty acres, thirty-five of which were ornamented to the highest 
degree, two-thirds of the remainder were in pasture on rising grounds, and the rest in tillage. The 
decorations consisted in having a broad margin of shrubbery and gravel-walk to almost every fence, 
but varied by difference of style, views, buildings, &c. It is minutely described in Wheatley's Observatimis, 
as an example of an ornamented farm. Q. Mason thinks the decorated strip often too narrow, and some- 
times offensive, from the impossibility of concealing the fence. To this bordering walk, he thinks, may 
probably be attributed the introduction of the belt. His remarks refer to the year 1768. In 1803, it had 
repeatedly changed proprietors, and scarcely a vestige remained to distinguish it from a common farm. 

Pains Hill, the creation of the Hon. Charles Hamilton, ninth son of James, sixth earl of Abercorn, is 
supposed to have been one of the next specimens exhibited of the modern style. Hamilton is said to have 
studied pictures, with a view to the improvement of grounds. Pains Hill is a small park, surrounded on 



76 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



three sides by garden and picturesque scenery. Excepting ft-om the house, there is no distant prospect ; 

but the surface being considerably undulated, the views from the walks across the park have some variety, 
and are always agreeable. This place is one of the few, described by Wheatley, which is still in perfect 
preservation. 

Hagley seems to have been improved about the same time as Pains Hill, in eiFecting which, Lord 
Lyttelton might probably receive some hints from the poet Thomson, who was then his guest. The 
grounds are much varied, and the distant prospects picturesque. A very small rill, which passed through 
the grounds in a sort of dell, was surrounded with shrubbery and walks, from which the park-scenery 
formed a sort of foreground, and sometimes a middle distance to the ofFscape ; thus, in the language of 
Wheatley, " blending the excellencies of the park and the garden." The fine trees, the distant prospects, 
and the principal buildings, still remain ; but the garden-scenery has been long since choked by the 
growth of the forest-trees; and some years ago the fence was removed, and the whole thrown into 
the park. 

South Lodge comes next in order. Soon after the improvements of Hamilton and Lyttelton, " the great 
Pitt," G. Mason informs us, " turned his mind to the embellishment of rural nature," and exercised his 
talent at the South Lodge upon Enfield Chace. " The first ground surrounding the enclosure was then 
wild and woody, and is diversified with hill and dale. He entertained the idea (and admirably realised 
it) of making the interior correspond with the exterior scenery. His temple of Pan is mentioned in Observ- 
ations. But the singular effort of his genius was a successful imitation of the picturesque appearance of a 
by-lane, on the very principles Price supposes it might be practicable." 

The Leasowes were improved about the same time. It v/as literally a grazing-farm, with a walk, in 
imitation of a common field, conducted through the several enclosures. Much taste and ingenuity was dis- 
played in forming so many points of view in so confined an extent, and with so few advantages in point of 
distance. But root-houses, seats, urns, and inscriptions, were too frequent for the whole to be classed with 
a common, or even an improved or ornamented English farm. It was, in fact, intended as an emblematical 
scene in which constant allusion was made to pastoral poetry ; and if we consider it in this light, in that of 
a sentimental farm, it was just what it ought to have been. W'e regret to find that Repton should attack 
the taste of this amiable man, from a misconception, as we presume, of his intentions, by blaming him for 
not " surrounding his house with such a quantity of ornamental lawn or park only, as might be consistent 
with the size of the mansion or the extent of the property." We fear that if Shenstone had adopted this 
mode of improvement, the Leasowes had never been distinguished from places got up by the common rou- 
tine of professorship. Shenstone broke his heart through the infamous conduct of a Birmingham attorney, 
in whose hands he had placed the title-deeds of his estate. The farm is now much neglected, though the 
paths, and many of the seats and root-houses, still remain. 

Claremont and Esher are well known. Both were laid out by Kent and Claremont, afterwards enlarged, 
and the house and kitchen-gardens added by Bro^vn. Walpole and Wheatley have celebrated both, and 
also Garth. Esher is praised by Warton, in his poem " The Enthusiast or Lover of Nature " 1740. Esher 
no longer exists ; but Claremont is kept up in tolerable style by Prince Leopold. 

Persjield was laid out so late as 1750. It is a small park, with an interesting walk, carried along the brow 
of a romantic rocky bank of the river Wye, perhaps as faultless as the nature of the place admits of " I 
cannot recollect," says G. Mason, writing of this place in 1768, " that any of the scenes on the Wye are 
the least adulterated by the introduction of any puerile appendage whatever." 

342. The artists or professors who established the modern style were, Bridgeman, Kent, 
Wright, Brown, and Eames. 

Of Bridgeman we have been able to procure no information. 

Kent was born in Yorkshire, and apprenticed to a coach-painter in 1719. He soon afterwards came to 
London, discovered a genius for painting, was sent to Italy, patronised there by Lord Burlington, returned 
with his lordship, and lived with him in Burlington House till 1748, when he died at the age of 63 years. 
On his first return, he was chiefly employed to paint historical subjects and ceilings ; and the hall at Stowe 
is from his pencil. Soon afterwards he was emplo}-ed as an architect ; and, lastly, as a landscape-gardener. 
It is not known where he first exercised his genius as a layer-out of grounds ; probably at Claremont and 
Esher, two of his designs, both minutely described by Wheatley, and, judging from the age of the trees, 
laid out some time between 1725 and 1735. Kent was also employed at Kensington Gardens, where he is 
said to have introduced parts of dead trees to heighten the allusion to natural woods. Mason, the poet, 
mentions Kent's Elysian scenes in the highest style of panegyric, and observes in a note, that he prided 
himself in shading with evergreens in his more finished pieces, in the manner described in the 14th and 
15th sections of Wheatley's Observations. " According to my own idea," adds G. Mason, " all that has 
since been done by the most deservedly admired designers, by Southcote, Hamilton, Lyttelton, Pitt, Shen- 
stone, Morris, for "themselves, and by Wright for others, all that has been written on the subject, even the 
Gardening Didactic Poetn and the Didactic Essay on the Picturesque, have proceeded from Kent. Had 
Kent never exterminated the bounds of regularity, never actually traversed the way to freedom of man- 
ner, would any of these celebrated artists have' found it of themselves ? Theoretical hints from the 
highest authorities had evidently long existed without sufficient eflfect. And had not these great masters 
actually executed what Kent's e"xample first inspired them with the design of executing, would the subse- 
quent writers on gardening have been enabled to collect materials for precepts, or stores for their ima- 
ginations ?" {Essay, &c. p. 112.) 

Wright seems to have been in some repute at the time of Kent's death. " His birth and education," 
G. Mason informs us, " were above plebeian ; he understood drawing, and sketched plans of his designs ; but 
never contracted for work, which might occasion his not being applied to by those who consider nothing so 
much as having trouble taken off their hands." At Becket, the seat of Lord Barrington, he produced an 
admired effect on a lawn ; and at Stoke, near Bristol, he is supposed to have decorated a copse- wood with 
roses, in the manner advised in the fourth book of the English Garden, and extensively displayed at 
Fonthill Abbey. He also designed the terrace- v/alk and river at Oatlands, both deservedly admired ; the 
latter being not unfrequently mistaken for the Thames itself 

Brown is the next professor, in the order of time. He was a native of Northiunberland, fiUed the situation 
of kitchen-gardener at a small place near Woodstock, in Oxfordshire ; and was afterwards head-gardener at 
Stowe tiU 1750. He was confined (see Beauties of E. and W. Bucks) to the kitchen-garden, by Lord Cobham, 
who, however, afterwards recommended him to the Duke of Grafton, at Wakefield Lodge, Northampton- 
shire, where he directed the formation of a large lake, which laid the foundation of his fame and fortune. 
Lord Cobham afterwards procured for him the situation of royal gardener at Hampton Court and Windsor. 
He was now consulted by the nobility, and among other places at Blenheim. There he threw a dam across 
the vale, and the first artificial lake in the world was completed in a week. By this he attained the summit 
of his popularity. The fashion of employing him continued, says G. Mason, not only to 1768, but to the 
time of his death, many years afterwards. Repton has given a Mst of his principal works, among which 
Croome and Fisherwicke are the two largest new places which he formed, including at Croome the man- 
sion and offices, as well as the grounds. The places he altered are beyond all reckoning. Improvement 
was the passion of the day ; and there was scarcely a country-gentleman who did not, on some occasion 
or other, consult the royal gardener. Mason, the poet, praises this artist, and Lord Walpole apologises 
for not praising him. Daines Barrington says, " Kent hath been succeeded by Brown, who hath un- 
doubtedly great merit in laying out pleasure-grounds ; but I conceive that, in some of his plans, I see 
rather traces of the kitchen-gardener of old Stowe, than of Poussin or Claude Lorrain, I cordd wish, there- 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



77 



fore, that Gainsborough gave the design, and that Brown executed." The works and memory of Brown 
have been severely attacked by Knight and Price, and strenuously defended by Repton, who styles him " his 
great self-taught predecessor." " Brown," observes G. Mason, " always appeared to myself in the light 
of an egregious mannerist ; who, from having acquired a facility in shaping surfaces, grew fond of exhi- 
biting that talent, without due regard to nature, and left marks of his intrusion wherever he went. His 
new plantations were generally void of genius, taste, and propriety ; but I have seen instances of his ma- 
naging old ones much better. He made a view to Cheney's church, from Latimer (Bucks), as natural 
and picturesque as can well be imagined. Yet at the same place he iiad stuffed a very narrow vale, by the 
side of an artificial river, with those crowded circular clumps of firs alone, that Price attributes to him. 
The incongruity of this plan struck most of the neighbouring gentlemen, but was defended by the artist 
himself, under shelter of the epithet ' playful/ totally misapplied." {Essay on Design, p. 130. 2d edit. 1795.) 

That Brown must have possessed considerable talents, the extent of his reputation abundantly proves ; 
but that he was imbued with much of that taste for picturesque beauty v/hich distinguished the works of 
Kent, Hamilton, and Shenstone, we think will hardly be asserted by any one who has observed atten- 
tively such places as are known to be his creations. Whatever be Ihe extent or character of the surface, 
they are all surrounded by a narrow belt, and th-2 space within is distinguished by numbers of round or 
oval clumps, and a reach or two of a tame riTer on different levels. This description, in short, will apply to 
almost every place in Britain laid out from the time (about 1740) when the passion commenced for new- 
modelling country-seats, to about 1785 or 1790, when it in ?. great measure ceased. The leading outline of 
this plan of improvement was easily recollected and easily applied; the great demand produced abundance 
of artists ; and the general appearance of the country so rapidly changed under their operations, that in 
1772, Sir William Chambers declared, that if the mania were not checked, in a few years longer there 
•would not be found three trees in a line from the Land s-end to the Tweed. Brown, it is said, never went 
out of England, but he sent pupils and plans to Scotland and Ireland ; and Paulowsky, a seat of the late 
emperor Paul, near Petersburg, is said to be from his design. Brown, as far as we have learned, could not 
draw, but had assistants, who made out plans of ^hat he intended. He generally contracted for the 
execution of the work- He amassed a handsome fortune, and his son Launcelot has sat in several 
parliaments. 

The immediate successor of Brown was his nephew, Holland, who was more employed as an architect 
than as a landscape-gardener, though he generally directed the disposition of the grounds when he was 
employed in the former capacity. HoUand, we believe, retired from business some years ago. 

Fames is the next artist that deserves to be mentioned ; of him, however, we know little more than that 
he is mentioned in terms of respect by G. Mason. 

343. The authors who established the modern style are, Addison, Pope, Shenstone, 
G. Mason, Wheatley, and Mason, the poet. 

Addison's Spectators have been already referred to. 

JPope's Epistle to Lord Burlington has also been noticed, as well as 

ShenstoTie's Unconnected Thoughts ; the former published in 1716, the latter in 1764. 

G. Mason^s Essay on Design in Gardening, from which we have so frequently quoted, was first published 
in 1768, and afterwards greatly enlarged in 1795. It is more a historical and critical work than a didactic 
performance. Mason was an excellent classical scholar : he lived much alone, and almost always in London, 
being connected with the Sun Fire OlRce. 

Wheatley's Observations on Modern Gardening, published in 1770, is the grand fundamental and standard 
work on English gardening. It is entirely analytical ; treating, first, of the materials, then of the scenes, 
and lastly, of the subjects of gardening. Its style has been pronounced by Ensor inimitable; and the 
descriptions with which his investigations are accompanied, have been largely copied and amply praised 
by Alison, in his work on taste. The book was soon translated into the continental languages, and is 
judiciously praised in the Mercure de France, Journal Encyclopedique, and Wieland's Journal. G. Ma- 
son alone dissents from the general opinion, enlarging on the very few faults or peculiarities which 
are to be found in the book. Wheatley, or Whateley, (for so little is known of this eminent man, that we 
have never been able to ascertain satisfactorily the orthography of his name,) was proprietor of Nonsuch 
Park, in Surrey, and was secretary to the Earl of Suffolk. He published only this work, soon after which 
he died. After his death, some remarks on Shakspeare, from his pen, were published in a small 12mo. 
volume. 

The English Garden, a poem by W. Mason, was published in four different books, the first of which 
appeared in 1772. With the exception of the fourth book, it was received with very great applause. The 
precepts for planting are particularly instructive. On the whole, the work may be classed with the Observ- 
ations of Wheatley; and these two books may be said to exhibit a clear view of the modern style, as first 
introduced and followed by liberal and cultivated minds ; whilst the Dissertation on Oriental Gardenings 
by Sir William Chambers, published in 1772, holds up to ridicule the absurd imitations of uncultivated 
amateurs and professors, who have no other qualifications than those acquired in laboring with the spade 
under some celebrated artist. Mason was a clergyman, resident in Yorkshire, and died in 1797. 

344. The 2)artial corruption of the modern style took place as soon as it became fashion- 
able ; though it may be true, that " in all liberal arts, the merit of transcendent 
genius, not the herd of pretenders, characterises an aera," yet in an art like that of 
laying out grounds, whose productions necessarily have such an influence on the general 
face of a country, it is impossible to judge otherwise of the actual state of the art, than 
from the effect which is produced. This effect, about forty yeai-s ago, when clumps and 
belts blotted every horizon, could never be mistaken for that intended by such pro- 
fessors as Kent, or such authors as Wheatley and Mason. The truth is, such was the rage 
for improvement, that the demand for artists of genuine taste exceeded the regular supply ; 
and, as is usual in such cases, a false article was brought to market, and imposed on the 
public. A liberal was thus for a time reduced to a mechanic art, and a new character given 
to modern improvements, which, from consisting in a display of ease, elegance, and 
nature, according to the situation, became a system of set forms, indiscriminately applied 
in every case. This system was in fact more formal, and less varied, than the ancient 
style to which it succeeded, because it had fewer parts. An ancient garden had avenues, 
alleys, stars, pates-d'oye, pelotons or platoons (square clumps), circular masses, rows, 
double and single, and strips, all from one material, wood; but the modern style, as 
now degraded, had only three forms, a clump, a belt, and a single tree. Place the belt 
in the circumference, and distribute the clumps and single trees within, and all that re- 
spects wood in one of these places is finished. The professor required no further exa- 
mination of the ground than what waa necessary to take the levels for forming a piece of 



78 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



WQter, which water .uniformly assumed one shape and character, and differed no more 
in different situations, than did the belt or the clump. So entirely mechanical had the 
art become, that any one might have guessed what would be the plan given by the pro- 
fessor before he was called in ; and Price actually gives an instance in which this was 
done. The activity of tliis false taste was abated in England before our time ; but we 
have seen in Scotland, between the years 1795 and 1805, we believe, above a hundred 
of such plans, in part formed by local artists, but chiefly by an English professor, who 
was in the habit of making annual journeys in the north, taking orders for plans, which 
he got drawn on his return home, not one of which differed from the rest in any thing 
but magnitude. These plans were, in general, mounted on linen, which he regularly 
purchased in pieces of some hundreds of yards at a time, from a celebrated bleachfield 
adjoining Perth. 

345. The monotonous jyroduclions of this mechanical style soon brought it into disrepute ; 
and proprietors were ridiculed for expending immense sums in destroying old avenues 
and woods, and planting in their room young clumps, for no other reason than that it 
was the fashion to do so. 

The first symptoms of disappi-obation that were ventured to be uttered against the degradation of the new 
taste, appear to be contained in an epistolary novel, entitled Village Memoirs, published in 1775, in 
which the professors of gardening are satirised under the name of Layout. A better taste, however, than 
that of Layout is acknowledged to exist, which the author states, " Shenstone and nature to have brought 
us acquainted with." Most of the large gardens are said to be laid out by some general undertaker, " who 
introduces the same objects at the same distances in alL" (p. 143.) The translation of Girardin Dela Com- 
position des Paysages, ou des Moyens d'embellir la Nature autour des Habitations, en joignant Vagreable i 
I'utile, See. accompanied with an excellent historical preface by Daniel Malthus, Esq. in 1783, must have 
had considerable influence in purifj'ing the taste of its readers. A poem in Dodsley's collection, entitled. 
Some Thoughts on Building and Planting, addressed to Sir James Lowther, Bart published in the same 
year, and in which the poet recommends, that 

•* Fashion wiU not the works direct. 
But reason be the architect." 

must have had some effect. But the Essay on Prints, and the various picturesque tours of Gilpin, pub- 
lished at different intervals from 1768 to 1790, had the principal influence on persons of taste. The beauties 
of light and shade, outline, grouping, and other ingredients of picturesque beauty, were never before ex- 
hibited to the English public in popular writings. These works were eagerly read, and brought about 
that general study of drawing and sketching landscape among the then rising generation, which has ever 
since prevailed ; and will do more, perhaps, than any other class of studies, towards forming a taste for the 
harmony and connection of natural scenery, the only secure antidote to the revival of the distinctness and 
monotony which characterise that which we have been condemning. 

346. The monotonous style has been ably exposed by Price and Knight. The Essays on 
the Picturesque, of the former, and the poem of the latter, though verging on the opposite 
extreme of the evil they wished to remove, have greatly improved the taste of proprietors 
and patrons. Tlie object of The Landscape, a didactic poem, is to teach tlie art of cre- 
ating scenery more congruous and picturesque than what is met witli in that " tiresome 
and monotonous scene called Pleasure-ground." Price's Essays on the Picturesque, and 
on the use of studying Pictures, with a view to the improvemejit of real Landscape, are 
written with the same intention ; but, as might be expected from a prose work, enter on 
the subject much more at length. In order to discover " whether the present system of 
improving is founded on any just principles of taste," Price begins by enquiring, 
*' whether there is any standard, to which, in point of grouping and of general compo- 
sition, works of this sort can be referred ; any authority higher than that of the persons 
who have gained the most general and popular reputation by their works, and whose 
method of conducting them has had the most extensive influence on the general taste." 
This standard (which, it will be recollected by the candid reader, is desired only for what 
relates to grouping and composition, not to utility and convenience, as some have unfairly 
asserted) Price finds in the productions " of those great artists, who have most diligently 
studied the beauties of nature, both in their grandest and most general effects, and in their 
minutest detail ; who have obser%-ed every variety of form and of color ; have been able 
to select and combine ; and then, by the magic of their art, to fix upon the canvass 
all these various beauties." Price recommends the study of the principles of painting, 
" not to the exclusion of nature, but as an assistant in the study of her works." He 
points out and illustrates two kinds of beauty in landscape ; the one the picturesque, 
characterised by roughness, abruptness, and sudden variation ; the other beauty in the 
more general acceptation, characterised by smoothness, undulations, intermixed with a 
certain degree of roughness and variation, producing intricacy and variety. Such beauty 
was made choice of by Claude in his landscapes, and such, he thinks, particularly adapted 
to the embellishment of ai'tificial sceneiy. These principles are applied by Price, in a 
very masterly manner, to wood, water, and buildings. 

347. The reformation in taste contended for by Piice and ICnight was, like all other pro- 
posals for reform, keenlj- opposed by professors, by a numerous class of mankind who hate 
innovation, and with whom " whatever is is right," including perhaps some men of taste, 
who had no feeling for the picturesque, or had mistaken the object of the book. The 
first answer to Price's work, was a letter by Repton, in which candor obliges^ us to state, 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. T9 

that the latter has misrepresented his antagonist's meaning, by confounding the study of 
pictures with that of the study of the principles of painting. Price published an able 
answer to this production, which, he informs us, was even more read than the original 
essays. Two anonymous poems of no merit made their appearance, as satires on The 
Landscape, and indirectly on the Essai/s on the PicLuresque. The Review of the Land- 
scape, and of a?i Essay on the Picturesque, 8cc. by Marshall, was published in 1795. 
There can scarcely be any thing more violent than this publication. The periodical 
critics brought forward all sorts of reasons against the use of the study of pictures, and 
deny (with truth perhaps as to themselves) the distinct character of the picturesque. Mr. 
Price they treat as " a mere visionaiy amateur," and Knight as " a Grub-street poet, 
who has probably no other garden than the pot of mint before his windows." 

The vagn; opinion of a great mass of couniri/.genf/e7>ien, tourists, and temporary authors, maybe also in- 
cluded; these taking the word picturesque in its extreme sense, and supposing it intended to regulate what 
was useful, as well as what was ornamental, concluded that Price's object was to destroy all comfort and 
neatness in country-seats, and reduce them to mere portions of dingle or jungle scenery. Such opinions we 
have frequently heard expressed by men in other respects of good sense. Even continental authors have 
imbibed and dissemmated similar exaggerations. " Egares jjar Gilpin, qui a cherche par ses voyages en 
diverses parties de V Angleterre et de I'Ecosse, a donner des regies, pour y assiijeter le genre pittoresque et 
romantique, its ont pris Fo^casion pour demander que Fart fut totalement banni des jardins. lis adoptent 
le pittoresque d'un Solvate - Rosa dans les paysages, comme le vrai nature dans Vart de faire des jardins, et 
on rejette comme un assen 'c^sement a ce nieme art, toutes les 7-egles qu'un Bridgewater {Bridgeman) et un 
Brown avoient publiees dans ce genre." {Description Pittoresque des Jardins, du gout le plus ?noderne. 
Leipsig, 1802. See also Tubinger's Taschenbuch,fiir nature und Gartenfreunde, 1798, p. 194.) 

Of eidightened and liberal minds, vrho have in some degree opposed Price's principles, we can only in- 
stance the late W. Wj-ndham, who in a letter to Repton, (Repton was at one period secretary to WjTidham, 
when that gentleman was in office,' -n-ritten after the publication of his defence, combats, not the works of 
Price, but the popular objections to the supposed desire of subjecting every thing to the picturesque. 
" The writers of this school," he observes, " show evidently that they do not trace with any success the 
causes of their pleasure. Does the pleasure that we receive from the view of parks and gardens, result 
from their affording in their several parts, subjects that would appear to advantage in a picture? What 
is most beautiful in nature, is not always capable of being represented in a painting ; as prospects, moving 
flocks of deer. Many are of a sort which have nothing to do with the purposes of habitation ; as the sub- 
jects of Salvator Rosa. Are we therefore to live in caves ? Gainsborough's Country Girl is more pictu- 
resque than a child neatly dressed. Are our children to go in rags ? No one will stand by this doctrine ; 
nor do they exhibit it in any distinct shape at all, but only take credit for their attachment to general 
principles, to which every one is attached as well as they. Is it contended, that in laying out a place, 
whatever is most picturesque is most conformable to true taste ? If they say so, they must be led to conse- 
quences which they can never venture to avow. If they do not say so, the whole is a question of how 
much or how little, which, without the instances before you, can never be decided." " Places are not to 
be laid out with a view to their appearance in a picture,' but to their use, and the enjoyment of them in 
real life ; and their conformity to these purposes is that which constitutes their true beauty. With this 
view, gravel walks, and neat mown lawns, and, in some situations, straight alleys, fomitains, terraces, 
and, for aught I know, parterres and cut hedges, are in perfect good taste, and infinitely more conform- 
able to the principles which form the basis of our pleasure in those instances, than the docks and thistles, 
and litter and disorder, that may make a much better figure in a picture." {Letter from IVynd/iam, 
published by Repton, in a note to his Observations on the Theory and Practice of Landscape Gardening.) 

The opinion of Professor Dugald Stewart, as given incidentally in his Philosophical Disquisitions on the 
Beautiful, {Essays, p. 285. 1810. 4to. edit.) is of great value. He says, " As to the application of the know- 
ledge thus acquired from the study of paintings, to the improvement of natural landscape, I have no doubt, 
that to a superior understanding and taste, like those of Price, it may often suggest very useful hints ; but 
if recognised as the standard to which the ultimate appeal is to be rnade, it would infalUbly cover the face 
of the country -uith a new and systematical species of affectation, not less remote than that of Brown from 
the style of gardening which he wishes to recommend ; let painting be allowed its due praise in quicken- 
ing our attention to the beauties of nature ; in multiplying our resources for their farther embellishment ; 
and in holding up a standard, from age to age, to correct the caprices of fashionable innovations ; but let 
our taste for these beauties be chiefly formed on the study of nature herself; nor let us ever forget so far 
what is due to her indisputable and salutary prerogative, as to attempt an encroachment upon it by laws, 
which derive the whole of their validity from her own sanction." (p. 287.) 

348. To draw a fair conclusion from these different opinions, it is necessary to take the 
whole of them, and the general scope of the authors into view. From the vein of excel- 
lent sense which pervades Wyndham's letter, and particularly the latter part of it, which 
we have extracted entire, it is impossible to avoid suspecting, either that there is a cul- 
pable obscurity in the works referred to, or that Wyndham had not sufficiently, if at all, 
perused them. We are inclined to believe that there is some truth in both suppositions. 
"We have no hesitation, however, both from a mature study of all the writings of these 
gentlemen, relating to this subject, as well as a careful inspection of their own residences, 
in saying, that there is not an opinion in the above extract, to which Price and Knight would, 
not at once assent. Knight's directions, in regard to congruity and utility, are as distinct as 
can well be expected in a poem. Price never entered on the subject of utilitj% His 
works say, " Your object is to produce beautiful landscapes ; at least this is one great 
object of your exertions. But you produce very indifferent ones. The beauty of your 
scenes is not of so high a kind as that of nature. Examine her productions. To aid 
you in this examination, consult the opinions of those who have gone before you in the 
same study. Consult the works of painters, and learn the principles which guided them 
in tlieir combinations of natural and artificial objects. Group your trees on the principles 
they do. Connect your masses as they do. In short, apply their principles of painting 
whenever you intend any imitation of nature, for the principles of nature and of painting 
arc thesam.e." " Are we to apply them in every case? Are we to neglect regular 
beauty and utility ? Certainly not, that would be inconsistent with common sense." 



80 



HISTORY OF OARDENING. 



Paut I. 



349. The taste of the present day in landscape-gardening may be considered as com- 
paratively chastened and refined by so much discussion, so many errors and corrections, 
and a great many fine examples. It is also more liberal than it was half a century ago ; 
admitting the use of the beauties of every style, even the geometric, as occasion requires ; 
in short, considering beauty as always relative to the state of society ; and in gardening, 
even to the state of the surrounding country. The principal artist of the present period, 
or that which has intervened since the death of Brown and Eames, was the late H. Repton, 
Esq. This gentleman, from being an amateur, began his career as professor of landscape- 
gardening about thirty years ago (1788) ; and till a sort of decline or inactivity of taste 
took place ten or twelve years since, he was extensively consulted. Though at first an 
avowed defender and follower of Brown, he has gradually veered round with the change 
effected in public opinion by the Essays on the Picturesque, so that now, comparing his 
earlier works of 1795 and 1805, with his Fragments on Landscape Gardening, published 
in 1817, he appears much more a disciple of Price than a defender of his " great self- 
taught predecessor. " Repton was a beautiful draftsman, and gave, besides plans and 
views, his written opinion in a regular form, generally combining the whole in a manu- 
script volume, which he called the red book of the place. He never, we believe, undertook 
the execution of his plans ; nor has, as far as we are aware, been employed out of Eng- 
land, but Valleyfield, in Perthshire, was visited by his two sons, and arranged from their 
father's designs. The character of this artist's talent seems to be cultivation rather than 
genius, and he seems more anxious to follow than to lead, and to gratify the preconceived 
wishes of his employers, and improve on the fashion of the day, than to strike out grand 
and original beauties. This, indeed, is perhaps the most useful description of talent both 
for the professor and his employers. Repton's taste in Gothic architecture, and in ter- 
races, and architectural appendages to mansions, is particularly elegant. His published 
Observations on this subject are valuable, though we think otherwise of his remarks on 
landscape-gardening, which we look upon as puerile, wanting depth, often at variance 
with each other, and abounding too much in affectation and arrogance. On the whole, 
however, we have no hesitation in asserting, that both by his splendid volumes, and ex- 
tensive practice among the first classes, he has supported the credit of this country for 
taste in laying out grounds. Repton was bom near Felbrig, in Norfolk, and died at 
Hare-street, in Essex, in 1817. 

350. The principal country-seats which disjilay the modem taste of laying out grounds, 
will be found arranged in the order of the counties in Part IV. of this work, Book I. 
and Chapter II. 

SuBSECT. 2. Gardening in Scotland, as an Art of Dedgn and Taste. 

351. Gardening was introduced into Scotland by the Romans, and revived by the reli- 
gious establishments of the dark ages. 

352. I7i the sixth century, is supposed to have been formed, the garden of the abbey 
of Icolmkill, in the Hebrides. It is thus noticed by Dr. Walker (Essays, vol. ii. p. 5.), 
from its remains as they appeared in the end of the eighteenth century. " On a plain 
adjoining the gardens of the abbey, and surrounded by small hills, there are vestiges of a 
large piece of artificial water, which has consisted of several acres, and been contrived both 
for pleasure and utility. Its banks have been formed by art into walks, and though now 
a bog, you may perceive the remains of a broad green terrace passing through the middle 
of it, which has been raised considerably above the water. At the place where it had 
been dammed up, and where there are the marks of a sluice, the ruins of a mill are still 
to be seen, which served the inhabitants of the abbey for grinding the corn. Pleasure- 
grounds of this kind," adds Dr. Walker, " and a method of dressing grain still un- 
practised in these remote islands, must, no doubt, have been considered in early times, 
as matters of very high refinement." 

353. Iji the twelfth century, Chalmers informs us [Caledonia Depicta, vol. i. p. 801.), 
" David I. had a garden at the base of Edinburgh castle. This king," he adds, 
" had an opportunity of observing the gardens of England under Henry I. when Norman 
gardening would, no doubt, be prevalent;" and we may reasonably suppose that he was 
prompted by his genius to profit from the useful, and to adopt the elegant, in that agree- 
able art. 

354. During the greater part of the fourteenth ceyitury, Scotlaiid was in a state of intes- 
tine war ; but in that succeeding, it is generally believed architecture and gardening 
■were encouraged by tlie Jameses. James I., as we have seen (319.) admired the gar- 
dens of Windsor, in 1420, and having been in love there, and married an English woman, 
would in all probability imitate them. He is described in the Chronicles of Scotland as 
" an excellent man, and an accomplished scholar. At his leisure hours he not only in- 
dulged himself in music, in reading and writing, in drawing and painting ; but when 
the circumstances of time and place, and the taste and manners of those about him made 
it proper, he would sometimes instruct them in tlie art of cultivating kitchen and pleasure 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



81 



gardens, and of planting and engrafting different kinds of fruit-trees. " (Scoticron. lib. xvi. 
cap. 30.) 

355. I?i the middle of the ffteenth centwy, James III. is described by Pilscottie, as 
" delighting more in music and policie (probably from the French polir, to remove, level, 
or improve ; or from a corruption of se polir, to improve one's self, — levelling and smooth- 
ing the grounds about a house, being naturally the first step after it is built), and build- 
ing, than he did in the government of his realm." Tlie general residence of this mo- 
narch was Stirling Castle ; and a piece of waste surface in the vale below is said to have 
been the site of the royal gardens. Enough remains to justify a conjecture, that at this 
early period they displayed as much skill as those of any otlier country. We allude 
to a platform of earth resembling a table, surrounded by turf seats, or steps rising in gra- 
dation, the scene, no doubt, of rural festivities. 

356. Ill the middle of the sixteenth century, the Regent Murray had a garden in the 
neighbourhood of Edinburgh, which still- exists. It contains some venerable pear-trees, 
a magnificent weeping thorn-tree of great age, and tlie remains of elm-bowers, which 
have doubtless in their time sheltered the fair queen of Scots, but the interwoven boughs 
of \vhich now appear in the shape of fantastically bent trunks, thin of spray and leaves, 
{Hort. Tour, &c. p. 226.) 

357. There are va7ious i-eniains of gardens~of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries in Scotland. 
At the palace of Falkland is a large square enclosure, on a dull flat, in which tliere 
exist only a few stunted ash-trees, though the boundary stone wall is still a formidable 
fence. The gardens of Holyrood House appear to have been exceedingly confined ; the 
boundaiy wall only remains, and there are som.e indications of the rows of trees which 
stood in the park, which seems to have extended to the base of the adjoining hill, Arthur's 
Seat. The palace of Scone, we learn from Adanson, a poet of the seventeenth century, 
was suiTounded by " gardens and orchards, flowers and fruits ;" and the park, in v> hich 
are still some ancient trees, " abounded in the hart and fallow deer." Generally a few 
old trees in rows adjoin the other royal residences, and oldest baronial castles ; but thev 
give no indications of the extent to which art was carried in their disposition. 

358. During the seventeeiith century, a few gardens must have been fcrmicd in Scot- 
land. About the end of this century, the grounds of the Duke of Hamilton vrere 
planted, in all probability by a French artist. The design of Chatelherault, an orna- 
mental appendage to the palace of Hamilton, is named after, and formed in imitation of, 
the residence of that illustrious family in France, laid out by Le Notre. 

359. About the beginiiing of the eighteenth century, the Earl of Lauderdale is said to 
have sent plans, sections, and sacks of earth from his domain at Hatton, to London and 
Wise, in London ; and these artists, it is added, formed a plan, and sent down a gardener 
to superintend its execution. Hatton is still a fine old place ; but has long changed its 
possessor. 

360. English artists were called info Scotland during this century. Switzer, Laurence, and Langley 
mention in their works, that they were frequently called into Scotland to give plans of improvement. 
Switzer appears to have resided a considerate time in Edinburgh, as he there pubhshed, in 1717, a tract 
on draining, and other useful and agricultural improvements. The Earls of Stair and Haddington (who 
wrote on trees), both great planters, about this time, probably consulted them ; as would, perhaps, Fletcher 
of Saltoun, the proprietors of Dundas Castle, Barnton, Saughton Hall, Gogar, and particularly Cragie 
Hall, a residence laid out with much art and taste, and next in rank, in these respects, to Hatton. New 
Listen, Dalkeith House, Hopeton House, and various other places near Edhiburgh, are also in Switzer's 
style. New Liston and Hopeton House, planted, we believe, from 1735 to 1740, were probably the last 
considerable seats laid out in the ancient style in Scotland. 

361. The modern style u-as f rst introduced into Scotland by the celebrated Lord JCames, 
wl]o, some time between 1740 and 1750, displayed it on his own residence at Blair 
Drummond. An irregular ridge, leading from the house, was laid out in walks, com- 
manding a view, over the shrubs on the declivity, of portions of distant prospect. One 
part of this scene was composed entirely of evergreens, and formed an agreeable winter- 
garden. Lord Karnes did not entirely reject the ancient style, either at Blair Drum- 
mond, or in his Essay on Gardening and Architecture, published in the Elements of 
Criticism. In that sliort but compreliensive essay, he shows an acquaintance Avith tlio 
Chinese style, and the practice of Kent ; admits both of absolute and relative beauty 
as the objects of gardening and architecture, and from this complex destination, accounts 
for that difference and wavering of taste in these arts, " greater than in any art that has 
but a single destination." (Vol. ii. p. 431. 4th edit. 1769.) 

Lord Karnes's example in Scotland may be compared to that of Hamilton or Shcnstone in England ; it 
was )iot generally followed, because it was not generally understood. That tije Elanents of Cr/ficism, 
though long since obsolete as such, tended much to purify the taste of the reading class, tljcre can be no 
doubt. Every person also admired Blair Drummond ; but as every countr}--gentlcman could not bestow 
sulficient time and attention to gardening to be able to lay out his own place, it became necessary to have 
recourse to artists ; and, as it happened, those who were employed had acquired only that habit of me- 
chanical imitation which copies the most obvious forms, without understanding the true merits of the 
original. In short, they were itinerant pupils of Brown, or professors in his school, who resided in Scot- 
land ; and thus it is, that after commencing in the best taste, Scotland continued, till within the last 
twenty years, to patronise tlie very worst. 

362. The grounds of Bttdding'ifon House may be referred to as a contrast to the style of 



82 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Paet 1. 



Blair Druvimond, and a proof of what we have asserted in regard to the kind of modern 
landscape-gardening introduced to Scotland. This seat was laid out about the year 1750. 
Tlie architect of the house was Sir William Chambers ; the name of the rural artist, 
whose original plans Vv'e have examined, was Robertson, nephew to the king's gardener 
of that name, sent down from London. We know of no example in any country of so 
perfect a specimen of Brown's manner, nor of one in which the effect of the whole, and 
the details of every particular part, are so consistent, and co-operate so well together in 
producing a sort of tame, spiritless beauty, of which we cannot give a distinct idea. It 
does not resemble avowed art, nor yet natural scenery ; it seems, indeed, as if nature 
had commenced the work and changed her plan, determining no longer to add to her 
productions those luxuriant and seemingly superfluous appendages which produce 
variety and grace. The trees here, all planted at the same time, and of the same age, 
seem to grov/ by rule. The clumps remind us of regularly tufted perukes. The waters 
ot the tame river neither dare to sink within, nor to overflow its banks ; the clumps keep 
at a respectful distance ; and tlie serpentine turns of the roads and walks, seem to hint 
that every movement to be made here, must correspond. 

The extent of Duddingston, we suppose, may exceed 200 acres. The house is placed on an eminence in 
the centre, from which the grounds descend on three sides, and on the remaining side continue on a level 
till they reach the boundary belt. This belt completely encircles the whole ; it is from 50 to 200 feet wide, 
with a turf drive in the middle. One part near the house is richly varied by shrubs and flowers, and kept 
as garden-scenery ; in tlie rest the turf is mown, but the ground untouched. A string of wavy canals, on 
diflferent levels, joined by cascades, enter at one side of the grounds, and taking a circuitous sweep through 
the park, pass oft" at the other. This water creates occasion for Chinese bridges, islands, and cascades. 
The kitchen-garden and oiiices are placed behind the house, and concealed by a mass of plantation. 
Over the rest of the grounds are distributed numerous oval unconnected clumps, and some single trees. 
In the drive are several temples and covered seats, placed in situations where are caught views of the 
house, sometimes seen between two clumps, and at other times between so many as to form a perspective 
or avenue. There is also a temple on the top of a hill, partly artificial, which forms the object from 
several of these seats, and from other open glades or vistas left in the inside of the belt. The outer margin 
of this plantation is every where kept perfectly entire, so that there is not a single view but what is 
wholly the property of the owner ; unless in one instance, where the summit of Arthur's Seat, an adjoining 
hill, is caught by the eye from one part of the belt, over the tops of the trees in its opposite per:»)her)'. 
That this place has, or had in 1790, great beauties, we do not deny; but they are beauties of a peculiar 
kind, not of general nature — not the beauties of Blair Drummond, or such as a liberal and enlightened 
mind would desire to render general ; but in great part such as Sir William Chambers holds up to ridicule 
in his Dissertation on Oriental Gardening (see his Introduction, p. fi — 11.), and Price, in his Essays on 
the Picturesque. Yet Duddingston may be reckoned the model of all future improvements in Scotland, till 
within the last twenty years. The same artist laid out Livingston, effected some improvements at Hope- 
ton House, Dalkeith, Dalhousie, Niddi-y, the Whim, Moredun, various other places near Edinburgh, and 
some in Ayrshire. 

363. No artist of note had hitherto arisen in Scotland in this department of gardenings 
if we except James Ramsay. This person was employed by Robertson, in Ayrshire, as 
a mason, but soon displayed a taste for disposing of verdant scenery, and afterwards 
became a landscape-gardener of considerable repute. He gave ground-plans and draw- 
ings in perspective, both of the buildings and verdant scenery. I>eith Head, a small 
place near Edinburgh, is entirely his creation. His style was that of Brown, in his 
waters and new plantations near the house ; but he was less attaclied to the belt, his 
clumps were not always regular, and he endeavoured to introduce a portion of third 
distance into all his views. Ramsay died at Edinburgh in 1794, and this record of his 
taste is due to his memory. 

364. English professors of the modern style have occasionally visited Scotland, and some 
regularly. From nearly the first introduction of the new style to the present time, 
annual journeys have been made into Scotland from the county of Dui-ham by the late 
White, and subsecjuently by his son. White, senior, we believe, was a pupil of Brown, 
of much information on country-matters, and generally respected in Scotland. Of his 
professional talents we have said enough, when we have mentioned their source. Air- 
tlirie, near Stirling, and Bargany, in Ayrshire, are the principal productions of this 
family. In what respects the talents of White, junior, differ from those of his father, or 
whether they differ at all, v/e are not aware ; though we think it highly probable they 
will partake of the general improvement of the age. We have already mentioned that 
none of the eminent English artists had ever been in Scotland ; but that Valleyfield 
was laid out from Repton's designs. Nasmyth, an eminent landscape-painter in Edin- 
burgh, and G. Parkyns, author of Monastic Itejuains, have occasionally given designs 
for laying out grounds in Scotland, both in excellent taste. 

The country-seats of Scotland are elsewhere described. (Part IV. Book I. Chap. III.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Gardening in Ireland, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

365. Of the ancient state of gardening in Ireland very little is known. A shoit Essay 
on the Riie and Progress of Gardening in Ireland, by J. C. Vy^alker, is given in the 
Transactions of the Royal Irish Acadeviy (vol. xiv. part 3. ) from wliich we shall glean 
what is available for our purpose. 

366. In the time of Queen Elizabeth, Fynnes Morrison, " a minute obsei-Ver," travelled 



Book I, 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES, 



83 



through that kingdom. He does not once mention a garden as appertaining either to a 
castle or to a monastery ; he only observes, " that the best sorts of flowers and fruits are 
much rarer in Ireland than in England ; which, notwithstanding, is more to be attri- 
buted to tlie inhabitants than to the ayre." In an inedited account of a Tour in 1634, 
also quoted by Walker ( Trans. R. I. A. ), Bishop Usher's palace is said to have a " pretty- 
neat garden." 

367. Of remains of ancient gardens in Ireland we may quote a few examples. Some 
of the largest sculptured evergreens are at Bangor, in the county of Down ; and at 
Thomas-town, in the county of Tipperary, are the remains of a hanging garden, formed 
on the side of a hill, in one corner of which is a verdant amphitheatre, once the scene of 
occasional dramatic exhibitions. Blessington gardens, if tradition may be relied on, 
were laid out during the reign of James II. by an English gentleman, who had left his 
estate at Byfleet in Sussex, to escape the persecution of Cromwell. In King William's 
time, knots of flowers, curious edgings of box, topiary works, grassy slopes, and other 
characteristics of the Dutch style, came into notice. Rowe and BuUein, Englishmen, 
who had successively nurseries at Dublin, wei-e in these days tlie principal rural artists 
of Ireland ; though Switzer and Laurence, as well as Batty Langley, occasionally 
visited that country. 

368. The first attempts to introduce the modem style into Ireland are supposed to have 
been made by Dr. Delany at Delville near Glassnevin, about tiie year 1720. Swift has 
left a poetical description of these scenes. Dr. Delany, Walker says, impressed a vast 
deal of beauty on a very small spot of ground ; softened tlie obdurate straight line of 
the Dutch into a curve, melted the terrace into a sloping bank, and opened the walk to 
catch the vicinal country. Walsh {^History of Dublin, 1820) says, these grounds retain 
all the stiffness of the old garden. As there existed an intimacy between Pope and 
Delany, it is supposed the former may have assisted his Irish friend. Tliis example 
appears to have had the same sort of influence in Ireland, that the gardening of Lord 
Kames had in Scotland. It gave rise to a demand for artists of the new school ; and the 
market was supplied by such as came in the way. Much less, hov/ever, was done in that 
country, partly from the abundance of picturesque scenery in many districts, and partly 
from other obvious causes. Mount Shannon, near Limerick, the seat of the late Chan- 
cellor Clare, is said to have been laid out from his lordship's designs, and the recent 
improvements at Charleville forest, where one of the most comfortable and magnificent 
castles in Ireland has been executed by Johnson of Dublin, were the joint productions 
of Lord and Lady Charleville. Walker mentions Marino, Castle-town, Carton, 
Curraghmore, the retreat of St. Woolstans, and Moyra, as exhibiting the finest garden- 
scenery in Ireland. Powerscourt, and 
Mucross, near the lakes, are reckoned the 
most romantic residences, and are little in- 
debted to art. St. Valori, Walker's own 
seat, is a beautiful little spot near the well- 
known village of Bray. Miss Plumtree 
mentions Blarney Castle {fg. 31.), as one 
of the most enchanting spots in the world. 
There have been delightful shrubberies, 
which might easily be restored. The cas- 
tle stands on a rock not very high, and 
below are fine meadows, with an ample 
stream flowing through them ; there is 
plenty of wood, and a considei-able lake at 
a short distance from the house, which furnishes excellent itunt : in short, nature has left 
little for art to supply; and yet this charming spot is deserted, abandoned, looking 
wholly neglected and forlorn. {Residence in Ireland, 1817, 240.) 

369. EngUsli artists p^'ofessing the modern style have been but little employed in Ireland, 
the common practice being to engage a good kitchen-gardener from England, and leave 
every thing to him. Sutherland was, in 1810, the local artist of greatest repute. A, 
M'Leish has since settled in this country, and, from what we know of this artist, we 
have little doubt he will contribute, in an eminent degree, to establish and extend a 
better taste than has yet appeared there. W. T. Mackay, curator of the Trinity-college 
garden, is said to excel in laying out grounds. Though landscape-gardeners from the 
metropolis have not been called to Ireland, yet it has happily become not an unfrequent 
practice to employ eminent English architects, — a practice, as far as taste is concerned, 
certain of being attended with the most salutary effects. 

Sect. II. British Gardening, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and Plants of Ornament, 

370. Flowers are more or less cultivated wherever gardening is practised ; but a parti- 
cular attention to this department of the art can only take place under circumstances of 

G 2 




84 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Fart I. 



ease, and a certain degree of refinement. A taste for fine flowers has existed in Holland 
and the Netherlands from a very remote period, and was early introduced into England ; 
but when that taste found its way to Scotland and Ireland, is much less certain. 

SuBSECT. 1. Gardening in England, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and the 
Establishment of Botanic Gardens. 

371. The taste for florists' fiowers, in England, is generally supposed to have been 
brought over from Flanders with our worsted manufactures, during the persecutions of 
Phihp II, ; and the cruelties of the Duke of Alva, in 1567, was the occasion of our re- 
ceiving, through the Flemish weavers, gillyflowers, carnations, and povins roses. But 
flowers and flowering shrubs were knoWn and prized even in Chaucer's time, as appears 
from a well-known passage of that poet. An Italian poet published, in 1586, a volume 
of poems, one of wliich is On the Royal Garden ; from this poem it would appear that 
Queen Elizabeth was attached to the culture of flowers, but few are named either in these 
poems, or in the description of Theobald's. Parterres seem to have been introduced in 
the beginning of Queen Elizabeth's reign, and also the tulip, and damask and musk 
roses. Gerrard, who published his herbal three years before, mentions James Garnet, 
" a London apothecary, a principal collector and propagator of tulips, for twenty years 
bringing forth eveiy season new plants of sundry colors not before seen, all which to de- 
scribe particularly were to roll Sisyphus's stone, or number the sands." 

372. One of the earliest notices which we have of a botanic garden in England is that of 
the Duke of Somerset, at Sion House, in the beginning of this century. It was placed 
under the superintendence of Dr. Turner, whom Dr. Pulteney considers as the father of 
English botany. Turner had studied at Bologna and at Pisa, where, as we have already 
seen (91.), botanic gardens were first formed. After being some years with the Duke 
of Somerset, he retired from Sion House to Wells, where he had a rich garden, and died 
there in 1560. About this time existed the botanic gardens of Edward Saintloo, a 
Somersetshire, James Coel, at Highgate, J. Nasmyth, surgeon to James I., and John 
de Franqueville, merchant in London. From the care of the latter, Parkinson observes, 
*' is sprung the greatest store that is now flourishing in this kingdom." Gerrard had a 
fine garden in Holborn, in the middle of the sixteenth century, of which there is a cata- 
logue in the British Museum, dated 1590. This garden was eulogised by Dr. Boleyn 
and others his contemporaries. Gerrard mentions Nicholas Lete, a merchant in London, 
" greatly in love with rare and fair flowers, for which he doth carefully send into Syria, 
having a servant there, at Aleppo, and in many other countries; for which myself, and 
the whole land are much bound unto him." The same author also gives due honor to 
Sir Walter Raleigh, Lord Edward 2ouch, the patron of Lobel, who brought plants and 
seeds from Constantinople, and to Lord Hudson, Lord High Chamberlain of England, 
who, he says, " is worthy of triple honor for his care in getting, as also for his keeping 
such rare and curious things from the farthest parts of the world." {Pulteney' s Sketches, 125.) 

373. In the beginning of the seventeenth century, flowers and curious plants appear to 
have been very generally cultivated. Piatt's Paradise of Flora, which is the first book 
that treats expressly on flowers, appeared in 1600. Parkinson published his Paradisus 
in 1629. " A modern florist," observes Dr. Pulteney, " wholly unacquainted with the 
state of the art at the time Parkinson wrote, would perhaps be surprised to find that his 
predecessors could enumerate, besides 16 described as distinct species, 120 varieties of 
the tulip, 60 anemones, moi-e'than 90 of the narcissus tribe, 50 hyacinths, 50 carnations, 
20 pinks, 30 crocuses, and above 40 of the Iris genus." {Sketches, &c. vol. ii. 123.) The 
laurel, or bay-cherry, was then very rare, and considered as a tender plant, being de- 
fended " from the bitterness of the winter by casting a blanket over the top thereof," and 
the larcli-tree was only reared up as a curiosity. Greenhouse-plants were placed in 
cellars, where they lost their leaves, but those of such as survived shot out again in spring 
when removed to the open air. 

Flowers were much cultivated in Norwich, firom the time of the Flemish weavers settling there. Sir J. 
E. Smith {Linn. Tr ctns, vol. ii. p. 296;) mentions a play called Rhodon and Iris, which was acted at the 
florists' feast at Norwich, in 1637 ; a proof that the culture of flowers was in great estimation there at that 
time ; and in 1671 Evelyn m.entions Sir Thomas Brown's garden there, as containing a i>aradise of rarities, 
and the gardens of aU the inhabitants as full of excellent flowers. From Norwich the love of flowers 
seems to have spread to other manufacturing establishments ; and the taste still continues popular, not 
only there, but among the weavers in Spitalflelds, Manchester, Bolton, and most of the commercial towns 
in Lancashire, and many in Cheshire, Derbyshire, and other adjoining counties. A florists' society is 
established in almost every town and village in the northern district. These societies have annual shows, 
as in London and Norwich ; and a book, called The Flower Book, is published annually in Manchester, 
containing an account of their transactions, the prizes which have been given, and the new flowers which 
have been originated. 

Ham House, the Duke of Lauderdale's, had famous parterres and orangeries at this time. Sir Henry 
Capell had a very fine orangery and myrtilleum at Kew ; and Lady Clarendon, who, Evelyn informs us, 
was well skilled in flowers, had an ample collection at Swallowfield in Berkshire. 

In the garden of William Coyte, of Stubbers, in Essex, the yucca blossomed in 1604, for the first time in 
England. {Lodel, Hist. Plant.) 

The place of Royal Herbalist was created by Charles I. ; and Parkinson was appointed to fill it. Queen 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



Mary appointed Plunkenet to be his successor, " a man distinguished for botanical knowledge." Under 
tliis botanist's directions, collectors were despatched to the Indies in search of plants. 

Tradescant's botanic garden at Lambeth was establislied previously to 1629. Tradescant was a Dutch- 
man, and gardener to Charles I. In his son published a catalogue of this garden, and of tiie museum, 
which botli of them had collected, Weston observes {Catalogue of Authors on Gardening, 30.) tliat the 
garden having for some years lain waste, on the 1st of May, 1749, William Watson, V. K. S., having 
visited its site, found many of the exotics remaining, having endured two great frosts in 1729 and 1740. A 
curious account of tlie garden is given by Sir W. Watson, in the Philosophical Transactions, (vol. xl.) 
Tradescant left his museum to K AshraoU, who lodged in his house. Mrs'. Tradescant contested the will, 
and on losing the cause drowned herself 

Tlie Chelsea botanic garden seems to have existed about the midiUe of this century. In 1685, Evelyn 
visited Watts, their head gardener. " What was very ingenious, was the subterranean heat conveyed by 
means of a stove under the conservatory, all vaulted with brick, so that he has the door and windows open 
in the hardest frosts, excluding only the snow." {Memoirs, &c. vol. i. 60C.) In Watts's garden was a tuiip- 
tree, and in the hot-house a tea-shrub. {Ray.) The ground occupied by tliis garden was rented from Sir 
Hans Sloane j who afterwards, in 1722, when applied to for its renewal, granted it in perpetuity at 5/. a 
year, and fifty new plants to be presented annually to the Royal Society, till their number amounted to 
two thousand. 

Various private botanic gardens existed at the end of this century. That of the celebrated naturalist 
Ray, in Essex, Dr. Uvedale's, at Entield, and especially that of the Duchess of Beaufort, at Badmington, 
were rich in plants ; but that of Sir Hans Sloane, at Chelsea, surpassed them all. 

374. A public botanic garden in England was first founded at Oxford, in 1632, nearly 
a century after that at Padua. This honor was reserved for Henry, Earl of Danby, who 
gave for this purpose five acres of ground, built green-houses and stoves, and a house 
for the accommodation of the gardener, endowed the establishment, and placed in it, as 
a supervisor, Jacob Bobart, a German, from Brunswick, who lived, as Wood tells us, in 
the garden-house, and died there in 1697. The garden contained at his death above 
1600 species. Bobart's descendants are still in Oxford, and known as coach-proprietors. 

375. Green-houses and j)lant-stoves seem to have been introduced or invented about, 
the middle of the seventeenth century. Tliey were fonned in the Altorf garden in 1645. 
Evelyn mentions Loader's orangery in 1662, and the green-house and hot -house at 
Chelsea are mentioned both by that author and Ray in 1685. 

376. During the lohole of the eighteenth century, botany was in a flourishing state in 
England. Previously to this period the number of exotics in the country pro- 
bably did not exceed 1000 species : during this century above 5000 new species were 
introduced from foreign countries, besides the discovery of a number of new native 
plants. Some idea may be formed of the progress of gardening, in respect to ornamental 
trees and shrubs, from the different editions of Miller's dictionary. In the first edition 
in 1724, the catalogue of evergreens amounts only to twelve. The Christmas-flower 
and aconite were then rare, and only to be obtained at Fairchild's at Hoxton : only 
seven species of geraniums were then known. Every edition of this work contained 
fresh additions to the botany of the country. In the preface to the eighth and last edition, 
published in 1768, the number of plants cultivated in England is stated to be more than, 
double those which were known in 1731. Miller- was born in 1691; liis father was 
gardener to the Company of Apothecaries, and he succeeded his father in that office in 
1722, upon Sir Hans Sloane's liberal donation of near four acres to the Company. He 
resigned his office a short time before his decease, which took place in 1771, and was 
succeeded by Forsyth, who was succeeded by Fairbairn, and the last by Anderson the 
present curator. 

377. As great encouragers of botany during this century, Miller mentions in 1724, 
the Duke of Chandos, Compton Speaker of the House of Commons, Dubois of Mitcham,- 
Compton Bishop of London, Dr. Uvedale of Enfield, Dr. Lloyd of Sheen. Dr. James 
Sherrard, apothecary, had one of the richest gardens England ever possessed at Eltham. 
His gardener, Knowlton, was a zealous botanist, and afterwards, when in the service of 
the Ear] of Burlington, at Londesborough, discovered the globe coyiferva. Dr. 
Sherrard's brother was consul at Smyrna, and had a fine garden at Scdokio, near that 
town, where he collected the plants of Greece and many others. The consul died in 
1728, and the apothecary in 1737. Fairchild, Gordon, Lee, and Gray of Fulham, 
eminent nurserymen, introduced many plants during the first half of the century. The 
first three corresponded with Linnteus. Collinson, a great promoter of gardening and 
botany, had a fine garden at Mill-hill. Richard Warner had a good botanic garden at 
Warnford Green. The Duke of Argyle, styled a tree-monger by Lord Walpolc, had 
early in this century a garden at Hounslow, richly stocked with exotic trees. A nuin - 
ber of other names of patrons, gardeners, and authors, equally deserving mention, are 
necessarily omitted. Dr., afterwards Sir John Hill, had a botanic garden at Bayswater ; 
he began to publish in 1751, and produced numerous works on plants and flowers, 
which liad considerable influence in rendering popular the system of Linna?vis, and 
spreading the science of horticulture, and a taste for ornamental plants. In 1775 Drs. 
Fothergill and Pitcairn sent out Thomas Blaikie (170.) to collect plants in Switzer- 
land, and this indefatigable botanist sent home all those plants mentioned in tlie Horlus 
Jycwensis, as introduced by the two Doctors. 

378. ruling the latter part of the eighteenth oritury, Hibbert, of Chalfont, and 

G 3 



86- 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



Thornton, of Clapham, opulent commercial men, may be mentioned as great encouragers 
of exotic botany. The collection of Heaths, Banksias, and other Cape and Botany Bay 
plants, in the Clapham garden, was most extensive ; and the flower-garden, one of the 
best round the metropolis. The Duke of Marlborough, while Marquis of Blandford, 
formed a collection of exotics at White Knights,* surpassed by none in the kingdom. 
{Historical Account of White Knights, &c. 1820, quarto.) R. A. Salisbury, one of our 
first botanists, and a real lover of gardening, had a fine garden and rich collection 
at Chapel Allerton, in Yorkshire. Subsequently, he possessed the garden formed by 
Collinson at Mill Hill. Choice collections of plants were formed at the Earl of Tan- 
kerville's at Walton, the Duke of Northumberland's at Siou House, at the Comte 
de Vandes' at Bayswater, Vere's at Knightsbridge, and many other places. Lee, Lod- 
dige. Knight, Colville, and several other nurserymen, might be named as greatly 
promoting a taste for plants and flowers by their well-stocked nurseries and publications. 
Of these the Heatheri/, the Botanical Cabinet, and the Genus Protea, are well known 
and esteemed works. A grand stimulus to the culture of ornamental plants, was given 
by the publication of Curtis's Botanical Magazine, begun in 1787, and still continued 
in monthly numbers. Here the most beautiful hardy and tender plants v>-ere figured 
and described, and useful hints as to their culture added. Other works by Sowerby, 
Edwards, Andrews, &c. of a similar nature, contributed to render verj' general a know- 
ledge of, and taste for plants, and a desire of gardens and green-houses, to possess these 
plants in a living state. Maddocks's Florists' Directory, which appeared in 1792, re- 
vived a taste for florists' flowers, which has since been on tlis increase. 

379. The royal gardens at Kew were begun about the middle of this century, 
under the auspices of Frederick, Prince of Wales, the father of George III. The exotic 
department of that garden was establL'^hed chiefly through the influence of the Marquis 
of Bute, a great encourager of botany and gardening, who placed it under the care of 
W. Aitcn, who had long been assistant to Miller, of the Chelsea garden. Sir John 
Hill published the ^r%t Hortus Kewensis in 17G8, but subsequent editions have been 
published under the direction of Alton, the father and son ; the last, in five volumes, 
the joint production of Di-. Dryander and R. Brown, is reckoned a standard work. A 
compendium in a pocket -volume has been published, wliich enumerates about 10,000 
species. ■ Sir Joseph Banks gave the immense collections of plants and seeds obtained in 
his voyages to this garden, and this example has been followed by most travellers, so tliat 
it is now the richest in England, as far as respects its catalogue, though it is generally 
believed a greater, or at least, an equal number of species are actually cultivated in the 
botanic garden of Liverpool. 

380. The Cambridge botanic garden was founded about the middle of the eighteenth 
century by Dr. Walker. It has chiefly become celebrated for the useful catalogue of 
plants (Hortus Caiitabrigiensis) published by Donn, its late curator. The garden is 
small, and never at any one time could contain all the plants, to the number of 9000, 
enumerated in that work. But if ever introduced there, that circumstance is supposed 
to justify their insertion in the catalogue. 

381. The nineteenth century has commenced with the most promising appearances 
as to floriculture and botany. The Linnsean and Horticultural Societies of London 
have been established ; and florists' societies are increasing ; and some other gardening 
and b^Jlanical associations forming in the counties. Tlie number of plant-collectors sent 
out is greatly increased ; and not only do societies and public bodies go to this expense, 
but even private persons and nursery-men. The botanic gardens of Liverpool and Hull 
have been established, and others are in contemplation. 

382. The Liverpool garden owes its origin to the celebrated W. Roscoe. It was begun 
in 1803, and a catalogue published in 1808 by Shepherd, the curator, containing above 
6000 species. 

SuBSECT. 2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to the Culture of Flowers and the 
Establishment of Botanic Gardens. 

383. A taste for florists^ flowers, it is conjectured, was first introduced into Scotland 
by the French weavers, who took refuge in that country in the seventeenth century, and 
were established in a row of houses, called Picardy-row, in the suburbs of Edinburgh. 
It seems to have spread with the apprentices of these men to Dunfermline, Glasgow, 
Paisley, and other places ; for in Scotland, as in England, it may be remai-ked, that 
wherever the silk, linen, or cotton manufactures, are carried on by manual labor, the 
operators are found to possess a taste for, and to occupy part of their leisure time in the 
culture of flowers. 

384. The oi-iginal botanic garden of Edinburgh took its rise about the year 1680, from 
the following circumstances : " Patrick Murray, Baron of Livingston, a pupil of Dr., 
afterwards Sir Andrev/ Balfour, in natural history, foiTned a collection of 1000 plants 
at Livingston ; but soon afterwards dying abroad, Dr. Balfour had his collection trans- 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



87 



ferred to Edinburgh, and there uniting it with his own, founded the botanic garden. 
It had no fixed support for some time ; but at length the city of Edinburgh allotted a 
piece of ground near the College-church, for a public garden, and appointed a salary for 
its support out of the revenues of the University." [Walker s Essaya, 358.) In 1767, 
the garden was removed to a more eligible situation, considerably enlarged, and a very 
magnificent range of hot-houses erected under the direction of Dr. John Hope, who first 
taught the Linnsean system in Scotland. This garden, in general arrangement, and in the 
order in which it is kept, is inferior to none in the kingdom, though at Kew and Liver- 
pool, the collection of plants is necessarily much greater. The collection in 1812, 
amounted to upwards of 4000 species, among which are some rare acclimated exotic 
trees, which have attained a great size. This garden was again removed, in 1822, to a 
situation including sixteen acres, where it is established with extensive hot-houses, and 
other desiderata, in a very superior style. 

385. In the early part of the eighteenth century, this taste was introduced to the higher 
classes by James Justice, F. R. S., who had travelled on the continent, and spared no 
expense in procuring all the -best sorts of florists' flowers from Holland, and many 
curious plants from London. Such was his passion for gardening, that he spent the 
greater part of his fortune at Crichton, near Edinburgh, where he had the finest garden, 
and the only pine-stove in Scotland, and the largest collection of auriculce, as he informs 
us, in Europe. In 1755, he published The Scots Gardener s Director, esteemed an ori- 
ginal work, and containing full directions, from his own experience, for the culture of 
choice flowers. About the end of this century, florists' societies which had existed 
before, but declined with the decline of gardeners' lodges, were revived in Edinburgh ; 
and there are now several in Glasgow, Paisley, and other parts of the country. Those 
at Paisley are considered remarkable for the skill and intelligence of their members, and 
the fine pinks and other flowers produced at their shows. ( Gen. Rep. of Scot. App. to 
chap. 2.) The Edinburgh Florists' Society gave rise to the Caledonian Horticultural 
Society, which was established in 1809, and has greatly promoted this and other branches 
of gardening in Scotland. 

386. In the middle of the eighteenth century, the Marquis of Bute had a rich botanic 
garden in the island from which he takes his title. Towards the end, a sale botanic gar- 
den was formed at Forfar, by Mr. George Donn, a well-known botanist ; and another at 
Monkwood, in Ayrshire, by Mr. James Smith, which contains about 3500 species, 
chiefly indigenous. At Dalbetb, near Glasgow, T. Hopkirk, a wealthy ccmmercialist, 
also maintained a respectable assemblage of natives. 

387. The nineteenth centtiry will probably witness a great degree of progress in botany 
nd floriculture in Scotland. Notwithstanding the example of Justice in 1750, and the 

opening of the nev^ botanic garden, with a tolerable collection in 1782, a taste for col- 
lections of plants can hardly be said to have existed among the higher classes in Scotland, 
previously to the present century. Flowers, either gathered, or in pots, were rarely pur- 
chased by the inhabitants of the capital, and not at all by those of any of the provincial 
towns. One, or at most, two green-houses might be said to have supplied all the wants 
of Edinburgh, till within the last twenty years, and the demand, though increased, is 
still of a very limited description among the middling classes. A very complete botanic 
garden has been lately formed at Glasgow, and W. J. Hooker, F. R. S., a distinguished 
botanist, appointed professor. A new stimulus to the introduction and culture of rare 
plants will be given by a periodical work, commenced by Dr. Hooker, and devoted to 
the description of such new plants as flower in Scotland ; for variety is useful in many 
things. Such flov/ers and exotics as were cultivated in the gardens of country-gentlemen 
were, till within the last thirty years, grown in the borders of the kitchen-garden, or in 
the forcing-houses ; but it has now become customary to have flower-gardens and hot- 
houses expressly for plants, as in England. (See Part IV. Book I. Chap. III.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to Floriculture and Botany. 

388. Botany and foicer-gardening have been much neglected in Ireland. Parterres, it 
would appear, (J. C. Walker s Hist .) came into notice during the reign of King William. 
Dr. Caleb Thrilkeld was among the first of the few who formed private botanic gardens 
for their own use, and Sir Arthur Rawdon almost the only individual who displayed 
wealth and taste in collecting exotics. Upon visiting the splendid collection of Sir Hans 
Sloane, at Chelsea, Sir Arthur, delighted with the exotics there, sent James Harlow, a 
skilful gardener, to Jamaica, who returned with a ship almost laden with plants, in a 
vegetating state. For these a hot-house was built at Mbyra, in the beginning of Charles 
the Second's reign, supposed to be the first erection of that kind in Ireland. 

389. In 1712, a small collection of plants was cultivated in the garden of the Dublin 
Medical College. 

390. The botanic garden of Trinity College was established in 1786, and though small, 
yet, as Neill observes, contains a richer and more varied collection than perhaps is to be 
found any where else within the same compass. There is also a botanic garden at Cork. 

G 4 



88 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



391. The botanic garden of the Dublin Society was established in 1790, chiefly through 
the exertions of J)r. Walker Wade. It contains upwards of thirty acres, delightfully 
situated, and very ingeniously arranged. , 

392. Tliere are a few jirivate collections in Ireland ; and one of the best flower-gardens 
is that of Lord Downes, at Merville, near Dublin ; but, in general, it may be stated, that 
ornamental culture of every kind is in its infancy in that country. Something will pro- 
bably be effected by the Dublin Horticultural Society, established in 1816. 

Sect. III. Bntish Gardening, in respect to its horticiillurnl FrcductiGns 

393. The knoivledge of culinary vegetables and cultivated fruits was first introduced to 
this country by the Romans ; and it is highly probable that the more useful sorts of the 
former, as the brassica, and onion tribe, always remained in use among the civilised parts 
of the inhabitants, since kale and le^ks are m.entioned in some of the oldest records, and 
the "Saxon month April was called Sprout Kale. 

■ 394. The native fruits of the British isles, and which, till the 13th or 14th century, must 
have been the only sorts known to the common people, are the following : small purple 
plums, sloes, wild currants, brambles and raspberries, wood strawberries, cranberries, 
black-berries, red-berries, heather-berries, elder-berries, roan-berries, haws, holly-berries, 
hips, hazel-nuts, acorns, and beech-mast. Tlie wild apple or crab, and wild cherry, 
though now naturalised, M'ould probably not be found wild, or be very rare in the early 
times of which we now speak. The native roots and loaves would be earth-nut, and any 
other roots net remarkably acrid and bitter ; and chenopodium, sorrel, dock, and such 
leaves as are naturally rather succulent and mild in flavor. 

■ 395. The more delicate fruits and legumes, introduced by the Romans, would, in all 
probability, be lost after their retirement from the island, and we may trace with more 
certainty tlie origin of what we now possess to the ecclesiastical establishments of the 
dark ages, and during the reign in England of the Norman line, and the Plantagenets. 
It may in general be asserted, that most of our best fruits, particularly apples and pears, 
were brought into the island by ecclesiastics in the days of monastic splendor and luxury, 
during the 1 2th, 13th, 14th, and 15th centuries. Gardens and orchards [horti et pomaria) 
are frequently m.entioned in the earliest chartularies extant ; and of the orchards many 
traces still remain in different parts of the country, in the form, not only of enclosure- 
wails and pre])ared fruit-tree borders, but of venerable pear-trees, some of them still 
abundantly fruitful, and others in the last stage of decay. Of the state of horticulture 
previous to the beginning of the 16th century, however, no distinct record exists. About 
that time it began to be cultivated in England, ^nd at more recent periods in Scotland 
and Ireland. 

SuBSECT. 1. Gardening in England, in respect to its horticidtural Froductions. 

396. The earliest notice of English horticidture which we have met with, is in Gale's 
History of Ely, and William of Malmsbury, and belongs to the twelfth century. Brithnod, 
the first abbot of Ely, in 1107, is celebrated for his skill in gardening, and for the ex- 
cellent gardens and orchards which he made near that monastery. " He laid out very 
extensive gardens and orchards, which he filled with a great variety of herbs, shrubs, and 
fruit-trees. In a few years the trees which he planted and ingrafted, appeared at a dis- 
tance like a wood, loaded with the most excellent fruits in great abundance, and added 
much to the commodiousness and beavity of the place." (Gale's Hi^H. of Ely, 2. c. ii.) 
William of Malmsbury speaks of the abundance of vineyards and orchards in the vale of 
Gloucester. At Edmondsbury, a vineyard was planted for the use of the monks of that 
place, in 1140. 

397. In the thirteenth century (A. D. 1294), the m.onks of Dunstable were at much ex- 
pense in repairing the walls about the garden and herbary of their priory; and the her- 
bary mentioned in Chaucer's Nonne's Priest's Tale, appears to have been Avell stored with 
medical herbs, shrubs, &c. Paris, in describing the backwardness of the seasons in 
1257, says, that " apples were scarce, pears still scarcer; but that cherries, plums, figs, 
and all kinds of fruits included in shells, were almost quite destroyed." [Henry's Hist'. 
b. iv. chap. 5. sect. 1.) 

398. Ereviously to the sixteenth ceyitury, it is generally said, that some of our most com- 
mon pot-herbs, such as cabbages, were chiefly imported from the Netherlands, their cul- 
ture not being properly understood in this country. " It was not," says Hume, " till the 
end of the reign of Henry VIII. that any salads, carrots, turnips, or other edible roots, 
were produced in England. The little of these vegetables that was used, was formei-ly 
imported from Holland and Flanders. Queen Catherine, when she wanted a salad, was 
obliged to despatch a messenger thither on purpose." {Hist, of Eng. anno 1547.) Fuller, 
in 1660, speaking of the gardens of Surrey, says, " Gardening was first brouglit into Eng- 
land for profit about seventy years ago ; before M'hich we fetched most of" our cherries 
from Holland, apples from France, and hardly had a mess of rath-ripe peas, but from 
Holland, wliich were dainties for ladies \ they came so far and cost so dear. Since <^ar- 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



89 



dtiiing Lath crept out of Holland to Sandwich, Kent, and thence to Surrey, where 
tlrough they have given £6 an acre and upwards, they have made their rent, lived com- 
fortable, and set many people to work." (^Worthies, partiii. p. 77.) 

399. During the reign of Henry VIII., rapid steps were made in horticulture. Ac- 
cording to some authors, apricots, musk-melons, and Corinth grapes from Zante, were in- 
troduced by that monarch's gardener ; and different kinds of salad, herbs, and esculent roots 
wei-e, about the same time first brought into the country from Flanders. Salads, how- 
ever, accoi-ding to Holingshed, are mentioned during Edward IV. 's reign. Henry had 
a fine garden at his favorite palace of Nonsuch, in the parish of Cheam, in Surrey. 
Here Kentish cherries were first cultivated in England. The garden wall was fourteen 
feet high, and there were 212 fruit-trees. Leland, who wrote during this reign, informs 
us (^Itinerary, &c.), that at Morle in Derbyshire, " there is as much pleasure of orchards 
of great variety of fruit, as in any place of Lancashire. The castle of Thornbury, in 
Gloucestershire, had an orchard of four acres, and there were others at Wresehill on 
the Ouse." 

400. Books on horticulture appeared towards the middle of the sixteenth century. The 
first treatise of husbandry' was a translation from the French, by Bishop Grosshead, in 
1500. In 1521, appeared Arnold's Chronicles, in which is a chapter on " The crafte of 
graffynge, and plantynge, and alterynge of fruits, as well in colours as in taste." The 
first author who treats expressly on gardening is Tusser, whose Five Hundred Points of 
good Husbandrie, ^c. with divers approved Lessons on Hojips and Gardening, &c. was 
first published in 1517. 

Thomas Tusser, {Sir J. Banks in Ilort. Trans, i. 150.) who had received a liberal education at Eton 
school, and at Trinity-Hall, Cambridge, lived many years as a farmer in Suffolk and Norfolk ; he after- 
wards removed to London, where he published the first edition of his work, and died in 1580. In his 
fourth edition, in 1578, he first introduced the subject of gardening, and has given us not only a list of the 
fruits, but also of all the plants then cultivated in our gardens, either for pleasure or profit, under the fol- 
lowing heads : — 

Seedes and herbes for the kychen, herbes and rootes for sallets and sawce, herbes and roots to boyle or to 
butter, strewing herbs of all sorts, herbes, branches, and flowers for windowes and pots, herbs to still in 
snummer, necessarie herbs to grow in the gardens for physick, not reherst before. — This list consists of 
more than 150 species. 

Of fruits he enumerates, apple-trees of aU sorts, apricoches, bar-berries, bollese black and white, cherries 
red and black, chestnuts, cornet plums (probably the Cornelian cherry) ; damisens v/hite and black, 
filberts red and v/hite, gooseberries, grapes white and red ; grene or grass-plums, burtil-berries {vacciniiim 
vitis-idcea), medlers or merles, mulberries ; peaches white, red, and yellow fleshed (called also the orange- 
peach) ; peres of all sorts, peer plums, black and yellow, quince trees ; raspes, reisons (probably currants), 
small liuts ; strawberries red and white ; service trees, wardens v/hite and red ; v/allnuts, wheat plums. 

Oi'^.er/rMzYs perhaps might have been added, as the fig; that fruit having been introduced previous to 
1534, by Cardinal Pole. The orange and pomegranate, which Evelyn, in 1700, says, had stood at Bedding, 
ton 120 years ; and the melon, v/hich, according to Lobel, was introduced before 1570, so that on the v/hole, 
we had all the fundamental varieties of our present fruits in the middle of the sixteecth century. Hie pine- 
apple is the only exception, which was not introduced till 16C0. 

401. The fertility of the soil of England was depreciated by some in Tusser's time, 
probably from seeing the superior productions brought from Holland and France. 
Dr. Boleyn, a contemporary, defends it, saying, " we had apples, pears, plums, cherries, 
and hops of our own growth, before the importation of these articles into England by 
the London and Kentish gardeners, but that the cultivation of them had been greatly 
neglected. He refers as a proof of the natural fertility of the land to the great crop of 
sea-pease [Pisum maritimum), which grew on the beach between Orford and Aldbo- 
rough, and which saved the poor in the dearth of 1555. Oldys soon afterwards, speaking 
of Gerrard's fine garden and alluding to the alleged depreciation of our soil and cihnato, 
says " from Avhence It would appear, that our ground could produce other fruits besides 
hips and haws, acorns and pig-nuts." At this time, observes Dr. Pulteney (Sketches, 
&c. 118.), "kitchen garden wares were imported from Holland, and fruits from 
France. " 

402. During the reign of Elizabeth, horticulture appears to have been in a state of 
progress. Various works on this branch then appeared, by Didymus Mountain, Hyll, 
Mascal, Scott, Googe, &c. ; these, for the most part, are transia'dons from the Roman 
and modern continental authors. Mascal is said to have introduced some good varieties 
of the apple. 

403. Charles I. seems to have patronised gardening. His kitchen-gardener was 
Tradescant, a Dutchman, and he appointed the celebrated Parkinson his herbalist. In 
1 G29, appeared the first edition of this man's great work, in folio, entitled, " Paradisi 
in sole Paradisus terrestris ; or, a Garden of all sortes of pleasant Flowers, with a Kitcnerx 
Garden of all manner of Herbs and Roots, and an Orchard of all sort of Fruit-bearing 
Trees, &c." This, as NelU observes (Ed. Encyc. art. Hurt.), may be considered as the 
first general book of English gardening possessing the character of originality. For the 
culture of melons, he recommends an open hot^bed on a sloping bank, covering the 
melons occasionally with straw, — the method practised in the north of France at this 
day. Cauliflowers, celery, and finochio, were then great rarities. Virginia potatoes 
(our common sort) were then rare ; but Canada potatoes (our Jerusalem articlioke) were 



90 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



in common use. The variety of fruits described, or at least mentioned, appears very 
great. Of apples there are 58 sorts; of pears, 64 ; plums, 61 ; peaches, 21 ; nectarines, 
5 ; apricots, 6 ; cherries, no fewer than 36 ; grape-vines, 23 ; figs, 3 ; with quinces, 
medlars, almonds, v/alnuts, filberds, and tlie common small fruits. 

404. Croimvell was a great promoter of agriculture and the useful branches of gar- 
dening, and his soldiers introduced all the best improvements wherever they went. He 
gave a pension of lOQl. a-year to Ilartlib, a Lithuanian, who had studied husbandry in 
Flanders, and published A Letter to Dr. Beati, concerning the Defects and Bemedies 
of English Husbandry, and the Legacy, both useful works. He was an autlior, says 
Harte, who preferred the faulty sublime, to the faulty mediocrity. He recommended 
the adoption in England of the two secrets of Flemish husbandry, that of letting farms 
on improving leases, and cultivating green crops. 

405. Charles II. being restored to the throne, introduced French gardening, and his 
gardener, Rose, Daines Barrington infonns us, " planted such famous dwarfs at Hamp- 
ton Coiu t, Carl'ton, and Marlborough gardens, that London, who was Rose's apprentice, 
in his Betired Gardener, published 1667, challenges all Europe to produce the like." 
Waller, the poet, in allusion to the two last gardens, describes the mall of St. James's 
park, as r 

All with a border of rich fruit-trees crown'd." 

When Quintinye came to England to visit Evelyn, Charles II. offered him a pension to 
stay and superintend the royal gardens here; but this, says Switzer {Pref. to Ichnograj^hia 
rnstica), he declined, and returned to serve his own master. Daines Barrington conjec- 
tures that Charles 11. had the first hot and ice houses ever built in this country, as at the 
installation dinner given at Windsor, on the 23d of April, 1667, there were cherries, 
strawberries, and ice-creams. These fruits, however, had been long, as Switzer states, 
raised by dung-heat by the London gardeners, and the use of ices must have long before 
been introduced from the continent. 

406. Evch/n was a distinguished patron of horticulture. On returning from his 
travels, in 1653 he published his French Gardener, and from that time to his death in 
1706 continued one of the greatest promoters of our art. In 1664, he published his 
Pomona, and Calcndarium Hortense ; the latter, the first work of the kind which had 
appeared in this country. In 1658, his translation of Quintinye's work on orange-trees, 
and his Complete Gardener appeared ; and his -^^ce/ar/cr, in 1669, was his last work on 
this branch of gardening. Evelyn is universally allowed to have been one of the warmest 
friends to improvements in gardening and planting that has ever appeared. He is 
eulogised by AVotton, in his Beficctions on Ancient and Modern Learning, as having 
done more than all former ages, and by Switzer, in his historical preface to Ichnographia 
nislica, as being the first that taught gardening to speak proper English. In his Memoira 
by Bray, are the following horticultural notices. 

1661. Lady Brook's at Hachney ; " vines planted in strawberry borders, staked at ten feet distance. I 
saw the famous queen-pine brought from Barbadoes, and presented to his majcst}'." Evelyn had seen one 
four years before, and he afterwards saw the first king-pine presented at the Eanquetting-house, and tasted 
of it. At Kensington Palace is a picture, in which Charles II. is receiving a pine-apple from his gardener, 
Rose, who is presenting it on his knees. 

1G66. At Sir IViUiajn Temple's at East Sheen, the most remarkable things " are his orangery and gar- 
dens, where the wall fruit-trees are most exquisitely nailed and trained, far better than I have noted any 
where else." Sir 'William has some judicious remarks on the soils ai^.d situations of gardens, in his Essay 
^vritten in 1658. He was long ambassador at the Hague, and had the honor, as lie informs us, and as 
Switzer confirms, of introducing some of our best peaches, apricots, cherries, and grapes. 

1678. At Kew Garden, {Memoirs, vol. ii. p. 17.) " Sir Henry Capel has the choicest plantation of fruit in 
England, as he is the most industrious and most understanding in it." Daines Barrington {Archcsologia, 
viii. 122.) considers Lord Capel to have been the first person of consequence in England, who was at much 
expense in his gardens, having brought over with him many new fruits from France. 

407. Duiing the eighteenth century, the progress of horticulture, as of every other de- 
partment of gardening v^ as rapid. Tliis will appear from the great number of excellent 
authors who appeared during this period, as Millar, Lawrence,"^ Bradley, Switzer, in the 
first half ; and Hitt, Abercrombie, Marshal, M'Phail, and others in the latter part of the 
period. Switzer was an artist-gardener and a seedsman, and laid out many excellent 
kitchen and fruit gardens, and built some hot-walls and forcing-houses. 

408. Forcing-houses and jnne-stoves appear to have been introduced in the early part 
of the eighteenth century : but forcing by hot beds and dung placed behind walls of 
boards were, according to Switzer ( Fruit Gardener) and Lord Bacon, in use for an un- 
known length of time. 

409. The ])ine-apple was first successfully cultivated by Sir Matthew Decker, at Rich- 
mond, in 1719. Warner, of Rotherhithe, excelled in the culture of the vine, and raised 
from seed the red, or V/arner's Hamburgh, a variety which still continues to be much 
esteemed. 

410. In the last year of the seventeenth century, appeared a curious work, entitled, 
Fruit-iralls improved by inclining them to the Horizon, by N. Facio de Doulier, F. R. S. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



91 



This work incurred the censure of the practical authors of the day .; but founded on 
correct mathematical principles, it attracted the attention of the learned, and of some 
noblemen. Among the latter was the Duke of Rutland, and the failure of the Irial of 
one of these walls, led to the earliest example which we have been able to discover of forc- 
ing grapes in England. This, Lav/rence and Switzer agree, was successfully accom- 
plished at Belvoir Castle, in 1705. Switzer published the first plans of forcing-houses, 
with directions for forcing generally, in his I^ruit Gardener, in 1717. 

411. The nineteenth century has commenced by extraordinary efforts in horticulture. 
The culture of exotic fruits and forcing has been greatly extended, and while in the 
middle of the eighteenth century scarcely a forcing-house was met with, excepting near 
the metropolis ; there is now hardly a garden in the most remote county, or a citizen's 
potagery, without one or more of them. The public markets, especially those of the 
metropolis, are amply supplied witli forced productions, and far better pines, grapes, and 
melons are grown in Britain tlian in any other part of the world. 

412. The London Horticultural /Soae^y, . established in 1805, has made astonishing 
exertions in procuring and disseminating fruits, culinary vegetables, and horticultural 
knowledge, and has succeeded in rendering the subject popular among the higher classes, 
and in stimulating to poAverful exertion the commercial and serving gardeners. A great 
and lasting benefit conferred on gai-dening by this society is the publicity and illustra- 
tion which they have given by their transactions to the physiological discoveries of 
Knight, who has unquestionably thrown more light on the nature of vegetation than 
any other man, at least in this country. 

SuBSECT. 2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to its horticultural Productions. 

413. The earliest Scottish horticulturists, ChaliTiers remarks, were the abbots; and their 
orchards are still apparent to the eyes of antiquaries, while their gardens can now be 
traced only in the chartularies. A number of examples of gardens and orchards are 
mentioned in writings of the twelfth and thirteenth centuries : and even at this day, Mr. 
Neill observes, " several excellent kinds of fruits, chiefly apples and pears, are to be 
found existing in gardens, near old abbies and monasteries. That such fruits were 
introduced by ecclesiastics cannot admit of a doubt. The Arbroath oslin, which seems 
nearly allied to the burr knot apple of England, m.ay be taken as an instance ; that apple 
having been long known all round the abbey of Aberbrothwick, in Forfarshire ; and 
tradition uniformly ascribing its introduction to the monks. — The great care bestowed 
on the culture of fruits, and of some culinary herbs, by the clergy and nobility, could 
not fail to excite, in some degree, the curiosity and the attention of the inhabitants in 
general ; and it may, perhaps, be said that the first impulse has scarcely spent its force ; 
for it is thus but comparatively a short time (four or five centuries) since the cultivation 
of apples, pears, cherries, gooseberries, and currants, and many of the common kitchen- 
vegetables, were introduced into this country." (^On Scottish Gardens and Orchards in 
Gen. Rep. of Scot. p. 3.) 

414. About the beginning of the eighteenth century, the best garden in Scotland was 
that of J. Justice, at Crichton, near Edinburgh. From the year 1760 to 1785, that of 
Moredun claimed the priority. Moredun garden was managed by William Kyle, author 
of a y/ork on forcing peaches and vines ; and Dr. Duncan informs us, that the late Baron 
Moncrieff, its proprietor, " used to boast, that from his own garden, within a few miles ©f 
Edinburgh, he could, by the aid of glass, coals, and a good gardener, match any countiy 
in Europe, in peaches, grapes, pines, and every other fine fruit, excepting apples and 
pears ;" these he acknowledged were grov/n better in the open air in England, and the 
north of France. {Discourse to Caled. Ilort. Soc. 1814.) It is observed, in another of 
Dr. Duncan's discourses to this society, that in 1817, on the 10th of June, a bunch of 
Hamburgh grapes was presented, weighing four pounds, the berries beautiful and large. 
" In June, it is added, such grapes could not be obtained at any price, either in France, 
Spain, or Italy." These facts are decisive proofs of the perfection to which horticulture 
Jias attained in Scotland, in spite of many disadvantages of soil, climate, and pecuniary 
circumstances. 

415. The Scotch authors on this department of gardening are not numerous. The 
first v/as Reid in the beginning, and the best, Justice, about the middle of the eighteenth 
century. In the nineteenth century, Nicol's works appeared, and a variety of other writers 
in the memoirs of the Caledonian Horticultural Society. 

416. The nineteenth century promises greatly to increase the reputation of Scotland 
for gardeners and gardening, not only from the general improvement in consequence of 
the increase of wealth and refinement among the employers and patrons of the art but 
from the stimulus of the Caledonian Horticultural Society, which, by well devised com- 
petitory exhibitions and premiums, has excited a most laudable emulation among 
practical gardeners of every class. 



92 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



SuBSECT. 3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to its horticidtural Productions. 

417. As far as respects hardy fruits and culinary vegetables, the gardens of the prin- 
cipal proprietors in Ireland may be considered as approaching to those of Scotland or Eng- 
land, as they are generally managed by gardeners of these countries ; but, in respect to 
exotic productions, Irish gardens are far behind those of the sister kingdoms. Indeed, it 
is only within the last fifteen years that it has become the practice to build hot-houses of 
any description in that country ; and the number of these is still very limited. The first 
forcing-house was erected in the Blessington gardens. The gardens of the minor nobi- 
lity and gentry of Ireland are poor in horticultural productions ; many content them- 
selves with cabbages and potatoes, and perhaps a few pears, onions, and apples. 

Sect. IV. British Gardening, in respect to the planting of Timber-trees arid Hedges. 

418. The British Isles irere ivell stocked nith timber when comparatively unpeopled with 
men. As population increased, culture extended itself, and forests were encroached on or 
eradicated, to make room for the plough or the scythe. History, as far as it goes, bears 
witness to this state of things in England, Scotland, and Ireland. 

SuBSECT. 1. Gardening in England, in respect to the 2)lanting of Timber-trees and 

Hedges. 

419. The ivoods of England were so numerous and extensive when Domesday-book 
was compiled, as to be valued, not by the quantity of timber, but by the number of 
swine which the acorns and mast could maintain. Four hundred years after this, in the 
time of Edward IV., an eminent writer says, that England was then a well timbered 
country. 

-''420. Till the beginning of the seventeenth century, the subject of planting for timber and 
fuel, seems not to have attracted much attention as an important part of the rural eco- 
nomy of England. Sir John Norden, in his Surveyor s Dialogue, published in 1607, 
notices the subject; as had been done before by Benose, in 1538, and Iltzherbert, in 1539. 
In 1612 was published. Of planting and preserving f T'imber and Fuel, an old Thrift 
newly revived, by R. C. ; and in the following year. Directions for planting of Timber 
and Fire IVood, by Arthur Standish. Planting for timber and copse is noticed in 
Googe\ Husbandry, published in 1614, and is the express subject of Manwood's Treatise 
on Forests, and their Origin(d and Beginni/ig, published in 1615 ; and of Rathbone's Sur^ 
veyor, in 1616. It is singular that so many books on this subject should have been pub- 
lished so near together at so early a period. The reason seems to be, as professor Mar- 
tyn has observed, that a material attack was made on the forest-trees in the 27th year of 
the reign of Henry VIII., when that monarch seized on the church- lands ; and from 
this time the consumption of oak- timber was continually increasing, not only in conse- 
quence of the extension of commerce, and of great additions to the royal navy, but be- 
cause it was made more use of in building houses. This alarmed both government and 
individuals. Holinshead, who lived in the reign of Elizabeth, says, that in times past 
men were contented to live in houses built of sallow, willow, &c. ; so that the use of oak 
was, in a manner, dedicated wholly unto churches, religious houses, princes' palaces, 
navigation, &c. ; but now nothing but oak is any where regarded. 

In the reign of James I., it appears that there was great store of timber, more than proportioned to the 
demand. For on a survey of the royal forests, &c. in 1608, we find that a great part of what was then in- 
tended to be sold, remained a considerable time undisposed of 

During the civil vjar, in the time of Charles I., and all the time of the interregnum, the royal forests, as 
well as the woods of the nobility and gentry, suffered so much, that many extensive forests had, in a few 
years, hardly any memorial left of their existence but their names. This Wss would not have operated so 
severely, had the principal nobility and gentry been as solicitous to plant with judgment, as to cut down 
their woods. 

The publication of Evelyn'' s Sylva, in 1664, raised a great spirit of planting, and created a ncv/ jcra in this 
as in other branches of gardening. In his dedication to Charles II., in 1678, he observes, that he need not 
acquaint the king how many millions of timber-trees have been planted in his dominions, at the instiga- 
tion, and by the sole direction of that work. The government at that time, alarmed by the devastation 
which had been committed during the civil v/ar, gave great attention to thejncrease and preservation of 
timber in the royal forests. 

421. Tree-mirseries were established during the seventeenth century. Young trees, the 
early authors inform us, were procured from the natural forests and copses, where they 
were self-sown ; but about the beginning of the seventeenth century, public nursery- 
gardens were formed, originally for fruit-trees ; but towards the end, nurserymen, as we 
learn from Switzer and Cooke, began to raise forest-trees and hedge-plants from seeds. 
The first nursery we hear of was that of Corbett, at Twickenham, mentioned by Ben 
Jonson, and the next of consequence that of London and Wise, at Brompton Park, 
already mentioned, and still continued as a nursery. 

422. During the eighteenth century, especially in the latter part, planting proceeded 
rapidly. The Society of Arts, &c. established in 1753, have greatly contributed, by 
their honorary and pecuniary rewards, to restore the spirit for planting. The republi- 
cation of Evelyn's Sylva^ in a splendid manner, by Dr. Hunter, and subsequently c-i 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 93 



different woiks by Kennedy, Young, the Bishop of LlandafF, Marshall, Pontey, and 
others, has doubtless contributed to that desirable end ; and the residt is, that many 
thousand acres of waste lands have been planted with timber-trees, independently of 
demesne-jjlantations, and such as have been made for shelter or effect. 

423. The nineteenth century has commenced with a much more scientific mode of 
planting and managing trees than formerly existed. Excellent modes of pruning have 
been pointed out and practised by Pontey, which will render future plantations much 
more valuable than where this operation and thinning have been so generally neglected 
as hitherto. 

424. At what time hedges were introduced into England is uncertain. They would proba- 
bly be first exhibited in the gardens of the Roman governors, and afterwards re-appear in 
those of the monks. From these examples, from the Roman authors on husbandry, or more 
probably from the suggestion of travellers who had seen them abroad, they would be in- 
troduced in rural economy. Marshal conjectures, that clearing out patches in the woods 
for aration, and leaving strips of bushes between thein, m.ay have given the first idea of 
a hedge, and this supposition is rendered more plausible, from the circumstance of some of 
the oldest hedges occupying so much space, and consisting of a variety of plants. However 
originated, they did not come into general use in laying out farms till after the Flemish 
husbandly was introduced in Norfolk about the end of the seventeenth century. (Iient's 
Hints, &c.) So rapidly have they increased since that period, that at the end of the 
eighteenth century they had entirely changed the face of the country. In the time of 
George I. almost every tract of country in England might have been said to consist 
of four distinct parts or kinds of scenery : 1 . The houses of the proprietors, and their 
parks and gardens, and the adjoining village, containing their farmers and labourers ; 
2. The common field or intercommonable lands in aration ; 3. The common pasture, 
or waste untouched by the plough ; and, 4, The scattered or circumscribing forest 
containing a mass of timber or copse. But at present these fundamental features are 
mixed and variously grouped, and the general face of tlie country presents one continual 
scene of garden-like woodiness, interspersed with buildings and cultivated fields^ un- 
equalled in the world. 

The oldest enclosures in England are in Kent and Essex, and seem to have been formed of hawthorn, 
sloe, crab, hazel, dogwood, &c. taken from the copses, and planted promiscuously ; but now almost all 
field or fence-hedges are formed of single or double rows of hawthorn, with or without trees, planted 
at regular distances to shoot up for timber. 

SuBSECT. 2. Gardening in Scotland, in respect to the planting of Timber-trees and 

Hedges. 

425. Scotland in ancient times was c/of/ietZ with extensive tracts of wood. (Graham, 
in Gen. Rep. of Scot. vol. ii. ) By various operations carried on by the hand of Nature 
and of man, this clothing has been in a great measure destroyed. The attempts to re- 
stoi-e it by planting timber, however, appear to be of recent origin. Dr. Wallier seems to 
be of opinion, that the elder (Sambucus nigra) was the first barren tree planted in Scotland ; 
and that the plane or sycamore was the next. The wood of the former was in much re- 
quest for making arrows. " A few cliestnuts and beeches," he adds, " were first planted 
in gardens, not long before the middle of the seventeenth cenitury, some of which have 
remained to our times." Notwithstanding this high authority, however, there seems to be 
good reason to conclude, that some trees which still exist were planted before the Re- 
formation ; they appear to have been introduced by the monks, being found for the most 
part in ecclesiastical establishments. Such are the Spanish chestnuts, the most of which 
are still in a thriving condition in the island of Inchmahoma, in the lake of Monteith, in 
Perthshire, where there was a priory built by David I. Some of these chestnut-trees 
measure within a few inches of eighteen feet in circumference, at six feet from the ground. 
They are probably three hundred years old, or upwards. There are planted oaks at 
Buchanan, which are apparently of the same age. 

426. The father of planting in Scotland, according to Dr. Walker, was Thomas, Earl 
of Haddington, having begun to plant Binning-wood, which is now of great extent and 
value, in 1705. But it is stated on an authority almost approaching to certainty, that 
the fine timber in the lawn at Callender House, in Stirlingshire, was planted by the Earl 
of Linlithgow and Callender, who had accompanied Charles II. in his exile, upon his 
return from the continent after the Restoration. This timber is remarkable, not only 
for its size, but for its quantity. Planting for timber became very general in Scotland 
between the years 17S0 and 1760, by the exertions and example of Archibald, Duke of 
Argyle, the Duke of Athol, the Earls of Bute, Loudon, Hyndford, and Panmure, Sir 
James Nasmy th , Sir Archibald Grant, Fletcher of Saltoun, and others. It is well ascer- 
tained that Sir Archibald Grant began to plant in 1719. 

427. A great stimulus to planting in Scotland was giveri by the Essays of Dr. Anderson, 
published in 1784, in which the value of the larch-tree and the progress it had made 
at Dunkeld, since planted there in 1741. were pointed out. The examples and 



94 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part L 



writings of Lord Kames also contributed to bring tliis, and every d<?scription of rural 
improvement into repute ; but the high price of timber during the war produced tlie 
most sensible effect as to planting. 

428. The two first tree-nurseries in Scotland were established at Edinburgh, about tlie 
beginning of the eighteenth century, by Malcolm, at the Water Gate, and Gordon, at 
the Fountain Bridge. To these succeeded a considerable one by Anderson and 
Leslie, about 1770. Leslie contributed to render the larch popular, and was the first 
nurseryman who ventured to erect a greenliouse. Since this period, tree-nm-series are 
nearly as common in Scotland as in England. 

429. Hedges ivere introduced to Scotland by some officers in Cromwell's army about 
the middle of the seventeenth century. The first were planted at Inch Buckling Brae, 
in East Lothian, and at tlie head of Loch Tay, in Perthshire. The former hedge was 
in existence in 1804, and then consisted of a single row of old hawtliorns. They are 
now general in all the low and tolerably fertile and sheltered parts of the country ; 
contributing with the plantations to ameliorate the climate, and greatly to improve the 
scenery. 

SuBSECT. 3. Gardening in Ireland, in respect to the planting of Timber-trees and 

Hedges. 

430. Trees ajypear to have covered Ireland in former times. " Though in every part 
of Ireland, in which I have been," observes A. Young, in 1777, {Tour, vol. ii. 2d edit.) 
** one hundred contiguous acres are not to be found without evident signs that they 
were once wood, at least veiy well wooded ; yet now the greatest part of the kingdom 
exhibits a naked, bleak, dreary view, for want of wood, which has been destroyed for a 
century past with the most careless prodigality, and still continues to be cut and wasted. 
The woods yet remaining are what in England would be called copses. The gentlemen 
in that country are much too apt to think they have got timber, when in fact they have 
got notliing but fine large copse- wood." Shaw Mason, in a Statistical Survey of 
Ireland, lately published, says there were natural woods in some places in James II. 's 
time ; but he produces very few instances of artificial plantations of full growth, and 
none of older date than the middle of the seventeenth century, when it appears, that 
through the instigation of Blythe and otiier officers in Cromw-ell's army, some gentlemen 
began to plant and improve. The late Lord Chief Baron Foster was the greatest 
planter when A. Young visited Ireland, and his lordship informed the tourist that 
the great spirit for this sort of improvement began about 1749 and 1750. 

431. Hedges, as fences, were probably, as in Scotland, introduced by the officers of 
Cromwell's army. 

Sect. V. British Gardening, as empirically practised. 

432. The use of gardens, is perhaps more general in England and Scotland than in 
any other country, if we except Holland. The laborious journeyman-mechanic, whose 
residence, in large cities, is often in the air, rather than on the earth, decorates his garret- 
window with a garden of pots. Tlie deljtor deprived of personal liberty, and the pauper 
in the work-house, divested of all property in external tilings, and without any -fixed 
object on which to place their affections, sometimes resort to this symbol of territorial 
appropriation and enjoyment. So natural it is for all to fancy they have an inherent 
right in the soil ; and so necessary to happiness to exercise the affections, by having some 
object on which to place them. 

433. Almost every cottage in England has its ajipendant garden, larger or smaller, and 
slovenly or neatly managed, according to circumstances. In the best districts of 
England, the principal oleraceous vegetables, some salads, herbs, flowers, and fruits are 
cultivated ; and in the remote parts of Scotland, at least potatoes and borecoles are 
planted. Tradesmen and operative manufacturers, who have a permanent interest in 
their cottages, have generally the best cottage-gardens ; and many of them, especially at 
Norwich, Manchester, and Paisley, excel in the culture of florists' flowers. 

434. The gardens of farmers are larger, but seldom better managed than those of the 
common cottagers, and not often so well as those of the operative manufacturers in 
England. They are best managed in Kent and in East Lothian. 

435. The gardens and grounds of citizens, who have country-houses, may be, in size, 
from an eighth of an acre to a hundi-ed acres or upwards. Such a latitude, it may 
easily be conceived, admits of great variety of kitchen-gardens, hot-houses, flower-gar- 
dens, and pleasure-grounds. They are, in general, the best managed gardens in Britain, 
and constitute the principal scenery, and the greatest ornament of the neighbourhood 
of every large town. Those round the Metropolis, Liverpool, and Edinburgh are 
pre-eminent. 

436. The gardens of independent gentlemen of middling fortune vary considerably in 
dimension. Few of the lutchen-gardens are under an acre, the flower-garden may 
contain a fourth or a third of an acre, and the pleasure-ground from three to ten or 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 



95 



twelve acres. The lawn or park varies from thirty or forty to three or four hundred 
acres. The whole is in general respectably kept up, thougli there are many exceptions 
arising from want of taste, of income, or engagements in other pursuits on the part of 
the proprietor ; or restricted means, slovenliness, and want of taste and skill in the 
head gardener. These gardens abound in every part of every district of Britain, in 
proportion to the agricultural population. 

437. The first-rate gardens of Britain belong chiefly to the extensive land-holders ; but 
in part also to wealthy commercial men. The kitchen-gardens of this class may 
include from three to twelve acres, the flower-garden from two to ten acres, the pleasure- 
ground from twenty to one hundred acres, and the park from Ave hundred to Ave 
thousand acres. Excepting in the cases of minority, absence of the family, or pecu- 
niary embaiTassments, these gardens are kept up in good style. They are managed 
by intelh'gent head gardeners, with assistants for the different departments, and appren- 
tices and journeymen as operatives. A few of such residences are to be found in 
almost every county of England, in most of those in Scotland, and occasionally in 
Ireland. 

438. The rayal gardens of England cannot be greatly commended ; they are in no 
respect adequate to the dignity of the kingly office. That at Kew has been already 
mentioned as containing a good collection of plants ; but neither this nor any of the 
other royal gardens are at all kept in order as they ought to be, not on account of want 
of skill in the royal gardeners, but for want of support from their employers. 

439. Gardens for public recreation are not very common in Britain ; but of late a con- 
siderable specimen has been formed at London in the Regent's Park, an extensive 
equestrian promenade, and one at Edinburgh on the Calton Hill, of singular 
variety of prospect. There are also squares and other walks, and equestrian promenades, 
in the metropolis, and other large towns; but in respect to this class of gardens, they 
are much less in use in Britain than on the continent, for Britons are comparatively 
domestic and solitary animals. 

440. Of gardens for public instruction, there are botanic gardens attached to the princi- 
pal nniversities and exijeri mental gardens belonging to the London and Edinburgh hor- 
ticultural societies. 

441. Commercial gardens are very numerous in Britain, arising from the number, 
magnitude, and v/ealtli of her cities being much greater in proportion to the territorial 
extent of the country than in any other kingdom. In general, they have been origi- 
nated by head gardeners, who have given up private servitude. 

442. Market-gardens and orchards are numerous, especially round the metropolis, and 
their productions are unequalled, or at least not surpassed by any gardens in the 
world, public or private. Forcing is carried on extensively in these gardens, and the 
pine cultivated in abundance, and to great perfection. Their produce is daily exposed 
in different markets and shops ; so that every citizen of London may, throughout the 
year, purchase the same luxuries as the king or as the most wealthy proprietors have 
furnished from their own gardens, and obtain for a few shillings what the wealth of 
Crcesus could not procure in any other country ! a striking proof of what commerce will 
effect for the industrious. Some gardens are devoted to the raising of garden-seeds for 
the seed-merchants, and others, to the growing of herbs and flowers for the chemist or 
<iistiller. 

443. There are fiorists' gardens, where plants are forced so as to furnish roses and 
other flowers of summer in mid-winter. Tlie tradesman's wife may thus at pleasure 
procure a drawing-room garden equal to that of her sovereign, and superior to that of 
all the kings and nobles on the rest of the globe. 

444. Of nursery-gardens for stocking and forming new gardens and plantations, and 
repairing or increasing the stock of old ones, there are a number in which a very con- 
siderable capital is embarked, lliese have greatly increased with the increasing spirit 
for planting, and other branches of gardening. The principal are near the metropolis ; 
but they are to be found in most districts, originated in almost every case by head gar- 
deners, whose capital consists of the savings made during their servitude. 

445. The operative j^art of gardening is canied on by labourers, apprentices, journey- 
men, and masters. 

The labourers are women for weeding, gathering some descriptions of crops, and other light works : and 
men for assisting in the heavier operations in extraordinary seasons. The permanent sub-operatives are 
the apprentices and journeymen ; the former are indentured generally for three years, at the expiration 
of which they become journeymen, and after a few years' practice in that capacity, in different gardens, 
they are considered qualified for being masters, or taking the charge of villa, private, or first-rate gardens 
according to their capacity, education, and assiduity, and the class of gardens in which they have studied 
and practised. Formerly there were lodges, or societies of gardeners, and a sort of mystic institution and 
pass-word kept up, like those of the German gardeners and masons ; but within tlie last fifty years this has 
been in most places given up. The use of books, and the general progress of society, render such institu- 
tions useless in point of knowledge and hospitality, and injurious politically, or in respect to the market- 
value of labor. {Preston's History of Masonry.) 



96 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



The head gardcihcrs of this country are universally allowed to he the most intelligent and trust-worth v 
part of the operatives of any branch of rural economv, and the most faithful and ingenious of those who 
constitute the serving establishment of a country-residence. Those of Scotland are by many preferred, 
chiefly, perhaps, from their having been better educated in their youth, and more accustomed 'to frugality 
and labor. Scotland, Neill observes, " has long been famous for producing professional gardeners ; per- 
haps more so than any other cour.try, unless we except Holland, about a century ago. At present, not 
only Great Britain, but Poland and Russia are supplied from Scotland ; and the numbers of an inferior 
class to be found in every part of England and Ireland, is quite astonishing." [Gen. Rep. Sec. chap, ii.) Lord 
Gardenstone {Trav-lUng Memorandum, 1790) savs, that in evsrv country in Europe, he found gardeners 
more sober, industrious, and intelligent than other men of a like condition in Society. 

446. The use of gardciis in Ireland is of a very limited, description, and the gardens 
there, of all the classes, are greatly inferior to tlie corresponding classes in Britain. A 
few exceptions may be made in favor of the Dublin botanic gardens, and those of one or 
two wealthy citizens and extensive proprietors ; but the cottage-gardens, in many districts, 
contain nothing besides potatoes ; and potatoes are the chief ingredients in the gardens 
of private gentlemen. Parnel, Wakefield, and Curwen, have ably shown that till wheaten 
bread and meat take place of these roots, no great improvement can be expected among 
the lower classes of Ireland. 

447. Tkc artists or architects of gardens, in Britain, are of three classes. First, head 
gardeners who liave laid out tlie whole, or part of a residence, under some professor, and 
who commence artist or ground workmen, as this class is generally denominated, as a 
source of independence. Such was Hitt, Brown, &c. Secondly, architects who have 
devoted themselves chiefly to counti-j"-buildings, and thus acquiring seme knowledge of 
country-matters, and the effects of scenery, combine with building, the laying out of 
grounds, depending for the execution of their ideas on the practical knowledge of the 
gardener, pro tempore. This class are commonly called gi-ound-architects. Such was 
Kent. Thirdly, artists who have been educated and apprenticed, or otherwise brought 
up entirely, or chiefly for that profession. These are often called landscape-gardeners, 
but the term is obviously of too limited application, as it refers only to one branch of the 
art. Such was Bridgeman, Eames, &c. 

Sect. VI. British Gardening, as a Science, and as to the Authors it has produced. 

448. Those superstitious observances attendant on a rude state of society, retained their 
ground in British gardening till tlie end of the seventeenth century. Meager, Mascal, 
Worlidge, and the authors who preceded them, regulate the perform.ance of horticultural 
operations by the age of the moon. Turnips or onions, according to these authors, sown 
when the moon is full, will not bulb but send up flower stalks ; and fruit-trees, planted 
or grafted at that season, will have their period of bearing greatly retarded. A weak tree 
is to be pruned in the increase, and a strong tree in the wane of the moon. Quintinye 
seems to have been the first to oppose this doctrine in France, and through Evelyn's 
translation of his Coinplete Gardener, he seems to have overturned it also in England. 
" I solemnly declare," he says, " that after a diligent observation of the moon's changes 
for tliirty years together, and an enquiry whether they had any influence in gardening, 
the affirmative of which has been so long established among us, I perceived that it was 
no weightier than old wives' tales, and that it had been advanced by unexperienced gar- 
deners. I have, therefore, followed what appeared most reasonable, and rejected what 
was otherwise ; in short, graft in what time of the moon you please, if your graft be good, 
and grafted on a proper stock, provided ycu do it like an artist, you will be sure to suc- 
ceed. In the same manner sow ^shat sorts of grain you please, and plant as you please, 
in any quarter of the moon, I'll answer for your success, the first and last day of the 
moon being equally favorable." 

(iiiintini'e not only removed ancient prejudices, but introduced more rational principles of pruning than 
had before been offered. Sv^-itzer says, he first made it known that a transplanted tree could not grow till 
it made fresh fibres, and that therefore the old ones:, when dried up, might be cut off 

449. The injluence of BacoJi s u^ritings produced the decline and fall of astrology, in 
tlie beginning of the eighteenth century. A different mode of studying the sciences was 
adopted. Vegetable physiology and chemistry, the first a new science, and the latter 
degraded under tlie name of alchemy, began to be studied, and the influence of tliis 
dawn of intellectual day Avas felt even in agriculture and gardening. 

450. The practice of forcing fruits and floivers, which became general about the middle 
of the century, led gardeners to reflect on the science of their art, by bringing more 
effectually into notice the specific influence of light, heat, air, water, and other agents of 
vegetation. The elementary botanical vrorks published about the same time, by dif- 
fusing the doctrines of Linnaeus, co-operated ; as did the various horticultural writers of 
this century, especially Miller, Bradley, and Hill, and subsequently Home, Anderson, 
and others. 

451. The increasiyig culture of exotics, Doctor Pulteney observes, " from the begin- 
ning of the eighteenth century, and the greater diffusion of taste for the elegancies and 
luxuries of the stove and green-house, naturally tended to raise up a spirit of improve- 



Book I. GARDENING IN ULTRA-EUROPEAN COUNTRIES. 



97 



ment and real science in the art of culture. To preserve far-fetched varieties, it became 
necessary to scrutinise into the true principles of the art, which ultimately must depend 
on the knowledge of the climate of such plant, and the soil in which it flourishes in that 
climate. Under the influence of such men as Sloane, the Sherrards, and other great en- 
couragers of science, gardeners acquired botanical knowledge, and were excited to 
greater exertion in tlieir art." 

452. The increased zeal for planting, and more careful attendance to the pruning of 
trees, tended to throw light on the subject of vegetable wounds, and their analogy with 
those of animals, as to the modes of healing, though the French laugh at our ignorance 
on this subject [Cours (V Agr. art. Plaie,) at the close of the eighteenth century. 

453. But the science of horticulture received its greatest improvement from Knight, 
the enlightened president of the Horticultural Society. The first of this philosopher's 
writings will be found in the Philosophical Transactions for 1 795, entitled Observations on 
the Grafting of Trees. In the same Transactions for 1801 and 1803, are contained his 
ingenious papers on the fecundation of fruits, and on the sap of trees. Subsequent 
volumes contain other important papers ; and a great number in which science and art 
are combined, in a manner tending directly to enlighten and instruct the practical gar- 
dener, will be found in the Tra7isactions of the Horticultural Society. Through the 
influence of this author and that society, over which he is so worthy to preside, we see 
commenced an important asra in the horticulture of this country, an sera rendered pecu- 
liarly valuable, as transferring the discoveries of science immediately to art, and rendering 
them available by practitioners. How great may be its influence, on the comforts and 
luxuries of the table, it is impossible to foresee. The introduction and distribution of 
better sorts of the common hardy fruits and culinary plants, will tend immediately to the 
benefit of the humbler classes of society ; and by increasing a little the size, and encou- 
raging the culture, both ornamental and useful, of cottage-gardens, the attachment of 
this class to their homes, and consequently their interest in the country, will be increased. 
Even agriculture will derive advantages, of which, as an example, may be adduced the 
result of pinching off the blossoms of the potatoe, which, by leaving more nourishment for 
the root, will increase the produce (according to Knight's estimate) at least one ton per 
acre. {Hart. Tr.i. 190. Treatise on the Apple and Pear.) 

454. Gardening, as an art of design and taste, may be said to have been conducted 
mechanically, and copied from precedents, like civil architecture, till the middle of the 
eighteenth century ; but at this time the writings of Addison, Pope, Shenstone, and 
G. Mason appeared ; and in these, and especially in the Observations on Modern Gar- 
dening, by Wheatley, are laid down unalterable principles for the imitation of nature in 
the arrangement of gardening scenery. The science of this department of the art may 
therefore be considered as completely ascertained ; but it will probably be long before it 
be appropriated by gardeners, and applied in the exercise of the art as a trade. A some- 
"what better education in youth, and more leisure for reading in the periods usually de- 
voted to constant bodily labor, will eflTect this change ; and its influence on the beauty of 
the scenery of country-residences, and on the face of the country at large, would be such 
as cannot be contemplated without a feeling of enthusiastic admiration. If this taste were 
once duly valued and paid for by those whose wealth enables them to employ first-rate 
gardeners, it would soon be produced. But the taste of our nobility does not, in gene- 
ral, take this turn, otherwise many of them would display a very different style of scenery 
around their mansions. 

455. Britain has produced more original authors on gardening than any other country. 
It may be sufficient here to inention, in the horticultural department. Justice, Miller, 
and Abercrombie. In ornamental gardening, Parkinson and Madocks ; in planting, 
Evelyn and Nicol j and in landscape-gardening, G. Mason and Wheatley. 



Chap. V. 

Of the present State of Gardening in Ultra- European Countries. 

456. The gardens of the old continents are either original, or borrowed from modern 
Europe. With the exception of China, the gardens of every other country in Asia, 
Africa, and America, may be comprised under two heads. The aboriginal gardens 
displaying little design or culture, excepting in the gardens of rulers or chiefs ; and 
the gardens of European settlers displaying something of the design and culture of their 
respective countries. Thus the gardening of the interior of Asia, like the manners of 
the inhabitants, is the same, or nearly the same, now, that it was 3000 years ago ; that of 
North America is British ; and that of almost all the commercial cities in the world, ex- 

H 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Paiit I. 



cepting those of China, is European, and generally either Dutch, French, or English. 
We shall notice slightly, 1st, The aboriginal gardening of modem Persia and India; 2d, 
Of China ; 3d, The state of gardening in North America ; and 4th, In the British 
colonies and other settlements abroad. 

Sect. I. Syrian, Persian, Indian, and j4frican Gardens of modern Times. 

457. The outlines i)f a Jewish garden, nearly 3000 years ago, coincide with the gardens 
formed in the same countries at the present day. Blaundrel in the fourteenth century, 
Russel in the seventeenth, Chardin in the eighteenth, and Morier in the nineteenth cen- 
turies, enumerate the same trees and plants mentioned by Moses, Diodorus, and Hero- 
dotus, without any additions. The same elevation of site for the palace (^5^. 33.); the same 
terraces in front of it; and the same walls and towers surrounding the whole for security, 
still prevail as in the time of Solomon and his successors. Maundrel describes the gar- 
den of the Emir Facardine, at Beroot, as a large quadrangular spot of ground divided 
into sixteen lesser squares, four in a row, with walks between them, and planted with 
citron-trees. Each of the lesser squares was bordered with stone, and in the stone-work 
were troughs, very artificially contrived for conveying the water all over the garden, 
tliere being little outlets cut at every tree, for the stream as it passed by to flow out and 
water it. On the east side were two terrace-walks, rising one above the other, each 
having an ascent to it of twelve steps. At the north end they led into booths and 
summer-houses, and other apartments very delightful. {Travels from Aleppo to Jeru- 
salem, p. 40.) 

458. The gardens of Damascus are described by Egmont and Heyman as perfect 
paradises, being watered with copious streams from Lebanon ; and in the Account of the 
Ruins of Balbeck, the streams are said to be derived from Lebanus and Anti-LebanuSj 
and the shades of the palms and elms are described as exquisite in that burning climate. 
The time of the singing of birds is mentioned in Solomon s Song as a season of great 
pleasure, and then as novv, they no doubt constituted a material article in fine gardens. 
Russel observes, that *' in Syria there are abundance of nightingales, which not only 
afford much pleasure by their songs in the gardens, but are also kept tame in the houses, 
and let out at a small rate to divert such as choose it in the spring, so that no entertain- 
ments are made in this season without a concert of these birds. " {Natural Hist, of Aleppo^ 
p. 71.) 

459. The gardens of the Persians, obsei-ves Sir John Chardin, in 1732, " consist 
commonly of a grand alley or straight avenue in the centre planted with planes (the 
zinzar, or chenar of the east), which divides the garden into two parts. There is a 
basin of water in the middle, proportionate to the garden, and two other lesser ones on 
the two sides. The space between them is sown with a mixture of flowers in natural 
confusion, and planted with fruit-trees and roses, and this is the whole of the plan and 
execution, They know nothing of parterres and cabinets of verdure, labyrinths, ter- 
races, and such other ornaments of our gardens. The reason of which is, that the 
Persians do not walk in their gardens as we do, but content themselves with having 
the view of them, and breatliing the fresh air. For this purpose they seat themselves 
in some part of the garden as soon as they come into it, and remain there till they go 
out." According to the same author, the most eastern part of Persia, Hyrcania, is one 
entire and continued parterre from September to the end of April. " All the country 
is covered with flowers, and this is also the best season for fruits, since in the other 
months they cannot support the heat and unhealthy state of the air. Towards Media 
and the northern frontiers of Arabia, the fields produce of themselves tulips, anemones, 
single ranunculuses of the most beautiful red, and crown imperials. In other places, as 
around Ispahan, jonquils are wild and flower all the winter. In the season of narcissus. 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN SYRIA, PERSIA, &c. 



39 



seven or eight sorts spring up among lilies (Lilium), lily of the valley, violets of all 
colors, gilly-flowers, and jessamines, all of an odor and beauty far svn-j)assing those 
of Europe. But nothing can be more beautiful than the peach-trees, so completely 
covered with flowers as to obstruct the view tlu-ough their branches." Morier mentions 
tlie garden of Azar Gerib, in Ispalian, as extending a mile in length, and being formed 
on a declivity divided into twelve teiTaces, supported by walls, each terrace divided into 
a gi-eat number of squares. This garden is devoted to the culture of the most esteemed 
Persian fruits. The neighbourhood of Bushire was formerly famous for its gardens ; 
but IMorier informs us, " that in the whole territory of Bushire at this day, there are only 
a few cotton-bushes (Acacia Julibi-issin) ; here and there date-trees ; now and then a 
konar-tree (a palm), with water-melons, beringauts (gourds), and cucumbers." These 
date-trees, the towers, and tlie presence of camel-drivers, gave this town, when Moi-ier 
saw it, a truly Persian appearance. (Fig. 32.) 

460. The gardens of Kerim Khayi are thus described by Morier : " An immense wall 
of the neatest construction encloses a square tract of land, which is laid cut into walks 
shaded by cypress and chenar (Flatanus), and watered by a variety of marble canals, 
and small artificial cascades. Over the entrance, which is a lofty and arched passage, is 
built a pleasure-house. In the centre of the garden is anotlier of the principal pleasure- 
hou-ses. There is a basin in the middle of the principal room, where a fountain plays 
and refreshes the air, &c. The whole soil of this garden is artificial, having been exca- 
vated from the area below, and raised into a high terrace. The garden is noAv falling 
into decay ; but those who saw it in the reign of Kerim Khan, delight to describe its 
splendor, and do not cease to give the most ravishing pictures of the beauty of all the 
environs of his capital." {Journey to Persia, 1812, p. 206. Jolmsons Journey from 
J7idia, 1817, chap, v.) 

461. The gardens cf the chiefs of India, now or lately existing, are of the same general 
character as those of Persia. " In the gardens belonging to the Mahomedan princes, 
which in some parts of India were made at a veiy great expense, a separate piece of 
ground was usually allotted for each kind of plant, the whole being divided into square 
plots, separated by walks. Thus one plot was filled with rose-trees, another with pomiC- 
granates, &c. The gardens of this sort, most celebrated in India, were tliose of Ben- 
galore and Delhi. The former, belonging to Tippoo, were made by him and his father, 
Hyder Ali. As Bengalore is very much elevated above the sea, it enjoys a temperate 
climate ; and in the royal gardens tliere were seen not only the trees of the country, but 
also the cypress, vine, apple, pear, and peach ; both the latter produced fruit. Straw- 
berries were likewise raised, and oaks and pine-trees, brought from the Cape of Good 
Hope, flourished. Some magnificent palaces and walled gardens (fg. 33.) are m.entioned 
by Morier and other oriental travellers ; but all agree in representing their interior in 
a state of neglect. 




462. The gardens of Kalimar, near Delhi, which were made in the beginning of the 
•seventeenth century by the Emperor Shaw Jehan, are said to have cost 1,000,000/. 
sterling, and were about a mile in circumference. They were surrounded by a high 
brick wall ; but the whole are nov/ in ruins." {JEdin. Encyc. art. India, p. 87.) 

463. Of the royal gardens of Shaw Leemar, near Lahore, a city of Hindostan, some 
account is given in tlie Jourjial of the lioyal Institution for July, 1820. " They 
differ," says the writer, " from the indigenous royal gardens generally found in India, in 
belonging to the class of hanging-gardens." Their length is about 500 yards, and their 
breadth about 140. They consist of three terraces watered by a stream brought upwards 
of sixty miles, and irrigating the country through which it passes. The only thing 
worthy of notice is the use of this water in cascades for cooling the air. There are large 
trees, including the apple, pear, and mango, a bordei- and island of flowers, among 

H 2 



100 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



which the narcissus abounds. Captain Benj. Blake, who describes these gardens, in 
making excursions in the neighbourhood, " stumbled, as it were, upon a most magnifi- 
cent mausoleum, round which was a walled garden of oi-ange and pomegranate trees." 

464. The gardens of the islands of Jajmn partake of the same general character as those 
of Persia and Hindostan. According to Kasmpfer, they display little of taste in design, 
but are full of the finest flowers and fruits. " Such," he says, " is the beauty of the 
flowers which ornament the hills, the fields, and the forests, that the country may even 
dispute the preference in this point with Persia. They transplant the most Ijeautiful of 
their wild flowers into the gardens, where they improve them by culture. Colors are tlie 
grand beauties desired both in plants and trees. Chestnut-trees, lemons, oranges, citrons 
and peaches, apricots and plums, abound. Tlie sloe, or wild plum, is cultivated on 
account of its flowers, which by culture acquire the size of a double rose, and are so 
abundant that they cover the whole tree with a snowy surface speckled with blood. 
These trees are the finest of their ornainents, they are planted in preference around their 
temples : and they are also cultivated in pots or boxes for private houses, as oranges are 
in Europe. They plant the summits of the mountains, and both sides of the public 
roads, with long rows of fir-trees and cypress, which are common in the countrj'. They 
even ornament sandy places and deserts by plantations ; and there exists a law in this 
island, that no one can cut down a tree without permission of the magistrate of the place, 
and even when he obtains permission, must replace it immediately by another." 

465. The gardens of the different African seaports on the Mediterranean, such as 
Tangier, Algier, Tunis, Tripoli, &c. have the same general character as those of Persia ; 
but inferior in proportion to the degraded state of society in these comparatively barba- 
rous places. The author of a Ten Years' residence in Tripoli confirms the remarks 
of Chardin and Kaempfer, as to the carelessness with which art lends her aid to nature. 
*' In their gardens the Moors form no walks ; only an irregular path is left, which 
you trace by the side of white marble channels for irrigation. Their form is gene- 
rally square, and they are enclosed by a wall, within which is planted a corresponding 
line of palm-trees. The whole is a mixture of beauty and desolation." (^Narrative, &c. 
p. 52.) 

466. The aboriginal horticulture of these countries consists chiefly in the culture of the 
native fruits, the variety of which is greater than that indigenous to any other country. 
The peach, the mango, all the palm tribe, and, in short, every fruit-tree cultivated in 
Persia and India by the natives, is raised from seed, the art of grafting or laying being 
uiih^nown. Water is the grand desideratum of every description of culture in this coun- 
try. Without it nothing can be done either in agri- 
culture or gardening. It is brought from immense 
distances at great expense, and by very curious con- 
trivances. One mode practised in Persia consists in 
forming subtei'raneous channels at a considerable depth 
from the surface, by means of circular openings at cer- 
tain distances, through which the excavated material is 
drawn up (Jig. 34. ) ; and the channels so formed, are 
known only to those who are acquainted with the country. These conduits are described 
by Polybius, a Greek author, who wrote in the second century before Christ ; and Morier 
(Journe!/ to Persia) found the description perfectly applicable in 1814. Doves' dung is 
in great request in Persia and Syria, for the culture of melons. Large pigeon-houses 

35.) are built in many places, expressly to collect it. The melon is now, as it was 





2500 years ago, one of the necessaries of life, and when the prophet Isaiah meant 
to convey an idea of the miseries of a famine, he foretold that a cab of doves' dung 
would be sold for a shekel of silver. The whole province of Syria was formerly famous 
for its horticultural productions, of which the bunch of grapes brought to Moses by his 



Book I. 



GARDENING IN CHINA. 



101 



spies {Nuvib. xiii. 23.) is a proof ; but it has been in a constant state of neglect since it 
came into the hands of the Turks, " who, of all nations," as Montesquieu observes, "are 
the most proper to enjoy large tracts of land with insignificance." 

467. Trees and bushes appear to have been held in superstitious veneration in these 
countries as early as the time of Moses, of which the story of the burning bush may be 
adduced as a proof. There are many other instances mentioned in the Jewish writings, 
of attachment to trees, and especially to the oak and plane. Morier, Johnson, and Sir 
William Ouseley [Embassi/, &c. vol. i.), describe the Persians as often worshipping under 
old trees in preference to their religious buildings. The chenar, or plane, is greatly pre- 
ferred. On these trees the devotees sacrifice their old clothes by hanging them to their 
branches, and the trunks of favorite trees are commonly found studded with rusty nails 
and tatters. {Sir William Ousley, App. 1819.) Groves of trees are equally revered in 
India, and are commonly found near the native temples and burial-places of the 
princes. 

Sect. II. Chinese Gardening. 

468. We know little of the gardening of China, notwithstanding all that has been written 
and asserted on the subject. It does not appear perfectly clear to us, that the difference 
between the gardens of Persia and India, and those of China, is so great as has been very 
generally asserted and believed. It is evident, that the Chinese study irregularity and 
imitate nature, in attempting to form rocks ; but whether this imitation is carried to 
that extent in wood, water, and ground, and conducted on principles so refined as 
those given as Chinese by Sir William Chambers, appears very doubtful. With all this, 
it must be confessed, there is a distinctive difference between the Chinese style and 
every other, though to trace the line of demarcation does not appear j)racticable in the 
present state of our information on the subject. 

469. One of the earliest accounts of Chinese gardens was given by Pere le Comte, who, 
as well as Du Halde, had resided in the country as a missionary. " The Chinese," 
observes Le Comte {Lettre vi.), " appear still more to neglect their gardens than their 
houses. They would consider it as a want of sense to occupy their grounds only in 
parterres, in cultivating flowers, and in forming alleys and thickets. The Chinese, who 
value order so little in their gardens, still consider them as sources of pleasure, and 
bestow some expense in their formation. They form grottoes, raise little hills, procure 
pieces of rocks, which they join together with the intention of imitating nature. If tl: j 
can, besides these things, find enough of water to water their cabbages and legumes, 
they consider, that as to that material they have nothing more to desire, and content 
themselves with a well or a pond." Olof Toreen, a Swede, who visited China early in 
the eighteenth century, and has published an account of his travels, states, " that in the 
Chinese gardens are neither seen trees artificially cultivated, nor alleys, nor figured par- 
terres of flowers ; but a general confusion of the productions of verdant nature." ( Voyage 
to Osbek, the East Indies and China, 8vo. 1761.) 

470. The imperial gardens of China are described in the Lettres Edifiantes et Cu7^ieuses, 
&c. in a letter dated Pekin, 1 743. It was translated by Spence, under the fictitious title 
of Sir Plarry Beaumont, whom Lord Walpole describes as having " both taste and zeal 
for the present style ;" and was published in Dodsley's collection in 1761. These gar- 
dens are described to be of vast extent, containing 200 palaces, besides garden-buildings, 
mock towns, villages, all painted and varnished, artificial hills, valleys, lakes, and canals ; 
serpentine bridges, covered by colonnades and resting-places, with a farm and fields, 
where his imperial majesty is accustomed to patronise rural industry, by putting his hand 
to the plough, or, as it has been otherwise expressed, " by playing at agriculture once a- 
year." Views of tliese gardens, taken by native artists for the Chinese missionaries, were 
sent to Paris about the middle of the eighteenth centur}^, and engravings from them were 
published by permission of the court in 1788, in a work entitled Recueils des Plans des 
Jnrdins Chinois. We have examined the plan of the imperial gardens [fig. 36.) with the 
utmost care, but confess we can see nothing but a mass of buildings generally forming 
squares or courts, backed by peaked hills, and interspersed with pieces of water, sometimes 
evidently artificial, and at other times seemingly natural. The first jet-d'ean ever seen 
in China v/as formed in the imperial gardens by Pere Benoit, who went to Pekin as 
astronomer. The emperor was transported with it, and instead of astronomer, made the 
reverend father the fountaineer. 

471. But the national taste of the Chinese in gardening must have had something 
characteristic in it, even to general observers ; and this character seems to have been 
obscurely known in Europe from the verbal accounts of Chinese merchants or travellers, 
in the beginning of the seventeenth century. A proof of this is to be found in Sir 
William Temple's Essay, written about the middle of the seventeenth century. Hq 
informs us, tliat though he recommends regularity in gardens, yet, for any thing he 

H 3 



102 



HISTOEY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



S6 




knows, there may be more beauty in such as are wholly iiregular. " Something of this 
sort," he says, " I have seen in some places, but heard more of it from others, who have 
lived much among the Chinese." Referring to their studied irregularity, he adds, 
" When they find this sort of beauty in perfection, so as to hit the eye, they say it is 
sharawadgi, an expression signifying fine or admirable." It appears from tins passage, 
that the Chinese style had not only been known, but imitated in England, nearly a cen- 
tury previous to the publication of the Jesuits Letters, and, at least, sixty years 
before Kent's time. Sir William Temple retired to East Sheen in 1680, and died in 
the year 1700. 

472. Sir William Chaynbers's account of the Chinese style has given rise to much dis- 
cussion. Tins author, afterwards surveyor-general, resided some time at Canton, and 
after returning to England, gave a detailed account of Chinese gardening ; first in the 
appendix to his Designs of Chinese Buildings, &c. in 1757, and subsequently at greater 
length in his Dissertatioii on Oriental Gardenijig, in 1772, and commended, as G. Mason 
observes, by so good a judge as Gray. Sir William Chambers avows that his 
information is not derived entirely from personal examination, but chiefly from the con- 
versation of a Chinese painter ; and it has been very reasonably conjectured, that he lias 
drawn, in some cases, on his own imagination, in order to enhance the reader's opinion 
of Chinese taste, with the laudable end of improving that of his own country. In his 
essay of 1757, which was published in French as vv'ell as English, and was soon trans- 
lated, as Hirschfield informs us, into German, he says, " the Cliinese taste in laying out 
gardens is good, and what we have for some time past been aiming at in England." 
With the exception of their formal and continual display of garden-buildings, and their 
attempts of raising characters, not only picturesque and pleasing, but also of horror, 
surprise, and enchantment, Sir William's directions, especially in his second work, will 
apply to the most improved conceptions of planting, and forming pieces of water, in the 
modern style ; or, in other words, for creating scenery such as will always resemble, and 
often might be mistaken for that of nature. But whatever may be the merits of the 
Chinese in this art, it may reasonably be conjectured, that their taste for picturesque 
beauty is not so exactly conformable to European ideas on that subject as Sir William 
would lead us to believe. Their decorative scenes are cai-ried to such an extreme, so 
encumbered with deceptions, and what we would not hesitate to consider puerilities, and 
there appears throughout so little i-eference to utility, that the more mature and chastened 
taste of Europeans cannot sympathise with them. Chinese taste is, indeed, altogether 
peculiar; it is undoubtedly perfectly natural to that people, and therefore not to be 
subjected to European criticism. 

473. Lord WalpoWs opinion of the Chinese gardens is that they " are as whimsically 
irregular as European gardens were formerly uniform and unvaried ; nature in them is 
as much avoided as in those of our ancestors." In allusion to those of the emperor's 
palace, described in the Lettres Edifiantes, he says, *' this pretty gaudy scene is the work 



Book I, 



GARDENING IN CHINA. 



103 



of caprice and whim ; and when we reflect on their buildings, presents no image but 
that of unsubstantial tawdriness." 

474. Lord Macartney* s remarks on these gardens show, that at least picturesque 
scenes are seen from them. " The view," he says, " from one qf the imperial gardens 
might be compared to that from the terrace at Lowther Castle." This view is 
altogether wild and romantic, and bounded by high uncultivated mountains, with no 
other buildings than one or two native cottages. In what degree of estimation such a 
view is there held does not, however, appear ; it would be too much to conclude that, 
because it existed in that situation, it had been created or left on purpose, or was con- 
sidered as eminently beautiful or desirable. " It is our excellence," observes his 
lordship, " to improve nature ; that of a Chinese gardener to conquer her : his aim is to 
change every thing from what he found it. A waste he adorns with trees ; a desert he 
waters with a river or a lake ; and on a smooth flat are raised hills, hollowed out valleys, 
and placed all sorts of buildings. " 

475. The description of the gardens of Woo-yiien in Ellis'* Journal of the late 
Embassy to China, 1818, is as follows : " We stopped opposite the gardens of Woo-yuen, 
which, after a little hesitation on the part of the mandarins, Ave were allowed to visit. 
Although now much neglected, they were interesting as a specimen of Chinese garden- 
ing. The Chinese are certainly good imitators of nature, and their piles of rocks are 
not liable to the same ridicule as some modern Gothic ruins in England ; indeed they 
are works of art on so great a scale, that they may well bear a rivalship with the original : 
the buildings are spread over the ground without any attention to effect being produced 
by their exterior, unconnected with the scenery ; the object seems to be to furnish pre- 
texts for excursions within the enclosure, which is so disposed as to appear more 
extensive than it really is. Much labor has been expended upon the walks, which, in 
places, resemble mosaic work. These gardens were a favorite resort of Kien-long, 
whose dining-room and study were shown to us ; in the latter was a black marble slab, 
with a poem inscribed upon it, composed by his majesty, in praise of the garden. The 
characters were particularly well executed. The trees in tlie garden were chiefly the 
olea fragrans and some planes." 
(Vol. i. p. 433.) 

476. The villa of Puanke-qua, belonging 
to one of the principal hong merchants 
of Canton, is interesting as a specimen 
of Chinese taste in laying out grounds ; 
the great object is to produce as much 
variety as possible within a small 
space." (Vol. ii. p. 186.) 

477. The Fatee gai-dens at Canton, be- 
longing to rich individuals, and the resort 
of the fashionables, " consist of straight 
walks lined with flower-pots, contain- 
ing the curious and beautiful plants of 
the country." (Vol ii. p. 186.) 

478. A plan of a Chinese gar- 
den and dwelling, executed at 
forty-five leagues from the city 
of Pekin, was taken by Storn- 
berg, a gardener, who was se- 
veral years in that country, and 
is given by Kraft in his Plans, 
(Flans, &c., partie 2. pi. 95.) 
If this plan (fg. 37.) is really 
correct, it seems to counte- 
nance the idea of the mod-ern 
style being taken from that of 
the Chinese. The house of the 
mandarin, its proprietor, con- 
tains an entrance under a tri- 
umphal arch (a), barracks or 
offices (h), fountains (c), en- 
trance-gate for dignified persons 
(d), vases of odors (e), officers' 
dwellings (/), residences of those 
in waiting {g\ fountains (h), 
residence of the proprietor (i), 
apartments for mandarin ladies 
(k), triumphal arch (I), bagnio 
and room for sports (m), a pa- 

H 4 




101 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



viKon on a rock building for the practice of archery (o), green-house (p), pleasure- 
house (y), and a rock under which the river passes and forms a waterfall (r). {Krajiy 
p. 70.) 

479. Horticulture in China is generally considered to be in an advanced state ; but 
we have no evidence that the Chinese are acquainted with its scientific principles, and 
especially with the physiology of plants. The climate and soil of so immense a 
tract as China, are necessarily various ; and equally so, in consequence, the vegetable pro- 
ductions. Besides the fruits peculiar to the country, many of which are unknown to the 
rest of the world, it produces the greater part of those of Europe ; but, excepting the 
oranges and pomegranates, they are much inferior. The orange was introduced to Eu- 
rope from China, and the pine-apple to China from South America, by the Portuguese in 
the sixteenth century. 

The Chinese are supposed to have a number of culinary vegetables peculiar to themselves. They are said 
to cultivate edible plants, even in the beds of their rivers and lakes, and among others, the p'-tsi or water- 
chestnut {Scirpus tuberosus, Rox.), which yields tubers of a farinaceous quality and agreeable taste. The 
convolvulus reptans {Lour.) grown in ditches, amaranthus polygamus, and tristis, Sinapis Pekinensis, and 
some others used as pot-herbs. They have also a particular variety of brassica, used both as a salad and 
in a boiled state. {AbePs Journal.) Le Comte, Du Halde, Eckeborg, and others, praise the manner in 
which the Chinese cultivate culinary vegetables, which, they say, are abundant in their gardens, and form 
the chief part of the nourishment of the lower orders. They add, however, that the greater part of their 
fruits do not equal ours ; either because the Chinese are ignorant of the art of improving them, or because 
they do not give themselves the trouble. Their grand object is to cultivate corn and rice; and they are 
ignorant of botany. One of the authors of these remarks. Captain Eckeberg, has published, in the 
transactions of the academy of sciences of Stockholm, a treatise on the rural economy of this people ; and 
Count Lasteyrie has collected what is known on the same subject. The British works, published after 
ditterent embassies, contain accounts of their modes of propagation, by inarching and local radication ; 
of their dwarfing forest-trees, producing double-flowers, monstrous unions, and various other exertions, 
in the way of conquering nature. It is a singular fact, that with aU this practical skill, the Chinese do 
not appear to be acquainted with the art of grafting, otherwise than by approach, nor with inoculation. 
John Livingston, a corresponding member of the horticultural society at Macao, considers the Chinese 
as entirely ignorant of the science both of horticulture and agriculture. They make no attempts to im- 
prove on old practices, or spread newly introduced plants, proofs of which are given by referring to the 
Fekin Gazette, " an official publication in wliich all notices relative to any variation or change in 
their practices are made public," and to the circumstance of " potatoes and cabbages having been 
cultivated in the neighbourhood of Macao for upwards of half a century, and although highly prolitable 
and productive, yet the method of growing them has not reached Canton, perhaps has not even ex- 
tended five miles." It is impossible, this writer observes, to establish any distinction between the 
agriculture and horticulture of the Chinese merely from the plan of cultivation, the same groimd being 
alternately cropped with grain and culinary esculents. 

The culture of flowers and plants qf ornatnent seems very general in China. The beautiful varieties 
of camellia, azalea, rosa, chrysanthemum, and of various other genera, are well known natives of that 
country. 

480. Hot-houses are not unknown in China. Wathen (^Journal of a voyage to China, &c. 
1814.) describes the villa (Jig. 38.) of Pon-qua-qua, a retired merchant and mandarin, 
as containing a green-house (a), an aviary (6), a banquetting room open on one side ; a 




garden with the walks bordered with porcelain pots of orange-trees and camellias ; and 
an immense Banyan-tree {Ficus Benghalensis). 

Sect. III. Gardening in Anglo^North America, or the United States and British 

Provinces. 

481. The use of gardens in Korth America is very general, though chiefly confined to 
horticultural or useful productions. B. M'Mahon, in his American Kalendar, says, 
« America has not yet made that rapid progress in gardening, ornamental planting, and 
fanciful rural designs, which might naturally be expected from an intelligent, happy, and 
mdependent people, possessed so universally of landed property, unoppressed by taxation 
or tithes, and blest with consequent comfort and affluence." {Pref.) 

M'Mahon is a seedsman in Philadelphia, and " has connected with the seed-trade a botanical, agricul- 
tural, and horticultural book-store." His work is the first of the kind which has appeared in America 
and includes every department to be found in our kalendars. Ample instructions are given for growing 
*^ ?ielon and other delicate fruits, and also for the forcing departments both of thi flowe? 

and kitchen gardens ; but we cannot gather from the work any thing as to the extent of American prac- 
tice m these particulars. From this, and the few other American books on gardening, we submit what we 
have been able to glean, as to the state of horticulture, botanic gardening, and timber-tree^ 



Book I. GARDENING IN ANGLO>NORTH AMERICA. 



105 



482. Horticulture. — William Coxe of Burlington in New Jersey, in his View of the 
Cultivation of Fruit-trees (Philad. 1817), is of opinion, " that the numerous varieties of 
American apples have proceeded from seeds brought there by their European ancestors ; 
and that none of the Indian orchards which have been discovered in America, are more 
ancient than the first settlement of the Europeans on this continent." 

The middle states of America, he says, " possess a climate eminently favorable to the production of the 
finer liquor and table apples ; and the limits of that district of country which produces apples of the due 
degree of richness and flavor for both purposes are the Mohawk river in New York, and the James river in 
Virginia. Apples grow well in other places, but that exquisite flavor for which the Newton pippin and 
Esopus Spitzenberg are so much admired, and which has given such high reputation to the cyder from the 
Hewe's crab, the white crab, the grey-housc, winesop, and Harrison, can only be found within the limits 
here described. Cold and heat, are equally necessary to the production of a fine apple, and neither must 
predominate in too great a degree. Some European cyder fruits have recovered their reputation by being 
transplanted to the more genial climate of America, where the grov/th of trees compared with Europe is as 
five to three." 

The peach is a native of Sovth America ; in North America, Coxe says, it is subject to a malady, which 
no remedy can cure, nor cultivation avert. This is a worm which destroys the roots and trunk of the tree. 
The only paHiative is fresh soil. {Preface, p. 11.) 

Plums and cherries are natives of the United States, and wood-cuts are given in Coxe's work of the prin- 
cipal sorts of these fruits commonly cultivated, and which are chiefly those well known in Britain. 

The vine. Dr. Dean observes {New England Georgical Dictionary, in loco Massachusetts, 1191), " may, 
without doubt, be cultivated in every latitude of the North American states. They are wild in the neigh- 
bourhood of Boston." He has known a good wine made from the juice of wild purple grapes j and seen 
excellent eating grapes produced in the American gardens, without any extraordinary culture. 

The melon grows to a large size in the southern states, and ripens even in New England in the common 
way of planting, but is not so large nor so early as when raised on dung. 

Culinary vegetables. Kingdom states {America, &c. 1820), grow in the same perfection as in England, ex- 
cepting the cauliflower and some species of beans. Water-melons, musk-melons, squashes, sweet potatoes, 
cucumbers, &c. arrive at great perfection. 

Those who wish to grow sugar must go south of 29|° ; cotton, south of 36° ; and for com the best latitude is 
from 36° to 41°. 

The first work after a settlement is to plant a peach and apple orchard, placing the trees alternately. The 
peach, being short-lived, is soon removed, and its place covered by the branches of the apple-trees. {King- 
dom, 5.) The seeds of pumpkins are scattered in the field, when planting the corn, and no further trouble is 
necessary than throwing them into the waggon when ripe. They weigh from thirty to forty pounds each ; 
and cattle and hogs are fond of them. In Maryland, Virginia, and the neighbouring provinces of the United 
States, peaches are propagated invariably from the stone. The fruit is used for feeding hogs, and distilled for 
brandy. In Virginia, the prickly pear abounds in the woods, and is reckoned a cooling, grateful fruit 
{Braddick in Hoi-t. Trans, vol. ii.) 

In Lower Canada, the fruit is neither remarkable for goodness nor cheapness, except strawberries and 
raspberries, which are very abundant. Apples and pears are sent from Montreal to Quebec, and sell for 
about the same price as in England. Oranges and lemons are imported from England, and are sometimes 
very scarce. Gooseberries, plums, and melons are plentiful ; but currants, cherries, walnuts, and filberts 
are scarce. {Kingdom, 97.). 

Upper Canada is very fertile. At Montreal are extensive orchai-ds. Here the sugar-maple is abundant, 
and pierced for sugar when the sap begins to rise. A tree twenty inches in diameter will yield five pounds 
of sugar annually, sometimes for thirty years. Pot and pearl ashes are made from the felled trees. Beech 
yields at the rate of 2191bs. for lOOOlbs. of ashes, and most other trees less. Sun-flowers are abundant, but 
oil is not extracted from them as in the United States. {Kingdom, 92.) A great variety of fruit-trees may be 
had at the nursery-gardens at Montreal. Tlie apples from thence are considered superior to any other. The 

E each-trees are introduced into the orchards from York to Amherstburgh. Cherries, walnuts, chestnuts, 
ickery, hazel, and filbert nuts grow wild ; as do gooseberries, strawberries, blueberries, cranberries, and 
black currants. 

483. Botanic gardening. — America is rich in botany, especially in trees. Dr. Hosack, 
in the preface to his Hortus Elginensis, observes, " that, although much has been done by 
the governments of Great Britain, France, Spain, Sweden, and Germany, in the investi- 
gation of the vegetable productions of America ; although much has been accomplished 
by the labors of Catesby, Kalm, Wangenheim, Schoepf, Walter, and the Michaux ; 
and by our countrymen, Clayton, the Bartrams, Calden, Muhlenburg, Marshall, Cutler, 
and the learned P. Barton of Pennsylvania, much yet remains to be done in this western 
part of the globe." There were in America, at an early period, men who recommended 
the necessity of instituting botanic gardens, as Lieutenant-Governor Calden and Dr. 
Middleton of New Yorkj in 1769; and, upon the revival of the medical school in 
Columbia college, in 1792, a professor of botany was appointed, and Dr. Mitchel was 
appointed professor. Dr. Hosack succeeded Dr. Mitchel, and the result was, first, the 
latter professor's establishing a botanical garden at his own expense, and afterwards 
government purchasing it of him for the benefit of the medical schools of New York, and 
it is now known as the New York Botanic Garden. 

484. The botanic garden of Neio York contains twenty acres ; the first catalogue was 
published in 1806, and the second, in 1811, containing nearly 4000 species. {Statement 
8iC. as to the Elgin Botanical Garden, by Dr. Hosack, Neio York, 1811.) 

485. The first American Flora appeared in 1816, by F. Pursh, a German botanist, 
who spent nearly twelve years beyond the Atlantic in botanic travel, and in the manage- 
ment of two botanic gardens, the last that of Elgin. From the preface to this work we 
are enabled to give the names of the principal botanic gardens in the United States. In 
British America there are none. The* first gardens Pursh saw were the old established 
gardens of M. Marshall, author of a small treatise on the forest-trees of North America. 
These were rather on the decline. The botanic garden of J. and W. Bartram on tlie 
banks of the Delaware, near Philadelphia, was founded by their father under the patron- 
age of Dr. Fothergill. W. Bartram is author of travels in North and South Carolina, 



106 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I 



and of an introduction to botany. The garden of W. Hamilton, Esq. of Woodlands, is 
one of the best in America ; that of Elgin has been already mentioned. 

486. Forest-trees. — Michaux's work on the trees of America is the fruit of two voyages, 
in 1 802 and 1 806. The number of trees which in America grow above thirty feet high, 
which he has seen and describes, is one hundred and thirty-seven, of which eighty-five 
are employed in the arts. In France there are only thirty-seven which rise to that height, 
of which eighteen serve to form timber-plantations, and of these seven only are employed 
in civil and marine constructions. Michaux acknowledges his obligations to W. Hamil- 
ton, " an enlightened amateur of the sciences and arts," who pleases himself in uniting 
at liis magnificent residence at Woodlands, near Pliiladelphia, not only all the useful 
vegetables of the United States, but those of every country of the world, which may oflfer 
any interest in the arts or in medicine. (Litroduction, 10.) From the Transactions of 
the Society of Agriculture of New York, we learn, that hawthorn hedges and other live 
fences are generally adopted in the cultivated districts ; but the time is not yet arrived 
for forming timber-plantations. 

Sect. IV. Gardening in Spanuih N^orth America, or Mexico. 

487. The gardening of the Mexicans is described by the Abb^ Clavigero, in his History of 
Mexico. According to this author, when the Mexicans were brought into subjection to the 
Calhuan and Tepanecan nations, and confined to the miserable little islands on the lake, 
they ceased for some years to cultivate the land, because they had none until necessity and 
industry together taught them to form moveable fields and gardens, which floated on the 
waters of the lake. The mode of forming these of wicker-work, water-plants, and mud, 
may be easily conceived. The boat or basis is commonly eight perches long by three 
broad. They first cultivated tlie maize and useful plants only, but afterwards " there 
were among them gardens of flowers and odoriferous plants, which were employed in 
the worship of the gods, and served for the recreation of the nobles." At present they 
cultivate flowers, and every sort of garden-herbs upon them, all of which thrive sur- 
prisingly. In the largest gardens there is commonly a little tree, and even a little hut 
to shelter the cultivator, and defend him from rain or the sun. "When the owner of a 
garden wishes to change his situation, to remove from a disagreeable neighbour, or come 
nearer to his own family, he gets into his little vessel, and by his own strength alone, if 
the garden is small, or with aid, if it be large, he tows it after him, and conducts it where 
he pleases with the little tree and hut on it. That part of the lake where the gardens 
are, is a place of infinite recreation, where the senses receive the highest possible grati- 
fication. The Mexicans were extremely well skilled in the cultivation of kitchen and 
other gardens, in which they planted, with great regularity and taste, fruit-trees, and 
medicinal ' plants and flowers. The last of these were much in demand, bunches of 
flowers being presented to persons of rank, kings, lords, and ambassadors, and also used 
in temples and private oratories. 

488. The royal gardens of Mexico a nd Tezcuco, and those of the Lords of Iztapalapan and 
Huantepec, have been much celebrated. One, belonging to the Lord of Iztapalapan was 
laid out in four squares, and planted with great variety of trees, through which a number 
of roads and paths led, some formed by fruit-bearing trees, and others by espaliers of 
flowering shrubs and aromatic plants. It was watered by canals, and had in the centre 
a fish-pond four hundred yards in diameter, where innumerable water-fowl resorted. 
Hernandez says, this garden contained many foreign trees. The garden of Huantepec 
was six miles in circumference, watered by a river, planted with numerous species of trees 
and plants beautifully disposed, along with pleasure-houses. Many foreign plants were 
cultivated, and evei-y kind of medicinal plant belonging to that clime, for the use of the 
hospital which they founded tliere. Cortez, in a letter to Charles V. in 1522, told him 
that this garden was the most extensive, the most beautiful, and most delightful which 
had ever been beheld. Bernard Dias and other authors concur in the same opinion. 
The Mexicans paid great attention to the preservation of woods, which supplied them 
with timber and fuel. {^History of Mexico, i. 379.) 

489. A conventual garden at Mexico is described by Humboldt {Voyage, &c. liv. iii. 
chap. 8.), in 180S, as one of the finest he had ever seen. The convent was a very pic- 
turesque building, and in the garden were inunense groves of orange-trees, peaches, 
apples, cherries, and otiier fruit-trees of Europe. 

490. The royal botanic garden, in the promenade (cowrs) of the vice-king's palace, Hum- 
boldt describes as small, but extremely rich in vegetables, rare, or interesting for industry 
and commerce. 

491. The floating gardens, or chinam jyas, mentioned by the Abb^ Clavigero, he says still 
exist. They are of two sorts ; the one mobile and blown here and there by the winds, and 
the others fixed and united to the shore. The former alone merit the appellation of floating, 
and they are diminishing day by day. He assigns to them the same origin as the Ahhe 
Clavigero j but thinks it probable that nature also may have suggested the first idea, 



Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH COLONIES, &c. 107 



and gives instances of small pieces of surface netted with roots and covered with plants being 
detached from the marshy shores of other American lakes, and floating about in the water. 
The bean, pea, apple, artichoke, cauliflowers, and a great variety of other culinary plants 
are cultivated on them. In the ninth chapter of Humboldt's work will be found an 
ample account of the useful plants of Mexico. It is singular, that the potatoe, which 
one would have imagined should have been introduced from the southern continent to 
Mexico, should have been first carried there from Old Spain. It is not, Humboldt 
says, a native of Peru, nor to be found between latitudes 12° and 50°. In Chili it has 
been cultivated for a long series of ages, where there is a wild sort with bitter roots. 

' Sect. V. Gardening in South America. 

492. Gardening ajypears to be little known in South America, excepting in the Euro- 
pean colonies. It is the country, however, of some of our most valuable culinary pro- 
ductions, as the potatoe ; of the most exquisite fruits, as the pine-apple and Cheremoya / 
and of many of our most beautiful flowers, as the dahlia. There is a species of Chili 
pine (Araucaria), which is considered the largest tree in the world : it has an erect stem, 
and the seeds are a farinaceous food, and as large as chestnuts. This tree, it is thought, 
may yet be acclimated, and clothe our northern mountains. The whole of South 
America is rich in vegetable productions, many of which are unknown in Europe ; but 
there are now a number of collectors in that country, for the purposes of botany and 
horticulture. 

Sect. VI. Gardening in the British Colonies, and in other Foreign Settlements of 
European Amotions. 

493. Gardeni^ig cannot be displayed to much advantage in distant and precarious ter- 
ritorial ap2)endages, where the object is most frequently to acquire the means of return- 
ing to garden at home. In permanent settlements, however, such as the Cape of Good 
Hope, Van Diemen's Land, &c. gardening will be resorted to as an art of necessity. 

494. The gardening of any colony will always resemble that of the parent country. It 
is evident, that wherever a people establish themselves, they will also establish, in part, 
their arts or manners. All colonists carry with them the seeds of the useful vegetables, 
which they have been accustomed to cultivate ; and subsequently they attempt to intro- 
duce the more delicate or luxurious fruits and flowers. 

495. Tlie Euro2)ean governments have established colonial botanic gardens wherever their 
utility has been made apparent ; and in this, as well as in the ornamental part of garden- 
ing, it is but fair to state, that the French and Dutch have been before England in point of 
time, as well as in point of excellence. The Dutch had a fine government garden at the 
Cape of Good Hope, and another at Batavia in the middle of the seventeenth centuiy. 
The French had a garden in Cayenne, in 1 630. The first colonial botanic garden esta- 
blished by the English, was that of Jamaica, about 1780. It must also be confessed, 
that our botanic gardens have hitherto been less useful to horticulture than the govern- 
ment or residence-gardens, and tlie botanical gardens of the Dutch ; because in these 
last, useful plants are the principal obic-cts ; whereas in ours, number of species is, or 
seems to be, most attended to. Horticulture, in civilised countries, may be deemed suf- 
ficiently protected and encouraged by its own immediate contributions to the wants and 
dGsires of mankind ; but in barbarous countries every art requires protection at the first 
establishment of a colony. Perhaps there is no way in which man in a civilised state 
can promote the progress of rude society more, than by introducing new and useful fruits 
and herbs. The numerous vegetables now used in the domestic economy of civilised 
society have been collected from various and opposite parts of the globe. Where would 
be the enjoyments of a European table, if they depended on our native herbs and fruits ? 
Europe in this respect is under great obligations to Persia and Egypt ; and these coun- 
tries, and many others of Asia, Africa, and America, are now in their turn receiving 
great benefits from the colonies of Europeans who settle on them. 

496. As examples of the use cf gardening in colonisation, we may refer to the Cape of 
Good Hope, which possesses at present all the best culinary productions and fruits of 
Europe and Asia. Till 1660, that the Dutch established a colony there, it had no 
other fniits than the chestnut, a nut like the wild almond, and what is called the wild plum ; 
and no culinary plants but a sort of vetch. The first shipment of convicts was landed 
at Sidney Cove in 1789, and since that period, every horticultural product of Britain has 
been introduced there, and cultivated with one or two exceptions, in the greatest per- 
fection. 

497. The influence of gardening comforts, together with instruction, on uncivilised coun- 
tries, both as to society and climate, and finally on the whole globe itself, cannot be foreseen. 
-The now trackless deserts of arid sand in Africa, may be destined at some future age to 
be watered and cultivated by the superfluous population of the other quarters of the 
world. Tlie evaporation and coolness produced by a surface cultivated chiefly by irri- 



lOS 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



gation, may effect a material change in the climate, and millions of human beings may 
live and exert their energies where civilised man at present scarcely dares to tread. 

498. Examples of British, Dutch, and French gardening, in different colonies, will be 
found in the West Indies, East Indies, Ceylon, Cape of Good Hope, New South 
Wales, Van Diemen's Land, Cayenne, and Malta. 

499. West India Islands. The native products of these islands are various and ex- 
cellent, and they have been greatly increased by fruits and spices, introduced from the 
East Indies and other places. Among these it may be sufficient to mention the pine- 
apple, bread-fruit, mangostan, durion and cinnamon. There is a large botanic garden 
at St. Vincents, and others at Trinidad and Martinique, supported by their respective go- 
vernments. There was formerly one of seventy acres in Jamaica, of which some particulars 
deserve here to be recorded. " Tlie botanic garden of Jamaica was originally begun by 
J. Hinton, Esq., and afterwards bought by government, and enlarged so as to contain 
seventy acres. One of the objects of its establislunent was to preserve, without artificial 
means, the production of various climates. Such a project could only be executed in a 
tropical latitude, where the various elevations of tlie ground would regulate the required 
temperature. The site chosen for this purpose is about seven miles from Kingston, 
on the side of the Liguanea mountain, the summit of which is 3600 feet above tlie level 
of the sea. Here, ascending from the base, are found the productions of the various 
countries of the earth ; every change of situation represents a change of latitude, and the 
whole surface of the mountain may be clothed with the appropriate vegetations of every 
climate, from the pole to the equator. By means of this noble and useful establishment, 
the vegetable productions of various climes have been naturalised to the soil, and the 
plantations of Jamaica have been enriched with many valuable trees, shrubs, and plants, 
which were heretofore unknown in the island ; of these may be mentioned cinnamon, 
mangostan, mangoes, sago, bread-fruit, star-apple, camphor, gum-arabic, sassafras, &c. 
introduced from a French ship captured in 1782." [Edwards's Jamaica, 188.) In tlie 
year 1812, the whole was sold by the House of Assembly, for the small sum of 
4000/. to an apothecary in Kingston. It is impossible to avoid regretting such a cir- 
cumstance. Some account of the garden of St. Vincents will be found in the Traus- 
actions of the Society of Arts. Pine-apple plants, and also ripe fruits, are frequently sent 
from the West Indies to Europe, and arrive commonly in a fit state for planting and the 
dessert. 

500. East Indies. Bengal, the province longest under British subjection, resembles 
Egypt, in consisting of one immense plain of fertile soil, watered by the Ganges, which 
overflows it annually. Calcutta, the capital, has been subject to the English since 
1765, but it does not appear that much has been yet done by the East India Company, 
in the way of gardening. 

In the park at Barraclpoor, about sixteen miles from the capital, are the unfinished arches of a house 
begun by the Marquis of Wellesley, but discontinued by the frugality of the Court of Directors. There is 
also a menagerie, and not far distant the botanic garden, ^'e^y picturesque villas and cottages have 



may cite, as an examp 
39 



been formed by the British in most of the East Indian settlements. 
M'Kinnon's cottage {Jig. 3a\ in the neighbourhood 
of Madras. It is tfiatched with palm-leaves. 
Town-houses and large country-houses are com- 
monly flat-roofed; and the roof shaded by an 
awning, sers-es as a banquetting-place. 

The botanic garden of Calcutta was founded in 
1790, it is beautifully situated on the west b.ink of 
the river, and gives to one of its bendings, the 
name of Garden-reach. Above the garden there 
is an extensive plantation of teak, a tree not a 
native of this part of India, but which thrives well 
here. This garden was under the direction of Dr. 
Roxburgh, well known as the author of a work on 
the plants of Coromandol. Maria Graham {Let- 
ters from India) describes it as rich in palms, mi- 
mosas, and parasitic plants, and as neatly kept. 
Seeds from this garden are sent annually to Kew 
and other Europerai gardens ; as well as to various 
British settlements in the East, as Ceylon, <S:c. 

The orchard of Bengal is what chiefly contributes 
to attach the peasant to his native soil. He feels a 
superstitious veneration for the trees planted by his ancestors, and derives comfort and profit from their 
fruit. Orchards of mango-trees diversify every part of this immense country ; the palmira abounds in 
Bahar. The cocoa-nut thrives in those parts which are not remote from the tropic. The date-tree 
grows every where, but especially in Bahar. Plantations of the areca, or Bet&l-palm, are common in the 
central parts of the country. 

The culinary vegetables of Eui-oipe have all been introduced into Irtdia. Potatoes grown there are deemed 
equal in quality to those of England. Asparagus, cauliflower, pease, and other esculent plants, are raised, 
but tJiey are comparatively tasteless. 

The dessert of Earopea'ns in Calcutta, is distinguished by a vast profusion of most beautiful fruits, pro- 
cured at a very moderate expense, such as pine-apples, plaritains, mangoes, pomeloes or shadocks, melons 
of all sorts, oranges, custard-apples, guavas, peaches, and an endless variety of other orchard-fruits. 

Forest-trees do not naturally abound in Bengal ; the teak-tree {Tectona grandis) is the oak of the East, 
and grows in abundance in the hilly kingdoms of Birman and Begum, whence Calcutta is supplied for 
the purposes of naval architecture. Whether it shall be found worth while to cultivate this tree in 
Bengal, appears very doubtful. The bambo.o is the timber used in the general economy of the country. 
Hedges of native armed plants are occasionally used round gardens, orchards, and small enclosures. 




Book I. GARDENING IN THE BRITISH COLONIES, &c. 109 



501. Ceylon. All the productions of Hindostan are said to thrive here. General 
Macdowal, with the assistance of Dr. Roxburgh of Calcutta, made a valuable collec- 
tion of exotics, which he left at Columbo in 1804. He introduced peaclies, grafted 
and trained on espaliers, which bore at three years old. Gai'deners, in hot climates, 
Cordiner observes (^Account of Ceylon, vol. ii. p. 387.), are much perplexed by the trees 
which are deciduous in Europe, retaining their leaves all the year. Apples and aspara- 
gus succeeded well in this climate. The country is rich in botany, and abounds in 
palm-trees and plantains. Cordiner describes the cinnamon-groves as delightful. 
*' Nothing can exceed the luxury of riding through them in the cool hours of the morn- 
ing, when the air is cool and the sweetness of the spring blended with the glow of 
summer. Every plant in the garden is at all times clothed with fresh and lively green, 
and when the cinnamon laurels put forth their flame-colored leaves and delicate blossoms 
the scenery is exquisitely beautiful. The fragrance, however, is not so powerful as 
strangers are apt to imagine. The cinnamon-bark affords no scent when the trees are 
growing in tranquillity, and it is only in a few places that the air is perfumed with the 
delicious odor of other shrubs, the greater proportion of the flowers and blossoms of 
India being entirely destitute of that quality. Gentle undulations in the ground, and 
clumps of majestic trees, add to the picturesque appearance of the scene ; and a person 
cannot move twenty yards into a grove without meeting a hundred species of beautiful 
plants and flowers springing up spontaneously. Several roads for carriages make wind- 
ing circuits in the woods, and numerous intersecting foot-paths penetrate the deepest 
thickets. In sauntering amidst these groves, a botanist or a simple lover of nature may 
experience the most supreme delight which the vegetable creation is capable- of affording, 
and the zoologist will not be less gratified by the variety, the number, and the strange- 
ness of many of the animal kingdom." The Cingalese, as we have noticed (5.), lay 
claim to the situation of paradise, and one of the animals peculiar to the country, the 
Loris Ceylonicus, Fischeri ( fig. 40.), has been con- 40 

sidered by some philosophers as aboriginal man. 
(^Cordiner s Ceylon, vol. ii. p. 421.) The agricul- 
ture and gardening of the native Cingalese may be 
considered as one art, the objects of culture being 
edible roots, as the yam and grains, and spices, as 
the rice and pe])per. Ample details are given by 
Dr. Davy in his Account, <|-c. of Ceylon. 

502. Cape of Good Hope. A very fine garden 
was formed here by the Dutch about the middle of 
the seventeenth century, which is described in 
J^acJiman s Travels of the Jesuits (vol. i. let. 37.), 
and thus noticed by Sir William Temple. " It 
contained nineteen acres, was of an oblong figure, 
very large extent, and divided into four quarters, by 
long and cross walks, ranged with all sorts of 
orange-trees, lemons, limes, and citrons ; each of 
these four quarters is planted with the trees, fruits, 
flowers, and plants, that are native and proper to each of the four parts of the world ; 
so as in this one inclosure are to be found the several gardens of Europe, Asia, Africa, 
and America. There could not be, in my mind, a greater thought of a gardener, nor a 
nobler idea of a garden, nor better suited or chosen for the climate." Father de Premare 
says, " it is one of the most beautiful spectacles in the world ;" and indeed it is not easy 
for a mere European traveller to conceive the magnificence of palm-trees and plantains 
in their native climates. Whether this garden still exists, we have not been able to learn, 
hut as it doubtless contributed to introduce the horticultural productions of Europe to 
this part of the globe, it deserves to be remembered w^ith gratitude to its founders. 

The only indigenous fruits of the Cape, as already observed (496.), are the chestnut, and two stone fruits. 
Those that have been introduced into the colony are the grape, apple, cherry, plum, peach, nectarine, 
apricot, fig, orange, lemon, citron, pomegranate, almond, mulberry, guava, melon, and in short all the 
fruits esteemed by Europeans. No grapes of Europe are considered preferable to those of this colony. 
The colony of Capetown consists chiefly of vine-growers. They are of French extraction, possess farms 
of about«120 English acres, and the culture of the grape, with an elegant garden, generally occupies the 
whole. The lands are surrounded and divided by oak and quince hedges ; and the vines, cultivated as in 
France and Germany, have the appearance of plantations of raspberries. The Cape-market is richly 
supplied from these gardens. Between Table Bay and False Bay, are the two farms producing the Con- 
stantia wine. Here most of the above fruits thrive ; but gooseberries, currants, plums, and cherries do 
not succeed at all. 

The ornamental -plants of the Cape are well known ; to them we are indebted for almost all our heaths, 
ixias, diosmas, pelargonums, and many other genera. {Kingdom's British Colonies, p. 81.) 

503. New South Wales. There are two colonies established in this extensive territory 
and its adjoining islands; the one at Sidney, in 1788, and the other at Van Diemen's 
Land some years afterwards. The botanical riches of New South Wales, and the singu- 
lar aspect of the native plants, are well known. There are gardeners and botanists esta- 




ilO 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



blished in and near Sidney, who collect seeds for England, and other parts of Europe ; 
and it is in contemplation to establish a government botanic garden there, wliich will 
doubtless be of essential service in collecting and preserving native plants. The climate 
and soil of both settlements are favorable for horticulture. Potatoes, cabbages, carrots, 
parsnips, turnips, and every species of vegetable known in England, are produced 
in this colony. The cauliflower and broccoli, and tlie pea, arrive to greater perfection 
than in Europe ; but the bean and potatoe degenerate. Tlie climate is too hot for the 
bean, and the potatoe is only grown to advantage on new lands. 

New South Wales is famed for the goodness end variety of its fruits ; peaches, apricots, nectarines, 
oranges, grapes, pears, plums, figs, pomegi'anates, raspberries, strawberries, and melons of all sorts, attain 
the highest degree of maturity in the open air ; and even the pine-apple may be produced merely by the 
aid of the common glass frame. The climate of Port Jackson, however, is not altogether congenial to the 
growth of the apple, currant, and gooseberry, although the whole of these fruits are produced there, and 
the apple in particular in very great abundance ; but it is decidedly inferior to the apple of Britain. In 
Van Diemen's Land these fruits arrive at the greatest perfection; and as the climate of the country to 
the westward of the Blue Mountains is equally cold, they will, without doubt, attain there an equal 
degree of excellence. Of all the fruits which are thus enumerated, as being produced in the colony, the 
peach is the most abundant and the most useful. The dift'erent varieties which have been already intro. 
duced succeed one another in uninterrupted succession from the middle of November to the latter end of 
March, thus filling up an interval of more than four months, and affording a wholesome and nutritious 
article of food during one-third of the year. The tree thrives in all soils and situations, and its growth is 
80 rapid, that if you plant a stone, it will, in three years afterwards, bear an abundant crop. The fruit is 
the food of hogs, and when thrown into heaps, and allowed to undergo a proper degree of fermentation, 
is found to fatten them very rapidly. Cyder is also made from it ; and the lees also fatten hogs. 
(Kingdom's British Colonies, p. 264.) 

504. Van Diemens Land. This settlement does not contain either such a variety or 
abundance of fruit as the parent colony. The greater coldness of the climate 
sufficiently accounts for the former deficiency, and the recency of its establishment 
for the latter. The orange, citron, guava, loquat, pomegranate, and other fruits, which 
attain the greatest perfection at Port Jackson, cannot be produced here without having 
recourse to artifical means ; while others, as the peach, nectarine, grape, &c. only arrive 
at a very inferior degree of maturity. On the other hand, the apple, ciurant, and goose- 
berry, and indeed all those fruits for which the climate of New South Wales is too 
warm, are raised here without difficulty. {Kingdoins BriLish Colonies, p. 300. ) 

505. Cayenne. The French have a botanic garden, and several fine private gardens in 
the fertile colony of Cayenne. A very interesting account of this colony and its pro- 
ductions, natural and artificial, will be found in the Maison Rustique de Cayenne, 
published by Prefontaine in 1763. 

506. Malta. There is a small botanic garden on this island, supported by the govern- 
ment; and a late governor, Sir A. Balls, is said {Letters frorn Malta, 1817) to have 
established public gardens at every village for tlie employment of the poor, and the 
dissemination of useful seeds and plants among the farmers. No success attended this 
measure, from mismanagement, as it is said, in the curators. Great part of Malta was 
originally little better than a bare limestone-rock ; but tliis rock is full of cracks or 
vertical fissures, which are filled with calcareous soil washed down from the surface. 
This is dug up by the inhabitants, and re-spread over the surface ; and by means of 
irrigation and careful culture, the cotton-plant is grown as an article of general economy. 
In the more fertile part of the island, the orange-tribe are grown, and the Maltese, or 
red-fleshed orange, being a variety in much esteem, there is some demand for young 
trees as articles of foreign commerce. These trees are more scientifically trained and 
inoculated than those of Genoa. 



BOOK II. 

GARDENING CONSIDERED AS TO ITS PROGRESS AND PRESENT STATE UNDER DIFFERENT 
POLITICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL CIRCUMSTANCES. 

507. Every art must be affected hy the govei'nment under which it is exercised, either 
directly by its laws and institutions, or indirectly by the state of society as modified by 
tlieir influence. Gardening and agriculture differ from other arts in being still more 
affected by climates than by governments ; the influence of the latter is temporary or 
accidental, while that of the former is absolute and unchangeable. 

Chap. I. 

Gardening as affected by dfferent Forms of Governnu nt. Religions, and States of Society. 

508. jill governments may be reduced to tivo classes ; the primitive, or those where the 
people are governed by the will or laws of one or a few persons independenfly of the 



Book II. GARDENING UNDER DIFFERENT GOVERNMENXa Hi 



people ; and the rational, or those where they are governed by laws formed by a congre- 
gated assemblage of their own body. The former are calculated for rude and ignorant 
ages, when man, in a state of infancy, is governed by a king, as children are ruled by 
their parents; the latter, for more enliglitened times, when a peojile, like children 
arri>'ed at manhood, are capable of thinking for tliemselves and acting in concert. 

509. Society is eilliei' Jixed or free. In a fixed state, properly is licreditary, and one 
part of the people are perfectly independent, and the other dependent ; in a free state, 
men may belong to either class, according to their talents and the chances of life. In 
the former case, a man's condition in society depends on chance; in the latter on chance 
and skill combined. 

Sect. I. Gardening as needed hy diff'ercnl Forms of Government and Religion. 

510. Gardening as an art furnishing a j)art of the necessaries of life, may be pmctiscd 
under any form of government ; and wherever there is some liberty and security of 
property, its productions of necessity and comfort will ensure its use. Wherever 
civilised man has a house, he will always have an accompanying spot for roots and 
legumes ; and wherever he enjoys a farm, he will desire orchards or vineyards for 
fruits or wine, and copse-woods and forest-trees for fuel and timber: shelter, shade, 
and ornament will follow in due time. Under paternal forms of government, the taste 
of the monarch will generally be indiscriminately followed by such of his subjects as 
can indulge in it; and thus fashion will assume the province of reason. Such a 
government must be favorable or unfavorable to the arts, according to the taste of its 
chief. Monarchs generally love splendor more than elegance or use ; and in gardening 
are less likely to render its useful productions common among their subjects, than to 
increase the luxurious enjoyments of a few wealthy courtiers. This was exemplified in 
Louis XIV., who set the fashion not only in France but in Europe ; but never, in all 
probability, added a foot of ground to the garden of a single cottager, or placed an 
additional cabbage or potatoe on his table. Under republican governments, the first 
tendency of public feeling is to economy, and consequently to discourage those arts, or 
branches of arts, which minister to luxury. Gardening, under such circumstances, 
will be practised as a useful art, rather than one of design and taste ; and more for its 
substantial benefits and scientific objects, than for its extraordinary productions and 
peculiar gratifications. In the beginning of the French revolution, we find the com- 
pilers of the Encyclopcedia (see the vol. sur VAratoire et Jardinage) holding light the 
productions of forcing-houses, and the taste for double flowers. In America, the same 
simplicity of taste prevails, and also in Switzerland. 

' 511. Gardening in all its branches will be most advantageously displayed where the 
people are free. The final tendency of eveiy free government or society is to conglome- 
rate property in irregular masses, as nature has distributed all her properties ; and this 
irregularity is the most favorable for gardening both as a necessary, convenient, and 
elegant art. A republican or representative government and a commercial people may 
be reckoned a case highly favorable to the arts, of which Holland, Genoa, and Venice, 
formerly, and this country, at present, may be adduced as examples. Under mixed 
governments, where there is a representative body, and a first or executive magistrate, his 
taste will naturally have considerable influence on that of the peOple, as in Charles the 
Second's time in England; unless, as sometimes happens, the king or executive officer's 
taste is behind that of the people, in which case if the jjeople be free and enlightened, the 
arts of design and taste will, as they ought, become a republic, governed by its own 
laws. This last state has in some degree taken place in England since the accession of 
the Brunswick line, a fine illustration of which is given by Eustace {Tour, i. 608.), in 
comparing the taste exhibited in the royal palaces built or altered by this race, with that 
displayed in the residences of private English gentlemen since the revolution. 

512. The religion of a jyeoi^le is calculated to have some effect on their gardening. Those 
religions whose offices are accompanied by splendor and show, and which have numerous 
fetes and spectacles, will be favorable to the culture of flowers and plants of ornament; 
and those which forbid, at certain seasons, the use of animal food, will in some degree 
encourage the production of fruits and culinary vegetables. Where those alternating 
days of rest, of such antiquity in society and so conducive to the comfort of the 
laboring classes, (Grahanis Sabbath, Pref.) are to be spent wholly or partly in recreative 
enjoyments, encouragement will be given to public gardens of different kinds ; but 
where they are to be spent in a devotion founded in fear, and consequently gloomy and 
austere in its offices, such a religion cannot be said to encourage gardening. The 
religions of Italy and Scotland afford examples of each of these cases. 

Sect. II. Gardening as affected by dfferenl Slates of Society. 

513. In mixed states of society, where property is in few hands, and the population 
consists chiefly of lords of the soil and of slaves, the immensely rich may accomplish 



112 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



great designs, which shall astonish by their magnificence ; but taste among such a people 
is not likely to be refined ; works of art are only prized as marks of wealth ; their merit 
is not understood, and therefore, declining in interest after the first burst of surprise, they 
are soon viewed with indifference, and afterwards neglected or destroyed. Gardening, 
in such circumstances, is not likely to be improved in any of its branches, nor the use of 
gardens rendered general among any part of the population. Russia and Poland may 
be referred to as examples. 

514. In free states of society, where commerce is a leading jnirsnit, and propert}"^ is irregu- 
larly distributed among all classes ; where there are wealthy, rich, and thriving citizens, 
and where the comforts of life are known and relished by every class, gardening is likely 
to prosper in all its branches. The first-rate gardens of the wealthy will be an example 
to the rich, act as a premium to operative gardeners and artists, and encourage commer- 
cial gardens. The fine gardens displayed by the wealthy commercialist will act as a 
stimulus to the independent gentleman, too apt to be stationary in his improvements. 
The retiring tradesman will aspire to the same excellence as the merchant, and stimulate 
him in his turn. Cottage-gardens will be found real ornaments to the country, and 
supply useful food and agreeable fruits to the laboring class of society, who, as they 
become more enlightened, will prefer employing their leisure hours in this way, rather 
than in grosser pleasures or habits. This was formerly the state of Holland, and is, in 
some degree, at present, that of Britain. 

515. In free states of society, where agncultiire is chiefly folloioed, where property con- 
tinues much divided, and mankind, as will always be the case under such circumstances, 
are sober and rational, the useful branches of gardening will be generally practised 
and much improved. Wliolesome culinary vegetables will be enjoyed by all classes, 
and agreeable fruits by most of the inhabitants. Switzerland may be referred to as an 
example. 

516. Times of I'teace and commercial prosperity, under any government or state of society, 
will be more favorable than their op^iosites. The long and flourishing peace of the two first 
empires, Sir W. Temple observes, gave earlier rise and growth to learning and civilisation, 
and all the consequences of them, in magnificence and elegancy of building and gardening ; 
whereas Greece and Rome were almost perpetually engaged in quarrels and wars, either 
abroad or at home, and so were busy in actions done under the sun, rather than those under 
the shade. 

517. In mixed states of society, where a part of the population are privileged orders or 
hereditary proprietors, and the rest partly free and partly dependent, gardening is likely 
to be encouraged, more especially as an art of design. The proprietor of an entailed 
territory may be said to enjoy a sort of tangible immortality ; for by establishing in his 
person and estate a sort of local and corporeal connection between his ancestry and pos- 
terity, he sees neither beginning nor ending to his life and property. Such a being is 
anxious to distinguish his little reign by some permanent improvement ; and those which 
are most likely to answer his purpose will be building or gardening. However distant 
the expected benefits of his efforts, they are sure to be enjoyed ; and even if he exceeds 
his income, and contracts debts which he cannot pay, he knows that the labor and pro- 
perty of others, which he has embodied on his estate, will remain for its benefit, and that 
posterity will give him credit for zeal and ambition. But partial rights of this sort are 
much more injurious than beneficial to society, by giving the privileged party a legal 
title to contract debts which he is not able to pay. They are remains of those feudal 
or primitive institutions which, as mankind become enlightened, will be swept away, 
■with various other antiquated customs and absurdities, till man at last, whatever may be 
the circumstances of fortune or family under which he may be ushered into society, will 
be left to sink or rise in wealth and respect, according to his personal merits. Though 
the nobility of Britain have fewer exclusive privileges than those on the continent, yet 
there are not wanting instances of these privileges being abused ; and as an example of 
a man creating sumptuous gardens and forming fine collections of plants, without being 
able to pay for them, or liable to be put to personal inconvenience on that account, we 
may refer to George, the third duke of Marlborough. 



Chap. II. 

Gardening as affected by different Climates, Habits of Life, and Manners. 

518. All gardening is relative to climate and prirpose. It is obvious that gardening, in 
so far as respects the culture of plants, must differ in different climates, some of which 
will be found favorable for fruits, others for flowers, for culinary vegetables, and for 
timber-trees. Considered as an art of design, and as furnishing agreeable views, and 



Book II. 



IN DIFFERENT CLIMATES. 



lis 



scenes for exercise or recreation, it will be found to vary, not only with the climate, but 
with the surface of the country, and the habits and manners of society. 

Sect. I. Influence of Climate, in respect to Fruits, culinary Plants, Flowers, Timber-trees, 
and horticultural SlcUl. 

519. The gardening of every country must vary according to the climate ; and the 
practice of the art in one country cannot be -applied to any other, unless that other greatly 
resemble the former in climate. " Useful hints," Neill observes, " may no doubt be 
occasionally drawn from observing the modes in other countries. But it is scarcely 
necessary to remark, that in warm climates the practice must differ very widely from that 
wliich obtains in the temperate or the cold. In the former, the plants which require to 
be fostered in our stoves, either grow spontaneously, or are cultivated in the open fields, 
while the greater part of our common pot-herbs refuse to flourish in sultry regions. 
Again, the far northern countries of Europe, Sweden, Norway, and Russia, possess 
peculiarities of climate : snow covers the soil throughout the winter, and the summers are 
uninterruptedly bright and warm. Even in Britain, such is the difference of climate 
between the favored countries of tlie south-west of England, and that part of the island 
which lies to the north of the Cheviot Hills, that the same rules cannot be applied to both, 
u'ithout very considerable modification. The horticulture of the north of France, of 
Belgium, Holland, and Denmark, may, in general, be considered as approaching to 
that of South Britain ; and these countries may frequently afford mutual lessons to each 
other, each availing itself of the other's discoveries, and adopting its improvements." 

520. The finest climate for fruits, according to Sir William Temple, is that of Assyria, 
Media, and Persia. " Those noble fruits, the citron, the orange, and the lemon, are 
the native product of those noble regions, and though they have been from tlience trans- 
planted and propagated in many parts of Europe, yet they have not arrived at such per- 
fection in beauty, taste, or virtue, as in their native soil and climate." " Tlie reason of 
it can be no other than that of an excellent and proper soil being there extended under 
the best climate for the production of all sorts of the best fruits ; which seems to be from 
about twenty-five to about thirty-five degrees of latitude. Now the regions under tliis 
climate in the present Persian empire (which comprehends most of the other two, called 
anciently Assyria and Media,) are composed of many provinces, full of great and fertile 
plains, bounded by high mountains, especially to the north. ; watered naturally with many 
rivers, and those, by art and labor, divided into many more and smaller streams, which 
all conspire to form a country, in all circumstances, the most proper and agreeable for 
the production of the best and noblest fruits. Whereas, if we survey the regions of the 
western world, lying in the same latitude, between twenty-five and thirty-five degrees, 
we shall find them extend either over the Mediterranean sea, the ocean, or the sandy 
barren countries of Africa ; and that no part of the continent of Europe lies so southward 
as thirty-five degrees ; which may serve to discover the true reason why the fruits of the 
east have been always observed, and agreed to transcend those of the west." " Persia," 
Chardin observes, *' is the first country of the world for beautiful and superb flowers, 
properly so called." The same observation will apply to the whole of India ; but it is to 
be observed, that the flowers of these and other hot and dry countries are less odoriferous 
than in such as are temperate, and have a comparatively moist atmosphere. Moisture is 
favorable for conveying all odors, or, at least, for strengthening tlieir impression on the 
olfactory nerves. 

521. T'he most suitable climate for culinary or herbaceous vegetables is one temperate and 
moist ; and in this respect Holland, England, and the more temperate parts of France 
and Flanders are before the rest of Europe. Sir William Temple, who lived inuch in 
Holland and the adjoining countries, says gardening, in his time, was there in the greatest 
perfection. The second country in Europe for culinary gardening and flowers, appears 
to us to be Lombardy ; and considering that it is highly favorable for fruits, it may, as 
already observed, be considered the most propitious country in Europe for horticulture 
and ornamental gardening. There appear to be also corresponding situations in America, 
China, and New Holland, especially in the latter country which may one day become a 
second America. Wherever the fruit of the gooseberry and strawberry, and the bulb of 
the turnip and the head of the cabbage attain a good size, there the climate may be con- 
sidered highly favorable to the growth of kitchen-crops, most kernel-fruits of Europe, 
and florists' flowers ; but a warmer and drier climate is required for the richer stone- 
fruits, and most of those of the torrid zone. 

522. The most suitable climate for ^imSer-irm, when durability is an object, is a dry 
and rather elevated region. The resinous tribe produces the best timber in cold moun - 
tainous regions in every part of the globe. The oak, the chestnut, and the mahogany, 
delight in strong soils and moderate temperatures, such as skirt the bottoms of mountains. 
In general, no species of timber is found to be durable which has been producetl in low, 
moist, warm situations. 



114 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



PAftI I. 



523. Climates highly favorable for the productions of gardening, are often unfavorable 
to the jrrogress of the art. In Persia and some parts of America, where the finest peaches 
are produced, the art of grafting is unknown or not practised ; and, in general, in the 
hot countries, where melons, gourds, and other rapid-growing annuals so readily produce 
their fruit, the culture of culinary leaves and legumes is neglected. In the West India 
islands and great part of America, the gourd serves the purposes of the cabbage, turnip, 
lettuce, and spinach, and with garlic, onions, and yams, constitutes their principal culi- 
nary crops. Chardin, after enumerating the natural products of Persia, says, " we are 
not to conclude from thence that they have the finest gardens in the world ; on the 
contrary, by a very general rule, there, where nature has been most abundant and liberal 
in her productions, art is proportionably rude and unknown ; for, nature having gardened 
so well, almost nothing is left for art." 

524. Climates and soils comparatively unfavorable for fruits and plants, are naturally 
conducive to skill in gardening. A very variable and unsettled climate, Neill observes 
(Gen. Report of Scotland, ch. ix.), tends to call into action all the powers of the mind, 
and to produce habits of increasing attention ; and where a gardener is able to raise 
tolerable crops, both of the more tender fruits and vegetables, in climates and situations 
adverse to tlfe production of either, he has doubtless more real merit in accomplishing 
his object, even though the articles should be somewhat inferior in quality, than he who, 
in a propitious soil and climate, raises them to the utmost perfection. Yet the merits of 
such a gardener are often overlooked, and the master, through ignorance or indifference, 
or a niggai'dly penuriousness of approbation, receives that as an effort of mechanical 
routine, which is due to a rare union of science, skill, and indefatigable attention. 

525. The climate and country of England, Sir W. Temple considers as highly favor- 
aWe for gardening. " Perhaps few countries," he says, " are before us in the number 
of our plants, and I believe none equals us in a variety of fruits, which may be justly- 
called good, and from the earliest cherry and strawberry to the last apples and pears, 
may furnish every day of the circling year. For the taste and perfection of what we 
esteem the best, I may truly say that the French, who have eaten my peaches and grapes 
at Shene, in no very ill year, have generally concluded, that the last are as good as any 
they have eaten in France on this side Fontainbleau : and the first as good as any they 
have ate in Gascony ; I mean those which come from the stone, and are properly called 
peaches, not those which are hard, and are termed pavies ; for these cannot grow in too 
warm a climate, nor ever be good in a cold, and are better at Madrid than in Gascony 
itself. Italians have agreed, my white figs to be as good as any of that sort in Italy, 
which is the earlier kind of white fig there ; for in the latter kind and the blue, we cannot 
come near tlie warm climates, no more than in the Frontignan or Muscat grape. My 
orange-trees are as large as any I saw when I was young in France, except those of 
Fontainbleau, or what I have since seen in the Low Countries, except some very old 
ones of the Prince of Orange's ; as laden with flowers as can well be, as full of fruit as 
I suffer or desire them, and as well tasted as are commonly brought over, except the 
best sorts of Seville and Portugal. And thus much I could not but say in defence of 
our climate, which is so much and so generally decried abroad. — The truth is, our 
climate wants no heat to produce excellent fruits ; and the default of it is only the short 
season of our heats and summers, by which many of the latter are left behind, and im- 
perfect with us. But all such as are ripe before the end of August are, for aught I know, 
as good with us as any where else. This makes me esteem the true regions of gardens 
in England to be the compass of ten miles about London ; where the incidental warmth 
of air, from the fires and steams of so vast a town, makes fruits, as well as corn, a great 
deal forwarder than in Hampshire or Wiltshire, though more southward by a full degree." 

Sect. II. Influence of Climate and Manners on Gardening, as an Art of Design and Taste. 

526. Taste in gardening depeyids jointly on the state of society, and on climate. Since 
the introduction of the modern or natural style of gardening into Britain, it has been a 
common practice to condemn indiscriminately every other taste as unnatural and 
absurd. If by unnatural, an allusion is made to the verdant scenery of uncultivated 
nature, we allow that this is the case ; but we would ask, if for that reason, it follows 
that ancient gardens were not as natural and reasonable in their day, as any of the man- 
ners and customs of those times? Gardening, as a liberal art, is destined to create 
scenes, in which both beauty and use are combined ; admitting, therefore, that both 
styles are alike convenient, to say that the modern only is beautiful, is to say that' there 
is only one sort of beauty adapted to gardening ; or that there is no beauty but that of 
the picturesque ; or that all former ages, and every country, excepting Britain, is in a 
state of barbarism with respect to this art. If we take the term natural in a more exten- 
sive sense, and apply it to the climate, situation, condition, and manners of a people ; 
and if we allow these to be natural, why may not their gardening be natural, as well as 
their particular customs and dress ? The gardening we now condemn so unreservedly, 



Book II. 



IN DIFFERENT CLIMATES. 



IIS 



has subsisted, as we have seen, from the earliest ages in wanii climates ; and still pre- 
vails there, as well as in more temperate countries, whose inhabitants are not altogethel" 
ignorant of the modern style. It may, therefore, be said to have grown up with man- 
kind, and at all events must be perfectly suited to the wants and wishes of the inhabit- 
ants of such countries. 

527. The fitness and beauty of any style must depend on the purposes to which it is 
applied, and the kind of rural beauty already prevalent in the country of its adoption. 

The gardens of the east, we have every reason to believe, were used more as arbors or conservatories 
are in tnis country, than as places of exercise and active enjoyment. The object was repose, indolent re- 
creation, sedentary or luxurious enjoyment. To breathe the fresh air, shaded from a tropical sun ; to 
inhale the odor of flowers ; to listen to the murmur of breezes or fountains ; to the singing of birds ; or to 
observe the minute beauties of the surrounding foliage, were, and still continue to be, the ordinary class 
of beauties desired in an eastern garden, A higher and more voluptuous kind, consisted in using it as a 
banqueting-place, bath, or seraglio, as is still the case in l\ii-key and Persia ; in feasting the eyes with the 
sight of dancing beauties ; in ravishing the ears with concerts of vocal or instrumental music, and in tiring 
every sense with wine. Exercise was incompatible with that languor of body, which is attendant on a 
warm climate and a distant prospect ; inconsistent with security from wild beasts, and that privacy which 
selfishness or jealousy might dictate. " The Persians," Chardin observes, " do not v/alk in gardens so 
much as we do, but content themselves with a bare prospect, and breathing the fresh air. For this reason, 
they set themselves down in some part of the garden at their first coming in, and never move from their 
seats till they are going out of it." {Travels, ch. vi.) " Nothing surprises'the people of the East Indies so 
much as to see Eui-opeans take pleasure in exercise. They are astonished to see people walk who might 
sit still." {Kinder ley's Letters from the East Indies, p. 182.) Add to this, that the natural surface of warm 
countries is generally so parched with heat, as to be far less agreeable to look on than the verdure of a 
limited space, kept luxuriant by water. "Before the end of May," Russel remarks, " the whole country 
round Aleppo puts on so parched and barren an aspect, that one would scarcely think it capable of produc- 
ing any thing but the very few plants which still have vigour enough to resist the extreme heats." 
(Itmsel^s Aleppo, p. 13.) If to these we subjoin the use of frurt, and, what is common to every exertion of 
man, a desire of obtaining applause for the employment of wealth and skill, we shall include every object 
sought in an eastern garden. An eastern garden, therefore, appears to have been a collection of aU those 
beauties found scattered about in general nature, in order to adapt them to the use and enjoyment of 
man. 

528. The jylan of an eastern garden was well calculated to attain the ends in view. 
Moderate extent and immediate connection with the house, are necessaiy and obvious 
ingredients in their design. The square form was adapted for the enclosure as the sim- 
plest ; the trees ranged in rows, to afford continuity of shade ; jand the walks laid out 
parallel between them, to admit uninterrupted progress ; that walk parallel to, and close 
under the house, as a raised jilatform or terrace, to give elevation and dignity to the 
house, to give the master a commanding view of the garden, and to serve as a connecting 
link between art and comparative nature. By leaving open plots or squares of turf in 
the areas, formed by intersecting rows of trees, a free circulation of air would be faci- 
litated ; and the same object, as Pliny informs us, is promoted by the quincunx, which 
admits the breeze from every quarter of the compass more readily than any other dis- 
position. A picturesque or natural arrangement would have stagnated the air, and 
defeated one of the grand purposes in view. The same reasons would guide them in 
their choice of spreading broad-leaved trees; and to thicken their boughs, or deprive 
them of such branches as were too low, or tended to destroy the balance of the tree, the 
pruning-knife would be occasionally applied. Water in every form suggests the idea 
of coolness ; but agitated in cascades, fountains, or jets-d'eau, it is used to the best ad- 
vantage, and the heat of the atmosphere is moderated in proportion to the evaporation 
which takes place. In still ponds or basins it has another property, that of reflecting the 
objects around it. Buildings, as arbors, aviaries, covered seats, banqueting-houses, baths, 
and grottoes, would become requisite for their respective uses, and would abound in pro- 
portion to the wealth or rank of the owner. Fruit-trees would be introduced in ap- 
propriate situations for the sake of their fruit, and a choice of odoriferous flowers and 
shrubs would fringe the margin of the walks, to admit of a more easy inspection of their 
beauties, and nearer contact of their odors with the olfactory nerves ; they would also 
be disposed in greater profusion, in curious knots or parterres near to the house, or in 
front of the resting-places or banqueting-rooms. In time, even artificial objects of 
value, as dials, statues, vases, and urns, would be added, in order to create as much 
variety and interest in a small spot as was consistent with its utility. Such we have 
found to be the general arrangement of eastern gardens ; and as there seems no more 
obvious way of attaining the wants of those to whom they belonged, we may pronounce 
it to be perfectly reasonable and natural. 

529. ^s to the more extensive paradises or parks in which wild beasts were admitted, and 
even whole regiments exercised, we have but few authentic particulars respecting tliem. 
Those of Assyria must be regarded as royal extravagancies, calculated to excite astonish- 
ment and admiration at their magnitude, and the art and expense employed in their 
construction ; and if any reliance is to be placed in the account given by ancient authors 
of the hanging gardens of Babylon, their design will be found singularly to unite this 
object with the minor beauties of the confined garden ; to combine the splendor of mag- 
nificence with the delights of the justest feelings of nature. Tliey were situated over, 
or according to some, adjoining to King Nebuchadnezzar's palace, or on a platfonn raised 



HISTORY OF GARDENING. 



Part I. 



by lofty pillars, on the banks of the Euphrates, in the middle of the city of Babylon. 
They are said to have contained groves, fountains, and, in short, eveiy object which we 
have mentioned, as appertaining to the more ordinary description of eastern gardens. 
Their object was to gratify his Median queen, by that sort of verdant scenery and distant 
prospect, to which she had been accustomed in the more romantic country of her birth. 
The height, then, would give that commanding prospect of the water and shipping of 
the Euphrates, and the citj', as well as the gardens wdthin and without its walls, which 
she particularly desired. The air in that elevated region would be more cool than below ; 
the noise and bustle of the city would cease to be offensive ; the whole would be more 
exposed to breezes and winds ; and the mind, deriving so much enjoyment in so singu- 
lar and elevated a situation, must have experienced emotions at once subHme and roman- 
tic. But a faint idea of these gardens will be excited, by imagining the quadrangle of" 
Somerset House crowned with a portion of Kensington gardens j or of the summer 
garden of Petersburgh placed over the Kremlin in Moscow. 

530. How and ivith lohat propriety the eastern style came afterwards to be adopted 
in Greece, Italy, France, and Jinully in England, is our next enquiry. The principle or 
instinct of imitation, would be the first cause why the more distant nations, whether 
colonies from the east, ■ or returning travellers or conquerors, adopted this parent style. 
This is so ob\Tious, as to require no comment beyond what wiU be furnished by individual 
enquiry into our earliest tastes, habits, and predilections in dress, amusements, furniture, 
and other matters of common life. The next principle is that of use or fitness, which 
would vary in application, proportionably to the distance and different circumstances of 
the imitating country. Thus it would not exactly apply in Greece or Italy, where the 
climate was more temperate, active exercise more congenial, and the habits of the 
wealthy, for a long time at least, comparatively frugal. Add to this, that verdant land- 
scapes, shade, breezes, rills, waterfalls, and lakes, with their accompaniments of odors, 
murmurs, singing birds, reflections of objects, were more liberally distributed over the 
face of general nature. The more active character of man in such countries w^ould, in 
time, also appropriate to their use from this natural abundance, a greater variety of 
fruits and legumes. 

531. The eastern style assumed a variation in its character tinder the Bovians. The 
necessarily different culture required for perfecting fruits and culinary vegetables in a 
different climate, would give rise to the orchard and kitchen-garden. This would 
simplify the objects of the omamental garden, which would thus exhibit less a collection 
of natural beauties, than the display of art, the convenience of taking exercise, here a 
pleasure rather than a fatigue, and the gi-atifications of shade, cool breezes, and aromatic 
odors. A prospect of the surrounding country was desired, because it was beautiful ; 
and where, from various circumstances, it was interrupted by the garden or its boundary 
fence, mounds or hills of earth were raised, and, in time, prospect-towers appended to 
the houses. Greater extent would be required for more athletic recreations, and would 
be indulged in also by the wealth and pride of the owner for obvious reasons. Abridg- 
ment of labor would suggest the use of the sheers, rather than the more tardy pruning 
knife in thickening a row of trees. A row of low trees so thickened, would suggest the 
idea of a row of cUpt shrubs. Hence at first hedges ; and subsequently, when art and 
expense had exhausted every beauty, and when the taste had become tired of repetition, 
verdant sculpture would be invented, as affording novel, curious, and fantastic beauty, 
bordering, as do all extremes, upon absuVdity. A more extended and absolute appropri- 
ation of territory, than what we may suppose to have taken place in the comparatively 
rude counti-ies of the east, w^ould lead to agricultural pursuits, and these again would 
give rise to the various arrangements of a Roman country-residence which we 'know to 
have existed, and which it would be superfluous to describe. Various other circumstances 
might be added ; but enough has been stated to show that the gardening of the Romans 
was perfectly natural to them, under the circumstances in which they were placed ; it 
suited their wants, and produced scenes which they found to be beautiful, and was there- 
fore in the justest taste. To have imitated the scenery of nature, or studied picturesque 
beauty in a garden, would have been merely adding a drop to the ocean of beauties 
which surrounded them. Expense incurred for this purpose could never have pro- 
cured applause to the owner, since the more like nature the production, the less would 
it excite notice. All that was left for man to do, therefore, was to create those beauties 
of art, convenience, and magnificence, which mark out his dwelling-place, and gratify 
his pride and taste by their contrast with surrounding nature. 

532. The gardening of the Romans ivas copied in France and Britain, with little vari- 
ation beyond those dictated by necessity and the difference of climate. It was found to be 
perfectly beautiful and agreeable ; and would have continued to prevail, had Britain con- 
tinued in similar chcumstances to those in which she was at the time of its introduction. 
But such has been the progress of improvement in this country, that the general face of 
nature became as it were an ancient garden, and eveiy estate was laid out, bounded, and 



Book II. 



IN DIFFERENT CLIMATES. 



117 



subdivided, by stripes of wood, rows of trees, canals, ponds, walls, and hedges. The 
credit or distinction to be obtained here, by continuing to employ the ancient style, could 
be no greater than what the Romans would have obtained by imitating nature. In their 
case all the country was one scene of uncultivated, in ours it was one scene of cultivated, 
beauty. In this state of things the modern style was adopted, not solely from a wish to 
imitate the gardening of the Chinese, or a high degree of refinement in taste, but from 
the steady operation of the same motives which produced and continued the ancient style, 
— a desire of distinction. 

533. The modern style of gardening is unsuitable to countries not generally under cul- 
tivation. The English style cannot long please in such countries as Sweden, Poland, 
and America, otherwise than from its novelty, or as giving rise to certain associations 
with the people, whose name it bears. What delight or distinction can be produced by 
the English style in Poland, for example, where the whole country is one forest, and 
the cultivated spots only so many open glades, with the most irregular and picturesque 
sylvan boundaries ? But let a proprietor there dispose of the scenery around his resi- 
dence in the Roman or French manner ; let him display a fruit or kitchen garden 
bounded by high stone walls ; a farm subdivided by clipped hedges and ditches ; and a 
pleasure-ground of avenues, stars, circles, fountains, statues, temples, and prospect- 
towers, and he will gratify every spectator. The view of so much art, industry, and 
magnificence, amid so much wild and rude scenery, awake so many social ideas of com- 
fort and happiness, and so much admiration at the wealth and skill employed, that a 
mind of the greatest refinement and the justest taste would feel the highest sensation of 
pleasure, and approve as much of such a country -residence in the wilds of Poland or 
America, as he would of the most natural and picturesque residence of England, amid 
its highly artificial scenery. Such is the dreariness of the public roads in Poland, 
Sweden, and Lapland, that the stran- 
ger-traveller hails as marks of civili- 
sation [jig. 41.) what in cultivated 
countries would fill his mind with 
horror. 

534. The modem style is not an 
improvement on the ancient manner, 
but the substitute of one style for 
another. Part of the prevailing an- 
tipathy to the ancient style proceeds 
from a generally entertained idea, 
that the modern is an improvement 
on it, in the same way as a modern plough is an improvement on the clumsy implements 
of our ancestors ; but the truth is, the two styles are as essentially and entirely different 
in principle, as painting and architecture, the one being an imitative, and the other an 
inventive art. The more the ancient style is improved and perfected, the more it will 
differ from the modern style ; and neither improvement nor neglect of the modern style 
will ever bring it a step nearer the ancient manner. 

Landscape-gardening agrees with ancient gardening in no other circumstance than as employing the same 
materials. It is an imitative art, like painting or poetry, and is governed by the same laws. The ancient 
style is an inventive and mixed art, like architecture, and governed by the same principles. The beauties 
which architecture and geometric gardening aimed at, were those of art and utility, in which art was every 
where avowed. The modern style of gardening, and the arts of poetry and painting, imitate nature ; and, 
in doing so, the art employed is studiously concealed. Those arts, therefore, can never be compared, 
whose means are so different ; and to say that landscape-gardening is an improvement on geometric 
gardening, is a similar misapplication of language, as to say that a lawn is an improvement of a corn-field, 
because it is substituted in its place. It is absurd, therefore, to despise the ancient style, because it has 
not the same beauties as the modern, to which it never aspired. It has beauties of a different kind, equally 
perfect in their manner as those of the modern style, and equally desirable under certain circumstances. The 
question therefore is not, whether we shall admit occasional specimens of obsolete gardening, for the sake 
of antiquity, but whether we shall admit specimens of a different style, from that in general use, but equally 
perfect in its kind. {Ed. Encyc. art. Landscape Gardening.) 

535. An enlightened mind will derive pleasure from every style. " When I perceive a 
man," observes Sir W. Bridges, " incapable of deriving pleasure from more than one 
style of composition, and dogmatising on its exclusive merit, I pity his weakness and de- 
spise his presumption. When he narrows his curiosity, either to what is old or what is new ; 
when he confines his praise, either to the dead or to the living, though in both cases he is 
ridiculous, perhaps his folly is more evinced in the last." (^Censura Literuria, vol. viii. 
p. 214.) It is the privilege of the man, who has opened to his mind by observation and 
study all the springs of pleasant association, to delight by turns in the rudeness of solitary 
woods, in the cheerfulness of spreading plains, in the decorations of refined art, in the 
magnificence of luxuriant wealth, in the activity of crowded ports, the industry of cities, 
the pomp of spectacles, the pageantry of festivals. {Ed. Rev. 1 806. ) 

536. We may therefore conclude that gardening, as an art of design, must be considered 
relatively to the climate and situation of the country, and habits and manners of the 

I 3 




118 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



people, where it is employed ; and that the ancient and modern styles, viewed in this 
li^t, are each perfectly natural, and equally meriting adoption, according to relative 
circumstances ; less than from any positive beauty or advantages of either manner. We 
are consequently of opinion, that the ancient style, divested of some ingredients which 
relate to warm climates, and purified from the extravagances of extremes in decoration, 
would be in much better taste in some situations in the Highlands of Scotland, and the 
south of Ireland, than the modern style ; and that this style cannot, for a long series of 
years, afford any other satisfaction in many parts of other countries than what arises from 
the temporary interest of novelty and accidental association. It may never be altogether lost 
sight of in subsequent arrangements ; but whenever the influence of fashion has subsided, 
the beauties of the ancient style will be desired, as fulfilling better the objects in view, till 
landed property, in these countries, becomes enclosed, subdivided, and cultivated, as it is 
in England. 

Sect. III. Of the Clhnate of Britain, in respect to Gardening. 

537. Britain, France, Holland, and the north of Italy, are UJiquestionably the best coun- 
tries of Europe for European gardening ; and of these, the best paits are such as combine 
hills and plains, rocks, rivers, and prospects. 

538. The preference of Britain, as to government and civilisation, and its equality at 
least as to soil and surface, will not be disputed. As to climate, Charles II. in reply to 
some who were reviling it, said, he thought " that was the best climate where he could be 
abroad in the air with pleasure, or at least without trouble and inconvenience, the most 
days of the year, and tlie most hours of the day ;" and this he thought could be done 
in England more than in any other country he knew of in Europe. 

539. Gravel and turf. There are, says Sir William Temple, "besides tlie temper of our 
climate, two things particular to us, that contribute much to the beauty and elegance of our 
gardens which arc, the gravel of our walks, and the fineness and almost perpetual greenness 
of our turf. Tlie first is not known any where else, which leaves all their dry walks, in 
other countries, very unpleasant and uneasy. The other cannot be found in France or 
in Holland as we have it, the soil not admitting that fineness of blade in Holland, nor 
the sun that greenness in France, during most of the summer ; nor indeed is it to be 
found but in the finest of our soils." 

540. Neatness and greenth, says Lord Walpole, " are so essential in my opinion to the 
country, that in France, where I see nothing but chalk and dirty peasants, I seem in a 
terrestrial purgatory, that is neither in town nor country. The face of England is so 
beautiful that I do not believe Tempe or Arcadia were half so rural ; for both lying in 
hot climates, must have wanted the moss of our lawns." [Letters, ccli. 1796.) v'f-' 

541. That which prevents the gardening of Britain from attaining to a much higher degree 
of j)erfectb7i as an art of taste, is not any natural deficiencies in our climate or soil, nor 
the want of meand to make the most of them, but the want of taste in the proprietors ; 
for after all that has been done and written, there appear to be few who have a just 
relish for that sort of beauty in pleasure-grounds which is properly called picturesque, 
or such as a painter might introduce in a picture. We do not allude to any objects or 
arrangements which would interfere with utility ; but to such a disposition of forms as 
painters call grouping, connection, hannony, and, above all, to that general result which 
is called unity of expression or character. 



^ PART II. 

GARDENING CONSIDERED AS A SCIENCE. 

542. Knowledge, in the infancy of eveiy art, is necessarily confined to particulars, but 
after long observation and experience, the mind begins to generalise facts, and this is tlie 
first step towards the foundation of theory, or science ; ■which is nothing more than the 
substitution of rational principles of action, for habits founded on custom or prejudice. 
A number of generalised facts accumulated, the next process of the mind is to classify 
or systematise them ; this is the highest eflfort in the progress of knowledge ; and tliat 
art will be the most perfectly understood as a science, in which the greatest number of 
facts, or in other words, the most extensive range of experience and observation, is gene- 
ralised and arranged in a connected system. 

543. Unfortifed by the light of science, the practical man has no other assurance for the 
success of the future, than the experience of the past, and no resource for unforeseen 
events but ordinary expedients ; he resorts to general rules and precepts, which direct 
what is to be done every where, and on eveiy occasion, instead of applying to principles 



Book I. THE STUDY OF THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 



119 



for particular instructions, adapted to peculiar cases, or singular pui-poses. Industry 
may be baffled, and hope defeated, by a thousand contingencies from causes incident 
to every process of art or operation of nature. By these the mere routine-practitioner 
is deranged, or thrown off his guard ; whilst the man of science refers events to their 
true causes, suggests the adaptation of measures to meet every case ; and knowing the 
laws of nature to be immutable, he operates on her materials with confidence in the 
result. Science alone, however, without practical experience, will not ensure success, 
and may at first end in disappointment. But " where theoretical knowledge and practi- 
cal skill," as D. Stew^art observes, " are happily combined in the same person, the intel- 
lectual power of man appears in its full perfection, and fits him equally to conduct with 
a masterly hand the details of ordinary business, and to contend successfully with th§ 
untried difficulties of new and hazardous situations." (Elements of the Philosophy of the 
Human Mind, p. 232. 2d. edit.) 

544. The science of every art must necessarily depend on the end or object for luhich that 
art is j7ractised ; on the nature of the materials employed to procure or attain those ends ; 
and on the nature of the agents made use of by human skill to operate on those mate- 
rials. The object of the art of gardening is twofold : that of cultivating vegetables for 
use or ornament in domestic or general economy ; and that of forming arrangements 

.-of external scenery, beautiful as such, and suitable for personal recreation. The first 
object, therefore, to be ascertained on this subject, should be the wants, desires, and taste 
of that society for which the gardening is intended ; the 2d, the study of the vegetable 
kingdom ; the 3d, the study of the natural agents of garden-culture ; the 4th, that of 
the artificial agents of garden-culture ; and the 5th, that of the operations of garden-cul- 
ture. All the operations of territorial cultivation are either mechanical or chemical ; 
and must therefore depend on the laws which govern the common materials of our globe. 
■jHaose laws, or the manner and circumstances in which these materials operate on each 
other, constitute the limit of human science j for any attempt to go farther and discover 
first causes, inevitably ends in disappointment. 

The first branch of the science of gardening, or the study of society and taste, may be considered as 
ascertained by every individual, from liis own mDservation and experience ; that is, from the circumstance 
of his being himself a specimen of the society for the time being. This branch, therefore, does not require 
■farther consideration in a work like the present. 

The second and third branches, in which gardening is considered as a science of chemical agencies, are 
important subjects of study, and admit of much improvement ; though unquestionably considerable pro- 
gress has been made within the last fifty j-ears, since the study of vegetable physiology and chemistry have 
become more general; and since these arts have been enriched by the discoveries of Mirbel, Keyser, 
Knight, Lavoisier, Chaptal, and Davy ; and applied to agriculture and horticulture by Davy and Knight, 
in England, and Du Hamel, Thouin, and others, in France. 

The fourth and fifth branches, in which gardening is considered as a science of mechanical operations, may 
be said to have partaken of the general progress of the age, and to have adopted various improvements 
made in architecture and engineering, in so far as they were found applicable to either its useful or agree- 
able destinations. Here, however, there is stiU great room for advancement, especially in the construction 
of hot-houses, and the formation of waUed gardens. 

The last branch, in which gardening is considered as a science of design and taste, is founded on principles 
common to other arts, as to architecture and landscape-painting, whose ends are similar ; and here, though 
its science has long been as much neglected as in the other branches, yet now it may be considered to be 
fully ascertained and fixed by Alison, Wheatley, and Price ; and applied by Wheatley and Price, in Eng- 
land, and Girardin and De Lisle, in France. 

545. To know the science of any one art pefectly, would require a knowledge of all the 
others which bear relation to it, or serve in any way to explain the nature and influence of 
its operations and arrangements. But this is more than can be expected from men in 
general (Aubert, in his Cours de Phytologie, Paris, 1816, gives a table of twenty sciences 
as related to Botany alone) ; what cannot be hoped for from practical men ; and what 
would require in a systematic view of gardening like the present, treatises on most of the 
other arts. It is preferable, in our opinion, to draw from other branches of know- 
ledge, the explanations which they afford of particular operations or phenomena, that 
come into notice in discussing what we have laid down as leading principles of garden- 
ing. Thus, in place of treating of chemistry, we have merely drawn from that science 
what belongs to the study of vegetables, soils, and manures, &c. ; instead of a treatise 
on the mechanical powers, we have merely given an explanation of the principles on 
which each class of implements and machines operates ; and in place of treating of archi- 
tecture and painting, we have merely discussed the subject of design and composition in 
these arts ; the first as applicable to buildings and artificial dispositions of ground, and 
the second as directing the formation of real sceneiy. 



BOOK I. 

THE STUDY OF THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 

546. Organised bodies are divided itito two orders ; those eridowed with sentiment, ot 
a consciousnesss of their existence, and those deprived of that sensibility. The study of 

I 4 



120 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



tlj£ fonuer h desigaated zoology ; that of the latter, botany or phytology. In the latter 
science, modern botanists have introduced the following subdivisions : — 1. Systematic 
botany ; in which plants are studied apart, as distinct beings, and considered in respect 
to their resemblances, differences, nomenclature, and classification. 2. Vegetable ana- 
tomy and physiology ; or the study of plants as living beings, in which is considered 
the form of their organs, and their mode of nourishment and of multiplying themselves. 
3. Botanical geography ; in which plants are considered relatively to climate, surface, 
soil, country, habitation, &c. 4. Applied botany ; in wliich vegetables are considered 
with respect to the wants of man and other animals ; and which includes the study 
of the medical and economical properties of plants ; the means by which man procures 
such as he wants, eitlier by searching for tlaem in a wild state or by cultivation. 
This last department of the science may be considered as including agriculture and 
gardening ; but these are parts of it so vast and important as to form separate branches 
of study. Conformably to this view of the subject, we have here considered the study of 
plants as to history, glossology, phytography, taxonomy, organology, anatomy, chemis- 
try, physiology, pathology, geography, and culture. 



Chap. I. 

Origin^ Progress, and present Stale of the Study of Plants, 

547. The study if plants may be regarded as coeval with the creation of man, because they 
are in a great measure indispensable to the support of animal life. The first stage in the 
progress of this study would be that in which the attention of the human mind was di- 
rected to the discrimination of spontaneous vegetables, as fit for food. A second stage, 
tliat in which men began to direct their attention to useful vegetables, as capable of 
furnishing, by means of cultivation, an increased supply proportioned to the wants of 
population. Then it was that agriculture, in the proper sense of tlie word, would com- 
mence in society. A third stage was that in which plants began to be regarded as fur- 
nishing not only necessaries, but comforts ; and from this period, whenever it happened, 
may be dated the origin of horticulture. A fourth stage was that in which plants began 
to be considered as furnishing, not merely comforts, but luxuries. Odors and beautiful 
flowers would be prized ; and hence the origin of floriculture. 

In taking a rapid view of the progress of the study of plants among the ancients and ?noderns, we pass 
over the fabulous history of the Greeks, and commence with Solomon, who appears to have written a trea- 
tise on vegetables somewhere about the year B. C. 1004. This work is lost ; and the next name in order is 
Thales, in B. C. 604. To him succeeded the celebrated Pythagoras, about B. C. 550, who is believed to 
have prohibited his disciples the use of beans, on account of a supposed identity of origin between beans and 
human flesh. He is also said to have written a treatise on onions. Anaxagoras, another Greek philoso- 
pher of this period, maintained that the seeds of all vegetables are lodged in the atmosphere ; from whence 
they descend, along with the rain and dews into the earth, where they mingle with the soil, and spring up 
into plants. Empedocles is said to have attributed sexes, desires, and passions to plants ; and Deraocritus 
wrote a treatise on their smells. Hippocrates, about the year B. C. 409, introduced a new and enlightened 
system of medical study, a subject intimately connected with that of plants; and his contemporary, 
Crategas, wrote a book on botany, of which some fragments lately existed in the imperial library at 
Vienna. Aristotle, about B. C. 350, wrote a scientific work on plants, which, though also lost, is quoted 
by contemporaries, and has thus obtained for its author the title of father of natural history, as well as 
prince of metaphysicians. His disciple, Theophrastus, about B. C. 300, wrote on plants ; he described 500 
species, and endeavours to account for the phenomena of vegetation. 

Soon after Theophrastus, the Greek ernpire began to decline, and luitk it the study of plants. Botany, 
with the other arts and sciences, migrated to Italy, in which it made some progress, as we may see by the 
writings of Pliny, Virgil, and other georgical authors of the Augustan age. Those Roman writers, how- 
ever, that can be considered strictly botanical, are only Dioscorides and Pliny. The work of the fonaer, 
is a body of materia medica ; that of the latter, Rousseau considers as a body of receipts. Nothing is 
known of the state of botany during the dark ages. 

On the revival of the arts 'in the beginning of the fifteenth century/, one of the first fruits it produced was 
the introduction of figures from wooden cuts, by Brunsfelsius of Mayence, in Germany. His Hi^tona 
Plantaru7n, published in the beginning of the sixteenth century, excited the emulation of other botanists ; 
and soon after followed his countrj-men. Bock, Cordus, Fuschius, Dodonsus, and Clusius. Matthiolus 
was the first Italian, Delachamp a"nd Bauhin the first Frenchmen, and Turner and Gerarde the first 
Englishmen who caught the flame. 

But though prints had been introduced, method was wanting, without which all study of natural history 
must be of the most imperfect and limited kind. Gesner, a native of Zurich, in Switzerland, made the 
first attempt at arranging plants into classes, orders, and genera, about the middle of the sixteenth cen- 
tury. Cfesalpinus, a native of Tuscany, presented a similar arrangement at the same time, without know- 
ing any thing of that of Gesner : a common occurrence in the history of inventions, and a proof that the 
general state of botanical science rendered such an invention necessary. After this period the study of 
botany proceeded with rapid strides ; and herbariums and copper-plates of plants were invented by 
Columna of Naples. 

Botanic gardens were established about the middle of the sixteenth century, first in Italy (90.), in 
1533, and afterwards in France (183.), Germany (21G.), and England (372.), before the completion of the 
sixteenth century. This circumstance contributed, in an astonishing degree, to the progress of the study 
of plants, and procured the patronage of the wealthy. 

Botany declined or was stationary, for the greatest part of the sixteenth century ; but revived, owing, as 
it is thought, to a new direction given to the spirit of philosophical enquiry, by the illustrious Bacon. This 
wonderful philosopher explored and developed the true foundations of human knowledge, with a sagacity 
and penetration unparalleled in the history of mankind. He dared to disengage himself from the fetters 
of academical authority, condemned the visionary speculations of the schools, and recommended the sub- 
stitution of analjtical and inductive investigation, proclaiming truth to be but the image of nature. 



Book I. THE STUDY OF THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 121 



The strmtwe qf plants, mid the phenomena qf vegetable life, began to attract attention in the seventeenth 
century, 2000 years after it had been first attempted by Theophrastus. Malpighi, an Italian, and Grew, 
an Englishman, carried on this study at the same time, unknown to each other; the result of their inves- 
tigations were communicated to the scientific world, towards the end of the seventeenth century, remov- 
ing in great part the veil which had hitherto enveloped the phenomena of vegetation. The plan which 
these philosophers pursued, was that of experiment recommended by Bacon j the result may be men- 
tioned as the first fruits of his philosophy. 

548. About the end of the seventeenth and beginning qf the eighteenth century, different 
methods or systems for arranging and naming plants were produced by Herman and 
Boerhaave, of Leyden ; Rivinus and others, in Germany ; Tournefort and Magnol, in 
France ; and Morrison and Ray, in England. Of these systems and nomenclatures, 
that of Tournefort was the most generally followed, of which we may give, as an instance, 
the first six editions of Miller's Gardener s and Botanist^s Dictionary, Tournefort's 
system depended chiefly on the corolla ; but when the plants of America began to be 
introduced, to them it was found impracticable in its application. All the other methods 
were in different degrees defective, and it was not till the appearance of Linnaeus that 
this perplexity was removed. 

549. Linnceus founded what is called the sexual system, deducing his rviles of method 
from incontrovertible principles ; establishing, in his Philosophica Botanica, laws of 
generic and specific distinction, and rules of legitimate definition. This simplicity of 
system, perspicuity of arrangement, and precision of language, has elevated botany to 
the high rank it now holds in the scale of human science ; allured to the study of plants 
men of the most distinguished abilities ; and excited that ardor for botanical investigation 
which characterises the present age. ' This new system, as founded on the sexes of plants, 
naturally led Linnaeus to the study of the structure and phenomena of vegetables, and 
this effected at last a close and intimate unipn between systematic and physiological 
botany. The propriety and advantage of this union are evident, since a thorough know- 
ledge of plants involves both studies. The doctrines of Linnaeus soon procured fol- 
lowers in every country ; but the most distinguished of his immediate disciples, were 
Kalm, Hasselquist, Laefling, and Koenig, all of whom travelled in pursuit of new plants, 
under the auspices of their great master. Of his more remote disciples, may be named 
as most distinguished, Gmelin, Oeder, Hedwig, Gaertner, Lamarck, and Sir James 
Edward Smith, the founder and president of the Linnaean Society of London, and pro- 
prietor of the whole of the Linnaean Herbarium ; from whose meritorious labors, botany 
has derived and is still deriving important advantages. 

The study of physiological botany, however, was less attended to than that of methodical arrangement 
by Linnseus and his immediate disciples ; and indeed, it would have been too much to have expected an 
equal progress in both, by him who had made so astonishing an improvement in the one department. To 
the names of Grew and Malpighi, in physiological botany, may be added, in addition to that of Linnseus, 
Hales, Bonnet, Du Hamel, Hedwig, Spallanzani, and especially Priestley. This philosopher first brought 
the aid of pneumatic chemistry to this study, which, under the direction of such men as Ingenhouse, 
Senebier, and Sassure, has done more to illustrate the phenomena of vegetation, than all the other means 
of investigation put together. If we add to these the ingenious hints and speculations of Darwin, in his 
Botanic Garden, and in Phytologia ; the masterly experiments of Knight, given in the Philosophical 
Transactions; the vegetable physiology of Mirbel and Keyser ; with the systematic view of the whole sub- 
ject by Keith, in his Introduction to Vegetable Physiology ; we may assert with the latter writer, 
" that our knowledge of the physiology of vegetables, may now be regarded as resting upon the foundation 
of a body of the most incontrovertible facts, and assuming a degree of importance inferior only to that of 
the physiology of animals." Such may be considered the present state of physiological botany. 

550. The chief imj)rovenient which has been made in the systematic department since the 
days of Linntsus, consists in the approximations that have been made to a method of ar- 
rangement, founded on a more extended view of the relations of plants than is taken 
in the Linnaejin, or artificial system. By this system, which is designated natural, as 
founded on the whole of the natural properties of the plant, the vegetable kingdom is thrown 
into groups, and whoever knows any one plant in that group, will have some general idea 
of the appearance and qualities of the whole. The use of such a classification for such as 
already know plants individually, is therefore obviously great, though for discovering the 
names of particular species, it is in its present state less convenient than the Linnsean sys- 
tem, for owing to the small number of plants which are yet known to botanists, the groups 
or classes of the natural method are far from being perfect. 

551. The first scheme for a natural method of arranging jilants was communicated to the 
public by Linnseus in his Fragments of a Natural Method, published in 1738. The next 
person who successfully traced the affinities of plants, was B. Jussieu, of Paris. In 1759, 
lie displayed his method in the arrangement of the plants in the royal gardens of Trianon, 
near Paris. Afterwards, Michael Adanson, a pupil of Jussieu, who had travelled through 
part of Africa, examined all the published systems, and paid the greatest attention to the 
natural affinities of vegetables, published a very learned and useful work. Families des 
Blantes, in 1763. But it is to A. L. Jussieu, of the National Institute, nephew of the 
elder Jussieu, that the science of natural affinities owes most ; and his Genera Plantarum, 
published in 1789, is considered " the most learned botanical work that has appeared since 
the Species Plantarum of Linnajus, and the most useful to those who study the philosophy 



SCIENCE Of GARDENING. 



Part IL 



of botanical aiTangement." Ventenat has lately published a commentary on the writings 
of A. L. Jussieu ; and this author himself is now publishing a Species Piantarum, arranged 
according to his method. Professor Decandolle, of Geneva, considered one of the first 
French botanists, is also a follower of this system, in which he has made some improve- 
ments {Theorie de la Botanique, 1817), and he also is occupied with a Species Piantarum, 
arranged according to his own improvements. 

552. Botanical geography, or the knowledge of the places where plants grow (habita- 
tiones piantarum), and the causes which influence their distribution over the globe, was 
totally neglected by the ancients. Clusius is the only botanist who before the eighteenth 
century took any pains to indicate the native countries of plants. Bauliin and Tournefort 
often neglected it. Linnseus is the first who gave the idea of indicating it in general 
works on botany, and his Floras of Sweden and Lapland are models of their kind in this 
respect. Since this period many excellent Floras have appeared, among which the Flora 
Britannica, by Sir J. E. Smith, and the Flora Franqaise, by Professor Decandolle, may 
be mentioned as examples. The first grand effort at generalising the subject, was made 
by Humboldt, in his Essai sur la Geographie des Plants, &c. 1811. This essay is rich in 
facts, and filled, like all the works of this philosopher, with new and ingenious views of 
nature. In a subsequent work, De Distributione Piantarum, 1815, he has more especially 
examined the influence of elevation of surface on vegetation. Professor Decandolle, has 
also given some views relatively to the subject, in his Flora Franqaise, and R. Brown, 
one of the first botanists in this country, in Bemarks on the Botany of Terra Australis, and 
on the Plants of Cojigo. On the whole, however, this branch of botany, the most import- 
ant for agriculture and gardening, and without some knowledge of which, naturalisation, 
and even culture, must go on by mere hazard, may be regarded as still in its infancy. 

553. With respect to applied botany, its history would involve that of medicine, agricul- 
ture, gardening, and other mixed and mechanical arts. Plants, it may be observed, have in 
every age but the present, formed the chief articles of the materia medica of all countries. 
At present the mineral kingdom is chiefly resorted to by the practitioners of the healing 
art in Europe ; but plants retain their ground in other countries ; and fashion, which en- 
ters into every thing, may change, after exercising a certain degree of influence. The 
universal use of the vegetable kingdom in the dietetics of every country ; in the arts of 
clothing, architecture, and, in short, in almost eveiy bi-anch of industiy, need not be en- 
larged on. 

554. Fossil botany, as studied from the impressions of plants found in the secondary 
strata of the earth, has only lately begun to attract attention ; but the essays of Schlot- 
theim, Knor, JMartin, Faujas de St. Fond, and Parkinson's Essay on Organic Remains, 
deserve to be mentioned. 



Chap. II. 

Glossology, or the 2<7i7nes of the Parts of Plants. 

555. All the arts and sciences require to express, with brevity and perspicuity, a crowd of 
ideas unused in common language, and unknown to the greater part of men. "Whence that 
multitude of terms, or technical turns, given to ordinary words which the public turn 
often into ridicule, because they do not feel the use of them, but wliich all those are 
obliged to make use of, who apply themselves to any study whatever. Botany having to 
describe an immense number of beings, and each of these beings having a great variety of 
organs, requires a great variety of terms. Nearly all botanists are agreed as to these 
terms ; and in order that they may be universally understood and remain unchanged in 
meaning, they are taken from a dead or fixed language. 

556. A jylant in flower, surveyed externally, may be perceived to be composed of a variety 
of obvious parts, such as the root, the stem, the branch, the leaf, the flower, the fruit, and 
perhaps the seed ; and other parts less obvious, as buds, prickles, tendrils, hairs, glands, 
&c. These, with their modifications, and all the relative circumstances which enter into 
the botanical description of a plant, form the subject of glossology, the details of which, 
involving the definition of some hundreds of terms, are here omitted ; because to those 
conversant with them it would be of little use, and those who have them still to learn will 
find it more convenient to have recourse to some elementary work, where most of them 
are illustrated by figures, (See Smith's Introduction to Botany, Grammar of Botany, 
and similar works.) 



Boox I. NAMES OF CLASSES, ORDERS, AND GENERA. 



Chap, III. 

Pki/tograpky, or the Noinendature and Description of Plants. 

557. The whole vegetable kingdom is divided into classes, orders, genera, species, and 
varieties. A class is distinguished by some character which is common to many plants ; 
an order is distinguished by having some character limited to a few plants belonging to a 
class ; a still more limited coincidence constitutes a genus ; and each individual of a 
genus, which continues unchanged when raised from seed, is called a species. A variety 
is formed by an accidental deviation from the specific character, and easily returns by seed 
to the particular species from which it arose. 

558. Before botany became a regular science, plants were named as individual beings, 
without regard to any relation which they had to one another. But from the great num- 
ber of names to be retained on the memory, and the obvious aflfinities existing among 
certain individuals or natural families, some method was soon found necessary, and it 
was then deemed requisite to give such composite names as might recall to mind some- 
thing of the individuals to which they were applied. Thus we have Anagalis fore cceruleo. 
Mespilus aculeata jiyrifolia, &c. But in the end the length of these phrases became in- 
convenient ; and Linnseus, struck with this inconvenience, proposed that the names of 
plants should henceforth consist of two words only, the one the generic or family name, 
and the other the specific or individual name. 

559. The names of classes and orders were originally primitive, or without meaning, as 
the Grasses of Tragus, Poppies of Bauhin, &c. j and afterwards so compounded as to be 
long and complex, as the PolloplostemonopetalcB, Eleutheromacrastemones, &c. of Wachen- 
dorf. Linnaeus decided, that the names of classes and orders should consist of a single 
word, and that word not simple or primitive, but expressive of a certain character or 
characters, found in all the plants which compose it. 

560. In applyijig the names to plants, three rules are laid down by botanists : 1st, That the 
languages chosen should be fixed and universal, as the Greek and Latin ; 2d, That these 
languages should be used according to the general laws of grammar, and compound 
words always composed from the same language, and not of entire words, &c. ; 3d, That 
the first who discovers a being, and enregisters it in the catalogue of nature, has the right 
of giving it a name ; and that that name ought to be received and admitted by naturalists, 
unless it belong to a being already existing, or transgress the rules of nomenclature. 
Every one that discovers a new plant may not be able to enregister it according to these 
laws, and in that case has no right to give it his name ; but the botanist who enregisters 
it, and who is in truth the discoverer, may give it the name of the finder, if he chooses. 
We shall notice this subject in the order of names of classes and orders, of genera, of 
species, of varieties and subvarieties, descriptions of plants, dried plants or herbariums, 
and methods of study. 

Sect. I. Karnes of Classes and Orders. 

561. The names of the classes and orders of LinncBus and Jussieu, being exclusively 
used at the present time, we shall pass over those of the earlier botanists. 

562. The names of the Liymcean classes and orders are, as far as practicable, expressive 
of some common character belonging to all the plants which compose them, and consist 
only of one word for the class, and another for the order, both compounded from the 
Greek. There are exceptions, however, to the first rule in several of the classes 
of the sexual system, as in Icosandna, Moncecia, Dioscia, which contain plants that 
have not the circumstances expressed in the title. Richard (Kouv. Elem. de Pot. 
1819) has given some new names, which he proposes to substitute for the least perfect of 
those fixed on by Linnasus, but they are not likely to be generally received, at least in 
this country. 

563. The names of natural orders may be taken from such genera as may serve to re- 
call the general relations of each tribe or order. The name of the order and generic 
name, however, are at no time to be precisely the same ; from the manifest impropriety 
and confusion of arranging a thing under itself. Thus in the natural method of Linnaeus, 
the order PalmiE has no genus of that name. In the method of Jussieu, die name of an 
order is composed from the name of one of the most characteristic genera of that order, 
as Posacece, a natural order of dicotyledonous plants, containing the well known genus 
Posa, Sec. ; and while the name of an order is terminated by two syllables, that of a sub- 
order is terminated by one only ; as Posacece, Posce ; Panunculacece, Panunculte. 

Sect. II. Names of Genera. 

564. Names from the Greek or Latin are exclusively admitted by modern botanists, all 
others bping esteemed barbarous. Without this nile we should be overwhelmed,, not only 



124 



SCIENCE OI* GARDENING. 



Part II. 



with a torrent of uncouth and unmanageable words, but we should be puzzled where to 
fix our choice, as the same plant may have fifty different original denominations in differ- 
ent parts of the world, and we might happen to choose one by wliich it is least known. 
There are however some exceptions, such as Acacia, Alisma, which are of Celtic origin, 
and AE?'uo, AlehemUla, derived from the Arabic. 

565. Such names as indicate some stinking peculiarity in the genus are to be preferred : 
as Glycyrrhiza, a sweet root, for the liquorice ; Amaranthus, without decay, for an ever- 
lasting flower ; Helianthus, a sun-flower ; Lithospermum, a stony seed ; Eriocalia, a 
flower with a singularly woolly base or cup ; Origanum, an ornamental mountain plant ; 
HemerocaUis, beauty of a day; Arenaria, a plant that inhabits sandy places; and Gypso- 
2)hila, one that loves a chalky soil. Such as mark the botanical character of the genus, 
when they can be obtained for a nondescript plant, are peculiarly desirable ; as Cerato- 
petalum, from the branched horn-like petals ; Lasiopetalum, from the very singularly 
woolly corolla ; Calceolaria, from tlie shoe-like figure of the same part ; Conchium, from 
the exact resemblance of its fruit to a bivalve shell. 

566. To dedicate certai?i plajits to the honor nf duttiyiguished persons has been customary 
in all ages. Thus Euphorbia commemorates the physician of Juba a Moorish prince, 
and Gentiana immortalises a king of Illyria. The scientific botanists of modern times 
have adopted the same mode of preserving the memory of benefactors to their science ; 
and though the honor may have been sometimes extended too far, that is no argument 
for its total abrogation. Some uncouth names thus unavoidably deform our botanical 
books ; but this is often effaced by the merits of their owners, and it is allowable to model 
them into grace as much as possible. Thus the elegant Tournefort made Gundclia, from 
Gundelscheimer ; which induced Sir J. E. Smith to choose Goodenia, for his friend Dr. 
Goodenough, though it has, when too late, been suggested that Goodenoviu might have 
been preferable. Some difficulty has arisen respecting French botanists on account of 
the additional names by which their grandeur, or at least their vanity, Avas displayed 
during the existence of the monarchy. Hence Pittonia was applied to the plant conse- 
crated to Pitton de Tournefort; but Linna?us preferred the name by which alone he was 
known out of his country, or in learned language, and called the same genus Tourne- 
fortia. 

567. A fajiciful ayialogy between botayiists and the plants named after them has been 
made by Linnaeus in the Critica Botanica. Thus Bauhinia, after the two distinguished 
brothers John and Gaspard Bauhin, has a two-lobed or twin leaf. Scheuclizeria, a grassy 
alpine plant, commemorates the two Scheuchzers, one of whom excelled in the knowledge 
of alpine productions, the other in that of grasses. Dorsteniu, with its obsolete flowers, 
devoid of all beaut}', alludes to the antiquated and uncouth book of Dorstenius. Her- 
nandia, an American plant, the most beautiful of all trees in its foliage, but furnished 
with trifling blossoms, bears the name of a botanist highly favored by fortune, and al- 
lowed an ample salary for the purpose of investigating the natural history of the Western 
world, but whose labors have not answered the expense. On the- contrary. Magnolia, 
with its noble leaves and flowers, and DUenia, with its beautiful blossoms and fruit, 
serve to immortalise two of the most meritorious among botanists. Linncea, a de- 
pressed abject Lapland plant, long overlooked, flowering at an early age, was named by 
Gronovius after its prototype Linnaeus. 

Sect. III. Names of Species. 

568. Specific names should be forjned on sijnilar principles to the generic ones ; but some 
exceptions are allowed, not only without inconvenience, but with great advantage. 
Such as express the essential specific character are unexceptionable, as Banksia serrata, 
hitegrifolia, dentata, &c. ; but perhaps those which express something equally certain, 
but not comprehended in that character, are still more useful, as conveying additional 
information, \i\L.e Ixora alba and'coccinea, Scleranthus annuus and. perennis, Aletris fra- 
grans, Saxifraga cernua, &c. ; for which reason it is often useful, that vernacular names 
should not be mere translations of the Latin ones. Comparative appellations are very 
good, as Banksia ericifolia, Andromeda salicifolia, Saxifraga bryoides, 2Iiliu?n cimicijtum, 
Elymus Hystidx, Pedicidaris Scepti~um. Names which express the local situations of 
different species are excellent, such as JSIelampyrum arvense, pratense, nemorosum and 
sylvaticum, Carex arenaria, uliginosa and sylvatica, as well as aquatica, mxiritinia, 
rupyestris, dlpina, nivalis, used for many plants. But names derived from particular 
countries or districts are liable to much exception, few plants being sufficiently local to 
justify their use. Thus Ligusticum cornubiense is found not only in Cornwall, but in 
Portugal, Italy, and Greece ; Schioenkia americana grows in Guinea as well as in . 
South America. Such therefore, though suffered to remain on the authority of 
Linnaeus, will seldom or never be imitated by any judicious writer, unless Trollius 
euvop<sus and asiaiicus may justify our naming the tliu'd species of that genus, lately 
brought from America, ainericanm. The use of a plant is often commodiously ex- 



Book I. 



NAMES OF SPECIES AND VARIETIES. 



125 



pressed in its specific name, as Brassica oleracea, Papaver somniferum, Inocarims eduUs ; 
so is likewise its time of flowering, as Pnmula veris, Leucojum vernum, ofstivum, and 
auluinnale, and Helleboms hyemalis. 

■ 569. When a jdant has been erroneously/ made a distinct genus, the name so aj^pUed to it 
may he retained for a specific appellation, as Lathrcea Phelypaca, and Barlsia Gymnan- 
dra ; which may also be practised when a plant has been celebrated, either in botanical, 
medical, or any other history, by a particular name, as Origanum Dictamnus, Artemisia 
jDracunculus, Lauras Cinnamomum, Selinum Carvifolia, Carica Fapaya. In either case 
the specific name stands as a substantive, retaining its own gender and termination, and 
roust begin with a capital letter. 

570. A specific name is occasionally adapted to some historical fact belonging to the plants 
or to the person whose name it bears, as Lhmcea borealis, from the great botanist of 
the north ; Murrcea exotica, after one of his favorite pupils, a foreigner ; Browallia 
demissa and elata, from a botanist of humble origin and character, who afterwards became 
a lofty bishop. In like manner Buffonia tenufolia, is well known to be a satire on the 
slender botanical pretensions of the great French zoologist. 

571. Names sanctioned by general use are for the most part held sacred among botanists. 
The study of natural history is, from the multitude of objects with which it is conver- 
sant, necessarily so encumbered with names, that students require every possible assist- 
ance to facilitate the attainment of those names, and have a just right to complain of 
every needless impediment. The names established throughout the works of Linnasus, 
are become curi-ent coin, nor can they be altered without great inconvenience. Those 
who alter names, often for the worse, according to arbitrary rules of their own, or in 
order to aim at consequence, which they cannot otherwise attain, are best treated with 
silent neglect. When, however, solid discoveries and improvements are made in the 
science ; when species or genera have been confounded by Linnaeus himself, and new 
ones require to be separated from them, the latter must necessarily receive appropriate 
appellations ; as also when a totally wrong and absurd name has by mistake been given, 
as Begonia capensis. In such cases names must give place to things, and alterations 
proceeding from such causes must be submitted to. (Smith's Introduction, ch. 22.) 

Sect. IV. Names of Varieties and Suhvarieties. 

572. The names which botanists give to varieties are of the simplest description; they 
always convey an idea of the variation which has taken place, and are used in addition 
to the specific name. Thus we have Caltha j)alustris, the species, and palustris fore 
jdeno, the double-flowered caltha, &c. As a series of species are commonly numbered 
1, 2, 3, &c. so the varieties of a species, are generally, for distinction sake, designated 
by the letters of the Greek alphabet, thus : Brassica oleracea, the species ; a. Capitata, 
the first species ; j8. Rubra, the second species ; y. Sabauda ; S. Sabellica, &c. 

573. Subvarieties of plants are accidental modifications of varieties of a very temporary 
and fluctuating nature. They are generally produced by culture, and are more espe- 
cially known in garden-fruits, culinary vegetables, and what are called florists' flowers. 
The differences among subvarieties are generally so slight, or so diflicult to define, as 
not to admit of the application of scientific names. Botanists, therefore, pay no 
attention to them ; but gardeners, to whom they are of considerable importance, have 
found it necessary in some way or other to distinguish them, and they generally apply 
the name of the person or place, by whom or where, tliey were originated. Thus Pyrus 
malus is the crab or apple, P. malus var. domestica, the cultivated apple. Pyrus 
malus var. domestica subvar. Downton pippin, apple raised from seed at Downton. 
P. m. v. d. subvar. Kirk's fame, &c. Brassica olei-acea var. capitata, common white 
cabbage. B. o. var. c. subvar. Battersea early common cabbage, an early variety 
raised at Battersea. Dianthus caryophyllus is the clove pink. D. c. var. flore pleno 
is the carnation. Dian. cary. var. fl. pi. subvar. Hogg's seedling, a variety of carnation 
raised by Hogg. D. c. fl. pi. subvar. Lady Jane Grey, a variety of carnation named 
after Lady Jane Grey. A refinement on this sort of nomenclature consists in adding 
the name of the person who originated the subvariety, to the name of the person or 
place after whom or which it was named ; thus, Hogg's Lady Jane Grey, Duncan's 
Cheshire hero, &c. " To raise a fine new variety of any florist's flower, to name it after 
some great personage, and with that name to couple your own, is the greatest honor, 
says Emmerton {Treatise on the Auricula), which a florist can aspire to." 

574. Names (f subvarieties which indicate something of their ])roj)erties are to be preferred, 
as Black July-grape, June-eating-apple, &c. ; or such as indicate the place or time where 
or when they were originated or abound, as Deptford onion, Claremont nuptials primrose, 
or the Afflicted queen carnation. Such names convey ideas which may prove useful 
as to the qualities of the variety : thus the first and second names convey some idea of 
the time of ripening ; the third, some idea of the soil and climate in which the plant 
thrives ; the fourth and fifth, the date, and consequently the age of the variety. 



126 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1 



42 

DeciduoM tree. 
Evergreen tree. 
Deciduous spiry-topt ire 
Evcrgr. spiiy-topt free. 

^ Decidmms shrub. 
SSL Evergreen shrub 

I 

Twining shrub. 
Climbing shrub, 
'r railing shruJ). 
ffr?if( Creeping shnilt. 
JSSSl Vnder-shrub. 

Perennial gniss. 

1 
i 

^ii>it^ Trailing perenniul. 
Creeping perennial. 
Bulbous perennial. 
Tuberous perennial. 
Fusiform perennial. 
Annual. 
-yfc Biennial. 



Tn'imug perennial. 
Climbing perennial. 



1 



Annual grass. 
^ Sciiaminous plajii. 
Aquatic. 
Parasite. 
^ Fern. 

Succulent. 
I ( Bark-stave. 
i Dry.stove. 
\ ' Green-house, 
I Frame. 

2?arA: ifoi'e deciduous tree. 
1^ Dry -stove deciduous shrub. 
Green-house aquatic. 



Sect. V. Descriptions of Plants. 

575. Plants are described by the use of language alone, or 
hy language and figures, models, or dried plants conjoined. Tlie 
description of plants may be either abridged or complete. The 
shortest mode of abridgment is that employed in botanical 
catalogues, as in those of Donn or of Sweet. A complete 
description, accordiag to Decandolle, ought to proceed in the 
foUovvino; order : — 



1. The admitted name. 

% The characteristic phrase. 

,-. The synonyms. 

4. The "description, comprehending the 
organs, bepnning with the root. 
o. The liiitor'y, that is, the coui\try, du- 



ration, station, habitual time of foliation and 
exfoliation, of flowering, and of ripening the 
seed. 

6. Application, -which includes the cul- 
ture and uses. 

7. Critical or incidental observations. 



576. Descrij)tiojis are, in general, written in Latin, the names 
in the nominative, and followed by epithets which mark their 
modifications, and which are not united by a verb, unless that 
becomes necessary to explain any circumstance which is not 
provided for in the ordinary form of the terms. Doubts as 
to the received ideas on the plant described, or any other mis- 
cellaneous matters, are to be placed under the last article. 

577. Collectiom of botanical descriptions may be of different 
sorts, as 



1. Monographs, or descriptions of one 
genus, tribe, or class, as Lindlej's Mom- 
graphia Rosanim. 

2. Floras, or an enumeration of the plants 
of any one district or country', £is Smith's 
Flora Dritanniai. 

3. Gardens, or an enumeration, descrip- 
tive or nominal, of the plants cultivated 
in any one garden, as Aitou's Hortus 
Ketvensis. 

4. General ivorks, m -which all known 



plants are described, as Willdenow's Spectea 
Plantarum, aad Persoon's Synopsis Specict 
Plantarum. 

Alt these classes of books may be -with or 
-without plates or figures ; and these again, 
may be of part or of the whole plant, and 
colored or plain, &c. Some botanists have 
substituted dried specimens for figures, which 
is apjjroved of in ca;.es of difficult tribes or 
genera ; as in the grasses, fernji, geraniums, 
ericas, &c. 



578. Collections of descriptions of 2)la7its in what are called 
gardens or catalogues, form one of the most usefid kinds of 
botanical books for the practical gardener. The most complete 
of these hitherto published is the Hortus Suburbajius Londinensis 
of R. Sweet ; but this, as well as all other works of the kind, 
admit of being rendered much more descriptive by a more ex- 
tensive use of abbreviated terms, and even by the use of picto- 
rial signs, (fig. 42.) Sweet's Hortus gives the Linnaean and 
natural class and order, systematic and English name, authority, 
habitation in the garden, time of flowering, year of introduction, 
and reference to engraved figures ; but there might be added 
on the same page, the height of the plant, color of the flower, 
time of ripening the seed or fruit, soil,- mode of propagation, 
and the natural habitation of such as are natives. Instead 
of the usual mark ( ) for a ligneous plant, pictorial types 
might be introduced to indicate whether it was a tree or shrub, 
deciduous or ever-green, spiry topt, a palm, climbing, twining 
or trailing, &c. ; and instead of the common sign for a per- 
ennial (4)) biennial {S), or annual (0), something of 
the natural character of the plant might be similarly indi- 
cated. A single Hne of a catalogue formed on this principle 
would expand into a long paragraph of ideas in the mind of the 
botanist or gardener, and might easily be rendered a Speciea 
Plantarum, by introducing short specific characters in single 
lines on the page opposite the catalogue lines, as in Galpine's 
Compendium of the British Flora. It might farther, by sub- 
joining notes to all the useful or remarkable species at the 
bottom of every page, be rendered a history of plants, includ- 
ing their uses in the arts and manufactures, and their culture 
in agriculture or gardening. Such an Encyclopcsdia of Plants, 
with other improvements, we, with competent assistance, have 
sometime since commencedj and hope soon to submit to the 
public. 



Book 1. 



FORMATION OF HERBARIUMS. 



127 



Sect. VI. Of forming and preserving Herbariums. 
519. Dried pkmts Jar surpass either draivings or descriptions in giving complete ideas of 
their ajipearance. When plants are well dried, the original forms and positions of even 
their minutest parts, though not their colors, may at any time be restored by immersion 
in hot water. By this means the productions of the most distant and various countries, 
such as no garden could possibly supply, are brought together at once under our eyes, 
at any season of the year. 

580. The mode or state in which plants are 2^reserved, is generally desiccation, accom- 
panied by pressing. Some persons. Sir J. E. Smith observes, recommend the preservation 
of specimens in weak spirits of wine, and this mode is by far the most eligible for such as 
are very juicy ; but it totally destroys their colors, and often renders their parts less fit 
for examination, than by the process of drying. It is, besides, incommodious for frequent 
study, and a very expensive and bulky way of making an herbarium. 

581. The greater pari oj" j)lants dry with facility between the leaves of books, or other paper, 
the smoother the better. If there be plenty of paper, they often dry best without 
shifting ; but if the specimens are crowded, they must be taken out frequently, and the 
paper dried before they are replaced. The great point to be attended to is, that the 
process should meet with no check. Several vegetables are so tenacious of their vital 
principle, that they will grow between papers ; the consequence of which is, a destruc- 
tion of their proper habit and colors. It is necessary to destroy the life of such, either 
by immersion in boiling water, or by the application of a hot iron, such as is used for 
linen, after which they are easily dried. The practice of applying such an iron, as some 
persons do, with great labor and perseverance, till the plants are quite dry, and all 
their parts incorporated into a smooth flat mass is not approved of. This renders them 
unfit for subsequent examination, and destroys their natural habit, the most important 
thing to be preserved. Even in spreading plants between papers, we should refrain 
from that precise and artificial disposition of their branches, leaves, and other parts, 
which takes away from their natural aspect, except for the purpose of displaying the 
internal parts of some one or two of their flowers, for ready observation. The most 
approved method of pressing is by a box or frame, with a bottom of cloth or leather, 
like a square sieve. In this, coarse sand or small shot may be placed, in any quantity. 
Very little pressing is required in drying specimens ; what is found necessary should 
be applied equally to every part of the bundle under the operation, and this can only be 
done by the use of an equalising press of granulated matter, of compressed air, or of a 
bag of water. 

Dried specimens are lept in herbariums in various ways : sometimes loose between leaves of paper ; at 
other times wholly gummed or glued to paper, but most generally attached by one or more transverse slips 
of paper, glued on one end and pinned at the other, so that such specimens can readily be taken out, 
examined, and replaced. On account of the aptitude of the leaves and other parts of dried plants to drop 
off, many glue them entirely, and such seems to be the method adopted by Linnaus, and recommended 
by Sir J. E. Smith. " Dried specimens," the professor observes, " are best preserved by being fastened, 
with weak carpenter's glue, to paper, so that they may be turned over without damage. Thick and heavy 
stalks require the additional support of a few transverse strips of paper, to bind them more firmly down. 
A half sheet, of a convenient folio size, should be allotted to each species, and all the species of a genus 
may be placed in one or more whole sheets or folios. On the outside of the latter should be written the 
name of the genus, while the name of every species, with its place of growth, time of gathering, the finder's 
name, or any other concise piece of information, may be inscribed on its appropriate paper. This is the 
plan of the Linnsean herbarium." 

In arranging dried specimens, the most simple and obvious guide is that of the order of their flowering, 
or that in which they are gathered, and this may be adopted during the summer season ; but afterwards 
they ought to be put into some scientific method, either natural or artificial. They may be kept in a 
cabinet, consisting of a collection of drawers for each order ; and the relative as well as absolute size of 
these drawers, will depend on the proposed extent of the collection, as whether of British plants only, of 
hardy plants only, or of all plants introduced to this country. In the chapter on vegetable geography will 
be foimd data for the size of the drawers under every case. 

The fungi cannot in general be dried so as to retain the habit and character of the vegetating plant ; 
but this defect is supplied by models, of which excellent collections are prepared for sale by the Sowerby 
family, well known for their botanical works. 

The perfect preservation of an herbarium is much impeded from the attacks of insects. A little beetle, 
called Ptinusfur, is more especially the pest of collectors, laying its eggs in the germens or receptacles of 
flowers, as well as on the more solid parts, which are speedily devoured by the maggots when hatched, and 
by their devastations, paper and plants are alike involved in ruin. The most bitter and acrid tribes, as 
euphorbia, gentiana, prunus, the syngenesious class, and especially willows, are preferred by these vermin. 
The last-mentioned family can scarcely be thoroughly dried before it is devoured. Ferns are scarcely ever 
attacked, and grasses but seldom. To remedy this inconvenience, a solution of corrosive sublimate of 
mercury in rectified spirits of wine, about two drams to a pint, with a little camphor, will be found per- 
fectly efficacious. It is easily applied with a camel-hair pencil when the specimens are perfectly dry, not 
before ; and if they are not too tender, it is best done before they are pasted, as the spirit extracts a yellow 
dye from many plants, and stains the paper. A few drops of this solution should be mixed with the glue 
used for pasting. This application not only destroys or keeps off all vermin, but it greatly revives the colors 
of most plants, giving the collection a most pleasing air of freshness and neatness. After several years' 
experience, no inconvenience has been found from it whatever, nor can any dried plants be long preserved 
without it. 

The herbarium is best kept in a dry room without a constant fire. Linnaeus had a stone building for his 
museum, remote from his dwelling-house, into which neither fire nor candle was ever admitted, yet 
nothing was more free than his collection from the injuries of dampness, or other causes of decay. 
{Smith's Introduction, oh, 24.) 



138 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pa ax II. 



Sect. VII. Of Methods of Study. 
582. There are two methods of acquiring botanical knowledge, analogous to those by which 
languages are acquired. The first is the natural method, which begins with the great and 
obvious classes of vegetables, and distinguishes trees, grasses, &c. ; next individuals among 
these ; and afterwards their parts or organs. This knowledge is acquired insensibly, as 
one acquires his mother-tongue. The second is the artificial method, and begins with 
the parts of plants, as the leaves, roots, &c., ascending to nomenclature and classification, 
and is acquired by particular study, aided by books or instructors, as one acquires a dead 
or foreign language. This method is the fittest for such as wish to attain a thorough 
knowledge of plants, so as to be able to describe them ; the other mode is easier, and the 
best suited for cultivators, whose object does not go beyond that of understanding their 
descriptions, and studying their physiology, history, and application. 

An easy and expeditious mode for gardeners to know plants and study the vegetable kingdom is as 
follows : — 

Begin by acquiring the narnes of a great number of individuals. Supposing the plants growing in a 
named collection, or that you have any person to tell you their names : then take any old book, and begin 
at any point (in preference the beginning) of the collection, border, or field, and taking a leaf from the 
plant whose name you wish to know, put it between the two first leaves of the book, writing the name 
with a pencil, if you are gathering from a named collection, or if not, merely write a number, and get the 
name inserted by your instructor afterwards. Gather, say a dozen the first day, carry the book in your 
pocket, and fix these names in your memory, associated with the form and color of the leaves, by 
repeatedly turning to them during the moments of leisure of one day. Then, the second day, proceed to 
the plants, and endeavour to apply the names to the entire plant. To assist you, take them in the order 
in which you gathered them, and refer to the book when your memory fails. To aid in recollecting the 
botanic names, endeavour, after you have gathered the leaves, either by books or your instructor, to learn 
the etymology of the name, and something of the history of the plant, &c. Attach the leaves by two 
transverse cuts in the paper, or by any simple process, so as the first set may not fall out when you are 
collecting a second. Having fixed tlie first fasciculus in your memory, form a second, which you may in- 
crease according to your capacity of remembering. Proceed as before during the second day ; and the 
beginning of the third day, begin at your first station, and recall to memory the names acquired during 
both the first and second day. In this way go on till you have acquired the names of the great majority 
of the plants in the garden or neighbourhood where you are situated. Nothing is more easily remembered 
than a word when it is associated with some visible object. Such as a leaf or a plant ; and the more names 
of plants we know, the more easy does it become to add to our stock of them. A person who knows only 
ten plants will require a greater effort of memory to recollect two more, than one who knows a thousand 
will to remember an additional two hundred. That gardener must have little desire to learn who cannot, 
in two or three weeks, acquire the names of a thousand plants, if already arranged. If to be collected in 
the fields, it is not easy getting a thousand leaves or specimens together; but, in general, every gardener 
requires to charge his memory with the names and ideas or images, of between five hundred and one 
thousand plants ; as being those in general cultivation as agricultural plants, forest-trees, and field-shrubs, 
horticultural plants, plants of ornament, and those requiring eradication as weeds. 

To acquire the glossology, cut a leaf or otlier part from the plants indicated in any elementary work 
on botany which you may possess, as affording examples of each term. You will not be able to get at all 
the examples ; but if you get at one tenth of them, it will prepare you for the next step, which is — 

To acquire a hnowledge of the classes and orders. This is easily done by selecting the blossoms of 
plants, whose class, &c. is designated in a catalogue. Begin with class 1, order 1. On looking at any pro- 
per catalogue, such as Sweet's or Bonn's, you will find that there are but few plants in this class, and only 
one British example which flowers in May. Unless you take that month, therefore, or enjoy the advan- 
tages of inspecting hot-house plants, you can do nothing with this class. Proceed to the next order, and so 
on, examining as many flowers as possible in each class and order, in connection with the descriptions, as 
given in your elementary guide, in order that you may be perfectly familiarised with aU the classes, and 
the whole or the greater number of the orders. 

Study the descriptions of plants, with the plants before you. For this purpose, procure any good Species 
Plantarum or Flora, in Latin, if j'ou know a little of that language, as the Hortus Kewensis, Smith's Flora 
Brifannica ; or in English, as Withering's Arrangement of British Plants, Murray's British Flora, or 
Miller's Dictionary, in which last are short descriptions both in English and Latin. Persevere in this 
practice, collecting an herbarium, and writing the complete description of each specimen under it, till all 
the parts of plants are familiar to you. When that is the case, you wiU be able, on a plant's being presented 
to you which you never saw before, to discover (that is, if it be in flower) first its class and order, and next, 
by the aid of proper books, its generic and specific name ; and this, as far as respects the names of plants, 
is to attain the object in view. 

But to know the name of an object is not to k?>ow its nature j therefore having stored up a great many 
names in your memory, and become familiarised with the plants by which you are surrounded, and with 
the art of discovering the names of such as may be brought to you, by the Linna?an method ; the next 
thing is to study plants according to their natural affinities, by referring them to their natural orders, and 
observing the properties common to each order. Then proceed to study their anatomy, chemistry, and 
physiology ; and lastly, their history and application. For these purposes Smith's Litroduction to Botany^ 
Keith's Vegetable Physiology, and Willdenow's Species Plantarum, may be reckoned standard works. 
Books of figures, such as Sowerby's Exotic and English Botany, or Curtis's Magazine, are eminently useful 
for the first department, but they can only come into the hands of a few. Those who understand French 
will find the elementary works of DecandoUe, Richard, and Girardin, of a superior description. The 
Elements of DecandoUe and Sprengel, lately translated, is also a valuable work. 



Chap. IV. 

Taxonomy, or the Classif cation of Plants. 

583. Without some arrangement, the mind of man W02dd be unequal to the task of aC' 
quiring even on im^^erfect k-nowledge of the various objects of nature. Accordingly, in 
every science, attempts have been made to classify the diflferent objects that it embraces, 
and these attempts have been founded on various principles. Some have' adopted arti- 



Book I. 



CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS. 



129 



ficial characters ; others have endeavoured to detect t!ie natural relations of the beings 
to be arranged, and thus to ascertain a connection by -wliich the wliole may be asso- 
ciated. In the progress of zoology and phytology, the fundamental organs on which 
to found an artificial arrangement have been finally agreed on. In both, those which 
are essential, and which discover the greatest variety, form the basis of classification. 
Animals are found to differ most from each other in the organs of nutrition, and plants 
in the organs of reproduction. 

584. Two kinds cf methods have been adopted in arranging vegetables ; the natural and 
the artificial. A natural method is that which, in its distribution, retains all the classes 
or groups obviously alike ; that is, such into which no plants enter that are not connected 
by numerous relations, or that can be disjoined without doing a manifest violence to 
nature. An artificial method is that whose classes are not natural, because they collect 
together several genera of plants which are not connected by numerous relations, although 
they agree in the characteristic mark or marks, assigned to that particular class or assem- 
blage to v.'hich the}' belong. An artificial method is easier tlian tlie natural, as in the 
latter it is nature, in the former the writer, who prescribes the rules and orders to be ob- 
served in distribution. Hence, likewise, as nature is ever uniform, there can be only 
one natural method : whereas artificial methods may be multiplied almost ad injinitum, 
according to tlae several different relations under which bodies are viewed. 

585. The object of both methods is to promote our knowledge of the vegetable kingdom : 
tlie natural method, by generalising facts and ideas ; and the artificial method, by faci- 
litating the knowledge of plants as individual objects. The merits of the former method 
consist in the perfection with which plants are grouped together in natural families or 
orders, and these families grouped among themselves ; the merits of the latter consist in 
the perfection with wliich plants are arranged according to certain marks by which their 
names may be discovered. Plants arranged according to the natural method may be com- 
pared to words arranged according to their roots or derivations ; arranged according to 
an artificial method, they may be compared to words in a dictionary, Linnaeus has given 
the most beautiful artificial system that has ever been bestowed by genius on mankind ; 
and Jussieu has, with unrivalled ability, exhibited the natural affinities of the vegetable 
kingdom. The following Tables exhibit an outline of both methods : — 



586. According to the Linn-iEan Method all Vegetables are furnished with Flowers, which 

fl'-e either 

Visible, 

Stamina and pointal in the same flower, 
Male and female organs distinct, 
Stamina not united either above or below, 
Generally of equal length. 

In Number. Classes. 
One, - - . 1. Monandria. 

Two, - . -2. Diandria, 

Three, - . 3. Triandria, 

Four, - - - i. Tetrandria, 



Five, 

Six, ... 
Seven, - . 
Eight, 

Nine, - - 

Ten, 

Twelve, 

Many, frequently twenty,") 
attached to the calyx, -5 
Many, generally upwards of 
twenty, not attached to 
L the calyx, 
.Of unequal length, 
r Two long, and two short. 



5. Pentand)ia, 



Hexandria, 

Heptandria, 

Octandria, 

Enneandria, 

Decandrla, 

Dodccandria, 



12. Icosandria, 



13. Polyandi-ia, 



14. 



15. 



c Four long, and two short, - 
.Stamina united, 
Cby the filaments, into one body, 

into two bodies, 
< into many bodies, 

I by tlie anthers or tops, into aT 
L cylinder, . . 
I Male organs (stamina) attached T 
j to, raid standing upon the fe- > 
L male (pistillum\ - -3 

.Stamina and pointal in different flowers, 
fon the same plant, - - 21. 
I on different plants, - - 22. 
■i. on the same or different plants T 
j along with hermaphrodite 23. 
L flowers, - - -3 
Or lie concealed from view, and cannot") 04 
be distinctly described, - -3 



Didynamia, - 

Tetradynamia, 

Monadelpfiia, - 
Diade/phia, 
Polyadelphia, - 

Syngenesia, 



20. Gynandria, 



Moncecia, 
Dicecia, 

Polygatnia, 
Cryptogamia, 

K 



Examples. 
Gingor, turmeric. 
Jessamine, privet, olive. 
Valerian, iris, grasses. 
Scabious, teazel, hollj'.. 
f BeU-flower, bind-weed, mullein, thorn- 
L apple. 
Snowdrop, tulip, aloe. 
Horse-chestnut. 
Indian-cress, heath. 
Bay, rhubarb. 
Fraxinella, rue, lychnis. 
Purslane, house-leek. 

Peach, medlar, apple, rose, cinquefoil. 

f Herb-cliristopher, poppy, larkspur, cOt 
^ lumbine. 

f Savory, hyssop, ground-ivy, balm, fox- 
1 glove. 

rScurvy-grass, candy-tuft, water-cress, 
t stock woad. 

Geranium, mallow tribe. 

Fumitory, milk-wort. 

Orange, chocolate-nut. 
("Compound flowers, as dandelion, thistle, 
\_ tansey. 

Orchis, ladies'-slipper, birth.wort. 



Mulberry, nettle, oak, fir. 
Willow, hop, juniper. 

White hellebore, pellitory, orach, fig, 
Ferns, mosses, mushrooms, flags, 



130 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



587, According to the Method of Jussieu all Vegetables are furnished 

are either 



Cotj'ledoneai ; 
furnished 
with two or 
more cotyle- 
dons, or seed- 
lobes, - - 



'Dicoty- 
ledonefE, 
having 
the calyx 
and co- 
rolla dis- 
tinct. 



fThalami- 
florae 
with dis- 
tinct pe- 
tals in- ' 
serted in 
the re- 
ceptacle, 



Pistils nume- 
rous, and sta- i 
mens oppo- ( 
site, 

Pistils solitary, 
or adhering 
together. 
Ovary solitary, 
placenta cen- 
tral, 
Fruit 
tered 
but 
the 
_ base. 

Pistils free, or more or less O 
adhering together, always ^• 
inserted in the calyx, - - J 
Stamens adhering to a co-'i 
roUa, which is not attached r 
_ to the calyx, 3 

Calyx and corolla forming only a single"? 
, envelope, i 



n 

it in scat- "| 
ed cells, j 
, joined on r 
! same I 
;e. - - - J 



5. Calyciflorff, 36. 



6. Corolliflora?, 16. 



iinth Seeds, which 



Orders. 
Ranunculaceee, 
Magnoliaceje, 
&c. 

PapaveracesB, 
Cruciferae, &c. 

Caryophylleas, 
Lineas, &c. 



Simaroubece, 
OchriacecC. 



Terebintaceae, 
Leguminosa?, 
&c. 

Oleina^, Jasmi- 
neas, &c. 



7. Monochla- 
raydeiE, 



Plumbaginese, 
Plantagineae, &c. 



Monocotyle- 
doneffi ; fur- 
nished with 
only one co- 
tyledon, or 
eeed-lobe, - 



In which the fructification is visible. 
In which the fructification is concealed, 



8. Phanerogameje, 18, 

9. Cryiitogaraea;, £ 



f C)'cadeoE;, Hydro- 
t charideas, &c.' 
f Naiadea;, Marsi- 
• I. liaceae, &c. 



With leafy expansions, and known 
sexes, ...... 



10. Foliacea?, - 2, 



Musci, Hepa- 

tiCEB. 

LichenejB, Hypo- 



Acotyledo- 
nece ; vege- 
table beings 
composed of 
a cellular tis- 
sue unprovi- 
ded with ves- - i,,rnpnP!P Hvuo 

embryo is ^ ^'8^- 

without coty- 
ledons. 

The names of the classes are of very little consequence in this method, and the number of orders is not 
to be considered as fixed. That part of a system so new and so comprehensive necessarily admits of much 
improvement by perfecting the groups, the progress to which will more frequently be attained by subdi. 
viding than by uniting. The names of the orders indicate at the same time examples of each, as 
RanunculacecE, Ranunculus, &c. 



Sect. I. The Hortus Bntannicus arranged according to the Linncean System. 

588. The plants grown in Britain, whether native or exotic, are thus arranged according 
to the Linneean system. The genera, of which there are species natives of the country, are 
here marked (*), for the sake of those who may wish to arrange a herbarium or growing 
collection of indigenous plants according to this method. The authorities followed are, 
Sweet's Hort. Suburb. Lond. 1818, and Smith's Comp. Flora Brit. 1816. 



Cl-Ass I. Manandria. Stamen 1. Containing only two Orders. 

1. Monogynia. Style 1. Containing of the natural order of 
Jussieu, Cannece, the genera Canna, Maranta, Thalia, Phry- 
nium ; of the beautiful order ScUamineee, Hedychium, Al- 
pinia, Hellenia, Zingiber, Elettaria, Costus, Kaempferia, 
Amomum, Curcuma, Globbar; of Jimcece, Philydrum ; of 
Onagrariw, Lopezia ; of Nydagines, Boerhaavia ; of Cheiio- 
vodete, Pollichla; *Salicomia; of Naiades, *Hippuris. 
20 Gen. 65 Sp. 

2. Digynia. Styles 2. Containing of Chenopodece, Corisper- 
mum, Blitum ; of Naiades, * CaUitriche. 3 Gen. 5 Sp. 

Class II. Diandria. Stamens 2. Orders 3. 

1. Monogynia. This, the most natural and numeroiis order, 
comprehends the elegant and fragrant Jasminece, the Jas- 
mine, Lilac, O ive, &c. ; also Veronica, and a few labiate 
flowers with naked seeds, as Salvia, Rosemary, &c. natural 
alUes of the fourteenth class ; but having only two stamens, 
they are necessarily ranged here in the artificial system — It 
contains of Jastmnece, Nyctanthes, Jasminium ; of Oleirus, 

* Ligustrum, Olea, Notelaea, Chionanthus, Linociera, 
Omus, Syringa j of Bignoniaceoe, Catalpa ; of Thytnelece, 
Pimelea ; of Oiiagrana, Fontanesia, * Circaea ; of Scrophu- 
larince, * Veronica, Gratiola, Schwenkia, Calceolaria ; 
Acanthacece, Elytraria, Justicia, Eranthemum ; of Lenti- 
bularitE, * Pinguicula, * Utricularia ; of Verbenacete, Galipea ; 
Ghinia, Stachytarpheta ; of Labiatw, * Lycopus, Araethystea, 
Cunila, Ziziphora, Hedeoma, Monarda, Rosmarinus, 

* Salvia, Colunsonia ; of Dipsacete, Morina ; of Rosacece, 
Acaena. 36 Gen. 276 Sp. 

2. Digynia, consists only of Graminece, *Anthoxanthum, a grass 



which, having but two stamens, is separated from its natural 
family in the third class. 1 Gen. 2 Sp. 
3. Trigynia. It contains of Piperacete, Piper. 1 Gen. 28 Sp. 

Class III. Triandria. Stamens 3. Orders 3. 

1. Monogynia. Valeriana is placed here because most of its 
species have three stamens. Here also we find the sword- 
leaved plants. Iris, Gladiolus, Ixia, Sec, also Crocus, and 
numerous grass-like plants, Scha;nus, Cyperus, Scirpus, &c — 
It contains of Dipsacew, * Valeriana, Fedia; of Nyctnginca;, 
Oxybaphus ; of Terebintacew, Cneorum, Comocladia ; of 
Cucurbitaceas, Melothria ; of Caryophylleas, Ortema, Loeflin- 
gia ; of Chenopodete, Polycnemum ; of Acerinoe, Hijipocratea ; 
of IridetE, *Crocus, Trichonema, Geissorhiza, Hesperantha, 
Sparaxis, *Ixia, Anomatheca, Tritonia, Watsonia, Gladio- 
lus, Melasphserula, Antholyza, Babiana, Aristea, Witsenia, 
LaiJeyrousia, Moraea, *Iris, Marica, Pardanthus ; of Coin- 
melineas, Commelina, Aneilema, Callisia ; of Pontederece, 
Leptanthus ; of Hcenwdoracea:, Wachendorfia, Xiphidium, 
DUatris, Haemodorum ; of Restiacece, Xyris ; of Cyperacecs, 
Mariscus, Kyllinga, *C>'perus, Isolepis, *Scirpus, Eleocharis, 
Rhynchospora, •bchoenus, Cladium, Trichophorum, *Eri- 
ophorum ; of Graminece, *Nardus, Lygeum, Comucopiae, 
Cenchrus, *Sesleria, Limnetis. 56 Gen. 346 Sp. 

2. Digynia. This important order consists of the true Grasses. 
Their habit is more easily perceived than defined ; their 
value, as furnishing herbage for cattle, and grain for man, is 
sufficiently obvious. No poisonous plant is found among 
them, except the Z-o/iuni <einu/e)i/Mm, ' said to be intoxicatink 
and pernicious in bread. Their generj are not easily defined. 
Linnaeus, Jussieu, and most botanists, pay regard to the 



Book I. 



LINNiEAN HORTUS BRITANNICUS. 



131 



mimber of florets in eacli spikelet ; but In Arundo this is of 
no moment. Magnificent and valuable worlcs on this family 
have been published in Germany by the celebrated Schreber 
and by Dr. Host. The FL Grtuca also is rich in this depart- 
ment, to which the late l)r. Sibthorp paid great attention. 
Much is to be expected from scientific agriculturists; but 
natuie so absolutely, in general, accommodates each grass to 
its own soil and station, that nothing is more difficult than 
to overcome their habits, insomuch that few grasses can be 
generally cultivated at pleasure — It contains of Gra>ranc(C, 
Trichodium, Sporobolus, *Agrostis, * Knappia, Perotis, 
*Polyi)ogon, *Stipa, Trisetum, *Avena, *Bromus, *Fes- 
tuca, «'rriticum, *Secale, *Hordeum, *Elymus, *LoUum, 
Koeleria, Glyceria, *Poa, Triodia, Calamagrostis, *Arundo, 
*Aii-a, *Melica, Echinaria, Lappago, Eleusine, Chrysurus, 
*Cynosurus, Beckmannia, *DactyUs, Uniola, *Briza, Cyno- 
don, *Milium, *Lagurus, *Alopecurus, *Phleum, Crypsis, 
*Phalaris, Tozettia, Paspalum, Digitaria, *Paiucum, Ortho- 
pogon, Pennisetum, Saccharum, RotbolUa, Michrochloa, 
Xeersia. 50 Gen. 514 Sp. 
3. Tri^ynia is chiefly composed of little pink-like plants, or, 
Cai'tjojihylleir, as Holosteum — TiUma muscosa has the number 
proper to this ordei", but the rest of the genus bears every 
part of the fructification in fours. This, in Linnsean lan- 
guage, is expressed by saying the flower of TUlcca is qvadri- 
*idtis, four cleft, and T. muscosa excludes, or lays aside one 

fourth of the fructification It contains of Restiaceas, *Eri- 

ocaulon ; of Portiilaceu:, *Montia ; of Polygonea;, Koenigia ; 
of CaryDphyllca:, *HoIosteum, *Polycarpon, MoUugo, Minu- 
artia, ^^ueria, Lechea. 9 Gen. 12 Sp. 

Class IV. Tetrandria. Stamens 4. Orders 3. 

1. Monogijnia, A very numerous and various order, of which 
the Proteacea: make a conspicuous part ; Plantago, remark- 
able for its capsula circumscissa, a membranous capsule, 
separating by a complete circular fissure into two parts, as 
in Centnuculus, Rulna, and others of its natural order, whose 
stipulation is remarkable, and the curious Bpimedium, are 
found here. — It contains of Proteacea, Petrophila, Isopogon, 
Protea, Leucospermura, Mimetes, Serruria, Nivenia, Soro- 
cephalus, Spatalla, Persoonia, Grevillea, Hakea, Lambertia, 
Xylomelum, Telopea, Lomatia, Rhopala, Banksia, Dry- 
andra ; of Globvlarice, Globularia, Adina ; of Rubiacew, 
Cephalanthus ; of DipsacecB, *Dipsacus, *Scabiosa, Itnautia ; 
of Nyciaginem, AUionia, Opercularia, Cryptospermum ; of 
Riihiiicece, Spermacoce. *Sherardia, *Asperula, Houstonia, 
•Galium, Crucianella, *Rubia, Catesbaea, Ixora, Pavetta, 
Bouvardia, Siderodendrum, Chomelia, Mitchella, Coccocyp- 
Bilum, Manettia, Oldenlandia ; of Rufacea; Zieria ; of Soia- 

nacece, Witheringia ; of Jasmmea, Penaea ; of " . . 

Curtisia ; of Lorantliacece, Chloranthus ; of Verhenaceoe, 
/Egiphila, Callicarpa ; of Ericece, Blaeria ; of Scroplmlarinee, 
Buddlea, Scoparia ; of Gentianece, Exacum, Sebsea, Frasera ; 
of Plaiitagineie, *Plantago ; of Primulacece, Centunculus ; of 
Rosacea;, *Sanguisorba, *Alchemilla; of V^ites, Cissus; of 
Berberides, Epimedium ; of Cuprifolice, *Comus ; of Terebin- 
tacea, Fagara, Ptelea ; of Onagrarix, Ludwigia, Isnardia ; 
of Salicai-iw, Ammannia ; of Hydrochandtw, *Trapa; of 
Vrticeos, Dorstenia ; of Aroidea, Pothos ; of Blieagni, Elae- 
agnus ; of Saixtalaceas, Santalum ; of Thymelece, Stru- 
thiola ; of Chenopodea, Rivina, Camphorosma. 78 Gen. 
420 Sp. 

% Digynia. It contains of Caryophylleoe, BufFonia ; of ... . 
Hamamelis ; of Papaveracew, Hypecoum. 3 Gen. 

3. Tetragynia. It contains of Rhamni, Myginda, *Ilex, some- 
times furnished with a few barren flowers ; of Boraginew, 
Coldenia ; of Alismaceee, *Potamogeton ; of Naiades, *Rup- 
pia; of Caryophyllew, *Sagina, Moenehia; of Sempervivw, 
"Tillaea; of iincie, *Radiola. 9 Gen. 35 Sp. 

Class V. Pentandria. A very large class. Stamens 5. 
Orders 6. 

I. Monogynia. 1 Style. One of the largest and most important 

orders of the whole system It contains of Boraginew, He- 

liotropium, *Myosotis, Lappula, *Lithospermum, Batschia, 
Onosmodium, *Anchusa, * Cynoglossum, *Pulmonaria, 
♦Symphytum, Cerinthe, Onosma, *Borago, Trichodesma, 
*Asperugo, *Lycopsis, *Echium, Toumefortici, Cordia, 
Bourreria, Ehretia, Hydrophyllum, EUisia; Nolana ? of 
PrimulacecE, Aretia, Androsace, *Primula, Cortusa, Solda- 
nella, Dodecatheon, *Cyclamen, *Hottonia, *Lysimachia, 
♦Anagallis, *Samolus, Coris, Diapensia, Pyxidanthera ; 
of Encece, Cyrilla, Brossaea; of Rlwdoracew , *Azalea; of 
Epacridece, Sprengelia, Andersonia, Lysinema, Epacris, Mo- 
notoca, Leucopogon, Stenanthera, Astroloma, Styphelia ; of 
Plumbaginea, Plumbago ; of Convolvulaceos, *Convolvulus, 
Calystegia, Ipomoea, Retzia ; of Bignoniacex, Coboea ; of 
Polemuniacea;, *Polemonium, Phlox, Ipomopsis, Caldasia; 

of Buttneriaceoe, Lasiopetalum ; of Galax ; of 

of Thymeleee, Scopolia ; of Campanulaceie, Lightfootia, 
♦Campanula, Roella, Phyteuma, Trachelium, Jasione, 
♦Lobelia, Cyphia ; of Goodenovite, Goodenia, Euthales, 
Scaevola, Darnpiera; of Ridnaceoe, Cinchona, Pinckneya, 
Musssenda, Portlandia, Genipa, Gardenia, Oxyanthus, 
Randia, Webera, Erithalis, Morinda, Nauclea, Cephaelis, 
Hamellia, Rondeletia, Macrocnemum, Vanguiera, Dentella, 
Serissa, Psychotria, Coftea, Chiococca, Paederia, Plocama ; 
of Caprijhliw, *I/onicera, Symphoria, Diervilla, Triosteum, 
♦Hedera ; of Combretaceie, Conocarpus; of Santalacew, 
Thesium ; of Nyctaginete, Mirabilis ; of Solanete, Ramonda, 
♦Verbascum, *I)atura, Brugmansia, *Hyoscyamus, Nico- 
tiana, Mandragora, *Atropa, Solandra, Physalis, Nicandra, 
Solanum, Capsicum, Cestrum, Vestia, Lycium ; of Myr- 
»inece, Ardisia ; of Sapotem, Jacquinia, Achras, Chryso- 
phyllum, Sideroxylon, Sersalisia, Bumelia ; of Verbenacea, 
Tectona ; of Rhamni, Elaeodendrum, *Rhamnus, Zizyphus, 
Celastrus, Senacia, *Euonymus, Hovenia, Ceanothus, Poma- 
derris, Phylica ? Brunia, Staavia, Plectronia ; of Diosmea, 
Adenandra, Barosma, Diosma, Agathosma; of Piitosporeas, 
Calodendrum, Bursaria, Billardiera, Pittooporum, Ilea ; of 
Melia t Cedrela, Leea ; of Terebirdaceu:, Mangifera ; of 
Rosacea;, Hirtella ; of Cadi, *Ribes ; of Vites, Vitis ; of 
Cucurbitacea;, Gronovia ; of Geraniw ? *Impatiens ; of Urn- 
iKlliferw, Lagoecia; of Portulacea;, Claytonia; of Violece, 
♦Viola, lonidium ; of Musaccae, Heliconia, Strelitzia ; of 
ArmrarUhacew, Gomphrena, Philoxerus, Achyranthes, Pu- 



palia, DeeringSa, Celosia, Lestibudesia, Altemanthera, ^rua, 
lUecebrum, Paronychia, Anychia, MoUia ; of Chenopodeae, 
Chenolea ; of Salicariw, ♦Glaux ; of Geniianeie, ♦Menyan- 
thes, *Villarsia, Logania, Spigelia, Lisianthus, ♦Chironia, 
Sabbatia, Erytluraea, Eustoma; of Malvaceae, Buttneria, 
Ayenia ; of Apocynew, Strychnos, Gelsemium, Rauwolfia, 
Carissa, Arduma, Cerbera, AUamanda, ♦Vinca, Nerium, 
Wrightia, Echites, Ichnocarpus, Plumeria, Cameraria, Ta- 
bemaemontana, Amsonia. 209 Gen. 1080 Sp. 

2. Digynia. 2 Styles — It contains of Apocynew, Apocynum, 
Melodinus; Asdepiadece, Periploca, Hemidesmus, Seca-- 
mone, Microloma, Sarcostemma, Dsemia, Cynanchum, 
Oxystelma, Gymnema, Calotropis, Xysmalobium, Gompho- 
caiT)us, ♦Asclepias, Gonolobus, Pergularia, Marsdenia, 
Hoya, Stapelia, Piaranthus, Huemia, Caralluma; of Ama- 
ranthacete, Hemiaria ; of Chenopodea;, *Chenopodium, *Beta, 
♦Salsola, Kochia, Anabasis, Bosea; of Ammtacea; *Ulmus ; 
of Saxijragea;, Heuchera ; of Caryopliyllece, Velezia ; of Cen- 
iianew, * Swertia, *Gentiana ; of Convolvulacea;, Falkia, 
Bichondra, E volvulus, Hydrolea, *Cuscuta; of Rubiacew, 
Phyllis ; of Aralia;, Cussonia. 

Umbellifera:. These are mostly herbaceous ; the qualities 
of such as grow on dry ground are aromatic, while the aqua- 
tic species are among the most deadly poisons ; according to 
the remark of Linnajus, who detected the cause of a dreadful 
disorder among horned cattle in Lapland, in their eating 

young leaves cf Cicuta virosa, under water It contains 

♦Eryngium, *Hydrocotyle, Spananthe, ♦Sanicula, *Astran- 
tia, *Bupleurum, *Echinophora, Hasselquistia, *Tordylium, 
♦Caucalis, Artedia, Daucus, Visnaga, *Ammi, *Bunium, 
♦Conium, *SeUnum, *Athamanta, Peuccdanum, *Crith- 
mum, Cachrys, ferula, Laserpitium, *Heracleum, *Ligus- 
ticum, *Angelica, *Sium, *Sison, Bubon, ♦Cuminum, 
♦(Enanthe, «Phellandi-ium, *Cicuta, *jEthusa, Meum, 
♦Coriandrum, Myrrhis, * Scandix, Oliveria, Anthriscus, 
♦Chaerophyllum, *Imperatoria, Seseli, Thapsia, *Pastinaca, 
♦Smyrnium, ♦Anethum, ♦Carum, ♦Pimpinella, *Apium, 
♦iEgopodium. 93 Gen. 487 Sp. 

3. Tngynia. It contains of Terebtntaceoe, Rhus, Spathelia ; of 
CaprtfoHa;, *Viburnum, *Sambucus; of Rhamni, Cassine, 
Staphylea ; of Portulacea:, ♦Tamarix, Turnera, Telephium, 
Corrigiola, Portulacaria ; oi Euphorbia;, Xylophylla; of Ca- 
njoj^iyllea,^ Phamaceum, Drypis ; of Chenopodea;, Basella. 

4. rdragynia. It contains of Capparides f *Pai-nassia. 1 Gen. 
3 Sp. 

5. Pentagynia. It contains of Aralia;, Aralia ; ot Plumhaginea;, 
♦Armeria, *Statice, a beautiful maritime genus, with a kind 
of everlasting calyx; of Caryophyllea; f *Linum; of Cappa- 
rides ? *Drosera ; of Portulacea; Gisekia ; of Sempervivew, 
Larochea, Crassula, a numerous succulent genus ; of Tilia 
ceo;, Mahernia ; of Meliucete, Commersoma ; of Rosacete, 
♦Sibbaldia. 11 Gen. 131 Sp. 

6. Polygynia. It contains of Ranuncidacea;, *Myosurus, a 
remarkable instance of few stamens (though they often ex- 
ceed five) to a multitude of pistils ; also CeratocephaluSj 
Zanthorhiza. 3 Gen. 3 Sp. 

Class VI. Hexandna. Stamens 6. Orders 4. 

1. Monogynia. This, as usual, is the most numerous. The 
Liliaceous family, with or without a spatha, called by Lin- 
naeus the nobles of the vegetable kingdom, constitute its 
most splendid ornament. The beautiful White Lily is 
commonly chosen by popular writers to exemplify the sta- 
mens and pistils. It contains of Pontedereoe, Pontedera 
otMifsaceoe, Musa, Urania ; of Bromdia;, BromeUa, Pitcaimia', 
Tillandsia, Agave, Furcrosa; of Commdinea;, Tradescantia ; 
of Asphoddece, Eucomis, Aphyllanthes, Sowerbaea, *Allium, 
Albuca, Xanthorrhcea, Thysanotus, Eriospermum, Gagea, 
♦Ornithogalum, *Scilla, Meissonia, ♦Asphodelus, *Anthe- 
ricum, Arthropodium, Phalangium, Chlorophytum, Caesla, 
♦Narthecium, Dianella, Eustrephus, ♦Asparagus, Drimia, 

Uropetalon, ♦ Hyacinthus, Muscari, Lachenalia, Dracaena, 
Phylloma, Phormium, Hypoxis, Curculigo, Cyanella ; of 
Amaryllidea;, Haemanthus, *Galanthus, ♦Leucojura, Stru- 
maria, Crinum, Cyrtanthus, Brunsvigia, Amaryllis, ♦Nar- 
cissus, Pancratium, Eucrosia. Doryanthes, Gethyllis; ot 
Hemerocallidea;, Blandfordia, AgapcUithus, ♦Hemerocallis, 
Aletris, Tritoma, Veltheimia, Polianthes, Sanseviera, 
Tulbagia, Brodiaea ? Aloe; of Li lice, ♦Fritillaria, ♦Lilium, 
♦Tulipa, Alstroemeria, Gloriosa, Yucca, Erythronium, 
Uvularia ; of Melanthacece, Bulbocodium ; of Bromdiacete, 
Buonapartea ; of Berberidew, Diphylleia, Nandina ; of Smila- 
cew, Streptopus, ♦Convallaria, Smilacina, ♦Polygonatum, 
Ophiopogon ; of Hannodoi-acea;, Lophiola, Lanaria, Anigo- 
zanthos ; of Berberidex, Leontice, Caulophyllum, ♦Berberis ; 
of Aroidea;, ♦Acorus, Orontium, Tupistra, Peliosanthes ; 
Tacca ? of Palma; Corypha, Licuala, Thrinax, Calamus ; of 
J?()icca?, ♦Juncus, ♦Luzula ; of /i/«jmnj, Prinos ; of Rubiacew, 
Hillia, Richardia ; of Campanvlacew, Canarina ; of Caryo- 
pliyllew, Frankenia; of Salicariw, ♦Peplis; of Graminew, 
Bambusa, Ehrharta. 106 Gen. 730 Sp. 

2. Digynia has but few genera. — It contains of Graminew, 
Oryza, the Rice, of which there now seems to be more than 
one species ; of Convoloulaccw, Falkia ; of Polygonew, Atra- 
phaxis. 3 Gen. 4 Sp. 

3. Trigynia. It contains of Polygonew, ♦Rumex ; of Juncew ? 
Flageilaria ; of Alismacew, ♦Scheuchzeria, ♦Triglochin ; of 
Mclanthaccw, ♦Tofieldia, Melanthium, ♦Colchicum, Helo- 
nias, Nolina ; of Srnilacew f Myrsiphyllum, Medeola, Tril- 
lium ; of Naiades, Aponogeton ; ot Palmw, Sabal. 14 Gen. 
175 Sp. 

4. Polygynia. It contains of Menispermew, AVendlandia; of 
Hydro'cliaridew, Damosonium ; of Alismacew, ♦Actinocarpus, 
♦Alisma. 4 Gen. 9 Sp. 

Ci,Ass VII. Hepiandria. Stamens 7. Orders 4. 

1. Monogynia. It contains of Primulacew, ♦Trientalis ; of 
Pcdicul'ares, Disandra ; of Nydaginew, Pisonia ; of Chenopodew, 

♦Pctiveria; of Accrw, ^sculus; of Jonesia; of 

Aroidea, Dracontium, Calla. 8 Gen. 21 Sp. 

2. Digynia. It contains of Portulacew, Limeum. 1 Gen. 1 Sp- 

3. Tdragynia. It contains of Naiades, ♦Saururus. 1 Gen. 

i}mptagynia. It contains of Sempervivw, Septas. 1 Geo- 
3 Sp. 

K 2 



132 



SCIENCE OF 



GARDENING. 



Part II. 



CtAss VIII. Odandria. Stamens 8. Orders 1. 

1 . Monogfjiua. A very various and rich order, consisting of 
the w'ell known Travreolutn, or Nasturtium, whose original 

■ Latin name, given from the flavor of the plant, like garden- 
cresse;, is now become its Knglish one m every body's mouth. 
The elegant and fanciful Linnaean appellation, equivalent to 
a trophy plant, alludes to its use for decorating bowers, and 
the resemblance of its peltate leaves to shields, as well as 
of its flowers to golden helmets, pierced through and 
through, and stained with blood. Epjlobium, with its allies, 
makes a beautiful part of this order ; but above all are con- 
spicuous the favorite Fuchsia, the American genus Vacci- 
niiim ; the immense and most elegant genus Erica, so 
abundant in southern Africa, but not known in America ; 
and the fragrant Daphne, of which last the Levant possesses 
many charming species — It contains of Geranice ? Tropaso- 
him ; of Melastotnacete, Osbeckia, Rhexia ; of Onagraria;, 
*aDnothera, Gaura, *Epilobium ; of Salicarix, Grislea, 
Lawsonia ; of Melanihacm, Roxburghia ; of Tremcindreas, 
Tetratheca; of Myrtacae, Jambolifera; of Diosmeae, 
Corroea, Boronia ; of Sanatece, Alimusops ; of Savindi, 
Omitrophe, Dimocarpus, Melicocca, Blighia, Ephielis, Koel- 
reuteria ? of Melitt, Guarea; of Terebintacea, Amyris ; Do- 
donaea ? of Aurantuc, Ximenia; of Sanialaceoe, Fuchsia, 
IMemecylon ; of Myrtacea, Baeckia; of GeiifiaJi«E, *Chlora; of 
Campaiiiilacece, INIiehauxia ; of Papaveracete, .TefFersonia ; of 
Ericea;, *Oxvcoccus, Calluna, *Enca ; of RJtodoracece, *Men- 
ziesia ; of Tliymeleic, Lagetta, *Daphne, Dirca, Gnidia, Slei. 
lera, Passerina, Lachntea. 41 Gen. 163 Sp. 

2. Digynia has a few plants, but little known ; among them 
are Galena africana, and Mochringia muscosa. The former 
belongs to Chenopodea, Jind the latter to Caryophyllea. 

2 Gen. 2 Sp. 

3. Trigyma. Polygonum is a genus whose species difTer in 
the number of their stamens and styles, and yet none can 
be more natural. Here therefore the Llnnsean system claims 
our indulgence. Paullinia and Cardiospenmim are more con- 
stant It contains of Polygnne/^, *Polygonum, Coccoloba ; 

of Sapindi, Paullinia, Seriana, Cardiospermum, Sapindus. 

6 (len. 50 Sp. 

4. Tctragynia. Here we find the curious Parts and Adora — 
It contains of Semiiervivos, Calanchoe, Bryophyllum ; of 
Smilacae, *Paris ; of Saxifragex, *Adoxa ; of Caryophyllac, 
Elatine; of Ona^ran>, Haloragis ; of Urifcat, Forskohlea. 

7 Gen. 10 Sp. 

Class IX. Enneandria. Stamens 9. Orders o. 

1. Monogynia. Here we find the precious genus Lnurus, in- 
cluding the Cinnamon, Bay, Sassaftas, Camphor, and many 
other noble plants. — It contains of Lauriiut:, Laurus ; of 
Terebiniaccte, Anacardium ; of Polygonece, Eriogonum. 

3 Gen. 20 Sp. 

2. Trigyitia. It contains of Polygonea, Rheum. 1 Gen. 
7 Sp. 

3. Hexagynia. Containing of Bidotneig, * Butomus. 1 Gen. 
1 Sp. 

Class X. Decandria. Stamens 10. Orders 5. 

1. Monogynia. A numerous and fine assemblage, beginning 
with a tribe of flowers more or less correctly papilionaceous 

and leguminous It contains of Leguminosw, Edwardsia, 

Sophora, Ormosia, Anagvris, Thermopsis, Virgilia, Cyclopia, 
Baptisia, Podalyria, Chorizema, Podolobium, Oxylobium, 
Callistachys, Brachysema, Gompholobium, Burtonia, Jack- 
sonia, V^irninaria, Sphaerolobium, Aotus, DiUwynia, Eutaxia, 
Sclerothamnus, Gastrolobium, Euchilus, Pultenaea, Davie- 
sia, MirbeUa, Cercis, Bauhinia, Hymenoea, Cynometra, 
Cassia, Cathartocarpus, Parkinsonia, Poinciana, Caesalpmia, 
Guilandina, Hyperanthera, Hoffmanseggia, Adenanthera, 
Cadia, Prosopis," Haematoxylon, Copaifera, Schotia ; of Ru- 
tacae, Guaiacum, Zygophyllum, Fagoivia, Tribulus, Dictam- 
nus, Ruta ; of Diosmccs Crowea ; of Solanacae, Codon ; of 

Ericece, Monotropa; of Broseraceco, Dioneea ; of 

Garuga ; of Samydece, Samyda ; of Guttiferoe, Gomphia ; of 
MagnoUte f Quassia ; of Aurantite, Limonia, Murraya, Cookia ; 
of },Ialpigh{ace<e, Gaertnera; of Melicc, Trichilia, Ekebergia, 
Heynea, Melia, S wietenia ; of Onagrarice, J ussieua ; of Cum- 
hretacew, Getonia, QuisquaUs ; of Thyiiutew, Dais ; of Mela- 
stomarece, Melastoma ; of Salicaria, Acisanthera ; of JUwdora- 
B&e, Kalmia, Ledum, Rhodora, *Rhododendron, EpigsBa; 
of Ericete, *Vaccinium, *Andromeda, Enkianthus, Gaul- 
theria, *Arbutus, Clethra, Mylocaryum, *Pyrola, Chima- 
phila ; of Sanfalacew, Bucida ; of Sdpotea ? Inocarpus ; of 
Ehenacece, Styrax. 92 Gen. 4 13 Sp. 

2. Digynia. Here we find Sajcifraga, remarkable for having 
the germen inferior, half inferior, and superior, in different 

species It contains of Ebenaceis, Royena ; of Potiulacece, 

Trianthema, Scleranthus ; of Ciinoniacecc, Cunonia ; of Sajci- 
frageic; Hydrangea, * Chrysosplenium, * Saxifraga, Tiarella, 
Mitella; of CarijophyUew, G\-psophila, * Saponaria, * Di- 
anthus. 12 Gen.' 160 Sp. 

3. Trigi/nia. Contains of Carynpkyllece, * Cucubalus, * Silene, 

* Stcllaria, * Arenaria, * Cherleria ; of Polygonece, Brun- 
nichia ; of Raniinculacece, Garidella ; of Mulpighiacecc, I\Ial- 
pighia, Banisteria ? 9 Gen. 158 Sp. 

4. Peniagynia. Containing of f'erebiidaccce ? Averrhoa ; Spon- 
dias; of Seinpervivce, * Cotyledon, *Sedum, Penthorum ; 
of Geranice f Grielum, * Oxalis ; of Caryophyllece, 

* Agrostemma, * Lychnis, * Cerastium, * Spergula. 1 Gen. 
6 Sp. 

6. Di'cagynia. Containing of Clienopodem, Phytolacca. 11 Gen. 
164 Sp. 

Class XI. Dodecjndria. Stamens 12 to 19. Orders 6. 

1. Moitngynia. A rather numerous and very various order, 
with scarcely any natural affinity between the genera. Some 
of tliein have twelve, others fifteen or more stamens, which 
should be mentioned in their characters — It contains of • 
Aristiilnchiie, * jVsarum ; of Papaveracece, Bocconia; of Sa- 
piite c, Bassia ; of Melastonuicecn, Blakea ; of Rhodoraceie, Be- 
jaria ; of Guttifera-, Garcinia ; of Ebenacece, Halesia ; of 
MyrlaceiE, Decumaria ; of RItamnece, Aristotelia; of Melue, 
Canella ; of Cnpparidea:, Crata;va ; of Tiliacetc, Triumfetta ; 
of Ritfaceus, Pc'ganum ; of Ericece ? Hudsonia ; of Ficoidem, 
Nitraria; of Porttilaccce, Portulaca, Talinum, Anacamp- 
seros ; of Salicaritr, * Lvthrum, Cuphea j of Mcdvaccce, 
Kleinhofia. 22 Gen. 51 Sp. 



2. Digynia. Containing of Ciinoniaceiv, CalUcoma ; of Til fc.r, 
HeJiocarpus; of Rosacea-, *Agrimonia. 5 Gen. S Sp. 

3. Trigynia. Containing of Cappiiridexu f * Reseda; of Eu- 
plwrbui; * Euphorbia; of Ehcnacea:, ^'isnea. 3 Gen. 
139 Sp. 

4. Tctragynia. Containing of Polygonem, Calligonum. 1 Gen. 
1 Sp. 

5. Peniagynia. Containing of Ficoidece, Glinus. 1 Gen. 1 Pp. 

6. Dodecagynia. Containing of Sempervivie, *Sempervivuin. 
1 Gen. 17 Sp. 

Class XII. Icasandria. Stamens 20 or more, inserted into 
theCalj-x. Orders 3. 

1. Monogynia consists of fine trees, bearing for the most part 
stone-firuits, as the Peach, Plum, Cherry, &c. though the 
leaves and other parts are bitter, acrid, and sometimes very 
dangerous, owing to a peculiar essential oil, known by its 
bitter-almond flavor. The ;AIyrtle tribe, so plentiful in New 
Holland, is another natural order, comprehended chiefly 
under Icosandria Mono^nia, abounding in a fragrant and 
■wholesome aromatic oil. — It contauis of Cadi, Cactus, 
Rhipsalis ; of Loasece, Bartonia ; of Myrlacece, Philadelphus, 
Leptospermum, Fabricia, Jletrosideros, Psidium, Eugenia, 
Caryophyllus, Ulyrtus, Calyptranthes, Eucalyjjtus, Punica; 
of Rosacece, Amvgdalus, * Pruuus, Armeniaca, Chryso- 
balanus. IS Gen. 178 Sp. 

2. Di-Pentaoynia. In this order it is most conrenient to in- 
clude sucli plants as have fiom two to five stvles, and 
occasionally, from accidental luxuriance only, one or two 
more. Pyrus is an example of it. Spiraea stands here, 
most of its species havin" five styles, though some have a 
much greater number. Here is Mesembryanthemum, a vast 
and brilliant exotic genus, of a succulent habit, abound- 
ing in alkaline salt — It contains of Rosacea; M'aldsteinia, 
* Mespilus, * Pyrus, * Cydonia, * Spiraea ; of Ficoidear, 
Sesuvium, Terragonia, lilesembryanthemum, Aizoon. 9 
Gen. 503 Sp. 

3. Polygynia. An entirely natural order of genuine Rosaceous 
flowers. Here we find" Rosa, Rubus, Fragaria, PotentUUt, 
TormentiUa, Geum, Dryas, and Comarum, all elegant plants, 
agreeing in the astringent qualities of their roots, bark and 
foliage, and in their generally eatable, always umocent fVuit. 
The'vegetable kingdom does' not afford a more satisfactory 
example of a natural order, composed of natural genera, 
than this ; and Linn^us has well illustrated it in the Flora 

Lapponica It contains of Rosacea; *Roia, *Rubus, Dali- 

oarda, *Fragaria, *Comarum, *Potentilla, *Tormentilla, 
*Geum, *Dryas, Calycanthus. 10 Gen. 2 10 Sp. 

Class XIII. Polyamlria. Stamens numerous, inserted into 
the Receptacle. Orders 5. 

1. Monogynia. The genera of this order form a numerous 
and various assemblage of handsome plants, but many are 
of a suspected quality. Among them are the Poppv, the 
Caper-shrub, the Sanguinaria canadensis, remarkable for its 
orange juice, like our Celandine ; also the beautiful genus 
Cistiis, with its copious but short-lived flowers, some of 
■which have irritable stamens ; and the splendid aquatic 
tribe of Nymplma — It contains of Capparideac, Capparis ; 
IVIarcgravia ? of Rammculaceoe, *ActSEa ; of Panaieraceie, 
Sanguinaria, Podophyllum, * Chelidomum, * Glaucium, 

*Papaver, Argemone ; of SaiTacenia ; of 

Nymphceacece, *Nymph3ea, Nuphar, Euryale ; of Tiliacece, 
Bixa, Sloanea, Aubletia, Sparmannia, Muntingia, Grewia. 
*Tilia, Corchorus ; of Guttifera; Grias, Calophyllum, Mam- 
mea, Ochna, Elaeocarpus ; of Myrtacea, Alangium ; of io ■ 
asea; Mentzelia ; of Salicariw, Lagerstroemia ; of Aurantucy 
^gle ; of Cisti, Cistus, *Helianthemum. 32 Gen. 161 Sp. 

2. Digynia. Containing of iJu/!0»iiace(E, Bauera ; of Ameniacete, 
Fothergilla ; of Magnolite ? Curatella ; of Ranunculacea, 
Paeonia. 4 Gen. 21 Sp. 

3. Trigynia. Containing of DjV/e/n'aceffi, Hibbertia ; of Ranun- 
culucete, -Jf Delphinium, Aconitum. 3 Gen. 36 Sp. 

4. Peniagynia. Contauiing of Ranuncnlacece, Cimicifiica, 
*Aquilegia, Nigella ; of Ficoirfeip, Reaumuria. 4 Gen. 18 Sp. 

5. Polygynia. An order for the most part naturad, compre- 
hending some fine exotic trees, as Dilknia, Liriodendron, the 
Tulip-tree, the noble Magnolia, &o. To these succeed a 
family of plants, either herbaceous or climbmg, of great 
elegance, but of acrid and dangerous qualities, as Anemone, 
in a single state the most lovely, in a double one the most 
splendid oniament of our parterres in the spring ; Atragene 
and Clematis, so gi-aceful for bowers; Thalidrvm, Adonis, 
Ranunculus, Trollius, Hellehorns and Caltha, all conspicuous 
in our gardens or meadows, which, with a few less familiar, 
close this class — It contains of Nymphceacece, Nelumbium ; 
of DiUeniacece, DUlenia; Magnoliacea, Liriodendron, Mag- 
nolia, Miehelia; of Annoni, Uvaria, lUiciuni, Annona, 
Porcelia, Xylopia ; of Ramtnculace(g,*ile\i3Xica, * Anemone, 

*Piilsatilla, Atragene, *Clematis, *Thalictrum, *Adonis, 
Knowltonia, *Ficaria, *Ranunculus, *TroUius, Isopyrura, 
Eranthis, *Helleborus, Coptis, *Caltha, Hvdropeltis, Hy- 
drastis. 28 Gen. 185 Sp. 

Class XIV. Didynamia. Stamens 2 long and 2 short. Or- 
ders 2, each on the whole very natural. 

1. Gymnospermia. Seeds naked, in the" bottom of the cah-x, 
four, except in Phryma, wMch has a solitary seed. Corolla 
monopetalous and irregular, a little inflated at the base, and 
holding honey, without any particular nectary. Stamens in 
two pairs, incurved, with the style between 'them, so that 
the impregnation rarely fails. The plants of this order are 
mostly aromatic, and none, we beheve, poisonous. The 
calyx is either in five neariy equal segments, or two-lipped. 
Most of the genera afford excellent essential characters, 
taken frequently from the corolla, or from some other part. 
— It contains of Labiaia, ■*Ajuga, Anisomeles, *Teucrium, 
"Westringia, Satureja, Thymbra, Hyssopus, Pycnanthemum, 
■* Nepeta, Elsholtzia, Lavandula," Sideritis," Bvstropogon, 
■*Mentha, Perilla, Hyptis, Lepechinia, *Glechoma, *La- 
mium, *Galeopsis, *Galeobdolon, * Betonica, *Stachys, 
*Ballota, *Marrubium, *Leonurus, Phlomis, Leucas, Le- 
onotis, MolucceUa, *Clinopodiuin, *Origanum, *Thymus, 
Acynos, Calamintha, Melissa, Dracocephalum, *Melittis, 
Ocymum, Plectranthus, Trichostema, Prostanthera, ■*Scu- 
tellaria, *PruneIla, Cleonia, Prasium, Plu^ma; of Verbe- 
benacete, Selago. 48 Gen. 279 Sp. 



Book I. 



LINN/EAN IICRTUS BUITANNICUS. 



133 



2. Attgicsyiermiu. Seeds in a capsule, and generally vevy nume- 
rous. The plants of this order have ihe Rroatest ))osoible 
affinity with some families in Pentamlriii Monof^ijiiia. Some 
species even vary from one class to the other, as Digtionia 
radicans, and Antirrliinum lAmiria, in which the irregular 
corolla becomes regular, and the four unequal stamens are 
changed to five equal ones ; nor does this depend, as has been 
asserted, on the action of any extraneous pollen upon the 
stigmas of the parent plant, neither are the seeds always 
abortive. No method of arrangement, natural or artificial, 
could provide against sruch anomalies as these, and therefore 
imperfections must be expected in every system — It con- 
tains of Verbenacea', Hebenstretia, Clerodendnim, Volka- 
meria, Holmskioldia, Vitex, Cornutia, Hosta, Gmelina, 
Petrsea, Citharexylum, Duranta, Lantana, Spielmannia, 
Zapania, Priva, Aloysia, *Verbena ; of Myoporincc, Myopo- 
rum, Stenochilus, Bontia, Avicennia ; of Pedaliiice, Peda- 
lium ; of Digiumiacew, Bignonia, Sesamum, Tourrettia, Mar- 
tinia ; of Gesiierece, Gloxinia, Gesneria ; of Orobanchecc, *La' 
thraea, *Orobanche ; of Acaidhacecc, Acanthus, Thunbergia, 
Barleria, Kuellia, Blechum, Aphelandra, Crossandra ; of 
Scrophularinw , Limosella, Browallia, Stemodia, Mazus, Lin- 
dernia, Herpestis, Capraria, Teedia, Besleria, Trevirana, 
Columnea, Husselia, Dodartia, Halleria, Mimulus, Home- 
mannia, *Digitalis, *Scrophularia, Penstemon, Chelone, 
Celsia, Alonsoa, Maurandia, Cymbaria, Nemesia, Anarrhi- 
num. *Antirrhinum, *Linaria ; of Pedicularecc, *Gerardia, 
*Pe<iicularis, Melampyrum, *llhinanthus, Bartsia, Cas- 
tilleja, *Euphrasia, Buchnera, Manulea, Erinus, *Sibthorpi ; 
of Sulanece ? Bninfelsia, Crescentia, Anthocercis ; of Capri- 
fnlue, *LinnaEa; of Riiiacew, Melianthiis. 81 Gen. 346 Sp. 

Class XV. Tdmdijnamia. Stamens 4 long and 2 short. 
Orders 2, perfectly natural. Flowers cruciform 

1. Siliculosa. Fruit a roundish pod, or pouch. In some 
genera it is entire, as Draba ; in others notched, as Thlaspi, 

and Iberis It contains of CrutiferiE, *Cakile, *Crambe, 

*Myagrum, Euclidium, Rapistrum, Bunias, *Coronopus, 
Biscutella, I'eltaria, Clypeola, *Isatis, Succowia, Vella,- 
Anastatica, ^Ethionema,. *Thlaspi, . *Hutchinsia, *Tees- 
dalia, *Iberis, *Lepidium,*Cochlearia, *Subularia, *Draba, 
Petrocallis, Camelina, *Alyssum, Farsetia, Vesicaria, Lu- 
naria, Ricotia. 30 Gen. 120 Sp. 

2. SUiquosa. Fruit a very long pod. Rome genera have a 
calyx clausus, its leaves slightly cohering by their sides, as 
Raphanus, and Cheirantltus. Others have a spreading or 
gaping calyx, as Car'damine, and Sisymbrium.. 

Cfcome is a very irregular genus, alhed in habit, and even 
in the number of stamens of several species, to the Polyan- 
dria Monogynia. Its fruit, moreover, is a capsule of one 
cell, not die real two-celled pod of this order. Most of its 
species are foetid and very poisonous, whereas scarcely any 
plants properly belonging to this class are remarkably noxious, 
sir J. E. Smith has great doubts concerning the disease 
called Raphania, attributed by Linnaeus to the seeds of Ra- 
phanus Raplianistrum. 

The cruciform pUmts are vulgarly called antiscorbutic, and 
supposed to be of an alkalescent nature. Their essential oil, 
■which is generally obtainable in very small quantities by dis- 
tillation, smells like volatile alkali, and is of a very acrid 
quality. Hence the foetid scent of water in which cabbages, 
or other plants of this tribe, have been boiled. 

It contains of Cruciferce, Heliophila, *Cardamine, *Ara- 
bis, Macropodium, *Turritis, *Barbarea, *Nasturtium, 
*Sisymbrium, ^Erysimum, Notoceras, *Cheiranthus, *Ma- 
thiola, Malcomia, *Hesperis, Erucaria, *Brassica, *Sinapis, 
*Raphanus, Chorispermura ; of Capparidece, Cleome. 20 Gen. 
164 Sp. 

Class XVI. Monadelphia. Stamens united by their filaments 
into one tube. Orders 8, distinguished by the number of 
their stamens. 

1. Triandriu. Tliis order contains the singular Cape plant 
Aphyteia, consisting of a large flower and succulent fruit, 
springing immediately from the root, without stem or leaves. 
— It contains of Leguminosai, Tamarindus ; of Iridece, Pa- 
tersonia, Ferraria, Tigridia, Galaxia. 5 Gen. 11 Sp. 

2. Pcntandria. Containing of Tiliaceas, Waltheria, Her- 
mannia ; of Malvacew, Melochia, Melhania, Ochroma ; of 
Passijloreie, Passiflora ; of Oeraniacea;, *Erodium. 7 Gen. 
92 Sp. 

3. Heplandria. Contains of Oeraniacae, Pelargonium. 1 Gen. 
175 Sp. 

4. Octarulria. Contains of Melia, Aitonia. 1 Gen. 1 Sp. 

5. Decandria. Contains of Geraniacew, *Geranium ; of Legumi- 
nasce, Brownea. 2 Gen. 41 Sp. 

6. Dodecandria. Contains of Geraniacew, Monsonia ; of Malvacete, 
Helicteres, Dombeya, Pentapetes, Pterospermum. 5 Gen. 
13 Sp. 

7. Polyandria, a very numerous and magnificent order, com- 
prising, of Malvacew, Carolinea, Adansonia, Bombax, La- 
gimea, Njipfea, Sida, Cristaria^ Palavia, Malachra, *A1- 
thaea, * Malva, * Lavatera, Ruizia, Malope, Kitaibelia, 
Urena, Gossypium, Hibiscus, Pavonia, Achania, Myrodia, 
Gordonia ; of^ riViacCfB, Stuartia; of Aurantiie, Camellia; of 
Myrtaceai, Barringtonia, Gustavia ; of . . . . . .Careya. 27 Gen. 

2it)Sp. 

Class XVII. Dimlelphia. Stamens united by their filaments 
into two parcels, both sometimes cohering at the base. 
Orders 4, distinguished by the number of their stamens. 
Flowers almost universally papilionaceous. 

1. Pentandria. Containing of Scrophularince, Monnieria ; of 
Leguminosw, Petalostemum. 2 Gen. 5 Sp. 

2. Hexandria. Containing of Papaveracca, Corydalis, Cysti- 
capnos, *Fumaria. 3 Gen. 19 Sp. 

3. Octavdria. Containing of Po/!t/g-ate, *Polygala, Securidaca. 
2 Gen.2 9 Sp. 

4. Decandria is by far the most numerous, as well as natural 
order of this class, consequently the genera are difficult to 
characterise. 

The genera are arranged in sections, variously charac- 
terised. 

(«■) Stamens all united, that is, all in one set ; as Spartium. 
(/j) Stigma downy, without the character of the preceding 
section ; as I'isum. 
U) Legume imperj'edly divided into two cells, always, as in all 



the following, without the characttr of th» preceding sec- 
tions ; as Astrajfulus. 

(d) Legume rvttk scarcely more than one seed ; as Psoralen. 

(e) Legume cmnposed of single-valued joints, which are rarely 
solitary ; as Hedysarum. 

(f) Legume of one cell, with several seeds ; as Melilolus. 
Leguminous plants are rarely noxious to the larger Irir.es 

of animals, though some species of Galega intoxicate fish. 
The seeds of Cytisus Laburnum have of late bei;n found 
violently emetic, and those of Lalhyrus sativiis have been 
supposed at Florence to soften the bones, and cause death j 
we know of no other similar instances in this class, whicOi is 
one of the most abundant in valuable esculent plants. The 
negroes have a notion that the beautiful little scarlet and 
black seeds of Abrus precatorius, so frequently used for neck- 
laces, are extremely poisonous, insomuch that half of one is 
sufficient to kill a, man. This is totally incredible. Linnaeus 
however asserts. Sir J. E. Smith thinks, rather too abso- 
lutely, that " among all the leguminous or papilionaceous 
tribe, there is no deleterious plant to be found." 

It contains of Leguminosa, Nissolia, Dalbergia, Pongamia, 
Pterocarpus, Amerimnum, Dipterix, Abrus, Erythrina, 
Butea, Piscidia, -Borbonia, *Spartiuni, *Genista, Lebeclda, 
Rafnia, Aspalathus, Sarcophyllum, Stauracanthus, *Ulex, 
Amoi-pha, Platylobium, Bossiaea, Scottia, Templetonia, 
Goodia, Loddigesia, Wiborgia, Crotalaria, Hovea, «Ononis, 
*Anthyllis, Arachis, Lupinus, Carpopogcn, Phaseolus, L'o- 
lichos, Stizolobium, Glycine, Apios, Kennedia, Cylista, Cli- 
toria, Galactia, *Pisum, Ochrus, *Oifobus, Lathyriis, *\'icia, 
*Ervum, *Cicer, Liparia, Cytisus, MuUera, Geoli'roya, Ro- 
binia, Colutea, Swainsona, Sutheilandia, Lessertia, Gly- 
cyrrhiza, Sesbana, CoroniUa, *Ornithopus, *Hi])pocrepis, 
Scorpiurus, Smithia, TEschynomene, Hallia, Lespedeza, 
*Heaysarum, Zornia, Fleniingia, Indigofera, Tephrosia, 
(lalega, Phaca, Oxytropis, *Asti-agalus, Biserula, Dalea, 
Psoralea, Melilotus, Lupinaster, *Trifolium, *Lotus, Bo- 
rycnium, Trigonella, *Medicago. 88 Gen. 800 Sp. 

Class XVIII. Polyadelphia. Stamens united by their fila- 
ments into more than two parcels. Orders 3, distinguished 
by the number or insertion of their stamens, which last 
particular Linnteus here overlooked. 

\. Decandria. Ten stamens. Contains of Jl/c/hiacca;, the Theo- 
broma, or Chocolate-nut-tree. 1 Gen. 2 Sp. 

2. Dodecandria. - Stamens, or rather anthers, from twelve to 
twenty, or twenty five, their filaments unconnected with the 
calyx. — It contains of Malvacew, Bubroma, Abroma. 2 Gen. 
3 Sp. 

3. Icosandriu. Stamens numerous, their filaments inserted 
(in several parcels) into the calyx — It contains of Myrtacew, 
Melaleuca, Tristania, Calothamnus, Beaufortia. 4 Gen.' 
32 Sp. 

4. Polyandria. Stamens vei-y numerous, unconnected with tlie 
calyx — It contains of Ebenacew, Hopea ; of Aiirantew, Ci - 
trus ; of Guttiferw, Xanthochymus ; of Hypericinw, *Ky • 
pericum, Ascyrum. 6 Gen. 65 Sp. 

Class XIX. Stjngenesia. Anthers united into a tube. Flowers 
compound. Orders 5. 
This being truly a natural class, its orders are most of them 
equally so, though some are liable to exceptions. 

1. Polygamia wgualis. In this each floret, taken separately, is 
perfect or united, being furnished with its own perfect stamens 
and pistil, and capable of bringing its seed to maturity with- 
out the assistance of any other floret. The order consists of 
three sections. 

(a) Florets all ligulate, or strap shaped, called by Toumefort 
scmtflosculous. These flowers are generally yellow, sometimes 
blue, very rarely reddish. They expand in a morning, and 
close towards noon or in cloudy weather. Their herbage is 
commonly milky and bitter; as in Leontodon, Tragopogon, . 
Hieradum, and Cicliorium. 

(b) Flowers globose, generally uniform and regular, their 
florets all itibular, Jive-cleft, and spreading; as Carduus. 

(t) Florvers discoid, their florets all tubular, regular, crowded,, 
and parallel, forming a surface nearly flat, or exactly conical. 
Their color is most generally yellow, in some cases pink. 
Santolina and Bidens are examples of this section. 

It contains of Cichoracew, Geropogon, * Tragopogon, Troxi- 
mon, Amopogon, Scorzonera, Picridium, * Sonchus, * Lac- 
tuca, Chondrilla, *Prenanthes, * Leontodon, * Apargia, 
* Thrincia, * Picris, * Hieracium, * Crepis, * Helminthia, 
Tolpis, Andryala, Rothia, Krigia, Hyoseris, Hedypnois, 
Seriola, * Hipochteris, * Lapsana, Zacintha, Rhagadiolus, 
Catananche, * Cichorium, Scolymus ; of Cynarocephalas 
*Arctium, *Serratula, *Carduus, *Cnicus, "^Onopordum, 
Berardia, Cynara, Carlina, Atractylis, Acama, Stokesia 
Stobaea, Carthamus, Staehelina, Pteronia ; of Corymbiferw 
Venionia, Liatris, Mikania, *Eupatorium, Ageratum, Stevia, 
Cephalophora, Hymenopappus^ Melananthera, Marshallia, 
Spilanthes, *Bidens, Lagasca,. Lavenia, Cacalia, Kleinia, 
Ethulia, Piqueria, *Chrysocoma, Tarchonanthus, Calea, 
Humea, Bassinia, Caesulia, Ixodia, *Santolina, Anthanasia, 
Balsamita, Pentzia. 74 Gen. 274 Sp. 

2. Polygamia superjlua. Florets of the disk perfect or united ; 
those of the margin furnished with pistils only ; but all pro- 
ducing perfect seed. 

(a) Discoid, the florets of the margin being obsolete or in- 
conspicuous, from the smallness or pecuhar form of the 
corolla ; as Artemisia. 

(b) Ligulate, two-lipped, of which Perdicium, a rare exotic 
genus, is the only instance. 

(c) Radiant, the marginal florets ligulate, forming spreading, 
conspicuous rays ; as in Bellis. This seems an approach of 
the third section of the former order towards what is equi- 
valent to becoming double in other tribes. Accordingly, 
the Anthemis nobihs, with Chrysanthemum, Leucanthemum, 
and some others, occasionally have their whole disk changed 
to ligulate florets, destitute of stamens, and consequently 
abortive. Such are actually called double flowers in this 
class, and very properly. Many exotic species so circum- 
stanced are met with in gardens. A very few strange anoma- 
lies occur in this section ; one, Sigesbecla'a, having but three 
stiamens, instead of five, the otherwise universal number in 
the class ; and Tussilago hybrida, as well as Parado.ra of Ret- 
zius, having distinct anthers. Nature therefore, even in tliis 
most natural class, is not quite without exceptions 



SCIENCE OF 



GARDENING. 



Part II. 



It contains of CorynO/iJira, *Tanacetum, *Artemisia, 
*Gnaphalium, Xerantheraum, Elichrysurfi, Cai-pesium, Bac- 
charis, *Conyza, Madia, *Erigeron, *Tussilago, *Senecio, 
*Aster, *Soiidago, *Cineraria, *lnula, Grindelia.TodoIepis, 
Arnica, Doronicum, Perdicium, Tetragonotheca, Ximenesia, 
Helenium, *Bems, fBelUum, Dahlia, Tagetes, Heterosper- 
mum, Schkuhria, Pectis, Leysera, Relhania, Zinnia, *Chry- 
santhemum, *Pyrethrum, *Matricaria, Boltonia, Lidbeckia, 
Cenia, Cotula, Grangea, Anacyclus, *Anthemis, Saiivitalia, 
*AciulIea, Balbisia, -Vmellus, Starkea, Eclipta, Ciirysan- 
thellum, Sieeesbeckia, Verbesina, Synedrella, Galinsogea, 
Acmella, Zaluzania, Pascalia, Hriiopsis, Buphthedmura. 
60 Gen. 675 Sp. 

3. Poliigarniafrastanea. Florets of the disk, as in the preceding, 
pertect or united ; those of the margin neuter, or destitute of 
pistils as well as of stamens ; only some few genera having the 
rudiments of pistils in their radiant florets. This order is, 
still more evidently than the last, analogous to double flowers 

of other classes It contaips of Cori/mbifercr, Helianthus, 

(ialcirdia, Rudbeckia, Cosmea, Coreopsis, Osmites, Pallasia, 
Sclerocarpus, Cullumia, Berckheya, Didelta, Gorteria, Ga- 
zaiiia, Cryptostemma, Arctotheca, Sphenogyne ; of Cijnaro- 
cephalw, Zicgea, *Ceataurea, Galactites. 19 Gen. 177 Sp. 

4. Polyfjamia necessaria. Florets of the disk furnished with 
stamens only; those of the margin or radius, only with pistils ; 

so that both" are necessary to each other It contains of C'o- 

rymhiferx, Milleria, Flaveria, Baltimora, Silphium, Alcina, 
Polymuia, r.Ielanr.'odium, Cha;)talia, Calendula, Arctotis, 
Osteospermum, t)thonna, Hipjiia, Gymnostyles, Psiadia, 
Eriocephalus, Fila^jo, Micropus, Partlieniura, Iva. 20 Gen. 

100 Sp. 

5. Poly^amia segregaia. Several ilowers, either simple or com- 
pound, but with united tubular anthers, and with a partial 
calyx, all included in one general calyx. — It contains of Co- 
rip'nhifem, Elephantopus, (Kdera, Stoebe, Nauenburgia; of 
Ctiniiroceplialcc ? Sphoeranthus, Echinops, Kolandra, Brotera, 
G'undelia. 10 Gen. 17 Sp. 

Class XX. Gynandria. Stamens inserted eitlicr upon the 
style or germen. Orders 5. 

1. Monamlria. Stamen, or sessile anther, one only — It con- 
tains of Ordiidece, *Orchis, Gymnadenia, *Aceras, *Hevmi 
nium, Habenaria, Bartholina, Serapiiis, *Ophrys, *Satyriura, 
Disa, Pterygodium, Disperis, Goodyera, Neottia, Ponthieva, 
Dim-US, Thelymitra, *Listera, Epipactis, Pogonia, Caladenia, 
Glossodia, Pterostylis, Caleya, C'alopogon, Arethusa, Bletia, 
Geodorum, Calypso, Malaxls, Corallorrhiza, Isochilus, Or- 
nithidium, Stelis, Pleurothallis, Octomeria, Aerides, Cry})tar- 
rhena, Dendrobiuni, Gomesa, Cymbidium, Brassia, Onci- 
dium, Cyrtopodium, Brassavola, Broughtonia, Epidendrum, 
Vanilla. 48 Gen. ITi Sp. 

2. Ditiiidrin. Containing of Orchiclete, *Cypripedium ; of Styli- 
Jtir, Stylidium ; ofUiiiceief Gunnera. 5 Gen. 10 Sp. 

3. He.rumlria. Containing of Aristolochiw , * Aristolochia. 
1 Gen. 19 Sp. 

Class XXI. Moncecia. Stamens and pistils in separate flowers, 
but both growing on the same individual plant. Orders 9. 

1. Monandria. Contains of Naiades, Zannichellia, *Chara ; of 
C/je/jo|)o,fca', Ceratocanius ; of Uriicece, Artocarpus; of Casua- 
j-iHcrt", Casuarina. 5 Gen. 16 Sp. 

2. Viandria. Contains of Cucurbitaceae, Anguriaj of Naiades, 
*Lemna. 2 Gen. 5 Sp. 

3. Trinitdria. Contains of ri/;)/)!;!*, *Tyi>ha, *Sparganium; 
of Gramhua:, Zea, Tripsacum, Coix, Olyra ; of Cyperacets, 
*Carex ; of Ameutucew, Comptonia ; of Chenopodeae, Axyris ; 
of Eiiphorbiucea, Tragia; of Laurina, Hemandia. 11 Gen. 

101 Sp. 

4. Tetrandria. Contains of Rhamni? Aucuba; of Diosmete, 
Empleunxm; of O/ia^rartiE, Serpicula ; of Plantaginca;,*hit- 
torella ; of Ameniacew, *Ahius ; of Euphorbiacex, Cicca, 
*Buxus, Pachysandra; of Cheiiopodea, Diotis; of Urticea, 
*Urtica, Boehmeria, iMorus. 12 Gen. 41 Sp. 

5. Pentiindria. Contains of Menispermeie ?, Schisandra ; of Corym- 
bijerwf Nephelium, Xanthium, Ambrosia, Franseria ; Cucur- 
6(<acecE, Lutfa; yl»nnraH</(«ce«', Amaranthus. 7 Gen. 48 Sp. 

6. Hexandria. Contains of Gramfjifiie, Zizania, Pharus ; of flu- 
biaceae, Guettarda; of fainw, Cocos, Bactris, Elate, Sagus. 
7 Gen. 11 Sp. 

7. Polyandria. Stamens more than seven. Contains of Naiades, 
*Ceratophyllum,*MyriophyUum ; of^/;«m«cea?,*Sagittaria; 
of Bcgoniacece, Begonia; of Eupliorbiacece, Acidoton; of Co- 
iiifira, Salisburia ; of Gramiiieas, Pariana ; of Vrticece, The- 
lygonum; of iioiacae, *Poterium; of Terebintacece, Juglans; 
of Ameiddcex, *p,uercus, *Fagus, *Castanea, *Betula, *Car- 
pinus, Ostrya, *Corylus, Platanus, Liquidambar ; of Ariodea, 
*Arum, Caladium ; of Palmce, Caryota. 22 Gen. 189 Sp. 

8. Monadelphia. Coatains of Palmcc, Areca; of Cmijerce, 
* Pinus, Thuja, Cupressus, Podocarpus ; of Euphorbiacece, 
Plukenetia, Dalechampia, Acalyphei, Croton, Jatropha, Rici- 
nus, Omphalea, Hippomane, Sapium, Phyllanthus, Stillingia, 
Aleurites, Hura; of Sterculiaceee, Sterculia; of Malpighiacete, 
Heretiera ; of CncurUtacea;, Trichosanthes, Momordica, Cu- 
curbita, Cucumis, *Bryonia, Sicyos. 26 Gen. 138 Sp. 

9 Gynandria. Contains of Euplivrbiaceoo, Andrachne. 1 Gen. 
1 Sp. 

Class XXII. Dicecia. Stamens and pistils in separate flowers, 
situated on two separate plants. Orders 13. 

1. Monamh-ia. Contains of Pandanete, Pandanus. 1 Gen. 
4 Sp. 

2. Diandria. Contains of Uriicece, Cecropia; of Amentaceae, 
*Salix; of Etiplwrhir.cea;, Bory a. 3 Gen. 87 Sp. 

3. TriandHa. Contains of Eaeea? ? *Empetrum; of Terebinta- 
cece, Sti\a.s;o ; of Santalacece ? Osvris ; of Restiacew, Willdenovia, 
Restio, I^legia ; of Patotp, PhdenLx. 7 Gen. 12 Sp. 

4. Tefrajidia. Contains of fiiihiaceo;, Anthospermum ; of 

Trophis, Schsefferia, Picramnia ; of Tcrebhitacew, Antidesma ; 
of OnagrariiE, Montinia ; of Loranthacew, *Viscum ; of Terc- 
fcj)itece«, Brucea; of Urficco;, Broussonetia ; of £te«g-ju', Hip- 
pophae; of ^»n«ntece<E, *]Myrica; of ProieacetE, Aulax, Leuco- 
dendron. 13 Gen. 46 Sp. 

5. Peidarulria. Contains of Tercbiiitacea:, Pistacia, Zanthoxy- 
lum ; of Euphorbiacece, Securinega ; of Ainaranthacece, Iresine ; 
of Chenopodcw, *Spinacia, Acnida ; of Uriicea; *Cannabis, 
*Humurus. 8 ^en. 18 Sp. 

6. Hcjcandria. Contadns of Siidlacecc, i-milax; *Tamus ? of 



Dioscorina, Rajanla, Dioscoroa; of £ie;!acea;,Maba; ofPalnue, 
Elais, Chamaedorea, Borassvis. 8 Gen. 36 Sp. 

7. Octandria. Stamens S. Contains of ylme»tocc<r, *Populus ; 
of Sempervivce, *Rhodiola. 2 Gen. 15 Sp. 

8. Ennciindria. Stamens 9. Contains of Eupliorbiacece, *Mer 
curialis; of //^rfrocAarirfae, *Hydrocharis. 2 Gen. 6 Sp. 

9. Decatidria. Stamens 10. Contains of Cucurlniacea: ? Carica ; 
of ie^n<inij!«s<c, Gymnocladus; of Euphorbiacece, Kiggelaria; 
of Teccinrfacea-, Schinus; of Coriaria. .5 Gen. 9Sp. 

10. Dodecaiidria. Stamens 11. Contains of Hydrocharidcce, 
*Stratiotes; of Eunhorbiacece, Hyoenanche; of ' Terebintacea, 
Euclea, Datisca ; of Meniipermece, Menispermum, Cocculus, 
6 Gen. 12 Sp. 

1 1 . Icosandria. Stamens 12. Contains of Tiliacea, Flacourtia ; 
of Gelonium, Rottlera. 3 Gen. 6 Sp. 

12. Polyandria. Stamens numerous. Contains of 

Trewia; of Uicjiflcew, Embryopteris > of Rosacece, CliiFortia; 
of CycadetB, Cycas, Zamia. 5 Gen. 26 Sp. 

15. Monadelphia. Stamens united. Contains of Coniferce, 
Araucaria, *Juniperus, *Taxus, *Ephedra; of Menispermetje, 

Cissampelos; of£«;)/iocWflcea-, Excoecaria,Adelia; of 

Loureira, Nepenthes ; of Myristicac, INIyristica ; of Siitilccca ? 
*Ruscus; of Pa/7ii<F, Latania. 12 Gen. 40 Sp. 

14. Gynamlria. Stamens inserted in the style. Contains of 
Euphorbiacc(C, Cluytia. 1 Gen. 8 Sp. 

Class XXIII. Pobfgamia. Stamens and pistils separate in 
some flowers, united in others, either on the same plant or on 
two or three distinct ones ; such difference in the essential 
organs being moreover accompanied with a diversity in the 
accessory parts of the flowers. Orders 2. 

1. Moiuccia. United flowers accompanied with barren or fer- 
tile, or both, all on one plant It contains of Miisacece, IMusa ; 

ofjU<>/<;ii</i«mf,\'eratrum ; of Grcwunea:, Andropogon, Chloris, 
Penicillaria, Sorghum, *Holcus, Ischcemum, .'iigilops, Hloni- 
suris; of Rnbiciceir, V'alantia; of Urticecv, * I'arietaria ; of 
Chenojiodca; *At;-iplex, Khagodia; of dmJjretucea; Termina- 
lia; of Santiditcece, Fusanu:, ; of FrofeiictiT, Brabejuni ; of 

Feronia; of TeiiAi/i/nmr, Allan thus ; of Guff ijcnc, 

Clusia; of Apocynea, Ophioxylon ; of Accrina-, *.A('er; of 
Ameniaceie, Celtis; of Rhamni f Gouania ; of I'liilicllijiiie, 
Hennas ; of Legtiminosae, Inga, IMimosa, Schra-ikia, Desinan- 
thus, -■Vcacia ; of Pu/wtf, Rhapis. 51 Gen. 20iSp. 

2. Dicecia. The dilferent flowers on two different plants. 
Contains of Leguminosce, Gleditschia, Ceratonia ; of Ulciiui; 

*Fraxinus; of Brosimum; of Tercbintcrmr, Hamil- 

tonia ; of Laurophyllus ; of Ebcnaccw, Diospyros ; 

of JUi/r««e<E, Myrsine ; of Santalacece? Nyssa ; ofTt-rclnniucea', 
Bursera; of Undnlliferaf Arctopus; of Arulice, Panax; of 
Urtieea:, Ficus; of Palnw, Charaajrops. 14 Gen. 76 Sp. 

Class XXIV. Cryptogamia. Stamens and pistils either not 
well ascertained, or not to be numbered with any certainty. 
Orders 10. 

1. Gonopteridcs. Fructification in a terminal catkin. Contains 
of Syiiise/aceff, *Equisetum. 1 Gen. 7 Sp. 

2. Stachyopierides. Fructification in a spike. Contains of ii/- 
copodinetv, *Lycopodiuin, Psilotum ; of Filices, *Ophioglos- 
sum, *Botrjchium. 4 Gen. IS Sp. 

3. Porovteridcs. Capsules opening by a pore. Contains ofFi- 
lices, Marattia. 1 Gen. 1 Sp. 

4. Filices. Fructification on the back, summit, or near the 
base of the frond — This order contains of Filices, Acrosti- 
chum, Hemionitis, IMeniscium, Grammitis, *Polypodium, 
*AV'oodsia, Nephrodium, AUantodia, *Aspidium, *Asple- 
nium, *Scolopendrium, Diplazium, *Pteris, Vittaria, Ono- 
clea,*BIechnum, Woodwardia, Doodia, *Adiantum, Cheil- 
anthes, Lonchitis, Davallia, Dicksonia, Cyathea, *Tricho- 
manes, *Hymenophyllum. 26 Gen. 150 Sp. 

5. Hydroptendes. Fructification nearly radical. Contains of 
Marsileacece, *Isoetes, *Pilularia. 2 Gen. 2 Sp. 

6. Schismatopterides. Fructification in branched spikes. Con- 
tains of Filices, Lygodium, Anemia, *Osmunda. 5 Gen. 9 Sp. 

7. Musa. Mosses. These are really herbs with distinct leaves, 

and frequently as distinct a stem It contauis of the natural 

order of the same name, and described in Smith's Flora Bri- 
tannica, *Andr£Ea, *Bartramia, *Jjryjm, *Buxbaumia, 
*Encalypta, -kFontinalis, *Funaria, *Grin\mia, *Gymnosto- 
raum, *Hookevia, *IIypnum, *Mnium, *Neckera, *Ortho- 
ti-ichum, ^Phascuni, *roIytiichum, *Pterogoniura, Sphag- 
num, *Splachnum, *Tetraphis, *Tortuia, * Trichosto- 
mum, and numerous others, aracunting by estimate to 460 Sp. 

(See Turner's Hisforia Mvscorum.) 

8. Hepat'cce. Liverworts. Of these the herbage is commonly 
frondose, the fructification originating from what is at the 
same time both leaf and stem . This character, however, 
proves less absolute than one founded on their capsules, which 
differ essentially from those of the preceding order in having 
nothing like a lid or operculum. The corolla, or veil, of some 
of the genera is like that of Jlosses, but usually bursts at the 
top. The barren flowers in some are similar to the stamens 
of the last-mentioned plants,as in Juiigerman/iiu (see Hooker's 
Monograph of this genus) ; in others they are of some peculiar 
conformation, as in Marchaniia, where they are imbedded in 
a disk like the seeds of lichens, in a manner so contrary to all 
analogy, that botanists can scarcely agree wliich are the barren 
cmd which the fertile flowers of this genus. Linnaeus com- 
prehended this order under the following one, to which, 
says Sir J. E. Smith, it is most assuredly far less akin than to 
the foregoing. British species estimated at 85. 

9. AlgcE. Flags. In tliis order the herbage is frondose, some- 
times a mere crust, sometimes of a leathery or gelatinous tex- 
ture. The seeds are imbedded, either in the fr ond itself, or in 
some peculiar receptacle. The barren flowers are but im- 
perfectly kno%vn. The aquatic or submersed Alga; form a dis- 
tinct and peculiar tribe. Some of these abound in fresh water, 
others in the sea, whence the latter are commonly denomin- 
ated sea-weeds. British species 18. 

10. Lichenes. Herbage frondose and leathery; seeds generally 
in the frond. This order was included by Limiceus under the 
former one. Estimated number of British species 573. 

11. Fungi. Mushrooms. These cannot properly be said to 
have any herbage. Their substance is fleshy, generally of 
quick growth and short duration, differing in firmness, from 
a watery pulp to a leathery or even woody texture. By some 
naturalists they have been thought of an animal nature, chiefly 
because of their fcetid scent in decay, and because little wliitc 



Book I. 



JUSSIEUEAN HORTUS BRITANNICUS. 



135 



bodies like eggs are found In them at that period. But these 
are truly the eggs of flies, laid there by the parent insect, and 
destined to produce a brood of maggots, to feed on the decay- 
infffung7i,i, as on a dead carcase. Ellis's beautiful discoveries, 
relative to corals and their inhabiting polypes, led to the 
strange analogical hypothesis that these insects formed the 
funjfus, which Munchausen and others have asserted. Some 
have thought J/oi^ft were composed of the saj) of corrupted 
wood, transmuted into a new sort of being ; an idea as unphilo- 
sophical as the former, and unsupported by any semblance of 
truth. Dryander, SchoRfFer, and Hedwig have, on much better 
grounds, asserted their vegetable nature, detected their seeds, 
and in many cases explained their parts of fructification. In 
fact they propagate their species as rejjularly as any other or- 



. beings, though, like others, subject to varieties. Their 
sequestered and obscure liabitations, their short duration, 
their mutability of form and substance, vender them indeed 
more difficult of investigation than common plants, but there 
is no reason to suppose them less perfect, or less accurately 
defined. Splendid and accurate works, illustrative of (his 
order, have been given to the world by Schoeffer, Kulliard, 
and Sowerby, which are the more useful, as the generality of 
fuHffi cannot well be preserved. The most distinguibhtd 
writer upon them, indeed the only good systematic one, is 
Persoon, who has moreover supplied us with some exquisite 
figures. See his Synopsis Meinudica Fuvf^orum. Estimated 
number of species, natives of Britain, 800. 



Sect. II. The Hortus Britannicus arranged according to the Jussieuean Si/slem. 
589. The plants grown in Britain, whether native or exotic, are thus arranged according 
to the system of Jussieu. The genera, of which there are species natives of the country, 
are marked thus (*), for the sake of those who may wish to arrange a herbarium or grow- 
ing collection of indigenous plants according to this method. The authorities followed 
are, Sweet's Hortus. Sub. Lond. 1818, and Smith's Comp. Flora Brit. 1816. 

troi>he, Dimocarpus, Melicocca, Blighia, Ephielis ? KojI 
reuteria; of Octaml. Trigy. PauUinia, Seriana, Cardio- 
spermum, Sapindus. 10 Gen. 20 Sp. 

6. Acaew, contains of Triandr. Moiiogyn. Hippocratea ; of 
Heptand. Monogyn. iEsculus; of Pvlygam. Moncec. *^cer. 
3 Gen. 24 Sp. 

7. Maljiighiacecc, contains of Decandr. Monngyn. Gasrtnera ; , of 
Decaiidr. Tri^yn. Malpighia, Bannisteria. 5 Gen. 27 Sp. 

8. Pittospercw i contains of Pentand. Monogyn. Bursaria, Bil- 
lardiera, Piltosporum. 3 Gen. 10 Sp. 

9. Hyperirinte, contains of Polyaddph. Pulyand. *Hypericura, 
•Ascyrum. 2 Gen. 54 Sp. 

10. Guitifer 



t^jatid. Pulyg. Dillenia ? lUiciuifn, Magnolia, Michelia. 



iGen. 



Class I. Dicotvledone.'E. ThalamiJIorce, sect. 1. with nu- 
merous pistils, and stamens opposite to the petals. Five 
Orders. 

Order 1. Ranunctdaceas, contains of Pent.Polyg. *Myosurus, 
Ceratocephalus, Zanthorhiza ; of Decand. Tngy. Garidella ; 
of Polymid. Mumg.*Act3i3L; of Polyand. Digy. '*V(eonia, ; of 
Polyand. Trig. Delphinium, Aconitum ; of Pulyanil. Pentag. 
Cimicifuga, «AquilegiaNigella; of Polyand. Polyg Hepatica, 
*Anemone, Pulsatilla, Atragene, *Ciematis, «Thalictrum, 
*Adonis, Knowltonia, *Ficaria, *Ranunculus, *Trollius, 
Isopyrum, Erantliis, *Helleborus, Coptis, *Caltha, Hydro- 
peltis, Hydrastis. 29 Gen. 214 Sp. 

2. Magimliacea:, contains Decand. Monogynia. Quassia ? of Po- 
hjand.Di/^y. Curatella ? of Polyatul. Trig. Hibbertia ? of Po- 

'< Sp. 

3. Attnonew, or AnonaceiL', contains of Polyand. Polyg. Uvaria, 
Annona, Porcelia, Xylopia. 4 Gen. IC'Sp. 

4. MenispermecB, contains of Hept. Polyg. WendlanAia.; of Mo- 
nacia Pent. Schizandra ; of Dia:c. Dodecan. Menispermum, 
Cocculus; of Z)z(Ec. Monad. Cissampelos. 5 Gen. 11 Sp. 

5. Berberides, or Berberideee, contains of Tetrand. Monog. *Epi- 
medium ; of Tetrand, Digy. Hamamelis ; of Hexand. Morwg. 
Leontice, Caullophyllum,'*Berberis. 5 Gen. 11 Sp. 

Class II. Dicotyledone^. Thalamiflorce, sect. 2. with 
pistils solitary, or adhering together, placentas equal. Six 
Orders. 

Order 1. Papavaraceas*, contains of Tetrand. Digy. Hypecoum ; 
of Octand. Monog. JefFersonia ; of Dodccand. Monog. Bocconia ; 
of Polyand. Monog. Sanguinaria, Podophyllum, *Chelido- 
nium, *Glaucium, * Papaver, Argemone ; of Diadelph. 
Hexand. Corydalis, Cystycapnos, *Fumaria. 12 Gen. 46 
Sp. 

2. NymphceacetB, of Polyand. Monngyn. *Nymphsea, *Nuphar, 
Kuryale ; Polyand. Polygyn. Nelumbium. 4 Gen. 20 Sp. 

3. CrucifercE, contains of Tetradynamia, Siliciilosa, *Cakile, 
*Crambe, Myagrum, Euclidium, *Rapistrum, *Bunias, 
*Coronopus, Biscutella, Peltaria, Clypeola, Isatis, Succowia, 
*Vella, Anastatica, iEtliionema, *Thlaspi, *IIutchinsia, 
*Teesdalia, Iberis, Lepidium, *Oochlearia, *Subularia, 
*Draba, Petrocallis, *CameIina, Alyssum, Farsetia, Vesi- 
caria, Lunaria, Ricotia; of Tetrady.Siliqu. Heliophila, *Car- 
damine, *Arabis, Macropodium, *Turritis, *Barbarea, 
♦Nasturtium, *Sisymbrium,*Erysimum, Notoceras, *Cheir- 
anthus, *Mathiola, Malcomia, *Hesperis, Erucaria, *Bras- 
sica, *Sinapis, Raphanus, Chorispermum. 49 Gen. 281 Sp. 

4. Capparides, or Capparidea;, contains of Pentand. Tetragy. 
*Pamassia ? of Pentand. Pentagy. * Drosera ; of Dodecand. 



Momgy. Crataeva ; of Dodecand. trig. *Reseda ; of Polyand. 
Mmiog. Capparis, Marcgravia ? of Tetradyn. Siliquosa, Cleome. 
" Gen. " 



5. Passijloreoe, contains of Monadelph. Pentand. Passiflora. 
1 (Jen. 24 Sp. 

6. Violeie, or Violaceee, contains of Pentand. Monogy. *Viola, 
lonidium. 2 Gen. 41 Sp. 

7. Cisti, or Cistiiwe, contains of Polyand. Monogyn. Cistus, *He- 
lianthemum. 2 Gen. 66 Sp. 

Class III. Dicotyledone^. ThalamiflorcE, sect. 3. with 
ovary solitary, placenta central. Sixteen Orders. 

Order 1. Caryonhyllece, contains of Triand. Monogyn. Ortegia, 
Lceflingia; or triand. Trigyn. *Holosteum, Polyearjjon, 
MoUugo, Minuartia, Queria, Lechea; of Tetrand. Digyn. 
Buffonia ; of Tetrand. Tetragy. *Sagina, Moenchia ; of Pen- 
tand. Digyn. Velezia, Pharnaceum ; of Pentand. Trigyn. 
Drypis ; of Pen/and. Pentagyn. *Linum ; of Hexand. Mono- 
gyn. *Frankenia? Octand. Monogyn. Moehringia ; ' of Odarerf. 
rdrag^im. *Elatine; of Decand. Digyn. Gypsophila, *Sapo- 
naria, «Dianthus ; of Decand. Trigyn. *Cucubalus, *Silene, 
*StelIaria, *Arenaria, *Cherleria; of Decand. Pentagyn. 
*Agrostemma, *Lychnis, *Cerastiuni, *Spergula. 30 Gen. 
289 Sp. 

2. Malvaceae, contains of Pentand. Monogy. Buttneria, Ayenia ; 
of Decand. Monogyn. Kleinhofia; of Monadelph. Pentand. 
Melhania, Ochroma ; of Monadelph. Dodecand. Helicteres, 
Dombeya, Pentapetes, Pterospermum ; of Monadelph. Poly. 
Adansonia, Bombax, Lagunoa, Napsea, Sida, Cristaria, Pa- 
lavia, Malachra, *Althaea, *Malva, *L,avatera, Ruizia, Ma- 
lope, Kitaibelia, Urena, Gossynium, Hibiscus, Pavonia, 
Achania, Myrodia, Gordonia ; of Polyadclph. Decand. Bu- 
broma, Abroma. 3.5 Gen. 217 Sp. ' 

3. Stcrcnliacem, contains of Monoscia. Monadelph. Sterculia. 
1 Gen, 5 S)>. 

4. Tiliacea;, contains of Pentand. Pentagy. Mahemia; of Dode- 
cand. Monogy. Triumfetta ; of Dodecand. Digyn. Heliocarpus ; 
of Pnlyandr.' Monogyn. Bixa, Sloania, Aubletia, Sparmannia, 
Munt'ingia, Grewia, Tilia, Corchorus; of Monadelph. Pen- 
tandr. Waltheria? Hermannia ? of Monadelph. Polyand. 
Stuartia; of Diac. Icosandr. Flacourtia. 15 Gen. 80 Sp. _ 

5. Sapindi, or Sapindaccce, contains of Octand. Monogy. Orni- 



decandr. Monogyn. Garcinia ; of Polyandr. Monogyn. Grias, 
Calophyllum, Mammea, Ochna? El'oeocarpus ? oi Poly gam. 
Mona:c. Clusia. 8 Gen. 15 Sp. 

11. Vites, contains of Tetrandr. Monogi/n. Cissus; of Pentand. 
Monogyn. Vitis. 2 Gen. 21 Sp. 

12. Geranioe, or Geraniacece, contains of Pentand. Monogyn. 
*Impatiens ? of Octamlr. Monogy. TropcEolum ? of Decandr. 
T,...4 *0xalis; of Monadelph. Pentand. ♦Erodiu.m ; of 



Pentagy. 
Monadelph. 



'.Iph. Heptand. Pelargonium; of Monadelph. Decandr. 
*Geranium ; of Monadelph. Dodecand. Monsonia. 7 Gen. 
314 Sp. 

13. Metiw, otMeliacew, contams of Pentand. Monogyn. Cedi-ella ? 
Leea ; of Octandr. Monogy. Gaurea; of Decand. Blonogyn. 
Trichilia, Ekebergia, Heynea, Melia, Swietenia ; of Dode- 
cand. Monogy. Canella; of Monadelph. Octandr. Aitonia. 
10 Gen. 16 Bp. 

14. Aurantice, or Hespendea, contains of Octandr. Monogyn. 
Ximenia ; of Decand, Monog. Limonia, Murraya, Cookia ; 
of Polyand. Monogyn. ^gle; of Monadelph. Polyand. Ca- 
mellia ; of Polyadclph. Polyand. Citrus. 7 Gen. 21 Sp. 

15. Rntacea, contains of Decandr. Monogy. Guiaicum, Zygo- 
phyilum, Fagonia, Tribulus, Dictamnus, Ruta, of Dode- 
candr. Monogy. Peganum ; of Didynam. Angiosp. Melian- 
thus? 8 Gen. 28 Sp. 

16. Diosmea;, contains of Peniandr. Monogy. Adenandra, Ba- 
rosma, Diosma, Agathosma ; of Octandr'. Monogy, Corraea ; 
of Mona:c. Tetrandr. Empleurum, 6 Gen. 32 Sp. 

Class IV. Dicotyledonk^. Thalamijlora:, sect. 4. with 
fruit in scattered cells, but joined on the same base. Two 
Orders, but no examples in British Gardens. 

Class V. Dicotyledone/e. Calyciflorce, with petals free, or 
more or less adhering together, always inserted in the calyx. 
Thirty-two Orders. 

Order 1. Terebintaceis, contains of Triandr. Monogy. Cneorum, 
Comocladia ; of Tetrand. Monogy. Fagara, Monetia ; of Pen- 
tand. Monogy. Mangifera ; of Peniandr. Trigyn. Rhus, 
Spathelia; of Octandr. Monogy. Amyris, Dodonaja ? of En- 
neandr. Mwwgy. Anacariinm ; of Decandr. Pentagyn. Aver- 
rhoa, Spondias ; of Mowc. Polyandr. Juglans ; of Dicec, 
Tetrandr. Brucea ; of Diwc. Peniandr. Pistacia ; Zanthoxy- 
lura ; of Dia:c. Decandr, Schinus ; of Poly gam. Moncec. 
Ailanthus ; of Polygam. Dia:c. Bursera. 19 Gen. 75 Sp. 

2. Rhamvi, or Rhamnete, contains of Tetrandr. Tetragyn. My- 
ginda, *Xlex; of Pentand. Jfo«og^j/«. Elaeodendrum, *Rham- 
nus, Zizyphus, Celastrus, Senacia, *Euonymus, Hovenia, 
Ceanothus, Pomaderris, Phylica, Brunia ? Staavia, Plectro- 
nia ; of Peniandr. Trigy. Cassine, Staphylea ; of Hexandr. 
Mo-iwgyn. Vxinos; of Moncec. Tetrandr. Aucuha ; of Polygam. 
Mona:c, Gouania. 20 Gen. 126 Sp. 

3. Leguminosae, contains of Decandr. Monogyn. Edwardsia, 
Sopliora, Ormosia, Anagyris, Thermopsis, Virgilia, Cyclopia, 
Baptisia, Podalyria, Chorlzema, Podolobium, Oxylobium, 
Callistachys, Brachysema, Gompholobium, Burtonia, Jack- 
sonia, Viminaria, Sphoerolobium, Actus, Dillwynia, Eutaxia, 
Sclerothamnus, Gastrolobium, Euchilus, Pultenia, Daviesia, 
Mirbelia, Cercis, Bauliinia, Hymenjea, Cynometra, Cassia, 
Cathartocarpus, Parkinsonia, Poinciana, Ca^salpinia, Guilan- 
dina, Hyperanthera, HofF'manseggia, Adenanthera, Cadia, 
Prosopis, Hsematoxylon, Copaifera, Schotia ; of Monadelph. 
Triandr. Tamarindus; of Diadelph. Peniandr. Petaloste- 
mum ; of Diadelph. Octandr. Securidaca^; of Diadelph. De- 
candr. Nissolia, Dalberg' ~ • 
rimnum, Dipterix, 

Borbonia, *Spartium, *Genista, Lebeckja, Raffhia, Aspa- 
lathus, Sarcophyllum, Stauracanthus, *Ulex, AmorjAa, 
Platylobium, Bossiaea, Scottia, Templetonia, Goodia, Lod- 
digesia, Wiborgia, Crotalaria, Hovea, *Ononis, *Anthylljs^ 
Arachis, Lupinus, Carpopogon, Phaseolus, Dolichos, Stizolo- 
bium. Glycine, Apios, Kennedia, Cylista, Clitoria, Galactia, 
*Pisum, Ochrus, *Orobus, *Lathyrus, *Vicia, *Ervum, 
Cicer, Liparia, Cytisus, Mullera, Geoffroyei, Robinia, Colu- 
tea, Swainsonia, Sutherlandia, Lessertia, Glycyrhiza, Ses- 
bana, Coronilla, *Omithopus, *Hippocrepis, Scorpiurus, 
Smithia, iEschynomene, Hallia, Lespedeza, *Hedysarum, 
Zomia, Flemingia, Galega, Indigofera, Tephrosia, Phacn, 
*Oxytrophis, *AstraRaltis, Biserrula, Dalea, Psoralia, *MeIi- 
K 4 



;ia, Pongamia, Pterocarpus, A me. 
Drus, Erythrina, Butea, I'iscidia, 



136 



SCIENCE OF 



GARDENING. 



Pakt II. 



lotus, Lupinaster, *TrUblium, Lotus, Dorycniura,Trigonella, 
Medicago ; of Diac. Decandr. Gymnocladus ; of Polygam. 
Monac. Inga, Mimosa, Schrankia, Desmanthus, Acacia ; of 
Polygam. £»wc. Gleditsclua, Ceratonia. 145 Gen. 1085 Sp. 

4. Hosaceco, contains of Diajtdr, Monos^y, Acaena ; of Tetrand* 
Monogy. *Sanguisorba, *Alchemiira; of Pentand. Monogy. 
Hirtella ; of Pentatid. Peniagyn. *Sibbaldia ; of Oodecandr. 
Digy?i. *Agrimonia ; of JcOsayidr. Monogy. Amygdalus ; 
*rrunus, Armeniaca, Chrysobalanus, Waldsteinia, '*Mespi- 
lus, *Pyru5, Cydonia, *Spiraea ; of Icosatidr. Polygam. 
*Rosa, *Rubus, Dalibarda, *Fragaria, *Comarum, *P6ten- 
tiUa, *'romientilla, *Geum, *Dryas, Calycanthus ? of 
MoruEC. Polyandr. *Poterium ; of Ditec. Pohamlr. Cliffbrtia. 
27 Gen. 316 Sp. 

5- Salicaria, contains of Tetrand. Monogy. Ammannia ; of 
Pentandr. Monogy. *Glaux ; of Hexand. Monogy. *Peplis ; of 
Octand. Mojio^y. Grislea, Lawsonia ; of Decand. Monogy. 
Acisanthera; pf Dodecand. Monogy. *Lythrum, Cuphaea; of 
Polyand. Monogy. Lagerstraemia. 9 Gen. 23 Sp. 

6. Melastomae, of Melastomaceee, contains of Octandr. Monogy. 
Osbeckia, Rhexia ; of Decand. Mono^. Melastoma ; of lio- 
decand. Monogy. Blakea. 4 Gen. 21 Sj). 

7. Myrti, or Myrtacecf, contains of Octatidr. Monogyn. Baeckia ; 
of Dodecand. Mtmogy. Decumaria ; of IcosaiSr. Monogyn. 
Philadelphus, Leptospermum, Fabricia, Metrosideros, Psi- 
dium, Eugenia, Caryophyllus, Myrtus, Calyptranthes, Eu- 
calyptus, Punica ; of Polyandr. Monogyn. Alangium ; of 
Monadelph. Polyandr. Barringtonia, Gustavia ; of Polyadclph. 
Icosandr. Melaleuca, Tristania, Calotharanus, Beaufortia. 
20 Gen. 121 Sp. 

8. Combretacece, contains of Pentandr. Monogy. Conocarpus ; of 
Decamlr. Monogy. Combretum, Getonia, Quisnualis ; of Poly- 
gam. Monoec. Tenninalia. 5 Gen. 10 Sp.' 

9. Cucurbitacea, contains of Triand. Monogyn. Melothria ; of 
Pentand. Monogyn. Gronovia ; of Moncec. Diand. Anguria ; 
of Moncecia Pefuand. Luffa; of Moncecia Monadelph. Tricho- 
santhes, Momordica, Cucurbita, Cucuinis, *Bryonia, Sicyos ; 
of Diwcia Decand. Carica. 11 Gen. 48 Sp. 

10. Loasew, contains of Icosand. Monogyn. Bax"tonia ; of Poly- 
and. Monogyn. Mentzelia. 2 Gen. 4 Sp. 

11. Onagrartae, contains of Monaml. Monogyn. Lopezia ; of 
Diand Monogyn. Ciroaea ; of Tetradyn. Monogy. Ludwigia, 
Isnardia; of ' Octand. Monog. *0!;nothera, Gaura, *Epilo- 
blum ; of Octand. Tetragy. Haloragis ; of Decand. Monogyn. 
Jussieua; of Dicecia Tetrand. Montinia. 10 Gen. 54 Sp. 

12. Ficoidece, contains of Dodecandr. Monog. Nitraria ; of Do- 
decandr. Pentagyn. Glinus ; of Icosandr. Pentagon. Sesuvium, 
Tetragonia, Mesembryanthemum, Aizoon ; ot Polyand. Pen- 
tagyn. Reaumuria. 7 Gen. 229 Sp. 

13. SempervivcE, contains of Tetrandr. Tetragyn. Tillaea ; of 
Peniandr. Peidagyn. Larochea, Crassula ; of Heptand. Hep- 
tjig. Septas ; of Octandr. Tetragyn. Calanchoe, Bn ophyllum ; 
of Decand. Pentag. *Cotyleddn, *Sedum, Penthorum ; of 
Decand. Decagyn. *Sempervivum ; of Diada Pentandr. 
*Rhodiola. H Gen. 12fiSp. 

14. Portulacece, contains of Tetrand. Tetragyn. *Montia ; of 
Pentandr. Monogy. Claytonia ; of Pentandr. Trlgj/n. *Ta- 
marijc, Tumera, Telephium, *Corrigiola, Portulacaria ; of 
Pentandr. Pentagyn. Gisekia ; of Heptand. Digyn. Limeum ; 
of Decandr. Digyn. Trianthema,' *Scleranthus ; of Dodecand. 
Monogyn. Portulaca, Talinum, Anacampseros. 14 Gen. 
39 Sp. 

15. Cacti, contains of Pentand. Monogyn. Ribes ; of Icosandr. 
Motwgyn. Cactus, Rhipsalis. 3 Gen. 81 Sp. 

16. Saxifrageae, contains of Pentand. Monogyn. Itea ; of Pe?!- 
tand: Digyn. Heuchera; of Octandr. Tetragy. *Adox3 ; of 
Decandr. Digyn. Hydrangea; *Chrysospleniura, *Saxifraga, 
Tiarella, Mitella. 8 Gen. 94 Sp. 

17. Cuiwniacea:, contains of Decandr. Digyn. Cunonia ; of Do- 
decan. Digyn. Callicoma, Bauera. 2 Gen. 3 Sp. 

18. Aralioe, or Araliacece, contains of Peidandr. Digyn. Cusso- 
nia ; of Pentandr. Pentagyn. Aralia ; of Polygam. Diac. 
Panax. 3 Gen. 12 Sp. 

19. Caprifolew, contains of Tetrandr. Monogyn. *Comus; of 
Pentand. Monogy. Lonicera, Symphorea, Diervilla, Trios- 
teum, *Hedera; of Pentand. Trigyn. *Vibumum, *Sam- 
buctis ; of Didynam. Angiosp. *Limisea ; of Diacia Tetran. 
*Viscum. 10 Gen. 60 Sp. 

20. Umbelliferw, contains of Pentandr. Monog. Lagoecia ; of 
Pentand. Digyn. *Eryngium, *Hydroctyle, Spananthe, *Sa- 
nicula, Astrantia, *Bupleurum, *Echinophora, Hasselquis- 
tia, Tordylium, *Caucalis, Artedia, ^Caucus, Visnaga, 
Ammi, *Bunium, *Conium, *Selinum, *Athamanta, *Peu- 
cedanum, *Crithraum, Cachrys, Ferula, Laserpitium, *He- 
racleum, *Ligusticum, ^Angelica, *Sium, *Sison, Bubon, 
Cuminum, *Qinanthe, *PhelIandrium, *Cicuta, *^5;thusa, 
*Meum, *Coriandrum, *Myrrhis, *Scandix, Oliveria, *An- 
thriscus, *Cheerophyllum, *Imperatoria, Seseli, Thapsia, 
*Pastinaca, *Smymium, *Anethum, *Carum, *Piinpi- 
nella, *Apium, *jEgopodium ; of Polygam. Monoscia, Her- 
nias ; of Polygam. Diaecia, Arctopus ? 64 Gen. 282 Sp. 

21. CorynJiiferce, contains of Syngenes. Polygam. .iSqualis, 
Vemonia, Liatris, Mikania, * Eupatorium, Ageratum, 
Stevia, Cephalophora, Hymenopappus, Melananthera, Mar- 
shallia, Spilantnes, *Bidens, Lageisca, Lavenia, Cacalia, 
Kleinia, Ethulia, Piqueria, *Chrysocoraa, Tarchonanthus, 
Calea, Humia, Caesulea, Ixodia, *Santolina, Athanasia, 
Balsamita, Pentzia ; of Sygenes. Polygam. Superjlua, *Ta- 
nacetum, *Artemesia, *Ghaplialiura, Xeranthemum, Heli- 
chrysum, Carpesum, Baccharis, *Conyza, Madia, *Erigeron, 
*Tussilago, *Senecio,* Aster, *Solidago,*Cineraria, *Inula, 
Grindelia, Podolepis, Arnica, *Doronicum, Perdicium, Te- 
tragonotheca, Ximensia, Heleniura, *Bellis, Bellium, Dahlia, 
Tagetes, Heterospermura, Schkuhria, Pectis, Leysera, Rel- 
hania. Zinnia, *Chrysanthemum, *Pyrethrumj *Matricaria, 
Boltonia, Lidbeckia, Cenia, Cotula, Grangea, Anacyclus, 
*Anthemis, Sanvitalia, * Achillea, Balbisia, A melius, Star- 
kia, Eclipta, Chrysanthellum, Siegesbeckia, Syndrella, Gal- 
Ingsoga, Acmella, Zaiuzania, Pascalia, Heliopsis, Buphthal- 
mum ; of Syngenes. Polygam. Frustan. Helianthus, Galardia, 
Budbeckia, Cosmea, Coreopsis, Osmites, Pallasia, Sclerocar- 
pus, CuUumia, Berckheya, Didelta, Gorteria, Gazania, 
Cryptostemma, Arctotheca, Sphenogyne ; of Syngen. Poly- 
gam. Necessar. Milleria, Flaveria, Baltimora, Sylphium, 
Alcina, Polymnia, Melampodium, Chaptalia, *Calendula, 
Arctotis, Osteospermum, Othonna, Hippia, Gymnostyles, 
Eriocephalus, *Filago, Micropus, Parthenium, Iva; of 



Syngenes. Polygam. Segregaia, Elephantopus, CEdera, Staebe, 
ISauenbergia; of Moncec. Pentandr. Nepheleum, Xanthium, 
Ambrosia, Franseria. 131 Gen. 998 Sp. 

22. Rnhiaces, contains of Tetrandr. Alunogy. Cephalanthus, 
Spermacoce, *Sherardia, *Asperula, Houstonia, *Gallium, 
Crucianella, Catesbaea, Ixora, Pavetta, Bouvardia, Sidero- 
dendron, Chomelia, Mitchella, Coccocypsilum, Manettia ; of 
Pentandr. Monogy. Cinchona, Pinckneya, Mussaenda, Port- 
landia, Genipa, Gardenia, Oxyanthus, Randea, Webera, 
Erithalis, Morinda, Nauclea, Cephaelis, Hamellia, Ronde- 
letia, Macronemum, Vanguiera, Dentella, Serissa, Psycho- 
tria, CotFea, Chiococca, Paederia, Plocama ; of Peniandr. 
Digyn. Phyllis ; of Hexand. Monogyn. Hillia, Richardia ; of 
Moncec. Hexandr. Guettarda ; of Diac. Tetra7idr. A ntho- 
spermum; of Polygam. Monoec. *Valantia. 47 Gen. 
145 Sp. 

23. Cii xrocephaloe, contains of Syngenes. Polyg. .^qualis, 
*A ium, *Serratula, *Carduus, *Cnicus, *Onopordum, 
Bei iia, Cynara, *Carlina, Atractylis, Acama, btokesia, 
Stobjea, Carthamus, Staehelina, Pteronia ; of Syngenes. 
Polygam. Frustan. Zoegea, *Centaurea, Galactites , of Syn. 
genes. Polygam. Segrega. Sphaeranthus, Echinops, Rolandra, 
Brotera, Gundelia. 25 Gen. 221 Sp. 

24. Dipsacew, contains of Diandr. Monogyn. Morina ; of Triand. 
Monogy/. *^^aleriana, Pedia ; of Tetrand. Monog. *Dipsacus, 
*Scabiosa, Knautia. 6 Gen. 70 Sp. 

25. Gentianew, contains of Tetrandr. Monogy. *Exacum, Se- 
baea, Frasera ; of Peidandr. Monogyn. *Menyanthes, *V'i]- 
larsia, Logania, Sp^gelia, Lisianthus, *Chironia, Sabbatia, 
*Erythraea, Eustoina ; of Pentandr. Digyn. *Swertia, *Gen- 
tiana ; of Octandr. Monogy. *ChIora. 15 Gen. 21 Sp. 

26. Ciclwrarca-, contains of Si^rigen. Polygam. .iEqualis, Gero- 

i logon, *Tragopogon, TroxiMion, Arnopogon, *Scorzonera, 
'iCridium, *Sonchus, *Lactuca, Chondrilla, *Prenanthes, 
*Leontodon, *Apargia, *Thrincia, *Picris, *Hieracium, 
*Crepis, Helminthia, Tolpis, Andryala, Rothia, Krigia, 
*Hyoseris, *Hedypnois, Seriola, *Hypochaeris, *Lapsana, 
Zacintha, Rhagadiolus, Catananche, *Cichorium, Scolymns. 
31 Gen. 214 Sp. 

27. Campanulacece, contains of Pentandr. Monogy. Liglitfootia, 
*Campanula, Roella, *Phyteuma, *Trachelium, "*Jasione, 
*I/Obelia ; of Hexand. Monogyn. Caneirina ; of Octandr. 
Monogt/n. Michauxia. 9 Gen. 118 Sp. 

28. Styltdece, contains of Gynundr. Diand. Stylidium. 1 Gen. 
5 Sp. 

29. Rlwdoracece, contains cf Pentandr. Monogyn. *Azalea, 
*Menziesia; of Decandr. Monogt/n. Kalmia, Ledum, Rho- 
dora,Rhododendron, Epigaea ; inDodecand. Monogyn. Bejaria. 
8 Gen. 40 Sp. 

30. Goodenovioe, contains of Pentandr. Monogjijn. Goodenia, Eu. 
thales, Scaevola, Dainpiera. 4 Gen. 8 Sp. 

31. Ericece, contains of Tetrand. Monogy. Blaeria ; of Pen- 
tand. Monogyn. Cyrilla, Brossaea ; of Octand. Motwg. *Oxy- 
coccus, *Calluna, *Erica ; of Decandr. Monog. *Vaccinium, 
*Andromeda, Enkianthus, Gaultheria, *Arbutus, Clethra, 
Mylocarium, *Pyrola, Chimaphila; of Dodecand. Monogyn. 
Hudsonia ; of Diaec. Triandr. *Empetrum. 19 Gen. 
410 Sp. 

32. Epacrideae, contains of Pentandr. Monogy. Sprengelia, An- 
dersonia, Lysinema, Epacris, Monotoca, Leucopogon, Stenan- 
thera, Astroloma, Styphelia. 9 Gen. 20 Sp. 

Class VI. Dicotyi.edoke.^e. Cordijlora:, with stamens ad- 
hering to a corolla, which is not attached to the calyx. 
Twenty-two Orders. 

Order 1. Myrsinece, contains of Pentandr. Monogyn. Ardisia ; of 
Polygam. Dicec. Myrsine. 2 Gen. 11 Sp. 

2. Sapoteoe, contains of J'cntarulr. Monogyn. Jacquinia, Achras, 
Chrysophillum, Sideroxylon, Sersalisi'a, Bumelia ; of Octand. 
Monogyn. Mimusops ; of Decandr. Monogyn. Inocarpus ; of 
Dodecandr. Monog. Bassia. 9 Gen. 22 Sp. 

3. Bbenacea;, of Decandr. Digyn. Royena; of Dodecandr. 
Monogy. Halesia ; of Dodecendr. Trigyn. Visnea ; of Poly- 
adelph. Polyandr. Hopea ; of Dicec Hexand. Maba ; of Diac. 
Po/yan. Embryopteris ; of fo^/^am. D?(ec. Diospyros. 8 Gen. 
27 Sp. 

4. OleinoE, contains of Diandr. Monogyn. *Ligustrum, Olea, No- 
telaea, Chionanthus, Linociera, Omus, *Syringa ; of Poly- 
gam. Dicec. *Fraxinus. 8 Gen. 40 Sp. 

5. Jasminea;, contains of Diand. Monogyn. Nyctanthes, Jasmi- 
num. 2 Gen. 14. Sp. 

6. Verhenacece, contains of Diandr. Monog. Ghinia, Stachytar- 
pheta ; of Tetrand. Monogyn. jEgiphila, Callicarpa ; of >£7i- 
iand. Monogyn. Tectona ; of Didynam.Gymnosperm. Selago; of 
Didyunm. Angiosperm. Hebenstretia, Clerodendrum, Volka- 
meria,.llolxnskioldia, Vitex, Comutia, Hosta, Gmelina, Pe- 
traea, Citharexylura, Dttranta, Lantana, Spielmannia, Zapa- 
nia, Priva, Aloysia, *Verbena. 23 Gen. 96 Sp. 

7. Asclepiadea;, contains of Pentand. Digy n. Periploca, Hemides- 
mus, becamone, Microloma, Sarcostemma, Daemia, Cvnan- 
chum, Oxystelma, Gymnema, Calotropis, Xismalobium, 
Gomphocarpus, Asclepias, Gonolobus, Pergularia, Marsdenia, 
Hoya, Stapelia, Piaranthus, Huemia, Caralluma. 21 Gen. 
126 Sp. 

8. Apocynea; contains of Peniandr. Monogyn. Strychnos, Geles- 
mium, Rauwolfia, Carissa, Arduina, Cerbera, Allamanda, 
Vinca, Nerium, Wrightia, Ecliites, Ichnocarpus, Plumeria, 
Cameraria, Tabemaemonta, Amsonia; of Pentand. Digijn. 
Apocynum, Melodinus ; of Polygam. Moncec. Ophloxyl'on. 
19 Gen. 61 Sp. 

9. BignoniacecE , contains of Diandr. Monogytt. Catalpa. ; of Pen- 
tandr. Monogyn. Cobcea ; of Didynam. Angiosperm. Bignonia, 
Sesamum ? Pentstemon, Chelone, Tourrettia ? Martynia ^ 
Gloxinia? Gesneria? 10 Gen. 49 Sp. 

10. Pedalinoe, contains of Didynam. Angios. Pedalium. 1 Gen. 
1 Sp. 

11. Polemoniacece, contsins of Pentandr. Monog. *Vo\emomum, 
Phlox, Ipomopsis. 3 Gen. 22 Sp. 

12. Convolvulaceae, contains of Pentandr. Monogy. *Convolvulus, 
*Calystegia, Ipomaea, Retzia ; of Peir and. Digy. Falkia, Di- 
chondra, Evolvulus, Hydrolea, *Cuscuta. 9 Gen. 91 Sp. 

13. Boraglnece, contains of Pentand. Monogyn. Coldenia, Helio- 
tropium, *Myosotis, *Lappula, *Lithospermium, Batschia, 
Onosmodium,*Anchusa, *C\TiogIossum,*Fulmon£iria, Svm- 
phy-tum, Cerinthe, Onosma, *Borago, Trichodesma, *A"spe- 
rugo, *Lycopsis, *Echium, Tournefortia, Cordia, Bourreria, 
EhreUa, Hydrophylluni, EUsia, Nolana. 25 Gen. 143 Sp. 



Book I. 



jrSSIEUEAN HORTUS PRITANNICUb. 



137 



14. Solanea, contains ofPeniamlr. Momgy. Ramondia, *Verbas- 
cum, *Datura, Brugmansia, *Hyoscyamus, Nicotiana, Man- 
dragora, *Atropa, Solandra, Physalis, Nicandra, *Sola- 
num^ Capsicum, Cestrum, *Lycium, Vestra ; of Didymim. 
Aninusperm. Brundfelsia ? Crescentia, Anthocercis. I'J Gen. 

15. Scrophularitits, contains of Diartd. Momigyn. *Veronica, 
*Gratiola, Schwenkia, Calceolaria ; of Ttlraml. Muitogyn. 
Buddlea, Soparia ; of Didynam. Angiosperm. * Limosella, 
BrowalUa, Stemodia, Mazus, Lindemia, Heirpestis, Capraria, 
Teedia, Besleria, Trevirana, Columnea, Russelia, Dodartia, 
Halleria, Mimulus, Homemannia, *Digitalls, *Scrophularia, 
Celsia, Alonsoa, Maurandia, Cymbaria, Neraesia, Anar- 
rhinum, *Antirrhinum, *Linaria, Gerardia, *redicularis, 
*Melampynim, *Rhinanthus, *Bartsia, Castilleja, *Eu- 
phrasia, Buchnera, Mamilea, Erinus, Sibthorpia, Disandra. 

43 Gen. 242 Sp. 

16. Orobancheie, contains of Didynam. Angios-perm. *Lathraea, 
*Orobanche. 2 Gen. 7 Sp. 

17. Lalxiatce, contains of Diund. Monogi/n. *Lycoi>xis, Amethy- 
stea, Cunila, Ziziphora, Hedeomay IVTonarda, Rosmarinus, 
Salvia, Collinsonia ; of Didynam. Gymnosperm. *Ajuga, Anl- 
someles, *Teucrium, Westringia, Satur^a, Thymbra, Hys- 
sopus, Pycnanthemum, *Nepeta, Elsholtzia, Lavandula, 
Sideritis, Bystropogon, *I\Ientha, Perilla, Hyptis, Lepechinia, 
*Glechoma, *J>amium, *Geileopsis, *Galeobdolon, *Beto- 
nica, *Stachys, *Ballota, *Marrubiura, *Leonurus, Phlomis, 
Leucas, Leonotis, Moluccella, Clinopodium, *Origanum, 
*Thymus, *Acynos, *Calamintha, Melissa, Dracocephalum, 
Melittis, Ocymum, Plectranthus, Prostanthera, *Scutellaria, 
*Prunella, Cleonia, Prasium, Phryma. 57 Gen. 493 Sp. 

18. Myoporina, contains of Didynam. Angiosp. Jlyoporum, 
Stenochilus, IJontia, Avicennia. 4 Gen. 11 Sp. 

19. Aca7iihacea;, contains o{ Diandr. Munugyn. Elytraria, Justi- 
Cia, Eranthemum ; of Didynam. Angiosperm. Acanthus, 
Thunbergia, Barleria, Ruellia, Blechum, Aphelandra, Cros- 
sandra. 10 Gen. Gl Sp. 

20. Leiitihularia, contains of Diandr. Monogyn. *Pinguicula, 
*Uti-icularia. 2 Gen. 8 Sp. 

21. Primulacea, contains of Tetrand. Mlcmogy. *Centunculus ; 
of Peyiiand. Monogyn. Aretia, Androsace, *Primula, Cortusa, 
Soldanella, Dodecatheon, *Cyclamen, *Hottonia, *Lysima- 
chia, *Anagallis, *Samolus, Coris ; of Heptand. Monogyn. 
*Trientalis, Diapensia, Pyxidanthera. 16 Gen. 68 Sp. 

22. Glubidariw, contams of Tdrand.Monogyn. Globularia, Adina. 
2 Gen. 7 Sp. 

Class VII. Dicotyi.edone^. Monochlamydex, in which the 
Calyx and the Corolla form only a single envelope. Seventeen 
Orders. 

Order 1. Plmnbaginea, contains of Pentand. Monogyn. Plum- 
bago ; of Pcntdndr. Pentagy. *Armeria, *Statice. 3 Gen. 

44 Sp. 

2. Plantaginem, contains of Pentand. Monogy. *Plantago ; of 
Moniec. Tetrand. *Littorella. 2 Gen. 38 bp. 

3. Nyctaginea, contains of Monand. Munogy. Boerhavia ; of 
Tridnd. Monogy. Oxybaphus ; of Tetrand. Monogyn. Allionia, 
Opercularia, Cryptospermum ; of Pentand. Monogy. Mirabilis ; 
of Heptandr. Monogyn. Visonia. 7 Gen. 18 Sp. 

4. Amarantliacecc , contains of Pentand. Monogy. Gomphrena, 
Philoxerus, Achyranthes, Pupalia, Cieringia, Celosia, Lesti- 
budesia, Altemanthera, iErua, *Illecebrum, Paronychia, 
Anychia, Mollia ; of PentawLDigyn. *He:miaria; of Monce.c. 
Peni<a«(/. *Amaranthus ; of Dicec.Hexandr. Ixeiine. 16 Gen. 
78 Sp. 

i. Chenopodece, contains of Diandr. Monogy. *Salicomia ; of 
Diand. Digyn. Corispermum, *Blitum ; of Triand. Monogyn. 
Polycnemum; of Tefrandr. Tctrag. Rivina, Camphorosma; 
i)f I'etandr. Monogyn. Chenolea ; of Pentandr. Digyn. *Cheno- 
/>o(Uum, *Beta, *Salsola, Kochia, Anabasis, Bosea; of Pen- 
tandr. Tetragyn. Bosella ; of Heptandr. Monogyn. Petiveria; 
of Octandr. Digyn. Oalenia ; of Decandr. Decagyn. Phytolacca; 
of ilfonafc. Jtfo«a?!</r. Ceratocarpus ; of Moncec. Triandr. Axy- 
ris; of Monxnc. Diotis; of Ciffie. Pe;ifaj!</r. Spinacia ; of Poly- 
gam. Moncec. *Atriplex, Rhagodia. 23 Gen. lUO Sp. 

6. PolygoneiB, contains of Triand. Trigyn. Kcenigia'; of 
Hexandr. Dfg^i/n. Atraphaxis, of Hexand. Trigyn. Rumex; 
of Ociand. Trigyn. *Polygonum, Coccoloba; of Enneand. 
Monogyn. Eriogonum ; of Enneand. Trigyn. Rheum ; of 
Decandr. Trigyn. Brunnichia; of Dodecandr. Tetragyn. Calli- 
gonum. 9 Gen. 80 Sp. 

7. Laurime, contains of Enneandr. Monogyn. Laurus ; of 
Moiuec. Tetrand. Hemandia ? 2 Gen. 18 Sp. 

8. Myristirinxe, contains of Dicec. Monadelph. Myristica. 1 Gen. 
2 Sp. 

9. Proteacece, contains of Tetrand. Monogyn. Petrophila, Iso- 
pogon, Protea, Leucospermum, Mimetes, Serruria, Nivenia, 
Sorocephalus, Spatalla, Persoonia, Grevillea, Hakea, Lam- 
bertia, Xylomelum, Telopea, Lomatia, Rhopala, Banksia, 
Dryandra ; of Ciffic. Tetrandr. Aulax, Leucadendron ; of 
Polygam. Moncec. Brabejum. 22 Gen. 191 Sp. 

10. Tliymeleoe, contains of Diandr. Monogyn. Pimelea; of 
Tetrandr. Monogyn. Struthiola; of Odaiidr. Monogyn. La- 
getta, *Daphne, iDirca, Gnidia, Stellera, Passerina, Lachnea ; 
of Decandr. Monogyn. Dais. 10 Gen. 47 Sp. 

11. Santalacece, contains of Triand. Monogyn. Santalum ; of 
Pentandr. Monogyn. *Thesium ; of Octandr. Monogyn. 
Fuchsia, Memecylon ; of Decandr. Monogyn. Bucida ; of 
X)ia?c. Triandr. OsyrLs ; of Polygam. Moncec. Fusanus, Nyssa. 
8 Gen. 17 Sp. 

12. Eleagnew, contains of Tetrand. Monogyn. Eleagnus ; of 
DitBC. Tetrand. Hippophae. 2 Gen. 6 Sp. 

13. Aristolochice, contains of Dodecandr. Monogyn. *Asarum ; of 
Gynandr. Hexandr. *Aristolochia. 2 Gen. 22 Sp. 

H. Buphorbiacea;, contains of Pentandr. Trigyn. Xylophila ; of 
Dodecand. Trigyn. *Euphorbia; of Momiec. Triandr. Tragia; 
of Momec. Tetrandr. Cicca, *Buxus, Pachysandra; of Ma:na:c. 
Monadelph. Plukenetia, Dalechampia, Acalypha, Croton, Ja- 
tropha, Rieinus, Omphalea, Hippomane, Sapium, Phyllan- 
thus, Stillingia, Aleurites, Hura ; of Diac. Dtandr. Borya ; of 
Diosc. Pentand. Securinega ; of Dicec. Enneandr. *Mer- 
curialis ; of C/oec Decandr. Kiggelaria ; of Dt<FC, Monadelph. 
Eccaria, Adelia; of Dime. Gynand. Cluytia. 26 Gen. 
220 Sp. 

15. IJrIu.rw, contains of Diandr. Trigy. Piper; of Tetrandr. 
Mumii/y. Dorstenia; of Octandr. Tetragyn. Forskohlea ; of 
Cijnand. Driand. (ianneta; of Manct'c. Jtfonartci. Artocarims ; 



of Mmioec. Tetrand. * Urtica, Boehmeria, Moms ; of Mona-c 
Polyandr. Thelygonum ; of Diac. Diandr. Cecropia ; of 
Diwc. PentuTidr. Cannabis, *Humulus; of Polygam. Mona:c. 
*Parietaria ; of Polyg. Dioecia, Ficus. 14 Gen. 103 Sp. 

16. AmentnctLOi, contains of Pentand. Digyn. Ulmus; of Fo- 
hjandr. Digyn. Fothergilla ; of Moncec. Triandr. Comptonia; 
of Mona:c. Tetrand. *Alnus ; of Moncec. Poiyand. *Quercas, 
*FaguSj Castanea, *Betula, *Carpinus, Ostrya, *'Corylus, 
Platanus, Liquidambar; of Dia:c. Diandr. *ha\ix; of Dia;c. 
Odand. *Populus ; of Polygam. Munosc. Celtis. 16 Gen. 
191 Sp. 

17. Cmnferrc, contains of Monac. Monand. Casuarina, *Finus, 
Thuja, Cupressus, Pndocarpus ; of Diac. Monodeljdi. Arau- 
caria, *Juniperus, * Taxus, Ephedra. 9 Gen. 74 Sp. 

Claps VIII. IMoNOcoxYi.EDONEa;. Phanerogamew, ox Vlanii^, 
with one Seed-lobe, in which the fruclihcation is visible. 
Twenty-five Orders. 

Order 1. Cycadew, contains of Dia:c. Polyand. Cycas, Zamia. 
2 Gen. 13 Sp. 

2. Hydrocharidew, contains of Tetrand. Monogyn. Trapa ; of 
Heptandr. Mtmogyn. Damasonium ; of Diac. Enneandr. 
* Hydrocharis ; of Diac. Dodecand. * Stratiotes. 4 Gen. 
4 Sp. 

3. Bvtmneie, of Enneand. Hexagyn. *Butomus. 1 Gen. 

1 Sp. 

4. Ahsmaceai, contains of Pentandr. Monogyn. *Potamogeton ; 
of Hexand. Trigyn. *Scheuchzeria, *Triglochin ; of Hexandr. 
Polyg. Aclinocarpus, *Alisma; of Moncec. Pulyandr. *Sa- 
gittaria. 6 Gen. 30 Sp. 

5. OrchidetF., contauis of Gynand. Monandr. *Orchis, *Gymna- 
denia, *Aceras, *Herminiura, *Habenaria, Bartholina, *Se- 
rapias, *Ophrys, *SatjTium, Disa, Pterygodium, Disperis, 
*Goodyera, *Neottia, Ponthieva, I)iurus,'Thelymitra, *Lis- 
tera, *E]>ipactLS, Pogonia, Caledonia, Glossodia, Pterostylis, 
Caleya, Calopogon, Arethusa, Bletia, Geodorum, Calypso, 
*Malaxis, *Corallhonhiza, Isochilus, Omithodiuni, Stelis, 
Pleurothallis, Octomeria, Aerides, Cryptarrher.a, Dendro- 
bium,Gomesa,Cymbidium, Brassia,Onciaium, Cyrtopodium, 
Brassavola, Broughtonia, Epidendrum, Vanilla; of Gynand. 
Diandr. *Cypripedium. 49 Gen. 128 Sp. 

6. Musacea:, contains of Pentandr. Monogyn. Heliconia, Stre- 
litzia; of Hexand. Mo?io^i/n. Musa, Urania. 4 Gen. 14 Sp. 

7. Iridece, contains of Triandr. Monogyn. *Crocus, *Tricho- 
nema, Geissorhiza, Hesperantha, Sparaxis, Ixia, y^noroa- 
theca, Tritonia, Watsonia, Gladiolus, Melasphserula, An- 
tholyza, Babiana, ^\ristea, Wi taenia, Lapeyrousia, Mora;a, 
*Iris, Marica, Pardanthus ; of Monadelph. Triandr. Pater- 
sonia, Ferraria, Tigridia, Galaxia. 24 Gen. 224 Sp. 

8. Hwmodoraceie, contains of Triand. Motiogyn. Wachendorfia, 
Xiphidium, Dilatris, Haemodorum; of Hexandr. Monogyn. 
Lophiola, Lanaria, Anigozanthus. 7 Gen. 13 Sp. 

9. AmaryllidetE, contains of Hexand. Monogyn. Ha^manthus, 
*Galanthus, Leucojum, Strumaria, Crinum, C'yrtanthus, 
Bnmsvigia, Amaryllis, *Narcissus, Pancratium, Eucrosia, 
Doryanthes, Gethyllis. 13 Gen. 170 Sp. 

10. Hemerocallidea:, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. Blandfo! dia, 
Hemerocallis, Aletris, Tritoma, Veltheiraia, Polianthes, 
Sanseviera, Tulbagia, Brodoca, Aloe. 11 Gen. 110 Sp. 

11. Dioscori72ce, contains of Disc. Hexand. Raiania, Dioscoria. 

2 Gen. 9 Sp. 

12. Smilacece, contains of Hexand. Monogyn. Streptopus, *Con 
vallaria, Smilacina, *Polygonatum, Ojihiopogon ; of Hexandr. 
Trigyn. Mvrsiphyllum ? Medeola, Trillium; of Octand. 
Tetragyn. *Pai-is ; of Dicec. Hexandr. Smllax, *Tamus ; of 
Moncec. Monadelph. *Kuscus. 12 Gen. 59 Sp. 

13. Lilicj;, or Liliacece, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. *Fri- 
tillaria, Lilium, *Tulipa, Erythronium, Gloriosa, Alstroe- 
meria, Uvularia, Yucca. 8 Gen. 57 Sp. 

14. Bromelea:, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. Bromelia, Pil- 
caimia, Tillandusia, Agave, Furcroea, Buonapartea. 6 Gen. 
39 Sp. 

15. Asphodelece, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. Pontederia ? 
Eucomis, Ajjhyllanthes, Sowerbsea, *Allium, A'buca, Xan- 
thorrhaea, T hysanotus, Eriospermum, *Gagea, *Omithoga- 
lum, *Scilla; Massonia, Asphodelus, Anthericum, Arthro- 
podium, Phalangium, Chlorophytum, Caesia, *Narthecium, 
Dianella, E\istrephus, Asparagus, Drimia, Uuropetalun, 
*Hyacinthus, *Muscari, Lachenalia, Dracajna, I hvlloma, 
Phormium, HyTJOxis, CurcuUgo, Cyanella. 53 Gen. 
273 Sp. 

16. Melanthacece, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. Bulboccdium, 
of Hexand. Trigyn. *Tofieldia, Melanthi'um, *CoIchicum, 
Helonias, Nolina ; of Polygam. Moncec. Veratrum. 7 Gen. 
31 Sp. 

17. Juncece, contains of Diandr. Monogyn. Philydrum; of 
Hexand. Monogyn. *Juncus, *Luzula; of Hexand. Trigiin. 
Flagellaria? 4 Gen. 30 Sp. 

18. Restiacece, contains of Triand. Mono^n. Xyris; of Triandr. 
Trigyn. *Ericcaulon ; of Diac. Triandr. Willdenovia, Restio, 
Elegia. 5 Gen. 7 Sp. 

19. Commelinea, contains of Triandr. Monogyn. Commelina, 
Aneileraa, Callisia; of Hexandr. Monogy. Tradescantia. 
4 Gen. 22 Sp. 

20. Palmte, contains of Hexandr. Monogyn. Corypha, Lic- 
ouala, Thrinax, Calamus; of Hexandr^ Trigyn. Sabal; of 
Monac. Hexandr. Cocus, Bactris, Elate, Sagus ; of Moncec. 
Polyandr. Caryota ; of Moncec. Monadelph. Areca ; of Dicec. 
Triandr. Phoenix; of Dicec. Hexandr. Elais, Chamaedorea, 
Borassus; of Dicec. Monadelph. Latania; of Polygam. Rha- 
phis ; of Polygam. Dicec. Chamaerops. 18 Gen. 29 Sp. 

21. Cannece, contains of Monand. Monogyn. Canna, Maranta, 
Thalia, Phrynium. 4 Gen. 15 Sp. 

22. PandancB, contains of Dicec. Monand. Pandanus. 1 Gen. 
4Sp. 

23. Scitaminea, contains of Monandr. Monogyn. Hedychjum, 
Alpinia, Hellenia, Zinziber, Elettaria, Costus, Kaempferia, 
Amomum, Curcuma, Globba. 10 Gen. 35 Sp. 

24. Cyperacea, contains of Triandr. Monogyn. *Mariscus, 
Kylluigia, *Cyperus, Isolepis, *Scirpus, Eieocharis, *Ryn- 
chospora, *Schoenus, *Cladium, *Trichophorum, *Eriopho- 
rum; of Moncec. Triandr. Carex. 12 Gen. 133 Sp. 

25. Aroidece, contains of Tetrand. Monogyn. Pothos ; of Hexand. 
Monogyn. *Acorus, Orontium, Tupistra, Tacca; of Hetdand. 
Monogyn. Dracontium, Calla; of Moruec. Triandr. *Typha, 
*Sparganium ; of Moiuec. PolyaivJ. * Arum, Caladium. 
11 Gen. 61 Sp. 



138 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



26. Granunete, contains ot Di.vidr D!gpv. *Anthoxanthiim ; 
of Triaiui. Mono^yn. *Nardus, Lvgciim, Cornucopia;, Cen- 
clirus, *Sesleria,\Limnetis; of friavdr Tripxjn. *Tricho- 
tlium, Sporabolus, *Agrostis, *Knappla, Pterotis, *Poly- 
pogon, *Slipa, Trisetum, *Avena, *Bromus, *Fcbtuca, *Tri- 
ticum, *.SecalL', *Hordeum, *EIymus, *Loliam, Kcelfria, 
*Glyceria, *Poa, *Triodia, *CalaiTiagrostis, *Arundo, *Aira, 
*MeUca, Echinaria, Lappago, Eleusine, Chr.suru';, *Cyno- 
surns, Beckmaiinia, *Dactylis, Uniola, *Briza, *C>niodon, 
*i\Iilium, *Lagurus, *Alopecuru.s, *PhJeum, Crypbis,*I'ha- 
laris, Torrettia, Pa^palium, Disitaria, Panicum, Orthopogon, 
*Pennjsetum, Saccliaruin, *K.ottbollia, Michrochloa, I.eer- 
sia ; of Hexamlr. Moiwgyii. Bambu^a, Ehrharta ; of Hexawtr. 
Digyu. Oryza; of Mvilax. Triandr. Zea, Tripsacum, Coix, 
Oltra; of Motiac. Hexamlr. Zizania, Phanis; of Poly gam. 
.WoiKEC. Andropogon , Chloris, Penicillaria, Sorghum, *Hol- 
»:us, Iscluemum, iEgilops, Alanisuris. 7 J Gen. 377 Sp. 

Class IX. Monocotvi.edo.vb^b. Cryptogamete, in which the 
fructification is concesiled, unknown, or irregular. Five 
Orders. 



Order 1. Naiadea, contains of Monandi: Mimogifti. *Hippuris ; 
of DianJr. Di^n. *Calitriche; of Tetraitd. Telragyn. *Raf- 
pia; of Hexaruir, Trigt/n. Aponogeton; of Heptand. Te- 
tragyn. Saururus ; of moturc. Monandr. * Zannichelia, 
*Cnara; of Moiuec. Diand. *Lemna; of M.-niac. Polyand. 
*CeratophylIum, *IVIyTiophyllum. 10 Gen. 23 Sp. 

2. Eijuisetacex, contains of Cryptog. Gonopterid. *Equisetum. 
1 den. 7 Sp. 

3. Marsiliaceif, contains of Cryptogam. Hydropterid. *Isoetes, 
*Pilularia. 2 Gen. 2 Sp. 

4. Lyciipndinca:, contains 6f Cryjitogam. Siachynpierid. *Lycopo 
dium, Psilotum. 2 Gen. 12 Sp. 

5. Filicts, contains of Cryptogam. Stachyopierid. *OphiogIossuni, 
*Botr>chiuni ; of Crypto, foro^^erirf. JVIarattia ; of Crypto^. 
SdiisimUonteruI. Lygo'djuni, Anemia, *Osmunda ; of Ctt/p^oJ'. 
Filic. Acrt)sticum,"Hemionitis, Meniscium, Grammitis, 'fPo- 
lv))odium, Allantodia, *Aspidum, *Asplenium, *Scolopen- 
drium, Dij>lazium, *Pteris, Vittaria, Onoclea, *BIechnum, 
AV'oodwardia, Doodia, *Adiantum, Cheilanthes, Lonchitis, 
Davallia, Dicksonia, Cyathea, *Trichomanes, *Hymenc- 
phyllum. 52 Gen. 139 Sp. 



Chap. V. 

Vegetable Organology, or the external Structure of Plants. 

590. Vegetables are reducible to classes, according as they are distinguished by a structure, 
or organisation, more complicated or more simple ; or, according as they are found to be 
formed with or witliout certain parts or organs entering into the general idea of the plant. 
The former constitute what may be denominated perfect plants, and form a class compre- 
hending the principal mass of the vegetable kingdom. The latter constitute what may be 
denominated imperfect plants, and form a class comprehending all such vegetables as are 
not included in the foregoing class. Such is the arrangement of Keith, from whose 
work, as by far the best for general purposes, we have chiefly extracted this and the 
three following chapters. 

OECT. I. Perfect Plants. 

591. The parts of perfect plants may be distribtited into conservative and- reproductive, as 
corresponding to their respective functions in the economy of vegetation. 

SuBSECT. 1. Conservative Organs. 

592. The conservative organs are sxich as are absolutely necessary to the growth and 
preservation of the plant, including the root, trunk, branch, leaf, and frond. 

The root is the principal organ of nutrition. 

The trunk constitutes the principal bulk of the individual. 

The branches are the divisions of the trunk, originating generally in the upper extremity, but often also 
along the sides. 

The leaf is a temporary part of the plant, issuing generally from numerous points towards the extremi- 
ties of the branches, but sometimes also immediately from the stem or root, and distinguishable by the 
sight or touch into an upper and under surface, a base and an apex, with a midrib and lateral nerves. 

The frond is to be regarded as a compound of several of the parts already described ; it consists of a 
union or incori>oration of the leaf, leaf-stalk, and branch or stem, forming as it were but one organ, of 
which the constituent parts do not separate spontaneously from one another by means of the fracture of 
any natural joint, as in the case of plants in general, but adhere together even in their decay. 

SuBSECT. 2. Conservative Appendages. 

593. The conservative appendages are accessory or supernumerary parts found to accom- 
pany the conservative organs occasionally, but not invariably. 

Gems, or buds, are organised substances issuing from the surface of the plant, and containing the rudi- 
ments of new and additional parts which they protrude ; or the rudiments of new individuals which they 
constitute by detaching themselves ultimately from the parent plant, and fixing themselves in the soil. 

Glands are small and minute substances of various different forms, found chiefly on the surface of the 
leaf and petiole, but often also on the other parts of the plant, and supposed to be organs of secretion. 

The tendril is a thread-shaped and generally spiral process issuing from the stem, brancli, or petiole, and 
sometimes even from the expansion of the leaf itself, being an organ by which plants of weak and climb- 
ing stems attach themselves to other plants, or other substances for support ; for which purjjose it seems 
to be well fitted by nature, the tendril being much stronger than a branch of the same size. 

The stipulce are small and foliaceous appendages accompanying the real leaves, and assuming the ap- 
pearance of leaves in miniature. 

Rajnenta are thin, oblong, and strap-shaped appendages of a brownish color, issuing from the surface 
of the plant, . and somewhat resembling the stipulsB, but not necessarily accompanying the leaves. The 
term, which literally signifies bits of chips or shavings, seems to have been employed by Linnaius to de- 
note the small and scattered scales that are frequently found on the stems of vegetables, originating in the 
bark, and giving it a rough or chopped appearance. Hence a branch or stem that is covered with thin and 
dry scales or flaps is said to be ramentaceous, as in the case of tamarix gallica. 

The armature consists of such accessory and auxiliary parts as seem to have been intended by nature to 
defend the plant against the attacks of animals. 

The pubescence is a general term, including under it all sorts of vegetable down or hairiness, with which 
the surface of the plant may be covered, finer or less formidable than the armature. 

Ano?nalies. There are several other appendages proper to conservative organs, which ajre so totally dif- 
ferent from all the foregoing, that they cannot be classed with any of them ; and so very circumscribed in 
their occurrence, that they do not yet seem to have been desigiiated by any peculiar appellation. The 



Book I. 



STRUCTURE OF PERFECT PLANTS. 



139 



first anomaly, as affects 
the conservative appen- 
dages, occurs in dionoea 
muscipula, or Venus's fly. 
trap ifigAS. a). A second is 
that which occurs in sarra- , 
cenia purpurea, or purple ) 
sidesaddle-flower (b}. A [ 
third, which is stiJl'more i 
singular, occurs in ne- ^ 
penthes distillatoria (c\ 
The last anomaly is that 
of a small globular and 
membranaceous bag, at- 
tached as an appendage 
to the roots and leaves of 
some of the aquatics. It 
is confined only to a few 
genera, but is to be seen 
in great abundance on the 
roots or leaves of the seve- 
ral species of utricularia 
' inhabiting the ponds and 
ditches of this country; 

and on the leaves of aldrovanda vesiculosa, an inhabitant of the marshes of Italy. In utricularia vulgaris 
this appendage is pear-shaped, compressed, with an oix?n border at the small end furnished with several 
slender fibres originating in the margin, and cont^iinnig a transparent and watery fluid, and a small bubble 
of air, by means of which it seems to acquire a buoyancy that suspends it in the water. 

SuBSECT. 3. liejrroductive Organs. 

594. 77ie reproductive organs are such j^arts of the plant as are essential to its propaga- 
tion, corresponding in extent to the fructification of Linnceus, -which he has elegantly 
defined to be a temporary part of the vegetable, whose object is the reproduction of the 
species, teiminating the old individual, and beginning the new. It includes the flower 
with its immediate accompaniments or peculiarities, the flower-stalk, receptacle, and 
inflorescence, togetlier with the ovary or fruit. 

Tfie flower, like the leaf, is a temporary part of the plant, issuing generally from the extremity of the 
branches, but sometimes also from the root, stem, and even leaf, being the apparatus destined by nature 
for the production of the fruit, and being also distinguishable, for the most part, by the brilliancy of its 
coloring or the sweetness of its smell. It has been happily st)-led by Pliny, the joy of plants^ " flos 
gaudium arborum ;" of which the lily, the tulip, and the rose, are magnificent examples. 

The flower-stalk is a partial trunk or stem, supporting one or more flowers, if the flowers are not sessile, 
and issuing from the root, stem, branch, or petiole, and sometimes even from the leaf. It is considered by 
botanists as comprehending two different species, the scape and peduncle. 

TJie receptacle is the seat of the flower, and point of union between the different parts of the flower, or 
between the flower and the plant, whether immediate and sessile, or mediate and supported upon a 
flower-stalk. Some botanists have considered it as a part of the flower itself, thongh this view of the sub- 
ject IS not entirely correct ; but it is at any rate a part of the fructification, and cannot possibly be wanting 
in the case of any flower whatever. Like the flower-stalk, it has been discriminated by botanists into two 
diflTerent species, which are not indeed designated by proper names, but characterised by the appellations 
of the proper receptacle, and the common receptacle. 

TJic viflorescence is the peculiar mode of aggregation in which flowers are arranged or distributed ujxjn 
the plant, whence it is called sometimes also the mode of flowering. 

'lif fruit. In the progress of fructification, when the several organs of the flower have discharged their 
respec tive functions, the petals, the stamens, the style, and often the calyx, wither and fall. The ovary 
alone remains attached to the plant, and swells and expands till it reaches maturity. It is now denominated 
the fruit. But at the period of its complete developement it also detaches itself from flie plant and drops 
into the bosom of the earth, containing and protecting the embrj'O of the future vegetable. The fruit then 
is the ripened ovary and the parts which it contains. In popular language the term is confined chiefly to 
such fruits as are esculent, as the apple, the peach, and the cherry, or perhaps to the esculent part only ; 
but with the botanist the matured ovary of every flower, with the parts contained, constitutes the fruit. 

SuBSECT. 4. Heproductive Appendages, 

595. Various additional ayid supernumerary parts, not at all essential to their consti- 
tution, because not always present, are often found attending the reproductive organs. 
Many of them are precisely of the same character with that of the conservative appen- 
dages, except that they are of a finer and more delicate texture. Such are the glands, 
down, pubescence, hairs, thorns, or prickles, wath one or other of which the parts of tjie 
fructification are occasionally furnished. But others are altogether peculiar to the repro- 
ductive organs, and are to be regarded as constituting, in the strict acceptation of the 
tenn, true reproductive appendages. Some of them are found to be proper to the flower, 
and others to the fruit. 

The appendages proper to the flower are the involucre, spathe, and bracte, generally designated by the 
appellation of floral leaves, as being leaf-like substances situated near the flower, though different in their 
color, form, or substance, from the real leaves of the plant ; together with the nectary, and several other 
minute organs presumed to be nectaries, though not certainly known to be so. 

Appendages of tlie fruit. When the flower with its appendages has fallen, the ovary, which is still 
immature, is left attached to the plant, to complete the object of the fructification in the ripening of the 
contained seed. If it is left without any extraneous or supernumerary appendage, which is a case that 
often occurs, as in the cherrj-, apricot, and currant, the fruit is said to be naked. The naked fruit, how- 
ever, is not to be confounded with the naked seed, from whicli it is altogether distinct. For it is the want 
of a conspicuous pericarp that constitutes the naked seed ; but it is the want of an additional integument 
enveloping the pericarp, that constitutes the naked fruit. But all parts of the flower are not always dcci- 




140 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



duous, and it often hapi>ens that one or otiicr of them still continues to accompany the pericarp or seed 
both in its ripening and ripened state, constituting its appendage, and covering it either wholly or in part, 
or adhering to it in one shape or other. 

Sect. IL Imperfect Plants. 

596. Plc.nts apparently defective in one or other of the more conspicuous parts or 
organs, whether conservative or reproductive, are denominated imperfect. Lin- 
njEus characterised them by the appellation of cryptogamous plants, because their 
organs of fructification are not yet detected, or are so very minute as to require the aid of 
the microscope to render them visible ; and in the system of Jussieu they are included 
in the monocotyledoneae and acotyledonea2, composing the cryptogameae of the former, 
and the whole of the latter division. As in the perfect plants, so in the imperfect plants, 
the eye readily recognises traces of a similitude or dissimilitude of external habit and 
deportment characterising the different individuals of which they consist, and suggesting 
also the idea of distinct tribes or families. And upon this principle different botanists 
have instituted different divisions, more or less extensive, according to their own peculiar 
views of the subject. But one of the most generally adopted divisions of imperfect 
plants is that by which they are distributed into the natural orders of filices, equisitaceaj, 
lycopodineae, musci, hcpatica?, algae, lichenai, and fungi. Dillenius, Micheli, 
Bulliard, Hedwig, and Acharius, have rendered themselves illustrious by the study of 
tliese tribes. 

SuBSECT. 1. Filices, Equisilacecr, and Li/copodineee. 

597. The filices, equisitaceee, and li/copodinecc, are for the 7nost part herbaceous, and 
die down to the ground in the winter, but they are furnished with a perennial root, from 
which there annually issues a frond bearing the fructification. The favorite habitations of 
many of them are heaths and uncultivated grounds, where they are found intermixed with 
furze and brambles ; but the habitations of such as are the most luxuriant in their growth, 
are moist and fertile spots, in sliady and retired situations, as on mossy dripping rocks, or 
by fountains and rills of water. Some of them will thrive even on the dry and barren 
rock, or in the chinks and fissures of walls; and others only in wet and marshy situations 
where they are half immersed in water. 

SuBSECT. 2. Musci. 

598. The mosses are a tribe of imperfect plants of a small and diminutive size, consisting 
often merely of a root, surmounted with a tuft of minute leaves, from the centre of which 
the fructification springs, but furnislied for tlie most part with a stem and branches, on 
which the leaves are closely imbricated, and the fructification terminal or lateral. They are 
perennials and herbaceous, approaching to shrubby ; or annuals, though rarely so, and 
wholly herbaceous, the perennials being also evergreens. Their most favorite habit- 
ations are bleak and barren soils, such as mountains, heaths, woods, where they are 
found, not only rooted in the earth, but attached also to the roots and trunks of trees, 
and even to the flinty rock ; or immersed in bogs and ditches, or floating, though fixed by 
tlie roots, in streams of running water. As they affect the most barren soils, so they 
thrive best also in the coldest and wettest seasons. In the drought of summer they 
wither and languish ; but in the more moderate temperature of autiurm they begin to 
recruit, so tliat even the chilling cold of winter that deprives other plants of their verdure 
and foliage, and threatens destruction to the greater part of vegetables, tends but to refresh 
and revive thie family of the mosses, [fig. 44.) Hence their capacity of retaining moisture 
for a great length of time vvithout discovering any tendency to putrefaction, and of recover- 
ing their verdure when moistened with water, even after having been completely dried, and 
kept in a dried state for many years. From the extreme minuteness of their parts, they 
are apt to be overlooked by the superficial observer, or disregarded by the novice in 




Book I. 



STRUCTURE OF IMPERFECT PLANTS. 



141 



botany, who is attracted perhaps only by wliat is specious in the plant or flower, but who, 
when the desire of botanical knowledge shall have inspired him with a relish for micro- 
scopical observation, vvill find the study of the mosses to be no less interesting than that 
of the more perfect plants, and the form and texture of their parts to be no less beautiful 
and elegant than that of the most gaudy flowers. {Jig. 44.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Hepaticce. 

599. The hepaticce are a tribe of small and herbaceous plants resembling the mosses, but 
chiefly constituting fronds, and producing their fruit in a capsule that splits into longi- 
tudinal valves. The name is derived from a Greek word signifying the liver, because 
perhaps some of them were formerly employed as a remedy in diseases of the liver ; or 
because some of them exhibit, in their general aspect, a slight resemblance to the lobes 
of the liver. In their habitations, they aflect for the most part the same sort of situations 
as the mosses, being found chiefly in wet and shady spots, by the sides of springs and 
ditches, or on the shelving brinks of rivulets, or on the trunks of trees. Like the mosses, 
they thrive best also in cold and damp weather, and recover their verdure, though dried, 
if moistened again with water. The hepaticac and the mosses are indeed so nearly al- 
lied, that they have generally been regarded as constituting but one family, and classed 
together accordingly ; the latter under the title of musci frondosi, and the former under 
that of musci hepatici. Such was the division even of Hedwig ; but later botanists have 
found it to be more consonant to the principles of sound and scientific arrangement, 
to separate the hepaticae from the mosses altogether, and to convert them into a distinct 
tribe. 

SuBSECT. 4, Alg(B and Lichence. 

600. The term alg(^, or sea-iveeds, among modern botanists, includes not merely marine 
and many other immersed plants, but also a great variety of plants tliat are not even 
aquatics. All the algte, or, according to the Jussieuean terminology, algeaa, however, 
agree in the common character of having their herbage frondose, or but rarely admitting 
of the distinction of root, stem, and leaf, and their fructification imbedded either in the 
substance of the frond itself, or in some peculiar and generally sessile receptacle. The 
algeae were formerly divided into the six following genera, lichen, tremella, fucus, ulva, 
conferva, byssus ; but now the genus lichen forms an order of itself. 

601. The utilily of the algcB is obviously very considerable, whether we regard them as 
furnishing an article of animal food, or as applicable to medicine and the arts. Tho 
fucus edulis, and several other fuci, ai-e eaten and much relished by many people, whether 
raw or dressed, and it is likely that some of them are fed upon by various species of fish. 
The fucus lichenoides [Turner, c. 118.) is now believed to be the chief material of the 
edible nests of the East India swallows, wliich are so much esteemed for soups, that they 
sell in China for their weight in gold. When disengaged from their place of grov/th and 
thrown upon the sea-shore, the European algse are often collected by the farmer and used 
as manure. They are often also employed in the preparation of dyes, as well as in the 
lucrative manufacture of kelp, a commodity of the most indispensable utility in the im- 
portant arts of making soap and glass. 

602. The utility of the lichence is also worthy 
of notice. The lichen rangiferinus {fig. 45.) 
forms the principal nourishment of the rein-deer 
during the cold months of winter, when all other 
herbage fails. The lichen islandicus is eaten 
by the Icelanders instead of bread, or used in 
the preparation of broths, and like the lichen 
pulmonarius, has been lately found to be bene- 
ficial in consumptive affections. Many of them 
are also employed in the preparation of some of 
our finest dyes, or pigments ; and it is from the 
lichen parellus that the chemical analysist ob- 
tains his litmus. The lichens and the noosses 
seem instituted by nature to provide for the uni- 
versal difl"usion of vegetable life over the whole 
surface of the ten-estrial globe. The powdery 
and tuberculous lichens attach themselves even 
to the ])are and solid rock. Having reached 
the maturity of their species, they die and are converted into a fine earth, which forms a 
soil for the leathery lichens. These again decay and moulder into dust in their turn ; 
and the depth of soil, which is thus augmented, is now capable of nourishing and support- 
ing other tribes of vegetables. The seeds of the mosses lodge in it, and spring up into 




H2 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



plants, augmenting also by their decay the quantity of soil, and preparing it for the sup- 
port of plants of a more luxuriant growth, so that in the revolution of ages even the sur 
face of the barren rock is covered with a soil capable of supporting the loftiest trees. 

SuBSECT. 5. Fungi. 

603. The fungi are a tribe of plants whose herbage is a frond of a fleshy or pulj)i/ texture, 
quick in its growth, and fugacious in its duration, and bearing seeds or gems in an appro- 
priate and exposed membrane, or containing them interspersed throughout its mass. But 
this rule is not without its exceptions ; for many of the fungi are converted, during the 
process of vegetation, or rather when their vegetation is over, into a tough, leathery, and 
even woody substance, which gives them a permanency beyond that of their congeners, 
and a trait of character that is not included in the above definition. They are also a tribe 
of plants that may be regarded as 
the lowest in the vegetable scale, 
exhibiting a considerable resem- 
blance to the tribe of zoophites, and 
thus forming the connecting link 
between the vegetable and animal 
kingdoms. The habitations they 
affect are very various, many of them 
vegetating only on the surface of the 
earth ( fig. 46. a), and some of them 
even buried under it ; others on 
stumps and trunks of rotten trees (i); 
others on decayed fruit ; others on 
damp and wet walls j and others on 
animal ordure. 

Conservative organs. Many of the fungi are altogether destitute of any conspicuous roof, being attached 
to some appropriate basis of support merely by means of a large and flattened surface. The frond is often 
merely a thin, flat, and leathery sort of substance, adhering to a^ basis of support by means of the whole of 
its under-surface, as in the boleti. In others it is globular and sitting, as in lycoperdon ; and in others, it 
is bell-shaped and sitting, as in nidularia. 

Reproductive organs. In fungi furnished with gills and a curtain, if the inner surface of the curtain is 
caretully examined with a good magnifier, before the time of its natural detachment from the stipe or 
pileus, there will be found adhering to it a number of fine and delicate threads supporting small globules ; 
and in such as have no curtain the same sort of substances may be found adhering to the edge of the 
pileus. These Hcdwig regards as stamens. If the gills are next examined in the same manner and about 
the same time, there will be found sitting on their edge or surface a multitude of small, tender, and cylin- 
drical substances, some of which are surmounted with a small globule, and others not. These he regards 
as being probably the styles and summits. Similar substances may be detected on the other genera of 
fungi also. But from the extreme minuteness of their parts, and from their strong similitude to the down 
with which the finer organs of vegetables are generally covered, it is easy to perceive how very difficult it 
must be to decide upon their true character. 

604. Uses of the fungi. The powder of the lycoperdons is said to be an excellent 
styptic ; and is remarkable also for its property of strongly repelling moisture. If a basin 
is filled with water, and a little of the powder strewed upon the surface so as to cover it 
thinly, the hand may be plunged into it and thrust down to the bottom without being 
wetted with a single drop of water. Several of the boleti, when dried, afford a very use- 
ful tinder ; and several of the agarics and tubers are used, as articles of food, or as ingre- 
dients in the preparation of seasoning. The truffle is much esteemed for the rich and 
delicate flavor which it imparts to soups and sauces ; and the mushroom for its esculent 
property, and utility in the preparation of ketchup. 




' Chap. VI. 

Vegetable Anatomy, or the internal Structure of Plants. 

605. The organs of plants discoverable by external examination, are themselves reducible 
to component organs, which are again resolvable into constituent and primary organs. 
These are called the decomposite, the composite, and the elementary. 

Sect. I. Decomposite Organs. 

606. The decomposite organs constitute the vegetable individual, and are distinguishable 
by external examination ; to the dissection of which we will now proceed, taking them in 
the retrograde order of the seed, pericarp, flower, leaf, gem, and caudex, or branch, stem, 
and root, with their decomposite appendages. 

607. The seed. The mass of the seed consists oftwo principal parts, distinguishable without much difficulty; 
namely, the integuments and nucleus, or embryo and its envelopes. The integuments proper to the seed 



Book I. 



INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF PLANTS. 



143 



are two in number, an exterior integument and an interior integument ; which are sometimes, liowcver, 
enveloped by the additional integument constituting an appendage of the seed, under tlie title of the 
pellicle or seminal epidermis. The exterior integument, or testa, is the original cuticle oT the nucleus, not 
detachable in the early stages of its growth, but detachable at the period of the m»aturity of the fruit, 
when it is generally of a membranaceous or leathery texture ; though sometimes soft and fleshy, and 
sometimes crustaceous and bony. It may be very easily distinguished in the transverse or longitudinal 
section of the garden-bean or any other large seed, and may be also easily detached by the aid of a little 
manipulation. The interior integument, or sub-testa, lines the exterior integument, or testa, and immedi- 
ately envelopes the nucleus, deriving its origin from the interior portion of the umbilical cord, which, after 
perforating the testa, disperses into a multiplicity of ramifications connected by a fine membrane, and 
forms the interior integument. Like the testa, to which indeed it adheres, it may be easily distinguished 
in the garden-bean {fig. 47.), or in a ripe walnut ; in which last it is a fine transparent and net-like mem- 
brane. 

G08. The nucleus is that part of the seed which is 
contained within the proper integuments, consisting 
of the albumen with the vitellus, when present, and 
embryo. The albumen is an organ resembling in its 
consistence the white of an egg, and forming, in most 
cases, the exterior portion of the nucleus, but always 
separable from the interior or remaining portion. 
The vitellus is an organ of a fleshy but firm contex- 
ture, situated, when present, between the albumen 
and embryo ; to the former of which it is attached 
only by. adhesion, but to the latter by incorporation 
of substance, so as to be inseparable from it, except 
by force. The embryo (Jig. 47. a) which is the last and 
most essential part of the seed and final object of the 
fructification, as being the germ of the future plant, 
is a small and often very minute organ, enclosed 
within the albumen and occupying the centre of the seed. The cotyledon or seed-lobe (A), is that portion 
of the embryo, that encloses and protects the plantlet, and springs up during the process of germination 
into what is usually denominated the seminal leaf, if the lobe is solitary ; or seminal leaves, if there are 
more lobes than one. In the former case the seed is said to be monocotyledonous ; in the latter case, it 
is said to be dicotyledonous. Dicotyledonous seeds, which constitute by far the majority of seeds, are 
well exemplified in the garden-bean. As there are some seeds who&e cotyledon consists of one lobe only, 
falling short of the general number, so there are also a few whose cotyledon is divisible into several lobes, 
exceeding the general number. They have been denominated polycotyledonous seeds, and are exempli- 
fied in the case of lepidium sativum or common garden-cress, in which the lobes are six in number; as in 
that also of the different species of the genus pinus, in which they vary from three to twelve. But 
although by far the greater number of seeds are furnished with two cotyledons, or with a cotyledon divi- 
sible or not divisible into several lobes, there is also a considerable proportion in which the cotyledon is 
altogether wanting, or at least believed to be wanting by botanists in general. These, according to 
Gasrtner, are exemplified in the fuci, ferns, and fungi, the embryo being merely a germinating cicatrice 
imbedded in the surface of a vitellus which forms the mass of the seed. But Hedwig, to whose opinions 
on this subject much deference is also due, maintains that the seeds of the plants in question are furnished 
with cotyledons as well as those of other plants, and that no seed whatever is without them. This is a 
case, however, in which the general opinion of botanists is against him, as may be seen from the many 
systems founded upon the presence, or absence, or number of the cotyledons, and exemplified, as we have 
seen, in that of the great and justly celebrated Jussieu, whose primary divisions are those of acotyledonous, 
monocotyledonous, and dicotyledonous plants, the polycotyledonous being thought to be too few in num- 
ber to constitute a separate division. It should be recollected, however, that the above divisions were 
instituted at a time when the subject had not yet undergone any thing like a rigorous scrutiny, that 
•already many changes have been found necessary, and that future investigations will in all probability 
point out the necessity of more. In watching the germination of fern-seed, Mirbel observed some sub- 
stances which he regards as cotyledons, and so far supports the position of Hedwig. The plantlet, or future 
plant in miniature, is the interior and essential portion of the embryo, and seat of vegetable life. In some 
seeds it is so minute as to be scarcely perceptible ; while in others it is so large as to be divisible into dis- 
tinct parts, as in the garden-bean. 

609. The pericarp, which in different species of fruit assumes so many varieties of contexture, acquires its 
several aspects, not so much from a diversity of substance as of modification. The valves of the capsule, 
but particularly the partitions by which it is divided into cells, are composed of a thin and skinny mem- 
brane, or of an epidermis covering a pulp more or less indurated, and interspersed with longitudinal fibres. 
The capsule of the mosses is composed of a double and net-like membrane, enclosed within a fine epider- 
mis. The pome is composed of a fine but double epidermis, or, according to Knight, of two skins, enclosing 
a soft and fleshy pulp, with bundles of longitudinal fibres passing through it, contiguous to, and in the 
direction of, its longitudinal axis. The valves of the legume are composed of an epidermis enclosing a 
firm but fleshy pulp, lined for the most part with a skinny membrane, and of bundles of longitudinal fibres, 
forming the seam. The nutshell, whether hard or bony, or flexible and leathery, is composed of a pulp 
more or less highly indurated, interspersed with longitudinal fibres, and covered with an epidermis. 'I'he 
drupe is composed of an epidermis enclosing a fleshy pulp, which is sometimes so interwoven with a mul- 
tiplicity of longitudinal fibres as to seem to consist wholly of threads, as in the cocoa-nut. The be7-ry is 
composed of a very fine epidermis enclosing a soft and juicy pulp. The scales of the strobile are composed 
of a tough and leathery epidermis, enclosing a spongy but often highly indurated pulp interspersed with 
longitudinal fibres that pervade also the axis. 

610. The flower-stalk, or peduncle supporting the flower, which is a prolongation of the stem or brancli, or 
rather a partial stem attached to it, if carefully dissected with the assistance of a good glass, will be found 
to consist of the following several parts : — 1st, An epidermis, or external envelope ; 2dly, A parenchyma, 
or soft and pulpy mass ; 3dly, Bundles of longitudinal threads or fibres, originating in the stem or branch, 
and passing throughout the whole extent of the parenchyma. The several organs of the flower are merely 
prolongations of the component parts of the flower-stalk, though each organ does not always contain the 
whole of such component parts, or at least not under the same modifications. The epidermis, however, 
and parenchyma are common to them all j but the longitudinal threads or fibres are seldom if ever to be 
found except in the calyx or coroUa. 

611. The leaf -stalk, or petiole supporting the leaf, which is a prolongation of the branch or stem, or rather 
a partial stem attached to'it, exhibits upon dissection the same sort of structure as the peduncle, namely, an 
epidermis, a pulp or parenchyma, and bundles of longitudinal threads or fibres. 

612. Gems. There exist among the different tribes of vegetables four distinct species of gems, two peculiar 
to perfect plants, the bud and bulb, and two peculiar to imperfect plants, the propago and gongylus ; the 
latter being denominated simple gems, because furnished with a single envelope only ; and the former being 
denominated compound gems, because furnished with more than a single envelope. 




144 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11. 



Biuls are composed externally of a number of spoon-shaped 
scales overlapping one another, and converging towards a point 
ia the apex, and often cemented together hy means of a gluti- 
nous or mucUaginous substance exuding from their surface. If 
these scales are stripped off and dissected under the microscope, 
they will be found to consist, like the leaves or divisions of the 
calyx, of an epidermis enclosing a pulp interspersed with a net- 
Avork of fibres, but unaccompanied with longitudinal threads. 
If the scales of a leaf-bud are taken ajid stripped olF, and the 
remaining part carefiilly opened up, it will be found to consist 
of the rudiments of a young branch terminated bv a bunch of 
incipient leaves imbedded in a white and cottony down, being 
minute but complete in all their parts and proportions, and 
folded or rolled up in the bud in a peculiar and determinate 



Bttlhs, which are either radical or caulinary, exliibit in their 
external structure, or in a part of their internal structure that 
is easily detected, several distinct varieties, some being solid, 
some coated, and some scaly ; but all protruding in the process 
of vegetation the stem, leaf, and tlower, peculiar to their 
spepies. 

The -pro-pago, which is a sunple gem, pecuUar to some genera 
of imperfect plants, and exemplified by Gaertner in the lichens, 
consists of a small and pnlpy mass forming a granule of no regu- 
lar shape, sometimes naked, and sometimes covered with an 
envelope, which is a fine epidermis. 

The goiigijlus, wliich is also a simple s^m pecuUar to some 
genera of imperfect plants, and exemplified by (jaertner in the 
fuci, consists of a sUghtly indurated ])ulp moulded into a small 
and globular granule of a firm and solid contexture, and invested 
witli an epidermis. 

613. The term caudex, in its present application, is to be understood as including the whole mass or body 
both of the trunk and root, as distinct from the temporary parts of the plant, or parts already investi- 
gated ; and as comprehending both the caudex ascendens, and caudex desccndens of Linna;us, or the 
trunk and its divisions, with the root and its divisions. In opening up and dissecting the caudex, whether 
ascending or descending, the dissector will soon discover that its internal structure, like its external aspect 
or habit, is materially different in different tribes of plants. 

614. llie first general mode of the internal structure of the caudex is that 
in which an epidermis encloses merely a homogeneous mass of pulp or 
slender libre,which forms the principal body of the caudex, and becomes some- 
what indurated with age, though not v/oody, without discovering any further 
variety of component parts. This, Mirbel observes, is the simplest mode of 
internal structure existing among vegetables ; it is exemplified in the lower 
orders of frondose and imperfect plants, particularly the alga? and fungi. 

615. The second general mode of internal structure of the caudex is that in 
which an epidermis encloses two or more substances, or assemblages of 
substances, totally heterogeneous in their character. A very common va- 
riety of this mode is that in which an epidermis or bark encloses a soft and 
inUinj mass, interspersed with a number of longitudinal nerves or fibres, or 
bundles of fibres, extending from the base to the apex, and disposed in a 
peculiarity of manner characteristic of a tribe or genus. This mode pre- 
vails chiefly in herbaceous and annual or biennial plants, {fig. 48.) 
pulp being solid, as in apsidium filix-mass, and tubular, as in the garden 
parsnep or common hemlock. A second variety of this mode is that in which 
a strong and often thick bark encloses a circular layer of longitudinal fibres, 
or st ver:il sucli ciiTular and concentric layers, interwoven with thin transverse and 
divergent layers of pulp, so as to form a firm and compact cylinder, in the centre of 
which is lodged a pulp or pith. This mode is best exemplified in trees and slirubs 
{fig. 49.), though it is also applicable to many plants whose texture is chiefly or 
almost wholly lierbaceous, forming as it were the connecting link between such 
plants as are purely herbaceous on the one hand, and sucli as are purely woody on 
the other. In the latter case the wood is perfect ; in the former case it is imperfect. 
The wood being imperfect in the root of the beet, the common bramble, and burdock j 
and perfect in the oak or alder. 

616. The appendages of the plant, whether conservative or reproductive, exhibit 
nothing in their internal structure that is at all essentially dififerent from that of the 
organs that have been already describecL 




Sect. II. Co7n])osite Organs. 

6] 7. From the preceding analysis, it appears the decomposite organs are reducible to 
one or other of the several following substances, namely, epidermis, pulp, pith, cortical 
layers, ligneous layers, and vegetable fibre. These now remain to be further analysed, under 
the title of composite organs, as being still compound, with a view to reach the ultimate 
and elementary organs of the vegetable subject. 

618. Structure of the vegetable epidermis. The epidermis of the vegetable, which, from its resemblance 
to that of the animal, has been designated by the same name, is the external envelope or integument of 
the plant, extending over the whole surface, and covering the root, stem, branches, leaves, flower, and 
fruit, with their appendages ; the summit of the pistil only excepted. But although it is extended over 
the whole surface of the plant, it is not of equal consistence throughout. In the root and trunk it is a 
tough and leathery membrane, or it is a crust of considerable thickness, forming a notable portion of the 
bark, and assuming some peculiar shade of color ; while in the leaves, flowers, and tender shoots, it is a 
fine, colorless, and transparent film, when detached; and when adherent, it is always tinged with some 
peculiar shade, which it borrows from the parts immediately beneath it. Du Hamel, Saussure, Hedwig, 
Comparetti, Bauer, and others, have examined the epidermis, and, according to their descriptions, it is 
represented as consisting of at least two if not more layers, which in the stem of many plants, are very 
easily distinguished, particularly in that of the paper-birch, the bark of which may, perhaps, be regarded 
as a succession of individual cuticles. 

619. The pulp is a soft and juicy substance, constituting the principal mass of succulent plants, and a notable 
proportion of many parts even of woody plants. It constitutes the principal mass of many of the fungi and 
fuci, and of herbaceous plants in general. Of those phytologists who have described the pulp, Mirbel is con- 
sidered the most accurate. He compares it to clusters of small and hexagonal cells or bladders, con- 
taining for the most part a colored juice, and formed apparently of the foldings and doublings of a fine 
and delicate membrane, in which no traces of organisation are to be distinguished. In the trunk of what 
are called dicotyledonous plants, he regards the pulp, or cellular tissue, as consisting of two distinct 
portions, which he designates by the respective appellations of the herbaceous tissue, and the parenchyma. 
The former is the exterior portion of the cellular tissue, of which the cells always contain a resinous and 
colored juice, that communicates its peculiar tinge to the epidermis. The latter is the interior portion of the 
tissue, composed also of cells, but differing from those of the herbaceous tissue in containing only a 
watery juice without color, because it has not been exposed to the action of the light, though in the calyx 
and fruit this watery juice is said to be also often colored. But in the description of the vegetable pulp, 
the only distinction necessary to be made is that by which it is divided into two parts, namely, an 
apparatus of hexagonal cells or vesicles, and a contained juice, whether colorless or colored, the union of 
which substances forms a true pulp. 



13oOK I. 



INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF PLANTS. 




of the wood, are sufH- 



020. T/ie pith, as has been already shown, is a soft and spongy, but often succulent 
substance, occupying tlie centre of the root, stem, and branches, and extending in 
the direction of their longitudinal axis, in wliicli it is enclosed as in a tube. The 
structure of the pith is precisely similar to that of the pulp, being composed of an 
assemblage of hexagonal cells containing a watery and colorless juice, or of cellular 
tissue and a parenchyma. 

621. The cortical 'layers, or interior and concentric layers, constituting the mass 
of the bark, are situated immediately under the cellular integument, where such 
integument exists, and where not, immediately under the epidermis ; or they are 
themselves external. They are distinguishable chieriy in the bark of woody plants, 
but particularly in that of the lime-tree. They f.re composed of two elementary 
parts — bundles of longitudinal fibres constituting a network {Jig. 50.), and amass 
of pulp more or less indurated, lilling up the meshes. The innermost of the 
layers is denominated the liber, and was used by the ancients to write on 
before the invention of paper. It is the finest and most delicate of them all, 
and often most beautifully reticulated (Jig. 51. a), and varied by bundles of 
longitudinal fibre {b). But the liber of daphne lagetto is remarkable 
beyond that of all other plants for the beauty and delicacy of its network, 
which is not inferior .to that of the finest lace, and at the same time so 
very soft and flexible that in countries of which the ti'ee is a native the 
lace of the liber is often made to supply the place of a neckcloth. If the 
cortical layers are injured or destroyed by accident, the part destroyed is 
again regenerated, and the wound healed up without a scar. But if the 
wound penetrates beyond the liber, the part destroyed is no longer rege- 
nerated. Or if a tree is bent so as to break part of tne cortical fibres, and 
then propped up in its former position, the fractured fibres will again unite. 
Or if a portion of the stem is entirely decorticated and covered with a piece 
of bark, even from another tree, the two different barks will unite. Hence 
the practicability of ascertaining howfartheliber extends. And hence also the 
origin of grafting, which is always effected by a union o'f the liber of the 
graft and stock. 

622. T/ie ligneous layers, or layers constituting the wood, occupy the 
intermediate portion of the stem between the bark and pith ; and are 
disthiguishable into two different sorts — concentric layers and divergent 
layers. (Jig. 50.) 

623. The concentric layers, which constitute by far the greater part of the i 
eiently conspicuous for the purpose of exemplification on the surface of a horizontal section of most trunl s 
or branches, as on that of the oak and elm. But though they are generally described as being con- 
centric, they are not always strictly so. For they are often found to extend more on the one side of 
the axis of the stem or branch, than on the other. Some authors say the excess is on the north side, but 
others say it is on the south side. The former account for it by telling us it is because the north side is 
sheltered from the sun ; and the latter by telling us it is because the south side is sheltered from the cold ; 
and thus from the operation of contrary causes alleging the same effect, which has been also thought to 
be sufficiently striking and uniform to serve as a sort of compass, by which the bewildered traveller 
might safely steer his course, even in the recesses of the most extensive forest. But Du Hamel 
has exposed the futility of this notion, by showing that the excess is sometimes on the one side of the 
axis, and sometimes on the other, according to the accidental situation of the great roots and branches ; 
a thick root or branch producing a proportionably thick layer of wood on the side of the stem from which 
it issues. The layers are indeed sometimes more in number on the one side than on the ether, as well 
as thicker. But this is the exception, and not the rule. They are thickest, however, on the side on 
which they are fewest, though not of the same thickness throughout. Du Hamel, after counting twenty 
layers on the one side of the transverse section of the trunk of an oak, found only fourteen on the other. 
But the fourteen exceeded the twenty in thickness by one fourth part. But the layers thus discoverable 
on the horizontal section of the trunk are not all of an cc ual consistency throughout, there being an 
evident diminution in their degree of solidity from the centre, where they are hardest, to the circum- 
ference, where they are softest. The outermost layer, which is the softest of all, is denominated the 
alburnum, perhaps from its being of a brighter white than any of the other layers, either of wood or bark ; 
from which character, as well as from its softer texture, it is also easily distinguished, though in the 
case of some plants, as in that of the poplar and lime-tree, this peculiarity of character is not very ap- 
parent. From the peculiarity of external character, however, which it possesses in general, it v/as at one 
time thought to be a substance essentially different from that of the layers which it invests. The ancients, 
whose phytological opinions were often very whimsical, supposed it to be something analogous to the fat 
of animals, and intended perhaps to serve as a sort of nutriment to the plant in winter. But it is now 
known to be merely wood in a less condensed state, being yet lighter and softer than the interior layers, 
but acquiring strength and solidity with age. It does not, however, acquire its utmost degree of solidity 
till after a number of years, as is plain from the regular gradation observable in the solidity of the different 
layers. But if a tree is barked a year before it is cut down, then the alburnum is converted into v/ood 
in the course of that year. -. 

624. The divergent layers vjhic\\ intersect the concentric layers in a transverse direction, constitute also a 
considerable proportion of the wood, as may be seen in a horizontal section of the fir or birch, or of 
almost any woody plant, on the surface of which they present an appearance like that of the radii of a 
circle. 

625. The structure of the concentric layers will be found to consist of several smaller and component 
layers, which are themselves comi^osed of layers smaller still, tiU at last they are incapable of farther 
division. The concentric layers are composed of longitudinal fibres, generally forming a network ; and 
the divergent layers,., of parallel threads or fibres of cellular tissue, extending in a transverse direction, 
and filling up the interstices of the network ; the two sets of fibres being interwoven and interlaced 
together, so as to form a firm and compact body in the matured layers ; and thus corresponding exactly 
to the description given of them by Grew and IVIalpighi, in which the longitudinal fibres are compared to 
the warp, and the transverse fibres to the woof of a web. 

626. The structure of the stem in plants that are purely herbaceous, and in the herbaceous parts of 
woody plants, is distinguished by a number of notable and often insulated fibres passing longitudinally 
throughout its whole extent, as in the stipe of apsidium filix-mass, or leaf-stalk of the alder. I'hese 
fibres, when viewed superficially, appear to be merely individuals, but when inspected minutely, and 
under the microscope, they prove to be groups or bundles of fibres smaller and minuter still, firmly 
cemented together, and forming in the aggregate a strong and elastic thread ; but capable of being split 
into a number of component fibres, till at last you can divide them no longer. If the fibres of the bark 
are separated by the destruction of a part, the part is again regenerated, and the fibres are again united, 
without leaving behind them any traces of a wound. But if the fibres of the wood are separated by the 
ucstruclion of a part, the part is never regenerated, and the fibres are never united. 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Sect. III. Elementary or Vascular Organs. 
627. From (he previous analysis of the composite organs it appears they are all ulti- 
mately reducible to fibres, cellular tissue ivith or without parenchyma, and reticulated mem- 
brane, which we must consequently regard as being, under one modification or other, the 
ultimate and elementary organs of which the whole mass of the plant is composed. If it 
is asked of what the elementary organs are themselves composed, the reply is, they are 
composed, as appears froii?*the same analysis, of a fine, colorless, and transparent mem- 
brane, in which the eye, aided by the assistance even of the best glasses, can discover no 
traces Avhatevcr of organisation ; which membrane we must also regard as constituting 
the ultimate and fundamental fabric of the elementary organs themselves, and by conse- 
quence of the whole of tlie vegetable body. It has been asked by some phytologists 
whether or not plants aTe furnished with vessels analogous to the blood-vessels of the 
animal system. But if it is admitted that plants contain fluids in motion, which cannot 
possibly be denied, it will follow, as an unavoidable consequence, that they are furnished 
with vessels conducting or containing such fluids. If the stem of a plant of marigold is 
divided by means of a transverse section, the divided extremities of the longitudinal fibres, 
arranged in a circular row immediately within the bark, will be distinctly perceived, and 
their tubular structure demonstrated by means of ttie orifices which they present, particu- 
larly when the stem has begun to wither. The same sort of structure may be observed 
in the stem of cucurbitaceous plants also, particularly in that of the gourd, in which tliere 
are besides discoverable several sets of longitudinal tubes situated near the centre, and 
of considerable diameter. Regarding it, therefore, as certain that plants are furnished with 
longitudinal tubes, as well as with cells or utricles for the purpose of conveying or contain- 
ii:g their alimentary juices, we proceed to the specific illustration of both, together with 
their peculiarities and appendages. 

fi28. The Ji/ridcs are the fine and membranous vessels constituting the cellular tissue of the pith and pulp 
already described, whether of the plant, flower, or fruit. Individually they resemble oblong bladders in- 
flated in the middle, as in the case of some plants ; or circular or hexagonal cells, as in the case of 
others. Collectively they have been compared to an assemblage of threads of contiguous bladders or 
vesicles, or to the bubble's that are found on the surface of liquor in a state of fermentation. 

629.. T/'ic tubes are the vessels formed by the cavities of the longitudinal fibres, whether as occurring in the 
stem of herbaceous plants, or in the foot-stalk of the leaf and flower, or in the composition of the cortical 
and ligneous layers, or by longitudinal openings pervading the pulp itself, as in the case of the vine. They 
have generally been characterised under the denominations of proper vessels, Ij-mphatics, and tracheae. . 
But as this is rather a premature reference to their different uses, which is besides not altogether correct, 
we shall adopt, with a little alteration, the denominations introduced by Mirbel, as arising from their 
form or structure. The first and primary division founded upon this principle is that by which they are 
distributed into large tubes and small tubes. 

630. The large tubes are tubes distinguishable by the superior width of the diameter which they present on 
the horizontal section of the several parts of the plant 



Simple tithes {,ftg: .52.) are the larRest of all the large 
tubes, and are formed of a thin and entire membrane, 
■without any perceptible disruption of continuity, and 
are found chiefly in the bark, thouo;h not confined to 
it, as they are to be met with also m the alburnum 
and matured wood, as well as in the fibres of herb- 
aceous plants. 

Porous tubes resemble the simple tubes in their 
general aspect ; but differ from them in being pierced 
with small holes or pores, which are often distributed 
in regular and parallel rows. Thev are found in 
most abundance in woody plants, and particularly in 
■wood that is firm and compact, like that of the oak ; 
but they do not, like the simple tubes, seem destined 
to contain any oily or resinous juice. 

Spiral itibes are fine, transparent, and thread- 




like substances, occasionally interspersed with the 
other tubes of the plant, but distingiushed from them 
by being twisted from right to left, or from left to 
right, in the form of a corkscrew. They occur in 
most abundance in herbaceous plants, particularly 
in aquatics. 

False spiral tubes are tubes apparently spiral on a 
slight inspection, but which, upon minute examine 
ation, are found to derive their appearance merely 
from their being cut transversely by parallel fissures. 

Mixed tubes are tubes combining in one individual 
two or more of the foregoing varieties. Mirbel exem- 
plifies them in the case of the butomus umbellatus, 
m which the porous tubes, spiral tubes, and false 
spiral tubes, are often to be met with united in ocie. 



631. The small tubes are tubes composed of a succession of elongated cells united, 
like those of the cellular tissue. Individually they may be compared to the stem of the 
grasses, which is formed of several internodia, separated by transverse diaphragms ; and 
collectively to a united assemblage of parallel and collateral reeds. 

632. 'Pores are small and minute openings of various shapes and dimensions, that seem to be destined to tlie 
absorption, transmission, or exhalation of fluids. They are distinguishable into the following two sorts : 
perceptible pores and imperceptible pores. The perceptible pores are either external or internal, and are 
the apertures described by Hedwig as discoverable in the network constituting the epidermis. The im- 
perceptible pores are pores that ai-e not distinguishable by the eye, imless assisted with the best glasses ; 
but they are known to exist by the evidence of experiment, and have lately been ably delineated and de- 
scribed by A. T. Thomson, in his Lectures on Botany. (VoL i. p. 609.) 

, 633. Gaps, according to Mirt>el, are empty, but often regular and symmetrical spaces formed in the in- 
terior of the plant by means of a partial disruption of the membrane constituting the tubes or utricles. 
In the leaves of herbaceous plants the gaps are often interrupted by transverse diaphragms formed of a 
portion of the cellular tissue which still remains entire, as may t)e seen in the transparent structure of the 
leaves of typha and many other plants. Transverse gaps are said to be observable also in the bark of some 
plants, though very rarely. 

634. There are various appendages connected with the elementary organs, such as internal glands, internal 
pubescence, &c. : the latter occurs in dissecting the leaf or flower-stalk of nymphjea lutea. 



Book I. 



PRIMARY PRINCIPLES OF PLANTS. 



147 



Chap. VII. 

Vegetable Chemistry, or irrimary principles of Plants. 

635. As plants are not merely organised beings, but beings endowed with a species of 
life, absorbing nourishment from the soil in which they grow, and assimilating it to their 
own substance by means of the functions and operations of t^ftr different organs, it is 
plain that no progress can be made in the explication of the phenomena of vegetable 
life, and no distinct conception formed of the rationale of vegetation, without some 
specific knowledge of the primary principles of vegetables, and of their mutual action 
upon one another. The latter requisite pi'esupposes a competent acquaintance with the 
elements of chemistr}'; and the former points out the necessity of a strict and scrupu- 
lous analysis of the several compound ingredients constituting the fabric of the plant, 
or contained within it. 

636. If the object of the experimenter is merely that of extracting such compound 
ingredients as may be known to exist in the plant, the necessary apparatus is simple, 
and the process easy. But if it is that of ascertaining the primary and radical principles 
of which the compound ingredients are themselves composed, the apparatus is then com- 
plicated, and the process extremely difficult, requiring much time and labor, and much 
previous practice in analytical research. But whatever may be the object of analysis, or 
particular view of the experimenter, the processes which he employs are either mechanical 
or chemical. 

637. The inechanical processes are such as are effected by the agency of mechanical 
powers, and are often indeed the operation of natural causes ; hence the origin of gums 
and other- spontaneous exudations. But the substances thus obtained do not always 
flow sufficiently fast to satisfy the wants or necessities of man. And men have conse- 
quently contrived to accelerate the operations of nature by means of artificial aid in the 
application of the wimble or axe, widening the passages which the extravasated fluid has 
forced, or opening up new ones. But it more frequently happens that the process 
employed is wholly artificial, and altogether effected without the operation of natural 
causes. When the juices are enclosed in vesicles lodged in parts that are isolated, or 
may easily be isolated, the vesicles may be opened by means of rasps or graters, and the 
juices expressed by the hand, or by some other fit instrument. Thus the volatile oil may 
be obtained that is lodged in the rind of the lemon. When the substance to be ex- 
tracted lies more deeply concealed in the plant, or in parts which cannot be easily de- 
tached from the rest, it may then become necessary to pound or bruise the whole, or a 
great part of the plant, and to subject it, thus modified, to the action of the press. Thus 
seeds are sometimes treated to express their essential oils. And if by the action of bruis- 
ing or pressing heterogeneous ingredients have been mixed together, they may generally 
be separated with considerable accuracy by means of decantation, when the substances 
held in suspension have be«n precipitated. Thus the acid of lemons, oranges, goose- 
berries, and odier fruits, may be obtained in considerable purity, when the mucilage that 
was mixed with them has subsided. 

638. The chemical processes are such as are effected by the agency of chemical powers, 
and may be reduced to the following : distillation, combustion, the action of water, the 
action of acids and alkalies, the action of oils and alcohols, and lastly fermentation. They 
are much more intricate in their nature than the mechanical processes, as well as more 
difficult in their application. 

639. Of the products of vegetable analysis, as obtained by the foregoing processes, 
some consist of several heretogeneous substances, and are consequently co?npound, as 
being capable of further decomposition ; and some consist of one individual substance 
only, and are consequently simple, as being incapable of further decomposition. 

Sect. I. Compound Products. 

640. The compound jyroducts of analysis are ver^- numerous in themselves, and much 
diversified in their qualities. They are gum, sugar, starch, gluten, albumen, fibrina, 
extract, tannin, coloring matter, bitter principle, narcotic principle, acids, oils, wax, 
resins, gum resins, balsams, camphor, caoutchouc, cork, woody fibre, sap, proper juice, 
charcoal, ashes, alkalies, earths, metallic oxides. 

Ml. Gu7n is an exudation that issues spontaneously from the surface of a variety of plants, in the state of a 
clear, viscid, and tasteless fluid, that gradually hardens upon being exposed to the action of the atmosphere, 
and condenses into a solid mass. ■ It issues copiously from many fruit-trees, but especially from such as 
produce stone-fruit, as the plum and cherry-tree. From plants or parts of plants containing it, but not dis- 
charging it by spontaneous exudation, it may be obtained by the process of maceration in water. It has 
been found by chemists to consist of several varieties, known by the names of gum arabic, gum tragacanth, 
cherry-tree gum, and mucilage. Gum arabic, which is the most plentiful of all the gums, is the produce 
of the mimosa nilotica, a native of the interior of Africa and of Arabia ; whence its name. When pure, it 
is colorless and transparent, though sometimes it is tinged with yellow, varying in its specific gravity 
from 1300 to 1490. {Davy's Agric. CJ'cm., lect. iii.) It is insoluble in alcohol ; but is readily soluble in 



148 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Paut il. 



water ; and if the solution is exposed to the action of the atmosphere, the water is gradually evaporated, 
and the gum again left in a solid mass. According to the analysis of Gay Lussac and Thcnard, it consists 
of the following elements, in the following proportions, 100 parts being the integer: carbon ■i2-23; oxy- 
gen oOS-i; hydrogen 6-93 ; saline and ear*hy matter a small quantity; total 100. Gum tragacanth is 
the produce of the astragalus tragacantha, a thorny shrub that grows in the islands of the Levant. It is 
less transparent than gum arable, and not so easily dissolved in water. Cherry-tree gum is obtained 
from the prunus avium, and other species of the same genus, and in general from all trees with stone- 
fruit, from which it exudes spontaneously and in great abundance. It differs" from gum arabic and tra- 
gacanth in its concreting in larger masses, and being more easily melted. Mucilage is found chiefly in 
the roots and leaves of plants, particularly such as are bulbous and succulent ; the bulbs of the hyacinth 
and leaves of the marshmallow. It is found also in iiax-seed, and in many of the lichens, and is to be 
obtained only by maceration in water, from which it is separated by means of sulphuric acid. 

The uses of gum are considerable. In all its varieties it is capable of being used as an article of food, 
and is highly nutritive, though not very palatable. It is also employed in the arts, particularly in calico- 
printing, in which the printer makes choice of it to give consistency to his colors, and to prevent them 
from spreading. The botanist often uses it to fix his specimens upon paper, for which purpose it is very 
weU adapted. It forms likewise an ingredient in ink ; and in medicine it forms the basis of many mix- 
tures, in which its influence is sedative and emollient. 

642. Sugar is the produce of the sr.ccharum otRcinarum. [Jig. 53.) 53 
The canes or stems of the plant, when ripe, are bruised between the - .n, 

rollers of a mill, and the expressed juice is collected and put into large ui;,li. 
boilers, in which it is mi.xed with a small quantity of quicklime, or 
strong ley of ashes, to neutralise its acid, and is then made to boil. 
The scum which gathers on the top during the process of boiling is 
carefully cleared away ; and when the juice has been boiled down to 
the consistence of a S3'rup, it is drawn oifand allowed to cool in vessels 
which are placed above a cistern, and perforated with small holes, 
through which the impure and liquid part, known by the name of mo- 
lasses, escapes ; while the remaining part is converted into a mass of 
small and hard granules of a brownish or whitish color, known by the 
designation of raw sugar, which, when imported into Europe, is further 
purified by an additional process, and converted by filtration or crystal- 
lisation into what is called loaf sugar, or refined sugar, or candied 
sugar. Sugar thus obtained has a sweet and luscious taste, but is 
without smell. According to.Dr. Thomson its specific caloric is 1-0S6, its 
specific gravity 1-40-15; and its constituent elements are oxygen 64-7; 
carbon 27 '5; hydrogen 7 '8 ; total 100". The juice of the acor sacchari. 
num, or American maple, yields sugar in such considerable abundance 
as to make it an object v/ith the North American farmer to manufac- 
ture it for his own use. A hole is bored in the trunk of the vegetating 
tree eai-ly in the spring, for the purpose of extracting the sap; of 
which a tree of ordinary size, that is, of from two to three feet in dia- 
meter, will yield from one hundred and fifty to two hundred pints and upwards, in a good season. The 
sap, when thus obtained and neutralised by lime, deposits, by evaporation, crystals of sugar in the pro. 
portion of about a pound of sugar to forty pints of sap. It is not materially different in its properties 
from that of the sugar-cane. The juice of the grape, when ripe, yielcts also a sugar by evaporation and 
the action of pot-ashes, which is known by the appellation of the sugar of grapes, and has been lately 
employed in France as a substitute for colonial sugar, though it is not so sweet or agreeable to the taste. 
The root of beta vulgaris, or common beet, yields also, by boiling and evaporation, a sugar which is dis- 
tinguished by a peculiar and slightly bitter taste, owing perhaps to the presence of a bitter extractive 
matter which has been found to be one of the constituents of the beet, ^ugar has been extracted from 
the following vegetables also, or from their productions : from the sap of the birch, sycamore, bamboo, 
maize, parsnep, cow-parsnep, American aloe, dulse, walnut-tree, and cocoa-nut-tree; from the fruit of 
the common arbutus, and other sweet-tasted fruits ; from the roots of the turnip, carrot, and parsley ; 
from the flower of the euxine rhododendron ; and from the nectary of most other flowers. 

643. Tne utility of suga?; as an aliment is well known ; and it is as much relished by many animals as 
by man. By bees it is sipped from the flowers of plants, under the modification of nectar, and converted 
into honey ; and also seems to be relished by many insects, even in its concrete state ; as it is also by many 
birds. By man it is now regarded as being altogether indispensable, and though used chiefly to give a 
relish or seasoning to food, is itself highly nutritive. It is also of much utility in medicine, and cele- 
brated for its anodyne and antiseptic qualities, as well as thought to be peculiarly etficacious in preventing 
diseases by worms. 

644. Starch. If a quantity of wheaten flower is made into a paste with v/ater, and kneaded and 
washed under the action of a jet, till the water runs off colorless, part of it will be found to have been 
taken up and to be still held in suspension by the water, which wiU, by-and-by, deposit a sediment that 
may be separated by decantation. This sediment is starch, which maybe obtained also immediately from 
the grain itself, by means of a process well known to the manufacturer, who renders it finally fit for the 
market by washing and edulcorating it with water, and afterwards drying it by a moderate heat. Starch, 
when thrown upon red-hot iron, burns with a kind of explosion, and leaves scarcely any residuum behind. 
It has been found by the analysis of Gay Lussac and Thenard, to be composed of carbon 43-53 ; oxygen 
49"G8 ; hydrogen 6-77 ; total 100'. This result is not very widely different from that of the analysis of 
sugar, into which, it seems, starch may be converted by diminishing the proportion of its carbon, and 
increasing that of its oxygen and hydrogen. This change is exemplified in the case of the malting of 
barley, which contains a great proportion of starch, and which absorbs during the process a quantity of 
oxygen, and evolves a quantity of carbonic acid ; and accordingly part of it is converted into sugar. 
Perhaps it is exemplified also in the case of the freezing of potatoes, which acquire in consequence a sweet 
and sugary taste, and are known to contain a great deal of starch, which may be obtained as follows : let 
the potatoes be taken and grated down to a pulp, and the pulp placed upon a fine sieve, and water made 
to pass through it : the water will be found to have carried off with it an infinite number of particles, 
which it will afterwards deposit in the fonn of a fine powder, separable by decantation ; which powder is 
starch, possessing all the essential properties of wheaten starch. It may be obtained from the pith of 
several species of palms growing in the Moluccas and several other East Indian islands, by the following 
process : the stem, being first cut into pieces of five or six feet in length, is split longitudinally so as to 
expose the pith, which is now taken out and pounded, and mixed with cold water, which after being 
well stirred up, deposits at length a sediment that is separated by decantation, and is the starch which 
the pith contained, or the sago of the shops. 

645. Salop is also a species of starch that is prepared, in the countries of the East, from the root of the 
orchis morio, mascula, bifolia, and pyramidalis, and in the isle of Portland, from the arum maculatum. 
So also is cassava, which is prepared from the root of jatropha manihot, a native of America, the ex- 
pressed juice of which is a deadly poison, used by the Indians to poison their arrows ; but the sediment 
which it deposits is a starch that is manufactured into bread, retaining nothing of the deleterious property 
of the juice ; and so also is sowans, which is prepared from the husk of oats, as obtained m the process 
of grinding. 




Book I. 



C0MF0UNJ3 PRODliCTS OF PLANTS. 



149 



646. According to Parmentier, starch may be extracted from a number of plants ; as arctium lappa, 
atropa belladonna, polygonum bistortj, bryoniaalba, colchicum autumnale, spiraea filipendula, ranunculus 
bulbosus, scrophularia nodosa, sambucus ebulus and nigra, orchis morio and mascula, imperatoria ostru- 
tliium, hyoscyamus niger, rumex obtusifolius, acutus, and aquaticus, arum maculatum, iris pseudacorus 
and fcetidissima, orobus tuberosus, bunium bulbocastanum. It is found also in the following seeds : 
wheat, barley, oats, rice, maize, millet-seed, chestnut, horse-chestnut, peas, beans, acorns. 

647. Starch is an extremely nutritive substance, and forms one of the principal ingredients in almost all 
articles of vegetable food used, whether by man or the inferior animals. The latter feed upon it in the 
state in which nature presents it ; but man prepares and purines it so as to render it pleasing to his taste, 
and uses it under the various modifications of bread, pastry, or confectionary. Its utility is also consider- 
able in medicine and in the arts ; in the preparation of anodyne and strengthening medicaments, and in 
the composition of cements ; in the clearmg and stiHening of linen ; and in the manufacture of hair- 
powder. 

' ■ 648. Gluten is that part of the paste formed from the flour of wheat that remains unaffected by the 
water after all the starch contained in it has been washed off". It is a tough and elastic substance, of a 
dull white color, without taste, but of a very peculiar smeli. It is soluble in the acids and alkalies, but 
insoluble in water and in alcohol. Glut'jn has been detected, under one modification or other, in a very 
considerable number of vegetables or vegetable substances, as well as in the flour of wheat. Kouelle, the 
younger, showed that it exists in the green fecula of plants ; and i'roust found it in the following grains 
and fruits ; peas, beans, barley, rye, acorns, chestnuts, horse-chestnuts, apples, quinces, alder-berries, 
grapes. He found it also in the leaves of rue, cabbage, cresses, hemlock, borage, and saflron, and in the 
petals of the rose. 

649. Gluten is one of the most important of all vegetable substances, as being the principle that renders 
the flour of wheat so fit for forming bread, by its occasioning the panary fermentation, and making the 
bread light and porous. It is used also as a cement, and capable of being used as a varnish, and a ground 
for paint. 

650. Albumen, which is a thick, glary, and tasteless fluid, resembling the white of an unboiled egg, is a 
substance that has been but lately proved to exist in the vegetable kingdom. Its existence was first an- 
nounced by Fourcroy, and finally demonstrated by the experiments of Vauquelin on the dried juice of the 
papaw-tree. It is nearly related to animal gluten, and the elements of its composition are, carbon 52-883 ; 
oxygen 23'872; hydrogen 7'540 ; nitrogen 15.705; total 100. Albumen has not been found in such 
abundance in any other plant, as in the plant above specified. But it has been found to exist in mush- 
rooms, and some other of the fungi. And the juice of the fruit of hibiscus esculentus, a West Indian plant, 
is said to contain such a proportion of it as to render it fit to be employed as a substitute for the vv^hite of 
eggs, in clarifying the juice of the sugar-cane. Almonds also, and other kernels from which emulsions are 
made, have been found to contain a substance possessing the properties of curd, which resembles albumen 
very ctosely. 

651. Fibrina is a peculiar substance which chemists extract from the blood and muscles of animrJs. This 
substance constitutes the fibrous part of the muscles, and resembles gluten in its appearance and elasticity. 
A substance possessing the same properties has been detected by Vauquelin in the juice of the papaw-tree, 
which is called vegetable fibrina. 

652. Extract. When vegetable substances are macerated in water, a considerable portion of them is 
dissolved ; and if the water is again evaporated, the substance held in solution may be obtained in a sepa- 
rate state. This substance is denominated extract. But it is evident that extract thus obtained will not 
be precisely the same principle in every different plant, but will vary in its character according to the 
species producing it, or the soil in which the plant has grov/n, or some other accidental cause. Its dis- 
tinguishing properties are the following : it is soluble in water as it is obtained from the vegetable, but 
becomes afterwards insoluble in consequence of the absorption of oxygen from the atmosphere. It is solu- 
ble in alcohol ; and it unites with alkalies, and forms compounds which are soluble in water. When 
distilled it yields an acid fluid impregnated with ammonia, atid seems to be composed principally of hydro- 
gen, oxygen, carbon, and a little nitrogen. Extract, or tlie extractive principle, is found in a greater 
or less proportion in almost all plants whatever, and is very generally an ingredient of the sap and bark, 
particularly in barks of an astringent taste. But still it is not exactly the same in all individual plants, 
even when separated as much as possible from extraneous substances. It nv^y, therefore, be regarded as 
constituting several different species, of which the following are the most remarkable : — 



Extract of catechu. This extract is obtained from an infu- 
sion of the wood or powder of catechu in cold water. Its 
color is a pale brown ; and its taste slightly astringent. It is 
precipitated from its solution by nitrate of lead, and yields 
Dy distillation carbonic and carburetted hydrogene gas, leaving 
a porous charcoal. 

Extract of senna. This extract is obtained from an infu- 
sion of the dried leaves of cassia senna in alcohol. The color 
of the infusion is brownish, the taste slightly bitter, and the 
smell aromatic. It is precipitated from its solution by the 
muriatic and oxymuriatic acids ; and when thrown on burning 
coals consumes, with a thick smoke and aromatic odor, leavijig 
behind a spongy charcoal. 



Extract of qtiinqtiina. This extract was obtained by Four- 
croy, by evaporating a decoction of the bark of the quinquina 
of St. Domingo in water, and again dissolving it in ali'ohol, 
which finally deposited by evaporation the peculiar extractive. 
It is insoluble in cold water, but very soluble in boiling water ; 
its color is brown, and its taste bitter. It is precipitated from 
its solution by lime-v/ater, in the form of a red powder; and 
when dry it is black and brittle, breaking with a polished 
fracture. 

Extract of saffron. This extract is obtained in great aljun- 
dance from tlie summits of the pistils of crocus sativus, wliich 
are almost wholly soluble m water. 



653. Extracts were formerly much employed in medicine; though their elFicacy seems to have been 
overrated. But a circumstance of much more importance to society is that of their utility in the art of 
dyeing. By far the greater part of colors used in dyeing are obtained from vegetiible extracts, whicl) 
have a strong affinity to the fibres of cotton or linen, with which they enter into a combhiation that is 
rendered still stronger by the intervention of mordants. 

654. Coloring matter. The beauty and variety of the coloring of vegetables, chemists have ascribed to 
the modifications of a peculiar substance which they denominate the coloring principle, and which they 
have accordingly endeavored to isolate and extract ; first, by means of m:iccration or boiling in water, 
and then by precipitating it from its solution. The chemical properties of coloring matter seem to be as 
yet but imperfectly known, though they have been considerably elucidated by the investigations of Ber- 
tholet, Chaptal, and others. Its aflSnities to oxygen, alkalies, earths, motaUic oxides, and cloths fabri- 
cated, whether of animal or vegetable substances, such as wool or flax, seem to be among its most striking 
characteristics. But its affinity to animal substances is stronger than Its afinnity to vegetable substances ; 
and hence wool and silk assume a deeper die, and retain it longer than cotton or linen. Coloring matter 
exhibits a great variety of difierent tints, as it occurs in different species of plants ; and as it combines 
with oxygen, which it absorbs from the atmosphere, it assumes a deeper shade ; but it loses at the same 
time a portion of its hydrogen, and becomes insoluble in water ; and thus it indicates its relation to ex- 
tract. Fourcroy reduced colors to the four following sorts ; extractive colors, oxygenated colors, carbo- 
nated colors, and hydrogenated colors ; the first being soluble in water, and requiring the aid of saline or 
vnotallic mordants to fix them upon cloth ; the second being insoluble in water, as altered by the absorp- 
tion of oxygen, and requiring no mordant to fix them upon cloth ; the third containing in their compo- 
sition a great proportion of carbon, but soIudIc in alkalies; and the fourth containing a great proportion 
of resin, but soluble in oils and alcohol. But the simplest mode of arrangement is that by which the dif- 
ferent species of coloring matter are cLxssfd according to their effect in the art of dyeing. The prinrij'al 
and fundamental colors in this art arc the blue, the red, the yellow, and the brown. 

I. 3 



150 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 




655. Tlie jflncst of all vegetable bbiee is that which Is known by 
Oie name of indigo. It is the produce of the-lndigofera tinctoria, 
Lin., a shrub which is cultivated for the sake of the dye it 
attbrds, in Mexico and the East Indies. The plant reaches 
maturity in about six months, when its leaves are gathered 
and immersed in vessels filled with water till fermentation 
takes place. The water then becomes opaque and green, ex- 
haling an odor like that of volatile alkali, and evolving bubbles 
of carbonic acid gas. AVhen the fermentation has been con- 
tinued long enough, the liquid is decanted and put into other 
vessels, where it is ajfitated! tUl blue flakes begin to appear. 
Water is now poured m, and the flakes are precipitated in the 
form of a blue powdery sediment, which is obtained by de- 
cantation ; and which, after being made up into small lumps 
and dried in the shade, is the indigo of the shops. It is insolu- 
ble in water, though slightly soluble in alcohol. But its true 
solvent is sulphuric acid, with which it forms a fine blue dye, 
known by the name of liquid blue. It affords by distillation 
carbonic acid gas, water, ammonia, some oily and acid matter, 
and much charcoal ; whence its constituent principles are 
most probably carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen. 
Indigo may be procured also from several other plants besides 
indigofera tinctoria, and particularly from isatis tinctoria or 
woad, a plant indigenous to Britain, and thought to be the 
plant with the juice of which the ancient Britons stained their 
naked bodies, to make them look terrible to their enemies. If 
this plant is digested in alcohol, and the solution evaporated, 
white crystalline grains, somewhat resembling starch, will be 
left behind ; which grains are indigo, becoming gradually 
blue by the action of the atmosphere. The blue color of in- 
digo therefore is owing to its combination with oxygen. 

656. The principal red colors are such as are found to exist in the 
root, stem, or h1)wer, of the five following plants : rubra tinc- 
torum, lichen roccella and parellus, carthamus tinctorius, 
caesalpinia crista, and hajmatoxylon campechianum. 

657. Yellow, which is a color of very frequent occurrence 
among vegetables, and the most permanent among flowers, is ex- 
tracted for the purpose of dyeing, from a variety of plants. It is 
extracted from the reseda luteola, Lin., by the decoction of its 
dried stems. The coloring matter is precipitated by means 
of alum, and is much used in dyeing wool, silk, and cotton. 
It is also obtained from the morus tinctoria, bixa orellana, or 

659. Tannin. If a quantity of pounded nut-galls, or bruised seeds of the grape, is taken and dissolved in 
cold water, and the solution evaporated to dryness, there will be left behind a brittle and yellowish sub- 
stance of a highly astringent taste, which substance is tannin, or the tanning principle. It is soluble both 
in water and alcohol, but insoluble in ether. With the salts of iron it strikes a black. And when a so- 
lution of gelatine is mixed with an aqueous solution of tannin, the tannin and gelatine fall down in com- 
bination, and form an insoluble precipitate. When tannin is subjected to the process of distillation, it 
yields charcoal, carbonic acid, and inflammable gases, with a minute quantity of volatile alkali, and seems 
accordingly to consist of the same elements with extract, from which, however, it is distinguished by the 
peculiar property of its action upon gelatine. Tannin maybe obtained from a great variety of other veget- 
ables also, as well as those already enumerated, but chiefly from their bark ; and of barks, chiefly from 
those that are astringent to the taste. The following table exhibits a general view of the relative value 
of different species of barks, as ascertained by Sir Humphry Davy. It gives the average obtained from 
4801b. of the entire bark of a middle-sized tree of the several difterent species, taken in the spring, when 
the quantity of tannin is the largest. 



amotta (fig. 54.), serratula tinctoria, genista tinctoria, rhta 
cotinus, rhamnus infectorius, and quercus tinctoria, or quer- 
citron, the bark of which last affords a rich and permanent 
yellow that is at present much in use. 

658. The bronn coloring matter qf vegetables is very abundant, 
particularly in astringent plants. It is obtained from the root of 
the walnut-tree, and rind of the walnut ; as also from tlie 
sumac and alder, but chiefly from nut galls, which Eire ex- 
crescences formed upon the leaves of a species of quercus, 
indigenous to the south of Europe, in consequence of the punc- 
ture of insects. The best in quality are brought from the 
Levant. They are sharp and bitter to the taste, and extremely 
astringent ; and soluble in water by decoction when ground or 
grated to a powder. The decoction strikes, with the solution 
of iron, a deep black, that forms the basis of ink, and of most 
dark colors used in dyeing cloths. 



lb. 

Oak 29 

Spanish chestnut - - 21 

Leicester willow (large) • 33 

Elm 13 

Common willow (large) - 11 

Ash .... - 16 



Beech 

Horse-chestnut 
Sycamore - 
Lombardy poplar 
Birch 
Hazel 



Ih. 




lb. 


10 


Black thorn ... 


- 16 


9 


Coppice oak 


. 32 


11 


Inner rind of oak-bark 


- 72 


15 


Oak cut in autumn 


- 21 


8 


Larch cut in autumn 


- 8 


14 







660. Tannin is of the very first utility in its application to medicine and the arts j being regarded by chemists 
as the general principle of astringency. The medical virtues of Peruvian bark, so celebrated as a febrifuge 
and antiseptic, are supposed to depend upon the quantity and quality of its tannin. In consequence of its 
peculiar property of forming an insoluble compound with gelatine, the hides of animals are converted into 
leather, by the important art of tanning. The bark of the oak-tree, which contains tannin in great 
abundance, is that which is most generally used by the tanner. The hides to be tanned are prepared for 
the process by steeping them in lime-water, and scraping off the hair and cuticle. They are then soaked 
first in weaker infusions, and afterwards in stronger infusions of the bark, till at last they are coftipletely 
impregnated. This process requires a period of from ten to eighteen months, if the hides are thick j and 
four or five pounds of bark are necessary on an average to form one pound of leather. 

661. Bitter principle. The taste of many vegetables, such as those employed in medicine, is extremely 
bitter. The quassia of the shops, the roots of common gentian, the bark and wood of common broom, the 
calyx and floral leaves of the hop, and the leaves and flowers of chamomile, may be quoted as examples. 
This bitter taste has been thought to be owing to the presence of a peculiar substance, different from every 
other vegetable substance, and has been distinguished by the name of the bitter principle. When water 
has been digested for some time over quassia, its color becomes yellow, and its taste intensely bitter ; and 
if it is evaporated to dryness, it leaves behind a substance of a brownish yellow, with a sUght degree of 
transparency, that continues for a time ductile, but becomes afterwards brittle. This substance Dr. 
Thomson regsirds as the bitter principle in a state of purity. It is soluble in water and in alcohol ; but the 
solution is not much affected by re-agents. Nitrate of silver and acetate of lead are the only two that 
occasion a precipitate. The bitter principle is of great importance, not only in the practice of medicine, 
but also in the art of brewing ; its influence being that of checking fermentation, preserving the fermented 
liquor, and when the bitter of the hop is used, communicating a peculiar and agreeable flavor. The 
bitter principle appears to consist principally of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, with a little nitrogen. 

662. Narcotic principle. There is a species of medical preparations known by the name of narcotics, which 
have the property of inducing sleep ; and if administered in large doses, of occasioning death. They are 
obtained from the milky and proper juices of some vegetables, and from the infusion of the leaves or stem 
of others, all which have been supposed to contain in their composition some common ingredient, which 
chemists have agreed to designate by the name of the narcotic principle. It exists in great abundance in 
opium, which is the concrete juice of papaver album, or the white poppy, from which it is obtained pure, 
in the form of white crystals. It is soluble in boiling water and in alcohol, as well as in all acid menstrua ; 
and it appears that the action of opium on the animal subject depends on this principle. When distilled 
it emits white vapors, which are condensed into a yellow oil. Some water and carbonate of ammonia pass 
into a receiver ; and at last carbonic acid gas, ammonia, and carburetted hydrogen, are disengaged, and 
a bulky charcoal left behind. Many other vegetable substances besides opium, possess narcotic qualities, 
though they have not yet been minutely analysed. The following are the most remarkable : the inspis- 
sateji juice of lettuce, which resembles opium much in its appearance, is obtained by the same means, and 
possesses the same medical virtues ; the leaves of atropa belladonna, or deadly nightshade, and indeed the 



Book 1. 



COMPOUND PRODUCTS OF PLANTS. 



151 



whole plant ; the leaves of digitalis purpurea, or foxglove ; and lastly, the following plants, hyoscyamus 
niger, conium maculatum, datura stramonium, and sedum palustre, with many others belonging to the 
Linnasan natural order of Lurida;. 

663. Acids. Acids are a class of substances that may be distinguished by their exciting on the palate 
the sensation of sourness. They exist, not only in the animal and mineral, but also in the vegetable 
kingdom ; and such of them as are peculiar to vegetables have been denominated vegetable acids. Of 
acids peculiar to vegetables chemists enumerate the following : the oxalic, acetic, citric, malic, gallic, 
tartaric, benzoic, and prussic, which exist ready formed in the juices or organs of the plant, and are ac- 
cordingly denominated native acids; together with the mucous, pyromucous, pyrotartarous, pyrolignous, 
camphoric, and suberic, which do not exist ready formed in the plant, and are hence denominated arti- 
ficial acids. They are consequently not within the scope of the object of the present work. 

664. Oxalic acid. If the expressed juice of the oxalis aceto- 
sella is left to evaporate slowly, it deposits small crystals of 
a yellowish color and saltish taste, which are known by the 
name of the acidulum of sorrel, that is, a salt with excess of 
acid, from which the acid may be obtained pure by processes 
well known tO' the chemist. It is not used in medicine or 
the arts, except in its state of acidulum, in which it is em- 
ployed to make a sort of lemonade, and to discharge stains 
of ink. It hcis been found also in oxalis corniculata, gera- 
nium acidum, in the several species of rumex, and in the 
pubescence of cicer arietinum. 

665. Acetic acid. The acetic acid, or vinegar, which is ge- 
nerally manufactured from wine in a certain stage of ferment- 
ation, has been found also ready formed in the sap of several 
trees, as analysed by Vauquelin ; and also in the acid juice 
of the cicer arietinum, of which it forms a constituent part. 
It was obtained also by Scheele from the sap of the sam- 
bucus nigra ; and is consequently tb be regarded as a native 
vegetables <acid. It is distinguished from other vegetable acids 
by its forming soluble salts with the alkalies and earths. 

666. Citric acid. Citric acid is the acid that exists in the juice 
of lemon. Its taste is very sour in a state of purity, but ex- 
ceedingly pleasant when diluted with water. By a red heat it 
yields carlfcnic acid gas and carbonated hydrogene gas, and is 
reduced to a charcoal ; nitric acid converts it into oxalic and 
acetic acid, and with lime it forms a salt insoluble in water. 
It has been found unmixed with other acids in the following 
vegetable substances : in the juice of oranges and lemons, and 
in the berries of vaccinium oxycoccus, and vitis idsea, prunus 
padus, solanum dulcamara, and rosa canina. Ithas been found 
also in many other fruits, mixed with other acids. 

667. Malic acid. Malic acid is found chiefly in the juice of un- 
ripe apples, whence it derives its name. But it is found also in 
tlie juice of barberries, alderberries, gooseberries, plums, and 
common house-leek. 

668. Gallic acid. Gallic acid, as it is obtained in the greatest 
abundance, so it derives its name from the nut-gall, from 
which it may be extracted by exposing a quantity of the powder 
of nut-galls to a moderate heat in a glass retort ; and the acid 
will sublime and form crystals of an octahedral figure. Its 
taste is austere and astringent. It strongly reddens veget- 



able blues. It is soluble both In water and alcohol ; and is dis- 
tinguished by its property of communicating to solutions of iron 
a deep purple color. When exposed to a gentle heat it sub- 
limes vjithout alteration, but a strong heat decomposes it. 
Nitric acid converts it into the malic and oxalic acids. It is 
of great utility in the art of dyeing, and forms the basis of all 
black colors, and of colors with a dark ground. It forms also 
the basis of ink ; and chemists use it as a test to detect the 
presence of iron. 

6G9. Tartaric acid. If wine is kept for alength of time in a cask 
or other close vessel, a sediment is precipitated which adheres 
to the sides or bottom, and forms a crust known by the name 
of tartar, which is a combination of potass and a peculiar acid 
in excess. The compound is tartarite of potass, and the acid, 
in its state of purity, is the tartaric acid. It is characterised 
by the property of its forming with potass a salt that is soluble 
with difficulty. Ithas been found in the following vegetable 
substances also ; in the pulp of tamarinds, in the juice of the 
grape, and mulberries, sorrel, and sumac ; and the roots of 
triticum repens, and leontodon taraxacum. It is not much 
used except among chemists. But the tartarite from which 
it is usually obtained is well known for its medical virtues under 
the name of cream of tartar. 

670. Benzoic acid. From the styrax benzoin there exudes a 
resinous substance, known in the shops by the name of l)en/oin, 
and in which the benzoic acid is contained. It is distinguished 
from the other acids by its aromatic odor and extreme volatility. 
It has been obtained also from the balsams of tolu and storax ; 
and is used in pharmacy, in the preparation of boluses and elec- 
tuaries. 

671. Prussic acid. Theprussic acid is generally cljissed among 
the animal acids, becaubi; it is obtained in the greatest abund- 
ance from animal substances. But it has been proved to exist 
in vegetable substances also, and is procured by distilling laurel 



resembling that of peach-tree blossoms. It does not j 
vegetable blues. But it is characterised by its property of 
fonning a bluish-green precipitate, when it is poured, with a Uttle 
alkali added to it, into solutions containing iron. 



672. It appears that all vegetable acids contain carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen, in one proportion or other ; 
and that the prussic acid contains also a {)ortion of nitrogen. The gallic acid contains more of carbon 
than any other vegetable acid, and the oxalic more of oxygen. 

673. Vegetable oils are of two kinds, the fixed and the volatile The former are not suddenly affected by 
the application of heat ; the latter are very inflammable. 

674. Fixed oils. Fixed oils are but seldom found, except in the seeds of plants, and chiefly in such as 
are dicotyledonous. They are found also, though rarely, in the pulp of fleshy fruits, as in that of the olive, 
which yields the most abundant and valuable species of all fixed oils. But dicotyledonous seeds which 
contain oil, contain also at the same time a quantity of mucilage and fecula, and form, when bruised in 
water, a mild and milky fluid, known by the name of emulsion. - And on this account they are sometimes 
denominated emulsive seeds. Some seeds yield their oil merely by means of pressure, though it is often 
necessary to reduce them first of all to a sort of pulp, by means of pounding them in a mortar. Others 
require to be exposed to the action of heat, which is applied to them by means of pressure between warm 
plates of tin, or of the vapor of boiling water, or of roasting before they are subjected to the press. Fixed 
oil, when pure, is generally a thick and viscous fluid, of a mild or insipid taste, and without smell. But it 
is never entirely without some color, which is for the most part green or yellow. Its specific gravity is to 
water as 9'403 to 1-000. It is insoluble in water. It is decomposed by the acids, but with the alkalies it 
forms soap. When exposed to the atmosphere it becomes inspissated and opaque, and assumes a white 
color and a resemblance to fat. This is in consequence of the absorption of oxygen ; but owing to the 
appearance of a quantity of water in oil that is exposed to the action of the air, it has been thought that 
the oxygen absorbed by it is not yet perhaps assimilated to its substance. When exposed to cold it con- 
geals and crystallises, or assumes a solid and granular form ; but not till the thermometer has indicated a 
degree considerably below the freezing point. When exposed to the action of heat it is not volatilised till 
it begins to boil, which is at 600° of Fahrenheit. By distillation it is converted into water, carbonic acid, 
and carburetted hydrogene gas, and charcoal ; the product of its combustion is nearly the same ; and hence 
it is a compound of cart)on, oxygen, and hydrogen. Fixed oils are generally divided into two sorts, fat 
oils and drying oils. The former are readily inspissated by the action of the air, and converted into a sort 
of fat. The latter are capable of being dried by the action of the air, and converted into a firm and trans, 
parent substance. 

675. The pi-incipal species of fat oils are the following : — 



Olive oil, -which is expressed from the pulpy part of the fruit 
of olea europea. The fruit is first broken in a mill, and reduced 
to a sort of paste. It is then subjacted to the action of a press, 
and the oil which is now easily separated swims on the top of the 
water in the vessel beneath. It is manufactured chiefly in 
France and in Italy, and is much used throughout Europe in- 
stead of butter, and to give a seasoning to food. 

Oil of almonds, which is extracted from the fruit of the anry? 
dalus communis or common almond. The almonds axx. nrst 
well rubbed or shook in a coarse bag or sack, to separate a bitter 
powder which covers their epidermis. They are then pounded 



to a paste m mortars of marble, which is afterwards subjected 
to the action of a press; and the oil is now obtained as in the 
case of the olive. 

Rapeseed-oil, which is extracted from the brassica na^ius and 
campestris. It is less fixed and less liable to become rancid 
than the two former, and is manufactured chiefly in Flanders. 

Oilnfhehen, which is extracted from the fruit of the guilandina 
mohringa, common in Egypt and Africa. It is apt to become 
rancid ; but it is without odor, and is, on this account, much 
used in perfumery. 



676. The principal species of drying oils are linseed-oil, nut-oil, poppy-oil, and hempseed-oil. 

Puppy-oil is extracted from the seeds of papaver somniferum, 
which is cultivated in France and Holland for this purpose. It 
is clear and transparent, and dries readily : and when )>ure it 
is without taste or odor. It is used for the same purposes as 
the olive-oil, for which it is often sold, and possesses nothing of 
the narcotic properties of the popi)y. 

Hempseed-oil is extracted from the seed of the hem)). It has 
a liar ah and disagreeable taste, and is use<l by painters in this 
country, atjd very extensively for food in H-ussia. 

4 



Linseed-oil is obtained from the seeds of flax, which are ge- 
nerally roasted before they are subjected to any other process, 
for thepurpose of drying up their mucilage and separating more 
oil. 

Nut-oil is extracted from the fruit of corylus avellana, or ju- 
glans regia. The kernel is first slightly roasted, and the oil 
then expressed. It is used in paintings of a coarser sort ; and 
also in the sezisoning of food by many of the inhabitants of (he 
middle deiiartments of France ; but it is apt to become rancid. 



152 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



677. Volidilc oUs. Volatile oUa, which are known also by the name of essential oils, are of very commoQ 
occurrence in the vegetable kingdom, and are found in almost all the different organs of the plant. They 
are found in many roots, to which they communicate a fragrant and aromatic odor, with a taste somewhat 
acrid. The roots of inula helenium, genista canariensis, and a variety of other plants, contain essentisl 
oils. They are found also in the bark of laurus cinnamomum, of laurus sassafras, and pinus ; in the leaves 
of labiate plants, such as mint, rosemary, marjoram ; and of the odorous umbelliferae, such as chervil, 
fennel, angelica ; and of plants with compound flowers, such as wormwood. They are found also in the 
flower itself, as in the flowers of chamomile, and the rose ; and in the fruit, as in that of pepper and ginger, 
and in the external integuments of many seeds, but never in the cotyledon. They are extracted by means 
of expression or distillation, and are extremely numerous ; and perhaps every plant possessing a peculiar 
odor possesses also a peculiar and volatile oU. The aroma of plants, therefore, or the substance from which 
they derive their odor, and which is cognisable only by the sense of smell, is perhaps merely the more 
volatile and evaporable part of their volatile oil, disengaging itself from its combinations. Volatile oils 
are characterised by their strong and aromatic -odor, and rather acrid taste. They are soluble in alcohol, 
but are not readily converted into soaps by alkalies. They are very inflammable, and are volatilised by a 
gentle heat. Like fixed oils, their specific gravity is generally less than that of water, on the surface of 
which they will float ; though in some cases it is found to be greater than that of water, in which they 
consequently sink. They are much in request on account of their agreeable taste and odor, and are pre- 
pared and sold by apothecaries and perfumers, under the name of distilled waters or essences j as well as 
employed also in the nianufacture of varnishes and pigments. 

678. Wax. On the upper surface of the leaves of many ti-ecs there may often be observed a sort of var- 
nish, which, when separated by certain chemical processes, is found to possess all the properties of bees'- 
wax, and is consequently a vegetable wax. It exudes, however, from several other parts of the plant 
besides the leaf, and assumes a more waxy and concrete fonii, as from the catkins of the poplar, the alder, 
and the fir ; from the fruit of the myrica cerifera and croton sebiferimi ; but particularly from the anthcraj 
of the flowers, from which it is probable that the bees extract it unaltered. It was the opinion of Reaumur, 
however, that the pollen undergoes a digestive process in the stomach of the bee before it is converted into 
wax, though a late \vriter on the subject endeavours to prove that the wax is elaborated from the honey 
extracted by the bee, and not from the pollen. It is found also in the interior of many seeds, from whicfi 
it is extracted, by means of pounding them and boiling them in water. The wax is melted and swims on 
the top. Wax, when pure, is of a whitish color, but without taste and without smell. The smell of 
bees' wax is indeed somewhat aromatic, and its color yellow. But this is evidently owing to some foreign 
substance with which it is mixed, because it loses its smell and color by means of bleaching, and becomes 
perfectly white. This is done merely by drawhig it out into tliin stripes, and exposing it for some time to 
the atmosphere. Bleached wax is not aflTected by the air. Its specific gravity is ODGOO. It is insoluble in 
water, and in alcohol. It combines with the fixed oils, and forms with them a composition known by the 
name of cerate. It combines also with the fixed alkalies, and forms with them a compoimd possessing 
the properties of common soap. The acids have but little action on it, and for this reason it is useful as a 
lute to confine them, or to prevent them from injuring cork. When heat is applied to wax it becomes 
soft, and melts at the temperature of 142° if unbleached, and of 155° if bleached, into a colorless and trans- 
parent fluid, which, as the temperature diminishes, concretes again and resumes its former appearance. 
At a higher temperature it boils and evaporates, and the vapor may be set on fire by the apphcation of red 
heat. Hence its utility in making candles. And hence an explication of the singular phenomenon ob- 
servable in the dictamnus fraxinella. Tliis plant is fragrant, and the odor which it diffuses around forms 
a partial and temporary atmosphere, which is inflammable ; for if a lighted candle or other ignited body 
is brought near to the plant, especially in the time of drought, its atmosphere immediately takes fire. 
This phenomenon was first observed by the daughter of the celebrated Linnaeus, and is explained by sup- 
posing the partial and temporary atmosphere to contain a proportion of wax exuded from the plant, and 
afterwards reduced to vapor by the action of the sun. The result of its combustion in oxygene gas was, 
according to Lavoisier, carbonic acid and water, in such proportion as to lead him to conclude that lOO 
parts of wax are composed of 82-28 of carbon and 1772 of hydrogen. But owing to the little action of 
acids upon it, there seems reason to believe that it contains also oxygen as an ingredient. 

679. Wax possesses all the essential properties of a fixed oil. But fixed oils have the property of becom- 
ing concrete, and of assuming a waxy appearance when long exposed to the air, in consequence as it seems, 
of the absorption of oxygen. Wax therefore may be considered as a fixed oil rendered concrete, perhaps 
by the absorption of oxygen during the progress of vegetation. But if this theory is just, the wax may be 
expected to occur in a considerable variety of states according to its degree of oxygenation ; and this is ac- 
cordingly the case. Sometimes it has the consistency of butter, and is denominated butter of wax, as 
butter of coco, butter of galam. Sometimes its consistency is greater, and then it is denominated tallowy 
as tallow of croton ; and when it has assumed its last degree of consistency, it then takes the appellation of 
wax. The following are its principal species : butter of cacao, butter of coco, butter of nutmeg, taUow of 
croton, and wax of myrtle. 

680. The butler of cacao is extracted from the seeds of the theobroma cacao or chocolate plant 
tfifr. 55.), either by boiling them in water, or by subjecting them to the action of the press after 
having exposed them to the vapor of boiling water. 

BtUter of coco is found in the fruit of the cocos nucifera or coco-nut-tree. It is expressed 
from the'pulp of thenut, and is even said to separate from it when in a fluid state, as cream sepa- 
rates from milk. 

Butter of nuttneg is obtained from the seeds of the mj-ristica ofHcmalis, or nutmeg-tree. 
Taltow of croton is obtained from the fruit of the croton sebLferum. 
The max qf myrtle is obtained from the berry of the myrica cerifera. 

681. Resiiis. Resins are volatile oils, rendered concrete by means of the 
absorption of oxygen, or rather perhaps by the abstraction of part of their 
hydrogen. They have a slight degree of transparency, and their color is 
generally yellowish. Their taste is somewhat acrid; but they are without 
smell when pure. Their specific gravity varies from I'OISO to 1-2289. They 
are non-conductors of electricity, and when excited by friction their electri- 
city is negative. The species of resins are numerous. 

CS'2. Roain is a species of resin, of wliich there are several varie- 
ties. — From different species of the pine, larch, and fir-tree, 
there exudes a juice which concretes in the form of tears. Its 
extrication is generally aided by means of incisions, audit re- 
ceives different appellations, according to the species from 
•which it is obtained. If it is obtained from the pinus syl- 
vestris, it is denominated common turpentine ; from pinus larix, 
Venice turpentine ; from amyris balsamea, balsam of Canada. It 
consists of two ingredients, oil of turpentine and rosin. The 
oil is extricated by distillation, and the rosin remains behind. 
If the distillation is continued to dryness, the residuum is 
common rosin or colophonium ; but if water is mixed with it 




while yet fluid, and incorporated by violent agitation, the resi- 
duum is yellow rosin. The yellow rosin is the most ductile, 
and the most generally used in the arts. 

683. Pitch and tor are manufactured from the resinous juices 
»>f the fir. The trunk is cut or cleft into pieces of a convaiient 



size, which are piled to- 
gether in heaps, and co- 
vered with turf. They are 
then set on fire, and the 
resinous juice which is thus 
extricated, being prevented 

from escaping in a volatile state by means of the turf, is 
precipitated and collected in a vessel beneath. It is partlv con 
verted into an empyreumatic oil, and is now tar, which, by 
being further inspissated, is converted into pitch. 
Mastich is extracted from the pistacia lentlscus. 
Sandarach is obtained from the juniperis conimu 
taneous exudation. 
Eloni is extracted from the amyris elemifera. 
Tacambac is the produce of the fagara octandra and Vonuk-s 
balsamifera. ' 
Labdmiim is obtained from the eistus creticus. 



by spon- 



Book I. COMPOUND PRODUCTS OF PLANTS. 153 



684. Ofiohaltammn, or bnhnof&lead, which has been so much 687. Copal k the produce of therhus copalllmun, a tree which 
fametl for its medical virtues. Is the produce of the amyris is found in North America. 

GileadensLs, a shrub which grows in Judaea and in Arabia ; but Anime, is obtained from the hymenaja coubaril, or locust-tree. 
It is so much valued by the Turks that its importation is pro- a native of North America. 

hibited. This is the balm ofGilead so much celebratea in Lac is the produce of the croton laccifeium, a native of the 
Scripture. Fliny says it was first brought to Rome by the East Indies. 

generals of Vespasian. It is obtained in a liquid state from 688. Bloom. Upon the epidermis of the leaves and fruit of cer- 
incisions made in the bark, cuid is somewhat bitter to the taste. tain species of plants, there is to be found a fine, soft, and glaucous 

685. Copaiva, or balsam of copuiva, is obtained from the co- powder. It is particularly observable upon cabbage-leaves, and 
paifera officinalis. upon plums, to which it communicates a peculiar shade. It 

Dragon's blond is obtained from the dracoena draco, pterocar- is known to gardeners by the name of bloom. It is easily rub- 
pus draco, and calamus rotang. bed ofFby the fingers ; and when viewed under the microscope, 
Gvaiac is the produce of the guaiacum officinale. seems to be composed of small opaque and unpolished granules, 
Botany Bay resin, the produce of the acarois resinifera, a native somewhat similar to the powder of starch ; but with a high 
of New Holland, and found in great abundance about Botany magnifying power it appears transparent. When rubbed off'. 
Bay. it is again re-produced, though slowly. It resists the action 

686. G)-ecitr-f.5ZH constitutes the coloring matter of the leaves of of dews and rains, and is consequently insoluble in water, 
trees, and of almost all vegetables. It is insoluble in water, b'lt But it is soluble in spirits of wine; from which circum- 
Boluble in alcohol. When treated with oxymuriatic acid, it as- stance it has been suspected, with some probability, to be a 
sumes the color of a withered leaf, and exhibits the resinous resin. 

properties more distuictly. 

689. The use of resins in the arts is very considerable ; but their medical virtues are not quite so 
great as has been generally supposed. They are employed in the arts of painting, varnishing, embalm- 
ing, and perfumery ; and they furnish us with two of the most imi^ortant of all materials to a naval 
power, pitch and tar. 

690. Gum-resins. This term is employed to denote a class of vegetable substances, which have been 
regarded by chemists as consisting of gum and resin. They are generally contained in the proper vessels 
of the plant, whether in the root, stem, branches, leaves, ilowcrs, or fruit. But there is this remarkable 
difference between resins and gum-resins, that the latter have never been known, like the former, to 
exude spontaneously from the plant. They are obtained by means of bruising the parts containing tlicm, 
and expressing the juice, which is ahvays in the state of an emulsion, generally white, but sometimes 
of a different color ; or they are obtained by means of incisions from which the juice flows. This juice, 
which is the proper juice of the plant, is -then exposed to the action of the sun, by which, in warm cli- 
mates, it is condensed and inspissated, and converted into the gum-resin of commerce. Gum-resins, in 
their solid state, are brittle, and less transparent than rosins. They have generally a strong smell, which 
is sometimes alliaceous, and a bitter and nauseous taste. They are partially soluble both in water and in 
alcohol. When heated, they do not melt like the resins, nor are they so combustible. But they swell 
and soften by heat, and at last burn away with a flame. By distillation they yield volatile oil, ammonia 
combined with an acid, and have a bulky charcoal. The principal species of gum-resins which have been 
hitherto applied to any useful purpose are : — 

Galbanum, obtained from the stem of the bubon galhanum. Arabia. Bruce says it belongs to the genus mimosa; buthowever 

Ammoniac, brought from Africa in the form of small tears; this may be, myrrh is the juice of the plant concreted in the 

the plant which yields it is thought to be a species of ferula. form of tears. Its color is yellow, its odor strong but agree- 

Scammony, the produce of the convolvulus scaramonia. able, and its taste bitter ; it is employed in medicine, and is 

Opopmrnx, obtained from the pastinaca opoponax. esteemed an excellent stomachic. 

Euphorlnum, the produce of^ the euphorbia officinalis; its &yi. y44-5afa'<i(/a, a substance which is well known for its strong 

taste is caustic ; it is considered as a poison, but is occasionally and fetid smell, is obtained from the ferula assafoetida. At four 

employed in medicine. years old the plant is dug up by the root. 'I'he root is then 

Olibanum is obtained from the juniperus lycia, which grows cleaned, and the extremity cut oft'; a milky juice exudes which 

tn Arabia, particularly by the borders of the Red Sea. It is is collected; and when it ceases to flow another portion is cut 

the frankincence of the ancients. It exudes from incisions off', and more juice extricated. The process is continued till the 

made in the tree, and concretes into masses about the size of a root is exhauottd. The juice which has been collected soon 

chestnut. concretes, and constitutes assafoetida. It is brought to Kurope 

Sat^apenum is supposed to be obtained from the ferula in small agglutinated grains of different colors, white, red, 

persica. yellow. It is hard, but brittle. Its taste is bitter, and its 

Gamboge, or gumgutt, the produce of the mangostana cam- smell insufferably fetid ; the Indians use it as a seasoning for 

bogia. - their food, and call it the food of the gods. In Europe, it is 

691. Myrrh, the plant yieldingwhich grows in Abyssinia and used in medicine as an antispasmodic. 

693. Balsams. The substances known by the name of balsams are resins united to the benzoic ocid. 
They are obtained by means of incisions made in the bark, from wliich a viscous juice exudes, whicli is 
afterwards inspissated by the action of the lire or air, or they are obtained by means of boiling the i)L;rt 
that contains them. They are thick and viscid juices, but become readily concrete. Their color is brown 
or red ; their smell aromatic when rubbed; their taste acrid ; their specific gravity 1-090. They Rrc un- 
alterable in the air after becoming concrete. They are insoluble in water, but boiling water abstracts 
part of their acid; they are soluble in the alkalies and nitric acid. When heated they melt and swell, 
evolving a white and odorous smoke. The principal of the balsams are the following : benzoin, storax, 
styrax, balsam of tolu, balsam of Peru. 

Benzoin is the produce of the styrax benzoin. Balsam of tolu is obtained from the toluiferabalsamum. 

Storax is obtained from the styrax officinale. Balsam of I'eru is obtained from the myroxylon perui- 

Styrax is a semi-tluid juice, the produce ofa tree said to be ferum. 
cultivated in Arabia. 

694. Camphor. The substance known by the name of camphor is obtained from the root and stem of 
the laurus camphora, by distillation. When pure it is a white brittle substance, forming octagonal crystals 
or square plates. Its taste is hot and acrid ; its odor strong but aromatic ; its specific gravity 0'9887. When 
broke into small fragments and put into water, on the surface of which it swims, a singular pheno- 
menon ensues. The water surrounding the fragments is immediately put into commotion, advancing and 
retiring in little waves, and attacking the fragments with violence. The minuter fragments are driven 
backwards and forwards upon the surfac^ as if impelled by contrary winds. If a drop of oil is let fall on 
the surface of the water it produces an immediate calm. This phenomena has been attributed to elec- 
tricity. Fourcroy thinks it is merely the effect of the affinities of the camphor, water, and air, entering 
into combination. Though camphor is obtained chiefly from the laurus camphora, yet it is known to 
exist in a great many other plants, particularly labiate plants, and has been extracted from the roots of 
zedoary, sassafras, thyme, rosemary, and lavender. 

695 Caoutchouc. The substance denominated caoutchouc was first introduced into Europe about the 
beginning of the eighteenth century. But from a use to which it is very generally applied of rubbing out 
the marks made upon paper by a black-lead pencil, it is better known to most people in this country by the 
name of Indian rubber. It is obtained chiefly from hsevea caoutchouc and jatropha elastica, trees indi- 
genous to South America ; but it has been obtained also from several trees which grow in the East Indies, 
such as ficus indicus, artocarpus integrifolia, and urceola elastica. If an incision is made into the bark of 
any of these plants a milky juice exudes, which, when exposed to the air, concretes and forms caoutchouc. 
As the object of the natives in collecting it had been originally to form it into vessels for their own use, it 
it is generally made to concrete in the form of bags or bottles. This is done by applying the juice, wlien 
fluid, in thin layers to a mould of dry clay, and then leaving it to concrete in the sun or by the fire. A 
second layer is added to the firs-t, and others in succession, till the vessel acquires the thickness tliat is 
wanted. The mould is then broken and the vessel fit^for use, and in this state it is generally brought into 
p:uroi)c. It has been brought, however, even in its 'milky state, by Ix.-ing confined from the action of the 
air. If the milky juice is exposed to the air, an clastic pellicle is formed on the surface. If it is confined 



154 



SCIENCE OF 'Gardening. 



Paiit II. 



in a vessel containing oxygene gas, the pellicle Is fonncd sooner. If ox>Tnuriatic acki is poured into the 
milky juice, the caoutchouc precipitates immediately. This renders it probable that the formation of the 
caoutchouc is owing to the absorption of oxygen. Caoutchouc, when pure, is of a white color, without 
taste and without smell. The black color of the caoutchouc of commerce is owing to the method of dry- 
ing the different layers upon the moulds on which they are spread. They are dried by being exposed to 
smoke. The black color of the caoutchouc, therefore, is owing to the smoke or soot aiternating with its 
different layers. It is soft and pliable like leather, and extremely elastic, so that it may be stretched to a 
very great length, and still recover its former size. Its specific gravity is 0'9335. Gough, of Manchester, 
has made some curious and important experiments on the connection between the temperature of caout- 
chouc and its elasticity, from which it results that ductility as well as fluidity is owing to latent heat. 
Caoutchouc is not altered by exposure to the air. It is perfectly insoluble in water ; but if boiled in water 
for some time its edges become so soft that they will cement, if pressed and kept for a while closely toge- 
ther. It is insoluble in alcohol, but soluble in ether. It is soluble also in volatile oils and in alkalies. 
And from the action operated upon by acids it is thought to be composed of carbon, hydrogen, oxy- 
gen, and azote. It seems to exist in a great variety of plants combined with otlier ingredients. It 
may be separated from resins by alcohol. It may be separated from the berries of the misseltoe by means 
of water, and from other vegetable substances by other processes. It is said to be contained both in opium 
and in mastic. But from these substances it cannot "be extracted in sufficient quantities to make it wortli 
tlie labor. It is applied to a great many useful purposes both in medicine and the arts, to which, from 
its great pliability and elasticity, it is uncommonly well adapted. In the countries where it is produced 
the natives make boots and shoes of it, and often use it by way of candle. 

693. Cork. The substance known by the name of cork is tiie outer and exfoliated bark of the quercus 
suber or cork-tree, a species of oak that grows in great abundance in France, Spain, and Italy. But to 
prevent its natural exfoliation, which is alwaj s irregular, and to disengage it in convenient portions, a longi- 
tudinal incision is made in the bark from the root to the top of the stem ; and a transverse and circular in- 
cision at each extremity. Tlie outer layer, which is cork, is then stripped off', and to flatten and reduce 
it to sheets it is put into water and loaded with weights. The tree continues to thrive, though it is thus 
stripped of its cork once in two or three years. Cork is a light, soft, and elastic substance, distingu'shed 
by the following properties : — Its color is a sort of light tan. It is very inflammable, and burns w.th a 
bright white flame, leaving a black and bulky charcoal behind. When distilled it yields a small qu:intity 
of ammonia. Nitric acid corrodes and dissolves it, changing its color to yellow, and finally decomposes it, 
converting it partly into an acid, and partly into a soft substance resembling wax or resin. The acid 
which is thus formed is denominated the suberic acid, and has been proved by the experiments of La- 
grange to be an acid of a peculiar nature. It seems probable that cork exists in the bark of some other 
trees also, as well as the quercus suber. The bark of the ulnius subcrosa assumes something of the exter- 
nal appearance of cork, which it resembles in its thickness, softness, and elasticity, and in its loose and 
porous texture, as well as also in its chemical properties. Fourcroy seems, indeed, to regard the epider- 
mis of all trees whatever to be a sort of cork, but does not say on what grounds his opinion is founded. 

697. Woodi/ fibre. The principal body of the root, stem, and branches of trees, is designated by the 
appellation of wood. But the term is too general for the purpose of analytical distinction, as tlie part 
designated by it often includes the greater part of the substances that have been already enumerated. It 
remains, therefore, to be ascertained whether there exists in the plant any individual substance different 
from those already described, and constituting more immediately the fabric of the wood. If a piece of 
wood is well dried and digested, first in water and then in alcohol, or such other solvent as shall produce 
no violent effects upon the insoluble parts ; and if the digestion is continued till the liquid is no longer 
colored, and dissolves no more of the substance of the plant, there remains behind a sort of vegetable 
skeleton, which constitutes the basis of the wood, and which has been denominated woody fibre. It is 
composed of bundles of longitudinal threads, which are divisible into others still smaller. It is somewhat 
transparent. It is without taste and smell, and is not altered by exposure to the atmosphere. It is inso- 
luble in water and alcohol ; but the fixed alkalies decompose it with the assistance of heat. When heated 
in the open air it blackens without melting or frothing, and exhales a thick smoke and pungent odor, 
leaving a charcoal that retains the form of the original mass. When distilled in a retort it yields an em- 
pyreumatic oil, carburetted hydrogene gas, carbonic acid, and a portion of ammonia, according to Four- 
croy, indicating the presence of nitrogen as constituting one of its elementary principles ; and yet this 
ingredient does not appear in the result of the later analysis of Gay Lussac, and Thenard, which is, car- 
bon, 52-53 ; oxygen, 41 78 ; hydrogen, 5.69; total 100. 

698. Cfiarconl. When wood is burnt with a smothered flame, the volatile parts are driven off" by 
the heat, and there remains behind a substance exhibiting the exact form, and even the several layers of 
the original mass. This process is denominated charring, and the substance obtained, charcoal. As it is 
the woody fibre alone which resists the action of heat, while the other parts of the plant are dissipated, it 
is plain that charcoal must be the residuum of woody fibre, and tliat the quantity of the one must depend 
upon the quantity of the other, if they are not rather to be considered as the same. Charcoal may be ob- 
tained from almost all parts of the plant, whether solid or fluid. It often escapes, however, during com- 
bustion, under the form of carbonic acid, of wliich it constitutes one of the elements. From a variety of 
cx})eriments made on different plants and on tlieir ditierent parts, it appears that the green parts contain 
a greater proportion of charcoal than the rest. But this proportion is found to diminish in autumn, when 
the green parts begin to be deprived of their glutinous and extractive juice. The wood contains more 
charcoal than the alburnum, the bark more than both. But this last result is not constant in all plants, 
because the bark is not a homogeneous substance, the outer parts being affected by the air and the inner 
parts not. The wood of the quercus robur, separated from the alburnum, yielded from 100 parts of its dried 
substance 19'75 of charcoal ; the alburnum, 17'5 ; the bark, 26; leaves gathered in May, 80; in Septem- 
ber, 26. But the quantity of charcoal differs also in different plants, as well as in different parts of the 
same. According to the experiments of Mushet, 100 parts of the following trees afforded as follows : — 



Lignum vitas 
]\Iahof;any 
Laburnum 
Chestnut 

Oak - . - - 

American black birch 



"Walnut - 

HoUy 

Beech 

American maple 
Elm 



- 20-6 

- 19-9 

- 19-9 

- 19-9 



Norway fir 
Sallow 
Ash 
Birch 

Scotch pine 



19-2 
18-4 
17-9 
17-4 
16-4 



699. The properties of charcoal are insolubility in water, of which however it absorbs a portion when 
newly made, as also of atmospheric air. It is incapable of putrefaction. It is not altered by the most 
violent heat that can be applied, if all air and moisture are excluded ; but when heated to a"bout8tX) it 
burns in atmospheric air or oxygene gas, and if pure, without leaving any residuum. It is regarded by 
chemists as being a triple compound, of which the ingredients are carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. Char- 
coal is of great utility both to the chemist and artist as a fuel for heating furnaces, as well as" for a variety 
of other purposes. It is an excellent filter for purifying water. It is a very good tooth-powder ; and is 
also an indispensable ingredient in the important manufacture of gunpowder. 

700. The sap. If the branch of a vine is cut asunder early in the spring, before the leaves have begun 
to expand, a clear and colorless fluid will issue from the wound, which gardeners denominate the tears 
of the vine. It is merely, however, the ascending sap, and may be procured from almost any other plant 
by the same or similar means, and at the same season ; but particularly from the maple, birch, and walnut- 
tree, by means of boring a hole in the trunk. It issues chiefly from the porous and mixed tubes of the 



Book I. 



COMPOUND PRODUCTS OF PLANTS. 



155 



alburnum ; though sometimes it does not flow freely till the bore is carried to the centre. A small branch 
of a vine has t>een known to yield from twelve to sixteen ounces, in the space of twenty-four hours. A 
maple-tree of moderate size yields about 2(X) pints in a season, as has been already stated ; and a birch- 
tree has been known to yield in the course of the bleeding-season, a quantity equal to its own weight, hi 
the sap of fagus sylvatica, Vauquelin found the following ingredients : — Water, acetate of lime, with excess 
of acid, acetate of potass, gallic acid, tannin, mucous and extractive matter, and acetate of alumia. In 
1039 parts of the sap of the ulmus campestris, he found 1027 parts of water and volatile matter, ')-24<) of ace- 
tate of potass, 1.060 of vegetable matter, 0.796 of carbonate of lime, besides some slight indications of the 
presence of sulphuric and muriatic acids ; and at a later period of the season he found the vegetable mat- 
ter increased, and the carbonate of lime and acetate of potass diminished. From the above exi)eriments, 
therefore, as well as from those of other chemists, it is plain that the sap consists of a great variety of ingre- 
dients, differing in different species of plants ; though there is too little known concerning it to warrant 
the deduction of any general conclusions, as the number of plants whose sap has been hitherto analysed is 
yet but very limited. It is the grand and principal source of vegetable aliment, and may be regarded as 
being somewhat analogous to the blood of animals. It is not made use of by man, at least in its natural 
state. But there are trees, such as the birch, whose sap may be manufactured into a very pleasant wine ; 
and it is well known that the sap of the American maple-tree yields a considerable quantity of sugar. 

701. The proper juice. When the sap has received its last degree of elaboration from the different or- 
gans through which it has to pass, it is converted into a peculiar fluid, called the proper juice. This fluid 
may be distinguished from the sap by means of its color, which is generally green, as in periwinkle ; or red, 
as in logwood ; or white, as in spurge ; or yellow, as in celandine ; from the two last of which it may rea- 
dily be obtained by breaking the stem asunder, as it will then exude from the fracture. Its principal seat is 
in the bark, where it occupies the simple tubes ; but sometimes it is situated between the bark and wood, 
as in the juniper-tree ; or in the leaf, as in the greater part of herbs ; or it is diffused throughout the whole 
plant, as in the fir and hemlock ; in which case, either the proper juice mixes with the sap, or the vessels 
containing it have ramifications so fine as to be altogether imperceptible. It is not, however, the same in 
all plants, nor even in the different parts of the same plant. In the cherry-tree it is mucilaginous ; in the 
pine it is resinous ; in spurge and celandine it is caustic, though resembling in appearance an emulsion. 
In many plants the proper juice of the bark is different from that of the flower ; and the proper juice of 
the fruit different from both. Its appearance under the microscope, according to Senebier, is that of an 
assemblage of small globules connected by small and prism-shaped substances placed between them. If 
this juice could be obtained in a state of purity, its analysis would throw a considerable degree of light 
upon the subject of vegetation. But it seems impracticable to extract it without a mixture of sap. Sene- 
bier analysed the milky juice of euphorbia cyparissias, of which he had procured a small quantity consi- 
derably pure, though its pungency was so great as to occasion an inflammation of the eyes to the person 
employed to procure it^ It mixed readily with water, to which it communicated its color. When left ex 
posed to the air a slight precipitation ensued ; and when allowed to evaporate a thin and opaque crust 
remained behind. Alcohol coagulated it into small globules. Ether dissolved it entirely, as did also oil of 
turpentine. Sulphuric acid changed its color to black ; nitric acid to green. The most accurate experi- 
ments on the subject are those of Chaptal. When oxymuriatic acid was poured into the peculiar juice of 
euphorbia, a very copious white precipitate fell down, which, when washed and dried, had the appear- 
ance of starch, and was not altered by keeping. Alcohol, aided by heat, dissolved two thirds of it, which 
the addition of water again precipitated. They had all the properties of resin. The remaining third part 
possessed the properties of woody fibre. The same experiment was tried on the juice of a variety of other 
plants, and the result uniformly was that oxymuriatic acid precipitated from them woody fibre. 

702. The virtues of plants have generally been thought to reside in their proper juices, and the opinion 
seems indeed to be well founded. It is at least proved by experiment in the poppy, spurge, and fig. The 
juice of the first is narcotic, of the two last corrosive. The diuretic and balsamic virtues of the fir reside 
in its turpentine, and the purgative property of jalap in its resin. If sugar is obtained from the sap of the 
sugar-cane and maple, it is only because it has been mixed with a quantity of proper juice. The bark 
certainly contains it in greatest abundance, as may be exemplified in cinnamon and quinquina. But 
the peach-tree furnishes an exception to this rule : its flowers are purgative, and the whole plant aro- 
matic ; but its gum is without any distinguished virtues. Malpighi regarded the proper juice as the prin- 
ciple of nourishment, and compared it to the blood of animals ; but this analogy does not hold very closely. 
The sap is, perhaps, more analogous to the blood, from which the proper juice is rather a secretion. In 
one respect, however, the analogy holds good, that is, with regard to extravasated blood and peculiar 
juices. If the blood escapes from the vessels it forms neither flesh nor bones, but tumors ; and if the pro- 
per juices escape from the vessels containing them, they form neither wood nor bark, but a lump or depo- 
sit of inspissated fluid. To the sap or to the proper juice, or rather to a mixture of both, we must refer 
such substances as are obtained from plants under the name of expressed juices, because it is evident that 
they can come from no other source. In this state they are generally obtained in the first instance whe- 
ther with a view to their use in medicine or their application to the arts. It is the business of the chemist 
or artist to separate and purify them afterwards according to the peculiar object he may happen to have in 
view, and the use to which he purjioses to apply them. They contain, like the sap, acetate of potass or of 
lime, and assume a deeper shade of color when exposed to the fire or air. Th.e oxymuriatic acid precipi- 
tates from them a colored and flaky substance as from the sap, and they yield by evaporation a quantity of 
extract. But they differ from the sap in exhibiting no traces of tannin or gallic acid, and but rarely of the 
saccharine principle. 

703. Ashes. When vegetables are burnt in the open air the greatest part of their substance is evapo- 
rated during the process of combustion ; but ultimately there remains behind, a portion which is altogether 
incombustible, and incapable of being volatilised by the action of fire. This residuum is known by the 
name of ashes. Herbaceous plants, after being dried, yield more ashes than v/oody plants ; the leaves more 
than the branches ; and the branches more than the trunk. The alburnum yields also more ashes than 
the wood ; and putrefied vegetables yield more ashes than the same vegetables in a fresh state, if the putre- 
faction has not taken place in a current of watpr. The result of Saussure's experiments on 1000 parts of 
different plants was as follows : — 



Ga/Acrcd in May, dried leaves of the oak - - - - r)5 jmrls nf ashes. 

green leaves of the oak ■ - - .1." 

ried leaves of the rhododendron - 30 

dried leaves of the a^sculus hippocastaniim 72 

trunk and branches of aesculus hipiiocastanum 3.'> 

Gathered in September, dried leaves of the aesculus hippocastanum 86 

dried leaves of the oak - - 55 

green leaves of the oak ... 21 

Gathered when injlower, leaves of pisuin sativum 95 

Gathered when in fniit, leaves of pisum sativum - 81 

leaves of vicia jtdia ... - yo 

Gathered before cnmitifr intiijhimer, the leaves of the vicia faba 16 

Oak, the dried bark 60, the alburnum 4, wood - 2 



704 The analysis of the ashes of plants, with a view to the discovery of the ingredients of whichthey are 
composed, produces alkalies, earths, and metals, which must therefore be considered as ingredients in the 
composition of the vegetable. But vegetable ashes contain also a variety of other principles, occurring, 
however, in such small proportions as generally to escape observation. Perhaps they contain all substances 
not capable of being volatilised by the action of fire. 



U6 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



705. Alkalies. The alkalies are a petailiar class of substances, distinguished by a caustic taste and the 
property of changing vegetable blues to green. Tliey are generally regarded as being three in number, 
potass, soda, and ammonia, of which the two former only are found in the ashes of vegetables. Ammonia 
is, indeed, often obtained from vegetable substances by means of distillation, but then it is always formed 
during the process. If the ashes of land vegetables, burnt in the open air, are repeatedly washed' in water, 
and the water filtered and evaporated to dryness, potass is left behind. The potass of commerce is manufac- 
tured in this manner, though it is not quite pure. But it may be purified by dissolving it in spirits of wine, 
and evaporating the solution to drj-ness in a silver vessel. When pure it is white and semi-transparent, 
and is extremely caustic and deliquescent. It dissolves all soft animal substances, and changes vegetable 
blues into green. It dissolves alumina, and also a small quantity of silex, with which it fuses into glass by 
the aid of fire. It had been long suspected by cliemists to be a compound substance; and according to 
the notable discovery by Sir H. Davy, its component parts are at last ascertained to be a highly inflam- 
mable metal, which he denominates potassium, and oxygen — one proportion of each. Soda is found 
chiefly in marine plants, from the ashes of which it is obtained by means of lixiviation. It exists in great 
abundance in salsola soda, zostera maritima, and in various species of fuci. It is generally obtained in the 
state of a carbonate, but is purified in the same manner as potass, to which it is similar in its properties ; 
but from which it is easily distinguished by its forming a hard soap with oil, while potass forms a soft soap. 
It consists, according to Sir H. Davy, of one proportion of a metal which he denominates sodium, and 
two proportions of oxygen. Such are the only vegetable alkalies, and modes of obtaining them. They 
are found generally in the state of carbonates, sulphates, or muriates, salts that form beyond all compa- 
rison the most abundant ingredient in the ashes of green herbaceous plants whose parts are in a st^te of 
vegetation. The ashes of the golden rod, growing in an uncultivated sod, and of the bean, tumsol, and 
wheat, were found by Saussure to contain at least three fourths of their weight of alkaline salts. This 
was nearly the case also with the leaves of trees just bursting from the bud. But the proportion of alkaline 
salts is found to diminish rather than to augment as the parts of the plant are developed. The ashes of 
the leaves of the oak, gathered in Mav, yielded 47 parts in the 100 of alkaline salts ; and in September, 
only 17. 

706. Ti'ie utility of the alkalies, as obtained from vegetables, is of the utmost importance in the arts, par- 
ticularly in the formation of glass and of soaps. If a mixture of soda or potass, and silex or sand, in cer- 
tain proportions, is exposed to a violent heat, the ingredients are melted down into a fluid mass, which is 
glass in a state of fusion. In this state it may be moulded into almost any form at the pleasure of the ar- 
tist. And accordingly we find that it is manufactured into a great variety of utensils and instruments, 
under the heads of flint-glass, crown-glass, bottle-glass. Bottle-glass is the coarsest ; it is formed of soda 
and common sand, and is used in the manufacture of the coarser sort of bottles. Crown-glass is composed 
of soda and fine sand: it is moulded into large plates for the purpose of forming window-glasses and 
looking-glasses. Flint-glass is the finest and most transparent of all : that which is of the best quality is 
composed of 120 parts of white siliceous sand, -10 parts of pearl-ash, S5 of red oxide of lead, 13 of nitrate of 
potass, and 25 of black oxide of manganese. It is known also by the name of crystal, and may be cut and 
polished so as to serve for a variety of ornamental purposes, as well as for the more important and more 
useful purpose of forming optical instruments, of which the discoveries of the telescope and the micro- 
scope are the curious or sublime results. If a quantity of oil is mixed with half its weight of a strong so- 
lution of soda or jjotass, a combination takes place which is rendered more complete by means of boiling. 
The new compound isso.-ip. The union of oil with potass forms soft soap, and with soda hard soap; sub- 
stances of the greatest efficacy as detergents, and of the greatest utility in the washing and blcaching'of 
linen. The alkalies are used also in medicine, and are found to be peculiarly efficacious in the reduction 
of urinary calculi. 

707. Earths. The only earths which have hitherto been found in plants are the following: lime, silica, 
magnesia, alumina. 

708. Of these earths, lime is by far the most abundant It is generally combined with a portion of phos, 
phoric, carbonic, or sulphuric acid, forming phosphates, or carbonates, or sulphates of lime. The 
phosphate of lime is, next to the alkaline salt, the most abundant ingredient in the ashes of green herbace- 
ous plants, whose parts are all in a state of vegetation. The leaf of a tree, bursting from the bud, contains 
in its ashes a greater proportion of earthy phosphate than at any other period : ItX) parts of the ashes of the 
leaves of the oak, gathered in May, furnished 24 parts of earthy phosphate ; in September, only 18-25. In 
annual plants the proportion of earthy phosphate diminishes from the period of their germination to that 
of their flowering. Plants of the bean, before flowering, gave 14'5 parts of earthy phosphate ; in flower, 
only 13"5. Carbonate of lime is, next to phosphate of lime, the most abundant «f the earthy salts that are 
found in vegetables. But if the leaves of plants are washed in water the proportion of carbonate is aug- 
mented. This is owing to the subtraction of their alkaline salts and phosphates in a greater proportion 
than their lime. In green herbaceous plants, whose parts are in a state of increase, there is but little car- 
bonate of lime ; but the ashes of the bark of trees contain an enormous quantity of carbonate of lime, and 
much more than tlie alburnum, as do also the ashes of the wood. The ashes of most seeds contain no car- 
bonate of lime ; but they abound in phosphate of potass. Kence the ashes of plants, at the period of the 
maturity of the fruit, yield less carbonate of lime than at any previous period. 

709. Silica is not found to exist in a great proportion in the ashes of vegetables, unless they have been 
previously deprived of their salts and i^hosphates by washing; but Vv-hen the plants are washed in water, 
the proportion of their sUica augments. The ashes of the leaves of the hazel, gathered in May, yielded 
2-5 parts of silica in 100. The same leaves, washed, yielded four parts in 100. Young plants, and leaves - 
bursting from the bud, contain but little of silica in their ashes ; but the proportion of silica augments as 
th^parts are developed. But perhaps this is owing to the diminution of the alkaline salts. The ashes of 
some stalks of wheat gathered a month before the time of flowering, and having some of the radicle leaves 
withered, contained 12 parts of silica and 65 of alkaline salts in 100. At the period of their flowering, and 
when more of their leaves were withered,_the ashes contained 32 parts of silica and 54 of alkaline salts. Seeds 
divested of their external covering, contain less silica than the stem furnished with its leaves ; and it is 
somewhat remarkable that there are trees of which the bark, alburnum, and wood, contain scarcely any 
silica, and the leaves a great deal, particularly in autumn. This is a plienomenon that seems inexplicable. 
The greater pirt of the grasses contain a very considerable proportion of silica, as do also the plants of the 
genus equisetum. Sir H. Davy has discovered that it forms a part of the epidennis of these plants, and in 
some of them the principal part. From 100 parts of the epidermis of the following plants the proportions 
of silica were, in bonnet cane, 9i); bamboo, 71'4; common reed, 48-1; stalks of corn, 66-5. Owing to the 
silic.i contained in the epidermis, the plants in which it is found, are sometimes used to give a polish to the" 
surface of substances wiiore smoothness is required. The Dutch rush, equisetum hyemale, a plant of this 
kind, is used to polish even brass. 

710. Magnesia does not exist so abundantly in the vegetable kingdom as the two prece~ding earths. It 
has been found, however, in several of the marine plants, particularly the fuci ; but salsola soda contains 
more of magnesia than any other plant yet examined. According to Vauquelin, 100 parts of it contain 
17"929 of magnesia. 

Alumina has been detected in several plants, but never except in very small quantities. 

711. Metallic oxides. Among the substances found in the ashes of vegetables, we must class also 
metals. They occur, however, only in small quantities, and are not to be detected except by the most de- 
licate experiments. The metals hitherto discovered in plants are iron, manganese, and perhaps gold. Of 
these iron is by far the most common. It occurs in the state of an oxide, and the ashes of hard aiwi woody 
plant*, such as the oak, are said to contain nearly one twelfth of their own weight of this oxide.* The ashes 



Book I. 



SIMPLE PRODUCTS OF PLANTS 



157 



of salsola contain also a cons'idcrablo quantity. Tbc oxl-lc of manganceo was first detected in the ashor, of 
vegetables by Scheele, and aftei-vvards found by Proust in tlie ashes of the pine, calendula, vine, f^recn oai:, 
and fig-tree. Becclier, Kunckel, and Sage, together with some other chemists, contend also for the exist- 
ence of gold in the ashes of certain plants; but the very minute portion which they found, seems more 
likely to have proceeded I'rom the lead employed in the procL'Ss than from the ashes of the plant. It has 
been observed by Saussure, that the proportion of the oxides of iron and of manganese augmeiits in the 
ashes of plants as their vegetation advances. The leaves of trees furnish nrioi-e of these principles in autumn 
than in spring. It is so also with annual plants. Seeds contain metals in less abundance than the stem ; 
and if plants are washed in water, the proportions of their metallic oxides is augmented. 

712. Such are the principal ingredients that enter into the vegetable composition. They are indeed nu- 
merous, though some of them, sucli as tJje miCtallic oxides, occur in such small proportions as to render it 
doubtful whether they are in reality vegetable productions or no. The same thing may be said of some of 
the other ingredients that have been found in the ashes of plants, which it is probable they have absorbed 
ready formed by the root, and deposited unaltered, so that they can scarcely be at all regarded as being the 
genuine products of vegetation. 

713. Other substances. Besides the substances above enumerated, there are also several others tliat have 
been supposed to constitute distinct and peculiar genera of vegetable productions, and which might have 
been introduced under such a character; such as the mucus, jelly, sarcocol, asparagin, inulin, and ulmirj, 
of Dr. Thomson, as described in his well known System of Chemistry ; tut as there seems to be some dif- 
ference of opinion among chemists with regard to them, and a belief entertained that they are but vari- 
eties of one or other of the foregoing ingredients, it is sufficient for the purposes of this work to have 
merely mentioned their names. Several other substances of a distinct and peculiar character have been 
suspected to exist in vegetable productions : such as tile febrifuge principle of Seguin, as discovering itself 
in Peruvian bark ; the principle of causticity or acridity of Senebier, as discovering itself in the roots of 
ranunculus bulbosus, scilla maritima, bryonia alba, and arum maeulatum, in the leaves of digitalis pur- 
purea, in the bark of daphne mezereon, and in the juice of the spurges : to which may be added the fluid 
secreted from the sting of the common nettle, the poisons inherent in some plants, and the niedical virtues 
inherent in others ; together with such peculiar principles as may be presumed to exist in such regions of 
the vegetable kingdom as remain yet unexplored. The im.portant discoveries which have already resulted 
IVom the chemical analysis of vegetable substances encourage the hope that further discoveries will be the 
result of further experiment ; and from the zeal and ability of such chemists as are now directing their 
attention to the subject, every thing is to be expected. 

Sect. 11. Simple Products. 
714. From the above analysis of the vegetable subject, it is evident, that the compound 
ingredients of vegetables are all ultimately reducible to a very few constituent and vncom- 
jhnmded eleniejits ; and that the most essential of sUch compounds consist of carbon, 
oxygen, and iiydrogen, merely ; though others contain also a small proportion of nitrogen, 
said to be found only in cruciform plants. The remaining elementary principles which 
plants have been found to contain, although they may be necessary in the vegetable 
economy, yet they are by no means principles of the first importance, as occurring only in 
small proportions, and being dependent in a great measure on soil and situation ; whereas 
the elements of carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen, form as it were the very essence of the 
vegetable subject, and constitute by their modifications the peculiar character of the pro- 
perties of the plant. This is conspicuously exemplified in the result of the investigations 
of Gay Lussac, and Thenard, who have deduced from a series of the most minute and 
delicate experiments the three following propositions, which they have dignified by the 
name of Laws of Vegetable Nature (Traite de Chem. Element, torn. iii. chap, iii.) ; — 1st, 
Vegetable substances are always acid when the oxygen they contain is to the hydrogen in 
a greater proportion than in water ; 2dly, Vegetable substances are always resinous, or 
oily, or spirituous, v/hen the oxygen they contain is to the hydrogen in a smaller propor- 
tion than in water ; 3dly, Vegetable substances are neither acid nor resinous, but sac- 
charine or mucilaginous, or analogous to woody fibre or starch, when the oxygen and 
hydrogen they contain are in the same proportion as in water. Such is a brief sketch of 
the vegetable analysis : but if the reader, not being already an adept, wishes to descend 
into the detail of particulars and to prepare himself for original experiment, let him search 
out and peruse original papers, and let him consult the vegetable department of the several 
elementary publications referred to, especially that of Dr. Thomson's Si/stem of Clieinistry ; 
the most distinguished and elaborate of all our elementary works on the subject, and the 
guide chiefly applied to in the drawing up of the sketch that is here exhibited. 



Chap. VI 1L 

Functions of Vegetables. 

715. From the analysis of the structure and principles of plants, the transition to their 
life, growth, and propagation is natural and easy. This subject necessarily involves the 
several following topics : germination ; nutriment ; digestion ; growth and developement 
of parts ; anomalies of vegetable developement ; sexuality of vegetables ; impregnation of 
the vegetable germen ; changes consequent upon impregnation ; propagation and disper- 
sion of the species ; causes limiting the dispersion of the species ; evidence and clia- 
racter of vegetable vitality. 



158 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pa:t 11. 



Sect. I. Germination of tlie Seed. 

716. Germination is that act or operation of the vegetative principle by wliich the em- 
bryo is extricated from its envelopes, and convertednnto a plant. This is universally the 
first part of the process of vegetation. For it may be regarded as an indubitable fact, that 
all plants spring originally from seed. The conditions necessary to germination relate 
either to the internal state of the seed itself, or to the circumstances in which it is placed, 
with regard to surrounding substances. 

717. The first conditioii necessary to germination is, that the seed must have reached 
maturity. Unripe seeds seldom germinate, because their parts are not yet prepared to 
form the chemical combinations on which germination depends. Tliere are some seeds, 
however, whose germination is said to commence in the very seed-vessel, even before the 
fruit is ripe, and while it is yet attached to the parent plant. Such are those of the tan- 
gekolli of Adanson, and agave vivipara of East Florida, as well as of the cyamus nelumbo 
of Sir J. E. Smith, or sacred bean of India ; to which may be added the seeds of the 
common garden- radish, pea, lemon, &c. But these are examples of rare occurrence ; 
though it is sometimes necessary to sow or plant the seed almost as soon as it is fully ripe, 
as in the case of the coffee-bean ; which will not germinate unless it is sown widiin five 
or six weeks after it has been gathered. But most seeds, if guarded from external injury, 
will retain their germinating faculty for a period of many years. This has been proved 
by tlie experiment of sowing seeds that have been long so kept ; as well as by the deep^ 
ploughing up of fields that have been long left without cultivation. A field that was thus 
ploughed up near Dunkeld, in Scotland, after a period of forty years' rest, yielded a con- 
siderable blade of black oats without sowing. It could have been only by the plough's 
bringing up to the surface seeds that had been formerly too deeply lodged for germination. 

718. The second condition is, that the seed sown must be defended from the action of the 
rays of light. This has no doubt been long known to be a necessary condition of ger- 
mination, if we regard the practice of the harrowing or raking in of the grains or seeds 
sown by the farmer or gardener as being founded upon it. 

719. A third condition necessary to geraiination is the access of heat. No seed has ever 
been known to germinate at or below the freezing point. Hence seeds do not germinate 
in winter, even though lodged in their proper soil. But the vital principle is not neces- 
sarily destroyed in consequence of this exposure ; for the seed will genninate still, on the 
return of spring, when the ground has been again thawed, and the temperature raised to 
the proper degree. But ihis degree varies considerably in different species of seeds, as is 
obvious from observing the times of their germination, whether in the same or in different 
climates. For if seeds which naturally sow themselves, germinate in different climates 
at the same period, or in the same climate at different periods, the temperature necessary 
to their germination must of consequence be different. Now these cases are constantly 
occurring and presenting themselves to our notice ; and have also been made the subject 
of particular observation. Adanson found that seeds which will germinate in the space 
of twelve hours in an ordinary degree of heat, may be made to gerniinate in the space of 
three hours by exposing them to a greater degree of heat ; and that seeds transported from 
the climate of Paris to that of Senegal, have tlieir periods of germination accelerated from 
one to three days. (^Families des Plantes, vol. i. p. 84.) Upon the same principle, seeds 
transported from a warmer to a colder climate, have their period of germination protracted 
till the temperature of the latter is raised to that of the former. This is well exemplified 
in the case of green-house and hot-house plants, from which it is also obvious that the tem- 
perature must not be raised beyond a certain degree, otherwise the vital principle is totally 
destroyed. 

720. A fourth condition necessary- to germination is the access of moisture. Seeds will 
not germinate if they are kept perfectly dry. Water, therefore, or some liquid equivalent 
to it, is essential to germination. Hence rain is always acceptable to the farmer or gar- 
dener, immediately after he has sown his seeds ; and if no rain falls, recourse must be 
had, if possible, to artificial watering. But the quantity of water applied is not a matter 
of indifference. There may be too little, or there may be too much. If there is too 
little, the seed dies for want of moisture ; if there is too much, it then rots. The case is 
not the same, however, with all seeds. Some can bear but little moisture, though others 
will germinate even when partially immersed ; as was proved by an experiment of Du 
Hamel's, at least in the case of peas, which he placed merely upon a piece of wet sponge, 
so as to immerse them by nearly the one half, and which germinated as if placed in the 
soiL But this was found to be the most they could bear ; for when totally immersed in 
the water they rotted. There are some seeds, however, that will germinate even when 
wholly submersed. The seeds of aquatics must of necessity germinate under water ; and 
peas have been also known to do so under certain conditions. 

721. A fifth condition necessary to germination is the access of atmospheric air. Seeds 
will not germinate if placed in a vacuum. Ray introduced some grains of lettuce-seed 



Book I. 



geHmination of the seed. 



159 



into the receiver of an air-pinnp, m liicli he then exhausted. I'he seeds did not germinate. 
But they germinated upon the re-admission of the air, which is thus proved by conse- 
quence to be necessary to their germination. Acliard proved that no seed will germinate 
in nitrogcne gas, or carbonic acid gas, or hydrogene gas, except when mixed with a cer- 
tain proportion of oxygene gas ; and hence concluded that oxygene gas is necessary to 
the germination of all seeds, and the only constituent part of the atmospheric air which 
is absolutely necessary. Humboldt found that the process of germination is accelerated 
by means of previously steeping the seed in water impregnated with oxymuriatic acid. 
Cress-seed treated in this manner germinated in the space of three hours, though its or- 
dinary period of germination is not less than thirty-two hours. 

722. The period necessary to complete the process of gerniinalion is not the same in all 
seeds, even when all the necessary conditions have been furnished. Some species require 
a shorter, and others a longer period. The grasses are among the number of those plants 
whose seeds are of tlie most rapid germination ; then perhaps cruciform plants ; then le- 
guminous plants ; then labiate plants ; then umbelliferous plants ; and in the last order 
rosaceous plants, whose seeds germinate the slowest. The following table indicates the 
periods of the germination of a considerable variety of seeds, as observed by Adanson ; — 



WTieat, Millet-seed 
Spinage, Beans, Mustard 
Lettuce, Aniseed 
Melon, Cucumber, Cress-^ 



seed 



Radish, Beet-root 

Barley 

Oraclie 

Purslain - 

Cabbage 



Days. 

Hyssop - - - - 30 
Parsley - - - 40 or 50 

Almond, Chestnut, Feach - 1 year 
Rose, Hawtliom, Filbert - 2 years. 



'23. Physical pheno7nena. 



When a seed is committed to the soil under the conditions 
that have been just specified, the first infallible symptom of germination is to be deduced 
from the prolongation of the radicle (Jig. 56. n) , bursting through its proper integuments. 





and directing its extremity downwards into the soil. Tlie next step in the process of ger- 
mination is the evolution of the cotyledon or cotyledons (c), unless the seed is altogether 
acotyledonous, or the cotyledons hypogean, as in the oak (6}. The next step, in the case 
of seeds furnished with cotyledons, i-; that of the extrication of the plumelet (c), or first 
real leaf, from within or from between the cotyledon or cotyledons, and its expansion in 
the open air. The last and concluding step is the developement of the rudiments of a 
stem (d), if the species is furnished with a stem, and the plant is complete. "Whatever 
way tlie seed may be deposited, the invincible tendency of the radicle is to descend and 
fix itself in tlie earth ; and of the plumelet to ascend into the air. Many conjectures 
liave been offered to account for this. Knight accounts for it on the old but revived 
principle of gravitation. Keith conjectures that it takes place from a pow er inherent in 
the vegetable subject, analogous to what we call instinct in the animal subject, infallibly 
directing it to the situation best suited to the acquisition of nutriment and consequent de- 
velopement of its parts. ' 

724. The chemical phenomena of germination consist chiefly in the changes that are effected in the 
nutriment destined for the support and developement of the embryo till it is converted into a plant. 
This nutriment either passes through the cotyledons, or is contained in them ; because the embryo dies 



160 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Taut II. 



when they are prematurely cut ofF. But the farinaceous substance of the cotyledons, at least in cxa!- 
buminous seeds, is a proof that they themselves contain the nutriment. Tliey are to be regarded, thereiorc, 
as repositories of the food destined for the support of the embryo in its germinating state. And if the 
seed is furnished with a distinct and separate albumen, then is the albumen to be regarded as the rejw- 
sitory of food, and the cotyledon or cotyledons as its channel of conveyance. But the food thus contain_>d 
in the albumen or cotyledons is not yet fitted for the immediate nourishment of the embryo. Some 
previous preparation is necessary ; some cliange must be effected in its properties. And this cliange is 
cftfected by the intervention of chemical agency. The moisture imbibed by a seed placed in tlie earth is 
immediately absorbed by the cotyledons or albumen, which it readily penetrates,, and on which it imme- 
diately begins to operate a chemical change, dissolving part of their farina, or mixing with tlieir oily 
particles, and forming a sort of emulsive juice. The consequence of this change is a slight degree of 
fermentation, induced, perhaps, by the mixture of the starch and gluten of the cotyledons in the water 
which they have absorbed, and indicated by the extraction of a quantity of carbonic acid gas as well as 
by the smell and taste of the seed. This is the commencement of the process of germination, wliich 
takes place even though no oxygene gas is present. But if no oxygene gas is present, then the process 
stops ; which shows that the agency of oxygene gas is indispensable to germination. Accordingly, when 
oxygene gas is present it is gradually inhaled by the seed; and the farina of the cotyledons is found to 
have changed its savour. Sometimes it becomes acid, but generally sweet, resembling the taste of sugar ; 
and is consequently converted into sugar or some substance analogous to it. This is a further proof that 
a degree of fermentation has been induced; because the result is precisely the same in the prcc.ss of the 
fermentation of barley when converted into malt, as known by the name of the saccharine fermentation ; 
in which oxygene gas is absorbed, heat and carbonic acid evolved, and a tendency to germination indi- 
cated by the shooting of the radicle. The effect of oxygen, therefore, in the process, is that of converting 
the farina of the albumen or cotyledons into a mild and saccharine food, fit for the nourishment of the 
infant plant by diminishing the proportion of its carbon, and in augmenting, by consequence, that of its 
oxygen and hydrogen. The radicle gives the first indications of life, expanding and bursting its integu- 
ments, and at length fixing itself in the soil : the plumelet next unfolds its parts, developing the rudi- 
ments of leaf, branch, and trunk : ano', finally, the seminal leaves decay and drop off; and the embryo 
has been converted into a plant, capable of abstracting immediately from the soil or atmosphere the 
nourishment necessary to its future growth. 

Sect. II. Food of the vegetating Plant. 

725. The substances which plants abstract from the soil or atmosphere, or the food of the 
vegetating plant, liave long occupied the phytological enquirer What then are the com- 
ponent principles of tlie soil and atmosphere ? The investigations and discoveries of 
modern chemists have done much to elucidate this dark and intricate subject. Soil, in 
general, may be regarded as consisting of earths, water, vegetable moidd, decayed animal 
substances, salts, ores, alkalies, gases, perhaps in a proportion corresponding to the order 
in which they are now enumerated ; which is at any rate the fact w^th regard to the three 
first, though their relative proportions are by no means uniform. The atmosphere has 
been also found to consist of at least four species of elastic matter — nitrogen, oxygen, 
carbonic acid gas, and vapor ; together with a multitude of minute particles detached 
from the solid bodies occupying the surface of the eartli, and wafted upon tlie winds. 
The two former ingredients exist in the proportion of about four to one ; carbonic acid 
gas in the proportion of about one part in 100; and vapor in a proportion still less. 
Such then are the component principles of the soil and atmosphere, and sources of vege- 
table nourishment. But the whole of the ingredients of the soil and atmosphere are not 
taken up indiscriminately by the plant and converted into vegetable food, because plants 
do not thrive indiscriminately in all varieties of soil. . Part only of the ingredients are 
selected, and in certain proportions ; as is evident from tlie analysis of the vegetable sub- 
stance given in the foregoing chapter, in which it was found that carbon, hydrogen, 
oxygen, and nitrogen, are the principal ingredients of plants ; while the other ingredients 
contained in them occur but in very small proportions. It does not however follow, that 
these ingredients enter the plant in an uncombined and insulated state, because they do 
not always so exist in the soil and atmosphere ; it follows only that they are inhaled or ab- 
sorbed by the vegetating plant under one modification or another. The plant then does 
not select such principles as are the most abundant in the soil and atmosphere ; nor in 
the proportions in which they exist ; nor in an unconnbined and insulated state. But 
what are the substances actually selected ; in what state are they taken up ; and in wliat 
proportions? In oider to give arrangement and elucidation to the subject, it shall be 
considered under the following heads : Water, Gases, Vegetable Extracts, Salts, Earths, 
Manures. 

726. IFater. As water is necessary to the commencement of vegetation, so also is it 
necessary to its progress. Plants will not continue to vegetate unless their roots are 
supplied with water ; and if they are kept long without it, the leaves will droop and 
become flaccid, and assume a withered appearance. -Now this is evidently owing to the 
loss of water ; for if the roots are again well supplied with water, the weight of the plant 
is increased, and its fi-eshness restored. But many plants will grow, and thrive, and 
effect the developement of all their parts, if the root is merely immersed in water, 
though not fixed in the soil. Tulips, hyacinths, and a variety of plants with bulbous 
roots, may be so reared, and are often. to be met with so vegetating ; and many plants 
will also vegetate though wholly immersed. Most of the marine plants ai'c of this de- 
scription. It can scarcely be doubted, therefore, that water serves for tJie purpose of a 
vegetable aliment. But if plants cannot be made to vegetate without water ; and if 
they will vegetate, some wlicn partly immersed without (he assistance of scnl ; and some 



Book I. 



FOOD OF THE VEGETATING PLANT. 



161 



even when totally immersed, so as that no other food seems to have access to them ; does 
it not follow that water is the sole food of plants, the soil being merely the basis on 
which they rest, and the receptacle of their food ? This opinion has had many advo- 
cates ; and the arguments and experiments adduced in support of it were, at one time, 
thought to have completely established its truth. It was indeed the prevailing opinion 
of the seventeenth century, and was embraced by several philosophers even of the eight- 
eenth century ; but its ablest and most zealous advocates were Van Helmont, Boyle, 
Du Hamel, and Bonnet, who contended that water, by virtue of the vital energy of 
the plant, was sufficient to form all the different substances contained in vegetables. 
Du Hamel reared in the above manner plants of the horse-chestnut and almond to some 
considerable size, and an oak till it was eight years old. And, though he informs us 
that they died at last only from neglect of watering : yet it seems extremely doubtful 
whether tliey would have continued to vegetate much longer, even if they had been 
watered ever so regularly ; for he admits, in the first place, that they made less and less 
progress every year ; and, in the second place, that their roots Vv'ere found to be in a 
very bad state. The result of a great variety of experiments is, that water is not the 
sole food of plants, and is not convertible into the whole of the ingredients of the veget- 
able substance, even with the aid of the vital energy ; though plants vegetating merely 
in water, do yet augment the quantity of their carbon. 

727. Gases. When it was found that water is insufficient to constitute the sole food 
of plants, recourse was next had to the assistance of the atmospheric air ; and it was 
believed that the vital energy of the plant, is at least capable of furnishing all the dif- 
ferent ingredients of the vegetable substance, by means of decomposing and combining, 
in different ways, atmospheric air and water. But as this extravagant conjectui*e is 
founded on no proof, it is consequently of no value. It must be confessed, how^ever, 
that atmospheric air is indispensably necessary to the health and vigor of the plant, 
as may be seen by looking at the different aspects of plants exposed to a free circulation 
of air, and plants deprived of it : the former are vigorous and luxuriant ; the latter 
weak and stunted. It may be seen also by means of experiment even upon a small 
scale. If a plant is placed under a glass to which no new supply of air has access, it soon 
begins to languish, and at length withers and dies ; but particularly if it is placed under 
the exhausted receiver of an air-pump ; as might indeed be expected from the failure of 
the germination of the seed in similar circumstances. The result of experiments on this 
subject is, that atmospheric air and water are not the only principles constituting the 
food of plants. But as in germination, so also in the progress of vegetation, it is part 
only of the component principles of tlie atmospheric air that are adapted to the purposes 
of vegetable nutrition, and selected by the plant as a food. Let us take them in the 
order of their reversed proportions. 

728. The effect of the application of cajhonic acid gas was found to be altogether prejudicial in the pro- 
cess of the germination of the seed. But in the process of subsequent vegetation its application has been 
found, on the contrary, to be extremely beneficial. Plants will not indeed vegetate in an atmosphere of 
pure carbonic acid, as was first ascertained by Dr. Priestley, who found that sprigs of mint growing in 
water, and placed over wort in a state of fermentation, generally became quite dead in the space of a day, 
and did not even recover when put into an atmosphere of common air. Of a number of experiments the 
results are — 1st, That carbonic acid gas is of great utility to the growth of plants vegetating in the sun, as 
applied to the leaves and branches ; and whatever increases the proportion of this gas in their atmo- 
sphere, at least v/ithin a given degree, forwards vegetation ; 2d, That, as appUed to the leaves and 
branches of plants, it is prejudicial to their vegetation in the shade, if administered in a proportion beyond 
that in which it exists in atmospheric air ; 3d, That carbonic acid gas, as applied to the roots of plants, 
is also beneficial to their growth, at least in the more advanced stages of vegetation. 

729. As oxygen is essential to the commencement and progress of germination, so also it is essential to 
the progress of vegetation. It is obvious, then, that the experiment proves that it is beneficial to the 
growth of the vegetable as applied to the root ; necessary to the developement of the leaves ; and to the 
developement of the flower and fruit. The flower-bud will not expand if confined in an atmosphere de- 
prived of oxygen, nor will the fruit ripen. Flower-buds confined in an atmosphere of pure nitrogen 
faded without expanding. A bunch of unripe grapes introduced into a globe of glass which was luted by 
its orifice to the bough, and exposed to tire sun, ripened Avithout effecting any material alteration in its 
atmosphere. But when a bunch was placed in the same circumstances, v/ith the addition of a quantity of 
lime, the atmosphere was contaminated, and the grapes did not ripen. Oxygen, therefore, is essential to 
the developement of the vegetating plant, and is inhaled during the night. 

730. Though nitrogene gas constitutes by far the greater part of the mass of amospheric air, it does not 
seem capable of affording nutriment to plants ; for as seeds will not germinate, so neither will plants 
vegetate in it, but for a very limited time, such as the vinca minor, lythrum salicaria, inula dysenterica, 
epilobium hirsutum, and polygonum persicaria, that seem to succeed equally well in an atmosphere of 
nitrogene gas as in an atmosphere of common air. Nitrogen is found in almost all vegetables, particularly 
in the wood, in extract, and in their green parts, derived, no doubt, from the extractive principle of veget- 
able mould. 

731. Hydrogene gas. A plant of the epilobium hirsutum, which was confined by Priestley in a receiver 
filled with inflammable air or hydrogen, consumed one third of its atmosphere and was still green. 
Hence Priestley inferred, that it serves as a vegetable food, and constitutes even the true and proper 
pabulum of the plant. But the experiments of later phytologists do not at all countenance this opinion. 
Our conclusion from various experiments is, that hydrogen is unfavorable to vegetation, and docs nut 
serve as the food of plants. But hydrogen is contained in plants as is evident from their analysis ; and if 
they refuse it when presented to them in a gaseous state, in what state do they then acquire it ? To this 
question it is sufficient for the present to reply, that if plants do not acquire their hydrogen in tlic state of 
gas, they may at least acquire it in the state of water, which is indisputably a vegetable food, and of 
whicii liydrogen constitutes one of tlie component parts. 



162 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



732. Vegetable Extract. When it was found that atmospheric air and water are not, 
even conjointly, capable of furnishing the whole of the aliment necessary to the de- 
velopement of the plant, it was then alledged that, with the exception of water, all sub- 
stances constituting a vegetable food must at least be administered to the plant in a 
gaseous state. But this also is a conjecture unsupported by proof ; for even with 
regard to such plants as grow upon a barren rock, or in pure sand, it cannot be said that 
they receive no nourishment whatever besides water, except in a gaseous slate. Many of 
the particles of decayed animal and vegetable substances, which float in the atmosphere 
and attach themselves to the leaves, must be supposed to enter the plant in solution with 
the moisture which the leaves imbibe ; and so also similar substances contained in the 
soil must be supposed to enter it by the root : but these substances may certainly con- 
tain vegetable nourishment ; and they will perhaps be found to be taken up by the 
plant in proportion to their degree of solubility in water, and to the quantity in which 
they exist in the soil. Now one of the most important of these substances is vegetable 
extract. When plants have attained to the maturity of their species, the principles of 
decay begin gradually to operate upon them, till they at length die and are converted 
into dust or vegetable mould, which, as might be expected, constitutes a considerable 
proportion of the soil. The chance then is, that it is again converted into vegetable 
nourishment, and again enters the plant. But it cannot wholly enter tlie plant, because 
it is not wholly soluble in water. Part of it, however, is soluble, and consequently 
capable of being absorbed by the root, and that is the substance which has been denomi- 
nated extract. Saussure filled a large vessel with pure mould of turf, and moistened it 
with distilled or rain water, till it was saturated. At the end of five days, when it was 
subjected to the action of tlie press, 10,000 parts in weight of the expressed and filtered 
fluid yielded, by evaporation to diyness, 26 parts of extract. In a similar experiment 
upon the mould of a kitchen-garden wliich had been manured with dung, 10,000 parts 
of fluid yielded 10 of extract. And in a similar experiment upon mould taken from a 
well cultivated corn-field, 10,000 parts of fluid yielded four parts of extract. Such was 
the result in these particular cases. But the quantity of extract that may be separated 
from common soil is not in general very considerable. After twelve decoctions, all that 
could be separated was about one eleventh of its weight ; and yet this seems to be more 
than sufficient for the purposes of vegetation : for a soil containing this quantity was found 
by experiment to be less fertile, at least for peas and beans, than a soil that contained 
only one half or two thirds the quantity. But if the quantity of extract must not be too 
much, neither must it be too little. Plants that were put to vegetate in soil deprived of 
its extract, as far as repeated decoctions could deprive it, were found to be mucli less 
vigorous and luxuriant than plants vegetating in soil not deprived of its extract ; and yet 
the only perceptible difference between them is, that the former can imbibe and retain a 
much greater quantity of water than the latter. From this last experiment, as well as 
from the great proportion in which it exists in the living plant, it evidently follows that 
extract constitutes a vegetable food. But extract contains nitrogen ; for it yields by 
distillation a fluid impregnated with ammonia. The difficulty, therefore, of accounting 
for the introduction of nitrogen into the vegetating plant, as well as for its existence in 
the mature vegetable substance, is done away ; for, although the plant refuses it when 
presented in a gaseous state, it is plain that it must admit it along with the extract. It 
seems also probable that a small quantity of carbonic acid gas enters the plant along with 
the extractive principle, as it is known to contain tliis gas also. 

733. Salts, in a certain proportion, are found in most plants, such as nitrate, muriate, 
and sulphate of potass or soda, as has been ab'eady shown. These salts are known to 
exist in the soil, and the root is supposed to absorb them in solution with the water by 
which the plant is nourished. It is at least certain that plants may be made to take up 
by the roots a considerable proportion of salts in a state of artificial solution. But if 
salts are thus taken up by the root of the vegetating plant, does it appear that they are 
taken up as a food ? Some plants, it must be confessed, are injured by the application of 
salts, as is evident from the experiments of Saussure ; but others are as evidently benefited 
by it. Trefoil and lucerne have their growth much accelerated by the application of sul- 
phate of lime, though many other plants are not at all influenced by its action. The 
parietaria, nettle, and borage vvill not thrive, except in such soils as contain nitrate of lime 
or nitrate of potass ; and plants inhabiting the sea-coast, as was observed by Du Hamel, 
will not thrive in a soil that does not contain muriate of soda. It has been thought, how- 
ever, that the salts are not actually taken up by the root, though converted to purposes of 
utility by acting as astringents or corrosives in stopping up the orifices of the vessels of the 
plant, and preventing the admission of too much water : but it is to be recollected that 
the salts in question are found by analysis in the very substance of the plant, and must 
consequently have entered in solution. It has been also thought that salts are favorable 
to vegetation only in proportion as they hasten the putrefaction of vegetable substances 
contained in the soil, or attract the humidity of the atmosphere. But sulphate of lime is 



Book I. 



FOOD OF THE VEGETATING PLANT. 



163 



not deliquescent ; and if its action consist merely in accelerating putrefaction, why is its 
beneficial effect confined but to a small number of plants ? Grisenthwaite [New Theory 
of Agriculturet 1819, p. 111.) answers this question by stating, that as in the principal 
grain-crops which interest the agriculturist, there exists a particular saline substance, pe- 
culiar to each, so, if we turn our attention to the clovers, and turnips, we shall still find 
the same discrimination. Saintfoin, clover, and lucerne, have long been known to con- 
tain a notable quantity of gypsum (sulphate of lime) ; but such knowledge, very strange 
to relate, never led to the adoption of gypsum as a manure for those crops, any more than 
tliat of phosphate of lime for wheat, or nitrate of soda, or potassa for barley. It is true 
that gypsum has been long, and in various places, recommended as a manure, but its uses 
not being understood, it was recommended without any reference to crop, or indeed to the 
accomplishment of any fixed object. It is very well known that some particular ingre- 
dient may be essential to the composition of a body, and yet constitute but a very small 
proportion of its mass. Atmospheric air contains only about one part in the 100 of 
carbonic acid ; and yet no one will venture to affirm that carbonic acid gas is merely an 
adventitious and accidental element existing by chance in the air of the atmosphere, and 
not an essential ingredient in its composition. Phosphate of lime constitutes but a very 
small proportion of animal bodies, perhaps not one part in 500 ; and yet no one doubts 
that it is essential to the composition of the bones. But the same salt is found in the 
ashes of all vegetables ; and who will say that is not essential to their perfection ? 

734. Earths. As most plants have been found by analysis to contain a portion of 
alkaline or earthy salts, so most plants have been found to contain also a portion of 
earths : and as the two substances are so nearly related, and so foreign in their character 
to vegetable substances in general, the same enquiry has consequently been made with 
regard to their origin. Whence are the earths derived that have been found to exist in 
plants ? Chiefly from the soil. But in what peculiar state of combination do they enter 
the vessels of the plant ? The state most likely to facilitate their absorption is that of their 
solution in water, in which all the earths hitherto found in plants are known to be in a 
slight degree soluble. If it be said that the proportion in which they are soluble is so 
very small that it scarcely deserves to be taken into the account, it is to be recollected that 
the quantity of water absorbed by the plant is great, while that of the eartli necessary to 
its health is but little, so that it may easily be acquired in the progress of vegetation. 
Such is the manner in winch their absorption seems practicable : and Woodward's expe- 
riments afford a presumption that they are actually absorbed by the root. The proportion 
of earths contained in the ashes of vegetables depends upon the nature of the soil in which 
they grow. The ashes of the leaves of the rhododendron ferrugineum, grov^ang on 
Mount Jura, a calcareous mountain, yielded 43*25 parts of earthy carbonate, and only 
0*75 of silica. But the ashes of leaves of the same plant, growing on Mount Breven, a 
granitic mountain, yielded two parts of silica, and only 16*75 of earthy carbonate. It is 
probable, however, that plants are not indebted merely to the soil for the earthy particles 
which they may contain. They may acquire them partly from the atmosphere. Margray 
has shown that rain-water contains silica in the proportion of a grain to a pound ; which, 
if it should not reach the root, may possibly be absorbed along with the water that adheres 
to the leaves. But although the earths are thus to be regarded as constituting a small 
proportion of vegetable food, they are not of themselves sufficient to support the plant, 
even with the assistance of water. Giobert mixed together lime, alumine, silica, and 
magnesia, in such proportions as are generally to be met with in fertile soils, and moistened 
them with water. Several different grains were then sown in this artificial soil, wliich 
germinated indeed, but did not thrive ; and perished when the nourishment of the cotyle- 
dons was exhausted. It is plain, therefore, that the earths, though beneficial to the growth 
of some vegetables, and perhaps necessary to the health of others, are by no means capable 
of aflTording any considerable degree of nourishment to the plant. 

735. Swpiily of food by manures and culture. With regard to the food of plants derived 
frojn the atmosphere, the supply is pretty regular, at least, in as far as the gases are con- 
cerned ; for they are not found to vary materially in their proportions on any part of the 
surface of the globe : but the quantity of moisture contained in the atmosphere is con- 
tinually varying, so that in the same season you have not always the same quantity, though 
in the course of the year the deficiency is perhaps made up. From the atmosphere, 
therefore, there is a regular supply of vegetable food kept up by nature for the support of 
vegetable life, independent of the aid of man : and if human aid were even wanted, it 
does not appear that it could be of much avail. But this is by no means the case with 
regard to soils ; for if soils are less regular in their composition, they are at least more 
within the reach of human management. Tlie supply of food may be increased by alter- 
ing the mechanical or chemical constitution of soils ; and by the addition of food in the 
form of manures. Tlie mechanical constitution of soils may be altered by pulverisation, 
consolidation, draining, and watering ; their chemical properties by aeration and torrifica- 
tion ; both mechanical and chemical properties, by the addition of earths or other sub- 

M 2 



164 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



stances ; and manures, either liquid or solid, are supplied by irrigation and distribution 
of dungs and other nourishing matters, with or without their interment. (See Book II.) 

736. Soils in a state of culture, though consisting originally of the due projmrtion of 
ingredients, may yet become exhausted of the principle of fertility by means of too frequent 
cropping ; whether by repetition or rotation of the same, or of different crops. In this 
case, it should be the object of the phytologist, as well as of the practical cultivator, 
to ascertain by what means fertility is to be restored to an exhausted soil, or commu- 
nicated to a new one. In the breaking up of new soils, if the ground has been wet or 
marshy, as is frequently the case, it is often sufficient to prepare it merely by means of 
draining off the superfluous and stagnant water, and of paring and burning the turf upon 
the surface. If the soil has been exhausted by too frequent a repetition of the same crop, 
it often happens that a change of crop will answer the purpose of the cultivator ; for al- 
though a soil may be exhausted for one sort of grain, it does not necessarily follow that it 
is also exhausted for another. And accordingly, the practice of the farmer is to sow his 
crops in rotation, ha\dng in the same field a crop, perhaps, of wheat, barley, beans, and 
tares in succession ; each species selecting in its turn som.e peculiai* nutriment, or requir- 
ing, perhaps, a smaller supply than the crop that has preceded it. But even upon the 
plan of rotation, the soil becomes at length exhausted, and tJie cultivator obliged to have 
recourse to other means of restoring its fertility. In this case, an interval of repose is 
considerably efficacious, as may be seen from the increased fertility of fields that have not 
been ploughed up for many years, such as those used for pasture ; or even from that of 
the walks and paths in gardens when they are again broken up. Hence also the practice 
of fallowing, and of trenching or deep ploughing, which in some cases has nearly the same 
effect. 

737. Tlie fertility of a soil is restored, in the case of draining, by means of its 
carrying off all such superfluous moisture as may be lodged in the soil, which is well 
known to be pi-ejudicial to plants not naturally aquatics, as well as by rendering the 
soil more firm and compact. In the case of burning, the amelioration is effected by 
means of the decomposition of the vegetable substances contained in tlie turf, and sub- 
jected to the action of the fire, which disperses part also of the superfluous moisture, but 
leaves a residue of ashes favorable to future vegetation. In tlie case of the rotation of 
crops, the fertility is not so much restored as more completely developed and brought into 
action ; because the soil, though exhausted for one species of grain, is yet found to be 
sufficiently fertile for another, the food necessary to each being different, or required in 
less abundance. In the case of the repose of tlie soil, the restored fertility may be owing to 
the decay of vegetable substances that are not now carried off in the annual crop, but left to 
augment the proportion of vegetable mould ; or to the accumulation of fertilising particles 
conveyed to the soil by rains ; or to the continued abstraction of oxygen from the atmo- 
sphere. In the case of fallows, it is owing undoubtedly to the action of the atmospheric 
air upon the soil, whether in rendering it more friable, or in hastening the putrefaction of 
noxious plants ; or it is o« ing to the abstraction and accumulation of oxygen. In tlie 
case of trenching, or deep ploughing, it is owing to the increased facility with which the 
roots can now penetrate to the proper depth, and thus their sphere of nourishment is in- 
creased. But it often happens that the soil can no longer be ameliorated by any of the 
foregoing means, or not at least with sufficient rapidity for the purposes of the cultivator ; 
and in this case there must be a direct and actual application made to it of such substances 
as are fitted to restore its fertility. Hence the indispensable necessity of manures, wliich 
consist cliiefly of animal and vegetable remains that are buried and finally decomposed in 
the soil, from which they are afterwards absorbed by the root of the plant, in a state of 
solution. 

738. But as carbon is the pnndpal ijigredient furnished by mamires,_as contributing to the 
nourishment of the plant, and is not itself soluble in water, nor even disengaged by fer- 
mentation in a state of purity ; luider what state of chem.ical combination is its solution 
effected ? Is it effected in the state of charcoal ? It has been thought, indeed, that car- 
bon in the state of charcoal is soluble in water ; because water from a dunghill, when 
evaporated, constantly leaves a residuum of charcoal, as was first ascertained by the experi- 
ments of Hassenfratz. But there seem to be reasons for doubting the legitimacy of the 
conclusion that has been drawn from it ; for Senebier found that plants v/hose roots were 
immersed in water took up less of the fluid in proportion as it was mixed with water from 
a dunghill. Perhaps then the charcoal of water from a dunghill is held merely in sus- 
pension, and enters the plant under some other modification. But if carbon is not 
soluble in water in the state of charcoal, in what otlier state is it soluble ? It is soluble in 
the state of carbonic acid gas. But is this the state in which it actually enters the root ? 
On this subject phytologists have been somewhat divided in opinion. Senebier endea- 
vours to prove that carbonic acid gas, dissolved in water, supplies the roots of plants whh 
almost all their carbon, and founds his arguments upon the following facts : ~ in tlie 



Book I. 



PROCESS OF VEGETABLE NUTRITION. 



165 



first place, it is known that carbonic acid gas is soluble in water ; in tlie second place, it 
is known to be contained in the soil, and generated by the fermentation of the materials 
composing manures ; and, in the next place, it is known to be beneficial to vegetation 
when applied artificially to the roots, at least in a certain degree. This is evident from 
the following experiment of Ruckert, as well as from several experiments of Saussure's, 
previously related. Ruckert planted two beans in pots of equal dimensions, filled with 
garden-mould ; the one was moistened with distilled water, and the other with water im- 
pregnated with carbonic acid gas. But the latter appeared above ground nine days sooner 
than the former, and produced twenty-five beans ; while the former produced only fifteen. 
Now the result of tliis experiment, as well as the preceding facts, is evidently favorable to 
the presumption of Senebier, and shows that if carbonic acid is not the state in which car- 
bon enters the plant, it is at least a state preparatory to it ; and there are other circum- 
stances tending to corroborate the opinion, resulting from the analysis of the ascending 
sap of plants. The tears of the vine, when analysed by Senebier, yielded a portion of 
carbonic acid and earth ; and as the ascending sap could not be supposed to have yet un- 
dergone much alteration, the carbonic acid, like the earth, was probably taken up from 
the soil. But this opinion, which seems to be so firmly established upon the basis of ex- 
periment, Hassenfratz strenuously controverts. According to experiments which he had 
instituted with an express view to the investigation of this subject, plants which were yaised 
in water impregnated with carbonic acid differed in no respect from such as grew in pure 
water, and contained no carbon that did not previously exist in the seed. Now if this 
were the fact, it would be decisive of the point in question. But it is plain from the ex- 
periments of Saussure, as related in the preceding section, that Hassenfratz must have 
been mistaken both with regard to the utility of carbonic acid gas as furnishing a vegetable 
aliment, and with regard to the augmentation of carbon in the plant. The opinion of 
Senebier, therefore, may still be correct. It must be acknowledged, however, that the 
subject is not yet altogether satisfactorily cleared up; and that carbon may certainly enter 
the plant in some state different from that, either of charcoal in solution, or of carbonic 
acid gas. Is not the carbonic acid of tlie soil decomposed before entering the plant ? 
This is a conjecture of Dr. Thomson's, founded upon the following facts : — the green 
oxide of iron is capable of decomposing carbonic acid ; and many soils contain that oxide. 
Most soils, indeed, contain iron, cither in the state of the brown or green oxide, and it 
has been found that oils convert the brown oxide into green. But dung and rich soils 
contain a quantity of oily substance. One effect of manures, therefore, may be that of 
reducing the brown oxide of iron to the green, thus rendering it capable of decomposing 
carbonic acid gas, so as to prepare it for some new combination, in which it may serve as 
an aliment for plants. All this, however, is but a conjecture ; and it is more probable 
that the carbonic acid of the soil enters the root in combination with some other substance, 
and is afterwards decomposed within the plant itself. 

Sect. III. Process of Vegetable Nutrition. 

739. Plants are nourislied in a manner in some degree analogous to the animal economy. 
The food of plants, whether lodged in the soil, or wafted through the atmosphere, is taken 
up by intro-susception in the form of gases or other fluids : it is then known as their sap ; 
this sap ascends to the leaves, where it is elaborated as the blood of animals is in tlie 
lungs ; it then enters into the general circulation of the plant, and promotes its growth. ^ 

740. Intj^o-susception. As plants have no organ analogous to the mouth of animals, they 
are enabled to take up the nourishment necessary to their support only by absorption, or in- 
halation as the chyle into the animal lacteals, or the air into the lungs. The former term is 
applied to the intro-susception of non-elastic fluids ; the latter to that of gaseous fluids. 
The absorption of non-elastic fluids by the epidermis of plants does not admit of a 
doubt. It is proved, indisputably, that the leaves not only contain air, but do actually 
inhale it. It was the opinion of Priestley that they inhale it chiefly by the upper surface. 
And it has been shown by Saussure, that their inhaling power depends entirely upon the 
organisation. It has been a question, however, among phytologists, whether it is not also 
effected by the epidermis of the other parts of the plant. We can scarcely suppose it 
to be effected by the dry and indurated epidermis of the bark of aged trunks, of which 
the original organisation is obliterated ; nor by that of the larger and more aged branches. 
But it has been thought there are eveii some of the soft and succulent parts of the plant 
by which it cannot be effected, because no pores are visible in their epidermis. Decan- 
doile found no pores in the epidermis of fleshy fruits, such as pears, peaches, and goose- 
berries ; nor in that of roots, or scales of bulbs ; nor in any part not exposed to the in- 
fluence of air and light. It is known, however, that fruits will not ripen, and that roots 
will not thrive, if wholly deprived of air ; and hence it is probable that they inhale it by 
their epidermis, though the pores by which it enters should not be visible. In the root, 
indeed, it may possibly enter in combination with the moisture of tlie soil ; but in Ihe 
other parts of the plant it enters no doubt in the state of gas. Herbs, therefore, and the 

M 3 



166 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



soft parts of woody plants, absorb moisture and inhale gases from the soil or atmosphere 
by means of the pores of their epidennis, and thus the plant effects the intro-susception 
of its food. 

741. Ascent of the sap. The means by which the plant effects the intro-susception of 
its food, is chiefly that of absorption by the root. But the fluids existing in the soil when 
absorbed by the root, are designated by the appellation of sap or lymph j which, before 
it can be rendered subservient to the purposes of vegetable nutrition, must either be 
intermediately conveyed to some viscus proper to give it elaboration, or immediately 
distributed throughout the whole body of the plant. Our present object, therefore, is 
that of tracing out the progress of its distribution or ascent. The sap is in motion in 
one direction or other, if not all the year, at least at occasional periods, as the bleeding of 
plants in spring and autumn sufficiently illustrates. The plant always bleeds most freely 
about the time of the opening of the bud ; for in proportion as the leaves expand, the sap 
flows less copiously, and when they are fully expanded, it entirely ceases. jSut this sus- 
pension is only temporary, for the plant may be made to bleed again in the end of the 
autumn, at least under certain conditions. If an incision is now made into the body 
of the tree, after the occurrence of a short but sharp frost, when the heat of the sun or 
mildness of the air begins to produce a thaw, the sap will again flow. It will flow 
even where the tree has been but partially thawed, which sometimes happens on the , 
south side of a tree, when the heat of the sun is strong and the wind northerly. At the 
seasons now specified, therefore, the sap is evidently in motion ; but the plant will not 
bleed at any other season of the year. It has been the opinion of some phytologists, 
that the motion of the sap is wholly suspended during the winter. But though the 
great cold of winter, as well as the great heat of summer, is by no means so favorable 
to vegetation as the milder though more changeable temperature of spring and autumn, 
j'et it does not wholly suspend the movement of the sap. Palms may be made to bleed 
at any season of the year. And although this is not the case with plants in general, 
yet there is proof sufficient that the colds of winter do not, even in this climate, entirely 
prevent the sap from flowing. Buds exhibit a gradual developement of parts through- 
out the whole of the winter, as may be seen by dissecting them "at different periods. So 
also do roots. Evergreens retain their leaves ; and many of them, such as the arbutus, 
laurustinus, and the beautiful tribe of the mosses, protrude also their blossoms, even in 
spite of the rigor of the season. But all this could not possibly be accomplished, if the 
motion of the sap were wholly suspended. 

742. Thus the sap is in perj^etual motion loilli a more accelerated or more diminisJied 
velocity throvghout the whole of the year ; but still there is no decided indication, exhi- 
bited in the mere circumstance of the plant's bleeding, of the direction in which the sap 
is moving at the time ; for tl^e result might be the same whether it was passing from the 
root to the branches, or from the branches to the root. But as the great influx of the 
sap is effected by means of the pores of the epidermis of the root, it follows that its motion 
must, at least in the first place, be that of ascent ; and such is its direction at the season 
of the plant's bleeding, as may be proved by the following experiment : — if tlie bore or 
incision that has been made in the trunk is minutely inspected while the plant yet bleeds, 
the sap will be found to issue almost wholly from the inferior side. If several bores are 
made in the same trunk, one above another, the sap will begin to flow first from the lower 
bore, and then from those above it. If a branch of a vine be lopped, the sap will issue 
copiously from the section terminating the part that remains yet attached to the plant ; 
but not from the section terminating the part that has been lopped off. This proves in- 
dubitably that the direction of tlie sap's motion, during the season of tlie plant's bleeding, 
is that of ascent. But if the sap flows so copiously during the season of bleeding, it 
follows that it must ascend with a very considerable force ; which force has accordingly 
been made the subject of calculation. To tlie stem of a vine cut off about two feet and 
a half from the ground, Hales fixed a mercurial gauge which he luted with mastic ; the 
guage was in the form of a syphon, so contrived that the mercury might be made to rise 
in proportion to the pressure of the ascending sap. The mercury rose accordingly, and 
reached, as its maximum, to a height of thirty-eight inches. But this was equivalent to 
a column of water of tlie height of forty-three feet three and one-third inches ; demonstrat- 
ing a force in the motion of the sap that, without the evidence of experiment, would have 
seemed altogether incredible. 

743. Thus the sap in ascending from the lower to the ujrper extremity of the plant isjiropelled 
with a very considerable force, at least in the bleeding season. But is the ascending sap pro- 
pelled indiscriminately throughout the whole of the tubular apparatus, or is it confined in 
its course, to any particular channel ? Before the anatomy of plants had been studied with 
much accuracy, there was a considerable diversity of opinion on the subject. Some 
thought it ascended by the bark ; others thought that it ascended by the bark, wood, and 
pith indiscriminately ; and others thought it ascended between the bark and wood. Tlic 
first opinion was maintained and supported by Malpighi ; and Grew considers that tlie 



Book L PROCESS OF VEGETABLE NUTRITION. 



167 



sap ascends by the bark, wood, and pith, indiscriminately. Du Hamel stript several trees 
of their bark entirely, which continued, notwithstanding, to live for many years, protrud- 
ing new leaves and new branches as before. Knight stript the trunk of a number of 
young crab-trees of a ring of bark half an inch in breadth, but the leaves were protruded, 
and the branches elongated, as if the operation had not been performed. Du Petit 
Thouars removed the central wood and pith from the stems of several young sycamore 
trees, leaving the upper part to be supported only by four pillars of bark : in others he 
removed the bark, liber, and alburnum, leaving the upper part of the tree to be supported 
solely by the central wood. In both cases the trees lived, so that he concludes the bark 
and wood can alternately act as the sap's conductor. (Hist. (Vuji Morceau de Bois. 
Hort. Tour. 481.) 

744. It is evjdent, therefore, that Ike sap does not asceyid exclusively by the bark. But it 
is equally evident that it does not ascend by the pith, at least after the first year ; for then, 
even upon Grew's own supposition, it becomes either juiceless or wholly extinct: and 
even during the first year it is not absolutely necessary, if at all subservient to the ascent 
of the sap, as is proved by an experiment of Knight's. Having contrived to abstract from 
some annual shoots a portion of their pith, so as to interrupt its continuity, but not other- 
wise materially to injure the fabric of the shoot. Knight found that the growth of the 
shoots which had been made the subject of experiment was not at all aflfected by it. 

745. Thus the sap ascends neither by the hark 7ior pith, but by the wood only. But the 
whole mass of the wood throughout is not equally well adapted for the purpose of con- 
veying it. The interior and central part, or that part that has acquired its last degree of 
solidity, does not in general afford it a passage. This is proved by what is called the 
girdling of trees, which consists in making a circular gap or incision quite round the 
stem, and to the depth of two or three inches, so as to cut through both the bark and 
alburnum. An oak-tree on which Knight had performed this operation, with a view to 
ascertaining the channel of the sap's ascent, exhibited not the slightest mark of vegetation 
In the spring following. The sap then does not ascend through the channel of the ma- 
tured wood. But if the sap ascends neither through the channel of the bark, nor pith, 
nor matured wood, through what other channel does it actually ascend ? The only re- 
maining channel through which it can possibly ascend is that of the alburnum. In 
passing through the channel of the alburnum, does the sap ascend promiscuously by the 
whole of the tubes composing it, or is it confined in its passage to any peculiar set ? 
The earliest conjectures recorded on this subject are those of Grew and Malpighi, who, 
though they maintained that the sap ascends chiefly by the bark, did not yet deny that it 
ascends also partly by the alburnum or wood. It occurred to succeeding phytologists 
that the progress of the sap, and the vessels through which it passes, might be traced or 
ascertained by means of making plants vegetate in colored infusions. Du Hamel steeped 
the extremities of branches of the fig, elder, honeysuckle, and filbert in common ink. 
In examining the two former, after being steeped for several days, the part immersed 
was found to be black throughout, but the upper part was tinged only in the wood, 
which was colored for the length of a foot, but more faintly and partially in proportion 
to the height. The pith, indeed, exhibited some traces of ink, but the bark and buds 
none. In some other examples the external layers of the wood only were tinged. 
In the honeysuckle the deepest shade was about the middle of the woody layers ; and in 
the filbert there was also observed a colored circle surrounding the pith, but none in the 
pith itself, nor in the bark. 

746. Thus it is proved that the saj) ascends through the vessels of the longitudinal Jihrc 
composing the alburnum of ivoody pla7its, and through the vessels of the several bundles of 
longitudinal fibre constituting the ivoody pa7-t of herbaceous plants. But it has been already 
shown tliat the vessels composing the woody fibre are not all of the same species. There 
are simple tubes, porous tubes, spiral tubes, mixed tubes, and interrupted tubes. Through 
which of these, tlierefore, does the sap pass in its ascent ? The best reply to this enquiry 
has been furnished by Knight and Mirbel. Knight prepared some annual shoots of the 
apple and horse-chestnut, by means of circular incisions, so as to leave detached rings of 
bark with insulated leaves remaining on the stem. He then placed them in colored in- 
fusions obtained by macerating the skins of very black grapes in water ; and, on exa- 
mining the transverse section at the end of the experiment, it was found that the infu- 
sion had ascended by the wood beyond his incisions, and also into the insulated leaves, 
but had not colored the pith nor bark, nor the sap between the bark and wood. From 
the above experiment. Knight concludes that the sap ascends through what are called 
the common tubes of the wood and alburnum, at least till it reaches the leaves. Thus 
the sap is conveyed to the summit of the alburnum. But Knight's next object was to 
trace the vessels by which it is conveyed into the leaf. The apple-tree and horse- 
chestnut were still his subjects of experiment. In the former tlie leaves are attached 
to the plant by three strong fibres, or rather bundles of tubes, one in tlie middle of the 
leaf-stalk, and one on each side. la the latter they are attached by means of several 

M 4 r 



168 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part ir. 



such bundles. Now the colored fluid was found in each 'case to have passed through 
tlie centre of tiie several bundles, and through the centre only, tinging the tubes through- 
out almost the whole length of the leaf-stalk. In tracing their direction from the leaf- 
stalk upwards, they were found to extend to the extremity of the leaves ; and in tracing 
their direction from the leaf-stalk downwards, they were found to penetrate the bark 
and alburnum, the tubes of which they join, descending obliquely till they reach the 
pith which they surround. From their position Knight calls them central tubes, thus 
distinguishing them from the common tubes of the wood and alburnum, and from the 
spiral tubes with which they were every where accorhpaiiied as appendages, as well as 
from a set of other tubes which surrounded them, but were not colored, and which he 
designates by the appellation of external tubes. The experiment was now transferred 
to the flower-stalk and fruit-stalk, which was done by placing branches of the apple, 
pear, and vine, furnished with flowers not yet expanded, in a decoction of logwood. 
Tlie central vessels were rendered apparent as in the leaf-stalk. When the fruit of the 
two former was fully formed, the experiment was then made upon the fruit-stalk, in 
which the central vessels were detected as before; but the coloring matter was found to 
have penetrated into the fruit also, diverging round the core, approaching again in the 
eye of the fruit, and terminating at last in the stamens. It was by means of a pro- 
longation of the central vessels, which did not however appear to be accompanied by the 
spiral tubes beyond the fruit-stalk. Such then are the parts of the plant through which 
the sap ascends, and the vessels by wliich it is conveyed. Entering by tlie pores of tlie 
epidermis, it is received into the longitudinal vessels of the root by which it is conducted 
to the collar. Thence it is conveyed by the longitudinal vessels of the alburnum, to the 
base of the leaf-stalk and peduncle ; from which it is further transmitted to the extremity 
of the leaves, flower, and fruit. There remains a question to be asked intimately con- 
nected with the sap's ascent. Do the vessels conducting the sap communicate with one 
another by inosculation or otherwise, so as that a portion of their contents may be con- 
veyed in a lateral direction, and consequently to any part of the plant; or do they form 
distinct channels throughout the whole of their extent, having no sort of communication 
■with any other set of tubes, or with one another? Each of the two opinions implied in 
the question has had its advocates and defenders. But Du Hamel and Knight have 
shown that a branch will still continue to live though the tubes leading directly to it are 
cut in the trunk ; fj-om which it follows that the sap, though flowing the most copiously 
in the direct line of ascent, is at the same time also diffused in a transverse direction. 

747. Causes of the sap's ascent. By what power is the sap propelled ? Grew states 
two hypotheses : its volatile nature and magnetic tendency, aided by tlic agency of fer- 
mentation. Malpighi was of opinion that the sap ascends by means of tlie contraction 
and dilatation of the air contained in the air-vessels. M. De la Hire attempted to ac- 
count for the phenomenon by combining together the theories of Grew and jMalpighi ; 
and Borelli, who endeavoured to render their theory mere perfect, by bringing to its aid 
the influence of the condensation and rarification of the air and juices of tlie plant. 

748. Agency of hcaf. Du Kamel directed liis efforts to the solution of the difficulty, by endeavouring to ac- 
count for the phcnomc; on frOT theagency of heat, and chiefly on the following grounds : — because the sap 
begins to flow more copiously as the warmth of spring returns ; because the sap is sometimes fcund to 
flow on the south side cf a tree before it flows on the north side, that is, on the side exposed to the in- 
fluence of the sun's heat sooner than on the side deprived of it; because plants may be niade to vegetate 
even in the winter, by m.eans of forcing them in a hot-house ; and because plants raised in a hot-house 
produce their fruit earlier than such as vegetate in the open air. There can be no doubt cf the great 
utility of heat in forv/arding the progress of vegetation j b\jt it will not therefore follow that the motion, 
and ascent of the sap arc to be attributed to its agency. On the contrary, it is very Vn^cU kno^^•n that if 
the temperature exceeds a certain degree, it becomes then prejudicial both to the ascent of Ihe sap and 
also to the growth of the plant. Hales found that the sap flows less rapidly at mid-day than in the 
morning ; and every body knows that vegetation is less luxuriant at midsummer than in tlie spring. So 
also, in the case of forcing, it happens but too often that the produce of the hot-house is tctaliy destroyed 
by the unskilful application of heat ; and if heat is actually the cause of the sap's ascent, how comes it 
that the degree necessary to produce the effect is so very variable even in tlie same climate ? For there 
are many plants, such as the ar.butvis, laurustinus, and the mosses, that v/ill continue not only to ve- 
getate, but to protrude their blossoms and mature their fruit, even in the midst cf winter, when the 
temperature is at the lov/est. And in the case of submarine plants the temperature can never be very 
high ; so that although heat does no doubt facilitate the ascent of the sap by its tendency to make the 
vessels expand, yet it cannot be regarded as the efficient cause, since the sap is proved to be in motion 
even throughout the whole of the winter. Du Hamel endeavours, however, to strengthen the operation 
of heat by means of the influence of humidity, as being also povv'erful in promoting the ascent of 'the sap, 
■whether as relative to the season of the year or time of the day. The influence of the humidity of the 
atmosphere cannot be conceived to operate as a propelling cause, tlTough it may easily be conceived to 
operate as affording a facility to the ascent of the sap in one way or other ; which under certain circum- 
stances is capable of most extraordinary acceleration, but parMcidarly in that state of the atmosphere 
which forebodes or precedes a storm. In such a state a stalk of wheat was observed by Du Hamel to grow 
three inches in three days ; a stalk of barley six inches, and a shoot of a vine almost two feet ; but this 
is a state that occurs but seldom., and cannot be of much service in the general propulsion of the sap. 
On this intricate but important subject Linnsus appears to have embraced the opinion of Du Hamel, or 
an opinion very nearly allied to it ; but does not seem to have strengthened it by any new accession of 
argument ; so that none of the hitherto alleged causes can be regarded as adequate to the production of 
the effect. 

749. Irritability. Perhaps the only cause that has ever been suggested as appearing to be ;it all adequate 
to the production of the effect, is that alleged by Saussure. According to Saussurc the cause of the sap's 



Book I. PROCESS OF VEGETABLE NUTRITION. 169 



pscent is to be found in a peculiar species of irritability inherent in the sap-vessels themselves, and de- 
pendent upon vegetable life ; in consequence of which they are rendered capable of a certain degree of 
contraction, according as the internal surface is affected by the application of stimuli, as well as of subse- 
quent dilatation according as the action of the stimulus subsides ; thus admitting and propelling the sap 
by alternate dilatation and contraction. In order to give elucidation to the subject, let the tube be sup- 
posed to consist of an indefinite number of hollow cylinders united one to another, and let the sap be 
supposed to enter the first cylinder by suction, or by capillary attraction, or by any other adequate 
means ; then the first cylinder being excited by the stimulus of the sap, begins gradually to contract, and 
to propel the contained fluid into the cylinder immediately above it. But the cylinder immediately 
above it, when acted on in the same manner, is affected in the same manner ; and thus the fluid is pro- 
pelled from cylinder to cylinder till it reaches the summit of the plant. So also when the first cylinder 
lias discharged its contents into the second, and is no longer acted upon by the stimulus of the sap, it 
begins again to be dilated to its original capacity, and prepared for the intro-susception of a new portion 
of fluid. Thus a supply is constantly kept up, and the sap continues to flow. The above is by far the 
simplest as well as most satisfactory of all theories accounting for the ascent of the sap. 

7i>0. Contraction and dilatation. Knight has presented us with a theory which, whatever may be its real 
value, merits at least our particular notice, as coming from an author who stands deservedly high in the 
list of phytological writers. This theory rests upon the principle of the contraction and dilatation, not 
of the sap-vessels themselves, as in the theory of Saussure, but of what Knight denominates the silver 
grain, assisted perhaps by heat and humidity expanding or condensing the fluids. {Phil, Trans. 1801.) 
Keith considers this theory of Knight as beset with many difficulties, and the agency of the alleged cause 
as totally inadequate to the production of the effect to be accomplished. 

751. Elaboration of the sap. The moisture of the soil is no sooner absorbed into the 
plant than it begins to undergo a change. This is proved by the experiment of making 
a bore or incision in the trunk of a tree during the season of bleeding ; the sap that issues 
from the wound possesses properties very different from the mere moisture of the soil, 
as is indicated by means of chemical analysis, and sometimes also by means of a peculiar 
taste or flavor, as in the case of the birch-tree. Hence the sap has already undergone a 
certain degree of elaboration ; either in passing through the glands of the cellular tissue, 
which it reaches through the medium of a lateral communication, or in mingling with 
tlie juices contained in the cells, and thus carrjdng off a portion of them ; in the same 
manner, we may suppose, that water by filtering through a mineral vein becomes im- 
pregnated with the mineral through which it passes. But this primaiy and incipient 
stage of the process of elaboration must always of necessity remain a mystery to the 
phytologist, as being wholly effected in the interior of the plant, and consequently beyond 
tlie reach of observation. All he can do, therefore, is to trace out its future progress, 
and to watch its succeeding changes, in which the rationale of the process of elaboration 
may be more e^ddent. 

752. The process of elaboration is chiejly operated in the leaf: for the sap no sooner 
reaches the leaf, than part of it is immediately carried off by means of perspiration, 
perceptible or imperceptible ; effecting a change in the proportion of its component parts, 
and by consequence a change in its properties. 

Hales roared a sun-flower in a pot of eartli till it grew to the height of three feet and a half ; he then 
covered the mouth of the pot with a plate of lead, which he cemented so as to prevent all evaporation from 
the earth contained in it. In this plate he fixed two tubes, the one nine inches in length and of but small 
diameter, left open to serve as a medium of communication with the external air ; the other two inches 
in length and one in diameter, for the purpose of introducing a supply of water, but kept alwaj^s shut ex- 
cept at the time of watering. The holes of the bottom of the pot were also shut, and the pot and plant 
weighed for fifteen successive days in the months of July and August ; hence he ascertained not only the 
fact of transpiration by the leaves, from a comparison of the supply and waste ; but also the quantity of 
moisture transpired in a given time, by subtracting from the total waste the amount of evaporation from 
the pot. The final result proved that the absorbing power of the root is greater than the transpiring power 
of the leaves, in the proportion of five to two. Similar experiments were also made upon some species of cab- 
bage, whose moan transpiration was found to be 1 lb. 3 oz. per day ; and on some species of evergreens, 
which were found, however, to transpire less than other plants. The same is the case also with succulent 
plants, which transpire but little in proportion to their mass, and which as they become more firm transpire 
less. It is known, however, that they absorb a great deal of moisture, though they give it out thus 
sparingly ; which seems intended by nature for the purpose of resisting the great droughts to which they 
are generally exposed, inhabiting, as they do for the most part, the sandy desert or the sunny rock. Along 
with his own experiments Hales relates also some others that were made by Miller of Chelsea ; the result of 
which was that, other circumstances being the same, transpiration is in proportion to the transpiring sur- 
face ; and is afifected by the temperature of the air, sunshine, or drought, promoting it, and cold and wet 
diminishing or suppressing it entirely. It is also greatest from six o'clock in the morning till noon, and is 
least during the night But when transpiration becomes too abundant, ov/ingto excess of heat or drought, 
the plant immediately suf^ers and begins to languish ; and hence the leaves droop during the day, though 
they are again revived during the night. For the same or for a similar reason, transpiration has been 
found also to increase as the heat of sum.mer advances ; being more abundant in July than in June, and still 
more in August than in either of the preceding months, from which last period it begins again to 
decrease. 

7J3. A fluid little different from common water is exhaled according to the experi- 
ments of Hales and Guettard ; in some cases it had the odor of the plant ; but Du 
Hainel found that it became sooner putrid than water. Such then are the facts that have 
been ascertained v/ith regard to the imperceptible perspiration of plants, from which it 
unavoidably follows that the sap undergoes a very considerable modification in its passage 
through the leaf. 

754. Perceptible jjerspiration, which is an exudation of sap too gross or too abundant 
to be dissipated immediately, and which hence accumulates on the surface of the leaf, is 
the cause of its furtlier modification. It is very generally to be met with in the course of 



no 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



the summer on the leaves of the maple, poplar, and lime-tree ; but particularly on the 
surface exposed to the sun, which it sometimes wholly covers. 

Its physical as well as chemical qualities are very different in different species of plants ; so that it is not 
always merely an exudation of sap, but of sap in a high state of elaboration, or mingled with the peculiar 
juices or secretions of the plant. Sometimes it is a clear and watery fluid conglomerating into large drops, 
such as are said to have been observed by Miller, exuding from the leaves of the musa arbor, or plantain- 
tree ; and such as are sometimes to be seen in hot and calm weather exuding from the leaves of the poplar 
or willow, and trickling down in such abundance as to resemble a slight shower. This phenomenon was 
observed by Sir J. E. Smith, under a grove of willows in Italy, and is said to occur sometimes even in Eng- 
land. Sometimes it is glutinous, as on the leaf of the lime-tree ; sometimes it is waxy, as on the leaves of 
rosemary ; sometimes it is saccharine as on the orange-leaf ; or resinous, as on the leaves of the cistus 
creticus. The cause of this excess of perspiration has not yet been altogether satisfactorily ascertained ; 
though it seems to be merely an effort and institution of nature to throw off all such redundant juices as 
may have been absorbed, or secretions as may have been formed beyond what are necessary'to the due 
nourishment or composition of the plant, or beyond what the plant is capable of assimilating at the time. 
Hence the watery exudation is perhaps nothing more than a redundancy of the fluid thrown off by imper- 
ceptible perspiration, and the waxy and resinous exudations nothing more than a redundancy of secreted 
juices ; all which may be still perfectly consistent with a healthy state of the plant. But there are cases in 
which the exudation is to be regarded as an indication of disease, particularly in that of the exudation 
known by the name of honey-dew, a sweet and viscid substance covering the leaves like a varnish, and 
sometimes occasioning their decay. Such at least seems to be the fact with regard to the honey-dew of 
the hop, which, according to the observations of Linnaeus, is the consequence of the attacks of the cater- 
pillar of the ghost-moth injuring the root. And such seems also to be the fact with regard to the honey- 
dew of the beech-tree, and perhaps also the honey-dew of the oak. The sap then in the progress of its 
ascent from the extremity of the root to the extremity of the leaf undergoes a considerable change, first in 
its mixing with the juices already contained in the plant, and then in its throwing off a portion at the leaf. 

755. The sap is furtlier affected by means of the gases entering into the root along with 
the moisture of the soil, but certainly, by means of the gases inhaled into the leaf ; the 
action and elaboration of which shall now be elucidated. 

756. Elaboration qf carbonic acid. The utility of carbonic acid gas as a vegetable food has been al- 
ready shown ; plants being found not only to absorb it by the root along with the moisture of the soil, but 
also to inhale it by the leaves, at least when vegetating in the sun or during the day. But how is the ela- 
boration of this gas effected ? Is it assimilated to the vegetable substance immediately upon entering the 
plant, or is its assimilation effected by means of intermediate steps ? The gas thus inhaled or absorbed is 
not assimilated immediately, or at least not wholly : for it is known that plants do also evolve carbonic 
acid gas when vegetating in the shade, or during the night. Priestley ascertained that plants vegetating in 
confined atniospheres evolve carbonic acid gas in the shade, or during the night, and that the vitiated 
state of their atmospheres after experiment is owing to that evolution ; and Saussure that the elaboration 
of carbonic acid gas is essential to vegetation in the sun ; and, finally, Senebier and Saussure proved that 
the carbonic acid gas contained in water is abstracted and inhaled by the leaf, and immediately decom- 
posed ; the carbon being assimilated to the substance of the plant, and the oxygen in part evolved, and 
in part also assimilated. The decomposition of carbonic acid gas takes place only during the light of day, 
though Saussure has made it also probable that plants decompose £rpart of the carbonic acid gas which 
they form with the surrounding oxygen even in the dark. But the effect is operated chiefly by means of 
the leaves and other green parts of vegetables, that is, chiefly by the parenchyma ; the wood, roots, petals, 
and leaves that have lost their green color not being found to exhale oxygene gas. It may be observed, 
however, that the green color is not an absolutely essential character of the parts decomposing carbonic 
acid ; because the leaves of a peculiar variety of the atriplex hortensis, in whicn all the green parts change 
to red, do still exhale oxygene gas. 

757. Elaboration of oxygen. It has been already shown that the leaves of plants abstract oxygen from 
confined atmospheres, at least when placed in the shade, though they do not inhale all the oxygen that 
disappears ; and it has been further proved, from experiment, that the leaves of plants do also evolve a 
gas in the sun. From a great variety of experiments relative to the action and influence of oxygen on the 
plant, and the contrary, the following is the sum of the results. The green parts of plants, but especially 
the leaves, when exposed in atmospheric air to the successive influence of the light and shade, inhale and 
evolve alternately a portion of oxygene gas mixed with carbonic acid. But the oxygen is not immediately 
assimilated to the vegetable substance ; it is first converted into carbonic acid by means of combining with 
the carbon of the plant, which withers if this process is prevented by the application of lime or potass. 
The leaves of aquatics, succulent plants, and evergreens consume, in equal circumstances, less oxygen 
than the leaves of other plants. The roots, wood, and petals, and in short all parts not green, with the 
exception of some colored leaves, do not effect the successive and alternate inhalation and extrication of 
oxygen ; they inhale it indeed, though they do not again give it out, or assimilate it immediately, but con- 
vey it under the form of carbonic acid to the leaves, where it is decomposed. Oxgen is indeed assimilated 
to the plant, but not directly, and only by means of the decomposition of carbonic acid ; when part of it, 
though in a very small proportion, is retained also and assimilated along with the carbon. Hence the most 
obvious influence of oxygen, as applied to the leaves, is that of forming carbonic acid gas, and thus pre- 
senting to the plants elements which it may assimilate ; and perhaps the carbon of the extractive juices 
absorbed even by the root, is not assimilated to the plant tiU it is converted by means of oxygen into car- 
bonic acid. But as an atmosphere composed of nitrogen and carbonic acid gas only is not favorable to 
vegetation, it is probable that oxygen performs also some other function beyond that of merely presenting 
to the plant, under the modification of carbonic acid, elements which it may assimilate. It may effect also 
the disengagement of caloric by its union with the carbon of the vegetable, which is the necessary result 
of such union. But oxygen is also beneficial to the plant from its action on the soil ; for when the ex- 
tractive juices contained in the soil have become exhausted, the oxygen of the atmosphere, by penetrating 
into the earth and abstracting from it a portion of its carbon, forms a new extract to replace the first. 
Hence we may account for a number of facts observed by the earlier phytologists, but not weU explained. 
Du Hamel remarked that the lateral roots of plants are always the more vigorous the nearer they are 
to the surface ; but it now appears that they are the most vigorous at the surface because they have there 
the easiest access to the oxygen of the atmosphere, or to the extract which it may form. It was observed 
also by the same phytologist that perpendicular roots do not thrive so well, other circumstances being the 
same, in a stiff and wet soil as in a friable and dry soil ; while plants with slender and divided roots thrive 
equally well in both : but this is no doubt owing to the obstacles that present themselves to the passage of 
the oxygen in the former case, on account of the greater depth and smaller surface of the root It was 
fiirther observed, that roots which penetrate into dung or into pipes conducting water, divide into immense 
nimibers of fibres, and form what is called the fox-tail root ; but it is because they cannot continue to ve- 
getate, except by increasing their points of contact, with the small quantity of oxygen found in such 
mediums. Lastly, it was otwerved that plants, whose roots are suddenly overflowed with water remaining 
afterwards stagnant, suffer sooner than if the accident had happened by means of a continued current. It 
is because in the former case the oxygen contained in the water is soon exhausted, while in the latter it is 



Book I. PROCESS OF VEGETABLE NUTRITION. 171 



not exhausted at all. And hence also we may account for the phenomenon exhibited by plants vegetating 
in distilled water under a receiver filled with atmospheric air, which having no proper soil to supply the 
root with nourishment, effect the developement of their parts only at the expense of their own proper 
substance ; the interior of the stem, or a portion of the root, or the lower leaves decaying and giving up 
their extractive juices to the other parts. — Thus it appears that oxygene gas, or that constituent part of 
the atmospheric air which has been found to be indispensable to the life of animals is also indispensable to 
the life of vegetables. But although the presence and action of oxygen is absolutely necessary to the process 
of vegetation, plants do not thrive so well in an atmosphere of pure oxygen, as in an atmosphere of pure or 
common air. This was proved by an experiment of Saussure's, who having introduced some plants of 
pisum sativum, that were but just issuing from the seed, into a receiver containing pure oxygene gas, 
found that in the space of six days they had acquired only half the weight of such as were introduced at 
the same time into a receiver containing common air. From whence it follows that oxygen, though the 
principal agent in the process of vegetation is not yet the only agent necessary to the health and growth of 
the plant, and that the proportion of the constituent parts of the atmospheric air is well adapted for the 
purposes both of vegetable and animal life. 

758. Decomposition of water. Although the opinion was proved to be groundless, 
by wluch •w ater had been supposed to be convertible into all the different ingredients en- 
tering into the composition of the vegetable substance by means of the action of the vital 
energy of the plant ; yet when water was ultimately proved to be a chemical compound, 
it was by no means absurd to suppose that plants may possess the power of decomposing 
part, at least, of what they absorb by the root, and thus acquire the hydrogen as well as a 
portion of the oxygen which, by analysis, they are found to contain. This opinion was- 
accordingly pretty generally adopted, but was not yet proved by any direct experiment. 
Senebier pointed out several phenomena from which he thought it was to be inferred, but 
particularly that of the gennination of some seeds moistened merely with water, and so 
situated as to have no appai-ent contact with oxygen. The decomposition of water was 
inferred also by Ingenhouz, from the amelioration of an atmosphere of common air into 
which he had introduced some succulent plants vegetating in pure water. Saussure having 
gathered a number of plants of the same species, as nearly alike as possible in all circum- 
stances likely to be affected by the experiment, dried part of them to the temperature of 
the atmosphere, and ascertained their weight ; the rest he made to vegetate in pure water, 
and in an atmosphere of pure oxygen for a given period of time, at the end of which he 
dried them as before, and ascertained their Aveight also, which it was thus only necessary 
to compare with the weight of the former, in order to know whether the plants had in- 
creased in solid vegetable substance or not. But after many experiments on a variety of 
plants, the result always was, that plants when made to vegetate in pure water only, and 
in an atmosphere of pure oxygen, or of common air deprived of its carbonic acid, scarcely 
added any thing at all to their weight in a dried state ; or if they did, the quantity was too 
small to be appreciated. But from a subsequent experiment, in which carbonic acid gas 
was mixed with common air by the same experiment, the decomposition and fixation of 
water by the vegetating plant is legitimately inferred. It does not appear, however, that 
plants do in any case decompose water directly ; that is, by appropriating its hydi-ogen and 
at the same time disengaging its oxygen in tiie form of gas, which is extricated only by 
the decomposition of carbonic acid. 

759. Descent of the proper juice. When the sap has been duly elaborated in the leaf 
by means "of the several processes that have just been described, it assumes the appel- 
lation of the cambium, or proper juice of the plant. In tliis ultimate state of elaboration 
it is found chiefly in the bark, or rather between the bark and wood, and may very often 
be distinguished by a peculiar color, being sometimes white, as in the several species of 
spurge, and sometimes yellow, as in celandine. It is said to be the principal seat of the 
medical virtues of plants ; and was regarded by Malpighi as being to the plant what the 
blood is to the animal body — the immediate principle of nourishment, and grand support 
of life ; which opinions he endeavours to establish by the following analogies : if the blood 
escapes from the vessels of the animal body, it forms neither flesh nor bone, but tumors ; 
if the proper juices of the plant are extravasated, they form neither bark nor wood, but a 
lump of gum, resin, or inspissated juice. The disruption of the blood-vessels and conse- 
quent loss of blood, injures and often proves fatal to the animal. The extravasation of 
the proper juice injures and often proves fatal to vegetables, unless the evil is prevented 
by the skill and Uianagement of the gardener. Whatever m.ay be the value of these re- 
marks as tending to establish the analogy in question, it cannot be doubted that the cam- 
bium or proper juice constitutes at least the grand principle of vegetable organisation ; 
generating and developing in succession the several organs of the plant, or furnishing the 
vital principle with the immediate materials of assimilation. 

760. Tlie pi-oper juice is conveyed to the several parts of the plant hy an appropriate set of vessels. One 
of the earliest and most satisfactory experiments on this subject, at least as far as regards the return of 
the proper juice through the leaf and leaf-stalk, is that of Dr. Darwin, which was conducted as follows : 
a stalk of the euphorbia heliscopia, furnished with its leaves and seed-vessels, was placed in a decoction 
of madder-root, so as that the lower portion of the stem and two of the inferior leaves were immersed in 
it. After remaining so for several days the color of the decoction was distinctly discerned passing along 
the midrib of each leaf. On the upper side of the leaf many of the ramifications, going from the midrib 
towards the circumference, were observed to be tinged with red ; but on the under side there was ob- 
served a system of branching vessels, originated in the extremities of the leaf and carrying not a red but 
a pale milky fluid, which, after uniting in two sets, one on each side the midrib; daaccndcd along with it 



172 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



iDto the leaf-stalk. These were the vessels returning the elaborated sap. The vessels observable on the 
upper surface Darwin calls arteries, and those on the under surface he calls veins. To this may be added 
the more recent discoveries of Knight, who in his experiments, instituted with a view to ascertain the 
course of the sap, detected in the leaf-stalk, not only the vessels which he calls central tubes, through 
which the colored infusion ascended, together with their appendages, the spiral tubes ; but also another 
set of vessels surrounding the central tubes, which he distinguishes by the appellation of external tubes, 
and which appeared to be conveying in one direction or other a fluid that was not colored, but that 
proved, upon further investigation, to be the descending proper juice. In tracing them upwards they 
were foimd to extend to the summit of the leaf, and in tracing them downwards niey were found 
to extend to the base of the leaf-stalk, and to penetrate even into the inner bark. According 
to Knight, then, there are three sets of vessels in leaves, the central tubes, the spiral tubes, and the 
external tubes. But by what means is the proper juice conducted from the base of the leaf-stalk to the 
extremity of the root ? This was the chief object of the enquiry of the earlier phytologists who had not 
yet begun to trace its progress in the leaf and leaf-stalk ; but who were acquainted with facts indicating 
at least the descent of a fluid in the trunk. Du Hamel stript sixty trees of their bark in the course of the 
spring, laying them bare from the upper extremity of the sap and branches to the root ; the experiment 
proved indeed fatal to them, as they all died in the course of three or four years. But many of them 
had made new productions both of wood and bark from the buds downwards, extending in some cases to 
the length of a foot ; though very few of them had made any new productions from the root upwards. 
Hence it is that the proper juice not only descends from the extremity of the leaf to the extremity of the 
root, but generates also in its descent new and additional parts. The experiments of Knight on this sub- 
ject are, if possible, more convincing than even those of Du Hamel. From the trunks of a number of 
young crab-trees he detached a ring of bark of half an inch in breadth. The sap rose in them, and the 
portion of the trunk above the ring augmented as in other subjects that were not so treated, while the 
portion below the ring scarcely augmented at all. The upper lips of the wounds made considerable ad- 
vances downwards, while the lower lips made scarcely any advances upwards ; but if a bud was protruded 
under the ring, and the shoot arising from it allowed to remain, then the portion of the trunk below that 
bud began immediately to augment in size, while the portion between the bud and incision remained 
nearly as before. When two circular incisions were made in the tnmk so as to leave a ring of bark be- 
tween them with a leaf growing from it, the portion above the leaf died, while the portion below the leaf 
lived ; and when the upper part of a branch was stripped of its leaves the bark withered as far as it was 
stript. Whence it is evident that the sap which has been elaborated in the leaves and converted into 
proper juice, descends through the channel of the bark, or rather between the bark and alburnum to 
the extremity of the root, efiecting the developement of neiv and additional parts. But not only is 
the bark thus ascertained to be the channel of the descent of the proper juice, after entering the trunk ; 
the peculiar vessels through which it immediately passes, have been ascertained also. In the language 
of Knight they are merely a continuation of the external tubes already noticed, which after quitting the 
base of the foot-stalk he describes as not only penetrating the inner bark, but descending along with it 
and conducting the proper juice to the very extremity of the root. In the language of Mirbel they are 
the large or rather simple tubes so abundant in the bark of woody pkints, though not altogether confined 
to it J and so well adapted by the width of their diameter to afford a passage to the proper juice. 

761. Causes of descent. The proper juice then, or sap elaborated in the leaf, descends 
by the returning vessels of the leaf-stalk, and by the longitudinal vessels of the inner bark, 
the large tubes of Mirbel and external tubes of Knight, down to the extremity of the root. 

The descent of the jy>-opcr juice was regarded by the earlier phytologists as resulting from the 
agency of gravitation, owing perhaps more to the readiness with which the conjecture suggests itself 
than to the satisfaction which it gives. But the insulflciency of this cause was clearly pointed out 
by Du Hamel, who observed in his experiments with ligatures that the tumor was always formed 
on the side next to tiie leaves, even when the branch was bent down, whether by nature or art, so 
as to point to the earth, in which case the power propelling the proper juice is acting not only in 
opposition to that of gravitation, but with such force as to overcome it. This is an unanswer- 
able argument ; atid yet it seems to have been altogether overlooked, or at least undervalued in its 
importance by Knight, wh.o endeavours to account for the effect by ascribing it to the joint opei\ition 
of gravitation, capillary attraction, the waving motion of the tree, and the structure of the conducting 
vessels ; but the greatest of these causes is gravitation. Certain it is that gravitation has considerable 
influence in preventing the descent of the sap in young shoots of trees which have grown upright, which, 
when bent down after being fUUy grown, form larger buds, and often blossom instead'of leaf buds. This 
practice, with a view to the production of blossom-buds is frequently adopted by gardeners {Hurt. Trans. 
i. 237.) in training fruit-trees. — These causes are each perhaps of some efficacy; and yet even when 
taken altogether they are not adequate to the production of the effect. The greatest stress is laid upon 
gravitation ; but its agency is obviously over-rated, as is evident from the case of the pendent shoots of 
the weeping willow ; and if gravitation is so very efficacious in facilitating the descent of the proper 
juice, how comes its influence to be suspended in the case of the ascending sap ? The action of the silver 
grain will scarcely be sufficient to overcome it ; and if it should be said that the sap ascends through the 
tubes of the alburnum by means of the agency of the vital principle, why may not the same vital prin- 
ciple conduct also the proper juice through tlie returning vessels of the bark. In short if, with Saussure, 
we admit the existence of a contracting power in the former case sufficient to propel the sap from ring to 
ring, it will be absolutely necessary to admit it also in the latter. Thus we assign a cause adequate to 
the production of the effect, and avoid at the same time the transgression of that most fundamental prin- 
ciple of all sound philosophy which forbids us to multiply causes without necessity. 

Sect. IV. Process of Vegetable Developement. 

762. The production of the different parts and organs of plants is effected by the assimi- 
lation of the proper juice. Tlie next object of our enquiry, therefore, will be that of 
tracing out the order of the developement of the several parts, together with tlie peculiar 
mode of operation adopted by the vital principle. But this mode of operation is not 
exactly the same in herbaceous and annual plants, as in woody and perennial plants. In 
the former, the process of developement comprises as it were but one act of the vital prin- 
ciple, the parts being all unfolded in immediate succession and without any perceptible 
interruption till the plant is complete. In the latter, the process is carried on by gradual 
and definite stages easily cognisable to tlie senses, commencing with the approach of 
ispring, and terminating vdth the approach of winter ; during which, the functions of the 
vital principle seem to be altogether suspended, till it is aroused again into action by the 
warmth of the succeeding spring. The illustration of the latter, however, involves also 
that of the former j because the growth of the first year exemplifies at the sam^ time the 



Book I. 



TROCESS OF VEGETABLE DEVELOrEMENT. 



173 



growth of annuals, while the growth of succeeding years exemplifies whatever is peculiar 
to perennials. 

763. Elementary organs. If the Embryo, on its escape from the seed and conversion 
into a jDlant, is taken and minutely inspected, it will be found to consist of a root, 
plumelet, and incipient stem, which have been developed in consecutive order ; and if 
the plant is taken and dissected at this period of its growth it will be found to be com- 
posed merely of an epidermis enveloping a soft and pulpy substance, that forms the mass 
of the individual ; or it may be furnished also with a central and longitudinal fibre ; or 
with bundles of longitudinal fibres giving tenacity to the whole. These parts have been 
developed no doubt by means of the agency of tlie vital principle operating on the proper 
juice ; but what have been the several steps of operation ? 

Perhaps no satisfactory explicaticn of this phenomenon has yet been offered. It is likely, liov/ever, 
that the rudiments of all the different parts of the plant do already exist in the embryo in such specific 
order of arrangement as shall best fit them for future developement, by the intro-susception of new and 
additional particles. The pellicle constituting the vegetable epidermis has generally been regarded as a 
membrane essentially distinct from the parts which it covers, and as generated with a view to the dis- 
charge of some particular function. Some phytologists, however, have viewed it in a light altogether 
different, and have regarded it as being merely the effect of accident, and nothing more than a scurf 
formed on the exterior and pulpy surface of the parenchyma indurated by the action of the air. It is 
more probably, however, formed by the agency of the vital principle, even while the plant is yet in em. 
bryo, for the ven- purpose of protecting it from injury when it shall have been exposed to the air in the 
process of vegetation. There are several respects in which an analogy between the animal and vegetable 
epidermis, is sulnciently striking : they are both capable of great expansion in the growth of the sub- 
ject ; they are both easily regenerated when injured (excepting in the case of induration), and seemingly 
in the same manner ; they are both subject, in certain cases, to a constant decay and repair j and they 
both protect from injury the parts enclosed. 

764. Composite organs. "The elucidation of the developement of the composite organs 
involves the discussion of the two following topics : — the formation of the annual plant, 
and of the original shoot of the perennial ; and the formation of the subsequent layers 
that are annually added to the perennial. 

765. Annuals and annual shoots. If a perennial of a year's growth is taken up in 
the beginning of v. inter when the leaves, which are only temporary organs, have fallen, 
it will be found to consist of a root and trunk, surmounted by one or more buds. The 
root is the radicle expanded into the form peculiar to the species, but the trunk and buds 
have been generated in the process of vegetation. 

The root or trunk, if taken and cut into two by means of a transverse section, will be found to con- 
sist already of bark, wood, and pith. Here then is the termination of the growth of the annual, 
and of the first stage of the growth of the perennial : hew have their several parts or organs been 
formed. 

766. The pith seems only a modification of the original pulp, and the same hypothesis that accounts for 
the formation of the one will account also for the formation of the other; but the pith and pulp, or 
parenchjTna, are ultimately converted into organs essentially distinct from one another; though phyto- 
logists have been much puzzled to assign to each its respective functions. In the ages in which phytolo- 
gical opinions were formed without enquiry, one of the vulgar errors of the time seems to have been an 
opinion by which the function of the pith Vv'as supposed to be that of generating the stone of fruit, and, 
by which it was thought that a tree deprived of its pith would produce fruit without a stone. {Phys. des 
Arb. liv. i. chap. 3.) But this opinion is by much too absurd to merit a serious refutation. Another 
early opinion, exhibiting however indications of legitimate enquiry, is that by which the pith was re- 
garded as being analogous to the heart and brain of animals, as related by Malpighi ; who did not him- 
self adopt it, but believed the pith to be like the cellular tissue, the viscera in which the sap is elaborated 
for the nourishment of the plant, and for the protrusion of future buds. Magnol thought that it pro- 
duces the flower and fruit, but not the wood. Du Hamel regarded it as being merely an extension of 
the pulp or cellular tissue, without being destined to perform any important function in the process of 
vegetation. But Linnasus was of opinion that it produces even the v/ood ; regarding it not only as the 
source of vegetable nourishment, but as being also to the vegetable what the brain and spinal marrow 
are to animals, the source and seat of life. In these opinions there may be something of truth, but they 
have all the common fault of ascribing to the pith either too little or too much. M. Lindsay of Jamaica 
suggested a new opinion on the subject, regarding it as being the seat of the irritability of the leaves of 
the mimosa, and Sir J. E. Smith says he can see nothing to invalidate the arguments on which this 
opinion is founded. Plenk and Knight regard it as destined by nature to be a reservoir of moisture to 
supply the leaves vv'hen exhausted by excess of perspiration. Hence it appears that the peculiar function 
of the pith has not yet been altogether satisfactorily ascertained ; and the difficulty of ascertaining it has 
been thought to be increased from the circumstance of its seeming to be only of a temporary use in the 
process of vegetation, by its disappearing altogether in the aged trunk. But although it is thus only 
temporary as relative to the body of the trunk, yet it is by no means temporary as relative to the process 
of vegetation ; the central part of the aged trunk being now no longer in a vegetating state, and the pith 
being always present in one shape or other in the annual plant, or in the new additions that are an- 
nually made to perennials. The pith then is essential to vegetation in all its stages: and from the 
analogy of its structure to that of the pulp or parenchyma which is known to be an organ of elabor- 
ation, as in the leaf, the function of the pith is most probably that of giving some peculiar elaboration 
to the sap. 

767. The generation of the layer of wood in woody plants, or of the parts analogous to wood in the case of 
herbaceous plants, has been hitherto but little attended to. If we suppose the rudiments of all the 
different parts to exist already in the embryo, then we have only to account for their developement by 
means of the intro-susception and assimilation of sap and proper juice ; but if we suppose them to be 
generated in the course of vegetation, then the difficulty of the case is augmented : and at the best we 
can only state the result of operations that have been so long continued as to present an effect cognizable to 
the sense of sight, though the detail of the process is often so very minute as to escape even the nicest 
observation. All, then, that can be said on the subject, is merely that the tubes, however formed, do, by 
virtue of the agency of the vital principle operating on the proper juice, always make their appearance at 
last in a uniform and determinate manner, according to tne tribe or species to which the plant belongs, 
uniting and coalescing so as to form either a circular layer investing the pith, as in woody plants ; or a 
number of divergent layers intersecting the pith, as in some Herbaceous plants ; or bundles of longitudinal- 



174 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



and woody fibre interspersed throughout the pith, ag in others. In the same noanner we may account for 
the formation of the layer of bark, 

768. Perennials and their annual layers. If a perennial is taken at the end of the 
second year and dissected as in the example of the first year, it will be found to have in- 
creased in height by the addition of a pei-pendicular shoot consisting of bark, wood, and 
pith, as in the shoot of the former year ; and in diameter by the addition of a new layer 
of wood and of bark, generated between the wood and bark of the former year, and cover- 
ing the original cone of wood, like the paper that covers a sugar-loaf : tliis is the fact of 
tlie mode of augmentation about which phytologists have not differed, though tliey have 
differed widely witli regard to the origin of the additional layer by which the trunk is in- 
creased in diameter. Malpighi was of opinion that the new layer of vrood is formed from 
the liber of the former year. 

769. The new layer of wood Linnasus considered as formed from the pith, which is absurd, because the 
opinion goes to the inversion of the very order in which the layer is formed, the new layer being always 
exterior to the old one. But according to the most general opinion, the layer was thought to be formed 
from a substance oozing out of the wood or bark — first, a limpid fluid, then a viscid pulp, and then a thin 
layer attaching itself to the former ; the substance thus exuding from the wood or bark was generally 
regarded as being merely an extravasated mucilage, which was somehow or other converted into wood an^ 
bark : but Du Hamel regarded it as being already an organised substance, consisting of both cellular and 
tubular tissue, which he designated by the appellation of the catnbium, or proper juice. 

770. Knight has thrown the highest degree of elucidation on this, one of the most obscure and intricate 
processes of the vegetable economy, in having shown that the sap is elaborated, so to render it fit for the 
formation of new parts in the leaf only. If a leaf or branch of the vine is grafted even on the fruit-stalk 
or tendril, the graft will still succeed ; but if the upper part of a branch is stripped of its leaves the bark 
will wither as far as it is stripped ; and if a portion of bark furnished with a leaf is insulated by means of 
detaching a ring of bark above and below it, the wood of the insulated portion that is above the leaf is 
not augmented : this shows evidently that the leaf gives the elaboration necessary to the lonnation of new 
parts, and that without the agency of the leaf no new part is generated : — Such then is the mode of 
the augmentation of the plant in the second year of its growth. It extends in width by a new layer 
of wood and of bark insinuated between the wood and bark of the former year; and in height'by 
the addition of a perpendicular shoot, or of branches, generated as in the shoot of the first year. 
But if the plant is taken and dissected at the end of the third year, it will be fbund to have aug- 
mented in the same manner ; and so also at the end of the succeeding year as long as it shall continue 
to live ; so that the outermost layer of bark, and innermost layer of wood, must have been originally 
tangent in the first year of the plant's growth ; the second layer of bark, and second layer of wood, in the 
second year ; and so on in the order of succession till you come to the layer of the present year, which will 
in like manner divide into two portions, the outer forming one or more layers of barkj and the inner 
forming one or more layers of wood. And hence the origin of the concentric layers of wood and of bark 
of the trunk. But how are we to account for the formation of the divergent layers, which Du Hamel 
erroneously supposed to proceed from the pith ? The true solution of the difficulty has been furnished by 
Knight, who, in tracing the result of the operation of budding, observed that the wood formed under the 
bark of the inserted bud unites indeed confusedly with the stock, though still possessing the character and 
properties of the wood from which it was taken, and exhibiting divergent layers of new formation which 
originate e\ndently in the bark, and terminate at the line of union between the" graft and stock. 

771. But how is the formation of the wood that now occupies the place of the pith to be accounted for? 
It appears that the tubes of which the medullary is composed do, in the process of vegetation, deposit a 
caytibium, which forms an interior layer that is afterwards converted into wood for the purpose of filling 
up the medullary canaL 

772. Conversion of the alburnum into perfect wood. In consequence of the increase of the trunk by means 
of the regular and gradual addition of an annual layer, the layers whether of wood or of l)ark are ne- 
cessarily of different degrees of solidity in proportion to their age ; the inner layer of bark, and the outer 
layer of wood, being the softest ; and the other layers increasing in their degree of sohdity till you reach 
the centre on the one hand, and the circumference on the other, where they are respectively the hardest, 
forming perfect wood or highly indurated bark, which sloughs or splits into chinks, and falls ofi" in thick 
crusts, as in the plane-tree, fir, and birch. What length of time then is requisite to convert the alburnum 
into perfect wood, or the liber into indurated bark ; and by what means are they so converted ? There is no 
fixed and definite period of time that can be positively assigned as necessary to the complete induration 
of the wood or bark, though it seems to require a period of a good many years before any particular 
layer is converted from the state of alburnum to that of perfect wood ; and perhaps no layer has received 
its final degree of induration till such time as the tree has arrived at its full growth. The induration 
of the alburnum, and its consequent durability, are attributed by many to the loss of sap which the 
layer sustains after the period of its complete developement ; when the supply from the root diminishes, 
and the waste by evaporation or otherwise is still kept up, inducing a contraction or condensation of 
its elementary principles that augments the ' solidity of the layer, in the first degree, and begins the 
process that future years finish. But Eoiight believes the induration of the alhurnum as distinguishable 
in the winter to be owing rather to some substance deposited in it in the course of the preceding summer, 
which he regards as being the proper juice in a concrete or inspissated state, but which is carried off again 
by the sap as it ascends in the spring. 

773. Circulation of vegetable juices. Afler the discoverj- of tlie circulation of the 
blood of animals, phytologists, who were fond of tracing analogies between the animal 
and vegetable kingdoms, began to tliink that there perhaps existed in plants also a cumu- 
lation of fluids. The sap was supposed to be elaborated in the root, Tlie vessels in 
which it was propelled to the summit of the plant were denominated arteries ; and tlie 
vessels in which it is again returned to the root were denominated veins. Du Hamel, 
while he admits the ascent of the sap, and descent of the proper juice, each in peculiar 
and appropriate vessels, does not however admit the doctrine of a circulation ; which 
seems, about the middle of the last century, to have fallen into disrepute. For Hales, who . 
contended for an alternate ascent and descent of fluids in the day and night, and in the 
same vessels, or for a sort of vibratory motion as he also describes it, gave no countenance 
whatever to the doctrine of a circulation of juices. But the doctiine, as it appears, has 
been again revived, and has met with the support of some of the most distinguished of 



Book I. 



PROCESS OF VEGETABLE DEVELOPEMENT. 



175 



modem phytologists. Hedwig is said to have declared himself to be of opmion, that plants 
have a circulation of fluids similar to that of animals. Corti is said to have discovered a 
species of circulation in the stem of the chara, but confined, it is believed, witliin the 
limits of the internodia. Willdenow has also introduced the subject, and defended the 
doctrine (^Principles of Botany, p. 85.); but only by saying he believes a circulation to 
exist, and that it is impossible for the leafless tree to resist the cold if there be not a cir- 
culation of fluids. Knight has given his reasons somewhat in detail ; and though his 
doctrine of a circulation should be false, yet the account w^hich he gives of the progress 
and agency of the sap and proper juice, short of circulation, may be true. The sum of the 
account is as follow^s : — When the seed is deposited in the ground under proper condi- 
tions, moisture is absorbed and modified by the cotyledons, and conducted directly to the 
radicle, wliich is by consequence first developed. But the fluid vi^hich has been thus con- 
ducted to the radicle, mingling no doubt with the fluid which is now also absorbed from 
the soil, ascends afterwards to tlie plumelet through the medium of the tubes of the albur- 
num. The plumelet now expands and gives the due preparation to the ascending sap, re- 
turning it also in its elaborated state to the tubes of the bark, through which it again 
descends to the extremity of the root, forming in its progress, new bark and new albur- 
imm ; but mixing also, as he thinks, with the alburnum of the former year, where such 
alburnum exists, and so completing the circulation. 

774. Decomposite organs. To the above brief sketch of the agency of the vital prin- 
ciple in the generation or growth of the elementary and composite organs, there now re- 
mains to be added that of the progress and mode of the growth of the decomposite organs, 
or organs inunediately constituting the plant, as finishing the process of the vegetable de- 
velopement. This will include the phenomena of the ultimate developement of the root, 
stem, branch, bud, leaf, flower, and fruit. 

775. The root. From the foregoing observations and experiments, it appears that the roots of plants, 
or at least of woody plants, are augmented in their width by the addition of an annual layer, and in their 
length by the addition of an annual shoot, bursting from the terminating fibre. But how is the develope- 
ment of the shoot effected? Is it by the intro-susception of additional particles throughout the whole of 
its extent ; or only by additions deposited at the extremity ? In order to ascertain the fact, with regard 
to the elongation of the root, Du Hamel instituted the following experiment : — Having passed several 
threads of silver transversely through the root of a plant, and noted the distances, he then immersed the 
root in water. The upper threads retained always their relative and original situation, and the lowest 
thread which was placed within a few lines of the end was the only one that was carried down. Hence 
he concluded that the root is elongated merely by the extremity. Knight, who from a similar experiment 
obtained the same result, deduced from it also the same conclusion. We may regard it then as certain, 
that the mode of the elongation of the root is such as is here represented, though in the progress of its 
developement, it may affect a variety of directions. The original direction of the root is generally perpen- 
dicular, in which it descends to a considerable depth if not interrupted by some obstacle. In taking up 
some young oak-trees that had been planted in a poor soil, Du Hamel found that the root had descended 
almost four feet, while the height of the trunk was not more than six inches. If the root meets with an 
obstacle it then takes a horizontal direction, not by the bending of the original shoot, but by the sending 
out of lateral shoots. The same effect also follows if the extremity of the root is cut off, but not always 
so, for it is a common thing in nursery-gardens, to cut off the tap-roots of drills of seedling oaks without 
removing them, by a sharp spade, and these generally push out new tap-roots, though not so strong as the 
former. When a root ceases of its own accord to elongate, it sends out also lateral fibres which become 
branches, and are always the more vigorous the nearer they are to the trunk, but the lateral branches of 
horizontal roots are the less vigorous the nearer they are to the end next the trunk. In the former case, 
the increased luxuriance is perhaps owing to the easy access of oxygen in the upper divisions ; but in the 
latter case, the increased luxuriance of the more distant divisions is not so easily accounted for, if it is not 
to be attributed to the more ample supply of nutriment which the fibres meet with as they recede from 
the trunk, particularly if you suppose a number of them lying horizontally and diverging like the radii of 
a circle. But the direction of roots is so liable to be affected by accidental causes, that there is often but 
little uniformity even in roots of the same species. If plants were to be sown in a soil of the same density 
throughout, perhaps there might be at least as much uniformity in the figure and direction of their roots, 
as of their branches ; but this will seldom happen. For if the root is injured by the attacks of insects, or 
interrupted by stones, or earth of too dense a quality, it then sends out lateral branches, as in the above 
cases ; sometimes extending also in length by following the direction of the obstacle, and sometimes ceas- 
ing to elongate, and forming a knot at the extremity. But where the soil has been loosened by digging or 
otherwise, the root generally extends itself to an unusual length, and where it is both loosened and en- 
riched, it divides into a multiplicity of fibres. This is also the case with the roots of plants vegetating in 
pots, near a river, but especially in water. \Vhere roots have some considerable obstacle to overcome they 
will often acquire a strength proportioned to the difiSculty : sometimes they will penetrate through the 
hardest soil to get at a soil more nutritive, and sometimes they will insinuate their fibres into the crevices 
even of walls and rocks which they will burst or overturn. This of course requires much time, and does 
much injury to the plant. Roots consequently thrive best in a soil that is neither too loose nor too 
dense ; but as the nourishment which the root absorbs is chiefly taken up by the extremity, so the soil is 
often more exhausted at some distance from the trunk than immediately around it. Du Hamel regards 
the small fibres of the root which absorb the moisture of the soil as being analogous to the lacteals of the 
animal system, which absorb the food digested by the stomach. But the root is rather to be regarded as 
the mouth of the plant, selecting what is useful to nourishment and rejecting what is yet in a crude and 
indigestible state ; the larger portions of it serving also to fix the plant in the soil and to convey to the 
trunk the nourishment absorbed by the smaller fibres, which ascending by the tubes of the alburnum, is 
thus conveyed to the leaves, the digestive organs of plants. Du Hamel thinks that the roots of plants are 
furnished with pre-organised germs by which they are enabled to send out lateral branches when cut, 
though the existence of such germs is not proved ; and affirms that the extremities of the fibres of the 
root die annually like the leaves of the trunk and branches, and are again annually renewed ; which last 
peculiarity Profesfsor Willdenow affirms also to be the fact, but without adducing any evidence by which 
it appears to be satisfactorily substantiated. On the contrary, Knight, who has also made some observ- 
ations on this subject, says, it does not appear that the terminating fibres of the roots of woody plants die 
annually, though those of bulbous roots are found to do so. But the fibres of creeping plants, as the com- 
mon crowfoot and strawberry, certainly die annually, as do those of the vine. 



176 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



776. The stem. The fitem, like the root, or at least the stem of woody plants, is also augmented in 
width by the addition of an annual layer, and in length by the addition of an annual shoot bursting from 
the terminating bud. Is the developement of the shoot issuing from the stem effected in the same man- 
ner also ? The developement of the shoot from the stem is not effected in tlie same manner as that of the 
root — by additions to the extremity only, but by the intro-susception of additional particles throughout 
its whole extent, at least in its soft and succulent state : the longitudinal extension diminishing in pro- 
portion as the shoot acquires solidity, and ceasing entirely when the wood is perfectly formed ; though 
often continuing at the summit after it has ceased at the base. The extension of the shoot is inversely as 
its induration, rapid while it remains herbaceous, but slow in proportion as it is converted into wood. 
Hence moisture and shade are the most favorable to its elongation, because they prevent or retard its in- 
duration ; and hence the small cone of wood which is formed during the first year of the plant's growth 
increases no more after the approach of winter, neither in height nor thickness. Such is the mode of the 
growth and developement of the trunk of perennial and woodv plants, to which there exists a striking 
exception in the growth of the trunk of palms. Their internal structure has been already taken notice of 
£is presenting no concentric or divergent layers, and no medullary canal, but merely an assemblage of large 
and woody tibres, interspersed without order in a pulp or parenchyma, softer at the centre and gradually 
becoming harder as it approaches the circumference. When the seed of the palm-tree germinates, it pro- 
trudes a circular row of leaves, or of fronds, which 6ro%vns the radicle, and is succeeded in the following 
year by a similar row issuing from the centre or bosom of the former leaves, which ultimately die down 
to the base. This process is continued for four or live years successively without exhibiting as yet any 
appearance of a stem, the remaining bases of the leaves or frond forming by their union merely a sort of 
knob or bulb. At last, however, they constitute by their union an incipient stem, as thick the first year 
as it ever is after ; which in the following year is augmented in height as before, and so on in succession 
as long as the plant lives, the leaves always issuing from the summit and crownuig the stem, which is a 
regular column, but decaying at the end of the year, and leaving circular marks at the points of insertion, 
which furrow the surface of the plant, and indicate the years of its growth. 

777. The branches, in their mode of growth and developement, exhibit nearly the same appearances as 
the trunk from which they issue. They originate in a bud, and form a-lso a cone that consists of pith, 
wood, and bark; or rather they form a double cone. For the insertion of the branch into the trunk 
resembles also a cone whose base is at the circumference, and whose apex is at the centre, at least if it is 
formed in the first year of the plant's growth, or on the shoot of the present year ; but faUing short of the 
centre in proportion to the lateness of its fonnation, and number of intervening layers. Branches in their 
developement assume almost all varieties of position from the reflected to the horizontal and upright ; but 
the lower branches of trees are said to be generally parallel to the surface of the soil on which they grow, 
even though that surface should be the sloping side of a hiU — owing, as it has been thought, to the evo- 
lution of a greater number of buds on the side that forms the obtuse angle with the soil, in consequence 
of its being exposed to the action of a greater mass of air. 

778. The bud, which in the beginning of spring is so very conspicuous on the trees of this country as to 
be obvious to the most careless observer, is by no means common to all plants, nor to plants of all climates ; 
shrubs in general, and annuals universally, are destitute of buds as well as all plants whatever growing 
within the tropics, the leaf being in them immediately protruded from the bark. It is only in the woody 
plants of cold climates, therefore, that we are to loolc for buds ; and in them no new part is added, whether 
proper to the leaf or flower, without the intervention of a bud. For whjcn the young shoot is produced, it 
is at tlie same time furnished with new buds, which are again extended into new shoots in the following 
spring ; and thus the bud is to be regarded as forming, not only the cradle but also the winter quarters of 
the shoot, for which its coat of tiled and g'lutinous scales seems admirably well adapted. It is found chiefly 
in the extremity, or on the surface of the young shoot or branch, and but rarely on the stem, except it be 
at the collar where it produces suckers. It is also generated for the most part in the axil of the leaves, 
as may be seen by inspecting the annual shoot of almost any tree at random, though not universally so ; 
for to this rule there exists a curious and singular exception in the bud of the platanus, which is gene- 
rated in the very centre of the base of the foot-stalk, and is not discoverable tiU after the fall of the leaf. 
But how are the buds formed which are thus developed ? Malpighi thought they were formed from the 
pith or cellular tissue, which the latter regarded as viscera destined for the elaboration of the sap and pro- 
trusion of future buds. Du Hamel thinks the exterior scales of the bud originate in the interior part of 
the bark, and Knight relates an experiment from which he thinks it follows that the buds are formed 
from the descending proper juice. But whatever may be the actual origin of the bud, it is evident that 
its developement does not take place except through the medium of the proper juice, which has been ela- 
borated in the leaves of preceding buds, and originally in those of the plumelet ; as the young bud does 
not make its appearance till the leaves of the preceding buds have expanded, and will not ultimately 
succeed if deprived of them too soon. 

Bulbs are so very similar to buds both in their origin and developement as to require no specific inves- 
tigation. 

779. The leaf. When the leaves burst from the expanding bud, and even long before that period, as 
may be seen by the dissection of the bud in the winter, they are complete in all their parts. Hence it is 
obvious that the leaf, like the young shoot, effects its final developement by means of the intro-susception 
of new particles throughout the whole of its dimensions : and yet this law of developement is not common 
to all leaves whatever, for the leaves of liliaceous plants extend chiefly at the point of their junction with 
the bulb. The effect perhaps of their peculiarity of structure, in being formed of parallel tubes which ex- 
tend throughout their whole length, without those transverse and branching fibres that constitute what 
are called the nerves of the leaves of woody plants. 

780. The flower end fruit. When the 'flower bursts from the expanding bud, and even long before 
that period, it is already complete in all its parts, as may be seen also by the dissection of the bud in winter. 
LinucBus represents the pistil as originating in the pith.'the stamens in the v.-ood, and the corolla and caly.K 
in the inner and outer bark respectively : but this account of their origin, though extremely plausible at 
first sight, will not bear tlie test of minute examination, being contradicted by the anatomy of the partd 
themselves ; particularly in the case of compound flowers. Kiught in investigatin,i^ the organisation (;f 
the apple and pear, endeavoured to ascertain the origin of the several parts by tracing the organs of the 
fruit-stalk to their termination. In the fruit-stalk he thought he could discover the pith, the central 
tubes, spiral tubes, and tubes of the bark, together with its epidermis : and in tracing them to their ter- 
mination, he thought the pith seemed to end in the pistils ; the central vessels in the stamens, after 
diverging round the core and approaching again in the eye of the fruit ; and the bark and epidermis in 
the two external skins. Hence he infers that the flower is a prolongation of the pith, wood, and bark. 
A question of some considerable importance has arisen out of 'this subject: does the flower or fruit elabo- 
rate sap for its own developement, or is it supplied with nourishment from the leaf? By placing small 
branches of the apple, pear, and vine, with blossoms not expanded in a decoction of logwood, Kniglit 
found that the central vessels were colored by the decoction. By means of a similar experiment on the 
same subjects after the friut was formed, the coloring matter was traced llirough the mass of the fruit to 
the base of the stamina. And hence it appears that the flower and fruit do possess the power of elaborat- 
ing sap for their own developement. Knight infers from the foregoing data, that the blossom is nourished 
from the alburnum, by means of the mingling of the proper juice, which the alburnum may be supposed 
to contain with the sap in its ascent. 



Boos I. ANOMALIES OF VEGETABLE DE VELOPEIMENT. 



177 



Sect. V. Anomalies of Vegetable Developement. 

781, A deviatioyi from the genei-al laivs of developement is occasioned by tlie intervention 
of some accidental cause ; or of some cause operating permanently in certain subjects. 
Hence the anomaly may regard the developement either of an individual or a species, 
and may occur either in the root, stem, branch, leaf, bud, flower, or fruit, according to 
the circumstances in wliich it is placed ; or it may affect the habit, duration, or physical 
virtues of the plant. 

782. The root. According to the general laws of vegetable 
developement, plants of the same species are furnished ^^-ith the 
same species of root — not producing at one time a woody or 
fibrous root, and at another time a bulbous root. And yet it is 
found that there are cases in which changes of this kind do occur. 
If part of the root of a tree planted by a pond or river, protrudes 
beyond the bank so as to be partially immersed, it divides at tlie 
extremity into innumerable ramifications, or sends out innumer- 
able fibres from the surface, which become again subdivided into 
fibres still more minute, and give to the whole an appearance 
something resembling that of the tail of a fox ; wliich has ac- 
cordingly been denonoinated by Du Hamel the fox-tail-root. 
(fg- 57.) 

783. 77ie root of the Phleum prafense, when growing in a moist soil, which 
it naturally affects, is uniformly fibrous ; but when growing' in a dry soil, 
where it is also often to be found, it is furnished with a bulbous root. The 
same is the case with the alopecurus geniculatus ; which, when growing 
in its native marshes protrudes a fibrous root, though, when growing in a 
very dry situation, as on the top of a dry wall, it is found to be furnished with an ovat-e and juicy bulb. 
This anomaly also seems to be merely the result of a provision of nature by which the plant is endowed 
with the capacity of collecting a supply of moisture suited to existing circumstances, and hence of adapt- 
ing itself to the soil in which it grows. 

784. The roots of Utricutaria minor, which consist of a number of slender and hair-like filaments, exhibit 
the singular anomaly of being furnished with a multitude of small and membraneous bladders, each con- 
taining a transparent and watery fluid, and a small bubble of air, by means of which the plant is kept 
floating in the water. 

785. "The descending root, an anomaly which attends some perennials, is at first spindle-shaped and per- 
pendicular, sending out some lateral fibres ; but dying at the lower extremity in the course of the succeed- 
ing winter, and protruding new fibres from the remaining portion, and even from the lower portion of the 
stem, in the course of the following spring, which by descending into the soil, draw down the plant with 
them, so that part of what was formerly stem is now converted into root. This process is repeated every 
year, and by consequence a portion of the stem is made to descend every year into the earth. The 
anomaly may be exemplified in the roots of Valeriana dioica, tanacetum vulgare, and oxalis acetosella; 
and will also' account for the bitten and truncated appearance of scabiosa succisa, or devil's-bit. 

7Sfi. The beet-root, if dissected when about a year old, presents the singular anornaly of beijlg already 
furnished with from five to eight distinct and concentric circles of longitudinal tubes or sap-vessels, im'- 
beddcd at regular intervals in its pulp; whereas other biennial roots form only an individual circle each 
year, and are, consequently, at no time furnished with more than two. 

787. yiigratory roots depend on a principle similar to the foregoing. If the stem of a descending root hap- 
pens to be creeping or procumbent instead of being erect, then the lateral shoots from above are carried for- 
ward in the direction of that procumbency , so that in the course of a few years the plant has actually changed 
it-s place by so much as the stem has been converted into a root. This is well exemplified in the genus 
Jris, which as it enlarges in circumference, dies in the centre and presents a ring of plants instead of a 
solitary one. In the case of some aquatics, which float about on the surface of the water as they happen 
to be driven by the winds, the whole plant may be said to be migratory, as in the case of the genus L,emna, 
and some marine plants. 

788. Hoots changed to branches and branches to roots. If the stem of a young plum or cherry tree, biit 
particularly of a willow, is taken in the autumn and bent so as that one' half of the top may be laid in the 
earth, one half of the root being at the same time taken carefully out, but sheltered at first from the cold 
and then graduallv exposed to it, and the remaining part of the top and root subjected to the same process 
in the following year, the branches of the top will become roots, and the ramifications of the root will 
become branches, protruding leaves, flowers, and fruit in due season. 

789. If the stem of a tree planted by a pond or river is so bent in its growth as to come 
near to the surface of the water and to be occasionally immersed in it, it will sometimes 
send out from the under surface a multitude of shoots that will descend into the water, 
and develope themselves in the manner of the fox-tail-root. Sometimes it happens that a 
stem, instead of assuming the cylindrical fonn common to the species, assumes a com- 
pressed and flattened form similar to the herbage of the cactus as in the fir-tribe, ash, &e. 

790. The anomaty of the flattened stem {fig. 58. a) is accounted for by Du Ham.el by supposing that an 
unnatural graft must have taken jilace in the leaf-bud ; and so united shoots that would otherwise 
have been distinct. Sometimes the stem is disfigured by accidental tumors or bunches projecting from 
the surface, and forming ultimately what are called knots in the wood. They are very common in 
the oak and elm, and are produced perhaps by means of some obstruction in the channel of the sap's 
motion, by which the vessels become convoluted and swell up into a bunch. 

791. But bunches are also to be met with on the stem of herbaceous plants, as on that of the carduus 
pratensis ; of which you will often find a portion near the top swollen out into an egg-shaped or egg-oblong 
bunch, extending from an incli to two inches in length, and about an inch across. If this bunch is cpt 
open in the month of August, it will be found to contain several large and white maggots. It has conse- 
quently been occasioned bv the puncture of the parent insect depositing its eggs. It does not seem to 
affect the general health of a vigorous plant, though it might prove seriously injurious to a weak one. 

792. Bundled stem. Sometimes two or more contiguous stems, extending in the process of their 
growth till they meet and press against one another, become incorporated at length into one, and form a 
sort of bundle. This is what may be termed a natural graft, in opposition to an artificial graft, of whiclj 

N 




178 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Paut II. 




it is the model and proto- 
type. The natural graft is 
always atTected by means 
of the union of the liber of 
the respective stems com- 
posing it ; so that the per- 
fection of the art of grafting 
consists in applying the liber 
of the graft and stock toge- 
ther in such a manner as 
shall most fkcilitate their 
incorporation. 

793. If the branch of 
a tree is situated as in 
the foregoing case of 
the stem, so as to be 
partially or periodically 
immersed in water, it 
will send out also the 
same sort of brush-like 
shoots. 

794. Bunches or knots, 
exhibiting a plexus of young 
shoots (fig. 59 . a) issuing 
from nearly the same point, 
crossing in all directions, 

and finally incorporating together by means of a sort of natural graft, frequently disfigure it. These bunches 
are frequently to be met with on the branches of the birch-tree, and are known among the peasantry of Scot- 
land by the name of witches' knots. They are occasioned, like the bunches of the stem, by some obstruc- 
tion in the channel of the sap or proper juice. A peculiar sort of knot or bunch is also often formed on 
the branches of the dog-rose. The nucleus, which is generally from an inch to an inch and a half in 
diameter is covered with a long and winged shag, first of a green and then of a purple color, presenting 
the appearance of a small bunch of moss. (fig. 58. b) It has been occasioned like that of the stem of tiie 
thistle, by the puncture of an insect depositing its eggs in the tender shoot ; for if it is cut open about tlie 
month of August, its contains maggots. These anomalies remind us always of that singular disease in tlie 
human species, the Plica polonica. 

795. The bud. The regular developement of the bud is also often prevented by means 
of the puncture of insects, and converted into a large globular tumor. 

796. The gall tumor is very often effected by a species of Cynips that lances its piercer into the heart of the 
bud while yet tender, and penetrates with its saw into the very pith ; injecting at the same time a drop of 
the corroding liquor contained in its bag, and then laying its egg. The bud being thus wounded, and the 
juices corrupted by the injected poison, the circulation is not only impeded, but a fermentation is induced 
which burns the contiguous parts and changes their color. The extravasated juice flows round the egg, and 
is there accumulated and converted into a sort of spongy lump which vegetates and augments till it forms 
what is called a gall. The gall thus formed affords both shelter and nourishment to the young maggot, 
which, after being converted into a fly, pierces its enclosure and launches into the open air. The most re- 
markable of such galls are those produced on the oak-tree, and known in this country by the vulgar 
name of oak-apples, {fig. 59. b) The bud of the willow, particularly salix helix, is apt always to be 
punctured by insects and converted into a gall. But the conversion is not always complete; and in this 
case the shoot remains dwarfish, and the leaves, which are now protruded from nearly the same point, 
assume something of the figure of a rose. Hence it has obtained the common name of the rose-willow. 
The galls of the salvia pomifera formed in the above manner arc said to be of a very pleasant flavor, and 
are esteemed a great delicacy in eastern countries. 




797. The leaver, like the buds, are also frequently chosen for the nidus of in- 
sects, and disfigured with galls or excrescences. But the most remarkable gall 
produced on the leaf, and indeed the most remarkable and important of all galls, 
is that which is so extremely useful in the arts of dyeing and making ink, the nut-gall 
of the shops. 



Book I. ANOMALIES OF VEGETABLE DEVELOPEMENT. 179 



798. The nut-gall is generated on the leaf of a species of oak that grows plentifully in the Levant, and 
is so well known in commerce as to require no particular description. It is occasioned by the puncture of 
the Cynips quercifoUi, which deposits its egg in the substance of the leaf, by making a small perforation on 
the under surface. Galls and tumors are to be found on the leaves of many plants ; and indeed almost all 
leaves are liable to deformities, giving them a blistei-ed, wrinkled, or curled appearance ; and often pro- 
ducing disease. 

799. The excess or deficiency of leaves protruded in a group sometimes constitutes the anomaly, as ii) 
the case of the trefoils. 

800. Sometimes in the natural figure of the leaf itself, as in asparagus officinalis, where they are bristle- 
shaped; salsola kali, awl-shaped; and allium cepa, in which they are tubular, tapering to a point. 
But one of the most remarkable anomalies of figure is that which occurs in the leaves of the genus Sarra- 
cenia (fig. 43. b), of which the lower portion is tubular, ascending, and approaching to funnel-shaped, or 
rather pitcher-shaped reversed, with a flattened and concave limb attached by the one side to the orifice of 
the tube, and constituting the upper portion of the leaf Linnseus, who was acquainted, with this singularity 
of structure, accounted for it by supposing that it was an institution of nature, meant for the i^irpose of 
furnishing the plant with a supply of water, which it could thus catch and retain in the leaf. But as some 
species of the genus do not readily admit water notwithstanding their capacity to retain it, this hypothesis 
is regarded by Sir J. E. Smith as being extremely doubtful, who accordingly offers a difTerent solution, 
founded upon the following facts. An insect of the Sphex or Ichneumon kind, had been observed by one 
of the gardeners of the botanic garden at Liverpool, to drag several large flies to a Ie;if of sarracenia, 
adunca, and to force them into the tubular part of it. On examination, the leaf was found to be aboutiialf 
filled with water, in which the flies were now struggling ; the other leaves were also examined, and were 
found crammed with dead or drowning flies. The leaves of sarracenia purpurea are said to exhibit also 
the same phenomena, and seem peculiarly well adapted to entrap and confine flies, by having the margin 
beset with inverted hairs rendering the escape of such insects as may have accidentally fallen into the 
watery tube, or are intentionally forced into it, impracticable ; so that the putrid exhalation from the dead 
insects contained in the leaf often offends the nostrils, even in passing near the plant. Hence Sir J. E. 
Smith infers, that the growth of the plant is perhaps benefited by means of the air evolved by the dead 
flies, which the water has been intended to tempt, and the loaves to entrap and retain." This ingenious 
conjecture is no doubt sufficiently plausible as far as the plant may be aft'ected ; but cannot be regarded as 
quite satisfactory till such time as it shall have been shown that the health of the plant is injured when 
insects are prevented from approaching it. 

801. The celebrated nepenthes distillatoria {fig. 43. c) exhibits also an anomaly similar to that of sarracenia, 
holding an ounce or two of a fluid which appears to be secreted from the leaf, and to be intended as a 
lure to insects, which gain admission either by the spontaneous opening of the lid, or by forcibly raising ip 
themselves. The consequence is that they f^iU into the fluid and are drowned, no insect being capable 
of living in it except a certain small squilla or shrimp, with a protuberant back, which, according to llum- 
phius, sometimes crawls into it and can live there. To this phenomenon Sir J. E. Smith applies the same 
explication as above, which is of course liable to the same objection. 

802. The figure of the leaf, however singular, is generally the same throughout the same individual, ex- 
cept in the case of accidental deformity, and yet there are exceptions even to this rule. For sometimes 
the lower leaves of a plant are entire while the upper leaves are divided, as occurs in a variety of mountain- 
ous plants, such as burnet, saxifrage, anise, coriander ; and sometimes the lower leaves are divided while 
the upper leaves are entire, as in the case of a variety of aquatics, particularly ranunculus aquaticus, in 
which the lower leaves are capillary and immersed, and the upper leaves flat and circular, floatiiig on the 
surface of the water. But sometimes the dissimilitude of the leaves is still more remarkable. The Chi- 
nese mulberry, a Botany Bay tree, has not two leaves alike in form on the whole plant. And lastly, there 
are some plants, as in the case of the fungi, that are wholly destitute of leaves, and hence called 
aphyllous ; while there are others, as in the case of the fuci, thafseem to be wholly leaf. 

803. The principal anomaly of the flower, is that by which one of its parts is unduly 
augmented, to the exclusion or diminution of some of the rest. The flower is then said 
to be luxuriant, and comprises the three following varieties : the multiplicate, the full, 
and the proliferous flower. 

804. The multiplicate flower is sometimes, though rarely, occasioned by an unusual multiplication of the 
divisions of the calyx, as in dianthus caryophyllus, and some of the Alpine grasses. But the anomaly 
most generally consists in the undue multiplication of the divisions of the corolla, by the conversion of part 
of the stamens into petals which is occasionally to be met with both in monopetalous and polypetalous 

. flowers. It occurs but seldom, however, in flowers growing in their natural state and habit, though now 
and then a double flower is met with even in such circumstances. 

805. The full flower is generally described to be that in which the divisions of the corolla are so multi- 
plied as to exclude the stamens and pistils wholly by means of their conversion into petals ; which conver- 
sion is most readily effected in polypetalous flowers, such as the tulip, poppy, pink, and ranunculus ; mo- 
nopetalous flowers seldom being found full. This complete metamorphose is always either the effect of 
cultivation, or of some concurrence of natural circumstances analogous to it ; and is indeed one of the 
principal objects of the art of the florist ; the beauty of the flower, according to general estimation, being 
thus much augmented. In the full flower the stamens are almost always converted into petals, whence we 
should perhaps hifer their identity of origin. But the pistil is often converted into a leaf, as may be seen 
by inspecting the flower of the double-blossomed cherry, which generally protrudes from the centre a leaf 
in miniature. But a flower may become full also by the multi- 
plication of the parts of the nectary, as is sometimes the case 
in the genus Aquilegia, which produces full flowers in three 
different ways — by the multiplication of the petals to the exclu- 
sion of the nectaries, by the multiplication of the nectaries to 
the exclusion of the petals, and by the multiplication of the nec- 
taries while the proper petals remain. There are also some pe- 
culiarities in the manner in which compound flowers become 
full. Radiated floAvers become full sometimes by the multipli- 
cation of the floscules of the ray to the exclusion of the floscules 
of the disk, as in helianthus, anthemis, and centaurea ; and 
sometimes by the multiplication of the floscules of the disk to 
the exclusion of those of the ray, as in matricaria and bellis. 

806. The proliferous flower (fi^. 60.) is that out of which 
another flower or another shoot is produced. It is seldom 
found but in flowers already full ; from the centre of which, 
that is, from the ovary or pistil, it sometimes happens that a 
new flower and foot-stalk is produced, if the flower is simple, as 
in the ranunculus, anemone, and pink ; or several flowers and 
foot-stalks, issuing from the common calyx, if the flower is com- 
pound, as in the daisy, hawkwecd, and marigold ; or a new 
umbel issuing from the centre of the original umbel, if the 

N 2 




180 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



flower is umbellate, as in cornus. Sometimes the proliferous issue of the full flower is not itself a flower, 
but a shoot furnished witli leaves, as has been sometimes, thooigh rarely, observed in the case of the 
anemone and rose. Such are the several varieties of luxuriant flowers, constituting anomalies of excess ; 
but it sometimes happens that there is also in the flower an anomaly of defect in the absence of one of Its 
parts. Examples of this sort are occasionally to be met with in the flowers of cherianthus cheri, cam- 
panula pentagonia, and tussilago anandria, in which the corolla is altogether wanting, though 
proper to the species; and in this case the flower is said to be mutilated. Sometimes the anomaly con- 
sists in the situation of the flower, which is generally protruded from the extremity or sides of the branches. 
But the flower of the ruscus is protruded from the surface of the leaf ; or it may consist in the relative 
situation of the several parts of the flower. In simple flowers the pistil is invariably central with regard to 
the stamens ; but in compound flowers the pistils are often situated in the circumference and the stamens in 
the centre. This seems to be the case also with some monoecious plants having their flowers on the same 
peduncle, as in the examples of the carex and arum, in which the stamens are more central than the pistils. 
Sometimes the anomaly consists in the color of the corolla, which will often deviate even in the same species. 
The general color of the common cowslip {Priinula veris) is a bright yellow ; but an individual is occasionally 
to be met with, though very rarely, in which the limb or expansion of the corolla is purple with a line of 
yellow around the border. Sometimes the anomaly consists in the time of flowering. The season proper 
for the flowering of the apple and pear tree is the month of May ; but trees of that sort have been known to 
protrude both buds and blossoms even in the month of November. Some plants, however, blow only in the 
winter, as in the case of the laurustinus and arbutus unedo; while others blow only in the night, and 
refuse to expand their petals to the light of the sun. Such is the case of the cactus grandiflorus, that 
produces one of the most magnificent of flowers j but blows only in the night; and is hence known also 
by the appellation of the night-blowing 
cereus. Some plants, such as the ferns, 
algae, and fungi, are altogether destitute 
of conspicuous flowers ; and are hence 
called Cryptogamous ; but in this respect 
the fig is perhaps the most singular. The 
flowers which in other cases uniformly 
precede the fruit, are in this case concealed 
within what is generally denominated the 
fruit ; as may be proved by cutting open a 
green fig {/ig.61. a) by means of a longitudi- 
nal section passing through its axis. Great 
numbers of flowers [b) are tiien disco- 
vered lining a sort of cavity in the axis 
of the fruit ; and hence what is called the 
fruit or fig, in common language, is rather 
the receptacle of the flower than any thing 
else. Most plants have their flowers, fur- 
nished both with stamens and pistils, and 
are hence hermaphrodites : but there are 
also many genera that have the stamens 
in one flower and tlie pistils in anotiier, 
both on the same individual ; these are 
denominated Monoecious plants, and are 
exemphfied in the oak anci hazel. Other 
genera have the flowers with stamens on 
one plant, and the flowers with pistils on 
another; these are denominated £)/«'c/- 
otis, and are exemplified in the hop and willow. Others have flowers of all the previous kinds on one and 
the same plant; these are denominated Polygamous, and are exemplified in the genus Atriplex. 

807. The fruit. The anomalies of the fruit may affect eitlier its number, figure, color, 
or appendages. The common hazel-nut produces in general but one kernel in one shell ; 
but in the course of opening up a considerable number, you will now and then meet witli 
one containing two or three kernels in a shell. 

62 

This is perhaps best accounted for by supposing, with Du Hamel, that 
it is the result of an unnatural graft effected in the bud ; though some 
think that the shell does always contain the rudiments of two or more 
kernels, although it rarely happens that more than one is developed. 
But if two apples or pears are developed in an incorporated state, whicli 
is a case that now and then occurs, it is no doubt best accounted for by 
the graft of Du Hamel. Sometimes the anomaly consists in the figure 
of the fruit, which is deformed by tumors or excrescences, in conse- 
quence of the bite of insects, or injuries of weather producing warts, 
moles, or specks. Sometimes it consists in the color, producing green 
melons and white cucumbers. Sometimes it consists in an append^e of 
leaves. C/ig-. 62.) 

808. Habit. Some plants, which, when placed in a rich 
soil, grow to a great height and affect the habit of a tree, 
are, when placed in a poor soil, converted into dwarfish 
shrubs. 

This may be exemplified in the case of the box-tree ; and so also in the case of herbaceous plants ; as in 
that of myosotis, which in dry situations is but short and dwarfish, while in moist situations it grows to 
such a size as to seem to be altogether a different plant. The habit of the plant is sometimes totally altered 
by means of cultivation ; the pyrus sativa, when growing in a wild and uncultivated state, is furnished 
with strong thorns ; but when transferretl to a rich and cultivated soil the thorns disappear. This 
phenomenon, which was observed by Linnjeus, was regarded as being equivalent to the taming of animals. 
But this explication IS, like some others of the same great botanist, much more plausible than profound, 
in place of which Professor Willdenow substitutes the following: The thorns protruded in the uncul- 
tivated state of the plant, are buds rendered abortive from want of nourishment, which when supplied 
with a sufficiency ot nourishment, are converted into leaves and branches. 

809. Physical virtues. When plants are removed from their native soil and taken 
into a state of culture, it alters not only their habit but their physical virtues. Thus the 
sour grape is rendered sweet, the bitter pear pleasant, the dry apricot pulpy, the prickly 





Book I. 



SEXUALITY OF VEGETABLES. 



181 



lettuce smooth, and the acrid celery wholesome. Pot-herbs are also rendered more tender 
by means of cultivation, and better fitted for the use of man ; and so also are all our fine 
varieties of fruit. 

810. Duration. Plants are either annuals, biennials, or perennials, and the species is 
uniformly of the same class. But it has been found that some plants vv'hich are annuals 
in a cold climate, such as that of Sweden, will become perennials in a hot climate, such 
as that of the West Indies ; this anomaly has been exemplified in tropasolum, beet-root, 
and malva arborica : and, on the contrary, some plants, which are perennials in hot climates, 
are reduced to annuals when transplanted into a cold climate ; tliis has been exemplified 
in mirabilis and ricinus 

Sect. VI. Of the Sexuality of Vegetables. 

811. The doctrine that plants are of di^erent sexes, and which constitutes the found- 
ation of the Linnsean system, though but lately established upon the basis of logical in- 
duction, is by no means a novel doctrine. It appears to have been entertained even 
among the original Greeks, from the antiquity of their mode of cultivating figs and palms. 
Aristotle and Theophrastus maintain the doctrine of the sexuality of vegetables ; and 
Pliny, Dioscorides, and Galen, adopted the division by which plants were then distributed 
into male and female ; but chiefly upon the erroneous principle of habit or aspect, and 
without any reference to a distinction absolutely sexual. Pliny seems to admit the dis- 
tinction of sex in all plants whatever, and quotes the case of the palm-tree as exhibiting 
the most striking example. 

812. Discoveries of the moderns. Ceesalpinus, in the sixteenth century, denominates trees which pro- 
duce fruit only, females ; and trees of the same kind which are barren, males ; adding, that the fruit is 
found to be more abundant and of a better quality where the males grow in the neighbourhood of the 
females, which is, he says, occasioned by certain exhalations from the males dispersing themselves"al] 
over the females, and by an operation not to be explained, disposing them to produce more perfect seed. 
About the middle of the seventeenth century, the doctrine of the sexes of the plants began to assume a 
more lixed and determinate character. Malpighi describes the stamens, anthers, and pollen : the merit of 
suggesting the use of the latter seems to be between Sir T. Millington, Savilian Professor at Oxford, and 
the celebrated Dr. Grew. The opinion of Grew was adopted also by Ray. The first example of experi- 
ment recorded on this subject is that of Camerarius, professor of botany at Tubingen, who having 
adopted the opinions of Grew and Ray, though without perhaps regarding their arguments as the best that 
could be adduced, conceived that the subject might be still further illustrated by means of depriving the 
plant of its male flowers altogether, or of removing the individuals of a different sex to a distance from 
one another. Accordingly having selected some plants of mercurialis, morus, zea mays, and ricinus, 
and stripped them of their staminiferous flowers, or removed the male plant to a great distance from the 
female, he found that the fruit did not now ripen ; the inference from which was, that the generation of 
plants is analogous to that of animals, and that the stamens of the flowers of the former correspond to the 
sexual organs of the males of the latter. The great and illustrious Linneeus, reviewing with his usual 
sagacity the evidence on which the doctrine rested, and perceiving that it was supported by a multiplicity 
of the most incontrovertible facts, resolved to devote his labors peculiarly to the investigation of the 
subject, and to prosecute his enquiries throughout the whole extent of the vegetiible kingdom ; which great 
and arduous enteqorise he not only undertook but accomplished with a success equal to the unexampled 
industry with which he pursued it. So that by collecting into one body all the evidence of former dis- 
covery or experiment, and by adding much that was original of his own, he found himself at length 
authorised to draw the important conclusion — that no seed is perfected without the previous agency of 
the pollen ; that the doctrine of the sexes of plants is consequently founded in fact. 

81.3. Proofs from the economy of the aquatics. Many 
plants of this class that vegetate for the most part wholly 
immersed in water, and often at a considerable depth, 
gradually begin to elevate their stems as the season of 
flov/ering advances, when they at last rear their heads 
above the surface of the water, and present their opening 
blossoms to the sun, till the petals have begun to fade, 
when they again gradually sink down to the bottom to 
ripen and to sow their seeds. This very peculiar economy 
maybe exemplified in the case of ruppia maritima, and 
several species of potamogeton, common in our ponds 
and ditches ; from which we may fairly infer, that the 
flowers rise thus to the surface merely to give the pollen 
an opportunity of reaching the stigma uninjured. But 
the most remarkable example of this kind is that of the 
valisneria spiralis {fig. &3.), a plant that grows in the 
ditches of Italy. The plant is of the class Dicecia, pro- 
ducing its fertile flowers on the extremity of a long and 
slender stalk twisted spirally like a corkscrew, which 
imcoiling of its own accord, about the time of the open- 
ing of the blossom, elevates the flowers to the surface of 
the water, and leaves them to expand in the open air. 
The barren flowers are produced in great numbers upon 
short upright stalks issuing from a different root, from 
which they detach themselves about the time of the 
expansion of the female blossom, mounting up like little 
air bubbles, and suddenly expanding when they reach the surface, where they float about in great 
numbers among the female blossoms, and often cling to them in clusters so as to cover them entirely ; 
thus brii iging the stamens and pistils into immediate contact, and giving the anthers an opportunity of 
discharging their pollen immediately over the stigma. When this operation has been performed, the now 
uncoiled stalk of the female plant begins again to resume its original and spiral form, and gradually sinks 
down, as it gradually rose, to ripen its fruit at the bottom of the water. We have gathered (in 1819) 
these stalks, in the canals near Padua, upwards of ten feet long. 




182 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING* 



Part II. 



Sect. VII. Jnrpregnation of the Seed. 
814. The stamens and pistils are the male and female organs of vegetable generation, and 
the polle7i is the substance by which the impregnation of the seed is effected ; but how is the 
pollen conveyed to the ovaiy ? And what is the amount of its action ? 

815. Access of the pollen. When the stamens and pistils are situated near each other, the elastic spring 
with which the anther flies open will generally be sufficient to disperse the pollen, so as that part of it 
must infallibly reach the stigma in such flowers as do not perfect their stamens and pistils at the same 
time. The pollen is very generally conveyed from the anther to the stigma through the instrumentality of 
bees, and other insects peculiar to a species. The object of the insect is the discovery of honey, in quest of 
which, whilst it roves from flower to flower, and rummages the recesses of the corolla, it unintentionally 
covers its body with pollen, which it conveys to the next flower it visits, and brushes off as it acquired it by 
rummaging for honey ; so that part of it is almost unavoidably deposited on the stigma, and impregnation 
thus eftected. Nor is this altogether so much a work of random as it at first appears. For it has been 
observed that even insects, which do not upon the whole confine themselves to one species of flower, will 

et very often remain during the whole day upon the species.they happen first to alight on in the morning ; 

ence the impregnation of the females of Dioecious plants where no male is near. Hence also a sort of 
natural crossing of the breed of plants which might probably otherwise degenerate. 

816. Fecundation of the ovary. Admitting that the pollen is conducted to the ovary 
through the channel of the tubes of the style, how" after all is the ovary fecundated ; or 
the seed rendered fertile ? On this subject naturalists have been much divided ; and ac- 
cording to their several opinions have been classed under the respective appellations of 
ovarists, animalculists, and epigenesists. 

817. Ovarist. According to the opinion of the Ovarist, the embryo pre-exists in the ovarj-, and is 
fecundated by the agency of the pollen as transmitted to it through the style. 

818. Animate ulist. But the theory of the ovarists is not without its difficulties ; for as the embryo is 
never found to make its appearance till after fecundation, it has been thought that it must necessarily pre- 
exist in the pollen of the anther ; from which it is conveyed to the ovary through the medium of the style, 
and afterwards matured. This theory was founded upon that of Leuwenhoeck, with regard to animal 
generation; which supposes the pre-existence of animalcula in the seminal principle of the male; the 
animalcula being conveyed in coiiit to the ovary of the female, where alone they are capable of 
develoj>cment. 

819. Eptgenesisf. The difficulties inseparable from both theories, together with the phenomenon of 
hybrid productions, have given rise also to a third ; this is the Theory of the Epigenesists, %vho maintain that 
the embryo pre-exists nether in the ovary nor pollen, but is generated by the union of the fecundating 
principles of the male and female organs ; the former being the fluid issuing from the pollen when it 
explodes ; and the latter, the fluid that exudes from the surface of the stigma when mature. But if 
the seed is generated from the union of two fecundating principles which form an intermediate oflTspring, 
then female plants of the class Dioecia ought occasionally to produce seeds whose oflftpring shall be Her- 
maphrodite, or at least Monoecious, which was never yet known to happen. 

820. Hybrids. Although the arguments of the epigenesists are by no means satis- 
factory, yet it cannot be denied, that hybrid productions partake of the properties both of 
the male and female from which they spring. This was long ago proved to be the fact 
by Bradley, and more recently confirmed by the experiments of Knight ; as well as hap- 
pily converted to the advantage of the cultivator. 

821. Vegetable crossing. Observing that fanners who rear cattle improve the progeny by means oin-ossvrg 
the breed. Knight argued from analogy, that the same improvement might be introduced into vegetables. 
His principal object was that of procuring new and improved varieties of the apple and pear to supply the 
place of such as had become diseased and unproductive. But as the necessan,' slowness of all experiments 
of the kind, with regard to the fruit in question, did not keep pace with the ardor of his desire to obtain in. 
formation on the subject, he was induced to institute sonie tentative experiments upon the common pea, — ■ 
a plant well suited to his purpose, both from its quickness of growth, and from the many varieties in form, 
size, and color, which it alForded. In 1787, a degenerate sort of pea was growing in his garden, which had 
not recovered its former vigor even when removed to a better soil. Being thus a good subject of experiment, 
the male organs of a dozen of its immature blossoms were destroyed, and the female organs left entire. 
When the blossoms had attained their mature state, the pollen of a very large and luxuriant grey pea was 
introduced into the one half of them, but not into the other. The pods of both grew equally ; but the seeds 
of the half that were unimpregnated withered away, without having augmented beyond the size to which 
they had attained before the blossoms expanded. The seeds of the other half were augmented and 
matured as in the ordinary process of impregnation ; and exhibited no perceptible difference from those 
of other plants of the same variety; perhaps because the external covering of the seed was furnished 
entirely by the female. But when they were made to vegetate in the succeeding spring, the eflfect of 
the experiment was obvious. The plants rose with great luxuriance, indicating in their stem, leaves, and 
fruit, the influence of this artificial impregnation ; the seeds produced were of a dark grey. By im- 
pregnating the flowers of this variety with the pollen of others, the color was again changed, and new 
varieties obtained, superior in every respect to the original on which the experiment was first made, and 
attaining in some cases, to a height of more than twelve feet. {Phil. Trans. 1789.) Knight thinks his 
experiments on this subject afford examples of superfoetation, a phenomenon, the existence of which has 
been admitted amongst animals, but of which the proof amongst Vegetables is not yet quite satisfactory. 
Of one species of superfoetation he has certainly produced examples ; that is, when, by impregnating a 
white pea-blossom with the pollen both of a white and grey pea, white and grey seeds were obtained. 
But of the other species of superfoetation, in which one seed is supposed to be the joint issue of two males, 
the example is not quite satisfactory. Such a production is perhaps possible, and further exjieriments 
mAy probably ascertain the fact ; but it seems to be a matter of mere curiosity, and not apparently co)i- 
iiected with any views of utility. 

822. The practicability of improving the species, is rendered strikingly obvious by these experiments ; 
and the ameliorating effect is the same whether by the male or female ; as was ascertained by im]ireg- 
nating the largest and most luxuriant plants With the pollen of the most diminutive and dwarfish, or 
the contrary. By such means any number of varieties may be obtained, according to the will of the 
experimenter, amongst which some will no doubt be suited to all soils and situations. Knight's ex- 
periments of this kind were extended also to wheat; but not with equal success. For though some 
very good varieties were obtained, yet they were found not to be i)ermanent. But tlie success of his 
experiments on the apple-tree were equal to his hopes. This was indeed his i)rn)ci|ial object, ai;d no 
raeans of obtaining a successful issue were left untried. The plants whicli were obtained in this cass 



Book I, 



IMPREGNATION OF VEGETABLES. 



183 



were found to possess the good qualities of both of the varieties employed, laniting the greatest health 
and luxuriance with the finest and best-flavoured fruit. 

823. Improved varieties of every fruit and esculent plant may be obtained by means of artificial impreg- 
nation, or crossing, as they were obtained in the cases already stated. Whence Knight thinks, that this 
promiscuous impregnation of species has been intended by nature to take place, and that it does in fact 
often take place, for the purpose of correcting such accidental varieties as arise from seed, and of con- 
fining them witliin narrower limits. All which is thought to be countenanced from the consideration of 
the variety of methods which nature employs to disperse the pollen, either by the elastic spring of the 
anthers, the aid of the winds, or the instrumentality of insects. But, although he admits the existence 
of vegetable hybrids, that is, of varieties obtained from the intermixture of difxerent species of the same 
genus, yet he does not admit the existence of vegetable mules, that is, of varieties obtained from the 
intermixture of the species of different genera ; in attempting to obtain which he could never succeed, 
in spite of all his efforts. Hence he suspects that where such varieties have been supposed to take place, 
the former must have been mistaken for the latter. It may be said, indeed, that if the case exists in the 
animal kingdom, why not in the vegetable kingdom ? to which it is, perhaps, difhcult to give a satisfactory 
reply. But from the narrow limits within which this intercourse is in all cases circumscribed, it scarcely 
seems to have been the intention of nature that it should succeed even among animals. Salisbury is of a 
different opinion, and considers (Hort. Trans, i. 36i.) that new species may be created both by bees and 
the agency of man ; and the recent experiments of Herbert, Sweet, and others seem to confirm this 
opinion. Sweet's experience leads him to conclude that the plants of all orders strictly natural may be 
reciprocally impregnated with success, and he has already, in the nursery-gardens of Messrs. Colvillc, 
produced many new geranise and rhoderaceas. 

82-1. A singular or anomalous effect of crossing, or extraneous impregnation, is the change sometimes un 
dergone by the seed or fruit which is produced by the blossom impregnated. These effects are not uniform 
results, but they are of frequent occurrence, and'have attracted notice from a very early period. John Tur- 
ner observes {Hort. Trans, v. 63.) that Theophrastus and Plinj {Tkeophrast. Hist Plant. 1. ii. c. 4?. ; PliniiHist. 
Nat. 1. xvii. c. 25.) seem to allude to it, and that the notion was entertained by Bradley, who, in his 
New Ijnprovements in Planting and Gardening, after giving directions for fertilising the female flowers 
of the hazel with the pollen of the male, says, " By this knowledge v/ e may alter the property and taste 
of any fruit, by impregnating the one with the farina of another of the same class, as, for example, a 
codlin with a pearmain, which will occasion the codlin so impregnated to last a longer time than usual, 
and be of a sharper taste ; or if the winter fruit should be fecundated with the dust of the summer kinds, 
they will decay before their usual time ; and it is from this accidental coupling of the farina of one kind with 
the'other, that in an orchard, where there is variety of apples, even the fruit gathered from the same tree 
diflTers in its flavor and times of ripening ; and, moreover, the seeds of those apples so generated, being 
changed by that means from their natural qualities, will produce different kinds of fruit, if th.ey are sov/n." 
Turner, after quoting several instances, and, among others, one from the Philosophical Transactions 
" concerning the effect which the farina of the blossoms of different sorts of apples had on the fruit of 
a neighbouring tree," states upv/ards of six cases of hybridised apples, that had come within liis own 
observation, and concludes with the remark, that if there does exist in fruits such a liability to change, 
it will at once be evident to the intelligent cultivator how much care is requisite in growing melon.-, 
cucumbers, &c. to secure their true characters, even without reference to saving seed for a future crop. 
In the same volume of the Horticidtural Transactions (p. 2.34,), an account is given of different-colored 
peas being produced in the same pod by crossing the parent blossom. AU these facts seem to contradict 
the generally received opinion, that crossing only affects the next generation ; here it appears to affect 
the embryo offspring ; and a gardener who had no keeping apples in his orchard, might communicate 
that quality in part to his summer fruit by borrowing the use of a neighbour's blossoms from a late variety. 
It is probable, however, that such counter-impregnations do not take place readily ; otherwise the produce 
of a common orchard would be an ever-varying round of monstrosities. 

Sect. VIII. Changes consequent upon Lnfiregnation, 
825. The peciiUar changes consequent upon impregnation, whether in the flowers or 
fruit, may be considered as external and internal. , 

826. External changes. At the period of the impregnation of the ovary the flower has attained to its 
ultimate state of perfection, and displayed its utmost beauty of coloring and richness of perfume. But as 
it is now no longer wanted, so it is no longer provided for in the economy of vegetation. Its period of 
decline has commenced ; as is indicated, first by the decay of the stamens, then of the petals, and then of 
the calyx, which wither and shrink up, and finally detach themselves from the fruit altogether, except in 
some particular cases in which one or other of them becomes permanent and falls only with the fruit. The 
stigma exhibits also similar symptoms of decay, and the style itself often perishes. The parts contiguous 
to the flower, such as the bractes and floral leaves, are sometimes also affected ; and finally the whole 
plant, at least in the case of annuals, begins to exhibit indications of decay. But while the flower withers 
and falls, the ovary is advancing to perfection, swelUng and augmenting in size, and receiving now all the 
nutriment by which the decayed parts were formerly supported. Its color begins to assume a deeper and 
richer tinge; its figure is also often altered, and new parts are even occasionally added — wings crests, 
prickles, hooks, bloom, down. The common receptacle of the fruit undergoes also similar changes, becom- 
ing sometimes large and succulent, as in the fig and strawberry ; and sometimes juiceless and indurated, as 
in compound flowers. 

827. Internal changes. If the ovary is cut open as soon as it is first discoverable in the flower, it pre- 
sents to the eye merely a pulpy and homogeneous mass. But if it is allowed to remain till immediately 
before the period of its impregnation, it will now be found to be divisible into several distinct parts, exhi- 
biting an apparatus of cells, valves, and membranes, constituting the pericarp, and sometimes the external 
coat^ of the seed. In this case the umbilical cord is also to be distinguished ; but the embryo is not yet 
visible. These changes, therefore, are to be attributed merely to the operation of the ordinary laws of 
vegetable developement, and are not at all dependent upon impregnation. But impregnation has no 
sooner taken place than its influence begins to be visible ; the umbilical cord, which was formerly sliort 
and distended, is now generally converted into a long and slender thread. Sometimes the position of the 
seed is altered. Before impregnation the seeds of caryophyllus aromaticus, and netrosideros gummifera, 
are horizontal ; after impregnation they become vertical Before impregnation the magnolia seeds are 
erect; after impregnation they become inverted and pendulous. The figure of the seed is often also 
altered in passing from its young to its mature state; changing from smooth to angular, from tapering to 
oval, from oval to round, and from round to kidney-shaped. But all seeds are not brought to maturity, of 
which the rudiments may exist in the ovary. Lagoecia and hasselquistia, produce uniformly the rudi- 
ments of two seeds, of which they mature but one. But the principal changes resulting from impregnation 
are operated in the seed itself, which, though previously a homogeneous and gelatinous mass, is now con- 
verted into an organised body, or embryo. Such are the phenomena, according to the description of 
Gaertner, accompanying or following the impregnation of all flowers producing seeds; exceptions occur 
where the fecundation is spurious or incomplete ; where the ovary swells, but exhibits no traces of perfect 
seed within, as often happens in the vine and tamus ; or when barren and fertile seeds are intermingled 
together in the same ovary. This proceeds from some defect either in the quantity or quality of the pollen ; 

N 4 



184 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IL 



but rather m the quality, as it is not always plants having the most pollen that produce the most seeds. The 
two stamens of the orchidee fecundate 8000 seeds, and the five stamens of tobacco fecundate 900 : while the 
50 stamens of barringtonia, the 230 of thea, and the 80 of the caryophilli, fecundate only two or three 



Sect. IX. The Propagation of the Species. 
828. jIs the life of the vegetable, like that of the animal, is limited to a definite period^ 
and as a continued supply of vegetables is always wanted for the support of animals^ 
what we call art, or nature operating by means of the animal man, has taken care to 
institute such means as shall secure the multiplying and perpetuating of the species in 
all possible cases. 

829. Equivocal Generation. It was long a vulgar error, countenanced even by the philosophy of the times 
that vegetables do often spring up from the accidental mixture of putrid water and earth, or other putrid 
substances, in the manner of what was called the equivocal generation of animals ; or at the very least, 
that the earth contains the principle of vegetable life in itself, which in order to deveiope, it is only neces- 
sary to expose to the action of the air. Tlie former alternative of the error has been long ago refuted ; 
the latter has lost its hold, having been also refuted by Malpighi, who proved that the earth produces 
no plant without the intervention of a seed, or of some other species of vegetable germ deposited in it by 
nature or by art. 

830. Propagation by seeds. When the seed has reached maturity in the due and 
regular course of the developement of its several parts, it detaches itself sooner or later 
from the parent plant, either singly or along with its pericarp, and drops into the soil, 
where it again germinates and takes root, and springs up into a new individual. Sudi 
is the grand means instituted by nature for tlie replenishing and perpetuating of the 
vegetable kingdom. 

831. Dispersion of seed. If seeds were to fall into the soil merely by dropping down from the plant, 
then the great mass of them, instead of germinating and springing up into distinct plants, would grow up 
only to putrefy and decay ; to prevent which consequence 

nature has adopted a variety of the most efficacious contri- 
vances, all tending to the dispersion of the seed. The first 
means to be mentioned, is that of tbe elasticity of the peri- 
carp of many fruits, by which it opens when ripe, with a sort 
of sudden spring, ejecting the seed with violence, and throw- 
ing it some considerable distance from the plant. This may be 
exemplified in a variety of cases ; the seeds'of oats when ripe 
are projected from the calyx with such violence, that in a fine 
and dry day you may even hear them thrown out with a 
slight and sudden snap in passing through a field that is ripe. 
The pericarp of the Dorsiferous Ferns {fig. 64 a) is furnished 
-with a sort of peculiar elastic ring (6), intended, as it would 
appear, for the very purpose of projecting the seeds. The 
capsules of the cucumber, geranium geum, and fraxinella, 
discharge their seeds also when ripe with an elastic jerk. But 
the pericarp of impatiens, which consists of one cell with 
five valves, exhibits perhaps one of the best examples of this 
mode of dispersion. If it is accidentally touched when ripe 
it will immediately burst open, while the valves, coiling 
themselves up in a spiral form, and springing from the stem, 
discharge the contained seeds and scatter ihem all around. 
The bursting of the pericarp of some species of pines is also 
worthy of notice. The pericarp, which is a cone, remains 
on the tree till the summer succeeding that on which it was 
produced, the scales being still closed. But when the hot 
weather has commenced and continued for some time, so as 
to dry the cone thoroughly, the scales open of their own 
accord with a sudden jerk, ejecting the contained seeds : and if a number of them happen to burst together, 
■Which is often the case, the noise is such as to be heard at some considerable distance. The twisted awn of 
avena fatua {fig.65.'), or wild oat, as well as that of geranium cicutarium, and some others, seems to have 
been intended particularly for the purpose of aiding the further dispersion of the seed, after being discharged 
from the plani or pericarp. This spiral awn or spring, 
which is beset with a multitude of fine and minute hairs, 
possesses the property of contracting by means of drought, 
and of expanding by means of moisture. Hence it remains 
of necessity in a perpetual state of contraction or dilatation, 
dependent upon change of weather ; from which, as well as 
from the additional aid of the fine hairs, which act as so many 
fulcra, and cling to whatever object they meet, the seed to 
which it is attached is kept in continual motion till it either 
germinates or is destroyed. The awn of barley, which is 
beset with a multitude of little teeth all pointing to its 
upper extremity, presents also similar phenomena. For 
when the seed with its awn falls from the ear and lies flat 
upon the ground, it is necessarily extended in its dimensions 
by the moisture of the night, and contracted by the drought 
of the day. But as the teeth prevent it from receding in 
the direction of the point, it is consequently made to ad- 
vance in the direction of the base of the seed, which is thus 
often carried to the distance of many feet from the stalk on 
which it grew. If any one is yet sceptical with regard to 
the travelling capacity of the awn, let him only introduce 
an awn of barley with the seed uppermost between his coat 
and shirtsleeve at the wrist, when he walks out in the morn- 
ing, and by the time he returns to breakfast, if he has 
waUced to any great distance, he will find it up at his arm- 
pit. This journey has been effected by means of the con- 
tinued motion of the arm, and consequently of the teeth of 
the awn acting as feet to carry it forward. 

832. Where distance of dispersion is required, nature is 





Book I. 



PROPAGATION OF VEGETABLES. 



185 



also furnished with a resource. One of the most common modes by which seeds are conveyed to a dis- 
tance from their place of growth is that of the instrumentality of animals. Many seeds are thus carried to 
a distance from their place of growth merely by their attaching th'emselves to the bodies of such animals 
as may happen accidentally to come in contact with the plant in their search after food ; the hooks or hairs 
■with which one part or other of the fructification is often furnished serving as the medium of attachment, 
-Jid the seed being thus carried about with the animal till it is again detached by some accidental cause, and 
*t' last committed to the soil. This may be exemplified in the case of the bidens and myosotis, in which 
\he hooks or prickles are attached to the seed itself ; or in the case of galium aparine and others, in which 
they are attached to the pericarp ; or in the case of the thistle and the burdock, in which they are attached 
to the general calyx. Many seeds are dispersed by animals in consequence of their pericarps being used 
as food. This is often the case with the seeds of the drupe, as cherries, sloes, and haws, which birds 
often carry away till they meet with some convenient place for devouring the pulpy pericarp, and 
then drop the stone into the soil. And so also fruit is dispersed that has been hoarded tor the winter, 
though even with the view of feeding on the seed itself, as in the case of nuts hoarded up by squirrels, 
which are often dispossessed by some other animal, that not caring for the hoard scatters and disperses it. 
Sometimes the hoard is deposited in the ground itself, in which case part of it is generally, found to take 
root and spring up into plants. Though it has been observed that the ground-squirrel often deprives the 
kernel of its germ before it deposits the fruit it collects. Crows have been also observed to lay up acorns 
and other seeds in the holes of fence-posts, which being either forgot or accidentally thrust out, fall ulti- 
mately into the earth and germinate. But sometimes the seed is even taken into the stomach of the 
animal, and afterwards deposited in the soil, having passed through it unhurt. This is often the case with 
the seed of many species of berry, such as the mistletoe, which the thrush swallows and afterwards deposits 
upon the boughs of such trees as it may happen to alight upon. The seeds of the loranthus americanus, 
another parasitical plant, are said to be deposited in like manner on the branches of the coccoloba grandi- 
flora, and other lofty trees ; as also the seeds of Phytolacca decandra, the berries of which are eaten by 
the robin, thrush, and wild pigeon. And so also the seeds of currants or roans are sometimes deposited, 
after having been swallowed by blackbirds or other birds, as may be seen by observing a currant-bush or 
young roan-tree growing out of the cleft of another tree, where tlie seed has been left, and where there 
may happen to have been a little dust collected by way of soil ; or where a natural graft may have been 
effected by the insinuation of the radicle into some chink or cleft. It seems indeed surprising that any 
seeds should be able to resist the heat and digestive action of the stomach of animals ; but it is undoubtedly 
the fact. Some seeds seem even to require it. The seeds of magnolia glauca, which have been brought 
to this country, are said to have generally refused to vegetate till after undergoing this process, and it is 
known that some seeds will bear a still greater degree of heat without any injury. Spallanzani mentions 
some seeds that germinated after having been boiled in water : and Uu Hamel gives an account of some 
others that germinated even after having been exposed to a degree of heat measuring 235° of Fahrenheit. 
In addition to the instrumentality of brute animals in the dispersion of the seed might be added also that 
of man, who, for purposes of utility or of ornament, not only transfers to his native soil seeds indigenous to 
the most distant regions, but sows and cultivates them with care. 

833. The agency of winds is one of the most effective modes of dispersion instituted by nature. Some seeds 
are fitted for this mode of dispersion from their extreme minuteness, such as those of the mosses, lichens, 
and fungi, which float invisibly on the air, and vegetate v;herever they happen to meet with a suitable 
soil. Others are fitted for it by means of an attached wing, as in the case of the fir-tree and liriodendron 
tulipifera, so that the seed, in falling from the cone or capsule, is immediately caught by the wind, 
and carried to a distance. Others are peculiarly fitted for it by means of their being furnished with 
an aigrette or down, as in the case of the dandelion, goat's-beard, and thistle, as well as most plants of the 
class Syngenesia s the down of which is so large and light in proportion to the seed it supports, that it is 
wafted on the most gentle breeze, and often seen floating through the atmosphere in great abundance at 
the time the seed is ripe. Some have a tail, as in clematis vita alba. Others are fitted for this mode of 
dispersion by means cf the structure of the pericarp, which is also wafted along with them, as in the case of 
staphylea trifolia, the inflated capsule of which seems as if obviously intended thus to aid tlie dispersion 
of the contained seed by its exposing to the wind a large and distended surface with but little weight. And 
so also in the case of the maple, elm, and ash, the capsules of which are furnished, like some seeds, with 
a membranous wing, which when they separate from the plant the wind immediately lays hold of and 
drives before it. 

834. The instrumentality of streams, rivers, and currents of the ocean, is a further means adopted by 
nature for the dispersion of the seeds of vegetables. The mountain-stream or torrent washes down to 
the valley the seeds which may accidentally fall into it, or which it may happen to sweep from its banks when 
it suddenly overflows them. The broad and majestic river, winding along the extensive plain, and tra- 
versing the continents of the world, conveys to the distance of many hundreds of miles the seeds that may 
have vegetated at its source. Thus the southern shores of the Baltic are visited by seeds which grew in 
the interior of Gerjnany, and the western shores of the Atlantic by seeds that have been generated in the 
interior of America. But fruits indigenous to America and the West Indies have sometimes been f ound 
to be swept along by the currents of the ocean to the western shores of Europe. The fruit of mimosa scan- 
dens, dolichos pruriens, guilandina bonduc, and anacardium occidentale, or cashew-nut, have been thus 
known to be driven across the Atlantic to a distance of upwards of 2000 miles j and although the fruits 
now adduced as examples are not such as could vegetate on the coast on which they were thrown, owing to 
soil or climate, yet it is to be believed that fruits may have been often thus transported to climates or coun- 
tries favorable to their vegetation. 

835. ProjMgation by gems. Though plants are for the most part propagated by means 
of seeds, yet many of them are propagated also by means of gems ; that is, bulbs and buds. 

The caulinary bulb is often the means of the propagation of the species : it generally appears in the 
axil of the leaves, as in dentaria bulbifera and lilium bulbiferum ; or between the spokes of their um- 
bels, as in allium canadense ; in the midst of the spike of flowers, as in polygonum viviparum and poa 
alpina. As plants of this last kind are mostly alpine, it has been thought to be an institution or re- 
source of nature to secure the propagation of the species in situations where the seed may fail to ripen. 

836. The bud, though it does not spontaneously detach itself from the plant and form a new individual, 
will yet sometimes strike root and develope its parts if carefully separated by art and planted in the 
earth : but this is to be understood of the leaf-bud only, for the flower-bud, according to Mirbel, if so 
treated, always perishes. 

837. Propagation by the leaves. The species may sometimes be propagated even by means of th > 
leaves ; as in the aloe, sea-onion, and some species of arum, which if carefully deposited in the soil will 
grow up into new plants, by virtue, no doubt, of some latent gem contained in them. The fungi and 
lichens, according to Gasrtner, are all gemmiferous, having no sexual organs, and no pollen impregnat- 
ing a germ. In the genus Lycoperdon, the gelatinous substance that pervades the cellular tissue is con- 
verted into a proliferous powder ; in clavaria, the fluid contained in the cavities of the plant is converted 
into a proliferous powder also ; and in the agarics, hypnum, and boletus, vesicles containing sobolifer- 
ous granules are found within the lamina, pores, or tubes. Hedwig, on the contrary, ascribes to the 
fungi a sexual apparatus, and maintains that the pollen is lodged in the volva. But here it is to be 
recollected, as in the cases of the scutells of the lichens, that all fungi arc not furnished with a volva. 



186 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



and consequently not ftirnished with pollen. The confervas and uIveb, together with the genera JBlasia 
and Riccia, are also, according to Gaertner, propagated only by gems; while marchantia, anthoceros. 
jungermannia, and lycoperdon, are said to be propagated both by gems and seeds. 

838. Runners are young shoots issuing from the collar or summit of tlie root, and 
creeping along the surface of the soil ; but producing a new root and leaves at the 
extremity, and forming a new individual, by the decay of the connecting link, as in the 
strawberiy. 

839. Slips. The process of raising perennials by slips is well known to gardeners, and 
should perhaps be regarded as an extension of the old plant, rather than as tlie generation 
of a new one ; though it serves ,the purpose of the cultivator equally well as a plant raised 
from seed, with the additional advantage of bearing fruit much sooner. But how is the 
root generated which the slip thus produces ? If the trunk of a tree is lopped, and all its 
existing buds destroyed, then there will be protruded from between the wood and bark a 
sort of protuberant lip or ring formed from the proper juice, and from which there will 
spring a number of young shoots. The fonnation of the root in the case of the slip is 
effected in the same manner, the moisture of the soil encouraging the protrusion of buds 
at and near the section ; and the bud that would have been converted into a branch above 
ground is converted into a root below. 

840. Layers. The mode of propagation by layers is practised upon trees that are deli^ 
cate, and whicli cannot readily be propagated by means of slips ; in which case the root 
is generated nearly as in the former case, the soil stimulating the protrusion of buds 
which are converted into roots. In many plants, such as the currant and laurel, this is 
altogether a natural process, effected by the spontaneous bending down of a branch to the 
surface of the soil. 

841. Suckers or off-sets. Many plants protrude annually from the collar a number of 
young shoots, encircling the principal stem and depriving it of a portion of its nourish- 
ment, as in the case of most fruit-trees. Others send out a horizontal root, from which 
there at last issues a bud that ascends above the soil and is converted into a little stem, as 
in the case of the elm-tree and syringa. Others send out a horizontal shoot from the 
collar or its neighbourhood ; or a shoot that ultimately bends down by its own weight till 
it reaches the ground, in which it strikes root and again sends up a stem as in the currant- 
bush and laurel. 'Jlie two former are called suckers or off-sets, though the term off-set 
should perhaps be restricted to the young bulbs that issue and detach themselves annually 
from bulbous roots. The latter is not designated by any particular name, but may be re- 
garded as a sort of natural layer, resemblijig also, in some respects, the runner ; from 
which, however, it is distinguished in that it never detaches itself spontaneously from the 
parent plant, as is the case also with the two former. But if either of them is artificially 
detached, together with a portion of root or a slice of the collar adhering to it, it will now 
bear transplanting, and will constitute a distinct plant. 

842. Grafting and budding. The species is also often propagated, or at least the 
variety is multiplied, by means of grafting, \\hich is an artificial application of a portion 
of the shoot or root of one tree or plant to the stem, shoot, branch, or root of another, so 
that the two shall coalesce together and form but one plant. The shoot wliich is to form 
the summit of the new individual is called the scion ; the stem to wliich it is affixed is 
called the stock ; and the operation, when effected, the graft. As the graft is merely an 
extension of the parent plant from which the scion came, and not properly speaking 
a new individual, so it is found to be the best method of propagating approved 
varieties of fruit-trees without any danger of altering the quality of the fruit, which is 
always apt to be incurred in propagating from seed, but never in propagating from the 
scion. The scion will also bear fruit much sooner than the tree that is raised from seed ; 
and, if effected on a proper stock, will be much more hardy and vigorous than if left on 
the parent plant. And hence the great utility of grafting in the practice of gardening. 
Till lately, grafting was confined to the ligneous plants, but it is now successfully prac- 
tised on the roots and shoots of herbaceous vegetables ; and the daliHa is grafted l\y the 
root ; the melon on the gourd ; the love-apple on the potatoe ; the cauliflower on the cab- 
bage, &c. by the shoot. A very ingenious tract has been published on this subject, 
entitled, Essai sur la Greffe de Vherbe des plantes et des arbres, par Mo7isr. Le Baron de 
Tschoudif, Bourgeois de Glaris. Paris, 1819. 

Sect. X. Causes limiting the Propagation of the Species. 

843. Though j)lanis are controlled chiefly by animals, yet they also control one another. 
From the various sources of vegetable reproduction, but particularly from the fer- 
tility and dispersion of the seed, the earth would soon be overrun with plants of the most 
prolific species, and converted again into a desert, if it were not that nature has set bounds 
to their propagation by subjecting them to the control of man, and to the depredations of 
tlie great mass of animals ; as well as in confining the germination of their seeds to cer- 
tain and peculiar habitations arising from soil, climate, altitude, and other circumstances. 



DOOK I. 



EVIDENCE OF VEGETABLE VITALITY. 



187 



In order to form an idea of the manner in which these act upon vegetation ; imagine that 
every year an enormous quantity of seeds, produced by the existing vegetables, are spread 
over the surface of the globe, by the winds and other causes already mentioned, all of 
these seeds which fall in places suitable for their vegetation, and are not destroyed by ani- 
mals, germinate and produce plants ; then among these plants, the strongest, and largest, 
and those to wliich the soil is best suited, develope themselves in number and magnitude 
so as to choke the others. Such is the general progress of nature, and among plants, as 
among animals, the strong flourish at the expense of the weak. These causes have oper- 
ated for such a length of time, that the greater number of species are now fixed and con- 
sidered as belonging to certain soils, situations, and climates, beyond which they seldom 
propagate themselves otherwise than by the hands of man. 

Sect. XI. Evidence and Character of Vegetable Vitality. 
844. The jiou'er of coiuiteracting the laws of chemical affinity is reckoned the best and 
most satisfactory evidence of the presence and agency of a vital principle as inherent in 
any subject. Tliis principle, which seems first to have been instituted by Humboldt, is 
ob\-iously applicable to die case of animals, as is proved by the process of die digestion of 
the food, and its conversion into chyle and blood ; as well as from the various secretions 
and excretions effected by the several organs, and effecting the growth and developement 
of the indi\-idual, in direct opposition to the acknowledged laws of chemical afhnity, 
which, as soon as the \ita\ principle is extinct, begin immediately to give indication of 
their action in the incipient symptoms of the putrefaction of the dead body. But the rule 
is also applicable to the case of vegetables, as is proved by the intro-susception, digestion, 
and assimilation of the food necessary to their developement ; all indicating the agency 
of a principle capable of counteracting the laws of chemical affinity ; which, at tlie period 
of Avhat is usually called the death of the plant, begin also immediately to act, and to give 
evidence of their action in the incipient spnptoms of the putrefaction of the vegetable. 
Vegetables are therefore obviously endowed with a species of -vitality. But admitting the 
presence and agency of a \ital principle inherent in the vegetable subject, what ai-e the 
peculiar properties by which this piinciple is characterised ? 

S4o. Excitability. One of the most distinguishable properties of the vital principle of vegetables is 
that of its excitability, or capacity of being acted upon by the application of natural stimuli, impelling 
it to the exertion of its vegetative powers ; the natural stimuli thus impelling it being light and heat. 

846. The stimulating iiiflueiice of light upon the vital principle of the plant is discoverable, whether 
in the stem, leaf, or flower The direction of the stem is influenced by the action of light, as well as 
the color of its leaves. Distance from direct rays of light or weak light produces etiolation, and its 
absence blanching. The luxuriance of branches depends on the presence and action of light, as is par- 
ticularly observable in the case of hot-house plants, the branches of which are not so conspicuously di- 
rected, either to the flue in quest of heat, or to the door or open sash in quest of air, as to the sun 
»in quest of Kght. Hence also the branches of plants are often more luxuriant on the south than on 
the north side; or at least on the side that is best exposed to light. The position of the leaf is also 
strongly affected by the action of light to vvhich it uniformly turns its upper surface. This may be readily 
perceived in the case of trees trained to a wall, from which the upper surface of the leaf is by con- 
sequence always turned; being on a south wall turned to the south, and on a north wall turned "to the 
north. And if the upper surface of the leaf is forcibly turned towards the wall and confined in that 
position for a length of time, it will soon resume its primitive position upon regaining its liberty, but 
particularly if the atmosphere is clear. The leaves of the mallow are said to exhibit but slight indi- 
cations of this susceptibility, as also sword-shaped leaves; and also those of the mistletoe, are equally 
susceptible on both sides. It had been conjectured that these effects are partly attributable to the 
agency of heat ; and to try the value of the conjecture. Bonnet placed some plants of the atriplcx in a 
stove heated to 25*^ of Reaumur. Yet the stems were not inclined to the side from which the greatest 
degree of heat came ; but to a small opening in the stoves. Heat then does not seem to exert any 
perceptible influence in the production of the above effects. Does moisture ? Bonnet found that the 
leaves of the vine exhibited the same phenomenon when immersed in water, as when left in the open 
air. Whence it seems probable that light is the sole agent in the production of the effects in question. 
But as light produces such effects upon the leaves, so darkness or the absence of light produces an effect 
quite the contrary; for it is known that the leaves of many plants assume a very different position in the 
night from what they have in the day. This is particularly the case with winged leaves, which, though 
fully expanded during the day, begin to droop and bend down about sunset and during the fall of the 
evening dew, till they meet together on the inferior side of the leaf-stalk, the terminal lobe, if the leaf 
is furnished with one,' folding itself back till it reaches the first pair ; or the two side lobes, if tlie leaf is 
trifoliatC; as in the case of common clover. So also the leaflets of the false acacia and liquorice hang 
down during the night, and those of mimosa pudica fold themselves up along the common foot-stalk 
so as to overlap one another. LinucEUs has designated the above phenomenon by the appellation of 
Hie Sleep of Plants. The expansion of the flower is also effected by the action of light. Many plants 
do not fully expand their petals except when the sunshines; and hence alternately open them during 
the day and shut them up during the night. This may be exemphfied in the case of papilionaceous 
flowers in general, which spread out their wings in fine weather to admit the rays of the sun, and again 
fold them up as the night approaches. It may be exemplified also in the case of compound flowers, as in 
that of the dandehon and hawkweed. But the most singular case of this kind is perhaps that of the 
lotus of the Euphrates, as described by Theophrastus, which he represents as rearing and expanding it* 
blossoms by day, closing and sinking down beneath the surface of the water by night so as to be beyond 
the grasp of the hand, and again rising up in the morning to present its expa'nded blossom to the sun. 
The same phenomenon is related also by Pliny. But although many plants open their flowers in the 
moming and shut them again in the evening, yet all flowers do not open and shut at the same time. 
Plants of (he same species are tolerably regular as to time, ether circumstances being the same; and 
. hence the daily opening and shutting of the flower has been denominated by botanists The Horologiiim 
FtorcB. Flowers requiring but a slight application of stimulus open early in the morning, while others 
requiring more open somewhat later. Some do not open till noon, and some, whose extreme delicacy 
cannot l>ear the action of light at all, open only at night, such as the cactus grandiflora, or night-blowing 



188 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



cereus. But it s?oms somewhat doubtful whether or not light is the sole agent in the present' case ; for 
it has been observed that equatorial flowers open always at the same hour, and that tropical flowers 
change tiieir hour of opening according to the length of the day. It has been observed also, that the 
flowers of plants that are removed from a warmer to a colder climate expand at a later hour in the latter. 
A flower that opens at six o'clock in the morning at Senegal, will not open in France or England 
till eight or nine, nor in Sweden till ten. A flower that opens at ten o'clock at Senegal, will not 
open in France or England till noon or later, and in Sweden it will not open at all. And a flower 
that does not open till noon or later at Senegal, will not open at all in France or England. This seems as 
if heat or its absence were also an agent in the opening and shutting of flowers ; though the opening of 
such as blow only in the night cannot be attributed either to light or heat. But the opening or shutting 
of some flowers depends not so much on tlie action of the stiinulus of light as on the existing state of 
the atmosphere, and hence their opening or shutting betokens change. If the Siberian sow-thistle shuts 
at night, the ensuing day will be fine; and if it opens, it will be cloudy and rainy. If the African mari- 
gold continues shut after seven o'clock in the morning, rain is near at hand. And if the convolvulus ar- 
vensis, calendula fluvialis, or anagallis arvensis, are even already open they will shut upon the approach 
of rain, the last of which, from its peculiar susceptibility, has obtained the name of the poor man's 
weatherglass. But some flowers not only expand during the light of day ; they incline also towards the 
sun, and follow his course, looking towards the east in the morning, towards the south at noon, and 
towards the west in the evening ; and again returning in the night to their former position in the morn- 
ing. Such flowers are designated by the appellation of Heliotropes, on account of their following the 
course of the sun ; and the movement they thus exhibit is denominated their nutation. This phenomenon 
had been observed by the ancients long before they had made any considerable progress in botany, and 
had even been interwoven into their mythology, having originated, according to the records of fabulous 
history, in one of the metamorplioses of early times. Clytie, inconsolable for the loss of the affections of 
Sol, by whom she had been formerly beloved, and of whom she was still enamoured, is represented as 
brooding over her griefs in silence and solitude ; where, refusing all sustenance, and seated upon the 
cold ground, with her eyes invariably fixed on the sun during the day, and watching for his return dur- 
ing the night, she is at length transformed into a flower, retaining, as much as a flower can retain it, 
the same unaltered attachment to the sun. This is the flower which is denominated heliotropium by the 
ancients, and described by Ovid as Flos qui ad solein vertitur. But it is to be observed, that the flower 
alluded to by Ovid cannot be the heliotropium of the moderns, because Ovid describes it as resembling 
the violet : much less can it be the sun-flower of the moderns, which is a native of America, and could 
not consequently have been known to Ovid ; so that the true heliotropium of the ancients is perhaps not 
yet ascertained. Bonnet lias further remarked that the ripe ears of corn, which bend down with weight 
of grain, scarcely ever incline to tiie north, but always less or more to the south ; of the accuracy of 
which remark any one may easily satisfy himself by looking at a field of wheat ready for the sickle ; he 
will find the whole mass of ears nodding, as if with one consent to the south. The cause of the pheno- 
menon has been supposed to be a contraction of the fibres of the stem or flower-stalk on the side exposed 
to the sun ; and this contraction has been thouglit by De la Hire and Dr. Hales to be occasioned by an 
excess of transpiration on the sunny side; which is probably the fact, though there seems upon this 
principle to be some difficulty in accounting for its returning at night ; because if you say that the con- 
tracted side expands and relaxes by moisture, what is it that contracts the side that was relaxed in the 
day? The moisture, of which it is no doubt still full, would counteract the contraction of its fibres, and 
prevent it from resuming its former position in the morning. 

847. Heat as well as light acts also as a powerful stimulus to the exertion of the 
vital principle. Tliis has been already shown in treating of the process of germination ; 
but the same thing is observable with regard to the developement and maturation of the 
leaves, flower, and fruit ; for although all plants produce their leaves, flower, and fruit, 
annually, yet they do not all produce them at the same period or season. This forms 
the foundation of what Linnagus has called the Calendarium Florce, including a view of 
the several periods of the frondescence and efflorescence of plants, together with that of 
the maturation of the fruit. 

848. Frondescence. It must be plain to every observer, that all plants do not protrude their leaves at the 
same season, and that even of such as do protrude them in the same season, some are earlier and some 
later. The honeysuckle protrudes them in the month of January ; the gooseberry, currant, and elder, 
in the end of February, or beginning of March ; the willow, elm, and lime-tree, in April ; and the oak 
and ash, which are always the latest among trees, in the beginning or towards the middle of May. 
Many annuals do not come up till after the summer solstice; and many mosses not till after the com- 
mencement of winter. This gradual and successive unfolding of the leaves of difterent plants seems to 
arise from the peculiar susceptibility of the species to the action of heat, as requiring a greater or less 
degree of it to give the proper stimulus to the vital principle. But a great many circumstances will al- 
ways concur to render the time of the unfolding of the leaves somewhat irregular ; because the mildness 
of the season is by no means uniform at the same period of advancement ; and because the leafing of the 
plant depends upon the peculiar degree of temperature, and not upon the return of a particular day of 
the year. Hence it has been thought, that no rule could be so good for directing the husbandman in the 
sowing of his several sorts of grain as the leafing of such species of trees as might be found by observation 
to correspond best to each sort of grain respectively, in the degree of temperature required. LinuEEUs 
(Stillingfleet informs us) instituted some observations on the subject about the year 1750, with a view 
chiefly to ascertain the time proper for the sowing of barley in Sweden ; he regarded the leafing of the birch- 
tree as being the best indication for that grain, and recommended the institution of similar observations 
with regard to other sorts of grain, upon the ground of its great importance to the husbandman, who 
may be said to attend to it in a manner instinctively ; but as all the trees of the same species do not come 
into leaf precisely at the same time, and as the weather may alter even after the most promising indi- 
cations, no guide natural or artificial can be absolutely depended on with a view to future results. 

849. Efflorescence. The flowering of the plant, like the leafing, seems to depend upon the degree of tem- 
perature induced by the returning spring, as the flowers are also protruded pretty regularly at the same 
successive periods of the season. The mezereon and snowdrop protrude their flowers in February ; the 
primrose in the month of March ; the cowslip in April ; the great mass of plants in May and June ; many 
in July, August, and September ; some not till the month of October, as the meadow safTron ; and some 
not till the approach or middle of winter, as the laurustinus and arbutus. Such at least is the period of 
their flowering in this country ; but in warmer climates they are earlier, and in colder climates they are 
later. Between the tropics, where the degree of heat is always high, it often happens that plants will 
flower more than once in the year ; because they do not there require to wait til! the temperature is 
raised to a certain height, but merely till the developement of their parts can be effected in the regular 
operation of nature, under a temperature already sufficient. For the greater part, however, they flower 
during our summer, though plants in opposite hemispheres flower in opposite seasons. But in all climates 
the time of flowering depends also much on the altitude of the place as well as on other causes affecting 
the degree of heat. Hence plants occupying the polar regions, and plants occupying the toiis of the high 
mountains of southern latitudes are in flower at the same season ; and hence the same flowers are later 



Book I. EVIDENCE OF VEGETABLE VITALITY. 189 



in opening in North America than in the same latitudes in Europe, because the surface of the earth is 
higher, or the winters more severe. 

8.50. Maturation of the fruit. Plants exhibit as much diversity in the warmth and length of time neces- 
sary to mature their fruit as in their frondesccnce and flowering ; but the plant that flowers the soone.'^t, 
does not always ripen its fruit the soonest. The hazel-tree, which blows in February, does not ripen its 
fruit till autumn ; while the cherry, that does not blow till May, ripens its fruit in June. It may be re- 
garded, however, as the general rule, that if a plant blows in spring it ripens its fruit in summer, as in the 
case of the currant and gooseberry ; if it blows in summer it ripens its fruit in autumn, as in the case of 
the vine ; and if it blows in autumn it ripens its fruit in the winter. But the meadow-saffron, which 
blows in the autumn, does not ripen its fruit till the succeeding spring. 

851. Such are the primary facts on which a Calendarium Florce, should be founded. 
They have not hitherto been very minutely attended to by botanists ; and perhaps their 
importance is not quite so much as has been generally supposed ; but they are at any 
rate sufficiently striking to have attracted the notice even of savages. Some tribes of 
American Indians act upon the very principle suggested by Linnaeus, and plant their 
corn when the wild plum blooms, or when the leaves of the oak are about as large as a 
squirrel's ears. The names of some of their months are also designated from the state 
of vegetation. One is called the budding month, and another the flowering month ; 
one the strawberry month, and another the mulberry month ; and the autumn is desig- 
nated by a term signifying the fall of the leaf. Tlius the proposed nomenclature of the 
French for the months and seasons is founded in nature as well as in reason. 

852, Cold. As the elevation of temperature induced by the heat of summer is es- 
sential to the full exertion of the energies of the vital principle, so the depression of 
temperature consequent upon tlie colds of winter has been thought to suspend the ex- 
ertion of the vital energies altogether, # But this opinion is evidently founded on a mistake, 
as is proved by the example of such plants as protrude their leaves and flowers in the 
winter season only, such as many of the mosses ; as well as by the dissection of the yet 
unfolded buds at different periods of the winter, even in the case of such plants as pro- 
trude their leaves and blossoms in the spring and summer, and in which, it has been 
already shown, there is a regular, gradual, and incipient developement of parts, from 
the time of the bud's first appearance till its ultimate opening in the spring. The sap, 
it is true, flows much less freely, but is not wholly stopped, Du Hamel planted some 
young trees in the autumn, cutting off all the smaller fibres of the root, with a view 
to watch the progress of the formation of new ones. At the end of every fortnight he 
had the jjlants taken up and examined with all possible care to prevent injuring 
them, and found that, when it did not actually freeze, new roots were always uniformly 
developed. 

853, Energies of life in plants Wee the process of respiration in animals. Hence it fol- 
lows, that even during the period of winter, when vegetation seems totally at a stand, 
the ti-ee being sti-ipped of its foliage, and the herb apparently withering in the frozen 
blast, still the energies of vital life are exerted ; and still the vital principle is at work, 
canying on in the interior of the plant, concealed from human view, and sheltered from 
the piercing frosts, operations necessary to the preservation of vegetable life, or protru- 
sion of future parts ; though it requires the returning warmth of spring to give that 
degree of velocity to the juices which shall render their motion cognizable to man, as 
well as that expression to the whole plant which is the most evident token of life : in the 
same manner as the processes of respiration, digestion, and the circulation of the blood 
are carried on in the animal subject even while asleep ; though the most obvious 
indications of animal life are the m.otions of the animal when awake. Heat then 
acts as a powerful stimulus to the operations of the vital principle, accelerating the mo- 
tion of the sap, and consequent developement of parts ; as is evident from the sap's 
beginning to flow much more copiously as the warmth of spring advances, as well as 
from the possibility of anticipating the natural period of their developement by forcing 
them in a hot-house. But it is known that excessive heat impedes the progress of veget- 
ation as well as excessive cold ; both extremes being equally prejudicial. And hence 
the sap flows more copiously in the spring and autumn, than in either the summer or 
winter ; as may readily be seen by watching the progress of the growth of the annual 
shoot, which, after having been rapidly protruded in the spring, remains for a while 
stationary during the great heat of the summer, but is again elongated during the more 
moderate temperature of autumn, 

854. Stimularity. There are also several substances which have been found to operate 
as stimulants to the agency of the vital principle when artificially dissolved in water, and 
applied to the root or branch. Oxygenated muriatic acid has been already mentioned : 
and the vegetation of the bulbs of the hyacinth and narcissvis is accelerated by means of 
the application of a sokition of nitre, Dr, Barton, of Philadelphia, found that a de- 
caying branch of liriodendron tulipifera, and a faded flower of the yellow iris, recovered 
and continued long fresh when put into water impregnated with camphor ; though 
flowers and branches, in all respects similar, did not recover when put into common 
water. 



190 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING, 



Part II. 



855. Irritabiliti/, Plants are not only susceptible of the action of the natural stimuli 
of light and heat, exciting them gradually to tlie exercise of tlie functions of their dif- 
ferent organs in the regular progress of vegetation ; they are susceptible also of the action 
of a variety of accidental or artificial stimuli, from the application of which they are 
found to give indications of being endowed also with a property similar to what we 
call irritability in the animal system. This property is well exemplified in the genus 
Mimosa ; but particularly in that species known by the name of the Sensitive Plant ; 
and tlie dioneea muscipula and drosera. But sometimes the irritability resides in 
the flower, and has its seat either in the stamens or style. Tlie former case is ex- 
emplified in the flower of the berberiy and cactus tuna, and the latter in stylidium 
glandulosum. 

856. Sensation. From the facts adduced in the preceding sections, it is evident that 
plants are endowed vnth a capacity of being acted upon by the application of stimuli, 
whether natural or artificial, indicating the existence of a vital principle, and forming 
one of the most prominent features of its character. But besides this obvious and ac- 
knowledged property, it has been thought by some phytologists that plants are endowed 
also -with a species of sensation. Sir J. E. Smith seems rather to hope that the doctrine 
may be true, than to think it so. 

857. Instinct. There is also a variety of phenomena exhibited throughout the extent 
of the vegetable kingdom, some of wliich are common to plants in general, and some 
peculiar to certain species, that have been thought by several botanical writers to exhibit 
indications, not merely of sensation, but of instinct. The tendency of plants to incline 
their stem and to turn the upper surface of the leaves to the light, the direction wliich 
the extreme fibres of the root will often take to reach the best nourishment, the folding 
up of the flower on the approach of rain, tlie rising and falling of the water-lily, and 
the peculiar and invariable direction assumed by the twining stem in ascending its prop, 
are among the phenomena that have been attributed to instinct, Keith has endeavoured 
(iin. Trans, xi. p. 11.) to establish the doctrine of the existence and agency of an in- 
stinctive principle in the plant, upon the ground of the direction invariably assumed by 
fhe radicle and plumelet respectively, in the germination of the seed. 

858. Dejlnition of the plant. But if vegetables are living beings endowed with 
sensation and instinct, or any thing approaching to it, so as to give them a resemblance 
to animals, how are we certainly to distinguish the plant from the animal ? At the ex- 
tremes of the two kingdoms the distinction is easy ; the more perfect animals can never 
be mistaken for plants, nor the more perfect plants for animals, but at the mean, where 
the two kingdoms may be supposed to unite, the shades of discrimination are so very faint 
or evanescent that of some individual productions it is almost impossible to say to which 
of the kingdoms they belong. Hence it is that substances which have at one time been 
classed among plants, have at another time been classed among animals ; and there are 
substances to be met with whose place has not yet been satisfactorily determined. Of 
these I may exemplify the genus Corallina (Jig. 66.), which Linnajus placed among 



66 




animals, but which Gasrtner places among plants. Linnceus, Bonnet, Hedwig, and 
Mirbel, have each given particular definitions. According to Keith, a vegetable is an 
organised and living substance springing from a seed or gem, which it again produces ; 
and effecting the developement of its parts by means of the intro-susception and assimila- 
tion of unorganised substances, which it derives from the atmosphere or the soil in which 
it grows. The definition of the animal is the counterpart : an animal is an organised 
and living being proceeding from an egg or embryo, which it again produces ; and ef- 
fecting the developement of its parts by means of the intro-susception of organised sub- 
stances or their products. For all practical purposes, perhaps plants may be distinguished 



Book t. 



VEGETABLE PATHOLOGY. 



191 



iVom animals with sufficient accuracy by incaiis of the trial of burning ; as animal sub- 
stances in a state of ignition exhale a sti-ong and phosphoi-ic odor, -wliich vegetable sub- 
stances do ixtt. 



Chap. IX. 

Vegetable Patliology, or the Diseases and CasuaJities of Vegetable Life. 

859. As plants are, like animals, organised and living beings, they are, like animals 
also, liable to such accidental injuries and disorders as may affect the health and vigor, 
or occasion the death of the individual, lliese are wounds, accidents, diseases, and 
natural decay. 

Sect. I. JVounds and Accidents. 

860. A wound is a forcible separation of tlie solid parts of the plant effected by means 
of some external Qause, intentional or accidental. 

861. Incisions are sometimes necessary to the health of the tree, in the same manner perhaps as 
bleeding is necessary to the health of the animal. The trunk of the plum and cherry-tree seldom expand 
freely till a longitu;iinal incision has been made in tlie bark ; and hence this operation is often practised 
by gardeners. If the incision affects the epidermis only it heals up without leaving any scar; if it pene- 
trates into tlie interior of the bark, it heals up only by means of leaving a scar ; if it penetrates into the 
n-ood, the wound in the wood itself never heals up completely, but new wood and bark are formed above 
it as before. 

862. Boring \i an operation by whicli trees are often wounded for the purpose of making them part with 
their sap in the season of their bleeding, particularly the birch-tree and American maple. A horizontal or 
rather slanting hole is bored in them with a wimble, so as to penetrate an inch or two into the wood, from 
this the sap flows copiously ; and though a number of holes is often bored in the same trunk, the health of 
tlie tree is not very materially affected. For trees will continue to thrive though subjected to this oper- 
ation for many successive years ; and tlie hole, if not very large, will close up again like the deep incision, 
not by the union of the broken fibres of the wood, but by the formation of new bark and wood projecting 
beyond the edge of the orifice, and rinally shutting it up altogether. 

_8oo. Girdling is an operation to wliich trees in North America are often subjected when the farmer 
wishes to clear his land of timber. It consists in making parallel and horizontal incisions with an axe into 
the tnmk of a tree, and carrying them quite round the stem so as to penetrate through the albiirninn, 
and then to scoop out tlie intervening portion. If this operation is performed early in the spring, and be- 
fore the commenc.3raent of the bleeding season, the tree rarely survives it ; though some trees that are pe- 
culiarly tenacious of life, such as acer saccharinum and nyssa integrifolia, have been known to survive 
it a considerable length of time. 

864. Fracture. If a tree is bent so as to fracture part only of the cortical and woody fibres, and the stem 
or branch but small, the parts will again unite by being put back into their natural position, and well 
propped up. Especially cure may be expected to succeed if the fracture happens in the spring ; but it will 
not succeed if the fracture is accompanied with contusion, or if the stem or branch is large ; and even where 
it succeeds the woody fibres do not contribute to the union, but the granular and herbaceous substance 
only which exudes from between the wood and liber, insinuating itself into all interstices and finally be- 
coming indurated into wood. 

865. Pruning. Wounds are necessarily inflicted by the gardener or forester in the pruning or lopping 
off the superfluous branches, but this is seldom attended with any bad eflTects to the health of the tree, if 
done by a skilful practitioner : indeed no further art is required merely for the protection of the tree be- 
yond that of cutting the branch through in a sloping direction so as to prevent the rain from lodging. In 
this case the wound soon closes up by the induration of the exposed surface of the section, and by the pro- 
trusion of a granular substance, forming a sort of circular Up between the wood and bark ; and hence the 
branch is never elongated by the growth of the same vessels that have been cut, but by the protrusion of 
new buds near the point of section. 

866. Grafting. In the operation of grafting there is a wound both of the stock and graft; which are 
united, not by the immediate adhesion of the surfaces of the two sections, but by means of a granular 
and herbaceous substance exuding from between the wood and bark, and insinuating itself as a sort of 
cenient into all open spaces : new wood is finally formed within it, and the imion is complete. 

Sb/. Felling is the operation of cutting down trees close to the ground, which certain species will survive, 
if the stump is protected from the injuries of animals, and the root fresh and vigorous. In this case the 
fibres of the wood are never again regenerated, but a lip is formed as in the case of pruning ; and buds, 
that spring up into new shoots, are protruded near the section ; so that from the old shoot, ten, twelve, or 
even twenty new stems may issue according to its size and vigor. The stools of the oak and ash-tree 
will furnish good examples ; but there are some trees, such as the fir, that never send out any shoots after 
the operation of felling. 

868. If buds are destroyed in the course of the winter, or in the early part of the spring, many plants 
will again generate new buds that will develope their parts as the others would have done, except that they 
never contain blossom or fruit. Du Hamel thought these buds sprang from pre-organised germs which 
he conceived to be dispersed throughout the whole of the plant ; but Knight thinks he has discovered the 
true source of the regeneration of buds, in the proper juice that is lodged in the alburnum. Euds thus re- 
generated never contain or produce either flower or fruit. Perhaps because the fruit-bud requires more 
time to develope its parts, or a peculiar and higher degree of elaboration ; and that this hasty production 
is only the effect of a great effort of the vital principle for the preservation of the individual, and one of 
those wonderful resources to which nature always knows how to resort when the vital principle is in dan- 
ger. But though such buds do not produce flowers directly, as in the case of plants that bear their blos- 
soms on last year's wood; yet they often produce young shoots which produce blossoms and fruit the 
same season, as in the case of cutting down an old vin"e, or pruning the rose. 

869. Sometimes the leaves of a tree are destroyed partially or totally as soon as they are protruded from 
the bud, whether by the depredations of caterpillars or other insects, or by the browsing of cattle. But 
if the injury is done early in the spring, new leaves will be again protrud'ed without subsequent shoots. 
Some trees will bear to be stripped even more than once in a season, as is the case with the mulberry-tree, 
which they cultivate in the south of France and Italy for the ptirpose of feeding the silk-worm. But if it is 
stripped more than once in the season it requires now and then a year's rest. 

870. Tlie decortication of a tree, or the stripping it of its bark, may be either intentional or accidental, 
partial or total. If it is partial, and affects the epidermis only, then it is again regenerated, as in the case 
of slight incision, without leaving any scar. But if the epidermis of the petal, leaf, or fruit, is destroyed, 
it is not again regenerated, nor is the wound healed up, except by means of a scar. Such is the case also 



192 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



with all decortications that penetrate deeper than the epidermis, particularly if the wound is not protected 
from the action of the air: if the decortication reaches to the wood, then new bark issues from between the 
bark and wood, and spreads till it covers the wound. But the result is not the same when the wound is 
covered from the air. In the season of the flowing of the sap Du Hamel detached a ring of bark, of three 
or four inches in breadth, from the trunks of several young elm-trees, taking care to defend the decorti- 
cated part from the action of the air^ by surrounding it with a tube of glass cemented above and below to 
the trunk. After a few days the tubes became cloudy within, particularly when it was hot ; but when the 
air became cool, the cloud condjnsed and fell in drops to the bottom. At last there began to appear, as if 
exuding from between the bark and wood of the upper part of the wound, a sort of rough scurfy substance ; 
and on the surface of the wood, as if exuding from between the longitudinal fibres of the alburnum, a 
number of gelatinous drops. They were not connected with the scurfy substance at the top, but seemed 
to arise from small slips of the liber that had not been completely detached. Their first appearance was 
that of small reddish spots changing by degrees into white, and finally into a sort of grey, and extending 
in size till they at last united and formed a cicatrice, which was a new bark. 

871. Abortion or failure in the produce of flowers, fruits, or of perfect seeds, is generally the effect of acci- 
dental injuries, either directly to the flower or fruit, by which they are rubbed off or devoured by insects ; or 
to the leaves by insects ; or to the roots by exposure to the air or cutting off so much of them as essentially 
to lessen their power of drawing up nourishment. Other causes will readily suggest themselves ; and one 
of the commonest, as to seeds and fruits, is want of sufficient impregnation. 

872. Premature inflorescence or fruiting is sometimes brought on by insects, but more generally by checks 
produced by cold or injuries from excessive heat, or long continued drought. Fruit is often ripened pre- 
maturely by the puncture of insects ; and a pine-apple plant of almost any age may be thrown into fruit by 
an hour or two's exposure to a frosty atmosphere in winter, or by scorching the roots in an overhot tan- 
bed at any season. 

Sect. II. Diseases. 

873. Diseases are corrupt affections of the vegetable body, arising from a vitiated state 
of its juices, and tending to injure the habitual health either of the whole or part of the 
plant. The diseases that occur the most frequently among vegetables are the follovs^ing : 
Blight, smut, mildew, honey-dew, dropsy, flux of juices, gangrene, etiolation, suffoca- 
tion, contortion, consumption. 

874. Blight. Much has been written on the nature of blight ; and in proportion as 
words have been multiplied on the subject, the difficulties attending its elucidation have 
increased. 

875. The blight, or blast, was well known to the ancient Greeks, who were however totally ignorant of its 
cause, regarding it merely as a blast from heaven, indicating the wrath of their offended deities, and utterly 
incapable of prevention or cure. It was known also to the Romans under the denomination of rubigo, who 
regarded it in the same light as the Greeks, and even believed it to be under the direction of a. particular 
deity, Rubigus, whom they solemnly invoked that blight might be kept from corn and trees. It is still well 
known from its effect? to every one having the least knowledge of husbandry or gardening ; but it has been 
very differently accounted for. And, perhaps, there is no one cause that will account for all the different 
cases of blight, or disease going by the name of blight ; though they have been supposed to have all the s.ime 
origin. If we take the term in its most general acceptation I think it will include at least three distinct 
species — b'.ight originating in cold and frosty winds, blight originating in a sort of sultry and pestilential 
vapor, and blight originating in the immoderate propagation of a sort of small and parasitical fungus. 

876. Blight, originating in cold and fi-osty winds, is ofien occasioned by the cold and easterljr winds of 
spring, which nip and destroy the tender shoots of the plant, by stopping the current of the juices. The 
leaves which are thus deprived of their due nourishment wither and fall, and the juices that are now 
stoijped in their passage swell and burst the vessels, and become the food of innumerable little insects 
that soon after make their appearance. Hence they are often mistaken for the cause of the disease itself ; 
the farmer supposing they are wafted to him on the east wind, while they are only generated in the extra- 
vasated juices, as forming a proper nidus for their eggs. Their multiplication will no doubt contribute to 
the spreading of the disorder, as they always breed fast where they find plenty of food. But a similar 
disease is often occasioned by the early frost of spring. If the weather is prematurely mild, the blossom is 
prematurely protruded, which, thougli it is viewed by the unexperienced with delight, yet it is viewed by 
the judicious with fear. For it very often happens that this premature blossom is totally destroyed by sub- 
sequent frosts, as well as both the leaves and shoots, which consequently wither and fall, and injure if they 
do not actually kill the plant. This evil is also often augmented by the unskilful gardener, even in at- 
tempting to prevent it; that is, by matting up his trees too closely, or by keeping them covered in the 
course of the day, and thus rendering the shoots so tender that they can scarcely fail to be destroyed by 
the next frost. 

877. Blight, originating in sultry and pestilential vapor, generally happens in the summer when the 
grain has attained to its full growth, and when there are no cold winds or frosts to occasion it. Such 
was the blight that used to damage the vineyards of ancient Italy, and which is yet found to damage our 
hop-plantations and wheat-crops. The Romans had observed that it generally happened after short but 
heavy showers occurring about noon, and followed by clear sunshine, about the season of the ripening of 
the grapes, and that the middle of the vineyard suffered the most. This corresponds pretty nearly to what 
is in this country called the fire-blast among hops, which has been observed to take place, most commonly 
about the end of July, when there has been rain with a hot gleam of sunshine immediately after ; the 
middle of the hop-ground is also the most affected whether the blight is general or partial, and is 
almost always the point in which it originates. In a particular case that was minutely observed, the 
damage happened a little before noon, and the blight ran in a line forming a right angle with the sun- 
beams at that time of the day. There was but little wind, which was however in the line of the blight. 
{Hale's Body of Husbandry.) Wheat is also affected with a similar sort of blight, and about the same 
season of the year, which totally destroys the crop. In the summer of 1809, a field of wheat, on rather a 
light and sandy soil, came up with every appearance of health, and also into ear with a fair prospcot of 
ripening well. About the beginning of July it was considered as exceeding any thing expected from ch 
a soil. A week afterwards a portion of the crop, on the east side of the field, to the extent of several acres, 
was totally destroyed ; being shrunk and shrivelled up to less than one half the size of what it had for- 
merly been, and so withered and blasted as not to appear to belong to the same field. The rest of the field 
produced a fair crop. 

878. Blight, originating in fungi, attacks the leaves or stem both of herbaceous and woody plants, 
such as euphorbia cyparissias, berberis vulgaris, and rhamnus catharticus, but more generally grasses ; 
and particularly our most useful grains, wheat, barley, and oats. It generally assumes the appearance 
cf a rusty-looking powder that soils the finger when touched. In March 1807,. some blades of wheat were 
examined by Keith that were attacked with this species of blight ; the appearance was that of a number 
of rusty-looking spots or patches dispersed over the surface of the leaf, exactly like that of the seeds of 
dorsiferous ferns bursting their indusium. Upon more minute inspection these patches were found to 



Book I. 



DISEASES OF VEGETABLES. 



193 



consist of thousands of small globules collected into groups beneath the epidermis, which they raised up 
in a sort of blister and at last burst. Some of the globules seemed as if imbedded even in the longitudinal 
vessels of the blade. They were of a yellowish or rusty brown, and somewhat transparent. But these 
groups of globules have been ascertained by Sir J. Banks to be patches of a minute fungus, the seeds of 
which, as they float in the air, enter the pores of the epidermis of the leaf, particularly if the plant is 
^ in- 'y ; or they exist in the manure or soil, and enter by the pores of the root. (Sir J. Banks on Blight, 
1805.) This fungus has been figured by Sowcrby, and by F. Bauer, and Grew. It is known among farmers 
by tlie name of red rust, and as it affects the stalks and leaves only it does not materially injure the crop. 
But there is another species of fungus known to the farmer by the name of red gum, which attacks the 
ear only, and is extremely prejudicial. In the aggregate it consists of groups of minute globules inter- 
spersed with transparent fibres. The globules are filled with a fine powder, which explodes when they are 
put into water. It is very generally accompanied with a maggot of a yellow colour, that preys also upon 
the grain, and increases the amount of injury. The only means of preventing or lessening the effect of 
any of the different varieties of blight mentioned is proper culture. Palliatives are to be found in topical 
applications, such as flower of sulphur, and where the disease proceeds from, or consists of, innumerable 
minute insects, it may occasionally be removed. Grisenthwaite conjectures that in many cases in 
which the blight and mildew attack corn-crops, it may be for want of the peculiar food requisite for per- 
fecting the grain ; it being known that the fruit or seeds of many plants contain primitive principles not 
found in the rest of the plant. Thus the grain of wheat contains gluten and phosphate of lime, and where 
these are wanting in the soil, that is, in the manured earths in which the plant grov/s, it will be unable to 
perfect its fruit, which of consequence becomes more liable to disease. {New Theory of Agr. &c.) 

879. Smut is a disease incidental to cultivated corn, by which the farina of the grain, 
together with its proper integuments and even part of the husk, is converted into a black 
soot-Uke powder. If the injured ear is struck with the finger, the powder will be dis- 
persed like a cloud of black smoke ; and if a portion of the powder is wetted by a drop of 
water and put under the microscope, it will be found to consist of millions of minute and 
transparent globules, which seem to be composed of a clear and glary fluid encompassed 
by a thin and skinny membrane. This disease does not affect the whole body of the crop, 
but the smutted ears are sometimes very numerously dispersed throughout it. Some have 
attributed it to the soil in which the grain is sown, and others have attributed it to the 
seed itself, alleging that smutted seed will produce a smutted crop. But in all this there 
seems to be a great deal of doubt. "VVilldenow regards it as originating in a small fungus, 
which multiplies and extends till it occupies the whole ear. [Princip. of Bat. p. 356.) 
But F. Bauer of Kew, seems to have ascertained it to be merely a morbid swelling of the 
ear, and not at all connected with the growth of a fungus. (Smith's Introd. p. 348.) It 
is said to be prevented by steeping the grain before sowing in a weak solution of arsenic. 
But be.sides the disease called smut there is also a disease analogous to it, or a different 
stage of the same disease, known to the farmer by the name of bags or smut-balls, in 
which the nucleus of the seed only is converted into a black powder, whilst the ovary, as 
well as the husk, remains sound. The ear is not much altered in its external appearance, 
and the diseased grain contained in it will even bear the operation of threshing, and con- 
sequently mingle with the bulk. But it is always readily detected by the experienced buyer, 
and fatal to the character of the sample. It is said to be prevented as in the case of ^ut. 

880. MUdeio is a thin and whitish coating with which the leaves of vegetables are some- 
times covered, occasioning their decay and deatli, and injuring the health of the plant. It 
is frequently found on the leaves of tussilago farfara, humulus lupulus, corylus avellana, 
and the white and yellow dead-nettle. It is found also on wheat in the shape of a glu- 
tinous exudation, particularly when the days are hot and the nights without dew. Will- 
denow says it is occasioned by the growth of a fungus of great minuteness, the mucor 
erisyphe of Linnaeus ; or by a sort of whitish slime which some species of aphides deposit 
upon the leaves. J. Robertson (Hart. Titans, v. 178.) considers it as a minute fungus 
of which different species attack different plants. Sulphur he has found the only specific 
cure. In cultivated crops mildew is said to be prevented by manuring with soot. 

881. Homy-dew is a sweet and clammy substance which coagulates on the surface of 
the leaves during hot weather, particularly on the leaves of the oak-tree and beech, and is 
regarded by Curtis as being merely the dung of some species of aphides. This seems to 
be the opinion of Willdenow also, and it is no doubt possible that it may be the case in 
some instances or species of the disease. But Sir J. E. Smith contends that it is not al- 
ways so, or that there are more species of honey-dew than one, regarding it particularly 
as being an exudation, at least in the case of the beech, whose leaves are, in consequence 
of an unfavorable wind, apt to become covered with a sweet sort of glutinous coating, 
similar in flavor to the fluid obtained from the trunk. 

S8£ It is certain, however, that saccharine exudations are found on the leaves of many plants, though 
not always distinguished by the name of honey-dew ; which should not perhaps be applied except when 
the exudation occasions disease. But if it is to be applied to all saccharine exudations whatever, then we 
must include under the appellation of honey-dew, the saccharine exudations observed on the orange-tree 
by De la Hire, together with that of the lime-tree which is more glutinous, and of the poplar which is 
more resinous ; as also that of the cistus creticus, and of the manna which exudes from the ash-tree of 
Italy and larch of France. It is also possible that the exudation of excrement constituting honey-dew 
may occasionally occur without producing disease; for if it should happen to be washed off soon after by 
rains or heavy dews, then the leaves will not suffer. Washing is therefore the palliative : judicious culture 
the preventive. 

883. Plants are also liable to a disease which affects them in a manner similar to that 
of the dropsi/ in animals, arising from long continued rain or too abundant watering. 

O 



194 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Willdenow describes it as occasioiaing a preternatural swelling of particular parts, and in- 
ducing putrefaction. It is said to take place chiefly in bulbous and tuberous roots, which 
are often found much swelled after rain. It affects fruits also, which it renders watery 
and insipid. It prevents the ripening of seeds, and occasions an immoderate production 
of roots from the stem. 

884. Succulent plants. This disease generally appears in consequence of excessive waterings, and is gene- 
rally incurable. The leaves drop, even though plump and green ; and the fruit rots before reaching maturity. 
In this case the absorption seems to be too great in proportion to the transpiration ; but the soil when too 
much manured produces similar effects. Du Hamel planted some elms in a soil that vpas particularly 
well manured, and accordingly they pushed with great vigor for some time ; but at the end of five or six 
years they all died suddenly. The bark was found to be detached from the wood, and the cavity filled up 
with a reddish-colored water. The symptoms of this disease suggest the palliatives j and the preventive 
is ever the same — judicious culture. 

885. Flux of juices. Some trees, but particularly the oak and birch, are liable to a 
great loss of sap either bursting out spontaneously, owing to a superabundance of sap, or 
issuing from accidental wounds ; sometimes it is injurious to the health of the plant, and 
sometimes not. 

886. There is a spontaneous extravasation of the sap of the vine, known by the name of the tears of the 
vine, which is not always injurious. As it often happens that the root imbibes sap, which the leaves are not 
yetprepared to throw off, because not yet sufficiently expanded, owing to an inclement season, the sap which 
is first carried up, being propelled by that which follows, ultimately forces its way through all obstructions, 
and exudes from the bud. But this is observed only in cold climates ; for in hot climates where the 
deyelopement of the leaves is not obstructed by cold, they are ready to elaborate the sap as soon as it 
reaches thera. There is also a spontaneous extravasation of proper juice in some trees, which does not 
seem in general to be injurious to the individual. Thus the gum which exudes from cherry, plum, peach, 
and almond trees, is seldom detrimental to their health, except when it insinuates itself into the other 
vessels of the plant and occasions obstructions. 

887. But the exudation of gum is sometimes a disease, and one for which there is seldom any remedy. It 
is generally the consequence of an unsuitable soil, situation, or climate. Cold raw summers will produce it 
in the peach, apricot, and more under-sorts of plum and cherry ; or grafting these fruits on diseased stocks. 
Cutting out the part and applying a covering of loam or tar and charcoal to exclude the air are palliatives ; 
but the only effectual method, where it can be practised, is to take up the tree and place it in a suitable soil 
and situation. 

888. The extravasation and coi-i-uption of the ascending or descending juices, has been known to occasion 
a fissure of the solid parts. Sometimes the fissure is occasioned by means of frost, forming what is called a 
double alburnum ; that is, first a layer that has been injured by the frost, and then a layer that passes into 
wood. Sometimes a layer is partially affected, and that is generally owing to a sudden and partial thaw 
on the south side of the trunk, which may be followed again by a sudden frost. In this case the alburnum 
is split into clefts or chinks, by means of the expansion of the frozen sap. 

889. Chilblains. But clefts thus occasioned often degenerate into chilblains that discharge a blackish and 
acrid fluid to the great detriment of the plant, particularly if the sores are so situated that rain or snow will 
readily lodge in them, and become putrid. The same injury may be occasioned by the bite or puncture of 
insects while the shoot is yet tender ; and as no vegetable ulcer heals up of its own accord, the sooner a 
cure is attempted the better, as it will, if left to itself, ultimately corrode and destroy the whole plant, bark, 
wood, and pith. The only palliative is the excision of the part affected, and the application of a coat of 
grafting wax. {Willdenow, xt.SS'i:.) 

890. Gangrene. Of this disorder there are two varieties, the dry and the wet. The 
former is occasioned by means of excessive heat or excessive cold. If by means of cold, 
it attacks the leaves of young shoots and causes them to shrink up, converting them from 
green to black ; as also the inner bark, which it blackens in the same manner, so that it 
is impossible to save the plant except by cutting it to the ground. If by means of heat, 
the effects are nearly similar, as may oftentimes be seen in gardens, or even in forests, 
where the foresters are allowed to clear away the moss and withered leaves from the roots. 
Sometimes the disease is occasioned by the too rapid growth of a particular branch, de- 
priving the one that is next it of its due nourishment, and hence inducing its decay. 
Sometimes it is occasioned by means of parasitical plants, as in the case of the bulbs of 
the saffron, which a species of lycoperdon often attaches itself to and totally corrupts. 

891. Bry gangrene. The harmattan winds of the coast of Africa kill many plants, by means of in- 
ducing a sort of gangrene that withers and blackens the leaves, and finally destroys the whole plant. The 
nopal of Mexico is also subject to a sort of gangrene that begins with a black spot, and extends till the 
whole leaf or branch rots off, or the plant dies. But plants are sometimes affected with a gangrene by which 
a part becomes first soft and moist, and then dissolves into foul ichor. This is confined chiefly to the 
leaves, flowers, and fruit. Sometimes it attacks the roots also, but rarely the stem. It seems to be owing, 
in many cases, to too wet or too rich a soil ; but it may originate in contusion, and may be caught by in- 
fection. But the nopal is subject also to a disease called by Thiery la dissolution, considered by Sir J. E. 
Smith as distinct from gangrene, and which appears to be Willdenow's dry gangrene. A joint of the 
nopal, or a whole branch, and sometimes an entire plant, changes in the space of a single hour, from a 
state of apparent health to a state of putrefaction or dissolution. Now its surface is verdant and shining, 
and in an instant it changes to a yellow, and its brilliancy is gone. If the substance is cut into, the parts are 
found to have lost all cohesion, and are quite rotten ; the attempt at a cure is by .speedy amputation below 
the diseased part. Sometimes the vital principle collecting and exerting all its energies, makes a stand 
as it were against the encroaching disease, and throws off the infected part. {Smith's Introduction, p. 340.) 

892. Etiolation. Plants are sometimes affected by a disease which entirely destroys 
their verdure, and renders them pale and sickly. This is called etiolation, and may arise 
merely from want of the agency of light, by which the extrication of oxygen is effected, 
and the leaf rendered green. And hence it is that plants placed in dark rooms, or be- 
tween great masses of stone, or in the clefts of rocks, or under the shade of other trees, 
look always peculiarly pale. But if they are removed from such situations, and exposed 



Book I. 



NATURAL DECAY OF VEGETABLES. 



195 



to the action of light, they will again recover their green color. Etiolation may also en- 
sue from the depredation of insects nestling in the radicle, and consuming the food of the 
plant, and thus debilitating the vessels of the leaf so as to render them insusceptible of 
the action of light. Tliis is said to be often the case with the radicles of secale cereale ; 
and the same result may also arise from poverty of soil. 

893. Suffocation. Sometimes it happens that the pores of the epidermis are closed up, 
and transpiration consequently obstructed, by means of some extraneous substance that 
attaches itself to and covers the bark. This obstruction induces disease, and tlie disease 
is called suffocation. 

894. Sometimes it is occasioned by the immoderate growth of lichens upon the bark covering the whole 
of the plant, as may be often seen in fruit-trees, which it is necessary to keep clean by means of scraping 
off the lichens, at least from the smaller branches. For if the young branches are thus coated, so as that 
the bark cannot perform its proper functions, the tree will soon begin to languish, and will finally become 
covered with fungi, inducing or resulting from decay, till it is at last wholly choaked up. 

895. But a similar effect is also occasionally produced by insects, in feeding upon the sap or shoot. Tliis 
may be exemplified in the case of the aphides, which sometimes breed or settle upon the tender shoot in 
such multitudes as to cover it from the action of the external air altogether. It may be exemplified also 
in the case of Coccus Hesperidum and Acarus iellariiis, insects that infest hot-house plants, the latter by 
spinning a -fine and delicate web over the leaf, and thus preventing the access of atmospheric air. Insects 
are to be removed either by the hand or other mechanical means, or destroyed by excess of some of the 
elements of their nutrition, as heat, or cold, or moisture, where such excess does not prove injurious to 
the plant; or by a composition either fluid or otherwise, which shall have the same effects. Prevention 
is to be attempted by general culture, and particular attention to prevent the propagation of the insects or 
vermin, by destroying their embryo progeny, whether oviparous or otherwise. 

896. Sometimes the disease is occasioned by an extravasation of juices which coagulate on the surface of 
the stalk so as to form a sort of crust, investing it as a sheath, and preventing its further expansion. 

897. Sometimes the disease is occasioned from want of an adequate sujyply of nourishment as derived 
from the soil, in which the lower part of the plant is the best supplied, while the upper part of it is starved. 
Hence the top shoots decrease in size every succeeding year, because sulhcient supply of sap cannot be 
obtained to give them their proper developement. This is analogous to the phenomena of animal life, 
when the action of the heart is too feeble to propel the blood through the v/hole of the system : for then 
the extremities are always the first to suffer. And perhaps it may account also for the fact, that in bad 
soils and unfavorable seasons, when the ear of barley is not wholly perfected, yet a few of the lower grains 
are always completely developed. {Smitli's Introduction, p. 344.) 

898. Contortion. The leaves of plants are often injured by means of the puncture of 
insects, so as to induce a sort of disease that discovers itself in the contortion or convolu- 
tion of the margin, or wrinkled appearance of the surface. The leaves of the apricot, 
peach, and nectarine, are extremely liable to be thus affected in the months of June and 
July. 

899. The leaf that has been punctured soon begins to assume a rough and wrinkled figure, and a reddish 
and scrofulous appearance, particularly on the upper surface. The margins roll inwards on the under 
side, and enclose the eggs which are scattered irregularly on the surface, giving it a blackish and granular 
appearance, but without materially injuring its health. In the vine, the substance deposited on the leaf is 
whitish, giving the under surface a sort of a frosted appearance, but not occasioning the red and scrofulous 
aspect of the upper surface of the leaf of the nectarine. In the poplar, the eggs when first deposited re- 
. semble a number of small and hoary vesicles containing a sort of clear and colorless fluid. The leaf then 
becomes reflected and conduplicated, enclosing the eggs, with a few reddish protuberances on the upper 
surface. The embryo is nourished by this fluid ; and the hoariness is converted into a fine cottony dov.'n, 
which for some time envelopes the young fly. The leaf of the lime-tree in particular is liable to attacks 
from insects when fully expanded ; and hence the gnawed appearance it so often exhibits. The injury 
seems to be occasioned by some species of puceron depositing its eggs in the parenchj'ma, generally about 
the angles that branch off from the midrib. A sort of down is produced, at first green, and afterwards 
hoary ; sometimes in patches, and sometimes pervading the whole leaf ; as in the case of the vine. Under 
this covering the egg is hatched ; and then the young insect gnaws and injures the leaf, leaving a hole, or 
scar of a burnt or singed appearance. Sometimes the upper surface of the leaf is covered with clusters of 
wart-like substances somewhat subulate and acute. They seem to be occasioned by means of a puncture 
made on the under surface, on which a number of openings are discoverable, penetrating into the warts, 
which are hollow and villous within. The disease admits of palliation by watering frequently over the 
leaves ; and by removing such as are the most contorted and covered by larvae. 

900. Consumption. From barren or improper soil, unfavorable climate, careless 
planting, or too frequent flowering exhausting the strength of the plant, it often happens 
that disease is induced which terminates in a gradual decline and wasting away of the 
plant, till at length it is wholly dried up. Sometimes it is also occasioned by excessive 
drought, or by dust lodging on the leaves, or by fumes issuing from manufactories which 
may happen to be situated in the neighbourhood, or by the attacks of insects. 

901. There is a consumptive affection that frequently attacks the pine-tree, called Teredo Pinorum 
{Willdenow, Princ. Sot. p. 351.), which affects the alburnum and inner bark chiefly, and seems to proceed 
from long continued drought, or from frost suddenly succeeding mild or warm weather, or heavy winds. 
The leaves assume a tinge of yellow, bordering upon red. A great number of small drops of resin exude 
from the middle of the boughs, of a putrid odor. The bark exfoliates, and the alburnum presents a livid ap- 
pearance. The tree swarms with insects, and the disease is incurable, inducing inevitably the total decay 
and death of the individual. The preventive is obviously good culture, so as to maintain vigorous health : 
palliatives may be employed according to the apparent cause of the disease. 

Sect. III. Natural Decay. 
902. Although a plant should not suffer from the influence of accidental injury, or 
from disease, still there will come a time when its several organs will begin to experience 
the approaches of a natural decline insensibly stealing upon it, and at last inducing death. 
The duration of vegetable existence is very different in different species. Yet in the ve- 
getable, as well as in the animal kingdom, there is a teiTn or limit set, beyond which the 

O 2 



196 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



individual cannot pass. Some plants are annuals and last for one season only, springing 
up suddenly from seed, attaining rapidly to maturity, producing and again sowing their 
seeds, and afterwards immediately perishing. Such is the character of the various species 
of com, as exemplified in oats, wheat, and barley. Some plants continue to live for a 
period of two years, and are therefore called biennials, springing up the first year from seed, 
and producing roots and leaves, but no fruit ; and in the second year producing both 
flower and fruit, as exemplified in the can-ot, parsnep, and caraway. Other plants are 
perennials, that is, lasting for many years ; of which some are called under-shrubs, and 
die down to the root eveiy year ; others are called shrubs, and are permanent both by the 
root and stem, but do not attain to a great height or great age ; others are called trees, 
and are not only permanent by both root and stem, but attain to a great size, and live to a 
great age. But even of plants that are woody and perennial, there are parts which perish 
annually, or which are at least annually separated from the individual ; namely, the leaves, 
flowers, and fruit, leaving nothing behind but the bare caudex, which submits in its turn 
to the ravages of time, and ultimately to death. 

903. The decay of the tenqwrary organs, which takes place annually, is a phenomenon 
familiar to every body, and comprehends the fall of the leaf, the fall of the flower, and 
the fall of the fruit. 

904. Hie fall qf the leaf, or annual defoliation of the plant, commences for the most part with the colds 
of autumn, and is accelerated by the frosts of winter, that strip the forest of its foliage, and the landscape 
of its verdure. But there are some trees that retain their leaves throughout the whole of the winter, 
though changed to a dull and duskj' brown, and may be called ever-clothed trees, as the beech : and there 
are others that retain their verdure throughout the year, and are denominated evergreens, as the holly. 
The leaves of both sorts ultimately fall in the spring. Sir J. E. Smith considers that leaves are thrown off 
by a process similar to that of the sloughing of diseased parts in the animal economy ; and Keith observes, 
that if it is necessary to illustrate the fall of the leaf by any analogous process in the animal economy, it 
maybe compared to that of the shedding of the antlers of the stag, or of the hair or feathers of other 
beasts or birds, which being, like the leaves of plants, distinct and peculiar organs, fall ofF, and are rege- 
nerated annually, but do not slough. 

905. The flowers, which, like the leaves, are only temporary organs, are for the most part very short- 
lived ; for as the object of their production is merely that of effecting the impregnation of the germs, 
that object is no sooner obtained than they begin again to give indications of decay, and speedily fall from 
the plant ; so that the most beautiful part of the vegetable is also the most transient. 

906. The fruit, which begins to appear conspicuous when the flower falls, expands and increases in 
volume, and, assuming a peculiar hue as it ripens, ultimately detaches itself from the parent plant, and 
drops into the soil. But it does not in all cases detach itself in the same manner : thus, in the bean and 
pea the seed-vessel opens and lets the seeds fall out, while in the apple, pear, and cherry, the fruit falls 
entire, enclosing the seed, which escapes when the pericarp decays. Most fruits fall sooii after ripening, 
as the cherry and apricot, if not gathered ; but some remain long attached to the parent plant after being 
fully ripe, as in the case of the fruit of euonjTnus, and mespilus. But these, though tenacious of their 
hold, detach themselves at last, as well as all" others, and bury themselves in the soil, about to give birth 
to a new individual in the germination of the seed. The fall of the flower and fruit is accounted for in the 
same manner as that of the leaf, 

907. Decay of the fiermamnt organs. Such then is the process and presumptive ra- 
tionale of the decay and detachment of the temporaiy organs of the plant. But there is 
also a period beyond which even tlie pennanent organs themselves can no longer carrj' on 
the process of vegetation. Plants are aff^ected by the infirmities of old age as well as 
animals, and are found to exliibit also similar symptoms of approaching dissolution. The 
root refuses to imbibe the nourishment afforded by the soU, or if it does imbibe a portion, 
it is but feebly propelled, and partially distributed, thi-ough tlie tubes of the alburnum ; 
the elaboration of the sap is now eflPected with diflftculty as well as the assimilation of the 
proper juice, the descent of which is almost totally obstructed ; the bark becomes thick 
and woody, and covered with moss or lichens ; tlie shoot becomes stunted and diminutive ; 
and the fruits palpably degenerate, both in quantity and quality. The smaller or ter- 
minal branches fade and decay the first, and then the larger branches also, together ^\ ith 
the trunk and root ; the vital principle gradually declines without any chance of xecoyerj, 
and is at last totally extinguished. " When life is extinguished, nature hastens the de- 
composition ; the surface of the tree is overrun with lichens and mosses, which attract and 
retain the moisture ; the empty pores imbibe it, and putrefaction speedily follows. Then 
come the tribes of fungi, which flourish on decaying wood, and accelerate its conniption : 
beetles and caterpillars take up their abode under the bark, and bore innumerable holes 
in the timber ; and woodpeckers in search of insects pierce it more deeply, and excavate 
large hollows, in which they place their nests. Frost, rain, and heat assist, and the whole 
mass crumbles away, and dissolves into a rich mould." (Dial, on Bot. p. 365.) 



Chap. X. 

VessPtable Geography and History, or the Distribution of Vegetables relatively to the Earth 

and to Man. 

903. The science of the distribution of plants, Humboldt observes (Essai sur la Geo- 
gra^Ms des Plantes, &c. 1807), considers vegetables iir relation to their local associations in 



Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETABLES. 



197 



different climates. It points out the grand features of the immense extent which plants 
occupy, from the regions of perpetual snow to the bottom of the ocean, and to the interior 
of the globe, where, in obscure grottoes, cryptogamous plants vegetate, as unknown as the 
insects which they nourish. The superior liinits of vegetation are known, but not the 
inferior ; for everj' where in the bowels of the earth are germs which develope themselves 
when they find a space and nourishment suitable for vegetation. On taking a general 
view of the disposition of vegetables on the surface of the globe, independently of the 
influence of man, that disposition appears to be determined by two sorts of causes, geog7-a- 
jyhical and physical. The influence of man, or of cultivation, lias introduced a third cause, 
which may be called civil. The different aspects of plants, in different regions, has given 
rise to what may be called their characteristic, or jnctiiresque distribution ; and the subject 
of distribution may be also considered relatively to the systematic divisions of vegetables, 
their arithmetical proportions, and economical appKcations. 

Sect. I. Geographical Distribution of Vegetables. 

909. The territorial lifuits to vegetation are determined in general by three different 
causes: — 1. By sandy deserts, wliich seeds cannot pass over either by means of winds or 
birds, as that of Sahara, in Africa; 2. By seas too vast for the seeds of plants to be 
drifted from one shore to the other, as in the ocean ; while the Mediterranean sea, on the 
contrary, exhibits the same vegetation on both shores ; and, 3. By long and lofty chains 
of mountains. To these causes are to be attributed the fact, that similai- climates and 
soils do not always produce similar plants. Thus in certain parts of North America, 
wliich altogether resemble Europe in respect to soil, climate, and elevation, not a single 
European plant is to be found. The same remai'k will apply to New Holland, the Cape 
of Good Hope, Senegal, and other countries, as compared with countries in similar phy- 
sical circumstances, but geographically different. The separation of Africa and South 
America, Humboldt considers, must have taken place before the developement of organised 
beings, since scarcely a single plant of the one country is to be found in a wild state in 
the other. 

Sect. II. Physical Distribution of Vegetables. 

910. The natural circumstances affecting the distribution of plants, may be considered 
in respect to temperature, elevation, moisture, soil, and light. 

911. Temperature has the most ob\ious influence on vegetation. Everyone knows 
that the plants of hot countries cannot in general live in such as are cold, and the con- 
trary. The wheat and barley of Europe will not grow within the tropics ; the same re- 
mark applies to plants of still higher latitudes, such as those witliin the polar circles, which 
cannot be made to vegetate in more southern latitudes ; nor can the plants of more southern 
latitudes be made to vegetate there. In this respect, not only the medium temperature 
of a countiy ought to be studied, but the temperature of different seasons, and especially 
of winter. Countries where it never freezes ; . those where it never freezes so strong as to 
stagnate the sap in the stems of plants ; and those where it freezes sufficiently strong to 
penetrate into the cellular tissue ; forai tln-ee classes of regions in which vegetation ought 
to differ. But this difference is somewhat modified by the effect of vegetable structure, 
which resists, in different degrees, the action of frost ; thus, in general, trees which lose 
their leaves during winter resist the cold better than such as retain them ; resinous trees 
more easily than such as are not so ; herbs of which the shoots are annual and the root 
perennial, better tlian those where the stems and leaves are persisting ; annuals which 
flower early, and whose seeds drop and germinate before winter, resist cold less easily than 
such as flower late, and whose seeds lie dormant in the soil till spring. Monocotyledonous 
trees, which have generally persisting leaves and a trunk without bark, as in palms, are 
less adapted to resist cold than dicotyledonous trees, which are more favorably organised 
for this pui-pose, not only by the nature of their proper juice, but by the disposition of the 
cortical and alburnous layers, and the habitual carbonisation of the outer bark. Plants 
of a dr\' nature resist cold better than such as are wateiy ; all plants resist cold better in 
dry winters than in moist winters ; and an attack of frost always does most injury in a 
moist countr)', in a humid season, or when the plant is too copiously supplied with water. 

912. Some plants of firm texture, but natives of warm climates, will endure a frost of 
a few hours' continuance, as the orange at Genoa (^Humboldt, De Distributione Plantarum) ; 
and the same thing is said of the palm and pine-apple, facts most important for the gar- 
dener. Plants of delicate texture, and natives of wai-m climates, are destroyed by the 
slightest attack of frost, as the phaseolus, nasturtium, &c. 

913. The temperature of spring has a material influence on the life of vegetables ; tha 
injurious effects of late frosts are known to every cultivator. In general, vegetation is 
favored in cold countries by exposing plants to the direct influence of the sun ; but thi-* 
excitement is injurious in a country subject to frosts late in the season : in such cases, it 
is better to retard than to accelerate vegetation. 

O 3 



198 



scip:nce of gardening. 



Part II. 



914. Tlie tempei'ature of summer, as it varies only by the intensity of heat, is not pro- 
ductive of so many injurious accidents as that of spring. Very hot dry summers, however, 
destroy many delicate plants, and especially those of cold climates. A very early summer 
is injurious to the germination and progress of seeds ; a short summer to tlieir ripening, 
and the contrary. 

915. Autumn is an important season for vcgetatio!i, as it respects the ripening of seeds ; 
hence where that season is cold and humid, annual plants, which naturally flower late, are 
never abundant, as in the polar regions ; the effect is less injurious to perennial plants, 
which generally flower earlier. Frosts early in autumn are as injurious as those which hap- 
pen late in spring. Tlie conclusion, from these considerations, obviously is, that temperate 
climates are more favorable to vegetation than such as are either extremely cold or ex- 
tremely hot. But the wanner climates, as Keith observes, are more favorable upon 
the whole to vegetation than the colder, and that nearly in proportion to their distance from 
the equator. The same pl?jits, however, will grow in the same degree of latitude, 
tliroughout all degrees of longitude, and also in correspondeiit latitudes on different sides 
of the equator ; the same species of plants, as some of the pahiis and ethers, being found 
in Japan, India, Arabia, the West Indies, and part of South America, which are all in 
nearly the same latitudes ; and the same species being also found in Kamschatka, Ger- 
many, Great Britain, and the coast of Labrador, wliich are all also in nearly the same lati- 
tudes, (^jnildenoiv, -p. 374.) 

916. The jnost remarkable circumstances respecting the temperature in the three zones, is 
exhibited in the following Table by Humboldt. Tlie temperature is taken according to the 
centigrade thermometer. The fathom is 6 French feet, or 6.39453 English feet. 





Torrid zone. 


Temperate zone. 


Frigid zone. 


Andes 
of Quito, 
Lat. 0°. 


Mountains 
of Mexico, 
Lat. 20°. 


Caucasus, 
Lat. 421°. 


Pyrenees, 
Lat. 42|». 


Alps, 
Lat. 45i-^ to 
46°. 


Lapland, 
Lat. 67° to 
70° 


Inferior limit of per- 1 
petual snow - - 3 


2460 fa. 


2350 fa. 


1650 fa. 


1400 fa. 


1370 fa. 


550 fa. 


Mean annual heat at 1 
that height - - ^ 










4°. 


6°. 


Mean heat of winter, do. 


If 








10°. 


20i°. 


Mean heat of Aug. do. 










6°. 


^2 • 


Distance between trees ) 
and snow - - - ^ 


600 fa. 


350 fa. 


650 fa. 


230 fa. 


450 fa. 


300 fa. 


Upper limit of trees - 


1800 fa. 


2000 fa. 


1000 fa. 


1170 fa. 


920 fa. 


250 fa. 


Last species of trees to- ) 
wards the snow - 3 


Escalonia 
alstonia. 


Hnus 
Occident. 


Betiila 
alba. 


Pin. rubra 
P. uncin. 


Pinus 
abies. 


Betula 
alba. 


Upper limit of the \ 
Ericinese - ~ - ^ 


BefariaD, 
1600 fa. 




Rhodod. 
Caucas. 
1380 fa. 




Rhodod. 
ferrug. 
11 70 fa. 


Rhodod. 
laponic. 
480 fa. 


Distance between the 7 
snow and corn - - 5 


800 fa. 




630 fa. 




700 fa. 


1 

450 fa. 

- '» 



917. Elevation, or the height of the soil above the level of the sea, determines, in a veiy 
marked manner, the habitation of plants. The temperature lessens in regular gradation, 
in the same manner as it does in receding from the equator, and six hundred feet of ele- 
vation, De Candolle states, are deemed equal to one degree of latitude, and occasion a 
diminution of temperature equal to 23° of Fahrenheit ; 300 feet being nearly equal to half 
a degree. Mountains 1000 fathoms in height, at 46° of latitude, have the mean temper- 
ature of Lapland ; mountains of the same height between the tropics enjoy the tem- 
perature of Sicily ; and the summits of the lofty mountains of the Andes, even where 
situated almost directly under the equator, are covei-ed vrith snow as eternal as that of the 
north pole. 



Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETABLES. 



199 



918. Hence it is that plants of high latitudes live on the mountains of such as are much lower, 
and thus the plants of Greenland and Lapland are found on the Alps and Pyrenees. At 
the foot of Mount Ararat (f,g. 67. ), Tournefort met with plants peculiar to Armenia ; 



67 




above these he met with plants which are found also in France ; at a still greater height 
he found himself surrounded with such as grow in Sweden ; and at the summit with such 
as vegetate in the polar regions. This accounts for the great variety of plants which are 
often found in a Flora of no great extent ; and it may be laid down as a botanical axiom, 
that the more diversified the surface of the country, the richer will its Flora be, at least in 
the same latitudes. It accounts also, in some cases, for the want of correspondence be- 
tween plants of different countries though placed in the same latitudes ; because the 
mountains or ridges of mountains, which may be found in the one and not in the other, 
will produce the greatest possible difference in the character of their Floras. And to this 
cause may generally be ascribed the diversity that often actually exists between plants grow- 
ing in the same latitudes, as between those of the north-west and north-east coasts of North 
America, as also of the south-west and south-east coasts ; the former being more moun- 
tainous, the latter more flat. Sometimes the same sort of difference takes place between 
the plants of an island and those of the neighbouring continent ; that is, if the one is 
mountainous and the other flat ; but if they are alike in their geographical delineation, 
then they are generally alike in their vegetable productions. 

919. Cold and lofty situations are the favorite habitations of most cryptogamic plants of the 
terrestrial class, especially the fungi, algae, and mosses ; as also of plants of the class 
Tetradynamia, and of the Umbellatce and Syngenesian tribes ; whereas trees and shrubs, 
ferns, parasitic plants, lilies, and aromatic plants, are most abundant in warm climates ; 
only this is not to be understood merely of geographical climates, because, as we have 
seen, the physical climate depends upon altitude. In consequence of which, combined 
with the ridges and directions of the mountains, America and Asia are much colder in 
the same degrees of northern latitude than Europe. American plants, vegetating at forty- 
two degrees of northern latitude, will vegetate very well at fifty-two degrees in Europe ; 
the same, or nearly so, may be said of Asia ; which, in the former case, is perhaps owing 
to the immense tracts of woods and marshes covering the surface, and in the latter, to the 
more elevated and mountainous situation of the country affecting the degree of temper- 
ature. So also Africa is much hotter under the tropics than America ; because in the 
latter the temperature is lowered by immense chains of mountains traversing the equa- 
torial regions, while in the former it is increased by means of the hot and burning sands 
that cover the greater part of its surface. 

920. Elevation influences the habits of plants in various ways ; — by exposing them to the 
wind ; to be watered by a very fresh and pure water from the melting of adjoining 
snow ; and to be covered in winter by a thick layer of snow, which protects them from 
severe frosts. Hence many alpine plants become frozen during winter in the plains, and 
in gardens which are naturally warmer than their natural stations. In great elevations, 
the diminution of the density of the air may also have some influence on vegetation. The 
rarity of the atmosphere admits a more free passage for the rays of light, which, being in 
consequence more active, ought to produce a more active vegetation. Experience seems 
to prove this in high mountains ; and the same effect is produced in high latitudes by 
the length of the day. On the other hand, vegetables require to absorb a certain quantity 
of oxygene gas from the air during the night ; and as they find less of that in the rarefied 
air of the mountains, they ought to be proportionably feeble and languishing. According 
to experiments made by Theodore de Saussure, plants which grow best in the high Alps 
are those which require to absorb least oxygen during the night ; and, in this point of 
view, the shortness of the nights near the poles correspond. These causes, however, are 
obviously very weak, compared to the powerful action of temperature. 

O 4 



200 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



921. Great anomalies are found in the comparative height in which tlie same plant will 
grow in different circumstances. In countries situated under the equator, the two sides of 
the mountain are of the same temperature, which is solely determined by elevation ; but in 
countries distant from it, the warmest side is that towards the south, and the zones of 
plants, instead of forming lines parallel to the horizon, incline towards the north. The 
reason, in both cases, is sufficiently obvious. In the temperate zone we find the same 
plants frequently on low and elevated situations, but this is never the case between the 
tropics. 

922. Altitude influences the habits of aquatics ; thus some aquatics float always on the 
surface of the water, as lemna, while others are either partially or wholly immersed. 
Such aquatics as grow in the depths of the sea are not influenced by climate ; but such as 
are near the surface are influenced by climate, and have their habitations affected by it. 

923. The moisture, or mode of luatering natural to vegetables, is a circumstance which 
has a powerful influence on the facility with which plants grow in any given soil. The 
quantity of water absolutely necessary for the nourishment of plants, varies according to 
their tissue ; some are immersed, others float on its surface ; some grow on the margin 
of waters, with their roots always moistened or soaked in it, others again live in soil 
slightly humid or almost diy. Vegetables which resist extreme drought most easily 
are, 1. Trees and herbs with deep roots, because they penetrate to, and derive sufficient 
moisture from, some distance below tlie surface ; 2. Plants which, being furnished with 
fevv pores on the epidemiis, evaporate but little moisture from their surface, as tlie suc- 
culent tribe. 

924. The qualities of water, or the nature of the substances dissolved in it, must neces- 
sarily influence powerfully the possibility of certain plants growing in certain places. 
But the difference in this respect is much less than would be imagined, because the food 
of one species of plant differs very little from that of another. The most remarkable 
case is that of salt-marshes, in which a great many vegetables will not live, whilst a 
number of others thrive there better than any where else. Plants which grow in marine 
marshes and those which grow in similar grounds situated in the interior of a country 
are the same. Other substances naturally dissolved in water appear to have much less 
influence on vegetation, though the causes of the habitations of some plants, such as 
those which grow best on walls, as peltaria, and in lime-rubbish, as thlaspi, and other 
cruciferecs, may doubtless be traced to some salt (nitrate of lime, &c.) or other substance 
peculiar to such situations. 

925. The nature of the eartlis surface affects the habitations of vegetables in different 
points of view : 1. As consisting of primitive earths, or the debris of rocks or mineral 
bodies ; and, 2. As consisting of a mixture of mineral, anim^al, and vegetable matter. 

926. Pri?nitive su faces affect vegetables mechanically according to their different de- 
grees of moveability or tenacity. In coarse sandy surfaces plants spring up easily, but 
many of them, which have large leaves or tall stems, are as easily blown about and 
destroyed. In fine, dry, sandy surfaces, plants with very delicate roots, as protea and 
erica, prosper ; a similar earth, but moist in the growing season, is suited to bulbs. On 
clayey surfaces plants are more difficult to establish, but when established are more per- 
manent : they are generally coarse, vigorous, and perennial in their duration. 

927. With respect to the relative jwoportions of the primitive earths in these surfaces, 
it does not appear that their influence on the distribution of plants, is so great as might 
at first sight be imagined. Doubtless different earths are endowed with diflerent degrees 
of absorbing, retaining, and parting with moisture and heat ; and these circumstances 
have a material effect in a state of culture, where they are comminuted and exposed to the 
air ; but not much in a wild or natural state, where they remain hard, firm, and covered 
witli vegetation. The difference, vntli a few exceptions, is never so great but that the 
seeds of a plant which has been found to prosper well in one description of earth, will 
germinate and thrive as well in another composed of totally different earths, provided 
ihey are in a nearly similar state of mechanical division and moisture. Thus De Can- 
ioWe observes, though the box is very common on calcareous surfaces, it is found in as 
great quantities in such as are schistous or granitic. The chestnut grows equally well 
in calcareous and clayey earths, in volcanic ashes, and in sand. The plants of Aira, a 
mountain entirely calcai'eous, grow equally well on the Vosges or the granitic Alps. 
But though the kind or mixture of earths seems of no great consequence, yet the presence 
of metallic oxides and salts, as sulphates of iron or copper, or sulphur alone, or alum, or 
other similar substances in a state to be soluble in water, are found to be injurious to all 
vegetation, of which some parts of Derbyshire and the maremmes of Tuscany (Chateau- 
vieux, let. 8.) are striking proofs. But excepting in these rare cases, plants grow nearly 
indifferently on all primitive surfaces, in the sense in which we here take these terms ; 
the result of which is, that earths strictly or chemically so termed, have much less in- 
fluence on the distribution of plants, than temperature, elevation, and moisture. Another 



Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETABLES. 



201 



result is, as De CandoUe has well remarked, that it is often a very bad method of cul- 
ture to imitate too exactly the nature of the earth in which a plant grows in its wild 
state. 

928. Mixed or secondary soils include not only primitive earths, or the debris of rocks, 
but vegetable matters — not only the medium through which perfect plants obtain their 
food, but that food itself. In this view of the subject the temi soil is used in a very ex- 
tensive acceptation, as signifying, not only the various sorts of earths which constitute the 
surface of the globe, but every substance whatever on which plants are found to vegetate, 
or from which they derive their nourishment. The obvious division of soils in this ac- 
ceptation of the term is that of aquatic, terrestrial, and vegetable soils ; corresponding 
to the division of aquatic, terrestial, and parasitical plants. 

929. Aquatic soils are such as are either wholly or partially inundated with water, and 
are fitted to produce such plants only as are denominated aquatics. Of aquatics there 
are several subdivisions according to the particular situations they affect, or the degree 
of immersion they require. 

One of the principal subdivisions of aquatics is that of marine plants, such as the fuel and many of the 
algse, which are very plentiful in the seas that wash the coasts of Great Britain, and are generally at- 
tached to stones and rocks near the shore. Some of them are always immersed ; and others, which are 
situated above low water mark, are immersed and exposed to the action of the atmosphere alternately. 
But none of them can be made to vegetate except in the waters of the sea. Another subdivision of aqua- 
tics is that of river plants, such as chara, potamogeton, and nymphsea, which occupy the bed of fresh 
water rivers, and vegetate in the midst of the running stream ; being for the most part wholly immersed, 
as well as found only in such situations. 

A third subdivision of aquatics is that of paludal or fen plants, being such as are peculiar to lakes, 
marshes, and stagnant or nearly stagnant waters, but of which the bottom is often tolerably clear. In 
such situations you find the isoetis lacustris, flowering rush, water ranunculus, water violet, and a variety 
of others which uniformly affect such situations ; some of them being wholly immersed, and others im- 
mersed only in part. 

930. Earthy soils are such as emerge above ttie water and constitute the surface of the 
habitable globe, that is every where covered with vegetable productions. Plants affecting 
such soils, which comprise by far the greater part of the vegetable kingdom, are de- 
nominated terrestrial, being such as vegetate upon the surface of the earth, without having 
any portion immersed in water, or requiring any further moisture for their support 
beyond that which they derive from the earth and atmosphere. This division is, like the 
aquatics, distributed into several subdivisions according to the peculiar situations which 
different tribes affect. 

931. Some of them are maritime, that is, growing only on the sea-coast, or at no great distance from 
it, such as statice, glaux, samolus, samphire, sea-pea. 
932 Some are fluviatic, that is, affecting the banks of rivers, such as lythrum, lycopus, eupatrorium. 

933. Some are champaign, that is, affecting chiefly the plains, meadows, and cultivated fields, such as 
cardamine, tragopogon, agrostemma. 

934. Some are dumose, that is, growing in hedges and thickets, such as the bramble. 

935. Some are rudcraie, that is, growing on rubbish, such as senecio viscosus. 

936. Some are sylvatic, that is, growing in woods or forests, such as stachys sylvatica, angelica sylvestris. 

937. And, finally, some are alpine, that is, growing on the summits of mountains, such as poa alpina, 
epilobium alpinum, and many of the mosses and lichens. 

938. Vegetable soils are such as are formed of vegetating or decayed plants themselves, 
to some of w^iich the seeds of certain other plants are found to adhere, as being the only 
soil fitted to their germination and developement. The plants springing from them are 
denominated Parasitical, as being plants that will vegetate neither in the water nor earth, 
but on certain other plants, to wliich they attach themselves by means of roots that 
penetrate the bark, and from the juices of which they do often, though not always, derive 
their support. This last circumstance constitutes the ground of a subdivision of parasiti- 
cal plants, into such as adhere to the dead or inert parts of other plants, and such as ad- 
here to living plants, and feed on their juices. 

939. In the first subdivision we may Y>\a.ce parasitical mosses, lichens, and fungi, which are found as 
often, and in as great perfection on the stumps of rotten trees, and on rotten pales and stakes, as on trees 
that are yet vegetating ; whence it is also plain that they do not derive their nourishment from the juices 
of the plants on which they grow, but from their decayed parts, and the atmosphere by which they are 
surrounded ; the plant to which they cling serving as a basis of support. 

940; In the second subdivision we may place all plants strictly parasitical, that is, all such as do actually 
abstract from the juices of the plant to which they cling the nourishment necessary to the developement 
of their parts ; and of which the most common, at least as being indigenous to Britain, are the Mistletoe, 
Dodder, Broom-rape, and a sort of tuber that grows on the root of Saffron, and destroys it if allowed to 
spread. 

941. The Mistletoe ( Viscum. album) is found for the most part on the apple-tree ; but sometimes also on 
the oak. If its berry is made to adhere to the trunk or branch of either of the foregoing trees, which 
from its glutinous nature it may readily be made to do, it germinates by sending out a small globular body 
attached to a pedicle, which after it acquires a certain length bends towards the bark, whether above it or 
below it, into which it insinuates itself by means of a number of small fibres which it now protrudes, and 
by which it abstracts from the plant the nourishment necessary to its future developement. When the 
root has thus fixed itself in the bark of the supporting tree, the stem of the parasite begins to ascend, at 
first smooth and tapering, and of a pale green colour, but finally protruding a multiplicity of branches and 
leaves. It seems to have been thought bv some botanists that the roots of the Mistletoe penetrate even 
into the wood, as well as through the bark. But the observations of Du Hamel show that this opinion is 
not well founded. The roots are indeed often found within the wood, which they thus seem to have 



202 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



penetrated by their own vegetating power. But the fact is, that they are merely covered by the addi. 
tional layers of wood that have been formed since the fibres first insinuated themselves into the bark. 

942. The Cuscuta europcea, or Dodder {fig. 68.), though it 
is to be accounted a truly parasitical plant in the issue, is 
yet not originally so. For the seed of this plant when it 
has fallen to the ground takes root originally by sending 
down its radicle into the soil and elevating its stem into 
the air. It is not yet, therefore, a parasitical plant. But 
the stem which is now elevated above the surface lays 
hold of the first plant it meets with, though it is par- 
ticularly partial to hops and nettles, and twines itself 
around it, attaching itself by means of Httle parasitical 
roots at the points of contact, and finally detaching itself 
from the soil altogether by the decay of the original root, 
and becoming a truly parasitical plant. Withering de- 
scribes the plant in his arrangement as being uiiginally 
parasitical ; but this is certainly not the fact. 

943. The Orobanchc, or Broom-rape, which attaches 
itself by the root to the roots of other plants, is also to be 
regarded as being truly parasitical, though it sometimes 
sends-out fibres which seem to draw nourishment from 
the earth. It is found most frequently on the roots of 
common Broom. 

944. The Epidendron flos aeris is regarded also by 
botanists as a parasitical plant, because it is generally 
found growing on other trees. But as it is found to grow 
in old tan, it probably derives only support from the 
bark of trees, and not nourishment. 

945. Light is a body which has very considerable influence on the structure of vege- 
tables, and some also on their habitation. Ilie fungi do not require the usual interludes 
of day, in order to decompose carbonic acid gas, and can live and thrive with little or no 
light. In green plants, which require the action of light, the intensity required is very 
different in different species ; some require shady places, and hence the vegetable in- 
habitants of caves, and the plants which grow in the shade of forests ; others, and the 
greater number, require the direct action of the sun, and grow in exposed elevated sites. 
De Candolle considers that the great difficulty of cultivating Alpine plants in the gar- 
dens of plains, arises from the impossibility of giving them at once the fresh temperature 
and intense light wliich they find on high mountains. 

Sect. III. Civil Causes affecting the Distribution of Plants. 

946. By the art of man plants may be inured to circurnstances foreign to their usual 
habits. Though plants in general are limited to certain habitations destined for them by 
nature, yet some are, and probably the greater number may be, inured to climates, soils, 
and situations, of which they are not indigenous. Tlie means used are acclimating and 
culture. 

947. Accliinating seems to be most easily effected in going from a hot to a cold climate, 
particularly with herbaceous plants. Because it often happens that the frosts of winter are 
accompanied with snow, which shelters the plant from the inclemency of the atmosphere 
till the return of spring. Trees and shrubs, on the contrary, are acclimated with more 
difficulty, because they cannot be so easily sheltered from the colds, owing to the greater 
length of their stems and branches. The acclimating or naturalisation of vegetables is to 
be attempted by two modes : by sowing the seeds of successive generations, and by the 
difference of temperature produced by different aspects. The former is well exemplified 
in the case of the rice-plant which is grown in Germany, from seeds raised there, while 
if seeds from its native country', India, are used_ they will not vegetate {^Sir J. Banks, 
in Hort. Trans, vol. i.) ; and the latter in the sloping banks of Professor Thouin of 
Paris, as described by Girardin. (^Physiologie Vegetate, vol. i.) Some plants seem to 
have the capacity of vegetating in almost all climates, or of naturalising themselves in 
almost any. This is particularly the case with esculents, such as the domestic cabbages, 
potatoes, and carrots. (Dialogues on Botany, p. 411.) 

948. Domesticated jilants. " Some plants," Humboldt observes, " which constitute 
the object of gardening and of agriculture, have time out of mind accompanied man 
from one end of the globe to the other. In Europe, the vine followed the Greeks ; the 
wheat, the Romans ; and the cotton, the Arabs. In America the Tultiques carried 
with them the maize ; the potatoe and the quinoa {^Chenopodium quinoa, of which the 
seeds are used,) are found wherever have migrated the ancient Condinamarea. The 
migration of these plants is evident; but their first countrj' is as little known as that of 
the different races of men, which have been found in all parts of the globe from the ear- 
liest traditions." {Geographie des Plantes, p. 25.) 

949. The general effect of culture on j)lants is that of enlarging all their parts ; but it 
often also alters their qualities, forms, and colors : it never, however, alters their pri- 
mitive structure. " The potatoe," as Humboldt observes, " cultivated in Chili, at 
nearly twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea, cairies the same 'flower as in 
Siberia." 




Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETABLES. 



203 



950. The cvHnary vegetables of our gardens, compared with tlie same species in their 
wild state, afford striking proofs of the influence of culture on both the magnitude and 
qualities of plants. Nothing in regard to magnitude is more remarkable than in the case 
of the Brassica tribe ; and notliing, in respect to quality, exceeds the change effected on 
the celerj^ and carrot. 

951. The vifluence of culture on fruits is not less remarkable. Tlie peach, in its wild 
state in Media, is poisonous, but cultivated in the plains of Ispahan and Egypt, it be- 
comes one of the most deUcious of fruits. The effect of culture on the apple, pear, 
cherry, plum, and other fruits, is nearly as remarkable ; for not only the fruit and leaves, 
but the general habits of the tree are altered in these and other species. Tlie historj^ of 
the migration of fruit-trees has been commenced by Sickler, in a work (Geschicte, See.) 
which Humboldt has praised as equally curious and pliilosophical. 

952. The influence of culture on plants of ornament is great in most species. Tlie 
parts of all plants are enlarged, some are numerically increased, as in the case of double 
flowers ; and what is most remarkable, even the colors are frequently changed, both 
in the leaf, flower, and fruit. 

953. The influence of civilisation and culture, in increasing the number of jilants in a 
countrif, is \ery considerable, and operates directly, by introducing new species for cul- 
ture in gardens, fields, or timber-plantations ; and indirectly by the acclimating and final 
naturalisation of many species, by the influence of winds and birds in scattering their 
seeds. The vine and the fig are not indigenous to France, but are now naturalised there 
by birds. In like manner the orange is naturalised in the south of Italy. Many her- 
baceous plants of the Levant ai-e naturalised both in France and Britain ; some, as the 
cabbage, cheiiy, and apple, were probably naturalised during the subjection of England 
to the Romans. The narrow-leaved elm was brought from the Holy Land during 
the crusades. Phaseolus vulgaris, and impatiens balsamina were brought originally 
from India ; and datura stramonium, which is now naturalised in Europe, was brought 
originally from India or Abyssinia. Buckwheat and most species of corn and peas 
came also from tlie East, and along with them several plants found among corn only, 
such as centaurea cyanus, agrostemma githago, raphanus raphanistrum, and myagrum 
sativum. The country from whence the most valuable grasses migrated is not known. 
Bruce says he found the oat wild in Abyssinia, and wheat and millet have been found in 
a wild state in liilly situations in the East Indies. Rye and the potatoe were not known to 
the Romans. The countiy of the former Humboldt declares to be totally unknown. 

954. The greatest refinement in culture consists in the successful formation of artificial 
climates for the culture of tropical plants in cold regions. Many vegetables, natives of 
the torrid zone, as the pine-apple, the palm, &c. cannot be acclimated in temperate 
countries. But by means of hot-houses of different kinds they are growm even on tlie 
borders of the frozen zone to the highest degree of perfection ; and in Britain some of 
the tropical fruits, as the pine and melon, are brought to a greater size and better flavor 
than in their native habitations. Casting our eyes on man, and the effects of his indus- 
try-, we see him spread on the plains and sides of mountains, from the frozen ocean to 
the equator, and ever}- M'here he wishes to assemble around him whatever is useful and 
agreeable of his own or of other countries. The more difficulties to surmount, the more 
rapidly are developed the moral faculties ; and thus the ci\dlisation of a people is almost 
always in an inverse ratio with the fertility of the soil which they inhabit. What is the 
reason of this ? Humboldt asks. Habit and the love of the site natal. 

Sect. IV. Characteristic or Picturesque Distribution of Vegetables. 

955. The social arul antisocial habits of plants is one of their most remarkable charac- 
teristics. Like animals they live in two classes : the one class grows alone and scattered, 
as solanum dulcamara, lychnis dioica, polygonum bistorta, anthericum liliago, &c. The 
other class unites in society, like ants or bees, covers immense surfaces, and excludes other 
species, such as fragaria vesca, vaccinium myrtillus, polygonum aviculai-e, aira canescens, 
pinus sylvestris, &c. Burton states that the mitchella repens is the plant most extensively 
spread in North America, occupying all the ground between the 28° and 69^ of north 
latitude. The arbutus uva ursi, extends from New Jersey to the 72° of latitude. On 
the contrary, gordonia, franklinia, and dioneea muscipula are found isolated in small 
spots. Associated plants are more common in the temperate zones than in the tropics, 
where vegetation is less uniform and more picturesque. In the temperate zones, the 
frequency of social plants, and the culture of man, has rendered the aspect of the country 
comparatively monotonous. Under the tropics, on the contrary, all sorts of forms are 
anited ; thus cypresses and pines are found in the forests of the Andes of Quindiu, and of 
Mexico ; and bananas, palms, and bamboos in the valleys, (fig. 69. ) But green meadows 
and the season of spring are wanting in the south, for nature has reserved gifts for every 
region. "The valleys of the Andes," Humboldt observes, " are ornamented with bananas 
and palms j on the mountains are found oaks, firs, barberries, alders, brambles, and a 



2C4 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



crowd of genera believed to belong only to countries of the north. Thus the inhabitant 
of the equinoctial regions views all the vegetable forms which nature has bestowed around 
him on the globe. Earth developes to his eyes a spectacle as varied as the azure vault 
of heaven, which conceals none of her constellations." The people of Europe do not 



69 




enjoy the same advantage. The languishing plants, which the love of science or luxury 
cultivates in our hot-houses, present only the shadow of the majesty of eqvinoctial vege- 
tation ; but by the richness of our language, we paint these countries to the imagination, 
and individual man feels a happiness peculiar to civilisation. 

956. The features of many plants are so obvious and characteristic, as to strike every 
general observer. The scitaminea?, tree-heaths, firs, and pines, mimosae, climbers, cacti, 
grasses, lichens, mosses, palms, equisitaceae, arums, pothos, dracontium, &c. the chafFy- 
leaved plants, malvaceaj, orchidca;, liliacere, &c. form remarkable groups distinguishable 
at first sight. Of these groups, the most beautiful are the palms, scitamineae, and liliaceo", 
which include the bamboos and plantains, the most splendid of umbrageous plants. 

957. The native countries of plants may often be discovered by their features in the same 
manner as the national distinctions which are obsei-vable in the looks and color of man- 
kind, and which are effected chiefly by climate. Asiatic plants are remarkable for their 
superior beauty ; African plants for their thick and succulent leaves, as in the case of the 
cacti ; and American plants for the length and smoothness of their leaves, and for a sort 
of singularity in the shape of the flower and fruit. The flowers of European plants are 
but rarely beautiful, a great proportion of them being amentaceous. Plants indigenous 
to polar and mountainous regions are generally low, with small compressed leaves ; but 
widi flowers large in proportion. Plants indigenous to New Holland are distinguishable 
for small and dry leaves, that have often a shrivelled appearance. In Arabia they are low 
and dwarfish ; in the Arcliipelago they are generally shrubby and furnished with prickles ; 
while in the Canary Islands many plants, which in other countries are merely herbs, 
assume the port of sliiubs and trees. Tlie shrubby plants of the Cape of Good Hope 
and New Holland exhibit a striking similarity, as also the shrubs and trees of the northern 
parts of Asia and America, which may be exempUfied in the platanus orientalis of the 
former, and in platanus occidentaHs of the latter, as well as in fagus sylvatica and fagus 
latifolia, or acer cappadocium and acer saccharinum ; and yet the herbs and under- 
shrubs of the two countries do not in the least correspond. " A tissue of fibres," Hum- 
boldt observes, " more or less loose — vegetable colors more or less vivid, according to 
the chemical mixture of their elements, and the force of the solar rays, are some of the 
causes which impress on the vegetables of each zone their characteristic features." 

958. The influence of the general aspect of vegetation on the taste and imagination of a jieojile 
— the difference in this respect between the monotonous oak and pine forests of the 
temperate zones, and the picturesque assemblages of palms, mimosas, plantains, and 
bamboos of the tropics — the influence of the nourishment, more or less stimulant, 
peculiar to different zones, on the character and energy of the passions : — these, Humboldt 
observes, unite the history of plants with the moral and political history of man. 



Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETABLES. 



205 



Sect. V. Systematic Distinbution of Vegetables. 

959. TJie distribution of plants, considered in respect to their systematic classificatioyis, is 
worthy of notice. The three grand systematic divisions of plants are acotyledoneae, dico- 
tyledoneae, and monocotyledoneaj. A simplification of this division considers plants as 
agamous, or phanerogamous, that is, without or with visible sexes. 

960. Plants of visible sexes. Taking the globe in zones, the temperate contain i part 
of all the phanerogamous or visible sexual species of plants. The equinoctial countries 
contain nearly J^, and Lapland only ^ part. 

961. Plants ivith the sexual parts invisible or indistinct. Taking the whole surface of 
the globe, the agamous plants, that is, mosses, fungi, fuci, &c. are to the phanerogamae 
or perfect plants, nearly as 1 to 7 ; in the equinoctial countries as 1 to 5 ; in the tem- 
perate zones as 2 to 5 ; in New Holland as 2 to 11; in France as 1 to 2 ; in Lapland, 
Greenland, Iceland, and Scotland, they are as 1 to I, or even more numerous than the 
phanerogamous plants. Within the tropics, agamous plants grow only on the summits of 
the highest mountains. In several of the islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, having a Flora 
of phanerogamous plants exceeding 200 species, R. Brown did not observe a single moss. 

962. In the whole globe, the monocotyledoneic, including the grasses, liliaceae, scita- 
menese, &c. are to the whole of the perfect plants as 1 to 6 ; in the temperate zones 
(between 36° and 52",) as 1 to 4; and in the polar regions as 1 to 20. In Germany, the 
rtionocotyledonese are to the total number of species as 1 to 4^ ; in France as 1 to 4| ; iii 
New Holland the three grand divisions of plants, beginning with the acotyledoneae, are 
nearly as 1, 2i, and 1\. 

963. DicotyledonecB. In the whole globe, the monocotyledoneae are estimated, by 
R. Brown, from Persoon's Synopsis, {Gen. B.em. on the Bot. of Terr. Aust. 1814,) to be 
to the dicotyledoneae as 2 to 11 ; or with the addition of undescribed plants, as 2 to 9. 
From the equator to 30° of north latitude, they are as 1 to 5. In the higher latitudes a 
gradual diminution of dicotyledoneae takes place, until in about 60° north latitude and 
50° south latitude they scarcely equal half their intertropical proportions. The ferns in 
the temperate regions are to the whole number of species as 1, 2, and 5 ; that is, in the 
polar regions as 1, in the temperate countries as 2, and in the intertropical regions as 5. 
In France, ferns form part of the phanerogamous plants ; in Germany j in Lap- 
land ^. 

964. The natural orders of perfect or phanerogamous plants are variously distributed in 
different countries. The following Table gives a general view of the relative proportions 
of several natural orders of perfect plants in France, Germany, and Lapland. 



Names of Natural Orders. 



Cyperoideae 

Graminese - - 

Junceae - - 

These three Families together 
Orchide^ - - - 
Labiatae - - _ 

Rhinantheae et Scrophuleas - 
Boragineae 

Ericeae et Rhododendreae 

Compositae 

Umbelliferee 

Crucifer^ - 

Malvaceae 

Caryophyllece 

Leguminoseae 

Euphorbeae 

Amentaceae 

Conifereae - - 



Number of Species in 
different Countries. 



Fran. 



134 
284 
42 



460 
54 
149 
147 
49 
29 
490 
170 
190 
25 
165 
230 
51 
69 
19 

3645 



Lapl. 



102 

143 
20 



265 
44 
72 
76 
26 
21 

238 
86 

106 
8 
71 
96 
18 
48 
7 

1884 



124 
11 

7 
17 

6 
20 
38 

9 
22 

29 
14 
1 

23 
3 

497 



Ratio of each Family to the 
whole of the Phanero- 
gamous plants in these 
Countries. 



Fran. 



Germ. 



533 

1 

27 



1-apl. 



205 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



965. The most universal plants are the agamous 
families. Their germs are the only ones which nature 
developes spontaneously in all climates. The poly- 
trychum commune (Jig. 70. ) grows in all latitudes ; in 
Europe and under the equator ; on high mountains and 
on a level with the sea ; in short, wherever there is 
shade ^nd humidity. No phanerogamous plants have 
organs sufficiently flexible to accommodate themselves in 
this manner to every zone. Tlie alsine media, fragaria 
vesca, and solanum nigrum, have been supposed to enjoy 
this advantage ; but all tliat can be said is, that these 
plants are very much spread, like the people of the race 
of Caucasus, in the nortliern part of the ancient con- 
tinent. ( Hwnboldt. ) 



Sect. VI. Economical Distribution of Vegetables. 

966. The plants chiefly employed in human economy diff'er in different climates and 
countries; but some, as the cereal grasses, are in universal use ; and others, as the banana 
and plantain (fig. 71.), only in the countries which 
product' tiiem. 

967. The bread-corn of the temperate climates is 
chiefly wheat and maize ; of the hot climates rice, and 
of the coldest climates bai-ley. 

968. The edible roots of the old world are chiefly the 
yam, sweet potatoe, onion, carrot, and turnip ; of the 
new the potatoe. 

969. 2Vie oleraceous herbs of temperate climates are 
chiefly the brassica family, and other cruciferae. In 
hot climates pot-«erbs are little used. Legumes, as 
the jiea, bean, and kidney-bean, are in general use in 
most parts of the old world. 

970. The fruits of the northern he?nisphere belong 
chiefly to the orders of Pomaceae, Amygdalincce, 
Grossulareae, Rosaceae, Viticece, and Amentaceee. 

The fruits of the East Indies belong chiefly to Myrtaceae, Guttifereae, Aurantea, Musaceae, Palmae, Cu 
curbitaceje, Myristicece, &c. 

The fruits qf China are chiefly of the orders of Aurante^, Myrtaceae, Rhamnes, Pomaces, Amygda 
linea?, Palma?, &c. 

Tfie fruits of Africa belong to Sapoteje, Palmse, Chrysobalaneae, Guttiferese, Apocines, PapiUonaceae, 
Musacea;, and Cucurbitacefe. 

The f ruits of South America belong to Annonacea?, Myrtaceas, Terebintaceae, Myristices, Palmae, Bro- 
meliaccEe, Sapoteas, Laurin£e, Chrysobalanes-, Musaceae, PapilionaceEe, and Passifloreae. 

971. The most showy herbaceoiis fioivers of the temperate zone belong to Rosaceae, Li- 
liacese, Irideae, Ericinae, Ranunculacese, Primulaceee, Caryophylless, Gentianeae, &c. 
Those of the torrid zone belong to the Scitamineae, Amaryllideae, Bignoniaceas, Mela- 
stomaceas, Magnoliaceae, Papilionaceas, Apocineae, &c. 

The most useful timber-trees of temperate climates are of the pine or fir kind j of warm climates the 
palm and bamboo. The universal agricultural order is the Graminece. 

Sect. VII. Arithmetical Distribution of Vegetables. 

972. The total number of species of plants known, or believed to exist, amounts to about 
44,000, of which 38,000 have been described. According to Humboldt and R. Brown, 
they are thus distributed : in Europe 7000 ; in temperate Asia 1500; in equinoctial Asia 
and the adjacent islands 4500 ; in Africa 3000 ; in temperate America, in both hemi- 
spheres, 4000 ; in equinoctial America 13,000 ; in New Holland and the islands of the 
Pacific Ocean 5000 ; — in all 38,000. In Spitzbergen there are 30 species of perfect 
plants ; in Lapland 534 ; in Iceland 533 ; in Sweden 1299; in Scotland 900 ; in Britain 
1400 ; in Brandenburg 2000 ; in Piedmont 2800 ; in Jamaica, Madagascar, and the coast 
of Coroinandel, from 4000 to 5000. 

Sect. VIII. Distribution of the British Flora, indigenous and exotic. 

973. About thirteen thousand j^lants compose the Hortus Britannicus, or such species 
as admit of cultivation. Mosses, Fungi, Fuci, Algas, and Lichens are, with a few ex- 
ceptions, excluded. 





Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRITISH FLORA. 



207 



974. The natives of Britain which enter into this Hortus are upwards of 1400 species ; 
but the native British Flora contains in all above 3300 species. Of these there are about 
1437 cotyledonous plants, and nearly 1893 of imperfect, or of what are termed, in the 
Jussieuean system, acotyledoneae. 

975. Of the cotyledonous or perfect plants, 182 are trees or shrubs; 855 are peren- 
nials ; 60 are biennials, and 340 annuals. Of the trees and shrubs, 47 are trees ; 25 
above thirty feet high, and the remainder under thirty, but above 10 feet high. Of the 
perennials 83 are grasses ; the next greatest number belong to the two first orders of the 
class Pentandria ; the next to the Syngenesia ; and the third to Moncecia Triandria, or 
the Cyperacese of Jussieu, comprehending chiefly the genus Carex. Most of the bien- 
nials belong to the first order of the 1 9th class, and the two first orders of Pentandria. 
There are 41 annual grasses ; 52 annuals belong to the two first orders of Pentandria ; 
and the next greatest number of annuals to Diadelphia Decandria, which includes the tre- 
foils and vetches. 

976. Of the Cryptogamece, or imperfect plants, 800 are fungi; 18 algae; 373 lichens; 
85 hepaticae ; 460 musci ; and 130 ferns ; according to an estimate (in Rees's Cyclop, art. 
Plant,) understood to be made by Sir J. E. Smith. 

977. In regard to the distribution of the perfect plants as to elevation, little or nothing 
has been yet generalised on the subject. In regard to soils, 276 are found in bogs, and 
marshy or moist places ; 140 on the sea-shores ; 128 in cultivated grounds ; 121 in mea- 
dows and pastures; 78 in sandy grounds ; 76 in hedges and on hedge-banks ; 70 on 
chalky and other calcareous soils ; 64 on heaths ; 60 in woods ; 30 on walls ; 29 on 
rocks ; and 1 9 on salt-marshes ; — reckoning from Galpine's Compend. FL Brit. 

978. In the distribution of the CryptogamecB, the ferns prevail in rocky places and wastes ; 
most of the musci, hepatici, and lichens, on rocks and trees ; most of the fuci and algae 
in the sea ; and of the fungi, on decaying vegetable bodies, especially trunks of trees, 
manures, &c. 

979. In respect to geographical distribution, the mountainous and hilly districts of Eng- 
land and South Wales are most prolific ; the greatest number, according to extent of sur- 
face, are found in England and Wales, and the smallest number in Ireland. 

980. The genera of the native British Flora have been already arranged according to the 
Linnaean and Jussieuean systems (where they are distinguished by marks *) ; they enter 
into 23 classes and 71 orders of the former, and 8 classes and 121 orders of the latter 
system. 

981. With respect to the uses or aj)plication of the native Flora, there are about 18 sorts 
of wild fruits which may be eaten, exclusive of the wild apple and pear ; but only the 
pear, apple, plum, currant, raspberry, strawberry, and cranberry, are gathered wild, or 
cultivated in gardens. There are about 20 boiling culinary plants natives, including the 
cabbage, sea-kale, asparagus, turnip, carrot, and parsnep. There are about the same 
number of spinaceous plants, salading, and pot and sweet herbs, which may be used, but 
of which but a few only enter into the dietetics of modern cooks. There are three fungi, 
in general use, the mushroom, truffle, and morel; and various others, as well as about 
eight species of sea-weeds, are occasionally eaten. There are about six native plants 
cultivated as florists' flowers, including the primula elatior, crocus, narcissus, dianthus, 
&c. Nearly 100 grasses, clovers, and leguminous plants are used in agriculture, or serve 
in their native places of growth as pasturage for cattle. Two native plants, the oat and 
the big, or wild barley, are cultivated as farinaceous grains. Most of the trees are used 
in the mechanical arts, for fuel, or for tanning : one plant, the flax, not an aboriginal 
native, but now naturalised, affords fibre for the manufacture of linen cloth. Various 
plants yield colored juices, which may be, and in part are, used in dyeing ; and some hundred 
species have been, and a few are still used in medicine. About 20 cotyledonous plants, 
and above 50 cryptogameee, chiefly fungi, are, or are reputed to be, poisonous, both to 
men and cattle. . 

982. By the artificial Flora of Britain, we understand such of the native plants as admit of 
preservation or culture in gardens ; and such exotics as are grown there, whether in the open 
ground, or in different descriptions of plant habitations. The total number of species 
Which compose this Flora, or Hortus Britannicus, as taken from Sweet's catalogue, is, as 
already observed (973.), about 13,000, including botanists' varieties, and excluding 
agamous plants. This is nearly a fourth part of the estimated Flora of our globe, and 
maybe considered in regard to the countries from whence the plants were introduced; 
the periods of their introduction ; their obvious divisions ; their systematic classification ; 
their garden habitations ; their application ; and their native habitations. 

983. With respect to the native countries of the artificial Flora or Hortus Britannicus, 
of 970 species the native countries are unknown ; the remaining 12,000 species were first 
introduced from the following countries : — 



208 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11. 



Europe. 


Asia. 


Continent. 




Continent. 




S. of Europe - 


659 


East Indies - 


826 


Spain 


266 


Siberia - 


364 


Italy - 


202 




213 


Hungary - 


173 


China 


205 


Austria - 


171 


Caucasus - 


67 


Germany - - 


134 


Persia - 


37 


Switzerland - 


117 


Japan - 


36 


France - 


103 


Syria - - 


19 


Various other") 
Parts - J 


446 


Various other") 
Parts - S 


82 


Islands. 




Islands. 




Madeira - 


75 


New So. Wales 


239 


Candia 


66 


New Holland 


152 


Other Islands - 


S52 


Ceylon 


31 


Britain - 


1400 


VanDieman's") 








Land - 3 


21 






Other Islands 





Africa. 



Continent. 
Cape of Good7 , 
Hope - j- 
Barbary - 
Eg>Tt - - 
Morocco - 
Sierra Leone - 
Guinea - 
Abyssinia - 
Algiers 

Various other^ 



Parts 



Islands. 
Canaries - - 
Teneriffe - 
St. Helena 
Cape Verde 1 
Islands - ' 



\xMERICA. 



S. Continent. 
Mexico - 
Peru . - - 
Brazil 
Guinea - 
Vera Cruz 
Caraccas - 
Chili 

Buenos Ayres 
Various other' 
Places 

S. Islands. 
Cayenne - 
Falkland 

Islands 
Terra del 

Fuego 



- ] 



1 N. Continent 
102 1 United States 1222 
77 Carolina - 
74 Virginia - 
33 i Canada - 
22 j Missouri 
21 Louisiana 
29 Georgia - 
8 Florida - 
Other Parts 
of British 
America and 
the United 
States - - 



275 



111 



European plants in the artificial Flora of Britain 
Asiatic . . - - . 
African . . . . . 
South America . . - . 

North America . . . - 

Native countries unknown . _ . 



N. Islands. 
West Indies - 
Jamaica - 
Bahamas - - 
Other Islands 

- 4169 

- 2365 



- 644 

- 2333 

- 970 

13,140 



984. With respect to the dates of the iyitroduction of the exotics from those different 
countries, the dates of the introduction of none are known before the time of Gerard, in 
Henry VIII. 's reign. From this author and Trew, it appears that 47 species were intro- 
duced on or before 1548, including the apricot, fig, pomegranate, &c. Those previously 
introduced, of which the dates are unknown, may be considered as left here by the Ro- 
mans, or afterwards brought over from France, Italy, and Spain, by the ecclesiastics, and 
preserved in the gardens of the religious houses. Henry died in 1547 ; but the plants in- 
troduced in the year after his death, may be considered as properly belonging to his reign. 

182 plants, chiefly through the 



Eihv. VI. ] Ml to 1553. During this troublous reign, only 
seven exotic species were added to the British garden, chiefly 
by Dr. Turner, director of the Duke of Somerset's (then Lord 
Protector) garden at Zion House. 

Mary. 1353 to 1558. Xo plants introduced. 

Elizabeth. 1558 to ICO". 553 species were introduced during 
this reign. Of these, 'iSS are enumerated in the first edition of 
Gerard's Herbal, published 1557. Drake's voyage round the 
world, Raleigh's discoveries in North America, and the con- 
sequent introduction of ths tobacco and potatoe, took place 
during this reign. 

James I. 1603 to 1625. Only 20 plants introduced during 
this period. 

Charles 1. 1625 to 1649. 331 plants introduced, which are 
chiefly mentioned by Parkmson, the first edition of whose 
•work was published in 1629. Parkinson was the king's herbalist, 
and Tradescant his kitchen -gardener. A tciste for plants began 
to appear among the higher classes during this reign ; various 
private gentlemen had 'botanic gardens; and several London 
merchants procured seeds and plants for Lobel, Johnston, and 
Parkinson, through their foreign correspondents. 

O. a)id R. Cromwell. 1649 to 1658. 95 plants introduced by 
the same means as before. Cromwell encouraged agriculture ; 
but the part he acted left no leisure for any description of 
elegant or refined enjovment. 

Charles II. 1660 to 1685. 152 plants introduced, chiefly 
mentioned by Ray, Morrison, and different writers in the 
Transactions of the Royal Society, founded in 1663. The 
Oxford and Chelsea gardens were founded, or enlarged, during 
tliis reign. Sir Hans Sloane and Evelju flourished. Many 
native plants were now brought into notice by Ray and 
Willoughby. 

James II. 1685 to 1688. 44 plants introduced. 

William Marij. 1688 to 1702. 298 species introduced, 
chiefly from the AVest Indies, and through Sir Hans Sloane 
and the Chelsea garden. Plunkenet succeeded Parkinson as 
royal herbalist during this reign ; and botanists were sent 
from England, for the first time, to explore foreign countries. 
As in the two former reigns, great additions were now made 
to the indigenous Flora, by Ray, Sibbald, Johnson, and 
others. Many of the 50 species annually presented to the 
Royal Society were natives. 

Anne. 1702 to 1714. 230 plants in great part from the 
East and West Indies, and through the Chehea garden. 



George I. 1714 to 1727. 
Chelsea garden. 

George II. 1727 to 1760. 1770 plants, almost entu-elj 
through the Chelsea garden, now in its zenith of fame under 
Miller. 375 of these plants are stated as introduced in 1730 
and 1731, the latter being the year in which the first folio 
edition of the Gardeners' and Botanists' Dictionary appeared. 
239 in 1759, in which year the 4th edition of the same work 
appealed. 196 in 1752, and above 400 in 1758 and 1759, 
when subsequent editions were published. In the last, in 
1763, the mmnber of plants cultivatid in England is stated to 
be more thsin double the number contained in the edition of 
1731. 

Georee III. 1760 to 1817. 6756 plants introduced, or con- 
siderably above half the whole number of exotic> now i- ilie 
gardens'of this country. This is to be accounted for from the 
general progress of civilisation, and the great extension of 
British power and influence in every quarter of the world; 
especially in the East Indies, at -the Cape of Good Hope, and 
New South Wales. The increasing liberality of intercourse 
which now obtained among the learned of all countries, 
must also be taken into account, by wliich, notwithstanding 
the existence of political ditterences, peace reigned and com- 
merce flourished in the world of science. George III. may 
also be said to have encouraged botany, aided by the advice, 
assistance, and unwearied efibits of that'distinguished patron of 
science. Sir Joseph Banks ; and the garden of Kew, and its late 
curator, Alton, became the Chelsea garden, and the Miller of 
this reign. Blost of the new plants were sent there, and first de- 
scribed in the Hort'fs Kervensis. The next greatest numbers were 
procured by the activity of the London nurserjmen, especially 
Lee and Loddiges, and described in the Botanical Magazine ; 
Andrew's Heathery ; the Botanical Register ; Loddiges* Cabi- 
net, and other works. The greatest number of plants intro- 
duced in any one yeax, during this period, is 536, in 1800, chiefly 
heaths and proteas from the Cape of Good Hope, taken from 
the Dutch in 1795. The following are the numbers annually 
introduced since that period : — 



1801. 


116 


1805. 


- 169 


1809. 


- 48 


181,-. 


- 42 


1802. 


169 


1806. 


- 224 


1810. 


- 68 


1814. 


- 44 


1803. 


267 


1S07. 


- 61 


1811. 


- 149 


1815. 


- 192 


1804. 


299 


1808. 


- 52 


1812. 


- 316 


1816. 


- 301 



Annual Average of 17 years, ending 1816, 156 species. 



985. With respect to the obvious character of the artificial Flora, 350 species are hardy 
trees or shrubs ; of these 270 are trees above 10, and 100 trees above 30 feet high. Of 
these, the larch, spruce fi^r, silver fir, and Lombardy poplar, sometimes attain the height 
of 100 feet. Above 400 species are hardy grasses. Of the tender exotics, the greater 
number are trees or shrubs, and the next greatest number annuals and bulbs. The 
colors of the blossoms are generally rich and vivid in proportion to the warmth of the 
climate of which the plants are natives. 

986. In regard to systematic and horticultural distribution, the following Table gives a 
combined view of the whole, arranged according to the .Linncean system, and also according 
to their habitation in the garden. 



Book I. DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRITISH FLORA. 



Class and order. 



MONANDRIA. 

Monogynia ... 
Digynia 

DiAN'DRIA. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigjnia 

Triandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

Tetrandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Tetragynia ... 
Pentamdria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

Tetragynia ... 

Pentagynia ... 

Polygynia , 

Hexandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

Heptandria. 

MonogjTiia ... 

Digynia 

Tetragynia ... 

HeptagjTiia ... 

OCTANDRIA. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigj-nia 

Tetragynia ... 
Enneandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Trigynia 

Hexagynia ... 
Decandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digjiiia 

Trigynia 

Pentagynia ... 

Decagj'nia ... 
Dodecandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

TetragjTiia ... 

Pentagynia ... 

Dodecag. 

Icosandria. 

Monogynia ... 

Di-Pentag. ... 

Polygynia 

POLYANDRIA. 

Monogynia ... 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

Pentagynia ... 
Polygynia 

DiDYNAMIA. 

GjTnnos 

Angios 

Tetradyn. 

Siliculosa 

Siliquosa 

Monadelphia. 

Triandria 

Pentandria ... 

Heptandria ... 

Octandria 

Decandria ... 

Dodecand. ... 

Polyandria ... 
Diadelphia. 

Pentandria ... 

Hexandria ... 

Octandria 

Decandria ... 
Polyadelphia. 

Decandria ... 

Dodecand. ... 

Icosandria ... 

Polyandria ... 

SVNGENESIA. 

Polyg. ffiqu. ... 



Hardy. 



II 2 - 



34 112 

2 



18 
1 

14 

117 211 

13 227 26 i 90 
42 



24 



1 

3 141 
9 



277 



196 
4 111 
67 
63 
1 



4 

9 
5 

70 138 



1 117 

6; 90 

1 3 

2 '4 



2 20 
1 1 
1 



2 
24 



, 1. 



Green-house. 



1! 3i 



42 12 



196: 5 



202 851 
26 ' 
23i - 



43 10 



34 238 
1 



o 



Dry-stove. 



Stove- 



349 



2 



18 



76 



10 



1 


3 


11 


131 


3 


1 3 
1 


106 


1 730 


3 


4 


14 


175 


8 


21 


1 


1 


1 


1 


1 


3 


41 


163 


2 


2 


6 


50 


7 


10 


3 


20 


1 


7 


1 


1 


92 


443 


12 


160 


c 


158 


1 


6 


11 


164 


22 


54 


3 


8 


3 


139 


1 


1 


1 


1 


1 


17 


18 


173 


9 


309 


10 


34fl 


32 


161 


4 


21 


3 


36 


4 


18 


28 


135 


48 


279 


81 


346 


30 


120 


20 


164 


5 


11 


7 


92 


1 


175 


1 


1 


2 


41 


5 


13 


27 


210 


2 


5 


3 


19 


2 


29 


88 


800 


1 


2 


2 




4 


32 


5 


65 


74 


274 



310 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Class and order. 


Hardy, 


Frame 




Green-house. 


Dry-stove. 


stove. 


Total. 


oYNGEN, '^COHt. 

Pol. superflua 




V. 


i 


O 




V- 


$ 




\ 




$ 


G 













If 


$ 





Ge. 


Sp. 


8 


389 


8l 98 


4 


5 


1 




101 


22 


12 






_ 


_ 


_ 


5 


5 


1 


13 




60 


673 


frustana;a . 




92 






2 


7 






20 


6 


1 


3 












2 


1 


1 


19 


177 


necessaria. 


1 


14 


■ 


14 


1 






4 


39 


13 


3 


2 


_ 


_ 


_ 


- 


1 




2 


6 


20 


100 


segregata . 


_ 


6 




2 






_ 


." 


3 


3 














1 


2 




_ 


10 


17 


GrYNANDRIA, 














































IVIonandria .. 




46 








1 


_ 




_'. 


23 


_ 


_ 


_ 




_ 




2 


50 


_ 


_ 


48 


132 


Diandria ... 




G 














1 


3 






















3 


10 


Hexandria... 


2 


6 














3 


2 














4 


2 






1 


19 


MONCECIA. 














































' Monandria . , 




_ 




g 


_ 




_ 




5 




_ 


_ 


_ 








2 


. 






5 


16 


Diandria ... 








4 


_ 








_ 


_ 






_ 


_ 








1 


_ 




2 


5 


Triandria ... 


1 


85 


* 












_ 


1 






_ 








2 


4 


_ 


3 


11 


101 


Tetrandria . . 


14f 


7 




4 


2 


1 








1 


_ 


_ 


_ 








10 


_ 


2 


. 


12 


41 


Pentandria . . 






■ 


42 










3 




_ 


_ 


_ 








1 






1 


7 


48 


Hexandria... 


_ 






1 






_ 




_ 


_ 


_ 








_ 


_ 


16 


1 


_ 


_ 


7 


11 


Polyandria . . • 


82 


17 




1 




3 






2 


2 














14 


16 


2 




22 


189 


Monadelp. ... 


36 


3 




14 


2 








13 


9 


_ 


_ 






_ 


_ 


46 


5 


4 


9 


26 


158 


Gynandria... 










































1 


1 


DlCECIA. 














































Monandria... 


. 








_ 




_ 




_ 






_ 


_ 


_ 






4 


_ 


_ 


_ 


1 


4 


Diandria ... 


84 


1 






























9 








3 


87 


Triandria ... 


1 


- 










_ 




4 


4 




_ 






_ 




3 




_ 




7 


12 


Tetrandria... 


9 












- 




33 


_ 






_ 




_ 


_ 


4 






_ 


13 


46 


Pentandria . . 


5 


1 




o 


- 


1 


- 




3 


_ 




_ 


- 


- 




_ 


5 


- 




- 


8 


18 


Hexandria... 


11 


7 






1 


- 


- 




6 




_ 


- 


_ 


- 


_ 


_ 


5 


6 


_ 


- 


8 


36 


Octandria ... 


14 


1 




2 






- 




1 
























2 


15 


flnneandria • 


2 


1 




2 










1 






_ 




_ 


_ 


_ 


_ 






_ 


2 


6 


Decandria... 


3 
















3 




_ 


_ 




- 






3 


_ 


_ 


_ 


5 


9 


Dodecand. ... 


2 


2 


■ 








- 




4 




_ 






- 


_ 




4 




_ 


_ 


6 


12 


Icosandria ... 














- 








_ 






- 




_ 


6 


_ 


_ 




3 


6 


Polyandria... 




_ 










- 


- 


16 




_ 


_ 


_ 


- 




_ 


10 






_ 


5 


26 


Mouadelp. ... 


21 








2 




- 


- 


7 


3 








- 




- 


7 




_ 




12 


40 


Gynandria... 


. 


- 






- 


- 


- 


- 


7 










- 


_ 


- 


1 


_ 




_ 


.1 


8 


POLYGA^IIA. 














































IVIonoccia ... 


24 


21 




29 




- 


- 




36 


5 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


70 


9 


2 


- 


31 


204 




25 


2 














20 
















27 








14 


(0 


Crypt oGAMiA. 














































Gonopter. ... 


1 


6 






































i 


7 


Stachyopter. 




16 






































4 


18 


Poropterid. . 










































1 


1 


Schismatopt. 




5 




































3 


9 


Filices 




5\ - 












1 
















2 


44 






26 


130 


Hydropter. . . 












































Total 


1132 


3130 


234 


123^ 


177 


21 


15 


23 t2014 


1535 


90 


382 


169 


6 







353 


438 


855 


764 


1850 


12700 



987. The foUovping Table exhibits the systematic and horticultural distribution of the 
artificial Flora of Britain, according to the Jussieuean classification, with the garden- 
habitations. 



Class and order. 




Hardy. 




Frame. 


Green-house. 


Dry-stove. 


stove. 


j TotaL 


Thalamif. ^ 1. 
Ranuncula. .. 


















T? 


If 


$ 






If 







1? 


V- 


$ 





\ Ge. Sp. 


16 


43 


_ 


4 










1 


2 














1 








23 69 


Magnoliaceae 


13 








"5 








3 
















3 








5 24 


Annonese ... 


3 








































4 16 


Menisperm. . 


3 
















3 
















4 


; 2 






5: 12 


Berberidea; .. 


7 


4 














1 


1 






















7 


i 


Thalamif. § 2. 












































Papaveracese 




18 


8 


20 




4 






























13, 51 


Cruciferese... 


46 


83 


33 


124 


"5 


1 






30 


1 


3 


2 










1 








53 3S0 


Capparideas . 




11 


1 


9 










5 


1 


1 












16 


"1 


"2 


6 


7 


S3 


Passifloreae... 


"l 


3 




7 




2 






4 


3 


1 












34 








1 


\ 55 




4 


36 




2 










5 


1 














5 








3 


63 


Pedicularese 


2 


5 




6 










15 


1 






















2 


29 




11 


A 




6 


































2 




Thalamif. ^ 3. 












































1 *' 


CaryophyU. 


5 


154 


12 


85 


1 


4 






8 


5 


5 


1 














r 




30 


281 


Malvaceae ... 


5 


16 


4 


24 


1 








1 


6 


1 


3 










71 


2 


24 


22 


35 


216 
6 


SterculiaceEe 




- 






























5 








2 


TiliaceEB 


21 








1 








43 
















65 




"1 


5 


20 


88 


Sapindeje ... 


1 
















1 
















15 






2 


10 


20 


Acereee 


22 


20 




i 




3 








"1 














8 


30 






17 


51 


Malpighiace^ 








































3 


27 


Pittosporese . 


















9 
























S 


10 


Hypericineffi 


10 


17 






8 


8 






10 




















"1 




2 


54 


Guttiferece... 


















2 
























8 


15 

8 




7 
































i 








1 


Geraniacese . 




30 




26 




3 






175 


67 


5 




















7 


309 


Meliacese ... 




1 














5 


1 














13 


"1 






14 


21 
38 


Auranteae ... 


































10 








8 




2 


6 




1 










11 


"1 


"2 




1 








1 


'1 




i 


10 


27 


Diosmaceffi 


















34 
























7 


34 



Book I. DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRITISH FLORA. 21 i 



Clnss ciiid order. 


Hardy. 


Frame. 


Green-house. 


Dry. 


stove. 


i stove. 


1 Total. 






1^ 




o 




V- 




10 



















i ^ 


1 


1 ^ 







Sp. 


1 HALAMIFIiOR. §4. 


0| 






































C 





1 c 





C 








Cai^yciflore^ 




1 




























i 












Terebintcice^ . 








































17 


1 70 


Leguminosse ,, 


52 


184 


9 


292 


9 


6 






189 


15 


5 


3 


- 








89 


10 


19 


62 


144 1054 




157 


195 


1 


I _ 


6 - 






37 


























Sr^licarecG 


- 


• 


5 










3 


1 


I 












7 


1 


1 


1 


12 


271 






i " 


































1 




4 


24 


MyrteacccS 


c 
















79 








- 


- 






S3 


1 




1 


2- 


123 


CombretaceJE . 








































"4 


9I 


cucuroit£ice<E . 




1 




8 








13 


- 


8 


- 


- 


- 


- 


_ 


- 


3 


7 


- 


1 


10 


! 4 


Loosacss 




11 










_ 






2 














2 


1 




1 





12 


OnograrecB •■• 




24 


8 


'7 




1 


1 




3 


2 


2 














2 


4 




10 




FicoidecS 


2 




_ 




"1 








152 


53 


5 


15 


- 


- 


_ 




i . 


3 


- 


4 




232 


Ssmperviveee . 




41 


- 


6 




"1 




_ 


42 


11 


5 


4 


4 
















13 


i ^ 


Portulaceas ... 


3 


6 




9 










5 


2 














! 5 


- 


3 


8 


14 




cactetE 


22 




- 


- 






" 




- 


2 




- 


55 


- 


- 


- 


3 


- 


- 


- 






oaxitragea} ... 




69 


- 


2 


'2 


18 






1 
























9 














































2 


2 






4 






































3 




^^^f?, 

v^apriioiGtS ... 


4 

55 


6 








































32 
00 


TJmbellifere^ , 


1 


172 


33 


51 


_ 








10 


8 


3 


1 












1 


1 


- 


53 


285 


CorjTGljifer^ . 


21 


494 


8 


148 


6 


12 


1 


1 


169 


54 


14 


6 




- 




- 


14 


12 


9 


SO 


133 


945 


Piubiace^ 


41 


36 


- 


11 








19 


1 














62 


2 


2 


3 


51 


153 


1^ ynarocspnai. 




127 




43 


2 


4 


3 




12 


4 


- 


1 




- 






1 


1 






23 


227 






33 


4 


26 


. 1 . 






4 




- 






- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


5 


68 


Gentianes ... 




24 


6 


9 














1 












13 


2 


- 


1 


15 


48 


Cichoracese ... 




118 


25 


59 






1 




1 


3 


2 




















10 


73 


CampanulacscE 




84 


14 


9 


■ 








8 




5 


9 










2 








10 


128 




















3 


2 




















1 


3 


Goodenovese... 




4 




































4 


g 




67 


10 






2 








42 






















20 


421 








- 
































9 


20 


CCUOLLIFLOREJE 




















































































2 


11 




















2 
















16 




- 




9 


23 


£jb6iiac8iiG... ... 


g 
















12 










- 


- 


- 


7 


- 
- 


- 


- 


8 


23 


OieinGcB 


34 








■ 
































9 


49 


Jasminese 






_ 














- 








- 






1 




- 




1 


1 


, ApocyiiGcH...... 


2 


Q 




- 










5 










- 


- 


- 


34 


- 


3 




19 


56 


Bignoniacese . 










1 






- 


4 






"2 




- 


- 




19 


2 


- 


5 


10 


47 


Pedalineas 


















4 


3 


'1 


















1 


1 


1 


x oiemoniaccEe 




27 




_ 










1 


. 


1 






- 


- 


- 


. 


. 


- 


. 


5 


24 


CouvolvulaceaB 





5 




18 










12 


9 








- 






9 


7 


1 


22 


9 


92 


Boragineas ... 




44 


17 


33 










28 


5 


'2 






- 






21 


1 




_ 


25 


152 




9 


12 


15 


49 








28 


8 












42 


3 


2 


2 


20 


174 


Scrophularineas 




102 


6 


38 


"2 


23 




1 


17 


4 


3 


5 




- 


- 


- 


11 


3 


1 


2 


41 


222 


Orobancheas... 








. 






: 




- 


2 








- 


• 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


2 


7 


Labiatv3cS 


32 


227 


11 


55 


23 


7 


2 - 


61 


13 














7 


3 


5 


15 


55 


590 


IVIyoporineas ... 


■ 










- 






5 


. 








- 


- 


- 


6 


- 




- 


4 


11 








. 












S 


3 














35 


5 


' 1 


5 


10 


61 


i-ientibuiareffi . 










































2 


9 


PrimulacGce ... 




57 


2 


7 




* 








3 






















14 


64 


Globularese ... 






1 


3 


































1 


7 


IVJoXOCHLAMYDE^ 














































PlumbaginecS . 




24 














4 


4 


1 






- 






3 






_ 


3 


44 


Planta^ineffi... 




19 


2 


I 14 










1 




1 






- 


- 






- 


- 


- 


2 


39 


Nyctagineae ... 


















2 


"1 


1 












6 


4 


- 


1 


7 


17 


AmaranthaceEE 


















1 


3 




1 










6 


4 


3 


9 


61 


23 


Chenopodese... 


_ 


5 


3 


60 










3: 1 


"1 












10 


3 


2 


2 


24 


136 


PolygonesB ... 




36 




26 










4 


2 


1 






- 


- 


- 


6 


1 


- 




8 


79 


LaurinecB 


















7 










- 


- 


- 


9 




- 


- 


2 


18 


MyristiacejE ... 





































1 


- 


- 


2 














































23 


200 


ThymelesG 

Santalaceas ... 


14 




_ 


_ 










32 














- 1 


2 


- 


- 


- 


11 


4« 


4 


4 














5 
























10 


20 


Eleagneae 


4 






. 










1 














- i 










2 


6 


Arjstoiocnese 


2 
















6 










- 






4 


1 


- 




2 


41 


EuyhorbiacesB 


4 


_ 


1 


20 










25 


1 












- j 


50 


2 


4 


9 


30 


196 




g 


'e 




10 




1 






3 


2 








- 




- 


46 


17 


2 


2 


15 


102 


AmentaceaB ... 


190 


3 






































18 


206 


C'oniferecB 


16 








































5 


26 


Ph A N E RO G AM EiE 
































i 

! 














CycadecE 


■ 
















5 










_ 




- 


8 


. 


. 


_ 


2 


13 


H}'drocharide£e 




13 




'1 










11 


- 








- 


- 




7 


14 


2 


- 


17 


58 


A-lismacGEG ... 




23 














5 










- 


- 


. ! 


- 


_ 






6 


30 


Orchideffi 




27 






1 






23 














2 I 


2 


48 






49 


128 
































- 


6 


9 






4 


15 






73 








1 






166 


2 








- 




- 


7 


5 


_ 




25 


00 


Hjemodoraceae 




1 














1 


2 






'7 


4 


- 












4 


4 


Amaryllidese . 




64 














2 


61 










- 


- 


- 


48 


- 


- 


13 


102 


Hemerocallid. 
















29 


39 














2 


9 






13 


102 




































1 


6 




: 


2 


9 


Smilacese ...... 


16 


29 




1 


1 


1 






7 


1 




















11 


59 




4 
















1 














1 


2 








47 


MelanthaceEe . 




; 37 
24 


































1 


35 


Junceae 




29 


























; 


1 




1 






32 


Restiacese 




1 








1 








4 






















7 


! CommelineEe . 




7 
























1 


9 




2 




22 



1 

V 2 



212 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Qass and order. 



Phan. — cont. 

Palmeae 

Pandanese... 

Scitamineee 
Cyperaceie .. 
Graininea2... 
Cryptogame^ 
Naiade£B ... 
Equisetaceje 
Marciliacese 
Lycopodineae 
Filiceffi 



Total 



Hardy. 



1132 



3130 



234 



1232 



Frame. 



1 

177 21 15 23 2014 



Green-house. 



'382 



Dry-stove= 



169 6 



49 . 

438 856 



Total. 



Ge.\ Sp. ! 



12 136 

75, 933: 



211 

J 

14*1 



988. The uses of these arrangements, and of the other tables in this chapter to the botanist 
^lnd cultivator, are very considerable. They aflPord a full view of tlie riches of the British 
garden ; a condensed view of the affinities of plants, by which their properties, culture, and 
alliances by grafting, crossing, &c. may be estimated ; and the means of selecting plants 
for every department of the garden. Thus, a person wishing to possess a collection of 
hardy plants, may, from the two last tables, order a certain number of annuals, biennials, 
perennials, and trees from each of the Linnsean or Jussieuean classes. Or if he wishes 
merely a few species of dried plants to illustrate each of the classes or orders of these systems, 
he may give instructions for forming a herbarium from the tables of the genera before 
given. (588, 589.) He may there also make a choice for any purpose confined to British 
plants. To the gardener these tables will be particularly useful, by enabling him to form 
arrangements in any of the departments of culture with ease and effect. Thus, supposing 
he is desirous of arranging his green-house plants according to the method of Jussieu ; 
then, beginning, say with Ranunculaceae, he finds that order contains only one tree and 
two perennials which are green-house plants ; on turning to the Jussieuean classification 
of the genera (589. ), he finds Atragene and Knowltonia furnish these. If these genera are in 
his collection, he begins by placing them together. Next, he proceeds to Magnoliaceje, 
in which there are three green-house trees, and so on ; — proceeding thus, whether in ar- 
ranging hardy, green-house, or hot-house plants in the natural method, and similarly, if 
arranging them according to that of Linnaeus. It is proper to observe, that though great 
care has been taken to attain arithmetical correctness in these tables, yet, in some cases, 
we have failed of perfect success ; but as the number of plants in the artificial Flora is 
every day increasing, and their arrangement and even names very frequently varj'ing, 
there is no occasion for absolute perfection in arithmetical enumerations for subjects such 
as ours, and even a much less degree than what has been attained would have answered 
the purpose equally well. 

989. Purchasable British Flora. The whole of the plants enumerated as forming the 
British Flora, are probably not at any one time all in existence in Britain. Many of them, 
especially the exotic species, which were introduced at Kew, have been lost there through 
accidents or diseases, and are wanting for a time till new seeds or plants are obtained from 
abroad. Had they been distributed among the nurserymen they would have been 
abundantly multiplied and spread over the country. Casualties happen even to hardy 
plants, and a species which at one time is to be found in moderate quantities in the nur- 
series is at another period comparatively scarce. Thus, if we reduce the actual number 
of species to be found in cultivation at one time to from 9000 to 10,000, it will be found 
nearer the truth. In the public nurseries, varieties are very much cultivated, in order, as 
it were, to place the beauties of esteemed species in different points of view ; or to produce 
in vegetables something analogous to what are called variations in musical compositions. 
The following may be considered as a popular or horticultural distribution of the species 
and varieties obtainable from British nurseries. It is taken from a catalogue entitled 
Prodromus, 8cc. ; or Forerunner of the collection in Page's Southampton nursery-garden, 
drawn up by L. Kennedy, (late of the Hammersmith nursery,) and published in 1818. 
It is a work of great practical utility, and with Sweet's Hortu^, should be in the hands 
of every gardener who has a collection of plants under his care. 



990. Hardy Plants. 

Sp. &Var 

Trees above 3D feet high - - 100 
Trees under 30 and above 10") 
feethiKh - - - J 
Deciduous shrubs ... 
Roses, double and single 
Evergreen shrubs - - - 



200 
500 
350 
400 



Hardy climbing shrubs - 
Herbaceous plants - . . 
Grasses introduced In botanic") 
collections - - • J 
Bulbous-rooted plants 
.'Vquatics ... 



150 
250 
50 



Book I. 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE BRITISH FLORA. 



21S 



991. Green-house and Dry-stove Plants. 



Trees and shrubs 
Heat)is 
tjeraniums 
Proteas - 



Sp. &Var. 

1450 . 
400 
150 
120 



Climbers 
Succulents - 
Mesymbryanthemums 
Bulbous-rooted plants 



Sp.&Var. 

. 90 
170 
160 
500 



Sp.&Var. 

Herbaceous and stemless plants 340 



992. Hot-house Plants. 



Trees and shrubs 
Climbers 
Succulent plants 
Bulbous-rooted plants 
Herbaceous 



Sp. &Var. 

850 
150 
150 
80 



Aquatics 

Reedy or scitaminous 



Sp. &Var. 

28 
55 



993. Annuals, native and exotic. 



Hardy 
Half hardy 
Tender 
Esculent 



Used in agriculture eidusive of grasses 



Total. Hardy, 4580; green-house and dry-stove, 3180 ; hot-house, 1463 ; annuals, 820; 
total, 10,043 ; of these, above 3000 may be considered as varieties, so that the actual 
hortus procurable in British nurseries, may be estimated, as to the British hortus of books, 
as 7 to 12, or including the cryptogamous plants, as 8 to 12. 



994. With respect to the application of the purchasable Flora of Britain, including species 
and varieties, we submit the following as only a rude outline, the subject not admitting 
of perfect accuracy from the ever-varying number of varieties. 

995. Varieties of Fruit-trees, and Fruit-bearing Plants, for Sale in British Nurseries. 



Apples . . . • 
p^frs .... 

Medlars - . . • 
Quinces • - - 
Services . - . - 
Oranges and Lemons 
Peaches . - - • 
Nectarines - • - 
Almonds 



Sp.&Var. 



Apricots - 
Plums - 
Cherries - 
Grapes - 

l'^ ^ ■• 

Gooseberries 

Currants 

Raspberries 

Strawberries 



150 
100 
50 
30 
200 
4 
10 



Cranberry 

Mulberries 

FUberts 

Walnuts 

Chestnuts 

Melons 

Pine-apples 



Sp.&Van 

2 
6 
5 
3 



996. Fsculent Herbaceous Plants, annuals and perennials, used in Horticulture. 

Pot-herbs and gamisliings 



Cabbage tribe - 
I,eguminous plants 
Esculent roots - 
Spinaceous plants 
Alliaceous plants 
Asparaginous plants 
Acetaceous plants 



Sp.&Var. 

1 35 

3 59 

10 45 

6 10 

7 18 

11 18 
25 40 



yeetl 



12 20 
18 



Plants used in confectionary \ 
and domestic medicine J 

Plants used as preserves andl , « 
pickles - - . S ° 



Sp.&Var. 

Edible wUd plants which 1 
may be used- - . J 
Edible fungi - - 3 3 

Edible fiici - - - 8 8 



Total 154 537 



997. Florists' Flowers, used in Floriculture. 

Sp. &Var. 



BiUbotis-rooted Plants, 
Hvacinths 

Tulips . - . . 
Crocuses . - • . 
Narcissi - . - 
Irisfes . . . . 
Fritilljiries - 
CroMm-imperials 
Dens canis - - . 



500 
100 
200 
60 
20 
20 
6 



Colchicums ... 
Other sorts - 

Fibrous-rooted Plants. 
Auriculas . - - . 
Polyanthi ... 
Primroses . ■. . 
Cowslips 

Pinks . . . . 
Carnations - , • 



100 
20 
10 

COO 



Tuberous.rooted PUiiUs. 
Dahlias - 
Pasonies 
Ranunculuses 
Anemonies ... 



Sp.&Var. 



400 

20 
300 



998. Hardy Timber-trees and Shrubs, used in Arboriculture, Floriculture, and Land- 
scape-gardening. 

Sp.&Var. Sp.&Var. 
Trees planted for timber . . - . . - 100 Shrubs planted for various uses, as fuel, charcoal,! 

.20 bark, firewood, &c J 



Trees planted for ornament 
Hedge-plants 



other useful purposes 



20 

Total 330 



999. Agricultural Herbaceous Plants, grown for Food for Men and Cattle, and for use 
in various Arts. 



j-20 



Plants used for dyeing - . . . 
Plants used for tlie clothing arts 
Sea-plants used . . - • . 
Mosses used in dyeing - - - • 
for varioiis purposes in the aits 



Sp. &Var, 
2 2 
2 2 
6 6 
1 1 
6 6 



Total 65 112 



Used for distillation and perfumery 



Grains for human food ------ 

Leguminous seeds ... - 
Roots ......... 

Herbage plants, not grasses . . . ■. 

grasses, and grasses for grains for the infe- 

rior animals - - - - 

Plants used for furnishing oils and essences - 

1000. Miscellaneous applicatiom of Hardy Perennials, native and exotic. 

Sp.&Var. 

Border-flowers, or such as are used in flower-gar-T ,00 

dens and shrubberies, in ordinary cases about J 
Used in the modem pharmacopoeias ... 50 

Sold by herbalists, and used by quacks and irregu- 1 on — — 

lar practitioners ...... j 

1001. Application of curious Hot-house Exotics, or such j)lants of ornament as require the 
protection of glass. Of these there are in ordinary green-houses seldom more than 100 species 
and varieties, and not more than half that number in most of our plant-stoves. The 
remainder of this class are confined to the public and private botanic gardens, and to eminent 

P 3 



Sp.&Var. 
20 

Total 870 



214 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Paut 11. 



public nurseries. Many of this di\ision are of great importance in tiieir native countries, 
as the indigo, sugar-cane, tea-tree, cinnamon, &c. ; the mango, durion, and other excellent 
fruits, the palms, bamboos, &c. Even some here treated as entii-ely ornamental, afford 
useful products in their own countries, as the camellia, sun-flower, &;c. from the seeds of 
which oils are expressed in Cliina and America. Tlie cultivation or preserv ation of li\"ing 
specimens of these plants, therefore, in our green-houses and stoves, is a rational entertain- 
ment, and also useful, as many species become in time acclimated, and some even natu- 
ralised ; and uses may in time also be discorerdd for such as are now merely looked on as 
objects of curiositj-. But it is quite enough to justify much more tlian all the care that 
is taken to obtain and preserve them, that they contribute to elegant enjoyment ; for what 
is life when it does not exceed mere obedience to the animal instincts ? 

1002. With respect to the native habitations of the exotic jmrt of the Hortus Brilannicus, 
little can be advanced with certainty. In general it seems to appear that moist and mo- 
derately warm climates, and irregular surfaces, are most prolific in species ; and judging 
of the whole world from Europe, we should venture to consider half the species of plants 
in existence as growing in soft and rather moist grounds, whether low or elevated. The 
soil of surfaces constantly moist, or inclining to be moist, whether watered from the at- 
mosphere or from subterraneous sources, is almost always found to be minutely divided, 
and generally of a black vegetable or peatj- nature. Immense tracts in Russia and Ame- 
rica are of this description, and even when dry, resist evaporation better than any other. 
In such soils, the roots of plants are generally small and finely divided, as in tlie heaths, 
most bog plants, and nearly all the American shrubs. Tlie next sort of habitation most 
prolific in species, appears to us to be arenarious soils in temperate climates, and in pro- 
portion to their moisture. Here the roots of plants are also small, but less so than in 
soils of the former description. On rocky and calcaieous soils the roots of plants are ge- 
nerally strong and woody, or at least long and penetrating. In clayey habitations, ex- 
clusive of the allurial depositions of rivers, few plants are found, and tliese generally 
grasses, or strong fibrous-rooted herbaceous plants, or tap-rooted trees. Such at least is 
the amount of our generalisations ; but as our observation has been limited to Europe, and 
does not even extend to the whole of it, those who have %'isited Africa and Asia are much 
more capable of illustrating the subject. One conclusion we tliink the cultivator is fully 
entitled to draw, that the greater number of plants, native or foreign, will thrive best in 
light soil, such as a mixture of soft black vegetable mould or peat and fine sand kept 
moderately moist ; and that on recei\ing unknown plants or seeds, of the native sites of 
which he is ignorant, he vdW err on the safe side by placing them in such soils rather 
than in any other ; avoiding, most of all, clayey and highly manured soils, as only fit 
for certain kinds of plants constitutionally robust, or suited to become monstrous by 
culture. 



Chap. XI. 

Origin of CvMure, as derived from tlie Study of Vegetables. 

1003. jfgriindtiire and gardening are the two arts which embrace the wliole business of 
cultivating vegetables, for whatever purpose they are applied by civilised man, and in this 
respect their fundamental principles are the same ; they ai-e all indicated by nature, and 
explained by vegetable chemistry and physiology. 

1004. The object of vegetable culture is either to increase the number of plants ; to in- 
crease their number and retain their native qualities ; to increase their number and im- 
prove their qualities ; to increase their magnitude ; to increase their number, improve tlie 
qualitj", and increase the magnitude of particular parts of the vegetable; to form new varieties 
for the furtherance of all or any of the above purposes ; to propagate r.nd preserve from 
degenerating approved varieties of vegetables ; and to presei-ve vegetables for future use, 

T/ie first step, for all these objects in connnon, is to procure the desired plant, either by removing it in 
an entire state from its native site, and planting it in an appropriate situation ; or by gathering and sow- 
ing its seeds ; or by propagating from a part of the plant. Hence the general origin both of agriculture an'^ 
gardening, and of all the different modes of propagation, transplanting, and collecting seeds. 

Tile next step is to secure the plants to be cultivated from the depredations of animals, or unsu!- 
weathor, either by surrounding them with an adeqiiate barrier -R here they are growing fortuitously, or 
removing them to' a spot already protected. Hence the origin of fences and enclosures, and plant hz 
tions. 

A third step common to all the above objects of culture is to remove from the vicinity of the plant to oe 
cultivated, or from the plant itself, all other plants, or animals, or objects likely to impede its progress. 
Hence the origin of weeding, thinning, destroying insects, and curing diseases. 

1005. To in-crease the number and retain the native qualities of vegetables, it is necessary 
tx) imitate, as exactly as circumstances will admit, their native habitation, in respect to 
soil, climate, mode of vratering, light, &c. If the habitation is in any way ameliorated, 
the qualities of the plant will be altered, and its parts enlarged, wliich is not desired. 



Book I. 



ORIGIN OF VEGETABLE CULTURE. 



215 



All that is necessary, therefore, for effecting this branch of culture, is to imitate the habit- 
ation, and to propagate. This is, or ought to be the case, wherever plants are grown for 
medical or botanical purposes, as in herb and botanic gardens. Nature is here imitated 
as exactly as possible, and the result is productions resembling, as near as possible, those 
of nature. 

1006. To increase the number and improve the qualities of plants, it is necessary to faci- 
litate their mode of nutrition by removing all obstacles to the progress of the plant. 
These obstacles may either exist under or above the surface ; and hence the origin of drain- 
ing, clearing from surface-incumbrances, and the various operations, as digging, plough- 
ing, &c. for pulverising the soil. Nature suggests this in accidental ruptures of the 
surface, broken banks, the alluvial depositions from overflowing rivers, and the earth 
thrown up by underground animals. Many of the vegetables within the influence of 
such accidents are destroyed, but such as remain are ameliorated in quality, and the reason 
is, their food is increased, because their roots, being enabled to take a more extensive 
range, more is brought within their reach. 

1007. It is necessary, or at least advantageous, to supply food artificially ; and hence the 
origin of manuring. All organised matters are capable of being converted into the food 
of plants ; but the best manure for ameliorating the quality, and yet retaining the peculiar 
chemical properties of plants, must necessarily be decayed plants of their own species. 
It is true that plants do not differ greatly in their pidmary principles, and that a supply 
of any description of putrescent manure will cause all plants to thrive ; but some plants, 
as wheat, contain peculiar substances, (as gluten and phosphate of lime,) and some ma- 
nures, as those of animals, or decayed wheat, containing the same substances, must neces- 
sarily be a better food or manure for such plants. Manui-ing is an obvious imitation of 
nature, every where observable by the decaying herbage of herbaceous plants, or the fal- 
len leaves of trees, rotting into dust or vegetable mould about their roots ; and by the 
effect of the dung left by pasturing or other animals. 

1008. Amelioration of climate is farther advantageous, in improving the qualities of vege- 
tables, by increasing or diminishing its temperature according to the nature of the plant ; 
unless, indeed, it be situated in a climate which experience and observation show to be 
exactly suited to its nature. Hence the origin of shelter and shade, by means of walls, 
hedges, or strips of plantation ; of sloping surfaces or banks, to receive more directly or 
indirectly the rays of the sun ; of soils T>etter calculated to absorb and retain heat ; walls 
fully exposed to the south, or to the north ; of training or spreading out the branches of 
trees on these walls ; of hot- walls ; of hot-beds ; and finally of all the variety of hot-houses. 
Nature suggests this part of culture, by presenting, in every country, different degrees of 
shelter, shade, and surface, and in every zone different climates. 

1009. The regulation of moisture is the next point demanding attention; for when the 
soil is pulverised, it is more easily dried by the penetration of the air ; when an increase 
of food is supplied, the medium through which that food is taken up by the plant should 

• be increased ; and when the temperature is increased, evaporation becomes greater. 
Hence the origin of watering by surface or subterraneous irrigation, manual supplies to 
. 'the root, showering over the leaves, steaming the surrounding atmosphere, &c. This is 
only to imitate the dews and showers, streams and floods of nature ; and it is to be re- 
gretted that the imitation is in most countries attended vnth. so much labor, and requires 
so much nicety in the arrangement of the means, and judgment in the application of the 
water, that it is but very partially applied by man in every part of the world, excepting 
perhaps a small district of Italy. But moisture may be excessive ; and on certain soils at 
certain seasons, and on certain productions at particular periods of their progress, it may 
be necessary to carry off a great part of the natural moisture, rather than let it sink into 
the earth, or draw it off where it has sunk in and injuriously accumulated, or prevent its 
falling on the crop at all ; and hence the origin of surface-drainage by ridges, and of un- 
der-draining by covered conduits, or gutters ; and of awnings and other covers to keep off 
the rain or dews from ripe fruits, seeds, or rare flowers. 

1010. The regulation of light is the remaining point. Light sometimes requires to be ex- 
cluded and sometimes to be increased, in order to improve the qualities of vegetables ; 
and hence the origin of thinning the leaves which overshadow fruits and flowers, the 
practice of shading cuttings, seeds, &c., and the practice of blanching. The latter 
practice is derived from accidents observable among vegetables in a wild state, and its in- 
fluence on their quality is physiologically accounted for by the obstruction of perspiration, 
and the prevention of the chemical changes effected by light on the epidermis. 

101 1. Increasing the magnitude of vegetables, without reference to their quality, is to be 
obtained by an increased supply of all the ingredients of food, distributed in such a body 
of well pulverised soil as the roots can reach to ; of heat and moisture ; of a partial ex- 
clusion of the direct rays of the sun, so as to moderate perspiration ; and of wind, so as to 
prevent sudden desiccation. But experience alone can determine what plants are best 
suited for this, and to what extent the practice can be carried. Nature gives the hint in 

P 4 



216 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



tlie occasional luxuriance of plants accidentally placed in favorable circumstances, and 
man adopts it, and impro^dng on it, produces cabbages and turnips of half a cwt. ; apples 
of one pound and a half ; and cabbage-roses of fovir inches in diameter ; productions 
•which may in some respects be considered as diseased. 

1012. To increase the number, irnprove the quality, and increase the magnitude of parti- 
cular parts of vegetables. It is necessary, in this case, to remove such parts of the vegeta- 
ble as arc not wanted, as the blooms of bulbous or tuberous rooted plants, vi'hen the bulbs 
are to be increased, and the contrary ; the water-shoots and leaf-buds of fruit-trees ; the 
flower-stems of tobacco ; the male flowers and barren runners of the cucumis tribe, &c. 
Hence the important operations of pruning, ringing, cutting off large roots, and other 
practices for improving fruits and throwing trees into a bearing state. At first sight these 
practices do not appear to be copied from nature ; but, independently of accidents by fire, 
already mentioned, which both prune and manure, and of fruit-bearing trees, say thorns 
or oaks, partially blo%\-ri out by the roots, or washed out of the soil by torrents, which 
.always bear better afterwards, why may not the necessity that man was under, in a pri- 
mitive state of society, of cutting or breaking off branches of trees, to form huts, fences, 
or fires, and the consequent vigorous shoots produced from the parts where the amputa- 
tion took place, or the larger fruit on that part of the tree which remained, have given the 
first idea of pruning, cutting off roots, &c. It may be said that this is not nature but art ; 
but man, though an improving animal, is still in a state of nature, and all his practices, 
in every stage of civilisation, are as natural to him as those of the other animals are to 
til em. Cottages and palaces are as much natural objects as the nests of birds, or the 
burrows of quadrupeds ; and all tlie laws and institutions by which social man is guided 
in his morals and politics, are no more artificial than the instinct which -congregates sheep 
and cattle in flocks and herds, and guides them in their choice of pasturage and shelter. 

1013. To form new varieties of vegetables, as well as of flowers and useful plants of 
every description, it is necessary to take advantage of their sexual differences, and to 
operate in a manner analogous to crossing the breed in animals. Hence the origin of 
new sorts of fruits. Even this practice is but an imitation of what takes place in nature 
by the agency of bees and other insects, and the wind ; all the difference is, that man ope- 
rates with a particular end in \'iew, and selects individuals possessing the particular 
properties ^^-llich he wishes to perpetuate or improve. New varieties, or rather subvarieties," 
are formed by altering tlie habits of plants; by dwarfing through want of nourishment; 
variegating by arenarious soils ; gi'sing or rather continuing peculiar habits when 
formed by nature, as in propagating from monstrosities — fasciculi of shoots, weeping 
shoots, shoots Avith peculiar leaves, flowers, fruit, &c. 

1 014. To propagate and preserve from degeneracy approved varieties of vegetables, it is in 
general necessary to have recourse to the different modes of propagating by extension, 
'riius choice apples and tree fruits are preserved and multiplied by grafting ; others, as the 
pine-apple by cuttings or suckers ; choice carnations by layers, potatoes by cuttings of the 
tubers, &c. But approved varieties of annuals are in general multiplied and preserved by 
selecting seed from tlie finest specimens and paying particular attention to supply suitable 
culture. Tliis part of culture is the farthest removed from nature ; yet there are not- 
witlistanding examples of the fortuitous graft ; of accidental layers ; of leaves,, or de- 
tached portions, forming natural cuttings, (as of the cardamine hirsuta,) dropping and 
taking root. 

1015. The preservation of vegetables for future use is effected by destroj-ing or render- 
ing dormant the principle of life, and by warding off, as far as practicable, the progress 
of cheinical decomposition. Hence some vegetables are dried, and either their herbs, or 
roots, or fruits ; others are placed beyond the reach of the active principles of vegetation, 
heat, and moisture, as seeds, cuttings, scions, roots, and fruits ; and some are, in addi- 
tion, even excluded from air, or placed in very low temperatures. The origin of these 
practices are all obvious imitations of what accidentally takes place in nature, from the 
withered grassy tressock to the hedgehog's mnter store ; and hence the origin of herb, 
seed, fruit, and root rooms and cellars, and packing plants and seeds for sending to a 
distance. 

1016. The whole of gardening, as an art of culture, is but a varied developement of the 
above fundamental practices, all founded in nature, and for the most part rationally and sa- % 
tisfactorily explained on chemical and physiological principles. Hence the great necessity 
of the study of botany to the cultivator, not in the hmited sense in which the term is often 
taken as including mere nomenclature and classification, but in that extended signification 
in which we have here endeavored, proportionately to our limited space, to present the 
study of the vegetable kingdom. Tliose who would enter more minutely into the subject 
will have recourse to the excellent work of Keith, from whom we have quoted at such 
length ; to Sir J. E. Smith's Introduction ; and to the elementary works of Willdenow 
&nd De Candolle. 



Book II. NATURAL AGENTS OF VEGETABLE CULTURE. 



217 



BOOK IL 

OF THE NATURAL AGENTS OF VEGETABLE GROWTH AND CULTURE. 

1017. The phenomena of vegetation being examined, and the fact ascertained that plants 
derive their nourishment from the external elements of matter : the next step in the study 
of tlie science of gardening is to enquire into the composition and nature of material bodies^ 
and the laws of their changes. The earthy matters which compose the surface of the earth, 
the air and light of the atmosphere, the water precipitated from it, the heat or cold pro- 
duced by the alternation of day and night, and by chemical composition and resolution, 
must include all the elements concerned in vegetation. These elements have all been 
necessarily brought into notice in the study of the vegetable kingdom ; but we shall now 
examine more minutely their properties, in so far as they are connected with cultivation. 
To study them completely, reference must be had to systems of chemistry and mechanical 
philosophy, of which those of Dr. Thomson (St/stem of Chemistry,) and Dr. Young 
{Lectures on Mechanical Fhilosophi/,) may be especially recommended. 



Chap. I. 

Of Earths and Soils. 

1018. Earths are the productions of the rocks which are exposed on the surface of the 
globe, and soils are earths mixed with more or less of the decomjwsed organised matter 
afforded by dead plants and animals. Earths and soils, therefore, must be as various as 
the rocks which produce them, and hence to understand their nature and formation it is 
necessary to begin by considering the geological structure of the territorial surface, and 
the manner in which earths and soils are produced ; and we shall next consider in suc- 
cession the nomenclature, quality, use, and improvement of soils. 

Sect. I. Of the Geological Structure of the Globe and the Formation of Earths and SoUs» 

1019. The crust, or under surf ace of t'he earth, is considered by geologists as presenting 
four distinct series of rocky substances ; the first, supposed to be coeval with the world, 
are called primitive, and consist cliiefly of granite and marble, below which man has not 
yet penetrated. The second series, called by the Wernerians transition-rocks, are of more 
recent formation, and seem to have resulted from some great catastrophe, (probably that 
to which history gives the name of deluge,) tearing up and modifying the former order 
of things. Clay-slate is one of the principal rocks of this class, and next limestone, 
sandstone, and trap or whinstone. The third series are called secondary rocks, and 
seem to owe their formation to partial or local revolutions, as indicated by their compa- 
ratively soft and fragile structure, superincumbent situation, and nearly horizontal position. 
They are chiefly limestones, sandstones, and conglomerations of fragments of other rocks, 
as plum-pudding-stone, &c. and appear rather as mechanical deposits from water than 
as chemical compounds from fusion or solution. A fourth stratum consists of alluvial or 
earthy depositions from water, in the form chiefly of immense beds of clays, marls, or 
sands. These strata are far from being regular in any one circumstance ; sometimes one 
or more of the strata are wanting, at other times the order of their disposition seems par- 
tially inverted ; their continuity of surface is continually interrupted, so that a section of 
the earth almost every where exhibits only confusion and disorder to persons who have not 
made geology more or less their study. 

1020. The succession of alluvial, secondary, transition, and primary strata, in England, 
has been illustrated by Professor Brande {Outlines of Geology), by two sections, supposed 
to be taken through them. 

1021. The first section {fig. 72.) commences with the blue clay of London (1), and pro- 
ceeding westward through the counties of Berkshire, Hampshire, Wiltshire, Dorsetshire, 
and Devonshire, terminates at the Land's End, in Cornwall. The rocks and earths pre- 
sented in this line are, the Windsor alluvion (2), Hampshire and Salisbury chalk (3), 
alluvion (4), sandstone (5), alluvion (6), Sherborne freestone (7), sandstone (8), blue ' 
lias limestone (9), Blackdown sandstone (10), Devonshire red sandstone (11), mountain 
limestone (12), Dartmoor slate (13), granite (14), slate again (15), greenstone (16), 

( ornwall serpentine (17), slate killas (18), Cornwall granite (19), slate killas (20), and 
finally, Cornwall granite. 

72 



218 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1022. The second section {jig. 73.) commences with the coal strata, and limestone 
resting upon slate and granite in Cumberland, and thence proceeds towards the metropolis 
by Yorkshire, Derbysliire, Leicestershire, Northamptonshire, Bedfordshire, and Hert- 
fordshire. The passage is here exhibited from the primaiy rocks of Cumberland to the 
secondary hills of the southern counties. It shows the Cumberland coal (a), limestone 
and slate (b), the Mossdale granite (c), slate (rf), grauwacke (e), Ribblesdale limestone 
(y)' gritstone (g), Ashton coal (Ji), Derby limestone (i), Derby toadstone (k), gritstone 
(/), gypsum {in), sandstone {n), limestone (o), Charnwood slate (/>), Mountsorrel 
granite {q), red sandstone (r), lias limestone (5), Northampton oolite or freestone (i), 
Woburn sand {u), Dunstable chalk {v), and terminates in the London clay {w), with 
wliich the first section sets out. 



73 




1023. The surface earth, or that wliich forms the outer coating of the dry parts of the 
globe, is formed by the detritus or worn off parts of rocks and rocky substances. For 
in some places, as in chasms and vacuities between rocky layers or masses, earth occupies 
many feet in depth, and in others, as on the summits of chalk hills or granite mountains, 
it hardly covers the surface. 

1024. Earths are, therefore, variously composed, according to the rocks or strata which 
have supplied their particles. Sometimes they are chiefly foi-med from slate-rocks, as in 
blue clays ; at other times from sandstone, as in siliceous soils ; and mostly of a mixture of 
clayey, slaty, and limestone rocks, blended in proportions as various as their situations. 
Such we may suppose to have been the state of the surface of the dry part of the globe 
immediately after the last disruption of its crust ; but in pi-ocess of time the decay of ve- 
getables and animals form additions to the outer -surface of the earths, and constitute what 
are called soils ; the difference between which and earths is, that the fonner always contain 
a portion of vegetable or animal matter. 

1025. The majiner in which rocks are converted into soils, Sir H. Davy observes {Elem. 
of J.gric. Chem. 188.), may be easily conceived by referring to the instance of soft 
granite, or porcelain granite. This substance consists of three ingredients, quartz, feldspar, 
and mica. Tlie quartz is almost pure siliceous earth in a crystalline form. The feld- 
spar and mica are veiy compounded substances ; both contain silica, alumina, and oxide 
of iron ; in the feldspar there is usually lime and potassa ; in the mica, lime and mag- 
nesia. When a granitic rock of this kind has been long exposed to the influence of air 
and water, the lime and the potassa contained in its constituent parts are acted upon by 
water or carbonic acid ; and the oxide of iron, which is almost always in its least oxidised 
state, tends to combine witli more oxygen ; the consequence is, that the feldspar decom- 
poses, and Ukewise the mica; but the first the most rapidly. The feldspar, wliich is as it 
were the cement of the stone, forms a fine clay : the mica partially decomposed mixes 
\yith it as sand ; and the undecomposed quartz appears as gravel, or sand of different de- 
grees of fineness. As soon as the smallest layer of earth is formed on the surface of a 
rock, the seeds of lichens, mosses, and other imperfect vegetables which are constantly 
floating in the atmosphere, and which have made it their resting-place, begin to vegetate ; 
their death, dGComposition, and decay afford a ceitain quantity of organisable matter, 
which mixes with the earthy materials of the rock ; in this improved soil more perfect 
plants are capable of subsisting ; these in their turn absorb nourishment from water and 
the atmosphere ; and, after perishing, afford new materials to those already pro\'ided : the n 
decomposition of the rock still continues ; and at length, by such slow and gradual pro- 
cesses, a soil is formed in which even forest-trees can fix their roots, and which is fitted to 
reward the labors of the cultivator. 

1026. The formation of peaty sails is produced from very Opposite causes, and it is interesting to contem- 
plate how the same effect may be produced by different means, and the earth which suppUes ahnost all 
our wants may become barren alike from the excessive application of art, or the utter neglect of it. Con- 
tinual pulverisation and cropping, without manuring, will certainly produce a hungry barren soil ; and 
the total neglect of fertile tracts will, from their accumulated vegetable products, produce peat soils, and 
bogs. Where successive generations of vegetables have grown upon a soil, Sir H. Davy observes, unless 
part of their produce has been carried offby man, or consumed by animals, the vegetable matter increases 
in such a proportion, that the soil approaches to a peat in its nature ; and if in a situation where it can 
receive water from a higher district, it becomes spongy, and permeated with that fluid, and is gradually 
rendered incapable of supporting the nobler classes of vegetables. Many peat-mosses seem to have been 
formed by the destruction of forests, in consequence of the imprudent use of the hatchet by the early cul- 
tivators of the country in which they e::ist : when the trees are felled in the outskirts of a wood, those in 
the interior are exposed to the inQuence of the winds ; having been accustomed to shelter, they become 
unhealthy, and die in their new situation ; and their leaves and branches gradually decomposing, produce 
a stratum of vegetable matter. In many of the great bogs in Ireland and Scotland, the larger trees that 



Book 11. 



CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS. 



219 



are found in the outskirts of them, bear the marks of having been felled. In theinterior, few entire trees 
are found ; and the cause is, probably, that thev fell by gradual decay ; and that the fermentation and 
decomposition of tlie vegetable matter was the most rapid where it was 'in the greatest (juantity. 

1027. Spurious peaty soil. Lakes and pools of water are sometimes filled up by the accumulation of 
the remains of aquatic plants ; and in this case a sort of spurious peat is formed. The fermentation in 
these cases, however, seems to be of a difierent kind. Much more gaseous matter is evolved ; and the 
neighbourhood of morasses, in which aquatic vegetables decompose, is usually aguish and unhealthy j 
whilst that of the true peat, or peat formed on soils originally dry, is ahvays salubrious. 

10^8. Soils rncy gemralli/ be distinguished from mere masses of eartlih^ \.\\€\x friable texture, dark 
color, and by the presence of some vegetable fibre or carbonaceous matter. In uncultivated grounds, soils 
occupy only a few inches in depth on the surface, iniless in crevices, where they had been washed in by 
rains ; and in cultivated soils their depth is generallv the same as that to which the implements used in 
cultivation have penetrated. 

1029. ^luch has been written on soils, and till lately, to very little purpose. All the Roman authors on 
husbandry treated the subject at length ; and in modern times, in this country, copious philosophical dis- 
courses on soils were published by Bacon, Evelyn, Bradley and others ; but itmay be truly said, that in 
no department of cultivation was ever so much written of' which so little use could be made by practical 
men. One reason for this failure is, that some of the principal efTects of operations on soils are chemical, 
and chemistry, till within the last forty years, could hardly be considered an inductive science. In so little 
esteem was it held in Evelyn's time, that he ranks it with astrology, and considers the term as synonymous 
with alchemy. [Ten-a, p. -i. ai^id ^ie^?!oirs, Sec. i.) Jethro Tull, about 60 years after the publication of 
Evelyn's Terra, published a system of culture, in which every thing was referred to mechanical division ; 
but though he referred to this theory the beiieficial influence of some excellent practices, yet neither 
gained ground at the time The first attempt to treat of soils chemically, was made by Kirwan about 
ITSt), the next by Lord Dundonald in 1795, and then followetl Dr. Darwin's Pliytologia in ISUO, and 
lastly. Sir H. Davy's Lectures on Agricultural Chemistry in 1S02. It is from the last edition (in 1821) 
of that valuable work, that we shall chiefly make our selections. 

Sect.il Classification and Nomenclature of Soils. 

1030. Systematic order and an agreed nomenclature are as necessary in the study of soils 
as of plants or animals. The number of provincial terms for soils Avhich have found 
their way into the books on cultivation, is one reason why so little use can be made of 
their directions. 

103L A correct classification of soils may be founded on the presence or absence of 
organic and inorganic matter in their basis. This will form two grand classes, viz. 
priinitive soils, or those composed entirely of inorganic matter, and secondary soils, or 
those composed of organic and inorganic matter in mixtures. These classes may be 
subdivided into orders founded on the presence or absence of saline, metallic, and car- 
bonic matter. Tlie orders may be subdivided into genera founded on the prevailing 
earths, salts, metals, or carbon ; the genera into species founded on their different mix- 
tures ; the species into varieties founded on color, texture ; and sub-varieties founded on 
moisture, dryness, richness, lightness, Sec. 

1032. In naniing the genera of soils, the first tiling is to discover the prevailing earth or 
earths; either the simple earths, as clay, lime, sand, or the particular rocks from which 
the soil has been produced, as granite, basalt, &c. When one earth prevails, the generic 
name should be taken from that earth, as clayey soil, calcareous soil, &c, ; when two 
prevail to all appearance equally, then their names must be conjoined in naming the 
genus, as clay and sand, lime and clay, basalt and sand, &c. The great thing is precision 
in applying the terms. Thus, as Sir H. Davy has observed, the term sandy soil should 
never be applied to any soil that does not contain at least seven eighths of sand ; sandy 
soils that effervesce with acids should be distinguished by the name of calcareous 
sandy soil, to distinguish tliem from those that are siliceous. The term clayey soil 
should not be applied to any laqd which contains less than one sixth of impalpable 
eartliy matter, not considerably effervescing with acids ; the word loam should be limited 
to soils, containing at least one third of impalpable earthy matter, copiously effervescing 
witli acids. A soil to be considered as peaty, ought to contain at least one half of 
vegetable matter. In cases where the earthy part of a soil evidently consists of the de- 
composed matter of one particular rock, a name derived from the rock may with pro- 
priety be applied to it. Thus, if a fine red earth be found immediately above decom- 
posing basalt, it may be denominated basaltic soil. If fragments of quartz and mica be 
found abundant in the materials of t!ie soil, which is often the case, it may be 
denominated granitic soil; and the same principles may be applied to other like instances. 
In genera], the soils, the materials of which are the most various and heterogeneous, are 
those called alluvial, or wliich have been formed from the depositions of rivers ; and 
these deposits may be designated as siliceous, calcareous, or argillaceous ; and in some 
cases the term saline may be added as a specific distinction, applicable, for example, at 
the embouchure of rivers, where their alluvial remains are overflown by the sea. 

1033. In na7ning the species of soils, greater nicety is required to determine distinctions, 
than in naming the genera ; and there is also some difficulty in applying or devising 
proper terms. The species are always determined by the mixture of matters, and never 
by tlie color or texture of that mixture which belongs to the nomenclature of varieties. 
I'hus a clayey soil with sand is a sandy clay, this is the name of the species ; if the 
mass is yellow, and it is thought worth while to notice that circumstance, then it is 
a yellow sandy clay, which expresses at once the genus, species, and variety. A soil con- 



220 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



taining equal parts of clay, lime, and sand, would, as a generic term, be called clay, 
lime, and sand; if it contained no other mixture in considerable quantity, the term 
entire, might be added as a specific distinction ; and if notice was to be taken of its color 
or degree of comminution, it might be termed a brown, a fine, a coarse, a stiff, or a free 
entire clay, lime, and sand. 

1034. The following Table enumerates the more common genera, species, and varieties of 
soils. The application of the terms will be understood by erery cultivator, though to 
attempt to describe the soils either chemically, or empirically (as by sight, smell, or touch), 
would be a useless waste of time. From a very little experience in the field or garden, 
more may be gained in the study of soils, than from a volume of such descriptions. Tliis 
table corresponds with the nomenclature adopted in the agricultural establishments 
of Fellenberg at Hofwyl in Switzerland, of Professor Thaer at Moegelin in Prussia, of 
Professor Thouiu in his lectures at Paris, and in general with that of all the 
continental professors. It is therefore very desirable that it should become as generally 
adopted as that of the Linnasan system in botany. The principle of the table may be 
extended so as to include any other soil whatever. 



Specie*. 



Primitive 
Soils. 



rclay 



J Lime 
LSand 



relay - 



Clay - 



Eajrths and or- 
ganic 
alone. 



Earths with or- 
ganic remains, 
metals, salts, 
and rocks. 



Granite 
Basalt 



Entire 
Entire 

Ferrugineous - 
Cupreous 
Saline - 
Ferrugineous 
Cupreous 
SaUne 

Ferrugineous 
Cupreous - 
Saline 
Loamy 
Peaty - 
Mouldy 
Limy 
Sandy 
Clayey - 
lyoamy - 
Sandy - - - Black - 
Peatv ... Black - 
IMouidy - . - Black 
Clayey - - . Black 
Loamy - - Black - 

Limy ... Black 
Peatv . . - Black - 
^Mouldy - - Black 
f Ferrugineous, loamy ,&c. Black 

!' Ferrugineous, limy, &c- Black 
Ferrugineous, sandy ,&c. Black 
Ferrugineous, peaty, &c. Black 
Ferrugineous,mouldy&c Black - 
Cupreous, loamy, <njc. Black 
• Saline, loamv, ic. - Black 
LCinereous, loamy, &c. Black 
rFemigineous, loamy,&c. Black - 

Ferj-ugineous, sandy,*cc. Black 
I Cupreous, loamy, &c. Black - 
■ Cupreous, sandv, &c. Black - 
1 SaUne, loamy, &c. - Black 
I Saline, sandy, &c. - Black - 
Cinereous, loamy, &c. Black 
I Cinereous, limy, (Sec. Black - 
pFerrugineous, loamy,&c. Black 
I Ferrugineous, limy, & ' 

Cupreous, loamy, &c. 
J Cupreous, limy, i'<i:c. 
j SaUne, loamy, &c. - 
Saline, limy, &c. - - 
Cinereous, "loamy, &c. 
LCinereous, limy, &c. 
r Ferrugineous, &c. - 

Ouartzose, &c. 
' Ferrugineous, &c. 
Columnar, &c. 
A^Tiinstone, &c. 
Ferrugineous, &c. . 
Micaceous, &c. 
Chlorite, &c. - 
Ferrugineous, &c. - 
Calcareous, &c. 
Argillaceous, &c. 
Cupreous, &c. . 
Chalky, &c. 
Marble, &c. 
SheUy, &c. - . - 
Jlagnesian, &c 
Sulphuric, &c. - . 
Ferrugineous, &c. - 
Cupreous, &c. - 
Argillaceous, &c. 
^Siliceous, &c. . 
rSlaty, &c. - 
J Pyritic, &C. 
j Stony, &c. 
(.Woody, &c. - 



Vaneti/. 
PBlack 



Red - . . . . . 

YeUow 

Coarse ...... 

.Fine 

Black, red, yellow, coarse, fine, &c 
Black, red, yellow, coarse, fine, &c 
Black, red, yellow, coarse, fine, &c 

Black, red, &c 

Black, red, &c 

Black, red 

Black, red 

Black, red, yellow, coarse, fine, &c, 
Black, red, yellow, coarse, fine, &c, 

Black 

Black 

Black, red, yellow, &c. ... 
Black, red, yellow, &c. ... 

Black 

Black 

Black 

Black, red, yellow, &c. - - . 
Black 



Black - 
Black 
Black - 
Black 
Black - 
Black 
Black - 

Black, red, yellow, &c. 
Black 

Black, red, yellow, &c. 

Black 

Black . - . . 
Black, red, yellow, &c. 
Black - 
Black 
Black, &c. 

Black - . . . 
Black - 
Black 

Black, red, &c. 
Black - 
Black 
Black . 
Black 

Black . . . . 
Black 
Black 
Black 

Black, red, yeUow, &c. 
Black . - . 
Black ... 
Black ... 



Sub-Varieiif. 
("Moist. 

Dry. 
•{Rich. 
iFoor. 

LSterile. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 
. Moist, dry, rich, &c. 
i Moist, dry, &c. 
. Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist, dry, rich. Sec. 

Moist, dry, rich, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist, dry, &e. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, dry. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, dry, &c. 
Moist. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, dry, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

JHoist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist, dry, rich, &c. 

Moist. 

Moist. 

Moist. 



Book II. 



ANALYSIS OF SOILS. 



221 



Sect. III. Of discovering the Qualities of Soils. 

1035. The value of soils to the cultivator', is discoverable botanically, chemically, and 
mechanically ; that is, by the plants that grow on fhem naturally ; by chemical analysis ; 
and by exterior and interior inspection or handling. 

SuBSECT. 1. Of discovering the Qualities of Soils hy means of the Plants which grow 

on them. 

1036. Plants are the most certain indicators of the nature of a soil ; for while no prac- 
tical cultivator would engage with land of which he knew only the results of a chemical 
analysis, or examined by the sight and touch a few bushels which were brought to him, 
yet every gardener or farmer, who knew the sort of plants it produced, would be at 
once able to decide as to its value for cultivation. 

1037. The leading soils for the cultivator are the clayey, calcareous, sandy, ferrugineous, 
peaty, saline, moist or aquatic, and dry. The following ai-e the plants by which such 
soils are distinguished in most parts of Europe : — 

Argillaceous. Tussilago farfara, Potentilla anserina, argentea, and reptans. Tha- 
lictrum flavum, Carex, many species. Juncus, various species. Orobus tuberosus, 
Lotus major, and corniculatus. Saponaria officinalis. But the Tussilago farfara is 
a cei-tain and universal sign of an argillaceous soil, and is the chief plant found on the 
alum grounds of Britain, France, and Italy. 

Calcareous. Veronica spicata, Gallium pusillum, Lithospermum officinale, and pur- 
puro-caeruleum. Campanula glomerata, and hybrida. Phyteuma orbicularis, Verbas- 
cum lychnitis. Viburnum lantana, Berberis vulgaris, Cistus helianthemum, Anemone 
Pulsatilla, Clematis vita alba, Hedysarum onobrychis. 

Siliceous. Teronica triphyllus, and verna. Echium italicum, Hernaria glabra, and 
hirsuta. Silene anglica and other species. Arenaria rubra, &c. Spergula arvensis, 
Papaver hybridum, Argemone, &c. 

Ferrugineous. Rumex acetosa, and acetosella. 

Peaty. Vaccinium myrtillus, uliginosum, and oxycoccus. Erica 4 sp. Spergula 
subulata, Tormentilla officinalis. 

Saline. Salicornea 4 species. Zostera marina, Ruppia maritima, Pulmonaria mari- 
tima, Convolvulus soldanella, Illecebrum verticillatum, Chenopodium maritimum, 
Salsola kali, and fruticosa. Slum verticillatum. Arenaria maritima, &c. Atriplex 
laciniata. 

Aquatic. Caltha palustris, Hippuris vulgaris. Pinguicula vulgaris, Lycopus euro- 
peus, Valeriana dioica, Viola palustris, Samolus valerandi, Silenum palustre, Epilobium 
tetragonum, Lythrum salicaria, Ranunculus lingula, and flamula. 

Very dry. Arenaria rubra, Rumex acetosella. Thymus Serpyllum, Acinos vulgaris, 
Trifolium arvense. 

1038. These plants are not absolutely to be depended on, however, even in Britain ; 
and in other countries they are sometimes found in soils directly opposite. Still, 
the saintfoin is almost always an indication of a calcareous soil ; the common 
coltsfoot {Tussilago farfara), of blue clay; the arenaria rubra, of poor sand; the 
small wood-sorrel of the presence of iron. The aquatic, peaty, and saline soils are 
almost every where indicated by their appropriate plants ; a proof, as we have 
before stated, that the climate and natural irrigation of plants have much more influence 
on their habits than mere soil. (See the Stationes Plantarum of I An. and the Flora 
Franqaise of De Candolle ; Galpine's Compendium, Fl. Brit. ; Smith's Flora Brit. ; 
Kent's Hints; and Farmers' Mag. Feb. 1819.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Of discovering the Qualities of Soils by chemical Analysis. 

1039. Chemical analysis is much too nice an operation for general purjwses. It is not 
likely that many practical cultivators will ever be able to conduct the analytic 
process with sufficient accuracy, to enable them to depend on the result. But still such 
a knowledge of chemistry as shall enable the cultivator to understand the nature of the 
process and its results, when made and presented to him by others, is calculated 
to be highly useful, and ought to be acquired by every man whose object is to join theo- 
retical to practical knowledge. If it so happens that he can perform the operations 
of analysis himself, so much the better, as far as that point is concerned ; but 
on the whole, such knowledge and adroitness is not to be expected from men who have 
so many other points demanding their attention, and who will, therefore, effect their pur- 
pose much better by collecting proper specimens of the soils to be studied, and sending 
them for analysis to a respectable operative chemist. 

1040. In selecting specimens, where the general nature of tlie soil of a field is to be 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Fart II. 



ascertained, portions of it should be taken from different places, two or three inches below 
the surface, and examined as to the similarity of their properties. It sometimes happens, 
that upon plains, the whole of the upper stratum cf the land is of the same kind, and in 
this case, one analysis will be sufficient ; but in valleys, and near the beds of rivers, tliere 
are very great differences, and it now and then occurs that one part of a field is calcareous, 
and another part siliceous ; and in this case, and in analogous cases, the portions different 
from each other should be separately submitted to experiment. Soils, M-hen col- 
lected, if they cannot be immediately examined, should be preserved in phials quite 
filled with them, and closed with ground glass stoppers. The quantity of soil most 
convenient for a perfect analysis is from two to four hundred grains. It should 
be collected in dry weather, and exposed to the atmosphere till it becomes dry to the 
touch. 

1041. The soil best suited for culture, according to the analysis of Bergman, contains four 
parts of clay, three of sand, two of calcareous earth, and one of magnesia : and, accord- 
ing to the analysis of Fourcroy and Hassenfratz, 9216 parts of fertile soil contained 305_ 
parts of carbon, together with 279 parts of oil; of which, according to the calculations 
of Lavoisier, 220 parts may be regarded as carbon : so that the whole of the carbon 
contained in the soil in question may be estimated at about 525 parts, exclusive of the 
roots of vegetables, or to about one sixteenth of its weight. Young observed that equal 
weights of different soils, when dried and reduced to powder, yieldejd by distillation 
quantities of air somewhat corresponding to the ratio of their values. The air was a 
mixture of fixed and inflammable airs, proceeding probably from decomposition of the 
water ; but, partly, it may be presumed, from its capacity of abstracting a portion of air 
from the atmosphere, which tiie soil at least is capable of doing. The following is the 
analysis of a fertile soil, as occurring in the neighbourhood of Bristol : — In 400 grains, 
there were of water, 52 ; siliceous sand, 240 ; vegetable fibre, 5 ; vegetable extract, 3 ; 
alumine, 48 ; magnesia, 2 ; oxide of iron, 14 ; calcareous earth, 30 ; loss, 6. But 
Kirwan has shown in his Geological Essai/s, that the fertility of a soil depends in 
a great measure upon its capacity for retaining water : and if so, soils containing the 
same ingredients must be also equally fertile, all other circumstances being the same; 
though it is plain that their actual fertility will depend ultimately upon the quantity 
of rain that falls, because the quantity suited to a wet soil cannot be the same that is 
suited to a dry soil. And hence it often happens that the ingredients of the soil do not 
correspond to the character of the climate. Silica exists in the soil under the modifi- 
cation of sand, and alumine under the modification of clay. But the one or the other 
is often to be met with in excess or defect. Soils in which the sand preponderates retain 
the least moisture ; and soils in which the clay preponderates retain the most : the former 
are dry soils, the latter are wet soils. But it may happen that neither of them is suflS- 
ciently favorable to culture ; in which case, their peculiar defect or excess must, be 
supplied or retrenched before they can be brought to a state of fertility. 

1042. Use of the result of analysis. In the present state of chemical science. Dr. Ure 
observes, no certain system can be devised for the improvement of lands, independently of 
experiment ; but there are few cases in which the labor of analytical trials will not be amply 
repaid by the certainty with which they denote the best methods of melioration ; and 
this will particularly happen, when the defect of composition is found in the proportions 
of the primitive earths. In supplying organic matter, a temporary food only is provided 
for plants, which is in all cases exhausted by means of a certain number of crops ; but 
when a soil is rendered of the best possible constitution and texture, with regard to its 
earthy parts, its fertility may be considered as permanently established. It becomes 
capable of attracting a very large portion of vegetable nourishment from the atmosphere, 
and of producing its crops with comparatively little labor and expense. {Diet, of Chem. 
art. SoxL) 

SuBSECT. 3. Of dispovering the Qualities of a Soil mechanically and empirically. 

1043. The physical projyerties of soils, and some of their most important constituents 
relatively to the cultivator, may be ascertained to a certain extent by various and very 
simple means. 

1044. The specific gravity of a soil, or the relation of its weight to that of water, may be 
ascertained by introducing into a phial, which will contain a known quantity of water, 
equal volumes of water and of soil, and this may be easily done by pouring in water 
till it is half full, and then adding the soil till the fluid rises to the mouth the differ- 
ence between the weight of the soil and that of the water, will give the result. Thus 
if the bottle contains four hundred grains of water, and gains two hundred grains when 
half filled with water and half with soil, the specific gravity of the soil will be 2, that is, 
it will be twice as heavy as water, and if it gained one hundred and sixty-five grains, 
its specific gravity would be 1825, water being 1000. 



Book 11. 



USES OF SOIL TO VEGETABLES. 



253 



1045. The presence of clay and sand in any soil is known, the first by its tenacity, the 
other by its roughness to the touch, and by scratching glass when rubbed on it. 

1046. The presence of calcareous matter in soil may be ascertained by simply pouring 
any acid on it. and observing if it effervesces freely. Calcareous soils are also softer to 
the touch than any other. 

1047. The presence of organised matter in any soil may be ascertained very satisfactorily 
by weighing it after being thoroughly dried ; then subjecting it to a red heat, and weigh- 
ing it again, the weight last found will be the proportion of organic matter. I'he same 
object may also be attained by ascertaining the specific gravity of the soil, but with 
less accuracy. 

1048. The presence of metallic oxides in a soil may generally be known by their color. 
Ferrugineous soils, are red or yellow ; cupreous soils, interspersed with greenish 
streaks, Sec. 

1049. The presence of salts, sulphur, coal, &c. may be known by the absence or 
peculiarity of vegetation, as well as by color, and the appearance of the water of such 
soils. 

1050. The cajmcity of a soil fur retaining -water may be thus ascertained. An equal portion 
of two soils, perfectly dry, may be introduced into two tall glass cylindrical vessels, 
{fg- 74.) in the middle of each of which a glass tube is pre- 
viously placed. The soils should be put into each in the same "^^^ 
manner, not compressed very hard, but so as to receive a so- i^tiflfe 
lidity approaching to that which they possessed when first ob- |^~^ 
tained for trial. If, after this preparation, a quantity of water fei^'u')^ 
be poured into the glass tubes, it will subside ; and the capillary iBlifl 
attraction of the soils will conduct it up the cylinders towards "^saMS 
the tops of the vessels. That which conducts it most rapidly, provided it does not rise 
from the weight of the incumbent column of water in the tube, may be pronounced to 
be the better soil. (Grisenthivaite.) 

Sect. IV. Of the Uses of the Soil to Vegetables. 

1051. Soils afford to jilants a fixed abode and medium of nourishment. Earths, exclu- 
sively of organised matter and water, are allowed by most physiologists, to be of no other 
use to plants than that' of supporting them, or furnishing a medium by which they may fix 
themselves to the globe. But earths and organic matter, that is, soils, afford at once 
support and food. 

1052. The pure earths merely act as mechanical and indirect chemical agents in the soil. 
The earths consist of metals united to oxygen, and these metals have not been decomposed ; 
there is consequently no reason to suppose that the earths are convertible into the elements 
of organised compounds^ that is, into carbon, hydrogen, and azote. Plants have been 
made to grow in given quantities of earth. They consume very small portions only ; and 
what is lost may be accounted for by the quantities found in their ashes ; that is to say, it 
has not been converted into any new products. The carbonic acid united to lime or mag- 
nesia, if any stronger acid happens to be formed in the soil during the fermentation of 
vegetable matter, which will disengage it from the earths, may be decomposed ; but the 
earths themselves cannot be supposed convertible into other substances, by any process 
taking place in the soil. In all cases the ashes of plants contain some of the earths of the 
soil in which they grow ; but these earths, as has been ascertained from the ashes afibrded 
by different plants, never equal moi-e than one fiftieth of the weight of the plant consumed. 
If they be considered as necessary to the vegetable, it is as giving hardness and firmness 
to its organisation. Thus, it has been mentioned that wheat, oats, and many of the hollow- 
stalked grasses, have an epidermis principally of siliceous earth ; the use of which seems 
to be to strengthen them, and defend them from the attacks of insects and parasitical 
plants. 

1053. true nourishment of j)lants is water, and decomposing organic matter; 
both these exist only in soils, not in pure earths ; but the earthy parts of the soils are 
useful in retaining water, so as to supply it in the proper proportions to the roots of 
the vegetables, and they are likewise efficacious in producing the proper distribution of 
the animal or vegetable matter. When equally mixed with it they prevent it from 
decomposing too rapidly ; and by their means the soluble parts are supplied in proper 
proportions. 

1054. The soil is necessary io the existence of i)lants, both as affording them nourishment, 
and enabling them to fix themselves in such a manner as to obey those laws by which their 
radicles are kept below the surface, and their leaves exposed to the free atmosphere. As 
the systems of roots, branches, and leaves, are very different in different vegetables, so 
they flourish most in different soils ; the plants that have bulbous roots require a looser 
and a lighter soil than such as have fibrous roots ; and the plants possessing only short 




224 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Part XL 



fibrous radicles demand a firmer soil than such as have tap-roots or extensive lateral 
roots. 

1055. The constituent parts of the soil which give tenacity and coherence are the finely 
divided matters ; and they possess the powder of giving those qualities in the highest 
degree when they contain much alumina. A small quantity of finely divided matter 
is sufficient to fit a soil for the production of turnips and barley ; and a tolerable 
crop of turnips has been produced on a soil containing 1 1 parts out of 1 2 sand. A much 
greater proportion of sand, however, always . produces absolute sterility. The soil of 
Bagshot heath, which is entirely devoid of vegetable covering, contains less than one twen- 
tieth of finely divided matter : 400 parts of it, which had been heated red, afforded 380 
parts of coarse siliceous sand ; 9 parts of fine siliceous sand, and 1 1 parts of impalpable 
matter, which was a mixture of ferruginous clay with carbonate of lime. Vegetable or 
animal matters, when finely divided, not only give coherence, but likewise softness and 
penetrability ; but neither they nor any other part of the soil must be in -too great propor- 
tion ; and a soil is unproductive if it consist entirely of impalpable matters. Pure alumina 
or silica, pure carbonate of lime, or carbonate of magnesia, are incapable of supporting 
healthy vegetation ; and no soil is fertile that contains as much as 19 parts out of 20 of 
any of these constituents. 

1056. A certain degree of friability or looseness of texture is also required in soils, in order 
that the operations of culture may be easily conducted ; that moisture may have free 
access to the fibres of the roots, that heat may be readily conveyed to them, and that eva- 
poration may proceed without obstruction. These are commonly attained by the presence 
of sand. As alumina possesses all the properties of adhesiveness in an eminent degree, 
and silex those of friability, it is obvious that a mixture of those two earths, in suitable 
proportions, would furnish every thing wanted to form the most perfect soil as to water 
and the operations of culture. In a soil so compounded, water will be presented to the 
roots by capillary attraction. It will be suspended in it, in the same manner as it is sus- 
pended in a sponge, not in a state of aggregation, but minute division, so that every part 
may be said to be moist, but not wet. ( Grisenthwaite. ) 

1057. The water chemically combined amongst the elements of soils, unless in the case of 
the decomposition of animal or vegetable substances, cannot be absorbed by the roots of 
plants ; but that adhering to the parts of the soil is in constant use in vegetation. Indeed 
there are few mixtures of the earths found in soils that contain any chemically combined 
water ; water is expelled from the earth by most substances that combine with them. 
Thus, if a combination of lime and water be exposed to carbonic acid, the carbonic acid 
takes the place of water ; and compounds of alumina and silica, or other compounds of 
the earths, do not chemically unite with water ; and soils, as it has been stated, are formed 
either by earthy carbonates, or compounds of the pure earths and metallic oxides. When 
saline substances exist in soils, they may be united to water both chemically and me- 
chanically ; but they are always in too small a quantity to influence materially the rela- 
tions of the soil to water. 

1058. The jwwer of the soil to absorb water by cohesive attraction depends in great measure 
upon the state of division of its parts ; the more divided they are, the greater is their ab- 
soibent power. The diflferent constituent parts of soils likewise appear to act, even by 
cohesive attraction, with different degrees of energy. Thus vegetable substances seem to 
be more absorbent than animal substances ; animal substances more so than compounds 
of alumina and silica ; and compounds of alumina and silica more absorbent than car- 
bonates of lime and magnesia : these differences may, however, possibly depend upon the 
differences in their state of division, and upon the surface exposed. 

1059. The power of soils to absorb water from air is much connected with fertility. When 
this power is great, the plant is supplied with moisture in dry seasons ; and the effect of 
evaporation in the day is counteracted by the absorption of aqueous vapor from the atmo- 
sphere, by the interior parts of the soil during the day, and by both the exterior and in- 
terior during the night. The stiff" clays approaching to pipe-clays in their nature, which 
take up the greatest quantity of water when it is poured upon them in a fluid form, are 
not the soils which absorb most moisture from the atmosphere in dry weather. They cake, 
and present only a small surface to the air ; and the vegetation on them is generally burnt 
up almost as readily as on sands. The soils that are most efficient in supplying the plant 
with water by atmospheric absorption, are those in which there is a due mixture of sand, 
finely divided clay, and carbonate of lime, with some animal or vegetable matter, and 
which are so loose and light as to be freely permeable to the atmosphere. With respect 
to this quality, carbonate of lime, and animal and vegetable matter, are of great use in 
soils ; they give absorbent power to the soil without giving it likewise tenacity ; sand, 
which also destroys tenacity, on the contrary, gives little absorbent power. The absorbent 
powers of soils, with respect to atmospheric moisture, is always greatest in the most fertile 
soils ; so that it affords one method of judging of the productiveness of land. 



Book II. 



USES OF SOIL TO VEGETABLES. 



225 



1060. As examples of the absorbent powers of soils : 1000 parts of a celebrated soil from 
Onniston, in East Lothian, which contained more than half its weight of finely divided 
matter, of which 1 1 parts were carbonate of lime, and 9 parts vegetable matter, when dried 
at 212°, gained in an hour by exposure to air saturated with moisture, at a temperature 
of 62", 18 grains. 1000 parts of a very fertile soil from the banks of the river Parret, in 
.Somersetshire, under the same circumstances, gained 16 grains. 1000 parts of a soil 
from Mersea, in Essex, gained 13 grains. 1000 grains of a fine sand^ from Essex, 
gained 1 1 grains. 1000 of a coarse sand gained only 8 grains. 1000 of a soil of Bag- 
shot heath gained only 3 grains. 

1061. The absorbent powers of soils ought to vary with the climate in which they are si- 
tuated. The absorption of moisture ought to be much greater in warm or dry countries, 
than in cold and moist ones ; and the quantity of clay, or vegetable, or animal matter in 
soils greater. Soils also on declivities ought to be more absorbent than in plains or in the 
bottom of valleys. Their productiveness likewise is influenced by the nature of the sub- 
soil, or the stratum on which they rest. When soils are immediately situated upon a bed 
of rock or stone, they are much sooner rendered dry by evaporation than where the sub-soil 
is of clay or marl ; and a prime cause of the great fertility of the land in the moist climate 
of Ireland, is the proximity of the rocky strata to the soil. A clayey sub-soil will some- 
times be of material advantage to a sandy soil ; and in this case it will retain moisture in 
such a manner as to be capable of supplying that lost by the earth above, in consequence 
of evaporation or the consumption of it by plants. A sandy or gravelly sub-soil often 
corrects the imperfections of too great a degree of absorbent power in the true soil. In 
calcareous countries, where the surface is a species of marl, the soil is often found only 
a few inches above the limestone ; and its fertility is not impaired by the proximity of the 
rock ; though in a less absorbent soil, this situation would occasion barrenness ; and the 
sandstone and limestone-hills in Derbyshire and North Wales, may be easily distinguished 
at a distance, in summer, by the different tints of the vegetation. The grass on the 
sandstone-hills usually appears brown and burnt up ; that on the limestone-hills flourish- 
ing and green. 

1062. In a moist climate, where the quantity of rain that falls annually equals from 40 
to 60 inches, as in Lancashire, Cornwall, and some parts of Ireland, a siliceous sandy soil 
is much more productive than in dry districts ; and in such situations wheat and beans 
will require a less coherent and absorbent soil than in drier situations ; and plants having 
bulbous roots will flourish in a soil containing as much as 14 parts out of 15 of sand. 
Even the exhausting powers of crops will be influenced by like circumstances. In cases 
where plants cannot absorb suflftcient moisture, they must take up more manure. And 
in Ireland, Cornwall, and the western Highlands of Scotland, com will exhaust less than 
in dry inland situations. Oats, particularly in dry climates, are impoverishing in a much 
higher degree than in moist ones. 

1063. Many soils are jwpularly distinguished as cold or hot ; and the distinction, though 
at first view it may appear to be founded on prejudice, is really just. Some soils are 
much more heated by the rays of the sun, all other circumstances being equal, than others ; 
and soils brought to the same degree of heat, cool in different times, i. e. some cool much 
faster than others. This property has been very little attended to in a philosophical point 
of view ; yet it is of the highest importance in culture. In general, soils that consist 
principally of a stiff white clay are difficultly heated ; and being usually very moist, they 
retain their heat only for a short time. Chalks are similar in one respect, that they are 
difficultly heated ; but being drier they retain their heat longer, less being consumed in 
causing the evaporation of their moisture. A black soil, containing much soft vegetable 
matter, is most heated by the sun and air ; and the colored soils, and the soils containing 
much carbonaceous matter, or ferruginous matter, exposed under equal circumstances to 
sun, acquire a much higher temperature than pale-colored soils. 

1064. When soils are perfectly dry, those that most readily become heated by the solar rays, 
likewise cool most rapidly ; but the darkest-colored dry soil, (that which contains abund- 
ance of animal or vegetable matter ; substances which most facilitate the diminution of 
temperature,) when heated to the same degree, provided it be within the common limits 
of the effect of solar heat, will cool more slowly than a wet, pale soil, entirely composed of 
earthy matter. Sir H. Davy " found that a rich black mould, which contained nearly 
one fourth of vegetable matter, had its temperature increased in an hour from 65° to 88° 
by exposure to sunshine ; whilst a chalk soil was heated only to 69° under the same cir- 
cumstances. But the mould removed into the shade, where the temperature was 62°, 
lost, in half an hour, 15° ; whereas the chalk, under the same circumstances, had lost only 
4°. A brown fertile soil and a cold barren clay were each artificially heated to 88°, 
having been previously dried ; they were then exposed in a temperature of 57° ; in half 
an hour the dark soil was found to have lost 9° of heat ; the clay had lost only 6°. An 
equal portion of the clay containing moisture, after being heated to 88°, was exposed in a 
temperature of 55^ ; in less than a quarter of an hour it was found to have gained the 

Q 



225 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



temperature of the rootTi. The soils in all these experiments were placed in small tin- 
plate trays two inches square, and half an inch in depth ; and tlie temperature asceitained 
by a delicate thermometer. Thus the temperature of the surface, when bare and exposed 
to the rays of the sun, affords at least one indication of the degrees of its fertility ; and 
the thermometer may be sometimes a useful instrument to the purchaser or improver of 
lands." 

1065. The moisture in the soil and sub-soil materially affects its te~inperature, and prevents, 
as in the case of constantly saturated aquatic soils, their ever attaining to any great degree 
either of heat or cold. The same observation will apply to moist peaty soils, or peat- 
Ijogs. 

1066. Chemical agency of soils. Besides these uses of soils, which may be considered 
mechanical, there is, Sir H. Davy observes, another agency between soils and or- 
ganisable matters, which may be regarded as chemical in its nature. The earths, and 
even the earthy carbonates, have a certain degree of chemical attraction for many of the 
principles of vegetable and animal substances. This is easily exemplified in the instance 
of alumina and oil ; if an acid solution of alumina be mixed with a solution of soap, 
which consists of oily matter and potassa, the oil and the alumina will unite and form a 
white powder, which will sink to the bottom of the fluid. The extract from decomposing 
vegetable matter, when boiled with pipe-clay or chalk, forms a combination by which the 
vegetable matter is rendered more difficult of decomposition and of solution. Pure silica 
and siliceous sands have little action of this kind ; and the soils which contain the most 
alumina and carbonate of lime, are those which act with the greatest chemical energy in 
preserving manures. Such soils merit the appellation, which is commonly given to them, of 
rich soils; for the vegetable nourishment is long preserved in them, unless taken up by 
the organs of plants. Siliceous sands, on the contrary, deserve the term hungry, wliich 
is commonly applied to them ; for the vegetable and animal matters they contain, not 
being attracted by the earthy constituent parts of the soil, are more liable to be decom- 
posed by the action of the atmosphere, or carried off from them by water. In most of the 
black and brown rich vegetable moulds, the earths seem to be in combination with a pe- 
culiar extractive matter, afforded during the decomposition of vegetables ; this is slowly 
taken up or attracted from the earths by water, and appears to constitute a prime cause of 
the fertility of the soil. 

1067. Thus all soils are useful to plants, as affording them a fixed abode and a range for 
their roots to spread in search of food ; but some are much more so than others, as better 
adapted by their constituent parts, climate, inclination of surface and subsoil attracting 
and supplying food. 

Sect. V. Of the Improvement of Soils. 

1068. Soils may be rendered more ft for answering the purjmes of vegetation by pulveris- 
ation, by consolidation, by exposure to the atmosphere, by an alteration of their constituent 
parts, by changing their condition in respect to water, by changing their position in re- 
spect to atmospherical influence, and by a change in the kinds of plants cultivated. All 
these improvements are independently of th6 application of manures. 

SuBSECT. 1. Pulverisation. 

1069. The mechanical division of the parts of soils is a very obvious improvement, and ap- 
plicable to all in proportion to their adhesive texture. Even a free siliceous soil will, if 
left untouched, become too compact for the proper admission of air, rain, and heat, and 
for the free growth of the fibres ; and strong upland clays, not submitted to the plough 
or the spade, will, in a few years, be found in the possession of fibrous-rooted perennial 
grasses, which form a clothing on their surface, or strong tap-rooted trees, as the oak, 
which force their way through the interior of the mass. Annuals and ramentaceous- 
rooted herbaceous plants cannot penetrate into such soils. 

1070. The first object of pulverisation is to give scope to the roots of vegetables, for 
without abundance of roots no plant will become vigorous, whatever may be the richness 
of the soil in which it is placed. The fibres of the roots, as we have seen (740.), take 
up the extract of the soil by intro-susception ; the quantity taken up, therefore, will not 
depend alone on the quantity in the soil, but on the number of absorbing fibres. The 
more the soil is pulverised, the more these fibres are increased, the more extract is ab- 
sorbed, and the more vigorous does the plant become. Pulverisation, therefore, is not only 
advantageous previous to planting or sowing, but also during the progress of vegetation, 
when applied in the intervals between the plants. In this last case it operates also in the 
way of pruning, and by cutting off or shortening the extending fibres, causes them to 
branch out numerous others, by which the mouths or pores of the plants ai-e greatly in^ 
creased, and such food as is in the soil has the better chance of being sought after, and 
taken up by them. Tull and Du Hamel relate various experiments which decidedly 
prove that, cceteris paribus, the multiplication of the fibres is as the inter-pulvei;isatioji ; 



Book II. 



PULVERISATION OF SOILS, 



227 



but the strength of tlie vegetable, in consequence of this multiplication of fibreK, must 
depei-d a good deal on the quantity of food or of extract within their reach. The root of 
a willow-tree, as we have seen (782.), has the fibres prodigiously increased by coming in 
contact with the water in a river, and so have various other aquatic trees and plants, as 
alder, mint, lysimachiathyrsiflora, calla i5alustris, oenanthe fistulosa, &c. ; but their herbs 
or trunks are not proportionally increased unless the water be impregnated with organised 
remains. 

1071. Pulverisation increases the capillari/ attraction, or sponge-Like property of soils, 
by which their humidity is rendered more uniform. It is evident this capillary at- 
traction must be greatest where the particles of the earth are finely divided ; for 
gravels and sands hardly retain water at all, while clays, not opened by pulverisation or 
other means, either do not absorb water, or when, by long action it is absorbed, they re- 
tain too much. Water is not only necessary to the growth of plants as such, but it is 
essential to the production of extract from the vegetable matters which they contain ; and 
unless the soil, by pulverisation or otherwise, is so constituted as to retain the quantity 
of water requisite to produce this extract, the addition of manures will be in vain. 
Manure is useless to vegetation till it becomes soluble in water, and it would remain 
useless in a state of solution, if it so abounded as wholly to exclude air, for then the fibres 
or moutlis, unable to perform their functions, would soon decay and rot off. 

1072. The temperature of a soil is greatlT/ promotedhy -pulveYisation. Earths, Grisenthwaite 
observes, are also amongst the worst conductors of heat with wliich we are acquainted, 
and consequently, it would be a considerable time before the gradually increasing tem- 
perature of spring could communicate its genial warmth to the roots of vegetables, if 
their lower strata were not heated by some other means. To remove this defect, which 
always belongs to a close compact soil, it is necessary to have the land open, that there 
may be a free ingress of the warm air and tepid rains of spring. 

1073. Pulverisation contributes to the increase of vegetable food. Water is known to be 
a condenser and solvent of carbonic acid gas, which, when the land is open, can be im- 
mediately carried to the roots of vegetables, and contribute to their growth ; but if the 
land be close, and the water lie on or near its surface, then the carbonic acid gas, which 
always exists in the atmosphere and is carried down by rains, will soon be dissipated. 
An open soil is also almost suitable for effecting those changes in the manure itself, which 
are equally necessary to the preparation of such food. Animal and vegetable substances, 
exposed to the alternate action of heat, moisture, light, and air, undergo spontaneous 
decompositions, which would not otherwise take place. 

1074. By means of j^ulverisation a j)ortio7i of atmospheric air is buried in the soil. This 
air, so confined, is decomposed by the moisture retained in the earthy matters. Am- 
monia is formed by the union of the hydrogen of the water with the nitrogen of the at- 
mosphere ; and nitre, by the union of oxygen and nitrogen ; the oxygen may also unite 
with the carbon contained in the soil, and form carbonic acid gas, and carburetted hydro- 
gen. Heat is given out during these processes, and "hence," as Dr. Darwin remarks 
{Phytologia, sect. xii. 1.), " the great propriety of cropping lands immediately after they 
had been comminuted and turned over ; and this the more especially, if manure has been 
added at the same time, as the process of fermentation vnll go on faster when the soil is 
loose, and the interstices filled with air, than afterwards, when it becomes compressed with 
its own gravity, the relaxing influence of rains, and the repletion of the partial vacuums 
formed by the decomposition of the enclosed air. The advantage of the heat thus obtained 
in exciting vegetation, whether in a seed or root, especially in spring, when the soil is 
cold, must be very considerable." 

1075. The great advantages of pulverisation deceived Tull, who fancied that no other 
assistances were required in the well-management of the business of husbandry. A 
knowledge of chemistry, in its present improved state, would have enabled him to discover 
that the pulverisation of the soil was of no other benefit to the plants that grow in it than 
as it " increased the number of their fibrous roots or mouths by which they imbibe their 
food, facilitated the more speedy and perfect preparation of this food, and conducted the 
food so prepared more regularly to their roots." Of this food itself it did not produce 
one particle. 

1076. TJie depth of pulverisation, Sir H. Davy observes, " must depend upon the nature 
of the soil, and of the sub-soil. In rich clayey soils it can scarcely be too deep ; and even 
in sands, unless the sub-soil contains some principles noxious to vegetables, deep commi- 
nution should be practised. Wlien the roots are deep, they are less liable to be injured 
either by excess of rain or drought ; the radicles are shot forth into every part of the soil; 
and the space from which the nourishment is derived is more considerable than when the 
seed is superficially inserted in the soil." 

1077. Pulverisation should, in all cases, be accompanied ivith the admixture of the parts 
o/' w<75 by turning them over. It is difficult, indeed, to pulverise without effecting this 

Q 2 



228 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



end, at least by the implements in common use ; but if it could be effected, it would be 
injurious, because the difference of gravity between the organised matters and the earths, 
has a constant tendency to separate them, and stiiring a soil only by forks or pronged 
implements, such as cultivators, would, in a short time, leave the surface of the soil too 
light and spongy, and the lower part too compact and earthy. 

SuBSECT. 2. Of the Improvement of Soils bi/ Comjiression. 

1078. Mechanical consolidation will improve some soils, such as spongy peats and light 
dusty sands. It is but a limited source of improvement, but still it deserves to be 
noticed. 

1079. The proper degree of adhesiveness is best given to loose soils by the addition of 
•earthy matters ; but mere rolling and treading are not to 'be altogether rejected. To be 
benefited by rolling a soil must be dry, and the operation must not be carried too far! A 
peat-bog drained and rolled, will sooner become covered with grasses than one equally 
well drained and left alone. Drifting sands may be well rolled when wet, and by re- 
peating the process after rains they will in time acquire a surface of grass or herbage. 
Every agriculturist knows the advantages of rolling light soils after solving, or even 
treading them with sheep. Gardeners also tread in seeds on certain soils. 

SuBSECT. 3. Of the Improvement of Soils by Aeration or Fallowing. 

1080. Soils are benefited by the free admission of the weather to their interior parts. This is 
generally considered as one of the advantages of fallowing, and its use in gardening is ex- 
perienced in compost heaps, and in winter and summer ridging. The precise advantages, 
however, of exposure to the air, independently of the concurrent influence of water, 
heat, and the other effects mentioned as attendant on pulverisation, do not seem at present 
to be correctly ascertained. It is allowed that carbonic acid gas may be absorbed by cal- 
careous earths, and Dr. Thomson considers that the earths alone may thus probably 
administer food to plants ; but Sir H. Davy seems to consider mere exposure to the at- 
mosphere as of no benefit to soils whatever. " It has been supposed by some witers," he 
says, " that certain principles necessary to fertility are derived from the atmosphere, which 
are exhausted by a succession of crops, and that these are again supplied during the repose 
of the land, and the exposure of the pulverised soil to the influence of the'air ; but this in 
truth is not the case. The earths commonly found in soils cannot be combined with more 
oxygen ; none of them unite to azote ; and such of them as are capable of attracting car- 
bonic acid, are always saturated with it in those soils on which the practice of fallowing is 
adopted." 

1081. Aeration and repose, or summer fallow. " The vague ancient opinion of the use of 
nitre, and of nitrous salts in vegetation," Sir H. Davy says, " seems to have been one of the 
principal speculative reasons for the defence of summer fallox^-s. Nitrous salts are produced 
during the exposure of soils containing vegetable and animal remains, and in greatest 
abundance in hot weather ; but it is probably by the combination of azote from these re- 
mains with oxygen in the atmosphere that the acid is formed ; and at the expense of an 
element, which otherwise would have formed ammonia ; the compounds of which are 
much more efficacious than the nitrous compounds in assisting vegetation." It is proper 
to observe that tliis reasoning is more speculative than experimental, and seems influenced, 
in some degree, by the opinion adopted by the author, that fallows are of little use in 
husbandry. One obvious advantage of aeration in summer, or a summer fallow, is, that 
the soil may thus be heated by the sun to a degree wliich it never could be, if partially 
covered with the foliage of even the widest-drilled crops. For this purpose, if the soil is 
laid up in large lumps, it is evident it will receive more heat by exposing a greater sur- 
face to the atmosphere, and it will retain this heat longer than can be expected, from tlie 
circumstance of the lumps reflecting back the rays of heat radiated by each other. A 
clayey soil, in this way, it is ?:Si\d. {Farmers' Magazine, 1815), maybe heated to ISO'', 
which may in some degree alter its absorbent powers as to water, and contiibvite materially 
to the destruction of vegetable fibre, insects, and their eggs. By the aeration of iands in 
winter, minute mechanical division is obtained by the freezing of the water in the soil ; 
for, as water in the solid state occupies more space than when fluid, the particles of 
earthy matters and of decomposing stones are thus rent asunder, and crumble down in 
a fine mould. Rough stony soils will tlms receive an accession to their finer soil every 
winter. 

1082. Agricultural experience has fully proved that fallows are the only means by 
which stiff clays in moist climates can be effectually cleared of weeds. Supposing there- 
fore that no other advantage whatever was obtained, that no nutritive matter was 
imbibed fronl the atmosphere, and the soil was neither chemically nor mechanically 
benefited by aeration, this benefit alone — the effectual eradication of weeds — is suf- 
ficient to justify the use of fallows on such soils. 



Book II. 



ALTERATION OF THE PARTS OF SOILS. 



229 



SuBSECT. 4. Altcrntioyi of the constiUient Parts of Soils. 

1083. The constituetit parts of soils may be altered by the addition or subtraction of in- 
gredients in wliich they are deficient, or superabound, and by the chemical changes of 
some constituent part or parts by the action offre. 

1084. In ascertaining the composition of faulty soils with a view to their improvement 
by adding to their constituent parts, any particular ingredient which is the cause of their 
unproductiveness, should be particularly attended to ; if possible, they should be com- 
pared with fertile soils in the same neighbourhood, and in similar situations, as the dif- 
ference of the composition may, in many cases, indicate the most proper methods of im- 
provement. If, on wasliing a sterile soil, it is found to contain the salts of iron, or any 
acid matter, it may be ameliorated by the application of quick-lime. A soil of good ap- 
pai-ent texture, containing sulphate of iron, ^vill be sterile ; but the obvious remedy is a 
top-dressing -svith lime, -svhich converts the sulphate into manure. If tliere be an excess 
of calcareous matter in the soil, it may be improved by the application of sand or clay. 
Soils too abundant in sand are benefited by the use of clay, or marl, or vegetable matter. 
Light sands are often benefited by a dressing of peat, and peats by a dressing of sand ; 
though the former is in its nature but a temporary im.provement. When peats are acid, 
or contain ferruginous salts, calcareous matter is absolutely necessary in bringing them 
into cultivation. Tlie best natural soils are those of v.hich the m.aterials have been de- 
rived from dilferent strata, which have been minutely divided by air and water, and are 
intimately blended together ; and in improving soils artificially, the cultivator cannot do 
better than imitate the processes of nature. Ihe materials necessaiy for the purpose are 
seldom far distant ; coarse sand is often found immediately on chalk, and beds of sand 
and gravel are common below clay. Tlie labor of improving the texture or constitution 
of the soil, is repaid by a great permanent advantage, — less m^anure is required, and its 
fertihty insured ; and capital laid out in tliis way secures for ever the productiveness, and 
consequently the value of tlae land. 

1085. The removal of superabundant ingredients in soils may sometimes be one of the 
simplest and most effectual means of tlieir improvement. It occasionally happens that 
the surface of a well proportioned soil is thickly covered •u'ith peat, v. itli di'ifted sand, 
with gravel, or with small stones. Extensive examples of the fonner occur in Stirling- 
shire, and of the latter in Norfolk. In such cases, a simple and efltectual mode of im- 
provement consists in removing the superincumbent strata, and cultivating that below. 
This can seldom be put in practice on a large scale, with such heavy materials as gravel 
or stones ; but some hundi-eds of acres of rich alluvial soil, deeply covered by peat, have 
been bared and cultivated in Flanders moss m Stirlingshire ; an operation commenced by 
the celebrated Lord Kaimes, (Gen. Rep. f Scot. App. v. 5.) copied by his neigiibours, 
and continued by his and their successors. Tlie moss is floated off by streams of water, 
which empt>' themselves in the Frith of F'orth. In this river, by the winds and tides, it 
is cast on shore in the bays and recesses, impregnated with salt ; and here it ingenders 
vegetation on the encroacliing surfaces of sand and gravel. Coatings of sand or gravel 
can seldom be removed on a scale of sufficient extent for agriculture, but have, in some 
instances, for the pui-poses of gardening. Sometimes this improvement may be effected 
by ti-enching down the surface, and raising up a stratum of better earth. 

1086. Incineration. The chemical changes which can be effected in soils by inciner- 
ation are considerable. Tliis practice was known to the Romans, is more or less in use 
in most paits of Europe, is mentioned as an approved practice by our oldest agricultural 
writers, and has lately excited some degree of attention from the successful experiments 
of different cultivators. {Farmer s Magazine, 1810 to 1815, and Farmers'' Journal, 
1814 to 1821.) 

1087. The theory of burning soils is tlius given by Sir H. Davy. It rests, he says, 
entirely on chemical doctrines. Tlie bases of all common soils, are mixtures of the 
primitive earths and oxide of iron ; and these earths have a certain degree of attraction for 
each other. To regard this atti-action in its proper point of vieM , it is only necessary to 
consider the composition of any common siliceous stone. Feldspar, for instance, contains 
siliceous, aluminous, calcareous earths, fixed alkali, and oxide of iron, which exist in one 
compound, in consequence of their chemical attractions for each otlier. Let this stone be 
ground into impalpable powder, it then becomes a substance like clay . if the powder be 
heated very strongly, it fuses, and on cooling forms a coherent mass similar to the original 
stone ; the parts separated by mechanical division adliere again in consequence of chemical 
attraction. If the powder is heated less strongly, the particles only superficially combine 
with each other, and form a gritty mass, wliich, when broken into pieces, has the characters 
of sand. If the power of the powdered feldspar to absorb water from the atmosphere 
before, and after the application of the heat, be compared, it is found much less in the 
last case. Tlie same efiect takes place when the powder of other siliceous or almninovrs 

Q 3 



230 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II, 



stones is made the subject of experiment, and two equal portions of basalt ground into im- 
palpable powder, of which one half had been strongly ignited, and the other exposed only 
to a temperature equal to that of boiling water, gained very different weights in the same 
time when exposed to air. In four hours the one had gained only tw o grains, whilst tlie 
other had gained seven grains. When clay or tenacious soils are burnt, the effect is of 
the same kind ; they are brought nearer to a state analogous to that of sands. In the 
manufacture of bricks the general principle is well illustrated ; if a piece of dried brick 
eaith be applied to the tongue, it will adhere to it very strongly, in consequence of its 
power to absorb water ; but after it has been burnt, there will be scarcely a sensible ad- 
hesion. 

1088. The advantages of burning are that it renders the soil less compact, less tenacious 
and retentive of moisture ; and when properly applied, may convert a matter that was 
stiff", damp, and in consequence cold, into one powdery, dry, and warm, and much 
more proper as a bed for vegetable life. 

1089. The great objection made by speculative chemists to paring and burning, is, that 
it destroys vegetable and animal matter, or the manure in the soil ; but in cases in which 
the texture of its earthy ingredients is permanently improved, there is more than a com- 
pensation for this temporary disadvantage. And in some soils where there is an excess 
of inert vegetable matter, the destruction of it must be beneficial ; and the carbonaceous 
matter remaining in the ashes may be more useful to the crop than the vegetable fibre 
from which it was produced. 

1090. Three specimens of ashes from different lands that had undergone paring and 
burning were examined by chemical analysis. The first was from a chalk soil, and 200 
grains contained 80 of carbonate of lime, 11 gypsum, 9 charcoal, 15 oxide of iron, 
3 saline matter, sulphate of potash, muriate of magnesia, with a minute quantity of ve- 
getable alkali. The remainder alumina and silica. Suppose 2660 bushels to be tlie 
common produce of an acre of ground, then, according to this calculation, they would 
give 172,900 lbs., containing carbonate of lime 691,60 lbs,, gypsum 9509\5., oxide of 
iron 12,967*5., saline matter 2593*5., charcoal 7780*5. In this instance there was un- 
doubtedly a very considerable quantity of matter capable of being active as manure pro- 
duced in the operation of burning. The charcoal vei*y finely divided, and exposed on a 
large surface, must be gradually converted into carbonic acid. And gypsum and oxide 
of iron seem to produce the very best eflfects when applied to lands containing an ex- 
cess of carbonate of lime. The second specimen was from a soil near Coleorton, in 
Leicestershire, containing only four per cent, of carbonate ^of lime, and consisting of 
three fourths light siliceous sand, and about one fourth clay. Tliis had been turf before 
burning, and 100 parts of the ashes gave 6 parts charcoal, 3 mm-iate of soda and sulphate 
of potash, with a trace of vegetable alkali, 9 oxide of iron, and the remainder the earths. 
In this instance, as in the other, finely divided charcoal was found, the solubility of 
which would be increased by the presence of the alkali. The third instance was that 
of a stiflP clay, from Mount's Bay, Cornwall. This land has been brought into cultiva- 
tion from a heath, by burning, about ten years before ; but having been neglected, furze 
was springing up in different parts of it, which gave rise to the second paring and burn- 
ing, 100 parts of the ashes contained 8 parts of charcoal, 2 of saline matter, principally 
common salt, with a little vegetable alkali, 7 oxide of iron, 2 carbonate of lime, the re- 
mainder alumina and silica. Here the quantity of charcoal was greater than in the other 
instances. The salt was probably owing to the vicinity of the sea, it being but two miles 
oflT. In this land there was certainly an excess of dead vegetable fibre, as well as un- 
profitable living vegetable matter. 

1091. Causes of the effects of burning soil. Many obscure causes have been referred to 
for the purpose of explaining the effects of paring and burning ; btit they may be re- 
ferred entirely to the diminution of the coherence and tenacity of clays, and to the 
destruction of inert and useless vegetable matter, and its conversion into a manure. 
Dr. Darwin, in his Phytologia, has supposed that clay, during torrefaction, may absorb 
some nutritive principles from the atmosphere that afterwards may be supplied to plants ; 
but the earths are pure metallic oxides, saturated with oxygen ; and the tendency of 
burning is to expel any other volatile principles that they may contain in combination. 
If the oxide of iron in soils is not saturated with oxygen, torrefaction tends to produce 
its further union with this principle ; and hence, in burning, the color of clay changes to 
red. The oxide of iron, containing its full proportion of oxygen, has less attraction for 
acids than the other oxide, and is consequently less likely to be dissolved by any fluid 
acids in the soil ; and it appears in this state to act in the same manner as the earths. 
A very ingenious author, Naismith (Elements of Agr.), supposes that the oxide of 
iron, when combined with carbonic acid, is poisonous to plants ; and that one use of tor- 
refaction is to expel the carbonic acid from it ; but the carbonate of iron is not "soluble 
in water, and is a very inert substance ; and a luxuriant crop of cresses has been raised 



Book II. CHANGING THE CONDITION OF LANDS. 



231 



in a soil composed of one fifth carbonate of iron, and four fifths carbonate of lime. 
Carbonate of iron abounds in some of the most fertile soils in England, particularly the 
red hop soil. And there is no theoretical ground for supposing that carbonic acid, 
wliich is an essential food of plants, should, in any of its combinations, be poisonous to 
them ; and it is known that lime and magnesia are both noxious to vegetation, unless 
combined with this principle. 

1092. The soils improved by blaming are all such as contain too much dead vegetable 
fibre, and which consequently lose from one third to one half of their weight by inciner- 
ation ; and all such as contain their earthy constituents in an impalpable state of division, 
i. e. the stiff clays and marls, are improved by burning : but coarse sands, or rich 
soils containing a just mixture of the earths ; and in all cases in which the texture is 
sufficiently loose, or the organisable matter sufficiently soluble, the process of torrefaction 
cannot be useful. 

1093. All poor siliceous sands are injured by burning. Young in his Essay on Ma- 
nures, states, " that he found burning injure sand ; and the operation is never performed 
by good cultivators upon siliceous sandy soils, after they have once been brought into 
cultivation." 

SuBSECT. 5. Changing the Condition of Lands, in res^)ect to Water. 

1094. The water of the soil where ' sup)erabundant may be withdrawn, and wheii deficient 
supplied ; these operations with water are independent of its supply as a manure, or as 
affording the stimulus of heat or cold. 

1095. Stagnant ivater may be considered as injurious to all the useful classes of plants, 
by obstructing perspii-ation and intro-susception, and thus diseasing their roots and sub- 
merged parts. Where the surface-soil is properly constituted, and rests on a sub-soil mo- 
derately porous, both wall hold water by capillary attraction, and what is not so retained 
will sink into the inteiior strata by its gravity ; but where the sub-soil is retentive, it will 
resist, or not admit with sufficient rapidity, the percolation of M^ater to the strata below, 
which accuinulating in the surface-soil, till its proportion becomes excessive as a com- 
ponent part, not only carries off the extractive matter, but diseases the plants. Hence 
the origin of surface-draining, that is, laying land in ridges or beds, or intersecting it 
with small open gutters. 

1096. Springs. Where the upper stratum is porous in some places, and retentive in 
others, and on a retentive base, the water, in its progress along the porous bed or layer, 
will be interrupted by the retentive places in a great variety of ways, and there accumu- 
lating will burst through the upper surface in the form of springs, which are more in- 
jurious than surface-water, as being colder, and generally permanent in their operation. 
Hence the origin of under-draining in all its varieties of collecting, extracting, and con- 
veying water. 

1097. The ivater of rivers may become injurious to lands on their banks, by too fre- 
quently overflowing their surface. In this case the stream may be included by mounds 
of earth, or other materials impervious to water : and thus aquatic soils rendered dry and 
fit for useful herbage and aration. The same may be said of lands occasionally over- 
flown by the sea. Hence the origin of embanking, an art carried to a great extent in 
Holland and Italy. (See Smeaton s Posthumous Works; Sigismondi, Agr. Tosc. ; and our 
article Embankment, in Supp. Encyc. Brit. 1819.) 

1098. Irrigation. Plants cannot live without water, any more than they can prosper 
in soils where it is superabundant ; and it is therefore supplied by art on a large scale, 
either by surface or subterraneous irrigation. In both practices important points are to 
imitate nature in producing motion, and in applying the water in the mornings or even- 
ings, or under a clouded sky, and also at moderate intervals. The effects of water con- 
stantly employed, would, in most cases, be such as attend stagnated water, aquatic soils, 
or land-springs ; and employed in hot sunshine, or after violent heats, it may check eva- 
poration and destroy life, exactly as happens to those who may have bathed in cold spring 
water after long and violent exercise in a hot day. (Phytologia, xv. 3. 5.) 

1099. In surface irrigation the water is conveyed in a system of open channels, which 
require to be most numerous in such grounds as are under drilled annual crops, and 
least so in such as are sown in breadths, beds, or ridges, under perennial crops. This 
mode of watering has existed from time immemorial. The children of Israel are repre- 
sented as sowing their seed and " watering it with their foot ;" that is, as Calmet explains 
it, raising the water from the Nile by a machine worked by the feet, from which it was 
conducted in such channels as we have been describing. It is general in the south of 
France and Italy ; but less required in Britain. 

1100. Subterraneous irrigation may he effected by a system of drains or covered gutters 
in the sub-soil, which, proceeding from a main conduit, or other supply, can be charged 
with water at pleasure. For grounds under the culture of annual plants, this mode would 
be more convenient, and for all others more economical as to the use of water, than sur- 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



P^RT II. 



face irrlgiation. Where the under-stratum is gravelly, and rests on a retentive stratum, 
this mode of watering may take place without drains, as it may also on perfectly flat 
lands, by filling to the brim, and keeping full for several days, surrounding trenches ; 
but the beds or fields between the trenches must not be of great extent. This practice is 
used in Lombardy on the alluvial lands near the embouchures of the Po. In Lincoln- 
shire the same mode is practised by shutting up the flood-gates of the mouths of the 
great drains in the dry seasons, and thus damming up the w^ater through all the ramifica- 
tions of the drainage from the sea to their source. Tliis was first suggested by G. Ren- 
nie and Sir Joseph Banks, after the drainage round Boston, completed about 1810. A 
similar plan, on a smaller scale, had been practised in Scotland, where deep mosses had 
been drained and cultivated on the surface, but where, in summer, vegetation failed 
from deficiency of moisture. It w^as first adopted by J. Smith, (See Essay on the Im- 
lirooement of Peat-Moss, 1795,) on a farm in Ayrshire, and has subsequently been brought 
into notice by J. Johnston, the first delineator and professor of Elkinston's. system of 
draining. • 

1101. Manuring by irrigation. Irrigation with a view to conveying additions to the soil 
has long been practised, and is an evident imitation of the overflowing of alluvial lands, 
whether in meadow or aration. In the former case it is called irrigation or flooding, and 
in the latter, waqjing. Warping is used chiefly as a mode of enriching the soil by an 
increase of the alluvial depositions, or warp of rivers, during winter, where the sur- 
face is not under crop, and is common on tlie banks of the Ouse. 

1 102. The rationale of irrigation is thus given by Sir H. Davy. " In general in nature 
the operation of water is to bring earthy substances into an extreme state of division. 
But in the artificial watering of meadows, the beneficial effects depend upon many dif- 
ferent causes, some chemical, some mechanical. Water is absolutely essential to vegeta- 
tion ; and when land has been covered by water in the winter, or in the beginning of 
spring, the moisture tliat has penetrated deep into the soil, and even the sub-soil, becomes 
a source of nourishment to the roots of the plants in the summer, and prevents those bad 
effects that often happen in lands in their natural state, from a long continuance of dry 
weather. ^Vhen the water used in irrigation has flowed over a calcareous country, it is 
generally found impregnated with carbonate of Mme ; and in this state it tends, in many 
instances, to ameliorate the soil. Common river water also generally contains a certain 
portion of organisable matter, which is much greater after rains than at other times ; and 
which exists in the largest quantity when the stream rises in a cultivated country. Even 
in cases when the water used for flooding is pure, and free from animal or vegetable sub- 
stances, it acts by causing a more equable diffusion of nutritive matter existing in the 
land ; and in very cold seasons it preserves tlie tender roots and leaves of the grass from 
being affected by frost. Water is of greater specific gravity at 42° Fahrenheit, than at 
32'\ the freezing point ; and hence, in a meadow iiTigated in winter, the water immediately 
in contact with the grass is rarely below 40'', a degree of temperature not at all prejudi- 
cial to the living organs of plants. In 1804, in the month of Mai-ch, the temperature in 
a water meadow near Hungerford was examined by a very delicate thermometer. The 
temperature of the air at seven in the morning was 29°. The water was frozen above the 
grass. Tlie temperature of the soil below the water in which the roots of the grass were 
fixed, was 43°." Water may also operate usefully in warm seasons by moderating tem- 
perature, and thus retarding the over-rapid progress of vegetation. Tlie consequence of 
this retardation will be greater magnitude and improved texture of the grosser paits of 
plants, a more perfect and ample developement of their finer parts, and, above all, an 
increase in the size of their fruits and seeds. We apprehend this to be one of the princi- 
pal uses of flooding rice-grounds in the East ; for it is ascertained that the rice-plant will 
perfect its seeds in Europe, and even in this country, without any water beyond what is 
furnished by the weather, and the natural moisture of a well constituted soil. " In 
general, those waters wliich breed the best fish are the best fitted for watering meadows ; 
but most of the benefits of irrigation may be derived from any kind of water. It is, how- 
ever, a general principle, that waters containing ferruginous impregnation, though pos- 
sessed of fertilising effects when applied to a calcareous soil, are injurious on soils that 
do not effervesce with acids ; and that calcareous waters, which are known by the earthy 
deposit they afford when boiled, are of most use on siliceous soils, or other soils containing 
no remarkable quantity of carbonate of lime." 

SuBSECT. 6. Changing the Condition of Lands, in reqiect to Atmospherical Iitfltience. 

1103. The influence of the weather on soils may be affected by changing the position of 
tlieir surface and by sheltering or shading. 

1104. Changing the condition of lands, as to solar influence, is but a Limited means of 
improvement ; but is capable of being turned to some account in gardening. It is 
effected by altering the position of their surface, so as tliat surface inay be more or less 
at right angles to the plane of the sun's rays, according as heat or cold is to be increased 



Book II. 



ROTATION OF CROPS. 



233 



or diminished. The influence of the sun's rays upon any plane are demonstrated to be 
as their number and perpendicularity to that plane, neglecting the effects of the atmo- 
sphere. Hence one advantage of ridging lands, provided the ridges run north and south ; 
for on such surfaces the rays of the morning sun v^^ill take effect sooner on the east side, 
and those of the afternoon will remain longer in operation on the west side ; whilst at 
mid-day his elevation will compensate, in some degree, for the obliquity of his rays to 
both sides of the ridge. In culture, on a small scale, ridges or sloping beds for winter- 
crops may be made south-east and north-west, with their slope to the south, at an angle 
of forty degrees, and as steep on the north side as the mass can be got to stand ; and on 
the south slope of such ridge, cceteris paribus, it is evident much earlier crops may be 
produced than on level ground. The north side, however, will be lost during this early 
cropping ; but as early crops are soon gathered, the whole can be laid level in time for 
a main crop. Hence all the advantage of grounds sloping to the south south-east, or 
south-west, in point of precocity, and of those sloping to the north for lateness and di- 
minished evaporation. Another advantage of such surfaces is, that they dry sooner after 
rains, whether by the operation of natural or artificial drainage ; or in the case of sloping 
to the south, by evaporation. 

1105. Shelter, whether by walls, hedges, strips of plantation, or trees scattered over the 
surface, may be considered generally, as increasing or preserving heat, and lessening 
evaporation from the soil. But if the current of air should be of a higher temperature 
than that of the earth, screens against wind will prevent the earth from being so soon heated ; 
and from the increased evaporation arising from so great a multiplication of vegetable 
surface by the trees, more cold wdll be produced after rains, and the atmosphere kept 
in a more moist state, than in grounds perfectly naked. When the temperature of a cur- 
rent of air is lower than that of the earth, screens will prevent its carrying off so much 
heat ; but more especially scattered trees, the tops of which will be chiefly cooled whilst 
the under surfaces of their lower branches reflect back the rays of heat as they radiate 
from the surface of the soil. Heat in its transmission from one body to another, follows 
the same laws as light ; and, therefore, the temperature of the surface in a forest will, in 
winter, be considerably higher than that of a similarly constituted soil exposed to the full 
influence of the weather. The early flowering of plants, in woods and hedges, is a proof 
of this : but as such soils cannot be so easily heated in summer, and are cooled like others 
after the sinking in of rains, or the melting of snows, the effect of the reflection as to the 
whole year is nearly neutralised, and the average temperature of the year of such soils 
and situations will probably be found not greater than that of open lands. 

1106. Shading the ground, whether by umbrageous trees, spreading plants, or covering 
it with tiles, slates, moss, litter, &c. has a tendency to exclude atmospherical heat and 
retain moisture. Shading dry loose soils, by covering them with litter, or slates, or tiles, 
laid round the roots of plants, is found very beneficial. 

SuBSECT. 7. notation of Crops. 

1 107. Growing different crojys in succession is a practice which every cultivator knows to 
be highly advantageous, though its beneficial influence has not yet been fully accounted 
for by chemists. The most general theory is, that though all plants will live on the same 
food, as the chemical constituents of their roots and leaves are nearly the same, yet that 
many species require particular substances to bring their seeds or fruits to perfection, as 
the analysis of these seeds or fruits often affords substances different from those which 
constitute the body of the plant. (736.) A sort of rotation may be said to take place in 
nature, for perennial herbaceous plants have a tendency to extend their circumference, 
and rot and decay at their centre, where others of a different kind spring up and succeed 
them. This is more especially the case with travelling roots, as in mint, strawberry, 
creeping crowfoot, &c. 

1 108. The rationale of rotation, is thus given by Sir H. Davy. " It is a great advantage 
in the convertible system of cultivation, that the whole of the manure is employed ; and 
that those parts of it which are not fitted for one crop, remain as nourishment for another. 
Thus, if the turnip is the first in the order of succession, this crop, manured with recent 
dung, immediately finds sufficient soluble matter for its nourishment ; and the heat pro- 
duced in fermentation assists the germination of the seed and the growth of the plant. 
If, after turnips, barley with grass-seeds is sown, then the land, having been little 
exhausted by the turnip crop, afibrds the soluble parts of the decomposing manure to the 
grain. The grasses, rye-grass, and clover remain, which derive a small part oily of 
their organised matter from the soil, and probably consume the gypsum in the manure 
which would be useless to other crops : these plants, likewise, by their large systems 
of leaves, absorb a considerable quantity of nourishment from the atmosphere ; and when 
ploughed in at the end of two years, the decay of their roots and leaves affords manure 
for the wheat crop ; and at this period of the course, the woody fibre of the farm-yard 
manure, which contains the phosphate of lime and the other difficultly soluble parts, is 



234 



SCIENCE OF Gardening. 



Part II. 



broken down : and as soon as tlie most exhausting crop is taken, recent manure is again 
applied. Peas and beans, in all instances, seem well adapted to prepai-e ground for 
wheat ; and in some rich lands they are raised in alternate crops for years together. 
Peas and beans contain a small quantity of a matter analogous to albumen ; but it seems 
that the azote, which forms a constituent part of this matter, is derived from the atmo- 
sphere. The dry bean-leaf, when burnt, yields a smell approaching to that of decomposing 
animal matter ; and in its decay in the soil, may furnish principles capable of becoming 
a part of the gluten in wheat. Though the general composition of plants is very analo- 
gous, yet the specific difference in the products of many of them, prove that they must 
derive different materials from the soil ; and though the vegetables having the smallest 
system of leaves will proportionably most exhaust the soil of common nutritive matter, 
yet particular vegetables, when their produce is carried off, will require peculiar princi- 
ples to be supplied to the land in which they grow. Strawberries and potatoes at first 
produce luxuriantly in virgin mould, recently turned up from pasture ; but in a few 
years they degenerate, and require a fresh soil. Lands, in a course of years, often cease 
to afford good cultivated grasses ; they become (as it is popularly said) tired of them ; 
and one of the probable reasons for this is, the exhaustion of the gypsum contained in the 
soil." 

1109. TJie powers of vegetables to exhaust the soil of the jmnciples necessary to tlieir 
growth, is remarkably exemplified in certain funguses. Mushrooms are said never to 
rise in two successive seasons on the same spot ; and the production of the phenomena 
called fairy rings has been ascribed by Dr. WoUaston to tlie power of the peculiar fungus 
which forms it, to exhaust the soil of the nutriment necessary for the growth of the 
species. The consequence is, that the ring annually extends ; for no seeds will grow 
where their parents grew before them ; and the interior part of the circle has been ex- 
hausted by preceding crops ; but where the fungus has died, nourishment is supplied for 
grass, which usually rises within the circle, coarse, and of a dark green color. 

1110. A rotation is unnecessary, according to Grisenthivaite ; and, in a strict chemical 
sense, wliat he asserts cannot be denied. His theory is a refinement on the common 
idea of the uses of a rotation stated above ; but by giving some details of the constituent 
parts of certain grains and certain manures, he has presented it in a more clear and 
striking point of view than has liitherto been done. To apply the theoiy in every case, 
the constituent parts of all manures and of all plants (1st, their roots and leaves, and, 
2dly, their seeds, fruits, or grains,) must be known. In respect to manures this is tlie 
case, and it may be said to be in a great degree the case as to the most useful agri- 
cultural plants ; but, unfortunately for our purpose, the same cannot be said of garden 
productions in general, though no branch of culture can show the advantage of a rota^ 
tion of crops more than horticulture, in the practice of which it is found that grounds 
become tired of particular crops, notwithstanding that manures are applied at pleasure. 
If the precise effects of a rotation were ascertained, and the ingredients peculiarly neces- 
sary to every species pointed out, nothing could be more interesting than the results of 
experimental trials ; and whoever shall point out a simple and economical mode by which 
the potatoe may be grown successively in the same soil, and produce annually, neglecting 
the effects of climate, as dry and well-flavored tubers, or nearly so, as they generally pro- 
duce the first and second years on a new soil, will confer a real benefit on society. That 
wheat may be grown many years on the same soil by the use of animal manures, or such 
as contain gluten, Grisenthwaite's theory would justify us in believing chemically ; and it 
ought to be fairly tried by such cultivators as Coke and Curwen. Till this is done in 
the face of the whole agricultural world, and the produce of every crop, and all the par- 
ticulars of its culture, accurately reported on annually, the possibility of the thing may 
be assented to from the premises, but will not be acted on ; and, in fact, even the best 
agricultural chemists do not consider that we are sufficiently advanced in that branch of 
the science to draw any conclusion, a prion, very much at variance with general opinion 
and experience. 



Chap. II. 

Of Manures. 

1111. Every species of matter capable of jrromoting the groivth of vegetables may be con- 
sidered as manure. On examining the constituents of vegetables, we shall find that 
they are composed of oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen, or azote, with a small 
proportion of saline bodies. It is evident, therefore, that the substances employed 
as manure should also be composed of these elements, for unless they are, there will 
be a deficiency in some of the elements in the vegetable itself; and it is probable 
that such deficiency may prevent the formation of those substances within it, for which its 



Book II. 



MANURES. 



235 



peculiar organisation is contrived, and upon which its healthy existence depends. The 
elementary bodies above enumerated are all contained in animal, and the three first in 
vegetable matters. Sometimes vegetables, though very seldom, contain a small quantity 
of nitrogen. As certain salts are also constantly found to be present in healthy living 
vegetables, manures or vegetable food may, consequently, be distinguished into animal, 
vegetable, and saline. The authors whom we have already mentioned (1029.) as produc- 
ing the first chemical treatises on soils, were also the first to treat chemically of manures. 
Of these, the latest in the order of time is Sir H. Davy, from whose liighly satisfactory 
work we shall extract the greater part of this chapter. 

Sect. I. Of Manures of Animal and Vegetable Origin. 

1112. Decaying animal and vegetable substances constitute by far the most important 
class of manures, or vegetable food, and may be considered as to the theory of their oper- 
ation, their specific kinds, and their preservation and application in practice. 

SuBSECT. 1. The Theory of the Operation of Manures of Animal and Vegetable Origin. 

1113. The rationale of organic manures is very satisfactorily given by Sir H. Davy, 
who, after having proved that no solid substances can enter in that state into the plant, 
explains the manner in which nourishment is derived from vegetable and animal sub- 
stances. 

1114. Vegetable and animal substances dqiosited in the soil, as is shown by universal ex- 
perience, are consumed during the process of vegetation ; and they can only nourish the 
plant by affording solid matters capable of being dissolved by w^ater, or gaseous substances 
capable of being absorbed by the fluids in the leaves of vegetables ; but such parts of 
them as are rendered gaseous, and pass into the atmosphere, must produce a comparatively 
small effect, for gases soon become diffused through the mass of the surrounding air. 
The great object, therefore, in the application of manure should be to make it afford as 
much soluble matter as possible to the roots of the plant ; and that in a slow and gra- 
dual manner, so that it may be entirely consumed in forming its sap and organised 
parts. 

1115. Mucilaginous, gelatinous, saccharine, oily, and extractive fluids, carbonic acid, and 
ivater, are substances that in theii- unchanged states contain almost all the principles 
necessary for the life of plants ; but there are few cases in which they can be applied 
as manures in their pure forms ; and vegetable manures, in general, contain a great ex- 
cess of fibrous and insoluble matter, which must undergo chemical changes before they 
can become the food of plants. 

1116. The nature of the changes on these substances; of the causes which occasion them, 
and which accelerate or retard them ; and of the products they afford, have been scientifi- 
cally stated and explained by our great agricultural chemist. If any fresh vegetable matter 
which contains sugar, mucilage, starch, or other of the vegetable compounds soluble in water, 
be moistened, and exposed to air, at a temperature from 55° to 80°, oxygen will soon be ab- 
sorbed, and carbonic acid formed ; heat will be produced, and elastic fluids, principally car- 
bonic acid, gaseous oxide of carbon, and hydro-carbonate will be evolved ; a dark-colored 
liquid, of a slightly sour or bitter taste, will likewise be formed ; and if the process be 
suffered to continue for a time sufficiently long, nothing solid will remain, except earthy 
and saline matter, colored black by charcoal. The dark-colored fluid foraied in the fer- 
mentation always contains acetic acid ; and when albumen or gluten exists in the vege- 
table substance, it likewise contains volatile alkali. In proportion as there is more 
gluten, albumen, or matters soluble in water, in the vegetable substances exposed to fer- 
mentation, so in proportion, all otlier circumstances being equal, will the process be more 
rapid. Pure woody fibre alone undergoes a change very slowly ; but its texture is 
broken down, and it is easily resolved into new aliments, when mixed with substances 
more liable to change, containing more oxygen and hydrogen. Volatile and fixed oils, 
resins, and wax, are more susceptible of change than woody fibre, when exposed to air 
and water ; but much less liable than the other vegetable compounds ; and even the most 
inflammable substances, by the absorption of oxygen, become gradually soluble in water. 
Animal matters in general are more liable to decompose than vegetable substances ; 
oxygen is absorbed and carbonic acid and ammonia formed in the process of their putre- 
faction. Tliey produce fetid, compound, elastic fluids and likewise azote : they afford 
dark-colored acid and oily fluids, and leave a residuum of salts and earths mixed with 
carbonaceous matter. 

1117. The principal animal substances which constitute their different parts, or which are 
found in their blood, their secretions, or their excrements, are gelatine, fibrine, mucus, 
fatty, or oily matter, albumen, urea, uric acid, and different other acid, saline, and earthy 
matters. 

1118. General treatment of organic manures. Whenever manures consist principally of 



236 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



matter soluble in water, it is evident that their fermentation or putrefaction should be pre- 
vented as much as possible ; and the only cases in w hicli these processes can be useful, 
are when the manure consists principally of vegetable or animal fibre. The circumstances 
necessary for the putrefaction of animal substances are similar to those required for the 
fermentation of vegetable substances ; a temperature above the freezing point, the presence 
of water, and the presence of oxygen, at least in the first stage of tlie process. To prevent 
ma'i.ures from decomposing, they should be preserved diy, defended from the contact of 
air, and kept as cool as possible. Salt and alcohol appear to owe their powers of pre- 
serving animal and vegetable substances to their attraction for water, by which they pre- 
vent its decomposing action, and likewise to their excluding air. 

SuBSECT. 2. Of the different Species of Manures of Animal and Vegetable Origiji. 

1119. The properties and nature of the vianures in common use should be known to evei'y 
cultivator : for as different manures contain diflferent proportions of the elements neces- 
sary to vegetation, so tliey require a different treatment to enable them to produce tlieir 
full effects in culture. 

1 1 20. All green succident plants contain saccharine or mucilaginous matter, with woody 
fibre, and readily ferment. They cannot, therefore, if intended for manure, be used too 
soon after their death. Hence the advantage of digging or ploughing in green crops, 
whether natural, of weeds, or sown on purpose ; they must not, however, be turned in too 
deep, otherwise, as Mrs. Ibbetson has shown [Philos. Mag. 1816), fermentation will be 
prevented by compression and exclusion of air. Green crops should be ploughed in, if it 
be possibte, when in flower, or at the time the flower is beginning to appear, for it is at 
this period that they contain the largest quantity of easily soluble matter, and that their 
leaves are most active in forming nutritive matter. Green crops, pond-weeds, the paring 
of hedges or ditches, or any kind of fresh vegetable matter, require no preparation to fit 
them for manure. The decomposition slowly proceeds beneatii the soil ; the soluble mat- 
ters are gradually dissolved, and the slight fermentation that goes on, checked by the want 
of a free communication of air, tends to render the woody fibre soluble without occasion- 
ing the rapid dissipation of elastic matter. When old pastures are broken up and made 
arable, not only has the soil been enriched by the death and slow decay of the plants which 
have left soluble inatters in the soil, but the leaves and roots of the grasses, living at the 
time, and occupying so large a part of the surface,^ afibrd saccharine, mucilaginous, and 
extractive matters, which become immediately the food of the crop, and the gradual de- 
composition affords a supply for successive years. 

1121. Rape-cake, which is used with great success as manure, contains a large quantity 
of mucilage, some albuminous matter, and a small quantity of oil. This manure should 
be used recent, and kept as di-y as possible before it is applied. It forms an excellent 
dressing for turnip crops ; and is most economically applied by being thrown into the soil 
at the same time with the seed. 

1122. Malt-dust consists chiefly of the infant radicle separated from the grain. Sir 
H. Davy never made any experiment upon this manure ; but has great reason to suppose 
it must contain saccharine matter, and this will account for its powerful eflEects. Like rape- 
cake, it should be used as dry as possible, and its fermentation prevented. 

1 123. Linseed-cake is too valuable as a food for cattle to be much employed as a manure. 
The water in which flax and hemp are steeped, for the purpose of obtaining the pure 
vegetable fibre, has considerable fertilising powers. It appears to contain a substance ana- 
logous to albumen, and likewise much vegetable extractive matter. It putrefies very 
readily. By the watering process, a certain degree of fermentation is absolutely neces- 
sary to obtain the flax and hemp in a proper state ; the water to which they have been ex- 
posed should therefore be used as a manure as soon as the vegetable fibre is removed from 
it. Washing with soap has been successfully substituted for watering by lie. 

1124. Sea-iveeds, consisting of different species of fuci, algx, and confervfe, are much 
used as a manure on the sea-coasts of Britain and Ireland. By digesting the common 
fucus, which is the sea- weed usually most abundant on the coast, in boiling water, one- 
eighth of a gelatinous substance will be obtained, with characters similar to mucilage. A 
qiiantity distilled gave nearly four fifths of its weight of water, but no ammonia ; the 
water had an empyreumatic and slightly sour taste ; the ashes contained sea-salt, car- 
bonate of soda, and carbonaceous matter. The gaseous matter afforded was small in 
quantity, principally carbonic acid, and gaseous oxide of carbon, with a little hydro-car- 
bonate. This manure is transient in its effects, and does not last for more than a single 
crop ; which is easily accounted for from the large quantity of water, or the elements of 
water, it contains. It decays without producing heat when exposed to the atmosphere, 
and seems, as it were, to melt down and dissolve away. A large heap has been entirely 
destroyed in less than two years, nothing remaining but a little black fibrous matter. 
Some of the firmest part of a fucus were suffered to remain in a close jar, co'ntaining at- 
mospheric air, for a fortnight : in this time it had become very much shrivelled ; tlie sides 



Book II. 



SPECIES OF MANURES. 



237 



of the jar wei-e lined with dew. The air examined was found to have lost oxygen, and 
contained carbonic acid gas. Sea-weed is sometimes suffered to ferment before it is 
used ; but this process seems wholly unnecessary, for there is no fibrous matter rendered 
soluble in the process, and a pm-t of the manure is lost. The best cultivators use it as 
fresh as it can be procured ; and the practical results of this mode of applying it are 
exactly conformable to the theory of its operation. The carbonic acid formed by its in- 
cipient fermentation must be partly dissolved by the water set free in the samie process ; 
and thus become capable of absorption by the roots of plants. The effects of the sea- 
w^eed, as manure, must principally depend upon this carbonic acid, and upon the soluble 
mucilage the weed contains ; some fucus which had fermented so as to have lost about 
half its weight, afTbrded less than one twelfth of mucilaginous matter ; from which it may 
be fairly concluded that some of this substance is destroyed in fermentation. 

1125. Dry straw of wheat, oats, barley, beans, and peas, and spoiled hay, or any other 
similar kind of dry vegetable matter, is, in all cases, useful manure. In general, such 
substances are made to ferment before they are employed, though it may be doubted 
whether the practice should be indiscriminately adopted. From 400 grains of dry barley- 
straw eight grains of matter soluble in water were obtained, which had a brown color, and 
tasted like mucilage. From 400 grains of wheaten straw, were obtained five grains of a 
similar substance. There can be no doubt that the straw of different crops, immediately 
ploughed into the ground, affords nourishment to plants ; but there is an objection to this 
method of using straw, from the difficulty of burying long straws and from its rendering 
the husbandry foul. Wlien straw is made to ferment, it becomes a more manageable 
manure ; but there is likewise, on the whole, a great loss of nutritive matter. More 
manure is perhaps supplied for a single crop ; but the land is less improved than it would 
be, supposing the whole of the vegetable matter could be finely divided and mixed with 
the soil. It is usual to carry straw that can be employed for no other purpose to the 
dunghill, to ferment, and decompose ; but it is worth experiment, whether it may not be 
more economically applied when chopped small by a proper machine, and kept dry till it 
is ploughed in for the use of a crop. In this case, though it would decompose much more 
slowly, and produce less effect at first, yet its influence would be much more lasting. 

1126. Mere woody fibi'e seems to be the only vegetable matter that requires fermentation 
to render it nutritive to plants. Tanners' spent bark is a substance of this kind. 
A. Young, in his excellent Essay on Manure, states, ".that spent bark seemed rather to 
injure than assist vegetation ;" which he attributes to the astringent matter that it contains. 
But, in fact, it is freed from all soluble substances, by tlae operation of water in the tan- 
pit ; and if injurious to vegetation, the effect is probably owing to its agency upon water, 
or to its mechanical effects. It is a substance very absorbent and retentive of moisture, 
and yet not penetrable by the roots of plants. 

1127. Inert peaty matter is a substance of the same kind. It remains for years exposed 
to water and air without undergoing change, and in this state yields little or no nourish- 
ment to plants. "Woody fibre will not ferment, unless some substances are mixed with 
it, which act the same part as the mucilage, sugar, and extractive or albuminous matters, 
with which it is usually associated in herbs and succulent vegetables. Lord Meadowbank 
has judiciously recommended a mixture of common farm-yard dung for the purpose of 
bringing peat into fermentation : any putrescible or fermentable substance will answer 
the end ; and the more a substance heats, and the more readily it ferments, the better wdll 
it be fitted for the purpose. Lord Meadowbank states, that one part of dung is suffi- 
cient to bring three or four parts of peat into a state in which it is fitted to be applied to 
land ; but of course the quantity must vary according to the nature of the dung and of 
the peat. In cases in which some living vegetables are mixed with the peat, tlie ferment- 
ation will be more readily effected. 

1128. Tanners' spent bark, shavings of wood, and saw-dust, will probably require as 
much dung to bring them into fei-mentation as the worst kind of peat. Woody fibre 
may be likewise prepared, so as to become a manure, by the action of lime. It is evident, 
from tlie analysis of woody fibre by Gay Lussac and Thenard, (w hich show s that it con- 
sists principally of the elements of water and carbon, the carbon being in larger quantities 
than in the other vegetable compounds,) that any process which tends to abstract carbo- 
naceous matter from it, must bring it nearer in composition to the soluble principles ; and 
this is done in fennentation by the absoi-ption of oxygen and production of carbonic acid j 
and a similar effect, it will be shown, is produced by lime. 

1129. Wood-ashes, imperfectly formed, that is, wood-ashes containing much charcoal, are 
said to have been used witli success as a manure. A part of their effects may be owing 
to the slow and gradual consumption of the charcoal, which seems capable, under other 
circumstances than those of actual combustion, of absorbing oxygen so as to become car- 
bonic acid. In April 1803, some well-burnt charcoal was enclosed by Sir H. Davy, in 
a tube, half filled with pure water, and half with common air ; the tube was hermetically 
sealed. The tube was opened under pure water, in the spring of 1804, at a time when 



238 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



the atmospheric temperature and pressure were nearly the same as at the commencement 
of the experiment. Some \i ater rushed in ; and on expelling a little air by heat from the 
tube, and analysing it, it was found to contain only seven per cent, of oxygen. The 
water in the tube, when mixed with lime-water, produced a copious precipitate ; so that 
carbonic acid had evidently been formed and dissolved by the water. 

1130. Manures from aiivnal substances, in general, require no chemical preparation to 
fit them for the soil. The great object of the farmer is to blend them with the earthy 
constituents in a proper state of division, and to prevent their too rapid decomposition. 

1131. The entire parts of the 'muscles of land ayiimals are not commonly used as manure, 
though there are many cases in which such an application might be easily made. Horses, 
dogs, sheep, deer, and other quadrupeds that have died accidentally, or of disease, after 
their skins are separated, ai'e often suffered to remain exposed to the air, or immersed in 
water, till they are destroyed by birds or beasts of prey, or entirely decomposed ; and in 
this case, most of their organised nicitter is lost for the land in which they lie, and a con- 
siderable portion of it employed in giving oft' noxious gases to the atmosphere. By 
covering dead animals with five or six times their bulk of soil, mixed with one part of 
lime, and suffering them to remain for a few months ; their decomposition would impreg- 
nate the soil with soluble matters, so as to render it an excellent manure ; and by mixing 
a little fresh quick lime with it at the time of its removal, the disagreeable effluvia would 
be in a great measure destroyed ; and it might be applied in tlie same way as any other 
manure to crops. 

1132. Fish forms a powerful manure, in whatever state it is applied ; but it cannot be 
ploughed in too fresh, though the quantity should be limited. A. Young records an ex- 
periment, in which herrings spread over a field, and ploughed in for wheat, produced so 
rank a crop, that it was entirely laid before harvest. The refuse pilchards in Cornwall 
are used throughout the county as a manure, with excellent effects. They are usually 
mixed with sand or soil, and sometimes with sea-weed, to prevent them from raising too 
luxuriant a crop. The effects are perceived for several years. In the fens of Lincoln- 
shire, Cambridgeshire, and Norfolk, the little fishes called sticklebacks, are caught in the 
shallow waters in such quantities, that they form a great article of manure in the land 
bordering on the fens. It is easy to explain the operation of fish as a manure. The skin 
is principally gelatine ; which from its slight state of cohesion, is readily soluble in water : 
fat or oil is always found in fishes, either under the skin or in some of the viscera ; and 
their fibrous matter contains all the essential elements of vegetable substances, 

1133. Amongst oili/ substajices, blubber has been employed as a manure. It is most 
useful when mixed with clay, sand, or any common soil, so as to expose a large surface 
to the air, the oxygen of which produces soluble matter from it. Lord Somerville used 
blubber with great success at his farm in Surrey. It was made into a heap with soil, and" 
retained its powers of fertilising for several successive years. The carbon and hydrogen 
abounding in oily substances, fully account for their effects ; and their durability is easily 
explained from the gradual manner in w hich they change by the action of air and water. 

1134. Bones are much used as a manure in the neighbourhood of I^ondon. After being 
broken, and boiled for grease, they are sold to the farmer. The more divided they are, 
the more powerful are their effects. The expense of grinding them in a mill would pro- 
bably be repaid by the increase of their fertilising powers; and in the state of powder they 
might be used in the drill husbandry', and delivered with the seed, in the same manner as 
i-ape-cake. Bone-dust and bone-shavings, the refuse of the turning manufacture, may be 
advantageously employed in the same way. The basis of bone is constituted by earthy 
salts, principally phosphate of lime, with some carbonate of lime and phosphate of mag- 
nesia ; the easily decomposable substances in bone, are fat, gelatine, and cartilage, which 
seems of the same nature as coagulated albumen. According to the analysis of Fourcroy 
and Vauquelin, ox-bones are composed of decomposable animal matter 5 1 ; phosphate of 
lime 37'7, carbonate of lime 10, phosphate of magnesia 1*3 ; — total 100. 

1 135. Horn is a still more powerful manure than bone, as it contains a larger quantity 
of decomposable animal matter. From 500 grains of ox-horn, Hatchett obtained only 
1 '5 grains of earthy residuum, and not quite half of tliis was phosphate of hme. The 
shavings or turnings of horn form an excellent manure, though they are not sufficiently 
abundant to be in common use. The animal matter in them seems to be of tlie nature 
of coagulated albumen, and it is slowly rendered soluble by the action of water. The 
earthy matter in horn, and still more that in bones, prevents the too rapid decomposition 
of the animal matter, and renders it veiy durable in its effects. 

1136. Hair, woollen rags, and feathers, are all analogous in composition, and princi- 
pally consist of a substance similar to albumen united to gelatine. Tliis is shown by the 
ingenious researches of Hatchett. The theory of their operation is similar to that of 
bone and horn shavings. 

1137. The refuse of the different mamfactures of skin and leathei' form verj^ useful 
manures ; such as the shavings of the currier, furriers' clippings, and the offals of the 



Book II. 



SPECIES OF MANURES. 



tan-yard and of the glue-maker. The gelatine contained in every kind of skin is in a 
state fitted for its gradual solution or decomposition ; and when buried in the soil, it 
lasts for a considerable time, and constantly affords a supply of nutritive matter to the 
plants in its neighbourhood. 

1138. Blood contains certain quantities of all the principles found in other animal sub- 
stances, and is consequently a very good manure. It has been already stated that it 
contains fibrine ; it likew^ise contains albumen ; the red particles in it, which have been 
supposed by many foreign chemists to be colored by iron in a particular state of combin- 
ation with oxygen and acid matter, Brande considers as formed of a peculiar animal 
substance, containing very little iron. The scum taken from the boilers of the sugar- 
bakers, and which is used as manure, principally consists of bullocks' blood, which has 
been employed for the purpose of separating the impurities of common brown sugar, by 
means of the coagulation of its albuminous matter by the heat of the boiler. 

1139. The different species of corals, corallines, and sponges, must be considered as sub- 
stances of animal origin. PVom the analysis of Hatchett, it appears that all these 
substances contain considerable quantities of a matter analogous to coagulated albumen ; 
the sponges afford likewise gelatine. According to Merat Guillot, white coral contains 
equal parts of animal matter and carbonate of lime; red coral 46*5 of animal matter, 
and 53-5 of carbonate of lime; articulated coralline 51 of animal matter, and 49 of 
carbonate of lime. These substances are never used as manure in this country, except 
in cases when they are accidentally mixed with sea-weed ; but it is probable that the 
corallines might be advantageously employed, as they are found in considerable quantity 
on the rocks, and bottoms of the rocky pools on many parts of our coast, where the land 
gradually declines towards the sea ; and they might be detached by hoes, and collected 
without much trouble. 

1140. Amongst excrementations, animal swftstonces used as manures, urine is the one 
upon which the greatest number of chemical experiments have been made, and the 
nature of which is best understood. The urine of the cow contains, according to the 
experiments of Brande : water 65 ; phosphate of lime 3 ; muriates of potassa and ammonia 
15 ; sulphate of potassa 6 ; carbonates, potassa, and ammonia 4 ; urea 4. 

1141. The urine of the horse, according to Fourcroy and Vauquelin, contains, of car- 
bonate of lime 11, carbonate of soda 9, benzoate of soda 24, muriate of potassa 9, urea 7, 
water and mucilage 940. In addition to these substances, Brande found in it phosphate 
of lime. The urine of the ass, the camel, the rabbit, and domestic fowls, have been 
submitted to different experiments, and their constitution have been found similar. In 
the urine of the rabbit, in addition to most of the ingredients above mentioned, Vau- 
quelin detected gelatine ; and the same chemist discovered uric acid in the urine of do- 
mestic fowls. Human urine contains a greater variety of constituents than any other 
species examined. Urea, uric acid, and another acid similar to it in nature, called 
rosacic acid, acetic acid, albumen, gelatine, a resinous matter, and various salts are found 
in it. The human urine differs in composition, according to the state of the body, and 
the nature of the food and drink made use of. In many cases of disease there is a much 
larger quantity of gelatine and albumen than usual in the urine ; and in diabetes it con- 
tains sugar. It is probable that the urine of the same animal must likewise differ 
according to the different nature of the food and drink used ; and this will account for 
discordances in some of the analyses that have been published on the subject. Urine is 
very liable to change, and to undergo the putrefactive process ; and that of carnivorous 
animals more rapidly than that of graminivorous animals. In proportion as there is more 
gelatine and albumen in urine, so in proportion does it putrefy more quickly. The species 
of urine that contain most albumen, gelatine, and urea, are the best as manures ; and all 
urine contains the essential elements of vegetables in a state of solution. During the 
putrefaction of urine the greatest part of the soluble animal matter that it contains is 
destroyed: it should consequently be used as fresh as possible; but if not mixed with 
solid matter, it should be diluted with water, as, when pure, it contains too large a quan- 
tity of animal matter to form a proper fluid nourishment for absorption by the roots of 
plants. 

1 1 42. Putrid urine abounds in ammoniacal salts ; and though less active than fresh 
urine, is a very powerful manure. According to a recent analysis published by Berze- 
lius, 1000 parts of urine are composed of, water 933; urea 30*1 ; uric acid 1 ; muriate of 
ammonia, free lactic acid, lactate of ammonia, and animal matter 17"14. The remainder 
different salts, phosphates, sulphates, and muriates. 

1 143. Dung of birds. Amongst excrementitious solid substances used as manures, one of 
the most powerful, is the dung of birds that feed on animal food, particularly the dung of 
sea-birds. The guano, which is used to a great extent in South America, and which is the 
manure that fertilises the sterile plains of Peru, is a production of this kind. It exists 
abundantly, as we are informed by Humboldt, on the small islands in the South Sea, at 
Chinche, Ilo, Iza, and Arica. Fifty vessels are laden with it annually at Chinche, each of 



240 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



which carries from 1500 to 2000 cubical feet. It is use<J as a manure only in very 
small quantities ; and particularly for crops of maize. Some experiments were made on 
specimens of guano in 1805. It appeared as a fine brown powder ; it blackened by heat, 
and gave off strong ammoniacal fumes ; treated with nitric acid, it afforded uric acid. 
In 1806, Fourcroy and Vauquelin published an elaborate analysis of guano. They 
state that it contains a fourth part of its weight of uric acid, partly saturated with am- 
monia, and partly with potassa ; some phosphoric acid combined with the bases, and 
likewise with lime. Small quantities of sulphate and muriate of potassa, a little fatty 
matter, and some quartzose sand. ' It is easy to explain its fertilising properties : from 
its composition it might be supposed to be a very powerful manure. It requires 
water for the solution of its soluble matter to enable it to produce its full beneficial efiect 
on crops. 

1144. The dimg of sea-birds has never been much used as a manure in this country ; 
but it is probable that even the soil of the small islands on our coast much frequented by 
them would fertilise. Some dung of sea-birds, brought from a rock on the coast of 
Merionethshire, produced a powerful, but transient effect on grass. Tlie rains in our 
climate must tend very much to injure thi^ species of manure, where it is exposed to 
them, soon after its deposition ; but it may probably be found in gi-eat perfection in 
caverns or clefts in rocks haunted by cormorants and gulls. Some recent cormorants' 
dung, when examined, had not at all the appearance of the guano j it was of a greyis^i- 
white color ; had a very fetid smell, like tliat of putrid animal matter ; when acted 
on by quick-lime, it gave abundance of ammonia ; treated with nitric acid, it yielded 
uric acid. 

1145. I^^ght-suil, it is well known, is a very powerful manure, and very liable to de- 
compose. It differs in composition j but always abounds in substances composed of 
caibon, hydrogen, azote, and oxygen. From the analysis of Berzelius, it appears that a 
part of it is always soluble in water ; and in whatever state it is used, whether recent or 
Termented, it supplies abundance of food to plants. The disagreeable smell of night- 
soil may be destroyed by mixing it with quick-lime ; and if exposed to the atmosphere 
in thin layers, strewed over with quick-lime in fine weather, it speedily dries, is easily 
pulverised, and in this state, may be usfed in the same manner as rape-cake, and 
delivered into the furrow with the seed. The Chinese, who have more practical know- 
ledge of the use and application of manures .than any other people existing, mix their 
night-soil with one third of its weight of a fat marl, make it into cakes, and dry it by 
exposure to the sun. These cakes, we are informed by the French missionaries, have no 
disagreeable smell, and form a common article of commerce of the empire. The earth, 
by its absorbent powers, probably prevents, to a certain extent, the action of moisture 
upon the dung, and likevpise defends it from the effects of air. Desiccated night-soil, in 
a state of powder, forms an article of internal commerce in France, and is known under 
the name of poudrette. In London it is mixed with quick-lime, and sold in cakes under 
the name of " Clarke's desiccated compost." 

1146. Pigeons^ dung comes next in order, as to fertilising power. 100 grains di- 
gested in hot water for some hours, produced 23 grains of soluble matter, which 
afforded abundance of carbonate of ammonia by distillation ; and left carbonaceous 
matter, saline matter, principally common salt, and carbonate of lime as a residuum. 
Pigeons' dung, when moist, readily ferments, and after fermentation, contains less 
soluble matter than before ; from 100 parts of fermented pigeons' dung, only eight parts 
of soluble matter were obtained, which gave proportionally less carbonate of ammonia in 
distillation than recent pigeons' dung. It is evident that this manure should be applied 
as new as possible ; and when dry, it may be employed in the same manner as the other 
manures capable of being pulverised. The soil in woods, where great flocks of wood- 
pigeons roost, is often highly impregnated with their dung, and it cannot be doubted, 
would form a valuable manure. Such soil will often yield ammonia when distilled with 
lime. In the winter, likewise, it usually contains abundance of vegetable matter, the 
remains of decayed leaves, and the dung tends to bring the vegetable matter into a state 
of solution. Manuring was, and still is, in great esteem in Persia. 

1 147. The dung of domestic fowls approaches very nearly in its nature to pigeons' dung. 
Uric acid has been found in it. It gives carbonate of ammonia by distillation, and im- 
mediately yields soluble matter to water. It is very liable to ferment. The dung of 
fowls is employed, in common with that of pigeons, by tanners, to bring on a slight degree 
of putrefaction in skins that are to be used for making soft leather ; for this purpose 
the dung is diffused tlirough water. In this state it rapidly undergoes putrefaction, and 
brings on a similar change in the skin. The excrements of dogs are employed by the 
tanner with siirular effects. In all cases, the contents of the grainer, as the pit is called 
in which soft skins are prepared by dung, must form a very useful manure. 

1 148. Rabbits^ dung has never been analysed. It is used with great success as a inanure 
by some farmers, who find it profitable to keep rabbits in such a manner as to preserve 



Book II. 



APPLICATION OF MANURES. 



241 



their dung. It is laid on as fresh as possible, and is found better the less it has 
fermented. 

1 149. The (hing of cattle, oxen, and cows, has been chemically examined by Einhof and 
Thaer. Tbey found that it contained matter soluble in water ; and that it gave in 
fermentation nearly the same products as vegetable substances, absorbing oxygen, and 
producing carbonic acid gas. 

1150. The recent dung of sheep and of deer affords, when long boiled in water, soluble 
matters wliich equal from two to three per cent, of their weight. These soluble sub- 
stances, procured by solution and evaporation, when examined, contain a very small quan- 
tity of matter analogous to animal mucus ; and are principally composed of a bitter 
extract, soluble both in water and in alcohol. They give ammoniacal fumes by dis- 
tillation, and appear to differ very little in composition. Some blades of grass were 
watered for several successive days with a solution of these extracts ; they evidently be- 
came gi-eener in consequence, and grew more vigorously than grass in other respects 
under ihe same circumstances. The part of the dung of cattle, sheep, and deer, not 
soluble in water, appears to be mere woody fibre, and precisely analogous to the residuum 
of those vegetables that form theu* food after they have been deprived of all their soluble 
materials. 

1151. The dung of horses gives a brown fluid, which, when evaporated, yields a bitter 
extract, which affords ammoniacal fumes moi-e copiously than that from the dung of 
oxen. 

1152. In the treatment of the pure dung of cattle, sheep, and horses, there seems no 
reason why it should be made to ferment except in the soil, like the other pure dungs ; 
or, if suffered to ferment, it should be only in a very slight degree. The grass, in the 
neighbourhood of recently voided dung, is always coarse and dark green ; some persons 
have attributed this to a noxious quality in unfermenting dung ; but it seems to 
be rather the result of an excess of food furnished to the plants, 

1 153. Street and road dung and the sweepings of houses may be all regarded as composite 
manures ; the constitution of them is necessarily various, as they are derived from a num- 
ber of different substances. These manures are usually applied in a proper manner, 
without being fermented. 

1154. Soot, which is principally formed from the combustion of pit-coal or coal, 
generally contains likewise substances derived from animal matters. This is a very 
powerful manure. It affords ammoniacal salts by distillation, and yields a brown 
extract to hot water, of a bitter taste. It likewise contains an empyreumatic oil. Its 
great basis is charcoal, in a state in which it is capable of being rendered soluble by the 
action of oxygen and water. This manure is well fitted to be used in the dry state, 
thrown into the ground with the seed, and requii-es no preparation. 

SuBSECT. 3. Of the fermenting, preserving, and applying of Manures of Animal ayid 

Vegetable Origin. 

1155. On the management of organic manures depends much of their value as food to 
plants. The great mass of manures procured by the cultivator are a mixture of 
animal and vegetable matters, and the great source of supply is the farm or stable yard. 
Here the excrementitious matter of horses, cattle, swine, and poultry, is mixed 
with straw, haulm, chaff, and various kinds of litter. To what degree should this 
be fermented before it is applied to the soil ? And how can it best be preserved when not 
immediately wanted? 

1156. A slight incipie7it fermcjitation is undouhtedily of use in the dunghill; for, by 
means of it a disposition is brought on in the woody fibre to decay and dissolve, when it 
is carried to the land, or ploughed into the soil ; and woody fibre is always in great ex- 
cess in the refuse of the farm. Too great a degree of fermentation is, however, 
very prejudicial to the composite manure in the dunghill ; it is better that there should be 
no fermentation at all before the manure is used, than that it should be carried 
too far. Tne excess of fermentation tends to the destruction and dissipation of the most 
useful part of the manure ; and the ultimate results of this process are like those of com- 
bustion. It is a common practice amongst farmers to suffer the farm-yard dung to ferment 
till the fibrous texture of the vegetable matter is entirely broken down ; and till 
the manure becomes perfectly cold, and so soft as to be easily cut by the spade. Inde- 
pendent of the general theoretical views unfavorable to this practice, founded upon the 
nature and composition of vegetable substances, there are many arguments and 
facts which show that it is prejudicial to the interests of the farmer. 

1157. During the violent fermentation which is necessary for reducing farm-yard 
manure to the state in which it is called short muck, not only a large quantity of fluid, but 
likewise of gaseous matter is lost ; so much so, that the dung is reduced one half, or two 
thirds in weight ; and the principal elastic matter disengaged, is carbonic acid wdth some 
ammonia ; and both these, if retained by the moisture in the soil, as has been stated 

R 



242 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IL 



before, are capable of becoming a useful nourishmerit of plants. In October, 1808, 
Sir H. Davy filled a large retort capable of containing three pints of water, with some 
hot fermenting manure, consisting principally of the litter and dung of cattle ; he adapted 
a small receiver to the retort, and connected the whole with a mercurial pneumatic 
apparatus, so as to collect the condensible and elastic fluids which might rise from the 
dung. The receiver soon became lined with dew, and drops began in a few hours 
to trickle down the sides of it. Elastic fluid likewise was generated ; in three days 
thirty-five cubical inches had been formed, which, when analysed, were found to contain 
twenty-one cubical inches of carbonic acid, the remainder was hydrocarbonate mixed 
with some azote, probably no more than existed in the common air in the receiver. The 
fluid matter collected in the receiver at the same time amounted to nearly half an ounce. 
It had a saline taste, and a disagreeable smell, and contained some acetate and carbonate 
of ammonia. Finding such products given off from fermenting litter, he introduced 
the beak of another retort, filled with similar dung, very hot at the time, in the soil 
amongst the roots of some grass in the border of a garden ; in less than a week a very 
distinct effect was produced on the grass ; upon the spot exposed to the influence of the 
matter disengaged in fermentation, it grew with much more luxuriance than the grass in 
any other part of the garden. — Besides the dissipation of gaseous matter, when 
fermentation is pushed to the extreme, there is another disadvantage in the loss of 
heat, which, if excited in the soil, is useful in promoting the germination of the seed, and 
in assisting the plant in the first stage of its growth, when it is most feeble and most 
liable to disease ; and the fermentation of manure in the soil must be particularly 
favorable to the wheat crop, in preserving a genial temperature beneath the surface late 
in autumn and during winter. Again, it is a general principle in chemistry, that in all 
cases of decomposition, substances combine much more readily at the moment of their 
disengagement, than after they have been perfectly formed. And in fermentation 
beneath the soil the fluid matter produced is applied instantly, even whilst it is warm, to 
the organs of the plant, and consequently is more likely to be efficient, than in manure 
that has gone through the process ; and of which all the principles have entered into new 
combinations. 

1158. Checking fermentation by covering. "There are reasons sufficiently strong," 
Grisenthwaite observes, " to discoui-age the practice of allowing dung-heaps to ferment 
and rot without interruption. It appears that public opinion has slowly adopted the 
decisions of chemical reasoning, and dung-pies, as they are called, have been formed with 
a view to save what was before lost ; a stratum of mould, sustaining the heap, being 
placed to receive the fluid parts, and a covering of mould being applied to prevent the 
dissipation of the aerial, or gaseous products. These purposes and contrivances, 
unfortunately, like many of the other operations of husbandry, were not directed by 
scientific knowledge. To cover is so commonly believed to confine, that there is no 
wonder that the practical cultivator adopted it in this instance from such a consideration. 
But it is in vain ; the elasticity of the gases generated is such as no covering whatever 
could possibly confine. If it were perfectly compact, it could only preserve as much 
carbonic acid as is equal to the volume or bulk of air within it; a quantity too incon- 
siderable to be regarded, could it even be saved; but every particle of it must be 
disengaged, and lost, when the covering is removed." 

1159. Checking fermentation by watering is sometimes recommended ; but this practice 
is inconsistent with just chemical views. It may cool the dung for a short time ; but 
moisture, as before stated, is a principal agent in all processes of decomposition. Dry 
fibrous matter will never ferment. Water is as necessary as air to the process ; and to 
supply it to fermenting dung, is to supply an agent which will hasten its decay. In all' 
cases when diing is fermenting, there are simple tests by which the rapidity of the process, 
and consequently the injury done, may be discovered. If a thermometer, plunged into 
the dung, does not rise to above one hundred degrees of Fahrenheit, there is little 
danger of much aeriform matter flying off. If the temperature is higher, the dung 
should be immediately spread abroad. When a piece of paper, moistened in muriatic 
acid, held over the steams arising from a dunghill, gives dense fumes, it is a certain test 
that the decomposition is going too far, for this indicates that volatile alkali is 
disengaged. 

1160. In favor of the ajyplication of farm-yard dung in a recent state, a great mass of 
facts may be found in the writings of scientific agriculturists. A. Young, in the Essay 
on Manures, already quoted, adduces a number of excellent authorities in support of the 
plan. Many, who doubted, have been lately convinced ; and perhaps there is no subject 
of investigation in which there is such a union of theoretical and practical evidence. 
Within the last seven years Coke has entirely given up the system fonnerly adopted on 
his farm, of applying fermented dung; and his crops have been since as good as 
they ever were, and his manure goes nearly twice as far. A great objection against 
slightly fermented dung is, that weeds spring up more luxuriantly where it is applied. 



Book II. OPERATION OF MINERAL MANURES. 



243 



If there are seeds earned out in the dung, they certainly will germinate ; but it is seldom 
tliat this can be the case to any extent ; and if the land is not cleansed of weeds, any 
kind of manure, fennented or unfermented, will occasion their rapid growth. If 
slightly fermented farm-yard dung is used as a top-dressing for pastures, the long 
straws and unfermented vegetable matter remaining on the surface should be re- 
moved as soon as the grass begins to rise \'igorously, by raking, and carried back to 
the dunghill : in this case no manure will be lost, and the husbandry will be at once 
clean and economical. In cases M hen farm-yard dung cannot be immediately applied to 
crops, the destructive fermentation of it should be prevented as much as possible : 
the principles on wliich tliis may be effected have been already alluded to. Tlie surface 
should be defended as much as possible from the oxygen of the atmosphere; a compact 
marl, or a tenacious clay, offers the best protection against the air ; and before the dung 
is covered over, or, as it were, sealed up, it should be dried as much as possible. If the 
dung is found at any time to heat strongly, it should be turned over, and cooled by 
exposure to the air. 

1161. Tlie doctrine of the proper application oi manures from organised substances, 
offers an illustration of an important part of the economy of nature, and of the happy 
order in which it is ai-ranged. The death and decay of animal substances tend to 
resolve organised forms into chemical constituents ; and the pernicious effluvia disengaged 
in the process seem to point out the propriety of burying them in tlie soil, m here they are 
fitted to become the food of vegetables. The fermentation and putrefaction of or- 
ganised substances in the free atmosphere ai-e noxious processes ; beneath the surface of 
the ground they are salutary operations. In tliis case the food of plants is prepared 
where it can be used ; and that which would offend the senses and injure the health, if 
exposed, is converted by gradual processes into forms of beauty and of usefulness ; the 
foetid gas is rendered a constituent of the aroma of tlie flower, and what might be poison 
becomes nourishment to animals and to man. 

1162. To preserve dung for a)ii/ time, the situation in which it is kept is of importance. 
It should, if possible, be defended from the sun. To presei-ve it under sheds Avould be 
of great use ; or to make the site of a dungliill on tlie north side of a wall. The floor 
on which the dung is heaped, should, if possible, be paved with flat stones ; and there 
should be a little inclination from each side towards the centre, in which there should be 
drains connected with a small w ell, furnished with a pump, by which any fluid matter 
may be collected for the use of the land. It too often happens that a dense mucilaginous 
and extractive fluid is suffered to drain away from the dungliill, so as to be entirely lost 
to the farm. 

Sect. II. Of Manures of Mineral Origin, 

1163. Earthy and saline manures are probably of more recent invention, and doubtless 
of more uncertain use than those of animal and vegetable origin. The conversion of 
matter that has belonged to living structures into organised forms, is a process that can 
be easily understood ; but it is more difficult to follow those operations by which earthy 
and saline matters are consolidated in the fibre of plants, and by which they are made 
subservient to their functions. These are capable of being materially elucidated by 
modern chemistry, and shall here be considered as to the theory of their operation, and 
specific kinds. 

SuBSECT. 1. Theory of Hie Operation of Mineral Mayiures. 

1164. Saline and calcareous substances iorm. principal fossil manures. Much has 
been written on lime and commoif salt, both in the way of speculation and reasoning 
from facts, which, from want of chemical knowledge, has turned to no useful account, and 
cultivators till very lately contented themselves with stating that these substances acted as 
stimuli to the soil, sometlung like condiments to the digestive organs of animals. Even 
chemists themselves are not yet unanimous in all their opinions ; but still the result of 
their enquiries will be found of great benefit to the scientific cultivator. 

1165. Various opinions exist as to the rationale of the operation of mineral manures. 
" Some enquirers," Sir H. Davy observes, " adopting that sublime generalisation of 
the ancient philosophers, that matter is the same in essence, and that the different sub- 
stances, considered as elements by chemists, are merely different arrangements of the 
same indestructible particles, have endeavoured to prove, that all tlie varieties of the prin- 
ciples found in plants, may be formed from the substances in the atmosphere ; and that 
vegetable life is a process in which bodies that the analytical philosopher is imable to 
change or to fomi, are constantly composed and decomposed. But the general results 
of experiments are veiy much opposed to the idea of the composition of tlie eai-tlis, by 
plants, from any of the elements found in the atmosphere, or in water ; and there are 
various facts contradictory to the idea. Jacquin states, that the ashes of glass-wort. (&7/- 

R 2 



244 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



sola soda), when it grows in inland situations, afford the vegetable alkali ; when it grows 
on the sea-shore, where compounds which afford the fossil or marine alkali are more 
abundant, it yields that substance. Du Hamel found that plants which usually grow 
on the sea-shore, made small progress when planted in soils containing little common 
salt. The sun-flower, when growing in lands containing no nitre, does not afford that 
substance ; though when watered by a solution of niti-e, it jdelds nitre abundantly. The 
tables of De Saussure show that the ashes of plants are similar in constitution to the soils 
in which they have vegetated. De Saussure made plants grow in solutions of different 
salts ; and he ascertained that, in all cases, certain portions of the salts were absorbed by 
the plants, and found unaltered in their organs. Even animals do not appear to possess 
the power of forming tlie alkaline and earthy substances. Dr. Fordyce found, that when 
canary-birds, at the time they were lapng eggs, were deprived of access to carbonate of 
lime, their eggs had soft shells ; and if there is any process for which nature may be con- 
ceived most likely to supply resources of this kind, it is that connected with the repro- 
duction of the species. 

1 166. It seems a fair conclusion, as the evidence on the subject now stands, that the dif- 
ferent earths and saline substances found in the organs of plants, are supplied byAe soils 
in which they grow ; and in no cases composed by nev/ an-angements of the elements in 
air or water. What may be our ultimate view of the lav. s of chemistry, or how far our 
ideas of elementary principles may be simplified, it is impossible to say. We can only 
reason from facts. We cannot imitate the powers of composition belonging to vegetable 
structures ; but at least we can understand them : and as far as our researches have 
gone, it appears'that in vegetation compound foi-ms are uniforaily produced from simple 
ones ; and the elements in the soil, the atmosphere and the earth absorbed and made parts 
of beautiful and diversified structures. The views winch have been just developed lead to 
correct ideas of the operation of those mam.ires which are not necessarily the result of de- 
cayed organised bodies, and which are not composed of different proportions of carbon, 
hydrogen, oxygen, and azote. — They must produce their effect, either by becoming a 
constituent part of the plant, or by acting upon its more essential food, so as to render it 
more fitted for the purposes of vegetable life. 

SuBSECT. 2. Of the different Species of Mineral Manures. 

1167. Alkaline earths, or alkalies and their combinations, which are found unmixed with 
the remains of any organised beings, are the only substances Avhich can with propriety be 
called fossil manures. The only alkaline earths which have been hitherto applied in this 
M^ay ai-e lime and magnesia ; though potassa and soda, the two fixed alkaHes, are both used 
to a limited extent in certain of their chemical compounds. 

11 68. The most common form in ivhich lime is found on the surface of the earth, is in a 
state of combination with carbonic acid or fixed air. If a piece of limestone or chalk 
be thrown into a fluid acid, there will be an effervescence. This is owing to the escape 
of the carbonic acid gas. The lime becomes dissolved in the liquor. "VMien limestone 
is strongly heated, the carbonic acid gas is expelled, and then nothing remains but the 
j)ixre alkaline earth ; in tliis case there is a loss of weight ; and if the fire has been very 
liigh, it approaches to one half the weight of the stone ; but in common cases, limestones, 
if well dried before burning, do not lose much more than 35 to 40 per cent., or from 
seven to eight parts out of twenty. 

1 1 69. IVlien burnt lime is exposed to the atmosphere, in a certain time it becomes mild, 
and is tl:ie same substance as that precipitated from lime-water ; it is combined with car- 
bonic acid gas. Quick-lune, when first made, is caustic and burning to the tongue, 
renders vegetable blues green, and is soluble in water ; but when combined \\-ith carbonic 
acid, it loses all these properties, its solubility, and its taste : it regains its power of effer- 
vescing, and becomes the same chemical substance as chalk or limestone. Very few 
limestones or chalks consist entirely of lime and carbonic acid. The statuaiy marbles, 
or certain of the rhomboidal spars, are ahnost the only pure species ; and the different 
properties of limestones, both as manures and cements, depend upon the nature of the in- 
gredient mixed in the limestone ; for the true calcareous element, the carbonate of Hme, 
is uniformly the same in nature, properties, and effects, and consists of one proportion of 
carbonic acid 41 '4, and one of lime 55. When a limestone does not copiously effer- 
vesce in acids, and is sufficiently hard to scratch glass, it contains siliceous, and probably 
aluminous earth. WTien it is deep brown or red, or strongly colored, of any of the shades 
of brown or yellow, it contains oxide of iron. When it is not sufficiently hard to scratch 
glass, but efferv'esces slowly, and makes the acid in which it effervesces milky, it contains 
magnesia. And when it is black, and emits a fetid smell if rubbed, it contains coaly or 
bituminous matter. • Before any opinion can be formed of the manner in which the 
different ingredients in limestones modify their properties, it will be necessary to con- 
sider the operation of pure lime as a manure. 



Book II. 



SPECIES OF MINERAL MANURES. 



245 



1 170. Quick-lime, in its j^ure state, whether in powder, or dissolved in water, is injurious 
to plants. In several instances grass has been killed by watering it with lime-water. 
But lime, in its state of combination with carbonic acid, is a useful ingredient in soils. 
Calcareous earth is found in the ashes of the greater number of plants ; and exposed 
to the air, lime cannot long continue caustic, for the reasons that were just now 
assigned, but soon becomes united to carbonic acid. When newly-burnt lime is exposed 
to air, it soon falls into powder ; in this case it is called slacked lime ; and the same effect 
is immediately produced by throwing water upon it, when it heats violently, and the 
water disappears. Slacked lime is merely a combination of lime, with about one third 
of its weight of water ; i. e. fifty-five parts of lime absorb seventeen parts of water ; and 
in this case it is composed of a definite proportion of water, and is called by chemists 
hydrate of lime ; and when hydrate of lime becomes carbonate of lime by long exposure 
to air, the water is expelled, and the carbonic acid gas takes its place. When lime, 
whether freshly burnt or slacked, is mixed with any moist fibrous vegetable matter, there 
is a strong action between the lime and the vegetable matter, and they form a kind of 
compost together, of which a part is usually soluble in water. By this kind of operation, 
lime renders matter which was before comparatively inert, nutritive ; and as charcoal 
and oxygen abound in all vegetable matters, it becomes at the same time converted into 
carbonate of lime. 

1171. Mild lime, poivdered limestone, marls, or chalks have no action of this kind 
upon vegetable matter ; they prevent the too rapid decomposition of substances 
already dissolved ; but they have no tendency to form soluble matters. It is obvious 
from these circumstances, that the operation of quick-lime, and marl, or chalk, depends 
upon principles altogether different. Quick-lime, in being applied to land, tends to 
bring any hard vegetable matter that it contains into a state of more rapid decomposition 
and solution, so as to render it a proper food for plants. Chalk and marl, or carbonate 
of lime, will only improve the texture of the soil, or its relation to absorption ; it acts 
merely as one of its earthy ingredients. Chalk has been recommended as a substance 
calculated to correct the sourness of land. It would surely have been a wise practice to 
have previously ascertained the certainty of this existence of acid, and to have determined 
its nature, in order that it might be effectually removed. The fact really is, that no soil 
was ever yet found to contain any notable quantity of uncombined acid. The acetic and 
carbonic acids are the only two that are likely to be generated by any spontaneous de- 
composition of animal or vegetable bodies, and neither of these has any fixity when ex- 
posed to the air. Chalk having no power of acting on animal and vegetable substances, 
can be no otherwise serviceable to land than as it alters its texture. Quick-lime, when 
it becomes mild, operates in the same manner as ebalk ; but in the act of becoming mild, 
it prepares soluble out of insoluble matter. Bou^'lion la Grange says, that gelatine 
oxygenised becomes insoluble, and vegetable extract v\ e know becomes so from the same 
cause ; now lime lias the property of attracting oxygen, and, consequently, of restoring 
the property of solubility to those substances which have been deprived of it, from a 
combination with oxygen. Hence the uses of lime on peat lands, and on all soils con- 
taining an excess of vegetable insoluble matter. (Grisenthwaite.) 

1 172. Effect of lime on wheat crops. When lime is employed upon land where there is 
present any quantity of animal matter, it occasions the evolution of a quantity of ammonia, 
which may, perhaps, be imbibed by the leaves of plants, and afterwards undergo some 
change so as to form gluten. It is upon this circumstance that the operation of lime in 
the preparation for wheat crops depends; and its efficacy in fertilising peat, and in bring- 
ing into a state of cultivation all soils abounding in hard roots, or dry fibres, or inert 
vegetable matter. ' 

i 1 73. General jninciplesfor applying lime. The solution of the question whether quick- 
lime ought to be applied to a soil, depends upon the quantity of inert vegetable matter 
that it contains. The solution of the question, whether marl, mild lime, or powdered 
limestone ought to be applied, depends upon the quantity of calcareous matter already in 
the soil. All soils are improved by mild lime, and ultimately by quick-lime, which do not 
effervesce with acids ; and sands more than clays. When a soil, deficient in calcareous 
matter, contains much soluble vegetable manure, the application of quick-lime should 
always be avoided, as it either tends to decompose the soluble matters by uniting to their 
carbon and oxygen so as to become mild lime, or it combines with the soluble matters, 
and forms compounds having less attraction for v/ater than the pure vegetable substance. 
The case is the same with respect to most animal manures ; but the operation of the lime 
is different in different cases, and depends upon the nature of the animal matter. Lime 
forms a kind of insoluble soap with oily matters, and then gi'adually decomposes them by 
separating from them oxygen and carbon. It combines likewise with the animal acids, 
and probably assists their decomposition by abstracting carbonaceous matter from thera 
combined with oxygen ; and consequently it must render them less nutritive. It tends 
to diminish likewise the nutritive powers of albumen from the same causes ; and always 

R 3 



246 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



destroys, to a certain extent, the efficacy of animal manures ; either by corhbining with 
certain of their elements, or by giving to them new arrangements. Lime should never 
be applied with animal manures, unless they are too rich, or for the purpose of preventing 
noxious effluvia. It is injurious when mixed with any common dung, and tends to 
render the extractive matter insoluble. 

1174. Lime promotes fermentation. In those cases in which fermentation is useful to 
produce nutriment from vegetable substances, lime is always efficacious. Some moist 
tanners' spent bark was mixed with one fifth of its weight of quick-lime, and suffered to 
remain together in a close vessel for tlu-ee months ; the lime had become colored, and 
was effervescent : when water was boiled upon the mixture, it gained a tint of fawn-color, 
and by evaporation furnished a fawn-colored powder, which must have consisted of 
lime united to vegetable matter, for it burnt when strongly heated, and left a residuum 
of mild lime, 

1175. Different hinds of limestones have different effects. The limestones containing 
alumina and silica are less fitted for the pui-poses of manure than pure limestones ; but 
the lime formed from them has no noxious quality. Such stones are less efficacious, 
merely because they furnish a smaller quantity of quick-linie. There is verj' seldom 
any considerable portion of coaly matter in bituminous limestones ; never as much as 
five pai-ts in 100 ; but such limestones make very good lime. Tlie carbonaceous matter 
can do no injury to the land, and may, under certain circumstances, become a food of the 
plant. 

1176. The subject of the application of the magnesian limestone is one of great interest. 
It had been long known to farmers in the neighbourhood of Doncaster, that lime made 
from a certain limestone applied to the land, often injured the crops considerably. 
Tennant, in making a series of experiments upon this peculiar calcareous substance, 
found that it contained magnesia ; and on mixing some calcined magnesia with soil, in 
which he sowed different seeds, he found that they either died or vegetated in a very 
imperfect manner, and the plants were never healthy. And with great justice and 
ingenuity he referred the bad effects of the peculiar limestone to the magnesian earth it 
contains. 

1177. Magnesian limestone is used with good effect in soine cases. Magnesia has a 
much weaker attraction for carbonic acid than lime, and will remain in the state of caus- 
tic or calcined magnesia for many months, though exposed to the air. And as long as 
any caustic lime remains, the magnesia cannot be combined with carbonic acid, for Ifme 
instantly attracts carbonic acid from magnesia. When a magnesian limestone is burnt, 
the magnesia is deprived of carbonic acid much sooner than the lime ; and if there is not 
much vegetable or animal matter in the soil to supply by its decomposition carbonic acid, 
the magnesia will remain for a long while in the caustic state ; and in this state acts as a 
poison to certain vegetables. And that m.ore magnesian lime may be used upon rich 
soils, seems to be owing to the circumstance that the decomposition of the manure in them 
supplies carbonic acid. And magnesia, in its mild state, i. e. fully combined with car- 
bonic acid, seems to be always a useful constituent of soils. Carbonate of magnesia 
(procured by boiling the solution of magnesia in supercarbonate of potassa,) was thrown 
upon grass, and upon growing wheat and barley, so as to render the surface white ; but 
the vegetation was not injured in the slightest degree. And one of the most fertile parts 
of Cornwall, the Lizard, is a district in which the soil contains mild magnesian earth. 
It is obvious, from what has been said, that lime from the magnesian limestone may 
be applied in large quantities to peats ; and that where lands have been injured by 
the application of too large a quantity of magnesian lime, peat will be a proper and 
efficient remedy. 

1178. A simple test of magnesia in a limestone is its slight effervescence with acids, and 
its rendering diluted nitric acid, or aqua fortis, milky. From the analysis of TeAnant, it 
appears to contain from 20-3 to 22-5 magnesia ; 29-5 to 31-7 lime ; 47-2 carbonic acid ; 
0-8 clay and oxide of iron. Magnesia limestones are usually colored brown or pale yel- 
low. ^ They are found in Somersetshire, Leicestershire, Derbyshire, Shropshire, Durham, 
and Yorkshire ; and in many parts of Ireland, particularly near Belfast. In general, 
when limestones are not magnesian, their purity will be indicated by their loss of weio-ht 
in burning ; the more they lose, the larger is the quantity of calcareous matter they con- 
tain. The magnesian limestones contain more carbonic acid than the common lime- 
stones ; and I have found all of them lose more than half their weight by calcination. 

1179. Gypsum. Besides being used in the forms of lime and carbonate of lime, cal- 
careous matter is applied for the purposes of agriculture in other combinations. One of 
these bodies is gypsum or sulphate of lime. This substance consists of sulphuric acid 
(the same body that exists combined with water in oil of vitriol,) and lime ; and when dry 
it is composed of 55 parts of lime and 75 parts of sulphuric acid. Common gypsum or 
selenite, such as that found at Shotover Hill, near Oxford, contains, besides sulphuric 
acid and lime, a considerable quantity of water; and its composition may be thus 



iJooK II. 



SPECIES OF MINERAL MANURES. 



247 



expressed : sulphuric acid one proportion 75 ; lime one proportion 55 ; water two pro- 
portions 34. 

1180. The nature of gypsum is easily demonstrated ; if oil of vitriol be added to qnick- 
lime, there is a violent heat produced ; when the mixture is ignited, water is given off, 
and gypsum alone is the result, if the acid has been used in sufficient quantity ; and gyp- 
sum mixed with quick-lime, if the quantity has been deficient. Gypsum, free from 
water, is sometimes found in nature, when it is called anhydrous selenite. It is distin- 
guished from common gypsum by giving off no water when heated. When gypsum, free 
from water, or deprived of water by heat, is made into a paste with water, it rapidly sets ♦ 
by combining with that fluid. Plaster of Paris is powdered dry gypsum, and its property 
as a cement, and its use in making casts, depends upon its solidifying a certain quantity 
of water, and making with it a coherent mass. Gypsum is soluble in about 500 times its 
weight of cold water, and is more soluble in hot water ; so that when water has been 
boiled in contact with gypsum, crystals of this substance are deposited as the water cools. 
Gypsum is easily distinguished by its properties of affording precipitates to solutions of 
oxalates and of barytic salts. In America it is employed with signal success ; it has been 
advantageously used in Kent, but in most counties of England it has failed, though tried 
in various v/ays, and upon different crops. 

1181. Very discordant notions have been formed as to the mode of oiyeration of gypsum. 
It has been supposed by some persons to act by its power of attracting moisture from the 
air ; but this agency must be comparatively insignificant. When combined with water, 
it retains that fluid too powerfully to yield it to the roots of the plant, and its adhesive at- 
traction for moisture is inconsiderable ; the small quantity in which it is used likewise is 
a circumstance hostile to this idea. It has been erroneously said that gypsum assists the 
putrefaction of animal substances, and the decomposition of manure. 

1 182. The ashes of saintfoin, clover, and rye-grass, afford considerable quantities of gypsum ; 
and the substance probably is intimately combined as a necessary part of their woody 
fibre. If tliis be allowed, it is easy to explain the reason why it operates in such small 
quantities ; for the whole of a clover crop, or saintfoin crop, on an acre, according to esti- 
mation, would afford by incineration only three or four bushels of gypsum. The reason 
why gypsum is not generally efficacious, is probably because most cultivated soils contain 
it in sufficient quantities for the use of the grasses. In the common course of cultivation, 
gypsum is furnished in the manure ; for it is contained in stable dung, and in the dung 
of all cattle fed on grass ; and it is not taken up in corn crops, or crops of peas and beans, 
and in very small quantities in turnip crops ; but where lands are exclusively devoted to 
pasturage and hay, it will be continually consumed. Should these statements be con- 
firmed by future enquiries, a practical inference of some value may be derived from them. 
It is possible that lands which have ceased to bear good crops of clover, or artificial grasses, 
may be restored by being manured with gypsum. This substance is found in Oxford- 
shire, Glocestershire, Somersetshire, Derbyshire, Yorkshire, &c. and requires only pul- 
verisation for its preparation. 

1 1 83. Ujion the use of sulphate of iron, or green vitriol, which is a salt produced from peat 
in Bedfordshire, some very interesting documents have been produced by Dr. Pearson ; 
and there is little doubt that the peat salt and the vitriolic water acted chiefly by pro- 
ducing gypsum. Hie soils on which both are efficacious are calcareous ; and sulphate 
of iron is decomposed by the carbonate of lime in such soils. The sulphate of iron con- 
sists of sulphuric acid and oxide of iron, and is an acid and a very soluble salt ; when 
a solution of it is mixed with carbonate of lime, the sulphuric acid quits the oxide of 
iron to unite to the lime, and the compounds produced are insipid and comparatively 
insoluble. 

1184. Vitriolic imj)regnations in soils where there is no calcareous matter are injurious ; 
but it is probably in consequence of their supplying an excess of ferruginous matter to 
the sap. Oxide of iron, in small quantities, forms a useful part of soils ; it is found 
in the ashes of plants, and probably is hurtful only in its acid combinations. The ashes 
of all peats do not afford gypsum. In general, when a recent peat-ash emits a strong 
smell, resembling that of rotten eggs, when acted upon by vinegar, it will furnish 
gypsum. 

1 185. Phosphate of lime is a combination of phosphoric acid and lime, one proportion of 
each. It is a compound insoluble in pure water, but soluble in water containing any acid 
matter. It forms the greatest part of calcined bones. It exists in most excrementitious 
substances, and is found both in the straw and grain of wheat, barley, oats, and rye, and 
likewise in beans, peas, and tares. It exists in some places in these islands native, but 
only in very small quantities. Phosphate of lime is generally conveyed to the land in 
the composition of other manure, and it is probably necessary to corn crops and other 
white crops. 

1 1 86. Bone-ashes calcined and ground to powder will probably be found useful on arable 
lands containing much vegetable matter, and may perhaps enable soft peats to produce 

R 4 



248 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



wheat ; but the powdered bone in an uncalcined state is much to be preferred in all cases 
when it can be procured. 

1187. The saline comjmiinds of magnesia will require very little discussion as to their uses 
as manures. In combination with sulphuric acid, magnesia forms a soluble salt. This 
substance, it is stated by some enquirers, has been found of use as a manure ; bat it is not 
found in nature in sufficient abundance, nor is it capable of being made artificially suffi- 
ciently cheap to be of useful application in the common course of husbandry. 

1 1 88. Wood-ashes consist principally of the vegetable alkali united to caibonic acid ; and 
as this alkali is found in almost all plants, it is not difficult to conceive that it may form 
an essential part of their organs. The general tendency of the alkalies is to- give solu- 
bility to vegetable matters ; and in this way they may render carbonaceous and other 
substances capable of being taken up by the tubes in the radical fibres of plants. The 
vegetable alkali likewise has a strong attraction for water, and even in small quantities, 
may tend to give a due degree of moisture to the soil, or to other manures ; though this 
operation, from the small quantities used or existing in the soil, can be only of a second- 
aiy kind. 

11 8 9. The mineral alkali or soda is found in the ashes of sea- weed, and may be procured 
by certain chemical agencies from common salt. Common salt consists of the metal 
named sodium, combined with chlorine ; and pure soda consists of the same metal united 
to oxygen. ^Vhen water is present, which can affiord oxygen to the sodium, soda may be 
obtained in several modes from salt. Tlie same reasoning will apply to the operation of 
the pure mineral alkali, or the carbonated alkali, as to that of the vegetable alkali ; and 
when common salt acts as a manure, it is probably by entering into the composition of 
the plant in the same manner as gypsum, phosphate of lime, and the alkalies. Sir John 
Pringle has stated, that salt in small quantities assists the decomposition of animal and 
vegetable matter. This circumstance may render it useful in certain soils. Common 
salt, likewise, is offensive to insects. In small quantities it is sometimes a useful 
manure, and it is probable that its efficacy depends upon many combined causes. Some 
persons have argued against the employment of salt ; because when used in large quan- 
tities, it either does no good, or renders the ground sterile ; but this is a very unfair mode 
of reasoning. That salt in large quantities rendered land barren, was known long before 
any records of agricultural science existed. We read in the Scriptures, that Abimelech 
took the city of Shechem, "and beat down the city, and sowed it with salt;" that the soil 
might be for ever unfruitful. Virgil reprobates a salt soil ; and Pliny, though he recom- 
mends giving salt to cattle, yet affirms, that when strewed over land it renders it barren. 
But these are not arguments against a proper application of it. Refuse salt in Cornwall, 
which, however, likewise contains some of the oil and exuvife of fish, has long been known 
as an admirable manure. And tlie Cheshire farmers contend for the benefit of the peculiar 
produce of their county. It is not unlikely, that the same causes influence the effects of 
salt, as those which act in modifying the operation of gypsum. Most lands in this island, 
particularly those near the sea, probably contain a sufficient quantity of salt for all the 
purposes of vegetation ; and in such cases the supply of it to the soil will not only be 
useless, but may be injurious. In great storms the spray of the sea has been carried more 
than fifty miles from the shore ; so that from this source salt must be often supplied to the 
soil. Salt is found in almost all sandstone rocks, and it must exist in the soil derived 
from these rocks. It is a constituent likewise of almost every kind of animal and ve- 
getable manure. 

1190. Other compotoids. Besides these compounds of the alkaline earths and alkalies, 
many others have been recommended for the purposes of increasing vegetation ; such 
are nitre, or the nitrous acid combined with potassa. Sir Kenehn Digby states, that he 
-'nade barley grow very luxuriantly by watering it with a veiy weak solution of nitre ; but 
he is too speculative a writer to awaken confidence in his results. This substance consists 
of one proportion of azote, six of oxygen, and one of potassium ; and it is not unlikely 
that it may furnish azote to form albumen or gluten in those plants that contain them ; 
but the nitrous salts are too valuable for other purposes to be used as manures. Dr. Home 
states, that sulphate of potassa, which was just now mentioned as found in the ashes of some 
peats, is a useful manure. But Naismith [Elements of Agriculture, p. 78.) questions his 
results ; and quotes experiments hostile to his opinion, and, as he conceives, unfavorable 
to the efficacy of any species of saline manure. Much of the discordance of the evidence 
relating to the efficacy of saline substances depends upon the circumstance of their having 
been xxsed in different proportions, and, in general, in quantities much too large. 

1191. Solutions of saline substances were used t\^ace a week, in the quantity of two 
ounces, on spots of grass and corn, sufficiently remote from each other to prevent any in- 
terference of results. The substances tried were super-carbonate, sulphate, acetate, nitrate, 
and muriate of potassa ; sulphate of soda ; sulphate, ni ti-ate, muriate, and carbonate of am- 
monia. It was found, that in all cases when the quantity of the salt cqualled-one thirtieth 



Booic II. 



HEAT AND LIGHT. 



249 



part of the weight of the water, the effects were injurious j but least so in the instances of 
the carbonate, sulphate, and muriate of ammonia. When the quantities of the salts were 
one three-hundredth part of the solution, the effects were different. The plants watered 
with the solutions of tlie sulphates grew just in the same manner as similar plants watered 
with rain-water. Those acted on by the solution of nitre, acetate, and super-carbonate 
of potassa, and muriate of ammonia, grew rather better. Those treated with the solution 
of carbonate of ammonia grew most luxuriantly of all. This last result is what might be 
expected, for carbonate of ammonia consists of carbon, hydrogen, azote, and oxygen. 
There was, however, another result which was not anticipated ; the plants watered with 
solution of nitrate of ammonia did not grow better than those watered with rain-water. 
The solution reddened litmus paper ; and probably the free acid exerted a prejudicial effect, 
and interfered with the result. 

1192. Soot doubtless owes part of its efficacy to the ammoniacal salts it contains. The 
liquor produced by the distillation of coal contains carbonate and acetate of ammonia, and 
is said to be a very good manure. 

11 93. Soapers' waste has been recommended as a manure, and it has been supposed that 
its efficacy depended upon the different saline matters it contains ; but their quantity is 
very minute indeed, and its principal ingredients are mild lime and quick-lime. In the 
soapers' waste, from the best manufactories, there is scarcely a trace of alkali. Lime, 
moistened with sea- water, affords more of this substance, and is said to have been used in 
some cases with more benefit than common lime. 

1 1 94. The result of Sir H. Davys discussion as to the extent of the effects of saline sub- 
stances on vegetation, is, that except the ammoniacal compounds, or the compounds con- 
taining nitric, acetic, and carbonic acid, none of them can afford by their decomposition 
any of the common principles of vegetation — carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. The alkaline 
sulphates and the earthy muriates are so seldom found in plants, or are found in such mi- 
nute quantities, that it can never be an object to apply them to the soil. The earthy and 
alkaline substances seem never to be formed in vegetation ; and there is every reason to 
believe, that they are never decomposed ; for, after being absorbed, they are found in their 
ashes. The metallic bases of them cannot exist in contact with aqueous fluids ; and 
these metallic bases, like other metals, have not as yet been resolved into any other forms 
of matter by artificial processes ; they combine readily with other elements ; but they re- 
main indestructible, and can be traced undiminished in quantity, through their diversi- 
fied combinations. 



Chap. IIL 

Of the Agency of Heat, Light, Electricity, and Water, in Vegetable Culture. 

1195. The particular agency of heat, light, and ivater in vegetation and culture has 
been so frequently illustrated, that it only remains to give a general idea of their natures, 
and to offer some remarks on electricity. 

Sect. I. Of Heat and Light. 

1 196. The heat ofthestin is the cause of growth, and its light the cause of maturity, in the 
vegetable kingdom. This is universally acknowledged : animals will live without or with 
very little light ; but no plants whatever can exist for any tim.e without the presence of 
this element. The agency of electricity in vegetation is less known. 

1197. Two opinions are current respecting the nature of heat. By some philosophers it 
is conceived to be a peculiar subtile fluid, of which the particles repel each other, but have 
a strong attraction for the particles of other matter. By others it is considered as a. mo- 
tion or vibration of the particles of matter, which is supposed to differ in velocity in dif- 
ferent cases, and thus to produce the different degrees of temperature. Whatever deci- 
sion be ultimately made respecting these opinions, it is certain that there is matter moving 
in the space between us and the heavenly bodies capable of communicating heat j the mo- 
tions of which are rectilineal : thus the solar rays produce heat in acting on the surface of 
the earth. The beautiful experiments of Dr. Herschel have shown that there are rays 
transmitted from the sun which do not illuminate, and which yet produce more heat than 
the visible rays ; and Ritter and Dr. Wollaston have shown that there are other invisible 
rays distinguished by their chemical effects. 

1 1 98. Heat is radiated by the sun to the earth, and if suffered to accumulate, Dr. Wells 
observes, would quickly destroy the present constitution of our globe. This evil is pre- 
vented by the radiation of heat from the earth to the heavens, during the night, when it re- 
ceives from them little or no heat in return. But, through the wise economy of means, 
which is witnessed in all the operations of nature, the prevention of this evil is made the 
source of great positive good. For the surface of the earth, having thus become colder 



250 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



than the neighbouring air, condenses a part of the watery vapor of the atmosphere into 
dew, the utility of which is too manifest to require elucidation. This fluid appears chiefly 
where it is most wanted, on herbage and low plants, avoiding, in great measure, rocks, 
bare earth, and considerable masses of water. Its production, too, tends to prevent the 
injury that might arise from its own cause ; since the precipitation of water, upon tlie 
tender parts of plants, must lessen the cold in them, which occasions it. The prevention, 
either wholly or in part, of cold, from radiation, in substances on the ground, by the in- 
terposition of any solid body between them and the sky, ai-ises in the following manner : 
the lower body radiates its heat upwards, as if no other intervened between it and the 
sky ; but the loss, which it hence suffers, is more or less compensated by what is radiated 
to it, from the body above, the under surface of wliich possesses always the same, or very 
nearly the same temperature as the air. The manner in wliich clouds prevent, or occa- 
sion to be small, the appearance of a cold at night, upon the surface of tlie earth, is by 
radiating heat to the earth, in return for that which they intercept in its progress from 
the earth towards the heavens. For although, upon the sky becoming suddenly cloudy 
during a calm "night, a naked thermometer, suspended in the air, commonly rises 2^ or 3 
degrees : little of tliis rise is to be attributed to the heat evolved by the condensation of 
watery vapor in the atmosphere, for the heat so exti'icated must soon be dissipated ; 
whereas the effect of greatly lessening, or preventing altogether, the appearance of a su- 
perior cold on the earth to that of the air, will be produced by a cloudy sky, during the 
whole of a long night. 

1 1 99. Dense clouds, near the earth, reflect back the heal^hei/ receive from it by radiation. But 
similarly dense clouds, if veiy high, though they equally intercept the communication of the 
earth with the sky, yet being, from their elevated sitviatiou, colder than the earth, will ra- 
diate to it less heat than they receive from it, and may, consequently, admit of bodies on 
its surface becoming several degrees colder than the air. Islands, and parts of continents 
close to the sea, being, by their situation, subject to a cloudy sky, will, from the smaller 
quantity of heat lost by them through radiation to the heavens, at night, in addition to 
the reasons commonly assigned, be less cold in winter, than countries considerably distant 
from any ocean. 

1200. Fogs, like clouds, will arrest heat, which is radiated upwards by the earth, and if 
they be very dense, and of considerable pei"pendicular extent, may remit to it as much as 
they receive. Fogs do not, in any instance, furnish a real exception to the general rule, 
that whatever exists in the atmosphere, capable of stopping or impeding the passage of 
radiant heat, will prevent or lessen the appearance at night of a cold on the surface of 
the earth, greater than that of the neighbouring air. The water deposited upon the earth, 
during' a fog at night, may sometimes be derived from two different sources, one of which 
is a precipitation of moisture from a considerable part of the atmosphere, in consequence 
of its general cold ; the other, a real formation of dew, from the condensation, by means 
of the superficial cold of the ground, of the moisture of that portion of the air, which 
comes in contact with it. In such a state of things, all bodies will become moist, but 
those especially which most readily attract dew in clear weather. 

1201. When bodies become cold by radiation, the degree of eflect observed must depend, 
not only on their radiating power, but in part also on the greater or less ease with which 
they can derive heat, by conduction, from wanner substances in contact with them. 
Bodies, exposed in a clear night to the sky, must radiate as much heat to it during the 
prevalence of wind, as they would do if the air were altogether still. But in the former 
case, little or no cold will be observed upon them above that of the atmosphere, as the 
frequent application of warm air must quickly return a heat equal, or nearly so, to that 
which they had lost by radiation. A slight agitation of the air is sufficient to produce 
some effect of tliis kind ; though, as has already been said, such an agitation, when the 
air is very pregnant with moisture, will render greater the quantity of dew, one requisite 
for a considerable production of tliis fluid being more increased by it, than another is 
diminished. 

1 202. It has been remarked, that the hurtful effects of cold occur chiefly in hollow places. 
If this ' be restricted to what happens on serene and calm nights, two reasons from 
different sources are to be assigned for it. The first is, that the air being stiller in such 
a situation, than in any other, the cold, from radiation, in the bodies which it contains, 
will be less diminished by renewed applications of warmer air ; the second, that from the 
longer continuance of the same air in contact with the ground, in depressed places than 
in others, less dew will be deposited, and therefore less heat extricated during its 
formation. 

1 203. An observation closely connected with the preceding, namely, that in clear and 
still nights, frosts are less severe upon hills, than in neighbouring plains, has excited more 
attention, chiefly from its contradicting what is commonly regarded an established fact, 
tliat the cold of the atmosphere always increases with the distance from the earth. But 
on the contrary the fact is certain, that in very clear and still nights, the air near to the 



Book II. 



HEAT AND LIGHT. 



251 



earth is colder than that which is more distant from it, to the height at least of 220 feet, 
this being the greatest to which experiments relate. If then a hill be supposed to rise 
from a plain to the height of 220 feet, having upon its summit a small flat surface 
covered with grass ; and if the atmosphere, during a calm and serene night, be admitted 
to be 10° warmer there than it is near the surface of the low grounds, which is a less 
difference than what sometimes occurs in such circumstances, it is manifest that, should 
both the grass upon the hill, and that upon the plain, acquire a cold of 10° by radiation, 
the former will, notwithstanding, be 10° warmer than the latter. Hence also the tops 
of trees are sometimes found dry when the grass on the ground's surface has been found 
covered with dew. 

1 204. A very slight covering will exclude much cold. I had often, observes Dr. Wells, 
in the pride of half knowledge, smiled at the means frequently employed by gardeners, 
to protect tender plants from cold, as it appeared to me impossible, that a thin mat, or 
any such flimsy substance, could prevent them from attaining the temperature of the 
atmosphere, by which alone I thought them liable to be injured. But, when I had 
learned, that bodies on the surface of the earth become, during a still and serene night, 
colder than the atmosphere, by radiating their heat to the heavens, I perceived 
immediately a just reason for the practice, which I liad before deemed useless. 
Being desirous, however, of acquiring some precise information on this subject, I 
fixed, perpendicularly, in the earth of a grass-plot, four small sticks, and over their 
upper extremities, which were six inches above the grass, and formed the corners of 
a square, the sides of which were two feet long, drew tightly a very thin cambric hand- 
kerchief. In this disposition of things, therefore, nothing existed to prevent the free 
passage of air from the exposed grass, to that M'hich was sheltered, except the four 
small sticks, and there was no substance to radiate heat downwards to the latter grass, 
except the cambric handkerchief. The temperature of the grass, which v/as thus 
shielded from the sky, was, upon many nights afterwards examined by me, and was 
always found higher than that of neighbouring grass which was uncovered, if this was 
colder than the air. When the difference in temperature, between the air several feet 
above the ground and the unsheltered grass, did not exceed 5°, the sheltered grass was 
about as warm as the air. If that difference, however, exceeded 5°, the air was 
found to be somewhat warmer than the sheltered grass. Thus, upon one night, when 
.fully exposed grass was 11° colder than the air, the latter was 3° warmer than the 
sheltered grass ; and the same difference existed on another night, when the air was 
14° warmer than the exposed grass. One reason for this difference, no doubt, was 
that the air, which passed from the exposed grass, by which it had been very much 
cooled, to that under the handkerchief, had deprived the latter of part of its heat; 
another, that the handkerchief, from being made colder than the atmosphere by the 
radiation of its upper surface to the heavens, would remit somewhat less heat to the 
grass beneath, than what it received from that substance. But still, as the sheltered 
grass, notwithstanding these drawbacks, was upon one night, as may be collected 
from the preceding relation, 8°, and upon another 11", warmer than grass fully ex- 
posed to the sky, a sufficient reason was now obtained for the utility of a very slight 
shelter to plants, in averting or lessening injury from cold, on a still and serene night. 

1205. The covering has most effect whenplaced ata littls distance above the plants or objects 
to be sheltered. A difference in temperature, of some magnitude, was always observed on 
still and serene nights, between bodies sheltered from the sky by substances touching them, 
and similar bodies, which were sheltered by a substance a little above them. I found, for 
example, upon one night, that the warmth of grass, sheltered by a cambric handkerchief 
raised a few inches in the air, was 3° greater than that of a neighbouring piece of grass 
which was sheltered by a similar handkerchief actually in contact with it. On another 
night, the difference between the temperatures of two portions of grass, shielded in the 
same manner, as the two above mentioned, from the influence of the sky, was 4°. Pos- 
sibly, continues Dr. Wells, experience has long ago taught gardeners the superior ad- 
vantage of defending tender vegetables, from the cold of clear and calm nights, by means 
of substances not directly touching them ; though I do not recollect ever having seen 
any contrivance for keeping mats, or such like bodies, at a distance from the plants 
which they were meant to protect. 

1 206. Heat produced by walls. Walls, Dr. Wells observes, as far as warmth is con- 
cerned, are regarded as useful, during a cold night, to the plants which touch them, or 
are near to them, only in two M'ays ; first, by the mechanical shelter which they afford 
against cold winds, and secondly, by giving out the heat which they had acquired during 
the day. It appearing to me, however, that, on clear and calm nights, those on which plants 
frequently receive much injury from cold, walls must be beneficial in a third way, 
namely, by preventing, in part, the loss of heat, which the plants would sustain from 
radiation, if they were fully exposed to the sky : the following experiment was made for 
the purpose of determining the justness of this opinion, A cambric handkerchief having 



252 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING 



Part II. 



been placed, by means of two upright sticks, perpendicularly to a grass-plot, and at right 
angles to the course of the air, a thermometer was laid upon the grass close to the lower 
edge of the handkerchief, on its windward side. The thermometer thus situated was 
several nights compared with another lying on the same grass-plot, but on a part of it 
fully exposed to the sky. On two of these nights, the air being clear and calm, the grass 
close to the handkerchief was found to-be 4^ warmer than the fully exposed grass. On 
a third, the difference was 6°. An analogous fact is mentioned by Gersten, who says, 
that a horizontal surface is more abundantly dewed, than one which is perpendicular to 
the ground. 

1207. Heat from a covering of snow. The covering of snow, the same author ob- 
serves, which countries in high latitudes enjoy during the winter, has been very 
commonly thought to be beneficial to vegetable substances on the surface of the 
earth, as far as their temperature is concerned, solely by protecting them from the cold 
of the atmosphere. But were this supposition just, the advantage of the covering 
would be greatly circumscribed ; since the upper parts of trees and of tall shrubs 
are still exposed to the influence of the air. Another reason, however, is furnished 
for its usefulness, by what has been said in this essay ; which is, that it prevents the 
occurrence of the cold, which bodies on the eai-th acquire, in addition to that of 
the atmosphere, by the radiation of their heat to the heavens during still and clear 
nights. The cause, indeed, of this additional cold, does not constantly operate ; but 
its presence, during only a few hours, might effectually destroy plants, which now 
pass unhurt through the winter. Again, as things are, while low vegetable produc- 
tions are prevented, by their covering of snow, from becoming colder than the atmo- 
sphere in consequence of their own radiation, the parts of trees and tall shrubs, which 
rise above the snow, are little affected by cold from this cause. For their outermost 
twigs, now that they are destitute of leaves, are much smaller than the thermometers 
suspended by me in the air, which in this situation very seldom became more than 2" 
colder than the atmosphere. The larger branches, too, which, if fully exposed to the sky, 
would become colder than the extreme parts, are, in a great degree, sheltered by them ; 
and, in the last place, tlie trunks are sheltered both by the smaller and the larger parts, 
not to mention that the trunks must derive heat, by conduction through the roots, 
from the earth kept warm by the snow. In a similar way is partly to be explained the 
manner, in which a layer of earth or straw preserves vegetable matters in our own 
fields, from the injurious effects of cold in winter. [Essay on Dew, &c. 1819.) 

1208. T/ie nature of light is totally unknown : the light which proceeds from the sun 
seems to be composed of three distinct substances. Scheel discovered that a glass mir- 
ror held before the fire reflected the rays of light, but not the rays of caloric ; but when 
a metallic mirror was placed in the same situation, both heat and light were reflected. 
The mirror of glass became hot in a short time, but no change of temperature took place 
on the metallic mirror. This experiment shows that the glass mirror absorbed the rays 
of caloric, and reflected those of light ; while the metallic mirror, suffering no change of 
temperature, reflected both. And if a plate glass be held before a burning body, the 
rays of light are not sensibly interrupted, but the rays of caloric are intercepted ; for no 
sensible heat is observed on the opposite side of the glass ; but when the glass has reached 
a proper degree of temperature, the rays of caloric are transmitted with the same facility 
as those of light. And thus the rays of light and caloric may be separated. But the 
curious experiments of Dr. Herschel have clearly proved that the invisible rays which 
are emitted by the sun, have the greatest heating power. In those experiments, the dif- 
ferent colored rays were thrown on the bulb of a very delicate thermometer, and their heat- 
ing power was observed. The heating power of the violet, green, and red rays were found 
to be to each other as the following munbers : violet, 16*0; green, 22*4; red, 55 0. 
The heating power of the most refrangible rays was least, and this power increases as 
the refrangibility diminishes. The red ray, therefore, has the greatest heating power, 
and the violet, which is the most refrangible, the least. The illuminating power, it has 
been already observed, is greatest in the middle of the spectrum, and it diminishes to- 
wards both extremities ; but the heating power, which is least at the violet end, increases 
from that to the red extremity ; and when the thermometer was placed beyond the limit of 
the red ray, it rose still higher than in the red ray, which has the greatest heating power 
in the spectrum. The heating power of these invisible rays was greatest at the distance 
of half an inch beyond the red ray, but it was sensible at the distance of one inch and a 
half. 

1 209. The influejice of the different solar rays on vegetation has not yet been stu- 
died ; but it is certain that the rays exercise an influence independent of the heat they 
produce. Thus plants kept in darkness, but supplied with heat, air, and moisture, grow 
for a sliort time, but tliey never gain their natural colors ; their leaves are white and 
pale, and their juices watery and peculiarly saccharine : according to Knight they merely 



Book II. 



ELECTRICITY. — WATER. 



253 



expend the sap previously generated under the influence of light. {Notes to Sir J£. 
Davy's ^gr. Chem. p. 402.) 

Sect. II. Of Electricity. 

1210. Electrical changes are constantly taking ])lace in nature, on the surface of the earth, 
and in the atmosphere ; but as yet the ejects of this power in vegetation have not been cor- 
rectly estimated. It has been shown by experiments made by means of the voltaic bat- 
tery, that compound bodies in general, are capable of being decomposed by electrical 
powers, and it is probable that the various electrical phenomena occurring in our system, 
must influence both the germination of seeds and the growth of plants. It has been found 
that corn sprouted much more rapidly in water positively electrified by the voltaic instru- 
ment, than in water negatively electrified ; and experiments made upon the atmosphere 
show that clouds are usually negative ; and, as when a cloud is in one state of electri- 
city, the surface of the earth beneath is brought into the opposite state, it is probable that 
in common cases the surface of the earth is positive. A similar experiment is related 
by Dr. Darwin. (P/iytologia, sect. xiii. 2, 3.) 

1211. Respecting the nature of electricity diif^avent opinions are entertained amongst sci- 
entific men ; by some, the phenomena are conceived to depend upon a single subtile fluid 
in excess in the bodies said to be positively electrified, and in deficiency in the bodies said 
to be negatively electrified. A second class suppose the eflfects to be produced by two 
different fluids, called by them the vitreous fluid and the resinous fluid ; and others 
regard them as affections or motions of matter, or an exhibition of attractive powers, 
similar to those which produce chemical combination and decomposition ; but usually 
exerting their action on masses. 

1212. A prof table a2}plication of electricity, Dr. Darwin observes, to promote the 
growth of plants is not yet discovered ; it is nevertheless probable, that in dry seasons, 
the erection of numerous metallic points on the surface of the ground, but a few feet 
high, might, in the night-time, contribute to precipitate the dew by facilitating the 
passage of electricity from the air into the earth ; and that an erection of such points 
higher in the air by means of wires wrapped round tall rods, like angle rods, or elevated 
on buildings, might freqviently precipitate showers from the higher parts of the atmosphere. 
Such points erected in gardens might promote a quicker vegetation of the plants in 
their vicinity, by supplying them more abundantly with the electric ether. (Phytologia, 
xiii. 4.) J. Williams {Climate of Great. Britain, 348.), enlarging on this idea, proposes 
to erect large electrical machines, to be driven by wind, over the general face of the 
country, for the purpose of improving the climate, and especially for lessening that 
superabundant moisture which he contends is yearly increasing from the increased 
evaporating surface, produced by the vegetation of improved culture, and especially 
fronl the increase of pastures, hedges, and ornamental plantations. 

Sect. III. Of Water. 

1213. Water is a qompound of oxygene and hydrogene gas, though primarily reckoned a 
simple or elementary substance. " If the metal called potassium be exposed in a 
glass tube to a small quantity of water, it will act upon it with great violence ; elastic 
fluid will be disengaged, which will be found to be hydrogen ; and the same eflfects will 
be produced upon the potassium, as if it had absorbed a small quantity of oxygen ; and 
the hydrogen disengaged, and the oxygen added to the potassium, are in vi-eight as 2 to 
15 J and if two in volume of hydrogen, and one in volume of oxygen, which have the 
weights of 2 and 1 5, be introduced into a close vessel, and an electrical spark passed 
through them, they will inflame and condense into 17 parts of pure water." 

1214. Water is absolutely necessary to the economy of vegetation in its elastic and fluid 
state ; and it is not devoid of use even in its solid form. Snow and ice are bad con- 
ductors of heat ; and when the ground is covered with snow, or the surface of the soil or 
of water is frozen, the roots or bulbs of the plants beneath are protected by the congealed 
water from the influence of the atmosphere, the temperature of which, in northern win- 
ters, is usually very much below the freezing point ; and this water becomes the first 
nourishment of the plant in early spring. The expansion of water during its congelation, 
at which time its volume increases one twelfth, and its contraction of bulk during a 
thaw, tend to pulverise the soil, to separate its parts from each other, and to make it more 
permeable to the influence of tlie air. 



254 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Chap. IV. 

Of the Agency of the Atmospliere in Vegetation. 

1215. The aerial medium ivhich efivelopes the earth may be studied chemically and phy- 
sically ; the first study respects the elements of which the atmosphere is composed ; and 
the second theii- action in a state of combination, and as influenced by various causes, 
or those phenomena wliich constitute the weather. 

Sect. I. Of the Elements of the Atmosphere. 

1216. Water, carbonic acid gas, oxygen, and azote, are tlie principal substances composing 
the atmosphei'e ; but more minute enquiries respecting their natm'e and agencies are 
necessary to afford coiTCCt views of its uses in vegetation. 

1217. That loater exists in the atmosphere is easily proved. If some of the salt, called 
muriate of lime, that has been just heated red, be exposed to the air, even in the di iest 
and coldest weather, it will increase in weight, and become moist ; and in a certain time 
will be converted into a fluid. If put into a retort and heated, it will jdeld pure water ; 
will gradually recover its pristine state ; and, if heated red, its former weight : so that it 
is evident that the water united to it was derived from the air. And that it existed in 
the air in an invisible and elastic form, is proved by the circumstance, that if a given 
quantity of air be exposed to the salt, its volume and weight will diminish, provided th« 
experiment be correctly made. 

1218. The quantity of water which exists in air, as vapor, varies vdih the temperature. In 
proportion as the weather is hotter, tlie quantity is greater. At 50° of Fahj-enheit, 
air contains about one 50th of its volume of vapor ; and as the specific gravity of vapor 
is to that of air nearly as 10 to 15 ; this is about one 75th of its weight. At 100°, sup- 
posing that there is a free communication with, water, it contains about one 14th part 
in volume, or one 21st in weight. It is the condensation of vapor by diminution of the 
temperature of the atmosphere, which is probably the principal cause of the formation of 
clouds, and of the deposition of dew, mist, snow, or hail. 

1219. The power of differetit substances to absorb aqueous vapor from the atmosphere by 
cohesive attraction has been already refened to. (1058.) The leaves of li\-ing plants ap- 
pear to act upon this vapor in its elastic form, and to absorb it. Some vegetables 
increase in weight from tliis cause, when suspended in the atmosphere and unconnected 
with the soil; such are the house-leek, and different species of the aloe. In very 
intense heats, and when the soil is dry, the life of plants seems to be preserved by the 
absorbent power of their leaves ; and it is a beautiful circumstance in the economy 
of nature, that aqueous vapor is most abundant in the atmosphere when it is most 
needed for the purposes of life j and that when other sources of its supply are cut off, 
this is most copious. 

1220. The existence of carbonic acid gas in the atmosphere is proved by the following 
process : if a solution of lime and water be exposed to the air, a pellicle will speedily 
form upon it, and a solid matter will gradually fall to the bottom of the water, and in a 
certain time the water will become tasteless ; this is owing to the combination of the lime 
which was dissolved in the water with carbonic acid gas, which existed in the atmosphere, 
as may be proved by collecting the film and the solid matter, and igniting them strongly 
in a little tube of platina or iron ; they will give out carbonic acid gas, and will become 
quick-lime, which, added to the same water, will again bring it to the state of lime- 
water. 

1221. The quantity of carbonic acid gas in the atjnosphere is very small. It is not easy 
to determine it with precision, and it must differ in different situations ; but where tliere 
is a free circulation of air, it is probably never more than one 500th, nor less than one 800th 
of the volume of air. Carbonic acid gas is nearly one thu-d heavier than the other elastic 
parts of the atmosphere in their mixed state ; hence at first view it tnight be supposed 
that it would be most abundant in the lower regions of the atmosphere ; but unless it has 
been immediately produced at the surface of the earth in some chemical process, this does 
not seem to be the case ; elastic fluids of diflPerent specific gravities have a tendency to 
equable mixture by a species of attraction, and the different parts of the atmosphere are 
constantly agitated and blended together by winds or other causes. De Saussure found 
lime-water precipitated on Mount Blanc, the highest point of land in Europe ; and 
carbonic acid gas has been always foimd, apparently in due proportion, in the air brought 
down from great heights in the atmosphere by aerostatic adventurers. 

1222. The principal consumption of the carbonic add in the atmosphere seems to be in 
affording nourishment to plants ; and some of them appear to be sup|)lied with carbon 
chiefly from this source. 

1223. The formation of carbonic acid gas takes place during fermentation,* combustion, 
putrefaction, respiration, and a number of operations taking place upon the surface of the 



Book II. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



255 



earth ; and there is no other process known in nature by which it can be destroyed but by 
vegetation. 

1224. Oxygen and azote are the remaining constituents of the atmosphere. After a given 
portion of common air has been deprived of aqueous vapor and carbonic acid gas, it ap- 
pears little altered in its properties ; it remains a compound of oxygen and azote, which 
supports combustion and animal life. There are many modes of separating these two 
gases from each other. A simple one is by burning phosphorus in a confined volume of 
air : this absorbs the oxygen and leaves the azote ; and 100 parts in volume of air, in 
which phosphorus has been burnt, yield 79 parts of azote ; and by mixing this azote with 
21 parts of fresh oxygene gas artificially procured, a substance having the original charac- 
ters of air is produced. To procure pure oxygen from air, quicksilver may be kept heated 
in it, at about 600°, till it becomes a red powder ; this powder, when ignited, will be 
restored to the state of quicksilver by giving oflP oxygen. 

1 225. Oxygen is necessary to some functions of vegetables ; but its great importance in na- 
ture is in its relation to the economy of animals. It is absolutely necessary to their life. 
Atmospheric air taken into the lungs of animals, or passed in solution in water through 
the gills of fishes, loses oxygen ; and for the oxygen lost, about an equal volume of car- 
bonic acid appears. 

1226. The ejects of azote in vegetation are not distinctly known. As it is found in some 
of the products of vegetation, it may be absorbed by certain plants from the atmosphere. 
It prevents the action of oxygen from being too energetic, and serves as |i medium in 
which the more essential parts of the air act ; nor is this circumstance unconformable to 
the analogy of nature ; for the elements most abundant on the solid surface of the 
globe, are not those which are the most essential to the existence of the living beings be- 
longing to it. 

1227. The action of the atmosphere on plants differs at different periods of their growth, 
and varies with the various stages of the developement and decay of their organs. We have 
seen (723.) that if a healthy seed be moistened and exposed to air at a temperature not 
below 45°, it soon germinates, and shoots forth a plume, which rises upwards, and a 
radicle which descends. If the air be confined, it is found that in the process of germin- 
ation the oxygen, or a part of it, is absorbed. The azote remains unaltered ; no carbonic 
acid is taken away from the air ; on the contrary, some is added. Seeds are incapable of 
germinating, except when oxygen is present. In the exhausted receiver of the air-pump, in 
pure azote, or in pure carbonic acid, when moistened they swell, but do not vegetate ; and 
if kept in these gases, lose their living powers, and undergo putrefaction. If a seed be 
examined before germination, it will be found more or less insipid, at least not sweet ; 
but after germination it is always sweet. Its coagulated mucilage, or starch, is converted 
into sugar in the process ; a substance difficult of solution is changed into one easily 
soluble ; and the sugar carried through the cells or vessels of the cotyledons, is the nou- 
rishment of the infant plant. The absorption of oxygen by the seed in germination, has 
been compared to its absorption in producing the evolution of foetal life in the egg ; but 
this analogy is only remote. All animals, from the most to the least perfect classes, re- 
quire a supply of oxygen. From the moment the heart begins to pulsate till it ceases to 
beat, the aeration of the blood is constant, and the function of respiration invariable ; 
carbonic acid is given off in the process, but the chemical change produced in the blood 
is unknown ; nor is there any reason to suppose the formation of any substance similar to 
sugar. It is evident, that in all cases of semination, the seeds should be sown so as to be 
fully exposed to the influence of the air. And one cause of the unproductiveness of cold 
clayey adhesive soils is, that the seed is coated with matter impermeable to air. In sandy 
soils the earth is always sufficiently penetrable by the atmosphere ; but in clayey soils 
there can scarcely be too great a mechanical division of parts. Any seed not fully sup- 
plied with air, always produces a weak and diseased plant. We have already seen (756.) 
that carbon is added to plants from the air by the process of vegetation in sunshine ; and 
oxygen is added to the atmosphere at the same time. 

1228. Those changes in the atmosphere which constitute the most important meteorological 
phenomena, may be classed under five distinct heads ; the alterations that occur in the 
weight of the atmosphere ; those that take place in its temperature ; the changes produced 
in its quantity by evaporation and rain ; the excessive agitation to which it is frequently 
subject ; and the phenomena arising from electric and other causes, that at particular times 
occasion or attend the precipitations and agitations alluded to. All the above phenomena 
prove to demonstration that constant changes take place, the consequences of new com- 
binations and decompositions rapidly following each other. 

1229. With respect to the changes in the weight of the atmosphere it is generally known 
that the instrument called the barometer shows the weight of a body of air immediateJy 
above it, extending to the extreme boundary of the atmosphere, and the base of which is 
equal to that of the mercury contained within it. As the level of the sea is the lowest 



256 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



point of observation, the column of air over a barometer placed at that level is the longest 
to be obtained. 

The variations of the barometer between the tropics are very trifling, and it does not descend more than 
half as much in that part of the globe for every two hundred feet of elevation as it does beyond the tropics. 
The range of the barometer increases gradually as the latitude advances towards the poles, till in the end 
it amounts to two or three inches. The following Table will explain this gradual increase : — 

The range of the barometer is considerably less in 
North A?nerica than in the corresponding latitudes of 
Europe, particularly in Virginia, wliere it never ex- 
ceeds I'l. The range is more considerable at the level 
of the sea than on mountains ; and in the same degree 
of latitude it is in the inverse ratio of the height of the 
place above the level of the sea. Cotte composed a 
table, which has been published in ihe Journal dePhy. 
sique, from which it appears extremely probable, that the 
barometer has an invariable tendency to rise between 
the morning and the evening, and that this impulse 
is most considerable from two in the afternoon till nine 
at night, when the greatest elevation is accomplished ; 
but the elevation at nine differs from that at two by 
four twelfths, while that of two varies from the elevation of the morning only by one twelfth, and that in 
particular climates the greatest elevation is at two o'clock. The observations of Cotte confirm those of 
Luke Howard ; and from them it is concluded, that the barometer is influenced by some depressing 
cause at new and full moon, and that some other makes it rise at the quarters. This coincidence is most 
considerable in fair and calm weather ; the depression in the interval between the quarters and conjunc- 
tions amounts to one tenth of an inch, and the rise from the conjunctions to the quarters is to the same 
amount. The range of this instrument is found to be greater in winter than in summer ; for instance, the 
mean at York, during the months from October to March inclusive, in the year 1774, was 142, and in the 
six summer months 1-016. 

The more serene and settled the weather, the higher the barometer ranges ; calm weather, with a tendency 
to rain, depresses it ; high winds have a similar effect on it ; and the greatest elevation occurs with easterly 
and northerly winds ; but the south produces a directly contrary effect. 

1230. The variations in the temperature of the air in any particular place, exclusive of 
the differences of seasons and climates, are very considerable. These changes cannot be 
produced by heat derived from the sun, as its rays concentrated have no kind of effect on 
air ; those, however, heat the surface of our globe, which is communicated to the immediate 
atmosphere ; it is through this fact that the temperature is highest where the place is so 
situated as to receive with most effect the rays of the sun, and that it varies in each region 
with the season ; it is also the cause why it decreases in proportion to the height of the 
air above the surface of the earth. The most perpendicular rays falling on the globe at 
the equator, there the heat of it is the greatest, and tliat heat decreases gradually to the 
poles, of course the temperature of the air is in exact unison ; from this, it appears, that 
the air acquires the greatest degree of warmth over the equator, where it becomes insensi- 
bly cooler till we arrive at the poles ; in the same manner, the air immediately above 
tlie equator cools gradually. Though the temperature sinks as it approaches the pole, 
and is highest at the equator, yet as it varies continually with the seasons, it is impossible 
to form an accurate idea of the progression without forming a mean temperature for a 
year, from that of the temperature of every degree of latitude for every day of the year, 
which may be accomplished by adding together the whole of the observations and dividing 
by their number, when the quotient will be the mean temperature for the year. The 
<' diminution," says Dr. Thomson, " from the pole to the equator takes place in arith- 
metical progression ; or to speak more properly, the annual temperature of all the lati- 
tudes, are arithmetical means between the mean annual temperature of the equator and 
the pole. And as far as heat depends in the action of solar rays, that of each month is as 
the mean altitude of the sun, or rather as the sine of the sun's altitude." 

1231. Inconsiderable seas, in temperate and cold climates, are colder in winter and 
warmer in summer than the main ocean, as they are necessarily under the influence of 
natural operations from the land. Thus the Gulf of Bothnia, is generally frozen in 
winter, but the water is sometimes heated in the summ.er to 70", a state, the opposite part 
of the Atlantic never acquires ; the German Sea is five degrees warmer in summer tlian 
the Atlantic, and more than three colder in winter ; the Mediterranean is almost through- 
out warmer both in winter and summer, which therefore causes the Atlantic to flow into 
it J and the Black Sea being colder than the Mediterranean, flows into the latter. 

The eastern parts of North America, as appears from meteorological tables, have a much colder air than 
the opposite European coast, and fall short of the standaid by about ten or twelve degrees. There are 
several causes which produce this considerable difference. The greatest elevation in North America ia 
between the 40th and 50th degree of north latitude, and the 100th and 110th of longitude west from Lon- 
don ; and there the most considerable rivers have their origin. The height alone is sufficient to make this 
tract colder than it would otherwise be ; but there are other causes, and those are most extensive forests, 
and large swamps and morasses, each of which exclude heat from the earth, and consequently prevent it 
from ameliorating the rigor of winter. Many extensive lakes lie to the east, and Hudson's Bay more to 
the north ; a chain of mountains extends on the south of the latter, and those equally prevent" the aceu. 
mulation of heat ; besides, this bay is bounded on the east by the mountainous country of Labrador, and 
has many islands ; from all which circumstances arise the lowness of the temperature, and the piercing 
cold of the north-west winds. The annual decrease of the forests for the purpose of clearing the ground 



Latitude. 


Places. 


Range of the Barometer. 






Greatest. 


Annual. 


0° 0" 
22 23 
33 55 
40 55 
51 8 
53 13 
53 23 
59 56 


Peru - - - 
Calcutta - - 
Cape Town - 
Naples - - 
Dover - - - 
Middle wich - 
Liverpool 
Petersburgh - 


20 
77 

"i 00 

2 47 

3 00 

3 45 


o" 89 

T 80 
1 94 

1 96 

2 77 



Book 1 1. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



257 



and the consumption for building and fuel, is supposed to have occasioned a considerable decrease of cold 
m the winter ; and if this should be the result, much will yet be done towards bringing the temperature of 
the European and American continents to something like a level. 

1232. Continents have a colder atmosphere than islands situated in the same degree of 
latitude ; and countries lying to the windward of the superior classes of mountains, or 
forests, are warmer than those which are to the leeward. Earth always possessing a cer- 
tain degree of moisture, has a greater capacity to receive and retain heat than sand or 
stones, the latter therefore are heated and cooled with more rapidity : it is from this cir- 
cumstance that the intense heats of Africa and Arabia, and the cold of Terra del Fuego, 
are derived. The temperature of growing vegetables changes very gradually ; but there 
is a considerable evaporation from them : if those exist in great numbers, and congre- 
gated, or in forests, their foliage preventing the rays of the sun from reaching the earth, it 
is perfectly natural that the immediate atmosphere must be greatly affected by the ascent 
of chilled vapors. 

1233. Our next object is the ascent and descent of water : the principal appearances of 
this element are vapor, clouds, devv^, rain, frost, hail, snow, and ice. 

1234. Vapor is water rarefied by heat, in consequence of which becoming lighter than 
the atmosphere, it is raised considerably above the surface of the earth, and afterwards by 
a partial condensation forms clouds. It differs from exhalation, which is properly a dis- 
persion of dry particles from a body. When water is heated to 212* it boils, and is ra- 
pidly converted into steam ; and the same change takes place in much lower temper- 
atures; but in that case the evaporation is slower, and the elasticity of the steam is 
smaller. As a very considerable proportion of the earth's surface is covered with water, 
and as this water is constantly evaporating and mixing with the atmosphere in the state of 
vapor, a precise determination of the rate of evaporation must be of very great import- 
ance in meteorology. Evaporation is confined entirely to the surface of the water ; hence 
it is, in all cases, proportional to the surface of the water exposed to the atmosphere. 
Much more vapor of course rises in maritime countries or those interspersed with lakes, 
th-an in inland countries. Much more vapor rises during hot weather than during 
cold : hence the quantity evaporated depends in some measure upon temperature. The 
quantity of vapor which rises from water, even when the temperature is the same, varies 
according to circumstances. It is least of all in calm weather, greater when a breeze 
blows, and greatest of all with a strong wind. From experiments, it appears, that the 
quantity of vapor raised annually at Manchester is equal to about 25 inches of rain. If 
to this we add five inches for the dew, with Dalton, it will make the annual evapor- 
ation 30 inches. Now, if we consider the situation of England, and the greater quantity 
of vapor raised from water, it will not surely be considered as too great an allowance, 
if we estimate the mean annual evaporation over the whole surface of the globe 
at 35 inches. 

1 235. A cloud is a mass of vapor, more or less opaque, formed and sustained at con- 
siderable height in the atmosphere, probably by the joint agencies of heat and electricity. 
Tlie first successful attempt to arrange the diversified form of clouds, under a few general 
modifications, was made by Luke Howard, Esq. We shall give here a brief account of 
his ingenious claaeifi cation. 

1236. The simple modifications are thus named and defined : — 1. CiiTus, parallel, 
flexuous, or diverging fibres, extensible in any or in all directions {Jig. 75. a) ; 2. Cumulus, 
convex or conical heaps, increasing upwards from a horizontal base (6); 3. Stratus,, 
a widely-extended, continuous, horizontal sheet, increasing from below (c). 

1237. The intermediate modifications which require to be noticed are, 4. Cirro-cumulus, 
small, w^ell-defined, roundish masses, in close horizontal arrangement (d) ; 5. Cirro-stratus, 
horizontal or slightly inclined masses, attenuated towards a part or the whole of their 
circumference, bent downward or undulated, separate or in groups consisting of small 
clouds having these characters (e). 

1238. The comj^ound modifications are, 6. Cumulo-stratus, or twain cloud ; the cirro- 
stratus, blended with the cumulus, and either appearing intermixed with the heaps of the 
latter, or superadding a wide-spread structure to its base (/) ; 7. Cumulo-cirro-stratus, 
vel Nimbus ; the rain-cloud, a cloud or system of clouds from which rain is falling. 
It is a horizontal sheet, above which the cirrus spreads, while the cumulus enters it 
laterally and from beneath (g, g) ; 8. The Fall Cloud, resting apparently on the surface 
of the ground {Ji), 

12.39. The cirrus appears to have the least density, the greatest elevation, the greatest variety of extent 
and direction, and to appear earliest in serene weather, being indicated by a few threads pencilled on the 
sky Before storms they appear lower and denser, and usually in the quarter opposite to that from which 
the storm arises. Steady high winds are also preceded and attended by cirrous streaks, running quite across 
the sky in the direction they blow in. 

1240. Tfie cumulus has the densest structure, is formed in the Ion er atmosphere, and moves along with 
the current next the earth. A small irregular spot first appears, and is, as it were, the nucleus on which 
they increase. The lower surface continues irregularly plane, while the upper rises into conical or hemi- 
spherical heaps ; which may afterwards continue long nearly of the same bulk, or rapidly rise into mouu- 



258 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pa ax II. 




tains. TTiey will begin, in fair weather, to form some houK? after sunrise, arrive at their maximum in 
the hottest part of the afternoon, then go on diminishing, and totally disperse about sunset. Previous to 
rain the cumulus increases rapidly, appears lower in the atmosphere, and with its surface full of loose 
fleeces or protuberances. The formation of large cumuli to leeward in a strong wind, indicates the ap- 
proach of a calm with rain. When they do not disappear or subside about sunset, but continue to rise, 
thunder is to be expected in the night. 

1241. The stratus has a mean degree of density, and is the lowest of clouds, its inferior surface commonly 
resting on the earth in water. This is properly the cloud of night, appearing about sunset. It compre- 
hends all those creeping mists which in calm weather ascend in spreading sheets (like an inundation of 
water) from the bottoms of valleys, and the surfaces of lakes and rivers. On the return of the sun, the 
level surface of this cloud begins to put on the appearance of cumulus, the whole at the same time separat- 
ing from the ground. The continuity is next destroyed, and the cloud ascends and evaporates, or passes 
oft" with the appearance of the nascent cumulus. This has long been experienced as a prognostic of fair 
weather. 

1242. Transition of forms. The cirrus having continued for sometime increasing or stationary, usually 
passes either to the cin-o-cumulus or the cirro-stratus, at the same time descending to a lower station in the 
atmosphere. This modification forms a very beautiful sky, and is frequently in summer an attendant on warm 
and dry weather. The cirro-stratus, when seen in the distance, frequently gives the idea of shoals of fish. 
It precedes wind and rain ; is seen in the intervals of storms ; and sometimes alternates with the cirro- 
cumulus in the same cloud, when the different evolutions form a curious spectacle. A judgment may be 
formed of the weather likely to ensue by observing which modification prevails at last. The solar "and 
lunar halos, as well as the parhelion and paraselene (mock sun and mock moon), prognostics of foul wea- 
ther, are occasioned by this cloud. The curnulo-stratus precedes, and the nimbus accompanies rain. 

12^13. Dew is the moisture insensibly deposited from the atmosphere on the surface of 



Book II. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



259 



the earth. Tliis moisture is precipitated by the cold of the body on which it appears, and 
will be more or less abundant, not in proportion to the coldness of that body, but in pro- 
portion to the existing state of the air in regard to moisture. It is commonly supposed 
that the formation of dew produces cold, but like every other precipitation of water from 
the atmosphere, it must evidently produce heat. 

1244. Phenomena of dew. Aristotle justly remarked, that dew appears only on calm and clear nights. 
Dr. Wells shows, that very little is ever deposited in opposite circumstances ; and that little only when the 
clouds are very high. It is never seen on nights both cloudy and windy ; and if in the course of the night 
the weather, from being serene, should become dark and stormy, dew which had been deposited will disap- 
pear. In calm weather, if (he sky be partially covered with clouds, more dew will appear than if it were en- 
tirely uncovered. Dew probably begins in the country to appear upon grass in places shaded from the sun, 
during clear and calm weather, soon after the heat of the atmosphere has declined, and continues to be depo- 
sited through the whole night, and for a little after sunrise. Its quantity will depend in some measure on 
the proportion of moisture in the atmosphere, and is consequently greater after rain than after a long tract of 
dry weather ; and in Europe, with southerly and westerly winds, than with those which blow from the 
north and the east. Tlie direction of the sea determines this relation of the winds to dew. For in Egypt, 
dew is scarcely ever observed except while the northerly or Etesian winds prevail. Hence also, dew is 
generally more abundant in spring and autumn, than in summer. And it is always very copious on those 
clear nights which are followed by misty mornings, which show the air to be loaded with moisture. And 
a clear morning, following a cloudy night, determines a plentiful deposition of the retained vapor. When 
warmth of atmosphere is compatible with clearness, as is the case in southern latitudes, though seldom in 
our country, the dew becomes much more copious, because the air then contains more moisture. Dew 
continues to form with increased copiousness as the night advances, from the increased refrigeration of 
the ground. 

1245. Cause of dew. Dew, according to Aristotle, is a species of rain, formed in the lower atmosphere, 
in consequence of its moisture being condensed by the cold of the night into minute drops. Opinions of 
this kind, says Dr. Wells, are still entertained by many persons, amc«ig whom is the very ingenious Pro- 
fessor Leslie. {Relat. of Heat and Moisture, p. 37. and 132 ) A fact, however, first taken notice of by 
Garstin, who published his Treatise on Dew in 1773, proves them to be erroneous ; for he found, that bodies, 
a little elevated in the air, often become moist with dew, while similar bodies, lying on the ground, remain 
dry, though necessarily, from their position, as liable to be wetted, by whatever falls from the heavens, as 
the former. The above notion is perfectly refuted by the fact, that metallic surfaces exposed to the air in- 
a horizontal position, remain dry, while every thing around them is covered with dew. After a long 
period of drought, when the air was very still and the sky serene. Dr. Wells exposed to the sky, 
28 minutes before sunset, previously weighed parcels of wool and swandown, upon a smooth, unpainted, 
and perfectly dry fir table, 5 feet long, 3 broad, and nearly 3 in height, which had been placed an hour 
before, in the sunshine, in a large level grass field. The wool, 12 minutes after sunset, was found to be 
14° colder than the air, and to have acquired no weight. The swandown, the quantity of which was much 
greater than that of the wool, was at the same time 13° colder than the air, and was also without any ad- 
ditional weight. In 20 minutes more the swandown was 14^° colder than the neighboring air, and was 
still without any increase of its weight. At the same time the grass was 15° colder than the air four feet 
above the ground. Dr. Wells, by a copious induction of facts derived from observation and experiment, 
establishes the proposition, that bodies become colder than the neighboring air before they are dewed. 
The cold therefore, which Dr. Wilson and M. Six conjectured to be the effect of dew, now appears to be 
its cause. But what makes the terrestrial surface colder than the atmosphere ? The radiation or pro- 
jection of heat into free space. Now the researches of Professor Leslie and Count Rumford have de- 
monstrated, that different bodies project heat with very different degrees of force. In th,e operation of 
this principle, therefore, conjoined with the power of a concave mirror of cloud, or any other awning, to 
reflect or throw down again those calorific emanations which would be dissipated in a clear sky, we shall 
find a solution of the most mysterious phenomena of dew. 

1246. Rain. Luke Howard, who may be considered as our most accurate scientific 
meteorologist, is inclined to think, that rain is in almost every instance the result of the 
electrical action of clouds upon each other. 

1247. Phenomena of rain. Rain never descends till the transparency of the air ceases, and the invisible 
vapors become vascul ir, when clouds form, and at length the drops fall : clouds, instead of forming 
gradually at once iluougliout all parts of the horizon, generate in a particular spot, and imperceptibly 
increase till the whole expanse is obscured. 

1248. The cause of rain is thus accounted for by Dalton. If two masses of air of 
unequal temperatures, by the ordinary currents of the winds, are intermixed, when 
saturated with vapor, a precipitation ensues. If the masses are under saturation, then 
less precipitation takes place, or none at all, according to the degree. Also the warmer 
the air, the greater is the quantity of vapor precipitated in like circumstances. Hence the 
reason why rains are heavier in summer than in wiiiter, and in warm countries than in 
cold- 

1249. The quantity of rain, taken at an annual mean, is the greatest at the equator, and 
it lessens gradually to the poles ; but there are fewer daj's of rain there, the number of 
which increase in proportion to the distance from it. From north latitude 12° to 43° the 
mean number of rainy days is 78 ; from 43° to 46° the mean number is 103 ; from 46° 
to 50°, 134 ; and from 51° to 60°, 161. Winter often produces a greater number of rainy 
days than summer, though the quantity of rain is more considerable in the latter than in 
the former season ; at Petersburgh rain and snow falls on an average 84 days of the 
winter, and the quantity amounts to about five inches ; on the contrary the summer pro- 
duces eleven inches in about the same number of days. Mountainous districts are sub- 
ject to great falls of rain ; among the Andes particularly it rains almost incessantly, while 
the flat country of Egypt is consumed by endless drought. Dalton estimates the quantity 
of rain falling in England at 31 inches. The mean annual quantity of tain for the whole 
globe is 34 inches. 

1250. Tlie cause why less rainfalls in the Jirst six months of the year than in the last six 
months is thus explained. The whole quantity of water in the atmosphere in January 
is usually about three inches, as appears from the dew point, which is then about 32° 

S 2 



260 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING 



Part II. 



Now the force of vapors at that temperature is 0*2 of an inch of mercury, which is equal 
to 2 '8 or three inches of water. The dew point in July is usually about 58° or 59^, cor- 
responding to 0*5 of an inch of mercury, which is equal to seven inches of water; the 
difference is four inches of water, which the atmosphere then contains more than in the 
former month. Hence, supposing the usual intermixture of currents of air in both the 
intervening periods to be the same, the rain ought to be four inches less in the former 
period of the year than the average, and four inches more in the latter period, making a 
difference of eight inches between the two periods, which nearly accords with the preced- 
ing observations. 

1251. The mean monthly and annual quantities of rain at various places, deduced from 
the average for many years, by Dalton, is given in the following Table : — 





[Chester, 
years. 


erpool, 
years. 


tsworth, 
years. 


li 


fi 


mfries, 
years. 


asgow, 
years. 


Ji 


•si 


iviers,- 
years. 


meral 
'erage. 




I« 


3^ 


6 








55 


is 




>o 
•* 


OO 




Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Inch. 


Fr. In. 


Fr. In. 


Inch. 


January - 


2.310 


2.177 


2.196 


3.461 


5.299 


3.095 


1.595 


1.4&4 


1.228 


2A-7 


2.530 


February - 


2.568 


1.8+7 


1.652 


2.995 


5.126 


2.S37 


1.741 


1.250 


1.232 


1.700 


2.295 


March - - 


2.098 


1.523 


1.322 


1.753 


3.151 


2.164 


1.184 


1.172 


1.190 


1.927 


1.748 


April - - 
May - - 


2.010 


2.101 


2.078 


2.180 


2.986 


2.017 


0.979 


1.279 


1.185 


2.686 


1.950 


2.895 


2.573 


2.118 


2.460 


3.480 


2.568 


1.641 


1.636 


1.767 


2.931 


2.407 


June - - 


2.502 


2.816 


2.286 


2.512 


2.722 


2.974 


1.343 


1.738 


1.697 


2.562 


2.315 


July - - 


3.697 


3.663 


3.006 


4.140 


4.959 


3.256 


2.303 


2.448 


1.800 


1.882 


3.115 


August 


3.665 


3.311 


2.435 


4.581 


5.089 


3.199 


2.746 


1.S07 


1.900 


2.347 


3.103 


September - 


3.281 


3.654 


2.289 


3.751 


4.874 


4.350 


1.617 


1.842 


1.550 


4.140 


3.135 


October - 


3.922 


3.724 


3.079 


4.151 


5.439 


4.143 


2.297 


2.092 


1.7S0 


4.741 


3.537 


November - 


3.360 


3.441 


2.634 


3.775 


4.785 


3.174 


1.904 


2.222 


1.720 


4.187 


3.120 


December - 


3.832 


3.288 


2.569 


3.955 


6.084 


3.142 


1.981 


1.735 


1.600 


2.397 


3.058 




36.140 


34.121 


27.664 


39.714 


53.994 


36.919 


21.331 


20.686 


18.649 


33.977 





1252. Frost, being derived from the atmosphere, naturally proceeds from the upper parts 
of bodies downwards, as the water and the earth ; so the longer a frost is continued, the 
thicker the ice becomes upon the water in ponds, and the deeper into the earth the ground 
is frozen. In about 16 or 17 days' frost, Boyle found it had penetrated 14 inches into 
the ground. At Moscow, in a hard season, the frost will penetrate two feet deep into 
the ground ; and Captain James found it penetrated 10 feet deep in Charlton island, and 
the water in the same island was frozen to the depth of six feet. Scheffer assures us, that 
in Sweden the frost pierces two cubits (a Swedish ell), into tlie earth, and turns what 
moisture is found there into a wliitish substance, like ice ; and standing water to three 
ells or more. The same author also mentions sudden cracks or rifts in the ice of the 
lakes of Sweden, nine or ten feet deep, and many leagues long ; the rupture being made 
with a noise not less loud than if many guns were discharged together. By such means 
however the fishes are furnished with air, so that they are rarely found dead. 

The history of frosts furnishes very extraordinary facts. The trees are often scorched and burnt up, as 
with the most excessive heat, in consequence of the separation of water from the air, which is therefore 
very drying. In the great frost in l683, the trunks of oak, ash, walnut, and other trees were miserably 
split and cleft, so that they might be seen through, and the cracks often attended with dreadful noises like 
the explosion of fire-arms. 

1253. Hail is generally defined as frozen rain, it differs from it in that the hailstones 
are not formed of single pieces of ice, but of many little spherules agglutinated together ; 
neither are those spherules all of the same consistence ; some of them being hard and 
solid, like perfect ice ; others soft, and mostly like snow hardened by a severe frost. 
Hailstone has a kind of core of this soft matter ; but more frequently the core is solid 
and hard, while the outside is formed of a softer matter. Hailstones assume various 
figures, being sometimes round, at other times pyramidal, crenated, angular, thin, and 
flat, and sometimes stellated with six radii, like the smaC crystals of snow. Natural 
historians furnish us with various accounts of surprising showers of hail in which the 
hailstones were of extraordinary magnitude. 

1254. Snow is formed by the freezing of the vapors in the atmosphere. It differs from 
hail and hoar frost, in being as it were crystallised, which they are not. As the flakes 
fall down through the atmosphere, they are continually joined by more of these radiated 
spicula, and they increase in bulk like the drops of rain or hailstones. The lightness of 
snow, although it is firm ice, is owing to the excess of its surface in comparison to the 
matter contained under it : as gold itself may be extended in surface till it will ride 
upon the least breath of air. The whiteness of snow is ovring to the small particles into 
which it is divided ; for ice when pounded, will become equally white. 

1255. Snow is of great use to the vegetable kingdom. Were we to judge from appearance 
only, we might imagine, that so far from being useful to the earth, the <;old humidity of 
snow would be detrimental to vegetation. But the experience of all ages asserts the con- 



Book II. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



261 



trary. Snow, particularly in those northern regions where the ground is covered with it 
for several months, fructifies the earth, by guarding the corn or other vegetables from 
the intenser cold of the air, and especially from the cold piercing winds. It has been 
a vulgar opinion, very generally received, that snow fertilises the land on which it falls 
more than rain, in consequence of the nitrous salts, which it is supposed to acquire 
by freezing. But it appears from the experiments of Margraaf, in the year 1731, that 
tlie chemical difference between rain and snow water, is exceedingly small ; that the 
latter contains a somewhat less proportion of earth than the former ; but neither of 
them contain either earth, or any kind of salt, in any quantity which can be sensibly 
efficacious in promoting vegetation. The peculiar agency of snow, as a fertiliser in 
preference to lain may be ascribed to its furnishing a covering to the roots of vegetables, 
by which they are guarded from the influence of the atmospherical cold, and the 
internal heat of the earth is prevented from escaping. The internal parts of the earth 
are heated uniformly to the fifty-eighth degree of Fahrenheit's thermometer. This degree 
of heat is greater than that in which the watery juices of vegetables freeze, and it is pro- 
pagated from the inward parts of the eai-th to the surface, on which the vegetables grow. 
The atmosphere, being variably heated by the action of the sun in different climates, and 
in the same climate at different seasons, communicates to the surface of the earth, and to 
some distance below it, the degree of heat or cold which prevails in itself. Pifferent ve- 
getables are able to preserve life under different degrees of cold, but all of them perish 
when the cold which reaches their roots is extreme. Providence has, therefore, in the 
coldest climates, provided a covering of snow for the roots of vegetables, by which they are 
protected from the influence of the atmospherical cold. The snow keeps in the internal 
heat of the earth, which surrounds the roots of veget9bles, and defends them from the cold 
of the atmosphere. 

1 256. Ice is water in the solid state, during which the temperature remains constant, 
being 32 degrees of the scale of Fahrenheit. Ice is considerably lighter than water, name- 
ly, about one eighth part ; and this increase of dimensions is acquired with prodigious 
force, sufficient to burst the strongest iron vessels, and even pieces of artillery. Congel- 
ation takes place much more suddenly than the opposite process of liquefaction ; and of 
course, the same quantity of heat must be more rapidly extricated in freezing, than it is 
absorbed in thawing ; the heat thus extricated being disposed to fly off* in all directions, 
and little of it being retained by the neighboring bodies, more heat is lost than is gained 
by the alternation : so that where ice has once been formed, its production is in this manner 
redoubled. 

1 257. The nnrthem ice extends about 9° from the pole ; the southern 1 8° or 20° ; in 
some parts even 30° ; and floating ice has occasionally been found in both hemispheres 
as far as 40"^ from the poles, and sometimes, as it has been said, even in latitude 41° or 
42°. Between 54° and 60° south latitude, the snow lies on the ground, at the sea-side, 
throughout the summer. The line of perpetual congelation is three miles above th« 
surface at tiie equator, where tlie mean heat is 84° ; at Teneriffe, in latitude 28°, two 
miles ; in the latitude of London, a little more than a mile ; and in latitude 80" north, 
only 1250 feet. At the pole, according to the analogy deduced by Kirwan, from a 
comparison of various observations, the mean temperature should be 31°. In London 
the mean temperature is 50*^ ; at Rome and at Montpelier, a little more than 60° ; in 
the island of Madeira, 70° ; and in Jamaica, 80°. 

1 258. Wind. Were it not for this agitation of the air, putrid effluvia arising from the 
habitations of man, and from vegetable substances, besides the exhalations from water, 
would soon render it unfit for respiration, and a general mortality would be the conse- 
quence. The prevailing winds of our own country, which were ascertained by order of 
the Royal Society of London, at London are, 

Winds. Days. Winds. Days. Winds. Days. 

South-west - 112 | West - - 53 1 South - - 18 

North-east - 68 South-east - 32 North - - 16 

North-west 50 | East - - 26 J 

The south wind blows more upon an average in each month of the year than any other, 
particularly in July and August ; the north-east prevails during January, March, April, 
May, and June, and is most unfrequent in February, July, September, and December ; 
the north-west occun-ing more frequently from November to March, and less so in 
September and October than in any other months. 
Near Glasgow, the average is stated as follows : •— 

Winds. Days. Winds. Days. 

South-west - - 174 I North-east - - 104 
North-west - - 40 | South-east - - 47 

In Ireland, the prevailing winds are the west and south-west. 

1259. The different degrees of motion of wind next excites our attention ; and it seems al* 

S3 



262 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



most superfluous to obserre^ tliat it varies in gradations from the gentlest zephyr, which 
plays upon the leaves of plants, greatly undulating them, to the furious tempest, calculated 
to inspire horror in the breast of the most callous. It is also a remarkable fact, that vio- 
lent currents of air pass along, as it w^ere, within a line, without sensibly agitating that 
beyond them. An instance of this kind occurred at Edinburgh, where the celebrated 
aeronaut Lunardi ascended in his balloon, which was conveyed with great velocity by 
the wind at tlie rate of 70 miles an hour, while a perfect calm existed in the city and, 
neighborhood. 

1260. Causes of wind. There are many circumstances attending the operations of the air, which we term 
wind, that serve for a basis for well-founded conjectures, and those, united to the result of daily observ- 
ation, render the explanation of its phenomena tolerably satisfactory. It must be clear to the most common 
capacity, that as the rays of the sun descend perpendicularly on the surface of the earth under the torrid 
zone, that part of it must receive a greater proportion of heat than those parts where they fall obliquely ; 
the heat thus acquired communicates to the air, which it rarefies, and causes to ascend, and the vacuum 
occasioned by this operation is immediately filled by the chill air from the north and south. The diurnal 
motion of the earth gradually lessens to the poles from the equator : at that point it moves at the rate of 
fifteen geographical miles in a minute : this motion is communicated to the atmosphere in the same de- 
gree ; therefore, if part of it was conveyed instantaneously from latitude 30°, it would not directly acquire 
the velocity of that at the equator ; consequently, the ridges of the earth must meet it, and give it the ap- 
pearance of an east wind ; tlie effect is similar upon the cold air proceeding from the north and south, and 
this similarity must be admitted to extend to each place particularly heated by the beams of the sun. The 
moon, being a large body situated comparatively near the earth, is known to affect the atmosphere in its 
revolutions by the pressure of that upon the sea, so as to cause the flux and reflux of it, which we term 
tides ; it cannot, therefore, be doubted, that some of the winds we experience are caused by her motion. 

1261. The 7-egiilar motion of the attnosphere, known by the name of land and sea breezes, may be accounted 
for upon the above principle : the heated rarefied land air rises, and its place is supplied by the chill damp 
air from the surface of the sea; that from the hills in the neighborhood, becoming cold and dense in the 
course of the night, descends and presses upon the comparatively lighter air over the sea, and hence the land 
breeze. Granting that the attraction of the moon, and the diurnal movement of the sun affects our atmo- 
sphere, there cannot be a doubt but a westward motion of the air must prevail within the boundaries of 
the trade-winds, the consequence of which is an easterly current on each side : from this, then, it proceeds 
that south-west winds are so frequent in the western parts of Europe, and over the Atlantic Ocean, 
Kirwan attributes our constant south-west winds, particularly during winter, to an opposite current 
prevailing between the coast of Malabar and the Moluccas at the same period : this, he adds, must be sup- 
plied from regions close to the pole, which must be recruited in its turn from the countries to the south of 
it, in tlie western parts of our hemisi)here. 

1262. The variable winds cannot be so readily accounted for ; yet it is evident, that though they seem the 
effect of capricious causes, they depend upon a regular system, arranged by the great Author of nature. 
That accurate and successful observer of part of his works, the celebrated Franklin, discovered in 1740, that 
winds originate at the precise points towards which they blow. This philosopher had hoped to observe an 
eclipse of the moon at Philadelphia, but was prevented by a north-east storm, that commenced at seven in 
£he evening. This he afterwards found did not occur at Boston till eleven ; and upon enquiry, he had 
reason to suppose, it passed to the north-east at the rate of about 100 miles an hour. The manner in which 
he accounts for this retrogade proceeding is so satisfactory, tliat we shall give it in his own words, particularly 
as his assertions are supported by recent observations, both in America and Scotland. He argued thus : — 
" I suppose a long canal of water, stopped at the end by a gate. The water is at rest till the gate is opened; 
then it begins to move out through the gate, and the water next the gate is put in motion and moves on 
towards the gate ; and so on successively, till the water at the head of the canal is in motion, which it is 
last of all. In this case all the water moves indeed towards the gate ; but the successive times of beginning 
the motion are in the contrarj- way, viz. from the gate back to the head of the canal. Thus to produce a 
north-east storm, I suppose some great rarefaction of the air in or near the Gulph of Mexico ; the air rising 
thence has its place supplied by the next more northern, cooler, and therefore denser and heavier air; a 
successive current is formed, to which our coast and inland mountains give a north-east direction." Ac- 
cording to the observations made by Captain Cook, the north-east winds prevail in the Northern Pacific 
Ocean during the same spring months they do with us, from which facts it appears the cold air from Ame- 
rica and the north of Europe flows at that season into the Pacific and Atlantic Oceans. 

1263. Other descriptions of winds may arise from a variety of causes. As the atmosphere 
has been ascertained to be composed of air, vapor, and carbonic acid and water, it is well 
known these frequently change their aerial form, and combine with different substances, 
and the reverse ; consequently partial vsrinds and accumulations must continually occur, 
which occasion winds of different degrees of violence, continuance, and direction. 

1264. T/ie priticipal electrical phenomena of the atmospliere are thunder and lightning. 

1265. Thunder is the noise occasioned by the explosion of a flash of lightning passing 
through tlie air : or it is that noise which is excited by a sudden explosion of electrical 
clouds, which are therefore called thunder-clouds. 

The rattling, in the noise of thunder, which makes it seem as if it passed through arches, is probably 
owing to the sound being excited among clouds hanging over one anothCT, and the agitated air passing ir- 
regularly between them. 

The explosion, if high in the air and remote from us, will do no mischief; but when near, it may, and 
has, in a thousand instances, destroyed trees, animals, &c. This proximity, or small distance, may be esti- 
mated nearly by the interval of time between seeing the flash of lightning and hearing the report of the 
thunder, estimating the distance after the rate of 1142 feet for a second of time, or 3| seconds to the mile. 
Dr. Wallis observes, that commonly the difference between the two is about seven seconds, which at tlie 
rate above-mentioned, gives the distance almost two miles. But sometimes it comes in a second or two, 
which argues the explosion very near to us, and even among us. And in such cases, the Doctor assures 
us, he has sometimes foretold the mischiefs that happened. 

Season of thunder. Although in this country thunder may happen at any time of the year, yet the 
months of July and August are those in which it may almost certainly be expected. Its devastation is of 
very uncertain continuance ; sometimes only a few peals will be heard at any particular place during the 
whole season ; at other times the storm will return at the interval of three or four days, for a month, six 
weeks, or even longer ; not that we have violent thunder in this country directly vertical in any one place 
so frequently in any year, but in many seasons it will be percej^tible that thunder-clouds are formed in the 
neighbourhood, even at these short intervals. Hence it appears, that during this particular period, there 
must be some natural cause operating for the production of this phenomenon, which does not take place at 
ether times. This cannot bo the mere heat of the weatiicr, for we have often a long tract erf" hot vreether 



Book II. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



without any thunder ; and besides, though not common, thunder is sometimes heard in the winter also. 
As therefore the heat of the weather is common to the whole summer, whether there be thunder or not, 
we must look for the causes of it in those phenomena, whatever they are, which are peculiar to the months 
of July, August, and the beginning of September. Now it is generally observed, that from the month of 
April, an east, or south-east wind generally takes place, and continues with little interruption till towards 
the end of June. At that time, sometimes sooner and sometimes later, a westerly wind takes place ; but 
as the causes producing the east wind are not removed, the latter opposes the westAvind with its whole 
force. At the place of meeting, there is naturally a most vehement pressure of the atmo.sphere, and.friction 
of its parts against one another ; a calm ensues, and the vapors brought by both winds begin to collect 
and form dark clouds, which can have little motion either way, because they are pressed almost equally on 
all sides. For the most part, however, the west wind prevails, and what little motion the clouds have is 
towards the east : whence, the common remark in this country, that " thunder-clouds move against the 
wind." But this is by no means universally true : for if the west wind happens to be excited by any tem- 
porary cause before its natural period when it should take place, the cast wind will very frequently get the 
better of it ; and the clouds, even although thunder is produced, will mov6 westward. Yet in either 
case the motion is so slow, that the most superficial observers cannot help taking notice of a considerable 
resistance in the atmosphere. 

126). Thunderbolts. When lightning acts with extraordinary violence, and breaks or shatters any 
thing it is called a thunderbolt, which the vulgar, to fit it for such efi'ects, suppose to be a hard body, 
and even a stone. But that we need not have recourse to a hard solid body to account for the effects 
commculy attributed to the thunderbolt, will be evident to any one, who considers those of gunpowder, 
and the several chemical fulminating powders, but more especially the astoiiishin^ powers of elasticity, 
when only colfected and employed by human art, and much more when directed and exercised in the course 
of nature. When we consider the known effects of electrical explosions, and those produced by lightning, 
we shall be at no loss to account for the extraordinary operations vulgarly ascribed to thunderbolts. As 
stones and bricks struck by ligfitning are often found in a vitrified state, we may reasonably suppose, 
with Beccaria, that some stones in the earth, having been struck in this manner, gave occasion to the 
vulgar opinion of the thunderbolt. 

1267. Tkunder-clouds are those clouds which are in a state fit for producing lightning and thunder. The 
fia:st appearance of a thunder-storm, which usually happens when there is little or no wind, is one dense 
cloud, or more, increasing very fast in si;5e, and rising into the higher regions of the air. The lower sur- 
face is black, and nearly level ; but the upper finely arched, and well defined. Many of these clouds often 
seem piled upon one another, all arched in the same manner ; but they are continually uniting, swell- 
ing and extending their arches. At the time of the rising of this cloud, the atmosphere is commonly full of 
a great many separate clouds, that are motionless, and of odd whimsical shapes ; all these, upon tlie appear- 
ance of the thunder-cloud, draw towards it, and become more uniform in their shapes as they approach ; 
till, coming very near the thunder-cloud, their limbs mutually stretch towards one another, and they 
immediately coalesce into one uniform mass. Sometimes the thunder-cloud will swell, and increase 
very fast, without the -conjunction of any adscititious clouds ; the vapors in the atmosphere forming 
themselves into clouds whenever it passes. Some of the adscititious clouds appear like white fringes, 
at the skirts of the thunder-cloud, or under the body of it ; but they keep continually growing 
darker and darker, as they approach to unite with it. When the thunder-cloud is grown to a great size, 
its lower surface is often ragged, particular parts being detached towai-ds the earth, but still connected 
with the rest. Sometimes the lower surface swells into various large protuberances, bending uniformly 
downward; and sometimes one whole side of the cloud will have an inchnation to the earth, and the ex. 
tremity of it nearly touch the ground. When the eye is under the thunder-cloud, after it is grown large 
and well-formed, it is seen to sink lower, and to darken prodigiously ; at the same time that a number of 
small adscititious clouds (the origin of which can never be perceived) are seen in a rapid motion, driving 
about in very uncertain directions under it. While these clouds are agitated with the most rapid motions, 
the rain commonly falls in the greatest plenty ; and if the agitation be exceedingly great, it commonly 
hails. 

1268. Lightning. While the thunder-cloud is swelling, and extending its branches 
over a large tract of country, the lightning is seen to dart from one part of it to another, 
and often to illuminate its whole mass. When the cloud has acquired a sufficient 
extent, the lightning strikes between the cloud and the earth, in two opposite places ; the 
path of the lightning lying through the whole body of the cloud and its branches. The 
longer this lightning continues, the less dense does the cloud become, and the less dark 
its appearance ; till at length it breaks in different places, and shows a clear sky. Those 
thunder-clouds are sometimes in a positive as well as a negative state of electricity. The 
electricity continues longer of the same kind, in proportion as the thunder-cloud is sim- 
ple and uniform in its direction ; but when the lightning changes its place, there com- 
monly happens a change in the electricity of the apparatus over which the clouds passed. 
It changes suddenly after a very violent flash of lightning ; but gradually when the 
lightning is moderate, and the progress of the thunder-cloud slow. 

1269. Lightning is an electrical explosion or phenomenon. Flashes of lightning are usually seen crooked 
and waving in the air. They strike the highest and most pointed objects in preference to others, as hills, 
trees, spires, masts of ships, &c. ; so all pointed conductors receive and throw off the electric fluid more 
readily than those that are terminated by flat surfaces. Lightning is observed to take and follow the 
readiest and best conductor ; and the same is the case with electricity in the discharge of the Leyden 
phial ; from whence it is inferred, that in a thunder-storm it would be safer to have one's clothes wet than 
dry. Lightning burns, dissolves metals, rends some bodies, sometimes strikes persons blind, destroys ani- 
mal life, deprives magnets of their virtue, or reverses their poles ; and all these are well-known properties 
of electricity. 

1270. With regard to places of safety in times of thunder and lightning. Dr. Franklin's advice is to sit in 
the middle of a room, provided it be not under a metal lustre suspended by a chain, sitting on one chair, 
and laying the feet on another. It is still better, he says, to bring two or three mattresses or beds into the 
middle of the room, and folding them double, to place the chairs upon them ; for as they are not so good 
conductors as the walls the lightning will not be so likely to pass through them. But the safest place of all 
is in a hammock hung by silken cords, at an equal distance from all the sides of the room. Dr. Priestley 
observes, that the place of most perfect safety must be the cellar, and especially the middle of it ; for when 
a person is lower than the surface of the earth, the lightning must strike it before it can possibly reach him. 
In the fields, the place of safety is within a few yards of a tree, but not quite near it. Beccaria cautions 
persons not always to trust too much to the neighborhood of a higher or better conductor than their own 
body, since he has repeatedly found that the lightning by no means descends in one undivided track, but 
that bodies of various kinds conduct their share of it at the same time, in proportion to their quantity and 
conducting power. 



2C4 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11, 



Sect. II. Of the Means of i^rognosticatiiig the Weather. 

1271. Tlie study of atmospherical changes has, in all ages, been more or less attended to 
by men engaged in the culture of vegetables, or the pasturage of animals ; and we, in 
this country, are surprised at the degree of perfection to which the ancients attained in 
this knowledge. But it ought to be- recollected, that the study of the weather in the 
countries occupied by the ancients, as Egypt, Greece, Italy, and the continent of Europe, 
is a very different thing from its study in an island situated like ours. It is easy to foretel 
weather in countries where months pass away without rain or clouds, and where some 
weeks together, at stated periods, are as certainly seasons of rain or snow. It may be as- 
serted with truth, that there is a greater variety of weather in London in one week, than 
in Rome, Moscow, or Petersburg, in three months. It is not therefore entirely a proof 
of our degeneracy, or the influence of our artificial mode of living, that we cannot predict 
the weather with such certainty as the ancients ; but a circumstance rather to be accounted 
for from the peculiarities of our situation. 

1272. A variable climate, such as ours, admits of being studied, both generally and lo- 
cally ; but it is a study which requires habits of observation and reflection like all other 
studies ; and to be brought to any useful degree of perfection must be attended to, not as 
it commonly is, as a thing by chance, and which every body knows, or is fit for, but as a 
serious undertaking. The weather may be foretold from natural data, artificial data, 
and from precedent. 

1273. The natural data for this study are, 1. The vegetable kingdom ; many plants 
shutting and opening their flowers, contracting or expanding their parts, &c. on ap- 
proaching changes in the humidity or temperature of the atmosphere ; 2. The animal 
kingdom ; most of which, that are familiar to us, exhibiting signs on approaching 
changes, of wliich those by cattle and sheep are more especially remarkable ; and hence 
shepherds are generally, of all others, the most correct in tlieir estimate of weather ; 3. Tho 
mineral kingdom ; stones, earths, metals, salts, and water of particular sorts, often 
showing indications of approaching changes ; 4. Appearances of the atmosphere, the 
moon, the general character of seasons, &c. Tlie characters of clouds, the prevalence of 
particular winds, and other signs are very^ commonly attended to. 

1 274. The iiifiuence of the moon on the weather has, in all ages, been believed by the 
generality of mankind : the same opinion was embraced by the ancient philosophers ; and 
several eminent philosophers of later times have thought the opinion not unworthy of 
notice. Although the moon only acts (as far at least as we can ascertain) on the 
waters of the ocean by producing tides, it is nevertheless highly probable, according to 
the observations of Lambert, Toaldo, and Cotte, that in consequence of tlie lunar in- 
fluence, great variations do take place in the atmosphere, and consequently in the wea- 
ther. The following principles will show the grounds and reasons for their embracing 
the received notions on this interesting topic : — 

There are ten situations in the yiwon's orbit -Rhcn she rou?t particularly exert her infiaence on the at- 
mosphere ; and when, consequently, changes of the weather most readily take place. These are, — 

1. The «<nu, and 2. the full moon, when she exerts her influence in conjunction with, or in opposition 
to the sun. 

S. and 4. The quadratures, or those aspects of the moon when she is 90° distant from the sun ; or when 
she is in the raiiidle point of her orbit, between the points of conjunction and opposition, namely, in the 
first and third quarters. 

5. The perigee, and, 6. The apogee, or those points of the moon's orbit, in which she is at the least and 
greatest distance from the earth. 

7. 8. The two passages of the moon over the equator, one of which Toaldo calls, 7. The moon's ascend- 
ing, and the other, 8. The moon's descending equinox, or the two lunistices, as De la La.ide terms them. 

9. The boreal lunistice, when the moon approaches as near as she can in each lunation, (or period be- 
tween one nev/ moon and another,) to our zenith (that point in the horizon which is directly over our 
heads). 

10. The austral lunistice, when she is at the greatest distance from our zenith ; for the action of the 
moon varies greatly according to her obliquity. With these ten points Toaido compared a table of forty- 
eight years' observations ; the result is, that the probabilities, that the weather will change at a certain 
period of the moon are in the following proportions : New moon, 6 to 1. First quarter, 5 to 2. Full 
inoon, 5 to 2. Last quarter, 5 to 4. Perigee, 7 to 1. Apogee, 4 to 1. Ascending equino^, 13 to 4, 
Northern lunistice, 11 to 4. Descending equinox, 11 to 4. Southern lunistice, 3 to 1. 

1275. That the neiv moon ivill bring with it a change of weather is in the doctrine of chances as 6 to 1. 
Each situation of the moon alters tliat state of the atmosphere which has been occasioned by the prece- 
ding one : and it seldom happens that any change in the weather takes place without a change in the lunar 
situations. These situations are combiiied, on account of the inequality of their revolutions, and the 
greatest effect is produced bv the union of the syzigies, or the conjunction and opposition of a planet with 
the sun, with the apsides, of points in the orbits' of planets, in which they are at the greatest and least dis- 
tanco from the sun or earth. The proportions of their powers to produce variations are as follows : New 
moon coinciding with the perigee, 33 to 1. Ditto, with the apogee, 7 to 1. Full moon coinciding with the 
perigee, 10 to 1. Ditto, with the apogee, 8 to 1. The combination of these situations generally occasions 
storms and tempests ; and this perturbing power will always have the greater effect, the nearer these com- 
bined situations are to the moon's passage over the equator, particularly in the months of March and 
September. At the new and full moons, in the months of March and September, and even at the solstices, 
especially the winter solstice, the atmosphere assumes a certain character, by which it is distinguished for 
three, and sometimes six months. The new moons which produce no change in the weather, are those 
that happen at a distance from the apsides. As it is perfectly true that each situation of -the moon alters 
that state of the atmosphere which has been produced by another, it is, however, observed that many situ- 
ations of the moon are favorable to good and others to bad weather. 



Book II. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



265 



' 1276. The situations of the moon favorable to bad weather are the perigee, new and full moon, passage of 
tfte equator, and the northern lunistice. Those belonging to the former are, the apogee, quadratures, 
and the southern lunistice. Changes of the weather seldom take place on the very days of the moon's 
situations, but either precede or follow them. It has been found by observation, that the changes 
affocted by the lunar situations in the six winter months precede, and in the six summer months follow 
them. 

1277. The octants. Besides the lunar situations to which the above observations refer, attention must be 
paid also to the fourth day before new and full moon, which days are called the octants. At these times the 
weather is inclined to changes ; and it may be easily seen, that these will follow at the next lunar 
situation. Virgil calls this fourth day a very sure prophet. If on that day the horns of the moon are 
clear and well defined, good weather may be expected ; but if they are dull, and not clearly marked on the 
edges, it is a sign that bad weather will ensue. When the weather remains unchanged on the fourth, 
fifth, and sixth day of the moon, we may conjecture that it will continue so till full moon, eyep sometimes 
till the next new moon ; and in that case, the lunar situations have only a very weak effect. Many 
observers of nature have also remarked, that the approach of the lunar situations is somewhat critical for 
tlie sick. According to Dr. Herschel, the nearer the time of the moon's entrance, at full, change, 
or quarters, is to midnight (that is within two hours before and after midnight), the more fair the weather 
is in summer, but the nearer to noon the less fair. Also, the moon's entrance, at full, change, or 
quarters, during six of the afternoon hours, viz. from four to ten, may be followed by fair weather ; but 
this is mostly dependent on the wind. The same entrance during all the hours after midnight, except the 
two first, is unfavorable to fair weather j the like, nearly, may be observed in winter. 

1278. The artificial data are the barometer, hygrometer, rain-gauge, and ther- 
mometer. 

1279. By means of the barometer, Taylor observes, we are enabled to regain, in some 
degree at least, that foreknowledge of the weather, which the ancients unquestionably 
did possess ; though we know not the data on which they founded their conclusions. 
We shall therefore annex such rules, as have hitherto been found most useful in ascer- 
taining the changes of the weather, by means of the barometer. 

1280. The rising of the mercurii/ presages, in general, fair weather; and its falling 
foul weather, as rain, snow, high winds, and storms. 

The sudden falling of the mercury foretels thunder, in very hot weather, especially if the wind is 
south. 

The rising in winter indicates frost ; and in frosty weather, if the mercury falls three or four divisions, 
there will follow a thavv^ : but if it rises in a continued frost, snow may be expected. 

When foul weather happens soon after the falling of the mercury, it will not be of long duration ; nor are 
we to expect a continuance of fair weather, when it soon succeeds the rising of the quicksilver. 

If, in foul weather, the mercury rises considerably, and continues rising for two or three days before the 
foul weather is over, a continuance of fair weather may be expected to follow. 

In fair weather, ivhen the mercury falls much and low, and continues falling for two or three days before 
rain comes, much wet must be expected, and probably high winds. 

The unsettled motion of the mercury indicates changeable weather. 

1281. Respecting the ivords engraved on the register-plate of the barometer, it maybe 
observed, that they cannot be strictly relied upon to correspond exactly with the state of 
the weather ; though it will in general agree with them as to the mercury rising and 
falling. The words deserve to be particularly noticed when the mercury removes from 
* changeable' upwards ; as those on the lower part should be adverted to, when the mer- 
cury falls from ' changeable' downwards. In other cases, they are of no use : for, as its 
rising in any part forebodes a tendency to fair, and its falling to foul weather, it follows 
that, though it descend in the tube from settled to fair, it may nevertheless be attended 
with a little rain ; and when it rises from the words ' much rain' to * rain' it shows only 
an inclination to become fair, though the wet weather may still continue in a less consi- 
derable degree than it was when the mercury began to rise. But if the mercury, after 
having fallen to 'much rain,' should ascend to 'changeable,' it foretels fair weather, 
though of a shorter continuance than if the mercury had risen still higher ; and so, on 
the contrary, if the mercury stood at ' fair' and descends to ' changeable,* it announces 
foul weather, though not of so long continuance, as if it had fallen lower. 

1282. Concavity of the surface of the mercury. Persons who have occasion to travel 
much in the winter, and who are doubtful whether it will rain or not, may easily ascer- 
tain this point by the following observation : — A few hours before he departs, let the 
traveller notice the mercury in the upper part of the tube of the barometer ; if 
rain is about to fall, it will be indented, or concave ; if otherwise, convex or pro- 
tuberant. 

1283. Barometer in spring. Towards the end of March, or more generally in the be- 
ginning of April, the barometer sinks very low, vnth bad weather ; after which, it seldom 
falls lower than 29 degrees 5 minutes till the latter end of September or October, when 
the quicksilver falls again low, with stormy winds, for then the winter constitution of the 
air takes place. From October to April, the great falls of the barometer are from 29 
degrees 5 minutes to 28 degrees 5 minutes, and sometimes lower ; whereas during the 
summer constitution of the air, the quicksilver seldom falls lower than 29 degrees 5 
minutes. It therefore follows that a fall of one tenth of an inch, during the summer, 
is as sure an indication of rain, as a fall of between two and three tenths is in the 
winter. 

1284. Barometer relative to situation. It must, however, be observed, that these 
heights of the barometer hold only in places nearly on a level with the sea ; for expe- 



266 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



riments hare taugljt us, that for every eighty feet of nearly perpendicular height that the 
barometer is placed above the level of the sea, the quicksilver sinks one tenth of an inch : 
observations alone, therefore, must determine the heights of the quicksilver, which in each 
place denotes either fair or foul weather. 

1285. The hygrometer is of various sorts, but cord, fiddle-string, and most of the sub- 
stances commonly used become sensibly less and less accurate, so as at length not to 
undergo any visible alteration from the different states of the air, in regard to dryness or 
moisture. 

A sjwiige makes a good hi/grometer on this account, as being less liable to be changed 
by use than cord. To prepare the sponge, first wash it in water, and when dry, wash it 
again in water wherein sal ammoniac or salt of tartar has been dissolved ; and let it dry 
again. Now, if the air becomes moist, the sponge will grow heavier ; and if dry, it will 
become lighter. 

Oil of vitriol is found to grow sensibly lighter or heavier in proportion to the lesser or 
greater quantity of moisture it imbibes from the air. The alteration is so great, that it 
has been known to change its weight from three drams to nine. The other acid oils, or, 
as they are usually called, spirits, or oil of tartar, per deliqnium, may be substituted for 
the oil of vitriol. 

Steel-yard hygrometer. In order to make a hygrometer with those bodies which 
acquire or lose weight in the air, place such a substance in a scale on the end of a 
steel-yard, with a counterpoise which shall keep it in equilibrio in fair weather; the 
other end of the steel-yard, rising or falling, and pointing to a graduated index, will 
show the changes. 

Line and plummet. If a line be made of good well dried whipcord, and a plummet 
be fixed to the end of it, and the whole be hung against a wainscot, and a line be 
drawn under it, exactly where the plummet reaches, in very moderate weather it will 
be found to rise above such line, and to sink below it when the weather is likely to be- 
come fair. 

The whalebone hygrometer, originally invented by De Luc, is esteemed one of the best 
now in use. 

128G. The rain-gauge, pluviometer, or hyetometer is a machine for measuring the quan- 
tity of rain that falls. 

A hollow cylinder forms one of the best -constructed rain gauges : it has 
within it a cork ball attached to a wooden stem [Jig. 76.), which passes through 
a small opening at the top, on which is placed a large funnel. When this in- 
strument is placed in the open air in a free place, the rain that falls within the 
circumference of the funnel will run down into the tube and cause the cork 
to float ; and the quantity of water in the tube may be seen by the height to 
which the stem of the float is raised. The stem of the float is so graduated, 
as to show by its divisions the number of perpendicular inches of water which 
fell on the surface of the earth since the last observation. After every observ- 
ation the cylinder must be emptied. 

A copper funnel forms another very simple rain-gauge : the area of the opening must 
be exactly ten square inches. Let this funnel be fixed in a bottle, and the quantity of 
rain caught is ascertained by multiplying the weight in ounces by '173, which gives the 
depth in inches and parts of an inch. 

In firing these gauges, care must be taken that the rain may have free access to 
them ; hence the tops of bviildings are usually the best places, though some 
conceive that the nearer the rain-gauge is placed to the ground the more rain it will 
collect. 

In order to compare the quantities of rain collected in pluviometers at different places, 
the instruments should be fixed at the same heights above the ground in all such places ; 
because, at different heights, tlie quantities are always different, even at the same 
place. 

1287. Thermometer. As the weight of the atmosphere is measured by the barometer, so 
the thermometer shows the variations in the temperature of the weather ; for every change 
of the weather is attended with a change in the temperature of the air, which a thermo- 
meter placed in the open air w^ill point out, sometimes before any alteration is perceived 
in the barometer. 

The scales of different thermometers are as follow. In Fahrenheit's the freezing point is 32 degrees, 
and the boiling point 212 degrees. In Reaumur's the freezing point is 0, and the boiling point 80 degrees. 
In the centigrade thermometer, which is generally used in France, and is the same as that of Celsius, 
which is the thermometer of Sweden, the freezing point is 0, and the boiling point 100 degrees. As a rule 
for comparing or reducing these scales, it may be stated, that 1 degree of Reaumur's scale contains 2^ degrees 
of Fahrenheit, and to convert the degrees of the one to the other, the rule is to multiply by 9, divide by 
34, and add 32. One degree of the centigrade scale is equal to one degree and eight-tenths of Fahrenheit; 
and the rule here is to multiply by 9, divide by 5, and add 32. Any of these thermometers 'may be proved 
by immersing it in pounded ice for the freezing point, and in boiling water for the boiling point, and if 
the space between these points is equally divided, the thermometer is correct. 



Book J I. 



OF THE ATMOSPHERE. 



1288. The shidy of the xueather from jrrecedent affords useful hints as to the character of 
approaching seasons. From observing the general character of seasons for a long period, 
certain general results may be deduced. On this principle, Kirwan, on comparing 
a number of observations taken in England from 1677 {Trayis. Ir. Acad. v. 20.) to 
1789, a period of 112 years, found : 

That when there has been no storm before or after the vernal equinox, the ensuing summer is generally 
dry, at least five times in six. 

That when a storm happens from an easterly point, either on the 19th, 20th, or 21st of May, the suc- 
ceeding summer is generally dry, at least four times in five. 

That when a storm arises on the '■25th, 26th, or Tith qf March, and not before in any point, the succeed- 
ing summer is generally dry, four times in five. 

If there be a storm at S. W. or W. S. IV. on the 19th, 20th, 21st, or 22d of March, the succeeding sum- 
mer is generally luet, five times in six. 

In this country winters and springs, if di-y, are tnost commonly cold; if 7noist, warm : on the contrary, 
dry summers and autumns are usually hot, and moist summers cold ; so that, if we know the moistness 
or dr^Tiess of a season, we can form a tolerably accurate j-udgment of its temperature. In this country 
also, it generally rains less in March than in November, in the proportion at a medium of 7 to 12. It 
generally rains less in April than October, in the proportion of 1 to 2, nearly at a medium. It generally 
rains less in May than September ; the chances that it does so, are, at least, 4 to 3 ; but, when it rains 
plentifully in May, as 18 inches or more, it generally rains but little in September ; and when it rains one 
inch, or less, in May, it rains plentifully in September. 

1289. The probabilities of particular seasons being foUoived by others, has been calculated 
by Kirvi'an, and although his rules chiefly relate to the climate of Ireland, yet as there 
exists but little difference between that island and Great Britain /in the general appear- 
ance of the seasons, we shall mention some of his conclusions. 

In forty-one years there 'were six wet springs, 22 dry, and 13 variable ; 20 wet summers, 16 dry, and 
5 variable ; 11 wet autumns, 11 dry, and 19 variable. 

A season is accounted wet, when it contains two wet months. In general, the quantity of rain, which 
falls in dry seasons, is less than five inches, in wet seasons more ; variable seasons are those, in which 
there falls between 30 lbs. and 36 lbs., a lb. being equal to '157039 of an inch. 

January is the coldest month in every latitude ; and July is the warmest month in all latitudes 
above 48 degrees : in lower latitudes, August is generally the warmest. The difference between tho 
hottest and coldest months increases in proportion to the distance from the equator. Every habitable 
latitude enjoys a mean heat of 60 degrees for at least two months j which heat is necessary for the pro- 
duction of com. 

Sect. III. Of the Climate of Britain. 

1290. The climate of the British isles, relatively to others in the same latitude, is tem- 
perate, humid, and variable. The moderation of its temperature and its humidity are 
owing to our being surrounded by water, which being less affected by the sun than the 
earth, imbibes less heat in summer, and from its fluidity is less easily cooled in winter. 
As tlie sea on our coasts never freezes, its temperature must always be above 33° or 
34^^ ; and hence, when air from the polar regions at a much lower temperature passes 
over it, that air must be in some degree heated by the radiation of the vvater. On the 
other hand, in summer, the warm currents of air from the south, necessarily give out 
part of their heat in passing over a surface so much lower in temperature. The vari- 
able nature of our climate is chiefly owing to the unequal breadths of watery surface 
which surround us ; on one side, a channel of a few leagues in breadth ; on the other, the 
Atlantic ocean. 

1291. The British climate varies materially ivithin itself: some districts are dry, as the 
east ; others moist, as the west coast ; in the northern extremity, dry, cold, and windy ; 
in the south, warm and moist. Even in moist districts some spots are excessively dry, 
as part of Wigtonshire, from the influence of the Isle of Man, in warding off the watery 
clouds of the Atlantic ; and, in dry districts, some spots are moist, from the influence of 
high mountains in attracting and condensing clouds charged with watery vapor. 

1292. The deterioration of the British climate is an idea entertained by some ; but whether 
in regard to general regularity, temperature, moisture, or wind, the alleged changes are 
unsupported by satisfactory proofs. It is not improbable but the humidity of our climate, 
as Williams alleges [Climate of Britain, See. 1816), has of late years been increased by 
the increase of evaporating surface, produced by the multiplicity of hedges and plant- 
ations ; a surface covered with leaves being found to evaporate considerably more than a 
naked surface. If the humidity of the climate was greater before the drainage of mo- 
rasses and the eradication of forests for agricultural purposes, a comparative return to 
the same state by artificial planting and irrigation, must have a tendency to produce 
the same results. However, it will be long before the irrigation of lands is carried to 
such a degree as to produce the insalubrious effects of un-lrained morasses ; and as to 
our woods and hedges, we must console ourselves with the beauty and the shelter which 
they produce, for the increase of vapor supposed to proceed from them. 



268 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



PAax XL 



BOOK III. 

MECHANICAL AGENTS EMPLOYED IN GARDENING. 

1293. Having considered the nature of vegetables, and the nature of the materials by 
which their culture or improvement is effected by art, the next step is to consider the 
means by which art is applied in the pj'actice of cultivation. In general it may be ob- 
served, that every change effected in the circumstances of materials, either consists in, 
or must be preceded by, a mechanical change in their position. To effect mechanical 
changes, the fundamental engine is the human frame; but its agency is essentially in- 
creased by the use of certain implements, utensils, machines, and buildings. The 
primary implements of gardening, as an art of culture, would necessarily be confined to 
a few tools for stirring the ground, and one or two instruments for pruning trees or 
gathering crops. But in the present state of the art, both the number and kind of agents 
are greatly extended and diversified. There are tools, instruments, and machines for 
culture, as the spade, knife, and water-engine ; for beautifying scenery, as the broom, 
scythe, and roller ; utensils for portable habitations of plants, or conveying materials, as 
pots and baskets ; structures for culture, as glass frames, hot-houses, and awnings ; and 
buildings for use, convenience, or decoration, as tool-houses, arbors, and obelisks. The 
whole may be included under implements, structures, and edifices, as in the following 
Table: — 



Implements 



rLever. 

Pick. 
I Spade. 
'I Shovel. 

Fork. 

Dibber. 
LPlanter's hack. 



Planter's trowel. 

Pleinter's pick-ax& 

Garden-trowel. 

Transplanter. 

Hoe. 

Rake. 



Turf-raser. 

Turf- beetle. 
Turf-scraper. 
AVeeder. 
Besom. 

I mplement-cleaner. 



("Of operation 



Of direction - 
Of designation 



TGarden-knife. 
1 Garden-chisel. 
\ Pruning-bill. 
I Forest-axe. 
LPruning-sav. 



ATerruncator. 

Shears. 

Scythe. 

Scarifiers. 

Barking-irons. 



Hammer. 
Pincers. 
Fruit-gatherers. 
Climbing-spurs. 



f Garden-line. 
< Ground-measure. 
(^Timber-measure. 



Ground 
Boming-piece. 



Staff. 

Straight-edge. 
Stake. 



f Notch numbering-stick. 
\ Written number-stick. 



rOf preparation f Screens, 
and dqiortation \ Sieves. 



Basket. 
Packing-case. 



fPots. 

1 A\'ater-saucers. 



I Of protection or I Cover, 
modification IShade^ 



Watering-pot. 
Sj-ringe. 



^ modification 
l_For vermin • 



Birdtrap-cage. 



AV'asp and fly trap. 



( Barrow. 

S A\'atering enmne. 
(.Roller. 



Tree-transpkmter. 
Seed-separater. 



Engines of destruction. Engines of alarm or snjires Living 
Registering thermometer Alarum thermometer. Regulating thermometer. 



1 For vermin 
\_Foi regulation 

, y Temporary coping. 

rOf adaptation S Horizon ta! shelter. 

<- Netting screen. 



Garden-hurdle. 
Moveable edging. 



Protecting bag. 
Shoe-scraper. 



Of manufacture | Canvass. 

LGauiie. 



Of preparatio 



■\\'all-tree lists. 



XProDs. 
t-Tie^. 



Various articles. 



Portable or moveable 


/The flower-stage. 

L Opaque covering-frame. 


Glazed frame or sash. 
Glass ca-se. 


Hotbed-fiame. 


Partly moveable - - - 


Pit. 


Adapted frame- 








"Wall. 


Espalier rail. 




Permanait • 




Hot-house. 


Mushroom-house. 


Cold house. 


"Economical 




f Head gardener's dwelling- 
) house. 

T Official or administrative 
( apartment. 


Peed-room. 
Fruit-room. 
Under-gardener's lodgi 


Entrance-lodge and gate. 
Building for raising water 
e. Reservoir. 


Anomalous 




Ice-house. 


Apiary. 


Aviary. 




TJsefiil - - 


f Cottage. 
1 Bridge. 


Boat. 
Sepulchre. 


Gate. 
Fence. 


Decorative - 


Convenient 


rProspect-tower. 

Temple. 
J Porch. 
i Portico. 
1 Arbor. 
[Cave. 


Cavern. 
Grotto. 
Roofed seat. 
Exiwsed seat. 
Swing. 


Waterfall. 
Cascade. 
Jet or spout. 
Sun-dial. 
Vane. 




Characteristic 


TRocks. 
< Ruins. 
(.Antiquities. 


Rarities. 

Monuments. 

Statues. 


A'cgetable sciUptures, 

Inscriptions. 

Eye traps. 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



269 



Chap. I. 

Implements of Gardening. 

1294. The usual mechanical agents employed in garden-culture, may be classed as fol- 
lows : — 1. Tools, or simple implements for performing operations on the soil, and other 
dead or mineral matters; 2. Instrume}its for performing operations on plants, or on living 
bodies, as insects and vermin ; 3. Utensils for habitations of plants, or the deportation 
or retention of either dead or living materials ; 4. Machines, or compound implements 
for any of the above or other purposes ; and, 5. Articles adapted, manufactured, or pre- 
pared, so as to sei"ve various useful purposes. 

Sect. I. Tools, 

1295. The common character of tools is, that they are adapted for labor which re- 
quires more force than skill ; they are generally large, and require tlie use of both hands 
and the muscular action of the Avhole frame, often aided by its gravity. Tools consist 
of two parts, the head, blade or acting part ; and the handle or lever, by wliich the power 
is communicated, and the tool put in action. As almost all tools operate by effecting a 
mechanical separation between the parts of bodies, they generally act on the principle of 
the wedge and lever, and consequently tlie wedge-shape ought to enter, more or less, 
into the shape of the head or blade of most of them, and the lever or handle ought to be 
of some length. Where the handle is intended to be grasped and held firm, its form 
may be adapted for that end, as in the upper termination of the handle of tlie shovel or 
the spade ; but where the human hand is to slide along the handle, then it should be 
perfectly cylindrical, as producing least friction, as in the hoe and the mattock. The 
materials of which tools are composed, are almost exclusively iron and timber ; and of 
the latter the ash is reckoned to combine most strength and toughness, the willow to be 
lightest, and fir or pine deal the sti-aightest. The best quality of both materials should, 
if possible, be used, as scrap-iron and cast-steel, and root-cut young ash from rocky steeps. 
For light tools, such as the hoe and rake, the willow, or pine deal, may be used for tlie 
handles, but in scarcely any case can inferior iron or steel be admitted for the blades. 

1296. The pick (Jig. 7 7.) is a double or compound lever, and consists of the handle (a), 
wliich ought to be formed of sound ash timber, and the head (6), which ought to be 
made of the best iron, and pointed with steel. There are several varieties : the first, the 
pick with the ends of the head pointed (Jig. 77.), is used for loosening hard ground, 
gravel, &c. ; the second, or pick-axe (Jig. 78.) with botli ends w^edge-shaped, in reversed 
positions, and sharp, is used for cutting through the roots in felling timber ; the third, 
or mattock (^Jlg. 79.), is used chiefly for loosening hard surfaces and for grubbing up 
roots of small trees or bushes. It is sometimes called a crow, and also a grubbing-axe, 
hoe-axe, &c. 

1297. Garden-levers are of two species, the removing and the carrpng lever. 

1298. Tlie removing-lever {Jig. 80.) is a straight and generally cylindrical or polygonal 
bar of iron, somewhat tapered and wedge-shaped or flattened in the thick end ; it is used 
for the removal of large stones or other heavy bodies, in which its advantage is as* the 
distance of the power [a), from the fulcrum (6), &c. 

1 299. The carrying-lever, or hand-spoke, is used in pairs for carrying tubs of plants or otiier 
bodies or materials furnished with hooks or bearing staples, under or in which to insert the 
hand-spokes. Two of them united to a platform of boards form the common hand-barrow. 




81 82 83 85 86 84 89 



1 500. The spade (Jig. 81 .) consists of tvro parts ; tlie blade, of plate-iron, and the handle, 



270 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Past II. 



of tough root-cut ash timber, rather longer than tlie handle of the pick, but generally about 
two feet nine inches. Spades are manufactured of different sizes, and generally with a 
flat blade ; but perforated blades {Jig, 82.) are sometimes pnzed, as cleaning or freeing 
themselves better from earth in adhesive soils ; and semi-cylindrical blades {Jig. 83. ), or 
what canal-diggers call grafting-tools, are preferred for the same reason, and also as enter- 
ing the soil easier, because gradually, and in effect as if a flat spade with a pointed or 
shield-like curved edge were used. Spades with curved edges or pointed blades are easiest 
to thrust into the earth in hard or stiff soils, and clean themselves better, but they are 
more apt to leave untouched parts (baulks) in the bottom of the trench than the common 
square-mouthed spade. They are the best species for new ground work, but not well 
adapted for culture. 

1301. The shovel (Jig. 84.) consists of two parts, the handle and the blade ; the latter of 
plate-iron, and the former of ash timber. There are several species. Such as are turned 
up on the edges, and are used for shovelling mud, or, when formed of wood (generally of 
beech), for turning grain, seeds, or potatoes ; square -mouthed shovels, for gathering 
up dung in stables, and used by the gardener in the melon-ground ; heart-shaped or 
pointed-mouthed shovels, used for lifting earth out of trenches in ditch-making, trenching, 
or in other excavations ; and long narrow-mouthed shovels, for cleaning out drains, &c. 

1302. The fork. (Jigs. 85, 86, and 87.) Of this tool there are three principal 
species: — The first (Jig. 85.), for working with litter, haulm, or stable-dung: the 
second (Jig. 86.), for stirring the earth among numerous roots, as in fruit-trees and 
flower-borders, or for taking up roots ; and the tliird (Jig- 87.), for plunging pots in 
bark-pits, or for taking up asparagus or other roots. The prongs of the last are small, 
round, and should be kept clear .or polished by use, or by friction with sand. In adhe- 
sive soils, a strong two-pronged fork (Jig. 86.) is one of the most useful of garden-tools, 
and is advantageously used on most occasions where the spade or even the hoe would be 
resorted to in free soils, but especially in stirring between crops. 

1303. The tiirf-spade (Jig. 104.) consists of a cordate or scutiform blade, joined to a 
handle by a kneed or bent iron shank. It is used for cutting turf from old sheep- 
pastures, with a view to its being employed either for turfing garden-grounds, or being 
thrown together in heaps to rot into mould. It is also used in removing ant-hills and 
other inequalities in sheep-pastures, in parks, or rough lawns. A thin section is first 
removed, then the protuberance of earth is taken out and the section replaced, which, cut 
thin, and especially on the edges, readily refits ; and the operation is finishe^^with gentle 
pressure by tlie foot, back of the spade, beetle, or roller. ' 

"1304. The dihber (Jigs. 88, and 89.) is a short piece of cylindrical wood, obtusely 
pointed, and sometimes shod with iron on the one end, and formed into a convenient 
spade-like handle in the other. Tliere are three species. The common garden-dibber 
(Jig. 88.), the potatoe-dibber (Jig. 89.), and the forester's or planter's dibber. The 
forester's dibber has a wedge-shaped blade, forked at the extremity, for the pui-pose of 
carrying down with it the tap-root of seedling trees ; it has been much used in planting 
extensive tracts, but may be considered as a barbarous mode of treating plants, and 
deserving reprobation. There are also dibbers that make two holes at once, sometimes 
used in planting leeks or other articles that are placed within a few inches of each other ; 
dibbers which make several holes for planting beans and other seeds ; and wedge-shaped 
dibbers which in soft sandy soils are easily worked^ and admit of spreading the roots 
better than the round kind. These wedge-shaped tools also admit of putting two plants 
in a hole, one at each extremity. 

1305. The planter s hack, or double mattock (Jig. 90.), is used for the same purpose 
as the forester's dibber, and is much to be preferred. ( See Pontey''s Profitable Planter. ) 

1306. The planters troivel is a triangular blade of iron joined to a short handle, 
used for planting young trees in free but unprepared soils, as heaths, moors, &c. (Sang's 
Planters* Kdlendar.) 

1307. The jjlanter's pick-axe is the tool of that name (Jig. 78.) in miniature ; or some- 
times merely a small mattock (j^^. 79.) used for planting in stony uncultivated soils. 

1308. The garden-trowel is a tongue- shaped piece of iron, with a handle attached ; the 
blade or tongue either flat (Jig. 91.), or semi-cylindrical (Jig. 92.), or merely turned up 
on the sides. It is used to plant, or take up for transplanting, herbaceous plants and 
small trees. Trowels are also used for loosening the roots of weeds, and are then called 
weeding-irons. Sometimes they are used for stirring the soil among tender plants in 
confined situations. Wooden trowels or spatulas are sometimes used in potting plants to 
fill in the earth ; but the garden-trowel with the edges turned up is the best for this and 
most other purposes. 

1309. The transplanter (Jig. 93.) consists of two semi-cylindrical pieces of iron with 
handles, and which are so inserted in the ground as to enclose a plant with a ball of eartli 
between them. In this state they are attached to each other by two iron pins; and, being 
pulled up, bring with them the plant to be removed, surrounded mth a ball of earth. 



Book UI. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



£71 



Tliis being set in a prepared excavation surrounded by loose earth, tlie transplanter 13 
then separated as at first, and being withdrawn, one half at a time, the earth is gently 
pressed to the ball containing the plant, and the whole well watered. Tender plants so 
U-ansplanted receive no check, even if in flower. 




102 104 107 



1310. Hoes are of two species, the draw-hoe and thrust-hoe, of each of which there are 
several varieties. 

1311. The drau)-hoe (Jigs. 94. to 97.) is a plate of iron, six or seven inches long by 
two or three broad, attached to a handle about four feet long, at an angle less than a right 
angle. The blade is either broad for cutting weeds (Jig. 94.); deep and strong for 
drawing earth to the stems of plants (Jig. 95. ) ; curved so as to act like a double mould- 
boarded plough in drawing drills ; formed into two strong broad prongs for stirring hard 
adhesive soils (Jig. 96. ) ; or it is formed to accomplish the first and last purposes, as in 
the double hoe. (Jig. 97.) 

1312. The thrust-hoe (Jigs. 98, and 99.) consists of a plate of iron attached somewhat 
obliquely to the end of a handle, either by a bow (Jig. 98.), or a straight piece. (Jig. 99.) 
These hoes, which are sometimes called Dutch hoes, are used only for killing weeds, or 
loosening ground which is to be afterwards raked. As a man can draw more than he 
can push, most heavy work will be easiest done by the draw-hoe. 

1313. The wheel-hoe (Jig. 108.) is a compound 
between the draw and thrust hoes, being drawn by one 
man and thrust by another. It is used for hoeing 
garden-walks in the Low Countries and France, where 
the walk-s are either of sand or eartli. In this coun- 
try it could seldom be employed for this purpose ; 
and indeed for this or any other object it is a bad 
implement, as it requires two men to work it ; and 
two men working with the same tool will never do 
as much work as if they used separate tools. 

1314. The garden-rake consists of a range of teeth inserted in a straight bar of iron or 
wood from six to eighteen inches in length, and attached at right angles across the end of 
a handle. Rakes vary in size, and in the length and strengtli of their teeth, and are used 
for covering seeds, or raking off weeds or cut grass, for smoothing surfaces and for 
removing or replacing thin strata of pulverised surfaces as in cuffing. For the latter pur- 
pose a wooden-headed rake is preferable, for the others iron is generally more eligible. 

1315. The drill-rake has large coulter-formed teeth about six inches long and the same 
distance apart : it is used for drawing drills across beds for receiving small seeds, and the 
same rake serves to stir the soil between the rows after the seeds come up. In very loose 
soils, where a wide drill is required a sheath of wood may be fixed to the upper part of 
each prong to spread the earth, but this is seldom necessary. When the drills are re- 
quired not to be quite so wide as six inches, the operator has only to work the implement 
diagonally. 

1316. The hoe -rake corahines a hoe and rake, either at opposite ends of the same 
hai.'dle, as in France, or back to back at one end, as in England. (Jig. 100.) They are 
used for giving slight dressings to borders. 

1317. The turf-raser (raser, Fr. to shave or trim.) (Jig. 101.) cjusists of a narrow 




272 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING 



Part II. 



kidney-shaped blade fixed to a straight handle, and is used for paring the edges of 
verges 'or borders of turf ; and for cutting the outlines of turves to be raised with the 
turf-spade. 

1318. The turf-beetle {Jig. 102.) is a cylindrical or conical piece of wood, of one hun- 
dred or two hundred pounds' weight, with an upright handle and two cross-handlets 
attached ; it is used chiefly for pressing down and levelling new-laid turf. There is a 
variety, consisting of a rectangular block with a handle placed obliquely {Jig' 103.), which 
is used when a leap powerful pressure is desirable. 

1319. The turf-scraper is a head or plate of wood {fig. 10.5.) or ii'on {fig. 106.), fixed at 
right angles across the end of a long handle, and is used chiefly to scrape off earth, or the 
exuvias of worms, snails, &c. from lawns, grass verges, or walks, early in spring. In some 
cases, teeth, like those of a saw, are formed in the edge of the blade of such scrapers, in 
order to tear out the moss from lawns ; in many situations, however, a mossy lawn is 
much to be preferred to grass, as softer, and requiring less frequent mowing. Wire 
besoms are used with good effect for this purpose, as well as for removing moss from 
walls or trunks of large trees. 

1 320. The dock-weedei- {fig. 107. ) is composed of a narrow iron blade attached to a spade- 
like handle, with a protruding iron stay joined to the lower end of the handle, or to the 
iron shank of the blade, to act as a fulcrum. It is used for digging up long conical 
roots of weeds in pastures or close crops, where the spade or two-pronged fork cannot be 
introduced ; or for taking up crops of fusiform roots, as the parsnep, scorzonera, &c. 

1321. The besom u?,edi in gardening is of tlu-ee species. The spray broom, consisting of 
a small faggot of spray, generally that of tiie birch, or of spartium, with a handle inserted ; 
or a brush of bristles with a similar handle : the former sort are used for the open air, tlie 
latter in hot-houses, seed-rooms, &c. The wire besom consists of a bundle of iron or 
copper wires, of one twentieth of an inch in diameter, fixed to a long handle. ' It is 
used for sweeping gravelled paths which have become mossy, mossy walls, mossy trunks 
of trees, &c. Such besoms require to be dipt in oil occasionally, to retard the progress 
of oxidation. 

1 322j Implement-cleaners, are small spatulae formed of wood, generally by the operator 
himself. A small brush of wire like a painter's large brush is useful for cleaning pots, 
and some have a particular description of knife for that purpose, and for spades, hoes, &c. 

1323. Of these tools the esseyitial kinds are the spade, the dung fork, and the rake ; for 
with these, all the operations for which the others are employed may be performed, though 
with much less facility, expedition, and perfection. There are diminutive sizes of most 
of them to be had in the shops for infant gardeners j and portable and convertible sets for 
ladies and amateur practitioners. 

Sect. II. Instruments. 

1324. The common character of cutting-implements is, that they require in their use more 
skill than physical force : they may be divided into instruments for operations, as the knife, 
saw, &c. ; instruments of direction, as the measuring-rod, level, &c. ; and instruments of 
designation, as numbering-talhes, name-pieces, &c. 

SuBSECT. 1. Instruments of Operation. 

1325. Operative instruments are used in labors of a comparatively light kind. They may 
be used in general with one hand, and commonly bring into action but a part of the mus- 
cular system ; the scythe however is an exception. They are similarly constructed to tools, 
and act on the same principles, differing from tliose only in being generally reducible to 
levers of the third kind, or those in which the power or hand is between the weight or 
matter to be cut or separated, and the fulcrum or arm, as in cutting oflf a shoot with a 
knife. But in clipping, the fulcrum is between the hand and the weight or object to be 
clipt off, and therefore shears act as wedges moved by levers of the second kind. The ma- 
terials of instruments are in general the same as tools, but the handles of knives are of 
horn, bone, ivory, or ramose fucus, and the greatest attention is requisite as to the iron and 
steel of the blades. 

1326. The garden-knfe is of several species and varieties. 

The common garden-knife consists of \ blade of prepared steel, fixed without a joint in a handle of bone 
or horn, and kept in a sheath of leather or pasteboard. It varies in shape and size, and in the quality 
of the blade ; the best in England are generally made in London, but the great mass disposed of in com- 
merce are manufactured at Sheffield. Ever^' working-gardener ought to carry one of these knives in a 
side-pocket on his thigh, that he maybe ever ready to cut off pieces cfdead, decayed, or injured plants, or 
gather crops, independently of otiier operations. 

The common pruning-knife is similar to the former, but less hooked at the point ; for though the hook 
be useful in gathering some crops, and in cutting over or pruning herbaceous vegetables, j'et as all knives 
cut on the same principle as the saw, it is injurious when the knife is used to cut woody shoots : therefore, 
wherever a clean section is of importance, the pruning-knife, with a straight-edged blade, and not the 
common garden-knife, with a hooked blade, ought to be employed. 

The folding pruning-knife differs from the other, in having the blade jointed in the handle, for the pur- 
pose of rendering it portable with greater ease and in any description of pockets ; such knives are more 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



273 



especially used by master-gardeners. There are varieties of these, with saws, chisels, penknives, &c. ; the 
two latter are mure curious than useful. 

The graj ting-knife {fig. 109.) differs from the common pruning-knife, in having a thinner and more nar- 
row blade fixed in a bone or horn handle. It is used for grafting, inarching, &c. 

K9 110 




114 



The budding-knife {fig. 110.) differs from the grafting-knife, in having the point of the sharp edge of th« 
blade rounded off in the same manner as is the back or blunt edge of the grafting and pruning knives, it 
has also a thin wedge-shaped ivory or bone handle for raising up the bark, in the operation of inocu- 
lation. 

The asparagus-knife consists of a strong blade, fixed in a handle, blunt on both edges, and straight 
{fig. 111.) ; or slightly hooked, and serrated at one end. {fi^. 112.) 

1327. The garden-chisel is of two species, of which there are several varieties. 

The grafting-chisel differs from the carpenter's chisel, in being a narrow wedge tapering equally on both 
sides. It is used to- split stocks where the common pruning-knife is not deemed sutficiently strong.' 

The forest-chisel { fig. 113.) is a sharp edge of steel, with or without a sharp steel hook or hooks, generally 
called ears : this bladfe or wedge is attached to a handle, from six to ten feet long or upwards ; or better to 
a handle capable of being lengthened by additional joints. It is used for cutting off small branches of 
forest-trees close by the bole or trunk ; with one hand it is placed and adjusted under the branch, and with 
the other a smart blow is given by a wooden mallet, which, either at once or by repetition, effects separ- 
ation, and leaves a smooth section. A variety of this instrument, used for pruning orchards, is furnished 
with a guard or plate behind the blade, to prevent its entering too far into the trunk or main branch. 
{fig. 114.) 

115 




120 

1 328. The pruning bill is generally a hooked blade, sometimes sharpened on one and 
sometimes on both edges, attached to a handle of from one to four feet in length, 
There are several varieties : one resembles the pruning-knife on a large scale {Jig- 115.), 
having a handle four feet long, and is used for pruning hedges in the best hedge-districts, 
such as Northumberland and Berwickshire ; another {Jig' 116.) has a handle of only one, 
or one foot and a half long, and is sharpened in part on the back, forming a sort of halberd- 
like blade, and is used where hedges are plashed, as in Middlesex and Hertfordshire ; 
and the last we shall mention, contains a saw on one edge of the blade, and a knife on 
the other {Jig. 117.) ; of this and the first-mentiojied sorts are small portable varieties 
with cases, &c. for amateur foresters. 

1329. The forest-axe is a steel wedge fixed at right angles to the end of a handle of 
wood, from two and a half to four feet long, and is chiefly used for cutting roots or trunks 
at the ground's surface, where the saw cannot operate. Axes vary in dimension, and 
also in the shape of the head or wedge, which, for the purposes of gardening, ought 
to be long and narrow. 

1 330. Occasional instruments. Besides the above there may be wanted, in extraordinary 
cases, adzes, gouges, carving-chisels, and peculiar-shaped instruments, which the intelligent 
gardener will search for or procure to be made to answer his intentions. 

1331. Tlie priining-saiv {Jig. 1 18.) is a blade of steel, serrated in what is called the 
double manner on one side, and is either jointed like a folding pruning-knife ; jointless 
as in the common knife ; shaped like a carpenter's saw (^g. 119.); or of some length, say 
with a handle of six or eight feet, as in the forest-saw. {Jig. 120.) The small saws are 
used for cutting off branches where the knife cannot easily act owing to want of room, 
and the forest-saw is used in cutting off large branches. In either case the section must 
be smoothed with the forest-chisel or priming-knife, and, if possible, or at least in delicate 
cases, should always be covered with some tenacious air-excluding composition. 

1332. The averruncator {Jig, 121,) is a compound blade attached to a handle from fivi 

T 



274 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



to eight feet in length, and operating by means of a lever moved by a cord and pulley. 
Its use is to enable a person standing on the ground to prune standard trees, which it 
readily does when the handle is eight feet long, to the height of fifteen feet ; and, by using 
step-ladders, any greater height may be attained. Branches one inch and a half in 
diameter may readily be cut off with this instrument. There is a species made entirely 
of metal, to be used with one hand for pruning shrubs or hedges : of this species there 
are varieties made at Slieffield of different sizes and qualities. 




1333. The shears used in gardening are of several species. 

1334. TJie pruning^hears (Jig. 122.) differ from the common sort, in having a moveable centre (a) for 
the motion of one of the blades, by which means, instead of a crushing-cut, they make a draw-cut, leaving 
the section of the part attached to the tree as firm and smooth as if cut off with a knife. It is used in the 
same way as the common shears, and is very convenient in reducing the size of the shrubs or bushes, and 
clipping hedges of roses or other select plants. 

1335. The ringing-shears {Jig. 123.) is an instrument of French invention for expediting the practice of 
ringing trees. A two-bladed knife, with both blades open at once, will give the best idea of its mode of 
operatmg, and is, in fact, a good substitute. 

123 124 





1336. The French prurdn^shears {Jig. 124.), by the curvature of the cutting bladCj cuts in a sort of 
medium way between the common crushing and pruning shears : it is an expeditious implement for 
pruning the vine. 

1337. Hedge-shears (Jigs. 125 & 126.) are composed of two blades, acting in unison by means of a pivot, 
on which they turn, on the principle of a lever of the second kind. They were formerly much used in 
gardening, for hedges, fanciful figures, bowers, and even fruit-shrubs, which were then shorn or trimmed, 
irrto globes, cones, and pyramids, by shears. At present the taste is different. Shears, however, are still 
wanted for hedges of privet and yew; but where the twigs or shoots are stronger, as in the holly, thorn, 
and beech, the hedge-bill or pruning-shears is preferable, as producing wounds more easily cicatrised, and 
not thickening the outer surface of the hedge, by which means the interior shoots rot for want of air, 
especially in thorn and other deciduous hedges 

125 126 




( 




i 


i; 1 




1338. Verge-shears (Jig. 127.) are a species in which the blades are joined to the handles by kneed shanks, 
to lessen stooping in the operator. They are chiefly used for trimming the sides of box-edgings and grass- 
verges. A variety has a small wheel appended, which in cutting grass-edgings is a great improvement 

1339. Turf-shears (fig. 128.) are another variety, for cutting the tops of box-edgings and the tufts of 
grass at the roots of shrubs, not easily got at by the scythe. Some of these have also a wheel or even two 
wheels on an axle fixed to the shears on the principle of the table-caster. 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



275 




1340. The scythe (Jig. 129.) is a sharp blade of steel attached to the end of a crooked 
wooden handle. It varies somewhat in size and in the angle made by the plate or knife, 
which is so contrived as to be varied at the pleasure of the operator ; and in mowing very- 
short thick grass, is generally placed so as the plane of the blade may be parallel to the 
plane of the surface to be mown. 

1341. Of the garden-scarifiers, or bark-scalers, there are several sorts. They are gene- 
rally hooked edge-tools or blunt knives, used for removing the already scaling off external 
epidermis of the stem and branches of fruit-trees of some age. They vary in size and 
strength, in order to suit different sorts of trees, and different parts of the same tree. 
The two-handed instrument (Jig. 1 30. ) is for removing the bark from the axillae of the 
branches, or other angular parts difficult to be got at. The small hook (^g. 131.) is for 
lateral branches of one and two inches in diameter ; and the knife-hook (fig. 132.) for 
the trunks of the largest trees. This operation should be performed in the middle of 
winter ; and to guard against accidents, the whole of a tree should seldom be done in 
one season. 




130 131 132 133 134 135 



1342. The'moss-scraper, for standards, is a sort of horse curry-comb (Jig. 133.) ; and 
for wall-trees, is a sickle-like instrument. (Jig. 134.) In either form it is used to re- 
move moss from the branches, or woody parts of trees ; the existence of which is a cer- 
tain indication of the commencement of decay. It must be confessed, however, that 
such instruments seldom remove the moss completely, and that the scarifier, by removing 
a portion of the outer bark, does the business much more effectually, and is greatly to be 
preferred. 

1343. The blunt knife (Jig. 135.) has a lanceolate, double-edged blade, somewhat 
obtuse on the edges, and is used for the removal of decayed wood from hollow wounds 
in old neglected trees. It can never be wanted where there has been any thing like good 
rp.anagement. 

137 138 




140 

1 344. Of forest baring-irons there are two species and several varieties. They are used, 
not to scarify or remove the scaly decaying epidermis, but to remove tiie entire mass of 

T 2 



276 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 





cortical layers of the oak for the pui-poses of the tanner. Tlie first species includes four 
varieties: the smaller instruments {Jigs. 136, 137, & 138.) are for undergrowth, or 
copse bark, or small branches ; the largest ( fig. 139.) for the larger branches and trunks : 
the long blade (j^. 140.) is the second species, and is used for cross-cutting the bark, 
before removed by the scarifiers, into proper lengths. 

1345. The garden-hammer consists of a head with a flat face and forked claw, and is 
generally lighter than the carpenter's hammer. It is used chielly by gardeners for 
driving or djawing the nails in dressing wall-ti-ees. 

1346. Of fruit-gatherers there are several species. 

1347. SaiW s f)~uit-gatherer (Jig. 141.) consists of 
a pair of cutters (a and b) attached to a long pole, 
which jnay be lengthened by screwed joints or other- 
wise. The operating lever (c) may be attached to 
any part of the pole; the lever of the moving 
chop (d) has a spring under it to keep it open ; 
and the communicating string passes over a pul- 
ley (e) ; the cutters (a, b) are so connected to the 
pole by a joint and arch (/), that they may be set 
at any angle required, for the purpose of getting 
at the fruit readily. Half the top of the basket 
may be covered to prevent the friut from falling out 
when a full basket is brought down. 

1348. Lane' s fruit-gatherer (Jig. 142.) consists of 
a pole (a), with a pair of forceps (b, c) at the end; 
one forcep (b) being fixed, and the other (c) move- 
able ; a wire (d, d) is attached to the moving forcep, 
which passes along a groove to the trigger (e). 
The pole being raised by tlae left-hand, tlie back of 
the right raises the trigger, and opens the forcep, 
which, being applied to the fruit, the trigger is 
pressed, by which tlie fruit is secured. The for- 
ceps are formed of a ring of metal, covered with 
soft leather and padded. 

1 349. The orange-gatherernsQA. in Spain (Jig. 143. ) 
consists of a rod with a cup at the end, composed of 
six Ungulate pieces of plate-iron or hoop, some- 
what sharp at the edges. The instrument is made 
to enclose the fruit, the stalk being between the iron- 
plates ; a gentle twist is then given, when the fruit is 
detached and brought down in the cup. • 

1350. The Swiss fruit-gatherer (Jig. 145.) is a 
small basket, with the ends and edges of the ribs 
sharpened and protruding : it is used like the orange- 
gatherer, in collecting apples, pears, and walnuts. (Lastei/rie, Collect, 
de Mach. &c.) 

1351. The orchardist's hook (Jig. 144.) consists of a rod, with an iron 
hook fixed at one extremity, and a sliding-piece (a) at the other. The oper- 
ator being on the tree, seizes a branch with the hook, draws it towards 
him, and holds it in that position till he gathers the fruit, by hooking on 
the sliding cross-piece to another branch. This slider passes freely 
along the rod, but cannot drop off" on account of the pin (6) at the end. 



14S 




143 



144 



145 

1352. Garden-pincers are of three species ; those for drawing nails do not differ from 
those used by carpenters, consisting of two hooked levers of iron, acting as levers of the 
first kind; those for twisting wire in repairing trellis or flower-baskets, &c. are the sort 
used by wire-workers, which operate both as pliers and pincers ; and th'ose for pulling 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



277 



weeds are, when large {Jig. 146.), formed of wood pointed with plate-iron, and ara used 
for pulling out large weeds, particularly thistles and other large plants in hedg ;s, or 
other bulky crops. They are also sometimes used, for common weeding, to prevent 
stooping and treading beds and borders ; but their chief use is to weed ponds, either 
reaching from the shores or from boats. A small sort foiTned of iron is sometimes used 
for weeding very hard gravel-walks. Gloves, having the first finger and tliumb points 
cased with iron or steel, brought to a wedge shape, are also used for the same purpose. 

1353. The grape-gatherer (^5. 147.) is a pair of scissars, combining also tweezers or 
pincers, attached to the end of a rod six or eight feet long, and worked by a cord and 
pulley, or lever and wire. The bunch of grapes to be gathered from the roof of a lofty 
vinery, or the sprig of myrtle to be culled from the summit of a green-house stage, is not 
only clipped cleanly off the plant by the sheers, but held fast by that part of them acting 
as pincers till it is brought down to the operator. 

146 147 150 




H8 151 



149 



1354. The peach-gatherer (Jig. 148.) consists of a tin funnel or inverted hollow cone, 
fixed on the end of a rod or handle at an obtuse angle, the funnel is first introduced under 
each fruit, and then gently raised or moved sideways ; if ripe, the fruit will fall into the 
funnel. It is used for gathering the peach tribe, apricots, and plums. 

1 355. The pear-gatherer resembles the above, but the funnel is deeply notched or ser- 
rated, in order to aid in gently drawing off ripe fruit. It is used in gathering the finer 
sorts of pears and apples from walls. This and the last instrument are also sometimes 
used for gathering mulberries. Common pears and apples are often gathered by Lane's 
instrument. (Ji^s. 142. & 151.) 

1356. The berry^gatherer (Jig. 149.) is the combined scissars and pincers above men- 
tioned, worked by the hand like common scissars, and is used for gathering gooseberries, 
strawberries, raspberries, and such fruits as should be touched by no other hand than that 
which conveys them to the mouth. Some opulent proprietors have branches of fruit 
shrubs cut off and brought to table, as bouquets, in elegant china vases ; or have their 
strawberries grown in pots, and thus served up to be gathered as used, &c. Jerome 
Buonaparte, when king of Westphalia, passing through Warsaw, on his way to Moscow, 
in the campaign of 1812, had branches of cherry-trees laden with fruit held upright by 
soldiers round his table like a sort of grove, from the branches of which, extending over 
their heads, he and his guests gathered the fruit. 

1357. The seed and cherry gatherer (fig. 150.) consists of a valvular pocket placed on 
the end of a long rod. One valve or jaw of the moutli or pocket is fixed, and the other 
is kept open by a spring, and closed at pleasure, and made bite or pinch off' seeds of 
forest-trees, or even fruits, especially cherries, 
by operating on it with a string and pulley, 
or wire and lever. It is peculiarly use- 
ful for gathering ash and sycamore keys, 
haws, and such like seeds. 

1 358. Floioer-gatherers&re of two sorts, the 
long-handled and the small flower-gatherer. 
The latter may be the same implement as the 
berry-gatherer, (fig. 149.) The long-han- 
dled flower-gatherer (fig. 152.), and which 
is also an excellent grape-gatherer, cuts and 
holds on the same principle as the wire- 
worker's pincers, or berry-gatherer. It is 
worked by means of two small cords, one 
(a) serves to vary the direction of the cutting 
part or scissars, and the other (b) to effect 
the amputation and retention of a flower, 
twig, or bunch of fruit. 

T 3 





^78 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11. 



153 




1359. The climbing-spur (Jig. 153.) is of two sorts, one Tvith, 
and the other without a stem. The first sort (a) is fastened to the 
upper part of the leg with a leather belt (b) ; the other sort (c) 
is tied to the feet. By means of these spurs, one on each foot, 
naked-stemmed trees may be ascended to any height, and when 
it is wished to stop a short time at any part, the screw of the ring 
(rf) is entered in the trunk, and forms a firm point for one foot. 
{Lasteyrie, Coll. de Machines, &c.) 

1360. The essential operative instruments are the knife, saw, shears, scythe, and hammer. 

SuBSECT. 2. Instruments of Direction. 

1361. The coinmon characteristic of directive or preparatory ijistniments i$, that tliey are 
7ised in actions preparatory to operations, rather than in operations themselves, and depend 
on scientific knowledge more than on practical dexterity ; this remark will apply also to 
their construction, which is founded on the doctrines of quantities, gravitation, &c. 

1362. The garden-line is composed of three parts, the frame, generally of iron, the cord 
which is wound upon the frame, and the pin which terminates the cord. The common 
use of the line is perfectly understood from the name ; though generally used for straight 
lines, yet it is also appHed, by means of pegs or small stakes, to form curved lines. 

1363. The grou7id- measure. Of this there are at least three sorts used in gardening. 
A Gunter's chain of 100 links, or 66 feet, a rod of one twelfth, or any equal part of the 
chain, marked with links on one side, and feet on the other, and a common pocket-rule. 
To these may be added a pocket measuring-Hne, though it is not, from its contraction and 
expansion, to be much depended on. The chain is used to ascertain tlie contents of, or to 
lay out and subdivide considerable plots ; the rod for the detail of such plots, or for 
marking out rows, &c. ; and the pocket-rule for taking smaller dimensions. 

1364. Of timber-measurers and dendroineters there are various kinds, and their use is 
for taking the dimensions of standing timber without climbing the tree. Broad's mea- 
surer [fig. 154.) is composed of two pieces of deal about 13 feet long, with a brass limb or 

154 



index (a), on which are engraven figures denoting the quarter girth in feet and inches* 
Raising the instrument, the index end (a) is taken hold of, and the other applied to that 
part of the trunk where the girth is to be taken, opening it so wide as just to touch at the 
same time both sides of it, keeping the graduated index uppermost, on which the quarter 
girth ^-ill be shown, allowing 1 inch in 13 for the bark. (Trans. Soc. Arts, vol. xxv. 
p. 20.) There are various other dendrometers, among which is a curious one by 
Monteath, which will be afterwards noticed. The above we consider as much the 
best. 

1365. For taking the height of a tree. Rods of deal or bamboo, seven feet long, made so 
as to fit into ferrules at the end of each other, tapering as in a fishing-rod, may be used. 
Five of them with feet marked on them would enable a man quickly to measure 
the height of a trunk of more than 40 feet, as he would reach above seven feet. 

1366. TJie ground-comjKisses [fig. 155.) are generally made of hard wood, such as oak. 



155 156 157 




shod with iron, and with an iron gauge or segment (a) ; their lengdi may be six feet ; 
they are used chiefly for laying out parterres in the ancient manner ; since, by a previous 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



279 



preparation of the soil, the curvilinear parts of such parterres can be described by them 
with perfect accuracy. Tlie stationary foot is placed on a slip of board a few inches 
square, with a pin beneath to retain it in its place, and a lead cap above for the point of 
the foot. ' 

1367. The borning-piece (Jig. 156.) is composed of the body (a), commonly a thin slip 
of board, four inches wide, half an inch thick, and four feet two inches long ; the head 
(6) of a similar slip of board placed across, but only eighteen inches long ; and the foot 
is either of the same form as the head, or merely the squared end of the body (as in the 
figure). The upper and under edge of the head and foot must be perfectly straight, and 
form right angles with the edges of the body. Boming-pieces are used to prove, com- 
plete, and continue level lines, or lines on certain given slopes. One is placed at each 
end of a convenient length of the level or slope, and there held perpendicular to its sur- 
face, and others, being placed in the interval, and in the same line or vertical plane, 
the ground under the feet of the intermediate borning-pieces is raised or lowered till it 
is brought to the proper level or slope, when the upper edges of all the heads will range. 
Where box-edgings are to be planted with accuracy and beauty, the use of these imple- 
ments cannot be dispensed with. 

1368. Of levels (Jigs. 157 & 158.) there are a variety of sorts; but the most con- 
venient is half a square, with an iron index in the angle marked with ninety divisions or 
degrees. The use of these degrees is to facilitate the laying out of slopes ; at a perfect 
level the plummet will hang at 45°, and for a slope it may be any lesser number in ascend- 
ing, or any greater number in descending from a fixed point. This level may also be 
used as a square to set off right angles, or indeed angles of any description. 

158 




1369. The adjusting Iwrizontal level (,fig' 157.) is peculiarly useful in laying out roads, 
or regulating the slope of lawns or borders, as is also the following instrument. 

1370. DalzieVs level. (Jig. 159.) This is an instrument of a very simple description, 

159 




lately invented, for ascertaining the relative elevation of unequal surfaces. It consists of a 
wooden bar (a) with a foot at one end (6), and at the other another larger foot with a groove 
and scale (c), to which the bar is connected by a screw and nut. In using this instru- 
ment, two points of different altitude being chosen, the support of the bar (b) is to be 
placed on the higher, and (c) the foot of the scale on the lower, while the position of both is 
secured by a slight turn of the thumb-screw. The bar'being brought parallel to the horizon 
with the plummet (fZ), will indicate, that the upper part of the scale is to be advanced, or 
the reverse, keeping its foot on the point of support, until some one of the graduations 
coincides with, or is visibly parallel to the upper edge of the bar. The difference of alti- 
tude sought is seen in figures, without calculation. Any person that understands the use 
of a level will see a variety of levelling operations on a small scale that this implement is 
calculated to simplify : for example, if it be required to construct an inclined plane, rising 
an inch in a foot, the inner edge of the scale is to be brought six feet from the foot end 
of the horizontal piece, and rendered perpendicular' to it, by making the graduated line at 
six inches coincide with the horizontal edge of the bar. Being fixed immoveably by tlie 
screw in that position, the surface of the ground is then to be worked until the plummet 
hangs perpendicularly. The first six feet of the inclined plane having been thus con- 
structed, other portions are to be taken successively throughout the remainder. If a plane 
of a different inclination is required, as of half an inch in a foot, the scale is to be shifted 
to three inches, and so on. (High. Soc. Trans, vol. v. p. 575.) 

T 4 



280 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IT. 



1 371 . The spint-level, with a theodolite, compass, and telescope, is used for laying out ex- 
tensive scenes. The most convenient are put together, and assume the form of a stout 
walking-stick. Smalcalder is at present the best London artist in this line. 

1372. The staff is used in laying out straight lines. It may be a straight rod of six or 
eight feet long or upwards, and one inch in diameter ; with the first six inches at the top 
painted white, the second black, and the third six inches red. Two points of the desired 
straight line being found or given, any greater number of points are found by placing 
other staffs or rods so as they shall range, and the first staflf conceal from the eye placed 
behind it, all the rest in the line ; the use of the three different colors is to render the ends 
distinctly visible when the ground is fresh dug, white or covered with snow, or green, as 
in pastures. 

1373. The straight-edge, for a garden, may also serve for a plumb-rule. It is merely a 
slip of board with straight parallel edges and sides, of any length from four to ten feet, 
with the addition of a plummet for occasional use as a plumb-rule. It is used to form 
and prove smaller levels, between points settled, by the borning-pieces ; or to prove beds 
or borders of even or plane surfaces. As a plumb-rule, this implement is also used to 
place espalier rails, temporary walls of boards, and even standard trees, upright. 

1374. The stake is any straight piece of wood of an inch or two in diameter, and from 
one to four feet in length. There are two sorts, the one short and thick, of one foot or 
eighteen inches in length, and used, by being driven into the ground in levelling, as resting- 
places for the level, or fixed indications of siirface alterations ; the other, comparatively 
slender and long, may either be covered with white-wash, or the lower half dipped in 
white-wash, and the upper half in a black-wash, or they may be painted as the staffs. The 
last kind are used for tracing out lines of any description, or for indicating the situations 
of trees, or other objects. Twigs and bits of lath are commonly used as substitutes, but 
wherever correctness is any object, the trifling expense of two or three hundred of such 
stakes, should not deter from procuring them. 

SuBSECT. 3, Instruments of Designation. 

1375. The object of designating instrinnents is to jecord and render ascertainable tlie 
individuality of objects, and chiefly of plants; either as species, genera, or varieties. A 
tally or stake driven into the soil and remaining fast, is, mechanically considered, a 
wedge held in equilibrium by the resistance of the earth. AVherever there is a variety of 
plants cultivated, it becomes necessary to be able to mark and distinguish them, as well 
when in a growing state, as when in a state of hybernation, or recent insertion in the 
soil. — In sending plants to any distance, the same thing is requisite. For both purposes 
the name is either written on some instrument, and attached to or placed beside the 
plant ; or a number is made use of instead of the name, from which reference is made to 
a written list. Of both these a considerable variety is used in gardening. 

1376. Notch numhering-sticks are of several distinct species. 

1377. The common tally {tailler, Fr.), or number-stick {fig. 160.), is a slip of lath, or 



160 166 



167 



168 



169 



170 163 



164 165 




9 QSpeciey 



deal, or a piece of a rod, nine or twelve inches long, sharpened at one end and squared 
at the otlier. The numbers, to nine inclusive, are cut on the face with a knife in 
Roman numerals (I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX.) ; reading always from the. 
insertion, or sharpened end. Ten is formed by a notch or tally on the near angle, and 
placed behind the above numerals, extends the series from eleven to nineteen. Twenty 
is formed by two notches, thirty by three, and so on : the nine numerals above being 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



281 



placed after tlie nordies, so as to form the intermediate terms of the series. Fifty, 
instead of five notches, is formed by a cross cut, or channel, like I, on the face, with a 
similar one on the right side joined to it. One hundred is formed by joining to these 
two cuts a similar cut 0:1 the other side, that is a channel continued on three sides ; and 
one hundred and fifty, by a cut or channel continued on the four sides of the stick. 
Ninety may be more readily formed by using the mark for one hundred, and placing a 
notch behind it, to signify 100 less 10, than using the cuts for fifty, and adding four 
notches before. Other high numbers may be simplified in the same manner. A little 
reflection will show that this mode of numbering may be carried to almost any extent; 
and in some nurseries, particularly in Scotland, we have known it carried as far as five 
hundred, which is formed by only three rings for 150 x 3 = 450, and a half ring for 50. 
Particular attention must always be had to read from the root, or insertion end. 

1378. Seto7is bolanic ta/li/ (Jigs. 161. to 165.) is a highly improved method of 
numbering, devised by Alexander and George, sons of the late l)r. Anderson. It proceeds 
upon the same general principles as that above, but with different marks, the ten cyphers 
( fig. 162.) being denoted by as many single distinct cuts of easy and expeditious exe- 
cution ; and any number, however high, requiring no naore mai-ks than it would require 
figures written v/itli a pen. 

1379. As an example of applicalion, the number 590 (fig. 161.) may be referred to. 
" The only way in which the memory is apt to misgive, in this scheme, is by confounding 
/&\j/^&h~5 A & Vj '^'^'ith each other, (as a child would confound the figures 6 
and 9,) but this slight inconvenience will be remedied by the following key, which may be 
easily borne in the mind. Let us recollect that, in writing, we naturally draw a stroke 
from the right, at top, to the left, at bottom, thus / , and not in the opposite direction, 
thus \ : now, in all the above numbers, which differ from each other in the direction of 
the diagonal line, that which is in the direction usual in writing precedes the other, 

thus / \^N/\/\; the other two, A & V? will not be confounded, on recol- 

236789 45 
lecting that V is the usual numeral notation of five. 

In order to express the numbers which refer to a botanical catalogue, a practice of great use to every cul- 
tivating botanist, " we cut the stick in the form of a prism of four sides, whereof one is narrower than the 
rest; or of a triangle, with one of the angles cut oft: A transverse section of the tally should be a 
truncate triangle. [Jig. IQi. a) On the narrowest side, notch the number corresponding with that of 
the genus, in the catalogue. Its being rather more easy to cut the numbers on the' smaller than on the 
larger surface, is the reason for preferring the former for the genus, the number of which is, in most cases, 
greater than that of the species. On the opposite and wider side, put the number of the species ; and if 
there be a variety, put it on one of the intermediate sides. By this simple method, in going over the 
garden with the catalogue in our hand, we can see at once the genus, species, and variety of any plant 
we wish to look for ; and in putting in plants, we have always the means ready at hand of placing 
the numl)ors with them, without the apparatus of whitened tallies, with ink, blacking, or any of those 
troublesome expedients in common use. The sticks themselves, which may be painted of a dark color, 
and kept always at hand, are, besides, less conspicuous and unsightly than the usual large white marks 
with writing on them, and they are not so easily effaced." {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 348, 349.) 

1.380. The luritten number-stick (Jigs. 166. to 170.) varies inform, size, and materials. 
The first sort (Jig. 166.) is a flat piece of lath, smoothed and pointed with the knife, and 
either painted, or more commonly rubbed on the face with white lead at the time of 
using, and numbers corresponding with those of genus, species, and varieties are written 
on it with a lead pencil. Sometimes types and printers' ink are used : when the paint is 
dry, common ink, or black paint is also made use of ; and in some cases the number is 
impressed by a cold type, or burnt in by one heated to redness. A little white lead 
rubbed on with the finger, and the name immediately written with a hard black lead 
pencil, will last as long as the wood, and is on the whole the best mode. Various sizes 
are used ; from laths formed with the knife three inches long, and half an inch broad, to 
pieces sawed out of deal, two or three inches broad, and from eighteen inches to three 
feet long ; tlie upper part painted white, and lower part pitched, charred, or coated with 
some preservative liquid,- for durability. With respect to materials, fir deal is most 
commonly used, but oak boards, or old oak spokes are occasionally made use of in 
botanic gardens. Cast-iron is also used, and found by nurserymen to be in the end the 
most economical. Earthenware, hoop-iron, lead, and copper have been tried. The general 
form in all these cases, is a parallelogram pointed at the insertion end, and somewhat 
rounded at the other. To detect stealing, or mark appropriation, the name of the proprietors 
or of the garden may be cast on the back of all lead, or cast-iron, or earthenware 
nami ng-instruments. 

1381. The stamped nvvibering-instrument is formed in various ways; the simplest and 
most economical is that of triangular slips of lead dipt or stampt from sheet-lead of 4lbs. 
to a superficial foot ; and for plants in pots, they need not be longer than three inches, 
nor broader at the head than half an inch. On these the number is stamped with a type, 
or the name at length may be stamped in the same manner. Such tallies are durable, 
unobtrusive, and not so readily driven out of pots as those of wood ; for herbaceous plants 
they may be of double size and weight. • 



282 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1382. Number-bricks. For plants in the open ground, bricks set endways and rather 
obliquely in the soil, and the number painted on a black or white ground, answers well 
where they do not require to be often removed. This mode is extensively used in the 
herbaceous and tree arrangements in the nurseries of Messrs. Loddiges. 

1383. The name-stick differs from the number-stick in having the name written 
or printed at length, instead of a number, figure, or sign referring to some list 
or catalogue containing the name. Any of the written number-sticks will serve also for 
a name-stick ; but frequently the upper end is broader, square, round, or oblong, 
{Jigs. 167, 168. & 170.) and inclined to the stem, so as the name may meet the eye at 
a parallel angle for reading. A very neat sort of naming-instrument for plants in hot- 
houses, which do not require to be often removed, is formed of white earthenware, on 
which the name may be written with ink or pencil, or printed. A variety of other 
devices for numbering and naming planted plants, by instruments inserted in the ground, 
might be mentioned : in the garden of the Ducal Palace Pitti, at Florence, the name, &c. is 
printed on slips of paper, and placed inside a small glass bottle, which is fixed on the end of 
an iron rod, a complex mode, and one which can only succeed in climates like that of Italy. 

1384. For writing the figures or letters on small sticks, a little white lead is rubbed on with a bit of stiff 
leather, and a hard pencil is then used ; on a larger scale, and on durable materials, the stick is first 
painted, and the figures or letters afterwards put on in oil colors. On earthenware instruments either 
ink or oil color may be used. On large sticks the skeleton tj-pe may be used. This is the practice in the 
Paris garden ; the classes, orders, and generic name are cut out of one thin plate of brass, which is 
applied to the face of the stick, and then oil color brushed over it : the specific name is then added in 
separate letters, from an alphabet so cut or stampt out of brass lamina. 

1 385. The plant-label is distinguished from the number and naming sticks, in being 
hung or tied to the plant, or nailed, or otherwise fixed to the wall or trellis against which 
it is trained. There are two species or varieties, the permanent and temporary, 

1386. The permaneiit label is a slip or plate an inch or more in width, and two or three 
inches long, of deal, metal, earthenware, leather, horn, bone, ivory, &c. on which the 
number or name is impressed or written, and it is then hung to trees or nailed on the wall 
or espalier rail to which trees are trained. The diflficulty in the case of hanging labels on 
trees, is to find a durable tie, or thread, and for this purpose, imtanned leathern thongs 
or catgut is preferred ; silver or lead wire may also be used, the former for select plants, 
and the latter for commoner cases. 

1387. The temporary label is a shred of paper or parchment, and sometimes of leatlier, 
with a string attached, and is used chiefly by nurserj'men to designate plants sold. 

1 388. The mode of naming or registering by series, chiefly applies to fruit-trees in kitchen- 
gardens or orchards, and is done by marking down the names in a book or on a plant, 
in the same order in which the trees or shrubs are planted in the garden. Thus, suppose 
the east side of an east wall is to be planted and registered without the use of naming- 
instruments or labels. Begin at the south corner and write down under that title the 
sort of trees in the order in which they are planted, placing in the list a number against 
each name in regular series. Suppose that at any time afterwards, you wish to find 
which tree is the golden pippin ; then looking in the list, that name is found opposite 
No. 9 ; counting nine, therefore, from the south corner, will give you ,the tree, &c. 
Tljis mode of registering by series is always a very good check to any other mode of 
numbering or naming. Sometimes it is done on a general plan of the garden, but the 
plan must then be on a large scale to admit of writing down all the numbers or names 
of the trees in the spots where they are planted. 

1389. The essential instruments of direction and designation are the line, rule, level, and 
common tally. 

Sect. III. Utensils. 

1390. Utensils may be characterised by their property of being adapted to hold, con- 
tain, or include some material or thing, and either for the preparation of materials, tlie 
deportation of plants and garden-productions, or their culture and protection. 

SuBSECT. 1. Uteyisils of Preparation ajid Dejiortation. 

1391. Preparatory utensils are the screen and sieve. Their construction and use em- 
brace a variety of operations, mechanical and chemical. 

1392. Screens are Used in gardening for fining or sort- 171 
ing earths, gravel, or tanners* bark. The moidd-screen 
{Jig. 171.) is a vdre frame with a jointed fulcrum, by 
which it can be placed sloping to any required degree ; its 
use is to separate stones and coarser particles from mould, 
either in trenching over ground intended for bulbous or 
other tender and succulent roots, or in turning over compost- 
heaps. The soil must be well broken with the spade before 
thrown on the screen, and it is in Tain attempting to use 
the utensil, unless the earth is dry. 




Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



'283 



1393. In g7-avel-screens the wires are placed wider, according to the use to which the 
gravel is to be applied. In general, one quarter of an inch is the width for earth, and 
half an inch for garden-gravel ; but for gravel used in the highways, o«e inch is not 
too wide for excluding small stuff", nor two inches too narrow for admitting the stonelets 
to be used. 

1394. Garden-sieves are of various kinds. The mould-sieve, is a piece of cloth of wire 
firmly attached to a circular rim, and the holes or interstices need not be above one 
fourth of an inch in diameter. It is used for sifting mould for small pots ; sieves are 
also required in gardening, for cleaning seeds ; and wooden sieves of .different kinds for 
airing or keeping fruit. 

1 395. Utensils of dci)ortation are, the mould-scu ttle, pot-carrier, basket, and packing-case. 

1 396. The mould-scuttle is a wooden box for carrying sifted earth in situations where the 
wheelbarrow cannot be brought into use. Sometimes it is made of iron, like the 
common coal-scuttle. 

1397. The pot-carrier is an oblong board, with a hoop-handle in the middle : it is used 
for carrying pots of plants from one part of the garden to another. A wire sieve answers 
the same purpose ; but it is an ill application of that utensil, and besides occupies both 
hands, and requires stooping. 

1398. Garden-baskets are of several species and varieties, used for growing, carrying, 
measuring, or keeping vegetable productions. They are woven or worked of the spray, 
bark, or split woody fibre of trees, or of the young shoots of willow, hazel, and other shrubs. 

1399. The plant basket is a vessel of wicker-work, and shaped like a large pot, not less than eighteen inches 
wide, by twenty inches deep, and is used by some nurserymen, and particularly by the Dutch, to grow 
large peach-trees, vines, &c. for deportation. Ey the means of these baskets, when new garden-walls or 
hot-houses are built, one, and often two years, may be saved in the fruit-trees ; the mode is at present a 
good deal out of use, but deserves to be revived. 

1400. The planters' basket is a flat, rectangular utensil of wicker-work, or boards partitioned into three or 
more parts, for the purpose of carrying with the gardener when about to plant or remove plants. One 
division is for the plants taken up ; another for the plants to be planted j and a third, for the tools which 
he uses, and for any decayed parts of plants, stones, weeds, or other refuse. By using such a basket the 
young gardener may proceed in his operations with order, accuracy, and neatness. 

1401. The mould-basket is a strong reticulated utensil of unpeeled willows or hazel, used for carrying 
earth, gravel, or tanners' bark. 

1402. Carrying-baskets and package-baskets are of various sizes, shapes, and qualities of material and 
workmanship. Such as are large, coarse, and without handles are called hampers, and about London, 
boats, barges, and other local names. ; 

1403. Measia-mg-baskets are chiefly in use by market -gardeners : the largest are bushels and half-bushels, 
formed of unpeeled or peeled willow shoots or withies ; pecks and half-pecks are formed of peeled withies ; 
and sieves, punnets, pottles, and thumbs, for the more rare culinary vegetables and fruits, are formed from 
shavings of woody fibre. 

1404. The plant packing-case is of various species, according as plants in a growing 
state, plants in a state of rest, and with or without leaves, cuttings, bulbs, or other roots, 
or seeds, are to be packed. Each of these species varies also according to the distance to 
which it is to be sent, climate, season of the year, and mode of conveyance. In 
sending plants in leaf from this country to the continent, and the contrary, a close-bot- 
tomed box hooped over {Jig. 172.), is generally used; 
the cover of the upper part being either netting, or 
if matting very frequently removed. 

1405. The glazed 2)acking- case is the most suitable 
for importing plants from distant countries. One 
of this kind employed by Sir R. Farquhar, in send- 
ing plants from the Mauritius to the Horticultural 
Society (Jig. 173.), was made of inch boards, three 
feet long, four feet wide, and twenty inches deep. 
The sloping roof consisted of two glazed shutters 



172 




173 



284 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



(a, a, a), wliicli o;)cncd to admit air (b), and could bo covered at pleasure with two 
rolls of tarj)awling (c, c) ; the trees were planted in wooden boxes just large enough to 
contain a single plant and perforated in their sid-es and bottom (c/), and their surface was 
carefully covered with moss (e), tied down with cord. 

SuBSECT 2. Ulensils of CulLure. 
H06. The utensils used in growing plcnits are the pot, water-saucer, box, tub, watering- 
pot, and syringe. 

1407. Ofjlower-pots there are several species and many varieties. 

The coviHion flowcr-pot is a cylindrical tapering vessel of burnt clay, with a perforated bottom, and of 
which there are ten British sorts, distinguished by their sizes thus : the 



1st size has 2 to the cast, and are called twos, being 

*A1 4 fours 

•■^1 6 .. .. .. sixes 

•Ith S .. .. .. eiL'hths 

■'>th 12 twelves 

Cth If) .. .. .. sisteeiis 



In. In. 
ilia, ileeu. 

IS 4 

12 1 

9 8 



In. In. 
ilia. deep. 

7th sizehas 21 to the c(z*<,and are called tweiUy-fours, being 5 6 
J^tli 32 .. .. .. llurty-two-s 4 b 

9th 48 forty-eighths 5 4 

lOih 60 sixUes 2 24 

Hth SO .. .. .. thumbs or eiffhties lA 2 




Common flower-pofs are sold by the cast, and the price is generally the same for all the 10 sorts ; two 
pots or a cast of No. 1, costing the same price as eight pots, or a cast of No. 11. 

The storc-poi is a broad flat-bottomed pot, used for striking cuttings or raising seedlings. 
The pot for Ijulbous roots is narrower and deeper tiian usual. 
The put for aquatics should have no holes in tlie bottom or sides. 

The pot for marsh-ptants sliould have three or four small holes in the sides about one third of the depth 
from its bottom. This third being filled with gravel, and the remainder with soil, the imitation of a 
marsh will be attended with success. 

The stone-ware pot may be of any of the above shapes, but being made of clav, mixed with powdered 
stone of a certain quality, is much more durable. 

The f^^tazed pot is chiefly used for ornament ; they are generally glazed green, but, for superior ocoa- 
sions, arc sculptured and painted, or incrusted, &c. 

1408, The propagalion-jiot { fig. l^i 5 .) has 
a slit in the side, from the rim to the hole in 
the bottom, tlie use of which is to admit a 
shoot of a tree for propagation by ringing in 
tlie Chinese manner. Opposite to the slit is 
an ear, or round appendage, with a hole for 
hanging the pot to a branch. To those 
who practise the mode of rooting shoots 
without laying them down to the ground, 
sucli pots will prove very convenient. In 
France and Italy thoy are formed in a similar manner, and for the same purpose, of tinned 
iron ; and by such means they propagate the camellia, banksia, &c. 

The square pot is jirefcrrcd by some for the three smallest sizes of pots, as containing more earth in a 
given surface of shelf or basis ; but they are more expensive at first, less convenient for shifting, and, not 
admitting of such jjerfection of form as the circle, do not, in our opinion, merit adoption. They are used 
in different jxu ts of Lombardy and at Paris. 

The classic pot is the common material formed into vases, or particular shapes, for aloes and other plants 
which seldom require shifting, and which are destined to occupy particular six)ts in gardens or conserva- 
tories, or on tlie terraces and parapets of mansions in the summer season. 

Tlie Chinese pot is generally glazed, and wide in proportion to its depth ; but some are widest below, 
with the saucer attached to the bottom of the pot, and the slits on the side of the pot for the exit or 
absoq)tion of the water. Some ornamental Chinese pots arc square at top and bottom, and bellied out in 
the middle. 

The French pot, instead of one hole in the centre of the bottom to admit water, has several small holes 
about one eiglith of an inch in diameter, by wiiich worms are excluded. 
^ 140y. F/oiver-pot gauge, (fig. 174. ) In order to form pots of different sizes of a regular ratio to each other. 
Knight has suggested a plan, of which this may be considered the substance. Assume as a convenient 
j)roportion as to width at top, bottom, and height, 8, 5, and 6; lay down the vertical section of a pot of 
this i)roportion on a board or large paper ; from its centre (a) draw two lines (6 and c) passing through 
the bottom of tlie sides, and equal distances measured on these lines will give equal accretions to smaller 
or larger sized jiots. Knight considers 2 inches as forming a proper difference in diameter in the scale of 
sizes of pots, which is nearly double that in common use. 

1410. The Jiower-jmt saucer is a flat circular vessel, with a rim from one to two inches 
high, and is made somewhat larger than tne bottoms of all the above sorts of pots. Its 
chief use is to prevent the water, which escapes by the bottom of the pot, from proving 
inconvenient on the shelves or stages in rooms or particular situations. In gardens they 
are seldom wanted. A species named the carnation-saucer {Jig- 176.) is formed as 
much larger than the pot to be placed in it as to admit of surrounding its base with 
water, in order to prevent creeping insects from getting at the pot. In the centre of the 
saucer is raised a basement on which to place the pot, in order to keep it dry, &c. 

1411. The qualities and diirability of pols ajid saucers depend on the sort of clay and 
degree of burning, in which a knowledge can only be acquired by observation and ex- 
perience. Pots too much burned, crack and fall in pieces ; and those which are not 
burnt enough, splinter or scale off with the frost and continued moisture. Porous 
earthenware is most congenial to the plants ; but by admitting transpiration by the sidcss 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



385 



dries the earth within sooner. Glazed or stone-ware pots are not congenial, but retain 
moisture a long time. 

1412. The plant-box {Jiiis. 177, 178, & 179.) is a substitute for a large pot; it is of a 
cubical figure, and generally formed of wood, though in some cases the frame is formed of 
cast-iron, and the sides of slates cut to fit, and moveable at pleasure. Such boxes 
are chiefly used for orange-trees. The construction of those of Versailles is ^generally 




^1. \ 




o 








-V' 



177 



178 



179 



approved. Two of the opposite sides are fixed, the other two are moveable, but kept in 
their places by a couple of iron bars %vith liinges, which are fastened on one side, and on 
the other are hooks to catch in {Jig- 177.), that the state of the roots may be readily ex- 
amined, the old earth taken out, and fresh put in at pleasure. Another material advan- 
tage gained in these boxes is, tliat the plants may be shifted by sliding them into others. 

1413. The plaiit-tiib {Jig- 180.) is a circular utensil formed by the cooper for the 
same purpose as the plant-box. In shifting, the box is unhooped, and when the old 
t^rth is re4noved it is refitted on tlie same or a new bottom by the cooper. 

1414. The garden icatei'iytg-pot is of difl[^erent species. The com?7ioii icatering-pot is a, 
tinned iron or copper vessel, used for conve^-ing water to plants. There are several 
varieties; but the principal are, 1st, the common large pot, with two roses of dilFerent 
sizes, the one pierced with small, and the other with large holes ; 2d, the long 
spouted pot, for watering plants in pots, at a small distance, either with or without a 
rose ; and, 3d, the shelf watering-pot, wlncli is a small cartouche-shaped pot for watering 
plants on shelves, or the back part of stoves, close under the glass, consequently above 
the eye of the gardener. 

1415. The French zcatering-pots {Jigs- 181, 182, & 183.) are generally formed of 
copper, and some {Jig- 183.) have zig-zag spouts, to break the force of the water when 
pouring it on plants without the use of the rose. 




1£0 



184 



181 



182 



183 



1416. The Italian watering-pot is formed of earthenware in shapes similar to the 
French. 

1417. The icatering-tuhe {Jig. 184.) is a tin tube with a funnel joined to it at right" 
angles at one end, and with or without a rose joined to it in an opposite direction at tne 
other. It is used for watering pines, and other potted plants in pits or beds, not easily 
reached, and where it is desirable not to moisten the leaves. 

1418. The garden-S!/ri)]ge is of different s-pecies : the common is made of tinned iron, 
copper, or brass, generally about two feet in length, and two inches in diameter. 

1419. Read's syringe {Jig- 185.) is by far the best implement of the kind. By means 
of a ball valve {d), which can never go out of repair, the water is drawni in through 
a large opening, and forced out either through a fine rose (e), a largier rose {b), or in 
one spout (a), each forming a separate cap, which screws off and on. In common 
syringes the air above the piston proves an obstacle to the operation of the syringe, and 
greatly increases the labor of the operator; but in Read's syringe there is a tube f /') 
by which this air escapes in the operation of drawing in water, andtlie space is as readily 
replaced with air through the same aperture in pressing the water out again. It is 



286 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



astonishing how much this lessens the power requisite either to fill 185 
the syringe or empty it. A child may do with Read's engine, 
what requires a man in the common kind. Tliis instrument may 
be considered as superseding not only the common hand-syringes, 
but even the barrow-engine, and other machines of tliis kind to 
which the same improvements are not applied. 

SuBSECT. 3. Utensils of Protection. 

1420. Utensils of shade, shelter, and exclusion are the cover, 
shade, blancher, hand-glass, and bell-glass. 

1421. Plant-covers are of diiFerent species. 

1422. The portable cloth cover or shelter is of different species: 
it consists of a frame of wicker-work, of any sizp, from tliat 
of a hand-glass, to six or eight feet high, which is covered 
with gauze, oiled canvas, matting, and sometimes entirely with 
wicker-work. It is used for protecting half-hardy shrubs and plants 
in the winter season, and when recently transplanted. 

1423. The jwrtable paper cover or shelter is a email frame, like 
the skeleton of a hand-glass, covered with oil-paper, and is used 
for protecting cauliflower-plants, striking cuttings, &c. 

1424. Shades are of three species. The place-umbrella (Jig. 186.) 
resembles the domestic instrument of that name ; but instead of 
the ordinary handle, has a pointed rod, shod with iron, for insertion 
in the ground. It is used for shading tender plants from the 
sun, or sheltering them from the rain. For both purposes it is conve- 
nient to have a joint in the stem, so as to incline the cover accord- F\ 
ing to the situation of the sun and the direction of the rain. They 

are much used in the Paris garden, and at Monza, in Lombardy. ^ 

1425. The portable luire shade is a bottomless cage of wire or wicker work, to place 
over tender plants, to protect them from excess of wind, sun, and rain. Tliey are a 
good deal used in the botanic gardens of the continent, for moderating the direct influence 
of the sun on plants of cold climates. 

1426. The earthenware shade {Jigs. 187, & 188.) is in the fonn of a flower-pot, 
but with a section cut from one side to admit the air and light. This open side in the 
case of auriculas and Alpine plants, is placed to the north, and in the case of tender 
plants to the south, or other points. Tliese utensils are exceedingly useful in transplanting 
tender plants, and in cultivating Alpine plants. One species (j^g. 188.) is entirely per- 
forated with holes, for shading ferns, mosses, and fungi. Common pots are often used 
for sheltering and shading newly transplanted articles Avith the greatest benefit. 

1427. Blanchers are any close utensil that when whelmed over a plant will exclude tlie 
light. The most common is the blanching-pot, which is used to exclude light from sea- 
cale and rhubarb-stalks, and some other culinary vegetables, where the green color is to 
to be avoided. In the Pyrenees they are used for blanching celery. 

1428. T/ie conic blanching-pot is in the form of a sugar-loaf, and is used in France for 
blanclung lettuce and endive. (Lasteyrie.) In Valentia, asparagus is blanched stalk 
by stalk, by portions of reed viath a knot or joint placed over each. (Ibid.) 




187 



1429. The hand-glass is of various species. 

The leaden hand-glass is a small portable glazed case, formed by grooved strips of lead, and is eitliet 
square or polygonal in the plan and roof. It is used for the protection of culinary and other plants, 
during the winter months ; its first cost is less than that of any other hand-glass. 

The copper hand-glass (Jig. 189.) is a very light and elegant variety of hand-glass, m which the bars are 
formed of copper, the sides bevelled, and the top or roof sometimes projects over the latter, with glass 
eaves. The lead hand-glass is the cheapest, but this is by far the most elegant ; they are manufactured 
by Jorden, and others, in Birmingham, and constitute one of the most elegant utensils used m gardenmg. 

The cast-iron hand-glass {fig, 190.) consists of two parts, the sides either square or polygonal, and the 
top of suitable shape.' Each side is cast separate, with screws and nuts; the four sides are afterwards 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



287 - 



J fW^!^' ^"'^ the top, which is always kept separable is cast in one piece. When air is to be 

?r ^ ^^Z^^-'^ enclosed, it is done by lifting up the top, and replacing it diagonally, by which mean! 
air IS admitted in every direction ; and one advantage of not being obliged to hft the bottom mrt if f hat 
TdSo'tESe'feTv'lTnf \° -dmittedVithLt danger of ^^^1^ e |lasf 

Srr^'[rdrco°p?er:rd% The relative prices, the si^e and^shapl b^in^th^e* slii^ iTi?[h^I 

1430. The ivrought-iron hand-glass (Jigs. 
191, & 192.) is composed of soUd iron 
sash-bars, and may therefore be formed 
of any shape or height It is particularly 
ehgible for covering tender shrubs, fixed 
in the open air, as tree-pceony, some half- 
hardy mimosas, &c., and even geraniums 
and fuchsias in the south of England. 




1431. The bell-glass differs from 
the hand-glass in being one entire 
piece of glass and commonly bell- 
shaped, semi-globular,or cylindrical. 

1432. The common green glass bell (Jig. 
193.) is formed of bottle glass, and is com- 
monly used in the open garden for protect- 
ing cauliflowers or other culinary plants, or for striking cuttings or retaining a moist atmosphere about 
seeds, &c. 

1433. T/ie crystal bell or receiver, 
{fgs. 194, 195, & 196.) used in gar- 
dening, is generally from three to 
eight inches in diameter, and from 
four inches to one foot in height ; 
they are employed in striking tender 
cuttings in the exotic departments, 
especially heaths. 




193 



194 195 



196 



1434. The essential viensUs are the sieve, flower-pot, watering-pot, and hand-glass. 



SuBSECT. 4. Utensils for entrapping Vermin. 

1435. Bird, beetle, and wasp traps constitute the only genera of this tribe of the class 
■■ ortli mentioning. . 197 

1436. The birdtrap-cage (Jig. 197.) is a wicker 
utensil with a funnel, tlirough which the bird ha\'ing 
descended in quest of the bait placed within 5 cannot 
aicend. It is successfully employed to catch young 
sparrows. 

1437. The earwig and beetle trap {Jig. 198.) is 
often only a hollow cylinder, but from this, if not 
taken regularly at certain seasons, the insects escape. 
A close box, with an inverted truncated cone of 
glass in the centre as a hgpper, is better ; because 
when earwigs, beetles, wood-lice, or such insects 
enter, they cannot escape, and may be drowTied or 
scalded, or suffered to die there. The common bait 
is crumbs of bread. 

14-38. The wasp and Jiy trap, is merely a bottle half full of water honied at tlie 
mouth to entice fheir entrance. . Some assert that the plant hoya carnosa, whilst in 
bloom, will attract wasps and all other insects from the fruit in the house in which it 
grows (Maher, inHort. Trans, vol. i. 197.) ; and others tliat boiled carrots will have the 
same effect. 




Sect. IV. Machines. 

1439. Machines are agents for abridging rnanual labor. All the operations of gar- 
dening may be performed by the simple tools, instruments, or utensils, already mentioned ; 
but in practice some labors would be insufferably tedious, and others inconveniently 
cumbersome ; and in many operations, the ordinary force of man could not be conveniently 
brought into action. Rollers, as opposed to the turf-beetle, are illustrative of the first 
case ; the German devil, and Bramah's hydrostatic press, as opposed to a number of 
men with ropes or levers, of the second ; and tlie boat-scythe, as perfoiming the oper- 
ations of the pincers or common scythe, of the third case. But the machines of gar- 
dening are very few, and chiefly artificial contrivances for tlie defence of gardens or 
scientific machines for measurement or designation of temperature. In contriving eitlier 



288 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt II. 



of these, simplicity ought to be attended to ; for a complicated machine is not only more 
expensive, and more apt to be out of order, but there is also a greater degree of 
friction, according to the number of rubbing parts. 



SuBSECT. 1, Machines of Labor. 
1440. The more cumbrous machines of gardening are the barrow, roller, watering-engine. 



199 




200 












201 "fiiii 





boat-scythe, ladder engine, and transplanter. 

1441. Garden-wheelbarroivs are of several 
species. The common garde n-wheelbarroiu 
{fg. 199.) is a box, open at top, placed on 
two levers, terminating in a wheel and axle 
at one end, and in two handles at the other. 
They are commonly made of wood, the levers 

of ash or elm, and the sides and bottom of any soft wood. The wheel is cither wholly of 
cast-iron, or of wood, shod with wrought-iron. Excellent garden-wheelbarrows are now 
made of wrought-iron ; but wooden ones are better for new ground work. They are used 
for conveying dung, weeds, garden-soils, litter, &c. 

1 442. The separating barrow is, in appearance, the same as the above, but the body being 
kept in its place by two iron bolts at opposite angles of the bottom, may be lifted off by 
two men, and thus tan, dung, and other articles are readily carried into hot-houses, ^^ hcio 
the wheel and levers could not be pushed along. 

1443. The neiu ground ivork barroiv [fg. 200.) 
differs from the first in having the sides and 
back very low, and a front of the same lieight. 
It is made much stronger, and is used chiefly for 
wheeling earth, clay, or gravel, in extensive ex- 
cavations or removals of these materials. 

1444. The haul m-barrow {fig. 201.) is an open box 
or case of wicker or other work placed on or suspended 
from a pair of handles, v. ith or without a wheel, and is 
useful for can-ying litter, leaves, haulm, spray, prunings 
of hedges, &c. 

1445. I'he foiver-pot barroio is a flat surface and 
wheel, on which plants, pots, or leaves are placed either 
directly, or when small in one or more shallow baskets. 

1446. The xmter-barrow, instead of a box, contains a barrel, fab, or cistern, in .vhlch 
fluid manure or mere water is conveyed to different parts of the garden. 

1447. The lutnd-barrow is a frame of 
wood carried by two levers, which form four 
handles, and is used, in gardening, for re- 
moving large pots or tubs of trees in blossom 
or in fruit, and which wheeling might shake 
and otherwise injure. 

1448. Watering-engines are of several 
species. 

1449. The pump-si/ringe, or hand forcing- 
jmmp (fig. 202.) consists of a barrel-piston 
and directing-tube. The water is drawn 
up through a pei-forated base ; and the ad- 
vantage of this engine is, that it may be 
placed in any common watering-pot or 
bucket, and thus much room and some 
trouble and expense saved in small gardens. 

1450. The barroiu ivatering-engine (fi_g. 
203.) is a portable forcing-pump so ar- 
ranged as to throw the water forty or fifty feet 
distance, and either in the form of a spout or a 
fine shower. The cistern commonly contains 
from twenty to thirty gallons of water, and 
the frame which holds it being fitted up as 
a wheelbarrow, it may be wheeled round the 
garden, and the walks, borders, or even the 
compartments to the extent of forty-five feet 
from the walk may be watered completely. 

The most desirable variety of this machine ^'^^^^^^nU'tfM^^' . . 




Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING. 



269 




204 



is that which is furnished with a sucking- 203 
pipe ( a), like the fire-engines, by means 
of wliich, if there are ponds or regular sup- 
plies by pipes or wells in a garden, the 
labor of carrying the water is avoided. 

1451. The curved-barrel engine (Jig. 204.) 
has the ban-el and piston-rods curved so as to 
form part of a circle, &c. , By this construc- 
tion, the bore of the barrels may be formed 
in the lathe, and consequently made perfectly 
true : the piston-rods move exactly in the 
direction of the axis of the barrels, and there- 
fore operate with the least possible friction, 
For a portable engine this is one of the best. 
— Both these engines would receive great ad- 
ditional power, by adopting the improve- 
ments on the syringe by Read. (141 9.) 

1452. The self-acting greenhouse-en^ne is 
a small vessel of cast-iron, one part of which 
is filled with air, highly condensed by a piston, and the other 
with water, which, by turning the- cock, is let out by a spout 
either as a shower or stream. The machine may be held in 
tlie hand, and the stream or shower directed against any 
particular plant. Instead of water, if tobacco-smoke is intro- 
duced, the smoke will be driven with great force to a consider- 
able distance. This machine will throw the water from thirty 
to fifty feet, but its chief use is in green-houses, for the pur- 
poses of fumigation, as a plant on the upper part of a stage 
may thus be fumigated without touching it, or the operator 
being nearer it than the path. On the whole, it is more an 
instrument for the amateur than the practical gardener. 

1453. The carriage water-barrel is used for watering lawns 
the first season after their formation, when the weather is diy ; 
or for watering borders or other cultivated surfaces near a 
broad wall. In the former case, the water is delivered by a,' 
horizontal tube six or eight feet long, perforated at the lower 
angle so as to produce a series of horizontal jets ; in the latter, a long leathern tube, ter- 
minating in a rose, is made use of. The barrel in the first case is drawn slowly along by a 
horse, in the latter it is nearly stationary, and a man waters on each side as far as may 
be deemed advisable, or as the leathern tube admits. 

1454. The roller water-engine {fig. 205.) consists of a horse, frame, and wheels, on 
which is placed a water-barrel, and under it an iron roller. It is an excellent machine 
for lawns and roads, as they may be watered and rolled by the same operation. The person 
who directs the water, irrigating the space to be rolled, not that which has undergone the 
operation. 

205 





1455. The garden-roller is formed either of wood, stone, or cast-iron. The first requires 
4,01)6 loaded ; the second, from the smallness of its diameter, is heavy to draw ; and there- 
fore the third, which may be foi-med of any diameter, weight, or breadth, is generally pre- 
ferred for garden-walks. The cylinder need not be above four feet wide, which will 
cover most walks at two or three breadths. For extensive lawns the horse-roller will be 
preferred. 

U 



290 



SCIENCE OF GA*RDENING. 



Part II. 



1456^. Garden-ladders are of three species. 

1457. The common wall-tree ladder differs frbnj those used ii\ other arts in having twa 
pieces of ten or twelve inches in length, projecting at right angles from the upper end, the 
use of which is to avoid injuring the trees, by keeping the top of the ladder ^t a small dis- 
tance from the wall, and thus admit of the operation of nailing, as well there as. elsewhere. 

1458^ The orchard-ladder consists of a frame on low wheels, as a basis for several lad- 
ders wliich fit into each other, and are capable of being hoisted up by machinery so as a 
person near the extremity of the ladder may have access to any part of a tree with con- 
venience, either to prune it or gather the fruit. 

1459. The three-styled, forked, and double ladders {Jig. 206. o, b, c) are also well adapted 
fior the ordinary purposes of gatlaering fruit or pruning. 



206 




1460. The rule-joint ladder {fig- 207.) is used for working on curvilinear roofs either 
of glass, or domes of lead, stone, &c. which require panes renewed or trees nailed. 
Each step or foot-board, has what is called a stop, to prevent the feet from breaking the 
glass, and at every joint is a moveable foot to project in the case of training trees on such 
surfaces, in order that tlieir leaves, &c. may not be injured. Such ladders are particularlj 
useful for repairing curvilinear hot-house roofs» 




208 



1461. The step-ladder {Jig. 208.), instead of round rods (Hi which to place thefeel^ has 
steps or boards, an improvement essentially necessary, where much work is to be done, 
because less fatiguing to the feet. Such ladders have a back or fulcrum by which they 
stand independently of any other object, and which is removeable at pleasure by drawing 
out an iron bolt. 



Book III. 



IMPLEMENTS OF GARDENING, 



291 




1462. The platform is of two species. 

14^3. 2^he portable 2)latfon)i combines a step-latldcr and platform, ivhich in part comes 
to pieces, and in part folds together, so as readily to be carried from place to place^ and 
to occupy little room in a tool-house. 

1464. The wJieel-j^latform (Jig. 209.) is a flat surface of boards 
generally five or six feet square, elevated by a frame with wheels ; 
it can thus be moved along lawns or walks, and is used chiefly in 
clipping lofty hedges. A variety of this, used in some places, has 
folding steps or boards on two sides, supported by brackets, by 
which three men at diflferent heights, and one on the ground, can 
proceed with dressing the whole side of a hedge at once. Such a 
machine is used in shearing the magnificent hornbeam hedges in 
the imperial gardens at Schcenbrunn, and those of spruce fir at 
Petrowsky, near Moscow. 

1465. The boat-scythe, for mowing weeds in ponds, is a machine 
invented by General Betancourt, now of Petersburgh, consisting of 
a boat with a system of wheels and pinions placed in the head, which give motion to a 
vertical shaft, containing on its lower end (which passes through the bottom of the boat 
into the water) three scythes ; two men communicate motion to the machinery, and one 
man rows the boat ; the upright shafts on which the scythes are placed, can be raised or 
lowered according to the depth of the weeds, &c. This machine has been improved by 
General Betancourt, but is capable of being further simplified. 

1466. The garden sharping-engine is ot seyQxai %oris. 

1467. The grindstone, as well as whetstone, scytliestone, hone for penknives, (the last used 
in making cuttings of heath and such like plants,) are necessary in every garden. Blunt 
spades, hoes, or knives should never be used, as they cannot operate properly in the hands 
of the most expert gardener. 

1468. Tree-transplanting machines of two 
or more species have been invented. The pole 
and wheels {Jig- 210.) is for general pur- 
poses the best of any of them. It consists of 
a long beam or pole, attached to an axle and 
wheels. The tree being prepared for removal, 
and the pole placed in a vertical position 
against it, the stem , or trunk is attached to it 
by ropes ; thus attached, they are brought into 
a horizontal position, by men or horses, with 
the ball of earth attached to the tree. Horses 
may then be yoked to the axle at the oppo- 
site end of the pole, or root end of the tree, 
with or without the aid of another axle, and 
the tree drawn to any distance and planted. 
In favorable climates, and when a little extra 
expence is no object, astonishing effects may 
be produced by removing large trees; and 
no machine is better adapted for aiding in 

the labor than this simple union of the pole and cart-axle. 

1469. The German devil is a frame of timber, with a cylinder moved by a combination 
of wheels, and a winch, as in raising clay or earth from pits or mines by manual labor. 
But instead of the bucket of clay, three hooks are attached to the end of the lifting rope, 
and these are fastened to the roots. (See Hunters Evelyn* s Sylva.) 

1 470. The hydrostatic press ( fig. 211.) may 2 1 1 
be applied to the same purpose as the Ger^ 
man devil, with incomparably greater effect. 
The only diflflculty is in finding a proper and 
convenient fulcrum ; that done, tiiis engine 
will root out the largest trees. It is suc- 
cessfully employed by engineers in drawing 
piles, gate-posts, raising stones, &c. (See 
Nicholsons Arch* Diet. art. Hydrostatic 
Press. ) 

1471. The garden-seed separater is a small 
portable threshing machine, on Meikle's prin- 
ciple, but fed, in Lee's manner, from a hopper, and with a winnowing machine either under 
or connected with it. { fig. 283.) 

1472. The essential machines of garden-labor may be considered the wheelbarrow, 
roller, and hand forcing-pujnp. 

U 2 





292 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



SuBSECT. 2. Machines for Vermin, and Defence against the Enemies of Gardens. 

1473. Of engines for entrapping or destroying vermin, and for the defence of gardens, there 
are but a few. All of them, with their modes of operating, are referable to commonly un- 
derstood mechanical and chemical principles, and to certain instincts and propensities of 
animated beings, which it is unnecessary to detail. 

1474. Engine-trajys for man are of two species, the common and the hximane. 

1475. The common mQ.n-trap is a rat-trap on a large scale, differing from it only in the 
mode of setting ; the former being baited and left loose, and the latter not being baited, but 
fixed to the ground by a chain. This is a barbarous contrivance, though rendered absolutely 
necessary in the exposed gardens around great tow'ns. Its defect is, tliat its severity defeats 
its ovra pui-pose ; for though kept and exposed to view in many places in the day-time, 
yet few venture to set them at night, and hence intruders, calculating on this humanity, 
enter and commit their depredations in spite of these machines. 

1476. The humane man-trap, instead of breaking the leg by crushing, and consequently by 
the worst of all descriptions of compound fractures, simply breaks the leg, and therefore 
is comparatively entitled to the appellation of humane. It is not unfrequently set in market- 
gardens near the metropolis. 

1477. Engine-traps for quadrujieds are chiefly the mouse, rat, and mole traps. 

1478. The garden mouse-trap is generally composed of a slate and a brick, supported by 
a combination of three slips of wood, fonm'ng tlie figure 4, and baited by a pea or bean. 
A few cats domiciled in the back sheds of hot-houses, will generally keep a walled garden 
clear of tliis enemy ; but the above trap is good for open grounds. 

1479. The garden rat-trap {fig. 212.) 
should generally be a box, or enticing 
engine, of some sort, rather than a toothed 
iron trap ; because unless there is a great 
scarcity of food, which is seldom the case 
as to the field rat, it \^'ill not be allured 
by the bait of the former ; whereas a trap 
may be so disguised by straw, or moss, or 
leaves, and so scented by oil of anise, as 
to be resorted to or at least not recog- 
nised by the rats till they are taken. 

1480. The mole- trap {figs. 213, & 
214.) is of various forms, and either 
made of wood or iron, or of both mate- 
rials. There are several varieties to be 
obtained in the shops; none of which 
appear superior to the original bow-trap. 




212 



y 



213 



214 



form for himself. 



which any laborer may 

Moles may be effectually destroyed by taking their nests in spring. 

1481. Engines of destruction are the spring-gun, musket, and fumigating bellows : the 
musket is essentially necessary, both as a destroyer, and scare of birds. 

1482. The fumigating bellows {fig. 215.) differs from the common 
domestic bellows in having a receptacle {a) for leaves of damaged 
foreign or of home-grown tobacco, which being ignited, and the 
blast sent thi-ough it, a po-w erful issue of smoke is produced by the 
rose {b), which can either be directed against insects on particular 
plants, or used to fill the atmosphere of a hand-glass, frame, or hot- 
house. 

1483. Engines of alarm, or scares, are the bell or gong alarm for 
man ; and the rattle-engine driven by hand, or a small wind-engine 
for herds. 

1484. Th£ concealed alarm is a system of wires spread over a gar- 
den or orchard, like those of the spring-gun, and terminating in a 
bell or gong alarm, which goes off when any of the wires are dis- 
turbod. Tlais alarm may be in or near to the gardener's room, watch- 
tower, or other suitable place, though at a considerable distance from 
the wires. This is, perhaps, on the whole, the best way of detecting 
intruders. In addition to setting off an alarm, the same wire may let 
loose a watch-dog, drop a heavy body, or a fulminating glass bead, 
discharge a gun, &c. 

1485. Of living vermin-kUlers, the ferret is useful for catching rabbits, squirrels, and 
ground rats ; the cat for mice, rats, and birds; the terrier for eradicating foxes ; and ducks 
and gulls eat snails, worms, frogs, &c. 

1486. The essential vermin engines are the mole and mouse traps, fumigating 
bellows, and musket. - 




Book III. 



METEOROLOGICAL MACHINES. 



S93 



SuBSECT. 3. Meteorological Machines. 

1487. The garden-indicators of weather differ from those in common 
use only in two instances, that of the registering thermometer and regu- 
lating thermometer. The barometer, hygrometer, rain-gauge, and vane 
or Eolian index, may all be usefully employed in gardening, (1278.) 
and should be fitted up in and about the gardener's office. The rain- 
gauge and vane may be placed on the roof of his office, and should 
communicate with the interior by means of tubes and machinery, the 
detail of which is perfectly known to opticians, and such as fit up ap- 
paratus of this kind. 

1488. Six's registering thermometer (Jig. 216.) is so contrived as to 
indicate the extreme points to which it falls or rises in the course of 
the day or night, and is, therefore, particularly useful as a check upon 
the working gardeners, who have to attend to the fires, or steam, &c. of 
hot-houses in the winter time. In the open air it is also a very useful 
instrument, by pointing out the extremes of temperature. (iVicZt. 
Encyc. art. Thermometer.) 



216 




50^ 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1469. Kewley's alarum-thermometer {Jig. 2190 consists of a glass tube (a, a), about ten 
inches in length, hermetically sealed atone end, and united at the other to a capillary tube 
(6, b), with an intervening and also a terminating ball (c and d). Imagine this double tube 
placed in a horizontal position, the largest tube, and half the intervening ball, filled with 
spirits of wine ; and the smaller tube and half of both of the balls, with mercury. If the 
tube is now fixed by its centre in a brass frame (e), and nicely balanced, it is evident that 
every change in the temperature of the atmosphere will produce a change in the position 
of the centre of gravity of the tubes. One degree of heat, by expanding the spirit, will 
press on the mercury in the intervening ball (c), and drive part of it over to the termi- 
nating tube (rf), which end will, in consequence, descend like the beam of a pair of scales 
or of a steam-engine. Hence a moving power of great nicety and certainty is obtained, 
the details for the application of which, to the ringing of a bell at any distance, commu- 
nicating by a wire {f), need not be here entered into. Suffice it to say, that by means of 
a scale [g), it may be set to any required temperature, and will give the alarm at a dif- 
ference of even the fourth of a degree, either of depression or elevation. It may be oc- 
casionally used in gardening, to convey some idea of the changes taking place in the 
temperature of particular hot-houses, to the head gardener's room, in the night-time ; but 
its most important uses are in domestic economy, hospitals, &c. This balance-thermo- 
meter, as it may be called, has been also applied, by its ingenious inventor, to the open- 
ing and shutting of windows or sashes, valves of chimneys, or flues, and steam-cocks, 
and either to all of these purposes at once, or to any one of them. 

1490. Keidey^s regulating thermometer, or automaton gardener {fig. 217.), consists of a 
particular application of the alarum thermometer just described. For this purpose, the 
thermometer is made from two to three feet in length, and the same principle may be ex- 
tended to any length, as ten or twelve feet, with a proportionate increase in the diameter. 
The apparatus which Kewley applies to tlie thermometer, and which enables him ta get 
the power requisite for opening the sashes or windows of hot-houses or buildings of any 
magnitude, is a metal cylinder (/j), generally of rolled copper, as being cheapest, from 
seven to fourteen inches in diameter, and from eighteen inches to two feet in length, 
with an accurately fitted piston (/). This cylinder is placed either within or without the 
hot-house or room in any convenient situation, and a cistern, or a barrel of ordinary dimen- 
sions, filled with water, is placed on an elevated situation, say on a level with the chimney- 
tops. The deeper the cylinder is sunk, the less the cistern requires to be raised above 
tlie level of the floor of the house. If, as is often the case, a pipe of water is conducted 
through the house from a distant reservoir of ordinary elevation, then nothing more is 
necessai y than attaching a branch-pipe. It is requisite that this pipe pass directly to the 
])oint where the thermometer is placed, and at any convenient distance under it, not 
higher than the bottom of the cylinder. Here it is joined to a tripartite cock {k), whence 
proceed two other pipes, one (/) to the cylinder, and tlie other (m) to a waste drain. The 
stopper to this cock turns only to the extent of about one-fifth of a circle ; and when 
turned to this extent to the right, it opens a communication between the supply-pipe (n), 
and tlie cylinder (Ji), when the pressure of the water in the reservoir, whether a barrel on 
the top of a house or a distant cistern, raises the piston, and by a communication of cords 
and pulleys with the sashes (o), they will be raised or opened ; and by another chain (;>), 
the fire or steam-damper {q), will be opened also. Wlien the cock is turned to the left, 
this communication is stopped, and one opened between the cylinder and waste-pipe (vi), 
by which the water escaping, the piston descends, and the sashes and dampers are shut. 
The equilibrium of the balance-thermometer restored by the temperature, being reduced 
or elevated to the proper degree, the plug is neither turned to the right nor left, and 
every communication is closed. The cock is worked by two wires (r r), fastened to two 
short levers, fixed on each side of the thermometer-frame, and the other ends of the cross 
or handle of tlie cock (s s). To set the machine at work, it is only necessary to place the 
scale to a degree at which it is desirable air should be given, taking care that tlie cistern 
is not without water. A small cask of water, regularly supplied, will answer as well as 
a large cistern, as the power is not as the body of water, but as its height. As a hot- 
house seldom remains many minutes at the same degree of heat in the day-time, it is 
evident that the sashes w^ould be in almost continual motion, which, in houses where the 
sashes open outwards, and especially the jyolj/prosopic, to be afterwards described, would 
have a singular and animated efi^ect in a flower-garden, or on a lawn. Where light 
valves or ventilators are used, the balance-thermometer of this size has sufiicient power 
to open them %vithout the aid of machinery ; and by lengthening the tube, sufficient 
power may be obtained to open balanced windows in dwelling-houses, churches, or hos- 
pitals. This machine was originally contrived for the use of tlie inventor's own garden 
in Douglas (Isle of Man), and successfully employed to give air to pits and frames tliere 
for two seasons. Having come to London, he employed it with the addition of more 
machinery (see the patent, 1816) than he now uses, to ventilate a part of a house in tlie 
New Kent Road, from 1816 to 1817. In 1818 he greatly simplified it, and thus im- 



Book IIL 



ARTICLES OF ADAPTATION. 



295 



218 



proved, it was in operation on a hot-house in Colville's nursery, King's-road, during 
the summer of 1819. In both cases the success was perfect and undisputed. The 
price of the alarum-thermometer is from two to three guineas ; and of the regulator, from 
six to ten pounds complete. These machines were exhibited to Sir Joseph Banks and 
to the Horticultural Society. But the president and other individuals of this body 
thought such a machine not wanted in gardening. "We cannot but regret, however, that 
some mark of approbation was not bestowed on the author of so ingenious an attempt to 
render a service to our art, and who, like other inventors, had devoted a great part of his 
time, and the greater part of his fortune, to bringing the invention to its present state. 
We are glad to see that it has been noticed by the Caledonian Horticultural Society 
(Mem. vol. iii. p. 170.), and we trust the inventor may yet obtain, at least, credit for his 
genius in mechanics. 

Sect. V. Various Articles used in Gardening Operations. 

1491. The objects used in gardening, which can neither be denominated implements nor 
machines, may be classed as adapted articles, manufactured articles, andprepaied articles. 

SuBSECT. 1. Articles of Adaptation. 

1492. Of articles ^fitted for particular situations or objects, we shall notice the temporary 
coping, horizontal shelter, moveable edgings, basket-edgings, and a few others. 

1 493. The temporari/ coping is commonly a board, or two or more boards joined, so 
as to form a breadth of eighteen inches or two feet. To these boards hinges are attached, 
which fit into irons on the front upper edge of the permanent coping of the wall ; and 
thus, by means of a rod or a cord and pulley, the board is either made to project over 
the front of the wall, or is laid flat on the top of the permanent coping. 

1494. Tlte horizontal shelter is a board of eighteen inches broad, and of any convenient 
length. By means of iron pins inserted in the wall, a number of such are placed hori- 
zontally, like shelves, about the middle and top of fruit-walls, to protect the blossom 
from perpendicular colds and fro»ts ; they were first recommended by Lawrence, but 
-are now seldom used. 

1495. The netting screen {fg.218.) 
** consists of two deal poles, on 
which is nailed a common fish- 
ing-net previously dipped in a 
tanner's bark-pit, to prevent its 
being mildewed when rolled up 
wet. At the top, the ends of the 
poles fit into double iron loops, pro- 
jecting a few inches from the wall, 
immediately under the coping ; and 
at the bottom they are fixed by a 
'hole at the end of each pole upon 
a forked iron coupling, which pro- 
jects about fourteen inches from the 
wall, thereby giving the screen a 
suflficient inclination to clear the 
branches. When it is wished to 
uncover the trees, one of the poles 
is disengaged and rolled back to 
the side of the other, where it is 
fastened as before. The most violent winds have no injurious effects upon shades 
of this kind ; a wall is very expeditiously covered and uncovered, and there is not 
any danger of damaging the blossoms in using them ; they occupy very little space 
when rolled up, are not liable to be out of order, and although rather expensive at first, 
seem to be very durable. From the facility with which the screen is put up, it may be 
beneficially used in the seasons when fruit ripens, to secure a succession, by retarding 
the crop of any particular tree. The lower ends of the poles are advantageously retained 
in their places, by means of a small iron spring-key attached to the coupling by a short 
chain." (Hort. Tram. vol. iv.) Canvass, pil-cloth, or gauze screens, may be similarly 
formed and fixed. 

1496. The canvass screen is a sheet of canvass in a moveable frame, to be placed against 
blossoming wall-trees during nights, and removed during temperate weather. Bunting, 
rendered more transparent by oiling, is considered by Nicol as preferable to canvass. 
Others recommend Osnaburgh or S<Jotch gauze. The screens should have hooks, to 
hook into projecting eyes at the top of the wall, from which, as well as at bottom, they 
should be kept distant one or two feet. " Canvass screens in frames may be fitted to 
move in the manner of a common sash, between rafters, and may be double, as in a 

U 4 




296 



SCIENCE OF ^GARDENING. 



Part II. 



window, to go either up or down, in order to admit air. The rafters being made move- 
able, by being fixed with hooks to stretchers at top and bottom, the whole could easily be 
removed or replaced at pleasure. Thus a frame might be made of ten, fifteen, twenty, 
or more feet in length, to answer for one or more trees, as may be required ; and if the 
whole be packed and laid up in a dry loft, garret, or shed, each season after using, it may 
la<st for many years. " (Nicol.) 

1497. The canvass curtain is so arranged by means of pulleys and weights, as to be drawn 
up over a wall of a hundred feet in length in a few seconds, and let down and spread 
out to dry in a short time. It is kept at a distance from the trees by cords stretched 
from tlie coping to the ground in a sloping direction : a fine example of this occurs at 
Dalmeney Park garden, near Edinburgh, erected under the inspection of J. Hay of 
Edinburgh, a meritorious designer of kitchen-gardens. " If screens be made in sheets," 
Nicol observes, " they are best to hoist up and lower with pulleys and cords (which 
pulleys may be fixed to the coping, as above mentioned, or to a beam or stretcher fixed 
at the top of the wall), they should be suspended over small rafters or spars, of an inch 
and a half to two inches square, according to their lengths, placed so closely as to pre- 
vent the canvass from dashing against the trees, as above liinted. Sheets of this kind may 
be of any convenient size, and made to cover one or more trees, as may be required. , 
I have had one sheet 200 feet in length, which I could join or unjoin at two or three 
different places, and could unclew and hoist, or lower and clew up, in fifteen or twenty 
minutes. - I first contrived it to clew at the top of the wall, but afterwards found it 
safer to do it at bottom, as a gust of wind had once nearly torn it away altogether. In 
the clew it was hung by loops to the bottom part of the upright spars (which were placed 
at four feet asunder), so as to be a few inches clear of the ground. Tliese rafters were 
fastened with hooks and eyes to the coping at top ; and at bottom to stakes drove fast 
into the earth, eighteen inches clear of the wall." {Kalendar.) 

1498. The oiled-paj^er frame consists of a light frame of timber, with cross bars mor- 
tised into the sides, and intersected by packthread, forming meshes about nine inches 
square. Common printing-paper is then pasted on, and, when quite dry, painted over 
witli boiled linseed-oil. These frames are then fitted to the wall, or subject of protection, 
according to circumstances. 

1499. r/<(? ^'arrfe/i-/mrrffe is of diflferent species. 

IVire hurdles are used as inconspicuous fences, ar(d sometimes for training plants or young hedges. 
Wattled hurdles, or such as are woven with shoots or spray, for shelter and shade. 

Straw and reed hurdles axe used for shelter, for shade, and for covering frames and other plant-habit- 
ations, or for forming temporary cases around plants to exclude cold. 

1500. Moveable edgings to borders, beds, or patches of flowers, are of different specie^. 



surface, they appear to grow — ^—^ — - 
from, or give some allusion to, 

a basket. These articles are also formed in cast-iron, and used as edgings to beds and 
plots, in plant-stoves and conservatories. 

1502. The earthenware border (Jig' 220.) is composed of long narrow plates of com- 
mon tile-clay, with the upper edge cut into such shapes as may be. deemed ornamental. 
They foi-m neat and permanent edgings to parterres ; and are used more especially in 
Holland, as casings, or borderings to beds of florists' flowers. 

1503. Edgings of vanous sorts are foraied of wire, basket- willows, laths, boards, plate- 
iron, and cast-ii'on ; the last is much the best material. 

1504. Protecting bags, for guarding ripening fruits from insects, are fonned of gauze, 
oiled-paper, or muslin-paper ; gauze is preferable, as it admits the air. They are used 
with advantage, in the case of grapes and stone-fruil, on walls in the open air, and in 
some cases are required even in hot-houses. 

1505. The shoe-scraper is a plate of iron, fixed vertically, either in a portable or fixed 
frame ; and to render it complete, should always have a rigid brush and dust-box at- 
tached, both of which may be taken out and cleaned ; their use in gardening is consi- 
derable, portable ones being placed at the entrances to every description of garden- 
building, and fixed ones at the exits from compartments to the main walks. They ought to 
abound, and their use be effectually insisted on wherever clean and pure gravel or turf- 
walks are desired objects. 

1506. Garden or bass mats, are sheets of cloth, woven or matted from the bast (Russ.) 



1 50 1 . The basket-edging {jig. 
219.) is a rim or fret of iron- 
wire, and sometimes of laths ; 
formed, when small, in entire 
pieces, and when large, in seg- 
ments. Its use is to enclose dug 
spots on lawns, so that when the 
flowers and shrubs cover the 




219 



220 



Book III. 



ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE. 



297 



or inner bark of trees, and generally of the lime. They are manufactured in the inland 
parts of Russia and Sweden, and even in some parts of Monmouthshire, of different 
sizes. They are used in gardening for a great variety of purposes ; for protecting wall-trees, 
by being hung before them, and removed in mild weather ; for protecting espaliers and 
standards, by being thrown over them ; for protecting more delicate shrubs, by being 
thrown over an envelope of hay or straw, in which way most American trees and standard- 
roses are protected in the neighbourhood of Petersburgh ; for protecting tender plants 
coming through the ground, by being spread on its siu-face, and such as are of a larger size, 
by being supported on hooped framing. They are used to cover hot-beds, hot-houses, 
hand-glasses, and every sort of glass case ; to shelter plants from wind, shade them from 
the sun, &c. 

1507. Prepared coverings are double mats with a layer of hay or straw within, like 
mattresses ; they are used for covering hot-beds in mid-winter, but are readily rendered 
injurious by heavy rains. A mode which would produce the same effect, is to use three 
thicknesses of mats, keeping them apart by small frames of lath or hollow rollers ; the 
object being to preserve vacuities or strata of air between the glass and first mat, 
between the first and second mat, and between the second and third mat, which, if 
attended to, would resist any external cold whatever without cumbrous loads of hay, 
straw, &c. (See Dr. IFells on Dew, and Remarks on Hot-houses, &c.) 

1508. Straw coverings are formed of straight long wheat or rye straw, tied in handfuls 
in the middle, so as each handful may be nearly of the length of two straws, and the hand- 
fuls are connected together by packthread. They are thus formed into rolls, and Avere for- 
merly much used, especially in the culture of early salading, and in covering glass cases. 
Melons were formerly protected by nothing more than loose wheat-straw, and this mode 
by rolls seems merely a more economical and neat mode of practice. Loose wheat-strav^ 
is used by the market-gardeners, to protect early crops of radishes and other saladings. 

1509. Reed coverings are formed exactly like those of straw, and are used chiefly for 
protecting glass, or fonning protecting cones round tender shrubs, or bee-hives of the 
common kind. 

SuBSEGT. 2. Articles of Manufacture. 

1510. The manufactured articles used in gardening are cxiiefly canvass,. gauze, netting, 
mats, and nails. 

1511. Canvass, either plain, oiled, tanned, or painted, is used for protecting the blossoms 
of wall-trees ; excluding cold from plants or plant-structures, shading or sheltering 
plants, and for keeping off rain, 

1512. Coarse gauze and netting, such as is used by fishers and bird-catchers, may be 
prepared similarly to canvass, and used for the same purposes as that article, excepting 
excluding rain. Oiling or tanning is best adapted for gauze ; as painting or tarring 
destroys its property of transmitting light. 

1513. A neding of straw ropes has been found efficacious in protecting trees from ftost, either thrown 
over an entire standard-tree, or hung before fruit-walls. They are used at Dalkeith gardens, near Edin- 
burgh, and were formerly much resorted to in the Netherlands. 

1514. Wall-tree nails axe. of several sorts, but the principal are, the small 221 
cast-iron aiail, in most common use with lists ; the flat-headed wrought-iron 
nail, used either with lists, loops of cord, or mat ; and the eyed cast-iron 
nail 221.), used with small pieces of spray, dried willow-twigs, or 
mat-ties, as in trellis-training. Its chief advantage is the not being so liable 
to lodge the larvae of insects as the nails which are used with lists ; and being 
once driven, they never require removal, or occasion the injury of the wall, 
as the branches may be loosened, or altered, by merely taking out the slips 
of spray, or cutting the mat-ties. {Caled. Mem. vol. iii.) 

1515. Wall-tree lists are marginal ends or shreds of broad cloth cut 
into lengths of from two and a half to four inches, and from one half to 
one inch in breadth, according to the size of the shoots, &c. Their grand disadvantage 
is the harboring of insects, for which some have substituted shreds of leather with ad- 
vantage, and others recommend steeping the shreds in a mixture of sulphur and soap- 
suds, or better in that of corrosive sublimate, recommended for preserving specimens of 
plants. (581.) The colors of black, scarlet, and reddis'h-brown are the best for lists, as 
contrasting well with vegetation. 

SuBSECT. 3. Articles of Preparation. 

1516. The prepared materials used in gardening are numerous : we shall merely enu- 
merate props, ties, covering materials, gravel, sand, cinders, lime and straw. 

1517. Props for plants are of two kinds, rods or poles, and spray. 

Rods vary from six inches to six feet or upwards in length, tapering to a point, and thick in proportion. 
For small plants in pots, and for delicate bulbous roots, as hyacinths, small splinters of lath, dressed with a 
knife or small plane, are th ebest ; and for hyacinths and florists' flowers in general, they should be painted 
green ; for botanical plants, however, this may, in some cases, appear too formal. For hardy plants and 
climbing shrubs, young shoots or poles of ha^el or ash from copse- woods are the most suitable ; they should 




29B 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



In general, be straight and tapering to a point, and as deacate as the weight of the plant, and the exposure 
of the situation will admit. The side shoots of these props should, in most cases, be cut off ; but in others, 
as in propping the dahlia, it is desirable to have some lateral studs, from three to eight inches long, near 
the top, so as to spread out the head. In lieu of this, several props are sometimes used, placed in form of 
an inverted pyramid, or cone, or of a regular prism. One prop, however, judiciously managed, will gene- 
rally be found sufficient. In no case should the bark be removed, because its natural tint is less glaring, 
and therefore preferable to that of peeled wood, and also because it preserves better the texture of the 
wood. In order that they may last several years, they should be cut in mid-winter, and the thick end 
pointed and charred by burning, or dipped in boiling pitch. The elegant propping of plants deserves the 
particular attention of the young gardener, as it is frequently done in so slovenly a manner as greatly to 
detract from the order and neatness which ought to reign in most descriptions of gardens. In pleasure- 
grounds or picturesque scenes, trees and shrubs should, in general, prop themselves, or each other ; but 
in flower and botanic-gardens, flower-borders, green-houses, &c. the greatest degree of art and high- 
keeping, and a sort of drilled polish, easier felt than described, ought always to prevail In all that re- 
spects this part of gardening, the French and Germans greatly excel the English, who are herein too apt 
to look at the end, without regarding the means. 

1518. Spray or branches are used as props for plants furnished with tendrils, as the common pea, and 
many of the leguminous tribe. Spreading frond-like, and yet thin spray, such as that of the beech, hazel, 
or Scotch elm, is generally preferable ; but for early crops the spray of the resinous tribe, and especially of 
the spruce and silver firs, is valuable, as producing warmth and shelter, by its numerous chaffy leaves, 
which are non-conductors. 

1519. Ties are various ; the most general are the ligular threads of bass matts; for 
espaliers some use withs, or tarred cords or threads : on the continent, rushes (Juncus 
effusus) cut green and dried in the sun are used ; and often wheat-straw. When mat, 
Ijark, rush, willow or other spray or shoots, or straw are used, they should be previously 
soaked a short time in water. 

1520. Coveri?ig materials are straw, reeds, haulm of any sort, spray, &c. They may 
either be used loose, which when the weather is dry and calm, is the most effectual way 
of excluding cold ; or drawn, that is, with the stalks or spray arranged in parallel lines in 
the manner of thatch, by which means the rain runs off, and then they exclude cold 
both in dry and wet weather. Sometimes straw and reeds are so prepared in frames, or 
rails suited to the size of beds in the manner of tlie reed, or spray, or wattled hurdle. 
(1499.) Sometimes they are covered with mats; but as the latter readily admit rain, 
this "mode is much inferior to that of arranging the straw or reeds in the manner of thatch. 

1521. Boards and planks are used in gardening, for wheeling up declivities, over steps 
and hollows, across borders, walks, &c. The notched or bridge-plank is used to protect 
edgings, serving as a bridge across them. Tressels are used for raising planks in ex- 
tensive operations on the soil, in forming pieces of water, new gardens, or garden-scenery. 

1522. Various prqmred articles might be mentioned as of frequent or occasional use. 
Scoria from a forge is used for forming a platform impervious to worms, on which to place 
pots of plants. Soaper's ashes or waste is used for the same purpose. The use of gravel 
and sand is very general ; fine sand, uncontaminated witli ferruginous matter, is parti- 
cularly useful in propagating heatlis and other delicate plants by cuttings. Oyster- 
shells are used as crocs or sherds for covering the bottom holes of pots. Quick-lime in 
powder or infusions to destroy vermin, especially worms. Tobacco and other prepared 
matters are also used for the same purpose. Moss is used in packing and for other 
objects. Tanner's bark for its heat and fermentation. 

Chap. II. 

Structures used in Gardening, 

1523. By garden-structures we mean to designate a class of buildings which differ 
from all other architectural productions, in being applied to the culture, or used exclu- 
sively as the habitations of plants. As edifices, the principles of their construction belong 
to architecture ; but as habitations for plants, their form, dimensions, exposition, and, 
in many respects the materials of which they are composed, are, or ought to be, guided 
by the principles of culture, and therefore under the control of the gardener. They may 
be arranged into tlie moveable, as the hot-bed frame ; Jixed, as -the wall, trellis, &c. ; and 
permanent, as the hot-house. 

Sect. I. Temporary or Moveable Structures, 

1524. Of these, some are for protecting plants in fixed places, as against walls or trel- 
lises, and exemplified in the different methods of covering by frames of canvass, netting, or 
glass ; others constitute habitations for plants, as the hot-bed frame, pit, &c. 

SuBSECT. 1. Structures Portable, or entirely Moveable. 

1525. Portable structures are the flower-stage, canvass or gauze frame or case, glass 
frame or case, glass tent, and glazed frame. 

1526. Of the Jloiver-stage there are two principal species ; the stage for florists' flowers 
and the stage for decoration. 

1527. The stage for Jlorists' Jlowers, when portable, is commonly a series of narrow shelves 
rising in gradation one above the other, and supported by a frame and posts, so as to be 
3 or 3^ feet from the ground at the lowest shelf. These shelves are enclosed, generally, 



Book III. 



PORTABLE STRUCTURES. 



299 



on three sides by boards or canvass, and on the fourth side by glass doors. This stage, 
when in use, is placed so as the glazed side may front the morning sun, or the north, 
so as the colors of auriculas, carnations, &c. may not be 
impaired by him. (See Floriculture, Part III. Book II. 
Ch. VIII.) 

1528. The decorative stage consists of shelves rising in gra- 
dation, in various forms, according to taste, and particular 
situation. Those to be viewed on all sides are commonly co- 
nical (Jig. 222.) or pyramidal ; those to be seen only on one 
side triangular. They are constructed either of boards or 
iron work, and placed in parterres, open courts, and large 
chambers. 

1529. The cqmque covering-frames are borders of board, strengthened by cross or diagonal 
slips of wood or rods of iron, and covered with canvass, gauze, woollen, or common net- 
ting, or soiled paper. They are used for protecting plants from cold, or for sheltering 
from wind, or shading, either singly, supported by props, or connected so as to form roofs, 
cases, or enclosures. 

1530. The transjyarent covering, or glazed frame or sash, consists of a boundary frame com- 
posed of two side pieces called styles, and two end pieces called the top and bottom rails, 
with the interspace divided by rabbeted bars to contain the glass. It is used as the 
opaque covering frames, and has the advantage of them in admitting abundance of light. 
In general the rabbeted bars are inserted in one plane, as in common hot-bed sashes ; 
but in some cases the surface is in angular ridges, or ridge and furrow-work (fg- 223.), 
cuneforra (fg. 224.), or trigonal (fg. 225.), in order, in each of these cases, to admit 



223 224 - 225 




more of the rays of the sun in tlie morning and afternoon, and to moderate it in the middle 
hours of the day. Such frames are used for placing over beds of hot dung, for growing 
cucumbers, forcing roots or flowers, and for a great variety of purposes. The materials of 
sashes is commonly timber, but iron, cast and wrought, and copper, are also used. 

1531. The common glass case is a glazed wooden frame or frames, so contrived as to fit 
together, and cover either single trees, espaliers, or shrubs too large for the hand-glass. 
Tlie flavor of plums and cherries on espa- 226 

liers in bad seasons is much improved by the 
use of this structure. In France it is chiefly 
used for peaches. For orange-trees, it con- 
sists of a number of frames, chiefly parallelo- 
grams, but partly right-angled triangles 
{fg' 226.), easily put together and taken 
asunder, to be used in the summer months in 
growing melons, or covering walls or espalier / 
rails ; and in winter in protecting orange-trees 
in situations where they are planted in rows against walls, or in groves in tlie open air. 

1532. The hot-bed frame is of three species, tlie common, fixed-bottomed, and move- 
able-bottomed. 

1533. The cojnmon hot-bed frame is a rectangular box of wood, bottomless and highest 
at the side to be placed to the north, subdivided by cross bars dove-tailed into the outer 
frame, and each subdivision covered by a glazed sash. Knight, instead of having the 
north side of the frame highest, has all the four sides of equal height, but forms the base 
ment of the dung-bed, and builds the dung-bed itself of that slope which he thinks most 
suitable for the sashes of hot-beds. 

1534. The fixed- bottomed frame is the common hot-bed frame, with a boarded bottom 
for the retention of earth. In the boards are holes for the emission of water. 

1 535. The adjusting-bottomed frame has a box for the earth, of tlie size of the inside di- 
mensions of the frame, and the frame being deep or placed on walls, like those of a pit, 
tlie bottom and its eartli and plants, or its pots and plants, may be raised or lowered by a 





300 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



power composed of a pinion and screw, or any other equally- convenient power. The 
bottom is composed of perforated boards, and has boarded sides to keep in the earth. The 
object is to prevent plants from being burned when the dung is very hot, by raising them ; 
to raise them close to the glass when young, and to lower them in cold nights. The chief 
difficulty it managing it is, to keep the earth of uniform moisture. Lawrence, in the last 
edition of his Kalendar (1715), suggests the idea of putting a bottom of wire to the frames 
of hot-beds, and of covering it with flat tiles, and over these the earth, &c. so as to admit 
of the whole being lifted, and the dung below stirred or renewed at pleasure. He says 
he has not seen it done, but merely suggests it as a hint to the ingenious. A century d£- 
terwards, J. Weeks, of the Horticultural Manufactory, King's Road, London, invented 
his patent forcing-frame, which is that ju«t described. 

1536. Separating frames. The component parts of any of the above frames, instead of 
being mortised into one another, are fastened by keyed iron bolts, which easily admit of 
their being taken asunder and put under cover, when not wanted for use ; these frames 
may, consequently, be preserved longer from decay, and are also more portable -than the 
common sort. 

1537. Mallei's frame {fig. 227.) is the invention of 
a French horticulturist of that name, and the ad- 
vantages it possesses are, 1. The admission of more 
light and solar heat from the elevated angle of the 
curvilinear roof ; and, 2. The direct admission of the 
sun's rays when air is given. Professor Thouin {^Cours 

Agnculture, &c. art. Chassis) says that they have not 
been much used, owing to the cost of their first con- 
struction, 

1538. The essential portable structures are the common 
hot-bed frame with flat sashes ; and next in order, the can- 
vass curtain or netting screen. 

SuBSECT. 2. Structures partly Moveable. 

1539. Plant-structures partly moveable are pits and adapted frames : the characteristic 
of the pit is, that it is surrounded by a wall of earth or masonry, enclosing a pit or bed 
for containing dung or bark. The characteristic of the adapted frame is, as the name im- 
ports, a hot-bed frame adapted to some structure of timber, masonry, or iron. 

1540. Ofthejnt. The species are the earth, walled, flued, vaulted, and pillar-pit, 

1541. The earth or piimitive jnt is in part sunk in the earth, and in part raised above it 
by walls of loam or turf. On these walls, glass frames are sometimes placed, and at other 
times only mats or canvass frames. Such pits are used by nurserymen and market-gar- 
deners, and answer perfectly for the preserv'ation of half-hardy plants. 

1542. The walled jiit is also partly sunk in the ground, and in part raised above it; but 
instead of earth or turf walls, they are formed of brick or stone, finished with a wooden 
coping the width of the wall, in which cross rafters are mortised to support the sashes. 
For ordinary purposes, such as growing melons or young pines, or half-hardy plants, such 
pits need not be above five feet deep, and if only one sash between each rafter is to be used, 
they should not be above six or eight feet wide. Where double sashes, one lapping over 
the other are to be used, the width of the pit may be from eight to twelve feet. Artificial 
heat i« supplied to such pits entirely from the" bed of tan or leaves. 

1543. The flued pit (fig. 228.) is the 
same as the last described, with the addi- 
tion of a flue, which either makes the 
circuit of the pit, or runs along and re- 
turns by its back wall. This is the most 
generally useful description of this class 
of buildings, as, whenever the heat of 
tlie bark or other fermentable matter 
subsides, or whenever the air in the pit 
is too moist, and in danger of generating 
damps, a fire can be lighted which will 
remove both evils. 

1544. Scott's flued pit and Knighfspit are both excellent varieties of thfs species, and will 
be described in treating of the pine and melon, for which they are particularly adapted. 

1545. Buck's flued jnt {flg.9.29.), by the interior position of the flues, saves some- 
thing in the length of the sashes, at the expense, however, of a greater first cost for 
the fiues, and the obvious loss of a portion of the fire-heat ever afterwards. It is fully 
described in Hort. Trans, iv. 535. 

1546. The vaulted pit, in its .simplest form, is the walled pit, with an arcK thrown from 
the front to the back wall. Under the arch the fire is made, or steam admitted ; or in some 





Book III, 



MOVEABLE STRUCTURES. 



301 




cases fermenting litter thrown 329 
in. A great improvement on 
this species of pit has been 
made by J. West, of Castle Ash- 
by, Northamptonshire. The 
principle of the improvement 
is the facilitating the passage 
of the heat from the vault to 
the bed of earth over it by sub- 
stituting a tlnn floor of boards 
or slates, or vi'^attled hurdle, for 
brick-work ; the walls are also flued, and the heat supplied is that of fei-menting dung, 
litter, weeds, &c. On the whole it seems an excellent improvement. Nine years' expe- 
rience enable its inventor to recommend it for neatness of appearance, the power of 
regulating the heat to the greatest nicety, and for forcing asparagus, strawberries, and 
the most delicate kind of cucumbers. By raising the walls of the pit higher above the 
earth, it is evident it would answer equally well for growing pines, or forcing shrubs, or 
any other purpose to which pits are applied. 

1547. In West^s j^it the dung is placed in a chamber (e) three feet and a half deep, 
being about eighteen inches below the surface-line ; the walls (g) wliich surround it are 
nine-inch brick- work ; both on the front and at the back of the chamber are two openings 
(a), about two feet six inches square each, with moveable doors through which the dung 
is introduced ; the doers fit at bottom into grooves (b), and are fastened by ^ wooden 
pin and staple at top. ^ In front of the doors, is a small area (o) sunk in the ground, 
surrounded by a curb of wood, by wlaich the introduction or removal of the dung 
is facilitated. Alon^ the centre of the chamber is a bar (d), which serves as a guide 
for packing the dung ; and across the top, at intervals of twelve inches, are placed, 
on their edges, cast-iron bars (A), two inches wide, and three quarters of an inch thick, 
to support a layer of small wood, bushes, and leaves (i), over which is laid the soil for 
the plants (k) . Just below the level of the bars all round the dung-chamber, are 
holes (f), passing in a sloping direction through part of the wall into a cavity (g) in 
the upper part of the wall at the back front and both ends of the pit. In the exterior 
part of the back wall are holes with plugs (I), to let out the steam and heat at discretion. 

230 




□ 




At the commencement of forcing, half the chamber is filled longitudinally with dung, 
and if the doorg are kept shut, this will afford 
sufficient heat from twelve to eighteen days. As 
the heat declines the other half of the cham- 
l>er is filled, and the temperature is kept up by 
additions to the top of the dung, on either or 
both sides, as it settles. When the united heat 
of the two sides ceases to be sufficient, the side 
first filled must be cleared out, and mixed with 
fresh dung and replaced, and so on, adding and 
turning as circumstances require. (Hort. Trans. 
iv. 220.) 

1 548. As an improvement on the construction 




303 



3CIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



of this pit, we would suggest the perforation of the whole of the side walls (Jig. 231. n) 
in order to admit the steam more readily than it can find admittance by a single range of 
openings adopted by West. Where pits on West's plan are already built, a substitute for 
this preparation in .the side walls may be found in the application of a wattled hurdle 
against them (Jig. 231. b), as has been adopted in the Comte de Vande's garden at 
Bayswater. On wet soils a hollow bottom is an obvious improvement. 

1549. Thejnllar-jnty or Alderstone pit {Jig, 232.), is constructed with cast-iron pillars of 

232 

- C c c c 




a a 



three feet in height (a, a), which being joined by plates of that metal, form a support to the 
wall on which the sashes rest. Above ground, this wall (b, b, b, b), of four or nine inches in 
thickness, is built on the iron plates, and carried the usual height of a cucumber-frame. 
On this, a coping, or plate, either of wood or iron, is placed, to which is fixed cross rafters 
either of wood or iron (c, c, c, c), to hold the sashes (d, d). Around the pit is a trench (e, e) 
of the same deptii as the cast-iron pillars, and its exterior sides supported by a brick wall. 
The centre of the bed, under the sashes, is filled with dung or bark in the usual manner, 
and the surrounding trench is destined for linings, which being protected by the wall, and 
covered by boards (J', f,f,f), supported on cross pieces of iron, retain their heat longer, and 
are less influenced by changes in the atmosphere. The chief advantage alleged in favor 
of this frame, is tlie greater durability of the brick walls, than of frames of wood, and its 
more elegant appearance in a garden. 

1550. Of adapted frames there are M'Phail's, or the frame with dung-flues, the pit with 
rising frame, and the frame with props. 

1551. MThaWs frame (fig. 233.) consists of two parts, the frame (a, a) and lights (6), 
which are of wood, and not different from those used for growing cucumbers, and 
the basement (c, d) on which the frame is placed, which is flues of brick-work, with 
the outer wall uniformly perforated. Against these perforated flues, linings of 
dung are formed, the steam of which enters the flue and heats the earth (e, e, e) in the 
centre of each light. The chief objections to this plan are the first cost, and the greater 
consumption of dung, which some allege is required to keep up the proper heat. Its 
advantages are, that hot dung may be used without any preparation, by which much 
heat is gained ; and in the winter months, when a powerful artificial heat is required, 
and (in the case of common hot-beds) is apt to burn the plants, they are here in the 
coldest part of the soil, and cannot possibly be injured by any degree of heat which can 
be communicated by dung. 




1552. The pit with rising frame (fig. 234.) contain's a basement-wall of brick-work of 
the height of the dung or bark (a, a), and in this is a perpendicular vacuity (6, b) in which 
a common frame (c, c) is placed, and by a spindle, pinion, &c. (d) may be raised or 
lowered at pleasure. Its object is the same as that of Weeks's frame already described, 
and which it attains with less risk to the plants, but at a great comparative expense. 
Tliis variety of pit is the invention of John Nairn, (Hort. Trans, vol. iii.) who has had 
it executed, and heated by surrounding tubes (e, e, (?).filled with steam. 



Book III, 



FIXED STKUCTUIIES. 



903 




1553. The frame on props, in construction, resembles the Alderstone pit, excepting that 
the superstructure is a frame instead of masonry. Such frames are much used about 
London to grow pines, the back being enclosed by walled hurdles, supported by the 
props as stakes, and round the hurdles linings of dung are applied. 

1554. There are a great many varieties of this species of frame : that adopted at Ed- 
monton for the culture of pines will be noticed in treating of that fruit. 

Sect. II. Fixed Structures. 

1555. Fixed s^rMcfwm consist chiefly of erections for the purpose "of improving the 
climate of plants by shelter, by supplying heat, and by exposing them to the influence 
of the sun. The genera are walls and espalier rails, of each of which the species are 
numerous. 

1556. Garden-walls are formed either of brick, wood, stone, or earth, or brick and 
stone together ; and they are either solid, flued, or cellular, upright or sloping, straight 
or angular. 

1557. Brick, stone, or mud loalls consist of three parts, the foundation, the body of the 
wall, and the coping. The foundation should be somewhat broader than the body of 
the wall, and of depth proportionate to the quality of the sub-soil, or intended plan of 
culture. In some cases where it is intended that the roots should have free access to 
both sides of the wall, it should be placed on arches {fig. 235. ), or piers, with plank- 
stones, the soffit of the stone or under crown of the arch being within 6 inches, or 1 foot of 
the surface, and the openings, smaller or larger, according to the power of the materials 
to resist the pressure of the wall. The arch should be a segment of a circle, or an ellip- 
sis, and the piers (a, a, a) proportioned to the qualities of the foundation and the super- 
structure. Where the body of the wall commences, there will be a set-ofF or rebate of 
one or two inches on each side, which should be commenced below the ground's surface, 
both for the sake of appearance, and to prevent the alternate action of the air and rain 
from rotting the mortar in the rebate. The body is generally carried up of the same 
width to the coping ; but where the walls are high, say 1 8 feet, it may taper equally on 
both sides to 14 inches; in doing which, great care must be taken by the bricklayer to 
make good joints. To facilitate this, some architects have bricks formed of a smaller 
size for the upper part of the wall. It is not settled among gardeners whether the cop- 
ing should project at all ; or if it projects, how much, and what proportion on each side. 
Nicol is of opinion it need not project at all, and that there is no occasion, as is gene- 
rally done, to bevel the coping stones to the north, or less useful side of the wall, to 
throw off the rain in that direction. Walls without copings have two advantages in their 
favor ; the first is, that no insects are harbored in the angle, under the coping, as is 
generally the case ; and the second, that trees are more readily trained over from one 
face of the wall to the other, a practice which has been found to induce a fruitful state 
in trees, which had never produced fruit before. There is also some saving in extent 

235 

iiIT'^n)I."I^!,"ll!l"'^'Xi!J;.MEinijjjii^ I.:.!;!!!!..^... 

^^^^^ 



304 



S<:iENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



of coping. On the other hand, copings which- have a considerable projection are 
known to protect wall-trees from spring frosts. We prefer for this purpose moveable 
copings. (1493.) 

1558. The brick and stone loall is a stone wall faced with four inches of brick-work, or 
what is called brick mid bed, on the side most exposed to the sun, as on the soutli sides 
of east and west w alls, and on the insides for the sake of appearance of the two end, or 
north and south walls of enclosed gardens. Where free-working stone abounds on the 
spot, such walls are erected at much less expense than walls entirely of brick. "Wlietlier 
they are as dury, durable, and warm, depends on the sort of stone ; some scliistous and 
otlier argillaceous stones are apt to be damp, but compact limestones may be accounted 
as good as brick, and if they are of a dark grey or blue color, better on account of their 
absorption and refraction of heat. ^ 

] 559. The solid brick imll is the simplest of all garden-walls, and where the height 
does not exceed 6 feet, 9 inches in thickness %vill suffice; when above that to 13 feet, 
14 inches, and when from 13 to 20 feet, 18 inches in width are requisite.- In most 
cases, such walls may be contracted in ^\'idth as they are carried up, so that a 20 feet 
wall may begin with 18, and terminate in 9 inches in breadth. The conti-action must 
be gradual from bottom to top ; or if accomplished by rebates, they must be bevelled, 
by means of a course of sloping-edged or flanched bricks at each set off ; and these must 
be made exactly alike on both sides of the wall, in order to preserve its centre of gravity 
exactly in the centre of the foundation. 

1560. The fued wall, or hot-xvall, {Jigs. 236, & 237.) is generally built entirely of 
brick, though where stone is abundant and more economical, the back or north side may 
be of that material. A flued wall may be termed a hollow wall, in which the vacuity is 
thrown into compartments (a, a, a, a), to facilitate the circulation of smoke and heat, 
from the base or surface of the ground to within one or two feet of the coping. Tlicy 
are generally arranged with hooks inserted under the coping, to admit of fastening some 
description of protecting covers (1495.), and sometimes for temporary glass frames. 
A length of 40 feet, and from 10 to 15 feet liigh, may be heated by one fire, the furnace 
of which (6), being placed 1 or 2 feet below the surface of the ground, the first course 
or flue (c) will commence 1 foot above it, and be 2 feet 6, or 3 feet high, and the 2d, 
3d, and 4th courses {d, e,f), narrower as they ascend. The tliickness of that side of the 
flue, next the south or preferable side, should for the first course be 4 inches, or brick and 
bed ; and for the other courses it were desirable to have bricks cast in a smaller mould ; 
say for the second course 3, for the third 2f, and for the fourth, 2^ inches in breadth. 
This will give an opportunity of bevelling the wall, and the bricks being all of the same 
tliickness, though of diflPerent widths, the external appearance will be every where the same. 

236 




Sometimes a vacuity is formed between the flue and the south or valuable side of the 
wall {Hort. Trans, iv. 139.); but this, we think, maybe considered an extravagant 
refinement. It cannot be carried into execution without employing a great quantity of 
materials and much labor. A wooden or wire trellis is also occasionally placed before 
flued walls ; but both modes suppose a degree of forcing which does not appear ad- 



Book III. 



FIXED STRUCTURES. 



30-5 



visable unless the wall is kept constantly covered with glass, in which case, without 
this precaution, constant fires might injure, by occasioning the partial growth of the 
trees, or even burning those parts of them immediately opposite the furnace. To 
prevent accidents of this kind, the furnace must always be placed at some distance, 
say from eighteen inches to three feet from the back of the wall. 

1561. The cellular wall (Jig. 238.) is a recent invention {Hort. Trans, vol. iv.), the 
essential part of the construction of which is, that the wall is built hollow, or at least 
with communicating vacuities, equally distributed from the surface of the ground to the 
coping. If the height does not exceed 10 or 12 feet, these walls maybe formed 
of bricks set on edge, each course or layer consisting of an alternate series of two bricks 
set edgeways, and one set across, forming a thickness of nine inches, and a series of cells, 
nine inches in the length of the wall, by three inches broad. The second course being 
laid in the same way, but the bricks alternating or breaking joint with the first. The 
advantages of this wall are obviously considerable in tlie saving of material, and in the 
simple and efficacious mode of heating ; but the bricks and mortar must be of the best 
quality. This wall has be^n tried in several places near Chichester ; and at Twickenham, 
by F. G. Charmichael, and found to succeed perfectly as a hot- wall, and at 10 feet high 
to be sufficiently strong as a common garden- wall, with a saving of one brick in three. 
As a whole, indeed, it is stronger than a solid nine-inch wall, on the same principle that a 
hollow tube is less flesible than a solid one. It is evident, that the same general plan 
might be adopted in forming cellular walls of greater height, by increasing their width. 
A very high wall might have two systems of cells divided vertically, one or both of 
which might be heated at pleasure. The same idea may be advantageously applied to 
flues, for heating hot-houses by steam, and for other purposes. Piers may be formed 
either on both sides of the wall (a), or on one side by bricks on edge (6), so as to bond 
in with the rest of the work. 

238 

Lll-H , 1 I ,J J , .1 t, ,1 I, I . ,1!, ,11 ,.1! , ,11 , , I' ,-U-,-JX, JJ ,^ 



P. .11, iL.n u 



5 



n' ri rr n n n 



TT — I I II II 



I 



^feef 



1562. Hollow tmlls may also be formed by using English instead of Flemish bond : 
that is, laying one course of bricks along each face of the wall on edge, and then bonding 
them by a course laid across and flat. Such a mode has been practised and described by 
Dearne, an architect in Kent. 

1563. Where wall-fruit is an object of consideration, the whole of the walls should be flued 
or cellular, in order that in any wet or cold autumn, the fruit and wood may be ripened 
by the application of gentle fires, night and day, in the month of September. It is an 
error to light the fires of hot-walls only in the evenings, the effect of heat in the process 
of maturition being much greater when accompanied by light. In all hot-walls one 
precaution must not be neglected, the building in, on the inferior or outer side, small 
cast-iron doors, or framed stones, which may be opened at pleasure, in order to withdraw 
the soot. They must be made perfectly air-tight, which is readily accomplished by 
having double cast-iron doors, in what is called Count Rumford's manner. 

1564. The mud or earth- wall {jig. 239.) is formed of clay, or better of brick earth in a 
state between moist and dry, compactly rammed and pressed together between two 
moveable boarded sides («, a), retained in their position by a frame of timber (6, 6), 
which form, between them the section of the wall (c, c) : these boarded sides are placed, 
inclining to each other, so as to form the wall tapering as it ascends ; one layer of 
the length of twelve or twenty feet being completed, another layer is formed on that, 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



and so on, till the wall attains the giv^n height, which in the Netherlands, and some 
parts of Germany, where these walls prevail, is seldom above ten feet. At Lyons they 
are often fifteen and eighteen feet. Sometimes a trellis is placed before them, but in 
general the branches of the trees are fastened by means of wooden hooks of six or seven 
inches long, which are driven into the walls, and from which twigs or rods are stretched 
.icross, from the one to tlie other. These walls are generally covered with a projecting 
coping of thatch, or boards ; the latter is much the neatest, and least liable to harbor 
b 239 

j2 . .... n .- J3. 




insects. Peaches are grown on them in France and Germany, but in this country, where 
the weather is more variable, and the atmosphere more generally charged with vapor, 
particular attention requires to be paid to the coping. This attended to, these en pise, or 
mud-walls, may be useful as shelters to cottagers' gardens, but rarely of much service as 
sources of wall-fruit. For a more particular account of their construction, see Commu- 
nications to the Board of Agriculture, vol. ii. : 
1565. Boarded or wooden walls (Jig- 240. a) 



or Nicholson's Arc/i. Diet. art. Wall, 
b 




240 



are variously constructed. One general 
rule is, that the boards of which they are 
composed, should either be imbricated or 
close-jointed, in order to prevent a current 
of air from passing through the seams; and 
in either case well nailed to the battens 
behind, in order to prevent warping from 
the sun. When well tarred and afterwards 
pitched, such walls may last many years. They must be set on stone posts, or the main 
parts or supports formed of cast-iron, Nicol informs us (Kalendar, p. 149.) that he 
has " constructed many hundred -lineal feet of wooden walls, which recline considerably 
towards the north (fig. 240. b), presenting a surface at a better angle with the sun than 
if they were upright. They are placed on sloping ground, and range in five ranges or 
lines, due east and west, at the distance of seven yards from each other, the southmost 
being five feet high, and the northmost seven, composed of imbricated boards, pitched 
over to give them durability ; the supports are set on (not in) blocks of stone, which are 
sunk in the earth, and firmly laid on solid foundations, three feet under the ground 
level." 

1566. Inclined fruit-walls seem to have been first suggested about the beginning of the 
eighteenth century, by N. F. De Douillier, F. R. S. an able mathematician, author of a 
work entitled Fi-uit-walls imiyroved by inclining them to the Horizon, Sec. Some 
walls were formed at Belvoir Castle on tliis plan, which Switzer informs us he went to 
see, but found them damp, and the ti-ees liable to be injured^by perpendicular frosts. 
De Douillier's work, as being the production of a speculative theorist (he was tutor to 
the Marquis of Tavistock), appears to have been rejected by Miller, Switzer, Lawrence, 
and the designers of gardens of that day, but it is replete with ingenuity and mathe- 
matical demonstration, and well illustrates the importance of sloping walls where they 
are to be protected by glass or gauze. For exposed walls, it does not appear that 
this form will ever be adopted, chiefly on account of the difficulty of building them, the 
inutility of the northern or inferior side, and because, if formed in the most economical 
manner, they would not serve as fences. In particular situations, as in the case of ter- 
race slopes, they certainly merit trial ; and if covered in severe weather, there can be no 
doubt that their surface, by being more perpendicular to the sun's rays in summer, would 
receive a greater accession of light and heat at that season. In a communication to the 
Horticultural Society (vol. iv. p. 140.), by StofFels, gardener at Mechlin, be states, " that 
he had an opportunity of comparing the effect of a sloping and perpendicular wall in the 
same garden, for the growth of peach-trees, and that the result was greatly in favor of the 
former." It appears to us, that for this and other fruit-trees that do not grow very rigid 
at the root or main stem, a boarded wall which might be inclined at pleasure, to an angle 
of 45° to both sides of the perpendicular, might be advantageously adopt^ed. In the day- 



Bock III. 



FIXED STRUCTURES. 



S07 



time, or at least when the sun shone in the beginning of summer, it might be inclined 
to die north, (the trees being planted on the south side,) to give the trees the advantage of 
the sun ; and during severe weather in autumn, or at any time when it was either desired 
to protect or retard the trees, it could be inclined to tlie south to protect them from dews 
and sha'de them from the sun's ravs. 




1567. The wavy or serjtentiyie ivall (Jig. 241.) has two avowed objects; first, the saving of 
bricks, as a wall in which the centres of the segments composing the line are fifteen feet 
apart, may be safely carried fifteen feet high, and only nine inches in thickness from the 
foundations ; and a four-inch wall may be built seven feet high on tlie same plan. Tlie 
next proposed advantage is, shelter from all winds in the direction of the wall ; but this 
advantage seems generally denied by practical men. Miller says, he saw them tried at 
Le Cour's in Holland, and tliat the trees which grew on them were in no respect supe- 
rior to those on straight walls. They have been tried at different places in the northern 
and southern provinces of Britain, but are generally disapproved of as creating eddies. 

1568. The angxdar ivall (Jig' 242.) is recommended on the same general principles of 
dielter and economy as the above ; it has been tried nearly as frequently, and as generally 
condemned on the same grounds. 

1569. The zig-zag wall (Jig. 243.) is an angular wall in w^Iiich tlie angles are all right 
angles, and tlie length of their external sides one brick or nine inclies. This wall is built 
on a solid foundation, one foot six inches high, and fourteen inches wide. It is then com- 
menced in zig-zag, and may be carried up to the height of fifteen or sixteen feet of one 
brick in diickness, and additional height may be given by adding three or four feet of 
brick on edge. The limits to the height of tliis wall is exactly that of a solid wall of 
fourteen inches thick ; that being the w^idth of the space traversed by the angles or zig- 
zag. Tliat as a whole it is sufficiently strong for a fence against cattle, may be proved 
by applying to it the first problem in dynamics ; the two diagonal lines fonned by the 
zig-zag producing an equal resistance to one line directly across a fourteen-inch wall. 
In training on these walls, wires are stretched horizontally from angle to angle, and 
eitlier four and a half, or nine inches apart, or upright rods of wood (a, a) may be em- 
ployed ; they are, however, better adapted for fences, or walls of botanic, flower, or 
nursery gardens, than for fruit-walls. 



243 




1570. The square fret ivall (Jig. 244.) is a four-inch wall like the former, and the -ground- 
plan is formed by joining a series of half-squares, the sides of which are each of the pro- 
per length for training one tree during two or thi-ee years. 

244 



1" 



1 571. The nurseryman's, or self-supported four-inch ivall (fg. 245.), is formed in lengths 
of from five to eight feet, and of one brick in breadth, in alternate planes, so that the points 
of junction form in effect piers nine by four and a half inches. This wall is the inven- 
tion of Lee, of the Hammersmith Nursery, and is well calculated for training peaches 

X 2 



•30H 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



and other fruit-trees for public sale. It seems to be the most economical wall that can 
be devised, as the parts forming piers are as useful as any other parts of the wall, which is 
not the case with piered walls of the common sort. 

245 



1 572. The jyiered wall (Jig. 246. ) maybe of any tliickness with piers generally of double 
that thickness, placed at regular distances, and seldom exceeding the wall in height, unless 
for ornament. These piers are generally made square in the plan ; but they have been 
found to be less obstructive to the training of trees, when rounded at the angles (a) ; or 
angular (b), and either hollow, or effected by deviation (c). Tlie same remark will 
apply to piers formed partly to support the wall, but principally as in the gardens laid 
out by London and Wise, Bridgeman, &c. for sheltering the fruit-trees. Where train- 
ing is not a leading object, a thin deep projection (rf) is much stronger as a whole, than 
the clumsy square piers generally formed by routine practitioners. 




1573. Skeltering piers were formerly, in some cases, made of such a width and depth 
as to contain a niche for training a vine, and, in that case, they were frequently raised 
above the coping of the wall. Examples of such piers exist in the walls of the kitchen- 
garden at Claremont, built from the designs of Brown, and at Hatton in Scotland, built 
after a design by London and Wise. 



247 




1574. Arched, niched, or recessed walls (Jig- 247.) were contrived for the same pur- 
pose by Switzer, and, at least, had a massive imposing effect to the eye. Such walls were 
generally heated by flues, and formed in fact the intermediate link in the progress of im- 
provement between hot-walls and forcing-houses. 

1575. Trellised walls are sometimes formed when the material of the wall is soft, as in 
mud walls ; rough, as in rubble-stone walls, or when it is desired not to injure the face of 
neatly finished brick- work. Wooden trellises have been adopted in several places, espe- 
cially when the walls are flued. Wire has also been used, and the following mode has been 
adopted by C. Holford, an ingenious horticultural amateur at Hampstead : " I affix cop- 
per wires from the top to the bottom of the wall, in a perpendicular direction, secured at 
each end by a small iron hook, two iron stair-staples are also driven in over the wires, at 
equal distances, to keep them nearly close to the wall. The wires may be placed at six 
to eight inches' distance from each other. The branches and shoots are fastened by means 
of thin twine, which is first tied to the wire wdth a single knot, and then round the shoot 
more or less tight, according as it may be required to check or encourage the circulation 
of the sap ; with a very little practice this may be done with great expedition. The 
wire which I have used is of the substance measuring about twenty yards ta the pound 
weight, and as it does not oxydate by exposure to the atmosphere, will not require paint- 
ing, and will last for years. The expense is about one penny per yard. I have not found 
the peaches and nectarines to be at all retarded by this mode of training." (Hort. Trans. 
V. 569.) 

1576. Espalier rails are substitutes for walls, and wliich they so far resemble, that trees 



3300K III. 



FIXED STRUCTURES. 



309 



are regularly spread and trained along them, are fully exposed to the light, and having 
their branches fixed are less liable to be injured by high winds. Tliey are formed of wood, 
cast-iron, or wire and wood. 

1577. The wooden espalier, of the simplest kind, is merely a straight row of stakes 
driven in the ground at six or eight inches asunder, and four or five feet high, and joined 
and kept in a line at top by a rail of wood, or iron hoop, through which one nail is driven 
into the heart of each stake. If the lower ends of the stakes are charred, and the sort oi 
wood be larch, oak, ash, or birch, with the bark adhering, they will last for many years ; 
but stakes of young Scotch pines or poplars lose their barks and soon decay. Young larch- 
trees are much the most durable. 

1578. The framed wooden espalier rail is composed of frames fitted with vertical bars at 
six or eight inches asunder, which are nailed on in preference to mortising, in order to 
preserve entire the strength of the upper and lower rails. The end styles or uprights of 
the fr,ame are set on stone piers, and attached and kept upright by irons leaded into the 
stone.' This is the most frequent mode of construction, but sometimes the frame is fitted- 
in with lattice- work, or wire, or stout laths ; and instead of stones, oak posts, or posts of 
fir charred, are driven into the ground, to which to attach the styles of the frames. 

1579. The cast-iron espalier rail, 
{Jig- 248:) resembles a common street 
railing, but it is made lighter. The 
columns or styles may either be fixed 
in oak or stone {a, a) ; or, when this 
mode is not adopted, to form their 
base in the shape of a reversed j^, 
setting them on a foundation of four- 
inch brick- work. Such espalier rails 
have been tried in Scotland {Caled. 
Mem. i. 483.), and found to come 
somewhat cheaper than wooden ones ; 
but their great advantage must be 
their durability, (especially when well 
painted, or oiled, whilst the iron is 
hot,) and the elegance of their appear- 
ance. 

1580. The horizontal espalier rail (Jigs. 249, & 250.) is a frame of wood or iron, of any 
form or magnitude, and either detached or united, fitted in with bars, and placed horizon- 
tally, at any convenient distance from the ground. For dwarf trees the common height is 





three feet, and for standards, six feet. In the latter case, the frames may be arched, and 
the trees trained so as to form a bower, covered way, &c. These have not been much used, 
nor, from the loss of ground, and the too violent constraint on the tree, is it likely thev 
will ever become general. 

1581. The oblique espalier rail is. comiposedi of frames of bars, wires, or lattice- work, 
placed obliquely. {Hort. Trans. App. to vol. ii.) Trees will no doubt thrive well, 
trained on such surfaces, but, unless they run north and south, one side will be of little 
use ; and even running north and south, they can only enjoy half the day's sun. The 
ground too under them, unless used as a walk, must be in a great degree lost, so that 
these rails are on the whole inferior to the common sort. 

1582. Of Jixed structures, the brick wall, both as a fence, and retainer of heat, may be 
reckoned essential to every kitchen-garden ; and in many cases the mode of building them 
hollow may be advantageously adopted. 

X 3 



310 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IT. 



Sect. III. Permanent Horticultural Structures. 

1583. Buildings with glass roofs, or artificial habitations for plants, constitute by far the 
most impoitant part of garden-structures, whether we regard tlie expense of their first 
erection, the skill required to manage them, or the interesting nature of their products. 

1584. Green-houses were known in this country in the seventeenth century. They were 
then, and continued to be, in all probability, till the beginning of the 18th century, 
mere chambers distinguished by more glass windows in front than were usual in dwelling- 
rooms. Such was the green-house in the apothecaries' garden at Chelsea, mentioned by 
Ray, in 1684, {Letters, p. 174.) as being heated by hot embers put in a hole in the floor ; 
a practice still extant in some parts of Nonnandy, and to wliich, as is well known, the 
curfew, or couvrefeu bell refers. The same general form of house with the addition of a 
furnace or oven is given by Evelyn in the different editions of his Kalendarimn. 

1585. The Jirst cera of improvemeyit may be dated 1717, when Switzer published a plan 
for a forcing-house, suggested by the Duke of Rutland's graperies at Belvoir Castle. 
Miller, Bradley, and others, now published designs, in which glass roofs were introduced ; 
and between the middle and the end of the last century, Speechley and Abercrombie in 
England, and Kyle and Nicol in Scotland, made various improvements in forcing- 
houses, as to general form, intemal arrangements, and mode of heating. Tlie largest plant- 
stoves were the joint productions of the late W. Aiton, and Sir W. Chambers at Kew, 
and the largest pineries were erected at Wellbeck by Speechley. 

1586. A second ccra of improvement may be dated from the time when Dr. Anderson pub- 
lished a treatise on his patent hot-house, and from the publication of Knight's papers in the 
Horticultural Society's Transactions, both of wliich happened about 1809. Not that the 
scheme of Dr. Anderson ever succeeded, or is at all likely to answer to the extent ima- 
gined by its inventor ; but the philosophical discussion connected with its description and 
uses, excited the attention of some gardeners, as did the remarks of Knight on the proper 
slope of glass roofs (^Hort. Trans, vol. i.) ; and both contributed, there can be no doubt, 
to produce the patent hot-houses of Stewart and Jorden, and other less known improve- 
ments. These, though they may now be considered as reduced au merite historique, yet 
were really beneficial in their day. Knight's improvements chiefly respected the angle 
of the glass roof ; a subject first taken up by Boerhaave about a century before, adopted 
by Linnaius (^A men. Acad. i. 44.), and subsequently enlarged on by Faccio in 1699, 
Adanson (Families des Plantes, torn, i.) in 1763, Miller in 1768, Speechley in 1789, 
John Williams of New York {Tr. Ag. Soc. New York, 2d edit.) in 1801, Knight 
in 1 806, and by some intermediate autliors whom it is needless to name. 

1587. The last and most important cera is marked by the fortunate discovery of Sir 
G. Mackenzie in 1815, " that the form of glass roofs best calculated for the admission of 
the sun's rays is a hemispherical figure." This may be considered as the ultimatum in 
regard to tlie principle and perfection of fonn ; and has already given rise to many 
beautiful curvilinear structures, of which a series of plans are in course of publication 
by Messrs. W. and D. Bailey, of Holborn, London, who have erected curvilinear houses 
at tlie following places : — 

Names of the Pfoprietoi-a. Their Residences. ^"^"^^ Description of Houses. Dimensions. 

Vincent Stuckey, Esq. - - ("S^m'^'SJf } ^ {curviUnear roof, .^/;S^S;ed ends - -{lil'llSh. 
San.uelChilvers,Esq. - - FincWey, Middlesex 1 {curvUinear roof, wUh& ends - -{jH^ 

ThomasAndrewKjiight,Esq.")T>„^» „^,,^,„ o,i„„ if Pine^tove. 3 lo l3"f: 

P.H.S. - - - - j CasUe, Salop 1 | Curvilinear roof, with two brick ends - - j g ^f^; 

r stove and Grapery. 1 £. 

rViarlK H Tnrnpr V.v} . f Rook's Nest, near 1 , J Plain sloping roof, with sashes opening in ( .if.' 
Charles ±1. lumer, ±-sq. -| Godstone - . - J J front, aiid at the back, by means of racks f 

(_ and pinions - - - - - - J 

r Camellia House. "J 1'20 ft. long. 

Messrs. Loddiges - Hackney - - - 1 < Curvilinear roof, with curved ends, glazed > 23 ft. wide. 

i back sashes ... - - - _i IS ft. high. 

r Conservatory. "1 

T. T' J ,1 -c ITT „ 1 J Gothic span roof, with French sa^.h-doors f 

Peter Kendall, Esq. - - Walthamstow - - 1 ^ in front, and opening sashes on the back f 

(. wall - - - " J 

f ■ Pine-stove. S f 2 ft' wi^' 

rVale Lodge, Leather- 1 o r'"'^^^'°°^''^'^"P"^^* ^^^^^ ^"^^ 1 6 ft.' W^^^^ 
Thomas Dickens, Esq. - - | h|ad . . j 2 -| C 65 ft. long. 

1^ .,. Green-house. } 15 ft. wife. 

[Curvilinear roof 7. H ft. 6 in. high. 



high. 

2 in. long. 

wide. 

high. 



22 ft. 8 in. long 
20 ft. 10 in. wide 
18 ft. 3 in. high. 



r Green-house. 7 40 ft long 

William Henry Cooper, Esq. Regent's Park . - 1 ^ O^^IS'^sfcrS fto"nf rai"^^^^^^ 

(_ cast-iron pilasters and cornice - - -J 

r Pine-stove and Grapery. 1 33 ft. long. 

M P S. De Caters De Wolfe Antwerp . - - 2 -{CurviUnear roofs, with curved ends, and >■ 13 ft. 'wide. 

t placed at each side of a large orangery -J 16 ft, high. 



Book III. PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN IN HOT-HOUSES. 



311 



Messrs. Sweets and Miller 
Thomas Fox, Esq. - 

Friends of T. Fox, Esq. 

T. A. RusseU, Esq. - 
Henrj- Brooke, Esq. 
Earl of St. Vincent - 

John Hullctt, Esq. 



- Bristol - 

- Beaminster, Dorsetshire 

f Lyndhurst, near 1 
• < Southampton, Ring- > 
i wood, Hants - ' - i 

- Cheshiint Park, Herts 

- Bristol . - - 

- Rochetts, Essex - - 



I Champion Hill, Cam- 
" I berwell - 



r Green-house, 1 

1 -i Gothic span roof, with folding doors at the J. 

l_ ends, and glazed on all sides - - - j 

r Grapery. 
1 < Plain sloping roof, as an addition to an old 

i stove. 



I Plain sloping 
2 ^ 



Grapery. 



Peach-house. 
Plain sloping roof, in separate sashes - 

ConservatO}-xi. 
Circular front, with doniical ventilator, 
made to rise and fall at pleasure - - - 
Green-kmse and Grapery. 
Sloping roof, with cast-iron gutters and 
fraiiie-work, opening sashes in front, and 



40 ft. long. 
15 ft. wide. 
9 ft. 6 in. high. 



42 ft. long. 

11 ft. wide. 

9 ft. 6 in. high. 
33 ft. long.' 

12 ft. wide. 
10 ft. high. 

9 in. long 
wide. 
6 in. high. 



at the back 



7 18 ft. 
{. 22 ft. 
i 16 ft. 

/ 48 ft. '9 
J. 14 ft. 3 
^ 9 ft. 74 



'9 in. long. 
»-ide. 
high. 



c ^ ■ , Om«s'ery. , 7 40 ft. diameter 

bpnsncal shape, with cast-iron copmg and >• ^0 ft hi^h. 



<_ gutter, ventilators in front and back waU: 
r Pine-stove. 1 

I Curvilinear roof, the bars fixed into a cast- | 
\ iron gutter in front, with rentilators un- 1> 
I demeath, and in the back walls glazed up- j 

I right ends J 

f South Stove. f 

'. Curvilinear roof, with glazed ends, cast-iron<j 



The Horticultural Society - Turnhani Green - 



2 ^ 



coping plate 

North Stove. 
I Curvilinear roof, with brick ends 



Sir Wm. Rouse Bough ton, 
Charles Hutchins, Esq. - 
James Burton, Esq. 
Henry Seymour, Esq. - 



TDownton Hall, near ") 
1 Ludlow - - - J 

{Hoxton Square, Lon- 1 
don - - - -J 



- Regent's Park 



{Wooburn, Bedford- \ 
shire - - - J 



' 1 

I Curvilinear roof 



Green-house. 



-house. ~) lo ft. long. 

Opening sashes in front, and ventilators at > 10 ft. wide. 

the ends J 8 ft. high. 

Green-house. 

Circular laced roof, the bars fixed ill a i f. j;,„„f-_ 

lar cast-iron gutter, with wooden ^-^ 
{_ and doors underneath 

Green-house. 
1 <^ Sloping roof, with opening sashes at the top 
' ■ " house. 



r 51 ft. 4 

- 1 15 ft. w 
r 25 ft. 6 

- 1 12 ft. 1 
7 loft 

t >. 10 ft. 
S 8 ft. 

inacircu- 1 ^ 
)den frame f 



50 ft. long. 
12 ft. 5 in. wide. 
12 ft. high. 
34 ft. long. 
8 ft. 6 in. wide. 
12 ft. high. 

in. long. 
. wide. 



fixed to a wooden 1 



1588. Gi-eat onulatioii now exists in this department of horticulture, not only among 
country gentlemen, but among commercial gardeners. One house for growing palms 
and scitaminae, erected by Messrs. Loddiges, is 45 feet high and 60 feet wide, and 
another by the same nurserymen for green-house plants, is 23 feet wide, 18 feet high, 
and upv-ards of 100 feet long, witliout a single rafter or standard : and these spirited 
cultivators, and also Messrs* Gunter, Grange, Wilmot, Andrews, and others, have 
heated the whole of their extensive ranges of glass by steam. 

1589. The application of steam to the heating of hot-houses appears first to have been 
attempted by Wakefield of Liverpool, in 1788, and afterwards effectually applied in 
the vault of a cucumber-house at Knowle in that neighbourhood, by Butler, gardener 
to the Earl of Derby, in 1792. It made little progress till about 1816, since which it 
has extended rapidly, and wherever an extensive range of hot-houses are to be heated, it 
will be found a saving of fuel and labor, attended with less risk of over heating or con- 
tamination by bad air. 

1590. The grand cause of the improvements ivhich have been made in hot-houses, may be 
traced to their being no longer as formerly under the control of mansion architects. To 
civil architecture, as far as respects mechanical and chemical principles, or the laws of the 
strength and durability' of materials, they are certainly subject in common with every 
description of edifice ; but in respect to the principles of design or beauty, the found- 
ation of which we consider, in works of utility at least, to be " fitness for the end in 
view," they are no more subject to the rules of civil architecture, than is a ship or a 
fortress ; for those forms and combinations of forms, and that composition of solids 
and openings which are very fitting and beautiful in a habitation for man or domestic 
animals, are by no means fitting, and consequently not beautiful in a habitation for 
plants. Such, however, is the force of habit and professional bias, that it is not easy 
to con\-ince architects of this truth ; for structures for plants are considered by them no 
further beautiful than as displaying not only something of architectural forms, but even 
of opaque materials. Fitness for the end in view, we repeat, is the basis of all beauty 
in works of use, and, therefore, the taste of architects so applied, may safely be pro- 
nounced as radically wrong. — We shall consider the subject of hot-houses as to the 
principles of construction, external forms, and interior details. 

SuBSECT. 1. Of the Principles of Design in Hot-houses. 

1591. To ascertain the principles of action, it is always necessary to begin by consider- 
ing the end in view. The object or end of hot-houses is to form habitations for veget- 
ables, and either for such exotic plants as vnll not grow in the open air of the country 

X 4 



312 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



PARt II. 



where the habitation is to be erected ; or for such indigenous or acclimated plants as it 
is desired to force or excite into a state of vegetation, or accelerate their maturation 
at extraordinary seasons. The former description are generally denominated green- 
houses or botanic stoves, in which the object is to imitate the native climate and 
soil of the plants cultivated ; the latter comprehend forcing-houses and culinary stoves, 
in which the object is, in the first case, to form an exciting climate and soil, on general 
principles ; and in the second, to imitate particular climates. The chief agents of ve- 
getable life and growth are heat, light, air, soil, and water ; and the merit of artificial 
climates consists in the perfection with which these are supplied. 

1592. Such heat as is required in addition to that of the sun is most generally produced 
by the ignition of carbonaceous materials, which heat the air of the house, either directly 
when hot embers of wood are left in a furnace or stove, placed within the house, as in 
Sweden and Russia; mediately, as when smoke and heated air, from, or passing tlirough 
ignited fuel, is made to circulate in flues ; or indirectly, when ignited fuel is applied to 
boil water, and the hot vapor, or the water itself, is impelled through tubes of metal or 
other conductors, and either to heat the air of the house at once, as in most cases, or to 
heat masses of brick- work, sand, gravel, rubble, or eai-th, tan, or even water, {Hort. 
Trans, vol. iii. ) which materials may afterwards give out the heat so acquired slowly to 
the atmosphere of the house. But heat is also occasionally supphed from fermenting 
vegetable substances, as dung, tan, leaves, weeds, &c. applied eitlier beneath or around 
the whole or a part of the house, or placed in a body within it. 

1593. In particular situations heat may be obtained from ano?nalous sources, as in Iceland, 
Tceplitz, and Matlock, from hot springs ; and perhaps in some cases, especially in coal 
districts, from a basement composed of certain compounds of sulphur and iron, &c. 
Dr. Anderson (Treatise on the Patent Hot-house,) proposed to preserve the superfluous 
heat generated by the sun in clear days, and to retain it in reservoirs placed under, 
above, or at one side of the house, re-admitting it as wanted to keep up the temperature ; 
but the plan, though ingenious and philosophical, required too much nicety of execution, 
and the clear days in this country are too few to admit of adopting it as a substitute for 
heating by ignition. Heat must not only be produced in hot-houses, but its waste avoided, 
by forming as large a portion of the cover as possible of materials through which it 
escapes with difliculty, as far as this is consistent with otlier objects. Hence, in certain 
classes of houses, the side to the north is formed of opaque and non-conducting 
materials. 

1594. Light is admitted by constructing the roof, or cover, of transparent matter, as 
oiled paper, talc, or glass, (the last being found much the best material,) joined to as small 
a proportion of opaque substances, as timber or metal, as is found consistent with the 
strength requisite to bear the weight of the glass, resist the accidents of weather, &c. 
All plants require perpendicular light, but some, as many succulents and others, which 
throw out, or ai-e allowed to radiate tlieir branches on all sides, require the direct influ- 
ence of light on all sides ; others naturally, as creepers or climbers, or artificially, when 
rendered creepers or climbers, by the art of training on walls or trellises, require direct 
light on one side only ; and hence it is, that for certain purposes of culture, hot-houses 
answer perfectly well when the transparent covering forms only a segment of their 
transverse section, provided that segment meets the sun's rays at a large angle the greater 
portion of the growing season. This, of course, is subject to limitations and variations 
according to circumstances, and has given rise to a great variety in the external forms 
of hot-houses, and the angles of their roofs. It decides, however, the necessity of 
placing all houses whose envelope is not entirely transparent, with their glazed side to 
the south. 

1595. The introduction and managemeiU of light is the most important point to attend to in 
the construction of hot-houses. Every gardener knows, that plants will not only not thrive 
without abundance of light, but will not thrive unless they receive its direct influence by 
being placed near or at no great distance from the glass. The cause of this last fact 
has never been satisfactorily explained. (Soiverbt/ on Light and Colors, 1816.) It seems 
probable, that the glass acting in some degree like the triangular prism, partially de- 
composes or deranges the order of the rays. It is an important fact also, that light in 
nature is always accompanied by heat ; and, therefore, it should not only be an object to 
admit the sun's direct rays in clear weather, when he is visible, but even when the rays 
are refracted and deranged by clouds and vapors, when he is invisible. 

1596. The theory of the transmission of light through transparent bodies, is derived from 
a well known law in optics, that the influence of the sun's rays on any surface, both in 
respect to light and heat, is directly as the sine of the sun's altitude, or in other words, 
directly as his perpendicularity to that surface. If the surface is transparent, tlie num- 
ber of rays which pass tlu-ough the substance is governed by the same laws. Thus, if 
1000 rays fall perpendicularly upon a surface of tlie best crown-glass, the whole will 
pass through, excepting about a fortieth part, which the impurities of even the finest 



Book IH. PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN IN HOT-HOUSES. 



313 



crystal, according to Bouguer, will exclude ; but if these rays fall at an incidental angle 
of 75°, 299 rays, according to the same author, will be reflected. The incidental angle, 
it will be recollected, is that contained between the plane of the falling or impinging 
ray, and a perpendicular to the surface on which it falls. 

1597. Tke benefit derived from the sun's influence on the roofs of hot-houses depends, as 
far as respects form of surface, entirely on this principle. Boerhaave applied it to 
houses for preserving plants through the winter, and of course required that the glass 
surface should be perpendicular to the sun's rays at the shortest day, when most heat and 
light were required. Miller (^Dict. art. Su7i,) applied it to plant-stoves, and prefers two 
angles in the roof ; one, as the upright glass, to meet the winter's sun nearly at right 
angles, and the other, as the sloping glass, to meet him at an angle of 45° for summer 
use, and "the better to admit the sun's rays in spring and autumn." Williamson 
(Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 161.) prefers this angle (45°) in all houses, as do most gardeners, 
probably from habit ; but Knight prefers, in forcing-houses at least, such a slope of roof 
as shall be at right angles to the sun's rays, at whatever season it is intended to ripen the 
fruit. In one of the examples given (Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 99.), his object was to 
produce a large and highly flavored crop, rather than a very early crop of grapes ; and 
he accordingly fixed upon such a slope of roof as that the sun's rays might be perpen- 
dicular to it about the beginning of July, the period about which he vsdshed the crop to 
ripen. The slope required to effect this purpose in latitude 52°, he found to form 
an angle of 34° with the plane of the horizon. In the application of the same principle 
to the peach-house (Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 206.) in order to ripen the fruit about mid- 
summer, the roof was made to form an angle wdth the horizon of 28°. Both these 
houses. Knight assures us, produced abundant crops perfectly ripened. 

1598. As data to determine the angles of glass roofs, the following are laid down by 
Wilkinson. The angle contained between the back wall of tine forcing-house, and 
the inclined plane of the glass roof, always equals the sun's altitude, when his rays fall 
perpendicularly on that plane, provided that the inclination of the plane to the horizon be 
at an angle not less than 28° 2', nor greater than 75°. Within the above limits, the 
sun's rays are perpendicular twice in the year, once in going to, and once in returning 
from, the tropic. Hence then, having determined in what season we wish to have the 
most powerful effects from the sun, we may construct our houses accordingly by the 
following rule. Make the angle contained between the back wall of the house and its 
roof, equal to the complement of latitude of the place, less or more the sun's declination 
for that day on which we wish his rays to fall perpendicularly. From the vernal to the 
autumnal equinox, the declination is to be added, and the contrary. Thus, to apply 
these principles to the slope of roof recommended by Knight, for ripening grapes in 
July ; say at London we have 



Latitude of London .... 
Sun's declination on the 21st July 



53" 58' or 34" nearly. 

Wilkinson adds that " as we want the genial warmth of the sun most in spring, 
therefore, for general purposes, that construction would perhaps be best which gives us 
the greatest quantity of perpendicular rays then. If the inclination were 45°, the sun's 
rays would be perpendicular about April 6th and September 4th. And as the rays 
would vary very little from the perpendicular for several days before and after the 
6th of April and September 4th, the loss of rays arising from reflexion, would, as appears 
from the annexed table, be nearly a minimum. Even at the winter solstice, the loss by 
the obliquity of the angle of incidence would be only two in 1000 more than when the 
rays fall perpendicularly, as appears by Bouguer's Table of Rays reflected from Glass. 

Of 1000 incidental rays when the angle of incidence is 



87" 


SC 


584 ai 


e reflected. 


750 


85 




543 




70 


82 


30 


474 




65 


80 




412 




60 


77 


30 


356 




60 



299 r.re reflected. 
222 
157 
112 
57 



40« 34 are reflected. 
30 27 
20 25 
10 25 
1 25 

Bort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 237. 



When, in addition to this, it is considered, that the slope of 45° is the least that will 
effectually drain the water from the intervals between the lapping over of the panes of 
glass, that angle appears to us, as Williamson suggests, decidedly the best slope for 
general purposes. 

1599. Air is supplied by the portion of the atmosphere enclosed by the tegu- 
ment. This air may be raised in temperature, charged with vapors, or renewed, at the 
will of the operator. It might also be put in motion by art, for the sake of obtaining 
strength of stem in ramose or tree-like plants ; but the motion communicated to plants, by 
opening the cover, and exposing them to the direct influence of the air in fine weather, is 
deemed sufficient, either for this purpose, or giving flavor to fruits when advancing to 
maturity. A very fit machine for putting air in motion, or for extracting air, was 
invented by B. Deacon (Patent office, 1812, and Remarks on Hot-houses, part 2.) It 



314 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



is impelled by manual labor, or clock or jack machinery, and has been successfully used 
for ventilating public rooms and churches. 

1600. Soil, it must be obvious, is perfectly within the control of art, which, in fact, 
can far surpass nature, when increased dimensions of the parts of plants and improved 
quality of fruit are objects. 

1601. Water is equally at our command with soil : it may be made to pass through the 
house in a surface rill ; or under the soil in subterraneous channels ; may be retained 
in a cistern or basin; or introduced in tubes, either to throw' up innumerable jets from 
the floor, or pour them down from the . roof to serve as rain. It may be supplied 
directly to the roots of plants, without wetting their leaves, in the manner of irrigation ; 
be stagnated round them, as in natural marshes, or made to ascend as vapor from 
steam-pipes, by pouring it on flues or hot bodies, or even watering the floor or interior 
surface of the house. Having ascended and filled the air, it parts with its caloric, and is 
precipitated on the plants in the form of dew.' 

SuBSECT. 2. Forms of Hot-house Roofs. 

1602. The general form and appearance of the roofs of hot-houses, was, till very lately, 
that of a glazed shed or lean-to ; diflfering only in the display of lighter or heavier frame- 
work or sashes. But Sir George Mackenzie's paper on this subject, and his plan and 
elevation of a semi-dome (Hort. T7-a}is. vol. ii. p. 175.), have materially altered the 
opinion of scientific gardeners. Knight made the first observations on this figure. Sir 
George Mackenzie's plan for forcing-houses, he observes, is extremely interesting ; but 
contains "some defects which cannot be obviated without deviating from the spherical to 
the spheroidal form, which Sir George states to be objectionable, on account of the 
great nicety requisite in the workmanship. On making a few trials, to ascertain tlie 
varieties of forms wMch might be given to forcing-houses, by taking diflferent segments 
of a sphere, I, however, soon became perfectly satisfied that forcing-houses, of excellent 
forms, for almost every purpose, and of any convenient extent, might be constructed 
without deviating from the spherical form ; and I am now perfectly confident, that such 
houses will be erected and kept in repair at less expense, will possess the important 
advantage of admitting greatly more light, and will be found much more durable than 
such as are constructed according to any of the forms which have been hitherto 
recommended. By employing a small segment (Jig. 251. b, c) of a large sphere 
(fg. 251. a, a), as low and as wide a forcing-house as can be wanted for any purpose, 
may be readily obtained. Instead of the half of a hemisphere of thirty feet diameter, 
let the half of one of fifty feet (a, a) be chosen, and from tlie base of this, cut oflT thirty- 
five degrees (6, 6), and from the summit fifteen degrees (c, c) ; and the following pro- 
portions for a forcing-house (fg. 251. b, c) will be given. Its height (including 
eighteen inches of upright opaque front, opening as shutters,) will be twelve feet ; its 
width in the centre fourteen feet, and its length very nearly forty feet ; and there are 
very few purposes for which a house, constructed according to some of the intermediate 
forms, between tliat above mentioned and the acuminated semi-dome, will not be found 

e a 




extremely well adapted." A few observations on Sir G. 
the improvements on it, proposed by Knight, were made by 
Neill (Edin. Encyc. art. iJo7-i.) and the next in order by us in 
Remarks on the Construction of Hot-houses, &c. 1 8 1 7. A yeai* be- 
fore (1816) we had invented a wrought-iron sash-bar, the section 
of which (fig. 252, a) is not more than half an inch wide, 
and a half bar (fig. 252. b) equally Hght (a specimen of both of 
which was presented to the Hort. Soc. in May 1816.) ; and in 
1818 we completed a considerable erection of glass roofs at 
Bayswater (fg. 253.), on the curvilinear principle, the first, we 
believe, attempted in Britain. The object of such a junction 
of different curvatures in the Bayswater example is to show, 



Mackenzie's plan, 
25i' 



and 




Book III. FORMS OF HOT-HOUSE ROOFS. 



315 



that, in regard to form, the strength and tenacity of the iron bar, and the proper ch'^ice 
of shape in the panes of glass, admits of every conceivable variety of glazed surface. 
In this w^e have completely succeeded, without in the least interfering with the objects 
of culture. To render all these improvements available by the public, as matters of trade, 
we transferred, in 1818, our right in the invention of the bar to efficient tradesmen ( W. and 
D. Bailey, 272. Holborn, London), who have since, from our plans, constructed in a most 
excellent style of workmanship, the curvilinear houses in different parts of the country, 
of which we have already given a list and description. (1587.) 




1603. Some forms of hot-houses on the curvilinear 2yn7idple shall now be submitted, and 
afterwards some specimens of the forms in common use ; for common forms, it is to be 
observed, are not recommended to be laid aside in cases where ordinary objects are to be 
attained in the easiest manner ; and they are, besides the forms of roofs, the most con- 
venient for pits, frames, and glass tents, as already exemplified in treating of these struc- 
tures. 

1604. Tlie acuminated semi-globe, 
{fig. 25^.) The most perfect form ^55jSr-T^ 254 
of a hot-house is indisputably that of 
a glazed semi-globe. Here plants, as 
far as respects light, would be nearly 
in the same situation as if in the open 
air; and art, as already observed, 
(1592.) can add heat, and all the other 
agents of vegetation, nearly to perfec- 
tion. But in respect to excluding the 
rain, the semi-globe is too flat at top, 

and requires to be acuminated ; and in regard to economy, the first cost and expense of 
maintaining an artificial heat against its constant abduction through a thin medium, ex- 
posed to the north winds, would, for most purposes, be a great objection. 

1605. An acuminated semi-dome, or a vertical section of the last figure, placed against 
a wall built in a direction from east to west, removes a great part of the objection as to 
heat, and will still admit an adequate supply of light to plants kept constantly in the 
same position, or turned very frequently. This, therefore, may be reckoned the second 
best form for a plant-habitation for general purposes, and without reference to particular 
modes of culture. 

1606. The semi-ellijyse {fig. 255.) is a figure which, in the plan (a, a), displays half an 







316 



SCIENCE OF GARDENIN<J. 



Part II. 



ellipsis, or oval, and in the superstructure (6, b) one fourth part of the solid figure. Its ad- 
vantage over a semi-dome is, that, whether the trees are to be trained on a trellis parallel 
to the glass, or against the back wall, a greater surface for training is obtained in propor- 
tion to the volume of cubic air to be heated. On the other hand, its glass surface is less 
perfect in respect to perpendicularity to the sun's rays ; though in this respect the differ- 
ence is not of great consequence. Houses of this sort, Adanson informs us, are of Dutch 
invention. As the sun retired from them in the afternoon, the eastern parts of the ellipse, 
as they fell successively into shade, were covered with reeds or mats ; and, in like manner, 
in the morning the east end was uncovered first, and the west end only as the sun came 
round on it. (^Families des Plantes, vol. i. Pref.) 

1607. The ]mrallelogra}7i with curved roof and ends {Jig- 256.) is one of the most con- 
venient forms of curvilinear roofs for the common purposes of culture, as it admits of 
more regular figures of beds, paths, trellises, &c. witliin, and of eveiy variety of dimen- 
sion. In regard to light, heat, and beauty, they do not differ materially from the semi- 
ellipse. Of this form, a considerable number of forcing-houses, and some green-houses, 
have been erected. Among the latter may be noticed one for Messrs. Loddiges, and 
another for the Horticultural Society. [See the Table, 1587.) 




1608. The ridge and furrow roof may be effected either in curvilinear or right-lined hot- 
houses ; and consists in placing the bars in the rebates of which the glass is put, in such a 
manner as that the section of the roof may always be a zig-zag line, in which the space 
traversed by each side or zig may either contain several bars (Jig. 257.), or merely one 
pane of glass. (Jig. 258.) In both modes it is generally desirable, that the ends of all 




tlie bars should terminate in one horizontal line on the top of the parapet ; which need 
not, however, be the case in their termination against the back wall. Some apparent 
difiicdlty of glazing is thus occasioned in the lower part of the roof ; but the difficulty 
is only apparent, for as smaller and only triangular pieces of glass can be used there, 
it becomes, in fact, more economical, by occasioning the use of pieces of glass which 
would otherwise be thrown away. The advantages of ridge and furrow roofing are 
chiefly obtainable in countries liable to heavy falls of snow or hail, and in houses which 
are parallelograms in plan. Almost any weight of snow may be carried by such roofs, 
especially when the bars are not far apart, as the pressure wiU evidently be almost 
entirely on the upper bars, and not on the glass. As to hail, as it will always meet the 
surface of the glass in a ridge and furrow roof at an angle of 45°, it can never do it 
much, if any, harm. Curvilinear houses with roofs of this description are therefore 
peculiarly suitable for the north of Europe, and especially for Russia ; and in houses 
with triangular and straight-lined roofs, the sun (a, Jigs. 257, & 258.) will be perpendi- 
cular to half the roof (by being so to half each ridge) at that period which forms half 



Book III. 



FORMS OF HOT-HOUSE ROOFS. 



317 



the time between his rising and mid-day, and perpendicular to the other half, at half 
the period of time between mid-day and sunset. Another advantage of ridge and furrow- 
roofs is, that the laps between the panes, unless very broad or puttied, are always kept 
free from accumulations of dust. This takes place in consequence of their angle of in- 
clination, which being about 45°, the gravity of the column of water between the laps 
is found to counterbalance the attraction of cohesion, and slides in the lap from the 
crown to the bottom of the furrow. 



259 




While the parallelogram part of 

260 



1609. The general form 
and appearance of a ridge and 
furrow house {fig- 259.) is 

not materially different from 
that of others. Where the 
curved end is adopted, it vdW. 
not be necessary to de\-iate 
from the common mode of 
glazing in these parts of the 

roof, unless \v\\h a view to resist a weight of snow 
the roof, therefore, is ridged 

{fig. 260. a, a), the ends wall 
present a smooth surface 

{fig. 260. b, b). 

1610. The poli/prosopic 
hot-house {fig. 261. ) re- 
sembles a curvilinear house, 
but differs in ha\-ing the 
surface thrown into a num- 
ber of faces, the chief advan- 
tages of which are, 1. That 
by hinging all the different 

faces at their upper angles, and by having rods connecting the lower outside corners of 
the faces terminating in chains which go over pulleys in the top or above the back wall, 
the whole roof, including the ends, may be opened or raised sympathetically, like Vene- 
tian blinds {fig. 261. a.), either so as each sash or face may be placed in the plane of the 
angle of the sun's rays at the time, ox to the perpendicular, to admit a shower of rain. 





b 



In consequence of this arrangement, the plants in a polyprosopic house may, at 
any time, and in a few minutes, be placed in effect, or as far as respects light, air, wind, 
rain, dew, &c. in the open air ; and being so placed, may, whenever desired, be as 
speedily restored again to their proper climate. The arrangement by which this is effected, 
and which is perfectly simple, is applicable to every form of hot-house, whether of glass on 
all sides, on two, or on three sides ; or whether the roof is formed of curved or straight lines. 
We consider it, indeed, to be the ne plus ultra of improvement, as far as air and light are 
concerned. One objection to all curvilinear fonns in this respect is, that the roof, unless 
a considerable expense be incurred, must be fixed, and air admitted by horizontal wooden 
or glazed shutters in the parapets, or between the props, and allowed to escape by sky- 
lights or shutters at the top of the back wall ; but here the air is equally admitted in every 
part of the house, in the most natural manner, without the creation of currents or eddies, 
and without excluding any more sun than will be obstructed by the thickness or edge of 
the faces or sashes. In like manner, a great objection to straight-lined roofs with sliding 
sashes is, that air can only be partially admitted, and that while this is being done, one 
glazed frame being slid over the other in all those parts where there is a double portion of 
glass, a double portion of light must be excluded ; and as opticians are aware, the light 
so transmitted will be doubly decomposed by passing through two surfaces of glass. 

1611. This roof, with respect to the suns rays, may be considered as exactly equivalent 
to a curvilinear figure whose curve lines shall touch all the angles of the faces, so that the 
sun in general would be nearly perpendicular to some one face every hour in the day, 
and every day in the year. A specimen of glass roof, constructed on this principle, 
formed a part of the erection at Bayswater (1602.), already referred to, but which 
owing to local alterations it became necessary to remove in 1 823. 



318 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1612. A range of hot-houses {Jig. 262.) of any or of all the different varieties of cur- 
vilinear surfaces, every one will allow to have a better effect than the common glazed 
sheds or lean-to hot-houses of kitchen-gardens. 



262 




1613. Lean-to glass roofs are of various sorts. The simplest and most economical hot- 
house of this description may be compared to a large pit. The back and front walls and 
ends being of masonrj', and a sloping side above of glass, and either fixed or moveable ; 
if fixed, then aii- is admitted by openings in the front wall and top of the back wall ; if 
moveable, the sashes slide, or are moved in grooves, the lower one being drawn up, and 
the upper sash let do\ra. Such a house vnll succeed perfectly well for grapes and pines. 
The first improvement on this form consists in forming mo\ing glass frames in front, in- 
stead of the opaque wall of masonry and shutters ; a second consists in adding glass ends ; 
a third, in forming the roof into two slopes ; and a fourth, in bevelling the positions of 
the front sashes, and forming the whole roof into three different slopes, the lower for 
receiving the sun's rays in winter ; the second for spring and autumn j and the third, for 
midsummer. 

1614. A variety of other forins will afterwards be given, both regular and anomalous, 
adapted to specific purposes of culture, particular situations, as conserA-atories or cabinet 
appendages to mansions, or for variety- in flower-gardens. 

SuBSECT. 3. Details of the Co7istncction of Roofs, or the glazed Part of Hot-houses. 

1615. The glazed tegument, or cover, may either be wholly fixed, wholly moveable, or 
partake of both modes. Each of these varieties may be considered in respect to com- 
ponent parts and materials. 

1616. Fixed roofs are eitlier formed of a series of bars "of iron or' wood, proceeding 
at once from the front parapet to the back wall ; or from the base to the centre, or they 
may be composed of sashes placed beside each other, or between rafters, as in common 
lean-to houses. Roofs of tliis fixed kind have been approved of by Knight for vines ; 
by Beattie, of Scone, for peaches ; and by most cultivators for the culture of pines and 
palms ; but, excepting for the two latter pui-poses, the general experience of gardeners is 
(in our opinion, very justly,) against them. It is to be observed, that in all cases of fixed 
roofs, shutters for ventilation are formed in the parapet, and in the upper part of the back 
wall immediately under the roof. Economy in first cost, and less breakage of glass after- 
wards, are the chief arguments in their favor ; the latter advantage, however, is generally 
denied, it being improper glazing rather than the moving of the sashes, which occasions 
the breakage of glass. 

1617. Moveable ?-oofs are generally composed of sashes, six or eight feet 
long, and three or four feet wide, which slide over each other, and are 
moved by cords and pulleys, and sometimes balanced by weights, to 
facilitate their motion ; but they are also occasionally formed of sashes 
which open outwards by means of iron levers at their lower extremities, 
and hinges at their upper angles (fg. 263.), in the manner of the poly- 
prosopic house, (fg. 261.) 

1618. Roofs partaking of both characters generally have a few sashes 
which let dow^n or rise up in tlie roof or front glass ; or in the 
case of domes or acuminated roofs, the top part rises in the manner of a sky-light. 

1619. The material of fxed 7-oofs is generally iron, as being least bulky in proportion 
to the strength required, most durable, and admitting, in the case of curvilinear roofs, a 
curvature to be formed at less expense than it could be of timber. In these roofs, in gene- 
ral, no other bars or opaque bearers are required than those for receiving the glass ; and 
hence their sunplicity and unity with regard to component parts, and the equal degree of 
transparency in eveiy part of tlie surface. 

1620. The materials of moveable roofs are most commonly timber; but frequently also 
timber and iron, or timber and copper joined together. Tlius cast-iron and wrought-iron 
rafters are frequently used ; and in these are placed sashes with styles and rails of timber, 
and bars of copper, and of cast or wrought iron. Two of the lightest-roofed shed-houses 
yet built with sliding sashes are, one by Timmins, of Birmingham, in 1811, at Loddiges' 
nursery, in w^hich the rafters are of wrought-iron, cased in copper, to wiiioh are screwed 
pulleys, on which the sashes, composed of copper bars and timber styles, slide without 
grooves ; and the other is at the Union Nurseiy, King's Road, erected by J. S. Jorden, 
in 1815, in which the upper part of the roof only moves ; the rafters are trusses of 
wrought-iron, supporting bars of cast-iron ; and the entire sash is formed of hollow^ sheet- 




Book III. 



GLAZING OF HOT-HOUSE ROOFS. 



919 



copper. The use of sheet-copper, however, may now be considered as exploded in hot- 
house building, wrought-iron being a much more economical, wholesome, durable, and 
equally elegant substitute for timber. In general, it may be observed, fliat where sashes 
and rafters are used in the formation of moveable roofs, a mixture of timber and metal is 
better than timber alone, the former in extremes of temperature being liable to expansion 
and contraction. Thus sashes with iron bars, and the outer frame or the styles and rails 
of timber, move readily in the grooves of cast-iron rafters, because when the metal expands 
with great heat, the timber in a slight degree contracts. The reverse is also the case, and 
cast-iron sashes slide readily in timber rafters. In both cases small rollers should be in- 
serted, either into the sides of the sash or the fillet or groove of the rafters, or both. Cast- 
iron rafters need not, for general purposes, be more than half an inch 264 
thick, and six or eight inches deep ; where the house is wide, they 
require to be supported by slender pillars. Wrovight-iron rafters 
may be rolled out of broad bar-iron {fig. 264.), so as to present as 
light and elegant an appearance as our moulded wrought-iron sash- 
bar, {fig. 252.) 

1621. Arrangements for covering the roofi of hot-houses hy hoards, canvass, or mats, to be 
lifted or rolled up or down, might be easily contrived and advantageously used ; but ex- 
cepting in pits and low hot-houses, they are not thought worth attending to, it being con- 
sidered better to gain the admittance of all the light possible, than lose it for the sake of 
a little economy in fuel. 

1622. The pUlai^s or props which are placed on the parapet, to support the rafters, whether 
of timber or iron, are generally formed of the same thickness as the rafters, because 
similar sashes are placed between them. 

1623. Interior uprights to support wide roofs are almost always of iron, either wrought- 
metal or small cast-iron columns, sometimes forming intersecting arches, or treillaged 
capitals, or connecting imposts for training creepers. 

1624. The tvall-plate, or cojnng of the ^mrapet, is sometimes a plate of timber, some- 
times of stone, and occasionally of cast-iron. Wherever upright glass is not employed, 
it must of necessity form also the guttering for the water of the roof, and at the same 
time for the water which condenses on the glazed inside of the house. 

1625. Objections to metallic roofs. In general it may be observed, that till lately gar- 
deners had a prejudice against metallic roofs. Of authors, who have avowed this, Aber- 
crombie, Mean, and Nicol, may be mentioned ; others have adopted a cautious neutrality, 
as M'Phail, Forsyth, Aiton, &c. Philosophical and amateur gardeners have generally 
approved of their introduction ; among which may be named Knight, Sir George Mac- 
kenzie, Loddige, and others. We shall here, as briefly as possible, enumerate the ob- 
jections to metallic roofs, which are expense, rust, breakage of glass, abduction of heat, 
and attraction of electricity. 

Expense. Metallic houses are, in general, rather more expensive than wooden ones ; but they admit 
more light and are more durable and elegant. 

Rust. That all ordinary metals are liable to rust is undeniable. This objection cannot be got rid of. 
The reply is, balance against it the advantages of light and durability ; and take into- consideration that 
careful painting will in a great degree prevent it. Knight observes, if one third of the sum requisite to 
keep a wooden roof properly painted be expended upon an iron roof, no injury will ever be sustained from 
the liability of that to suffer from rust. {Hart. Trans, v. <2S\.) 

Breakage of glass. This is altogether denied, as respects cast or wrought iron at least, and if appli- 
cable at all, can only be so to copper or compound metallic roofs, where weakness produces a bending of 
the sash ; or whore corrosion or unequal expansion of improper mixtures of metals as iron cased with 
copper, occasions a twisting of the bar. Cast-iron or solid wrought-iron frames, have never been known 
to occasion the breakage of more glass than wood. The grand cause of the breakage of glass, arises in 
almost every case from glazing with broad laps. The expansibility of copper is greater than that of brass, 
and that of brass greater than the expansion of iron in the proportion of 95, 89. 60. {Young's Lect.) Con- 
sequently copper is above one third part more likely to break glass than iron ; but when it is considered, 
that a rod of copper expands only one hundred thousandth part of its length, with every degree of heat, 
and that iron only expands the one hundred and sixty-six thousand six hundred and sixty-sixth part, 
the practical efiects of our climate on these metals can never amount to a sum equal to th'e breakage of 
glass. 

Abduction of heat. The power of metals to conduct heat is an objection, which, like those of rusting 
and additional expense, cannot be denied. The reply is, the smaller the bars, the less their power of con- 
ducting ; and a thick coat of paint, and the covering of half the bar by the putty requisite to retain the 
glass, also lessens this power ; it is added, heat may be supplied by art, but solar light, the grand advan- 
tage gained by metallic bars, cannot, by any human means, be supplied otherwise than by the transparency 
of the roof 

Attraction of electricity. To this objection it is replied, that if metallic hot-houses attract electricity, 
they also conduct it to the ground, so that it cannot do any harm. Also that no instance can be produced 
of iron hot-houses having been injured by the effects of this fluid. 

SuBSECT. 4. Glazing of Hot-house Roofs. 

1626. Glazing was formerly performed with the very worst description of glass, called 
green glass ; and accordingly, Adanson, in 1710, recommends the adoption of Bohe- 
mian glass, then the best in Europe, but now equalled by our best crown or patent crown 
tables. If, as Bouguer has shown, one fortieth part of the light which falls perpendicu- 
larly on the purest crystal is reflected off, or does not pass through it, it may safely be 




f20 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11. 



assorted, that green glass reflects off more than three fourths. Econom)-, as to the 
quality of glass, therefore, is defeating the intention of building hot-houses, which is to 
imitate a natural climate in all the qualities of light, heat, air, water, eartli, &c. as per- 
fectly as possible. Without a free influx of light, the sickly pale etiolated appearance of 
plants is more painful than agreeable to the eye of any who take an interest in the 
vegetable kingdom. As the panes or pieces of glass employed in hot-house roofs lap 
over each other, the air which enters by the lap, when uneven glass is employed or care- 
less glazing perfoiTTied, no doubt, suggested the idea of closing the lap with lead or putty. 
But both these modes being found to prevent the water which collects on the inner sur- 
face of glass roofs, from escaping by the outside surface, gave rise, first, to partially 
closing the lap ; and subsequently to various forms of panes, and descriptions of laps, of 
which the principal are as follow. 

1G27. Common sash-glazing is perfonned by even the best hot-house builders with a 
lap of from one fourth to three fourths of an inch ; but by the great majority of glaziers, 
with a full inch lap. The objection to this mode is, that the broader the lap, the greater 
the quantity of water retained in it by capillary attraction ; and when such water, tlirough 
a deficiency of heat in the house, is frozen, the glass is certain of being broken. But 
supposing this breakage not to take place, the broader the lap, the sooner it fills up with 
earthy matter, forming an opaque space, both injurious by excluding light, and unpleas- 
ing because imperfect : or if the lap is to be puttied, the opacity is the same. The 
accidental filling up of such spaces (when not puttied by art) with dust and earthy matter, 
is what prevents them from being broken, by excluding tJie water in a great degree. 
"Where the lap is not more than one fourth of an inch, it may be puttied without a very 
disagreeable effect. The rectangular pane is the only form which can with propriety be 
admitted in curvilinear roofs ; and tlie most approved practice as to the lap, whether in 
roofs or common sashes, is never to make the lap greater than the thickness of the glass, 
and not to close it Avith putty. It is extremely difficult to get glaziers to attend to this ; 
but by employing superior workmen, and obliging them to remove every pane which 
shall project over the other more than one sixteenth of an inch, the thing may be accom- 
plished. This is not only the most elegant of all modes for a curved roof, or indeed for 
any other, but the safest for tlie glass, which is, we repeat, seldom broken by any other 
natural means than the expansion of frozen water retained between the laps. It must 
not be forgotten that this form is also by far the easiest to repair, and that no mode of- 
puttying or closing a narrow lap with lead is of long duration. 

265 




a b 

1 628. Glazing uith a leaden lap (265. a) was formerly practised with a view of ex- 
cluding the air by a more permanent material than putty. The sort of lap made use of, 
is that used by glaziers in lattice- work windows (Jig. 266. a.) The panes being inserted 
in the grooves, formed in the edges of the lap, are of 
course all in one plane, and the water in running 
down either the outside or inside of the roof, must ac- 
cumulate on the upper edge of each riband or cross- 
string of lead, and so penetrate between it and the glass, 
and drop on the plants in the house. Tliis indeed 
forms the chief objection to the leaden lap, which is 
now deservedly exploded. 

5 1629. u4n improved form of lead lap (fig. 266. b) 
consists in using slips of lead rolled so thin as not to 
be thicker than fine drawing paper, in connection with 
putty, and for the sole purpose of retaining it in its place. 

beyond the exterior edges of the glass, so that it readily permits the descent of the water. 
Its thinness renders it easily manageable, and the time employed in filling up such laps, 
when one man is stationed outside the glass and another mtliin, is not much more than 
that occupied in glazing a roof with the common putty lap. Such lead laps may either 
have a small opening in the middle, or at the angles, and are equally apphcable to any 
of the modes of glazing to be described. The lead is rolled to any width, and dipt or 
cut to the size wanted as used. 




c b 

It is never allowed to project 



Book III. 



GLAZING OF HOT-HOUSE ROOFS. 



1630. The copper lap {Jig. 265. c) is the invention of D. Stewart, and its origin may be 
recognised in the ess-shaped shred of lead introduced by glaziers between newly glazed 
panes, to retain them in their places (Jig. 265. d). The lap is drawn through graduated 
moulds till at last it is brought into the' shape of the letter ess compressed. It adds 
greatly to the strength of glazing, by giving each pane a solid firm bearing on the upper 
and lower edges, and by preventing water from lodging between the panes. Where the 
sashes are flat, however, it occasions droppings of condensed water on the plants, against 
which there is a general prejudice among gardeners ; and it has been alleged, that the 
drip from copper becomes in a few years poisonous from the partial oxidation of the 
metal. In steep roofs, however, this objection does not hold, and there remains in such 
cases only the objection of the opacity produced by the lap. It has been used in the 
large conservatories at East Sheen and Woodlands ; but appears to us much too opaque 
for hot-house roofs, and only adapted for sky-lights in common buildings. If so much 
light can be spared as is lost by these laps, it were better to increase the number of sash- 
bars, by which the panes would be smaller, and consequently stronger and less expensive, 
and no metallic lap would be wanting. It is now entirely or nearly out of use. 

1631. Fragment glazing {Jig. 265. b). This is the primitive mode adopted by nur- 
serymen and market-gardeners, before it was supposed that the productions raised under 
glass would pay for any thing better. In steep roofs it answers nearly as v/ell as any 
other mode rn respect to keeping out rain and air, but as a somewhat greater lap is re- 
quired in these crooked or undulated pieces of glass, a flat roof is liable to be covered by 
dark lines, formed by the lodging of earthy matter in the laps or interstices. W^here the 
bars are not placed more than six or seven inches asunder, centre from centre, this method 
is much more economical than any other ; and is therefore useful for such country-nur- 
serymen or market-gardeners as have not, like the nurserymen of London, the opportu- 
nity of purchasing the hot-houses of decayed gentlemen or bankrupts ; and consequently 
are obliged to build and construct every part ab origine. 

1632. In rhomboidal glazing (Jig. 265. c), the panes are in the form of rhomboids, the 
advantage of which is, that the water runs rapidly to the lower angle, and passes off both 
inside and outside along the bar ; and what is retained by capillary attraction, is alleged 
to be so small as not to have the power of breaking the glass. 

1633. Perforated shield glazing (Jig. 265. d). This is a supposed improvement on the last 
described mode, which it would be, were it not that by the perforation in the upper part 
of the shield as it is called, the dexter and sinister chiefs are liable to be broken off ; and 
by the prolonged acumination of its base, it is rendered obnoxious to the same casualty 
in the nombril point. 

1634. Entire shield glazing (Jig- 265j e). This plan has been used by Butler, a London 
hot-house builder ; but it does not seem either to merit or obtain general adoption. It 
is difficult, indeed, to conceive what are the arguments in its favor beyond that of 
strength, with a very great loss of light, which may surely be better obtained by Stewart's 
lap. 

1635. Curvilinear lap glazing (Jig. 265. f). This mode appears, unless on very flat 
roofs, preferable to the common square mode, because the curve has a tendency to 
conduct the water to the centre of the pane. If the lap is broad, however, the globule 
retained there by attraction is situated precisely in the point where it is calculated to do 
most mischief, being in fact as a power on the end of two levers. When the lap is not 
more than one sixteenth of an inch, no evil of this sort can happen ; it also happens less 
frequently for the first few years after puttying the lap, and leaving a small opening in 
the centre for the water to escape. In time, however, according as the house has been 
used, the putty begins to decay, it becomes saturated with water, and during frost, when- 
ever the temperature of the house is inadequate to prevent this water from freezing, the 
panes are certain of being broken. It can hardly be too often impressed on the mind of 
the gardener, that puttying or otherwise filling up the lap is in no case requisite, if care 
be taken in the glazing to use flat glass, and never to let the lap exceed one fourth, or 
fall short of one sixteenth of an inch. This is now rendered the more easily practicable 
since the invention of a variety of glass called patent crown glass, and which, purchased 
in panes fit for hot-houses, is hardly more expensive than the other. It may be added, 
that taking all circumstances into consideration, and especially that of repairs, the common 
rectangular pane of a small size is, according to common consent, decidedly the best. 

1636. Reversed curvilinear glazing (Jig. 265. g) is a method of throwing the water of 
condensation to the bars, so as to carry it off by their means, and, if possible, prevent it 
from dropping in the house. 

1637. Anmnalous surfaces can only be glazed by throwing the panes into triangles, 
and by no other manner, unless by annealing and bending the glass, because three is the 
greatest number of points that will touch a globular surface in one plane. By adopting 
triangular panes the most singular-shaped roofs may be glazed as perfectly as the simplest 
forms of surface. 

Y 



322 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1638. Though the making of^ptttti/ be hardly within the gardener's province, yet it is 
fitting he should know that there are several sorts, of which the following are the prin- 
cipal : — 

Soft putty, being a well-wrought paste of flour of whitening and raw linseed-oil ; 
Hard putty, composed of whitening and boiled linseed-oil ; 

Harder putty, in which a portion of turpentine, or what is called, drying, is introduced ; and the 
Hardest ptitty, composed of oil, red or white lead, and sand. The first is the most durable of all, be- 
cause it forms an oleaginous coat on the surface, but it requires a longer time for drying. The hard sorts 
are apt to crack, if not soon well painted ; and the hardest of all, though it appears to be impenetrable, 
aSd of the greatest durability, yet renders it difficult to replace a pane when brolien. It seems, therefore, 
quite unfit for hot-houses. Much depends on well working the putty some days before it is to be used j 
and in general, that putty which has been ground and wrought in a putty-mill is to be preferred. 

1639. The best sort of paint fo?' hot -houses is that which, for the last twenty years, 
has been known by the name of anti-corrosion, which is composed chiefly of the 
powdered scoriae of the lead-mines of Col. Beaumont, near Hexham. There are other 
sorts, which are called anti- corrosive and ifnpeyietrable paints ; but tliey have not been long 
enough in use to enable us to recommend them. It may be a sufficient recommendation 
of the anti-corrosion to state, that it is used in government works, and especially on all 
cast-iron erectipns, by Rennie, Telford, and others. As to the color of paint, or washes 
of any sort, for the walls or interior of hot-houses, it is almost unnecessary to observe, 
that as light is the grand object, white is to be preferred. 

SuBSECT. 5. JValls and Sheds of Hot-houses. 

1 640. Walls of some sort are necessary for almost every description of hot-house, for 
even those which are formed of glass on all sides are generally placed on a basis of 
masonry. But as by far the greater number are erected for culinary purposes, they are 
placed in the kitchen-garden, with the upper part of their roof leaning against a wall, 
which forms their northern side or boundary, and is commonly called tlie back wall, and 
the lower part resting on a low range of supports of iron or masonry, commonly called 
the froUt wall. Behind the back wall a shed is commonly formed, and under this is 
placed the furnace, the fuel to be used therein, and other materials or implements con- 
nected with the culture or management of the hot-house. 

1641. The parapet, or front ivall, of hot-houses comes first in order. Where upright 
Bashes are used, there are generally brick walls, either carried up solid from the found- 
ation, or built on piers, according as it may be desirable to have the roots of the plants 
within pass through to the soil without, or not. In the case of fixed roofs, that part of 
the wall which is above ground is formed with horizontal openings, to which opaque or 
glazed shutters are fixed, opening outwards for the purpose of admitting air. A recent 
improvement on parapets consists in forming them of cast-iron props or pillars (fg' 267.), 
which are placed on a basis of two or three bricks (c, c), three or four feet under the sur- 
face : to these props, top and bottom rails are fitted, which are rebated to receive a shut- 
ter, (fg. 268.) The wall-plate (a, b,fgs. 267, & 268.), which receives the ends (d) of 
the rafters or sash-bars, forms also a gutter for carrying off the water of the roof, exter- 
nally (a), and the condensed water internally {fgs. 267, & 268. b). 




1642. Where tlie roof is moveable on the polyprasopic plan, no such shutters are re- 
quired, and therefore the ends of the rafters may go at once three or four feet into the 
soil, according to the nature of tlie foundations, and rest on brick-work ; the surface of 
the ground, and the lower edge of the lowest sash being united by a* moveable plate, 
forming at once a gutter and a rest for the lower rail of the sash. 



Book III. 



HOT-HOUSE FURNACES AND FLUES. 



323 



1643. Holes for vine-steins (Jig. 268./, f). In all parapets or front arrangements 
where vines are to be introduced from without, particular care must be had to provide for 
the withdrawing of the vines, even when their wood is of a con-siderable age and thick- 
ness. For this reason, where horizontal shutters are used, the lower styles or pieces 
against which they shut, should always be moveable ; and, in general, it may be stated, 
that of the various m.odes for the introduction of the vine from without which have been 
adopted, that by cutting off a corner of the sloping or front sash, is the best ; by this 
means, when the sash is opened, a vine of almost any size (Jig. 269. a) may be taken out 
with ease. A piece of thin board or cork cut every year to fit the increasing diameter of 
the shoot is screwed to the wall-plate or lower style, as the case may be, and the vacuity, 
which must necessarily be left around the stem, is closed up with moss. When the vine 
is to be taken out by unscrewing the triangular board, and opening the sash, or shutter, 
a more than sufficient space for drawing out any ordinary-sized plant is obtained without 
the least trouble or chance of fracturing the shoots. It may be added, that in curvilinear 
ground plans, some exertion of design and nicety of workmanship is required in framing 
the horizontal shutters, so as they shall not twist, and also that they require in such cases 
to be hinged with what are called coach -hinges. 

1644. Glazed shutters (Jig- 269.) are preferred by some to an opaque panel, the utility 
of which must, of course, depend on the relative height of 

the pots or plants immediately within. The mode of 
opening such shutters, and keeping them open (Jig. 270.), 
is perfectly simple. 

1645. The back wall is in general straight or perpendi- 
cular, and carried up one or two feet higher than the glass, 
to shelter it from the north. (Jig. 255. ) Sometimes, how- 
ever, it is bevelled or curved to meet the sun's rays. 
(Jig. 261. b) 

1646. The back shed (Jig. 256. a) is naturally con- 
nected v-dth the back wall, and in form and extent, is ge- 
nerally regulated more by its uses as a working.-shed, than 
by the mere enclosure and covering of the fire-places and 
fuel, its original and legitimate objects. The width may be varied at pleasure, but sel- 
dom exceeds ten or twelve feet, and the height is generally seven or eigiit feet in the lower 
wall, and nearly of the same height as the back wall ; but where opening shutters are 
formed in the back wall, for the purposes of ventilation, the upper angle of the shed-roof 
must be kept under the level of the shutters to save intricacy of contrivance. But as these 
shutters frequently do not communicate directly with the open air, but with passages 
under the shed-roof, or channels in the top of the back wall, the height of the shed may 
in such cases be made higher. In some cases, instead of shutters (Jig. 270.), boards slid- 
ing in grooves, or a sort of Venetian blind, or which is best, flaps held close by a cord, 
pulley, and weight, are used ; but the great heat of hot-houses is apt to wai-p and derange 
some of these contrivances. The essential part of the back shed, as respects the hot- 
house, is the situation for the furnace and fuel, or steam apparatus, with which no other 
use to which it may be applied must be allowed to interfere. Sometimes back sheds are 
not enclosed, but supported on pillars, in which case they are used for fermenting tan, 
leaves, or dung, growing mushrooms on ridges of dung, holding pots, pease-sticks, and 
other similar purposes. Where the range of hot-houses is situated in the middle of the 
garden, great care must be taken, that it present nothing offensive, and that the sheds 
behind neither resemble a row of workshops, alms-houses, brickmakers' sheds, or cattle- 
hovels. An effectual way of preventing this, is by carrying up the walls of the sheds as 
high as the other walls, thus completely concealing their roofs. 




SuBSECT. 6. Fiirnaces and Flues. 

1647. The most general mode of heating hot-houses is by fires and smoke-flues, and on a 
small scale, this will probably long remain so. Heat is the same material, however pro- 
duced ; and a given quantity of fuel will produce no more heat when burning under a 
boiler than when burning in a common furnace. Hence, with good air-tight flues, 
formed of well burnt bricks and tiles accurately cemented with lime-putty, and arranged 
so as the smoke and hot air may circulate freely, every thing in culture, as far as respects 
heat, may be perfectly accomplished. 

1648. The hot~liouse fire-place, or furnace, consists of several parts : a chamber, or oven, 
to contain the fuel, surrounded by brick-work, in which fire-brick (a sort containing a 
large proportion of sand, and thus calculated by their hardness not to crumble by heat, 
&c.) is used; a hearth or iron grating, on which the fuel is laid; a pit or chamber 
in which the ashes drop from this grating, and iron doors to the fuel-chamber and 
ash-pit. 

Y 2 



^324 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1649. The iron doors admit of several varieties ; but it does not appear that there is any 
great difference in the effect produced by the different plans of Nicol, Hay, Stevpart, and 
others. A double door has the advantage of durahility, of preserving heat, and of not so 
readily admitting cool air to pass over the fire ; which air, of course, must be less heated, 
and consequently less capable of heating the flue than such as, entering from below, passes 
through it. The use of the ash-pit door is to act as a regulator to the current of air, or as 
a damper or suffocator. 

1650. Vacuities have been formed around furnaces, and by communications between these 
and the open air, and an air-flue in the house, a stream of heated air has been introduced: 
but this air is so little at the command of the gardener ; is so dried up or burnt, as the 
phrase is, that is, mixed with offensive gases from decomposed water, burned oil, iron, 
sulphur, or very fine dust ; and so liable to be mixed with smoke, that such plans are now 
generally laid aside. Vacuities, however, are frequently formed round furnaces, and 
along the first four or six feet of the flue, in order to temperate the heat in that part ; but 
such vacuities rarely have any communication with the air of the house. Where a house 
of considerable length and volume is to be heated, it is generally deemed better to increase 
the number of furnaces than to increase their size, or have recourse to air-flues ; for when 
the latter practice is resorted to, they are necessarily projected so far into the shed, or 
otherwise kept back from the house, that a great part of the heat is lost in the mass of 
brick-work which surrounds them. Small furnaces, on the contrary, may be built in great 
part under the walls or floor of the house. In countries where turf, wood, or inferior 
coal, is used for fuel, the chamber of the furnace must be large ; on the contrary, where 
the best coal, cinders, charcoal, or coke (the three last, the best of all fuel for hot-houses, 
as having no smoke), is used, they may be made smaller in proportion to the diflferent de- 
grees of intensity of the heat produced by these different materials. In fixing on the 
situation of furnaces, care must be taken that they are always from one to two feet under 
the level of the flue, in order to favor the circulation of the hot air and smoke, by allow- 
ing it to ascend. 

1651. A small lime-kiln {fig. 271. a) is 
in some places constructed or fixed over 
hot-house furnaces for burning lime ; and 
when the heat, which passes through the 
limestone, is made to enter the flues (^), 
it is evident a real benefit must result from 
the practice, as the heat applied to the 
burning of the lime in the common way 
escapes in the atmosphere. The grate 
or fuel bars (d) are contrived to draw 
out, by means of a grooved frame (c), 
so that w^hen the lime is burned, it then 
di-ops into the ash-pit (b). ' ^ 

1652. As to the size of hot-house fire- - 

places, tlie door of the furnace may be from \ 

ten inches to one foot squai-e ; the fuel- \ 

chamber from two to four feet long, from 
eighteen inches to two feet wide, and of 
the same dimensions as to height. Every 
thing depends on the kind of fuel to 
be used. For Newcastle coal, a chamber 
of two feet long, eighteen inches broad, 
and eighteen inches high, will answer as well as one of double the size, where smoky 
Welsh or Lancashire coal is to be used. Various contrivances, as hoppers, horizontal 
wheels, &c. have been invented for supplying fuel to furnace-fires without manual labor, 
and especially during night ; but from the nature of combustion, and the common mate- 
rials used in this country to supply it, no effectual substitute has yet been discovered. If 
wood or charcoal, or even cinders or coke were used, there vt^ould be a greater chance of 
such inventions succeeding, but we do not think ourselves warranted in detailing any of 
them. 

1653. The modes of constructing fiues are various. The original practice was to build 
them on the naked earth, like drains or conduits ; or in the solid walls of the backs and 
fronts of the pits, like the flues of dwelling-houses. The first improvement seems to have 
been that of detaching them from the soil by building them on flag-stones, or tiles sup- 
ported by bricks ; and the next w^as, probably, that of detaching them from every descrip- 
tion of wall, and building their sides as thin as possible. A subsequent amelioration 
consisted in not plastering them within, but in making their joints perfect by lime-putty, 
by which means the bricks were left to exert their full influence in giving out the heat of 
the smoke to the house. 





Book III. HOT-HOUSE FURNACES AND FLUES. 



323 



272 



1654. The sides of common Jlv£S are commonly built of bricks placed on edge, and the 
top covered by tiles, either of the full width of the flue outside measure, or one inch nar- 
rower, and the angles filled up with mortar, which Nicol prefers, as neater. Where a 
stone that will endure fire-heat without cracking is found to be not more expensive than 
tiles, it is generally reckoned preferable, as offering fewer joints for the escape of the 
smoke. Such stones are sometimes hollowed on the upper surface, in order to hold water 
for the benefit of plants in pots, or for steaming the house. 

1655. Broad and deep Jlues, agreeably to the Dutch practice, have been 
recommended by Stevenson {Caled. Mem.) ; that of making them narrow 
and deep, agreeably to the practice in Russia, is recommended by Oldacre, 
gardener to Sir Joseph Banks, and that of using thin bricks {Jig. 272.) 
with thick edges, by S. Gowen {Hort. Trans, iii.) In Goweu's flues, the 
section {fig. 273. a) shows less materials 
than any other brick flue, the covers (6) and 
the side wall bricks (c) being quite thin, 
the base requisite for building the latter on 
one anotlier being obtained by the thickness 
of their edges (rf, e), which is equal to that 
of common bricks. 

1656. Can-flues {fig. 21 "i.), long since 
used by the Dutch, imbedded in sand, and 
for the last fifty years occasionally in Eng- 
land, are sometimes employed. They consist « ^ 

of earthen pipes, straight (a), or rounded at the ends for returns {b), and joined together 
by cement, placed on bricks (c) . They are rapidly heated, and as soon cooled. None of 
the heat, however, which passes through them, can be said to be absorbed and lost in the 
mass of enclosing matter, as Knight and Sir Joseph Banks {Hort. Trans.) assert to be the 

274 





275 




case with common flues. They are only adapted for moderate fires, but judiciously 
chosen, may frequently be more suitable and profitable than common flues ; as, for 
example, where there are only slight fires wanted occasionally ; or where there is a re- 
gular system of watching the fires, in which case, but not otherwise, the temperature can 
be regulated with sufficient certainty. 

1657. The embrasure flue {flg.275.) h the 
invention of Sir G. Mackenzie, and is by him 
strongly recommended, as exposing a greater 
heated surface in proportion to its length. 
{Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 175.) 

1658. Cast-iron flues have also been recom- 
mended on account of their durability, but unless they were to be imbedded in sand, or 
masonry, they are liable, in an extreme degree, to the same objections as can-flues. A 
triangular cast-iron flue, to be coated over with a mixture of one part clay and three of 
sand, is recommended for trial by Sir G. Mackenzie. {Hort. Trans, v. 216.) For our 
part we cannot perceive a single circumstance in favor of its adoption. 

1659. The best sort of flues, after all that has been said on the subject, is, in our opi- 
nion, the common form, built of thin well burned bricks neatly jointed, with the bottom 
and top of tiles, and no plaster used either inside or outside. Where only one course of 
a flue can be admitted the broader it is the more heat will be given out as it proceeds, and 
as a consequence, one extremity of the space to be heated will be hotter than the other ; 
a return or double course of a narrow flue is, therefore, almost always preferable to one 
course of a broad flue. With respect to the embrasure flue, flues with iron tubes, or iron 
covers, and various others that have been recommended or described in recent volumes of 
the Horticultural Society s Transactions, they are liable, in our opinion, to great objections, 
and chiefly to produce sudden excesses of heat, and in general as tending to extremes of 
temperature. 

1660. The size of flues is seldom less than nine inches wide, by fourteen or eighteen 
inches high inside measure, which suits a furnace for good coal, whose floor or chamber is 
two feet long, eighteen inches wide, and eighteen inches high. According as the object 
varies, so must the proportion both of furnaces and flues. {Designs for Villas, &c. 1812 j 

Y 3 



326 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Hort. Trans, vol. iv.) The furnaces from whence the flues proceed, are generally 
placed behind the back wall, as being unsightly objects ; but in point of utility, the best 
situation is at tlie end of the front wall, so as it may enter the house, and proceed a con- 
siderable length without making an angle. A greater utility, however, is here given up 
for fitness ; it being more fitting in a gentleman's garden that something should be sa- 
crificed to neatness, than that all should be sacrificed to profit. 

1661. The direction of flues, in general, is round the house, commencing always within 
a short distance of the parapet, and after making the course of three sides, that is, of the 
end at wliich the fire enters, of the front, and of the opposite end, it returns (in narrow 
houses) near to or in the back wall, or (in wide houses) up the middle, forming a path ; 
and in others, immediately over or along side of the first course. In all narrow houses 
this last is the best mode. 

1 662. The jwwer of Jlues depends so much on their construction, the kind of fuel, the 
roof, mode of glazing, &c. that very little can be affirmed with any degree of certainty on 
this subject ; 3000 cubic feet of air is in general enough for one fire to command in stoves 
or forcing-liouses ; and 5000 in lean-to green-houses. In houses exposed on all sides, 
2000 cubic feet is enough in stoves, and 3000 cubic feet for green-houses. The safest 
side on wliich to err is rather to attach too little than too much extent to each fire, as ex- 
cessive fires generally force through the flues some smoke or mephitic air ; and besides 
produce too much heat at that part of the house where the flue enters. 

1663. Dampers, or valves, are useful in flues and cliimneys, both in case of accident and 
also to moderate the heat, or in case of one furnace supplying two flues, to regulate the 
passage of smoke and heat. For general purposes, however, the ash-pit door is perfectly 
sufficient. The damper, and furnace, and ash-pit doors ought seldom to be all shut 
at the same time, as such a confinement of the hot air of the flue is apt, owing to its ex- 
pansion by increased heat from the hot masomy, to force some of it through the joints of 
the flue into the house. 

1664. Chimney-tops are generally built on the coping of the back wall, and some- 
times ornamented with mouldings, and even disguised as vases. Where there are 
only one or two to a conservatory or other house of ornament, these last modes may 
be allowable ; but in culinary ranges, it appears to us an unsuitable application of orna- 
ment either to form on the stone or brick chimneys many mouldings, or to disguise them, 
as m-ns or vases. "WTien these last are to be adopted, cast-iron presents abundant facilities 
of economical execution. Tliere is a four-sided composition -stone cliimney-pot recently 
come into use near London, which will answer extremely well till it becomes so common 
as to be reckoned vulgar. Sometimes the flues are earned under ground to some 
distance from the hot-house, and the chimney carried up in a group of trees, or other- 
wise concealed. This practice is suitable to detached buildings formed of glass on all 
sides. 

SuBSECT. 7. Steam Boilers and Tubes. 

1665. Steam awards the most simple and effectual mode of heating hot-houses, and indeed 
large bodies of air in every description of chamber, for no other fluid is found so con- 
venient a canier of heat. The heat given out by vapor, differs in nothing from that given 
out by smoke, though an idea to the contrarj' prevails among gardeners, from the cir- 
cumstances of some foul air escaping into the house from the flues, especially if these are 
over-heated or over- watered ; and from some vapor issuing from the steam -tubes when 
these are not perfectly secure at the joints. Hence flues are said to produce a burnt or 
drying heat, and steam-tubes a moist or genial heat, and in a popular sense this is cor- 
rect for the reasons stated. It is not, however, the genial nature of steam heat which 
is its chief recommendation for plant-habitations, but the equality of its distribution, 
and the distance to which it may be carried. Steam can never heat the tubes, even close 
to the boiler, above 212 degrees, and it will heat them to the same degree, or nearly so, at 
the distance of 1000, 2000, or an indefinite number of feet. Hence results the convenience 
of heating any range or assemblage of hot-houses, however great, fi-om one boiler, and the 
lessened risk of over or insufficient heating at whatever distance the house may be from 
the fire-place. The secondary advantages of heating by steam are the saving of fuel and 
labor, and the neatness and compactness of the w^hole apparatus. Instead of a gardener 
having to attend to a dozen or more fires, he has only to attend to one ; instead of ashes, 
and coal, and unsightly objects at a dozen or more places in a garden, they are limited to 
one place ; and instead of twelve paltry chimney-tops, there is only one, wliich being 
necessarily large and high, may be finished as a pillar so as to have effect as an object ; 
instead of twelve vomitors of smoke and flakes of soot, the smoke may be burned by 
using Parkes's or some other smoke-consuming furnace. The steam-tubes occupy much 
less space in the house than flues, and require no cleaning ; they may often pass under 
paths where flues would extend too deep ; there is no danger of steam not draiving or 
circulating freely as is often the case with flues, and always when they are too narrow or 



Book III. 



STEAM BOILERS AND TUBES. 



327 



too wide, or do not ascend from the furnace to the chimney ; steam is impelled from the 
boiler and will proceed with equal rapidity along small tubes or large ones, and descend- 
ing or ascending. Finally, with steam, insects may be effectually kept under in hot-houses, 
with the greatest ease, by merely keeping the atmosphere of the house charged with vapor 
from the tubes for several hours at a time. 

1666. The disadvantages of steam as a vehicle for conveying heat to hot-houses are few. 
On a small scale it is more expensive than the mode by flues, and more trouble is required to 
attend to one boiler than to one or even two or three furnaces. These are all the dis- 
advantages we know of. It has been stated by some that steam draws up or etiolates bo- 
tanic plants, and lessens the flavor of fruits ; bttt we are inclined to consider such effects, 
when attendant on plants or fruits in houses heated by steam, as resulting from some de- 
ficiency of management in other points of culture. 

1667. The boilers used to generate steam are formed of cast or wrought iron, or copper, 
and of different shapes. Wrought-iron and an oblong form are generally preferred at 
present, and the smoke-consuming furnace most approved is that of Parkes. 

1668. The tubes used for conveying steam are formed of the same metals as the boilers ; 
but cast-iron is now generally used. Earthen or stone ware tubes have been tried ; but it is 
extremely difficult to prevent the steam from escaping at their junctions. The tubes are laid 
along or around the house or chamber to be heated, much in the same manner as flues, only 
less importance is attached to having the first course from the boiler towards the coldest 
parts of the house, because the steam-tube is equally heated throughout all its length. As 
steam circulates with greater rapidity, and conveys more heat in proportion to its bulk, 
than smoke or heated air, steam-pipes are consequently of much less capacity than smoke- 
flues, and generally from three to six inches diameter inside measure. Where extensive 
ranges are to be heated by steam, the pipes consist of two sorts, mains or leaders for sup- 
ply, and common tubes for consumption or condensation. Contrary to what holds in 
circulating water or air, the mains may be of much less diameter than the consumption 
pipes, for the motion of the steam is as the pressure ; and as the greater the motion, the 
less the condensation, a pipe of one inch bore makes a better main than one of any larger 
dimension. This is an important point in regard to appearance as well as economy. 
In order to procure a large mass of heated matter, M'Phail and others have proposed to 
place them in flues, where such exist. 'They might also be laid in cellular flues built as 



276 




Y 4 



(i28 



SCIENCE OP GARDENING. 



Part II. 



cellular walls. (Jig. 238.) The most complete mode, however, is to have three parallel 
ranges of steam-pipes of small diameter, communicating laterally by cocks. Tlien, when 
least heat is wanted, let the steam circulate through one range of pipes only ; when more, 
open the cocks wliich communicate with the second range ; and when most, let all 
the three ranges be filled with steam. This plan has been adopted by Messrs. Lod- 
digiss at Hackney, and Messrs. Bailey in heating the hot-houses at Knowle and other 
places, 

1669. yls an example of the power and conveiiience of steam, as a medium of conveying 
heat to hot-houses, we may refer to the garden, mansion, and farm-yard of Edward Gray, 
Esq. of Harringay House, Hornsey, where ten large hot-houses, and the largest of them 
550 feet from the boiler, have been heated in a masterly manner by INIessrs. Bailey. There 
are for this purpose two boilers [fg. 276. a&b): one smaller than the other for mild weather, 
and when the whole of the forcing-houses are not in operation ; and the other larger as a re- 
serve boiler in ca^e of accident, as an accessor)' power in extremely severe weather, or for 
use alone in cold weather. A main from these boilers heats in succession two graperies 
(c, d) two pineries {e,f), a peach-houses («:), strawberry-pit (A), plant-stove (i), grapery (i), 
green-house (l), conservatory (m), and a mushroom-house, in all upwards of 50,000 cubit 
feet of air. In addition it supplies a steam-apparatus in the farm-yard (71) ; and it would 
also heat the mansion (0) if required. Tlie boilers to this steam-apparatus are on the 
most approved construction : they ai-e fitted up with furnaces for consuming the smoke 
(p), have safety-valves (y), a supply-cistern (r), and cliimneys (5) sufficiently high to pre- 
vent what smoke or contaminated air may pass off by them from injuring the garden. So 
effectually is heat carried by steam, that at the extreme distance from the boiler (i) a 
thermometer applied to the steam-pipe will rise to within two degrees of what it wiU stand 
at close to the boiler. The whole is a most masterly performance. 

1670. Pipes of hot water have been proposed to be circulated through hot-houses 
by Knight [Hort. Trans, vol. iii.); the plan was tried many years ago by the late 
Gould, gardener to Prince Potemkin, in the immense conservatory of the Tauridian palace 
at Petersburgh. There, however, pumps were employed to re-dehver the water to the 
boiler. It was adopted to a certain extent by Davis, a sugar-boiler in Essex ; but it does 
not appear likely to become general. The only advantage proposed is, that should the 
boiler or steam- apparatus go wrong in the night-time, pipes filled with water would be 
longer of cooling than pipes filled with steam. It has been asserted in reply, that an appa- 
ratus capable of circulating hot-water, would be much more likely to go out of order than 
one adapted to circulate steam. 

SuBSECT. 8. Trellises. 

1671. Trellises are of the greatest use in forcing-houses and houses for fniiting the trees of 
hot climates. On these the branches are readily spread out to the sun, of whose influence 
every branch, and every twig and single leaf partake alike, whereas, were they left to grow 
as standards, unless the house were glass on all sides, only the extremities of the shoots 
would enjoy sufiicient light. The advantages in point of air, water, pruning, and other 
parts of culture, are equally in favor of trelUses, independently altogether of the ten- 
dency which proper training has on woody fruit-trees, to induce fruitfulness. 

1672. The viatenal of the trellis is either wood or metal ; its situation in culinary hot- 
houses is against the back wall, close under the glass roof, or in the middle part of 
the house, or in all these modes. Sometimes it is in separate parts, and either fixed 
or moveable ; and in some cases, though rarely, it is placed across the area of the 
house. Sometimes it is introduced ornamentally in arches, festoons, &c. The most 
general plan is to place it under the glass roof, and at the distance of from ten to twenty 
inches from it, according to the length of the footstalk of the leaves of the plants to be 
trained. 

1673. The back wall trellis was formerly in general use, and considered the principal 
part of the house for a crop ; but that is now only the case in narrow houses. In many 
cases a trellis is still applied against the back wall for temporary crops, till the plants 
trained under the front glass trellis cover the roof ; or for figs, which are found to succeed 
better than most trees under the shade of others. 

1674. The middle trellis is generally recurvate so as not to exclude the light from the 
back wall. Sometimes it is horizontal for the same purpose, and sometimes it is omitted, 
and dwarf standards preferred in its room. 

1675. The front or roof trellis generally extends under the whole of the roof, at a mo- 
derate distance (256. b) from it, according to circumstances. It is generally formed of 
wires stretched horizontally at 6 or 8 inches' distance, and retained in their places by being 
passed through wrought-iron trellis-rods proceeding from the parapet to the back wall, 
or the lower edges of the rafters, when formed in a manner adapted for this end. 



Book III. 



PITS, 'stages, doors, paths, &c. 



399 



1676. The fixed rafter-trellis consists ordinarily of three 
wires, which pass through the points of crosses {fig' 277.), in 
breadth from fourteen to eighteen inches, and which crosses are 
screwed to the under edge of the rafter ; the first fixed at the 
plate of the parapet, and the last at the upper end of the 
rafter, and the intermediate ones at distances of from three 
to four feet. 

1677. The moveable rafter-treUis consists of a rod bent parallel 
to the roof, with horizontal studs or rods, extending from 6 to 
10 inches on each side, containing two collateral wires, the rod 
itself forming the third. This rod is hinged, or moves in an 
eye or loop, fixed either immediately above the plate of the parapet, or near the top of the 
front glass. It terminates within one or two feet of the back wall, and is suspended 
from the roof by two or more pieces of chain attached to the studs, the links of which are 
put on hooks attached to proper parts of the roof. Tlieir advantage is chiefly in the 
case of very early forcing, when they can be let down two or three feet from the glass, 
and thus is lessened the risk of injury from frost. A whole sheet or tegument of trellis, 
if desirable, may be lowered and raised on the same general plan. (See the details, 
Hort. Trans, vol. iii.) Rafter-trellises are in general used only for such houses as are not 
chiefly devoted to vines ; such as pineries, peach-houses, and sometimes green-houses. 

1678. The secondary trellis is placed from six inches to eighteen inches behind the 
first, and is used for training shoots of the current year, while that nearest the light is 
devoted to such as are charged with fruit. In ordinary trellises, the wires are generally 
placed from nine inches to a foot asunder, in a horizontal direction ; on the secondary 
trellis they are placed at double that distance. 

1679. The cross trellis has been sometimes employed in peach-houses, 'and is strongly 
recommended by Sir George Mackenzie, in what he calls an economical hot-house. These 
trellises, however, unless kept very low, darken the house to such a degree as to prevent 
the ripening of fruits. They may be useful for nurserymen for training peaches or fig- 
trees for sale, but for culinary forcing are worse than useless. Sir G. M.'s house, though 
lauded by Dr. Duncan {Caled. Memoirs, vol. ii.), was soon obliged to be cleared of its 
cross trellisses, and restored to the common form. The only houses where such trellises 
can be used with any reasonable prospect of advantage, are such as are placed south and 
north, and span-roofed, or glass on all sides. On these two or more lines of low trellis 
may be placed, and the plants will enjoy the forenoon's sun on one side, and the after- 
noon's sun on the other. 

1680. The entrance to hot-houses is commonly at each end, and sometimes in the 
middle, either of which modes answers perfectly where the ground-plan is a parallelo- 
gram ; but for any description of curvilinear house, the entrance is more commodiously 
made through a lobby at each end of the house, and which lobby is best formed behind 
the wall. When there are a number of curvilinear houses placed against one wall, one 
door in the wall between each will serve every purpose, and the whole will be at once 
elegant and commodiously connected, {fig- 262.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Paths, Pits, Stages, Shelves, Doors, ^c. 

1681. The j)afAs in hot-houses vary in direction, breadth, and construction. In ge- 
neral, one path runs parallel to the front, sometimes upon the front flue, but more gene- 
rally beside it ; at other times, as in peach-houses, it passes near the back wall, or through 
the middle of the house. In pineries and houses with pits, it generally surrounds 
these, and in green-houses it is commonly confined to a course parallel to the front 
and ends. Some of the most ornamental paths we have yet seen have been formed by 
Messrs. Bailey, oif cast-iron plates, laid over steam-pipes, and so perforated as to form an 
elegant running pattern, or cast-iron carpet. 

1682. The materials of which the path is composed in the case of some houses, are 
mere planks, or lattice-work, supported on cross pieces of timber, in order to admit the 
sun and air to the soil below, and not to indurate it by the pressure of feet. An improve- 
ment on this mode consists in using grated cast-iron plates, which are more durable, 
and may be set on iron stakes driven in till their tops are on a level, and at a proper 
height, &c. These gratings are also particularly preferable when the path is over a flue, 
not only as presenting a cooler surface to walk on than the covers of the flue, but also by. 
readily admitting the ascent of the heat in the interstices, and preventing the movement 
of the covers by the motion of walking. But the best material for a permanent path, as 
in green-houses, botanic stoves, &c. is argillaceous flag-stone, and of this one of the best 
varieties is that obtained from Arbroath, and known by the name of Arbroath pavement. 

It is a light grey schistus, which rises in lamina of from three to six inches in thick- / 
ness, and eight or ten feet square ; requires very little work on the surface ; and has the 
property of but very slightly absorbing moisture from the atmosphere, or from the 




330 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



moist ground on which it may be placed. Thus, unless when watered on purpose, it 
always appears perfectly dry and agreeable, however moist the soil below. Where the 
paths in a house are on different levels, they are commonly united by steps ; but an 
inclined plane, when not steeper than one inch in six, will generally be found more con- 
venient for the purposes of culture and management ; and if the slope is one in eight, it 
is more agreeable to ascend or descend than a stair. 

1683. Pits, as applied to the interior parts of houses, are excavations, or rather en- 
closures, for holding bark or other fermentable substances. They should be formed so 
as the plants may stand at a moderate distance from the glass, which of course depends 
on the nature of these plants, whether dwarf bushy plants, as the pine, or taller, as palms 
and hot-house trees. They are generally surrounded by walls of brick, four or nine 
inches tliick, or to save room, by plates of cast-iron, stone, or slate. Sometimes the slope 
of their surface approaches to that of the roof ; but as, in this case, the tan or leaves in 
the course of fermentation, do not settle or compress regularly, the pots are thrown off 
their level, and therefore the more common way is to adopt a slope not exceeding 5°, or 
to form a level surface. Tan will fennent with all the rapidity necessary for bottom heat, 
if in a layer of two and a half or three feet thick, and therefore no tan-pits need exceed 
that depth. Those for leaves may be somewhat deeper. Heat from fire, or steam, or 
water, is sometimes substituted for that afforded by fermentable substances, and in these 
cases various forms of construction are adopted. For fire-heat, flues are made to cir- 
culate under a covering of pavement, on which sand, gravel, scoria, or sawdust, is 
placed to preserve a moist heat round the pots. An air-chamber is thus formed under 
the pit, from which the heated air may be allowed to escape, if desired, by upright tubes, 
with stops, as in the Chelsea garden, or small openings in the side walls of the pit, as at 
N. Kent's, of Clapton, or as we suggested and executed at different places in 1804. 
(Tr. on Hoth. 8vo. Edin. 1804. Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) Another mode consists in 
filling the vacuities round the flues with loose stones (as in the Glasgow garden), flints, 
brick-bats, or large gravel. These materials, when once heated, retain their heat a very 
long time, and give it out slowly to the superincumbent mass of sand, gravel, or other 
media, in which the pots may be plunged. Sometimes soil is placed over this stratum of 
stone and gravel, and the plants inserted in the soil. Pines have been successfully grown 
in this way at Underley Park from our suggestions. {Tr. on Hoth. 8vo. Edin. 1804. : 
Tr. on Country Resid. vol. i. 1806.) Another, and very old method of heating 
pits by smoke is by forming a vault under them, building in a furnace and ash-pit 
door at one end, and a chimney at that opposite. This is the mode originally used in 
France and Germany. [Encyc. Method, in vol. d''Arntoire et Jardinage, art. Serre.) Knight 
suggests the idea of building the walls of bark-pits cellular, and of admitting at their 
bottom a current of external air, to be heated in the cells, and issue in that state into 
the house. This he " feels confident" will save fuel, but as it would be at the expense 
of the heat of the bark or other fermenting material in the pit, it does not appear to us 
that any advantage would result from the plan. (Hort. Trans, vol. v. 246.) 

1684. Pits may he heated by steam by substituting tubes for flues, and in the case of 
the vault, merely by introducing the steam-tube about the middle of the space, and omit- 
ting the chimney. Or the tubes may circulate at once in the tan, sand, or sawdust ; or 
a vacuity may be formed not more than six inches deep, the whole width of the pit, 
covered by pierced oak boards, and the steam introduced there at proper intervals. All 
these and other plans have been tried by Butler, at Knowle, near Prescot, in 1791 ; 
Mawer, at Dairy, in 1795 ; Thomson, at Tynningham, in 1805 ; Gunter, at Earl's Court, 
in 1818; W. Phelps, of Wells, in 1822 (H. Trans, v. 357.), and various other persons; 
accompanied, as was to be expected, by different degrees of success. A cistern of water 
of the size of the pit has been heated by steam, and left to give out its heat to the superin- 
cumbent materials of the pit, by Count Zuboff, at Petersburgh. We have seen cucum- 
bers grown over a cistern in which the hot water from a distillery passed through. 
The result of all the attempts hitherto made to find a substitute for the heat of ferment- 
able substances, as applied to pits in which pots are to be plunged, is not such as to 
warrant much deviation from the usual practice. But that bottom heat may be very 
generally dispensed with altogether, at least wdth ornamental plants, modern experience 
goes far to prove ; and it is more likely that it will be given up altogether, and bottom 
moisture obtained by plunging the pots in gravel or scoria, than that methods so expen- 
sive, and attended with so much risk to the plants, will ever come into general use. 

1685. Beds and borders in hot-houses are generally formed on the ground level, though 
sometimes raised above it. They are either composed of earth, for the direct growth of 
plants, or of gravel or scoria, in or on which to place pots. When the use of tan is given 
up, as in some plant-stoves, the tan-pits are filled with gravel, on or in which, the pots 
are set or plunged. Where heat and moisture are judiciously applied, this mode is found 
to succeed perfectly, as at the Comte de Vandes', Bayswater, and Messrs. Loddiges', 
Hackney. . . 



Book III. 



DETAILS FOR WATER, AIR, &c. 



331 



1686. Shelves, excepting such as are placed near the ground, or almost close under the 
upper angle of the roof, are extremely injurious to the vegetation going forward in the 
body of the house by the exclusion of light. This consideration, therefore, must be 
kept in view in placing them ; in some cases they are inadmissible, as in conservatories ; 
in others, as in propagating-houses, the light they exclude can better be spared, than in 
fruiting or flowering departments. For forcing strawberries, they may be introduced 
under the roof in vine and peach-houses, and removed when their shade proves inju- 
rious, &c. The ordinary form is that of a flat board ; but an improvement consists in 
nailing two fillets along its edges, and covering the board with a thin layer of small 
gravel or scoria. This preserves a cool genial moisture which keeps the earthen pot 
moist, and lessens the effect on the earth of alternate dryings and waterings ; and it also 
admits the more ready escape of water from the orifices in the bottoms of the pots. Some, 
in the case of forcing strawberries and French beans, have the fillets or ledges of the 
shelves so high as to contain two or three inches of water, by which means whole rows of 
pots can be inundated at one operation ; but_this is too indiscriminate an application of 
a material on which so much in the growth of plants depends. 

1687. Stages are shelves in series rising above each other, and falling back so as their 
general surface may form a slope. They vary in form according to that of the house. 
The houses with shed roofs and opaque ends have merely a series of steps reaching from 
one end to the other ; but wherever the ends are of glass, by returning each 
shelf to the back wall, due advantage is obtained from the light furnished by the glass 
ends. The addition of ledgement, or turned-up edges to each shelf, and the covering 
them with gi'avel, is, of course, as advantageous as in separate shelves, and surely 
more consonant with natural appearances, than leaving them naked like household, or 
book shelves. Shelves and platforms of stone are now very general, and found more 
congenial to the plants than dry painted boards. 

SuBSECT. 10. Details for Water, Wind, and Renewal of Air. 

1688. The reservoirs of water in hot-houses are commonly cisterns of stone or timber, 
lined with lead, or cast-iron troughs or basins. Sometimes, also, tanks are built in the 
ground, and lined with lead or cement. The cistern is sometimes placed in an angle, or 
other spare part of the house, and the water lifted from it at once with the watering-pots ; 
but a more complete plan is to build it in an elevated part of the back wall, where it may 
have the benefit of the heat of the house, and whence pipes may branch off to different 
parts of the house with cocks, every 30 or 40 feet, for drawing supplies. Tanks and 
cisterns below tlie level of the front gutter may be supplied great part of the year from 
the water which falls on the roof ; but more elevated cisterns must either be supplied by 
pumps, or elevated springs. The sources of supply, and the quality of the water must 
be taken into consideration before the situation of the cisterns are determined on. In all 
cases, there must be waste-boxes at the cocks, and waste-pipes from the cistern, to coun- 
teract the bad effects of leakage. 

1689. Artificial rain. A very elegant plan has been invented and executed by Messrs. 
Loddiges, for producing an artificial shower of very fine rain in hot-houses, by conduct- 
ing pipes horizontally along the roof, at the distance of six or eight feet, and having these 
pipes very finely perforated by a needle. According to the power of the supply, one or 
more pipes may be set to work at a time, and a very fine shower thrown down on the 
leaves of the plants with the greatest regularity. This has been done in- one of the 
palm-houses of these spirited cultivators at Hackney, and for which a medal was voted 
to them by the Horticultural Society, in 1817. The following is a particular account of 
this apparatus. {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. p. 15.) 

A leaden pipe of half an inch bore is introduced into one end of the house, in such a situation that the 
stop-cock, which is fixed in it, and which is used for turning on the supply of water, may be within 
reach : it is then carried either to the upper part, or the back of the house, or to the inside of the ridge 
of the glass frame-work,T3eing continued horizontally, and in a straight direction, the whole extent of the 
house, and fastened to the wall or rafters, by iron staples, at convenient distances. From the point where 
the pipe commences its horizontal direction, it is perforated with minute holes, through each of which 
the water, when turned on, issues in a fine stream, and, in descending, is broken, and falls on the plants, 
in a manner resembling a gentle summer shower. The holes are perforated in the pipe With a needle, 
fixed into a handle like that of an awl ; it being impossible to have the holes too fine, very small needles 
are necessarily used for the purpose, and in the operation great numibers are of course broken. The 
situation of the holes in the pipe must be such as to disperse the water in every direction that may 
be required, and in this particular the relative position of the pipe, and of the stations of the plants to be 
watered, must be considered, in making the perforations. The holes are made, on an average, at about 
tv/o inches' distance from each other, horizontally, but are somewhat more distant near the commence- 
ment, and rather closer towards the termination of the pipe, allowing thereby for the relative excess and 
diminution of pressure, to give an equal supply of water to each end of the house. A single pipe is 
sufficient for a house of moderate length : one house of Messrs. Loddiges, which is thus watered, is sixty 
feet long, and the only difference to be made in adapting the plan to a longer range, is to have the pipe 
larger. The reservoir to supply the pipe, must of course be so much above the level, as to exert a 
sufficient force on the water in the pipe, to make it flow with rapidity, as it will otherwise escape only in 
drops ; and as too strong a power may be readily controlled by the stop-cock, the essential point to be 
attended to, in this particular, is to secure force enough. From the above details it will be observed, that 



SS2 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



some nicety is required in the arrangement and formation of the machinery ; but it is only n^ieSsary to 
view the operation in Messrs. Loddiges' house, to be convinced of the extreme advantage and utility of 
the invention, when it is properly executed. {Sabine, m Hort. Ttnns. vol. iii. p. 15.) We adopted this plan 
on a smaller scale in our erections at Bayswater, and the whole of the plants under the square dome 
(in fig. 253.) were watered from a perforated pipe, which passed round tire dome near its apex, and radiated 
from thence a very fine shower, which reached every part of the floor beneath. 

1690. Wind in hot-houses has been attempted, or rather recommended to be attempted, 
by Dr. Anderson and others by means of fans. If any thing of this sort were desirable, 
the Eolian machine invented by B. Deacon, already mentioned (1599.) might be 
employed, either placed in the house, and kept in motion by human, or mechanical 
pow^er, or placed at one end to force in or draw out the air. In a range of houses form- 
ing a circle or square, or any endless figure, a perpetual breeze might be readily 
produced in the following manner. Place under the floor, a powerful fan of the width 
of the house. Exactly over the fan, place a glass division across the house, and let the 
fan draw in the air through apertures in the floor on one side of the division, and give it 
out through similar apertures, or through tubes of any sort on the other. It is evident, 
a regular current would thus be produced, more or less powerful according to the size of 
the fan, and the rapidity of its motion. 

1691. Ventilators, ^c. The general mode of renewing the air, is by opening the 
sashes or doors of the house, in periods when the exterior temperature and weather is such 
as not to injure the plants within. The cool air of the atmosphere being then more 
dense than that of the house, rushes in till it cools down the air of the house nearly to an 
equilibrium with that without. The next mode most common, is that of having a range 
of boards hinged to oblong openings, in the lower and upper parts of the house, and 
generally in the front and back wall : those in the back wall opening to the south, or 
having the opening otherwise guarded, so as to prevent the rushing in of cold north 
winds. Sometimes these ventilators are made with a cylinder and fans to extract the air, 
and sometimes, as most generally, they are mere openings of small dimensions ; but, in 
order to effect any circulation or renewal with this sort of ventilators, the opening must 
have an area of two or three feet, and there must be a considerable difference of temperature 
between the air of the house and the open air. 

1692. To effect the renewal, or cooling down the air, without manual labor, some con- 
trivances have been adopted besides the automaton gardener of Kewley already described. 
{Jig' 217.) Dr. Anderson and J. Williams made use of oblong bladders made fast at 
one end, and with the other attached by means of a cord to a moveable pane or small 
sash. The bladder being filled with air at the common temperature allowed for the 
house, and hermetically sealed, the window remains at rest ; but as the air of the house 
becomes heated, so does that of the bladder, which consequently swells, and assumes the 
globular form, its peripheries are brought nearer together, and of course the sash or pane 
pulled inwards. In a small house this scheme may answer perfectly well for the pre- 
vention of extreme heat. Another mode is by using a rod of metal, such as lead, of 
the whole length of the house, and one end being fixed to the wall, on the other is 
attached a series of multiplying wheels, the last of which works into one, which in 
various ways may open valves or sashes. As the expansion of lead is considerable, the 
effect of twenty degrees of increase with proper machinery, might perhaps guard against 
extremes, as in the other case. A column of mercury , with a piston-rod and machinery 
attached, has also been used, and a ring on a barometrical principle is suggested by 
Silvester; but the only complete mode is that of Kewley. For details at greater length 
on all the departments of the construction of hot-houses, see Bemarks, &c. 4to. 1817. 

Sect. IV. Mushroom-houses. 

1693. The mushroom-house is a genus of plant-habitation, which diflfers from the others 
in requiring very little light. The simplest form of the mushroom-house is that of an 
open shed or roof, supported on props, for throwing off the rain, and protecting from per- 
pendicular cold. Under this, the mushrooms are grown on ridges, covered by straw, &c. 
to maintain the requisite temperature. 

1694. The fiued mushroom-house (Jig. 278.) is an improvement on the shed, by being 
better calculated for growing them in winter. Provided it be placed in a dry situation, 
the aspect, size, proportions, doors, or windows, are of little consequence. To be suffi- 



278' 




Book III. 



MUSHROOM-HOUSES. 



333 



ciently wanned by one fire in winter, it should not contain more than 10,000 cubic feet 
of air. As mushrooms will not thrive without some light, and at all events require air, 
it ought to have two or three windows or valves for these purposes, 

1695. The German mushroom-house (Jigs. 279, 280 & 281,) It is a common practice with 
German gardeners to grow mushrooms on shelves, and in pots and boxes, placed behind 
stages, or other dark parts of their forcing-houses othervnse unoccupied. (Dielrieh's 
Gartner s Lexicon ; Ranslebens Brieffe, &c. ) This practice was carried to Russia, 
and from Russia was brought to England by Isaac Oldacre, who thus describes the sort 
of house adapted for the German practice. " The outside walls (G, H.Jlgs. 279, 280.) 
should be eight and a half feet high, for four heights of beds, and six feet and a half for 
three heights, and ten feet vnde with'inside the walls ; this -is the most convenient width, 
as it admits of a set of shelves three feet and a half wide on each side ; and affords a 
space through the middle of the house, tliree feet wide for a double flue and walk upon 
it. The wall should be nine inches thick, and the length of the house as it may be 
judged necessary. When the outside of the house is built, make a floor or ceiling over it 
^as high as the top of the outside walls) of boards one inch thick, and plaster it on the upper 
side (e, e) with road-sand well wTOught together, one inch thick (this will be found supe- 
rior to lime), leaving square trunks (f) in the ceiling, nine inches in diameter, up the 
middle of the house, at six feet distance from each other, with slides (s) under them, to 
admit and take off air when necessary ; this being done, erect two single brick walls (v, v), 
each five bricks high, at the distance of five feet and a half from the outside walls, to 
hold up the sides of the floor-beds (a, a), and form cme side of the air-flues {tu, tu), 
leaving three feet up the middle (t xt) of the house for the flues. Upon these walls [v, v) 
lay planks (t v) four and a half inches wide and three inches thick, in which to mortise 
the standards {t k) which support the shelves. These standards should be three inches 
and a half square, and placed four feet six inches asunder, and fastened at the top (k, k), 
through the ceiling. When the standards are set up, fix the cross bearers [i n, i n), that 
are to support the shelves (o, o), mortising one end of each into the standards (i), the 
other into the walls (n). The first set of bearers should be two feet from the floor, and 
each succeeding set two feet from that below it. Having thus fixed the uprights {tk), 
and bearers (in), at such a height as the building vvill admit, proceed to form the shelves 
(o, o) with boards an inch and a half thick, observing to place a board ((/, d), eight inches 
broad and one inch thick, in the front of each shelf, to support the front of the beds. 
Fasten this board on the outside of the standards, that the width of the beds may not be 




diminished. The shelves being complete, the next thing to be done is the construction of the 
flue (P, fig. 281.), which should commence at the end (L) of the house next to the door, 
run parallel to the shelves the whole length of the house, and return back to the fire-place, 
where the chimney (S) should be built, the sides of the flue inside to be the height 
of four bricks, laid flat-ways, and six inches wide, which will make the width of the flues 
fifteen inches from outside to outside, and leave a cavity (tu, figs. 279, 280.) on each 
side, betwixt the flue and the walls that are under the shelves, and one {x y) up tlie middle, 
betwixt the flues, two inches wide, to admit the heat into the house from the sides of the 
flues. The middle cavity (xy) should be covered with tiles, leaving a space (Ji) of one 
inch betwixt each tile, for the admission of the heat. The top of the flue, including the 
covering, should not be higher than the brick walls that form the front of the floor-beds. 
The reason why the sides of the flues are recommended to be built stronger than usual, 
is, because they support the walk. The walk itself is formed by three rows of tiles, the 
outside rows making the covering of the flues, and those of the centre row are what cover 
the middle cavity (xy), as above mentioned ; the outside cavities (tu) of the flue are 
left open, the tiles which are placed over the flues being laid so as not to cover these 



S34 SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Part II. 

cavities, which allows the heat of the sides of the flues to 'rise upwards." {Oldacre, in 
Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) 

281 




Sect. V. Cold Plant-habitations. 

1696. CoW p?an?-/ia&i^f7^iows, ; though seldom or never erected, yet desei-ve to be men- 
tioned as resources under certain circumstances. Tliese circumstances may be, a desire 
to cultivate the alpine plants of Europe in tropical climates, or to cultivate the mosses 
and ferns of the north of Europe in its more southern countries. 

1697. The jirinciple on ivhich a cold house can be constructed in a warm climate must 
either be that of the exclusion of the heat by coverings or envelopes ; or the abduction of 
heat by evaporation or contact with cold bodies. Heat will be, to a certain extent, ex- 
cluded, by forming the house in the ground ; by excluding the sun's rays from its roof ; 
by a high wall on three sides, leaving only an opening in the middle of the north side ; 
and by a double or treble roof of glass to the excavation. A house to be cooled by eva- 
poration may also be sunk in the ground; or it may be raised above it, shaded from 
the sun, and over it may be supported a number of shower-pipes (1689.), which, by pro- 
ducing a gentle and continual rain on the glass roof and stone or other sides of the house, 
would draw off much heat by evaporation. Enclosing it by a line of powerful je^s-d'eaw 
would effect the same purpose. To produce cold by abduction, the house might be sunk; 
its floor supported on pillars ; and its sides and bottom kept in contact with a running 
stream ; or, if it could be afforded, ice renewable as it melted. These hints are sufiicient 
to show how cold plant-habitations may be formed in any climate : to enter more at 
length on the subject would be useless, in a work calculated chiefly for the climate of 
Britain. 



Chap. III. 

Edifices used in Gardening. 

1698. Edifices of diferent kinds are required' in gardening, for carrying on operations, 
for retaining or preserving materials and products, and for recreative or decorative pur- 
poses. We shall consider the leading genera in the order of economical, anomalous, 
and decorative edifices. In all of these, the details of construction belong to civil ar- 
chitecture ; but the design of the greater part ought to be regulated by the judgment of 
the gardener or garden-architect. 

Sect. I. Economical BuUdi^igs. 

1699. Economical buildings^ are chiefly dwellings, store-rooms, and working-places, 
entrance-lodges, and buildings for procuring or retaining water. 

1700. The head-gardener s dwelling-house, in small places, often assumes the character 
of porter's lodge to the gate or entrance ; or is placed in some point of the grounds requiring 
protection. In all cases it should be near to the garden, and if forcing is cairied on, 
the nearer it is placed to that department the better. Sometimes it is placed in the 
back sheds, but that is an unwholesome situation ; such sheds fronting the direct north, 
and without a single opening to the south, east, or west, are entirely excluded from the 
sun, excepting during a few mornings and evenings in summer. A small enclosure, near 
the forcing-department, and, if possible, on rising ground, so as to command a view of 
at least that part of the garden, is to be preferred. With respect to accommodation, no 
dwelling in this country, for a servant expected to do his duty, ought to contain less on 
the ground-floor than a kitchen, back-kitchen, and parlor ; on the floor above that, at 
least two bedrooms, with closets, and other requisite appendages, internal as well as ex- 
ternal. This will suit a prudent man and his wife, not in circumstances to keep a maid, 
or to produce a numerous offspring. But for such as afford to keep a servant, or iiave, 
or deem it right to have, a large family, or persevere without thinking any thing about 



Book III. 



ECONOMICAL BUILDINGS. 



335 



the consequences in generating one child after another, more bedrooms will be necessary, 
and a larger parlor and kitchen. As a gardener, in common with other domesticated 
servants, is liable to be removed from the house he occupies at a short notice, and with- 
out any reference to his having, or being able to procure another, it follows, as a matter 
of justice, that what are called house-fixtures should be provided by the master. Water 
should be conducted to a pump fixed in the back-kitchen ; a furnace and boiler for 
washing affixed ; a proper range, with oven, &c. dressers, tables, shelves, &c. in the prin- 
cipal kitchen ; grates, and such closets and clothes-presses placed in the parlor and other 
rooms, &c. as the occupier would place there, if he held the house on lease. In general, 
we may observe that a master has seldom occasion to repent making his servants' abode 
comfortable, and even rather agreeable and elegant, than otherwise. A master of a well 
regulated mind, indeed, will be anxious to effect this, as far as lies in his power, for every 
portion of animated nature under his protection. 

1701. The gardener's office is necessarily omitted in small places; but it is an essential 
requisite wherever several men are kept. It should, if possible, adjoin the dwelling, and 
be connected with the seed-i-oom, fruit-room and cellar, root-cellar, tool-house, and gar- 
dener's lodge. The furniture or appendages to this room are the writing-desk ; a 
bookcase, containing a small library, to be lent out to the men ; a map of the garden, 
and of all the grounds under the master's care ; a herbarium press, and a cabinet for such 
specimens of plants as tlie gardener may find it useful to dry for his own use, or, as often 
happens, for that of his family ; a drawing-board and T square ; a board to be used when 
new grounds are laying out, as a plain table (in geometry) ; a tlieodolite, Gunter's chain, 
and measuring laths ; with any similar articles, as spare tliermometers, budding- 
knives, &c. 

1702. The seed-room may be connected with the office by a door in the lobby. This 
should be a small room, well ventilated, with a cabinet of drawers, as in a common seed- 
shop, but on a smaller scale, and somewhat different system. The lower tier of drawers 
should, of course, be the largest, and may be one foot deep by two wide on the face, and 
eighteen inches broad within. Tliis tier will serve for beans, peas, acorns, mast, &c. A 
second may be three fourtlis the size, for carrot, turnip, spinage, larch-seed, &c. A third, 
half the size, for salad-seeds ; and the fourth for those of pot and sweet herbs, need not be 
more than four inches deep on the face. The upper part of the cabinet may consist of 
shallow drawers, divided into ten or twelve compartments each, for flower-seeds ; and on 
the top of all, as being least in requisition, similar shallow drawers, with moveable parti- 
tions for bulbous roots. As the kind or kinds placed in each drawer will probably vary 
every year, it seems better that their names should only be written on paper and pasted 
on. There ought to be a small counter, with a weighing machine (that of Medhurst is 
preferable), an ink-piece placed on it, and drawers, with paper bags, packthreads, &c. 
below. Some seeds, which it is desirable to keep in the fruit, as capsicum, pompion, &c. 
may be suspended from rows of hooks, fixed in the ceiling. 

1703. The fruit-room may be connected with the seed-room. This ought to be well 
ventilated, for which purpose, like the three other rooms, it ought to have a small fire- 
place. The fruit-room was formerly a mere loft, where fruits were kept on the floor in 
common with onions, with no proper means of separation, or arrangement for systematic 
consumption. Now, however, they are regularly fitted up, either with shelves of lattice- 
work, on vi'liich to place sieves of different sorts of fruit ; or with close shelves, for jars, 
boxes, &c. according to the various modes adopted of preserving them. The room may 
be of any form, but one long and narrow {Jig. 282. a, a) is generally best adapted for 
ventilation and heating, or drjdng, when necessary, by a flue. The system of shelves 
(6, b) may be placed along one side, and may be raised to the height of six feet or more, 
(c, c) according to the number wanted. These shelves are formed of open work (d, rf), 
on which to place square sieves of fruit, each of which should be numbered, and a table 
or slate (e), containing tlie corresponding numbers, may be hung up in the room, and 



282 





b 

11 • , 11 


11 




1" 






a 












J 




















1 












1 




J 






















1 



336 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



opposite each number should be a space for noting down daily the number taken out of 
each sieve for use. From this table statements may be made from time to time of the 
quantity of fruit on hand for the use of the house-steward. {Maker, in Hort. Trans. 
vol. ii. 76.) Forsyth directs that all the floors or shelves on which apples are to be kept or 
sweated, should be made of white deal, as when red deal is made use of for these purposes, 
it is liable to give a disagreeable resinous taste to the fruit, and spoil its flavor ; when white 
deal cannot be procured, he advises covering the shelves with canvass. Those sorts of 
fruit which keep longest are generally best preserved in jars, excluded from the air, and 
placed in cold dry situations, not under 32° nor above 40^. 

1704. The root-cellar should be placed beneath the office and seed-shop ; and the 
fi-uit'cellar below the fruit-room, and both descended to from the lobby. Tlie great ob- 
ject is to keep the air in these apartments cool, and always, as near as possible, of the 
same degree of coolness : and for this purpose the windows should be small, placed be- 
low the ground level, and furnished with double or treble casements or sashes. These 
cellars should also be approached through double doors for the same reason. The fruit- 
cellar may be fitted up with binns or cells, like a wine cellar, in which casks and jars or 
sieves of fruit may be placed ; and the root-cellar may have a few divisions on the 
ground to keep diflPerent roots apart, and sand, to keep them of uniform plumpness or 
moisture. 

1705. The seed rooms or garrets may consist 

of one for drying and cleaning seeds ; one for 283 ^ 

drying bulhous roots, as onions, hyacinths, &c. ; 
and one for drying fruits or preserving them 
there. In all of these rooms, there should be 
hooks from the roof for hanging bundles of pot- 
herbs, branches of seeds, sieves, bags, &c. and a 
moveable table or counter in the centre of each, 
with lattice-shelves below for holding sieves of 
roots, seeds, or fruits. A very small fanning- 
macliine, and a couple of grooved cylinders to 
act as a threshing-machine, or a Meikle's hand 
threshing-machine {fig- 283.) to be worked 
by two men, are requisite appendages of the 
seed-room. Supposing these rooms to form one 
wing to the gardener's house, the office opening into his kitchen ; then the other wing 
may consist of a tool-house and men's living-room on the ground-floor ; cellars for po- 
tatoes and fuel for their use under, and sleeping-apartments over, with a door, lobby, 
and stair, corresponding vAth the other wing. 

1706. The tool-house is commonly a small apartment in the back sheds of hot-houses, in 
which the tools are laid down or piled up in the angles promiscuously ; but in a proper 
tool-room, wherever situated, there should be contrivances of different sorts for hanging 
up the tools, so as their important parts, such as the teeth of rakes, blades of hoes, and 
spades, &c. may always be so exposed, that the master may see whether or no they are 
properly cleaned. There are certain tools, of which each workman appropriates one to 
himself, as spades, scythes, &c. ; in these cases a small space should be allotted to each 
hired man, with his name affixed, &c. Watering-pots, syringes, engines, &c. should 
have their moveable parts separated, and be reversed, in order that they may drain and 
continue dry. Lists, nails, and mat-ties, should be kept in close drawers. Pruning- 
instruments oiled, and laid horizontally on latticed shelves or pins. A grindstone and 
other stones, and hones, with a vice, and files for sharpening the tines and teeth of forks 
and rakes, are the appropriate furniture of the tool-house. 

1707. The lodge for under-gardeners should never consist of less than three apartments 
or divisions ; first, an outer lobby, with a pump and exit for water, in which the work- 
men may wash their hands on entering to their meals, and the party who acts as cook or 
servant, which is generally taken by turns, may wash, scour, &c. ; secondly, the cook- 
ing and living room, in which should be an economical kitchen-range, with an oven and 
boiler included, and proper closets, cupboards, tables, &c. to expedite and simplify 
cooking ; and, thirdly, the bedroom over, where the bedsteads should be of iron, nar- 
row, and without curtains, and for not more than one person. To each bed, there should 
be a small clothes-press, in which should be kept the linen, &c. belonging to each bed, 
and for which the occupier ought to be rendered responsible. A cellar for fuel and 
edible roots should be formed below. It is a common practice to place the lodges for 
working gardeners behind the hot-houses, or some high wall, in what is called a back 
shed. There, in one ill-ventilated apartment, -with an earthen or brick floor, the whole 
routine of cooking, cleaning, eating, and sleeping is performed, and joung men are 
rendered familiar with filth and vermin, and lay the foundation of future diseases, by 
breathing unwholoseme air, and checking the animal functions by cold and damp. How 




Booit III. BUILDINGS FOR RAISING WATER* 



937 



masters can expect any good service from men treated worse than horses, it k difftcuh to 
imagine ; but the case is ten-fold worse, when head-gardeners and their famib'es are com- 
pelled to lodge in these shed-houses. Independently of filth and incommodiousness, the 
mother never fails to contract, early in life, rheumatism or ague ; and it is only the ex- 
treme healthfulness of the employment of gardening, and the consequent vigor of the 
operatives, that ward off till a later day the same and similar diseases in the fatliers and 
journeymen. . 

1 708- As a general arrangement of a gardener s house, office, and other appendages, the 
house may form a centre ; the office, seed and fruit apartments, cellar, and garrets, one 
wing ; and the lodge for under-gardeners, tool-house, &c. the other. 

1709. A line of sheds is generally placed behind the range of hot-houses, or be- 
hind the hot-wall, or other high wall of the garden. These are used as stores, or places 
of reserve for utensils, machines and implements, and for working-sheds. The width 
and height of this line of sheds is necessarily regulated by tlie height of tlie wall. The 
roof of tlie shed being towards the north, and therefore witliout the advantage of the sun 
to dry it after rains, should not make an angle of less tlian 40° degrees with the horizon, 
and as the lower wall or line of props ought, at least, to be seven feet high above the 
level of the floor of the shed, the width is guided accordingly, x^ll the fitting up requi- 
site for the part destined to hold materials, is a few hooks and projecting pins for ladders, 
&c« and a sound floor, either paved or prepared with mortar, Roman cement, and scoria ; 
and the whole, or the greater part of the division may have props or piers in front, in- 
stead of a wall and Avindows. As these sheds generally contain tlie hot-house furnaces, 
each of these, or every pair or group of tliem, ought to be enclosed with a low parapet to 
retain the fuel, give an orderly and neat appearance, and guard against accidents by fire, 
which might communicate with mats, litter, &c. Doors generally communicate with the 
hot-houses at different points, and near to each of tliese should be a bench or table on 
which to set or shift pots, &c. 

1710. The jyart of these sheds more particularly set apart for working, ought to be en - 
closed with a wall on all sides, and warmed by a fire-place or flue. It ought to be made 
perfectly light, and well aired by having numerous windows, and along these a range of 
benches or tables, for potting cuttings or bulbs, sowing seeds, preparing cuttings, num- 
ber-tallies, painting and naming them, preparing props for plants, hooks for layers, lists 
for wall-trees, making baskets, wattled hurdles, and a great variety of other operations 
performed in winter, or severe weather, when little or nothing can be done in the open 
air. It may by some be thought too great a refinement to place a fire-place or a flue 
in such sheds ; but if work is really expected to be done in them in cold weather, the 
saving will soon be rendered obvious. 

1711. In small gardens, where there are no hot-houses, one small building is generally 
devoted to all the purposes for which the ofBce, seed, tool, and fruit rooms, and working- 
sheds, are used. This should be fitted up with some degree of attention to the various 
uses for which it is designed, and a fire-place never omitted. 

1712. Entrance lodges and gates more properly belong to architecture than gardening. 
But, as in small places, they are sometimes designed by the garden-architect, or land- 
scape-gardener, a few remarks may be of use. In respect to style, the lodge ought al- 
ways to bear as much analogy as possible to the mansion. If the one is Grecian, so 
■should the other ; but the lodge should display less decoration, because, as the mind na- 
turally ascends from the less to the greater, the lodge would otherwise prove a false index 
to the mansion. In regard to general form, a cubic mass with a central chimney, is an 
unvaried comfortless-looking dwelling, especially when small. It is an attempt to form 
a whole without composing it of parts. A lodge, however small, to be a picturesque ob- 
ject, ought to contain a principal and subordinate mass or masses, and in the composition 
of which, the gate and piers may form one gradation. In respect to accommodations for 
the occupier, it ought never to contain less than three apartments — a kitchen or living- 
room, back kitchen, and sleeping-room, with the usual conveniencies ; and, at least, two 
sleeping-rooms where there are children. A handsome architectural entrance is but a 
poor compensation for its want of harmony with the mansion, of which that at Sion- 
House is an instance, and that at Blenheim of the contrary. But architects, like all of 
us, are sometimes so wrapt up in their art, or their favorite part of it, tJiat they forget 
that congruity of parts is essential to the unity of the whole. 

1713. Buildings for raising water. There are various contrivances fqr procurin"- 
water in garden-scenery, where it is not found in springs, rills, or lakes ; and where it is 
found, of collecting and retaining it. The principal of these are wells, conduit-pipes or 
drains, and reservoirs. 

Wells are vertical excavations in the earth ; always of such a depth as to penetrate a porous stratum 
charged with wgter, and mostly as much deeper as to form a reservoir in this stratum or in that 
beneath it. A well otherwise excavated is a mere tank for the water which may ooze into it from 
the surface strata. The form of the well is generally circular, and to prevent the crumbling down or 
falling in of the sides, this circle is lined with timber, masonry, or zones of metal. The earthy ma- 



338 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



terials being thus pressed on equally In every point of this circle, arc kept in equilibrium. When tlie Weil 
is not very deep, and in firm ground, this casing is built from the bottom to top, after the excavation is 
finished ; but when the soil is loose, the excavation deep, or its diameter 
considerable, it is built on the top in zones, sometimes seiiarated by hori- 
zontal sections of thin oak boards, which, with proper management, sink 
down as the excavation proceeds. There are various other modes, which 
those who follow this department of architecture are sufficiently conver- 
sant with. The height to which the water rises in the well, depends on 
the height of the strata which supply the water; occasionally it rises to 
the surface, but generally not within a considerable distance. In this 
case it is raised by buckets and levers {fig. 284.), by buckets and hand- 
rnachines placed over the well, or by buckets raised by horse-machines. 
{fig. 285.) 

1714. The lever and bucket mode is the most ancient and the simplest. 
It is common in the market-gardens round London and Paris, and in most 

of the villages from France to Berlin, Warsaw, Moscow, Astracan ; and, we are told, it is to be seen in 
Turkey, Persia, India, and China. The hand and horse-machines are more recent inventions, applicable 
to market-gardens. 





1715. The process of boring the earth for water has of late been successfully practised in various places, 
and especially at Tottenham, Middlesex, and ^Mitcham, Surrey. An augur like that used in draining is 
employed, and when the spring is reached, the augur hole is kept open by tin tubes soldered one to the 
other as they are pushed down. Up these tubes the water rises to the height of the source of the spring, 
and when this height does not reach the surfaco, a well is dug down to the level to which the water will 
rise. It is evident that where the spring will rise to the surface boring must be a great saving, but less so 
in proportion as the source of the spring is low. {London Journal of Arts, Sec. Oct. 1822. p. 204.) 

1716. Pumps are of various kinds, as the lifting-pump ; the forcing-pump, for very deep wells j the suction- 
pump ; and the roller-pump, a recent invention for such as do not exceed thirty-three feet in depth. A 
good pump for gardens, where the water is not to be raised above twenty-eiglit or thirty feet in depth, is that 
of Robertson Buchannan (author of a Treatise on Heating by Steam, &c.), because this pump, which also 
acts by the pressure of the atmosphere, will raise drainings of dunghills, or even water thickened by mud, 
sand, or gravel. " The points in which it differs from the common pump, and by which it excels, are, that it 
discharges the water below the piston, and has its valves lying near each other. The advantages of this 
arrangement are — that the sand or other matter, whicli maybe in the water, is discharged without injur- 
ing the barrel or the piston-leathers ; so that besides avoiding unnecessary tear and wear, the power of the 
pump is preserved, and it is not apt to be diminished or destroyed in moments of danger, as is often the 
case with the common and chain pumps; that the valves are not confined to any particular dimensions, 
but may be made capable of discharging every thing that can rise in the suction-piece without danger of 
being choked ; and that if, upon any occasion, there should happen to be an obstruction in the valves, 
they are both within the reach of a person's hand, and may be cleared at once, without the disjunction of 
any part of the pump. It is a simple and durable jmmp, and may be made either of metal or wood, at a 
moderate expense." Where clear water only is to be raised, Aust's (of Hoxton) curvilinear pump is pre- 
ferable even to Buchannan's. The advantages depend on the curvilinear form of the barrel^ which allows, 
and indeed obliges, the rod, the handle, and the lever, on which it works, to be all in one piece. Hence 
simplicity, cheapness, precision of action, more water discharged in proportion to the diameter of the 
barrel, and less frequent repairs. {Repertory of Arts, Jan. 1821.) Perkins's square-barrelled pump is a 
powerful engine {London Journal, &c.) ; but this and other contrivances for raising water will be found 
detailed in works on hydraulics. 

1717. Conduits for watering gardens are either open or surface conduits, or internal tubes or apertures. 
Open conduits are not common in Britain, though very general in France and Italy. They are formed in 
the commonest gardens of puddled or well incorporated clay ; in the better sort of brick, or rough stone lined 
with stucco or cement; and in the best,of hewn stone, in regular troughs, carefully jointed both by mecha- 
nical and chemical means. Internal tubes may be formed of timber, iron, lead, or earthenware. For 
mains or large supplies, cast-iron is the most durable, and timber the cheapest material ; but for the minute 
ramifications necessary to afford supplies at different points, lead excels every thing else. A beautiful ap- 
plication of the principles of chemistry to the jointing of lead pipes, has been made by Kewley (inventor 
of the automaton gardener). Instead of a large gibbous joint, formed by plastering on a mass of solder at 
an expense both of nlaterial and time, which in inch-pipes amounts to at least 3s. a joint, Kewley prepares 
clear transverse sections on the extremities to be joined, places these in perfect contact, heats the pipe 
within a few degrees of the melting point, and then, with one drop of solder not larger than a pea, he 
forms a junction as perfect as if no separation had previously existed. By proper irons this is done in 
three minutes, at an expense, time and materials included, of not more than one penny per joint 
Earthen pipes in a clayey sub-stratum may be used with economy, to convey water from ofie point to 
another; their disadvantages are liability to fracture or derangement from operations performed on the 
soil, to guard against which they should be laid at not less than three feet depth from the surface, and 
well bedded in worked clay. Conduits of common masonrj' can seldom be advantageously used on a 
small scale, unless for serving jointly as drains and conduits,' but where they are eighteen inches or two 
feet in diameter, a complete cylinder of masonry may be formed, which, well executed, becomes very 
durable. It is observed, however, that all conduits of masonry, and even earthen pipes, can only be used 



Book HI. 



ICE-HOUSE. 



aa audi where the water Is conducted along a level or declining bed ; w^reas by metal or wooden pijKJS, 
water may pass alternately over hollows and eminences, the latter not being higher than the source, 
without loss in the ground through which it passes. 

1718. Reservoirs may be eitlier tanks, cisterns, basins, or ponds. Tanks and cisterns 
are sometimes old. barrels well tarred or painted, and then sunk in the soil ; occasionally 
they are framed boxes of timber, the joints filled with oxide of lead and oil, and. the 
whole pitched over, and then placed where they are to remain either above or on a level 
with the surface. 

1719. Ponds or large basins {Jig- 286.) are reservoirs foitned in excavations, either iu 
soils retentive of water, or rendered so by tlie use of clay. This clay is tempered, or 
made compact and tenacious, by working it so as to exclude the larger globules of air 
and water, and intimately unite all its parts with as much moisture as leaves it plastic. 
The bottom and sloping sides of the excavation, being smoothed and made firm, this 
tempered clay or puddle is to be spread evenly over it, from margin to margin, about 
a foot thick, and well compacted by beating. To preserve it fiom injury by the 
pressure of feet, or other accidents, it should be covered with gravel, in thickness 
according to the supposed liability to accidents. If cattle are to enter it, eighteen 
inches of coarse gravel, or stones covered with six inches of fine gravel, will not be 
too much. Sometimes these basins are lined with pavement, tiles, or even lead, and 
the last material is the best, where complete dryness is an object around the margin. 



286 287 288 




1720. Tanks or cisterns (Jig. 287.) are generally excavations in the earth, lined with 
masonry, and sometimes raised two or three feet above it. Tliis masonry is always 
built with mortar which sets or hardens under water, as the Dorking and other sorts 
of lime, gypsum, and any lime mixed with oxide of iron, in the form of what is called 
Roman cement, or Puzzolana earth. (Davi/'s Elements of Agr. Chem. lect. vii.) To 
protect this, the bottom of the cistern or basin is sometimes covered wit-h six or eight 
inches of clay. Sometimes the bottom of the excavation for a pond or tank, is naturally 
a retentive clay, while the sides are of porous earth. In this case, the simplest way is to 
raise a wall, or vertical stratum of puddle (Jig. 288.), from the horizontal stratum of clay, 
to within a few inches of the surface of the ground. 

1721. Water for culinary purposes should be preserved in tanks, or in barrels interiorly charred, sunk 
deep in the ground, and rendered inaccessible to surface water. Tanks should be arched over with ma-, 
sonry, leaving, as ought always to be done in wells, a hole for the pump, sufficiently large to admit a man 
to clean or repair. A similar construction is proi)er for reservoirs of liquid manures, but they need not 
be so deep, as coolness in them is less sought for. {RatcliSTs Agr. of Fland. 1819.) All reservoirs for pure 
water, to be used in gardening, ought to be exposed to the sun and air. 

Skct. II. Arwnalom Buildings. 
1722. Collecting and preserving ice, rearing bees, 8cc. however unsuitable or dis- 
cordant it may appear, it has long been the custom to delegate' to the care of the 
gardener. In some cases also he has tlie care of the dove-house, fish-ponds, aviary, a 
menagerie of wild beasts, and places for snails, frogs, dormice, rabbits, &c. but we shall 
only consider the ice-house, apiary, and aviary, as legitimately belonging to gardening, 
leaving the others to the care of the gamekeeper, or to constitute a particular depart- 
ment in domestic or rural economy. That the subject of anomalous buildings may not 
occur again, we shall here conclude it by treating also of their management. 

SuBS-ECT. 1 . Of t fie Ice-house and its Management. 
: 1723. The ice-house. Ice is kept on the continent in cellars, at a greater or less 
dejjth from the surface according to the climate. These cellars are without windows, 
surrounded by very thick walls, and entered by double and treble doors, sometimes 
placed in angular or circuitous passages, and always with intervals of several feet between 
them. Sometimes precautions are taken to carry off any water which may arise from a 
partial thaw, by forming gutters across the floor, and covering it with a grating of strong 
lattice-work, leading to a cess-pool in tlie passage, whence the water can be taken out by 
utensils without opening the inner door ; but very frequently full confidence is had in 
the coolness of tlie situation, especially if the surrounding soil be dry. Wliere the sur- 
rounding soil is moist, a frame-work or cage of carpentry, grated at bottom, is con- 
structed in the cellar, so as to be from one to two feet apart from the floor, sides, and 
roof, and in this the ice is as perfectly preserved as in a dry soil. (Cours, &c. ; Bordlet/'s 
Essays and Notes on Hvsbandry, Philadelphia, 1780.) Ice is kept in the cellars of con- 

Z 2 



340 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IL 



289 




fectioners, and also by some of the market-gardeners, in heaps, with a very thick covering 
of straw or reeds. 

1724. To keep ice in stacks or heaps in the open air, 
an elevated circular platform [Jig. 289. a) is raised of 
earth ; on this the ice is piled up in a conic form during 
a severe frost, and the addition of water enables the 
builder to form the cone very steep. On this cone 
wheat-straw is laid a foot in thickness (6), over this a 
stratum of faggot-wood or spray (c), and finally another 
thick stratum of thatch or long litter of any sort (rf). 
In this way ice will keep a year, care being taken to 
expose it to the air as short time as possible in taking 
supplies. 

1725. The form of ice-houses commonly adopted at 
country-seats, both in Britain and in France, is gene- 
rally that of an inverted cone, or rather hen's egg, with 
the broad end uppermost, {fig. 290. ) 

1726. The proper situation for an ice-house is that of a dry spot of ground ; as, where- 
cver there is moisture, the ice will be 'liable to dissolve : of course, in all strong soils 
which retain the wet, too much care cannot be taken to make drains all round the house 
to carry off moisture. The situation should likewise be elevated, that there may be 
descent enough to convey off any wet that may arise near it, or from the ice melting ; and 
also as much exposed to the sun and air as possible. 

1727. The dqUh and diameter of the ice-well should be proportioned to the quantity of, 
ice wanted ; but it is always best to have sufSciont room, as when the house is well built, 
it will keep the ice two or three years : and there will be this advantage in having it large 
enough to contain ice for two years' consumption, that if a mild winter should happen, 
when there is not ice to be had, there will be a stock in the house to supply the want. 
Where the quantity wanted is not great, a well of six feet diameter, and eight feet deep, 
will be large enough ; but for a large consumption, it should not be less than nine or ten 
feet diameter, and as many deep. 

1728. The excavation for the ice-well, where the situation is either of a dry, chalky, 
gravelly, or sandy kind, may be made entirely below the surface of the ground ; but in 
strong loamy, clayey, or moist ground, it will be better to raise the well so high above 
the surface, as that there may be no danger from the wetness of the soil. 

1729. In building tlie ice- 
well there should be a space 290 
about two feet deep left at the 
bottom {fig. 290. a), for re- 
ceiving any moisture which 
may drain from the ice, and 
a small underground drain 
(6) containing a stop or trap 
for the exclusion of air (c) 
should be laid from this, to 
carry off the wet. Over the 
space at bottom (a) should be 
placed a strong grate of wood 
or a cart-wheel, to let the 
moisture fall down, which 
may at any time happen from 
the melting of the ice. The 
sides of the well (rf) must be 
walled up with brick or stone at least two feet tluck; or the wall may be built hollow. 
When the proper height is attained the waU may be arched over with two arches with a 
vacuity between, and leaving in the centre a hole for the admission of the ice (e), and in 
the sides a door for taking it out (/). This door, in order the better to exclude the air 
should open into a porch {g) with the three other doors, the spaces between which should 
be filled with straw to exclude more effectually the heat of the atmosphere. The whole 
being covered first with a layer of tempered clay and next with a hill of earth, the appear- 
ance will not be disagreeable {fig. 291.) and may be made ornamental. 

1730. Management. When the house is finished, it shoidd have time to dry before the 
ice is put into it ; as when the walls are moist, the damp of them frequently dissolves the 
ice. At the bottom of the well, upon the wooden grate, some small faggots should be 
laid ; and if upon these a layer of reeds be placed smooth for the ice to rest upon, it will 
be better than straw, which is coramonly used. In the choice of the ice, the thinner it is, 
the better it may be broken to powder ; as the smaller it is broken, the better it will unite 




Book III. 



APIARY. 



341 




when put into the well. In putting it in, it should be rammed close, and a space left be- 
tween it and the wall of the well, by straw being placed for the purpose, so as to give 
passage to any moisture that may be collected by the dissolving of the ice on the top or 
otherwise. If snow is used instead of ice, it ought to be pressed very firmly together, so 
as to exclude air, and in fact approach in texture to ice. To aid in consolidating both ice 
and snow, a little water may be occasionally poured over it from the rose of a watering- 
pot. In putting the ice into the house, some mix a little nitre or common salt with it, to 
make it congeal more fully ; but this is not necessary. As the ice becomes solid in the 
well, an iron crow is necessary to take it up with. 

1731. An ice-cold chamber is found of great use in horticulture, in preserving gathered 
vegetables, as pease, beans, cauliflowers, &c. in a fresh state, for some time after they are 
gathered. Potatoes and other tubers and bulbs, also plants in pots, cuttings, &c. may 
have their vegetation retarded by being placed in so cold an atmosphere. Several ice- 
houses, Neill informs us, excellently adapted not only for the main purpose, but for these 
secondary views, which nowise interfere with the other, have lately been constructed in 
the neighbourhood of Edinburgh, under the directions of Hay, particularly at Dalmeny 
Park and Dundas Castle. These ice-houses have double walls, a passage being left be- 
tween the outer and inner. In the thick wall immediately enclosing the ice, are four re- 
cesses, with stone shelves for receiving the vegetables or fruits. In the outer wall, the 
same object is provided for. The roof, it may be added, is arched with stone, and has a 
hole in the top, over the centre of the ice-chamber, for introducing the ice. The passage 
between the two walls is likewise arched, and has two or three small grated apertures, 
which are closed with fitted stones, and may be opened for the purpose of admitting light 
and air when wanted. (Supp. to Encyc. Brit. art. Hort.) 

1732. If an ice-cellar was added to the domestic offices of country-seats, and the ice 
preserved in it, and placed under the immediate care of the steward or housekeeper, it 
would certainly be more convenient for culinary use, and attended with less risk of melt- 
ing when ice was taken out. Ice-cold rooms, which would be found useful for various 
purposes in dom.estic economy, might be formed adjoining. It is possible, however, that 
artificial modes of producing cold and ice as wanted, may supersede the use of ice-houses 
altogether. A very scientific view of the subject of ice-houses will be found in Rozier's 
Diet, of Agr., and in Nouveau Cours (V Agriculture, &c. art. Glaciere. 

SuBSECT. 2, Of the A^nary and the Management of Bees. 

1733. The care of bees seems more naturally to belong to gardening than the keeping 
of ice ; because their situation is naturally in the garden, and their produce is a 
vegetable salt. The garden-bee is found in a wild state in most parts of the globe, in 
swarms or governments ; but never in groups of governments so near together as in a 
bee-house, which is an artificial and unnatural contrivance to save trouble, and injurious 
to the insect directly as the number placed together. Thus, if ten acres are sufficient to 
maintain two hives, a hundred acres will be required to maintain twenty ; but while, in 
the former case, the hives being placed in the centre of the ten acres, each bee need not 
perform a longer journey than two hundred yards ; in the latter, the colony being simi- 
larly situated as to the hundred acres, the average journey for each insect wfll be nearly a 
mile. Hence, independently of other considerations, one disadvantage of congregating 
hives in bee-houses or apiaries. The advantages are, greater facility in protecting from 
heats, colds, or thieves, and greater facilities of examining their condition and progress. 
Independently of their honey, bees are considered as useful in gardens, by aiding in the 
impregnation of flowers. For this purpose, a hive is sometimes placed in a cherry-house, 
and sometimes in peach-houses ; or the position of the hive is in the front or end wall 
of such houses, so as the body of the hive may be half in the house and half in the wall,, 
with two outlets for the bees, one into the house, and the other into the open air. By 
this arrangement, the bees can be admitted to the house and open air alternately, and ex- 
cluded from either at pleasure. 

Z 3 



342 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 




292 



1 734. The apiary, or bee-house. The slmr 
plest form of a bee-hous2 consistB of a few- 
shelves in a recess of a wall or other building 
(Jig. 292.) exposed to the south, and >vith 
or witliout shutters, to exclude the sun in 
summer, and, in part, the frost in winter. 
The scientific or experimental bee-house is a 
detached building of boards, differing from 
the former in having doors behind, which 
may be opened at any time during day to 
inspect the hives. In both kinds of houses, 
small holes, say half an inch high and three 
inches wide, with a small projection as a 
landing-place, are made in the front shutters, opposite the situation of each hive on the 
shelf. Tlie upper part of tliese openings or entrances is sometimes guarded by a hori- 
zontal fillet to throw off the rain. Bee-houses may always be rendered agreeable, and 
often ornamental objects : they are particularly suitable for flower-gardens ; and one 
may occur in a recess in a wood or copse, accompanied by a picturesque cottage and 
flower-garden. Tliey enliven a kitchen-garden, and communicate particular impressions 
of industry and usefulness. 

1735. The position of the apiary is thus treated by Huish : in the southern countries 
the aspect which is preferred is always to the eastward ; in the northern countries, it is 
always to tlie eastward and the southward; but in England little or no attention is paid 
to the aspect. It is cei-tain, however, that the aspect of the apiary should vary with the 
climate of the country ; and in this climate, there can be little doubt that two points to 
the eastward of south, is tlie best. 

Protection from high winds in essential In whatever position the hives are placed. In this country, 
therefore, a protection from the south-west is advisable. The high winds not only prevent the bees from 
leaving the hive in quest of honej', but they also surprise them in the fields, and often kill them by dashing 
tliom against the trees and rocks, or into the rivers. 

The /lives in an apiary shmild aliuai/s be placed in a right line ; but should the number of the hives be 
great, and the situation not capacious enough to admit of their being placed longitudinally, it is more ad- 
visable to place them over one another, on shelves, than in double rows on the ground. A bee, on leaving 
the hive, generally forms an angle of about forty-five with the horizon ; the elevation of the hive should, 
therefore, be about two feet from the ground, in order to protect it from humidity. The greater the 
elevation of t)ie hive, the longer is the flight of the swarm ; and when they are at a certain point of 
elevation, the swarms are lost for ever to the proprietor. If the hives are to be placed in a double row, 
the hinder ones should alternate with, and be placed at, such a distance from the front ones, that when 
the bees take their flight, no obstruction i; offered to their ascent. 

Placing several hives upon the same bench, is very injurious, and during the swarming season, it is often 
attended with very destructive consequences. Huish was once requested by a gentleman to perform an 
experiment upon a hive, which was placed on the same bench with six others, and in attempting to move 
the hive destined for the operation, the others were agitated, and the whole apiary became in a little time 
in a state of confusion. The easy access also, which the bees of one hive have to those of another, pro- 
motes quarrels and murderous battles. It is an erroneous opinion, though held by some skilful apiarians, 
that all the bees of one apiary know each other, and that it is only the bees of' a foreign apiary, with 
whom they quarrel. Huish having been often witness of the destructive animosity of these little insects, 
and the wars which they wage upon the weaker hives in their own establishment, endeavours to impress 
it strongly upon the attention of every apiarian, to place every hive upon a respective pedestal. In general 
a post is placed at each comer of the stand, as some prejudiced people believe that a hive stands firmer 
upon four feet than upon one ; but Huish is certain that they who have once used the single pedestal, 
will never have recourse again to the four-legged stool. Another advantage particularly arises from the 
use of a single pedestal, which is, that the hive may be chained down and locked. 

The apiary should be kept particularly clean; all noxious weeds carefuUy removed, and no rubbish be 
left in which the enemies of the bees can conceal themselves. A few low trees or shrubs, planted in the 
vicinity of the apiary, will be found useful in arresting the flight of the swarms, for they very often 
alight on espalier trees, or on currant and gooseberry bushes. It is essential, however, to observe, that 
the apiary should not be incommoded %vith herbs or plants, which rise to a height equal to, or exceeding 
the entrance of the hive ; because the bees, on their arrival from their journeys, being much fatigued, 
are impeded by these plants, and regain their habitation with difficulty. If they touch these plants on 
passing, they often fall to the ground, and become victims to their enemies, or are unfortunately trodden 
under foot. Such plants also serve the purpose of a ladder, for the enemies of the bees to ascend into the 
hive, and especially the ants, which in some districts are particularly numerous. These little insects arc 
a great detriment to a hive, and they baffle the most vigilant attention of the apiarian to prevent their 
depredations. I have found that a small leaden reservoir of water, encircling the bottom of the pedestal, 
is of great service in preventing the ascent of these insects. 

Tfie vicinity of great towns is not a proper situation for an apiary. The smoke of a city is very detri- 
mental to bees, and the chimneys are in general the resort of the swallows and martins, who are great 
destroyers of these insects. 

The proximity of a large river is also injurious, as the bees in their homeward flight are often dashed 
into it by the high winds, or fall into it from fatigue. 

1736. The position of hives, according to Dr. Howison, should be such as to receive the rays of the 
rising as well as meridian sun ; heat and light appearing the principal stimulants to the action of bees. 
A hive so situated as not to be touched by the sun until some hours later than the other hives in the same 
garden, would, in the course of the season, lose a proportional number of days' labor. Hives should stand 
at some distance from walls,and hedges. When lately building a garden-wall, with a gootl exposure for 
bees, I ordered a number of niches to be made, into which I afterv/ards put hives. These were, however, 
so much infested with snails in summer, and mice in winter, that I was under the necessity of removing 
them to a more open situation. 



Book III. 



APIARY. 



343 




1737. The furniture of the apiart/, or bee-house, consists of the hives or utensils in which 
each hive or swarm is congregated, and lives, and works, and of these there is a great 
variety of sorts. 

1738. TJie Polish hive, or log-hive, {Pasieka Pol.) {fig. 293.) may be considered as 293 
the primitive form of artificial dwellings for bees. It is simply the trunk of a 
tree, of a foot or fourteen inches in diameter, and about nine feet long. It is 
scooped out (boring in this country would be better) for about six feet from one 
end, so to form a hollow cylinder of that length, and of six or eight inches dia- 
meter within. Part of the circumference of this cylinder is cut out during the 
greater part of its length, about four inches wide, and a slip of board is made to 
fit the opening. On the sides of this slip («), notches are made every two or three 
inches, of sufficient size to allow a single bee to pass. This slip may be furnished 
with hinges and with a lock and key ; but in Poland it is merely fastened in by a 
wedge. All that is wanting to complete the hive is a cover at the top to throw 
off the rain, and then it requires only to be placed upright like a strong post in 
the garden so as the bottom of the hoUow cylinder may be not nearer the ground 
than two feet, and the opening slip look to the south. "When a swarm is to be 
put in, the tree, with the door or slip opened, is placed obliquely over it ; when 
the bees enter, the door is closed, and the holes stopped with clay till the hive is 
planted or placed upright. When honey is wanted, the door is opened during 
the finest part of a warm day, when most of the bees are out ; its entire state is 
seen from top to bottom, and the operator, with a segar in his mouth, or with a 
lighted rag, to keep off the bees from his hands, cuts out, with a hooked knife, 
as much comb as he thinks fit. In this way fresh honey is obtained during the 
whole summer, the bees are never cramped for room, nor does it become neces- 
sary to kiU them. The old comb, however, is annually cut out to prevent or 
lessen the tendency to swarming, which, notwithstanding this and the size of 
their dwelling, they generally do once a year ; for the laws of nature are not 
to be changed. Though it is a fact that a small swarm of bees will not do well 
in a large hive, yet if the hive extend in length and not in breadth, it is ad- 
mitted both by Huber and Huish, that they will thrive in it. " If too great a diameter," says Huber, 
" be not given to the abode of the bee, it may without danger be increased in the elevation, their success 
in the hollow trees, their natural domicile, incontestably proves the truth of this assertion." We wit- 
nessed in 1813, near Grodno, the management by a woman, Panna Andriewschieskniowna, (A''. M. Ma. 
gazine, June 1818.) in whose house we lodged, of above a dozen of these hives, for nearly four months, 
and are of opinion that they merit a trial in this country. It is singular, that this should be almost 
the only continental hive that Huish, who seems to have paid more attention to the subject by foreign 
travel, study, and practice, than almost any man, has not seen. In Poland, he says, the inhabitants 
have no regular bee-hives. (Treatise on Bees, 3d edit. 1817, p. 52.) 

1739. The common hive, called by the French the Scotch hive, is a thimble-shaped basket of rushes, straw, 
and sometimes of willows, about a foot in diameter within, and fourteen inches high. It is formed by 
coiling ropes of straw of wheat on a mould, sewing the layers to each other in advancing by flattened 
shoots of bramble, clematis, or willow. In Georgia, hives of this class are wrought with willows in the 
form of a cone, and the bees enter by the apex. [Johiiston's Journey overland from India, 1817.) 

1740. The glass hive is variously constructed, sometimes with two of the sides of glass in order to seethe 
bees at work ; at other times the hive is entirely of wood or straw, but with a flat surface at top, pierced 
with holes about an inch diameter, on which to insert crystal bell-glasses or drinking-glasses, in which 
the bees may be seen at workj and which glasses, when filled with comb, may be removed and replaced 
by empty ones, and thus occasional supplies of fresh honey obtained during summer. In the glass hive of 
White and Thorley, one large globe is used, which, as often as filled, is removed and replaced by an empty 
one. Such hives must necessarily be placed in the bee-house, or under a proper cover to exclude the 
weather. Huish says, " they are fit only for the amateur, or those persons who wish to have a little fine 
honey during the season, but who have no inclination to preserve the bees for the benefit of the succeeding 
year." 

1741. The storying or pyramidal hive admits of increase, by 
the addition of horizontal sections of case, whether of straw 
or timber. The object is to produce a very strong hive ; but 
this, when carried beyond a certain point, is found injurious, 
rather than otherwise. {Huish, p. 67.) 

1742. The hive of Palteau {fig. 294.) is composed of three or 
four frames, each a foot square, by three inches in height 
These square frames are placed the one on the other, and 
the first and last can always be lifted without deranging, the 
work in the others. Each square is strengthened from 
every side by a cross piece of eight or ten lines in width, 
and two lines in thickness, which serves tq sustain the combs 
of the bees. All the frames are tied together by means 
of these cross pieces; a board is placed on the top; and a 
general cover is placed over the whole to guard it from the 
effects of the seasons. In autumn, when the honey is to be 
taken from this hive, the cross pieces are untied, and one or 
two of the upper frames are removed, passing the long blade 
of a knife or a wire between. This done, an empty frame is 
placed above, and another under all the rest, which makeup 
for the two removed. " In an hour after," says Bosc, who de- 
scribes and recommends this hive, " the bees are at work as if nothing had happened; and the same 
operation can be renewed to infinity." 

1743. Huish's hive {fig. 295.) is about the capacity of the common straw hive (1739.), in shape like a 
flower-pot, placed on its narrow end, with a convex cover (a). It is so constructed interiorly that 
each comb (c) may be extracted by itself without deranging the rest; the combs being attached to 
slips of board {b) placed across the mouth or top of the hive. Any one of them may be lifted up, 
and to this the tapering construction of the interior is favorable. To prevent the bees from working 
between the sUps, air is admitted by means of pierced plates of tinned iron {fig. 296. «1, and to 
prevent human thieves from carrying off the whole hive, it is chained and padlocked {fig. 296. b) 
to a strong post, which serves also as a fulcrum. The inventor of this hive has tried it, he 
says, for nearly twenty years, and the following he states as the mode of using it, and the ad- 
vantages attending its construction. " At any time and season when I require some honeycomb, or at 
the end of the season, when I deprive my bees of their superfluous store, I open the top, and take the side- 
boards out, from which having cut the honeycomb, I replace them in the hive, and the operation i# 

Z 4 



294 




344 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 





facilitated by hax'ing some vacant boards ready 
to su])ply the place of the full ones. This oper- 
ation is very easily and speedily performed ; it 
has the advantage of not disturbing the middle 
combs, and I have often deprived these hives of 
their honey without the loss of a single bee, ex- 
cepting those few who left their stings in various 
parts of my dress. — Two very considerable ad. 
vantages arise from the use of this hive : in the 
first place, there is never any occasion to make 
an addition to the hive at the bottom, when the 
bees, by lying out in clusters, declare that they 
stand in need of room ; for the operation of de- 
priving them of a part of their combs from the 
top, will give them the room which they require, 
and which they will soon replenish with honey. 
In the common hive it is customary, in this pre- 
dicament, to place, what is called in Scotland an 

eek, which consists of from four to six bands of the same diameter as the hive ; but, on taking away this eck 
in the autumn, I have seen the most injurious consequences result to the hive. It is, in general, ix>rfonned 
by cutting the combs v.-ith a wire between the hive and the eek, and then, whilst one person lifts up the hive 
another draws the eek away : tlie hive then rests on the stool. Few persons, however, consider that, as 
the combs are cut parallel with the bottom of the hive, they will all touch the stool on which it stands, and 
I have thus known a wliole hive perish. The second advantage is, that the whole of the interior of the 
hive is open to your inspection, and you are thus enabled to examine the devastation of the moth, or to 
ascertain the presence of any other enemj\" (Treatise on Bees, p. 85.) 

1744. Br. Huw/son's hive {figs. 297- to 299.) for obtaining the honey without killing the bees, " consists of 
two distinct hexagons {figs. 297, 298.) ; one placed above the other. The under is formed of six panes of 
half-inch deal, each measuring ten inches in width and eight in depth, and covered with a thin board at top. 
This forms a box that will contain two pecks' measure of corn, and which he considers as sufficient for 
the largest swarm. This is intended for the breeding, as well as winter habitation of the bees. The upper is 
of the same dimensions and form as the under at bottom, but, in order to give it a conical shape, for the 
more conveniently fixing thereon a coat of straw, the panes at top are only live inches wide, which is also 
covered by a piece of board. The upper box has a moulding {fig. 297. a) fixed to its under part, which 
projects about a quarter of an inch, and so exactly embraces the upper part of the lower box, as to join 
these two firmly together. Ifi tlie deal which forms the top of the lower box, are cut four oval holes 
{fig. 298. c), each one inch wide and two inches long, through which the bees pass into the upper. This 
communication, when not wanted, is shut by a board which moves on a nail in its centre. Tlie small pane 



297 



298 



299 





of glass {fig.Sdl- b), in the top of the upper box, admits of seeing the progress the bees have made in it, 
without seiiarating it from the lower one. This pane is covered to exclude light and cold or heat by a small 
shutter (c). When the swarm is first put into the lower box, the communication is shut with the ujiper, 
until the bees have completely filled the lower with combs. The communication is then to be opened, 
when the bees will ascend, and, if the season is favourable and the swarm numerous, they will fill it also, 
but not until they have completely stocked the lower. By removing the straw covering, and looking 
through the glass in the upper box, it may be seen what honey has been collected. Should a part or the 
whole'of it be wanted, it will only be necessary carefully to separate the upper from the lower box, and shut 
the board of communication. The upper box is then to be removed to some distance, and the bees con- 
tained in it driven off, on which they will immediately join their companions in the lower. So soon as the 
honey is taken from the box, it can be replaced, and if early in the season, the communication opened for 
making more honej", but if late, it must be kept shut uniil the hive has swarmed next summer. Both the 
lower hexagon {fig. 298.) and the upper {fig. 299.) contain the usual cross horizontal sticks {a, a, a) for sup- 
porting the combs. If honeycomb early next season is preferred to a swarm, then the communication must 
be opened about the beginning of June. All the honey procured in this way is remarkable for its purity, 
none of the cells having been ever polluted by the hatching of young bees. The greatest advantages, how- 
ever, from this method, are the early and large swanns j the consequence of not killing the bees." (Cfl/c- 
donian Memoirs, vol. ii, p. 133.) 



Book III. 



APIARY. 



545 



1 745. Management of bees. Being of opinion that the common straw or Scotch hive 
is the best for general purposes, we shall give Dr. Howison's mode of management as 
the simplest and most effectual for the common end in view. If the lives of the bees 
are to be saved, then some of the others may be tried ; and the most suitable for this 
purpose, we think, is the Polish hive, and the next best that of Howison. The 
most ingenious, and the fittest for an amateur, is no doubt that of Huish. The latter 
autlior justly remarks, that " there is no certain method, nor will one be ever dis- 
covered, by which a great harvest of wax and honey, and great swarms, can be ob- 
tained at pleasure : these are chimerae, which it is folly to pursue ; because the former 
depends on the seasons being more or less favorable to the secretion of honey, on 
the countries which the bees inhabit being more or less wooded and covered with 
flowers, and the latter on the fecundity of the queen. Hence that annual difference 
between the harvest of honey and wax, and the largeness or smallness of the swarms 
which is found in all countries. To the same causes may be attributed the fact, 
that a mode of treatment, which has succeeded one year, will not succeed the 
next, although the circumstances be almost the same in appearance. It is these dif- 
ferences and variations, which, for the period of fifty-five years, have given rise to hives 
of different forms and materials, which have only tended to instruct us, that bees can 
inhabit, work, and collect provisions in vessels of every form, from the excavated trunk 
of the tree, as it is used in Poland and the northern countries, to the expensive and 
useless glass hive, or to the hive of Du Hamel ; and, where no hollow trunk of the tree 
can be found, in the holes of walls, in chimneys, and under the roofs." 

1746. Choice of bees. To the common observer, all working bees,'as to external appearance, are nearly 
the same ; but to those who examine them with attention, the difference in size is very distinguishable ; 
and they are in their vicious and gentle, indnlent and active natures, essentially different. Of the stock 
which I had in 1810, it required 250 to weigh an ounce ; but they were so vicious and lazy, that I changed 
it for a smaller variety, which possesses much better dispositions, and of which it requires 296, on an 
average, to weigh an ounce. Whether size and disposition are invariably connected, I have not yet had 
sutticient experience to determine. 

1747. Materials and size of hives. Hives made of straw, as now in use, have a great advantage over 
those made of wood or other materials, from the effectual defence they affbrd against the extremes of heat 
in summer, and cold in winter. That the hives in size should correspond as nearly as possible with that 
of the swarms, has not had that attention paid to it which the subject demands, as much of the success in 
the management of bees depends on that circumstance. From blind instinct, bees endeavour to fiU with 
combs whatever hive they are put into, before they begin to gather honey. Owing to this, when the hive is 
too large for its inhabitants, the time for collecting their winter store is spent in unprofitable labor : and 
stan^ation is the consequence. This evil also extends to occasioning late swarming the next summer ; it 
being long before the hive becomes so filled with young bees as to produce a necessity for emigration, 
from which cause the season is too far advanced for the young colonies to procure a winter stock. I should 
consider it as a good rule in all cases, that the swarm should fill two thirds of the hive. The hives used 
by me for my largest swarms, weighing from five to six pounds, will contain two pecks' measure of corn, 
and will yield, in a good season, eight Scots pints of honey, and for smaller swarms in proportion. Hives 
with empty combs are highly valuable for second swarms, as the bees are thereby enabled much sooner to 
begin collecting honey. 

1748. Feeding of bees. Near the sea little honey is collected after the first week in August ; but in 
high situations, where the flowers are later and heath abounds, the bees labor with advantage until the 
middle of September. These are the proper periods, according to situation, for ascertaining if the hives 
intended to be kept, contain a sufficient winter stock. The killing of the drones perhaps marks this time 
with more precision. If a large hive does not weigh thirty pounds, it will be necessary to allow it half a 
pound of honey, or the same quantity of soft sugar, made into a syrup, for every jxiund that is deficient 
of that weight ; and, in like proportion to smaller hives. This work must not be delayed, that time may 
be given for the bees to make the deposit in their empty cells before they are rendered torpid by the cold. 

1749. Preparing sugar for bees. I must here notice, that sugar simply dissolved in water (which is 
a common practice), and sugar boiled with water into a syrup, form compounds very differently suited for 
the winter store of bees. When the former is wanted for their immediate nourishment, as in spring, it 
will answer equally as a sjTup ; but if to be laid up as a store, the heat of the hive quickly evaporating the 
water, leaves the sugar in dry crystals, not to be acted upon by the trunks of the bees. I have known several 
instances of hives killed by hunger, while some pounds' weight of sugar in this state remained in their 
cells. The boiling of sugar into sjTup forms a closer combination with the water, by which it is prevented 
from flj-ing off, and a consistence resembhng that of honey, retained. I have had frequent experience of 
hives not containing a pound of honey, preserved in perfect health through the winter, with sugar so pre- 
pared, when given in proper time, and in sufficient quantity. 

1750. Covering the hives. Bees are evidently natives of a warm climate, a high temperature being ab- 
solutely necessary to their existence ; and their continuing to live in hollow trees during the severe win- 
ters of Russia and America, must depend on the heat produced from the great size of the swarms which 
inhabit these abodes. From my own obsen^ation, the hives which are best covered during winter, 
always prosper most the following summer. In consequence, about the end of harvest, I add to the thin 
covering of straw put on the hives at the time of swarming a thick coat, and shut up the aperture through 
which the bees entered, so that only one can pass at a time. Indeed, as a very small portion of air is 
necessary for bees in their torpid state, it were better, during severe frosts, to be entirely shut up, as num- 
bers of them are often lost from being enticed to quit the hive by the sunshine of a winter day. It will, 
however, be proper at times to remove, by a crooked wire or similar instrument, the dead bees and other 
filth, which the living at this season are unable to perform of themselves. 

1751. Treatment during the breeding season. To hives, whose stock of honey was sufficient for their main- 
tenance, or those to which a proper quantity of sugar had been given for that purpose, no further atten- 
tion will be necessary, until the breeding season arrives. This, in warm situations, generally takes place 
about the beginning of May, and in cold, about a month after. Owners of hives are often astonished; 
that, at this advanced season, when their bees had, for weeks preceding, put on the most promising ap- 
pearance, after a few days of rain, they become so weak and sickly as to be unable to leave the hive, and 
continue declining until they at last die. From paying attention to this subject, I am convinced that the 
cause is as follows : The young bees for a short time previous to their leaving their cells, and some time 
after, require being fed with the same regularity that young birds are by their parents ; and if the store 
in the hive be exhausted, and the weather such as not to admit of the working bees going abroad to col- 
lect food in sufficient quantity for themselves and their brood, the powerful principle of affection for their 



346 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



voung compels them to part with what is not enough for their support, at the expense of their own lives. 
To prevent such accidents, I make it a rule, that if, during the breeding season, it rain for two successive 
days, to feed all the bees indiscriminately, as it would be difficult to ascertain those only who require it 

1752. SMarmin^. For several years past, my hives have uniformly sent forth their first swarms during 
the second week m July, from which it appears, that early or late swarming, in the same situations, is not 
so much regulated by good or bad seasons as might have been expected. Near the sea this will, of course, 
take place some weeks earlier. 

1753. Signs of sivartnin^. The first swarming is preceded by the appearance of drones, and hanging 
out of working bees, 'the signs of the second are more equivocal, the most certain being that of the 
queen, a day or two before swarming, at intervals of a few minutes, giving out a sound a good deal re- 
sembling that of a cricket. It frequently happens that the swarm will leave the old hive, and return 
again several times, which is always owing to the queen not having accompanied them, or from having 
dropt on the ground, being too young to fly to a distance. In such cases, I have seen her found near to 
the old hive, and on being taken up and placed in the new one, the swarm instantly settled. 

1754. Late swa?-rns. When a hive yields more than two swarms, these should uniformly be joined to 
others that are weak, as from the lateness of the season, and deficiency in number, they will otherwise 
perisi.. This junction is easily formed, by inverting at night the hive in which they are, and placing 
over it tlie one you intend them to enter. They soon ascend, and apparently with no opposition from the 
former possessors, as I have never observed fighting to be a consequence. It being very universally be- 
lieved that two queens cannot live together in the same hive, I have, for several daj-s after this forced 
junction, searched for the murdered queen, but never with success. Should the weather, for some days 
after swarming be imfavorable for the bees going out, they must be fed with care until it clears up, 
otherwise the young swarm will run a great risk of dying. {Howison, in Met??. Calcd. Hort. Soc.) 

1755. Taking the honey. This may be effected, even with liives of the common 
construction, by three modes, partial deprivation, total deprivation, and suffocation. 

175f). Partial deprivation is performed about the beginning of September. " Having ascertained the 
weight of the hive, and consequently the quantity of honeycomb which is to be extracted, begin the oper- 
ation as soon as evening sets in, by reverting the full hive, and placing an empty one over it; particu- 
lar care must be taken that the two hives are of the same diameter, for if they ditter in their dimensions, 
it will not be possible to effect the driving of the bees. The hives being placed on each other, a sheet or 
large tablecloth must be tied round them at their point of junction, in order to prevent the bees from 
molesting the operator. The hives being thus arranged, beat the sides gently with a stick or the hand, 
but particular caution must be used to beat it on those parts to which the combs are attached, and which 
will be found parallel with the entrance of the hive. The ascent of the bees into the upper hive wiU be 
known by a loud humming noise, indicative of the pleasure in finding an asylum from their enemy ;~ in a 
few minutes the whole' community will have ascended, and the hive with the bees in it may be placed 
upon the pedestal from which the full hive was removed. The hive, from which the bees have been 
driven, must then -be taken into the house, and the operation of cutting out the honeycomb commences. 
Having extracted the requisite quantity of comb, this opportunity must be embraced of inspecting the 
hive, and of cleaning it from any nor.ious matter. In cutting the combs, however, particular attention 
should be paid not to cut into two or three combs at once, but having commenced the cutting of one, to 
pursue it to the top of the hive ; and this caution is necessary for two reasons. If you begin the cutting 
of two or three combs at one time, were you to extract the whole of them, you would perhaps take too 
much ; and, secondly, to stop in the middle of a comb, would be attended" with very pernicious conse- 
quences, as the honey would drop from the cells which have been cut in two, and then the bees on being 
returned to their native hive, might be dromied in their own sweets. The bees, also, in their return to 
their natural domicile, being still under the impression of fear, would not give so much attention to the 
honey which flows from the divided cells ; and as it would fall on the board, and from that on the ground, 
the bees belonging to the other hives would immediately scent the wasted treasure, and a general attack 
upon the deprivated hive might be dreaded. The deprivation of the honeycomb being effected, the hive 
may be returned to its former position, and reversing the hive which contains the bees, and placing the 
deprivated hive over it, they may be left in that situation till the morning, when the bees will be found to 
have taken possession of their native hive, and if the season proves fine may replenish what they have 
lost." {Huish's Treatise on Bees.) 

1757. Total deprivation is effected in the same manner, but earlier in the season, immediately after the 
first swarm ; and the bees, instead of being returned to a remnant of honey in their old hive, remain in 
the new empty one, which they will sometimes, though rarely, fill with comb. By this mode, it is to be 
observed, very little honey is obtained, the bees in June and July being occupied chiefly in breeding, and 
one, if not two, swarms are lost. 

1758. Suffocation is performed when the season of flowers begins to decline, and generally in October. 
The smoke of paper, or .linen rag soaked or smeared with melted sulphur, is introduced to the hive by 
placing it on a hole in the ground, where a few shreds of these articles are undergoing a smothering com- 
bustion ; or the full hive may be placed on an empty one, inverted as in partial deprivation, and the sul- 
phureous smoke introduced by fumigating bellows, &c. The bees will fall from the upper to the lower 
hive in a few minutes, when they may be removed and buried, to prevent resuscitation. Such a death 
seems one of the easiest, both to the insects themselves and to human feelings. Indeed, the mere depri- 
vation of life to animals not endowed with sentiment or reflection, is reduced to the precise pain of the 
moment without reference to the past or the future ; and as each pulsation of this pain increases in effect 
on the one hand, so on the other the susceptibility of feeling it diminishes. Civilised man is the only 
animal to whom death has terrors. 

1 759. Estimate of the humanity of the three modes. Much has been said about the cruelty 
of killing Ijees ; but if man is entitled to deprive them either totally or partially of their 
food, he has an equal right (and in truth by that veiy act exercising it) of depriving 
them of their lives. For of the hives that have been partially or wholly deprived of their 
honey, it may be safely affimied, that there is not one in ten that does any good. If 
they live till the succeeding spring they are commonly too weak to collect food or to 
breed, and, being plundered by their neighbours, dwindle away, till at last the hive is 
without inhabitants. A prompt death is surely preferable to one so protracted. — Some 
judicious observations on this subject will be found in Huish's book, extracted from 
the works of La Gren^e, a French apiarian. 

SuBSECT. 3. Of the Aviary, and of Menageries, Piscinai'ies, ^c. 

1760. The aviary was common to the country-houses of the Romans, but used princi- 
pally, as it would appear from Pliny, for birds destined to be eaten. Singing-birds, how- 
ever, were kept by the Persians, Greeks, and also the Romans in wicker-cages ; and these 
utensils, no doubt, gave rise to the large and fixed cage called an aviary'; but in what 



Book III. 



AVIARY, &c. 



347 



countr}', and in what ago, appears uncertain. They arc highly prized in China, and 
seem tliere to confer about a similar degree of dignity to a house and family as does a 
large conservatory in this country ; for in the altercations which took place during Lord 
Amherst's embassy, it was stated, on the part of the emperor, that Sir George Staunton 
had profited greatly from China, and had built himself a house and an aviary. That 
they were in use in England in Erelyn's time, is evident from a memorandum entered 
in his diary, that the JNIarquis of Argyle took the parrots in liis aviary at Sayes' Court 
for owls. 

1761. The cajiary or singing-bird aviary used not unfrequently to be fomied in the 
opaque-roofed green-house or conservatory, by enclosing one or both ends with a 
partition of wire ; and furnishing them with dead or living trees, or spray and branches 
suspended from tlie roof for the brirds to perch on. Such are chiefly used for the canary, 
bullfinch, linnet, &zc. 

1762. The parrot aviary is generally a building fonned on purpose, with a glass roof, 
front, and ends ; with shades and curtains to protect it from the sun and frost, and a 
flue for winter heating. In these, artificial or dead trees with glazed foliage are fixed 
in the floor, and sometimes cages hung on them ; and at other times the birds allowed to 
fly loose. An aviary of this sort was built at Morden by the late Abraliam Goldschmidt. 

1763. The verdant aviary is that in which, in addition to houses for the dilFerent sorts 
of birds, a net or wire curtain is thrown over the tops of trees, and supported by light 
posts or hollow rods, so as to enclose a few poles, or even acres of ground, and water in 
various forms. In this the birds in fine weather sing on the trees, the aquatic birds sail 
on the water, or the gold-pheasants stroll over the lawn, and in severe seasons tliey be- 
take themselves to their respective houses or cages. Such an enclosed space will of 
course contain evergreen, as well as deciduous trees, rocks, reeds, aquatics, long grass 
for larks and partridges, spruce firs for pheasants, furze-bushes for linnets. Sec. An 
aviary, somewhat in this way, was formed by Catherine of Russia, in the Hermitage 
Palace ; and at Knowlsley in Lancashire. In short th^se are the only sorts admissible 
in elegant gardens ; since nothing surely to one who is not an enthusiast in this brancli 
of natural history, can be more disagreeable than an apartment filled with the dirt and 
discordant music of innumerable birds, such, for example, as the large a\-iary at Kew. 
Birds from the hot climates are sometimes kept in hot-houses among their native plants, 
as in the large conservatories at Vienna. (218.) In this case, the doors and openings 
for giving air must be covered -n-itli wire cloth, and the number must not be great, otlier- 
wise they will too much disfigure the plants with their excrement. 

1764. Gallinaceous aviary. At Chiswick, portable netted enclosures, from ten to 
twenty feet square, are distributed over a part of tlie lawn, and display a curious col- 
lection of domestic fowls. In each enclosure is a small wooden box or house for shel- 
tering the animals during night, or in severe weather, and for breeding. > Each cage or 
enclosure is contrived to contain one or more trees or shrubs; and water and food are 
supplied in small basins and appropriate vessels. Curious varieties of aquatic fowls 
might be placed on floating aviaries on a lake or pond. 



300 1 765. Wire-cages. In a flower-garden 

or pleasure-ground where the object is the 
singing of birds, much the most eflfectual 
mode is to distribute over it a number of 
common-sized cages containing diflferent 
sorts of birds. They may either be hung 
on trees or fixed to iron rods. {Jig. 300.) ' 
The more hardy sorts of British birds 
may remain there during night, and the 
more delicate sorts and canaries taken in 
either by removing the cage only or the 
cage and rod together {Jig. 301.), and 
placing or fixing it in a shed or conserv- 
atory. 

1766. Menageries were formerly attach- 
ed to most of the royal gardens and parks 
of Europe. The most complete example 
is that of the Paris garden, constructed 
and arranged, as much as possible, ac- 
cording to the natures and habits of the difierent animals enclosed. 
The subject, however, can hardly be considered within our depart- 
ment. 

1767. The pisdnary, cochlearium, ranarium, columbarium, &c. 
belong to that part of rural economy which forms the connecting link 
between rural and domestic economy. 



301 





MW'X 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



Sect. III. Decorative Buildings. 

1768. The general characteristic of decorative buildings is, that they are introduced more 
for their picturesque effect as parts of external scenery, than as absolutely necessary. 
Their construction, like the others, belongs chiefly to civil architecture and sculpture ; 
but the choice and emplacement to gardening. ITieir variety is almost endless ; but we 
shall rank a few selections under the different heads of useful, convenient, and character- 
istic decorations. 

SuBSECT. 1. Useful Decorative Buildings. 

1769. Useful decorations are such as while they serve as ornaments, or to heighten tJie 
effect of a scene, are also applied to some real use, as in the case of cottages and bridges. 
They are the class of decorative buildings most general and least liable to objection. 

1770. Cottages are of various 
sorts ; one grand division is 
founded on the style of archi- 
tecture employed, as Grecian, 
Gothic, Chinese, &c. ; another, 
on the materials used, as stone, 
brick, timber, trees unbarked 
{fig- 302.), wicker-work, with 
moss or mud ; and another, on 
the peculiar stj'le of different 
countries, as English, Swedish, 
Italian, &c. (See Prin. of Design 
in Jrch. 8vo. 1821.) 

1711. The Gothic cottage is 
characterised by the forms of the 
Gothic or pointed style of architecture in the openings, as doors, windows, &c. in the 
chimney-tops and gable-ends. It may be thatched ; but the most appropriate roof is 
grey slate, or slate stone, or flat grey tiles. 

1772. The Grecian cottage is that in which the lines of Grecian architecture prevail. 
These are generally horizontal, and may be displayed in the windows, roof, and other 
parts. The roof is generally flat and projecting, and the best slate or flag stone seems 
the most approved covering. 

L773 The Chinese cottage (fig. 303.) is characterised by concave lines in the roof, pro- 
jecting eaves, small windows, and bell or drop ornaments. The proper roofing is party- 
colored tiles, with which the w alls may also be covered. 

303 





>: X. X X X 




1774. T/ie Bengal cottage has walls of mud, the openings surrounded by frames of 
bamboo, the doors and divisions of the windows of the same material, and the roof covered 
with reeds or palm-leaves. 

1 775. The English cottage is generally Gothic as to style, the lowest order formed of 
mud and that;;hed, with boarded labels over the windows and doors ; the second order of 



Book III. USEFUL DECORATIVE BUILDINGS. 



framed timber, filled up with brick- work, with oaken door and window-frames ; and the 
third order of solid brick, with stone door and window-frames, and Gothic mouldings 
and labels. - There is a very pleasing assemblage of picturesque cottages, mostly thatched, 
erected on the grounds at Blaze Castle, near Bristol. They are not only varied in form, 
for which much facility is obtained, by including two, and sometimes three dwellings, in 
one pile ; but their disposition on the ground, and the surface of the ground itself, is 
varied ; and by the management of the walks and trees, an eyeful of any part seldom 
contains more than two or three groups ; always one in the fore-ground, and the others 
in the middle or remote distance. They were designed by Nash. 

1776. The Scotch cottage is, as to architectural style, something between Gothic and 
Grecian. It is the same with the cottage of France and Flanders, is characterised by 
high narrow gable-ends, with notched or step-like finishings. The material of the walls, 
almost always stone ; and of the roof, pantiles or grey schistus slate. 

1777. The Italian cottage is characterised by Grecian lines, and forms bold projections 
and recesses, as far as a cottage admits of these ; high pantiled roofs of a peculiar con- 
struction ; the walls white-washed, and in farmers' cottages, especially in Tuscany, often 
a part of the roof raised as a sort of watchtower. 

1 778. The Polish cottage {Jig. S04. ) is formed chiefly of timber, 
with some plaster and wicker-work to thicken the walls within. 
The roof is covered with shingles or fir-timber split into pieces 
of about eighteen inches long, six inches broad, and half an inch 
thick. The ends are generally upright, not en paiillo/i, and 
the roofs projecting. 

1779. The Russian cottage is also built of timber, but of solid 
logs or trees notched, and let into each other at the angles of 
the buildings where they intersect. They are roofed as in the 
Polish cottage, and sometimes highly ornamented at the ends 
by carved imitations of the sun, moon, stars, &c. protruded 
from the ends, and protected by the projection of the roof. 

1780. The Swedish and Danish cottage is built of logs and 
moss, like the Russian. 

1781. The j^rimitive hut, or cabin, varies as to material, according to the country in 
which it is formed. The rudest description of artificial shelter for man is perhaps 
that used by the aboriginal inhabitants of Botany Bay, which is a large plate of the 
bark of a tree bent in the middle, and its two ends stuck in the earth. The African 
cottage (Jig. 305.) is a low 305 
oblong mud hut, con- 
structed by the natives as 
swallows do their nests. 
(Sir IF. Ouseley.) The 
rudest European hut is 
generally a cone formed by 
branches, poles, or young 
trees, with their ends set 
in the ground, made to 
lean against each other at 
the top, such as are now in 
use in Lapland. (^.306.) They are then covered with spray, heath, straw, reeds, 
or turf One opening serves the purpose of all others. In countries abounding in 
noxious reptiles, this is made in the upper part of the roof, and entered by a trap-door, 

as in Stedman's hut at Surinam, or by a ladder as in the huts of Morocco {Jig. 31 1.) ; ^ 
but in Europe the entrance is generally made on a level with the floor, as in the huts of 



806 






960 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Tart II. 




307 308 309 310 

Ireland, the Highlands of Scotland, and Lapland. 
Modifications of this and other rude forms {^/igs. 307. 
to 310.) may sometimes be admitted in garden-scenery, 
as tool-houses, or shelters for other materials, game, 
&c. — A variety of examples of rustic huts and 
cottages are to be found in Kraft's plans, &c. ; and of 
highly decorated cottages and ornamented buildings 
in Mrs. Hofland's JVhite JTrdghts, and Ackermann's 
Repository of the Arts. 

1782. The bridge is one of the grandest decorations 
of garden-scenery, where really useful. None require 
so little architectural elaboration, because every mind 
recognises the object in view, and most minds are 
pleased with the means employed to attain t!iat object 
in proportion to their simplicity. There are an im- 
mense variety of bridges, which may be classed accord- 
ing to the mechanical principles of tlieir structure; 
the style of architecture, or tlie materials used. 

With respect to the jn-inciplesqf their mechanical structure, the materials of bridges are held together, either 
by their gravity, as in all arches, whether of stone, iron, or timber ; or by their tenacity, as in single planks, 
flat bridges of iron or timber, and those new and wonderful exertions of ingenuity, suspended bridges, of 
which fine examples have been executed across the Menai and the Tweed, and the principles of which we 
have elsewhere (^«7»a/5 Q/'Pyit/o50jo/(y, Jan. 1816.) entered into at large. 

With respect to styles of architecture, the bridge affords little opportunity of detailed display j but the 
openings may be circular or pointed arches, or right-lined, or a mixture of these. 

As to 7naterial,hT\dges of tenacity are formed of timber or wrought-iron ; bridges of gravity, generally 
of cast-iron or stone ; but they may be formed of any material. We submit a few examples in different 
styles, and composed of different materials. 

1783. The fallen tree is the original form, and may sometimes be admitted in garden- 
scenery, with such additions as will render it safe, and somewhat commodious. 

1784. The Jbot-plank is the next form, and may or may not be supported in the middle, 
or at different distances by posts. 

1785. The Swiss bridge (Jigs, 312, 313.) is a rude composition of trees unbarked, 
and not hewn or polished. 

312 




311 






1786. The tied jilank (Jig. 314.) is formed by fixing the ends of one or more planks 
in two heads or cases of cast-rron (a, a), and then connecting them by wrought-iron 
rods (b, b) fixed to the heads in the manner of a string to a bow. A very light bridge 
is thus formed, which acts both by tenacity and gravity. Thus, when a light weight 
is on the bridge, the particles of the boards are not moved, but merely pressed on, and 
therefore the arched part may then be said to act by gravity ; while this pressure being 
propagated to the 9,butments, these are held in equilibrium by the iron rods acting by 
tljeir tenacity. On the otlieT hand, when a bridge of this sort is heavily loaded, tljc 



Book TIL 



USEFUL DECORATIVE BU1LDING& 



est 




arch will bend down, or yield in some places and rise in others ; in which case the whole 
acts by its tenacity. 314 




1787. A very light and strong bridge may be formed by sci-ewing together thin boards in 
the form of a segment, or by screwing together a system of triangles of timber. This 
principle may be carried to a great extent ; by using so many lamina the elasticity of 
the materials is lessened without rupturing their parts, and though from the form of 
such arches, they would appear to act by gravity, yet in truth, they act more by 
tenacity, for the ends of the segment cannot be pressed out without rupturing the soffit, 
or crushing the crown of the arch. For broad tame rivers in flat grounds, such arches 
may be considered appropriate, as attaining the end without any appearance of great 
effort. (^Fulton on Bridges ; Howard on Military Bridges.) 

1788. Bridges of common carpentry {Jigs. 315, 316.) admit of every variety of form, 
and either of rustic workmanship or with unpolished materials, or of polished timber 
alone, or of dressed timber and abutments of masonry. 

315 31G 





1789. Bridges of masonry {fig. 317.) may either have raided or flat roads ; but in all 
cases those are the most beautiful (be- 317 
cause most consistent ^ith utility) in 
which the road on the arch rises as little 
above the level of the road on the shores 
as possible ; notwithstanding the pre- 
judices of some eminent engineers 
{Telford, in Ed. Encyc, art. Bridge) in 
favor of the old practice of always 
forming the extrados of a considerable curve. It is only where masted vessels are to 
pass under, that the raising the arches higher than what is necessary for the transit of the 
stream can be considered in good taste. 

1790. Cast-iron bridges are necessarily curved ; but that curvature, and the lines 
which enter into the architecture of their rails, may be varied according to tasle or 
local indications. 

1791. The boat, as to construction, belongs to naval architecture. In gardening, 
it is sometimes used as a substitute for the bridge, sometimes worked by a mechanical 
power, as the wheel and pinion, and commonly with the deck arranged as part of the 
grayel walk, which approaches the edge of the water. But where a river with a cur- 
rent is to be crossed, the fiying boat, with the deck arranged as part of the walk {fig. 318.), 



S52 



SCONCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IT. 



is preferable. The motion of this boat is de- 
rived from the obliquity of its sides to the 
direction of the current, wliich must be kept 
up by the use of the rudder. The boat (a) 
must be anchored to a post (b) fixed in the 
middle of the river ; and the longer the ca- 
ble (c), the manoeuvre vdll be the more easily 
executed, provided the movement is not- 
made in a greater arc than 90°. The force 
of the stream is at a maximum, when the 
angle formed by it, and the side of the boat 
is 54^ 44'. The same purpose may be ef- 
fected by a triangular raft without the use of 
a rudder. (Howard on Military Bridges, 
sect. 4. p. 97). 

1792. Sepidchral structures l>ave been 
adopted as parts of garden -scenery from 
tlie earliest times. They are most common 
in the Protestant countries of Europe, and 
in England are to be found in parks and 
pleasure-grounds in various cliaracters and 
styles, from the consecrated flower-plot, as 
at Nuneham Courtenay, to the superb mau- 
soleum of Castle Howard, or of Cobham 
Hall. 

The most ancient foi-m of sepulchres seems to have been tumuli, harrows, or mounds of eaHh ; some- 
times planted, but generally left to acquire a clothing of turf. In cool regions, these may be considered 
the most durable of all tombs, because the roots and clothing of the turf prevent the earth from being 
washed or blown away by the weather, and the material presents no temptation to the avarice of man- 
kind. Of such tombs there are several on a small scale in Wiltshire, and on a large scale round the city 
of Cracow ; the last considered as the sepulchres of the ancient kings of Poland. 

The cairn, or cone of rough stones, is the next form, common in some parts of Britain. To this suc- 
ceeded the pjTramid of Egj'pt. These are, in their nature and construction, calculated to serve as durable 
monuments, and were very properly employed by kings and chiefs in rude ages ; for then, as now, the 
idea of being quite forgotten was felt to be unpleasant. But in more modern times, those parts of men's 
actions, which are worth remembering, can be recorded in books, which, when good, are the most 
durable of all monuments. Such piles as have been mentioned are felt as too expensive, and considered 
as too gross a display of the love of feme ; men, therefore, have recourse to what may be called emblems 
of monuments, known under the names of mausoleums, obelisks, pillars, tombs, vaults, stone coffins, 
sarcophagi, urns, &c. ; all of which exist from general consent, and not from the indestructive nature of 
their materials or construction, as in the former class. The most unnatural form of sepulture, and the most 
liable ultimately to defeat the very end in view — respect to the memory of the deceased*— is that in which 
the body is embalmed, richly clothed, and hermetically sealed up in a box or chest of durable materials, 
such as lead, and placed in a richly ornamented building of valuable stone. Here, in times of intestine 
war and rapine, the building will be broken into, and the lead and other valuable materials taken from 
the bodies ; even the stuff's in which the body is wrapped may be an object, as was the case with the 
retreating French army at Kowno and other places in 1812 ; or the architectural ornaments, and the dead 
bodies themselves, may be objects of research, as in the case of certain Grecian marbles taken by Lord Elgin, 
and the despoliation of numerous Egyptian tombs by Signor Belzoni and others. A very natural form of 
sepulture for a family residing on their own estate in the country, is a consecrated grove or enclosure, 
in which each individual is buried near a tree, inscribed with his name on the bark. All that an enemy 
or a new purchaser can do, is to cut down the trees, and change the state of the ground from pasture 
to arable. If any of the family have effected any great public good, it wiU be elsewhere permanently 
recorded ; if they have not, it is fitting their names should, as indeed they always will, perish with thejr 
bodies. The utility of epitaphs and tombs in public groves or churchyards, however, it is not meant to 
deny ; nor to impugn the different tastes of individuals. The grand object appears to us to be the at- 
tainment of the greatest possible quantum of enjoyment, mental and corporal, while living. 

1793. As to monu7nents for the inferior animals, such as are to be found at Potsdam, Oatlands, and 
Bramley Hall, we say, with that enviable and remarkable character the Prince de Ligne, 

" Loin ces vains monumens d'un chien ou d*un oiseau, 
C'est profciner le deuil, insulter au tombeau." 

1794. The gate is of various forms and materials, according to those of the barrier of 
wloich it constitutes a part. In all gates, the essential part of the construction, or those 
lines which maintain its strength and position, and facilitate its motion, are to be distin- 
guished from such {a, a, Jig. 319. ; Scjig. 320.) as serve chiefly to render it a barrier, 
or as decorations. Ilius a gate with a raised top or head {jig. 321.) is almost always 
in bad taste, because at variance with strength ; while the contrary form {Jig. 320.) is 
generally in good taste, for the contrary reason. In regard to strength, the nearer the 
arrangement of rails and bars approaches in effect to one solid lamina, or plate of wood 
or iron, of the gate's dimensions, the greater will be the force required to tear or break 
it in pieces. But this would not be consistent with lightness and economy, and, there- 
fore, the skeleton of a lamina is resorted to, by the employment of slips or rails joined 
together on mechanical principles ; that is, on principles derived from a mechanical 
analysis of strong bodies. Strength of the most perfect kind is resolvable into hard- 
ness and tenacity ; and in artificial compositions, the latter is obtained by what in car- 
pentry are called ties {Jigs. 319. a, & 322.) and the former by what are called struts 
{Jig. 322. b). The art of carpentry, as far as construction is concerned, whether of gates, 




Book III. 



USEFUL DECORATIVE BUILDINGS. 



353 



or of roofs, consists in the judicious composition of ties and struts ; the former always re- 
sisting a drawing or twisting power, and the latter one of a pressing or crushing nature. 

321 

319 



a 



a 



a 




322 




1795. By the maintenance of « gate^ s position, we mean the resistance to that tendency 
which most gates have to sink at the head or falling-post, and thus no longer to open and 
shut freely. If the construction and hanging of the gate were perfect, this could not 
possibly take place ; but as the least degree of laxity in trussing the gate, or want of 
firmness in fixing the post in the ground, will occasion, after frequent use, a sensible de- 
pression at the head, it becomes requisite either to guard against it as mucli as possible, in 
the first construction ; or, to have, as in N. Parker's gate, a provision in the design of tlie 
upper hinge, for rectifying the deviations as they take place. In order to understand the 
construction best calculated to resist depression, suppose a gate hung, and resting on its heel 
{Jig. 322. c), acting as a strut, and maintained 

there by its upper hinge (d), acting as a tie, ^r.---- f 

then the bottom rail of the gate considered as 
representing the whole, becomes a lever of tlie 
second kind, in which the prop is at one end 
(cj, the power at the other [g), and the weight 
placed between them in the line of the centre 
of gravity of the gate (i). Now, as two equal 
forces, to hold each other in equilibrium, must 
act in the same line of direction, it follows, 
that the power acting at the end of the lever 
{g), will have most influence when exerted at 
right angles to it or parallel to the line of 
gravity {g e) ; but as this cannot be accom- 
plished in a gate where the power must be 
applied obliquely, it follows, that a larger 
power becomes requisite ; but that the less 
the obliquity, the less will be the power, or in other words the less the strain on the con- 
struction of the gate, or the less the tendency to sink at the head. The half of the right 
angle [gee), seems a reasonable limit, by which, if the power requisite to hold the 
weight in equilibrium, when acting at a right angle, be as the side of a square of the 
length of the lower bar of the gate (g c), then the power requisite to effect the same end, 
when acting at an angle of 45 degrees, is as the diagonal to this square (g h). ' By 
changing the square to a parallelogram, the relative proportions will still be the same, 
and the advantages and disadvantages will be rendered more obvious. (For g d\% not 
to rf c, as g h is to h c.) It is evident from this principle, that gates whose upper line is 
concave, or falls from the posts or piers to the centre {Jig' 320.), are more fitting, and 
consequently more beautiful, than such as are of an opposite description (Jig. 321.) 
But a person totally ignorant of mechanical principles, but of good taste in visual mat- 
ters in general, might prefer the latter, which shows, that a just or true taste must be 
founded on science or reason, and is by no means so vague and indefinite, or arbitrary 
an exertion of judgment as many are apt to imagine. 

1796. Compensation-hinges. Where there is no choice between a construction calcu- 
lated to resist sinking, and the common form, then the corrective or compensatioii-hinge 
of N. Parker (Jig. 323.) is very proper for division-gates in parks or drives ; but a sci- 
entific construction, either polished or rustic (Jig' 326.), may be easily conh'ived for 
gates in forests and farms. When Parker's hinge is used, all that is necessai y, when the 
gate sinks at the head, is to screw it up by the nut (a, Jig. 323.) till it is replaced in its 
original position. 

1797. With respect to facilitating the motion of gates, that is to be done by lessening the 
friction of then- hinges. Friction is as the extent of rubbing surface, and the weight ; 
therefore, of the two hinges of a gate, the friction of the heel, when a pivot, is by much 
the least, as the rubbing there is limited to one point, instead of the whole surfaces of two 
cylinders. Whatever, therefore, has a tendency to throw the preponderance of weight 
on the heel, must lessen the friction of the upper hinge. This will be accomplished in 

A a 



354 SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Part II. 




proportion as the centre of gravity is moved from the centre of the gate towards the 
heel : and this, as well as additional strength, may be obtained by increasing the dimen- 
sions of the materials gradually from the head to the heel. — Some have proposed to 
suspend gates by weights, in the manner of windows, instead of hanging them, but ex- 
cepting in anomalous cases, this would be an unsightly and inconvenient practice. 
(Farmer's Mag. 1819.) 

1798. The forces and directions of the strains on the hinges of gates has been practically 
explained and matliematically demonstrated by Bailey (Agric. Rep. Northunib.) and 
N. Parker. [Essay on Gates, 1816.) The turnpike-gate of the last author seems to be a 
very near approach to perfection. 

1799. Substitutes for gates, such as the gate with falling bars (fgs. 324, 325.) ; the stile, 
which is of various sorts ; turn-wicket ; horizontal grating ; and varioias other modes of 
permitting man to pass a barrier and yet excluding cattle, belong rather to agriculture 
than to gai-dening. 




1800. Gates, as decorations, may be classed according to the prevailing lines, and the 
materials used. Horizontal, perpendicular, diagonal, and curved lines, comprehend all 
gates, whether of iron or of timber, and each of tliese may be distinguished more or less 
by ornamental parts, which may either be taken from any of the known styles of archi- 
tecture, or from heraldry or fancy. 

1801. The jmblished designs for gates are numerous, especially those for iron gates; for 
executing which, the improvements made in casting that metal in moulds afford great 
facilities. By a judicious junction of cast and wrought iron, the ancient mode of en- 
riching gates with flowers and other carved-like ornaments might be happily re-intro- 
duced. 



1 802. Gates in garden-scenery, where architectural elegance is not required to sup- 
port character, simple or rustic structures ( fig. 326. ), wickets, turn-stiles, and even move- 

326 




Book III. 



CONVENIENT DECORATIONS. 



355 



able or suspended rails, like the German sclilagbaum {Jig. 324. ), may be introduced 
according to tlie character of the scene. ^ 

1 803. Rails or fences, for parks and garden-scenery, are, as to lines, similarly character- 
ised as gates ; and, like gates, 327 
fences are of many species, 
from the rudest barriers with- 
out nails or iron work [Jig. 
327.) to the numerous sorts 
of iron and wire barriers. 
Hurdles, whether of wood or 
iron, are the most convenient 
description of temporary fences. They are manufactured of various forms and dimen- 
sions, so as to prove, as to height and openings between the rails, rods, or wires, barriers 
to hares, sheep, cattle, or deer. "VvTiere iron fences are considered as permanent fixtures, 
those parts which are inserted in the ground should be of cast-iron, as resisting oxidation 
much better than the wrought material. It ought, at the same time, to be covered with 
tar, pitch, or pyroligneous acid, or, whilst hot, painted over with oil. For interior fences, 
poles or laths may be formed into treillage-work of different kinds {fig' 328.) ; preserv- 
ing the bark of the former, and pitching or charring the ends inserted in the earth. A 

328 





1804. Walls are unquestionably the grandest fences for parks ; and arched portals, 
the noblest entrances ; between these and the hedge or pale, and rustic gate, designs in 
even,- degree of gradation, both for lodges, gates, and fences, will be found in the works 
of Wright, Gandy, Robertson, Aikin, Pocock, and other architects who have published 
on the i-ural department of their art. The pattern books of manufacturers of iron gates 
and hurdles, and of wire workers, may also be advantageously consulted. 

SuBSECT. 2. Convenient Decorations. 

1805. Of convenient decorations the variety is almost endless, from the prospect-tower 
to the rustic seat ; besides aquatic decorations, agreeable to the eye and convenient for 
the purposes of recreation or culture. Their emplacement, as in the former section, be- 
longs to gardening, and their construction to architecture and engineering. 

1806. The prospect-tower is a noble object to look at, and a gratifying and instructive 
position to look from. It should be placed on the liighest grounds of a residence in 
order to command as wide a prospect as possible, to serve as a fixed recognised point to 
strangers, in making a tour of the grounds. It may very properly be accompanied by 
a cottage ; or the lower part of it may be occupied by the family of a forester, game- 
keeper, or any rural pensioner, to keep it in order, &c. 

1807. The Mosque is the Chinese prospect-tower, of peculiar construction, charac- 
terised by numerous stories, designated by projecting roofs and pendent bells. An ex- 
ample exists at Kevv, and its details will be found in the Plans of the JSuildings, x&c., 
erected there by Sir W. Chambers. Sometimes the prospect-tower is a hollow column, 
as in the monumental column of London, that to the memory of Lord Nelson, at 
Edinburgh, and to Lord Hill, at Shrewsbury ; but the stairs in such buildings are ne- 
cessarily too narrow for the prospect-tower of country-residences, and besides^tliere can 

Aa 2 



556 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IL 



be no rooms as resting-places, which are absolutely necessarj', where ease and enjojinent 
are studied, and where some attention is had to the delicacy of women, and the frailties 
of old age. 

1808. Temples, either models or imitations of the religious buildings of the Greeks 
and heathen Romans, are sometimes introduced in garden-scenery to give dignity and 
beauty. In residences of a certain extent and character, they may be admissible as imi- 
tations, as resting-places, and as repositories of sculptures or antiquities. Though their 
introduction has been brought into contempt by its frequency, and by bad imitations in 
perishable materials, yet they are not for that reason to be rejected by good taste. They 
may often add dignity and a classic air to a scene ; and when erected of durable mate- 
rials, and copied from good models, will, like their originals, please as independent ob- 
jects. Knight, and some other connoisseurs of less note, disgusted by the abuse of 
temples, have argued, as it appears to us, too exclusively against their introduction, and 
contend for cottages as the fittest ornaments of rural scenery : but why limit the resources 
of an art because they are lial)le to abuse ? Thatched roofs may become tiresome, as 
well as columns ; and if Stow is an example of the latter carried to excess. White 
Knights is as certainly of the former 

1809. Porches and porticoes (Jig- 330.) are sometimes employed as decorative marks 
to the entrances of scenes ; and sometimes merely as roofs to shelter seats or resting 
benches. 

1810. Alcoves (Jig. 331.) are used as winter resting-places, as being fully exposed to 
the sun. 330 331 



1811. Arbors are used as 
summer seats and resting-places : 
they may be shaded w ith fruit- 
trees, as the vine, currant, cherry ; 
climbing ornamental shrubs, as 
ivy, clematis, &c. ; or herba- 
ceous, as everlasting pea, gourd, 
&c. They are generally formed 
of timber lattice-work, some- 
times of woven rods, or wicker- 
work, and occasionally of wire. 




1812. The Italian arbor (Jig. 
332.) is generally covered with a dome, often framed of thick iron or copper wire 
painted, and covered with vines or honeysuckles. 

- 332 ' 333 




1813. The French arbor (Jig. 333) is characterised by the various lines and surfaces, 
which enter into the composition of the roof. 

1814. Caves and caverns, where they exist naturally in the grounds of a residence, as at 
Piercefield, Corby Castle, &c., or can be readily formed, are to be regarded more as singu- 
larities or picturesque objects than as places of use or enjojTnent in this climate ; in Italy 
and Spain they are great luxuries. 

1815. GroWoes are resting-places in recluse situations, rudely covered externally, and 
within finished with shells, corals, spars, crystallisations, and other marine and mineral 
productions, according to fancy. To add to the eifect, pieces of looking-glass are in- 
serted in different places and positions. 



Book III. 



CONVENIENT DECORATIONS. 



357 



1816. Roofed seats, boat-houses, moss houses, Jlmt houses, bark huts, and similar con- 
-structions, are different modes of forming resting-places containing seats, and some- 
times other furniture or conveniences in or near them. Very neat buildings and furni- 
ture of this class may be formed of hazel-rods ; or of any tree with a clean bark, and 
straight shoots, as young oaks or mountain ash. The spruce fir affords a good outside 
material : and five or six young trees coupled together, make good rustic columns. At 
White Knights, the Slopes at Windsor, and Bothwell Castle, are good examples of 
covered seats of the rustic kind. { Jigs. 334, 335, 336.) 



334 335 * 336 




337 



338' 



1817. Roofed seats of a viore polished description are boarded structures generally 
semi-octagonal, and placed so as to be open to the south. Sometimes they are portable, 
moving on wheels, so as to be placed in different positions, according to the hour of the 
day, or season of the year, vvliich, in confined spots, is a desirable circumstance. Some- 
times they turn on rollers, or on a central pivot, for the same object, and this is very 
common in what are called barrel-seats. In general they are opaque, but occasionally 
their sides are glazed, to admit the sun to the interior in winter. 

1818. Folding cJmirs. A sort of medium seat, between the roofed and the exposed, is 
formed by constructing the backs of chairs, benches, or sofas with hinges, so as they may 
fold down over the seat, and so protect it from rain. After rain, when these backs are 
replaced in their proper position, a dry seat, and dry back to lean against, are at once 
obtained- 

1819. Elegant structures of the seat kind for summer use, may be constructed of iron rods 
and wares, and painted canvas ; the iron forming the supporting skeleton, and the canvass 
the protecting tegument. The mushroom or umbrella form {fig. 337.), and that of the 
Turkish tent (^g. 338.), the oriental pavilion, or any other exotic form free from vul- 
garity and ifieagre lines, may be made choice of on such occasions. 

1820. Exposed seats 
include a great variety, 
rising in gradation from 
the turf bank to the 
carved couch. Inter- 
mediate forms are stone 
benches,root stools,sec- 
tions of trunks of trees, 
wooden, stone, or cast- 
iron mushrooms paint- 
ed or covered with moss, or mat, or heath ; the Chinese barrel-seat, the rustic stool, chair, 
tripod, sofa, the cast-iron couch or sofa, the wheeling-chair, and many sub-varieties. 

1821. Swings {fg. 339.), see-saws, &c. 339 
are not very common in English gardens, 
but, as exercising places for chil£en, are 
very proper in retired, but airy parts of the 
pleasure-ground. Hurley-burleys, riding- 
wheels, &c. are better substituted by 
donkies and ponies. No greater danger 
is incurred, and something of the art of 
horsemanship is thus actually acquired. 
In every country-residence where there 
are children, contrivances for their exercise 
and amusement ought to be considered 
essential objects ; for these purposes, a riding school, and bath or pond for learning to 
swdm and row a boat, may be considered essential. The former may also serve for ac- 
quiring the infantry and cavalry exercise, and learning to fire at a mark^ jump, run, 
wrestle, box, climb trees or smooth poles, ascend ropes, &c. 

A a 3 




^^^^^^ 




358 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II, 



1822. Of constructions for diq)laymg water, as an artificial decoration, the principal are 
cascades, waterfalls, jets, and fountains. The foundation of the cascade and waterfall, is 
the head or dam which must be thrown across the river or stream ; and in this, two things 
are to be considered, its strength, and the materials of which it is composed. 

1823. JFith respect to strength, the pressure of water is as its depth, and consequently a 
dam, whose section is a right-angled triangle {fig- 340. a, b, c), and whose hypothenuse 
(a, b) forms an angle of 45°, 'with the base (a, c) formed of any material of greater specific 
gravity than water, would, as far as strength is concerned, hold in equilibrium a body of 
still water of a depth equal to its perpendicular. If the hypothenuse, or sloping side, 
be placed next the water, it will more than hold the water in equilibrium, by the weight 
of the triangle (a, b, d) of the water superincumbent on the triangle of the dam or bank. 

1824. That the materials of the bank must be of a nature impervious to water, and also 
must adhere to the base or bottom, so as not to admit water to escape beneath it, are ob- 
vious conditions of the foregoing proportion. The practice of forming dams or heads, is 
derived from this theory ; but to guard against accident, the base of the triangle is always 
made three or more times greater than its height ; the slope next the stream may form an 
angle with the horizon, of from 40° to 20°, and that on the lower side is regulated by the 
uses of the dam. If for raising water so as to cover a hollow where there is little or no 
overflow expected, then the slope is generally of earth, 40° or 35° {fg' 340. e,f), turfed 
or planted ; if for a cascade, the slope is regulated by the form or undulations on which 
the rocks to produce the breaking of the water are to be placed ; and if for a waterfall, a 
perpendicular wall is substituted, over which the water projects itself in a sheet or lamina, 
in breadth proportioned to the quantity of the current. 




1 825. In all these cases, instead of forming the dam entirely of materials impervious 
to water, it is sufficient if a vertical stratum of wrought-clay be brought up its centre 
{fg. 340^ g'.f), and the surface of the bank rendered firm by a coating of gravel on the 
slope next the water. 

1826. The construction of the waterfall, where avowedly artificial, is nothing more than a 
strong-built wall across the stream, perfectly level at top, and vnih a strong, smooth, ac- 
curately fitted, and well jointed coping. On the perfection of the coping, both as to level 
and jointing, depends the regular distribution of the lamina of water to be projected. 
Formerly artificial cascades of this sort Avere curved in the grourxd-plan, the concavity 
pointing down the stream, by which some strength and a better view of the water were 
supposed to be obtained. With respect to strength, ibis can only hold true, or at least be 
of consequence, in cases where the upper slope of the dam is very steep, and the force of 
the current great ; and as to a fuller view, this can only take place when the eye of the 
spectator is in the focus of the segment. Where a natural waterfall is to be imitated, the 
upright wall must be built of huge irregular blocks ; the horizontal lamina of water 
broken in the same way by placing fragments of rocks grouped here and there so as -to 
throw the whole into parts ; and as nature is never methodical, to form it as if in part a 
cascade. 

1827. In imitating a -natural cascade in garden-scenery, the horizontal line must here 
also be perfect, to prevent waste of water in dry seasons, and from this to the base of the 
lower slope the surface must be paved by irregular blocks, observing to group the promi- 
nent fragments, and not distribute them regularly over the surface. In the infancy of 
landscape-gardening, the lower bank or slope of the dam was formed into ogee and other 
curves, or a serpentine line, and smoothly paved or causeyed, fixing on the convexities of 
the curves projecting boards across the current ; and the current being thus interrupted, 
was thrown up in arched waves. Such was the sort of beauty then admired; for it is a 
long time in the progress of improvement before man can see any other beauty than tliat 
which he has himself produced. 

1 828. The greatest danger in imitating cascades and waterfalls, consisting in attempting 
too much, a very few blocks, disposed with a painter's eye, will effect all ♦•hat can be 
in good taste in most garden-scenes ; and in forming or improving them in natural 
rivers, there will generally be found indications both as to situation and style, especially 
if the country be uneven, or stony, or rocky. Nothing can be in worse taste than piles of 
stones and rocks across a river either natural or artificial, in a tame alluvial meadow : they 
may be well chosen fragments from suitable materials, and arranged so as to form a cas- 
cade or waterfall very beautiful of itself, but whose beauty is really deformity or mon- 



Book III. 



CONVENIENT DECORATIONS. 



359 



strosity, relatively to the surrounding scenery, or to that whole of which it should form an 
accordant part. 

1829. Jets atid other hydraulic devices, though now less in repute than formerly, are not 
to be rejected in confined artificial scenes, and form an essential decoration where the 
ancient style of landscape is introduced in any degree of perfection. 

1830. The Jirst requisite for jets or projected sj^outs, or threads of tvater, by atmos])heric 
pressure, is a sufficiently elevated source or reservoir of supply. This being obtained, 
pipes are to be conducted from it to the situations for the jets. No jets, however con- 
structed, will rise as high as the fountain-head ; because the water is impeded by the re- 
sistance of the air, the friction against the opening of the pipe or adjutage, and its own 
gravity. It is not easy to lay down data on this head ; if the bore of the adjutage be too 
small, the rising stream will want sufficient weight and power to divide the air, and so being 
dashed against it will fall down in vapor or mist. If too large, it will not rise at all. The 
length of pipe between the reservoir and the jet will also impede its rising in a slight degree 
by the friction of the water on the pipe. This is estimated by P. J. Francois ( Art des 
Fontaines, 137.) at one foot for every hundred yards from the reservoir. The proportion 
which this author gives to the adjutages relatively to the con ducting-pipes, is one fourth ; 
and thus for a jet of four lines, or a third of an inch, he requires an adjutage of between 
four and five lines, and a conducting pipe of one inch and a half diameter ; for a jet of six 
or seven lines, a conducting-pipe of two inches, and so on. From these data, the height 
of the fountain and the diameter of the conducting-pipe being given, the height to which 
a jet can be forced can be estimated with tolerable accuracy, and the contrary. But where 
the pipes are ^already laid, and tJie power of the head, owdng to intervening obstructions, 
not very accurately known, the method by trial and correction by means of a leaden nozzle, 
the orifice of which may be readily increased or diminished, will lead to the exact power 
under all the circumstances. 

1831. Adjutages are of various sorts. Some are contrived so as to throw up the water 
in the form of sheaves, fans, showers, to support balls, &c. ; others to throw it out hori- 
zontally, or in curved lines, according to the taste of the designer ; but the most usual 
form is a simple opening to throw the spout or jet upright. The grandest jet of any is 
a perpendicular column issuing from a rocky base, on which the water falling, produces 
a double effect both of sound and visual display. A jet rising from a naked tube in 
the middle of a basin or canal, and the waters falling on its smooth surface, is unnatural, 
without being artificially grand. 

1832. Drooping fountains fj^gs. 341, 342, 343.), overflowing vases, shells (as the 
chama gigas), cisterns, sarcophagi, dripping rocks, and rockworks, are easily formed, 
requiring only the reservoir to be as high as t\\e orifice whence the dip or descent pro- 
ceeds. This description of fountains, with a surrounding basin, are peculiarly adapted 
for the growth of aquatic plants. Both classes of water-works successfully combine. 




34i ' 342 ' 348 



1833. Waste-drains. In all water- works in gardens, pipes or drains must be contrived 
to carry off such of the water as is not used in culture. The diameter of these should be 
somewhat larger than the conducting-pipes, for obvious reasons. 

1834. Sun-dials are venerable and pleasing garden-decorations ; and should be placed 
in conspicuous frequented parts, as in the intersection of principal walks, where the 
" note which they give of time" may be readily recognised by the passenger. Elegant 
and cheap forms are now to be procured in cast-iron, which, it is to be hoped, will render 
their use more frequent. . 

1835. Vanes are useful in the same way, but are an unsuitable garden-ornament, 
though frequently introduced on the summits of garden-buildings. The ideas to which 
they give rise, as connected with ships, flags, fairs, military standards, &c. are all oppo- 
site to the stillness and repose of gardens. Over a library or office they are useful, con- 
nected with an internal index ; and they are characteristic and proper over churches, 
family-chapels, clock-towers, and domestic offices. 



360 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



SuBSECT, 3. Characteristic Decorations. 

1836. As characteristic decorations are purely decorative, without any pretensions to 
convenience, they should ever be very sparingly employed, and only by persons of 
judgment and experience. A tyro in gai'dening will be more apt to render himself 
ridiculous by the use of decorations, than by any other point of practice, and most apt 
by the use of characteristic decorations. 

1 837. Rocks are generally considered as parts of the foundation of the earth, and their 
general character is that of grandeur, sometimes mixed with the singular, fantastic, or 
romantic. Their expression forms a fine contrast to that cf perishable vegetation, and 
therefore they have been eagerly sought after in gardens, both on this account, and as 
foi-ming a suitable habitation for certain descriptions of plants. Plant-rockworks are 
protuberant surfaces, or declivities irregularly covered with rocky fragments, land-stones, 
conglomerated gravel, vitrified bricks, vitrified scorijB, flints, shells, spar, or other earthy 
and hard mineral bodies. Such works are, in general, to be looked on more as scenes 
of culture than of design or picturesque beauty. 

1838. Rockworks for effect or character require more consideration than most gar- 
deners are aware of. The first thing is to study the character of the country, and of tlie 
strata of earthy materials, whether earth, gravel, sand, or rock, or a mere nucleus of either 
of these, such as they actually exist, so as to decide whether rocks may, with propriety, 
be introduced at all ; or, if to be introduced, of what kind, and to what extent. The 
design being thus finally fixed on, the execution is more a matter of labor than of 
skill. 

' 1839. TJie ruins of objects adapted by their natures or constructions to brave time, 
have always excited veneration ; and this sentiment, forming a contrast wdth those emo- 
tions raised by mere verdant scenes, has ever been esteemed very desirable in gardens. 
Hence the attempt to produce them by forming artificial ruins, which, being absolute 
deceptions, cannot admit of justification. If any tiling is admissible in this way, it is the 
heightening the expression of ruins which already exist, by the addition of some parts, 
which may be supposed to have existed there when the edifice was more entire. Thus, 
the remains of a castle-wall, not otherwise recognisable from that of a common house or 
enclosure, may be pierced with a window or a loophole, in the style appropriate to its 
date, or it may be heightened or extended in some degree. In other cases, turrets, or 
pinnacles, or battlements, or chimney-tops may be added according to circumstances, and 
as a judicious and experienced taste and antiquarian architect may direct. Unless the 
style of the age of the ruins be adopted, the additions become worse than useless to all 
such as are conversant in the history of architecture, of which an example may be given 
in the modern Gothic turrets, in the grounds of White Knights, intended to represent 
the a-bbey of that name, founded soon after the Norman conquest. 

1840. Antiquities (Jig. 3-14.) are nearly allied to ruins, but diflTer from them in being 
of some value as objects, independently of locality. They may be valuable from their 
great age, as druidical ; from historical traditions connected Vv ith them, as stones indi- 
cating the site of a battle, the cross-stone of an ancient town, &c. ; or from the excel- 

344 



Book III. 



CHARACTERISTIC DECORATIONS. 



361 



lence of the workmanship or the material, as in the fragments of Grecian and Roman 
sculpture and architecture. This class of decorations is very common in Italy, and espe- 
cially near Rome and Naples. Viewed as parts of landscape, almost every thing depends 
on their union with the surrounding scenery. 

1841. Rarities and curiosities, like antiquities, possess a sort of absolute value ; but ^ 
the sentiments to which they give rise are more allied to wonder than veneration. They 
are occasionally introduced in gardening, such as the jaw-bones of the whale, basaltic 
columns, lava blocks, pillars of earthy rock-salt. The tufFa, corals, and madrepores 
brought from Otaheite by Captain Cook, as ballast, now form part of the rock work in 
the Chelsea garden. Chinese rocks, idols, and other Chinese garden-ornaments, are 
sometimes admitted, not as imitations of rocks or sculpture, but as curiosities. 

1 842. Monumental objects, as obelisks, columns, pyramids, may occasionally be intro- 
duced with grand effect, both in a picturesque and historical view, of which Blenheim, 
Stow, Castle Howard, &c. afford fine examples ; but their introduction is easily car- 
ried to the extreme, and then it defeats itself, as at Stow. In this department may be 
truly said, after Buonaparte, " Du sublime au ridicule il rCy a quun pas /" 

1843. Sculptures. Of statues, therms, busts, pedestals, altars, urns, and similar 
sculptures, nearly the same remarks may be made. Used sparingly, they excite interest, 
often produce character, and are always individually beautiful, as in the pleasure-grounds 
of Blenheim, where a few are judiciously introduced j but profusely scattered about, they 
distract attention. 

1844. Vegetable sculptures {fig- 345.) are very appro- 
priate in parterres and other scenes in the ancient style. 
That they may be executed with correctness and without 
loss of time, the skeleton should be formed of wire, with- 
in which all the shoots should be confined, and when 
once the form is filled up with vegetation, the gardener 
has only to clip the protruding shoots. Groups of 
figures of different colors may be very curiously executed 
by using different colored greens. In the garden of the 
convent of th«^ Madre di Dio, near Savonna, is a group 
representing the flight of Joseph into Egypt, in yellow 
box, variegated holly, myrtle, cypress, laurel, and rose- 
mary. The attending priest told us these plants com- 
pleted their forms in three years. 

1 845. Inscriptions, as historical records, without comment, may in some cases be ad- 
missible ; as the date when any work was begun and finished, the height of elevated 
points above the level of the sea, or relatively to other surrounding elevated and conspi- 
cuous objects, &c. &c. ; but sentimental and religious inscriptions cannot be approved 
of by men in general. They are something superadded to what is or ought to be already 
complete, and place nature in the situation of tlie painter, whose portraits required the 
aid of graphical description. " This is a black bear." That is " A happy rural seat of 
various view." 

1846. Eye-traps, painted perspectives, on walls or boards, as terminations, mock hermits, 
soldiers, banditti, wooden lions (as at Hawkstone), sheep in stucco, or any other figures of 
men or animals, intended to pass for realities, though still used in Holland and France, may 
be pronounced as too puerile for the present age. If they are still admired by the city mob 
in a suburban tea-garden, so much the better ; the mob must be pleased as well as their 
superiors, and the rich vulgar may join with them ; but the object of all the arts, whether 
useful or agreeable, is to elevate our tastes and enjoyments ; and therefore as soon as 
men's minds are prepared for any refinement on former things, the particular art to which 
these things belong should prepare the way for their removal, by presenting appropriate 
substitutes. A few reading tents and portable coffee-houses scattered over the public 
parks round London and Edinburgh, as at Paris and Vienna, in umbrageous and pictu- 
resque situations, would be fitting resources for one class of pedestrians, as those 
crowded yards called tea-gardens are for others. 




Chap. IV. 

Of the Improvement of the Mechanical Agents of Gardening. 

1 847. The greater number of the implements and buildings enumerated in the fore- 
going chapters may no doubt be done without, even in the first-rate gardens. A number 
more, however, might have been added, which are in use in particular situations and 
circumstances, but we have omitted them, some as not meriting to become general, and 



562 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



rART II. 



others because their forms or constructions were too obsolete for modern practice, or too 
new and imperfect in construction to merit recommendation. A gardener of science 
and experience is not to be confined in his choice to what is or has been in this or in any 
department of his art ; but drawing from the resources of his own mind, he may, and 
ought not only to improve what is already in use, but design and get executed, new 
tools, instruments, and constructions, better calculated to effect the ends in view gene* 
rally, or more suited to the exigencies of his particular case. Notwithstanding the al- 
terations and ameliorations which have of late been so frequently made, there are few of 
the mechanical agents of .gardening now in use, that do not admit of some, and many 
of them, unquestionably, of much improvement. The ultimate effect of all these amelior- 
ations is to lessen human labor, and increase the quantity, or improve the quality, of gar- 
den-productions, so that every attempt to extend them is highly meritorious. 

1848. As a general principle in res2)ect to implements, structures, and buildings, the best 
designs should be selected, and their execution procured in the best manner and of the 
best materials. This can scarcely be too strongly impressed on the mind of the gardener 
or bis employer. With tools or instruments made of improper timber or iron, and of in- 
different workmanship, the operator can never satisfy himself or his master. The quan- 
tity of his labor is less, and the quality inferior ; add to this, that the instrument soon 
begins to decay, and requires to be renewed, so that independently altogether of the 
loss in the quantity and quality of labor, the loss occasioned by the renewal of the tool, 
instrument, or machine, ought to be a sufficient inducement to procure at first only the 
very best. The true way to ensure this, where the party are not judges, is to employ 
tradesmen of good repute and long standing. In general, seedsmen should be the per- 
sons from whom all the implements of gardening ought to be procurable ; but as they 
often omit this branch of their business, from the want of regular demand, recourse must 
be had to ironmongers, or to those new establishments called Horticultural and Agri- 
cultural Repositories. 

1849. Hot-houses are hy far the most important class of garden-constructions. With respect 
to them, no degree of horticultural skill and practical attention will compensate for the 
want of light or air, or a bad exposure ; and where the arrangements for supplying arti- 
ficial heat are imperfect, the risk is great, and painful for a zealous gardener to contem- 
plate. One night may destroy the labors of the past year, and forbid hope for the year 
to come ; the blame may be laid where it is not merited, and a faithful servant may lose 
his situation and his character, without having comniitted either errors of ignorance or 
carelessness. 

1850. In all structures and edifices, the most complete, elegant, or grand design, when 
badly executed, is disagreeable to the view, defective in the object of its erection, and 
ruinous to the proprietor. Bad foundations and roofs, improper materials, materials of 
diflPerent degrees of durability, piled incongruously together, and bad workmanship form 
the elements of bad execution. In no country are materials and labor obtained in 
greater perfection than in England ; and in all regular works coming under the architect 
or the engineer, we generally find little to condemn, and often much to adnoire in the 
execution of the work. Garden-buildings, however, and especially that important class, 
hot-houses, are, relatively to civil architecture, an anomalous class of structures ; and 
hence they are more the subject of chance or caprice in design, and of local convenience 
in execution, than those of any department of rural architecture. The subject of horti- 
cultural architecture, indeed, till very lately, has not been deemed of sufiicient import- 
ance, to induce an architect to make himself master of the first step towards improvement 
in every art, the knowledge of what has already been done in it by others. Hence it fol- 
lows, that garden-buildings, and especially hot-houses, are left either wholly to gardeners, 
who understand little of the science of architecture, or wholly to architects, who under- 
stand as little of the science of gardening. The consequence in either case, generally is, 
incongruity in appearance, want of success in the useful results, and want of permanency 
in duration. It would be more easy to adduce examples than to avoid the charge of im- 
partiality in the selection. 

1851. The recent improvement in the manufacture of iron, and the war-price of timber, 
have greatly extended the use of the foiTner material in most erections, and contributed, 
from the novelty of the thing, to a good deal of incongruity in the disposition of the ma- 
terials of buildings. Thus we have cast-iron sashes in deal frames, cast-iron rafters 
placed on timber wall-plates, iron bars sheathed with copper, and many such dis- 
cordant arrangements, certain in the end of defeating the purpose for which they were 
adopted. 

1852. Artists. There are two modes which proprietors may adopt who are desirous of 
embodying in garden-erections the modem improvements. The first is, to employ a 
first-rate head gardener, and to authorise and require of him, to consult with a regular 
architect or engineer, previously to fixing on any plan for a structure or machine ; and 
the second is, to employ a regular garden-architect. A connoisseur will, no doubt, think 



Book IV. OF THE OPERATIONS OF GARDENING. 



363 



for himself, and form his own plans ; and^a spirited amateur will be the first to adopt 
new improvements ; but the policy of a well regulated man, who has no pretensions to 
particular skill himself, will certainly lead him to adopt one of the two first modes. 



BOOK IV. 

OF THE OPERATIONS OF GAJIDENING. 

1853. All tlie operations of gardening are mechanical in the first instance, though the 
principal mtention of many of them is to effect chemical changes, and of others, changes 
on tlie vital principle. They are also all manual, or effected by man, who, though 
possessing little power over nattire in his naked, unarmed state, yet taking in his hands 
some one of the implements or machines described, becomes thereby armed with a new 
power, and operates on the soil, or on the vegetable itself, by effecting changes in 
his own centre of gravity, and by muscular movements of his legs and arms, calculated 
by pushing, drawing, or lifting, to bring tlie implement into the action proper for per- 
forming the operation in view. All these movements are governed by the laws of me- 
chanics, and the operations performed, are all referable to one or more of the mechanical 
powers, and chiefly, as we have before observed, to the lever and the wedge. 

1854. The operations of gar/lening present astonishing proof s of tlie advanced state of the 
art. In the infancy of gardening, as the implements were few, so would be also the 
operations of culture. The ground would be loosened on the surface with a hooked 
stick [fg. 2. ), or scratched with a bone, or a horn in the spring season ; the plants or seeds 
rudely inserted, and the produce in autumn broken over or pulled up, as wanted by the 
family or band to whom they belonged. But in the present state of human improve- 
ment, the operations of gardening have branched out into a number and variety which 
at first sight appear astonishing. Tlie operations of pulverisation and sowing, for ex- 
ample, are not confined to spring ; but are practised in eveiy month of the year. The 
season of reaping or gathering crops is equally extended ; and for such productions as 
cannot be produced or preserved in the open air, recourse is had to hot-houses, and fruit 
and root store-rooms. Vegetation is accelerated, retarded, and modified, almost at the 
will of the operator; and by processes which suppose a considerable degree of physiolo- 
gical and chemical science, as w^ell as practical skill, mechanical dexterity, and personal 
attention. Thus, shading, airing, and watering, though operations exceeded by none in ' 
manual simplicity, cannot be performed without continual reference to the state of the 
plant, of the soil, and of the climate or weather. Hence it is, that an operative gardener 
who really knows his profession, requires to be not only a habile workman, but a thinking 
and reasoning being, and a steady man. We shall consider the operations of gardening, 
1. As consisting of operations or labors in which strength is chiefly required ; 2. As 
operations where skill is more required than strength ; and, 3. As operations or pro- 
cesses where strength, skill, and science, are combined. 

Chap. I. 

Operations of Gardening, in which Strength is chiefly required in the Operator. 

1855. To acquire the piractice of gardening-operations, a few hours' labor with the im- 
plements or machines will be of more use than a volume of words ; all that we shall 
submit, therefore, will be some observations relatively to the mechanical action of the 
implement and operator, the object of the operation, and the best season of performing 
it. They may be arranged as, 1. Mechanical operations common to all arts of manual 
labor ; 2. Garden-labors on the soil ; and, 3. Gaiden-labors on plants. 

Sect. I. Mechanical Operations common to all Arts of Manual Labor, 

1856. All the operations which man jierforms with imjylements or machines are, as far 
as his own person is concerned, reducible to lifting, carrying, drawing, and thrusting. 
Man himself, considered as an engine, derives his power from alterations in the posi- 
tion of his centre of gravity, and he applies it chiefly by his hands, arms, and legs acting 
as levers of the third kind. 

1857. Lifting is performed by first stooping or lowering the centre of gravity, and at 
the same time throwing it to one side Tlie object being then laid hold of by the hands, 
the body is raised, and the centre of gravity, in being restored to its true position, 
acts as a counterbalancing weight to the weight to be raised. The weight retained by 



364 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Pari II. 



the hand is now raised a certain height, never exceeding half that of the man ; if to be 
raised higher, recourse is had to muscular strength, or the power of the arms to act as 
levers. 

1858. Carrying. To carry a thing is merely to walk with a greater weight than before, 
and walking is performed by a series of alternate derangements and adjustments of the 
centre of gravity, slow or rapid, according as the person may walk or run. According 
to Delolm, the most advantageous weight for a man of common strength to carry hori- 
zontally is 112lbs. ; or, if he returns unladen, 135lbs. 

1859. Drawing. In this operation, the upper part of the body is thrown forward, so 
as to act as a power to counterbalance or lift up the body or weight to be moved ; 
and by joining to this lifting motion the operation of walking, the weight is at once 
lifted up and drawn along. This compound operation is exemplified in a horse, when 
straining at a draught in a plough or cart. He first lowers his chest, then raises it, 
and lastly steps forward. When drawing at ease, the lifting motion is scarcely dis- 
tinguishable from the progressive one. 

1 860. Pushing or thrusting is performed exactly on the same principles as drawing, 
and differs from it chiefly in the kind of implement or machine which requires to be 
employed ; all machines which are to be pushed requiring to be attached to the animal 
machine by parts acting by their rigidity ; whereas, tliose to be drawn may be attached 
by parts acting by their tenacity merely. 

1861. All these operations may be va-ried in quantity, either by a variation in the weight 
or gravity of the man, or moving power ; or by a variation in the time or rapidity of his 
motions. Thus a heavy man may, in one movement, lift a weight ten times greater 
than can be done by one of less weight ; but a light man may, by increasing the time of 
performance, lift the same weight at ten times. A man, who in digging can apply with 
his feet five cwt. of his weight towards pushing the wedge or blade of the spade into the 
soil, has an evident advantage over a lighter man who can only apply three cwt. fof that 
purpose ; but yet the latter may equal the former, by accompanying his power or foot 
with a proportionate increase of motion. The power in this last case is said to be 
obtained by the mornetitum, or quantity of matter in a body multiplied by the velocity 
with which it is moved. Power, therefore, we thus ascertain, is obtained by matter and 
motion jointly, and what may be deficient in tlie one, may be made up by excess in the 
other. Thus, a small, light workman may (though with more animal exertion) produce 
as much work as a larger or heavier man : for if we suppose the quantity of matter 
in the , large man to be thirty, and his motion at the rate of two, then if the quantity 
of matter in the small man be twenty, and his motion at the rate of three, he will pro- 
duce an equal eflfect with the large man. As small human machines, or little men, 
are generally constructed of firmer materials, or more healthy and animated, than large 
ones, the small man performs his rapid motions with nearly as great ease to himself 
as the heavy man moves his ponderous weight ; so that in point of final result they are 
very nearly on a par. 

Sect. II. Garden-labors on the Soil. 

1862. The simple labors p)eculiar to arts of culture are performed either in the body of 
the soil, as picking, digging ; on its surface, as hoeing, raking ; or on vegetables, as cut- 
ting, clipping, &c. 

1863. Picking. The pick, as we have seen [Jig. 77.) is a blunt wedge, with a 
lever attached to it at right angles, and the operation of picking consists in driving in 
the wedge perpendicularly, so as to produce fracture, and then causing it to operate ho- 
rizontally by the lever or handle, so as to effect separation, and thus break up and loosen 
hard, compact, or stony soils. It is also used to loosen stones or roots ; and the pick- 
axe is used to cut the latter. For breaking and pulverising the soil, the most favorable 
conditions are, that the earth should be moderately moist, to facilitate the entrance of 
the pick, but in tenacious soils not so much so as to impede fracture and separation. 

1864. Digging. The spade is a thin wedge, with a lever attached in the same plane, 
and the operation of digging consists in thrusting in the wedge by the momentum 
(or weight and motion) of the operator, which effects fracture ; a movement of tha lever 
next effects separation, whilst the operator, by stooping and rising again, lifts up the 
spitful or section of earth on the blade or wedge of the spade, which, when so raised, 
is dropt in a reversed position, and at a short distance from the unbroken ground. The 
separation between the dug and undug ground is called the trench or furrow ; and 
when a piece of ground is to be dug, a furrow is first opened at that end of it where the 
work is to commence, and the earth carried to one end where it is to terminate, where 
it serves to close the furrow. In digging, regard must be had to maintain a uniform 
depth throughout ; to reverse the position of each spitful, so as what was before surface 
may now be buried; to break and comminute every part where pulverisation is the 
leading object ; to preserve each spitful as entire, and place it separate, or isolated as 



Book IV. 



GARDEN-LABORS ON THE SOIL. 



365 



much as possible where aeration is the object ; to mix in manures regularly where they 
are added ; to bury weeds not injurious ; and to remove others, and all extraneous 
matters, as stones, &c. in every case. For all these purposes a deep open trench is 
requisite, and that this may not be diminished in the course of the operation, it must 
never be increased in length. If allowed to become crooked by irregular advances in 
the digging, it is thus increased in length, and necessarily diminished in capacity, unless, 
indeed, the dug ground is allowed to assume an uneven surface, which is an equally 
great fault. 

1865. Weather for the operation. Digging, for pulverisation and mixing in manures, 
is best performed in dry weather ; but for the purposes of variation, a degree of moisture 
and tenacity in the soil is more favorable for laying it up in lumps or entire pieces. The 
usual length of the blade of a spade is from ten inches to a foot, but as it is always in- 
serted somewhat obliquely, the depth of pulverisation in gardens attained by simple 
digging seldom exceeds nine inches, and in breaking up firm grounds it is seldom so 
much. 

1866. Shovelling is merely the lifting part of digging, and the shovel being broader 
than the spade, is used to lift up fragments separated by that implement or the pick. 

1867. Excavating is the operation of working out pits, furrows, or other hollows in 
grounds, either for the commencement of other operations, as digging or trenching, or 
for planting, burying manures, inserting roots ; or on a large scale, for forming pieces of 
artificial water, &c. 

1868. Levelling, m the ordinary sense of the term, as used in gai-dening, consists in 
spreading abroad the soil in such a way that its surface may be nearly in one uniform 
plane, either level or nearly so ; to be correct, this plane ought to be parallel with that 
of the horizon ; but very generally an even surface, if not very far from level, answers 
all its purposes. The terms level and eve?i, in ground-work, however, ought to be 
considered as quite distinct : the former should be like the surface of still water, and the 
latter merely free from inequalities. 

1869. Marking with the line is an operation preparatory to some others, and consists 
in stretching and fixing the line or cord along the surface by means of its attached pins 
or stakes, in the direction or position desired, and cutting a slight continuous notch, 
mark, or slit in the ground, along its edge with the spade. 

1870. Trenching is a mode of pulverising and mixing the soil, or of pulverising and 
changing its surface, to any greater depth than can be done by the spade alone. For 
trenching, with a view to pulverising and changing the surface, a trench is formed like 
the furrow in digging, but two or more times wider and deeper ; the plot or piece to be 
trenched, is next marked olF with the line into parallel strips of this width ; and beginning 
at one of these, the operator digs or picks the surface stratum, and throws it in the 
bottom of the trench. Having completed with the shovel the removal of the surface 
stratum, a second, and a third, or fourth, according to the depth of the soil and other 
circumstances, is removed in the same way ; and thus, when the operation is completed, 
the position of the ditFerent strata is exactly the reverse of what they were before. 




In trenching, with a view to mixture and pulverisation {fig. 346.), all tliat is necessary 
is to open, at one corner of the plot, a trench or excavation of the desired depth, three 
or four feet broad, and six or eight feet long. Then proceed to fill this excavation 
from one end by working out a similar one. In this way proceed across the piece to 
be trenched, and then return, and so on in parallel courses to the end of the plot, 
observing that the face or position of the moved soil in the trench must always be that of 
a slope, in order that whatever is thrown there may be mixed, and not deposited in 
regidar layers, as in the other case. To effect this most completely, the operator should 
always stand in the bottom of the trench, and first picking down and mixing the 
materials, from the solid side (a), should next take them up with the shovel, and throw 
them on the slope or face of the moved soil (b), keeping a distinct space of two or three 
feet between them. For want of attention to this, in trenching new soils for gardens 
and plantations, it may be truly said that half the benefit derivable from the operation 
is lost. In general, in trenching, those points which were mentioned under digging, 
such as turning, breaking, dunging, &c. require to be attended to, and sometimes an 



366 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



additional object, that of producing a level from an irregular surface is desired. In this 
case double care is requisite to avoid forming subterraneous basins or hollows, which 
might retain water in the substratum, at the bottom of the moved soil, and also^to mix 
inferior with better soil, &c. where it becomes requisite to penetrate into depositions of 
inferior earthy matters. 

1871. Ridging is a mode of finishing the surface, applicable either to dug or trenched 
grounds, which, when so finished, are called ridge-dug or ridge-trenched. Instead of 
being formed with an even surface, ridged grounds are finished in ridges, or close ranges 
of parallel elevations, whose sections are nearly equilateral triangles. Hence, supposing 
the triangles to touch at their bases, two thirds more of surface will be exposed to the 
influence of the atmosphere and the weather, than in even surfaces. 

1872. Forking. The fork is composed of two or three separate, parallel, and uniform 
wedges, joined so as form one general blade, which is acted on like the spade, by 
means of a shoulder or hilt, for thrusting it into the matters to be forked, and a lever or 
handle for separating and lifting them. In gardening, forking is used for two pur- 
poses ; for pulverising the soil among growing crops, and for moving vegetable 
manures. In the first case the operation is similar to digging, the only difference being 
that pulverisation is more attended to than reversing the surface ; in the other, the fork 
separates chiefly by drawing and lifting ; hence for this purpose a round-pronged (or 
dung) fork {Jig. 85. ) produces least friction during the discharge of the forkful and re- 
insertion ; and in the other abroad-pronged (or garden) fork {Jig. 86.) separates and 
lifts the soil more readily. Dry weather is essentially requisite in forking soils, and 
most desirable for spreading manures ; but dunghills may be turned, and hot-bedii 
built, during rain, with no great injury. 

1873. Hoeing is performed by drawing or thrusting the wedge or blade of the draw or 
thrust hoe along the surface of the soil, so as to cut weeds at or under the surface, and 
slightly to pulverise the soil. It is used for four purposes, sometimes together, but 
commonly separate ; first, to loosen weeds so as they may die for want of nourishment, 
or be gathered or raked off, for which purpose, either tlie thrust or draw hoe may be used ; 
the second, to stir the soil, and for this purpose, when no weeds require killing, the 
pronged hoe is preferable, as being thrust deeper with less force, and as likely to cut the 
roots of plants ; the third, is to draw up or accumulate soil about the stems of plants, for 
which purpose a hoe with a large blade or shovel will produce most effect ; and the 
fourth is to form a hollow gutter or diill, in which to sow or insert the seeds of plants, 
for which a large or small draw-hoe may be used, according to the size of the seeds to be 
buried. The use of the hoe for any of the above purposes requires dry weather. 

1874. Raking is performed by drawing through the surface of the soil, or over it, a 
series of small equilateral wedges or teeth, either with a view to minute pulverisation, or 
to collecting weeds, stones, or such other extraneous matters as do not pass through the 
interstices of the teeth of the rake. The teeth of the rake being placed nearly at right 
angles to the handle, it follows that the lower the handle is held in performing the 
operation, the deeper will be the pulverisation, and on the contrary, that the higher it is 
held, the interstices being lessened, the fewer extraneous matters will pass through the 
teeth. The angle at which the handle of the rake is held must therefore depend on the 
object in \iew ; the medium is forty-five degrees. For all raking, except that of 
new-mown grass, dry weather is essentially requisite. 

1875. Cuffing is a mode of excavating used in preparing a surface for seeds, and in 
covering them when sown ; the surface being well pulverised by digging and raking, is 
laid out into beds with alleys between, at least three times the breadth of the operator's foot. 
Then take a wooden -headed or cuflfing-rake (1314.), stand on the alley of the opposite 
side of the bed j turn the rake on its back, and push off the earth from the one half of the 
bed to the purposed depth, as far as the side of the alley marked by your feet, being 
careful to keep the earth so pushed off quite straight. ^\Tien one side is finished, turn 
round and do the other in the same manner. After the seeds are sown take the rake, 
stand on the alley on the opposite side of the bed ; put in the teeth of the rake imme- 
diately beyond the cuflflng or ridge of earth pressed off, and, by a sudden pull, draw it 
on the bed so as to cover its own half equally. And having finished this half, turn 
round, and finish the other in the same manner j and the operation is completed. 
{Sangs. Plant. Kal. 242.) 

1876. Scrajnng is drawing a broad and blunt wedge along hard surfaces, in gardening 
generally those of lawns or walks, to remove excrementitious matters thrown out of the 
soil by worms. Moist weather best suits the operation on lawns, and dry weather on 
gravel. 

1877. Siveeping, mechanically considered, is the same operation as scraping. In gar- 
dening, it is chiefly used after mowing, and for collecting leaves ; for both which purposes 
dewy mornings are preferable, as at such seasons the leaves or grass being jnoist, conglo- 
saerate without adhering to the dry soil. 



Book IV. 



GARDEN-LABORS WITH PLANTS. 



367 



1878. Wieeling is a mode of carrying materials in which the weight is divided between 
the axle of the wheel and the arms of the operator. Tlie ai-ms or shafts of the barfow 
thus become levers of the second kind, in which the power is at one end, and the fulcrum 
at the other, and the weight bet\veen them. The weight is carried or moved on by the 
continual change of the fulcrum with the turning of the wheel ; and this turning is pro- 
duced by the operator throwing forward liis centre of gravity so as to pusli against the 
wheel by means of the moveable axle, &c. The chief obstacles to wheeling are the 
roughness or softness of the surface to be wheeled on. Where this is firm, there wheel- 
ing will be best performed with the greater part of the load resting on the axle ; but 
when soft and deep, the centre of gravity should be nearest the operator, who will find 
it easier to caiTy than to overcome excessive friction. Dry weather is obviously prefer- 
able for this operation. " With wheelbarrows," Dr. Young observes, "men will do half 
as much more work as with hods." 

1879. Beating is the application of pressure to surfaces or to materials, with a view to 
render them more fit for pai-ticular uses. Thus, in new-laid turf verges, or gravel alleys, 
compactness and adhesion are required and obtained by beating ; in working clay for 
puddling or claying the bottom of ponds or cisterns, intimate mixture, exclusion of air, 
and of hard particles, are effected by the same means. 

1 880. Rolling is the application of pressure to surfaces on a large scale, and chiefly to 
turf and gravel. The roller, mechanically considered, is the second mechanical power, or 
wheel and axle, to which the handle becomes a lever of the second kind, as in the wheel- 
barrow. The amount of its action is as the breadth of the wheel and joint weight of it 
and of the axle ; it is drawn over the surface, and produces by far the greatest effect when 
the ground is saturated with moisture below, but dry on the immediate surface. 

1881. Sifting or screening are operations for separating the coai'ser from the finer par- 
ticles of earth, gravel, tanners' bark, &c. The materials require to be dry, well broken, 
and then tlu-own on the screen (Jig. 1392.), which being a grated inclined plane, in slid- 
ing down it, the smaller materials drop through while the larger pass on. In sifting, the 
same process is effected by motion wdth a sieve or circular and flat grating of limited ex- 
tent. The screen is calculated for coarser operations, as with gravel and bark on a large 
scale, and the sieve for finer operations with plant-moulds and composts. 

Sect. III. Garden-labors with Plants. 

1882. The simple operations performed on vegetables are sawing, cutting, clipping, 
splitting, mowing, and weeding. 

1883. Sawing. The saw is a conjoined series of uniform wedges, which, when drawn 
or thrust in succession across a branch or ti'unk gradually wear it through. In perform- 
ing the operation, the regularity of the pressure and motion are chiefly to be attended to. 
In green or live shoots, the double-toothed saw produces less friction on the sides of the 
plate, by opening a larger channel for its motion. Where parts are detached from living 
trees, the living section ought generally to be smoothed over with a knife, chisel, or file ; 
and a previous precaution in large trees is to cut a notch in the lower part of the branch 
immediately under and in the line of the section, in order to prevent any accident to the 
bark, when the amputated part falls off. Sawing is a coarser mode of cutting, mowing, 
or shaving ; or a finer mode of raking, in w^hich the teeth follow all in one line. 

1884. Cutting is performed by means of a very sharp wedge, and either by di-awing 
this through obliquely or across the body to be cut, as in using the knife ; or by pressing 
or striking the axe or hedge-bill obliquely into the body, first, on one side of an imagi- 
nary line of section, and then on the other, so as to work out a trench across the branch 
or trunk, and so effect its separation. The axe, in gardening, is chiefly used in felling 
trees, and for separating their trunks, branches, and roots into parts. The knife is ex- 
tensively used for small trees, and the hedge-bill and chisel for those of larger size. In 
amputating with the knife, one operation or draw-cut ought generally to be suflicient 
to separate the parts ; and this ought to be made with the knife sufliciently sharp, 
and the motion so quick as to produce a clean, smooth section, with the bark un- 
injured. 

1885. Every draw-cut produces a smooth section, and a fractured or bruised section ; 
and one essential part of cutting li\ing vegetables, is to take care that the fractured sec- 
tion be on the part amputated. Another desirable object is, that the section of the Kving 
or remaining part should be so inclined (a, Jig. 347.) as not to lodge water or overflowing 
sap, and so far turned to the ground {d) or to the north, as not to be struck by the direct 
rays of the sun. To accomplish both these purposes, as well as to make sure of having 
the fractured section on the part amputated, the general practice is to cut from below or 
from the under edge of the branch or shoot, unless the position of the leading bud occa- 
sions a deviation from the rule (b). The cut should also be made in all shoots of not 
more than three or four years old, within from one fourth to half an inch, or a little more 
of the bud intended to take the lead ; when this is not done, and half an inch or more of 



368 SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Part II. 




shoot left without a bud (c and e), the consequence is, the stump dies back to tlie bud in 
the course of the season (g), and if not carefully cut off (f), will end in a decaying ori- 
fice both unsightly and injurious. The bud selected for a leader ought always to be a 
leaf-bud, and in general the plane of the section ought to be parallel to the angle which 
the bud makes with the stem (d). Exceptions occur in the case of plants with much 
pith (Ji), as the vine, elder, &c. in cutting the year-old shoots of which, an inch or more 
ought to be left, as these always die back a few lines ; and thus the leading bud might 
be injured, if this precaution were not taken. In like manner, when pruning a large 
tree, the section of amputation ought to be made so oblique as to throw off the rain ; as 
generally as possible, it should be turned from the sun, and rather downwards than up- 
wards, in order to shield it from heat and cracking : and whenever it can be done, it should 
be made near a branch, shoot, or bud, which may take the lead in the room of that cut off, 
and thus, by keeping the principle of life in action at the section, speedily heal up the wound. 

1886. 7n jorMwi/!^ the same principle, as far as applicable, ought to be attended to ; the trunk or 
stem when cut over ought to be sloped to the north {i), and the lateral roots cut so as the section may be 
on the under side {k), and therefore less likely to rot than when the cut faces the surface of the ground 
(/), or is bruised by neglecting to form the smooth section on the attached extremity. When roots are 
large always cut to a lateral, and when they are small to a fibre; for in roots as in shoots, naked extremi- 
ties always die back to the nearest leader. When a root broken or bruised has neither laterals nor fibres, 
then merely cut back to sound wood, leaving a smooth section ; for the sap which always operates first 
and most powerfully at the extremities both of roots and shoots, will there originate fibres. 

1887. In cutting mth the chisel, the blade is applied below the branch to be amputated, so as to rest on 
the trunk or main branch, and so applied, a quick blow with a mallet is applied to the handle of the chisel 
by the operator or his assistant. If this does not effect a separation, it is to be repeated. In forest-pruning 
it is often advantageous to ajtply one cut of the chisel on the underside of the branch, and then saw it 
through'with the forest-saw from the upper. 

1888. Clipping is an imperfect mode of cutting adapted for expedition and for small 
shoots. The separation is effected by bruising or crushing along with cutting, and, in 
consequence, both sections are fractured. In gardening it is chiefly applied for keeping 
hedges and edgings in shape ; but the hedge-knife {Jig. 115.), which operates by clean, 
rapid, draw-cuts given always from below, is generally preferable, as not decreasing the 
live ends of the amputated shoots. The new pruning-shears {fig. 122.), and the 
averuncator {fig' 121.), it is to be observed, by producing cuts much more like the draw- 
cuts of knives, are greatly to be preferred to the common hedge-shears. 

1889. In respect to the seasons for sawing, cutting, or clijrping living trees, the best seem 
early in spring, and in inidsummer. Early in autumn, trees are apt to bleed ; later, and 
in winter, the section is liable to injury from the weather ; but trees pruned early in spring 
remain only a short period before the wound begins to heal ; and in those pruned at mid- 
summer wounds heal immediately. There are, however, exceptions as to spring pruning 
in evergreens, cherries and other gummiferous trees ; and summer pruning is but ill 
adapted for forest-work or trees in crowded scenery. 

1890. Splitting, as an operation of gardening, is generally performed on roots of trees 
remaining in the soil, for the purpose of facilitating their eradication.' The wedge in its 
simplest form, and of iron, is driven in by a hammer or mallet, till it produces fracture 
and separation, when the parts are removed as detached, &c. 

1891. Moiuing is performed by the rapid motion of a very sharp wedge across the mat- 
ters to be cut or mown, and at an oblique angle to them. In gardening it is applied to 
grassy surfaces, in order, by repeated amputations, to keep the plants short, spreading, 
and tiiick, and by always admitting light and air to the roots or stools, to render the sur- 
face green. This operation requiring great force, and also a twisting motion of the body, 
brings almost every muscle into action, and is, in fact, one of the most severe in vegetable 
culture. 

1892. Moioingfrom a boat, is in use for cutting weeds in rivers and ponds. The operator 
stands in the boat, and is rowed forward by another, as required. Sometimes scythe- 
blades are tied or rivetted together, and worked by means of ropes like a saw from one 
shore to the other ; but the first mode is generally reckoned the best, even in public 
canals, and is unquestionably so in gardening. 

1893. Weeding is the operation of drawing or digging out such plants from any given 



Book IV. 



TRANSFERilING DESIGNS OF GARDENS. 



plot as are foreign to those cultivated there. Tn this sense every plant may become a v> cf d 
relatively ; but absolute or universal weeds are such as are cultivated in no department of 
gardening, excepting in that purely botanical. Weeds are drawn out of the ground by 
the hand or by pincers {Jig. 146.), or they are dug or forked out by weeding tools. 
Aquatic weeds are necessarily drawn up by pincers. The best season for weeding is after 
rain. 

Chap. IL 

Operations of Gardening in which Skill is more required than Slreyigth. 

1894. Operatio7is of skill reqidre the end to be knoivn and kept in vieiu by the operator^ 
diinng the operation. The labors which we have enumerated in the foregoing chapter, 
may almost all be performed by the laborer v/itliout reference to any plan or design ; but 
those which come next to be enumerated, require a greater or lesser degree" of reference 
to tlie ultimate object. Of this, even the simple operations of digging a drain to carry ofF 
water, planting in a row, or fonning a bed of earth, may be mentioned as» examples. 
Previously to proceeding to these operations, it becomes necessary to consider the subject 
of transfen-ing designs from ground to paper, or to memoiy, and from paper or inemory 
to ground ; we shall then be prepared to treat of executing designs. 

Sect. I. Of transferring Designs from Ground to Paper or Memory. 

1895. The subject of taking })lans or designs of objects is to be considered as part of a 
gardener's general education, since none who aspire to any degree of eminence in their 
art ought to be ignorant of the first principles of geometry, land-surveying, and drawing. 
We shall merely, therefore, touch on a few points with a view to assisting a gardener in 
bringing the knowledge he has so acquired into action. A gardener may require to take 
plans of gardens, or parts of gardens, or of implements or buildings, for his own instruc- 
tion, or to execute similar objects for his employer. It is as requisite, therefore, that 
a gardener should be able to copy a garden, as a carpenter a gate or a roof. 

1896. r/ie dimensions of simple objects, as of a bed of earth or dung, border or other 
plot, he may retain in memory, and transfer from memory to the imitation or copy ; but 
in general he will require the assistance of graphic memorandums, either of the pen or 
pencil, or both. The instruments necessary for taking measurements and angles so as 
to transfer plants from the ground to paper, are the measuring-line or chain, the measur- 
ing-rod, and occasionally the theodolite ; but for all ordinary purposes the chain and rod 
are sufficient. 

1897. The simplest forrn of surface-plan to transfer from ground to paper is a circle ; 
for here it is only necessary to find the diameter. The next is a parallelogram or bed, in 
which it is only requisite to take the length and breadth. Most of the details of the plans 
of kitchen-gardens, may be reduced to parallelograms, so that they are trajisferred to paper, 
or even taken down arithmetically, as in the land-surveyor's field-book, with great ease. 

1898. Irregular fgiLres, as parterres, outlines of picturesque plantations {fg. 348.), or 
water ; or the plans of winding walks, require greater nicety. In such cases, temporary 
or imaginary lines {fg. S48. a, b, c), forming parts of regular figures (as d with b, 
Jig. 348.), are first to be formed, or partially indicated around, or through the plot to be 
transferred ; and dimensions are next to be taken relatively to these known and simple 
lines or figures. Of all temporary or skeleton figures, the triangle is the most simple, 
the most correct, and the most generally used. The skeleton or tem.porary figure (e) or 
line (fi b, &c.) being transferred to paper, the dimensions {d) are set oiF from it, and the 
irregular plot and all its details are thus correctly protracted. 




and next, to measure their elevations or depressions from these lines, in order to find their 
height or depth. FeM' gardens of any description are made perfectly flat ; the borders of 

B b 



370 



SCIENCE OF GARDENlKa. 



Part II. 



the kitchen-departments generally rise on each side of the walks ; and in large parterres, 
one of the chief beauties arises from the inequalities of the surface. The depth of ponds, 
excavations for dung, earth, &c. ridges, hot-beds, rock works, even houses, trees, &c. are 
all to be measured with reference both to their horizontal and perpendicular extensions. 
Four persons are required in performing such operations accurately ; two to hold the 
chain or line in a horizontal position, or in the plane of the general surface ; one to take 
the dimensions downwards or upwards from this with the measuring-rod, and one to mark 
down the dimensions. 

1 900. In protracting elevations and dejrressions on paper, the simplest way is to introduce 
sections, in dotted or otherwise distinguished lines, to prevent their being mistaken for 
surface-lines ; or in wavy surfaces, figures may be introduced, thus "5 or i, to denote their 
elevation above, or depression below, some piece of water, or other surface fixed on as a 
medium. Some excellent observations on this subject will be found in Major Lehman's 
Topographical Plan Drawing, as translated by Lieutenant Siborn, (oblong fol. Land. 
1822,) which it is to be hoped will soon be appropriated in the popular books on land- 
surveying, and adopted in practice. 

1901. Mliere it is in contemplation to form jneces of water, the elevations and depressions 
or levels must be taken and recorded either by sections or arithmetically with the greatest 
accuracy ; and, in some cases, sections may require to be taken to diow particular trees, 
buildings, the depth of water, or other objects. (Jig. 349.) 




1 902. With respect to the elevations and shapes of hUls and mountains which may lie 
within parks or plantations, they are only to be measured correctly by the quadi'ant and 
theodolite, in the hands of regular land-surveyors ; and, therefore, are not considered as 
here included. Tlieir shape and dimensions are laid down in maps in the same manner 
as those of smaller deviations from the flat surface. Inaccessible dimensions of height, 
as of trees or buildings, are obtained by the quadrant, or by relative comparisons of 
shadows ; of depth, as of water or wells, by rods ; of breadth or length, by finding the 
two angles of a triangle whose base shall be in one extremity of the distance ; and apex 
in the other. These, and many other equally simple problems in trigonometry, need not 
be enlarged on, because they must be supposed to form a part of general education. 

1903. The greatest accuracy is requisite in transferring plans of garden-sceneiy. Not 
only the mere ground-lines are to be transferred ; but to form a complete plan, the 
distances between scattered trees or trees in rows, or otherwise regularly disposed, ought 
to be marked, the situations of their stems indicated, and, where they are of considerable 
size, representations of the horizontal extension of their heads (fg. 350. b) should also be 
given. The same ought to be done in the case of walls, buildings, and all other raised ob- 
jects. The intention of a ground-plan is to give an idea of the superstructure ; and with- 
out such additions as these and others of a pictorial nature (fg. 350.), to the mere 
ground-lines, that idea must be very imperfect, at least in plans of mixed scenery. 

1 904. For protracting rural objects various modes have been adopted by land-surveyors : 
trees are sometimes shown by small crosses or ciphers, triangles or dots (fg. 350. a); by 




an orbiculate line representing the extension of the branches or head, and a dot in the 
place of the trunk (a and e) ; by the same, witli the addition of a shadow, taken when tlie 
sun is soutli or south-west, and his elevation exactly 45°, by which the points of tlie com- 
pass are readily ascertained throughout the plan, and the shape of the head, and the height 
of the tree exhibited (e) ; sometimes an elevation or profile of the tree is given, either 



Book IV. 



TRANSFERRING DESIGNS OF GARDENS. 



S71 



in foliage {f), or to show the form of the trunk and brandies (g), or merely to give a 
rude idea of a tree (c). Hedge-rows, whether with or without trees, are either shown in 
elevation or profile (h), or in vertical profile or bird's-eye view (/). They may be de- 
lineated either in skeleton or foliage. Buildings may be shown either in general .plan (A), 
detailed plan (I), vertical profile of the roof (m), elevation (n), perspective view (o) ; or a 
plan may be given and a diagonal elevation {q) taken and placed opposite the plan 
in the margin of the map. A pictorial surveyor, who understands perspective, and is 
desirous of conveying a correct idea of the subject he is to measure and delineate, will 
readily find expedients for attaining success. 

1905. In portrai/ing the general surface of land-estates, different modes have been 
adopted by modern land-surveyors. The first we shall mention is the old mode of giving 
what may be called the ground-lines only ; as of roads, fences, water-courses, situations of 
buildings and trees. (Jig. 351.) This mode has no other pretensions than that of accuracy 
of dimensions, and can give few ideas to a stranger who has not seen the property, beside 
those of its contents and general outline. 

351 352 




1 906. In the second, elevations of tJie (Ejects are added to these lines ; but which, in 
crowded parts, tend much to obscure tliem. (Jig. 352.) This mode is perhaps the best 
calculated of any to give common observers a general notion of an estate ; more especially 
if ably executed. Very frequently, however, this mode is attempted by artists ignorant 
of the first principles of drawing, optics, or perspective, and without taste. 

1 907. In the third, a vertical projile, or geometrical bird's-eye view, that is, a bird's-eye 
view in which all the objects are laid down to a scale is presented. In this tlie upper sur- 
face of every object is seen exactly as it would appear to an eye considerably elevated 
above it, and looking centrically down on it. (Jig. 353.) This mode, properly executed, 



353 




372 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



is calculated to give a more accurate idea of the furniture or surface-objects of an estate 
Chan any other ; and if the declivities be correctly indicated, and the shade of the hoUow^s 




354 



and eminences be laid on with reference to some medium elevation, referred to or illus- 
trated by sections, taken in the direction of indicated lines (a... 6), it will give an equally 
correct idea of the variations of the ground. In short, it is the best mode for most pur- 
poses, and is now coming into general use. 

1 908. A very complete method of giving the plan of an estate, is to adopt the profile 
manner and include such a portion of the plans of the adjoining estates or country as 
shall be contained within a circle of moderate extent {Jig- 354.), the centre of which may 
be the centre of the demesne-lands, family-mansion, or prospect-tower. Around a map 
so formed, the distant scenery, as seen from the roof of the Iiouse or prospect-tower, may 
form a panoramic circumference, or margin of prospects. {Jig. 354.) In all these modes, 
dimensions and contents are given or obtainable along with effect ; in those wliich follow, 
effect or general appearance only is obtained. 

1909. The natural bird's-ej/e view is intended to give a general idea of the external ap- 
pearance of an estate. In this the eye of the spectator is supposed to be considerably 
elevated above the centre of the estate, and all the objects are portrayed exactly as they 
would appear to him in that situation ; largest in the centre, and gradually diminishing to 
the circumference of the circle of vision. In svich a delineation, parts of other adjoining 
estates may often require to be included, in order to complete the circle ; but these are 
necessary to the general idea, and can easily be distinguished from the principal property 
by minute marks on the delineation. 

1910. In the imnoramic view, the delineator supposes himself placed on an eminence, 
as the roof of the mansion, where centrical, and looking round on all that he sees on 
every side. Where there is a prominent hill, or where the mansion is on an eminence, 
this is a very desirable mode of giving a general idea of a domain, and by the aid of hori- 
zontal lines and lines converging to them from the centre of vision, some idea may be 
had, on flat surfaces at least, of the relative heights and distances of objects. 

1911. A simple mode is to give a general view, or distaizt prosiKCt of the .estate, or its 



Book IV. TRANSFERRING DESIGNS TO PLANE SURFACES. 



373 



principal parts {jig. 355.), as seen from some elevated conspicuous hill, building, or 
object near it ; or if the estate, as is frequently the case, is situated on the side of a 
hill, or rginge of hills, a situation on the plain, or flat grounds opposite to it, will be 
sufficient. 

355 




1912. Great improve mmts have been made in the art of delineating estates by T. Hornof, 
an elegant and scientific chorometer and draughtsman. See his Mode of Delineating 
Estates, 8vo. 1813; and Lehman's Topographical Plan Draimig,^ oblong fo\. 1822. Mo- 
dels of estates are also formed in cork, papier machee, and other substances, which 
for hilly scenery are very useful and entertaining. 

Sect. II. Of transferring Designs from Pliper or Memory to Ground. 

1913. Staking or marking out plans is a subject requiring much greater skill than the 
last, on account of the inequalities and other obstructions met with on the ground's 
surface. It may be considered, 1. As to transferring figures to plane surfaces ; 2. To 
irregular or obstructed surfaces ; and, 3. Arranging quantities. 

SuBSECT. 1. Transferring Figures and Designs to plane Surfaces. 

1914. The transferring of plane or regular figures to even ground is nothing more than 
perforpiing the elementary problems of geometry on a large scale. The subject has been 
amply illustrated by Switzer, Le Blond, and other waiters of their day ; but a very 
few examples wlil here suffice, as the school education of gardeners is now superior to 
what it was in those times. 

1915. A perpendicular to any \u\Q 356 
may either be found by taking a 
garden-line, doubling a portion of it, 
and applying the extremities at equal 
distances fiom the point whence the 
perpendicular is to proceed {fig. 
356. a) • or more simply, but on a 
large scale with less accuracy, by 
applying the garden-square [h), or 
on any scale by the use of a rope 
or line united at the extremity, and 
divided in the proportions of 6, 8, 
and 10 (c). The 6 is to be placed 
as the perpendicular of a right-angled 
triangle, the 8 as the base, and the 10 as the hypothenuse ; or three rods of similar 
proportions, or divided into feet, and the proper numbers taken, may be used for this 
purpose. Switzer informs us this was the mode in which all right-angled figures in 
gardens, and all other works, were set out in his time. 

1916. To divide an angle, a line united at tlie extremities, and divided into four equal 
parts (rZj, may readily be so applied to any angle as to divide it equally; or the same 
thing may be done by a portion of line bisected, and its extremities applied at equal 
distances from the angle (e). -A line divided into three equal parts readily forms an 
equilateral triangle {fig- 356. f). 

1917. J'o describe an oval ivithin a given length, the length may be divided into three 
equal parts ; then let the two inner points so found be the centres of two circles which 
shall form the ends of the oval, and the sides may be formed by segments whose centres 
are- the intersecting points of the circles (fig. 357. a). Tlie same oval may be formed by 

B b 3 ' 




374 



SCIENCE OF G ^RDENING. 



Part IL 




357 

dividing the given line into four parts ; forming the ends by segments of which the 
two outermost points are the centres, and the sides by segments proceeding from a line 
passing at right angles through the centre of the given line {Jig- 3S7. b). 

1918. The gardener s oval, or one in which both diameters are given, is thus formed. 
Bisect the long diameter by the transverse one, itself thus bisected by the other. Divide 
half the transverse diameter into three parts. Take one of these parts, and set it off 
from both extremities of the long diameter. Fix there two pins or stakes, and fix a 
third stake one part from the end of the transverse diameter ; double a line and put it 
round these stakes, of such a length that when stretched, it may touch the extremities of 
one of the diameters. Then, with a pin in this extremity, move it completely round, 
and so strike out the oval (^g. 357. c). The long and short diameters are more easily 
divided arithmetically ; thus, supposing the given length of the oval be ninety feet, and 
its width sixty feet ; then the third part of half of the width is ten feet, and this distance 
set back from the extremities of the diameters gives the situation of the stakes at once. 



3u58 



1919. A sjriral line, or volute, may be sometimes re- 
quired in gardening, for laying out labyrinths or curious 
parterres. The width or diameter of the spiral being 
given {Jig. 358. i, h), bisect it, and divide each half into 
as many parts as the spiral is to form revolutions (Jig. 358. 
g to h). Then, from the centre draw all the halves of 
the spirals which are on one side of the diameter line 
{be, de, fg, hi) ; and from the point where the first semi- 
spiral intersects the diameter line (6), as a centre, draw 
all the others {de,fe, hg ). 

1920. Uniting three points in a curved line. A very 
useful problem both in laying down plans on paper, and 
transferring them to gardening, is that which teaches how, 
Jrom any three points {Jig. 359. a, b, c), not in a straight 
line, to Jind the centre of a circle whose circumference shall 
pass through them. Imagine the three points connected 
by two straight lines ; bisect these lines by others {g and e), 
perpendicular to them, and where these intersect (at g) 
will be found the centre of the circle whose circumference 
shall pass through the three points. 

1921. The method of laying out polygons on even 
ground, or any geometrical figure, will be perfectly sim- 
ple to such as can perform the problems on paper ; all 
the difiTerence on the ground is, that the line is used in- 
stead of the compasses, with or without the assistance of 
the square and arithmetical calculation. 

1922. Laying out the ground-lines of gardens, parterres, or any large figures on plain 
surfaces, is merely a mixed application of geometrical problems. It is only necessary 
to premise, that a straight line is found by placing rods upright, so as they may range 
one behind the other at convenient distances, and so accurately adjusted, that the one 
next the eye may conceal all the rest. A plan 
of a garden, &c. (Jig. 360. a) being given 
with a scale and north and south line attached, 
first find its extreme dimendons, and supposing 
you have space sufficient for laying it out, find 
the central lines {fig. 361. a,a,b, b), and lay 
them down first, distinguishing them by rows 
of stakes ; then from tfiese set off the lines of 
the central plot, if any, the walks, alleys, walls, 
&c., distinguishing them by strong stakes, 
which may remain till the ground is put into 
proper form. 

1923. In laying out polygonal gardens, or 
plots, or ponds {Jig. 360. b), when the dimen- 




360 




Book IV. TRANSFERRING DESIGNS TO IRREGULAR SURFACES. 375 



sions are too great for inscribing a circle of the full size with a line ; the obvious mode 
is to form a small circle in the centre, and mark the figure on its circumference ; then 
from the points where the sides intersect radii can be extended as far as required, and 



361 
-J— 



._J..J 



362 



-J .i-^'d'-' 

^ '1:4-::''. l.Jj...|.Jpj.. 



6|.J...J...J„.;/ 



i J, 



- ^..ii.Vsi 



•-.-IT. 

r'SVr 

f'i ! i 



\ ;f~ tr/ 

r -> 



tlie length of one being found, the rest can be adjusted accordingly, and the plot thus 
laid out of the required size. (^^. 362.) 




1924. Intricate and fanciful Jigures of parterres are most correctly transferred t& 
ground, as they are copied on paper, by covering the figure to be copied with squares 
(^Jig' 363. a) formed by temporary lines intersecting each other at equal distances and right 
angles, and by tracing on the ground similar squares, but much larger, according to the 
scale (Jig. 363. 6). Sometimes the figure is drawn on paper in black, and the squares in 
red, while the squares on the ground are formed as sawyers mark the intended path of 
the saw before sawing up a log of timber ; that is, by stretching cords rubbed with 
chalk, which, by being struck on the ground (previously made perfectly smooth), leave 
white lines. With the plan in one hand and a pointed rod in the other, the design is 
thus readily traced across these indications. The French and Italians lay out their 
most curious parterres (fg. 364. ) in this way. 



364 




SuBSECT. 2. Transferring Figures and Designs to irregular Surfaces. 
1925. Staking or marking out plans on irregular surfaces' constitutes the most diflScult 
part of practice, whether in arranging grounds in the country, or streets, or other 
improvements in towns.' These difficulties do not arise from the intricacy of the princi- 
ples of action ; but from the variety of operations often requisite to overcome the obstruG- 

B b 4 



S76 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 11. 



tions. Tliey may be all classed under thi-ee heads, that of transferring a straight line, a 
curved line, and a level line. ► 

1 926. Where a straight line is to be indicated among objects or inequalities not more 
than fifteen or twenty feet high, its plan or tract on the earth {jig' 365. a ... 6) may be 
found by the use of poles, a few feet higher than the elevation of the obstructions, the 
director being placed on a step-ladder, or other elevation at one end. Where this method 
cannot be adopted on account of the height of the inequalities, the line must either be 
foi-med along the summits of these inequalities, which may be done if tliey are houses, 
hills, or trees ; or parallel lines (c, d, e] formed where practicable, and the main line 
found by offsets {f, g, h) from those collateral lines at such places as are suitable. A 
third method, but one not always perfectly accurate, is to take a plan of the field or scene 
of operations, and on this to set out the proposed line ; then by ascertaining its bearings 
and distances relatively to the obstructions, it may be transferred from the paper to the 
ground. In carrying straight lines through woods, lanterns have been used ; but a much 
more correct method is to elevate poles above the surface of the wood. 



365 




1927. Continuous lines may always be made perfectly straight, however irregular the 
surface, by following the same parallel as indicated by points of the compass j or by tlie 
shadow of the operator during sunshine. If the needle does not move, or tlie shadow of 
the spectator is always projected at the same angle to his course, tlie direction in which 
he walks, in either case, must be straight. The mode of forming right lines in such cir- 
cuiAstances being understood, the formation of right-lined figures is merely a repetition 
of the process, uniting each side by the required angle. 

1 928. Cui-ved lines on irregular surfaces are in general only to be laid down by the 
previous establishment of straight lines ; first, leading straight h'nes {Jig' 348. a, b, c) and 
next secondary straight lines {Jig' 348. d, d), which shall form skeletons to the curves. 
A second mode, and on a large scale by much the most certain, is to find the leading 
points of th-e curves by triangles from a known base or known bases ; but as both modes 
are rare in the practice of gardening, they need not be enlarged on. 

1929. Circles, ovals, and every description of curvilinear Jigure may be laid down by 
either of the above modes ; but ^ here the obstructions are not great, circles, or parts of 
circles, may be transferred more expeditiously by the following method. The diameter 
of the circle {Jig. 366.), and any two points {a and c) which 366 

its circumference is to touch, being given, next ascertain the 
side of the largest square which the circle will contain. Then, 
if the director place himself in the given point of the cir- 
cumference, and look eitlier through the sights of a theodo- 
lite, or along the edge of a common cai-penter's square (rf),- 
or any right-angled l>oard, the straight line traced by his eye 
will intersect the situation of tlie circumference of the cir- 
cle ; if he then causes to be measured along that straight 
line, the length of the side of the square contained within the 
circle, the extent of the dimension will deteiTnine a point in 
the circumference. Then looking along the other side of the 
square, or through the sights of the theodolite at right angles to tlie former observation, 
he will by a similar process determine another circumferential point ; and now, by 
changing his position either to tlie right or left, taking care to set off always the same 
dimension from tJie side of the square, he will trace out the circumference of the circle 
or any portion of it. It is evident to any person in the slightest degree acquainted with 




Book IV. 



ARRANGEMENT OF QUANTITIES. 



377 



367 



practical geometry, that the same object may be attained by an adjusted triangle (such as 
t'), the extremities of which will indicate points in the circumference without further 
trouble. 

1930. Other modes on siviilar principles, well known to 
land-surveyors, are occasionally resorted to in laying out 
gardens, especially in the geometric style, and in preparing 
the foundations of farmeries, and otlier rural offices and 
appendages. A very obvious application of it is that* of 
reducing an irregular basin of water to a cii'cular figure. 
The director moves round with the adjusted triangle 
(Jig. 367. a) ; his assistant sets off the dimensions and as each 
point in the circumference is ascertained, it is marked by a 
stake (b, c, rf). 

1931. A level line (/g- 368./,/), whether straight or 
curved in direction, can only be determined on an irregu- 
lar surface by measuring down from an elevated level line (a), or from level lines in 
parallel directions, and so transferring the points by horizontal levels to tlie proper line. 
Straight rods are the ready means of measuring down, and the points must be marked 
by hillocks or hollows [b) ; or by smooth-headed stakes driven into the surface, and pro- 
truding above, or sunk under it, according to the obstructions. 




368 




1 932. Lines of uniform acclivity or declivity {Jig. 368. e, e, e) are readily formed on 
the same principle. In this and the former case, tlie common level and the horning., 
pieces (a and d), with measuring rods and stakes, are all the instruments required. Tlie 
formation of level lines and uniform slopes, by the borning-pieces and common level, 
ought to be familiar to every working-gardener ; for, without considerable adroitness in 
this department of garden-operations, none can be considered as fit to form a walk, or 
even plant a box-edging. 

1933. Levelling for terrace-slopes {Jig. 369.), or for geometrical surfaces, however 
varied, is performed by the union of both modes, and requires no fexplanation to those 
who have acquired the rudiments of geometry, or understand what has been described. 



369 




SuBSECT. 3. Of the Arrangement of Quantities. 
1934. The dividing and subdividing of land is generally the business of the land-sur- 
veyoi-, bu t it sometimes comes under the practice of the gardener, on a small scale, and on 
simple principles. Thus it may be required to determine the dimensions of a square, of a 
circle, of an oval, or of a mixed figure of a kitchen-garden, which shall contain a certain 



378 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



number of acres, or acres and parts of acres. Or, on a certain compartment in a garden 
of given breadth and length, it may be required to sow or plant a certain number of 
poles of any given crop, &c. 

1935. Where the figures are simple and regular, as squares, parallelograms, triangles, 
circles, &c., these problems are easily solved ; but where they are irregular, the safest way 
for practical gardeners, not much in the habit of calculation, is by trial and correction. 
Thus, supposing it required to find the dimensions and ground-plan of a garden-wall, 
which shall enclose two acres, the north and south walls to be straight and parallel, and 
the two ends parts of ellipses. Try a parallelogram, which shall contain 1^ acres, and 
try and adjust two curves to its ends, which shall each contain i of an acre. If an eighth 
of an acre does not give sufficiently curved ends, narrow the parallelogram part a little, 
which will admit an increase to the curved ends. All this being laid down on paper to 
a scale, when the figure is completed, ascertain its contents by the scale, and vary it as 
above, till it corresponds exactly with what is required. 

1936. For more intricate figures, first cover the paper with squares, each containing a 
certain area ; say a yard, a pole, &c., according to the magnitude of the design to be ad- 
justed. Then, on these squares adjust the form and the contents of the given figure, 
by alternate delineations of the desired shape, and numbering the squares for the desired 
contents. When the end appears to be attained, prove the whole by measuring from the 
scale. 

1937. With res^iect to measui-irigfior cropping co7n2)artments or borders, supposing it is 
desired to sow three poles of turnips on a compartment 60 feet broad, then the first question 
is simply, given 60 feet as one side, required the length of anodier requisite to form a pole. 
A pole contains 30^ square yards, or 273^ square feet; dividing tlie last sum by 60, 
the quotient, 4 feet 6|, is the length of one pole at this breadth. Or, if by links, then 60 
feet = 136-2 links, and 625 square links = 1 square pole ; hence 625 -i- 136-2^6-j3o Knks. 
3x4 feet 6-|- inches, or 3 x links ^13 feet 8 inches, or 20 -^^^ links, tlie length of 
three poles of the given breadth. 

1 938. For arra?iging ivork done by contract, it is necessary for the gardener to be able 
to determine the superficial and solid contents of ground, whether it is to be cultivated 
on the surface, as in digging or hoeing ; turned over to a considerable depth, as in digging 
drains or trenching ; or removed from its place, as in former excavation for water or 
foundations. All this is abundantly simple, where the first rudiments of mensuration 
are understood. The most important part is what relates to digging out large excava- 
tions, and wheeling the earth to different distances ; and to guide in this, the following 
rules, known to every canal contractor, may be worth attending to by the gardener. 

1939. For excavating and transporting earth. In soft ground, where no other tool 
than the spade is necessary, a man will throw up a cubic yard of 27 solid feet in an hour, 
or ten cubic yards in a day. But if picking or hacking be necessary, an additional man 
will be required ; and very strong gravel will require two. The rates of a cubic yard, 
depending thus upon each circumstance, they will be in the ratio of the arithmetical 
numbers 1, 2, 3. If, therefore, the wages of a laborer be 2s. 6d. per day, the price of a 
yard will be 3d. for cutting only, 6rf. for cutting and hacking, and 9d. when two hackers 
are necessary. In sandy ground, when wheeling is requisite, three men will be re- 
quired to remove 30 cubic yards in a day, to the distance of 20 yards, two filling and 
one wheeling ; but to remove the same quantity in a day, to any greater distance, an 
additional man will be required for every twenty yards. 

To find the price of removing any nwtibcr of cubic yards to any given distance : 

Divide the distance in yards by 20, which gives the number of wheelers ; add the two cutters to the quo- 
tient, and you will have the whole number employed ; multiply the sum by the daily wages of a laborer, 
and the produce wiU be the price of 30 cubic yards. — Then, as 30 cubic j'ards is to the whole number, so is 
the price of 30 cubic yards to the cost of the whole. 

Example. "What will it cost to remove 2750 cubic yards to the distance of 120 yards, a man's wages 
being three shillings per day ? First, 120 -h .20 = 6, tlie number of wheelers ; then, + 2 fillers = 8 men 
employed, which, at three shillings per daj', gives 24 shillings as the price of 30 cubic yards; then 
30 : 24 : : 2750 and 24 x 2750 -r- 30 = 110/. 

For elementary instructions in this department, see Hutton's Mensuration, Nicholson's Architectural 
Dictionary, and the article Canal, in the principal Encyclopcedias. 

Sect. III. Of carrying Designs into Execution, 

1940. To realise alterations j^^ojected or marked out on the groujid, recourse is had to the 
mechanical operations of gardening. These require to be directed to the following ob- 
jects. Removing surface incumbrances, smoothing surfaces, draining off superfluous 
water, forming excavations for retaining water, forming artificial surfaces, and forming 
walks and roads. 

1941. .Removing surface incumbrances is one of the first operations of improvement in 
reclaiming neglected lands, or preparing them for ulterior purposes. The obstacles are 
generally large blocks of stone, bushes, roots of trees, and sometimes artificial obstacles, 
as parts of walls, hedges, buildings, &c. Where the stones cannot ultimately be ren- 



Book IV. CARRYING DESIGNS INTO EXECUTION. 



379 



dered useful or ornamental near to where they lie, they are to be loosened by levers, and 
placed on sledges and dragged off ; and to facilitate this, they may be previously blown 
in pieces by gunpowder ; or large pits may be dug, and they may be buried near to 
where they lie. The other obstacles are easily got rid of ; large roots may be split with 
wedges, reft with gunpowder, and drawn out by wrenches ; or, the hydrostatic press 
applied, as for drawing piles. The use of gunpowder was formerly often attended with 
accidents to the operators ; but the risk is now greatly lessened, since it has been dis- 
covered that sand may be poured in, instead of ramming clay and stoney matters over the 
charge. (Siippl. Ejicyc Brit. art. Blasting.) 

1 942. Smoothing surfaces. Whatever be the nature of the future improvements, this 
operation generally takes place to a certain extent after the removal of obstacles. Pits, 
quarries, pools, &c. are to be filled up ; banks, dykes, artificial mounds, and excrescences 
to be broken down and scattered about, before the natural surface can be duly under- 
stood and appreciated, and before drains and other preliminary improvements, as roads, 
fences, &c., can be conveniently marked out. 

1943. Draxoing off superfluous luater hy subterraneous drains. The theory of this sub- 
ject has been already noticed (1096.), and as it more properly belongs to agriculture than 
gardening, we shall confine our remarks to execution. The designer or director of the 
improvements, having, by the aid of levelling, and consideration of the causes of the su- 
perfluous moisture, marked out by proper stakes the main drain and lateral cuts, the 
lowest point or outlet of the former is first to be begun on, and excavated to the proper 
width and depth. If the soil is very soft, the materials for filling in, or forming the 
channel, or di-ain, should have been previously carted there, as this operation, performed 
on soft ground after the excavation is made, is apt to damage the sides of the drain. No 
part of the drain ought to be filled, till the whole has been completed, and any errors in 
the level of its bottom or water-way corrected. The height to which the materials are to 
be laid, must be regulated by the use to which the surface is to be applied. For 
permanent pastures, as in lawns and parks, they may be brought near the surface, but 
in kitchen-gardens, or scenery were digging or trenching are occasionally to taktr 
place, they should not come within six inches of the bottom of the loosened strata. As 
to materials for drains, whatever will form a porous or hollow stratum or vein may 
be employed ; but round stones are unquestionably the most durable for collecting- 
drains ; and tubes of earthenware, or built drains of stone or bricks, for drains of con- 
veyance. The most complete description of master-drain, is one with a built cylinder 
or barrel of stone or brick below, covered by a vein or vertical stratum of round stones, 
terminating near the surface in coarse gi-avel. Wherever much draining is to be done, 
all the various methods should be considered as detailed in the county surveys, and col- 
lected in Marshall's Treatise on Landed Property, and Johnston's System of Draining ; 
and those fixed on which may be considered as most suitable to the particular case. 

1 944. Drawing off sujierfluous water by surface drains is seldom admissible with good 
effect in garden-scenery. Ridges, whether broad or narrow, communicate a vulgar 
field-like character to parks or lawns ; and large open gutters are only ditches. Per- 
haps the least objectionable mode is to use the mole-plough, or to form underground 
gutters with the spade on a similar principle. The blade of the spade should be in the 
form of the letter V, rather blunt at the point, and as each spitful is dug out, half 
its lower part is to be cut off, and the upper part returned to the gutter, so that no ex- 
ternal deformity is produced. Such drains, as well as the channels made by the mole- 
plough, required to be renewed every three or four years, especially if cattle and horses 
are admitted on the grounds in winter. Hence, many use straw or small faggot-wood 
to fill the gutters as in Norfolk, or flints as in Kent, gravel as in Berkshire, or cinders 
and scoriae as in some parts of Lancashire. 

1 945. Forming excavations for retaining water. Previously to commencing this oper-' 
ation, the levels must be staked out with great accuracy, as well as the places indicated 
from which the larger masses of earth are to be moved or to which they are to be taken. Ex- 
cavations for water vary in respect to the difficulties and manner of execution, according as 
they may be intended for running or stagnated water ; for water already existing on the 
spot, or to be brought there, or according to the nature of the soil and surface. For 
running water more depends on the design than on the execution ; for a current, if well 
directed, will, in a short time, form a suitable bed and banks for itself : but for stagnated 
water all depends on art, both in the design of the shape and the execution of the bed 
and margin. Water already existing in a body on the spot generally implies a suitable- 
ness of soil for retaining it, and the existence of springs for an increased supply, and 
these serve as useful guides in the course of execution : but where water is to be brought 
to a situation, it generally implies an unsuitableness both of soil and surface to retain it, 
and hence requires the greatest attention in the application of art, both as to design and 
execution. The most suitable surface for water is a hollow or level, and the best soil 
a clay or strone loam. In all these cases the executive part reduces itself to tlaree oper- 



380 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



ations ; the removal and disposal of the earth, the formation of the bed and margin, and 
the formation of the dam or head and sluice. 

1 946. In the removal and disposal of the earth, regard should be had to preserve the 
best soil for what is to be future surface ; and, in poor lands, it may often be advisable 
to dig or pare off the surface of the spots to be covered by the excavated earth, and 
preserve them for the same purpose. Where the new soil is to be thinly scattered over 
the old, fallowing, trenching, or digging may effect the proper mixture. AVhen large 
masses of new earth are to be laid down, that of worse quality must be farthest removed 
from the probable reach of the roots of future trees ; or, if the roots of trees will pene- 
trate the whole mass, then the whole soil should be mixed. Gravelly materials should 
be kept at such a distance from the margin of the water, as not to act as a drain 
from it ; and, in forming the mass of earth requisite at most dams or heads, the less 
gravel or porous matter used alone, the more compact and retentive will be the head. 
In every mode in which excavated earth is disposed of, care is requisite to blend its out- 
lines witli those already existing, so as to avoid all appearance of patches laid on, bumps, 
warts, or excrescences, than which nothing is more disagreeable in surfaces. 

1 947. In the formation of the bed, where the excavation has been made in a level sur- 
face, no farther attention is requisite than attending to the depths indicated in the design, 
wliich will generally be greatest towards the middle, and diminishing to the sides, as 
in nature. Few pieces of water require to be deeper in the middle than ten feet, which 
will generally deter cattle from wading across them, and prove unfavorable for the 
growth of most aquatic plants. ' Wliere water is formed by damming up, or throwing a 
head across a hollow, of wliich, perhaps, the most notable instance on record is that of 
Blenheim, the bottom does not require any attention, excepting adjoining the head ; the 
mass of materials forming which should form an inclined plane under the body of water 
for the sake of securing the head ; and to prevent the water from penetrating into this 
mass of materials, its surface should be regularly clayed or puddled over, as well as a 
part of the firm ground on all sides, and even in the bottom of the excavation. For 
if tliis firm ground is of a sandy or gravelly nature, the water may, by entering it, find 
its way to the mass of new and not yet consolidated earthy matters, and by softening 
them, speedily ruin the whole mound or head. A safe mode is to leave the head to 
consolidate for a year or more before filling with water. This was Brown's practice 
at Blenheim, Harewood Hall, and other places. 

1948. When toater is formed on the side of a hill, the lower part of the excavation must 
be raised and clayed with equal care, as in the case of the head or dam, and for the same 
reasons. It is almost needless to mention, that claying must never be omitted where 
the bottom or sides are either newly formed, or not naturally retentive of water. WTiere 
clay cannot be had, loamy, or calcareous, and even somewhat sandy earth, by abundant 
working, becomes retentive of water. This the celebrated engineer Brindley first dis- 
covered and practised. 

1 949. The margin of all water, luhere nature is imitated, ought, as much as possible, 
to be formed of stony or gravelly materials, as most likely to give a dry appearance quite 
to the edge of the water, to admit of walking there, of cattle drinking without poaching 
and bemiring themselves, and to prevent the growth of such grasses and aquatics as 
communicate a morassy or marshy appearance ; and finally as being more natural and 
picturesque than banks of mud. For this purpose, during the excavation, all or a suitable 
quantity of such gravelly or stony materials as occur, should be reserved for depositing 
along the margin, for at least one yard beyond the edge of the water, and two yards down 
the slope of the bed. If suitable materials 
are not to be had from the excavation, they 
should be procured ; for without them 
there can be but little beauty in the mar- 
gins at least of stagnated water. The 
margins of rivers may be left in a great 
degree to nature, watching every proper 
opportunity after floods or winds, to 
heighten indications of picturesque effects, 
not materially inconsistent with local cha- 
racter and utility. 

1950. In the foivnation of the head, or 
dam (fg. 370. d), the points requiring 
particular attention are the claying, and 
the forming the sluice or valve for empty- 
ing the pond. Claying should either be 
performed over the whole of the inner 
surface of the head, or by a perpendicular 
stratum of clay in the middle of the bank. 



370 




Book IV. CARRYING DEStGNS INTO' EXECUTION. 



381 



The last mode is the most simple of execution ; but if the great body of loose 
materials are of a sandy or porous nature, the former will be found the safest ; either 
however, well executed, will suffice ; and in this point of practice, execution is certainly, 
of more consequence than design. 

1951. The sluice is the stopper or valve to a drain {fig' 370. e), carried through 
the bank of a piece of artificial water at the lowest part of its bed, in order to be able 
to empty it at pleasure. There are various kinds, from the simple tube and stopper 
{fig- "71. a), to the plank-sluice (c), or grooved frame (6). This last is formed of a plate 
of boards, generally two or three feet wide, and six or eight feet high, attached to a stalk, 
and worked by means of a pinion and rachet in a frame of timber. The sluice is built 
vertically into the drain as a damper is into a flue, and the length of the stalk and frame 
is always such as to reach somewhat above the ground's surface for conveniency of work- 
ing. 'ITie grand object as to tlie sluice is to construct it so as to admit the least possible 
escape of water. This will generally be best attained by forming the tunnel, in which 
the sluice is to be built, in the solid ground at the side of the head, and not in the new 
and loose eartli, building it of masonry or brick set in cement, claying it completely on 
all sides, and fitting in the sluice with the greatest nicety. 






1952. Syphon sluice. As it is practically impossible to form sluices and drains that 
do not lose more or less water, owdng to the great pressure of the volume in the lake or 
pond, it is better, where the supply is very limited, to have no drain or sluice, and to draw 
off the water when required by a large syphon, which may easily be formed of boards ; or 
a drain may be formed, and, instead of a sluice, a well of clay adopted as a stopper. Tlie 
power of drawing off the water is seldom 
used, and, unless in fishponds, or where 
frequent clearing is necessary, sluices are 
of little use. The superfluous water 
which escapes over the head when abund- 
ant, may form a cascade or waterfall ; but 
where the waste is small, it may escape 
at one side {fig. Si i. a) as a small gur- 
gling rill over a bed formed of well- 
worked clay, to prevent its working out 
hollows, and covered by gravel, stones, 
&C-, to give it a clear and natural-like ap- 
pearance. As the head is generally a 
straight mound, destitute of natural 
beauty, it should be disguised by small 
islands {fig. 372. h, c), or varied by plant- 
ing on the margin, or both ; but as our 
present business is merely to describe the 
operations requisite to the formation of 
pieces of water, we must refer, for what 
concerns it as a material of landscape, to Landscape-gardening. (Part III. Book IV.) 

1953. Sm faces to imitate nature, such as hills, knolls, and all the variety of raised 
surfaces in pleasure-grounds, are formed by heaping up materials in the indicated shapes ; 
and hollows of equal variety, by hollowing them out ; in both cases, studying to keep the 
best earth at the surface, and so to blend the forms with those to whidi they are united, 
that no line of demarcation may ever afterwards be discoverable. 

1954. Surfaces avowedly artificial, as levels, terraces, slopes, banks, beds of earth, or 
dung-beds, being once distinctly marked out, are executed with equal facility and greater 
certainty of attaining the end or effect. Formerly the geometric style of gardening af- 
forded an ample field for the exercise of this class of operations ; but at present they are 
chiefly confined to the kitchen-garden, the sites of buildings, and a linaittnl space around 




382 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING 



Part 11. 



the mansion. Wliatevcr may be the surface dosthied for a court or square of buildings, 
as a stable-yard or fannery, it must be reduced to a plane or planes connected in such a 
way as not to interfere with utility or effect. It is not essential that the surface be 
formed to a perfect level, or to any one slope, but that order and connection should enter 
into the choice of the slopes, whatever that may be. In kitchen-gardens it sometimes 
happens that a level, or one general slope, may be adopted ; but much more frequently 
that different slopes enter into the composition of the enclosed surface. These subordi- 
nate planes or surfaces are all so connected as to balance and harmonise, and present to 
the intelligent eye a work, not of chance, but of design and reflection. In a seemingly level 
garden it often happens that not one of the compartments is level ; but each compartment 
of itself forms one plane, diverging from the centre, nortli wall, or some other point of the 
garden, and terminating on the same level, at tlie extreme corners of the compartment, or 
at the lower extremity of the garden. Besides these means, the formation of raised bor- 
ders, and the furniture of gardens, such as espaliers, bushes, &c. enable the designer 
to harmonise forms and surfaces seemingly the most incongruous and unsuitable for a 
scene of culture. 

19.55. There are two modes of reducing an irregular surface to one plane. The first is 
by taking sections of the surface in parallel lines at every ten or twenty feet distance, 
according as the surface may be more or less irregular ; laying down these sections on 
paper geometrically, and from the whole finding a mean section. Tlie stakes of all the 
parallel lines of levels still remaining in the ground, it will be easy to transfer the mean 
section by raising these stakes in some places, and lowering them in others, as tlie scale 
of the diagram will direct. The second and more general mode is by approximation, or 
trial and correction, which, in all ordinary cases, is sufficiently correct. Suppose an irre- 
gular surface, 100 feet square, is to be reduced to a level or plane. The degree of slope 
is first ascertained (by the American or any other level) from the highest side of the 
square to the lower, and it is found, we shall suppose, that the ground will not easily 
reduce to a horizontal surface. It is, therefore, determined to reduce it to a slope ; and 
for this purpose a certain height is determined on by the eye for the extremities of the 
slope ; in fixing on which, the object is to adjust the slope to the earth, so as the former 
may be completed without exterior aid or superfluity. Supposing the lower side of the 
plot to be twenty-five inches below the level of the upper side, then the fall is a quarter 
of an inch in each foot, and a few lines of stakes can be run across the ground in the 
direction of the slope, with their tops adjusted to this declivity. Or this may be omitted, 
and the same end attained by borning-pieces used after the ground has been roughly 
levelled. But this is one, among many paits of the business of a gardener, which can 
more readily be acquired by practice than verbal instruction. 

. 1956. Walks are spaces in gardens formed for the purposes of inspecting the garden, 
i-ecreation, and carrying on the operations of gardening. As one great requisite is, that 
they should always be dry, the bottom of the walk in most cases forms a drain. There 
are three descriptions of walks common to gardens, those of gravel, sarid, and grass. 
All walks consists of two parts, their substrata and surface-covering^ The substratum 
is generally placed in an excavation, the section of which is a segment of a circle, or an 
inverted pointed arch, being deepest in the centre, where, in wet soils and situations, a 
notch or drain is often fonned to carry off the water which oozes from the sides of the 
bottom, or sinks through the gravel. In all ordinary cases, however, the water will run 
off without this notch, provided the general levels of the bottoms of the walks or the drains 
which cross them, or lead from them, be contrived accordingly. The foundation of the 
walks is to be filled with stones, the largest at bottom ; or with rubbish of old buildings, 
flints, or any other similar matei'ials, observing always to place the smallest at top. When 
this is done, before the covering of gravel, sand, or turf is laid on, the substratum 
should be well rolled, so as it may never afterwards vary its position, either with the 
weight of the covering, or any weight which may pass over it. 

1957. The covering of gi-avel 373 
(Jig. 373. a) need seldom be thicker 
than six inches, and generally four 

inches will be sufficient. That this ^ 
gravel may bind in so thin a stratum, / ' ^. 

it is requisite that it be free from < . ■/^ 
larger stones than those the size of a -'>'- .i^/. 
})igeon's egg, that the general size be 

that of large gooseberries or plums, and that there be about a sixth part of rusty sandy 
matter to promote its binding. The choice of gravel is seldom within the power of tlie 
gardener ; but, in general, pit-gravel is to be preferred to river-gravel, as binding better, 
and having a better color. Gravel abounding in oxide of iron, if laid down where it is 
finally to remain, when newly taken out of the pit, and well watered and rolled, will often 
bind into one compact body like what is called pudding-stone. Such gravels, however. 



mm. 




Book IV. 



CARRYING DESIGNS INTO EXECUTION. 



383 



are seldom well colored. Tlie best in this respect in England, and also a good gravel 
tor binding, is the gravel of Kensington, to which good qualities it adds that of being the 
most beautiful in the world. There are some very agreeable sea-gravels, formed chiefly 
of small shells, or fragments of larger ones. The way to make a handsome walk with 
this gravel is to mix it with about a tenth part of a composition consisting of equal parts 
of brickdust and puzzolana earth or Roman cement. This done, and the gravel laid down 
in a wet state, and well rolled, it will form a surface like that of shell-marble. 

1958. Where a covering of sand is adopted, its thickness must depend on its qualities, 
and whether sand is taken from preference or necessit}-. When sand is taken from pre- 
ference, the intention is to produce soft walks, which shall yield to the feet like turf, in 
which case its thickness may be from three to six inches ; but if sand is used because 
gravel cannot be procured, then Uttle more should be laid on than what is sufficient to fill 
up the interstices of the upper surface of the substrata. Sometimes an attempt is made 
to bind such sand, by mixing it with dried clay in a state of powder, or with the scrapings 
of stone roads, and then watering and rolling ; but it is not often that this succeeds ; and 
it may certainly be considered as unfortunate where the best walks about a residence are 
covered with sand. 

1959. The covering of turf and earth {fig. 373. b) should not be less than six inches in 
thickness, that there may be sufficient pasturage and moisture for the roots of the grasses 
in the dry season. For this purpose, the soil laid under the turf should be a medium be- 
tween a stiff clayey and a loose sandy soil, so as more completely to serve as a sponge than 
either. 

1960. Substitutes for gravel and sand are burned lumps of clay reduced to powder, 
pounded bricks, stones, or slates, scoria, ashes, soaper's waste, coal, shells, sawdust, tan- 
ner's bark, ferruginous earth, and even moss or peat-earth. Bark and peat-earth are 
often used in Holland ; the former, when fresh, has much of the color of Kensington 
gravel, and assorts well with vegetation. 

1961. Substitutes for turf are green mosses recently gathered and stuck on mortar or 
cement ; the same process with lichens from trees, or with flow-moss or heath-tops. 

1 962. The form of the suface of gravel, sand, and grass walks, should almost always 
be flat ; or, in the case of gravel, gently raised in the middle, so as to throw the water 
towards the sides, in approaching which it may sink gently into the substrata. But in 
turf walks this should never be attempted ; as it is desirable, on account of equally 
watering the plants, and retaining an equal firamess throughout their surface, that the 
water should sink in where it falls. It is a common practice to form turf walks of solid 
earth, without any regard to the substrata ; and this succeeds very well in dry soils, and 
where such walks ai'e little used, excepting in summer ; but whenever turf walks are to 
be in constant use, the above is much the best way of forming them. Gravel and sand 
have, in like manner, been laid on the surface of the soil in small gardens, and in very dry 
sub-soils, and where this can be done with the attainment of the desired objects, it has this 
advantage, that the roots of trees may range under the walks, as indeed always happens 
in shrubberies and plantations. The scoria; of metals, coal-ashes, the refuse of mines and 
glass-works, and other similar matters, are often used instead of gravel ; but their color 
seldom harmonises well with that of vegetation. 

1 963. The breadth of walks generally depends on the extent or scale of the whole residence, 
and not of the particular garden or scene, which may be small, and yet connected with 
greater. They should never be narrower than is sufficient to allow a party of two to walk 
abreast, the minimum breadth for which is four feet six inches ; but they may be large 
enough for a party of half a dozen, or in public walks, or walks in extensive pleasure- 
grounds, avenues, &c., for one or two dozen. For the latter number thirty-six feet suf- 
fices. Tlie direction of walks depends on their particular use, and connection with the 
different scenes or subjects of gardening. 

1964. Alleys are smaller walks generally covered with a thin coat of sand, gravel, or 
shells. In parterres they are sometimes of various widths, to suit the particular forms 
which constitute the design ; and there also they are sometimes covered with different 
sorts of gravels, shells, scoriae, &c., or paved with flints, pebbles, &c. ; but the alleys of 
separation, in walled gardens, are generally two feet wide, and formed in right lines, 
parallel to the main walks, or borders. Sometimes they are not gravelled, and at other 
times they are covered with road-grit, or the scrapings of roads j which, of course, is to be 
considered as the powder of the material of which the road is made, mixed with vegetable 
matter from the droppings of horses and cattle, and is considered as well adapted for 
binding or forming a compact surface. 

1965. Roads are walks on a large scale ; they are formed on the same general plan ; 
but when of fifteen or twenty feet in breadth, and on a wet or retentive soil, they have 
generally a drain on each side instead of one in the centre. On the sides of slopes, 
where, during heavy rains, these roads intercept the water from the upper grounds, they 
should have frequent gratings, or pierced stones, communicating with the drains on 



384 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pari II. 





the upper side {Jig. 874.), unless pro- 
vision is made for intercepting the water 

before it comes on the gravel, by a gentle 374 
hollow (a), running parallel and close to 
the road, and communicating in like 
manner with the drains. 

1966. The durability and comfort of 
roads and walks depend on their power to 
Tresvit the action of animals walking on 
them, of machines being rolled over them, 

of weather, and of vegetation. A dry firm substratum is necessary for all these pur- 
poses ; and this, as ailready observed, is to be obtained by draining either in the centre or 
in the sides, and by a sti-atum of gravel or fragments of stones ; the largest, in walks, of two 
or three ounces each, and in garden-roads, of six or eight ounces ; in both cases covered 
with smaller gravel. For resisting animals, a degree of compactness, solidity, and homo- 
geneous texture of surface is requisite, according to the weight of the a:nimals arid their 
burdens, and the area of their feet. Tiius, supposing a man to weigh seven hundred 
weight, and to carry a load of two hundred weight, and the area of one of his feet to be 
twenty-five inches, then tlie walk or road will require to bear at least forty pounds per 
square inch, and so on. But an animal not only presses veilically on a walk or road, 
but his feet (the feet of man singly, and of quadrupeds relatively to each other), 
acting as levers of the third kind, have a tendency to force up and derange the materials 
under the point of the foot in the action of walking, in the same way as tlie lower end of 
a ladder, when rearing up against a wall, has a tendency to press into and derange that 
part of tlie ground wliich acts as a fulcrum. Hence an additional reason for firmness of 
surface, and also for using small materials ; for if tlie end of a ladder, or the extremity of 
the foot, or any point of pressure, were to exert itself on one end or extremity of a stone, 
it would act as a weight on the end of a lever ; and, depressing one end and raising the 
other end, would derange at once the substratum and the surface. Diu-ing rain, or when 
the surface of the road was moist, this operation would go on in at least a duplicate ratio. 
Whatever may be tlie weight of a four-wheeled carriage or waggon, it presses on tlie road 
on four points only, whose united areas seldom exceed one foot ; hence the necessity of 
fiminess, and also of materials reduced to a size, whose areas are less than the separate 
areas of the four pressing points, in order to prevent derangement from leverage or com- 
pound action. This subject has been ably illustrated by II. L. Edgeworth, and practi- 
cally exemplified, to a great and beneficial extent, by J. L. M'Adam [Rides for rejmiring 
Roads, &c. 1823), and bids fair to effect an entire change in tlie system of public road- 
making followed in this countiy. (See our Encyc. of Agriculture.) 

1 967. To resist weather, the grand object is to get rid of superfluous water ; subterra- 
neous sources are to be cut off by drains, and surface water is not to be allowed to sink 
into the road, but the surface gently raised, and rendered and kept, by rolling and conti- 
nually obliterating foot or machine marks, so smooth and impervious, as to throw the water 
entirely to tlie sides. By this means, the effects of frost, heavy carriages, and narrow 
wheels, is greatly lessened. 

1 968. To resist vegetation, a road must be in constant use ; but firmness is useful even 
in this point of view, and also the exclusion of vegetable earths from tlie gravels or other 
materials used in forming the surface of garden-walks and approach-roads. 



Chap. III. 

Scientific Processes and Operatiom. 

1969. Scientific processes and o;j^roiio?f5 include the master-operations of gardening as 
an art of culture. These operations are all mechanical ; but some depend, for their be- 
neficial result, on chemical changes, as in the preparation of composts and manures ; 
others depend on the prevention of chemical changes, as in the preserving and keeping of 
fruits and roots ; some on imitations of climates, as in the management of hot-houses ; 
but the greater number are dependent on the laws of vegetable life, as in the operations 
of propagating, rearing, accelerating, and retarding vegetables. Other processes to be 
treated of are of a mixed nature, and some depend on tlie laws of animal life, as in the 
operations for destroying vermin and insects. 

Sect. I. Preparation of fermenting Substances for Hot-beds, Manures, and Composts. 

1970. The fermenting substances used in forming hot-beds are stable litter or dung in a 
recent or fresh state, tanner's bark, leaves of trees, grass, and the herbaceous parts of 
plants generally. 



Book IV. PREPARATION OF MANURES AND COMPOSTS. 385 



1971. Stable-dung is in the most general use for forming hot-beds", which are masses of 
this dung after it has undergone its most violent fermentation. These masses are gene- 
rally in the form of solid parallelograms of magnitude proportioned to the frames which 
are to be placed on them, the degree of heat required, -and the season of the year in which 
they are formed. 

1972. Tanners' bark is only preferred to dung because the substance which undergoes 
the process of putrid fermentation requires longer time to decay. Hence it is found 
useful in the bark-pits of hot-houses, as requiring to be seldomer moved or renewed 
than dung, or any other known fermentable substance that can be procured in equal 
quantity. 

1973. Leaves, and especially oak-leaves, come the nearest to bark, and have the addi- 
tional advantage, that when perfectly rotten like dung, they form a rich mould or excel- 
lent manure ; whereas rotten tanners' bark is found rather injurious than useful to vege- 
tation, unless well mixed with lime and earth. 

1974. Preparation of manures. The object of preparation in these three substances 
being to get rid of the violent heat which is produced when the fermentation is most 
powerful ; it is obvious that preparation must consist in facilitating the process. For 
this purpose, a certain degree of moisture and air in the fermenting bodies are requisite ; 
and hence the business of the gardener is to turn them over frequently, and apply water 
when the process appears impeded for want of it, and exclude rain v.-hsn it seems chilled, 
and impeded by too much water. Recent stable-dung generally requires to lie a month 
in ridges or beds, and be turned over in that tim.e thrice before it is fit for cucumber-beds 
of the common construction ; but for M'Phail's hot-beds, or for Knings, or for frames 
with moveable bottoms, three weeks, a fortnight, or less, will feuffice ; or no time at all 
need be given, but the dung formed at once into linings. Tan and leaves require in general 
a month ; but much depends on the state of the weather, and the season of the year. 
Fermentation is always most rapid ia summer ; and if the materials are spread abroad 
during frost, it is totally impeded. In winter, the process of preparation generally goes 
on under cover from the weather, in the back sheds ; which situation is also the best in 
summer, as full exposure to the sun and wind dries too much the exterior surface ; but 
where sheds cannot be had, it will go on very v/ell in the open air. A great deal of heat 
is undoubtedly lost in the process of fennentation ; and some cultivators have recently 
devised plans to turn it to some account, by fermenting dung in vineries, which are just 
beginning to be forced, or in vaults under pine-pits or plant-stoves. The latter mode 
seems one of the best in point of economy, and is capable of being turned to consider- 
able advantage where common dung-beds are extensively used ; but the m.ost economical 
plan of any seems to be that of employing only M'Phail's pits, or such as are constructed, 
on similar principles. 

1975. The fGrmation of dung-beds is effected by first marking out the dimensions of 
the plan, which shoidd be six inches ^^ider on all sides than that of the frame to be placed 
over it, and then, by successive layers of dung laid on by the fork, raising it to the de- 
sired height, pressing it gently and equally 375 

throughout. In general, such beds are formed 
on a level surface ; but Knight's mode {Jig^ 
375. ) is to form a surface of earth as a basis, 
which shall incline to the horizon to the ex- 
tent of fifteen degrees ; on this he forms the 
dung-bed to the same inclination ; and, finally, 
the fi-ame, when placed on such a bed, if, as is 
usual, it be deepest behind, will present its 
glass at an angle of twenty degrees instead of 
six or eight, which is undoubtedly of great ad- 
vantage in the winter season. Tliis seems "a 
very desirable improvement where light is an object, which it must be, m a high degree, 
in the case of the culture of cucumbers and melons, as v/ell as in forcing flowers. 

1976. Ashes are often mixed with the dung of hot-beds, and are supposed to promote 
the steadiness and duration of their heat ; and at first to revive it, if somewhat decayed. 
Tan and leaves have also been used for the same purpose ; and it is generally found that 
about one third of tan and two thirds of dung will form a more durable and less violent 
heat than a bed wholly of dung. : The heat of dung-bedS is revived by linings or colla- 
teral and surrounding walls or banks of fresh dung, the old dung of the bed being pre- 
viously cut down close to the frame. These linings, as before observed, require less pre- 
paration than the dung for the beds. The dung-bed being formed, and having stood two 
or three days with the frame -and lights placed over it to protect it from rain, is next to 
be covered with earth, of xjuality and in quantity according to the purpose to which it is 
to be applied. In severe weather, the sides of the bed are often protected by bundles of 
straw or faggots, which tend to prevent the escape of the heat. 

C c 




386 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



1977. Collecting and forming comjjosts for manure is an essential part of the economy 
of the garden, no less than of the farm. The following judicious observations on this 
subject, by Bisliop, merit attention : — • 

Without enumerating the various means that, with careful economy, may be used for increasing the 
stock of garden manure, such as collecting the urine of animals, chamber-lie, soap-suds, or mixing fresh 
soils of opposite qualities, I shall confine myself to a plain statement of a method I have practised for these 
several years past with much success. Situated the same as many others, to whom the produce of the 
stable-yard is the only allowance of dung that can conveniently be allotted for the garden, which, although 
every way advantageous for hot-beds, and other purposes of forcing, yet, to use it as a manure for garden 
crops, without having its qualities altered by fermentation, or blended with substances of a heavier nature, 
would, in many cases, be more injurious than beneficial ; I therefore, during the summer and autumn, 
have all the offals in the garden, such as weeds, leaves of strawberries and other vegetables, short grass, 

Eeas and asparagus haulm, with the foliage of trees and shrubs when newly shed, carefully collected into a 
eap. These are all turned over and mixed during the winter, that they may be sufficiently rotted to mix 
with the dung against the end of summer. I have also another heap formed with the prunings from goose- 
berry and currant bushes, fruit-trees, raspberry-shoots, clippings of box-edgings, and loppings from shrubs ; 
also the roots of greens and cabbages, which are generally burnt at two different periods in the year, viz. in 
spring and autumn ; but previous to each burning, I endeavour to pare up all the coarse grasses around 
the garden, with a portion of the soil adhering thereto, and whenever these are sufficiently dried, have 
them collected to the heap intended to be burnt. The fire is kindled at a convenient distance from the 
heaps, and a portion of such as burn most easily is first applied, untd the fire hath gained a considerable 
power. After this, the process of burning is continued, by applying lighter and heavier substances alter- 
nately, that the one may preserve the action of the fire, and the other prevent it from reducing them too 
much to ashes. When the whole are thus consumed, a quantity of mould is thrown over the heap to pre- 
vent the fire from breaking through ; and whenever it can be broke into with safety, it is then mixed up 
into a dunghill with the rotted vegetables, moss-earth, and stable-yard dung, in such proportions as is 
likely to ensure a moderate fermentation, which is generally completed in three or four weeks ; at which 
time, I think, it is most advantageously applied, in having it carried to the ground, and instantly dug in. 
{.Metn. Caled. Hort. Soc. i. 443.) 

1978. Liquid manures are highly approved of by many cultivators, and especially by 
Knight. They are formed by infusing rich dungs, as those of fowls, sheep, pigs, &c. or 
blood, in three or four times their bulk of water ; and the application of the extract so 
procured is made at the usual seasons of watering, taking care to apply it only to the 
roots. Knight applies this mode of manuring chiefly to plants in pots, and is convinced, 
from experience, that trees and shrubs may grow and bear fruit in very small pots, if 
abundantly supplied with nourishment in this manner. (Hort. T?-a7is. vol. ii. p. 127.) 
For some plants, as the pine, vine, cauliflower, cucumber, and others which gardeners 
consider as gross feeders, liquid manures may be applied during their full vigor of 
growth ; but the practice, we think, would be dangerous, if so applied to culinary or 
fruit-bearing plants in general, as producing too great excitement. 

1979. Collecting and forming comjwsts for motdd. Composts are mixtures of several 
earths, or earthy substances or dungs, either for the improvement of the general soil 
under culture ; or for the culture of particular plants. 

1980. In respect to composts for the amendment of the general soil of the garden, their 
quality must depend on that of the natural soil ; if this be light, loose or sandy, it may 
be assisted by the addition of heavy loams, clays, &c. from ponds and ditches, cleanings 
of sewers, &c. On the other hand, heavy, clayey, and all stubborn soils, may be assisted 
by light composts of sandy earth, drift, and sea-sand, the shovellings of turnpike-roads, 
the cleansing of streets, all kinds of ashes, rotten tanners' bark, rotten Avood, and saw- 
dust, and other similar light opening materials that can be most conveniently procured. 

1981. Composts for j^ai-ticular plants may be reduced to light sandy loam from old 
pastures ; strong loam appi'oaching nearly to brick-earth from the same source ; peat- 
earth from the surface of heaths or commons ; bog-earth from bogs or morasses ; veget- 
able earth fropa decayed leaves, stalks, cow-dung, &c. ; sand, either sea-sand, drift-sand, 
or powdered stone, so as to be as free as possible from iron, lime-rubbish ; and lastly 
common garden-earth. There are no known plants that will not grow or thrive in one 
or other of these earths alone or mixed with some other earth, or with rotten dung, or 
leaves. Nurserymen, whose practice may be considered a safe criterion to judge from, 
have seldom more than three sorts of earth : loam, approaching to the qualities of brick- 
earth ; peat or bog-earth, from heaths or morasses ; and the common soil of their nursery. 
With these, and the addition of a little sand for striking plants, some sifted lime-rubbish 
for succulents, and some well rotted cow-dung for bulbs and some sorts of trees, they 
contrive to grow thousands of different species in as great perfection (taking the dif- 
ference between plants in pots and plants in the free soil and air) as in their native coun- 
tries, and many, as the pine, vine, camellia, rose, &c. in a superior manner. 

1982. Practical limit to ingredients for comp)osts. Gushing, one of the best writers on 
the propagation of exotics, observes, " Loam, peat, and sand, seem to be the three simples 
of nature, if I may so call them, most requisite for our purpose ; to which we occasionally 
add, as mollifiers, vegetable or leaf mould,' and well rotted dung ; from the judicious 
mixture and preparation of which, composts may be made to suit plants introduced from 
any quarter of the globe." {Exotic Gardener^ p. 153. 1814.) Sweet {Botanical Cidti- 
vator, 1820,) concurs in this 0]^inion. See also Haynes On Collecting and Forming 
Composts, &c. 182J. 



Book IV. OPERATIONS OF PROPAGATION. 



887 



1983. Preparation of composts. The preparation requisite for the heavy and light 
composts for general enrichment, and of the above different earths, consists in collecting 
eadi sort in the compost-ground, in separate ridges of three or four feet broad and as 
high, turning them every six weeks or two months for a year or a year and half before 
they are used. Peat-earth being generally procured in the state of turves full of the 
roots and tops of heath, requires two or three years to rot ; but, after it has lain one year, 
it may be sifted, and what passes through a small sieve will be found fit for use. Some 
nurserymen use both these loams and peats as soon as procured, and find them answer 
perfectly for most plants ; but for delicate flowers, and especially bulbs, and all florists' 
flowers, and for all composts in which manures enter, not less than one year ought to be 
allowed for decomposition, and what is technically called sweetening. Tlie French 
gardeners allow for their rich orange-tree composts from three to six years. 

1984. The compost-ground may be placed in any situation concealed from the general 
view, but at the same time exposed to the free action of the sun, air, and rain. Its size 
will depend on that of the garden, and on the sorts of culture for which the moulds are 
adapted. It should generally foi-m a part of the parallelogram enclosure used as hot-bed 
ground, and where there are hot-houses, both should be situate as near them as possible. 

" Sect. II. Operations of Propagation* 

1 985. The operations of j^ropagation are among the most curious and difficult in gardening. 
As already observed (830.), plants are universally propagated by seed, but partially also 
by germs or bulbs, suckei's, runners, slips, and offsets j and ai'tificially by layers, inarch- 
ing, grafting, budding, and cuttings. 

SuBSECT. 1. Propagation by natural Methods. 

1986. By seed. Here the first consideration is to make sure of live seeds ; for some, 
as we have seen (717. to 722.) lose their vitality very early after being gathered, while 
others retain it only for one or perhaps two seasons ; some seeds also are injured, and 
others are improved by keeping. The size of seeds requires also to be taken into con- 
sideration, for on this most frequently depends the depth which they require to be buried 
in the soil ; the texture of tlieir skin or covering must be attended to, as on this often 
depends the time they require to be bui-ied in the soil previously to germination. On the 
form and surface of the outer coating of seeds sometimes depends the mode of sowing as 
in the carrot, and on their qualities in general depends their liability to be attacked by 
insects. The nature of the offspring expected and the proper climate, soil, and season 
require also to be kept in view in determining how, where, when, and in what quantity 
any seed must be sown. Such are the general considerations, tlieir particular applications 
will afterwards occur. 

1987. By ger?ns or bulbs. These, whether cauline or radical, require in general to be 
planted immediately or soon after removal from the parent plant, in light earth about 
their own depth from the surface. Matured bulbs may be preserved out of the soil for 
some months, without injury to their vitality ; but infant bulbs are easily dried up and 
injured when so treated. 

1988. By offsets. This mode is not very easily distinguislied from the foregoing and 
following, and seems in a strict sense only applicable to young radical bulbs, which, whea 
separated or taken off from the parent roots, are termed offsets. 

1989. By slips. These are shoots (Jig. 376. a) which spring from the collar or the 
upper part of the roots of herbaceous plants, as in auricula, and under shrubs, as thyme, 
&c. The shoot, when the lower part from whence the roots proceed begins to ripen or 
acquire a firm texture, is to be slipped or drawn from the parent plant so far as to bring 
off a heel or claw of old wood, stem, or root, to which generally some roots, or rudiments 
of roots, are attached. The ragged parts and edges of this claw or rough section are 
then to be smoothed with a sharp knife, and the slip planted in suitable soil, and shaded 
till it strikes root afresh, or appears to have recovered from the effects of amputation. 




] 990. By division of the plant. This m.ode is adopted with many species, as most per- 
ennial grasses, the daisy, polyanthus, and a great variety of others. The plant is takf a 

C c 2 



388 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



up, and the earth shaken from its roots ; the whole is then separated, each piece containing 
a portion of root and stem, which may be planted without farther preparation. 

19^1. By runyxers {fig- 376. c). With certain species this is a \ery convenient and 
sure mode of propagation. All that is requisite, is to allow the plantlet on the shoot or 
runner to be well rooted before being separated from the parent. It may then be planted 
where it i« finally to remain. 

1992. By suckers, [fig. 376. b). These are merely runners under ground; some run 
to a considerable distance, as the acacia, narrow-leaved elm, sea-limegrass, alkekengi, 
&c. ; others are more limited in their migrations, as the lilac, syringa, Jerusalem arti- 
choke, saponaria, &c. All that is necessary is to dig them up, cut off each plantlet with 
a portion of root, after which its top may be reduced by cutting off from one fourth to 
one half of the shoot, in order to fit it to the curtailed root, and it may then be planted, 
either in the nursing-department, or, if a strong plant, w here it is finally to remain. 

SuBSECT. 2. ProjKigation by Layering. 

1993. Layers, as we have already observed (S40.) are indicated by nature, and we 
shall here point out the improvements of art and their applications. The roots in natural 
layers are produced by the stimulus of tlie moist earth on which the shoots, from the na- 
ture of the tree or plant, or accidental causes, rtcline ; art increases the natural stimuli, 
and adds others, especially that of diminishing the resources of the shoot in the parent 
plant, by incision or fracture. 

1994. Season. In general, the operation of layering in trees and shrubs is commenced 
before the ascent of the sap, or delayed till the sap is fully up, and thence the two seasons 
are early in spring or in midsummer. Autumn and winter are resoited to for convenience 
iu extensive concerns. The shoot, or extremity of the shoot, intended to become a new 
plant, is half separated from the parent plant, at a few inches' distance from its extremity, 
and while this permits the ascent of the sap at the season of its rising, the remaining half 
of the stem being cut through and separated, forms a dam or sluice to the descending 
sap, which, thus interrupted in its progress, exudes at the wound in the < form of a gra- 
nulous protuberance, which throws out roots. If the cut or notch in the stem does not 
penetrate at least half way through, some sorts of trees will not form a nucleus the first 
season ; on the other hand, if the notch be cut nearly through the shoot, a sufficiency of 
alburnum or soft wood is not left for the ascent of the sap, and the shoot dies. In deli- 
cate sorts it is not sufficient to cut a notch merely, because in that case, the descending 
sap, instead of throwing out granulated matter in the upper side of the wound, would 
descend by the entire side of the shoot ; therefore, besides a notch formed by cutting out 
a portion of bark and wood, the notched side is slit up at least one inch, separating it by 
a bit of twig, oi small splinter of stone or potsherd. 

1995. Manipulation. Shoots when layered are often cut and mangled at random 
{_-fig. 377. a, 6, c), or buried insufficiently, or so deep in the soil [d) that they throw out 
but few roots ; or not placed upright (t?) , by which they make unsightly plants. In order 
to give some sort of principle to go upon, it should be i-emembered, that the use of the notch 
is to prevent the heel or part intended to throw out granulous matter from being bn^ised, 
which it generally is, by the common practice of performing this operation by one cut 
sloping upwards; and that the use of the slit is to render it more difficult for the 



377 




descending sap to return from the extremity of the heel. In confomiity with this idea. 
Knight recommends taking up the shoot after it has grown some time, and cutting 
off a ring of bark below the notch and slit, so as completely to hinder the return of the 
sap, and thereby force the shoot to employ it in forming roots. {Hort. Trans, vol. i. 256.) 
In burying an entire shoot {/) witli a view to induce shoots to rise from every bud, 
notches alone are sufficient without either slitting or ringing. The use of the splinter of 
wood, or bit of tile or potsherd, is partly to prevent the union of the parts when the bent 
position of the shoot is not sufficient, and partly, and in some cases principally, to act as 
a stimulus, like the bottom and sides of pots. On what principle it acts as a stimulus 



Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY LAYERING. 



389 



has not, we think, been yet determined, but its effects have long been very well known 
to gardeners. In all cases the layer must be held firmly in its place by hooked pegs. 
The operation of layering is performed on herbaceous plants as well as ti-ees ; and 
the part to become the future plant is, in both cases, covered with soil about a third of 
its length. 

1996. Layering by tiL'hting, ringing, piercing, and u'iring the shoot intended for the 
future plant is also occasionally practised. 

1997. P/ercz^g is performed with an awl, nail, or penknife, thrust through two or 
three times in opposite directions at a joint ; from which wounds, first, granulated matter 
oozes, and finally, fibres are emitted. 

1998. Ringing is cutting oft' a small ring of bark and part of the wood, by which the 
return of the sap being wholly prevented, it is, therefore, as it were, compelled to form 
roots. Care must be taken, however, that the ring does not penetrate far into the wood, 
otherwise the sap will be prevented from ascending in the first instance, and the shoot 
killed. 

1999. U'iring is performed by twisting a piece of wire round the shoot at a joint, 
and pricking it at the same time with an awl on both sides of the wire. It is evident 
that all these methods depend on the same general principle, that of permitting the ascent 
of the sap through the wood, but checking its descent by cutting off or closing the vessels 
of the bark. 

20CX). Layers which are difficult to strike may be accelerated by ringing. Ringing is 
an excellent metliod for making layers of hard-%^ ooded plants strike root witli greater 
certainty, and in a smaller space of time than is attained in any other way. The accu- 
mulated vegetable matter in the callus, which is formed on the upper edge of the ring, 
when brought into contact with the soil, or any material calculated to excite vegetation, 
readily breaks into fibres and roots. (Ilort. Trans, iv. 558.) 

2001. In layering trees in the ope7i ^garden, whatever mode be adopted, the ground 
round each plant intended for laying, must be digged for the reception of the layers ; 
then making excavations in the earth, lay down all the shoots or branches properly 
situated for this purpose ; pegging each down with a peg or hooked stick ; laying also 
all the proper young shoots on each branch or main shoot, fixing each layer from about 
three or four to six inches deep, according as they admit, and moulding them in at that 
depth, leaving the tops of every layer out of ground from about two or three to five or 
six inches, according to their length, though some shorten their tops down to one or two 
eyes. Observe also to raise the top of each layer somewhat upright, especially tongue or 
slit layers, in order to keep the slit open. As the layering is completed, level in all the 
mould finally, and equally in every part close about every layer, leaving an even, smooth 
surface, presenting only tlie tops of each layer in the circumference of a circle, and the 
stems or stools in the centre. Sometimes the branches of trees are so inflexible, as not 
to be easily brought down for laying ; in which case they must be plashed, making the 
gash or ctit on the upper side ; and when they are grown too large for plashing, or that 
the nature of the wood will not beai- that operation, they may be thrown on their sides, 
by opening the earth about their roots, and loosening or cutting all those on one side, 
that the plant may be brought to the ground to admit of laying the branches. 

2002. Layering plants in pots. "VMien layers are to be made from green-house shrubs, 
or other 2)la}its in pots, the operation should generally be performed either in their own 
pots, or in otliers placed near that of the stool to receive the layer. 

2003. General treatment. After laying in either of the above methods, there is no par- 
ticular culture requisite, excepting that of keeping the earth as much as possible 
of uniform moisture, especially in pots ; and watering these in the open air in dry 
weather. 

2004. 2fanage}nent of stools. When the layers are rooted, which will generally be the 
case by the autumn after the operation is performed, they are all cleared from the stools 
or main plants, and the head of each stool, if to be continued for furnishing layers, should 
be di-essed ; . cutting off all decayed and scraggy parts, and digging the ground round 
them. Some fresh rich mould should also be worked in, in order to encourage the 
production of the annual supply of shoots for layering. 

2005. Chinese laying. The Cliinese method of propagating trees by first ringing, or 
nearly so, a shoot, and then covering the ringed part with a ball of clay and earth, 
covered with moss or straw, is obviously on the same general principle as layering ; and 
is better efiTected in tliis country by drawing the shoot through a hole in a pot (such a 
pot as Jig. 175.) ; ringing it to the extent of three fourths of its circumference,' near the 
the bottom or side of the pot, and then the pot, being supported in a proper position, and 
filled with earth, it may be watered in the usual way. Some plants difficult to strike, 
and for which proper stocks for inarching are not conveniently procured, are thus pro- 
pagated in the nursery hot-houses. 

200(5. Removal of the rooted layer or plantlet. Tliough layers of trees completed early 

C c 3 



390 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



in spring, and of herbaceous plants after the season of their flowering, are gerverally^i to 
remove from the parent plant the end of the succeeding autumn ; yet many sorts of 
American trees require two years to complete their roots. On the other hand, some sorts 
of roses and deciduous shrubs, if their present year's wood be laid down when about half 
grown, or about the middle of August, it will produce roots, and be fit to separate the 
succeeding autumn. 

SuBSECT. 3. Propagation hy Inarching. 

2007. Inarching may be described as a sort of layering, by the common or slit 
process, in which the talus or heel intended to throw out fibres, instead of being inserted 
in the soil, is inserted in the wood, or between the wood and bark of another plant, so as 
to incorporate with it. It evidently depends on the same general principles as layering ; 
and all the difference is, that the granulated matter which exudes between the bark and 
the wood of the talus or heel, instead of throwing out fibres, unites with the wood of the 
stock or plant to which it is attached, forming a solid ligneous union, which, when the 
layer or shoot is separated from the mother plant, supplies it with nourishment as the 
fibres do the common layer. It is the most certain mode of propagation with plants 
difficult to excite to a disposition for rooting ; and when all other modes fail, this, when 
a proper description of stock or basis is to be found, is sure to succeed. Professor 
Thouin (Coiirs Complet Agriculture, &c. art. Greffe) has enumerated thirty-seven 
varieties of inarching ; but they may all be reduced to two, crown inarching, in which 
the head of the stock is cut off {Jig. 378. a), and side inarching {b and c), in which the 
head of the stock is left on. With young hardy trees, the first mode is reckoned the 
best, as the whole effort of the stock is thereby directed to the nourishment of tlie 
inarched shoot ; the other is resorted to in propagating delicate trees, and for filling up 
blanks in branches, and other purposes. 

2008. Preparatory measures. The stocks designed to be inarched, and the tree from 
which the layer or shoot is to be bent or arched towards them, and put in or united, must 
be placed if in pots, or planted if in the open soil, near together. Hardy trees of free- 
growing kinds should have a circle of stocks planted round them every year in the same 
circumference, every other one being inarched the one year, and when removed, their 
place supplied by others, so that there will always be, by this practice, stocks of one year's 
standing ready to receive the shoot. If the branches of tlie tree are too high for stocks 
in the ground, they should be planted in pots, and elevated on posts or stands, or sup- 
ported from the tree, &c. 



378 




2009. Manipulation. Having made one of the most convenient branches or shoots 
approach the stock, mark on the body of the shoot the part where it will most easily join 
to the stock ; and in that part of each shoot pare away the bark and part of the wood two 
or three inches in length, and in the same manner pare the stock in the proper place for 
the junction of the shoot ; next make a slit upwards in that part of the branch or shoot, as 
in layering, so as to form a heel, but more of a tongue shape than in layering, and make 
a slit downward in the stock to admit it. Let the parts be then joined, slipping the 
tongue of the shoot into the slit of the stock, making both join in an exact manner, and 
tie them closely together with bass. Cover the whole afterwards with a due quantity of 
tempered or grafting clay or moss. In hot-houses, care must be taken not to disturb the 
pots containing the plants operated on. 

2010. Seasons for the operation. Inarching, like layering, is commonly ^(^orwterf m 



Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY GRAFTING. 



391 



sjrring, and in general cases, the union is effected in four or five months, when the layer 
or inarched shoot may be separated from the mother plant. This must be done with a 
very steady hand, so as not to loosen or break out the adhering shoot, sloping it off down- 
wards, close to the stock ; and if the head of the stock was not cut down at the time of 
inarching, it must now be cut off in a sloping direction close to the union ; and all the 
old clay and bandage cleared away and replaced with new, to remain a few weeks longer 
till the adhesion is complete, when it may be finally removed. In some cases, however, 
the inarched shoot requires to remain two years, during the whole of which period, it 
should be carefully covered to exclude the air from the wounds ; nor must the binding be 
removed more than once during that period for fear of disturbing the cicatrising parts. 

2011. Inm-ching a branch or shoot on the same tree (Jig' 378. b) is frequently a very 
convenient mode of filling up vacancies in trees ; in which case it is generally performed 
without heading down. Knight adopted this practice on a peach-tree, for a very in- 
genious purpose, that of procuring returning or concocted sap to swell and ripen the fruit. 
" In the last season (1812), a peach-tree in my garden, of which I was very anxious to 
see the fruit, had lost, by the severity of the weather, all its blossoms, except two, which 
grew upon leafless branches : I was very desirous to preserve these, as well as to ascertain 
the cause why the peach and nectarine, under such circumstances, fail to acquire maturity. 
The most probable cause, according to my hypothesis, appeared to be the want of return- 
ing sap (which the leaves, if existing, would have afforded}, and the consequent morbid 
state of the branch ; I therefore endeavoured to derive the necessary portion of returning 
sap from another source. To obtain this object, the points of the branches, which bore 
fruit, were brought into contact with other branches of the same age that bore leaves ; and 
a part of their bark, extending in length about four times their diameters, was pared off 
immediately above the fruit. Similar wounds were then made upon the other branches, 
with which these were brought into contact ; and the wounded surfaces were closely 
fitted ; and tightly bound together. An union soon took place ; and the fruit, apparently 
in consequence of it, acquired the highest state of maturity and perfection." Inarching,! 
like grafting, may be applied to various curious and useful purposes (c, d). Harte men- 
tions that the hornbeam-hedges, in some parts of the Netherlands, were worked in the 
lozenge foi-m (rf), and tha/: by removing the bark at each intersection, the whole had be-' 
come united as if one tree. Some curious examples of inarching and grafting combined, 
are to be seen in the Jardin des Flantes. 

2012. Inarching herbaceous vegetables may, in almost all solid or sub-solid stalked 
plants, whether annual or of longer duration, be performed with equal certainty as 
in ligneous kinds. The vine of the cucumber may be inarched on that of the gourd,' 
the love-apple on the potatoe, &c. (Baron Tschoudi. ) 

SuBSECT. 4. Propagation by Grafting. 
■ 2013. Grafting is a mode of propagation applicable to most sorts of trees and shrubs ; 
but not easily to very small under-shrubs, as heath or herbaceous vegetables. It is chiefly 
used for continuing varieties of fruit-trees. A grafted tree consists of two parts, the scion 
and the stock ; their union constitutes the graft, and the performance of the operation is 
called grafting. The scion is a part of the living vegetable, which, united or inserted in 
a stock or other vegetable of the same nature, identifies itself with it, and grows there as 
on its natural stem and roots. 

2014. The end of grafting is, 1st. To conserve and multiply varieties and subvarieties 
of fruit-trees, endowed accidentally or otherwise with particular qualities, which cannot 
be with certainty transferred to their offspring by seeds, and which would be multiplied 
too slowly, or ineffectually, by any other mode of propagation. 2. To accelerate the 
fructification of trees, barren as well as fruit-bearing ; for example, suppose two acorns 
of a new species of oak, received from a distant country ; sow both, and after they have 
grown one or two years, cut one of them over, and graft the part cut off on a common 
oak of five or six years' growth ; the consequence will be that the whole nourishment of 
this young tree of five years' growth being directed towards nourishing the scion of one 
or two years', it will grow much faster, and consequently arrive at perfection much sooner 
than its fellow, or its own root left in the ground. A French author found the advantage 
of this practice in the case of a new species of ash, to be as five to one in point of height. 
(Cours Complet d' Agriculture, &c. art. Greffe.) The third use of grafting is to improve 
the quality of fruits ; the fourth to perpetuate varieties of ornamental trees or shrubs ; 
and the fifth to change the sorts of fruit on any one tree and renew its fruitfulness. 

2015. The tJieory of grafting may be reduced to the following particulars : — 

201 6. To graft or unite only varieties of the same species ; species of the same genus ; and 
by extension, genera of the same natural family. Unless this union of natures be attended 
to, success will not attend the operation. 

2017. To observe the analogies ^ trees, as to the periods of the movement of their sap ; 
in the permanence or deciduous duration of their leaves j and the qualities of the juices of 

C c 4 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



their fruits, in order to estimate the probable advantage of grafting a fruit of any parti- 
cular flavor on another of similar or different qualities. 

201 8. To unite exactly the inner barh of the scion with the inner bark of the stock in order 
to facilitate the free course of the sap. 

2019. To make choice of the j)roj)er season, and perform the operation with celerity. 

2020. Any scion will not succeed on ajiy stock. Professor Thouin observes, that the 
historians and poets of antiquity have written, and the moderns repeated on the faith of 
others, that every scion will take on any sort of stock, provided there be a resemblance in 
their barks. Thus Pliny, Varro, Columella, &c. speak of apples and vines grafted on 
elms and poplars ; and Evelyn mentions, that he saw a rose grafted on an orange-tree in 
Holland. The ancients acknowledged, however, that such grafts were but of very short 
duration. " The result of numerous experiments which we have made," observes the 
professor, " proves that if any one of these grafts seems at first to succeed, they all perish 
more or less promptly." 

2021. Certain species of trees, and certain varieties of fruits, take more easily on some 
stocks than on others. Sometimes the cause is known, and at other times we are ignorant 
of it. Thus the platanus-leaved maple will not receive the scions of any species of its 
genus ; the reason of which may perhaps be deduced from its milky sap, which indicates 
an organisation different from its congeners. In like manner, the common walnut takes 
with difficulty on the late walnut ; because the times of the motion of their sap do not 
coincide. But why certain varieties of pear succeed better on the quince than on the 
seedling, and others better on the seedling than on the quince, cannot so easily be ac- 
counted for. Such anomalies are frequent, and make part of the practical science of 
gardeners ; of so much the more importance, because less subjected to general laws. 
(Cours Complet, &c. art. Greffe.) 

2022. Grafting may be 2^srformed on all herbaceous vegetables ivith solid stems. The 
dahlia roots are frequently grafted in this country, and sometimes the stems are grafted 
or inarched. Baron Tsclioudi at Strasbourg, and other physiologists at Paris, have 
grafted melons on cucumbers, love-apples on potatoes, cauliflowers on cabbages, &c. and 
made other similar unions with perfect success. Many of them are detailed in £ssai sur 
la Greffe de V Herbe, &c. by the Baron Tschoudi, 1819. 

2023. Graftitig may be performed with the current yearns shoot, or ivith shoots of sevei'al 
years' growth. This is evident from the general principles of the art, as well as from ex- 
perience. Knight, the Baron Tschoudi, and others, have grafted young shoots in leaf ; 
and Professor Van Mons, at Brussels, has grafted an entire tree, 1 5 feet high, on the stump 
of another of similar diameter. (A^eill, in Horticidtural Tour, 310.) 

2024. Influence of the stock. The stock does not change the character of the species of 
tree, which may be grafted on it ; nor even that of the variety, if the connection between 
the stock and scion is intimate : but by a particular choice of stocks, the tree is often mo- 
dified differently in the dimensions of its parts ; in its general aspect ; in the flavor and 
size of its fruit, though perhaps in a very slight degree j and in the duration of its ex- 
istence. ' 

2025. The nature of the fruit is to a certain extent affected by the nature of the stock. 
Miller says decidedly, " that crab-stocks cause apples to be firmer, to keep longer, and 
to have a sharper flavor ; and he is equally confident, that if the breaking pears be grafted 
on quince-stocks, the fruit is rendered gritty or stony, while the melting pears are much 
improved by such stocks. This, according to Neill, is scarcely to be considered as incon- 
sistent with Lord Bacon's doctrine, ' that the scion overruleth the graft quite, the stock 
being passive only ;' which, as a general proposition, remains true ; it being evident, that 
the scion, bud, or inarched shoot is endowed with the power of drawing or forming 
from the stock that peculiar kind of nourishment which is adapted to its nature, and that 
the specific characters of the ingrafted plant remain unchanged, although its qualities may 
be partially affected. " {Ed. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2026. Friiitfulness and precocity produced by grafting. The effects produced upon the 
growth and produce of a tree by grafting. Knight observes, " are similar to those which 
occur v/hcn the descent of tiae sap is impeded by a ligature, or by the destruction of a 
circle of bark. The disposition in young trees to produce and nourish blossom-buds and 
fruit, is increased by this apparent obstruction of the descending sap ; and the fruit of 
such young trees ripens, I think, somewhat earlier than upon other young trees of the 
same age, which grow upon stocks of their own species ; but the growth and vigor of the 
tree, and its power to nourish a succession of heavy crops are diminished apparently by 
the stagnation in the branches and stock of a portion of that sap, which, in a tree grow- 
ing upon its own stem, or upon a stock of its own species, would descend to nourish and 
promote the extension of the roots, The practice, therefore, of grafting the pear-tree 
on the quince-stock, and the peach and apricot on the plum, where extensive growtJi 
and durability are wanted, is wrong ; but it is eligible whenever it is wished to diminisli 
the vigor and growth of the tree, and %vhei-e its durability is not thought important." 



Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY GRAFTING. 



393 



He adds, " When great difficulty is found in making a tree, whether fructiferous or 
ornamental, produce blossoms, or in making its blossoms set, when produced, sucoess 
will probably be obtained in almost all cases, by budding or grafting upon a stock 
which is nearly enough allied to the graft to preserve it alive for a few years, but not 
permanently. The pear-tree affords a stock of this kind to the apple ; and I have obtained 
a heavy crop of apples from a graft which had been inserted in a tall pear-stock, only 
twenty months previously, in a season when every blossom of the same variety of fruit in 
the orchard was destroyed by frost. The fruit thus obtained was externally perfect, and 
jDOssessed all its ordinaiy qualities ; but the cores were black, and without a single seed ; 
and every blossom had certainly fallen abortively, if it had been growing upon its native 
stock. The experienced gardener will readily anticipate the fate of the scion ; it perished 
in the following winter. The stock, in such cases as the preceding, promotes, in propor- 
tion to its length, the early bearing and early death of the graft." 

2027. Species and varieties of grafting. The chief modern writers on grafting are, 
Quintiney, Du Hamel , Rosier, and Professor Thouin, among the French ; Mayer, Die- 
derich, Christ, and Sickler, among the Germans ; Ciarici and P. Re, among the Italians ; 
and Miller, Curtis, and Knight, among the English.. Professor Thouin has refined so 
much on the subject, as to have produced or enumerated above forty modes of grafting, 
besides a great many kinds of budding and inarching, named chiefly after eminent an- 
cient and modern botanists and gardeners, as Pliny, Virgil, Quintiney, Miller, Adanson, 
&c. Most of these are, however, varieties of the ordinary species, and separated by such 
slender shades of difference, or so remotely connected vv'ith utility (as the Greffe Banks), 
that they do not appear of sufficient importance for admission here ; and we shall, there- 
fore, chiefly describe such varieties as have been long known and practised ; which form 
the basis of all the others ; and which every individual may vai-y according to his taste. 
The reader who would enquire further into the subject, may consult Curtis's Lectures on 
Botany, vol. iii. and Nouveau Cours Complet (V Agriculture, &c. torn. xvi. art. Greffe. 
. 2028. IFhip-grafting {fig. 379. a), 379 
or, as it is sometimes called, tongue- 
grafting, is the most generally adopted 
in nurseries for propagating fruit- 
trees. To effect this mode in the best 
style, it is desirable, that the top of 
the stock, and the extremity of the 
scions should be nearly of equal dia- 
meter. Hence this variety admits of 
being performed on smaller stocks 
than any other. It is called whip- 
grafting, from the method of cutting 
the stock and scions, sloping on one 
side so as to fit each other, and thus 
tied together in the manner of a vv'hip- 
thong to the shaft or handle. The 
scion and stock being cut off obliquely 
at con-esponding angles, as near as the operator can guess, then cut off the tip of the stock 
obliquely or nearly horizontally ; make novv^ a slit nearly in the centre of the sloped face 
of the stock downv/ards, and a similar one in the scion upwards. The tongue or wedge- 
like process, forming the upper part of the sloping face of the scion, is then inserted down- 
wards in the cleft of the stock ; the inner barks of both being brought closely to unite on 
one side so as not to be displaced in tying, which ought to be done immediately with a 
riband of bass, brought, in a neat manner, several times round the stock, and which is 
generally done from right to left, or in the course of the sun. The next operation is to 
clay the whole over an inch thick on every side, from about half an inch or more below 
the bottom of the graft, to an inch over the top of the stock, finishing the whole coat of 
clay in a kind of oval globular form, closing it effectually about the scion and every part, 
so as no light, wet, nor wind may penetrate ; to prevent which is the whole intention of 
claying. It may be added, that the whip-grafting of Lawson, and other old horticultural 
writers, was then practised without a tongue, which addition gave rise to the latter term. 
The French mode of whip-grafting differs from the English in their never paring more 
off the stock, however large, than the width of the scion {fig. 380. e,f, g). In both modes, 
the stock is sometimes not shortened down to the graft, but a few inches left to serve as a 
prop to tie the shoots proceeding from the scion ; or even to admit of fastening the liga- 
tures used in the operation more securely. In either case, if the graft has succeeded, this 
appendage is cut off at the end of the season. 

2029. Cleft-grafting {fig. 379.. 6) is resorted to in the case of strong stocks, or in head- 
ing down and re-grafting old trees. " The head of the stock or branch (which we may 
suppose to be two or three inches in diameter) is first cut ofi' obliquely, and then the 




f 

f 



394 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II, 




a b c d e f g h 



sloped part is cut over horizontally near the middle of the slope ; a cleft nearly two inches 
long is made with a stout knife or chisel in the crown downwards, at right angles to the 
sloped part, taking care not to divide the pith. This cleft is kept open by the knife. 
The scion has its extremity for about an inch and half, cut into the form of a wedge, it is 
left about the eighth of an inch thicker on the outer or back side, and brought to a fine 
edge on the inside. It is then inserted into the opening prepared for it ; and the knife 
being vrithdrawn, the stock closes firmly upon it." If it be intended to graft any pretty 
large stocks or branches by this method, two or more scions may be inserted in each. The 
stock being prepared by cutting over as above, cleave it across in two places parallel and 
at a small distance apart, and insert a scion in each cleft : or by cutting or sawing the 
head off horizontally, and smoothing the section, a radiated series of clefts may be made, 
and sciorrs inserted in each. 

2030. Crown-grafting is another mode adopted for thick stocks, shortened branches, or 
headed down trees. It is sometimes called grafting in the bark or rind, frdm the scion 
being inserted between the bark and wood. This mode of grafting is performed with 
best effect, somewhat later than the others, as the motion of the sap renders the bark and 
wood of the stock much more easily separated for the admission of the scions. In per- 
forming the operation, first cut or saw off the head of the stock or branch, horizontally or 
level, and pare the top smooth ; then having the scions, cut one side of each flat and some- 
what sloping, an inch and half long, forming a sort of shoulder at the top of the slope, to 
rest upon the crown of the stock ; and then raise the rind of the stock with the ivory 
wedge, forming the handle of the budding-knife {Jig' HO.) ; so as to admit the scion be- 
tween that and the wood two inches down ; which done, place the scion with the cut side 
next the wood, thrusting it down far enough for the shoulder to rest upon the top of the 
stock ; and in this manner may be put three, four, five, or more scions, in one large stock 
or branch. It is alleged as a disadvantage attending this method in exposed situations, 
that the ingrafted shoots for two or three years are liable to be blown out of the stock by 
violent winds ; the only remedy for which is tying long rods to the body of the stock or 
branch, and tying up each scion and its shoots to one of the rods. 

2031. Side-grafting {Jig. 379. c) resembles whip or tongue grafting, but differs in 
being performed on the side of the stock without bending down. It is practised on wall 
trees to fill up vacancies, and sometimes in order to have a variety of fruits upon the 
same tree. Having fixed upon those parts of the branches where wood is wanting to 
furnish the head or any part of the tree, there slope off the bark and a little of the wood, 
and cut the lower end of the scions to fit the part as near as possible, then join them to 
the branch, tie them with bass, and clay them over. 

2032. Saddle-grafting is performed by first cutting the top of the stock into a wedge- 
like form, and then splitting up the end of the scion and thinning off each half to a 
tongue shape ; it is then placed on the wedge, embracing it on each side, and the inner 
barks are made to join on one side of the stock, as in cleft-grafting. This is a very 
strong and handsome mode for standard-trees when grafted at the standard-height. It is 
also desirable for orange-trees, and rose-standards, as it makes a handsome finish, covering 
a part of the stock, which by the other methods, long remains a black scar, and some- 
times never becomes covered with bark. The stocks for this purpose should not be much 
thicker than the scions, or two scions may be inserted. 

203S. A local variety of saddle-grafting {Jig' 379. d, e, f) is thus described by Knight, as 
practised upon small stocks, and almost exclusively in Herefordshire. It is never at- 
tempted till the usual season of grafting is passed, and till the bark is readily detached from 
the alburnum. Tlie head of the stock is then taken off by a single stroke of the knife 
obliquely, so that the incision commences about a diameter below the point where the me- 



Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY GRAFTING. 



S95 



dulla appears in the section of the stock, and ends as much above it, upon the opposite 
side. The scion, which should not exceed in diameter half that of the stock, is then to be 
divided longitudinally, about two inches upwards from its lower end, into two unequal 
divisions, by passing the kni-fe upwards just in contact with one side of the medulla. 
The stronger division of the scion is then to be pared thin at its lower extremity, and in- 
troduced, as in crown-grafting, between the bark and wood of the stock ; and the more 
slender division is fitted to the stock upon the opposite side. The scion consequently 
stands astride the stock, to which it attaches itself firmly upon each side, and which it 
covers completely in a single season. Grafts of the apple and pear rarely ever fail in 
this method of grafting, which may be practised with equal success with young wood in 
July, as soon as that has become moderately firm and mature. 381 

2034. A subvariety of saddle-grafting (fig. 381.), applicable 
to very slender shoots, is practised by Knight, who gives the 
rationale and manipulation in his usual masterly manner. As Mm 
this mode has rarely " or never been properly executed, it will \M 
be necessary that I describe the motion of the sap as I conceive iM 
it to be, at the period when grafts are most advantageously in- H 
serted. The graft first begins its efforts to unite itself to the | » 
stock just at the period when the formation of a new internal |rijj 
layer of bark commences in the spring ; and the fluid, which 
generates this layer of bark, and which also feeds the inserted H 
graft, radiates in every direction from the vicinity of the me- Wm 
dulla, to the external surface of the alburnum. The graft is of Ira 
course most advantageously placed when it presents the largest 
surface to receive such fluid, and when the fluid itself is made to Vm 
deviate least from its natural course. This takes place most Ira 
eflSciently, when a graft of nearly equal size with the stock is 
divided at its base and made to stand astride the stock, and |'| 
when the two divisions of the graft are pared extremely thin, at 
and near their lower extremities, so that they may be brought 
into close contact with the stock (from which but little bark or «1» 
wood should be pared off) by the ligature. I have adopted this 
mode chiefly in grafting cherry-trees, and I have rarely ever seen 
a graft fail, even where the wood has been so succulent and immature as to preclude 
every hope of success by any other mode." (Hort. Trans, v. 147.) 

2035. Shoulder, or chink-grafting, is performed with a shoulder, and sometimes also 
with a stay at the bottom of the slope. It is chiefly used for ornamental trees, where the 
scion and stock are of the same size (fig. 380. a, b, c, d). 

2036. Root-grafting (fig. 380. h) is sometimes performed in nurseries on parts of 
the roots of removed trees, when the proper stocks are scarce ; and in which case, the 
root of the white thorn has been resorted to as a stock both for the apple and pear. In 
general, however, a piece of the root of the tree of the same genus is selected, well fur- 
nished with fibres, and a scion placed on it in any of the ordinary ways for small stocks. 
Thus united, they are planted so deep as to cover the ball of clay, and leave only a few 
eyes of the scion above ground. Some gardeners have thought, that in this way, the 
plant must preserve a near resemblance to the parent tree ; but Abercrombie remarks, 
that though it is an expeditious way of obtaining a new plant, such a graft cannot be 
materially different from a cutting or layer. 

2037. j4 variety of root-grafting, practised by Knight, is thus described. " Trans- 
planting, many years ago, some pear-stocks from a seed-bed, of which the soil was soft 
and deep, I found that the first emitted roots of many of them descended a foot or more 
perpendicularly into the earth, before they divided into any lateral ramifications : and as 
I did not like to replant the young trees, with such an inconvenient length of perpendi- 
cular root, I cut off about six inches from each. The amputated parts were then accu- 
rately fitted and bound, as in splice or whip-grafting, to scions of pear-trees, which were 
selected as nearly as possible of the same size ; and the roots, with their attached branches, 
were deposited in the ground as cuttings, so deep, that the whole of the root, and about 
an inch of the scion, were covered. • The soil was then drawn up with the hoe on each 
side of the plants, which were placed in row«, so that one bud only of each graft was 
above the soil, and another just within it. These grafts succeeded perfectly well ; and I 
have subsequently repeated the same experiment with equal success upon the apple, the 
plum, and the peach. In the greater part of these experiments, the roots were perfectly 
cleansed from mould by washing, before they were fitted to the graft, and were then 
placed in wet moss, till a sufficient number were ready to be carried to the nursery ; a 
common dibber only was employed in planting them ; but the mould was washed into 
the holes wdth water, to close it well round the roots, and to supply the place of the clay 
used mother methods of grafting." (Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 239.) A variation of this 




396 ' SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



mode, consists in leaving that part of the tap-root not wanted with the removed tree undis- 
turbed in the soil, and grafting on it there. Such root-grafts grow with uncommon vigor. 

2038. Terebration, or jjeg-grafting {fig. 380. i), is an old method, in which the stock 
being cut off horizontally, a hole was bored in the centre of it j and the scion being se- 
lected to fit the stock, Avithin an inch and a half of its lower end, a circular incision was 
made, and the part between that and the end reduced, so as to fit the hole in the stock. 
This peg filling the hole was supposed to secure the graft from the effect of the winds. 

2039. Future treatment. In a month after grafting, it may be ascertained whether the 
scion has united with the stock, by observing the progress of its buds ; but, in general, it 
is not safe to remove the clay for three months or more, till the graft be completely cica- 
trised. The clay may generally be taken off in July or August, and at the same time 
the ligatures loosened where the scion seems to require more room to expand ; a few 
weeks afterwards, when the parts have been thus partially inured to the air, and when 
there is no danger of the scion being blovra off by winds, the whole of the ligatures may 
be removed. If the stock was not shortened down close to the graft or junction of the 
scion with the stock at the time of performing the operation, it may be done now, or as 
soon as the ligatures can be entirely dispensed with. In particular cases, a ligature 
round the graft, or a stake, or other prop, for the shoots of the scion, may be necessary 
for a year to come, to protect against winds ; or a bandage of moss kept over the graft, 
to preserve moisture, and encourage the expansion of the parts, and complete filling up 
of the wound. 

2040. Choice and treatment of stocks. The stocks on which the operation of grafting is 
performed, are most commonly the stems of young trees, raised from the seed, or from 
suckers, layers, or cuttings, reared for that purpose. For what are called dwarf-trees, 
tlie stock at the time of grafting must always be headed down within a few inches of the 
ground for the insertion of the scion ; and for standards, the heading of the stock for the 
insertion of the scion may either be near the gi-ound, the scion inserted accordingly, and 
one of the first shoots from it trained up to form a stem, or the scion inserted at the pro- 
per height. But if, as is the case with standard chenies, the stock is intended to form 
the stem, then it must be suffered to grow six or seven feet high, and be afterwards 
headed down at five or six feet for the reception of the scion. The French and Americans 
graft and bud their stocks much higher than is practised in Britain, which some consider 
to contribute to the durability of the tree. J. Wilmot is of opinion, that, by the oppo- 
site practice, the whole of the wild or proper stock, in garden-grounds where the soil is 
continually raised by manure, becomes buried in the soil, and reduced to a mere root, 
and then, he says, the tree begins to decline in vigor, and soon decays and dies. {Hart. 
Trans, vol. i. p. 215.) 

2041. The species of stocks for fndt-trees are diwidiedi into axe cs\\Qdi free-growing 
and dwarfing stocks. Tlie free-growing are such as naturally attain the full height of the 
species to be grafted on them, as the seedlings of the common apple, common pear, plum, 
and cherry. The dwarfing stocks are such as naturally form much smaller trees than 
the sorts to be grafted on them, and therefore have a tendency to diminish the magnitude 
of the adopted sorts ; as the paradise, doucin, and creeper, for apples ; the qumce, for 
pears ; bullace, for plums ; and perfumed, and wild red cherry, for cherries. 

2042. The species of stocks for timber and ornamental trees is generally some hardy spe- 
cies or variety of the same genus ; often, however, plants of a different genus, but of the 
same family, will answer. This, as already observed (2021.), is partly a matter of 
theory, and partly of experience. 

2043. Scions are generally tlie young shoots of last summer's growth, and should be 
chosen from the outside lateral branches of healthy trees. The outside lateral branches 
are preferred, because in them the shoots are not so robust and apt to run to wood as in 
the centre and top of the tree, nor so weak as those which are at its base, and under the shade 
and drip of the rest. Such shoots are uniformly found to be the best bearers, and to pro- 
duce the truest specimen of the fruit of the tree on which they grow. An exception to this 
rule is to be found in the case of debilitated trees, where, of course, the scions should be 
taken from the strongest shoots in the centre of the tree. The middle part of each shoot 
makes always the best scion, for the same reasons as those given for choosing the shoots 
from the middle part of the tree ; but long shoots, and especially where the scion is of a 
rare variety, may be cut into several scions of four or six inches in length, reserving not 
fewer than two, nor more than five eyes, to form the future head of the tree. 

2044. Preparation of scions. Scions should be gathered several weeks before the sea- 
son for grafting arrives ; the reason is, that experience has shown that grafting may 
most successfully be pei-formed, by allowing the stock to have some advantage over the 
graft in forwardness of vegetation. It is desirable that the sap of the stock should be in 
brisk motion at the time of grafting ; but by this time the buds of the scion, if left on 
the parent tree, would be equally advanced ; whereas the scions, being gathered early, 
the buds are kept back, and ready only to swell out when placed on the stock. Scions 



Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY BUDDING. 



397 



of pears, plums, and cherries are collected in the end of January, or beginning of Fe- 
bruary. They are kept at full length, sunk in dry earth, and out of the reach of frost 
till wanted, which is sometimes from the middle of February to the middle of March. 
Scions of apples are collected any time in February, and put on from the middle to the 
end of March. In July grafting (2033.), the scions are used as gathered. 

2045. The materials used in grafting are, a strong pruning-knife for cutting off the 
heads of the stocks previous to their preparation by the grafting-knife for the scion ; a 
small saw for large stocks ; and a penknife for very small scions ; a chisel and mallet 
for cleft-grafting ; bass-ribands as ligatures ; and grafting-clay. 

2046. Grafting-clay is prepared either from stiff yellow or blue clay, or from clayey 
loam or brick-earth ; in either case, adding thereto about a fourth part of fresh horse- 
dung, free from litter, and a portion of cut hay, mixing the whole well together, and 
adding a little water ; then let the whole be well beaten with a stick upon a floor, or other 
hard substance ; and as it becomes too dry ajDply more water, at every beating turning 
it over ; and continuing beating it well at top till it becomes flat and soft. This process 
must be repeated, more or less, according as the nature of the clay may require to render 
it ductile, and yet not so tough as to be apt to crack in dry weather ; for instance;> it 
should be several times beaten the first day ; and next morning repeat the beating, still 
moistening it with water, and by thus repeating the beating several times every day for 
two or three days, or every other day at least, for a week, it will be in proper order for 
use ; observing that it should be prepared a week at least before it is used ; but if a month, 
the better, keeping it moist. Some recommend salt to be mixed with the clay, and ethers 
ashes or lime-rubbish, or drift-sand ; tlie object in these cases being to prevent its crack- 
ing with the sun ; which, however, the horse-droppings, if well incorporated, will in 
general fully prevent. 

2047. The grafUng-clay of the French and Dutch, Onguent de St. Fiacre (St. Fiacre 
being the patron saint of gardening), is composed of half cow-dung, free from litter, and 
half fresh loam, intimately incorporated. They prefer this to all others for exclud- 
ing the external air from wounds of every description, and ridicule the idea of certain 
complex compositions. Bosc (iV". C. d' Ag. &c. tom. v. art. Englumen) observes of a 
noted English composition for healing wounds, that it is so " complicated and ridiculous 
in the eyes of those who have any knowledge of chemistry or natural philosophy, that it is 
a matter of astonishment how it could be proposed in our age." 

2048. Substitutes for grafting-clay. Abercrombie and various authors mention resinous 
substitutes for clay, the details of which are given in the first edition of Miller's Diet. 
These substitutes are recommended for small and delicate trees, as camellias, daphnes, &c. 
and are composed of wax and pitch, pitch and tallow, tallow and oil, or a compound of 
turpentine, bees'-wax, and rosin, at first melted together, and afterwards heated as wanted ; 
care being taken not to apply it too hot. A coating laid on with a brush, to the depth of 
a quarter of an inch, is said to be less liable to crack than clay ; and it is added, that when 
the full heat of summer arrives, the composition melts away of its own accord. This last 
circumstance, we must confess, appears a sufficient argument against its use, since its re- 
moval must depend on the weather, and not on the state of the graft. We have seen its 
use in Italy attended by such consequences. D. Powel, Esq. spreads it on shreds of brown 
paper; wraps these round the graft, and over them some bass ties. (Hort. Trans, v. 282.) 

2049. The use of comjwsitionsfor covering grafts is threefold; 1st. To prevent the extra- 
vasation of the sap from the wounds ; 2d. The too sudden drying of the wood ; and, od. 
The introduction of rain-water in the wound or cleft. It is evident, therefore, that what- 
ever sort of clay or coating is adopted, much will depend on its immediate application, 
and instantaneous repair in future, wherever it cracks or falls off. In addition to 
claying, some nurserymen cover the clay with a coating of moss, to preserve a moderate 
degree of moisture and tenacity ; and others, in the case"^of dwarf-trees grafted close to 
the ground, earth up the grafts for the same purpose. These practices suit particular 
cases, but are not generally necessary. Earthing up is one of the best accompaniments 
to claying, and should seldom be omitted when it can be adopted. 

SuBSECT. 5. Propagation by Budding. 
' 2050. Budding, or grafting by gems, consists, in ligneous plants, in taking an eye or bud 
attached to a portion of the bark, of different sizes and forms, and generally called a shield, 
and transporting it to a place in another, or a different ligneous vegetable. In herbaceous 
vegetables the same operation may be performed, but with less success. It may also be 
performed with buds of two or three years' standing, and on trees of considerable size, but 
not generally so. The object in view in budding is almost always that of grafting, and 
depends on the same principle ; all the difference between a bud and a scion being, that 
a bud is a shoot, or scion, in embryo. In all other respects, budding is conducted on the 
same principles as grafting. 

205 1 . A new application of budding has been made by Knight. It is that of transferring 



398 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



" a part of the abundant blossom-buds from one tree to the barren branches of others." 
He tried this first on roses, and afterwards on the pear and peach, with much success. In 
this way also he considers that fruit might be produced on yearling trees, not as matter of 
utility (as in supplying barren trees with blossom-buds), but as a curious experiment. 

2052. Advantages of budding. Budded trees are generally two years later in producing 
their fruit than grafted ones ; but the advantage of budding is, that where a tree is rare, 
a new plant can be got from every eye, whereas by grafting it can only be got from every 
three or four eyes. There are also trees which propagate much more readily by budding 
than grafting ; and others, as most of the stone-fruits, are apt to throw out gum when 
grafted. When grafting has been omitted or has failed in spring, budding comes in as an 
auxiliary in summer. 

2053. Season of budding. Tlie operation of common budding is performed any time 
from the beginning of July to the middle of August ; the criterion being the formation 
of the buds in the axillae of the leaf of the present year. The buds are known to be ready 
by the shield or portion of bark, to which they are attached, easily parting with the wood. 
The buds preferred are generally those on the middle of a young shoot, as being neither 
so apt to run to wood as those at the extremity, nor so apt to lie dormant as those at the 
lower end. In some cases, however, the buds from the middle and extremity of the shoots 
are to be rejected, and those taken which are at the base of the annual shoots, as Knight 
(Hart. Trans, vol. iii. 135.) found in the case of the walnut-tree. Scalope-budding may 
be performed in spring, or at any season. 

2054. Stocks for budding may, in general, be much smaller than for grafting, as the 
operation may be performed on the same year's shoot. But it may also be performed on 
shoots or stems of several years' growth, and in such, by inserting a number of buds, a 
complete tree may be formed at once. Scalope-budding may be performed on trees of 
considerable age. 

2055. Choice of buds. For gathering the shoots containing the buds, a cloudy day or 
an early or late hour is chosen, on this principle, that the leaves being at these periods 
in a less active state of perspiration, suffer least from being separated from their parent 
plant. They are preserved fresh, and may be sent a great distance by inserting their ends 
in water or moist moss ; though, in general, they should be used as soon after gathering 
as possible ; indeed, as in grafting and inarching, the whole operation ought to be per- 
formed with the greatest celerity. 

2056. Kinds <f budding. Professor Thouin enumerates twenty-three species and va- 
rieties of budding ; but we shall here describe only foiu-, of which but Que variety is in 
general use in Britain. 

2057. Shield-budding, or T budding (fg. 382.) is thus performed : — 382 
Fix on a smooth part on the side of the stock, rather from than towards 
the sun, and of a height depending, as in grafting, on whether dwarf, 
half, or whole standard-trees are desired ; then, with the budding-knife, 
make a horizontal cut across the rind, quite through to the firm wood ; 
from the middle of this transverse cut, make a slit downward, perpendi- 
cularly, an inch or more long, going ?ilso quite through to the wood. 
This done, proceed with all expedition to take off a bud ; holding the 
cutting, or scion, in one hand, with the thickest end outward, and with 
the knife in the other hand, enter it about half an inch or more below 
a bud, cutting near half way into the wood of the shoot, continuing it 
with one clean slanting cut, about half an inch or more above the bud, 
so deep as to take oflP part of the wood along with it, the whole about 
an inch and a half long {fg. 382. a) ; then directly with the thumb 
and finger. Or point of the knife, slip off the woody part remaining to 
the bud ; which done, observe whether the eye or gem of the bud re- 
mains perfect ; if not, and a little hole appears in that part, it is improper, or as gardeners 
express it, the bud has lost its root, and another must be prepared. This done, placing 
the back part of the bud or shield between your lips, expeditiously with the flat haft of 
the knife separate the bark of the stock on each side of the perpendicular cut, clear to the 
wood (c), for the admission of the bud, which directly slip down, close between the wood 
and bark, to the bottom of the slit (d). The next operation is to cut off the top part of 
the shield (b) even with the horizontal first made cut, in order to let it completely into 
its place, and to join exactly the upper edge of the shield with the transverse cut, that tlie 
descending sap may immediately enter the bark of the shield, and protrude granulated 
matter between it and the wood, so as to effect a living union. The parts are now to be 
immediately bound round with a ligament of fresh bass (e), previously soaked in water, 
to render it pliable and tough, beginning a little below the bottom of the perpendicular 
slit, proceeding upward closely round every part, except just over the eye of the bud, and 
continue it a little above the horizontal cut, not too tight, but just sufficient to keep the 
whole close, and exclude the air, sun, and wet. 




Book IV. 



PROPAGATION BY CUTTINGS. 



S99 



2058. Shield-budding reversed, or reversed buddihg, differs from the former in having 
the transverse cut made at the bottom of tlie perpendicular slit, instead of at its top, and 
of course the shield is reversed in its position. This mode is represented as preferable to 
the other by such as contend that the sap rises in the bark equally with the wood ; but as 
this opinion is now generally considered as exploded, the first, or T mode, may justly be 
considered as the most scientific mode of budding. Professor Thouin describes shield- 
budding reversed under the name of Schnerwoogth. The advantages attending it, he says, 
are, that it is not easily drowned with sap or g-um ; and the disadvantages, that it often 
fails when there is a scarcity of sap. It is practised occasionally in the orange-nurseries 
near Genoa, as may be seen in the plants imported to this country. 

2059. Scalope-budding consists in paring a thin tongue-shaped section of bark from the 
side of the stock ; and in taking a similar section from the shoot of buds, in neither 
case removing the wood. The section or shield containing the bud is then laid on the 
corresponding scollop in the stock ; its upper edge exactly fitted, as in shield-budding, 
and at least one of its edges, as in whip-grafting. After this, it is tied in the usual 
way. The advantages of this mode are, that it can be performed when the wood and 
bark do not separate freely ; on trees having very stiff, thick, suberose barks, and at any 
season of the year. Its disadvantages are, that it requires longer time to perform the 
operation, and is less certain of success. The French gardeners often bud their roses in 
this manner in spring ; and if they fail, they have a second chance in July by using the 
common mode. 

2060. Budding with double ligatures is a mode invented by Knight, and described 
by him (Hort. Trans, vol. i. 194.) as " a new and expeditious mode of budding." The 
operations are performed in the manner first above described ; but instead of one liga- 
ture, two are applied, one above the bud inserted upon the transverse section through 
the bark ; the other, which had no farther oflSce than that of securing the bud, was 
applied below in the usual way. As soon as the buds had attached themselves, the 
lower ligatures were taken off ; but the others were suffered to remain. " The pas- 
sage of the sap upwards was in consequence mych obstructed, and the inserted buds 
began to vegetate strongly in July (being inserted in June) ; and when these had afforded 
shoots about four inches long, the remaining ligatures were taken off, to permit the ex- 
cess of sap to pass on ; and the young shoots were nailed to the wall. Being there pro- 
perly exposed to light, their wood ripened well, and afforded blossoms in the succeeding 
spring ; and these would," he adds, " no doubt, have afforded fruit j but that, leaving 
my residence, I removed my trees," &c. 

2061. Future treatment. In a fortnight at farthest after budding, such as have adhered 
may be known by their fresh appearance at the eye ; and in three weeks all those which 
have succeeded will be firmly united with the stock, and the parts being somewhat 
swelled in most species, the bandage must be loosened, and a week or two afterwards 
finally removed. The shield and bud now swell in common with the other parts of the 
stock ; and nothing more requires to be done till spring, when, just before the rising of 
the sap, they are to be headed down close to the bud, by an oblique cut, terminating 
about an eighth or a quarter of an inch above the shield. In some cases, however, as in 
grafting, a few inches of the stalk is left for the first season, and the young shoot tied to 
it for protection from the winds. 

2062. The instruments and materials for budding are merely the budding-knife 
{Jig.. 110.) and bass ligatures. 

SuBSECT. 6. Projyagation by Cuttings. 

2063. Propagation by cuttings has been long known, and is abundantly simple when 
applied to such free-growing hardy shrubs, as the willow [Jig. S83. a) or the gooseberry 
(6) ; but considered as the chief mode of propagating most of the ericeae, myrteae, pro- 




teaceae, &c. becomes one of the most delicate and difficult modes of continuing the 
species, and fifty years ago was an operation known to very few of even the first-rate 
gardeners. It may be considered, as to the choice of cuttings, their preparation, their 
insertion in the soil, and their future management. 



400 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



2064. In re&pect to the choice of cuttings, those branches of trees and shrubs which are 
tlirown out nearest the ground, and especially such as recb'ne, or nearly so, on the 
eeirth's surface, have always the most tendency to produce roots. Even the branches of 
resinous trees, which are extremely difficult to propagate by cuttings, when reclining 
on the ground, if accidentally, or otherwise, covered with earth in any part, will there 
often throw out roots, and the extremity of the lateral shoot will assume the character of a 
main stem, as may be sometimes seen in the lai'ch, spruce, and silver fir. Cuttings then 
are to be chosen from the side shoots of plants, rather than from their summits or main 
stems ; and the strength and health of side shoots being equal, those nearest the ground 
should be preferred. The proper time for taking cuttings from the mother plant 
is when the sap is in full motion, in order that, in returning by the bark, it may 
form a callus or protruding ring of granular substance, between the bark and wood 
whence the roots proceed. As this callus, or ring of spongy matter, is generally best 
formed in ripened wood, the cutting, when taken from the mother plant, should contain 
a part of the former year, or in plants which grow twice a year, of the wood of the 
former grov/th ; or in the case of plants which are continually growing, as most ever- 
green exotics, such wood as has begun to ripen, or assume a brownish color. This is 
the true principle of the choice of cuttings as to time ; but there are many sorts of trees, 
as willow, elder, &c. the cuttings of which will grow almost at any season, and even 
if removed from the mother plant in winter, when the sap is comparatively at rest. In 
these and other trees, the principle of life seems so strong, and so universally diffused 
over the vegetable, that very little care is requisite for tlieir propagation. Cuttings from 
herbaceous plants are chiefly chosen from the low growths, which do not indicate a 
tendency to blossom ; but they will also succeed in many cases, when taken from tlie 
flower-stems, and some rare sorts of florists' and border flowers, as the dalilia, rocket, 
cardinal-flower, scarlet lychnis, wallflower, 8cc. are so propagated. 

2065. The preparatioii of the cutting depends on, or is guided by this principle, that 
the jjower of protruding buds or roots resides chiefly, and in most cases entirely, at what 
are called joints, or at those parts whei-e leaves or buds already exist. Hence it is that 
cuttings ought always to be cut across, with the smoothest and soundest section possible, 
at an eye or joint. And as buds are in a more advanced state in wood somewhat ripened 
or fully formed, than in a state of formation, this section ought to be made in the wood 
of the growth of the preceding season ; or as it were in the point between the two 
growths. It is true, that there are many sorts of cuttings, which not only throw out 
roots from the ring of granulated matter, but also from the sides of every part of the 
stem inserted in the soil, whether old and large (c), or young and small {d, c), as 
willows, cuiTants, vines. See. ; but all plants which are difficult to root, as heaths {f), 
camellias, orange-trees, &c. will be found in the first instance, and for several years after 
propagation, to throw out roots only, from the ring of herbaceous matter above mentioned; 
and to facilitate the formation of this ring, by properly preparing the cuttings of even 
willows and currants, must be an obvious advantage. It is a common practice to cut off 
the whole or a part of tlie leaves of cuttings, which is always attended with bad tliects 
in evergreens, in wliich the leaves may be said to supply nourishment to the cutting till 
it can sustain itself. Tliis is very obvious in the case of striking from buds [g], 
which, without a leaf attached, speedily rot and die. Leaves alone, as in bryophyllum 
calycinum, will even strike root and form plants in some instances ; and the same, 
as Professor Thouin observes, may be stated of certain flowers and fruits. 

2066. Cuttings which are difficult to strike may be rendered more tractable by previous 
ringing ; if a ring be made on the shoot which is to furnish the cutting, a callus will 
be created, wliich, if inserted in the ground after the cutting is taken oflT, will freely emit 
roots. A ligature would perhaps operate in a similar manner, though not so efficiently ; 
it should lightly encircle the shoot destined for a cutting, and the latter should be taken 
off v.hen an accumulation of sap has apparently been produced. The amputation in 
the case of the ligature, as well as in that of the ring, must be made below the circles, 
and the cutting must be so planted as to have the callus covered with eartli. (^Hoi-t. 
Trans, vol. iv. 558.) 

2067. The insertion of the cuttings may seem an easy matter, and none but a practical 
cultivator would imagine that there could be any difference in the growth, between cut- 
tings inserted in the middle of a pot, and those inserted at its sides. Yet such is actually 
the case, and some sorts of trees, as the orange, ceratonia, &c. if inserted in a mere mass 
of earth, will hardly, if at all, throw out roots, while, if they are inserted in sand, or in 
earth at the sides of the pots, so as to touch the pot in their whole length, they seldom 
fail of becoming rooted plants. Knight found the mulberry strike very well by cuttings, 
when they were so inserted, and when their lower ends touched a stratum of gravel or 
broken pots ; and Hawkins, {^Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 12.) who had often tried to strike 
orange-trees, without success, at last heard of a method (long known to nurserpnen, 
but which was re-discovered by Luscome), by which, at the first trial, eleven cuttings 



Book IV. ' SOWING, PLANTING, AND WATERING. 



401 



out of tliirteen grew. " The art is, to place them to touch tlie bottom of the pot ; (hey 
are then to be plunged in a bark or hot-bed, and kept moist. " 

2068. The management of cuttings after they are planted, depends on the general prin- 
ciple, that where life is weak, all excesses of exterior agency must have a tendency to 
render it extinct. No cutting requires to be planted deep, though such as are large 
(2) ought to be inserted deeper than such as are small (f, h). In the case of ever- 
greens, the leaves should be kept from touching the soil (h) otherwise they will damp 
or rot off ; and in the case of tubular-stalked plants, which are in general not very 
easily struck, owing to the water lodging in the tube, and rotting the cutting, both ends 
(/) may in some cases (as in common honeysuckle,) be advantageously inserted in the 
soil, and besides a greater certainty of success, two plants will be produced. Too much 
light, air, water, heat, or cold are alike injurious. To guard against these extremes in 
tender sorts, the means hitherto devised is tliat of enclosing an atmosphere over the cut- 
tings, by means of a hand or bell glass, according to their delicacy. This preserves a 
uniform stillness and moisture of atmosphere. Immersing tlie pot in earth (if tlie cut- 
tings are in pots) has a tendency to preserve a steady uniform degree of moisture at the 
roots ; and shading, or planting the cuttings, if in the open air, in a shady situation, 
prevents the bad effects of excess of light. The only method of regulating the heat is 
by double or single coverings of glass or mats, or both. A hand-glass placed over a 
bell-glass will preserve, in a shady situation, a very constant degree of heat. What the 
degree of heat ought to be, is generally decided by the degree of heat requisite for the 
mother plant. WTiatever degree of heat is natural to the mother plant when in a grow- 
ing state will, in general, be most favorable to the growth of the cuttings. There are, 
however, some variations, amounting nearly, but not quite, to exceptions. Most species 
of the erica, dahlia, and geranium strike better when supplied with rather more heat 
than is requisite for the growtli of these plants in green-houses. The myrtle tribe and 
camellias require rather less and in general it may be observed, that to give a lesser 
portion of heat, and of every thing else proper for plants in their rooted and growing 
state, is the safest conduct in respect to cuttings of ligneous plants. Cuttings of deci- 
duous hardy trees taken off in autumn should not, of course, be put into heat till spring, 
but should be kept dormant, like the mother tree. Cuttings of succulents like geraniums 
will do well both with ordinary and extraordinary heat. 

2069. Piping is a mode of propagation by cuttings, and is adopted with herbaceous plants 
having jointed tubular stems, as the dianthus tribe ; and several of the gi-asses, and tree 
arundos, might be propagated in this manner. When the shoot has nearly done growing, 
which generally happens after the blossom has expanded, its extremity is to be separated at a 
part of the stem where it is nearly, or at least somewhat indurated or ripened. This se- 
paration is effected by holding the root end between the finger and thumb of one hand, 
below a pair of leaves, and with the other, pulling the top part above die pair of leaves, 
so as to separate it from the root part of the stem at the socket formed by the axillae of 
the leaves, leaving the stem to remain with a tubular or pipe-looking termination. These 
pipings, or separated parts (k), are inserted without any further preparation in finely 
sifted earth, to the depth of the first joint or pipe, gently firmed with a small dibber, 
watered, a hand-glass placed over them, and their future management regulated on the 
same general principles as that of cuttings. 

Sect. III. Operations of Rearing and Culture. 

2070. Operations of rearing and cultivation are various, and some of them of the sim- 
plest kind, as stirring the soil, cutting, sawing, weeding, &c. have been already consi- 
dered as garden-labors on the soil and on plants (1862. & 1882.) ; we here, therefore, 
confine ourselves to the more complex processes of sowing, planting, watering, trans- 
planting, pruniiTg, thinning, training, and blanching. 

SuBSECT. 1. Sowing, Planting, and Watering. 

2071. Sowing is the first operation of rearing. Where seeds are deposited singly, as 
in rows of beans or large nuts, they are said to be planted ; where dropt in numbers to- 
getlaer, to be sown. The operation of sowing is either performed in drills, patches, or 
broad-cast. Drills are small excavations formed with the draw-hoe, generally in straight 
lines parallel to each other, and in depth and distance apart varying according to the 
size of the seeds and future plants. In these drills, the seeds are strewed from the hand 
of the operator, who, taking a small quantity in the palm of his hand and fingers, re- 
gulates its emission by the thumb. Some seeds are veiy thinly sown, as the pea and 
spinage ; others thick, as the cress and small salading. For sowing by bedding-in, see 
£eddi7ig-in planting , {2091.), and Cujfing. 5.) 

2072. Patches are small circular excavations made with the trowel ; in these, seeds 
are either sown or planted, thicker or thinner, and covered more or less, according to 

D d 



402 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



their natures. This is the mode adopted in sowing in pots, and generally in flower- 
borders. 

2073. In broad-cast sowing, the operator scatters the seed over a considerable breadth 
of surface previously prepared by digging or otherwise minutely pulverised. The seed 
is taken up in portions in the hand, and dispersed by a horizontal movement of the arm, 
to the extent of a semicircle, opening the hand at the same time, and scattering the seeds 
in the air, so as they may fall as equally as possible over the breadth taken in by the 
sower at once, and which is generally six feet ; that being the diameter of the circle in 
which liis hand moves through half the circumference. In sowing broad-cast on the 
surface of beds, and in narrow strips or borders, tlie seeds are dispersed between the 
thumb and fingers by horizontal movements of the hand in segments of smaller 
circles. 

2074. Dry weather is cssentialh/ requisite for sowing, and more especially for the oper- 
ation of covering in the seed, which in broad-cast sowing is done by treading or gently 
rolling the surface and then raking it ; and in drill-sowing, by treading in the larger 
seeds, as peas, and covering with the rake ; smaller seeds, sown in drills, are covered 
with the same implement without treading. 

2075. Planting, as applied to seeds, or seed-like roots, as potatoes, bulbs, &c. is most 
frequently performed in drills, or in separate holes made with the dibber ; in these, the 
seed or bulb is dropt from the hand, and covered with or without treading, according to 
its nature. Sometimes planting is performed in patches, as in pots or borders, in which 
case the trowel is the chief implement used. 

2076. Quincunx is a mode of planting in rows, by which the plants in the one row are 
always opposed to the blanks in the other, so that when a plot of ground is planted in 
this way, the plants appear in rows in four directions. 

2077. Planting, as applied to plants already originated, consists generally in inserting 
them in the soil of the same depth, and in the same position as they were before re- 
moval, but with various exceptions. The principal object is to preserve the fibrous roots 
entire, to distribute them equally around the stem among the mould or finer soil, and to 
preserve the plant upright. The plant should not be planted deeper than it stood in the 
soil before removal, and commonly the same side should be kept towards the sun. 
Planting should, as much as possible, be accompanied by abundant watering, in order to 
consolidate the soil about the roots ; and where the soil is dry, or not a stiff clay, it 
may be performed in the beginning of wet w^eather in gardens ; and in forest-planting, 
on dry soils, in all open weather during autumn, winter, and spring. 

2078. IVatering becomes requisite in gardens for various purposes, as aliment to plants 
in a grovdng state, as support to newly transplanted plants, for keeping under insects, 
and keeping clean the leaves of vegetables. One general rule must he ever kept in mind 
during the employment of water in a garden ; that is, never to water the top or leaves of 
a plant when the sun shines. A moment's reflection will convince any one that this 
rule is agreeable to the laws of nature, for during rain the sun's rays are intercepted by 
a panoply of fog or clouds. All watering, therefore, should be carried on in the even- 
ing or early in the morning, unless it be confined to watering the roots, in which case, 
transplanted plants, and others in a growing state, may be watered at any time ; and if 
they are shaded from tlie sun, they may also be watered over their tops. Watering over 
the tops is performed with the rose, or dispenser attached to the spout of the watering-pot, 
or by the syringe or engine. Watering the roots is best done with the rose ; but in the 
case of watering pots in haste, and where the earth is hardened, it is done with the naked 
spout. The compartments of gardens are sometimes watered by a leather tube and muzzle 
attached at pleasure to different pipes of supply ; but this depends on local circumstances, 
and, in general, it may be observed that the great increase of labor occasioned by 
watering compartments renders the practice very limited. In new-laid turf, or lawns of a 
loose porous soil and too mossy surface, the water-barrel {Jig- 205.) may be advantage- 
ously used. 

SuBSECT. 2. Transplanting. 

2079. Transplanting is the next operation of rearing, and consists in removing propa- 
gated plants, whether from seeds, cuttings, or grafts, according to their kinds and other 
circumstances, to a situation prepared to receive them. The uses of transplanting lig- 
neous plants are chiefly to increase the number of fibrous roots, so as to prepare or fit 
young subjects for successful removal from the places where they are originated to their 
final destination ; but in herbaceous vegetables it is partly used to increase the propor- 
tion of fibrous roots in plants, relatively to their ramose roots, by which it is found the 
size and succulency of their leaves, flowers, and fruit are increased. Transplanting 
involves three things : first, the preparation of the soil to which the plant is to be 
removed ; secondly, the removal of the plant ; and, thirdly, tlie insertion in the pre- 
pared soil. 



Book IV. 



TRANSPLANTING. 



403 



2080. The preparation of the soil implies, in all cases, stirring, loosening, mining, and 
comminution ; and, in many cases, the addition of manure or compost, according to the 
nature of the sdil and plant to be inserted, and according as the same may be in the open 
ground, or in pots or hot-houses. 

2081. The removal of the plant is generally effected by loosening the earth around it, 
and then drawing it out of the soil with the hand j in all cases avoiding as much as pos- 
sible to break, or bruise, or otherwise injure the roots. In the case of small seedling 
plants, merely inserting the spade and raising the portion of earth in which they grow 
will suffice ; but in removing larger plants, it is necessary to dig a trench round, or on one 
side of the plant. In some cases, the plant may be lifted with a ball or mass of earth, 
containing all or great part of its roots, by means of the trowel or transplanter {fig. 93.) ; 
and in others, as in the case of large shrubs or trees, it may be necessary to cut the roots 
at a certain distance from the plant, one year before removal, in order to furnish them 
with young fibres, to enable them to support the change. In pots, less care is necessary, 
as the roots and ball of earth containing them are, or may be, preserved entire. 

2082. Inserting the i^einoved jylant in the prepared soil, is performed by making an ex- 
cavation suitable to the size of the plant, with the dibber, trowel, or spade, placing the 
plant in it to the same depth as before its removal, and then covering its roots with earth 
firmly, but not harshly or indiscriminately, pressed to it ; lastly, adding water. There 
are various modes of insertion according to the age and kind of plant, tools employed, 
object in view, &c. of which the following are the principal species and varieties. 

2083. Of sj)ade planting there are a variety of different sorts, known by the names of 
hole planting, trench planting, trenching-in planting, slit or crevice planting, holing-in 
planting, drill planting, bedding-in planting, furi'ow planting, &c. All these modes are 
almost peculiar to nursery gardening. 

2084. Hole planting is the principal method practised in the final planting of all sorts of trees and 
shrubs in the open ground; and is performed by opening round holes for the reception of each 
plant somewhat larger than its roots, then inserting the plant according to the general principles of 
planting. (2077.) 

2085. Trench planting is practised in nurseries, in planting out seedlings of trees, and plants in rows, also 
for box-edgings, small hedge-plants, asparagus, &c. It is performed by opening a long narrow trench with 
a spade, making one side upright, placing the plants against the upright side, and turning in the earth 
upon their roots. 

2086. Trenching-in planting is practised in light pliable-working ground, for planting young trees in 
nurseries, thom-nedges, &c. It is performed by digging a trench one spit wide, by a line, and planting 
from one end of the trench towards the other, as the trench is being dug. Thus, the line being set and 
the plants ready, with your spade begin at one end, and standing sideways to the line, throw out a spit 
or two of earth, which forming a small aperture, another person being ready with the plants, let hiia 
directly insert one in the opening, whilst the digger proceeds with the digging, and covers the roots of the 
plants with the earth of the next spit Another aperture being thereby also formed, place therein another 
plant, and so on. 

2087. Another 7netkod of trenching-in planting sometimes used for planting certain roots, such as horse- 
radish-sets, potatoes, &c. is performed by common trenching, placing a row of sets in each trench or fur- 
row. The horse-radish should be planted in the bottom of the open trench, if not above twelve inches 
deep, turning the earth of the next over them ; and the potatoe-sets placed about four or six inches deep, 
and cover them also with the earth of the next trench. 

2088. Slit planting. This method is performed by making slits or crevices with a spade in the ground, 
at particular distances, for the reception of small trees and shrub-plants. It is practised sometimes in the 
nursery, in putting out rows of small plants, suckers, &c. from about a foot or eighteen inches or two feet 
high, and that have but small roots : it is also sometimes practised where very large tracts of forest-tree^ 
are to be planted by the most expeditious and cheapest mode of performance ; the following is the method : 
— Aline is set or a mark made accordingly ; then having a quantity of plants ready, for they must be 
planted as you proceed in making the slits, let a man, having a good clean spade strike it into the ground 
with its back close to the line or mark, taking it out again directly, so as to leave the slit open : he thfen 
gives another stroke at right angles with the first ; then the person with the plants inserts one immediately 
into the second-made crevice, bringing it up to the line or mark, and directly pressing the earth close to 
the plant with his foot ; proceed in the same manner to insert another plant, and so on. A man and a boy, 
by this method, wiU plant ten or fifteen hundred, or more, in a day. 

2089. Holing-in planting. This is sometimes used in the nursery in hght loose ground; and some- 
times in planting potatoes, &c. in pliable soils. The ground being previously digged or tren^fted, and a 
line placed, proceed thus : — Let one man, with his spade, take out a small spit of earth, and the hole so 
formed let another person directly deposit a plant ; ihen let the digger take another spit 3<a little distance, 
and turn the earth thereof into the first hole over the roots; then placing directly another plant in this 
second opening, let the digger cover it with the earth of a third, and so on. 

2090. DrUl planting. This is by drawing drUls with a hoe, ^om two to four or five 
inches deep, for the reception of seeds and roots, and is a commodious method of planting 
many sorts of large seeds, such as walnuts, chestnuts, &c ; sometimes also broad beans, 
but always kidneybeans and peas : likewise of planning many sorts of bulbous roots, 
when to be deposited in beds by themselves. The drills for all of these purposes should 
be drawn with a common hoe, two or three inches deep, though, for large kinds of bul- 
bous roots, four or five inches deep will be requisite, and the seeds and roots should al- 
ways be covered the depth of the drills. 

2091. Bedding-in planting. This i=5 frequently practised for planting the choicer kinds 
of flowering buds, such as hyacintJis, &c. ; also for larger seeds of trees ; as acorns, large 
nuts, and other kinds of seeds, stones, and kernels, and is performed by drawing the earth 
from off the tops of the beds, some inches in depth, in the manner of cuffing, then plant- 
ing the seeds or roots, and covering them over with the earth, drawn off for that purpose. 

D d 2 



404 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



The follo^ving is the mode of performance : — The ground must be previously digged or 
trenched, raked, and formed into beds three or four feet wide, with alleys between bed 
and bed ; then with a rake or spade, trim the earth evenly from off the top of the bed into 
the alleys, from two or three to four inches deep for bulbous roots, and for seeds, one or 
two inches, according to what they are, and their size ; then, if for bulbous roots, draw lines 
along the surface of the bed, nine inches' distance, and place the roots, bottom downward, 
along the lines, six or eight inches apart, thrusting the bottom into the earth. Having 
thus planted one bed, then with the spade, let the earth that was drawn off into the alley 
be spread evenly upon the bed again, over the roots or seeds, being careful that they are 
covered all equally of the above depth, and rake the surface smooth. This method is also 
practised in nurseries, for sowing such seeds as require great accuracy in covering, as the 
larch, pine, and fir tribes ; and, indeed, for most other tree-seeds. 

2092. Fwrow planting. This is by drawing furrows with a plough, and depositing 
sets or plants in the furrow, covering them in also with the plough. It is sometimes 
practised for planting potatoe-sets in fields, and has been practised in planting young trees, 
for large tracts of forest-tree plantations, where the cheapest and most expeditious method 
was required ; but it can only be practised advantageously in light pliable ground. It 
is thus performed : a fuiTOw being drawn, one or two persons are employed in placing 
the sets or plants in the furrow, whilst the plough following immediately with another 
furrow, turns the earth thereof in upon the roots of the plants. 

2093. Dibble planting. This is the most commodious method for planting most sorts 
of fibrous-rooted seedling plants, slips, ofF-sets, and cuttings both of herbaceous and 
shrubby kinds ; and likewise for some kinds of seeds and roots, such as broad beans, po- 
tatoe-sets, Jerusalem artichokes, and horseradish-sets, bulbous roots, &c. It is expedi- 
tiously performed with a dibble or setting-stick ; therewith making a narrow hole in the 
earth for each plant or root, inserting one in each hole as you go on, &c. 

2094. Troivel planting. This is performed with a garden -trowel, which being made 
hollow like a scoop, is useful in transplanting many sorts of young fibrous-rooted plants 
with balls of eaith about their roots, so as they may not be checked by their removal. 

2095. Planting uith balls. By removing a plant with its roots firmly attached to a 
surrounding ball of earth, it continues in a growing state, without receiving any, or but 
very little check from its removal. This mode is often practised, more particularly with the 
more delicate and choicer kinds of exotics, both trees, shrubs, and herbaceous plants ; and 
occasionally to many of the fibrous-rooted flowery plants, both annuals and perennials, 
even in their advanced groAN-th and flowering state, when particularly wanted to supply 
any deficient compartments, or when intended to remove any sort of tree or plant out of 
the proper planting season, as very late in spring, or in summer. The most diflScult 
tribe of plants to transplant, when in a growing state, are bulbous roots ; which succeed 
with difficulty, even when removed with balls attached. 

2096. Planting by mudding-in {dnschlamen) is a German practice in planting fruit- 
trees, particularly suitable to the dry sandy soils of that country, and sometimes adopted 
in similar situations in this countr)\ The pit being dug out, the mould in its bottom is 
watered and stiiTed so as to form a mass of mud about half the depth of the pit ; the tree 
is then inserted, and its roots worked up and down in the mud so as to spread them as 
much as possible equally through it. More mud, previously prepared, is poured in till 
the pit is full, which is then covered with dry earth, raised round the stem, but hollowed 
in the middle, so as to form a basin round its stem, and finally covered with litter {mul- 
ched), and, if a standard, it is fastened to a stake to protect it from vidnds. Diel, a 
scientific German author already mentioned (224.), assures his readers, that trees planted 
in thisi way in spring thrive better in cold situations than those planted in the ordinary 
way in the preceding autumn ; and, that though it occasions considerable trouble, it should 
never be neglected either in spring or autum^. He found it also particularly useful in 
the case of planting fruit-trees in pots. {^Obst. Orangerie, &c. vol. ii.) Pontey, alluding 
to this mode, says ■■' planting in a puddle occasions the soil speedily to firm, not only 
too hard for the roots of the plant to spread, but also so far as perfectly to exclude water." 
{Rural Improver, p. 89.) 

2097. Planting by Juring uitJi water is an excellent variety of the last species. It has 
been successfully practised by Pontey, and is thus described by him : — The hole 
being made, and the tree placed it in the usual manner, the root is then slightly 
covered vsdth the finer part of the soil ; ^l^e tree being at the same time shaken, as is com- 
mon, to settle the earth among its roots. Water is then applied by a common garden 
Watering-pot, by pouring it upon the soil with some force, in order to wash it close to 
and among the roots of the plant. But this can only be done effectually by elevating the 
pot as higli in the hands as can be conveniently used, after first taking oft' the rose. It 
will be obvious, that for such purposes a large pan with a wide spout is to be preferred. 
The hole is then filled up with the remainder of the soil, and that again consolidated widi 
water as before, which usually finishes the business. The foot is never applied except in 



Book IV. 



TRANSPLANTING. 



405 



the case of bad roots, wlilch sometimes occasion the plants to be left a little leaning. In 
such cases, the application of the foot slightly, once or twice, after the soil has become 
somewhat firm (which generally happens in less than an hour), sets the tree upright, and 
so firm as to require no staking. [Rural Improver, p. 89.) 

2098. Panning, mulching, and staking. Panning is an almost obsolete phrase, applied 
by Switzer, and writers of his day, to the operation of forming a hollow or basin round 
trees, for the purpose of retaining water when given them by art. Mulching consists in 
laying a circle of litter round the roots of newly planted trees, to retain the natural humi- 
dity of the soil, or to prevent the evaporation of artificial watering. Staking is the oper- 
ation of supporting standard-trees, by tying them with straw, or other soft ties, to poles or 
stakes inserted firmly in the ground close to the tree. 

2099. Planting edgings. Edgings are rows of low-growing plants, as box, daisy, &c. 
planted in lines along the margins of walks and alleys, to separate them from the earth 
and gravel. They should always be planted before either the gravel or substratum are 
deposited. To perform the operation, the first thing is to form the surfaces for the edg- 
ings in planes corresponding with the established slopes or levels of the borders or other 
parts of the garden, observing, that a line crossing the walk at right angles, and touching 
both of the prepared surfaces, must always be a horizontal line, whether the walk be on a 
level or slope. Suppose a walk 150 feet long on a gentle declivity, and that the level or 
height of both ends are fixed on ; then by the operation of the borning-pieces, any num- 
ber of intermediate points is readily formed to the same slope, and the spaces between 
these points are regulated by the eye or the application of the straight-edge. The earth, 
so formed into a regular slope, need not exceed about a foot in breadth, on which the line 
being stretched, half is to be cut down, with a face sloping towards the walk, and against 
this sloping, or nearly perpendicular face, the box is to be laid as thin and regular as 
practicable, and every where to the same height, say one inch above the soil. The box 
is to be previously prepared by separation, and shortening the roots and tops. This is one 
of those operations, on the performance of which, with accuracy, depends much of the 
beauty of kitchen-gardens. 

2100. Planting verges. Verges are edgings of turf, generally two feet broad or up- 
wards. The turves being cut in regular laminae, with the edges or sides of each turf per- 
pendicular, and the two ends oblique in the same slope, they are to be placed so as the 
one may fit exactly to the other. They are next to be beat with the beetle, afterwards 
watered, and again beat or rolled, and finally a line applied to their edges, and the raser 
{fig. 101.) used to cut them off neatly and perpendicularly. If the turf is from loamy 
soil, this is readily effected ; but if no turf can be got but from sandy soils, then it must 
be cut very thin, and placed on good earth or loam, according to circumstances. Verges 
are sometimes, though rarely, formed of chamomile, strawberries, dwarf-thyme, &c. in 
which situations the wood-strawberry and chamomile produce abundant crops. 

2101. Transplanting or laying down turf. Turfing, as this operation is commonly called, 
consists in laying down turf on surfaces intended for lawn, in parterres or pleasure- 
grounds. The turf is cut from a smooth firm part of an old sheep -pasture, free from 
coarse grasses, in performing which the ground is first crossed by parallel lines, about a 
foot asunder, and afterwards intersected by others three feet asunder, both made with 
a line and the turf-raser. Afterwards, the turf-spade or turfing-iron is employed to 
separate the individual turves, which are rolled up, and conveyed to tfie spot where they 
are to be used. It is to be observed, that, in this case, all the sides of each turf are be- 
velled ; by which means, when they are laid down exactly as they were before being 
taken up, their edges will fit, and in some degree lap over each other, and thereby, after 
rolling, a more compact surface will be formed. The surface on which the turves are 
to be laid, ought previously to be either dug or trenched, so as to be brought to one de- 
gree of consistency, and then rolled, so as it may not afterwards sink ; the turves being 
laid so as to fit, are to be first beaten individually, and then watered and rolled till the 
whole is smooth and even. 

2102. In transplanting in pots, the general practice is to begin with the smallest-sized 
pot, and gradually to transplant into others larger, as the plant advances, and as the ob- 
ject may be to produce a large or a small plant. In the case of balsams and tender an- 
nuals, this may require to be performed three or four times a month, till the plant has 
attained its full size ; in the case of heaths, not more than once a year or seldomer. 

2103. The operation qf potting is thus performed. Having the pots and mould ready for the reception of 
the intended plants, observe, previous to planting them, to place some pieces of tile, potsherds, or oyster, 
shells, or gravel over the hole at the bottom of the pot, both to prevent the hole from being clogged and 
stopped with the earth, and the earth from being washed out with occasional watering ; and also to prevent 
tlie roots of the plants from getting out. Having secured the holes, place some earth in the bottom of 
each pot, from tv/o or three to five or six inches or more in depth, according to the size of the pot, and the 
roots of the plant. This done, insert the plant in the middle of the pot, upon the earth, in an upright 
position ; if without a ball of earth, spread its roots equally every way, and directly add a quantity of fine 
mould about all the roots and fibres, shaking the pot to cause the earth to settle close about them ; at the 
same time, if the roots stand too low, shake it gently up, as you shall see occasion j and having filled the 

D d 3 



406 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt II. 



l)Ot with earth, press ii gently all round with the hand to settle it motlerafecly Arm in every part, and to 
steady the upright posture of the plant, raising the earth, however, within about half an inch, or less, or 
the top of the pot. It will soon settle lower, and thereby leave a void space at top, which is necessary to 
receive occasional waterings. As soon as the plant is thus potted, give directly a moderate watering to 
settle the earth more effectually close about all the roots, and promote their shooting into the new earth j 
repeating the waterings as occasion requires. 

2104. Transplanting potted 2}lants from one pot to another is called shifting; and is 
performed with the -^vhole ball of earth contained in the pot entire, so as to preserve the 
plant in its growing state. 

2105. The method of removing them ant of the pots with balls is generally easily effected. Sometimes in small 
plants it is performed by turning the pot upside down, and striking the edge against the side of a bench, 
or edge of the boards of a wheelbarrow, or the like,-. when the ball comes out entire ; or occasionally a plant 
that is very well rooted, and whose numerous fibres surround the outside of the ball, will readily quit 
the pot by drawing it by the stem. But if, by either of the above methods, the ball will not readily 
quit the pot, thrust a narrow thin slip of wood down all round the pot, when the ball will come 
out by the process of striking the edge of the pot, with the greatest facility. Sometimes, however, the 
bellied form of the pot, and the luxuriance of the roots which circulate between the pot and earth, pre- 
vent the possibility of removing the ball entire; in which case, either that circumstance must be dispensed 
with, or the pot be broken. 

2106. In replanting in larger pots, the first step regards the management of the numerous fibres which sur- 
round the outside ball. When these are not numerous, the general practice is to leave them untouched ; 
but when they are so abundant as to form a sort of matted coat, like the inside of a bird's nest aU around, 
then the practice is to trim the greater part of them off close to the ball, both on the sides and bottom, 
together with some of the outward old earth of the ball ; then having the pots of proper sizes, larger than 
the former ones, and having secured the holes at bottom, and put in some fresh compost, deposit the plant 
with its entire ball in the pot, taking care that it stands in the centre, erect, and of the same depth as 
before. Then fill up all the interstices round the ball with fresh mould, pressing it down, and ramming it 

"round the sides with a broad stick, adding more mould gradually, and raising it so as to cover the old ball, 
and finish with a moderate watering, to settle the new earth close in every part. Hayward has sug- 
gested the idea of a moveable bottom for more readily shifting potted plants with matted roots ; and we 
have already (1412.) describetl the orange-boxes used at Versailles, and by Mean at Wormsleybur)', by 
which fresh earth can be put to the sides of the largest plants with little trouble. 

2107. Transplanting iviih balls is to he avoided in the case of diseased plants, unless it be evident that the 
disease has no connection with the ball of earth and the roots. Very frequently, however, the diseases of 
plants in pots arise from the want of a proper vent for the water, and from their having had too much 
given them ; hence in transplanting such plants, it is eligible to shake the whole entirely out of the earth, 
in order to examine its roots, and trim off all decayed and other bad parts ; then having a fresh pot, and 
some entire new compost, replant as already directed. 

2108. In potting plants from the open ground, or beds of earth on dung, or otherwise, if they have been 
previously pricked out at certain distances, and have stood long enough to fix their roots firmly, they 
may be moved into pots with balls, by the proper use of the trowel, transplanter, or hollow spade. Seed- 
lings, however, cannot often be raised with balls, and are therefore planted in the smallest-sized pots first, 
and gradually removed into larger ones with their balls entire. 

2109. Plants in pots are never shifted directly from small into large pots, but always into a size only one 
gradation larger than that in which they are. Experience proves that this is the best mode, and also that 
plants, in general, thrive best in small pots. The reason seems to be that, in large pots, the roots are apt 
to be chilled and rotted by the retention of more water than is requisite for their wellbeing. 

SuBSECT. 3; Pruning. 
2110. The amjndation of part of a plant ivith the knife, or other instrument, is practised 
for various piirposes, but chiefly on trees, and more especially on those of the fruit-bear- 
ing kinds. Of two adjoining and equal-sized branches of the same tree, if the one be cut 
off, that remaining will profit by the sap which would have nourished the other, and both 
the leaves and the fruits which it may produce will exceed their natural size. If part of 
a branch be cut off which would have carried a number of fruits, tliose which remain Avill 
set, or fix better, and become larger. On the observation of these facts is founded the 
whole theory of pruning ; which, though like many other operations of art, cannot be 
said to exist veiy obviously in nature, is yet the most essential of all operations for the 
culture of fruit-trees. 

2111. The objects of prtini7ig may he reduced to the following : promoting growth and bulTc ; lessening 
bulk ; modifying form ; promoting the formation of blossom-buds ; enlarging fruit ; adjusting the stem 
and branches to the roots ; renewal of decayed plants or trees ; and removal or cure of diseases. 

2112. Pi umng for promoting the growth and bulk of a tree is the simplest object of pruning, and is 
that chiefly which is employed by nursery-men with young trees of every description. The art is to cut 
off all the weak lateral shoots, that the portion of sap destined for their nourishment maybe thrown into 
the strong ones. In some cases, besides cutting off the weak shoots, the strong ones are shortened, in 
order to produce three or four shoots instead of one. In general, mere bulk being the object, upright 
shoots are encouraged rather than lateral ones ; excepting in the case of trained trees, where shoots are 
encouraged at all angles, from the horizontal to the perpendicular, but more especially at the medium of 
45 degrees. In old trees, this object is greatly promoted by the removal, with the proper instruments, of 
the desftl or already scaling off outer bark. 

2113. Pruning for lessening the bulk of the free is also chiefly confined to nursery-practice, as neces- 
sary to keep unsold trees of a portable size. It consists in httle more than what is technically called 
heading down, that is cutting off the leading shoots within an inch or two of the main stem, leaving, in 
some cases, some of the lower lateral shoots. Care is taken to cut to a leaf-bud (1885.), and to choose such 
from among the side, upper, or under buds of the shoot according as the succeeding year's shoots may 
be wanted,, in radiated lines from the stem, or in oblique lines in some places to fill up vacancies. It 
is ewclcnt that this unnatural operation persisted in for a few years must render the tree knotty and 
unsiglitly, and in stone-fruits, at least, it is apt to generate canker and gum. 

2114. Pruning for modifying the form of the tree embraces the management of the plant from the 
time of its propagation. Almost every tree has a different natural form, and in botanic and landscape 
gardening it is seldom desirable to attempt altering these by pruning, or by any other operation. But in 
rearing trees planted for timber, it is desirable to throw the timber produced, as much as possible, into 
long compact masses ; and hence pruning is employed to remove the side branches, and encourage (he 
growth of the bole or stem. Where this operation is begun when the trees are young, it is easily performed 
every two or three yearsj^ and the progress of the trees under it is most satisfactory ; when, however, it i* 



Book IV. 



PRUNING. 



407 



delayed till they have attained a timber size, it is, in all cases, much less conducive to the desired en^, and 
sometimes may prove injurious. It is safer in such cases to shorten or lessen the size of lateral branches, 
rather than to cut them off close by the stem, as the large wounds produced by the latter practice either 
do not cicatrise at all, or not till the central part is rotten, and has contaminated the timber of the trunk. 
In all cases, a moderate number of small branches, to be taken off as they grow large, are to be left 
on the trunk, to facilitate the circulation of the sap and juices. Where timber-trees are planted for 
shelter or shade, unless intermixed with shrubs or copse, it is evident pruning must be directed to clothing 
them from the summit to the ground with side branches. In avenues and hedge-row trees, it is generally 
desirable that the lowest branches should be a considerable distance from the ground ; in trees intended 
to conceal objects, as many branches should be left as possible ; and in others, which conceal distant 
objects desired to be seen, or injure or conceal near objects, the form must be modified accordingly. In 
all these cases, the superfluous parts are to be cut off with a clean section, near a bud or shoot if a 
branch is shortened, or close to the trunk if it is entirely removed; the object being to facilitate 
cicatrisation. 

2115. Pmning fruit-trees. The grand art of pruning, not only as to the modification 
of form, but in all its other varieties, relates to fruit-trees, of vv^hich the leading characters 
are standards and w^all-trees ; the former including dwarfs and half-standards, and the 
latter, dwarfs and riders. 

2116- In jiruningto form standards (arbres a jylein-vent, Fr.), the first thing to be 
determined on after the plant has been received from the nursery and planted, is, whether 
the stem is to be tall (Jiaut'tige) or short (basse-tige) ; and the next, if the head is to be 
trained in any particular form, as a cone, globe, semi-globe, radiated pyramid, &c. ; or 
left to assume its natural shape. If a cone or pyramid is determined on, then a leading 
upright shoot must be carefully preserved, and the side shoots kept at regular distances 
from each other, and as far as practicable, equally extended on the one side of the main 
stem as on the other, keeping always in view the ultimate figure. If a globe is to be 
produced no shoot must be permitted to take the lead, but a number encouraged to ra- 
diate upwards from the graft, and these kept as regular as possible, both in regard to distance 
from each other, and of tlieir extremities from the centre of the globe. If the tree is to be 
left to its natural shape, which in our opinion is by far the best mode, it will, in the ap- 
ple, pear, cherry, and most other fruit-trees, assume something of the conical shape, at least 
for some years ; but whatever shape it has a tendency to assume, that shape must not be 
counteracted by the pruner, whose operations must be chiefly negative, or directed to thin- 
ning out weak and crowded shoots, and preserving an equal volume of branches on one 
side of the tree as on the other : in technical language, preserving its balance. Knight's 
directions for this mode of pruning, both in his Treatise on the Apjile and Pear, and in 
different papers in the Horticultural Transactions, are particularly valuable. For the apple 
and all standard trees he recommends that the points of the external branches should be 
every where rendered thin and pervious to the light ; so that the internal parts of the 
tree may not be wholly shaded by the external parts : the light should penetrate deeply 
into the tree on every side ; but not any where through it. When the pruner has 
judiciously executed his work, every part of the tree, internal as well as external, will 
be productive of fruit ; and the internal pai't, in unfavorable seasons, will rather receive 
protection than injury from the external. A tree thus pruned, will not only produce 
much more fruit, but will also be able to support a much heavier load of it, without 
danger of being broken ; for any given weight will depress the branch, not simply in 
proportion to its quantity, but in the compound proportion of its quantity and of its 
horizontal distance from the point of suspension, by a mode of action similar to that 
of the weight on the beam of the steelyard ; and hence a hundred and fifty pounds, 
suspended at one foot distance from the trunk, will depress the branch which supports it 
no more than ten pounds at fifteen feet distance would do. Every tree will, therefore, 
support a larger weight of fruit without danger of being broken, in proportion as the 
parts of such weight are made to approach nearer to its centre. Hitt recommends that 
the shape or figure of standards should be conical, like the natural growth of the fir- 
tree : and this form, or the pyramidal or sub-cylindrical {en quenouille, Fr.) is decidedly 
preferred by the French, and universally employed both by them and the Dutch. 

2117. I7i pruning to form dwarf-standards (basse-tiges, Fr.), the plants being received 
from the nursery, furnished with shoots of one year's growth, are to be cut down to three 
or four buds, which buds will throw out other shoots the following year, to form the 
bush or dwarf. If these buds throw out, during the second year, more than can grow 
the third year without crossing or intermixing with each other, then the superfluous 
shoots must be cut off ; but if too few to form a head regularly balanced, or projecting 
equally beyond the stem on all sides, then one or more of the shoots in tlie deficient part 
must be cut down to three or four eyes, as before, to fill up by shoots of the third year the 
vacancies in the bush. In this way must the tree be treated year after year, cutting 
away all cross-placed branches and crowded shoots, till at last it shall have formed a head 
or bush globular, oblong, or of any other shape, according to its nature, and with this 
property common to every form, that all the shoots be so far distant from each other as 
not to cjiclude the sun's rays, air, or rain, from the blossoms and fruit. Such is the 
u)ost approved modern mode of training fruit-tree bushes or dwarf-standards ; but, 

D d 4 



408 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Taut II. 



about a century ago, when dwarfs were in the greatest vogue, they were trained into re- 
gular geometrical shapes, without tlie least regard to the natural shape or tendency of the 
branches of the tree. In tlie works of Quintiney and Arnaud d'Andilly are described 
concave, conical, fusiform, spiral, and other dwarfs. 

2118. Cktncave or cup-shaped dwarfs (arbonjin boomen, Dut. ; eji gobelet or en tonnoiry 
Fr.), being trained concave or hollow in the middle, having all the branches ranged cir- 
cularly around the stem, in an ascending direction, so as to form the heart of the tree 
hollow or concave. 

2119. Conical or pyramidal dwarfs, tapering like a cone or pyramid from the base to tlie 
summit. When pyramidal trees are so pruned that the horizontal branches form stages 
above one another, they are termed chandelier-like, or en girandole. 

2120. Fusifoi~)n {en qnenouille, Fr.) or coiivex duKnfs, being trained, bellied out, or 
somewhat spindle-shaped in the middle, or like a full distaff. 

2121. Horizontal divarfs, in which all the branches were trained in a flat position, pa- 
rallel to the surface of tlie earth. 

2122. Spiml dtvarfs (Jig. 384.), in which the branches were trained spirally round stikes, 
which stakes were afterwards removed* 




2123. Fan-divarfs (pahnettes, Fr.) in which the branches were spread out like the 
hand, or like a spread fan. 

2124. Natural dwarfs or bushes (arbres en huisson, Tt.), in which the branches were 
permitted to advance in their natural mode of growth; being only thinned, or shortened, 
or deprived of supernumerary side shoots, as already described. 

21 25. Estimate of the forms ofdtcarfs. Some authors observe that all these forms may be 
introduced for the sake of variety ; but of all forms which require constraint, as being con- 
trary to the natural shape of the bush and tendency of the branches, it may with certainty 
be observed, that they can only be maintained by continual exertion in counteracting 
nature ; and that the trees so ccJnstrained and cut, generally throw out, at particular 
parts, such a superfluity of useless wood, as greatly to lessen their tendency to produce 
blossom-buds. Each variety of the apple-tree, observes Knight, " has its own peculiar 
form of growth, and this it will ultimately 
assume, in a considerable degree, in defi- 
ance of the art of the pruner." The same 
remark, it is obvious, applies to every sort 
of tree. 

21 2ff. Priming half standards is conducted 
exactly on the same general principles as 
pruning dwarfs ; the only difference between 
them being that, in the one case, the bush 
or head is close to the ground, and in the 
other, it is elevated from it three or four 
feet. Of the common hardy fruit-trees, it 
may be observed, that the apple, plum, 
quince, medlar, and mulberry form a forked 
irregular head {fig. 385. a), and the pear 
and cherry a more regular cone or distaff, 
with lateral branches proceeding from an 
upright stem {b). The French are particularly expert in pruning their pear-trees into 
this last form, assisted sometimes by a rod to train the central shoot. 

21 27. Crown or umbrella headed standards {kroo?i boomen, Dut. ) are a sort of l>alf-stand- 
ard,^ formed by the Dutch, and chiefly on dwarfing stocks. The stems ai-e"six or seven fevt 




Book IV. 



PRUNING. 



409 



liigh, and terminate In a few branches, which stretch" out on all sides horizontally : this 
position being given by inclining them downwards by ties. 

2128. Balloon-headed standard-trees have been formed by a mode of training adopted 
by J. Brookhouse, Esq. at Warwick. 

The trees are apples, six feet high in their stems, from the tops of which, the branches, which are of 
three or four years' growth, extend outwards, and nearly horizontally in all directions, from five to six 
feet from the centre. Round the tree, at about three feet from the stem, and at two feet from the ground, 
is placed a hoop, fastened to stakes, and towards this hoop the ends of the branches are directed by worsted 
cords fastened to their extremities, and to the hoop. The branches, by this means, assume a curved 
direction, straighter near to their origin in the centre, much arched afterwards, and having their ex- , 
tremities turned inwards. The average distance from the ground to the ends of the branches thus secured 
is about four feet. The general outline of the tree has much resemblance to that of a balloon, and the 
cords which are attached all round to the hoop in a slanting direction inwards, increase the similitude. 
After the fruit has been gathered, the fastenings are removed; in winter the trees are pruned, the 
upright shoots which have been made, are shortened to spurs, except where fresh branches are wanted 
to complete the uniformity and regularity of the whole ; and in spring the operation of tying is re- 
peated. Sabine observes on this mode, " It is scarcely possible to conceive a rov/ of trees in a garden 
more beautiful than one thus arranged, not only from the uniformity in size, and regularity of growth 
of the trees ; but from the beautiful display of blossoms and fruit in the different seasons, occasioned by 
this peculiar mode of training, which is calculated to exhibit the whole so perfectly. The advantages of 
the plan are many and important. The downward inclination given to the branches increases the dis- 
position to form blossom-buds, and consequently to produce more abundantly ; the foliage is well exposed 
to receive the influence of the light and air ; the fruit is uniformly distributed over the surface of the 
tree, and does not sufffer from being shaded by irregularly placed branches ; whilst the ligatures at tlie 
ends of the shoots keep the whole so steady, that they are never so agitated by wind as to lose their 
crop prematurely, nor do the bi-anches suffer like those of other trees, by lashing each other in strong 
gales of wind." {Hort. Trans, vol. v. 186.-) However fascinating this plan may appear at first sight, and 
for a few years while the trees are young, it is, like most of the French and Dutch modes of training just , 
described, radically bad, and certain of ultimately defeating the object in view. The main effort of trees 
so constrained will annually be directed to sending up upright shoots from the apex oT the balloon ; 
and though these may be " shortened to spurs" for a year or two, the spurs so formed will only bear 
shooti not blossoms, and will rapidly increase in size till they present only a deformed mass of knots 
sending up a crowd of shoots, and depriving the pendent branches of nourishment. Every gardener 
can foresee this. There is only one mode of training that nature approves of, and that is the fan 
mode. (2144.) 

2129. Pruning, for the modification of fruit-trees trained on walls {en espalier, Fr.) or 
on espaliers {en contre-espalier, Fr.), depends on the principle of training which may be 
adopted. The selection being made of such shoots as are requisite for carrying on the 
form of the training tree ; the others are to be cut off, first on the general principles re- 
commended for all cutting (1884.) ; and secondly, according to the particular nature of 
the tree. All trees which are much cut or constrained, have a tendency to throw out 
over-luxuriant shoots at particular parts of the branches where the sap is suddenly 
checked ; such shoots seem to employ the great body of the sap, and thus divert it from 
performing its functions in the other parts of the branch or tree. The largest of these 
shoots, the French term gourmands, or gluttons ; and the lesser ones, which have their 
leaves very distant and the wood slender, with hardly any appearance of buds in the 
axillae of the leaves, they term water-shoots. As soon, in the growing season, as the cha- 
racter of both these sorts of shoots, especially of the latter, is known, they ought to be 
pinched off, with the exception of some cases, at the discretion of an intelligent pruner, 
where the gourmand may fill up a vacancy, supply a decaying branch, or otherwise be so 
situated as to assist in forming the tree. This chiefly happens when they are thrown 
out on the sides of wall-trees, so as to admit of being checked by a horizontal or ob- 
lique position in training. What are called fore-right and back shoots, or such as are 
thrown out nearly at right angles to the training surface, ought to be rubbed or 
pinched off, as ill adapted for training, or being applied to the training surface ; but 
with the same exceptions as for gourmands. Where the grand object is fruit, however, 
it is well remarked by Marshall {Introd. to Gard.), "that in this matter, the end in view 
is not to be sacrificed to fanciful precision." 

2130. Pruning to promote the formation of blossom-buds depends on the nature of the 
tree. The peach and nectarine, for example, produce their blossoms on the preceding 
year's wood ; consequently the great art of pruning a peach-tree is to have a regular 
distribution of young wood over every part of it. This the tree has a natural tendency 
to effect itself, and all that is required from the pruner is, when these shoots are too 
abundant, to rub them off in the summer pruning, and where they are too few, to cut 
or shorten some of the least valuable branches or shoots in the winter pruning. In 
apples and pears, on the contrary, the blossoms are chiefly produced on short leafy 
protuberances, called spurs, which form themselves naturally along the sides of the 
shoots, chiefly of apples and pears, but also of plums, cherries, quinces, medlars, and 
to a certain degree, the apricot, which produces blossoms on last year's wood, and on 
spurs and small twigs from the shoots of the second year preceding. The production 
of bearing or blossom buds is sometimes promoted by cutting out weak wood, by 
which what remains is strengthened ; and shortening or stopping the shoots of the vine 
m summer is believed by many to have the same effect. The rose, syringa, spiraea frutex, 
and many shrubs, produce their blossoms in the wood of the present year, and to give 



410 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pari II. 



vigor to such plants, it is desirable, when blossoms are wanted in these shrubs, to cut 
down both old and new wood. 

2131. Pruning for the enlargement of the fruit is effected either by diminishing the 
number of blossom-bearing branches, or shortening them ; both which operations depend 
on the nature of the tree : the mode of shortening is particularly applicable to the vine, 
the raspberry, and to old kernel fruit-trees. 

2132. Pruning for adjusting the stem and branches to the roots is almost solely applica- 
ble to transplanted trees, in -which it is an essential operation ; and should be performed 
in general in the interval between removal and replanting, when the plant is entirely 
out of the ground. Supposing only the extremities of the fibres broken off, as is the 
case in very small plants and seedlings, then no part of the top will require to be re- 
moved ; but if the roots have been broken or bruised in any of their main branches or 
ramifications, then the pruner, estimating the quantity of root of which the plant is 
deprived by the sections of fracture and other circumstances, peculiar and general, will 
be able to form a notion of what was the bulk of the whole roots before the tree was 
undisturbed. Then he may state the question of lessening the top to adjust it to the 
roots thus : — As the whole quantity of roots which the tree had before removal is to the 
whole quantity of branches which it now has or had, so is the quantity of roots which it 
now has to the quantity of top which it ought to have. In selecting the shoots to be re- 
moved, regard must be had to the ultimate character the tree is to assume, whether a 
standard, or trained fruit-tree, or ornamental bush. In general, bearing-wood and weak 
shoots should be removed, and the stronger lateral and upright shoots, with leaf or shoot 
eyes, left. 

2133. Priming for reneival of the head is perfonned by cutting over the stem a little 
way, say its own thickness, above the collar or the surface of the ground. This practice 
appHes to old osier-beds, coppice- woods, and to young forest- trees. Sometimes also it is 
performed on old or ill-thriving fruit-trees, which are headed down to the top of their 
stems. This operation is performed vidth the saw, and better after scarification, as in 
cutting off the broken limb of an animal. The live section should be smootlied with the 
chisel or knife, "covered with the bark, and coated over with grafting clay, or any conve- 
nient composition which will resist drought and rain for a year. 

2134. Pruning for curing disease has acquired much celebrity since the time of For- 
syth, whose amputations and scarifications for the canker, together with the plaster or 
composition which he employed to protect the wounds from air, are treated of at large 
in his Treatise on Fruit Trees. Almost all vegetable diseases either have their origin in 
the weakness of the indi\ddual, or induce a degree of weakness ; hence to amputate a 
part of a diseased tree is to strengthen the remaining part, because the roots remaining of 
the same force, the same quantity of sap will be thrown upwards as when the head and 
branches were entire. If the disease is constitutional, or in the system, this practice 
may probably, in some cases, communicate to the tree so much strength as to enable it to 
throw it off ; if it be local, the amputation of the part will at once remove the disease, 
and strengthen the tree. 

For the removal of diseases, whole branches, the entire head, single shoots, or merely the diseased spot 
in the bark or wood, may require to be cut off In the removal of merely diseased spots, care must be 
taken to remove the who'le extent of the part affected with a part of the sound wood and bark ; and, in 
like manner, in amputating a diseased shoot or branch, a few inches or feet of healthy wood should be 
taken away at the same time, to make sure of removing every contamination. 

Insects may be removed, or at least prevented from spreading on trained trees, especially such as are 
in bouses, and on dwarf-trees, where the whole plant comes readily under ^Ije eye, either by cutting off, ~ 
in the summer season, the young shoots or the individual leaves on which the insects, as the coccus, 
aphis, acarus, &c. are found. This is frequently practised on gooseberry-plants, and Sir Brook Boothby 
{,Hort. Trans, vol. i.) asserts that he keeps his peach-frees free from the red spider by cutting off every 
leaf the moment he sees an insect on it 

2135. Pruning the roots of trees. What effect it would have on the roots of trees, if 
they could be exposed to view, and subjected to pruning and training, as well as the 
branches, it is not easy in many cases, to determine ; but where they are diseased, or 
growing on soil vrith an injurious substratum, could the pruning-knife be applied to their 
descending and diseased roots annually, the advantages would be considerable. The 
practice of laying bare the roots of trees to expose them to the frost, and render the tree 
fruitful, is mentioned by Evelyn and other writers of his time ; but in doing so, it does 
not appear that pruning was any part of their object. The pruning of roots can therefore 
only take place, according to the present state of things, in the interval between taking 
up and replanting ; as such roots are generally small, and some of them broken or in- 
jui-ed, all that the pruner has to do, is to facilitate the healing of the ends of broken roots 
by a more perfect amputation ; and in fruit-trees he may shorten such roots as have a 
tendency to strike too perpendicularly into the soil. The form of the cut in either case 
is a matter of less consequence than in the shoot ; but like it, it ought in general to be 
made from the under side of the shoot, that only one section may be fractured, and that 
the removed section may be the fractured one ; and also that ^vater or sap may rather de- 



Book IV. 



TRAINING. 



411 



scend from than adhere to the wound. The chief reason for this practice, however, is 
the facility of performing it, for a section directly across, as if made with a saw, will, in 
roots, heal as soon, if not sooner, than one made obliquely ; but to make such a section 
in even small roots would require several distinct cuts, whereas the oblique section is 
completed by a single operation. The Genoese gardeners, in pruning the roots of the 
orange-trees, always make a section directly across, which, in one year, is in great part 
covered by the protruding granulated matter. (See 1886). 

The roots of trees might be completely pruned, if done by degrees ; say that the roots extended in every 
direction in the form of a circle ; then take a portion, say one eighth, of that circle every year till it is 
completed; and remove the earth entirely from above and under the roots; then cut off the diseased 
parts, or those roots which penetrate into bad soil ; and laying below them such a stratum as shall be 
impenetrable by them in future, intermix and cover them with suitable soil. 

2136. Pruning herbaceous plants, or what is called trimming, consists generally in 
thinning the stems to increase the size and flowers of those which remain ; but it may 
also be performed for all the purposes before mentioned ; and for some other purposes, 
such as the prolongation of the lives of annuals by pinching off their blossoms, 
strengthening bulbous roots by the same means, increasing the lower leaves of the 
tobacco-plant by cutting over the stem a few inches above ground, &c. In trimming 
the roots of herbaceous plants, the same general principles are adopted as in pruning 
the roots of trees. In transplanting seedlings, the tap-root merely requires to be 
shortened ; and in most other cases merely bruised, diseased, or broken roots cut off, 
and fractured sections smoothed. 

2137. The seasons for pruning trees are generally winter and midsummer ; but some 
authors prefer spring, following the order of the vegetation of the different species and 
varieties. According to this principle, the first pruning of fruit-trees begins in Fe- 
bruary with the apricot, then the peach, afterwards the pears and plums, then the cher- 
ries, and lastly the apples, the sap of which is not properly in motion till April. Some 
have recommended the autumn and mid-winter ; but though this may be allowable in 
forest-trees, it is certainly injurious to tender trees of every sort, by drying and harden- 
ing a portion of wood close to the part cut, and hence the granulous matter does not so 
easily protrude between the bark and wood, as in the trees where those parts are fur- 
nished with sap. For all the operations of pruning, therefore, which are performed on 
the branches or shoots of trees, it would appear the period imanediately before, or com- 
mensurate with, the rising of the sap, is the best. 

2138. Summer pruning commences with the rubbing off of the buds, or disbudding, soon after they have 
begun to develope their leaves in April and May, and is continued during summer in pinching off or 
shortening such as are farther advanced. It is obviously, to a certain extent, guided by the same general 
rules as winter or general pruning ; but the great use of leaves in preparing the sap being considered, 
summer pruning wisely conducted will not extend farther than may be necessary to maintain as much as 
possible an equilibrium of sap among the branches ; to prevent gourmands and water-shoots from depriv- 
ing the fruit of their proper nourishment, and to admit sufficient air and light to the fruit. Most autliors 
are of opinion, that the other objects of pruning will be better effected by the winter operations. Summer 
pruning is chiefly applicable to fruit-trees, and among these to the peach ; but it is also practised on forest 
and ornamental trees when young, and is of great importance in giving a proper direction to the sap in 
newly grafted trees in the nursery. 

2139. Thinning the branches of individual trees may be considered as included 
in pruning. In herbaceous vegetables, or young trees growing together in quantities, 
it consists in removing all such as impede the others from attaining the desired bulk, 
form, or other properties for which they are specially cultivated, and is generally per- 
formed in connection with weeding or hoeing. 

SuBSECT. 4. Training. 

2140. By training is to be understood the conducting of the shoots of trees or plants 
over the surface of walls, espalier rails, trellises, or on any other flat surface. It is per- 
formed in a variety of ways, according to the kind of tree, the object in view, and the par- 
ticular opinions of gardeners. 

2141. The object of training is, either to induce a disposition to form flower-buds in rare 
and tender trees or plants ; to mature and improve the quality of fruits which would not 
otherwise ripen in the open air ; or to increase the quantity and precocity of the fruit of 
trees which mature their fruit in the open air. Such are the principal objects of training : 
which are effected by the shelter and exposure to the sun of the surface to which they are 
trained, by which more heat is produced, and injuries from severe weather better guarded 
against ; by the regular spreading of the tree on this surface, by which the leaves are more 
fully exposed to the sun than they can be on any standard ; and by the form of training : 
which, by retarding the motion of the descent of the sap, causes it to spend itself in the 
formation of flower-buds. 

2142. The leading modes of training ivoody-stemmed trees are the fan, horizontal, and 
vertical {fig.^%6. a,f, h). To which may be added the wavy or curvilinear. Their 
varieties are, the herring-bone («), the irregular fan (6), the stellate fan (c), the drooping 



412 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



386 




fan (d), the wavy fan (e) ; the horizontal, with screw stem (g), and with double stem (k) ; 
the vertical, with screw or wavy shoots {h), and with upright shoots (i). Haywood pro- 
poses a sort of wavy training ( Jig. . j^gy 
387. )» little different from that of 
the wavy fan, but which is cer- 
tainly superior to some of the other 
of the above modes in principle, 
as it has no tendency to constrain 
the shoots, and produce an irregu- 
lar distribution or exhibition of the 
sap in gourmands, &c. (Science of 
HorLicullure, 8vo. 1818.) 

2143. Trees xvith flexible stemSy 
such as the vine and other climbers, 
ndnut of tliree other varieties of 

raining {fig' 388.), which, as 

anes bear the sweetest fruit at the 

rreatest distance from the root, is 

jarticularly suitable for them. 

2 1 44. Fan training, as the name 
imports, directs the spreading out 
of all the branches like the spokes • 

of the fan ; it is reckoned of universal application and peculiarly suitable for peaches 
and other stone-fruits. 




388 




2145. Horizontal training is that in which, from a main stem, lateral branches are led 
out horizontally on each side, and is more especially adapted for pear-trees. 



2 1 46. Horizontal training 
with the screw stem is chiefly 
applicable to pears and apples, 
and the use of the screw is to 
cause buds to push at proper 
places for the horizontal 
shoots. Where this is not 
adopted, the annual heading 
down of the vertical shoot is 
resorted to, by which the same 
effect is produced; but the tree 
requires in this case a longer 
period to fill the wall. It may 
be effected either with one or 
two main stems ; but, in ge- 



389 




Dooi: IV. 



TRAINING. 



413 



neral, the latter mode is preferable {Jig. 389. )> as distributing the sap or vigor of the tree 
more equally. 

2147. Oblique training resembles the two last, with this difference, that the lateral 
shoots are trained obliquely to the main stem. It is particularly adapted for cherries. 
Thouin remarks, that the shoots should not be raised above an angle of forty-five degrees, 
unless in the case of a very weak shoot, which, for one season, may be led perpendicularly ; 
nor lowered below the horizontal line, unless in the case of an excessively strong gourmand 
or water-shoot. The angle of forty-five degrees indeed is recommended by the French 
writers, as the best for all shoots of fruit-trees to assume, whether by the training against 
walls or the pruning of standards. See the articles Espalier and Treille in Cours Complet 
dC AgricuUxire, &c. 

2148. Perpendicular training is performed by leading one horizontal shoot from each 
side of the stem, and within a foot or eighteen inches of the ground ; the shoots whicli 
proceed from these are led up perpendicularly to the top of the wall ; sometimes such 
shoots are trained in the screw or serpentine manner, particularly in vines and currants^ 
which bear remarkably well in this fonn. This is the original mode of training practised 
by the Dutch, and is still more common in Holland and Flanders than any where else, 

2149. Stellate training refers chiefly to standards trained on walls, or what by some are 
called riders. The summit of the stem being elevated six or eight feet from the ground 
by its length, the branches are laid in like radii from a centre. 

2150. The ojyen fan 390 
(Jig. 390.) is a mode of 
training described by 
Professor Thouin, and 
exemplified in the Jar- 
din des Plantes. It does 
not appear to differ 
much from a mode de- 
scribed by Knight, which 
he applied to the peach, 
and considers, with a 
little variation, appli- 
cable, even with supe- 
rior advantages, to the 
cherry, plum, and pear- 
tree. This form, he 
adds, "might with much 
advantage be given to 
trees whilst in the nursery ; and perhaps it is the only form which can be given without 
subsequent injury to the tree." There is nothing very peculiar in this form the first and 
second year of training (a, b), after being headed down ; but in the third year (c), the 
reversing of the lateral shoots (d), becomes a characteristic. 

2151. Wavy or curvilinear training, Haywood considers as combining " all the grand 
requisites stated to be produced" by the modes recommended by other writers on fruit- 
trees. " The fjtems {Jig- 391. a) being two principal branches through which the sap will 



391 




flow in equal portions from the root, to the length of three feet, before it is permitted to 
form collaterals, the same effect will be produced as if the whole sap was to pass up a 
single stem of a standard of six feet, which is justly observed by Bradley, ' to make 
fruit-branches in such plenty, that hardly any barren shoots are to be found upon 
them.' It also is conformable to the idea of Hales, that ' light, by freely entering 
the extended surfaces of leaves and flowers, contributes much to the ennobling the 
pruiciplcs of vegetables.' By avoiding the precise horizontal position in which Hitt 




414 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



directs the branches to be fixed, the sap is more regularly and unifonnly disposed of, 
and tliere will be no necessity for cutting branches short to form studs for producing 
bearers, nor to adopt the method recommended by Forsyth for furnishing bearers, that of 
repeatedly pinching off the tops, and shortening the leading shoots. The whole of the 
sap will, by this mode, be expended in profitable and increasing production, and all tlie 
desirable effects which these authors describe to be attainable, will be produced in less 
time and with less difficulty. By this mode, also, it is possible to train a tree to its ut- 
most extent without ever using the knife for any other purpose than for removing worn- 
out branches, or old bearers, nor need a branch ever be shortened. It will be found like- 
wise to support Knight's ideas, ' and expose a greater surface of leaf to the light,' in the 
shortest possible time. It will also ' promote an equal distribution of the circulating 
fluids ;' and without cutting off the strongest and weakest branches, ' each annual shoot, 
as produced, will possess nearly an equal degree of vigor.' And, as the horizontals will 
be formed of the most luxuriant shoots, they will find sufficient space to be trained in, and 
thus by ' proper treatment,' will, in due season, be found to ' have uniformly produced 
the finest possible bearing wood for the succeeding year,' and this without pinching off 
shoots. Thus, also, the same square of walling will be furnished with more bearing 
wood, in the third and fourth years, than can possibly be done by any other mode, and 
than can be effected by the common mode of practice, in less than eight or ten years." 

2152. Preparatory training. Nearly the same routine is gone through when the trees 
are young, for all the different modes of training. The shoots of grafted trees newly 
received from the nursery (Jig- 392. a) are not shortened by the best modern practi- 
tioners : at the end of the first season the side branches are left at an elevated angle (6), 
to encourage them to throw out laterals ; afterwards they are brought down (c, d) to an 
oblique or nearly horizontal position, and each shoot, placed in its final position, as it 
increases in size. 



392 




2153. Materials used in training. The operation of training on walls is performed chiefly 
by means of nails and shreds, on trellises by bass ties, and on espalier rails osier-twigs are 
most commonly used. The bass, after being applied, is gently twisted round with the 
finger and thumb, in order that it may run into a firm knot without tearing and weaken- 
ing the ligament. The osier tie is made fast by twisting the two ends, somewhat in the 
manner done by reapers in tying up sheaves of corn, and well known in the nurseries. 
But the nicety of the operation of training consists in the proper use of nails and shreds 
on a wall ; in which business, as Marshall has observed, " ingenuity will evidence itself 
in neatness and symmetry." When a shoot requires some constraint to retain it in its 
position, the pressure must always be against the shred and never against the nail. Of 
both nails and shreds there should be two sizes used, the larger for strong, and the smaller 
for weak shoots. Trees trained to boards can hardly have nails too small ; and those 
trained to stone or old brick walls generally require a larger size. 

2154. Shreds should be adapted to the sti-ength of the branches, and the distance of 
the buds from each other ; so that with strong shoots, having their buds wide, such broad 
shreds may be used as would make weak shoots unsightly, and spoil them by covering 
the buds ; many a well cut tree has been made disgusting, merely by irregular and dang- 
ling shreds. A uniformity of color can hardly be accomplished, but a regularity of size 
may ; scarlet, if all alike, looks best, and white the worst. The general width of shreds 
should be from half an inch to three quarters, and the length two inches tb three, having 
some wider, longer, and stronger, for large branches. In the disposition of shreds, some 
must have their ends turned downwards, and some upwards, as best suits, for bringing 
the shoots to their proper place, and straight direction. Though some pruners observe a 
sort of alternate order, yet the ends hanging chiefly down will look best. Use no more 
shreds and nails than necessary to make good work, as the effect is rude and injurious. As 
nails are apt to break out pieces of the wall in drawing, it is a good way to give the nail a 



Book IV. 



INDUCING FRUITFULNESS. 



415 



tap to drive it a little, which loosening it from its rust, makes it come out easier, and so 
saves a vv^all from large holes, which is a material thing. {Introd. to Card. ) 

2155. Herbaceous training is performed by means of poles, rods, branches, and pegs. 
Plants that twine and grow high are furnished with high poles, on wliich to twine them- 
selves, as the tamis, convolvulus, &c. Plants with tendrils, as the pea, the bryonia, &c. 
are furnished with branches or spray, through which the plant springing up attaches itself 
by its tendrils, and is thus better exposed to the sun and air, and not so liable to rot as 
when it lies on the ground. Props or poles are used for supporting and leading upright, 
tall, slender, growing plants, as the dahlia, tree-lupin, and the like. Creeping and trail- 
ing plants, as the melon, gourd, &c. are generally trained in the stellate manner on the 
ground by means of pegs ; sometimes also on walls and trellises. 

SuBSECT. 5. Blanching. 

2156. Blanching is an operation of culture performed by earthing the stems of plants, 
by tying up their leaves, or by covering them with utensils from the light. 

2157. Blanching by earthing IS ^eriormeA. on the. celery, chardoon, asparagus, &:c. In 
the case of annuals the earth is generally drawn up so as to press on the leaves of the plant 
as it advances in growth ; in the case of perennials a covering of loose earth is generally 
placed over them before the growing season, through which the stalks shoot up, and 
are blanched. 

2158. Blanching by tying together the leaves is sometimes performed on lettuce, cabbage, 
endive, &c. The plant being nearly in its most leafy state, the head or fasciculus of 
leaves are gathered together, and tied up with bass ribands. By this operation two effects 
are produced : the inner leaves as they grow, being excluded from the light, are blanched ; 
and being compressed in proportion to the growth, which takes place after tying up the 
head, the fasciculus becomes both tender and solid. 

2159. Blanching by overlaying is merely the laying down of tiles, slates, pieces of boards, 
&c. on endive and other salading, when nearly full grown, and of which, being thus ex- 
cluded fi-om the sun, the future growth is colorless. Covering by the following mode is 
preferable. 

2160. Blanclmig by covering tvith utensils is a recent invention applied to sea-kale, 
rhubarb, asparagus, &c, and consists in placing over them the utensils already described 
as appropriated to this purpose. (1427.) 

Sect. IV. Operations for inducing a State of Fruitfulness in barren and unblossoming 

Trees and Plants. 

2161. Various means have been tried to induce fruitfidness v/hh different degrees of 
success. Almost every description of fruit-tree, if planted in a thin stratum of rich loam 
on a dry and impervious sub-soil, will come into bearing in regular course, according to 
its nature ; but it too frequently happens that the stratum of soil is too deep, or the roots 
penetrate into the sub-soil, or by some means, not always obvious, acquire the power of 
throwing much superfluous sap into the tree, which spends itself in leaves and branches, 
instead of blossoms. Similar circumstances produce similar effects in ornamental trees 
and shrubs, whether in the open air or in artificial climates. Attempts are known to have 
been made for upwards of a century and a half, to cause such trees to produce blossoms, 
attended with different degrees of success ; but the practice was carried on empirically, 
without any knowledge of the reason or principle which operated in producing the desired 
end, till its true rationale was given by Du Hamel, in his Physique des Arbres, 1758. 

2162. Laying hare the roots of trees is mentioned by Evelyn as conducive to fertility. 
— Trans2)lanting the tree frequently, by Van Osten. — Boring a hole, and driving in an 
oaken plug is mentioned by the same author as the "old way." Every one must 
have observed that trees partially blown out of the ground, or with the earth washed 
or otherwise removed from their roots in banks or river-sides, or with their trunks or 
roots broken, bent, or mutilated in any way, are always more fruitful than others ; and 
this, we conceive, has suggested the various modes of artificial mutilation. Mutilation, 
both in plants and animals, is attended by a sort of maturity ; and maturity in all living 
things is the period of reproduction. 

2163. Cutting the roots of trees is an old practice, generally performed in winter or 
spring, but recently by Beattie, gardener at Scone, in midsummer. " In the begin- 
ning of July 1811, I had a border on the south wall, of 400 feet long, trenched to the 
depth of from two and a half to three feet ; in doing this, I had the opportunity 
of cutting the roots of all the trees, as the work went on, which I did so completely, 
that they in a manner hung by the nails and shreds, with a ball of earth of about two 
feet from the stem of the tree. As cutting the roots of fruit-trees has a tendency to 
make them fruitful, that may possibly proceed from the small quantity of fibrous roots 
produced by the operation." Beattie says, he acted on the principle of depriving the tree 
of the means of containing such a great quantity of sap, thereby preventing it from 



416 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part IL 



gro-vdng so much to wood, and of course inclining it to become fruitful. (Caled. Mem. 
vol. i. 272.) Nicol suggests the same expedient in his Forcing and Fruit Gardener, 
4th edit. p. 240. 

2164. Cutting notches in the stem or branches has been tried on many occasions on 
the same principle as cutting the roots. 

2165. Partial decortication is the removal of the bark already scaling off, covered with 
mosses and lichens, or carbonised by the action of the atmosphere. It is only 
applicable to old trees, or trees of a certain age, and the effect is to increase the vigor 
of the tree, and thus promote the production of young wood and blossom-buds. It 
was recommended by Arnaud d'Andilly, in 1650, and has been practised for several 
years, by Forsyth, Lyon, and various others, on standard-trees, and by King, a com- 
mercial gardener, at Teddington, on the vine. 

2166. Stripping of pieces of the bark from the stem and branches is said by Marshall 
to check the luxuriance, and promote the fruitfulness of pear-trees. (Introd. to Gard. Sec. 
4th edit. p. 156.) 

2167. Ringing the stem and branches, circumcision, or excision, &:c. was known to 
the Romans, and is mentioned by Virgil, Columella, &c. Among tlie moderns, it 
seems to have been revived by Du Hamel in the beginning of the ISth centurj-, more 
csp6tjially igTJ 733, when he perfectly succeeded in rendering trees fruitful, and has given 
an account of his experiments in the Memoires de VAcadcmie des Sciences, A. D. 1788. 
Tlie subject has since been taken up by Suriray Delarue, and by Lancry ; tlie former of 
whom has given an excellent history and rationale of the practice in the Journal 
Ph)/sico-(Econo?nique for 1803. It is also ably treated in the Cours Complet d^Agn- 
cidlure, &c. art. Bourrelet. The effect of ringing has been perfectly well known and 
acted on in Holland and Germany since Du Hamel's time, as any one may be assured of 
by the perusal of the works of Christ, Diederich, and Diel ; and it is remarkable, that 
so late as 1815, A. Hempel, a clergyman of Saxony, should have published an account 
of Iiis practice in ringing, as new. The use of ringing would be, in all probability, 
introduced into England soon after Du Hamel's experiments were published ; but 
though it has been known and occasionally practised by some gardeners for upwards of 
half a century, it seems not to have been generally known, either in 1817, when, judging 
from a paper of Dr. Nohden, the subject was considered new in tlie Horticultural 
Society ; or, in the end of last century, when Dr. Darwin, in his Notes to Phyiologia, 
vol. i. p. 393, describes the practice, and accounts for its effects. It is now frequently 
practised, both for the purpose of inducing blossoms on trees, or rendering them pro- 
ductive ; and for accelerating the maturity and increasing the size of fruits. The 
former has been termed production-ringing, and tlie latter maturation-ringing. (Hort. 
Trans, iv. 557. ) Production-ringing should be performed in the spiing, and will pro- 
duce its effects in the following year : maturation-ringing when the plants are in blossom, 
and it will show its effects the same season. 

2168. Maturation-ringing. Ringing has been found not only to induce blossom- 
buds, but where these prove fertile, to increase the size and accelerate the ripening of 
fruits. In a paper read before tlie Horticultural Society in 1 808, Williams, of 
Pitmaston, describes a mode of making annular excisions in the bark of >-ines. 
These were made rather less than a quarter of an inch in width, that the exposed wood 
might be covered again with bark by the end of autumn. " Two \mes of the 
white Frontiniac, in similar states of growth, being trained near to each other on 
a south wall, were selected for trial ; one of these was experimented on (if I may use the 
term), the other was left in its natural state, to form a standai-d of comparison. When 
the circle of bark had been removed about a fortnight, the berries on the experimented 
tree began evidently to swell faster than those on the other, and by the beginning of Sep- 
tember showed indications of approaching ripeness, while the fruit of the unexperimented 
tree continued green and small. In the beginning of October, die fruit on the tree that 
had the bark removed from it was quite ripe, the other only just began to shaw a dis- 
position to ripen, for the bunches were shortly afterwards destroyed by the autumnal 
frosts. In every case in which circles of bark were removed, I invariably found that the 
fruit not only ripened earlier, but the berries were considerably larger than usual, and 
more highly flavored. The effects tlius produced, I can account for only by adopting 
Knight's theory of the downward circulation of the sap through the bark. It is not of 
much consequence in %vhat part of the U-ee the incision is made ; but in case the tmnk is 
very large, I should then recommend, that the circles be made in the smaller branches." 

2169. The operation of maturation-ringing should be deferred till the flowers are fully 
expanded, or rather till they are passing into fruit, or even till tlie fruit is set. The sap, 
being interrupted in its descent by the annular incision, is held in the bough, and thus 
the fruit gains a more ready and unintenrupted supply of nourishment, the consequence 
of which is not only an increase of size, but earlier maturity. This operation, besides, 
may be serviceable in ripening the seeds of plants, which otherwise would not be per- 



Book IV. 



INDUCING FRUITFULNESS. 



417 



fected ; for as the fruit is sooner ripened, so the seeds will likewise be sooiiei- 
matured. When the influence of ringing is limited to three or four months, as in 
the case of maturation-ringing, it is obvious that the ring need not be so broad as when 
it is to be extended to a longer period ; from which it follows that maturation-ringing, as 
it keeps the bark separated for a shorter period, will do less injury to the health of the 
branch than the other mode. [Hort. Trmis. iv. 557.) 

2170. Ringing is said to force young trees to show blossoms. Hempel states as a 
consequence resulting from ringing, that you may force young trees to show fruit, before 
they otherwise would do. That ringing may have some effect in this way, we think 
highly probable ; but by no means so much as is ascribed to it by Hempel. Trees must 
arrive at their age of puberty, like animals, before they can propagate their species. 
Abundance of food and heat will, no doubt, induce a degree of precocity in the subjects 
of both kingdoms ; and as ringing gives in effect abundance of food to the particular part 
above the excision, it must have some effect, but it has not been proved to have much. 
Ringing will produce blossoms in all plants, herbaceous or shrubby, propagated by ex- 
tension, that is, originated otherwise than from seed, at arty age; but its eflfects on young 
trees raised from seed, or in causing blossoms on any description of tree to set, are much 
less certain ; though in all cases where they do set, the size of the fruit will be greatly 
enlarged for the first year or two. 

2171. In forming the operation of' ringing, a ring of outei' and inner bark, not 
larger than the tree can fill up in stone-fruit in one, and in kernel-fruit in two, or at 
most three yeai-s, is cut clean out with a knife, or the ringing shears, (fg. 123.) If larger, 
the tree becomes too much excited to fruitfulness, and the part of it separated from the 
root by the ring dies, while the stem and parts adjoining the root become too luxuriant. 
When the rings are made so wide as that the barks cannot unite for two or three years, 
the result, says the author of the article, Bourrelet, in N. C. d" Agriculture, &c. will be 
to " accelerate the production of blossoms, and the setting of fruit, and to augment their 
size during the first year ; and then, during the following years, to make them languish, 
and at last die." "There is a pear-tree," Sabine observes, "against one of the walls 
in the kitchen-garden, belonging to his Majesty, at Kev.', which underwent the operation 
of ringing about fifteen years ago. The part operated on was near the root; and, as it 
was a principal arm, about one half of the whole tree became influenced by the operation. 
This half has uniformly borne fruit, the other half has been nearly barren. The portion 
of stem which was laid bare is about six inches wide, and it has not been again covered 
by bark. That part just above the ring is considerably larger than the part below it. 
The ends of the branches appear in much decay, and there are but very few young shoots 
thrown out from the sides ; whilst, on the other part of the tree, the shoots, as usual, 
proceed from the extremities, as well as from the sides of the main branches. I appre- 
hend, from the present appearance of the whole, that the portion of the tree which, by 
the separation of the bark, has been deprived in a great measure of supply from the root, 
cannot survive many years." 

2172. Renewal of the soil about fruit-trees has been found by Hay, of Newliston, 
near Edinburgh, in the case of peaches ; and Maher, of Arundel, in the case of figs, 
and by various others, to renew the fruitfulness of trees. There may be two reasons 
given for this, both of which may be concerned in the effect : the first is the exhaustion 
of the soil generally ; and the second is its exhaustion of the particular sort of food pre- 
ferred by the kind of tree. ITaough we are not so certain that every species of tree 
requires, to a certain extent, a particular sort of food, as we are that herbaceous vegetables, 
as wheat, oats, &c. do ; yet analogy renders the fact highly probable. At any rate, it is 
clear that a renewal of soil must always be conducted with reference to the state of the 
plants; a poor, limy, sandy soil may be substituted for one where the luxuriancy of the 
plants shows that it is too rich ; and a rich loamy one for one of an opposite description, 
where the plants are unthriving, &c. 

2173. Bending down the braiiches has been found conducive to fruitfulness; and is 
accounted for on the same principle as ringing. It has been well exemplified by 
Mayer (Hort. Trans, i.), in fixing clay balls to the extremities of the shoots of young 
apple-trees after midsummer, which, depressing them, stagnated the sap, and induced the 
production of abundance of flower-buds. 

2174. To induce the jn-oductio7i of blossoms in herbaceous ])lants, any or all of the above 
modes may be adopted with most species, but on a large scale the first object is to place 
the plants in a soil neither too poor nor too rich. A dry soil, not deep, and resting on a 
dry firm bottom, is most favorable to fruitfulness, especially when joined to abundance 
of air and light. In perennials, the effect can only be produced the second year, as in 
trees ; but in annuals it will be immediate ; in the former class, however, where the de- 
fect is want of nourishment, the effect may take place even the first year. Knight in- 
duced the production of blossoms on an early variety of potatoe, by depriving the plant 
of its tubers, as soon as they made their appearance ; by which means, the nourishment 



418 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



which would have been devoted to theii* enlargement, was employed by the plant in the 
production of blossoms, as the remaining mode which it had of propagating its species. 
The reverse of the practice is found proportionally to increase the bulk of the tubers, and 
has become an important point of practice in potatoe culture. The Dutch, as Darwin 
informs us, were the first to adopt this mode in the culture of bulbous-rooted flowers. 
In general, it may be stated, that the art of producing blossoms in perennial herbaceous 
plants consists in permitting them to have abundance of leaves, fully exposed to the light 
and air the preceding year, and in not cutting them over when in a state of growth, as is 
too frequently done, but in letting them first begin to decay. By this means, healthy 
vigorous butk and roots are prepared for exertion the following year. 

2175. Genei-al estimate of^ these practices. All these operations may be resorted to oc- 
casionally as expedients, but the only permanent and general mode of inducing fruitful- 
ness is by supplying judicious soil, exposure, and pruning. 

Sect. V. Oj)e)'ations for retarding or accelerating Vegetation' 

2176. To oveixome difficulties is the last stage in the progress of art. After civilised 
man has had every thing which he can desire in season, his next wisli is to heighten the 
enjoyment by consummation at extraordinary seasons. The merit here consists in con- 
quering nature ; and in gardening tliis is done by coW-^o?/i'es and /if>?-/<ou5e5 ; and by ex- 
cluding or increasing the effects of the sun in the open air. The origin of these practices 
is obviously derived from the fact, that heat is the grand stunulus to vegetation, and its 
comparative absence, the occasion of torpor and inactivity. 

SuBSECT. 1. Opey^ationsfor retarding Vegetation. 

2177. Retarding by the form of surface, is eftected by forming beds of earth in an east 
and west direction, sloping to the north at any angle at which the earth will stand ; here 
salading may be sown in summer, and spinage, turnips, and such crops as shoot rapidly 
into flower-stems during hot weather. 

2178. Retarding by shade. The simplest mode of retarding vegetation is, by keeping 
plants constantly in comparative shade in the spring season. Tliis is either to be done by 
having them planted in tlie north side of a wall or house, or sloping bank, hill or other 
elevation ; or by moving them there in pots ; or by placing a shade or shed over, or on 
the south side of the vegetables to be retarded. Where the object of retarding vegetation 
is to have the productions in perfection later in the season, the first method is generally 
resorted to ; but where vegetation is only retarded in order that it may burst forth with 
greater vigor when the shades are removed, then eitlier of the others is preferable. 
Trees on an east and west espalier-rail, shaded fi-om the sun from February to the middle 
of May, will be later of coming into blossom, and therefore less likely to have their blos- 
■soms injured by frost. 

2179. Retarding by the cold-house, or ice-cold chamber, (fgs. 169. 173.) is more particu- 
larly applicable to plants in pots, especially fruit-trees, and might be made a practice of 
importance. Vegetation may in this way be retarded from jMarch to September, and the 
plant' removed at that season, by proper gradations, to a hot- house, will ripen its fruit at 
mid-winter. It is even alleged by some gardeners, who have had experience in Russia, 
that the vegetation of peach-trees may be so retarded an entire year ; and that afterwards, 
when the plant is removed into spring or summer heat, in the January of the second year, 
its vegetation is most rapid, and a crop of fruit may be ripened in Mai'ch or April, with 
very little exertion on the part of the gardener. The earliest potatoes are obtained from 
tubers which have been kept two seasons ; that is, tliose are to be planted which have 
been produced the season before tlie last; or, the produce of summer 1821, in December 
1822. 

2 1 80. Retarding the ripening of fruits by excluding oxygen. M. Berard, of Montpelier, 
in an essay on the ripening of fruits, which gained the prize of the French Academy of 
Sciences in 1821, found that the loss of carbon is essential to the ripening of fruits ; that 
this carbon combines with the oxygen of the air, and forms carbonic acid ; and that when 
the fruit is placed in an atmosphere deprived of oxygen, this function becomes suspended, 
and the ripening is stopped. Hence it results, that most fruits may be preserved during 
a certain period, by gathering them a few days before they are ripe, and placing them in 
an atmosphere free from oxygen. The most simple process for effecting this consists in 
placing at the bottom of a bottle, a paste formed of lime, sulphate of iron, and water ; 
then introduce the fruit so as they may rest detached from the bottom of the bottle, and 
from each other, and cork the bottle and cover it with cement. Peaches, plums, and 
apricots have been kept in this way for a month ; pears and apples for three months. 
Afterwards they will ripen perfectly by exposure to the air. (Jour?ial R, Inst. vol. xi. 
396.) 



Book IV. 



ACCELERATING VEGETATION. 



419 



SuBSECT. 2. 0])e)'atio7is for accelerating Vegetation. 

2181. Accelerating hy tlie form of surface consists in forming beds or banks in an east 
and west direction, and sloping to the south, forming an angle witli the horizon, the 
maximum of which, in garden-soils, cannot exceed 45 degrees. On such beds early 
sown crops, as radishes, peas, turnips, &c. will come much earlier, aiTd winter standing 
crops, as lettuce, broccoli, &c. suffer less from severe weather than those on a level sur- 
face. Tlie north side of such beds or ridges may be used for retarding vegetation, as leeks, 
borecoles, &;c. (2177.) 

2182. Acceleration by sJielter, and exposure to the sun, is the simplest, and probably only 
primitive mode of accelerating the vegetation of plants ; and hence one of the objects for 
%vhich v/alls and hedges are introduced in gardens. A May-duke cherry, trained against 
a south wall, and another tree, of the same species, in the open compartment of a sheltered 
garden, were found, by the late J. Kyle, of Moredun, near Edinburgh, on an average of 
years, to differ a fortnight in the ripening of tlieir fruit. In cold, damp, cloudy seasons, 
they were nearly on a par ; but in dry, warm seasons, those on the wall were sometimes 
fit to be gathered three weeks before the others. It may be here remarked, that though, 
in cloudy seasons, those on the wall did not ripen before the others ; yet their flavor was, 
in such seasons, better than tliat of the others, probably from the comparative dryness of 
their situation. Corn and potatoes on the south and nortli sides of a hill, all otlier circum- 
stances being equal, ripen at about the same relative distances of time. 

2183. Accelerating by soils is effected by manures of all sorts, but especially by what 
are called hot and stimulating manures and composts, as pigeons' dung for cucumbers, 
blood for vines ; and, in general, as to soils, lime-rubbish, sand^ and gravel, seem to have 
the power of accelerating vegetation to a much greater degree than rich clayey or loamy 
soils, or bog or peat earth. 

2184. Accelerating by ])revious jn-eparation of the plant is a method of considerable im- 
portance, whether taken alone, or in connection with other modes of acceleration. It has 
long been observed by cultivators, that early ripened crops of onions and potatoes sprout, 
or give signs of vegetation, more early next season than late-ripened crops. The 
same of bulbs of flowers which have been forced, which re-grow much earlier next 
season, than those which have been grown in the open air. It was reserved to Knight, 
however, to turn this to account in the forcing of fruit-trees, as related in a paper, ac- 
companied as usual by what renders all the papers of that eminent horticulturist so truly 
valuable, — a rationale of the practice. 

2185. The period which any species or variety of fruit will require to attain maturity, under any given de- 
crees of temperature, and exposure to the influence of light in the forcing-house, will be regulated to a much 
greater extent than is generally imagined, by the previous management and consequent state of the tree, 
when that is first subjected to the operation of artificial heat. Every gardener knows, that when the pre- 
vious season has been cold, and cloudy, and wet, the wood of his fruit-trees remains immature, and weak 
abortive blossoms only are x^roduced. The advantages of having the wood well ripened are perfectly well 
understood ; but those which may be obtained, whenever a very early crop of fruit is required, by ripening 
the wood very early in the preceding summer, and putting the tree into a state of repose, as soon as pos- 
sible after its wood has become perfectly mature, do not, as far as my observation has extended, appear to 
be at all known to gardeners ; though every one who has had in any degree the management of vines in a 
hot-house, must have observed the different effects of the same degrees of temperature upon the same 
plant, in October and February. In the autumn, the plants have just sunk into their vv'inter sleep : in 
February they are refreshed, and ready to awake again ; and whenever it is intended prematurely to ex- 
cite their powers of life into action, the expediency of putting those powers into a state of rest, early in the 
preceding autumn, appears obvious. {Hart. Trans, vol. ii. 368.) Knight placed some vines in pots, 
in a forcing-house, in the end of January, which ripened their frui'- in the middle of July ; soon after 
which the pots were put under the shade of a north wall in the open air. Being pruned and removed in 
September to a south wall, they soon vegetated with much vigor, till the frost destroyed their shoots. 
Others, which were not removed from the north wall till the following spring, when they were pruned and 
placed against a south wall, " ripened their fruit well in the following season in a climate not nearly warm 
enough to have ripened it at all, if the plants had previously grown in the open air." Peach-trees, some- 
what similarly treated, unfolded their blossoms nine days earlier, " and their fruit ripened three we^ks 
earlier" than in other trees of the same varieties. {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. 372.) Pots of grapes which had 
produced a crop previously to midsummer, were placed under a north wall till autumn : on the 12tli of 
January, they were put into a stove, and ripened their fruit by the middle of April. {Hort. Trans. 
iy. 440.) 

2186- By thus inducing a state of rest in plants in pots, say vines or peaches, in 
August, and placing them immediately in the ice-cold room till the beginning of January, 
wliich is allowing four months of a winter to them, they would, in all probability, produce 
very early crops of grapes with less forcing than would be required for such as ripen their 
wood in October. Such pots might be placed in pine and other stoves, where a certain 
degree of heat is kept up at any rate, and might be contrived to produce a succession of 
fruit, in the manner practised by W. Masland, of Stockport, by a vineyard in pots, whicli 
pass in regular succession through his pine-stoves, and furnish ripe grapes the wliole 
year. A state of rest is readily induced by withholding water from plants under cover ; 
and in the open air by covering trees, and a portion of the surface or border around or 
before them, with canvass or oil-cloth, to throw off the autunnnal and part of the winter 
rains. 

E e 2 



420 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



2187. Accelerathig by housing, such as removing plants in pots and boxes, to sheds or 
rooms in the night, and exposing them in fine weather to the sun, was practised by the 
gardener of Tiberius, to procure early cucumbers ; and by those of Louis XIV. to force 
peas. [Benard. ) Parkinson and Gerarde describe the practice as applied to raising cu- 
cumbers and melons in this country. 

2188. Accelerating by artificial heat in vcalls is a veiy frequent and useful practice. In 
general it is accom.panied by protectuig-covers of canvass or netting (1495.) : but some 
gardeners, as Trotter of Alva, a very liigh and exposed situation on the Ochill hills, never 
cover their hot- walls ; but in ripening the wood in -autumn, and in saving the blossom and 
settmg the fruit in spring, keep up such fires as wdll repel the frost, and evaporate the wet 
that might fall on the wall. " No danger," Trotter observes, " is to be apprehended from 
the severity of the spring months, even when exposed to all sorts of weather ; every 
kind of covering being superseded by the genial heat of the w^all." This he has long 
experienced, even in England, but especially in Scotland, to be " the best preservative 
of the blossom of young fruits." [Caled. Mem. vol. ii. 113.) 

2189. Accelerating by flued borders has been occasionally attempted, but can never 
succeed by fii-e heat ; by tubes of steam, perhaps, something might be done, but the heat 
can always be more economically applied by means of pits or frames, placed on raised 
beds of mould, with arches, or some similar contrivance underneath. (See a description 
of a flued border in Keil's Treatise on the Peach Tree, 8vo. 1780.) 

2190. Accelerating by covering idtJi glass cases, of different sizes and descriptions, pro- 
bably succeeded to housing. The Romans are supposed to have hastened the ripening of 
grapes and peaches, by placing them under talc cases (55.) ; and a French author, B^- 
nard, informs us, that tlie origin of forcing the vine arose from one Gordon observing 
that a shoot which had entered his room-window through a crevice, ripened its fruit some 
time before those branches of the same tree which remained in the open air. The practice 
of forcing peaches in Holland, is said to have originated from a gardener near Haarlem 
putting hot-bed lights against his walls to ripen peaches in a bad season. By a mere 
covering of glass, without any description of bottom heat, or any auxiliary mode of ac- 
celeration, almost all fruits and flowers which grow in the open air in this countrj"^, may 
be forwarded from one fortnight to one month, according to the season. Fruits may 
by the facile means thus afforded of covering and protection, be retained in a ripe and 
plump state from one to three months ; so that in general it may be observed, that 
cold frames, as they are called, and mere glass cases, will double the ordinary time of 
enjoying hardy fruits, and cfitainly they greatly increase the flavor of such as ripen 
late, and especially of the vine and peach. 

2191. Accelerating by glass cases and artificial heat combined is effected by hot-beds, 
pits, and hot-houses. 

2192. Accelerating by the common hot-bed is an ancient, general, but still somewhat pre- 
carious and unmanageable mode. The heat being produced by a fermenting mass of ve- 
getable matter, over which is placed the earth containing the plants, it becomes diflScult 
to regulate any excess of heat, and the plants are sometimes, in the empirical phrase, 
burnt. When, however, the lieat declines, it is readily renewed by linings or a sur- 
rounding layer of dung. To remedy the defects of the common hot-bed, and prevent 
the possibility of burning the plants, by interposing a stratum of air between the dung 
and the mass of earth which contains them, is the object of the vaulted pit and M'Phail's 
frame {Jigs. 230. 233.); to which there is no objection, but the greater original cost. 
These structures actually save dung, and are more agreeable to the eye of those who 
value order and neatness than dung-beds 

2193. Accelerating by means of imlled pits is very similar to that of forcing by hot-beds ; 
with the advantages of having more room between the surface of the beds and the glass for 
the tops of sln-ubs, and of the glass having a better slope ; but with the disadvantages of a 
chance of burning in the first instance, and no power of increasing the bottom heat when 
it once declines. Bark is generally used to lessen the first evil, as it does not ferment so 
powerfully as dung, and the second is remedied by a suiTounding flue. Such pits are 
much used in all the branches of garden-culture. Henderson, of Brecliin, proposes to 
lay on the surface of beds of tan, or on hot-beds, pits, pineries, &c. fine di-ifted river or 
sea sand, three inches deep. " This covering," he says, " possesses many advantages. 
It will extirpate the slater or wood-louse {oni^cus asellu£), as the nature of the sand pre- 
vents the insect from concealing itself from the rays of the sun. In dung hot-beds, it 
keeps down the steam. To fruit, it aflPords a bed as waim and as dry as tiles or slates. 
Tins covering also retains the moisture in the earth longer than any other, and is itself 
sooner diy. It gives the houses a clean, neat appearance, and though it cannot be ex- 
pected to remove the infection, where already introduced, will be found a powerful pre- 
ventive of that great evil, mildew." 

21 94. Acceleratijig by ynenns of hot-houses is the master-piece of this brginch of culture, 
and is but of modern invention, being unknown till the end of the 1 7th century. Im- 



Book IV. 



ACCELERATING VEGETATION. 



421 



provement in the form as well as management of these buildings has, as in every other 
case, been progressive ; and there are now a great choice both of the forms adopted, the 
materials used in the construction of these forms, and the mode of producing artificial 
iieat. 

2195. There are tivo leading ynodes of accelerating playits in hot-houses ; the first .is by 
placing them there pennanently, as in the case of the peach, vine, (ic, planted in the 
groimd ; and the second is by having the plants in pots, and introducing or withdrawing 
them at pleasure. As far as respects trees, the largest crops, and A\ ith far less care, are 
produced by the first metliod ; but in respect to herbaceous plants and shrubs, whether 
culinaiy, as the strawberry and kidneybean, or ornamental, as the rose and the pink, 
the latter is by far the most convenient metliod, and it is also the best adapted for aflfbrd- 
ing veiy early crops. (2185.) Where large pots are used, the peach, cherry, fig, &c. 
will produce tolerable crops. Knight has observed, that " vines and other fruit-trees, 
when abundantly supplied with water and manure in a liquid state, requii-e but a very 
small quantity of mould ;" and he adds, " A pot containing two cubic feet of veiy rich 
mould, with proper subsequent attention, is fully adequate to nourish a vine, which, after 
being pruned in autumn, occupies twenty square feet of the roof of a hot-house ; and I 
have constantly found that vines in such pots, being abundantly supplied with food and 
Avater, have produced more Angorous wood, when forced very early, than others of the 
same varieties, whose roots Avere permitted to extend beyond the limits of the house." 
(Hart. Trans, vol. ii. p. 373.) 

2196. When trees are planted for a permanenci/ ivithin , or close to tlie outside of a hoi- 
house, the soil requires to be prepared of depth and quality according to the nature of 
the tree ; and a principal consideration is to form, if such does not naturally exist, a sub- 
soil, wliich shall be impenetrable to the roots. The deptli of soil on such a substratum 
need not in general be great, provided it be rich. Fonnerly a depth of three or four 
feet was recommended ; but Hayward proposes to have his fruit-tree borders only fifteen 
or eighteen inches deep ; which is conformable to an observation of Hitt, that the finest 
crop of peaches he had ever seen, grew on trees which were nourished from a border not 
more than one foot deep, with a compact rock below, Nicol allows from twenty-four to 
thirty inches of soil. Knight is of opinion, that " a large extent and depth of soil seem 
to be no farther requisite to trees tlian to aflfbrd them a regular- supply of water, and a 
sufficient quantity of organisable matter;" and, he thinks, "the rapid growtli of plants 
of eveiy kind, when their roots are confined in a pot to a small quantity of mould, till 
that becomes exhausted, proves sufficiently the truth of this position." [Hort. Trans. 
vol. ii. p. 127.) 

2197. The operations of forcing chiefly respect the admission of air, the supply of heat, 
of light, and of water. Tlie grand effect is produced by heat, and the great art is 
just to supply as much as v.ill hannonise with the light afforded by the sun and the 
nature of the species of plant to be forced. All the operations of nature are gradual ; 
and a good gardener will always follow these as the safest examples. He will never 
be anxious to apply artificial heat before buds have naturally swoln ; he will tlien 
increase tlie temperature gradually for some weeks ; he will in particular guai'd against 
any sudden decrease of warmdi, it being most necessary towards success, to con- 
tinue the course of vegetation uninterruptedly, through foliation, inflorescence, and 
fructification. 

2198. Heat and light. An error in hot-house culture in general, of very considerable 
importance, and which has prevailed till lately, consists in not adjusting the heat of art 
to the light of the sun. In cloudy weather, and during night, the aitificial atmosphere 
is kept hot by fires and exclusion of the external air, wliile in clear days and during 
sunsliine, fires are left oft or allowed to decline, the external air is admitted, and the at- 
mosphere wdthin is reduced to the temperature of that without. As heat in nature is the 
result of the shining of the sun, it follows that when there is most light there is most 
heat ; but the practice in forcing is very generally the reverse. " A gardener, in forcing," 
Knight observes, " generally treats liis plants as he would to be treated himself ; 
and consequently, though the aggregate temperature of his house be nearly what it ought 
to be, its temperature, during the night, relatively to that of the day, is almost always too 
high." In one of Knight's forcing-houses, in which grapes are grown, he always wishes 
to see its temperature, in the middle of every blight day in summer, as high as 90 ' ; " and 
after the leaves of the plants have become diy, I do not object to ten or fifteeli degrees 
higher. In the following night, the temperature sometimes falls as low as 50° ; and so 
far am I from tliinking such change of temperature injurious, I am well satisfied that it 
is generally beneficial. Plants, it is true, tluive well, and many species of fruit acquire 
their greatest state of perfection in some situations within the ti-opics, where the tempera- 
ture in the shade does not vary in the day and night more than seven or eight degrees ; 
but in these climates, the plant is exposed during the day to the full blaze of a ti-opical 
sun, and early in the night it is regularly drenched with heavy wetting dews ; and con- 



422 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part U. 



seqiiently it I's very differently circumstanced in the day and in the night, thougli the tem- 
perature of tlie air in the shade at both pei-iods may be very nearly the same. I suspect," 
he continues, " that a large portion of the blossoms of the cherry and other fruit-trees in 
the forcing-house often proves abortive, because they are forced by too high and uniform 
a temperature, to expand before the sap of the tree is properly prepared to nourish them. 
I have, tlierefore, been led, duiing the last three years, to try the effects of keeping up a 
much higher temperature in the day tlian in the night. As early in the spring as I 
wished the blossoms of my peach-trees to unfold, my house was made warm during the 
middle of the day ; but towards night it was suffered to cool, and the trees were then 
sprinkled, by means of a large syringe, with clear water, as nearly at the temperature at 
which that usually rises from the ground, as I could obtain it ; and little or no artificial 
heat was given during the night, unless there appeared a prospect of frost. Under this 
mode of treatment, the blossoms advanced with very great vigor, and as rapidly as I 
wished them, and presented, when expanded, a larger size than I had ever before seen of 
the same varieties. Another ill effect of high temperature during the night is, that it 
exhausts the excitability of the tree much more rapidly than it promotes the growth, or ac- 
celerates the maturity of the fruit ; which is in consequence ill supplied with nutriment, 
at the period of its ripening, when most nutriment is probably wanted. The muscat of 
Alexandria and other late grapes are, owing to this cause, often seen to wither upon the 
branch in a very imperfect state of maturity ; and the want of richness and flavor in 
other forced fruit is, I am very confident, often attributable to the same cause. There 
are few peach-houses, or indeed forcing-houses of any kind in this country, in which the 
temperature does not exceed, during the night, in the months of April and May, very 
greatly that of the wamnest valley in Jamaica in the hottest period of the year : and there 
are probably as few forcing-houses in which the trees are not more strongly stimulated 
by the close and damp air of the night, than by the temperature of the dry air of the noon 
of the following day. The practice which occasions this cannot be right ; it is in direct 
opposition to nature." (^Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 130.) 

2199. Air. Knight considers that gardeners often and widely err, " by too freely 
admitting the external air during the day, particularly in bright weatlier. Plants gene- 
rally grow best, and fruits swell most rapidly, in a warm and moist atmosphere ; and 
change of air is, to a very limited extent, necessary or beneficial. The mature leaves of 
plants, and according to Saussure, the green fruits (grapes at least), when exposed to the 
influence of light, take up carbon from the surrounding air, whilst the same substance is 
given out by every other part of the plant ; so that the purity of air, when confined in 
close vessels, has often been found little changed at the end of two or three days by the 
growth of plants in it. But even if plants required as piu'e air, as hot-blooded animals, 
the buoyancy of the heated air, in every forcing-house, would occasion it to escape and 
change as rapidly, and indeed much more rapidly, tlian would be necessaiy. It may be 
objected, that plants do not thrive, and that the skins of grapes are thick, and other fruits 
without flavor in crowded forcing-houses ; but in these it is probably light, rather than a 
more rapid change of air that is wanting. "Wlien fruits approach to maturity such an in- 
crease of ventilation, as will give the requisite degree of dryness to air within the house, 
is highly beneficial ; pro\-ided it be not increased to such an extent as to reduce the tem- 
perature of the house much below the degree in which the fruit has pre^^ous]y grown, 
and thus retard its progress to maturity. The good effect of opening a peach-house, by 
taking off the liglus of its roof, during the period of the last sw^elling of the fruit, appears 
to have led many gardeners to over-rate greatly the beneficial influence of a free cuiTcnt 
of air upon ripening fruits ; for I have never found ventilation to give the proper flavor 
or color to a peach, unless that fruit was at the same time exposed to the sun without the 
intervention of glass ; and the most excellent peaches 1 have ever been able to raise, were 
obtained under circumstances where change of air was as much as possible prevented con- 
sistently with the admission of light (without glass) to a single tree." 

2200. Water. The supplies of water given to plants should be regulated by the sup- 
plies of heat, the nature of the plant, its state in regard to growth, and the object for which 
it is cultivated. Abundance of heat should generally be succeeded by copious waterings, 
unless the nature of the plant, as its succulency, or its donnant state in regard to growth, 
render that improper. Plants cultivated for their fruits should be less watered during 
the ripening season than such as are grown for their effect ; a drj' atmosphere being most 
conducive to flavor. Tlie succulent shoots of trees, Knight observes, always appear to 
grow most rapidly, in a damp heat, during the night ; but it is rather elongation than 
growth, v. hich then takes place. The spaces between the bases of the leaves become 
longer, but no new organs are added ; and the tree, under such circumstances, may witli 
much more reason be said to be drawn, than to grow ; for the same quantity only of ma- 
terial is extended to a greater length, as in the elongation of a wire. 



Book IV. 



OPERATIONS OF EXOTIC CULTURE. 



423 



Sect. VI. Operations to imitate loarm Climates^ 

2201 . The imitation of warm climates hy hot-houses must not be confounded with the art 
of forcing the vegetables of temperate climates into the premature production of their 
flowers or fruit. The former was the first object for which hot-houses were erected, and 
conservatories, green-houses, and plant-stoves existed in this country before any descrip- 
tion of forcing-house ; even pineries are of subsequent introduction to botanic and orna- 
mental hot-houses. The various climates and constitutions of plants require atmospheres 
of different degrees of temperature and moisture : but experience has proved, that 
the plants of every warm country in the world may be grown in one or other of the three 
following descriptions of hot-houses : — 1. The green-house, of which the varieties are the 
Sinarium, or house for Chinese plants ; the Conservatory, in which the plants are inserted 
in the soil without pots ; the Cold-frame for bulbs, and Heathery for Cape plants, &c. 
2. Tlie dry-stove, for succulent plants, or such as require a dry atmosphere ; and 3. The 
moist or hark-stove, for pines, palms, and the tropical plants which require the highest 
degree of heat, and an atmosphere moist in proportion. 

2202. Treatment common to the three species of artificial climates. ^ In general, hot-house 
exotics are kept in pots ; but in some cases, fruit-bearing plants, as the orange, and plants 
with large roots, as the Strelitzia, and luxuriant creepers, as the different Passifloras, are 
planted in the ground. The soils are, of course, very various, and can only be treated of 
with advantage under each species, tribe, or family. There are none of them, however, 
that will not thrive eitlier in bog-earth, sand, or loam, or a mixture of these. For pines, 
oranges, and large-blossomed plants, rotten leaves or old cow-dung are added with advan- 
tage, and to some of these, as to the orange and pine-apple, liquid manures are frequently 
applied. Gardeners in general are averse to the application of any thing rich to the soil 
of exotic plants which are not cultivated for their fruit, a prejudice evidently contrary to 
analogy, and originating, in all probability in the circumstance, that it is in general de- 
sirable to keep exotic plants small, both for want of room in ordinary-sized houses, and by 
that means to induce a flowering state. Now, however, when the facilities of hot-house 
building by wrought and cast iron admit of covering several acres of ground with a glass 
roof at fifty, a hundred feet, or at any distance from the surface ; and when the mode of 
heating by steam readily admits of keeping such a space at any required temperature, all 
exotic plants, where expense is not an object, may be planted in the ground duly pre- 
pared, cultivated and manured like a shrubbery, and allowed to attain their natural size. 
Such a house or scene may be watered after Loddiges' method already described (1689.), 
and its temperature regulated, if desired, by the ingenious machine of Kewley. (fig. 217.) 
With the exception of temperature, the operations in imitation of artificial climates are 
the same as those for forcing ; we shall, therefore, confine ourselves to indicating the 
temperature of its three leading departments. 

2203. The green-house is freely exposed to the influence of our atmosphere when the 
open air is not colder than 48'^ of Fahrenheit, and when winds and rains do not prevent the 
opening of the roofs or other means of ventilation. " As long as the weather continues 
fair without frost," says Abercrombie, " open the green-house windows in the daytime an 
hour after sunrise, and close at the same time before sunset. Never admit air by the 
door or sashes in foggy or damp weather, or when bleak cutting winds prevail. The admis- 
sion of air in the middle of a clear frosty day will not hurt the plants, if counteracted 
by fire heat. Admit air freely when the external temperature is at 42° by Fahrenheit, 
or above ; admit it guardedly when between 35 and 42° ; but not at all when under 35° 
before the furnace is employed." Green-house plants are generally placed in the open air 
during the five mildest months in the year, either by taking off the roofs of the houses 
when these are moveable, or by removing the pots, and placing them in the open garden. 

2204. Dry-stoves are opened night or day in the summer seasons, but only during sun- 
shine in winter and spring, beginning as in the forcing-houses, by opening the top sashes or 
ventilators first, by which the external air descends and cools down the temperature, 
partly by mixing with the internal air, and partly by forcing it out. Afterwards, when 
the temperature of the atmosphere is above 50", the lower or front sashes or ventilators 
may be opened, by which means a regular circulation or breeze is promoted in every part 
of the house, if a detached house ; and in most parts of it, if forming part of a range of 
connected houses. 

2205. Moist or bark stove. The range of temperature which bark-stove plants can endure, 
*' is from 63° to 81° of Fahrenheit, the instrument being in the middle of the house, at a 
considerable distance from the furnace, and out of reach of the sun's rays." According to 
Abercrombie the temperature by artificial heat of the bark-stove " is 58" min. 10"' max. 
When meridian summer is felt, the temperature must keep pace with the increase of heat 
in the atmosphere ; and therefore will ascend through all the intermediate degrees, to 75°, 
80*^, 85°, 90°, 95°, and even 100°. The maximum heat in the house, in July and August, 
may in general be kept down to 90'^, by free admissions of air, and by evaporation from 

E e 4 ' . 



424 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



the watei given to the plants ; altliough tha force of tlie season will sometimeii prevail to 
95'' and 100"." M'Pliail, however, found that pines will bear without injury 130°, and he 
considers that no plant w hatever will be injured by 1 20°. " It is not uncommon to give air 
to a hot-house only thi-ough the day, and to shut it up close at night, perhaps even increas- 
ing the temperature in the evening. Judicious horticulturists reverse the practice. 
Knowing, for example, that, in the West Indies, chilly and cold nights usually succeed to 
the hottest days, they ratlier imitate nature, by shutting up the house during the day, and 
tlu'owing it open at night. This practice, how ever, can only be followed in our climate in 
the summer and autumn seasons." (X'eill, in Ed. Enci/. art Hort.) Tiiis opinion is in 
unison witli Knight's, w^ho considers excess of heat during the night, as in all cases 
highly injurious to the fruit-trees of temperate climates, and not at all beneficial to those 
of tropical climates ; " for the temperature of these is in many instances low during the 
night. In Jamaica, and other mountainous islands of tlie West Indies, the aii" upon tlie 
mountains becomes, soon after sunset, chilled and condensed, and in consequence of its 
superior gravity descends and displaces the warm air of the valleys ; yet tlie sugar-canes 
are so far from being injured by tliis sudden decrease of temperature, that the sugars of 
Jamaica take a higher price in the market than those of the less elevated islands, of wliich 
the temperature of the day and night is subject to much less valuation." [Hort. Trans. 
vol. ii. p. 131.) 

Sect. VI I. Operations of Protection from Atmospherical Injuries. 

2206. The injuries lohich 2^lants may receive from the atmosphere, axe various as its 
changes. Many vegetables which flourish in Britain in the open air during the summer 
season require protection during some or all of the other seasons of tlie year. Some also, 
from the state of tlieir health, or other circumstances, requii-e to be protected from the direct 
ravs of the sun, from excessive rains, winds, frosts, and even from heat and evaporation. 
From these and other evils the gardener protects by opaque coverings or shelters of different 
kinds, and by transparent covers or glass cases, and by otlier operations and processes. 

2207. Protecting by fronds and frond-like branches is pertbraied by sticking in the 
foot-stalks of the fronds of any of the ferns, but especially of the pteris aquilina, 
branches of fir, w hin, or broom, or of any other evergreens, between the branches of wall- 
trees and the wall, so as the frond or leafy branches may project, and either retard 
the blossom by excluding the sun, as is often done in Denmark and Sweden, or protect it 
from the frost and winds, as is generally the object in Britain. Tliis is a very simple and 
economical protection for myrtles, camellias, and other tender botanical plants, trained to 
walls, or even growing in the open ground as stools, and also for fruit-trees. Archd. 
Gorrie (^Caled. Mem. vol. i. 276.) formed a frame for the more commodiously containing 
the branches of spruce and silver firs, and other evergreens ; and applied frames so 
clothed to his fruit-tree walls, on the principle. of retai-ding the blossom. The success 
was equal, and even beyond liis expectations. He covered tliem on the 20th of Februaiy, 
and removed the frames on the 1st of June. During this period, the frames were opened 
every fine day, but always shut at night. Adjoining were some trees of the same kinds, 
which were covered night and day, during tlie above period, with a woollen net. The 
shoots of these trees were infected with the curl or wrinkled leaf — a disease peculiar to 
peach-trees in exposed situations ; while those protected by the frames of branches were 
perfectly healthy ; and what is remarkable, though retarded nearly four weeks in the 
period of their blossoming, the fruit ripened one week sooner. 

2208. The advantage of using frames in covering by fronds and branches is, that the screens or protecting 
frames can be removed in the daytime ; whereas, attaching the fronds to the trees, they must, in general, 
remain till they have cfFected their object. It is easy to conceive that trees so treated must often suffer 
from want of light, and accordingly Nicol, on the whole, rather disapproves of it. " It is," he says, " a 
common practice, to screen the blossoms of wall-trees by sticking twigs of larch, or of evergreens, as 
firs, or laurels, between the branches and the wall, in such a manner as to overhang the blossoms where 
thickest; and some, instead of these, use the leaves of strong fern. These last are certainlv fitter for 
the purpose than the former mentioned, as being lighter, and less liable to hurt the blossoms, when dashed 
by the wind against them. But all these are objectionable, on account of their shading the bloom too 
much, and too constantly, from the sun and light, by which it is rendered weak, and the fruit produced 
oftjn drop away, before arriving to any'considerable size ; so that all this trouble taken goes for nothing, 
as there would probably have been as good a crop, had the trees been left to take their chance." 

2209. Protecting by straw ropes is effected by throwing the ropes in different directions 
over the trees, and sometimes depositing their ends in pails of water. It is a Dutch 
practice, and appears to have been first made known in this country by Dr. Anderson, in 
his Recreations, &c. in ] 804. James Laird appears to have tried it successfullv on wall- 
trees, and on potatoes and otlier herbaceous vegetables. His method is as follows : — 
" As soon as the buds of the trees become turgid, I place poles against the wall, in front 
of the trees, at from four to six feet asunder ; thrusting their lower ends into the earth, 
about a foot from the wall, and fastening them at the top with a strong nail, either to the 
wall or coping. I then procure a quantity of straAv or hay ropes, and begin at the top of 
one of the outer poles, making fast the end, and pass the rope from pole to pole, taking 
a round turn upon each, until I reach the end ; when after securing the end well, I begin 



Book IV. 



OPERATIONS OF PROTECTION 



425 



about eighteen inches below, and return in the same manner to the other end, and so on, 
till I have reached to within eighteen inches or two feet of the ground. I have also 
found straw ropes to be very useful in protecting other early crops from the effects of 
frost, as peas, potatoes, or kidneybeans, by fixing them along the rows with pins driven 
into the ground. Old herring nets, and branches of evergreens, are not so efficacious 
as straw ropes, which, besides being much cheaper, may be obtained in every situation." 

2210. Protecting by nets is effected by throwing either straw, hay, bass, hempen, or 
woollen nets over standard- trees, the extreme shoots of which will support the net ; or by 
throwing it over hooped beds, or hooped single plants of herbaceous vegetables, or fixing 
it over the fruit-trees trained against a wall {Jig. 218.), or by placing it over tender 
flowers and botanic plants, as auricula and hydrangea, &c. by means of net frames or 
portable cases. 

2211. The ordinary way of applying nets, Nicol observes, " is to hang them over the trees, close to 
the branches ; the flower-buds and spurs often sticking out beyond the net. Instead of being hung on in 
so unmeaning a manner, they should be placed out, at the distance of fifteen or eighteen inches from the 
tree ; being kept off by hooked sticks, with their buts placed against the wall, and at the distance of 
about a yard from each otlier. In order to make these stand firmly, the net should be first stretched 
tightly on, and be fastened on all sides. By further stretching it, to the extent of fifteen or eighteen 
inclies, over the hooked ends of the sticks, it will be rendered so firm that no wind will displace it j and the 
sticks will also be made quite fast at the same time. If the nets were doubled, or trebled, and put on in 
this way, they would be the more effectual a screen, as the meshes or openings would, in that case, be 
rendered very small." Woollen nets are deemed the best, and are now in general use in Scotland. Bass 
nets are used in Sweden, and straw nets at the Duke of Buccleugh's garden at Dalkeith. " In screening 
with nets of any kind," Nicol observes, " they are always to be let remain on night and day, tiU all danger 
of frost be over ; the trouble of putting them properly on being considerable, and there being no ne- 
cessity for repeating such trouble, as they will in nowise injure the health of the trees, being incapable of 
shading them very much." 

2212. Protecting by canvass or bunting screens is effected either by placing moveable 
canvass cases over or around detached trees ; portable hand-cases over herbaceous plants ; 
tents or open sheds over the florists' productions ; or frames or sheets against trees 
trained on walls. In all cases they should be placed clear of the tree or plant, either by 
extended, forked, or hooked sticks, or hooping, or any other obvious resource. " For 
hot-walls," Nicol observes, " they should be placed about the distance of a foot at top, 
and of eighteen inches at bottom. In using canvass or bunting screens, in either of the 
above-mentioned forms, the trees are always to be exposed to the free air and light, in 
good weather, through the day ; screening only at night, and on bad days ; applying 
them from the time the buds begin to open, till the fruit is fairly set, or till any fear of 
further danger from the effects of frost be past." 

2213. Protecting by mats is the commonest of all modes for bushes, beds, and single 
herbaceous plants. Sometimes also screens of mats sewed together, or bound in frames, 
are applied to fruit-trees, either singly or in frames, or on hooks and pegs. Nicol 
considers that they are " in no way so good, effectual, or ultimately so cheap screens as 
those of canvass." 

2214. Protecting by straw and litter is effected in herbaceous plants by laying it 
round their roots, as in the artichoke, asparagus, &c. ; or covering the tops of seedlings, 
which was formerly done, in cultivating the cucumber and melon, and is still practised 
by market-gardeners in raising radishes and other tender salading. Straw is also 
formed into coverings of various sorts for frames ; screens for projecting from walls ; 
and cones for bushes, herbaceous plants, and beehives. 

2215. Protecting by oiled iiajier frames is effected on exactly the same plan and prin- 
ciple as that by bunting or canvass screens. " Frames covered with oiled paper have 
been successfully employed at Grangemuir garden in Fifeshire. The frames are of 
wood, inch and half square, with cross bars mortised into the sides. To give support to 
the paper, strong packthread is passed over the interstices of the frames, forming meshes 
about nine inches square. Common printing (or unsized) paper is then pasted on ; and 
when this is quite dry, a coating of boiled linseed-oil is laid on both sides of the paper 
with a painter's brush. These frames are placed in front of the trees, and made move- 
able, by contrivances which must vary according to circumstances. If the slope from the 
wall be considerable, a few triangular side frames may be made to fit the spaces. At 
Grangemuir, the frames are not put up till the blossoms be pretty well expanded ; till 
which time they are not very apt to suffer from spring frosts or hail showers. In 
this way, it may be remarked, there is much less danger of rendering the blossom 
delicate by the covering, than if it were applied at an earlier period. The paper frames, 
if carefully preserved when not in use, will endure for a good many years, with very 
slight repairs." 

2216. Protecting copings and horizontal shelters, mentioned by Miller and Laurence, 
are used chiefly with a view of preventing the perpendicular cold. They are projected 
generally from the top, but in lofty walls, also from the middle, and remain on night 
and day during the cold season. When there is only a temporary coping, it is recom- 
mended by Miller and others to be hinged, and to have strings hanging down from 



426 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



every board on each side of the wall, so as the board may be projected or thrown back 
to rest on the top of the wall at pleasure. 

2217. Protecting by transparent covers is effected with small plants by placing over 
them a hand or bell glass ; with larger ones, by other portable bell or curvilinear shaped 
portable cases, and with considerable shrubs or fruit-trees by moveable cases or glass 
tents. {Jig. 226. ) For culinary seedlings, herbaceous plants in pots, and young trees 
of delicate sorts, timber frames with glass covers are used ; or the plants are placed in 
pits dug in the ground, over which sashes are laid. In whichever way transparent 
protections are used, they must be partially or wholly removed, or otherwise opened, in 
fine weather, to admit a change of atmosphere, and a free current to dry up and destroy 
the appearance of what are called damps ; and also to harden and prepare such plants for 
the removal of the covers. 

2218. Transparent screens are made by placing sashes not in use on edge, and thus 
forming as it were glass walls or partitions, which, applied to green-house plants, set 
out in the open air, have the effect of producing shelter without shade, and at the same 
time of admitting the fall of rain on the plants. Many plants receive sufficient pro - 
tection by being placed near to the south side of a wall, hot-house, or other building, 
or under a tree or bush during the winter months, without any covering or guard whatever. 

Sect. VIII. Operations relative to Vermin, Diseases, and other Casualties of Plants and 

Gardens. 

2219. The casualties of gardens, from human enemies, vermin, and diseases, are nu- 
merous, and have given rise to a variety of devices and operations. 

SuBSECT. 1. Of the Kinds of Vermin most injurious to Gardens. 

2220. The human enemies of gardens are such as break in secretly to steal clandestinely, 
to injure, or destroy ; or, under the guise of regular operators, pilfer and otherwise act as 
enemies to the garden and its proprietor. Tlie operations for deterring and detecting 
thieves are, watching by men, by dogs, by peacocks and turkeys allowed to sit on high 
trees, and by ducks. The dog is most effectual ; but peacocks and ducks are known to 
scream or cry on the approach of strangers in the night-time ; as neither of these birds 
scratch the earth, they are in some descriptions of gardens, especially nurseries, more 
useful in picking up insects than they are injurious. Man-traps, spring-guns, and 
alarums, are also set to detect and deter, and the notices of these dreadful instruments, as 
well as the fear of the law, have considerable influence. 

2221. The brute vermin which injure gardens and garden-productions may be classed 
as quadrupeds, birds, insects, and worms. 

2222. Of the quadriqied enemies, the larger are excluded by fences, and the smaller 
species which are most injurious are, the hare, mouse, mole, and rat. Where the hare 
or other similar animals are not excluded by a sufficient fence, they must be caught by 
traps or shot. Or where the hare is chiefly injurious by barking trees, smearing the 
stem with cow-dung, ordure, tar, or coal-liquor will deter them. Mice may be kept 
under by the different domestic traps, or the gardeners' or fourth figure trap, or by an 
earthen vessel with a naiTOw mouth and bellied out within, sunk in the earth, and a few 
leaves or straws placed over it, as is common about Paris. But two or three cats kept 
in a garden, are the most effectual destroyers of mice. The mode of setting the common 
moletrap is familiar to every countryman ; the true mode however of getting rid of 
moles, and one most readily put into execution is, to dig up their nests in spring. 
The heaps of earth over these nests are easily known from common mole-heaps by their 
size. Field rats are destroyed by dogs ; and house rats, where they are troublesome, 
by poison and other well known means. 

2223. The feathered enemies of gardens are numerous but not very destructive, excepting 
in very severe winters, when they eat the buds, and during the coming up of small seeds. 
To preserve ripening or germinating seeds where birds are numerous, they must either 
be covered with a net or watched by man. Scares of different sorts, as mock men or cats, 
mock hawks or eagles, miniature windmills, rattles, lines with feathers, the smell of tar 
and bruised gunpowder, &c. are of some use ; but the chief dependence must be,on watch- 
ing, nets, and the frequent use of the gun. P. Musgrave, a practical gardener, who has 
treated the subject of vermin in a scientific manner, has the following observation on this 
subject. " It is a too common practice amongst gardeners to destroy without discrimination, 
the birds which frequent their gardens. This, in my opinion, is bad policy. Although 
I am aware some of the kinds of birds are great enemies to some crops, it certainly must 
be a trifling crop indeed, that will not bear the expense of a person to watch it, or a 
net to protect it, until it is out of danger: thus the gardener preserves the birds to per- 
form a double office, — eating up the vermin from the trees, and the seeds of weeds and 
eggs of insects from the ground. I have often stood and observed the male bird, while 
the female was sitting upon her eggs or her young, fly to the spot with his bill full of 
caterpillars to feed his mate, or young ; and when the young ones become so strong as to 



Book IV. 



OF VERMIN. 



427 



accompany their parents in quest of food, it is really astonishing the number of cater- 
pillars they destroy. I can say, from my own observation, that if it was not the case 
tliat the birds destroy a vast number of caterpillars, our trees in general would exhibit 
nothing but bare stumps, for the insects would become as numerous as the locusts of 
Spain and America. It is from that circumstance that we find so few flies in com- 
parison of the great num^ber of caterpillars. I one day followed a nest of young ox- 
eyes, which had just flown, in order to see how the old ones acted. I saw them fly from 
branch to branch, and pick from the curled leaves the caterpillars, with which they flew 
to their young to feed them. From these considerations, it is my opinion, that should 
the gardener, instead of pursuing a system of indiscriminate warfare against the 
feathered tribe, avail himself of the services of these useful allies, he might, with their 
exertions and his own united, soon rid himself of those insects that have hitherto set his 
efforts at defiance." {Cat. Mem. iii. 333.) 

2224. The insects which infest plants are almost as numerous as the plants themselves : 
almost eveiy species having a particular insect which it seems destined by nature to sup- 
port. Insects are distinguished from quadrupeds, birds, and reptiles, by their more 
numerous feet, being vnthout bones, and by their head being furnished with a pair of 
antennae or horns. From the vermes, or worm-like animak, insects are suflSciently dis- 
tinguished by their having feet. 

2225. Taking a general view of insects we find most of them are oviparous ; of course 
the first state in which insects appear is that of an ovum or egg. This relates to the 
generality of insects, for there are some examples of viviparous insects, as in the genera 
aphis, musca, &c. The eggs of insects [jig. 393.) 393 
are of two sorts : the first membranaceous, like the 
eggs of the tortoise, and the other reptiles ; the other 
covered with a shell like those of the birds. Their 
figure varies exceedingly ; some are round, some 
elliptical, some lenticular, some cylindrical, some 
pyramidal, some flat, some square, but the roimd 
and oval are the most common. As an example of 
the various shapes of the eggs of insects, and of 
their natural as well as magnified size, we refer to 
those of the common slug (a), phala2na nupta (b), 
brown-tailed moth (c), currant-moth (rf), common 
gooseberry-moth (e), turnip-butterfly {f), spider 
{g), house-cricket (h), and common chafer (r). 

2226. The eggs of insects seldom increase in size, from the time they have been de- 
posited by the parent, till they are hatched ; those of the tenthredo, however, and of some 
others, are observed to increase in bulk. At first there is nothing to be perceived in the 
eggs of insects but a watery fluid ; after some little time, the head, like an obscure point, 
is observable in the centre. The little insect remains in the egg till its limbs have ac- 
quired strength to break the egg and make its escape ; the different species of insects 
remain enclosed in the egg for very diflPerent periods; some continue enclosed only a 
few days, others remain for several months. The eggs of many insects remain without 
being hatched during the whole winter, and the young insects do not come forth from 
them, till the season atwhich the leaves of the vegetables on which they feed begin to expand, 

2227. The insect in its second or caterjiillar state {fig. 394.) has been usually known by 
the name of eruca or larva, being a sort of masked form or disguise of the insect in its com- 
plete state. Tlie larva; of insects differ very much from each other, according to the several 
tribes to which they belong ; those of the butterfly (Papilio) and moth {Phalcena) tribes ai-e 
generally known by the name of caterpillars ; those of the beetle {Scarabceus), except 




428 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



such as inhabit the water, are of a thick, clumsy form, called grubs. The larvae of the 
locust, or grasshopper (Gr^Zi?w5), do not differ very much in appearance from the com- 
plete insect ; except being without wings. The larvae of flies (Afusca), bees i^Apk), &c. 
are generally known by the name of maggots, and are of a thick short form. Those of 
water-beetles (JDi/liscus) are of highly singular forms, and differ, perhaps, more from that 
of the complete insect than any other, except those of the butterfly tribe. Some insects 
undergo no change of shape, but are hatched from the egg complete in all their parts, 
and they undergo no farther alteration than that of casting their skin from time to time, 
till they acquire the complete resemblance of the parent animal. In the larv a state most 
insects are peculiarly voracious, as in many of the common caterpillars. In their per- 
fect state some insects, as butterflies, are satisfied with the lightest nutriment, while others 
devour animal and vegetable substances with a considerable degree of avidity. As an 
example of the caterpillar state of some of the commoner insects, we may refer to that of 
the privet-moth (Sphinx ligmtri) (a) ; the cabbage-butterfly (Papilio brassica) (6) ; the tur- 
nip-butterfly (P. napi) (c) ; gooseberry-moth {Phalcena wavaria) (d) ; the currant-moth 
(Ph. gi^ossularia) (^) ; the dragon-fly (Libellula virgo) (f) ; the common chafer (Scarabceus 
melolonlha) [g) ; the phryganea rhombica (fi) ; the frog-hopper (Cicada spumaria) (i) ; and 
the musca puinilionis (k). 

2228. When the larva is about to change into the chrysalis or ptipa state ( Jlg.395) it ceases to 
feed, and having placed itself in some quiet situation, lies still for several hours, and then, 
by a sort of effort, it divests itself of its external skin, and immediately appears in the dif- 
ferent form of a chrysalis or pupa ; in this state, likewise, the insects of different genera 
differ almost as much as the larvae. In most of the beetle tribe it is furnished witli short 
legs, capable of some degree of motion, though very rarely exerted. In the butterfly tribe 
it is destitute of legs ; but in the locust 
tribe it differs very little from the perfect 
insect, except in not having the wings 
complete. In most of the fly tribe it is 
perfectly oval, without any apparent mo- 
tion or distinction of parts. The pupa of 
the bee is not so shapeless as that of flies, 
exhibiting the faint appearance of limbs. 
Those of the dragon-fly (Libellula) differ 
most widely from the appearance of the 
complete insect ; from the pupa emerges 
the image or insect in its ultimate form, 
from which it never changes, nor receives 
any farther increase of growth. As ex- 
amples of the chrysalis of various insects, 
we give those of the beetle (Scarabceus me- 
lolontha) (fig- 395. a), papilio napi (b), 
P. lo, (c), phalaina grossularia (d), Ph. 
wavaria (e), tipula cornicina (f), phryganea rhombica (g), musca pumilionis, natural size 
and magnified (h, h). 

2229. The sexes of insects are commonly two, male and female. Neuters are to he met 
with among those insects which live in swarms, 

such as ants, bees, &c. As examples of the ^'^'^ 
appearance of different insects in regard to 
sex, we refer to the male, female, and neuter 
ant (fig- 396. a, b, c), and to the male or drone, 
female or queen, and neuter or working bee 
(d,e,f). 

2230. In duration, the majority of insects 
are observed to be annual, finishing the whole 
term of their lives in the space of a year or less, 
and many do not live half that time ; nay, there 
are some which do not survive many hours ; 
but this latter period is to be understood only 
of the animals when in their complete or ulti- 
mate form, for the larv« of such as are of this 
short duration have in reality lived a very long 
time under water, of which they are natives ; 
and it is observed, that water insects in general 
are of longer duration than land insects. Some 
few insects, however, in their complete state, are supposed to live a considerable time, as 
bees for instance ; and it is well known that some of the butterfly tribe, though the major 
part perish before winter, will yet survive tliat season in a state of torpidity, and again 



395 





Book IV. 



OF VERMIN. 



429 



ap]iear and fly abroad in the succeeding spring ; spiders arc also thought to live a consi- 
derable time. 

2231. The arrangement of insectR, according to the Linntean system, is divided into seven 
orders. The natural orders and families into which they have been divided by subsequent 
naturalists are very numerous ; and therefore, w-^e shall notice only the artificial orders of 
Linnaeus, viz. 1. Coleoptera; 2. Hemiptera ; 3. Lepidoptera ; 4. Neuroptera j 5. Hyme- 
noptera ; 6. Diptera ; and 7. Aptera. The leading characters of these orders, and the 
names of the genera belonging to tlicm which are most noxious to plants in a state of 
culture, will be of some use in enabling the gardener to use a correct nomenclature, as 
well as to enlighten him generally on the intricate and little understood subject of insects. 

2232. The coleoptera have a hollow horny case, under which the wings are folded when 
not in use. The principal genera are — 1. Scarabajus (beetles) ; 2. Lucanus (stag-beetle) ; 
3. Dermestes ; 4. Coccinella (lady-b)ird); 5. Curculio (weevil); C. Lampyris (glow-worm); 
7. Meloe (Spanish fly) ; 8. Staphylinus ; 9. Forficula (earwig). Like other winged insects, 
all the beetles live for some time in the form of caterpillars, or grubs. The caterpillars 
of the garden-beetle, cockchafer, &c. lead a solitary life imder ground, and consume the 
roots of plants ; those of others feed upon putrid carcasses, every kind of flesh, dried skins, 
rotten wood, dung, and the small insects called pucerons, or 307 
vine-fretters . But after their transformation into flies, many of 
the same animals, which formerly fed upon dung and putrid 
carcasses, are nourished by the purest nectareous juices extracted 
from fruits and flowers. The creatures themselves, with regard 
to what may be termed individual animation, have suffered no 
alteration. But the fabric of their bodies, their instruments of 
motion, and the organs by which they take their food, are ma- 
terially changed. This change of structure, though the animals retain their identity, 
produces the greatest diversity in their manners, their economy, and the powers of 
their bodies. The beetles {ji'r. 397.) produced in the palm 398 

called the mountain cabbage-tree ( Areca) has a grub or caterpillar 
(^g. 398.) the size of a man's thumb, extremely fat ; " fx-ied 
with butter or salt, or spitted on a wooden skewer, they are 
esteemed excellent. In taste they partake of all the spices of 
India, as mace, cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, &c. Several species 
are produced in all the palm-trees when beginning to rot, some 

larger than others, all of a pale yellow color with black heads." (Stednutns Suinnam.) 





399 




2233. Of beetles the scarabssus melolontha (Jig. 399. a) is tlie 
most common. The eggs are deposited in the ground by tlie 
parent insect, whose fore legs are very short, and well calcu- 
lated for burrowing. From each of these' eggs proceeds, after 
a short time, a whitish worm with six legs, a red head, and 
strong claws, which is destined to live in the earth under that 
form for four years, and there undergoes various changes of 
its skin, until it assumes its chrysalid form. These creatures, 
sometimes in immense numbers, work between the turf and 
the soil in the richest meadows, devouring the roots of the grass 
to such a degree that the turf rises, and will roll uj) with 
almost as much ease as if it had been cut with a turfing-knife : 
and underneath, the soil appears turned into a soft mould for 
above an inch in depth, like the bed of a garden. In this the 
grubs lie, in a curved position, on their backs, the head and 
tail uppermost, and the rest of the body buried in the mould. 
Such are the devastations committed by the grubs of the cock- 
chafer, that a whole field of fine flourishing grass, in the sum- 
mer time, became in a few weeks withered, dry, and as brittle ^ 
as hay, by these grubs devouring the roots, and gnawing away all those fibres that fastened it to the 
ground, and through which alone it could receive nourishment. The larvs having continued four years 
in the ground, are now about to undergo their next cliange : to effect this, they dig deep into the earth, 
sometimes five or six feet, and there spin a smooth case, in which they change into a pupa or chrysalis. 
They remain under this form all the winter, until the month of February, when they become perfect 
beetles ; but with their bodies quite soft and white. In May the parts are hardened, and then they come 
forth out of the earth. This accounts for our often finding the perfect insects in the ground. The most 
efficacious mode of preventing their increase is to employ proper persons to take the flies in May and June, 
before they have laid their eggs ; which, though it appears an endless task, may be done with very con. 
siderable effect, by shaking and beating the trees and hedges in the middle of the day. Children will be 
ablp « this, and, as has been proved by experiment, will, for a trifling reward (suppose a penny a hun- 
dred), bl-i . some thousands per day gathered in a single village. Domestic fowls of all kinds are particu- 
larly fond of these beetles, so that the expense of collecting them would be fully compensated by the 
quantity of food they would afford in this way. "When land is ploughed up in the spring, if the weather 
be warm, hundreds of the chafer grubs are exposed, in which case, rooks, gulls, and jays will be sure to 
detect and d%our them. These birds, therefore, should not be driven away, as the occasional damage 
they commit is amply repaid by their unceasing exertions to destroy various insects. The almost sole 
employment of rooks, for three months in the spring, is to search for this sort of food, and the havockthat 
a numerous f Jck makes amongst them must be very great. 

2234. The lady-Ui-d (Coccinella) feeds chiefly on aphides, and therefore is not considered as inji'iious to 
gardens. 

2235. The weevil{ Curculio) is a very numerous and splendid genus ; the larvae of some infest granaries, others 
may be found inside of artichoke and thistle-flowers. All the species feed on the seeds or leaves of vegetables. 
One of the most common is the nut- weevil (C. nucujn) (fig, 399. b), of which the larvai (c) and pupa {d) 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



are both nearly of the size of the perfect insect. To this genus also -belongs the insect generally known 
by the name of diamond beetle. 

2236. Bytiscus and hydrophilics are aquatic genera, inhabitants of ponds and stagnant waters, they swim 
with great dexterity ; their hind legs are particularly fitted for their residence in the water, being thui 
and flat, and having the inner edges furnished with stiff hair-like appendages which act as fins or oars ; 
the males are distinguished from the females, by having a horny flap or shield on the fore legs, near the 
setting on of the feet. The larvse (as is common with aquatic insects) remain a long time in the imperfect 
state, some two to four years ; they secrete themselves in holes in banks, and devour other insects, worms, 
and the young fry of fish, which they destroy by sucking out their juices. 

22J7. The earwig [Forficula) frequents moist ground, is very injurious to flowers and fruit, and may 
easily be taken by suspending any hollow article on a plant or twig, as it retires in the daytime to such re- 
treats, and feeds mostly during the night. 

2238. The hemipiera are all furnished with wing-cover* of a softer texture than the 
coleoptera ; these covers do not meet in a direct line as in that order, but the base of the 
left wing covers the inner margin of the right ; in some, the wings nearly cross at the 
tips ; the mouth is either situated on the breast, or inclining towards it. The principal 
genera are — 1. Blatta (cock-roach) ; 2. Gryllus (locust, grasshopper) ; 3. Fulgora 
(lantern-fly); 4. Cimex (bug, &c.) 

2239. Of the cock-roach {Blatta) many species are 
exceedingly injurious, devouring most kinds of provi- 
sions, paper, leather, and vegetable substances ; they are 
generally nocturnal insects, and are found in great 
abundance in bakehouses, and other wann places. 
They are all killed without any external injury, by 
immersion in boiling water. 

2240. The black cock-roach, improperly called the 
black beetle {B. orientalis) {fig. 400.), was originally a 
native of South America, but is now very generally 
spread throughout Europe. It cannot be considered a 
British insect, though it frequents kitchens, ovens, and 
warm places, and devours meal, bread, and otlier pro- 
visions, shoes, &c. It conceals itself during the day, 
and comes abroad in the night ; it runs quickly, and is 
very tenacious of life. They are killed by red wafers. 
The egg {a) is of a considerable size, and the pupa {b) 
larger than the perfect insect (c). 

2241. The gryllus genus comprehends a number of spe- 
ciesjsome of which are called grasshoppers,others locusts, 
and others crickets. The caterpillars of the grylli have a 
great resemblance to the perfect insects, and, in general, 
live underground. Many of these insects feed upon the 
leaves of plants ; others, which Uve in houses, prefer 
bread and every kind of farinaceous substance. 

The house-cricket {G. dotnesticus) {Jig. 401. a) is one 
of those busy Uttle insects that reside altogether in our 
dwellings, and intrude themselves on our notice, whether we wish it or not. They are partial to houses 
newly built, for the softness of the morUr enables them to form their retreats, without much difSculty, 
between the joints of the masonry, and immediately 40 1 

to open communications with the different rooms. 
They are particularly attached to kitchens and 
bakehouses, as affording them a constant warmth. 
In some of the warmer countries, this genus of 
insects is, of all the pests that mankind are subject 
to, the most injurious, destroying vegetables of 
every kind and even from their numbers alone, 
constituting one of the heaviest afflictions that can 
happen to a country. The mischiefs done by the 
blatta, or cock-roaches, is trifling, compared with 
those of this destroying tribe, for the dreadful ra- 
vages committed by the locusts are such as to reduce 
the most fertile fields to the appearance of barren 
deserts; they devour the fruits, leaves, and even 
the buds and bark of trees, and have even been 
known to devour he reeds used in thatching the 
human habitations, so unfortunate as to be visited 
by these devouring hordes. Jackson depicts their 
ravages in the empire of Morocco, and gives a figure 
of the insect {fig. 402.) of half the natural size. In 
Abyssinia,China, and other countries, the caterpillar 
or larva of certain species of roaches and locusts is, 
like that of some beetles (2232.), eaten by the natives. 

The frog-hopper, or cuckow-spit insect{ Cicada){eeds, 
on: various kinds of plants ; the grub or larva is without wings ; in' the pupa the wings are very short ; but in 
both states they are exceedingly active. The males are distinguishable by their loud chirping note, the female* 
are quite mute. In the fly state, they are found on the leaves and stems of plants, and in the immature state 
about the roots of grass and trees. The white froth- 
like spittle, which is seen on the leaves and stalks of 
many kinds of plants in the summer season, is pro- 
duced by the black-headed frog-hopper {^Cicada spu. 
mafia) (fig. 401. b), and if this froth be wiped off and 
examined, it will be found to contain the larva or 
young of the cicada : and this matter, which is dis- 
charged from its own body, no doubt serves to protect 
it from the attacks of other insects. 

2242. The plant-louse, vine-fretter, or puceron, 
{Aphis) is a very common insect, the numerous species 
bemg denominated from the trees and plants which 
they infest. The males are winged, and the females 
without wings j they are viviparous, producing their 
young alive in the spring: and also oviparous, lay. 



4CX) 






Book IV. 



OF VERMIN. 



431 



ing eggs in the aututan. As these insects derive their nourishment from the juices of the plants which 
they infest, nature has wisely ordained that the females should lay eggs in the autumn, though 
they bring forth their young alive all the spring and summer months. This is to prevent them from 
being starved for the want of food in winter. The young burst forth from their eggs in spring as soon as 
there are leaves to subsist upon. Their noxious effects are well known to the gardener. They sometimes 
migrate, and suddenly fall in showers on spots that were until then free from their ravages. Water 
dashed with force from a syringe will prove as destructive to them as any thing when on trees ; and 
smaller plants may be v/ashed witli lime-water, with tobacco- water, with elder-leaves infused in water, or 
with common soap-suds, any of which will destroy the insects. The larvae of the lady-bird eat thousands 
of them, some species of ichneumon and common ants also destroy them ; and some conjecture that it 
would probably prove serviceable to scatter ants, v/hich may always be procured in abundance, upon in- 
fested trees. The aphides sometimes settle upon the tops of beans, covering them so thickly as to make 
them appear quite black : in such cases the crops may often be preserved by cutting ott the tops^ a practice 
which is likewise adopted independently of this pest requiring it, for the purpose of increasing the 
yield of beans. {Dr. S/crimshire's Essays Introd. to Nat. Hist., vol. i. p. 149.) The rose-tree is, after a 
mild spring, greatly injured by a species of aphis {A. rosce). The best mode of remedying this evil is to 
lop offthe infected shoots before the insects are greatly multiplied, repeating the same oijeration before 
the eggs are deposited. By the first pruning a very numerous parent mcrease will be prevented, and by 
the second, the following year's supply may, in a great measure, be cut off. If it were not for the 
numerous enemies to which the aphis is exposed, their wonderful fecundity is such that the leaves, 
branches, and stems of every plant would be totally covered with them. Myriads of insects of different 
classes, of different genera, and of different species, seem to be produced for no other purpose than to 
devour the aphis. On every leaf inhabited by them we find caterpillars of different kinds. These 
teed not upon the leaves, but upon the pucerons, whom they devour with an almost incredible rapacity. 
Some of these larvae; are transformed into insects with two wings, others into flies with four wings, and 
others into beetles. While in the larva state one of these glutinous insects will suck out the vitals of 
twenty pucerons in a quarter of an hour. Reaumur supplied a single caterpillar with more than a 
hundred pucerons, every one of which it devoured in less than three hours. 

2243. The chertnes {fig. Wl. c, d, e) is a genus very generally confounded with aphis; it also inhabits 
the leaves and stems of plants, and by its punctures, produces excrescences and protuberances of various 
sizes and shapes, which are generally found to enclose either the egg or immature insect, in the larva 
state ; it is six-footed, hairy or woolly, and without wings ; and in the pupa are two protuberances from 
the thorax, which are the rudiments of the future wings. The winged insects (c) leap or spring with great 
agility, and infest a number of different trees and plants : the females {d), by means of a tube at the ter- 
mination of their bodies, insert their eggs under the surface of the leaves ; and the worms, when hatched, 
give rise to those tubercles, or galls, with whicli the leaves of the ash, the fir, and other trees, are some- 
times almost entirely covered. The old females, before depositing their eggs, expand to a comparatively- 
large size {e). 

2244. The thrips {fig. 401. /) genus consists of very small insects, found chiefly on the flowers of plants, 
and, excepting when very numerous, are not very detrimental. The natural size is very minute, and there- 
fore to search for this insect the gardener should use a magnifying glass. 

2245. Of the cochineal or coccus genus {fig. 401. g) there are several species very injurious in gardens, the 
peach, vine, pine, and orange bugs. They are very well known to gardeners, and are almost exclusively 
found in hot-houses. The males are active, but the females are very inert, being generally fixed to differ- 
ent parts of plants. The eggs, of their natural size, are mere dots, magnified {g) they appear of an oval 
shape ; the larva is proportionally small, but magnified {h) is oblong and roundish ; the males {i) only have 
wings, and require to be magnified to show their form {k) ; the female attains a considerable size {!), and, 
when hatching, becomes enveloped in a case of wool {m). Brushing off these creatures is the only effectual 
remedy, and, if set about at once and persevered in, will save the trouble of many prescribed washes and 
powders, whicli are mere palliatives. 

2246. The lepidoptera contains the butterfly, moth, and hawk-moth ; they have all four 
wings covered with scales or a sort of farina ; they have a mouth, with palpi, a spiral 
tongue ; the body covered with hair. The scales resemble feathers ; they lie over one 
another in an imbricated manner, the shaft towards the body of the insect, and the ex- 
pansion towards the end of the wing, reflecting the most brilliant colors. 

2247, Of the butterfly genus {Papilio, Ij.) many thousand species are known in Europe, and in England 
alone more than eleven hundred have been collected by a celebrated entomologist. 

9248. TTie larvce, or young, of the different kinds of butterflies and moths, when in that state in which 
they come from the egg, are called caterpillars. These, which are very minute at first, feed generally on 
the leaves of vegetables, and increase in size. They cast their skins occasionally, and sometimes chango 
in color and markings, but never in their general appearance or in their habits. Eating seems to be their 
sole employment J and when they meet with food that suits their palate, they are extremely voracious, 
committing great havoc in gardens. But the same cause which restrains the depredations of the aphides 
and other insects has also set bounds to the destruction occasioned by the caterpillar, who has myriads of in- 
ternal as well as external enemies. Many flies deposit their eggs in the bodies of caterpillars. From these 
eggs proceed small maggots, which gradually devour the vitals of the animal in which they reside. When 
about to be transformed into chrysalids, they pierce the skin of the caterpillar, spin their pods, and remain 
on the empty skin till they assume the form of flies, and escape into the air to perform the same cruel 
office to another unfortunate larva. Every person must recollect to have seen the colewort or cabbage 
caterpillar stuck upon old walls, or the windows of country-cottages, totally covered with these chrysalids, 
which have the form of small maggots, and are of a fine yellow color. One of the most formidable ene- 
mies of the caterpillar is a black worm, with six crustaceous legs: it is longer and thicker than an ordinary- 
sized caterpillar. In the fore part of the head it has two curved pincers, with which it quickly pierces the 
belly of a caterpillar, and never quits the prey till it is entirely devoured. The largest caterpillar is not 
sufficient to nourish this larva for a single day; for it daily kills and eats several of them. These 
gluttons, when gorged with food, become inactive, and almost motionless ; when in this saUated con- 
dition, young larvee of the same species attack and devour them. Of all trees, the oak perhaps nourishes 
the greatest number of different caterpillars, as well as of different insects. Among others, the oak is 
inhabited by a large and beautiful beetle. This beetle frequents the oak, probably because that tree is 
inhabited by the greatest number of caterpillars. It marches from branch to branch, and, when dis- 
posed for food, attacks and devours the first caterpillar that comes in its way. 

2249. Chrysalis state. When full grown, the caterpillar seeks some retreat, to prepare for an important 
change, viz. from the soft caterpillar, possessing motion and feeding so voraciously, to the hard chrysalis, 
fixed immoveably, and sustained without food. The retreat that is chosen and the preparation that is made 
for this important change vary essentially in different species : some retire to the sheltered situations of 
houses, walls, and other buildings ; some bury themselves in the ground ; some wrap themselves up in leaves ; 
others attach themselves to the stalks of plants ; while others again eat into the stems of vegetables, or the 
very heart of trees, and there undergo their metamorphosis. Although each kind of caterpillar seeks a 
diflferent retreat, yet all of the same species seek the same, and adopt the same means of preservation. 



432 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part 1 1. 



Such as are to lie dormant all winter, seek the warmth of our houses, or dig their way into the ground, 
below the influence of the expected frosts. Such as are to leave their prisons in a few weeks, and before 
the end of summer, roll themselves up in the leaves of those plants on which they fed. No caterpillar 
that is to remain in the state of a chrysalis till the following summer, attaches itself to an annual plant ; 
and none that is to enter on its winged state in winter (which some few do) is ever found but upon ever- 
greens. In the preparation which is made for their metamorphosis, caterpillars differ as much as in their 
selection of a proper place. Some attach themselves by a thread from tlieir tails, and are suspended per- 
pendicularly ; while others, among which is the white cabbage butterfly, by another thread across the 
body, are suspended horizontally. The silk-worm and several others spin a complete covering or case 
for "their bodies, some of fin«r materials and less agglutinated together than others. Some caterpillars form 
a ball or nest of the mould in which they are buried, glued together by their saliva, and smooihed within ; 
and others fasten two leaves together, or, curling its edges, unite two parts of the same leaf by threads 
and bands, and thus form a covering and safe retreat for themselves. 

2250. Perfect insect. After the animal has lain dormant its due time in tlie chrysalis state, the skin or 
shell bursts, and the perfect insect, in its winged state, creeps out, gradually expands its wings, and, when 
they are dried, becomes a gay inhabitant of the air. It now no longer seeks to satisfy its hunger on the 

fross food that it devoured when a caterpillar, but sips the nectar from the blossoms of the flowers, 
laving fulfilled the intentions of nature, they deposit their eggs with care, and, having thus provided for 
a future generation, the insect terminates its short but brilliant, career. In the deposition of their eggs, 
the parent butterflies and moths display wonderful instinct in seierting precisely such pLaces as are best 
adapted to their future young ; such plants, for instance, as will furnish food for the new-born cater- 
pillars, and such parts of i)lants as are not likely to be removed by decay, or such as will be exactly in 
the required stage of maturity at the time when the caterpillars are to be born. Tiius, a little instct [Tinea 
pomona) lays its eggs in the blossom, that its caterpillar may fteed on the fruit of the apple ; and several 
others act in the same provident way. 

403 

2251. The most remarkable British butter- 
flies are — the purple emperor (^Papilio iris), 
which appears in July, and is considered 
the most beautiful : the peacock butterfly 
(P. lo), whose wings are of a brownish-red 
color with black spots, is sufficiently 
common in the south of England, but 
extremely rare in the north : the tor- 
toiseshell butterfly (P. urticce) {Jig. 403.), 
which appears in its winged state about 
the month of April, is one of the most 
common, and at the same time the most 
beautiful of the British lepidoptera ; the 
upper wings are red, and marked with 
alternate bands of black and pale orange ; 
the eggs (a), caterpillar (6), and chrysalis 
(c) are each elegant in their kind. The 
mazarine blue butterfly (P. cymon) is also an admired species. " 

^2. The kaivk-jnoth, sphynge, or sphinx, is chiefly seen in the evening. The name sphynx is applied to 
the genus on account of the posture assumed by the larvas of several of the larger species, which are often 
seen in an attitude much resembling that of the Egyptian sphynx, with the fore parts elevated, and the 
rest of the body applied flat to the surface. One of the most elegant insects of this genus is tlie privet 
ha.w'k-xnoth {Sphinx ligustri) {fi^.'^Wi.), measuring 404 
nearly four inches and a half from wing's end to 
wing's end. The caterpillar(^^.394.rt), which is very 
large, is smooth, and of a fine green, with seven ob- 
lique purple and white stripes along each side: at the 
extremity of the body, or top of the last Joint, is a 
horn or process pointing backwards. This beau- 
tiful caterpillar is often found in the months of July 
and August, feeding on the privet, the lilac, the 
poplar, and some other trees, and generally changes 
to a chrysalis {fig. 404. a) ih August or September, 
retiring for that purpose to a considerable depth 
beneath the surface of the ground ; and after cast- 
ing its skin, continuing during the whole winter in 
a dormant state, the sphinx emerging from it in 
the succeeding June. The egg of the sphinx {b) is 
very different from that of the papilio. Another 
perhaps still more beautiful insect is the sphinx 
ocellata, or eyed hawk-moth, which is principally 
found on the willow-tree, in its perfect state, in the 
month of June. The largest and most remarkable 
of the British hawk-moths, is the si)hinx atropo.s, 
or death's head hawk-moth. The upper wings are 
of a fine dark. grey color, with a few slight va- 
riegations of dull orange and white : the under 
wings are of a bright orange color, marked by a pair of transverse blatk bands : the body is also orange- 
colored, with the sides marked by black bars : on the top of the thorax is a very large patch of a most 
singular appearance, exactly resembling the usual figure of a skull, or death's head, and is of a pale grey, 
varied with dull ochre color and black. When in the least disturbed or irritated, this insect emits a stfi- 
dulous sound, sometimes like the squeaking of a bat or mouse ; and from this circumstance, as well as from 
the mark above mentioned, is held in much dread by the vulgar in several parts of Europe, its appear- 
ancn being regarded as a kind of ill omen, or harbinger of approaching fate. The caterpillar from which 
this curious si)hinx proceeds, which is principally found on the potatoe and the jessamine, is in the higlicst 
degree beautiful, measuring sometimes five inches in length : its color is a bright yellow, and its sides are 
marked by stripes of a mixed violet and sky-blue color. It usually changes into a chrvsalis in the month 
of September, and emerges the complete insect in June or Julv following : some individuals, however, 
change in July or August, and produce the moth in November. 





Book IV. 



OF VERMIN. 



433 



2253. The moths [PhalceiKe) are a numerous genus like the sphinges. They fly abroad only in the evening 
and during the night, and obtain their food from the nectar of flowers. The larva is active and quick m 
motion, and preys voraciously on the leaves of plants. The most remarkable British moths are the clothes- 
moth (P. sarcifella) {Jig. 405. a) : the eggs of which are deposited on woollen clothes, furs, &c. on which the 
larvffi feed and change to chrysalids, appearing in the imago state in August. The most troublesome in 
gardens are the cabbage-moth {P. oleracea) (6), the gooseberry-moth {P. wavaria) (c), the currant-moth 
(P. grossularia) (d), and the cotlling-moth, common on fruit-trees, hedges, and oak-trees {P.pomonclla) {c). 

405 




2254. 77i€ neuroptera, or nerve- winged insects, have four naked membranaceous wings, 
but no stings ; and they differ from the last order, as their wings are without their minute 
scales or down. Most of the insects in this family are aquatic, residing in the water 
during their immature state, and resorting thereto in their perfect state, 

22.55, The dragon-fly {Libellula) is well known as frequenting rivers, lakes, pools, and stagnating waters, in 
which the females deposit their eggs. The egg, when deposited by the parent in the water, sinks to the 
bottom, and remains there till the young insect has acquired sufficient maturity and strength to burst 
from its confinement. The larva, at first small, increases to nearly half the size of the perfect fly, by 
changing its skin at different intervals, like the caterpillars of moths and butterflies, The slender-bodied 
dragon-fly (L. virgo) [fig. 406. a) is tlie most common. 

406 




2256. The day-fly {Ephemera) differs in many respects from all other insects. The larvas live in water 
(where earth and clay seem to be their only nourishment) for three years, the time they consume in pre- 
paring for their change, which is performed in a few moments. The larva, when ready to quit that state, 
rises to the surface of the water, and, getting instantaneously rid of its skin, becomes a chrysalis. This 
chrysalis is furnished with wings, which it makes use of to fly to the nearest tree or wall ; and there set- 
tling, it in the same moment quits a second skin, and becomes a perfect ephemera. In this state all the 
species live but a very short time, some of them scarcely half an hour, having no other business to per- 
form than that of continuing the race. They arc called the insects of a day ; but very few of them ever 
see the light of the sun, being produced after sunset, during the short nights of summer, and dying long 
before the dawn. All their enjoyments, therefore, excelling coition, are confined to their larva state. 
The E. vulgata {fig. 406. 6) is the largest British si>ecies, 

2257. The spring-fly {Phrygajiea) in the caterpillar state, lives in the water, and is covered with a silken 
tube. The caterpillars or larva have a very singular aspect ; for, by means of a gluten, they attacii to the 
tubes in which they are enclosed small pieces of wood, sand, gravel, leaves of plants, and not unfrequcntly 
live on testaceous animals, all of which they drag along \vith them. They are very commonly found on 
the leaves of the water-cress ; and, as they are often entirely covered with them, they have the appear- 
ance of animal plants. They are in great request among lishennen, by whom they are distinguislied by 
the name of stone or cod-bait. The fly, or perfect insect, frequents running water, in which tiie females 
deposit their eggs. P. rhombica {fig. 406. c) is common. 

2258. The hymenojHera, or four-winged insects with stings, includes the gall-insect, 
wasp, bee, ant, &c. At the extremity of the abdomen, the females of several of thege- 

F f 



434 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 




The I. manifcstator 



nera have an aculeus or stliig, that lies concealed within the abdomen, which is used as 
a weapon, and instils into the wound an acrid poison : those which want the sting are 
furnished with an oviduct that is often serrated, and with w hich the eggs are deposited, 
either in the bodies of the caterpillars of other insects, or in wood. From these eggs the 
larvaj are produced, which in some have no feet, in otliers more than sixteen. They 
change to pupce incompletce, which are enclosed in cases. Some of the insects of this 
order live in societies, others are solitary. 

2259. The gall-fly {Cynips) pierces the leaves, Sec. of plants with its sting, and deposits its eggs in the 
wound ; the extravasated juices rise round it, and form a gall 407. a) which becomes hard ; and in this 
the larva {b) lives and feeds, and changes to a pupa (c, c}, and afterwards to the imago, or perfect insect (rf]. 
The C. quercus folii {Jig. 407. d), and C. glechomatis, or ground-ivy gall-fly, are very common, 

2260. The saw-fly {Tenthredo), in ihe \cLrv a. sAate 407 
{fig. 407. e), bears a strong resemblance to some of 
*the cateriiillars of the lepidoptcrous insects ; but 
is distinguishable by the number of the feet, 
which are never fewer than sixteen, exclusive 
of the thoracic pairs ; the lar^-a? feed on the leaves 
of plants, and the pupa is enclosed in a strong 
gummy case (/), retiring in the autumn, and the 
perfect fly {g) emerges early in the ensuing spring 
The serrated sting is used' by the female in the 
manner of a saw, to make incisions in the twigs, or 
stems of plants, where it deposits its egg.s. T. rosse 
{fig. 407. e, /, g) is a common species. The T. gros- 
sularise {h) is also frequent in gardens : both are 
very troublesome species of.this genus. 

2261. The Ichneuvion is a very numerous genus, 
there being upwards of 800 British species. The 
eggs, in most kinds, are deposited in the bodies of 
caterpillars or pupa, which are there hatched : 
the larvae have no feet ; they are soft and cyhn- 
drical, and feed on the substance of the caterpillar ; 
this last continues to feed and even to undergo its 
change into a chrysalis, but never turns to a.per- 
fect insect: when the larvee of the ichneumon 
are full grown they issue forth, spin themselves 

a silky web, and change into a pupa incompieta, and in a few days the fly^ppears. 
[fig. 407. i) is common in woods. 

, 2262. The bee {Apis), u>asp {Vespa), and ant {Formica) are well tnowii. All the si^ecies of ant are of 
three sorts, male, female, '.and neuter. The neuters alone labor ; they form the ant-hill, bring in the 
provisions, feed the young, bring them to the air during the day, carry them back at night, defend them 
against attacks, &c. The females are said to be retainod merely for laying eggs, and as soon as that is 
accomplished they are unmercifully discarded. The males and females i^erish with the first cold; the 
neuters lie torpid in their nest, and thus nature compensates them by duration, what it denies them in 
intensity of enjoyment. 

2263. The diptera, or two-winged insects, have two wings, and behind or below them 
two globular bodies, supported on slender pedicles, called haltercs or poisers. At tlie 
mouth they have a proboscis, sometimes contained in a vagina, and sometimes furnislied 
at its sides with two palpi, but no maxilla. Their eyes are reticulated and large. The 
females, in general, lay eggs, but some are viviparous ; the larvaj of tlie insects of this 
order are as various in their appearance as the places in which they are bred. In general 
they do not cast their skins, but change into a pupa state. Flies, strictly so called, gad- 
flies, and gnats belong to tliis order. 

2264. The gad-fiy {(Estrus) is a germs exceedingly 408 
troublesome to horsey, cattle, and sheep, in the skins 
of which they deposit their eggs {fig. 408. n\ which 
soon change into larv'je, that feed under the skin of 
living animals (6), and often line the stomachs of 
horses under the name of bots {Clarke, in Linn. 
Trans, vol. iii.) ; the lar\'£e are soft, smooth, annu- 
late, without feet, and in most species furnished 
with hook-like appendages : the chrj salis (r) differs 
little in form from the larvse. The'O. bovis (rf) in- 
fests oxen ; O. hjemorroidalis {e), horses ; and O. ovis, 
sheep. 

2265. The crane-fly {Tipula) resembles the gnat, it 
feeds on various substances; the larvje are without 
feet, soft and cylindrical; pupa cylindrical, homed; 
some species reside amongst the roots of aquatic vege. 
tables, others amongst grass ; but by far the greater 
number are aquatic. The perfect flies are found in 
abundance in the autumnal months. TheT. oleracea, 
or long-legs, feeds on the roots of the cabbage ; and 
the T. crocata {fig. 409. a) and other species inhabit 
meadows, and are common from spring to autumn. 
The wheat-fly, T. tritici {b), twelve of which have 
been observed at one time, laying their eggs in a 
smgle ear of wheat, would soon become of serious 
injury to mankind, were not their race kept within 
due bounds by several natural enemies, particularly the ichneumon tipult?. The well-known gaffer loi>g- 
legs, so frequently seen in houses in the autumnal evenings, flying about tlic fl.ime of the candles and often 
perishing in the blaze, is the T. rivosa (c), one of the larger species of the genus. The eggs of the wheat- 
fly {d) are very small ; when magnified they appear roundish i^) ; the larvje also (/), and the perfect insect 
(i), to be studied, should be magnified (g, h). 




KooK IV. 



OF VERMIN. 




2266. The fly genus {Musea) presents many curious species. The common flesh-fly {M. vomitona) {fig. 410.a) 
deposits its eggs on the meat in our shambles and larders. These eggs (jb) speedily become larvse (r), are soon 
full grown [d), change to the chrysalis state {e), and in 410 

a month the fly appears (a). The rapid multiplication 
of the fly is thus calculated by Leuwenhoeck. " Let us 
suppose, that in the beginning of June there shall be 
two flies, a male and a female, and the female shall lay 
144 eggs, which eggs, in the beginning of July, shall be 
chafiged into flies, one half males and the other half 
females, each of which females shall lay the like num. 
ber of eggs ; the number of flies will amount to 10,000 : 
and, supposing the generation of them to proceed in 
like manner another month, their number will than be 
more than 700,000, aU produced from one couple of flies 
in the space of three m.onths." The Hessian fly {M.pu- 
pilionis) (/) is very destructive to wheat and rye, and has 
occasionally been a source of great alarm to our agri- 
culturist?. 'The cheese-fly {M-putris) (g), well known to 
housewives under the name of hopper, deposits its eggs 
in the crevices or holes of the cheese, whence those nu- 
merous maggots (/i), that so much amuse us by their 
agility and surprising leaps. One of these insects, not a 
quarter of an inch in length, has been known to leap 
out of a box six inches deep. The chrysalis (2) is 
straight and crusty. 

2267. The gnat {Cttlex) is frequent in the neighbor- 
hood of waters and marshy places. In southern re- 
gions there is a larger species, which is known by the 
name of musquito. Its bite is painful, raising a 
considerable degree of inflammation, and its continual piping note is exceedingly irksome where it abounds, 
especially during the night. When it settles to inflict the wound and draw the blood, it raises its hind 
pair of feet. In Lapland, the injuries the inhabitants sustain Irom it are amply repaid by the vast num- 
bers of water-fowl and wild-fowl which it attracts, as it forms the favorite food of their young. The 
fecundity of the common gnat {C. pipiens) (fig. 410. k) is as remarkable as that of the flesh-fl_v. 

2268. The tabanus genus greatly resembles musca, and produces some species troublesome to men and 
other animals on whose blood they feed. The spider fly (Ilippobosca) inhabits woods. The species known 
as the forest-fly [H. equina) [fig. 410. /) is particularly tormenting to the horse. 

2269. The aptera, or insects without wings in both sexes, is composed of genera of such 
varied forms, that no other general characters can be affixed. Linnaeus comprehended in 
this order spiders, lice, lobsters, crabs, shrimps, &c. which Leach and most other modern 
naturalists class separately. 

2270. The louse {Pediculus) and flea (Pulex) are well known : the only genera of this order which ai e trou- 
blesome in gardens are the mite-spider {Acarus), the common spider (Aranea), and the woodlouse (Onivcvi.^ 




411 



2271. The red spider is the Acarus tellurius, L. (fig. 411. a), and 
the same name is also applied by gardeners to the scarlet acarus 
{A. holosericeus, L.) (6), the only two British species of the genus 
which infest plants, and to which perhaps they do more injury 
than all other insects put together. Watering over the leaves is 
the well known preventive and remedy : the water should be 
applied to both sides of the leaf in a finely divided state, and with 
great force, so as to dash the insects to the ground. For this 
purpose Read's syringe is the most eiKcient implement at present 
in use. The sheep-tic {A. reduviiis) {c), the dog-tic {A. ricini/s) 
(d), the cheese-mite [A. siro), and the itch-mite (mite de la gale, 
Fr.) [A, exulcerans, L.) which inhabits the ulcers of the itch, are 
the principal species mentioned by Linnseus ; but some naturalists 
consider that every animal, and most plants, have their peculiar 
species of acarus. The harvest bug is by some considered an 
acarus, and by others a phalangium. 

2272. The common spider {Aranea) is a numerous genus, and 
very prolific : as they live entirely on insects they cannot be con- 
sidered as otherwise injurious in gardens than by their unsightly appearance. 

2273. The wood-louse {Oniscus) is of retired habits, shunning the light and the heat of the sun. It 
lives on leaves, fruit, and also on animal substances, and car.ts its crust or skin like the spider. In 
gardens it is easily caught by bundles of reeds or beans, or other hollow stalks, like the earwig. The 
O. aquaticus {fl^. c) is common in springs and clear ponds, or cisterns of watei\ The dog-tic and water onis- 
cus both re<fuire to be magnified to be studied properly (/, g). 

Ff 2 




136 SCIENCE OF GARDENING. Part II. 

227-1. Of worms (class Vermes, L.), there are only a few genera which are materially in- 
jurious in gardens, the earth-worm [Lumbricus), the slug (Z<i»uii), and the snail (^Helix). 

22.75. The slug {Umax) is without a sheU, and distinguished by its lateral pore. There are 16 British 
species : the L. ater {fig. 412. b), alba, and hyalinus are the most common in gardens ; and the L. agrestis 
{a) is common both in gardens and fields, and is the species recommended to be swallowed by consumptive 
persons. The snail {Helix) is a numerous genus, and, hko tlie slug, very destructive to plants and fruit : 
both snails and slugs are hermaphrodite, having both sexes united in each individual ; they lay their eggs 
with great care in the earth, and the young ones are hatched, the slugs without shells, and the snails 
with shells completely formed. They are most troublesome in spring and autumn, and during mild 
weather in winter. In dry warm weather, and during frosts, they retire into the earth and remain there 
in a torpid state. The most common species is the H. hortcnsis { fi£. 412. c), or garden-snail, of which it is 



412 




remarked, that having once attacked a leaf or fruit, it will not begin on another till the first is wholly 
eaten. Snails, slugs, and worms, may be annoyed by caustic substances scattered over them, or by water, 
ing with bitter infusions, acids or alkalis, as vinegar, or what is equally effectual and cheaper, lime-water ; 
but the only effectual way of getting rid of snails in gardens is by hand-picking. They may be collected 
under decaying leaves or haulm, laid down on purpose to attract them. In this way a garden may soon, 
and at little trouble and expense, be effectually cleared of the worm class of enemies, 

SuESECT. 2. Operations for subduing Vermin. 

2276. The ope ratio 7is for deteriing the human, quadruped, and feathered enemies (f 
gardens are few, and have been already noticed. (2220. 2222, 2223.) 

2277. The operations for destroying insect vermin, or counteracting their injurious 
effects, are of three kinds, preventives, palliatives, and efficient processes. 

2278. The preventive operations ^vc those oi the best culture in the most extensive sense of the term, 
including what relates to choice of seed or plant, soil, situation, and climate. If these are carefully at- 
tended to, it will seldom happen that any species of insect will exist in gardens to an injurious degree. 
But some parts of culture, such as climate, are often beyond our control ; as, for example, when a very dry 
spring and east winds prevail, in which case many insects increase, or ratlier their larvae are hatched and 
reared under such favorable circumstances that few of them die, and all of them become strong in pro- 
portion as the plants on which they live, in consequence of tlie dry weather (favorable to the insects), 
become weak. In sucli a case as this, or its reverse, tliat of a series, of cold moist weather, the gardener 
cannot apply good culture to plants in the open air, and therefore cannot prevent the increase of insects. 
In artificial plant-habitations of every kind, however, properly constructed, his power in regard to culture 
B complete, and therefore he may always prevent, not the existence, but the injurious increase of insects, 

2279. The palliative operations are various. Artificial bad weather will annoy every description of organised 
being, and especially animals. Excessive waterings, stormy applications of water with a syringe, violent 
wind produced by shaking the plant or tree in the air instead of moving the air round the tree, as in natural 
wind ; these and similar operations will materially injure and annoy insects, both in their common func- 
tions and in the work of generation, hatching, and rearing. Insects may be farther annoyed by throwing on 
them acrid waters or powders, as tobacco-water, lime-water, powdered quick-lime, soot, ashes, barley-awns, 
&c. &c. The smell of tar is particularly offensive to various moths and butterflies ; and it is said, if a'little of 
it is placed under plants, or if they are watered with tar- water, these insects will not lay their eggs on them. 
It is also said that if shreds of flannel are hung on trees or plants, moths and butterflies will lay their 
eggs on the shreds, in preference to the leaves of the plant. The effect of the fumes of tobacco, sulphur, 
urine, &c. are well known. Saline substances mixed with water are injurious to most insects with tender 
skins, as the worm and slug ; and hot water, %vhere it can be applied without injuring vegetation, is 
equally, if not more powerfully, injurious. Water heated to 12U or 130 degrees will not injure plants 
whose leaves are fully expanded and in some degree hardened ; and water at 200 degrees or upwards 
may be poured over leafless plants. There are various other ways in which insects may be annoyed, and 
often in part destroyed, which will be pointed out in treating of the plants which particular sjiecies 
inhabit. The effects of insects may also be palliated on one species of plant, by presenting to them 
another which they prefer : thus wasps are said to prefer carrots, the berries of the yew, and the honey 
of the hoya, to grapes ) honey or sugared water to ripe fruit, and so on. One insect or animal may also 
be set to eat another, as ducks for slugs and worms, turkeys for the same pur^wse, and caterpillars, and 
ants for aphides, and so on. 

2280. llie operations for the utter removal or destniction of ijisects are few, and chiefly that of hand- 
picking, or otherwise removing or killing by manual operations with a brush, sponge, or net Destruction 
by hand-picking should, if possible, commence with the parent insect in its fly or perfect state before it 
has deposited its ova. Thus the gathering of moths, butterflies, and large wasps may save the gathering 
afterwards of thousands of caterpillars and the drowning of hundreds of wasps, as preventing weeds from 
speeding in a garden will soon eradicate them altogether. It is no small proof of tlie advantages of a 
knowledge of natural history to gardeners, and also of the progress of knowledge among this ingenious 
.ind useful class of artisans, that a practical gardener lias actually practised for several years the catching 
ui liiotlvs pi"cve:it thcni i'r.;ni L.ying their eggs ou his trees. F. Musgrcvc, gardener, at May-field near 



Book IV. 



OF DISEASES. 



437 



Edinburgh, has almost completely cleared his trees of caterpillar;B by the following mode: " I examine," h i 
says, " the trees I wish to clear, in the beginning, of June, tnat being the time the moths begin to leave the 
chrysalis state. When I find one of those of a dark color, I am aware the insect will make its appearance 
in the course of a few days. That chrysalis I examine daily until the insect comes out ; and although I do 
not see the insect emerging from the shell, yet I am sure to find it in the neighborhood of the covering 
which it has left, exhausted with fatigue in consequence of the exertion in extricating itself from 
confinement. At first I put a few of the chrysalids into paper bags, which gave me an opportunity 
of examining them minutely. I also watched some of the chrysalids of the bore-worm, which causes 
gooseberries to fall off" in great quantities by boring into the berry, and I found that fly to be of the same 
class with those which infest the apple, pear, and cherry trees. I was also able to prove decidedly, that 
the females come into existence full of the rudiment of eggs, which I found by dissecting several of them, 
and examining the ovarium. I also found, by carefully noticing every insect which I caught, that the 
greater number were females." 

Having made himself completely acquainted with the enemy with which he had to contend, he con- 
tinued his labors: " going over a number of wall-trees which I fixed upon for the experiment, with a 
branch of a willow-tree in my hand, with which I switched the leaves and branches, for it is amongst the 
leaves and branches of the trees the insect secretes itself ; but in order that it may be done with more ex- 
pedition and success, I would recommend a birch-besom to be used in preference. There should be two 
persons, one to go over the leaves and branches of the trees, in order to make the insect leave its retreat, 
and one with a net attached to a pole to catch the fly, or to destroy it if it should alight on the ground, as it 
will be apt to do, if the day is clear and sunny, for these insects cannot bear the bright rays of the sun, which 
is the cause of their remaining amongst the leaves during the day ; but should the day be dull, the net 
will be highly necessary to catch the insect, as it will then likely fly to some distance before it alights. 
ITiis operation must be continued until all the insects are destroyed ; but it is not needful that it should 
be performed every day, but every other day, as the insects are some days from the chrysalid state before 
they are ready to deposit their ova, which is done during night. 

The method followed with standards is as follows : — The time for going over them is generally two or 
three weeks later than the wall-trees. It is a singular fact, that the insect keeps pace with the leafing of 
the tree. With the standards nothing will be required but the net, as the branches can be gently shaken, 
which is sufficient to cause the fly to leave its nestling-place ; but as it might be the means of bringing too 
many down at one time, if the tree was shaken all at once, care must be taken to shake tlie branches one 
by one. Where the trees are lofty, a pole with a hook attached to the end may be used. 

The net used is made of strong black gauze, that color being best for the purpose. It is a yard and a 
half in circumference, a foot deep, and attached to a whalebone rim. The handle is made of common 
wood, about a yard and a half long. With regard to the manner in which it should be used, all I have 
to say is, that I kept the net in my right hand ; and the moment an insect was driven from its place, I 
swung the net in the direction opposite to that in which it flew. If I missed in the first attempt, the 
second generally succeeded. 

The success of this plan of destroying moths has succeeded equal to my expectations ; indeed it carries 
conviction on the face of it. It is not only simple, and can be performed at very little expense ; but it is 
sure, and can be acted upon in the most extensive orchards. When we consider the great number of 
eggs one destroys by killing a single female in the beginning of the season, the utility of the plan I think 
will at once appear. Supposing, then, that any person, by going over twenty or thirty trees each day, 
which can be done easily in a few hours, kills 200 insects; there will be no fewer than 10,000 eggs destroyed 
or prevented. If the operation be carried on for a month only, every alternate day over this number of 
trees, the amount of eggs destroyed will be 150,000. This is actually what I have done myself: there 
is surely, then, very little reflection necessarj-, to convince any unprejudiced person, that by following 
the same plan, he might soon be able to bid defiance to such a formidable foe. When we also take 
into consideration how much the success of the crop depends upon an uninjured foliage, and a free and 
strong expansion of blossom, the propriety of adopting this method must be obvious : hitherto all the 
plans of liming, oiling, peeling, &c. have failed." {Caled. Mem. iii. 333.) 

2281. Catching the winged insect, or hand-picking the eggs, or larvae, are the only certain modes of pre- 
venting the ravages of the gooseberry caterpillar. As soon as the eggs which are white, and no thicker 
than hairs, appear on the under side of the leaf, they should be rubbed off", or the entire leaf gathered. 
It is true, watering the leaves well, and then dusting them with powdered quick-lime, will destroy all 
those eggs which are wet at the time the lime falls on them ; but will it fall on the under sides of the leaves? 
Watering with lime-water is better ; but even that operation is less certain, more troublesome, and not much 
more expeditious than hand-picking taken in time. In exti eme cases, both modes may be combined. 

2282. The aphides may be destroyed by the fumes of tobacco from the fumigating bellows, or by 
excessive watering. 

2283. The red spider andi most insects maybe destroyed by the fumes of sulphur, produced by flues, the 
tops of which have been washed with it ; or from hot plates, or by burning sulphurated paper and rags, 
or distilling it with a retort. Ammoniacal gas, produced either from urine, recent stable-dung, or dis- 
tillation from bones, or other substances, is also, where the air is charged with it for sometime together, 
an effectual mode of destroying all animals. Watering, and a moist and warm atmosphere, will destroy 
the red. spider and keep under all insects. Heat and moisture combined, indeed, are what the gardener 
has chiefly to depend on, especially in every description of plant-habitation. This will appear more fully 
in the practical parts of this work, where the particular application of these general remarks is made to 
the culture and treatment of particular plants. 

2284. Snails and slugs, as already observed, are most effectually destroyed by lures of decayed leaves or 
haulm and hand-picking. (2275.) 

The earth'Worm is most effectually kept under by watering with lime-water. Salt, vinegar, alum, or 
other acrid waters, wiU have the same effect, but are injurious to vegetation, and besides less economicaL 
The lime-water, as Forsyth directs, is to be prepared by pouring water on quick-lime, and letting it stand 
till it settles clear, the ground infested with worms should have their casts scraped off", and then the water 
should be applied from the rose of a watering-pot. The evening, and early in the morning, or on ap- 
proaching rain, ai'e the best seasons. 

2285. The young gardener should carefully and assiduously study the nature, names, and classification 
of insects ; and make himself acquainted with all the species he can pick up, either in gardens, houses, or 
fields. Besides being of material use to him in his profession, he will find it a never failing source of 
interest and enjoyment, at least equally so with the study of botany. For this purpose let him read the 
articles on insects in such Encyclopedias as come within his reach, and borrow, or otherwise procure, a 
reading of the Essays and Works of Dr. Skrimshire, of Wood, Kirby and Spence, Donovan, Samouelle, and 
other authors that he will find quoted and referred to in this and other books which mention the subject 

SuBSECT. 3. Operations relative to Diseases and other Casualties. 
2286. The subject of the accidents and diseases to which plants are liable has been 
treated at length in the "study of the vegetable kingdom" (Part II. Book I. Chap. IX.) ; 
and it there appeared, that veiy little could be done by art in curing diseases ; but that 
much might be done to prevent them by regimen and culture, and something to the 
healing of wounds by amputation and exclusion of air. 

F f 3 



438 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt ir. 



2287. The operathnsjur ike cure of accidents 3Lre chiefly cutting cfF injured parts, sup- 
porting, and coating over. Amputation must be performed with suitable instruments^ 
and so as to leave a smooth section calculated to throw off the water. In cutting out 
large wounds which are deep, the chisel will require to be used ; and in cutting off dis- 
eased or injured parts from small and delicate plants, a very sharp knife. Supporting 
the stem or trunk of bruised and wind-shaken trees, or such as are otherwise injured or 
rendered less secure in their general structure, is an obvious operation, and i-equires to he 
done promptly and effectually. It is also requisite in the case of cutting out such deep 
wounds as m.ay endanger the stems or branches of trees or plants exposed to the free air^ 
Coating over wounds to exclude air is a useful practice ; and though it may be dispensed 
with in the case of small wounds on healthy plants, ought never to be neglected in tlic 
case of large wounds on any description of plants, or small ones made on such as are 
sickly. The usual application is now clay and loam made so thin as to be laid on with 
a brush, and two or three coats may be given. On large wounds paint, or putty and 
paint may be used; and in the case of deep hollow wounds, the part may be filled up 
with putty, or putty and small stones, for the sake of saving the former, and tiien made 
smooth and well painted. 

2288. The operations for curi)ig diseases are few, besides those for the cure of accidents. 
Washes are applied by the sponge, brush, syringe, or watering pot, for filth, mildew, and 
blight; and for the two latter diseases sulphur, or powdered lime is sometimes added l>y 
di-edges or the hand while the plant is wet. Slitting the bark is the operation for hide- 
bound trees; and jjeeling off the outer, rough, and already separating bark by scraping- 
irons and bark-scalers, is resorted to in the case of old trees, as cutting out is in the case 
of canker. In scaling off care must be t-aken not to injure the inner bark ; and in cutting 
out for canker shaqj instruments must be used, and a coating applied. (See 873. to 9J1.) 

Sect. IX. Operations of Gathering, Preserving, and Keeping. 

2289. Gathering, undeserving, and keeping vegetable productions, form an important part 
of the horticultural division of gardening. Some productions, after being reared and 
perfected, are to be gathered for immediate consumption ; but a part require to be pre- 
served in a state fit for culinary purposes; or for sowing or dispersing; or sending to a 
distant market, family or friend. 

2290. Gathering vegetables or their different parts is, in part, pei formed with a knife, as 
in cutting off some fruits, as the cucumber, or heads of leaves, as the cabbage ; and in 
part by fracture or torsion with the hand, as in pinching off strawberries between the 
finger and thumb, gathering peas, with one hand applied to retain the stem finn, and the 
other to tear asunder the peduncle, &c. In all cases of using the knife, the general 
principle of cutting is to be attended to, leaving always a sound section on the. living 
plant. Gathering with the hand ought to be done as little as possible, as there are now 
garden-pincers for all such purposes, which do the work quicker, with far less injury to 
the plant, and more regard to cleanliness. Sometimes the entire plant is gathered, as in 
celery and onions ; and at other times only the root or tuber, as in potatoes and carrots. 
In taking up these, care must be taken not to injure' their epidermis, as on the preserv- 
ation of this depends their retention of juices, beauty, and keeping. 

2291. The gathering of hardy fruits should take place "in the middle part of a dry 
day ; not in the morning before the dew is evaporated, nor in the evening when it begins 
to be deposited. Plums readily part from the twigs when ripe : they should not be much 
handled, as the bloom is apt to be rubbed off. Apricots may be accounted ready when 
the side next the sun feels a little soft upon gentle pressure with the finger. They ad- 
here firmly to the tree, and would over-ripen on it and become mealy. Peaches 
and nectarines, if moved upwards, and allowed to descend with a single jei-k, will separate, 
if ready ; and they may be received into the peach-gatherer { fig. 148.) or any tin funnel 
lined with velvet, so as to avoid touching with the fingers or bruising. The old rule for 
judging of the ripeness of figs, was to observe if a dro]D of water v,'as hanging at the end 
of the fruit ; a more certain one is, to notice when the small end becomes of the same 
colour as the large end. The most transparent grapes are the most ripe. All the 
berries on a bunch never ripen equally ; and it is therefore proper to cut away unripe 
or decayed berries before presenting the bunches at table. Autumn and winter pears 
are gathered, when dry, as they successively ripen. The early varieties of apples 
begin to be useful for the kitchen in the end of June; particularly the codlins and 
the jenneting ; and in July they are fit for the dessert. From this time till October or 
November, many kinds ripen in succession. The safest rule is to observe when the 
fruit begins to fall naturally. Another easy mode of ascertaining, is to raise the fruit 
level with the footstalk;- if ripe, it will part readily from the tree : this mode of trial is 
also applicable to pears. A third criterion is to cut up an apple of the average ripeness 
of the crop, and examine if its seeds have become brown or blackish ; if they remain 
uncolored, the fruit is not ready for pulling. Immature fruit never keeps so well 



Book I V. 



GATHERING AND PRESERVING. 



439 



as that which nearly approaches maturity ; it is more apt to shrivel and lose flavor. 
Winter apples are left on the trees till there be danger of frost : they are then gathered 
on a dry day." [Ed. Enajc. art. Hort.) In no case should fruit be gathered with the 
hand when any of the different descriptions of fruit -gatherers {Jigs. 141. to 153.) can be 
used. With one or other of these, and the use of proper ladders {figs. 206. to 209.), every 
kind of fruit, from the gooseberry to the walnut, may be gathered without bruising, 
soiling, or fingering the fruit, and without injuring the tree. 

2292. Tlie gathering of seeds should take place in very dry weather, when the seed- 
j)ods, by beginning to open, give indications of perfect ripeness. Being rubbed out with 
the hand, beat with a stick, or passed through a portable threshing-machine, they are then 
to be separated by sieves and fanners from their husks, &c. and spread out in a shaded 
airy loft till they are so dry as to be fit for putting up in linen or paper bags, or putting 
in drawers in the seed-room till wanted. 

2293. Preserving heads or leaves of vegetables is effected in cellars or sheds, of any 
temperature, not lower, nor much above the freezing point. Thus cabbages, endive, 
chiccory, lettuce, &c. taken out of the ground with their main roots in perfectly dry 
weather, at the end of the season, and laid in, or partially immersed in sand or dry 
earth, in a close shed, cellar, or ice-cold room, will keep through the winter, and be 
fit for use till spring, and often till the return of the season of their produce in the 
garden. The German gardeners are expert at this practice ; and more especially in 
Russia, where the necessities being greater have called forth greater skill and attention. 

2294. Flowers and leaves for decoration may be preserved by drying between leaves of 
paper, or in ovens ; or imbedded in their natural position in fine dry sand, placed in that 
state in an oven. In this pot of sand they will keep for years ; but they must not be 
taken out till v/anted. When at a little distance it will be difficult to distinguish them from 
such as are fresh gathered. A rose is cut when the petals and leaves are perfectly dry, 
a little sand is put in the bottom of the flower-pot, the rose is stuck in the sand, and sand 
is then slowly sprinkled in till the rose be covered and the pot filled. At Paris and 
Milan the more popular flowers are frequently preserved in this way. 

2295. Roots are preserved in different ways, according to the object in view. Tuberous 
roots, as those of the dahlia, pa^onia, tuberose, &c. intended to be planted in the suc- 
ceeding spring, are preserved through, the winter in dry earth, in a temperature rather 
under than above what is natural to them. So may the bulbous and tuberous roots of com- 
merce, as hyacinths, tulips, onions, potatoes, &c. ; but for convenience, these are kept either 
loose in cool dry shelves or lofts, or the finer sorts in papers, till the season of planting. 

229G. Potaiues, turnips, and all similar roots which it is desired to preserve in a dor- 
mant or unvegetating state beyond the season of planting, have only to be sunk in pits 
to such a depth as that vegetation will not take place. A pit filled with these roots 
to within five feet of the surface, and the remainder compactly closed with earth, and 
kept quite dry, will keep one or more years in a sound state, and without vegetating. 
{Farmers' Mag.)_ For convenience of using, there should be a number of small pits, or 
rather of large pots of roots, so buried at a little distance from each other, as that na 
more may be taken up at a time than what can be consumed in a few days. The mould 
or compost ground will, in general, be found a convenient scene for this operation ; and, 
for a small family, pots contrived with covers, or with their saucers, used as covers, may be 
deeply immersed in a large shaded ridge of earth, to be taken up, one at a time, as 
wanted. Grain, apples, and potatoes are kept the whole year in deep pits, in sandy soil, 
foiTned in the village-greens of some parts of Gallicia and Moravia, and in banks and 
rocks in Spain. Oldacre informs us, in his account of his rnushroom-house {Hort. Tr. 
vol. ii.), that he preserved broccoli in it through the winter ; and Henderson, of Brechin, 
makes use of the ice-house for preserving " roots of all kinds till the return of the natural 
crop." " By the month of April," he says, "the ice in our ice-house is found to have 
subsided four or five feet ; and in this empty room I deposit the vegetables to be pre- 
served. After stuffing the vacuities viath straw, and covering the surface of the ice with 
the same material, I place on it case-boxes, dry ware casks, baskets, &c. ; and fill them 
with turnips, carrots, beet-roots, celery, and, in particular, potatoes. By the cold of the 
place,^ vegetation is so much suspended, that all these articles may be thus kept fresh and 
uninjured, till they give place to another crop in its natural season." 

2297. Green fruits are generally preserved by pickling or salting, and the operation 
is performed by some part of the domestic establishment ; but in some countries it is 
made the province of the gardener, who, in Poland, preserves cucumbers and khol- 
rabbi by salting, and then immersing them in casks at the bottom of a deep well, where 
the water, preserving nearly the same temperature throughout the year, impedes their 
decay. It must be confessed, however, that vegetables so preserved are only fit to 
be eaten with animal food, as preserved cabbage (i. e. sour-crout,) or other salted 
legumes. 

2298. Such rij^e fruit as may be preserved is generally laid up in lofts and bins, or 

F f 4 



440 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



shelves, when in large quantities, and of baking <jualities ; but the better sorts of apples 
and petu-s are now preserved insets of drawers {fig' 279.), sometimes spread out in 
them, at other times wrapt up in papers ; or placed in pots, cylindrical earthen vessels, 
among sand, moss, paper, chaff, hay, sawdust, &c. or sealed up in air-tight jars or casks, 
and placed in the fruit-cellar. ( 1 704. ) The finest pears, as the cressannes and chaumon- 
telles, should have tlieir footstalks previously tipped with sealing-wax, as practised in 
France and the isles of Jersey and Guernsey. 

2299. Hitt's method of keeping pears may be here mentioned. Having prepared a 
number of earthenware jars, and a quantity of dry moss (different species of hypnum 
and sphagnum), he placed a layer of moss and of pears alternately till the jar was 
filled ; a plug w^as then inserted, and sealed round with melted rosin. These jars were 
sunk in dry sand to the depth of a foot ; preferring a deep cellar for keeping them to 
any fruit-room. 

2300. Miller, after sweating and wiping pears, in which operations he says great care 
must be taken not to bruise the fruit, packs them in close baskets, having some wheat- 
straw in the bottom and around the sides to prevent bruising, and a lining of thick soft 
paper to hinder the musty flavor of the straw from infecting the fruit. Only one 
kind of fruit is put in each basket, as the process of maturation is more or less rapid 
in differing kinds. A covering of paper and straw is fixed on the top, and the basket 
is then deposited in a &iry room, secure against the access of frost, " and the less air 
is let into the room, the better the fruit will keep." A label should be attached to each 
basket, denoting the kind of fruit j for the basket is not to be opened till the fruit be 
wanted for use. 

2301. James Steivart preserves his choice apples and pears in glazed earthenware jars, 
provided with tops or covers. In the bottom of the jars, and between each layer of fruit, 
he puts some pure pit-sand, which has been thoroughly dried on a flue. The jars are 
kept in a dry airy situation, as cool as possible, but secure from frost. A label on the 
jar indicates the kind of fruit ; and when this is wanted or ought to be used, it is taken 
from the jars, and placed for some time on the shelves of the fruit-room. The less ripe 
fruit is sometimes restored to the jars, but with newly dried sand. In this way he pre- 
serves colmars and other fine French pears till April ; the terling till June ; and many 
kinds of apples till July, the skin remaining smooth and plump. Others who also em- 
ploy earthenware jars, wrap each fruit in paper, and, in place of sand, use bran. 
{Ed. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2302. Ingram, at Torry, in Scotland, finds that for winter pears two apartments are 
requisite, a colder and a wanner ; but the former, though cold, must be free from damp. 
From it the fruit is brought into the Avarmer room, as wanted ; and by means of increased 
temperature, maturation is promoted, and the fruit rendered delicious and mellow. 
Chaumontelles, for example, are placed in close drawers, so near to a stove, that the tem- 
perature may constantly be between 60° and 70^ Falir. For most kinds of fruit, how- 
ever, a temperature equal to 55° is found sufficient. The degree of heat is accurately 
determined by keeping small thermometers in several of the fruit-drawers, at different 
distances from the stove. The drawers are about six inches deep, three feet long, and 
two broad ; they are made of hard wood, fir being apt to spoil the flavor of the fruit. 
They are frequently examined in order to give air^ and to observe the state of the fruit, it 
being wiped when necessary. Ingram remarks, that, in Scotland particularly, late 
pears should have as much of the tree as possible, even although some frost should 
supervene ; such as ripen freely, on the other hand, are plucked rather before they reach 
maturity. 

2303. Winter apj^les are laid in heaps, and covered with mats or straw, or short 
or grass well dried. Here they lie for a fortnight or more, to sweat, as it is called, or 
to discharge some of their juice ; after which the skin contracts in a ceilain degree. 
They are next wiped dry with a woollen cloth, and placed in the fruit-room. Sometimes, 
when intended for winter dessert fruit, they are made to undergo a farther sweating ; 
and are again wiped and picked : they are then laid singly on the shelves, and covered 
with paper. Here they are occasionally turned, and such as show any symptoms of decay 
are immediately removed. 

2304. The sweating of fruit is entirely disapproved by some, who afllirm, that it thereby 
acquires a bad flavor, or, at any rate, that the natural flavor of the fruit is deteriorated, 
and that it gets dry and mealy. They consider it better to carry the fruit directly from 
the tree, carefully avoiding all sort of bruising, and to lay it thinly on the shelves of the 
fruit-room ; afterwards wiping each fruit, if necessary. The room, they say, should be 
dry, and the only use that should be made of a stove, is to take off the damp. Such 
is the prevailing practice at the present time. From what we have observed in tlie 
practice of such as are successful in preserving bread corn, and other seeds, a<» acorns, 
nuts, &c. we are inclined to think that sweating, by getting rid of a quantity of moisture, 
must, to a certain extent, be a beneficial practice. Marshall, and rfiost French gar- 



Book IV. 



GATHERING AND PRESERVING. 



441 



deners, and English gardeners of the last century, are in favor of the practice, and those 
of the present day are against it. 

2305. Knight's experience in preserving fruits, with the rationale of his practice, is given 
in the following valuable extract: — 

Fruits which have grown upon standard-trees, in climates sufficiently warm and favorable to bring them 
to maturity, are generally more firm in their texture, and more saccharine, and therefore more capable 
of being long preserved sound, than such as have been produced by wall-trees ; and a dry and warm 
atmosphere also operates very favorably to the preservation of fruits, under certain circumstances, but 
under other circumstances, very injuriously : for the action of those elective attractions which occasion 
the decay and decomposition of fruits, is suspended by the operation of different causes, in diflerent 
fruits, and even in the same fruit, in different states of maturity. When a grape is growing upon the vine, 
and till it has attained perfect maturity, it is obviously a living body, and its preservation dependent upon 
the powers of life ; but when the same fruit has some time passed its state of perfect maturity, and has 
begun to shrivel, the powers of life are probably no longer, or at most very feeble, in action ; and the 
fVuit appears to be then preserved by the combined operation of its cellular texture, the antiseptic powers 
of the saccharine matter it contains, and by the exclusion of air by its external skin ; for if that be de- 
stroyed, it immediately perishes. If longer retained in a dry and warm temperature, the grape becomes 
gradually converted into a raisin ; and its component parts are then only held in combination by the 
ordinary laws of chemistry. 

A nonpareille apple or a catillac, a d'auch, or bergamotte de bugi pear, exhibits all the characters of a 
living vegetable body long after it has been taken from the tree, and appears to possess all the powers of 
other similar vegetable bodies, except that of growing, or vitally uniting to itself other matter ; and the 
experiments which I shall proceed to state, prove that the pear is operated upon by external causes nearly 
in the same manner after it has been detached from the tree, as when it remains vitally united to it. 

Most of the fine French pears, particularly the d'auch, are much subject, when cultivated in a cold and 
unfavorable climate, to crack before they become full grown upon the trees, and, consequently, to decay 
before their proper season or state of maturity ; and those which present these defects in my garden are 
therefore always taken immediately from the trees to a vinery, in which a small fire is constantly kept in 
winter, and they are there placed at a small distance over its flue. Thus circumstanced, a part of my 
crop of auch pears ripen, and will perish, if not used, in November, when the remainder continue sound 
and firm till March or April, or later ; and the same Vvarm temperature which preserves the grape in a 
slightly shrivelled state, till January, rapidly accelerates the maturity, and consequent decay of the pear. 
By gathering a part of my swan's egg pears early in the season (selecting such as are most advanced 
towards matui-ity), and subjecting them, in the manner above mentioned, to artificial heat, and by retard- 
ing the maturity of the later part of the produce of the same trees, I have often had that fruit upon my 
table nearly in an equal state of perfection from the end of October to the beginning of February ; but the 
most perfect, in every respect, nave been those which have been exposed in the vinery to light and arti- 
ficial heat, as soon as gathered. 

2306. The most successful method of preserving pears and apples, which I have hitherto tried, lias been 
placing them in glazed earthen vessels, each containing about a gallon (called, provincially, steens), and 
surrounding each fruit with paper ; but it is probable that the chaff of oats, if free from moisture or any 
offensive smell, might be used with advantage instead of paper, and with much less expense or trouble. 
These vessels, being perfect cylinders, about a foot each in height, stand very conveniently upon each 
other, and thus present the means of preserving a large quantity of fruit in a very small room ; 
and if the spaces between the top of one vessel, and the base of another, be filled with a cement 
composed of two parts of the curd of skimmed milk, and one of lime, by which the air will be 
excluded, the later kinds of apples and pears will be preserved with little change in their appearance, 
and without any danger of decay from October till February and March. A dry and cold situation, in 
which there is little change of temperature, is the best for the vessels ; but I have found the merits of the 
pears to be greatly increased by their being taken from the vessels about ten days before they were wanted 
for use, and being kept in a warm room ; for warmth at this, as at other periods, accelerates the maturity 
of the pear. The same agent accelerates its decay also ; and a warmer climate cannot contribute to the 
superior success of the French gardeners ; which probably arises only from the circumstance of their fruit 
being the produce of standard or espalier trees. 

2307. Preserving ripe fruit by retaining it on the tree, or on detached shoots. Some 
fruits may be preserved through the winter by allowing them to hang on the tree in a 
moderate climate, somewhat above the freezing point. Vines are sometimes so preserved ; 
and Diel mentions that frequently on the nonpareil pippin, planted in pots, and kept under 
glass, without any fire-heat, he has had the fruit hanging on the tree till the ripening of the 
succeeding crop. Arkwright (Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 97.), by late forcing, retains plump 
grapes on his vines till the beginning of May, and even later, till the maturity of his 
early crops. In this way he gathers grapes every day in the year. By covering some 
sorts gf cherry, plum, gooseberry, and currant trees, either on walls or as bushes, with 
mats, the fruit of the red and white currant, and of the thicker-skinned goosebemes, 
may be preserved to Christmas and later. Grapes, in the open air, may be preserved in 
the same manner ; and peaches and nectarines may, in this way, be kept a fortnight hang- 
ing on the trees after they are ripe. 

2308. Preserving ripe fruit in air-tight vessels, in a low temperature, is perhaps the most 
effectual and certain mode, at least with the more hardy fruits. Apples and pears, placed 
in jars or pipkins in which butter had been kept, have been closely sealed up, and placed 
in a cellar, in a temperature never below 32°, and not exceeding 42", for a year, and 
found in perfect order for eating. (Braddick, in Hort. Trans, vol. iii. ; Encyc. Brit. 
Supp. art. Food.) 

2309. Preserving fruit, by gathering it before it is ripe, and then retarding its ripening. 
Retarding the wasting or decay of fruit or vegetables gathered for use, is effected by 
burying them in boxes in. the soil, immersing them in deep wells, or, as already stated, 
placing them in an ice-house, or an ice-cold room. Ripe peaches may thus be kept a week, 
and other fruits longer ; pears, cauliflowers, salads, &c. preserved in a fresh state for 
some days, and potatoes and other tubers and bulbs for a long period, both fresh and 
without growing. 



442 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



2310. Seeds. "WTien seeds are to be preserved longer than the usual period, or when 
they are to be sent to a great distance, various devices have been adopted to preserv e their 
vitality. Sugar, salt, tallow, cotton, sawdust, sand, clay, paper, &c have been adopted 
with different degrees of success. 

23 11. Livingston, Avho, from a long residence in China, is well informed on the horticul- 
ture of the Chinese, states that, " from April to October, rain is so frequent in China, and 
the air is generally so moist, that it is nearly impossible to preserve seeds. If excluded 
from the air they are quickly covered with mildew, and when exposed, no less certainly 
destroyed by insects." He proposes to dry Chinese seeds by means of sulphuric acid, in 
Leslie's manner, which he found dried " small seeds in two days, and the largest seeds 
in less than a week. Seeds thus dried," he obsenes, " may be afterwards presei-Aed in 
a vegetating state for any necessary lengtli of time by keeping them in an airy situation 
in common brown paper, and occasionally exposing them to the air in a fine day, espe- 
cially after damp weather. This method will succeed Avith all the larger mucilaginous 
seeds. Very small seeds, berries, and oily seeds may probably require to be kept 
in sugar, or among currants or raisins." (Hort. Traiis. vol. iii. 184., and tlie article 
Cold, in Supp. Encyc. Brit.) It is probable many seeds might be preserved and sent to 
a distance with safety, if, after being thoroughly matured and dried, they were enveloped 
or baked into a large ball of loam. Such a mode, at all e%'ents, being suggested by na- 
ture, deserves a trial. 

2312. Nufs sent from the East Indies, compactly packed in a barrel of clay, and the head of the cask firmly 
put on, have made a partial developement of their parts during the voyage, and stiU grown after their arrival. 

Liiiuceits, writing to John Ellis says, " Fresh seeds may be conveyed in the following manner: — Fill 
a glass vessel with seeds, so deposited in dry sand as riot to touch each other, that they may freely 
perspire through the sand, laying a bladder or piece of paper, over the mouth of the vessel. This glass 
must be placed in one of larger dimensions, the intermediate space, of about two inches all round, being 
quite filled with three parts nitre, one of common sea-salt, and two of sal-ammoniac, all powdered and 
mixed, but not dried. . This mixture will produce a constant cold, so as to prevent any injury to the 
seeds from external heat, as has been proved by experience." (Corresp. Tf. Linn. 110.) Ellis very cor- 
rectly answers Linna?us, that salts of no kind' will generate cold air during dissolution, and that 
afterwards the mixture, whether dry or fluid, will soon acquire the same temperature with the sur- 
rounding air. He imagines the true use of salts to be to prevent putrefactive fermentation in the 
seeds. After trying a great variety of experiments on seeds and nuts sent to America, and even China, 
he found that sweating acorns, then letting them become perfectly . dry, and en%'eloping them in 
melted tallow, or a mixture of melted tallow and wax, was the best mode. The tallow must not be hotter 
than blood heat when the seeds or nuts are bedded in it ; each must be kept separate ; and the greatest 
care had that they are thoroughly dried before being enveloped. Wax alone and gumlie also found suc- 
cessful ; but, on the whole, he found tallow best. Acorns kept a year in it, grew vigorously when taken 
out and planted. {Corrcsp. of Unit. p. 119. ct seq.) 

2313. J. Hoivcson, when in Bengal, wrought a variety of seeds into a thick mucilage of gum Arabic, in 
the same way that caraway seeds are wrought into dough in making gingerbread. These he afterwards 
divided into small cakes, and placed them in the sun, until perfectly dry ; but as a number of the seeds 
still appeared on their surface, he dipped the cakes in a thin solution of gum, until the whole were com- 
pletely covered. On looking into a trunk, twelve years after his return to this country-, he found a cake 
containing babul, or gum Arabic tree seeds, which, having separated, by dissolving the cake in water, he 
sowed on a hot-bed, when the proportion of three out of four seeds became healthy plants. He adds, 
" while I was in India, none of the methods then in use were effectual for bringing out garden-seeds from 
England in a sound state, even altliough enclosed in varnished cases, and sealed bottles. It appeared to 
me, that the air which occupied the spaces between the seeds contained a sufficient quantity of water in 
solution to produce, during the ship's passage through the warm latitudes, a musty fermentation, which 
inevitably destroys the living principle in seeds. It was from this %'iew of the siibject, that I was led 
totally to" exclude air, by giving to each its own -envelope." (Caled. Me7n. iii. 238.) 

2314. Boots, cutthigs, grafts, and perennial plants in general are preserved, till wanted, 
in earth or moss, moderately moist, and shaded from tlie sun. The same principle is 
followed in packing them to be sent to a distance. The roots or root-ends of the plants 
or cuttings are enveloped in balls of clay or loam, wrapped round with moist moss, and 
air is admitted to the tops. In this way orange-trees are sent from Genoa to any part 
of Europe and North America in perfect preservation ; and cuttings of plants sent any 
distatice which can be accomplished in eight months, or even longer with some kinds. 
Scions of the apple, pear, &'C. if enveloped in clay, and wrapt up in moss or straw, and 
then placed in a portable ice-lioyse so as to prevent a greater heat than 32*^ from pene- 
trating to them, would, there can be little doubt, keep a year, and might thus be sent 
from England to Australasia or China. Knight found that the buds of fruit-trees might 
be preserved in a vegetating state, and sent to a considerable distance, by reducing the 
leaf-stalks to a short length, and enclosing the shoot in a double fold of cabbage-leaf, 
bound close together at each end, and theii enclosing the package in a letter. " It was 
found advantageous to place tlie under surface of the cabbage-leaf inwards, by which the 
enclosed branch was supplied with humiditj', that being the perspirating surface of the 
leaf, the other surface being nearly or wholly impei-vious to moisture." (Hort. IVans. 
vol. iv. y. 403.) 

2315. Packing a7i.d conveying pla 77 fs 171 pots. Plants in pots are packed among moss 
in boxes, with tlieir tops covered with a net, and sent to any distance where the climate 
will not injure them, and where water is supplied. Where the climate is severe, they 
are covered v. ith a glazed tegument, and thus glass cases or temporary hot-houses are 
employed in ships to carry tender plants from this country to the colder colonies, and to 



Book IV. FINAL PRODUCTS DESIRED OF GARDENS, 



443 



bring plants from the warmer colonies home. Stove-plants are also transported from 
France, Holland, and Hamburgh, into Germany and Russia, in waggons with glass 
covers. 

2316. In packing plants for importation, much more care is requisite than has in general been bestowed 
on the subject. " It is thought enough," Lindley observes {Hort. Trans, v. 192.), " to tear a plant from its 
native soil, to plant it in fresh eartli, to fasten it in a wooden case, and put it on board a vessel." Notiiing 
can be more erroneous : preparatoi-y for packing, the plants should have their roots well establish e<l in 
pots or boxes, which may, in woody kinds, require from one to three months. Boxes with proper per- 
forations in the bottom are better tlian pots, because less liable to break, and of less Weiglit. Vv'hen the 
period for embarking them arrives, they should be placed in wooden cases, the t(ips of which must be 
capable of being opened, and should slope both ways, like the roof of a double green-house. These cas:>3 
must be furnished with a tarpawling, fixed along their tops, and sufficiently largo, when unrolled, to cover 
them completely, so as to protect the plants from being damaged by the salt-water dashing over them in 
rough weather. It cannot be expected that heayy cases should meet with very gentle tr;;atment on siiip- 
board ; and ft is certain they will be handled in the roughest manner by watermen, carters, and custom- 
house oihcers, after they have arrived in port. The materials, therefore, of which they are made, ought 
to be of a very strong description, and the joints of the lower part either secured by iron bands, or well 
dovetailed together. The person in charge of the cases on board should have directions never to ex- 
clude them from air and light in fine weather, unless to protect them from the cold, as the vessel makes 
the land, and after she is in port, or during high winds, or especially when the seamen are washing the 
decks ; but in foul weather to close the lids down, and to unrol the tarpawling over the latter, so as to 
exclude the sea-spray effectually. If, notwithstanding these precautions, saline particles should become 
encrusted upon the leaves and stems of the plant, it is necessary that the former should be removed as 
soon and as carefully as possible, with fresh water and a sponge, otherwise the salt will soon kill 
them. The quantity of water the plants receive must be determined by what can be spared ; so that no 
other direction for its application can be given, than to keep the mould just moist. The requisite supply 
of water must also depend much upon the way in which the cases are drained. The best manner in 
which this can be effected, is by causing holes about half an inch in diameter to be bored through the 
bottom of the cases and pots. Much mischief being occasionally done to collections by monkeys and 
parroquets on board the vessels, it is highly necessary that means should be taken to guard against their 
attacks. 

2317. Collections arc not un frequently injured offer they anive in this country, by the pots being shaken so 
violently as to be deprived of a large portion of their mould. Nothing can well be more destructive of 
vegetable life than this, which should be prevented by the pots being made square, so as to fit accurately 
into the bottom of the outer case. There then could be no ditticulty in keeping them steady ; and if they 
were fastened down by cross pieces of wood, they would be secured still more completely. In addition, 
the surfacv.* of the mould ought to be covered deeply with coarse moss, or other similar substance (not 
grass), which "Tiight be secured by packthread passed frequently across the box from its sides, or by slender 
laths, which would be less likely to become rotten than packthread. By this means, evaporation of the 
watery particles which are necessary to the existence of the plants, proceeds much less i-apidly than when 
the mould is exposed; and the latter has an additional security against being shaken out of the pots. 
When it happens that pots are not to be procured, the want of them must be supplied by the collection 
being planted in earth in the cases themselves, their bottom being previously strewed to the depth of an 
inch or two with fragments of earthenware or bits of wood. In such cases, it is particularly necessary 
that the mould should be securely fastened down. 

2318. Parasitical orcJiidcce, or, as they are commonly called, air plants, may be transported safely to any 
distance, by being packed loosely in moss, and put into boxes so constructed that the plants maybe ex- 
posed to a free admission of air, but protected from the sea-water. 

2319. Bulbs travel most securely if they are packed in paper or canvass bags, they having been previously 
dried, till all the moisture in their outer coats is evaporated. Dry sand is a good medium for placing 
them in, if opportunities should not have occurred of giving them the necessary exposure to the sun. 
But minute bulbs, such as those of ixias, gladioluses, oxalises, and others of a similar kind, only require 
to be folded in separate little parcels without any previous preparation. Terrestrial orch idea; should be 
tran.splanted when in flower, and not when their roots are in a state of rest. 

2320. Any woody or bony seeds, or capsides, that may have been procured should be buried among the 
mould in which plants are potted ; or any of those seeds, the juices of which become rancid soon after 
gathering, such as those of the guttifereas, magnoliaceae, sterculiacea;, &c. Camellia-seeds which are not 
readily transported, if sown in mould in China, will have become seedling plants before they reach thjs 
country. Acorns and walnuts may be conveyed from hot countries much better in this way than in any 
other. Palms, too, are better sent in this way than in bags or paper. The plants in all cases, if possible, 
should have numbers punched upon small pieces of thin sheet-lead, and fastened round the subjects to 
which they belong with fine iron or copper wire. When such lead is not to be procured, little wooden 
tallies should be used instead. {Hort. Trans, v. 194.) 

• 2321. Packing and transporting roots of plants, or entire plants in a dormant state, is a 
very simple operation. When the distance does not exceed a week's journey, they are 
packed in straw, and covered with mats : if a longer period is required, the roots are en- 
veloped in earth or moss ; but very moist moss is not desirable, as it occasions mouldiness, 
and rots off the bark of the roots when it begins to dry. Regard in all cases must be had 
to the kind of plant, season of the year, distance, time, and mode of carriage. 



Chap. IV. 

Ojyerntions relative to thejinal Products desired of Gardens, and Garden-scenery. 

2322. The object of gardening is certain vegetable productions, and certain beauties and 
effects in respect to design and taste. We now propose to notice the general principles 
by which the gardener ought to be guided, in directing the operations for the attainment 
of these ends ; the mode of conducting the business of a garden in an orderly manner; 
and the leading points of attention, requisite to ensure the beauty and order of garden- 
scenery. 

Sect. I. Of tlie Ve.zetable Products d^esired of Gardens. 

2323. The vegetable prodacLions of gardens are fruits, seeds, roots, stems, and stalks, 
Icav. s, flowers, barks, woods, and entire plants. 



414 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



2324. Fruits. All plants require to attain the age of puberty, before they will pro- 
duce fruits or seeds. In annuals, as in the melon, this happens in a few weeks or 
months ; in trees, as the pear, it requires several years. The first object is to induce the 
production of blossom-buds ; the next, to induce the blossoms to set or fecundate ; and 
the third, to swell and ripen the fruit. New fruits are procured from seeds properly pro- 
duced and selected ; continued in trees by grafting or budding ; in perennials, by slips or 
runners ; in annuals, by seeds. The quality of fruits is improved by abundant supplies 
of nourishment, by increased air, light, and heat, by pruning, tiiinning, and other 
means ; their bulk by moisture ; and their flavor by withholding moisture and increasing 
light, heat, and air. Fruit is preserv ed by placing it in a low dry temperature, burying 
it in the earth, or di'ying it in the sun. 

2325. Seeds are the essential part of fruits, or constitute the entire fruit, and are pro- 
duced on the same general principle. Those produced for culinary' purposes in garden- 
ing are chiefly from annuals, and used green, as the pea, bean, Indian cress, &c. ; but 
seeds of ahnost all garden-vegetables are occasionally produced for the sake of propagat- 
ing the species. Here attention is requisite to make choice of a proper stock, and to 
jilace it so as not to be in danger of impregnation from other allied species, which might 
hybridise the progeny ; to thin out superfluous blossoms ; to remove leafy or barren exuber- 
ances, or bulbs, tubers, or other productions which might lessen the nourishment devoted 
to tlie production of the seed. Seeds of common forest-trees are not generally subjected 
to so careful management as those of herbaceous vegetables or rarer trees ; but, wherever 
the best progeny are desired, the same practices are applicable. Light, air, and a free 
exposure, witli dry, warm weather, are essential to the proper ripening of seeds. They 
are preserved in dry, cool temperatures, like fruits ; and, if perfectly excluded from air 
and moisture, will never vegetate ; but tlie- vital principle of most seeds is but of short 
duration. 

2326. Hoots, to be produced in perfection, require a deep, well pulverised, pliable, 
porous soil, and moderate moisture. Tlie plants should, in all cases, be prevented from 
bearing seeds, should have their roots thinned where practicable, and their leaves care- 
fully preserved, and fully exposed to the sun, air, and weather. Roots are preserved by 
burying in the earth ; by being placed in low, dry temperatures, like fruits ; or by being kept 
dry, or dried by art ; or having their buds scooped out, when not intended for vegetation. 

2327. Leaf-stalks are increased in size in the same way as roots, by a rich, deep, well 
pulverised soil, by preventing the plant from producing blossoms, or even flower-stalks, 
and by tliinning out weak or crowded leaves. Leaf-stalks are blanched to lessen their 
acrimony, as in the celer^', asparagus, and chardoon, or used in a green state, as in the 
rhubarb and angelica. They are preserved to a certain extent in cool, drj^, but well ven- 
tilated situations ; some sorts, as celerj-, similarly to roots. Tlie stems of some plants, as 
the asparagus, are used like leaf-stalks. 

2328. Leaves. Abundant nourishment supplied by the usual means; abundant 
moisture, and room for expansion of growth ; free exposure to light and-air ; thimiing, and 
preventing the appearance of flower-stalks, will in general ensure large succulent leaves, 
which are sometimes used separately and green, as in the spinage and white beet ; in tufted 
or compact heads, as in the cabbage and lettuce, or blanched, as in the endive. Leaves 
of the headed or tufted sorts may be preserved similarly to leaf-stalks ; otliers, as those of 
most siilads, require to be used immediately ; while most herbs are dried, before being 
used, either on small kilns or ovens, or in the sun, at the time the plant begins to blossom. 

2329. Flowers. These are produced for culinary purposes, medicine, and ornament". 
Tlie principal of those grown for culinarj" purposes are tlie cauliflower and broccoli, and 
here the first object is to produce a large and vigorous plant, by abundant nourishment 
and moisture in a temperate, moist, but not over-warm climate. Free room for the roots 
and leaves to extend on every- side must be given, and the situation should be open and 
exposed to the full light of the atmosphere ; though, if in very hot weather the direct in- 
fluence of the sun's rays be impeded by a screen at a moderate distance, there will be less 
risk of over-rapid growth. "WTien the plant is fully grown, the flower appears, and, in 
the case of tlie sorts mentioned, is gatliered whilst the fasciculus of blossom is in embrj'o. 
Such flowers may be preserv ed, on the same principle as stalks and headed leaves, for a 
moderate period. Other flowers, used for culinary purposes, as those of the nasturtium, 
caper, &c. for pickling, require less attention, the object being flavor rather than magnitude. 

2330. Floiversfor medical jmrjwses should have no culture whatever; for, in proportion 
as they are increased in bulk they are diminished in virtue. For ornament, flowers are 
enlarged, increased in number, rendered double, and variegated in a thousand ways, by 
excess of nourishment, peculiar nourishment, and raising from selected and curiously im- 
pregnated seed : these are called florists' flowers. Other flowers are grown for ornament, 
Avith a moderate degree of culture, which enlarges their parts generally : such are border- 
flowers. Others are grown, as much as possible, without producing any change in their 
parts, as in botanical collections, whether hardy or exotic. 



Book IV. 



SUPERINTENDENCE OF GARDENS. 



445 



2331. Barks produced by British gardening are applied only to one purpose, that of 
tanning. Little or no culture is ever given expressly to increase or improve the bark ; 
but abundant nourishment and all the requisites of vegetable growth will increase that 
part of the plant in common with others. Moss, or any other cortical parasites, should be 
removed. Bark is best separated from the wood, when the sap is ascending with the 
greatest vigor, late in spring. 

2332. Woods. The production of timber, and coppice-wood or small timber, is an 
important and extensive branch of gardening. Timber is propagated in various ways, 
but the principal sorts generally from seed, either sown where it is finally to arrive at 
maturity, or in nursery-gardens, and transplanted into prepared or unprepared ground. 
Tlie growth of all timber may be greatly increased by culture, and especially by deeply 
turning over, and pulverising the soil previously to planting or sowing, and stirring it, 
and removing weeds afterwards. The timber is also produced in the most useful, or in 
any desired form, as in trunks or branches, straight or crooked, or in spray or small shoots, 
by pruning. But as it is chiefly desired in the form of a straight stem or trunk, pruning 
is particularly useful in this respect, especially when joined to judicious thinning, to al- 
low of the beneficial effects of air, and the motion produced by wind. Though pruning 
and pulverising the soil are undoubtedly of great use in hastening the growth of trees 
when young, and consolidating their timber as they grow old, yet planting trees in a more 
rich, warm, and moist soil than is natural to them, is to be avoided. The timber of the 
Scotch pine and the oak, grown in deep fertile valleys, or in alluvial depositions, is found 
to be less hard, tough, and durable, than when grown in colder situations and thinner 
soils. This doctrine applies more especially to the resinous tribe of timber-trees, which, 
as every one knows, thrive best in cold regions, produced by elevation in warm countries, 
as in the Alps of Italy, or by high latitudes, as in Russia and Sweden. Where timber 
is grown for fuel, the more rapidly it is made to grow, whether by culture or the choice 
of species (as the willow, robinia, &c. ), the greater will be the produce and profit within 
a given period. The presei-vation of timber from fungi, insects, dry rot, and natural de- 
cay is best effected by immersion in water or in earth, or complete desiccation in the open 
air. (Su]}]). Encyc, Brit. art. Dry Rot.) 

2333. The entire j)la?it is produced in gardening, for ornament, in herbs, shrubs, and 
trees, but especially in exotics ; sometimes for culinary purposes, as in the fungi and 
fuci ; for purposes of general economy, as in hedge-plants ; for shelter and shade, in 
hardy trees ; and for picturesque effect in trees and shrubs, in parks and pleasure- 
grounds. In general, the object of culture for this purpose ought to be to give each in- 
dividual plant sufficient nourishment and space fully to expand itself, and, as it were, 
show and express its nature or character : but though this will often apply in hot-houses 
and artificial gardens, it is in general but partially accomplished, even in picturesque scenery, 
in the open air, where the object is connection and grouping of different objects, rather 
than the display of single ones j and it is inconsistent with the formation of hedges, rows, 
strips, and masses. 

Sect. II. Of the Superintendence and Management of Gardens. 

2334. Whenever the culture and management of a garden requires more than the labor 
of one man, one of those employed must necessarily be apj^ointed to arrange the labors of 
the rest, and, in fact, to establish a general system of management. It is only under such 
a system that the performance of operations can be procured in the proper season, and the 
objects in view successfully attained, and at a moderate expenditure. 

2335. On being apjminted to a situation as head gardener, the first thing to be done, 
in that capacity, is to survey the extent of the field of operations, and to asceftain any 
peculiar products or objects desired by the master, so as to determine the number of per- 
manent hands that will be required. Then the number of implements of every kind must 
be fixed on and procured, and an estimate formed of the occasional hands, men or women, 
that may be necessary as extraordinary assistants at particular seasons. If only two or 
three permanent men are required, then one of them should be appointed foreman, to act 
as master during absence or sickness, and to have constantly the special charge of the hot- 
iiouses, or forcing and exotic departments. If, however, ^e situation is of such extent 
as to require a dozen permanent hands or upwards, then it will generally be found best 
to appoint a foreman to each department ; as one to the artificial clim,ates of the kitchen- 
garden, another to the open garden, one to the flower-garden and shrubbery, pleasure- 
ground, &c. (when there are plant-stoves and collections of florists* flowers, these de- 
partments should be divided), and one to the woods and plantations, unless there is a 
regular forester directly under the control of the master. To each of these foremen a 
limited number of permanent men should be assigned, and when occasion requires, 
assistance should be allowed them, either by common laborers or women, or by a 
temporary transfer of hands from any of the other departments from which they can be 
spared. 



416 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



■2336. Economical arrangements. The next tlung is to fix on the hours of labor anJ 
of rest, the amount of wages, and regulations as to board, lodging, 'tc. The hours of 
labor ought to be at least one hour per day less than those for common laborers (wlio 
require no noind), in order to allow time for studying the science of the art to be 
practised. The amount of fines should also be fixed on at the same time : as for absence 
at the liours of going to labor ; for defects in the performance of duty of various sorts, 
as putting by a tool without cleaning it, being found without a knife or apron, or not 
knowing the name of a plant, &c. * A set of general maxims and rules of conduct 
should be drawn up by the master (for which the succeeding section will afford some 
liints), and printed, and the amount of fine specified at the end of each rule. The fines 
may either be applied to some general purpose, or returned by equal distribution quarterly. 

2337. The system of keeping accounts may next be determined on, and this, in gar- 
dening, is very simple. The books necessary are, the time-book, the cash-book, and the 
■forest or pla7itatio?i book, 

2338. The time-book is a large -folio volume, ruled so as to read across both pages, 
with columns titled, as in the specimen in the next page. In this the master inserts the 
name of every hand ; and the foreman of each department inserts the time in days, or 
proportions of a day, which each person under his care has been at work, and the par- 
ticular work he or she has been engaged in. v\.t the end of each week the master sums 
up the time from the preceding Saturday or Monday, to the Friday or Saturday inclu- 
sive ; the sum due or to be advanced to eacii man is put in one column, and when the 
man receives it he writes the word received in tl;e column before it, and signs his name 
as a receipt in the succeeding column. Tiie time-book, therefore, will show what every 
man has been engaged in during every hour in the year for which he has !)een paid, 
and it will also contain receipts for eveiy sum, however trifling, which has been paid by 
the gardener for garden-labor. In short, it would be difficult to contrive a book more 
satisfactory for both master and servant than the time-book, as it prevents, as far as can 
well be done, the latter from deceiving either himself or his employer, and remains an 
authentic indisputable record of work done, and of vouchers for money paid during tlie 
whole period of the head gardener's sei vices. In laying out groimds in a distant part 
of the country, where upwards of two hundred men were employed under one foreman, 
we have had their time, emploi/7nent, and pcii/nients recorded, and receipts taken, in this 
way, and found it an effectual bar to every thiug doubtful or disagreeable, 

2339. The next book is f/ie cash-bool.-, (see next page,) which may be a common quarto or cct?.vo book, 
with horizontal hnes running across both pages ; Dr. and Cr. columns for cash on tlie left-hand page ; and 
the right-liaiid page left blank for signatures. The cash-book may bo finally balanced once a-year, or 
oftener, and, if requisite, the sums received from the woods and pbntations can be taken out and added 
together, to show the amount of profit by that department. In small gardens, this is the only book that 
gardeners in general require to keep ; but our business here is to show what belongs to first rate gardens. 

2340 The forest-hook, (see next page,) where that depaitment is no*: an entirely separate concern, m.-.y 
be simply what, in Italian book-k«eping, is called a waste-book. Tlie size may be quarto, v.ith a column 
for cash to each page, and the intention of the book is to serve as a record for all bargains for the sale of 
timber, fuel, bark, or the felling of timber, grubbing, planting, &c. When the money is received for any 
such sale, it is entered in the cash-book ; as paid for work done, it is entered in the time-book. In very 
extensive concerns it may be necessary to open accounts for particular woods or plantations, as well as for 
individuals who become purchasers of timber, bark, fuel, charcoal, &c. ; in such cases it is hardiy 
necessary to observe, that recourse is to be had to the common ledger of merchants. 

2341. Substitutes for books. When a man acting as gardener, forester, or foreman over 
a number of laborers, can neither read, nor write, he may keep an account of their time, 
money, and a journal of work done, in various ways, and among others as follows : •— 

For 9?ien's time he may take seven small fiower-pots for the seven days of the week and set them in order 
on a shelf. In each pot put as many bits of sticks as there are men employed, and a diflferent kind of 
jvood for each man ; and then cut each stick with four edges or sides. To prevent mistakes as to the in- 
dividual men the different woods represent, apply the names of the woods to the men, and this from 
first hiring them, (" John Davies, I shall call you Lime-tree^ and here is your stick," &c.) and always after- 
wards when speaking to them. To note their time on the sticks, let a corner notch denote one entire day ; 
a cut on one face, one quarter; on two faces, or half round the stick, two quarters ; or three sides, four 
xjuarters; and on four sides, or a single notch and one side, five quarters, and so on. When pay night 
comes, take one kind of wood out of each of the pots, reckon the notches and cuts, and adding them 
together, call the man — " Lime-tree, your time is five days," &c. 

To keep a cash-account, have three bags for gold, silver, and copper, and different-colored stones or 
shells, &c. in each, to represent sovereigns, shillings, &c. Then have three pots for payments, answering 
to the Cr. /. s. d. columns in a cash-account ; the bags answering to the Dr columns. Then, for every 
real transaction make a counter-transaction between the bags and pots, &c. The rest is obvious. 

To keep a ledger, for each man as represented by a sort of wood, or each object as represented by a bit of 
itself, &c. keep bags and pots, and efFect counter-transactions, &c. 

To keep a journal of operations, for each man devote seven pots for a week, or twenty-eight for a month, 
&c. Then suppose you wish to note what Lim.e-tree is doing on Monday, put in his pot a bit of some- 
thing taken from the place where he is at work, or the things he is at work with ; thus, if he is at work witli 
tan or gravel, a little of each in a paper; pruning, a twig; mowing, a httle grass ; watering, a bit of 
iris or other water-plant ; or on a journey, a leaf of wayfaring-tree or a little road-grit ; digging, a leaf or 
twig from some noted tree in that compartment. Sec. &c. These visible memoranda will, to a man whose 
memory is unencumbered by written signs, readily recall operations, and enable him after months to 
recount, in the order in which it was executed, the work done by himself or the men under his care. As 
farm-bailifFs are often very illiterate, it might also be tried with them, and would at all events serve to 
occupy and amuse some descriptions of masters and mistresses. 



448 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part II. 



2342. Tfie time, cash, and forest books, and, in common cases, the two first, will answer 
every purpose as to money matters in private gardens : where gardening is practised as a, 
trade, as in nurseries, &c. of course the routine books common to trades become necessary. 

2843. The additional books which a gardener may require as official records in his office 
are a jovirnal of sowing and reaping, trenching-book, produce-book, and weather-book ; or 
some of these books may be very well supplied by tables of common folio or quarto size. 
The sowing and reaping-book may be an octavo blank book, with a column for the date 
on each page. On the left hand page, the time and place of sowing or planting is 
recorded, and when the crop is fit to gather, that circumstance is noticed in the opposite 
page, and in an opposite line, thus — 



1821. 


Sowing or Planting. 


1821. 


Gathering the Crop. 


April 4. 


Planted Mazagan beans in Q. No. 1. A. 

Sowed spinage between tlie rows of beans in ditto. 


July 23. 
May 29. 


Gathered the first dish of beans. 
Gathered part of the spinage. 



413 



Not. 

Dec 

Jan. 

Feb. 

March 

April 

May 

June 

July 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Not. 

Dec. 



2344. Or a cropping table may be used 
for this purpose [Jig. 4 1 3. ) in which there 
may be tM'o vertical columns for each of 
the principal crops sown in gardens, and 
horizontal lines for each month. Then 
suppose frame peas, sown in Novem- 
ber, begin a line on the left hand co- 
lumn, headed peas, opposite November, 
and write the variety frame in the right 
hand column ; and when the peas are 
fit to gather, trace the line diagonally 
down to the horizontal line representing 
the month [Mau, in the figure) in wliich 
they ripen. This is a very simple mode, 
as it presents the sowing and reaping 
of the whole of the principal kitchen- 
garden crops at one view. A few large sheets, ruled in this manner, might be bound 
together ; one page would serve for a year, and when a few years were recorded, the 
whole would present a rich assemblage of facts to suggest ideas as to cropping. 

234.5. The trenching-book. Another very requisite book in extensive gardens is the 
trenching-book, which is simply a thin octavo volume, in which a page is devoted to each 
compartment of the kitchen-garden or nursery, or to any ground frequently trenched; and 
in this column the date of tiie trenching and the depth is recorded. The object is to 
ensure fresh soil at the surface, by never trenching twice in succession to the same depth. 



\ 


FraiiLt 


net 


Xns . 




a eat 


Fela 


'ars 






w 


















) 












'Earh 














i 






















J 




i 


























\\\^ 


















\ 


^^^^ 












\\\ 




















•\\ 




















\^ 




















\ 






1 






\ 






























\ 


\ 
1 




Gattf" 


s 


G 




It 


s 


Or - IS 



1817 to 
1820. 


Compartment, No. 2. A. 


1817 to 
1820. 


Compartment, No. 2. B. 


1S17 
April. 
1818 
September. 
1819 
January. 

1820 
October. 


Trenched two spits after asparagus for turnips. 
three spits and winter fallow. 

two spits, and ridged during winter. 


1817 
February. 
1S18 

1S19 

1820 
August. 


Trenched two spits, and dunged for straw berpes. 

Strawbarries. 

Strawberries. 

Trenched three spits, and weil dunged. 



2346. Or a irenching-table may be easily arranged thus : — 



Com. No. 


1. 




Com. No 2. 


Com. No. 3. 


Com. No. 4. 


Slip, No. 5. 




A 


B 


c 


D 


A 


B 


C 


D 


A 


B 


C 




A 


B 


C 


D 


A 


B 


c 


D 


1817. 


4 


3 


2 


1 


1 


3 


1 




4 


1 


1 


2 


4 


1 


2 


4 


1 


3 


1 


1 


1818. 


3 


2 


3 


2 


4 




4 


2 




2 


4 


3 


1 


2 


3 


3 


4 


2 


3 


1 


1819. 


2 


1 


4 


3 


2 




2 


3 




3 


3 


4 


2 






2 


3 


1 


4 


2 


1820. 


1 


4 


1 


4 






1 


4 


1 


4 


2 





3 






1 


3 






4 



2347. Plan of the kitchen-garden. For the two last books or tables, as well as for a 
variety of other purposes, it is necessary that a plan of the kitchen-garden should be made. 



Book IV. SUPERINTENDENCE OF GARDENS. 



449 



and the compartments nimibered, and their subdivisions lettered ; and this plan, as well 
as another exhibiting every scene under the gardener's care, should be framed and hung 
up in the office for constant reference. 

2348. The produce-book may be either a quarto or octavo volume, ruled with blue 
lines across both pages, with a column for the date on the left-hand page, and tlie other 
blank for signatures. In this book is to be entered daily, on the left-hand page, the disposal 
of produce gathered or taken from the garden or garden-stores, as the fruit-room, ice- 
cold room, &c. On the right-hand page the name of the party in the family of the 
master receiving it is to be signed by the receiver as a receipt. Such books are not 
uncommon in first-rate gardens ; and, like the game-book and cellar-book, are of very 
considerable use. 



1821. 


Garden Produce. 


Signatures. 


June 
20 

22 


Sent peas, onions, parsley, cabbage, spinage, and some 
Two bundles sweetwater gi-apes, two cucumbers, a 

A large nosegay for Lady Almeria, by J. Gott 

Sent a fine miit of the blood pine to the Horticultural 
Society in London ; and also a seedling mango plant, 
and some seeds of the new red lettuce. Booked them, 
per mail at Reading, and directed them to J.Sabine, 
Esq. Horticultural Society, Regent Street, London. 


. 

Received by me, Leah Fry, cook. 

Received by me, Joseph Tomcat, butler. 
Received by me, Juliet Flirtwell, for my Lady A. 



2349. ji iveather-hook is very useful, and may be either of the folio or quarto size, with 
columns for the 



1821. 
June 


Thermo- 
meter. 

M. N. E. 


Baro- 
meter. 


Rain 
and 
Hail. 


Wind. 


General 
character 
of the 
day's 
weather. 


Trees in 
Leaf, or defo- 
liated. Fungi 
appear, &c. 


Plants in 
Flower or 
Fruit. 


Birds and 
Insects ap- 
pear or dis- 
appear. 


Observ. 
at ions as to 

Fish and 
other Ani- 
mals. 


Miscellane- 
ous. Bodily 
Fains, pre- 
vailing Dis- 
eases, &c. 


21 
22 

'23 

24 


50 
52 


69 

65 
70 


60 
58 

59 
58 


28.90 
28.8 

28.8 


0. 

0.02 

0.00 
0.01 


S. S.W. 

s. w. 
s. 


Fair. 
Showers. 

Cloudy. 
Windy. 


Marchantia 
polymorpha 
in perfec- 
tion. 


Lilium oan- 
didum in f ull 
blow. 

Nuphar adve- 


Sphinx 
elpenor 
appears. 


Spawn of 
the Carp 
hatched in 
breeding 
pond. 


Dull and 
sleepy. 


58 


28.7 


S.W. 




na in flower. 




Ditto 
Bream. 


Rheumatic 
pains. 













There is a very good model of this description, called the Naturalist's Kalendar, by the 
Honorable Daines Barrington, in quarto, which may be procured and filled up. Indeed 
every apprentice ought to be made to keep such a kalendar, for the sake of inducing habits 
of observation. For further instruction, see the Naturalist'' s Kalendar, of White, and 
Naturalist'' s rocket-booh, of Graves. It has been judiciously remarked {Farjn. Mag. 
1820.), that in all kalendars of nature, particular attention should be paid to the in- 
florescence of aquatics, as these are much more regular in their times of foliation and 
flowering than land plants. The comparative denseness of the medium in which they 
live, prevents their being affected by winds or rains, and probably also by electrical and 
other atmospherical changes. 

2350. For keeping a register of the temperature of hot-houses and the open air, a book 
witli columns may be adopted, or a table (fg. 414.) may be fixed on, in which the ver- 

414 

10, 1 1,12,13,14, 15,1 6,17,18,19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,26,26, 27,28,29, 30 Days. 

Pinery. 



I i l_l l_l Plant-stoTe. 




— ; Hot-beds. 
Dry -stove. 



I I f — Green-house. 

n 1 rn~i_j 

— j South waU. 

1 ] — !. — 1_| 1 Open air. 



tical lines representing days of the month, and the horizontal ones degrees, the variations 
of each house, and the open air, may be shown by wavy lines made by daily increments 
depressed or raised, according to the rise or fall of the thermometer in each separate 



^50 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




house or place. Twelve tables, or twelve pages of an oblong folio book ruled in this way, 
would keep a register of all the hot-houses, frames, and the open air of a garden for a year. 
A very beautiful graphic mode {Jig. 415.) of recording the variations of temperature of 
the open aii-, or of any one hot- 
house during a year, is given 415 
by Howard, in his Climate of 
London, a simplification of 
wliich may be adopted by the 
curious gardener. Here the 
indicating line waves upon a 
circular zone, composed of ra- 
diating lines, representing time, 
and concentric circles repre- 
senting degrees of heat. One 
line represents the average tem- 
perature of the year : all the 
degrees exceeding the average 
temperature are projected be- 
yond this line towards the ex- 
tremity of the zone ; and all 
the degrees under the average 
are projected from the average 
line towards the inner circum- 
ference of the zone. A series 
of tables of this sort might 
prove useful to the gardener, by 
enabling him at all times, by 
a simple glance, to compare tlie 
present weather with that of se- 
veral past years. Howard's nomenclature of clouds, already given (1235.), deserves 
also the study of the gardener desirous of scientifically registering the weather. {Encyc. 
Brit. Sup. vol. iii. art. Cloud.) 

2351. Records of the grototh of plants are sometimes kept to show the comparative 
warmth and congeniality of seasons to vegetation. When that is to be done, a table 
(Jig. 416.) may be composed of horizontal lines, 416 

the distance between which shall represent space Feb. Marchv April. May. June July. Aug. 

in feet or inches, and vertical lines, the dis- 
tance between which shall represent time by 
months or days. Then supposing a plant 
(briony) beginning to push in the middle of 
March, make a mark on the lowest line in the 
middle of the column for that month, and trace 
the line as the plant grows, ascending diago- 
nally through the other months, according to 
the progress of the shoot in feet. If a kidney- 
bean germinates in the beginning of April, and 
attains the height of ten feet by the first of Sep- 
tember, then the indicatory line will pass through five vertical columns or months, and 
through ten feet, or spaces, between the horizontal lines (as in the figure). All these books, 
tables, and records must be kept in the office as a part of its library ; by which means, 
■when the head gardener is changed, the new-comer will the sooner become acquainted 
with the situation and climate, his duties, and a variety of other useful circumstances. 

2352. Memorandum books. Besides the above books and tables, it is almost unnecessary 
to add, that various small blank books for inventories of tools, memorandums of agree- 
ments, out of door entries-, lists of names, &c. will be required both by the head gardener 
and by his different foremen. Models of all these books may be had at Harding s 
Agricultural Library, St. James's Street, London. 

2353. Tlie reading library of the gardener s office should at least contain the following 
works. One of the best Encyclopcedias, and whichever one is adopted, add the Siippl. to 
the Encyc. Brit., the best work of its kind hitherto published. The Agncultural Survey of 
ike County, and statistical account of the parish. If con-venient, the surveys of all the 
counties in the empire should be procured. The best modern Systcema Naturce of the 
time ; Turton's Linnaeus, is very imperfect, but the only one to be had at present. The 
best Introduction to Botany, say that of Sir J. E. Smith, for technical or systematic bo- 
tany ; and that of Keith for physiology. The best catalogues of plants, say those of 
Sweet and Page. The best Flora Britannica for the time, say Gal pine's, or the Translation 
c^f Flora Britannica, by Sir J. E. Smith. Sowerby's British Botany ; his Mineralogy ; — 




Kidnejbea 



Book IV. BEAUTY AND ORDER OF GARDEN-SCENERY. 451 



and Zoology, when published, Kirby and Spence's Introduction to Entomology ; and 
Samouelle's Entomologist's Useful Companion. The best Dictionary of Botany and CuU 
ture, say that of Miller, enlarged by Martyn. Marshall, Pontey, and Sang, on planting. 
Wheatley, Girardin, Price, and Repton, on laying out grounds. The Transactions of tlie 
London and Edinburgh Horticultural Societies. The best Gardener s Kalendar for the 
time, say that of Abercrombie for England, and Abercrombie or Nicol, for Scotland and 
Ireland. All new works on practical gardening, if possible, as they appear. Eng- 
lish, Latin, French, and Geographical Dictionaries, and as many other works as the 
master may be pleased to deposit in the gardener's office, or lend from the library of the 
mansion. 

2354. These books ought to be considered as for the use of journeymen and apprentices, as 
well as the master ; but the latter ought to be responsible for their being kept clean and 
perfect. Where the head gardener is of a humane and kind turn of mind, he may as- 
semble the men and also the women, and read aloud, and expound to, or answer ques- 
tions put by them ; or he may cause them to read aloud to and question one another, in 
such a way as to blend entertainment with instruction. In short, he ought to consider it 
as a part of his duty to improve their minds, as well as to render them habile in his art, 
and by all means to ameliorate their condition and manners as much as is in his power. 
Neill, one of the best modern writers on gardening, and obviously a humane and bene- 
volent man, states of the late Walter Nicol, that " he observed a praiseworthy practice, 
too much neglected by head gardeners, — that of instructing his young men or assist- 
ants, not only in botany, but in writing, arithmetic, geometry, and mensuration. He 
used to remark, that he not only used to improve his scholars, but taught himself and 
made his knowledge so familiar, that he could apply it in the daily business of life." 
Tlie same practice, as already observed (235.), is still carried on in Germany. 

Sect. III. Of the Beauty and Order of Garden-scenery. 
•2355. To unite the agreeable with the useful is an object common to all the departments 
of gardening. The kitchen-garden, the orchard, the nursery, and the forest, are all in- 
tended as scenes of recreation and visual enjoyment, as well as of useful culture ; and 
enjoyment is the avowed object of the flower-garden, shrubbery, and pleasure-ground. 
Utility, however, will stand the test of examination longer and more frequently than any 
scene merely beautiful, and hence the horticultural and planting departments of gar- 
dening are, in fact, more the scenes of enjoyment of a family constantly residing at their 
country-seat, than the ornamental or picturesque departments. It has been a very common 
assertion since the modern style of gardening became prevalent, and absorbed the attention 
of gardeners and their employers, that beauty and neatness may be dispensed with in 3 
kitchen-garden ; but this is to assign too exclusive limits to the terms beauty and neatness ; 
and, in truth, may be considered as originating in the vulgar error of confounding 
beauty with ornament, which latter quality is unquestionably not essential to scenes of 
utility. Every department of gardening has objects or final results peculiar to itself ; 
and the main beauty of each of these departments will consist in the perfection with 
which these results are attained ; a secondary beauty will consist in the display of skill 
in the means taken to attain them j and a third in the conformity of these means to the 
generally received ideas of order, propriety, and decorum, which exist in cultivated and 
well regulated minds. It is the business of this section to offer some general observ- 
ations, with a view to the'attainment of the beauties of order, propriety, and decorum. 
The entire work is devoted to the former beauties. 

2356. Order, it has been well observed, is " Heaven's first law." It is, indeed, the 
end of all law. Without it, nothing "worth having is to be attained in life, even by the 
most fertile in resources ; and with it much may be accomplished with very slender 
means. A mind incapable of an orderly and regular disposition of its ideas or inten- 
tions, will display a man confused and disorderly in his actions ; he will begin them 
without a specific object in view : continue them at random, or from habit, without 
knowing well why, till some accident or discordant result puts an end to his present 
progress, unmans him for life, or awakens reflection. But a well ordered mind reflects, 
arranges, and systematises ideas before attempting to realise them, weighs well the end in 
view, considers the fitness of the means for attaining that end, and the best mode of em- 
ploying these means. To every man who has the regulation and disposal of a number 
of servants, this mode of orderly arrangement is essentially necessary in order to reap the 
full effects of their labors ; and to no men is it of more importance than to master- 
gardeners, whose cares are so various, and the success of whose operations, always con- 
nected with, and dependent on, living beings and weather, depends so much on their 
being performed in the fitting moment. 

2357. Propriety relates to what is fitting and suitable for particular circumstances ; it 
is the natural result of an orderly mind, and may be said to include that part of order 
which directs the choice and adaptation of means to ends, and of ideas and objects to 

Gg 2 



452 



SCIENCE OF GARDENING. 



Part tl. 



cases and situations. It belongs to order for a master to allow workmen proper periods 
for rest and refreshment; propriety dictates the time and duration of these periods; 
prudence suggests tlie wisdom, of departing as little as possible from established 
practices. 

2358. Decorum is the refinement of propriety. It is in order to procure stable-dung 
for hot-beds, and to cart it into the framing-ground ; it is proper to do this at all times 
when it is wanted, but it is decorous to have the work performed early in the morning, 
that the putrescent vapors and dropping litter may not prove offensive to the master of 
the garden, should he, or any of his family or friends, visit that scene. 

2359. Neatness, as opposed to slovenliness, is well understood ; it consists in having 
every tiling where it ought to be ; and in attending to tlie decorum of finishing operations, 
and to minute things in general. These abstract liints may be considered as more parti- 
cularly directed to master -operators ; the following practical directions apply both to 
Piasters and their journeymen or laborers. 

2360. Ferforvi every operation in the proper season. The natural, and therefore the 
best indications for the operations of sowing and reaping, transplanting, &c. are given by 
the plants themselves, or by the progress of the season as indicated by other plants. But 
there are artificial kalendars or remembrancers, the use of which is to remind the master 
of the leading crops and operations of culture throughout the year. But, even if such 
books were made as perfect as their nature admits of, still they are only calculated to 
aid the memory, not to supply the place of a watchful and vigilant eye, and habits of 
attention, observation, reflection, and decision. Unless a gardener has these, either na- 
turally, or partly natural and partly cultivated, in a considerable degree, he will be but 
little better than a common laborer as to general management and culture of garden- 
scenery. 

2361. Perforin every ojyeration in the hest manner. Tliis is to be acquired in part by 
practice and partly also by reflection. For example, in digging over a piece of ground, 
it is a common practice v/ith slovens to throw the weeds and stones on the dug ground, 
or on the adjoining alley or walk, with the intention of gathering them off afterwards. A 
better way is to have a wheelbarrow, or if that cannot be had, a large basket, in which 
to put the weeds and extraneous matters, as they are picked out of the ground. Some per- 
sons, in planting or weeding, whether in the open air or in hot-houses, throw down all 
weeds, stones, and extraneous matters on the paths or alleys, with a view to pick them 
vp, or sweep or rake together afterwards ; it is better to carry a basket or other utensil, 
either common or subdivided (1400.), in which to hold in one part the plants to be planted^ 
in another the extraneous m.atters, &c. 

2362. Complete every part of an operation as you proceed. This is an essential point 
in garden-operations, and though it cannot always be attended to, partly from the nature 
of the operation, partly from weather, &c. yet the judicious gardener will keep it in view 
as much as possible. Suppose a compartment, or breadth of rows of potatoes, containing 
one tenth of an acre, required to have the ground stirred by the Dutch hoe, the weeds raked 
off, and then the potatoes earthed-up Avith the forked hoe ; the ordinary practice would 
be, first to hoe over the whole of the ground, then to rake it wholly over, and, lastly, to 
comirience the operation of earthing-up. If the weather were certain of holding good 
two days, this, on the principle of the division of labor, would certainly be somewhat 
the most economical mode. But supposing the weather dry, the part left hoed and not 
raked will, for a time (and one hour ought to be an object in a fine garden), appear unfi- 
nished ; and if rain should happen to fall in tiie night, the operation will be defeated in 
most soils. Better, therefore, to hoe, rake, and earth-up a small part at a time : so 
that leave off where you will, what is done w411 be complete. . 

2363. Finish one job before you begin another. This advice is trite, but it is of great 
importance ; and there are few cases where it cannot be attended to. 

2364. I7i leaving off imrJdng at any job, leave your work and tools in an orderly manner. 
Are you hoeing between rows, do not throw down your hoe blade upwards, or across 
the rows, and run off the nearest way to the walk the moment the breakfast or dinner 
hour strikes. Lay your implement down parallel to the rows, with its face or blade to 
the ground ; then march regularly between one row to the alley, and along tJie alley to 
the path. Never drop your tools and leave off work before the hour has well done 
striking ; and above all, never run on an occasion of this kind ; it argues a gross bru- 
talised selfishness, highly offensive to well regulated minds. 

2365. In leaving off ivork for the day, make a temporary finish, and carry your tools 
to the tool-house. In general, do not leave off in the middle of a row ; straighten your 
trenches in digging, because, independently of appearances, should a heavy rain of a 
week's duration intervene, the ground will have to be re-dug, and that will be more 
commodiously done with a straight than with a crooked, and consequently unequal 
trench. 

2366. In passing to and from your work, or, on any occasion, through any part of what 



Book IV. BEAUTY AND ORDER OF GARDEN-SCENERY. 



453 



is considered under the charge of the gardener, keep a vigilant lock out for weeds, de- 
cayed leaves, or any other deformity, and remove them, or some of them, in passing 
along. Attend to this particidarly on v/alks, edgings, and in passing through hot- 
houses, &c. In lik3 manner take off' insects, or leaves infected by them. IMuch in large 
as well as in small gardens may be effected by this sort of timely or preventive a^ention, 
which induces suitable habits for a young gardener, and occupies very little tim.e. 

2S67. In gathering a crop or ani/ part of a crop, remove at the same lime the roots, leaves, 
stems, or ivhatever else belonging to the plan t of which t/ou have cropped the desired part is of 
no further u^e, or may appear slovenly, decaying, or off'ensive. In cutting cabbage, lettuce, 
borecoles, &c. pull up the stem (with exceptions) and roots, and take them at once 
with the outside leaves, to the compost-heap. Do the same with the haulm of potatoes, 
leaves of turnips, carrots, celery, &c. Do not suffer the haulm of peas and beans to re- 
main a moment after the last gathering of the croji. 

2368. Let no crop of fruit, or lierbaceous vegetables, or any part thereof, go to ivaste on 
the spot. Instantly remove it when decay or any symptom of disease appears, to the 
compost-yard, or to be consumed by pigs or cattle. 

2369. Cut doivn the foiver-stalks of all floivering plants, with the proper exceptions, the 
moment they are fully done flowering, unless seed is an object. Cut off" decayed roses, 
and all decaying double flowers, with their foot-stalks, the moment they begin to decay ; 
and the same of the single plants, where seed is not wanted. From May to October, the 
flower-garden and shrubbery ought to be looked over by apprentices or women, every 
day, as soon as the morning dews are evaporated, for this purpose, and for gathering 
decayed leaves, tying up tall-growing stems before they decline or become strag- 
gling, &c. 

2370. Keep every part of wJiat is under your care perfect in its kind. Attend in spring 
and autumn to walls and buildings, and get them repaired, pointed, glazed and painted, 
where wanted. Attend at all times to machines, implements, and tools, keeping them 
clean, sharp, and in perfect repair. With an imperfect tool, no man can make perfect 
work. See particularly that they are placed in their proper situations in the tool-house. 
House every implement, utensil, or machine not in use, both in winter and summer. 
Allow no blanks in edgings, rows, single specimens, drills, beds, and even where prac- 
ticable in broad-cast sown pieces. Keep edgings and hedges cut to the utinost nicety. 
Keep the shapes of your wall-trees filled with woofl according to their kind, and let 
their training ho. in the first stj'Ie of perfection. Keep all walks in perfect form, v/hether 
raised or flat, free from w^eeds, dry, and well rolled. Keep all the laums under your 
care, by all the means in your power, of a close texture, and dark-green velvet appear- 
ance. Keep water clear and free from weeds, and, if possible, let not ponds, lakes, or arti- 
ficial rivers, rise to the brim in winter, nor sink veiy far under it in summer. 

2371. Finally, attend to personal habits and to cleanliness. " Never perform any oper-' 
ation without gloves on your hands that you can do wdth gloves on ; even Vv^eeding is 
far more effectually and expeditiously performed by gloves, the fore-fingers and thumbs 
of which terminate in wedge-like thimbles of steel, kept sharp. Most other operations 
may be performed with common gloves. Thus, no gardener need have hands like bears' 
paws. Always use an iron tread fastened to your shoe when you dig ; and generally a ' 
broad -brimmed, light, silk or straw hat, to serve at once as a parasol and umbrella. You 
will thus save the use of your feet, lessen the wear of your shoes, and avoid the rheu- 
matism in the neck. Let your dress be clean, neat, simple, and harm.onious, in form 
and color : in your movements maintain an erect posture, easy and free gait and mo- 
tion ; let your manner be respectful and decorous to your superiors ; and conduct fair 
and agreeable to your equals. Elevate, melioi-ate, and otherwise improve, any raw, 
crude, harsh, or inharmonious features in your physiognomy, by looking often at the 
faces of agreeable people, by occupying your mind with agreeable and useful ideas, and 
by continually instructing yourself by reading. This also will give you feattires if you 
have none. Remember that you are paid and maintained by and for the use and plea- 
sure of your employer, who may no more wish to see a dirty, ragged, uncouth-looking, 
grinning, or conceited biped in his garden, than a starved, haggaiid, untutored horse in 
his stable. ' ' ( Traugott Sch wa mstapper. ) 

2372. He tvho undertakes the profes-sio7i of a gardener, says the Rev. W. Marshall, 
takes upon himself a work of some importance, and which requires no small degree of 
knowledge, ingenuity, and exertion, to perform well. There are few businesses which 
may not be learned in much less tiiue than that of a gardener can possibly be. It often 
happens, however, that a man who has been very little in a garden, and that only as a 
laborer, who can do little more than dig, or put out cabbage plants, will call himself a 
gardener ; but he only is worthy of the name who having had much practice in the various 
parts of horticulture, possesses a genius and adroitness, fitting him for making experi- 
ments, and for getting through difficulties that the existing circumstances of imtoward 
seasons, &c. may bring him into. He should possess a spirit of enquiry into the nature 



454 



PRA^CTICE 0> GARDENING. 



Part III. 



of plants and vegetation, and how far art (in his way) may be made successfully useful, 
or at least probably so. The mode of growth, the pruning, the soil, the heat, and the 
moisture that suits particular plants, are not to be understood without a native taste, and 
close application of the mind. Whoever will give himself the pains to trace a good 
gardener through the several stages of his employ, in all the seasons of the year, will find 
it to be one continued circle of reflection, labor, and toil. Gardening depends more upon 
the labor of the brain than of the body : there is no such thing as always proceeding with' 
certainty and ^insuring success. Plants will die, and that sometimes suddenly, under the 
very best management. There are few things to be done in a garden which do not re- 
quire a dexterity in operation, and a nicety in hitting the proper season for doing it. 
A gardener should be a sort of prophet in foreseeing what will happen under certain cir- 
cumstances, and wisely cautious to provide, by the most probable means, against what 
may happen. A man cannot be a good gardener, except he be thoughtful, steady, and 
industrious ; possessing a superior degree of sobriety and moral excellence, as well as 
genius and knowledge adapted to his business. He should be modest in his manners and 
opinions. ' It too often happens, with those who have much practical skill, that they slight 
what is \vi-itten upon subjects of their profession ; which is a fastidious temper that the 
man of real merit will hai-dly entertain. 

2373. The characte)' of a gardener is here set high ; but it is the goal of respectability 
at which he ought to aim who presumes to call himself a professed one. A gardener 
has reason, indeed, to love liis employment, as he meets with health and tranquillity in the 
exercise of it ; but considering what he is, and what he does, in his proper capacity, he 
may justly claim a superior degree of estimation and reward. A true gentleman is of 
a liberal spirit, and I would plead for Ms gardener as a proper person to be generous 
towards, if his manners be good. {Tntrod. to Gard. p. 447.) 



PART III. 

GARDENING AS PRACTISED IN BRITAIN. 

2374. The art of gardening in the earlier ages of society would be practised without those 
local subdivisions, or technical distinctions, which its progressive improvement has since 
rendered necessary ; and being then carried on in one enclosure, called a Garden, the 
term Gardening was then sufficiently explicit for every purpose. But at present the 
local subdivisions and technical distinctions of this art are various ; we have the kitchen, 
fruit, flower, forcing, and exotic gardens, the pleasure-ground, shrubbery, park, and 
timber-plantation, all vsdthin the province of Gardening ; and the terms culinary gardening, 
fruit-gardening, flower-gardening, planting, &c. as technical distinctions for them. Tlie 
vague manner in which so many terms have been used by gardeners and authors, has led 
to some confusion of ideas on the subject, which it is much to be wished could be avoided 
in future. Taking the word gardening as a generic term, we have arranged its ramifi- 
cations or divisions, in what we conceive to be permanent or specific distinctions. The 
principle of classification which we have adopted, is that of the use or object in view ; and 
applying it, we think all the vaj-ieties of gardening may be included under the four fol- 
lowing species : — 

2375. Horticulture, the object of which is to cultivate products used in domestic economy. 
It includes culinary and fi uit gardening, or orcharding ; and forcing or ex(3tic gardening, 
as far as respects useful products. 

2376. Floriculture, or ornamental gardening, the object of which is to cultivate plants 
ornamental in domestic economy. It includes flower, botanic, and shrubbery gardening ; 
and forcing and exotic gardening, as far as respects plants of ornament. 

2377. Arboriculture, or planting, the object of which is to cultivate trees and shrubs, useful 
in general economy. It is practised in forests, woods, groves, copses, stripes, and rows. 

2378. Landscape-gardening, the object of which is to produce landscapes; or, so to 
arrange and harmonise the external scenes of a country-residence, as to render them orna- 
mental, both as domestic scenery, and as apart of the general scenery of the country. This 
branch is by some called picturesque, rural, ornamental, or tenitorial improvement ; rural 
ornament, ornamental gardening, pictorial improvement, new ground work, ornamental 
planting, &c. It includes the ancient, formal, geometric, or French gardening, and the 
modem, natural, picturesque, or English gardening. 



Book I. 



FORMATION OF A KITCHEN-GARDEN. 



455 



2379. There are other terms applied to gardens and gardening ; as nursery, market, 
physic, &c. gardens, and nursery-gardening, market-gardening, &c. ; but these concern 
gardening as a trade, rather than as an art, and their discussion is referred to the succeeding 
part of this work, in which gardening is considered statistically. 



BOOK 1. 

HORTICULTURE. 

2380. In treating of horticulture, some, as Nicol and Abercrombie, have neglected its 
local unity, and adopting its technical subdivisions, treated of the culinary fruit and 
forcing departments, as if they were separate gardens. But as these departments are all 
generally carried on within the same ring-fence, and as it is impossible to form and ar- 
range a kitchen-garden, without at the same time forming and arranging the walls and 
borders destined to receive the most valuable part of the fruit garden, and equally so to lay 
out the area enclosed, without determining the situation and extent of the forcing- depart- 
ment, we deem it preferable to treat of Horticulture as actually carried on, and in the fol- 
lowing order : viz. — The formation of the kitchen-garden. The distribution of the fruit- 
trees. The forming and planting of a subsidiary orchard. The general culture of the 
kitchen-garden. The general culture of the orchard. The construction of buildings used 
in the forcing-department. The general culture of the forcing-department. Catalogue of 
plants and trees used in horticulture. A monthly table of horticultural productions. 



Chap. I. 

The Formation of a ICitchen-garden. 

2381. The arrangement and laying out of a kitchen-garden, embraces a variety of con- 
siderations, some relative to local circumstances, as situation, exposure, soil, &c. ; others 
depending on the skill of the artist, as form, laying out the area, water, &c. : botli require 
the utmost deliberation ; for next to a badly designed, ill placed house, a misplaced, 
ill arranged, and unproductive kitchen-garden is the greatest evil of a country-residence. 

Sect. I. Situation. 

2382. The situation of the kitchen-garden, considered artificially or relatively to the other 
parts of a residence, should be as near the mansion and the stable-offices, as is consistent 
with beauty, convenience, and other arrangements. Nicol observes, " In a great place, 
the kitchen-garden should be so situated as to be convenient, and, at the same time, be con- 
cealed from the house. It is often connected with the shrubbery or pleasure-garden, and 
also placed near to the house. There can be no impropriety in this, provided it be kept 
in good order, and that the walls be screened by shrubbery from the immediate view of 
the public rooms ; indeed it has been found, that there is both comfort and economy in 
having the various gardens of a place connected, and placed at no great distance from 
the house. In stepping from the shrubbery to the flower-garden, thence to the orchard, 
and lastly to the culinary garden, there is a gradation both natural and pleasant. With 
such an arrangement, in cases where the aspect of the ground is answerable, and the 
surface, perhaps, is considerably varied, few faults will be found." 

2383. Sometimes we fnd the kitchen-gardejt jjlaced immediately in front of the house, 
•which Nicol " considers the most awkward situation of any, especially if placed near, and 
so that it cannot be properly screened by some sort of plantation. Generally speaking, 
it should be placed in the rear or flank of the house, by which means the lawn may not 
be broken and rendered unshapely where it is required to be most complete. The neces- 
sary traffic with this garden, if placed in front, is always offensive. Descending to the 
consideration of more humble gardens, circvimstances are often so arbitrary with respect 
to their situations, as that they cannot be placed either so as to please, or give satisfaction 
by their products. There are cases where the kitchen-garden is necessarily thrust into a 
corner, and perhaps is shaded by buildings, or by tall trees, from the sun and air ; where 
they are placed on steep hangs in a northern aspect, the sub-soil is a till or a cankering 
gravel, and the site cold and bleak. Such situations as these are to be avoided, and 
should be considered among the worst possible. Next are open, unsheltered plains. But 
even there, if the soil be tolerably good, and the sub-soil be not particularly bad, shelter 
may be reared, so as that in a few years the garden may produce a return for the expense 
laid out in its improvements." (Kalendar, p. 8.) 

2384. To j)lace the fruit and kitchen gardens at perhaps half a mile's distance or more from 

Gg4 



456 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the house was formerly the prevailing taste. In many cases, Neill observes, " this has been 
found inconvenient, and it can seldom happen that the garden- walls may not be effectually 
concealed by means of shrubs and low growing trees, so as not to be seen, at least from 
the windows of the public rooms, and the garden yet be situated much nearer to the 
house. It is scarcely necessai7," he adds, " to observe that an access for carts and wheel- 
barrows, without touching the principal approach, is indispensable." (^Ed. Encyc. art. 
Hort.) 

2385. With respect to the natural situation of a garden, Nicol and Forsyth agree in pre- 
ferring a gentle declivity towards the south, a little inclining to the east, to receive the 
benefit of the morning sun. " If it be situated in a bottom, the wind will have the less 
effect upon it ; but then damps and fogs will be very prejudicial to the fruit and other 
crops ; and if situated too high, although it will in a great measure be free from damps 
and fogs, it will be exposed to the fuiy of the winds, to the great hurt of the trees, by 
breaking their branches, and blowing down their blossoms and fruit. " {Tr. on Fruit 
Trees, p. 286.) 

2386. The situation should not he so elevated as to he exposed to boisterous and cutting 
uinds ; nor should a very low situation be chosen, if circumstances afford any choice. 
It should be situate conveniently for access from the house. (^Abercromhie'' s Practical 
Gardener, p. 1,2.) 

2387. Acoid lov situations and bottoms of valleys, say Switzcr, Darwin, Bradley, 
and Lawrence, " because there is often a sourness in the earth that cannot be eradicated, 
and in this uncertain climate of ours, such heavy fogs and mists that hang so long on the 
fruit and leaves in low situations, that not only vegetation is retarded, but also tlie fruit." 
{Pract. Fruit Gard. 2d edit. p. 19.) " Tlie greater warmth of low situations," Dr.. 
Darwin observes, " and their being generally better sheltered from the cold north-east 
winds, and the boisterous south-west winds, are agreeable circumstances ; as the north- 
east winds in this climate are the freezing winds ; and the south-west winds being more 
violent, are liable much to injure standard fruit-trees in summer by dashing their branches 
against each other, and thence bruising or beating off the fruit ; but in low situations the 
fogs in vernal evenings, by moistening the young shoots of trees, and their early flowers, 
render them much more liable to the injuries of the frosty nights, which succeed them, 
which they escape in higher situations." {Phytologia, sect, xv, 3. 6.) Professor Brad- 
ley " gives a decisive fact in regard to this subject. A friend of his had two gardens, 
one not many feet below the other, but so different, that the low garden often appeared 
flooded with the evening mists, when none appeared in the upper one ; and in a letter to 
Bradley he complains that his lower garden is much injured by the vernal frost, and not 
his upper one. A similar fact is mentioned by Lawrence, who observes, that he has 
often seen the leaves and tender shoots of tall ash-trees in blasting mists to be frozen, and 
as it were singed, in all the lower parts and middle of the tree ; while the upper part, 
which was above the mist, has been uninjured." (Darwin s Phi/tologia, sect. xv. 3. 6.) 

2388. Main entrance to the garden. Whatever be the situation of a kitchen-garden, 
whether in reference to the mansion or the variations of the surface, it is an important 
object to have the main entrance on the south side, and next to that, on the east or west. 
The object of this is to pi-oduce a favorable first impression on the spectator, by his viewing 
the highest and best wall (that on the north side) in front ; and which is of still greater 
consequence, all the hot-houses, pits, and frames in that direction. Nothing can be more 
unsightly than the view of the high north wall of a garden, with its back sheds and 
chimney-pots from behind ; or even getting the first coup d'ooil of the hot-houses from a 
point nearly in a parallel line with their front. The effect of many excellent gardens 
is lost or marred for want of attention to this point, or from peculiarity of situation. 
Even the new garden of the London Horticultural Society, when finished according to 
their engraved plan, will be obnoxious to it : the Chelsea garden is liable to the objec- 
tion, and those of Oxford and Liverpool particularly so. 

2389. Pird's-eye view of the garden. When the grounds of a residence ai'e much varied, 
the general view of the kitchen-garden will unavoidably be looked down on or up to from 
some of the walks or drives, or from open glades in the lawn or park. Some arrange- 
ment will therefore be requisite to place the garden, or so to dispose of plantations that 
only favorable views can be obtained of its area. To get a bird's-eye view of it from the 
north, or from a point in a line with the north wall, will have as bad an effect as the view 
of its north elevation, in which all its " baser parts" are I'endered conspicuous. 

Sect. II. Exposure and Aspect. 

2390. Exposure is the next consideration, and in cold and variable climates is of so 
much consequence for the maturation of fruits, that the site of the garden must be guided 
by it, more than by locality to the mansion. 

2391. The exposure should be towards the south, accoi'ding to Nicol, and" the aspect at 
some point between south-east and south-west, the ground sloping to these points in 



Book I. 



EXTENT. 



457 



417 




an easy manner. If quite flat, it seldom can be laid sufficiently dry ; and if very steep, 
it is worked under many disadvantages. It may have a fall, however, of a foot in twenty, 
without being very inconvenient, but a fall of a foot in thirty is most desirable, by which 
the ground is sufficiently elevated, yet not too much so. (^Kalendar, p. 6.) 

2392. An exposure declining towards the south, is that approved of by Switzer, " but not 
more than six inches in ten feet. Two or three inches he considers better." {Tract. 
Fruit Card. 2d edit. p. 17.) 

2393. An open aspect to the east, Abercrombie observes, "is itself a point of capital 
importance in laying out a garden, or orchard, on account of the early sun. When the 
sun can reach the garden at its rising, and continue a regular influence, increasing as the 
day advances, it has a gradual and most beneficial effect in dissolving the hoar frost, which 
the past night may have scattered over young buds, leaves, and blossoms or setting fruit. 
On the contrary, when the sun is excluded from the garden till about ten in the morning, 
and then suddenly darts upon it, with all the force derived from considerable elevation, 
the exposure is bad, particularly for fruit-bearing plants, in the spring months ; the 
powerful rays of heat at once melt the icy particles, and immediately acting on the 
moisture thus created, scald the tender blossom, which drops as if nipped by a malignant 
blight ; hence it happens, that many a liealthy tree, with a promising show of blossoms, 
fails to produce fruit ; the blossoms and thawed frost sometimes falling together in the 
course of a m.orning. The covering of the hoar frost, or congealed dew, is otherwise of 
itself a remarkable preservative of the vegetable creation from frosty winds." (Pract. 
Gard. p. 1.) 

2394. An exposure in ivhich is a free adfnittance for 
the sun and air, is required by Forsyth, who rejects a 
place surrounded by woods as very improper, because 
a foul stagnant air is very unfavorable to vegetation ; 
and it is also observed that blights are much more fre- 
quent in such situations than in those that are more 
open and exposed. Such an exposure will generally 
be to the south (fg. 417. d, e), but much depend;/ on 
the surrounding scenery. For this reason the northern 
boundary of a garden, where the hot-beds are gene- 
rally placed, will admit most sun and air, in proportion to the open space, when of 
a rounded (as in fg. 417. d, e), rather than an angular form; especially if the 
plantation [fg. 418. a), which 
surrounds the garden gradu- 
ally decline in height as it 
approaches the hot-bed ground 
(f) , on the north, and the sur- 
rounding walk (c), on the other 
sides. 

2395. If there be any slojie 
in the area of a garden, Mar- 
shall considers " it shoidd be 
southward, a point to the east 
or west not much signifying ; 
but not to the north, if it can 
be avoided, because crops come 
in late, and plants do not 
stand the winter so well in 
such a situation. A garden 
with a northern aspect has, 
however, its advantages, being 
cooler for some summer pro- 
ductions, as strawberries, spring- 
sown cauliflowers, &c. ; there- 
fore, to have a little ground 
under cultivation, so sitiiated, is 
desirable, especially for late suc- 
cession-crops." [lutrod. toGard. 
5th edit. p. 8.) 

Sect. III. Extent. 

2396. The extent of the kilchen-garden must be regulated by that of the place, of the 
family, and of their style of living. In general, it may be observed, that few country- 
seats have less than an acre, or more than twelve acres in regular cultivation as kitchen- 
garden, exclusive of the orchard and flower-garden. From one and a half to five acres 



418 




458 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



may be considered as the common quantities enclosed by walls, and the latter size, under 
proper management, with abundance of manure, is capable of supplying a respectable 
establishment. Where a farm is cultivated by the proprietor, it is found a desirable prac- 
tice to have part of the more common kitchen-crops, as cabbages, turnips, peas, potatoes, 
carrots, &c. grown in the fields ; the flavor of vegetables so grown being greatly superior 
to that of those raised in a garden by force of manure. Where a farm is not kept in 
hand, by annually changing the surface of the garden by trenching (2343. ), this effect of 
enriched grounds is considerably lessened. 

2397. To assist in detertyiining the extent of a garden, Marshall observes, tliat an 
acre with wall-trees, hot-beds, pots, &c. will furnish employment for one man, who, 
at some busy times, will need assistance. The size of the garden should, however, 
be proportioned to the house, and to the number of inhabitants it does, or may contain. 
This is naturally dictated ; but yet it is better to have too much ground allotted than too 
little, and there is nothing monstrous in a large garden annexed to a small house. Some 
families use few, others many vegetables ; and it makes a great difference whether the 
owner is curious to have a long season of the same production, or is content to have a 
supply only at the more common times. But to give some rules for the quantity of 
ground to be laid out, a family of four pei-sons (exclusive of servants) should have a rood 
of good-working, open ground, and so in proportion. But, if possible, let the garden be 
rather extensive, according to the family ; for then a useful sprinkling of fruit-trees can 
be planted in it, which may be expected to do well under the common culture of the 
ground about them ; a good portion of it also may be allotted for that agreeable fruit the 
strawberry in all its vaiieties ; and the very disagreeable circumstance of being at any 
time short of vegetables will be avoided. It should be considered also that artichokes, ' 
asparagus, and a long succession of peas and beans, require a good deal of ground. Hot- 
beds will also take up much room, if any thing considerable be done in the way of raising 
cucumbers, melons, &c. (Introd. to Gard. p. 25.) 

2398. For a small famUy, two acres of ground ivill do; but if for a great family, it should 
be six or eight acres. (Justice's Bi-it. Gard. Direc. p. 1.) 

2399. Tlis size of a garden 7nay be from one acre to six or eight within the wall, according 
to the demand for vegetables in the family. (Forsyth.) 

Sect. IV. Shelter and Shade. 

2400. To combine adequate shelter, with a free exposure to the rising and setting sun, 
is essentially necessary, and may be reckoned one of the most difficult points in the form- 
ation of a garden. 

2401. The kitchen-garden should be sheltered by plantations ; but should by no means be 
shaded, or be crowded by them. If walled round, it should be open and free on all sides, 
or at least to tlie south-east and west, that the walls may be clothed with fruit-trees on 
both sides. (^Nicol, Kal. p. 6.) 

2402. The garden should be sheltered from the east, north, and ivest winds, by hills, 
rising grounds, high buildings, or plantations of trees, at such a distance on the east and 
west sides, as not to prevent the sun from shining upon it. (M'Phail, Gard. Rem. 
2d edit. p. 12.) 

2403. A garden ought to be sheltered as much as can be from the north and east winds. 
These points of the compass, Marshall observes, should be guarded against by high and 
good fences, by a wall of at least ten feet high ; lower walls do not answer so well for fruit- 
trees, though one of eight may do. A garden should be so situated as to be as much 
warmer as possible than the general temper of the air is without, or ought to be made 
warmer by the ring and subdivision fences. This advantage is essential to the expectation 
we have from a garden locally considered. As to trees planted without the wall, to break 
the wind, it is not to be expected to reap much good this way, except from something 
more than a single row ; i. e. a plantation. Yet the fall of leaves by autumnal mnds is 
troublesome ; and a high wall is therefore advisable. Spruce firs have been used in close 
shorn hedges ; which, as evergreens, are proper enough to plant for a screen in a single 
row, though not very neai- to the wall ; but the best evergreens for tliis purpose are the 
evergreen oak and the cork-tree. The witch elm, planted close, grows quick, and has a 
pretty summer appearance behind a wall ; but is of little use then, as a screen, except to 
the west ; when still it may shade too much (if planted near) as it mounts high. In a 
dry hungry soil, the beech also is very proper, and both bear cutting. The great maple, 
commonly called the sycamore, is handsome, of quick gro^vth, and being fit to stand the 
rudest blasts, will protect a garden well in a very exposed situation ; the wind to be 
chiefly guarded against as to strength, in most places, being the westerly. (Introd. to 
Gard. p. 27.) 

2404. To shelter an elevated garden on a steep declivity (^fg. 419.), it may require to be , 
surrounded on all sides by high woods (n), and even to have groups of evergreens, as 
pines and hollies (e), and hedges of trellis or lattice- work (;>,;0> witliin the garden. The 



Book I. 



SHELTER AND SHADE. 



459 



hot-hotises (d) and hot-beds (/) may be placed, and more delicate culinary crops (h) cul- 
tivated, in an artificial basin or hollow, vhich will have the advantage of being sheltered 
both naturally and artificially, and on a steep exposed to the south, will have a powerful 
influence in accumulating heat in winter from the sun's rays. The south borders of such 
gardens (I, m), and the walls heated by furnaces (o^, will frequently be found to produce 
earlier crops than gardens placed on level surfaces and in low sheltered situations. 



419 




2405. Shelter may in jmrt be derived from the natural shape and situation of the ground. 
Gentle declivities, Neill observes, at the bases of the south or south-west sides of hills, or 
the sloping banks of winding rivers, with a similar exposure, are therefore very desirable. 
If plantations exist in the neighbourhood of the house, or of the site intended for the 
house, the planner of a garden naturally looks to them for his principal shelter ; taking^ 
care, txowever, to keep at a reasonable distance from them, so as to guard against the evil 
of being shaded. If the plantations be young, and contain beech, elm, oak, and other tall- 
growing trees, allowance is of course made for the future progress of the trees in height. 
It is a rule that there should be no tall trees oft the south side of a garden, to a very con- 
siderable distance ; for, during winter and early spring, they fling their lengthened 
shadows into the garden, at a time when every sunbeam is valuable. On the east also, 
they must be sufficiently removed to admit the early morning rays. The advantage of 
this is conspicuous in the spring months, when hoar-frost often rests on the tender buds 
and flowers : if this be gradually dissolved, no harm ensues ; bvit if the blossom be all at 
once exposed to the powerful rays of the advancing sun, when he overtops the trees, the 
sudden transition from cold to heat often proves destructive. On the west, and particu- 
larly on the north, trees may approach nearer, perhaps within less than a hundred feet, 
and be more crowded, as from these directions the most violent and the coldest winds 
assail us. If forest-trees do not previously exist on the territory, screen-plantations must 
be reared as fast as possible. The sycamore {Acer pseudo-platanus) is of the most rapid 
growth, making about six feet in a season j next to it may be ranked the larch, which 
gains about four feet j and then follow the spruce and balm of Gilead firs, which grow 
between three and four feet in the year. (^Edin. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2406. A garden should be well sheltered from the north and east, to prevent the blight- 
ing winds from affecting the trees ; and also from the westerly winds, which are very hurt- 



460 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part II L 



fill to the gardens in the spring or summer months. If a garden be not naturally 
sheltered with gently rising hills, which are the best shelter of any, plantations of forest^ 
trees, made at proper distances, so as not to shade it, will be found the best substitute. 
{Fors7jth, Tr. on Fruit Trees, p. 286.) 

2407. y4 garden should be ivell " guarded ivith ivood," oil the nortli-east, south-west, and 
norlh-xvest ; the south and south-east being the only aspects that should be open. This, 
Switzer says, is of " great import." There is great danger as to the easterly exposition, 
inasmuch as all blighting winds come from that quarter ; so also the south-west is sub- 
ject to the violent concussions of those winds that come off from the Atlantic or western 
ocean. But, it may be observed, the sun acting in an oblique manner, and the winds 
fluctuating horizontally, the garden may be planted all round with wood, between ten 
and fifteen yards' distance, provided you keep your trees on the south side to about fifteen 
feet high, for security from winds, without any danger of depriving it of the benefit of 
the sun. {Pratt. Fruit Gard. 2d edit. p. 18.) 

2408. Shade as u'ell as shelter are attended to by Abercrombie, who observes, " that 
competent fences are serviceable in sheltering tender seedlings, and in forming warm 
borders for early crops and winter standing plants ; while in another direction some part 
of the line of fence will afford a shady border in summer, which is required by the pecu- 
liar constitutions of many small annual plants. Where a kitchen-garden encloses two, 
three, or four acres, it will admit cross walls at proper distances, by which the advantages 
just mentioned may be multiplied." {Prac. Gard, 2d edit. p. 3.) 

Sect. V. SoU. 

2409. The soil of a garden is obviously of the greatest consequence in its culture. It 
is, however, a subordinate consideration to situation and exposure, for the soil may be 
changed or improved by art ; but no human efforts can remove the site, or change the 
exposure of a plot of ground. This subject was much more attended to about a cen- 
tury ago, in the days of London and Wise, Switzer and Hitt, than it seems to be at 
present. Gardeners, in general, depending too much on manures, and other adventitious 
aids, for securing large, though sometimes ill-flavored, culinary crops. Jethro Tull has 
some coarse, but to a certain extent just remarks on this subject. As an auxiliary argument 
in support of his delusive doctrine of rejecting manure in culture, he affects to " wonder 
that gentlemen who are so delicate in other matters should make no scruple to cat vegetables 
and fruits grown among the vilest filth and ordure." {Treatise on the Horse-hoeing Hus- 
bandry, 3d edit. p. 30. ) 

2410. The best soil for a garden, M'Phail observes, " is a sandy loam, not less than 
two feet deep, and good earth not of a binding nature in summer, nor retentive of rain 
in winter; but of such a texture, that it can be worked without difficulty, in any seasoh 
of the year. It should be remembered, that there are few sorts of fruit-trees, or esculent 
vegetables, which require less depth of earth to grow in than two feet to bring them to 
perfection ; and if the earth of the kitchen-garden be three or more feet deep, so much 
the better; for when the plants are in a state of maturity, if the roots, even of peas, 
spinage, kidneybeans, lettuce, Sec. be minutely traced, they will be found to pene- 
trate into the earth, in search of food, to the depth of two feet, provided the soil be of a 
nature that allows them. If it can be done, a garden should be made on land whose 
bottom is not of a springy wet nature. If this rule can be observed, draining will be 
unnecessary ; for when land is well prepared for the growth of fruit-trees and esculent 
vegetables, by trenching, manuring, and digging, it is by these means brought into such 
a porous temperament, that the rains pass through it without being detained longer than 
necessary. If the land of a garden be of too strong a nature, it should be well mixed 
with sand, or scrapings of roads, where stones have been ground to pieces by carriages." 
(Gard. Rem. p. 12.) 

2411. A hazel-colored loam, or a blackish vegetable earth, according to Abercrombie, 
*' may be regarded as good ; or if it be a fat loam mixed with silvery sand, or a moder- 
ately light mellow loam. A bed of very light sand or gravel is to be rejected, unless 
the alternative would give you a soil still more difficult to improve. The worst of all 
soils for a kitchen-garden is a strong clay. Nevertheless, as both clay and chalk have 
an attraction for fluid and volatile solutions of oil, a limited proportion of those earths 
contributes to form a rich and generous soil. Chalk may abound in a higher proportion 
than clay, and sand in a higher proportion than either clay or chalk, without causing 
barrenness. The soils best adapted for moderating the excesses, and compensating the 
deficiences of heat and moisture in different seasons, are compositions of sand, pulverised 
chalk, and finely divided clay, with a proportion of animal or vegetable matter. If the 
soil be not naturally good to the depth of thirty inches, and thence to three feet, proper 
earths and composts should be incorporated with it, to make it so, whei-e the tenure does 
not render the expense unadvisable. It should be done where it is intended to found a 



Book I. 



SOIL. 



461 



complete kitchen-garden ; not, indeed, because many esculent plants require more than 
eighteen inches' depth of good earth, in order to flourish in perfection ; nor that even 
fruit-trees generally will not thrive for a considerable course of time in a suitable soil, 
full two feet in depth, although three feet on their account is bettei- ; but, in order that 
the gardener may have it in his power to give rest to alternate portions of the soil, with- 
out keeping the surface out of crop, by trenching in successive years to different depths, 
so as to bring any given layer, measuring a spit in thickness, by turns to the bottom, the 
middle, and the surface, in proportion as the natural soil is unfavorable, it should 
receive improvement, till it be gradually brought to the desired state. Where some- 
thing intractable must be taken away, as in the case of a very stony bed, let the ground 
be trenched, and thp larger stones screened or raked out : ameliorate the residue 
by such earths, manures, and composts as its defects may require. To give heart to 
excessively light, sandy, and unstable ground, incorporate widi it substantial loam and 
Avell rotted dung. To correct a cold stubborn clay , add drift sand, shell marl, sea- 
weed, warm light earth, and well-rotted dung. To qualify soot for application in a 
garden, mix a thirty-sixth part with a heap of compost. If the soil has been rendered 
cold and wet by the passage and lodgment of water, it is requisite to have the ground 
effectually drained." (Pract. Gard. p. 2.) 

2412. T/ie soil that suits general cuUivation best is a loam, rather the red than the blacl-f 
Marshall observes ; " but there are good soils of various colors, and this must be as it 
happens ; the worst soil is a cold heavy clay, and the next a light sand ; a moderate 
clay, ho\^-ever, is better than a very light soil, though not so pleasant to work. If the 
soil is not good, i. e. too poor, too strong, or too light, it is to be carefully improved 
without delay. Let it first, at least, be thoroughly broken, and cleaned of all rubbish, to 
a regular level depth at bottom as well as top, so as to give about eighteen inches of 
working mould, if the good soil will admit of it ; none that is bad should be thrown up 
for use, but rather moved away. This rule of bottom-levelling is particularly neces- 
sary when there is clay below, as it will secretly hold up wet, which should not stand in 
any part of the garden. When a piece of ground is cleared of roots, weeds, stones, &c. 
it would be of advantage to have the whole thrown into two-feet wide trenches, and lie 
thus as long as conveniently may be. The ground cannot be too well prepared ; for 
when this business is not performed to the bottom at first, it is often neglected, and may 
not be conveniently done afterwards ; so it happens, that barely a spade's depth (or less) 
is too often thought sufficient to go on with. Tiiere is this great advantage of a deep 
staple, that in the cultivation of it the bottom may be brought to the top every other year, 
by double-trenching ; and being thus renewed, less dung will do, and sweeter vegetables 
be grown. Tap-rooted things, as carrots and parsneps, require a good depth of soil.'* 
(Introd. to Card. p. 28.) 

2413. 2' he soil oj" a new garden shoidd be tico or three feet deep, according to Forsyth,' 
" but if deeper the better, of a mellow pliable nature, and of a moderate dry quality ; 
ai.d if the ground sliould have an uneven surfoce, by no means attempt to level it, for by 
that unevenness, and any little difference there may be in the quality, you will have a 
greater variety of soil adapted to different crops. The best soil for a garden is a rich 
mellow loam ; and the worst, a stiff heavy clay. A light sand is also a very unfit soil 
for a garden. Sea-coal ashes, or the cleanings of streets and ditches, will be found very 
proper to mix with a strong soil ; and if the ground should be cold, a large quantity of 
coal -ashes, sea-sand, or rotten vegetables should be laid upon it, in order to meliorate 
and loosen the soil, and render it easy to work. Lime-rubbish, or light sandy earth 
from fields and commons, will also be found of great service to stiff clayey ground. If 
the soil be light and warm, rotten neat's dung is the best dressing that you can give it. 
If horse-dung be ever used, it must be completely rotted, otherwise it will burn up the 
crop the first hot weather." (Tr. on Fr. Trees, p. 290.) 

2414. Different soils are required in the same garden. This is Nicol's opinion, who has 
had more experience in the formation of gardens than any of the authors from whom we 
are quoting ; his remarks " on soils, and how to improve them," merit every attention, 
and will be duly valued by those v/ho have seen any of the excellent kitchen-gardens he 
has formed in Fifeshire, Perthshire, and other northern counties. It is a happy circum- 
stance, he says, " that in many instances we meet with different soils in the same acre." 
In the same garden they should never be wanting ; and where nature (or natural causes) 
has been deficient, recourse must be had to art ; inasmuch as the variety of fruits and 
vegetables to be cultivated require different soils to produce them in perfection. It 
would be absurd, however, to imagine, that for every particular vegetable there is to be a 
particular soil prepared. 

2415. The varieties of soil in an;/ garden rmy, with pro])riety, be confined to the following : — Strong 
clayey loam, light sandy loam (which are the two grand objects), a comjwsition of one fourth strong with 
three fourths light loam, half strong and half light, and one fourth light and tlirce fourths stvong. These, 
by a proper treatment, and with the proper api)lication of manures, may be rendered productive of any 
oi"thc known and commonly cultivated vegetables in the highest degree of perfection. 



462 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



2416. In order to improve a soil, we must be guided much by its nature, so as, if possible, to render it ser- 
viceable for general purposes. And hence our duty is to endeavour to hit on that happy medium which suits 
the generality of esculents, in the formation or improvement of the soil in the kitchen-garden. Such a 
soil should be sufficiently tenacious to adhere to the roots of plants, though not so much so as to be bind, 
ing, which would certainly retard their progress and extension in quest of food. Hence a loam of a 
middle texture, rather inclining to sand, may be considered as the most suitable soil for the purpose here 
in view, and that on a double account, viz. the greater part of the valuable kinds of kitchen-vegetables 
delight in such soil, and it is worked at less expense than a stifF one ; neither in severe droughts is it apt 
to crack or be parched, nor in hard frosts is it so apt to throw out tender plants or seeds. 

2417. If soils be too strong, the tender roots of plants push weakly in them, sicken, canker, and perish ; and 
if a soil be too light, and if it be poor withal, plants deposited in it will push their roots far, and in vain, in 
quest of that stability and nutriment which is necessary and essential to their support. So that if the butt 
of our aim be perfection in the production of wholesome and well matured vegetables, we must put aside 
careless indifference in the formation of a proper soil, nor trust entirely to the fiirce of dungs, were they 
even to be had in the greatest plenty ; for dungs, by too free an apphcation, have an effect on the quality 
of esculents not altogether salutarj'. Wherefore, that our efforts may be attended with success, let us 
bestow a moderate and prudent expense in the first outset, on composing or so improving the soil to be 
appropriated to this purpose, as that, in our best judgment, it may fully answer the intention. 

2418. Where the bottom is wet and the sub-soil of a cankering nature, it may be improved by judicious drain- 
ing ; where the soil is stubborn, by the addition of small gravel, sea-sand, wherein is a considerable quantity 
of small pebbles and shells, coal-ashes, lime, gravel, pounded brick-bats, brick-kiln ashes, &c.,and, aboveall, 
by being carefully laid up in ridges in the winter months, and, indeed, at aU times when not in crop, in 
such a manner as to give the greatest extent of surface for the weather to act upon ; where the soil is a 
poor sand, or gravel, by the addition of clay, or strong clayey loam, scourings of ditches which run 
through a clayey sub-soil, pond-mud in a like situation, or" scrapings of roads which lie in a clayey 
district, &c. 

2419. Soils that abound ivith inetalUc substances, and which generally make them appear of an iron color, 
are termed fox bent or till. These substances are often found to be intimately mixed, or rather consoli- 
dated with the soil, in considerable masses, which are adhesive and very ponderous. Such soils are the 
most unfavorable to vegetation of any, and are quite ineligible for the purpose here in view, without 
being much improved. For this purpose, lime will be found the most serviceable of all things, if judici- 
ously applied, and the soil be frequently turned over by digging or trenching, so as that the soil and the 
lime may be intimately mixed together, and that the atmosphere may have fuU effect upon them ; for 
without this, the lime will not operate so effectually, nor will the tilly particles of the soil be divided or 
meliorated so well. It may seem unnecessary to observe, that, according to the quantity of irony matter 
contained in the soil, limo will be required to reduce it. In order to ascertain this quantity, a magnet 
ivill be found useful, and one of the masses being calcined, and then reduced to a powder, "the magnet 
will separate the irony particles from the soil, showing the proportion of iron and of earth. Thus we may 
fertilise the soil, taking for the extremes in ordinary cases, and supposing the lime of a middling quality, 
150 and 400 Winchester bushels an acre ; applying the lime in a quick or powdered state, and properly 
working the soil, being careful, in the first place, to drain it of superabundant moisture. 

2420. Ridging up of soil, as above hinted at, has the happiest effect, especially for stiff soils, and should 
never be omitted when the ground is not under crop. In dead sandy loams also, and in cankering gravels, 
it is of incalculable advantage, and greatly meliorates them. For it is a fact proved by experience, that 
exposing soil to the sun's rays in part, by throwing it into a heap, whereby it is also partly shaded, and 
trenching it once a month, or in two mo"nths, will sooner restore it to fertility than any other process, 
exclusively of adding fresh matter. And thus, if any ingredient noxious to vegetation" abound in the 
soil, it may be expelled, or be exhaled by the action of the atmosphere, more particularly if the soil 
undergo a summer and also a winter faUow. In the latter case, however, care should be taken to have 
the surface encrusted by frost, as often as possible, by turning it, and giving it a new surface each succeed- 
ing thaw. {Gard. Kalend. p. 19.) 

2421. The soil intended for a garden may he known by its productions. " In selecting 
ground for a garden," Neill observes^ " the plants growing naturally on the surface 
should be noted, as from these a pretty correct opinion may be formed of the qualities of 
the soil. The sub-soil should also be examined. If this be radically bad, such as an iron 
till mixed with gravel, no draining, trenching, or manuring will ever prove an effectual 
remedy ; if, on the contrary, the sub-soil be tolerably good, the surface may be greatly 
meliorated by these means. In every garden two varieties of soil are wanted, a strong 
and a light one, or, in other words, a clayey loam and a sandy loam ; different plants 
requiring these respective kinds. For the general soil, a loam of middling quality, 
but partaking father of the sandy than the clayey, is accounted the best." (Ed. Encyc 
art. Hort.) 

2422. General jyractice. It appears to be generally agreed on by practical men, that 
there ought to be between two and a half and four feet of good soil over the whole sur- 
face of the kitchen-garden. This depth will rarely be found to exist naturally ; or, if it 
does in some places, it will be deficient in others. The proper heights for the borders and 
compartments being fixed on, and the whole thoroughly drained, the next tiling is to trench 
the soil to the proper depth from the level or levels of the intended surface, whether these 
run under or over the present surface, remo-ving all unfavorable sub-soil, either to such 
hollows within the ring-fence of the garden as require to be filled up to a greater depth 
than that fixed on for the good soil; or, what is preferable, placing it without the 
garden. This done, the next thing is to introduce as much good soil as will raise the 
surface to the thickness required. The strongness or lightness of this additional soil 
must depend on the nature of that already there, and on the object in view. In com- 
plete gardens, it may be desirable to have three qualities of soil, viz. a strong loam or 
light loam, and a loam of medium quality ; the latter occupying the borders and about 
half of the compartments. The soils introduced therefore must be such as, with what is na- 
turally tliere, will effect these objects. If, for example, the local soil is every where light 
or sandy, then one part, say that destined for strong loam, should receive as much of 
clayey loam as will bring it to the temperament desired ; that for medium " loam a lesser 
portion, with as much light earth as will bring it to the required depth : and if the 



Book I. 



WATER. 



46S 



natuml soil is deemed too light, to that also must be added a portion of what is more 
cohesive, &c. It may be observed, however, that the 
general object in selecting, forming, or improving the 
soil for a kitchen- garden, is to obtain, as Nicol 
expresses it, " a loam of a middle texture rather 
inclining to sand," such soil being easy to work, little 
affected by either droughts, rains, or frosts ; and the 
greater part of the valuable kinds of kitchen-vegetables 
delighting in it. All the authors we have quoted 
above may be said to agree in desiring such a soil for 
the whole of the kitchen-garden. In peculiar situ- 
ations, as where villas are built on rocky steeps, and 
other romantic situations, it may become a matter of 
great difficulty and expense to bring soil from a 
distance ; and it may also be found equally difficult 
to find a bed for it, by the removal of rock, &c. In 
such cases, all that can be done is to select the most 
favorable spots {Jig. 420. a, a) ; cultivate them to the 
utmost, connect them by walks and shrubbery ; and 
place the economical buildings attached to the garden 
(6), and hot-houses, &c. (e), in the most commodious 
situations, and where they will not interfere with 
general effects. There are many very productive 
gardens of this description in the north of Scotland, 
and in the territory of Genoa. 

Sect. VI. Water. 

2423. A copious supply of water is essential to a good kitchen-garden, and, from 
whatever source it is furnished, should be distributed either in reservoirs or open cisterns, 
or in pipes, properly protected, over the garden, and in hot-houses. If the supply is 
from a pond or river, a system of lead or cast-iron pipes may be adopted, and the 
delivery effected by cocks at proper distances ; but if from wells or springs, the delivery 
should be into open stone or cast-iron cisterns ; or, in default of these, into tubs or 
butts sunk in the earth. In Tuscany, where the inhabitants excel in the manufacture of 
pottery, immense jars of earthenware are frequently adopted ; in the Royal Garden at 
Paris, sunk barrels ; and cisterns of masonry, lined with cement, are general in the best 
gardens on the continent. In these gardens, a system of watering is adopted, which, 
though rendered more necessary there by the climate, than it can possibly be in this 
country, yet in various respects deserves imitation. 

2424. Many Mtchen-crops are lost, or produced of very inferior quality for want of watering. Lettuces 
and cabbages are often hard and stringy ; turnips and radishes do not swell, onions decay, cauliflowers 
die off, and, in general, in dry seasons, all the crudferecB become stinted, or covered with insects, even in 
rich deep soils. Copious waterings in the evenings, during the dry seasons, would produce that fulness 
and succulency which we find in the vegetables produced in the Low Countries, and in the Marsh Gar- 
dens at Paris ; and in this country at the beginning and latter end of the season. The vegetables brought 
to the London market from the Neat's Houses, and other adjoining gardens, where the important article 
of watering is much more attended to than in private country-gardens, may be adduced as affording 
proofs of the advantage of the practice. 

242,5. Tlie watering the foliage of fruit and other trees to destroy or prevent the increase of insects, 
and of strawberries and fruit-snrubs to swell the fruit, is also of importance ; and though the climate of 
Scotland is less obnoxious to great droughts, than that of the southern counties, yet we find that excellent 
horticultural architect, John Hay, adopting a system of watering in various gardens lately formed by him 
in the neighbourhood of Edinburgh. 

2426. The contrivance for watering or washing the foliage of the wall-trees in Dalmeny garden, laid out 
by this artist, deserves particular notice. Water is supplied to the garden from a reservoir, situated on 
an eminence, a considerable height above the garden-walls. Around the whole garden, four inches below 
the surface of the ground, a groove, between two and three inches deep, has been formed in the walls, 
to receive a threfe-quarter inch pipe for conducting the water. About fifty feet distant from each other 
are apertures through the wall, two feet and a half high, and ten inches wide, in which a cock is placed, 
so that on turning tne hantUe to either side of the wall, the water issues from that side. The nozzles of 
the cocks have screws on each side, to which is attached at pleasure a leathern pipe, with a brass cock 
and director ; roses, pierced with holes of different sizes, being fitted to the latter. By this contrivance, 
all the trees, both inside and outside the wall, can be most effectually watered and v/ashed in a very short 
space of time, and with very little trouble. One man may go over the whole in two hours. At tho same 
time the borders, and even a considerable part of the compartments, can be watered with the greatest ease 
when required. The conveniency and utility of this contrivance must at once be perceived by every 
practical horticulturist. The same plan of introducing water is adopted in a garden which J. Hay 
planned and executed for Lord V. Duncan, at Lundie-House, near Dundee ; and after the experience of 
several years, it has been greatly approved of. The water at Lundie is conveyed to the garden from a 
considerable height, and is thrown from the point of the director with great force, and to a good distance. 
{Edin. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2427. Water in a garden is absolutely necessary, according to Justice ; well-water is 
fax from being proper, but that which is impregnated by the sun's rays is highly condu- 



420 




464 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



cive to vegetation. He recommends forming a large pond or basin in the centre of the 
garden, which shall at the same time contain fish. (^Brit. Gard. Direct, p. 2. ) 

2428. Gardens should be near a oiver or brook, that they may be loell supplied with water. 
From these, Forsyth observes, " if the garden does not lie too high, the water may be 
conducted to it by drains ; or, which is much better, by pipes, taking care to lay them 
low enough to receive the water in the driest season, which is the time when it will be 
most wanted. If there be no running water near the garden, and if the latter lies on a 
declivity near a public road, I would advise to make a hollow drain, or a cut, from the 
most convenient part of the road, to receive the water that washes the road in rainy 
weathei , and convey it to a large cistern, or tank, in the upper part of the gai-den ; this, 
if the road be mended with limestone or chalk, will prove an excellent manure. The water 
from the cistern, or from the river, may be conducted to the different compartments by 
means of pipes, which, having cocks at proper places, the water may be turned upon the 
different compartments of the garden at pleasure. Or the water may be conveyed in proper 
channels, and turned on the compartments in the same manner as in watering meadows. 
These pipes, channels, &c. will be a considerable expense at first ; but they will soon 
repay it, by saving a great deal of time, which would otherwise be spent in pumping 
and carrying water. The most convenient time for turning the water on is, in general, 
during the night ; and in dry weather it would then be of the most essential serv^ice. 
If the situation be such that you are obliged to pump the water from deep wells, 
there should be a large reservoir, in which it should be exposed to the sun and air 
for some days before it is used ; it may then be turned on as above. If the ground 
be wet and spewy, it will be proper to make a basin of the most convenient place to re- 
ceive the water that comes from the drains, and to collect the rain that falls on the walks." 
{Tr. on Fr. Trees.) 

2429. Water cs the life and soul of a garden. Switzer observes, " it is one of the most 
essential conveniences of a country-seat, and especially useful to kitchen-crops ; for, 
indeed, what can be made of any ground without it ? Anima mea sicut terra sine aqua, 
is a good metaphor to express it, as it really is the soul and life of all vegetation ; and 
whoever does not make that one of his principal considerations, deserves blame or pity." 
Describing his design for the garden of Spy Park as to water, the same author observes, 
" The square basins are not only designed for little stews for fish, but at each corner 
there are clay and elm pipes, with plugs to them that go under the alley, and commu- 
nicate themselves with the adjacent divisions or compartments, which will, in an instant, 
float the same, because the little basins are designed to lie six inches higher than those 
divisions or compartments ; and then the whole is so contrived by other larger elm pipes, 
that the said little basins are filled by the canal and other conveniences." 

2430. A source of water is considered essential to a garden by most writers. London 
and Wise, Evelyn, Hitt, and LawTence are warm in recommending it. M'Phail ob- 
serves, that a garden to bring the prodi?Ce of the soil to the greatest perfection, " should 
be well supplied with water, to water the plants in dry seasons." [Gard. Rem. 2d edit, 
p. 13.) If water can be introduced, observes Marshall, " and kept clean with verdant 
banks around it, it would be very useful where a garden is large ; but let it be as near 
the centre as possible, being the most convenient situation. It should be fed from a 
spring, and (if it could) be made to di'ip in the reservoir, because its trickling noise is 
agreeable music in a garden to most ears." (Introd. to Gard. p. 42.) " If there be no 
natural stream that can be conducted through a garden," observes Nicol, " water should 
be conveyed from the nearest river, lake, or pond ; soft water being most desirable for 
the use of the garden." [Kalendar, j). 7.) 

Sect. VII. For?n. 

2431. In regard to form, almost all the authors above quoted agree in reconimending 
a square (fg. 421. a) or oblong, as the 
most convenient for a garden ; but 
Abercrombie proposes a long octagon, 
in common language, an oblong with 
the angles cut off (b) ; by which, he 
says, a greater portion of the wall in 
the slips behind will be on an equality 
with the garden as to aspect. \V I \ 

2432. A geometrical square is recom- * j 
mended by Hitt, " set out in such a S 
manner, that each wall may have as 

much benefit of the sun as possible," that is, with reference to the compass, set out as a 
rhomboid (c). 

2433. A square or oblong form, M'Phail considers as the most convenient. A square 
with a semicircular projection on the north side (fig. 417. d), or a parallelogram with a 




Book I. 



WALLS. 



465 




northern projection in the form of a semicircle (Jig- 417. e), were favorite forms with 
the late W. Nicol. These opinions, it is to be considered, refer more properly to the 
space enclosed by walls than to the whole garden, which ought to be considered as com- 
prehending the entire space included in the ring-fence ; which fence, choice or accidental 
circumstances may produce in any shape from the circle 424.) to the most irregular 
figure. (Jigs. 420. 422. ) 

2434. The oval, polygonal, and trapezium forms have been adopted for the walls of a 
garden, in order to procure a more equal distribution of sun and shade ; but the incon- 
veniences attending the culture and management of the compartments of such gardens 
are considerable ; nor does it appear an equal distribution of sun is so suitable, as that 
of having some walls as advantageously exposed as possible for the more delicate fruits ; 
and others less so for hardier sorts, for retarding fruits, and for growing plants to which 
shade is congenial in the borders. No figure whatever can add to the quantity of sun's 
rays received by the whole form, but merely vary their distribution. 

2435. Even irre- 
gular figures are ad- .«'"Fftts.LftY/i^ 
missible, such figures 
{fig. 422.) being 
surrounded by wood 
{i), and interspersed 
with fruit-trees, will 
form very agreeable 
shapes in walking 
through them ; and 
while the compart- 
ments are thrown in- 
to right-lined figures 
to facilitate culture, 
the angles can be 
occupied with fruit- 
trees or shrubs, per- 
manent crops, as 

strawberries, asparagus, &c. with the hot-houses (e), or other buildings (6), or with 
ponds {f), and other adjuncts. Some of the walks may be wavy (a), as a directio'i 
indicated by the outline of wood, and one main walk (d, d) may be formed, broad ani 
straight, to display the whole. 

Sect. VIII. Walls. 

2436. Walls are built round a garden chiefly for the production of fruits. A kitchen- 
garden, Nicol observes, considered merely as such, may be as completely fenced and 
sheltered by hedges as by walls, as indeed they were in former times, and examples of that 
mode of fencing are still to be met with. But in order to obtain the finer fruits, it be- 
comes necessary to build walls, or to erect pales and railings. 

2437. Placing, jrroportioning, and construct- 423 
hig the walls of a kitchen-garden, is a matter in 
which the artist may display a degree of taste ^ 
as well as fitness and propriety. " If these," 
Nicol continues, be properly set down, so as to 
answer the cast of the ground (fig. 423. ), and be 
raised to proper heights, according to its extent, 
the rest is easy, and follows as a matter of course. 
In this particular branch of gardening, utility 
and simplicity ought to go hand in hand, other- 
wise true taste will be wanting. It is not in 
curves, circles, and ogees, we shall find satis- 
faction. The walls, if the ground admit of it, 

should all run in direct lines, corresponding to the slopes on which they are placed (a, b, 
c, d) ; they may be built level, or they may be inclined, so as to suit the general cast of 
the ground ; but the nearer to a level the better they will please. The mind is dissatis- 
fied and distracted in beholding any building apparently unstable. We can look upon 
a mast placed oblique, or on a tree growing aslant, with firmness and satisfaction, because 
we know the one is supported by ropes, and the other by roots ; but on a wall running 
much off the level, we look with a degree of distrust or of fear. If the north wall can be 
placed quite level, and also the south wall on a lower level, and so as that the east and 
west walls shall fall, from north to south, a foot in thirty or in twenty-five ; and if the 
ground be lengthened from east to west, in the proportion of three to two, the extent be- 
ing two or three acres, on such a spot may be formed a garden that will not fail to please. 

H h 




466 PRACTICE 6F GARDENING. Part III. 

Next, on a spot of the above, or of similar dimensions, sloping to the south, and not level 
from east to west, but sloping a few feet, perliaps one in fifty, to the east, in this case the 
opposite walls should run directly parallel to each other, both with respect to latitude and 
to inclination, otherwise the eye will be displeased by the distorted appearance of the cop- 
ing when at the full height. Next, all as here described, and the ground sloping to the 
south and to the west. And next, a dead level spot, in which case particularly the walls 
should be of different heights. But ground falling to the north, or much distorted, should 
be avoided, as being very unfit for erecting walls or other buildings upon, on which a com- 
plete modern garden cannot be formed without considerable difficulty, and a great addi- 
tional expense. " {Xalend. p. 142.) 

2438. Walls with a south aspect, as Switzer observes, " have been all along reckoned 
the best for fruits, though later observation and experience have not confirmed it ; for 
when the days are something long, and the heat of the sun in its greatest strength, it is 
late before the sun shines upon them, and it leaves such a position as early in the after- 
noon. Besides, when it is mid-day, the sun is so much elevated above the horizon, that 
it shines but faintly and very slopingly upon them, which makes the heat to be much the 
less, inasmuch as a smaller quantity of rays fall upon such a wall, it being visible, that 
both before and after noon the sun shines hotter than when it is in its highest meridian. 
From whence, 'tis natural to infer, that a little inclination, either to the east or west, are 
the best aspects ; but which of the two will maintain its precedence may be now enquired 
into. And in this enquiry, I shall venture to affirm, that the east, or rather south-east, 
are to be preferred to the west or south-west, though they are as much exposed to the sun 
as east walls are. Though it should be argued that the sun shines stronger in the after- 
noon than the morning, because it continues to act on air already warmed with the influ- 
ence of the morning sun, yet, inasmuch as the rays of the sun are more healthy and cheer- 
ful then than after, and dispel the cold dews and vapors as before, it is more than equi- 
valent to the extraordinary heat of the afternoon sun, as experience shows, which is generally 
languid and unhealthy. From whence I infer as before, that the south-east maintains its 
post against either the south or south-west. *Tis from reasonings of this kind I would 
venture to establish it as my humble opinion, (and I think I have the suffrage of most 
eminent planters and gardeners to second me,) that a south wall, inclining about twenty 
degrees to the east, is preferable to any of the others, inasmuch as the sun shines as early 
on it as on a full east wall, and never departs from it till about two o'clock in the after- 
noon ; besides, it is something removed from those destructive winds that come from the 
west and north." (Pr. Fr. Gard. p. 312.) 

2439. Equality of aspect. Hitt proposes to have no south wall, but by the position of 
the four sides of his garden {Jig' 421. c ) endeavors to obtain a comparatively equal dis- 
tribution of solar heat. The plan he recommends contains two acres, the ground descend- 
ing from the south-west side. " In respect to the aspect of the walls," he says, "the 
sun's rays continue no longer upon the north-west wall than three in the afternoon, which, 
I think, is the most proper aspect for grapes, peaches, nectarines, and all other kinds of 
fruit that require the most regular heat to bring them to perfection, and soonest to matu- 
rity, for though the sun leaves this wall so soon in the afternoon, yet in the morning this 
aspect will be of advantage to the trees and fruits ; for, as apricots, peaches, and nectarines 
blossom early in the spring, at which time our climate is frequently attended with frosty 
nights, destructive of both blossoms and fruit, the sun's rays darting in lines at right 
angles upon the wall at nine o'clock, dissolve the congealed moisture mucli sooner than if 
they darted upon it at right angles at noon, which they must consequently do if the wall 
stands due south. 'Tis true, a south wall will receive more sun by three hours, that is, 
from about three in the afternoon till near six, (in the vernal equinox,) but that is no great 
advantage, for before that time of the day the air will be suflSciently warmed. Besides, if 
the wall is built full south, it will not be so proper for fruit-trees as a south-east aspect; 
for in the middle of the day the sun will cause the trees to exhale their juices faster than 
their roots can absorb them, which will render the fruit smaller and the pulp harder, and 
worse flavored, than those which receive the heat more regular. The south-east wall re- 
ceives the sun about nine o'clock, which is a proper situation for some of the best kinds 
of winter pears, and which they well deserve, for they afford fine juices and rich flavors, 
when other fruits of the same quality are wanting. Some kinds of grapes, peaches, and 
nectarines will ripen well against it ; and this has one equal advantage with the south-west 
wall, viz. of the sun's rays striking obliquely upon it at noon. The north-vi^est aspects of 
these walls receive but little sun, for he shines not upon them till three in the afternoon, 
but they will serve for fruits which ripen in summer, as cherries, plums, and some kinds 
of pears." (2V. on Fruit Trees, p. 33.) 

2440. A full south aspect is recommended by Marshal], for a wall designed for the best 
fruits ; or, it may be somewhat inclining to the east, by which it will catch the sun's rays 
at its rise, the cold night dews will be earlier and more gently dissipated, and the scorch- 
ing rays of the afternoon summer's sun are sooner off. By thus having the walls of a 



Book I. 



WALLS. 



467 



garden not tUrectly to the four ^joints, the north wall is greatly advantaged by liuving 
more sun. 

2441. The best aspect for a fridt-wctll in Scotland, Nicol observes, " is about one point 
to the eastward of soutii, such walls enjoying the benefit of the morning sun, and being 
turned a little from the violent west and south-west winds. South-east is, for the same 
reasons, accounted by many a better aspect than south-west." Dr. Walicer, on the 
other hand, with reference to the same country, states, that the six hottest hours of 
the day are from eleven to five o'clock, and that it is not a wall of a south-east, but 
of a south-west aspect, which enjoys this heat. (Essays on A%t. Hist. p. 258.) 

2442. The height of walls for training fndt-trees generally approved is from ten to 
twelve feet ; but it is more commonly determined by the size and form of the garden, 
and the inclination of its surface. The following judicious observations of Nicol are 
the best which have appeared on this subject. The irregular surfaces on which gardens 
are often obliged to be formed in Scotland, require the greatest attention and nicety 
from the designer, and hence the fulness of his remarks. 

2443. With respect to the height of fruit-walls, considered merely as such, the matter might easily be 
determined. I would say, twelve feet, that height being very convenient for the operations of pruning, 
watering, gathering the fruit, &c. and admitting of a sufficient expansion of the branches of most trees. 
But the height of garden-walls should be regulated by the extent, or by the apparent extent, of the ground 
enclosed by them. I say by the apparent extent, as well as by the real extent, because much depends on 
the form and cast of the ground, in how much the eye shall be pleased. If it be a square, it will seem less 
than it really is ; and if a lengthened parallelogram, larger j and according to its flatness or its elevation, 
the eye will be deceived. 

2444. A small pot surrounded by high walls has a bad effect and a gloomy appearance^ Th e walls being 
of different heights give relief In a garden of an acre, being a parallelogram of the best proportion, and 
gently elevated, the north wall may be raised to the height of fourteen feet ; the east and west walls to 
twelve ; and the south wall to ten feet above the ground level If the ground slope considerably, the 
breakings in the respective heights of the walls may be less ; they may be only a foot ; and the relief will 
be the same, or nearly the same, to the eye, in ranging along their surfaces. In a garden of greater 
extent, the walls may be raised to a greater height ; but by no means in proportion, if it extend to several 
acres. The extreme height of the north wall of any garden should not exceed eighteen feet ; and containing 
suppose four acres, the east and west walls should be fifteen, and the south wall only twelve feet high, in 
order that it may give the necessary relief to the eye. In a garden four hundred feet long and three 
hundred feet broad, which forms a handsome parallelogram, and contains something above two English 
acres, if the ground lie on an easy slope, a very eligible height for the north wall is sixteen feet ; for the 
east and west walls fourteen ; and for the south wall twelve. But if the ground be quite level, or nearly 
so, the north wall being the same height, the east and west walls should only be thirteen and a half feet, 
and the south wall eleven feet in height; or the east and west walls may only be thirteen, and the south 
wall ten feet high, if it be a dead level. {Kal. p. 145.) 

2445. Fruit-walls Jive or six feet high, Hitt observes, will do very well for peaches, 
"cherries, vines, and figs, but he would not advise the planting of plums, apricots, or 
pears, on such walls, they requiring more room, and to stand longer before they 
bear. 

2446. Fniit-walls ten feet high axe preferred by Forsyth, but he says they may extend 
to fourteen feet. 

2447. Many low walls, or stout' ranges of jyaling, Abercrombie observes, "will pro- 
duce a greater total of effect in accelerating fruit, than the same expenditure in high 
walls." 

2448. The situation of the garden-doors in the walls demands attention. We have 
already shown the importance of entering the garden from the south, south-east, or south- 
west sides ; and this circumstance must not be lost sight of for main entrances. Doors in 
the north wall, or north ring-fence, should be considered as ex<;lusively for the operators 
of the garden. Doors, in short, should be so contrived, as never to invite visitors to the 
north slip, or so as to get behind the hot-houses. The width of doors depends on the 
extent of the garden, and whether the melon-ground and compost-ground are within the 
walls, or in the external area. In general the doors in the ring-fence, and the walk round 
the outside of the garden, should be such as to admit ^one-horse cart for bringing in 
manure and soils. 

2449. The slojnng or bevelled walls, recommended by the author of Fruit Walls 
im])roved by inclining them to the Horizon, are disapproved of by Switzer, because, 
" though the author's very curious calculation is, perhaps, no whit inconsistent with 
truth, yet experience has taught (and that in a sloping wall at Belvoir Castle, I think, of 
the author's own directing), that though the sun may act with more vigor in its solstitial 
capacity on a sloping than on a perpendicular wall, yet it is as deficient in its performances 
in the morning ; and by the author's own arguments, as well as the observations of 
almost every body that has made any observation at all, that dews are expelled at least an 
hour in the morning sooner from a perpendicular wall than a sloping one ; so that what 
is gained at one time is lost at another."" ( Pract. Fr. Gard. p. 314, 315.) 

2450. Other modifications of kitchen-garden walls. Hitt observes, " I have seen some 
walls stuck with tiles projecting, called" horizontal shelters, some built w\t\i large pillars, 
and others with curves ; all tliese are attended with evils of one kind or other ; for the 
liorizontal shelters are great receptacles of noxious insects, particularly of the small greeu 

H h 2 



•168 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



and variegated caterpillars. These insects devour the leaves and eat deeply into the 
fruit when grown to a good size ; so that it perishes and drops off the trees. The shelters 
are likewise very prejudicial to both fruit and branches, by depriving them of the descend- 
ing dews, from which they imbibe great nourishment. Large pillars or piers have almost 
the same ill effects ; besides, they shade the rays of the sun from the trees part of the day, 
more or less, in proportion to their size. Though walls built with curves have, in calm 
seasons, the benefit of more heat than others ; yet, in windy weather, the winds from 
some point or other rebounding from side to side, break and destroy the tender branches 
and blossoms of trees, whereby they are much more injured than the heat reflected from 
one wall to the other can be of advantage to them. I have found by experience, that 
walls built straight and upon arches, as mentioned before, are preferable to all others, 
having a coping which projects about two inches to shoot off the rain, in order to preserve 
the wall." (Tr. on Fruit Trees, p. 40.) 

2451. With respect to the con- 
struction of walls for kitchen-gardens, 
the common upright, straight wall 
is now generally preferred to the 
sloping, angular, or curved walls, 
tried in several places about a cen- 
tury ago, and criticised by Justice, 
Miller, Switzer, and other authors 
of that day. There may occur cases, 
however, in which these uncommon 
forms, and others which we have no- 
ticed (1556 to 1575.), may be adopted 
with propriety. A very good applica- 
tion of the angular wall, when formed 
of boards, may be made in the ease 
of a circular garden, {fig. 424. ) At 
each angle (a, b) a light cast-iron 
post with grooves is to be inserted 
in the ground ; and in these grooves, 
the ends of the boards, say in six or 
^ight feet lengths, are to be inserted, 
and left without any fastening. If 
they shrink during summer, being loose, they will only drop a little, but never show any 
crevice ; and, in order to let the trees be fully exposed to the weather in winter, or to 
paint, repair, or renew the boards, all or any part of the latter may easily be 
taken out, leaving the cast-iron props in the grounds, and the trees as entirely detached 
as if they were standards or border bushes (d). In this way, a large surface of cheap 
and neat walling might be obtained in very little space, and on the whole an agreeable 
effect produced. A walk, shrubbery and hedge (c) may surround the whole. 

2452. Fruit-walls, according to Hitt, should be founded on piers, " placing them at such 
distances as to admit one tree of the sort proper for the aspect between, and forming them 
of dimensions suitable to the size of the walls, and the nature of the foundations. The 
advantages he states to be a saving of material and intended pasturage for the root. If, 
however, the wall is to be planted with fruit-trees on both sides, the latter advantage is 
imaginary ; and, indeed, the construction might often prove injurious by admitting the 
hardy roots of trees, fit for a northern exposure, to intermix with the more delicate ones 
of such as are planted on a south aspect. Justice, having disapproved of curved and 
angular walls, says, " and as to the other methods of arching walls at their bottoms, that 
is still worse ; for when the roots go out at the back sides of the walls at their freedom, 
they draw all the rancid juices from the earths at the backs of the walls : in consequence 
of which, the fruit infallibly falls off, after it has acquired its magnitude, &c." (Brit. 
Gard. Direct, p. 5.) A late writer, J. Robertson {Hort. Trans, iv. p. 95.), recommends 
such walls for peach-trees, but obviously on the supposition that no use is made either of 
the north side of the wall, or north border, 

2453. Tlie foundation of a garden-wall, according to M'Phail, should be dug out no 
deeper than the thickness of good earth on the surface, in order that as little wall may be 
lost as possible. 

2454. Fruit- walls may be strengthened by piers, according to Forsyth, placed from forty 
to sixty feet apart, and projecting half a brick beyond the wall. Such piers are now 
made round, or rounded off, as the technical term is, which is more convenient for train- 
ing trees. 

2455. Projecting stone buttresses are, in some places, set at intervals in the walls, 
Neill informs us, in order to strengthen them, and break the force of the winds when 
sweeping along. From the external angles of the walls of Dalmeny Park gardens, 



424 




Book I 



WALLS. 



•169 



where they meet at right angles, a wall (Jig. 425. a), is extended 
diagonally about seventeen feet. This extension is found very 
useful in breaking the force of the wind when ranging along 
the walls. At the same time it does away, in a considerable 
degree, the formal box-shape of the garden when viewed from 
the higher grounds in the neighborhood. (Ed, Encyc. art. 
Hort.) 

2456. With respect to the cojnng of garden-walls, Nicol ob- 
serves, " much has been said, and opinions are at variance. 
Some insist that the coping should not project beyond the 
face of the wall ; and others, that it should project several 
inches, in order to throw the drip off the foliage. Others, 
again, give it a slope to the north, or to the west side, in 
order to throw all the water to the first aspect, or to that 
not covered with trees. It may be right to throw the whole 
of the water to the side not covered with fruit-trees ; but it is wrong to throw it all 
to the worst aspect, if that aspect be planted, by being disadvantageous to the trees trained 
on it, if there be any disadvantage in the rains falling upon them ; which, indeed, is ques- 
tionable, except, perhaps, just when the fruit is ripening off. Tlie quantity of rain that 
falls on an ordinary wall, is but trifling ; and if even a light breeze of wind prevail at the 
time, it is generally dashed against the foliage in dripping, or is scattered and dissipated. 
In short, it is quite as well for the trees that there be no projection at all, if the coping be 
fixed. A temporary coping of boards, projecting perhaps a foot or eighteen inches, may 
be of service to the trees in spring, while in bloom, in repelling the perpendicular frosts, 
that are often injurious to them at that time, and to the tender fruit. But such frosts are 
less hurtful than baneful frosty winds, which fall not perpendicularly, and which are better 
warded off by screens." [Kal. p. 146.) 

2457. Fixed copings are disapproved of by Forsyth, especially when they project so far 
as they are generally made to do. " I would rather advise to have a moveable wooden 
coping, fixed on with iron hooks, fastened to pieces of wood, built into the top of the wall ; 
these copings would also be found very convenient to fasten the nettings, &c. to in spring, 
for sheltering the fruit-trees. If, however, any should prefer fixed copings, they should 
not project above an inch on each side of the wall ; this small projection will be sufficient 
to preserve the wall, and will not prevent the dew and rain from falling on the upper part 
of the trees, which is of great service to them." 

2458. Cojnngs which jyroject nearly afoot are approved of by the Comte Lelieur, and the 
Rev. T. G. Cullum. In the best peach-gardens at Montreuil they project four or five 
inches ; and at Thomery, where the finest grapes are raised, the copings project ten or eleven 
inches over walls which do not exceed eight feet in height. (Pom. Eranfaise, p. 78.) T. G. 
Cullum has built, in Suffolk, a nine-inch wall with rounded piers, and copings of slate 
supported by oaken brackets, projecting a foot from the wall. The result answered his 
expectations. (Hort. Trans, iv. 269.) 

2459. Estimate of opinions as to copings. On the whole, it appears both from the ex- 
perience of a number of gardeners, and the most correct theories of dew ( Wells on Deiv, 
1819, see 1243.) and cold {Leslie, in Supp. Encyc. art. Cold), that projecting copings are 
of use in spring to protect the blossoms from descending cold and dews ; but as the 
copings must be injurious in summer by excluding light, rain, and air, and harboring ver- 
min, we should prefer the temporary coping of boards recommended by Miller, Forsyth, 
and Nicol. 

2460. irith respect to the materials for kitchen-garden walls, brick is almost universally 
preferred ; Forsyth says, " Where brick cannot be got, it is better to dispense with walls 
altogether, or to adopt wooden ones." " Brick," Nicol states, "is best for the superstruc- 
ture, and stone for the foundation and basement. Bricks give more warmth, and answer 
better for training trees to than stone. South, east, and west aspects should therefore be 
faced with brick, if the wall be not entirely built of it. If the wall be built entirely of 
stone, or be backed with stone, or be faced with bricks, and if trees are to be trained 
against such backing, the stones should be run in regular courses of from four to seven 
or eight inches thick, and each fifteen or twenty inches in length, by which there may be 
a frequency in joints, and that the trees may be properly trained against the wall." 

24fil. Dark-colored whinstonc (greenstone or basalt) is the next best material to brick, when properly 
squared and hammer-dressed, as it absorbs heat ; and next to that, a kind of bluish-grey stone (sandstone 
flag), or, in parts of the country consisting of primitive rocks, clay-slate that rises in natural flags, the thick- 
ness or nearly the thickness, of bricks, and which require but little dressing, or trouble in building. The 
nearer the stone approaches to black, the more valuable it is for the purjiose ; the prefcjcnce being given to 
the darkest whinstone, merely because it absorbs c.nd retains heat more than liglit- colored stones, and by 
reason of its close texture or grain, repels moisture better, or retains less of it than other stones. But good 
durable freestone (sand-stone), being properly squared, hammer-dressed, and run in courses as above, makes 
a very good wall for training the more common kind of fruits to ; such as apples, cherries, pears, and plums, 
and may answer verv well for east, west, and north aspects. But the better aspects, as south, south east, or 

H h 3 




f 



470 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



soutJi-west, on which are to be trained apricots, flgs, nectarines, peaches, and the finer sorts of pears and 
plums, should, if at all convenient, be faced with brick, or be built of dark whinstone. 

2-tG2. The basement of the wall should universally be built of durable stone, if it can be obtained, in pre- 
ference to brick ; whether tlie superstructure be of brick, or of stone in courses. In many cases it is cheaper 
than brick ; in any case more solid and durable. Supposing a ground-level line to be determined on, the 
foundation or basement should be sunk at least a yard below it. If for a stone superstructure, it should be 
thirty inches thick ; for a brick and a half brick thick wall, twenty inches ; and if for a wall faced with brick, 
and backed with free-stone, two feet, or twenty-six inches thick, according to the size of the stones ; that is 
to say, the basement should generally be six inches thicker than the superstructure, there being a shelf or 
scarcement of three inches thick on e'ither side of the wall. If the basement be built with bricks, in order to 
save materials, the scarcement need not be made more than two inches ; that is, the half breadth of a brick 
on either side ; so allowing four bricks to the basement, and three to the superstructure. {Kalend. p. 144.) 
The foundation and basement of walls, Neill obser\-es, are often made of common building sand-stone, 
while the superstructure is brick ; and sometimes the back part of the wall is of sand-stone, and the front 
only of brick. Sand-stone, which rises in flags, is the best substitute for bricks. Both kinds of materials 
admit of the branches of the trees being nailed in regularly, and without difficulty. Where brick is scarce 
and dear. Justice builds the foundation of stone, and lays one course of bricks on that side of the wall which 
has the best aspect, carrying up the other with stone. 

2463. Trellises against stone ivalls. " Where the walls are of common rubble building," 
Neill observes, " a trellis of spars is sometimes placed against them, and to this trellis the 
branches are tied with osier twigs or rope-yarn. This is regarded as a veiy good plan ; 
but the expense is considerable, as, to prevent the lodging of insects, the trellis must be 
smooth and painted. Tlie trees thus enjoy the shelter and regular heat of the wall, with- 
out being injured by its dampness in rainy weather ; and as the wall is not injured by the 
driving and., drawing of nails, thei-e are fewer lurking places for the wood-louse and the 
snail. The rails of the trellis are made closer or wider according to the nature of the tree 
to be trained against it. In a few instances in Scotland, walls have been built of diiferent 
kinds of whinstone, chiefly green-stone and basalt." (JSdin- Encyc. art. Hon.) 

2464. The courses of bricks in kitchen- garden icalls, some artists require to be laid hori- 
zontally, or on a level ; but Hitt, Nicol, and most modern designers, prefer them laid in 
lines parallel to the surface of the border, which, besides presenting a more agreeable effect 
to the eye, answers better for lateral or horizontal training, in which, when adopted on such 
walls, tJie shoots are laid in parallel to the courses of brick and tlie surface of the ground. 
Were they laid in horizontally, tliere would necessarily be an unsightly blank at the top 
and bottom of each tree. Tliis is a matter deserving attention, both on account of 
economy and the effect produced. 

2465. Different descriptions of wooden walls have been described (1565.), and one or other 
of them may be adopted in small gardens, or in particular situations. Nicol affirms 
(A'al. p. 148.) that fruits may be produced on wooden walls, in as high perfection as on 
those of brick. He acknowledges them, however, to be less durable. Switzer describes 
a wooden fruit-wall, made from the boards or sides of " old shipping, which may be had 
at sea-port towns, and is, indeed, some of the best for fruit of any, not excepting brick 
walls ; for, being pitched and tarred, on accoimt of its preservation before it goes to sea, 
time and the salt-water, and the different climates through which the vessel sails, so 
harden and incrustate the planks, that the heat of tlie sun strikes upon it to a degree not 
to be borne withal, as all that make voyages at sea can testify. These kind of wooden 
walls are generally made at half tlie expense of brick, and will last many years ; and you 
may nail tolerably \\ell into tliem. " 

2466. Mud u'alls. A sort of walls to save bricks are made of mud ; " but I do not," 
says Switzer, " thereby mean such as were in old times made of those coarse materials, 
though I have, I confess, often seen good fruit on them, but such as they make at this 
time in Dorset and Wiltshire [dry climates), chalk and 
mud mixed together, with a proportionable quantity of 
old hay or straw mixed with it; of which, when 
the foundations are laid of brick, or stone, or chalk, 
two or three feet high, which they often do, it is a very 
good wall for fr-uit, not disagreeable, nor of less use and 
concern for fruit-trees, than stone, brick, or wooden 
walls." {Pract. Fr. Gard. p. 300.) 

2467. Open railings, or lattice-ivork of timber or cast- 
iron, are sometimes used as substitutes for walls. The 
garden of the Duke of Chundos (Pope's Timon), at 
Edgeware, was surrounded by a wrought-iron rail 
twelve feet high. W^e liave, in the case of a garden 
of a north aspect, employed an open railing {Jig. 426. 
b) instead of the south wall, and a boarded wall {a) as 
the fence on the north side. The advantage of this 
plan is, that the south border (c) of the north wall is 
sheltered at all times, and the north border and walk of 
tlie south rail (c, i) is exposed to the sun during winter 
ajid spring, v/hen the trees trained against tlie rail are 



426 




Book I. 



WALLS. 



471 



defoliated ; wliile in summer, the same border is shaded by the foliation of tlie trees, and 
thereby as well adapted for salading and late crops, as the north border of any opaque 
wall. This garden had round ends ; the semicircular compartments [f, g) formed by 
wliich were devoted to fruit-shrubs ; and the other compartments being rectangular, 
to tlie culture of the ordinary annual crops : at one end was a building (A) serving 
as a tool-house and watching-lodge. 

2468. Hot or Jiued mills have been in use in kitchen-gardens for more than a century ; 
but till lately they were confined to walls with southern aspects. At present, however, 
it is not uncommon, where all the four walls of a quadrangular kitchen-garden are of 
brick, to flue the whole of tliem. The expense of a flued wall is exactly the same as that 
of a solid one, what is lost in labor being gained in materials ; and it is found of great 
advantage, in cold and late autumns, to apply iires for even two or three weeks, as well to 
ripen the wood, as the remaining fruit. In spring also, such walls, either with or 
without some of the different sorts of protecting covers (1492.) are found of great use 
in forwarding vegetation, especially in all tlie nortliern counties of England, and in 
Scotland. Flued walls are certainly not much recommended by Abercrombie, M'Phail, 
Marshall, or Forsyth, probably from the climate in wlaich these authors gained their ex-- 
perience not requiring such aids. It is acknowledged also, that " this species of forcing 
is practised by many in a very injudicious way, and much mischief done through error to 
thousands of fine trees." Xicol, however, the author of this remark, subjoins, that flued 
walls are certainly eminently useful, particularly in the northern parts of these kingdoms, 
and are often necessaiy to the production of peaches and nectarines in bad seasons." 
Switzer seems to have been the first to recommend them, giving various plans for hollow- 
arched and flued walls in his Practical Fruit Gardener, some of which had been executed 
and found to succeed in Lincolnshire, and at Buckingham House. Abercrombie says, " We 
mention the hot wall without glass work, as among the projects for forcing, an old tried 
one, but not to recommend it. The expense of glass \\ork is saved by a false economy: 
the plants are thus excited, on one side, by a strong artificial heat ; and exposed to frost 
and damp -s-iolent winds, and heavj' rains on the other. Many practical men have found 
this contrivance calculated to produce an untimely show of blossoms, while the counter- 
acting effect of their situation exposes both plant and blossom to perish. If not applied till 
the decline of summer, it may do some good in assisting fruit to ripen." {Fr. Gar. p. 59^.) 

2469. Flued walls for the climate of Scotia ?id are 
highly approved of by Justice ; and, as they cost 
no more in erection tlian solid walls, it may be ad- 
visable in many cases to build them, whether steam 
or smoke heat should be applied or not. The fa- 
cility with which the former is applied to walls 
through recent improvements (1561.j is certainly a 
great argument in their favor. Our opinion is, 
that in all complete gardens, the whole of the walls 
should be flued or cellular (fg. 238.), to admit of 
the application of artificial heat at pleasure. One 
boiler and furnace may easily be contrived to sup- 
ply heat to both the hot-houses and %Talls. 

2470. Cross ivalls {fg- 427. a, b) are introduced 
^^■here tlie boundary wall is not sufiiciently exten- 
sive to produce the desired quantity of fruit, and 
also to produce shelter to the garden. They are 
very generally flued walls in all modern gardens 
north of London, and are not unfrequently wholly 
or in part covered with glass. The direction of 
these walls is almost universally east and west, and 
their height is determined by the sun'ounding walls 
to which they are joined. These cross walls, Nicol 
observes, are not placed neai-er to each other than 
one hundred feet ; if they be two hundi-ed feet se- 
parate, it is perhaps better. 

2471. Hedges are sometimes introduced instead 
of cross u'alls ; but it is obvious they possess only- two 
of their advantages, that of affording shelter and 
shade. Where they are adopted for these purposes, 
evergreens, as the holly, box, laurel, spruce, 8cc. 
are to be preferred to deciduous trees ; as from tlieir 
surface being, at all seasons of the year, more com- 
pact than thaf of deciduous hedges, they are less 
liable to harbor bird* and venniu. No hedge has 

H h 4 




472 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



a finer effect than one of shining gneen holly, decorated with its coral berries. (See 
Hort. Trans, ii. 354.) 

2472. Color of walls. Garden- walls are generally left of the native color of the mate- 
rial of which they are constructed ; but they have been also colored white or black, and 
the latter color is justly preferred as absorbing and refracting more heat than any other, 
and thereby accelerating the maturity, and improving the quality of fruits. {H. Dawes, in 
Hort. Trans, iii. 330.) From various trials, it appears that fruit- walls of every descrip- 
tion, in the open air, may be blackened with advantage ; but under glass, white is pre- 
ferable, as reflecting light, which is there obtained with more difficulty than heat. 

Sect. IX. Ring-fence and Slip. 

2473. The ring or outer fence of a garden is generally placed at some distance from the 
fruit or main walls. The object is to admit the use of these on both sides as well as to 
obtain a portion of ground in addition to what is enclosed. This fence may either be an 
evergreen hedge, paling, low wall, or sunk fence, and with or without a wire fence to 
exclude hares and rabbits. It may be placed at any distance from the walls, according as 
accidental circumstances, or the purposes to which it is intended to devote the intervening 
space, may determine. This space is technically called the slip, and, according to M'Phail 
and most authors, should not be narrower tlian thirty feet, nor so wide as to throw the 
plantation for shelter too far off to produce its effect. 

2474. The breadth of the slip, according to Nicol, should be at least twenty feet, in 
order to afford a sufficient border for the trees, and a walk ; but it may be as much more 
in breadth as may be necessary to give ground without the space enclosed by walls for the 
supply of the family, and it may be enlarged on all sides, or on any particular side, for 
that purpose. (Kal. p. 6.) Tlie garden, Forsyth states, should be surrounded with a bor- 
der, or slip, from forty to sixty feet wide or more, if the ground can be spared ; and this 
again enclosed with an oak paling, from six to eight feet high, with a cheval-defrize at top 
to prevent the people's getting over : it will also strengthen the paling. By making slips 
on the outside of the garden-wall, you will have plenty of ground for gooseberries, cur- 
rants, strawberries, &c. You may allot that part of the slips which lies nearest to the 
stables (if well sheltered and exposed to the sun) for melon and cucumber beds ; and you 
can plant both sides of the garden-wall, which will give a great addition to the quantity 
of wall-fruit. (Tr. on Fr. Trees, p. 294.) 

Sect. X. Placing the Culinary Hot-houses and Melonry. 

2475. Tfie situation of the hot-houses of a kitchen-garden is as various as the size and 
form of gardens. In very extensive establishments, as at Kew, and the Royal Gardens, 
Kensington, a garden or walled enclosure is entirely devoted for this department, in- 
cluding also the framing or melonry. In ordinary cases, however, the culinary hot- 
houses are either placed against the north wall of the garden, or against one or more of 
the cross walls. Sometimes they are placed in the slip, which is made wider on purpose, 
either on the east and west sides of the garden, or to the north, when it is situated on a 
considerable declivity. Their effect, however, is almost always best when situated 
within the walls of the garden, either attached or on the north or cross walls. In this 
way they are sources of greater interest to the proprietor, and come more naturally into 
the general course of promenade : for it must not be forgotten, that the pleasure or satis- 
faction derived from even culinar)-^ hot-houses, does not wholly consist in being put in 
possession of certain fruits of excellent quality, (for if so, recourse need only be had to 
public markets,) but in marking the progress of the trees or plants on which these fruits 
are grown, in all their different stages ; and, as Nicol observes, in being able to say 
" these are the products of my own garden.'* 

2476. Placing the hot-houses in a range with a directly south aspect, or one inclining to 
the east, is recommended by Nicol ; and it may be here observed, that what is a desir- 
able aspect for the north and best walls of a garden, vrill also be the best for the hot- 
houses. By placing them in a range, " there will be an evident saving in the division 
or end lights, besides the saving of trouble and work to those who attend to them. 
Being properly arranged according to their different lengths, breadths, and heights, very 
much beauty and variety may be given to the whole appearance." (AaZ. p. 272.) 

2477. The hot-houses occujn/ a considerable j)art of the south wall, Niel observes, "in 
many gardens. In the area behind them are sheds for tanners' bark, rich mould, and 
other requisites ; while there is a cart-access to the doors of the furnaces, and these with 
the rubbish necessarily attending the operations of forcing, are completely hid from view. 
In some places all the forcing-houses form a continuous range ; but generally the pine- 
stove and succession pit, being of different dimensions, are placed separately." (Edin. 
Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2478. Culinary hot-houses should not be mixed with houses for plants of ornament. In some 
old ill-arranged places, the greenhouse and plant-stove, or botanic hot-houses, are united 



Book I. 



LAYING OUT THE AREA. 



473 



with those destined for culinary products, and this is very suitable, or is rather a matter 
of necessity in places on a moderate scale ; but where variety and effect are taken pro- 
perly into consideration, the ornamental or curious productions of gardening will be 
kept separate from those whose beauty consists chiefly or entirely in their utility. In 
this way two distinct and strongly marked characters are produced, instead of scenery of 
a mixed, and as it were neutralised character. 

2479. Tlie situation of the melonry is generally in the slip, and where the range of 
hot-houses are placed on the north wall, and the ground sloping so as to shorten the 
shadow tlirown by this wall in winter when the sun is low, the melonry is with great 
propriety placed in what may be called a bay of the slip behind the north wall {Jig^ 
427. c). This may almost always be the case when the compost-ground and melonry 
are placed adjoining each other, as the part most liable to be shaded may be devoted to 
the former. " The reasons," Forsyth observes, " for allotting part of the outside slip 
next the stable for hot-beds for raising melons and cucumbers, are, first, because there 
will be no litter to carry in within the walls to dirty the walks ; secondly, the beds will 
not be seen from the garden, and lastly, the convenience of carrying the dung, by wliich 
a great deal of time will be saved in carting and wheeling. It will be necessary, 
especially in exposed situations, to enclose the melon-ground with either a wall or 
paling from six to eight feet high. It was formerly a practice to enclose melon-grounds, 
with reed-fences ; but, although they are tolerably wann, and easily removed from one 
ilace to another (being made in separate panels), they are very apt to harbor vermin." 
( Tr. on Fr. Tr. p. 295. ) In Dalmeny garden, Neill informs us, the melon-ground is 
situated on the east side of the garden, the garden- wall being extended on the north of 
it to the same height as tlie other walls, and flued like the rest of the walls which have a 
south aspect. The pine-stoves and pits are placed in this melon-ground. 

2480. The mould and compost ground, as above suggested, should generally be com- 
bined with the melonry, and will be most convenient, if placed between the pits and hot- 
beds, and the garden-wall on which the range of hot-houses is placed ; and thus, when 
the melonry is placed in the bay behind the north Avail, the compost-ground occupies a 
space that would otherwise be too much shaded for hot-beds or pits. 

Sect. XI. Lar/ing out tlie Area. 

2 The area, or space 
enclosed by the garden- 
walls {fig. 428. a, b), is 
usually formed into com- 
partments, very common- 
ly called quarters (d, d), 
and borders, or narrow 
slips (a), running pa- 
rallel to the walls (6) and 
walks (c). The mag- 
nitude and number, 
both of compartments 
and borders, as well as 
of the walks, depend 
on the size of the gar- 
den, and partly also on 
the taste of the de- 
signer. Rectangular 
figures are almost uni- 
versally preferred for both. Wall-borders are generally formed of the breadth of the 
height of the accompanying wall ; they may be broader, but do not produce a good effect 
when narrower. In a garden of an acre within the walls, the walks are never less tlian 
six feet broad, the surrounding or wail border from ten to thirteen feet, and the marginal 
borders from seven to eight feet wide. In the latter, an espalier rail is frequently 
fixed about five feet from the edging of the wall ; in other cases, the trees are planted 
along the middle of the border, and trained as dwarfs ; an -alley or path, commonly 
two feet wide (o), separates the borders from the compartments. In the slip may be 
formed irregular compartments or borders {q), the gardener's house {g), and the compost 
and melon ground {f). The fence on the south side may be an open railing 
and on the north a wall or close holly-hedge, the whole surrounded by a plantation 
nearer or more distant, according to circumstances. The hot-houses being placed 
against the north wall (6), behind them are placed the sheds, and on a moderate 
scale these may contain a working-room (/i), fruit and seed-room (e), tool-houses (k), 
and the furnaces (i). To the open space behind (/), for composts and hot-beds, 
there should always be a carriage entrance (A), for'bringing in earth, fuel, dung, &c. 




474 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

In tlie centre of the garden may be a fountain or 
basin of water and in the gardener's house an 429 

upper bedroom to overlook the whole. In smaller 
gardens {Jig' 429.) the same general plan is adopted 
as far as their extent admits. Where ornament is to 
be combined with use, the standard fruit-trees and 
shrubs may be planted in borders accompanying the walks 
(c, c) J but where economy of ground is the object, the 
trees and shrubs may be collected together in compart- 
ments [a, b), and borders altogether omitted. 

2482. In laying out the compartments of a garden, 
Forsyth observes, " you must be guided, in a great 
measure, by the form and size of the garden ; but do 
not lay them out too small, as in that case a great part 
of the ground will be taken up with walks and bor- 
ders. The best figure is a square, or oblong, when 
the garden is of that fonn ; but if not, they may be 
laid out in any other figure that is thought to be most 
convenient." Some of the compartments, in some 
of our best gardens, Neill observes, are laid out in 
beds four feet wide, with narrow alleys. So many 
alleys, no doubt, occupy a deal of room ; but advan- 
tages of conveniency and neatness, in enabling the 
workmen to clean and gather the crop, without trampling the ground, seem to compen- 
sate the sacrifice of space. For currant, gooseberry, and raspberry bushes, the compart- 
ments are, of course, reserved undivided ; and narrow beds are unnecessary in the case of 
large perennial plants, such as artichokes or rhubarb. 

2483. Laying out the borders. Abercrombie recommends the borders next the walls to 
be made of prepared soil, " from eight to twelve feet wide, and the same description of 
soil extended under the walks, in order to allow a liberal width for the roots to spread 
without impediment. Next to the borders, leave a space for a walk entirely round tlie 
garden, from four to six feet wide. Some persons also choose to have a border on the 
inward side of the walk, for the cultivation of espaliers, and esculents of dwarf growtli ; 
others divide the central parts at once into main compartments or divisions. The walks or 
alleys must be regulated by convenience of access. Where the ground is extensive, the 
centre should be traversed by a walk, with parallel borders, from which cross walks may 
branch, if necessary." (Pr. Gard. p. 4.) The borders imder tlie walls, Forsyth 
observes, should, in the inside, be from ten to twenty feet wide, according to the size of 
the garden, to give full liberty to the roots of the trees to spread. There should be a 
foot-path, about two feet and a half from the wall, for the greater convenience of nailing 
the trees, gathering the fruit, &c. This walk should be from two, to two feet and a half 
wide, (to admit a barrow or barrow-engine for watering the trees,) and covered with 
sand ; or, which is better, coal-ashes, about two or three inches thick, but without any 
gravel or rubbish below. ( Tr. on Fruit Trees, p. 294. ) The borders for wall-trees, 
according to Nicol, should not be less than twelve feet in breadth ; but fifteen 
or eighteen feet is not too much. That is to say, the soil should be prepared for these 
breadths, if it be not naturally good, and perfectly answerable for the different kinds of 
trees to be planted. 

2484. Preparation of fruit-tree, borders. It is not enough, Nicol observes, that the 
upper soil of a border only be improved. The sub-soil must also be attended to, and be 
laid comfortably dry ; otherwise success in the rearing of fruits will be precarious and 
doubtful. Draining is the basis of every improvement in horticulture, being the basis 
of improvement in the soil. In this particular case, of preparing fruit-tree borders, it 
is indispensable. It is also necessary that the roots of the trees be kept out of the sub- 
soil, if it be of a cankering quality, as till, or corroding sand. This matter has appeared 
evident to many, and various means have been taken to prevent them from getting down 
to a bad substratum, at much trouble and expense. I shall here submit a method, the 
least expensive and most effectual of any, which has been successfully practised for 
several years. 

2485. Forming an imjiervious bottom to borders. If the sub-soil be wet and cankering, 
let the border be cleared out its whole length, to the depth and breadth before- 
mentioned. Lay the bottom in a sloping manner from the wall to the walk, giving it a 
fall of six or eight inches. Run a drain along by the conjunction of the border and 
walk, a few inches lower than the bottom thus formed, which shall be capable of com- 
pletely draining off both under and surface water. It may be a rubble-drain, or a box- 
drain, according to necessity. Now, lay over the bottom, thus formed and smooth, two 
inches of good earth, if clayey so much the better, which pulverise and pass the roller 





Book I.- 



LAYING OUT THE AREA. 



475 



over; then an inch of clean pit or river gravel, which also pass the roller over ; another 
inch of earth, as above, which also roll ; and, lastly, an inch of gravel, also, as above. 
Tliis should be done with the materials rather in a dry state ; but now moisten tlie whole 
moderately with a watering-pot, and roll until the surface acquires a hard shining con- 
sistency. Keep rolling and watering alternately, till the whole becomes firm and 
glazed, and till the earth and gravel be intimately mixed and incorporated. Tims may 
a bed be formed for the roots of fruit-trees, much superior to one of stone or brick, and 
at an expense greatly less; of a nature more kindly, and which no root will perictrate. 

2486. Prepared soil for borders should be thrown in, having been previously laid up in 
a ridge, along the outer edge of the border, before the floor thus made get damaged by 
wet, or other accidents ; and care must be taken that at no future period it be disturbed 
in digging or trenching the border. 

2487. A fit composition for apples, apricots, cherries, and figs is, three fourths hale 
lightish earth, and one fourth strong loam ; being properly composed, and moderately 
enriched with cow-dung, or a mixture of cow and hog dung, or of cow and stable dung ; 
avoiding the latter, however, if the two former can be obtained, for the cooler dungs 
answer best for fruit-trees. The average depth of the borders for these kinds should be 
thirty inches. 

2488. A very fit soil for peaclies, pears, and plums is, three fourths loam, and one 
fourth sandy earth, being well mixed, and moderately enriched, as above. The depth 
for peaches and nectarines may be thirty inches, as above ; but for pears and plums, it 
should not be less than three feet on the average, that is, two feet nine inches at the walk, 
and three feet three inches at the wall, or thereby. {Xal. p. 153.) 

2489. Where the expense of forming proper soils for fruit-tree borders is not incurred, it is 
necessary to adapt the kind of trees to the soil. On soils. Neill observes, "naturally very 
light, gravelly, and sandy, peach and nectarine trees do little good ; it is better to plant 
apricots, figs, or vines, which agree with such soils, and, when trained against a 
wall having a good aspect, will, in the southern parts of the island, afford excellent crops 
of fruit. On such soils, even espalier and dwarf standard apple-trees are short-lived, 
subject to blight, and produce only stunted fruit. Next to renewing the soil, the best 
remedy is to engraft and re-engraft frequently, on the best wood of the trees, giving the 
preference to grafts of those kinds which experience has shown to be the most productive 
and healthy in that particular place. In shallow soils, some have been in the practice of 
making troughs or hollows, and filling them with rich earth, for the reception of the trees ; 
but this is not to be approved of ; the roots of the trees will probably be confined to the 
trough, and it is possible that water may be retained in it." (Edin. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

2490. The number ofid breadth of ivalks, Marshall observes, " must, in a great measure, 
be detei-mined by the quantity of allotted ground, exceeding in these particulars where 
there is room. But few and wide walks are preferable to many contracted ones. If the 
garden is small, one good walk all round is sufficient ; and if long and narrow, the cross 
walks should not be many : six or eight-feet walks are not too wide for a moderate-sized 
garden." The middle walk, according to Forsyth, "should be about seven feet, which 
is wide enough to admit a cart ; and the otiiers about three or four feet broad, w^ith a 
border on each side, five or six feet wide, at least, between the walk and the fruit-trees." 
"If the garden be very extensive," Neill observes, "the centre is traversed by a 
broad walk. If it be of the largest dimensions, and possess a cross wall or cross walls, 
the arrangement of the walks falls to be altered accordingly; a main walk proceeding 
directly to the door, in the centre of the cross walls." 

2491. A ivalk should always proceed from the main entrance to the main object (f the 
garden. The entrance, as already observed (2388.), should either be in the centre 
of the south-east or west walls. Where there are hot-houses, it should, if possible, be in 
the south wall, and from thence a broad walk with suitable borders should proceed direct 
to the centre of the garden, and across it to the centre of the range of hot-houses. IVIain 
walks in square or parallelogram gardens, entering from whatever point, should, in 
general, proceed to the centre ; but in long octagons or irregular gardens, diagonal walks, 
though they occasion a little more trouble in cidture, have a noble effect. It is almost 
needless to observe, that no main walk ought ever to terminate abruptly, or look to a 
mere blank, a defect, or an unsightly object. These and various other points of the 
greatest consequence as to future effect, must be left to the taste of the designer. 

2492. Gravel is almost universally considered the best material for imlks ; but there are 
various substitutes. " Sand," Marshall observes, " may be adopted for walks, and there is a 
binding sort of it that does very well ; but lay not any of it too thick, as it is the less 
firm for it. Drift-sand is a good substitute for gravel. Coal-ashes, strewed thinly in 
the alleys, are better than nothing, as tliey at least serve to keep the feet dry and clean. 
If the garden be a strong soil, these ashes (when worn down) should be thrown out of 
the walks, with a little of the earth, and will prove a good manure for the compartments." 
(Introd. to Gard. p. 35.) A binding sand, Fortyth says, " makes good walks, and they 



476 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

are easily kept; for when moss or weeds begin to grow, they may b-> cleaned with a 
horse-shoe, or scuffled over with a Dutch hoe, in dry weather, and raked a day or two 
after, by which they will be made always to look neat and clean. I, however, give the 
preference to sea-coal ashes, which, in my opinion, make the best walks for a kitchen- 
garden, and they are easier kept than any others, being firm and dry, and cleaner to walk 
on than sand, especially after frost." 

2493. Grass walks may do lohere gravel is scarce ; but the latter is so clearly preferable, 
that, except for a little variety in laj-ge gardens, where there are many walks, grass walks 
will hardly be made choice of, as they are troublesome to keep in order ; and if much 
used are apt to get bare, and out of level, especially when narrow : they are also fre- 
quently damp to the feet. Chamomile has been used also to form green or carpet 
walks, planting it in sets about nine or ten inches asunder ; which, naturally spreading, 
the runners are fixed by walking on them, or rolling. 

2494. Edgings to walks are essential to the beautt/ and completeness of a kitchen-garden, 
though, in some cases, verdant edgings are dispensed with. According to Marshall, the 
borders should have their outer edges, in contact with the walks, made up firm and even. 
Where the design or intimate communication with the house requires edgings, box is 
superior to every thing else. In extensive kitchen-gardens, edgings of vegetables, 
particularly of box, are dispensed with as inconvenient, and apt to harbor slugs. At 
the same time the margins of the beds and main walks should be kept even and 
well defined ; for this purpose, nothing is more neat and lasting, or better fitted to save 
trouble, than narrow edgings of brick a single course wide. In the interior compartments, 
parsley may be sown for an edging ; so slips of thyme, winter savory, hyssop, and other 
aromatic herbs, may be planted ; as long as such herbs flourish, or remain ungathered, 
they form a verdant edging, in character with the kitchen-garden. (^Introd. to Gard. 
p. 5.) Border-edgings, Neill observes, are not in use, excepting for the walks next 
the walls, and the cross w^alks in very large gardens j for these, dwarf-box is almost 
universally employed. 

2495. In laying out the slip or exterior area of the kitchen-garden, those parts not occu- 
pied as the melonry or compost-ground are disposed of in two borders : the one for fruit, 
surrounding the wall, and of suitable breadth and composition as to soil ; the other next 
the boundary, of such breadth as the width of the slip allows. The walk between these 
borders should, in gardens of one or more acres, be made of suflScient width to admit a 
one-horse cart, to make the circuit of the garden so as to bring in manures, soils, fuel, 
&c. to any of the wall-doors, for the purpose of being wheeled into the inner garden. 
The outer border is commonly occupied by low fruit-shrubs, or common kitchen-crops ; 
but in small places, and where the garden is of a mixed character, it is arranged as a 
shrubbery, and, where Forsyth's advice is taken, the shrubs are mixed with the more 
hardy fruit-trees. 

2496. A reserve and nursery department should always be formed in the slip, at 
least in gardens where any thing like beauty or perfection is aimed at. The use of this 
compartment is to preserve or raise plants, some in pots, others in the open ground, to 
supply vacancies within the w^ills. Whatever crop is sown or planted in the garden, a 
small portion of it should, at the same time, be sown or planted in the nursing depart- 
ment, some in pots, and others in the open ground, by which means, when any blanks 
occur in the former, they can be filled up from the latter. One part of this department 
should be^devoted to propagating fruit-trees and fruit-shrubs for the same purpose, and 
also for giving aw^ay to poorer neighbors, and for stocking and encouraging cottage and 
farm gardens. 

2497. The best seasons for forming a garden are the spring and summer; but, at 
all events, at whatever time the operations are begun, they should be arranged so as to 
be finished early in autumn to admit of planting the fruit-trees and laying the edges of 
the walks at that season, or very early in the spring. 



Chap. II. 

Of the Distribution of Fndt-trees in a Kitchen-garden, 

2498. To select and arrange a proper collection of fruit-trees, and plant them in their 
appropriate situations, is the next step in forming a kitchen-garden. This subject 
naturally comprehends, 1. Wall-trees; 2. Espaliers audi divaTf-standards for the borders ; 
3. Standards for the compartments ; 4. Fruit-shrubs. As a point of practice common to 
each of these divisions of fruit-trees, we may mention that of registering their names either 
in series (1388.) on a plan of the garden, or by reference to numbers attached to the 
trees, cut in tallies placed by them, stamped in lead and hung on them, or nailed to the 



Book I. 



ARRANGEMENT OF WALL FRUIT-TREES. 



-5 77 



wall or espalier-rail, &c. Forsyth, Abercrombie, and others, agree in recommending 
the placing the names of the sorts on tablets, with the time of ripening, and fixing them 
by, or what is better, hanging them on, the lower part of the stem of each tree. With 
respect to the varieties of fruits recommended in the sections of this chapter, those who 
consider them as too limited, will find ample choice in the horticultural catalogue, 
Chap. II. 

Sect. I. Of the Selection and Arrangement of Wall Fruit-trees. 

2499. Fruit-trees adapted for walls may be considered in regard to the sort of fruit, 
sort of plant, distance, and planting. 

2500. With respect to the sorts of fruit and their distribution on the different aspects of the 
walls, the first general principle is, that the more delicate species of trees, as the grape, fig, 
and peach, are planted against the warmest walls ; the next is, that the more delicate va- 
rieties of the more hardy fruits, as the cherry and pear, are placed against warm walls ; 
and the last, that such varieties of the hardy fruits as it is desired to ripen very early, find 
a place there. *' The best border and wall," says Abercrombie, " should be allotted to the 
vine, the peach, nectarine, fig, and apricot ; let the vine take the first place for aspect, as 
it is diflScult to bring it to ripen out of doors north of London. Where the peach, nec- 
tarine, fig, and apricot cannot have a south aspect, the south-east and south-west are the 
proper alternatives. Some early sorts of the apricot will ripen on an east or west wall. 
The west is the middling exposure, and by no means on a par with the east. The 
cherry in general may have an exposure looking to any point of the compass, except full 
north, yet choice early kinds deserve a south border, nor do they attain the climax of 
perfection without. The morella cherry, the pear in general, the plum in general, the 
apple in general, and the mulberry will do on any wall ; but all late fruit is universally 
improved in proportion to the goodness of the aspect from the west and east through all 
the intermediate points to the south, and some of the high-flavored French pears require 
a fine wall to grow here in perfection. The end of a building is a good site for a free- 
growing pear-tree ; which, if a garden-wall is not uncommonly high, will require a deal 
of lateral room. A long and high wall is also fittest for a fig-tree. The mulberry, 
medlar, quince, filbert, currant, gooseberry, and raspberry answer well on espaliers." 

2501. The sorts or varieties of fruit that may be procured at the nurseries are so nume- 
rous, as to puzzle an inexperienced person in making the selection. After all, much is 
generally, and with propriety, left to the nurserymen, who recommends the sorts most in 
repute at the time. " I have long made it my business," says Nicol, " to persuade my 
employers, in the planting of new gardens and orchards, to limit the varieties of fruit, in 
the firm conviction that I was acting for their interest ; for certainly the rage for mul- 
tiplying them, and of having a numerous collection, has too much prevailed of late. It 
V, ere better to be contented with a few good kinds that produce well in most seasons, 
than to plant maay sorts (even of those reckoned the finer) for the sake of variety, of 
which a crop is obtained, perhaps once iu three, or in seven years. It is no doubt of very 
much importance to select and adapt the kinds to the climate, soil, and aspect, and in 
some cases, a greater variety may be planted with propriety than in others. This 
matter must be determined by existing circumstances, by the fancy of the proprietor, and 
by the discretion of the gardener. The following list exhibits a collection, in my opinion, 
ample enough in any case, though, perhaps, according to better judgment, certain kinds 
may be substituted for some here named, that may be equally valuable. Certain kinds 
may also be placed differently with respect to aspect, as may be thought proper, according 
to the climate and local situation." Those marked with an asterisk (*) Nicol considers 
the most valuable kinds, and such as should be preferred in the planting of small gar- 
dens, where the walls are of little extent. 



Apples. 

*Golden Pippin, S., S.E., or S.W. 
Oslin Pippin, E.orW. 
*Ribston Pippin, Ditto. 
*Golden Russet, Ditto. 
Pu)yal Russet, E., W., N. E., or N. W. 
*Nonpareil, S., S. E., or S.W. 
Hawthomdean, E,, W., or N. 
Yorkshire Greening, Ditto. 

Pears. 

*.Targonelle, S., E., W. 
Cressane, S.E., S., or S.W. 
Colmar, Ditto. 
*Iieurre du Roi, . S.,E.,W. 
Gansell's Bergamot, E.orW. 
*Autumn Bergamot, Ditto.. 
Swiss Bergamot, - Ditto. 
* A Chan, ... Ditto. 
Yair, : . . Ditto. 
St. Germain's, - Ditto. 
Summer Boncretieii, Ditto. 
*ChaumontelIe, S. 



S., E., W. 



Arch-duke, S., E.,W. 
*BIack Heart, - Ditto. 
White Heart, - Ditto. 
^Harrison's Heart, Ditto. 
*Morella, E., \V., N. 

Phnns. 

*Green Gage, S. E., S.,or S.W. 

Yellow Gage, Ditto. 

Blue Gage, E.orW. 

*Fotheringham, Ditto. 

La Royale, S. E. orW. 

*White Magnum Bonum, E. or W 

Apricots. 
*Moore Park. E., W., or N. 
Orange, - Ditto. 
*Breda, - Ditto. 
^Brussels, . Ditto. 
Roman, - Ditto. 
Masculine, S., E., W. 

Pencil es. 

*Rcd Magdalen, S. E.,S.,or S.W. 
White Magdalen, Ditto. 
*Noblesse, - - Ditto. 



*RoyaI George, 
Montauban, - 
Admirable, - 
* Teton de Venus 
Late Purple - 



S. E., S., or S.W. 

Ditto. 
Ditto. 
Ditto. 
Ditto. 



Nectarines. 
*Elruge, S.E.,S.,orS.W. 
Due de Tello, - Ditto. 
*Fairchild's early. Ditto. 
*. Murray, - - Ditto. 
Scarlet, - - Ditto. 
Temple, - - Ditto. 

Figs. 

*Blue, or Black Iscbia, S.E., S., or S.W. 
*White, or Brown Ischia, Ditto. 
Black Genoa, - - Ditto.' 
White Genoa, - - Ditto. 

Other Sorts. 
The Mulberry is sometimes introduced as 
a wall-tree, and planted on a western 
exijosure. 

(Kaknd. p.lfiS. 



478 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part II L 



25(y2. The sorts of plants made nse of for planting agauisl walls are dwarfs and riders, 
and tliese may be of the age of one year froin the graft, or tlicy may be several years 
trained. Dwarfs are understood to be the penTKinent trees, and riders merely temporary 
plants introduced to fill up the upper part of the wall. With both sorts it is tlie practice 
to make choice of trees that have been two or more years trained ; or if they have been 
moved in the nursery every second year, they may be of five or six years' training, in 
which case they come into immediate bearing. Some gardeners, however, prefer young 
plants. IMarsliall says, trees to be planted against walls, should not be older than two 
years from the graft or bud. " Much disappointment has been the consequence of 
planting old trained trees, through their being accustomed, perhaps, to a contrary soil, 
or by damage done the roots in taking the trees up, and thus, instead of saving time, it 
has frequently been lost, being obliged, after some years, to be replaced widi young 
ones. But if trained trees are to be made use of, let them be planted as early, and with 
as full roots as possil)le, and in a right good soil." 

2503. JFilli resfiect to the age of the plants, Nicol observes, maiden, or one year » 
trained trees, are to be preferred, especially of apples and pears. Even of the stone- 
fruits, such will succeed best ; though two or three years' trained are often planted. I 
here allude to the dwarfs. Riders of greater age than dwarfs may be planted, in any 
case, with propriety ; they being considered temporary, and it being desirable to obtain 
fruit of them as soon as possible." A safe mode is, to plant partly maiden, and partly 
trained plants, by ■which means, those which come early into fruit, should they prove 
bad sorts, may be replaced by others ; meanwhile, those sorts which are approved of, will 
afford an early return for the labor and expense incurred. 

2.504. The distance at which xvall-trees should be planted from each othei', depends jointly 
on the sort of tree, and the height of the wall. For a wall nine or ten feet high, 
Marshall plants apricots, peaches, and nectarines, twenty feet apart. Nicol, for a 
wall of twelve feet in height, indicates the following distances : — Apples, eighteen or 
twenty feet ; apricots, twenty to twenty-four ; figs, fifteen or eighteen ; cherries, twelve 
or fifteen ; nectarines and peaches, twelve or fifteen ; pears, twenty-four to thirty ; and 
plums, eighteen or twenty feet. For low walls, of five or six feet: — apples, thirty; cherries, 
pears, thirty to thirty-five ; and plums, twenty to twenty-four feet. Tlie distances at 
which wall-trees ought to be planted, according to Abercrombie, depend on the general 
growth of the species, connected with these other things : — whether the individual plant 
has been dwarfed by the mode of propagation, or is a free grower ; whether the species 
will bear to be kept in bounds by the knife ; and, lastly, on the height of the wall : thus, 
a higher wall is a compensation for a reduced distance, and a lower will make it necessary 
to increase the intervals. Supposing the wall to be twelve feet high, the following are 
good average distances for planting the kinds named : — Vines, from ten to fifteen feet 
asunder, or in vacant spaces between other walls where the distance is less, because the 
vine bears pruning well, and can always be reduced to the prescribed limits. Peach- 
trees and nectarines, from fifteen to twenty feet. Fig-trees, eighteen to twenty 
feet, or more, as the bearers are not to be shortened. Apricot-trees, fifteen feet for the 
dwarf early sorts, eighteen to twenty-four for the free-growers,- as the plant does not 
bear the knife well. Cherry-trees, from fifteen to twenty feet. Pear-trees, twenty 
feet, if on dwarf stocks ; thirty feet, if on free stocks. Plum-trees, from fifteen to 
twenty-four feet. Apple-trees, if on dwarf stocks, fifteen feet ; if on free stocks, twenty- 
five or thirty. Mulberry-trees, fifteen or twentj- feet. Along the line of tlie walls only 
nine feet high, increase the intervals to one fourth as much again ; and of walls six feet 
high, to one half. 

2505. The distance of the steyn of the tree f-om the wall at the ground's surface, should, 
according to most authors, be nine inches ; cherries, apples, and pears may be somewhat 
more ; and peaches, nectarines, and vines somewhat less. 

2506. The intermediate species between dwarf loall-trees are commonly filled up with 
ridei-s, or some other temporary fruit-bearing plant. According to Marshall, "the 
intermediate spaces between peaches, nectarines, and apricots may have a vine, a dwarf- 
cherry, or currant, or gooseberry tree, of the early sorts, as the smooth green and small 
red gooseberiy, to come in early, and improved in the beauty, size, and flavor of their 
fruit, by the advantage of situation. But wheresoever grapes can be expected to ripen, 
there let a young plant or cutting be set, though the space be confined ; for the vine, 
freely as it shoots, bears the knife well to keep it within bounds. If the wall be high, 
the cherry or plum may be half-standards or riders, which being after a while kept above, 
will be more out of tlie way of the principal trees, though dwarfs may be tiained so as 
not to interfere. Some have planted half-standards of the same kind of fruit as the 
dwarfs, but whichever way is used, let the intermediate trees be pruned away below in 
good time, in order to accommodate the principals freely as they mount and extend. 
The better way however is, when the wall is tolerably covered, to extirpate tlie inter- 
mediate trees, as, when large, they impoverish the border, and too much rob the principals 



Book L ESPALIERS AND DWARF-STAl^DARDS. 



479 



of nutriment : if taken up well, in season, and pruned properly, they may be planted 
elsewhere." While the principal wall-trees are making progress, Abercrombie observes, 
"riders may be introduced between them ; these, should be confined to sorts which are 
the quickest in coming into bearing, for else, as soon as the trees become productive, it 
will be time to remove them. Against low walls, currants, gooseberries, and raspberries 
may be placed instead of riders. Plant a wall-tree nine inches from the wall, to give the 
root some room behind ; detach or shorten the roots pointing towards the wall, so that the 
parts left on that side may not be cramped." [Pr. Gard. p. 189.) " On walls ten feet 
in height or upwards, Nicol plants riders between the dwarf or principal trees, in order 
the sooner to furnish the wall ; but for low Myalls it is not worth the while, as goose- 
berries, currants, or raspberries, answer better, and produce fruit more immediately. 
Riders of all or most of the kinds in the foregoing lists can be had in the nurseries ; but 
they should consisfe chiefly of apricots, cherries, nectarines, peaches and plums ; as few 
kinds of apples or pears would begin to produce crops before it would be necessary to 
root them out in order to give place to the dwarfs." 

2507. IFit/i respect to the mode of planting, the roots of each plant should be trimmed, 
previous to being planted, by pruning off the points of those bruised in the taking up, 
and moderately thinning them out, if thought too thick, or too much crowded. This is 
seldom necessary for maiden trees, but it is often so with respect to plants that have 
stood several years in the nursery, or that have been trained against walls or pales, and have 
made strong roots. The roots should be, in some measure, rendered proportionate to 
the tops ; and as the shoots and branches are to be headed down, or to be well shortened 
and thinned out, it follows that the roots should also be moderately thinned and pruned. 
In doing this, however, be careful to retain those most promising and best furnished 
with fibres. The surface level being determined on, prepare the pit so as that the plant 
may be placed just as deep in the ground as it was before, and not deeper ; spreading 
out the roots and fibres, and carefully bedding them in the compost prepared for that 
purpose, as hinted at last month. Fill in the common earth, gently tread it round the 
stem, keeping it a few inches clear of the foundation, and secure the plant from the 
bad effects of high winds, by tacking it to the wall. Proceed thus, tree by tree, till all 
be planted. They require no further care till March, when it will be proper to head 
them down. (iVi'coZ.) Most writers agree in recommending November as the best time 
to plant on absorbent soils, March for heavy or wet land, and February for medium soils. 

Sect. II. Of the Selection and Arrangement of Espaliers and Dwarf-standards. 

2508. Espaliers or dwarf-standards are planted in the borders of the principal walks 
in all complete kitchen-gardens. Besides the value of their fruit, they form a sort of 
counterpart to the trees on the walls, and add much to the general effect of the garden, 
by increasing the appearance of design ; and much to its beauty in detail by the variety of 
the blossoms in spring and the fruit in autumn. Some gardeners, however, disapprove 
of them, or do not consider them of much consequence. " If espaliers are planted," 
says Marshall, " let them be only fruit of the best sorts, and in spacious gardens, 
where they may have a good length and height allowed them to grow freely ; and let it 
be resolved to do the business neatly." M'Phail disapproves of espaliers, as hurtful to 
crops of vegetables in the kitchen-garden. Forsyth is silent on the subject. Aber- 
crombie says, " Espaliers may be planted in some of the borders, in a row along the 
inner edge." Nicol observes, *' Espaliers, if well managed, are both ornamental and 
useful in the garden, affording a deal of fruit, yet taking up little room." " Of late 
years," Neill observes, " some have proposed to banish espalier-trees altogether, alleging 
that they injure the kitchen-garden compartments, by depriving them of sun and air. But 
in point of fact, they exist in the greater number of kitchen-gardens, and are not likely 
soon to be laid aside. If they are sometimes injurious, by depriving the plants of air, they 
are at other times very useful, acting as a hedge in protecting the young crops from the 
violence of strong winds. Espalier-trees generally produce excellent fruit, the sun and 
air having access to both sides of the tree ; they commonly afford abundant crops, and 
the fruit is not apt to be shaken by high winds. Further, they tend to hide the crops of 
culinary vegetables from the eye, and to render the walk of the kitchen-garden as pleasant 
as an avenue in the shrubbery. " Espalier -trees, like wall-trees, maybe considered in 
regard to the kind of espalier-rail, sort of fruit, sort of plant, distance, and planting. 

2509. The proper situation for an espalier-rail, according to Nicol, is in the border, 
by the principal walks, and at three or four feet distant from the walk. They may be 
placed on each side of the cross walks, if the garden be not very small ; but in that 
case, they would both confine and overshadow the kitchen-crops too much. The railing 
ought to be plain and neat, four or five feet high, and the upright spars to which the trees are 
trained, nine inches apart. The posts should be set on blocks of stone, and should be run 
in with pitch, or, which is a better way, set in blocks of stone, in an iron hose batted into 
the stone. These blocks, in either case, should be sunk under the surface of the ground. 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



PaUt III. 



2510. Espaliers, Abercrombie states, '< may be inserted three feet from the edge of the 
border ; but if the ground under the walks has not been prepared, five feet will be 
better. The stem or head of a wall-tree or espalier must be planted yvith a little in- 
clination to the fence or trellis ; and nailed or tied to prevent the wind from shaking it. 
Espaliers have the branches trained to an upright superficial trellis, standing detached, 
and thus bear on both sides. Occupying little room, they drip and shade less than 
standards, but are more troublesome to manage. While young, they may be rendered 
in some degree ornamental ; but as the plants get old, the most skilful pruning can 
hardly keep the espaliers fruitful, or prevent them from looking formal, unless the order 
of bearing will allow the old wood to be freely dut out. Not having the benefit of re- 
flected heat from a wall, there is a distinct motive for training them with a short stem, 
and with the branches laid horizontally, rather than in a fan-like expansion, and with the 
highest branches at four feet, or not exceeding six from tlie ground ; for thus they receive 
a stronger reflection of sun from the earth. At planting, it is easy to set them to the 
best aspect." 

2511. The projyer kinds of fruit for espaliers and divarf-standards, according to Nicol, 
are included in the following list, in which those marked with an asterisk (*) are deemed 
the most valuable. For small gardens the apples ought to be grafted on paradise, and 
the pears on quince stocks. 



Apples. 

*Royal codling, kentisb ditto, *carUsle 
ditto, *grey leaoington, royal pearmain, 
*ribston pippin, gogar pippin, *oslin 
pippin, golden rennet, *royju russet. 

Peart. 

* Jargonelle, *summer bergamot, *grey 
.ichan, *swan egg, *moorfowl egg, yair. 



*camock,*'warden, scots bergamot. Ion- 
gueville. 

Cherries. 

*May-duke, holman's duke, *black 
heart, white heart, *moreUa, *kentish. 

Plums. 

*Green gage, Orleans, *fotheringham. 



*white magntim bonam, blue perdrigon, 
*bullace. 

Other Sorts. 
The mulberry, quince, medlar, and ser- 
vice are sometimes introduced as espalier- 
trees, or dwarf-standards, especially where 
there is no orchard. 



2512. Dwarf-Standards are hy some preferred to espalier-trees. Hitt and Switzer approve 
of them, and Forsyth and Marshall prefer them. Abercrombie approves of dwarfs in 
common with espaUers, but seems, with M'Phail, to prefer them planted by themselves 
in the compartments. This we conceive to arise from the peculiar notions that many gar- 
deners have, that the kitchen-garden ought to be a mere place of culture, without any 
of that neatness, or of those beauties which would render it a scene fit to be included in 
the course of walks for recreation. "Where different ideas are entertained, and that order, 
regularity, and neatness are attempted, which is to be found in an eminent degree in 
the kitchen-gardens of Scotland, espaliers and dwarfs will be valued as forming the 
chief furniture of the borders. Abercrombie obsei-ves, " Dwarf-standards are raised 
with low stems, of one, two, or three feet in height, and with round heads propor- 
tionately diminished. These are the earliest bearers compared with other standards, and 
produce large fruit in great abundance for the size of the tree. In small gardens 
the same benefits and conveniences which recommend the half-standards are attached 
to these in a superior degree." Marshall observes, that " dwarf-standards occasion 
less trouble to keep them in order tlian espaliers, and are generally more productive ; 
planted at eight or nine feet distance, pruned and kept in an easy manner, they make 
a fine appearance, and produce better fruit and in greater quantities, than when they 
are in espaliers." (^Introd. to Gard. p. 37.) 

2513. The sort of jMnts, as far as respects age, are chosen on the same principle as in 
choosing wall-trees ; but such as are grafted on dwarfing stocks are generally preferred : 
apples on paradise, creeping apple, or doucin stocks ; pears on quince-stocks; and 
cherries on the perfumed cherry or small wild cherry stocks. 

2514. The distances at which to plant espalier-trees, according to Nicol, are, "for apples, 
on crab-stocks, thirty ; cherries, twenty ; pears, on free stocks, thirty to tliirty-five ; and 
plums, twenty to twenty-four feet. Pears on quince-stocks are planted from twenty 
to twenty-five feet asunder. Dwarf standard apple-trees, on paradise-stocks, may be 
planted very closely, as they cccupy but little room ; they do not require more than ten 
or fifteen feet." 

Sect. III. Of tall Standard Fruit-trees in a Kitchen-garden. 

2515. Though tall standard fruit-trees are more generally confined to orchards, yet 
they were formerly common in tlie kitchen-garden, and are still occasionally introduced 
in the circumferential portion, called the outer border of the slip. They cannot, how- 
ever, be recommended, on account of the extent of their drip and shade, which renders 
it impossible to grow culinary vegetables to any degree of perfection, either in size or 
flavor ; and also to the too orchard-like character which they in time give the garden. 

2516. According to Marshall, " The fewer standard-trees in a garden the better, as they 
take up much room, and by their shade prevent the proper growth of vegetables that are 
any thing near them." 

2517. M'Phail considers them as hurtful to crops of vegetables. 



Book I. 



FRUIT-SHRUBS. 



481 



2518. Aberawibie says, " full standards areonly or chiefly adapted for orcliards and otlicr 
grounds not occupied with esculents as principal crops. In the interior compartments; 
some full and half standards may be introduced ; being thinly scattered towards the angles 
of the compartments, not to overspread the ground, nor placed nearer together than forty 
feet ; indeed, marly designers of horticultural plantations would restrict the full standards 
to the orchard and pleasure-ground, as plants cultivated underneath them are apt to suffer 
from drips." {Pr. Gard. p. 5.) 

2519. Forsyth recommends their being mixed with other trees in the shrubberies which 
surround gardens. 

2520. Nicol concurs in this opinion ; and in general prefers standards in the outer 
border of the slip, or in the orchard. 

2521. Yor the sorts of fruit-trees j^roper for standards, see Chap. III. on Orchards, 

Sect. IV. Fruit-shrubs, 

2522. By fruit-shrubs are to be understood the gooseberry and currant tribes, rasp- 
berry, cranberry, &c. They are almost universally planted in the walk borders, at re- 
gular distances of from six to ten feet. Plantations of them are also formed in the 
compartments, and in the outbr border of the slip. " Some of those useful shrubs, 
gooseberries and currants," Marshall observes, "should grow in every aspect of the gar- 
den, in order to have a succession of their fruits as long as may be. Raspberries may 
be set in plantations, in rows. Though these shrubs are best by themselves, yet here 
and there, by the walks, a detached bunch may be kept, or here and there one against a 
warm wall. Currants, gooseberries, and raspberries," he adds, " do well, espaliered, as 
to a production of early and fine fruit." Abercrorabie observes, " Gooseberry and cur- 
rant bushes may be planted in single rows, in cross rows, or in plantations by them- 
selves : — plant some near the outward edge of the main compartments ; others along 
the borders v/here there are no espaliers ; others again in cross rows, to divide large com- 
partmonts. Raspberries may occupy other borders and compartments. " (Pract. Gard. 5. 
189.) Forsyth recommends planting gooseberries *' in a compartment by themselves, 
or round the edges of the compartments, about three feet from the path. Never plant 
them under the shade of other trees, as it will injure the flavor of the fruit." " Currants 
and gooseberries," Nicol observes, " are often planted in lines by the sides of the walks 
or alleys of the garden ; but in that way, especially if not well managed, they are gene- 
rally more cumbersome than useful. It is a better method to plant them in compartments 
by themselves, and to make new plantations every sixth or seventh year, as young plants 
are found to produce more handsome fruit, and also more plentifully than old ones. 
The same thing may be said of raspberries, which produce the finest fruit when young ; 
that is, about the third or fourth year after planting, if properly managed. It is proper 
to plant some of all the above fruits on a north border, or other shaded situation, in 
order to prolong the season of them, if that be an object, besides planting them out in 
compartments, as hinted above. Some may also very properly be planted against vacant 
places on any of the walls, pales, or espaliers. An Antwerp raspberry in particular, and 
soiiic or the kinds of gooseberries, are highly improved in size and flavor, if trained to a 
south A all." The cranberry was first introduced as a garden-fruit by Sir Joseph Banks, 
and is grown to most advantage in bog-earth, kept moist. The margins of ponds, or 
other reservoirs, in the slip, are good situations for this plant : but when the dewberry, 
bilberry, and other fruit-bearing bog-earth plants are introduced, we would recommend 
a bord. r or other compartment in a shady situation, furnished with bog-earth ; and to 
which water could be readily applied, either by the watering-pot, engine, or by means of 
under-ground channels. 

2523. IFith respect to tlie sorts of fruit-shrubs, the following list is given by Nicol, 
those to be preferred being marked with an asterisk (*). 

Gooseberries, Green, 
Early, *gascojgne, *walnut, goliah, 
globe. 

Gooseberriei, Red, 
* Ironmonger, * nutmeg, * walnut, 
*large rough, *champaigne, *smooth, 
♦captain, admirable. 

2524. The sorts ofj)lants are commonly such as have been grown two or three years 
from the cuttings, or in the case of raspberries, suckers of the preceding year. Older 
gooseberry and currant trees, where they can be procured, should be preferred, to a cer- 
tain extent, as they bear immediately, and when they grow old can readily be renewed. 
Raspberries, from their nature, can never have stems of more than a year in age. 

2525. In respect to distance, according to Nicol, " from four to six feet square, ac- 
cording to the quality of the soil, may be deemed sufficient ; that is, in good land, six 
feet ; in middling land, five; and in poor land, four feet. 

2526. The mode and season of planting is regulated on general principles. (2071. to 
2098.) 

I i 



Gooseberries, Yellow. 
*Golden droi), upright, *champaigne, 
*golden knap, *conqueror, *sulphur, 
*amber globe, *honeycomb. 

Gooseberries, WItiie. 
* Royal george, Orleans, * crj'stal, 
matchless. 



Curranfs. 

The red, white dutch, black, chamr 
paigne or gri/zly. 

Raspberries. 
The common fed, common white, red 
antweq), white antwerp, red cane, and 
twice-bearing, are all good sorts. 



■182 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Chap. III. 

Of the Formation atid Planting of an Orchard, subsidiary to the kitchen-garden. 

2527. j471 orchard, or separate playitation of the hardiei' fruit-trees is a common ap- 
pendage to the kitchen-garden, where that department is small, or does not contain 
an adequate number of fruit-trees to supply the contemplated demand of the family. Some- 
times this scene adjoins the garden, and fonns a part of the slip ; at other times it forms 
a detached, and, perhaps, distant enclosure, and not unfrequently, in countries where the 
soil is propitious to fi-uit-trees, they are distributed in the lawn, or in a scene, or field 
kept in pasture. Sometimes the same object is effected by mixing fruit-trees in the plant- 
ations near the garden and house. 

2528. As to the situation, exposure, soil, and shelter of orchards, most of tlie obsei-vations 
submitted as to these properties in kitchen-gardens will equally apply to them ; but 
there is this difference, that as orchards are not generally surrounded by walls, . and 
not always under the spade, the surface may be much more irregular ; and, in regard to 
form, it is a matter of no great consequence. Size will of course be regulated by the 
quantity of produce desired, and nothing can be more simple than the arrangement of 
the trees which, in regard to position, is almost always that of the quincunx, the distances 
between the plants being greater or less according to the sorts made choice of. 

2529. As to the site of an orchard, Abercrombie observes, " land sloping to the east or 
south is better than a level ; a sheltered hollow, not liable to floods, is better than an 
upland with the same aspect, and yet a gentle rising, backed by sufficient shelter, or the 
base of a hill, is eligible. A good loam, in which the constituents of a good soil predo- 
minate over those of a hot one, suits most fruit-trees : tlie sub-soil should be dry, and the 
depth of mould thirty inches or three feet. Before planting, di-ain if necessary ; trench 
to the depth of two feet ; manure according to the defects of the soil ; aiid give a win- 
ter and summer fallow ; or cultivate the site for a year or two as a kitchen-garden, so 
that it may be deeply dug, and receive a good annual dressing." 

2530. 1)1 a situation much exposed, plant shrubs or wilding fruits, as screens, or as 
nurses : forest-trees may be planted as an outer screen, but on a distant line, whence 
their roots will not draw the soil to be occupied with fruit-trees. \Miere ornamental 
grounds present a good aspect, as well as prepared shelter, fruit-trees are distributed 
in them to great advantage. 

2531. As to the size of an orchard, Forsyth obsei-ves, " it may be from one to twenty 
acres, or inore, according to the quantity of fruit wanted, or tlie quantity of ground that 
you may have fit for the purpose." 

2532. That soil will do for an orchard which produces good crops of com, grass, or 
garden-vegetables ; but a loamy soil is to be preferred ; though any of a good quality, 
not too light or dry, nor wet, heavy, or stubborn, but of a moderately soft and pliant 
nature, will be found to answer the end. Sliingly and gravelly soils disagree very much 
with fruit-trees, unless there be loam intermixed. They will succeed much better on a 
chalk bottom. On such a soil, I have seen roots twelve feet deep, and trees thrive well. 
The soil should be trenched from two to three feet deep. 

253S. The sorts of fruits adapted for orchards are the more hardy apples, pears, cherries, 
and plums ; the medlar, mulbeiTy, quince, walnut, chestnut, filbert, barberry, and some 
others. According to Forsyth, a complete orchard ought to have, besides apple, pear, 
plum, and cherry trees, quinces, medlars, mulberries, ser\dce-trees, filberts, and barber- 
ries ; as also walnuts and chestnuts ; the two latter of which are well adapted for 
sheltering the others from high winds, and should therefore be planted in the bound- 
aries of the orchard, a little closer than ordinary, for that purpose. In an orchard for 
raising crops for sale, Abercrombie says, that fruit is the most profitable for which there 
is the greatest demand. Apples ai-e first in utility ; but pears, cherries, plums, and 
most other fruits in the subjoined alphabetical list, are acceptable, for dressing in paste, 
for preserving, or for pickling, as well as in the dessert. According to the extent and 
nature of the ground, mulbenies, medlars, quinces, services, walnuts, chestnuts, and all 
die sorts which will ripen their produce sufficiently on standards, may be introduced. 

2534. The varieties of the common orchard fruits recommended by Nicol,-are as follows, 
the sorts marked with an asterisk (*) being preferable : — 



Apples. 

*Ribston pippin, *oslin ditto, *ffogar 
ditto, *kentisn ditto, *royal codling, 
*kentish ditto, * Carlisle ditto, *royal 
russet, wheeler's ditto, *roval pearmain, 
*loan's ditto (good), *gblden rennet, 
* kentish ditto (good), *grey leading- 
ton, scarlet ditto, summer queening, 
■winter ditto, * yorfcshire greening, 
*margill (ven- good), margaret apple 
(good), * wlilte hawthomdenn, * nor- 



folk beafing (good), strawberrv, *purse- 
mouth (very good). 

Pears. 

* Jargonelle, cra\vford or lammas, 
*camock or drummond, *grev achan, 
*s-n-an egg, *moorfowl egg, *vair, *gold- 
eu knap (good), longueVille,' * summer 
bergamot, *autumn ditto, *scots ditto, 
musk robin (good), saffron, *hanging 
leaf (vers good), the pound peai-, caSlac 
■warden (for baking). 



Cherries. 

* May-duke, *holman's diite, *b]ack 
heart, *morella, *kentish, *large gean. 
Plmns. 

*Orleans, *damask (black, good), dam- 
son (black, ditto), white perdrigon, *blue 
ditto, blue gage, ^'wliite magmim bonum , 
red ditto or imperial, white buUace, 
*black ditto, *drap d"or (yellow, good), 
*'queen claude (ditto> ditto). 

{Kaltnd. p. 179.) 



Book I. 



FORMATION OF AN ORCHARD. 



483 



2535. The sorts of plants made choice of for orchards are invariably standards, and half- 
standards, and commonly such as are not more than one or two years from the graft. Aber- 
crombie and Nicol prefer " maiden plants, or such as are only two years fi-om the bud or 
graft, of all the above kinds, to older trees : haWng boles or stems of three or four feet 
in length; the apples being worked on crab, and the pears on free stocks." 

2536, The ultimate distance at whick apple and pear trees should stand in an orchard is, according to 
the same author, from thirty to forty feet, less or more, according to the quality of the soil ; taking as tlie 
medium thirty-six feet. In a poor soU, and a bleak exposure, where the trees may not be expected to grow 
very freely, thirty feet is sutlicient ; whereas in good soil, and in a sheltered situation, forty may not be too 
much. Cherries and plums may be planted at from twenty-four to thirty-six feet, accor'ding'to soil and 
situation, as above ; taking, as a medium, thirty feet for the ultimate distance at which they are to stand 
clear of one another. But it would be advisable, in the first instance, to plant four trees for one that is 
intended ultimately to remain ; planting the proper kinds at the above distances first, and then temporary 
plants between them each way ; which temporary plants should be of the free-growing sorts that begin to 
bear early, such as the nonsuch and hawthomdean apples, the may-duke cherry, and the Cra-srford and 
yair pears ; or any others better known to produce fruit soon after planting. These should be considered, 
and be treated as temporary plants from the beginning, and must give place to the principal trees as they 
advance in growth, by being pruned away by degrees, and at last stubbed up entirely. If orchard-trees be 
planted among shrubbery, fee. they may be planted at ajiy distance, exceeding forty feer, that may be 
thought proper ; but they should not be planted nearer, otherwise they will too much confine the shrubs. 
In this case it will not be necessary to plant temporary trees, as the principals will be nursed by the shrubs. 
In bleak situations, if forest and other hardy trees be planted among the fruit-trees, it may not be necessary 
to plant so many ,if any' temporary fruit-trees ; or these may chiefly consist of the hardier sorts, such as the 
hawthorndean apple, the may-duke and moreUa cherries, and the Scotch geans, which produce fruit the 
soonest. " In a good soil,'" Abercrombie observes, "the final distances at which the plants should stand 
is twenty or twenty-five feet for full standards; of those kinds which reach but a moderate size as trees, 
and thirty or forty feet for the larger-growing sorts. Temporary plants of such kinds as bear fruit soon 
may be planted at half the final distances, in order to be pruned down, and at last removed, when the prin- 
cipals require it" 

2537. The mode of planting best adapted for standard-trees is unquestionably that 
of mudding in, and next that of fixing by water (2096'. 2097.) ; one or other of 
these methods should be adopted, where success and immediate growth is an object, 
and should be succeeded by staking, panning, mulching, clothing the stems, and 
watering. 

25-38. Staking and protecting. " If the stem of a tree is rocked by the Tvind, the root is prevented from 
shooting new fibres ; the ground is also opened, so that in winter frost penetrates, and in summer hot 
drying winds. Having set up a firm stake to each high standard newly planted, twist a part of a hay band 
round the tree to prevent it from galling, and with the remainder tie it securely to t.he stake." {Aber- 
croynbie.) Forsj-th and Xicol agree in recommending staking to prevent the trees from being wind-waved. 
In respect to protection, Xicol obser\-es, " If the orchard be not completely fenced, every care should be 
taken to guard the plants from hares, by properly bushing them round with thorns ; which I think is the 
most effectual method, and that least injurious to' the trees." 

2559. Panning and mulching. Let a small basin or hollow be made round the stem of each tree, a foot or 
eighteen inches in diameter, and two or three inches deep, according to the extent of its roots. Fill this 
basin with littery dung, to the thickness of five or six inches, over which sprinkle a little earth just 
enough to keep it from being blo^vn about. This both nourishes the young fibres, and keeps the ground 
about them moist in hot weather, if wetted freely once a-week. yXicol's Kal. 220.) To protect the roots 
of autumn-planted trees from the frost of the succeeding winter, and from drought in the summer, Aber- 
crombie directs to " lay mulch about the stem, to the distance of two feet round, and six inches in thick- 
ness ; or substitute dry'litter, or a thin layer of turf in summer." Forsyth says, " if it prove dry the spring 
after planting, dig up some turf, and lay it round the stem of the young trees with the grassy side down- ■ 
wards ; this will keep the ground moist, and save a deal of watering ; if the trees have taken well this 
need not be repeated, as they will be out of danger the first year. The turf should be laid as far as the 
roots of the trees extend; and when it is rotted, it should be dug in^ which will be of great service to 
them." 

2540. Clothing the stev7s of standard-frees by an envelope of moss, or short grass, or litter wound round 
with shreds of matting, is of great use the first vear after planting, to keep the bark moist, and thereby aid 
the ascent and circulation of the sap in the alburnum. This operation should be performed at or soon 
after planting, and the clothing may be left on tiU by decay it drops oft' of itself ; it is of singular service in 
verv- late planting ; or when, from unforeseen circumstances, summer planting becomes requisite. 

2^1. TVaiering. Newlv planted orchards must be attended to in respect to watering, which should be re- 
peated the oftener as the season advances, till the trees strike into the soil. " If the planting is performed 
earl v in autumn," .\bercrombie observes, " while the weather is yet hot and dry, a little water may be given 
to assist the roots to strike; but thev ought not to be soaked with water, nor need watering be repeated. 
At planting late in spring, should the ground be dry, give a moderate watering ; which repeat about once 
a fortnight during the hot months. Supposing the plantation to have been made in winter, should a very 
dry spring follow, a few waterings may be necessary until the plants strike." 

2542. The best season for jylanting an orchard is the autumn, as soon as the trees have, 
ripened their wood and dropped their leaves. The work properly executed at this sea- 
son, the trees will push out fresh fibres the same year, and be ready and able to push out 
shoots of considerable vigor in spring. ^Vhen autumn planting is impracticable, the 
next best is in the beginning of February-, or as early as the season will permit. 

2543. In a desigfi recently coynposed, for combining an extensive kitchen-garden uith a 
fotrer-garden and orchard fig. 430.), the last surrounded the two former, and served to 
shelter them. The kitchen-garden {d, ii, u) occupied a parallelogram in the centre ; 
the flower-garden (y, (j), with its botanic hot-houses (^, h, i), a semicircuiar area at the 
south end ; tlie gardener's lodge {b), gardener's house and garden-offices (c), and 
nursing departments ( p, p), a similar area at the nortli end ; and the orchard (t, r) sur- 
rounded the whole. The south and north ends {b, e) were approached by carriage-roads 
(a, a, a), and the sides by walks (/)• The hot-houses were partly in north and soutli 



484 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



ranges, glass on all sides, for main crops of grapes and peaches (???, vi, k), and partly 
placed against walls (n, n), for more early forcing. The pine-pits and melonry 
(fi, I, k, n), and the compost-ground u), were within the walls, and approached by 
carts by a subterraneous road from the concealed part of the orchard (s). The hot- 
houses, pits, and walls were heated by steam from a central tower {f ), two ponds (r, r) 
supplied water to a system of pipes, which distributed it over the open garden, and the 
hot-houses were supplied from a cistern under the glass roof of the tower (/): a room 
for eating fruit, or repose (d), occupied a situation which overlooked the whole. The 
main entrance for the master and his friends was at the southern extremity [e), and 
that for the head gardener and his operatives at the other end of the garden. (6) 

430 




This garden nriay be considered as composed for effect, as well as for use; and it 
may be asserted, that the central range of hot-houses, when the grapes and peaches are 



Book I. CULTURE AND MANAGEMENT OF THE SOIL. 



485 



in full bearing, will, to the spectator within, present a vault of fruit and foliage, such as 
lias not hitherto been displayed in any British garden. 

2544. The subject of cyder and perry orchards we consider as belonging more to 
agriculture than horticulture. (See Encyc of Agriculture, part iii.) 



Chap. IV. 

Of the general Cultivation and Management of a Kitchen- garden. 

9515. The cultivation of a garden includes the performance of all those things that are 
requisite, in order to a reasonable and prolific production of the various vegetables and 
fruits grown therein. By the management of a garden, is to be understood the keei)ing 
it in such order, as that it may not fail in those impressions of pleasure it is calculated to 
afford. A kitchen-garden, as well as a garden professedly ornamental, may and ought 
to be agreeable to walk in, as well as profitably cultivated. A gardener may be well 
acquainted with the culture of individual vegetables and fruits, and yet very deficient in 
the general cultivation and management of his garden. The following sections relate 
entirely to general practices conducive to these objects, and they deserve to be carefully 
studied by the young gardener who aspires at any degree of eminence in his art. 

Sect. I. Culture and Management of the Soil. 

2546. The soil, Marshall observes, " must be first attended to, always to keep the 
fruit-borders in heart, and the compartments in a proper state for use, when called upon to 
receive either seeds or plants. Ground should never lie long without stirring ; for the 
soil of a garden should be in a free, sweet, and rich state, by proper digging, &c. or no 
great things can be done, as to early, handsome, or well flavored productions. It- 
should be free, that the roots of plants may not be impeded in the quest of food ; sweet, 
that the food may be wholesome ; and rich, that there may be no defect of nutriment. 

2547. Trenching the vacant ground in a garden does good to all soils in the autumn 
and winter seasons, and that in proportion to its strength, being indispensably necessary 
for clays to separate and ameliorate the parts. The light soils may do by being only 
rough dug, which is a method that stronger soils vdW be also benefitted by. The soil 
would be stilL ferther improved, by re-trenching, or rough-digging, once or twice more 
in the winter, if the opportunity offers, particularly if strong or stubborn. Let the 
ridges lie E. and W. except the ground be a slope, when they may correspond. 

2548. The trenching of vacant ground, Abercrombie observes, " should be forwarded 
as much as possible in winter, and early in spring. By repeatedly exposing a new sur- 
face to the action of the frost, a greater quantity of the soil is ameliorated. In every 
case where it is intended that the ground shall lie fallow any time, it is advisable, in 
digging trenches, to turn up the earth roughly in ridges ; forming, parallel to each 
trench, a single ridge of the same width, in order that the soil may be the more 
effectually mellowed, pulverised, and renovated by the weather. These ridges can be 
expeditiously levelled, for the reception of seeds and plants ; which is a further improve- 
ment of the ground." 

2549. To conserve the fertility of kitchen-garden soil, the mode adopted by Nicol and 
practised by the best Scotch gardeners, is the most scientific of any. Nicol observes, 
that, as kitchen- vegetables do best on what is termed new land, it is a common complaint 
among gardeners that their ground, by being, as it were, worn out, will not produce 
cei-tain kinds of vegetables ; not that it is poor and hungry, or altogether unfitted to the 
production of them, having formerly produced them in great abundance, but that the 
surface has become tired of these crops, in the same way as a field sown with the same 
sort of grain for two or three years in succession, ceases to produce that grain in perfec- 
tion. The method which he practised with success is as follows : — 

2550. First, it is necessary to have a depth of soil from twenty-four to thirty-six inches ; in which 
case it is obvious, that whatever the depth of the natural soil is deficient of, twenty-four inches must be 
made good by carrying in soil from fields of good quality. Then take three crops offthe first surface, and 
then trench ^'<r(?<? spit deep, by which the bottom and top are reversed, and the middle remains in the 
middle Take three crops off this surface, and then trench two spit ; by which the top becomes the middle, 
and the middle the top. And take also three crops off this surface, and then trench three spit ; whereby 
that which was last the middle, and now top, becomes the bottom ; and. that which is now the bottom, 
and was the surface at first, now becomes surface again, after having rested six years. Proceed in this 
manner alternately ; the one time trenching two spit deep, and the other three 3 by which means the sur- 
face will always be changed, and will rest six years, and produce three. 

Hence there will always be new soil in the garden for the production of whole so^ne vegetables; and 
hence also will much less manure be required, than when the soil is shallow, and the same surface con- 
stantly in crop He adds, that he would not advise the soil to be more than three feet deep, as the sur- 
face might be liuried too deep from the action of the weather, and influence of the sun. Where the soil is 
only so deep as to allow of trenching two spit, by trenching every third or fourth year the ground will rest 
half its time • and if judiciously managed, and cropped in proper rotation, wholesome vegetables may be 



486' 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 



produced on it for many years successively. It is not intended that the whole garden should be trenched 
over the same season, " one half, or a third part at a time may be more advisable, and also more con- 
venient." {Kal. p. 16.) 

Sect. II. Manure. 

2551. When manure is applied the ground is not to be glutted with dung; for, as 
Marshall observes, " a little at a time, well rotted, is sufficient, so that it comes often 
enough, as opportunity and the nature of the cropping may dictate. It is indeed a soi-t 
of rule vidth gardeners, that ground should be dunged every second year ; but circum- 
stances may make more or less of it necessary, and rules should never be indiscriminately 
applied. If dung is pretty well reduced much less will do, and let it not be buried too 
deep ; but if it is otherwise, lay it low, to be dug upwards another time, when it is more 
consumed. It is an excellent way of manuring, where the superficial soil is much ex- 
hausted, to dig slightly, and spread over rotten dung, late in autumn, in the winter, or 
early in spring, and so let it remain, till the ground is wanted, before it is dug in; which 
should, however, be slightly dug before the manure is put on, or forked in a little after- 
wards. This method is particularly to be recommended where crops of onions, leeks, 
and such superficial rooting plants are to be." 

2552. Dung used in great quantities, and Ir/ing in lumps, harbors woryns, grubs, and 
insects, and makes plants groiv too rampant and rank-Jlavored. Carrots it cankers, and it 
disagrees with many things ; is apt also to make the ground parch, and burn the crops sown 
upon it in a hot summer. On these accounts some persons have been induced to dress 
their gardens only with rich fresh earth ; which, if they do not overcrop, will do very 
well, being accompanied with good tillage ; which alone is of much use, and is essential 
to due cultivation. Vegetables are always sweeter the less dung is used, and little need 
be used when the natural soil is good and deep ; for the earth may be so dug, tliat what 
is at the top one year may be at the bottom the next : wdiich is a manoeuvre evidently 
advantageous, as a good part of the strength of the top soil washes downw-ards. The 
method just recommended, of letting dung lie on the surface for a time, is good also, as 
it abates the rankness of it. Lime SAveetens. 

2553. The periods for ap^ylying manures necessarily depends on the soil and the mode 
of cropping. If the original soil be poor, it may require aid from dung every year,; but, 
in general, the compartments in which annuals and biennials are cultivated will want to 
be thus recruited at least once in two years, when the last autumn crops are off the 
ground. Beds occupied by perennials cannot sometimes receive any material accession 
of new earth or compost for a number of years ; and therefore, when the stools are 
worn out, the repairs of the soil should, in proportion, be substantial, and go deep. 
Dung is fit to manure beds for receiving many sorts of plants, when it has lain in a heap 
from three to six months, and is beginning to be well rotted. But for particular pur- 
poses, it should lie from one to two years. Apply it for annuals, two or three inches 
thick ; for perennials that are to stand long, six or eight inches thick ; spreading it 
equally, till the bed into which it is to be dug is covered : then trench it in a moderate 
spade deep, that it may be within easy reach of the roots of the plants. In preparing 
ground for perennial stools, a portion of the dung should be deposited six inches deeper. 
(^Abercrombie. ) 

2554. Manures are to be applied either as simples or compounds ; but the latter method 
Nicol considers the most eligible. He agrees with Jethro Tull in stating, that if they 
have not undergone a proper fermentation, their effects are, giving a rank and disagree- 
able flavor to fruits and vegetables; and if an immoderate quantity be applied, of 
producing a considerable degree of unwholesomeness, and tainting the juices of all 
plants. 

A mixture of stable-dung, sea.iveed, lime, and vegetable mould, which has lain in a heap for three 
or four months, and has been two or three times turned during that period, will make an excellent manure 
for most kinds of garden-land. Also, cow-dung, hog-dung, and sheep-dung, mixed with soot or with 
wood-ashes. Pigeon-dung and vegetable mould, well mixed, wiU also make an excellent manure for heavy 
land ; or even for lighter soils, provided the pigeon-dung be used sparingly. 

Neafs-dung and hog-dung, slightly fermented, are very fit and rich manures for light hot soils. For 
those of a dry, absorbent nature, none answer better, or last longer; by reason that they retain moisture 
for a. greater length of time, and also ferment more slowly than other dungs. 

Pigeoit-dung, lime, soot, ashes, &c. .should never be applied as simples ; the quantity required being com- 
paratively small, and the regular distribution of them difficult, without the admixture of otlier matter. 
But these should generally be applied to compost of good earth, turf, or sward, or of cow, or other dung 
of a cool nature ; applying them in quantity according to the cold or the hot nature of the soil to be ma- 
nured, allowmg the compost a sufficient time to incorporate, and mixing it thoroughly. 

Marl is a good manure for almost amj soil : and it may be applied as a simple, with as much propriety 
as any of the kinds of cattle-dung, or even of vegetable earth. The kind called sheU-marl, is much to be 
preferred, and should be freely applied to strong lands, but more sparingly to light : the loamy kind being 
best adapted to light lands. 

Stable-dung, if used as a simple, should not be applied in too rank a state, nor should it be m uch fermented. 
It should generally he in a heap for four or five weeks ; during which time it should be turned over once 
or twice. A ton of it m this state is worth three that has been used in the hot-bed, and is a year old. This 
manure, and indeed dung of any kind, when applied as a simple, should never be carried from the heap to 
the ground, till it is to be digged in j as, by exposure to the air, part of its virtues evaporate, and it is the 
less effectual 



Book I. 



CROPPING. 



487 



Sea-weed should be applied 'mstantly after landing. If used as a simple, is even greater than the above ; as 
it instantly corrupts, and its juices flow downwards, and are lost. If this manure be used as a compound, 
the heap in which it is compounded should be more frequently turned on its account; that none of the 
juices may be lost, but that the other part of the compost may absorb them. 

Horse-dung, and tlie dung of sheep, deer, and of rabbits are most eligible for cold wet soils ; and all 
these, or any of these in compost with lime, will be found beneficial. For such soils also, a compost of 
coal-ashes, pigeon-dung, and lime; or of wood-ashes, whin-ashes, fern-ashes, and stable-dung; or of deer- 
dung, rabbit-dung, soot, and burnt sward, will make a good manure. 

Manures are to be applied in quantify according to their qualify. Hence the dung of pigeons should be 
applied in much smaller proportions than that of horses, it containing a greater quantity of volatile salts ; 
and so the ashes of vegetables containing a portion of fixed alkaline salts, being more powerful, are to be 
applied in still smaller quantity. So also, lime being the most powerful of the calcareous kind, should be 
applied, in ordinary cases, -in much smaller quantity than marl. 

Vegetable mould may either be used as a sijnple, or as a compound, and may be applied with equal pro- 
priety to all soils. None can be hurt by it in any degree, since almost every plant will grow luxuriantly in 
it alone, without the aid of any soil or manure whatever. It seems to be the ambrosia, and the dunghill 
drainings the nectar, of vegetable lifa The latter, however, if too freely indulged in, is rather of an in- 
toxicating nature {KaL) 

2555. Where economy, rather than the flavor of culinary crops, is aji object, recent dung 
is unquestionably to be preferred (1156.)? and, in fact, is so by most market-gardeners : 
John Wilmot, an extensive market-gardener at Isleworth, bears testimony to this fact. A 
given weight of recent stable dung, he says, will not only go farther than the same weight 
of rotten dung from old hot-beds ; but will serve as a manuring for the succeeding crop, 
which, with old dung, is not the case. (Hort. Trans, iv. 55.) 

Sect. III. Cro])ping. 

2556. A change of crops is founded on the generally acknowledged fact, that each sort 
of plant draws a somewhat different nourishment ; so that after a full crop of one thing, 
one of another kind may often be immediately sown. " Nothing tends more to relieve the 
soil," Abercrombie observes, " than a judicious succession of crops ; for plants of dif- 
ferent constitutions not only strike to different depths, and in difi^erent directions, with' 
their roots, but the terminal fibres or feeders of the roots appear to take up separate and 
peculiar constituents of the soil, and to be indebted for support to some property imparted 
by tlie earth in very different degrees. The duration of the vegetable, its short or pro- 
tracted existence, is a great cause of diversity of effect as to the quantity of aliment drawn 
from the soil. Another mark of distinctness in constitution is the character of the root, 
as it may be fibrous and tender, or fibrous and woody, — or bulbous, or tuberous, — ex- 
tended or compact ; another, the form and magnitude of the herb, and the proportion of 
fibrous or ligneous substance in the stem and branches. A fourth index of a separate 
nature is the succulency or hardness of the leaves, and the quantity of pulpy or 
farinaceous matter in the parts of fructification, — as the leaves may be the edible 
part, before the plant is matured; or the seed-vessels, as in pulse, may hold the 
produce for the table ; or the esculent part may consist of fruit-enclosing seeds. To 
apply this practically : — we will suppose a strawberry-plantation requires to be re- 
newed ; and the stools seldom continue fully productive more than three or four years ; 

— instead of introducing young strawberry-plants into the same bed, entirely eradicate 
the old plantation, and let it be succeeded by a crop of beans, or of some other esculent as 
different as may be in constitution and habit. In the same manner, let the new plant- 
ation of strawberries follow some light crop which left the ground in a good state, or 
which allowed it to be trenched and followed for an interval, whether it were an annual 
or biennial. It is a rule, from which only extraordinary circumstances can warrant a de- 
parture, never to plant a new set of perennial stools on the ground whence a plantation 
of the same or a similar species, having worn itself out, has just before been removed. 

On the contrary, crops which strike deep, and occupy the ground long, should be suc- 
ceeded by plants which pierce but a little way under the surface, are drawing in the least 
degree, and soon come off from the short term of their vegetable life." 

2557. A studied rotation is advisable, in all cases, according to Nicol ; so as that no crop 
of the same class may immediately follow another. To facilitate this measure, the kitchen- 
ground should be divided into a number of portions, and a journal or note-book 
should be kept, with a reference to their numbers. In this journal, wliatever relates to 
their cropping, manuring, trenching, or fallowing should he recorded, for reference and 
guidance as to future cropping. Nicol, v^hile practising as head gardener at Raith, 
Wemyss Castle,' and other places, kept a regular journal of this sort ; he published it in 
his Kitchen Gardener in 1802, and he tells us, in 1816, that it had been approved and 
adopted by many practical gardeners. (See theixiodeL, 2345-) 

2558. JBy planting out currants, gooseberries, and raspberries in co?npartments, instead of 
growing them in single lines, particularly if tliese be properly managed, an opportunity 
of changing crops might further be afforded ; as these should not stand longer than 
seven or eight years together, before the plantations are renewed. 

2559. Strawberry-plantations, under proper management, should be renewed every four 
or five years ; and thus likewise might an opportunity of changing crops be afforded. 

I i 4 



48S 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Also, by the renewal of artichoke and asparagus plantations, which should be done every 
seven or eight years. In managing all the above-named articles on a large scale, new 
plantations should be made every year, to a certain extent, which would throw a certain 
proportion of ground regularly into the rotation. 

2560. Esculents might be cultivated in classes, and thus a sort of rotation, though not 
very complete, might be produced ; and the brassica tribe, the leguminous family, 
the tuberous or carrot-rooted kinds, the bulbous or onion kinds ; and the lighter 
crops, as salads and herbs, might succeed each other. 

2561. Close crops, as onions, leeks, carrots, &c. are conveniently and neatly cultivated in 
beds of from four to five feet widths, with alleys of a foot to eighteen inches between them. 

2562. Resting garden-ground. Market-gardeners, Nicol observes, who are generally 
good managers, and naust of necessity make the most of their ground, in order to main- 
tain their families, and be able to pay high rents, have found out the utility of resting 
their land, and of following a regular rotation in cropping it, at least in the culture of 
the principal articles, and as far as the nature of the thing will admit. The best man- 
agers sow out a portion of their ground eveiy season in grass, clover, or barley, which 
is used as green food for theii* horses and cows. Very generally the barley is sown along 
with the clover, merely to nurse and shade it, being cut down and not allowed to ripen. 
The clover is sometimes dug up after the first season, if land for market-crops be scarce, 
but more generally it is allowed to lie a second year. By good managers, the ground is 
never sown down in a hungry state. Land that has been under esculent crops for many 
years together, and is, perhaps, glutted with manm-e, may be cleansed, as it is termed, 
by a scouring crop of oats, wheat, or r\'e, which, if thought necessary, may be repeated. 
If trenched to its full depth afterwards, it will again be fit for the production of culinary 
crops in great perfection. 

2563. The seasons ]}roper for furnishing the ground ivith every particular vegetable should 
be well attended to, that each may be obtained as early as its nature will permit ; and of 
the seeds and plants we use, care must be taken to procure the best of the kind, lest after 
all the trouble of cultivation, disappointment as to vegetation or quality should ensue. 
The principal time for sowing and planting the articles raised in tlie kitchen-garden falls 
in the spring months. It is necessary to lodge some sorts in the ground as early as Ja- 
nuary ; but February, March, and April are the months in which the principal supphes 
from summer crops are provided for. From April till September, and even October, 
many sorts are sown and planted, in smaller portions, for successive crops. Particular 
hardy esculents are also sown or transplanted principally in autumn, for a supply as 
well in winter as in spring and early in summer. Other kinds are inserted occasionally 
as late as November and December, to stand wholly over the winter, in rising growth, 
for early crops and for main crops the following summer ; such as peas, beans, cabbages, 
and cauliflowers. To obtain early crops of favorite esculents which are more tender, 
several kinds are sown and planted in hot-beds in winter and spring. 

2564. The quantity soicn and planted is to be determined jointly by the dem-ands of the 
family and the portion of ground that can be spared : but it should be always a rule, to sow 
and plant more than probably enough for tlie family, as more may happen to be wanted 
than expected, and a cross season or other Occident may occasion a failure. As exact 
rules cannot be laid down, the exercise of a little judgment will be necessaiy, in order to 
proportion crops alike ; for to have too much of one thing, and too little of another, is 
disagreeable and discreditable. Respect should be paid to the natural duration of crops, 
some going off soon, and others being lasting, and that too according to the season tliey 
are propagated in. The pea requires the greastest breadth of surface ; and next to this the 
cabbage tribe. The spaces for asparagus, artichokes, strawberries, sea-kale, &c. are in 
some degree fixed from the comparative pennanency of these crops. Pot and sweet 
herbs require the least space, and ascending from these to breadths necessary for the pea 
and cabbage tribe, the proportions are as various as the kinds to be grown ; and these 
can only be acquired properly by experience, and observation of what takes place in dif- 
ferent gardens. 

2565. Seeds and plants should be adapted as much as possible to the soil and situation which 
best sidts them ; for in the same garden some dilFerence will be found, not only as to sun 
and shelter, but the earth ; as some will be richer, some poorer, some deeper, some 
shallower, and some perhaps heavier, some lighter, m due attention to which, advantage 
is to reaped. [Marshall.) 

2566. The ordering of seeds from the seedsman is generally a matter of some difficulty 
to the young gardener, and Abercrombie is almost the only author who has endeavored 
to^ remove it. ^ The information afforded by his work, entitled The Seed Estimate^ 
will be found in tlie Horticultural Catalogue ; where under every culinary vegetable 
raised from seed, waU be found the quantity, either stated in weight or measure, requisite 
for a certain space of ground ; and this space generally that which is deemed sufficient 
for a considerable garden. 



Book I. 



THINNING. 



489 



Sect. IV. Thinning. 

2567. The thinning of seedling crops, Marshall observes, " should be done in time, be- 
fore the young plants have di-awn one another up too much. All plants grow stronger, 
and ripen their juices better, when the air circulates freely round them, and the sun is not 
prevented from an immediate influence ; an attention to which should be paid from the 
first appearance of plants breaking ground. In thinning close crops, as onions, carrots, 
turnips, &-c. be sure that they are not left too near, for instead of reaping a greater produce, 
there would be a less. When they stand too close, they will make tall and large tops, 
but are prevented swelling in their roots : better to err on the wide side, for though there 
are fewer plants, they will be finer and better flavored." 

2568. Thinning the leaves of fruit-trees. " The leaves," Abercrombie observes, " have 
too essential an office as organs of growth to the entire plant, to be lightly parted with ; 
and where the climate is not deficient in heat, compared with the habitat of the plant, or 
the portion of the year in which its season for vegetating falls, their shade is more likely 
to be serviceable than detrimental, even in the last stage of fruiting. Thus, cherries, rasp- 
berries, strawberries, currants, and other species whose full term of fructification is more 
than comprehended in our summer, reach perfect maturity-, and acquire the color proper 
to each, though ever so much covered with leaves : whereas for those kinds which ripen 
with difficult}' here, because the direct rays, and most intense reflection of the sun, is 
scarcely equal to the heat in the shade during the full summer of their native climate, — 
it is proper, when the fruit has nearly attained its full size, and is naturally losing its ab- 
solute greenness, to remove some of the leaves which shade it too much. Were the leaves 
thinned sooner, it would prejudice the growth of the fruit ; and should they even now be 
swept off unsparingly, the growth of the year's shoots might be arrested. The leaves 
which cover the fruit, whether peaches, grapes, late pears, or other exotics, must be re- 
moved gradually ; that is, at two or three times in the course of five or six days ; other- 
wise the unusual full heat of the sun darting upon the fruit, would occasion the rind to 
crack," 

£5d9. Kicol says, " My practice has been, as the fruit begin to color, to pick off every leaf that may over- 
hang them ; thus very much enhancing their beauty and flavor. In late seasons, if the leaves of wall- 
trees hang longer thaii usual, they may be brushed oft; in order to let in the sun and air the better to ripen 
the wood. This brushing, however, should be cautiously performed, never brushing much at a time. The 
leaves should not be forced off violently. Some use a common stable -broom for this purpose ; but a better 
instrument is a hazel, or strong willow withe, or a smaU smooth cane. The shoots from which the leaves 
are to be displaced, should be gently stroked upwards, and outward ; but never the reverse way, else there 
is danger of hurting the buds. Trees exposed to the wind seldom require this care ; but sometimes espa- 
liers may, and if so, the same course is to be pursued as above." 

2570. Thintiing stone fruits. Tliinning the over-abundantly set fruit on apricot, nec- 
tarine, peach, and plum trees, is a necessary duty ; as many of these, in good seasons, 
set more than they can nourish or bring near to perfection. This thinning, however, must 
be cautiously performed, and by degrees. If the trees have set then- fruit very thick in 
particular parts only, such parts should be moderately thinned out now, and the other 
parts not yet. But if the fruit be very quickly set all over the tree, let it be generally 
thinned off to half its extent at this time ; deferring the final thinning till the stoning be 
over ; that is, till the shells be quite hard, and the kernel be formed. For most trees, 
especially those anywise unhealthy, drop many of their fruit in the time of stoning ; so 
that the thinning had better be performed at two or three different times ; always observ- 
ing to reserve the fullest, brownest, and best-formed fruit. Stone-fruits must be again 
looked over in June, and a few more friut thinned off where too thick ; and the final 
thinning must take place in July, when the stoning of stone-fruits is over, and previously 
to their beginning to swell off for ripening. [Nicol.) 

2571. TVlth respect to the quantity orjiumher of fndt proper to he left on a tree, " much," according to 
Nicol, " must depend on its size and strength, and whether it be full grown, or be yet in training. A full- 
grown tree, in a healthy state, may be allowed to produce considerably more than one in a weak condition. 
And if a tree yet in training, that is, one not having filled the space allotted to it, be allowed to ripen all 
the fruit it may set, its extension will be much retarded in consequence. On the More-park apricot, and 
the larger kinds of peaches, in a healthy full-bearing state, a fruit to every foot square of the superficial 
content, or surface of the tree, may be taken as a good medium ; that is to say, a tree covering a space fif- 
teen feet by twelve, may be allowed to ripen about two hundi-ed fruit. The smaller kinds of apricots and 
peaches, and of nectarines in general, may be allowed to produce a third part more, if in a healthy state. 
The larger and better sorts of plums may be thinned in proportion, and according to their sizes ; and may 
be thinned out to from three to six inches apart, if on the shoots of last year, or so as to hang quite free of 
one another, if on spurs. I am aware, that many will think thinning to this extent an extraordinary mea- 
sure ; but I would have such be convinced of the propriety of doing so, by comparison. If they have two 
trees of a kind, both healthy and well loaded, let the one be thinned as above, and allow the other to pro- 
duce as it has been wont ; or thin it even to half the extent. It wiU be found, that the tree fully thinned 
will produce an equal, if not a greater weight of fruit, and these incomparably more beautiful, and higher 
in flavor. Observe, the comparison must be made the same season, else it would not be fair; as the size 
and flavor of the fruit might be very different, according to the goodness or badness of the weather in dif. 
ferent years." 

2572. Apples and pears should be moderately thinned, and good account would be found 
in the practice. This should be done when the fruit is about half grown, or when all ap- 



490 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



prehension of its dropping is over. Nothing tends more to keep fruit-trees in good health 
than regularly to thin their over-abundant crops, and that always before they begin to 
swell ofr' for ripening ; for if this be delayed till they are nearly full grown, the mischief 
is, in a great measure, already done, both to the tree and to the fruit left. (Nicol.) 

Sect. V. Pnini7ig and Training. 

2575. Pruning and training being frequently practised together, and in aid of each 
other, may be advantageously treated of under the same head. 

2374. Pruning ncuili/ planted trees. Trees planted one year from the graft, or two from 
budding, must be pruned as though still in the nursery, in order to furnish them with a 
head. At the end of March, or the beginning of April, as tlie wood-buds begin to shoot, 
one of these courses must be taken ; either shorten the shoots of the preceding summer ; 
or head down tlie tree to two, three, or four eyes, taking all those shoots off. Tlie latter 
course is most commonly expedient on the peach-tree, or nectarine, or apricot. If the 
first shoots happen to be unexceptionably placed for beginning the figure, instead of head- 
ing down the stem, cut these into two or three eyes. On wall-trees and espaliers, rub oft' 
the fore and back wood-buds. 

2575. Seasons for pnming 7iewll/ planted trees. On all trees during the tender stage of 
infancy, spring is the fittest time of pruning, even for wood, and for proceeding in the 
formation of a head, as successive sets of new branches are yearly obtained by shortening 
the last. Something may also be done in simimer to promote this object. If between 
the end of May and the end of June, a pair of shoots have not-started as desired, one oa 
each side from a stem headed down, or from the mother branches shortened ; and in lieu 
of such, one solitary slioot has arisen, or two, both on one side, or not equally proper to be 
retained, the desired end may yet be attained, and a season saved. Pinch down the soli- 
tary shoot two or three eyes : this will force out new slioots in the course of summer. In 
the case of two shoots, one of which is evidently unfit for beginning the head, take off" 
the one rejected without delay, and pinch down the other to two or three eyes. Of two 
shoots on the same side equal in regard to strength and direction, to preserve the lower 
on wall-trees and dwarfs is a rule to which an exception can scarcely be imagined. The 
summer pruning of heads progressively forming, will afterwards fall in with that of esta- 
blished trees. 

2576. Summer jn-uning of trees in bearing. The buds and shoots to be preserved claim 
the first attention ; for if the precious germs of future fruit or wood are carelessly de- 
stroyed, the work of reparation is difficult and tedious : whereas the removal of spray not 
of service as branches or bearers, though necessary to prevent confusion, and to strengthen 
the plant, is to be conducted in subservience to the vital object of fertility. For the pre- 
sent retain all the fruit-buds and fruit-shoots, and as many well placed wood-shoots as 
will afford a selection for winter pruning : but rub off ill placed and superfluous wood- 
buds, as they can be certainly discriminated, or after waiting till appearances ai-e no longer 
doubtful, pinch off the shoots from such wood-buds before they are above three inches 
long. In some kinds, to avoid the destruction of wood-buds, or the germs of fruit-spurs, 
the disbudding ought to be postponed until the wood-shoots can be distinguished from 
spurs, and pinched off without injuring the fruit-buds, llie species which alternately 
produce spurs on the one-year-old shoots, are, the apple, pear, apricot, cherry, and plum. 
The peach and nectarine rarely emit spui-s. While you avoid displacing infant spurs on, 
plants which bear on such, be as careful to discourage the wood-buds and shoots on old 
spurs, for shoots from these are cuuibersome and unprofitable. If aay spray that wants 
displacing has got woody, use the knife, lest the bark of the mother branch be torn. 

2577. T//e mode of beat-in^^, and the duration of the bearers, is the first thing to be ad^'erted to for regu- 
lating the proportion of new wood to be retained. Thus, in the kinds which bear on spurs, a less quantity 
of advancing wood is necessary for future svipply, according to the time that a bearing branch continues 
fruitful ; but as the fruit-shoots on some of these kinds are two, three, four, and even five years in coming 
into bearing, the difficulty of exercising a proper foresight is increased. On the sorts which bear on the 
shoots of last year, although a great reserve, and constant annual succession are wanted, it is more easy to 
suit the provision to the expected vacancy. In both classes, the leader to a stem yet under training as a 
wall-tree is to be carefully preserved : also a surplus number or buds to the right arid left must be suffered 
to sprout, till it can be known whether shoots will spring at the desired places ; and afterwards a selection 
from these for forming the tiee : further, the leading shoot to each side branch should be always left, if 
the limits admit. Well placed shoots, between the origin and the extremity of a lateral, are to be' retained 
in pairs, until a good leader has sprung, and is sufiiciently established to be laid in ; when they are to be 
cut away close, unless a vacancy requires their permanent cultivation. As the new laterals tit to be pre- 
served extend, lay them close to the wall in a straight easy direction, at a convenient average distance j 
nailing them farther onward as the extremities want support. 

2578. Three revisions are included in a summer s jn'uning ; one beginning at the end of 
April, another in July, and the third in September : all which have a preparatory re- 
spect to the winter pruning. Stone-fruit trees, if much wounded in summer, are apt to 
gum ; so that if superfluous slioots have not been removed before they get woody, it is 
best to defer the retrenchment of these to the winter pruning. A weak tree is strength- 
ened by reducing its spray ; let it, however, be low and compact, rather than naked. To 



Book I. 



PRUNING AND TRAINING, 



491 



keep a luxuriant tree full of wood tends to make it less rampant : but a crowded intricacy 
is to be avoided ; for the air stagnates in a thicket of spray and foliage, while the sun 
cannot penetrate it : hence the new shoots grow long-jointed, and do not ripen thoroughly ; 
and the blossom-buds forming on the bearers for the following year will be fewer and 
less plump. All the shoots rising after midsummer are to be displaced, unless a va- 
cuity cannot be furnished without reserving some of them ; or unless the excessive luxu- 
riance of a plant makes it proper to cut it as little as possible, and to let the sap expend 
itself in numerous channels. The spring shoots laid in are generally to be preserved at 
full length, as far as the limits will permit, until after the fall of the leaf ; because to stop 
them in summer would cause them to shoot from alinost every eye, and fill the wall with 
spray ; hence, when a vacancy wants several branches to furnish it, it is a good resource 
to shorten a strong contiguous shoot to three or four eyes. This is the exception to the 
rule. 

2579. Winter pruning of trees in bearing. Now a final selection is to be made from 
the last year's shoots retained as candidates during the summer. On established trees 
which have fully ripened their shoots, and of which the young wood is not succulent, 
and therefore susceptible of injury from frost, there is a wide latitude of time for the 
capital or winter pruning, extending from the fall of the leaf to the time of the sun's 
rising, or just before. To prune in autumn strengthens a plant, and will bring the 
blossom-buds more forward : to cut the wood late in spring, tends to check a plant, and 
is one of the remedies for excessive luxuriance. At the opening of spring, the blossom- 
buds can be certainly distinguished, which is a great guide to the judgment in many 
critical cases ; but on the other hand, if the blossom-buds get much swelled, they are 
liable to be bruised or knocked off, in the various operations of untacking, cutting, and 
re-nailing the branches. Supposing the common course of winter pruning to be divided 
into three periods — autumn, the cold months of winter, and the beginning of spring 
— the plants to be excepted from the first two, are, uniformly the fig, when not in 
a forcing-house, the vine for the most part, because the autumn is seldom hot and fine 
suflSciently long to ripen the year's shoots. Some except the peach and nectarine from 
the middle period, but not from the first ; because they say, that if a severe frost happen 
immediately to follow the pruning, the points of the unripened shoots, and particularly 
the wood-bud next to the cut, are generally so much hurt, that there must be a second 
shortening, farther in than was intended to furnish these shoots with leaders. 

2580. The number of good shoots to be retained is limited by the character of the tree, the size to which 
the fruit grows, and the compass to be given to the head. The branches of a wall-tree may be from five 
to ten inches asunder, according to its strength and the size of the fruit. Of fruit-shoots those are the 
best which are short-jointed, and show a competent number of blossom-buds, and on which the series of 
blossom-buds commences nearest to the origin of the shoots, especially on that class which must have the 
bearers annually shortened. Spongy or disproportionately large and gouty shoots are bad alike for 
wood and fruit ; but good shoots for wood may be above the middle size, if the buds are well defined j 
and the best shoots for fruit may incline to slenderness, if not wiry and sapless ; disproportionably large 
shoots are seldom fruitful. In choosing large supplies for wood, other things being equal, the lowest new 
branches on the tree, and the last year's laterals nearest to the origin of a branch, are to be preferred. 
Begin at the bottom and middle of the tree ; keep these furnished without intricacy ; and the ex- 
tremities will be easily managed. Such shoots as are preserved, whether to come in immediately as 
bearers, or to furnish naked parts in the figure, or future supplies of wood, are to be treated according to 
the mode of bearing. 

Class bearing on distinct branches. On those species which bear at the ends of the branches, or on 
spurs for several years in succession, the leading shoot of a fruit-branch is always to be retained, on a 
double account ; and the fruit-branches are not to be shortened where they do not exceed the assigned 
limits for the tree ; because, if stopped, these would send out strong wood-shoots, where blossom-buds or 
fruit-spurs had otherwise been produced. 

2581. Exceptions to this rule : on young trees tinder training, to be furnished with a head, shorten the 
branches until the designed figure is complete ; again, though a tree be established, occasionally shorten 
a branch, to bring out wood to fill a vacancy. The surplus of the last year's shoots, which would crowd, 
or disfigure, or too much weaken the tree, or occupy it without promise, are to be cut out clean to the 
parent branch ; also cut away any old branches which appear decayed, or of which the spurs begin to get 
barren. Finally, take off' close the naked barren stumps left at previous amputations. 

2582. Class bearing on last yearns wood only. On trees which bear on the last year's wood, there is a 
necessity for annually shortening alternate divisions of the branches, in order to provide a supply of new 
shoots for bearing the next season. We prune the longer branches of a luxuriant plant, and the shorter 
of a weak plant in an inverted proportion. Were the strong tree much cut in, it would produce only the 
more wood ; while the weak tree, unless relieved by short pruning, would not long continue to bear. 
Very strong shoots may be left eighteen inches long, or lose but a fourth of their length ; extremely weak 
shoots retrench to half their length, whether that be five, six, eight or ten inches ; prune shoots of medium 
growth to the extent which best consults the double object of leaving as many blossom-buds as may be on 
the shoot, and of forcing out new wood at a well placed eye. In shortening cut at a leaf or wood-bud 
that is likely to yield a leading shoot. Leaf-buds are distinguished by being oblong, narrow, and de- 
pressed ; blossom-buds by being rounder and bolder. If a leaf-bud at a suitable distance is found between 
twin blossom-buds, so much the better. A leading shoot at the point of a bearing branch draws nourish- 
ment for the intervening fruit. The thinning of rejected shoots, and decayed or worn-out bearers, is 
nearly as for the other class. 

2583. Mixed class. There is a small anomalous class which bears frequently on spurs of several years' 
continuance as well as on annual shoots, but chiefly on the latter. Shoots of this class are to have a mixed 
treatment, preserving the fertile spurs as much as may be. Having finished pruning a wall-tree, lay in the 
branches and shoots directly ; tacking them in a neat manner to the wall or treUis. {Abercrombie.) 

2584. Winter pruning to be revised. Revise the pruning when a sufficient time has 
•lapsed to see it with another eye ; or when the expansion of the blossoms decides the 



492 



- PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part 111. 



competition between probationary fruit-shoots which have been laid in too close. In 
those stone-fruit trees which bear on the last year's shoot, such as the peach and most 
kinds of the apricot, it is particularly necessary to revise the winter pruning at the 
time of blossoming ; because, if on any branch the blossoms are observed to have been 
spoiled either by gum, by blight, or spring frost, that branch is quite useless as a bearer, 
and unless it has made some shoots which may prove bearers the following year, is to 
be entirely cut away : but if the blighted branches have made well placed shoots, shorten 
them to these. {Abererombie.) 

2585. Methods of training. The two principal methods of training wall-trees which 
are followed in this country, Neill observes, are called the fan and tlie horizontal modes. 
In the former, the branches are arranged like the spokes of a fan, or like the hand opened 
and the fingers spread. In the other way, a principal stem is carried upright, and 
branches are led from it horizontally on either side. The Dutch style consists in taking 
a young tree with two branches, and leading these horizontally to the right and left, to 
the extent, perhaps, of twelve feet each way, and in then training the shoots from these 
perfectly upright to the top of the wall. This is now seldom practised here, excepting, 
perhaps, with fig-trees, or white currants. In some places, a few of the wall-trees are 
trained in a stellate form, the stem being led upright for about six feet, and then some 
branches trained downwards, others laterally, and others upwards. When walls exceed 
seven feet in height, the best gardeners seem to concur in giving the preference to the 
fan training, variously modified : in this way they find that a tree can much sooner be 
brought to fill its allotted space, and the loss of a branch can much more easily be sup- 
plied at any time. For lower walls, the horizontal method is preferred ; and the same 
plan is adopted almost imiversally on espalier-rails. Hitt strongly recommends this 
mode for most sorts of wall-trees ; and for pears he adopts what is called the screw 
stem, or training the stem in a serpentine manner, the branches going off horizontally as 
in the ordinary straight stem. (Edin. Encyc. art. Hart.) Nicol agrees with most ex- 
perienced gardeners, in preferring fan training to all other methods ; and it may be ob- 
served, that this form comes nearer to that mode recommended by Knight, as affording 
*' evidence of a more regular distribution of the sap," than any other mode. It agrees 
with the excellent general principles of pruning laid down by Quintiney, who first re- 
duced this branch of gardening to scientific principles — and to the practice of the cele- 
brated growers of peaches at Montreuil, near Paris. 

2566. Knight remarks, that when trees are, by any means, deprived of the motion which their branches 
naturally receive from the winds, the forms in which they are trained operate more powerfully on their 
permanent health and vigor than is generally imagined. " In this sentiment," says Nicol, " I perfectly 
agree ; and I may be allowed to add, that I have been engaged in the training of fruit-trees these twenty- 
five years, and have trained them in a great variety of forms. Some in the Dutch style, running out two 
branches first, perfectly horizontal, right and left, to the extent of three or four years each way, and 
from these training shoots perfectly upright, at nine inches apart, to the top of the wall ; some with 
screwed stems and horizontal branches ; some with upright stems and horizontal branches ; some with 
stems six feet high, with pendent, upright, and horizontal branches, so as to appear like a star ; and others 
in the fan manner ; which last, I confess, 1 prefer to all other methods of training wall-trees. I have 
altered many from the above forms to this both on walls and espaliers." 

2587. Modes of training to check over 
vigorous growth are various ; but all of 
them depend on depressing the shoots 
either throughout their whole length or 
operating on the young shoots only. When 
opportunity admits, or want of space on 
one side of a wall requires, it is found 
conducive to moderation of growth and 
the production of fruit to train the 
branches of trees over the wall and down 
the other side. {fg. 431.) This is found 
to increase the prolificacy of vigorous 
growing kinds, as the pear ; and it also 
succeeds well with the apple, cherry, and vine. 

2588. Modes of training to encourage the grouch of shoots proceed on the opposite prin- 
ciple, and while ovei-luxuriant shoots are depressed, weak ones, which it is deemed proper 
to encourage, are elevated and brought nearer to the perpendicular. 

2589. Pruning and training, as applied to edgings and hedges, is performed by clipping 
or cutting en masse, with the hedge-bill. (1328.) Hedges must be cut in autumn 
when the wood is ripe : sometimes it is done in summer, which is admissible, as far as 
respects the health of the plants, and consequent durability of the hedge when the lower 
ends of the shoots are nearly ripe. If this is not the case, the operation is in- 
jurious. The judicious gardener will weigh the circumstances of the case, and decide 
accordingly. 



431 




Book I. 



WATERING. 



493 



Sect. VI. Weeding, Stirring the Soil, Protecting, Supporting, and Shading. 

2590. Eradication of loeeds. The means of removal, are hoeing and weeding ; and 
of destruction, exposing them, when hoed or pulled up, to the sun and air ; or, what is 
in all cases better, taking them at once to the dunghill or compost-yard, to be destroyed 
by fermentation. These operations require to be performed almost every month in the 
year ; but more especially in the beginning of summer, when the earth is teeming with 
vegetable life. Weeding in time, Marshall observes, is a material thing in culture, and 
the hand is generally more certain than the hoe. 

2591. Stirring the ground among cro])s is nearly as essential as weeding, and is in some 
degree performed by the operation of hoeing. But the most effectual mode of stirring, 
and that now adopted by the best gardeners, is by the two-pronged fork or two- 
pronged hoe. {Jigs. 86. 97.) "Every crop, whether planted in rows, or sown broad- 
cast, ought to be subjected to this operation once or oftener in the course of its progress 
to maturity. Small crops, where the distances between the plants are not wide, ought 
to be stirred by a fork of two prongs, or even one prong. A narrow hoe is the 
usual instrument, but this always tends to harden the ground below, and form a sort of 
sole, which in many soils is impervious to air or rain. Besides, the operator is generally 
obliged to tread on and harden the ground stirred. " Breaking the surface," Marshall 
remarks, " keeps the soil in health ; for when it lies in a hard or bound state, enriching 
shov/ers run off, and the salubrious air and solar heat cannot enter. Ground," he adds, 
" should be frequently stirred and raked between crops, and about the borders, to give 
all a fresh appearance. There is a pleasantness to the eye in new-broken earth, which 
gives an air of culture, and is always agreeable." This last observation is particularly 
meant to apply in autumn, that the garden may not become dreary too soon, and so bring 
on winter before its time. 

2592. Earthing up ought to go hand in hand with stirring in many cases ; but rarely 
in the case of those plants which form their bulbs above the surface, as turnips and 
onions. This operation supports the stems of some crops, as the bean, cabbage, &c. 
and encourages the fertility or improves the quality of others, as the potatoe, leek, celery, 
&c. In winter also it protects them from the frost, and may then be applied to the 
turnip as no longer in a state of growth. 

2593. Protecting, supporting, and shading. These operations are too little attended to, 
or attempted in a slovenly manner, by many gardeners. The grand subjects of pro- 
tection are fruit-trees; and we have already (2206, &c.) given an enumeration of the 
various m.odes to which recourse is had.* Tiie simplest, and perhaps the best protection 
for general purposes, is that of throwing a net, either an old fishing-net or one formed 
on purpose of woollen yarn, over the whole tree, if a standard, or placing it against it, 
if trained to a wall, before it begins to blossom, and letting it remain there till the fruit 
is set. Marshall recommends this mode, justly observing, that after much expense and 
trouble to preserve blossoms from inclement weather, the business is often done to no 
purpose, or a bad one. Nicol's opinion is not materially different. Single plants, as 
the raspberry, are to be supported by sticks or rods, and rows of climbers, by rods, spray, 
or branches, as peas, kidneybeans, &c. 

2594. Shading is but little attended to, excepting in the case of transplantation ; but 
it is of great importance in the fruiting season to certain plants which naturally grow 
in shady situations, as the strawberry and raspberry ; and properly applied and accom- 
panied with watering, tends to swell these fruits and others, as the gooseberry, and heads 
and roots of certain vegetables in hot weather, as the cauliflower, turnip, onion, radish ; 
and the whole vegetable, as in the case of lettuce and other salads. The advantages of 
shading small fruits have been pointed out by Haynes (On the Culture of the Straivberry, 
Baspberry, and Goctfeberry, 8vo. 1812.), and are very strikingly displayed -in the gardening 
of the south of France and Italy. 

Sect. VII. Watering. 

2595. Watering, Marshall observes, " is a thing of some importance in cultivation, 
though not so much as many make it. It is a moot point, whether more harm than good, 
is not on the whole done by it. In a large garden it is a Herculean labor to v/ater 
every thing, and so the temptation generally prevails, either wholly to neglect it, or to 
do it irregularly or defectively. To water nothing is too much on the dry side ; but 
watering too much spoils the flavor, and renders esculents less wholesome." It may be 
observed, that the practice of the market-gardeners near London and Paris, and many 
private gardeners who practise in the southern counties, is somewhat at variance with the 
opinion of this experienced and very judicious author. The reason may probably be, 
tliat the region of his experience, Northamptonshire, is high and moist. He adds, 
liowever, that " strawberries and cauliflowers should generally be watered in a dry sea- 
son ; strawberries rnbre particularly when in bloom, in order to set the fruit ; and the 



494 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



cauliflowers when they show fruit, in order to swell the head : in a light soil this ought 
unremittingly to be done. In very dry weather seedlings, asparagus, early turnips, 
carrots, radishes, and small salads, will need an evening watering." He adds, " Water 
to the bottom and extent of the roots, as much as may be. The wetting only the surface 
of the ground is of little use, and of some certain harm, as it binds and cracks the earth, 
and so excludes the benefit of showers, dews, air, and sun, from entering the soil, and 
benefiting the roots as they otherwise would do. By wetting the surface of the ground, 
however, in a summer's evening, as it makes a cool atmosphere, a dew is formed, which 
pervades the leaves, and helps to fill their exhausted vessels." He recommends " water- 
ing the roots of wall-trees in dry weather effectually; watering wall-trees with an 
engine in the evening refreshes them much, and helps to rid the trees and wall of insects 
and filth. Late in the summer, whdn the nights begin to get cold, it is time to leave off 
all watering, except things in pots and frames, which should have it then only in the 
morning. As watering is apt to make ground hidebound and unsightly, let the 
surface be occasionally stirred and raked, which will make future waterings enter the 
ground better : when the ground is hard on the top, the water runs away from its proper 
place, and half the labor is lost. Many things are impatient of being kept wet about the 
stalks, and therefore watering such plants should be generally at a little distance." 

2596. Watering over the leaves of luall-trees qnd espaliers is essentially necessary, because 
these trees by their position are deprived in a great degree of the natural showers which 
would fall on them, if their branches were freely diverged in the open garden. 

Ahercromhie, Forsyth, and Nicol strongly recommend watering the leaves of wall fruit-trees in dry 
weather every other day in the evening. Forsyth recommends watering infected trees with clear lime- 
water over the leaves, which he says soon destroys the red spider. Nicol uses water only j leaves oft' when 
the fruit approaches to maturity ; and after it is gathered, recommences. 

2597. Substittites for ivatering can only be found in contrivances to lessen evaporation 
from the soil. Mulching is much used for this purpose in all the departments of the 
gardens of Italy and Spain. Even the Paris nurserj'men cover the spaces between their 
lines of young trees with litter or leaves, as do the orange propagators at Nervi and the 
market-gardeners at Rome and Naples. In this countiy similar practices are sometimes 
tried. Maher, at Arundel Castle, during one very hot and dry summer, " sowed his seeds 
in drills, and covered the intervals between the drills with tiles, letting the edges of the 
tiles approach within an inch of the drills, and pressing them close into the earth. The 
tiles effectually preserved the roots from the scorching rays of the sun, and by preventing 
the evaporation of the moisture under them, afforded support as well as protection." 
(Hort. Trans, vol. iv. p. 51.) 

Sect. VIII. Vermin, Insects, Diseases, and Accidents. 

2598. Such vermin as moles, mice, and birds are to be caught by some of the traps or 
snares before described. (1473. to 1486.) After all the various devices that have been 
suggested and practised for keeping under the grub, caterpillar, and snail, the most 
certain is gathering them by hand at their first appearance every season. The grub, 
wire- worm, and maggot must be sought for by removing the earth from the roots of 
the plants where it is in action. The caterpillar gathered from the leaves beginning 
early in the season. The snail picked from the leaves or stalks of plants ; or, in the case 
of new-sown crops, by strewing the ground with cabbage-leaves, or decaying leaves or 
haulm of any sort, (the proces.s of decay inducing a degree "of sweetness in the vegetable,) 
the snails will attach themselves to their under surface in the night, and may be picked 
off in the morning. Where the earth-worm is too abundant, they may be gathered in 
digging ; or their casts removed, and the ground watered with clear lime-water. Ear- 
wigs, wood-lice, and similar insects, may be caught in hollow stalks of vegetables, or in 
the beetle-trap. Wasps are best destroyed by suffocating them in their nests ; when this 
cannot be done, recourse must be had to bottles of honied water, or other common modes. 
Watering is an effectual mode of destroying the red spider. Fumigation is generally 
resorted to in the case of the aphis and thrips ; but in the open garden, watering and 
rubbing, or brushing them off, will effect their destruction. 

2599. Diseases in the vegetable kingdom are rather to be prevented than cured. A good 
soil on a diy sub-soil is the grand foundation of health, both in trees and herbaceous plants ; 
and, on the supposition of proper culture, the judicious use of the knife to thin out 
superfluous, diseased, or injured branches, shoots, or leaves, and of the scraper, to re- 
move mosses and rough bark already cracked and separating, are all that can be done to 
be depended on. Various unctions, oils, washes, compositions, and plasters, have been 
tried and recommended for curing the canker, mildew, blight, blotches, barrenness, gum, 
&c. ; but few or none of them can be depended on. For the mildew, strewing with pow- 
dered sulphur is considered a specific; for the canker, &c., the most effectual mode of 
procedure is to correct the faults of the sub-soil and soil, renewing the latter entirely, if 
necessary j to cut out as far as practicable the diseased or vrounded part ; and in the case 



Book I. GATHERING AND PRESERVING VEGETABLES, &c. 495 



of barrenness, to cut in or sliorten even the healthy wood. Wherever amputation takes 
place, the wound will heal, if the air is excluded by prepared clay or any adhesive mix- 
ture, provided always, that the principle of life exists in tolerable vigor in the tree. 
Every thing, indeed, in plants as in animals, depends on the vis medicatrix: ncUura:. 

Sect. IX. Gathenng and Preserving Vegetables and Fruits, and sending them to a 

Distance. 

2600. Gathering should commence as early and continue as late as possible with all 
kitchen-crops. At the same time, no vegetable ought to be gathered till it has attained the 
requisite degree of maturity, nor offered for use when it has begun to decay. What this 
degree is, often depends on the particular tastes of families, or their domestics : thus 
cabbages are most esteemed in Edinburgh when fully headed and blanched ; while, in 
London, they are preferred open and green, &c. Equal differences in taste as to peas, 
celery, lettuce, and indeed most other kitchen-crops, might be noticed. The operations 
of gathering kitchen-crops .are either cutting off" the part desired, breaking or pulling it 
off", as in the case of peas, beans, &c. or pulling or rooting up, as in the case of onions, 
turnips, potatoes, &c. Each of these operations ought to be performed with due regard, 
to the plant, where that -is to remain, as in the case of the peaj and to the adjoining 
plants of the same sort, as in the case of pulling turnips, onions, &c. As soon as any 
plant has furnished its crops or produce, the root and other remains ought to be immedi- 
ately removed to the dung or compost heap. (See 1977.) 

2601. Gathering fruits. This operation in the case of the small fruits, as the goose- 
berry, strawberry, &c. is generally performed by the under-gardeners ; but wall and 
espalier fruit ought to be gathered by the head gardener. Where the- utmost delicacy is 
desired, the berry-gatherer (Jig. 149.) ought to be adopted for the small fruits, and also for 
plums, apples, and other fruits on espaliers. For the finer fruits, as the peach, nectarine, 
&c. the peach-gatherer (Jig. 148.) lined with velvet, ought always to be adopted. 

2602. Preserving esculents. The ice-house, as we have repeatedly observed, is found 
particularly useful for preserving esculent roots, and likewise celery during winter. 
" Where parsneps and beet-roots are left in the ground over winter," Neill observes, ">they 
must be lifted at the approach of spring, as they become tough and woody wheneVer there 
is a tendency to form a flower-stalk. These roots may, therefore, at this season, be placed 
in the ice-house, and preserved, there for a considerable time in excellent order. In the 
summer season, during hot weather, various kinds of vegetables, as peas, kidneybeans, 
cucumbers, &c. can be kept fresh in it for several days ; fruits gathered in the morning, 
which is the most proper time, may be here kept cool, and with all their freshness and 
flavor, until required for the dessert in the afternoon." {Supp. to Encyc. Brit. art. Hort.) 

2603. Packing fruit and vegetables to be sent to a distance frequently forms a part of the 
gardener's duty. Fruits of the most delicate sorts, it is well known, are sent from Spain 
and Italy to England, packed in jars with sawdust from woods not resinous or otherwise 
ill tasted. One large bunch of grapes is suspended from a twig or pin laid across the 
mouth of the jar, so as it may not touch either the bottom or sides ; sawdust or bran is 
then strewed in, and when full, the jar is w^ll shaken to cause it to settle : more is then 
added, till it is quite full, when the supporting twig is taken away, and the earthen 
cover of the jar closely fitted and sealed, generally with fine stucco. In this way grapes 
may be sent from the most remote parts of Scotland or Ireland to the metropolis. When 
the distance is less, they may be sent enveloped in fine paper, and packed in moss. For 
extraordinary lai-ge bunches of grapes, the mode adopted by the Jewish spies (Numbers 
xiii.), and afterwards by Speechly, may be followed ; that of carrying it suspended on a 
pole or staff" resting on men's sholders. The simplest mode for short distances is to wrap 
each bunch in fine soft paper, and lay them on a bed of moss in a broad flat basket with 
a proper cover. 

2604. The more common fruits, cherries, and plums may be packed in thin layers, with paper and moss 
between each. Peaches, apricots, and the liner plums, may each be wrapped separately in vine or other 
leaves, or fine paper, and packed in abundance of cotton, flax, fine moss, or dried short grass. Moss, it 
wil be recollected, is apt to communicate its flavor to fine fruits, and so is short gras.s, if not thoroughly 
dried and sweetened. Cotton best preserves the bloom on peaches and plums. 

2605. Common culinary vegetables are seldom sent to a great distance. The great art is to preserve thera 
fresh, for which purpose they ought to be laid loose in a close box, in the manner of botanic specimens; 
or closely packed in hampers, so as to exclude the air. The brassica and lettuce tribes, if pulled up by the 
roots, and as it were replanted in a box of sand with a wicker-work cover, may be sent a journey of two 
or three weeks without injury, as practised in Russia. Celery, turnips, &c. may be packed in sand ; 
potatoes and other roots, loose. Legumes and other summer crops generally in moss. 

Sect. X. Miscellaneous Operations of Culture and Management. 
2606. 'The miscellaneous operations and duties of the gardener are numerous, and in 
the foregoing general view of kitchen -garden culture many particulars are necessarily 
omitted. Among these may be mentioned propagation of various kinds for the renewal 
of crops, mulching perennials, blanching leaves and stalks, rolling walks, preparing 



496 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



composts, regrafting trees to introduce better sorts, or a variety of sorts on one tree, per- 
forming operations on their roots or stems to render them more fruitful, &c. Tliese and 
other practices described in Part II. Book IV. of this work must be applied according 
to the judgment of the practitioner. 

2607. A garden may be managed so as to produce good crops, and yet not so as to be 
agreeable to the eye. In general it may be observed, that the English gardeners excel in 
the former, and the Scotch in the latter part of practice. 'The Dutch and Flemish seem, 
in some degree to combine both, and this ought to be attempted, and persevered in till 
perfection is attained, by every British gardener, 

2608. The first requisite to good manageynent is a proper establishment qf laborers, and resources, as to 
manure, seeds, repairs, &c. adequate to the extent and character of the garden. The next thing neces- 
sary is the entire independence of the gardener, as far as respects his province. The constant irksome 
interference of masters and mistresses, stewards, or others, is justly complained of by every gardener who 
understands his business. Where the proprietor is as it were head gardener, in that case he ought to 
make use of mere workmen, or of such gardeners as are not over-ambitious in their profession. In 
general it may be observed, that gardens so managed are ill managed, and often not well cultivated. 

2609. The next requisite is a taste for order and neatness. This taste is generally acquired in youth 
from the instruction or imitation of parents or masters ; but it may be greatly increased in grown-up 
persons, when they perceive its advantages, and in head gardeners, when a demand for it is created by 
their employers. 

2610. Industry and steadiness are perhaps in no kind of life more necesssary than in that of a gardener. 
Whole crops may be easily ruined by a day's neglect ; and not only whole crops, as in the case of ne- 
glecting cucumber-frames, for example, but the whole produce of a year, or of several years, as in the case 
of neglecting a peach-house for one hot day. 

2611. Unremitting attention and application. Unless a man is endowed with, and has well cultivated 
the faculty of attention, he can never excel in any thing. Without an ever-active attention, a gardener, 
will not see what is out of order, or unsightly in his garden, and of course will not think of correcting it. 
Many people are so deficient in this respect, that their knowledge is entirely confined to the few objects 
with which their mode of procuring ^living obliges them to be conversant. Something more than this 
is wanting in a gardener who would be master of his business ; and it must be confessed, to the honor of 
many gardeners, that they excel in point of general observation and knowledge. 

2612. The management of a garden, ^larshaW ohserve?i, consists in attention and application; the first 
should be of that wary and provident kind, as not only to do well in the present, but for the future ; and the 
application should be of so diligent a nature, as " Never to defer that till to-morrow which may be done 
to-day." Procrastination is of serious consequence in gardening; and neglect of times and seasons is 
fruitful of disappointment and complaint. It will often happen, indeed, that a gardener cannot do what 
lie would; but if he does not do what he can, he will be most justly blaraed, and perhaps censured_by 
none more than himself. {Introd, to Gar. p. 59.) 



Chap. V. 

Of the general Management of Orchards. 

2613. A private orchard is, sometimes, treated entirely as a kitchen-garden, in 
which case the foregoing chapter contains the general outline of management. Vege- 
tables and small fruits, however, are seldom well flavored when gi-own under the shade 
and drip of trees, and, therefore, orchards are commonly either but slightly cropped, or 
laid down in pasture, after the trees are a few years established. 

Sect. I. General Culture. 

2614. Stinn7ig the soil. " Many orchards would bear much better," Marshall observes, 
" if the ground were, before winter, dug over every second or tliird year, and dressed, 
by digging in some rotten dung, or sprinkling over tlie whole soot and pigeons' dung, 
or that of any other poultry ; this will wash in by rains and snows, and do much good. 
Or, if an orchard were ploughed, or rough dug, every^ year, immediately after the fall of 
the leaf, without manuring, it would be very beneficial." 

2615. The taking qf light, green a-ops near and aino^ig fruit-trees, according to Aber- 
crombie, tends to keep the ground more effectually stirred and recruited, than if 
periodical diggings or hoeings were prescribed merely for the sake of the trees, because 
labor, for which the recompense is not direct, is constantly liable to be neglected. 
Nevertheless circumspection must be exercised, neither to dig too near, nor too deep 
among garden-trees, lest the roots should be loosened or injured. Digging the ground, 
Forsyth observes, provided it be not done so deep as to hurt the roots, by admitting the 
sun and rain to meliorate the ground, will keep the trees in a healthy flourishing state. 
When the surface of the ground is wet, and has a little descent, it may be formed into a 
kind of ridges, by making a furrow, from one to two feet deep, between every two rows, 
sloping the ground regularly on each side, from a reasonable distance to the bottom of the 
fuiTOw. These hollows will carry off the water, and render the surface dry and healthy. 
If pasture, the turf may be first pared off, and afterwards relaid when the furrow is 
made. {Forsyth on Fr. Trees, p. 305.) 

Nicol directs the whole ground of an orchard to be dug in the autumn, and laid up in a rough state for 
the winter, giving it as much surface as possible, in order that the weather may fully act upon and meliorate 
the soil ; thus fallowing it as far as the case will admit. Observe to dig carefully near tp the trees, and so 
as not to hurt their roots and fibres. If the soil be shallow, and if these lie near the surface, it would be 
advisable to dig with a fork instead of the spade. {Kal. p. 262.) 



Book I. 



PRUNING ORCHARD-TREES. 



497 



2616. Manuring. The natural defects of the soil, the habits of fruit-trees, and the 
preference of a species for a particular soil or manure, are to be considered. The hotter 
dungs are not liked by fruit-trees ; and those of the horse and the sheep, if not wanted 
where they would be beneficial alone, should be mixed with twice as much of the cooler 
dungs, and three times as much fresh earth or road-drift ; or with twice the bulk of 
earthy matter, if the cooler dungs are not to be obtained. The residuum of neats' dung, 
properly reduced by keeping, is a good simple manure for most fruit-trees, and excellent 
in a compost ; but where the soil is naturally cold, a little ashes of coals, wood, straw, or 
burnt turf, or a minute proportion of soot, ought to be incorporated with it. Hog-dung 
is accounted to have a peculiar virtue in invigorating weak trees. Rotted turf, or any 
vegetable refuse, is a general manure, excellent for all soils not already too rich. One 
of the best correctives of too rich a soil is drift sand. For an exhausted soil, where a 
fruit-tree that has been an old profitable occupant is wished to be continued, a dressing 
of animal matter is a powerful restorative ; such as hog's or bullock's blood, offal from 
the slaughter-house, refuse of skins and leather, decomposed can-ion t also urine diluted 
with water. The drainings of dung laid on as mulch are highly serviceable. In a soil 
which does not effervesce with acids, a little lime, dug in a spit deep, is beneficial to 
fruit-trees. (Abercrombie.) 

Forsyth says, " Orchards ought to be dunged once in two or three years." Marshall allows of some rotten 
dung being dug in, or of sprinkling the whole over with soot and pigeon' s dung ; he adds, " It is not ad- 
visable to give trees much dung ; a little lime, only surface-dug, is good." 

2617. Cropping. Marshall, Abercrombie, and Forsyth allow of moderate cropping 
among standard fruit-trees ; but the following observations of Nicol are the most definite 
on the subject : — 

It is proper to crop the ground among new-planted orchard-trees for a. fevr years, in order to defray the 
expense of hoeing and cultivating it ; which should be done until the temporary plants are removed, and 
the whole be sown down in grass. But it is by no means advisable to carry the system of cropping with 
vegetables to such an excess as is frequently done. If the bare expense of cultivating the ground, and 
the rent, be paid by such cropping, it should be considered enough. As the trees begin to produce fruit, 
begin also to relinquish cropping. "When by their productions they defray all expenses, crop no longer. 
I consider these as being wholesome rules, both for the trees and their owners. 

Rule. " Crop to within two feet of the trees the first year ; a yard the second ; four feet the third ; and 
so on until finally relinquished ; which of course would be against the eighth year, provided the trees 
were planted at thirty or forty feet apart with early bearing sorts between. By this time, if the kinds 
have been well chosen, the temporary trees will be in full bearing, and will forthwith defray every neces- 
sary expense while they remain, or until the principal trees come into a bearing state, and it become 
necessary to remove them ; after which, the ground should be sown down in grass. But until then, the 
ground should be properly cultivated, though not cropped close to the trees ; and a moderate quantity of 
manure should be digged in every second or third season." {Kal. 262.) 

Sect. II. Pruning Orchard-trees. 

2618. In pruning a neivly planted orchard or standard tree, the first object is the form- 
ation of a head. According to Abercrombie, this ought in most kinds to be " circular, 
compact, and proportioned to the strength of the stem, with the branches well distributed, 
and sufficiently open in the centre to admit the free circulation of air." 

In the first spring " after a young standard has been planted, examine the primary branches, to see 
whether they will be sufficient, with the secondary laterals to be forced out by shortening, to form a good 
head. The primary branches should be so placed as to balance each other, and be equally distributed 
round the tree. Thus, three in a triangle ; four at right angles ; five, six, and-even seven, shooting at 
pretty equal distances, might be retained : but it is seldom that more than four well placed offer, which 
is a good number. These first branches, if there be no secondary laterals, or none well placed, should be 
shortened down to two or four eyes each ; or reduce a strong shoot to one third of its length, and a 
weak shoot to two thirds. The second spring, again revise the branches and secondary shoots, and re- 
serve only so many as are vigorous and well distributed. Afterwards leave the head to form of itself, 
cutting out superfluous and ill placed shoots, and shortening for the production of new laterals only to fill 
a vacancy. Luxuriant limbs, which are likely to be disproportionally large, should be rejected as weakly 
shoots. In the third or fourth year after planting a maiden tree, the foundation of a good head having 
been obtained by judicious shortening, and the plant sufficiently strengthened, it will become proper to 
let the tree proceed to bearing with no greater check from the knife than is unavoidable. To this end, 
the lower branches should not be shortened at all, and the upright leaders very little. But wliere two 
shoots cross, let the worst be cut out. Moderate-sized and slender shoots are more fruitful than strong 
luxuriant wood." 

2619. The olject of pruning j/oung standard-trees, Nicol observes, " is to form a proper 
head. Generally speaking, the shoots may be pruned in proportion to their lengths, 
cutting clean away such as cross one another, and fanning the tree out towards the ex- 
tremities on all sides ; thereby keeping it equally poised, and fit to resist the effects of 
high winds. When it is wished to throw a young tree into a bearing state, which 
should not be thought of, however, sooner than the third or fourth year after planting, 
the leading branches should be very little shortened, and the lower or side branches not 
at all ; nor should the knife be used, unless to cut out such shoots as cross one another, 
as above liinted." 

2620. Pruning bearing trees. " After an orchard-tree is come into bearing," 
Abercrombie observes, " continue at the time of winter pruning, either- every year, or 
every two, three, or four years, as an occasion is perceived, to cut out unproductive 

K k 



498 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



wood, crowded spray, and decayed parts. Also reduce long and outrunning ramblers, 
and low stragglers, cutting them to some good lateral that grows within limits. Where 
fruit-spurs are too numerous, then cut the strongest and most unsightly. Also keep the 
tree pretty open in the middle. If it be necessary to take off large branches from aged 
trees, use a chisel or saw, and afterwards smooth the wound with a paring-knife. In 
case old wood is to be cut down to young shoots springing below, to make the separation 
in summer will be of more advantage to those young shoots, though it is not a common 
practice, on account of the liability of many stone-fruit bearers to exude gum, when a 
large branch is lopped in the growing season. Observe to keep the stem clear from all 
lateral shoots, and eradicate all suckers from the root." 

2621. In pruning aged trees, that have run into a confusion of shoots and branches^ 
and whose spurs have become clustered and crowded, the saw and the knife may be ex- 
ercised with freedom ; observing to cut clean away all useless spray, rotten stumps, and 
the like excrescences. Thin out the spurs to a moderate consistency, so as to let the air 
circulate freely among the leaves and fruit in the summer season, and to admit the rays 
of the sun, so as to give the fruit color and flavor. 

Marshall strongly recommends " thinning the branches of orchard-trees for the same objects," adding, 
" that it is in general much neglected." He recommends "a little pruning of standards every year; 
and a general one (rather free) every three or four years, to cut out what is decayed, and some of the 
older wood, where a successional supply of young may be obtained to succeed, as the best way to keep 
the trees in vigor, and have the best of fruit ; for that which grows on old wood gets small and austere." 
The same author judiciously remarks, that trees with heavy fruit, as the apple and pear, should have, if 
possible, their branches rather upright ; but that light-fruited trees, such as the cherry, will admit of 
drooping branches. 

2622. The season for jmming orchardii is generally winter or early in spring — not 
later than February, according to Abercrombie and Nicol. Quintiney says, " A weak 
tree ought to be pruned directly at the fall of the leaf." And Abercrombie, " To prune 
in autumn strengthens a plant, and will bring the blossom-buds more forward ; to cut 
the wood late in spring tends to check a plant, and is one of the remedies for excessive 
luxuriance." 

2623. Treatment of deforvied or diseased trees. Where a tree is stinted, or the head ill shaped, from 
being originally badly pruned, or ban-en from having overborne itself, or from constitutional -weakness, 
the most expeditious remedy is to head down the plant within three, four, or five eyes (or inches, if an 
old tree) of the top of the stem, in order to furnish it with a new head. The recovery of a languishing 
tree, if not too old, will be further promoted by taking it up at the same time, and pruning the roots ; for 
as, on the one hand, the depriving too luxuriant a tree of part even of its sound healthy roots will moderate 
its vigor ; so, on the other, to relieve a stinted or sickly tree of cankered or decayed roots, to prune the 
extremities of sound roots, and especially to shorten the dangling tap-roots of a plant, affected by a bad 
sub-soil, is in connection with heading down or very short pruning, and the renovation of the soil, and 
draining, if necessary, of the sub-soil, the most availing remedy that can be tried. (Abercrombie.) 

2624. A tree often becomes stinted from an accumulation of moss, which affects the 
functions of the bark, and renders the tree imfruitful. This evil is to be removed by 
scraping the stem and branches of old trees with the scraper ; and on young trees a hard 
brush will effect the purpose. Abercrombie and Nicol agree in recommending the 
finishing of this operation by washing with soap-suds, or a medicated wash of some of 
the different sorts for destroying the eggs of insects. In our opinion lime-water, or even 
water alone, is better than any of these applications. 

2625. Wlierever the bark is decayed or cracked, Abercrombie and Forsyth direct its removal. 
Lyon, of Edinburgh, has lately carried this practice to so great a length as even to 
recommend the removal of a part of the bark on young trees. Practical men, in general, 
however, confine the operation to the cracked bark which nature seems to attempt throw- 
ing off ; and the effect, in rendering the trees more fruitful and luxuriant, is acknow- 
ledged by Neill in his Account of Scottish Gardening and Orchards, and by different 
writers in the London and Edinburgh Horticultural Transactions. 

2626. The other diseases to which orchard-trees are subject, are chiefly the canker, gum^ 
mildew, and blight, which, as we have already observed, are rather to be prevented by 
such culture as will induce a healthy state, than to be remedied by topical applications. 
Too much lime, Sir H. Davy thinks, may bring on the canker, and if so, the replacing 
a part of such soil with alluvial or vegetable earth, would be of service. The gum, it is 
said, may be constitutional, arising from offensive matter in the soil ; or local, arising 
from external injury. In the former case, improve the soil ; in the latter, apply the 
knife. The mildew, it is observed by Knight and by Abercrombie, " may be easily 
subdued at its first appearance, by scattering flour of sulphur upon the infected parts." 
As this disease is now generally considered the growth of parasitical fungi, the above 
reraedy is likely to succeed. For the blight and caterpillars, Forsyth recommends burn- 
ing of rotten wood, weeds, potatoe haulm, wet straw, &c. on the windward side of the 
trees when they are in blossom. He also recommends washing the stems and branches 
of all orchard-trees with a mixture of " fresh cow-dung with urine and soap-suds, as a 
white- washer would wash the ceiling or walls of a room." The promised advantages 
are, destruction of insects, and fine bark ;" he adds, " when you see it necessary take 
all the outer bark off. " 



Book I. GATHERING AND STOKING ORCHARD-FRUITS. 499 



Sect. III. Of gatheiing and storing Orchard-fruits. 

2627. The gathering of orchard-fruits, and especially apples, from standards, should 
be performed in such a manner as not to damage the branches, or break off the spurs. 
Too frequently the fruit is allowed to drop, or they are beat and bruised by shaking the 
tree, and using long poles, &c. Nicol directs that " they should never be allowed to 
drop of themselves, nor should they be shaken down, but should be pulled by the 
hand or apple-gatherer. (1347.) This maybe thought too troublesome a method ; but 
every body knows that bruised fruit will not keep, nor will it bring a full price. The 
expense of gathering, therefore, may be more than defrayed, if carefully done, by saving 
the fruit from blemish." {Kul. 257.) 

Forsyth says, " As apples shaken or beaten down with a pole never keep in winter, they ought all to l>e 
hand-picked by a person standing on steps made on purpose. The step-ladder should be light, in two 
pieces, to disengage the back at pleasure, by drawing the bolt ; and they should have a broad stop at top 
for a man to stand on, and to place a basket by his feet. In the larger baskets or hampers, in which the 
fruit is to be placed to be wheeled away, lay some short grass mowings, perfectly dry (which ought to be 
provided in summer, and kept dry), to prevent the fruit from being bruised." 

2628. In respect to the time of gathering, Nicol recommends " that pears and apples 
should not be pulled till their seeds be of a dark brown, or blackish color." The 
criterion of ripeness, adopted by Forsyth, is their beginning to fall from the tree. He 
says, *' Observe attentively when the apples and pears are ripe ; and do not pick them 
always at the same regular time of the year, as is the practice with many. A dry season 
will forward the ripening of fruit, and a wet one retard it ; so that tliere will sometimes 
be a month or five weeks difference in the proper time of gathering. The method that I 
have practised is, to observe when the fruit begins to fall (I do not mean wliat we call 
windfalls, or the falling of such as are infested with the caterpillar, &c., but sound 
fruit) ; I then put my hand under it ; and if it comes off without any force being used, I 
take it for granted that the fruit is perfectly ripe ; unless the tree be sickly, which is 
easily known by the leaves or fruit being shrivelled. If the foregoing observations are 
attended to, the fruit will keep well, and be plump ; and not shrivelled, as is the case 
with all fruit that is gathered before it is ripe." 

Marshall says, " Gather pears of the summer sorts, rather before they are ripe, as when thoroughly so 
they eat mealy, if kept above a day or two ; even when gathered as they ought to be, in a week 6t less 
they will begin to go at the core. They should not, however, be gathered while they require much force 
to pull them off. Autumn pears must also not be full ripe at the time of gathering, though they will keep 
longer than those of the summer. Winter pears, on the contrary, should hang as long on the trees as 
they may, so as to escape frost, which would make them flat in flavor, and not keep well. Generally they 
may hang to the middle of October on full standards, a week longer on dwarfs, and to the end of the 
month on walls ; but yet not after they are ripe. The art of gathering is to give them a lift, so as tapress 
away the stalk, and if ripe they readily part from the tree. Those that will not come off easy, should hang 
a little longer ; for when they come hardly off, they will not be so fit to store, and the violence done at the 
footstalk may injure the bud there formed for the next year's fruit. Let pears be quite dry when pulled, 
and in handling avoid pinching the fruit, or in any way bruising it, as those which are hurt not only decay 
themselves, but presently spread infection to those near them : when suspected to be bruised, let them 
be carefully kept from others, and used first : as gathered lay them gently in shallow baskets." 
— " The jargonelle pear," Forsyth observes, " keeps best on the tree, as if gathered, it rots almost 
immediately." 

2629. With regard to keeping of orchard-fruits, the old practice, and that recommended 
by Marshall and Forsyth, commences with sweating. Nicol, and most modern 
gardeners, omit this process, and spread the fruit thinly on shelves, or the floor of the 
fruit-room. As to the keeping of apples, Marshall observes, " those which continue 
long for use should be suffered to hang late, even to November, if the frost will permit, 
for they must be well ripened, or they will shrink. Lay them in heaps till they have 
sweated a few days, when they must be wiped dry. Let them then lie singly, or at least 
thinly, for about a fortnight, and be again wiped, and immediately packed ir^ boxes and 
hampers, lined with double or treble sheets of paper. Place them gently in, and cover 
them close, so as to keep air oxit as much as possible. Preserve them from frost through 
the winter. Never use hay for the purpose. Some of the choicest table sorts of apples 
may be treated as directed for the best pears." 

2630. Sweating and storing xvinter pears. Winter pears, according to Marshall, 
" should be laid in a dry airy room, at first thinly for a few days, and then put them in 
heaps to sweat ; in order to which, a blanket thrown over them will help. The ferment- 
ation must be watched, and when it seems to have passed the height of sweating, wipe 
the fruit quite dry gently with fine flannel, or clean soft linen, and store them carefully. 
The staying is thus : those to be used first, lay by singly on shelves, or on the floor, ia a 
dry southern room, on clean dry moss, or sweet dry straw, so as not to touch one another. 
Some, or all the rest, having first lain a fortnight singly, and then nicely culled, are to 
be spread on shelves, or on a dry floor. But the most superior way is, to pack in large 
earthen, or China or stone jars, with very dry long moss at the bottom, sides, and also 
between them, if it might be. Press a good coat of moss on the top, and then stop the 
mouth close with cork, or otherwise, which should be rosined round with about a 

K k 2 



500 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



twentieth part of bees' wax in it. As the object is effectually to keep out air (the cause 
of putrefaction), the jars, if earthen, may be set on diy sand, which put also between, 
round, and over them, to a foot thick on the top. In all close storing, observe, there 
should be no doubt of the soundness of the fruit. Guard, in time, from frost those that 
lie open. Jars of fruit must be soon used after unsealing." 

2631. Sweating and storing apples and pears as practised by Forsyth. " When the 
fruit is carried to the fruit-room, lay some of the dry short grass on the floor, in the area 
of the room ; then take the fruit gently out of the baskets, and lay it in heaps on the top 
of the grass, keeping each sort in a separate heap ; the heaps may be from two to three 
feet high, or according to the quantity of fruit that you have. When the heaps are com- 
pleted, cover the tops at least two inches thick with short grass, in order to sweat them. 
Let them lie a fortnight, then open the heaps and turn them over, wiping each apple or 
pear with a dry woollen cloth, which should be frequently dried during the process, 
observing now to lay in the middle the fruit which before was at the top. Let the heaps 
now remain eight or ten days, covered as before ; by that time, they vdW have thrown out 
the watery crudities which they may have imbibed during a wet season ; then uncover the 
heaps, and wipe the fruit carefully one by one, as before, picking out every one that is 
injured, or has the least spot, as unfit for keeping. During the time that the fruit is 
sweating, the windows should be left open, except in wet and foggy weather, t© admit the 
air to carry off the moisture which perspires from the fruit. The perspiration will some- 
times be so great, that, on putting your hand into the- heap, it will come out as wet as if 
it had been dipped into a pail of water : when in this state it will be necessary to turn and 
wipe the fruit." 

2(i32. In laying up fruit, the common practice has been, to lay it on clean wheat-straw ; but I find, by- 
experience, that, when any of the fruit begins to decay, if it be not immediately picked out, the straw, 
by imbibing the moisture from the decayed fruit, will become tainted, and communicate a disagreeable 
taste to the sound fruit. " The fruit on shelves," he adds, " should be turned two or three times during 
the winter ; as delicate and tender fruit, by lying long witliout turning, is apt to rot on the underside, 
even if perfectly sound when laid up. Be particulaily careful, however, to pick out all the damaged fruit. 
When the fruit is laid in, put the earliest sorts on ihe lower shelves, or in the lower drawers, according to 
their time of coming in, beginning with the nonsuch, golden rennet, and Jenneting apples, and bergaraot 
and beurr^ pears ; thus, by proper management, you may have a constant succession of fruit from one 
season to the other. Those who keep their fruit in storehouses, for the supply of the London and other 
markets, as well as those who have not proper fruit-rooms, may keep their apples and pears in baskets or 
hampers ; putting some soft paper in the bottoms and round the edges of the baskets, &c., to keep the fruit 
from being bruised ; then put in a layer of fruit, and over that another layer of paper ; and so on, a layer of 
fruit and of paper alternately, till the basket or hamper be full : cover the top with paper three or four 
times double, to exclude the air and frost as much as possible. Every different sort of fruit should be 
packed separately ; and it will be proper to fix a label to each basket or hamper, with the name of the 
fruit that it contains, and the time of its being fit for use." 

2633. But the best way of keeping fruit, is to pack it in glazed earthen jars. " The pears or apples must 
be separately wrapped up in soft paper ; then put a little well-dried bran in the bottom of the jar, 
and over the bran a layer of fruit ; then a little more bran to fill up the interstices between the fruit, and 
to cover it; and soon, a layer of fruit and bran alternately, till the jar be full ; then shake it gently, 
which will make the fruit aiid bran sink a little ; fill up the vacancy at top with more bran, and lay some 
paper over it, covering the top with a piece of bladder to exclude the air; then put on the top or cover 
of the jar, observing that it fits as closely as possible. These jars should be kept in a room where you can 
have a fire in wet or damp weather." 

2634, NicoVs opinion as to the sweating of fruits is thus given : " I consider it an error 
to sweat apples, as it is termed, previous to storing them, either in the common way, with 
straw or hay, or as recommended by Forsyth, by the use of short grass. The fruit ever 
after retains a bad flavor. It should never be laid in heaps at all ; but if quite dry 
when gathered, should be immediately carried to the fruit-room, and be laid, if not 
singly, at least thin on the shelves ; the room being properly fitted up with shallow 
shelves on pxirpose, being well aired, and having a stove in it, that damp may be dried 
off when necessary." He adds, " If the finer fruits are placed on any thing else than a 
clean shelf, it should be on fine paper. Brown paper gives them a flavor of pitch. The 
finer large kinds of pears should not be allowed even to touch one another, but should 
be laid quite single and distinct. Apples, and all pears, should be laid thin ; never 
tier above tier. Free air should be admitted to the fruit-room always in good weather, for 
several hours every day ; and in damp weather a fire should be kept in. Be careful 
at all times to exclude the frost from the fruit, and occasionally to turn it when very 
mellow." 

2635. Gathering and storing nuts. Walnuts are generally beat off the tree with poles ; 
but it does not appear that any harm would result to the fruit from leaving them to drop, 
or be shaken off by winds, or in part shaking them off. Sweating may be applicable to 
them, in order to the more ready separation of the outer or soft skin from the hard shell. 
This effected, they are to be spread thin till quite dry, when they may be preserved in bins, 
or boxes, or heaps. 

2&36. Walnuts for keeping, Forsyth observes, " should be suffered to drop of themselves, and afterwards 
laid in an open airy place till they are thoroughly dried ; then pack them in jars, boxes or casks, with 
fine clean sand, that has been well dried in the sun, in an oven, or before the fire, in layers of sand and 
walnuts alternately ; set them in a dry place, but not where it is too hot. In this manner, I have kept 



Book I. 



PACKING FRUITS FOR CARRIAGE. 



501 



them good till the latter end of April. Before you send them to table, wipe the sand clean ofF; and. if 
you find that they have become shrivelled, steep them in milk and water for six or eight hours before they 
are used ; this will make them plump and fine, and cause them to peel easily." 

2657. The chestnut is to be treated like the walnut, after the husk is removed, which, in the chestnut, 
opens of itself Knight {Hor. Tr. i. p. 247.) preserves chestnuts and walnuts during the whole winter, 
by covering them with earth as cottagers do potatoes. 

2638. Filberts may always be gathered by hand, and should afterwards be treated as recommended for 
walnuts, Forsyth recommends packing nuts, intended for keeping, in jars or boxes of dry sand. 

2639. Other fruits. The barben^y and cornel, or dog-wood berry, are used immediately, 
when gathered, as preserves. The medlar is not good till rotten ripe. It is gene- 
rally gathered in the beginning of November, and placed between two layers of straw, to 
forward its maturation. " Others," Marshall observes, " put medlars in a box on a three- 
inch layer of fresh bran, moistened well with soft warm water ; then strew a layer of 
straw between them, and cover with fruit two inches thick ; which moisten also, ljut not 
so wet as before." In a week or ten days after this operation, they will be fit for use. 
Quinces are gathered in November, when they are generally ripe. After sweating in 
a heap for a few days, they are to be wiped dry, and placed on the fruit-shelf at some 
distance from each other. The service, or sorb apple, never ripens on the tree in Eng- 
land. Where grown, it is gathered late in autumn, in a very austere state, and laid on 
wheat-straw to decay. It thus becomes eatable in a month. 

Sect. IV. Of packi?ig Orchard and other Fruits for Carriage. 

2640. In packing fruit to be sent to a considerable distance, great care is requisite. It 
should not, Forsyth observes, be packed in baskets, as they are liable to be bruised among 
heavy luggage, and the fruit, of course, will be injured. I would, therefore, recommend 
boxes made of strong deal, of different sizes, according to the quantity of fruit to be 
packed. The following are the dimensions of the boxes in which we send fruit by the 
coach to Windsor and Weymouth, for the use of his Majesty and the Royal Family ; 
viz. : The larger box is two feet long, fourteen inches broad, and the same in depth. 
The smaller box is one foot nine inches long, one foot broad, and the same depth. 
These boxes are made of inch-deal, and well secured with three iron clamps at each 
corner : they have two small iron handles, one at each end, by which they are fastened to 
the roof of the coach ; in these boxes we send melons, currants, pears, peaches, nectarines, 
plums and grapes, packed so as always to have the heaviest fruit at bottom. The melons 
are wrapped up in soft paper : the pears, peaches, nectarines, plums, and grapes are first 
wrapped up in vine-leaves, and then in paper. The cherries and currants are packed in 
a flat tin box, one foot four inches long, ten inches broad, and four deep. 

2641. In packing, proceed thus : — First, put a layer of fine long dry moss in the bottom of the tin box, 
then a layer of currants or cherries, then another layer of moss, and so on, alternately, fruit and moss, 
until the box is so full, that, when the lid is hasped down, the fruit may be so firmly packed as to preserve 
them from friction. Make a layer of fine moss and short, soft, dry grass, well mixed, in the bottom of the 
deal box ; then pack in the melons with some of the same, packing it tight in between all the rows, and 
also between the melons in the same row, till you have finished the layer ; choosing the fruit as nearly of 
size as possible, filling up every interstice with the moss and grass. When the melons are packed, lay a 
thin layer of moss and grass over them, upon which place the tin box with the currants, packing it firmly 
all round with moss to prevent it from shaking ; then put a thin layer of moss over the box, and pack the 
pears firmly (but so as not to bruise them) on that layer, in the same manner as the melons ; and so on 
with the peaches, nectarines, plums, and lastly, the grapes, filling up the box with moss, that the lid may 
shut down so tight as to prevent any friction among the fruit. The boxes should have locks, and two keys, 
which may serve for them all ; each of the persons who pack and unpack the fruit having a key. The 
moss and grass should always be returned in the boxes, which, with a little addition, will serve the 
whole season, being shaken up and well aired after each journey, and keeping it sweet and clean. After 
the wooden box is locked, it will be necessary to cord it firmly. My reason for being so particular on 
packing of fruit is, that I have known instances of its being totally spoiled in the carriage from im- 
proper packing. By pursuing the above metliod, we have never failed of success ; and if fruit be packed 
according to the foregoing directions, it may be sent to the farthest parts of the kingdom, by coaches or 
waggons, with perfect safety. 

2642. Miscellaneous points of orchard cidture. As in treating of kitchen-garden 
culture, so here various lesser points of culture and management are omitted, which 
the judicious gardener will not overlook in practice ; provided he has, or ought to have, 
the whole art and science of gardening, as it were, stored up in his mind, and ready to 
apply on every occasion. Among these points may be named the occasional grafting 
of orchard-trees, with a view either to introduce new or preferable sorts, or to fill up 
the head of a tree. Thinning out temporary trees ; introducing young trees in intervals 
of old orchards to succeed the old ; guarding from thieves ; and a variety of other 
matters, which circumstances will always suggest to the observing eye and fertile mind 
of a gardener attached to his profession. Among these things, one of the first conse- 
quence is attention to order and neatness. 

2643. In regard to neatness and order, see 2355. to 2373. ; and with respect to recent 
improvements, which have not been fully sanctioned by extensive adoption, they have been 
already enumerated in Part II. Book IV. On the Oi^erations of Gardening. 



K k 3 



502 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part II L 



432 



Chap. VI. 

Construction of the Culinary Forcing Structures and Hot-homes. 

2644. The general principles of desig7i in forcing and hut-house structures have been already 
laid down (1591. to 1692.); and, therefore, the object, in this chapter, is to detail the 
most approved practice in regard to the particular construction of such as belong to 
the culinary and fruit gardens. These are the pitiery, vineri/y peach-house, cherrTj-house, 
fig-house, culinary pits, frames, and mushroom-house. 

Sect. I. Of the Constniction of the Pinery. 

2645. The external form of a piiiejy varies less than that of any other description of 
hot-house. The necessity, in glass structures, of placing all plants intended to thrive 
near the glass, and a bed of bark or leaves for plunging pots, being most convenient, 
when flat or gently sloping, have led, in almost all cases, to a low and rather flat roof, 
nearly parallel to the bark-bed. This gave rise, many years ago, to the growing of 
pines in pits, as practised by the Dutch, and generally on the continent, and as recently 
adopted in this country by most commercial gardeners ; by Nicol, in giving designs 
for this class of buildings ; and by Baldwin, one of the best pine-growers of the present 
day. 

2646. The pinery of Nicol consists of tliree pits in a range ; one for crowns and 
suckers, one for succession, and one for fruiting plants. The fruiting-pit to be placed 
in the centre, and the other two, right and left ; forming a range of a hundred *feet in 
length ; which would give pine-apples enough for a large family. The fruiting-pit to 
be forty feet long, and ten feet wide, over walls ; and each of the others to be thirty 
feet long, and nine feet wide, also over walls. The breast-wall of the whole to be on a 
line, and to be eighteen inches above ground. The back wall of the centre one to be 
five feet, and of the others, to be four and a half feet higher than the front. Tlie front 
and end flues to be separated from the bark-bed by a three inch cavity, and the back 
flues to be raised above its level. 

2647. The furnaces may either be placed in front, or at 
the back, according to conveniency ; but the strength of the 
heat should be first exhausted in front, and should return in 
the back flues. The fruiting-pit would require two small 
furnaces, in order to diffuse the heat generally, and keep up a 
proper temperature in winter ; one to be placed at each hand ; 
and either to play, first in front, and return in the back ; but 
the flues to be above, and not alongside of one another ; as in 
the latter way they would take up too much room. The under 
one to be considered merely as an auxiliary flue, as it would 
only be wanted occasionally. None of these flues need be 
more than five or six inches wide, and nine or ten deep. Nor 
need the furnaces be so large, by a third or fourth part, as 
those for large forcing-houses ; because there should be proper 
oil-cloth covers for the whole, as guards against severe wea- 
ther, which would be a great saving of fuel. The depth of 
the pits should be regulated so as that the average depth of the 
bark-beds may be a yard below the level of the front flues ; 
as to that level the bark will generally settle, although made as 
high as their surfaces, when new stirred up. If leaves, or a 
mixture of leaves with dung, are to be used instead of bark, 
the pits will require to be a foot, or half a yard deeper. 

2648. Large pineries should be turned to other purposes, and 
such erected as are described above. There cannot be a doubt 
respecting the satisfaction that would follow, if to have good 
fruit at an easy rate were the object. I have given designs for 
no other kinds of new pineries these six years past, but such 
as these ; with some variations respecting extent, however, in 
order to suit different purses. 

2649. The pinery of Baldwin consists of two structures, the 
succession-bed and fruiting-house. 

2650. The succession-beds or frame {fig. 432.), in which the 
young plants are to remain both winter and summer, should 
be constructed of timber, seven feet wide, and seven feet three 
inches high at the back, the front being in the same proportion. 
The method of preparing the bed is as follows : — " Sink your 




Book I. 



PINERY. 



503 



434 



pit (2) three feet three inches deep, as long as you require, and sufficiently broad to 
admit of linings on each side (1,3); make a good drain at the bottom of the pit to keep 
it dry ; then set posts, about the dimensions of six inches square, in the pit, at conve- 
nient distances (say about the width of the top lights), and case it round with one inch 
and a half deal wrought boards above the surface, and below with any inferior boards 
or planks. The dimensions of my succession-beds or frame are thirty-nine feet long, 
and seven feet wide ; containing two hundred and seventy-three square feet, which will 
hold three hundred and fifty suckers, from the end of September till the seventh of 
April." (Cult, of ^nan. Tp. 11.) 

2651. The fruiting-house (Jig. 433.) is a pit with a walk behind; " in it the glass 
should be closely puttied, to keep out the cold air, and to retain the warm, and in the 
back there should be three lids (6), to admit air , the dimensions of each to be three feet 
long and one foot deep. The flue makes only one course in the passage behind." (Cull, 
of Anan. p. 19.) 

2652. Aitons pine-pits at Kensington (fg. 434. ) 
are constructed exactly in Baldwin's manner, with 
this difference, that the sub-soil at Kensington being 
moist, they are raised on a small platform (a, b) above 
the surface, instead of being sunk under it, as Bald- 
win's are. They have, also, the addition of a gutter 
in front (c), which, though at first sight it may appear 
trifling, yet, in practice, is of very material consequence, by keeping the lining dry, and 
.not chilling and interrupting the heat in the very part where it should penetrate to the 
interior of the pit. Occasionally some plants are fruited in these pits, especially at Kew, 
but in general they are removed to a low house 

{fg. 435.) of a most economical and judicious 
construction, and calculated both for the growth 
of pines and vines. This house is fifteen feet 
wide vdthin walls ; the pit (a) is nine feet wide ; 
the back path (b) forms a border for the roots of 
the vines ; the pit is surrounded by a flue (c, rf) ; 
the curb is two feet three inches from the glass 
in front (e), and four feet eight inches from it 
behind (f) ; the vines are planted in the back 
border (b), and trained under the roof directly over it and over the back flue ; and others 
are planted in the front border (g) ; and trained up the rafters. The length of the 
houses in the royal gardens at Kensington varies from thirty-three to fifty feet (fgA36.)\ 

436 






each house has two furnaces, one for constant use, and another for giving an extra supply 
of heat in very severe weather. The first (a) proceeds directly to the front corner(6), thence 
along the front to the opposite end (c), then along the back of the pit (d, e), passing 
under the back path, or border, and terminating in a chimney (/) beside the furnace. 
The other furnace is placed at the opposite end of the house (g) ; has a short flue under 
the back path, which conducts it to the back course of the principal flue (at d), which it 

Kk 4 



504 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



joins, and the smoke of the two fires moves in the same tunnel (from d to e), and passes 
out by the same chimney. When this second furnace is not in use, its connection with 
the flue of the first is cut off' by a damper at the point of junction (rf). A very smafl fire 
made in this furnace, in severe weather, not only adds to the heat of the house by its own 
power, but by increasing the draught, or rate of burning, of the fire in the otlier furnace. 
In addition to the fire heat, a steam-apparatus has been lately erected, and the tubes 
conducted round the houses on the tops of the flues (Jig. 436. d, e) ; this is found to give 
a great command of heat ; and also to admit of filling the house with vapor at pleasure. 
The height of the house from the ground to the top of the back wall, is only nine feet 
(Jig. 437.) ; the rafters of the roof are placed about four feet apart, centre from centre ; 




h c 



or about twenty-four sashes are given to every hundred feet ; the front sashes (a) are 
only eighteen inches high, and slide past each other \ the middle end sash (b) also slides ; 
the sill of the door (c) and the back path, or border, are on a level witli the outer sur- 
face of the ground, to admit the easy wheeling in of tan, &c. ; the front border (d) is 
raised considerably above it, on account of the wet bottom ; the back sheds are low 
and neat ; and the furnaces sunk three feet below the surface {jig. 436. h, h) to give them 
a better draught ; and this also serves to drain the back border. The houses are placed 
in pairs, the furnaces for general use at the extreme ends of the range, and the auxiliary 
ones in the middle, ■where the steam-boiler is also placed, but worked by a fire apart ; 
on the whole, no plan of pine-stove that has yet appeared is more simple, neat, economical, 
and complete than this ; tlie only objection we have to them, is, that owing to the great 
thickness of wood employed in the bars of the sashes, they are rather dark and gloomy 
within ; but this might easily be remedied by the substitution of light iron rafters, with 
wooden-framed sashes sliding in them, but the bars of the sashes formed of iron. It is 
true, gloomy as these houses are, the pines thrive in them as well as can be wished ; but 
probably by having more light, they might tlirive so as to surpass all expectation. 

2653. The pinery of Knight may be described as a pit forty-five feet long, nine feet nine 
inches wide, the front parapet eighteen inches, and the back wall nine feet high. The 
roof is constructed of iron sash-bar, fixed, and the bars curved, so that the versed sine of 
the segment is about twelve inches. Air is given by horizontal openings immediately 
under the copings of both walls. More light is adn^itted into such a pit in March, than 
into a common flat-roofed pit with wooden sashes in May or June. 

438 




2654. As an example of a pinery and grapery combined, we refer to a curvilinear 
structure [Jig. 438.), erected from our designs, at Langport in Somersetshire. This house 

439 



Book I. 



PINERY. 



505 




is fifty feet long by sixteen feet wide, contains 370 superficial feet of bark-pit for 
pine-plants ; 1400 superficial feet for training vines ; and space for 500 pots of straw- 
berries or French beans ; quantities greater in proportion to the glass roof, than have 
hitherto been obtained in any hot-house of the common form and similar dimensions. 
This structure is entered by lobbies at each end (j^"^. 439. l), which communicate 
with a back passage, having a glass roof and trellis for vines (2) : in the back wall of 
this passage, and also in the front of 
the house, are glazed ventilators open- 
ing outwards {fig' 440. 3), through 
which the vines (5) are introduced and 
withdrawn at pleasure. The pine-pits 
(7) are raised so as to be as near the 
glass as is desirable, by vaulting them 
beneath (6) ; against the front of these 
pits, shoots of vines are brought down 
from the roof, and trained (9), and pots 
are placed over the front flue (8). The 
vines, close under the roof, are trained 
on moveable trellis-rods, composed of a centre and two side wires, and placed five feet 
apart ; these rods are hinged to the front props, and supported in tlie middle of the roof, 
and at top, by chains and hooks, and in this way can be raised or lowered at pleasure. 
This house, since its erection, in 1817, has given the greatest satisfaction, and already pro- 
duces considerable crops of grapes. 

2655. The pine-pit of Scott 
(fig. 441.) will fruit 120 
plants, with three or four 
chaldrons of coals. The 
bed for the plants is fifty feet 
long, and seven feet six inches 
wide; its peculiarities are that 
there is only a flue in front 
(fig' 441. a.), which returns 
on itself, and requiring no 
glass over it, is covered with 
flag-stone (6), supported by 
props of brick work (c). Co- 
vering the flue with flag- 
stone, Scott considers a great saving; it is less costly than glass, and as the part that it 
covers requires no heating, by using it, instead of glass, tlie lights are reduced to a more 

442 






506 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



convenient length. If there were no stone, the lights must be in two lengths, and the 
rafters would necessarily be considerably larger, so that there would be more shade on 
the centre of the bed, if the flue was vnthin the glass. The back elevation in the lower part 
is formed of open brick work (d), to admit the heat of a lining of dung, and the wall (e) 
enclosing this lining is bevelled, so that the dung as it sinks may not shrink and allow the 
heat to escape in the air. In both back and front walls are ventilators (f), for use in winter 
and severe weather. There are twoiires (Jig. 442. g, g) the pit being constructed in two 
divisions (h, h), in order to keep up a succession of fruit. A drain {i) frees tlie whole 
from subterraneous water. In the use of this pit, the dung is thrown into the cavity be- 
hind, fresh from the stable : " when the weather is dry," Scott observes, " and a moist 
heat is required, I turn the dung once a week ; but if the weather be wet, I use the fire, 
and let the dung lie undisturbed, so that I have either a damp or dry heat at pleasure. I 
consider that no expense is caused by the use of the dung in this way, because, after being 
turned two or three times, it answers the same purpose, as it would after having been 
thrown up in heaps to sweeten it for cucumber or melon beds. " (Hurt. Trans, v. 221.) 
This appears to us the best plan of a pine-pit, that has yet appeared. Tlie flue, by being 
situated in front, vnll have a perfect command of the air of the house, and the dung be- 
hind, which should be covered in wet or very dry weatlier, comes conveniently in aid both 
of the flue and tan-bed. 



Sect. II. Of the Construction of the Vinery. 

2656.' The vinery affords tlie greatest latitude of construction ; for the fruit-tree the most 
easily cultivated of all that are grown under glass, is the vine. For a crop which is to 
be forwarded by the natural influence of the sun, chiefly or alone, almost any fonn will 
sufiice, provided the plants are trained near the glass. For very early crops, small 
houses with steep roofs (^^5. 443, 444.), ir. order freely to admit the sun in the winter 
and spring months, are most desirable, arid the section {fig. 443.) of 443 
the steep-roofed house used by the Dutch, is not surpassed by any form 
adopted in this country. It is commonly supposed that pits are the 
best buildings for early forcing, and as far as respects artificial heat, 
they are not much inferior to the Dutch vinery ; but as to light, with- 
out which forced productions are not worth using, they are, from the 
low angle of their roof, greatly deficient. A house for early forcing 
{fig. 444.) may be thirty feet long, eight feet wide ; the glass (a) twelve 
feet high, placed at an angle of 15^ to the perpendicular ; the flue en- 
tering at one end {f) may pass under the front glass (b), and afterwards make two or 
three returns in the back wall (rf) ; the vines may be trained on a trellis nearly parallel to 
the glass, between the flue and the back wall (c), and the shed behind may be fitted up 
with shelves (e), and used as a mushroom-house. Such a house, being small, will be very 
easily managed in the most severe winters. 





2657. The vineries made use of by the Dutch for early forcing are generally about twenty- 
five or thirty feet long, about five feet wide at bottom, and at the top about three feet. 
The height generally about ten feet, which is that of the wall against v. hich tliey are placed. 
The fire-place is at one end, and the flue runs along the bottom to the opposite end, and 
generally returns to a chimney built in the middle of the frame. The vines are brought 
down from the wall, and nailed all along the front close to the glass frames, and are 
securely covered at nights. The black and white sweet-water are the kinds preferred for 
this early forcing. As this kind of forcing spoils the vines, it is necessary to have the 
vine-walls at least five times the length of the frame, in order to furnish a succession of 
well-perfected wood. After the crop is over, therefore, the vines in the course of the en- 
suing winter are cut down nearly to the bottorti, and they require a term of four or five 
years to recover themselves for another early crop. (Tr. on the Vine, -p. 127.) Similar 
forcing-frames heated by a bed of dung within, have been adopted by P. Lindegaard, 
gardener to the king of Denmark. {New Method of forcing Grapes, &c. 8vo. 1817.) 



Book I. 



VINERY. 



507 



2658. The vinery of Speechly consists of a roof, and glass lights covering a border of about ten feet wide 
on the south side of a flued wall, about 14 feet high. Upright glasses, two feet and a half or three feet 
high in front, to support the roof, are proper for vines to be forced at an early season, because it admits 
the sun and light to the border ; but when grapes are not wanted at an early season, a considerable ex- 
pense may be saved by adopting a low wall in front. The shade of this wall would be injurious to the 
border, if the vines were to be forced early in spring; but the meridian altitude of the sun, in the begin- 
ning of summer, renders it no way prejudicial at that season. Supposing a flued wall, twelve feet high, 
the breadth of the border ten feet, and the height of the upright glass frame, or wall in front, three feet, 
the roof will then form an angle of about forty-three degrees. Experience shows this to be a proper pitch 
for vines forced after the vernal equinox. I mention this circumstance, because some persons who give 
designs for buildings of this kind, lay so great a stress on this point, as to pronounce a vinery or peach- 
house incapable of answering the intended purpose, should the pitch of the roof happen only to vary a de- 
gree or two from their favorite angle. In Holland, the frames for winter forcing are almost perpendicular, 
but for those forced in summer, they are almost as flat as those made use of for melons. Hence it follows, 
that the construction of different frames or buildings, for the purpose of producing grapes, should not 
only vary according to the quantity required, but also according to the season in which that fruit is in- 
tended to be produced. The roof should be steep for early forcing, and flatter for the summer. (TV. on 
the Vine, p. 99.) 

2659. The vinery of Nicolfor early forcing, to be commanded by one furnace, should not much exceed 
thirty feet in length. If it were forty or forty-five feet long, it would require two furnaces to be placed, 
and the flues to run as described below. The width of the house may be ten or eleven feet, and the 
height thirteen or fourteen; the front, including parapet and glass, not exceeding four feet in height. 
But, if the roof were made to rest on the parapet, without having any upright glass, and if the parapet 
were about eighteen inches high, it would have a better pitch, and there would be a longer run for the 
vines. The front flue should be two feet clear of the parapet, should return in the middle of the border, 
and double by the back wall, being separated from it by a three-inch cavity ; that is, in the case of there 
being but one furnace for the house. But if the house be much above thirty feet in length, and require 
two furnaces, one should be placed at each end, in the shed behind, and the power of both should be 
brought to the front, the flue of the one to be placed within two feet of the parapet, and of the other close 
behind the first, being separated by a two-inch cavity only, and both to stand on a common foundation. 
The one may return in the middle of the house, and the other by the back wall; but it will be uniiccessary 
to have a double return to either of them ; as a house of the above-mentioned width and height, to the 
extent of fifty feet in length, may thus be fully commanded. 

2660. The vinery of Nicolfor late forcing niay be of any convenient length, from thirty to fifty feet ; 
fourteen feet wide, and fifteen or sixteen feet high ; with or without front glass, as above hinted. But if 
it have upright glass, both glass and parapet should not exceed five feet in height ; as it is but seldom that 
any fruit grows below the angle of the ratter ; and, if it do, it is never so well ripened as the fruit growing 
under the sloping sashes. The flues may be conducted, in every respect, as above directed for the early 
house, and the number of furnaces must be regulated by its length. If under thirty-five feet, one furnace 
may do ; but if longer, it will require two furnaces, in order to have a perfect command of the temper- 
ature necessary for grapes. The parapet and front flue of both these houses should stand on pillars, three 
and a half feet deep under the ground-level, in order that the roots of the plants may have free scope to 
run to the border without the house ; as the intention is to plant them inside, and train them, under the 
roof, to a trellis fixed to the rafters. 

2661. Vineries of other horticultural architects. Hay seems to make very little difference in the slopes 
of glass roofs for whatever purpose the house may be intended. In his very extensive designs for Lundie 
and Dalmeny {fig. 445.) the difference is inconsiderable. The same may be remarked of most of the 
ranges of houses built by G. Tod. {Ed. Encyc. art. Hart. ; Tod's Flans for Hot-houses, &c. foL 1812.) 



445 




2652. A vinery for a crop to ripen in July, Knight recommends to be roofed at an angle of 35°, Wilkinson 
{Hort. Trans.) and Miller {Diet, in loco,) 45°, which is that adopted most commonly for summer crops, 
both of grapes and peaches. Abercrombie says, " The diagonal side of a glass case, designed for a short 
periodical course of forcing, to begin the 21st of December, may be 55° ; 22d January, 50° ; 21st Febru- 
arv, 46° ; 21st March, 43°." He adds, " Too much importance must not be attachetl to the angle of in- 
clination in the glass work." It is of some consequence to remark, that the roofs of vineries may be 
fixed, provided there are shutters in the front and back wall for ventilation, though for these, as for every 
description of house, gardeners prefer a roof in which the sashes slide, are raised up, or take off 

2663. A vinery on the curvilinear principle, with a fixed roof (resembling./ig-. 163.), was erected from our 
designs at Finchley, in 1818 ; no form or manner of construction can admit more light. The vines are 
trained within a foot of the glass ; ventilation effected by shutters in the front and back walls, and the 
whole is managed by one fire. It is a beautiful object, the vines have grown admirably, and in 1820 
produced a small crop (their first) of highly flavored fruit. Several other curvilinear-roofed vineries have 



508 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

been recently erected with iron roofs, and from their decided superiority in admitting light, we have no 
doubt of curvilinear iron roofs being ultimately adopted, not only for vineries, but for every description 
of hot-house, as soon as the great importance of light to vegetation, and especially to the flavor of fruits, 
is fully understood by practical men. 

Sect. III. Construction of the Peach-house. 

2664. A peach-house not intended for early forcing, may be of any shape, provided that 
the trees are either standards or trained near the glass. Knight and many practical 
gardeners are of opinion, that the roofs of all peach-houses should be made to take off, 
in order to color the fruit, and afterwards expose the trees to the weather for the sake of 
destroying insects. 

2665. In Holland, peaches are often forced iii deep frames (Jig- 446.), filled within a 




foot or eighteen inches of the glass with tan (o), and heated by an exterior lining if ne- 
cessary. The tree is planted in a box (6), by wliich its roots are confined so as to be- 
nefit by the heat of the tan, and the branches are trained on a trellis (c), close on the bed. 
Instead of tan, dung may be used, covered in the flowering season with earth, or tan 
and earth. In such pits peaches are ripened in Holland, by the middle of May. (Hort. 
Trans, v. 325.) 



2666. In Denmark, peaches are forced by dung- 
heat : the tree is planted against the back wall 
(^fg. 447 a.) which is heated by a lining of dung 
(b), as are its roots, and the area of the house by 
another lining {c)t (Liyidegaard in Hort. Trans. 
V. 320.) 

2667. The peach-house of Nicol for the earliest 
forcing, to be commanded by one furnace, may be of 

any length, between thirty and forty feet ; eight or 
nine feet wide, and twelve feet high. It should 
have no upright glass. The parapet may be about 
eighteen inches in height, and the rafters should 
rest immediately upon it. The intention here is, 
to train the peaches and nectarines up the roof, in 
the same manner as vines, only a little nearer to 




the glass, and none against the back wall. The 
front flue may run within two feet of the parapet, and should return by the back wall, 
being separated from it by a three-inch cavity. The parapet and front flue must stand 
on pillars, three feet deep under the ground-level, in order to give full scope to the roots of 
the plants. 

2668. A succession 2}each-house to the above, that is, not to be forced so early, may be 
of a like length, ten or eleven feet wide, and thirteen or fourteen feet high ; also without 
upright or front glass, and otherwise may be constructed in all respects as above. 

2669. A late peach-house, to be managed by one furnace, may be forty or forty-five feet 
long ; thirteen or fourteen feet wide, and fourteen or fifteen feet high. It may either have, 
or not have, upright glass in front ; which should not, however, exceed four, or four and a 
half feet in height, including the parapet. The flues may be conducted as above specified 
for the early houses. The intention here is, to train plants on trellises against the back 
wall, and likewise half way up tlie roof, in the manner of vines j so that it may be termed 
a double peach-house. 

2670. The peach-house of M'Phail was made sixty-four feet long, ten feet wide ; the height of the back 
wall was four feet, and that of the front five feet, in pillars of brick work four feet each in length, 
which supported the sill to support the frame for the lights to rest upon; so that there were in the front 
eight vacuities in width, four feet each between the said pillars, for the roots of the trees to extend into 
the border. " In the inside of the pit, I had a wall built the whole length of the pit, and thirty inches 
distance from the front pillars. The wall was nine inches thick, and three feet six inches high, about one 
foot lower than the pillars of brick. I then made a border of good loamy earth, mixed with some very 
rotten dung, four feet deep, which left a vacancy between the pillars and the sill of nearly one foot, which 
was filled up with the earth of the border, which reached to the nine-inch wall within the pit, so that 



Book I» 



PEACH-HOUSE. 



509 



thirty inches wide of the border was in the inside of the pit. I had the border made fourteen feet wide." 
" I got the floor of the pit paved with bricks, and in the back side, between the pavement and the trees, 
tlicre was between five and six feet, so that a person had room to walk under to prune and manage the 
trees." The door was made in the back wall, at the west end ; and at the east end a fire-place was made 
in the back wall, about three feet high, without a return. M'Phail began to force in the middle of March, 
and ripened abundant crops of fruit in the month of July. 

2671. As a suitable peac/t-house, for earl!/ forcing, we ■would suggest a length of forty feet, width eight 
feet, and height twelve feet : the glass in two planes, each plane forming an angle with the perpendicular 
of fifteen degrees, and formed into sashes ( Jig. 448. a) hinged at their upper angles, and opening outwards. 
The flue {d) entering the house at one end (c), passing under the front glass, and making two turns in the 
back wall ; and the trellis {e, b) placed between the flue and back wall. Such a house will be easily 
managed, and, like the early vinery, may be covered by mats in front during the most severe nights of 
winter. 

448 




2672. As a peach-house for a main crop, we would suggest a polyprosopic roof, with 
the sashes (Jig. 449. a) opening on the principle of Venetian blinds ; the flue (tZ) may 
])ass round the house, and tlie trellis (c) be placed between the flue and front glass ; 
both the flues and front glass may be supported on cast-iron props (e). The length 
u-iay be forty feet, breadth and height twelve feet. 

449 




2673. Peach-houses and vineries combined. It is a common practice to combine the 
vinery and peach-house, and to train the vines close under the glass, and the peach-trees 
against the back wall (Jig. 450. a) ; or to train the peach-trees against the back wall, and 
also on a flat or table trellis, in the middle of the house (6) ; but if the house be wide, 
neither modes are advisable, on account* of the distance of the plants from the glass ; 
and even in naiTow houses, it can only be considered as a temporary expedient till the 



450 




vines cover the roof. So important is light to every kind of plant, that, in our opinion, the 
\ine should be very sparingly introduced even in pineries, where some plants are generally 
trained close under the roof (c), and where some gardeners think their shade beneficial. 



510 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part nr. 



Sect. IV. Construction of the Cherry-hoxise and Fig-house. 

2674. Any form will answer for a cherry-house. Some market-gardeners grow them 
in houses placed south and north, glazed on all sides, as Andrews at Lambeth ; others 
in pits, and some in moveable glass cases. 

2675. The cherry house of Nicol, to be worked by one furnace, may be from thirty to 
forty feet in length ; from ten to twelve feet wide, and twelve or fourteen feet high. 
The parapet a foot or eighteen inches, and the front glass two feet, or two and a half feet 
high. The front flue to stand on the same foundation with the parapet, and its return 
to be by the back wall ; but both flues to be separated from the walls by a cavity of 
three inches. The front parapet and flue to stand on pillars ; which pillars should be 
thirty inches deep under the surface ; the depth, or rather more than the depth requisite 
for the border. The back wall to be trellised for training cherries to ; and the border 
to be planted with dwarf-cherries, or with dwarf apricots and figs, or with all three. 
The front and end flues to be crib-trellised, (t. e. shelves of lattice-work to be placed 
over them,) for pots of strawberries, kidneybeans, or the like. 

2676. The fig-house may be of any form not very lofty. One constructed like the 
cherry-house, Nicol considers, will answer " perfectly well. Tlie figs might be trained 
to the trellis at back, and either dwarf figs, apricots, or cherries, or all of these, might 
be planted in the border." As figs are not a popular fruit in Britain, a sufficient num- 
ber for most families may be gro^^•n in pots and tubs, placed in the otlier hot-houses. 

Sect. V. Of Constructing Hot-houses in Ranges. 

2677. The culinary hot-houses are very frequently placed in a range, by which it is sup- 
posed something is saved in the expense of the ends, some heat gained, and greater conve- 
nience of management obtained. Nicol practised this mode, and Hay, as we have seen 
{fig. 445.) has adopted it at Dalmeny Park, Lundie, and other places. The same plan 
seems to be followed by Tod, of which, as an example, we may refer to a very substan- 
tial range {fig. 451.), constructed for the Honorable Champion Dymoke, at Scrivelsby. 
One of the most ornamental ranges of this sort in the neighborhood of London, is that 
of the Duke of Devonshire at Chiswick ; but it is also the most gloomy within, of any 
we have seen. If we may submit our opinion, we should, in most cases, recommend 
detached houses (as in fig. 262.), in wlaich opinion, we may add, Knight coincides. 

451 




Sect. VL Construction of Culinary Pits, Frames, and Mushroom-houses. 

2678. Culinary jnts may be constmcted either with or without flues ; and either of 
such a height behind as to admit of a walk ; or, so low, as to be managed like a common 
hot-bed frame. The intention of these pits, as far as culinary gardening is concerned, is 
first to force fruit-trees, as peaches, grapes, cherries, figs, apples, &c. in pots ; and in 
this case the design which admits of a passage behind from which to water and manage 
the plants, will be found preferable ; and secondly, to force strawberries, kidneybeans, 
potatoes, asparagus, sea-kale, rhubarb, &c. for which a pit sunk in the ground, and to be 
managed from without, will suffice, and is even preferable, because the plants may be 
brought close under the glass. 

2679. The jyit for fruit-shrubs may be forty feet long, eleven feet wide, within walls ; 
the angle of the roof from 15° to 20° ; the back path two feet wide, the furnace placed 
at one end, and the flue passing along the front, separated by a three-inch vacuity from 
the tan-bed, and returning close under the back wall. These dimensions will give a 
bark-bed six feet wide, thirty-seven feet long, and, supposing the surface of the pit to 
be kept level, it may be raised to any convenient height, according to that of the trees to 
be forced. Whatever be the height to which the pit is raised, the back of the pit should 
always be at least three and a half feet higher than the front, which will admit of difllerent 
sizes of trees. The sashes for this pit may be in two lengths, one sliding over the other, as 
in hot-house roofs ; but a better plan is, to have them to rise in the manner recommended 
for an early peach-house, (fig. 449.) 



Boosl. CONSTRUCTION OF CULINARY HOT-HOUSES. 511 



young 



452 



2680. The jjit for forcing herbaceous vegetables may be in all respects of the same di- 
mensions as above, but with the angle of the glass not more than 15°. On this plan and 
angle, the back of the pit will be two feet higher than the front : but the simplest plan 
is to omit the passage, and lessen the width of the pit two feet, retaining the slope of 15°, 
and the compound, or double sashes, between each rafter. 

•2681. Pits without fire heat, to be worked by that arising from the bed of bark or 
dung, may be of any length, six or seven feet wide within, and with the glass at an 
angle of fifteen degrees. 

2682. M^PhaiVs pit is approved of by many gardeners for growing cucumbers and 
melons, and may be considered as coming into general use. Abercrombie, after de- 
scribing it as a " flued pit without a furnace," says, " some persons approve of this kind 
of frame, and others disapprove of it ; but when the management of the air-chamber is 
understood, it may be applied very successfully to the forcing of early melons and choice 
esculents. It allows new stable-dung, even before any of the fiery particles are exhaled, 
to be used without any danger of burning tlie roots of the plants." (Pr. Gard. 
p. 662.) 

2683. Other jnts and fixed frames. West's pit {fig. 1547.) and the Alderstone fixed 
frame {fig. 1549.) are both structures deserving introduction where neatness is an object, 
and it is to be hoped that these and similar structures (see Hort. Trans, vol. iv. and v.) 
will soon come into more general use, and elevate tlie melon-ground from a disorderly 
dung-yard, to a scene fit for general inspection. 

2684. KnishVs melon-pit {fig. 452.), and which may also be applied to the culture of cucumbers, 
pines, or other low vegetables, is surrounded by a cellular 
wall, (see 1561.) The front wall is four feet, and the back 
wall five feet six inches high, enclosing a space of six feet 
wide, and fifteen feet long, and the walls are covered with 
a wall-plate, and with sliding lights, as in ordinary ho't- 
beds. The space included may be filled to a proper 
depth with leaves or tan, where it is wished to promote the 
rapid growth of plants ; Knight, however, did not use dung 
internally, but grew the melon-plants in large pots, and 
trained them on a trellis at a proper distance from the 
glass. The wall is externally surrounded by a hot-bed 
composed of leaves and horse-dung, by which it is kept 
warm, and the warm air contained in its cavity is per- 
mitted to pass into the enclosed space through many small 
perforations in the bricks. At each of the lower corners is 
a passage (a), which extends along the surface of the 
ground, under the fermenting material, and communicates 
with the cavity of the wall, into which it admits the ex- 
ternal air, to occupy the place Of that which has become 
v/arm and passed into the pit. The entrances into these 
passages are furnished with grates, to prevent the ingress of 

vermin of every kind. The hot-bed is moved and renewed in small successive portions, so that the 
temperature may be permanently preserved, the ground being made to descend a little towards the wall 
on every side, that the bed in shrinking may rather fall towards than from the walls ; and Knight enter- 
tains " no doubt, but that the perpetual ingress of warm air, even without an internal leaf-bed, will 
prove suliicient to preserve pine-apple plants without the protection of mats, except in very severe 
weather." {Hort. Trans, v. 224.) 

2685. The Edmonstone pine or melon 
pif (fig- 453.) is eighteen and a half 
feet long, by six feet in breadth ; the 
heiglit of the back is five feet, the 
height of the front three feet nine 
inches ; the declivity for the glass one 
foot three inches. The pits for the 
dung are on the outside of the frames, 
and sunk level with the surface of 
the earth, or gravel, on the outside. 
The height of these pits is three feet, 
their breadth two feet. The outside 
of the pits for the dung is built with 
a nine-inch wall up to the surface, 
with one course of hewn stone on the 
top. One inch is cut out for the 
boards that cover the space allotted 
for the linings to rest upon : that appearance of litter and dung, which is so offensive in ordinary hot- 
beds is thus prevented. The boards that cover the dung are one inch thick, by two feet two inches in 
l)readth. They are of the length of the pit, and have rings at each end for lifting them with. The 
pits should be well drained, to carry off the under water, and a small grate should be made at the end of 
the drains. The kind of matter which is generally employed to fill these pits, is a mixture of new horse and 
cow dung : sometimes we use tree leaves and short grass, which do very well, provided they be duly pre- 
pared, by throwing them up in a high heap, to remain eight or ten days, that they may ferment to an 
equal temperature. To maintain seventy degrees of heat with horse and cow dung, or leaves of trees is 
no difficult matter, and it is easy to preserve the plants in health, and in a fruitful state during the 
severest winter, by covering the pits with mats in time of frost. {Caled. Hort. Mem. iii. 336.) 

2686. The common hot-bed frame is generally from four to five feet wide within, and 
from nine to twelve feet long, divided into three or four lights or sashes. The back is 
generally double the height of the front, so that the slope of the glass is seldom more 
than ten degrees. Knight, with great correctness of principle, considers this as too flat 
to admit the sun's rays in the winter season, and recommends a basis of earth sloped to 





512 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



an angle of fifteen degrees, then. forming on it the dung-bed, by which means its surface 
will be at the same angle as the base ; and, lastly, he constructs the frame equally high, 
both in front and behind, and placing it on the dung, still retains the above angle. 
(Jig. 375.) 

2687. The common form of the mushroom- hotise and that recommended by Oldacre 
have been described. (1694. and 1695.) The latter plan, though adopted in several places, 
does not appear to be so generally countenanced by practical, and especially by market- 
gardeners, aa to justify our giving it a preference in this part of our work. In the 
greater number of cases where mushrooms are grown for the London market, they are 
raised in the open air on dung-ridges ; and a number of gentlemen's gardeners make use 
of back sheds, either closed, or open, and some of old cucumber-beds. 

Sect. VII. Details in the Construction of Culinary Hot-houses. 

2688. There are certain details of construction in glazed structures, on wliich from their 
novelty or rarity there is considerable difference of opinion among gardeners. These are 
chiefly metallic roofs, steam, furnaces, flues, trellises, and ventilators. 

2689. Materials of the roof. In the construction of the roof, iron and copper, and 
other metals, have been lately introduced, in order to admit more light, and be more 
durable. This improvement, Abercrombie observes, *' is at present too new to afford 
ground for a decisive opinion ;" and Nicol says, " On account of the high price of tim- 
ber, some are now constructing the framing of hot-houses of cast-iron. I would beg 
leave to remind such, that there is nothing so prejudicial to vegetation as the dripping of 
rusted iron ; and would advise, that the frames be well and frequently painted, in order 
to prevent the bad effects of irony water falling on the foliage and fruit. I am of 
opinion, however, that iron-framed hot-houses will soon get out of fashion. From the 
quantity of water that must be used, in order to keep the plants in health, the frames 
must be often moistened, and will corrode." Not only cast-iron rafters, but roofs entirely 
of iron have wonderfully increased since Nicol's time. 

2690. The mode of heating, by steam is becoming very general in the neighborhood of the 
metropolis, and especially by such commercial gardeners as have extensive forcing depart- 
ments, asLoddiges, Gunter, Grange, Andrews, Wilmot, &c. and wherever there is a range 
of any extent, this mode seems far preferable to heating by smoke-flues. Nicol gives no 
opinion on this point ; but M'Phail says, " At present, I must freely own, that I have 
some doubts both of the cheapness, and superiority in other respects, of this new scheme 
of forcing by the influence of hot water, over the generally adopted methods of the in- 
fluence of fire, dung, and tan heat." Even " if found to answer better than fire alone, 
which I much doubt, it will only, I apprehend, be adopted in gardens where there is 
much forcing, and therefore, of course, the more simple methods of forcing by fire, dung, 
and tan heat, will be continued in moderate-sized gardens and in small ones." (Garrf. 
Rem. p. 122.) Experience confirms the propriety of these remarks. 

2691. The furnace used by Nicol is simply an oven, capable of containing less or 
more fuel, according to the kind of hot-house to which it may be attached, and the kind 
of fuel to be used, with a grate in front, just large enough to kindle the mass of fuel, 
and keep it alive. In one of a middle size, the oven is thirty inches long and twenty 
inches vdde ; the grate eighteen inches long and ten broad ; the furnace-door ten inches 
square ; the ash-pit door ten inches M'ide but fifteen inches deep, both widi circular 
valves in their centres. The grate is placed close to the furnace-door. [Kal. p. 280. ) Others 
have been tried, but none answer better for the general purposes of flued hot-houses. 

2692. Flues. Nicol gives the decided preference to flues constructed of brick and 
tiles, thus — " The sole of two-inch thick tiles, each fifteen inches long, by twelve broad ; 
jointed on cross bricks on edge, or pillarets, to keep them about four inches clear of tlie 
surface. The walls of well-moulded, or stock bricks, six inches clear of each other, and 
the height of two bricks placed on edge, covered with' inch and half thick tiles, each 
twelve inches long and ten broad, laid the length to the run of the flue, by which means 
the covers will not be flush with the sides of the flue, but each edge will he champhered 
or bevelled, which makes the flue look very light and neat. The open or void of the 
flue will thus be (with the height of two bricks on edge, and two joints of lime,) ten by 
six inches, or thereby. It is clear, and detached on all the four sides, except the in- 
terruptions of the pillarets ; and is the most effectual flue of many different sizes I have 
tried. "^ — Of air fines, the same author observes, " I think I have ascertained the use- 
lessness of air-flues." Our opinion is that air-flues in most cases are more injurious 
than useful, and we believe there has been no mode yet discovered for issuing a current 
of heated air into a hot-house that is not liable to the most decisive objection on account 
of the risk of heating to excess. A mode of heating air by steam and then intro- 
ducing it to the house is now disseminating by some London tradesmen under the name 
of caloriferes, and which is particularly obnoxious to these objections. 

2693. Trellising. " Roof-trellising," Nicol observes, " is now universally of wire. 



Book I. GENERAL CULTURE IN FORCING STRUCTURES. 513 



and often also that against back v/alls. It is cheaper than wood, and, on account of its 
b'ghtness, fitter for the purjoose, especially when placed on the roof, or against tlie end 
lights. Tlie distance at which the wires should be placed apart for grapes, is ten or 
twelve inches ; for cherries or peaches, four or five. The distance of the wires from the 
glass, for grapes, a foot ; for peaches and nectarines, nine inches. But there should be 
a lov.-er trellis, with the wires placed at two feet apart, and a foot under the proper 
trellis, on which to train the summer shoots of vines that are in a full-bearing state, in 
order that there may not be too great a confusion of fruit, shoots, and foliage. When 
vines are trained up the rafters in a stove or green-house, they should not be nailed to 
the bearn ; but three rows of wire should be extended for them, at the distance of four 
or five inches from each other, and three from the rafter ; being set out with studs of 
wire, or of iron, made to screw into it, and with eyes to take in the wire. " 

2694. Ventilators. " The hot-house may require to be ventilated at times, when it 
may be improper to open the sashes for that purpose. Ventilators are then useful. 
They may be contrived in different forms, and inay be placed in different situations. 
If the hot-house have a shed behind it, they might be made to open, in the manner of a 
common window, near to the top of the back wall ; and three in an ordinary-sized house 
would be enough. I lately made four ventilators in a house that had no shed behind 
it, in this manner : when the wall was raised to within a yard of its full height, aper- 
tures were formed in the manner of a common chimney or fire-place, eighteen inches 
wide, and two feet high, from which a small vent was carried through the coping. On 
tlie top was fixed a horizontal tube, three inches square, and two feet long, with a 
centre pipe fixed into the vent. The aperture or chimney was filled in front, with two 
moveable panels or boards hung in the manner of common sashes, the one to move up 
and the other down, for the admission of air through the tube at top, thus diverting or 
breaking a strong cuiTcnt, which might be prejudicial to the grapes. Ventilators in 
front, at the distance of six or eight feet from one another, may bo made thus : Pierce a 
hole an inch diameter, through the bottom rail of the under sash if the house have no 
upright glass, or through the upper rail of the upright sash, if it have. In this hole 
insert a tin tube to fit, having a funnel mouth outwards, and a fine rose, like that of a 
watering-pot, to fit to it inside. Tlie tube should be made in lengths of two feet each, 
that the air may be either diffused as it enters through the front, or be carried to the 
centre of the house, or farther if thought necessary. When not in use, it should be 
stopped with a cork or plug. When a full stream is wished, the rose need not be put 
on ; but it should if the air be keen. In order the better to collect the air, the funnel 
should be pretty large ; that is, about seven or eight inches diameter. With these and 
with the ventilators at or near to the top of the back wall, as mentioned above, any hot- 
house may safely be aired or ventilated, even in the severest weather ; and also when it 
may be improper to open the glasses, as during rain." 

2695. Annucd repairs. The best gardeners clean the flues, white-wash the v/alls, and 
paint the wood-work of hot-houses every year, or paint every other year. In general, 
once in four or five years m.ay suffice ; but eveiy thing will depend on the purpose to 
which the house is applied ; a system of early and severe forcing being evidently much 
more trying for the roof than moderate sun-heat, aided by occasional fires. The breakage 
of glass from frost amcunts frequently, in the northern counties, to .five per cent, on the 
surface of the roof, especially in flat green-houses, and others, where there is not a sufficient 
heat kept up to prevent the water from freezing in the unputtied interstices ; but we know 
instances of pineries and other stoves where, for ten years, as many panes have not been 
broken. A roof at an angle of not less than 45^, diagonal or fragment glazing, or a 
closed lap, seem preventives to breakage in cold-houses : Stewart's copper lap is still 
m.ore effectual, but produces a dark, heavy effect, not at all suitable to liot-houses of 
any sort, and w ith difficulty admits of repairs. Our opinion is, that by using the best 
crown glass, small panes, and a lap of not more than one eighth of an inch, no breakage 
from frost will take place in any description of roof. If the work is performed in a 
masterly manner, closing this lap by putty, lead, or copper, will be unnecessary even for 
pineries or v; inter forcing. 



Chap. VII. 

Of the general Culture in Forcing Structures and Cidinary Hot-houses. 

2696. By general culture, we are here to understand the fonnation of the soil, the 
arrangement of the trees or plants, and their general treatment when planted, in regard 
to temperature, air, water, training, and other points of management, 

■'LI 



514 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paht III. 



Sect. I. Culture of the Pinery. 
2691. The pine-apple is a native of the tropical regions of Asia, Africa, and South 
America ; and thus, from its original habitation and nature, it requires a higher degree of 
heat than any culinary or fruit-bearing plant at present cultivated as such. It is by no 
means, however, so delicate as many imagine ; for as it v^nll bear a higher degree of heat 
continued for a length of time than either the vine or tlie peach, so, at any period of its 
growth, it will bear, without injury, a degree of cold for a space of time v/hich, though 
short, would have destroyed the foliage of a vine or peach-tree in a state of vegetation. 
" This incomparable fruit," Weeks observes, " can be obtained even in frames without 
fire-heat, having only the assistance of tan and dung ; and is more easily brought to ma- 
turity than an early cucumber." Though liable to the attacks of insects, it is less so than 
the peach, and less speedily injured by them than the common cabbage. Diseases it has 
almost none. The pine is generally grown in pots, and plunged in a bed of tanner's bark, 
or other matter in a state of feraaentation ; recently, however, it has been grown without 
bottom heat, and even with a lower atmospherical temperature than it has been accustomed 
to receive, at least, during winter; but as the experience of gardeners is very limited on 
this mode of treatment, we shall reserve whatever we have to offer on it, till we have 
brought into view the established practices. The fruit being reckoned the most delicious 
of all others, and gardeneirs being valued by the wealtliy in proportion to their success in 
its cultivation, we shall here lay before the reader a copious view of the present modes of 
culture, from the works of the most reputable practical men who have written on the 
subject ; noticing also, occasionally, the practices of those w ho grow them for the London 
market. 

SuBSECT. 1 . Varieties of the Pine mid General Mode of Culture. 
2698. The most esteemed varieties of the pine-apple for general cultivation are, accord- 
ing to Speechly, the following, here arranged in the order of their merits : — 

The queen pine I Pw-idence [Sugar-loaf I Havannah ' I Silver striped 

Brown antigua S.Vincent's, or Montserrat I Ripley Gold striped 

Antigua queen | , green olive | Black Jamaica ' 1 King | Striped queen. 

According to Abercrombie, they are the following : — 

Queen I Prickly striped sugar-loaf I Havannah I Black Jamaica. 

Brown sugar-loaf | Silver striped | Black Antigua | 

M'Phail says, the pines most worthy of cultivation are — 

The black Antigua | Ripley | Black Jamaica ; and | Montserrat. 

Nicol States, the kinds most generally cultivated in hot-houses to be — 

The king I Black Antigua I Prickly striped sugar-loaf | Montserrat | Havaimah ; and 

The queen | Brown sugar-loaf | Smooth striped sugar-loaf | Silver striped | New Providence. 

Griffin recommends — 

J The oval, or queen | Pyramidal, or sugar-loaf ; and | New white Providence. , 

Baldwin^ for expeditious forcing, on which alone he treats, recommends — 

The old queen ; and | Ripley's new queen. 

S2699. Plan of culture. As the.pine-plant is a triennial, bearing fruit once only, unlike the peach and 
vine, and other fruit-bearing plants, its propagation, rearing, and fruiting are necessarily all carried on 
in every garden where it is cultivated. Its culture generally commences in a common hot-bed frame, heated 
by dung; at the end of a period varying from six to nine months, it is removed to a larger framed hot- 
bed, or pit, generally called a succession bed or house; and after remaining there from eight to twelve 
months, according to circumstances, it is removed to its final destination, the fruiting bed, pit, or house. 
Here it shows its fruit, continues in a growing state during a period varying from six to twelve months, 
according to the variety grown, mode of culture, &c. ; and finally ripens its fruit and dies, leaving the 
crown or terminal shoot of the flruit, and one or more suckers or side-shoots as successors. The produc- 
tion of a single pine-apple, therefore, requires a course of exotic culture, varying from eighteen months to 
three years, and generally not less" than two years. 

SuBSECT. 2. Soil. 

2700. The pine-apple soil of Speechly is as follows : " In the month of April or May, let the sward or 



turf of a pasture, where the soil is a strong rich loam, and of a reddish color, be pared off, not more than 
two inches thick : let it then be carried to the pens in sheep-pastures, where sheep are frequently put for the 
purpose of dressing, which places should be cleared of stones, &c. and made smooth ; then let the turf be 
laid with the grass side downwards, and only one course thick; here it may continue two, three, or more 
months, during which time it should be turned with a spade once or twice, according as the i>en is more 
or less frequented by the above animals, who, with their urine and dung, will enrich the turf to a great 
degree, and their feet will reduce it, and prevent any weeds from growing. After the turf has lain a suf- 
ficient time, it should be brought to a convenient place, and laid in a heap for at least six months (if a 
twelvemonth it will be the better), being frequently turned during that time ; and after being made pretty 
fine with the spade, but not screened, it will be fit for use. In places where the abo^^e motle cannot be 
adopted, the mixture made by putting a quantity of sheep's dung (or deer's dung, if it can be got) and turf 
together. But here it must be observed, that the dung should be collected from the pastures when newly 
fallen ; also, that a larger proportion should be added, making an allowance for the want of urine. 1. Three 
wheelbarrows of the above reduced sward or soil, one barrow of vegetable mould from decayed oak-leaves, 
and half a barrow of coarse sand make a compost-mould for crowns, suckers, and voung plants ; 
2, Three wheelbarrows of sward reduced as above, two barrows of vegetable mould, one barrow of coarse 
sand, and one fourth of a barrow of soot, make a compost-mould for fruiting plants. The above composts 
should be made some months before they are wanted, and very frequently turned during that time, 
that the different mixtures may get well and uniformly incorporated. It is observable, that in hot- 
houses, where pine-plants are put in a light soil, the young plants frequently go into fruit the first season 



Book I. 



ARTIFICIAL HEAT. 



515 



(and arc then what gardeners term runners) ; on the contrary, where plants are put in a strong rich soil, 
they will continue to grow, and not fruit even at a proper season : therefore, from tlie nature of tlie eoil 
from whence the sward was taken, the quantity of sand used must be proportioned : when the loam is 
not strong, sand will be unnecessary in the compost for young plants." 

2701. Abercrornbie's compost for the pirie-apple " is formed of the following articles : 1. vegetable 
mouldy 2. the top-spit earth from an upland pasture, loamy, friable, and well reducetl ; 3. hard-fed dung, 
rotten and mellowed by at least a year's preparation; 4. small, pearly river-gravel; 5. white sea-sand; 
6. shell-marl. If no vegetable mould has been provided, light rich earth, from a fallowed part of the 
kitchen-garden, may be substituted : there is no difference of any account between one and the other, 
further than this : the vegetable mould is sure to be virgin earth, from which no aliment has been ex. 
tracted ; the mould from the kitchen-garden, however you may trench, and rest, and enrich it, cannot but 
contain many particles which have given out their fertilising qualities to previous crops. Dung perfectly 
decomposed comes to the same thing as vegetable mould; therefore that one of them which is most at- 
tainable, or best prepared, may fitly serve instead of the other. Of the first three take equal quantities ; 
making three fourths of the intended compost. Constitute the remaining fourth thus : let river-gravel 
and shell-marl furnish each a twelfth part. The small gravel is to afford something for the roots to lay 
hold of ; the sea-sand, to promote lightness and dryness ; the shell-marl, the better to support the growth 
of fibres and integuments and parts not pulpy. Mix with the whole a fortieth part soot, to offend and 
repel worms. Incorporate the ingredients fully ; and turn the heap two or three times before using it." 

2702. The soil for the pine-apple, recommended by M'Phail, " is any sort of rich earth taken from a compart- 
ment of the kitchen-garden, or fresh sandy loam taken from a common, long pastured with sheep, &c. If 
the earth be not of a rich sandy quality, of darkish color, it should be mixed well with some perfectly 
rotten dung and sand, and if a little vegetable mould is put among it, it will do it good, and also a little 
-soot Though pine-plants will grow in earth of the strongest texture, yet I have found by experience 
that they grow most freely in good sandy loam not of a binding quality." 

2703. The soil for the jnne, used by Nicol. " In this, vegetable mould being a chief ingredient, a stock of it 
should be provided wherever the culture of the pine is followed. The kind to be used here is that from 
decayed tree-leaves, and those of the oak are to be preferred ; but when a sufficient quantity of them 
cannot be had, a mixture with those of the ash, elm, birch, sycamore, &c., or indeed any that are not 
resinous, will answer very well. In autumn, immediately as the leaves fall, let them be gathered, and be 
thrown together into an heap ; and let just as much light earth be thrown over them as will prevent them 
from being blown abroad by the wind. In this state let them lie till May, and then turn them over and 
mix them well. They will be rendered into mould fit for use by the next spring ; but from bits of sticks, &c. 
among them, they will require to be sifted before using. Strong brown loam is the next article. This 
should consist of the sward of a pasture, if possible ; which should, previous to using, be well reduced, by 
exposing it a whole year to the action of the v/eather. Pigeon-dung, also, that has lain at least two whole 
years in a heap, has been frequently turned, and well exposed to the weather, is to be used. Likewise 
shell-marl. And, lastlyj sea or river gravel, which should be sifted, and kept in a dry place ; such part of 
it as is about the size of marrowfat peas is to be used. This is the proportion : for crowns and suckers, 
entire vegetable mould, with a little gravel at bottom, to strike in ; afterwards, three fourths vegetable 
mould, and one fourth loam, mixed with about a twentieth part gravel, and two inches entire gravel at 
bottom, till about a year old. For year-olds, and till shifted into fruiting-pots, one half vegetable mould, 
one half loam; to which add a twentieth part gravel, and as much shell-marl, with three inches clean 
gravel at bottom. For fruiting plants, one half loam, a fourth part vegetable mould, and a fourth part 
pigeon-dung ; to which add marl and gravel as above, and lay three or four inches of clean gravel at 
bottom. Ihe above compositions are what I formerly used for pine-plants with much success ; and are 
what may be reckoned good medium soils for the production of pine-apples." 

. 2704. Griffiji's pine-apple soil is fi'ee from many different strange ingredients for composts recommended 
by others ; for after " numerous experiments made with mixtures of deer's, sheep's, pigeons', hens', and 
rotten stable-dung, with soot, and other manures, in various proportions and combinations with fresh 
soil of different qualities from pastures and waste lands, I can venture with confidence to recommend the 
following : Procure from a pasture, or waste land, a quantity of brown, rich, loamy earth, if of a reddish 
color the better, but of a fattish mouldy temperature ; that by squeezing a handful of it together, and 
opening your hand, it will readily fall apart again : be cautious not to go deeper than you find it of that 
pliable texture; likewise procure, if possible, a quantity of deer's dung : if none can be conveniently got, 
sheep's dung will do, and a quantity of sv/ine's dung. Let the above three sorts be brought to some con- 
venient place, and laid up in three different heaps ridge-ways, for at least six months ; and then mix 
them in the following manner, covering the dung with a little soil before it is mixed : four wheelbarrows 
of the above earth ; one barrow of sheep's dung, and two barrows of swine's dung. This composition," 
he adds, " if carefully and properly prepared, will answer every purpose for the growth of pine-plants of 
every age and kind. It is necessary that it should remain a year before applied to use, that it may receive 
the advantage of the summer's sun and winter's frost ; and it need not be screened or sifted before using, 
but only well broken with the hands and spade, as when finely sifted it becomes too compact for the roots 
of the plants." {Tr. on the Pine-apple, p. 26.) 

2705. Baldwin's soil for the pine-apple is still more simple than Griffin's. " From old pasture or meadow 
ground strip off' the turf, and dig to the depth of six or , eight inches, according to the goodness of tlie soil ; 
draw the whole together to some convenient place, and mix it with one half of good rotten dung ; fre- 
quently turn it over for twelve months, and it will be fit for use. This is the only compost-dung for 
young and old plants." {Cult, of Ananas, p. 8.) Weeks's soil agrees with Baldwin's : he takes unex- 
hausted earth and some rotten dung, and gives them a twelve month's preparation, by turning and mixing 
previously to using. {Forcer's Assistant, p. 50.) 

SuESECT. 3. Artificial Heat. 

2706. Bottom heat. The pine, when originally introduced in England, was cultivated, 
without bottom beat, on stages, like other succulents. Ingenuity, however, soon sug- 
gested, and experience approved the advantage of the latter, first in preserving a moist 
equable heat ; and, secondly, in preventing the plants from feeling so much as they other- 
wise would any casual declension in the fire-heat, or sudden vicissitude in the temperature 
or moisture of the external air. " Pines," Nicol observes, " do certainly not require 
so strong a bottom heat as many keep them in ; yet there is something in a mild tan 
heat, so congenial to their natures, that they thrive much better in pots plunged in a bark- 
bed, if properly managed, than when planted out on a bed of earth that is heated, and 
often scorched, by under flues." The tan or bark pit is therefore considered essential to 
the pinery. 

2707. Bark-pits are filled with tan which has previously undergone a course of di aining 
and sweating. The heat thus produced, will last from three to six months, when it is 
sifted and again put into a state of fermentation, by replacing the deficiency occasioned 

L 1 2 



516 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



by decay, and separation of the dust by sifting with new tan. In this way the bark-bed is . 
obliged to be stirred, turned, refreshed, or even renewed several times a year, so as to 
produce and retain at all times a bottom heat of from 75 to 85 degrees in each of the 
three departments of pine culture. These operations being common, we have placed a 
summary of management under the head of General Directions for the JBark-pit, at the end 
of this section. (See Subsect. 8.) 

2708. Dung-heat. Pines are grown to the greatest perfection by many gardeners with- 
out either bark or fire heat simply by the use of dung. A frame double the usual depth 
and also about a third part broader than the common cucumber frames, is placed on a bed 
of dung, or of dung and tan, or dung and ashes, or even dung and faggots mixed or in 
?Jternate layers. Tliis bed of itself supplies heat for a wliile, and when it begins to be 
exhausted, linings are applied in the usual way, and continued for a year or more, reviv* 
ing and renevring them as may become requisite, till the bottom bed becomes too solid 
for the ready admission of heat. The frame and pots are then rem.oved to a prepared bed, 
and this old bottom taken away, or mixed up with fi esh materials. In tliis way, as 
Yv eeks observes, every one that can procure stable-dung may grow pines. In a tract 
On the Ananas and on Ifelons, by A. Taylor, pnnted in 1769, the author tells us 
that lie both rears and fruits pines in a pit formed of boards or of brick-work three 
feet deep, and of any convenient length and M-idth ; and on the walls or boaitls which 
enclose the tan, he places a frame two and a half feet deep in front, and four feet high 
behind. The ends and front are of glass, and the latter is fonned into small sashes, 
which slide in a groove. The back is formed of inch boards ; and against these he places 
a powerful lining of dung. The pit he fills widi tan^ or dung, as may be most convenient ; 

dung," he says, " does as well as tan and only requires a little more trouble, which is 
amply repaid to the gardener by the value of the dung to the garden, when no longer in 
active fermentation. " An anonymous annotator (to the copy of Taylor's book, in the library 
of the Horticultural Society) says, " I find by experience, that the dung of four horses is 
sufficient to work two frames twenty-six feet each in length, and six in breadth ; one for the 
fruiting-house, the other for succession plants ; and that it maybe reasonably expected to 
cut forty fruit yearly after the first year, and that dung as valuable for the field or garden, 
as if this use had not been made of it." (Taylor on Ananas, 8cc. p. 3. ; Diff". Modes of 
Cult. P. App. &c. p. 47.) 

2709- Fire-heat for the atmosphere. The high temperature requisite for the pine in 
every stage of its growth, renders it necessary to have recourse to fire-heat for eight or 
nine months in every year ; unless indeed the plants are grown in pits heated by linings 
of dung ; in wliich case, these linings become necessary every month in the year in order 
to keep up the bottom heat. What respects the management of fires being also common 
to the culture of this plant in all its stages, we have placed the directions as in the case 
of bark-pits under such as are general. (See Subsect. S.) 

2710. Dung-heat and fire-heat com. 
bined. Jenkins, of the Portman nur- 
ser>', London, grows his pine-plants in 
large hot-beds, and fruits them in a 
house ifig. 4oi.), which " though fur. 
nished with flues, yet these have been 
very little used. The heat iniparted to 
the plants is produced by the ferment- 
ation of stable-dung in a pit below the 
plants, the top of which is covered by 
tiles supported by iron rafters, with the 
joints closely cemented, to prevent the 
passage of steam into the house. The 
pots are neither bedded in tan, nor in 
mould, but stand on the files, and the 
interstices between them warm the air nf 
the house." The dung is managed as in 
"West's pit, but with the addition of being 
■watered after it is thrown in, which is 
found to promote fermentation, and the 
intensity of the heat. {Hooker, in Hart. 
Trans, iv. 363.) 

2711. Steam-heat, with or without any of the other modes of heating, has been tried 
extensively as far as respects heating the air of the house, and with the most perfect suc- 
cess. As a bott om heat it has also been tried in ditferent places by turning it into vaults 
of air, or cisterns of water, or chambers of large rough stones (which imbibe the lieat and 
give it slowly out to the bed above) with diiferent degrees of success, but not such as to 
induce cultivators to relinquish fermenting substances in its favor, where tliey can be 
procured at a reasonable expense. 

Subsect. 4. Propagation of ilie Pine-apple. 

2712. The pine is generallt/ propagated hy crowns and suckers, though, -in common with 
every other plant, it may be propagated by seed, Speechly prefers suckers, because ge- 




Cook I. 



PROPAGATION OF THE PINE-APPLE. 



517 



nerally larger than crowns, and those produced near the middle of the stem, he consi- 
ders the best. He does not, however, reject crowns ; but selects the largest, v/hich he 
says, when nine inches in circumference at their bottoms, equal any suckers. ( Treatise on 
the P'me-Apj}le, 2d edit. 22. ) Abercrombie says, " Suckers which rise from the extre- 
mities of the roots, at a distance from the stem, though they have radical fibres, are apt to 
to have ill-formed hearts. With Speechly, he prefers stalk-suckers and strong crowns." 
(Pract. Gard. 621.) Andrews uses suckers only, not from any objection to crowns, but 
from the difficulty and trouble of getting them returned from the fruiterers, and the risk 
of diiferent kinds being mixed through the carelessness of servants. M'Phail, Nicol, 
Griffin, and Baldwin, do not express any preference. 

2713. Separation of crowns and suckers. Speechly and Abercrombie concur in the following directions : 
" When the fruit is served to table, the crown is to be detached by a gentle twist, and returned to the gar- 
dener, if it be wanted for a new plant. Fruit-stalk suckers are taken off at the same period. Suckers at 
the base of the herb are commonly fit for separation when the fruit is mature; though, if the stool be vi- 
gorous, they may be left on for a month after the fruit is cut, the stool receiving plentiful waterings on 
their account. The fitness of a sucker to be removed is indicated, at the lower part of the leaves, by a 
brownish tint there ; on the appearance of which, if the lower leaf be broken off, the sucker is easily dis- 
pJanted by the thumb." Speechly says, " Suckers cannot with saftety be taken from the plants, till they 
are grown to the length of twelve or fourteen inches, v/hen their bottoms will be hard, woody, and full of 
small round knobs, which are the rudiments of the roots. It would endanger their breaking, if they were 
to be taken off' sooner. When the .suckers are taken off, the operation should be performed v/ith great 
care, that neither plant nor sucker may be injured. To prevent v/hich, one hand should be placed at the 
bottom of the plant to keep it steady ; the other as near to the bottom of the sucker as conveniently can ; 
after which, the sucker should be moved tv/o or three times backwards and fomards in a sideway direc- 
tion, and it will fall off v/ith its bottom entire. Whereas, when a sucker is l>ent dov/nwards immediately 
from the plant, it frequently either breaks off in the stem, or splits at the bottom." Andrews allows the 
suckers to remain on the parent plant till they have attained a large size ; sometimes even till they are fit 
to occupy a large pot at once. 

2714;. Season of scparathig crowns and suckers. Crowns and suckers taken off from the parent plant later 
than October, should not be planted before the month of February or March ; for, in the winter time, pro- 
bably, they would not strike root, but rot : they may be hung or laid in a dry part of the hot-house. Un- 
matured young suckers and crowns should lie unplanted, till their natural juices be so exhausted that there 
may be no danger of their rotting after being planted ; but if they are grown to such a size as to be easily 
separated from the parent plant, they m.ay be planted immediately. {Gard. Rem. 83.) 

271.'5. To generate siic':ers. If the old fruiting-plant offers only small bottom-suckers, or fails to furnish 
any, you may bring out good suckers thus : Having waited tiU the fruit is cut, take the old plant in its pot 
but of the bark-bed ; strip off the under leaves near the root, and with the knife cut away the leaves to 
six inches from the bottom. Take out some of the stale mould from the pot, fill up with fresh, and give a 
little water. Plunge the old plant into a bed with a good growing heat. Let the routine culture not be 
neglected, and the old plants will soon send out good suckers. Allov/ these to grow till they are four 
inches long, or more ; and on the signs of fitness, detach them. 

2715. Preparation of crowns or suckers. As soon as either crowns or suckers are detached, twist off some 
of the leaves about the base ; the vacancy thus made at the bottom of the stem is to favor the emission 
of roots. Pare the stump smooth ; then lay the intended plants on a shelf in a shaded part of the stove, 
or of the green-house, or of any dry apartment. Let crowns and fruit offsets lie till the part that adhered 
to the fruit is perfectly healed ; and root-suckers in the same manner, till the part which was miited to the 
old stock is become dry and firm. They wiU be fit to plant in five or six days. As to the prolonged period 
for whicli they remain out of culture, pine-plants have been kept six months without mould, in a mode- 
rately warm dry state, and the only injury has been loss of time. Crowns or suckers coming off before Mi- 
chaelmas should be planted, v/ithout any unnecessary delaj', to get established before the winter. When 
late-fruiting plants do not afford offsets till after Michaelmas, it is best to keep them in a dormant state 
during the months least favorable to artificial culture ; therefore, as you obtain these late offsets, hang 
them up in the house, not too near the flues, to rest till March. Some think it necessary to dry, or win, 
all crowns and suclcers before letting them, and for that purpose lay them on the shelves, &c. of the stove 
for a week or ten days. By this treatment, they certairily may be hurt, but cannot be improved, provided 
they have been fully matured before being taken from off the fruit or stocks, and that these have previ- 
ously had no water for about ten days. They will succeed as well if planted tlie hour they are taken off, as 
if treated in any other way whatever ; and I only advise their being laia aside as above, as being a m.atter 
of conveniency. (Nicol.) 

2in. Planting crowns and sucJcers. Nicol plants his suckers in summer and autumn as the fruit is ga- 
thered, sticking them into the front part of the bark-bed, " where they will strike root as freely as any 
where. If a large proportion of the crop come off early, the crov/ns and suckers may be potted at once, 
and plunged into the nursing-pit ; or they may be tv/isted from off the stoc];.s, and may be laid by, in a dry 
shed or loft for a few days, till the other operations in the pinery be performed, and the nursery-pit be 
ready to receive them and the crov/ns (collected as the fruit have been gathered) ; which, if rooted, may 
be potted, and may be placed for the above time, either in a frame, or in a forcing-house of any kind, as 
they will sustain no injury, though out of the bark-bed for so short a time. Such crowns as have not struck 
root, may be laid aside with the suckers." Griffin generally plants his crowns in the bark till they have 
struck root ; but the suckers he pots at once, unless they are small and green at bottom, v/hen he treats 
them like the crowns. Baldwin says, " Tov/ards the end of September, take off the suckers from the 
fruiting-plants, and lay them in any warm place for about three days ; then strip off a few of their bottom 
leaves, and they v/ill be ready for planting. Plant them in ti)e old tan, on the surface of the bed, without 
pots, abovit four or five inches apart, according to the size of the plants ; observ iiig, that the tallest be 
placed at the back of the frame, and the shortest in the front. In this state let tiiem remain till the fol- 
lowing April." {Cnlt. of A nan. p. 13.) Andrews pots his suckers in September, and plunges them in a bark- 
bed during the winter. 



SuBSECT. 5. Of rearing the Pine apple in the JShasing Depart raerd. 

2718. TIte rearing cf the pine-apple requiring different modes of treatment at different 
-Stages of its progress to maturity, established practice has adopted three iiouKCs or 
pits, through each of whicli the plants pass in succession. They are usually named 
the inirsiiig, succession, and fruiting houses, or pits. The nursing-pit is used for bringing 
on crowns and suckers until they are established in growth, and for tliis purpose they gc- 
ncraliy remain there one vear. 

LIS 



518 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



P^rtIII. 



2719. Nursing-pit with fire-heat. The nursing-pit is generally flued, but some adopt a common dung hot- 
bed, and others the flued pit or bed recommended by M'Phail, and which answers extremely well. The 
minimum depth of the bark-bed in the nursing-house, Abercrombie states, to be three feet ; " the maximum 
three and a half. The less depth is the right, when bark alone is employed to produce the bottom heat ; 
and the greater, when tree-leaves are substituted on account of their weaker influence. In eitlier case, 
the pit may be six inches shallower than that in the fruiting-house ; because the requisite altitude in the 
different pits partly depends on the perpendicular dimension of the i)ots, and on the thickness to which a 
layer of old bark must reach from the surface, to keep the pots from contact with the new bark, that the 
roots may not be burnt. In the nursery-pit, the neutral layer need not be deeper than eight inches." " If 
the bark-bed has been in action to bring forward a previous set of plants, now removed to the succession- 
pit, recruit it by taking away the wasted bark, to the extent of a sixth, fourth, third, or half part, and by 
substituting an equal quantity of fresh. A lively bottom heat is requisite to make pine offsets strike 
freely. 

2720. Some growers of pines, he adds, " who cannot command higher means, choose to cultivate 
crowns and suckers in pits without flues. As the aid of the furnace, however, allows a freer admission of 
air, and prevents the necessity of covering the glasses in very cold days, it is not to be deliberately rejected 
from the nursing-pit, when new buildings, or fundamental alterations, are in agitation — unless the vici- 
nity of some large establishment for horses shouM otier a regular supply of dung, without much expense of 
carriage. When dung is employed, it is proper to force with that alone. The bottom heat from tan-bark 
or tree-leaves is always to be preferred, in combination with flues." 

2721. Speec/it// adopts the flued pit, and occasionally the frame, but generally a part of the succession- 
pit. Nicol the nursing-house. Griffin adopts three houses, the two last diminutives of the first, which is 
the common pine-stove of Nicol and Abercrombie. Baldwin makes use of a succession or nursing bed, 
without fire-heat, and of a fruiting-stove", both small. 

2722. Nursing-jnt, tvithoutjire-heat. " Hot-beds used for growing suckers," Speechly 
observes, " should be well prepared, and the violence of the heat allowed to be fully 
over before the suckers are taken off. It is then to be levelled and covered with eight 
or ten inches of tan, into which to plunge the pots."( Tjwf. on the Fine, 34.) M'Phail, 
who, when gardener to the Earl of Liverpool, was reckoned one of the best pine-growers 
in England, recommends the brick bed of his invention as answering well for small suc- 
cession-plants. " A pit," he says, "built on the same construction, but of larger 
dimensions, without cross flues, is a suitable one for growing pine-apple plants of any 
size ; for by linings of dung the air in it can be kept to a degree of heat svifficient to 
grow and ripen the pine-apple in summer, as well as it can be done with fire-heat ; only 
it will require a little m.ore labor and plenty of dung." Baldwin, as already observed, 
grows both his nursery and succession plants in a bark -bed excited by external linings 
of dung. 

2723. Culture of nursing-j)lants. Whether pits or hot-beds be adopted, the potting, 
temperature, air, water, &c. are nearly the same. 

2724. Potting hy Speedily. For full-sized crowns and suckers, Speechly employs pots six inches diame- 
ter at top, and five and a half inches deep. Less-sized suckers and crowns, he puts in less-sized pots. He 
pots ripe or knobby-bottomed suckers immediately after taking off, letting the others lie a few days to har- 
den. He inserts the end of the sucker no farther into the earth than what is necessary to hold the plant 
fast. Thev are to remain ten or twelve days without water, and afterwards be watered twice a week. 
{Treat, on'tf/e Pine, 37.) 

2125. Potting by Aoercromhie. " The pots, to receive unstruck crowns and suckers, should be three 
inches in diameter, inside measure, and four inches and a half deep, for the smaller plants, four inches in 
diameter, and six inches deep, for the larger. Lay at the bottom of each pot dry shivers, or clean gravel, 
to an inch in depth. FiU the pots with the compost before described, not pressing it too close. With a 
dibble make a hole, for the smaller plants, two inches deep ; and two inches and a half, for the larger. Set 
the plants, and level the surface of the mould, leaving a vacancy half an inch deep from the rim. Plunge 
the pots in the bark-bed down to their rims, leaving between each an interval equal to the diaineter of the 
pot. After planting, shut the house ; and withhold water and admissions of air for some time." 
• 2726. M'P/iail's mode of potting. " The fruit being partly over, and a cucumber brick bed prepared for 
unstruck crowns and suckers, towards the end of August or in September, I planted them in rich earth in 
pots suitable to the size of the plants ; I then had the pots plunged to their rims in the tan-bed in which 
there was a good growing heat ; the Ughts were then shut down close, and as great a heat kept among the 
plants as the heat of the tan and sunshine could raise, and when the sun shone long and very bright, the 
plants were shaded a few hours in the middle of the day. The plants were thus managed till they had 
struck root and begun to grow, when a gentle watering was given to them, and a little air admitted daily. 
About the end of October, or beginning of November, if the state of the bed required it, a little fresh tan 
was added, and if the plants by growth had become crowdeil, some of them were removed into another 
place, and the remainder plunged into the tan-bed, in which they continued till February or March, when 
of course the bed required an addition of fresh taii, which was given it, and the plants plunged again into 
it at such distances one from the other as to give them room to grow." 

2727. Potting by Nicol. Twist off a few of the bottom leaves, and pare the end of the stumj) smooth with 
the knife. Then fill pots of about three or four inches diameter, and five or six inches deep, (the less for the 
least, and the large for the largest plants,) with very fine, light earth, or with entire vegetable mould of 
tree-leaves, quite to the brim ; previously placing an inch of clean gravel in the bottom of each, and ob- 
serving to lay in the mould loosely. Thrust the large suckers down to within two inches of the gravel, and 
the small ones and crowns, two inches into the mould ; firming them with the thumbs, and dressing oft'the 
mould, half an inch below the margin of the pots. Then plunge them into the bark-bed, quite down to, or 
rather below the brim, especially of the smaller pots. If the pots be placed at the clear distance of three 
or four inches from each other, according to the sizes of the plants, they will have sutticient room to grow 
till next shifting. t > / b 

2728. Potting by Griffin ajid Baldwin. Griffin plants suckers and crowns in pots five inches diameter, 
and four inches deep ; and very strong ones in pots seven and a quarter wide by six and a half deep. Bald- 
\wm plants his nursing plants in the bark-bed, without pots. 

2729. Temperature of nursing-iilants. Speechly does not mention his summer tem- 
perature for nursing-plants, farther than referring to a peculiar thei-mometer which he 
vised, and " made for sale ;" but he says, after the beginning of November, " the house 
should be kept in a cold state, and little or no water given the plants till the middle or 
latter end of January." {Treat, on the Fine, p. 39.) 



Book I. 



PINERY. — NURSING DEPARTMENT. 



2739. Abercrombie Is more definite: "The artificial heat in the nursing-pit is 55? for tiie minimum. 
This will keep the plants, in winter, secured from a check, and a few degrees above a dormant state. It is 
enough to aim at this minimum, when dung-heat is employed ; for as its decline is never abrupt, there is no 
danger in going pretty close to the lowest extreme. When fire-heat is applied, it is better to aim at 60*', 
as the charge in the flues is more liable to fluctuate suddenly. The maximum artificial heat, in winter, 
need not go beyond 65* : but as the season for excitement advances, this becomes the minimum. When the 
plants are growing vigorously in autumn, or spring, the artificial maximum is 70°. In winter, the maxi- 
mum, with the aid of sunshine, should not be allowed to rise higher than 70°, because the benefit of airing 
would be lost : in summer, the maximum, under the effect of strong sunshine, may rise to 85° ; to keep it 
down to this, give, in July and August, the benefit of air freely." 

2731. M'Phail says., " The heat of the air in the nursing-pit, exclusive of sun-heat, is not required to be 
greater than from 60° to 65°." But at first planting of crovyns and suckers, he gives them " a great heat 
and no air till they begin to grow." {Gard. Rem. 81. 319.) 

2732. Nicol directs the temperature of the nursing-pit in January with fire-heat, to be kept, as near as 

Possible, to 65°, mornings and evenings ; and in sunshine, on good days, it may be allowed to rise about 
0°. In March, from 70° to 80°, and after newly potting and plunging unstruck crowns and suckers, to 80? 
or 85°. 

2733. Covering at nights. One great advantage of growing pines in pits is, that they 
may easily be covered with mats, or by other means, in winter. Abercrombie considers 
covering not positively indispensable to flued pits, in which the minimum degree of 
fire-heat is regularly maintained; but it will add to the security of the plants, and 
admit of some retrenchments in fuel, if some warmer screen, in addition to that of the 
glass, is applied at night, during all the season when frost prevails, or may be expected. 
For this purpose, provide either double mats, or a strong canvass cover. The latter is 
commodious, because it can be mounted on rollers, and let down at will, or drawn up 
under a weather-board. Remove the covering at sunrise, that the essential benefit may 
not be obstructed. 

2734. M'Phail covers his pits during the colder months. In January, he " covered up about three or 
four o'clock in the afternoon, and uncovered in the morning about eight or nine. In very cold weather, 
it may be necessary, sometimes, not to uncover them in the day-time, only as far as to give them a little 
light" 

2735. Nicol says, " The pit should be carefully covered up soon after sunset every evening, either with 
double mats, or with a proper thick canvass cover, made on purpose for it, and mounted on rollers. The 
cover should be removed by sunrise in the morning, and should never be kept on through the day, except 
occasionally, in very severe weather. For if all the light possible be not admitted to the plants, they lose 
color, and become sickly. By using a proper cover, however, in the night, and only in very severe weather 
in the day, at particular times, a considerable deal of fuel may be saved." 

2736. Griffin, Baldwin, and Weeks oflFer nothing on covering any description of pine frame or pit, 

2737. Air. When the weather is warm, Speechly admits a great deal of air" to 
nurse-plants. Having potted unstruck oflfsets, Abercrombie admits little or no air until 
the plants begin to grow ; but as soon as the leaves show that the root has struck, he 
gives plenty of air, in order to make the leaves expand, and the entire plant robust. 
{Pr. G. p. 628.) Speaking of the winter treatment of pines, M'Phail says, " Admit 
air in fine days into every place where pine-plants are." In warm summer weather, he 
admits some all night. (G. Rem. p. 142.) 

2738. Nicol says, " Air should be admitted to the nursing-pit every good day to a certain extent; 
dividing the quantity admitted equally, that there may be a regular circulation in all parts of the pit. Even 
in hard frost, when the sun shines, two or three of the lights should be slipped down, to let the rarefied air 
escape at top." After potting unrooted offsets, he gives no air till the heat begins to rise in the bark-bed j 
but " as the plants take on growths, it must be given in larger portions, especially in sunshine, so as to 
keep down the thermometer to 85° or 80°." Griffin gives air at all favorable opportunities. Baldwin fronj 
the back and ends, but not from the roof, either in summer or winter. 

2739. Watering the nursing-jnt. Speechly waters olFsets over the leaves after they 
have begun to strike, but gives to ail pines much less water in a moist than a dry season, 
depending on the humidity of the air. (Tr. on Pine, p. 37.) He waters once a week or 
fortnight in September and October, and then leaves off till the middle or end of 
January, depending on the moisture of the tan, and the state of inaction of the plants. 
In frosty weather, he sometimes plunges the pots so deep in the tan that their rims 
may be covered two or three inches in order to give heat, and prevent the surface of 
the mould from becoming too dry. In March, he waters once in a week or ten days, 
and advances to twice a week in summer. (Tr. on Pine, p. 47.) 

2740. Abercrombie, after planting crowns and suckers, gives no water till " the heat of the bark has 
risen, and the plants show signs of striking. Then water moderately at the root ; but give none over the 
herb until the heart-leaves begin to grow. Meanwhile repeat watering at the root every four days. 
After the plant is established, water freely at the root, and give sprinklings over the leaves from a fine 
rose-pan." 

2741. M'Phail says, " No certain rule can be laid down for the exact quantity of water that must be 
given to the pine-apple plant, or how often ; nor is it necessary to be particular. These and many other 
matters must be left to the gardener who has the care of the plants," In July, " besides watering the 
earth in the pots in which the roots of the plants grow, when it begins to get dry, the leaves and fruit 
should be watered now and then, till they are all wetted, with clean water out of a fine-rosed pot ; the 
water should be as warm as the medium heat of the air in the house. The best time to water over the 
leaves, is about eight o'clock in the morning, or about four in the afternoon ; though it will do them no 
harm to water them at any time of the day, if you keep the air in the house sweet, and up to a heat 
strong enough for the growth of the pine-plant. The plants in this month will want water about once a 
week, and if the weather be hot, perhaps oftener. However, it is rare that pine-apple plants require 
water oftener than twice a week." 

2742. Nicol says, nurse-plants require very little water in winter ; " perhaps a little only once in eight 

L 1 4 



520 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING 



Part III. 



or ten ckys, or even at greater intervals, if the weather be moist and hazy. It is safer, in winter, to give 
too little,, rather than too much water to pine-plants, nor should they be watered over head at this season. 
They should be watered in the forenoon of a sunny day, at this time of the year, in order that any water 
spilt on the bark, or in the hearts of the plants, may be exhaled by the heat of the sun, and by an extra 
quantity of air purposely admitted. This precaution, however, is only necessary for the sake of such 
crowns and suckers as have been struck late last season, and are not very well rooted ; such being more 
apt to damp off than others that are better established." In summer he supplies water regularly and 
plentifully once in three days ; giving the proper quantity at root, and then a dewing over the leaves. 
Water frequently with the draining of the dunghill. 

2743. Temjierature of the ivater. M'Phail says, " Eighty degrees is the medium 
heat of the water with which pines should be watered." He adds, " I would advise 
never to water them with water under seventy, unless in very wann weather, when the 
earth about their roots will soon regain its natural warmth." ((?. Ee7n. p. 128.) 

2744. Steaming. M'Phail obtains this in summer " by sprinkling the flues and paths 
now and then with clean water in the afternoon, and shuts up the houses with a strong 
heat in them." (G. Bern. p. 240.) 

2745. Shading. This, all the authors quoted, agree in recommending during bright 
sunshine, after newly potting offsets. Aberci-ombie says, " shade them with thin mats 
in the middle of hot days ; dividing the hours before and after twelve, so as to amount 
to a fourth of the morning, and a third of the afternoon." (Pr. G. p. 629.) Speechly 
approves of shading, and effects it in an ornamental and useful manner by training vines 
on the rafters. 

2746. Shifting nurse-plants. " Offsets planted early in the season," Speechly says, 
*' should be carefully looked over in September, and all the forward crowns and 
suckers that are grown large, and with an appearance of being under-potted, should 
be removed into larger-sized pots, with their roots- and bulbs entire." {Tr. on Fine, 
p. 38.) 

2747. Abercrombie says, " When offsets have been potted in July or August, remember by October to 
examine the roots of the most vigorous plants. Should any have filled the pots, shift them into larger ; 
but new roots will not often have filled the pots at that inconvenient period." {Pr. G. p. 625.) 

2748. M'Phail does not shift unstruck crowns and suckers, planted in the end of August or September, 
till the following March or April, and pots with entire balls like Nicol. 

' 2749. Nicol new-pots offsets planted in summer in the following March. " Let them be shaked out 
entirely; the balls be quite reduced ; the roots be trimmed of all straggling and decayed fibres ; and let 
them be replaced in the same, or in similar pots. The proper size of pots, however, in which to put 
crowns and suckers struck last season, is about four inches inside diameter at top, and six inches deep. 
A little clean gravel should be laid at the bottom of each pot, in order to drain off extra moisture, and 
this should be observed in the potting of pine-plants of all sorts. I have generally observed, that if the 
bark-heat be not violent, the plants will push very strong fibres into this stratum of gravel, in which they 
seem to delight. I therefoi-e generally make it two inches thick in small pots, and three or four in larger 
ones, less or more, according to their sizes. From the time I first adopted this mode of potting, I hardly 
ever had an instance of an unhealthy plant ; and this very particular, together with that of keejvlng the 
plants always in a mild bottom heat, is of greater importance in the culture of pines, than all the ether 
rules that have been given respecting them, out of the ordinary way. The roots of pines seem to delight 
in gravel; and 1 have been careful to introduce it into the mould for plants oT all ages. I generally 
used small sea-gravel, in which was a considerable pi'oportion of shells, or chips of shells, with other 
particles of a porous nature ; and I have uniformly observed the finest fibres cling to these, and often 
insinuate themselves through the pores, or embrace the rougher particles. Therefore, if sea-gravel can 
be obtained, prefer it ; and next, river-gravel ; but avoid earthy pit-gravel, and rather use sharp sand, or 
a mixture of pounded stone, chips, and brick-bats. The plants being repotted, plunge them in the 
bark-bed again, quite down to the rims of the pots, keeping t'lem perfectly level. Eight or nine 
inches from centre to centre will be distance sufficient. When they are all placed, give a little aired 
water, to settle the earth about their roots. This need not be repeated till the heat in the bed rise to the 
pots, after which, as the plants will now begin to grow fi-eely, they must be watered at the root once in 
four or five days ; and they may have a dewing ovSr head, from the fine rose of a watering-pot, occasion- 
ally, if the weather be fine." 

2750. In May, Nicol again shifts, " but the plants are not to be shaken out at this time, but are to be 
shifted, balls entire, into pots of about six inches diameter, and eight inches deep. If the roots be any- 
wise matted at bottom, or at the sides, they must be carefully singled out ; and in potting, be sure that 
there be no cavity left between the ball and the sides of the new pot. In order the more effectually to 
prevent which, use a small, blunt-pointed, somewhat wedge-shaped stick, to trindle in the mould wi'th ; 
observing that it be in a dry state, and be sifted fine ; and also to shake the pot well (potting on a bench 
or table), the better to settle the earth about the ball. Pots of this size should be filled to v/ithin half an 
inch of their brims (the balls being covered about an inch with fresh earth), as the whole will settle 
about as much, and so leave a full inch for holding water, which is enough. In preparing the plants for 
potting, observe to twist off a few of the bottom leaves, as they ahvays put out fine roots from the lower 
part of the stem. Also, before letting the plant out of hand, trim off the points of any leaves that may 
have been bruised or anywise injured in the shifting. Replunge the pots to the brim, as before, observing 
to keep them quite level, at the distance of fifteen inches from centre to centre of the plants on a medium ; 
then give a little water, which need not be repeated till the heat rise to the pots." 

2751. Nicol, ill November, shifts such others whose roots have filled their pots, and have become any- 
wise matted. " p:xamine any you suspect to be so, and let them be shifted into pots of the next size im- 
mediately above those they are in ; keeping the balls entire, and only singling out the netted fibres at 
bottom. The rest should be trimmed of any dead leaves at bottom of their stems, and should have a 
little cf the old mould taken from off the surface of the pots ; which replace with fresh earth ; filling the 
pots fuller than u 'ual, as but little water v/ill be required till next shifting time in the spring. The 
whole should then be replaced in the bark-bed as before, and should be plunged quite to the rims of the 
pots ; giving a little water to settle the earth about their roots, which need not be repeated till the heat 
rise in the bed." 



2752. Insects and diseases. See this article under General Diirctions. (Subsect. 8.) 



Book I. 



PINERY, — SUCCESSION DEPARTMENT. 



521 



SuBSECT. 6. Succession department. 

2753. The culture of sticcession jnne-plants necessarily coincides in many particulars 
with that of nurslings ; but less heat is generally allowed the former in order not to 
draw them ; and they are allowed plenty of room in the bed, frequently shifted, and 
abundance of air admitted, in order to make them broad-bottomed and bushy : thus 
streiigthening the heart or root part, in order that it may tiarow up a strong fruit the 
second or third year. 

2754. Growing succession plants ivithout fire-heat. M'Phail says, " Succession pine- 
I^ants grow exceedingly well in pits covered with glazed frames, linings of warm dung 
being applied to them in cold frosty weather. The north wall of a pit for this purpose 
had best be only about four feet above the ground ; and if about two feet high of it, the 
whole length of the wall, beginning just at the surface of the ground four feet below the 
height of the wall, be built in the form of the outside walls of my cucumber bed, the 
lining will warm the air in the pit more easily than if the wall were built solid. The 
linings of dung should not be lower in their foundation than the svirface of the tan in the 
pits in which the plants grow (for it is not the tan that requires to be warmed, but the 
air among the plants) : and as during the winter the heat of the air in the pit among the 
plants, exclusive of sun-heat, is not required to be greater than from sixty to sixty-five 
degrees, strong linings are not wanted : one against the north side, kept up in cold 
weather nearly as high as the wall, will be sufficient, unless the weather get very cold in- 
deed, in which case a lining on the south side may be applied. In cold, frosty weather, 
a covering of hay or straw, or of fern, can be laid on the glass above mats in the night- 
time." 

2755. Most nurserymen and growers of pines for the London market employ dung-beds of the common 
kind, keeping up the heat by powerful linings. The same practice is successfully adopted by Miller and 
Sweet, of Bristol. Baldwin combines the nursing and succession beds, growing both on tan with dung- 
linings. 

2756; Shifting and potting. The middle of March Speecbly considers the most eligi- 
ble time for sliifting and potting such nurse-plants as are to be removed to the succession., 
house. " If the v/ork is done sooner," he says, " it will prevent the plants from striking 
freely; and if deferred longer, it will check them in their summer growth. " — In this 
shifting, he "always shakes off the whole of the ball of earth, and cuts olF all the roots 
that are of a black color, carefpjlly preserving such only as are white and strong. He 
then puts the plants into pots eight inches and a half diameter at the top, and seven 
inches deep, in entirely fresh mould. The bark-bed is renewed, the pots plunged to 
the rims, the house is kept pretty warm, till the heat of the tan arises ; the plants are then 
sprinkled over tlje leaves with water, and watered first once a week and afterwards twice 
a week, till next shifting in the beginning of August, when they are shifted into fruiting- 
pots with their balls entire. The size of tliese pots is eleven inches and a I^alf at top by 
ten inches deep." 

2737. Ahercrotnbie observes, that most of the remarks on the nursing-house will apply to the succession- 
pit. " Sometimes the plants, originated in the nursing-pit in August or September, will be fit to bring into 
the succession-house in March or April following ; and sometimes not till the anniversary season. Those 
from late fruiterers, originated in March, will be most established by the end of summer." 

2758. Introductory shifting. Where at the first shifting of rootod plants, they are 
transferred to this department, proceed as in nursing-pit, except in regard to the size of 
the pots, which should be twenty-four inches, or about seven inches across, and nine 
deep. When the plants are a year old, and the shifting for culture here is the second or 
third, begin as before : — make arrangements to complete the business in one day. Be 
prepared with a bed of lively tan, the number of pots, the compost for pines, and some 
clean sea-gravel or shivers. As each plant is taken from the nursing-pit, tie the leaves 
together. Turn them out of the old pots singly. Then proceed as follows : — Shake off 
the ball of mould. Strip off a few of the lower leaves. Cut the roots off entirely : fur- 
ther, if the roots are scanty, or decaying, prune away a small portion of the stem, cutting 
into the quick. Pot the plants ; plunge them in the tan, not entirely to their rims, till 
the new heat rising from the bark can be ascertained. Leave about five inches space 
between each. Keep them under a strong heat; and forbear to give water, or to admit 
cold air, till the plants have struck root. 

2759. Intermediate shifting. When plants are to remain in the succession-house a 
year, shift them in the March following their introduction. Let the fresh pots be full 
eight inches in diameter, and ten inches deep. It is one of the most availing precau- 
tions against the premature fruiting of pines, to allov/ rising plants a capacious bed, and 
free space for the herb to expand. In turning healthy plants, now, out of the old pots, 
endeavor to preserve the ball of earth entire. But where plants appear to be sickly, 
to be infested with insects, or to have bad roots, brush away the old earth entirely : thevi 
with a long knife trim the longest fibres; and if any part of the main root be unsound, 



522 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



cut it away. Strip off some of the lower leaves. Replant in the new pots. Set the 
plants in the bark-bed, leaving the pots partly out, lest the first heat should be too 
strong. There should be a distance of seven inches from pot to pot. Water full-rooted 
plants gently, to settle the mould. Plants divested of roots are not at present to receive 
water. 

2760. Second intermediate sliifting. The roots of large plants which were shifted in 
J\Iarch should be examined at the end of May, or in June. If they have filled the pots, 
it will be necessary to shift them into pots of an increased size, so as to admit new com- 
post to the extent of an inch all round the old ball. The diameter of the cradle at top 
should be nine inches ; the depth twelve, including an inch of pearly gravel at the bottom. 
If the roots are matted, carefully disentangle them: prune oflp old fibres, or not, ac- 
cording as the root has been spared or retrenched. In all cases, cut away unsound parts 
of the root, and slip off a few of the oldest leaves. After replanting, disti-ibute the pots 
eight inches apart over the surface of the bed, without plunging them to their full depth, 
till the heat of the renewed tan is ascertained. 

2761. M'Pkail says, " If in March you have any nurse-pines a year old, shift and repot them at this sea- 
son. Having a bed prepared for them, strong enough to raise a good heat, take the plants and tie their 
leaves together carefully; then turn them out one after another, and cut all their roots off close to the 
stem ; and if the stems of them be bare of roots, or appear rotting or black, cut a part of them off up to the 
quick. Hub the mould clean from the stems, divest them of a few of the lower leaves, and pot them in 
good rich mould, in small pots suitable to the size of the plants, and plunge them in the tan up to their 
rims. Let all this work be done in one day, if it be convenient. Keep a strong heat about them, and give 
them no air nor water till they have struck root and begin to grow; but remember, the earth should be 
moist in which they are potted, for no plants can make shoots without moisture. When large succes- 
sion plants have been divested of their roots, and potted in the month of March, they will probably by this 
time have filled the pots with roots; if so, they ought to be shifted into pots a size larger, just large 
enough to admit of mould falling easily round their ball. If they were not shifted when the roots begin to 
get matted, it would check them, and probably make them fruit in August or September. In August or 
September, the plants are again shifted into pots large enough to admit earth easily round their balls be- 
tween their roots and the sides of the pots." In these pots, he lets the plants remain in general till the 
fruit is over. (Gard. Bern. 82.) 

2762. M'Fhail and Speechly agree in remarking, that " some large kinds of pine-apple plants require 
three seasons to grow before they can bring large-sized fruit, such as the black Antigua, the Jamaica, the 
Ripley, &c. ; therefore, in the month of April or May, after they have been planted upwards of a year, it 
is best to take them out of the pots, and to cut of!" all their roots close to the stem, or leave only a few 
which are fresh and strong, and then plant them again in good earth in clean pots, and plunge the pots in 
a tan-bed with a lively heat in it. After this process a stronger heat than usual must be kept in the house, 
till the plants have made fresh roots and their leaves be perceived to grow, when a little water may be 
given to them, which, together with a good bottom and top heat, will make them grow finely." 

2763. Nicol recommends a general potting of the succession plants in August, when the fruit are aU or 
nearly all cut ; removing the old stocks from which the fruit had been cut to make room for them in the 
fruiting-pit. "The nurse-plants now become the succession; the succession the fruiters for next season, 
and the croAvns and suckers produced by the plants whose fruit have been cut, occupy the nursing-pit." 
{Kal. 410.) The succession plants, before removal into the fruiting-pit, must be shifted into pots of about 
eleven or twelve inches diameter, and fourteen or fifteen inches deep. The plants should be plunged en- 
tirely in old tan to within an inch or two of their brims, keeping them quite level, and eighteen or twenty 
inches centre from centre. Great care must be taken to keep the heat of the bark-bed moderate and 
steady, lest the plants should start into fruit, which, if they did, they would be next to lost. I would 
rather have a one-year-old than a two-year-old plant show now, as the loss would evidently be less; but 
frequently the former will bring a better fruit than the latter in the end of the season. Some of the succes- 
sion plants, potted from the nurse-pit in August, may require repotting in November ; but, in general, not 
till March, when the plants are to be shaken out of their pots, and replaced in the same or similar pots 
(seven or eight inches diameter, by nine or ten deep) in fresh mould, placing some gravel at bottom. The 
plants are then to be replunged (the bark-bed being refreshed, &c. agreeably to the general mode of man- 
agement laid down in Subsect. 8.) at the distance of fifteen inches from each other. In this state they re- 
main till May, when they are reshifted with their balls into pots a size larger (nine or ten inches diameter, 
and twelve deep), and plunged tiU August, v/hen they are shifted into fruiting-pots (eleven or twelve 
inches diameter, and fourteen or fifteen deep) and removed to the fruiting-pit as above described. 
(,Kal. 413.) 

2764. Griffin shifts his succession plants for the second time, in March, into pots nine inches in dia- 
meter, by eight inches deep, " turning each singly out of its present pot, with the ball of earth entire 
around its roots, unless any appear unhealthy or any ways defective, when it is eligible to shake the earth 
from the roots, and trim ofF all the parts that appear not alive. He plunges them in the bark (refreshed 
as at each shifting) eighteen inches from plant to plant in the row, and twenty inches' distance row from 
row." It is to be observed here, that Griffin's practice, in not divesting the plants entirely of their balls of 
earth at this shifting, agrees with Baldwin's, but differs from that of all the other authors quoted. Griffin, 
it is alleged, obtains larger fruit ; and Baldwin, by his practice, fruits the plants a year sooner, that is, 
in fifteen and eighteen months. 

2765. Baldwin takes up the crowns and suckers planted in the tan in September in the succeeding April ; 
divests them of all their roots, which " must not," he says, " be taken off at any future transplanting," 
ans! put into pots of five, six, or seven inches' diameter, according to the size of the plant. About the mid- 
dle of the following June, when the pots are beginning to be filled with roots, take out the plants with 
their balls entire, and put them into pots about nine inches in diameter ; replunge them into your bed, and 
Jet them remain till the end of September. {Cult, of Anan. p. 15.) 

2766. llie practice of shaking off the balls of earth, and cutting off the loive^' roots of pities 
in the second year's spring shifting, has at first sight an unnatural appearance, and vari- 
ous theorists,, and some gardeners, recommend shifting the plants from first to last with 
their balls entire. On attentively examining the pine-plant, however, it will be found, tliat, 
in its mode of rooting, it may be classed with the strawberry, vine, and crowfoot, which 
throw out fresh roots every year, in part among, but chiefly above the old ones. This 
done, the old ones become torpid and decay, and to cut them clear away, ff it could be 
done in all plants of this habit, would no doubt be assisting nature, and contribute to the 



Book I. 



PINERY. — SUCCESSION DEPARTMENT. 



523 



growth of the new roofs. At the same time, it is to be observed, that encouraging, in an 
extraordinary degree, the production of roots, though it will ultimately increase the vigor 
of the herb and fruit, will retard their progress. 

2767. On shifling with the balls entire, Speecbly has the following judicious observ- 
ations, which coincide ^ith those we have above submitted : — 

2768. First, It is observable, that the pine-plant bogins to make its roots at the very bottom of the stem, 
and as the plant increases in size, fresh roots are produced from the stem, still higher and higher j and the 
bottom roots die in proportion : so that, if a plant in the greatest vigor be turned out of its pot as 
soon as the fruit is cut, there will be found at the bottom a part of the stem, several inches in length, 
naked, destitute of roots, and smooth : now, according to the above method, the whole of the roots 
which the plant produces being permitted to remain on the stem to the last, the old roots decay and 
turn mouldy, to the great detriment of those afterwards produced. Secondly, The first ball which 
remains with the plant full two years, by length of time will become hard, cloddy, and exhausted of its 
nourishment, and must, therefore, prevent the roots afterwards produced from growing with that free- 
dom and vigor, which they would do in fresher and better mould. Thirdly, The old ball continually re- 
maining after the frequent shiftings, it will be too large when put into the fruiting-pot, to admit of a sutK- 
cient quantity of fresh mould to support the plant till its fruit becomes ripe, which is generally a whole 
year from the last time of shifting. 

2769. Temperature. Speecbly approves of rather a lower top and bottom heat for 
pines in the winter season than what some later authors recommend. " There is nothing 
so prejudicial to the pine-apple plant, (insects and an overheat of the tan excepted,) as 
forcing them to grow by making large fires, and keeping the hot-house warm at an im- 
proper season, wliich is injudiciously done in many hot-houses. It is inconsistent with 
reason, and against nature, to force a tropical plant in this climate in a cold, dark season, 
such as generally happens here in the months of November and December ; and plants 
so treated, will in time show the injury done them ; if large plants for fruiting, they 
generally show very small fruit-buds with weak stems ; and, if small plants, they seldom 
make much progress in the beginning of the next summer." " In the hot regions," 
Abercrombie observes, " to which the pine-apple is indigenous, the growth of the herb 
and fruit proceeds, at all times of the year, as the new plant may happen to spring, and as 
the advancement of the herb, and the expansion of the organs of fructification follow at 
natural intervals. Thus the rising and intermediate pines have, at home, the same heat 
as fruiting plants. As the force of the climate is always equal to conduct the plant to 
the next stage, whatever the present may be, nature's plants always show their blossoms 
opportunely ; and the fruit is swelled to perfection, however diiferent periods of growth 
in plants of one family fall together. But, under a course of artificial culture, although 
a similar promiscuous succession may go on, and be cherished to the end of fruiting with- 
out miscarriage ; yet to let the critical periods of growth fall in winter, without any failure 
of the crop, or debasement of the fruit, requires so much additional expense and attend- 
ance, that our cultivators of pines endeavour to keep the viain stock of established plants 
just vegetating in winter, and to bring the time of full expansion in the herb, and as 
much as may be of the long and trying time of fructification, to coincide with the spring 
and summer of this climate. The dependence of the plant on artificial excitement is 
then so much less. Hence, though it is contrary to the free progress of nature, the suc- 
cession pines are kept under a temperature rather lower than that of the nursing-pit, in 
order that while the complete developement of the herb is provided for, the plant may not 
be excited into fruit prematurely in regard to its age, nor unseasonably as to the course of 
the natural climate during the period which the fruit will take to ripen." 

2770. Tlie minimum temperature for succession plants, 
on which the preservation of a gentle course of growth de- 
pends, cannot be safely reduced lower than that which is 
specified under Temperature in Nursing Department. But 
it is important to carry the maximum, as it respects both 
fire-heat, and the accumulation of sun-heat in the cham- 
ber, no higher in this than is fixed for that department, 
and rather to aim at a maximum from two to five degrees 
less intense. Thus the double object, of avoiding to excite 
the plants too strongly, and of giving air at a good oppor- 
tunity, will be consulted. {See the Table.) 

2771. M'Phail says, " Let the succession pine-plants have 
about the same degree of heat to their roots in thetan-bed, 
and in the air of the house about them, as 1 have recom- 
mended for the fruiting plants ; viz. from SO to 100 at the 
bottom of the pots, and from 65 to 80 in the atmosphere of 
the house. Some writers," he says, " recommend that a 
less heat be given to succession plants than to fruiting ones. 
I can see no reason for making the difference, Jior did t 
make a practice of doing it, except to young plants in 
winter, in pits without fire-heat, which at that season could 
not at all times be kept to that degree of heat which might 
be done by the influence of fire. When succession plants 
are kept in a less degree of heat than that necessary for fruiting them, they require a longer time to bring 
tiieni to a proper size for producing large fruit; and of course the expense of rearing them is greater 
tiian when tliey are kept in a vigorous growing state. Nothing better suits a pine-apple, nor any fruit- 
bearing plant, than to keep it in a vigorous growing state, from the time it is planted till it ripen its fruit." 
{Gard. Rem. 126.) 

2772. Nicol says, " The temperature in January by fire-heat should be kept as near to 60° as po.^isible, 
and even in sunshine, should not be allowed to pass 65°, lest the plancs_ start into fruit." In May, he in- 



Standard for the Thcrmomsler in the 
Succession-House. 





MINIMUM. 


MAXIMUM. 






From the 








From the 


Clim2te 


From Ar- 


From 




Climate 


and Tan 


tificial 


Sunshine 




andDuiig- 


with Fh-e 


j Heat. 


and con- 




heat. 


when ne- 
cessai-y. 


i 
1 


linedAir. 


Sept. 


65 


65 " 




68 




Oct. 


58 


62 




O-l 


70 


Nov. 


56 


60 




02 


OS 


Dec. 


55 


00 




62 


65 


Jan. 


55 


CO 




02 


06 


Feb. 


58 


60 




05 


70 


Mar. 




65 




68 


70 




62 


65 




68 


70 


iv/ay 


64 


06 




OS 


72 


.Tuns 


06 


66 




68 




July 


68 


68 




68 


si) 


Aug. 


70 


70 






SO 



524 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



creases the heat to between 65" and 70° in the night. In August, he keeps down the thermometer to 75° 
or in the day-time. In September, he returns to 65° in the night, and 70<=' or 72" with air in the day. 
In October, he descends to 60*^ mornings and ei^enings, and 65° in sunshine. 

2773. Griffin differs from the above authors in recommending eO** as the heat proper for the pine in every 
stage, not exceeding five or six degrees over or under. The bottom heat he considers proper, is from 
90 to 100 degrees ! {Tr. on the Pine, p. 60. 66.) 

2774. Baldwin does not mention at what temperature he keeps his succession-pit. 

2775. Covering at vights. Where succession plants are grown in pits or frames, this is 
allowed on all hands to be most advantageous, by saving fuel, and preventing the risk of 
an injurious cooling, which in pits and houses warmed by fire, and unprotected but by 
the glass, will sometimes happen under the best management. Practical men recommend 
mats, canvass, litter, &c. laid on the frames ; but a great improvement consists in keep- 
ing the covering of whatever nature, and especially if of mats or canvass, at not less than 
six inches on the principle experimentally illustrated by Dr. Wells in his Essai/ on Dew ; 
Leslie, in his experiments on concentric cases (^Essay on Heat), and derivable from the 
fact known to scientific men (See Young's Led.), that heat follows the same general laws 
as light. 

2776. Speedily and Nicol complain of the great bi-eakage of glass, by covering with mats, litter, &c. 

2777. Sf /"ore adopts portable covers of straw, arranged in the manner of thatcli, and which may be com- 
pared to the panels of rqed fences or screens. They are formed on four laths, fixed at the same width as 
the pit or I'rame one way, and not more than four feet apart the other. The chief advantage is, that as the 
water runs off the thatch, tlie interior remains perfectly dryj so that there is 3io consumpfion of heat by 
the creation of vapor in those parts which are near the glass ; " whereas mats, cloth, loose straw, and 
other similar coverings become impregnated with moisture every night from dew, rain, or snow, and the 
evaporation which is thereby constantly generated, and greatly augmented by the contact of the warm 
glass, causes a vast and continued drain of heat." Another advantage is the facility with which thevmay 
be put on and taken off, and the little risk there is of breaking glass during these operations. (Hart. 
Trans, iii. 296.) 

2778. Air. Speechly considers a due proportion of air as essential to the goodness of 
pine-plants. The want cf it v, ill cause them to grow with long leaves and weak stems ; 
and too great a quantity, or air given at improper seasons, will starve the plants, and cause 
them to grow yellow and sickly. Little air will be wanted in winter ; but letting down 
the glasses, even for a few minvites in the middle of the day, should never be neglected in 
fine weather, to let out the foul air. This will cause the plants to grow with broad leaves, 
and stiff and strong stems, provided they have room in the bed. Air may be admitted 
all night in the hot season, care being takin^^ that the glasses are left in such a manner as 
to prevent tiie rain, in case any falls, from coming on the plants. (Tr. on the Pine, 
p. 75.) 

2779. Abercromhie gives abundance of air in July and August, but with due caution the rest of the year. 

2780. M^Phail admits more or less air every fine day during spring and autumn, and abundance in the 
summer months, which is also the practice of Nicol, Griffin, and Weeks. Baldwin seems to admit air 
rather more sparingly than these gardeners. 

2781. Water. Speechly disapproves of ever giving a great quantity of water at one 
time to the pine-apple plant, in any stage or at any season. Too much causes the mould 
in the pot to run together and become hard and cloddy ; and, independently of this, 
glutting a plant with water will rob it of its vigor, and reduce it to a weak state. 
Hence, though keeping of plants too diy is certainly an error, it is not attended with the 
same fatal consequences as the contrary practice. W^atering the walks and flues, &c. 
in an evening, in order to raise a kind of artificial dew, is in imitation of what takes 
place in the W^est Indies, where no rain falls in the summer for many months together, 
and the plants are wholly supplied with moisture from the dews. Gentle summer 
waterings over the top are founded on this principle. " Plants lately shifted into the 
pots, till their roots get matted, do not require so much water as before their shifting. 
Plants that are in large-sized pots, in proportion to the size of the plants, do not require 
so much water as plants that are under-potted. Plants tliat are in hard-burnt pots, made 
of strong clay, do not require near so much water as plants in pots less burnt, and made . 
of clay with a good proportion of sand intermixed. The latter are greatly to be preferred. 
Plants in a vigorous growing state require very frequent and gentle waterings. But 
plants with fruit and suckers upon them require most of all. When plants are watered 
over their leaves, it should be sprinkled upon them only till every part is made wet, 
which may easily be distinguished, as the water immediately changes the color of them 
to a sad green. As the leaves stand in different directions, the best method is to dash 
the water upon them backwards and forwards, on every side of the bed. Summer 
waterings should always be given late in an evenfng ; but in the spring and autumn, the 
forenoon is the proper time. Less water should be given in moist than in dry Aveather, 
for reasons already given. In winter, when water by accident falls into the centres of 
the fruiting plants, it should immediately be drawn out, which may easily be effected by 
the help of a tin pipe of about three feet in length, one end of which should be no bigger 
than the small end of a tobacco-pipe." Pond or river water, or water collected from 
the roof of the hot-house, and retained within the house till it has attained its tempera- 
ture, is to be preferred. {Tr. on the Pine, 81, 82.) 



Book I. 



PINERY. 



— FRUITING DEPARTMENT. 



525 



2752. Ahercroynbic, from March to September, gives most water, "keeping the mould during this season 
constantly a little moist." In the other months he diminishes the quantity according to the season and 
circumstances of the temperature, plants, ^-c. He uses soft water at 75<', and gives it through a tube 
composed of jointed pieces, so that it may be shortened at will, to prevent its falling into the liearts of 
the plants. He also steams the flues occasionally, and waters with drainings of the dunghill in the 
growing season. ^Pr. G. 621, C-S.^ 

27So. M'P/iail says, " Of two evils, it is better to give pine-plants too little water than too much." He 
gives little in the winter months, but more freely in summer. He sprinkles the leaves occasionally with clean 
water, not less than 70 degrees warm, and shuts them down in the afternoon with a strong heat in the 
house. He judges of the temperature of the water by taking a mouthful of it ; and if it feel neither hot 
nor cold, it is in a good state, being upwards of 85 degrees. {Gard. Rem. 239.) " When you water your 
pines, recollect that some sorts require less water than others ; the sorts called the queen and the sugar- 
loaf require rather more water than those called Antigua, black Jamaica, and some others of the large- 
growing sorts. In July succession pines require frequent waterings. It is a good sign to see plants 
growing broad-leaved, and the water standing constantly in their hearts in the summer months, nor will 
it hurt them at any time, if there be a sufficient degree of heat kept in the house. Water them 
plentifully about once a-week all over their leaves with clean water, from 70 to 85 degrees warm. 
The quantity of water pines require, depends somewhat on the condition of the tan in wliich the pots 
are plunged. If the tan be in a dry state, and a strong heat in it, they wiU require more v.-ater than 
when it is moist, and a less heat in it; so that, in giving water, the person who manages them must be 
able to conclude how often and what quantity of water the plants will need." {Gnrd. liem.) 

2784. yicol waters succession plants once in eight or ten days in January, the quantity moderate, and the 
time the forenoon of good dajs. He gives a little more in February and "March, *tiU August, when " the 
waterings are to be forthwith regular and moderate, as it is not'intended to force the plants into much 
growth, it being supposed that they are now very healthy and strong." In October he lessens and retracts 
the waterings, and during winter waters very moderately once in four, five, or six days ; but at the root 
only. {KaL 429.) 

2785. Griffin waters moderately in vs'inter, and more liberally in the growing season, from March till Oc- 
tober ; want of water to keep the plants moist being one of the reasons of their premature fruiting. 

2786. Baldwin gives no water to the young suckers planted in the tan, from September till April ; but 
after potting, waters two or three times a_week during the summer, according as the temperature 
may be. 

2787. Shading. " Succession pine-plants," Speechly observes, " do not make half 
the progress in violent hot weather in the middle of summer, that they do later in the 
season. In order to obviate the above inconveniencies, some persons cover their hot- 
houses in the middle of the day, when the heat of the sun is violent, with bass mats 
fastened to a rope, M-hich may be m^oved up and down with great ease. But a better 
mode, and which is frequently practised, is, to cover the glasses with a large net, which 
admits the air to pass freely, and at the same time breaks the rays of the sun, and retards 
their force, especially if the meshes of the net be not large. But if vines were judi- 
ciously trained up to the rafters of the hot-house, there would be no need of either of the 
last-mentioned coverings. The vines should be planted in the front of the hot-house, 
and not more than one shoot trained to each rafter, part of which should be cut down to 
the bottom of the rafters every season, by which means the roof of the hot-house may con- 
stantly be kept thinly covered "with young wood, and by having only one shoot to each 
rafter, the ^-ine-leaves Avill afford a kindly shade, and, never incommode the pines ; for 
the leaves fall, and the vines are pruned at a season when the hot-hoase most requires 
sun." 

2753. Ahercromhie onlv shades new-potted plants till they have struck root. He uses thiii mats as in 
the nursing-pit. (Pr. Gn: 629.) 

2789. 'SPPliail uses no screens or covers for shades, but supposes his succession plants grown in houses 
in which vines are trained under the rafters. 

2790. Dressing the plmits, &c. Most of the authors quoted agree in recommending 
decayed or casually bioiised leaves to be twisted off, if they ai-e at the bottom of the 
stem ; or sucli as grow on it carefully trimmed off with the knife. In the season of 
free excited growth, Abercrombie says, " Midway between the times of shifting, take off 
about two inches of the upper mould, and replace it by fresh compost." Remove all 
fungi wliich grow out of the tan, and in general keep every part of the pinery at all 
times clean and sweet. 

2791. Insects and Diseases. See General Directions. (Subsect. S.) 

SuBSECT. 7. Fruititig Department, 

2792. The culture of the fruiting department embraces much of the culture of tlie 
nursing and succession pits : but little difference, for example, is made in temperatui-e, 
air, and watering, till the last stage of the maturation of the fruit. 

2793. Abercrombie observes " that the pine-apple can be carried even through the last stage without fire- 
heat : but the fruiting-house is a department in which the aid of the furnace should least of all be 
relmquished, unless some very great facilities for employing dung-heat, or some obstacles to the working 
of a stove, attend the situation." This is frequently practised by nurserjTnen and market-gardeners, and 
is quite practicable where abundance of dung for linings can be procured. 

2794. Speechly says, " Both the growth and size of the pine depend much on the construction and condition 
of the stove iii which they are cultivated. In many places small stoves of a particular construction (in 
the which the pines stand very near the glass) are erected solely for the purpose of fruiting-houses. 
These, from their being always kept up to a high degree of heat, are by gardeners usually termed 
roasters. When there is such conveniency, it is customary, when any pine-plants show fruit in the large 
stoves, to remove such plants (especially the most promising) directly into the fruiting-house ; where, from 
the high degree of heat kept, they generally swell their fruit astonishingly." 

2795. Griffin'?, house corresponds nearly with the roaster or small house of Speechly ; but Baldwin's seems 



526 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING 



Part III. 



an improvement, as being much smaller, losing less room in paths, and being comparatively easily 
heated. 

2796. Shifting and j)otting. Speechly shifts into fruiting-pots in August (see this 
article under Succession Department), and afterwards, in the following March, divests 
the plants of a few of their bottom leaves, renews the mould on the tops of the pots as 
deep as can be done without injuring the roots, and fills up with fresh compost earth. 
He says, " It is very injurious to the plants, and greatly retards the swelling of the fruit 
to remove them after this season." (Tr. on Pine, p. 49.) 

2797. Abercromhie differs from this author, in shifting in the spring after the plants show fruit : he says, 
" The main set of plants from the succession-pit will usually be ready for the fruiting-house in the course 
of August. As to a criterion for removing full-gro^vn pines ; shift them just as the roots have tilled the 
pot, so as to turn out whole. Late plants may not be in this state till October. The bark-bed, here, 
must be renewed, as on every occasion of repotting plants : but to guard against an untimely show of 
fruit, the strength of the new bark must be kept considerably below the extreme limit, and there should 
be a layer of old bark to the full depth of the pots. For the large sorts, provide pots twelve inches in 
diamater and fifteen inches in depth. For forward plants also, which you are apprehensive require free 
space for the root and hevb, to prevent them from fruiting too early, provide pots two inches wider and 
three inches deeper than those out of which they are to be turned ; but the additional room in the pots 
should be no more than you may calculate the roots will fill up by the time at which you propose to have 
them fruit. On the other hand, if you have any reluctant fruiters, when you transfer them to the 
fruiting-house, postpone shifting them into new pots, in order that the impletion of the pot by the roots 
may accelerate their fruiting ; or shift them into pots barely large enough to receive the roots, putting 
them into mould rendered, by an increased quantity of river-sand and fresh loam, somewhat less rich 
than the compost for pines in general : whichever of "these courses may have been taken, as soon as they 
show fruit in the spring, shift them into kirge pots, without disturbing the ball of earth ; and then fill 
the side of the pot with the best mould. Lay in the bottom of the fresh pots clean shivers, or sea-gravel, 
to the thickness of two inches, and as much compost as will keep the ball, or. root, to be received, level at 
top with the rim. At the shifting of plants that come from the succession-pit, twist off some of the 
bottom leaves, as far as the ripened stem is ready to send out new roots. Turn out each plant with the 
ball of earth entire J set it in the new pot, fill tlie vacancy with compost, and raise the mould to the 
lowest leaves by spreading compost over the ball ; leaving a hollow descent to the depth of the rim to 
hold water. Plunge the pots in the tan-bed, distributing those in the same range eight inches apart." 

2798. Second shifting. "There is in general no second shifting ; but the plants remain 
in the pots assigned at their coming from the succession-pit till the fruit is ripened. 
But, 1. In the case mentioned above, there is sometimes a spring shifting. 2. When 
plants which were regularly shifted, come into fruit early, and it is wished to retard them, 
you may give them a second shifting in February, or at any time before the fruit lias 
attained half the full diameter ; putting them into pots one size larger, and proceeding, in 
other respects, as at the introductory shifting. Tliough this acts as a temporary check, 
the advantage of fresh mould contributes to swell the fruit. 3. To plants which are 
sickly, or growing out of shape, the best remedy is, to shift them as soon as tliis is per- 
ceived, changing the mould, and pruning away decayed parts of the roots as there may 
be occasion." [Abercrombie.) 

2799. M'Pkail, with Speechly, shifts finally in August or September ; gives a dressing in March, and, in 
general, does not move them again till they have ripened their fruit, unless to give more bottom heat. 
Sometimes, however, plants intended for fruiting tlie following year, when shifted late in the autumn into 
pots which their roots do not fill well before the month of January, do not show fruit till late in the spring 
or summer months. For this reason it is advisable, when they cannot be shifted early enough in the 
month of August or beginning of September, so as to fill the pots with roots before the winter come on, 
to let them remain unshifted till the fruit appear, and the stem of it be grown to its full height, and 
then shift the plants into larger pots, in the manner before directed, disturbing the roots of the plants 
as little as can be helped. After the plants ai-e shifted, they must not get much water till the fresh 
growth of the roots has somewhat exhausted the moisture of the fresh earth put round them. (Gard. 
Mem.) 

2800. Nicol shifts finally in August, and top-dresses in Februarj' ; but plants that are unhealthy, feeble, and 
do not stand firm in their pots, should be shaken out entirely, and be replaced in the same pots ; trimming 
their roots according as they may need, but retaining all" fresh healthy fibres. Any plants that have 
already started into fruit, should also be shaken out, and be fresh potted,'as above ; which, by the check 
they receive, will keep them back to a better season of ripening, and by the force of fresh earth, make 
them swell their fruit larger than they otherwise would have done. I have thus new-potted plants, 
even in flower, with very much success, and have swelled the fruit to a size far bevond my expectations ; 
of which fact any one may easily satisfy himself, by fresh-potting a few plants, and comparing their pro- 
gress with others treated in the ordinary way. Let the plants be replunged to the brim as before, keep- 
ing the pots quite level. If the plants be full-sized, and strong, they will require to be set at about 
twenty inches apart from centre to centre, on a medium. But they should be sorted ; the smallest 
placed in front, and the largest at back, as in arranging plants on a stage, that they may have an equal 
share of sun and light. As soon as replaced in the bark-bed, let them have a little water, to settle the 
earth about their roots. In May he again top-dresses, " reducing an inch or two of the earth from off 
the surface, and adding some fresh mould, which will invigorate the plants, cause them to push sur- 
face radicles, and so keep^ them the more firm and steady. This needs not be done, however, to plants 
whose fruit are nearly ripe ; but chiefly to healthy plants new-shown in flower, past the flower, or with 
the fruit about half grown. And with respect to any that are unhealthv, and whose fruit are less than 
half grown, do not hesitate to shift them, shaking them out, trimming'their roots, and retaining only 
healthy fibres. This is a very great improvement in the culture of pines, which I formerly practised, 
have since advised, and have seen followed with much success." (Kal. p. S94.) 

2801. Griffin shifts, for the last time, in October, with the balls entire as before, allowing them in the bark- 
bed about twenty inches from plant to plant, and two feet distance from row to row ; " the first row 
eighteen inches from the kirb, angling them in rows as you go on." The pots he uses are twelve inches 
diameter, and ten inches deep. 

2802. Baldwin shifts of the last time, in September, into pots " of about fourteen inches diameter, at the 
top," at first half plunging the pots till the heat diminishes to a safe temperature. J^e after^vards fills 
up the interstices with tan, and lets the plants so remain until they are fruited off for the table. (Cult, of 
Anan. p. 17.) 



Book I. 



PINERY. -.FRUITING DEPARTMENT. 



627 



2803. Te?7i]yemtW'e. Speechly is not definite oa this subject ; but observes generally 
that nothing is so prejudicial to fruiting plants as making large fires to force them to 
grow in the winter season ; the fruit-buds they send up are small, and the stems 
weak. (ZV. on Pine, p. 41.) 

2804. Abercrombie observes, "As long as it would be danger- 
ous, or at least not desirable, to have the plants show fruit, 
the temperature should be kept reduced to that of the suc- 
cession-pit. But a capital elevation, in the course of heat 
maintained here, must be made for about eight of the last 
months which the plants will remain in the house; 
that is, just as it becomes fit to excite them into fruit, 
and during the whole period of fructification. In the an- 
nexed Table, it will be observed, that August, September, 
October, November, December, are set down twice. 
Against the first series of these months is marked the 
temperature at which it is proper to aim when the plants 
have been transferred to the fruiting-house in the July- 
preceding, or the current August or September, in order 
that they may not start into fruit at the beginning or 
middle of winter. Contrasted with this, tlie second series 
1-e.spects a distinct pit appropriated to late fruiters ; plants 
which have been removed from the succession-house 
soine months, and in which the object of culture is nearly 
finished : however the decline of the natural season pro- 
ceeds, a high course of heat must be continued, to ripen 
the fruit on these. As to the maximum of artificial heat 
for plants already in fruit, the degrees expressed are merely 
to indicate, that it would be an unnecessary expense to go 
higher ; but should the natural climate not supply a greater 
heat, to go five or ten degrees higher, so far from being at- 
tended with danger, would be beneficial to ripening pines, 
particularly in allowing air to be given with greater security. 
So the maximum in the last column is chiefly to be ob- 
served for the sake of fresh air, which will do more good 
than a greater heat. He adds : " The fruit will not swell ofF fine, if the heat from the flues be too 
languid to support the prescribed minimum temperature, until the full dominion of summer supersede 
the aid of the furnace altogether." • 

2805 M'F/iall has given tables of the temperature in Average Month:?/ Temperature of M'PhaU's 
Ins hot-house, or fruitmg-pmery, for every day m the ^ Fruitins- House. 

year, from which we annex the accompanying monthly 
average. In January the thermometer stood at from 
63 to 66 degrees in the morning ; from 68 to 85 de- 
grees at noon ; and from 64 to 74 degrees in the even- 
ing, and so on. On the tables from which the above is 
extracted, M'Phail observes, " that the thermometer 
was hung in the middle of the hot-house, shaded from 
the direct rays of the sun." He does not offer these 
tables as exact rules to be followed ; nor deny tliat the 
pine-apple can be ripened in a different degree of 
heat than that described; but he asserts, that such 
heat and management as he recommends will bring the 
pine-apple to good maturity. " Had I kept a register 
of the thermometer another year, and compared it 
with that which I kept for twelve months, and have herein given, there would have been a diflPerence ; 
the heat of every day, week, or year, would not have been alike; nor to cultivate the pine-apple, or any 
other plant, is it necessary that it should be so." 

2806. Nicol, in January, keeps the fruiting-pit at the same temperature as the succession department, 
(from 60° to 65°,) lest the plants should start into fruit. In February, he requires a " lively, but not 
violent bottom heat, in order to start the plants into fruit :" the temperature of the air he raised gradually 
to 75°, not allowing the thermometer to pass 80°. From 72° to 75° is his temperature for March and 
April. In May, June, July, and August, he requires 75° mornings and evenings, and 80° or 85° at noon. 
In September, after fire-heat becomes necessary, he keeps as nearly to 65° as possible, and in sunshine, 
by the free admission of air, to about 70° or 72°. In October, November and December, he lowers the 
temperature to 60° mornings and evenings, and 65° in sunshine. 

J 2807. Griffin, as before observed, endeavors to keep the air of his fruiting and succession houses as 
near as possible to 60°. 

2808. Baldwin says, " The fruiting-house, during the winter, should be kept at about 70° ; it may be 
left in the evening at about 75°, and it will be found in the morning at about 65°^ so that no attendance 
during the night will be required." {Cult, of Anan. p. 19.) 

» 2809. Coveting at nights. Speechly observes, that many small hot-houses are covered by large sheets of 
canvass, by the help of a roller and pulleys ; " but where hot-houses are large, this mode of covering 
cannot so well be adopted ; therefore the most general method is to use light covers of wood, or frames of 
wood, covered with painted canvass : the covering the whole of the roof of a hot-house in this manner is 
very troublesome, and attended with great expense ; nor indeed is it absolutely necessary, as 1 have ob- 
served above. When either of the above methods are practised, it should be done with discretion. In 
many places the covers of the hot-houses are sometimes, in a snowy, dark, severe, or rainy season, per- 
mitted to remain on for many days together, which is very detrimental to the plants, as they will in time 
draw themselves weak by the continuance of such a practice ; for it is observable, that plants grow much 
faster in the dark than in the light ; and this is manifest from the progress of plants when first they arise 
from seed, in the open ground, in the spring of the year, when they do not grow half so much in the day 
as in the night. But here it must be observed, that the sun and light give maturity to the nightly pro- 
gress of plants, and the want of them soon causes the plants tu grow languid, weak, and, in time, to die. 
It is also a bad practice to continue to cover hot-houses late in the spring of the year, which is injudici- 
ously done in many places, even so late as the middle of the month of May ; for as the covers are seldom 
taken off till after six o'clock in the morning (the hour that laborers come to their work at most places), 
it makes the hot-house night too long at that season of the year, when generally there are great numbers 
of the fruit of the pine in blossom ; for it should be remembered that light, as well as warmth, is essen- 
tially necessary to promote the growth of plants. In large double-pitted hot-houses, the covering of the 
lower lights may be effected with great ease, and this is found to be of use on a double account; first, 
because the pine plants in the front pit, by standing very near the glass, are in the most need of covering in 
severe weather ; and, secondly, because the front pit is generally used for succession plants, which require 



Standard Temperature for the Fruiting- 
House. 





. MINIMUM. 


MAXIMUM. 




From tlie 

and Dung 
heat. 


From the 
Climate 
and Tan, 
with Fire, 
if neces- 
sary. 


tificial 
Heat. 


From 
Sunshine 
and con- 
fined 
Heated 
Air. 


Aug. 
Sept. 
Oct. 
Nov. 
Dec. 


66 
62 
60 
65 
55 


66 
62 
62 
58 
58 


68 
65 
CO 
60 


80 
75 
70 
65 
05 


Wlienever the Plants 
show Fruit, the Mini- 
mum should be 63 deg. 






Jan. 
Feb. 
Blar. 
April 
May 
June 
July 


60 
63 
65 
65 
65 
68 
70 


63 
66 
67 
67 

68 
70 


65 

72 
7'2 

75 
75 


70 II 75 

82 
84 
86 
88 

90 II 96 
100 


Aug. 
Sept. 
Oct. 
Nov. 
Dec 


70 
66 
63 
63 
63 


70 
66 
66 
66 
66 


72 
70 

68 
68 


100 

98 
94 

86 
82 



Mom. 

Jan. from 63 to 66 from 

Feb.' from 58 to 65 from 

Mar. from 61 to 71 from 

April from 60 to 78 from 

May from 62 to 73 from 

June from 65 to 75 from 

July from 62 to 75 from 

.4ug. from 60 to 74 from 

Sept. from 62 to 78 from 

Oct. ; from 59 to 74 from 

Nov. from 57 to 67 from 

Dec. from 52 to 65 from 



Noon. Even. 

68 to 85 from 64 to 74 

68 to 90 from 61 to 70 

65 to 90 from 62 to 72 

66 to 96 from 65 to 73 

75 to 94 from 66 to 75 
83 to 100 from 68 to 82 
80 to 100 from 68 to 78 

76 to 100 from 69 to 78 
75 to 100 from 67 to 79 
63 to 96 from 60 to 72 
66 to 85 fr om 62 to 67 
55 to 68 from 58 to 65 



528 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



to be shaded, after being shifted in the spring, whenever the weather is warm and clear, as I have before 
observed in treating upon that head." 

2810. In Russia, the pine-stoves are frequently kept covered with boarded shutters day and night for 
several weeks, and even as long as three months together. As the plants are then as nearly as possible 
in a dormant state, it does not appear to injure them so much as a native of a more genial climate would 
imagine. 

2811. Air. In March, when the plants ai-e showing fruit, Speechly " admits a great 
quantity of air into the hot-house, the want of a due proportion of which causes the stems 
to draw themselves weak, and grow tall, after which the fruit never swells kindly." 
{Tr. on Pine, p. 50.) 

2812. Abercrombie says, " Give plenty of air to plants in fruit, without a daily supply of which, they will 
not swell to a handsome full size, nor acquire the elevated flavor which belongs to the pine-apple when in 
perfection." {Pr. Gard. p. 642.) 

2813. M'P/iail admits air whenever it can be done consistently witli attention to the temperature. In 
June, if the night^ be cold, and the daj s cloudy, " you will have occasion for fires, otherwise you will 
not be able to give air enough, and keep up the temperature." In July and August, abundance of air is 
given, and some often left at the houses all night. 

- 2814. Nicol admits air at all seasons, in fine sunshine weather, " freely, as the fruit approaches maturity, 
in order to enhance its flavor." 

2815. Griffin gives air to the fruiting-house, " discretionally, in fine, mild, sunny days, from ten till about 
two o'clock," and more freely in the summer season. 

2816. Baldwin gives air " when the weather will permit, winter and summer, from the back and ends, 
but never from the roof." 

2817. JFater. Speechly says, " As tlie fruit and suckers begin to advance in size, the 
plants will require plenty of water to support them, which may be given them at least 
twice, and sometimes three times a-week ; but too much should not be given tliem at 
one time ; it is better to give them less at a time and oftener." As soon as the fruit 
appears udl swelled, the watering such plants as produce them should cease ; but it is 
a general practice (in order to have the fruit as large as can be got,) to continue tlie 
watering too long, which causes the fruit to be filled with an insipid, watery, and ill 
flavored juice. ( Tr. on Pine, p. 52. ) 

2818. Abercrombie, hQiwzen the times of watering plants in f*uit, sprinkles the flues, but "suspends 
watering over the herb till the olossoras are fairly set. Afterwards, while the fruit continues green, it 
•will be beneficial to give water now and then, over the herb, from a fine rose-pan : even departing winter 
is some restraint upon this ; but after March has commenced, wash the herb perfectly clean every eight 
days. Use soft water that has been warmed to the temperature of the house; and, for two or three hours 
after, have a maximum heat from the flues to exhale superfluous moisture. Moderate humidity and the 
suitable degree of heat will make the young fruit swell apace. At seasons when the mid-day suu 
has much power, it is best to water over the leaves as soon as the morning-sun is felt on the house, or two 
hours before sunset The fruit will not swell off fine, if there be any deficiency in giving water. When 
the fruit is well swelled, forbear to water over the fruit or leaves ; but it is still riccessarj- to keep the earth 
about the roots a little moist. Nor, when the fruit is pretty large, should water be poured into the 
crowns so cojjiously as to stand in them more than one day. The diftferent degrees in which the varieties 
stand in need of water must not be forgotten. As the pine-apples begin to ripen, put them on short al- 
lowance of water, for excessive humidity spoils the flavor of the fruit : begin the reduction by decreasing 
the quantity ; for, in hot weather, frequent .small supplies should be given on account of the sucker.-; ou 
the plant, till consideration for the fruit forbid even sparing waterings, lest it should be rendered 
insipid." 

2819. J\PPJwil says, " Let it be remembered, that while the fruit is in blossom, and for some days 
afterwards, the plants should not be watei-ed all over their leaves, neither should the plants be watered 
all over their leaves nor fruit after the fruit is fully swelled, nor should the earth, in which the roots are, 
be after that time kept very moist, for they do'not require it, because the plant has nearly performed 
its office, which it never has to do a second time." To water the fruiting pine-plants in winter; in 
gloomy weather, when it is best not to water over the leaves, a small-sized watering-pot, with a long tin 
pipe and a flat nose on the end of it, should be in readiness : the water should beat S{>°, and never under 
iQ". In January, they may require to be watered two or three times. The same in February. In March, 
wash them once or twice' over the leaves, till every part be perfectly clean. They may require to be 
watered three or four times at root. In April and May, water over the leaves with water fro^n SC^ to 
90"'', and at bottom perhaps four or five times. In July, " when any of the fruit are full-swelled, do 
not water them over the fruit or leaves : but it is necessan," even then to have the earth about tlieir 
roots moderately moist, otherwise the fruit would flag for want of nourishment. It should also be ob- 
served, that after the fruit is swelled to a prettj- good size, water should not be poured into the crowns 
of the fruit so plentifully as to stand in them above a day or two." In August, when the fruit are 
ripening, give no water. 

2820. Nicol waters seldom in January, and not oftener than once in six or eight days in February. 
In March, " water may be given oftener than heretofore advised, and also in larger quantities ; generally 
a moderate watering at root once in three or four days, and a dewing over head occasionally, to refresh 
the leaves, and keep them clean from dust. From the' time the plants are cut of flower, and the fruit 
begins to swell, water must be applied in a very liberal manner once in two or three days, always giving 
the necessary quanOty at root, and then a dewing over head. Watering to this extent, however, if the 
fruit be not in too forward a state, will seldom benecessarj- before the end of the month, or till April." 
In April, " water must be given in a plentiful manner, once in two or three days, in order the better to 
swell oft" the fruit. The roots have now mucli to do in sustaining it, and also the suckers, which will be 
fast advancing in growth. For this reason, water frequently with dunghill drainings, or with water of 
dung, soaked on purpose ; and after each watering at root, give a dewing over the leaves, as directed 
above." In May, June, and July, " from the time the fruit begin to color, however, begin also to lessen 
the quantity of water ; and towards its being fit for cutting, withhold water entirely, else the flavor will 
be very much deteriorated I shall here observe, with respect to tlie different kinds of pines, that the 
queen and the sugar-loaf sorts require considerably more water than the king or Havannah, and the 
Antigua. The difFerence in the manner of watering should be more particularly attended to as the 
fruit approach to maturity ; as the latter-named kinds are namrally more juicy and waterj' than the 
former." In August, the plants that have done fruiting being removed, the succession stock which re- 
place them are to be watered freely at root, and occasionally dewed over top. In October and Novem- 
ber, the waterings are gradually lessened ; and in December, once in eight, ten, or twelve days, will be 
sufficient. {Kal.) 



BboK I. 



PINERY -.FRUITING DEPARTME 



529 



2821. Griffin never waters pines over the leaves in any stage, nor gives miicli ot in damp weather. 
In other respects his practice agrees with that of Abercrombie and Nicoi. 

2822. Baldwin waters the plants in tlie fruiting-house cautiously till towards Febii. .iry ; but as the spring 
advances, gives a larger supply. He adds, " Never water your plants in the common broad-cast method, 
Tver their heads and leaves." {Cult, of Anan. p. 21.) 

2823. Treatment of the plants in fruit. "Sticks," Speechly says, " should be provided to 
support the fruit before it is grown too large ; and in laying them, care should be taken 
to leave bandage room sufficient, making allowfance for the swelling of the fruit. When 
the suckei's are grown to about a foot in length they should be taken off, and from that 
time the fruit will swell very fast." (Tr. on Pine, p. 51.) " Large fruiting plants," he 
adds, " will sometimes show their fruit in the months of August and September, but 
these are generally thought of no value, and consequently thrown away. To prevent 
this, I frequently take such plants out of the hot-house as soon as their fruits begin to' 
appear. I then set them in a shed or out-house for five or six weeks ; at the ex- 
piration of whit'-i time I pot them as in the month of March, after shaking off their balls. 
After this I plunge them into the tan ; and in the month of March following put them 
into larger-sized pots, with their balls and roots entire. By this means I have sometimes 
cut tolerably good fruit from such plants in the months of May and June following. 
Such forward plants generally produce very fine suckers. Whenever the pine-plants are 
removed after they are grown large, it will be of service, before they are taken out of 
the tan-bed, to mark the side of the pots which stands next the sun ; for it is observable, 
that the centres of the plants generally tend that way : so that the plants, when replaced, 
may stand as they did before they were removed. I do not mean that it is at all neces- 
sary for the plants to be put into the very identical places in which they stood before, 
but, in point of position, it will be proper, and the plants will be benefited by being so 
placed. This may as easily be done as placing them in a random manner, which is the 
common method." 

2824. y4te?-c?-ow2Z»ie directs, " to keep the plants growing gently, and to have the pots, in general, ccn- 
pletely filled with the roots by the time at which you intend to excite them into blossom. From the midc.le 
of February to the 1st of March is a good time to have the main crop in flov/er ; as the prospective season is 
the finest. About a month before you expect to see fruit, dress the plants by taking away two inches in 
depth from the top of the mould. Twist off some of the lower leaves. Fill up with fresh compost, round 
the stem, to the remaining leaves. The baric-bed should be revived at the same time, so as to make it 
lively; but no new tan should be added, till the time for the fullest heat arrives." 

2825. M'Phail says, " It frequently happens that pine-apple plants designed to bear fruit, do not show 
their fruit early enough in the spring or fore-part of summer, to ripen their fruit before winter, when there 
is not sunshine enough to give the fruit any flavor. This may happen because the plants have not come to 
a proper growth, or their roots may have been injured by too violent a bottom heat, or by being over, 
watered, or they may have been shifted too late, or been put into pots too large for their roots to have filled 
them before the end of the growing season. To make pine-plants show their fruit at an early time in the 
spring, some authors have recommended the cutting off some of the roots at the autumn shirting; but 
long experience has convinced me, that cutting off the roots, or destroying them by any means, instead of 
making them show fruit, is an effectual mean to prevent them from showing fruit till they have again made 
long roots. The fruit of the pine-apple is formed probably not less than seven or eight weeks before it 
appears among the leaves ; and if a plant be divested partially or totally of its roots, its growth is stopped 
tUl it has made roots of considerable length, when it will grow quickly. And, if before the roots were de- 
stroyed, the fruit had been formed in the hidden secret centre of the plant, the fruit will grow and show 
itself when the leaves of the plant, excepting those on the stem of the fruit, will make no appearance of 
growing. This, perhaps, may be the reason which induces some persons to think that cutting off the roots 
of the plant causeth it to fruit sooner than it would do were the roots suffered to remain. If pine-apple 
plants, intended for fruiting the following year, be shifted late in the autumn into pots, which their roots 
do not fill well before the month of January, they probably will not show fruit till late in the spring or 
summer months." He top-dresses the pots, and trims plants in February, and uses every means to heat 
water, &c. to keep them in a growing state during that month and March. If more than two or three 
suckers begin to grow out of the stem, they should be destroyed, unless they are so near the earth as to 
make roots into it, which will strengthen them without robbing the fruit. " In June, the fruit, when it 
gets large, should be supported with sticks to prevent it from falling, and to make the ci-owns grow up- 
right on the fruit. .Were the fruit permitted to lean to one side, the crown in growing would force itself 
upright, and when the fruit was ripe, the crown would stand crooked on it. If any of the fruit that 
showed early are ripe, set the plants out of the fruiting-house, and replace them by any that may have 
shown fruit among the succession plants." If in August you have any plants arnong your succession 
pines which have shown fruit, as your fruiting plants are now ripe, set out the pots, and take those in 
fruit from among your; succession plants, to replace them. In November it may be well to have a few 
plants start into fruit,' which may come in at an early and very acceptable season. Some may yet be 
green or not fully ripe, and should get no more water than what is necessary to keep them from "flagging. 
(G. Rem.) 

2826. Nicol, in February, top-dresses and trims such of the plants as have not then showru fruit. " Some 
kinds of pine-apples put out suckers on the fruit-stalk, at the base of the fruit, which should be rubbed off 
with the thumb as they appear, because they rob it of nourishment to a certain extent. If the object be to 
have large fruit, all suckers of the root, and all but two or three of the best of those rising from between the 
leaves, should be destroyed. Those of the root m.ay easily be twisted off, and the others may be destroyed, 
or be prevented from growing further, by breaking out their heart-lea^'es, which is no difficult matter 
while they are young, being then brittle. But if the increase of the stock be the object, all suckers of the 
stem should be encouraged, and even some of the best of those from the root." {Kal.) 

2827. Time required to fruit the pine. All the authors quoted, excepting Baldwin, 
and almost all cultivators of the pine-plant, require from two and a half to four years 
from the planting of the crown or sucker to perfecting its fruit. The general period is 
from two and a half to three years ; a fruit of the queen pine being gathered in August, 
1819, and its crown planted a few days afterwards, will, in the July, August, or Sep- 
tember, 1822, produce fruit. A stron"- sucker from the same plant taken off, as is fre- 



530 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



quontly the case, a month hefore the fruit ripens, and planted, will, in the end of 1821, 
OK early in the spring of 1822, ripen its fruit. 

2828. Baldwin, however, accomplishes this by both crowns and suckers in a shorter period, and appears 
to have great merit, not only in that, but in growing his successi(xi plants without the aid of fire -heat. The 
following are his observations on both subjects. " The New Providence, black Antigiia, Jamaica, Enville, 
and the other large sorts of ananas, will require the cultivation of three years to bring them to perfection ; 
but the old queen and Ripley'^s new queen may be brought to perfection in fifteen months. To effect this 
it must be observed, that some of the plants will fruit in February or the beginning of March, and conse- 
quently that the suckers may be taken off in June, or the beginning of July. Make then a good bed of 
tan with lining of litter round the outside, to keep in the tan ; make the bed to fit a large melon-frame ; 
nut the suckers into pots of about nine inches diameter, filled with the compost ; plunge them in the bed, 
prepared in regular order, and throw a mat over them in hot weather, for shade, till they hare taken 
root ; let them remain till the end of September, and then shift them into pots of about twelve inches dia- 
meter, and plunge them in the fruiting-houso. I have had fine crops of pines raised from these suckers, 
many of them four pounds each, from plants only fifteen months old. This method, in point both of time 
and expense, has greatly the advantage of the common plan of raising pines, in three years, by fires ; when 
the fruit at last is frequently small and ill-flavored." It is a peculiar recommendation of this plan, that the 
plants reared in frames, without fires, the first year seldom or never run to fruit ; whereas, on the con- 
trary, where stoves are used, first for the nursery, next for the succession, and lastly for the fruiting 
house, it is seldom that one third of the plants come to the fruiting-house, because so many of them have 
run to fruit ; and even those that stand are necessarily dried and stinted, being subject to the attacks of 
various insects ; not to mention the enormous care and expense attendant \i\Mn a three years' cultivation. 
By this plan, *' one third of the coals are sufficient, and less than one half of the usual labor and build- 
ings." {Cult, of Allan, p. 28.) 

2829. Growing the fruit of an extraordinary/ size. Spcechly and M'Phail say, " In March, to make some 
of your fruit swell very large, prevent all suckers from growing on the plants. You may destroy them by 
twisting out their hearts with a sharii-pointed stick, or a piece of iron about eighteen inches long. This, 
however, should not be made a general practice." 

2830. Abercronibie concurs in this practice, and adds, " A yet further advantage may be given to the swell- 
ing of the fruit, by having a few of the lower leaves of the plant taken off, and by putting a rim of tin, or 
any thing else in the form of a hoop, round the top of the pot, sufficient to raise the mould three or four 
inches. The mould should be of the best quality, and constantly kept in a moderate moist state : this 
may be done by having the surface kept covered with moistened moss. The roots of the pine-plant, es- 
pecially those produced from the part of the stem just under the leaves, will then make a surprising pro- 
gress, and tlie fruit will be greatly benefited by this expedient." 

28.31. IV. Hogg, who has grown the largestpines next to Baldwin and Buchan, " in March, 1820, had several 
of different sorts, which had been suckers taken from the parentplants in 1816, and which, under the usual 
treatment, had become too large to receive proper sustenance while remaining in pots. To provide a fit place 
for them, he cut a deep trench along the back of the bark-bed, into which he put a quantity of good earth, 
and then turned the pines out of the pots into it, and filled up round the balls with mould of the same qua- 
lity, which he covered lightly with tan. At the time a few only of the plants were showing fruit, but 
they all (with the exception of one plant of the New Providence) fruited immediately, and extremely well, 
yielding fruit from 3 lbs. to 5f lbs. each in weight. The plant of the New Providence continued growing 
luxuriantly till the foUomng February, when it showed fruit, which was cut in June, and weighed 9 lb. 
4 oz. During the growth of this pine, it was twice nourished by a supply of fresh earth to its roots." {Hort. 
Trans, iv. 555.) 

2832. Cutting ripe pines. " It is easy to know," Speedily observes, " when the pine 
becomes ripe by its yellow color, yet they do not all change in the same manner, but 
most generally begin at the lower part of the fruit ; such fruit should not be cut till the 
upper part also begins to change, ^vhich sometimes will be many days after, espe- 
cially in the sugar-loaf kinds. Sometimes the fruit will first begin to change in the 
middle, which is a certain indication of its being ripe ; such fruit should be cut imme- 
diately." 

2833. Abercro?nbie says, " The indications of maturity are, a difflisive fragrance, accompanied by a change 
, in the color of the fruit ; most sorts becoming yellow, or straw-color ; others, dark-green, or yellowish tinged 

with green. Cut pine-applcs before they are dead-ripe, or the spirit of the flavor will be dissipated. Bring 
away, with the fruit, above five inches of stalk ; and leave the crown adhering to the top." 

2834. Nicol, " If pine-apples be not cut soon after they begin to color, that is, just when the fruit is of a 
greenish-yellow, or straw-color, they fall greatly off in flavor and richness ; and that sharp luscious taste, 
so much admired, becomes insipid." 

2835. Retarding and keeping frtdt. " It sometimes happens," Speechly obsei-ves, " that 
great part of a stove of plants will show their fruit at or near the same time, and with 
the same treatment, would consequently become ripe too nearly together. To prevent 
this, and bring them into a regular succession, when the fruit is nearly ripe, part of 
the plants fnay be taken out of the stove, and set in a dry shady place ; as, for instance, 
the stove-shed, where the pots should be covered with moistened moss, but no water 
given them ; it must be observed, that every one of the plants must be taken into the 
hot-house again, and set in the tan-bed for a w^eek or ten days before the fruit is cut, 
to give it a good flavor. When there is a variety of hot-houses, this caution is not 
necessary." 

2836. Aberci-omhie saySf contrivances for retarding fruit, are sometimes resorted to, that plants which have 
started too soon into fruit, may have a better season to ripen in ; and sometimes in order that a whole 
crop may not come in at once. The former may be provided for by shifting early in spring, or at any time 
before the fruit has attained half the full diameter ; and the latter inconvenience may be thus obviated : 
" If you perceive the fruit ripening too fast, or advancing too nearly together, set as many plants as you 
intend to retard into a dry airy place, affording both shade and shelter. Give no water as long as you 
wish to suspend their progress. For the same purpose, others may be set out green ; while the excite- 
ment of these is lowered, they must be kept in a growing state." 

2837. M'Phail observes, " If pines ripen too fast after one another, set the pots out of the house with the 
fruit on them, into an airy, cool, dry shade, and the fruit will keep a fortnight or longer, if it be set out 
before it is full ripe. The plants, while in this situation, should have no water given them : and it may be 
necessary sometimes, in order to have a succession, or constant supply of fruit for a long time, to set some of 



liooa I. 



PINERY.— -GENERAL CULTURE. 



tlicm out greet), Into a cooler i>laco, to kcoi)tlicm back : and wlien you wisli to r\pcn tlretn, take them into 
the liouse, and plunge them in the tan again," 

28oS. Size of the fruit. Tlirce jwunds may be considered the average size of the queen pine-ai)j)lcs 
brought to market or sent to table, but occasionally they grow much larger, attaining four and five 
pountls ; and the rrovidence, with S|)ccchly and Griffin, has weighed seven and nine pounds. Grittin ap- 
pears to have been particularly successful in growing large fruit. At Kclham, near Nottingham, while 
gardener to J. C. Gir?irdot, Esq. he cut, in the year 1802, twenty queen pines, which weighed togethe r 
eigiity-seven pounds seven ounces ; in 1803, one weighing five pounds three ounces; in July, 1804, one of 
tiio New Providence kind, weighing seven pounds two ounces ; in August, 1804, one of the same kind, 
weigiiingnine i)ounds three ounces ; and in 1805, he cut twenty -two queen pines, which weighed together 
one hundred and eiglitecn jjounds three ounces. 

2839. Ba/dwi/i, at a meeting of the Horticultural Society of London, held in October, 1817, presented a 
queen pine of groat beauty and superior flavor. It measured sixteen inches in circumference, seven inches 
in length, and weighed four pomids. The plant on which it was produced was little more than fillecn 
months old. [Ilort. Tr. iii, lia) 

2840. At the aunioersaiy dinner of the society on the -ith of June, 1822, four New Providence pines were re- 
ceived from Baldwin, which together weighed 32 lbs. 10| ounces ; the largest 8 lbs. 14| oz, ; the next 8 lbs. 
i') oz. ; the third 8 lbs. 2 oz. ; and the fourth 7 lbs. 5 oz. {Hort. Trans, v. 200.) 

2841. On the VithJuly, 1821, Win. Buciian, gardener to Lord Cawder, at Stackpool Court, Pembrokeshire, 
produced a pine which weighed 10 lbs. 8 oz. and was 10| inches high, exclusive of the crown and stalk, 
riiis was larger than any pine which had been exhibited to the society, and with the exception of a few 
which have been grown by Baldwin, is the heaviest, as far as has been ascertained, that has been 
fruited in this country. Buchan fruited three other Providence pines, of extraordinary weight, in 
the same season ; one weighed 10 lbs. 6 oz. ; another 10 lbs. 2 oz. ; and a third 9 lbs. 8 oz. making the total 
weight of the four, 40 lbs. 8 oz, {Hort. Trans, v, 2G4.) 

SuB.sECT. 8. General Directions cofumoii to the Three Dejm-lments of Pine-apple 

Culture. 

2842. That which is general in the culture of the pine-apple chiefly respects the bark-pit, 
air, water, and insects. 

2843. Management of the bark-pit. The first point deserving attention here is the 
prejmration of the tan, after it is brought from the tan-vats ; but tliis has been already- 
described. (See 1974.) 

2844. Formation of the bed. M'Phail says, "Pits for tan need not be made deeper 
than three feet six inches ; if they be very wide, tiiree feet will do ; and to admit large 
fruiting pine-plants, the surface of the tan-bed will require to be five or six feet from the 
glass above it. When a pine-pit is to be filled wholly with new tan, if it be late in the 
autumn or winter, the tan had best lie in a state of fermentation for some time before 
the pots be plunged in it. If i)ine-plants in pots be plunged in wet tan, it is apt to affect 
their roots, and if the roots be hurt, the plant must suffer." 

2845. Abercroynbie says, " It is desirable on the first formation of a bed, to mix new and old tan together ; 
in which case the quantity of new bark to be brought into the pit will depend upon the goodness of the bark 
and the bottom heat required. As much new tan as will fill two third parts of the bark-pit, with a mix- 
ture of old, rotten almost to earth, will produce a bottom heat of about 85". When old tan with higher 
remains of strength is used to modify the new, the same heat may be produced, if the quantity of new be 
not more than half the capacity of the pit This is said of a new pit After a bark-bed has been in ac- 
tion, partial renewals of bark, to keep up the heat, are frequently sufficient in the reduced proportion of 
one third, one sixth, one twelfth, or less. At intermediate stages between the partial renewals, the bed re- 
quires only to be excited into a brisker fermentation by forking-up. About five sevenths of the pit from 
the bottom should be occupied by the new and old tan as a fermenting body of bark : and about two 
sevenths from the top, or a little more than the depth of the pots, whatever that may be, should consist 
of old tan incapable of heating so as to bum the roots of the plants ; at least such should be the ordinary 
distribution of the tan ; but where peculiar circumstances require a speedy augmentation of heat, without 
displacing the pots, as when fruit is to be swelled off in the last stage, the earthy tan at top may be taken 
away, and new tan substituted." 

2846. M'Phail has found, " that when a tan-pit is about six feet wide, and three feet deep, filled with good 
new and old tan in nearly equal quantities, it is enough to raise and retain a sufficient heat for the growth 
of the pine-apple for about half a year, with the addition of as much new tan as will keep it up to its ori- 
ginal height ; at the expiration of which time, the exhausted part of the tan is to be taken out, and the 
bed recruited with new bark. When tan gets too dry, pour water into it now and then between the 
pots ; this will cause a fine moist heat to arise among the plants to help to nourish them, and it will like- 
wise enable the tan to retain its heat longer than if it were suffered to become dry, for no body of veget- 
ables will continue to ferment and generate heat after the mois«;ure in them is evaporated." {Gard. 
Jiernem.) 

2847. Temperature of the bed. The general practice is to keep this from five to ten 
degrees higher than that of the air of the house in the winter months ; somewhat higher 
in spring and autumn ; and about the same temperature in summer. ]M'Phail and Griffin 
prefer rather a higher degree of bottom heat. One hundred degrees, these authors re- 
commend, or " about milk-warm, at the bottom of the pots, is heat enough for the roots" 
of the pine-apple plant to grow in ; therefore the depth, whether of tan, leaves of trees, or 
dung put into the pit, should be proportioned according to the qualities of the materials 
in regard to raising heat. If the aiif in the house be kept up to a proper degree of heat, 
the roots of the plants will grow in a heat of eighty degrees, so that it is safer to have the 
pots stand for a time in such a gentle heat than in a heat of upwards of a hundred ; but 
let it be remembered, that the heat of the bed, especially from its surface to eight or nine 
inches downward, is liable to increase and decrease in a uniformity, though not s(j 
quickly, with the variations of the heat kept up in the atmosphere of the house. But be 
this as it may, the heat of the tan at the bottom of the pots when the roots are there, had 
best not be warmer than about milk-warm, especially in winter, when, if the roots at the 
bottoms of the pots be destroyed, there is not at that season of the year a kindly natural 

M m 2 



532 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part lU, 



wai^mth in the house to cause young roots to spring from the stems of the plants to draw 
into them sufficient nourishment to sustain them ; and farther, if the roots of fruiting plants 
be destroyed in winter, it will probably hinder them from show ing fruit in time to ripen, 
or make them show weak." (^Gnrd, JRem.) 

2848. Aberci-ombie and Xicol agree in the following standard for the different classLi of pines, allowing a 
latitude of from five to eight degrees, below or above : — Nursing bark-bed Tj*^ ; Succession bark-bed 12° ; 
Fruiting bark-bed 82°. The standard for the succession-pit is fixed lower than that for the nursing-pit, to 
guard against the chance of starting the pknts into untimely fruit. Abercrombie observ^es, that when the 
bottom heat of a bark-pit is as high as SO"", with a layer composed of old and ncv.- tan at top, that layer wiU 
scarcely exceed 65°. " Many persons," lie adds, " work pine-«toves with a bottom heat five or ten degrees 
higher than the maximum standard set down for each house above. These, on the one hand, and the 
theorists, on the other, who censure the application of any bottom heat to exotics as unnatural, both seem 
to be in extremes. In tropical climates, the earth itself about the roots of plants is frequently so pene- 
trated with the violent heat of the atmosphere, as to maintain a temperature of 80 degrees, or more, in the 
shade j consequently, for the roots of exotics from such climates to be plunged into a bed heated to that 
degree is not unnatural : still it should be recollected, that the heat of the air there has a proportionate 
elevation above that of the earth. During our winter, therefore, instead of keeping the roots of 
pine-plants in a factitious heat of 80°, while the artificial temperature of the air is, in some cases, let 
down to 55° and 60°, perhaps a better relation of the bed with the atmosphere would be supported by 
having the bark-bed at 60° or 65°, and the air of the pit at 70°, at least never less than the heat at the 
roots." 

2849. The measurement of bottom heat is effected by keeping trial-sticks in the bed, 
which M'Phail considers sufficient for any experienced person ; but the most accurate 
mode is, to plunge the bulb of the thermometer about a foot into the bed, till it reach that 
depth where the layer of old bark into which the pots are plunged, and the fermenting 
mass may be supposed to join. Tliis will give the heat at the bottom of the pots. 

2850. Renewal of the bark-bed. When the decline of the bed below a given temper- 
ature requires it to be renewed, take out tlie pots, tie the leaves carefully witli bass, to 
protect them from being broken, and set them in a place where the plants will receive no 
check. If the top layer be earthy and decayed, so as to run through the screen, take it 
entirely off. Let the rest of the old bark be screened, and that which passes through be 
carried out of the house. Bring in new bark equal to the quantity taken away ; but, be- 
fore mixing it with the retained portion of the old, separate the least efficient of the old to 
serve as a top layer. Proceed then to mix the new baik equally with the soundest part 
of the old, turning over the bed from the bottom with a fork. Tread this part equally. 
To receive the pots, spread on lightly at top a layer composed three fourths of old bark, 
extending at least to the depth of the pots. Dress the surface of tlie bed full up to the 
sides of the pit, making it rather higher in the middle. After renewing a bark-bed, if 
there has been a great proportion of new tan introduced, or if there is any probability that 
the heat may rise excessively, plunge the pots but one third of their depth into the bark> 
or set til em merely on the surface, till the full heat has risen and been found not in ex- 
cess ; then plunge them to the rims. 

2851. Rev'wing ta?i ivith the fork. If it be not requisite to take off the top, begin at one 
end of the bed, and dig out as much bark as will allow tlie remainder to be loosened, anil 
completely forked over, without spilling any into the house. Fork it accordingly ; return 
the bark taken out, level the top, and replunge the pots to their rims. 

2852. Times of reneidng and reviving the bark-bed. After the bark-bed has been re- 
newed by the substitution of new bark for that which is quite wasted, it may be expected 
to last in good action, with the help of an intermediate forking up, for ten or eleven weeks ; 
consequently, it will require renewal about five times in the year. As a gradual decline 
must take place between one renewal and another, the heat can scarcely be kept by any 
management from fluctuating less than ten degrees ; and therefore, in planning the busi- 
ness of the year, it is a desirable thing to distribute the times of renewal so that they may 
just precede those periods when something critical depends on having the bark-bed at a 
maximum heat. The principal occasions seem to be these : — 

2853. The time of the principal annual poti'mg and repotting, when established plants are advanced to the 
last and intermediate stages, and new plants are brought into the nursing-pit. This will commonly fall in 
the first week in August ; but let it fall when it will, one of the fundamental reparations of the bed must 
be adapted to it ; because the plants want a good growing heat to strike them, and the successive clearance 
of one pit after another aflTords the easiest opportunity for shifting the bark. 

2854. That crisis ofaiitmnn ivhen the weather is declining, yet not cold enough to light fires. This liap- 
pens about the beginning of October, and may commonly foUow too close after the entire restitution ot the 
bed to admit of timing the second renewal exactly to it ; the bed may be, however, well forked up, when 
the season is on the turn. The second renewal will scarcely be demanded by the state of the bed till eleven 
weeks after the first. As it respects the fruiting-house, it should be particularly sound and complete, to 
allow of timing the third- to a critical period in the culture of the pine. Rather protract the interval be- 
tween the second and third renewal to three months or more, than precipitate the third, which might start 
the plants too soon into blossom. In the fruiting-house, accordingly as you calculate that the plants 
will show fruit at the end of January or later, renew the bed just before, "in the proportion of one third, 
if necessary, so as to have the bed steadily up to 80° when the plants come into flower. 

2855. In March. A shifting of the roots into larger pots is frequently requisite for plants in the nursery 
and succession pits about the middle or end of March. Whenever repotted plants are to be struck, the 
bed should be prepared for yielding the approved degree of heat. 

2856. In Mai/. The same principle prescribes a renewal at the partial repotting, which is commonly made 
at the end of May. This may be com.bined with another object : — contrive to have the pit in lively action 
just before you discontinue fire-heat. As to forking up merely : if this be done at the end of six weeks 



Book 1. 



PINERY. — GENERAL CULTURE. 



533 



after renewal, there will be four or five weeks to run, while the heat is to be sustained on the old mate- 
rials, which will be generally found a convenient distribution of this business. In the continued hot 
weather of full summer, the fermentation in the bed may decline faster than the strength of the tan is 
given out, from the mass of tan getting excessively dry. In this case, pour as much water on the surface, 
between the pots, as, in addition to that passing through the pots in common waterings, will restore suffi- 
cient moisture to the bed. With a small fork, keep the surface of the bark free from fungi, or crusty 
spawn, which are apt to generate there. 

2857. Substitutes for tan. Tan is in many places scarce and dear, and in others not to 
be got ; in either case it becomes an object to knov/ the best substitutes, and their manage- 
ment. Horse-dung alone^ as already observed, is used by some ; and, by others, mixed 
with bark, with ashes, with leaves, sawdust, shavings, clippings of leather, chopped 
spray, and such other dui-able substances as can be brought to ferment along with it, and 
prolong its dm-ation as a fermenting mass. 

2858. Nicol, when tanners' bark is difficult to be procured, recommends a mixture of leaves with stable- 
Mtter, using only a little baxk (fifteen or eighteen inches), in which to plunge the pots. But in using leaves, 
or leaves mixed with litter, they must always be well fermented, and the rank heat extracted out of them 
before they are made up into a bed for the plants. 

2859. Neill observes, that flax-dressers' refuse ferments very slowly and regularly, and that, used instead 
of stable-dung, it will keep up a steady heat longer than almost any other substance. 

2860. Oak-leaves. Speedily used oak-leaves with great success, and gives the follow- 
ing directions for their preparation : — 

2861. After being raked into heaps, they should immediately be carried to some place near the hot-house, 
where they must lie to couch. I generally fence them round with charcoal-hurdles, or any thing else to 
keep them from being blown about the garden in windy weather. In this place we tread them well, and 
water them in case they happen to have been brought in dry. We make the heap six or seven feet in 
thickness, covering it over witli old mats, or any thing else, to prevent the upper leaves from being blown 
away. In a few days the heap will come to a strong heat. For the first year or two that I used these 
leaves, I did not continue them in the heap longer than ten days or a fortnight ; but in this I discovered a 
considerable inconvenience, as they settled so much when got into the hot-house, as soon to require a 
supply. Taught by experience, I now let them remain in the heap for five or six weeks, by which time 
they are properly prepared for the hot-house. In getting them into the pine-pits, if they appear dry, we 
water them again, treading them in layers exceedingly well, till the pits are quite full. We then cover 
the whole with tau to the thickness of two inches, and tread it well, till the surface become Smooth and 
even. On this we place the pine-pots in the manner they are to stand, beginning with the middle row 
first, and filling up the spaces between the pots with tan. In like manner we proceed to the next row, till 
the whole is finished ; and this operation is performed in the same manner as when tan only is used. 

2862. Thus prepai ed, they will retain a constant and regular heat for twelve months without either 
stirring or turning; and if I may form a judgment from their appearance when taken out, (being 
always entire and perfect,) it is probable they would continue their heat through a second year ; but, 
as an annual supply of leaves here is easily obtained, such a trial with us is hardly worth the trouble 
fflf making. However, as a saving in leaves may be an agreeable object in places where they are less 
plentiful, I was induced to make the following experiments : — In 1777, one of the pine-pits was filled 
with one part of old, and two parts new leaves well mixed together ; and the next year, 1778, one 
pit was filled with old and new leaves in equal quantities : — in both these experiments, I had the 
satisfaction to find the pits so filled to retain a heat thi-ough each season, equal to the other pits th^t 
were filled entirely with new leaves ; and since that time we have always used the whole of the 
undccayed leaves mixed along with the new ones. I also have constantly used the leaves after 
they were taken out of the hot-house in the early-made hot-beds, and always found them to answer 
quite as well as fresh leaves. I must beg leave to observe, that when the leaves are intended to be used 
a second time, it will be proper at the taking them out of the pits to remove some few at the top, as also 
on each side ; because the leaves at the top and outside of the pit approach most to a state of decay. 
After this the pines will have no occasion to be moved but at the stated times of their management ; viz. 
at the shifting them in their pots, &c. when at each time, a little fresh tan should be added to make up 
the deficiency arising from the settling of the beds ; but this will be inconsiderable, as the leaves do not 
settle much after their long couching. During the two first years of my practice, I did not use any tan, 
but plunged the pine-pots in the leaves, and just covered the surface of the beds when finished, with a 
little sawdust, to give it a neatness. This method was attended with one inconvenience ; for, by the 
caking of the leaves, they shrunk from the sides of the pots, whereby they became exposed to the aii-, and 
at the same time the heat of the beds was permitted to escape. Many powerful reasons may be given 
why oak-leaves are preferable to tanners' bark. I believe that oak-leaves are preferable to those of any 
other sort ; but I have found, by repeated trials, that the leaves of beech, Spanish chestnut, and horn- 
beam, will answer the purpose very well. It seems, that all leaves of a hard and firm texture are very 
proper ; but soft leaves that soon decay, such as lime, sycamore, ash, and of fruit-trees in general, are 
very unfit for this mode of practice. 

2863. Superiority of oakJeaves. They always heat regularly; for, during the whole time that I 
have used them, which is near twenty-five years, I never once knew of their heating with violence ; and 
this is so frequently the case with tan, that I affirm, and indeed it is well known to- every person convers- 
ant in the management of the hot-house, that pines suffer more from this one circumstance than from all 
other accidents put together, insects excepted. When this accident happens near the time of their fruit- 
ing, the effect is soon seen in the fruit, which always comes ill-shaped and exceedingly small. Sometimes 
there will be little or no fruit at all ; therefore, gardeners who make use of tan only for their pines, should 
be most particularly careful to avoid an over-heat at that critical season — the time of showing fruit. 

2864. The heat of oak-leaves is constant ; whereas tanners' bark generally turns cold in a very sliort 
time after its furious heat is gone off". This obliges the gardener to give the tan frequent turnings, in 
order to promote its heating. These frequent turnings, not to mention the expense, are attended with 
the worst consequences ; for, by the continual moving of the pots backwards and forwards, the pines are 
exposed to the extremes of heat and cold, whereby their growth is considerably retarded ; whereas, when 
leaves are used, the pines will have no occasion to be moved but at the times of potting, &c. The pines 
have one particular advantage in this undisturbed situation ; their roots grow through the bottoms of 
the pots and mat amongst the leaves in a surprising manner. From the vigor of the plants, when in this 
situation, it is highly probable that the leaves, even in this state, afford them an uncommon and 
agreeable nourishment. 

2865. There is a saving in point of expense, which is no inconsiderable object in places where tan 
cannot be had but from a great distance, as is the case here, the article of carriage amounting to ten sliil- 
lings for each waggon-load. Indeed, this was the principal reason that first induced me to make trial of 
leaves. 



M m 3 



534 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



J^66. Decayed leaves make good manure ; whereas, rotten tan is experimentally found to be of no value. 
I have often tried it both on sand and clay, also on wet and dry lands, and never could discover, in any of 
jpy experiments, that it deserved the name of a manure ; whereas, decayed leaves are the richest, and 
of all others, the most suitable for a garden. But this must only be understood of leaves after they 
have undergone their fermentation, which reduces them to a true vegetable mould, in wliich we experi- 
mentally know that the food of plants is contained. This black mould is, of all others, the most pr<^r to 
mix with compost-earth, and I use it in general for pines, and almost for all plants that grow in pots : for 
flowers it is most excellent. The remainder of this vegetable mould may be employed in manuring the 
compartments of the kitchen-garden, for which purpose it is highly useful. 

2867. Leaves mixed unth dung mahe excellent hot-beds; and beds compounded in 
this manner, preserve their heat much longer than when made entirely with dung. In 
both cases, the application of leaves will be a considerable saving of dung, a circum- 
stance very agreeable, ^s it will be the means of preventing the contests frequently 
observed in large families, between the superintendant of the garden, and the directors 
of the husbandry. 

2868. Steam as a bottom heat, Specchly observes, " seems to stand forward among the 
modern improvements of gardening." Speechly knew, in 1796, only two instances in 
which steam was applied as bottom heat ; and, with JVI'Phail, does not think it will 
finally answer as a substitute for tan. Instances in which it is adopted, are now much 
more numerous ; but time sufficient has not elapsed, and the opinions of gardeners are 
yet too unsettled on its merits to enable us to recommend it for adoption in general 
practice. For heating the atmosphere of hot-houses, there seems little (or at least much 
jess) doubt of its being preferable to fire-heat. 

2869. Gunter, of Earl's Court, tried the application of steam as a bottom heat, by introducing the vapor 
into a chamber in the bottom of the pit, over which were laid crossbars covered with brush-wood, and, in 
some places, oak-planks, pierced with holes. On these the mould was placed in which the pines were 
planted. The quantity of heat imparted to the earth was very great, but, contrary to his exyHJctation, no 
vapor ascended into the mould, which became excessively dry and husky ; nor was he able, by frequent 
waterings, to keep it in a state tit for vegetation ; the roots of the plants in it, in spite of every precaution, 
becoming shrivelled and dry. {Hort. Trans, iv. 408.) 

2870. J. Hay, of Edinburgh, gives three examples {Calc/l. Mctn. vol. iii.) of steam having been adopted as a 
bottom heat in Scotland. It is there introduced under vaulted pits, or chambers covered with rafters and 
slates laid close in mortar, and has been found to succeed. {Different Modes of cultivating the Pine 
Apple, &c. 174.) 

2871. Hot ivata- as a bottom heat. Count Zubow, at St. Petersburg, employed steam 
to heat a pit or cistern of water, over which, at about three inches' distance, a frame, 
covered with faggots, %vas placed, and on this was laid the earth, in which his pines and 
other exotics were planted without being in pots. The plan is said to have succeeded, 
and a wholesome temperature to have been obtained and communicated to the mould 
above the faggots. (Fischer, in Hart. Trans, iii. 430.) 

2872. Fire-heat. Recourse must be had to the furnace whenever the temperature of 
the house, from the natural heat of the season, aided by the bark-pit, falls below 60". 
At 55^ the decline of atmospheric heat will not be got so far as to hurt pines and stove- 
plants in general ; but, if you light no fires till the thermometer fall to 55^, it may 
happen that, before the flues can be brought into full action to affect the bouse, a 
sudden retrocession in the natural season may sink the air at once five or six degrees 
lower — then, the tenderest exotics will be in a hazardous situation. It is not advisable 
to expose a plant that has been lately potted even to the extreme, 55°, lest ft should be 
checked in making new roots. To refuse tlie aid of the furnace till the latest moment 
will also restrain the gardener from admitting fresh air, in tlie meantime, so as to have 
always pure air in the house. ITie maximum heat to be caused by fire alone in absch- 
lute winter, is 68°. Tliis should be thrown to the middle of days not enlivened by 
sunshine ; also, to periods when the heat of the bark-bed is from any cause deficient. 
The medium, 64°, for mere fire-heat, should be interposed on preparing to air the 
house in the forenoon ; and in the evening, between three and eight. 

2873. Pit-coal is the best kind of fuel, mixed with cinders of the same, on account of 
the duration of the fire and regularity of tlie heat : cinders are lasting in the next de- 
gree : peat may be resorted to under a deficiency of either of the others ; it will require 
more attendance : wood blaaKs off so rapidly, that to maintain and regulate a furnace fed 
by it is very troublesome, (Pr. G.) 

2874. Coal-dmt, formed into bricks, with one third of its bulk of clay or pond-mud, 
has been tried by Knight. With these he found he could sustain a high and regular tem- 
perature in his pinery with little expense or trouble, and that the burnt clay and ashes 
were valuable as manure. {Hort. Trans, iv. 156.) 

2875. Time of tlie dai^ for lighting Jires. As soon as fires become necessary, Aber- 
crombie says, " the attendant on the furnace should set it at work every afternoon, at 
five, four, or three o'clock, according to the time of year, beginning an liour before sun- 
set. His last examination of the furnace for the evening should not be earlier than ten 
o'clock, when as much fuel should be added as will support tlie proper heat till the 
morning, while the front of the fire is smothered with ashes to prevent too consuming a 
draught. He ought to be again at the lire, to refrebh it with fuel in the morning, williin 



Book 1. 



PINERY. — GENERAL CULTURE. 



535 



seven hours after leaving it : when the nights are longest, the decline of the fire will 
thus be repaired three hours before sunrise." 

2876. The season for Jire-heat falls mostly within the limits of eight months, specified 
below. Fire-heat is first resorted to in evenings ; and is extended to mornings when 
the weather is cloudy and damp, or frosty. The lateness or forwardness of the seasons 
will require occasional deviations from any outline drawn from the practice of a single 
year : the following outline is given to assist, and not to fetter, the director of the 
stove : — 

2877. October, As soon as cold nights or foggy days occur, ifires will be wanted in houses where the stand- 
ard temperature marks a high minimum. The pinery first demands the aid of the furnace, on account of 
all the plants having been recently potted. Gentle fires made in the evening, to last only for the night, 
will supply the few degrees of heat m which the natural climate is defective. Artificial heat is not ap- 
plied to excite the pines to grow in the herb at this time ; but merely to prevent any check to the new 
roots from cold and damp. If the tan-bed send up a good heat, the use of the stove in the pinery may be 
deferred till the middle or end of the month. One object is, to keep the temperature up to a given mini- 
mum ; another, to interfere with fire-heat when the declension in the natural climate is unseasonably 
abrupt. Thus 62 degrees at the end of September, is more severe than 58 degrees at the end of October. 

£878. Noveviber. Work regular fires every evening, and occasional fires on cold mornings, and through- 
out severe days. A violent heat would be pernicious. The maximum to aim at for the day-time, in rigorous 
frosts, is 65 degrees, independent of any rise in the thermometer from occasional sunshine. 

2879. December. Attend punctually to the furnace in the afternoon, late at night, and timely in the morn 
ing. Between five and nine in the forenoon, never let the course of the fire-heat relax : but if, between nine 
and three, the sun should shine sufficiently to raise the thermometer to 70 degrees, the furnace may 
be stojiped, and need not work again till three in the afternoon. 

288Q. January. Recruit and regulate the stove evening and morning. To have the heat defective, or in 
excess, would be alike prejudicial. 

288 1. February. The furnace must be carefully attended as the three principal hours of daily regulation 
come round. Maintain fires all day in rigorous weather. . 

2882. March, From the returning influence of the sun, and the gentle impulse of the stove, the plants will 
be excited strongly into growth. To conduct them by an equal progression, the fire-heat should be regu- 
larly sustained morning and evening, and raised, as noon approaches, to 70, 72, and 75 degrees, in case the 
power of the sun alone has not elevated the thermometer, by ten in the morning, at least to 70 degrees. 
To make the continuation of fire in a hot-house during the day depend merely upon the presence or ab- 
sence of frost, is to treat a stove like a green-house. According to the climate to be imitated, the tenor 
of artificial heat ought to bear some analogy to the revolutions of temperature caused by the sun, as it 
respects both the history of a day, and the rise and acme of arrowing season. 

2883. April. Continuefires regularly while the sun is down j and when the weather is chilly and gloomy, 
work the furnace all day. 

2884. May. Go on with the evening fires : have a gentle heat in the early part of the morning, at least till 
appearances promise a fine warm day. Some managers, to spare fuel, dispoise with the stove as soon as 
the thermometer can be kept, by the shelter of the house and the influence of the bark-bed, from sinking 
below 60 degrees at the coldest time between sunset and sunrise. But, on the principle laid down in 
March, the heat ought to be progressive where pines are grown, and, indeed, where any fruit is forced 
that will repay the cost : in the pinery, then, the minimum for May is 64 degrees at the beginning, and 
68 at the close. 

2885. June. If the weather be seasonable, no fire-heat will be wanted. But, if it be midsummer, ac- 
cording to th e kalendar, resume fires in unseasonably cold intervals, in order to give sufficient air, without 
checking |)lants that have been excited by a higher temperature than .that at which the natural climate 
may happen to be during an anomalous day or two. (Abercrombie.) 

2886. Air. The following monthly directions on this subject by Abercrombie cor- 
respond with the practice of the other authors quoted : — 

2887. July and August. You can scarcely give air without restraint, even in the day-time, at any other sea- 
son than the last weeks of July and the course of August. When the nights are warm, leave openings for 
a gentle interchange with the unconfined atmosphere, so as not to expose the pines to casual rain. A con- 
.stant circulation of pure air will always invigorate growing plants, and heighten the flavor of ripening fruit. 
In the middle of sultry days, keep down the heat to the maximum under Temperature, by a very free 
circulation of air. 

2888. In September commences the necessity for caution in admitting air, so as not to lower the temper- 
ature beyond the minimum for the house. When air is given in reduced quantities, divide it equally to all 
parts of the pit. The atmosphere at the autumnal is not equally cool as the vernal equinox, because the 
heat from the past summer is not at once dissipated. The 23d of September will more often correspond 
with the middle of May than with the 21st of March, as to the influence on the glass of the withdrawing 
£^i!d returning heat in the natural climate. Proceed in September as in June and May below. 

2889. October, To give air without hazard, see Temperature for the house, and the directions in April 
and March. . 

2890. Novetnber. In calm fine days, give moderate admissions of air from about ten till two. Be careful 
to shut the sashes, if the atmosphere turn cloudy or excessively cold. 

2891. December. In the middle of a clear sunny day, when suJh occurs, though the air be frosty with it, 
slide down a light alternately a little way. Meanwhile keep up a maximum heat by the flues ; and shut 
the glasses by two o'clock, or sooner, if the weather or the thermometer requires. 

28!)2. January. As in December. 

2893. February. As in November ; rather freer : in order to which keep good fires. 

2894. March. Watch for favorable opportunities to give air. In warm cheerful days, with a little wiivd, 
draw oi)en some of the glasses about three hours before twelve, and close again by four in the afternoon j 
or reduce the interval, as the suitable hours may be few. 

2895. April. Every fair warm forenoon, as soon as the sun's influence will prevent the house from being 
chilled, admit fresh air by opening the sashes a little. From nine till noon, gradually widen the aperture 
for the air. Close again two hours before sunset, or before the thermometer is below 60 degrees, or 
the higher minimum prescribed by the forced advancement of the plants in particular houses. Whenever 
the weather is gloomy, raise the fire-heat preparatory to giving air. 

2896. May. Fresh air maybe admitted, in bright warm mornings, an hour sooner than in April ; and, on 
fine altcrnoons, the sashes may be kept open proportionally later, so as the thermometer be watched, and 
tl)o exceptions after shifting plants, or renewing the bark-bed, be attended to. 

28S)7. June. Give air liberally from seven to six, if the weather has attained a seasonable settled 
warmth. When the thermometer is down to 66 degrees, shut the glasses for the evening. 

2898. Water. The same agreement is observable in Abercronibie'.s general inslruc- 

M m 4 



53G 



PKACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



tions for ^vatering. " Use soft water ; in winter, let water that is to be given to plants 
stand in the house to acquire the same temperature, or warm the water to 75 degrees 
before applying it." 

2899. From 'November to February, or as long as the deficiency of a strong exhaling heat in the natural cli- 
mate makes it unsafe to let water fall into the hearts of the plants, give the water through a tube, composed 
of jointed pieces, so that it may be shortened at will, and having a funnel into which you may pour water. 

2900. From March to October it is proper to water over the leaves, excepting in the last stage of fruit and 
plants ; let the water be warmed to <S0 degrees before it is applied, which will contribute to kill several tribes 
of insects. 

2901. From the middle of October to the end of February the plants will require to be moderately watered 
only once in eight or ten days. When they have been recently potted, they require less than at other times. 
Under a continuance of moist and hazy weather, the plants may be kept without water for a lengthened 
interval, without any privation : in the beginning of October and March, once a-week may be sutficient. 
During the course of September and April, they may require watering every five days ; August, May, 
June, and July, every three or four. If, by accident, water fall into the heart of a plant in winter, the 
best remedy is, to shut the house close, and raise the heat something above the customary standard, that 
the water may go off in vapor before it can injure the plant. 

2902. Froin thefirst of March to Scpte)/}bcriA the season of free -excited growth, though this must commence 
sooner, or be continued later, according to the forwardness or delay of the plant, and the desired time of 
fruiting. During this season, the mould in the pots should be kept constantly a little moist. Maintain 
the bark-bed in good action, when you begin to water at the root in an increased degree ; heat the air of 
the chamber nearly to the maximum, before you at any time dew the herb, and raise it fully afterwards ; 
for moderate humidity, corrected and exhaled by heat, will make the plants thrive. 

2903. From May to August, the time of day for watering must recede more and more from the hour of 
noon to ten, nine, and eight in the morning ; or to three, four, or five in the afternoon, according to the 
power of the sun. When July and August happen to be sultry, the pine, as a plant, will flourish the better 
for a little water once in two or three days : but from pines in fruit withhold water, as the signs of ripe- 
ness appear. In the height of summer, pour the water over the leaves, and into the centre of the plant. 
It promotes the health of the herb, to have water standing continually in the heart of the plant, under a 
well-sustained heat, never fluctuating more than ten degrees below 80°. Shut the house close after water- 
ing, which will cause a dewy exhalation. 

2904. Watering ivith drainiiigs of the dunghill. In the growing season, about mid-day, 
between the times of shifting the plants, pour every six or eight days a quantity of dung- 
hill drainings on the mould, which is a compendious way of applying manure. Plants 
making new stalks and leaves may thus be invigorated ; but after fruit is shown, only pure 
water should be given even at the root. 

2905. Steaming the fines. Having the flues at a maximum heat, sprinkle them occa- 
sionally with water from a rose-pan. The steam thus raised is congenial to vegetation, 
and destructive to insects. It is a fine resource when you cannot water over the leaves. 
{Abercro7nbie.) 

2906. Insects. The white scaly coccus, or mealy pine-bug, is the most injurious in- 
sect to pine-apples. It adheres closely to the leaves ; and, if not removed, will in time 
consume them, though in appearance it seems almost inanimate. It infests the vine, the 
orange, and many plants besides the pine ; and lurking in the pots of earth plunged in 
the bark-bed, insinuating itself into every crevice of the walls and wood-woi-k, is not to 
be extricated without extreme difficulty. 

2907. The brown turtle insect, or brown scaly coccus, or bug, also infests the pine. It is nearly allied ia 
form to the white scale, but is much less injurious in its effects. 

2908. The white m^aly crbnson-tinged insect is also enumerated by Speechly ; and by some is thought to 
be the same as the white scale, with which it iS equally injurious, " wedging itself in between the protu- 
berances of the fruit in the most surprising manner," so as not to be got out without great difficulty, ren- 
dering the fruit unsightly, robbing it of its juices, and rendering it deficient in flavor, and ill tasted. (TV. 
on Pine, p. 133.) 

2909. Desti-oying insects. So many different processes have been recommended for destro>-ing these in- 
sects, that Abercrombie justly obser^-es, " To devise any remedy new in principle would be diflicult and 
altogether superfluous. Of the recipes and specified methods which have fallen into disuse, or were at 
once rejected by men of business, we shall avoid quoting any merely to say, that this is too simple to be ef- 
fective, that too elaborate to be of practical use, and a third as fatal to the plants as to the insects. It 
will be enough to select one or two remedies, which are safe, with a little qualification, and certainly effi- 
cacious. The ingredients of the first prescription are met with in many recipes : to Nicol belongs the 
credit of mixing them in the proportion recommended below. We shall previously observe, however, 
that many experienced growers of pines concur in the opinion, that a chemical preparation is not to be 
resorted to till the effects of a sound, cleanly course of culture have been tried." 

2910. Nicol's recipe. Take soft soap, one pound ; flowers of sulphur, one pound ; tobacco, half a pound ; 
nux vomica, an ounce ; soft water, four gallons ; boil all these together till the liquor is reduced to three 
gallons, and set it aside to cool. In this liquor immerse the whole plant, after the roots and leaves are 
trimmed for potting. Plants in any other state, and which are placed in the bark-bed, may safely be wa- 
tered over-head with the liquor reduced in strength by the addition of a third part water. As "the bug 
harbors most in the angles of the leaves, there is the better chance that the medicated water will be effec- 
tual, because it will there remain the longest, and there its sediment will settle. The above is a remedy 
for every species of the coccus ; and for most insects, on account of its strength and glutinous nature. Its 
application will make the plants look dirty ; therefore, as soon as the intended effect may be supposed to 
have followed, whatever remains of the "liquor on the leaves should be washed off with clean water. It 
would be improper to pour a decoction charged with such offensive materials over fruiting plants. Further, 
this peculiar dose for a tenacious insect is not to be applied indiscriminately to exotics in a general stove, 
as it might make the more delicate leaves of shmbs drop off 

2911. M'Phail's mode consists in the application of a powerful moist heat. Of this method we have 
already given an account, and shall only here observe, that it proceeds on the fact experimentally proved, 
that a degree of heat and moisture, which is speedily fatal to animals, will not immediately destroy or in- 
jure vegetable life, and this the more especially of plants of such a robust nature as the pine. 

2912. Griffin's recipe. To one gallon of soft rain-watei", add eight ounces of soft green soap, one ounce of 
tobacco, and three table-spoonfuls of turpentine ; stir and mix them well together in a watering-pot, and 
let them stand for a day or two. When you are going to use this mixture, stir and mix it well again, then 
strain it through a thin cloth. If the fruit only is infested, dash the mixture over the crown and firuit. 



Book I. 



COMPENDIUM OF A COURSE OF CULTURE. 



•with a squirt, until all is fairly wet ; and what runs down the stem of the fruit will kill all Hie Insects that 
are amongst the bottom of the leaves. When young plants are infested, take them out of their pots, and 
shaking all the earth from the roots (tying the leaves of the largest plants together'!, plunge them into 
the above mixture, keeping every part covered for the space of five minutes ; then take them out, and set 
them on a clean place, with their tops declining downwards, for the mixture to drain out of their centre. 
"When the plants are drv, put them into smaller pots than before, and plunge them into the bark-bed, 
{Tr. on the Pine, p. 84.) 

2915. Baldwin's recipe. Take horse-dung from the stable, the fresher the better, sufficient to make up 
a hot-bed three feet high to receive a melon-frame three feet deep at the back ; put on the frame and 
lights immediately, and cover the whole with mats, to bring up the heat. When the bed is at the strong- 
est heat, take some faggots, open them, and spread the sticks over the surface of the bed on the dung, so 
as to keep the plants from being scorched; set the plants or suckers, bottom uppermost, on the sticks; 
shut down your lights quite close, and cover them over well with double mats, to keep in the steam ; 
let the plants remain in this state one hour, then take out the plants, and wash them in a tub of cold 
water, previously brought to the side of your bed ; then set them in a dry place, with their tops down- 
wards, to drain, and afterwards plant them. This treatment is sure to kill every insect. You will observe 
likewise, that the crowns and suckers in the beds heated by linings of dung without fire-heat, will have 
all their insects killed, or be kept free of them, if they were clean when planted, by theefRuvia of the dung. 
{Cult, of Ajian. 33.) 

£914. Miller's recipe. Miller recommends turning the plants out of the pots, and cleaning the roots ; 
then keeping them immersed for four-and-twenty hours in water in which tobacco-stalks have been in- 
fusetl : the bugs are then to be rubbed off with a sponge, and the plants, after being washed in clean water 
and dripped, are to be repotted. INIuirhead, a gardener in the north of Scotland, has described a similar 
mode {Caled. Horf. Soc. Mc»i. i. p. 209.), only in the place of tobacco-juice, he directs flowers of suli)hur to 
be mixed with the water. With a bit of bass mat fixed on a small stick, and dipt in water, he displaces as 
many of the insects as he can see. He then immerses the plants in a tub of water, containing about lib, 
of flowers of sulpliur to each garden-potful. They remain covered with the water for twenty-four hours, 
as described by Miller. They are then laid with their tops downward to dry, and are repotted" in the usual 
j.nanner. What share of the cure in either of these ways may be due to the sulphur or to the tobacco- 
liquor does not clearly appear ; the rubbing off or loosening the insects is evidently important ; and it is 
not unlikely that immersion in simple water, so long continued, may alone .be sufficient to destroy them. 
Indeed, the experience of one of the best practical gardeners in Scotland (Hay\ leads him to conclude, 
that even moderate moisture is destructive to these insects. During many years, he regularly watered 
his pine-plants over head with the squirt, during the summer-months: this was done only in the 
evening ; it never injured the plants ; and the bug never appeared upon them. (Ed. Encyc. art. Horf.) 

2915. Knight's suggestion. " Baldwin recommends the steam of hot fermenting horse-dung : I con- 
clude the destructive agent, in this case, is ammoniacal gas ; which Sir Huraphrj- Davy informed me he 
had fomid to be instantly fatal to every species of insect ; and if so, this might be obtained at a small ex- 
pense, by pouring a solution of crude muriate of ammonia upon quick-lime ; the stable, or cow-house, 
would afford an equally efficient, though less delicate, fluid. The ammoniacal gas might, I conceive, be 
impelled, by means of a pair of bellows, amongst the leaves of the infected plants, in sufficient quantity to 
destroy animal, without injuring vegetable life : and it is a very interesting question to the gardener, 
whether his hardy enemy, the red spider, will bear it with impunity."' 

2916. Clea7isi)ig and refitting the house. Every department of the pinery must be kept 
at all times sweet and clean. At the period of removing sets of plants (or oftener, if 
necessar}') that have completed specific stages, purify the house thoroughly, and have 
the flues swept, the plaster white-washed, the wood-work and glass washed at all 
events, and the latter painted, if necessary, all broken glass mended, and every other 
substantial, or casual reparation eflfected. If insects are supposed to be harbored in 
the building, the following wash is to be introduced with a brush into the cracks and 
joints of tlie wood-work, and the crevices of the wall : " Of sulphur vivum, take 2 oz. ; 
soft soap, 4 oz. Make these into a lather, mixed with a gallon of water that has been 
poured in a boiling state upon a pound of mercury. Tlie mercuiy will last to medicate 
fresh quantities of water almost perpetually." {Abercrombie.) 

SuESECT. 9. Compendium of a Course of Culture. 

2917. The following judiciovs summary of jn-actice, from the planting of the crown to 
the cutting of the fruit, is given by Abercrombie. Tlie dates are arbitrary; but 
specific days or months must be assumed to mark anniversary and other periods. 

2918. Xursing-pit. Aug. 15. 1813. Crowns and suckers planted, 

Oct. SO. 1813. If the plants, from forward growth, require more room, some are removed to another 
pit, and the remainder set at increased distances. 

March 30. 1814. Such plants as want it are shifted. Plants of the same standing are now sometimes 
distributed to houses where the treatment differs, as the plant is expected to fruit at the end of two or 
three vears. 1. The large black varieties require three years' culture. 2. Crowns and fruit-suckers are 
seldom so forward as suckers from the stem. The last, indeed, commonly grow too vigorously, and do 
best under a moderate excitement during the first two stages. 

2919. Three-year fruiting plants. Nursing-pit. May, 1814. Plants intended to complete a year in this 
pit, are repotted ; having the ball of earth shaken away, and all the old root-fibres pruned off. 

2920. Succession.pif. Aug. 1,;. 1814. Plants that have been in the nursing-pit the previous year, are 
shifted and transferred to this house. 

2921. Fruiting-house. Aug. 1815. Plants which have consumed one year in the nursing-pit, and a 
second year in the succession-house, are removed to this department. 

Aug. 1. 1816. Fruit ripe. 

2922. Two-year fruitins plants. Succession-pit. March 30. 1814. Plants from the nursing-pit arc put 
into larger pots ; and brought for culture here, as directed under this division. 

May or June, 1S14. Succession pines are sometimes intermediately shifted, without disturbing the 
balls of earth. 

2!:)2.3. Fruiting-house. Aug. 15. 1814. Plants from the succession-pit, having consumed one year m the 
first and second stages, are shifted into the largest-sized pots, to be treated as under this head. 
Aug. 1. 1815. Having been cultivated as under fruiting-house, the ripe fruit is fit to cut. 



538 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paiit III. 



SuBSECT. 10. Recent Improve mmts in the Culture of the Pine-apjde. 
2924. Tlie most recent improve?nents in the culture of the pine-apple consist chiefly of some 
attempts by Knight and others to grow this fruit, as well without the aid of bottom heat 
as with it. Knight also employed a much higher degree of solar heat during summer, and 
much less fire-heat during winter, tlif.n is generally done by practical gardeners. Some 
lesser improvements, such as nourisliing the suckers on the parent stem after the fruit is 
cut, are less recent, and though not mentioned in the popular manuals of gardening, are 
yet frequently practised by the best cultivators. With respect to growing pine-plants by 
the heat of dung or tan without fire-heat, there is notliing new or extraordinary in the 
practice, as may be seen in the foregoing subsections, by the quotations from M'Phail 
and others. 

2925. The ^ect of a very high temperature dunng the day^ in bright weather, and of comparatively low 
temperature during the Jiight, and in cloudy weather, was tried by Kr,'(;h' i:i 1819. "A fire of sufficient 
power only to preserve in the house a temperature of about 70°, duiii: , summer, was employed ; but no 
air was given, nor its escape facilitated till the thermometer, perfectly sliaded, indicated a temperature of 
95° ; and then only two of the upper lights, one at each end, were let down about four inches. The heat 
of the house was consequently sometimes raised to 110", during the middle of warm and bright days, and 
it generally varied, in such days, from 90" to 105°, declining during the evening to about 80°, and to 70° in 
the night. Late in the evening of every bright and hot day, the plants were copiously sprinkled with 
water, nearly of the temperature of the external air. I'he melon, water-melon, Guernsey lily, fig-tree, 
nectarine, orange and lemon, mango, Avocado pear, Mamme-trce, and several other plants, part of them 
natives of temperate climates, grew in this hot-house so managed "through the whole summer, without 
any one of them being drawn, or any way injured, by the very high temperature to which they were 
occasionally subjected; and from these and other facts," Knight continues, "which have come within 
my observation, I think myself justified in inferring, that in almost all cases in which the object of the 
cultivator is to promote the rapid and vigorous growth of his plants, very high temperature, provided it 
be accompanied by bright sunshine, may be employed with great advantage ; but it is necessary that the 
glass of his house should be of good quality, and that his plants be placed near it, and be abundantly sup- 
plied with sand and water." In the above case liquid-manure was employed. It is added, 

2926. My house contains a fciv pine-apple plants ; in the treatment of which I have deviated somewhat 
widely from the common practice ; and I think with the best effects, for their growth has been exceed, 
ingly rapid, and a great many gardeners, who have come to see them, have unanimously pronounced them 
more perfect than any which tliey had previously seen. But many of the gardeners think that my mode 
of management will not succeed in winter, and that my plants will become unhealthy, if they do not 
perish in that season ; and as some of them have had much experience, and I very little, I wish, at 
present, to decline saying more relative to the culture of that plant. {Hort. Trails, iii. 465.) The al>ove 
information, the result of Knight's experiments in 1819, was communicated to the Horticultural Society 
in the autumn of that year. On the 7th of March following, a paper was read to the Society on the same 
plants, of which the following is a transcript : — 

2927. Gf those gai-deners who doubted whether the plants would stand the winter, it is stated, — The same 
gardeners have since frequently visited my hot-house, and they have unanimously pronounced my plants 
more healthy and vigorous than any they had previously seen : and they are all, I have good reason to 
believe, zealous converts to my mode of culture. I had long been much dissatisfied with the manner in 
which the pine-apple plant is usually treated, and very much disposed to believe the bark-bed, as Kent 
has stated {Hort. Trans, iii. 288.), " worse than useless," subsequent to the emission of roots by the crowns 
or suckers. I therefore resolved to make a few experiments upon the culture of that plant; but as I had 
not at that period, the beginning of October, any hot-house, I deferred obtaining plants till the following 
spring. My hot-house was not completed till the second week in June (1819), at which period I began my 
experiment upon nine plants, which had been but very ill preserved through the preceding winter by the 
gardener of one of my friends, with very inadequate means, and in a very inhospitable climate. These, at 
this period, were not larger plants than some which I have subsequently raised from small crowns, (three 
having been afforded by one fruit,) planted in the middle of August, were in the end of December last ; 
but they are now beginning to blossom, and in the opinion of every gardener who has seen them, promise 
fruit of great size and perfection. They are all of the variety known by the name of Ripley's queen 
pine. 

292S. Upon the introduction of my pine-plants into the hot-house, the mode of management, which it is 
the object of the present communication to describe, commenced. They were put into pots of somewhat 
more than a foot in diameter, in a compost made of thin green turf, recently taken from a river-side, 
chopped very small, and pressed closely, whilst wet, into the pots a circular piece of the same material, 
of about an inch in thickness, having been inverted, unbrokc . occupy the bottom of each pot. This 
substance, so applied, I have always found to afford the most tu^oient means for draining off superfluous 
water, and subsequently of facilitating the removal of a plant from one pot to another, without loss of 
roots. The surface of the reduced turf was covered with a layer of vegetable mould obtained from 
decayed leaves, and of sandy loam, to prevent the j. r i. of the grass roots. The pots were then placed 
to stand upon brick piers, near the glass ; and the M^.i^ bemg formed of loose bricks (without mortar), 
were capable of being reduced as the height of ir r t i,j,;»ts increased. The temperature of the house was 
generally raised in hot and bright days, chiefly b. . opfl ied solar heat, from 95 to 105 degrees, and some- 
times to 110 degrees, no air being ever given till "the temperature of the house exceeded 95 degrees ; and 
the escape of heated air was then only in a slight degree permitted. In the night, the temperature of 
the house generally sunk to 70 degrees, or somewhat lower. At this period, and through the months of 
July and August, a sufficient quantity of pigeons' dung was steeped in the water, which was given to the 
pine-plants, to raise its color nearly to that of porter, and with this they were usually supplied twice a-dav 
in very hot weather; the mould in the pots being kept constantly very damp, or what gardeners would 
generally call wet. In the evenings, after very hot days, the plants were often sprinkled with clear water, 
of the temperature of the external air ; but this was never repeated till all the remains of the last sprink- 
ling had disappeared from the axillsB of the leaves. It is, I believe, almost a general custom with 
gardeners, to give their pine-plants larger pots in autumn, and this mode of practice is approved by 
Baldwin. {Cult, of Anan. I nevertheless cannot avoid thinking it wrong ; for the plants, at tliis 
period, and subsequently, owing to want of light, can generate a small quantity only of new sap ; and con- 
sequently, the matter which composes the new roots, that the plant will be excited to emit into the fresh 
mould, must be drawn chiefly from the same reservoir, which is to supply the blossom and fVuit : and I 
have found, that transplanting fruit-trees, in autumn, into larger pots, has rendered their next year's 
produce of fruit smaller in size, and later in maturity. I therefore would not remove my pine-plants into 
larger pots, although those in which they grow are considerably too small. As the length of the days 
dnninished, and the plants received less light, their ability to digest food diminished. Cess food was in 
consequence dissolved in the water, which was also given with a more sparing hand j and as winter ap- 
IMoached water only was given, and in small quantities. 



Cook I. 



IMPROVEMENTS IN PINE-APPLE CULTURE. 



539 



2923. During the months of November and December, the temperature of the house was generally littfe 
above 50 degrees, and sometimes as low as 48 degrees, and once so low as 40 degrees. Most gardeners 
would, I believe, have been alarmed for the safety o( their plants at this temperature ; but the pine is a 
much hardier plant than it is usually supposed to be ; and I exposed one young plant in December to a 
temperature at 32 degrees, by which it did not appear to sustain any injury. I have also been subsequently 
informed by one of my friends, Sir Harford Jones, who has had most ample opportunities of observing, 
that he has frequently seen, in the East, the pine-ai)ple grooving in the open air, where the surface of the 
ground, early in the mornings, showed unequivocal marks of a slight degree of frost. 

2930. My plants l emained nearly torpid, and without growth, during the latter part of KoveJnbef, aftd 
in the whole of December ; but they began to grow early in January, although the temperature of the 
house rarely reached 60 degrees ; and about the 20th of that month, the blossom, or rather the future fruit, 
of the earliest plant, became visible j and subsequently to that period their growth has appeared very ex- 
traordinary to gardeners who had never seen pine-plants growing, except in a bark-bed or other hot-bed, 
I believe this rapidity of growth, in rather low temperature, may be traced to the more excitable state of 
their roots, owing to their having passed the winter in a very low temperature comparatively with that of 
a bark-bed. The plants are now supplied with water in moderate quantities, and holding in solution a less 
quantity of food than was given them in summer. 

2931. In planting suckers, I have, in several instances, left the stems and roots of the old phnt remaining 
attached to them ; and these have made a much more rapid progress than others. One strong sucker was 
thus planted in a large pot upon the 20th of July (1819), and that is (March 1820) beginning to show fruit. 
Its stem is thick enough to produce a very large fruit ; but its leaves are short, though broad and numer- 
ous ; and the gardeners who have seen it, all appear wholly at a loss to conjecture what will be the value of 
its produce. In other cases, in which 1 retained the old stems and roots, I selected small and late suckers, 
and these have afforded me the most perfect plants I have ever seen ; and they do not exhibit any symp- 
toms of disposition to fruit prematurely. I am, however, still ignorant whether any advantage will be 
ultimately obtained by this mode of treating the queen pine : but I believe it will be found applicable with 
much advantage in the culture of those varieties of the pine, which do not usually bear fruit till the plants 
are three or four years old. 

2932. Some remarks are next made upon the facility of managing pines in the manner recommended, and 
upon the necessary amount of the expense. " My gardener is an extremely simple laborer, he does not know 
a letter or a figure ; and he never saw a pine-plant growing, till he saw those of which he has the care. If I 
were absent, he would not know at what period of maturity to cut the fruit ; but in every other respect he 
knows how to manage the plants as well as I do; and I could teach any other moderately intelligent and 
attentive laborer, in one month, to manage them just as well as he can : in short, I do not think the skill ne- 
cessary to raise a pine-apple, according to the mode of culture I recommend, is as great as that requisite to. 
raise a forced crop of potatoes. The expense of fuel for my hot-house, which is forty feet long, by 
twelve wide, is rather less than sevenpence a day here, where I am twelve miles distant from coal pits 
and if I possessed the advantages of a curved iron-roof, such as those erected by Loudon, at Bayswater, 
which would prevent the too rapid escape of heated air in cold weather, I entertain no doubt, that the ex- 
pense of heating a house forty-five feet long, and ten wide, and capable of holding eighty fruiting pine- 
plants, exclusive of grapes or other fruits upon the back wall, would not exceed fourpence a-day. A roof 
of projierly curved iron bars, appears to me also to present many other advantages : it may be erected at 
much less cost, it is much more durable, it requires much less expense to paint it, and it admits greatly 
more light." (Hort. Trans. \v. 12.) The president has since (in June, 1820) had such a house as he has 
hinted at erected, and roofed with our bar ; and in a long paper {Hort. Trans, iv. 543.) read in November^ 
1821, and two others {Hort. Trans, v. 142. 227.) he has given some account of it, and of his experience 
in pine-apple culture. The first paper is quoted at length in TTie different modes of cultivuting the 
pine-apple from its first introduction to Europe, to the improvements of T. A. Knight, in 1822, (a work 
which should be in the hands of every pine grower,) and the following remarks are from that 
work : — 

2933. To draw any conclusions in the present stage of Knight's experiments would be premature, 
and might excite prejudice to anticipate the final result. That the pine-plant will grow and thrive, with- 
out what is technically called bottom heat, is an obvious truth, since no plant in a state of nature is found 
growing in soil warmer than that of the superincumbent atmosphere. But to imitate nature, is not always 
the best mode of culture ; for the more correct the imitation, the less valuable would be the greater part 
of her products, at least as far as horticulture is concerned. "What would our celery, cabbage, and apples 
be, if their culture were coined from nature? Though the pine-apple will grow well without bottom heat 
it may grow with bottom heat still better ; and though the heat of the earth, in its native country, may 
never exceed that of the surrounding atmosphere, it does not follow that earth heated to a greater degree 
may not be of service to it, in a state of artificial culture. But admitting for the sake of argument, that 
the pine-plant could be grown equally well with, as without bottom heat; still it appears to us that the 
mass of material which furnishes this heat, will always be a most desirable thing to have in a pine-stove, as 
being a perpetual fund of heat for supplying the atmosphere of the house in case of accident to the flues or 
steam-apparatus. Besides it appears from nature, as well as from observing what takes place in culture, 
that the want of a steady temi»erature and degree of moisture at the roots of plants is more immediately 
and powerfully injurious to them than atmospheric changes. Earth, especially if rendered porous and 
sponge-like by culture, receives and gives out air and heat slowly ; and while the temperature of the air of 
a country, or a hot-house, may vary twenty or thirty degrees in the course of twenty-four hours, the soil at 
the depth of two inches would hardly be found to have varied one degree. With respect to moisture, every 
cultivator knows, that in a properly constituted and regularly pulverised soil, whatever quantity of rain 
may fall on the surface, the soil is never saturated with water, nor, in times of great drought, burnt up 
with heat. The porous texture of the soil, and sub-soil, being at once favorable for the escape of super- 
fluous water, and adverse to its evaporation, by never becoming so much heated on the surface, or con. 
ducting the heat so far downwards as a close compact soil. These properties of the soil relatively to plants 
can never be completely attained by growing plants in pots, and least of all by growing them in pots sur- 
rounded by air. In this state, whatever may be the care of the gardener, a continual succession of 
changes of temperature will take place in the outside of the pot, and the comjjact material of which it is 
composed being a much more rapid conductor of heat than porous earth, it will soon be communicated to the 
web of roots within. "With respect to water, a plant in a pot surrounded by air is equally liable to injury. 
If the soil be properly constituted, and the pot properly drained, the water passes through the mass as soon 
as poured on it, and the soil at that moment may be said to be left in a state favorable for vegetation. But 
as the evaporation from the surface and sides of the pot, and the transpiration of the plant goes on, it be- 
comes gradually less and less so, and if not soon resupplied, would become dry and shrivelled, and either 
die from that cause, or be materially injured by the sudden and copious application of water. Thus the 
roots of a plant in a pot surrounded by air, are liable to be alternately chilled and scorched by cold or heat, 
and deluged or dried up by superabundance or deficiency of water, and nothing but the perpetual care and 
attention of the gardener, to lessen the tendencies to these extremes, could at all preserve the plant from 
destruction. To lessen the attention of the gardener, therefore, to render the plant less dependent on his ser- 
vices, and, above all, to put a plant in a pot as far as possi! le on a footing with a plant in the unconfined soil, 
j)lungiiig the pot in a mass of earth, sand, dung, tan, or any such material, appears to us a most judicious 
part of culture, and one that never can be relinquished in fruit-bearing plants with impunity. Even if no 
neat were to be afforded by the mass in which the pots were plunged, still the preservation of a steady 
temperature which would always equal the average temperature of the air of the house, and the re- 



540 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



tention, by the same means, of the steady degree of moisture, would, in our opinion, be a sufficient argu- 
ment for plunging pots of vigorous-growing, many-leaved, or fruit-bearing plants. 

2934. Had Juiight's plan been brought forward by a less eminent horticulturist, it 
would have claimed but little attention, as the plan of growing pines without bottom 
heat, is generally considered to have been tried, — first by M. Le Cour, and subsequently 
by various others, and abandoned. In Knight's hands, however, whether it fail or suc- 
ceed, it is certain of doing good, by the observations it will elicit from the fertile and 
ingenious mind of so candid and philosophical a horticulturist. {The different Modes, 
&c. p. 170.) 

2935. Estimate of Knight'' s efforts as to the culture of the pine-apple. Knight's two 
subsequent papers contain merely incidental observations of little consequence ; but in 
so far as they go, rather adverse than otherwise, both to the plan of house, as well as 
the mode of culture. On the whole, it may safely be asserted that no light has been 
thrown on the culture of the pine-apple by this eminent horticulturist, notwithstanding 
his assertions respecting the great facility of its culture by the most ignorant laborer ; 
that the culture in the bark-bed, or other hot-bed, if the pots be plunged into it, is worse 
than useless {Hort. Trans, iv. 544.); and that every one of a very great number 
of gardeners who visited the garden, declared himself a zealous convert. [lb. 545). 
The truth is, Knight commenced his operations a perfect novice in that depart- 
ment of gardening ; and it is most curious to observe, from his own accounts, that he 
has only succeeded in so far as he has approached to the modes in common use. Very 
large pots were adopted (Hort. Trans, v. 144.), which served as an approach to plunging 
smaller pots in a mass calculated to preserve a uniform degree of moisture : a house 
with a fixed roof is found less suitable for ventilation than one with sliding sashes [Hort. 
Trans, v. 287-8-9.) ; and this circumstance, and that of the iron bars admitting so much 
light, render the risk of over-heating such, that it was " thought best" to be " provided 
with a net" to shade in hot weather. In short, notwithstanding the " many converts" 
among the " practical gardeners," and the confident assertions in the communications to 
the Horticultural Society, the foilure may be considered as fiot only complete, but as 
having been attended by nothing useful or new on the subject. It is but rendering 
justice to practical gardeners to state this freely ; and Knight is too sensible a man to 
be offended at us for having done so. We, therefore, recommend all those who wish 
to grow the pine-apple in the first style of excellence, and at a moderate expense, to 
adopt the pits and houses of Baldwin, Alton, or Scott ; and to imitate their practice, 
or that of M'Phail and Griffin. See the useful treatise above (2932.) referred to for 
more minute details. 

2936. The mode of employing the vigor remaining in the old-stock or plant after the fruit is cut, 
to nourish, for a certain time, the sucker or suckers which may be growing on it, was prac- 
tised by Speedily ; but scarcely to the extent to which it has been carried lately. This 
we tliink, a considerable improvement, if kept within certain limits ; but, if carried too 
far, what might be gained by the sucker coming earlier into fruit, would be lost by the 
retardation of its own suckers. 

2937. A queen pine, grown hy Peter Marsland, of Woodbank, near Stockport, was exhibited to 
the Horticultural Society, on Nov. 3. 1818. " It weighed three pounds fourteen ounces, measured seven- 
teen inches in circumference, and was peculiarly well-flavored. The singularity of this pine was its being 
the produce of a sucker which had been removed from the parent root only six months previous to the 
time the fruit was cut. The plant on which the sucker grew had produced a fruit, which was cut in 
October, 1817 ; the old stem, with the sucker attached, was allowed to remain in the pine. pit till May, 
1818; at that time the sucker was broken off, potted, and plunged into a fresh pit ; it soon after showed 
fruit, which, in -the course of four months, attained to the weight and size above stated. P. Marsland is in 
the practice of producing pines in this way with equal success and expedition. His houses are all heated 
by steam." (Hort. Trans, iv. 52.) 

2938. Specimens of the New Providence, globe, black Antigua, and Enville, were exhibited on the 17th of 
October, 1819, all which were produced in a similar manner to the above. P. Marsland considers, that 
" though not of the largest description, yet as far as beauty of form and richness of flavor are concerned, ■ 
they would not yield to fruit of more protracted growth." The success which has attended this gentle- 
man's mode of " treating the pine, so as to ensure the production of fruit within twelve months from the 
cutting of their previous produce, has been perfectly satisfactory and the following is his account of it. 
" In November, 1819, as soon as the fruit had been cut from the pine-plants, which were then two years 
old, all the leaves were stripped off the old stocks, nothing being left but a single sucker on each, and that 
the strongest on the plant; they were then placed in a house where the heat was about sixty degrees, 
and they remained till March, 1820. At this period the suckers were broken off frdm the old stocks, and 
planted in pots from eight to twelve inches in diiimeter, varying according to the size of the sucker. It 
may be proper, however, to observe, that the length of time which the young sucker is allowed to remain 
attached to the mother plant, depends in some degree upon the kind of pine : the tardy fruiters, such as 
the black Antigua, and others, require to be left longer than the queen, and those which fruit readily. 
After the suckers had been planted, they were removed from the house, where they had remained while 
on the old stock, to one in which the temperature was raised to seventy-five degrees. Immediately upon 
their striking root, the largest of the suckers showed fruit, which swelled well, and ripened between 
August and November, being, on the average, ten months from the time the fruit was cut from the old 
plant, and seven months from the time the sucker was planted. The fruit so produced, though, as may 
be expected, not of the largest description, I have invariably found to be richer and higher flavored than 
that grown on older plants. The suckers of inferior strength will not show fruit in the same season, but 
in the following they will yield good fruit, and strong suckers for a succeeding year's supply. Those 
suckers are to be preferred which are produced on plants that have ripened their fruit in November, for 
those taken from plants whose fruit is cut in August or earlier, are apt to show fruit in January, or 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY, 



541 



February, while yet remaining on the mother plant. But whenever this happens, the sucker should be 
broken off immediately upon being perceived, and planted in a pot so as to form a root of its own, to 
maintain its fruit." {Hort. Trans, iv. 392.) 

2939. This experiment shows what can be done ; though it must be obvious that a considerable part of the 
saving in time is lost by the small size of the fruit. Baldwin, in our opinion, has hit on the proper use of 
this mode, the principle of which, as already observed, consists in the employment of the otherwise lost 
vigor of the old stock. He contrives to produce tolerably sized fruit, and to have such a degree of vigor 
in his suckers, as that they are able, in their turn, to throw out other vigorous suckers to succeed them. 
In aid of this, he often earths up the old stock, so as to cover the lower end of the sucker ; and partially 
wrenching it off, he, by these means, obtains for it a good stock of roots before he renders it an in- 
dependent plant. 

Sect. II. Of the CuUure of the Vinery. 

2940. On the culture of so important a fruit as the grape, it is not surprising that there 
should be a great variety of opinions. Without quoting those of the earlier, and of 
foreign authors, neither of which are of much value as to the hot-house culture of this 
plant, we shall give those of the best modern British gardeners ; on the general modes 
of culture adopted in ordinary vineries ; in regard to particular modes of culture ; as to 
gathering and preserving the fruit ; and as to insects and diseases. 

SuBSECT. 1 . Of the General Culture of the Grape in Fineries. 

2941. The culture of the grape in ordinary vineries embraces the subject of soil, sort of 
grapes, sort of plants, pruning, training, bleeding of the shoot, culture of the borders, 
time of beginning to force, temperature, air, water, ripening and resting of the wood. 

2942. Soil. The kind of compost Speechly made use of for the vine border of the hot- 
he use a Welbeck, was as follows, viz. " One fourth part of garden mould (a strong 
lo. m) ; one fourth of the swarth or turf, from a pasture where the soil is a sandy loam ; 
o; e fourth of the sweepings and scrapings of pavements and hard roads ; one eighth of 
rotten cow and stable-yard dung, mixed ; and one eighth of vegetable mould from 
reduced and decayed oak-leaves. The swarth or sward should be laid on a heap, till the 
grass roots are in a state of decay, and then turned over and broken with a spade ; then 
put it to the other materials, and work the whole well together." (Tr. on Vine, p. 25.) 
Speechly covers his vine border with a coat of gravel two inches thick. 

2943. Abercrombie says, " materials and proportions of a good compost are of top-spit sandy loam from an 
upland pasture, one third part ; unexhausted brown loam from a garden, one fourth part ; scrapings of 
ro:;ds, free fi'om clay, and repaired with gravel or slate, one sixth part ; vegetable mould, or old tan 
reduced to earth, or rotten stable-dung, one eighth part ; shell-marl or mild lime, one twelfth part." 
The borders he recommends to be from three to five feet in depth, and, where practicable, not less than 
four feet wide in surface within the house, communicating with a border outside the building, of not less 
than ten feet wide. 

2944. M'Phail directs as follows : " To make a suitable border where it is required for the grape-vine, 
provide a large quantity of earth of a loamy nature; that from arable land, or from a ridge in which a 
hedge-row of hazel, maple, elm, &c. have grown many years, and have been grubbed, is good ; or a spit 
deep from the surface of a common, long pastured ; or from the head or end lands of a corn-field ; either 
of these will do very well." For forcing early, he adds, " vines do best in a strong deep loam, 
not destitute of a mixture of sand, and well manured with rotten dung, on a dry bottom of hard 
clay." 

2945. Nicol, after premising that the bottom of the border is to be made perfectly dry by draining and 
paving, says, " the average depth of the border should not be less than a yard. If four feet, so much the 
better. It is not easy to say how broad it should be ; but it should not be narrower, outside and inside of 
the house taken together, than thirty feet. The soil should be thus composed : one half strong hazelly 
loam, one fourth light sandy earth, an eighth part vegetable mould of decayed tree-leaves, and an eighth 
part rotten dung; to which may very properly be added, a moderate quantity of lime, or of shell-marl. These 
articles should be perfectly decomposed, and intimately mixed, before planting." 

2946. G?-fffin, who has received the medal of the Horticultural Society for his skill in cultivating grapes at 
Woodhall, in Hertfordshire, forms his vine borders as follows : After being completely drained, the 
whole bottom is covered with brick, stone, or lime rubbish, about six inches thick, and on this is laid a 
compost of " half good loamy soil with its turf, one quarter of rich solid old dung, and one quarter of 
brick and lime rubbish ; the turf weU rotted, and the whole well incorporated." {Ho7-t. Trans, vol. iv. 
p. 100.) 

2947. Judd uses half of rich gritty loam from a common ; a quarter of rich old dung ; and a quarter of 
lime rubbish, tan, and leaf mould, mixed together. These materials were kept separate, and frequently 
turned during winter, and when afterwards well mixed were not sifted, but laid on a prepared bottom to 
the depth of three feet. He says he does not use so much dung as is usually done, because, though the 
vine will bear an extraordinary quantity of manure, yet its growth is thereby retarded, especially when 
young. He recommends the addition of old tan, from having experienced (with Speechly, Mitchell, 
and others) that the vine will root in that more freely than in any other substance. {Horf. Trans. 
vol. iv. p. 4.) 

2948. Sort of grapes. In the horticultural catalogue will be found a description of the 
best sorts of grapes for forcing, or the open wall, from which a selection may be made, 
according to the taste of the party. 

2949. For a mere glass case, in which the fruit is to be ripened by the heat of the sun, 
the following, which are the hardiest sorts, will succeed best, viz. white muscadine, white 
Sweetwater, black sweetwater, black Hamburgh, large black cluster, black July, miller 
grape, and black St. Peter's. 

29.50. For a small house to be forced, or to which fire-heat is to be applied in spring and autumn, the 
following sorts are what experienced gardeners recommend, as sure bearers and high.flavored grapes : 
black and red Hamburgh, black and grizzly Frontignac, black prince, white muscat of Alexandria, 
Sitwcl's white sweetwater, and early white Tencriffe. 

2951. M'Phail, for general forcing, recommends, as " the best sorts of grape-vines for forcing, the blaclc 



542 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



P.^aT III. 



Hamburgh, red Frontignac, black prince, black muscadel, red Lombardy, royal muscadine, white 
muscadine, white Frontignac, white muscat, white sweetwater, white muscadel, and white Svrian," 
{Gard. Hem, p. 77.) 

2952. Nicol, for geiu'ral forcings names twenty-four sorts, as under, marking those he esteems the best 
with an asterisk («). 

While Grapes. Black Grapes. 

^Sweetwater, *muscadiiie, *royaI mus- Muscadine, ^Frontignac, *Hamburgh, 
cadine, ^Frontignac, Hamburgh, raisin, *rauscat of Alexandria, cluster, *Con- 
*tokay, *passe musque, *mu!>cat of Alex- stantia, St. Peter's, 
andria, *Constantia. 

2953. SpeecMi/, Forsyth, and Abcrcro7nbic give long descriptive lists, and leave the reader to choose from 
their descriptions. 

2954. Sort uf plants. Vines are to be had in the nurseries, propagated either from 
layers, cuttings, or eyes ; and provided the plants be well rooted, and the wood ripe, 
many are of opinion that it is a matter of indifference from which class the choice is 
made. Justice prefers plants raised from cuttings, as likely to have ripened roots ; but 
where they have to be sent from a distance, he prefers to plants, cutting^ containing an 
inch or two of the old wood, and twelve or fourteen inches of the new. These he plants 
at once where they are to remain, as practised in France. Speechly prefers plants which 
have been raised from the eye, for the following reasons : " They have more abundant 
roots, grow shorter jointed, are more prolific, and will, if permitted, come into bearing 
the second year." Abercrombie takes indifferently plants raised from cuttings or eyes ; 
and M'Phail does not direct any preference. Nicol approves of " plants raised from 
cuttings that have been two seasons in pots, and have been properly treated and trained 
to a single shoot." The shoot of the first year should have been headed down to within 
six or eight inches of the pot ; and that of last season to four, or, at most, five eyes. 
** The plants should have been fresh potted into good earth last season, and should be 
now in pots of nine or ten inches diameter, well rooted, and healthy. Such plants are 
much to be preferred to those raised from layers that are seldom well rooted, and never 
grow so freely as plants raised from cuttings." 

2955. Cuttings and eyes. It may be remarked, that the most general mode of pro- 
pagating the vine at present, in the best nurseries, is from buds or eyes ; and that, both 
as the cause and effect, such plants are made choice of by most gardeners. Tlie great ob- 
jection to layers is, that being propagated in the open air, they grow till checked by frost, 
and then do not ripen their roots, which generally die off, so that the plants make very 
weak shoots the first year after planting. Layers kept in the nursery one year after being 
separated from the mother plant, are, of course, not so liable to this objection. Plants 
raised from cuttings or eyes, having no adventitious support, produce no more roots than 
what the shoot and leaves enable tliem to lipen, and at two years' growth, may be justly 
considered as the best description of plants for stocking a house. 

2956. Expedition proj)agation. Neill (Edin. Encyc. art. Hort.) describes <* an in- 
comparably more speedy mode of storing a new grape-house," than that of employing any 
description of plants to be procured from a nursery. 

2957. This mode is only to be adopted " where a vinery previously exists in the garden, or where there is 
a friend's vinery in the neighborhood. It is practised "frequently at the gardens of Dalkeith House, by 
James Macdonald, head gardener there, and a distinguished member of the Caledonian Horticultural So- 
ciety ; and Neill has been an ocular witness of * its complete success.' In the end of June or beginning of 
July, when the vines have made new shoots from ten to twelve feet long, and about the time of the fruit 
setting, he selects any supernumerary shoots, and, loosening them from the trellis, bends them down so as 
to make them form a double or flexure in a pot filled with earth, generally a mixture of loam and vegetable 
mould ; taking care to make a portion of last year's wood, containing a joint, pass into the soil in the pot. 
The earth is kept in a wet state ; and at the same time a moist warm air is maintained in the house. In 
about a week or ten days, roots are found to have proceeded plentifully from the joint of last year's wood, 
and these may be seen by merely stirring the surface of the earth ; or sometimes they may be observed 
penetrating to its surface. The layer may now be safely detached. Very frequently it contains one or two 
bunches of grapes, which continue to grow and come to perfection. A layer cut ofF in the beginning of July 
generally attains, by the end of October, the length of fifteen or twenty feet. A new grape-house, there- 
fore, might in this way be as completely furnished with plants in three months, as by the usual method, 
above described, in three years. Supposing the layers to be made on the 1st of July, they might be cut, 
and removed to the new house on the 9th : by the 9th of October, the roof would be completely covered 
with shoots, and next season the house would yield a full crop of grapes. It is not meant that they should 
be allowed to do so, if permanently bearing plants be wished for ; on the contrary, they should be suffered 
to carry only a very moderate crop, as it is pretty evident that the roots could not sustain the demand of a 
full one, or at any rate, that the plants would necessarily show their exhausted state, by barrenness in the 
following season. By this means the more delicate kinds, as the Frontignac, may be quickly propagated ; 
we have seen layers of the Gibraltar or red Hamburgh made in the beginning of Jidy, reach the length of 
thirteen feet before the end of the month, yielding at the same time two or three bunches of grapes. The 
more hardy, such as the white muscadine, form still stronger plants in that space of time. Little difficulty 
is experienced in removing the plants from the pots into the holes prepared for them : if there be fears 
of preserving a ball of earth to the new roots, the pots may be sunk with them, and then broken and re- 
moved ; or the plants may be kept in the pots till autumn, when they may very easily be taken out of them 
without detriment. Macdonald's experience does not lead him to think that plants propagated in this 
way are less durable than those procured by slower means, and where the roots and branches bear a rela- 
tive proportion to each other. But supposing they were found to be less durable, it is evident that one may 
thus very easily keep grape-houses constantly stored with healthy fruit-bearing plants, and that the kinds 
may be changed almost at pleasure. When it happens that too much bearing wood has been trained in, 
the plants are relieved, and sufficient sun and air admitted, by thus removing two or three shoots ; and 
supposing these to contain each several bunches of some fine sort of grape, they are not lost, but may be 
ripened, by setting the jwts on the side shelves, or flue-trellis, of the pinery, or any hot-house." We have 
tried this mode with success, and find it greatly aided by ringing the larger at or below the tongue. 



Red Grapes* 
*Frontignac, *griz.zly Frontignac, rai- 
sin, *tlanie tofcay, *Ix)nibardy. 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



543 



2958. Choice by anlicipation. A mode of very general utility is to select the plants in 
the nursery a year before wanted, and to order them to be potted into very large pots, 
baskets, or tubs, filled with the richest earth, and plunged in a tan-bed. They will thus 
make stioots, which, the first year after removal to their final destination, will, under or- 
dinary cii'cumstances, produce fruit. 

2959. Planting inside or outside the house. Vines are commonly either trained against 
the back wall, or on a trellis under the glass roof. In the former case, the plants are al- 
ways placed inside the house ; but in the latter, there are two opinions among practical 
men, one in favor of planting them outside, and the other inside the parapet wall. Where 
the vines are to be drawn out when in a dormant state, as is generally the case with those 
trained under the rafters of pineries, there can be no question that outside planting must 
be adopted ; but for vineries, where this practice is not requisite, it seems preferable to 
plant them inside. This is Nicol's practice, who places one plant " behind the parapet, 
and between it and the front flue, in the centre of eacli light." 

2960. Mode of plantiiig. Abercrombie says, " Let them be carefully turned out of 
the pots, reducing the balls a little, and singling out the matted roots. Thexi place them 
in the pits, just as deep in the earth as they were before, carefully spreading out 
the fibres, and filling in with fine sifted earth, or with vegetable mould. Settle all with 
a little water ; and let them have plenty of free air every day, defending them from very 
severe frost or much wet ; which is all the care they will require, till tljiey begin to push 
young shoots." 

2961. JudcVs mode of planting seems to be excellent in its kind ; it is founded on the principle of 
increasing the number of mouths or feeders of the roots of plants (740.), to enable them to search for, 
and take up food, rather than gorging such as they may have with too much food, or with food of too 
rich a quality. The vines being raised from single eyes in March, were in the March of the following year 
cut down to one eye, and put in bottom boa* till they produced shoots of sufficient length to draw through 
the holes in the parapet of his viner}, ' ' • n't two feet ; afterwards they were hardened in the green- 
house, where a temperature was kept of aboat M^, and there they grew two feet more. Holes were opened 
in the vine border in the beginniis?: o; ' f;iy, and in about a fortnight after, a wheelbarrow full of old tan, 
or earth of tan, was put in each hoi . , in the middle of which the roots of the pine-plants remained after 
being treated as follows. " The Ic^'^es were cut off' from the lower part of the plant, about two feet and 
a half of its length ; the end of the shoot was then drawn very carefully through the hole, so that the 
pot being removed, the ball v/as placed two feet distant from the front of the house, upon its side, so that 
the stem lay in a horizontal pos'tior.. ibout six inches below the level of the surface of the border. When 
thus placed, the whole of the f-teia. which was to be covered was slit, or tongued, at each eye, like a 
carnation layer, by passing a snarp penknife at three quarters of an inch below each eye, and on the side 
of the eye, about one third of the thickness into the wood, and then upwards to the centre of the joint. 
This being done, the stem was covered with about four inches of old tan, and the other two inches were 
filled up with the mould of the border." It is essential to the safety of the shoot, that the slitting be done 
the last thing, and whilst it is laid in its position, lest the stem should be broken. By slitting the stem, 
he adds, " abundance of roots are produced from every eye : the progress of the shoot is not very 
great until the roots begin to push out ;" after which, however, it is so surprising that those under Judd's 
management were from twenty-five to thirty feet in length, and of proportionate strength. {Hort. Trans. 
iv. 4.) 

2962. Season of jdanting. As the plants are generally in pots, and may be turned out 
with balls, they may be planted in almost any month in the year ; but the autumn or 
spring months are of course to be preferred. Nicol says, I have planted grape-houses 
in May, and in June, that have succeeded so well, as that the plants have reached the top 
of the house before November in the same years. They were kept in pots, and so care- 
fully turned out of them in transplanting, as that the plants experienced no check, although 
sprung many inches. I have also done the like with peaches." 

2963. Distance. Speechly disapproves of the common practice of planting all the dif- 
ferent sorts of grapes at the same distances, and advises a larger or less space to be allowed, 
in proportion to the natural character and qualities of the plant. Vines planted at three 
or four feet apart he considers as crowded ; for though by this mode a house will soon 
get furnished, and tolerable crops of grapes be produced in a few years ; yet after remain- 
ing many years so close together they will be cramped in their growth for want of room, 
and thereby rendered less productive. On a wall or trellis twelve feet high, he recom- 
mends six feet between plant and plant for the weak and delicate kinds, and twelve feet 
for those that grow robust and strong. But in order to obtain a crop of grapes as soon 
as possible, he proposes to introduce temporary plants between the principals ; such tem- 
porary plants to have been grown two or three years, in large pots, so as to come imme- 
diately into bearing, and to be trained so as to occupy the upper parts of the wall, while 
the principals are furnishing it below. {Treat, on Vine, 102.) 

2964. Temporary plants. " At first planting a house," Abercrombie observes, " some 
of the vines may be introduced as temporary plants. After the wood from a good stool is 
able to cover the space between two or more lights, plants less vigorous, or which bear 
fruit not so well approved, may be taken quite away. A vinery is better adapted for cul- 
tivating a single plant to a considerable extent than a hot-house." 

2965. Pruning and training. Tlie opinions of authors and practical men on this sub- 
ject are very various ; and each, as M' Phail observes, lays " much stress on his own mode ;" 
he adds, " but I am of opinion, that to have good crops of grapes much more depends 



544 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



on the soil tliey are planted in, and the climate in which they are kept, than on any me- 
thods of pruning or training that have been, or ever can be, adopted." In this sentiment, 
every person of observation who has seen a number of the vineries in this country, or 
vineyards on the continent, must entirely concur : but as every operation of art is, 
or ought to be, conducted in a manner suitable to the end in view, it is highly necessary 
that system should enter into tins as into every thing else. We shall, therefore, give 
the various opinions of practical men as to training vines in vineries, in chronological 
series, beginning with Speechly, the Moses, as he may be called, of modern British 
vine-dressers. 



455 




2966. Speechly s mode of prun- 
ing and training. Speechly, hav- 
ing planted a vine against a wall 
or roof-trellis, cuts it down to 
two eyes or buds [Jig' 455. a) ; 
the next winter the shoots of the 
preceding summer are shortened 
each to one eye [b] ; two leading 
shoots are produced, trained up- 
right during summer, and in the 
following winter headed down to 
from three to five feet each, and 
laid in horizontally parallel to the 
ground, and about a foot above 
it (c) ; these main stems pro- 
duce shoots from every eye, but 
only a few are selected, which 
stand from a foot to fifteen inches 
apai-t, and these are trained up- 
wards during summer, and in 
wdnter every other one is cut out 
to within two or three eyes of 
the main stem, and the rest 
shortened to one third of the 
length of the trellis {d). The 
following summer, the third, a 
moderate crop will be produced 
from the side shoots of the wood 
of the preceding year, and from 
tlie spurs on the main stem. In 
the winter following, the shoots 
which have produced the fruit 
are shortened down to two eyes, 
excepting the leaders to the long 
shoots, which are left with four 
or five eyes (e). Next summer, the fourth, the top of the roof, or wall, will be reached 
by the leading shoots, and the spurs are now allowed to produce each one leader. In 
winter, both of these leaders are headed down to four or five eyes, and the side shoots, 
from the old wood, to one or two eyes {f). In the following summer, the fifth, a fuU 
crop of grapes is produced in every part of the house. This constitutes one course or 
rotation ; and the next, and all the future courses, extend only to four years, in which 
the object is to renew the upright bearers every fourth year, the intervening spurs fur- 
nishing shoots to succeed them. Tliis method is called perpendicular, spur, or Dutch 
training : but few who adopt it pursue it so regularly as to renew the old upright shoots 
every fourth year, by which, and for other causes, and cliiefly the small quantity of fruit 
produced during the first four years, it has fallen into disrepute. 

2967. Abercrotnbie's " methods of priming established vines" admits of much diversity of method, as the 
plants are in different situations. Without reckoning the cutting down of young or weak plants, alter- 
nately, to the lowermost summer shoot, which is but a temporary course, three different systems of prun- 
ing have their advocates. 

2968. The first method is applicable only to vines out of doors ; but it may be transferred to plants in a 
vinerj' without any capital alteration. In this method, one perpendicular leader is trained from the stem, at 
the side of which, to the right and left, the ramifications spring. When the plant is established, the imme- 
diate bearers, or shoots of the growing season, and the mother bearers, or shoots of the last year's growth, 
are thus managed. Soon after the growing season has commenced, such rising shoots as either are in fruit 
and fit to be retained, or are eligibly placed for mother bearers next season, are laid in, either horizontally 
or with a slight diagonal rise, at something less than a foot distance, measuring from one bearing shoot to 
the next : the rising shoots, intended to form young wood, sliould be taken as near the origin of the 
branch as a good one offers, to allow of cutting away, beyond the adopted lateral, a greater quantity of 
the branch, as it becomes old wood ; the new-sprung laterals, not wanted for one of these-two objects, are 
pinched off. The treatment of those retained, during the rest of the summer, thus differs. As the shoots 
in bearing extend in growth, they are kept stopped about two eyes beyond the fruit : — the connate shoots. 




Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



545 



cultivated merely to enlarge the provision of wood, are divested of embryo bunches, if they, eho^ any ; 
but are trained at full length as they advance during the summer, until tliey reach the allotted bounds : 
were they stopped in the middle of' their growth, it would cause them to throw out troublesome laterals 
In the wii:ter pruning, there will thus be a great choice of mother bearers. That nearest the origin 
of the for ner mother bearer, or most commodiously placed, is retained, and the other or others on the 
same branch are cut away; the rest of the branch is also taken otf, so that the old wood may terminate 
with the adopted lateral : the adopted shoot is then shortened to two, three, four, or a greater number of 
eyes, according to its place on the vine, its own strength, or the strength of the vine. The lower shoots 
are pruned-in the shortest, in order to keep the means of always supplying young wood at the bottom of 
the tree. 

2969. The second method is to head down the natural leader, so as to cause it to throw out two, three, 
or more principal shoots ; these are trained as leading branches ; and in the winter pruning are not 
reduced, unless to shape them to the limits of the house, or unless the plant appears too weak to 
sustain them at length. Laterals from these are cultivated about twelve inches apart, as mother bearers ; 
those in fruit are stopped in summer, and after the fall of the leaf are cut-in to one or two eyes. From 
tlie appearance of the mother bearers, thus shortened, this has been called spur-pruning, 

£970. The third -method seems to flow from taking the second plan as a foundation, in having more than 
one aspiring leader; and from joining the superstructure of the first system immediately to this, in 
reserving well placed shoots to come in as bearing-wood. Thus, supposing a stem, which has been 
headed, to send up four vigorous competing leaders, two are suti'ered to bear fruit ; and two are divested 
of such buds as break into clusters, and trained to the length of ten, twelve, fifteen feet, or more, 
for mother bearers next season. In the winter pruning, the leaders which have borne a crop are cut 
down to within two eyes of the stool, or less, according to the strength of the plant; while the reserved 
shoots lose no more of their tops than is necessary to adjust tliem to the trellis. 

2971. M'Phail also describes three modes of pmyiing the vine; the first, or fruit-tree 
manner, he calls the old method, the general shape of the plant when pruned and trained 
being like that of a trained peach 456 

{Jig. 456.) ; the second he agrees 
with Abercrombie in calling 
spur-pruning {Jig. 455.) ; and the 
third he calls the long or new 
method {Jig. 459.^ ; " though," 
he adds, " I understand by 
books (Sii'itzer and The Betired 
Gardener), that it was in practice 
nearly one hundi'ed years ago, 
and I saw it in practice forty years 
since." It is singular tliat this 
old method of IM'Phail should 
have been recently described and 
figured by a Gemian horticul- 
turist, as a new and " experi- 
mentally proved superior method of vine culture;" Versuch drier durch Erfcdmu 
erprobten methode den JJ'einbau zu verbessern, von J. C. Keclit, Berlin, 8vo. 1813. 

2972. Forsytlis method oj vine train- 457 
ijig nearly resembles that of Speechly ; 
but instead of laj-ing-in the shoots in a 
straight direction, eitlier upright or ho- 
rizontal, he bends and attaches them 
in a serpentine form {Jig. 457.), which 
has some effect in the open air, or 
under gentle forcing, of making them 
break more regularly ; though even 
this is denied by some, who contend 
that, so treated, they break only at the 
angles or bends. 

2973. NicoVs opinion, as to the dif- 
ferent modes of training, is in unison with 

M'Phail's and our own. He says, " With respect to the manner in which vines should be 
ti'ained, opinions are at variance. Some advise training the shoots in a straight and 
direct manner ; others in a horizontal manner ; and others in a serpentine form. If 
grapes be otherwise well managed, they will do well in any of the above ways ; and I 
have just to observe, with respect to the last-mentioned method, that it necessarily leads 
to more confusion, particularly with regard to the training-in of tlie summer wood, than 
either of the preceding methods. On dwarf-walls or trellises, the horizontal or zigzag 
manner of Hitt {Jig. 386. g.), or Forsyth {Jig. 457.), maybe very proper; but in a 
properly constructed and properly planted grape-house, the most sensible manner of 
training, in my opinion, is directly up the roof." 

2974. The first year after planting, " after the buds have sprung an inch or two, it will be proper to single 
out those to be trained, and displace the others with the thumb. Three shoots only should be trained on 
each plant ; that is, the two lowennost, and the uppermost, if it be vigorous ; but otherwise displace it, 
and train the next below it. As the shoots advance, they should be trained at the distance of ten or 
twelve inches from each other; allowing them sufficient room in the ties to swell without being bound. 
Pinch off all laterals as they appear, except one or two nearest to the point of the shoot, lest by any acci. 

N n 





546 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



PaRT IIL 



dent it be broken, and in that case, tiiat a substitute may readily be found ; which, however, is never 
equal to the main shoot ; so that great care should be taken in the training of principal leaders. One 
side shoot of each plant may be stopped when it is five or six feet in length, and the other when nine or 
ten, (as they are to be cut well down in the winter pruning,) which will throw in the more strength to 
the middle shoots, that are only to be headed down to about six or eight feet, and which, if weU 
ripened, may yield a few fruit next season. These should be encouraged, therefore, and be carefully 
trained, as long as they will grow." 

2975. In the end of the season, say in the month of November, "these shoots," Nicol observes, "are to 
be pruned thus: the side shoot, stopped first, to three eyes ; the other to five or six feet ; and the middle 
shoot, to seven, eight, or ten feet, according to its strength : from which may be expected a good deal of 
fruit next season, and a shoot from its extremity, to be stopped at the top of the house, this time twelve- 
month. From the side shoot, pruned to five or six feet, may be expected a few fruit ; and from its ex- 
tremity, a shoot to be headed at this time next year, at nine or ten feet in length, which will, the season 
following thereafter, produce a full crop. From the side shoot, shortened to three eyes, are to be expected 
two shoots ; the one to be trained to the height of about nine or ten feet (to be pruned to five or six at 
this time next j^ear) ; and the other to four or five only, as it is again to be pruned back to two or three 
buds this time twelvemonth ; thus providing for wood to fill the under part of the treUis." 

2976. Bearing shoots. In a properly constructed grape-house, the plants trained up the roof, and tlie house 
filled %vith wood, "there should be," Kicol observes, "three ranges of bearing shoots; viz. one range, at 
bottom of the trellis, from end to end of the house, reaching from within two feet of the ground, five or 
six more feet upwards j a second, reaching from a foot, or perhaps two feet under the tops of these, that 
is, from within seven or eight feet of the ground, to the distance of fourteen or fifteen feet upwards from 
it; and a third range, reaching from a foot or two under the tops of these last, to the uppermost row of 
wires on the trellis : the shoots of the first, or lower range, being headed at about five or six feet ; those 
of the second, or middle range, at about seven or eight ; and those of the third, or uppermost, at about 
nine or ten feet in length ; all a foot or two, more or less, according to circumstances, according to their 
strengths, how low or how high upon the plants they have issued, and how far they have sprung, and are 
fully matured. The distance at which these shoots should be placed from each other, in their respective 
ranges, is about thirty inches ; which distance is necessary to give room to the stubs of next year, on which 
the clusters are to hang, as in this season ; and which distance may be varied a few inches, according to the 
kinds of grapes, some growing stronger than others. The undermost shoots on the trellis, or those placed 
nearest to the ground, and which were only trained to the height of a few feet, must be shortened back 
to two or three joints ; it being a principal point in the training of vines, always to provide for a supply of 
bottom wood, and to keep young wood as near to the ground, or lower parts of the plants, as possible." 

2977. Cutting and laying in the shoots. " In pruning, cut generally at two inches above the bud. Some cut 
nearer, even as near as half an inch, which is apt to weaken the shoot of next season, and sometimes to 
prevent its vegetating at all ; the buds being very susceptible of injury, on account of the soft and spongy 
nature of the wood. In the cutting out of old wood, be careful to cut in a sloping direction, and to 
smooth the edges of the wound, in order to prevent its being injured by moisture. The pruning being 
finished, let the loose, shreddj', outward rind on the old wood be carefully peeled off", observing not to 
injure the sound bark, and clear the trellis and branches of leaves, tendrils, &c. Let the shoots 
and branches be afterwards regularly laid in, at the distances above specified, particularly the young 
shoots that are expected to bear next season. As to the others, it is not so material ; nor is it ma- 
terial how near the young shoots be placed to the old, or even though they sometimes cross them. 
Choose strands of fresh matting, or packthread, to tie with ; and observe to leave sufficient room for the 
swelling of the shoots and branches next season, as often already cautioned." 

2978. General treatment after pruning. " The house should be shut up at nights, for ten days or a fortnight, 
after being pruned, particularly if theVe be any appearance of frost ; admitting air freely through the day. 
It is proper to keep the plants from the extremes of heat or cold for some time, in order that their pores 
may contract, and the wounds may heal gradually ; as otherwise they are apt to bleed now, and to break 
out afresh on the application of fire-heat in the spring. When they are judged to be safe, expose the 
house night and day." 

2979. HaywarcCs j)runing and 
training proceeds on the opinion, 
** that the greater length the sap has 
to pass through the body of the vine, 
the more abundant, fine, and high- 
flavored will the fruit be he re- 
commends introducing only one plant 
in a \inery, and training it over the 
whole trellis, either in horizontal 
shoots from two main leaders {Jig. 
458. d) ; or in his wavy manner (6) ; 
and he can, as the tree advances in 
growth, gradually convert the latter 
into the former mode. 

2980. Setons training. A very scientific mode of training . Aanes under a glass roof, 
has been adopted at Stamford Hill, by J. Seton, Esq. one of our most enlightened horti- 
culturists, and practised by him for several years with considerable success. It is thus 
described : — 

2981. T1)e vine ha ving, like other trees, a tendency to produce its most mgorous shoots at the exti-emitics of the 
tranches, and particularly so at those which are situated highest, it generally happens, when it is trained, 
as is most frequently done, across and upwards, from the front to the back of the house, that the greater 
portion of the fruit is borne near the top, while the lower parts are comparatively barren. This take.s 
place, whether the branches be made to consist chiefly of vigorous terminal shoots, preserved at con- 
siderable length, or the leading shoots be kept short, and lateral spurs be left for the production of the 
fruit ; but in the latter case, the evil exists in a smaller degree : for the spurs, or short lateral branches, 
divert tJie sap in its ascent, producing, by means of its flowing to their extremities, an approximation to 
the efTect of long branches. The same inconvenience would occur, to a certain extent, if the vines were 
trained in a like manner in the open air, but it is greatly augmented in a house, in consequence of the 
air being much hotter, as every one knows, at the top than beneath. Having observ'ed that the fruit pro- 
duced on the vigorous shoots, which usually grow it the extremities of the long branches, is, generally, 
more abundant, and of a finer quality, than tliat produced on the short lateral ones, I was desirous to 
promote the growth and preservation of the former ; but the usual mode of training the branches across 
the house and upwards, being subject to the objection before-mentioned, and little scope being afforded for 




Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



517 



it in a house of small dimonslmis, I thought I should obviate these iiiconveiiioncGS, in great part, and 
attain anoUier object, presently to be mentioned, by training the branches in a horizontal direction, and 
keeping the whole of the fruit-bearing part of each tree nearly on the same level. 

2982. Five vines were planted at the ends of a house, tiventy-Jive feet in length, for this purpose, provided 
with rods placed horizontally under the glass of the roof, twenty inches asunder, and extending from end 
to end. The first vine, placed at one end, beiiig trained up to the two lower rods, a shoot of it was laid 
along each of them, and continued successively from year to year, till it reached the other end : then the 
shoot on the lower rod was turned upwards to the next, and led back upon it towards the stem of the 
ti'ee ; while that on the upper rod was turned down, and led back, in like manner, on the lower one. 
During this process, a sufficient number of spurs, or short branches, was left annually on the old v/ood, 
to produce fruit. When the leading shoots, which had been thus trained in a retrograde direction, ap- 
proached towards the end, whence the original branches proceeded, preparation was made for a succession 
of young wood, bringing forward two fresh shoots from the stem of the tree, and leading them along, 
close to the preceding ones. As these, and the leading shoots of the first branches, which were then on 
their return, advanced, the spurs on that part of the old wood, to which they had reached, were cut out, 
to make room for them, the naked stem only being left. "When the second series of branches had re- 
turned nearly to the end, at which the trunk was situated, the first series, on which there was then but 
little of the herbage remaining, was cut out at the trunk. Fresh shoots were then brought forward to 
succeed the second series ; and so on without end. It would be superfluous to dwell on the mode of 
managing the other trees ; as it v/ill be perceived that, following the same principle, they must be laid 
along the higher rods in succession, two rods being allowed to each tree ; and v/hen the stem is not at the 
end of the house, two branches are to be trained eastward, and two westward, along the rod. Thus, in a 
house of twenty-five feet in length, instead of having only fifteen or sixteen feet, to admit of the length 
of a branch, as would be the case under the usual mode of training across the house, we have a range of 
thirty feet, which afFords ample scope for the long shoots at the extremities ; and these, I find, when laid 
on in the horizontal position, and left from three to five feet long, according to their strength, usually bear 
fruit at all their buds, while the spurs on the old wood are also very productive. By these means, the 
tree possesses the double advantage of no part of it being robbed of its nourishment, by means of any other 
vegetation, which is supplied fi-om the same root, being situated either in a higher position or warmer 
atmosphere. To what extent the former of these circumstances alone may operate, I cannot detei-mine 
from any actual experiment ; but, from the genei-al observations I have made, that the growth of the 
vine, as well as of other trees, is most luxuriant in the parts that are situated highest, I am inclined to 
think, that its effects are very considerable. Others, who have made the same observation, have recom- 
mended the training of the shoots in a zigzag manner, advancing upwards, with the view of retarding the 
ascent of the sap through the inclined parts : this, however, I have found to have little or no effect, the 
general direction of the shoot being upwards, through all the bendings. But whatever may be the effect 
produced by the horizontality of the position, in equalising the luxuriance of the growth, I conceive that 
no doubt will be entertained, in regard to that of a uniformity of temperature; and this is fullv 
obtained by the method in question. I now come to the other object to be attained by the mode of 
treatment, which will be stated in a few words, as the effects produced in regard to it will be very 
evident. 

2983. In the usual mode of management, each tree is under the influence, in its different parts, of all the 
degrees of temperature in the house ; but under the mode now proposed, each tree has its own peculiar 
climate, to which alone all its parts are exposed. This affords us the command of a most convenient variety, 
in regard to earliness in the ripening of fruit. For example, if there be a wish to save fuel, and yet to have 
grapes of several varieties, which ripen at different seasons, of the late sorts there v/ill, under the common 
method, be only a few brought to perfection at the tops of the trees, whilst those that are near the bottom 
will not ripen, and that part of those trees will accordingly be useless. But in the arrangement above de- 
scribed, the early and late sorts may be procured at the same time in equal abundance and perfection, by 
training the early sorts, let us suppose the sweetwater, at the bottom ; the middling ones, such as the black 
Hambro', next ; and the late, such as the muscat of Alexandria, at the top. A gain, ifit be wished to have 
some vei-y early, and others very late, the order may be reversed, by placing the early varieties at the top, 
and the late at the bottom ; in which case more fuel will be required. This method, it will be perceived, 
may be varied in many ways, and will operate under all the degrees of forcing. {Eort. Trans, vol. iii. 
p. 9. to 13.) 

2984. In Griffiii's 7node of training and prwiing, only a single shoot is led up under each rafter. The, 
vine is planted outside, close to the parapet, and introduced through a hole immediately under the rafter 
up which it is trained. On planting, it is cut down to one eye ; about Christmas, the shoot formed during 
the preceding summer is cut down to two or three feet ; the second year one shoot only is trair.ed from 
the extremity, and it is again headed down in winter, so that the joint length of the two years' wood is 
from ten to fifteen feet ; and at the Christmas of the third year, the shoot is cut off at the end of the rafter. 
The fruit, it is obvious, is to be obtained from the side shoots, or spurs, proceeding from this main shoot. 
The spurs are cut down to single eyes every winter, till the main shoots get coarse and rugged, which 
will happen in about ten years ; it is then cut away entirely, a young stem having been previously trained 
up the two preceding years from the bottom to substitute in its place. As soon as the plants become suf- 
ficiently strong to furnish wood, from the point where they enter the house, for a second and third branch, 
then a proper number must be fixed on as permanent plants, and their side branches brought successively 
forward and trained to the contiguous rafters, " one bearing branch being applied to each rafter, and the 
plants which originally belonged to these rafters taken away entirely." 1 ho weight of grapes pi-oduced by 
the vine under each rafter by this mode of pruning is generally about forty pounds, two bunches to each 
spur, or from fifty to a hundred bunches, averaging half a pound each. When the house is in forcing, the 
branches are suspended from the rafter by strings from two to three feet long, fastened to nails or hooks 
on each side the rafter ; by this means they are let down from the glass when danger from frost is appre- 
hended, in the manner effected by the hinged rafter-ti-ellis. (1677.) " I also contrive," adds this very 
successful cultivator, " to spread the branches, when in bearing, on either side of Uie rafters, u;ider the 
glass, but so as not to occupy the whole space under the glass with the foliage, for I consider that very great 
advantage arises to the fruit from giving free admission to the sun from the centre of each light." It will 
be asked by some gardeners, what is done with the leading shoot at the end of every main stem ? This 
Griffin " stops during its growth in the summer, leaving three or four joints at the utmost ; and these must 
be cut away, at the time of pruning, down to the old wood, or nearly so : sometimes, to prevent the top of 
the house being crowded, a little of the old wood at top may be cut off also, and replaced by the next year's 
shoot." [Hort. Trans, iv. 104.) 

2985. The long, or succession mode of pruning vines, may be exemplified in the practice 
of Mearns of Shobden Court, Herefordshire. The vinery there, as at Wood Hall, is of 
the common form, with wooden sashes and rafters ; the vines are planted inside the house, 
at two feet and a half apart, nearly close to the front wall, and are headed down to 
within a foot of the soil {fig. 459. a). One shoot only is allowed to proceed from 
each plant, which at the end of the first season is cut down to the second or third eye 
(b). Next year, two leading shoots are encouraged, the strongest of which is stopped 

Nn 2 



548 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




when it has grown three or four joints beyond 
the middle of the roof, and the weaker after 
having grown three or four feet, for the purpose 
of strengthening the eyes. At the fall of the 
leaf, the leading shoots are reduced, the main 
one to the length of the middle of the roof (c), 
and the lower one to the tliird eye ((Z). In the 
third season, one leading shoot is trained in from 
each shoot (c and d), and from the bearing shoot 
(c), fruit-bearing side shoots are produced, one 
bunch is left on each, and the shoot stopped at 
one or two joints above it : ~ no side shoots are 
allowed to proceed from the spur (cZ), the lead- 
ing shoot from which is to become the bearing 
wood for the next year. Thus in the autumn of 
the third season the lower part of the house is 
furnished with a crop of grapes from shoots pro- 
ceeding from wood of the preceding year (e), and 
parallel to this bearing shoot on each vine is the 
young shoot for next year's crop. In winter, 
the shoot from the extremity of the bearing 
branch (e) is cut off at the top of the roof, or 
within twelve or fifteen inches of it (g), and the 
shoot (y) from the spur (d) is cut down to the 
middle of the roof, and all the spurs (on e) which 
had borne the grapes are now cut out. Each vine 
is now furnished with two shoots of bearing wood 
a part of old barren wood (e), and a spur 
for producing a young shoot the following year [k). 
In the fourth summer a full crop is produced 
both in the upper and lower half of the house ; 

the longer shoot bearing on the upper half of its length, and the shorter on its whole 
length ; a leading shoot is produced from the short shoot, and another from the spur. 
In the pruning season of the fourth year, the centre shoot is entirely removed, and re- 
placed by the side shoot (i), now the whole length of the roof, and this side shoot is in 
its turn supplanted by the shoot (k) from the spur, while a spur (/) is prepared to suc- 
ceed it. This constitutes one rotation or period of the system of Mearns, which he has 
followed since 1806, attended by abundant crops of large-sized bunches ; and he con- 
siders it may be continued for any length of time. (Hort. Trans, iv. 246.) 

2986. In the garden of Marie Leerne-, at Ghent, the vines are planted in front, on the 
outside of the house. Every year a new set of wood is taken into the vinery : the 
wood produced this year, is trained upright on an exterior trellis, and is next season 
laid down to a sloping trellis, and made to yield its fruit within the house. The wood 
which has once been forced is cut entirely out, and, from the same roots, new upright 
shoots are annually required ; but unfortunately for the success of this plan these 
shoots do not always ripen. {Hort. Tour. 62.) 

2987. Summer jn-uning. This depends generally on the necessity of admitting light 
and air to the fruit and young wood ; and particularly on the sort of winter pruning to 
be adopted. " The gardener, therefore," as Nicol observes, " must have a predesti- 
nating eye to the following season." " Whatever methods of pruning are used," 
M'Phail remarks, " the grape-vine, through the whole course of the growing season, 
requires constant attendance, so as not to suffer the plant to be crowded in any part 
with superfluous shoots or leaves, and no more fruit ought to be suffered to swell on the 
plant than it is well able to bring to perfection. The berries also on each bunch 
should be thinned, so that they may have room to swell, without pressing too hard 
upon each other." 

2988. Abercrombie and M'Phail agree in directing, that " as the shoots of newly planted vines advance, they 
must be kept regularly fastened to the rafters. Divest them of their wires, and also take off their laterals 
as they appear. The vines in general may be permitted to run twenty feet, and the most vigorous thirty- 
five feet, before they are stopped, if the rafters extend so far. Sometimes a vigorous shoot, having ex- 
tended the width of the house, is conducted either in a returning direction down a contiguous rafter, or 
laterally along the top of the stove, as may be most convenient. Stop the shoots by pinching off their 
tops. After they have been stopped, they usually send out laterals from three or four of the upper eyes. 
If these laterals are at once taken 'off, the sap wiU be merely diverted to the lower part of the shoot ; 
permit them, therefore, to proceed about twelve inches, and then pinch offtheir tops. These shortened 
laterals will, in their turn, send out others, which should be stopped at the second joint." 

2989. In the second season, " as soon as the shoots are half a span long, the rudiments of the bunches will 
be perceptible. The bunch is produced on the naked side of the shoot, opposite the leaf-bud. Having 
ascertamed the most promising shoots, divest the vines of supernumerary branches as they rise. Fruitful 
laterals will sometimes show two or three bunches at each eye ; and this is apt to tempt the pruner to 
retain too many. On the leading shoot, retain of the best laterals, to the right and left, a number pro- 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



549 



portioned to the vigor and age of the plant : one on each side, as near the bottom as it offers, with a 
second, third, fourth, up to seven, at the distance of three feet, if the plant is in its fourth summer, but 
only five, at the distance of four feet, if this be the third summer since the plant was struck. Train the 
shoots reserved on each side the rafter, tying them to the trellis with strands of matting. Leave on each 
branch two bunches, or a single bunch ; according as the plant is in the fourth or third season from its 
origin : pinch off the others. Afterwards stop the bearing laterals at the second joint above the fruit. 
Rub off water-shoots from the older wood. Pinch off' inferior laterals and tendrils." 

2990. Mcol observes that most of the summer pruning of vines may be performed with the fingers, with- 
out a knife, " the shoots to be displaced being easily rubbed off, and those to be shortened, being brittle, 
are readily pinched asunder." After selecting the shoots to be trained for the production of a crop next 
season, and others necessary for filling the trellis from the bottom, which shoots should generally be laid 
in at the distance of a foot or fifteen inches from each other, rub off all the others that have no clus- 
ters, and shorten those that have at one joint above the uppermost cluster. For this purpose, go over the 
plants every three or four days, till all the shoots in fruit have shown their clusters ; at the same time 
rubbing off any water-shoots that may rise from the old wood. 

2991. Train in the shoots to be retained, as they advance : using strands of fresh matting, and allowing 
sufficient room in the ties for the swelling of the shoots. Likewise pinch off all laterals and tendrils, every 
time you go over the plants, as these only tend to confusion, and take greatly from the strength of the 
clusters. 

2992. If there be an under trellis, on which to train the summer shoots, they may, when six or eight feet 
in length, or when the grapes are swelling, be let down to it, that the fruit may enjoy the full air and light, 
as it advances towards maturity. Such of these shoots as issue from the bottom, and are to be shortened 
in the winter pruning to a few eyes, merely for the production of wood to fill the trellis, may be stopped 
when they have grown to the length of four or five feet. Others that are intended to be cut down to 
about two yards, and which issue at different heights, may be stopped when they have run three yards or 
ten feet, less or more, according to their strength. And those intended to be cut at, or near to, the top of 
the house, should be trained a yard or two down the back wall (a trellis being placed against it purposely) ; 
or they may be run right or left a few feet on the uppermost wire. 

2993. In order to be a good trainer of vines, and be able to provide for a crop the following 
season, a man must have some forethought, and be capable of making his selections, as the plants shoot, 
even at this distance of time. He must predetermine how he shall prune, and where he shall cut, at 
the end of the season ; and so, as it were, fashion the plants to his mind. He has this more effectually 
in his power, with respect to the vine, than any other fruit-tree, on account of its rapid growth and 
docility. 

2994. The stubs, or short shoots, on which the clusters are placed, will probably push again after being 
stopped, if the plants be vigorous. If so, stop them again and again ; but after the fruit are half grown, 
they will seldom spring. Observe to divest the shoots, in training, of all laterals as they appear, except 
the uppermost on each ; in order to provide against accidents, as hinted at above, in training the new- 
planted vines. When these shoots are stopped, as directed above, they will push again. Allow the lateral 
that pushes to run a few joints, and then shorten it back to one ; and so on, as it pushes, until it stop 
entirely. When the proper shoot gets ripened nearly to the top, the whole may be cut back to the origi- 
nally shortened part, or to one joint above it, if there be reason to fear that the uppermost bud of the pro- 
per shoot will start. 

2995. Divest the plants of all damped or decayed leaves, as they appear, as such will sometimes occur in 
continued hazy weather ; and some may be bruised by the glass, in moving the sashes for the amission 
of air, or by other accidents. 

2996. Hayward, in the summer prunings, takes off all collaterals as they arise, and any shoots which, 
though laid in for fruit, turn out unproductive, that the whole strength of the tree may be properly ap- 
plied. {Hort. Trans. voL i. 172.) 

2997. Mearns in his sumTner pruning stops the bearing branches at the bunch, instead of the next joint 
above it, which is the usual practice ; " for I found that the fruit did equally well, and it divested the 
branch of an incumbrance, while it allowed a much larger portion of light to come into the house, together 
with a more free circulation of air among the firuit and yovmg wood. I blind all the eyes on each fruit- 
spur as soon as they push, except the uppermost, which I retain, to draw up the sap to nourish the fruit : 
I never suffer them to push above a joint or two before I pinch them back, always cautiously retaining an 
eye, and am particularly cautious that nothing should happen to injure the leaf that accompanies the 
bunch, for if that is lost, the fruit of course will come to nothing." {Hort. Trans, iv. 255.) 

2998. Thinning the leaves and fruit. " Every one of penetration and discernment," 
Nicol observes, " vv^ill admit the utility of thinning the berries on bunches of grapes, in 
order that they may have room to sw^ell fully ; and further, that of supporting the 
shoulders of such clusters of the large-growing kinds as hang loosely, and require to be 
suspended to the trellis or branches, in order to prevent the bad effects of damp or 
mouldiness in over-moist seasons. Of these, the Hamburgh, Lombardy, royal mus- 
cadine, raisin, St. Peter's, Syrian, Tokay, and others, should have their shoulders sus- 
pended to the trellis, or to the branches, by strands of fresh matting, when the berries 
are about the size of garden-peas. At the same time, the clusters should be regularly 
thinned out, with narrow pointed scissors, to the extent of from a fourth to a third 
part of the berries. The other close-growing kinds, as the Frontignacs, muscats, &c., 
should likewise be moderately thinned ; observing to thin out the small seedless ber- 
ries only of the muscadine, sweetwater, and flame-colored Tokay. In this manner, 
handsome bunches and full-swelled berries may be obtained ; but more so, if the clus- 
ters on over-burdened plants be also moderately thinned away.' Indeed, cutting off 
the clusters, to a certain extent, of plants over-loaded and pushing weak wood, is the 
only means by which to cause them to produce shoots fit to bear fruit next year ; and 
this should be duly attended to, so long as the future welfare of the plants is a matter 
of importance." 

2999. Remedies for bleeding. " If the pruning has been timely, the vine is not liable 
to bleed. When the sap rises before the wound is healed, bleeding ensues, and is not 
easily stopped. This retards the plant ; and, out of doors, the loss of a few days is, 
in some seasons, irreparable : but in other respects, the consequences of bleeding are 
not so disastrous as many seem to apprehend ; and a gardener is sometimes surprised 
by a subsequent crop of uncommon goodness. Innumerable remedies for bleeding have 
been proposed : the following rank among the best. Sear the place, and cover it with 

N n 3 



550 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



melted wax, or with warm pitch spread upon a piece of bladder, or peel off the outside 
bark to some distance from the place j and then press into the pores of the wood a 
composition of pounded chalk and tar, mixed to the consistence of putty." {Ahercrombie.) 

3000. NicoVs remedy. Vines " will bleed in autumn, as well as in spring, though not so copiously at the 
former season. The best preventative is timeous or early pruning in spring; and not pruning till the 
wood is thoroughly ripe in autumn. Plants that have been pruned too late in the spring, and forced too 
60on afterwards (a great mistake), will bleed, and the best remedy I iaiow of is searing the end of the 
shoots by a hot poker, or rod of iron, in order to dry it, and then to apply hot wax." 
: 3001. Switxer, to stop bleeding, opens a hole at the roots with a spade, and pours in a few pailfuls of cold 
water, which he says will have a sure and immediate effect. As this must be by chiUing the roots and 
weakening the vital functions, it seems questionable whether the remedy may not be worse than the 
disease. 

3002. SpecchJy' s remedy for bleeding is to peel off or divest that part of the branch adjoining the wound of 
all the outside bark ; then with a sponge dry up the moisture, and immediately wrapt round the wounded 
part a piece of an ox's bladder, spread over with tar, or pitch made warm, in the manner of a plaster. 
Then tie the whole securely w^ith a strong thread, well rubbed with bees' wax. These must remain for 
three weeks or a month. {Tr. on the Vine, 145.) 

3003. Knight's remedy consists of four parts of scraped cheese to be added to one part of calcined oj-ster- 
shells, or other pure calcareous earth, and this composition pressed strongly into the pores of the wood. 
" This done," he says, " the sap will instantly cease to flow." {Hart. Trans, vol. i.) When the vine is 
in full leaf, it is not liable to bleed wlien cut ; therefore the largest branches may be cut oflf during the 
growing season with perfect safety. 

3004. Stirring tJie soil, ami culture of the borders. " The boi'ders," Abercrombie 
observes, " should be kept at all times clear from weeds. In winter and spring, the 
surface of an open border should be turned with a three-pronged fork, not digging deep 
so as to injure the roots. The design is merely to re\'ive the surface. When it is ne- 
cessai-y to recruit the soil, dig the exhausted part cai-efully up, and %vork in such a com- 
post as has been described under Soil, or similar. Tlie dung out of a cow-house, per- 
fectly rotted, is a fine manure for the vine." He adds, " From tlie time the buds rise 
till the fruit is set, manure the border once in ten days, with the drainings of the dung- 
liill, poured over the roots of tlie plants." 

3005. M'Pkail recommends digging in rotten dung, and watering with dung-water from the melon-beds, 
or with that which has run from a dunghill in a state of fermentation. Forking over, and working a little 
short dung or compost, if thought necessary, is Kicol's preparation for the winter. A week or tVo pre- 
viously to coimnencing to force, say about the middle of January (forcing to begin the first of February), 
he directs the border to be pointed or forked over carefully ; and let it be watered all over with the 
drainings of the dunghill ; which repeat at the end of four or live days, and also again at a light interval ; 
giving as much as will sink down to the deepest-placed roots and fibres. The border on the outside should 
also be covered, or rather should already have been covered, to a good thickness, with stablc.3-ard dung j 
not, however, mere litter, but good fresh dung, the juices of which may be waslied down to the benefit 
of the roots. The intention of this covering is to answer as a manure ; and also to keep severe frost 
from the roots, from the time the sap is put in motion, till the spring be so far advanced as that the plants 
shall sustain no injury. Previous to laying on the dung, the border should be pointed> or forked over, 
that the juices may descend the more readily to the roots, and not be washed otr". 

3006. Speedily covered the vine-border in front of his hot-house with gravel ; the best gardeners do not 
crop tliem at all, or only with the most temporary crops of vegetables. 

3007. Time tf begi}i7ii?ig to foi'ce. " The growing season of oiu- climate," Aber- 
crombie remarks, " does not last long enough to bring out, swell to full size, and per- 
fectly ripen, the fruit and suimner shoots of the vine. Hence, when the artificial ex- 
citement, applied to this plant, begins just before the natural spring, and is continued 
till the leaves fall, the plant is beneficially assisted under a deficient climate rather than 
forced. The best time to begin to force is the first of March, if the object be simply to 
obtain grdpes in perfection moderately early. In proportion as the stait is accelerated 
before this, the habits of a deciduous plant, and the adverse state of the weather, leave a 
greater number of obstacles and discouraging contingencies to intercept final success. 
IManagers, however, who work a number of houses, and ^vho have to provide, as well as 
they can, against demands for grapes in early succession, begin to force about the 21st 
of December, and, successively, in other houses, the 1st of Januarj', 1st of February, 
and so on. Attempts are even made, by bold speculators, to lay forward for a crop in 
Mai'ch, by beginning to force in August, and getting the fruit set befoi'e November : 
but such labor and expense is often lost. The period* of ripening is not early in pro- 
portion to the time of beginning ; when the course of forcing coincides nearly witli the 
natural growing season, ripe grapes may be cut in five months or less ; when sliort days 
compose a tliu-d part of the course, in about six months j when the course includes full 
half the winter, it will last nearly seven months." 

3008. M'Phail, in case grapes be not wanted very early, considers the month of February the best time 
to begin to force. On the subject of very early forcing, this author remarks : " On the siipposition that 
the earliest crop of grapes was over by the end of June, and the glasses laid aside, or left open on the 
house day and night, you may, if it is desired to try to have grapes early in the spring, prune your vines 
in August, and put your house in order ; and if it is necessary to dig in manure about the roots and stems 
of the vines, let it be done. If your border be dry, give it a good watering ; and if with dung- water, at 
this time, it wiU help to enrich it. When this is done, draw on your glasses, and keep the air in the 
house to a moderate degree of heat, and your vines will afterwards shoot out, and if they are in a fit 
state for bearing, they will show fruit. If you have not plenty of vines in other houses to succeed these 
it would not be advisable to begin to force at this season of "the year, for there are several things that 
might reasonably be urged against the probability of the succcss'of this attempt to ripen grapes early in 
the spring ; but it may succeed, and therefore, it is worth, giving it a trial. By custom, the vines can 
be brought, f.s it Wcie naturaUy. to shoot ibrth in the autumn, and their fruit mavbe set l)efore the 
shortest days ; the greatest art will then, after that, be to preserve them throu.:h the dead cf winter in 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



551 



a lively growing state. This can be done only by much attention, in making gentle fires, and admitting 
an easy circulation of fresh air in the house every favorable opportunity." 

3009. Nicol says, " Those who have two or three grape-houses, generally begin to force the earliest by 
the first of the year, and sometimes even in November or December." 

3010. In Holland, Speechly observes, " they begin to force the vines in November, in order to have 
ripe grapes in April, and sometimes they succeed in producing them by the end of March, in pretty 
good perfection." 

3011. Griffin puts on the sashes and commences forcing early in January ; no fire is used the first week ; 
in the second week a little fire is made every other night ; the third week the heat is kept from 50^ to 
520, but not allowed to exceed 55^ till the vines begin to break; from that time, until they blow, the 
heat is kept between 52Q and 51^ ; and whilst they are in bloom the heat is raised to between 
57" and 65o. " Air is regularly given plentifully through all these stages, until the bloom appears, 
when the house is kept close, except the sun be very powerful When the bloom is past, attention 
is paid to thinning the grapes, a regular heat is then kept up, and air in due quantity, as the weather 
permits, is admitted, observing to give a larger proportion when the heat of the sun . is strong, and always 
shutting up the house early in the afternoon." The crop so treated generally ripens in July. {Hort. 
Trans.iu. 106.) 

3012. Care of outside stems. " At whatever season forcing commences, the stems of 
vines planted outside the house should be guarded from the stagnating effects of cold, 
by a bandage of hay, or moss and bass matting, round the bole, and a mulching of dry 
litter over the root. The excluded stems must be protected in the same vv^ay at the com- 
mencement of the forcing season. Wliile the vines are young, it vs^ill also be advisable 
to cover the outside border, in w^inter, with strawy dung taken from the outside of old 
hot-beds." (^Abercrombie.) 

5013. Griffin keeps the stems of his vines inside the house moist, from the time of beginning to force 
till the bunches show themselves, by daily watering them with a syringe. This, he says, contributes 
materially to the production of vigorous shoots. Some gardeners wrap the stems round with moss, which 
they keep moist for two or three months, for the same purpose. In hard forcing, practices of this sort are 
particularly necessary. 

3014. Temperature. " Begin," Abercrombie says, " at 50" min. 55° max. In a 
week, raise the minimum to 55*^, and the maximum to 60®. Till the time of budding, 
the temperature should not exceed 60° from artificial heat, and 64° from collected sun- 
heat. After the buds are in full motion, it may be raised to 60° min. 64. max. from 
fire, and 68° from sun-heat. By the time the bloom expands, the lowest effect from 
the flues should be 66° : the highest may be 72° ; and when the sun's influence is strong, 
let it be accumulated, by confining the interchange of air to the ventilators, till the 
heat rise to 80°. After the fruit is set, the minimum should be 75°, and fresh air co- 
piously admitted." 

3015. M'Phail says, in beginning and continuing to force the vine, " nature should be imitated, by in- 
creasing the heat as the days lengthen ; but it should be remembered, that to ripen the best sorts of 
grapes, they require as great a heat as the pine-apple does to ripen it in the summer ; for the vine has no 
artificial heat to its roots." 

3016. Nicofs directions, supposing the forcing to commence on the first of February, are as follow t 
" Make the fires so moderate as that the thermometer may not pass 50^, or at most 55<J, mornings and 
evenings, until every bud in the house have begun to spring. This is a point of very great importance in 
the forcing of grapes. If the forcing be commenced with a dash, as some fast-growing gardeners term it, and 
if a high temperature be kept up from the beginning, the chance is, that a third or fourth part of the 
buds will not push, and of course there wiU be a great faUing off in the expected crop. After the whole 
of the shoots and buds are in an evident state of vegetation, the temperature may be gradually raised to 
60^, 65«, and 70°, at which it may continue till the bloom begin to open. This rise from 50^ to.70Q must 
not be sudden : it should not be effected in less time than a fortnight ; or, if the plants be not in a very 
strong state, three weeks, otherwise the shoots will push weakly." After the plants come into bloom, he 
directs the heat to be raised to 75o M'Phail and Abercrombie allow it to be a little higher " with the 
sun heat, and if there be air at the house. When the fruits are ripening, the air of the house ought to 
rise from 75^ to 85Q, with sun-heat and plenty of air." {Pr. Gr.) 

3017. Mearns, in forcing the vine, considers it of the utmost importance to the bold breaking of the buds, 
and to the strength of the wood, not to force vines hard until the first leaves arrive nearly at their full 
size. " After that period," he says, " I give them a much less portion of air, suffering the sun to raise the 
thermometer to 90" or 100° before I give any. There is no danger of drawing the wood after that stage of 
growth, and if the thermometer sinks at night to 60°, the vines will do better in a higher temperature in 
the day." {Hort. Trans, iv. 254.) 

3018. Air. Abercrombie directs this to be given pretty freely by the sashes till the 
leaves unfold. Before the foliage is fully made out, begin to keep the house close, ad- 
mitting air only by the ventilators ; and particularly observe to have a sultry, moist cli- 
mate while the blossom is coming out, and until it is off and the fruit set. While the 
fruit is swelling and ripening, the plants will want abundance of heat and air." {Pr, 
Gr.651.) 

3019. M'Phail recommends a little air to be given during a part of the d^y while the thermometer is 
above 65°,' and the sun shines in the winter months, and abundance in the summer season when the heat 
exceeds 7-5° or 80°. 

3020. Nicol, in beginning to force, admits air freely every day, by opening the sashes in the ordinary way, 
until the foliage begin to expand ; and to an extent that the thermometer may not rise to more than five 
degrees above the fire-heat medium in sunshine ; thus bringing away the buds strong and vigorous. But 
after the foliage begins to expand, except in fine weather, the house should be chiefly aired by means 
of the ventilators, until the blossom is over, and the fruit begin to set ; or at least until the season become 

"^3021. Wlien grapes are setting, air need not be admitted so freely as before, grapes being found to set best 
in a high moist heat. " A moderate circulation by the ventilators will be sufficient for the purpose, except 
perhaps in clear sunshine ; when it may be necessary to open a few of the sashes at top, in order to let the rare- 
fied air escape, and keep the temperature within due bounds. Air is to be increased as the season and growth 
of the plants and fruit advance. When the fruit is ripening, it should be admitted more freely than here^ 

N n 4 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



tofore, in order to give the fruit flavor ; for on this, and on the withholding of water, as advieed above, 
that matter entire depends." (Kal.) 

3022. A dry atmosphere for vines is strongly recommended by Williams {Hort. Tram, i.), because in it 
" the wood, though of slower growth, is more compact, and the fruit more saccharine. Hence vines grow- 
ing on the sides of mountains in the south of Europe, and in the dry warm province of La Mancha in 
Spain, yield richer grapes, and make stronger wine, than when cultivated in the neighboring valleys, 
where, however, they experience greater warmth, and the fruit arrives sooner at maturity. From the be- 
ginning of July till the middle of October, he generally leaves several of the upper lights of his vinery open 
about two or three inches all night." 

3023. Watering and steayning. Abercrombie says, vines require a plentiful supply of 
water from the time the fruit is well set till it begins to color, particularly when the ber- 
ries become transparent at the last swelling. Withhold water entirely when tlie grapes 
approach maturity. 

3024. WPhail says, " If the vines be planted in the inside of the house, care should be taken to keep 
them suflSciently watered, and in dry weather, in the spring and summer, the border in the outside of the 
house in which the roots of the vines run, should get plentiful waterings. Tn order to keep the leaves and 
fruit clean, let the plants be washed occasionally with clean water, thrown on them by a tin squirt or en- 
gine, but take care that the decaying paint on the rafters be not washed down on the leaves and fruit, 
which would stain and hurt them. Should there be any danger of that, it will answer the purpose fully as 
well by filling the house full of steam now and then, by sprinkling water on the flues when they are warm." 
Alluding to the first stage of early forcing, the same author observes : *' In some houses, the border, or 
part of the border in which the vine is planted, is in the inside of the house ; where that is the case, let it 
be watered and sprinkled now and then to keep it in a moist state. Water the flues sometimes when they 
are hot, which will produce a fine steam, very beneficial to the plants in promoting their growth, and in 
preventing them from being infested by the red spider. Steam, however, should not be used loo copiously. 
If the border for the vines be in the house, or if there be plenty of plants in pots of earth in it, the evapor- 
ation arising from the moist earth is generally sufficient to moisten the air properly ; and besides, there is 
a continual draught of external air coming into the house among the plants ; and it is known that the 
common atmosphere contains moisture at all times, especially in cold weather, when the ground is full of 
rain from the clouds." In March, the fruit being set and swelling, he says, " Water the borders in the 
house, and sprinkle them and the flues now and then with sweet clean water. If this be attended to, and 
air given in fine days, the house will be kept in a sweet state. The vines may sometimes be watered all 
over ; but if this kind of watering is practised, it should be done carefully ; for I have seen grapes much 
hurt with the decaying paint having been driven from the rafters and other parts of the house on them, 
by the force of the water. If the patlis, flues, and borders in the house be sprinkled and watered occa- 
sionally as I have directed, grape-vines will do without giving them water over their leaves and fruit, at 
this season of the year ; though I by no means disapprove of washing them well, now and then, all over, 
leaves and fruit; provided it be done with clean water, and no filth driven on them from any part of the 
house." From the time that grapes are swelled to a size that you can hardly perceive them to grow 
larger, till the black sorts begin to change color, and the white ones to appear of a more bright color than 
at an earlier period of their swelling, let the borders be watered plentifully, and the flues sprinkled now and 
then with clean water. The border outside w.ie house may, probably, in the summer months, require a 
good watering now then. (G. Rem.) 

3025. Nicol, after the commencement of forcing, " has the border duly and freely refreshed with water, 
generally once in two or three days; and if occasionally watered with the drainings of the dunghill, it 
would add much to the vigor of the plants. The branches should be watered once in two days by the en- 
gine, with a considerable degree of force, in order to keep the plants clean, and prevent the breeding of the 
red spider and thrips, which are often very troublesome in the grape-house." As vines advance in growth, 
" they must be liberally supplied with water. The vine, when in a free-growing state, requires more water 
than is generally imagined ; and many, very many gardeners, half ruin their plants, and very much injure 
their crops of fruit by withholding this element. I know some who do not give as much water to a vinery 
in a whole season as it ought to have in a month. But what is the consequence ? Wood as large as wheat- 
straw, and berries the size of garden-peas !" Increase the supplies of water with the advances of the season 
and growth of the plants. " As the fruit begin to color and swell off for ripening, the quantity of water, 
hitherto liberally given, must be lessened by degrees ; and, towards its coming to full maturity, must be 
entirely withheld, that it be not rendered insipid. The operations of the engine on the foliage must also 
cease ; but previously, be particularly severe, and be careful to scourge it well, that no vestige of the red 
spider be left. This is a matter of very great importance, and but too little attended to : and for want of 
taking this care, I have more than once seen a whole crop of grapes very much spoiled, and the berries ren- 
dered dirty, nauseous, and bitter." 

3026. Ripening the wood. Abercrombie directs, " If the fruit be not off by the middle 
of August, the continuation of fine dry weather, or of the heat dependent on the natural 
climate, will hardly be sufficient to ripen the wood ; and therefore, as soon as the external 
air declines to 68*', resume gentle fires, morning and evening, so as to keep the minimum 
temperature of the house to 70°. The maximum need not exceed 75° in sunshine ; for 
fresh air should circulate at every proper opportunity. Proceed thus until the shoots of 
the season have ceased to grow, and turn brownish at bottom, and the leaves begin tofallj 
indications that the wood is ripe, when the first and last are not caused by a deficiency of 
heat." He adds, " If the weather continues warm after the fruit is cut, take off the 
glass frames ; as the shoots will ripen the better under full exposure to it. In October, 
however, it will be advisable again to put on the frames, as well by shelter to assist the 
ripening of the wood, if that is not complete, as to protect the house from injury, when 
rough wintry weather may be expected." 

3027. Nicol says, " If the lower part of the shoots be not, by the beginning of August, turning brownish 
then it is advisable to apply a little fire-heat, in order to further the growth of the plants, and the perfec- 
tion of the wood. Some would put this matter off, perhaps another month ; but if the aiwlication of fire- 
heat be at all necessary, less trouble and expense for fuel will attend the process of ripening the shoots in 
September than m October. Another consideration is, that, as it were, you take up vegetation on the way 
and hand her forward to the end of her journey, instead of allowing her to lag behind, and then forcibly 
push her on against her inclinations ; a matter of the very first consideration and importance in every 
species of horticulture. Let very moderate fires be made at first, increasing their strength as the season 
advances, and so as to keep the temperature, mornings and evenings, at about 70°. This should be con- 
tinued till the growth of the plants begin to stop, and till the part of the leading shoots whereat you would 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



553 



cut, that is, about six or eight feet upwards, become brownish. The portions of air, hitherto freely ad. 
mitted, must be lessened by degrees, as the weather turns cooler ; and so as that, in sunshine, the mercury 
may not fall below 75°. When the growth of the plants is over, expose the house day and night, except in 
rain. Water must also be withheld, as the growth of the plants abates, and somewhat in the proportion in 
which you would have vegetation stop ; not all at once, but gradually. Continue the operations of the en- 
gine to the latest j not merely to subdue the enemy at present, but, as far as possible, to prevent his ap- 
pearance next campaign." 

3028. Exposure and resting of the wood. " Some managers," Abercrombie observes, 
" leave the house quite exposed when the vines have done grovi^ing ; and whether it be 
covered or not, there should be constantly a circulation of air through it. Vines which 
have been exposed to the weather, or freely to the dry air, in a state of rest, when forced 
after a proper interval, generally break at almost every eye." The rest proper to a de- 
ciduous plant cannot be given to vines where the branches are kept subject to the influ- 
ence of a permanent heat after the leaves are fallen, as in the case of vines grown in pine 
or other stoves. The top of its stem, with its branches, must therefore be withdrawn 
from the house immediately after the fall of the leaf, to remain on the outside till it be 
proper again to force the plant. Abercrombie says, " the branches will require no cover- 
ing in this climate ;" but many gardeners lay them, down, or tie them to stakes, and cover 
them with litter or mats. 

3029. M'Phail says, " Some modem writers on gardening recommend that the glass frames of the 
grape-house be taken off the vines as soon as the vines are all cut ; and also to take the vine-plants out of 
hot-houses appropriated to the culture of the pine-apple when the grapes are over. Tliis they tell us is to 
ripen the wood, and give the plants rest, &c. I do advise that the glass frames of grape-houses be suffered 
to remain over the vines all the year, excepting in July and August, and that grape-vines in hot-houses 
for the pine-apple sliould not be taken out to remain for any length of time at any season of the year. If 
fruit-trees ripen their fruit well, the wood for bearing the following year will be sufficiently matured ; but 
the plants, whether they be the grape-vine, peach, &c. had best remain in that artificial climate made for 
them all the year, for though the fruit be over, the wood of the plant requires protection. As well," 
he adds, " might they expect the cherry-tree to blossom in September and October ; which months are 
some years warmer than the month of April, when the cherry-tree is in full blow, or that the Christmas- 
rose may be excited by summer heat to blossom in July or August. It is natural for the grape-vine to 
produce only one crop in the year ; and when it is accustomed to grow in a hot-house appropriated for the 
pine-apple, its nature is not changed ; nor will it offer to put forth its bud before January in hot-houses 
kept to a heat sufficient for growing the pine-apple, when the pine pots are plunged in a bed of warm 
tan." 

3030. Knight, as we have seen (2185.), is highly favorable to putting the vine into a state of repose, as early 
as possible in the autumn preceding the season in which it is to be forced. 

3031. Nice/, after the growing season, and when the wood is ripened, 
nigl)t, except in rain." After an autumn pruning, he 
shuts up the house for ten days or a fortnight, particu- 
larly if there be any appearance of frost ; admitting air 
freely through the day. The object in thus keeping 
the plants from the extremes of heat and cold, is, in or- 
der that their pores may contract, and their wounds heal 
gradually ; as otherwise they are apt to bleed now, and 
to break out afresh on the application of fire-heat in 
the spring. When they are judged to be safe, expose 
the house night and day, as before. {Kal. 428.) 

3032. S. Galton describes a plan of exposing the 
branches of vines growing in a stove to the external 
air, without the necessity of suspending the forcing or 
heat in the stove, or of drawing the stems back through 
apertures by which they are introduced into the house. 
This was put in practice at Derby, in the garden of 
Joseph Strutt, of that town, where it has been in suc- 
cessful use, for above fifteen years. The foundation wall in 
front of the house is capped with a stone sill (fig. 460. a); 
the front upright lights(6)move on centre pins, andean be 
taken out from their places without disturbing the rafter- 
plate (c), or the uprights which support the plate; these 
lights, when taken out, can be fixed by the lower ends 
to the inner side of the stone sill, the spaces of the 
uprights being filled by other pieces, whilst the tops are 
held by a board (rf) longitudinally fixed to the rafter by 
hinges (e), and capable of being raised and let down at 
pleasure. When the vines are to be exposed they are 
unfixed from their places between the rafters, and laid 
down on the stone sill (a) ; the front upright lights (b) 
are then taken out and fixed on the inner side of the 
sill(/), thus leaving the whole of the vine on the out- 
side of the house, and under cover, protected from rain, 
until it is desired to put it again into heat, when the 
situation of the upright lights is changed, and they are 
replaced in their former situation. {Hort. Trans, iv. 567.) 



exposes the hotise day and 



460 















„., 




s 

































SuBSECT. 2. Of particular Modes of cultivating the Grajye, adapted to particular Situations. 

3033. The j)articular modes of cultivating the grape which we shall now enumerate, re- 
fer to its culture in pineries, green-houses, and other plant structures, by dung-heat, in 
hot-bed frames, temporary frames and glass covers, hand-glasses, and cultivating for re- 
tarding maturation. 

3034. Forcing the vine in a pine or other stove. Abercrombie, in a comparison between 
the hot-house or general stove and vinery, justly observes, that the former "has many cir- 
cumstances of inferiority to the vinery ; and, although its shades of inconvenience or iin- 



554 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



perfect accommodation are not weighty enough to forbid the dedication of any spare room 
to the vine, yet they are sufficient to confer very great credit on the manager who obtains 
a good crop of fine-flavored grapes under them." (Pr. G. 657.) 

3035. Speechly considers, that the vine and pine may be advantageously grown together ; but subse- 
quent experience having led to the culture of pines in pits, most gardeners, and among these Nicol, prefer 
growing them separately. 

3036. M'Phail, without giving a decided approbation of their union, gives the following directions on 
the subject, which are to be taken in connection with his opinion as given above, on the impropriety of 
withdrawing the wood to rest it in the open air. To manage the grape in a hot-house appropriated for 
growing the pine-apple, and for ripening its fruit, treat them in the following manner : in the month of 
November or December, cut down all the old wood to about the height of the pit, leaving only two young 
shoots, the strongest that can be got, the strongest one to shoot from the buds and bear the fruit, the other 
to be cut short and to grow long shoots to bear the fruit the succeeding year. This is to be done succes- 
sively year after year, leaving the old stem of the vine to grow, as the older the plant is the better. After 
the vines are pruned, tie them up nearly close to the glass, with matting, to iron rods or laths fixetl to the 
rafters of the house. As soon as they begin to swell in their buds and show themselves ready to break, let 
them down about a foot from the glass, so that they may receive the benefit of the warm air round about 
them, and not be liable to be affected by the frosts. If the buds burst strong and bushy, it is a good sign 
that they will show fruit; but if weak, the contrary; and, if they miss showing fruit on the fourth or 
fifth joint, they will show none at all ; and in that case the young shoot that does not show fruit should be 
cut off, as it would only take the nourishment from the others which have shown fruit. Do not let more 
than one or two bunches grow on one bud, for if too many are left on the plant, they will not swell well. 
If the vines be planted in the inside of the house, care should be taken to keep them sufficiently watered ; 
and in dry weather, in the spring and summer, the border on the outside of the house, in which the roots of 
the vines run, should get plentiful waterings. In order to keep the leaves and fruit clean, let the plants 
be washed occasionally with clean water, thrown on them by a tin squirt or engine, but take care that the 
decaying paint on the rafters be not washed down on the leaves and fruit, which would stain and hurt 
them. Should there be any danger of that, it will answer the purpose fully as well by filling the house full 
of steam now and then, by sprinkling water on the flues when they are warm. 

3037. Growing grapes in green-houses and other houses. Vines are grown under the rafters in green- 
houses, conservatories, and in most kinds of forcing and other hot-houses ; but, as the gardener who un- 
derstands their culture in the vinery and pine-stove, can be at no loss in any case of that sort, we do not 
consider it necessary to introduce here any thing farther on the subject. The excellence of the fruit, and the 
grateful nature of the plant, than which none is more certain of rewarding the gardener's care by abund- 
ant crops, will, we trust, justify our having brought together the practice of so many cultivators. 

3038. Forcing vines hy dung-heat. Justice, Lavrrence, and Switzer state instances of 
this being done on wooden walls in their time. Fletcher, a market-gardener near Edin- 
burgh, has practised it with great success in a glass case, keeping constantly, till the fruit 
is about to ripen, a heap of dung, or dung and weeds, in a state of fermentation in the 
area of the house. But the most systematic and extensive forcing of this kind is that 
which has for fifteen years been practised by J. French, Esq. a gentleman farmer of East 
Hornden, in Essex, and which has been thus described by a late intelligent fellow of the 
Horticultural Society. 

3039. FrencKs mode of forcing vines hy dung-heat. About the beginning of March, French commences 
his forcing, by introducing a quantity of new long dung, taken from under the cow-cribs in his straw -yard ; 
being principally, if not entirely, cow-dung, which is laid upon the floor of 

his house {fig. 461.), extending entirely from end to end, and in width 
about six or seven feet, leaving only a path-way between it and the back 
wall of the house. The dung being all new at the beginning, a profuse 
steam arises with the first heat, which, in this stage of the process, is found 
to be beneficial in destroying the ova of insects, as well as transfusing a 
wholesome moisture over the yet leafless branches ; but which would prove 
injurious, if permitted to rise in so great a quantity when the leaves have 
pushed forth. In a few days the violence of the steam abates as the 
buds open, and in the course of a fortnight the heat begins to diminish ; it 
then becomes necessary to carry in a small addition of fresh dung, laying it 
in the bottom, and covering it over with the old dung fresh forked up ; this 
produces a renovated heat and a moderate exhalation of moist vapor. In 
this manner the heat is kept up throughout the season, the fresh supply of 
dung being constantly laid at the bottom in order to smother the steam, or rather to moderate the quantity 
of exhalation ; for it must always be remembered, that French attaches great virtue to the supply of a rea- 
sonable portion of the vapor. The quantity of nev>?dung to be introduced at each turning, must be regu- 
lated by the greater or smaller degree of heat that is found in the house, as the season or other circum- 
stances appear to require it. The temperature kept up is pretty regular, being from 65 to 70 degrees. 
French contends, that the moist vapor which is transfused through the house is essentially beneficial, not 
only because it discourages the existence of insects, and destroys their ova, but it likewise facilitates the 
setting and swelling of the fruit. I ought to observe, that I ata not offering any opinion of my own in the 
present statement, but merely recording, as faithfully as possible, the remarks made to me by a person of 
ingenuity and observation, whose extraordinary success is, in my mind, the best test that can be given of 
the merits of his practice. {Anderson, in Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) 

3040. Mearns " approves greatly of applying the steam and heat of dung to the forcing of grapes, and 
uses it in the earliest part of forcing with great advantage, forming a large ridge of it in the back part of 
his vinery, and introducing the additions of recent litter always under the old dung." {Hort. Trans iv. 
p. 256.) 

3041. Advantages of using dung-heat. The practice of applying the heat of horse-dung, and of other fer- 
menting substances, to the forcing of vines and the growing of pines and other plants, usually excited or 
preserved by means of fire -heat, is becoming very general, and is attended with this advantage, that the 
ammoniacal and carbonic gas, which is disengaged during the decomposition of the dung, is highly noxious 
to insects, while to vines before the buds protrude themselves, and to pine-plants at most seasons, it is 
found not at aU injurious. These things known, every farmer might have an excellent vinery attached to 
his straw-yard, or placed over, or near to his dung-pit, at very little expense, and with very little con- 
trivance m ordinary cases. A few apertures along the upper part of the house being kept at all times 
open, there could hardly occur any injurious accumulation of steam, and the same openings would render 
daily attention in giving air unnecessary ; for there is abundant experience to prove that a vinery in 
which the apertures for admitting air at bottom and top are opened in spring, may be left with them in 
that state night and day till autumn, without the smallest injury. All that the farmer would have to do. 




Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



555 



would be to water the plants two or three times a week with a syringe or engine, and to tie up the s^oot8, 
as they grew, to the trellis. As in this way the enjoyments of a numerous class of men might be increased 
at very little expense and labor, we intreat the attention of head gardeners and proprietors to the subject, 
as calculated, like the dissemination of every other rational luxury, to be conducive to the general good. 
Opulent, or proprietor farmers, who have extensive farmeries, and probably two or three separate straw- 
yards (fig. 4G2. a and b), might raise all the fruits grown in first-rate gardens by the same means, and add 
not a little even to the elegant appearance of their establishments. A pinery, for example, might be 
formed over a large dung-pit, and the side walls, being hollow, like those of Silverlock (Horf. Trans. 
iv. 244. and^^. 238.), or of West {Hort. Trans, iv. 220. and our Jig. 230.), would preserve the air within 
perfectly pure, so as to admit the growth even of ornamental exotics, &c. The additional expense of 
management to the farmer, in this case, would be chiefly the difference between keeping a half-bred 
gardener and a common laborer. 




3042. Forcing the vine in hot-bed frames, and oilier glass cases. Knight, after de- 
scribing his inclined hot-bed and frame, and its advantages in respect to cucumbers and 
melons, adds, " 1 have often used, with great success, a frame and hot-bed thus foratied, 
for forcing grapes, by placing the bed at three feet distance from the wall, to which the 
vines were trained, and introducing their branches into the frame, through holes made at 
the north end of it (the vines having been trained to a soutli wall), as soon as the first 
violent heat of the bed had subsided. The white Chasselas grape, thus treated, ripens in 
July, if the branches of the vine be introduced in the end of April ; and a most abundant 
crop may be thus obtained ; but the necessity of pruning very closely renders the 
branches which have been forced unproductive of fruit in the succeeding season ; and 
others from the wall must consequently be substituted. I have always put a small 
quantity of mould in the frame, and covered it with tiles. If an inclined plane of earth 
be substituted for the hot-bed, and vines be trained in a frame adapted to it, the grapes 
(the Chasselas) ripen perfectly in August ; and if small holes be made through the sides 
of the frame, through which the young shoots of the vines can extend themselves in the 
open air, a single plant, and a frame of moderate size, will be found to yield annually a 
very considerable weight of grapes. For this purpose, the frames should not be more 
than eight or ten feet long, nor more than five or six in breadth, or the young shoots 
will not be so advantageously conducted out of them into the open air; and the depth 
of the frame, either for the hot-bed or inclined plane of the earth, should not be less 
than eighteen inches. The holes in the side of the frame, through wdiich the young 
shoots are to pass, should of course be closed during the spring, and till wanted ; and if 
the weather be cold, it will be necessary to cover the frames at night. When the grapes 
are nearly full-grown, and begin to ripen, it will also be highly advantageous to draw off 
the glasses during the day, in fine weather, by which means the fruit will be exposed to 
the full influence of the sun, without the intervention of the glass, and will attain a 
degree of perfection that it rarely acquires in the vinery or hot-house." 

3043. Mean, gardener to Sir A. Hume, has practised a mode very similar to that of Knight, for a num- 
ber of years ; and, as such simple modes of obtaining early or well ripened grapes are within the reach of 
every one who has a grape-vine trained against a wall or house, we shall quote his account of it. " This 
method is particularly applicable in cases where vines are trained to walls, and do not ripen their fruit, nor 
bear well. The frame must be high enough in the sides, to admit of the vines being trained horizontally 
on a trellis, to keep the pendent bunches clear of the dung, and to give free room for the leaves between 
the vine branches and the glass. The frames used at Wormleybury have either one or two lights ; the 
latter are nine feet long and six feet wide ; the fronts of the frames are eighteen inches high, and the backs 
are two feet high ; the trellis is fixed nine inches from the glass, which gives sulHcient space above and 
below. The upper board at the back of the frame, being nine inches wide, lifts up or slides off, so that the 
branches are laid in without suffering the injury they would sustain in their buds, if they were drawn 
through holes. In tlie first or second week in April, just before the vines begin to move, you make up a 
common dung hot-bed at a convenient distance from the wall, or from the place where the shoots of the 
vines are ; lay your frame on the bed, with its back towards the vine, and fronting the sun, as it would 
naturally be if placed against a south-wall : the branches must then be introduced into the frame ; these 
you train along the trellis already mentioned, with their points directed downwards, towards the front of 
the frame. By these means, through the heat of the dung, and that of the sun from the glass, your vines 
produce an abundant crop ; and it is found, that the ripening of the fruit is accelerated, by laying slates or 
tiles all over the dung. At the end of the season, those shoots which have borne their crop are cut 
entirely away, and a fresh supply introduced of young shoots, which have been making and ripening their 
wood on the wall ; these are treated in the same manner, the wall annually yielding a successive supply 
of young wood to be taken into the frame." {Hort. Trans, ii. 230.) 

3044. Temporary frames and glass cases have been constructed by Lindegaard, 'Tor- 
bron, and various gardeners, foreign as well as British, but more especially those of 
Holland and Flanders, against walls of vines. Sometimes a temporary furnace and 
flue is built, and at other times a dung-bed is resorted to, and very excellent crops are 
obtained. 

3045. Ripening grapes under hand-glasses. About twenty years ago, a market- 
gardener at Bath published a plan of ripening grapes under common hand-glasses. He 
planted the vines in a soil composed in great part of lime rubbish ; placed a glass over 
each plant, taking out half a pane in its summit, through which the leading shoot of the 



556 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



vine protruded itself, and grew in the open air. The bunch or bunches of grapes 
remained within the hand-glass, and enjoyed the advantages of protection from cold 
winds, dews, and rains, during night, and of a high degree of confined solar heat during 
the day. 

3046. Forcing vines in j^ots. This is not a very common practice, because the vine 
requires a greater extent of pasturage for the roots than any other fruit-tree. It has, 
however, been occasionally attempted by gardeners in pits and stoves, and three or four 
bunches are sometimes thus obtained from one plant. The soil must be as rich as pos- 
sible, and every attention paid to keeping the plants regularly supplied with water and 
liquid manure. Knight employed water impregnated with pigeons' dung to the color of 
porter, and found, in consequence, the most vigorous growth. He states, that a pot 
containing two cubic feet of very rich mould, properly supplied with water and manure 
in a liquid state, is fully adequate to nourish a vine, which, after being pruned in 
autumn, occupies twenty square feet of the roof of a hot-house. Such vines he con- 
stantly found to produce more vigorous wood when forced very early, than otliers of the 
same varieties, whose roots were permitted to extend beyond the limits of the house. 
{Hort. Trans, vol. ii. 373.) 

3047. Marsla7id, of Woodbank, near Stockport, has a succession of grapes during eleven months 
in the year, by forcing vines in pots. The pots are placed on stages, and as the fruit is cut, they are 
removed and replaced by others ; the plants are from one to four years old, and at the latter age they 
bear abundantly, and produce large bunches. {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. 373.) 

3048. Buck finds this method of obtaining grapes answer particularly well, and by removing the pots 
in the winter months, when the fruit is full ripe, into a dry airy situation, he can preserve it fit for 
the table much longer than he can in the vinery, when cloudy and damp weather prevails. {Hort. 
Trans, vol. iv. 561.) 

3049. Cultivating for retarding maturation, so as to obtain a supply in the winter 
season, is thus described in the Transactions of the Horticultural Society, as practised by 
ArkwT-ight, of Willersley. 

The sorts cultivated for this late crop are the white muscat of Alexandria, the black Damascus, the 
black TenerifFe, the St. Peter's, the black raisin, the Syrian, and the white Nice. They are grown in 
houses alternately used as pineries and vineries. About the second week in February, the pine-plants are 
always removed into another vinery. The grapes which remain on the vines are all cut, and the house 
thrown open for the free admission of air at all times, till the end of April, when the vine-buds begin to 
swell, when a gentle fire is applied in the night, and in dark and cold days ; but air is admitted freely 
when the thermometer is up at 708. At this period, a proportion of the pine-plants is again brought into 
the house, where they remain till the succeeding February. The treatment from this time is quite in the 
common way ; and by this late and slow process, the grapes do not begin to ripen till towards the end of 
October, and the very late sorts, such as the St. Peter's, are scarcely ripe at Christmas. The following 
note is added to this paper by the secretary : — 

Sjiecimens of grapes ripened in this manner were exhibited by Arkwright to the society on the 3d of 
February, 1819, and were as rich, perfect, and fresh, as if they had been produced at the usual season : and 
the leaves of the vine, which were sent at the same time, were in an undiminished state of vegetation. 
These leaves, Arkwright has since stated, w€re from the late sorts of vines, viz. the Syrian, the Nice, and 
the St. Peter's ; those of more early kinds, such as the muscat and the Damascus, begin to assume their 
yellow tinge about Christmas, but their fruit continues quite fresh and good for a considerable time after- 
wards. The conclusion is obvious, that the vines made to produce these late grapes had acquired the 
habit of late bearing, and this habit, Arkwright states, has been brought on gradually. Whenever he 
introduces a young vine into the house, where his late grapes are grown, it is treated exactly like the 
vines which are in bearing, and in the second or third year after planting, when it begins to yield fruit, 
it is found to have lost its disposition to break into leaf at the accustomed season. Arkwright began to 
practise his present plan of growing late grapes about twelve years ago, at which time he also used to 
force early grapes ; and so successful was his plan of retardation, that, on the 1st of May, 1810, he had on 
his table fresh-gathered fruit, the produce of two years, viz. of the late crop of the past, and the early crop 
of the present year. He has now ceased to force any vines for early fruit, and confines his cultivation to 
that of late grapes alone. 

SuBSECT. 3. Of Gathering and Xeejnng forced Grajyes. 

3050. With" respect to the gathering of grajyes, Nicol observes, " they should be 
allowed to hang till fully matured and ripened ; especially the thick-skinned and fleshy 
sorts. Even the thin-skinned and juicy kinds, as the white sweetwater, white Frontig- 
nac, and muscadine (that are often cut before nearly ripe,) are much improved in flavor, 
by being allowed to remain on the plant till the skin become transparent, and of a russet 
or yellowish color." The grapery, when the fruit is ripe, ought to be kept dry and cool 
in order to preserve the fruit as long as possible on the branches, and thus to prolong the 
grape season. Covering the border an inch or two withdi-y sand, ashes, or gravel, Nicol 
.says, contributes to dry the air and dispel damps. The leaves round the bunches are 
to be picked off for the same end, and a fire to be made in the day-time in gloomy 
weather. 

3051. Thompson, gardener to Earl Cowper, at Panshanger, preserves grapes in his vinerv till February, by 
lighting fires in the day-time, and giving plenty of air; but putting them out in the afternoon, and shut- 
ting the house close up at night. " The fire in the day, aided by the circulation of the air, renders the 
whole interior of the houses perfectly dry, so that no damp exists in them when shut upj a night fire, on 
the contrary, with the houses closed, creates a vapor, which causes the fruit to become mould3% and to 
decay. The sorts used were the Frontignacs, sweetwater, and black Damascus." (Hort. Trans. 
vol. iv. 132.) 

3052. M'PAaz? observes, " there are some sorts of grapes, such as the black muscat o/ Jerusalem, the 
Syrian, Tokay, and some others, which will keep on the tree a long time after they are ripe, provided the 
house be kept dry and cool." 



Book It 



CULTURE OF THE VINERY. 



557 



3053. Braddick covers the floors of his vinery in autumn about three inches thick with coal-ashes, 
which, by preventing any damp from rising, to mildew or injure the fruit, enables him to preserve 
the grapes hanging on the tree in a very perfect state till the end of January, or later. {Hort. Trans, 
vol. iv. 143.) 

3054. Torbron, in a temporary vinery, or a glass case placed against a wall on which grapes were trained, 
has ripened a late crop, and kept the fruit on the trees in a state fit for use till February. {Hort. 
Trans, vol. iv. 118.) 

3055. Various modes for dnjing the air in a grapery. Decayed granite or trap, which 
has been discovered by Professor Leslie to be powerful absorbents of moisture, where 
they can be obtained, would be excellent substitutes for ashes ; or oatmeal might be 
used (being swept up and dried occasionally), were the harboring of vermin not to be 
dreaded. (See Sujyp. Encyc. Brit. art. Cold.) 

3056. To preserve grapes by removal from the tree, Forsyth directs, Where there are 
several bunches in one branch you may cut it off, leaving about six inches in length, or 
more, of the wood, according to the distance between the bunches, and a little on the 
outside of the fruit at each end ; seal both ends with some common sealing-wax, such 
as wine-merchants use for sealing their bottles with, which you may buy at the wax- 
chandler's ; then hang them across a line in a dry room, taking care to clip out, with a 
pair of scissors, any of the berries that begin to decay or become mouldy, which, if left, 
would taint the others. In this way I have kept grapes till the 6th of February ; but, if 
they are cut before the bunches are too ripe they may be kept much longer." 

3057. Grapes may be kept by jiacMng them in jars, " every bunch being first wrapped 
up in soft paper, and covering every layer with bran, which should be well dried before 
it is used ; laying a little of it in the bottom of the jar, then a layer of grapes, and so on, 
a layer of bran and of grapes alternately, till you have filled the jar ; then shake it gently, 
and fill it to the top with bran, laying some paper over it, and covering the top with a 
bladder tied firmly on to exclude the air ; then put on the top or cover of the jar, observ- 
ing that it fits as close as possible. These jars should be kept in a room where you can 
have a fire in wet or damp weather." (Tr. on Fr. Tr.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Of the Insects and Diseases attendant on forced or Hot-house Grapes. 

3058. The insects and diseases of the vine are not numerous : of the latter there are 
few or none, unless bleeding may be excepted, the remedies for which we have already 
given. (2999.) The insects which infest the vine, are chiefly the red spider and coccus. 
To remove these, Speedily and Abercrombie recommend washing the stem and all the 
shoots with soap and water ; the stem being previously divested of the loose bark. 
Abercrombie adds, give the border two or three soakings over the roots with soap-suds. 
If the plants get infested with the pine-bug or turtle insect, it is to be extirpated by 
syringing the leaves with a strong infusion of tobacco-stalks. Watering is the best pre- 
ventive of the red spider, and aphis or green fly, and fumigation keeps down, and in 
part destroys the latter and the thrips. 

3059. M'Phail observes, that the red spider, the mealy white bug, and the brown turtle insect are the 
most injurious to the vine. " These insects lodge upon the wood of the trees, and upon their leaves, and 
upon their fruit. To prevent accidental infection, care should be taken not to introduce infected plants into 
the house ; keeping the air in the house among the plants sweet, and to a strong degree of heat, with 
constant admission of fresh air, are good preventives against insects. To help to destroy insects on the 
vine, peel off, in the autumn, winter, or spring, before the plants begin to grow, all the loose outside bark, 
and wash, with soap- water mixed with sulphur, the stem and all the branches, rubbing them well with a 
sponge or brush, which will destroy the insects, and the spawn of them that have been deposited thereon. 
If they happen to be infested very much, after they are well washed with clean water, let the stem and all 
the branches be smeared with a mixture of sulphur, soot, and water, put upon them with a painter's 
brush." Rotten and decayed berries or leaves are to be removed, that they may not spread their 
infection. 

3060. Nicol considers the red spider as the grand enemy to the vine. After every winter pruning and re- 
moval of the outward rind on the old wood, he directs to anoint the branches, shoots, and trellis, with the 
following composition, the object of which is the destruction of their eggs or larvee. 

3061. Nicol'' s recipe. " Soft soap, two pounds; flowers of sulphur, two pounds; leaf or roll tobacco, two 
pounds; nux vomica, four ounces ; and turpentine, an English gill ; boiled in eight English gallons of soft or 
river water, to six." This composition is to be laid on, milk-warm, with a painter's brush, " then with a 
sponge carefully anoint every branch, shoot, and bud; being sure to rub it well into every joint, hole, 
and angle." If'the house is much infected, the walls, flues, rafters, &c. are also to be painted over with 
the same liquor. Watering over the leaves and fruit at all times, except the ripening season, is the pre- 
ventive which he proposes, and which all gardeners approve. 

3062. Birds, xvasps,fies, &c. several gardeners direct to be excluded by gauze frames, 
calculated to fit the openings by which air is given. Some recommend putting bags of 
gauze over each bunch ; others hang up bottles, boiled carrots, &c. M'Pliail says, " Fix 
nets on the parts of the house where you admit air, and fix them in such a way us that 
the sashes will slide backwards and forwards either in the outside or inside of the nets. 
The net should be as thick in the meshes as that a wasp cannot fly through them." It 
may be noted, that a flying wasp (the wings being distended) will not require meshes 
smaller than an inch square. 



558 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Sect. III. Culture of the Peach-house. 
3063. Soil. Abercronibie recommends three parts of mellow unexhausted loam, and 
one part of drift-sand moderately enriched with vegetable mould, or the cooler dungs. 
The border or bed to be thirty inches or three feet deep. The nectarine wants tlie 
warmer, richer, and deeper soil, if any difference be made. (Pr. G. 292.) 

3064. M'Phail recommends the soil for peach-trees which are to be forced, to be " fine loamy welU 
prepared earth of a-medium texture, neither very light, nor of a strong binding quality, well mixed with 
some good manure. The border to be four feet deep, and so broad, that the roots cannot get into a 
bad soil." (ff;-. Rc.7i. 18.) 

3065. Nicol. The bottom being made " comfortable by draining and paving, if not naturally dry, 
directs the breadth of the border to be the width of the hou-e within, and to the extent of ten or twelve 
feet without. Tlie average depth thirty inches at tlie least : but if a yard, it would not be too much. The 
soil to be thus composed \ three fourtlis strong loam, an eiginli part light sandy earth, and an . eighth part 
rotten stable-vard dung, with a competent quantity of lime and marl ; all being properly mixetl before 
planting." {ttal. p. 291.) 

3066. Flanagan, for peaches and nectarines, whether in houses or on open walls, uses "the top-spit of a 
pasture of rich yellow loam, if it can be procured, without adding to it any manure whatever ; if poor and 
sandy it should' have a little rotten dung added to it, and the whole should be laid up on ridges, and 
turned over for six months previously to using." {Hort. Trans, vol. v. 57.) 

3067. Choice of sorts. The following list is given by Abercrombie as tlie most proper 
for forcing : — 



Cling Stones. 
Late admirable. A] id. Sejjt. 
Old Newinston. Late in bept 
Portugal. Knd Sept. 
Golden. Sept. 
Catharine. Early in Oct. 
Monstrous pavie. End Oct. 



PEACHES. 

Free Stones. 
■\^Tiite nutmeg. End of July. 
I^arica Migiionne. i\Iid. Auj;. 
Bello Clie\-reuse. Late in Aug. 
ANTiite Magdalen. End -\.ug. 
Red Magdalen. End Aug. 
Montauban. End Aug. 



Chancellor. End Aug. 

Early admirable. B«^nn. Seiit. 

IMalfa. Early in Sept. 

Royal Geoi-ge. ."Mid. Sept. 

Noblesse. Afid. Sept. 

Le Teton de \'enus. I^te in Sept. 

Late purple. Late in Sept. 



NECTARINES. 

Cling Stojies. \ Golden. Sept. I Free Stones. | Temple. Sept. 

Red Roman. Late in Aug. Brugnion. Late in Sept. Scarlet. End Aug. I MTiite. Aug. and Sept 

Newington. End Aug. J "* | Murray. Early in Sept | 

3068. M'Phail says, " Tlie names of peach-trees fit for forcing are the Magdalen, 
Montauban, royal George, and noblesse ; of nectarines, the scarlet, temple, Murray, and 
red Roman." (G. Bern. -p. 18.) 

3069. Nicol recommends tlie following : — 

PEACHES. 

Red Magdalen I Royal George I Montauban I Teton de Venus [ French Mignonne I Early purple ; and 

^^'hite Magdalen | Noblesse | Admirable | Late purple J Smith's Newiiigton 1 Orange. 

NECTARINES. 

Elruge I Due de TeUo I Scarlet I Murraj | Temple ] Roman | Newington ; and | Brugnion. 

3070. Choice of plnnts. " Before a house for forcing peaches and nectarines be built," 
M'Phail observes, " trees to plant in it had best be got in readiness ; and if they be 
growing on the premises it will be an advantage. If it can be avoided, no tree should 
bo planted in a forcing-house until the fruit of it have been seen and tasted. Tlie trees 
.should be well trained ones, four or five feet high : indeed it is of no consequence what 
their age be, provided they be healthy, well rooted, and in a bearing state : and if they 
have been transplanted several times since they were budded, they will be the fitter for 
transplanting again ; and if the work of taking tliem up and of planting them in the 
peach-house be carefully and methodically done, the trees by their removal will be but 
little retai-ded in their growth. When ever}' thing in a forcing-house is got in readiness 
for the reception of the trees, loose tlieni from the wall to which they were fastened with 
nails and shreds, and dig a wide semicircular ti-ench four feet distant from the stem of 
each tree, and a little deeper than their spreading roots ; then by little and little with a 
pointed stick work the earth out among their roots, taking care to break as few of them 
as possible : in this manner the roots of the plants ai-e to be divested of eaith in a careful 
manner, so as to undermine the stem, that the tree may be lifted out of its place without 
straining the roots of it. Having holes previously prepared about eight or ten inches 
deep, and four feet wide, set the trees into them one after another, training their roots 
out in a regular horizontal manner at full length, and after the ends of tlie roots be cut 
so as to take the raggedness off, cover them no deeper than about six inches at their 
extremities, and at the stem of the tree about four inches." 

3071. Nicol prefers clean, healthy dwarfs, that have been one or two years trained, to older plants ; and 
riders three or even four years trained ; because, being temporarj-, it 'is desirable to have them produce 
fruit as soon as possible, for if the dwarfs thrive, the former will have to be removed in three, or, at most, 
in four years. In a house tliirty-five feet long, tliree dwarfs should^Je planted, and in a house thirty-five 
or forty feet long, four dwarfs ; in both cases with riders between them. [Kal. p. 323.) 

3072. P. Flanagan prefers plants that have been grown in stiff loam and three years trained. 

3073. Situation of the plants in tlie house. Permanent occupants, intended to be forced early, Aber- 
crombie plants in a front border, training them on a trellis just under the roof. In late forcing-houses, he 
trains them to an upright trellis near the back wall. 

3074. M'Phail plants so as to train under the glass ; and Nicol's practice concurs with that recom- 
mended by Abercrombie. 



Book T. 



CULTURE OF THE PEACH-HOUSE. 



659 ~ 



3075. For a late peach-house, dwarfs should be planted in front, to be trained about half way up the roof; 
and dwarfs, with riders between them, against the back wall, to be trained to the top. In this case, the 
trees on the back trellis would not be shaded by those in front, provided they be not trained to more than 
half way up the sloping glass ; and thus the greatest possible extent of unshaded surface, and the greatest 
quantity of unshaded fruit may be obtained. A house planted in this manner, about forty or forty-five 
feet in length, may have four dwarfs in front, and four dwarfs and five riders at back; and when in a 
full-bearing state, would produce a large quantity of nectarines and peaches. If only thirty or thirty-five 
feet in length, three dwarfs in front, and three dwarfs and four riders at back, would be trees enough to 
fill it. {Pract. Gard.) 

3076. For an early jyeach-house many consider the plants as safer when trained against 
the back wall, or on a trellis not nearer the glass than three feet. This is the Dutch 
practice, and was that of Speechly, and Kyle, of Moredun. 

3077. Season of Planting. Abercrombie recommends November and December as 
preferable ; or otherwise February and March : M'Phail, " any time when the weather 
is open, between October and March ;" which practice is also agreeable to that of Nicol. 
Flanagan plants in the latter end of autumn, or beginning of spring, placing a compost 
of three parts loam and one of dung immediately round the roots, in order to encourage 
the plants to strike more freely into the general soil of the border. [Hort. Trans, v. 58.) 

3078. Training. All seem agreed in recommending fan-training for peaches and nec- 
tarines ; which being the simplest and most natural of all training, we deem it unnecessary 
to quote opinions at length. 

3079. Pruning. This, according to Abercrombie, may be performed at the fall of 
the leaf ; but should be completed before the blossom-buds are considerably advanced. 
M'Phail says, the best season is the spring, when the blossom-buds can be distinguished. 

3080. Nicol, in the case of a newly planted house, heads down the maiden plants, or cuts in the trained 
trees, about the end of March or beginning of April. " With respect to the dwarfs, the shoots on the 
lower branches should be cut back to two or three buds, that the trellis may be furnished from the bottom 
with young wood. The shoots on the upper or farther extended branches may be shortened back to half, 
or one third of their lengths, according to their strength, provided they have been well ripened, and are 
ftee from canker ; but if the tree be anywise diseased, let them be cut so far back as to get rid of the can- 
kered or mildewed part. I mention this as a matter of precaution, but would rather advise that no dis- 
eased tree be planted, unless of a particular kind, that cannot be easily obtained. The riders need not be 
headed so much in as the dwarfs ; the object being rather to throw them into a bearing state, than to 
cause them to push very strong shoots, which would not be fruitful. If they make moderately strong shoots, 
and if these be well ripened in autumn, a good crop may be expected on them next year. Let the 
young shoots be laid in, as they advance, at the distance of about nine inches from each other; that, 
is, of the dwarfs. Those of the riders may be laid in considerably closer, it not being intended they shall 
grow so vigorously as those of the dwarfs." 

3081. Flanagan says, " If the trees appear to make luxuriant shoots in any part where bearing wood 
is wanted, the shoots should be stopped at the third or fourth leaf, and if they are still inclined to 
grow strong, they must be stopped a second time ; this will obtain kindly wood. Two or three times in 
the spring the v.'hole should be looked over, and the shoots moderately thinned out, leaving those 
which are most kind and well placed at regular distances for the next year's bearing. The first 
thinning of the young shoots should be just after the fruit is set, and when they are eight or ten inches 
long ; when at that length, they must be laid in at such distances as to admit the sun and air to ripen the 
wood destined to bear in the ensuing season. The principal business of the first season is to keep the young 
wood regularly laid in, to attend to the top and bottom waterings, and to the free admission of air 
at all opportunities. If all this has been done, and the plants have been kept clean, they wiU in this 
season have made plenty of good bearing wood for the next year, and they will have nearly covered half 
the extent of trellis within the house." {Hart. Trans, v. 59.) 

3082. The winter pruning in a bearing-house is supposed to take place in November; and if the summer 
shoots have been regularly trained, and laid in at the distances of nine inches in the dwarfs, and 
rather less in the riders, they will not require much pruning at this time. A few of the shoots may 
be shortened about the lower and middle parts of the tree, for the purpose of providing a supply of 
young wood in these parts, and thinning out such shoots here and there as have been left too thick; 
for others should not be shortened, but sliould be laid in at full length ; that is, such as are short, stout, 
nearly of an equal thickness, and have a bold wood-bud at the extremity ; as from these may be expected 
the best fruit next season. " In some parts of the tree, perhaps, or in some particular trees, it may be 
expedient to cut out such old branches as have but few young shoots on them, provided there be 
neighboring branches better furnished, whose shoots may be spread out, so as to fill, or nearly to fill, 
the vacancy occasioned by such lopping. In this case, the shoots, borrowed as it were for this purpose, 
must be shortened more or less, according to the size of the vacancy to be filled up, and according 
to their strengths, in order that the plant may appear complete in all parts as soon as possible." 

3033. The summer pruning consists in pinching off all fore-right shoots as they appear, and all such as 
are ill placed, weakly, watery, deformed, or very luxuriant, leaving a leader to every shoot of last 
year, and retaining a plentiful supply of good lateral shoots in all parts of the tree. If any blank is to be 
filled up, some conveniently placed strong shoot is shortened in June to a few eyes, in order that it may 
throw out laterals. 

3084. The fruit is thinned after the stoning season, as already described in treating of 
thinning of wall-fruit. (2570.) 

3085. Abercrombie says, " There should be a preparatory' thinning before the time of stoning, and a 
final thinning afterwards, because most plants, especially such as have overborne themselves, drop many 
fruit at that crisis. Finish the thinning with great regularity, leaving those retained at proper distances, 
three, four, or five, on strong shoots ; two or three on middling, and one or two on the weaker 
shoots ; and never leaving more than one peach at the same eye. The fruit on weakly trees thin more 
in proportion." 

3086. Nicol concurs with these remarks. " If," he says, " the trees set an immoderate quantity of fruit, 
which plants not in a healthy and vigorous state will often do (that is to say, such will frequently set more 
than they are able to sustain or nourish), they should, in that case, be moderately thinned at this time. Also, 
the fruit on trees in a more vigorous condition should be thinned ; thinning most where health is most 
wanting, and least where it prevails over sickness. And observe, that for want of timely and judicious 
thinning, sickness is often induced, and the whole crop lost. In a peach-house in a state of bearing, 
when the fruit is swelling off, in order that it may attain a greater degree of perfection, such leaves and 
summer shoots as overhang and shade the fruit are taken off or thinned," 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III 



S087- Fall of the leaves of forced peach-trees. Nicol says, the leaves of peach-trees " may be dressed off," 
when the wood is ripened, by the use of a withe or small cane, which is more necessary in a house than if 
the trees were growing in the open air, where the wind or frost might make them tumble down fast. 

3088. Stirring the soil. The borders are to be pointed and forked up after pruning, 
and a little well rotted dung or compost added where deemed necessary. The part of 
the borders on the outside may, in addition, be covered with dung ; and after forcing is 
commenced, those in the inside may be occasionally watered with the drainings of the 
dunghill. {Kal. 324. 438.) 

3089. Time of beginning to force. " From the rise of tlie sap," according to Aber- 
crombie, " it occupies, in some sorts, about four months to make mature fruit ; in the 
later varieties, five months ; and when much of winter is included in the course of forcing, 
the time is proportionally lengthened. To ripen moderately early kinds by tlie end of 
May, begin to force on the 21st of December. Little is gained by commencing sooner. 
But you may put on the glasses a week before, and make gentle fires, admitting a con- 
stant stream of fresh- air, to get the house ready." 

3090. M'Phail says, " Those who wish to have peaches and nectarines ripe in May, should begin to force 
them about the beginning or middle of December." For a general crop, Nicol, Weeks, and most gar- 
deners, recommend forcing to begin the month of February. Nicol offers " a word to the novice in forcing : 
Be diffident, and drive too slow rather than too fast. Most new beginners in this business make haste to 
outdo, or to eclipse their neighbors ; and so drive on at a pace they cannot long keep up, but founder their 
steed, and stop short by the way." 

3091. Temperature. Abercrombie directs to " begin at 42° min. 45° max. from sun- 
heat ; and rise in a fortnight to 45" min. 50'' max. from sun-heat, giving plenty of air ; 
in the progress of the second fortnight, augment the temperature from three to eight de- 
grees, so as to have it at the close up to 53° min. 56° max. from sun-heat, admitting air 
in some degree daily. When the trees are in blossom, let the minimum heat be 55° min. 
60° max. Continue to aim at this till the fruit is set and swelling. When the fruit is 
set, raise the minimum to 60°, tlie ailificial maximum to 65°, in order to give fresh air : 
when the sun shines, do not let the maximum, from collected heat, pass 70°, rather em- 
ploying the opportunity to admit a free circulation of air." 

3092. M'Phazl, beginning in February, keeps the thermometer to about 55°, increasing it as the days 
lengthen ; when set and swelling, raise it to 60" with fire -heat ; when the sun shines, let it rise to 65° or 70"* 
with air. A short time before the fruit begins to ripen, fVom 55°. to 70° is not too much, with fire-heat, 
and in sunshine days a little above 75''. 

3093. Flanagan begins to force a new-planted house in the second week of February, by putting on the 
lights, and begins fire-heat at the end of the month. - The second season he puts on the lights^in the latter 
end of January. {Hort. Tram. v. 58,59.) 

3094. Nicol, in a house begun to force on the 1st of February, begins with 45° for the first fortnight, and 
then increases the heat to 50° or 52°. The times of regulation are supposed to be at six or seven in the 
morning, and at eight or nine at night. At the end of a month the temperature is to be kept as steadily as 

Eossible to 55°. In two months, keep it to about 65°, seldom allowing it to pass 70°, which, if it does, it will 
ave the effect of drawing the shoots up weak, and may cause the setting fruit to drop. He recommends 
60° by fire-heat, mornings and evenings, as proper after the fruit is fairly stoned. 

3095. Flanagan, the first season of forcing a peach-house, "attains a temperature of from 53° to 55° from 
fire the last week of February, and does not allow the sun-heat to exceed 65°. The second season of forcing, 
fires are made in the second week of February, just to keep the heat by fire from 45° to 50°, not exceeding 
70° of sun-heat ; in the third week the fire-heat is gradually increased from 50° to 55°, and not exceeding 
75° sun-heat. In March, particular attention must be paid to the regularity of heat, which may be pro. 
gressively increased a degree or two as the season advances, but I do not allow it to exceed the last-named 
temperature until the fruit is perfectly stoned, when I increase it from 55° to 60° at night, and from 77° to 
80° of s< n-heat. At the medium of these the temperature should continue during the remaining part of 
the sea >n." {Hort. Trans, v, 60.) 

3096. Air. A constant stream of fresh air is to be admitted before beginning to force, 
and plenty of air during sunshine throughout the whole progress of forcing. M'Phail says, 
when the fruit is set and swelling, " give the house air every day, whether the sun sliine 
or not." Give plenty of air, and keep the house dry, when the fruit begins to ripen. 
When the intention is to begin to force on the 1 st of February, Nicol shuts up the house 
from the middle of January, admitting plenty of free air through the day. During the 
first month of forcing, he admits air freely " every day, even in frosty weather, by the 
sashes, till the flowers begin to expand ; after which time by the ventilators, except in fresh 
weather, till the season become mild. Air should be admitted all this month, to such an 
extent as to keep down the temperature, in sunshine, to within five degrees of the fire-heat 
medium ; and this in order to strengthen the buds as they break, and that the young shoots 
may spring in a vigorous manner." Admit large portions of air every day when the fruit 
is swelling off, except in damp weather, from seven or eight in the morning to five or six 
in the evening ; opening the sashes to their fullest extent from ten till two or three o'clock, 
giving and reducing gradually, &c. 

3097. Watering and steaming. While the fruit is in blossom," Abercrombie ob- 
serves, " steaming the flues must be substituted for watering over the herb ; at the same 
time, you may water the roots now and then gently, avoiding such a copious supply as 
might risk the dropping of the fruit to be set. Let the water be warmed to the air of the 
house." 



Book I. 



CULTURR OF THE PEACH-HOUSE. 



561 



S098. M'Phail directs to keep the border moist by watering ; and after the fruit are as Wg as nuts, sprinkle 
the flues now and tlien with water to raise steam, and wash the trees about once a-weelc with clean water, 
not too cold. It is better not to wash all over the top till the fruit are set. A sunshine morning is to be 
preferred, and tlie water may be about 65". Do not water after the fruit begin to ripen, but re-commence 
when all are gathered. {Gard. Rem. 148. 191.) 

3099. Nicol says, " newly planted i)cach.trees should be freely supplied with water at the root throughout 
the season, in order to promote their growth ; and the engine must be applied with force to the branches, for 
the suppression of the red spider, and refreshing the foliage, generally once in two or three days." In a 
fruit-bearing house, after the fruit is set, " water should be given pretty freely to the plants at root, once 
in two or three days ; increasing the quantity as the fruit begins to swell, and as the shoots advance in 
growth. Also, continue the operations of the engine regularly ; and do not be sparing, or be afraid to hurt 
the foliage, if the red spider appear on it. Hit hardest at, or near to the top of the house ; as it is there he 
preys most, being fostered by the extreme heat, in which he delights. In looking out for this enemy, there- 
fore, keep your eye particularly on this part. "Withhold water from the border, and cease to exercise the 
engine on the foliage when the fruit is swelling off." {Kal. 358. 401.) 

3100. Flanagan, whilst the trees are in bloom, neither sprinkles nor steams the house, for he " considers 
that sufficient moisture arises from the earth in the house at this stage of forcing." (Hort. Trans, v. 60.) 
When the fruit is set, he gives the trees a gentle syringing on a fine morning with clean water, and 
waters the borders within the house occasionally after the stoning, until the fruit is arrived at full size, and 
begins to change color, then all watering should be left ofFboth with the syringe and on the borders. 

3101. Insects and diseases. The red spider is the grand enemy to peach-trees; but 
they are also attacked by blight, mildew, the aphis, thrips, and sometimes even the coccus. 
" The blight," Abercrombie says, " is caused by small insects, very pernicious both to 
the trees and fruit in their growth ; this is apparent by the leaves curling up, and often 
by the ends of the shoots being bunched and clammy, which retards their shooting. In 
this case, it is advisable to pick off the infected leaves, and cut away the distempered part 
of the shoots. Further to check the mischief, if the weather be hot and dry, give the trees 
a smart watering all over the branches. A garden-engine will perform the watering much 
more effectually than a common watering-pot, as it discharges the water in a full stream 
against the trees. Apply it two or three times a week ; the best time of the day is the 
afternoon, when the power of the sun is declining. These waterings will clear the leaves, 
branches, and fruit, from any contracted foulness ; refresh and revive the whole consider- 
ably ; and conduce greatly to exterminate the vermin." 

3102. M^Phail directs, when the plants have begun to expand their blossoms and leaves, and the aphis, or 
green insect, makes its appearance, to fill the house full of tobacco-smoke once a week, or oftener. If there 
be any appearance of mildew, dust a little sulphur on the infected parts ; and if the gum or canker be seen 
on the shoots on any part of the trees, open the bark, and cut out the dying wood. Inspect the trees in 
every part minutely, and if you perceive the bark dying, or the gum oozing out of any part of them, cut off 
the bark as far as it is dead or decaying ; and if the branches be strong, that you cannot well effect it with 
your knife, take a chisel with a semicircular edge, and a mallet, and cut out the wood as far as you see it is 
affected ; you need not be afraid of hurting the tree, even if the branches or main stem are cut half away. 
I have cut sometimes more than half of the stems of standard trees away from the ground farther up than 
where the branches began to separate, which was the means of saving them alive. This method exposes 
the old wood to the sun and air, by which it is dried, and the tree is thereby assisted in casting off the 
unwholesome juices, or those kept in it too long for want of a more dry, genial climate. {Gard. Rem. 131.) 

3103. Mitchel, of Montcrieff House, Perthshire, hangs on his peach-trees, when the fruit are ripe, " large 
white glass phials, with a little jam or jelly in them, in order to entice large black flies, which he finds 
very destructive to peaches. Wasps he destroys by finding out their nests in the day, marking them with 
a stick ; and going in the evening with a lantern and candle, he introduces a burning stick, smeared with 
wet gunpowder, which stupifies the wasps. He then pours water over them, and with a spade works up the 
nest, earth, and water, into a sort of mortar. Nests on trees or hedges he stupifies by the wet gunpowder, 
which causes the wasps to faU nearly dead, when he crushes them, &c." {Caled. Hort. Trans, vol. i. 194.) 

3104. Isicol strongly recommends watering for keeping down insects, especially the red spider. If the green 
fly or thrips make their appearance, recourse must be had to fumigation. Shut the house close up at 
night, and fill it so full of tobacco-smoke that one person cannot see another. If this should be rejpeated 
the next evening, they will be completely destroyed. Calm weather is most favorable for this op^^tion. 
" The coccus and chermes," he says, " are not so immediately hurtful, and unless very numerous,' need 
not be much minded at this season ; but they must be more particularly attended to at the time of pruning 
in November. The males, which have wings, and are active, will be dislodged by the operations of the 
engine ; and the females, v/hich are stationary, and adhere to the shoots and branches, if very numerous, 
may readily be crushed by the finger, or by a small flatfish stick, that can easily be insinuated into the 
angles of the branches, where they often lodge." {Kal. 340 — 358.) 

3105. Nicol and Abercrombie recommend that in November, when the winter pruning is finished, the 
pknts end trellis should be anointed with the composition recommended for vines, (3061,) 

3106. Rijwning the fruit. Knight finds that neither peaches nor nectarines ac- 
quire pjifection either in richness or in flavor, unless they be exposed to the full in- 
fluence of the sun during their last swelling, without the intervention of the glass. In 
consequence, he says, some gardeners lake off the lights wholly before the fruit begins 
to ripen ; but he recommends taking them off only in bright sunshine, and putting them 
on during rain, and at night to protect the fruit from dews, &c. " When the fruit 
begins to ripen, which will be about the second week in July, I gradually expose the 
house to the open air on fine and dry days, by drawing down the lights as much as 
convenient in the day, and shutting them again in the evening. It is this which gives 
the fruit both flavor and color." (Hort. Trans, v. 61.) 

3107. Gathering the fruit. M'Phail advises laying moss or some soft material over 
the borders, to save those which drop off of themselves. Nicol recommends the peach- 
gatherer. (Jig. 148.) Sir Joseph Banks, quoting from a French author, states, that 
" Peaches are never eaten in perfection,, if suffered to ripen on the tree ; they should 
be gathered just before they are quite soft, and kept at least twenty-four hours in 



562 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the fruit-chamber." {Hort. Trans, vol. i. App.) Williams, of Pilmaston, says, 
" Should the season prove vv et when the peaches are ripe, they should be gathered, and 
placed for about two days in a dry airy room before they are eaten." {Horl. Trans. 
vol. ii. p. 113.) 

3108. Ripening the wood. Abercrombie says, " On account of the fruit of most sorts 
of peaches ripening somewhat earlier than grapes, and the growth of the shoots stopping 
sooner than the summer- wood of vines, it is not so often necessary to assist tlie plant, 
in September or October, by artificial heat ; but in some of the late kinds, if, by the 
time the external air is down to 60 degrees, the shoots have not taken a greenish-brown 
tint as high as several eyes from the origin, and if the blossom-buds on these, round 
wlien full swelled, are not distinguishable from the oblong wood-buds, apply a little 
fire-heat, and continue it till the leaves fall." 

3109. Nicol directs attention to be had to the ripening of the wood of peach-trees in September. A little 
fire-heat maybe necessary fully to mature the shoots, especially of young trees. " Fire-heat should be 
continued till the growth of the smaller and middle-sized shoots stop, their bottom parts become greenish- 
brown, and the buds upon them, that is, the flower-buds, appear turgid, and be distinguishable from the 
wood-buds. The sitronger and more extreme shoots of the dwarfs in particular will continue to grow 
later than the above shoots ; which, as they are to be considerably shortened back in November, for the 
production of wood to fill the trellis next season, is not very material, provided the bottom part be pretty 
well hardened." 

3110. Resting the imod. The management of the peach-house, when at rest, Aber- 
crombie says, " Should be nearly the same as for the grape-house, except when there is 
but one set of frames to serve both an early peach-house and late grape-house ; in which 
case, as soon as the young wood of the vines is perfectly ripened, the glasses should be 
brought back to the peach-house ; t'oT although the fruit of the grape is to be set and 
ripened in a higher heat, the peach-tree, as a plant, is more tender than the vine; and 
independently of forcing, comes into blossom about two months sooner." 

3111. M'Phail keeps on the glasses from the time the fruit is gathered till he begins to force, in order to 
keep the wood dry ; but gives them all the air he can. {Gard. Remem. 367.) 

3112. 'Nicol exposes the house fully day and night, only shutting up in the time of heavy rains. 
{^Kal. 420.) 

3113. Forcing peaches and nectarines by d^ing-heat. The following mode is practised 
at Dagnam Park : — " The house is seventy feet long by eleven feet wide, the front wall 
being five feet and a half deep from the bottom of the lights, the depth from the roof 
(there being no upright lights in front) to the ground : about three feet and a half of 
the bottom of this wall in open brick-work, with a flue in the inside, the top of which 
is covered with plain tiles. The inside of the house is filled up with earth to within two 
feet of the bottom of the lights, and the trees planted as near as possible to the front 
wall, and trained under the lights or wires, in the same w"ay as vines. The back wall of a 
pirie-pit is built of the same height as the front of the peach-house, and three feet distant 
from it ; this of course forms a space thiee feet wide for the hot dung. As soon as I wish to 
begin forcing, this space is filled with hot dung : the roots being near the flue, soon begin 
to feel the warmth, and I sometimes take off a few tiles from the top of the flue, so as to 
admit the steam from the hot dung into the house ; I find this of great advantage, and 
productive of no ill eflTects, until the leaf-bud begins to expand, and if the stream is not 
then perfectly sweet and moderate, the places left to admit it must be secured. You 
will of course observe, that while this hot dung lining is forcing the peaches and nec- 
tarines, it is assisting to work the pines in the pine-pit at the same time, and without any 
additional expense, there being also a lining at the front of the pine-pit, as well as this 
one at the back ; and when it has become cooled by frequent turnings, I either make 
cucumber-beds of it, or take it inside the peach-house or vinery. For these five years 
past, I have never failed in producing an abundant crop of peaches and nectarines by 
the above method." {Bi-eese, in Hort. Trans, v. 219.) 

3114. Forcing the peach-tree in pots. " All the varieties of the peach and nectarine,'* 
Abercrombie observes, " are extremely well suited for forcing in large pots or tubs. 
Small plants, intended to come in before or after those in the borders, may be excited, 
in the first stage, in a distinct house ; so as the temperature of that in which they are 
brought to finish fruiting* be suited to their progress. The compost for plants in cradles 
ought to be lighter and richer than the mould in the borders." The pots or tubs should 
be such as not to contain less than a cubic foot of earth ; the soil should be lighter and 
richer than that recommended for the borders, and liquid manure should be plentifully 
supplied, to make up, in some degree, for the confinement of the roots. They are best 
forced in a peach-house, but succeed in a vinery or succession-stove ; best of all, how- 
ever, in a pit or Dutch frame {jig. 446.), where the temperature can be regulated at 
pleasure, and where they are near the glass. Great care must be taken to supply them 
regularly with water, for which purpose some place saucers under the pots ; others cover 
their surface with moss, or, what is better, fresh cow or rotten horse dung. Casing the 
pots with ropes made of moss, is also a veiy good method, as it not only preserves a uni- 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CHERRY-HOUSE. 



form degree of moisture, but also of temperature. Of course the moss must be kept 
watered. Peach-trees, in pots, are sometimes trained to small fan-trellises attached to 
the pot ; but in general they are pruned as dwarf-standards, in which form they bear 
fully better than when trained. When tlie fruit is nearly ripe, the pots ought to be re- 
moved from the hot-house or vinery to a cooler and more airy situation ; or, if in pits, 
the sashes may be taken off a part of every fine day. In other respects, the treatment 
of peach-trees in pots is similar to that of trees in borders. 

3115. Williams, of Pilmaston, observes, that in respect to the quality of fruit from peacli-trees in pots, 
" by far the best-flavored peaches I have ever tasted, were from trees planted in large pots, and kept in a 
vinery from February till the first week in June ; when the trees were removed into the open air, and 
after being shaded a little from the sun for the first ten days, were placed in the most open part of the 
garden till the fruit became ripe. Treated in this way, the peach becomes beautifully colored on the out- 
side, and of a most exquisite flavor." Occasionally, in very warm seasons, peach-trees in pots, when 
forced very early in the season, and afterwards plunged in the open air, will produce a second crop late 
in autumn ; but this is more matter of curiosity than of utility. It frequently happens with forced 
cherries and strawberries. {Hort. Trans, iii. 367.) 

3116. Peach-trees as standards. The peach bears remarkably well in the standard 
form, planted in the middle of a house ; and the flavor of the fruit is universally ac- 
knowledged to be preferable to that grown on the trellis, from the comparatively free cir- 
culation of air. The glass tent, or moveable house (Jig' 226. ), might be most advan- 
tageously applied in this way ; and when the fruit began to ripen, the sashes could be 
removed, and applied to ripening a late crop of grapes against a common wall, or 
to cover pits or houses which had not been forced. 

Sect. IV. Of the Culture of the Cherry-house. 

3117. No fruit is inore difficult to force than the cherry. The blossoms of forced trees 
are apt to fall off' before the fruit is set, and the fruit will keep falling off" before and 
after they are as large as peas. This is thought to be occasioned by a kind of stagnation 
of air about them, which affects the tender blossoms and young fruit. 

3118. Soil. M'Phail says, " Take light, sandy, rich, mellow earth, and make a border 
of it the whole width of the house, and four feet deep." Nicol — " The border should be 
from twenty-four to thirty inches deep ; the bottom, if not naturally mild and dry, to be 
drained and paved. The soil should be a sandy loam, or light hale gardeii-earth, made 
moderately rich with stable-yard dung well reduced, or with other light compost. If a 
small portion of lime, or a moderate quantity of marl were mixed with it, so much the 
better. The soil for cherries to be forced in pots or tubs, should be considerably richer- 
than the above." Torbron uses fresh virgin soil and rotten dung. {Hort. Trans. 
iv. 116.) 

SI 19. Choice of sorts. M'Phail, Nicol, and all gardeners, agree in giving the prefer- 
ence to the May-duke. Nicol says, " None of the other kinds set so well, except the 
Morella, which I do not hesitate to say well deserves a place : it is a -good bearer, and 
the fruit, when forced, acquires a superior size and flavor." (^ICal. 295.) 

3120. Choice of plants. M'Phail takes standards of different heights in a bearing state ; 
Nicol, clean, healthy, young plants, that have been one or two years in training against a 
wall. Torbi-on trees, eight or ten years from the bud, and selected of such various 
heights as best suited the size of the house. 

3121. Situation if the plants in the house. M'Phail and Torbron plant in rows, be- 
ginning with the tallest in the back side, reserving the shortest for the front, letting them 
slope to the south gradually, somewhat in the form in which plants are set in the green- 
house. (G. Rem. 146. ; Hort. Trans, iv. 116.) 

3122. Nicol has a trellis against the back wall for wall-trained trees, and a border ni front, in which he 
plants dwari-standards. The dwarfs against the back trellis, he plants eight or ten feet apart. Riders that 
have been three or four years trained, and are well furnished with fruit-spurs, may be planted between the 
dwarfs. They may probably yield a few fruit the first season ; and will hardly fail to produce plentifully in 
that following. " In the border may be planted, as dwarf-standards, to be kept under five feet in height, 
some well furnished plants that have been kept in large pots or tubs for a year or two ; such being more 
fruitful, and less apt to grow to wood than plants that have grown in the open ground. In planting these, 
the ball of earth should not be very much reduced ; only a few of the under roots should be spread out ; 
for if the ball were reduced, and the whole roots spread out, as in the ordinary way of planting, when ii is 
wished that a plant may push freely, the intention here would be thwarted ; which is, to have the plant 
dwarf and fruitful, growing little to wood. Along with these may be planted in the same way, an apricot . 
or two, or figs, or both, that have been dwarfed in pots or tubs, as above. If they succeed, it would give a 
pleasant variety ; ofwliich there need be little doubt, as the temperature, soil, and general treatment for 
cherries will suit apricots, and not far disagree with figs. These little standards may be allowed a space of 
about four feet square each, which is sufficient, as they must not be suflfered to rise high, or spread far, on 
account of shading the trees on the trellis. In planting of the principal dwarfs and riders, let the work be 
carefully performed. They should be raised with as good roots, and be kept as short time out of the 
ground as possible ; placing them just as deep as they have been before; spreading out their roots and 
fibres, and filling in with fine earth. The whole should have a moderate quantity of water, and have air 
freely admitted every day ; defending them, however, from snow or much rain. The house should not be 
forced tlie first year ; and it will be better to defer heading in the plants till the middle or end of March, 
than to prune them now. I shall, therefore, take no further notice of them till then, supposing they are to 
be attended to with respect to air, and moderate waterings. It is necessary, however, to remark, that the 
plants should be carefully anointed with the liquor, either just now, or some time in the course of the 
month." 

O o 2 



564 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



3123. Time of planting. According to Nicol and M'Pliail, January and February ; to 
Torbron, early in the autumn. 

31 24. Primiyig. " Trees planted in January may be pruned about the middle or end of 
March, llie dwarfs, planted against the trellis, should be well cut in ; that is, each 
shoot of last year should be shortened back to three or four buds, that the plants may 
throw out a sufficiency of young shoots to fill the rail from the bottom. Tlie dwarfs, 
planted in the border as little standards, need not be headed in so much ; as the intention 
is to have them fruitful, and that they may grow little to wood from the beginning. Their 
short stubby shoots need not be touched, unless brviised or hurt in transplanting ; shorten- 
ing back the longer and weaker ones only, a few inches, according to their strengths. The 
riders, planted against the back trellis, may be treated very much in the same manner ; 
the sole intention being to obtain a few crops of them while tlie dwarfs are making wood 
and filling their spaces. In November following, the trees may be pruned for the suc- 
ceeding season. In order to produce wood to fill the trellis as soon as possible, the dwarfs 
should be pretty much headed in. The shoots may be pruned very much in the manner 
of the trees in the early house, shortening no shoots that are fully ripened, except a few of 
those at the extremities of the ti-ee, in order to make them throw out others for its full 
extension upwards next year. November is also the proper time for pruning an esta- 
blished cherry-house, preparatory to forcing for next year. As cheny-trees which have 
been forced make vei y little wood, very little pruning is required ; probably nothing 
further than moderately to thin out the spurs, and to prune oflT any accidental breast- wood 
or water-shoots that may have risen since the crop was gathered. The leading shoots, 
except for the purpose of producing Avood to fill up any blank or vacancy, need not be 
shortened ; nor need those in the lower parts of the tree, except for the same reason. But 
if it be necessary to shorten these, let them be cut pretty well in, as otherwise they will 
push very weakly. Shoots on the extreme parts of the tree, that should be shortened for 
the above purpose, need not, however, be cut so closely in. If they be headed back one 
third, or to half their lengths, it will generally be found suflScient." 

3125. Summer pruning. Very little of this is requisite, such water-shoots or breast- 
wood as arise among the spurs are to be pinched off as they appear ; laying in such 
shoots only of this description as may be wanted to fill an occasional vacancy. Train in 
the summer shoots of the dwarfs as they advance, at the distance of about eight or nine 
inches from each other ; and otherwise observe the general rules for pruning cherries on 
walls and espaliers. 

3126. Stirring the soil. After pruning, the borders are to be forked up, and a little 
well rotted dung, mixed with sand, worked in, if thought necessary. In summer, they 
may be slightly stirred on the surface, and M'eeded to keep them fresh, clean, and neat, 
and where a part of the border is outside the house, cover with horse-dung or litter in the 
early part of the season. 

3127. The time of beginning to force is sometimes December, but more generally Janu- 
ary or February. " Newly planted trees," Nicol observes, " will bear gentle forcing 
next spring, from the first or middle of March ; which ought to be considered merely as 
preparatory to forcing them fully, from about the first of Februaiy, the third year." 
Torbron, if the trees have been removed with good balls, admits of gentle forcing the first 
spring, but prefers deferring it till the third year. He says, " I have had an abundant 
crop of fine cherries, from trees v.hich had been planted only a few months before forcing, 
but woidd not recommend the risking a whole crop, unless the trees have been longer 
established." Where cherries are to be ripened early in the season, he " shuts in about 
the beginning of December, and lights the fires about the third or last week of that month. " 
{Hort. Trans, iv. 116.) 

3128. Temperature. Abercrombie begins at 40°, " and throughout the first week, 
lets the minimum be 40^, and the maximum 42", giving plenty of air. By gradual ad- 
vances in the second, tliird, and fourth week, raise the course to 42^ min. 45-" max. In 
strong sunshine, admit air freely, rather than have the temperature above 52°, by collect- 
ing the warm air. In the fifth and sixth week, the artificial minimum may be gradually 
elevated to 45^*, but the maximum should be restrained to 48° from fire-heat, and to 55^ 
from sun-heat, until the plants are in flower. After the blossoms are shown, and until 
the fruit is set, aim to have the heat from the flues at 48° min. 52= max. At this stage, 
maintain as free an intercliange of air as the weather will permit ; and when the sun-heat 
is strong, do not let the temperature within exceed 60'^. As the fruit is to be swelled and 
ripened, the requisite heat is 60 mm. 65° max." 

3129. M'FJiaU, in January, does not let the cherry-house rise higher than 50°. In February, " If the 
thermometer in a morning is as low as 35°, there is no danger ; but it should rise in the course of the day, 
to imitate nature as near as possible. In the month of March, the thermometer in the open air in the 
shade seldom rises above 55°. In the month of April, it seldom rises above 65°. But it is observed, that 
when the sun shines on a cherry-tree or other trees in the open air, the heal on them is higher than in the 
shade. The cherry-tree is of such a delicate nature to force, that it is impossible for any person to write 
down the exact temperature of the air, which would ensure a crop of fruit from it in the forcing way." 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CHERRY-HOUSE. 



565 



3130. Nicol does not force the newly planted cherry-house the first season. The established house he 
begins in January, making fires so moderate for the first ten or twelve days, as that the thermometer shall 
not rise by the force of the fire-heat to more than 40° ; afterwards increase the fire-heat gradually, and so 
as to raise it to 45° ; at which keep as nearly as possible for the remainder of the month. In sunshine, in 
good weather, the thermometer may be allowed to rise to 50° or 55°, but not more. In February, continue 
to regulate the temperature of tiie house, so as that the thermometer may not rise, by the force of fire- 
heat, to more than 50° ; and by the free admission of air in sunshine, keep it down to eO'' or 55'". In 
March the fruit, will be setting, and the temperature of the house must therefore be kept as steadily as 
possible to about 50^, lest the fruit drop ; this being the most critical period of the forcing with all stone- 
fruit. In April the fruit will be beginning to color and swell ofF for ripening, when the temperature may 
be raised four or five degrees. 

3131. Torbron says, " For the first three, four, or five weeks of lighting fires, if the weather be so 
severe as to depress the thermometer in the open air from twenty-two to twelve degrees ; then let the 
thermometer inside the house be kept from thirty-five to forty degrees, or just sufficient to exclude the 
frost. If the weather be not severe during the above period, the thermometer may be kept to forty-five 
degrees inside the house. As the season advances and becomes more mild, and the days longer, probably 
about the first or middle of February, the thermometer may be raised to fifty degrees, and then it is expe- 
dient to give gentle sprinklings by an engine or syringe, two or three times a week, in the evening. Whilst 
the trees are in bloom, no sprinkling must be used ; but the flues, when only moderately hot, are to be 
steamed morning and evening, and every day and hour of sunshine, and calm and mild weather, fresh air 
must be copiously admitted. When the petals begin to drop, and when the Iruit is set, the temperature 
may be raised to fifty-five degrees, the house being engined three or four times a week in the evening; 
but never till the bloom is all down. When the cherries are completely stoned, the thermometer maybe 
raised to sixty degrees by fire-heat, sprinkling every evening by engine, till the fruit is nearly ripe ; the 
house may be kept higher by day, as well as by night, after stoning." [Hort. Trans, iv. 119.) 

3132. Watering. M'Phail waters occasionally at root and over the top, till the trees 
are in blossom ; but when the stones in the fruit are become hard, the trees may be 
washed all over occasionally with clean water, not too cold. " Let this be done in a fine 
sunny morning, and take care not to spatter the fruit with any kind of dirt. In April, 
when the cherries are grown large, give the border a good watering now and then, which 
will enable the trees to swell their fruit to a good size : by keeping them in a healthy 
growing state, the fruit will be line-flavored, and the trees will make strong flower-buds 
for the ensuing season. If the fruit are not ripening, wash the trees occasionally, in a 
fine sunshine morning, with sweet clean water." 

3133. Nicol, after he begins to force in January, " gives moderate supplies of water at the root ; and 
once in two days, let them be well scourged with the engine ; first right and then left. This is done to re- 
fresh the branches and infant foliage ; but chiefly, at this time, for the suppression and prevention of in- 
sects that are as troublesome here as in any other forcing-house, and are easier kept down than brought 
down," In February, " the plants must have regular and moderate supplies of water at the root till the 
fruit be set, and then more freely, as the season, and as their growth advances. The engine may be ex- 
ercised upon their branches, in a moderate manner, once in two days; generally in the afternoon, about 
sunset ; using always well aired soft water. But from the time the flowers begin to open, until the petals 
begin to drop again, desist from using the engine. At this interval, the foliage must be refreshed by 
steam, which may be produced plentifully every evening, by pouring water on the flues when the fire is at 
the strongest. A very fine dew might he thrown on the plants by a soft syringe ; but as soon as the fruit 
is set, the engine is the instrument we should trust to for the suppression of insects." In March, the 
fruit will be setting, and till this is completed, " the border should be kept rather in a drier state than here- 
tofore; as if it be kept too moist, it may occasion their dropping; but afterwards, let it be regularly arnl 
freely watered, in order to promote the growth of the plants, and the swelling of the fruit. Now again re- 
sume the use of the engine ; and exercise it witn force upon the branches, every second day, for the sup- 
pression of the red spider, and to keep the plants clean." In April, " when the fruit begins to color and 
swell off", withhold water from the border by degrees, and towards their being ripe, entirely. At this time 
also, watering with the engine must be withheld ; but previously exercise it with force, and often, for a 
week or two, so as completely to subdue the red sjnder, if he have gained any ground lately. After the croj) 
is gathered, these waterings must be resumed, and should be continued till the foliage begin to drop ; not, 
however, so much on account of the cherry-trees, as on account of other plants that maybe placed in the 
house ; for if the enemy be allowed a footing on the former, he will soon show himself on the latter, where 
perhaps he may be less vulnerable, especially if the plants be of a tender kind. The border may be kejjt in 
a moderately moist state till the leaves fall, or till the house be exposed, or be uncovered." 

3134. Torbron says, " From the time the flower begins to open, till the fruit is completely stoned, 
the soil should be but sparingly watered; but when the stoning is effected, water may be applied to the 
roots freely, till the fruit is nearly ripe." {Hort. Trans, iv. 119.) 

3135. Air. " In forcing the cherry, it is essential to continue a free renovation of 
air ; always^ sustaining the minimum heat in the different stages. The blossoms will 
sometimes fall abortive, or the young fruit drop off after setting, from no other cause 
than a stagnant atmosphere. " At first beginning to force, M'Phail gives pknty of air 
night and day. In February, when the trees are in blossom, " let air be at the house 
day and night ; and as much as you can when the fruit are swelling oflT." 

3136. Nicol says, the airing of the cherry-house may be performed by the sashes, with every safety, till 
the buds begin to expand ; and after that, in frosty or bad weather, air may be admitted by the ventilators. 
In February, nothing is more conducive to the health of the plants, and the setting of the fruit, than a 
regular and free circulation of air ; and if this be denied them for many days together, the effect will soon 
be visible. The foliage will become languid, and the flowers will drop away. Therefore a day should not 
pass in which less or more air is not admitted. As the fruit ripen, give as large and regular portions of air 
as possible ; opening the sashes by eight or nine in the morning; giving full air about ten ; reducing about 
two or three ; and shutting up about four or five, sooner or later, according to the state of the atmosphere. 
In conductirig this matter, however, regard must be had to the temperature ; but air may be admitted, in 
sunshine, to such an extent as to keep down the mercury or spirits in the thermometer to 65°, and at other 
times to 60°. {Kal. p. 339.) 

3137. Torbron says, " The cherry, in forcing, requiring more fresh air than most other fruits, particular 
attention must be paid to its admission, by the gardener having it in his power occasionally to make as 
many inlets or openings as convenient. It will be conducive to this end, that the roof, and the upright or 
front sashes, if any, be moveable, and all with little dillicuKy ; because in changeable weather, the current 
of air may be required to be augmented or reduced many times in one day. Air must be admitted freely and 

() o"3 



5GG 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



copiously when the weather is mild and calm, and accompanied with sunshine, during the time the cherries 
are in bloom, and also near the time of their ripening." (Hort. Trans, iv. 119.) 

3138. Insects, diseases, ayid depredators. " The cherry is liable to be infested by a 
small grub-worra, which rolls itself up in the leaves, and extends its ravages to the fruit. 
As soon as this insect is perceived, the trees should be searched daily, that it may be de- 
stroyed by the hand, and prevented from spreading. It usually shows itself first about 
the time of flowering. Cherries set, or in blossom, require great attention. Like rose- 
buds, they are liable to be destroyed by a small grub-worm, which rolls the leaves roimd 
itself, occasionally, for a covering : it preys on the leaves as well as the fruit. The trees 
should be searched once or twice a-day, to destroy them with the hand as soon as they 
can be observed. Whenever a leaf appears to begin to curl, be sure there is an insect in 
it, or the embryo of one. The cherry-house, as the season advances, may be smoked once 
a- week or ten days, which will prevent the trees from being infested with a blackish kind 
of insect, frequently very pernicious." (Gard. Remem. 161. 191.) When the fruit 
are ripe, it is likely the birds will fly in and eat them, if you do not contrive nets, or some 
other method, to keep them out. If the meshes of the nets which you employ are narrow, 
the wasps and flies, as well as the birds, will be prevented from getting in ; for, as these 
insects generally fly in, they therefore require room for their wings extended, otherwise 
they ai-e repulsed in their attempt. (Garrf. Remem. p. 246.) 

3139. yicol, after every winter pruning, washes the trees over with the mixture of soap, sulphur, &c, 
already mentioned (3061.) ; and in spring and summer waters over the leaves, picks off grubs, and fumi- 
gates, like M'Phail. 

3140. Torbion fumigates for the black fly, and picks off the grub. 

3141. Gathering and keeping the frnit. If it be found necessary, cherries will keep for 
some time on the trees, provided the birds can be kept from them. Keep the house, for 
this purpose, dry, cool, and well aired. (Gard, Remem. 246.) 

3142. Exposing the wood. Tliis, according to all the authors quoted, may be done from 
the time the fruit is gathered, till witliin a week or ten days of the recommencement of 
forcing. The glass should be entirely taken off, unless the cherry-house is in part used 
for some other purpose, to which this practice would be injurious. 

3143. Forcing cherry-trees in pots. M'Phail and Nicol concur in approving the very 
general practice of planting cheriy-trees in pots ; in which, or in tubs of a foot or fifteen 
inches diameter, they may be successfully forced. " Three or four dozen good plants, 
well managed in tliis way, would give a deal of fruit ; which might be had in succession 
for a considerable length of tiine, by dividing the plants into three or four classes or divi- 
sions, and shifting them from one compartment to another. In January, the fii;st twelve 
trees may be placed (from the open air, of course,) in the green-house or conservatory, if 
there be one, or in a peach-house now at work ; placing them in the coolest part of the 
house, but in the full light, and where they may have plenty of air. They must be duly 
attended to with water at the root, and be frequently syringed at top, generally once in 
two days. The pots being occasionally watered with the drainings of the dunghill, would 
add much to the vigor of the plants : there is no method of manuring more effectual, or 
so easily accomplished. The plants may i-emain here till the fruit be fairly set, the stoning 
over, and all danger of dropping be passed. They may then be placed in a vinery or 
stove to ripen off, where they would come in early, and be very high-flavored, if placed 
near the light, and so as that they might have free air daily. In February, a second and 
third dozen should be taken in, and a fom*th in the beginning of March, and each simi- 
larly heated." {Kalend.) " It is very common with early forced cherry-trees to bear a 
second crop late in the same season." (Hort. Trans, iii. 367.) 

3144. Forcing by a temporary structure. Torbron observes, that, "where a portion of 
wall (especially with a southern aspect), already well furnished Avith May-dukes, perfectly 
established, and in a bearing state, can be spared for forcing, a temporary glass case may be 
put up against it ; the flue maybe built on the surface of the border,without digging, or sink- 
ing for a foundation ; neither will any upright glass or front wall be requisite ; the wooden 
plate on which the lower end of the rafters are to rest may be supported by piles, sunk or 
driven into the soil of the border, one pile under every, or every alternate rafter. The 
space between the plate and the surface of the soil should be filled by boards nailed 
against the piles, to exclude the external air, for the plate must be elevated above the level 
of the surface from eighteen to thirty inches, or whatever height may be sufficient to let 
the sashes slip down, in order to admit fresh air. I believe tliis to be an uncommon struc- 
ture, and it may perhaps be objected to : but I am confident that it will suit well for 
cherries, for I have constructed such places even for forcing peaches with good success, as 
well as for maturing and preserving a late crop of grapes. " ( Hort. Trans, iv. 117.) 

Sect. V. Of the Culture of the Fig-house. 

3145. A house for forcing the fig is seldom built expressly for that purpose; partly 
from there being no great demand for the fruit in most families, and partly because figs 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE FIG-HOUSE. 



567 



are generally forced in pots or tubs placed in the peacli or cherry-house, and managed as 
tliese trees. The ng-tree, when forced, is very apt to cast its fruit before it is half 
swelled. " A separate hot-house," Neill observes, " is but seldom erected for tlie cul- 
tivation or the foi cing of the fig ; a few dwarf-trees, such as the brown Italian, and 
purple Italian, introduced into tlie peach or cherry house, being by most people diought 
sufficient. It has been found by experience, that dwarf-standard fig-trees, planted in the 
middle of a vineiy, between the flues, and thus under the shade of the vines, bear fruit 
plentifully, ripening both the spring and autumn crops. Tliis may be seen in the vinery 
erected by Hay, at Preston Hall, near Edinburgh." {Ed, En. art. Hort.) Sabine 
recommends training fig-trees on the back walls of vineries, where he has seen them 
answer well, the vines being trained immediately under the roof. He says, " It is ad- 
visable not to ti-ain the vines entirely under the v>'hole of the glass, but to leave a space in 
the centre of each light, its whole length, for tlie admission of the sun's rays;" judici- 
ously adding, " the grapes will be perhaps as much benefited by this practice as the figs." 
{Hort. Trans, iii. 410.) 

3146. The soil for fig borders, or plants in pots, is in all respects the same as that for 
die cherry. 

3147. Choice of sorts. Abercrombie recommends the 

White Genoa | Chestnut | Black Ischia | Brown Ischia | Black Genoa 1 Malta. 

8148. To which Nicol adds the brown Italian, and black and purple Italian. 

3149. Choice of plants. Such as are two or three years trained, either as wall or dwarf 
standards, are to be preferred. 

3150. The situation of thej^lajits in the house is generally against a back wall trellis. 

3151. Pruning. Figs are to have a spring and summer pruning ; both of which, 
Nicol observes, may be comprised in one, by rubbing or pinching oft' the infant shoots, 
thought necessary to be displaced, in order to give the tree air, and strengthen such as 
remain. The summer pruning, or rather thinning, consists chiefly in keeping them 
moderately thin of leaves, so as not to overshadow the fruit. Sabine's trees are pruned 
in the autumn, after their wood is well hardened ; but as " the object is to get the trees 
to the largest possible size, in which state they will produce more of the short fruit-bearing 
shoots, they are cut but little, except it be occasionally necessary to thin them, by taking 
out a strong limb. " [Hort. Trans, iii. 410.) Fig-trees, intended to bear fruit abund- 
antly, should never be allowed to produce suckers, or any shoots from the main stem, 
within eighteen inches of the ground ; fan-training is in general the best method, and the 
points of the young shoots may be turned downwards, where it can be done without pro- 
ducing fracture, or inducing them to throw out shoots by the strain requisite for this 
purpose. 

3152. Stirring the soil, &c. After the gathering of the fruit, the borders are to be 
forked up and manured, if necessary, as in the cherry-house, and in summer weeded and 
refreshed. 

8153. The time of beginning to force is generally the same as that for the cherry or 
peach house : December, January, or February. Sabine, in the case above referred 
to, where the trees are planted against the back wall, says, " the time of beginning to 
force is in the middle of April ; the first crop of figs ripens in June,- and the second crop 
in August." {Hort. Trans, iii. 410.) 

3154. Temperature. " From the leafing time," Abercrombie observes, " till the 
ripening of the fruit, the fig requires a temperature between that scale which is proper 
for the peach, and that for the cherry." M'Phail says, " They require a greater degree 
of heat than the cherry." When bringing forward their fruit, they will bear a good 
strong heat, if care be taken to keep a free circulation of air moving out of and into the 
house. {G. Rem. 147.) 

3155. Water. Fig-trees in a house, and especially those in pots, require abundance of 
water in the stages suitable for watering fruit-ti-ees. {Abercrombie.) M'Phail says, 
*' The border in which fig-trees grow, should be kept sufficiently watered, till May, when 
watering over the leaves may be commenced." 

3156. Air. When the figs are planted under glass. Miller observes, " The heat 
should not be too great, nor the glasses or other covering kept too close, but at all times, 
when the weather is favorable, a good share of free air should be admitted. In this 
respect the fig does not greatly differ from the vine, though it will thrive with less air 
than any other fruit-tree." {Diet, in loco.) In summer, as the fruit advances, water 
even in that part of the border which is without the house. Refrain from watering over 
the leaves and fruit, when the latter begin to ripen. {G. Rein. 192.) 

3157. Insects. Very much pains, Nicol observes, should be taken to suppress the red 
spider on the foliage of figs ; whether by the engine, syringe, or by frequently brushing with 
a painter's sash-tool, the under sides of the leaves, " in order to destroy his webs, which 
are there thickly woven." Few other insects annoy the fig, except sometimes the coccus 

O o 4 



568 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 



or scaly insect ; which is destroyed by washing with soap-suds and sulphur : or the 
Hquor recommended for destroying that insect on pines. (ICal. 319.) 

3158. Gathering the fruit. Figs begun to be forced in January, Nicol states, wiU be 
ripe about the end of June and July. " If fig-trees in a forcing-house," Miller ob- 
serves, " are properly managed, the first crop of fruit will be greater than upon those 
which are exposed to the open air, and will ripen six weeks or two months earlier, and a 
plentiful second crop may also be obtained, which will ripen early in September." To 
preserve the bloom, gather with the peach-gatherer. They may be preserved a short 
time on the trees, by covering with mats from the sun, and admitting abundance of air 
among the branches. This alludes to what is called the second crop, or that produced 
from the wood of the current year. Sometimes a few of the first crop ripen, but in 
general it is not to be relied on. Alton, Sir Joseph Banks informs us {Hort. Trans, i. 
253.), " has for several years practised the forcing of figs in the royal gardens of Kew, 
with great success, and his chief dependence is on the second crop." 

3159. Exposure of the wood. After the fruit is gathered, the glasses may be removed, 
till winter sets in, when they must either be put on, or the trees covered with mats or 
straw, to protect them from the frost. 

3160. Forcing the fig in pots. M'Phail says, figs may be ripened at an early season, 
by planting them in pots, and setting them into a hot-house or forcing-house. " The 
plants should be low and bushy, so that they may stand on the curb of the tan-bed, or 
they may be plunged in a gentle tan-heat, or in a bed of leaves of trees. The best way 
to propagate plants for this purpose is to take layers or slips which have good roots : plant 
them in pots in good earth, one plant in each pot, and plunge them in a bed of tan or of 
leaves of trees, in which is a very gentle heat : a brick bed will answer the purpose very 
well ; or they will do in the forcing-house, if there be room for them. Let them be put 
into the house in the latter end of February or beginning of March, and keep them suffi- 
ciently watered. Wlien they are two years old, they will be able to bear fruit ; the pots, 
in that time having become full of roots. In the month of November or December, turn 
tlie plants out of the pots, and with a sharp knife pare ofi' the outside of the ball, by which 
the plant will be divested of its roots matted against the inside of the pot : then place 
them into larger pots, filling up the vacancy round the balls with strong loamy earth. 
During the winter, let them be kept in the green-house, or in a glazed pit of a like tem- 
perature, till the month of February ; then set them into the forcing-house, where it is 
intended they shall ripen their fruit. In this manner let them be treated every year, 
which will be a means of preventing the fruit from falling off before it come to matu- 
rity." (G. Rem.) Nicol says, fig-trees kept in pots or tubs, may be treated very much 
as directed for cherries. Two dozen, or thirty plants, would be a good stock for that 
purpose. The first division might be placed in a cherry or peach-house about the middle 
or latter end of January. {Malendnr, 319.) 

3161. Culture of the fig-tree in the stove. The fig formed one of the different species 
"of trees which Knight subjected to a very high temperature during bright weather, and a 

comparatively low temperature during the night. (Hbri. Trans, iii. 459. 1212.) 

3162. The targe white fig-tree succeeded perfectly, " just ripening its spring figs, (those which usjally 
ripen in the open air in this country), and afterwards its summer figs. The trees then produced new 
leaves and branches; and the fruit, which would have appeared in the next spring, ripened in high per- 
fection in September. Subsequently also, a few of those, which, in the ordinary course of the growth of 
the tree, would have appeared as the summer crop of next year, have ripened, and these, though inferior 
to those of the preceding crops, have not been without merit." At the time this communication was 
made, this fourth crop was only beginning to ripen, and was thought of inferior quality : but Knight 
informs us, in a subsequent communication (read July 18. 1820), that " the subsequent portion of it 
proved most excellent ; and some figs which were gathered upon Christmas-day, were thought by myself, 
and a friend who was with me, much the best we had ever tasted. The same plants have since ripened 
four more crops, being eight within twelve months ; and upon a ringed branch of one year old, and about 
an inch in diameter, a ninth crop, consisting of sixty figs, will ripen within the next month. I possess only 
two plants, each growing in a pot, which contains something less than fourteen square inches of mould, 
and occupying together a space equal to about sixty-four square feet of the back wall of my pine-stove : 
from which space the number of figs that have been gathered within twelve months has been little, if any, 
less than 300 : and I see every prospect of a succession of crops till winter. I therefore send the following 
account of the mode of culture, which has been employed, in the hope that it may prove useful to those 
who are sufficiently admirers of the fig, to think it deserving a place in the forcing-house. My trees 
grow, as I have stated in the communication to which I have above alluded, in exceedingly rich mould, 
and are most abundantly supplied with water, which holds much manure in solution. They consequently 
shoot with great vigor, notwithstanding the small space to which their roots are confined; and they re- 
quire some attention to restrain them within the limits assigned to them ; but I have found the following 
mode of treatment perfectly efficient and successful. Whenever a branch appears to be extending with 
too much luxuriance, its point, at the tenth or twelfth leaf, is pressed between the finger and thumb* 
without letting the nails come in contact with the bark, till the soft succulent substance is felt to yield to 
the pressure. Such branch, in consequence, ceases subsequently to elongate ; and the sap is repulsed to be 
expended where it is more wanted. A fruit ripens at the base of each leaf, and during the period in 
which the fruit is ripening, one or more of the lateral buds shoots, and is subsequently subjected to the 
same treatment, with the same result. When I have suffered such shoots to extend freely to their natural 
length, I have found that a small part of them only became productive, either in the same, or the ensuing 
season, though I have seen that their buds obviously contained blossoms. I made several experiments 
to obtain fruit in the follov;ing spring from other parts of such branches, which were not successful : 
but I ultimately found that bending these branches, as far as could be done without danger of breaking 
them, rendered them extremely fruitful ; and in the present spring, thirteen figs ripened perfectly upon a 



Book L 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



569 



branch of this kind, within the space of ten Inches. In training, the ends of all the shoots have been 
made, as far as practicable, to point downwards." {Hort. Trans, iv. 202.) 

3163. For various opinions and practices in pruning and training the fig in the open 
air, which may also deserve attention in the forcing department, see the Horticultural 
Catalogue. 

Sect. VI. Of the Culture and Forcing of the Cucumber. 

3164. To produce cucumbers at an earli/ season, is an object of emulation with every 
gardener ; and there is scarcely any person, not even the humblest tradesman, as M'Phail 
observes, who has not his cucumber-bed in his garden. We shall follow our usual plan, 
and lay before the reader a systematic view of the practices of the most approved gar- 
deners in the culture of this plant. Cucumbers are forced in hot-beds, pits, and hot- 
houses ; and the heat of fire, and steam, and dung, have been applied to their culture ; 
but dung, as the author last quoted observes, is the only thing yet found out, by the heat 
of which the cucumber may be advantageously cultivated. 

3165. Soil. Cucumbers, like every other plant, will grow in any soil, though not with 
the same degree of vigor, provided they be supplied with a sufficiency of heat, light, 
water, and air. 

3166. Abeixrombie, for early forcings recommends a mould or compost of the following materials : — 
" One third of rich top-spit earth, from an upland pasture, one half of vegetable mould, and one sixth 
of well decomposed horse-dung, with a small quantity of sand." 

3167. M'Phail used vegetable mould, made from a mixture (accidental) of the leaves of " elm, lime, 
beech, sycamore, horse and sweet chestnut, spi-uce and Scotch fir, walnut, laurel, oak, evergreen oak, 
ash, &c." and among them withered grass, and weeds of various sorts. " This vegetable mould," he 
says, " without a mixture of any thing besides, is what 1 used for growing cucumbers in, and, by ex- 
perience, I found it preferable to any other moulds, earths, or composts whatever, either in my new 
method of a brick bod, or in the old method of a bed made of hot dung." 

3168. Nicol says, soil thus composed will produce cucumbers in great abundance : " Three fourths light, 
rich, black earth from a pasture, an eighth part vegetable mould of decayed tree leaves, and an eighth 
part rotten cow-dung." {Kal. p. 393.) 

3169. Alton gives the following as the compost used in the Kew-garden : " Of light loam, a few 
months from the common, one third part ; the best rotten dung, one third part ; leaf-mould and heath- 
earth, of equal parts, making together one third part : the whole well mixed for use." {Hort. Trans. 
vol.ii. p. 282.) 

3170. Mills {Ho7-i. Trans, vol. iii. p. 148.) states, that the soil he uses " is half bog or black mould, 
got from a dry heathy common, and half leaf-mould ; after lying twelve months in a heap, the compost 
is fit for use." 

3171. Time of beginning to force. Abercrombie says, " Managers who have to pro- 
vide against demands for early cucumbers, must raise the seedlings from twelve to ten 
weeks before the fruit will be required, according to the length of the days in the interval. 
In proportion as the entire course embraces a greater part of midwinter, the liability of 
failure from obstacles in the weather will be greater. The last fortnight in January, or 
first week of February, is a good time for beginning to force the most early crop. In 
the subsequent months, both main and secondary crops may be started as required ; and 
will come forward more freely. To have a constant succession, seedlings should be 
originated twice a-month. As the course of forcing more coincides with the natural 
growing season, the length of it will be reduced to eight, seven, or six weeks." 

3172. M'Phail says, " Those who are desirous of having cucumbers early, had best sow the seeds about 
the 20th of October ; they may be sown at any time of the year, but the spring and autumn are the best 
seasons. Cucumber-i)lants may be made to bear fruit plentifully from about the middle of March till the 
middle of September ; but from the middle of September till the middle of March their produce will be 
but scanty. Cucumber-plants raised from seed in October, will begin to produce fruit in February or 
March, and will continue to bear till the following month of October, provided they be kept in frames, 
and get plenty of heat and water." 

3173. Nicol recommends the middle of January. He says, " Some begin sooner, but it is striving hard 
against the stream to little purpose. If the dung be prepared, and the bed be got ready, so as to sow about 
the 1st of February, the success will often be greater than by sowing a month earlier ; the growth of the 
plants being frequently checked by bad weather, and sometimes they are entirely lost." 

3174. Aiton, in the paper above quoted, sowed on the 12th and 20th of August, with a view to cultivate 
in stoves ; a regular supply of this vegetable being annually required for the royal tables. 

3175. Mills sows on the 14th of October. 

3176. Sorts. Abercrombie recommends " the short prickly for very early fruit ; and 
the long prickly kinds for the chief early and main summer crops." M'Phail prefers 
" the green cucumber with black prickles, as best for forcing. When fit for table, it runs 
from six to nine inches long, and, when ripe, runs to about eighteen or twenty inches 
long." Nicol says, " Every gardener has his favorite sort of cucumber, and it is no 
easy matter to advise. He names, as early sorts generally known, the early short 
prickly as the earliest ; the early smooth green, a long fruit ; the long green prickly, 
and the white prickly, a white fruit." Aiton and Mills do not mention the varieties 
they used. 

3177. Choice of seed. " It is advisable," Abercrombie observes, " to Iiave that from 
two at least to four years old, in preference to newer seed, which is m^ re apt to run 
luxuriantly in vine, and the plants from it do not show fruit so soon, nor so abundantly 
as those from seed of a greater age. But when seed has been kept more than four 
years, it is sometimes found to be too much weakened." 



570 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



PAiiT III. 



3178. Forming the seed-bed. " A one-light frame," Abercrombie says, "will be large 
enough for ordinary purposes. Choose a dry sheltered part of the melon -ground, and 
form a bed for a one-light frame. When high winds are suffered to blow against a 
cucumber-bed, they have a very povt^erful efl^ect on it ; for, in that case, the heat in a 
short time will not only be greatly abated, but also forced and driven into the corners 
of the frames, and, consequently, some parts thereof are rendered too cold, whilst other 
parts are m.ade too warm ; and, of cx)urse, the plants are all equally endangered, retai'ded 
in their growth, and perhaps some, if not all of them, totally destroyed. Therefore, 
when a cucumber-bed is about to be built, the first object of consideration should be, to 
have it, as well as possible, sheltered from the high winds and boisterous stormy weather. 
Having put on the frame, and waited till the bed is fit for moulding, lay in five or six 
inches depth of the proper earth or compost." 

3179. IsV-Phail makes up a bed of good dung, four feet high, or a one-light box. 

3180. Kicol builds a bed of dung, carefully fermented, to the height of five feet at back, and four at 
front, keeping it a foot larger all round than a one-light frame, or about five or six feet by three or 
three and a half He then covers with turf ; and on that lays fine sand, as free from earth as possible, 
to the depth of about six inches ; laying it in a sloping manner, corresponding with the glass, and to 
within six inches of it ; over which he lays an inch or two of dry light earth. 

3181. Alton and Mills also prepare a bed for a one-light box ; the latter forms it on a stratum of wood 
one foot high for drainage, and eight inches higl:er in the middle than at the sides, " as tlie sides are hable, 
from the weight of the frame, to settle faster tl^an the middle," which causes the hills of earth to crack ; 
by which, in fruiting-beds more especially, the roots of the plants are greatly injured. 

3182. Sowing. Abercrombie sows some seeds in the layer of the earth, which he 
spreads over the bed, putting them in half an inch deep. He also sows some seeds in 
two, three, or more small pots of the same kind of earth, which may be plunged a Httle 
into that of the bed. 

3183. M'PhaU sows in a pot filled with rich earth, covers about two inches thick, and sets the pots on the 
surface of the naked dung on the bed. 

3184. JN7coZ sows immediately after the bed is made, without waiting till the heat arise, which, he says, 
is losing time, and the opportunity of bringing on vegetation by degrees as the heat rises. He sows in a 
broad pan four inches deep, or in small pots four or five inches diameter, and as much in depth. These 
he fills with " fine light earth," or vegetable mould, and covers the seeds two inches. He plunges these 
to the brim in the back part of the bed (which it will be recollected contains a stratum of earth six inches 
thick over one of sand, and another of turf), puts on the light, and lets the frame be matted at night in 
the ordinary way. 

3185. Iiaisi7ig plants from cuttings. M'Phail says, "Instead of raising cucumber- 
plants from seed, they may be raised from cuttings, and thus kept on from year to year in 
the following manner : " the method of striking tliem is this ; take a shoot which is just 
ready for stopping, cut it off* just below the joint behind the joint before which the shoot 
should have been stopped, then cut smooth the lower end of the shoot or cutting, and 
stick it into fine leaf or other rich mould about an inch deep, and give it plenty of heat, 
and shade it from the rays of tlie sun till it be fairly struck. By this method, as well as 
by that of laying, cucumber-plants may readily be propagated." 

3186. jVi?«?-«5, gardener at Shobden Court, near Leominster, propagates his cucumber-plants for a win- 
ter crop in this way, and " finds, that the plants raised from cuttings are less succulent, and therefore do not 
so readily damp off, or suffer from the low temperature to which they are liable to be exposed in severe 
weather : that they come into bearing immediately as they have formed roots of sufficient strength to 
support their fruit, and do not run so much to barren vine as seedlings ate apt to do." He takes the 
cuttings from the tops of the bearng shoots, and plants them in pots nine inches deep; half filled with 
mould. He then waters them, covers the tops of the pots with flat pieces of glass, and plunges them into 
a gentle bottom heat. " The sides of the pot act as a sufficient shade for the cuttings during the time 
they are striking, and the flat glass, in this and in similar operations, answers all the purposes of bell-glasses. 
The cuttings form roots, and are ready to pot off in less than a fortnight." {Hort. Trans, iv. 411.) 

3187. Temperature of the seed-bed. Abercrombie says, " The minimum heat for the 
cucumber is 58 degrees at the coldest time of night ; in the day-time 65 degrees is suflS- 
cient for the maximum ; because air admitted when the sun has great influence, will do 
more good than a higher heat. " 

3188. M'Phail says, " If it were possible to keep the heat in the frames always to 80 degrees, with the con- 
currence of proper air and moisture, I am of opinion that that would be a sufficient heat for the proiductiou 
of the cucumber." 

3189. Nicol keeps the air in the bed to about 65 degrees in the night, allowing a few degrees of a rise in 
sunshine. 

3190. Aiton rears and fruits his plants in a stove, and therefore we shall take no farther notice of his prac- 
tice at present. 

3191. Mills says, " The heat I wish to have in the seed-frame is from 65 to 75 degrees." 

3192. Treatment till removed to the fruiting-bed. " After sowing, Abercrombie con- 
tinues the glasses on the frame ; giving occasional vent above foi-the steam to evaporate, 
that the bed may keep a moderate heat, and not become too violent. The plants will 
be up in a few days, when it will be proper to admit air daily, but more guardedly, at 
the upper ends of the lights, which may be raised from half an inch to an inch or two, 
according to the temperature of the weather, tliat the plants may not draw up weak, or 
be injured I y the steam. In frosty weather, hang part of the mat over the aperture. 
When the plants are a little advanced, with the seed-leaves about half an inch broad, 
take them up, and prick some in small pots of light earth, previously warmed by the 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



lieat of the bed. Put three plants in each pot, and insert them a little slopingly, quite 
to the seed-leaves. Plunge the pots into the earth ; and you may prick some plants also 
into the earth of the bed. Give a very little water just to the roots : tlie water should be 
previously warmed to the temperature of the bed. Draw on the glasses ; but admit air 
daily, to promote the growtli of the plants, as well as to give vent to the steam rising in 
the bed, by tilting the lights behind, from half an inch to an inch or two high, in propor- 
tion to the heat of the bed and temperature of the weather. Cover the glasses every 
niglit with garden-mats, and remove them timely in the morning. Give twice a week, 
once in two days, or daily, according to the season, a very light watering. Keep up a 
moderate lively heat in the bed, by requisite linings of hot dung to the sides." 

3193. M'Phail, having sown and placed the pots on the naked bed, says, the plants will come up in a few 
days ; and when they have fully expanded their two seed-leaves, transplant them into small pots, three 
plants in each pot ; set them on the surface of the dung in the bed, and let a little air be left at the light 
day and night, to let the steam pass off freely. " V/hen the seedling plants have one or two joints, stop 
them, after wliich they generally put forth two shoots, each of which let run till they have made one or 
two clear joints, and then stop them ; and afterwards continue throughout the season to stop the plants at 
every joint." 

319-t. i^ico^ directs to guard the seeds from mice, which generally swarm about hot-beds, by laying a 
pane of glass over the pot or pan till they have come up; and afterwards, at night, by covering with a pot 
of equal size, till the seed-leaves have expanded, and the husks have dropped : for, until then, the plants 
are liable to be destroyed. The cover, however, should always be removed by sunrise, and replaced in 
the evening. It is at night these vermin generally commit their depredations. No air need be admitted 
till the heat begin to rise, and steam begin to appear; but after that, the light should be tilted a little 
every day, in whatever state the weather may be, until the plants break ground. Air must then be ad- 
mitted with more care; and, if frosty or very chill, the end of a mat should be hung over the opening, 
that the air may sift through it, and net immediately strike the plants. A little aired water may be given 
once a-day, from the time the seeds begin to chip ; and if a very strong heat rise, the pots should be raised 
a little, to prevent the roots from being injured. They should be frequently examined on this account, 
and if the heat be violent, should be set loosely in the sand, or be placed entirely on the surface. The air of 
the bed should be kept to about 65 degrees in the night ; allowing a few degrees of a rise in sunshine. If 
the weather be severe, therefore, the mats must be doubled or tripled ; and if mild, perhaps a single one 
may suffice. But, unless in very bad weather, they should always be removed by sunrise, in order to 
admit all the sun and light possible to the plants, which is very essential to their welfare. 

3195. Pricking out. When the plants are about an inch and a half high, they are then fit to be pricked 
out into nursing-pots. These pots should be about three and a half or four inches diameter at top, and as 
much in depth. The mould to be used should be the same as that the seeds were sown in, and should be 
laid in the frame a few hours previous to potting, in order to bring it to a proper degree of warmth, that 
the tender fibrils be not chilled by it. Let the pots be filled about one half with the earth; turn the 
plants" carefully out of the seed-pot; place three in each against the side of the pot, and so as that their 
leaves may be just above its margin ; then cover the roots with the mould, rubbing it fine between the 
fingers, and filling the pots nearly to the brim. Work over the sand in the frame to its full depth ; 

^ plunge the pots to within an inch of their rims ; and cover the whole surface with a little dry earth as at 
first, making it level with the tops of the pots. Then give a little aired water, in order to settle the earth 
to the roots of the plants. 

3196. Second sowing. As these tender seedlings, at this early period, are liable to many accidents, 
it will be proper to sow a little more seeds of the same kinds at this time, in order to provide a supply of 
plants. If they should not be wanted, the trouble is not much ; and they may be given to a neighbor, or 
be thrown away. 

3197. Routine culture. Let air be admitted to them as freely as the state of the weather will allow ; and 
supply them moderately with water once in two or three days. Examine the pots frequently, if the heat 
be violent, lest the roots be scorched ; setting them loosely, or pulling them up a little in that case ; or, if 
thought necessary, placing them entirely on the surface. If much steam abound in the bed at this time, 
it may be proper to leave the light tilted half an inch in the night; observing to hang the lap of a single 
mat two or three inches over the tilt. But if the bed was carefully turfed over, as directed at making up, 
this will seldom be necessary ; never but in thick hazy weather. Mat up carefully at night; but make a 
point of admitting all the sun and light possible to the plants ; therefore uncover always by sunrise, and 
frequently wash or wipe die glasses clean, outside and inside, as they are often clogged by a mixture of 
steam and dust. Also, occasionally stir the surface of the sand or earth in the frame with the point of a 
stick, in order to extirpate vapor that hovers on the surface, and so purify the internal air of tne bed. If 
the heat begin to decrease, and particularly if the weather be severe, it may be necessary to line one or 
more sides of the bed, that the plants may receive no check in their growth. If it be a one-light box, 
boih back and front may be lined at the same time ; and, if necessary, in ten or twelve days, the two sides ; 
and if much steam arise from the linings after they come into heat, be careful, in matting at night, to 
tuck up the edges of the mat, lest it be thrown into the bed. 

3198. Mills, as soon as the seed-leaves of the plants are fully expanded, transplants them singly into pots 
of the 48th size, gives a little water and air night and day. His temperature for seedlings, as already stated, 
is from 65 to 75 degrees. With this heat, and water, as the earth in the pots becomes dry, and a little air 
night and day, so as to keep the internal air in the frame sweet, and fluctuating between the degrees 
of heat above mentioned, the plants will be fit for finally transplanting out in one month, that is, by 
the 14th of November, into the fruiting-frames. {Hort. Trans, vol. iii.) 

3199. Forming the fruiting-bed. Abercrombie directs, " Wlien the plants are ad- 
vanced in some tolerable stocky growth, that is, when the first rough leaves are two 
or three inches broad, or when the plants have been raised about five weeks, transplant 
them to a larger hot-bed, with a two-light or three-light frame, sometimes called the 
ridging-out bed." Form the bed on general principles, of superficial extent according 
to the frame it is to support, leaving from four to six inches all round, and fixing the 
height according to the season. Thus, in January, Abercrombie directs the bed to be 
" three feet nine inches high in front ; four feet six inches at the back ; and six inches 
larger than the frame all round : in February, three feet three inches high at the front ; 
four feet at the back ; and four inches to spare round tlie frame : in March, three feet 
high in front ; three feet six inches at back ; and four inches beyond the frame every 
way. Put on the frame and glasses presently after the body of dung is built up, to 
defend it from the weather. At the same time raise the glasses a little at the upper 



572 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



end, in order both to draw up the heat sooner, and to give vent to the rising steam, until 
the bed is reduced to a regular temperature. In connection with the thermometer, the 
cultivator may be assisted to form a judgment of this, by trying-sticks, that is, two or 
more sharp-pointed smooth sticks, thrust down in different parts of the bed ; which at 
intervals may be drawn up, and felt by a quick grasp of the hand. The smell of the 
vapor is also a criterion : it should not be strong and fetid, but mild and sweet. While 
taking care that the heat is not so intense as to burn the mould when applied as below, 
let it not be suffered to evaporate unnecessarily by delay. If the temperature appear 
not sufficiently high, take off the frame, and add another course of dung." 

3200. M'Phail, when he fruits the cucumber on dung-beds, begins to make preparations for the fruiting, 
bed, about three weeks before the plants are ready to be planted out for good. The dung collected, after 
being well worked, is " made up into a bed of about four or five feet high, and the frames and 
lights set upon it. It is afterwards suffered to stand for a few days to settle, and until its violent heat be 
somewhat abated ; and when it is thought to be in a fit state for the plants to grow in, its surface is made 
level, and a hill of mould laid in just under the middle of each light, and when the mould gets warm, the 
plants are ridged out in it. After this, if the bed has become perfectly sweet, and there be heat enough 
in it, and the weather prove fine, the plants will grow finely." 

3201. Nicol builds his fruiting-bed about four feet and a half high at back, and three feet and a half in 
front, keeping it fully a foot loiiger than the frame all round. He turfs it, and lays on sand as in forming 
the seed-bed, if the dung has not been well fermented. " But otherwise, placing a thick round turf, a j'ard 
over, in the middle of each light, so as that its centre may be exactly under the plants, will generally be 
found sufficiently safe." The frames are now put on ; and the beds matted up at night to make the heat 
rise the sooner. 

3202. Mills says, " Well preparing the dung, is of the greatest importance in forcing the cucumber, 
and if not done before it is made into a bed, it cannot be done after, as it requires turning and watering 
to cause it to ferment freely and sweetly ; fresh dung from the stable will require at least six weeks' pre- 
paration before it will be fit to receive the plants. A month before it is made into a bed, it should be laid 
into a heap, turned three times, and well shaken to pieces with a fork, and the outsides of the heap 
turned into the middle, and the middle to the outsides, that the whole may have a regular fermentation ; 
and if any appear dry, it should be made wet, keeping it always between the two extremes of wet and 
dry. A dry spot of ground should be chosen to prepare the dung on, that the water may drain away 
from the bottom of the heap. The dung having been a month in licap, I make the bed as follows : I form 
a stratum one foot high, of wood of any kind, but if large the better (old roots of trees, or any other of 
little value will do) ; this is to drain the water from the bottom of the bed ; for, after a month's prepar- 
ation, with every care, it will frequently heat itself dry, and require water in large quantities, which, if 
not allowed to pass off freely, will cause an unwholesome steam to rise, in which the cucumber-plant will 
not grow freely : on this bottom of wood I make the bed, four feet high, with dung, gently beating it down 
with a fork : this is done about the 1st of November, and by the month of February the four feet of dung 
will not be more than two feet thick, which, with the foot of wood at the bottom, will make the bed three 
feet high ; this I consider a good height, for if lower, it cannot be so well heated by linings, which is the 
only method of warming it in the months of February and March, as by that time the first heat of the 
bed will have quite declined. Having made the bed, I put on the frames and lights, which I shut close 
till the heat rises. I then give air night and day, sufficient to allow the steam to pass off, and once in two 
days I fork the surface over, about nine inches deep, to sweeten it, and if, in the operation, I find any 
part dry, I carefully wet it. The bed being quite sweet, I prepare it for the mould, by making the middle 
about eight inches lower than the sides, as the sides are liable, from the weight of the frames, to settle 
faster than the middle, which often causes the hills of earth to crack, by which the roots of the plants are 
greatly injured." {Horf. Tra/is. vol. iii. p. 147.) 

3203. Moulding. " As soon," Abercrombie observes, " as you deem the bed to have 
a lively, safe, w^ell tempered heat, which may be in a week or ten days after building, 
proceed to mould it. Earth the middle of each light, laying the mould so as to form a 
little hill, from six to ten inches in height, according as seed is to be sown, or plants 
from the seed-bed inserted. Then earth over the intervals between the hills and the 
sides of the frame only, from two to four inches, as a temporary measure, until the heat 
is ascertained to be within safe limit. After the whole bed has been some time covered, 
examine the mould : if no traces of a burning effect appear, discoverable by the mould 
turning of a whitish color and caking, it will be fit to receive the plants. But if the 
earth appears burnt, such part should be replaced by fresh, and vacuities made to give 
vent to the steam, by drawing away part of the hills from the centre. Wlien the bed is 
in fit order, level the mould to six inches deep, to receive seeds ; but to receive plants 
in pots, the hills of earth should be kept ten inches deep or more. If there be any 
motive for haste while an excess of heat is to be suspected, the danger from burning 
may be obviated by leaving vacancies in the top mould ; by placing patches of fresh cow- 
dung or decayed bark to receive the pots of seeds or plants ; and by boring holes in the 
bed with a round pole sharpened at the end, which holes should be filled up with hay 
or dung when the heat is sufficiently reduced. Some persons place a layer of turf with 
the sward downwards between the dung and the mould : but this, if ever expedient, is 
only in late forcing ; for in winter the full effect of a sweet well tempered heat is wanted, 
much of which, by being confined at top, may be forced out at the sides." 

3204. M'Pkail, in moulding common hot-beds, also raises hills in the centre of each light in the usual 
way. {Gard. Eemem. p. 51.) 

3205. Wicol gathers up from the surface of the beds a sufficient quantitv of earth to raise hiUs whereon 
to plant ; one exactly in the middle of each light, about a foot broad at top, and to within six inches of 
the glass. If the frames be of a proper depth, they should be twelve or fifteen inches high above the turf. 
(^Kal. 365.) 

3206. Mills puts under the centre of each light one solid foot of earth, the top of whifh is then within 
nine inches of the glass, and the top of the plants, when planted in it, will be within three inches of the 
glass. 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



573 



3207. Planting out. Abercrombie, ^vhcn the temperature is ascertained to be right, 
brings tlie plants in their pots ; turns over the hills of mould, forming them again pro- 
perly, and then proceeds to planting. " Turn those in pots clean out, one pot at a time, 
with the ball of earth whole about tlie roots ; and thus insert one patch of three plants 
which have grown together, with the ball of earth entire, into the middle of each Iiill, 
earthing them neatly round the stems. Also any not in pots, having been pricked into 
the earth of the bed, if required for planting, may be taken up with a small ball of earth, 
and planted similarly. With water warmed to the air of the bed, give a very light water- 
ing about the roots, and shut down the glasses for the present, or till next morning. 
Shade the plants a little from the mid-day sun a few days, till they have taken root in 
the hills, and cover the glasses every evening with large mats, which should be taken off 
in the morning." 

3208. Nicol, before planting, if the beds have settled anywise unequally, rectifies and sets level tlie 
frames, by placing boards, slates, or bricks, under the low corners, so as to make them correct. He 
then makes up the outsides of tlie bed with dung, a few inches higher than the bottoms of tlie frame; 
over which he lays some dry litter, or fern fronds, and planks at top to walk on. He then takes tlie pots 
of plants, each of which is supposed to have got two or tliree rough leaves, and making a hole in 
each full large enough to receive the balls, turns them out of the pots as entire as possible, placing tliem 
level with the surface of the hill, fitting the earth round their sides, and settling all with a little water. 
In the case of planting older plants than the above, at a farther advanced period of the season, or such 
as have quite filled their pots with roots, the balls may be reduced a little, and the fibres should be singled 
out, if anywise matted. But the above plants are supposed to have barely filled the pots with roots, and 
then the balls should be kept entire, that they may not receive a check in the transplanting. 

3209. Temperature f 07' fruiting plants. Abercrombie's minimum is fifty-five degrees, 
and maximum in the day-time sixty-five degrees, the same as for the seed-bed. 

3210. M'P/iail says, " It appears, that during the winter and spring months, the medium heat of the 
air in the frames should be seventy-five degrees, and the medium heat of the mould eighty degrees. But 
when the sun shines, the heat of the air in the frames is often raised to a much higher degree ; 
so that reckoning this heat, tlie medium for that of the air of the frames may be eighty degrees." 
(Gard. Reweyn. p. 59.) 

3211. NicoVs medium heat for cucumbers is sixty degrees ; in sunshine he admits as much air as will 
keep down the thermometer to sixty-five. {Kalend. p. 366.) 

3212. Mills, in the fruiting-frames, wishes " to have at all times from seventy to eighty degrees of heat, 
which I regularly keep up by applying linings of hot dung, prepared one month previously, in the same 
manner as that for the beds. For the first month I cover the glass with a single mat only ; and as the 
nights become cold, I increase the covering, using hay, which I put on the glass, and cover that with a 
single mat. I regulate the heat at night by the wai-mth of the glass under the hay, for when the glass is 
warm, which should be in two hours after covering up, a little air is required. When the glass and hay 
covering are warm, which is easily known by putting the hand under the hay on the glass light, the 
internal heat of the bed will be about seventy-eight degrees, in which degree of heat, the cucumbers 
shown to the society have grown in length, in sixteen hours, one inch and a quarter. I give a little water 
round the insides of the frame as often as I find them dry, which causes a fine steam to rise, and I think 
it better than watering the mould, for if this latter practice is often repeated in winter, when the sun's 
power is insufficient to absorb the moisture, and the glasses can be but little open, to allow the damp to 
pass off, the earth, in a few weeks, will lose its vigor, and the roots of the plants will perish. Great care 
should also be taken, at this season, not to injure the roots by too much heat, which is not less detrimental 
than too much moisture ; they can only be secured by keeping up a regular warmth, just sufficient to 
expel the damp which arises in the night from the fermenting dung." 

3213. Linings. The requisite degree of heat Abercrombie is careful to support in 
the bed, when declining, " by timely linings of hot fresh dung, which may be applied to 
the sides, fifteen or eighteen inches in width, and as liigh as the dung of the bed. 
Generally line the back part first, and the other in a week, or from ten days to a fort- 
night after, as may seem necessary by the degree of heat in the bed. Sometimes, if the 
heat is fallen abruptly below the minimum degree, it may be proper to line both sides 
moderately, at once, to recover the temperature sooner and with better effect : but be 
particularly careful never to over-line, which would cause a too violently renewed heat 
and steam in the bed. The dung for linings must be fermented, as in first building a 
bed." 

3214. Nicol, when the heat decreases, cuts avv'ay the old dung perpendicularly by the frame, and adds 
new linings (generally beginning witli the back first), two feet broad, to the height of six inches above the 
bottom of the frame. As it will sink considerably in heating, he adds to it in a few days. 

3215. Mills applies linings of hot dung prepared a month previously. 

3216. Covering. This must be nightly performed till June ; proportioning the warmth 
of the cover to the heat of the air in the bed, and that of the external air. Mats are laid 
next the glass ; on these a layer of hay, and over this mats, made fast by boards, but 
not hanging over the linings, is the usual mode, early in the season. M'Phail says, 
" My method of covering up was as follows : in the first place, I laid clean single mats 
on the lights, in length and breadth, just or nearly to cover the sashes, taking care not 
to suffer any part of the mats to hang over the sashes on or above the linings, for that 
would be the means of drawing the steam into the frames in the night-time. On these 
mats was spread equally a covering of soft hay, and on the hay was laid another 
covering of single mats, upon which were laid two, and sometimes three or four, rows 
of boards, to prevent the covering from being blown off by the winds. The mats laid on 
next to the glass are merely to keep the seeds and dust which may happen to be in the 
hay from getting into the frames among the plants. If the bed be high in covering up, 



571 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



steps or short ladders must be used by those whose office it is to cover and uncover; 
and great care must be taken not to break or injure the glass." 

.3217. Air. Abercrombie directs to "admit air every day, when the weather is mode- 
rate, without much wind ; and always more freely in sunny days, than when cloudy and 
cold, or frosty. Open the lights behind, only a little at first, sooner or later in the day, 
according to the temperature of the season ; increasing the opening, from about half an 
inch, to one, two, or three inches, or veiy little more; (decrease the opening occasionally, 
if the weather, in the early part of the season, changes very cold ;) and shut closer in 
the same gradual order towards afternoon ; generally shutting close in the evening, 
unless, in the early state of the bed, a considerable heat and steam continue. In this 
case, you may occasionally leave open about half an inch, hanging the end of a mat 
before each opening." 

3218. M'Phail says, " A cucumber-plant delights to grow in a strong heat, and in sweet wholesome air ; 
but if the air in which it grows be contaminated, unhealthy, or impure, the plant will not continue long 
in a healthy flourishing condition. Whatever is disagreeable to the smell becomes in time hurtful to the 
cucumber-plant ; therefore, whoever would wish to know if the air in a cucumber-frame be of a healthy 
nature for the plants should smell to it." He adds, in giving and taking away the air, do it gradually, 
that is, by little and little at a time, which, without doubt, is the best way ; for sudden changes are always 
attended with unpleasant consequences. A due proportion and continual supply of fresh air is at all 
times necessary, and more or less is required according to the heat of the linings, the temperature of the 
weather, and the thickness of the coverings put on at nights. {Gard. Rem. p. 42.) 

3219. Nicol admits air regularly in as large portions as the state of the weather will allow; being careful 
to let off rank steam, if it abound, by leaving a tilt (wedge), even in the night. 

3230. Mills says, " My usual times of giving fresh air to the frames, and permitting the foul to escape, 
in the winter months ("that is, from the middle of November to the middle of February), is as follows: 
between eight and nine in the morning, I raise the lights, and let the confined air pass off, shutting them 
again ; about ten I give a little air ; at eleven more ; at one I lower the lights a little, and between three 
and fbur I close them entirely. About two hours after the covering of hay has been put on, I give a little 
air for the night. Should the weather be changeable, the lights must be raised or lowered more or less, 
as circumstances may require ; but some air about the times of the day above mentioned is absolutely 
necessary to keep the plants in a free-growing state." 

3221. IVater. Give necessary waterings, with water warmed to the air of the bed, 
mostly in the forenoon of a mild day, in early forcing ; and in a morning or afternoon, 
in the advanced season of hot sunny weather. (^Abercrombie.) 

3222. M'Phail says, " The quantity of water requisite to be given to the plants depends upon the heat of 
the bed, the strength and age of the plants, and also on the temperature of the weather. When the 
weather is cold, wet, or gloomy, and the air moist, they require less water than when the weather is clear, 
and the air more dry. If too much water be given, or if water be given too often, it will hinder the fruit 
from setting and smelling kindly ; and if too little water be given, the plants will grow weak, and the 
fruit hollow. I seldom watered the plants with water warmer than 85 degrees, nor colder than 65 ; 
although, in general, I tried by the thermometer the warmth of the water I used, yet it is not necessary so 
to do. A good way to know if the water be of a proper temperature is to take a mouthful of it, and when it 
feels neither hot nor cold, then it is in a fit state for accelerating the growth of the plants, or for making 
them grow fast. I made it a constant rule never to water the plants but with clean sweet water; and if 
the water be clean and sweet, I am of opinion it makes little or no difference whether it be pump-water, 
spring-water, rain-water, or river-water. However, it is a good quality in water to bear soap, and make a 
lather therewith, which rain and river waters readily do ; but the pump and spring waters are found too 
hard to do it ; yet this may easily be remedied in them, by letting them stand a few days in the open air 
and sun's rays. With regard to the time of the day in which the watering of the plants ought to be per- 
formed, I think it is not material, nor did I ever make any rule with respect to the time, but give them 
water at any hour of the day when I saw they stood in need of it, and when it best suited my coriveniency. 
Those who have hot-houses may get their water warmed there, and those who have no hot-houses may 
get some from the house, or from some other place where water is frequently heated. One gallon of hot 
water will properly warm several gallons of cold water. Late in spring and in the summer months the 
water may be warmed by exposing it to the rays of the sun." 

3223. Nicol airs his water " by some means or other ;" waters once in two or three days after planting, 
and liberally from the rose of the watering-pot as the plants advance. The time chosen is the afternoon, 
about four or five o'clock, in order not to scorch the plants, which, he says, often happens when, after 
morning waterings, the sun's rays suddenly dart on the plants. {Kal. p. 366. 385.) 

322'4. Mearns, already mentioned (3186.), uses water impregnated with sheep's dung, as does Knight. 
Mearns tried this water first " on some cucumber-plants in the pine-stove, which had been planted in 
January, but which, in consequence of duU weather, had become weak, and of a pale green color; he ap- 
plied the liquid to the roots, and in a few daj's a great change in the appearance of the plants was pro- 
duced ; the foliage assumed a hardy green, the shoots acquired an unusual degree of strength, with short 
joints, and although the stove had scarcely any air given to it, yet the fruit swelled off rapidly, and 
attained a large size." These plants continued in bearing till May,' and were then cut back to within six 
inches of the root, v/hen they started again with vigor. " No water was ever given over the leaves, but a 
continual supply of the liquid pigeoh-dung manure to the roots." {Hort. Trans, iv. 412.) 

.S225. Earthiiig. " Observe," says Abercrombie, " in proper time, when the first heat 
of the bed is moderated, to l^egin adding more earth between the hills, as the extending 
roots require to be covered, or the runners to be supported with mould ; raising it by 
degrees equal with the tops of the hills, all in level order, from eight to ten inches 
thick." (Pr. Gard. p. 72.) 

3226. Nicol, by the time the plants have sent out runners, and the roots spread quite over the hills, en- 
larges them; beginning by stirring up the earth in the other parts of the frame to its full depth with a 
hand-fork, or weeding-iron, breaking it fine if anywise caked by the heat. To this, add fresh mould sifted 
or finely broken, and in a dry state, so as to raise the surface nearly to the level of the hills ; laying it in 
a sloping manner from back to front. Previously, he rectifies the position and level of the frames, and 
raises it so that the glass may be eight or nine inclies above the mould in the centre. {Kal. p. 367.) 

3227. Training. To force the cucumber into early fruit, Abercrombie directs to " stop 
the runners as soon as the plants have made two rough leaves, as the bud that produces 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



57.5 



the runner is disclosed at the base of the second rough leaf, it rnay be cut off or picked 
out, or, if the runner has already started, it may be pinched oft' close. This is called 
stopping at the first joint, and is necessary to promote a stronger stocky growth, and an 
emission of fruitful laterals ; and from these, other prolific runners will be successively 
produced. The vines, without the process of stopping, would generally be both weaker, 
and so deficient in fertile runners, that they would sometimes extend two or three 
feet without showing fruit. When plants which have been once stopped, have extended 
the first runners to three joints without showing fruit, they are to he again stopped for 
the purpose of strengthening the plant, and disposing it for bearing. As fertile run- 
ners extend, train them out regularly along the surface, fastening them down neatly with 
pegs." 

3228. M^Phail stops his plants when they have two joints ; and "when the plants shoot forth again after 
the second stopping, they seldom miss to show fruit at every joint, and also a tendril; and between this 
tendril and the showing fruit may clearly be seen the rudiment of another shoot ; and when the leading 
shoot has extended itself fairly past the showing fruit, then with the finger and thumb pinch it and the 
tendril olF just before the showing fruit ; so that in pinching off the tendril and the shoot, the showing 
fruit is not injured. Thus stopping the leading shoot stops the juices of the plant, and is the means of 
enabling the next shoot (the rudiment of which was apparent when the leading shoot was stopped) to push 
vigorously, and the fruit thereby also receives benefit. When the plants are come into bearing, if the 
vines are suffered to make two joints before they are stopped, at the first of these joints, as I before said, 
will be seen showing fruit, a tendril, and the rudiment of a shoot ; but at the second joint there is seldom 
to be seen either showing fruit or the rudiment of a shoot, but only a tendril and the rudiments of male 
blossoms. It is therefore evident, and but reasonable, that the shoot should be stopped at the first of these 
joints ; for were the shoot to be let run past the first joint, and stopped before the second, perhaps no shoot 
would ever spring forth at the said second joint, but only a cluster of male blossoms or leaves, which would 
serve for no good pui-pose, but would rather exhaust the juices of the plant, which ought to be thrown 
into the productive parts of it. If the plants are suffered to bear too many fruit, that will weaken them, 
and in such case some of the shoots will lose their leaders, that is, the rudiment of some of the shoots will 
not break forth, the numbers of fruit having deprived them of their proper share of the vegetative juices. 
The rudiments of some of the shoots may also be injured by accident, which sometimes prevents their 
pushing ; but from whatever cause this happens, it matters not; for by the losing of its leader the shoot 
is rendered unfruitful, and therefore should be cut entirely off. In the course of the spring and summer 
months several shoots break forth here and there from the old ones. When too many break out, cut off 
the weakest of them close to the old shoots, and those which remain with regard to stopping, serve nea»ly 
in the same manner as young plants. If the old shoot from which the new one bursts forth, lie close to 
the mould, it sometimes sends forth roots from the same joint from which the young shoot proceeded, by 
which the young shoot is much invigorated, and the old plant, in some measure, renovated. When this 
young plant is fairly formed on the old shoot, it somewhat resembles a young plant formed and struck root 
on a strawberry runner ; and if the shoot were to be cut off on each side of the newly formed plant, and no 
part of the plants left in the frame but itself, by proper treatment it would soon extend itself all over the 
frame. In winter, when the plants are young, and before they come into bearing, it sometimes happens 
that they send forth too many shoots : in that case cut the weakest of them off, not suffering them to be- 
come crowded and thick of vines, for that would weaken and prevent the plants from bearing so early as 
tliey ought to do. Keep the leaves of the plants always regularly thin. The oldest and worst of them 
cut off first, and cut them off close to the snoot on which they grow. This is necessary and right ; for if 
any part of the stem of the leaf were to be left, it would soon putrify and rot, and perhaps destroy by damp 
the main branch from which it proceeded." 

3229. Nicol says, " Cucumber-plants will put out runners or vines, whether the heart-buds be picked 
out or not, which is a matter of trivial concern, although much insisted on by some, as being necessary 
to their doing so at all. For my own part, I never could discover any difference, and I have repeatedly 
made the comparison in the same bed, which otherwise of course could not be fair. When the vines have 
grown to the length of four or five joints, and fruit appear on them, they may be stopped at one joint above 
the fruit ; but otherwise they may be allowed to run to the length of seven or eight joints, and may then 
be stopped, which will generally cause them to push fertile shoots. These should be regularly spread out, 
and be trained at the distance of eight or ten inches part." 

3230. Upright training. " Cucumber-plants being climbers by means of their ten- 
drils, some branchy sticks being placed to any advancing runners, they will ascend and 
produce fruit, at a distance from the ground, of a clean growth free from spots, and 
well flavored." 

3231. Setting the fruit. " The cucumber," Abercrombie observes, " bears male and 
female blossoms distinctly on the same plant. The latter only produce the fruit, which 
appears first in miniature, close under the base, even before the flower expands. There 
is never any in the males ; but these are placed in the vicinity of the females, and are 
absolutely necessary, by the dispersion of their farina, to impregnate the female blossom ; 
the fruit of which will not otherwise swell to its full size, and the seeds will be abortive. 
The early plants under glass, not having the full current of the natural air, nor the as- 
sistance of bees and other winged insects to convey the farina, the artificial aid of the 
cultivator is necessary to effect the impregnation. At the time of fructification, watch the 
plants daily ; and as soon as a female flower and some male blossoms are fully expanded, 
proceed to set the fruit the same day, or next morning at furthest. Take oflf a male 
blossom ; detaching it with part of the footstalk. Hold this between the finger and 
thumb ; pull away the flower-leaf close to the stamens and anthera or central part, which 
apply close to the stigma or bosom of the female flower, twirling it a little about, to dis- 
charge thereon some particles of the fertilising powder. Proceed thus to set eveiy fruit, 
as the flowers of both sorts open, while of a lively full expansion ; and generally perform 
it in the early part of the day ; using a fresh male, if possible, for each impregnation, as 
tlie males are usually more abundant than the female blossoms. In consequence, the 
young fruit will soon be observed to swell freely. Cucumlbers attain the proper size for 



576 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paiit nr. 



gathering in about fifteen, eighteen, or twenty days from the time of setting ; and often 
in succession, for two or three months or more, in the same bed, by good culture. The 
above artificial operation will be found both necessary and eiFectual in forcing the cucum- 
ber, between the decline of autumn and May, while the plants are mostly shut under 
glass. In plants more freely exposed to the free air, in the increasing warmth of spring, 
and in having the full open air in summer, from June or July till September, the im- 
pregnation is effected mostly or wholly by nature. The male flowers, being by some ig- 
norantly denominated false blossoms, are often plucked wholly off as useless, under a 
notion of strengthening the plant : but this should not be generally done. Where crowded 
too thick in clusters, some may Ije thinned out moderately ; but their agency being abso- 
lutely necessary in fertilising the females, they should only be displaced as they begin to 
decay, except where they are superabundant." 

3232. M'Pkail observes, " It is the female blossoms or flowers that bear the fruit ; but if they were not 
to be impregnated by the male flowers, they would prove barren and unfruitful. The female blossoms are 
easily to be distinguished from the male ones, for the rudiment of the fruit is apparent at the bottom of 
the female flowers, and the flowers have no stamina, but have three small-pointed filaments without sum- 
mits : whereas the male blossoms have not any rudiment of fvuit about them, but in the centre of the 
flower are three short stamina, which are inserted in the impalement. When the female or fruit blos- 
soms are in full blow, take a male blossom which is in full blow, and holding it in one hand, with the other 
spUt, and tear off the flower-leaves or petals, taking care not to hurt the stamina or male part. Then hold 
the male blossom thus prepared between the finger and thumb of the right hand, and with the left hand 
gently lay hold of the female blossom, and holding it between two fingers, put the prepared male blossom 
into the centre of the female blossom, and there the farina, pollen, or dust of the anthera, clings or sticks to 
the stigma, and thus the impregnation of the fruit is effectuated, and the plants are thereby rendered fruit- 
ful, which, being in frames in a climate by art made for them, would otherwise in a great d'egree be ren- 
dered barren and unproductive ; and which I have frequently known to have been the case, even when at 
the same time the plants were in a vigorous flourishing state. Generally leave the prepared part of the 
male blossom sticking in the centre of the female one, and take a fresh male blossom to every female blos- 
som. But if male blossoms run scarce, which seldom or never happens, make one male blossom do for two 
or three female ones." 

3233. Nicol states, that cucumbers will grow and will arrive at full size without the female flowers 
being impregnated ; the seeds, however, will prove abortive. The directions he gives for impregnating 
are in substance the same as those of M'Fhail. The fruit being set and swelling, some lay fragments of 
glass or slate beneath it, in order to keep it clean, and to admit as much air and light as possible to the 
under side, so as to cause its approach in greenness to the upper. 

3234. Gathering the crop. Cucumbers are used green or unripe, and before they have 
attained their full size. They are cut and gathered when four, five, six, or eight inches 
long, according to the kinds. To this size they attain in ten days, or a fortnight, in the 
best part of the season. 

3235. To save seed. " Select some best summer fruit, from good productive plants ; 
which permit to continue in full growth till they become yellow. Then cut them from 
the vine, and place them upright on end, in the full sun, for two or three weeks ; when 
they may be cut open, and the seed being washed out from the pulp, spread it to dry 
and harden : then put it up in papers or bags for future sowing. It will remain good 
many years: and seed of three or four years' keeping is preferable for early frame 
crops." 

3236. Cultivation of the cucumbe->' in a Jlued pit. Nicol says, " Those who would 
have cucumbers on the table at Christmas, (a thing sometimes attempted,) will find it 
more practicable, and less troublesome, if the plants be grown in a flued pit, in the 
manner of late melons, than if they grow on a common hot-bed. In this case the 
cucumbers should take place of the melons planted in this compartment in July, and 
which will, by the middle or end of the month, have ripened off all their fruit of any 
consequence. 

3237. Sow the seeds of some of the early sorts (those best for early being also best for late,) " in small 
pots, about the first of July, and place them in the pit along with the melons, or under a hand-glass on a 
slow dung-heat ; where let the plants be nursed, and be prepared for planting about the second or third 
week in the month. Observe to sow old seeds, not those saved this season, which would run more to 
vines than to fruit. Let the pit be prepared for their reception, by trenching up the bark or dung, and by 
adding fresh materials, in so far as to produce a moderate growing heat ; observing the directions given 
for preparing the pit for the melons in July, and moulding it (however with proper cucumber earth) all 
over, to the depth of a foot or fourteen inches. The plants may be placed closer in planting them out, 
than is necessary in a Spring hot-bed. They may be planted at the distance of a yard from one another, 
and two rows lengthwise in the pit, as they will not grow very vigorously at this late season. They 
should be moderately supplied with water once in four or five days, and should alwaj's be watered over 
the foliage ; the more especially when strong fire-heat becomes necessary, as cucumbers naturally like a 
moist rather than a dry heat. The temperature should be kept up to about 64 or 65 degrees in the night, 
by the aid of the flues, and by matting, or otherwise covering the pit. Air should be as freely admitted as 
tlie state of the weather will allow ; and so as to keep the mercury down, in sunshine, to about 70 degrees. 
The plants will require little other pruning than to stop the vines, as they show fruit, at a joint or two 
above it; for they will not push many superfluous shoots. Observe to pick off all damped leaves as they 
appear ; and otherwise carefully attend to them, slS above directed, while they continue to flourish, or to, 
do any good worthy of such attendance." 

3238. Cultivation of tlie cucurnber in M^Phail's brick-bed or fra?ne. " When I used," 
observes M'Phail, "to cultivate cucumbers on a dung -bed, the fruit were sometimes 
watery and ill-tasted ; but after I began to cultivate them on a brick-bed, the fruit were 
constantly firm and well-flavored ; which is certainly occasioned by the goodness and 
wholesomeness of the food with which the plants are fed or nourished." Besides this ob- 
jection, M'Phail mentions several others, the principal of which are — 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



577 



The nsk of burnmg the plants at first, as well as on tlie application of every frosh lining. In a few 
days after a cuoumber-bcd nas been planted, the "heat of the dung begins to decline, and perhaps tho 
weather changes from fine, and becomes cold, wet, and gloomy ; and in that case a lining of fresh dung 
to enliven the heat of the bed is undoubtedly required. When this fresh lining is applied, it sets the bed 
into a fresh fermentation, and very frequently gives too much bottom heat, and it even often happens that 
the heat becomes too great under the plants before a lining is applied ; for the heat of a dung-bed is change- 
able, and is raised and lowered by the changes of the weather. There is no necessity for having heat di- 
rectly underneath the roots of the plants ; for if the air in the frames be kept up to a proper degree of heat, 
that is sufficient. In climates where the cucumber naturally grows, I apprehend there is no heat in the 
earth but what is raised in it by the heat of the sun and the circumambient air, which seems to be warmed 
Jjy the reflection of the sun upon the earth." 

, The risk oj destroying the plants by impure air, and steam from the bed. " It is not only necessary 
that in the Irames the air be kept up to a sufficient degree of heat, but it is absolutely necessary that nothing 
pernicious or unwholesome be conveyed into, or caused to arise in, the frames among the plants by means 
of that heat. If the steam of the linings get in, it will hurt the plants : and if there be any thing which 
smells disagreeably in the mould, or underneath the mould in the frames, the heat of the linings will cause 
unhealthy vapors to ascend from it, which in time will prove injurious to the plants. So that, although 
there may be a degree of heat in the frames strong enough for the grov/th of the plants yet, through means 
of that heat, something may arise in the frames which will become progressively, if not almost instanta- 
neously, destructive of the plants, especially when they are young and tender. Care, therefore, must be 
taken that nothing be introduced into the frames among the plants but what is of a sweet wholesome nature." 

"Die difficulty of keeping up the proper heat in winter. 

The great attention and expense attending the formation and general management of dung-beds in 
winter. 

3239. The chief advantages of M'PhaWs frame are stated to be : — 

That the coldest pl^ce in the bed is exactly in the centre of each pit, from which centre the heat in- 
creases on each side to the linings v.'here the heat begins. The plants being planted, he says, in this 
centre, or coldest part of the bed, their roots can never be hurt by the heat increasing on each side gra- 
dually, being in every respect suitable for their increase and extension. The heat in the centre of each 
pit, just where the plants are first planted, seldom rises higher than to about eighty or eighty-five degrees, 
nor does it ever rise higher in any part of the pits than about ninetj^-six or ninety-seven degrees ; nor do I 
believe it ever can be raised higher than that, without scorching the plants by top heat or heated air : 
whereas, in a bed made of dung, the heat in the centre of the bed, under the mould in which the plants are 
planted, frequently rises to above 120 degrees, when, at the same time, the air in the frames can scarcely be 
kept up to a proper degree of heat: Uiis frequently happens in cold weather in winter. The scorching 
heat of a hot-bed of horse-dung, when too hot for plants, is equal to 130 degrees and more, and hereabout is 
probably the heat of blood in fevers. 

The dung requires no more working than what is necessary to bring it to and keep it in a proper degree of 
heat, and to let some of its more rancid qualities pass off by evaporation ; and as soon as the heat rises in 
the linings, it circulates in the flues, and warms every part of the bed ; whereas the dung for making a 
common cucumber-bed must be turned and worked, and lie, till, by fermentation, its rank qualities 
be evaporated, and its violent heat be somewhat diminished. This, as already noticed, is a very great 
advantage. 

Tiie linings retain the heat longer than the linings of a dung-bed do, and that because the flues are con- 
stantly full of steam ; but a dung-bed having little or no vacuity for the retention of the steam, the steam 
of the linings of it is perhaps more immediately evaporated, and consequently the heat of the linings is 
sooner exhausted than the heat of the linings of the brick-bed. 

In the course of the winter a dung-bed sinks so low, that it becomes difficult sometimes to get a 
proper heat raised in the linings ; but my brick-bed being always of the same height, such difficulty can 
never happen. 

A brick-bed may be built and set to work immediately j the heat of the linings will dry the lime of 
the joints of the bricks. The evaporation in the frames, from the moist lime of the joints of the brick- 
work, has no bad eflTect on the plants ; but when a bed is set to work before it be dry and steady,.great 
care must be taken not to injure the brick-work in filling up the pits. 

All the materials of the brick-bed are clean and sweet j and the flues being made perfectly close, no 
tainted or bad-smelling air can get through them into the bed, so that it is of little or no concern whether 
the dung of the linings be sweet or otherwise, or whether the linings be made of dung, or of any thing 
else, provided there be a sufficient heat kept in them, and no pernicious steam be drawn in among the 
plants by the current of air. 

3240. The plan of M^Phail's frame ha,s already boen given and described. (1551. and 
Hg. 233. ) It is almost needless to repeat that a sheltered dry situation for placing it is 
of the first consequence. The bed being built, " when the frame is about to be set upon 
it, a layer of mortar is spread all round upon the upper course of brick-work on which the 
bottoms of the frames are to rest. Thus the frames are set in mortar on the bricks ; 
and the flues are, with a bricklayer's brush, well washed, and rubbed with a thick grout 
made of lime and water, which stops every crack or hole, and prevents the steam of the 
linings from getting into the frames. This washing of the flues I had done once a-year, 
for no crack or hole must ever be suffered to remain unstopped in the flues. I found little 
or no trouble in keeping the flues perfectly close, nor is it indeed likely that they should 
become troublesome if the bed stands on a sound foundation, for the heat of the dung has 
not that powerful effect on the flues, as fire-heat has on the flues of a hot-house ; because 
the heat of dung is more steady, and not so violent as the heat of fire ; and besides, the 
flues of the cucumber-bed are almost always in a moist state, which is a preventive in 
them against cracking or rending. When the bed is first built, the pits are about three 
feet in depth below the surface of the flues. These pits I had filled up about a fbot high, 
some of them with rough chalk, some of them with small stones, and some of them with 
brick-bats : this is to let the wet drain off freely from the mould of the beds. After this 
filling up witli chalk, stones, and broken bricks, there is a vacancy in the pits about two 
feet deep below the surface of the flues ; this vacancy I had filled to a level with the 
.surface of the flues with vegetable or leaf mould ; and in putting it in, it was gently 
j)rcssed. to prevent it from sinking too much afterwards." 

3241. On (he surface of (he mould with which (he pits were fdledy " under the middle of each light, and 

rp 



578 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



which is just in the centre of the mould in each pit, make hills of mould in the same form as is commonly 
done on a dung-bed. These hills are to set the plants in, and are to be raised at first nearly close to, or 
within a few inches of the glass. Raising the mould at first pretty nigh the glass is necessary, on account 
of the sinking of it ; for as the frames are set on bricks, they cannot sink, but mould newly put in is sure 
to settle, and the measure of settlement will ever depend upon the lightness and texture of the mould with 
•which tl^ pits are filled. Therefore, these and such like matters must be left to the discretion of those 
who are entrusted with the direction and management of the frames. When the bed is thus finished, 
and ready for the reception of the plants, if the fiues be strewed over with mould, so that their surface be 
just covered, to a stranger it is altogether a deception, for in every respect it has the appearance of a 
dung-bed." 

3242. The sashes of the frames " which I used were glazed in lead ; but if any person who rears early cu- 
cumbers have lights which are not glazed in lead, but are slate-glazed, the vacancies between the glass had 
best be filled up close with putty, to prevent too much air from getting into the frames in the cold days 
in winter. The frames under my management were constantly kept in good repair, and painted over once 
every year. This method, I am clearly of opinion, is more profitable than if the frames were neglected for 
two or three years, and then have a thorough repair with two or three coats of paint When frames are 
new painted, they should be suffered to lie and sweeten for some time, at least for two or three weeks, or 
until the disagreeable smell of the paint be somewhat lessened. Although the frames I used were of a 
very good size, yet if they were a little smaller or larger, they would answer the purpose very well. There- 
fore those who intend to build a bed after my plan, have no occasion to make new frames merely for the 
purpose, but they may get the bed built to fit the frames they are already in possession of." 

3243. Linings of dung. " The linings are to be applied to the bed a few days before the plants are ready for 
finally planting out, in order that the mould and every thingin the frames may be properly warmed for their 
reception. The dung of which the linings are to be made may either he cast together in a heap, to bring it to 
a heat before it be laid round the bed, or it may be laid round the bed as it is brought from the dung-yard ; 
but whichever of these methods be taken, when the linings are makiiig up, the dung should be well shaken, 
and laid up lightly, so that the heat of it may come up freely. As it takes some days before the linings are able 
to warm the earth in the bed sufficiently for the reception of the plants, the rank steam of new dung-linings 
is evaporated, unless the dung came immediately from the stables, which seldom is the case. The linings 
are to be made nearly three feet broad in their foundation, and tapered up to about thirty inches at the 
top, by which they will retain their heat long, and in sinking will keep close to the bed, which is what 
should at all times be paid proper attention to. In the winter and spring months the finings should be 
trodden upon as little as possible, for treading on them would be the means of stagnating their heat. 
But should it at any time, in managing the plants, be found necessary to stand or kneel upon them, 
boards should be laid on their tops for that purpose; which will prevent the weight of a person from 
taking that effect on them which it otherwise would do." 

3244. Refreshing the linings. " As the linings sink they are to be raised with fresh dung ; but they should 
seldom be raised higher than about the level of the mould in the frames in which the plants grow, espe- 
cially when there is a strong heat in them ; for, when there is a great heat in them, if tbey are kept 
higher than the level of the mould, the heat dries the air in the frames too much. Nor should they be 
suffered to sink much below the level of the mould in the frames ; for that, on the contrary, would cause 
too much moisture in the frames, especially in the winter and spring months. When the heat begins to 
be too little, notwithstanding the finings being kept to their proper height, the fresh unexhausted dung 
on the top or upper part of them is to be laid aside, and the exhausted dung underneath to be taken away, 
and that which was laid aside put in the foundation, and fresh dmig laid above it in lieu of that which 
was carried away." 

3245. Reneudng the linings. " Both the side linings may be raised at one time, but both of them should 
never be renewed together; for if both were to be renewed at the same time, it would for a time cool the 
frames too much, and when the heat of both came to its full strength, it would probably be too powerful 
for the roots of the plants when extended to the flues. I seldom or never renewed the end linings, be- 
cause I found the heat of the side ones fully sufficient ; for as there are flues or vacuities in every part of 
the bed, the steam being fluid, circulates in, and warms every part thereof. And for the very same 
reason there is no occasion for having a strong heat in both the side linings at one and the same time, 
except in very cold weather. In making up and pulling down the linings, care should be taken not to in- 
jure the brick-work." 

324ff. The covering the lights in the winter and spring is absolutely necessary ; "for, notwithstanding the 
h^t of the linings, it would be impossible to keep up a proper degree of heat in the frames for the plants, 
without coverings. Therefore the covering up in tne evenings, and uncovering in the mornings, must 
be particularly attended to, and more or less put on according to the heat of the linings and the temper- 
ature of the weather." 

3247. Aflei- the bed is set to work, heat and sweet moisture are the two principal agents required for pro- 
moting the gi-owth and vigor of the plants ; " therefore, if there be a heat kept in the linings strong 
enough to keep the heat in the centre of the pits of mould fluctuating between 80 and 90 degrees, cold 
water may be poured on the flues twice or thrice a-week. There is no danger of creating damps or im- 
pure air in the frames by watering the flues ; for the water is no sooner poured on them, than it runs 
down their sides, and passes clear off through the drains of the bed ; consequently water being poured 
upon the flues, gives only a momentary check to the heat of the frames; for the Sues being at all times 
full of hot steam, when the watering is finished, the heat quickly resumes its former vivacity, and raises 
a warm vapor in the framos, well adapted for promoting vegetation, and for increasing the growth, and 
invigorating the plant in all its parts. The mould round about the sides of the pits close against the inner 
sides of the flues, should be kept nearly on a level with the surface of the flues ; and as it is the mould 
that joins to the flues which receives the first and greatest heat from the linings, it should continually 
be kept in a moist state ; for if the mould against the flues be suffered to become dry and husky, air will 
be generated in the frames disagreeable to the plants." 

3248. Temperature of M'Phail's frame. M'Phail has, in his Gardener's Remembrancer, as well as in his 
Treatise on the Cucumber, given the temperature of one of his beds for every day in the year, of which the 
annexed table shows the extremes for every month. By the heat described in this table, and plenty 
of water, the cucumber-plants, the seeds of which 
were sown on the 22d day of October, were maintained 
in a healthy fruit-bearing state, in the brick-frame, 
from the month of January to the beginning of 
December. The melon-plants were kept in about 
the same degree of heat given for the culture of the 
cucumber in the forcing-frames ; and it may be pre- 
dicted, that if any person keep melon or cucumber 
plants in nearly the same degrees of heat as are set 
down in the table, and manage the plants well in 
other respects, the way to do which has been clearly 
pointed out, they will not fail of having success. 
M'Phail adds, that notwithstanding the objections 
of some who have not been successful in making 
trial of his bed, " it is now generally approved of, and in practice by numbers of the best' gentlemeu's. 
gardeners in the kingdom ; and by various market-gardeners in the neighborhood of London." 







Mom. 




Noon. 




ETcn. 


Jan. 


from 


58 to 86 


from 


56 to 86 


from 


54 to 77 


Feb. 


from 


68 to 88 


from 


66 to 90 


from 


58 to 84 


Mar. 


from 


62 to 83 


from 


65 to 90 


from 


62 to 85 


April 


from 


69 to 84 


from 


68 to 93 


from 


64 to 90 


May 


from 


67 to 79 


from 


70 to 90 


from 


66 to 95 


June 


from 


62 to 85 


from 


80 to 98 


from 


67 to 90 
69 to 95 


July 


from 


61 to 79 


from 


72 to 105 


from 


Aug. 


from 


60 to 78 


from 


80 to 96 


from 


70 to 89 


Sept. 


from 


69 to 80 


from 


74 to 100 


from 


72 to 97 


Oct, 


from 


64 to 81 


from 


71 to 101 


from 


68 to 89 


Nov. 


from 


62 to 82 


from 


65 to 92 


from 


61 to 80 


Dec. 


from 


65to8S 


from 


64 to 77 


from 


58 to 71 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE CUCUMBER. 



579 



In allitther reispects, the culture of the cucumber or melon, on M'Phatl'e brick-bed, oc^esponda with the 
culture of these fruits on common dung-beds, 

S249. The cultivation of tfie cucumber in West's frame (fig. 230.), differs from the 
common mode ; but it being attended with less risk, in our opinion, this frame or pit 
is superior to M'Phail's, as requiring much less dung, presenting a much more neat 
and orderly appearance, and giving a greater command of temperature. 

3250. Cultivation of the cucumber in a common pit without fines. Some form a narrow 
dung-bed along the middle of such a pit, leaving room for adding a lining on each side 
when the heat declines. This method succeeds very well late in the season ; but at an 
early period the sinking of the bed from the glass leaves the plants at a great distance from 
the light. 

3251. Cultivation of the cucumber in stoves. " Cucumber-plants," M'Phail observes, 
will grow in a hot-house where the pine-apple is cultivated ; but they will not be very 

long-lived there, for that is not a healthy climate for them." In August, sow the seeds 
in boxes filled with vegetable or other light earth, and place them on shelves in the back 
side of the hot-house, where the sun may not be interrupted from shining on them in the 
short days. They may, perhaps, produce a few fruit in the month of December or 
January. (Gard. Rem. p. 301.) 

5252. Abercrombie says, " Some gardeners, ambitious of early fruit, try a sowing in the stove under the 
disadvantages of December. For fruiting this plant in the house, narrow boxes, three feet long, and 
full twenty inches deep, may be found more commodious than pots. The boxes may stand upon the crib- 
trellising over the flues, or be suspended near the back wall eighteen inches from the upper tier of lights, 
so as not to shade the regular house-plants : this is the best situation for a very early crop. The plants 
may be originated in small pots, plunged into the bark-bed, in order to be transplanted with a ball of 
earth into the boxes. Those who aim to have fruit at Christmas, introduce seedlings about the middle of 
August. - The chief deviation from the course of the hot-bed is, that the plants must be trained in the 
house upright ; for which purpose form a light temporary trellis of laths. Give water every other day 
at least." {Pract. Gard. p. 618.) 

3253. Aitoii's method of raising cucumber-plants in August, with a view to their being fruited in the stove 
through the winter, has been already given. (3174.) We now subjoin the remainder of that excellent paper. 

3254. The plants being raised on a well-prepared one-light hot-bed ; when the cotyledons or seed- 
leaves became nearly of full growth, the plants were potted out two into each pot, known to gardener* 
about London by the name of upright thirty^twos. When these pots became filled with roots, the plants 
were again shifted into larger ones, called sixteens, and removed from the seed-bed into a three-light 
frame, with a sufficient bottom-heat to allow a considerable portion of air being given day and night, 
both in the front and back of the frame. About the middle of September, the plants having again fiUed 
their pots with roots, and become stocky, were takenAom the frame to the stove, and after a few days 
received the last shifting into larger pots of the following dimensions : — at the top fourteen inches over ; 
the bottom ten inches across, and twelve inches deep, all inside measure ; each pot at equal distances 
apart, having three side drain-holes near the bottom, and a larger one in the centre of the bottom, and 
containing about three pecks of solid earth. 

3255. The plants were fruited in a pinery. On the front edge of the back flue of this stove, a fascia- 
boarding, six inches deep, was affixed, the whole length of the building, forming all along a trough or 
enclosure for a reserve of compost after the exhaustion of the mould in the pots had taken place. The 
pots were now placed in regular order upon the mould-trough over the flue, at three feet apart, and re- 
mained in this station for good, for succession. A setting of the second sowing was placed upon the end 
flues of the house ; underneath each pot was set an upright circular gardai-pan, six inches deep, and 
fourteen inches diameter, which being filled with earth, the pots were plunged therein about two- inches 
deep, and the drain-holes being sufficiently covered with mould, served as outlets to the roots. 

3256. Temperature. The fire-heat of the stove was kept day and night at sixty to sixty-five degrees 
Fahrenheit's thermometer, varying only a few degrees when the sudden influence of sun or steam pro- 
duced an additional glow of climate. The plants being now established and vigorous, required stopping 
for laterals and fruit ; and these second and third lateral shoots in their turn were stopped also, and the 
blossoms from time to time set, as usual, for succession of supply. 

3257. Waterings were necessary only when the surface of the earth was evidently dry, and light 
sprinklings of soft water, tempered in the stove, were occasionally given over the leaves of the plants and 
path with good effect. 

■ 3258. Steam from a well regulated flue was considered always favorable to the cultivation, but applied 
sparingly on account of its scalding effect upon the leaves when the vapor proved over-heated. 

3259. Diseases and Insects. For the mildew, flower of brimstone, colored leaf-green by a little soot, has 
been applied with the best success in all stages of the disease, and copious fumigations of tobacco were 
uSed for the destruction of the several species of the aphis tribe. 

: 3260. Result. Under this simple practice, winter cucumbers have been produced abundantly in the 
months of October, November, December, and part of January, in aU the royal gardens of His Majesty 
during a series of years. 

526 1. Cultivation of the cucumber in Weeks' s patent frame. (1553.) We know only of 
two instances in which this ingenious invention has been tried, both of which are men- 
tioned at the end of Weeks's Forcer's Assistant. The chief objection to the plan is, that the 
bed or stratum of earth in which the plants are grown being but of moderate depth, and 
surrounded by air above and below, is extremely difficult to retain at an equable 
moisture. 

3262. Growing tlie cucumber under hand-glasses. The following method is given by 
M'Phail as that generally practised : " The seeds are sown some time about the middle 
of April in a cucumber or melon bed, and when they come up, they are potted out into 
small pots, two or three plants in each pot, and are kept properly watered, and stopped 
at the first or second joint. About the tniddle of May, a warm situation where the 
mould is very rich is pitched on, and a trench is dug out about two feet deep, three feet 
broad, and the length is proportioned according to the number of lights it is intended 
for. This trench is filled with good warm dung, and when the dung is come to its full 

Pp 2 



580 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



heat, it is covered over with eight, ten, or twelve inches deep of rich mould. The 
glasses are then set upon it about three feet distant from each other, and when the 
mould gets warm under them, the plants are turned out of the pots with their balls 
whole, and plunged in the mould under the glasses, and a little water given tliem to 
settle the mould about their roots, the glasses set over them, and after they have made 
roots, and begin to grow, in fine days they are raised a little on one side to let the plants 
have the free air ; and as the weather gets warmer and warmer, air is given more 
plentifully, to harden the plants, so that they may be able to bear the open air, and run 
from under the glasses. When the plants begin to fill the glasses^ they are trained out 
horizontally, and the glasses are set upon bricks or such like, to bear them from the. 
plants. After this the plants require nothing more but to be supplied with water when 
the summer showers are not sufficient, and to stop them when they run too thin of 
branches, and thin them of leaves or branches when they are likely to become over- 
crowded. In warm suminers and in warm situations, by this mode of management, the 
plants mil bear plentifully for about two months, provitled they be not attacked by insects 
or weakened by diseases." 

3263. Abercrombie describes a practice somewhat different, but with his usual attention to detail and 
order. He says — To have a general summer crop, to fruit in hot-bed ridges under hand-glasses, sow 
some seed of the long prickly kind in a hot-bed, under a frame or hand-glass, or in any cucumber hot-bed 
in cultivation, about the middle of March, or thence till the middle of April. When the plants have been 
up three, four, or five days, prick some in the same or another hot-bed, three or four inches asunder. A 
portion may be put in small pots, three plants in each, and plunged in the bed. Give water, and shade 
from the sun, till they take root ; and manage as for the frame-crop. In three or four weeks, when 
advanced in the first rough leaves, about two inches broad, and stopped at the first joint, as directed in 
the early crop, the plants should be ridged-out, that is, transplanted into hot-bed ridges, under hand- 
glasses, to remain for fruiting. The period for this may fluctuate from the middle of April to the begin- 
ning of May. 

3264. Having a sufficient quantity of prepared dung, make a hot-bed on the level ground, three feet 
and a half or four feet wide, and two and a half high, the length as required, according to the number of 
hand-glasses intended. Earth it at top, six or eight inches thick, and place the hand-glasses along the 
middle, at three feet and a half distance. Sometimes the bed is made in a moderate trench, twelve or 
fifteen inches deep, in some good soil in the kitchen-garden, in order to have the excavated earth of the 
trench ready at hand for moulding the bed. When the earth under the glasses is warm, proceed to put 
in the plants, removing them from the nursery-bed, with as much earth as will adhere about the roots. If 
you have any plants in small pots, turn them out with the balls entire, and plant three plants under each 
glass. Give a light watering ; put down the glasses ; and shade the plants from the sun, till they have 
taken root ; after which, let them enjoy the sun and light fully, only covering the glasses and bed every 
night with mats till June, or commencement of warm weather. Admit air every mild day, by propping up 
the southward side of the glasses one or two inches ; moderate waterings will be necessary twice a week or 
oftener. 

3265. As the plants push runners of considerable length, train them regularly. When extended to the 
limits of the glasses, and when the weather is settled warm, about the beginning or middle of June, they 
should be raised upon three props, two or three inches high, and the runners trained out in regular order ; 
but cover them in cold nights with mats, for the first week or two. Continue the glasses, and circum- 
spectly water in dry weather, as may be necessary; the plants will produce fruit in June, July, August, 
&c. in plentiful succession. 

3266. In default of plants raised in a previous nursery. bed for transplanting, sow seed under the hand- 
glasses in April or in May, inserting several seeds in the central part under each glass. When the plants 
have been up a few days or a week, thin them to three or four of the strongest in each patch, managing 
them afterwards as the others. They will come into bearing towards the end of June or July, and thence 
till September. j^. 

3267. Should thei-e be a scarcity of dung to make a regular bed, in the last week of April, or in May, 
you may dig circular holes two feet wide, a spade deep, and four or five feet asunder ; fill them with hot- 
dung, trodden down moderately firm, and earthed over six inches. In these put either plants or seed j 
and place on the glasses : the plants wiU produce fruit in June or July till September. 

3268. In default of ha7id-glasses : make a hot-bed, or holes of dung, as above, in May : put in plants or 
seed, and defend with oiled-paper frames to remain constantly, day and night, till settled warm weather 
in June or July. Give the additional protection of mats over the paper frame in cold nights and bad 
weather. 

3269. In the culture of all the crops, give proper supplies of water in dry warm^weather, two or 
three times a week, or every day in the hottest season of June, July, and August. In the hot-bed ridges 
made above ground in April or May, if in three or four weeks or more after making the heat be much 
declined, and the nights, or general season, remain cold, let a moderate lining of hot-dung be affiled to 
the sides ; which will both throw in a reviving heat, and widen the bed for the roots and runners of the 
plants to extend. {Abercrombie.) 

3270. Insects and diseases. The thrips sometimes attacks early cucumbers, and is to be 
destroyed by fumigation. The red spider rarely makes its appearance ; when it does, 
water must have been improperly withheld. Some soils produce canker in the shoots, 
especially where they branch from the main stem. When this is the case, the only 
resource is to renew the soil and the plants. 

Sect. VII. Of the Culture of the Melon. 

3271. The melon requires the aid of artificial heat the greater part of the year, and 
even in the warmest months it cannot be brought to perfection without the protection of 
glass. Its culture is an object of emulation among gardeners ; and the fruit of the best 
sorts have a peculiarly rich flavor, thought by some to bear some resemblance to that 
of the pine. Ripe fruit, Abercrombie observes, " may be had by forcing at any season ; 
but the main crops raised for the general demand, are seldom cut, at the earliest, before 
May, and the last succession mostly ceases to yield fruit after October." To ripen the 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MELON. 



581 



best, largest, fine kinds, M'Phail observes, " as great an atmospherical heat, and a bottom 
heat to its roots also, is required as is sufficient to ripen the pine-apple in this country ; 
but as the melon is produced from an annual plant, the seeds of which must be sown 
every year, it requires a different mode of culture. Different methods of treatment and 
various kinds of earths and of manures have been recommended, and used successfully 
in rearing of melons. The great thing after planting is to give them plenty of atmo- 
spherical heat, and a sufficiency of external air and water. Those methods which are most 
simple and the least expensive, and best calculated to assist in making a suitable climate 
for the melon-plant to grow in and ripen its fruit well, should be preferred." 

3272. Soil. Abercrombie says, " The melon will succeed in any unexhausted loam, 
rich in vegetable rudiments, with a mixture of sand, but not too light. The following 
is a good compost : two thirds of top-spit earth from a sheep common, adding sharp 
sand, if the earth contains little or none, till half is sand ; one sixth of vegetable mould ; 
and one sixth of well consumed horse-dung. Or, if the earth is not obtained from a 
pasture, rotted sheep-dung may be substituted for the last. The ingredients should have 
been incorporated and pulverised by long previous exposure and turning over. The 
compost should be dried under shelter before it is used, and warmed in the frame for 
potting." 

3273. M'Pkail says, " Melons will grow and produce fruit of a good flavor, if they be planted in any 
kind of earth not of too light a texture, whether it be taken from a compartment of the kitchen- 
garden or from a corn-field mixed well with good rotten dung ; but earth of a loamy nature is the best, 
because it retains moisture longer than light earth. Earth dug from the surface of a common, where 
sheep and cattle have long been pastured, is excellent for the melon. It should be broken well, and lie 
a few months before it be used ; and if it be exposed to a winter's frost, it will do it good. This sort of 
earth, if it be taken from the surface of the common, will require no manure the first year of using. I 
would here mention, that unless the earth v/hich I used for the melon-plants was very strong, I made it 
a practice, when the melon-beds were wholly earthed up, to tread the surface all over, which makes the 
earth retain its moisture longer than if it were left loose." 

3274. Nicol says, " Soil for melons may be thus composed : one half strong brown loam from ^pasture ; 
a quarter light sandy earth ; an eighth part vegetable mould of decayed tree-leaves ; and an e?gnth part 
rotten stable-yard dung. The mould for melons should be weU incorporated; should be exposed to the 
frost, and be frequently turned over to meliorate." 

3275. Sorts. The following list is given by Abercrombie : — 



Netted cantaleupe, large round 
Early small black rock cantaleupe 
Carbunded rock cantaleupe, cheese- 
shaped 

Green cantaleupe (oblong rock) 
Orange cantaleupe 
Early golden cantaleupe 



Scarlet cantaleupe 
Silver cantaleupe 
Small romana, oval 
Larger netted romana, oval 
Polignac 

Musk, or oblong ribbed, netted-rinded 



Oblong, smooth-rinded 
Round, smooth, green-rinded 
Round white-rinded 
Green-fleshed 

Water-melon, a very large roundish 
green fruit. 



3276. Nicol enumerates the following, in the order in which they ripen : — 

The early golden cantaleupe I The silver cjmtaleupe I Lee's rock cantaleupe | Large netted romana 

The orange cantaleupe I The black rock cantaleupe I Lee's romana I Fair's romana. 

^he netted cantaleupe • The carbuncled rock I I 

3277. Estimate of sorts. " The cantaleupes are in high estimation for their general 
superior flavor, although not uniformly such great bearers as some others in the list; they 
are besides admired for their handsome and curious shapes, some of them growing very 
large. The netted cantaleupe is a good bearer ; the fruit above the middle size, round, 
heavy, full of juice, and high flavored. The early small black rock cantaleupe is a good 
bearer : but there is a large black rock which holds an inferior rank, both for bearing 
and the flavor of the fruit. Of the carbuncled rock there are two sorts : the smj^ller is 
by far the best. The green cantaleupe has a dark green rind, with a pale pulp, grows 
rather larger than the early black rock, and vies with it in flavor. The orange canta- 
leupe ,is an excellent early variety, a great bearer ; the fi'uit under the middle size, but 
juicy, and of the most generous flavor. The early golden, and the prolific, set speedily, 
and soon ripen ; the fruit middle-sized, the flavor not so elevated as might be expected 
from a cantaleupe. The silver cantaleupe bears freely ; the fruit middle-sized, and for 
flavor ranking vrith the finest. The small romana is one of the most plentiful bearers, 
either for an early or main crop ; the fruit not abundantly juicy, but good-flavored. The 
larger netted romana bears more freely than large sorts in general; the fruit is sub- 
stantial and heavy, a single melon sometimes weighing ten pounds, not so juicy as the 
best cantaleupes, but the flavor high and grateful. The polignac is also a rich-flavored 
fruit. The old oblong-ribbed is generally a good bearer, and the fruit agreeably flavored. 
The other kinds also will ripen here in good perfection, except the water-melon, which 
does not always ripen freely with a good full flavor. The principal' culture, however, 
the cantaleupes, romanas, and polignac, are indisputably preferable : any of the others 
may be adopted in secondary crops, or for variety." 

3278. M'Phail says, " Several sorts of melons are not worth propagating, that is, in the estimation of 
some iKTSons ; but there are some kinds of them, such as the early cantaleupes and the rock cantaleupes, 
which, when well ripened, are delicious in flavor, and very wholesome in quality. Of the varieties, there 
are those called the rock cantaleupe, the early small black, large black, the orange, the golden, the silver, 
the green, the carbuncled, the netted, the Roman, the musk, and the scarlet cantaleupes, and likewise 
the oblong-ribbed, the smooth-rind, the round white, the green-flcshcd, the water-melon. &c." 



583 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



3279. T^me of beginning to force. From the time of sowing, ripe fruit may be cut 
in about fifteen weeks, as an average period : when many sliort and wintry days fall in 
the course, it may last eighteen weeks ; but when the forcing is not commenced till the 
days are nearly twelve hours long, and continually lengthening, ripe fruit is sometimes 
cut in ten weeks. The period also depends upon the sort. Little time is gained by 
beginning excessively early. The early and main crops are commonly originated from 
the middle of January to the first week of February ; the latter or succession crops, at 
the beginning of March ; and late crops intended to fruit at the end of summer, in the 
middle of April. 

3280. M'Phail and Nicol sow in* January. The latter says, " I formerly cut melons, for three years 
successively, on the 15th, 12th, and 10th of May, and never sowed before the last week of January, or first 
of February. In 1788, when at Rainham Hall, in Norfolk, I sowed melons on the 12th March, and cut 
ripe fruit on the f<;Oth May. The kind was the early golden cantaleupe. This shows bow little is to be 
gained, or rather, how much may be lost, by early forcing." 

3281. Forming the seed-bed. The plants may be originated in a cucumber-bed, and 
this is the general practice ; but Abercrombie prefers a separate bed, built a slight degree 
higher than that for the cucumber, at the same season, and adapted to a one or two light 
frame, according to the quantity to be raised. Nicol raises the melon almost exactly in 
the same way as the cucumber, and there is very little difference in his subsequent culture 
of these plants. 

3282. Choice of seed. " Seed under the age of two years is apt to run too much to 
vine, and show only male flowers ; but new seed may be mellowed by being carried in 
the pocket a fortnight or more, till the heat of the body has dried and hardened it. Seed, 
twenty years old, has been known to grow and make fruitful plants ; but seed, which 
has been kept three or four years, is quite old enough, and less likely to fail than 
older." 

S283. WPhail says, " It is best not to sow melon-seed till it be two or three years old. It cannot be 
too old if it be sound and grow weR Young seed is apt to run too much to vine, and to show more male 
than female blossoms." 

3284. Nicol says, " I have sown melon-seeds twenty years old, from which I have raised very healthy 
and fruitful plants." {Kal. p. 396.) 

3285. Miller and Nicol say, young melon-seeds may be worn in the pocket, near the body, for several 
months previous to sowing, which has the effect of fully maturing them. " If seeds of the last season," 
Nicol observes, " be sown without taking this precaution, or something similar, the plants will not be 
fruitful J but will run much to vines, and show chiefly male blossoms." 

3286. Sowing. Abercrombie says, " Having moulded the bed, and proved the heat, 
sow in pans three inches, or pots four inches, deep, rather than in the earth of the bed. 
Sow a second portion in five or seven days, to provide against failure. Do not at once 
plunge the pots to the rims." (Pr. G. p. 108.) 

3287. Treatment till removed to the fruiting-jnt. " As soon as the plants appear, give 
air cautiously ; guarding the aperture with matting at night, and on frosty or gloomy 
days. At favorable opportunities, wipe the condensed steam from the glasses. When 
the seed-leaves are about half an inch broad, prick the plants into small pots five inches 
in diameter, three in each pot, giving a little aired water just to the roots ; then plunge 
the pots into the earth of the hot-bed partially, or to tlie rims, according to the heat. 
Admit fresh air, every day in moderate weather, at the upper end of the lights, raised an 
inch or two, according to the temperature of the external air ; more freely when sunny 
than cloudy ; shutting closer, or quite close, as the afternoon advances towards evening, 
or sooner, if the weather changes cuttingly cold ; and cover the glasses every night with 
mats, and uncover in the morning, as soon as the sun is high enough to reach the frames. 
Give occasionally a very light watering, when the earth appears dry. As the plants 
advance into the first rough leaves, the first runner-bud in the centre should be stopped, 
by cutting or pincMng the top off, close to the first or second joint ; an operation which 
strengthens the plants, and promotes the lateral issue of fruitful runners. Be careful to 
support a regular tenor of heat in the bed, by laying, first, an outward casing of straw- 
litter round the sides, to defend it from the weather ; afterwards, if the heat declines, 
remove the above casing ; and apply a moderate lining of hot dung to one or more of 
the sides. In matting at night, be careful not to drive the rank stem of the linings into 
the beds, by letting the ends of the mats hang down." 

3288. Fruiting-bed. Form it as directed for the cucumber-bed, but six inches deeper; 
M'Phail says, " four feet high, and after it has stood about a week, tread it down and 
make it level, and set the frames upon it." 

3289. Moulding the bed. Abercrombie directs to " mould it by degrees to eight, t^i, 
or twelve inches' depth ; first laying the compost in little hills of that thickness, one under 
each light, with the intervals earthed only two or three inches, for the present, till the 
general heat is moderated." M'Phail lays in under each light a small hill of earth about 
one foot high. 

3290. Planting. When the earth of the hills is warmed by the heat of the bed, and 
the plants liave leaves two or three inches broad, or have begun to push lateral runners. 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MELON. 



5&3 



turn them out of the pots, " with the ball of earth entire : set a ball containing one 
plant, in the middle of each hill, inserted clean over the ball ; or set at most two plants 
under the centre of a large light. After planting, give a gentle watering over the hills 
and round the roots, avoiding to wet the shanks of the plants : shut down the glasses 
close, till the heat and steam arise ; then give air moderately. Extend a slight shade 
over the glasses in the middle part of warm summer days, if the plants shrink or flag 
their leaves, before fully rooted in the bills ; which they will be in two, three, or four 
days after planting. " 

3291. Temperature. The melon requires a minimum heat of about 65° from the 
time of germination till that of fructification, and a heat of about 75^ to fruit in, 

{Abercrombie. ) 

3292. M'Phail, as appears from the taMes in his Gardener's Remembrancer^ kept his melon and cucum- 
ber frames at the same temperature ; stating, that if any person keep melons or cucumber-plants in the 
same degrees of heat, they will not fail of success. (3248,) 

3293. Nicol's medium heat for melons is 70°. 

3294. Heat from linings of dung. The proper temperature must be kept up by repeated linings, at least 
till the middle of July. After that, sun-heat may suffice to ripen the crop. Till this season, the greatest 
care must be taken not to burn or over-heat the plants. M'Phail says, " Examine daily with your hand 
the heat of the bed, pushing your fingers into the dung immediately under the hills of earth in which the 
plants grow; and if you find the heat likely to be too powerful, pour cold water all round the bottom of 
the hills of earth, to lower the heat of the bed. Remember this must be daily attended to till the heat 
of the bed be so declined in the middle, that the roots of the plants be in no danger of being hurt by 
the heat of the dung under them. In case this necessary precaution has been neglected till the heat 
immediately under the stems of the plants has become too hot, pour plenty of water, 80" warm, round 
about on the sides of the hills in which the plants grow, and among the stems of the plants, which will 
bring the earth and dung immediately under the plants to the same degree of heat as the water which 
is poured into it Wheii the heat in the middle of the bed becomes so cool, that there is no fear of its 
being too great for the roots of the plants, watering that part of the bed to keep the burning heat down, 
of course, must cease, and as the roots of the plants extend, earth may be added to the hills. As soon 
as the heat of the bed declines, linings must be applied to it, which will set it into a fresh fermentation, 
and then the surface upon the bed must be examined occasionally, by pushing the hand into it in 
different parts, and when a burning heat is felt, pour in some water as before directed. In this way you 
should persevere, still keeping a strong h«at in the linings. Remember that the surface of the bed all 
round about the hills should be left uncovered with earth, and the dung should be loosened occasionally, 
to let the heat rise freely to nourish the plants. Melons will do without heat in the linings in July ; 
but I found by experience, that they do better by keeping a heat in the linings all the summer. If a 
heat be kept on constantly in the linings, and the plants watered sufficiently, they will continue to pro- 
duce fruit till (±ie middle of October." 

3295. Air. As long as weak steam is perceived to rise from the bed, leave an aper- 
ture, even at night, for it to escape ; guarding against the influx of cold air by a curtain 
of matting. Admit fresh air to the plants by tilting the glasses more or less at the most 
favorable hours in a mild dry day. After the bed has come to a sweet heat, shut down 
close at night. As the fruit enlarges, it becomes more necessary to seize every proper 
opportunity of admitting air ; raising the lights from one to four inches, according to the 
season, the heat of the bed, and temperature of the external air ; shutting close, if that 
should turn cold, and always timely towards evening. As confirmed summer approaches, 
admit air still more freely. 

3296. Nicol says, " Air should be freely admitted, though not in such quantity as for the cucumbers, 
which do not require so high a temperature as melons do. In sunshine, however, the mercury in the 
thermometer should be kept down, by the admission of air, to about 80° or 75°." 

3297. M'Phail says, " Look into your melons in the morning, and if there is a dew on them standing 
like little beads round the edges of the young leaves, it is a good sign ; but if there is no dew on them, in 
the form I have described, they are not in a very prosperous condition. The air in the frames is not 
sweet : they either want water, or sprinklings of water, or else the heat of the air in the frames is too 
great in the night. In hot weather, melons are better to have air left at them all night, and in very warm 
weather to take the glasses entirely off in the evening, and put them on again in the morning: by this 
means the plants will get a refreshment from the dew in the night." 

3298. Water. After the pVants are placed on the hills, give opportunely gentle wa- 
terings, increasing them as the season and the growth of the plants advance. " Water 
circumspectly and scantily while the fruit is setting or young in growth, as too much 
moisture would make it decay. Take a warm morning for watering, before the middle 
of May ; in summer, the afternoon, or evening. Use soft water warmed to the air of 
the frame ; and let as little as possible fall on the setting or new-set young fruit ; nor 
much near the main head of the plants, for fear of rotting that part. Shut down the 
lights after watering, for a short time ; and if in the morning, and a strong sun, 
spread a mat over, to prevent the sun from injuring the plants by acting on the water 
lodged on the spray and leaves. As a strong steam will now arise, remove the mats in 
an hour or two, and raise the glasses at the top, to give vent to the steam and admit air 
to the plants. As the fruit becomes nearly ripe, lessen the quantity of water given, 
barely keeping the plant from flagging ; and withhold water when the fruit begins to 
turn color." 

3299. Nicol says, water once in four or five days in the afternoon, watering over the foliage. Repeat 
them oftener as the season and the growth of the plants and fruit advance, in order to swell it off' the 
better. (Kal. p. 387.) 

3300, M'Phail says, " If the weather is warm and dry, the melons will probably sometimes require 
water twice a-week : if the weather is wet and cloudy, they will not require it so often." (G. Bern. 

P p 4 



5S4 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



rAHT III. 



p. 300.) It is probaWe considerable advantage would be obtained by the use of liquid i>lgeons' dung ma- 
nure, as in the case of the cucumber. (Sec 3224.) 

3301. Knight, finding that the leaves of melons sustained great injury from tlie weight of tiie water 
falling from the watering-pot, pours the water on the tiles which cover the surface of the bed. 

3302. Earthing. Perform this operation as directed for the cucumber, after the heat 
of the dung has become moderate, earthing up by degrees the intervals between tlie hills, 
till the depth of the earth becomes equal. Eight or ten inches' deptli of earth, M'Phail 
states to be enough for the roots of the plants to run in, provided the bed, or fermenting 
mass beneath, be made of leaves of trees, or of dung vi'ell prepared ; for if the bed under 
the earth be in a good state, the roots will gi-ow into it, and draw from thence consider- 
able nourishment to the plants. The roots of the melon do not naturally run deep ; 
they extend horizontally, not far from the surface, especially in forcing-frames, where 
the moist warm air is more confined than in the open atmosphere. In early forcing, 
leave unfilled up with earth a space of about seven or eight inches wide against the in- 
side of the frames, immediately adjoining the hot linings., " By this method the heat 
of the linings does more powerfully warm the air in the frames than if the earth was made 
level home to the sides of the boards of the frames to which the linings adjoin. But if 
melons be not planted earlier than the month of May, this precaution need not be at- 
tended to, unless the weather prove uncommonly cold, and but little sunshine." (G. Rem. 
p. 63.) 

3303. Training. As the plants advance into the first runners, three or four joints in 
length, if no fruit be shown, stop them at the third joint, in order that they may produce 
fruijtful laterals ; and as the runners extend, train them over the surface of the bed with neat 
pegs. Many of these runners, as the plant proceeds, will show embryo fruit at the 
joints ; but a great many barren ones are occasionally produced, and hence it becomes 
necessary to regulate them. Abercrombie says, " Cut out the superfluous, unfruitful, 
or evidently useless shoots, especially the very weak and the most luxuriant; for the 
middle-sized are the most fertile." 

3304. Nicol says, melons should bo kept moderately thin of vines, though not so thin as cucumbers, 
(the foliage being smaller,) which should never be much lopped at a time, as they are also apt to bleed. 
All bruised, damp, or decayed leaves should be carefully picked off as they appear, and the plants 
should be cleaned from weeds, and other rubbish that may be conveyed into the frames by the wind, or 
otherwise. 

33()5. JSrPhail directs to "cut out of the melon-frames all superfluous or decaying shoots. Stop the 
shoots a joint or two before the fruit, and ako cut off the ends of the long running shoots immediately 
before a showing fruit, if there is a leading shoot coming out by the side of it ; for you ought to remem- 
ber always in pruning melons, that a fruit will not swell well except there be a growing shoot before 
it ; and this shoot, which is called a leader, because it leads or draws the sap from the roots to and past 
the fruit, should be stopped before a joint that will, if the plant is in good health, sprout out again. 
Do not let your plants get too full of leaves ; and cut off the oldest and worst leaves first. This ought 
to be done, at least once or twice a-wcek ; by which method they will be nearly always in one medium 
state of thinness, and the plants and fruit will derive advantages which they would be deprived of 
were they to be suffered to become over-crowded with leaves and shoots, and then a great many cut 
out at one time. If melons are of a large kind, no more than one or two fruit should be left on a plant 
to swell off at one time ; if smaller, three or four fruit may be left." (G. lievi. p. 278.) 

3306. Knight, in an ingenious and philosophical paper on the culture of the melon, states, that his 
crops of melons failed, because watering over the foliage, pruning, weeding, &c. had removed 
the leaves on the extended branches, from their proper position, and these leaves being heavy, broad, 
slender, and feeble, on long foot-stalks, were never able to regain it. " In consequence a large portion 
of that foliage which preceded, or was formed at the same period witli the blossoms, and which nature 
intended to generate sap to feed the fruit, became diseased and sickly, and consequently out of office, 
before the fruit acquired maturity." To remedy this defect, the plants were placed at greater distances 
from each other, viz. one plant of the salonica variety, to each light of six feet long by four feet wide. The 
earth was covered with tiles, and the branches trained in all directions, and hooked down over them with 
pegs. They were thus secured from being disturbed from their first position ; the leaves were held erect, 
and at an equal distance from the glass, and enabled, if slightly moved from their proper position, to re- 
gain it. " I, however, still found that the leaves sustained great injury from the weight of the water fall- 
ing from the watering-.pot ; and I therefore ordered tlie water to be poured from a vessel of a proper con- 
struction, upon the brick tiles, between the leaves, without at all touching them ; and thus managed, 
I had the pleasure to see that the foliage remained erect and healthy. The fruit also grew with very ex- 
traordinary rapidity, ripened in an unusually short time, and acquired a degree of perfection, which I had 
never previously seen. As soon as a sufficient quantity of fruit (between twenty and thirty pounds) on 
each plant is set, I would recommend the further production of foliage to be prevented, by pinching off 
the lateral shoots as soon as i)roduced, wherever more foliage cannot be exposed to the light. No part of 
the full-grown leaves should ever be destroyed before the fruit is gathered, unless they injure each other, 
by being too much crowded togeth&r : for each leaf, when full grown, however distant from the fruit, and 
growing on a distinct branch of the plant, still contributes to its support ; and hence it arises that when a 
plant has as great a number of growing fruit upon part of its branches, as it is capable of feeding, the 
blossoms upon other branches, which extend in an opposite direction, prove abortive." {Hort. Trans, vol. i.) 
In another paper {Hori. Trans, v. 238.) Ave find this ingenious horticulturist describing his mode of grow- 
ing melons in large pots, and training the shoots on a trellis, fifteen inches under the glass. A mode evi- 
dently less certain of success, and more expensive than the common mode : but it is good to try every thing. 

3307. Setting. As the fruit-bearers come into blossom, you may assist the setting of 
the fruit, by impregnating some of the female blossoms with the male flowers, as de- 
scribed for the cucumber. The melon, however, will also set naturally, and produce 
fertile seeds, if the time of fructification fall at a season when the glasses can be left almost 
constantly open. [Aber.) Nicol says, he has proved experimentally, that melons not 
impregnated will not swell off so fair and handsome as impregnated ones", and, therefore, 
considers it more necessary to attend to this operation in melons than in cucumbers. 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MELON. 



585 



" Therefore, let nature be assisted in this work, " considering that she is more under re- 
straint here, than if the plants grew in the open air, where the wind, insects, and oUaer 
casualties, might help." (^Kal. p. 384.) 

3308. Care of the fruit. As the fruit increases to the size of a walnut, place a flat tile 
or slate under each, to protect it from the damp of the earth ; the slab thus interposed 
will also assist the fruit to ripen, by reflecting the rays of the sun. [Abercrovibie.) 

3309. M'Phail says, " The fruit should lie upon dry tiles, stones, or slates, and no leaves or shoots 
ought to be suffered to lie upon it. When the fruit is young, it is better to have a gentle shade of leaves ; 
but when it is full swelled, it should be entirely exposed to the sun." 

3.310. Nicol advises placing the fruit on bits of slate or glass some time before it begins to ripen, as the 
flavor might else be tainted ; but by no means slate or moss the whole surface of the bed, lest you encourage 
the red spider. " Think on the reflection of the sun upon the slates or tiles, in hot weather particularly, 
and of his additional force in shining through glass ! It is more consonant to the nature of the plants that 
they be trained on the earth. By mossing the surface, the indolent may find a pretext, as it, no doubt, in 
some measure, lessens the labor of watering. But it is wrong to do so, in so far as it harbors and encou- 
rages the breeding of various insects ; and, as the fruit approach to maturity, taints it by unpleasant 
eflauvia." 

3311. Time of maturation. The interval between the setting of the fruit and perfect 
maturity is generally from thirty to forty days ; but the plants in the same bed, and 
the vines on the same plant, often show some difference in the time of reaching maturity. 
(^Abercrombie.) 

331 '2. Cutting the fruit. " Ripe melons are distinguished by their full size ; sometimes 
by turning yellowish, more constantly by imparting an agreeable odor ; often by the 
base of the foot-stalk, close to the fruit, cracking in a little circle. On these indications 
of maturity, the fruit should be cut, before too mellow or dead ripe, that it may eat with 
a lively sharp flavor. The morning is the time for cutting." 

3313. Nicol observes that " melons, if allowed to remain on the plant till they be of a deep yellow color, 
lose much of their flavor. They should, therefore, be cut as soon as they begin to change to a greenish, 
yellow, or rather, as soon as they begin to smell ripe. They may lie in the frame for a day or two, if not 
immediately wanted, where they will acquire sufficient color. But if they are let remain many days in the 
frame, they will become as insipid as if they had been left too long on the plant." 

3314. Saving seed. The ordinary mode is to request the seeds of particularly fine 
fruits, of approved sorts, to be returned from table. The best way, however, is to pick 
some best ripe fruit, take out the seed, clean it from the pulp, and let it be well dried 
and hardened ; and then put it up in papers. {Abercrombie.) Nicol says, wash it very 
clean, skimming off the light seeds, as those only that sink in water will grow. {Kal. 
p. 396.) Great care must be taken that the sorts, from which seeds are saved, are 
genuine and distinct. When different sorts are planted in the same frame, this cannot 
be the case. 

3315. Second croj) from the same plants. " When the fruit of the first crop is off, a 
second crop may be obtained from the stools ; which often proves more productive than 
the first. If the first crop is taken before the middle of June, the second will come in 
at a very good time. For this purpose, as soon as the fruit is cut, prune the plant. 
Shorten the vigorous healthy runners at a promising joint, to force out new laterals ; 
cutting about two inches above the joint. At the same time take off all decayed or 
sickly vines, and all dead leaves. Stir the surface of the mould ; and renew it partially, 
by three inches depth of fresh compost. Water the plant copiously ; shutting down the 
glasses for the night. Shade in the middle of hot days ; and give but little air until the 
plant has made new radicles and shoots. Afterwards repeat the course of culture above 
described, from the stage when the first runners are sent out till fruit is cut." 

3316. Nicol says, " When all the fruit of this crop are cut, suppose in three or four weeks, the plants 
may be pruned for the production of a second crop, equal, and perhaps superior to the first. They should 
be cut pretty much in, in order to cause them to push jilenty of new vines, which wiU be very fruitful ; 
observing to cut always at a joint of some promise, and to thin out all decayed or unhealthy vines, dead 
leaves. Sec. Observe, also, to cut at an inch or two above the joint you expect to push, and then to bruise 
the end of the stem so lopped with the thumb and finger ; which will, in a great measure, prevent it from 
bleeding. The plants should be shaded from the mid-day sun, for a week or ten days ; exposing them to 
his fuU rays by degrees. Now, also, let tlje mould in the frame be well watered, in order to put the roots 
in a state of active vegetation ; point over the surface, with a small stick, or little wedge ; and cover the 
whole with about two inches of fresh mould. This will greatly encourage the plants, and cause them to 
make new fibres near the surface. At this period air need not be admitted very freely, especially while 
the glasses are covered ; but, rather, as it were, endeavor to force the plants into new life. After they 
begin to shoot, water, admit air, prune, train, and otherwise manage the plants as before directed. If the 
season be fine they may yield you a third crop, by a repetition of the above rules, coming in in September, 
which might be very gratifying. I once had fifty-two full-sized fruit produced in a three-light frame, a 
second crop, and two dozen a third, ofF the same plants, the early golden cantaleupe. Of the first crop 
(twenty-six fruit) two were cut the 10th of May. Thus, a three-light box produced, in one season, 102 
full-matured melons." 

3317. M'Phail says, " If you intend to have melons as long as there is a sufficiency of sun to ripen them 
tolerably weU, you had best put linings of warm dung to some of your beds. These, if applied in time 
and kept on, will cast a fresh heat into the beds, and with other necessary assistance, the plants will grow 
as long as you want them." 

3318. La'e crop on old hot-beds. To ripen melons, not earlier than the month of 
August, M'Phail " generally made beds of dung which had first been used for linings 
to the early cucumber and melon beds. For this pui-pose, this kind of dung is better than 



586 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paet hi. 



new dung, because it does not heat violently, and for a considerable time keeps its heat. 
Leaves of trees make very good melon-beds, but they do not produce heat enough alone 
for linings ; but of whatever materials melon-beds be made, the air in the frames among 
the plants should be kept sweet and strong, otherwise the plants will not grow freely. 
It may be known whether the air be sweet or whether it be not, by putting the head in 
under the lights, and smelling it. But it frequently happens to be difficult to bring 
dung-beds into a requisite state of kindliness for these delicate plants, for if the dung by 
any means get and retain too much water before its noxious vapors pass off by evaporation, 
it will stagnate and become sour, and, until these pernicious qualities be removed, which 
requires time and patience, the plants will not grow kindly ; and besides this, although 
corrupted stinking air hinders the growth of plants of the melon kind, it greatly promotes 
the health and forwards the breeding of diiferent kinds of insects, which feed upon and 
otherways hurt fruits, and plants, and esculent vegetables of various kinds." 

3319. Culture of melons in a dung-pit. " A glazed pit to receive either stable-dung, 
leaves, or tanners' bark, is calculated to ripen superior fine fruit. The well of the pit 
may be formed either by a nine-inch wall, or by strong planking ; a yard in depth, from 
six to eight feet wide, and in length from ten to twenty feet, or more, as required. 
A low glass case is to be fitted to it, adapted to the growth of the melon. Having 
raised the plants in a small seed-bed as for the frame crop, ridge them out into the pit in 
the usual manner. Give the proper subsequent culture ; and when the strength of the 
fermenting mass begins to decline, add linings outside the pit, if enclosed by boards ; 
but if enclosed by a nine-inch wall, cut away as much of the dung and earth within, and 
throw it out, as will admit a lining of well tempered dung." [Abercromhie.) 

3320. Culture of melons in a flued pit. One such as that proper for the nursing-pinery is 
here understood ; and the plants being raised in the usual way, and the bed, whether fiUed 
with dung, tan, or leaves, or a mixture of these, being moulded, plant about the end of July. 
Nicol prefers for such late crops " the early golden cantaleupe, the orange cantaleupe, and 
the netted cantaleupe, planting a part of the pit with each. A very mild bottom heat is 
sufficient for the purpose here in view ; and if the pit have been occupied in the forcing of 
asparagus, French beans, or strawberries, on a bark, or bark and dung, or on a bark and leaf 
heat, it will require no other preparation than to be stirred up, and have a little fresh 
materials added ; keeping the fresh bark, dung, or leaves well down, and finishing the bed 
with some of the smallest and best reduced. When it has settled a few days, let it be 
moulded all over to the thickness of twelve or fifteen inches ; previously laying on a little 
more of the above small materials, in order to keep the plants well up to the glass, as the 
bed will fall considerably in the settling. It should be formed, and the mould should be 
laid on, in a sloping manner, from back to front, so as in some measure to correspond 
with the glasses. All being ready for the plants, they may either be planted in a row in 
the middle of the pit, at two feet apart, or may be planted in two rows at four feet apart; 
or, if they have been planted, in nursing, three in a pot, plant in the centre of each light, 
as directed for the common hot-bed in March. Let them have a little water, and be 
shaded from the sun for a few days ; exposing them to his rays by degrees. The future 
management of the plants differs in nothing from that of melons in a hot-bed, till Sep- 
tember, when it will be proper to apply fire-heat. About the beginning of September, 
it will be proper to apply fire-heat, in order to further the progress of the late fruit, 
and to dry off damps. Let the fires be made very moderate at first, however, and 
increase their strength, as the season becomes more cold and wet. Keep the mercury 
up to about 70° in the night ; and in the day, by the admission of air, keep it down to 
about 80^ or 75°. Very little water will now suffice for the plants, as their roots will 
be fully established, and be spread over the whole bed ; the heat of which will also now 
have subsided. They should only, therefore, have a little water once in eight or ten days ; 
and, as the fruit begin to ripen off, entirely withhold it. Keep the plants moderately thin 
of vines and foliage ; be careful to pick off all damped leaves as they appear ; and fully 
expose the fruit to the sun as it ripens, in the manner directed for melons in the hot-bed. 
In this manner, I have often had melons in October and November, fully swelled, and in 
good, but not of course in high perfection, for want of sun to give them flavor. Any who 
have a pit of this kind, however, for the forcing of early vegetables, strawberries, flowers, 
&c. cannot, perhaps, occupy it to a better purpose in the latter part of the season ; as the 
trouble is but little, and the expense not worth mentioning." {Kal.) 

3321. Culture of melons in M^PhaiVs hrick-bed. The inventor of this pit says, "For 
the purpose of raising melons early, for many years I cultivated them on a brick-bed, on 
the same construction as that which I invented for rearing early cucumbers, excepting 
only that through the pit of each three-light box I carried no cross flues. In each three- 
light division I made the pit about three feet six inches wide, and ten feet long, and three 
feet deep below the surface of the flues. When this bed was first set to work, I had the 
pits filled level with the surface of the flues with well feimented dung, or with the dung 
of old linings from the cucumber-beds. On the surface of the dung in the pits, I had 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MELON. 



• 587 



laid about ten inches thick of good earth, in a ridge of about twenty inches wide, from 
one end of the pit to the other. When this was done, I made a lining round the bed, and 
as soon as the earth became warm, I set the plants into the ridge of earth, and gave them 
a little water, and kept a strong heat in the frames, and filled up the pit gradually as the 
roots and plants extended themselves. The dung or leaves of trees in the pit require not 
to be changed every year, neither need the earth for the plants be removed entirely every 
season, for by experience I found it to do very well by digging and mixing with it some 
fresh earth and manure in winter, and exposing it to the rains, the frost, and the snow. 
In forcing melons early, the surface of the cross flues, as well as of the surrounding or 
outside ones, should be kept bare of mould till the days in spring get long, which will let 
the heat of the linings arise freely through the covers of the flues to warm the air among 
the plants. After the cross flues are covered with earth, those which surround each frame 
may be left uncovered till the month of Mayor June." (G. Rem. p. 64.) The culture in 
the brick-bed is in other respects the same as that already given for melons in frames, and 
cucumbers in brick-beds. (3238.) 

3322. Culture under hand-glasses. A succession, or late crop, to fruit in August and 
September, may be raised on hot-bed ridges under hand-glasses. 

S323. Sow in a hot-bed, from the middle of March to the middle of April. When the plants have been 
up a few days, while in the seed leaves, prick some into small pots, two plants in each : water, and plunge 
them into the hot-bed ; managing, as directed for the young frame-plants, till the rough leaves are 
from two to four inches long, and ready to shoot into runners. From the middle of March to the third 
week of May, when the plants are a month or five weeks old, they will be fit to ridge out under hand- 
glasses. 

3324. Fonrdug the bed. With well prepared stable-dung, or, with a mixture of fermented tree-leaves, 
build the hot-bed four feet wide, and two feet and a half thick, the length according to the number of 
glasses intended, allotting the space of four feet to each. In a week or ten days, or when the dung, or 
dung and leaves, is brought to a sweet well tempered heat, mould the bed ten or twelve inches thick j 
then place the glasses along the middle, and keep them close till the bed has warmed the earth. 

3325. Planting. The same, or next day, insert the plants : turn them out from the pots with the ball of 
earth entire ; and, allotting plants for each glass, insert the ball into the earth clean down over the top 
cosing the mould about the stems. Give a little water, and place the glasses over close. 

. Routine culture. From about nine in the morning till three in the afternoon, of the first two or 
three days, shade the plants till they have taken root ; when admit the sun more freely ; yet only by de- 
grees from day to day, till they can bear it fully without flagging much. Give air daily, in temperate 
weather, by tilting the edge of the glasses, on the south side, an inch or two : but in the present stage of 
the plants, shut close at night. Cover with mats till morning ; constantly keeping the glasses over- Give 
occasional moderate waterings, with aired water. Cover in the day-time with mats, in bad weather, or 
heavy or cold rains ; and continue the night-covering till confirmed summer in July. Meanwhile, attend 
to the heat of the bed : if this be declined, so that the minimum temperature be not 65*' at night, with the 
aid of matting, line the sides with hot dung, covered with a layer of mould. The revived heat from the 
lining will forward the plants in fruiting ; while the earth at top, will enlarge the surface for the runners, 
and the bed for the roots. When the runners have extended considerably, and filled the glasses, they 
must be trained out. Accordingly, at the beginning of June, in favorable settled warm weather, train out 
the runners ; cutting away dwindling and useless crowding shoots : then the glasses must be raised all 
round, two or three inches, upon props, to remain day and night. Cover with mats in cold nights and bad 
weather ; having, to support the mats, first arched the bed over with rods or hoop-bands. Apply moderate 
waterings, as necessary, in the morning or afternoon. Oiled-paper frames, formed either archwise, or with 
two sloping sides, about two feet or two and a half high, and of the width of the bed, are very serviceable 
in this stage. Some persons use them from the first, under a deficiency of hand-glasses. But the proper 
time for recourse to them is when the plants have been forwarded in hand-glasses, till the runners require 
training out beyond the limits of the glasses, some time in June : then removing the glasses, substitute 
the oiled frames. As these paper screens will entirely cover the bed and plants, over which they are to 
remain the rest of the season, they will afford protection from heavy rains or tempests, as well as from 
nocturnal cold, and also screen the plants ftom the excessive heat of the sun, while, being pellucid, they 
admit its influence of light and warmth effectually. Give proper admission of free air below, and occa- 
sional watering. With respect, however, to the crop, for which no oiled-paper frames have been -provided, 
continue the hand-glasses constantly on the bed, over the main head and stem of the plants, throughout 
the season, to defend those capital parts from casual injuries by the weather. Throughout June, and 
thence to the decline of summer, be careful, if much rain, or other unfavorable weather, or cold nights 
occur, to shelter the beds occasionally with an awning of mats or canvass ; particularly when the plants are 
in blossom. Likewise, turn in some of the best full-set exterior fruit under the glasses ; or some spare 
glasses might be put over the outside melons, to forward them without check to maturity. 

3327. Crop. Some will be ready to cut in July, others in August the more general time, and in Sep- 
tember ; they being generally, after setting, from thirty to forty days in ripening. The crop coming in at 
the decline of summer will not ripen well, unless guarded from cold at nights, and assisted by linings. The 
pomes that do not ripen may be used as substitutes for mangoes. 

3328. Culhire on wide ridges. The fruiting-bed may be made six, seven, or eight feet 
wide, for the plants to have an ample surface for their extending runners ; defended 
either with a regular frame and glasses of proportionate dimensions, or with a case formed 
of inch-and-half boarding, ranged connectedly along both sides of the bed, without any 
internal cross divisions other than top cross bars, to stay the sides, and support the 
glasses. ( Abercrombie. ) 

3329. Cidture on sloping banks. Williams, of Pilmaston, has for several years been 
trying to give increased hardiness to the melon, by growing it in the open air. He does 
not state what varieties he grows, but his bed {fg. 463.) is placed on the open ground (a, 
a), and is formed of a row of wooden posts, three feet six inches high, to the south 
face of which boards are nailed (6). The surface of the bed is an inclined plane, fronting 
the south ; covered with slates laid upon the mould, and not overlapping. There is 
anotlier row of posts (</, d), two feet six inches high, to which boards are nailed on 



588 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




the north face, fontiiug a space (e, e) three feet wide, extending the whole length of 
the bed on its north side, and 
this is fdled with mowings of 
grass, weeds, fallen leaves, 
haulm, and other refuse of 
the garden. The melon-plants 
if) g''Ow on the inclined plane, 
beneath which is old spent 
tanners' bark trodden hard (g), 
and over it nine inches of me- 
lon soil. The plants are placed 
on this bed in May, under 
hand-glasses; the shoots, as 
they advance, are pegged down ; 
fruit is cut in August, and from that time till the plants are killed by frost in October. 
{Hurt. Trans, v. 346.) 

3S30. Insects and diseases. To prevent melon-plants from being infested vnth insects, 
or injured by disease of any kind, no better metliod can be adopted than to keep the 
plants constantly in a healthy, vigorous, growing state ; for this purpose, M'Phail ob- 
serves, " they must be constantly attended to, gi\ing them plenty of heat and water. In 
wai-m weather, in the spring and in summer, they should be watered occasionally all 
over their fruit and leaves, till the earth in which they grow be thoroughly moistened, 
and a stronger heat than usual kept in the frames about the plants for a few hours ; also 
the lights should be shut down every afternoon, with a good strong heat among tlie 
plants. If there be sufficient moisture in the earth, the greatest sun-heat in the afternoon 
will not hurt the plants, but it might scorch the sides of large fruit exposed to the sun- 
beams operating upon the glass, which should be guarded against. The frames and 
lights should be kept clean, and painted over once every other year. 

3331. Mildew and canker. " Melon-plants are subject to be infected and hurt by the mildew and by 
the canker. These diseases come upon them because they are not in a good climate, they have not a 
sufficiency of heat, or the dung and earth of the bed is in a stagnated state. Melon-plants are liable 
to be greatly injured by the red spider, which increaseth surprisingly in hot dry weather. As I said 
before, nothing will prevent plants from the inroads of disease and insects but heat, sweet air, and a 
sufficiency of water, which sweetens the atmosphere, and makes it healthy for vegetables as weU as for 
animals. And nothing will eradicate disease and insects from melon-plants but good management, strong 

■ heat, and plenty of water given all over them. Diseased plants, or plants much infested with insects, cannot 
produce good healthy fruit. The mildew is a most pernicious disease to all sorts of plants. On melons it 
generally makes its first appearance on the oldest leaves, and on the extremities of the young shoots. 
The cause of it, I apprehend, is unhealthy nourishment comprehended in the elements, or their not har- 
monising in the promotion of the growth of the plant; for by practitioners it may be obser^-ed, that 
when a dung hot-bed gets into a stagnated sour state, the plants do not grow kindly, the air in the frames 
is saturated with unhealthy particles, and so also must be the juices drawn into the plants by their roots. 
These must breed diseases, if preventive means be not applied. It cannot be reasonably supposed that 
plants of a delicate nature will continue in a healthy state, growing upon a heap of stinking dung, and in 
confined air." 

3332. Bed spider. " When melon-plants have become diseased, or much infested with the red spider, 
they should either be destroyed or effectual means used to cure them. To destroy the plants is easy; to 
cure them, let the following methods be put in practice : get plenty of horse-dung thrown up in a large 
heap, turn it over once or twice, shaking and mixing it well, and let it lie till its rankness be somewhat 
evaporated, and if there be linings at the beds, take them entirely away ; examine the dung of the beds, 
and if it be wet and has a bad smell, take a sharp-pointed stake, and make holes all round in the sides 
of the beds into their centre, in such a slanting way that the water may easily run out of them ; then 
make a strong lining of the prepared dung all round the beds, and by occasional augmentations keep up 
the linings nearly to a level with the surface of the earth in which the plants grow. As soon as the 
linings have cast a strong heat into the beds, scatter some flour of sulphur all over the plants, and keep as 
strong a heat in the frame as the plants can bear ; a heat of 120 degrees will not destroy them, if the steam 
of the linings be prevented from getting in among the plants. Water the plants all over their leaves about 
once a-week with clean water 100 degrees warm, and if the sun shine, keep the lights close shut down all 
day, and cover them up in the evening, leaving a little air all night at each light, to prevent a stagnation 
of air among the plants. Continue this process till the mildew and the insects disappear, and the plants 
appear to grow freely, and afterwards manage them in the usual way, taking care to keep up a good 
strong heat in the linings. This method sets the old stagnated bed in a fermentation, which makes the 
moisture run out of it, and dries it so, that water given to the plants has free liberty to pass off. If the 
linings do not heat the air in the frames sufficiently, let some of the earth in the inside all round the sider 
of the boards be removed, to let the heat from the linings rise freely in the frame." 



Sect. VIII. Forcing the Strawberry in Hot-houses, Pits, and Hot-beds. 
3333. The strawberry is forced in every description of forcing-house, and also in die 
pinery, though the heat of the latter often prevents the setting of tlie blossoms. Where 
they are forced in large quantities, it is a good method to apply a pit to their sole culti- 
vation. M'Phail says, " They will occasionally do well in a hot-house for growing the 
pine ; but a heat sufficient to force peaches and nectarines is more natural, and likely to 
secure the obtaining of good crops of fine fruit. A good way of forcing the strawberry," 
he adds, " is to bring them forward in a gentle heat in melon-frames, till the fruit be 
nearly about half swelled, and then to give them a stronger heat to ripen them." {Gr. 
Rem. 29.) Nicol thinks " the climate of the cherry-house most suitable to the nature 



GooK I. FORCING THE STRAWBERRY IN HOT-HOUSES, &c. 589 

of strawberries ; they will do well in a hot-bed ; but the best metliod is to force them in 
flued pits, such as that for nursing pines." 

3334. Soil. All agree that strawberries to be forced in pots require a strong and a very 
rich loamy earth. 

3335. Choice of sorts. Abercrombie and Nicol recommend the alpine and scarlet 
Virginia ; to which Nicol adds the wood strawberry. Morgan (Hurt. Trans, vol. ii. 
p. 376.) begins with the alpines ; next he takes the Bath scarlets and common scarlets; 
and after these the pines. 

3336. Potting and jrreparation of the plants. Abercrombie says, the plants selected 
should be two years old, having attained a full bearing state. It conduces to the per- 
fection of the fruit, to put as many plants as are intended to be forced into pots, that 
they may be previously nursed for a longer or shorter time, according to the age of tlie 
stool. 

3337. New runners of the present summer may be potted in July and August and nursed in pots for 
two seasons, having the blossoms pinched ofF in the second. This course of preparation is attended with 
most trouI)le : but the crop repays it. Three offsets may be planted in one large pot. 

3338. Runners made last year may be potted in April, and then plunged in the earth, to be nursed 
throughout the growing season with a view to forcing, having such blossoms as appear pinched off, while 
the roots are carefully watered. 

3339. Stools of two years' standing, which have borne one crop, may be put into pots in August, Septem- 
ber or October. They may also be put into pots during any mild interval from the beginning of Novem- 
ber, till the end of the year ; but they will not be so strong and well rooted. The method of potting established 
bearers is this. The pots should be twenty-fours or thirty-twos ; provide at the same time some fresh 
and good rich loam. Put some of the earth, well broken with the spade, and free from grubs or hurtful 
worms, into each pot, to the depth of three or four inches. Then take up the plants, with a ball of earth 
to the root of- each ; pare the ball with a knife till it be pretty round ; and having cleared the stem of the 
plant from any withered or rotten leaves, place it in the pot, which lill up to the surface of the ball with 
the prepared earth. Water the plants as they are potted, and remove them to a warm situation. On the 
approach of winter, all the potted plants, whether established bearers or runners, should be placed under 
a frame, or other sufficient shelter, till the hot-bed or forcing-house is ready to receive them. 

3340. M'Phail says, " Strawberry-plants intended for forcing should be planted in pots eight or ten 
months before they be set into the forcing-house ; or strong plants may be taken up with balls of earth 
about their roots, and be potted and set into the forcing-house immediately." 

3341. Nicol says, " Some force old roots or stools, and others the runners only. Those who force the 
old roots generally lift and pot them about October or November ; lifting a bulk from the bed or row, 
nearly sufficient to fill a nine or ten inch pot, of plants three or more years old. Others plant runners of 
the former year in April, three or four in a large pot, or two in a middle-sized one, and plunge them in 
the earth all summer, giving them occasional waterings, and taking proper care of them. These succeed 
better than old roots, treated as above. But when I was in the practice of forcing strawberries, I used 
to prepare my plants in the following manner : In July or August, I planted runners of that season, three 
in a nine or ten inch pot, watered them, and placed them in the shade for a few days; then plunged 
them to the brim, in a freely exposed situation. In October, their leaves were dressed off, and the plants 
trimmed; and before winter, they were covered with a little dry litter, in order to preserve the pots from 
the effects of frost. The following spring, any flowers that made their appearance were pinched off; and 
throughout the summer, the plants were occasionally refreshed with water, and kept clear from weeds. 
In autumn, the leaves were again dressed off as before ; and when taken up for forcing, the pots were 
dressed, and fresh earthed at top, previous to being placed in the forcing-house. This method of pre- 
paring the plants is no doubt more troublesome than either of the above-mentioned ; but the plants, by 
being completely established, and of a proper age, produce better crops. I have tried all the three ways 
r-jpeatedly, and prefer the last." 

3342. Morgan raises his alpines from seed, sowing in January in frames or boxes, to be placed in a gentle 
heat ; he hardens them after they come up by removal to a cooler situation ; pots in May in pots six inches 
diameter and six inches deep. In October they are in flower, when he puts them under shelter, and in 
the latter end of November he places them in the forcing-house or pinery, where they bear fruit through 
the winter. The scarlets he pots, three plants in a pot, of the same size as those used for the alpines in 
May, or early in June, taking the runners of the previous year ; he picks off the blossoms as they appear, 
and keeps them in a shady place till January, when he places them in the forcing-house on shelves eighteen 
inches from the glass, each pot in a pan. The pine-strawberries he pots in the same manner, and takes 
them into the forcing-house in February or March. 

3343. Time of beginning to force. If the fruit be wanted very early, the plants are 
put in hot- beds, or pits, in Qctober ; but the crops from strawberries so forced, Nicol 
thinks hardly worth the trouble. Abercrombie says, " Begin to force strawberries about 
nine weeks before you want to gather fruit. Plants excited before the first of January 
seldom repay the trouble ; and in proportion as the time of beginning to force approaches 
the vernal equinox, the returns are more abundant. To have a succession, reserve sets 
of potted plants for removal into a house, or frame, every three weeks, till the middle of 
March." He adds, " Strawberries taken into the house in March, fruit in higher per- 
fection than those forced earlier." 

.3344. M'Pkail and Nicol begin in January. The latter observes, " Those who force strawberries to a con- 
siderable extent, perhaps a thousand pots, bring them in, in different successions, perhaps a hundred or 
two at a time ; this is, in places where there are several forcing-houses." {Kal. p. 330.) M'Phail says, 
" When the weather begins to get cold in September, strawberries of the alpine kind in pots may be set 
in a forcing-house or brick frame ; and if they be in good health, they will produce fruit for a considerable 
time. They require only a gentle heat of from 50 to 60 degrees ; give them water occasionally, but as 
there is constantly blossom and fruit on them, they need not be watered all over broad-cast. Give them 
great plenty of air : they only require protection from heavy rains and cold weather." 

3345. Morgan, as we have noticed above (3342.), begins to force alpines in November, the scarlets in 
January, and the pines in February and March. Thus ensuring, as he says, a successional supply of fruit 
from October till June. 

3346. Temperature. Abercrombie says, begin at 40°, and raise the heat as in the cherry-house. When 
a pit is employed, Nicol directs the pots to be plunged in a mild bark-heat ; and the temperature, hy the 
aid of the flues, to be kept at 50°, and 55° or 66° in sunshine. Such treatment will make the plants thrive, 
and the fruit set freely. Morgan prefers beginning with the heat of a frame on dung, or a pit, and the 



590 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



moves to the peach-house ; and, after the fruit is set, removes his plants to ripen in the vinery or stove* 
Scarlets, he finds, bear more heat than the other sorts. 

3347. ylir and water. The former is to be freely admitted in good weather ; and the 
latter plentifully supplied at all times, until the fruit begins to ripen off, Then it is to 
be withheld, lest the flavor become insipid. Morgan prefers supplying it from pans, in 
order not to rot the hearts of the plants. He gives as little water as possible when the 
plants are nearly ripe, this being essential in order to have good-flavored fruit. 

3348. Treatment after gathering the fruit. The strawberry, it is generally considered, 
will not force the year after like fruit-trees ; but must be rested by plunging in the open 
ground for one or two years, pinching off all blossoms as they appear. Williams states, 
that the scarlet strawberry, after affording a crop of fruit in the hot-house early in the 
spring, if carefully removed out of the pots or boxes, and placed in the open ground, will 
yield another crop of fruit in September. The second crop is very abundant, the warm 
rains of July and August proving highly favorable to the growth of the fruit ; and, as there 
is no other strawberry to be had at this season of the year, except the alpine, the addi- 
tion of the scarlet makes a pleasing variety in the dessert." (Hort. Tr. vol. ii. p. 93.) 
Morgan observes, without limiting his observation to any one sort, that " after the fruit 
has been gathered from the plants, the pots should be plunged into a shady border, giving 
them a good watering, and at the same time cutting off the leaves : when thus treated, 
they will, in the year following, produce as good crops in forcing as fresh -potted plants ; 
if not wanted for this purpose, they may be turned out into the natural ground, and will 
then bear a crop in the autumn of the same year, as described by Williams above." 

Sect. IX. Forcing Asparagus in Pits and Hot-beds. 

3349. Asparagus is forced with equal, or with greater success, and with less trouble 
in flued pits than in dung hot-beds. M'Phail recommends his brick-bed for this purpose. 
The roots, Nicol states, may either be forced on bark, or on dung, or on dung and bark. 
But old half-rotten bark, in which there is not much heat, is to be preferred. Next to 
this he uses well fermented dung underneath, and old bark to the thickness of a foot or 
fifteen inches at top. " If dung alone, or a mixture of dung and leaves be used, it 
should be carefully fermented, and should be in a state past heating violently before it 
is put into the pit. In this case, observe to finish the bed with the smallest and driest 
part of the materials." Ross (Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 361.), instead of a warm stratum 
of dung or tan, places his roots on a cold bed of the latter, on which nursing-pines or 
melons have been grown, but which has ceased to ferment. He then applies warm 
linings to the sides, and thus produces the requisite degree of heat. Sabine, having 
seen in Ross's pits, in January, 1817, some of the strongest asparagus he ever noticed at 
that season, concludes, " that the weak and drawn state of forced asparagus is occasioned 
by the action of the dung immediately on its root." He therefore greatly prefers Ross's 
mode. 

3350. Choice of plants. M'Phail says, take roots of any age that bear fine grass. 
Nicol says they should not be under four years old, nor above eight. Abercrombie takes 
plants of two or three years' standing. 

3351. Planting. M'Phail says, " Lay on the surface of the bark-bed from six 
to eight inches of vegetable mould, or any other sort of light earth that the heat may easily 
ascend through, and of such a texture as does not retain water. Take up plants, no 
matter what age they are, which produce fine asparagus, trim their roots, and place them 
in rows on the beds ; when one row is laid, strew a little fine mould among the roots, 
then proceed in the same way with one row after another, keeping them on a level, as the 
surface of the bed at first lay, till you have finished planting them ; then lay among the 
buds and roots some fine vegetable, or other light rich mould, working it in among them 
with your fingers, and cover the buds over about one inch thick, and above that lay three 
inches in depth of vegetable mould not very rotten, but such as the water will run quickly 
through. If you have not got vegetable mould of this description, old tan, not very fine, 
will answer the purpose equally well. If there is a strong heat in tlie bed, let the glasses 
remain off till it begin to decline." Nicol directs, that the roots in the beds in the open 
air, which are to be taken up and forced, should be kept covered with litter, so as to be 
easy to come at in time of frost. 

3352. Time of beginning to force. Abercrombie says, if in mid-winter, begin six 
weeks before you propose to have a crop ; when the days are longer, five weeks, or but a 
calendar month before. Nicol says, those who wish to have the asparagus on the table 
at Christmas, should prepare for forcing it in November, to have a continual succession. 

3353. Temj)erature. The temperature at night should never be under 50°. In the 
day-time keep the maximum heat down to 62°. " If by the heat of the bark or dung, 
and the use of mats or canvass covers at night, the thermometer stand as high as 50°, fire- 
heat will be unnecessary; but otherwise recourse must be had to the flues. Avery 
moderate degree of fire-heat, however, will be sufficient ; and a small fire made in the 



Book I. FORCING ASPARAGUS IN PITS AND HOT-BEDS. 



591 



evening will generally answer the purpose. Sometimes, in dull hazy weather, a fire 
may be necessary in the morning, in order to enable you to admit air more freely, and 
to dry off damp." (Abercrombie and Nicol.) 

3354. Air must be freely admitted every day in some cases to allow any steam to pass 
off ; and for the sake of the color and flavor of the plants. As the buds begin to appear, 
as large portions of air must be daily admitted as the weather will permit. 

3355. Water. When the asparagus-bed has, after planting, stood two or three days, 
and when the heat will have begun to warm the root, give the plants a suflScient wa- 
tering. Pour it out of a pot with a rose on it, to imitate a shower of rain ; let the bed 
have enough to moisten the mould well, and to wash it in among the roots. Repeat such 
waterings now and then. Nicol says, the roots must have moderate supplies of water : 
once in three or four days, if the heat be not violent ; and if otherwise, oftener. 

3356. Galhenng. " By the time the buds have come up three inches above the surface, 
they are fit to gather for use, as they will then be six or seven inches in length. In ga- 
thering them, draw aside a little of the mould, slip down the finger and thumb, and twist 
them off from the crown. This is a better method than to cut them ; at least it is less 
dangerous to the rising buds, which come up in thick succession, and might be wounded 
by the knife, if cutting were practised." 

3357. Forced roots. The roots, after they have furnished a crop, are considered use- 
less for future culture, because no leaves having been allowed to develope themselves, of 
course no buds could be formed for the succeeding year. 

3358. Successional supplies. If the pit in which asparagus is forced, be twenty-five or 
thirty feet long, it will be enough, for the supply of an ordinary family, to fill one half 
at a time. If the second half be planted when the grass in the first half is fit for use, 
and so on, a constant succession may be kept up in the same pit for any length of time 
required. In order, however, to forward or protract the growth of the one part or of the 
other, the pit may be divided in a temporary way, by fitting a board neatly under the 
middle rafter. By this means, one half may be kept cooler or hotter than the other, by 
matting or not matting, or by the admission of more or less air, &c. " In filling the 
first end of the pit a second time, if bark be used, it will not be necessary to add fresh 
materials ; as trenching over the bed will be found to answer the purpose, even a third 
time. And in using dung, the stirring up of the old, and adding as much new as will 
raise the bed to a proper height, finishing with the smallest and best fermented part, will 
generally be suflScient for a second filling. For a third filling, one half new dung may 
be necessary, which, however, should be moderately fermented, and be kept well down." 

3359. Forcing aqmragus in hot-beds. Asparagus may be brought to perfection in 
hot-beds at any time from November till it comes in the natural ground. When it 
is intended to have a constant supply from hot-beds, M'Phail recommends one to be 
made every fortnight, and Abercrombie once a month, from November till April. This 
must, of course, be arranged according to the size of the hot-beds and number of the, 
family. 

3360. Forming the hot-bed. M'Phail says, Get a quantity of good dung well pre- 
pared, by putting it together in a heap to ferment, that the rancidity of it may be evapo- 
rated, by turning and mixing it several times when there is a strong heat in it ; make it 
up into a bed about three feet high, and four or five inches larger all round than the size 
of the frames, which are to be set upon it. When it is made, set the boxes and glasses 
on, and let it heat and stand till it is sweet, which may be known by the smell of it ; 
then tread it level, and loosen up the surface again, that the heat may have free liberty to 
arise." In this stage, Nicol covers the whole with " rolls or squares of turf, cut so as 
again to join exactly ; v/hich lay green side down, and beat them well with the back of the 
spade, that the whole may be close and compact, in order as much as possible to exclude 
steam." To this practice M'Phail objects, as preventing the water from sinking freely 
into the bed ; and if there be a sufl5cient heat in it for winter forcing, unless it receive 
water, it must become dry and husky. The method, he says, is an old one practised 
fifty years ago, and now exploded by every good gardener. Instead of turf, therefore, 
M'Phail and Abercrombie, after setting on the frame, direct, with the bed from five to 
eight inches thick, to use any sort of light earth. Nicol says, " I have often used old 
bark reduced to a fine mould, without any mixture of earth, and have sometimes 
mixed it with fine sandy earth, with little difference in the success ; only I have ob- 
served, that when the roots were placed in bark entirely, the buds would come a few 
days earlier." 

3361. Planting. Proceed as directed for planting on a bark-bed. Abercrombie says, 
" Provide from five to nine hundred (he elsewhere says six hundred) roots for a hot-bed 
under a three-light garden-frame. Having prepared the roots, mark out on the sur- 
face of the mould the width of the frame ; then, beginning at one end, raise a small 
ridge of earth crosswise, and proceed to planting ; placing the first course of roots nearly 
upriglit, close against the said ridge, and with the crowns in contact, either upon the sur- 



592 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

face of the level earth, or with only the lower ends of the roots a little inserted : place 
more against these in the same manner, as close together as possible, and extending to 
the width of the frame : add successive ranges, as close as they can be set, with the 
crowns of an equal height." Where the bed is completely planted, the crowns are to be 
earthed over regularly. Some, as Abercrombie, cover with two inches of light earth, 
adding, when the buds appear, three or four inches of additional earthing ; others, as 
Nicol and M'Phail, cover at once with four or five inches, adding no more afterwards. 
The planting completed, the next thing is to put on the lights, which are to be kept close 
shut down till the heat begin to rise in the frame ; which will generally happen the se- 
cond or third day, when air is to be admitted, in order to pass off the steam, and dry the 
surface of the mould. Air must be given every good day till the buds begin to appear 
above ground; and then more freely admitted to give color and flavor. 

3362. Produce in hot-beds. Nicol says, " An ordinary-sized three-light frame, com- 
pletely filled with roots, and properly managed, will only yield a dish every day for about 
three weeks." 

3363. Successional supplies from hoi-beds. On the above estimate, if a constant suc- 
cession of asparagus be required, it will be necessary to make up a bed every eighteen 
or twenty days till the middle or end of March. Each successive bed may be made a 
little lighter; and less trouble will be required as the season advances. {KaL 347.) 

3364. Forcing the roots as they stand in the open ground. Stir the surface of any bed 
or beds in full bearing in the general plantation ; then, having raked it fine as in the 
usual spring dressing, cover three inches with the siftings of old tan, and on that lay a 
layer of fermenting dung, as in forcing rhubarb or sea-kale. This mode has been but 
seldom practised ; but we consider it likely to succeed to a certain extent. 

3365. Melross " finds, that asparagus may be forced in a vinery, by planting the roots in the border, 
behind the flue, where no vine roots are." (Caled. Hart. Mem. iii. 164.) 

3366. Sea-kale and rhubarb may be, and sometimes are, forced in the same manner as 
asparagus ; but the most general mode is to excite them where they stand in the open 
garden, by the application of warm dung, with or without earth in pots, or other covers, 
(See the Horticultural Catalogue.) 

Sect. X. Forcing Kidneybeans, 

3367. The kidneybean may be successfully forced in pits, hot-houses or forcing-houseSy 
and hot-beds. The more general mode is to force in the pine-stoves ; the same heat 
which suits the pine-apple, suiting the kidneybean, which is a native of India. Nicol 
prefers a flued pit, such as that used for nursing pines : and Abercrombie says, 
" Where there are no hot-houses, or where kidneybeans are to be raised in quantities for 
the market, the most economical and successful mode will be found a flued pit, prepared 
as directed for asparagus, but with a stronger bottom heat." 

3368. Soil. All agree in recommending light vegetable earth. 

3369. Soris. Abercrombie recommends the early speckled, early negro, and dun- 
colored dwarfs. Nicol says the speckled dwarf is the best sort. 

3370. Solving. Sow in flat boxes or pans of fine light earth thickly, and cover to 
the depth of an inch. Let them be placed in a stove or hot-bed, and have moderate 
supplies of water, and they will be fit to plant when about three inches in height. 
Plant them in rows across the bed of the pit fifteen inches apart, and three inches distant 
in the line. 

3371. Culture. Water after planting, and afterwards, as required; give abundance of 
air every fine day, and earth up the plants as they advance in growth in order to give 
them strength. 

3372. Time of beginning to force. M'Phail says, " If you wish to endeavor to have 
kidneybeans green all the year, you should plant the seeds, and begin to force in 
August." Abercrombie observes, " Some forcers, quite in opposition to the season, 
raise kidneybeans in August, and thence till the 21st December, which day maybe 
regarded as the boundary between late and early forcing." 

3373. Temperature. The heat by fire in the night need not exceed 50", according to 
Nicol ; but Abercrombie recommends 60° for a minimum, and 75° for a maximum. 

3374. Successional supplies are to be obtained by sowing every month or six weeks, for 
which purpose the pits may be divided by temporary partitions, as recommended under 
Forcing Asparagus. (Sect. IX.) 

3375. Forcing in hot-houses. " The most early fruit in perfection," says Abercrombie, 
"is obtained by culture in a stove, sowing from midwinter till the end of March." 
Sow in pots, or oblong boxes, containing a mixture of light fresh earth and vegetable 
mould, depositing the seeds either in a triangular or quincunx order, and full an inch 
deep. If the plants are to fruit where sown, the cradles should be ten inches deep ; but, 
if they are to be transplanted, which admits a greater number in the same space, the seed- 
pots or boxes may be shallow. Do not fill the cradles with mould* at first, to allow of 



Book I. 



FORCING POTATOES. 



593 



gradually earthing up. When the beans have germinated, sprinkle the earth witli 
water; after the plants have risen, give moderate waterings every other day — the last 
crops may want water every day. Sprinkle also the leaves with water warmed by stand- 
ing in the house. Those raised in shallow pans should be transplanted for fruiting when 
two or three inches high. It is sometimes proper to stop luxuriant runners. These in- 
cidental crops may stand in rows, on the flues, or on shelves ; but take care they do not shade 
the pines and other principal plants. Por succession, sow everj' fortnight or three weeks. 

3376. Forcing in a peach or cherry house. Nicol observes, " French beans may be 
successfully planted out in the borders of an early cherry-house or peach-house, so as 
that they may not be overmuch shaded by the trees ; but they seldom do much good in a 
vinery, where they are shaded by the whole foliage of the vines." 

3377. Forcing in a common hot-bed. " Under the deficiency of a house, you may 
have recourse to a hot-bed and frame ; but the culture will be attended with more 
trouble, the course will be longer, and the fruit is rarely so fine and plentiful ; nor 
without fire-heat can the difficulties of late or very early forcing be so well contended 
with. From the middle of February to the beginning of April is the most successful 
period for forcing the kidneybean in a hot-bed. The early white dwarf, from its low 
growth, is to be sown in preference to the kinds recommended for a stove, unless it be 
intended to fruit the plants in a deeper frame than ordinary. The early yellow and 
early black are next, as not growing very high. The temperature for the kidneybean 
is 60° for the minimum, and 75° for the maximum of the fruiting-bed. In forcing 
soon in the spring, raise the plants on a smaller bed, earthed over with light rich com- 
post six inches deep. Sow the beans tliickly, covering them to the depth of an inch. 
The second hot-bed should be earthed over to the depth of eight or nine inches. 
Into this transplant the seedlings as soon as they are two or three inches high ; setting 
them in cross rows twelve or fifteen inches asunder, by four or three inches in a line. Or 
when the season is so far advanced, that one bed with the help of linings will bring the 
plants well into fruit, you may sow at once, at the full distance, in a similar hot-bed, to 
continue for podding. Cover the glasses every night with garden-mats ; also partially 
in severe weather. Admit fresh air moderately every mild day, and give occasional 
gentle waterings. The plants raised in Februaiy will come into bearing in April and 
May, making moderate returns : a new crop every three weeks will keep up the suc- 
cession : those sown at the beginning of April will last till the middle or end of June ; 
when they will be succeeded by the early half-sheltered crops in the open garden." 

3378. Crop raised under glass to fruit in the open garden. " At the end of March, you may sow a small 
portion under glass, for transplanting into the open garden in the first or second week of May. It is not 
so well to sow in patches on the surface of the ground, as in small pots, because the plants can be turned 
out from the latter with less check to their growth when transplanted. Sow three beans in each pot. 
When the seedlings are two or three inches high, harden them by. degrees to the full air ; and plant them 
on a good open border as soon in May as the season will suit. They will yield fruit about a fortnight 
sooner than the earliest raised under exposure to the wedther." 

3379. Crop raised on slight heat. " A crop to fruit early in the open garden may be accelerated with 
more certainty by plunging the pots containing the seed-beans into a gentle hot-bed ; or some sown in 
shallow pans or boxes may be set on the shelves of a stove. Just at the opening of April will be early 
enough to begin ; as the plants will otherwise get too forward for the weather, to proceed well without a 
continuance of artificial heat. Having nursed them to the proper stage, plant out under a south fence, 
either three inches apart, if in a single line, and eighteen inches by three, if in two lines ; or it may be 
better to set the plants in patches of nine or seven, to receive the temporary shelter of a hand-glass, lest 
the transition from a hot-bed, all at once, to the fluctuating air of spring be too violent." {Abercrombie.) 

3380. Insects. Nicol observes, that " the thrips often attacks French beans in the 
hot-house; and, therefore, the plants should be fumigated with tobacco, which destroys 
that insect." 

Sect. XI. Forcing Potatoes. 

338 1. The potatoe is forced in a great varietij of ways; but, " for a fair crop of tubers, 
which shall be somewhat dry and flowery, and of the size of hens' eggs ; plant sets of the 
ash-leaved variety in single pots, filled one third part with light earth, in January. Place 
them in a hot-house or hot-bed, earth them up as they appear, and about the middle or 
end of February transplant them with their balls entire into a pit prepared as for 
asparagus. Distance from plant to plant one foot each way. Give water occasionally, 
and admit as much air as possible at all times. Potatoes so managed will produce a 
xirop the end of March or beginning of April." {Abercrombie.) 

3382. Forcing potatoes in hot-beds. -Abercrombie says, " A young crop is easily 
obtained soon in spring, by planting the early dwarf, or the sort called mules, on a slight 
hot-bed. Put in the sets pretty thickly, at six or eight inches square distance, as the 
potatoes are not to grow large. If planted successively in January and February, they 
will produce young crops for use in April and May, to be taken up in small portions as 
wanted for present eating. During the growth of the plants, open the lights fully in the 
middle of fine dry days ; but mat at night to guard against frost. Water attentively as 
the mould and weather may require." 



596 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



lific, and run less to straw by that management, than when they are sown where they 
are to remain. Indeed, it would be very well worth while to transplant the earliest crops 
in the open ground." (ITal. p. 29.) 

3398. Beans may be forced in a similar manner, though this is seldom attempted. 

Sect. XIII. Forcing Salads, Pot-herbs, ^c. 

3399. Salads, pot-herbs, and various other cidinary playlts, are, or may be forced; but 
the practice in Britain seldom extends beyond pot-herbs and salads ; though some have 
forwarded cabbages, cauliflowers, turnips, carrots, &c., in tliis way, as is occasionally 
done in Russia and the north of Germany. 

3400. Cauliflower, lettuce, radish, carrot, and onion, M'Phail obsei-ves, may be planted 
or sown in February, "on gentle hot-beds of dung or leaves, to bring them in before 
those in the open ground. They should have glass frames set over them in cold, frosty, 
or rainy nights ; which may be taken off in fine days, or a great deal of air given to 
them." Nicol says, " The early horn can ot may be sown in January on a slight hot-bed, 
or on a border, close by the parapet in front of a pinery, early grape-house, or peach- 
house. The seeds should be sown in fine light earth, in either case, and should not be 
covered more than to the depth of a quarter of an inch. If sown on a hot-bed, the seeds 
may be defended by a frame and lights, or by hoops and mats, from bad weather, and 
should be covered always at night. If sown on a border in front of a forcing-house 
of any kind, they may be covered with hand-glasses. When the plants come up in 
either situation, they should have plenty of free air, as they do no good if they be drawn ; 
they also should have moderate supplies of water. A thin sprinkling of radish or lettuce 
may be thrown in along with the carrot." 

3401. Pot-herbs, such as mint, marjoram, chervil, &c., are planted or sown in pots or 
boxes, and placed in any house, pit, or frame, in a state of forcing, near the glass, and 
where they will receive abundance of air in fine weather. They require little or no far- 
ther attention, but occasional watering. They may also be planted in rows in hot-beds 
or pits. 

3402. Small salading, such as cresses, mustard, rape, chiccory, &c., to be cropped 
when young, may be treated as pot-herbs ; the three first will thrive at a greater distance 
from the light, and may be sown as practised by the market-gardeners on the floors or 
borders of cherry and peach houses. 

3403. Radish. Abercrombie says, " To obtain the earliest spring radishes, sow on a 
hot-bed of dung or leaves some early dwarf short-tops in December, January, or the be- 
ginning of February. Having made a hot-bed two feet, or two and a half high, in dung, 
place on the frame. Earth the bed at top six inches deep ; sow on the surface, covering 
the seed with fine mould, about half an inch thick ; and put on the glasses. WTien the 
plants have come up, admit air every day, in mild or tolerably good weather, by tilting 
the upper end of the lights, or sometimes the front, one, two, or three inches, that the 
radishes may not draw up weak and long-shanked. If they have risen very thick, thin 
them in young growth, moderately at first, to about one or two inches apart. Be care- 
ful to cover the glasses at night with garden-mats or straw-litter. Give gentle waterings 
about noon on sunny days. If the heat of the bed declines much, apply a moderate 
lining of warm dung, or stable-litter, to the sides ; which, by gently renewdng the heat, 
wiU forward the radishes for drawing in February and March. Remember, as they 
advance in growth, to give more copious admissions of air daily ; either by tilting the 
lights in front several inches, or, in fine mild days, by drawing the glasses mostly off ; 
but be careful to draw them on again in proper time. Small turnip-radishes, of the 
white and red kinds, may be forced in the same manner. For raising early radishes on 
ground not accommodated with frames, a hot-bed, made in February, may be arched 
over with hoop-bends, or pliant rods, which should be covered with mats constantly at 
night ; and during the day in very cold weather. In moderate days, turn up the mats 
at the warmest side ; and on a fine mild day, take them wholly off." Any sort of radish- 
seed may be sown occasionally for salad-herbs, to be taken while in the seed-leaves, to 
mix with cresses and mustard. Sow about once a-week in spring, summer, or any 
season when radish-salad is required, managing it as other small salad-herbs." 

Sect. XIV. Culture of the Mushroom. 

3404. The edible mushroom {Agaricus campestiis, L.) has long been held in esteem in this 
country. Its peculiar habits, and the method of propagating it, are so unlike those of any 
other culinary vegetable, that gardeners, till lately, seem not to have generalised on its 
culture. For a long period back, it seems never to have been produced in any other way 
than on ridges of warm dung ; no one appearing to advert to the circumstance of its being 
indigenous, and that it may be grown in the open ground in the warmer months. 

3405. The cultivation of mushrooms, Nicol observes, is a process in* gardening, per- 
haps the most singular and curious of any. In the culture of any other vegetable, we 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MUSHROOM. 



597 



either sow or plant something material, — a seed, slip, or root, which we both see and 
handle ; but in the culture of the mushroom, we neither sow nor plant any thing visible, 
at least to the naked eye. Yet it is certain, that mushrooms are produced by seeds, 
which naturally vegetate in the fields at certain seasons, and which may be made to 
vegetate artificially at any season, by a certain process, and by a composition, in which 
the dungs of certain animals fonn the chief ingredient. The droppings of horses are 
found to produce mushrooms more plentifully, and with greater certainty, tlian the dungs 
of other animals. Hence it would appear, that their stomachs have less power to hurt 
or to destroy the vegetative quality of these seeds, which being collected along with their 
food, must pass through their intestines, than the stomachs of other anim.als ; or, that 
the dung of horses is a better nidus for the seeds than other dungs. The food of horses, 
consisting mostly of corn and hay, may, no doubt, be more replete with the seeds of 
muslirooms than that of cows and other stock, which consists chiefly of green vegetables ; 
but even the droppings of horses while at grass, or on tares, produce few or no mush- 
rooms, as more particularly noticed below. This fact would seem to prove, either that 
the seeds are collected in greater numbers, and are better preserved by hay or the straw 
and chaff of oats, than by green food ; or, that green food may have the eflTect of de- 
stroying them by its moistness in the stomach, or after having passed through it. It may 
be further observed, that animal matter seems necessary to the vegetation of the seeds, or 
the spawn of mushrooms. Hence v.e find them produced plentifully in old pastures, 
and in cattle-sheds, whether these be frequented by horses, cows, or sheep, or by all of 
them ; but the eatable kinds are never found in woods or fields from which cattle are com- 
pletely excluded, though the herbage be ever so old. From the stubs of cut or decayed 
trees, and about such as have fallen and are rotten, many species of fungi spring ; most 
of which are nauseous, poisonous, or unwholesome. The seeds, too, may lie concealed 
and dormant in various other matter, till put into a state of active vegetation by a proper 
temperature, and a proper degree of moisture." 

3406. Jfliat spaiL'7i is. Spawn is a white fibrous substance, running like broken 
threads, in such diy reduced dung, or other nidus, as is fitted to nourish it. These 
threads produce, when planted, tubercles in the manner of potatoes. The true sort has 
exactly tlie smell of a mushroom. Spawn, when once procured, may be extended or 
propagated as spawn, without producing mushrooms. [K'ein ; Abercrombie.) 

3407. Producing spawn. This vegetable may be produced by first making lumps, or 
what are sometimes called cakes of spawn, and afterwards placing them on a slight dung 
hot-bed, where tlie spawn vegetates into complete mushrooms ; in which process of 
making tlie spawn (as it is termed) different ingredients are used, but chiefly the dung 
of horses, as said above. This has so far become a branch of trade, as that mushroom* 
spawn may be had of most of the nursery and seedsmen about all the great towns in the 
kingdom. 

3408. Originating mushrooms without planting spaion. Nicol says, " I have formerly 
been in the practice of producing mushrooms, however, most successfully, without using 
spawn, and by a very simple process : I might rather say, without transplanting spawn, 
in the common way, but by making the bed a whole mass of spawn at once, and never 
disturbing it till done bearing. Beds that are built in the common way, and spawned, 
seldom produce long ; perhaps only a few weeks or months. I have had them continue to 
yield large crops the year round, and sometimes for two years. But mushroom-beds, in 
whatever way made, are subject to many misfortunes ; and the spawn is of a nature so 
delicate, that it is quickly destroyed either by too much wet or drought. By making up 
a bed in the ordinary way, that is, of stable-dung, moderately fermented, to the thickness 
of about a yard ; spawning it over when the strong heat has subsided, and then covering 
it with light earth, mushrooms may be obtained sooner than by the process I shall 
recommend. But if this process be more slow, it has the advantage of being more sure ; 
and the time of reaping may be reckoned upon with equal certainty. The difference of 
time, from first proceeding to make the beds to gathering mushrooms, will generally be 
three or four weeks. By the first method, you may reap in six or eight weeks ; and by 
the latter, in ten or twelve." 

^9. Proceed thus : " After having laid a floor, as hinted at abuve, of ashes, stone-chips, gravel, or 
brick-bats, so as to Iceep the bed quite dry, and free from under-damp, lay a course of horse-droppings six 
inches thick. These should be new from the stable, and must not be broke ; and the drier the better. 
They may be collected every day, until the whole floor or sole be covered to the above thickness ; but 
they must not be allowed to ferment or heat. In the whole process of making up, the bed should be as 
much exposed to the air as possible ; and it should be carefully defended from wet, if out of doors. 
When this course i.^ quite dry, and judged to be past a state of fermentation, cover it to the thickness of 
two inches v/ith light dry earth ; if sandy, so much the better. It is immaterial whether it be rich or 
not ; the only use of earth here being for the spawn to run and mass in. Now lay another course of 
droppings, and earth them over as above, when past a state of fermentation ; then a third course, which 
in like manner earth over. This finishes the bed, which will be a very strong and productive one, if 
properly managed allerwards. Observe, that in forming the bed it should be a little rounded, in order 
that the centre may not be more wet or moist than the sides. This may be done in forming the sole or 
floor at first, and the bed would then be of equal strength in all parts. If it be made up against a wall 
ill a cellar, stable, or shed, it may have a slope of a few inches from the back to the front, less or more, 

Qq 3 



598 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



according to its breadth. I have sometimes been contented with two courses, as above, instead of three ; 
and, often, when materials are scarce, have made them up slighter, thus : three four-inch courses of 
droppings, with one inch of earth between each, and a two-inch covering at top. Such a bed as this I 
have had produce for ten or twelve months together ; but very much depends on the state of the 
materials, and on the care taken in making it up ; also on the after-management. The droppings of hard- 
fed horses only are usefuL Those of horses on green food will, of themselves, produce few or no mush- 
rooms. This I have proved in more than one instance, much to my disappointment. And I have, 
moreover, found, that the richer the keep of the horses, the more productive are their droppings. I 
have made up beds from farm-horses, fed partly on hard, and partly on green food ; and from carriage 
or saddle horses, fed entirely on corn and hay; treated them in the same way in every respect ; and 
have found, not once, but always, those made from the latter most productive. Droppings from corn-fed 
horses may be procured at the public stables in towiis, or at inns in the country, any time in the year j 
and if the supply be plentiful, a bed of considerable dimensions may be made and finished within five or 
six weeks. In as many more weeks, if in a stable, or drj' cellar, or a flued shed, it will begin to protluce, 
and often sooner ; but if the situation of the bed be cold, it will sometimes be two or three months of 
producing mushrooms." 

3410. Where indigenous spawn may he collected. September is the month in which the 
mushroom comes to perfection in the open air ; and this is the time to look for it in 
its native habitats. Downs and upland pastures are the primitive situations, whence 
the seeds seem to be carried by horses and cattle, to what are called secondary situations. 
Thus " it is found in strength and purity, in the path of a bark-mill worked by a horse, 
in any other horse-mill track under shelter, in covered rides for horses, in dry half-rotted 
dung-heaps, and in hot-beds. It is found in a less degree in various other situations." 
(^Abercrombie.) 

3411. WPhail says, " The best of mushroom-spawn is frequently to be found in dunghills which have 
lain a long time without turning, and which had been formed of horse-dung, scrapings of roads, and 
turf cut up about the sides of roads and commons. The heat of the summer months having dried the 
dunghill, when rain comes about the latter end of August or in September, mushrooms of a good quality 
may often be seen beginning to form themselves on the surface, like large peas. When these are ob- 
served, it is time to take out the spawn, which is generally in hard dry lumps of dung, the spawn having 
the appearance of whitish coarse pieces of thread." 

3412. To jyreserve indigenous spaxvn. "Having found cakes of dung which contain 
the desired spawn, take them up as entire as possible, with the earth adhering, and lay 
them carefully in a basket or any other conveyance. These are to be stored till used 
as below, in a dry covered place ; and if they were found in a damp state, should be 
dried in hollow piles, before they are laid together in a mass. The dry spawn may be 
preserved three or four years. To preserve alike from perishing, and from running 
before it is planted, a dry shed furnished with a current of air, is indispensable." 

3413. Procuring spawn artificially. Wales tlius procures spawn : " For this purpose, 
the month of March is the fittest time, the cattle not being then upon grass, but chiefly 
upon dry food of one sort or other. Take two barrow-loads of cow-dung, one load of 
sheep and one of horse dung ; dry tliem well ; then break tliem quite small, so as they 
may go easily through a coarse garden-sieve. When well mixed together, lay them up 
in a round heap, finishing at top in a point. It is to be understood, that the operation 
is to be conducted in a dry shed. Observe to tread the heap as it is put up, which will 
greatly save it from heating too much. If a stick were thi-ust into the heap as a proof, 
and when taken out, if it feels very slightly warm in the hand, the heat is doing 
well ; for, in the whole mode of raising mushrooms, it should be particularly observed 
to take great care of the heat, as the mushrooms are impatient of either too much heat 
or cold : the best adapted, and most productive heat I have ever found, was from 
55 to 60 degrees of Fahrenheit, and the nearer the beds are kept to this heat, the 
greater will be the success. The heap is to be covered with horse-litter, in a state of 
fermentation, to the thickness of four inches all over. If the shed be warm when the 
heap is put up, I would recommend old bass-mats rather than dung, as the least over- 
heat would spoil the heap. In this state let it lie for one month ; then throw the litter 
a little aside, thrust the hand into the heart of the heap, and take out a handful. If the 
spawn has begun to run, you will observe numerous small white fibres or threads 
through the dung. If not begun to run, let another covering be put on above the old 
one of the same thickness as the first ; and after a month more, you will undoubtedly 
find the heap to abound with spawn. I have had it running in three weeks, and some- 
times it has required ten weeks, much depending on the state of the dung. The spawn 
thus procured is of the very best quality, far exceeding what is got in fields or in old 
hot-beds. I write from experience, and have not borrowed this mode of procuring 
spawn from any one. The spawn in this state is not fit for keeping long ; and I shall 
next give directions how to form spawn-bricks, when as many can be made at one time, 
as will serv^e for the season, or even for a number of years if required, provided the 
spawn be kept dry." {Mem. Caled. Hort. Soc.) 

3414. Preserving artificial spawn by forming spawn-bricks. The author last quoted says, 
" Take of horse-dung without litter, three barrow-loads ; two barrow-loads of the mould 
of rotten tree-leaves ; two baiTOw-loads of cow-dung ; one barrow-load of old tan-bark, 
such as is thrown out of the pine-pit ; with one baiTow-load of sheep's dung ; mix all 
these well together, till the mixture seem to be one compost, and to be as fine and soft as 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MUSHROOM. 



599 



common mortar, or as the clay used in grafting, as otherwise it would not come eiisily 
out of the mould. Then take a small fi-ame, such as brick-makers use for moulding 
tlieir bricks, — the size six inches long, four broad, and three deep. A portion of the 
mixture should then be forced into the mould or frame, and the sides of the mould being 
a little wetted beforehand, the spawn-brick will easily come out without breaking. After 
the bricks have stood two hours or so, take a blunt or rounded dibble, and make three 
holes in the middle of each brick, an inch from each other, and about half through the 
brick ; these holes are for receiving the spawn. I find it is the best way to lay the bricks 
as they are made upon boards, that they may be carried out of doors in a good day to 
dry. The bricks should be rendered perfectly dry, as the least damp would spoil the 
spawn. They will often seem dry on the outside, while they continue wet in the 
inside. The best way to prove them, is to break a brick, and observe how dry it is in the 
inside. It is to be observed, that great care must be taken in the turning them upon the 
boards, for fear of breaking, they being very apt to go to pieces, till nearly fit for re- 
ceiving spawn. When fit, they are firm, and quite dry on the outside : this happens in 
the course of tliree weeks, if the weather be dry and the bricks be rightly attended to. 
Now, take fresh horse-litter, which has been laid up in a heap to sweeten as when for 
hot-beds ; lay a bottom course of this six inches thick, whereon to lay the bricks. The 
horse-litter which is to be prepared for covering the spawn-bricks ought to be rank, be- 
cause the drier and sweeter the heat, the spawn will work the freer ; and, as I stated 
before, if the weather be wanii, the less covering will serve ; also, if there be any heat in 
the old covering at the expiration of three weeks, add no more new covering, as the old 
will perfectly serve the end. Every hole in the bricks must next be filled quite close 
up with the spawn ; and as the bricks are laid one upon another, the upper side of the 
brick when laid, must also be covered with spawn : at the same time observing, as the 
bricks are laid, to keep them as open between one another as possible, so as to let the 
heat and steam of the dung go through all parts of the heap. The heap is to be ter- 
niinated at top by a single brick. When all are thus laid, place round the sides and top 
six inches of the hot dimg, which will soon raise a fine moderate heat ; observing, that 
all this must be done in a shed, or where rain cannot enter to cool the dung. , After 
two weeks, add three inches thick of additional fresh dung upon the old ; this wall renew 
the heat, and make it work forcibly for the space of two weeks more, when the litter 
may be taken off, and cleared all out from the spawn-bricks. Before the cover is taken 
off, it will be proper to lay a little of it aside, and take out a few of the bricks, to see 
whether the spawn has run all through each brick or not ; if not, replace the bricks 
again, and the cover, and let them remain for ten days longer, when they will be found 
to be every one, as it were, a solid mass of spawn. They may be allowed to stand and 
dry for a few days in the heap : they are then to be laid up in some dry place till wanted 
for use, where they will keep good for many yeai's." 

3415. Projmgation of mushroom-sjiawn. M'Phail offers two modes, as follows: " About 
the beginning of the month of May collect a heap of nearly equal quantities of cow, 
horse, and sheep dung ; add to it some rotten fern-leaves, or rotten dry dung, somewhat 
resembling spawn, from the linings of hot-beds ; mix the whole well together, in the 
way a bricklayer's laborer makes mortar ; spread it on a floor in a cool dry shed, where 
it cannot dry too hastily, making it about five or six inches thick ; beat or tread it firm ; 
.and as soon as it is in a fit condition, cut it with a sharp spade into pieces in the form 
of bricks ; set tlie pieces to dry till they can be conveniently handled ; then with a knife 
make a hole in the middle of each, and put a little piece of good mushroom-spawn 
into each hole, closing it up with a bit of that which was taken out ; then pile the im- 
pregnated pieces up in a heap in a hollow manner, so that the air may pass through the 
heap freely among the pieces, to dry them gradually ; and if the shed be light, cover the 
heap with mats, or any other light covering to keep it dark. When the spawn lias ex- 
tended itself through every part of the prepared pieces of the mixture, lay them out se- 
parately, that they may be perfectly dried, which will prevent mushrooms from growing 
out of them ; which, if suffered, would exhaust the spawn so, that it would be much 
weakened. In a dry state, the spawn, thus propagated, may lie till it be wanted in the 
autumn or following spring. If such pieces of spawn be continued in a dry state, the 
spawn will remain good for a long time.'' 

S^IS. Another way, similar to the preceding, to make mushroom-spawn, is as follows : " Some time in the 
month of May or June, collect about two cart-loads of dung from the fields, or take it from the stables ; 
separate it entirely from the straw ; add to it six barrows of fresli loam, two barrows of soil scraped from 
the road, and one barrow of coal-ashes sifted fine : mix these well together ; the« spread the mixture on 
the floor of a dry shed, give it a gentle watering, and spread over it a tjuantity of spawn from an old 
mushroom-bed ; after this, tread it as firm as possible, and continue to do so two or three times a-wcek. 
In this situation let it remain till it is turned into a solid mass of spawn, which generally is about the end 
of August ; then cut it into lumps, and lay them up edgewise to dry." 

3417. Abcrcrombie says, " Pieces of it may be laid along the ridge of a cucumber-bed raised in spring. 
I'iant them about a foot apart. In about two months, the surface of the spawn will assume a mouldy 
appearance; it is then to be taken up with the earth adhering thereto, broken into pieces, and laid upon 
the slielf oJ a dry shed." 

Qq 4 



600 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part II L 



341^. Oldacre^s mode of propagation is as follows : " Take any quantity of fresh horse-droppings mixed 
with short litter (as recommended for the beds), add one third of cows' dung, and a small portion of 
earth to cement it together ; mash the whole into a thin compost, and then spread it on the floor of an 
open shed, and let it remain till it becomes firm enough to be formed into flat, square bricks, which being 
done, set them on edge, and frequently turn them until half dry ; then, with a dibble make one or two 
holes in each brick, and insert in each hole a piece of good old spawn, the size of a common walnut ; the 
bricks should then remain until they are dry. This being completed, level the surface of a piece of ground 
three feet wide, and of length sufficient to receive the bricks, on which lay a bottom of dry horse-dung 
six inches high ; then form a pile, by placing the bricks in rows one upon another (the spawn-side upper- 
most) till the pile is three feet high ; next cover it with a small portion of warm horse-dung, sufficient in 
quantity to diffuse a gentle glow through the whole. When the spawn has spread itself through every 
part of the bricks, the process is ended, and they must be laid up in any dry place for use. Mushroom- 
spawn, made according to this receipt, will preserve i:s vegetative power many years, if well dried before 
it is laid up ; if moist, it will grow, and soon exhaust itself." 

3419. Neill mentions an original method of propagating spawn, practised by Hay, in Scotland. 
" A quantity of cow-droppings is to be gathered from the pastures ; some rotten wood, or spray from the 
bottom of a hedge, is to be collected, with a little strong loam. These are mixed, and formed into a moist 
ductile sort of mortar or paste, of such consistence that it can be cut into pieces like bricks. When these 
are so far dried that they can conveniently be lifted, a row is laid in some dry place under cover, perhaps 
in a shade at the back of a hot-house ; a little spawn is placed upon the layer ; then another layer of the 
spawn-bricks, and so on. In a few weeks the whole mass is penetrated by the spawn. The spawn-bricks 
may then be laid aside for use; they will keep many months; and the drier they are kept the more 
certainly do they afford a crop of mushrooms when placed in favorable circumstances for doing so." 

3420. Roger's mode of preparing spawn is as follows : — I collect pure cow-dung, not fresh, but such 
as I happen to find in the park, the fields, or the farm-yard ; with this I mix the scrapings of roads, in the 
proportion of one half to one, adding to it about one third or a fourth of vcgetalile mould, obtained from 
leaves or decayed stacks. These ingredients being well worked up together, the compost is formed into 
bricks about nine inches long, three and a half broad, and two thick. The bricks are exposed to the air 
and sun, and suffered to attain such a degree of solidity, as to bear a considerable pressure, but not to dry 
hard. They are then removed to a shed for the purpose of being laid up in strata. Three or four rows are 
first placed on the ground with interstices of about one inch in width between the rows and the bricks ; 
into these interstices, or spaces, loose spawn, such as is found in the litter of old mushroom-beds, is scat- 
tered ; and over the whole surface of the layer such spawny litter is likewise spread. Should there be no 
old mushroom-beds at hand to furnish the scatterings, some spawn-bricks must be broken to pieces in 
order to supply them. The first layer having been thus treated, another is put upon it, and likewise in- 
terspersed and covered with spawn and litter from old beds. A third and fourth stratum may be laid on, 
or more, and regulated in the same manner. The whole pile being completed according to the quantity 
that is required, it is covered over with hot stable-dung and litter ; and in two, three, or more weeks, ac- 
cording to the state of the weather, the bricks are filled with spawn, and may be laid by for use. I will 
not hazard an opinion, whether the cow-dung itself contains the elements of spawn, or only acts the part 
of a matrix, or receptacle ; but this I can state, that mushroom-spawn is generated in oth^ dung besides 
horse-dung; for I once found it plentifully in pigeon's dung. As I have used this preparation of spawn 
for a length of time, the essence of cow-dung must entirely preponderate in my composition ; though the 
origin of the spawn should at first have been derived from horse-dung. I may add, that, when managed 
in the manner I have described, it yields spawn as productive as any that can be obtained. I was formerly 
taught to believe that it was essential to mix a portion of horse-dung in the bricks, but my experience 
has since convinced me, that cow-dung alone answers the purpose. The spawn is generated in it plenti- 
fully, and of good quality. 

3421. Care of the bricks. It is of importance that the bricks alluded to should not be left in a situation 
which would cause the spawn to work, an effect which would be produced by moisture, combined with 
warmth. Therefore, when the spawn is bred, the bricks must be laid in a dry place to prevent the process 
of germination. The spawn must not be suffered to advance towards the rudiments of the mushroom, 
which consist in little threads or fibres, for in this state it ceases to be useful in spawning a bed. As soon 
as those rudiments are formed, they must be left undisturbed, or they perish. They will grow into a 
mushroom on the spot where they are developed ; but when removed or torn up, they are destroyed. A 
piece of spawn which appears in filaments or fibres is no longer applicable to a mushroom-bed ; it may 
produce a mushroom in itself, but can serve no other purpose. The spawn that is to be inserted in a bed, 
and to receive its developement there, must not be gone so far, but should only have the appearance of 
indistinct white mould. {Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 472.) 

3422. The importance of keeping spawn diy is attested by Miller, who found, that 
spawn which had lain for four months near the furnace of a stove, yielded a crop in less 
time, and in greater profusion, than any other. 

. 3423. The methods of rearing mushroonis are still more various than those of propa- 
gating the spawn. They are most commonly grown in ridges in the open air, covered 
with litter and mats ; and next in frequency in ridges of the same sort under cover, as 
in the open sheds of hot-houses. They are also grown in close sheds behind hot- 
houses ; in flued sheds built on purpose, or mushroom -houses ; on shelves in flued mush- 
room-houses ; in pots, boxes, hampers, baskets, placed in any warm situation ; in 
cucumber, or melon beds ; in old hot-beds of any sort ; in pits with glass frames ; and 
in dark frames or pits. 

3424. Ridges in the ojien air. M'Phail says, ** Some think that mushrooms do better 
in the open air than in covered sheds, which I have frequently experienced to be the 
case. In sheds, mushroom-beds ai-e apt to become too dry ; in the open ground, the 
humidity of the air, and a little wet sinking through the covering, keeps them in a damp 
state." {G. Rem. p. 110.) 

3425. Preparing the dung. Provide good horse-dung, purged of its fiery heat by the 
usual preparation ; with which some old linings from a melon-bed may be mixed, if it is 
not winter. {^Abercrombie.^ M'Phail says, " Take two cart-loads of fresh stable-dung, 
to which add an equal quantity of old dry linings from melon or cucumber beds, mixing 
them well together in a heap ; and after letting it lie about a fortnight, it will be in a fit 
state to make into beds. To make a mushroom-bed of new dung, let the same be well 
prepared, by laying it together in a heap to ferment, and by turning and mixing it 
well, shaking the outside of the heap, which is cold, and the inside, which is hot, to- 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MUSHROOM. 



601 



gether. so tliat every part of it may be equally fermented, and deprived of its noxious 
quality." 

3426. Forming the bed. Abercrombie says, " Mark out the ground-line of a bed 
four feet wide at bottom, the length to be governed by the quantity to be raised; from 
this, work with an inward slope, so as to terminate with a narrow roof-shaped ridge 
along the centre, three feet or more in height. In building the bed, shake and mix 
the dung well together : beat it down with the fork, but do not tread it : leave it to set- 
tle, and to expend the first heat in vapor. When the dung is in a fit state to make into 
a bud, which it will be in about three weeks or a month after it has been put together to 
ferment, let the bottom for it be marked out about seven feet wide, and as long as you 
choose to make it ; let the foundation on which it is made be dry, and let it be worked 
up in a sloping manner, so as to terminate with a narrow roof-shaped ridge along the 
centre, about four feet or more in height. In making the bed, shake and mix the dung 
well together; beat it down well with the fork; and if the dung be long and dryish, 
tread it down as you pi'oceed." (^M^FhaU.) 

3427. Moulding the bed. " Having proved by trial-sticks left some days in the bed, 
that the heat is become moderate, you may cover two thirds of the sloping bank with 
mould two inches thick, leaving the top of the ridge open for the steam to evaporate 
as it gradually rises. When the exhalation is finished, the top may also be earthed 
over ;" or, earth round the bed four inches high, forming a ledge of mould two inches 
thick. 

3428. Planting the spaiun. " Divide the large cakes of spawn into small lumps. 
These may be planted in rows six or eight inches asunder. Place the lumps of spawn 
about six inches apart in the same row, inserting them through the mould close down to 
the surface of the dung : or, the dry spawn may be broken or scattered over the bed ; 
being covered with earth to the depth specified above." (Abercrombie.) 

S429. M'P/iail directs, " When the bed has been some time made, and the heat sufficiently declined, 
the spawn maybe put into it ; but, for fear of the heat being too great in the upper part of it, it had best 
be at first spawned only half-way up all round. Take the spawn in small pieces, and stick it into the sides 
of the bed, in rows about three or four inches, piece from piece, so that the spawn and earth about to be 
laid on, may meet. When the bed is spawned as high up as it is thought the heat of the bed will not in- 
jure it, take good, strong, rich earth, of a loamy quality, and cover the spawned part of the bed with it, 
about two inches thick, beginning to lay it at the bottom of the bed, beating it firm with the spade. The 
earth should be in a pliable state ; not wet, nor over dry." 

3430. Covering the ridges. " Tlie inconvenience of a bed exposed to the weather, 
is, that it is sometimes necessary to cover it from wet, where there is danger of thus ex- 
citing a fermentation. When the bed is even under a shed, it is necessary to apply a co- 
vering from three to twelve inches thick, as the strength of the dung declines, or as the 
bed may be exposed, at the sides, to rain, snow, or frost. The covering may be either 
clean straw and long dry stable-litter, or sweet hay and matting ; the latter is to be pre- 
ferred. Lay it thin at first, and increase it as circumstances demand." 

3431. Ridges in open sheds are formed and planted exactly in the same manner. 

3432. In rearing in close sheds behind hot-houses, where the temperature approaches to 
50 or 55 degrees in the v.'inter months, from the heat arising from the hot-house furnaces, 
the ridge mode above may be adopted, or a flat bed similarly composed and planted. 

3433. In Jiued sheds, or mushroom-houses on the common plan, the method of forming 
the dung-bed, earthing, and planting is the same as in the three last modes : sometimes, 
however, the beds are formed in a walled pit, and flat, or sloping, on the surface, like a 
cucumber-bed. 

3434. German mode of cultivating the mushroom. Tlie culture of mushrooms on 
shelves, in flued sheds or houses, is a German practice, introduced to this country by 
Oldacre. The plan of Oldacre's house has been already given [figs. 279. to 281.) 
M'Phail describes a similar one, "as a good method of propagation." {Gard. Rem. 
p. 108.) To either houses the following directions will apply: — 

3435. Compost for the beds. Collect a quantity of fresh horse-dung, that has neither been exposed to 
wet nor fermentation, clearing it of the long straw, so as to leave one fourth, in quantity, of the shortest 
litter, when incorporated with the horse-droppings ; then add a fourth part of tolerable dry turf-mould, or 
rather maiden earth, and mix it well with the dung before mentioned : the advantage derived from the 
mould or maiden earth is the union of the whole into one compact solid substance, so congenial to the 
growth of mushrooms. If dung from the rides of a livery-stable, or the round of a horse-mill, can be 
procured, and mixed with a fourth part of short litter, and added to as many fresh horse-droppings as will 
cause a gentle warmth, when made into beds, it will be found superior, for the production of mushrooms, 
to horse-dung that is gathered from the stables. 

3436. The method of making the beds. Form the beds on the shelves and ground-floor by placing a 
layer about three inches thick of the prepared mixture. Then, with a flat mallet, beat it as close together 
as possible, next add another layer of the compost, repeating the same process as before, and so on until 
the beds are formed into a solid body, seven inches thick, making the surface of the beds as smooth and as 
even as possible. The reducing the beds into a very solid body is a most essential point; for, without it, 
you cannot expect success : and the thickness of them must also be particularly attended to ; for, where 
there is a much greater body, the beds will be subjected to a strong fermentation, and will be prevented, 
by evaporation, from retaining that consistency in the dung, which is absolutely necessary for the produc- 
tion of a good and plentiful crop. On the contrary, if a much less quantity be laid together, the heat and 
fermentation will be insufficient to prqiarc the beds for the nourishment of the spawn j but the assistance 



602 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



PjlRT III. 



of both, to the extent prescribed, cements the materials together, which, in addition'to beating, increases 
greatly their solidity. The proper vegetation of the spawn, and the consequent crop of mushrooms, de- 
pend entirely upon a moderate genial heat and fermentation, neither too strong nor too slight. As soon 
as the degree of heat in the beds is a little more than that of milk from the cow, (say from eighty to ninety 
degrees of Fahrenheit's thermometer,) beat the beds a second time, to render them more solid, if possible ; 
then make holes with a dibble, three inches in diameter, and nine inches asunder, through the compost in 
every part of the beds : these holes will be a means of coohng the beds, and preventing that excess of heat 
from taking place, which would produce rottenness, and render them unproductive. If the beds do not 
attain the heat required, in four or five days after they are put together, (which you will know by plunging 
a thermometer into one of the holes,) add another layer of the compost, two inches thick, which will pro- 
bably increase the heat sufficiently ; if not, a part of the bed should be taken away, and the remainder 
mixed with fresh horse-droppings, and wrought together in the same way as before, in order to pro- 
duce the proper degree of heat. Beds made after this manner readily generate natural spawn in summer, 
and frequently in the winter months. 

3437. Of spawning the beds. In three or four days after the holes have been made, by observing the 
thermometer, it will be found that you have the desired degree of heat, and the inside of the holes will also 
have become dry ; the beds are then in a good state for spawning, which should be done while the heat is 
on the decline. If this operation be deferred until the heat is quite exhausted, the crop will be late, and 
less plentiful. Fill every hole full of spawn, which must be well beaten into them, and then make the 
surface of the beds solid and level ; it is of no consequence whether the spawn put into the holes be in one 
lump or in several small pieces, it is only necessary that the holes should be well filled. About a fortnight 
after the spawn has been introduced, examine the holes, and if the spawn has suflfered any damage from 
over-heat, or too much moisture, in the beds, introduce fresh spawn in the same way as before. On the 
contrary, if the spawn be found good, and vegetating freely into the compost, such beds (if required for 
immediate production,) may be covered with mould agreeable to the rules hereafter laid down ; and the 
beds intended for succession should remain unearthed, in the summer, three weeks or a month before you 
wish them to produce, and in the winter a month or five weeks. If the spawn be introduced in hot wea- 
ther, air must be admitted as freely as possible into the shed, till the spawn has spread itself through the 
beds ; for if the place be kept too close, the beds will become soft and spongy, and then the crop will nei- 
ther be abundant, nor of good quality. 

3438. Of earthing the beds. Such beds as are intended to be put into work, must be covered with a 
coat of rich maiden earth, wherein its turf is well reduced. Then spread it regularly over the surface of 
each bed, two inches thick ; and beat it as solid and level as possible. The earth used should be neither 
too dry, nor yet wet, but so as to become compact together, and take, when beaten, a smooth face. If too 
moist, it will chill the beds, and injure the spawn. On the contrary, if too dry, it will remain loose, and in 
a state by no means favorable to the growth of the mushrooms : but when sohd, it produces not only finer 
mushrooms, but in greater quantities, as the earth from soils of lighter texture invariably grows them 
weaker, and of inferior quality, and such beds cease bearing much earlier. 

3439. Of the subsequent treatment. From the time of covering with earth, the room or shed should be 
kept at fifty to fifty-five degrees of Fahrenheit's thermometer, and the light must be excluded. If the heat 
be suffered to exceed, to any considerable degree, it will cause the beds to ferment a second time, and 
weaken, if not totally destroy, the spawn ; but should a much lowor degree of temperature than the one 
prescribed be permitted to prevail, the mushrooms will advance slowly in their growth ; and if watered ia 
that state, numbers of the small ones will be prevented from attaining perfection. In watering them, ex- 
treme caution is necessary, as well in the mode of application, as in the temperature of the water, which 
should be nearly as warm as new milk, and very lightly sprinkled with a syringe, or a small watering-pot ; 
otherwise the mushrooms are sure to sustain damage. If cold water be used, and given plentifully at one 
time, it will not only destroy the existing crop, but the spawn also, and render the beds so treated of no 
further utility. If the beds have been suffered to become very dry, it is better to give them several light 
waterings than one heavy supply. In gathering the mushrooms, great care should be taken not to disturb 
the small ones that invariably, with good management, surround the stems of those which are more early 
matured. The best method is to twist them up, very gently, in all instances where you can. But where 
you are obliged to cut them, great care should be taken to divest the beds of the stems of those that are 
cut, as they would rot, to the great injury of those that surround them. If the preceding directions are 
properly attended to, in the management of the beds, they will continue to bear several months, and a 
constant supply may be kept by earthing one bed or more, every two or three months, according to the 
quantity of mushrooms required at one season. When the beds are in full bearing, if the mushrooms 
become long in thpir stems, and weak, it is certain the temperature of the building is too high ; conse- 
quently, air must be admitted in proportion to the heat. 

3440. Of renovating the old beds. As your beds begin to decHne in bearing, and produce but few mush- 
rooms, take off the earth clean from the dung, and if you find the latter decayed, destroy the beds and re- 
place them by new ones, being careful to select any good spawn that may present itself; but if, on taking 
away the earth, you find the beds dry, soUd, and full of good spawn, add a layer of fresh compost, as be- 
fore recommended, three or four inches thick, mixing it a little with the old, and beat it as before. By ad- 
hering to this mode of renovating the old beds, a continual supply may be kept up. {Oldacre, in Hart. 
Trans, vol. ii.) 

3441. Estimate of the tnerits of the German viode of cultivating nmshrooms. Neill ob- 
serves, In what particulars the advantage of Oldacre's plan over former modes chiefly 
consists, does not very clearly appear. Beds made up in the usual way are much less 
compact, and are more damp ; compactness and dryness may therefore be considered as 
important." (Ed. Encyc. art. Hort.) Rogers remarks that " the quantity of mush- 
rooms depends upon the manner in which they are nourished : if they are meagerly fed, 
tlieir flavor and substance will be poor in proportion. Hence artificial mushrooms are, 
generally, richer and higher flavored than those which grow naturally ; and again, 
among the artificial produce, those will surpass which are reared on large and deep 
beds." It is a fact, that in Covent Garden market, mushrooms grown on ridges are 
greatly preferred to those grown on shelves, or in boxes, in the German manner : 
they are considered heavier and more juicy. (Hort. Trans, iv. 475.) 

3442. Growing mushrooms, in jmts, boxes, ^c. with dung, by Wales. " Having given an 
account how to procure the spawn, which is the principal point, I shall next proceed to 
state how mushrooms are to be raised from the spawn with dung. I raise the mushrooms 
in boxes, hampers, or, in short, in any thing which will hold the dung and the soil toge- 
ther. These boxes or vessels are placed in the back sheds of the hot-houses, or in any 
house whatever, where no damp nor frost can enter. There should be several boxes, a 
part only being filled at a time, so as to keep a rotation of them, and have mushrooms 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MUSHROOM. 



603 



at all times ready for the table. I shall suppose three boxes to be filled at one time. 
Each, box may be three feet long, one and a half broad, and seven inches in depth. Let 
each box be half filled with horse-dung from the stables (the fresher the better, and if 
wet, to be dried for three or four days before it be put in the boxes) ; the dung is to be 
well beat down in the boxes. After the second or third day, if any heat has arisen 
amongst the dung, it is then a fit time to spawn : break each spawn-brick into three 
parts as equal as possible ; then lay the pieces, about four inches apart, upon the surface 
of the dung in the box ; here they are to lie for six days, when it will probably be found, 
that the side of the spawn next to the dung has begun to run in the dung below ; then 
add one and a half inch of more fresh dung upon the top of the spawn in the box, and 
beat it down as formerly. In the course of a fortnight, the box will be ready to receive 
the mould on the top ; this mould must be two and a half inches deep, well beat 
down with the back of a spade, and the surface made quite even. But before the box 
be earthed over, it will be proper to take up a little of the dung, as far down as near the 
bottom of the box, to see if the spawn has run through the dung ; if not, let the box 
stand unearthed for some days longer, for, were it to be earthed before the spawn had 
run through the dung, there would be put a poor crop. In the space of five or six weeks 
the mushrooms will begin to come up ; if then the mould seems dry, give a gentle wa- 
tering, the water being slightly heated in any warm place before applied. This water- 
ing will make the mushrooms start freely, and of a large size. I cut three myself, which 
weighed 18^ oz. from a box treated as above. The boxes will continue to produce for 
six weeks, and I have had them productive sometimes for two months, if duly attended to, 
by giving a little water when dry, for they need neither light nor free air. I have had 
thirty-two pretty well-sized mushrooms in one cluster. If cut as button-mushrooms, 
each box will yield from six to twelve Scots pints (24 to 48 Eng. pints), according to 
the season and other circumstances. The plan now described, I prefer for yielding 
numbers of mushrooms, and where a great many are required ; but when reared without 
dung, they are best flavored. They are not then to be distinguished from those which 
grow naturally in the fields, but comparatively few are in this way produced. I have 
lately found it very useful to add to every three barrow-loads of horse-dung, one of per- 
fectly dry coiv-dung, beat down to powder as it were, and well mixed among the horse- 
dung, after the horse-dung has lain under cover for four or five days to dry. The reason 
I tried the cow-dung dry was, that I still found the horse-dung to have a strong damp, 
after having lain in the boxes for some time ; but the cow-dung, when beat down to 
powder, has the effect to dry up this damp, and also to make the horse-dung lie in the 
box more compactly ; and the more it is pressed down, the finer the spawn will run 
amongst it." (Wales, in Caled. Hort. Mem.) 

3443. Growing mushrooms, in pots, boxes, <^c. ivithout dung. " Take a little straw, and 
lay it carefully in the bottom of the mushroom-box, about an inch thick, or rather 
more. Then take some of the spawn-bricks, and break them down, each brick into 
about ten pieces, and lay the fragments upon the straw, as close to each other as they 
will lie. Cover them up with mould, three and a half inches deep, and well pressed 
down. When the surface appears dry, give a little tepid water, as directed for the last 
way of raising them ; but this method needs about double the quantity of water that the 
former does, owing to having no moisture in the bottom, while the other has the 
dung. The mushrooms will begin to start in a month or five weeks, sometimes sooner, 
sometimes later, according to the heat of the place where the boxes are situated. They 
do not rise so thick nor of so large a size, nor dp they continue to be produced so long, 
as in the other plan with dung." {Wales.) 

3444. Comjwst or mould for growing mushrooms in boxes. *' Take a quantity of horse- 
dung from the stable-yard fresh, and for every layer of dung, six inches in depth, lay 
three inches of fine earth from any light goil ; these alternate layers may be repeated till 
there be as much as will probably be wanted for the course of a year. After this mix- 
ture has lain about six months or so, the dung will be sufficiently rotten : it should then 
be well broken with a spade, and passed through a garden-sieve. Two inches of this 
compost laid upon the top of the box, and well pressed down with the back of a 
spade, will be found to answer. It is to be understood, that the same compost, made of 
the dung and earth, is used for going on the top of the beds formed with dung, 
as well as on those without it, observing to have it sifted fine, and well dried, for 
if it be damp, the spawn would not run freely amongst it." (Oldacre, in Horticultural 
Transactions. ) 

3445. Culture of the mushroom in melon-beds. The following mode has been prac- 
tised by the Rev. W. Williamson, for several years, with great success. He considers 
it more economical and generally practicable than the plan of Oldacre. " Having made 
my melon-bed in the usual manner, when the burning heat is over, and the bed is ready 
to be earthed to a sufficient thickness, I place spawn on the sides of the luills, and also on 
the surface of the bed, and then cover the whole with mould, as usual, managing the 



604 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Fart IIL 



melons exactly in the same manner as if the spawn were not there, not omitting even to 
tread it, as I find that a compact loam is more congenial to the growth of the mushroom, 
than the light rich compost of the cucumber-bed. The heat will soon cause the spawn to 
run, and extend itself through the dung, to the surface of the ground. In September or 
October following, when the melon-bine is decaying, the bed is carefully cleaned, the 
glasses are put on, and kept close; and when the mould becomes dry, it must be fre- 
quently watered, but not immoderately, as too much wet would destroy the spawn ; ad- 
vantage should also be taken of every gentle shower, for the same purpose. Tlie moisture 
coming up on the dry earth produces a moderate heat, which soon causes the mushrooms 
to appear in every part of the bed, in such abundance as even to prevent each other's 
growth. I have frequently, at one time, gathered two bushels from a frame ten feet by 
six, and have produced individual mushrooms of nearly two pounds' weight. The mould 
being kept warm by the glasses, and properly watered, the mushrooms will continue to 
spring till the frost of winter prevents their further growth. I then leave the bed, frame, 
&c. just as they are, and early in spring, as soon as the frost may be supposed to be over, 
I take off the frame and glasses, and cover the bed lightly with straw ; when the warm 
enlivening showers of spring cause the mushrooms to be again produced in every part, 
till the drought of summer renders it difficult to keep the bed sufficiently moist for their 
growth. Sometimes I suffer the bed to remain, in order to produce a crop in the second 
autumn, but more generally take the bed to pieces, for the sake of the dung, and also 
for the purpose of procuring and drying the spawn, against the return of spring. When 
I first thought of raising mushrooms in the manner above described, I was apprehensive, 
lest the spawn, by running among the roots of the melons, might injure their growth. 
I therefore planted it in one light only, but the result convinced me that it did no injury, 
as, on the only plant in that light I grew a melon, of the black rock kind, weighing 
eight and three quarters pounds, for the first crop, and another six and a half pounds for 
the second crop ; both of which ripened well. Since that time I have always placed the 
spawn over the whole of the bed, and have never failed to produce a good crop of both 
melons and mushrooms. Should it be thought advisable to have a supply of mushrooms 
during the depth of winter, I am confident (though I have not tried the experiment,) 
that they might be obtained, at a trifling expense, by lining the bed with hot dung, and 
using other precautions to keep out the cold air." (Hort. Titans, v. iii.) 

' 3446. Oldacre, at the end of his paper on growing mushrooms on shelves, &c. says, " They may be growr. 
also plentifully, in hot-bed frames, by the same process as is recommended for the sheds. In this latter 
practice, as soon as the beds are earthed, they should be covered with hay or litter under the lights, until 
they are in full bearing, then remove the covering to the outside of the lights, to exclude the sun and air 
as much as possible. In cold weather, if they advance slowly in their growth, the frames may be covered 
with hot dung, which will greatly encourage' them. It must be recollected, that when these beds are 
made in hot weather, air must be admitted as freely as possible into the frames, during the time of 
spawning, as directed for the management of this part of the process, in cellars or sheds." 

3447. In old hot-beds. A good crop of mushrooms is sometimes obtained without 
making a bed on purpose, by introducing lumps of spawn along the margin of late 
cucumber-ridges, just into the top of the mould. This may be done from March to 
May. (^Abercrombie. ) 

3448. In pits. Jeeves has adopted this practice, and thus describes it. " To make 
my bed, the dung was placed in the bottom of the pit, and rammed tightly down, to 
about the thickness of eighteen inches ; the dung itself producing sufficient heat to set 
the spawn running, after it had been introduced in the usual manner. Tlie bed was 
made up last September, and came into bearing in six weeks ; it has continued to pro- 
duce regularly to the present time, and requires no more heat than is collected by the 
effect of the sun on the air witliin the house, except on frosty nights, when a little fire 
is put into the flue. The mushrooms come up uniformly over every part of the bed, 
which is covered very slightly with straw, (not sufficient to exclude the light,) for the 
pui-pose of preserving moisture on the surface." 

3449. In dark frames. Nicol says, " If you have no mushroom-house, and yet are 
anxious to have mushrooms in winter, a cover or frame, capable of defending the bed 
from rain, snow, or frost, may be made at a small expense, thus : first, make a frame 
of inch-and-half deal, nine or ten inches deep, six feet wide, and of any convenient 
length, from ten tc twenty feet. Then fit a roof to it, three feet in the pitch, made of 
thin boards, imbricated, w^hich lay over with two or three coats of pitch or paint. 
The roof part to be fixed down to the wooden frame by hooks and eyes, or by bolts, so 
as that it may be removed at pleasure, and to have two moveable boards on each side, of 
about a foot square, to slip for the admission of air. This sort of frame being placed in a 
dry warm situation, and being insulated by a drain or trench, would completely defen(^ 
the bed from wet ; and by being covered, in severe weather, with straw or mats, from 
frost. If the ground be not perfectly dry, a sole or floor must be formed of aslies, 
gravel, or stone-chips, for the bed ; a thing necessary in any situation which is the least 
damp, either within or out of doors." 



Book I. 



CULTURE OF THE MUSHROOM. 



605 



3450. In a cellar. " Musbrooms may likewise be produced in a cellar, or any other 
vaulted place, with equal success, and not unfrequently to greater advantage as to crop, 
than in a shed, or other building, that is level with the surface of the earth. The same 
rules of management are to be observed as directed for the shed. The peculiar advan- 
tage of a cellar is, that no fire is necessary, and less water, the application of which so 
frequently proves injurious, is wanted." 

3451. On hollow ridges. Hogan says he has devised an easy mode of growing 
mushrooms under shelter, and tried it one season with great success. " The exterior 
form of my bed resembles the old ones as built against a wall ; but instead of building it 
solid, it is hollow ; strong stakes are inclined against the wall, at an angle of about 65°, 
on which are placed hurdles to support the bed. By this means a cavity is formed under 
the stakes, between them and the wall and floor, for the purpose of receiving dung, 
which being readily changed, an opportunity is thus afforded of keeping up a permanent 
moist heat in the bed, the absence of which, together with an insufficient depth of mould 
for the spawn to run in, is the great defect of all other modes of raising mushrooms with 
which I am acquainted. On this structure fourteen inches of rotten dung and four 
inches of loamy earth were laid, and beat firm, and the spawning and other processes and 
results were the same as usual." {Hort. Trans, v. 305.) We fear two things from this 
mode — occasional overheating and overdrying, either of which are as ruinous to the 
mushroom, as they are to cape-heaths in pots. 

3452. The following details of culture are common to each of tlie above modes of rearing 
the mushroom : — 

3453. Season for commencement. Mushroom-beds or boxes may be formed and planted at any time of 
the year ; but the month of September is the most natural season ; and the time next to be recommended 
is early in spring. In June, July, and August, the weather is rather too warm ; and in the depth of 
winter, it is not equally easy to excite and cherish the spawn. {Abercrombie.) Nicol makes up a bed in- 
March to last till September, and another at that time to last through the winter, till the bed to be again 
made in March comes into bearing. He adds, however, that there is no rule for making up these beds, as 
it maybe done at any day of the year with nearly equal propriety. {Kalendar, p. 50.) 

3454. Time of growth. In autumn and spring, common ridges will often begin to produce plentifully in 
four, five, or six weeks. > In summer or winter they are much longer before they become productive. 
{Abercrombie.) In Wales's method of growing in boxes, they come up in five weeks. Abercrombie says, 
mushroom-beds have been known to lie dormant for five or six months, and yet afterwards produce 
abundant crops. Where a bed is cold, Nicol observes, it will be sometimes two or three months of pro- 
ducing mushrooms. 

3455. Symptoms of progress. Nicol says, when you would know whether the spawn has begun to run, 
thrust your hand a few inches deep into different parts of the bed, and examine what you bring up. If it 
smells exactly of mushrooms, and has the appearance of bits of thread, then the spawn is in action. 
" But generally you will be forewarned of the spawn's running, by a previous crop of spurious fungi, 
which rise more or less abundantly, according to the fineness or grossness of the materials of which the 
bed is composed. These fungi generally are either what are called pipes or balls ; and sometimes a kind 
of mushroom, of a very bad sort, thin, flat, with white or pale yellow gills. They have all, however, a 
nauseous, sickly smell, and may readily be distinguished from the true mushroom, which is thick, 
hemispherical, with brown or reddish gills." 

3456. Duration of a crop. Six months is the ordinary duration of a common bed or ridge, made in the 
open air or in a flued shed. Oldacre says, his beds will continue to produce for several months. To have 
a succession, he earths a bed every two or three months. Wales's boxes (3442.) continue to produce 
for six weeks, and sometimes two months. 

3457. Temperature. Nicol says, if the bed be placed in a flued shed, the temperature 
in winter should be kept steadily to about 55 degrees. This is also Oldacre's 
temperature. 

3458. Wales says, " I have ever found the best adapted and most productive heat to 
be from 55 to 65 degrees, and the nearer the beds are kept to this heat the greater will 
be the success." 

3459. Air is essentially necessary to the flavor of mushrooms. Oldacre says, air 
must be admitted in proportion to the heat, otherwise the mushrooms become long in 
their stems, and weak. The same thing takes place in ridges when the coverings are 
too thick. 

3460. Water. Abercrombie and Nicol agree in recommending no water to be given till 
the spawn begins to run. 

3461. Abercrombie says, *' In autumn, the bed will want no water until the first crop is gathered. Then 
a sprinkling will help to excite a fresh vegetation. In spring, should a drying air long prevail, it may be 
necessary to moisten the bed a little. In summer, the bed may be now and then exposed to gentle 
showers, or otherwise watered according to the dryness and heat of the season. In order to give water, 
without wetting the bed excessively or unequally, scatter a thin layer of short hay over the ridge ; and let 
a small quantity of water be gently distributed, to all parts alike, from a rose-pan. Leave it to filter 
through the hay, and cover the bed up with litter. In winter, the substitute for watering must be some 
warm mulch from a dung-heap, laid over the dry litter ; the moisture evaporating from this will promote 
the growth of the mushrooms. Excessive moisture is- not only apt to destroy the spawn, but it debases 
the flower of such fungi as can be produced under it. It is also supposed to render the salutary sorts less 
so, and to make the unwholesome kinds more acrimonious." 

3462. mcol says, " When the spawn is fully formed, give the bed two or three hearty waterings, in 
order to set it a growing ; for, otherwise, it will lie dormant, and show no symptom of vegetation. Give 
just as much water (but by no means at once) as will fairly reach to the bottom of all the materials, and 
afterwards keep the bed in a state neither wet nor dry, but rather inclining to the latter, this being the 
safe side to err on, as it is more easy to make it damp than to dry it. When a bed has been, as it were, 
tired of producing, I have sometimes desisted from watering for several months ; then by examination I 
have fcxund a new net of spawn formed all over the surface, the threads being deep-rooted, even to the 



606 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



bottom. By a hearty watering, as above, a most plentiful and lasting supply has been obtained. The 
idea of treating my beds so, arose by observation of the manner in which field-mushrooms are often pro- 
duced. We frequently see the crop suddenly disappear, and as suddenly appear again, according to the 
state of the weather, with respect to wet or drought ; and that too, in the same field." 

3463. Oldacre Waters with extreme caution, using water nearly as warm as new milk, sprinkling very 
lightly with a syringe, or a small watering-pot. Cold water destroys the bed and the spawn, and thus 
renders the whole useless. 

3464. Some old authors advise to take a few full-grown mushrooms, and breaking them down in the 
watering-pot, to water the beds with the infusion. This, Neill observes, is plainly nothing else than 
sowing mushroom-seed. 

S465. Light. Abercrombie, Nicol, and most gardeners and authors, consider light as 
quite unnecessary for the production of the mushroom. It is very probable, however, that 
it contributes in some way to their perfection, since in their natural situation, they enjoy 
a considerable portion of it. Our opinion is, that it should not be entirely excluded from 
mushroom-houses or beds on whatever plan they may be constructed. See an interest- 
ing proof of value of light in Chaptal's Agr. app. a CItimie, vol. i. p. 180. ^ 

3466. Gatheritig the crop. When the bed is in full production, and the season fine, 
mushrooms may be gathered two or three times a-week. Turn off the straw covering, 
and return it carefully at each gathering. {Abercrombie.) " In gathering mushrooms," 
Nicol observes, " they should always be cut, and never be pulled ; as by pulling, many 
young ones might be destroyed. There are always a number of these forming or clus- 
tering about the roots of the old ones, which should not be disturbed. If the spawn be 
deeply situated in these beds, mushrooms will often form and come to full maturity, en- 
tirely under ground. They may easily be recognised, however, as they are generally 
large, and push up small hills above their heads. They ought to be uncovered with care, 
that the spawn about them may be as little disturbed as possible." Oldacre says, in ga- 
thering mushrooms, avoid disturbing the small ones, that invariably, with good manage- 
ment, surround the stems of those which are more early matured. Twist them up very 
gently in all instances where you can ; and when obliged to cut them, take care to divest 
the beds of those that are cut, as they would rot and injure those around them. 

3467. Poisonous mushrooms. For the characters of the true mushroom (Agaricus 
cainpcstris), and the other species and varieties, edible and deleterious, see the follow- 
ing chapter. Their duration is too fugitive to admit of their being much injured by 
insects. 



Chap. VIII. 

Horticultural Catalogue. — Hardy Herbaceous Culinary Vegetables. 

3468. The various 2>lants and trees grown in the different dejmrtments of horticulture 
shall now be more particularly enumerated and characterised, and some account given 
of their history, use, and culture. We shall commence with the hardy herbaceous ve- 
getables ; and the most i^itable arrangement for this class of plants seems to be, that 
arising from a combined view of their habits, culture, and uses, in domestic economy. 
Though no such arrangement can be absolutely perfect, from the circumstance of some 
of the plants being used for different purposes, yet, by bringing together such as present 
most points of union, something better than a mere alphabetical catalogue is formed, of 
which the following is the outline : — 

3469. The cabbage tnbe ; comprehending the white and red cabbage, cabbage-colewort. 
Savoy, Brussels sprouts, borecoles or winter greens, cauliflowers, and broccolis, 

3470. Leguminous j)lants ; comprehending the pea, bean, and kidneybean. 

3471. Esculent roots ; comprehending the potatoe, Jerusalem artichoke, turnip, carrot, 
parsnep, red beet, skirret, scorzonera, salsify, and radish. 

3472. Spinaceous plants ; comprehending the garden-spinage, white beet, orache, wild 
spinage. New Zealand spinage, sorrel, and herb-patience. 

3473. Alliaceous lylants ; comprehending the onion, leek, chives, garlic, shallot, and 
rocambole. 

3474. Asparaginous plants; comprehending asparagus, sea-kale, artichoke, cardoon, 
rampion, alisanders, hop, bladder-campion, cotton thistle, and milk-thistle. 

3475. Acetarious plants or salads ; comprehending small salads, lettuce, endive, suc- 
cory, dandelion, celery, mustard, rape, corn-salad, garden-cress, American cress, winter 
cress, water-cress, brook-lime, scurvy-grass, garden-rocket, burnet, buckshorn plantain, 
ox-eye daisy, and some of those included in other sections, as the sorrel, tarragon, Indian 
cress, &c. 

3476. Pot-herbs and garnishings ; comprehending parsley, purslane, tarragon, fennel, 
dill, chervil, horse-radish, Indian cress, marigold, borage, and some others included in 
other sections. 



Book I. 



THE CABBAGE TRIBE. 



607 



3477. Siveet herbs ; comprehending thyme, sage, clary, mint, balm, marjoram, savory, 
basil, rosemary, lavender, tansy, costmary, and some of those in the preceding section. 

3478. Plants used in tarts, confectionary, and domestic medicine ; coinprehending rhu- 
barb, gourd, angelica, anise, coriander, caraway, rue, hyssop, chamomile, elecampane, 
licorice, blessed thistle, wormwood, and some others. 

3479. Plants used as preserves and pickles ; comprehending love-apple, egg-plant, cap- 
sicum, caper, samphire, and the red cabbage, Indian cress, radish, kidneybean, marsh 
marygold, &c. included in other sections. 

3480. Edible indigenous j^lants neglected, or not in cultivation ; comprehending the sea- 
beet, nettle, sea-peas, and a variety of other natives. 

3481. Edible British fungi; comprehending the mushroom, truffle, and morel. 

3482. Edible British fuci ; comprehending the dulse, tangle, &c. 

Sect. I. The Cabbage Tribe. 

3483. The cabbage tribe is of all the classes of cultivated culinary vegetables, the most 
ancient as well as the most extensive. The Brassica oleracea. Tetrad, siliq. Linn., and 
Crucferce, Jiiss. figured in Eng. Bot. t. 637., being extremely liable to sport, or run 
into varieties and monstrosities, has in the course of time, become the parent of a numer- 
ous race of culinary productions, so very various in their habit and appearance, that to 
many it may appear not a little extravagant to refer them to the same origin. Besides 
the different sorts of white and red cabbage, and Savoys, v/hich form the leaves into a 
head, there are various sorts of borecoles, which grow with their leaves loose in the natural 
way, and there are several kinds of cauliflower and broccoli, which form their stalks or 
flower-buds into a head. All of these, with the turnip-rooted cabbage and the Brussels 
sprouts, claim a common origin from the single species of brassica above mentioned. 
Cabbage of some sort. White, in his History of Selborne, informs us, must have been, 
known to the Saxons ; for they named the month of February Sprout kale. ' Being a 
favorite with the Romans, it is pro})able the Italian cabbage would be introduced at an 
early period into South Britain. To the inhabitants of the north of Scotland, cabbages 
were first made known by the soldiers of the enterprising Cromwell, when quartered at 
Inverness. (Edin. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

3484. The origirml cabbage-jjlant grows naturally on the sea-shores in different parts of 
England, but it has not been observed in Scotland. It is a biennial plant ; the stem- 
leaves are much waved and variously indented ; the color is sea-green, with occasionally 
a tinge of purple. Early in the spring, the wild cabbage or colewort, from the sea-coast, 
is said to be excellent, but it must be boiled in two waters to remove the saltness. The 
roots may also be eaten, but they are not veiy tender. {Neill, in Ed. Encyc. and Martyuy 
in Mill. Diet.) 

3485. A new arrangement of the cultivated species of brassica has been made by 
Prof. Decandolle {Hort. Trans. yo\. \. , and in\n%Beg. Veg.), but as many of the va- 
rieties which the brassica oleracea assumes on the continent are little known here, and as 
some of our varieties are omitted in Prof. Decandolle's enumeration, there does not 
seem at present any sufficient reason to deviate from the usual British arrangement of this 
genus. Prof. Decandolle's varieties, or races, of B. oleracea, are — 

B. oleracea sylvestris, or wild cabbage I B. oleracea capltata, headed or leaved cabbage 

acephala, open cabbage, or borecole caulo-rapa, turnip cabbage, and 

buUata, blistered cabbage, or Savoy I botrytis, flowery cabbage, or cauliflower, and broccoli. 

The colza of the Dutch, he makes a distinct species (S. campestris), and also the turnip {B. Rapa), the 
rape {B. Napus), and the summer rape of the Germans (B. preecox). 

3486. The sjmce occup)ied by this tribe in most kitchen-gardens may be estimated sit one, 
eighth part of the open compartments, taking the whole year round ; and in cottage-gardens, 
the heading cabbages and borecoles generally occupy one half of the whole space. We 
shall take the varieties in the order of white cabbage, red cabbage. Savoy, Brussels 
sprouts, borecole, cauliflower, and broccoli. 

SuBSECT. I. IVliite Cabbage. — Brassica oleracea, var. a. capitata, L. and Dec. Chou 
l)oinme, or cabus, Fr. ; Kopfkohl, Ger. ; and Cavolo, Ital. 

3487. The common or ivhite garden-cabbage is too well known, and its uses too 
universal, to require any description. It produces firm, compact heads, glaucous, green, 
or greenish-yellow externally, but blanched within, and varying in different sorts from 
three to twelve or fifteen inches' diameter, and from two to fifteen or twenty pounds' 
weight. 

3488. Subvarieties. These are very numerous : the sorts chiefly cultivated are — 



Small early dwarf 
Early dwarf York 
I>arge early York 
Early dwarf sugar-loaf 
Large sugar-loaf 
East Ham 
Early Battersea 
Eaiiy Imperial 



Pentonville. Large round 
head ; leaves white and 
fleshy, wrinkled like the 
Savoy; very delicate and 
fine : in perfection dur- 
ing the latter summer 
months, when other cab 
bagei are of strong flavor. 



Antwerp 
Russian 

Early London hollow 
Large hollow sugar-loaf 
Large oblong hollow 
Large round winter 
(white) 



Great drum-head flat- 
topped 

Great round Scotch, or 
white Strasbourg : from 
which the German sour 
krout is chiefly made. 



608 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 



5489. Estimate of sorts. The first five or six sorts are suitable for the earliest and secondary summer 
crops ; and the middle-sized and large kinds for the principal summer, autumn, and winter supplies. 
Thus, 1. For the earliest crops, allot some of the small early dwarf York, East Ham, and sugar-loaf, for 
cabbaging in April, May, and June. 2. Raise more considerable quantities of the middle-sized kinds, par- 
ticularly the large York, and large sugar-loaf, or the Battersea, Penton, Imperial, Antwerp, Russian, &c. 
for general summer crops. 3. Choose the larger later sorts for succession, summer, and general autumn 
cabbages. The large hollow sugar-loaf, oblong hollow, long-sided hollow, and large round winter (white), 
are excellent for full cabbaging in August, September, and October, till Christmas : or any of the middle- 
sized varieties may be eligibly sown for latter succession crops in summer and autumn, to cut in light young 
growth ; also to cultivate for cabbage-coleworts, either with small hearts, or as open greens for family and 
market supply in autumn, winter, spring, and returning summer. 4. The large round winter cabbage, 
great drum, Scotch, and American kinds, all reaching a very expanded bulk in autumn and winter, are 
not usually so well fitted for family consumption as the foregoing, being more commonly adopted for field- 
culture, to feed cattle in winter, &c. 

3490. Propagation. All the kinds are raised from seed annually, of which, according to Abercrombie's 
seed estimate, " for a seed-bed to raise the early York, and similar varieties, four feet wide by twenty in 
length, two ounces" will be jrequired. For a seed-bed to raise the large sugar-loaf, and other luxuriant 
growers, four feet by thirty-six in length, two ounces. Sow at three different seasons, that is, spring, 
summer, and autumn, and cover from an eighth to a quarter of an inch. Under a deficiency of winter- 
standing young plants, for final transplanting in spring, or, in order to have some spring-sown plants as 
forward as possible, a moderate portion of some best early sorts may be sown between the middle of 
February and the middle of March, in a slight hot-bed or frame, to nurture the plants till the leaves are 
an inch or two in length. Then prick them into intermediate beds in the open garden, there to gain 
strength for final transplanting. {Abercrombie.) 

3491. Soil and situation. The soil for seedlings should be light, and, excepting for early sowings, not 
rich. Where market-gardeners raise great quantities of seedling-cabbages to stand the winter, and to be 
sold for transplanting in spring, they choose, in general, the poorest and stifFest piece of land they have 
got, more especially in Scotland, where large autumnal sowings of winter drum-head and round Scotch 
are annually made, and where the stiffness of the soil gives a peculiar firmness of texture and hardness of 
constitution to the plants, and prevents their being thrown out of the soil during the thaws which succeed 
a frosty winter. Transplanted cabbages require a rich mould, rather clayey than sandy j and, as Neill and 
Nicol observe, it can scarcely be too much manured, as they are an exhausting crop. Autumnal plant- 
ations, intended to stand the winter, should have a dry soil, well dug and manured, and of a favorable 
aspect. The cabbage tribe, whether in the seed-bed, or final plantation, ever require an open situation. 
Under the drip of trees, or in the shade, seedlings are drawn up weak, and grown crops are meagre, worm- 
eaten and ill-flavored. 

3492. Early and main summer crops. The cabbage being a biennial, the largest crops 
are obtained by sowing the year previous to that in which you expect to reap. Sow, 
therefore, at the beginning of August, to raise plants to stand over the winter in young 
open growth, for cabbaging early, and in succession, the following year. A nice atten- 
tion should be paid to the time for sowing this crop, which is the first or second week 
in August, being that most conducive to ultimate success, though some sow at the close 
of July, to have the plants stronger before the approach of winter ; but of a crop so 
forward, many generally run for seed in the spring ; therefore be careful to make the 
principal sowing neither sooner than about the fifth, nor later than the twelfth, of that 
month. For, if sown earlier, many of the plants are apt to run in the spring, as just 
stated ; and, if sown later, they would not acquire sufficient strength before winter, 
to enable them to stand severe weather so effectually as those a little advanced in firmer 
growth. 

3493. Sow each sort separately in an open free situation, in beds of rich mellow earth, broad cast, 
moderately thick, and rake in the seed evenly, lengthwise each bed. Give occasional watering, if dry hot 
weather; or sometimes shade with mats, in hot sunny days, till the plants come up fully; after which, 
continue necessary moderate watering, if a dry season, to forward and strengthen the crop. 

3494. WTien the plants have two or three leaves an inch or two broad in September, or beginning of 
October, lift some considerable portion from the seed-beds, and prick into beds of good earth, about four 
inches apart, giving water : all these are to remain in the intermediate bed during winter, to gain strength 
for transplanting in the spring. Those left in the seed-beds will thus have more room to advance equally 
for transplanting the most forward of the early sorts in the same year, towards the end of October, or in 
November and December, and the principal supply in the spring, the last fortnight of February, or in 
March and April. 

3495. In transplanting, continue to keep each sort separate, allotting the whole good ground; and, if 
dunged, it will be repaid in the crop. Plant some of the dwarf early in rows, from a foot and a half to two 
feet asunder, to admit of thinning for use in a young cabbaged state : those of the middle-sized, intended 
for main crops, plant at two feet, or two and a half distant. The large autumnal kinds plant at least 
from two feet and a half to a yard asunder, giving water at planting in dry warm weather. 

3496. In their subsequent growth, \f any ia.i\ or run to seed, be careful to pull them up directly, and 
supply the deficiencies with fresh plants. As the crop proceeds, give it two or more timely hoeings, both 
to cut down all rising weeds, and to loosen the ground between the plants, drawing some earth round the 
■tems, which will strengthen and forward them considerably. 

3497. The different sorts will cabbage in succession from April till October. Some may be forwarded in 
cabbaging by tying the leaves together, moderately close, with osier twigs, or strings of bass. The succeed- 
ing main crops will not need that assistance, but will head spontaneously in due time. Of the earlier 
dwarf kinds, some probably will be fit for cuttijig, in small cabbagy heads, at the close of April or begin- 
ning of May; and the others in full growth from May tillJuly ; and the succeeding main crops in full 
heads from July till October. 

3498. Early spring-sown crop. To succeed the crops of the preceding autumn sowing, it is requisite to 
sow in the spring, to raise plants for use the same year, partly as young summer cabbages, and partly with 
full heads, in autumn and winter. For this purpose, sow at the close of Februarv, or in March, and the 
beginning of April. A few for early summer use may be sown in the third week of Februarj' on a slight hot- 
bed, or on a warm border under glass. In case no plants were raised the preceding autumn, or if the young 
crop which has stood the winter be much cut by severe weather, there is an additional motive for sowing 
a competent portion in the spring, of dwarf, middle-sized, and large kinds, according to the above estimate 
of sorts. Sow the different kinds separately, and in the same method as directed for the crop to stand the 
winter. Manage the plants in the seed-bed, and prick a proportion into an intermediate bed in the same 
manner. When of suitable growth for final transplanting, in May, June, or July, (taking opportunity of 
moist weather, if it occurs,) plant them out in rows traced from one to two feet asunder fbr the dwarf and 
middle-sized, and for the larger kinds from two feet and a half to a yard distant. Give water at planting. 



Book I. 



WHITE CABBAGE. 



609 



In their subsequent growth, give occasional hoeing to kill weetls, and to draw earth round the stems, as 
advised for the August-sown plants. 

3499. iMte spring or snnnner sown crop. For late young summer and autumn cabbages and winter 
plants, you may sow small portions at any time from May to July, principally of the quick-hearting kinds ; 
plant out finally in summer and autumn to produce young heads, and small cabbage- hearted coleworts in 
August, September, October, and thence till midwinter. The large late family cabbages, which make 
returns for autumn, winter, and early spring, also the largest kinds usually adopted for field-culture, are 
to be excluded from this sowing, as they are only properly raised as part of the principal crops sown in 
August and early in spring. (Abercrombic.) 

3500. Watering cabbages. During long continued droughts in June and July or later, cabbages are apt 
to become stinted in their growth, and covered with aphides. To prevent this apply copious waterings 
every evening; water so abundantly supplied is supposed to injure the flavor of some plants, but it is 
found to have no efFect of that kind on cabbages. 

3501. Cabbage- coleworts. The original variety of cabbage called colewort (if ever the 
plants which passed by that name were a distinct variety) is, or seems to be, lost, and is 
now succeeded by what are called cabbage-coleworts. These, Abercrombie observes, are 
valuable family plants, useful in three stages : as young open greens, as greens with 
closing hearts, and as greens forming a cabbage growth. 

3502. Sorts proper for coleivorts. Procure seed of some middle-sized early variety of the cabbage, 
quick-hearting, and of close growth ; such as the early and large York, East Ham, and large sugar-loaf. 
Occasionally, for larger coleworts, you may adopt some Battersea, imperial, Antwerp sorts, or early 
London hollow; but avoid the larger late kinds of cabbage, which, in a colewort state, are too spreading 
and open ; the others grow close, stocky, and full in the heart, and boil most tender and sweet for the 
table. 

3503. Times of sowing. To have a good supply of coleworts for autumn, v/inter, spring, and returning 
summer, it is proper to make three or four sowings in summer and autumn : that is, one sowing toward 
the middle of June, a second about the same time in July, with a third in the last week. These 
supplementary crops are for transplanting in August, September, and October, and will amount to a con- 
tinued prt)vision of autumn, winter, and early spring coleworts, from September till March or April. At 
this time the plants of these sowings will mostly start for seeding. To succeed these, effect a very con- 
siderable sowing in the begiiming from about the third to tiie sixth of August. Having been transplanted 
in autumn, the forwardest of the August-raised plants will be fit for gathering in the course of winter, if 
the weather be mild ; but the principal supply should be set apart for a continuing spring crop to increase 
in growth from March till June, without running to seed, as would generally be the case, if sown before 
the time just specified. What are not used in their colewort state in spring, will advance in cabbaging, to 
be cut either with small hearts, or with middling, or full heads, in the early part of summer and autumn. 
If it be required to have coleworts in a younger state in summer and autumn, you may sow at the time of 
raising the spring-sown crop of cabbages. 

3504. Sowing, thinning, and transplanting. Sow in some open compartments of light mellow ground, 
in one or more beds, distributing the seed evenly on the surface ; and rake it regularly into beds length- 
wise. If the weather be dry, give occasional waterings, both before and after the plants are up. When 
the young plants have two or three leaves, if thick in the seed-bed, prick out a portion into intermediate 
beds, to increase in growth three or four weeks. When these and those in the seed-beds have several 
leaves two or three inches broad, transplant them finally into open compartments of ground, in rows 
twelve or fifteen inches asunder, by eight or twelve inches in the lines, as it may be intended to gather 
them in smaller or larger growth. If tlie weather be dry and warm, a watering at planting would be of 
much advantage. In their subsequent growth, keep them clear from large weeds by occasional hoeing; 
at the same time, loosen the ground aliout the plants, drawing a little earth to the stems, which 
will forward and strengthen their growth ; the hoe will also wound and kill many of the slugs which 
sometimes annoy these plants in their young state, about the end of autumn and beginning of winter. 
{^Abercrombie.) 

3505. Taking the cabbage crop. After cutting off the head, never neglect immediately to pull up the stalk, 
and carry it off" with all the refuse leaves to the compost-heap. This practice is enjoined as well to prevent 
the stem from pushing out shoots, and needlessly exhausting the ground, as to promote neatness and order. 
It is necessary, however, to make an exception in favor of the practice of some, who, instead of removing 
the roots and stems of the main summer crop, leave them in the ground deprived of their injured leaves, 
and with the intervals between the rows stirred and perhaps manured, allow them to stand till spring. 
Thus treated, they push out in autunm, and in January or February abound in fine cabbage-sprouts, not 
much inferior to young cabbages. Sometimes this practice is applied to the earliest spring or summer 
crop in which case the sprout- cabbages come into use the following autumn. 

3506. Cabbage-coleworts are gathered when the leaves are as broad as a man's hand. The largest are 
drawn up by the root, which is generally allowed to remain attached to those taken to public markets, as 
it retains the sap, and tends to preserve ihem succulent a longer period, than if they were wounded close 
to the succulent leaves, 

"3507. Preserving cabbages. Where this is thought necessary, the plants are laid down on their sides, 
and the stems covered with earth close to the head, the outer part of the more exposed side of which may 
be sometimes injured, but the inside remains sound. 

3508. To save cabbage-seed. The raising of the seed of the different sorts of cabbage, 
Neill observes, affords employment to many persons in various parts of 'England. It is 
well known that no plants are more liable to be spoiled by cross breeds than the cabbage 
tribe, unless the plants of any particular variety, when in flower, be kept at a very 
considerable distance from any other ; also, in flower, bees are extremely apt to carry 
the pollen of the one to the other, and produce confusion in the progeny. Market- 
gardeners, and many private individuals, raise seed for their own use. Some of the 
handsomest cabbages of the different sorts are dug up in autumn, and sunk in die 
ground to the head ; early next summer a flower-stem appears, which is followed by 
abundance of seed. A few of the soundest and healthiest cabbage-stalks, furnished with 
sprouts, answer the same end. When the seed has been well ripened and dried, it will 
keep for six or eight years. It is mentioned by'Bastien, that the seed-growers of Auber- 
villiers have learned by experience, that seed gathered from the middle flower-stem 
produces plants which will be fit for use a fortnight earlier than those from the seed of 
the lateral flower-stems : this may deserve the attention of the watchful gardener, and 
assist him in regulating his successive crops of the same kind of cabbage. 

R r 



bio 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 



SuBSECT. 2. Re([ C(iblHt<ic. — lirasxica olcrnccn, var. ^. rubra. L. Chou jut m /in'' 
rouge, Fr. ; Both A'o/tfA-o/il, Gcr. ; and Cavolo roxso, Ital. 

3509. The red or jmrple cabbage is similar in form to tlie white, but 6f a purple or 
brov. nisli-rcd color. 

3510. Use. The red cabbage is chiefly used for pickling ; and tlie dwarf red variety, 
Neill observes, " certainly does make one of the most beautiful pickles that can be pre- 
sented at table," Both the dwarf and large sorts ai-e sometimes shredded down in 
winter, in salads, like red beet-root ; and the Germans prepare sour krout from all or 
any of the varieties. 

351 1. Sitbvarieti-ea. There are tliree principal varieties of red cabbage, viz. 

Ttie large red, orred Dutch; witha large, I Thedwarfred; withasmall, round, tinii, I Tlie Aberdeen red; with an open leafy 
firm, round head, usually cultivated in delicate head, less common than the head, chiefly found in cottage garden* 
market-gardens | other | , in the itorth of Scotland. 

3512. The propagation, sowing, and cultnre are in all respects the same as for the white 
cabbage ; excepting that the heads are not used when imperfectly formed, or as cole- 
worts ; but the plants should, in all cases, be allowed to stand till they have formed 
close firm heads. Sow in August for a crop to stand the winter, and to come in at the 
close of next summer, and thence till the end of autumn. Sow early in spring for re>- 
turns in the following winter and spring. 

SiiBSECT. 3. Savoy. — Brassica oJeracea, vai*. y. xahauda, L. ; B. o. var. 7. bullata, Dec. 
Chou pomme frise, Fr. 

3513. Tlie Savoy is distinguished from the other close or hearted cabbages by tlie ru- 
gosity of its leaves ; and from the Brussels -sprouts, by its cabbaging in large full heads. 
The Brussels sprouts is considered a subvariety. 

3514. Use. The Savoy is in use as a table-vegetable from November till spring, un- 
less destroyed by frost, in which case, it is succeeded by the borecoles or winter greens. 
These two classes of the cabbage tribe generally supply the table from November to 
May. 

3515. Stibvarieties. These are — 

The green I The yellow Savoy ; and of each of these I The oblonfr, antl 

The dwarfj and are— The conical, or sugar-loaf headed. 

I The round | 

oSlff. Est'wmte of sorts. The green Savoy is the least liardy, and must be used first. The London 
market is gcncralfy supplied with it through the month of November, and until the jilants are injured by 
frost. The dwarf Savoy is hardier than the preccdingj bearing well the attack of the first winter frosts, 
by which tlie delicacy of its flavor is materially improved ; and from its small size, it is better adapted to 
the tables of private familes. Where the whole class is cultivated, this must be considered the second 
sort in succession. Tlie best plants grow close to the ground, not exceeding a foot in height. The yellow 
Savoy, by its hardiness, enables us to continue the use of Savoys till mid-winter. It does not yield to any 
of the others in goodness, and by many persons it is preferred, being considered much sweeter. {Hort. 
Trmis. vol. ii. p. :>09.) 

3.'517. Prapngafioii. The Savoy is always raised from seed, and for a seed-bed four feet and a half by 
eight feet, half an ounce of seed will be sufficient. 

3518. Soil and situation. This esculent answers best on a light rich soil : poor or exhausted ground 
should be manured according to the defects of it. Allot an open compartment in the full air, that the 
seedlings and advancing plants may grow stocky, and not draw up weak and long stemmed, as they are 
liable to do in close situations, or narrow borders, under walls. 

3519. Times of sowing. A sufficient succession is obtained by three, or at most, four sowings, made from 
the last week of February till the second week in May; for planting out, from May till September. A 
small crop may be sown at the end of February, or tlie beginning of March, to plant out for early autumn 
Savoys, to cabbage in August or September. Sow a larger portion in the last fortnight of March fbr a first 
considerable autumn and winter crop. Nor omit to sow a full supply in the second or third week of April, 
for a main crop to be planted out in June, July, and the beginning of August, to attain a full cabbaged 
growth late in autumn, and to stand partly over the winter. Furthermore, it would be eligible to make 
a moderate sowing at the beginning, or towards the middle of May, in order to plant out the seedlings iu 
July, August, or September, for smaller heading, to come in towards the spring, and to stand longer 
before they run ; or, some to use occasionally in Avinter, as Savoy coleworts. 

3.520. Culture. The ground should have been jireviously trenched to a good depth. Four feet is a con- 
venicnt width for the beds. Sow broad-cast ; and rake in a quarter of an inch deep. As soon as the 
plants iiave two or three leaves, an inch or two in width, if they stand too crowded, thin the seed-beds, by 
drawing out a quantity regularly ; and prick them into other beds four inches asunder. Should the 
weather be dry, water those left, as well as those removed. Permit both divisions to remain three, four, 
or five weeks, to gain a good stocky size for final transplanting. When the plants, both in seed-beds and 
those pricked out, are advanced with several leaves, two or three inches broad, or more, transplant them 
finally into tiie most open comjjartments of ground, where they will be less annoyed by caterpillars, that 
they may cabbage with large full heads ; planting them at different times as ground becomes vacant, 
llemove "the most forward in May or June, for early autumn heading in August or September. But plant 
the jirincipal crops in June or July, and from the beginning to the middle of August; taking all possible 
advantage of sliowcry weather. In drawing the plants, observe if any are clubbed or knotty at the root, 
and cut off the iirotuberances close. Plant in rows those removed in May, June, or July, tv/o feet and a 
half, or not less than two feet asunder, by tlie same distance in the rows ; others late planted in August 
and September, two feet by eighteen inches. In scarcity of vacant ground, some Savoys may be occa. 
sionally planteil between wide rows of previous standing crops, such as beans, cauliflowers, and early 
cabbage, that are sufficiently forward to be gathered off by the time the Savoys will want the entire 
ground. Before and after plantings made in dry weather, watering would be of essential service. As 
the plants of the different successions advance, keep them from weeds by occasional broad hoeing. At 
the same time, loosen tlie surface of the earth, and draw some about the stems of the plants : let 
this be done twice or oftcncr, to forward them in a free enlarging growth. They will gradually heart, 
fully cabbaging in September, October, November, December, &c. as they are the crops of the forward, or 



Book I. 



BORECOLE. 



fill 



later sowings : thev may \i2 cut for use accordingly, and during the v/inter. The Savoys left sf^-^nding 
will continue good till the middle or end of February, when, or in the course of March, they oi>en ana 
send up seed-stalks. 

3521. To save seed. See Cabbage. (3508.) 

Sl'bsect. 4. Brussels Sprouts. — Brassica oleracea, a subvariety of var. y. sabauda, L., 
and of B. o. var. 7. bullata, Dec. Chou de Bruxelles, or djet, Fr. 

3522. The Bmssels sprouts produce an elongated stem, often four feet high, from the 
alae of the leaves of which sprout out shoots which form small green heads like cabbages 
in miniature, each being from one to two inches in diameter, and the whole ranged 
spirally along the stem, the main leaves of which drop off early. The top of the plant 
resembles that of a Savoy planted late in the season ; it is small, and with a green 
heart of little value. Van Mons says {Hort. Trans, vol. iii.), " If this vegetable be 
compared with any other which occupies as little space, lasts as long, and grows as well 
in situations generally considered unfavorable, such as between rows of potatoes, scarlet 
runners, or among young ti'ees, it must be esteemed superior in utility to most others." 
Nicol considers it as deserving more general culture in Scotland ; and Morgan (Horf. 
Trans, vol. ii.) says, it is an excellent sort of winter green for the table, but not 
sufficiently hardy to last through the winter in England. 

5523. Use. The sprouts are used as winter greens ; and at Brussels they are sometimes served at table 
with a sauce composed of vinegar, butter, and nutmeg, poured upon them hot after they have been 
boiled. The top, Van Mons says, is very delicate when dressed, and quite different in flavor from the 
sprouts. 

3524. Culture. The plants are raised from seed, of which an ounce may be requisite for a seed-bed, four 
feet by ten feet. Van Mons, in the paper already referred to, says, " The seed is sown in spring under a 
frame, so as to bring the plants forward j they are then transplanted into an open border with a good 
aspect." By thus beginning early and sowing successively till late in the season, he says, " we contrive to 
supply ourselves, in Belgium, with this delicious vegetable, full ten months in the year; that is, from the 
end of July to the end of May." The plants need not be placed at more than eighteen inches each 
way, as the head does not spread wide, and the side leaves drop offi In this, as in everj' other respect, 
the culture is the same as that of the borecole, , 

3525. Gathering the crop. Morgan says, the sprouts must have some frost before gathered; but this 
Van Mons assures us is an erroneous opinion. In Belgium, the small cabbages are not esteemed if of more 
than half an inch in diameter. It is usual to cut off the top about ten or fifteen days before gathering 
from the stem. In spring, when the sprouts are disposed to run to flower, their growth is checked by 
taking up the plants, and laying them in the ground in any shaded spot. 

3526. To save seed. Van Mons says, it is usual to save the seeds indiscriminately 
from plants which have or have not been topped ; but that he intends to save from the 
tops only, hoping thereby to improve the progeny. Whatever mode be adopted, the 
grand object is to place the plants where they will be in no danger of receiving the farina 
of any other of the brassica tribe. 

SuBSECT. 5. Borecole. — Brassica oleracea, var. 5. sabellica, L. ; B. 0. var. jS. acephala, Dec. 
Chou vert, Chou cavalier, or Chou non pomme, Fr.; A^ohl, Ger. ; Kale, Sax. ; and 
Green Kale, Scotch. 

3527. The borecole contains several subvarieties, the common characteristic of all 
which is an open head, sometimes large, of curled or wrinkled leaves, and a peculiar 
hardy constitution, which enables them to resist the winter, and remain green and fresh 
during the season. Morgan ^ys, it is impossible to find a plant of more excellence for 
the table, or more easUy cultivated than the common borecole. Sinclair recommends 
the Woburn perennial kale, which has beeti grown six years at Woburn Abbey. It 
shoots up yearly from the stool, like a true perenni-al plant, scarcely ever flowers, and is 
considered as producing more than thrice the produce of any other borecole, with a veiy 
great sa\'ing of manure and labor. It is considered by Sinclair as peculiarly adapted for 
farm and cottage gardens. 

3528. Use. The crown or centre of the plant is cut off so as to include the leaves which 
do not exceed nine inches in length. It boils well, and is most tender, sweet, and deli- 
cate, pro\'ided it has been duly exposed to frost. 

3529. Subvarieties. These are — 

1. The green borecole, Scotch kale, or Siberian borecole I 9. The Jerusalem kale 

2. The purple or bro^Tn kale 10. The Buda kale, Russian kale, Prussian kale, and by some 

3. The German kale, German greens, or curlies called the Manchester kale 

4. The variegated borecole 11. The palm-borecole, or c/io»-^a/wier 

5. The thousand-hended cahbage I 12. The turnip-cabbage, or turnip-borecole, (B-o. var. ^^ando- 

6. The chau de Milan \ rapa, Dec.) chou-navd, Fr. 

7. The Egyptian kale, rabi kale, or kohl robe i 13. The Portugal or large-ribbed borecole 

8. Ragged' Jack I 11. The Woburn perenrual kale, \fith finely cut leaves. 

35-30. Estimate of sorts. The three first sorts are the most valuable, and the most generally cultivated : 
the third sort is almost universally preferred in Britain. The seventh, eighth, and ninth sorts, being 
dwarf, stemless plants, resist black frosts, and come in for a late supply ; the third, fourth, fifth, and tenth 
sorts are merely curious plants, and the others are of httle merit 

3531. Propagation of the first thirteen species. All the sorts are propagated by seed, which is sold by 
weight : and for a seed-bed four feet by ten, Abercrombie says, one ounce of seed is necessary. Sow in 
the last fortnight of March, in April, in the beginning of May, and in August. The first week in April 
for the principal crop of German kale ; and the first week hi August for the latest spring crop of Buda kale, 
ajid which will be ready to transplant in September. 

R r 2 



612 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 



35J2. Subsequent culftire. " When the plants have leaves one or two inches broad, take out some from 
the seed-bed, and j)rick into other open bods, six inches apart, giving water : in which let them have four 
or five weeks' growth. Those left in the seed-bed, as well as these, will all acquire proper strength for 
final trans})lanting in May, or thence till August. Taking the opportunity of rain, if possiiiie, plant them 
in an open compartment, in rows two feet and a half asunder, for the tirst forward plantinj;S in summer; 
the others two feet; allotting the whole similar distances in the rows. Give occasional water, if dry 
weather, till they have struck root. In their advancing growth, hoe the plants once or twice, to cut down 
rising weeds, and to draw earth about the bottom of the stems, to encourage their growth in the produc- 
tion of large full heads in proper season, September, October, &c." At the approach of winler, the stems 
should be earthed up, especially of the talkT sorts. When the distances between the plants are such as 
have been recommended, the hills round each plant will be of sucii a size and breadth as to cherish the 
roots of the dwarf varieties, and serve as a protection to the tall sorts in stormy weather. 

3333. Gathering. The heart is to be gathered of all the tall sorts, atler which, witii tiie exception of the 
German kale, and the chou de Milan, the stalks should be pulled up, and taken to the compost-heap or 
dunghill ; but the terms of the two sorts excepted are to be left for the sake of their side shoots or sprouts. 
Of the dwarf sorts, the heart may either be cut ofF, fir which the Buda kale and coleworts are well suited ; 
or the leaves gathered when the plant begins to grow, which corresponds with the habits of the Egyptian 
and Jerusalem kale. 

3534. Propagation of the Wohurn kale is effected by cuttings of six or seven inches, 
which readily take root, and may be planted at once where they are finally to remain : the 
best season is March and April. 

3535. Cidtwe of the Jrobiim kale. " About the beginning of April, or as soon as 
winter greens are out of season, the stems are cut down near to the ground, within two 
buds of the roots, the soil is then slightly forked over, and afterwards kept clear of 
weeds by the hoe. This is all that is required." [Hort. Trans, v. 299.) 

3536. Blanching the Buda or Fortugal kale. Wedgewood writes to the Horticul- 
tural Society, " I have been trying an experiment with Buda kale, which has an- 
swered completely ; this is blancfiing it as you do sea-kale, by turning a pot over it, and 
letting it remain covered till it is quite blanched. When cut and dressed in that state it 
is excellent, and one advantage will be, that the same plant will furnish two cuttings, for 
the sprouts are more delicate than even the original heart of the plant. I used no dung 
to force it ; but tliis might be applied witli great advantage ; and I think it would be an 
excellent substitute for sea-kale." {Hort. 'Trans, iv. 570.) 

3537. To save seed. Tliis can seldom be done of more than one or two sorts in the 
same garden, on account of the risk of promiscuous impregnation by bees, the wind, &c. 
As the seed, however, will keep for several years, good specimens of one or two sorts 
may be selected every year in rotation, and placed in spots distant from each other, in 
autumn, or early in spring. Trench the root and stem into the ground, at nearly double 
the distance at which they stood in the plantation. This will allow abundance of air to 
circulate rovmd the blossoms and seed-pods. They will be ripe in -August, when they 
may be gathered, and threshed out ; and the seed, after being exposed to the dry air in 
the shade for a few clays, put up in bags till wanted for use. 

SuBSECT. G. Caulifloiver. — Brassica oleracea, var. e, botrytis, L. and Dec. Chou~ 
feiir, Fr. ; Bhimenkohl, Ger. ; and Cavoiifori, Ital. 

B538. The caidiflower is one of tliemost delicate and curious of the whole of the brassica 
tribe, the flower-buds forming a close, firm cluster or head, white and delicate, and for the 
sake of which thi plant is cultivated. 

3539. Use. " Tiiese heads or flowers being boiled, wrapped generally in a clean linen 
cloth, are served up as a most delicate vegetable disli. Cauliflower is a particular fa- 
vorite in this country. ' Of all the flowers in the garden,' Dr. Johnson used to say, ' I 
like t!ie cauliflower.' Its culture, however, had been little attended to till about the close 
of the 1 7th century ; since that time it has been greatly improved, insomuch tliat cauli- 
flower may now fairly be claimed as peculiarly an English product. Till the tiine of 
the French Revolution, quantities of English cauliflower were regidarly sent to Holland ; 
and the Low Countries, and even France, depended on us for cauliflower-seed. Even now, 
English seed is preferred to any other," For the early supply of the London market, very 
great quantities of cauliflower are fostered under hand-glasses during winter and the first 
part of spring ; and to behold some acres overspread with such glasses, gives a stranger 
a forcible idea of the riches and luxury of the metropolis, (A'^e///, in Ed. EncT/c.) 

3540. The subvarieties in cultivation are — - 

Early, for the first early crops I Red cauliflower ; having the stalks of the I teemed more hardy than the others, and 

Later, or large, for principal early, and head of a rwleUsh or purple color, ei- good for an early crop, 
main crops I | 

3541. Propagation and soil. The cauliflower is raised from seed, of which half an ounce is sufficient 
for a seed-bed tour feet and a half wide, by ten in length. The soil for the seed-bed may be light; but 
for final transplanting, it can hardly be too rich, the cauliflower, like the vine, being reputed a " rough 
feeder." Cleanings of streets, stables, cess-pools, &c. ought therefore to be liberally supplied during the 
growth of the plants, when very large heads are desired. 

3542. Ti^nes of sowing. " The early and main eujierior crop, brought to fruit by the longest nursery 
attendance; the late summer succession crop, raised by the shortest course; and the Michaelmas crop, 
obtained at the least expense ; are sown respectively at three different seasons. The principal sowing is 
made about the end «f the third week in August, or a day or two before or after the 21st, to raise plants 
to stand over the winter, under frames, hand-glasses, or lialf sheltered in warm borders, for the early and 



Book 1. 



CAULIFLOWER. 



main superior crops next summer. A secondary sowing in February or M.-trcli, for sucrcs^ion and late 
inferior crops tlie same year in summer and autiimn. A final sowing neai- tiie close of I\I ;y, t(-r crdiiiary 
crops, to yield fruit the following autumn and winter." IJall finds, that if caulifiower-sced is not sown 
till the last week in August, and that if the seedlings are not transplanted till the middle or near the end 
of November before the haixl weather sets in, no sort of covering is necessary, nor any other protection than 
that afibrded by a wall having a south aspect. " In such a border, and without any covering, young 
cauliflower-plants have uniformly .'tcod v/ell for many successive winters, and have always i;rovcd better 
and sounder plants for S[)ring jilanting than such as have had additional shelter, 'iho seedlings protected 
with glass frames generally grow too gross in the stems, which become partly blackened ; and the plants 
being thus unhealthy, are not fit for planting out. I>ate raised .seedlings, which spend the winter in the 
open border, uniformly become the largest and finest table cauliflowers during the summer, though they 
certainly do not come in quite so early. Cauliflower-plants, it is ])robal)le, are often killed with too much 
attention. Seedlings raised late in autumn seem to be very tenacious of life." {Cnlcd. Hurt. Mc?ii. iii. 192.} 
" A method of producing cauliflower pretty early, and with great certainty, is this : The i)lants are set in 
.^all pots in the winter season, and kept in any convenient part of the floor ot a vinery or other glazed 
house. In the beginning of March, they are taken out of the pots with the ball of earth attached, and 
planted in tlie ojjen grouixl. If they be here protected against severe frosts with bell-glass covers, they 
come into head in the course of April, if the weather prove favorable." {Kcill, in Ed. Eiwi/c.) 

3543. Suivings to stand the minter. " Time of sov/ing and first culture. For the early and general crops next 
summer, make a considerable sowing in August, about the eighteenth, an.d thence to the twenty-fourth 
day of that month ; or two dillerent sowings between those extremes, at three or four days' interval, to 
raise young plants to stand the winter under protection ; some being planted out finally the same year in 
October or November, under hand-glasses ; and the others pricked into frames and warm borders, for 
planting out finally in the spring, into the open ground, to succeed the liand-glass fruit, or for the general 
summer crop. Sow in a bed of rich, light, mellow earth. After sowing, give occasional light waterings in 
dry weather, and shade in hot sunny days, till the plants come up. \Vhen these have leaves an inch or 
an" inch and a half broad, in September, prick them into intermediate beds, three or four inches apart; 
watering, and occasionally shading from the mid-day sini, till they have taken root; to remain in such 
beds to gain strength till October." 

3544. Hand-glass division. " Then towards the close of October, tr.ansplant a quantity finally into rich 
ground, which has been well dunged, under hand glasses, in rows three feet and a half or four feet 
asunder (with intervening alleys c\ foot wide), and three feet apart in the row. Set three or four plants 
centrally under each glass, about four inches apart, with the design of retaining only one or two of the best 
in the spring. Give a moderate watering at planting, and put on the glasses close tin the plants take 
root, discoverable in a week or ten days by their showing a renewed growth ; f lien rai: e tne glasses on the 
wannest side, one or two inches in mild days, to admit free air to the plants. Continue the glasses all 
winter; but in all teinperate weather, tilt up the south side daily, two or three ir.ches, to give the requi- 
site admission of free air, in order to strengthen and harden the plants ; and sometimes, in fine, mild, 
dry days, you may occasionally take the glasses ofF, especially if the j)lants apj)ear to draw, or get on too 
fast in growth, as they are sometimes apt to run info small button heads in their nursery state, unless for 
future culture; but put on the glasses early towards the evening; and always keep them on at night, 
and during cold rain, snow, and frosf, shutting them close down in all inclement weather ; and during ri- 
gorous frosts it would be advisable to give some protection, with long, dry, stable-litter, round the glasses, 
or to cover with mats, removing the covering when settled mild weather occurs. Thus conforming to the 
vicissitudes of the season, continue the glasses till the close of .April or beginning of May ; giving larger 
admissions of free air as the warmer season of spring advances : and sometimes in fine mild weather, 
admit a moderate warm shower of rain. Jilcanwhiie, in March, if all or most of the plants under the 
glasses have stood the winter, be careful to leave only one or two of the strongest under each glass ; 
transplanting the superabundant into the open garden, in a compartment of rich mellow earth, improved 
with rotten (iimg digged in a spade deep : setting the plants two feet and a half asunder, and giving Vv'ater. 
In thinning the plants, be careful to take out those with black shanks: but do not take the trouble to 
transplant them, for they will prove abortive. At the same time, to assist these remaining under the 
glasses, draw a little earth about the stem of each. To these continue the glasses till the period men- 
tioned above, to forward them in full growth for the most early production ; but as they expand in the 
herb, raise each glass upon three props, three or four inches high, to admit air freely, and to give a larger 
scoi)e ol' room above, for the free growth of the plants ; or, when further advanced, you may draw a small 
ledge of earth round the bottom of each glass, both to raise the props higher, for an additional upward 
space, and to contain water when occasionally given in dry weather. Towards the end of April, or the 
beginning of May, v.'hen the plants will, in a manner, have filled the glasses, remove these from, the most 
forward, but contiviue the aid of glass as loi'g as practicable, to accelerate the plants into early heading in 
May. Thus the most early crop will produce a supply of fiower-heads for gathering in succession in May 
and June." 

o545. Frame division. " The other plants of the same sowing, designed for wintering in frames, maj', in 
young growth, at the end of September, or beginning of October, be either pricked at once into the winter 
beds, or be, at that time, removed into a preparatory bed in the open garden, to have a m.onth's growth ; 
in order to be transplanted into the frame-beds at the end of October or beginning of November, in rows 
crosswise the bed, four by three incl\es apart. Give a light watering, and put on the lights of the frame 
close till the plants have taken root; then prop up the lights behind, two or three inches, or draw them 
off occasionally to the back of the frame in mild, dry days, but keep on when very cold, and in rain, snow, 
frost, and always at night; and in severe frost cover the glasses and round the frames with dry, long, 
strawy litter and mats ; but in all mild, dry weather, admit the air full)', as in managing the hand-glasses. 
Then in March or beginning of April, trans])lant the whole into the open garden, in rows two feet and a 
half asunder ; and they will come into full production in July and August." 

354(). Half-sheliered portion. " In want of frames or hand-glasses, you may, in October, either prick 
some plants into a warm south border, close under the fence, three inches apart, to be protected in rigor- 
ous frosts, with mats, dry litter, or reed pannels ; or you prick somic in a bed arched over with hoops, to 
receive a covering of mats during cold nights, or heavy rain, snow, and frosts, in the day-time in winter. 
Give the full air in all moderate weather, till March or April: then all to be transplanted finally as 
above." 

3547. Brummond, of the Cork botanic garden, protects cauliflower-plants during winter by planting 
them in excavations made in the commoirsoil of the garden, and covered with frames thatched with long 
straight wheat-straw. He uncovers constantly in mild weather, whether nights or days. {Jiort. Trans, 
V. 365.) 

3548. Secondary sowing, or first spring-raised crop. " For late succession summer cauliflowers, to succeed 
the autumn-raised, early, and main summer crops; or, if none were raised to stand the winter ; sow in 
the spring, February, or beginning of March, in a moderate hot-bed, or, where that cannot be had, in a 
warm border under a frame or hand-glass ; and when the young plants have leaves an inch broad, prick 
them into other beds of the sam.e description, three inches "apart, to gain strength by three or four weeks' 
growth, in order to be planted out in the open garden, at the end of April or the beginning of May ; where 
they will produce tolerable heads in July or August. Sow also in the open garden during the last fortnight 
in Sl.'.rcli, and the first in April for a late succession, with small fiowcr-heads in August and throughout 
autumn. Plants of the last crop, rcm.ovcd as late as May, for fruiting- the same year, should be planted ia 
a shady Ixjrder." 



614 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Vakt II L 



S549. Second spring-raised crop. " The next and last sowing is for the late autumn and winter crop, 
commonly called the Michaelmas crop : to be made towards the twenty-fourth of May, in a bed of light 
earth. Prick out the j'oung plants in June, to remain in the intermediate bed till about the middle of 
July ; then to be transplanted two feet and a half asunder. Give occasional watering till they have taken 
good root. They will begin to produce heads in October, but the fruit will be of superior size in Novem- 
ber and December, if temperate weather follow." 

3550. Final culture of the thi-ee crops. "With respect to the culture of the different crops after being 
finally transplanted, it is to hoc the ground occasionally, in order to cut down weeds, and as well to loosen 
the earth, and draw some round the stems of the plants. When the early crops are nearly advanced to 
full growth, in May and June, one or two good waterings to the roots will contribute to their producing 
largo heads. In the dry weather of meridian summer, water those not in flower twice a-week ; and those 
in flower, every second day. As the flower-heads show themselves, turn down some of the larger leaves, 
to defend them from sun and rain, and to preserve them white and close, in perfection." {Abercro?nbie.) 

3551. Crop for winter use. Cockburn sows the seeds of early cauliflower in a south border in tlie be- 
ginning of July, thins to 12 or l-l- inches apart, and in November finds heads produced from ten to thirty 
inches in circimiference. He then removes them with balls, and plants them so as their heads do not 
touch in earth, in a shed which will keep out ten degrees of beat. All decayed leaves are taken off, and 
when severe frost occurs, the plants are covered with dry short hay. " By this management," he says, 
" I have been able to send three dishes of the cauliflowers to table every week during the autumn and 
winter, and shall be able to continue to do so till February." {Hort. Trans, v. 281.) 

3552. Preserving during ivinter. For this purpose it is usual to pull up the plant entire, and hang it up in 
a shed or cellar, or to lay the plants in sand in cellars or sheds, covering the flower with the leaves, and 
being careful to remove every decayed part as it appears. When a shed or cellar is not at hand for this 
purpose, a mode may be resorted to which has been adopted by Smith, and described by him in the Calcd. 
Hort. Mem., vol. i. p. 129., and which consists in burying the entire plant in a pit about eighteen inches 
deep, dug along the bottom of a wall. On a dry day he takes up the plant, and wrapping the leaves round 
the head of the flower, deposits them in the trench, the heads sloping downwards, and the roots extending 
upwards, so that the roots of the one layer cover the tops of another. Next, he covers up the whole closely 
with earth, sloping it from the wall, and beating it smooth with the back of the spade, so that rain may- 
run off. In this way he preserves it in a good state from November to January. The best mode, however, 
of prolonging the cauliflower season, is by raising the plants with balls, and trench-planting them in 
frames, or the borders of peach or grape houses not in action, taking care to keep the soil dry, and to re- 
move decaying leaves ; or, where frames are in sufficient quantity, to place a few over the plants as they 
stand in the compartment. 

3553. To save seed. " Mark arid leave some of the prime plants of the thoroughly 
nursed early and main crops in May and June, when the flower-heads are in highest 
perfection ; as those of late production will not ripen seed effectually. Tlie stools will 
afford ripe seed in September ; when be careful to watch the chaffinches, green-birds, &c. 
and to gather the branches as the seed upon them ripens. Lay them elevated from the 
ground, in some sunny, airy situation, to dry and harden to full maturity : after which 
let the seed be beaten and rubbed out, cleaned and sifted from the husky parts, spread on 
a cloth to di-y tlie whole equally; and then put up for sowing the following year." 
{Abercromhie. ) 

3554. Insects. Cauliflower-plants, when first planted out, are frequently infested 
with flies, or their larvffi, to attract which, it is not uncommon to sow a little radish-seed 
on the cauliflower ground a fortnight before transplanting ; the flies prefen-ing the tender- 
leaves of the radish to those of the cauliflower, the latter are thus suffered to escape. 

SuBSECT. 7. Broccoli. — Bra^sica oleracea, a sub variety of var. e. hotrytis, L. and Dec. 
Broccoli, Fr. ; Italieniscke Kohl, Ger. ; and Broccoli, Ital. 

3555. The few broccolis that were known in Miller's time are supposod to have pro- 
ceeded from the cauliflower, which was originally imported from the Isle of Cyprus^ 
about the middle of the 16th century. Miller mentions the white and purple broccoli as 
coming from Italy ; and it is conjectured, that from these two sorts all the subsequent 
kinds have arisen, either by accidental or premeditated impregnations. 

3556. Use. The same as the cauliflower. 

3557. Subvarieties. Neill observes, that "no culinary plant is so liable to sport as broccoli ; so that new 
kinds, slightly different, are continually coming into notice or favor, and as speedily sinking into neglect." 
Tlie common characteristic of broccoli, as distinguished from cauliflower, is color \n the flower and leaves, 
and a comparatively hardy constitution to stand the winter. Maher observes {Hort. Trans, vol. i. 
p. 116.), that as all plants of the brassica tribe become less alkalescent, and more palatable in proportion 
as they approach to a pale or white color, such x'arieties of broccoli will undoubtedly be preferable to pur- 
ple ones, if they turn out equally hardy. H. Ronalds, of Brentford, has given {Hort. Trans, vol. iii.) a 
DescHption of the different sorts of Broccoli, with an Account of the Method of cultivating them, from which 
we shall chiefly compose this article. The sorts which follow are placed in the order in which they come 
in perfection to table. 

3558. Purple cape, or autwnnal broccoli^ This has a close, compact head, of a beautiful purple color ; 
the leaves are nearly entire, erect, concave, lobed at bottom, and much waved, short, and regularly sur. 
rounding the head ; the veins and mid-rib are stained with purple, which stain is a test of its being true ; 
the head is exposed to the view in growing ; in general it is not very large ; as it enlarges, the projecting 
parts of the flower show a greenish-white, mixed with the purple color. WTien boiled, the whole flower 
becomes green. If the season is showery, and this variety is planted in good ground, it comes as large as 
cauliflower. 

3559. Culture of the purple broccoli. Sown about the middle of May, and beginning and end of June, it 
w^ill produce in regular succession from August to December, or until frost destroy the heads. Sown in 
July and August, if the winter is mild, it will bring good heads in spring. W^hen sown in the beginning 
of September, and the plants preserved in frames as cauliflowers, fine heads may be expected in the 
months of June and July. Thus, by good management, this kind may be in use during the greater part 
of the year ; but it is not hardy enough to be depended on for the winter months. The plants grow from 
cane foot to one foot and a half high, and should be placed about two feet apart in every direction. 

3560. Maher's 9node of treating the pitrple broccoli is as follows T " Three crops are sewn annuallv : the 
first between the 12th and 18th of April ; a second between the 18th and 24th of Mav ; the third between 
the 19th and 25th of August : these successive crops supply the family from September till the end of May. 
The seeds are scattered exceedingly thii], in a border of very rich light earth. Not a weed is suflTered to- 



Book I. 



BROCCOLI. 



615 



appear, and when the young plants have from eight to ten leaves, whidi is in about a month, they arc finally 
plaiitetl out, at the distance of two feet every wav, in a piece of sandy loam, wliich has been well jircparcd 
for the purpose by digging, and enriching it w ith a large proportion of very rotten dung, fretjuciUiy 
turned over to pick out every sort of grub, or insect deposited in it. The ground is kept constaiitly clean- 
by hoeing whenever a seed-leaf of any weed springs up, and the loose surface is drawn together into'a heap 
round the stem of each plant. The second crop is'treated exactly as the first, but the weaker plants left in 
the seed-bed are permitted to remain eight or ten dayslongerto gain morestrength. They are then trans- 
planted into pots of the size called sixteciis, filled with ver\- rich compost, placing them close to cacli other 
in the shade, and duly watering the plants^ till they begin"to grow freely. After this, the pots are plunged 
in the open grouixi at two feet distance from each other every way, and about three inches under the 
general level, leaving a hollow or basin round each plant, to retain any water given to them when neces- 
sar)-. By tlie time the pots are filled with roots, and that autumnal rains render watering imnccessary, 
tbe basins are rilled up by drawing the earth round each plant, at the same time pressing it firmly down, 
to prevent tlie wind from shaking them. A few of these plants in pots sometimes show flowers too soon ; 
and to guard them from early frost, a leaf or two is broken down over them. On the ajiproach of settletl 
- frost in December and January, all the pots are taken up and removed to a frame, pit, or shed, where 
they can be sheltered from the extreme severity of the winter, but have air when it is milder, and by this 
method a supply is preserved for the table in the liardcst winters. To make broccoli succeed in pots, I 
fiiKl, by experience, that it should be potted immediately from the seed-bed. If it is transplanted oftencr, 
the head or flower is both less in size, and runs much sooner after it forms. For the same reason, I never 
prick out or transplant the general crops ; and as the temperature of our climate does not sufJbr vegeta- 
tion to go on briskly from October to 3Iarch, by following this method, the lieads of flower will remain a 
long time in a state of rest after they are formed, without bursting, and heads from six to seven inches 
diameter are the ordinary produce of our plants. The seeds of the third crop are sown In a frame, or 
under hand-glasses, and about the third week in October, the plants become strong enough to remove, as 
in the two former crops. 

3561. Green cape, or autumnal broccoli. This sort differs but little from the preceding, except in -colot 
and in the heads, as well as the plant, proving in general larger. The leaves are long and narrow, much 
like those of a cauliflower; they are very little waved, and, consequently, have a general api)earance of 
saioothness ; the veins and mid-rib are green. The head, which has some resemblance to a cauliflower, 
is of _a greenish-white color, and is usually somewhat covered by the leaves. These two sorts are very- 
sportive, running much into each other, and have a strong tendency to degenerate, yet are quite distinct, 
and when sc, verj- beautiful The greatest care should be taken in saving the seeds from the plants which 
are perfectly true'. This remark applies generally to all the sorts. 

5562. Grange's early cauUjionsr 'hroccoH. If thi's sort is sown at three different times, from the beginning 
of 3Iay until the end of June, it Avill Lear its heads in succession from Michaelmas to Christmas, if the 
weather is not severe. The leaves covering the hea-d, defend it from slight attacks of frost, they have 
long naked foot-stalks, are wider and shorter than those of the green cape, are iobed at bottom, but not 
much waved; the veins and mid-rib are whitish green; the head is large and quite white. It should be 
planted at about two feet apart. 

Soui Green close-headed Kinter b)occoH. This is a new and good sort, appareiitly a seedling from the 
green cape, which it closely succeeds in coming into use. The plants are dwarf; leaves spreading, and 
moderately indented, they are numerous, much waved and large; the veins are white; the flower 
grows exposed, nearly resembling that of the green cape in appearance, and does not attain a great size. 

oooi. Culture. The peculiarity of this variety is, that it continues to bear during the whole of the 
winter, if the weather is mild. A single plantation, from seeds sown in May, Ronalds found to yield 
heads fit for use, through the months of November, December, January, and February. Plant from one 
foot and a half to two feet distance. 

o5o5. Early purple broccoli. This is a very excellent kind, of a deep purple color ; if the true sort, it is 
close-headed at first; afterwards it branches^ but it is apt to come green, and too much branched, especi- 
ally in rich ground. The plants are from two to three feet high, growing strong and tall ; the leaves are 
much indented, of a purplish -green color, they spread out wide, but not long, though the stalks are so; 
the head is quite open from the leaves ; small leaves are sometimes intermixed with the head : the plants 
produce sprouts of flowers from the al£E of the leaves. 

Som. Culture, ^^'hen sown in April, it begins to produce in November, and continues bearing the 
heads and sprouts throughout the winter, in mild seasons ; if sown in June, it produces abundance of 
sproiits in 3Iarch and -■\pril. It should be planted three feet apart in rich ground. 

Sjo,. Early Khite broccoli. The heads of this sort are of a close texture, and of a pure white color. 
It grows to about three feet in height; with erect, concave, light-green, and nearly entire leaves. 

SonS. Culture. To obtain heads'fine and early, the seed should be sown in February, or beginning of 
March, on a slight hot-bed. The plants, v\-hen about three or four inches high, must be transplanted 
into beds of light rich earth, three or four inches apart, and defended from the frost and cold nights 
by a mat covering ; they will be strong enough to plant out at two or three feet distance by the end of 
April : under this treatment, they will produce beautiful heads in November, and continue to do so until 
Christmas, if the weather is tolerably mrld. This sort, as well as several others, is sometimes cut in con- 
siderable quantities by the market-ga'rdeners, previous to an expected frost, and kept in sheds or cellars for 
the supply of the market. 

5569. Diuarf brown close-headed broccoli. From its resemblance, I take this to have sprung from the 
sulphur-colored broccoli, from which, however, it differs, by coming in earlier, as well as in the shajie and 
color of its head ; the leaves are also shorter and broader than those of the sulphur-colored ; they are 
small, not much waved, dark-green, with white veins ; they grow upright, and do not cover the head at all. 
Most of the crowns are green on their first appearance, but soon change to large, handsome, brown heads. 

SoiU. Culture. If sown about the middle of April/ it is in use through March and April. Two feet 
distance is sufficient for the plants, when put out. 

3571. Tall large-headed purple broccoli. This sort produces large, tall, purple heads, at two and three 
feet in height. 

Mti. Culture. If sown towards the end of iNIarch, it will prove a useful kind in March and April. The 
plants should be three feet asunder, m good ground. 

3573. Creajn-colored, or Portsmouth broccoli. This is a very noble sort, exceeding all the others in size. It 
is of a buff or cream color, and has a very compact firm head ; its leaves are large and broad, with white 
veins ; they spread out widely, but the small centre leaves cover the flower. A head, sent by Oldacre 

> from the garden of Sir Joseph Banks, to the Horticultural Society, on the 5th of May, 1S19, measured 
more than two feet in circumference, although it was quite close. 

3574. Culture. Seeds sown in the middle of April will be in perfection during the following February, 
March, and April. It bears near the ground. The plants should be planted three feet asunder. 

3575. Sulphur-colored broccoli. A hardy and valuable sort ; if sown in ApvW, it produces in the following 
April, and beginning of 3Iay, fine, compact, conical, sulphur-colored h.eads, some of tliem slightly dotted 
with purple. The leaves have long foot-stalks, are 7nuch inden.ted, and of a bluish-grey color. 

3576. Culture. Two feet distance will be sufficient for the plants to grow well. 

3577. Sprins; white, or cauliflower broccoli. This sort grows very robust, witli large leaves, flat and 
narrow, with thick veins ; the leaves encompass and compress the head, so as to render it generally in- 
visible when fit to cut, which is a great preservative from the frosty memings conunon in the spring 
months. 

R r 'I 



616 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part II L 



3.578. Culture. Sow in March, and pbnt out at three feet distance. When in good ground, it will pro- 
duce very fine heads, perfectly white, throughout the months of April and May of the following year. 

3579. Late dwarf close-headed purple broccoli. This is the latest purple broccoli, being in perfection 
throughout April and the greatest part of May. The plants seldom rise above a foot in height ; the 
flower at first shows small and green, but soon enlarges, and changes to a close, conical, purple head ; the 
leaves are short and small, dark-green, with white veins, much sinuated, deeply indented, and forming a 
regular radius round the flower, giving the whole plant a singular and beautiful appearance. 

3580. Culture. The seed should be sown in April, and the plants must stand from one foot and a half 
to two feet apart. 

3581. Latest green, or Iberian, or Danish broccoli. This is the latest and hardiest of all the broccolis, for 
the severest winters will not destroy it. The leaves are much undulated and indented, narrow and long, 
with a tinge of purple color in the stems. 

3582. Culture. If sown towards the end of April, it will produce large, compact, green heads during the 
whole succeeding May. Two feet distance is sufficient for the plants. 

3583. General obsei vaiions on the culture of broccoli. All the sorts are raised from seed ; 
and for a bed four feet in width by ten feet, Abercrombie says, one ounce of seed 
is sufficient. 

3584. Seed-bed. Ronalds, in the paper above quoted, directs the seed-beds to be pre- 
pared of rich mould, well dug, and if dry, watered the evening before sowing. The 
seeds must be thinly sown, and the beds should be covered with mats or litter till the 
plants appear, the covering may then be removed, and the plants watered occasionally as 
the state of the we-ather req\iires ; should that continue very dry, the best method is to 
transplant, when the plants are about two or three inches high, into other beds about four 
inches asunder. Being several times refreshed by sprinklings of water, they will, in a 
fortnight or three weeks, be sufficiently strong for a second remove. This mode offers 
some advantage in giving time to clear off any crops of peas, &c. thereby obtaining 
ground which could not otherwise be conveniently had at the first season of planting out. 
The four first sorts on the list, which I consider as congeners, should be only once trans- 
planted, as the check their removal occasions is apt to produce the heads prematurely, 
which, in that case, will be small, and indifferent in quality. If the season is showery, 
it will be needful to cover the beds as soon as sown with netting, to keep off the birds, 
also to sprinkle the plants when they appear with lime-water, or to strew on them fresh - 
slacked lime, to destroy the slugs. In this case, when the plants are six or eight 
inches high, they may be planted at once at the distances recommended for each sort. 

3585. Insects and diseases. In old gardens, infested, as is often the case, with an in- 
sect which in summer insinuates itself into the roots of all the brassica tribe, and causes 
a disease usually called the club, trenching the ground deep enough to bring up four 
or six inches of fresh undisturbed loam or earth, will probably bury the insects too 
deep for mischief, and provide fresh ground for the benefit of the plants. In gardens 
much exhausted by reiterated cropping, if this mode cannot be adopted, a good quantity 
of fresh loam from a common or field, dug in, would materially improve the broccoli, 
and be of lasting use to future crops. Broccoli, in general, succeeds best in a fresh loamy 
soil, where it comes, I think, more true in kind, and is hardier, without dung ; but if this 
situation cannot be had, deep digging, with plenty of manure, is the only remaining al- 
ternative to procure good crops. I believe soap-ashes, dug into the ground in consider- 
able quantities, to be a good preservative from the club ; and if the roots of the plants, 
just previously to planting, are dipped and stirred well about in mud of soap-ashes with 
water, its adherence will, in a great measure, preserve them from attack ; perhaps a mix- 
ture of stronger ingredients, such as soot, sulphur-vivum, tobacco, &c. would be still bet- 
ter. {Hort. Trans, vol. iii.) 

3586. Wood, a writer in the Caledonian Horticultural Memoirs, says he has paid a 
considerable degree of attention to the culture of broccoli, and has made considerable 
progress therein. He finds that manuring with a compound of sea-weed and horse-dung 
produced the largest and finest heads he had seen during a practice of fifty-four years. 

3587. Cidture ivithoiit transplanting, M'Leod grows cape broccoli in a very superior manner without 
transi)lanting. In the end of May, after having prepared the ground, he treads it firm, and by the assist- 
ance of a line, sows his seeds in rows two feet apart, dropping three or four seeds into holes two feet dis- 
tance from each other in the row. When the seeds vegetate, he destroys all except the strongest, which 
are protected from the fly, by sprinkling a little soot over the ground ; as the plants advance they are 
frequently flat-hoed until they bear their flowers ; they are once earthed up, during their growth. A 
specimen of the broccoli thus grown was exhibited to the Horticultural Society ; the head was compact and 
handsome, measuring two feet nine inches in circumference, and weighing, when divested of its leaves 
and stalk, three pounds ; the largest of its leaves was upwards of two feet long. M'Leod adopts the same 
mode in the cultivation of spring-sown cauliflowers, lettuces, and almost all other vegetables, avoiding 
transplanting as much as possible. {Hort, Trans. voL iv. 559.) 

3588. Preserving broccoli during winter. Ronalds observes, that, though broccolis come larger and finer 
on the spot where they are planted, yet it is prudent to take up a part of the later " sorts in the beginning 
of November, disturbing the roots as little as possible, and lay them in slopingly, with their heads towards 
the north, only a few inches above the ground, and about eighteen inches asunder. By this means, the 
crown of the plant lying low, is soon covered and protected by the snow, which generally falls previously 
to long and severe frosts ; the plant is also rendered tougher in fibre, and hardier^by the check received 
in this last removal." 

3589. Knight, having practised laying in his broccoli-plants in November in the usual way, found but 
small heads produced from them in the succeeding spring ; till he tried trenching or laying them in in the 
month of September, and " so low as that the centre of the stem at the top of each plant was level with 
the surface of thje ground.^ The plants are^watered, roots arc properly emitted, and the earth drawrk 



Book I. 



INSECTS. 



617 



round each plant before snow is apprehended. The consequence of this treatment is, that the plants are 
fresh and vigorous in spring, and produce large heads. {Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 305.) 

3590. Nicol takes up the most forward crops of broccoli in the end of October, and lays them on their sides, 
so as the heads may not touch each other. In a dry soil and open situation, the plants will thus resist the 
severest winters. 

3591. Gathering. In gathering broccoli, five or six inches of the stem are retained along with the head ; 
and in dressing, the stalks are peeled before boiling. Some of the sorts produce sprouts from the sides of 
the stems, with small heads, that should be gathered when ready, and are very good when boiled. 

3592. To save seed. Wood, already mentioned, selects the largest, best formed, 
and finest heads, taking particular care that no foliage apjjears on the surface of the 
heads ; these he marks, and in April lays them in by the heels in a compound of cleanings 
of old ditches, tree-leaves, and dung. When the head begins to open or expand, he cuts 
out the centre, leaving only four or five of the outside shoots to come to seed. Lifting, 
he says, prevents them from producing proud seed, as it is called, or degenerating. 
The above method produces seed the most genuine of all the others he has tried. The 
sulphur broccoli he finds the most difficult to procure seed from. {Caled. Hort. Mem. 
vol. ii. p. 267. ) Abercrombie says, broccoli-seeds degenerate in this country, and that 
tlie best seed is obtained from Italy. 

SuBSECT. 8. Of the Insects which infest the Cabbage Tribe. 

3593. The whole of the cabbage tribe are liable to the attacks of the larvae of tlie Ti- 
jnda oleracea, L. on their roots, and of the caterpillars of butterflies {Jig. 464.) and 
moths [fg. 4.65.) on their leaves, as 

ivcll as of aphides, or cabbage-lice, _ / 464 

snails, and slugs. There is no re- 
medy for the first, excepting that of 
taking up, cleaning, and transplant- 
ing in fresh soil, in a different part 
of the garden ; and it is in general 
easier to plant afresh from the seed- 
bed. With respect to caterpillars, 
snails, and slugs, they can only be 
gathered by hand, and the way to 
do this effectually is to begin as soon 
as they appear, employing women 
or children to look them over daily 
early in the morning. Poultry, and 

especially ducks and sea-gulls, are sometimes of use in keeping these and other insects 
under; a hen and chickens will devour caterpillars and aphides greedily, but are apt to 
scratch the soil afterwards, if not timely removed ; turkey fowls are better. Nature has 





furnished a remarkable insect, which assists man in the destruction of the caterpillar, the 
Ichneumon nuinifestator, L. {jig. 466.) " 'ITie insects of this genus," Samouelle observes, 

lay their eggs in the bodies 
of caterpillars or pupae, which 
are there hatched ; the larvae, 
have no feet ; they are soft 
and cylindrical, and feed on 
the substance of the caterpil- 
lar, which never turns to a 
perfect insect, while the larvae 
of the ichneumon spin them- 
selves a silky web, and change 
into a jwpa incompleta, and 
in a few days the fly ap- 
pears." {Entomologist's Com- 
j)anioii) 6^3.) Ante,266l. 




618 



PRACTICE OF GARDEJ^ING. 



Pakt III. 



3594. Preventive device. " If in a patch of ground where cabbages are to be planted 
some hemp-seed be sown all round the edge, in the spring, the strong smell which that 
plant gives in vapor, will prevent the butterfly from infesting the cabbages. The 
Russian peasantry, in those provinces where hemp is cultivated, have their cabbages 
within those fields, by which they are free from caterpillars." (/. Busch, in Hort. Trans^ 
vol. iv. 569.) 

3595. The principal disease to ivhich the cabbage is liable, is the clu!) in the root. The 
cause is doubtful, but most probably it proceeds from the puncture of an insect in 
depositing Its eggs. The part swells and becomes a tubercle as large as a gooseberry, 
and sometimes the size of a hen's egg. When it has attacked plants before transplant- 
ation, the root on which it appears should be cut off before planting ; in the case of 
transplanted crops there is no remedy but taking up, cutting oft', and re-transplanting. 
Some in planting apply ashes, lime, &c. at the roots, but nothing of this sort has been 
found of much advantage. In general, frequent transplanting (as pricking out twice or 
oftener before making the final plantation) is a palliative, as it promotes fibrous roots, 
and the club attacks chiefly those which are ramose. 

Sect. II. Leguminous Plants. 

3596. llie legiuninous esculents are of great antiquity as culinary vegetables ; the 
British islands are supposed to be less favorable to them, than to most others, all the 
diadelphous plants of Linnneus, or leguminosae of Jussieu, tln-iving best in a dry atmo- 
sphere, and comparatively arenaceous soil. These, it must be allowed, are more com- 
mon in other countries than in ours. The space occupied by this tribe in the kitchen- 
garden, during the spring and summer months, is very considerable ; probably amount- 
ing to an eighth part of the open compartments, and warm borders ; but towards autumn, 
as the crops ripen, it is given up to be succeeded by other crops, chiefly of the cabbage and 
turnip tribes. These, independently of other circumstances, liaving fibrous or surface- 
roots, succeed well to the tap-roots of the bean and pea. In cottage gardens, the bean 
is very profitably grown among cabbages and potatoes ; and the pea and kidneybean 
may occvipy a space to be filled up in October with winter greens. We shall take them 
in the order of the pea, bean, and kidneybean. 

SuBSECT. 1. Pea. — Pisum sativum^ L. [Lam. III. i. 163.) Diad. Decan. L. and 
Leguminosa;, J. Pois, Fr. ; Erbse, Ger. ; and Pisello, Ital. 

3597. The pea is a hardy annual, a native of the south of Europe, and cultivated in 
this country from time immemorial. It was not very common, however, in Elizabeth's 
time, when, as Fuller informs us, peas were brought from Holland, and were " fit 
dainties for ladies, they came so far, and cost so dear." It is a climbing plant, with the 
legumes, or pods, commonly produced in pairs, the seeds contained in which are the part 
of the plant used. 

' 3598. The tise of the pea is familiar in cookery. In one variety, called the sugar-pea 
(pois des couches, Fr. ?), the inner tough film of the pods is wanting ; and such pods, when 
young, are frequently boiled with the seeds or peas within them, and eaten in the manner 
of kidneybeans. This variety is comparatively new, having been introduced about the 
middle of the 17th century. 

3599. The varieties of the pea are numerous : the principal are — 



Early Charlton ; an excellent early sort 

nearly equeJ to the genuine frame 
Early golden Charlton 
Early Nichol's golden Charlton 
Common Charlton 
Early single-blossomed 
Reading Hotspur ; long pods 
Dwarf marrowfat ; large, long pods 
Tall marrowfat ; most large, long pods 
Green marrowfat, Patagonian 
Knight's ivrinkled, or marrow ; a white- 



blossomed, tall, luxuriarit grower ; the 
fruit of excellent flavor, cream -colored, 
and shrivelled when riue and dried 

Spanish moratto ; largish 

Prussian blue ; great bearer 

Egg ; largish 

White rouncival ; large, fine pods 

Green rouncival ; ditto 

Grey rouncival ; ditto 

Tall sugar ; large, crooked pods 



Dwarf sugar 

Crown, or rose ; of tall, strong growth ; 

producing its blossom and fruit in a 

bunchy tuft at top 
Leadinan's dwarf ; a great bearer, but of 

small pods ; good for a latter crop, or 

as required for succession 
Spanish dwarf ; of low growth, small pod 
Early dwarf frame ; for forcing 
Nanterre, or earliest French pea. 



3600. Estimate of sorts. " The varieties, besides differing in the color of the blossoms, height of the 
stalks, and modes of growth, are found to have some material differences in liardiness to stand the winter, 
time of coming in, and flavor of the fruit. The Charltons are not only very early, but great bearers, and 
excellent peas for the table ; and are therefore equally well fitted for the early crop, and forward succes- 
sion crops, and inferior to few even for the main summer crops. The frame-pea may, indeed, be raised 
without the assistance of heat for a forward crop ; and, if a genuine sort, will fruit a few days sooner than 
the Charlton : but it grows low, and bears scantily. The Hotspur is hardy and prolific, and makes returns 
nearly as quick as the Charlton, and about a fortnight before the marrowfat. The sorts already specified, 
therefore, embrace the best for sowings made from the end of October till the middle of January, and for 
late crops raised between the middle of June and the beginning of August. The fine flavor of the marrow- 
fat is well known. A few dwarf marrowfats may be sown in December and January, as mild weather 
may occur : but the time for sowing full crops of the larger kinds of peas, is frorn the beginning of 
February till the end of April. Knight's pea, one of the newest varieties, is very prolific, and retains its 
fine sweet flavor when full grown. The egg, the moratto, the Prussian blue, and the rouncivals, the large 
sugar, and the crown, are all very fine eating peas in young growth ; and, like the marrowfat, mav be 
sown freely, according to the demand, from the third week of February, till the close of April, and, in 
smaller crops, until the middle of June. For late crops, in addition to the early sorts already mentioned, 
the dwarf sugar, Leadman's dwarf, and Spanish dwarf, are very suitable. The Leadman's dwarf is a 
small delicious pea, a great bearer, and in high request at genteel tables : but as the fruit is long in coming 



Book I. 



PEA. 



619 



in, it is not advisable to sow it after the third week in June ; rather sow it in Marcli, April, and May, 
and then it will be later than the Charltons raised live weeks afterwards. The Charltons and Hotspur, 
may be sown in May, for late full crops ; in June for a smaller supply : and in July, along with tlie frames 
for the last returns." 

3601. Ti))ics of sowing. " Much that relates to this has been incidentally mentioned in the Estimate 
of sorts. To try for a crop as early as possible, sow, of the sort preferred as hardy and forward, a small 
portion on a sheltered south border, or other favorable situation, at the close of October, or rather in the 
course of November. Follow witli another sowing in December, that, if tlie former should be casually 
cut off in winter, this coming up later, may have a better chance to stand ; and if both survive the frost, 
they will succeed each other in fruit in 'May and June. For more considerable, and less imcertain 
returns, either in succession to the above, or as first early and intermediate crops, sow larger portions in 
December or January, if open temperate weather. To provide for main crops, make successive sowings 
of the suitable sorts from February till the end of May. It frequently proves, that the fruit from a sowhig 
at the beginning of February, is not a week later than that from a crop raised in November ; nay, the 
February-sown plants sometimes surpass all that have stood the winter, in forward returns as well as 
quantity. From the middle of February make successive sowings every three weeks in the course of 
March, April, and May; or twice a-month in summer, when a continued succession is to be provided till 
the latest period. At the close of the sowing season, July and the first week of August, sow a reduced 
quantity each time ; because the returns will depend on a fine mild autumn following, and whatever 
fruit is obtained will be small and scanty." 

3602. Quantity of seed. Of the small early kinds, one pint will sow a row of twenty yards; for the 
larger sorts for main crops, the same measure will sow a row of thirty-three yards. 

3603. Process in sowing. " For early sorts, make the drills one inch and a half deep ; and let parallel 
drills be two feet and a half, three, or four feet asunder. Peas that are to grow without sticks require the 
least room. For summer crops and large sorts, make the drills two inches deep, and four, five, or six feet 
asunder. As to the distances along the drill, distribute the peas according to their size and the sea- 
son : the fi-ame, three in the space of an inch ; the Charltons, Hotspur, and dwarf marrowfat, two in an 
inch ; the Prussian blue and middle-sized sorts, three in two inches ; the large marrow-fiit and Knight's, 
a full inch apart ; the moratto, rouncivals, and most larger sorts, an inch and a half apart ; and the Pata- 
gonian, two inches." 

3604. Soil and situation. " The soil should be moderately rich, and the deeper and stronger for the 
lofty growers. Peas are not assisted, but hurt, by unreduced dung recently turned in. A fresh sandy 
loam, or road-stufF, and a little decomposed vegetable matter, is the best manure. The soil for the early 
crops should be very dry, and rendered so where the ground is moist, by mixing sand with the earth of 
the drills. For early crops, put in from October till the end of January, let the situation be sheltered, 
and the aspect sunny. Before the end of December, every one or two rows should stand close under a 
south or south-eastern fence. In January, several parallel rows may be extended under a good aspect 
farther from the fence. After January, till the end of May, sow in an open situation. For the late 
crops, return again to a sheltered sunny border." 

3605. Subsequent culture. " As the plants rise from half an inch high to two or three inches, begin to 
draw earth to the stems, doing this when the ground is in a dry state ; and earthing gradually higher as 
the stems ascend. At the same time, with the hoe loosen the ground between the young plants, and cut 
down rising weeds. Early crops should be protected during hard frosts by dry straw or other light litter, 
laid upon sticks or brushwood ; but remove the covering as soon as the weather turns mild. If in April, 
May, and the course of summer, continued dry weather occurs, watering will be necessary, especially to 
plants in blossom and swelling the fruit; and this trouble will be repaid in the produce. Rows partly cut 
off may be made up by transplanting. This is best done in March. In dry weather, water, and in hot 
days, shade, until the p'lants strike. All peas fruit better for sticking, and continue longer productive, 
especially the larger sorts. Stick the plants when from six to twelve inches high, as soon as they begin 
to vine. Provide branchy sticks of such a height as the sort will require : for the frame and Leadman's 
dwarf, three feet high ; for tlie Charlton and middle-sized, four or five feet ; for the marrowfat and 
larger kinds, six or eight feet ; for the rouncival, and for Knight's mr.rrow-pea, nine or ten feet. Plaro 
a row of sticks to each line of peas, on the most sunny side, east or south, that the attraction of the sun 
may incline the plants towards the sticks. Place about half the number on the opposite side, and let botn 
rows stand rather wider at top than at the ground. Some gardeners stop the leading shoot of tlie most 
early crop when in blossom ; a device which accelerates the setting and maturity of the fruit." 

3606. To fonvard an early crop. Sow or plant in lines from east to west, and stick a row of spruce-fir 
branches along the north side of every row, and sloping so as to bend over the plants, at one foot or eigh- 
teen inches from the ground. As the plants advance in height, vary the position of the branches, so as 
they may always protect them from perpendicular cold or rain, and yet leave them open to the full in- 
fluence of the winter and spring sun. Some cover during nights and in severe weather, with two boards 
nailed together lengthwise, at right angles, which forms a very secure and easily managed covering, 
but excludes light. A better plan would be to glaze one of the sides, to be kept to the south, and to 
manage such row-glasses (Jig. 467.), as they might be called, when over peas, beans, spinage, &c., as hand- 
glasses are managed when over cauliflower ; that is, to take tliem off in fine weather, or raise them con- 
stantly or occasionally by brick-bats, or other props, as the weather and the state of the crop might require. 




3607. Knight sowed peas in the open air, and peas in pots on the first day of March. In the last week 
of the month those in pots were transplanted in rows in the open ground ; on the 29tb of April the trans- 
planted plants were fifteen, and the others four inches high, and in June, the former ripened twelve days 
before the latter. [Ilort. Trans, v. 341. ~l Had a single, or even two peas only been planted in each pot, 
and the plants turned out with their balls entire, the crop, no doubt, would have ripened still earlier. 

3608. Managey/ient of a late crop. The best varietj' for this purpose is Knight's marrow-pea, which 
may be sown at intervals often days from the beginning to the end of June. " The ground is dug over 
in the usual wav, and the spaces to be occupied by the future rows of peas are well soaked with water. 
The mould upon each side is then collected, so as to form ridges seven or eight inches above the previous 
level of the ground, and these ridges are well watered. The seeds are now sown in single rows along the 
tops of the ridges. The plants grow vigorously, owing to the depth of soil and abundant moisture. If 
dry weather at any time set in, water is supplied profusely once a-week. In this way the plants continue 
green and vigorous, resisting mildew, and yielding fruit till subdued by frost." {Hort. Trarts. ii.) 

3609. Taking the crop. " The early crops are generally gathered in very young growth, often too 
young, when the pods are thin and the pease small, for the sake of presenting some at table as soon as 
pofisiUe. In the laain crops these is no cause for jirecipitatiou : take them as tliey ttccome pretty pbunpv 



620 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paiit.III. 



Broad Spanish 
Windsor broad 
Large Kentish Windsor 
Largest Taylor's '^Vmdsor 
Sandwich flargish 



Toker ; middling large 
A\'hite-bIossomed ; sniallish middli) 
Green nonpareil; smallish 
ninr.iford; smallish middling 
Dwarf cluster, or fan ; sinallest. 



while the peas are yet green and tender. Leave some on to grow old; the young pods Avill then fill in 
greater perfection, and the plants will continue longer in bearing." 

3610. To save seed. " Either sow approved sorts in the spring, for plants, to stand 
wholly for seed, to have the pods ripen in full pcifection ; or occasionally leave some 
rows of any main crop; let all the early podded ripen, and gather the late formed only 
for the table, as the last gleanings of a crop seldom afford good full seed. For public 
supply extensive crops are commonly raised in fields. Let the seed attain full maturity, 
indicated by the pods changing brown, and the peas hardening : then to be hooked up 
and prepared for threshing out in due time, cleaned, and housed." 

3611. For tiie method ofybrcm^ peas, see Chap. VII. Sect. XII. 

SuBSECT. 2. Garden- Bean. — Vicia Faba, L. Diad. Dec. L. and Leguminosce, J. 
Feue de marais, Fr. ; Bohn, Gei'. ; and Fava, Ital. 

3612. The garden-bean \s an. axmvL?A plant, rising from two to four feet high, with a 
tliick angular stem, the leaves divided, and without tendrils ; the flowers white, with a 
black spot in the middle of the wing ; seed-pods thick, long, woolly within, and enclosing 
the large ovate flatted seeds, for the sake of which the plant is cultivated in gardens. It 
is a native of the east, and particularly of Egy]3t, but has been known in this country 
from time immemorial, having, in all probability, been introduced by tlie Romans. 
" Crops of beans," Neill observes, " are very ornamental to the kitchen-garden, and 
render it a pleasant walk, the flowers having a fragrance not unlike those of the orange." 

3613. Use. The seeds are the only part used in cookery; and are either put in 
soups, or sent up in dishes apart. 

3614. Varieties. The following are the principal sorts planted in British gardens : — 

Early small P.Iazagan 
Early long-pod 
Early small Lisbon 
I>arge long -nod 
Larger sword long-pod 

3(il5. Estimate of sorts. " The Mazagan is one of the hardiest and best flavored of the small and early 
sorts. Mazagan is a Portuguese settlement on the coast of Africa, near the Straits of Gibraltar ; and it is 
said that seeds brought from thence afford plants that are more early and more fruitful than those which 
spring from home-saved seed. The Lisbon is next, in point of earliness and fruitfulness ; some, indeed, 
consider it as merely the Mazagan ripened in Portugal. The dv/arf-fan or cluster-bean is likewise an 
early variety, but it is planted chiefly for curiosity ; it rises only six or eight inches high ; the branches 
spread out like a fan, and the pods are produced in small clusters. The Sandwich bean has been long 
noted for its fruitfulness ; the Toker and the broad Spanish are likewise great bearers. Of all the large 
kinds, the Windsor bean is preferred for the table. When gathered young, the seeds are sweet and very 
agreeable ; when the plants are allowed room and time, they produce very large seeds, and in tolerable 
plenty, though they are not accounted liberal bearers. There are several subvarieties, such as the broad 
Windsor, Taylor's Windsor, and the Kentish Windsor. The long-poddcd bean rises about three feet high, 
and is a great bearer, the pods being long and narrow, and closely filled with oblong middle-sized seeds. 
This sort is now very much cultivated, and there are several subordinate varieties of it, as the early, the 
large, and the sword long-pod. The white-blossomed bean is so called, because the black mark on the 
wing of the blossom is wanting. The seed is semi-transparent ; when young it has little of the peculiar 
bean flavor, and is on this account much esteemed ; it is at the same time a copious bearer, and proper for 
a late crop. It may be mentioned, that Delaunay, in Le ban Jardinier, describes as excellent a new 
variety cultivated at Paris, which he calls the green bean from China ; it is late, but very productive ; and 
the fruit remains green even when ripe and dried." 

3616. Times of solving for early and sitccessional crops. " For the earliest crop, plant some Mazagars 
in October, November, or December, in a warm border, under an exposure to the full sun. Set them in 
rows two feet or two and a half asunder, about an inch and a half or two inches deep, and two or three 
inches apart in the rows; or some may also be sown in a single drill, under a south wall." The most 
successful plan for nurturing a crop over the winter, is to sow the beans thickly together in a bed of light 
earth, under a warm aspect, for the intermediate object of protecting the infant plants the better from 
rigorous weather ; and with the view of transplanting them at the approach of spring, or when the size of 
the plants (two or three inches in height) require it, into warm borders, at the distances at which the 
plants are to fruit. For this object, the width of a garden-frame is a convenient width for the bed, which 
should slope a little to the south. Sow two inches deep, either in drills, or by drawing off that depth of 
the earth with a hoe or spade, scattering in the beans at the distance of about a square inch. At the ap- 
proach of frost, protect the rising plants with a frame, hand-glasses, or the half-shelter of an awning of 
matting. In February or March, as soon as mild weather offers, transplant them into a warm south bor- 
der, placing one row close under a protecting-fence as far as that advantage can be given. Ease them out 
of the seed-bed with their full roots, and with as much mould as will adhere : pull off the old beans at 
bottom, apd prune the end of the tap-root. Then plant them at the proper final distances, closing the 
earth rather high about the stems. Besides the benefit of previous protection, the fruiting of the beans is 
accelerated about a week by transplanting. Further, if severe frosts kill the early advanced plants, or if 
it was omitted to sow an early crop at the general season, a quantity may be sown thick in a moderate 
hot-bed, in January or February, or in large pots placed therein, or in a stove, to raise some plants quickly, 
for transplanting as above ; previously hardening them by degrees to the full air. In all cases, as the 
young plants come up, give occasional protection in the severity of winter; and hoe up a little earth to 
the stems. Plants which can have no other shelter should be covered lightly with dry haulm or straw ; 
but such a covering must be carefully removed as often as the weather turns mild. To succeed the above, 
plant more of the same sort, or some of the early long-pod or small Lisbon, in December or Januarj', 
when mild weather, for larger supplies, in m.ore open exposures. And in order to obtain either a more 
full succession, or a first general crop, plant some early and large long-pods, and broad Spanish, at tlie end of 
January, if open weather, in some warmest compartment of good mellow ground. Some of the larger sword 
long-pod, Sandv/ich, and Toker beans, may also be planted in fuller crops in February, if the weather 
permit, both for succession and principal supplies. You may likewise plant any of the preceding kinds, as 
well as Windsors and other sorts, in full and succession crops in February, March, and April." 

3617. For the tnain sumtner crops, " adopt principally the Windsor, Sandwich, and Toker, large long-pod, 
and broad Spanish ; all to be assigned under a free exposure, in the main com.partments. The Windsor ranks 
first in regard to flavor ; but proves, on common soils, not so plentiful a bearer as the other late sorts. 
Plant also full succession crops, in March and April, and smaller portions in May and June, for late pro- 



Book I. 



KIDNEYBEAN. 



621 



duction, especially the long-pod, broad Spanish, andTokcr; also any of the early sorts, whicli are more 
suct-essful in lato planting, than the larger broad varieties. The white-blossomed bean, tliough tiie 
sni illest of the middle-sized, is a very desirable sort to plant as secondary crops, botli in tiie general and 
late planting seasons, from March till June and July ; being a great bearer, and a tender and sweet 
eating bean, if gathered young. Any of the other sorts named in the above list may also be planted oc- 
casioiiaily, to increase the variety, i'nr sowings in June and July, the small or early kinds again become 
the moc^t" proper, as their constitiition tits them for standing late as well as earl}'. Tiuis regular supplies 
may be provided for in succession, from Juno till September." {Abcrcro7iihie.) 

J>il8. Quantity of seed. For Ciirly crops, one pint of seed will be requisite for every eighty feet of 
row ; lor main crops, two ejuarts for every !::4() feet of row ; and for late crops, nearly the same as the 
early. For the main crops, the quantity cultivated in proportion to that for early or late crops, is gene- 
rally treble or quatlru[)le, as to the extent of ground : but a less quantity of seed is requisite for the same 
space. 

:l{^V^. Method of sowing. " Ilant all the sorts in I'ows, two feet and a half apart, for the smaller, or 
very early, or very late kinds; and three feet for the lai-ger : the smaller beans two inches deep, and 
thr. inches distant in the row ; the larger three inches deep, and four inclies distant in the row." 

3>i-(t. Trausp/aiiti/ig. Speedily constantly transplants his eai'ly bean-crops, and considers that tliis 
plant may be as easily transplanted as cabbage, or any other vegetable. It is a i)ractice with him to 
l)lant beans alternately with potatoes in the same row ; the rows three feet a{)art, and tiie potatoes eigh- 
teen inches apart in the row, so that the beans are nine inches from the potatoes. The beans are 
transplanted, by which means they have the start and advantage of the potatoes and weeds, and as they 
come in early, may be gathered before they can possibly incommode or injure the potatoes. {Practical 
Hints, &c. p. 17.) 

3621. Manual process. "The work of sowing is most generally effected by a dibble, having a thick 
blunt end, to make a wide aperture for each bean, to admit it clean to the bottom, without any narrow 
liollow part below : strike the earth fully and regularly into the holes, over the inserted beans. Or tlic 
planting may be performed occasionally in drills drawn with a hoe the i)ropcr depth and distance as 
above : place the beans at intervals along the bottom of each drill, and earth them over evenly; which 
method, though suitable to any kinds, may be more particularly adopted in sowing tlie early and other 
small sorts." 

o622. Soaking seed in summer. " In planting late crops in June and July, if the weather be dry, it is 
eligible to give the beans a previous soaking for several hours in soft water ; or, if they are to be sown in 
drills, water the drills beforehand, then directly put in the beans, and earth them in v.-hile the ground 
remains moist." ^ 

3623. Subsequent culture. " As the plants come up, and advance from two to four or six inches high, 
hoe up some earth to the stems on both sides of each roM', cutting down all weeds. Repeat the hoeing 
as future weeds arise, both to keep the ground about the plants clean, and to loosen the earth to encou- 
rage their growth. In earthing up, great cai-e must be taken that the earth do not fall on the centre of 
the plant so as to bury it ; for this occasions it to rot or fail. After earthing up, stir between the rows 
with a three-pronged fork. As the different crops come into full blossom, pinch or cut oft' the tops, in 
order to promote their fruiting sooner, in a moreiilentiful production of well filled pods." {Abercrombic.) 
Nicol says, " Topping is unnecessary for any but the early crops ; being practised to render them more 
early." Most gardeners, however, are of opinion, that topping improves the crop both in quantity and 
quality. It might be^worth an ingenious young gardener's while to try the effect of ringing at the bot- 
tom of the stalk, against cutting ott'the top. 

5624. To forward an early crop, see this article under Pea. (3606.) 

3(525. To produce a very late crop. Neill mentions an expedient sometimes resorted to to produce a late 
crop. A compartment of beans is fixed on ; and when the flowers appear, the plants are entirely cut over, 
a few inches from the surface of the ground. New stems spring from the stools, and these produce a 
very late crop of beans. 

3G26. Gathering. For table use, gather only such as are tender, the seeds decreasing in delicacy after 
they attain about half the size which they should possess at maturity. When they become black-eyed, 
they are tough, and strong tasted, and much inferior for eating. 

3627. To save seed. " Either plant some of the approved sorts, in February or 
March, wholly for that purpose ; or leave some rows of the different crops ungathered, 
in preference to the gleanings of gathered crops. The pods will ripen in August, 
becoming brown and dry, and the beans dry and hard : then pulling up the stalks, place 
them in the sun, to harden the seed thoroughly, after which thresh out each sort 
separately. " [Abercrombic. ) 

3628. To force the bean, see Chap. VII. Sect. XII. 

SuBSECT. 3. Kidneyheaii. Phaseolus, L. Diadel. Decan. L. and Legnmiiwf.a', J. 
Haricot, Fr. ; Sc/uninkbohne, Ger. ; and Fagiuolo, Ital. 

3629. The common dimrf kidneybcan, the haricot of the French, and erroneously 
termed French bean, is the F. vulgaris, L. (^Lob. Ic. 2. p, 59.) It is a tender annual, a 
native of India," and introduced in 1597, or earlier. Flowers from June to September. 
The species called the runner is the P. multiflorus, Willd. [Sclik. Han. 2. 7. 199. a.) a 
half hardy annual, and a native of South America, introduced in 1633. It is rather 
more tender than the other ; produces flowers from July to September. The stem of 
both species is more or less twining, though little of this propensity is shown in the 
dwarfish kinds. 'I'he leaves are ternate, on long foot-stalks; the flowers on axilla.'y 
racemes ; the corolla generally white, sometimes yellow, red, or pin-ple. The pods are 
oblong, swelling slightly over the seeds, which are generally kidney-shaped, smooth, and 
shining, when ripe, varying in color according to the variety, and either white, black, blue, 
red, or spotted. The fruit of both sorts may be had in perfection from tlie open garden, 
by successive crops from June to October. Speechly suggests (Practical Hints on Domestic 
OEconomij, p. 15.), that the culture of the kidneybcan might become an object of national 
or field culture in this coimtry, and be particularly usefid in times of scarcity ; " more 
especially, as on good land it will flourish and grow luxuriantly, even in a dry parching 
season ; in whidi respect it differs from most other culinary vegetables." It is an article 
of field-culture in most warm countries, especially France and America. 

3630. Use. The unripe pods are chiefly used in Britain as a legume, for which they 



622 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



are in great estimation throughout the year ; being produced by forcing when they can- 
not be grown in the natural ground. Tliey are also used as a pickle. On the continent, 
the ripe seeds are much used in cookery ; forming what are called liaricols, of different 
kinds, and entering into some sorts of soups. In the end of the season, when frost is 
expected, the haulm of the kidneybean crop is gathered and dried like that of tlie pea in 
tliis country, and the ripe beans afterwards threshed out, and preserved for use through 
the winter. 

3631. Varieties of the dwarf species : — 

Early yellow dwarf ( Eariy white I Black-speckled ) Streaked, or striped 

Early red-speckled : Battersea white I Brown-speckled Tawny 

Early black, or negro | Canterbury white | Dun-colored 1 Large white dwarf. 

3632. Varieties of the runner or climbing species: — 

Scarlet runner ; the most plentiful and I but the pods similar to the scarlet Canterbury and Battersea small white 
lasting bearer, preferable for the niaiji kind runner 
crop of runner \Miite Dutch runner; bears veo" lofK Variable runner. 

Large white runner; a variety of the I smooth pods, but does not continue 
scarlet. The seed and Wossom white, 1 so long in flower as the two former 

3633. Constitution and habits. Both the above classes of kidneybeans, dwarfs, and runners, are tender 
in their nature, unable to grow freely in the open garden before April or May ; the seed being liable to 
rot in the ground from the effects of wet, if planted before the beginning of the former month, even in a 
dry soil. The plants are also affected by sharp cold, and make but little progress till settled warm wea- 
ther. However, when sown in the proper season, from April or May through the course of summer, 
till the beginning of August, they succeed well, making liberal returns of fruit from June or July till 
October. The dwarfs require no support ; but the runners, ascending eight or ten feet high or more, 
require tall sticks or poles to climb upon, or lines suspended from a contiguous building or fence. They 
l)roduce pods their whole length. It deserves notice, that in their voluble habit of growth, the tendrils 
turn to the right, or in a direction contrary to the apparent diurnal course of the sun : this aberration 
from the common habits of plants has been accounted for by supposing that the native climate of the 
scarlet runner will be found to lie south of the equator, and that the plant, although removed to the 
northern hemisphere, is still obedient to the course originally assigned to it, turning in a direction which, 
in its native climate, would be towards the sun. {Abercromble.) 

363-1. Estimate of sorts. The dwarfs bear sowing a little sooner, and make returns quicker than the run- 
ners. Tiiey are, besides, more convenient to cultivate on a largo scale; and the smaller pods which they 
produce, are esteemed by many to have more delicacy of flavor. On these accounts, it is usual to raise the 
larger supply from the dwarf species. The early yellow, early black, and early red-speckled, are among 
tJie most hardy and most forward ; the early white comes in a few days later, but is of superior flavor. The 
Canterbury, Battersea, black-speckled, brown-speckled, dun-colored, striped, and tawny, are plentiful 
lasting bearers. Growers for sale, in general, depend on the Canterbury and Battersea for main crops ; but 
the others just named are also profitable sorts, and acceptable to the consumer. The dwarf kidneybean 
continues to i)roduce young pods in abundance, and in perfection only about three weeks or a month. The 
runners yield a succession of fruit from the same sowing a much longer time than the dwarfs. The scarlet 
runner ranks first for its prolific property and long continuance in fruit ; the pods are thick, fleshy, tender, 
and good, if gathered while moderately young. TTlie white variety is equally eligible for a principal crop. 
The Dutch runner grows as luxuriantly as hops, and is also a great bearer, in fine long pods, but not so 
lasting as the former. As to the smaller runner kinds : these are rather degenerate varieties of the Can- 
terbury and Battersea white dwarfs ; casually shooting into runners : they bear, in tolerable abundance, 
slender neat pods, which are very good and tender eating ; though not so' eligible for a principal crop of 
runners as the scarlets. 

3635. Quantity of seed. Half a pint will sow a row eightj' feet in length, the beans being placed from two 
and a half to three inches apart. 

3fi3fi. Soil. The soil for both species should be light and mellow, inclining to a dry sand for the early 
sowings, and to a moist loam for the sowings in summer. 

3637. Separate culture of dwarfs. About the beginning of April, if the weather be temperate, fair, and 
settled, make the first sowing, or in a dry south border, or other shelteretl compartment with a good aspect, 
or sow in a single row close under a south fence ; beginning with a small proportion of the most hardy early 
sorts. It is a good method to follow in a week with a second sowing in case the former should fail. You 
may sow for a larger crop about the middle, or twentieth of April. For the early crops, make the drills two 
feet asunder. The common depth is an inch and a half for the smaller-sized beans. Drop the beans in 
each row at this season pretty close together, as many may fail ; from one to two inches apart. Cover them 
in evenly the full depth of the drill. For the main crops, you may sow more fully towards the end of April ; 
and in full crops in May and June ; a portion once every fortnight or three weeks, of the Canterbury and 
otlier sorts, approved for a main supply. Draw drills, two feet or two and a half asunder, an inch and a 
half or two inches deep. Drop the beans therein, three inches apart, and earth iu the full depth of the 
drills. For supplies in succession, sow in July once or twice ; and make a moderate sowing at the begin- 
ning of August for a late and last crop. In the drouglit of high summer, it is advisable to accelerate the 
germination of the seed, by laying it in damp mould, till it begins to sprout, or by soaking it in soft water for 
six or eight hours previous to sowing ; and by watering the drills to receive it. Crops sown after the middle 
of July should be favored in situation, or the time of their bearing will be much shortened by the decline of 
sinumer. From this course of sowings, a regular succession of young green pods will be produced from 
June and July till October. As the plants of the different crops "advance in growth, occasionally hoe and 
stir the ground between the rows. Cut down all weeds as they spring. Draw some earth to the stems of 
the plants as they rise to height, which will strengthen and forward them considerably. When advanced to 
full bearing, it is advisable to gather the pods in moderately young or medium growth. 

3638 Culture of runners. The runner kidneybeans may be sown in a small portion, towards the end 
of April, if tolerably warm dry weather; but as these beans are rather more tender than the dwarf sorts, 
more liable to rot in the ground by wet and cold, especially the scarlets, the beginning or middle of May 
will be time enough to sow a considerable crop ; and you may sow a full crop about the beginning of June. 
Allot principally the scarlet and large white runners. Some Dutch runners are very eligible as a se- 
condary crop. The first crojjs should have the assistance of a south wall. Intermediate crops may be 
sown in any oi>on comi)artment, or against any fence not looking north. The latest sown will continue 
bearing the longer under a good aspect and shelter. In sowing, draw drills about an inch and a half, or 
not more than two inches deep. Let parallel rows be at least four feet asunder, to admit in the intervals 
tall sticks or jwles for the plants to climb upon. Place the beans in the drills four inches apart, and earth 
them in evenly, the depth of the drills. A row contiguous to a fence or building may ascend upon lines. 
Some may bo sown in a single row along a border, or on each side of a walk ; and have the support of a 
slight trellis of laths and lines ; or they might be arched over with similar materials, to fonn a shadv walk 
or bower. In a cold wet season, or when requisite to have a few plants more forward than the general 
crop, some scarlets may be sown in April, either in a slight hot-bed, or in pots, under frames or hand- 
glasses, to raise and forward the plants till two or Uiree inches high : tlicn, at the end of May, transplant 



Book I. 



ESCULENT ROOTS. 



623 



them into the open gp.rden. As tlie plants come up, and advance from three to six inche?; in growth, hoe 
some earth to tlie stcn\s, cutting down all weeds. When they begin to send forth runners, place suitable 
supports to ea(;h row ; and conduct the tendrils to the sticks or lines, turning them in a contrary di- 
rection to the sun. The ascending plants will soon come into flower, podding at the joints in long 
succession. They are so pvolific that (he returns from three sowings, in May, June, and July, will last from 
Julv till October, 

3iW. Taking the crop. Gather the pods, both from dwarfs and runners, while they are young, 
fleshy, brittle, and tender; for then are they in highest perfection for the table; and the plants will 
bear more fully, and last longer in fruit, under a course of clean gathering, not leaving any superabundant 
pods to grow old. 

36-10. To nauc seed. Either sow a portion for that object, or leave rows wholly ungathered of the niain 
crops, or i)reserve a sulficiency of good pods promiscuously. The beans saved should be the first-fruits of 
a crop sown at a period which throws the entire course of growth into the finest part of summer. Let 
them hang on the stalks till they ripen fully in August and September ; then let the haulm be pulled up, 
and placed in the sun, to dry and harden the seed, wiiich should be afterwards cleared out of the husks, 
bauged up, and housed. 

oti41. Funvardhig a>i_ early crop. The kidneybean is often partially forced in hot-houses or frames, 
with a view to its fruiting in the open garden ; and supjilies of green pods are also kept up .throughout 
the winter and spring months, by forcing in hot-houses and pits ; for the details ofbotii practices, see 
Ch. VII. Sect. X. 

3(542. Injects. The pea, bean, and kidneybean are liable to the attacks of various insects, 
especially the aphides in dry seasons. The BntcJnis Pisi {fig. 468.) is particularly destructive to 
the pea, and its larva {a) is often found in the ripe pod. In gardens, the only mode of keeping 
them under, is to cut off the part infested, and remove it with the insects attached. When 
early crops are newly sown or planted, mice will burrow for and eat the seed, and when it be- 
gins to penetrate the soil, it is attacked by snails and slugs, and sometimes by birds. The usual 
means of defeating the attacks of these and other enemies, must always be early resorted to by 
the gardener. 

Sect. III. Esculent Roots. 

3643. The esculent-rooted culuian/ plants delight in a light, rather sandy, deep, and 
well stirred soil. It must be dry at bottom ; but a moist atmosphere and moderate tem- 
perature are greatly favorable to the growth of almost the whole of the plants we have in- 
cluded in this section. Hence the excellence of the potatoe crop in Ireland, and the size 
to which turnips, carrots, parsneps, &c. attain in Britain and Holland, compared to what 
they do in France and Germany. The space occupied in the kitchen-garden by this class 
of vegetables is considerable ; but as it is regulated in some degree by the quantity of the 
more common roots grown in the farm for culinary use, it is less subject to estimation. 
In most gardens, however, the esculent roots taken together may occupy as much space 
as the legumes. In cottage gardens, they may be considered as occupying one half of 
the whole, to be in part succeeded by winter greens. 

SuBSECT. 1. Potatoe. — Solamim tuberosum, 1^. [Bauh. Prod. 89. t. 89.) Pent. Dig. L. 
and Solanece, B. P. Pomme de Tei~re, Fr. ; Cartoffel, Ger. ; and Porno di Terra, Ital. 

3644. The potatoe is a perennial plant, well known for the tubers produced by its roots. 
The stem rises generally from two to three feet in height, with long and weak branches, 
furnished with leaves interruptedly pinnate. The flowers are white or tinged with purple. 
The fruit is a berry of the size of a plum, green at first, but black when ripe, and con- 
taining many small, flat, roundish, white seeds. It is supposed to be a native of South 
America, but Humboldt is very doubtful if that can be proved : he admits, however, tliat 
it is naturalised there in some situations. 

364.'). Sabine and Lambert consider it as satisfactorily proved, that it is to be found both 
in elevated places in the tropical regions, and in the more temperate districts of the western 
coasts of South America. (Hort. Trans, v. 250. ; Jour. R. Instit. x. 25.) Some 
tubers, said to be of the wild potatoe, have been received by the Horticultural Society, and 
grown by them ; they differ so little from those of the cultivated potatoe, that Sabine con- 
jectures, " that the original cultivators of this vegetable did not exercise either much art 
or patience in the production of their garden-potatoes." (Hort. Trans, v. 257.) 

3646. Sir Joseph Banks {Hort. Trans, i. 8.) considers that the potatoe was first brought 
into Europe from the mountainous parts of South America, in the neighborhood of 
Quito, where they were called j^^pcts, to Spain, in the early part of the sixteenth century. 
From Spain, where they were called battntas, they appear to have found their way first to 
Italy, where they received the same name with the truffle, taratoujii. The potatoe was 
received by Clusius, at Vienna, in 1598, from the governor of Mons, in Hainault, who 
had procured it the year before from one of the attendants of the Pope's legate, under the 
pame of taratoujii, and learned from him, that it was then in use in Italy. In Germany 
it received the name of cartoffel, and spread rapidly even in Clusius's time. To England 
the potatoe found its way by a different route, being brought from Virginia by the colon- 
ists sent out by Sir Walter Raleigh in 1584, and who returned in July 1586, and 
" probably," according to Sir Joseph Banks, "brought with them the potatoe." Thomas 
Herriot, in a report on the country, published in De Bry's Collection of Voyages (vol. i. 
p. 17.), describes a plant called operunvk, with "roots as large as a walnut, and others 
much larger ; they grow in damp soil, many hanging together, as if fixed on ropes ; they 
are good food, either boiled or roasted." 

3647. Gerrard, in his Herbal, published in 1597, gives a figure of the potatoe, under 



G24 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Tart III. 



the name of Ihc paiaUie of Virginia, wIilmicc, he says, lie rcceivctl the roots ; and tliis ap- 
pellation it appeal s to have retained, in order to distinguish it from tlie battatas, or sweet 
\>ota.too {Conindruhis ballalas), till the year 1G40, if not longer. " Hie sweet potatoe," 
Sir Joseph Banks observes, " was used in England as a delicacy long before the intro- 
duction of our potatoes : it was imported in considerable quantities from Spain and the 
Canaries, and was supposed to possess the power of restoring decayed vigor. The kissing 
comfits of Falstaff", and other confections of similar imaginary qualities, with which our 
ancestors were duped, were principally made of these and of eringo roots." 

3648. Goi/gh, in his edition of Caymleiia Brilnniiia, says, that the potatoe was first 
planted by Sir Walter Raleigh on his estate of Youghall, near Cork, and that it was 
"cherished aiid cultivated for food" in that country before its value was known in 
England ; for, though they were soon carried over from Ireland into Lancashire, Gerrard, 
who had this plant in his garden in 1597, under the name of Jiallata J'irgininna, recom- 
mends the roots to be eaten as a delicate dish, not as common food. Parkinson men- 
tions, that the tubers were sometimes roasted, and steeped in sack and sugar, or baked 
with marrow and spices, and even preserved and candied by the comfit-makers. 

3649. T/ie Roijal Socieli/, in 1663, took some mea?iures for encouraging the cultivation 
of potatoes, with the view of preventing famine. Still, however, although their utility 
as an article of food was l)etter known, no high character was bestowed on them. In 
books of gardening, published towards the end of the seventeenth century, a hundix'd 
years after their introduction, they are spoken of rather slightingly. " They are much 
used in Ireland and America as bread," says one yuthor, "and may be propagated with 
advantage to poor people." " I do not hear tliat it hath been yet essayed," are the words 
of another, " whether they may not be propagated in great quantities, for food for swine 
or other cattle." Even the enlightened Evelyn seems to have entertained a prejudice 
against them ; "Plant potatoes," he says, writing in 1699, "in your worst ground. 
Take them up in November for winter spending ; there will enough remain for a stock, 
though ever so exactly gathered. " The famous nurserymen, London and Wise, did not 
consider the potatoe as worthy of notice in their Complete Gardener, published in 1719; 
and Bradley, who, about the same time, wrote so extensively on horticultural subjects, 
speaks of tliem as inferior to skirrets and radishes. 

3650. The use of potatoes, however, gradually spread, as their excellent qualities became 
better understood. But it was near the middle of the eighteenth century before they 
were generally known over the country : since that time they have been most extensively 
cultivated. In 1796, it was found, that in the county of Essex alone, about 1700 acres 
w^ere planted with potatoes for tlie supply of the London market. This must form, no 
doubt, the principal supply ; but many fields of potatoes are to be seen in the other 
counties bordering on the capital, and many ship-loads are annually imported from a dis- 
tance. In every county in England, it is now more or less an object of field-cultuie. 
The cultivation of potatoes in gardens in Scotland was very little understood till about 
the year 1740 ; and it was not practised in fields till about twenty years after that pe- 
riod. It is stated in the General Report of Scotland (vol. ii. p. 111.), as a well ascer- 
tained fact, that in the year 1725-6, the few potatoe-plants then existing in gardens about 
Edinburgh, were left in the same spot of ground from year to year, as recommended by 
Evelyn ; a few tubers were perhaps removed for use in the autumn, and the parent-plants 
were then well covered with litter to save them from the winter's frost. Since the middle 
of the eighteenth century, the cultivation of potatoes has made rapid pi'ogress in that coun- 
try ; so that they are now to be seen in almost every cottage garden. The potatoe is now 
considered as the most useful esculent that is cultivated ; and who, Neill asks, " could, d 
priori, have expected to have found the most useful plant among tlie natural family of the 
Luridce, L. , several of wliich are deleterious, and all of which are forbidding in their aspect. ' ' 

3651. Use. The tubers of the potatoe, from having no peculiarity of taste, and con- 
sisting chiefly of starch, approach nearer to the nature of the flower, or farina of gnuii, 
than any vegetable root production ; and for this reason it is the most universally liked, 
and can be used longer in constant succession by the same individual without becomijig 
unpalatable, than any other vegetable, the seeds of the grasses excepted. " So generally 
is it relished, and so nutritious is it accounted," Neill observes, " tliat on many tables it 
now appears almost every day in tlie year. It is commonly eaten plainly boiled, and in 
this way it is excellent. When potatoes have been long kept, or in the spring months, 
the best parts of each tuber are selected, and mashed before going to table. Potatoes- are 
also baked, roasted, and fried. With the flour of potatoes, puddings are made nearly 
equal in flavor to those of millet ; with a moderate proportion of wheat-flour, bread of 
excellent quality may be formed of it ; and potatoe starch, independently of its use in 
the laundry, is considered an equally delicate food as sago or arrow-root." As starch and 
sugar are so nearly the same, that the former is easily converted into the latter, lience the 
pofcitoe yields a powerful spirit by distillation, and a strong wine by the fermentive process. 

3652. Varieties. Tliese are very numerous, not only from the facility of procuring new 



Book 1. POTATOE. 625 

sorts by raising from seed; but because any variety cultivated for a few years in the 
same soil and situation, as in the same garden or farm, acquires a peculiarity of cha- 
racter or habit, which distinguishes it from the same variety in a different soil and situ- 
ation. The varieties in general cultivation may be distinguished in regard to precocity, 
tardily, form, size, color, and quality. 

3653. Precocity. The earliest varieties are — 



Hog's early frame ; a small watca? pota- 
toe, fit only for very early forcing 

Royal dwarf; a mealy potatoe, much grown 
at Perth 

Early Manchester ; waxy and red 



Common early frame; wasy 

Foxe's yellow seedluig ; similar, but ratlier 

larger, waxy 
American early; much esteemed at 

Edinburgh 



Early dwarf; waxy 
Early ash-leaved ; dry 
Early chamiiion ; large 
M'Cree's early; dry. 



3654. No blossoms are ])roduced by any of t/ie above sorts : they are roundish in form, 
small-sized, white, and not of the best quality. 

3655. Tardity. The latest sorts are — 

The round puri)le | The speckled purple, or tartan ; commonly grown in 

The oblong j)uri>le I mossy soils in Scotland. 

3656. The fnrm of potatoes is either round, oblong, or kidney-shaped. 

3657. Of the round, the most esteemed are — 

The champion ; late and early varieties I Round red ; middle-sized, smooth 

The oxnoble ; very large, and of a peculiar flavor I Round rough red ; or Lancashire, 

not generally esteemed I 

3658. The oblong are — 

The red nosed oval; often confounded I TTie American red ; long and not ^hick | tatoe; ovate, with small full eyes, 

with the red kidney j The Irish red, or pink ; oblong and en- I much grown in Cheshire and Lan- 

The oblong red ; varied with white tirely red, with hollow eyes I cashire, mealy and agreeably flavored. 

The oblong white 1 The bright-red, blood-red, or applc-i>0- j 

3659. The kidney-shaped are — 

The common white kidney; of a peculiar flavor esteemed by many | The red kidney ; reckoned somewhat more hardy. 

3660. In size, the early sorts are the least, and the oxnoble and late champions tlie 
largest 

3661- In color, the early sorts are in general white, the oblong sorts red, and the latest 
sorts purple. 

3662. In quality, potatoes are either watery, as the very early sorts ; waxy, as the 
American and Irish reds ; or mealy, as the ash-leaved early, the champion, the kidney, &c. 

3663. The following list is recommended by the principal London seedsmen at the 
present time : — 

For forcing in frames, or for the first crop in the open garden. 
Fox's seedling | Early manley | Early mule I Broughton dwarf. 

For general cultivation in the open garden or field. 
Early kidney ; good flavor, and very early, keeps well 1 Nonsuch; early, prolific I Early shaw ; good early sort for gensi-al use. 

Foj- main crops, arranged in the order of their ripening. 
Early champion; very generally Culti- I Bread-fruit; originated about 1810, pro- j Purple ; very mealy, productive, and keeps 

vated, prolific, and mealy lifio, white, and mealy well 

Red nose kidney ) Lancashire pink-eye ; good Red apple ; mealy, keeps tlie lonjjest of 

Large kidney 1 Black skin ; mealy, white, and good J any. 

3664. In general, every town and district has its peculiar and favorite varieties, early 
as well as late, so that, excepting as to the best early kinds, and the best for a general crop 
in all soils, any list, however extended, could be of little use. Dr. Hunter, in his 
Georgical JEssays, has supposed the duration of a variety to be fourteen years ; and 
Knight (Hort. Trans, vol. i.) concurs with him in opinion. Tliere are some excellent 
sorts of party-colored potatoes in Scotland, which degenerate when removed from one 
district to another ; and most of the Scotch and Irish varieties degenerate in England. 
The best mode, therefore, to order potatoes for seed is to give a general description of 
the size, color, form, and quality wanted, and whether for an early or late crop. 

3665. Propagation. The potatoe may be propagated from seed, cuttings or layers of the green shoots, 
sprouts from the eyes of the tubers, or portions of the tubers containing a bud or eye. The object of the 
first method is, to procure new or improved varieties ; of the second, little more than curiosity, or to mul- 
tiply as quickly as possible a rare sort ; and of the third, to save the tubers for food. The method by por- 
tions of the tubers is the best, and that almost universally practised for the general puqjoses, both of field 
and garden culture. 

3666. Bi/ seed. Gather some of the ripest apples in September or October, take out and preserve the 
seed till spring, and then sow it thinly in small drills. When the plants are up two or three inches, thin 
them to five or six inches' distance, and suffer them to grow to the end of October, when the roots will 
furnish a supply of small potatoes, which must then be taken up, and a portion of the best reserved for 
planting next spring in the usual way. Plant these, and let them have the ensuing summer's full growth 
till October, at which time the tubers will be of a proper size to determine their properties. Having con- 
sidered not merely the flavor of each new variety, but the size, shape, and color, the comparative fertility 
and healthiness, earliness or lateness, reject or retain it for permanent culture accordingly. {Abercrombie.) 

3667. To produce seeds on early potatoes. The earliest varieties of potatoes, it has been already re- 
marked, do not produce flowers or seed. Knight, desirous of saving seed from one of these sorts, took 
a very ingenious method of inducing the plants to produce flowers. " I suspected the cause," he says, 
" of the constant failure of the early potatoe to produce seeds, to be the preternaturally early formation of 
the tuberous root ; which draws off for its support that portion of the sap which, in other plants of the 
same species, affords nutriment to the blossoms and seeds : and experiment soon satisfied me that my con- 
jectures were perfiectly well founded. I took several methods of placing the plants to grow, in such a 
situation, as enabled me readily to prevent the formation of tuberous roots ; but the foUowing appearing 
the best, it is unnecessary to trouble the Society with an account of any other. Having fixed strong stakes 

S s 



626 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



in the ground, I raised the mould in a heap round the bases of them, and in contact with the stakes : on 
their south sides I planted the potatoes from which I wished to obtain seeds. When the young plants were 
about four inches high, they were secured to the stakes with shreds and nails, and the mould was then 
washed away, by a strong current of water, from the bases of their stems, so that the fibrous roots only of 
the plants entered into the soil. The fibrous roots of this plant are perfectly distinct organs from the run- 
ners, which give existence, and subsequently convey nutriment to the tuberous roots ; and as the runners 
spring from the stems only of the plants, which are, in the mode of culture I have described, placed 
wholly out of the soil, the formation of tuberous roots is easily prevented ; and whenever this is done, 
numerous blossoms wiU soon appear, and almost every blossom will afFord fruit and seeds." Knight, con- 
sidering that the above facts, which are more fully explained in the Philosophical Transactions for 1806, 
were sufficient to prove, that the same fluid or sap gives existence alike to the tuber, and the blossom, and 
seeds, and that, whenever a plant of the potatoe aflTords either seeds or blossoms, a diminution of the crop 
of tubers, or an increased expenditure of the riches of the soil, must necessarily take place, succeeded in 
producing varieties of sufficiently luxuriant growth, and large produce for general culture which never 
produced blossoms. {Hoi-t. Trans, vol. i. 188.) 

3668. By cuttings, or the layers of the stalks, or suckers. Make cuttings of the young stalks or branches, 
of five or six inches in length, in May or June ; attending to the general directions for forming cuttings. 
Choose, if possible, showery weather ; or strike them under a hand-glass, or in a half empty pot covered 
with a pane of glass, as in striking cucumber-cuttings. 

3669. Layers. In June or July, when the potatoe-stalks are advanced one or two feet long, choose such 
plants as stand somewhat detached, and lay down the shoots on the ground with or without cutting, in the 
common mode of layering. Cover them with earth about three inches, lea\^ng the points of the shoots 
exposed. These shoots will emit roots at every leaf, and produce full-grown potatoes the same year, attain- 
ing perfection in autumn. 

3670. Suckers. Remove in June, off-set sucker shoots, with a few roots to each j plant them carefully, 
and they will produce a late crop like the layers. 

3671. By spi-outs or shoots from the tubers. In default of genuine early sorts ; or, to save the tubers for 
use in seasons of scarcity, the sprouts which are generally found on store-potatoes in spring, and picked off 
and thrown away as useless, will, when carefully planted in loose well prepared soil, yield a crop ; and this 
crop will be fit for use a little sooner than one produced from cuttings or sections of the same tubers, in 
which the buds are not advanced. Almost every thing, however, depends on the fine tilth, and good state 
of the ground. 

3672. By portions of the tube7-s. This is the only method fit for general purposes. In making the sets or 
sections, reject the extreme or watery end of the tuber, as apt to run too much to haulm, and having the 
eyes small, and in a cluster ; reject also the root or dry end, as more likely to be tardy in growth, and pro- 
duce the curl. Then divide the middle of the potatoe, so as to have not more than" one good eye in each 
set. Where the potatoe scoop is used, take care to apply it so as the eye or bud roay be in the centre of 
each set, which this instrument produces, of a semi-globular form. The larger the portion of tuber left to 
each eye, so much the greater will be the progress of the young plant. The scoop is only to be used in 
seasons of scarcity, when the portion of tuber saved by it rnay be used for soups for the poor, or for feeding 
cattle. The best scoop is that described and figured in Supp. Encyc. Brit. art. Agr. 

3673. Size of the sets. Knight has found that for a late crop small sets may be used, because the plants of 
late varieties always acquire a considerable age before they begin to generate tubers ; but for an early crop 
.he reconamends the largest tubers, and he has found that these not only uniformly afford very' strong p'lants, 
but also such as readily recover when injured by frost : for being fed by a copious reservoir beneath the 
soil, a reproduction of vigorous stems and foliage soon takes place, wheii those first produced are destroyed 
by frost, or other cause. He adds, "when the planter is anxious to obtain a crop within the least possible 
time, he will find the position in which the tubers are placed to vegetate by no means a point of indiffer- 
ence ; for these being shoots or branches, which have grown thick instead 'of elongating, retain the dis- 
position of branches to propel their sap to their leading buds, or points most distant from the stems of the 
plants, of which they once formed parts. If the tubers be placed with tlieir leading buds upwards, a few 
very strong and very early shoots will spring from them ; but if their position be reversed, manv weaker 
and later shoots will be produced ; and not only the earliness, but the quality of the produce, in size, will be 
much affected." {Hort. Trans, iv. 448.) 

3674. Quantity of sets. In respect to proportioning the quantity of sets to the space to be planted, 
Abercrombie directs, " For a plot of the eat'ly and secondary crops, eight feet wide by sixteen in length ; 
planted in rows fifteen inches asunder by nine inches in the row, a quarter of a peck of roots or cuttings. 
For fuU-timed sorts a7idmain crops, a compartment, twelve feet wide by thirty-two in length, planted in 
rows two feet distant by twelve inches in the row, half a peck of roots or cuttings will be required." 

3675. Soil and viamire. The best soil for the potatoe is a light, fresh, unmixed loam, 
where they can be grown without manure. Here they have always the best flavor. In 
a wet soil, they grow sickly, and produce watery tubers, infected with worms and other 
vermin. To a poor soil, dung must be applied ; littery dung will produce the earliest 
and largest crop ; but mellow dung, rotten leaves, or vegetable earth, will least affect the 
flavor of the tubers. 

3676. Season for planting. " The last fortnight of March, and first fortnight of April, is the most 
proper time for planting the main crops ; a little earlier or later, as the spring mav be forward or late, the 
ground dry or wet. Occasional plantings may be made in Ma j', or even the beginning of June." (Aber. 
crombie.) 

3677. Methods of planting. The sets of whatever kind, or the plants forwarded in pots, to be turned out 
with their balls entire for producing an early crop in the open air, should alwavs be inserted in regular 
rows ; the object of which is to admit with greater facility the stirring the earth between, and the earthing 
up of the plants. The rows may be fifteen inches apart for the small early sorts ; and for the larger, twenty 
inches or two feet, according to the poorness or richness of the soU. In the lines traced, make holes for 
the sets at eight, twelve, or fifteen inches' distance, letting their depth not be less than three, nor exceed 
five inches. 

3678. Planting on a level surface will answer on a light soil. In small gardens, the planting may be per- 
formed by a common large dibble with a blunt end. For planting considerable crops, a strong larger dibble, 
about a yard long, is used, with a cross handle at top for both hands, the lower end being generally shod 
with iron, and having a short cross iron shoulder about four or five inches from the bottom, as a guide to 
make the holes of an equal depth ; one person striking the holes, and a boy directly dropping a set into each 
hole. Strike the earth in upon them fully with a dibble, hoe, or rake, either as each row is planted, or when 
the whole planting is finished. Sometimes the process is to open a small hole with the spade, and to drop 
m a set, which set is covered in by the opening of the nest hole 

W?/ /awd, the planting ought to be on raised beds with alleys, or in drills on the crown 
?5r?^^f Ifco fn^fho h^k'-T^^ by previous digging, throwing on good earth till the 

Itl-^ !, IIZI^^,,^'^-^^^ method describ^ below. To plint in drills, trace 

hnJ^ f„ ihL^^wri>.i'^?'^^ sPI^'fied : form them to the proper depth with a narrow spade or large 

hoe : m these place the sets a foot or fifteen mches apart, and earth over. To avoid the incQnVemeQces of 



Book I. 



POTATOE. 



627 



low wcttish grouiul, whether it be arable or grass land, or a cultivated garden, potatoes are planted in 
raised beds four feet wide, with alleys lialf that width between. The beds are thus raised : — Without dig- 
ging the surface, lay some long loose litter upon the intended beds. Upon this litter place the sets about a 
foot apart; and upon the sets apply more litter, equally distributed over the whole : then digging the alleys, 
turn the earth thereof upon the beds five or six inches deep ; or, if grass, turn the sward downward, level, 
ling in the top-spit to the same depth. The plants will produce very good crops. 

3680. Subsequent culture. *' From the March or April planting, the stems generally rise fully in May. 
After the plants have appeared, give an effectual hoeing on dry days, cutting up all the weeds, and stir the 
ground about the rising stalks of the plants. When advanced from six to twelve inches high, hoe up some 
earth to the bottom of the stems, to strengthen their growth, and promote the increase below : continue 
occasional hoeing to eradicate weeds, till the plants cover the ground, when but little further care will be 
required. Permit the stalks to run in full growth, and by no means cut down, as is sometimes practised ; 
the leaves being the organs for transmitting the beneficial influence of the sun and air to the roots, which is 
most necessary to the free and perfect growth of the tubers." {Abercrombie.) 

3681. Pinching off the blossoms. It is now generally admitted, that a certain advantage, in point of pro- 
duce, is obtained bypinching ofTthe blossoms as they appear on the plants. The fact has been repeatedly 
proved, and satisfactorily accounted for by Knight, who imagines, that it may add an ounce in weight to the 
tubers of each plant, or considerably above a ton per acre. {Hort. Trans, vol. i. 190.) - 

3682 Taking the crop. *' Clusters of roots in the early planted crop will sometimes by June or July be ad- 
vanced to a sufficient size for present eating, though still small. Only a small portion should be taken up at 
a time, as wanted for immediate use, as they will not keep good above a day or two. In August and Septem- 
ber, however, they will be grown to a tolerably good size, and may betaken up in larger supplies, though 
not in quantities for keeping a length of time. Permit the main winter crops to continue in growth till 
towards the end of October or beginning of November, when the stalks will begin to decay — an indication 
that the potatoes are fully grown : then wholly dig them up, and house for winter and spring. Let them 
then be taken up, before any severe frost sets in ; having, for large crops, a proper potatoe-fork of three or 
four short flat tines, fixed on a si)ade-handle. Cut down the haulm close, and clear ofF forward : then fork 
up the potatoes, turning them clean out of the ground, large and small; and collect every forking into 
baskets." 

3683. Housing and preserving tlie crop, Abercrombie recommends "housing potatoes in a close, dry, 
subterranean apartment, laid thickly together, and covered well with straw so as to exokide damps and 
frost." There they are to be looked over occasionally, and any that decay picked out. In spring, when 
they begin to shoot, turn them over, and break off the sprouts or shoots from each tuber, perfectly close, 
in order to retard their future shooting as much as possible. Potatoes so stored, will continue good all the 
winter and spring, till May and June. 

3084. Pying (as it is called in some places) is a good method of preserving potatoes in winter. They are 
piled on the surface of the ground, in a ridged form, of a width and length at pleasure, according to the 
quantity; but commonly about five or six feet wide. This is done by digging a spit of earth, and laying it 
round the edge, a foot wide (if tui-f the better), filling the space up with straw, and then laying on a course 
of potatoes, dig earth from the outside, and lay upon the first earth. Put straw a few inches along the inside 
edge, then put in more potatoes, and so on, keeping a good coat of straw all the way up between the potatoes 
and the mould, which should be about six inches thick all over ; beat it close together, and the form it lies 
in, with the trench all round, will preserve the potatoes dry ; and the sharpest frost will hardly affect them ; 
in a severe time of which, the whole may be covered thickly with straw. In the spring, look over the 
stock, and break off the shoots of those designed for the table, and repeat this business to preserve the pota- 
toes the longer good. 

3685. Curl disease. The disease called curl, has in many places proved extremely 
troublesome and injurious. It has given rise to much discussion, and to detail all the 
various opinions would be a useless task. It may, however, be remarked, that the expe- 
riments of Dickson {^Caled. Hort. Mem. i. 55.) show, that one cause is the vegetable 
powers in the tuber planted, having been exhausted by over-ripening. That excellent 
horticulturist observed, in 1808 and 1809, that cuts taken from the waxy, wet, or least 
ripened end of a long flat potatoe, that is, the end nearest the roots, produced healthy 
plants ; while those from the dry and best ripened end, farthest from the roots, either did 
not vegetate at all, or produced curled plants. This view is supported by the observations 
of a very good practical gardener, Daniel Crichton, at Minto, who, from many years' ex- 
perience, found (/rf. p. 440.) that tubers preserved as much as possible in the wet and 
immature state, and not exposed to the air, were not subject to curl. And Knight 
{Hort. Trans. 1814), has clearly shown the beneficial results of using, as seed-stock, po- 
tatoes whicii have grown late, or been imperfectly ripened in the preceding year. Dickson 
lays down some rules, attention to which, he thinks, would prevent the many disappoint- 
- raents occasioned by the curl. He recommends, 1 . The procuring of a sound healthy 
seed-stock of tubers for planting from a high part of the country, where the tubers are 
never over-ripened : 2. The planting of such potatoes as are intended to supply seed- 
stock for the ensuing season, at least a fortnight later than those planted for a crop, and 
to take them up whenever the stems become of a yellow-green color, at which time the 
cuticle of the tubers may be easily rubbed off between the finger and thumb : 3. The 
preventing those plants that are destined to yield seed-stock for the ensuing year, from 
producing flowers or berries, by cutting off the flower-buds ; an operation easily per- 
formed by children, at a trifling expense. Shirreff {Ceded. Hort. Mem. vol. i. p. 60., 
and in the Farmer s Magazine) controverts Dickson's opinion, and accounts for the curl 
disease as the effects of old age, on the hypotliesis that plants like animals will not live 
beyond certain periods, &c. The essay is ingenious, but totally speculative. Young, 
who has paid much attention to the subject, has brought forward a variety of facts to show 
that the " curl on the young stem rising weakly arises chiefly from the two causes men- 
tioned by Dickson and Crichton, over-ripe tubers, or the employment of seed-stock that 
has been improperly kept during winter, that is, kept exposed to the light and air instead 
of being covered with earth or sand, or straw, so as to preserve their juices." (Caled. Hort. 
Mem. iii. 278.) The same view, it may be remarked, had occurred to Dr. Hunter. A 

Ss 2 



628 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



fact ascertained by Knight deserves to be particularly noticed : it is this ; that by plant- 
ing late in the season, perhaps in June, or even in July, an exhausted good variety may 
in a great measure be restored ; that is, the tubers resulting from the late planting, when 
again planted at the ordinary season, produce the kind in its pristine vigor, and of its for- 
mer size. 

3686. Crichton, who has made a variety of experiments on the effects of exposure 
to the air in hampers and open floors, and on exclusion of the air by covering with earth 
{Caled. Mem. vol. i. 440.), concludes, " That the curl in the potatoe may often be occa- 
sioned by the way the potatoes are treated that are intended for seed. I have obsen'ed, 
that wherever the seed-stock is carefully pitted, and not exposed to the air in the spring," 
the crop has seldom any curl ; but where the seed-stock is put into bams and out-houses 
for months together, such crop seldom escapes turning out, in a great measure, curled ; 
and if but few curl the first year, if they are planted again, it is more than probable the 
half of them will curl next season." 

3687. For forcing i)otatoes, see Ch..Y 11. Sect. XL 

SuBSECT. 2. Jerusalem Artichoke. — Helianthiis tuberosus, L. {Jac. Vind. 2. t. 161.) 
Syng. Polyg. Fnist. L. and Corj/mbifercv, J. Poire de Terre, Fr. ; Frde Apfd, Ger. ; 
and Girasole, Ital. 

3688. The Jerusalem artichoke is a hardy perennial, a native of Brazil, and introduced 
in 1617. It has the habit of a common sun-flov. er, but grows much taller, often rising 
ten or twelve feet high. The season of its flowering is September and October ; but 
though its roots endure our hardest Avinters, the pl^nt seldom flowers with us, and it never 
ripens its seed. The roots are creeping, and are furnished with many red tubers, clus- 
tered together, perhaps from thirty to fifty to a plant. Before potatoes were known, this 
plant was much esteemed. The epithet Jerusalem is a mere corruption of the Italian word 
Girasole (from girare, to turn, and sol), or sun-flower ; the name Artichoke is bestowed 
from the resemblance in flavor which the tubers have to the bottoms of artichokes. 

3689. Use. The roots are esteemed a wholesome, nutritious food, and are eaten 
boiled, mashed with butter, or baked in pies, and have an excellent flavor. Planted in 
rows, from east to west, the upright herb of the plant affords a salutarj' shade to such 
culinary vegetables as require it, in the midsummer months, as lettuce, turnips, strawber- 
ries, &c. 

3690. Propagation. It is raised by planting, either some small offset tubers of the main roots, or middling- 
sized roots cut into pieces for sets, which is more eligible. Preserve one or two full eyes to each cutting. 

3691. Quantity of sets. For a row 120 feet in length, the sets being inserted two feet apart, half a peck, 
or sixty roots, will be sufficient. {Abercromhie.) 

3692. Culture. It will grow in any spare ordinary part of the garden ; but to obtain fine large roots, give 
it an open compartment of pretty good mellow ground. The season for planting is February, March, or be- 
ginning of April. Having digged the compartment, plant them, either by dibble, in rows two feet and a half 
asunder, about eighteen inches in the lines, and three or four inches deep ; or, in drills by a hoe, the same 
depth and distances. The plants will come up in April and May. In their advancing growth, hoe and cut 
down all weeds, drawing a little earth to the bottom of the stems. The root will multiply into a progeny of 
tubers, in a cluster, in each plant, increasing in size till September and October : you may then cut away the 
stems, and dig up the produce as wanting. Or, in November, when they are wholly done growing, it will be 
proper to take up a quantity, and lay in dry sand under cover, to be ready as wanting, in frosty weather, when 
the others are frozen up in the ground, or affected by the frost. As the roots of this plant are very prolific, 
the smallest piece of a tuber will grow. In taking up the produce, you sliould therefore clear all out as well 
as possible ; as any remaining part will come up the following year disorderly, and pester the ground ; and 
■would thus continue rising for many years, but not eligible to cultivate for a good crop. Therefore, to an- 
swer a demand, make a fresh plantation every year. {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Turnip. — Brassica Rapa, L. and Dec. (Eng. Bot. 2176.) Tetrad, 
SUiq. L. and Cniciferce, J. Navet, Fr. ; Steckriibe, Ger. ; and Navone, Ital. 

3693. The turnip is a biennial plant, growing in a wild state in some parts of Eng- 
land ; but better known as an inhabitant of the garden and the farm. In its wild state, 
the root-leaves are large, of a deep-green color, very rough, jagged, and gashed ; in the 
second season it sends up a flower-stalk, with leaves embracing the stem, smooth, glau- 
cous, oblong, and pointed. 

3694. Use. The use of the root, boiled and mashed as a dish, in broths, soups, and 
stews, or entire, is familiar over all Europe. Tlie top-shoots, from such as have stood 
the winter, are gathered whilst tender, and dressed as spring greens or spinage. The seed 
is also sometimes sown as small salading. " The navet, or French turnip, is considered a 
distinct species, and is the B. Napus, L. and B. N. var. /8. esculenta,Dec., or edible rape. 
It is a different plant from the navet of Decandolle, which he calls B. campestris, var. 
7. napo-brassica." Of the true navet or French turnip cultivated in England, Dickson 
observes {Hort. Trans, vol. i.), " that it enriches all the foreign soups. Stewed in gravy, 
it forms a most excellent dish, and being white, and of the shape of a carrot, when mixed 
alternately with those roots upon a dish, it is very ornamental. In France, as well as in 
Germany, few great dinners are served up^ without it in one shape or other." In using 
it, there is no necessity to cut away the outer skin or rind, in which, indeed, the flavor 



Book I, 



TURNIP. 



629 



chiefly resides ; scraping it will be quite sufficient. Justice observes, that it is neither fit 
to be eaten boiled alone nor raw ; but that two or three of them in seasoning will give a 
higher flavor than a dozen of other turnips. (British Gardener s Director, p. 159.) 
3695. Varieties. Those in general cultivation are the 



Early white Dutch 
Early 5tone 
Comuion round white 
Large round white 
Velio w Dutch 
Aberdeen yellow 

Maltese golden ; an excellent and beauti- 
ful root 



Green-topped large round white; skin of 

the crown greeii 
Red-tcjiped larse white 
Tankard ; large oblong 
French (B. Napus, var. esculenta), nai-ei 

de Meiiujc, Fr. ; small oblong 
Small round French, petit Berlin, Fr., 

teltatv, Ger. 



Swedish {B.campesiris,\aT. napo-brassica, 
Dec), Navet de Suede, Fr.; large round, 
and a very hardy plant, more valued 
for field-culture than in gardens for 
the table. 



3696. Estimate of sorts. Tlie first three sorts are the fittest for early, first succession, and main summer 
crops for the table. The early white Dutch is proper both for the most early and^first succession crops, as 
is also the early stone. The common round white is highly eligible for the main crop ; and the large round 
white stands nearly on a par with that, and, if not sown to come in with it, should at least succeed it, as a 
late summer and autumn crop. In large grounds, portions of the large white green-topped, and the large 
white red-topped, may be sown for autumn and winter ; but the surest plant for winter consumption is 
the yellow Dutch ; although constituted to stand intense frost unhurt, it has a fine flavor, and is very nu- 
tritive. Small portions of any of the other sorts may be cultivated in secondary crops for variety, or to 
answer a particular demand. The French, or iiavet, is of excellent flavor. It was anciently used 
throughout the south of Europe, and was more cultivated in this country a century ago than it is now. It 
is still in high repute in France, Germany, and Holland. It is grown in the sandy fields round Berlin, 
and also near Altona, from whence it is sometimes imported to the London market. ' Before the war, the 
queen of Geo. II I. had regular supplies sent to Englantifrom Mecklenburgh. The Swedish, for its large size 
and hardy nature, is extensively cultivated in fields for cattle : it is also occasionally raised in gardens for 
the table, to use in winter and spring like the yellow Dutch. 

3697. Seed cstiynate. For a seed-bed four feet and a half by twenty-four, the plants to remain and be 
thinned to seven inches' distance, half an ounce. 

3698. Th)ie of sowing. This root can be obtained most part of the year, by sowing every month in spring 
and summer. Make first, a small sowing in the last fortnight of March, or the first days of April, for early 
turnips in May and June ; but, as these soon fly up to seed the same season, adopt a larger early sowing 
about the middle of April. The first main sowing should follow at the beginning, or towards the end of 
May, for roots to draw young about the end of June, and in full growth in July and August. Sow full 
crops in June and July, to provide the main supplies of autumn and winter turnips. Make a final smaller 
sowing in the second or third week of August, for late young crops, or to stand for the close of winter and 
opening of spring ; the turnips of this sowing continue longer than those of the previous sowings before 
they run in the spring. As the crops standing over winter shoot up to seed-stalks in February, 
March, or April, the root becomes hard, stringy, and unfit for the table. Make the sowings a day or two 
before or after the prescribed times for the opportunity of showery weather ; or, if done at a dry time, 
give a gentle watering. 

3699. Soil and situation. The turnip grows best in a light moderately rich soil, broken fine by good 
tilth. S:ind or gravel, with a mixture of loam, produces the sweetest-flavored roots. In heavy excessively 
rich land, the plant sometimes appears to flourish as well ; but it will be found to have a rank taste, and 
to run more speedily to flower. A poor, or exhausted soil, ought to be recruited with a proportion of 
manure suited to the' defect of the staple earth. Dung, when requisite, should have been laid on the 
preceding autumn; for when fresh, it affords a nidus for the turnip-fly. Let the early crop have a 
warm aspect, and the lightest driest soil Sow the crops raised after the first of May in the most 
open exposure. 

3700. Process in solving, and precautions against the fly. Let the ground be well broken by regular dig- 
ging, and neatly levelled to receive the seed. Procure bright well-dried seed. At a season when the 
tumip-fly is not apprehended, the seed may be put into the ground without any preparation, either alone 
or mixed with a little sand ; but in the hot weather of summer, it is advisable to use some cheap and effec- 
tual preventive of the fly. It appears from a trial of Knight, at the suggestion of Sir Humphrey Davy, 
that lime slacked with uriiie, and mixed with a treble quantity of soot, if sprinkled in with the seed at the 
time of sowing, will protect the seeds and germs from the ravages of this pernicious insect ; but this anti- 
dote cannot be conveniently applied unless the sowing be in drills. A yet simpler remedy, found by Mean 
to be perfectly successful, is, to steep the seed in sulphur.water, putting an ounce of sulphur to a pint of 
water, which will be sufficient for soaking about three pounds of seed. Qlbercrombie.) 

3701. Arch. Gorrie, a Scottish gardener of merit, tried steeping the seed in sulphur, sowing soot, ashes, 
and sea-sand, along the drills, all without effect. At last, he tried dusting the rows, when the plants were 
in the seed-leaf, with quick-lime, and found that efiectual in preventing the depredations of the fly. " A 
bushel of quicldime," he says, "is sufficient to dust over an acre of drilled turnips ; and a boy may soon be 
taught to lav it on almost as fast as he could walk along the driUs. If the seminal leaves are powdered in 
the shghtest degree, it is sufficient ; but should rain wash the lime offbefore the turnips are in the rough- 
leaf, it may be necessary to repeat the operation if the fly begin to make its appearance." {Cat. Horf. 
Mem. vol. i.) 

3702 Mixiitg equal parts of old seed with new, and then dividing the mixture, and steeping one half of it 
twentv-four hours in water, has often been tried with eflTect, and especially by farmers. By this means, 
four different times of vegetation are procured, and consequently four chances of escaping the fly. Radish- 
seed is also frequently mixed with that of the turnip, aod the fly preferring the forraer, the latter is allowed 
to escape. 

3703. Neill says, " one of the easiest remedies, is to sow thick, and thus ensure a sufficiency of plants 
both for the fly and the crop." But the most effectual preventive on a large scale is' fomad in sowing late, 
where that can be done ; the fly in its beetle state having fed on other herbage, and disappeared before the 
tuniip comes into leaf. 

3704. Abercrombie directs to " sow broad-cast, allowing half an ounce of seed for every 100 square feet, 
unless some particular purpose will be answered bv drilling. In the former method, scatter the seed regu- 
garly and thinlv; in drv weather, tread or roU it in lightly and evenly ; but after heavy showers, merely 
beat'it gently down ; rake in fine. Let drills be an inch deep, and twelve or fifteen inches asunder. In 
the heat of summer it is of great importance to wait for rain, if the ground be too extensive to be properly 
watered ; for the fermentation caused by copious rain and heat gives an extraordinary quick vegetation to 
the seed, which in a few days will be in the rough leaf, and out of all danger from the fly. This insect is 
weakened or killed by drenching showers, and does no injury to the turnip when much rain falls. It is de- 
sirable to have the last sowing finished by the twentieth of August." 

370a Reparation of a destroyed sowing. When a crop is destroyed by the fly, the necessary reparation is 
immediately to dig or stir the ground, and make another sowing ; watering soon, and occasionally after 
wards, unless rain falls. . , , ■■ , j ^. . 

3706. Subsequcnf culture. " As soon as the plants have rough leaves about an mch broad, hoe and thni 
them to six or eight square inches' distance, cutting up all weeds. As the turnips increase in the root, a 
part may be drawn young by progressive thinnings, so as to leave those designed to reach a fidl size ulti- 
mately ten or twelve square inches. Water garden-crops sometimes in hot weather. One great advanta^'Q 

S s 3 



630 



PRACTICE OF GAKDENING. 



Vakt III. 



attending the cultivation of the navet is, that it requires no manure whatever ; any soil that Is poor and 
light, especially if sandy, suits it, where it seldom exceeds the size of one's thumb or middle finger j in 
rich manured earth, it grows much larger, but is not so sweet or good in quality." [Justice and Dickson.) 

3707. Taking the crop and preserving it by Jiousing. "In the successive crops, begin to draw as above 
in a thinning order, that such others as are coming forward may have room to enlarge in succession ; by 
which means a regular supply will be procured till March or April of the second season ; six-cific sorts 
being sufficiently hardy to continue good throughout our ordinai-y winters. But of the winter crops for 
the table, draw a portion occasionally in November, December, or whenever there is an appearance of 
the frost setting in severe. Cut the tops off close, and house the roots in some lower shed or cellar, laid in 
sand, ready for use while the ground is frozen." Instead of cutting the top and roots close off, some prefer 
leaving about an inch of the top, and the whole of the root ; and, when the bulbs are kept in a sufficiently 
cool store, this seems preferable, as more likely to retain the sap. {Abercrmnbie.) 

3708. Turnip-tops. These are to be gathered from among the earliest spring-produced leaves, either 
from the crown, or flower-stalk. They are equally good from any of the varieties, and less acrid from 
those of the Swedish. Sometimes very late sowings are made in September and October, which never 
bulb, but which are preserved entirely for thin produce, as greens in spring. 

3709. Field-turnips. Where a family can be supplied from the field, the roots will always be found of a 
better flavor than those produced in the garden ; and the same remark applies to aU the brassica tribe, 
excepting the cauliflower and broccoli, and to potatoes and most tuberous roots. 

3710. To save seed. " Either leave, in the spring, some of the best sound roots of the 
winter-standing crop, or leave, in May or June, a part of the spring-sown crop of the 
same year : or, to be more certain of good kinds, transplant, in November or February, 
a quantity of full-grown well-shaped roots of the autumn or winter crop, into large, 
deepish drills, two feet asunder ; inserting the bottom fibre into the nether ground, and 
the main root fully to the bottom of the drill ; and earth well over. The plants will 
shoot in Jarge branchy stalks in summer, and ripen seed in July or August." 
{^Abercrombie.) It is preferable, however, to procure turnip-seed, as indeed that of 
most other vegetables, from the regular seedsmen ; as the seed-farmers have oppor- 
tunities of keeping the sorts distinct, which cannot be had within the precincts of a 
walled garden. 

3711. Insects and diseases. (See Process in Sowing, su^^ra.) The club or anbury is the 
principal disease to which turnips in gardens are liable, for which we know of no palli- 
ative but good culture, as turnips cannot be transplanted like the cabbage tribe. (See 
Sect. I. Subsect. 8.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Carrot. — Daucus carota, L. {Eng. Bot. t. 1174.) Pent. Dig. Jj. 
and Umbellifercs, J. Carotte, Fr. ; Gelbe Riibe, Ger. j and Carota, Ital. 

3712. The carrot is a hardy biennial, and common in many parts of Britain, in sandy 
soils, and by road-sides. It is kaown in many places by the name of bird's nest, from 
the appearance of the umbel when the seeds are ripening. The leaves are pinnatifid 
and much cut : the plant rises to the height of two feet, and produces white flowers in 
June and July, succeeded by rough, hispid seeds, which ripen in August. The root of 
the plant, in its wild state, is small, dry, sticky, of a white color, and strong-flavored ; 
but the root of tiae cultivated variety is large, succulent, and of a red-yellow, or pale 
straw-color. 

3713. Use. It is used in soups and stews, and as a vegetable dish. Parkinson 
informs us, that in his day, ladies wore carrot-leaves in place of feathers. In winter, an 
elegant chimney ornament is sometimes formed, by cutting off a section from the head or 
thick end of a carrot containing the bud, and placing it in a shallow vessel with water. 
Young and delicate leaves unfold themselves, forming a radiated tuft, of a very hand- 
some appearance, and heightened by contrast with the season of the year. 

3714. The varieties of the carrot in common cultivation are — 

Large red, or field carrot; grows to a , Orange carrot; large, long root, of an I small early crop. Also for shallow 

large size, and is chiefly cultivated orange color ; best sort for the main I soils 

m fields and in farmers' gardens for crop Late horn; same characterisUcs : but 

coloring butter 1 Early horn ; short, smaller root ; for a • suited for a late crop. 

3715. Cliristie enumerates the following varieties, as having been grown in the garden 
of the Horticultural Society, some of which are foreign sorts newly introduced : 

Horn carrots. Early red, common early, long horn 1 red, purple ; and the altringham, or superb, orieinalW 

Long carrots. White yeUow, long yellow, long orange, long ] from Cheshire. (HoH. Trans, vol. iv. p. 388.) 

3716. Soil. The carrot requires a light meUow soil, mixed with sand, which should be dug or trenched 
one or two spades deep, breaking well all the lumpy parts, so as to form a porous bed, and an even sur- 
the^orn ^ orange and red sorts, on account of their longer roots, require a soU proportionally deeper than 

*i,^^^^'ii'^^^'^ es^i»2rt^6', and sowing. The seeds have numerous forked hairs on their borders, by which 
they adhere together, and therefore should, previously to sowing, be rubbed between the hands, and 
mixed with dry sand, in order to separate them as much as possible. They are also very light, and there- 
fore a calna day must be chosen for sowing ; and the seeds should be disseminated equaUy, and trodden in 
before raking. Previously to sowing, if convenient, the seed shovdd be proven, by sowing a few in a pot, 
and placing It in a hot-bed or hot-house, as it is more frequently bad than most garden-seeds. For a bed 
four and a half feet by thirty, one ounce will be requisite, and the same for one hundred and fifty feet of 
drill-row. ^ 

3718. TiTnes of sawing. To have early summer carrots, sow on a warm border in the beginning of 
February ; or, to have them still more forward, sow in a moderate hot-bed, giving copious admissions of 
air. In the open garden, " begin with the early horn in the last fortnight of February, or first week of 
March, as dry, fine, and open weather may occur. The first-sown beds should be assigned a favorable 
situation, and covered for a time with haulm. FoUow with the orange in the first fojtnight of March, 



Book I. 



PARSNEP. 



6S1 



and make successive sowings thence till the 20th of April, for main crops. Add smaller sowings twice in 
May, for plants to draw young late in summer : also sow a few at the commencement of July for a later 
succession of young carrots in summer and autumn. Lastly, in the beginning of August, two separate 
small sowings may be made, for plants to stand the winter, and afford young roots early in spring, March 
and April." 

3719. Culture. " When the plants are up two or three inches in growth, in May and June, they will 
require thinning and clearing from weeds, either by hand or small hoeing. Thin from three to five 
inches' distance such as are designed for drawing in young and middling growth. But the main crop, 
intended for larger and full-sized roots, thin to six or eight inches' distance. Keep the whole clean from 
weeds in their advancing young growth. Some of small and middling growth will be fit for drawing in 
June and July ; large sizeable roots, in August and September ; and those of fuU growth, by the end of 
October." (Abercrombie.) 

3720. Preserving during winter. " Carrots are taken up at the approach of winter, cleaned, and stored 
among sand. They may be built very firm, by laying them heads and tails alternately, and packing with 
sand. In this way, if frost be excluded from the store-house, they keep perfectly well till March or 
April of the following year. Some persons insist that the tops should be entirely cut off at the time of 
storing, so as effectually to prevent their growing ; while others wish to preserve the capability of veget- 
ation, though certainly not to encourage the tendency to grow." 

v3721. To save seed. Plant some largest best roots in October, November, or the last 
fortnight of February, tvv^o feet apart ; insert them a few inches over the crowns. They 
will yield ripe seed in autumn, of which gather only from the principal umbel, which is 
likely not only to afford the ripest and largest seed, but the most vigorous plants. A 
considerable quantity of carrot-seed for the supply of the London seedmen is raised near 
Weathersfield, in Essex ; and much is imported from Holland. 

3722. Insects. Carrots, when they come up, are apt to be attacked by insects like the 
turnips ; the most approved remedies for which are thick sowing, in order to afford both 
a supply for the insects and the crop ; and late sowing, especially in light soils, thus per- 
mitting the grubs to attain their fly state before the seed comes up. 

SuBSECT. 5. Parsnq). — Pastinaca sativa, L. (Flor. Dan. t. 1206.) Pent. Dig. Li. 
and UmbellifercEy J. Panais, Fr. ; Pastinake, Ger. ; and Pastinaca, Ital. 

3723. The jfarsnep is a biennial British plant, common in calcareous soils by road-sides 
near London. The wild variety is figured in English Botany, t. 556. The garden- 
parsnep has smooth leaves, of a light or yellowish-green color, in which it differs from the 
wild plant, the leaves of which are hairy and dark -green ; the roots also have a milder 
taste : it does not, however, differ so much from the native plant, as the cultivated does 
from the native carrot. 

3724. Use. The parsnep has long been an inmate of the garden, and was formerly 
much used. In Catholic times, it was a favorite Lent root, being eaten with salted fish. 
" In the north of Scotland," Neill observes, " parsneps are often beat up with potatoes 
and a little butter of this excellent mess the children of the peasantry are very fond, 
and they do not fail to thrive upon it. In the north of Ireland, a pleasant table beverage 
is prepared from the roots, bi'ewed along with hops. Parsnep wine is also made in some 
places ; and an excellent ardent spirit, distilled after a similar preparatory process, to 
that bestowed on potatoes destined for that purpose. 

3725. Varieties. There is only one variety in general cultivation in Britain ; but the 
French possess three, the Coquaine, the Lisbonaise, and the Siam. 



The Coquaine, Dr. Maculloch mforms" us 
{Caled. HoH. Mem. vol. L p. 408.), is 
much cultivated in Guernsey and Jer- 
sey. The roots run sometimes four feet 
deep, and are rarely so small in circum- 
ference as six inches, having been known 
to reach sixteen. The leaves of this 



variety grow to a considerable height, 
and proceed from the whole crown of 
the root 

The Lisbonaise does not extend to so great 
a depth as the coquaine ; but the root 
■ i equally good in quality, and what 
■ ' " ■ ned ■ 



The leaves are small and short, and 
only proceed from the centre of the 
crown 

The Siam has a root of a yellowish color, 
not very large, but tender, and more 
rich in taste than the other varieties. 



lost in length is gained in thickness. 

3726. Soil. The soil most proper for the parsnep should be light, free from stones^ 
and deep. It should be dug or trenched before sowing at least two spits deep ; and the 
manure should either be perfectly decomposed, or, if recent, deposited at the bottom of 
the trench. 

3727. Seed estimate, and sowing. Sow in the end of February, or in March, but not later than April; 
and for a bed five feet by twenty, the plants to remain thinned to eight inches' distance, half an ounce of 
seed is the usual proportion. Having prepared either beds, four or five feet wide, or one continued plot, 
sow broad-cast, mode-ately thin, and rake the seed well into the ground. 

3728. Culture. Wheu the plants are about one, two, or three inches high, in May or June, let them be 
thinned and cleared from weeds, either by hand, or by small hoeing ; thinning them from eight or twelve 
inches' distance. Keep them afterwards clean from weeds till the leaves cover the ground, after which no 
further culture will be required. The roots will be pretty large by the end of September, from which time 
a few may be drawn for present use : but the parsnep is far best at fuil maturity, about the close of 
October, indicated by the decay of the leaf. The root will remain good for use till April and May 
following. 

3729. Preserving during winter. The parsnep is not so liable as the carrot to be hurt by frost, if left in 
the ground. But it would be proper, in the beginning of November, when the leaves decay, to dig up a 
portion of the roots, and to cut the tops off close, laying them in sand, under cover, ready for use in hard 
frosty weather. The rest will keep good in ground till they begin to shoot in the spring : then, in February 
or March, dig them up; cut the tops off; and, preserved in sand, the root will remain till about the end 
of April. 

3730. To save seed. " Transplant some of the best roots in February, two feet asunder, 
inserted over the crowns ; they will shoot up in strong stalks, and produce large umbels 
of seed, ripening in autumn." (Abercrombie.) 

Ss 4 



632 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSECT. 6. Red Beet. — Beta vulgaris, L. (Schk. Han. i. t. 56.) Pent. Dig. L. and 
Chenojmdecc, B. P. Betterave, Fr. ; Bothe Riibe, Ger. ; and Barba Bkttola, Ital. 

3731. The red beet is a bienmal plant, rising with large, oblong, thick, and succulent 
leaves, generally of a reddish or purple color ; the roots often three or four inches in dia- 
meter, of a foot or more in length, and of a deep-red color. It produces greenish flowers 
in August. The red beet is a native of the seai-coast of the south of Europe ; it was 
cultivated in this country by Tradescant, the younger, in 1 656, and then called beet rave 
(or beet-radish), from the French name betterave. 

3732. Use. The roots are boiled and sliced, and eaten cold, either by themselves, or 
in salads ; they also form a beautiful garnish, and are very much used as a pickle. Some 
consider the green-leaved variety as more tender in the roots than the red-leaved sort ; 
other prefer those with a few small dark-red leaves. From one variety, having a red. 
skin, but white flesh, sugar is prepared in some parts of France and the Netherlands ; 
but this manufacture, introduced under Buonaparte's reign, is now almost entirely given 
up in favor of West India produce. The roots, dried and ground, are sometimes used 
as " a supplement to coffee," and dried in an oven in thin slices : they are also used in 
comfitures. (iV. Cours d^ Agncultur, art. Bette.) 

3733. Varieties. These are numerous, but the principal are — ' 

The common long-rooted; which suits | The short, or tximip-rooted ; suited to I The green-leaved; red-rooted, suited to 
light, deep, rich soils, and grows very shallow soils soils of light open texture, 

large I I 

3734. Morgan has enumerated the following sorts of red beet, as having been culti- 
vated in the garden of the Horticultural Society ; — 

Large-rooted I Turnip-rooted ; and early va- | in France, and said to have I rates some yeUow-rootedi 

Long-rooted I riety I the flavor of a nut. I sorts, none of which are in 

Dwarf; one of the best [Small-red Green-topped.; much grown in general cultivation. 

1 Castlenaudari; much esteemed \ Scotland — He also enume- | (Hort. Trans, v. iil. p. 277.) 

3735. Seed and soil. The beet is always raised from seed, and for a bed four feet and a half by twelve 
feet, one ounce is requisite. The soil in which it naturally delights is a deep rich sand, dry and light 
rather than moist. Sowing in seed-beds and transplanting has been tried ; but though it may answer for 
the spinage or pot-herb beets, (white and its varieties,) it will not answer where the object is a large clean 
root. 

3736. Sowing. The beet is sown annually in the last week of March, or beginning of April. If sown 
earlier, many of the plants are apt to run into flower, and so become useless. " The ground on which it 
is sown should have been previously enriched by mellow compost and sea-sand ; but rank dung is not to 
be laid in, as it is apt to induce canker. For the long-rooted kind, trench to the depth of eighteen inches. 
Sow either broad-cast on the rough surface, and rake well into the earth ; or, as the seed is large, sow in 
drills an inch or two deep, and a foot asunder ; or dot it in with a thick blunt-ended dibble, in rows that 
distance, making holes ten or twelve Inches apart, about an inch and a half deep ; drop two or three seeds 
in each hole, but with the intention to leave only one best plant." 

.S7.'37. Subsequent culture. " When the young plants are advanced into leaves, one, two, or three inches 
in growth, they must be thinned and cleared from weeds, either by hand or small-hoeing, especially those 
sown promiscuously broad-cast and in drills : thin the latter to twelve inches' distance; and those holed 
in by dibble, to one in each place. They will acquire a large full growth in the root by September or 
October, to take up for use as wanted, and in continuance all winter and spring following : or in Novem- 
ber, it may be proper to dig up a quantity, cut off the leaves, and deposit the roots in dry sand, under 
cover, ready for use in winter, in case of hard frosty weather, which would fix them fast in the ground ; 
or the rest may be digged up at the same time, and trenched in close together in some dry compartment, 
to be covered occasionally in severe frost, to prevent their being frozen in, that they may be readily taken 
up as wanted. Towards spring, in February or the beginning of March, if any remain in the bed where 
raised, their removal then, being trenched in close together over the root, will, in some degree, check 
their shooting, and preserve them from running, so as to keep them good all the spring till May and 
June." {Abercrombic.) 

3738. Housing. In the northern counties, the winter stock of beet is' commonly lifted and housed in 
sand, in the manner of carrots. In digging up the roots for this purpose, great care must be taken that 
they be not in anywise broken or cut, as they bleed much. For the same reason, the leaves should be 
cut off, at least an inch above the solid part of the root. 

3739. To save seed. Either leave a few strong roots standing in the rows ; or select a 
few, and transplant them to a spot where they will be in no danger, when in flower, of 
being impregnated with any other variety. They will shoot up the second year, when 
liieir flower-stalks should be tied to stakes, to prevent their breaking over. 

SuBSECT. 7. Skirret. ^Sium Sisarum, L. {Schk. Hand. L t. 69.) Pent. Dig. L. and 
UmbellifercB, J. Chervis, Fr. ; Zuckerwiirzel, Ger. ; and SisarOy Ital. 

3740. The skirret is a perennial tap-rooted plant, a native of China, known in this 
country since 1548. The lower leaves are pinnated, and the stem rises about a foot 
high, terminated by an umbel of white flowers, in July and August. The root is com- 
posed of fleshy tubers, about the size of the little finger, and joined together at the crown 
or head ; they were formerly much esteemed in cookery. In the north of Scotland, the 
plant is cultivated under the name of crummock. 

3741. Use. The tubers are boiled, and served up with butter ; and are declared by 
Worlidge, in 16^2, to be " the sweetest, whitest, and most pleasant of roots." 

.3743. Culture. This plant grows freely in a lightish soil, moderately good. It is propagated both from 
seed, and by offsets of established roots. The better method is to raise seedlings, to. have the root in 
perfection, young and tender. 



Book I. 



SCORZONERA, SALSIFY. 



3743. By seed. " Sow between the 21st of March and the 15th of April ; n fortnight later rather than any 
earlier for a full crop, as plants raised forward in spring are apt to start for seed in summer. Sow on an 
open compartment of light ground, in small drills eight inches apart. When the plants are one or two 
inches high, thin them to five or six ii^ches asunder. They will enlarge in growth till the end of autumn : 
but before the roots are full grown, in August, September, or October, some may be taken up for con- 
sumption as wanted : those left to reach maturity will continue good for use throughout winter, and in 
spring, till the stems run." 

3744. Br/ slips. " Having some plants of last year's raising, furnished with root-offsets, slip them off ; 
taking only the young outward slips, and not leaving any of the larger old roots adhering to the detached 
offsets : which plant by dibble, in rows from six to nine inches asunder. They will soon strike, and en- 
large, and divide into offsets : which, as well as the main roots, are eateble and come in for use in 
proper season.' 

3745. To save seed. Leare some old plants in the spring : they will shoot up stalks, 
and ripen seed in autumn. ' 

SuBSECT. 8. Scorzonera, or Viper's Grass. — Scorzonera Hispanica, L. [Lam. III. 
t. 647. f. 5.) Si/ng. Polyg. jiEqu. L. and Cichoracece, J. Scorzonere, or Salsafis 
(VEspagne, Fr. ; Scorzonere, Ger. ; and Scorzonera, Ital. 

3746. Tlie scorzonera is a hardy perennial, a native of Spain, the south of France, and 
Italy, cultivated in this country since 1576. The stem rises tw^o or three feet high, with 
a few embracing leaves, and is branched at top ; the lower leaves are b'near, eight or 
nine inches long, and end in a sharp point ; the flowers are yellow, and appear from 
June to August. The root is carrot-shaped, about the thickness of one's finger ; taper- 
ing gradually to a fine point, and thus bearing some resemblance to the body of a viper. 

3747. Use. The outer rind being scraped off, the root is steeped in water, in order to 
abstract a part of its bitter flavor. It is then boiled or stewed in the manner of carrots 
or parsneps. The roots are fit for use in August, and continue good till the following 
spring. 

3748. Culture. " To have an annual supply, sow every year ; for although the plant, as to its vegetable 
life, be perennial, the root continuing only one season useful, must be treated merely as a biennial. The 
quantity of seed for a bed four feet and a half by ten feet, to be sown in drills fifteen inches asunder, is 
one ounce. Sow every spring, at the end of March, or in April : follow with a secondary sowing in May. 
't his root likes a deep, light soil. Allot an open compartment. Sow either broad-cast, and rake in evenly ; 
or in small drills, twelve or fifteen inches asunder, and earth over half an inch or an inch deep. When 
the young plants are two or three inches high, thin them to six or eight inches' distance. Clear out all 
weeds as they advance in growth. The plants having a free increase all summer, the roots will, .some of 
them, be of a moderate size to begin taking up in August, others in September, bat will not attain full 
growth till the end of October, when, and during the winter, they may be used as wanted ; or some may 
be dug up in November, and preserved in sand under cover, to be ready when the weather is severe. The 
plants left in the ground continue useful all winter till the springy then those remaining undrawn, shoot 
to stalk in April and May, and become unfit for the table." 

3749. To save seed. " Leave some old plants in the spring ; which will shoot up in 
tall stems, and produce ripe seed in autumn." (Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Salsify, or Purple Goat's Beard. — Tragopogon porrifolius, L. (Eng. Bot. 
638.) Si/7ig. Polyg. JEqu. L. and Cichoracece, J. Salsifis, Fr. ; Bocksbart, Ger. ; 
and Sassifica, Ital. 

3750. The salsify is a hardy biennial, a native of England, but not very common. The 
root is long and tapering, of a fleshy white substance ; the herb smooth, glaucous, and 
rising three or four feet high. The leaves, as the trivial name imports, resemble those of 
the leek ; the flowers are of a dull purple color, closing soon after mid-day ; the seed, as 
in other species of goat's beard, is remarkable for having attached to it a bnoad feathery 
crown. It has taken place in gardens of the T. pratensis, which was cultivated in Ger- 
rard's and Parkinson's time, but is now entirely neglected, 

3751. Use. The roots are boiled or stewed tike carrots, and have a mild, sweetish 
flavor; the stalks of year-old plants are sometimes cut in the spring, when about four or 
five inches high, and dressed like asparagus. 

3752. Culture. " Salsify is raised from seed, annually, in the spring, and for thirty feet of drill, one 
ounce of seed is sufficient. Allot an open situation. The soil should be light and mellow, fuU two spits 
deep, that the long tap-root may run down straight. Sow in March, April, and in May, for first and sue- 
cession crops, either broad-cast in beds, and rake in the seed, or in small drills, eight or ten inches asun- 
der. The plants are to remain where sown. When they are two or three inches high, thin them about 
six inches apart. In the dry hot weather of summer, water now and then till the ground be soaked. 
The roots having attained a tolerable size in August and September, may be taken up occasionally for 
present use. Those remaining, perfect their growth in October, for a more general supply ; and will 
continue good all winter, and part of the following spring. For winter use, take up a portion before frost 
hardens the ground, and preserve in sand. Such year-old plants as remain undrawn in the following 
spring, shoot up with thick, fleshy, tender stalks: these are occasionally gathered young to boilj the 
roots continuing good till the plant runs to stalk in April or May." 

3753. To save seed. " Leave or transjilant some of the old plants in spring ; which 
will shoot, and produce ripe seed in autumn." (Abercrombie.) 



634 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSECT. 10. Radish. — Baphams sativus, L. (Lam. III. t. 568.) Tetrad. Siliq. L, and 
Cruciferce, J. Hadis and Ravey Fr. ; Rettig, Ger. ; and Rafano, Ital. 

3754. The radish is an annual, a native of China, and mentioned by Gerrard in 1584. 
" The leaves are rough, lyrate, or divided transversely into segments, of vv hich the infe- 
rior less ones are more remote. The root is fleshy, and fusiform in some varieties, in 
others sub-globular ; white within, but black, purple, yellow, or white, on the outside ; 
the flowers pale-violet, with large, dark veins ; pods long, with a sharp beak." 

3755. Use. Formerly the leaves were often boiled and eaten ; but now the roots are 
chiefly employed. These are eaten raw in spring, summer, autumn, and winter. The 
young seedling leaves are often used with cresses and mustard, as small salad ; and radish 
seed-pods, when of plump growth, but still young and green, are used to increase the 
variety of vegetable pickles, and are considered a tolerable substitute for capers. 

3756. Varieties. These may be divided into the spring, autumn, and winter sorts. 
Spring radishes may be subdivided into the long or spindle-rooted (Rave, Fr.); and the 
round or turnip-rooted (Radis, Fr.); the autumn sorts are chiefly oval or turnip-rooted, 
and the winter radishes are ovate or oblong, and dark-colored. " The character of a 
good long-rooted radish," Strachan observes, " is to have its roots straight, long, free from 
fibres, not tapering too suddenly, and especially to be fully formed on the top, or well 
shouldered, as it is called, and without a long neck ; the roots should be ready to draw 
whilst the leaves are small, whence the name short-top radish, and if they soon attain a 
proper size, and also force well, they are then called earli/ and frame radishes." (^Hort. 
Trans, vol. iii. p. 438.) 



Autumn Kinds. 

White Russicin ; the root larg:er than any 
of the long-rooted kinds, wmte, taperinp 
like a cajrrot, flavor nutty, like that of 
the rampion. (Hort. Trans, iii. 115.) 

Yellow turnip ; root large, ovate, ye 'low, 
or dusky-brown, and rough without, 
but the flesh white 

Round brown ; root large, shape irregu- 
lar, externally matted with greenish- 
brown, and the flesh soft, and of a 
greenish-white. 



Winter Radishes. 

White Spanish ; root large, oval, outside 
white tmged with green, flesh hot, firm, 
solid, and white 

Oblong brown; root middle-sized, pear- 
shaped, outside coat rough and brown, 
marked with white circles, flesh hot, 
firm, solid, and white, plant very hardy 

Black Spanish ; root large, irregularly 
pear-shaped, rough and black externally, 
and the flesh hot, firm, solid, and white : 
very hardy 

Purple Spanish ; a subvariety of the black, 
with a purple skin. 

(Christie, in Hort. Trans, iv. 13.) 



Spring and Summer Kinds. 

Long sorts. Scarlet, or salmon-colored, 
^ and its subvairieties — 

Short-topt scarlet, and 

Early frame scarlet : which are the two 
sorts most generally cultivated 

Purple ; an early sort of good flavor, but at 
present neglected 

Long white; the original variety cultivated 
in Gerrard s time, white, semi-transpa- 
rent, and delicate. 

Turnip-Radishes. 

■WTiite ; root globular like a turnip 

Early white ; a subvariety 

The pink ; rose-colored, scarlet, and crim- 
son are names applicable to one sort 
■which approaches to the pear-shape. 

3757. Estimate of sorts. The spindle-rooted kinds are cultivated in the largest proportion for the first 
crops. The small turnip-rooted sorts may be sown in spring as secondary crops, and in summer and au- 
tumn for more considerable supplies. The winter sorts have a coarser flavor than the other kinds; but 
being of a hardy nature, are frequently sown. They are sliced in salads, or occasionally eaten alone with 
salt, vinegar, and other condiments. 

3758. Propagatimi. All the varieties are raised from seed. 

3759. Soil and situation. The soil shoulc) be light and mellow, well broken by digging : for sowings be- 
tween the middle of October and the middle of February, let the site be a dry sheltered border, open to 
the full sun. From the middle of February to the end of March, any dry open compartment will be suit- 
able. As spring and summer advance, allot cooler and shaded situations. A scattering of the smaller 
growing sorts may be sown among some broad-cast crops of larger growth, such as spinage, lettuce, and 
onion ; it may be also drilled between wide rows of beans, or on ground intended to be sown with a late 
spring crop. 

3760. Times of sowing. " The crops raised between the middle of October and the middle of February, 
are usually confined to the spindle-rooted kinds. Of the early short-top red, a first small saving may be 
made at the end of October, another in November, and a third in the last fortnight of December, if open 
temperate weather ; respectively to stand over the winter : but make the principal early sowings in January, 
or the beginning of February. From this time sow every fortnight or ten days, in full succession crops 
till the end of May ; as well the white and red small turnip-rooted fis the autumn sorts. The winter sorts 
are sometimes raised at the beginning of summer ; but the fittest season to sow them is from the end of 
June to the end of August ; that is, in July for use in autumn, and in August, to provide a supply through- 
out winter." 

3761. Seed, process in sowing, and common culture. " Sow each sort separate ; and for a bed four feet 
six inches by twelve feet, two ounces of seed will be required of the spring sorts, and an ounce and half 
for the autumn varieties. All the kinds may be sown either broad-cast or in drills ; but the latter is pre- 
ferable, as allowing the roots to be drawn regularly, with less waste. If you sow broad-cast, it is a good 
method to make beds four or five feet wide, with alleys between, a foot wide, the earth of which may be 
used to raise the beds, or not, as the season may make it desirable to keep the beds dry or moist. Avoid 
sowing excessively thick, as it tends to make the tops run, and the roots stringy. Rake in the seed well, 
full half an inch deep, leaving none on the surface to attract the birds. If you trace drills, let them be 
for the spindle-rooted kinds half an inch deep, and about two inches and a half asunder ; for the small 
turnip-rooted, three quarters of an inch deep, and four or five inches asunder; ami for the black turnip 
or Spanish, six or eight inches asunder, because the root grows to the size of a middle-sized turnip. As 
the plants advance in growth, thin them so as to leave the spindle-rooted about two inches square distance, 
and the other sorts three, four, or five, leaving the most space to the respective sorts in free-growing wea- 
ther. In dry warm weather, water pretty frequently : this swells the roots, and makes them mild and 
crisp." 

3762. Occasional shelter. " The crops sown between the end of October and the end of February, be- 
sides being favored in situation, will want occasional shelter, according to the weather. On the first ap- 
proach of frost, whether the seed is just sown, or the plants have appeared, cover the ground, either with 
clean straw, dry long haulm, or dried fern, two or three inches thick, or with mats supported on short 
stout pegs. The covering will keep off the birds, and by its warm effect on the mould, forward the ger- 
mination of the seed. The time for removing or restoring it must be regulated by the weather ; as the 
plants should be exposed to the full air whenever it can be safely done. If the season be cold without 
frost, take off the covering every morning, and put it on towards evening ; and if the weather be sharp 
and frosty, let it remain on night and day, till the plants have advanced into the first rough leaves, and af- 



Book I. 



SPINACEOUS PLANTS. 



635 



terwards occasionally, till the atmosphere is settled and temperate. Replace it constantly at night till there 
is no danger of much ftost happening ; then wholly discontinue the covering." 

3763. Pods for pickling. " Radish seed-pods should be taken for pickling when of plump growth, in July 
and August, while still young and green." 

3764. To save seed. " Transplant a sufficiency of the finest plants in April or May, 
when the main crops are in full perfection. Draw them for transplanting in moist wea- 
ther, selecting the straightest, best-colored roots, with the shortest tops, preserving the 
leaves to each ; plant them, by dibble, in rows two feet and a half distant, inserting each 
root wholly into the ground, down to the leaves. Keep the red and salmon-colored kinds 
in- separate situations, to prevent a commixture of their farina, and to preserve the kinds 
distinct. With proper watering, they will soon strike, and shoot up in branchy stalks, 
producing plenty of seed ; which will be ripe in September or October. In transplanting 
for seed the turnip-rooted kinds, select those with the neatest-shaped roundest roots, of 
moderate growth, and with the smallest tops. They, as the others, will yield ripe seed in 
autumn. To obtain seed of the winter sorts, sow in the spring to stand for seed ; or 
leave or transplant, in that season, some of the winter-standing full roots. As the different 
kinds ripen seed in autumn, cut the stems ; or gather the principal branches of pods ; 
and place them in an open airy situation, towards the sun, that the pod, which is of a 
tough texture, may dry, and become brittle, so as readily to break, and give out the seed 
freely, whether it be threshed or rubbed out." 

3765. For forcing the radish, see Chap. VII. Sect. XIII. 

Sect. IV. Spinaceous Plants. 

3766. As the excellence of spinaceous plants consists in the succulency of the leaves, 
almost every thing depends on giving them a rich soil, stirring it frequently, and sup- 
plying water in dry seasons. The space they occupy in the garden is not considerable, 
say a thirtieth part ; more especially as some of them, the common spinage for example, 
often comes in as a temporary crop between rows of peas, or beans, or among cauliflowers 
and broccolis, &c. The plant of this class the most deserving of culture in the cottage 
garden, is the Swiss chard, which produces abundance of succulent, and most nutritious 
foliage. It is to be found in every cottage garden in Switzerland and the north of 
France. 

SuBSECT. 1. Sjnnage. — Spinacia oleracea, L. (Schk. Hand. iii. t. 324.) Dioec. Hex. L. - 
and Chenopodece, B. P. Ujnnard, Fr. ; Spinat, Ger. ; and Sjnnaci, Ital. 

3767. The common spinage is an annual plant, cultivated in this country since 1568, 
and probably long before ; but of what country it is a native is not certainly known ; 
some refer it to Western Asia. The leaves are large, the stems hollow, branching, and, 
when allowed to produce flowers, rising from two to three feet high. The male and fe- 
male flowers, as the name of the class imports, are produced on different plants ; the 
former come in long terminal spikes; the latter in clusters, close to the stalk at every joint. 
It is almost the only dioecious plant cultivated for culinary purposes. 

3768. Use. The leaves are used in soups ; or boiled alone, and mashed and served 
up with gravies, butter, and hard-boiled eggs. The leaves may be obtained from sowings 
in the open ground at most seasons of tiie year, but chiefly in spring, when they ar^ 
largest and most succulent. 

3769. Varieties. These are — 

The round-leaved, or smooth-seeded | The oblong triangular-leaved, or prickly seeded. 

3770. Estimate of sorts. " These varieties of spinage are adapted for culture, principally, at two differ- 
ent seasons. The round-leaved sort, of which the leaves are larger, thicker, and more juicy, is mostly 
sown in spring and summer, for young spinage in those seasons : the triangular-leaved is chiefly sown in 
autumn, to stand for winter and the following spring ; for the leaves being less succulent, it is hardier to 
stand the inclement weather : but a portion of this is acceptable, when the other sort is principally 
raised." 

3771. Summer crop. " Begin in January, if open weather, with sowing a moderate crop of the round- 
leaved. Sow a larger quantity in February ; and more fully in March. The plants presently fly to seed in 
summer, especially if they stand crowded ; it is therefore proper to sow about once in three weeks, from the 
beghining of March to the middle of April : then, every week till the middle of May : from which time, 
till the end of July, sow once a fortnight. Small crops, thus repeated, will keep a succession during the 
rest of summer and throughout autumn. A portion of the prickly seeded spinage may be sown as thought 
proper, to come in among the successive summer crops; and if drilled between lines of other vegetables, 
will encroach less than the smooth-seeded, a thing to be considered where the spare room is not of a liberal 
width." 

S772. Soil and situation. " The soil which suits any of the general summer crops will do for spinage ; 
that for the early crop should be lightest and driest. For a January sowing, allot a warm border, or the 
best-sheltered compartment. Afterwards, for all the supplies during summer, sow in an open compartment. 
"Where it is necessary to make the utmost of the ground, the spring sowings, in February, March, and 
April, may be made in single drills between wide rows of young cabbages, beans, peas, or other infant 
crops of slow growth ; or they may be made still better on spots intended to receive similar plants, including 
cauliflowers and horse-radish ; and the spinage will be off before the slower-growing crops advance consi- 
derably ; or spinage and a thin crop of radishes may be sown together; and the radishes will be drawn in 
time, to give room for the spinage." 

3773. Seed and process in sowing. " When raised by itself, spinage is generally sown broad-cast, and 
two ounces will sow a bed four feet and a half by thirty feet : but in drills one ounce will sow the same 
space. In drills, it is easier to weed and gather : let the drills be from nine to twelve inches apart. Bcdi 



G36 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



four fett wide, with small alleys, are convenient of access. Let the ground be thoroughly dug. Whether 
broad-cast or in drills, so^v thinly ; and rake or earth in about an inch deep." 

3774. Subsequent culture. " When the plants are up, showing leaves about an inch broad, clear them 
from weeds, either by hand or small hoeing ; and thin the plants where crowded (especially the broad-cast 
crops) to three inches apart ; and when advanced in growth, every other may be cut out for use, increasing 
the distance to about six inches, that the remainder may grow stocky, with large spreading leaves. The 
plants of the early and succession crops attain proper growth for gathering in April, May, and June. When 
the leaves are from two to five inches in breadth, cut the plants clean out to the bottom, or sometimes cut 
only the larger leaves. But as soon as there is any appearance of their running to seed, they may be 
dra^vn out clean as wanted." 

3775. Winter crop. " The prickly seeded, or triangular-leaved, is alone constituted to stand a severe 
winter, and the quantity of seed is the same as in the spring sowings. The main ^vinter crop should 
be sown in the first or second week of August, and a secondary one towards the end of that month, 
to stand later in the spring, until the round spinage comes in. The plants of these sowings will acquire 
proper growth and strength, and will not run the same year, nor very early in the spring, which is 
apt to be the case with crops sown sooner." 

3776. Site. " AUot a compartment of dry-lying mellow ground, with an open aspect to the winter's 
sun ; and let it be digged regularly." 

3777. Process in sowing. " In general, sow broad-cast, treading the seed down, and raking it well 
into the ground. The bed may be one continued space ; or the garden may be divided into 
beds three or four feet wide, with spade-wide alleys between them, which are convenient both in the 
culture and the gathering of the crop A portion may be sown thinly in broad shallow driUs, from 
six to twelve inches asunder. When the plants are advancing with leaves an inch broad, in September, 
they will require thinning and clearing from weeds ; which may be done either by hand or by small, 
hoeing: thin the plants to two or three inches' distance. If by" October and November the plants are 
forward in growth, with leaves two or three inches broad, some may be gathered, occasionally, in the 
larger leaves ; or, where most crowded, plants may be cut out to give tlie others room for a strong 
stocky growth, so as to be more able to endure the cold and wet in winter, and produce larger and 
thicker leaves. In this stage, clear out all weeds by hand, as any left in hoeing would grow again, 
especially in a moist season. During the winter, if the spinage advances in pretty free growth, some 
may be partially gathered as wanted, taking the larger outward leaves : the others will increase in suc- 
cession. At the end of winter, thin the plants to seven inches by seven, ten by five, or twelve by four. 
On a dry day, stir the surface of the mould, if it has been much battered by rough weather. The plants 
will reach full growth in February, March, and April, bearing, for frequent gathering, numerous clusters 
of large leaves. In April and May, the larger plants may be cut out fully for use, clean to the bottom, or 
drawn, if the ground be wanted ; as they will then soon go to seed-stalks, past useful growth ; and will 
be succeeded in May and June by the young spring-sown crops of round spinage." 

3778. To save seed. " To obtain seed of the round-leaved, leave a sufficient quantity 
6f established plants in April, May, or June, to run up in stalks; or transplant in autumn 
some of the spring-sown which have not run. To save seed of the triangular spinage, 
transplant in March some good strong plants, of the winter crop. For large supplies, 
a portion of each may be sown in February, or the first fortnight of March, to stand 
wholly for seeding. Sow each sort separate. Respecting both sides, observe, that 
they are of the class Dioecia, the male and female flowers growing separately, on two 
distinct plants. When the plants are flowering for seed, the cultivator should examine 
whether the male plants^ distinguishable by the abundant farina upon the blossoms, 
stand crowded or numerous to excess ; in which case he should pull up the superfluous 
plants, leaving a competency for fertilising the female blossoms, which else would 
prove abortive. And when the female blossoms are set, it is best to dispose of all the 
male plants, drawing tliem by hand ; which will give more room to the females to grow 
and perfect their seed. The plants rejected may be profitably given to young pigs. The 
seed ripens in July and August." (^Abercrombie,) 

SuBSECT. 2. White Beet. — Beta Cicla, L. Pent. Dig. L; and Chenopode<s, B. P 
Bette, or Poirce, Fr, ; Mangold Kraut, Ger. ; and Biettola, Ital. 

3779. The white beet is a hardy biennial plant, with leaves larger than the red beet, and 
very thick and succulent. It is a native of the sea-coasts of Spain and Portugal, and 
was introduced in 1570, and cultivated by Gerrard and Parkinson. It produces greenish 
flowers in August and September. 

3780. Use. The white beet is cultivated in gardens entirely for the leaves, which are 
boiled as spinage, or put into soups. Those of the great white, or sweet beet are 
esteemed for the midribs and stalks, which are separated from the lamina of the leaf, and 
stewed, and eaten as asparagus, under the name of chard. Tlie variety called the Man- 
gold WUrzel, Ger. (Mangold-root), is reckoned a valuable agricultural plant for feeding 
cattle, and affording sugar. 

3781. Varieties. The principal of those known in this country are — 

The common green-leaved small rooted | leaves whiter, and with white ribs and i strong white ribs and veins ; grown 

beet; the roots not thicker than a man's veins in many parts of the continent for 

thumb , The great white, or Swiss chard ; large the chard, which in taste nearly equals 

The common wnite small-rooted ; the • stalks, smaller erect leaves, with I asparagus. 

3782. Propagation and soil. It is raised from seed ; and, for a bed four feet and a half by twelve sown 
in drills, one ounce is requisite. The soil for the varieties to be used as pot-herbs, may be considerably 
stronger and richer than for the red or yellow beets, and need not be quite so deep. The plants endure 
for two years, shooting the autumn of the second ; but it is best not to depend on the shot or shoot leaves 
of the second year, but to sow at least annually. 

3783. Sowing. The white beet is generaUy sown in gardens in the beginning of March, and sometimes 
also in September, to furnish a supply of tender leaves late in the season, and early next spring. Sow 
either broad-cast, and lake in the seeds ; or in drills, six or eight inches apart for the smaller kinds, and 
ten or twelve for the larger. For the mangold, eighteen inches are not too much. 

3784. Culture. When the plants have put out four leaves, they are hoed and thinned out to from four 
inches to a foot, according to the sort A second thinning should take place a month afterwards, and the 
ground should be kept clear of weeds, and stirred once or twice during the season with a fork or pronged 



Bock I. 



NEW ZEALAND SPINAGE. 



637 



hoe. In cultivating the Swiss chard, the plants are frequently watered during summer, to promote the 
succulency of the stalks ; and in winter they are protected by litter, and sometimes earthed up, partly for 
this purpose, and partly to blanch the stalks. Fresh chards are thus obtained from August to May. 
The mangold is often transplanted, especially in field-culture, but this being foreign to our present purpose, 
we take leave of it. When the garden sorts of white beet are transplanted, the proper time is during 
moist weather in May or June. The distance from plant to plant maybe from ten to fourteen inches, 
much of the advantage of transplanting depending on the room thus afforded the plants ; together with 
the general disposition of transplanted annuals, with fusiform roots, as the turnip, carrot, &c. to throw out 
leaves and lateral radicles. 

3785. Gathering. The most succulent and nearly full-grown leaves being gathered as wanted, others 
will be thrown out in succession. The root is too coarse for table use. 

3786. To save seed. Proceed as in growing the seed of red beet. 

SuBSECT. 3. Orache, or Mountain Spinage. Atrdplex hortensis, L. (Blackw. t. 99.) 
Polyg. Moncec. L. and ChenopodecB, B. P. Arroche, Fr. ; Meldekraut, Ger. ; and 
Atrepiccy Ital. 

3787. The orache is a hardy annual, a native of Tartary, and introduced in 1548. The 
stem rises three or four feet high ; the leaves are oblong, variously shaped, and cut at the 
edges, thick, pale-green, and glaucous, and of a slightly acid flavor. It produces flowers 
of the color of the foliage in July and August. There are two varieties, the white or 
pale-green ; and the red or purple-leaved. 

3788. Use. The leaves are. used as spinage, and sometimes also the tender stalks. 
The stalks are good only while the plant is young ; but the larger leaves may be picked 
off in succession throughout the season, leaving the stalks and smaller leaves untouched, 
by which the latter will increase in size. The spinage thus procured is very tender, and 
much esteemed in France. 

3789. Culture. The orache is raised from seeds, which should be sown on a rich deep soil in August or 
September ; sow in drills from one foot to eighteen inches asunder, keep the ground clear of weeds during 
the autumn, and in spring thin the plants to four or six inches in the row. Stir the soil occasionally till 
the plants come into flower in July, when the crop may be considered over. Spring sowings, however, 
are made in places where this sort of spinage is in demand. In the market-gardens round Paris, the 
plant is often cultivated in the broad-cast way, like common spinage. 

3790. To save seed. Leave a few plants of the most tender and succulent constitutions 
to blossom, and they will produce abundance of seeds in August. 

SuBSECT. 4. Wild Spinage. — Chenopodium bonus Henricus, L. {Eng. Bot. 1033.) 
Pent. Dig. L. and Chenopodece, B. P. Anserine, Fr. ; Henkelkraut, Ger. ; and 
Anserino, Ital. 

3791. TAe i<;i7rf s/jma^-e is an indigenous perennial, common byway-sides in loamy 
soils. The stem rises a foot and a half high, is round and smooth at the base, but up- 
wards it becomes grooved and angular. The leaves are large, alternate, triangular, 
arrow-shaped, and entire on the edges. The whole plant, but especially the stalks, is 
covered with minute transparent powdery particles. 

3792. Use. While young and tender, the leaves are used as a substitute for spinage, 
for which purpose, Curtis observes, it is cultivated in Lincolnshire, in preference to the 
garden sort. Withering observes, that the young shoots, peeled and boiled, may be eaten 
as asparagus, which they resemble in flavor. 

3793. Culture. The plant may be propagated by dividing the roots ; or the seed may be " sown in March 
or April, in a small bed. In the course of the following September, in showery weather, the seedlings 
are transplanted into another bed which has been deeply dug, or rather trenched to the depth of a foot 
and a half, the roots being long and striking deep, while at the same time they are branched; so that 
each plant should have a foot or fifteen inches of space. Next season the young shoots, with their leaves 
and tops, are cut for use as they spring up, leaving perhaps one head to each plant, to keep it in vigor. 
The bed continues productive in this way for many successive years. The first spring cutting may be got 
somewhat earlier, by taking the precaution of covering the bed with any sort of litter during the severity 
cf winter." {Neill.) ■ ' 

SuBSECT. 5. New. Zealand Spinage. — Tetragonia expansa. (Plant, grass. 113.) Icos. 
'Di-Pentag. L. and Ficoidece, J. 
3794. New Zealand spinage is a half hardy annual, with numerous branches, round, 
succulent, pale-green, thick, and strong, somewhat procumbent, but elevating their ter- 
minations. The leaves are fleshy, growing alternately at small distances from each 
other, on shortish petioles ; they are of a deltoid shape, but rather elongated, being from 
two to three inches broad at the top, and from three to four inches long ; the apex is al- 
most sharp-pointed, and the two extremities of the base are bluntly rounded ; the whole 
leaf is smooth, with entire edges, dark-green above, below paler, and thickly studded 
with aqueous tubercles ; the mid-rib and veins project conspicuously on the under sur- 
face. The flowers are sessile in the alse of the leaves, small and green, and, except that 
they show their, yellow anthera; when they expand, they are very inconspicuous. The 
fruit when ripe has a dry pericarp of a rude shajJe, with four or five hornlike processes 
enclosing the seed, which is to be sown in its covering. It is a native of New Zealand, 
by the sides of woods in bushy sandy places, and though not used by the inhabitants, yet 
being considered by the naturalists who accompanied Captain Cook, as of the same 



6»8 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



nature as the chenopodi jm (see Foster, Playit. esculent., &c.), it was served to the sailors, 
boiled every day at breakfast and dinner. It was introduced here by Sir Joseph Banks in 
1772, and treated as a green-house plant ; but has lately been found to grow in the open 
garden as freely as the kidneybean or nasturtium. As a summer spinage it is as valuable as 
the orache, or perhaps more so. Every gardener knows the plague that attends the frequent 
sowing of common spinage through the warm season of the year ; without that trouble 
it is impossible to have it good, and with the utmost care it cannot always be obtained 
exactly as it ought to be (particularly when the weather is hot and dry) from the rapidity 
with which the young plants run to seed. The New Zealand spinage, if watered, grows 
freely, and produces leaves of the greatest succulency in the hottest weather. Anderson, 
one of its earliest cultivators, had only nine plants, from which he says, " I have been 
enabled to send in a gathering for the kitchen every other day since the middle of June, 
so that I consider a bed with about twenty plants quite sufficient to give a daily supply, 
if required, for a large table." 

3795. ifse. It is dressed in the same manner as common spinage, and whether boiled 
plain, or stewed, is considered by some as superior to it ; there is a softness and mildness 
in its taste, added to its flavor, which resembles that of spinage, in which it has an advan- 
tage over that herb. 

3793. Culture. The seed should be sown in the latter end of March, in a pot, which must be placed in 
a melon-frame ; the seedling plants while small should be set out singly, in small pots, and kept under the 
shelter of a cold-frame, until about the twentieth of May, when the mildness of the season will probably 
allow of their being planted out, without risk of being killed by frost. At that time a bed must be pre- 
pared for the reception of the plants, by forming a trench two feet wide, and one foot deep, which must 
be filled level to the surface with rotten dung from an old cucumbor-bed ; the dung must be covered with 
six inches of garden-mould, thus creating an elevated ridge in the middle of the bed, the sides of which 
must extend three feet from the centre. The plants must be put out three feet apart ; I planted mine at 
only "two feet distance from each other, but they were too near. In five or six weeks from the planting, 
their branches will have grown sufficiently to allow the gathering of the leaves for use. In dry seasons 
the plants will probably require a good supply of water. They put forth their branches vigorously as soon 
as they have taken to the ground, and extend before the end of the season three feet on each side from 
the centre of the bed. 

3797. In gathering for use, the young leaves must be pinched off the branches, taking care to leave the 
leading shoot uninjured ; this, with the smaller branches which subsequently arise from the alas of the 
leaves which have been gathered, will produce a supply until a late period in the year, for the plants are 
sufficiently hardy to withstand the frosts which kill nasturtiums, potatoes, and such tender vegetables. 
{Anderson, in HorU Trans, vol. iv. 492.) 

3798. To save seed. Place a plant or two in a poor soil, or train one up a wall, or 
stunt one or two in lime rubbish, or in pots sparingly watered, as in growing the pea-plant 
for seed. Or a few cuttings may be struck in autumn, and preserved through the winter 
in the green-house. 

ScTBSECT. 6. Sorrd. — Rumex, L. Hex. Trig. L. and Polygoiiece, J. Oseille, Fr. ; 
Sauerampfer, Ger. ; and Acetosa, Ital. 

3799. French sorrel, Roman sorrel, or round-leaved sorrel, is the jR. Scutatus, L. ; a 
perennial plant, a native of France and Italy, and cultivated in tliis country since 1596. 
The leaves are somewhat hastate, blunt, and entire ; glaucous, smooth, soft, and fleshy. 
The trailing stems rise from a foot to a foot and a half high, and the flowers, of a greenish- 
white, appear in June and July. 

3800. Garden-sorrel is the R. acetosa, L. [Eng. Bot. 127.), an indigenous perennial, 
common in meadows and moist situations. The root-leaves have long foot-stalks, are 
naiTow-shaped, blunt, and marked with two or three large teeth at the base ; the upper 
leaves are sessile and acute. There are two varieties of this species, the broad-leaved, 
and the long-leaved, both in cultivation, and the fonner esteemed the most succulent. 

3801. Use. Both sorts are used in soups, sauces, and salads ; and very generally by 
the French and Dutch, as a spinage ; in the latter way it is often used along with herb- 
patience, to which it gives an excellent flavor, as well as to turnip-tops. 

3802. Culture and soil. " The finer plants are propagated from seed, but good plants can be obtained by 
parting the roots, which is the most expeditious way. The native varieties flourish both in humid meadows 
and sandy pastures : their roots strike deep. The trailing round-leaved requires a dry soil." 

3803. Bi/ seed. " Sow in any of the spring months, best in March. Drop the seed in small drills, six or 
eight inches asunder. When the plants are one or two inches high^ thin them to three or four inches 
apart: when advanced to be a little stocky, in summer or autumn, transplant a quantity into another bed, 
from six to twelve inches apart, if of the first two sorts : leaving those in the seed-bed with the same 
intervals. But leave almost double that distance for the round-leaved creeping kind. They will come 
in for use the same year." 

3804. By offsets. Part the roots in spring or autumn. Either detach a quantity of offsets, or divide 
full plants into rooted slips : plant them at a foot distance, and water them. 

3805. General treatment. As these herbs, however originated, run up in stalks in summer, cut them 
down occasionally ; and cover the stool with a little fresh mould, to encourage the production of large 
leaves on the new stem. Fork and clean the ground between the plants every autumn or spring ; and 
keep it clear from weeds. If, in two or three years, they have dwindled in growth, bearing small leaves, 
let them be succeeded by a new plantation. 

3806. To save seed. " Permit some old plants to run up in stalks all the summer : 
they will ripen seed in autumn." (^Abercrombie.) 



Book 1. 



ALLIACEOUS PLANTS. " 



639 



SuBSECT. 7. Herb- Patience, or Patience-Dock. Rumex Patientia, L. {Blackw. 349.) 
Hex. Dig. L. and Polygone<B, J. Rhubarbe des Moines, Fr. j Gartenampfer, Ger. ; 
and Romice, Ital. 

3807. T/je herb-patience is a hardy perennial plant, a native of Italy, introduced in 
1573. The leaves are broad, long, and acute-pointed, on reddish foot-stalks; the stems, 
where allowed to spring up, rise to the height of four or five feet. It produces its 
whitish-green flowers in June and July. 

3808. Use. " In old times, garden-patience was much cultivated as a spinage. It 
is now very much neglected, partly perhaps on account of the proper mode of using it 
not being generally known. The leaves rise early in the spring ; they are to be cut 
while tender, and about a fourth part of common sorrel is to be mixed with them. In 
this way patience-dock is much used in Sweden, and may be safely recommended as 
forming an excellent spinage dish." {Neill.) 

3809. Culture. Garden-patience is easily raised from seeds, which may be sown in lines in the manner 
of common spinage, or white beet, and thinned out and treated afterwards like the latter plant. If the 
plants be regularly cut over two or three times in the season, they continue in a healthy productive state 
for several years. 

Sect. V. Alliaceous Plants. 

3810. The alliaceous esculents are of great antiquity and universal cultivation. No 
description of useful British garden is without the onion ; and few in other parts of the 
world, without that bulb, or garlic. They require a rich, and rather strong soil, and 
warm climate, thriving better in Spain and France than in England. The onion and 
leek crops may occupy a twentieth of the open compartments in most kitchen-gardens j 
and a bed of five or seven square yards in those of the cottager. 

SuBSECT. 1. Onion. — Allium Cejya, L. Hexandria Monogynia, L. and Asphodelece, J. 
Oignon, Fr. ; Zwiebel, Ger. ; and Cipola, Ital. 

38 11. The common bulbous onion is a biennial plant, supposed to be a native of Spain ; 
though as Neill observes, " neither the native country, nor the date of its introduction 
into this island, are correctly known." It is distinguished from other alliaceous plants 
by its large fistular leaves, swelling stalk, coated bulbous root, and large globular head 
of flowers, which expand the second year in June and July. 

3812. Use. The use of the onion, in its different stages of growth, when young, in 
salads, and when bulbing and mature, in soups and stews, is familiar to every class of 
society in Europe ; and for these purposes has been held in high estimation from time 
immemorial. 

3813. The varieties ascertained to be best deserving of culture are as follows : — 



The silver-skinned ; flat, middle-sized, and 

sluning ; chiefly used for pickling 
Early silver-skinned ; a subvariety of the 
other, smaller, and excellent for pick- 
ling 

Yellow ; small, globular, strong-flavored, 

and good for pickling 
Two-bladed ; flat, small, brownish-green, 
has few leaves, ripens early, and keeps 
well ; one of the best for pickling 
True Portugal onion of the fruiterers ; 
large, flatly globular, mild; does not 
keep well 

Spanish, Reading, white Portugal, Cam- 
bridge, Evesham, or sandy onion ; large, 
flat, white tinged with green, mild, 
but does not keep very well ; good for 
a general crop, much cultivated round 
Reading 

Strasburgh, Dutch, or Flemders onion, the 
seed being generally procured from 
thence,; or Essex onion, when the seed 
is saved in that county; oval, large, 
and light-red, tinged with green ; har- 
dy, keeps well, but of strong flavor ; 
much the most generally cultivated in 
Britain 

Deptford onion ; middle-sized^ globular, 
pale-brown ; a subvariety of the Stras- 
burgh, and very generally cultivated 
Globe ; large, globular, pale-brown, tinged 
with red, mild, and keeps well ; very 
popular among gardeners 

3814. Estimate of sorts. The Strasburgh is most generally adopted for principal crops, and next the 
Deptford and globe. The Portugal and Spanish yield large crops for early use, and the silver-skinned 
and two-bladed are reckoned the best for pickling. The potatoe-onion is planted in some places as an 
auxiliary crop, but is considered inferior to the others in flavor : the Welsh onion is sometimes sown 
for early spring-drawing. 

3815. Soil. The onion, " to attain a good size, requires rich mellow ground on a dry sub-soil. If the 
soil be poor or exhausted, recruit it with a compost of fresh loam and well consumed dung, avoiding to 
use stable-dung in a rank unreduced state. Turn in the manure to a moderate depth ; and in digging 
the ground, let it be broken fine. Grow picklers in poor light ground, to keep them small." The mar- 
ket-gardeners at Hexham sow their onion-seed on the same ground for twenty or more years in succes- 
sion, but annually manure the soil. After digging and levelling the ground, the manure, in a very 
rotten state, is spread upon it, the onion-sced sown upon the manure, and covered with earth from the 
alleys, and the crops arc abundant and excellent in quality. {Hortr Trans, i. 121.) 



James's keeping ; large, pyramidal, brown, 
hardy, strong in flavor, and keeps well : 
originated some years ago by James, a 
market-gardener, in Lambeth Marsh. 

Pale-red ; middle-sized, flattened, globe 
shape, pale-red, strong flavor, keeps 
well 

Blood-red, Dutch blood-red, St. Thomas s 
onion; middle-sized, flat, very hardy, 
deep red, strong flavor, and keeps par- 
ticularly well ; much grown in Wales 
and Scotland: in the London market 
it is esteemed for its diuretic qualities 

Tripoli ; the largest onion grown ; oval, 
light red, tinged with green and brown, 
soft and mild, but does not keep long 
after it is taken up 

Lisbon ; large, globular, smooth, bright, 
white, and thin skin, tardy iti ripening 
but hardy, much used for autumnal 
sowing ; seed generally obtEiined from 
the south of France 

Welsh onion, or ciboule { Allium Jistulosum, 
L ) ; a native of Siberia, hardy, strong in 
flavor, but does not bulb ; sown in 
autumn for drawing in spring 

Underground or potatoe onion ; multiplies 
itself by the formation of young bulbs 
on the parent root, and produces an 
ample crop below the surface ; ripens 
early, but does not keep beyond Feb- 
ruary ; flavor strong 



Tree or bulb-bearing onion {Allium 
cepa, var- vivipara), Oignon d Egypte, 
Fr.; originally from Canada, where the 
climate being too cold for onions to 
flower and seed, when they are al- 
lowed to throw up flower-stalks, the 
flower becomes viviparous, and bears 
bulbs instead of flowers ; here it re- 
tains the same habit. It is more an 
object of curiosity than use, though, 
in some parts of Wales, Milne informs 
us (Hort. Trans, iii. 419.) ; the cauline 
bulbs are planted, and produce ground- 
onions of a considerable size, while 
the stem supplies a succession of 
bulbs for next year's planting. It is 
considered stronger, and to go farther 
as seasoning than other onions. {Hort. 
Trans, iii. 369. 

Soallion ; a term generally given to the 
strong green tops of onions in the 
spring which do not bulb, or to the 
snoots from bulbs of the preceding year. 
Miller mentions it as a distinct sort; 
some consider it the Welsh onion ; and 
Milne thinks it may not improbably 
be the hollow leek, a species of Allium 
grown in Pembrokeshire and other 
parts of South Wales, with roots in 
clusters like that of shallots. 

(Hort. Tram, iii, 416.) 



640 PRACTICE OF GARDENING Part III. 

3816. Seed and times qf sowing. When onions are to be drawn young, two oun'ces of seed will be re. 
quisite for a bed four feet by twenty-four ; but when to remain for bulbing, one ounce will suffice for a 
bed five feet by twenty-four feet. 

3817. The course of culture recommended by Abercrombie for the summer, and what he calls winter- 
laid-by crops, is as follows : " Allot an open compartment, and lay it out in beds from three to five feet in 
width. Sow broad-cast, equally over the rough surface, moderately thick, bed and bed separately, and 
rake in the seed lengthwise each bed, in a regular manner. When the plants are three or four inches 
high, in May and June, let them be timely cleared from weeds, and let the principal crop be tliinned, 
either by hand, or with a small two-inch hoe ; thinning the plants to intervals of from three to five inches 
in the main crops designed for full bulbing ; or, some beds may remain moderately thick for drawing 
young, by successive thinnings, to the above distance. For the Spanish, from seed obtained immediately 
from Spain, the final distance should be six or seven inches. Keep the whole very clear from weeds, in 
their young and advancing state. Tlie plants will begin bulbing a little in June ; more fully in July ; 
and be fully grown in August to large bulbs. In July or August, when the leaves begin to dry at the 
points and turn yellow, lay the stems down close to the ground, bending them about two inches up the 
neck, which promotes the ripening of the bulb, particularly in wet or backward seasons. Tlie crop of 
full bulbers will be ready to take up towards the middle of August. When the necks shrink, and the 
leaves decay, puU them wholly up in due time : spread them on a compartment of dry ground, in the 
full sun, to dry and harden completely, turning them every two or three days ; and in a week or fort- 
night they will be ready to house. Clear off the grossest part of the leaves, stalks, and fibres ; then 
deposit the bulbs in some close dry apartment, in which sometimes turn them over, and pick out any 
that decay ; and they will thus keep sound and good, all winter and spring, till May foUowjng." 

3818. Transplanting onions. This practice was recommended by Worlidge in his Systcma Horticulture, 
published early in the 17th century, and has lately been revived by Knight, Warre, Macdonald, and 
others. It may be observed, that it has been practised, for an unknown period, in some of the market- 
gardens near London, known by the name of the " Gardens of the Neat's Houses." Knight observes, 
that every bulbous-rooted plant, and indeed every plant that lives longer than one year, generates in one 
season the sap or vegetable blood which composes the leaves and roots of the succeeding spring. " This 
reserved sap is deposited in, and composes, in a great measure, the bulb ; and the quantity accumulated, 
as well as the period required for its accumulation, varies greatly in the same species of plant, under 
more or less favorable circumstances. Thus the onion, in the south of Europe, acquires a much larger 
size during the long and warm summers of Spain and Portugal, in a single season, than in the colder cli- 
mate of England J but under the following mode of culture, which I have long practised, two summers 
in England produce nearly the effect of one in Spain or Portugal, and the onion assumes nearly the form 
and size of those thence imported. Seeds of the Spanish or Portugal qnion are sown at the usual period 
in the spring, very thickly, and in poor soil ; generally under the shade of a fruit-tree ; and in such situ- 
ations the bulbs, in the autumn, are rarely found much to exceed the size of a large pea. These are 
then taken from the ground, and preserved till the succeeding spring, when they are planted at equal dis- 
tances from each other, and they aflTord plants which differ from those raised immediately from seed, 
only in possessing much greater strength and vigor, owing to the quantity of previously generated sap 
being much greater in the bulb than in the seed. The bulbs, thus raised, often exceed considerably five 
inches in diameter, and being more mature, they are with more certainty, preserved in a state of perfect 
soundness, through the winter, than those raised from seed in a single season." 

3819. West has tried the above mode, and found it perfectly successful. (Hort. T)-ans. iv. 139.) Brown, of 
Perth, has practised transplanting onions for upwards of twenty years ; all the difference between his mode 
and that of Knight and the Neat's Houses' gardeners, is that, instead of sowing under the shade of trees, 
he picks out all the small onions, from the size of a pea to that of a filbert, from his general crop. If the sown 
crops fail, he can always trust to the transplanted crop as a reserve. [Neill, in Encyc. Brit. art. Hort.) , 

3820. James transplants either autumn-sown onions, or such as are forwarded by a hot-bed in spring, 
in drills which have been dunged, by which he considers a larger crop may be obtained with less dung than 
by the broad-cast mode of dunging. {Hort Trans, iv. 130 ) 

3821 . Warre states that the onion is also transplanted in Portugal, and the general practice is as follows : 
the seed is sown " very thinly, in November or December, on a moderate hot-bed, in a warm situation, 
with a few inches of rich light loam upon it, and the plants protected from frost by mats and hoops. In 
April or May, when they are about the size of a large swan's quill, they are transplanted on a rich light 
loam, well manured with old rotten dung. Tlie mode of transplanting is particular. The plants are laid 
flat, about nine inches asunder, each way, in quincunx, the beard of the root, and part only of the plant, 
lightly covered with very rich mould, well mixed with two thirds of good old rotten dung. This compost 
is slightly pressed down on the plant ; water is given when the weather is dry, until the plants have taken 
root. Subsequently, the earth is occasionally broken around them, by shght hoeing, in which operation 
care is taken not to wound the bulb. Weeding is diligently attended to, and the watering continued, ac- 
cording to the state of the weather. In Portugal, the means of irrigation are easy, the effects of which 
are particularly beneficial to the onion ; for, by letting the water filter, or pass through small heaps of 
dung, placed in the alleys of the beds, a very rich liquid flows in upon the plants. The dung, as it is 
exhausted, or washed away, should be renewed ; and the water must be checked in its current, so that 
it may gently spread over the surface." {Hort. Trans, iii. 68.) 

3822. Macdonald's practice is noticed and approved of by Warre. " He sows in February, sometimes 
on a slight hot-bed, or merely under a glass frame ; and between the beginning of April and the middle 
of the month, according to the state of the weather, he transplants in drills about eight inches asunder, 
and at the distance of four or five inches from each other in the row. The bulbs thus enjoying the great 
and well known advantages of having the surface-earth frequently stirred, swell to a much larger size than 
those not transplanted; while in firmness and flavor they are certainly not inferior to foreign onions" 
(^Caled. Hort. Mem. iii. 68.) 

3823. Wftatever plan of transplanting spring-sown onions may he adopted, care should be taken to keep 
the incipient bulb above ground ; and in the case of planting autumn-formed bulbs in spring, they should 
be covered as slightly and loosely as possible, otherwise, in neither case, wiU the bulbs attain a satisfactory 
magnitude. ' 

3824. Culture of a winter-standijig crop to be drawn for use the succeeding spring. " Allot a soil 
rather more light and sandy for the summer crop, on a sub-soil a^ least equally dry. The compartment 
especially for any of the biennial kinds, should lie warm and sheltered. The beds may be three or four 
feet wide, runnmg parallel to the best aspect. The medium time for the principal sowing falls about the 
seventh of August ; and for a secondary crop, near the 25th, Sow the bulbing sorts and the Welsh peren- 
nial separately ; distribute the seed pretty thickly. If the soil be dry and hght, tread down the seed evenly 
along the surface of each bed, and then rake it in neatly. When the plants are come up, one, two, or 
three inches, carefully hand-weed in time, before any rising weeds spread : not thinning the plants, 
because they should remain thick, for their chance in winter, and to be by degrees drawn thinningly for 
use m salads and otherwise; but reserve a principal supply to remain till spring. Observe, the Welsh 
onion, m particular, commonly dies down to the ground about mid-winter; but the root-part, remaining 
who ly sound sends up a new vigorous steih in February and March. At the opening of spring, let thi 
whole of both sorts be well cleared froni weeds ; they wiU continue fit to draw young, durinf all the 
spring months, till May ; then let some of the bulbous kinds be thinned, to remain for early bulbing in 
June and July; but as they will soon after shoot up in stalk, they are chiefly for present use, notbeine 
eligible as keepmg-onions." ■' »^ . » • 



Book I. 



LEEK. 



641 



S825. Lifting and preserving the general crop of onions. This, according to Nicol, should not be delayed 
after the beginning or middle of September. When taken up, they are to be spread thin on the ground ; 
*' but if the weather be wet, they had better be removed to a gravel walk, or a space purposely covered 
with sand or gravel, in the full sun. Turn them over once or twice a-day, until they are thoroughly dried, 
and then store them in a well aired loft, &c. ; here still turn them occasionally, if they lie any^vise thick ; or 
may string them up by the tails, or hang them in nets. If they are not intended to be strung, the tails 
and outer husks should be displaced before housing them, and the latter at all events ; that is, just as 
much as comes easily off in rubbing. The manner of stringing them is this : take in your hand three or 
four by the tails ; tie them hard with a new strand of matting, or a bit of packthread ; place on two or 
three more onions ; lap the thread once or twice round their tails ; place more onions, which also lap 
hard, and so on. In this manner may be made a string (as it is called), or bunch, of a yard in length, or 
more; which by being hung up in a dry well aired place, free from frost, is an excellent way of keeping 
onions." In Portugal, " when the onions are ripe," Warre observes, " they are drawn up out of the 
ground, and a twist is given to the top, so as to bend it down. They are left on the ground to season, 
before they are housed ; then, immediately platted with dry straw into ropes or strings, of twenty-five 
each, and hung up to dry ; they are not permitted to sweat in a heap. Their keeping well depends 
greatly upon the weather being dry and favorable, when they are brought into the house, and also upon 
their being carefully handled, and not bruised. In this country, I have practised, with much success, 
searing the roots with a hot iron, for the purpose of preserving the onions, which checks their sprouting, 
and they should be kept in a dry airy place." 

3826. To save seed. " Select some of the largest, well housed, sound, firm bulbs, 
either in October, the beginning of November, or in February. Draw drills three or 
four inches deep, either a single row, or two or three rows together, a foot asunder ; in 
which plant the onions, six, ten, or twelve inches apart, and earth in about three inches. 
In planting double or treble rows, allow an interval of two feet between each bed of two 
or three rows, to admit of going in, both to place stakes and horizontal lines for the sup- 
port of the seed -stems, and to cut down weeds. The plants will shoot up in stalks two 
or three feet liigh, producing each a large head of seed, which will ripen in August or 
September." 

3827. Culture of the 2'>otaloe-onion. This variety, erroneously supposed to have been 
brought from Egypt by the British array about 1805, was grown in Driver's nursery in 
1796, and has been known in Devonshire for upwards of twenty years. It is thus cul- 
tivated at Arundel Castle, by Maher. Having thoroughly prepared the ground, and 
formed it into beds four feet wide, " I draw lines the whole length, three to each bed, and 
with the end of the rake handle, make a mark (not a drill) on the surface ; on this mark 
I place the onions, ten inches apart; I then cover them vnth leaf-mould, rotten dung, or 
any other light compost, just so that the crowns appear exposed. Nothing more is neces- 
sary to be done until they shoot up their tops ; then, on a dry day, they are earthed up, 
like potatoes, and kept free from weeds until they are taken up. In the west of England, 
where this kind of onion is much cultivated, I understand that it is the practice to plant 
on the shortest day, and take up on the longest. The smallest onions used for planting 
swell, and become very fine and large, as well as yield offsets ; the middle-sized and 
larger bulbs produce greater clusters." {Hort. Trans. Mi. 305.) 

3828. Z)2/moni^ states [Hart. Trans, iii. 306.), that in Devonshire it is planted in 
rows twelve inches apart, and six inches' distance in the row ; that the plants are earthed 
up as they grow, and that the smaller bulbs yield a greater increase than the larger. A 
similar practice is adopted by some Scotch cultivators. {Caled. Hort. Mem. i. 343. and 
iv. 216.) 

3829. Wedgewood does not earth up, and finds his bulbs acquire a much larger size 
than when that practice is adopted. {Hort. Trans, iii. 403.) The fact is, as we have 
observed in generalising on the subject of earthing up (8233.), surface-bulbs, as the onion, 
turnip, &c., are always prevented from attaining their full size by that operation, what- 
ever they may gain in other respects, 

SuBSECT. 2. Leek. — Allium 2'>orrum, L. {Blackw. t. 421.) Hexan. Monog. L. and 
Asphodelecs, B. P. Poireau, Fr. ; Lauch, Ger. ; and Poro, Ital. 

3830. The leek is a hardy biennial, a native of Switzerland, and introduced in 1562. 
The stem rises three feet, and is leafy at bottom, the leaves an inch wide. The flowers 
appear in May, in close, very large balls, or purplish peduncles. The leek is mentioned 
by Tusser ; but was, no doubt, known in this country long before his time. Worlidge, 
speaking of Wales, says, " I have seen the greater part of a garden there stored vv-ith leeks, 
and a part of the remainder with onions and garlic." 

3831. Use. The whole plant is used in soups and stews ; but the blanched stem is 
most esteemed. Leeks formerly constituted an ingredient in the dish called porridge, 
which some suppose to be derived from the Latin ^jorrww. 

3832. The varieties are — 

The narrow -leaved, or Flanders leek ! The Scotclr, or flag, or Musselburgh I The broad-leaved, or tall London leek. 
I leek I 

S8S3. Propagation. From seed ; and for a bed, four feet wide by eight in length, one ounce is requisite. 

S834. Soil and site. The soil should be light and rich, lying on a dry sub-soil. A rank soil does not 
suit it, so that when manure is necessary, well reduced dung, mixed with road-drift, is better than dung 
alone. The situation should be open. Let the ground be dug in the previous autumn or winter ready for 
sowing in spring. For the principal crop, allot beds four or five feet wide. A small crop may be sown 



tS42 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



thinly with a main crop of onions^ and when the latter are drawn off, the leeks will have room for full 
growth. 

3835. Times of sowing. A small first crop, or the subordinate crop in the onion-bed, may be sown at 
the end of February, if the weather be mild, and the ground in a dry state ; but it is better not to sow the 
main supply till the course of March ; or first week of April. Tt is eligible to sow a secondary crop at the 
end of Apiil or beginning of May, for a late succession in winter and the following spring. 

3836. Course of culture. When the plants are three or four inches high, in May or June, weed them 
clean, and thin where too crowded. Water well in dry hot weather, to bring the plants forward. The 
leek is much improved in size by transplanting ; those designed for which will be fit to remove when from 
six to ten inches high, from June till August. For this purpose, thin out a quantity regularly from the 
seed-bed, either in showery weather, or after watering the ground : trim the long weak tops of the leaves 
and the root-fibres ; and plant them, by dibble, in rows from nine to twelve inches asunder, by six or eight 
inches in the row ; inserting them neaily down to the leaves, or with the neck-part mostly into the ground, 
to whiten it a proportionate length. Press the earth to the fibres with the dibber, but leave the stem as 
loose as possible, and as it were standing in the centre of a hollow cylinder. Give water, if the weather 
be dry. Those remaining in the seed-bed, thin to six or eight inches' distance. Keep the whole clear 
from weeds. In hoeing, loosen the ground about the plants, to promote their free vigorous growth. Some 
plant in hollow drills, and earth up as in celery-culture, which produces very large stems. The main 
crops will attain a mature useful size in September, October, and November ; and continue in perfection 
all winter and the following spring. When frost is expected, a part may be taken up, and laid in sand. 
The late-sown crop will continue till May, without running to stalk. 

3837. To save seed. Transplant some best full plants, in February or the beginning 
of mareh, into a sunny situation, or in a row near a south fence. They will shoot in 
summer, in single tall seed-stalks. Support them, as necessary, with stakes ; and they 
will produce ripe seed in September. Cut the ripe heads with part of the 5talk to each ; 
tie two or three together, and hang up under cover, to dry and harden the seed thoroughly, 
when it may be rubbed out, cleaned, and put by for future service. {Abercrombie. ) 

SuBSECT. 3. Chive. — Allium Schcenojrrasum, L. {Eng. JBot. 2438.) Hex, Monog, 1j. 
and AsphodelecB, B. P. Civette, Fr. ; Binsenlanch, Ger. ; and Cipoletta, Ital. 

3838. The chive, or cive, is a hardy perennial plant, a native of Britain, and found in 
meadows and pastures, though but rarely. The leaves rise from many small bulbous 
roots connected in bunches ; are awl-shaped, thread-like, and produced in tufts. The 
flowers are white, tinged with reddish-purple, and appear on round stalks in June. 

3839. Use. Cliives, when gathered, are cut or shorn by the surface, and on tliis ac- 
count are generally named in the plural. The foliage is employed as a salad ingredient 
in spring, being esteemed milder than onions or scallions. Occasionally the leaves and 
roots are taken together, slipped to the bottom singly in small separate cibols, in lieu of 
young onions in the spring for salads. They are also used as a seasoning to omelets, 
soups, &c. 

3840. Culture. Chives may be planted in any common soil and situation. The plant is propagated by 
slips ; or by dividing the ipots in the spring or autumn. Plant them in any bed or border, from eight to 
twelve inches apart ; they will soon increase into large bunches. In gathering the leaves for use, cut 
them close, and others will shoot up in succession. A bed lasts three or four years ; after which period 
it must be renewed, by dividing the roots. 

SuBSECT. 4. Garlic. — Allium sativum, L. {Moris, s. 4. t. 15. f. 9.) Hexandria Monogij- 
nia, L. and Asphodelece, B. P. Ail, Fr. ; Knoblauch, Ger. ; and Aglio, Ital. 

3841. The garlic is a hardy perennial bulbous-rooted plant, growing naturally in 
Sicily and the south of France. The leaves are linear, long, and narrow. The bulb is 
composed of a dozen or fifteen subordinate bulbs, called cloves. It flowers in June and 
July, and has been cultivated in this country since 1548. 

3842. Use. It is cultivated for the sake of the bulb, which is used in various kinds 
of dishes, being in general introduced only for a short period into the dish v.'hile cooking, 
and withdrawn when a sufficient degree of flavor has been communicated. It is much 
more used in foreign, and especially in Italian, cookery than in ours. It is occasionally 
also prescribed in medicine. 

3843 Culture. Garlic is propagated by planting the cloves on subdivisions of the bulb, and prefers 
a light dry soil, rich, but not recently dunged. In February, March, or beginning of April, havin"- 
some large full bulbs, divide them into separate cloves, and plant them singly in beds,' in rows lengthwise. 
Set them from six to nine inches asunder, two or three inches deep, either in drills or in holes made with 
a blunt-ended dibble. In placing the cloves in drills, thrust the bottom a httle into the ground and earth 
theniover the proper depth. The plants will soon come up: keep them clear from weeds. The bulbs 
•will be full-grown in July or beginning of August." 

_ 3844. Taking the crop. " The maturity of the bulbs is discoverable by the leaves changing yellowish, 
m a decaying state ; when they may be taken wholly up. Continue the stalky part of the leaves to each 
root : spread them in the sun to dry and harden, and then tie them in bunches by the stalks, and house 
them to keep for use, as wanted; they will remain good till next spring and summer. If, in their ad- 
vancing growth, some are required for present use, before attaining maturity, a few of the early planting 
^" ^" permitting the general supply to attain full growth as above." {Aber- 

SuBSECT. 5. Shallot. ^Allium ascalonium, L. {Mor. His. s. 4. t. 14. f. 3.) Hexan- 
dria Monogynia. L. and- Asphodelece, B. P. Echalote, Fr. ; Schalotte, Ger.: and 
Scalogni, Ital. 

3845. The shallot is a bulbous-rooted perennial, a native of Palestine, found, as the 
trivial name imports, near Ascalon. Some old authors denominate it the -barren onion. 



Book I. 



ASPARAGINOUS PLANTS, 



643 



from tlie circumstance of its seldom sending up a flower-stalk. The roots separate into 
cloves, like those of garlic ; and the leaves rise in tufts like those of the chive, but larger. 
The flavor of the bruised plant is milder than any of the cultivated alliaceous tribe. 

3846. Use. The cloves are used for culinary purposes, in the manner of garlic and 
onions. In a raw state, cut small, it is often used as sauce to steaks and chops ; and 
sometimes a clove or two is put in winter salads. The roots become mature in July and 
August, and, dried and laid in store, are in season till the following spring. 

3847. Culture. The shallot is propagated by dividing the clustered root into separate offsets. These 
are to be planted in February, or early in March, or in October and November. Planting in autumn is 
generally preferred as producing the best bulbs ; but great care must be taken that much wet do not reach 
the roots in winter. Abercrombie directs to " lay out some light rich ground, in beds four feet wide, 
and in rows extending along these, to plant the offsets six inches apart, either in drills two inches deep, 
or inserted to that depth by the dibber, or with the finger and thumb." Nicol advises not to dung land 
intended for shallots, as rendering them liable to the attacks of maggots and insects : a very common 
complaint of gardeners. 

3848. Machray, at Errol, {Cal. Hort. Mem. i. 275.) finds soot mixed with the manure given to shallot- 
beds effectual in preventing the appearance of maggots ; while the roots were improved in size. 

3849. Henderson, of Delvine, {Caled. Mem. vol. i. 199.) to prevent the maggot, picks out the very 
smallest shallot-roots for planting; manures the ground with well rotted dung or house-ashes. He plants 
about tl>e middle of October, as recommended by Marshal, and never has had the roots injured by the 
maggot in the smallest degree. " Autumn planting," he says, " is the whole secret." To prove this, he 
planted some roots in spring, only seven feet distance from those planted in autumn ; and while the latter 
were untouched, the former were destroyed by these insects. The smallness of the roots planted, prevents 
Ihem from growing mouldy. The most intense frost does not hurt them. From 204 cloves planted in 
October, 1810, he lifted, in August, 1811, above 5000 good clean roots, measuring in general about three 
and a half inches in circumference. 

3850. Knight, to guard against the maggots in shallots, tried planting the bulb on the surface, instead 
of burying it two or three inches in the soil ; and the experiment was attended with such perfect success, 
that he confidently recommends this mode of culture. He places a rich soil beneath the roots, and raises 
the mould on each side to support them till they become firmly rooted. This mould is then removed by 
the hoe and water from the rose of a watering-pot, and the bulbs, in consequence, are placed wholly out 
of the ground. " The growth of those plants," he adds, " now so closely resembled that of the common 
onion, as not to be readily distinguished from it ; till the irregularity of form, resulting from the nume- 
rous germs within each bulb, became conspicuous. The forms of the bulbs, however, remained perma- 
nently different from all I had ever seen of the same species, being much more broad and less long ; and 
the crop was so much better in quality, as well as much more abundant, that I can confidently recommend 
the mode of culture adopted to every gardener." {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 98.) 

3851. Taking and preserving the crop. When the leaves begin to decay, the bulbs are fit to be taken 
up, when they should be dried and housed, either on the floor of the root-loft, in nets hung from the 
roof, or in strings, as recommended for onions.* Should any roots be wanted during the growth of the 
crop, a few may be taken up young in June afid July for immediate consumption. 

SuBSECT. 6. Rocambole. — Allium Scorodoprasum, L. (Plenck. Ic. t. 256.) Hexan. 
Monog. L. and Asphodelece, B. P. Ail (VEsjmgne, Fr. ; Rockenhollun, Ger. ; and 
Scorodopraso, Ital. 

3852. The rocambole is a perennial plant, a native of Denmark, and mentioned by 
Gerrard as cultivated in 1596. It has compound bulbs, like garlic, but the cloves 
are smaller. These are produced at the roots, and also, though of a smaller size, on the 
stem, which rises two feet high, and produces the bulbs in the axillas of the leaves in 
July and August. 

3853. Use. The cloves, both of the stalk and root, are used in the manner of garlic 
or shallot, and nearly for the same purposes. It is considered milder than garlic. 

3854. Culture. It is propagated by planting the separated cloves of the root-bulb, or occasionally the 
cloves of the head, in February, March, or April. A small bed, or a few rows, will be sufficient for a 
family garden. Plant it either by dibble, or in drills, in rows six inches apart, and two inches deep. The 
plants shoot up, each in a slender stalk, contorted at top, and terminated by a small head of cloves, which, 
as well as the root, will acquire full growth in July or August, for immediate use ; or to be taken up, and 
spread to dry, tied in bunches, and housed for future consumption. 

Sect. VI. Asp)araginous Plants. 

3855. The asparaginous class of esculents may be considered as comparatively one of 
luxury. It occupies a large proportion of the gentleman's garden, often an eighth part ; 
but does not enter into that of the cottager. A moist atmosphere is congenial to the chief 
of them, especially to asparagus and sea-kale, which are sea-shore plants, and are brought 
to greater perfection in our islands than any where else, excepting perhaps in Holland. 

SuBSECT. 1. Asparagus. — Asparagus officinalis, L. (Eng. Bat. t. 339.) Hex. Monog. L. 
and Asphodelece, B. P. Asperge, Fr. ; Spargel, Ger. ; and Asjmrago, Ital. 

3856. The asparagus is a perennial plant, found in stony or gravelly situations near 
the sea, but not very common. It grows near Bristol, in the Isle of Portland, and 
sparingly in Seaton Links, near Edinburgh. The roots consist of many succulent 
round knobs, forming together a kind of tuber, from which numerous erect round 
stems arise Avith alternate branches, subdivided into alternate twigs, not unlike a 
larch fir-tree in miniature. The leaves are very small, linear, and bristle-shaped ; the 
flowers nodding, of a yellowish-green, and odorous, are produced from June to August ; 
and the berries of a yellowish-red : the v/hole plant has a very elegant appearance. 
Many of the steppes in the south of Russia and Poland are covered with this plant, which 



644 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



is there eaten by the liorses and oxen as grass. In its native state, it is so dwarfish in 
appearance, even when in flower, that none but a botanist attending to the minute struc- 
ture, would, consider it as the same species with our cultivated plant. This vegetable is 
cultivated extensively for the London market ; and it is estimated, that in the parish of 
Mortlake alone, there are generally about eighty acres under this crop. One grower 
there, Biggs, has sometimes had forty acres under asparagus at one time. A great deal 
is also gi'own near Deptford, and one grower there, Edmonds, has had eighty acres en- 
tirely under this crop ; — a thing, Neill observes, wliich must appear almost incredible to 
those who have not witnessed the loads of this article daily heaped on the green-stalls of 
the metropolis for the space of nearly three months. Asparagus, tliis author adds, was 
a favorite of the Romans ; and they seem to have possessed a very strong-growing variety, 
as Pliny mentions, that, abovit Ravenna, three shoots would weigh a pound ; with us, six 
of the largest would be required. It is much praised by Cato ; and as he enlarges on the 
mode of culture, it seems probable that the plant had but newly come into use. In this 
country, Dutch asparagus was preferred in the end of the 17th century ; and this variety 
is still distinguished for affording the thickest shoots. In a garden formed at Dunbar, 
in the very beginning of the 18th fcentury, by provost Fall (a name well known in the 
mercantile world), asparagus was for many years cultivated with uncommon success. 
The variety used, was the red-topped, and it was brought from Holland. The soil of the 
garden is little better than sea-sand. This was trenched two feet deep, and a thick layer 
of sea-weed, was put in the bottom of the trench, and well pressed together and beat down. 
This was the only manure used, either at the first planting, or at subsequent dressings. 
There was an inexhaustible supply of the article generally at hand, as the back-door of 
the garden opens to the sea-shore. (Ed. Encyc. art. Hort.) 

3857. Use. The esculent part is the early shoots or buds, when three or four inches 
high, and partially emerged from the ground in May and June. They are in great 
esteem in Britain, and on the continent ; and this plant has, in consequence, been culti- 
vated for an unknown period. In Paris it is much resorted to by the sedentary operative 
classes, when they are troubled with symptoms of gravel or stone. 

3858. Varieties. There are two varieties cultivated : viz. 

[ The red-topped ; rising with a large head, full, close, and 1 The Battersea, Deptford, Large Gravesend, Large Reading, 
of a reddish-green Dutch, Cork, and Early Mortlake are subvarieties. 

' The green-topped ; rising with a smaller head, not generally 
so plump and close, but reckoned better flavored | 

3859. Estimate of sorts. Both varieties are in great estimation : the red-topped is most 
generally cultivated by market-gardeners, and the green-topped in private gardens. Both 
succeed by the same mode of culture. 

3860. Projmgation. Asparagus is propagated only from seed, though the roots might 
be divided like those of the garden-ranunculus, if thought necessary. It is best, however, 
to raise the plant from seed ; and it is of considerable importance to gather it from the 
strongest and most compact shoots ; such seed, as might naturally be expected, yielding 
by far the best plants. Seed, as well as one and two year-old plants, may be purchased 
from nurserymen and market-gardeners : and when a new garden is formed, the latter 
practice is generally adopted for the first plantation, in order to gain time. 

3861. Quantity of seed or roots. If sown to transplant, for a bed four feet and a half 
wide by six feet in length, one quart of seed will be requisite. If sown to remain, for 
a bed four feet and a half wide by thirty feet in length, one pint is necessary. If plants 
a year old are wanted for a plantation, then, for a bed four feet and a half wide by thirty 
feet in length, to contain four rows of plants, nine inches distant in the row, one hundred 
and sixty plants will' be requisite. 

3862. Sowing, and culture in seed-bed. It is generally sown broad-cast on a four-feet 
bed, in March, not very thickly, often M'ith a thin sprinkling of onions or radishes. The 
seed being slightly trodden in, the bed is raked smooth, and after the plants make their 
appearance, they are to be kept as free from weeds as possible, and the ground stirred with 
a narrow hoe once or twice during the summer. In the end of October following, the 
roots are protected from the frost by spreading over the ground some rotten dung or litter, 
which remains till March or April, according to the season, Vv'hen the plants are trans- 
planted to a compartment prepared for their final culture. 

3863. Judd {Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) sows in drills eighteen inches apart, hiirying the seed two inches : 
the object is to admit of stirring between. He keeps the plants thin, and if the weatherproves dry, waters 
once a week or fortnight. 

3864. Soil and prejyaration. " Aspai'agus-ground should be light, yet rich ; a sandy 
loam, well mixed with rotten-dung or sea-weed, is accounted preferable to any. Tiie 
soil should not be less than two feet and a half deep ; and before planting a bed, it is 
considered good practice to trench it over to that depth, burying plenty of dung in the 
bottom, as no more can be applied there for eight or ten years. It can scarcely, there- 
fore, be too well dunged ; besides, although the plant naturally grows in poor sandy soil, 
it is found that the sweetness and tenderness of the shoots depend very' much on the 



I3oOK I. 



ASPARAGUS. 



rapidity of the growth, and this is promoted by the richness of the soil. Damp ground, 
or a Avet sub-soil, are not fit for asparagus : indeed, the French consider wetness as so 
prejudicial to this plant, that they raise their asparagus-beds about a foot above the alleys 
in order to throw oiT the rain. " [Neill.) 

3865. Abercrombie says, " For planting asparagus, allot a plot of sound brownish loam, mixed with 
sand, in an open compartment, full to the sun. Having trenched it thirty inches deep, or as near that 
depth as the soil will allow, manure the bed with well reduced dung, six inches thick, or more, digging 
in the dung regularly one spade deep. Then lay out the ground in regular beds four feet and a half wide, 
with intervening alleys three feet wide. If the soil is naturally too light and poor, improve it with a little 
vegetable mould, or pulverised alluvial compost, after the bottom has been dunged." 

3866. Jiidd (who laid before the Horticultural Society, in 1816, " a specimen of asparagus, pi-o- 
nounced, by those who saw it, to be the finest they liad ever seen,") says, " Prepare a piece of good land, 
unencumbered with trees, and that lies well for the sun ; give it a good dressing of well reduced horse- 
dung from six to ten inche.s thick, all regularly spread over the surface ; then proceed with the trenching 
(if the soil will admit) two feet deep; after this first trenching, it should lie about a fortnight or three 
weeks, and then be turned back again, and then again in the same space of time ; by this process, the dung 
and moidd become well incorporated ; it may then be laid in small ridges till the time of planting. This 
work should all be performed in the best weather the winter will afford, that is, not while it rains, or 
snow is lying on the ground, as it would tend to make the land heavy and sour; all this is to be particu- 
larly attended to, as the preparation of the soil is of more consequence than all the management after- 
wards. At the time of planting, I always spread over the ground another thin coat of very rotten dung, 
and point it in half a spade deep, making my beds three feet wide only, with two feet of alleys ; so that three 
rows of grass, one foot apart, are all I plant on each bed : I find this to be the best method, as by this plan 
there is not the least trouble in gathering, whereas you are obliged to set a foot on one of the wide beds, 
before you can get at all the grass, to the great injury of the bed and the buds under the surface." 

3867. Dr. MaccuUoclc gives the following mode of preparing an asparagus bed, as practised in France; 
and which, it is stated, has been adopted by a gentleman in Peebleshire with success. " A pit, the size of 
the Intended plantation, is dug five feet in depth, and the mould which is taken from it, must be sifted, 
taking care to reject all stones, even as lov/ in size as a filberd-nut : the best parts of the mould must then 
be laid aside for making up the beds. The materials of the bed are then to be laid in the following propor- 
tions and order : six inches of common dunghill-manure, eight inches of turf, six inches of dung as before, 
six inches of sifted earth, eight inches of turf, six inches of very rotten dung, eight inches of the best earth. 
The last layer of earth must then be well mixed with the last of dung. The. compartment must now be 
divided into beds five feet wide, by paths constructed of turf, two feet in breadth, and one foot in thick- 
ness." {Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. ii.) 

3868. Dr. Forbes describes the Vienna mode of making, an asparagus-bed to last 25 years. It is deeply 
trenched, and in the bottom is placed a layer of bone, horn, chips of wood, or branches of trees a foot 
thick. Over this is placed good mould, cow-dung, and river mud, &c. {Hort. Trans, v. 335.) 

3869. Removal and planting. Take up the plants carefully with a fork, to avoid 
cutting the roots, exposing them to the air as short a time as possible ; and at the tiine of 
planting, place them among a little Sfand in a basket covered with a mat, 

3870. l<licol says, " It is of very great importance for the ensuring of success in the planting of aspara- 
gus, to lift the roots carefully, and to expose them to the air as short time as possible. No plant feels a 
hurt in the root more keenly than asparagus j the fibrils are very brittle, and if broken, do not readily 
shoot again." {Kal. 47.) 

3871. Smith has proved experimentally, that though the common season for planting is March and April, 
yet, that it may also be successfully performed in June, without any extraordinary care. Judd, already 
mentioned, transplants when he observes the plants beginning to grow, which, he says, is " the best time 
for the plants to succeed. If moved earlier, they perhaps have to lie torpid for two or three weeks, which 
causes many of them to die, or if not, they shoot up very weak." In France (according to Dr. Macculloch), 
they plant even as late as July, cutting off such young shoots as the plants have made before the operation. 
{Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. i.) 

3872. The distance at which asparagus is commonly planted is nine inches in the row, and one foot be- 
tween the rows; in general, between every fourth row so planted, a double distance is left for an alley. 
Many asparagus-farmers, however, consider it better to plant in single rows at two feet and a half or three 
feet distance, than to adopt the bed form. The crowns of the plants are generally covered two inches with 
soil. 

' 3873. Method of planting. " Stretch a line lengthwise the bed, nine inches from the 
edge, and with a spade, cut out a small trench about six inches deep, perpendicular next 
to the line, turning the earth displaced along by the other side the trench ; and, having 
the plants ready, set a row along the trench, nine inches apart, with the crown of the roots 
two inches below the surface, drawing some earth just to fix them as placed. Having 
planted one row, directly cover them in fully with the earth of the trench, raking it back 
regularly an equal depth over the crown of the plants. Proceed then to open another 
trench a foot from the first ; plant it as above ; and in the same manner plant four rows 
in each bed. Then lightly raking the beds lengthwise, draw off any stones and hard 
clods, and dress the surface neat and even. Then let the edges be lined out in exact order, 
allowing three feet for each alley. But sometimes in planting large compartments of aspara- 
gus, a first trench having been made, and the roots planted as above, then a second trench 
is opened, of which the earth is turned into the first over the plants. So proceed in 
planting the whole ; making allowance between every four rows for an alley of three feet. 
In a dry spring or summer, water the roots from time to time, till the plants are esta- 
blished." [Abercrombie.) 

3874. Judd strains the line, and cuts down a trench, sloping in the usual way for planting box, and 
making choice of all the finest plants, puts them in one foot apart, and one inch and a half below the sur- 
face. This done, he lets the alleys and beds lie level till autumn, and then digs out the alleys deep enough 
to get from four to six inches of mould all over the bed ; over this he lays a good coat of rotten dung, and 
fills in the alleys with long dung. 

387.'?. In France, they plant in beds five feet wide, separated by paths constructed of turf, two feet in 
breadth, and one foot in thickness. The plants are placed eighteen inches asunder, spreading out the rootis 
as wide as possible in the form of an umbrella, and keeping the c^own one and a half inch under ground. 

T t 3 



546 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



A pin is put to each plant as a mark ; and as soon as the earth is settled and dry, a spadeftil of fine sand 
is thrown over each pin in the form of a mole-hill. 

38 7 6. Extent of the plantation. An asparagus-compartment should not contain less than 
a pole of ground, as it often needs this quantity to furnish a good dish at one time. For a 
large family, about sixteen roods are kept in a productive state, which are calculated to 
furnish, on an average, between two hundred and three hundred shoots every day in the 
height of the season. {Neill, in Ed^ Encyc.) 

3877. Abercrombie says, when the buds come to be fully productive, five square poles of ground, planted^ 
with 1600 plants, will yield from six to eight score heads daily. 

3878. Progressive culture. Permit the entire crop the two first years, and the greater 
part of it the third year, to run up to stalks ; keeping the beds free from weeds, and stir- 
ring the surface. It is a common practice to sow onions, lettuce, &c. the two first years 
over the beds ; and to plant cauliflower in the alleys between them. The advantage of 
this pi-actice is questionable ; and, at all events, it should not be continued after the plants 
are in full bearing. Judd, having dug out the alleys the first season , instead of repeating 
that operation the next, lays on a coat of good dung three inches thick, and forks it evenly 
into the beds and alleys, and so on every season after, " never digging out the alleys 
any more, as it is known the asparagus-plant forms a fresh crown every season ; and 
sometimes it happens, that in a few years the crown will increase almost into the alley ; 
so, that by digging out this, you must inevitably spoil that plant : if this is not the case 
when the beds are in good condition, the roots will be sure to work out at the sides into 
the alleys, and by digging out the latter, these roots must be cut oflP, and you will often 
see them exposed all the winter before dung can be got to fill them up ; rather than be 
treated in this way, they had better be without any thing all the winter, as asparagus does 
not suffer generally by frost. The first two years I have a very thin crop of celery-plants 
or lettuce upon the beds, but nothing afterwards ; nor do I plant any thing in the alleys 
after the same period, for I think the asparagus is injured thereby." 

3879. Autumn dressing. The following is the usual practice, as described by Aber- 
crombie : " Towards the end of October or beginning of November, the stalks which have 
run up to seed, having done growing, or begun to decay, cut them down close, and carry 
them away ; then hoe off all weeds from the beds into the alleys : this done, proceed with 
the line and spade to mark out the alleys the prescribed width ; then dig each alley 
lengthwise, . a moderate spade deep, and spread a good portion of the earth equally on each 
side over the adjoining beds ; digging down the weeds as you advance, clean to the bot- 
tom of the alleys, under a proper depth of earth. Form the edges of the beds full and 
straight, and the alleys of an equal depth ; and thus let them remain till spring." 

3880. Judd, on the above practice, observes, " rather than treat them in this way, they would be better 
without any thing." He fills up the alleys with litter or dung, to exclude the frost. 

3881. ]<iicol recommends covering asparagus-beds with good dung, and not mere litter, as frequently is 
done, in the idea that the roots would otherwise perish. Fresh dung mixed with sea-weed, he considers 
the very best manure for asparagus. {Kal. 129.) 

3882. The Frejich cover in autumn, with six inches of dung, and four of sand ; and in performing this 
operation, as well as every other, great care is taken not to tread on the beds, so as to condense the earth. 
In planting and cutting, a plank is always used to tread on ; and the turf-divisions of the beds which are 
intended to prevent the condensation of the earth below, in consequence of walking among the beds, are 
removed every three years. 

3883. Neill mentions a very proper precaution before covering, which is, to stir the surface of the beds 
vnth a fork, in order that the juices of the manure washed do\vn by the rains, may be readily imbibed. 
He adds, that some cover the manure with a thin layer of earth from the alleys, which is cailed 
landing up. 

3884. Spring dressing. About the end of March or towards the middle of April, be- 
fore the buds begin to advance below, proceed, with a short three-tined fork, to loosen the 
surface of the beds ; introducing the fork slanting two or three inches under the mould,^ 
turn up the top earth near the crown of the roots, with care not to wound them. Then 
rake the surface lengthwise the bed, neatly level, drawing off the rough earth and hard 
clods into the alleys ; also, trim the edges of the beds and surface of tlie alleys regularly 
even. Thus to loosen the bed, enables the shoots to rise in free growth, admits the air, 
rains, and sunshine, into the ground, and encourages the roots to produce buds of a hand- 
some full size. (Abercrombie.) 

3885. Time of coming to a bearing state. In general, transplanted asparagus comes 
up but slender the first year ; it is larger the second ; and the third year some shoots 
may be fit for gathering ; in the fourth year the crop will be in good perfection. 
(^Abercrombie. ) 

3886. Judd begins to cut the third season, but not generally. By the French method before mentioned, 
" in three years the largest plants will be fit to cut for use." 

3887. JBlancliing. No attempt at blanching the tops is made in this country, otherwise 
than by having abundance of loose earth on the surface through which they spring ; but 
Lasteyrie informs us (Co/, de Machines, &c.) that joints of cane are placed separately 
over each stalk in Spain : and Bauinan of Vienna, in a communicsitiQn to the Horticultural 



Book I. 



ASPARAGUS. 



647 



Society on the culture of asparagus in Austria, says, " to give asparagus-shoots growing 
in the open air as much length and tenderness as possible, there is inserted over each stem 
destined to be gathered, as soon as it shoots above ground, a woe ien tube or pipe eigh- 
teen inches high, and one inch in diameter." (Hort. Trans, v. 334.) Dr. Forbes, on the 
same subject, says, " in order to preserve the whiteness of the asparagus-shoots, they 
should be covered with a wooden or earthen pipe of twelve or fifteen inches in height, with 
a hole in the top." (Hort. Trans, v. 336.) 

3888. Cutting and gathering. " In new plantations, be careful not to begin cutting 
tin the stools are advanced to mature age, having been planted three or four years, and 
become of competent strength for producing full-sized shoots. Likewise observe, both in 
new and old beds, to gather all the produce in a regular successive order within the proper 
limits of the season specified above. As the rising shoots project two, three, four, or five 
inches at most above ground, while the top bud remains close and plump, they are in the 
best condition for gathering. Cut them off within the ground, with a narrow sharp- 
pointed knife, or small saw, nine inches long ; thrusting the knife, or saw, down straight, 
close to each shoot separately, cut it oflT slantingly, about three inches below the surface, 
with care not to wound the younger buds advancing below. Observe, in a new plant- 
ation, in the first year's gathering, if the shoots come up of irregular sizes, to cut only- 
some of the larger for a fortnight, or three or four weeks, and then permit the whole to 
run ; but otherwise, when in strong production, gather all as they come, two or three 
times a-week, or as required, during the season, till the 21st of June; then, at farthest, 
terminate the cutting, and permit the after-shoots to run up in stalk till October. If from 
a particular inducement you cut later than the 21st of June, be careful to leave two or 
more shoots to each stool, in order to draw nourishment to it ; for the stools left without 
growing shoots will perish, and by negligence in this respect many vacuities or unpro- 
ductive spots are left in beds." (Abercrombie.) 

3889, Nicol says, the best method of cutting is to scrape away an inch'or two of the earth from the shoot 
you would cut, and then slip the asparagus-knife (^^^5. Ill, 112.) down another inch or two, taking care not 
to wound the crown, or any adjoining shoot. Shoots two inches under the ground, and three or four above 
it, make the handsomest dishes. , 

3890. Ncill observes, " after the beds are in full bearing, all the shoots are gathered as they advance, till 
the end of June or beginning of July a common rule being to " let asparagus spin (grow up), when green 
peas come in." Dr. IVIacculloch states that the same practice is pursued in France. 

389L Judd says, " I never make a practice of cutting very much after the first week in June : I then 
begin to let it run ; in fact, I never cut the very small grass at all. Asparagus being so valuable a vege- 
table, some persons continue to cut indiscriminately till the latter end of June, but this practice is of very 
great injury to the next year's produce." (-Hort. Trans, vol. ii. 237.) 

3892. Duration of the crop. Generally, three months ; from the middle of April to the 
middle of July. (Neill.) 

3893. Duration of the plantation. Abercrombie says, ** A plantation of asparagus, 
under good culture will mostly continue for ten or twelve years to afford plentiful crops ; 
after which, the stools usually decline in fertility, and the shoots in quality ; so that to 
provide a permanent annual supply, some fresh beds should be planted a sufficient time 
beforehand, allowing four years for their advancing to a productive state." 

3894. Dr. MaccuUoch says, the French beds which he describes "will generally last thirty years; but, if 
they be planted in such abundance as to require cutting once in two years, half the bed being always in a 
state of reservation, it will last a century or more." {Calcd. Mem. vol. ii. 250.) 

3895. To save asparagus-seed. " Select some of the finest and earliest heads as they 
make their appearance in the spring ; tie them to stakes during summer, taking care not 
to drive the stake through the crown of the plant. In autumn, when the berries are ripe, 
wash out the seeds, if for the market, or to be sent to a distance ; but, for home-sowing, keep 
them in the berry till the time of sowing, the pulp being a gi*eat nourishment to the 
seed, which ought to be kept in a dry place during the winter." {Judd, in Hort. Trans. 
vol. ii. 234.) 

3896. Forcing asparagus. Meager, writing in the middle of the 17th century, men- 
tions, that the London market was, at that period, supplierl with forced asparagus early in 
the year. " Some having old beds of aspai-agus, which they are minded to destroy, and 
having convenience of new or warm dung, lay their old plants in order on the dung, and 
the heat doth force forward a farewell crop." {English Gardener, 188.) Where much 
asparagus is forced, it becomes necessary to form plantations on purpose for an annual 
supply. The plants are raised from seed in the usual way ; but when transplanted, as 
they are not intended to remain longer than three years in the bed or plantation, they need 
not be planted wider than seven or nine inches. When of three years' standing in the bed, 
they are eligible for removal to the forcing pit or frame, or to be excited by a super- 
stratum of tan and warm dung, in the manner of sea-kale or rhubarb. As some guide to 
proportion the forcing plantations to the demand, 600 plants are required for an ordinary- 
sized three-light frame, which, Nicol says, will yield a dish every day for about three 
^veeks. 

3897. For the details of forcing asparagus, see Ch. VIII. Sect. IX. 

T t 4 



648 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSECT. 2. Sea-kale. — Crambe maritima, L. {Eng. JBot. 924.) Tetrad. Siliq. L. 
and Cruciferce, J. Chou marin, Fr. ; Meerkohl, Ger. ; and Crambio, Ital. 
S898. The sea-kale is a hardy perennial, found in various parts of our shores. Tlie 
^whole plant is smooth, of a beautiful glaucous hue, covered with a very fine meal ; oc- 
casionally, however, it varies like the wallflower-leaved ten-week stock, with quite green 
leaves. The radical leaves are large, more or less sinuated and indented, containing in 
the axil a bud or rudiment of next year's stem. The flower is of a rich white appear- 
ance, and smells strongly of honey. The common people on the western shores of 
England have, from time immemorial, been in the practice of watching when the shoots 
begin to push up the sand or gravel, in March and April ; when they cut off the young 
shoots and leaf-stalks, then blanched and tender, and boil tliem as greens. The precise 
period of its introduction to the garden is unknown. Parkinson and Bryant state, that 
the radical leaves are cut by the inhabitants where the plant grows wild, and boiled as 
cabbage ; and Jones, of Chelsea, assured the late Curtis, that he saw buodles of it, in 
a cultivated state, exposed for sale in Chichester market in ] 753. Maher states 
(Hort. Trans, i.), that the crambe maritima was known and sent from this king- 
dom to the continent more than two hundred years ago, by Lobel and Turner ; 
but Miller, in 1731, was the first who wrote upon it professionally. About the 
year 1767, it was cultivated by Dr. Lettsom, at Grove Hill, and by him brought 
into general notice in the neighborhood of London. In the Gardener's Dic- 
tionari/^ published in 1774, by Gordon, at Fountain-bridge, near Edinburgh, di- 
rections are given for the cultivation of this vegetable, and for blanching it, by covering 
the beds four inches deep with sand or gravel. Professor Martyn has printed some 
valuable instructions for its cultivation, from the MS. of the Rev. M. Laurent ; and the 
late Curtis, by a pamphlet on its culture, has done more to recommend it, and diffuse 
the knowledge of it, than any of his predecessors. Sea-kale is now a common vegetable 
in Covent Garden market, and Neill obsei-ves, has even begun to appear on the green- 
stalls of the Scottish metropolis. But in France it is nearly unknown. Bastien 
{Manuel du Jardinier, 1807) describes the chou marin d' Angleterre, but he appears to 
have tried to use the broad green leaves, instead of tlie blanched shoots. Disgusted with 
his preparation, he denies the merits of sea-kale ; and resigns the plant, with a sneer, to 
colder climates. When the French gardeners, however, have learned to cultivate it, and 
especially to force it at mid- winter, it will doubtless soon become a favorite with the 
Parisians. {Ed. Encyc, art. Hort.) 

3899. Use. The young spring shoots, and the stalks of the unfolding leaves, blanched 
by rising through the natural ground in a wild state, or by earthing up in gardens, are 
the parts used ; and when boiled, and dressed like asparagus, are not inferior to that 
vegetable. They form also an excellent ingredient in soups. Sometimes the ribs of the 
large leaves are peeled and dressed as asparagus, after the plant has ceased to send up 
young growths. By forcing, sea-kale may be had in perfection from November till May, 
a period including all the dead months of the year. It is remarked by Nicol, that vege- 
tables are seldom improved by forcing, l)ut that sea-kale foiins an exception, the forced 
shoots produced at mid-winter being more crisp and delicate in flavor than those procured 
in the natural way in April or May. Sir George Mackenzie (Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. 
i. 313.) observes, that sea-kale cannot easily be overdone in cooking, and that after being 
well boiled, it should be thoroughly drained, and then suffered to remain a few minutes 
before the fire, that a farther portion of moisture may be exhaled. 

3900. Projyagation. Sea-kale is generally and best raised from seed ; of which, if 
sown to transplant, for a seed-bed four feet by nine, sown in drills a foot apart by eight 
inches in the row, two ounces will suffice ; if sown to remain, then the same quantity 
will serve for a plot five feet by fifteen, sown in drills two feet apart. Plantations may 
also be formed by detaching rooted offset-shoots from established plants, or by cuttings 
of the roots, leaving about two eyes to each cutting. The last fortnight of March, and 
the first of April comprises the best time for putting in seed, or cuttings, and removing 
plants. 

3901. Soil. The native soil of sea-kale is deep sand, sometimes covered or partially 
interlaminated with alluvial matter from the sea. " Hence," says Abercrombie, " a 
light, diy, moderately rich mould, of a loose texture, suits it best. A fit soil for it," he 
adds, " may be composed of one half drift sand, two sixths rich loam, and one third small 
gravel, road-stuff", or sea-coal ashes. If the loam be not rich, add a little rotten dung." 
Barton {Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. ii. p. 99.) cultivates sea-kale in " a pretty strong 
loam, on a ^oose till-bottom, which he previously prepared by trenching, and mixing 
with it a good portion of vegetable mould from decayed leaves, adding a quantity of 
river sand." 

3902. Culture. Maher pursues the following mode : " Prepare the ground in De- 
cember or January, by trenching it two feet and a half deep ; if not that depth naturally. 



Book I. 



SEA-KALE. 



649 



and light, it must be made so artificially by adding a due proportion of fine white sand, 
and very rotten vegetable mould ; if your ground is w^et in winter, it must be effectually 
drained, so that no water may stand within a foot at least of the bottom ; for the strength 
of your plants depends on tlie dryness of the bottom, and richness of your soil. Then 
divide the ground into beds, four feet wide, with alleys of .eighteen inches, after which 
at the distance of every two feet each way, sow five or six seeds two inches deep, in a 
circle of about four inches in diameter : this operation must be performed with strict 
caie and regularity, as the plants are afterwards to be covered with blanching-pots, 
and both the health and beauty of the crop depend upon their standing at equal dis~ 
tan-' ss. In the months of May and June, if the seeds are sound, the young plants will 
appear. When they have made three or four leaves, take away all but three of the best 
plants from each circle, planting out those you pull up (which by a ca,jeful hand may be 
drawn with all their tap-root,) in a spare bed for extra forcing, or to repair accidents. 
The turnip-fly and wire-worm are great enemies tQ the whole class of tetradynamia 
plants. I know no remedy for the latter, but picking them out of the ground by hand ; 
the former may be prevented from doing much damage, by a circle of quick-lime strewed 
I'ound the young plants. If the months of June and July prove dry, water the whole 
beds plentifully. In the following November, as soon as the leaves are decayed, clear 
them away, and cover the beds an inch thick with fresh light earth and sand, that has lain 
in a heap and been turned over at least three times the preceding summer ; this, and 
indeed all composts, should be kept scrupulously free from weeds, many of which nourish 
insects, and the compost is too often filled with their eggs and grubs. Upon this dress- 
ing of sandy loam, throw about six inches in depth of light stable-litter, which finishes 
every thing to be done the first year. In the spring of the second year, when the plants 
are beginning to push, rake off the stable-litter, digging a little of the most rotten into 
the alleys, and add another inch in depth of fresh loam and sand. Abstain from cutting 
this year, though some of the plants will probably rise very strong, treating the beds the 
succeeding winter exactly as before. The third season, a little before the plants begin to 
stir, rake off the winter covering, laying on now an inch in depth of pure dry sand or 
fine gravel. Then cover each parcel with one of the blanching-pots, pressing it very 
firmly into the ground, so as to exclude all light and air ; for the color and flavor of the 
sea- kale is greatly injured by being exposed to either." 

3903. Barton, in the autumn, covers all the sea-kale beds, excepting the roots intended to be taken up 
for forcing, with leaves, as they are raked up from tile pleasure-grounds ; covering each bed in thickness 
according to the strength and age of the roots, giving the greatest covering to the oldest, upon an average 
from five inches to a foot when first laid on : over this, I place a slight covering of long dung, just sutri- 
cient to keep the leaves from being blown about. The covering is suffered to remain on the beds until 
the whole is cut for use the following spring ; after which the dung and leaves may be removed, and the 
ground dug regularly over. By this treatment, the heads will be found free and well blanched, and, from 
the sweetness of the leaves, free from any unpleasant flavor. As the heads become ready for use, they 
will raise the covering, by which means they will be easily perceived, without removing any more of the 
covering than the part where those heads are that are intended to be cut. Those beds which have had 
the thickest covering of leaves in autumn, come first into use, and the others in rotation; so that the 
last cutting is from v/hat was sown the spring before. Aware that cutting from one-year-old plants 
is generally disapproved of, Barton defends the practice from his experience of its not proving injurious, 
and because thereby the sea-kale season is prolonged, as the one-year-old plants "come in much later in 
spring than the old-established roots." {Caled. Hort. Mem.) 

.S904. Talcing the crop. Cut the young stems, when about three inches above ground, 
carefully, so as not to injure any of the remaining buds below, some of which will 
immediately begin to swell. A succession of gatherings may be continued for the space 
of six weeks, after which period the plants should be uncovered, and their leaves suffered 
to grow, that they may acquire and return nutriment to the root for the next year's 
buds. The flowers, when seeds are not wanted, ought to be nipped off with the finger 
and thumb, as long as they appear. {Hort. Trans, vol. i. ) 

3905. Forcing sea-kale. No vegetable is more easily or more cheaply forced than sea- 
kale, whether the operation be performed in beds or drills in the open air, or in hot-bed 
frames or flued pits. 

3906. Abercrombie, Nicol, and Maker recommend forcing in beds in the open air. " Seven weeks," 
the former observes, " before the time at which you wish to cut shoots for the table, begin to prepare 
the plants for forcing, and to ferment a sufficient quantity of fresh stable-dung. Having trimmed the 
leaves from the plants, carefully point the surface of the ground; and over the tops of the roots, spread 
fresh light earth, mixed with drift-sand or coal-ashes, two or three inches in depth. When the dung is 
well prepared, which will be in about three weeks, proceed to the forcing. If you mix tree-leaves with 
the dung, begin to ferment them a week or a fortnight sooner. Cover each of the plants, either with a 
regular blanching-pot, or with a garden-pot of the largest size. When the latter is employed, stop the 
hole with a cork, and cement it with clay, to keep out both the weather and the rank steam from the 
lining. Then lay a portion of prepared dung alone or mixed with tree-leaves, about and over each pot, 
pressing it down firm, extending it eight or ten inches all round, and raising the bank six or eight inches 
above the pot. It will be necessary to examine the plants frequently, and to measure the heat within 
the covers now and then, lest, by some inadvertency, the quantity of litter should not have been well-ap. 
portioned, or rightly prepared. If the heat be under 50'', there is not enough heat to excite the plants ; 
and if above 60"^, it is too fiery and may injure them. In about three weeks or a month after being 
covered up, the first shoots will be from six to ten inches long, and fit for the table. If the plant send up 
a flower-stalk, cut it away ; and successive supplies of shoots will be produced, till perhaps the end of th& 
third month from beginning to force." 



650 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



3907. Maker observes, that the only thing necessary in forcing sea-kale, is to be very particular in 
guarding against too much heat, using trial-sticks, and never if possible, exceeding 55°. So much mis- 
chief ensues when this is violent, that it is far better to begin time enough, and force slowly, rather than 
quickly. Like Abercrombie, Maher covers with dry sea-coal ashes, sifted neither verj' small nor very 
large. These are the best remedies against worms, which, after forcing is commenced, often spring up on 
the surface, and spoil the delicacy of the young shoots. Salt, he adds, also effectually destroys worms, 
and will not injure the sea-kale. 

3908. Abercrojnhk says, unless the weather be unusually rigorous, it will not be necessary to renew the 
linings of hot litter oftener than once in seven or eight weeks. Take away the exhausted part, and mix 
the remainder with fresh dung and leaves. Maher says, after the sea-kale is gathered, the dung will be 
found in the finest possible state for spring hot-beds. When the stools will produce no more shoots, 
remove the litter and the covers, and dress the ground, in order, as observed by Maher, that their leaves 
may be suffered to grow, and acquire and return nutriment to the root, for the next year's buds. 

3909. Nicol says, he knows an instance of a row of sea-kale having been forced in the above way every 
season for seven years, in which the plants in it are as vigorous and healthy as others in the same com- 
partment that are forced only every second year. 

3910. Barton forces sea-kale on dung-beds, under frames, exactly in the manner generally adopted for 
asparagus. The advantages be considers to be the certainty of having the latter vegetable fit for use at 
any particular time, and the saving of dung and labor. The latter saving, he says, " must appear obvious 
to every practical gardener, when he considers the difficulty attending the keeping up a proper and 
regular degree of heat, by covering with dung over pots and other similar methods, (as generally prac- 
tised,) at so inclement a season of the year ; requiring three times the quantity of dung to produce an 
equal number of heads, to what will be necessary when the roots are placed in a frame ; for a com- 
mon melon-frame will contain as many heads as are capable of being produced in two drills of twenty 
yards each, by covering with hot dung. He finds two frames, of three lights each, quite sufficient for a 
large family ; the first prepared about the beginning of November, and the second about the last week in 
December ; and by the time the second frame is exhausted, sea-kale will be ready for use in the open 
ground." {Caled. Hort. Me???.) 

3911. W. Gibbs, of Inverness, {Caled. Me??i. vol. i. p. 388.) also forces in frames, blanching by keeping 
the bed covered with mats. Economy and certainty he considers to be the advantages attending this 
mode. As the plants are no longer of use after being forced, a succession is kept up by annual sowings, 
and the plants are allowed to attain three years' growth before taking up for forcing. 

3912. Baldwin forces sea-kale where it stands in the open garden in the following manner : " On each 
side of a three-feet bed, in which the sea-kale has been planted, trenches are formed two feet deep, and 
eighteen inches wide at bottom ; the side of the trench next tlie bed is perpendicular, and the other side 
is sloped, so as to make the top of the trench, at the surface-level, two feet and a half wide : this trench 
is filled with linings of hot dung, on the inner edges of which, garden-lights are placed, and the glass 
kept covered with mats until the kale is fit to cut. The same plan," he adds, " is applicable to asparagus, 
and also to rhubarb, or any other perennial vegetable intended to be excited where it stands, and a 
covering of boards, canvas, or mats, might be substituted for the glass lights." {Ho}-t. Tra?is. iv. 63.) 

3913. Melross, of Ardgowan, forces sea-kale in a vinery. He plants " along the back of the flue where 
no vine-roots are, places covers on the plants, and in two weeks, when the heat for forcing vines is kept 
up," he has " as fine sea-kale as could be desired. When a dish is cut, he hfts the roots, and supplies 
their places by others from the open ground. He considers this a very easy and certain method, espe- 
cially in a wet climate." {Caled. Ho?-t. Mem. iv. 164.) 

3914. Gatheiing. Remove a pai-t of the earth, leaves, or whatever is employed in 
blanching ; cut off the heads or shoots, and slip off the stalks of the leaves. 

3915. Produce. From four to six heads, according to the size, tied together like 
asparagus, make a dish : and, Maher says, a blanching-pot which contains three plants, 
will afford a dish twice in a season. Hence, from sixty to a hundred pots will suffice 
for forcing sea-kale for a large family. From the above data, it is easy to form an esti- 
mate of the breadth of ground requisite for plantations of this plant to come in naturally. 

3916. To save seed. Let a stool which has not been cut, run in spring ; and seed will 
be produced on every stem. 

SuBSECT. 3* Artichoke. — Cijnara Scoly?nus,'L. {Blackio. t. 458.) Si/)i. Polyg. uEqu. L.' 
and Ci/narocephal(e, J. Artichaiit, Fr. ; ArtischoJce, Ger. ; and Carcioffolo, Ital. 

391*7. The artichoke is a perennial, with numerous large pinnatifid leaves, three or 
four feet long, covered with an ash-colored down ; the mid-rib deeply channelled and fur- 
rowed. Tlie time of flowering is August and September. It is a native of the south 
of Europe, and was introduced in England in 1548. 

3918. Use. The flower-heads in an immatui'e state contain the pai't used, which is 
the fleshy receptacle, commonly called the bottom, freed from the bristles and seed down, 
vulgarly called the choke, and the talus or lower part of the leaves of the calyx. In 
France, the bottoms are very cornmonly fried in paste, and they form a desirable ingre- 
dient in ragouts. They are occasionally used for pickling ; and sometimes they are 
slowly dried and kept in bags for winter use. In France the bottoms of young arti- 
chokes are frequently used in the raw state as a salad ; thin slices are cut from the bot- 
tom with a scale or calyx leaf attached, by which the slice is lifted, and dipped in oil 
and vinegar before using. The chard of artichokes, or the tender central leaf-stalk 
blanched, is by some thought preferable to that of the cardoon. The flowers possess the 
quality of coagulating milk, and have sometimes been used in the place of rennet. 

3919. Varieties. There are three varieties cultivated : — 



Conical, French, or oijal Artichoke, with 
green head. The head is oval, the scales 
open, and not turned in at the top as in 
the globe sort 



Globe, or largest, with dusky purpli&li 
head. The scales are turned in at 
top, and the receptacle more succulent 
than the other 



The dwarfish globe; a prolific variety, 
and Taluable as occupying little room 
"with its head. 



3920. Estimate of sorts. The globe sort is generally preferred for the main crop ; but the conical, or 
French, is generally considered as possessing more flavor, as the flower-heads are cut off for use when in 
an immature state ; both sorts continue producing them from July to November. 



Book I. 



CARDOON. 



651 



3921. Propagation. Tliis esculent is propagated by rooted suckers or young shoots, 
rising in the spring from the roots of the old plants ; these are fit to slip off for plant- 
ing in March and April, when from five to ten inches high. Opening the ground to the 
old stool, slip them off clean to the root, leaving the three strongest on each mother- 
plant to advance for summer production. Tliose slipped off, prepare for planting, by 
pulling away some of the under and decayed or broken leaves, and by pruning any 
straggling long tops of the leaves remaining ; also cut off casually hard or ragged parts 
at the bottom of the root. Then, having an open compartment, with a light rich soil of 
good depth, well dunged and dug, plant the sets by dibble, in rows four feet asunder, 
and two feet apart in each row. Give each plant some water : repeat this once or twice, 
if very dry weather, till they have taken root." 

39£I2. Subsequent culture. " All spring and summer keep them clear from weeds by occasional hoeing 
between the plants : this, with regular waterings in the dry weather of summer, is all the culture which 
they require, till the season of production is tei-minated. They will produce some tolerable heads the 
same year, iu August, and thence till November : next year they will head sooner, in full perfection. By 
having fresh stools planted every year or two, the old and new plantations together furnish a production 
of heads from June or July till November. Besides the main head, several smaller lateral heads gene- 
rally spring from the sides of the stem in succession ; but, in order to encourage the principal head to 
attain the full size, most of the side suckers should be detached in young growth, when their heads are 
the size of a large egg, which in that state are also prepared for some tables. As to the continuing main 
heads, permit them to have full growth till the scales begin to diverge considerably, but gather them 
before the flowers appear, cutting to each head part of the stalk. "When the entire crop on a stem is 
taken, cut ofi the stem close to the ground, to give the plant more strength for new shoots." {Aber. 
cronibu'.) " To encourage the production of large main heads, some detach all the lateral heads in a 
young state. These are commonly in a fit state for eating raw, having attained about one third of their 
proper size ; and they are for this purpose frequently sold in Covent Garden market, chiefly to foreigners. 
Another thing practised with the same view is the shortening the ends of the large leaves." {Neill, in 
Ed. Euci/c.) 

395-3. 'Xicol mentions, that the strongest crops he ever saw, grew in rather a mossy earth that had been 
trenched fully a yard in depth, and had been well enriched with dung, and lined ; and that the plants were 
generally covered before winter with a mixture of stable-litter and sea- weed. This last article, we believe, 
is one of the very best manures for artichokes. In no place is the plant to be seen in greater perfection than 
in gardens in the Orkney Islands ; and we know that the luxuriance of the plants in these is to be ascribed 
to the liberal supply of sea-weed dug into the ground everj' autumn. It was long ago remarked by a hor- 
ticultural writer, tliat " water drawn from ashes, or improved by any fixed salt, is very good for arti- 
chokes." {Si/sfe>?!a Agriculturce, 1682.) 

39-24. Winter dressing. Abercrombie says, " First cut down all the large leaves, but without hurting the 
small central ones, or the new shoots. Then dig the ground between and along each row ; raising it gra- 
dually from both sides, ridgeways over the roots, and close about the plants. In rigorous frosty weather, 
cover also in the litter, a foot thick, and close about each plant." 

3925. Sp}-ing dressing. In spring, the litter and earth being removed in March or April, according to the 
kind of season, the stocks are examined ; and two or three of the strongest or best shoots being selected for 
growing, the rest are removed by pressure with the thumb, or by a knife, or wooden chisel. Those shoots 
or suckers are used for new plantations. Dig the whole ground level, loosening it close up to the crown of 
the roots of every plant. 

3926. Duration of the plants. " Artichoke-plants continue productive for several years ; but, every 
season, some well rotted dung or fresh sea-weed, should be delved into the ground at the winter dressing. 
It is certain, however, that after a few years, the' plants begin to degenerate, the heads becoming smaller 
and less succulent. It is therefore a general rule not to keep an artichoke-plantation beyond four or at most 
six years. Scarcely any kind of grub or wire-worm ever touches the roots of artichokes : they form, there- 
fore, an excellent preparative for a crop of onions, shallot, or garlic. In many gardens, a smidl new plant- 
ation is formed every year ; and in this way the artichoke season, which begins in June, is prolonged til! 
November ; those from the old stocks continuing till August, when those from the new stocks come in. If 
the last gathered be cut with the stems at full length, and if these be stuck among moist sand, the heads 
may be preserved a month longer." 

3927. Culture for producing the chard. "When the artichoke compartment is to be shifted, 
and the old stocks are at any rate to be destroyed, the plants may be prepared, after mid- 
summer, when the best crop of heads is over, for yielding chards against winter. '.Uhe 
leaves are to be cut over within half a foot of the ground j the stems as low as possible. 
In September or October, when the new shoots or leaves are about two feet high, they are 
bound close with a wreath of hay or straw, and earth or litter is drawn round the stems of 
the plants. The blanching is perfected in a month or six weeks. If the chards are 
wished late in wintei*, the whole plants may be dug up before frost sets in, and laid in 
sand in their blanched state ; in this way they may be kept for several weeks." 

3928. Seed. The heads when suffered to remain ten days or a fortnight, after the season 
of cutting, expand the calyx leaves, and display an aggregation of jagged purple florets, 
producing a fine appearance. Wlien ripe seed is wanted, those heads in flower are to be 
bent down and retained in that position, so as that the calyx may throw off the autumnal 
rains. In general, however, the seed is not perfected in our climate. 

SoBSECT. 4. Cardoon, or Chardoon. — Cynara Carduncnlus, 1j. {Tabem. Icon. 696.) 
Si/ng. Poli/g. JEqu. L. 'and Ci/narocephalce, J. Cardoon, Fr., Ger., and Ital. 

3929. The cardoon is a hardy perennial plant, a native of Candia, introduced to Eng- 
land in 1658, and ^nown in all the European languages under the same name. It greatly 
resembles the artichoke, but rises to a greater height ; and becomes a truly gigantic her- 
l>aceous vegetable of four or five feet in height. It produces flowers like those of the 
articlioke in August and September. " In France," Neill observes, "the native prickly 
plant is sometimes cultivated under the nanie of Cardoon of Tours, and is accounted pre- 
fcr.vblc to the common garden variety. So formidable are its spines, that great care is 



652 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



necessary in working about it, to avoid personal injury ; a strong leather dress, and thick 
gloves, are therefore worn. This prickly sort has not yet been introduced into Britain." 

3930. Use. The tender stalks of the inner leaves of the cardoon, rendered white and 
tender by earthing up, are used for stewing, and for soups and salads, in autumn and 
winter. When the plants are large, the inner leaves and stalks are rendered by blanching 
white, crisp, and tender, to the extent of two or three feet. The plant is not in much re- 
quest, and is only cultivated in some pai'ticular family-gardens, and a few market-grounds. 
On the continent, it is in considerable repute, as indeed are many of salad and pot-herbs, 
which are comparatively neglected in this country. 

3931. Propagation. Though a perennial, it often dies in the winter, and therefore requires to be raised 
from seed almost every j'ear ; and for a bed four feet wide by eight feet, two ounces are sufficient. Formerly 
the plants were raised on hot-beds, and transplanted in May and June, but now the seed is generally sown 
where the plants are to remain. 

3932. Soil. The best soil for the cardoon is one that is light, deep, and not over rich. 

3933. Times of sowing. The chief sowings are made in the spring j for a small early crop, in the last 
fortnight of March j and for the main crop, in the first or second week of April. Further, for a late full 
crop, you may sow towards the close of June. 

3934. Sowing for trajisplanting. Sow in a bed of common light earth, moderately thin ; and rake in the 
seed evenly. When the plants have risen, thin them to three or four inches' distance, to give them room 
to acquire stocky growth for transplanting. When they have been raised about eight weeks, transplant 
them ; allotting an open compartment of well digged ground, and taking an opportunity of rain falling. 
Having lifted the plants, trim any long straggling tops of the leaves and fibres of the roots. Plant them 
either in the level ground, or in drills, or form a lioilow patch for each plant ; in all cases at four feet and 
a half distance. Thus j'ou will have ample scope for their growth, and considerable space of ground to land 
them up. Give water at planting, and occasionally till they take root. In their advancing growth, hoe 
and loosen the ground about the plants, cutting down all weeds. 

3935. Sowing to remain. A crop may be raised by sowing where the crops are to remain, not to have any 
check by removal. Sow in small hollow patches, at the distance specified above, two or three seeds in each. 
Thin the plants to one strongest in each patch. 

3936. Landing up. When the plants are advanced in large growth, two or three feet high or more, in 
August, September, and October, proceed to land them up for blanching. First tie the leaves of each plant 
together with hay or straw bands ; then digging and breaking the ground, earth up round each plant a foot 
or more high or two thirds of the stem. As the stems rise higher, tie and earth them up accordingly, 
giving them a final earthing in October. 

3937. Watering in autumn. Regular waterings in the dry weather of August and September will pre- 
vent the plants from seeding. 

3938. Taking the crop. When they are blanched a foot and a half, or two feet in length, or more, they 
may be digged up, as wanted, in September, October, and throughout winter. 

3939. Occasional shelter. Protect the plants in severe frost with long litter, either as they stand, or 
turned down on one side. 

3940. To save seed. Leave some full-grown plants in the spring, to shoot up in stalk. (Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 5. Rampion. — Campanula Rajmnculus, 'L. (Eng. Rot. 283.) Pent. Monog. 
L. and Campanulacees, B. P. Raiponce, Fr. ; Rapunzel, Ger. ; sind Raperonzo,ltSL\. 

3941. The rampion is a biennial plant, a native of England, but rare. The root is 
long, white, and spindle-shaped ; the lower leaves oval-lanceolate, and waved ; the flower- 
stalk is about two feet high, and furnished with a panicle of blue flowers in July and 
August. The whole plant abounds with a milky juice. 

3942. Use. The root is eaten raw like a radish, and has a pleasant nutty flavor ; it is 
also sometimes cut into winter salads, and then the leaves as well as the root are used. 

3943. Culture. The seed should be sown in the latter end of May, on a shady border of rich earth, not 
over stiff, the mould being made as firm as possible : it is better not to rake in the seed, which, being so 
very fine, may, by that operation, be buried too deep. If the sowing is earlier than May, the plants will 
sometimes run to flower in the autumn, and so become useless. Moderate waterings must be given as they 
come up, through a fine rose of a watering-pot, and it is necessary that they be kept, at all times, tolerably 
moist. When the plants are of sufficient size, they must be thinned out, to the distance of three or four 
inches apart ; those drawn will bear transplanting well, if put into a border similar to the seed-bed, but 
care must be taken to insert the roots straight into the earth, and not to press the mould too close ; the 
roots which become forked are not so good as the straight ones. In November, the plants v/ill be fit for 
use, and will continue so until April. (Dickson, in Hort. Trans.) 

3944. To save seed. Leave or transplant some of the best plants in spring, and they will produce flowers 
and abundance of seed in autumn. , 

SuBSECT. 6. Hop Humulus Lupulus, L. {Eng. Rot. 427.) Dicec. Pent. L. and 

Urticece, J. Houblon, Fr. ; Hopfen, Ger. ; and Lnpolo, Ital. 

3945. Tlie hop is a perennial plant, a native of Britain, and well known as being 
cultivated for its flowers, which are used in preserving beer. It rises with a rough shoot, 
and rough tripartite leaves, the former climbing round whatever comes in its way to a 
considerable height, and producing flowers of a peculiar odor in July. 

3946. Use m cookery. The young shoots, when they have risen three or four inches 
from the root, were formei-ly gathered and boiled like asparagus, to which they are very 
little inferior j these shoots are still occasionally to be found in the market, under the name 
of hop-tops. A pillow filled with hop-flowers will induce sleep, unattended with the bad 
eflTects of soporifics which require to be taken internally. 

394:7. Culture. The hop is propagated by dividing the roots in autumn or .spring. It requires a deep 
rich soil, which should be frequently stirred and kept qu'te free of weeds, and the plantation slioukl be 
renewed every seven or ten years according to circumstances. In field-culture, it is planted in hills or in 
groups of three or four plants, at six or eight feet centre from centre ; but in growing a fejv for hop-tons, 
they may be planted ni single rows at three feet distance, and one foot asunder in the row. 



Book I. ALISANDER, BLADDER-CAMPION, THISTLE. 653 



SuBSECT. 7. Alisander, or Alexanders. (Jig' 469.) — Smyrnium Olusatrum, L. {Eng. 
Bot. 230. ) Pent. Dig. L. and TJmhelliferecs, J. Maceron, Fr. ; Smyrnerkranty 
Ger. ; and Macerone, Ital. 

3948. TAe aZwanrfgr is a biennial plant, rising about 
two feet high, and flowering in May and June ; the 
leaves are of a pale-green color, ar^d the flowers 
yellowish. It grows naturally near the sea in several 
places, and may often be observed naturalised near old 
buildings. 

3949. Use. It was formerly much cultivated, its 
leaf-stalks having been used when blanched, as a pot- 
herb and salad. It somewhat resembles the celery in 
flavor, by which vegetable it has been almost entirely 
supplanted. Some consider the leaves and stalks of 
tlie S. perfoliatum, a native of Italy, as preferable to 
those of this plant. 

3950. Culture. " Where the plants are in demand, sow a pro- 
portionate crop at the close of March, in the course of April, 
or beginning of May : eitlier broad-cast, raking in the seed ; 
the plants, when between three and six inches high, to be trans- 
planted into drills, eighteen inches or two feet asunder, by five 
or six inches apart in each row ; or sow at once in drills that 
distance, to remain, thinning out the superfluous plants in proper time. The seed is sold by weight, and 
if sown to transplant, for a bed three feet and a half wide by six feet in length (21 superficial feet}, 
half an ounce will suffice ; if sown to remain, then for a bed four feet by twenty-four, containing two 
drills, two feet apart, or for forty-eight feet in length of drilling, then one ounce will be requisite. 
When the plants are well advanced in growth, earth them up several inches on each side the rows, 
to blanch the lower parts white, for use in summer, autumn, &c. You may likewise sow a moderate por- 
tion in August, to stand over the winter for a supply in spring and the early part of the summer, till the 
spring-sown plants come in." 

3951. To save seed. The alisander produces nothing fit for the table after the second year ; and as it 
ripens plenty of seed in autumn, it is proper to save some every year for sowing as above. {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 8. Madder- Campion. — Silene inflata, H. K. {Eng. Bot. t. 164.); Cucubalus 
behen, L. Dec. Trig. L. and Caryophyllece, J. 

3952. The bladder-campion is a perennial, growing naturally by the sides of corn- 
fields and pastures ; and also on the sea-shore. The stems are smooth and erect, rising 
from a foot to eighteen inches high, The leaves are smooth, glaucous, and the flowers in 
nodding panicles. 

3953. Use. Our kitchen-gardens, Bryant observes, scarcely afford a better-flavored 
vegetable than the young shoots of this plant when boiled. They ought to be gathered 
when not above two inches long. The sprouts are to be nipped off when of a proper 
size, and the plants will produce a succession of fresh ones for at least two months. 

3954. Culture. A similar culture to that given to the asparagus, or sea-kale, would answer, and probably 
highly improve this plant. Bryant says, its culture would well reward the gardener's trouble. Seeds may either 
be procured from wild plants, or the roots, which run very deep, may be transplanted into deep light soil. 

Slbsect. 9. Thistle. — Carduus and Onojjordiitm, L. ; and Cynarocephalce, J. 
S955. There are two sorts of thistle, which are, or were formerly, used as asparaginous 
plants, viz. the milk-thistle, and cotton-thistle. 

3956. The milk-thistle, or our lady^s thistle, is the Carduus Marianus, L. {Eng. Bot. 
t. 976.) It is a biennial plant, a native of Britain, and found in church-yards and 
near ruined buildings. The plant rises from four to six feet high, furnished with large 
leaves, covered with an irregular network of beautiful milky vein,s. 

3957. Use. When very young, the leaves are used as a spring salad ; and blanched, are 
used in winter salads; stripped of their spines, they are sometimes boiled and used as greens ; 
and the young stalks peeled, and soaked in water to extract a part of their bitterness, 
are said to be excellent. Early in the spring of the second year, the root is prepared like 
salsify or skirret ; the receptacle of the flower is pulpy, and eats like that of the artichoke. 

3958. Culture. The seeds are sown in a good dry soil, early in February ; and when the plants come up, 
they are thinned out to one foot and a half distance from one another. The intervals are to be kept free 
of weeds, and stirred occasionally during the summer ; and in autumn the leaves are to be tied up like 
those of endive, and the earth drawn round to blanch them. The blanched herb being cut off for use 
during winter, the roots remain to be used in spring. 

3959. To save seed. Leave one or two plants untied up the first season, and \a the second they will 
produce flowers in July, and seed in August. 

3960. The cotton-thistle is the Onopordiicm acanthiujii, L. {Eng. Bot. t. 977.) It is a 
biennial plant, indigenous in various parts of Britain, and remarkable for its large downy 
leaves and lofty stem, often rising ten feet high, and covering a circle of six or eight feet 
diameter. 

3961. Use. It was formerly used like the artichoke and cardoon ; the receptacle and 
the tender blanched stalks, peeled and boiled, being the parts vised. 

39G2. Vulture. The same as the Cat-doon. See Subsect. 4. 




654 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Sect. VII. Jcetarious Plants. 

3963. The acetarious vegetables are a numerous class, of various culture, habits, and 
use, and of which but little that is general can be here observed, excepting that they are 
all articles of comparative luxury, or condiments, rather than food ; and consequently, 
that though they occupy a moderate portion, perhaps a fortieth of the kitchen-garden, yet, 
excepting a few of the sorts, as the lettuce, radish, cress, &c. they are seldom found in 
those of the cottager. 

SoBSECT. 1. Lettuce, — Lactuca sativa, L. Syng. Polyg. ^qu. L. axidi dehor acece, J . 
Laitue, Fr. ; Gartensalat, Ger. ; and Lattuga, Ital. 

3964. The lettuce is a bardy annual, introduced or cultivated in 1562, but from wliat 
country is unknown. Some authors consider it as merely a variety of one of the three native 
species ; one of M'hich, the L. virosa, seems very likely to be the parent plant. The 
leaves are large, milky, frequently wrinkled, usually pale-green, but varying much in 
form and color in the different varieties. Though of but a few months' duration in the 
same individual, yet, in gardens, by successive sowings in spring, summer, and autumn, 
it is obtained most part of the year. 

3965. Use. The use of lettuce as a cooling and agreeable salcfd is well known ; it is 
also a useful ingredient in soups. It contains, like the other species of this genus, a 
quantity of opium juice, of a milky nature, from which, of late years, a medicine has 
been prepared by Dr. Duncan, senior, of Edinburgh, under the title of Lactucariuniy 
and. which he finds can be adixdnistered with effect in cases where opium is inadmissible." 
{Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. i. 160. 259. ; vol. ii. 314. ; and vol. iv. 153.) 

3966. Varieties. These are very numerous ; and, from the names, many of them 
appear to have come to us from the Greek islands and the coast of the Levant. The 
best are — 



Green Cos 

White Cos 

SUver Cos 

Spotted Cos 

Egyptian early Cos 

Black-seeded green Cos 

Lap 



Brown CiUcia 

Green Cilicia 

Common white cabbage - 

Large white cabbage 

Brown Dutch cabbage 

Imperial cabbage ; large and fine 



Grand admiral, or admirable; a very 

large fine cabbage-lettuce 
Large Roman 

Hardy green cabbage (capuchin) 
Tennis-ball cabbage 
Prussian. 



3957. Estimate of sorts. In their general growth, all the Cos lettuces are more or less upright, of an 
oblong shape. The cabbage-lettuces are round-leaved, growing in a compact full head of squat form, 
close to the ground. Both have white, close, firm heads when in perfection; the varieties reach ma- 
turity from June till September. Meanwhile they are occasionally used in young open growth. In a 
very young state, the cabbage-lettuces have a milder, more agreeable taste than the Cos : but when both 
classes are full grown, the flavor of the Cos is preferred for salads, while the cabbage kinds are more used 
for soups. The Cilicia, of a nature between the other two, is much admired by some, but is less culti- 
vated than formerly. The lap is drawn young, and cut with small salads. For principal summer and 
autumn crops, the white, the silver, the green, the spotted, the Eg>-ptian, with the other kinds of Cos, 
are eligible in the first degree. Next to these are the common and the large white cabbage, the brown 
Dutch, the imperial, the grand admiral, the Roman, and both sorts of the Cilicia. Those kinds should 
be reserved for the end of summer which are the most backward in starting for seed, among which are 
the hardy green, the brown Dutch, and the tennis-ball. Any of the other kinds may be resorted to for 
secondary crops, or to answer a local preference for particular names. For a very early crop, or for a late 
sowing, to stand the winter, the fittest of the Cos kinds are the white, the green, the black-seeded, and 
the Egyptian ; the latter is hardy, foniis a close head, and comes early : of the cabbage class, the 
brown Dutch, the hardy green," the common white, and the tennis-ball are much relied upon for 
their hardiness in standing severe weather. 

3968. Propagation. From seed ; of which, for a seed-bed four feet wide by ten feet in length, a quarter 
of an ounce is sufficient, and will produce upwards of four hundred plants. - * 

3969. Soil and situation. " AU the sorts grow freely on any rich mellow soil, where the sub-soil is dry. 
For the most part, raise this vegetable as a principal crop, on beds set apart for it ; and keep the varieties 
separate, but to multiply the supplies throughout summer, portions may be sown, thinly intermixed with 
principal crops of leeks, onions, carrot, and spinage, which will come ofi before the lettuces are full 
grown ; also, with any young perennials which stand at wide intervals." 

3970. Times of sowing. " To obtain a constant supply of good lettuces, it is advisable to sow every 
month, from February to July, for the main summer and autumn crops ; and to sow distinct sorts in 
August and September, to produce late autumn and winter plants, of which a reserve is to stand for 
spring and early summer heading lettuces in the following year. For the first early crops, you may begin 
to sow at the end of January or beginning of February, if mild dry weather ; or, more generally, later in 
February, or in the first week of March, on a sheltered south border. Some choice kinds may be sov.'n in 
a frame, and forwarded by forcing. But for the main summer crops, sow in March and April, in any 
open situation. Follow with secondary sowings twice or oftener every month, from May till about the 
seventh of August ; to provide for a succession through the summer, till October, as the plants sowni early 
in the year, after heading fuUy, soon fly up to seed-stalks. The sowing in the midst of summer should be 
on shady borders. For a crop to come in during winter, and stand over partially till spring, make two 
late sowings, in the third week of August and last fortnight of September." 

3971. Process in sowing. " The ground should have been broken in the previous digging. Sow broad- 
cast, moderately thin ; rake in lightly, and very even." 

3972. Manage7nent of the summer crops. " In the successive crops raised from the opening of spring 
till the close of summer, when the plants reach ;about two, three, or four inches' growth, they should be 
thinned ; of those removed let a requisite number be planted out, from a foot to fifteen inches asunder, 
to remain for cabbaging. Such as continue in the seed-beds may be either gathered thinningly, in pro- 
gressive stages, till the final reserve advance in close heading ; or as they increase in size, be planted out at 
the square distance specified above, especially those designed to stand till of stocky growth. In dry wea- 
ther, water well at transplanting. Also weed and hoe the beds thinned, and water them, if necessary. 
In the first heading crop of Cos lettuces, when about three parts grown, and beginning to close the inner 
leaves, a number may be forwarded in cabbaging, by tying the leaves together, moderately close, with 
strings of bass ; the remainder wiU head and whiten, in due time, without this assistance. Under the 



Book I. 



ENDIVE. 



655 



above culture, the successive crops will advance freely to a stocky growth : the earliest will cabbage mo- 
derately in May, but more fully in June, and in perfection in July and August. 

3973. Crop raised on heat. " For an accelerated crop, some may be sovra in the 
beginning or middle of February on a gentle hot-bed. When the plants are one or two 
inches high, in March or April, prick a portion either into a warm border, if a mild 
season, and let them be shielded with mats, during nights and bad weather ; or into ii 
frame or slender hot-bed, to bring them more forward. According to their progress, in 
April or May, transplant them into the open garden, from six to twelve inches asundt-r, 
to remain for heading." 

3974. Winter-standing crop. " To have lettuces for drawing in minor growth for use, during winter, 
and to stand over in part for returns in a muture stage, early next spring and, the beginning of summer, 
sow in the third week of August and in the first fortnight of September, the suitable hardy sorts. You 
may, further, towards the close of September, sow a smaller portion on a warm border or sloping terrace ; 
the plants to remain and take the chances of the weather : if these survive, they will be acceptable in the 
spring ; some to thin out for use young, and the remainder to transplant for larger growth, early in sum- 
mer, without running. The plants of the August and September sowing, will soon appear, and will be 
ready to transplant the same season. Some may remain where sown, and a good portion may be trans- 
planted to warm borders ; a quantity of the choice Cos may be planted in beds of light dry earth, under 
frames or hand-lights, or under awnings, to have the protection of mats in cold nights, and partially on 
inclement days. Accordingly, about the middle or end of September, and in October, when the plants 
are two or three inches high, prick out a quantity (taking first those of the August sowing), from the 
seed-beds into prepared warm-lying ground, in rows six inches by four apart. From such as remain in the 
seed-beds, you may conveniently thin out some young plants, for occasional use in the winter, but so as 
to leave a competency to remain for spring. As October advances, let some considerable quantity of 
choice lettuces of the September sowing be pricked out from the seed-bed into dry sheltered south borders, 
three or four inches asunder, wholly to continue for spring and early summer lettuces. Through October 
to the beginning of November, it is advisable to prick a quantity of the Cos kinds thickly, in frames or 
under hand-lights, to have protection during the night, and in all bad Winter weather ; or, if deficient 
in frames and glasses, you may transplant a part hito a south border, to be arched over with hoops, and 
covered occasionally with mats ; or, as the young plants are tender in winter, protection, afforded in 
some of these ways, will preserve them more effectually in rigorous weather. During the winter, let 
those in frames, and the others under occasional shelter, have the free air on all mild dry days j but let 
them be defended always at night with the glasses, and with mats or other additional covering in intense 
frost or very rigorous weather : in the day-time, protect them from heavy rain, snow, and frost, but so 
as to admit the light ; also, in a severe season, you may cover the choicer plants in the open borders with 
mats, light straw-litter, or fern ; or occasionally with reed panels, or wattled hurdles, placed slantingly 
over to the wall. These coverings should be continued only in rigorous frosts, and removed when the weather 
is open. Then in the spring, about March or April, the plants in open borders, which have survived the 
winter, should be thinned, so as to stand from six to twelve inches apart ; and those thinned out may be 
planted in another compartment at the same distance. At the same period, all the lettuces which have 
wintered under frames, hand-glasses, or mats, should be transplanted into the open garden. In their 
final stations, the whole will advance to useful sizes in the course of April, or will reach full growth with 
stocky hearts about May : thus the table may be supplied till the early crops of spring succeed. The 
plants first sown in the current year come to have good heads in June and July. Winter and early spring 
lettuce may be further accelerated by transplanting some of the strongest autumn-raised plants, interme- 
diately protected, as above, by frames or glasses, into hot-beds, or the borders of forcing-stoves : trans- 
plant the lettuces to be thus forced, with balls of earth about the roots, in December, January, and 
February. Those excited by heat in December, will have cabbaged hearts by the beginning of March." 

3975. To save seed. " Leave or transplant either some of the early winter-standing plants, in March 
or April, or of the forwardest spring.sown crops, in May or beginning of June, fifteen inches asunder. 
They will produce ripe seed in August and September." (Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Endive. — Cichorium Endivia, L. Si/7ig. Polyg. ^qu. L, and Cicho- 
racecB, J. Chicoree des Jardins, Fr. ; Endivie, Ger. ; and E7idivia, Ital. 

3976. The endive is a hardy annual, a native of China and Japan, and introduce4 
1548. The root-leaves are numerous, large, sinuate, toothed, and smooth ; the stem 
rises about two feet high, is branched, and produces pale-blue flowers in July and 
August. 

3977. 'Use. It is cultivated for the stocky head of leaves, which, after being blanched 
to take away the bitter taste, are used in salads and stews in autumn, winter, and spring- 
It is in great repute both in England and on the continent. 

3978. The varieties are — 

Green curled-leaved ; principal sort for the main crops ( Broad-leaved Batavia ; of largest upright growth. 
Wliite curled-leaved I 

3979. Estimate of sorts. " All the sorts are eligible for culture; but allot, principally, 
the green curled for the main crops of autumn and winter endive, this being of tlie most 
stocky full growth, and hardiest to stand severe weather. As to the others, allot a smaller 
portion of the white curled for early summer and autumn use : of the broad-leaved kind, 
provide a moderate crop for autumn, till November or December ; being by some 
esteemed preferable for stew^s and soups, though not much used in salads." 

3980. Propagation. All the varieties are raised from seed, of which, for a seed-bed 
four feet wide by ten in length, half an ounce is sufficient. 

3981. Times of sowing. The proper seasons are. May for a smaller early crop ; and principally June and 
July to the beginning of August ; for full and succession crops, all autumn and winter, till the following 
wring. For, if sown earlier than the middle of May or beginning of June, they will mostly run to stalk 
the same season, before attaining mature useful growth. If any are required for early young summer 
endive, sow only a small portion of the white curled, in April or May, as the plants will soon run to seed. 
In the middle or towards the end of May, you may begin sowing moderately of the different sorts ; but do 
not sow fully till nearly the middle of June, that the plants may st^nd without running the same year. 
About the twelfth and twcnty-fifth of that month, also at the beginning and middle of July, sow the maiu 



656 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



and succession crops for autumn and winter ; and a finer smaller sowing about the beginning of August, 
for late supplies in the end of winter and following spring. 

3982. Culture in the seed-bed. Sow each sort separately in beds of rich mellow earth, in an open situ- 
ation ; scattering the seeds thinly, and rake in the seed. When the plants are up an inch or two in growth, 
thin them moderately, where in clusters, that they may have room to grow stronger and stocky for trans- 
planting. But if a portion are sown in soil of sufficient depth, and thinned to the distances mentioned 
under transplanting, instead of being moved, they may be expected to yield heads of the finest kind, under 
the same culture as is given to the others. 

S983. Transj)lantmg, As the plants attain a sufficient growth, being from four to six 
inches high, or in a month or five weeks from the time of sowing, proceed to transplant 
the successive crops. The ground should be light and rich on a dry sub-soil. Dig it a 
full spit deep ; set in shallow trenches, or drills the depth of a hoe, endive blanches with 
less trouble than if inserted on a level surface. The lines may be fifteen inches asunder ; 
the plants ten or twelve inches distant in the line. Drawing the strongest first, plant out 
portions from June till October ; but the principal removals will fall in August ; in 
which months three different plantings may be made for succession ; also for a general 
winter crop, at the beginning of September. While the plants are in hand, trim the ex- 
tremities of the leaves, and shorten the top roots a little. Water at planting ; and moder- 
ately afterwards once in two days, if the weather be dry, till the plants take root. At the 
end of September, and in October, likewise plant some in a warm dry border, to stand 
the winter more effectually. Also, in the last fortnight of October or beginning of 
November, it would be proper to insert some stout plants thickly on a bank of dry light 
soil, raised a foot or two behind, sloping to the south. Thus they will remain drier in 
winter, and will be preserved more securely from rotting in that season. The bed might 
be also defended in severe weather with frames and glasses, or with ah occasional awning 
of mats or sail-cloth. 

3984. Grange, of Kingsland, transplants in October, on sloping banks, at the base of hedges or walls ; or 
if these are not to be had, he forms banks with a slope of 45 degrees facing the south. The width of the 
face of the bank measures five feet ; along it he places four rows of pantiles stuck more than half way into 
the earth with the convex side to the sun. A plant of endive is then placed opposite the concave side of 
each tile, the latter serving to keep its leaves dry. In winter these banks are covered with dippings of 
hedges or straw to keep them dry, and to exclude the frost. 

398.'5. Blanching. As the transplanted crops advance to full growth, stocky and full in the heart, some 
should have the leaves tied up every week or fortnight, to blanch or whiten, and to render them tender, 
crisp, and mild-tasted. Perform tliis in dry days ; and in winter, when the weather is dry without frost. 
Using strings of fresh bass, or small osier twigs, tie the leaves regularly together a little above the middle, 
moderately close. If the soil be light and dry, earth them up half way ; but if moist, merely tie them. 
The two curled sorts, if neatly earthed up, will branch pretty well without being tied. The Batavian, from 
its loftier, looser growth, in every case hearts and blanches better with a bandage. The blanching will be 
completed sometimes in a week, when the weather is hot and dry ; at others, it may take a fortnight or 
three weeks ; after which the endive should be taken up for use, or it will soon rot, in six days or less, 
especially if much rain fall. To save the trouble of tying, this esculent is also occasionally blanched by 
setting up flat tiles or boards on each side of the plants, which, resting against other in an angular form, 
and confined with earth, exclude the light. Further, endive may be blanched under garden-pots, or 
blanching-pots, in the manner of sea-kale. In the heat of summer and autumn, tying up is best ; but in 
wet or cold weather, to cover the plants preserves while it blanches them. 

3986. Occasional shelter. At the approach of severe frost, cover some thickly with straw-litter. Also 
plunge a portion into a raised bank of light dry earth, under a glass-case, or covered shed, open to the 
south. Protect with litter in rigorous weather ; but uncover, and give plenty of air on mildxlays. 

3987. To save seed. " Allot some of the strongest old plants in February or March, if any remain ; other- 
wise, sow seed in March or April, and transplant or thin the plants to twelve or fifteen inches' distance. 
They will shoot, and the seed ripen in autumn." 

SuBSECT. 3. Succory, or Wild Endive. — Cichorium Intybus, L. {Eng. Bot. 539.) Syrin 
genesia Folygamia ^qualis, L. and Cichoracece, J. Chicoree Sauvage, Fr. j Gemeine 
Cichorie, Ger. ; and Cicoria, Ital. 

S988. The succory, or chiccory, is a hardy perennial not uncommon in calcareous wastes 
and by road sides. The whole plant greatly resembles the common broad-leaved endive ; 
the leaves are runcinated ; the stem rises from two to four and five feet high, producing 
blue flowers from June to August. The plant is but little cultivated in gardens in this 
country, though it is in much repute on the continent, and especially in Italy. It has 
been grown in the fields, in France and England, as a fodder for cattle, when coming into 
flower ; and is at present much cultivated in Holland and Flanders, for the roots, which 
are dried, and ground, and used on almost every part of the continent, partly along with, 
and partly as a substitute for coffee, by those who cannot afford to use that article 
genuine : but Miller and other English authors on horticulture do not notice it as an 
article for the garden. 

3989. Use. The leaves are blanched and used as those of endive, or during winter* 
forced in the dark, and so blanched. In this state it is the Barbe de Capucin of the 
French. It is also sown thick in frames, and in the open air, and when it has produced 
two rough leaves, cut as a small salad. When lettuce or garden-endive is scarce, chic- 
cory can always be commanded as salading by those who possess any of the most 
ordinary means of forcing. The roots cut in pieces, dried and ground, afford a powder, 
which Dr. Howison (Caled. Hort. Mem. iv. 132.) thinks preferable to that of coffee ; and 
Dr. Duncan {Disc, to Caled. H. S. 1820) is of opinion that the plant might be cultivated 
with great national advantages, as a substitute for that exotic berry. About Bruges, the 



Book I. 



DANDELIOF, CELERY. 



C57 



roots are scraped and boiled, and eaten along with potatoes, or with a sauce of butter and 
vinegar. 

3990. Varieties. The French have the common large-leaved, the chicoree a nnvcl, or 
cnfe-chicoree, with large white fleshy roots, and the variegated chiccory. 

3991. Culture. Isaac Oldacre, an excellent practical gardener, who experienced the advantages of cul- 
tivating this plant in the Imperial gardens near Petersburgh, gives the following directions, " It should 
be sown in the end of June or beginning of July, on a rich piece of ground, broad-cast, in the same manner 
as endive ; when the leaves begin to cover the ground, thin out the plants, leaving those that remain on 
the beds from three to four inches apart ; those pulled out may be planted into other beds, at the same 
distance as tliose which are left to remain ; keep them clear from weeds, and if the leaves grow very 
strong, and shade the roots much, cue them off within one inch of the 
ground. The end of September or beginning of October is the proper 
time to shift the roots ; the leaves should be first cut off with care, so as 
not to destroy the hearts of the plants, then dig up the roots, shorten 
them, and plant them in pots or portable boxes, with a dibble, very close 
together, in rich mould ; give them v/ater when dry, and shelter them in 
severe frosts, by a light covering of litter. After they are well rooted, 
the pots or boxes, as wanted, are to be removed into the mushroom-house 
or cellar, where they must be entirely excluded from light, in order to 
blanch the leaves, which will be effected in six or seven days. SuccOry 
will thrive in a heat of sixty degrees, but it is best to keep it in a lower 
temperature. If the roots are strong, each pot or box will bear cutting 
twice, after which they should be removed, and changed for the succes- 
sion, as the leaves of the future growth become bitter. {Ilort. Trans. 
vol. iii. p. 139.) 

3992. Crop in cellars. On the continent, the roots are taken up on the 
approach of winter, and stacked in cellars in alternate layers of sand, so 
as to form ridges with the crowns of the plants on the surface of the ridge. 
Here, if the frost be excluded, they soon send out leaves in such abund- 
ance as to afford a supply of salad during winter. If light is excluded, 
the leaves are perfectly blanched, and in this state are known under the 
name of Barbede Capucin. On ship-board it is customary to use a barrel of sand with numerous holes 
{Jig. 470.), or a hamper, for the same purpose. 

3993. To save seed. Proceed as directed for endive. 

SuBSECT. 4. Dandelion. — Leontodon Taraxacum, L. {Eng. Bot.') Syngeyi. Polygam. 
JEqu. L. and Cichoracece, J. Dents de Lion, or Pisse-en-lit, Fr. ; Lowenzahn, Ger. ; 
and Piscia in let to, Ital. 

3994. TAe dandelion is a hardy perennial, a native of Britain, well known among gar- 
deners as a troublesome weed, but which may also be used as a salad, and as a substitute 
for cofiee. 

3995. Use. The leaves in early spring, when just unfolding, afford a very good in- 
gredient in salads. The French sometimes eat the young roots, and the etiolated leaves, 
with thin slices of bread and butter. When blanched, the leaves considerably resemble 
those of endive in taste. The root is considered an equally good substitute for coffee as 
chiccory, and may, like that plant, be stored in cellars or barrels for producing winter 
salad. (Caled. Hort. Mej)i. iv. 138.) 

3996. Culture. Though regularly produced in the London market, it is seldom or never cultivated, being 
generally to be found in sutticient luxuriance by the sides of hedges and dry ditches. It might easily be 
propagated either by seeds or roots ; and, if introduced as a garden-plant, should have a rich deep soil, and 
be carefully tied up, and earthed round, to blanch it effectually. Cut off all the flowers as they appear, to 
prevent the dispersion of the seed, and the weakening of the plant. When salad is scarce, the dandelion 
might be dug up from road sides in winter, and forced in pots, like succory. 

SuBSECT. 5. Celery- — Apium graveolens, Ij. (Eng. Hot. 1210.) Pent. Dig. L. and 
XJmbellifercB, J. Ache, Fr. ; jEppich, Ger. ; and Appio, Ital. 

3997. The celery is a hardy biennial plant, a native of Britain, and known in its wild 
state by the name of smallage. It is frequent by the sides of ditches, and near the 
sea, where it rises with wedge-shaped leaves, and a furrowed stalk producing gi-eenish 
flowers in August. The whole plant has a rank coarse taste, and the effects of cultiv- 
ation in producing from it the mild sweet stalks of celery are not a little remarkable. 
A head of celery, we are informed (Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. ii. p. 297.), was dug up on 
the 4th of October, 1815, at Longford, near Manchester, which weighed 9 lbs. when 
washed, with the roots and leaves still attached to it, and measured four feet six inches in 
height. It was of a red sort, perfectly solid, crisp, and firm, and remarkably v^ell flavored. 

3998. Use. The blanched leaf-stalks are used raw, as a salad, from August till 
March ; they are also stewed, and put in soups. In Italy, the unblanched leaves are 
used for soups, and when neither the blanched nor the green leaves can be had, the seeds 
bruised, form a good substitute. The root only of the variety called the celeriac is used, 
and Sabine informs us (iiforf. Trans, vol. iii.) "it is excellent in soups, in which, whether 
white or brown, slices of it are used as ingredients, and readily impart their flavor. 
With the Germans, it is also a common salad, for which the roots are prepared by 
boiling, until a fork will pass easily through them ; after they are boiled, and become 
cold, they are eaten with oil and vinegar. They are also sometimes served up at table, 
stewed with rich sauces. In all cases, before they are boiled, the coat and the fibres 

U u 




658 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



of the roots, which are very strong, are cut away ; and the root is put in cold water, or 
the lire, not in water previously boiling." 
3999. Varieties. These are — 

The common upright Italian I The tumip-rooted, or celeriac, the cele- longer in spring. It is grovrn to a 

The large hollow upright ri-rave, of the French, and the kiwtt- large size in the neighborhood of 

The soM-stalked upright ceHerie, of the Germans. This is hardier Hamburgh, and sometimes imported 

The large red-stalked upright | than the other kinds, and will contmue for the London market. 

4000. Estimate of soi-ts. The first three sorts are preforable for general culture. The red variety is 
rather coarse for salads, but it is hardy to stand the winter, and well adapted for soups and stews. ^ The 
turnip-rooted is cultivated on account of its root, which is fit for use in September and October, and may 
be preserved in sand through the winter. 

4001. Propagatioji. All the sorts are rai&cd from seed ; and half an ounce is reckoned 
sufficient for a seed-bed four feet and a half wide by ten feet in length, of the upright 
sorts ; but for celeriac, a quarter of an ounce will be enough for a bed four feet 
square. 

4002. Soil. Celery delights in a soil rather moist, rich in vegetable mould, but not 
rank from new unrotted dung. 

4003. Times of soiviiig. The most forward crop is slightly forced : any of the 
varieties may be sown in the spring, in the open garden, at two or three different times, 
from the 21st of March till the first week in May; but the principal sowing should be 
made in the first fortnight of April. 

4004. Earlj/ crop. ■ " For early summer and autumn celery : sow a sm.all portion towards the end of 
February, in 'a moderate hot-bed. When the young plants are about two inches high, prick out some 
into a warm border, two or three inches apart, or rather into a second slight hot-bed, if before the 21st of 
March, as well to protect the plants as to expedite their growth for final planting. As soon as the leaves 
are six inches high, in May or June, transplant them into trenches for blanching, as directed below for 
the main crops, but as these early-sown plants wiU not continue long in full growth, before many of them 
will pipe or run, you should plant only a moderate crop, for a temporary supply : when they are advanced 
in the trenches from eight to twelve inches in growth, begin to earth them up several inches on both sides 
each row ; continue earthing up by degrees as they rise higher, till they are whitened from six to twelve 
inches in length ; when they may be digged up as wanted." 

4005. Main crops. " To raise the main crops for summer, autumn, and winter, 
make a considerable sowing at the commencement of April. Sow in beds of light mellow 
earth, and rake in the seed lightly and regularly. In very dry weather, give moderate 
watering both before and after the plants come up. When they are two, three, or four 
inches high, thin the seed-bed, and prick out a quantity at successive times into inter- 
m.ediate beds, three or four inches asunder. Water those removed, and till they have 
struck." 

4006. Judd sows about the middle of January in a warm situation, on very rich ground, protecting it by 
mats at night. When the plants are from two to three inches high, he pricks out into a nursery-bed, 
immersing the plants, as he draws them, in water, so as they may remain moist while out of ground. 
The plants remain in the nursery-bed till they become "very strong." {Ilort. Trans, vol. ii.) 

4007. Walker, a gardener, near Manchester, grows the red celery ; sows for the early crop about the 
1st of March, and for the late crop about the 1st of April. "The seed-bed is formed of fresh, dark, 
loamy soil, mixed with old rotten dung, half and half, and placed on a hot-bed. The nursery or 
** transplanting bed is formed with old hot-bed dung, very well broken, laid six or seven inches thick, on 
a piece of ground which has lain some time undisturbed, or has been made hard by compression. The 
situation should be sunny. The plants are- set six inches apart in the dung, without soil, and covered with 
hand-glasses. They are watered well when planted, and frequently afterwards. By hardening the soil 
under the dung in which the plants are set, the root is formed into a brush of fibres ; and by thus pre- 
venting the pushing of a tap-root, the plant never runs to seed before the following spring." {Caled. Ilort, 
Mem. vol. ii.) 

4008. Transplanting into trenches. " When either the plants left in the seed-bed, or 
those removed, are from six to twelve inches high, or when the latter have acquired a 
stocky growth, by four or five weeks' nurture in the intermediate bed, transplant them 
into trenches for blanching. For this purpose allot an open compartment. Mark out 
the trenches a foot wide, and from three feet to three and a half distance ; dig out 
each ti%nch lengthwise, a spade in mdth, and a light spit deep, that is, six or eight 
inches. Lay the excavated earth smoothly in the intervals, making the edges of the 
trenches equally full and straight ; also loosen the bottom moderately, in a level order, to 
receive the plants. Before inserting them, it would essentially strengthen the soil to 
apply some good rotten dung in each trench two or three inches thick, and let it be 
digged in at the bottom regularly, a moderate depth. Then having lifted the plants, just 
trim any long straggling tops of the leaves and fibres of the roots ; also slip off side 
shoots ; plant a single row along the bottom of each trench, four or five inches apart. 
Give a good watering directly ; and occasionally after, if the weather be dry, till the 
l>lants take root and show a renewed growth. Continue planting out a monthly succes- 
sion in June, July, August, and September ; thus providing for a supply from July and 
August of the present summer throughout the course of autumn and winter, till May in 
the following spring." 

4009. Jiidd prepares his ground for transplanting, by trenching it two spades deep, mixing with it in the 
operation a good dressing of well reduced dung from the old forcing-beds. He says, " I give it a second 
trenching, that the dung may be the better incorporated with the mould, and then leave it in as rough a 
state as possible, tiU my plants are ready to be put out. In the ground thus prepared, I form trenches 
iweaty inches v/ide, and six inches deep, at six feet distance from each other, measuring from the centre 



Book I. 



CELERY. 



650 



Oi each trench. Before planting, I reJuce the depth of tlie trenches to three inclics, by digging in suf- 
ficient dang to fill them so much up. At the time of planting, if the v%-eathcr be dry, the trenches arc 
well watered in the morning, and the plants are put in^ six inches apart, in the ron% in the evening, care 
being taken by the mode above mentioned, to keep the libres quite wet whilst out of ground ; r;s they arcs 
drawn from the nursery-bed, the plants are dressed for planting, and then laid regularly in the gardenlpan. 
The trenches in which my rows of celery are planted, being so very shallow, the roots of the plants grow- 
nearly on a level with the' surface of tlie' ground : this I consider particularly advantageous ; for as con. 
siderable cavities are necessarily formed on each side vv-hen the moulding takes place, all injurj- from stag- 
nant water or excess of moisture is prevented. The trenches, when planted, are watered as may be 
required." He adds, " that he prepares his ground for celery during the winter, and avoids putting mucii 
of a crop in the space between the trenches, especially one that grows tall, as he finds celery does best, when 
it grows as open as possible." 

4010. IValker makes his trenches at four feet distance, and eighteen inches wide, twelve deep, and filled 
nine inches with a compost of fresh strong soil, and well rotted dung ; three fourths dung, and one fourth 
soiL Old hot-bed dung is thebe>t. The ptants should be taken up with as much dung as will conveniently 
adhere to the roots, and the side shoots are removed from the stems ; they are then set v>ith the hand at 
nine or ten inches apart in the centre of each trench ; it is necessary to water well until they are ready to 
be earthed up, but not .afterwards. 

401 1. I.au ii'ij ir\ As the plants in the trenches rise from ten to fifteen inches high, 
Ahc-rcrombie begins to lar.d up for blanching, observing " to trim in the earth gently, 
when first raistd to the stems, with a hoe or spade, but mostly the latter. When the 
plants are of more advanced grov.-iii, earth them up equally on both sides each row, 
three, four, or five inch.es. according to the strength and height of the different crops. 
Ptepeat this once a weeh cr fortniglit. till by degrees they are landed up from twelve 
inches to two feet, in order to blanch them of some considerable length. Continue thus 
landing up the different crops from July till February, As the autumnal and main 
winter crops attain full growth, give them a final landing up near the tops, which ivill 
increase the length of the blanched part, and al-o proicct the latter crops more effectually 
during the winter." 

4012. Judd, in landing up celery, does " not think it well to load the plants with too much mould at first ; 
the two first mouldings, tlierefore, are done very sparingly, and only with the common draw-hoe, forming 
a ridge on each side of the row, and leaving tiie plants in a hollow, to receive the full benefit of the rain 
and waterings. Vslien the plants are strong enough to bear six inches heigh.t of mould, the moulding is 
done with the spade, taklrg care to leave basis enough to support the mass of mould which will ultimately 
be used in the ridge, and still keeping for some time the plants in a hollow, as before directed. The process 
of moulding is continued through the autumn, gradually diminishing the breadth of the top, until at last 
it is drawn to as sharp a ridge as possible to stand the winter.' In the operation of moulding it is necessary, 
in order to prevent tlie earth from falling into the heart of the plant, to keep the outer leaves as close 
together as possible : for this juirpose, before i begin the moulding, I take long strands of bass matting, 
tied together till of sulficient length to answer for an entire row ; and I fasten this string to the first plant 
in the row, then pass it to the next plant, giving it one twist round the leaves, and so on, till I reach the 
other end, where it is again fastened; when the moulding is finished, the string is easily unravelled, by 
beginning to untwist it at the end where it was last fastened." 

4013. Walker " having removed the lateral shoots, the leaves of each plant being held together with 
one hand, the soil, pulverised, is drawn round witl: the other, taking care not to earth up too high at once, 
nor too close. The heart should always be left quite free. This may be repeated about once a fortnight, 
until the plants are ready for use." 

4114. Late crop. " For late spring celery to stand till the end of May in the returning 
spring, without running considerably, it is expedient to make a small late sowing at the 
commencement of INIay. Tlie plants when six vreeks old may be pricked on interme- 
diate beds in rows, six inches by three asunder ; to remain till September or October ; 
then transplant them into moderate trenches ; as they advance in growth, earth them up 
a little in winter ; and, fitially, in the spring, in February or March." 

4015. Occasional shelter. On the approach of frost, take up a part of the crop, and 
lay it by under cby sand for winter use. To preserve tiie plants left in the bed, lay some 
long diy- litter over the tops; which remove in every interval of mild v,-eather." It is a 
common complaint that veiy fine looking celery is often found to be rotten at the base 
of the leaf-stalks ; the fact being, tlmt when celeiy is full grown and the blanching com- 
pleted, it begins to decay, and will not keep good in tlie ground for more than a month 
at most. Some, therefore, take up and preserve in dry sand ; but in " that siti^tion it 
soon becomes tough and dry. The best mode seems to be that of forming successive 
plantations. " 

4016. Taking the crop. " It is best to begin at one end of a row, and dig clean down 
to the roots, which then loosen with a spade, tliat they may be drawn up entire without 
breaking the stalks." 

4017. Cultivation of celeriac. The times of sowing are the same as for the other sorts. 
Celeriac requires a rich well manured soil, and,, according to an account communicated 
by Lord Stanhope to Sabine (Hort. Trans, iii.), the plants are i-aised on a hot-bed 
under glass, and transplanted when two or three inches high to another hot-bed, and set 
one inch and a half apart. " In tlie beginning or middle of June they are transplanted into 

a flat bed in the open air, at the distance of fifteen inches from each other, and not in ' 
trenches like other celei-y. Tliey must l)e abundantly watered as soon as they are set 
out, and the watering must be repeated every other day, or, if the weather should be 
warm, every day. As they iiicrease in size, they will require a greater quantity of 
water, and they must be occasionally hoed. The roots will be fit for use in September 
or October." In a note to this paper, Sabine states, that he has been informed, that 

Uu 2 



&60 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the plan of giving excess of water is peculiar, and that the vigorous growth of the 
plant is more dependent on richness of soil than on any other cause. Abercrombie 
directs to earth up the bulbs four or five inches^ to blanch thera when they are full 
grown. 

4018. 2\> save seed. " Either leave some established plants in the spring where grow- 
ing ; or in Februarj-^ or March dig up a competent number, cut down the top leaves, and 
set the plants in the ground, full two feet asunder. They will produce seed in autumn." 

4019. Walker grows only red celery ; and in preparing plants for seed, chooses the most solid, of the 
reddest color, and the smallest size. When taken out of the transplanting-hed, the lateral shoots being 
removed, they should be planted in a dry warm situation, where the seed wUl ripen well. 

SuB6"ECT. 6. Mustard. — Sinapis, L. Tetradynamia SUiquosa, L. and Ci-uciferce, J. 
Smeve, Fr. ; Sevf, Ger. ; and Senajm, Ital. 

4020. Of mustard there are two species in cultivation, the black ajid the lohite ; an- 
nuals, and natives of Britain. 

4021. Tlie white mustard is the Sinapis alba, L. {Eng. Bot. t. 1677.) It grows na- 
turally in corn-fields, and flowers in June and July. The leaves are pinnatifid, the 
pod round and rough, and abruptly terminated. The seed is yellow, and, as well as 
the flowers, is larger than those of the black species. 

4022. Use. This species is cultivated chiefly as a small salad, and is used like cressea 
while in the seed ; when these are newly expanded, they are mild and tender ; but when 
the plants have advanced into the rough leaves, they eat rank and disagreeable. 

4023. Culture. For spring and summer consumption, sow once a week, or fortnight, in dry warm situ- 
ations, in February and March ; and afterwards in any other compartment. " In summer, sow in shady 
borders, if it be hot sunny weather; or have the bed shaded. Generally sow in shallow flat drills, frora 
three to six inches apart ; scatter the seed thick and regular, and cover in thinly with the earth, about a 
quarter of an inch. To fui-nish gatherings in winter, or early in spring, sow in frames or under hand- 
glasses ; and when the weather is frosty or very cold, in hot-beds and stoves, as directed for cress." 

4024. To save seed. Either sow a portion in March or April, to stand for that purpose ; or, for small 
supplies, leave some rows of the spring sowing, grown too large for salads ; they will ripen seed in 
autumn. 

4025. The black mustard is the iS*. nigra, L. {Eng. Bot. 969.) the seneve of the French. 
It is frequent in corn-fields. It is altogether a larger plant than the white, with much 
darker leaves, and their divisions blunter. The flowers are small, the pods smooth, and 
lying close to the stem. 

4026. Use. Black mustard is chiefly cultivated in fields for the miU,. and for medicinal purposes. It is 
sometimes, however, sowti in gardens, and the tender leaves used as greens early in spring. The seed- 
leaves, in common with those of the cress, radish, rape, &c. are sometin^ies used as a salad ingredient ; but 
the grand purpose for which the plant is cultivated is for seeds, which, ground, produce the well known 
condiment. If the seeds. Dr. Cullen observes, be taken fresh from the plant, and ground, the powder 
has little pungency, but is very bitter ; by steeping in vinegar, however, the essential oil is evolved, and 
the powder becomes extremely pungent. In moistening mustard-powder for tiie table, it may be re- 
marked, that it makes the best appearance when rich milk is used; but the mixture in this oase does not 
keep good for more than two days. The seeds of both the black and white mustard are often used in an 
entire state medicinally. 

4027. Culture for the 7niU. " To raise seed for flower of mustard, and other officinal occasions sow, 
either in March or April, generally the black sort, or occasionally the white, in any open compartment : 
or make large sowings in fields, where designed for public supply. Sow moderately thick, either in drills 
from six to twelve inches asunder, or broad-cast, and rake or harrow in the seed. When the plants are 
two or three inches in the growth, hoe, or thin them moderately, where too thick, and clear them from 
weeds. They will soon run up in stalks ; and in July or August return a crop of seed, ripe for gather- 
ing." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 7. Ra2)e. — Brassica Kapvs, L. var. oleifera, Dec. {Eng. Bot. t. 2146.) 
Tetrad. Siliq, L. and Crucifercey J. Navette, Fr. ; Repskohl, Ger. ; and N^ajjo sal~ 
vatico, Ital. 

4028. The rape is a biennial plant, a native of Britain, and distinguished by its glau- 
cous root-leaves, and yellow flowers, wliich appear in April. 

4029. Use. Rape is cultivated in gardens as a small salad herb, to be gathered 
young in the seed-leaves, and used in cresses and mustard. Like these, it has a warm 
flavor, and is recommended as a stomachic. The plant is also much used in agriculture. 

403G. Culture for small salading. Sow at the same time with cresses, mustard, &c. in winter and 
spring ; or at any season when smaU salading is required. Sow in drills or beds, and follow the culture 
directed for White Mustard. 

4031. To save seed. Transplant two or three plants any time during the summer, and they will flower 
and seed the second year abundantly. 

SuBSECT. 8. Corn-Salad, or Lamb-Lettiice. — Valeriana Locusta, L. ; Fedia olUoriaf 
Willd. {Eng. Bot. 811.) Triandria Monogyn. L. scoA Dipsacece, J. Mdche, Fr. ; 
Ackersalat, Ger. j and Valei-ianello, Ital. 

4032. The corn-salad is a diminutive annual plant, common in corn-fields or sandy 
soils. The leaves are long and narrow, of a pale glaucous hue, the lower ones rather 
succulent. The flowers are very small, pale-bluish, and collected into a close little 
corymb ; they appear in the open fields in April. When cultivated, it rises a foot high. 



Book I. 



GARDEN-CRESS, AMERICAN CRESS. 



661 



and flowers in March. Gerrard tells us, that foreigners using it while in England, led 
to its being cultivated in our gardens. 

4033. Use. It is used in salads through winter and early spring ; both as a substitute 
for common lettuce in those seasons, and to increase the variety of small salads. For 
these purposes it has long been a favorite plant in France, under the denomination of 
mdche, doucette, salade de chanoine, and jmvle grasse. 

4034. Propagation. It is raised from seed, of which a quarter of an ounce is sufficient for a bed four 
feet by five. 

4035. Times of sowing. " To answer the common demand, two or at most three sowings will be suffi. 
cient, viz. a principal sowing at the beginning or towards the middle of August ; a secondary sowing early 
in September, to furnish together crops in winter and early spring; and a smaller sowing in spring, the 
close of February or course of March, if the plants are required in continuation throughout that season 
though they are apt to get rank-tasted in warm dry weather. If wanted throughout summer, sow once 
a month, and cut the crop quite young." 

4036. Culture. " Sow in any bed of common mellow earth, broad-cast, and rake in the seed. When 
the plants are up, thin them two or three inches asunder, that they may have room to acquire some small 
stocky growth for gathering." 

4037. To save seed. " Leave some plants in spring ; they will produce seed in July or August." 
(Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Garden-Cress. — Lepidiiwi sativum, Li. {Zorn. Ic. 16.) Tetrad. Silic. L, 
and Cruciferce, J. Cresson, Fr. ; Gemeine Kresse, Ger. ; and Crescione, Ital. 

4038. r/ie garrfm-cms is a hardy annual plant, cultivated since 1548 ; but its native 
country is unknown. The cultivated plant rises with numerous small long leaves, 
curled or plain ; from which proceeds a stalk from fifteen to twenty inches high, fur- 
nished with white flowers, which blossom in June and July. The whole plant partakes 
strongly of the pungent smell and acrid taste which distinguish the Cruciferce. 

4039. Use. It is cultivated in gardens for the young leaves, which are used in salads, 
and have a peculiarly warm and grateful relish. It ranks among gardeners as the prin- 
cipal of the small salads. 

4040. Varieties. These are — 

The common plain-leafed ; principally I Curled-leaved ; equally good as a salad, I Broad-leaved ; less -cultivated for salad- 
cultivated I and preferable as a garnish mg, but grown for reai-ing tur- 

I keys, &c. 

4041. Propagation. All the varieties are raised from seed, of which one ounce or 
one eighth of a pint will suffice for a bed four feet by four feet. 

4042. TiiJies of sowing and site of the' crop. " Cress should be raised three or four times every month, 
as it may be in demand, to have crops delicately young in constant succession. For culture in the 
open garden, begin in the first, second, or third week in March, as a forward spring may bring mild 
weather or otherwise : allot some warm situation for the early spring sowings ; and if the weather take a 
cold turn, either put on a spare frame, or cover with matting between sijnset and sunrise. When spring 
is confirmed, sow in any open compartment. At the beginning of summer, the same ; but, in hot dry 
weather, either sow in a shady border, or if the situation be open, shade with mats in the middle of the 
day. For autumn sowings, when cold weather is approaching, allot some warm borders, and give occa- 
sional protection. When crops are in demand throughout winter, either sow in a moderate hot-bed, or in 
cradles to be placed in a stove ; pans filled with rotten tan are to be preferred to pots or boxes with mould. 
From the last fortnight of October till the first of March, it will be mostly fruitless to sow in the open 
garden ; but a terrace, sloping south under a frame, may be used at the decline of the year and most 
early part of spring, as the intermediate step between the open garden and hot-bed, if more within the 
means at command. During this interval, some market-gardeners sow it just within the glasses which 
cover larger plants." The cress is often raised on porous earthen-ware vessels, of a conical form, having 
small gutters on the sides, for retaining the seeds. These are called pyramids, are somewhat ornamental 
in winter, and afford repeated gatherings. 

4043. Process in sowing and subsequent cidture. " Having allotted a fine mellow soil to receive the seed, 
dig the surface, and rake it finally preparatory to sowing, which mostly perform in small, flat, shallow 
drills, four, five, or six inches asunder. Sow the seed very thick, and earth over very lightly, or but just 
thinly cover. Give occasional waterings in wavm dry seasons." 

4044. Taking the crop. " To gather cress in perfection, cut them while moderately young, either clean 
to the root, or only the tops of advanced plants. They will shoot again for future gathering, but the 
leaves will be hotter, and not so mild and tender as those of younger plants." 

. 4045. To save seed. " Either sow a portion in the spring for that purpose ; or leave some rows of any 
overgrown old crop in April and May. The plants will yield seed in autumn." 

SuBSECT. 10. American Cress. — Erysimum prcecox, Smith. (Eng. JBot. t. 1129.) 
Tetradynamia SUiquosa, L. and Cruciferce, J. Cresson d" Amenque, Fr. ; and Ameri- 
kanisher Kresse, Ger. 

4046. The American cress is a native of Britain, and found in watery places ; and 
was formerly considered as a variety of the common winter cress (E. Barbarea) ; but, as 
observed by Neill, it is only biennial ; while the common winter cress is perennial. 
It' has smaller leaves, more frequently sinuated ; the lower are lyre-shaped, and those on 
the stalk pinnatifid. It is often called black American cress, and sometimes French 
cress. 

4047. Use. It is generally liked ?s a winter cress and early spring salad, resembling 
in flavor the common winter cress, but rather more bitter. It is in demand in some 
families throughout the year. 

4048. Culture. It is raised from seed, which is sold by weight, and for every ten feet of drill, a quarter 
of an ounce will be requisite. " Sow in a bed of light dry earth, rather in drills nine inches apart, than 
broad-cast. For winter and spring use, make a cowing in the last fortnight of August, or beginning of 
September, on a warm sheltered border. If wanted throughout summer, sow every six weeks from March 
to August, giving a sunny or shady situation according to the advancement of the, season. Water occa- 

U u 3 



662 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part HI. 



sionally in dry hot weather. At the approach of winter, shelter the plants, by laying a few light twigs 
among them so as not to interfere with their growth ; and upon these, a covering of fern, reeds, or dry 
litter. The plants being cut, or the outside leaves stripped off, shoot again for another gathering." 

4049. To save seed. " Let a few choice plants, raised in spring, run j and they will ripen seed before 
the decline of summer." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 11. winter Cress. — Barbm-ea vidgm^, H. K. {Eng. JBot. 443.); Erysi- 
mum Barbarea, L. and Smith. Tetrad. Siliq. L. and Cruciferte, J. Barbare, Fr. ; 

Winter Kresse, Ger. ; and Erba di Santa Barbarea, Ital. 

4050. The winter cress is a well-known perennial plant, common in moist shady 
situations. The lower leaves are lyre-shaped, and the upper obovate and indented. The 
flower-stalk rises about a foot high, and produces yellow flowers from April to August. 
The whole plant is bitter and somewhat aromatic. Neill observes, " Some stUl con- 
sider the American cress of gardeners as a variety of this ; but after cultivating both 
for several years, we have found those to be right who regard them as distinct." A 
double variety of Barbarea is well known in the flovrer-border as the yellow rocket of gar- 
deners. 

4051. Use and culture. The same as the American cress. 

SuBSECT. 12. Water-Cress. — Nasturtium officinale, H. K. {Eng. Bot. t. 855.); Sisym- 
brium Nasturtium, L. Tetrad. Siliq. L. and Cruciferce, J. Cresson de Fontaine, Fr. ; 
Briinnenkresse, Ger. ; and Cressione di Sorgenti, Ital. 

4052. Water-cress is a creeping amphibious perennial, growing in wet ditches and 
slow running streams. The stems are spreading, declining or floating, if in water. Tlie 
leaves are alternate, pinnate, and somewhat lyre-shaped. Tlie flowers are white in a 
corymb, soon lengthened out into a spike in June and July. The plant, when growing 
in a rapid current, has its leaves lengthened ; and in this state, Martyn remai'ks, is some- 
times mistaken for the water-parsnep {Sium nodiflorum, L.), which commonly grows with 
it, and is deleterious. 

4053. The cultivation of the watcr-cress is said to have been first attempted in 1808, by Bradbury, at 
North fleet-Spring- Head, near Gravesend. This cultivator now grows five acres at Vv'est Hyde, near 
Rickmansworth : he sends the cress in hampers, each containing eight dozen hunches, to the London 
markets every day throughout the year, excepting Sundays, and in consequence of this and other supphes 
from artificial sources, the wholesale price of the article is reduced one half. There are now several culti- 
vators of water-cress at Hackney, Bayswater, Uxbridge, and other places. Water-cresses are also culti- 
vated near Paris. {Neill, in Hart. ZbM?-, 4S0.) 

4054. Use. It forms an excellent spring salad either alone or wdth brook -lime or 
scurvy-grass. It is a popular favorite in spring in most places ; and is eaten fasting, 
or with bread and butter, by those who have faith in its antiscorbutic virtues. The juice 
is decocted with that of scurvy-grass and Seville oranges, and fonns the popular remedy 
called spring juices. 

4055. Varieties. Bradbury considers that there are three, the green-leaved, the small brown-leaved, and 
the large brown-leaved. The green-leaved is the easiest cultivated, the small brown-leaved the hardiest, 
and the large brown the best for cultivation in deep water, and that preferred by this cultivator. 

4056. Culture. The most suitable description of water is a clear stream, and not more than an inch and 
half deep, running over sand or gravel ; the least favorable, deep still water on a muddy bottom. It is highly 
advantageous ta make the plantations in newly risen spring-water, as the plants not only thrive better in 
it, but in consequence of its being rarely frozen, they generally continue in vegetation, and in a good state 
for gatheinng through the whole winter season. The plants are^disposed in rows parallel with the course 
of the stream. In shallow water the distance between the rows is not more than eighteen inches, but in 
deep water it is as much as from five to seven feet. When the plants begin to grow in water one inch 
and a half deep, they soon check the current so as to raise the water to the height of three inches about 
the plants, which is considered the most favorable circumstance in which they can be placed. Where the 
plants are not in rows, the water is impeded in its course, and the plants are choaked up with weeds and 
the different matters which float down the stream ; and when the cress is grown in deep water, the roots 
are easily drawn out of the soil in gathering. The cress will not grow freely in a muddy bottom, nor will 
it taste well when there is mud about the roots j which should be carefully removed, and replaced by 
gravel or chalk. It is absolutely necessary to have a constant current, as where there is any obstruction'to 
the stream or flow of water, the plants cease to thrive. After the plants have been cut about three times, 
they begin to stock, and then the oftener they are cut the better ; in summer it is necessary to keep them 
very closely cut ; and in water of a proper depth, and with a good soil, each bed supplies a gathering 
once a-week. In winter the water should be i-ather deeper than in summer (four or five inches) ; to 
obtain this, the plants are left with more head, that the water may thus be impeded. 

4057. Beplanting. The most expensive part of tlie cultivation is the necessity of cleaning out and re- 
planting the beds twice a-year ; as the rnud quickly collects about the roots, and the duck-weed and other 
plants become intei-mixed with, and choak up the cress ; it is almost impossible to pick it in a fit state for 
market after the plantation has been made five or six months. The mode of replanting is ta remove all 
the roots of plants, beginning at the stream head, and then clear the bed of the stream from mud and rub- 
bish, which, however, it should be remarked, make excellent garden manure. From the crop of plants 
thus taken out, the youngest, and those with most roots, are selected ; these are placed on the gravel in 
rows at the requisite distance, with a stone on each plant, to keep it in its place. The times of renewing 
the beds are in May and June, and from September to November. The planting is done in succession, so 
that the crops may come regularly into cutting. Those planted in May are fit to cut in August, and those 
planted in November are ready to gather in the spring. 

4058. Culture in tvater-beds. Some market-gardeners who can command a small stream of water, grow 
the water-cress in beds sunk about a foot in a retentive soil, with a very gentle slope from one end to the 
other. Along the bottom of this bed, which may be of any convenient breadth and length, chalk or gravel 
is deposited, and the plants are inserted about' six inches' distance every way. Then, according to the 
slope and length of the bed, dams are made six inches high across it, at intervals ; so that when these dams 
are full, the w-iiter may rise net Isis tiian three inches on all the plants included in each. The water being 



Book I. 



SCURVY-GRASS, BURNET. 



663 



turned on will circulate from dam to dam; and the plants, if not allowed to run to flower, will afford 
abundance of young tops in all but the winter months. A stream of water, no larger than what will fill a 
pipe of one inch bore, will, if not absorbed by the soil, suffice to irrigate in this way an eighth of an 
acre. As some of the plants are apt to rot off in winter, the plantation should be laid dry two or three 
times a-year, and all weeds and decayed parts removed, and vacancies filled up. Cress grown in this way, 
however, is far inferior to that grown in a living stream flowing over gravel or chalk. 

4059. Taking the crop. The shoots are cut for market, not broken off, which is the usual mode of ga- 
thering the wild cress, and which latter practice is found to be verv injurious to the plants in the beds. 
{Hoj-t. Trans, iv. 540.) 

SuBSECT. 13. Brook-lutie. — Feronica beccabiinga, L. {Eng. Bot. 655.) Diandria 
Monogynia, L. and ScrophularincE, B. P. Beccabongue, Fr. ; Bachbunge, Ger. ; and 
Beccabungia, Ital. 

4060. The brook-lime is a perennial plant, a native of Britain, and common in rivu- 
lets and wet ditches. It has a trailing or procmnbent stem, furnished with smooth, dark- 
green, elliptical leaves, from the axillte of which proceed bunches of blue flowers in July. 

4061. Use. The young tops and leaves are used as a salad, like the water-cress, with 
which it is often mixed, being milder, more succulent, and only slightly bitterish in taste. 
In Scotland the sprigs of brook-lirne are brought to market under the name of ivater- 
jncrpie, and sold along with wall- cresses (well, or water-cresses), 

4062. Culture. The same as for tlie water-cress. 

SuBSECT. 14. Garden-rocket. — Brassica Eruca, L. {Schl: Hand. 2. t. 186.) Tetrad. 
Siliq. L. and CrucifercB. J. Roqnette cultivee, Fr. ; Raukette, Ger. ; and Ruca, Ital. 

4063. The garden-rocket is an annual plant, a native of Austria, and known in this 
country in 1573. Tlie stem rises two feet liigh, is upright and branchy, and furnished 
with smooth, pulpy, cut and toothed leaves. When in flower in July, it has a strong pe- 
culiar smell, almost fetid. Tlris plant is now neglected in Britain, but is still in use in 
several places on the continent. 

4064. Use. The leaves and tender stalks are used as salad ingredients, and form an 
agreeable addition to cresses and mustard early in spring. 

4065. Culture. Sow in a warm border early in February, and agaiji in March and April for successive 
crops. Thin the plants after they have produced the first rough leaf to three or four inches asunder, and 
keep them clear of weeds. If a supply is desired throughout the year, monthly sowings may be made ; and 
in autumn, under frames. 

4066. To save seed. Allow a few of the strongest plants of the spring sowing to come into flower ; they 
will produce abundance of seeds in August. 

SuBSECT. 15. Scurvy-grass. — Cochlearia officinalis. L. [Eng. Bot. 550.) Tetra- 
dynamia Siliculosa, L. and Cruciferts', J. Cransoii officinal, Fr. ; Loffelkraiit, Ger. ; 
and Coclearia, Ital. 

4067. The sctirvy-grass is a biennial plant, indigenous to most of our sea-shores, and, 
like the sea-pink (^Statice), growing also on inland mountains. The root-leaves are 
round ; those of the stem sinuated ; the whole plant is low and spreading, seldom rising 
above a foot. The flowers are white, and appear in April and May. 

4068. Use. The smaller leaves are occasionally used like the water-cress,« and some- 
times eaten between slices of bread and butter. Tlie plant is also occasionally used me- 
dicinally. 

4069. Farieiies. A tliick-leaved variety, called' the Dutch scurvy-grass, is cultivated 
in some gardens. 

4070. Culture. The plant may either be propagated from seed, or by dividing the roots. It delights in a 
sandy soil and a moist atmosphere, which it finds alike by the sea-shore and on lofty mountains. It will 
grow, however, almost any where, and is often found firmly established on old walls and ruins, sowing 
itself, and thus remaining many years. "When to be raised from seed, sow about July. Plants from a 
spring sowing seldom prosper. Abercrombie says, " Sow in drills eight inches apart and when the 
plants are up, thin them to six inches' distance ; these thinned out, may be transplanted into new beds. In 
the following spring, the succulent leaves will be fit for use. 

4071. To save seed. Leave some plants in flower in May, and they will ripen abundance of seed in July. 

SuBSECT. 16. Burnet. — Poterium Sanguisoi-ba, L. {Eng. Bot. t. 860.) Moncec. Po- 
lyan. L. and Rosacece, J. Petite Pimprenelle, Fr. ; Pimpernelle, Ger. ; and Pim- 
pinella, Ital. 

4072. The burnet is a hardy perennial plant, indigenous in Britain, and found in dry 
upland calcareous soils. The leaves are pinnated, and form a tuft next to the root ; but 
are alternate on the stem : the leaflets are partly round-shaped, partly pointed, and much 
serrated on the edgt's. The stem rises fifteen inches high, and the flowers form small 
greenish heads tinged with purple in July- 

4073. Use. Burnet-leaves are sometimes put into salads, and occasionally into soups, 
and they form a favorite herb for cool tankards. When slightly bruised, they smell 
like cucumber, and they have a somewhat warm taste. They continue green through the 
winter, when many other salad-plants are cut off, or in a state unfit for use. It was for- 
merly in much greater repute than at present. 

U u 4 



664 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4074. Propagation and cnltu7-e. The plant may be raised from seed ; of which half an ounce will suffice 
for a bed three feet by four. It may either be sown in spring or early in autumn. It may also be very 
readily propagated by parting the roots early in spring. When the plants are of two or three inches 
gro\vth, transplant into rows, or a bed, at six inches plant from plant Cut down all flower-stalks not 
intended for seed. 

SuBSECT. 17. Wood-Sorrel. — Oxalis acetosella, L. {Eng. Bot. 762.) Decan. Pentag. L. 
and Geraniacece, J. Oseille, Fr. ; Saiierampfer, Ger. ; and Acetosa, Ital. 
4075. The ivood-sorrel is an indigenous perennial plant, found in woods, and by 
hedge-sides, and in moist, shady situations. It has a scaly, bulbous, articulate root, and 
ternate, obcordate, hairy leaves. The flowers rise from tlie root singly, are of a pale flesh 
color, and appear in April and May. 

4076. Use. The leaves form a very grateful addition to salading, and communicate 
an agreeable relish to dishes of mashed greens. 

4077. Culture. The plant is readily propagated by dividing the roots, and may be planted in a moist 
shady situation in bog earth. Here, by preventing the plants from coming into flower, and cropping the 
herb of a part of the plantation two or three times in the season, a supply of fresh young leaves may be 
obtained from April to October. 

SuBSECT. 18. Small Salads. 
4078. By small salads gardeners and cooks understand the small herbs, or very young 
plants, which are used in the seed-leaves ; such as cress, mustard, radish, and rape ; also 
the lamb-lettuce. Others, such as son-el, are either pot-herbs or salad-herbs. Some- 
times the white cabbage, lettuce, endive, and succory, are also sown, to be cut in the 
seed-leaf. The sinall salads are occasionally used by themselves, when there is a de- 
ficiency of the greater salad-plants, the lettuce, endive, celery. Sec. But when both kinds 
can be had, they are in general combined. 

4079. Culture. Sow very thick in drills, or on beds of very finely pulverised soil, watering in dry wea- 
ther to accelerate germination and the succulency of the plants. £arly in spring sow under glass, or in a 
warm sheltered situation, and in winter in pots and boxes to be placed in some of the forcing-houses, 
or in the stove ; or sow in the borders of the forcing-houses, or in hot-beds or pits, &c. Observe, that a sup. 
ply is wanted in most families throughout the year. 

4080. Gathering. Cut off the seed-leaves and about half their foot-stalks, as soon as the former are ex- 
panded ; some prefer letting small salading grow till one or two of the proper leaves appear, in which 
case it is of a stronger flavor. 

Sect. VIII. Pot-herbs and Garnishings. 

4081. Pot-herbs and garnishings require but a very small portion of the kitchen-garden, 
perhaps not above two or three poles, even in the largest, and with tlie exception of 
parsley, marygold, and Indian cress, they are rarely found in those of the cottager. 

SuBSECT. 1. Parsley. — Apiian Petroselimim, L. Pent. Trig. L. and Umbelliferce, J. 
PersU, Fr. ; Petersilie, Ger. ; and Petroselino, Ital. 

4082. The parsley is a hardy biennial, a native of Sardinia, and introduced in 1548. 
It is so common as to be naturalised in several places both of England and Scotland. 
Tlie root-leaves are compound, and much curled in some varieties. The flowers are 
pale-yellow, and appear in June ; they have usually one leaflet at the origin of the uni- 
versal umbel ; and an involucre of from six to eight short folioles, fine almost as hairs, 
to the partial umbel. " It may be right to notice, that the poisonous plant called fool's 
parsley (^JEthusa Cynapium), a common weed in rich garden-soils, has sometimes been 
mistaken for common parsley. They are veiy easily distinguished : the leaves of fool's 
parsley are of a darker green, of a different shape, and, instead of the peculiar parsley 
smell, have, when bruised, a disagreeable odor. When tlie flower-stem of the fool's 
parsley appears, the plant is at once distinguished by what is vulgarly called its beard, 
three long pendent leaflets of the involucrum. The timid may shun all risk of mistake 
by cultivating only the curled variety. This last, it may be remarked, makes the prettiest 
garnish." {Neill, in Ed. Encyc.) 

4083. Use. The leaves of the two first varieties are used as pot-herbs at all seasons 
of the year ; also as a garnish. The third kind is esteemed for its large white carrot- 
shaped root, drawn in autumn and winter, like parsneps, for the table ; and occasionally 
to be used in medicine, being considered a remedy for the gravel. 

4084. Varieties. These are — 

The common plain-leaved ; seldom cultivated | The broad-leaved, or large-rooted Hamburgh ; 
The curled thick-leaved ; most esteemed | cultivated for its carrot-shaped root. 

4085. Culture of the pot-herb kinds. " One sowing in spring will mostly furnish young leaves all the 
year ; though to answer a constant demand, many persons make successive sowings from February to 
May. Some also sow early in autumn for young parsley in winter and spring ; but such a supply is bet- 
ter provided by cutting down established plants. Sow in a single drill, along the edge of any compart- 
ment, or occasionally in rows nine or twelve inches asunder. Draw small drills, something less than an 
inch deep; in which drop the seed moderately thick, and cover a little above half an inch. The plants 
will come up in tliree or four weeks, and when two or three inches high, may be gathered as wanted, 
all the summer, winter, and following spring, till May, when they will go to seed. Have always a young 
crop sown timely in the spring, to succeed the declining old plants. In gathering pot-herb parsley, cut 
close and regular. In summer, when the plants grow rank, yielding more leaves than can be used, cut 
them in close to the bottom, and they will shoot up stocky in a regular close growth. Observe also to do 



Book I. 



PURSLANE, TARRAGON, FENNEL. 



665 



the same in autumn, about the end of September, that the plants may form heads of fresh young leaves 
before winter. On the approach of frosty weather, protect them with haulm or reed panels, laid upon 
branches of birch or other light supports." 

4086. Culture of Ha7nburgh parsley. " To obtain large roots, allot a compartment where the soil is 
deep, and has been well digged. Any common mould will suit, if dry and not too rich. Sow in Fe- 
bruary, March, or early in April, in one or more beds j'either in drills nine inches asunder, or broad-cast, 
and rake in. The plants should be thinned to nine inches' distance, to give room for proper growth in 
the roots ; for use in August, September, October, and thence till the following spring. On the approach 
of frost, take up some roots, and preserve them in sand. A sowing may be made in the third week in 
June, where young roots are wanted in winter." 

4087. To save seed. " Permit some old plants to run to stalks in May ; they wiU produce plenty of seed, 
ripening in July or August." {Abeixromdie.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Purslane Portidaca olcracea, L. [Plant, grass, 123.) Dodec. Monog. L. 

and Portulacece, J. Pnurpier, Fr. ; Portulak, Ger. ; and Porcellana, Ital. 

4088. The purslane is an annual plant, a native of South America, and introduced in 
1 652. It has a round, smooth, rather procumbent stem, and diffused branches ; the 
leaves somevfhat wedge-shaped and fleshy; tlie flowers, yellow and sessile, appear in 
June and July. 

4089. Use. The young snoots and succulent leaves are esteemed cooling, and are 
used in spring and summer as an ingredient in salads, and as pot-herbs and pickles. 
The plant was formerly much more in request than at present. 

4090. Varieties. There are two varieties of the P. oleracea cultivated, the green and the golden. 
The latter is by some considered as a distinct species (P. satiua). It has rather larger leaves, and is less 
succulent than the P. oleracea. 

4G91. Culture. Both sorts are raised from seed, and for a bed four feet by four feet, sown either broad- 
cast or in drills, nine inches apart, one eighth of an ounce will suffice. " Each variety is somewhat ten- 
der; the green, which is usually pi-eferred, is perhaps rather the hardiest. An early crop may be sown 
in February or March, on a moderate hot-bed : the plants will require the -'id of a gentle heat till the 
middle of May ; when the seed may be sown in a warm border. If a continued succession is required, 
sow every month during summer, till August, or while the plant can be raised ; generally in small drills, 
from three to six inches asunder. The plants will soon come up : they should remain where sown. In 
very drj' hot weather, water thrice a week. The shoots may be gathered for use when they are from two 
to five inches in height, and are well furnished with leaves. Cut them off low, and the bottom part will 
soon sprout out again." 

4092. To save seed. " Leave some of the first open-border plants to run ; they will give ripe seed in 
autumn." {Abercroynbie.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Tarragon. — Artemisia Dracuncidus, 'L. (Blackw. t. 116.) Si/7ig. Polyg. 
Super. L. and Corymhiferce, J. L' Estragon, Fr. ; Dragioi, Ger. ; and Dragon- 
cello, Ital. 

4093. The taii-agon is a perennial plant, a native of Siberia, but cultivated in our gar- 
dens from the time of Gerrard, in 1548. Its branched stem rises a foot and a half high, 
and has narrow leaves, green on botli sides. The smell of the plant is fragrant, and its 
taste aromatic. 

4094. Use. The leaves and tender tips are used as an ingredient in pickles. A 
simple infusion of the plant in vinegar makes a pleasant fish sauce. In France it is em- 
ployed, on account of its agreeable pungency, to correct the coldness of salad-herbs ; it is 
also put in soups, and other compositions. 

4095. Culture. " Avoid planting tarragon in a wet tenacious soil ; as in that case the root is apt to 
perish in a severe winter. This herb may be propagated in the spring, by seed ; or, more expeditiously, 
by offset bottom slips, or sections of the root and top, planted in spring or autumn : also plentifully in 
summer, from June to August, by slips or cuttings of the spring stalks or branch shoots. The germs are 
to be planted in beds or borders from six to nine inches apart, and properly watered. They will quickly 
increase in a branchy head, for use the same year, to gather green, as wanted ; and a portion may be 
dried and housed for winter. When the stems are running up for flower, if seed is not wanted to be 
saved, cut them down ; which will force up fresh young shoots. It would be proper, towards the end of 
autumn, to transplant some ftiU plants close under a south fence, to preserve them more effectually 
in winter, and cause an earlier production of young tops in spring." 

4096. To obtain green tarragon in ivinter. " Plant some stocky roots in a hot-bed, or in pots placed in 
a hot-house." {Abercro7?ibie.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Fennel. — Anethum Foeniculum, L. {Eng. Pot, t. 1208.) Pent. Trig. L. 
and Umbelliferce, J. E" Aneth, Fr. ; Dillhraut, Ger. ; and Aneto, Ital. 

4097. The fennel is a perennial plant, naturalised in England, and found in chalky 
soils. The plant rises with finely cut leaves, and capillary leaflets, on a smooth, dark- 
green, branched, tubular stalk, to the height of five or six feet. On the summit are pro- 
duced umbels of gold-colored flowers, in July and August. The whole plant is aro- 
matic, and has long been an inmate of the garden. 

4098. Use. The tender stalks of common fennel are used in salads; the leaves 
boiled, enter into many fish sauces ; and raw, are garnishes for several dishes. The 
blanched stalks of the variety caWed jinochio are eaten with oil, vinegar, and pepper, as a 
cold salad, and tliey are likewise sometimes put into soups. 

4099. The varieties are — 

The common, or sweet I very tender. " Owing to the peculiar nature of this variety," 

Dark-CTeen-leaved | Neill observes, ""it is more tender than the common fennel, and 

Dwarf, or finochio- This variety is characterised by a I often perishes in the course of the winter. Misled by this cir- 

tendencyin the stall' to swell to a considerable thickness. cumstance, several horticultviral writers describe it as an An- 

. This tliickened part is blanched by earthing up, and is then | nual species, under the appellation A, segetwn," 



666 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4100. Propagation. Thoj' are all raised from seed, of which half an ounce is sufficient for a seed-bed 
four feet by six feet. Sometimes also, they are raised from ofifsets from the old plants, where only a few 
are wanted. " Sow in the spring in light earth, either in drills from six to twelve inches apart, or 'broad- 
cast and raked in. When ihe plants are three or four inches high, thin or transplant a quantity fifteen 
inches asunder. As the roots of old plants divide into side ofltsets, these may be slipped off in' spring 
summer, or autumn, and planted a foot apart. They will produce immediate leaves for present supply* 
and in continuance ; or for an immediate larger supply of leaves, you may procure some established fiili 
roots, and plant as above ; let them be well watered." 

4101. Subsequent culture. " The same plants remain several years by the root : but as fennel sends up 
strong stems for seed in summer, these, or a part of them, should be cut down, to encourage a production 
of young leaves below, in succession. It is apt to spread more than is desirable, if suffered to seed. The 
swelling stems of the finochio variety, when of some tolerable substance, should be earthed up on each 
side five or six inches to blanch them white and tender. This will be effected in ten davs or a fortnight • 
and by successive sowings, or cutting down plants during summer, successive crops of blaiiched stalks may 
be had from June to December." 

4102. To save seed. Permit some of the best stalks to shoot ; they will produce large umbels of seed 
in autumn. {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 5. BUI. — Anethum graveolens, L.. {Blackw. t. 545.) Pent. Trig. L. and 
UmbeUiferce, J. VAneth, Fr. ; Dill. Ger. ; Aneto, Ital. 

4103. The dill is a hardy biennial plant, a native of Spain, and introduced in 1570. 
The plant is of upright growth, somewhat similar to fennel, but smaller. It has finely- 
divided leaves, and a slender single stem, bearing an umbel of flowers at top, which ap- 
pear in June and July. The whole plant is powerfully aromatic. 

4104. Use. The leaves are used to heighten the relish of some vegetable pickles, 
particularly cucumbers ; and also occasionally in soups and sauces. The whole herb is 
also used in medical preparations. 

4105. Culture. It is raised from seed, of which half an ounce is sufficient for a bed three feet by four 
feet. " Sow annually in February, March, or April, or occasionally in autumn, as "soon as the seed is 
ripe, to come up stronger in the spring, in any open compartment ; either in drills, six or twelve inches 
apart ; or broad-cast thinly, and raked in evenly. The plants sliould remain where raised ; and may be 
thinned moderately, should they rise too thick. They will shoot up in stalks, with leaves and seed-um- 
bels in summer and autumn, for use in proper season." 

4106. To save seed. " Leave some plants where raised : they will furnish plenty of seed in autumn. 
Or, from self-sown seeds, many plants rise spontaneously in the spring." [Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 6. Chervil. — Scandix Cerefolium, L. j Chceroi)hyllum sativum of Persoon'5 
Synopsis Tlmitarum. {Eng. Bat. 1268.) Pentand. Dig. L. and UmbellifercB, J. 
Ceifeuil, Fr. ; Gcirtenkerbel, Ger. ; and Cerfoglio, lial. (Jig. 471.) 

4107. The chervilis an annual plant, a native ^„ 
of various parts of the continent of Europe, and 
sometimes observed naturalised in our gardens 
in England. The plant rises from a foot to 
near two feet high ; the leaves are of a very 
delicate texture, three times divided, and the 
flowers, of a wliitish color, appear in June. 
There is a variety cultivated in the Paris gar- 
dens with beautifully frizzled leaves. 

4108. Use. The tender leaves are used in 
soups and salads ; but are much less in demand 
now than formerly. 

4109. Cultui-e. It is propagated from seed ; and for a 
bed four feet by four, a quarter of an ounce is sufficient. 
" Sow a bed or" two in August and September, as well to 
come in use at the end of the same autumn, as to stand 
for winter and spring. If a continued succession be re- 
quired in spring and summer, begin to sow again in the 
last fortnight of February, and sow a portion every 
month till August, or twice a month in the midst of 
summer ; as the plants of the spring and summer sow- 
ings soon run up for seed. Sow the seed in shallow drills, from six to nine inches apart, and earth in 
lightly ; or sow occasionally broad-cast, and rake in evenly, just covering the seed. The plants are to 
remain where sown. When the leaves are two, three, or four inches in growth, they are" proper for 
gathering. Cut them off close, they will shoot up again, and may be gathered in succession, though the 
plants of the spring and summer sowing soon spindle up into seed-stalks, ceasing to produce young leaves, 
which are the useful parts." 

4110. To save seed. " Leave some plants in the spring : they will shoot to stalks, and give ripe seed in 
J.uly or August." {Abercrot?!ble.) 

SuBSECT. 7. Horse-radish. - 
, Silic, L. and Crucifercs, J. 
and Ramolaccio, Ital. 




Cochlearia Armoracia, L. {Eng. Bot. 
Cranson, or Le Grand Raifort, Fr. ; 



2223.) Tetrad. 
2Ierrettis:, Ger. ; 



4111. The horse-radish is a -perenma]. -plant, growing naturally in marshy places, and 
by the sides of ditches, in some parts of England. The leaves are very large, oblong, 
sometimes smooth, and at other times notched at the edges ; on the stem they are some- 
times deeply pinnatifid ; the flowers are white, and appear in loose panicles in May and 
June. It has been long cultivated in gardens, and forms one of the most profitable 
articles raised by the mai'ket-gardener. 



B«OK I. 



INDIAN CRESS. 



667 



4112. Use. Tlie root scraped into shreds is a well known accompaniment of English 
roast beef. It is also used in winter salads, in sauces, and sometimes eaten raw. 

4113. Propagation and culture. The following excellent instructions are by Knight : " Horse-radish 
thrives best in deep, soft, sandy, loam, that is not very dry in summer, nor inundated in winter ; the 
situation must be open. During winter, trench the ground three feet deep, and in the following Fe- 
bruary procure your sets, in the choice of which take the strongest crowns or leading buds from old plants, 
cutting them about two inches long. Mark out the ground in four-feet beds and one-foot alleys ; then 
take from the first bed nine inches of the top soil, laying it upon the adjoining bed ; after which take out 
an opening at one end of the bed, in the common way of trenching, fifteen inches deep from the present 
surface; then level the bottom, upon which plant a row of sets across the bed, at nine inches apart each 
■way, with their crowr.s upright ; afterwards dig the next trench the same width and depth, turning the 
earth into the first trench over the row of sets : thus proceeding trench after trench, to the end. Where 
more than the produce of one bed is required for the supply of the family for twelve months, the third 
bed is next to be planted, which treat as directed for the" first, only obs'erving to lay the earth on the 
fourth, and so on for any number of beds. Upon every alternate bed, which is not planted, a dwarf 
annual crop may be grown. The plants must be kept clear from weeds during summer: and as soon 
as the leaves decay in autumn, let them be carefully raked off with a wooden-toothed rake; in the fol- 
lowing February,' eighteen inches of the earth of "the unpl.inted bed must be laid as light as possible, 
and equally over the beds that are planted ; then trench and plant the vacant beds e.xactly in the same 
manner as' before directed. The following autumn, the first planted horse-radish may be taken up, by 
opening a trench at one end of the bed to the bottom of the roots, so that the sticks or roots of horse- 
radish may be taken up entire and sound, which for size and quality will be such as have not generally 
been seen' The following Februarj' the one-year-old crop will require additional earth as before di- 
rected, which must of course be taken from those beds which are now vacant, which, when done, if the 
ground appears poor, or unlikely to produce another vigorous crop, they must have a coat of manure." 
{Horf. Trans, i. £07.) 

4114. Judd has also written on the culture of horse-radish {Hort. Trans, v. 302.), and his practice, though 
verj- different from Knight's is also excellent, and perhaps preferable. Knight takes strong buds from old 
plants, while Judd takes about three inches of the top part of each stick or root, and then cuts clean o/f 
about a quarter of an inch of this piece under the crown, so as to leave no appearance of a green bud. 
Judd trenches only two feet deep, and if he applies manure, puts it in the very bottom of the trench ; " for 
if not- so done, the horse-radish, which always puts out some side roots, wo'uld send out such large side 
roots from the main root, in search of the dur.g lying contiguous, as materially to injure the crop. In 
planting, holes are made eighteen inches apart every way, and sixteen or eighteen inches deep. The root- 
cuttings are let down to the bottom of the holes, which are afterwards filled"up with fine sifted cinder-dust, 
and the surface of the bed is then raked over. The season of plantuig is the middle of March." The essen- 
tial difl:erence between Knight's plan and Judd's is, that the former produces his root from the root-end 
of the cutting downwards, and the latter from the bud-end upwards : hence the one plants near the 
surface, and the other near the bottom of the trench. Judd's mode seems more certain of producing one 
entire strong root than Knight's. 

4115. Preserving. Horss-radish, if dug up in autumn, may be preserved through the winter in shsds or 
cellars, among sand or dry earth. 

Sl'bsect. 8. Indian Cress, or K'asturlhnn. — TropcBoJum majus, L. [Bot. Mag. 23.) 
Octan. Monog. L. and Geraniaceie, J. Capucine, Fr. ; ISapndnerblume, Ger. ; and 
Fior Cappucino, Ital. 

4116. The Indian cress is a hardy annual, a native of Peru, introduced in 1686. The 
stalks, if supported, will rise eight or ten feet high ; the leaves are peltate, or have their 
petiole fixed to the centre of the leaf; the flowers are very showy, of a brilliant orange 
color, and continue in succession from July till destroyed by frost. In its native 
countiy, it endures several seasons ; but here, being unable to sustain our winter, it is 
treated as an annual plant, and requires to be sown every year. 

4117. Use. Tlie flowers and young leaves are frequently eaten in salads ; they have 
a warm taste, like the common cress, thence the name of nasturtium. The flowers are 
also used as a garnish to dishes, in wliich they form a brilliant contrast with the flowers 
of borage. The berries are gathered green and pickled, in which state they form an 
excellent substitute for capers. 

4118. Varieties : — 



There is a variety with double flowers, 
which is propagated by cuttings, and 
requires to be treated as a green-Iiouse 
plant. The flowers are preferable for 
garnishing. 



The TropcBo-'wa tnimtt, a native of Peru, 
and introduced in 1596, nearly a cai- 
tuTV before the other, is also sometimes 
cultivated for culiaary puri;o_^3 ; bat is 
of weakly growth, and by no means 
equal to the conimon m produce. 



There is also a variety of tliis species 
with double flowers, propagated by 
cutdngs, and preser\-ed through the 
winter imdcr glass ; but, like the double 
variety cf T. mnjus, it is more orna- 
mental than usefiil. 



4119. Culture.. The single varieties of both sorts are raised from seed, of which one ounce will sow 
twenty-five feet of drill. The plants will thrive in almost any s»il, but a light fresh loam is best, as less 
likely "to make the plants grow rank and luxuriant, and produce few berries, which one that is rich is apt 
to do'. Care must be taken to select good sound seed, berries of the last year, for those of greater age wiH 
not grow at all, or not freely and regularly. " Sow in March or April, or not later than the beginning of 
May, in one small crop, of one, two, or three rows, for a moderate family. Either allot the large sort a 
situation in a single row, near a vacant fence, trellis, or wall, on which the runners may be trained ; or 
divide an open compartment into rows, three or four feet asunder, to admit sticks for their" support. Form 
drills an inch and half deep ; in which deposit the seeds two or three inches apart, and earth them over 
evcnlv. When the plants begin to advance in runners, let them be trained to a fence or trellis. It is 
generally necessary, at first, to conduct the main runners, but they will afterwards climb unassisted." 

4120. Taking the crop. " For pickling let the berries just attain their full size, but pluck them while 
green, plump, and tender." 

4121. To save seed. " Permit a sufficiency of the berries to remain till mature. In August and Sep- 
tember, gather tliem as they ripen ; spread them to dry and harden ; then put them up for sowing next 
year." {Abercronibie.) 



668 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSECT. 9. Marigold, or Pot-marigold. — Calendula officinalis, L. St/ng. Folyg. Ne- 
cess. L. and Corymhiferce, J. Souci du Jardin, Fr. ; Ringelblume, Ger. ; and 
Fiorrancio, Ital. 

4122. Tlie pot-marigold is an annual plant, a native of France and Spain, and known 
in this country since 1573. It has a short divaricated stem, dividing into numerous 
branches, from one to two feet in height, and furnished with blunt lanceolate leaves. 
The yellow flowers proceed from the ends of the branches, and last from June till killed 
by the frost. It is one of the oldest and best known inhabitants of our gardens. " Its 
flowers," Gerrard observes, " having been formerly in much repute as comforters of the 
heart." Though little faith is now placed in its virtues, it still keeps its place in most 
cottage gardens, both in England and Scotland, though rarely applied to any culinary 
purpose. 

4123. Use. Marshal observes, that " the flower is a valuable ingredient in broths and 
soups, however much it may have got into disuse." The dried flowers are also used in 
domestic medicine. 

4 1 24. The varieties are — 

The single orange-flowered ; most aromatic and proper for keeping | The childing or proliferous ; sends out small flowers from the 
The single lemon-flowered ; rather less aromatic margins of the calyx of the large central flowers, culti- 

The double flowered of both varieties ; vated chiefly for ornament. 

4125. Culture. Sow in February, March, or April, and for a seed-bed four feet by four feet, sown in 
drills a foot asunder, a quarter of an ounce will suffice ; " or you may deposit the seed in autumn (Sep- 
tember), to have it come up forwarder in the spring, though the spring sowing will come up in very good 
time. Sow on a light dry soil, either in drills a foot asunder, or broad-cast ; and rake in the seed. When 
the plants are up two or three inches in growth, thin them to about twelve or fifteen inches asunder, or 
they may be transplanted with that interval. They will grow freely in either method, and come ijito 
flower the following May or June, and continue flowering in plentiful succession throughout summer and 
autumn ; to be cut for use as wanted. A store for winter should be gathered when in full flower, spread 
to dry out of the sun, and afterwards put up in paper bags." 

4126. To save seed. " The flowers, as far as they are left to run, will in autumn produce a competency." 
(Aberoombie.) 

SuBSECT. 10. Borage. — JBorago officinalis, L. (Eng. Bot. 36.) Pent. Monog. L. and 
Poraginece, B. P. Pourrache, Fr. ; Porragen, Ger. ; and Porragine, Ital. 

4127. The borage is an annual, and sometimes a biennial plant, with the lower leaves 
oblong, alternate, and spread on the ground ; the flower-stem rises nearly two feet high ; 
and, with the leaves, is rough with white bristly hairs. The light-blue flowers make a 
beautiful appearance, and are produced for several months in succession, beginning witli 
May. It is a native, or naturalised in several parts of Britain. 

4128. Use. The young leaves and tender tops are used occasionally as salads, and to 
furnish a boiled dish in summer and autumn. ^ The plant was formerly in high estimation 
as a cordial herb for driving away sorrow ; but " very light surely," says Sir J. E. Smith, 
*' were those sorrows that would be so driven away." The spikes of the flowers form 
an ingredient in negus and cool tankards, and the blossoms are occasionally employed 
as a garnish. The juice of the plant affords nitre, and the withered stalks have been 
observed to burn like match-paper. 

4129. Cou7-se of culture. It is raised from seed, and for a bed four feet and a half by six feet, one ounce 
is requisite. " Sow every year in the spring, any time in February or March, till May, &c. for summer 
supply ; and in any of the summer months, for young borage in autumn, as the plants of the spring and 
early summer sowings soon run up to stalks in the same year ; and in July or August and September, to 
furnish young leafy plants for winter and following spring. A small crop of each sowing will be sufficient 
for the supply of a family. This herb loves a dry soil. Sow either broad-cast, and raked in, or in small 
drills six to twelve inches asunder. Where the plants rise too close, thin them to that distance. Although 
this herb will grow when transplanted, it prospers best when it remains where sown. Where the young 
leafy tops and flower-spikes are in demand, permit the stem to run up." 

4130. To save seed. " Leave some of the plants which first run : they will produce plenty of* seed 
in autumn : and from self-sown seeds many young plants will come up spontaneously." (Abercrombie.) 

Sect. IX. Sweet Herbs. 

4131. Of sweet herbs, one or two kinds, as the lavender, peppermint, and some other _ 
mints, are extensively cultivated by market-gardeners for the druggists ; but a very few 
square yards of the private kitchen-garden vvill suffice to cultivate as much of each as is 
ever wanted by any family. The sage, thyme, mint, and tansy, appear in single plants 
in the border of the cottager's garden. 

SuBSECT. 1. Thyme. — Thymus vulgaris, L. Didy. Gymnos. L. and Labiate, J. 
Thym, Fr. ; Thimian, Ger. ; and Timo, Ital. 

4132. Of thyme there are two species cultivated for culinary purposes, tlie common 
and the lemon thyme. 

4133. Common or garden thyme h the Thymus vulgaris, L. ; a low evergreen under- 
shrub, a native of Spain and Italy, and cultivated in this country since 1548, and pro- 
bably long before. It seldom rises above a foot high, has smaller flowers than the 
common wild thyine, and is more delicate in its flavor. There are two* varieties, the 
broad and the narrow leaved, besides the variegated, grown for ornament. 



Book I. SAGE, CLARY. 669 

4134. Lemon thyme is the T. citriodorus, P. S. ; a very low evergreen shrub, traiUng 
and seldom rising above four or six inches in height. It is readily distinguished from 
the former, and from wild thyme, of which it has generally been considered as a variety, 
by its strong smell of lemons, as the trivial name imports. 

4135. Use. The young leaves and tops are used in soups, stuffings, and sauces. For 
these purposes, the broad-leaved common is generally preferred ; but the flavor of the 
yellow is much liked in peculiar dishes. 

4136. Culture. " To raise the plant from seed is the general and most eligible method. It is occasion- 
ally multiplied by parting the roots of stocky close plants, and by slips of the young shoots." 

4137. JBi/ seed. " Sow in March or April in a bed or border of light fine earth, either broad-cast scat- 
tered thin, and raked in lightly, which is the general course, or in small shallow drills, six inches 
asunder : the young plants may either remain, or be transplanted in the summer, when two or three 
inches high. A portion may be drilled, for an edging to a border. Give occasional light waterings in 
dry warm weather, both before and after the plants are up. As soon as they are from three to five 
inches in growth, in June or July, taking the opportunity of rain, thin some out, and plant six inches 
asunder, and water at planting. Others may be planted in a single row to form an edging to a border, 
either set close to form at once a full edgingj or as far as three inches apart. Seedlings thus treated will 
come in for use the same year. Those who raise considerable supplies of thyme for the markets, usually 
sow large portions thickly in beds, to remain till of useful growth ; then to be drawn oft' root and top to- 
gether, at different seasons, as wanted ; it is then tied in small bunches for market. Some persons also 
transplant considerable portions in spring and summer, to six, ten, or twelve inches' distance, to form a 
stocky full growth, to be drawn off" in large bushy plants." 

4138. By offsets. " Thyme is also propagated by slips of the branchy shoots in the spring, or early in 
autumn ; but more effectually by sections of the stool, top and root together, or by removing rooted 
branches. To make branches quickly root, loosen the mould about any established bushy plants, in spring 
or summer, and lay some fresh earth a small depth upon the spreading shoots : they will all be well rooted 
the same year for planting off. Plant in light rich earth : shade and water till rooted. In autumn, to 
provide against the effects of frost on exotic evergreens, dry and house a store for winter ; either cutting 
the tops, or drawing entire plants." 

4139. To save seed. " It is produced abundantly, and ripens in summer and autumn. Gather the seed- 
spikes, spread them upon a cloth to dry ; rub out clean, and put the seeds up for sowing the following year." 
{Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Sage. — Salvia officinalis. L. (Ger. Herb. 623. f. 1.) Dian. Monog.Li. and 
Labiates, B. P. Sauge, Fr. ; Salbey, Ger. ; and Salvia, Ital. 

4140. The sage is an evergreen under-shrub, a native of the sputh of Europe, and 
mentioned by Gerrard, in 1597, as an inhabitant of our gardens. It rises about two 
feet high, with wrinkled, green, cinereous leaves, white, or tinged with white or dusky 
purple. The flowers are terminal, in long spikes, of a blue color, and appear in June 
and July. 

4141. Use. The leaves are used in stuffings and sauces for many kinds of lus- 
cious and strong meats ; as well as to improve the flavor of various articles of cookery. 
The decoction called sage-tea is usually made from one variety, the small-leaved green, 
or sage of virtue ; but any of the others are equally fit for this purpose. 

4142. Varieties. These are — 

The common, or red | The green | The small-leaved green, or sage of virtue | The broad-leaved, or balsamic. 

4143. Estimate of sorts. " The red is the principal sort in culinary use, having the most agreeable and 
fullest flavor ; the green is next in estimation with the cook : but the small-leaved is generally preferred 
to those to eat as a raw herb, and for decoctions ; while the broad-leaved balsamic species is the most ef- 
ficacious in a medical way, and is also a tea-herb. However, any of the sorts may be occasionally used 
for those alternate purposes." 

4144. Culture. " AU the varieties may be propagated by slips or cuttings of the young shoots, taken 
from March to June ; but most successfully in May and June, by detaching the young shoots of the same 
year. The outward shoots are to be' preferred ; slip or cut them off' five or six inches long, stripping off 
the under leaves, and preserving the top leaves entire : plant them in a shady border, six inches asunder, 
inserting them quite down to the top leaves, and water them. They will soon take root freely, especially 
the young shoots planted in May and June. In the advancing growth, if they spindle up in flower-stalks, 
pinch or cut that part down, that the plants may shoot out full and stocky from the bottom in close bushy 
growth for use the same year. In gathering sage for use, cut or slip off the young side and top shoots 
neatly ; and be careful not to stub too close, especially towards winter, and during that season. In July 
and the rest of summer, it is usual to gather some of young top growth to dry for winter. Keep the plants 
in regular bushy heads by cutting away disorderly growths, and the decayed flower-stalks in autumn. 
Keep them clear from weeds ; and sometimes loosen the earth between and about the plants, with a hoe, 
garden-trowel, or small spade, in spring and autumn. Make a fresh plantation once in two, three, or four 
years, or as may be necessary by the plants becoming naked, stubby, and dwindling." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Clari/. — Salvia Sclarea, L. (Fl. Graic. i. t. 27.) Dian. Monog. L. and 
LabiatcBf B. P. Orvale, Fr, ; Scharlachkraut, Ger. ; and Schiarea, Ital. 

4145. The clary is a hardy biennial, a native of Italy, introduced in this country in 
1562. The lower leaves are very large, the stem is about two feet high, clammy to 
the feel ; the flowers are in loose, terminating spikes, composing whorls, and of a pale- 
blue colour. 

4146. Use. The leaves are sometimes used in soups, though some dislike its scent. 
Its flowers are used for a fermented wine, and the whole plant is, like sage, esteemed 
medicinal. 

4147. Culture. Clary is raised from seed, and sometimes from cuttings and slips. A small bed will sup- 
ply most families ; and, if raised from seed, a quarter of an ounce will suffice for a seed-bed to be trans- 
planted from two feet by two. Sow in the last fortnight of March, or the course of April, in any bed or 
border thinly, and rake in the seed. In summer, when the plants are advanced two or three inches, trans- 
plant a portion of the strongest from twelve to eighteen inches apart, to allow competent room for the 



670 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

leaves to spread into full growth, when they will be fit for use the same year, and in continuation through 
winter until the following spring and summer. 

4148. To save seed. In the spring, allot some old plants to run up into stalk : these will yield ripe seed in 
autumn. 

SuBSECT. 4. Mint. — Mentha, L, Didy. Gymnos. L. and Lahiatce, J. Menthe, Fr. ; 
Milnze, Ger. ; and Erba Santa Maria, Ital. [Jig. 472.) 

4149. Of mint there are several species cultivated in gardens ; all of them indigenous 
perennials. The principal are — 

41.50. The pep2^ermint {M. piperita, L.), {Eng. Bot. 687.) (a). This species may 
readily be distinguished by its subcamphorated 
odor, and blackish-purple flowers, which appear 
in August and September. It is found in watery 
places. 

4151. Use. Almost entirely for distillation, for 
which it is extensively cultivated in low, rich, 
soft, marshy lands, especially such as can be 
irrigated or flooded. 

4152. The spearmint (M. vhidis, L.), (Eng. Bot. 
2424.) (b). This sort rises from two to three feet 
high, with sessile, lanceolate, naked leaves; the 
whole plant has a reddish-green hue ; is occasion- 
ally found in marshy situations, and flow^ers in Au- 
gust. There is a narrow and a broad-leaved variety. 

415.3. Use. The young Isaves and tops are 
used in spring salads, and form an ingredient in 
soups ; they are also employed to give flavor to 
certain dishes, as peas, &c., being boiled for a time, and then withdrawn in the manner 
of garlic. 

415^. The jmini/roT/al-minl (M. jnilegium Li.), (E7ig. Bot. 1206.) (c) Pouliot, Fr. ; 
Foley, Ger ; and Puleggio, Ital. ; is a trailing plant with small, smooth, ovate leaves. It 
is indigenous in watery pastures, and places subject to inundations. It flowers in Sep- 
tember. 

4155. Use. In different branches of cookery, and also for distilling pennyroyal-water. 

4156. Culture. All " the species are raised by the same methods, viz. by parting the roots, by offset 
young plants, and by cuttings of the stalks." By the roots. This is performed in spring or autumn. Hav- 
ing some full roots from any established beds, divide them as expedient ; and drawing drills with a hoe, 
about two inches deep, and six inches asunder, place the roots in the drills, moderately close, and earth 
them over to an equal depth. By offsets in the spring. Procure these from established plants, and dibble 
them, in rows, six inches asunder. By cuttings of the young stalks in May, June, or advanced summer. 
Taking the opportunity of showery weather, cut them into lengths of five or six inches ; and plant the 
cuttings by dibble, six inches apart, inserted halfway into the earth. 

4157. Soil. Spearmint and peppei-mint like a moist soil ; pennyroj'al a strong loam. 

4158. Subsequent culture. " Propagated in any of the above methods, tlie plants set in spring or sum- 
iner will come into use the same year. Water new plants tiU they take root. Keep them clean from 
weeds. At the end of autumn, cut away any remaining stems ; at which season, or in spring, spread a 
little loose earth thinly over the beds." 

4159. Taking.the crop. " For culinary use, or salads, gather both when the young green tops are from 
one inch to six inches in length, and in their advanced growth, throughout the sunmaer. When nearly 
full grown in June, July, or August, or beginning to flower, gather a store for winter. Spread the heads 
thinly in some dry place, shaded from the sun, to be well dried : then, tied in bunches, house the store. 
When designed for distilling, let them attain full growth, coming into flower \ then cut, and use the heads 
immediately. The peppermint, being principally used for distilling, and such of the pennyroyal as is 
wanted for the same purpose, should stand tiU they begin to flower ; being then in highest perfection. 
Cut in dry weather and tie in bunches, and carry under cover, ready for immediate use. Cut full-grown 
stalks close to the bottom." 

4160. "New plantation. " All the species continue by the roots many years ; but when the plants shoot 
dwindling, or weakly, make a fresh plantation in time." 

4161. Forcing spear mint. " Mint, in a young green state, may be obtained all winter, and early in 
spring, by planting some roots in a gentle hot-bed, or in pots or shallow pans, to be plunged therein. 
Plant the roots pretty thickly, and earth over an inch and a half deep; or some roots, thus planted in 
pots or boxes, may be placed in a stove. Plant for succession every three weeks, as forced roots soon decay. 
In order to have young leaves and tops all the sunmier, cut down some advanced stalks every month, 
when new shoots will be thrown up; and to have dried balm for the winter, permit others to complete 
their growth, and come into blossom. These last are to be cut as soon as the dew is off in the morning, 
for in the afternoon, and especially during bright sunshine, the odor of the plant is found to be much di- 
minished. Dry the crop thus gathered in the shade, and afterwards keep it in small bundles, compactly 
pressed down, and covered with white paper. By the common mode of hanging up mint and other herbs 
in loose bundles, the odor soon escapes. The mint having a travelling root, the bed soon becomes co- 
vered, so as not to admit of further culture ; hence, after four or five years' standing, a fresh plantation 
will require to be made." 

SuBSECT, 5. Marjoram. — Origanum, L. Didy. Gymnos, L. and Labiate. J. Mar- 
jolaine, Fr ; Marjoran, Ger. ; and Maggiorana, Ital. 

4162. Of marjoram four different species are cultivated ; the 2^ot, siveet, ivintet', 
" and common. 

4163. Pot-maijoram is the 0. Onites, L. (Bocc. Mus. t. 38.); a hardy perennial un- 
der-shrub, a native of Sicily, introduced in 1759. The stem rises more than a foot high, 




Book I. 



SAVORY, BASIL. 



671 



and is covered with spreading hairs ; the leaves are small and acute, almost sessile, and 
tomentose on both sides. Though hardy enough to withstand our winters, it seldom ri- 
pens its seeds in this country. It is in flower from July to November, and is propagated 
from seed, but chiefly from rooted slips. 

4164. Sweet maijoram is the 0. Marjorana, L. (Moris, s. 11. t. 3. f. 1.); a hardy 
biennial, a native of Portugal, and introduced in 1573. It resembles the 0. Onit.es, but 
the leaves have distinct petioles, and the flowers, which appear in June and July, are 
collected in small close heads ; and hence is often called knotted marjoram. As the 
seed seldom ripens in this country, it is generally procured from France. When in 
blossom, the herb is cut over, and dried for winter use, so that a sowing requires to be 
made every year. 

4165. The ivinter sweet marjoram is the 0. Heracleoticum, L. {Lob. Ic. 492.); a 
hardy perennial, a native of Greece, and introduced in 1640. The leaves of this species 
resemble those of 0. Marjorana ; but the flowers come in spikes. It flowers from June 
to November ; requires a sheltered diy soil, and seldom ripening its seeds in this country, 
is propagated by cuttings and slips. 

4166. The com/non marjoram is the 0. vulgare, L. (Eng. Bot. 1143.); a hardy 
perennial, a native of Britain, and found under thickets and copses on chalky soils. It 
bears a considerable resemblance to the last-named species. The flowers arise in subrotund 
panicles, in smooth clustered spikes, of a reddish color, in July and August. This 
species is only used in cookery in default of one of the others. 

4167. Use. All the species, but especially the three first, are aromatics, of sweet 
flavor, much used as relishing herbs in soups, broflis, stuflfings, &c. The young tender 
tops and leaves together are used in summer in a green state ; and they are dried for 
winter. 

4168. Culture. The three first species prefer a light dry soil; the other, a calcareous soil and shady- 
situation. Though the O. Marjorana, or sweet marjoram, be a biennial in its native country, and here", 
when it receives the aid of a green-house through the winter, yet, in the open garden, it requii-es to be 
treated as an annual, and sown and reaped the same year. For a seed-bed three feet by three feet, a quarter 
of an ounce of seed is sufficient. Sow in April on a compartment of light earth, either in srnal) drills, or 
broad-cast ; or sow a portion in a hot-bed, if requisite to have a small crop forwarded. When the plants are 
one, two, or three incheshigh, thin the seed-beds; and plant those thinned out in a final bed, six inches apart, 
giving water ; or, where larger supplies are required, some may remain thick where sown, to be drawn 
off by the root as wanted. The pot, winter, and coimnon marjoram maybe propagated frjom oflTsets by 
parting the roots in spring and autumn. Plant in rows or in beds, allowing a square foot for each plant. 

4169. Gather the tops of all the sorts as wanted for summer use; and when in full blossom, in July or 
August, for preservation through the" winter. 

SuBSECT. 6. Savory. — Satureja, L. Didynamia Gymnospermia, L. and Labiates, J. 
Sariette, Fr. j Saturei, Ger. ; and Satoreggia, Ital. 

4170. Of savory two species are cultivated, the winter and summer savory. 

4171. JFinter savory is the S. Montana, L. (Sab. Hort. 3. t. 64.); a hardy under-shrub, 
a native of the south of France and Italy, and known in this country since 1562. The 
shoots are furnished with two narrow stiff leaves, an inch long, placed opposite at each 
joint, and from the base of these a few small leaves proceed in clusters. It produces 
whitish flowers in May and June. 

4172. Summer savory is the S. hortensis (Latn. III. ii. 504. f. 1.) ; a hardy annual, a 
native of Italy, and known in this country since 1652. The branches are slender, erect, 
and about a foot high ; leaves opposite, and about an inch in length. It flowers in June 
and July. 

4173. Culture. " The perennial is generally propagated by slips, or cuttings, ot the young side shoots, 
in April, May, June, or July ; planted in a shady border, and watered ; also by dividing the bottom off- 
set rooted shoots, the root and top-part together, planted as above. When the plants are a little advanced 
in branchy top growth, they may be transplanted : set some in single plants, a foot apart ; others, to form 
a close edging. Keep the ground clear of weeds : in spring and autumn loosen the earth a little about 
the plants, and trim off decayed and irregular parts. This herb may also be occasionally raised from seed 
in the spring, as directed below, for the summer savory. It continues useful summer and winter ; and 
some may be gathered, when of full growth, in autumn, to dry for winter use. The annual is always 
raised from seed. In March or April, sow either in small drills, nine by six inches apart ; or, on the 
smoothed surface, and rake in lightly. The plants may either remain, to be thinned, or some maybe 
transplanted in June, nine by six inches asunder. This herb comes in for gathering from June until Octo- 
ber. When a store is to be dried, draw it by the roots." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 7. Basil. — Ocymum, L. Didyn. Gymnos. L. and Labiates, J. Basilic, Fr. ; 
Basilikurn, Ger. ; and Basilica, Ital. 

4174. Of basil two species are cultivated as culinary aromatics. The sweet, or larger 
basil, is the 0. Basilicum, L. (Blackw. t. 104.) ; a tender annual plant, highly aro- 
matic, rising from six to twelve or fifteen inches high, and thickly covered with small 
oval leaves. It produces small white flowers in June and July ; is a native of the East 
Indies, and was introduced to this country in 1548. 

4175. The bush, or least basil, is the 0. Minimum, Jj. (Schk. Hand. 2. t. 166.) ; an 
annual aromatic plant, a sort of diminutive of the other, forming a round orbicular bushy 



672 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



head, not half the size of the larger basil. It is a native of the East Indies, flowers in 
June and July, and was introduced to this country in 1573. 

4176. Use. The leaves and small brachia;, or leafy tops, are the parts gathered ; and 
on account of their strong flavor of cloves, they are often used in highly seasoned dishes. 
A few leaves are sometimes introduced into salad, and not unfrequently into soups. 

4177. Culture. Both species are raised from seed, and for a seed-bed of three feet by one and a half, to 
furnish plants for a final plantation four feet by twelve, a quarter of an ounce will be sufficient Sow on 
a hot-bed in the end of March, and plant out in a warm border of rich soil, the larger at eight or ten inches 
every way, and the lesser at six or eight inches square. Sometimes both sorts are sown in the open border ; 
but so treated, they come up late and small In transplanting from the hot-bed, take care to raise the 
plants in small tufts, or single plants, with balls attached ; by which they receive no check, and if watered 
after planting, and in dry weather, will soon produce abundance of tops.' 

4178. Seed can only be saved in England in warm dry seasons, and under the most favorable circum- 
stances of situation and precocity. In general it is procured by the seedsmen from Italy. 

SuBSECT. 8. Rosemary. — Rosmarinus officivalis, L. {Flor. Grenc. 1. t. 14.) Dian- 
dria Monogynia, L. and Labiatce, B. P. Romarin, Fr. ; Rosmarin, Ger. ; and 
Rosvianno, Ital. 

4179. The rosemary is a hardy under-shrub, a native of the south of Europe, intro- 
duced in, or before, 1548. The plant is evergreen, rising sometimes six or eight feet 
high, though rarely. The leaves are sessile, linear, dark-green above, and grej-ish or 
whitish underneath ; the blossoms are of a pale-blue color. The whole plant is highly 
aromatic. 

4180. Use. The flowers and calyces form a principal ingredient in the distillation of 
Hungaiy water. Infusions of the leaves are made in some drinks. Sprigs of rosemary 
are used as a garnish ; and were given in Shakspeare's time as tokens of remembrance : 
" There's rosemaiy ; that's for remembrance," says the distracted Ophelia. In some 
parts of the west of England and in Wales, the sprigs are still distributed to the company 
at funerals, and often thrown into the grave upon the cofiin of tlie deceased. 

4181. Varieties. These are — 

The green, or common | The gold-striped. | The silver-striped. 

4182. Culture. " The green is hardiest as a plant, and is the sort generally used. The finest plants are 
raised from seed. Sow either broad-cast or in small drills, six inches apart. The green is also raised by 
planting slips or cuttings of the young shoots in spring and summer, in a shady border. Let these be taken 
off five, six, or seven inches long, detaching the under-leaves. Set them in a row from six to twelve inches 
apart, nearly two thirds into the ground : water at planting, and occasionally afterwards, tiU they have 
struck. The plants wiU be strong and well rooted by autumn, when they should be transplanted at proper 
distances. A light sandy soil assists exotic evergreens, that retain some of their original deUcacy, to stand 
the winter ; partly by preventing them from growing too luxuriantlj', and partly by not being a conductor 
of frost. In their final situations, train the plants, either with a bushy head, of moderate growth ; or, if 
near a fence, in a fan-like order. The striped sort may be propagated as above ; or with most success, by 
layers of the young wood, as it is not so free to grow from cuttings. Being a little tender, it must be planted 
in a warm situation. It is retained chiefly as ornamental, on account of the variegation of its leaves. 
Rosemary is of several years' duration, continuing in full foliage at all seasons where the exposure is not 
too severe." {Abercroynbie.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Lavende)\ — Lavayidula spica, L. (Schk. Hand. 2. t. 157.) Didyn. Gynv- 
nos> L. and Labiates, J. Lavende, Fr. ; Spiklavendel, Ger. ; and Lavendula, ItaX. 

4183. The lavender is a hardy under-shrub, a native of the south of Europe, and intro- 
duced in 1658. The plant rises from two to four feet high, witli hoary linear leaves, 
slightly rolled back at the edges ; the flowers form terminating spikes, of a blue color, 
and appear from July to September. The leaves and flower are powerfully aromatic. 

4184. Use. It is rather a medicinal plant than one used in cookery ; though a few 
plants are kept in every garden. Imitation scent-bottles are made by the ladies of the 
fragrant spikes. They ai-e also put in paper-bags, and placed among linens to perfume 
them. Lavender-water, a well known perfume, is distilled from the flowers ; for which 
purpose the plant is extensively cultivated in different places, but more especially at 
Mitcham in Surrey, and Maidenhead in Berkshire. 

4185. Varieties. The narrow-leaved and the broad-leaved, both equally good. 

4186. Propagation and culture. " It is propagated by cuttings and slips like rosemary : it likes a dry 
soil, and may be planted either in distinct plants two feet asimder, or to form a sort of hedge-row, in one 
or more lines, especially where large supplies of flowers are required for distilling. The plants will advance 
in a close branchy growth, from a foot and a half to two feet high, or more ; and, when established, will 
produce plenty of flowers in July and August : gather them while in perfection, cutting the spikes off close 
to the stem. Then give the plants occasional trimming, taking off the gross and rampant shoots of the 
year, and the decayed flower-spikes." NeiU observes, " If lavender be planted in a dry, gravelly, or poor 
soil, its flowers have a powerful odor, and the severity of our winters has little effect on it ; while in a rich 
garden-soil, although it grows strongly, it is apt to be killed, and the flowers have less perfume." 

SuBSECT. 10. Tansy. — Tanacetum vulgare, L. {Eng. Bot. 1229.) jS^^^. Polyg. Suj)er. 
L. and CorymbifercB, J. Tanesie, Fr. ; Rheinfarm, Ger, ; and Tanaceto, Ital. 
4187. The tansy is a perennial plant, growing in many parts of Britain on the sandy 
banks of rivers. The stem rises to the height of two or three feet in its wild state, richly 
furnished with deep-green finely divided leaves ; the flowers are yellow,- arid appear in 
terminating corymbs in July and August. The leaves and flowers are aromatic. 



Book I. PLANTS USED IN TARTS, &c. 61?, 

4188. Use- The young leaves are shredded down and employed to give color and 
flavor to puddings ; they are also used in omelets and other cakes, and were formerly in 
much repute as a vermifuge. 

4189. Varieties. These are, the common; the curled, generally preferred ; and the 
variegated, cultivated chiefly for ornament. 

4190. Culture. Tansy may be propagated in spring or autumn by rooted slips, or by dividing the roots 
into several sets : plant them in any compartment of the kitchen or physic garden, from twelve to eighteen 
inches asunder. The plant continues for several years, producing abundant tufts of leaves annually. As 
they run up in strong stalks in summer, these should be cut down to encourage a production of young leaves 
low on the stem. 

4191. To have young tansy in winter. Plant some roots either in a liot-bed or in pots placed therein, or 
in a pinery or forcing-house, at any time from November to March. {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 11. Costmary, or Alecost. — Tnnacetum JBalsamita, L. ; Balsamita vul- 
garis, H. K. {Schk. Hand. 3, t. 240.) Syng. Polyg. Swperf. L. and Corymbiferce, J. 
Coq-des-jardins, Fr. ; Frauenmunze, Ger. ; and Costo ortense, Ital. 

4192. The costmary is a hardy perennial plant, a native of Italy, and introduced in this 
country in 1568. The lower leaves are large, ovate, of a greyish color, and on long foot- 
stalks ; the stems rise two or three feet high ; they are furnished with leaves of the same 
shape, but smaller and sessile. The flowers are of a deep yellow color, and appear in 
corymbs in August and September. In indifferent seasons, or in cold situations, they 
scarcely expand, and the seeds very seldom come to maturity in this country. The whole 
plant has a peculiarly agreeable odor, and its name, costmary, intimates that it is the 
costus, or aromatic plant of the Virgin. There is a variety M-ith deep-cut, hoary leaves, 
but it is less fragrant than the other. 

4193. Use. In France it is used in salads ; and was formerly put into ale and negus ; 
and hence the name of alecost. In this country, at present, it is but little used in 
the kitchen. 

4194. Propagation and culture. It is a travelling-rooted plant, and readily propagated by division after 
the flowering season, or in spring. It delights in a dry soil, and a plantation once made wiU remain good 
for several years. )' 

Sect. X. Plants used in Tarts, Confectionary, and Domestic Medicine. 

4195. Of confectionary plants, excepting the species of rhubarb used as a substitute for, 
or addition to, gooseberries, this class occupies only a few yards of the largest kitchen- 
garden. Almost the only species worthy of introduction in that of the cottager, unless 
we except the chamomile, is the rhubarb. 

SuBSECT. 1. Rhubarb. — Rheum, L. Enneandria Trigynia, L. and Folygonece, J. 
Rhubarbe, Fr. ; Rabarber, Ger. ; and Rubarbaro, Ital. 

4196. Of rhubarb there are three species in cultivation, the rhaponticum, hybridum, and 
palmatum, all perennials. 

4197. Rheum Rhapo?iticum, L. {Sabb. Hart. i. t. 34.) is a native of Asia, and was 
introduced in 1573. Tlie leaves are blunt and smooth, veins reddish, somewhat hairy 
underneath ; petioles grooved above and rounded at the edge. This species has been 
longest in cultivation. 

4198. R. hybridum, L. (Murr. Com. Gott. t. 1.) is also a native of Asia, introduced in 
1778. The leaves are large, somewhat cordate, smooth, and of a light green. When 
under good cultivation, they often m.easure four or five feet in length, the foot-stalk in- 
cluded. This sort was first introduced as a culinary rhubarb by Dickson, V. P. H. S., 
about twenty years ago, and is esteemed more succulent than the R. Rhaponticum. 

4199. R. palmatum, L. {Mill. Ic 2. t. 218.) is a native of Tartary, distinguished from 
all the others by its elegant palmate leaves. It has been known in this country since 
1758, and is generally considered as the true Turkey or Russian rhubarb. 

4200. Use. The two first species are cultivated entirely, and the third in gardens, 
principally for the petioles of the root-leaves, which are peeled, cut down, and formed into 
tarts and pies in the manner of apples and gooseberries. Tlie R. hybridum affords the 
most abundant and succulent supply for this purpose. 

4201. Propagation and culture. All the sorts may be raised either from seed or by dividing the roots. 
If from seed, which is the best mode, sow in light deep earth in spring ; and the plants, if kept eight or 
nine inches asunder, will be fit for transplanting in autumn, and for use next spring. When the roots 
are divided, care must be had to retain a bud on the crown of each section : they may be planted where 
they are finally to remain. When a plantation is to be made, the ground, which should be light and 
rather sandy, but well manured, should be trenched three spits, or as deep as the sub-soil will admit, 
adding a good manuring of well-rotted hot-bed dung. Then plant in rows three feet wide by two feet, 
in the rows for the R. rhaponticum and paknatum, and five feet wide by three feet, in the rows for the 
R. hybridum. No other culture is required than keeping the ground free of weeds, occasionally stirring it 
during summer with a three-pronged fork, and adding a dressing of well rotted manure every autumn or 
spring, stirring the earth as deep as possible. Such a plantation will continue good many years. Some 
r.ever allow the flower-stalks to produce flowers ; and others cut them over as soon as they have done 
flowering, to prevent the plants from being exhausted by the production of seeds. The former seems the 



674 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



preferable method, as the flower-stalks of plants cannot, like the leaves, be considered as preparing a re- 
serve of nourishment for the roots. 

4202. Blanching. The advantages of blanching the stalks of rhubarb for culinary purposes have been 
pointed out by T. Hare, Esq. {Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) " These are twofold, namely, the desirable qualities 
of improved appearance and flavor, and a saving in the quantity of sugar necessary to render it agreeable 
to the palate, since the leaf-stalks, when blanched, are infinitely less harsh than those grown under the 
full influence of light in an open situation." It may either be blanched by earthing up the roots early in 
spring, or earthen pots or covers may be used, as in blanching sea-kale. 

4203. To force rhubarb. Two methods are described in the Hort. Trans, vol. iii. The 
first is by Judd, of Edmonton, who states, that his first attempt was made by covering 
plants of the rheum Iiybridum with common garden-pots, number twelves, having their 
holes stopped. These were covered with fermenting dung ; and the plants came very 
fine and quickly ; but were much broken by the sides and tops of the pots. " After it 
was all well up, the dung and pots were entirely taken off, and large hand-glasses were 
substituted in their stead, thickly covered with mats every night, and in dull weather. 
This process I found greatly to improve their flavor, and it gave me a regular supply 
till that in the open air was ready for use. The follo-wing year I had large pots made 
on purpose, vs ithout holes, but these broke the shoots almost as much as the first, for this 
sort of rhubarb grows so very luxuriantly, that it is impatient of such confinement." 
He afterwards enclosed and covered his bed ^vith open frame-work, around and on 
which, he placed the dung, and with this treatment, he says, " the rhubarb has come up 
very regularly, of excellent quality, and wants far less attention than was required by my 
former method ; for the frame- work renders hand-glasses, or any other cover, unnecessary. 
Care should be taken to lay the dung in such a manner that the top may be partly or 
wholly taken off at any time for the purpose of gathering or examination, without dis- 
turbing the sides. That this is a superior method of forcing the rheum hybridum, this 
year's experience has satisfied me ; but still the forcing by pots will answer very well for 
any of the smaller growing species. I have never found any difference between using 
dung fresh from the stable, and that which had undergone fermentation, provided it was 
not sufi^ered to heat violently after its application to the frame. I do not permit the in- 
ternal heat of the hollow space, above the plants, to rise above 60°, between 55° and 60** 
being the proper medium. To those who dislike the trouble of either frames or pots, it 
may be useful to know that rhubarb will come in much quicker, by being covered about 
six inches thick, with light litter ; care should be taken, in putting it on, and removing it, 
that no injury be done to the plants." 

4204. Knight has forced the rhubarb, and gives the following rationale of the principles on which his 
practice is founded. " The root of every perennial herbaceous plant contains within itself, during win- 
ter, all the organisable matter, which it expends in the spring in the formation of its first foliage and flower- 
stems ; and it requires neither food nor light to enable it to protrude these, but simply heat and water : and 
if the root be removed entire, as soon as its leaves become lifeless, it wiU be found to vegetate, after being 
jijeplanted, as strongly as it would have done, if it had retained its first position. These circumstances led 
Die, in the last winter, to dig up the roots of many plants of the common rhubarb (which I had raised 
from cuttings in the preceding spring), and to place them in a few large and deep pots, each pot being 
made to receive as many as it would contain. Some fine sandy loam was then washed in, to fill entirely 
the interstices between the roots, the tops of which were so placed as to be level with each other, and 
about an inch below the surface of the mould in the pots, which were covered with other pots of the same 
size, inverted upon them : being then placed in a vinery (in a situation where nothing else could be made 
to thrive on account of want of light), and being copiously supplied with water, the plants vegetated rapidly 
and strongly ; and from each pot I obtained three successive crops, the leaf-stalks of the two first being 
crowded so closely as nearly to touch each other over the whole surface of the pots. As soon as the third 
crop of leaves was broken off, and a change of roots became necessary, those taken from the pots were 
planted in the open ground, their tops being covered about an inch deep with mould, and I have reason to 
believe, from present appearances, that they will live and recover strength, if given a year of rest to be fit 
for forcing again. Should they, however, perish, it is of very little consequence ; as year-old roots, raised 
from cuttings or even from seeds, sown in autumn in rich soil, will be found sufficiently strong for 
use. The heat of a hot-bed, a kitchen, or other room, and, on the approach of spring (probably at any 
period after the middle of January), a cellar, wiU aftbrd a sufficiently high temperature ; and the advan- 
tage in all cases will be that of obtaining from one foot of surface as much produce as in the natural state 
of growth of the plants would occupy twenty feet ; and in the shady space of the vinery or peach-house, 
not applicable to other pui-poses, and" without incurring any additional expense in fuel, or doing injury to 
the soil, a succession of abundant crops may be raised." 

4205. Taking the stalks. Remove a little earth, and bending down the leaf you would remove, slip it off 
from the crown, without breaking or using the knife. The stalks are fit to use when the leaf is half- 
expanded ; but a larger produce is obtained by letting them remain till in full expansion, as is practised 
by the market-gardeners. The stalks are tied in bundles of a dozen and upwards, and thus exposed 
for sale. 

4206. To save seed. Leave one or two of the strongest flower-stalks to perfect their seeds, which they 
will do in July and August. 

SuBSECT. 2. Pomjnon and Gourd. — Cucurbita, L. Moncec. Monad. L. and Cucur- 
bitacece, J. Potiron and Pastisson, Fr. ; Kiirbiss, Ger. ; and Popone, Ital. 

4207. Of the pomjnon and gourd tribe there are six species in cultivation, natives of 
India and the East, all tender or half-hardy annuals, but producing fruit in the open air 
in Britain in the v/armest period of our summers. 

4208. The pumpkin, pumpion, or, more correctly, jwmpion, is the C- Pepo, L. (Pastis- 
son, Fr.); a native of the Levant, and introduced in 1570. Tlois is the melon or millon 
of our early horticulturiBts, the true melon being formerly distinguished, by the name of 



Book I. 



POIMPION AND GOURD 



675 



musk-melon. Though commonly cultivated in gardens for curiosity, yet, in some of 
the countrj- villages of England, the inhabitants grow it on dunghills, at the backs of 
their houses, and train the shoots to a great length over grass. When the fruit is ripe, 
they cut a hole in one side, and having taken out the seeds, fill tiie void space with sliced 
apples, adding a little sugar and spice, and then having baked the whole, eat it with - 
butter. (^jyeUl.) Pumpkin-pie, Abercrombie says, is very common. On the continent, 
the fruit is a good deal used in soups, and also stewed and fried in oil or butter. 

4209. The water-melon is the C. citndlus 
(Rumph. Am. 5. t. 146. and our ^g. 473.), Pas- 
teque, Fr. ; Wassermelone, Ger. ; and Cocomero, 
Ital. It is a native of the south of Europe, and 
introduced in 1.^97. It is rather more tender 
than the C. Pepo. This plant forms both the food 
and the drink of the inhabitants of Egypt for se- 
veral months in the year ; and is much used in 
the south of Italy. It requires nearly the same 
treatment as the common melon, but a larger frame 
to admit its more extended shoots to spread them- 
selves. The fruit is large, green externally, white - 
fleshed, reddish towards the centre, succulent, and 
refreshing, but not high-flavored. It is generally 
considered as the melon of the Jews, mentioned 
in various parts of the Bible. 

4210. The squash is the C Melopepo {Potiron, 
Fr. ; Pfebin Kurbiss,-Ger. ; and Popone, Ital.); a 
native of the Levant, and introduced in 1 597. It is cultivated like the pompion, and 
the fruit is used in pies, or gathered when of the size of a hen's egg, dressed in salt and 
water, and sliced and serv^ed on a toast. It is also used for pickling. In North America 
it is cultivated as an article of food. 

4211. The warted gourd (C. vei'rucosa) is a native of the Levant, and introduced in 
1658. Its nature and uses.ai-e the same as those of the squash, and like it, it is cultivated 
in North America as an article of food. 

4212. The bottle gourd, or false calabash (C. lagenaria), [Rmnph. Ain. 5. t. 144.) is a 
native of India, and introduced in 1597. Its culture and uses are the same as those of 
the two last sorts. 

4213. The orange-fruited gou7'd (C. aurantia) is a native of India, introduced in 1802, 
and rather more tender than the common pompion. It has been hitherto cultivated chiefly 
for curiosity, and when trained spii-ally round a pole, or against a wall, and loaded with 
its yellow fruit, it is very ornamental. The fruit may be used like those of the othe.- 
sorts. 

4214. The vegetable marrow (C. succado) {fg. 474.) . was in- 
troduced within these few years from Persia, where it is called'" 
deader. " The fruit," Sabine observes (Hort. Trayis. vol. ii. 
255.), "is of a uniform pale-yellow, or light sulphur-color ; when 
full grown, it is about nine inches in length, four inches in dia- 
meter, of an elliptic shape, the surface being rendered slightly 
uneven by irregular longitudinal ribs, the terminations of which 
uniting, form a projecting apex at the end of the fruit, which is 
very unusual in tliis tribe. It is useful for culinary purposes in 
ever}' stage of its growth ; when veiy young, it is good if fried 
with butter ; when large or about half grown, it is excellent either 
plain, boiled, or stewed with rich sauce ; for either of these purposes 
it should be cut in slices. The flesh has a peculiar tenderness and 
softness, from which circumstance it has, I suppose, received its 
name, much resembling the butter}^ quality of the Beurre pears, 
and this property remains with it till it is full grown, when it is 
used for pies. It is, however, in its intermediate state of growth 
that I conceive it likely to be most approved. Compared with all 
the other kinds which I had growing, its superiority was decided ; there were one or two 
which, in cooking, might be considered nearly as good, but these are bad bearers, and 
more difficult to cultivate, so that I consider the vegetable marrow without a rival." 
The culture of this species is the same as that of the others. 

4215. Culture applicable to all the species. They are propagated from seeds which are large, and require 
to be covered nearly an inch. " Sow in April in a hot-bed under a frame or hand-glass, to raise plants for 
transferring to the open garden at the end of May under a warm aspect ; or for planting out in the middle 
of May on a trench of hot dung under a hand-glass or half-shelter: otherwise sow, at the beginning of 
May, under a hand-glass without bottom-heat, for transplanting into a favorable situation ; or sow three 
wedEs later (after the 20th) at once in the open garden, under a south wall, for the plants to remain. The 





676 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Fart ill. 



smaller-fruited kinds do best trained to an upright pole or trellis. From time to time earth up the shank* 
of the plants. As the runners extend five feet or more, peg down at a joint, and they will take root. 
Water copiously whenever warm weatlier without showers makes the ground arid." {Abercrombie.) 

jSubsect. 3. Angelica, — Angelica Archangelica^ L. (Fl. Dan. t. 206.) Pent. Dig. L. 
UmbellifercB, J. Angelique, Fr. ; Engehviirtz, Ger. ; and Angelica, Ital. 

4216. The angelica is a biennial, a native- of England, being sometimes found in 
moist situations, and is also common in Lapland and Iceland. It was cultivated in 
Britain in 1568, and probably more early. It rises from three to five feet high, with 
very large pinnate leaves, the extreme leaflet three-lobed. The flowers are greenish, 
and produced in September ; the roots long and thick, and they, as well as the whole 
plant, are powerfully aromatic. Though the plant is only a biennial, it may be made 
to continue several years, by cutting over the flower-stem before it ripens seed j in which 
case it immediately pushes out below. 

4217. Use. It was formerly cultivated on account of its leaf-stalks, which were 
blanched and eaten as celery : now they are used only when candied ; and the young and 
tender stalks are for this purpose collected in May. Sometimes also the seeds and leaves 
are used in medical preparations. 

4218. Prapagatian and culture. It delights in moist situations, or the banks of running water ; but will 
grow freely in any soil and exposure. The plants are raised from seed, and, for a bed four feet and a half 
by six feet, sown in drills a foot apart, to be transplanted, half an ounce of seed will be requisite. " Sow 
in August, or as soon as the seed is ripe, as the plants will come up earlier and stronger than from a sow- 
ing in the spring. When the plants are advanced from four to six inches high, transplant them into rows 
two feet apart. They will soon strike root, and advance quickly in strong growth. In the second year, 
their strong erect branchy stalks will be several feet high, producing large umbels of seed, ripening in 
autumn, which, as well as the leaves of the plant, are used in medicine. But, for candying, the young 
shoots of the stems and stalks of the leaves are the useful parts: being cut, while green "and tender, in 
May and June, they are made by confectioners into the sweetmeat called Angehca. In the second year, 
if seed is not wanted, cut the plants-down in May, and the stool will send out side-shoots; by repeating 
this practice every year, the same plant may be long continued. Cuttings will also grow." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Anise. — Pitnpinella Anisum, L. {Blackw. t. 374.) Pent. Trig. L. and 
UmbellifercB, J. Anis, Fr. and Ger. ; and Anice, Ital. 

4219. The anise is an annual plant, a native of Egypt, and introduced to this coun- 
try, according to Turner, in 1551. The lower leaves are divided into three lobes, deeply 
cut on the edges ; the stem is a foot and a half high, dividing into several slender 
branches; the umbels large and loose, on rather long peduncles ; the flowers are small, 
of a yellowish-white, and appear from June to August. 

4220. Use. It is cultivated in Malta and Spain for its seeds, which are annually im- 
ported as medicinal, and for distillation and expression. In this country, it is occasionally- 
grown in the garden to be used as a garnish, and for seasoning, like fennel. 

4221. Culture. The sec<ls require to be sown in April, in a warm border, in a dry light soil; or raised 
in pots on heat, and removed to a warm site in May, where it will blossom and ripen seeds in August in 
favorable seasons. It does not bear transplanting, but the plants, when too thick, are to be thinned out 
to three or four inches' di^tiince. 

SuBSECT. 5. Coriander. — Coriandrum sativum, L. (Eng. Pot. 67.) Pent. Dig, L, 
and Umbelliferce, J. Coriandre, Fr. ; Coriander, Ger. ; and Coriandro, Ital. 

4222. The coriander is a hardy annual plant, originally introduced from the East, but 
now naturalised in Essex, and other places, where it has long been cultivated for di-ug- 
gists and confectioners. The plant rises about a foot high, with doubly pinnated leaves, 
and produces an umbel of white flowers in June. The whole plant is highly aromatic. 

4223. Use. In private gardens, it is cultivated chiefly for the tender leaves, which are 
used in soups and salads. On a large scale, it is cultivated for the seed, which is used 
by confectioners, druggists, and distillers, in large quantities. 

4224. Culture. The plant delights in a sandy loam. It is raised from seeds, which may be sown in Fe- 
bruary, when the weather is mild and dry ; and the quantity requisite for a bed four feet wide by six in 
length, to be sown in rows, is half an ounce ; and when sown in drills, they may be nine inches apart, 
and the seed buried half an inch. *' Where a constant succession is required, small successive monthly 
sowings will be necessary in spring and summer, as the plants in those seasons soon run to seed. There 
should be also small sowings in August and September, to stand the winter under the defence of a frame. 
The plants are to remain where sown." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 6. Caraway. — Carum carui, L. (Eng. Pot. 1503.) Pent. Trig. L. and 
UmbellfercB, J. Carvi, Fr. ; J{iimmel, Ger. ; and Carvi, Ital. 

4225. The caraway is a biennial plant, a native of England, being occasionally found 
in meadows and pastures. It rises a foot and a half high, with spreading branches ; the 
leaves are decompound ; the leaflets in sixes ; it produces umbels of white flowers in 
June. 

4226. Use. The plant is cultivated chiefly for the seed, which is used in confectionary 
and in medicine. In spring, the under leaves are sometimes put in soups ; and in former 
times the fusiform roots were eaten as parsneps, to which Parkinson gives them the pre- 
ference. In Essex, large quantities of the seed are annually raised for distillation with 
spirituousjjquors. 



Book I. 



HYSSOP, CHAMOMILE, ELECAMPANE. 



677 



4227. Culture, It is raised from seed, of which a quarter of an ounce is sufficient for a seed-bed four 
feet by five. Sow annually, in autumn, soon after the seed is ripe ; the seedlings will rise quickly, and 
should be thinned, to a foot's distance each way. In default of sowing in autumn, sow in March or April, 
either in drills or broad-cast ; but the plants so raised, will not in general flower till the following year. 
When the seed is ripe, the plant is generally pulled up in gathering, especially in field-culture 

SuBSECT. 1-. Hue. — Ruta graveolem, L. {Lam. III. 345. t. 1.) Decan. Monog^ L. 
and RutacecB, J. Rue, Fr. ; Raute, Ger. j and Ruta, Ital. 

4228. The rue is a perennial evergreen under-shrub, a native of the south of Europe, 
but cultivated in this country since 1562, and probably long before. It is w^ell know^n 
by its fetid smell. 

4229. Use. The leaves are sometimes gathered as a medicinal simple, and are also 
given to poultry having the croup. In former days, it was called the herb of grace, from 
the circumstance of small bunches of it having been used by the priests for the sprinkling 
of holy water among the people. 

4230. Culture. It is easily propagated by seeds, cuttings, or slips of the young shoots in March, April, 
or May, planted in a shady border. The plant delights in a poor, dry, calcareous soil ; in which it will con- 
tinue for many years, and if cut down occasionally, always in full leaf and well furnished with young 
shoots. Letting it run to seed, weakens the plant and shortens its longevity. 

SuBSECT. 8. Hysso}}. — Hyssojms officinalis, L. {Jac. Aug. 3. t. -254:.) Didynam. Gym- 
nos. L. ; and Labiates, J. HysojiC, Fr. ; Jsop, Ger. j and Jsopo, Ital. 

4231. The hyssop is a hardy evergreen under-shrub, a native of the south of Europe, 
and introduced in 1548. The stems rise a foot and a half high; the leaves are lanceolate, 
short, and somewhat obtuse ; it produces blue flowers from June to September. The 
whole plant has a strong aromatic odor. 

4232. Use. The leaves and young shoots are occasionally used as a pot-herb, and the 
leafy tops and flower-spikes are cut, dried, and preserved for medicinal purposes. 

4233. The varieties are — 

The white, blue, and red flowered ; but the blue is the original color, and most commonly cultivated. 
4234. Propagation and culture. " It is raised by seed, by slips, and cuttings of the branches, and by 
slips of the root and top together. It likes a di-y or sandy soil. When it is propagated by seed, sow in 
March or April a small portion, either broad-cast and raked in, or in small drills, six inches apart. The 
plants may mostly be transplanted into final beds in June or July, nine inches apart, or some may be 
planted as an edging ; or you may also sow some seed for an edging to remain where sown. Give the 
edgings occasionally trimming, in their established growth ; cutting away also any decayed flower-spikes 
in autumn. You may take rooted offsets from established plants in March, April, August, or September; 
cuttings from the stalks in April and May ; also rootless slips of the young shoots in June or July. After 
May, shade for a time, or plant in a shady border. If for culmary purposes, the distance from plant to 
plant may be nine inches ; in the i)hysic-garden, eighteen inches or two feet. Water at planting, and twice 
or thrice a-week in dry weather till rooted." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Chamomile. — Anthemis nobilis, L. (Eng. Rot. 980.) Syng. Polyg. Super. 
L. and Corymhiferce, J. Camomille, Fr. ; Kamille, Ger. ; and Camomilla, Ital. 

4235. The chamomile is a hardy perennial, which grows wild in various parts of Eng- 
land in gravelly pastures, and by road-sides. The leaves are cut into threads, and the 
stem prostrate. The flowers are white in the rays and yellow in the disk, and appear in 
August and September. The whole plant is bitter and highly aromatic. 

4236. Use. It is cultivated on account of the flower, which is a safe bitter and 
stomachic, and much used under the name of chamomile-tea. The double-flowering 
variety, though more beautiful than the single-flowered, is less useful ; the aromatic 
principle not residing in the floscules of the ray, the multiplication of which constitutes 
the double flower. The double sort, however, is most cultivated by growers for the 
market, on account of its greater bulk and weight. 

4237. Varieties. These are the common single, and the double flowered. 

4238. Soil and culture. This herb delights in a poor sandy soil. " Both kinds are propagated by part- 
ing the roots, or by slips of the rooted, offsets, or of the runners. Detach them with roots, in little tufty 
sets, in March, April, or May ; and plant them from eight to twelve inches asunder, giving water ; repeat 
waterings occasionally till they root ; they will soon overspread the bed, and produce plenty of flowers the 
same year in July and August, and continue several years productive. 

4239. Taking the crop. " The flowers should be gathered in "their prime, in June or July, just when 
full-blown. Let them be spread to dry in a shady place j then put them in paper bags, and house them for 
use." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 10. Elecamjmne. — Inula Helenium, L. {Eng. Bot. t. \5A6.) Syng. Polyg, 
Super. L. and CorymhifercB, J. Inule, Fr. and Ger. ; and Inula, Ital. 

4240. The elecamjmne is a perennial plant, found in moist pastures in the south of 
England, and one of the largest herbaceous plants we have, rising from three to five feet 
Iwgh ; the lower leaves embrace the stem, are ovale and wrinkled, a foot long and four or 
five inches broad in the middle. It produces large heads of yellow flowers in July and 
August. The root is thick, fusiform, and aromatic. It was formerly in great repute, 
and the plant was cultivated in village gardens throughout Europe. In private gai-dens 
it still keeps its place in the physic-herb corner. 

4241. Use. In France and Germany, the root is candied, and used as a stomachic, for 

X X 3 



678 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

streogthening the tone of the viscera in general. As a medicinal plant, it possesses the 
general virtues of alexipharmics. 

4242. Culture. It is propagated by offsets in autumn, after the plant has done flowering : these, if planted 
in a deep soil, rather moist, or in a shady situation, will be fit for use the end of the second year. Roots of 
this age are said to be preferable to those of older plants. 

SuBSECT. 1 1 . Licorice. — Glycyrrliiza glabra, L. (Lam. III. t. 625. f. 2. ) Diadel. 
Decan. L. and Leguviinosce, J. Reglisse, Fr. ; SiisholZf Ger. ; and Reglida, Ital. 

4243. The licorice is a hardy perennial plant, a native of the south of Europe, and 
introduced into this country in 1562. The roots run very deep into the ground, and 
creep to a considerable distance, sending up strong herbaceous stalks, four or five feet 
high ; the leaves are composite, and consist of four or five ovate leaflets terminated by an 
odd one ; these and the stalks are clammy, and of a dark green. The flowers come out 
in axillary spikes, of a blue color, in July and August, Stowe informs us,, that the plant- 
ing and grovi^ing of licorisk began about the first year of Queen Elizabeth. 

4244. Use. It is cultivated on a large scale for the brewers and druggists, and in 
gardens for the saccharine juice obtained from the root by decoction, and used as an 
emollient in colds, fevers, &c. 

4245. Propagation and culture. " Licorice is propagated by cuttings of the roots. On account of the 
depth to which the root strikes, when the plant has room to flourish, the soil should have a good staple of 
mould thirty inches or three feet in depth. Taking the small horizontal roots of established plants, cut 
them into sections six inches long ; having traced out rows a yard asunder, plant the sets along each row, 
at intervals of eighteen incheS; covering them entirely with mould. For the first year, you may cultivate 
alight crop of lettuce or onions between the rows. During the summer, keep the plot clear from weeds; 
and when the subordinate crop comes off, hoe and dress the ground. At the close of autumn, or as a 
winter dressing, fork or dig between the rows, to stir and refresh the surface ; and cut down the decayed 
stems." 

4246. Taking the crop. After three or four years' growth, the main roots will be of a mature size, 
and fit for consuiBption or the market. In the course of the following winter, begin to digthemup, open- 
ing a trench close to the first row, as deep as the roots, then, with the spade, turn out all the roots clean to 
the bottom; so proceed from trench to trench, and prepare the ground for some other crop." {Aber- 

crotnbie.) 

SuBSECT. 12. IFormwood. — Artemisia Absinthium, L. {Eng. JBot. 1230.) Syng. 
Polyg. Super. L. and Corymbifercp, J. Absinthe, Fr. ; Wermuth, Ger. ; and 
Assenzio, Ital. 

4247. The wormwood is a perennial plant, well known, and frequent in calcareous 
commons and by road-sides in England. It rises from two to four feet high, covered 
with minutely divided hoary leaves. The flowers appear in small pendulous hemi- 
spherical bunches in August, The whole plant is intensely bitter and iircmatic. 

4248. Use. The seeds are used as stomachics, and the herb was formerly much used 
as a vermifuge. The gi ov. th of this plant, Neill observes, " should be encouraged in 
poultry v/alks, it being found beneficial to them. The distillers in Scotland sometimes 
employ it in place of hops, and for their use, small fields of it are occasionally sown." 

4249. Propagation and culture. By seed, cuttings, or dividing the root : the latter is the easiest mode, 
and the future treatment may be the same as for rue or hj'ssop. The sea-wormwood {A. maritima), the 
Roman {A. pontica), and the Tartarian {A. santonica) are propagated chiefly by cuttings, and may be treated 
like the common species. 

SuBSECT. 13. Blessed Thistle. — Centaurea benedicta, L. iZorn. Ic. 122.) Syngen. 
Polyg. p7-i(Stan. L. and Cynarocephalce, J. Centauree sudonfique, Fr. ; Cardo 
benedicten, Ger. ; and Cai-do santo, Ital. 

4250. The blessed thistle is an annual plant, a native of Spain and the Levant, and 
introduced in 1548. The leaves are long, elliptical, rough, runcinate, and variously 
serrated. The calyx is woolly, and the flowers yellow, appearing from June to November. 

4251. Use. An infusion of the leaves is sometimes used as a stomachic, and is said 
to procure the return of appetite, where the stomach was injured by irregularities. A 
strong infusion promotes perspiration, and increases all the secretions. It was formerly 
used in cases of cancer ; but at present is considered of little medical value. 

!ii52. Culture. The seed is to be sown in autumn, in any light earth, and in a warm situation. Thin- 
ned and kept free from weeds, the plants will flower the following June and July, and if not gathered, will 
produce seeds in August and September. Gather the herb when in flower, and take great care in drying 
it and keeping it in a dry airy place, to prevent its rotting or getting mouldy, which it is very apt to do. 

SuBSECT. 1 4. Palm. — Melissa officinalis, L. Didyn. Gymnos. L. and Labiat<B, J. 
Melisse, Fr. ; Melisse, Ger. ; and Melissa, Ital. 

4253. The halm is a hardy perennial, with square stems, which rise two feet high or 
more, furnished with large ovate leaves, growing by pairs at each joint. It is a native 
of Switzerland, and the south of France ; produces flowers of a purplish color from 
June to October, and was introduced to tliis country in 1573. There is a variety with 
hairy leaves. 

4254. Use. It is now little used, unless for making a simple balm-tea, which affords 
a grateful diluent drink in fevers, and for forming a light and agreeable beverage under 
the name of balm-wine. 



Book I. 



PLANTS USED AS PRESERVES, &c. 



679 



4255. Propagation. It is readily propagated by parting the roots, [)reserving two or 
three buds to each piece, or by slips, either in autumn or spring. 

4256. Culture. Plant the slips or sets in any bed of common earth, by dibble or trowel, and from eight 
inches to a foot apart, giving water, if dry weather. Those of the spring planting will soon grow freely 
for use the same year ; and afterwards will increase by the root into large bunches of several years' continu- 
ance, furnishing annual supplies from March to September. 

4257. Dried balm. Gather when coming into flower, and when the leaves are per- 
fectly free from dew or moisture ; then dry rapidly in the shade, or better in an oven ; 
and when cool press the herbage into packages, and wrap them up in white paper till 
wanted for use. Keep the packages dry and in a close drawer. 

Sect. XI. Plants used as Preserves and Pickles. 

4258. Ofj^lants used as culinary preserves and pickles, some are tender annuals, requir- 
ing to be reared to a certain stage of growth in hot-beds or stoves, as the capsicum and 
love-apple ; others are marine plants, as the samphires, more generally gathered wild than 
cultivated in the garden. The remainder are chiefly common garden-plants, used also 
for other purposes, as the red cabbage, Indian cress, &c. The whole occupy but a few 
square yards of the largest kitchen-garden ; and, excepting the red cabbage, few of them 
are seen in that of the cottager for the purposes of this section. 

SuBSECT. 1. Love-ylpjde. — Solanuni Lycopersicu7n, L. ; Lycopersicum escidentum, 
Dunal. (Rumph. Amb. 5. t. 154. f. 1.) Pentan. Monog. L. and Solanacece, J. 
Tomato, Fr. ; Liebes Apfel, Ger. ; and Porno d' Oro, Ital. 

4259. The love-ajiple is a tender annual, a native of South America, and introduced 
in 1596. The stem, if supported will rise to the height of six or eight feet ; the leaves 
are pinnate, and have a rank disagreeable smell when handled; the flowers .are yellow, 
appearing in bunches in July and August, and followed by the fruit in August and 
September. The fruit is smooth, compressed at both ends, and furrowed over the sides ; 
it varies in size, but seldom exceeds that of an ordinary golden pippin. 

4260. Use. When ripe, the fruit, which has an acid flavor, is put into soups and 
sauces, and the juice is preserved for winter use like ketchup ; it is also used in confec- 
tionary, as a preserve ; and when green, as a pickle. Though a good deal used in 
England in soups, and as a principal ingredient in a well known sauce for mutton ; yet, 
our estimation and uses of the fruit are nothing to those of the French and Italians, and 
especially the latter. Near Rome and Naples, whole fields are covered with it, and 
scarcely a dinner is served up in which it does not in some way or other form a part. 

4261. Varieties. Those in general cultivation are — 

The large, small, cherry, £ind pear-shaped red 1 The large, and small, or cherry-shaped yellow. 

4262. Estimate of sorts. " The first sort is in most estimation for domestic purposes, 
and should be cultivated accordingly ; while a few plants of the other kinds may be 
raised for variety of the fruit." 

4263. Propagation and culture. The plants must be raised and forwarded in a hot-bed, under glass, 
from about the vernal equinox till May. Sow in any general hot-bed about the end of March, or begin- 
ning or middle of April ; and as to quantity of seed, one ounce will produce sixty plants. As soon as 
the plants are about two inches high, if they are immediately pricked into another hot-bed, or into that 
where raised, singly into small pots placed in the hot-bed, they will grow more stocky, and can be more 
successfully transplanted. About the middle or end of May, transplant them, each with a ball of earth, 
into a south border, to have the full sun, that the fruit may ripen in perfection. Some may be planted 
close to a south wall, if. vacant spaces can be had ; but as they draw the ground exceedingly, do not set 
them near choice fruit-trees. Give water. During the first week or fortnight, if the nights be cold, de- 
fend them with hand-glasses, or by whelming a large garden-pot over each plant ; or transplant upon 
holes of hot dung, earthed to six inches depth, and cover with hand-glasses. When they begin to run, 
train them to stakes, or, when planted near a wall or pales, nail up the branches. 

4264. Wilmot plants at the foot of a bed sloping steeply to the south, and trains the runners on it by 
pegging them down. They frequently strike root at the joints ; he " tops them as soon as their branches 
meet, clears off all the lateral shoots, and thins the leaves by which the fruit is exposed and well ripened. 
In the fine season of 1818, each plant so treated produced, on an average, twenty pounds' weight of fruit." 
{Hart. Trans, iii. 345.) The fruit begins to ripen in August ; gathered in October, and hung up in 
bunches in any dry apartment, it will continue good for use in November. 

4265. To save seed. " Gather some of the best ripe fruit in autumn ; clear out the seed ; wash and 
cleanse it from the pulp, and dry it thoroughly ; then put it up in papers or bags, for use next spring." 
( Abera-ombie.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Egg-Plant. — Solanum Melongena, L. {Pluk. Phyt. 226. f. 2.) Pent. 
Monog. L. and Solanacece, B. P. Melongene, Fr. ; Tollapfel, Ger. ; and Melan- 
zana, Ital. 

4266, The egg-plant is a tender or green-house annual, a native of Africa, introduced 
in 1597. The plant rises about two feet high, with reclining branches ; the flowers ap- 
pear in June and July, of a pale-violet color, followed by a very large berry, generally 
of an oval shape, and white color, much resembling a hen's egg ; and in large speci- 
mens, that of a swan. 

4267. Use.- In French and Italian cookery, it is used in stews and soups, and for the 
general purposes of the love-apple. 

X X 4 



680 



PRACriCE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 



The vmieties are — 

The oval-shaj)ed white | The globular-shaped white 1 The purple, or violet -colored, of both forms. • 
42o9. Culture. The plants are raised from seed, which may be sown in March or April, in a hot-bed, 
in light rich earth. After they have shown two or three proper leaves, they may either be pricked out. 
in another hot-bed, or i)lanted in small pots, to be sliifted in rotation, till in size No. 16. in which 
they will produce their fruit. If the plants, instead of being shifted into fruiting-pots, are planted 
against a wall, or in a warm border in June, they will fruit in the open air, if the season is not unusually 
wet and cold. 

4270. To save seed. Gather one or two ripe berries of each sort, large and well formed, and preserve 
them entire, till the seed is wanted for sowing. 

SuBSECT. 3. Capsicum. — Capsicvm, L. Pent. Monog. L. and Solanncece, B. P. 
Piment, Fr. ; Sjyanischer Pfeffer, Ger. ; and Peberone, Ital. 

4271. Of the capsicum there are three species in cultivation. 

4272. The annual capsicum, or Guinea-pepper, is the C. annuum, L. [KnoiT. Thess. 2. 
t. C. 6.), an annual plant, which, though a native of India, endures the open air in 
this country during summer. It was introduced in 1548, and was cultivated in Gerrard's 
time. It rises about two feet high, producing long, linear, dark-green leaves, on a 
branchy stem. The flowers are white, and appear in June and July, succeeded by ber- 
ries, vaiying in shape and color, and either long-podded, red and yellow ; short-podded, 
red and yellow ; round short-podded, red and yellow ; or heart-shaped, red apd yellow. 

4273. The cherry-jyejyj^er (<?. cerasiforme), (Hort. Keiv.), is an annual plant, a native of 
the West Indies, which also stands our summer. It was introduced in 1759, has the 
same general character of foliage as the Guinea pepper, and flowers from June to Sep- 
tember. It is characterised by its small cherry-shaped fruit, which is sometimes heart- 
shaped, bell-shaped, or angular, and in color red or yellow. 

4274. The hell-pepper [C. grossum), [Be.d. E^/st. Aut. 1. t. ] 1. f. 1.), is a stove biennial, 
a native of India, and introduced in 1759. It is of humble growth, flowers in July, 
and produces large red or yellow berries. It will endure the open air in summer, but 
requires a place in the stove during the winter and spring months. 

4275. Use. The green pods, or inflated berries, of all these varieties, are used for 
pickling. They are sometimes also used in their ripe state, when they form a spice of 
the hottest quality, known by the name of Cayenne pepper. The berries of the last 
named species are deemed better for pickling than the others, tlie skin being thick, 
pulpy, and tender. 

4276. Culture. All the three species, with their varieties, are raised from seed ; a small parcel, or the 
produce of two pods, will be a sufficient quantity of each or of any one variety for ordinary supply. Sow 
all the annual sorts at the end of March, " or beginning or middle of April, in a moderate hot-bed, under 
a frame. Cover the seed a quarter of an inch deep. When the plants are two or three inches in growth, 
prick some into a new slender hot-bed, to forward them for final transplanting ; or in default of this, 
prick them into a bed of natural earth, at the beginning of May, if fine, settled, warm weather ; defend 
them with a frame, or awning of mats, at night and in cold vicissitudes. Give water hghtly at planting, 
and occasionally afterwards in moderate supplies, to assist their fresh rooting and subsequent growth. At 
the beginning of June, when the weather is settled warm, transplant them into the open garden, in beds 
of light rich earth, from twelve to eighteen inches apart, giving water. They will thus advance freely, 
flower in July or August, and produce plenty of pods from August till the end of September. Under the 
de;iciency of a hot-bed or stove, or for succession, annual capsicums may be raised in a bed of light rich 
earth, under a hand-glass ; but the sowing must be deferred to fine warm weather in May. Give the 
plants air in the day, but cover them close at night, till danger from frost is over. At the close of June, 
transplant as above. The perennial species must be wintered in the stove." {Abcrcrmtibie.) 

^2.17. To save seed. Leave one or two of the largest and handsomest shaped pods to ripen in autumn ; 
after gathering them, the best way is to hang them up in a dry place, and not take out the seed till 
wanted for sowing in spring. 

SuBSECT. 4. SamjMre, three Sjyecies of diff'erent Orders and Genera. 

4278. Common samphire is the Crithmum Mari- 
timum, L. Pot. 819.); Pent. Big. L. and 
UmSelliferce, J. Perce-pierre, or Saint Pierre, 
Fr. ; Meerfenchel, Ger. ; and Finochio marino, 
Ital. {Jig. 475. a) It is a perennial plant, a 
native of Britain, and found on rocky cliffs by the 
sea, and in dry stone walls. The root-leaves are 
triternate, those of the stem lanceolate and fleshy ; 
the flowers appear on a stem of about eighteen 
inches high in August, and ai-e of a yellow color. 
The name samphire is a corruption of sampiei^, and 
this again a corruptioii of the French name Saint 
Pierre. 

4279. Use. Samphire forms an excellent 
pickle, and a frequent addition to salads. In 
taste, it is crisp and aromatic, and constitutes a 
light and wholesome condiment. It is generally 
gathered in places where it is found native ; and 
the allusion to the practice by Shakspeare, in his 

description of Dover cliff, is well known. The plant is also used medicinally. 




Book I. 



EDIBLE WILD PLANTS. 



681 



4280. Cidture. It is propagated by parting the roots, or by sowing the seed in April ; but is rather 
difficult of cultivation. Marshall says, " it likes a cool situation ; but yet prefers a sandy or a gravelly 
soil, and'plenty;of water. Some," he adds, " have found it to do best in pots, set for the morning sun only." 
Braddick placed it in a sheltered dry situation, screened from the morning sun ; protected it by litter 
during winter, and in spring sprinkled the soil with a little powdered barilla : " This I do," he says, "to 
furnish the plant with a supply of soda, since in its native place of growth, it possesses the power of 
decomposing sea-water, from which it takes the fossil alkali, and rejects the muriatic acid. With this 
treatment it has continued to flourish at Thames Ditton for some years, producing an ample supply of 
shoots, which are cut twice in the season." {Hort. Trans, ii. 232.) 

4281. Golden samphire is the Inula CriilwiifoUa, L. {Eng. Bot. 68.) Syng. Polyg. 
Super. L. and Corymbiferce, J. L^Inule perce-pierre, Fr. ; Goldene Meerfenchel, Ger. 
{Jig. 475. b) It is a perennial plant, found on sea-shores, generally within salt-water 
mark. It is occasionally gathered and brought to Covent Garden market, under the 
name of golden samphire ; but has not, we believe, been introduced in the garden. It 
is used for the same pui"poses as the common samphire. 

4282. Marsh-samphire is the Salicornia Herbacea, L. {Eng. Bot. t. 415.) Dian. 
Monog. L. and Chenopodea, B. P. Salicorne, Fr. ; Glassdnnalz, Ger. ; and Erbacali, 
Ital. [Jig. 475. c.) It is an annual plant, a native of Britain, and not uncommon in 
salt-marshes, and other aits and islets of low land overflown by the sea. It is occasionally 
gathered and brought to market ; and is used for pickling, and in salads, like the two 
plants above described. This and the former species might be cultivated in the garden, 
by imitating a small portion of salt-marsh. 

Sect. XII. Edible Wild Plants, neglected, or not in Cultivation. 

4283. Tlie subject of edible wild p)lants is introduced as highly deserving the study 
of the horticulturist; partly to increase his resources, partly to induce such as have 
leisure to try how far these plants may be susceptible of improvement by cultivation ; but 
principally to enable the gentleman's gardener to point out resources to the poor in his 
neighborhood, in seasons of scarcity. All vegetables not absolutely poisonous maybe 
rendered edible by proper preparation. Many sorts, for example, are disagreeable from 
their acrid and bitter taste ; but this might be, in a great degree, removed by maceration, 
either in cold or hot water. The vegetable matter once reduced to a state of insipidity, 
it is easy to give it taste and flavor, by adding salt of some sort, which is an article never 
scarce through the influence of bad seasons ; or by vinegar, or oils, or fats ; by the 
addition of other vegetables of agreeable tastes and flavors, as of thyme, mint, celery- 
seed, onions, &c. ; or by the addition of torrefied vegetable matter ; as of the powder of 
roasted carrot, parsnep, potatoe, or dandelion-roots, or of beans, peas, or wheat ; or, if 
it can be had, of toasted bread, which will render almost any thing palatable, and pro- 
long the pleasure of eating many of the ^best things. 

4284. Gooseberry, birch, beech, willow, and other leaves, we are told, were formerly eaten 
as salads ; and there can be little doubt that aboriginal man would eat any green thing 
that came in his way, till he began to improve. It may be worth while for man in his 
present multiplied and highly civilised state, to reflect on these things, with a view 
to resources in times of famine, or in travelling or voyaging, or touching at or settling 
in new or uncultivated countries. {Parry's Voyage to the Polar Regions, 4to. 1821.) 
Edible wild plants may be classed as greens and pot-herbs, roots, legumes, salads, 
teas, and plants applied to miscellaneous domestic purposes. 

SuBSECT. 1. Greens and Pot-herbs from Wild Plants. 

4285. Black bi-yony. Tamus communis, L. {Eng. Bot. 91.) Dioec. Hex. L. and 
Smilacece, J. A twining perennial, growing in hedges, and commonly considered a 
poisonous plant ; but the young leaves and tops are boiled and eaten by the country 
people in spring. 

4286. Burdock. Arctium lappa, L. {Eng. Bot. 1228.) Si/ng. Pol. 2Eq. L. and Cynaroceplialce, J. A 
well known perennial, the tender stalks of which many people eat boiled as asparagus. {Bryant.) 

4287. Charlock. Sinapis arvensis, L. {Eng. Bot. 1748.) Tetrad. Siliq. L. and Cruciferte, J. A common 
annual weed in corn-fields. The young plant is eaten in the spring as turnip-tops, and is considered not 
inferior to that vegetable. The seeds of this have sometimes been sold for feeding birds instead of rape; 
but being hot in its nature, it often renders them diseased. 

4288. Chickweed. Alsine media, L. Stellaria media, E. B. {Eng. Bot. 537.) Becan. Trig. L. and 
Caryophyllece, J. This common garden-weed is said to be a remarkably good pot-herb, boiled in the 
spring. 

4289. Shepherd's purse. Thlaspi bursa pasioris,!.. {Eng. Bot. 1485.) Tetrad. Silic. L. and Cruciferce,3. 
An esculent plant in Philadelphia, brougnt to market in large quantities in the early season. The taste, 
when boiled, approaches that of the cabbage, but is softer and milder. This plant varies wonderfully in 
size and succulence of leaves, according to the nature and state of the soil where it grows. Those from 
the gardens and highly cultivated spots near Philadelphia, come to a size and succulence of leaf scarcely 
to be believed without seeing them. They may be easily blanched by the common method, and certainly, 
in that state, would be a valuable addition to the list of delicate culinary vegetables. {Correa de Serra, in 
Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 445.) 

4290. Fat hen. Chenopodium urbicuf?iy (Eng. Bot. 717.) and C. album, {Eng. Bot. 1723.) Pent. Dig. L. 
and Chenopode^e, J. Both these plants are annuals, common among rubbish of buildings, dunghills, &c. 
Boiled, and eaten as spinage, they are by no means inferior to that vegetable. Several other native, but 
less common species of this genus, may be applied to the same use.. 



682 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4291. Ox-tongue. Pm-is Meracioides, L. {Eng. Bot. 972.) Syn. Pol. JEq. L. and Cichoracece, J. This 
annual, common in clayey pastures and wastes, when boiled, affords a good green. In France and Italy, 
a species named P. vulgare, and probably the same as the above, is grown and used as a salad, and is said 
to resemble succory. {Bon Jard. 1820. p. 170.) 

4292. Sauce alone, or Jack by the hedge, is the Erysimum AUiai-ia,!^. {Eng. Bot. 196.) Tetrad, Siliq^. 
and Cntcifei-cB, J. {fig. 475. d) A biennial plant ; found by hedges where the soil is dry and rich. The 
stem rises two or three feet high, with heart-shaped leaves of a yellowish-green color the flowers are 
white, and appear in May. The whole plant, as the trivial name imports, scents strongly of garlic. It is 
occasionally used as a salad; boiled as a pot-herb, or introduced in sauces. XeiU observes, that, " when 
gathered as it approaches the flowering state, boiled separately, and then eaten to boiled mutton, it cer- 
tainly forms a most desirable pot-herb ; and to any kind of salted meat, an excellent green." 

4293. Sea-orache. Atriplex Uttoralh, L. {Eng. Bot. 708.) Poly. Monocc. L. and Chenopodece, B. P. This 
is an annual, and is eaten in the same manner as the chenopodium, as greens or spinage. 

4294. Sea-beef. Beta maritima, L. {Eng. Bot. 285.) Pent. Big. L. and Chenopodece, J. Tliis biennial 
is common on various sea-shores, and is also used like the orache, fat hen, and white beet. 

4295. Spotted haivkweed. Hypocheris tnaculata, L. {Eng. Bot. 225.) Syng. Pol. JEq. L. and Cichora- 
cece, J. The leaves of this perennial are eaten as salad, and also boiled as greens. 

4296. Stinging nettle. Urtica dioica, L. {Eng. Bot. 1750.) Monac. Pent. L. and Vrticece, J. This 
perennial, found in dry rubbishy soils and in hedges ; is but seldom seen in places where the hand of man 
has not been at %vork, and may therefore be considered a sort of domestic plant. Early in February, the 
tops will be found to have pushed three or four inches, furnished with tender leaves ; in Scotland, Poland, 
and Germany, these are gathered as a pot-herb for soups, or for dishes like spinage ; and their pecuUar 
flavor is by many much esteemed. No plant is better adapted for forcing ; and in severe winters, when 
most of the brassica tribe have been destroyed, it forms an excellent resource. Collect the creeping roots, 
and plant them either on a hot-bed, or in pots to be placed in a forcing-house, and they will soon send up 
abundance of tender tops : these, if desired, may be blanched, by covering with other pots. We have 
known the nettle forced by being planted close to the flue in a vinery, so as to produce excellent nettle- 
kale and nettle-spinage in the last week of January. 

4297. Wild rocket is the Sisyttibrium officinale, {Eng. Bot. 125.) Tetrad. Siliq. L. and Cruciferce, J. 
A common annual, of a yellowish hue, from two to three feet high, with the leaves runcinated, and the 
seed-pods inclined upwards, close to the stalk. It is sometimes used as a pot-herb ; and the tender young 
leaves, in salading, greatly resembling mustard in its taste and flavor. 

4298. Willow-herb. Epilobium angustifolium, L. {Eng. Bot. 1947.) Oct. Monog. L. and Onagrarece, J. 
The young and tender shoots are eaten as asparagus, and the leaves are a wholesome green. 

4299. Sow-thistle is the Sonchus olcraceus, {Eng. Bot. 843 ) Syng. Polyg. JEqu. L. and Cichoracece, J. 
A hardy annual, and a well known weed in rich garden and field soils. There is a prickly and a smooth 
variety, both abounding in a milky bitter juice. The tender tops of the smooth variety are in some 
countries boiled and used as greens, or mashed as spinage : hence the origin of the Linna?an trivial name 
oleraceus. 

SuBSECT. 2. Roots of Wild Plants edible. 
4300. Arrowhead. Sagittaria sagittifolia, L. {Eng. Bot. 84.) Moncec Polyan. L. and 
Alismaceee, B. P. The roots of this aquatic perennial are said to be very similar to those 
of the West India arrow-root (2Taranta Arundinacea, L.). They are sometimes dried 
and pounded, but are reported to have an acrid unpleasant taste ; though tliis might, 
it is believed, be got rid of by washing the powder in water. 

4301. Common arum. Arum maculatum, L {En^. Bot. 1293.) Moncec. Polyan. L. and Aroidcee, B. P. 
This plant is very common in hedges and woods in loamy soils ; in the isle of Portland it is very abun- 
dant, and there the roots are dug up by the country people, macerated, steeped, and the powder so 
obtained is dried, and sent to London, and sold under the name of Portland sago. 

4302. Bitter vetch, or tnouse peas. Orobus tubcrosus, L. {Eng. Bot. 1153.) Diad. Decan. L. and 
Leguininosce, J. The tubers are said to be chewed by the Scottish Highlander as a substitute for tobacco. 
Boiled till a fork will pass through them, and dried slightly and roasted, they are served up in Holland 
and Flanders in the manner of chestnuts, which they resemble in flavor. Dickson {Hort. Trans, ii. 359.) 
recommends cultivating them in a bed or border of light rich soil, paved at the depth of twenty inches, to 
prevent their roots from running down. Plant the tubers six inches apart, and three inches below the 
surface ; the second year some will be fit to gather, and by taking only the largest, the bed will continue 
productive for several years, adding some fresh compost every year. 

4303. Earth-nut. Bunium bulbocastanum, L. {Eng. Bot' 988.) Pent. Dig. L. and TJmbellifercB, J., 
The roots of this bulbous perennial are eaten raw, and are by some considered a delicacy here, but thought 
much more of in Sweden, where they are an article of trade : they are eaten also stewed as chestnuts. 

4304. Meadow-sweet. Spircea Filipendula, L. {Eng. Bot. 284.)" Icos. Di-Pentag. L. and Bosacece, J. 
The tubers of this perennial, common in most meadows where the soil is inclined to peat, or boggy, are 
ground and made into bread in Sweden. 

4305. Pilewort. Banuncidus ficaria, L. {Eng. Bot. 584.) Polyan. Polyg. L. and Banunculacece, J. 
The young leaves, in spring, are boiled by the common people in Sweden, and eaten as greens. The roots 
are sometimes washed bare by the rains, so that the tubercles appear above ground ; and in this state 
have induced the ignorant, in superstitious times, to fancy that it has rained wheat, which these tubercles 
somewhat resemble. {Derham's Physico-Theology.) 

4306. Sago. Orchis Mono, L. {Eng. Bot. 2059.) Gynan. Monan. L. and Orchidece, B. P. The 
powder of the roots is used in forming the beverage called saloop. Though imported chiefly from Turkey, 
yet the roots of this country, either gathered wild, or cultivated for use, might answer the same purpose. 
This plant is particularly abundant in the vale of Gloucester. 

4307. Silver-weed. Potentilla Anserina, L. {Eng. Bot. 861.) Icos. Polyan. L. and Bosacece, J. The 
roots of this plant taste like parsneps, and are frequently eaten in Scotland either roasted or boiled. In 
the islands of Jura and Col they are much esteemed, as answering in some measure, the purposes of 
bread, they having been known to support the inhabitants for months togetl>€r during a scarcity of 
other provisions. They often tear up their pasture-grounds with a view to get the roots for their use ; 
and as they abound most in barren and impoverished soils, and in seasons when other crops fail, they 
aflTord a most seasonable relief to the inhabitants in times of the greatest scarcity. {Lighffoofs Fl. Scot.) 

4308. Solomons seal. Polygonatum vulgare, D. {Eng. Bot. 280.) The roots are 
dried, ground, and made into bread j and the young shoots are boiled and eaten as 
greens. 



Book I. 



WILD PLANTS FOR VARIOUS PURPOSES. 



083 



SuBSECT. 3. Leguminous Wild Plants Edible. 

4309. Sea-peas. Pisummaritimum,'L. (Eng. Bot. 
1046.) Diad. Decan. L. and Leguminosce, J. 
{Jig. 476.) These peas have a bitterish disagree- 
able taste, and are therefore rejected when more 
pleasant food is to be got. In the year 1555, how- 
ever, when there was a great famine in England, the 
seeds of this plant were used as food, by which, ac- 
cording to Turner, thousands of families were pre- 
served. The bitter of these seeds might in all 
piobability be removed by steeping and kiln-dry- 
ing, as in preparing for the mill peas which are to be 
split. 

4310. Wild vetches. Lathyrus, Vicia, and Ervum, L. Diad. 
Decan. L. and Leguminoscs, J. The seeds of all the British 
species of these genera may be used as peas. They are found 
in hedges, woods, and corn-fields, and are most prolific in dry 
seasons. 



SuBSECT. 4. Salads from Wild Plants. 
4311. Ladies' smock. Cardamine jyratensis, L. {Eng. Bat. 776.) Tetrad. Silig. L. 
and Cruaferce, J. The leaves of this plant afford an agreeable acrid salad, greatly 
resembling the American cress. 

4312. Stone-crop, or orpine. Sedum Telephiwn, L. {Eng. Bot. 1319.) Decan. Pentag. L. and Semper- 
vivece, J. Triqve Madam, Fr. The leaves are eaten in salads like those of purslane, to which, by the 
French, it is considered equal. 

4313. Sea-bindweed. Convolvulus Soldanella, L. {Eng. Bot. 314.) Pent. Monog. L. and ConvolvtUacecFf 
B. P. This plant abounds on sea-coasts, where the inhabitants gather the tender stalks, and pickle 
them. It is considered to have rather a cathartic quality. 

4314. Sweet Cicely. Scandix odorata, L. {Eng. Bot. 697.) Pentan. Dig. L. and UmbellifercE, J. 
The leaves of this plant used to be employed like those of chervil. The green seeds ground small, and 
used with lettuce or other cold salads, give them a warm agreeable taste. The smell of the plant attracts 
bees, and the insides of empty hives are often rubbed with it before placing them over newly-cast swarms 
to induce them to enter. 

4315. Buckskorn-plantain, or star of the earth. Plantago coronopus^ L. {Eng. Bot. 892.) Tetrand. 
Monog. L. PlantaginetE, B. P. Corne de Cerf, Fr. ; Krahenfuss, Ger. ; and Coronopo, Ital. This is a 
hardy annual, a native of Britain, found in sandy soils. It is a low spreading plant, with linear pinnated 
leaves, and round stalk : producing short spikes of starry flowers from May to August. It was formerly 
cultivated as a salad herb, and used like the common cress ; but is now neglected in English gardens, 
perhaps on account of its rank and disagreeable smell. It is still, however, regularly sown in French 
gardens. It is raised by seed, which may be sown the first week in March ; and after the plants have 
come up, they should be thinned so as each may occupy from five to nine square inches. To ensure a 
succession of tender leaves, cut off the flowers as they appear. 

4316. Ox-eye daisy. Chrysanthemum leucanthemum, L. {Eng^ Bot. 601.) Syng. Polyg. Super. L. and 
CorymbifercB, J. Marguerite grande, Fr. ; Grosse Wucherblum£, Ger. ; and Leucanterno, Ital. This is a 
perennial plant, common in dry pastures. The leaves, which spring immediately from the root, are 
obovate with foot-stalks ; from these a stem arises from two to three feet high, furnished with oblong, 
embracing pinnatifid leaves. The flowers are large, with yellow disks and white rays, and appear in 
June and July. The young leaves were much used in Italy in salads in Bauhin's time ; and they are 
mentioned by Dr. Withering as being fit for this purpose. The plant is easily propagated by dividing the 
roots after the flowering season. To produce succvdent tender leaves, it should be placed in soft, rich^ 
moist earth. 

SuBSECT. 5. Substitutes for Chinese Teas from Wild 
Plants. 

4317. Speedwell. Veronica spicata^ L. {Eng. Bot. 
2.) Dian. Monog. L. and ScrophularincB, B. P. This 
plant is sometimes used as a substitute for tea ; and 
is said to possess a somewhat astringent taste like 
green tea {Camellia viridis). 

4318. Spring grass. Anthoxanthum odxyratum, L. {Eng. Bot. 
647.) Dian. Dig. L. and Graminece, B. P. {fig. 477.) This is a 
highly odoriferous grass, a decoction of which is said to bear a 
considerable resemblance to tea. 

4319. Other substitutes. The leaves of the black currant afford 
a very good substitute for green tea ; and those of Saxifraga 
crassifolia are said, by Took {Russ. Emp.), to be used as tea in 
Siberia. Betonica qfficinalis (Eng. Bot. 1142.) is said to have 
the taste and all the good qualities of foreign tea without the 
bad ones. 



SuBSECT. 6. Wild Plants applied to various Domestic Purposes. 
4320. Butterwort. Pinguicula vulgaris, L. {Eng. Bot. 70.) IHand. Monog. L. 
and Lentibulareee, B. P. The inhabitants of Lapland and the north of Sweden give to 
milk the consistence of cream by pouring it warm from the cow upon the leaves of this 
plant, and then instantly straining it, and laying it aside for two or three days till it 





684 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

acquires a degree of acidity. This milk they are extremely fond of ; and once made, 
they need not repeat the use of the leaves as above, for a spoonful or less of it will 
coagulate another quantity of vs^arm milk, and make it like the first, and so on, as often 
as they please to renew their food. [Lightfoot^s Flor. Scot. p. 77.) 

4321. Cow-parsnep. Heracleum Sphondylium, L, {Eng. Bot. 939.) Pent. Dig. L. and UinbelUferce, J. 
The inhabitants of Kamschatka, about the beginning of July, collect the foot-stalks of the radical leaves 
of this plant, and, after peeling ofF the rind, dry them separately in the sun ; and then tying them in 
bundles, they lay them up carefully in the shade. In a short time afterwards these dried stalks are 
covered over with a yellow saccharine efflorescence, tasting like licorice, and in this state they are 
eaten as a delicacy. The Russians, not content with eating the stalks thus prepared, contrive to get a 
very intoxicating spirit from them, by first fermenting them in water with the greater bilberry ( Vaccinium 
uliginosurn), and Uien distilling the liquor to what degree of strength they please ; which Gmelin says, is 
more agreeable to the taste than spirits made from corn. {LightfooVs Fl.'Scot.) 

4322. Heath. Erica Vulgaris, Ij. {Eng. Bot. \0lo.) Octan. 3Ionog. L,. and Ericete, J. Formerly the young 
tops are said to have been used alone to brew a kind of ale ; and even now, the inhabitants of Isla and 
Jura continue to brew a very potable liquor, by mixiiag two thirds of the tops of the heath with one of 
malt. {Lighffoot's FL Scot.) 

4323. Substitutes for capers. . The flower-buds of the marsh-marigold {Caltha palvstris, L.) form a safe 
substitute for capers ; and likewise the young seed-pods of the conimon radish ; and the unripe seeds of the 
nasturtium, or Indian cress. A species of spurge, common in gardens, {Euphorbia Lathyris,) is vulgarly 
called caper-bush, from the resemblance of its fruit to capers ; and though acrid and poisonous, like the 
other plants of this genus, its seeds are sometimes substituted by the Parisian restaurateurs for the pods 
of the true capers. For more minute details respecting the plants enumerated in this section, and 
various others which might be used as food, or in domestic economy, see Bryant's Flora Di^etetica, 
and Lightfoot's Flora Scotica, Hudson's Flora Anglica, and the local floras of all parts of Europe. 

SuBSECT. 7. Poisonous native Plants to be avoided in searching for edible Wild Plants. 
4324. The princijml poisonous plants^ natives or growing in Britain, are the follow- 
ing : those marked thus (*_) are also the most valuable plants in the native materia 
medica : the whole, for obvious reasons, ought to be known at sight by every gardener : — 

wine, or acids. Conium maculatum*. 
Digitalis purpurea*, Helebonis foeti- 
dus, Juniperus Sabina, Scrophularia, 
aquatica- 

Drastic Poisons, to be corrected by acids 
alkalies, and astringents. Asclepias 
syriaca, Bryonia dioica, Euphorbia La- 
thyris and ainygdaloldes, I\lercurialis 
perennis and annua, Periploca graeca, 
N'eratrum album. 



Bitter Poisons, for -which acids, astrin- 
gents, wines, spirits, and spices are 
useful correctives. Chelidonium ma- 
jus, Cicuta virosa*, Colchicum autum- 
nale*, CEnanthe crocata, Prunus Lau- 
rocerasus. 

Acrid Poisoru, -which should be counter- 
acted by powerful astringents, as bark, 
and afterwards the stomach restored 
by soft mucilaginous matters, as milk. 



fat broth, &c. Aconitum Napellus, 
and Ly coctonum, Actaea spicata,Rhus 
Toxicodendron . 

Stupifying Poisoiis, to be counteracted by 
-vegetable acids and emetics, ^iithusa 
cynapium,Atropa Belladonna, Datura 
Stramonium *, Hyoscyamus niger, 
Lactuca virosa, Solanum dulcamara*, 
and nigrum. 

Fetid Poisons, to be attacked by ether. 



4325. The poisonous Jungi will be found in a succeeding section. 

Sect. XIII. Foreign hardy herbaceous culinary Vegetables, little xised as such in Britain. 

4326. The culinary ])lants of other countries are in general the same as o\ir own ; but 
a few may be mentioned which are more commonly cultivated in France, Germany, and 
America, than in England, but which would thrive in the latter country. 

4327. The Claytonia perfoliata {Pentan. Monog. L. and Portulacece, J.) is a hardy annual, a native of 
America, of the easiest possible culture in any soil. Sown in autumn, it endures the winter, and flowers 
in April and May. Its perfoliate foliage is not very abundant, but it is exceedingly succulent, and not 
inferior to common spinage in flavor. It has no pretensions to supersede, or even to be generally culti- 
vated as a spinage plant ; but in very poor soils, under trees, or in other peculiar circumstances, it may be 
found a useful resource. 

4328. The Basella alba and rubra {Pentan. Trig. L. and Clienopodece, J.) are stove-biennials, raised on 
hot-beds near Paris, and transplanted into warm borders, where they furnish a summer spinage equal to 
that of the orache. {Uort. Tour, 489.) They are also grown for the same purpose in China. {Living- 
stone, in Hort. Trans, v. 54.) 

43'29. The Virginian poke {Phytolacca decandra, Decan. Pentag. L. and Chenopodece, J.) is a hardy perennial 
with large ramose roots, shoots half an inch in diameter, and five or six feet high ; the leaves five 
inches long and two and a half inches broad, smooth and of a deep green. It grows vigorously in a good 
deep soil, and furnishes ample supplies of young shoots, which in America and the West Indies are 
boiled and eaten as spinage. {Miller's Diet. art. Phytolacca; Correa de Serra, in Hort. Trans, iv. 446.) 

4330. The White cabbage of China {Brassica, sp. ?), used both as a pot-herb and a salad {Barrow ; 
Abel), and the wild cabbage of America {B. washitana, Muhl.), used as a pot-herb, might be grown for 
similar purposes in this covmtry. The procumbent cabbage of China is mentioned by Livingstone {Hart. 
Trans, v. 55.), as being a hardy plant, supplying leaves the whole of -winter. 

4331. The Shawanese salad {Hydrophyllunt. virginicum, L. Pentan. Monog. L. and Boraginets, J.) 
is a hardy perennial, very prolific in lobed lucid green leaves which hold water (whence the name), and 
are used by the Indians both raw and boiled. 

4332. The Apios tuberosa. Ph. {Diadelph. Decan. L. and LeguminoscB, J.) is a hardy tuberous-rooted 
perennial, a native of North America, the tubers of which are used by the Indians. 

4333. The bread-root {Psoralea esculenta, L. Diadel. Decan. L» and Leguminosce, J.) is a hardy perennial, 
a native of Missouri, and used there as potatoes are in this country. 

4334. The Quamash {Scilla esculenta, L. Hexan. Monog. L. and Asphodelece, J.) is a native of North Ame- 
rica, and there used as food. _ 

4335. Other hardy esculents. The Indian com {Zea mays) is grown in some parts as a garden-plant, 
the ears being gathered green or partially ripe, and boiled or roasted. The common millet is grown on 
the continent as a garden-plant for its seeds, to be used as a substitute for rice : the Polish millet 
{Disitaria sanguinalis) is grown for this purpose in the cottage gardens in Poland ; as is the carnation 
poppy {Papaver somniferum), for its seeds, which form a seasoning to buck-wheat porridge. Nigella 
sativa and arvensis, hardy annuals, are cultivated in Flanders for their seeds, which are used as celery- 
seeds are in this country, in soups and also in puddings. The Pekin mustard {Sinapis Pekinensis) is a hardy 
annual and the most extensively used herbaceous plant in China, being, as Livingstone informs us 
(Hort Trans, v. 54.), carried about the streets of Canton and other towns in the boiled state. The amaran- 
thus polygaraus, a hardy annual, grown in China as a spinage plant, and a number of others belonging to the 
Cruciferee • Chenopodeae, Portulacea, &c., might be mentioned. {See Forster's Plant. Eseulent. Ait^tr. j 
Bryant's 'Flora Dicetetica i Le Bon Jardinier j Modern Books qf Travels, &c.) 



SOOK I. 



EDIBLE FUNGI. 



685 



478 



Sect. XIV. Edible Fungi. 

4336. Only one species of edible fungi has yet been introduced to the garden, though 
there can be no doubt the whole would submit to, and probably be improved by, cul- 
tivation. All of them are natives of Britain, and may be gathered wild at certain sea- 
sons, so that though they do not enter into the plot of the cottager, they are, or may 
be, enjoyed by him. In Poland and Russia, there are above thirty edible sorts of 
fungi in common use among the peasantry. They are gathered in all the different stages 
of their growth, and used in various ways : raw, boiled, stewed, roasted; and being 
hung up and dried in their stoves or chimneys, form a part of their winter stock of pro- 
visions. Fungi, however, are not equally abundant in Britain, owing to the general 
cultivation of the soil ; and therefore the good sorts being little familiar to the cottager, 
most of them are passed over as deleterious. Indeed the greatest caution is requisite in 
selecting any species of this tribe for food ; and though we have given a catalogue both 
of the good and bad sorts of mushrooms, we can advise none but the botanist to search 
after any but the common sort [Agnricus campestris) as food. 

SuBSECT. 1.- Cultivated Mushroom. — Agaricus campestris, I^. and Sowerby ; A. edulis 
of Bulliard. {Eng. JBot. Fungi, t. 1.) Cryptogamia Fungi, L. and of the natural 
order of Fungi Gymnocarpi, Persoon. Champignon Comestible, Fr. ; Essbare Bl'dt- 
terschamme, Ger. ; and Pratajuolo, Ital. {fig- 478.) 

4337. The mushroom is a well known native vegetable, 
springing up in open pastures in August and September. 
It is most readily distinguished, when of middle size, by its 
fine pink or flesh-colored gills, and pleasant smell; in a 
more advanced stage, the gills become of a chocolate color, 
and it is then more apt to be confounded with other kinds j 
of dubious quality ; but that species which most nearly ' 
resembles it, is slimy to the touch, and destitute of the fine 
odor, having rather a disagreeable smell : further, the 
noxious kind grows in woods or on the margins of woods, 
while the true mushroom springs up chiefly in open pastures, 
and should be gathered only in such places. 

4338. Use. The garden-mushroom is eaten fresh, either 
stewed or boiled ; and preserved as a pickle, or in powder, or dried whole. The sauce 
commonly called ketchup (supposed, by Martyn, from the Japanese, kit-jap,) is, or 
ought to be, made from its juice, with salt and spices. Wild mushrooms, from old 
pastures, are generally considered as more delicate in flavor, and more tender in flesh, 
than those raised in artificial beds. But the young, or button mushrooms, of the cul- 
tivated sort, are firmer and better for pickling; and in using cultivated mushrooms, 
there is evidently much less risk of deleterious kinds being employed. [Neill and 
Martyn. ) 

4339. Species. The following catalogue of edible and poisonous mushrooms is taken 
from Sowerby's splendid work on Englisli^ungi. 




Edible Sorts. 
Ag-aricus campestris. Common 
field, or cultivated mush- 
room 

A. violaceiLS. Violet, or blue 
A. cinnamomeus. Cinnamon 
A. lactejluus. Milky 
A. chantarellus. Chantarelle 



A. pratensis. Champignon 

A. auraniiacus. Orange 

A. solitarius. Solitary 

A. procerus. The grisette of 
tite French, or Tall 

A. deliciosus. Sweet mush- 
room 

A. virfrineus. Mausseron 
mushroom 



Dangerous Sorts. 
A. campestris, var. Dangerous 
variety of cultivated mush- 
room 

A. clypeatus. Long-stalked 
A. muscarius. Reddish 



A. piperatus. Pepper 

A. campanulatus. Bell 

A. mammosus. Nipple 

A. auraniiacus, var. Danger- 
ous variety of orange mush- 
room 

A. necator 

A. virosus. Poisonous, or toad- 
stool. 



4340. General criteria of ivholesome and deleterious fungi. Unwholesome fungi will 
sometimes spring up even on artificial beds in gardens ; thus, when the spawn begins to 
run, a spurious brood are often found to precede a crop of genuine mushrooms. The 
baneful quality of the toad-stool {A. virosus) is, in general, indicated by a sickly nauseous 
smell, though some hurtful sorts are so far without any thing disagreeable in the smell, 
as to make any criterion, drawn from that alone, very unsafe. The wholesome kinds, 
however, invariably emit a grateful rich scent. 

4341. Antidote to jmisonous sorts. All fungi should be used with great caution, for 
even the champignon and edible garden-mushrooms possess deleterious qualities when 
grown in certain places. All the edible species should be thoroughly masticated, before 
taken into the stomach, as this greatly lessens the effects of poisons. When accidents of 
this sort happen, vomiting should be immediately excited, and then the vegetable acids 
should be given, either vinegar, lemon-juice, or that of apples ; after which, give ether 
and antispasmodic remedies, to stop the excessive bilious vomiting. Infusions of gall- 
nut, oak-bark, and Peruvian bark are recommended as capable of neutralising the poi- 
sonous principle of mushrooms. It is, however, the safest way not to eat any of the good 
but less common sorts, until they have been soaked in vinegar. Spirit of vnne and vinegar 



686 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



extract some part of their poison ; and tannin matter decomposes the greatest part of it. 
(Botanist's Companion, vol. ii. p. 145.) 

4342. Culture. For the culture of the common mushroom, see Chap. VII. Sect. XIV. (34C4.> With respect 
to the other edible sorts, as already observed, they are seldom gathered for use in Britain, excepting by ex- 
perienced botanists ; and none of them, as far as we know, have yet been brought under cultivation. We 
think, however, that some of them, as the A. aurantiacus, A', deliciosus, and A. pratensis, might very 
readily, and without danger, be introduced to the garden ; treating them like the garden-mushroom, 
or imitating the climate of the season of the year in which they are found in perfection, and the soil, 
situation, and exposure, &c. where they are found in greatest abundance, and of the best quality. In the 
first instance, it would, perhaps, be preferable to propagate from seed, in order to make sure of the species. 
In the present improved state of horticulture, if this branch of culture were once attempted, it would soon 
be rendered available-by every gardener who can cultivate the common mushroom. 

SuBSECT. 2. Morel. — Phallus esculentiis, L. ; Helvella esculenta of Sowerby 
(tab. 51.); and Morchella esculenta of Persoon. Cryptogamia Fungi, L. and Gym- 
nocarpi, Persoon. In French, Gei-man, and Italian, not distinguished from the Cham- 
pignon by any popular name. {Jig- 479.) 

4343. The morel is distinguished by its cylindrical, solid, or hol- 
low stem, white and smooth ; the cap is hollow within, and adher- 
ing to the stem by its base,and latticed on the surface with ii-regu- 
lar sinuses. The height is about four inches. It rises in the 
spring months, in wet banks, in woods, and in moist pastures. 
It is in perfection in May and June, and should not be gathered 
when wet with dew, or soon after rain. Gathered dry, they will 
keep several months. 

4344. Use. Morels are used, either fresh or dried, as an in- 
gredient to heighten the flavor of gravies, ragouts, &c. 

4345. Culture. Though this vegetable has not yet been introduced in gar- 
den-culture, like the mushroom, there can be no doubt of the attempt being 
attended with success. The spawn should be collected in June, and planted in 
beds or ridges, differently composed, and some laid up for use in dry and moist 
envelopements, in order, by experiment, to come to the best mode of cultiva- 
tion. Lightfoot says, he has raised the phallus from seed. 

SuBSECT. 3. Truffle, or Subterraneous Puff-bail. — Tuber Cibariuyn, Sowerby. (tab. 309.) 
Cryptogamia Fungi, L. and Angiocarpi, Per. Truffe, Fr. ; Truffel, Ger. ; and Tar- 




tufo nero, Ital. (Jig. 480.) 



480 




4346. The tmffle is a subterraneous fungus, growing 
naturally some inches below the surface in different parts 
of Britain ; and very common in the downs of Wiltshire, 
Hampshire, and Kent, where dogs are trained to scent it 
out. The dogs point out the spot by scraping and bark- 
ing ; and the truffles, which are generally found in clus- 
ters, are dug up with a spade. The truffle is globular, 
seldom the size of a hen's egg, without any root, and of a 
dark color, approaching to blackness. The surface is 
uneven and rough ; the flesh firm, white while young, but when old, it becomes black, 
with whitish veins. 

4347. Use. They are used, like the mushroom, in stuffings, gravies, and other high- 
seasoned culinary preparations. They are generally procured from Covent Garden mar- 
ket, as they bear carriage to any distance. 

4348. Culture. " No attempt," Neill observes, " it is believed, has hitherto been made to cultivate 
truffles ; but of the practicability of the thing there seems no reason to doubt. In their habits of growth, 
indeed, they differ essentially from the mushroom ; but it is certainly possible to accommodate the soil and 
other circumstances to the peculiar nature of the fungus. It has been said, that the tubercles on the sur- 
face of truffles are analogous to the eyes or buds of potatoes, and that they have been propagated, like po- 
tatoes, by means of cuts furnished with tubercles ; it may however be suspected, that the pieces thus 
olanted contained ripe seeds. Truffles, we may add, seem to delight in a mixture of clav and sand ; and 
a moderate degree of bottom heat, such as is afforded by a spent hot-bed, might probably forward their ve- 
gelation." {Ed. Encyc.) 



Sect. XV. Edible Fuci. — Cryptogamia Algce, L. and Fucaceee, Lamouroux. 
Varec, Fr. ; Meer grass, Ger. ; and Fuco, Ital. 

4349. The edible British fuci may be shortly enumerated, because some of them are 
occasionally used as condiments by famihes living near the sea-coast ; and because they 
furm'sh articles of resource for the local poor, especially in seasons of scarcity. Tliere are 
numerous species ; all of which, in common with every other class of sea-weeds and zoo- 
phytes, are employed in gardening as manures ; and in general economy for making kelp 
or alkali. The following are the principal of the British species, which are considered 
edible by the inhabitants of sea-shores. 



Book I. 



HORTICULTURAL CATALOGUE. 



687 




4350. Fucus saccharhms. Sweet fucus, > or sea-belt. 
{fig. 481. a) Lightfoot mentions, that the common peo- 
ple on the coast of England sometimes boil this species as 
a pot-herb. Anderson says, the Icelanders boil it in milk 
to the consistence of pottage, and eat it with a spoon. 
They are also said to soak it in fresh water, dry it in the 
sun, and then lay it up in wooden vessels ; it soon becomes 
covered with a white effloresence of salt, wb.ich has a 
sweetish taste, and in this state they eat it with butter. 
They also feed their cattle with this species. 

4351. F.palmatus, L. Dulse. (fig.iSl.b) Eoth the 
tender stalks and young fronds are eaten recent from the 
sea, commonly without any preparation ; they are some- 
times considered as forming a salad, but more generally 
are used as a whet. Dulse formerly was frequently fried 
and brought to table. It is said, that the inhabitants of 
the Greek islands are fond of this species, adding it to ra- 
gouts and olios, to which it communicates a red color, and" 
at the same time impai-ts some of its rich and gelatinous 
qualities. The dried leaves, infused in water, exhale an 
odor somewhat resembling that of sweet violets, and they 
communicate that flavor to vegetables with which they 
are mixed. Lightfoot mentions, that in the Isle of Skye, 
in Scotland, it is sometimes used in fevers, to promote per- 
spiration, being boiled in water, with the addition of a 
little butter. It grows not uncommonly on rocks which are barely uncovered at the ebb of the tide ; but 
is more frequent as a parasite on F. nodosus ; and it occurs also on the stems of F. digitatus, attaining in 
this situation a considerable size, perhaps twelve or fifteen inches long, while, in general, it is only about 
six or eight inches. It is soft and limber, and does not become rigid by drying, being of a more loose tex- 
ture than many other sea-weeds. 

4352. F.eduHs, L,. red dulse (^^. 481. c), is by many preferred to the F. palmatus, especially for roast- 
ing in the frying-pan. Like that species, its smell somewhat resembles sweet violets. It is of a deep, 
opaque, red color, giving out a purple dye. 

4353. F. esculentus, L. Badderlocks, or henware. 
{fi^. 482. a) The mid-rib, stripped of its membrane, is 
the pa^t chiefly eaten. In Orkney, the pinncB are also 
eaten, under the name of mickles. 

4354. F. ciliatus, L , ciliated dulse, and F. digitatus, 
fingered dulse, .sea-girdle, and hangers {figs.iS>2. b), 
are sometimes gathered and eaten like F. edulis, palma- 
tus, and other species. 

4355. F. digitatus. In Scotland, the stem of this species 
is used for making handles to pruning-knives. A pretty 
thick stem is selected, and cut into pieces about four 
inches long. Into these, while fresh, the blades are stuck, 
and as the stem dries, it contracts and hardens, closely 
and firmly embracing the hilt of the blade ; when these 
handles have become hard and shrivelled, and tipt with 
metal, they are hardly to be distinguished from harts- 
horn. 

4356. F. pinnatifidus, L. Pepper dulse. In Scotland, 
it is eaten along with the F. palmatus, and in Iceland it 
is used instead of spice. This species is common to Scot- 
land, Iceland, the Red Sea, and the shores of Egypt. 

4357. F. natans, L. Floating fucus. The succulent 
fronds. Turner mentions, are selected and pickled like 
samphire ; and the young shoots are eaten as a salad, 
seasoned with juice of lemons, pepper, and vinegar. 

4358. Ulva Lactuca, L. {fig. 482. c) Lettuce-leaves, 
or oyster-green. The thin, green, pellucid membranes 
of which this vegetable is composed are eaten raw, as a 
have been accustomed to the use of marine vegetables. 

4359. Supplies. No submarine production has hitherto been cultivated in the garden ; though it might 
be worth while to try what could be done by a stone cistern of salt-water, and other contrivances. In the 
mean time, families in any part of Britain or Ireland, desirous of enjoying these vegetables, might have 
them regularly forwarded from the sea-shores, especially from such as are rocky. There are very few spe- 
cies known to be absolutely poisonous. 

4360. Edible nests. We may add, as matter of curiosity, that the transparent edible nests of the East 
Indian swallows, so much in repute at the luxurious tables of the rich, in China and the East, are now 
generally believed to be almost entirely composed of gelatinous fuci ; and more especially of the F. liche-s 
noides. {Turner, 1. 118.) The plant is also in high estimation for the table in India. 




salad, and esteemed a great delicacy by such a« 



Chap. IX. 

Horticultural Catalogue.. — Hardy Fruit-trees, ShrubSf and Plants. 

4361. The hardy fruits of a country may be considered in reference to the vegetable 
appendages of the table, as next in utility to bread, corn, and culinary esculents. 
The excellent meats which they afford to the second course, and their contributions 
to the dessert, give them a peculiar value in the domestic economy of all those whose 
condition in life rises above the care of mere subsistence ; and there are some sorts, as 
the gooseberry and apple, which, happily, either are or may be within the reach of the 
most humble occupier of a cottage arid garden. Many fruits are as wholesome as they 
are pleasant ; and some greatly assist the cure of particular diseases. Cider, perry, and 



G88 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the various wines which may be made from the juices of fruits, are acceptable offerings 
to the social circle, when made in the best manner, and form important articles of com- 
merce. We shall aiTange the Hardy Fruits as — 

4362. Kernel-Fruits or Pomes ; including the apple, pear, quince, medlar, service. 

4363. Stone- Fruits ; as the peach, nectarine, almond, apricot, plumb, and cherry. 

4364. Berries ; as the mulberry, barberry, elderberry, gooseberry, currant, raspberry, cranberry, and 
strawberry. 

4365. Nuts ; as the walnut, chestnut,.filbert. 

4366. Native and neglected Hardy Fruits, deserving cultivation, or useful in domestic economy, as the 
sloe, bird-cherry, wild service, mountain ash, bilberry, &c. 

4367. The varieties of most of these fruits are so numerous, and each described as 
having so many good qualities, that the inexperienced selector may well be puzzled in 
making a choice, even from the comparatively limited lists which we have prepared for 
the following sections. When to all the names in these lists, and those of the nursery- 
men, we add the numerous new names annually brought forward by the Horticultural 
Societies of this country and of France, the difficulty of selection seems insuperably in- 
creased. The experienced and well informed gardener will be able to find out his way 
in this labyrinth ; but what are others to do ? We would say, as a prudent mode, con- 
sult the selections recommended by eminent practical men ; as Abercrombie, M'Phail, 
Forsyth, Nicol, Macdonald, &c. which we have given in this chapter, and also in those 
on planting the kitchen-garden and orchard. (2498. and 2527.) There are probably not 
half so many distinct sorts, as there are names in use ; and of that half, most likely 
two thirds are not worth cultivating. Of most of the sorts originated from seed, sufficient 
time has not elapsed to judge of their merits ; they are all described as good ; but un- 
questionably many of them are worth little in comparison with the best old sorts. Some of 
the new cherries and peaches might be adduced as examples ; and the Poonah grape, lately 
imported, from the East Indies, and stated to be a valuable addition to our gardens" [Hort. 
Trans, iv. 517.), has been in the country (in the Brompton Nursery, for example), for an 
unknown length of time, under a different name. It is one of the worst descriptions of 
raisin grapes, with a small elliptical berrj-^, having little flesh, juice, or flavor. — We 
make these remarks not to discourage from originating or importing new fruits ; nor to 
dissuade from choosing new sorts ; but to guard the inexperienced against being led 
away by names and appearances. The Horticultural Society are doing much to illus- 
trate the subject of fruits, and in a few years they will no doubt settle a nomenclature, 
and determine the merits of all the fruits now in Europe, or perhaps the world. 

Sect. I. Kernel-Fruits. 

4368. The principal hardy liernel-finiits are the apple and pear, too well known 
for their important uses to require any eulogium. In this section are also included 
the quince, medlar, and service. 

SuBSECT. 1. Ajyple. — Pyrus Malus, L. {Eng. Bot. 179.) Icos. Di-Pentag. L. and 
Rosacea, J. Pomme, Fr. ; A]fel, Ger. ; and Porno or Melo, Ital. 

4369. The apple is a spreading tree with the branches more horizontal than in the pear- 
tree ; the leaves ovate ; the flowers in terminating umbels, produced from the wood of the 
former year ; but more generally from very short shoots or spurs from wood of two years* 
growth. The fruit is roundish, umbilicate at the base, and of an acid flavor. In its wild 
state, it is termed the crab, and is then armed with thorns, with smaller leaves, flowers, and 
fruit, and the pulp of the latter extremely acid. It is a native of most countries of Europe 
in its wild state ; and the improved varieties form an important branch of culture in Britain, 
France, Germany, and America, for the kitchen, the table, and for the manufacture of cider 
From whence we at first received the cultivated apple is unknown ; but in all probability it 
was introduced by the Romans, to whom twenty- two varieties were kno\\Ti in Pliny's time 
(52.), and afterwards the stock of varieties greatly increased at the Norman conquest. 
According to Stow, carp and pepins were brought into England by Mascal, who wrote on 
fruit-trees in 1572. The apple-tree is supposed by some to attain a great age. Haller men- 
tions some trees in Herefordsliire that attained a thousand years, and were highly prolific ; 
but Knight considers two hundred years as the ordinary duration of a healthy tree, grafted 
on a crab-stock, and planted in a strong tenacious soil. Speechly (Hints, 58.) mentions 
a tree in an orchard at Burton-joyce, near Nottingham, of about sixty years old, with 
branches extending from seven to nine yards round the bole, which, in 1792, produced 
upwards of 100 pecks of apples. Of all the different fruits which are produced in 
Britain, none can be brought to so high a degree of perfection, with so little ti-ouble ; and 
of no other are there so many excellent varieties in general cultivation, calculated for 
almost every soil, situation, and climate, which our island affords. Very good apples are 
grown in the Highlands and Orkneys, and even in the Shetland Isles, (Caled. Hort. 
Mem. vol. ii. ) as well as in Devonshire and Cornwall ; some sorts are ripe in the be- 



Book I. 



APPLE. 



689 



ginning of July, and others, which ripen later, will keep till June. Unlike other fruits, 
those which ripen latest are the best. 

4370. Use. For pies, tarts, sauces, and the dessert, the use of the apple is familiar to every one. Diiduit, 
of Mazeres, has found tliat one-third of boiled apple-pulp, baked with two thirds of "flour, having 
been properly fermented with yeast for twelve hours, makes a very excellent bread, full of eyes, and ex- 
tremely palatable and light. (jNVio Month. Mag. June 1S21.) The fermented juice forms cidcr,'a substitute 
both for grape-wine and malt liquor. In confectionary, it is used for comfits, compotes, marmalades, 
jellies, pastes, tarts, &c. In medicine, verjuice, or the juice of crabs, is used for sprains, and as an astrin- 
gent and repellent : and, with a proper addition of sugar. Withering thinks a very grateful liquor might 
be made with it, little inferior to Rlienish wine. Lightfoot affirms that the crab mixed with cultivated 
apples, or even alone, if thoroughly ripe, will make a sound, masculine wine. The apple, when ripe, is 
laxative; the juice is excellent in dj'sentery : boiled or roasted apples fortify a ^veak stomach. ScopolL 
recovered from a weakness of the stomach and indigestion from using them; and they are equally eltica- 
cious in putrid and malignant fevers with the juice of lemons or currants. In pcrfuinery, the'i)ulp of 
apples, beat up with lard, forms pomatum : and Bosc observes (/V. Cours d' Agr/ciiltiire, &c. in loco), that 
the prolonged stratification of apples with elder-flowers, in a close vessel, gives the former an odor of 
musk extremely agreeable. In dyeing, the bark produces a yellow color; and, in general economy, the 
wood of the treeis used for turning, and various purposes, where hardness, compactness, and variegation 
of color, are objects. 

4:571. Criterion of a good apple. Apples for the table are characterised by a firm juicy pulp, elevated poig- 
nant flavor, regular form, and beautiful coloring ; those, for kitchen use, by tlie property of falling, as it is 
technically termed, or forming in general a pulpy mass of equal consistency, when baked or boiled, and by 
a large size. Some sorts of apples have the property of falling when green, as the Keswick, Carlisle, Haw- 
thornden, and other codlins ; and some only after being ripe, as tlie russet tribes. Those which have this 
property when green, are particularly valuable for affording sauces to geese early in the season, and for 
succeeding the gooseberry in tarts. For cider, an apple must possess a considerable degree of astringency, 
with or without firmness'of pulp, or richness of juice. The best kinds, Knight observes, are often tough, 
dry, and fibrous ; and the Siberian Harvey, which he recommends as one of the very best cider-apples, is 
unfit either for culinary puqiosesor the table. Knight has found that the specific gravity of the juice of any 
apple recently expressed, indicates, witli very considerable accuracy, the strength of the future cider. 
Considering the various uses of the a)iple, we agree with Speechly in regarding it as a fruit " of more use 
and benefit to the public in general, than all the other fruits, tlie produce of this island, united." 

4372. Varieties. Tusser, in 1573, mentions in his list of fruits, " apples of all sorts." Parkinson, in 
1629, enumerates fifty-seven sorts. Evelyn, about thirty years afterwards, says {Po?>iona, pref ), " It was 
through the plain industry of one Harris, a fruiterer to Henry VIII , that the fields and environs of about 
thirty towns in Kent only, were planted with fruit from Flanders, to the universal benefit and general im- 
provement of the county." G\h&on {Churches of Dove and Ho77ielacy.\ mentions that Lord Scudamore, 
ambassador to the court of France, in the time of Charles I., collected in Normandy scions of cider-apple- 
trees, and when he returned to England, encouraged the grafting them throughout the county of Here- 
ford. Hartlib, in 1650, speaks of " one who had two hundred sorts of apples," and " verily believes there 
are nearly 500 sorts in this island." Ray, in 1688, selected from the information of the most skilful gar- 
deners about London, a list of 78 sorts. ' Succeeding writers have been enabled greatly to increase the list, 
partlyfrom the almost continual accession of sorts received from the continent during intervals of peace, but 
principally from the great numbers raised from seeds. A variety of apple, like those of most other plants, 
is supposed by some to have only a limited duration ; and hence on taking a retrospective view of the lists 
of sorts, given by Parkinson, Evelyn, and other authors, many of them are not now to be found, or are so 
degenerated or diseased, as no longer to deserve the attention of the planter. " The moil," Knight ob- 
serves, " and its successful rival, the red-streak, with the musts and golden-pippin, are in the last stage of 
decay, and the stire and fo.x whelp are hastening rapidly after them." After making a great variety of ex- 
periments for several years, and after many attempts to propagate every old variety of the apple, this au- 
thor observes {Tr. on Apple and Pear, 15.), " I think I am justified in the conclusion, that all plants of 
this species, however propagated from the same stock, partake in some degree of the same life, and will 
attend the progress of that life, in the habits of its youth, its maturity, and its decay; though they will 
not be any way affected by any incidental injuries the parent tree "may sustain after they are detached 
from It." 

4373. Knight next directed his attention to raising new varieties from seeds, and has, by crossing one 
sort with another, and by having constantly several thousands of seedlings rearing, from which, as they 
show fruit, to select the best sorts, succeeded in producing several new varieties of apples, much esteemed 
for the table and the press. Of several of these sorts, and how obtained, accounts will be found in the 
work above quoted, and in the Horticultural Transactions, and a compend of their history and properties 
will be found in our table {next page). Several eminent horticulturists, in different districts, are now en- 
gaged in a similar manner ; and there can be little doubt a valuable accession will, in a few^ years, be made 
to this class of fruits. Some, however, as Williamson {Hort. Trans, iii. 291.) and Speechly {Hints, 188.), 
consider that the deterioration of the apple and other fruits may be owing to the climate, and that the re- 
turn of genial summers would restore to us from old trees as good fruit as heretofore. Such also is 
our opinion, and Knight's doctrine appears to us contrary to general analogy in vegetable life. It is 
unquestionably true that all varieties have a tendency to degenerate into the primitive character of the 
species ; but to us it appears equally true, that any variety may be perpetuated with all its excellencies by 
proper culture, and more especially varieties of trees. However unsuccessful Knight may have been in con- 
tinuing the moil, redstreak, and golden pippin, we cannot alter our conviction, that by grafting from 
these sorts they may be continued, such as they are, or were when the scions were taken from the trees, to 
liie end of time. As to plants propagated by e"xtension, " partaking in some degree of the same period of 
life as the parent," we cannot admit the idea as at all probable. Vines, olives, poplars, and willows have 
been projjagated by extension for ages, and are still, as far as can be ascertained, as vigorous as they were 
in the time of Noah or Pliny. 

4374. A nuinerous list of varieties viay be considered as puzzling to inexperienced per.^ons luho have to 
select for a garden or an orchard. Sabine {Hort. Trans, iii. 263.) justly observes, that the stock of 
apples requires reduction rather than increase ; and adds, that one of the chief objects to which the 
attention of the Horticultural Society is at present directed, is to make a judicious selection. 

4375. A great variety of apple-trees in a bearing state may be seen in different nurseries both in Britain 
and Ireland, but especially near London ; from these in the autumn, the fruit may be tasted from the 
trees, and either young plants newly worked, or plants in a state of bearing, fixed on and marked, to be 
taken up at the proper season. The advantages of this mode, especially to such as possess but a small gar- 
den, are too obvious to require comment. 

4376. No well arranged catalogue of apples has yet been published, because, in general, only a limited 
number of sorts fall under the eye and experience of one individual. Such a work seems more likely to 
be accomplished by public bodies, and is worthy of their attention. In the mean time, we present tlie 
best arrangement in our power of sorts readily procured from British nurseries, including most of the 
newly originated varieties, of which accounts have been published, and grafts distributed, among the com- 
mercial gardeners. 



Yy 



690 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



1 
i 



S 

li 

13 O 



»^ 
Ph 
Oh 

O 

C5 
O 

< 

< 

> 

5 
o 

Q 



i 



a 

i 



m 

ill 



3 C-SJ 

III 
p£ 

ill 

III 

i 



o Si 



I 

K 

ii 



i m3 s 



^=2 P 

^ ll 



.o 

m 



11 iliWil fill 

lillllilfiiPti-Htlllii! I 



s 



§11 



5; o o .ri .S: -rs -a .s .a .« f-i 2^-5 o tj 4> m u .= »3 
S i i S I H S S I e E S £| I S 1 1 E II J 



1|! 



o o a 

zo6 



J 



1 * -si ^ =i 
,'llltl||lll|ll||gltllljs 



.2^ 



IIJIIIllllllllllllllllIll 



ill gss33iillsss^ssl>^^ll3si.3l 



Mi 



I ft Iff . f f ft It tiff ti ^^u^ t 



I s 

VMlil 

. lillllll 
IfllllJIt 

s 

iii-i III 

1 illlllll 

§ 6;gcocooo 

o If; . . . C5 .to *i 

2 liigiiil 

S tS • 



J- 



..I. 



.5 =s- 



ac'Sf >"g ' S ' otx' -g 



Hi ii'lj 

< ^=3 95 s* 

' c ■ 5 S • S S ■ 2 « 
■«1 cccc 



e g 
III 

Il5 



.,11 
(as 



p- — 



I&1 



Illlllll 



■l-l 



.1 



• I 



liiiltl 



Book I. 



APPLE. 



C91 



1 

■It 


f,howy fruit 
and hardy 
iteemed. 


Character of (he tree 
repvtutioit ofth 


5i 

III 

11 ! 

s si 

3 3- 

Isl 


i 


111 


1 


i 

f 

1 


Hi 
111 


Ccuisi, 


ESS 


Lasts liU 


•g 3 a. 


'k 

ai 


III 






1 


> .=>3 
^ 1 












III 




■5 -3 "3 


i 

1. 


5-S'S 
Ill 


1 


(22 














vhen, md rvh 
taied, procure 
abounding. 


s s ' 


w 



o-S ' 

II 


a 


i* 


i 


1 

Is 

(SI- 


Name. 


' ■ '$% 

1 Ji 



III 



! 



Ill 

oil 



— 



1 

II 



EES 
<! .Si 

IJ 

•2 ^ 



■sis 
111 



III 



it 11 



S S -o g jj 



P ililt 

1 i ii ii 

i § = § I c 



I IHil 

111 li^-g^ 



« ^ tt'^tl 



p.1 o 

<! K 

CO 

I/; 
o 



ti t-^ :c ~ C 



ll-S 
111 

•a •S's 
EES 



III 



■2 § 



03 P p*: 



tl 



II 



lit 

-Is 
— x> 

6 £5 



I;! 



Hi 



III 



c — aj 



7. BO 

Hi 



. E 



is - 



mil 



11 

if 



Great 
Great 
Good 

Good 


t 






Soft and swet 
Soft and juic 
Firni, juicy, i 
Firm, juicy 
Firm, juicy, 1 


Firm, vinous 


Decern. 

May 
Febr. 
March 


1 


mil 


Nov. 



Ip'III 



Hort. Tr. ii. 104. 
r;al.Mem.ii.310. 
Hort. Tr. i. 229. 
Hort. Tr. ii. 74. 
Hort. T. ii. 285. 


Hort. T. ii. 407- 1 


oi 








Po'm.Hei 
Hor. T. ii 


1 


1760 
1801 




1 


From seed in Scotlan( 
An esteemed Hereforc 

'An Amn-ican fruit 


Russian, or Ukraine i 


- ' i -1 








|i & ' ' 

■sl g & !• 

S §2= S 









Yy 2 



692 



TRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



S c?-:SJ!h -ss-ss.. . Sit 5.. ?<i: 4J 



■li I" 




Jiiiilil III jiiii ili2-lii^iliilljijii II l;¥ 



1| III |1||| ml SS|p|3||S|||1| |S SS I 



B O 5S 



§•3 >>S 



II ^mui m mil iiii iiiiffeiiiiiiii a n % 



4 If I 



II 



^1' I 

fe!l!fss|||? lis 




T-ti » 11 « to xj « •*■<;•■«!• ■vh'S'co t-.Qoai« 
££5* £££££ £5££ 

oS o o o o c o o o o o o o o c o o oooo 



£ ££ £ ££ £££X X £ £ 

& S- & 5> & & & S'&l' S-l- s? S? 

Cfa ;b U. Eh [i. b b C^ b b £^ 



ii i§ i- 



!!! 
'ill 



o . 



s J3 



■.rit 

■1 



;| I 



r 

.i.i. 



g ■ 
s 



■II I 

..ll.l 



tli 



111 III 



^ a III 



o c o o 



Book I. 



APPLE. 



693 



SI 



ml 



8 e S s 



Ijl 111 



l1 



I. 

sit 



' to aj ji .H 'S 



I I 



^ El 



la's a 
£ o ■- 

;5wa 



2 ill it 2 



5 3 3 3 13 5 



EE 



1 1.2"! a I 

•a -3 -3 -O TS .2 
c = c § c C.3 

£ S S S S E S" 
.S.S.S.i;.t:.S.a 



.a, 13.2. 

I Ml 



till- i 



g . g gggg 

E g-E ESSEE 
.5 -c-ft .t:.l!A.S.!a 



i nil ill SI II ltellji||llj 



ZOCO 



iilll 



I m I'll 111 ill 



5 !£i><> ><of5 



3 ^ 

11 1 g 
c;5 O O 



Ss cii- C.-2 21.2 cs =S = 

miimmu 



3 S o a 
5 - £• = 



t sees' EH"! 



o 5 



5 =3 ^ c •: "2-3 

IIIMilI 

Pi ^ 

Jr 3 a II 3^ J 

» ;2ccooico 

H M-3 « s S: S)3 
:;;! E S .-5 

Q 



9 tea • !3 - 
Z S=S £ 



•3'3_!'3 

nil 



iHlii 

illill 



Oli S c c g s 
CKKCO 



Z IcSci^ 



Z :5i5S^iS 
PS e£=£ = 

StSbZbZ 



tttt 

oooo 



z 

< • . 

- ttttt 
^ 1 i III 



wis 

.M ^ 

a w J 



III 

s s a 



S "3 



ill! 



E3g-3 



-III 
ii 1 1 

c5* n Q 



I 



^ I 2 22S2 



mm lilp pli 



Yy 3 



694 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



v-s 



IK- 



11 "I H 

ft 



1 If i" I 

flllltlli 



3 M 

I,- 

t| I Mil 

plifllil 



111 
111 



1 1 if 



13 15 U 



15 IS^fctiii 



iiiii 



II 
II 



la 

1 1-3 
I 1? 



f II -gl 



|| I III II |>|| |;3^ 
llllllll 

llllllllliillf 



§11 



llllllllll 

fci pti t/3 X &< (K &< ti* 



ll 

^ 5 a 

•S -a .a 
s a S 



tllliti.:!! 

p. 3 3 <» o JS 3 



1^ 



1 i 
I h 



I II It i 
1 1! 

ma i 



. . .Is 



111! 



=8-3 -a 



gi^«- 



K fafc, O O 



III I 



t3 . cans fuMhs 



•o-d ^ 



1 P d j>S 



22 e" 



£ '£ S u u '£ u a 'C u S 
oooooooooooooo 
fa fe, fa fa fc, fa fc, fc, S, fc, fc, En 



fafafafafafafafafafa 



s 1 



1 -if 



.1 

ill 



<J fa(S-«J (i-< 



11 



II. 



bJo-x *fa S 



si; 

o o 



i liJ 



• e c ■ 



III 



Book I. 



APPLE. 



695 



I 



I J. 

a BP 

— c o C 

.1.1 'llf 



^1 ssl 

I' 1§3 

!■ li 



^ 1 



S2 
c5 



•Si 

■d-a 

gi 

E S 
'.c 

E » 
I.? 



11 III 
o-i; ooo 



Ml 
oo 

II 



j: £ H J 



I t 

I. li 
Mil 



His 



5 2 i i » 

g =8 c S = 
?3 1^1^ 



too .o? 

o o o o 



n 3 « S-S 



1 

ii 

•f i 
s.s 



I 



ail 



.1 .§^§1 



UTS c5t3l 



:2 eg 



■3 -a 



lllll 

§ c c c c 
SSSSS 



lit! 

E EES 









a 

o 




A J3 






May 
Marc: 
Marc! 
May 


Febr. 

Chms 


May 


local, 
Febr. 


Marc 


Marc 
Febr. 
Marc 
Febr. 
Febr. 


Febr. 


Marc 
April 
Marc 



n o 



I — 



H g S S 



O. B 

M i 
s — 

111 



? 2 g « i 

'•^i^^ I all 



tfcoocS 



^ 5 S 

H S S 

a; CO CO 

^ I 1 



.2 <N 

CO g 



Oh -r- 
Ph 



3 U 



lllll 



■5 6 fa 

1 I II 



1^ 11 

^Et ^1 



llll, 



=1 ^liilP 

5" ?yCS*KW 



o c 



CT O Cl 



Y V 4 



696 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III 




li ill 1 fill III il 11 

II 111 I III! Ill II II 

II III I III! ill II I I 



i till Ullj ii 



jJliiiJ 




iiiFiiiiiiJi!i j i umuii Is 
liiliijiiiiit ii II j 111 II i: ii 

MmimiilMli i t llimilll II 



:i 1% I m Ii i 1 11 

I *l 1 III II 1 1 li 

1 1 iiimikn ij 
iLilliliilJjJL 

f j illliiliij jj 
|, ...I .| ,. . . 



2S 22S S 22 22 

aMfMlMBM 



15 



SSH sS S s IS 
e its Is e 

UAiMJLL 




Book I. APPLE. 697 

4378. Propagation. The apple, like most other hardy trees, may be propagated by seeds, cuttings, 
suckers, layers, or engrafting : by seeds, for obtaining new varieties, and by the other modes for continu- 
ing such as are in esteem. 

4379. By seeds. The first business here is, the choice of the seeds ; which should be taken from fruits, 
having the properties it is desired to perpetuate or improve in the greatest degree. The sorts of apples 
proper for crossing or reciprocal impregnation, appear to be those which have a great many qualities 
in common, and some different qualities. Thus the golden pippin has been crossed by other pippins or 
rennets, and not by calvils or codlings. A small-sized apple, crossed by a large sort, will be more certain 
of producing a new variety than the above mode ; but will be almost equally certain of producing a 
variety destitute of valuable qualities ; the qualities of parents of so opposite natures being, as it were, 
crudely jumbled together in the offspring. 

4380. Knight's mode of cutting out the stamens of the blossom to be impregnated, and afterwards, when 
the stigma is mature, introducing the pollen of the other parent, is unquestionably the most scientific 
itiode of performing the operation. In this way he produced those excellent apples, the Downton, red and 
yellow Ingestrie, and Grange pippins, from the same parents ; viz., the seed of the orange pippin, and 
the pollen of the golden pippin. The Brindgwood pippin he produced from golden pippin blossoms (di- 
vested of their stamens) dusted with the pollen of the golden harvey apple. The seeds may be sown in 
autumn, in light earth, covered an inch, and either in pots or beds. The end of the first year they should 
be transplanted into nursery rows, from six inches to a foot apart every way. Afterwards they should be 
removed to where they are to produce fruit ; and for this purpose the greater the distance between the 
plants the better. It should not be less than six or eight feet every way. The quickest way to bring them 
into a bearing state, Williams, of Pitmaston, considers, {Hort. Trans, vol. i. 333.) is to let the plants be fur- 
nished with lateral shoots from the ground upwards ; so disposed as that the leaves of the upper shoots 
may not shade those situated underneath, pruning away only trifling shoots. This mode of treatment 
occurred to him on reflecting on Knight's Theory of the Circulation of the Sap. Observing the change 
in the appearance of the leaves of his seedling plants as the trees advanced in growth, he thought it might 
be possible to hasten the progress of the plants, and procure that peculiar organisation of the leaf, neces- 
sary to the formation of blossom-buds, at a much earlier age. He in consequence adopted the mode 
above described, and succeeded in procuring fruit from seedling apples at four, five, and six years of age, 
instead of waiting eight, ten, and even fifteen years, which must be the case by the usual mode of planting 
close, and pruning to naked stems. 

4381. Macdonald, an eminent Scotch horticulturist, has also succeeded in obtaining fruit from seed- 
lings at an early period by grafting, already stated (2014.) as one of the uses of that mode of propagation. 
In 1808, he selected some blossoms of the nonpareil, which he impregnated with the pollen of the golden 

'pippin and of the Newton pippin. When the apples were fully ripe, he selected some of the best, from 
which he took the seeds, and sowed them in pots, which he placed in a frame. He had eight or nine 
seedlings, which he transplanted into the open ground, in spring 1809. In 1311, he picked out a few of 
the strongest plants, and put them singly into pots. In spring 1812, he observed one of the plants show- 
ing fruit-buds. He tooK a few of the twigs, and grafted them on a healthy stock on a wall ; and in 1813 
he had a few apples. This year (1816) his seedling yielded several dozens, and also his grafts; and he 
mentions, that the apples from the grafts are the largest. He is of opinion that in giving names to seed- 
lings, raised in Scotland, the word " Scotch" should be mentioned. 

4582. A very common practice among those who raise fruit-trees from seed, is, in the second or third 
season, to select such plants only as have broad and roundish leaves, throwing away the rest; experi- 
ence having taught, that the former more frequently produce fruit of improved qualities, or kt least 
larger, than those plants which have narrow-pointed leaves. The width and thickness of the leaf, Knight 
observes, " generally indicates the .size of the future apple ; but will by no means convey any correct idea 
of the merits of the future fruit. Where these have the character of high cultivation, the qualities of the 
fruit will be far removed from those of the native species ; but the apple may be insipid or highly fla- 
vored, green, or deeply colored, and of course well or ill calculated to answer the purposes of the planter. 
An early blossom in the spring, and an early change of color in the autumnal leaf, would naturally be 
supposed to indicate a fruit of early maturity ; but I have never been able to discover any criterion of 
this kind on which the smallest dependence may be placed. The leaves of some varieties will become 
yellow and fall off, leaving the fruit green and immature ; and the leaves in other kinds will retain their 
verdure long after the fruit has perished. The plants whose buds in the annual wood are full and promi- 
nent, are usually more productive than those whose buds are small and shrunk in the bark ; but their 
future produce will depend much on the power the blossoms possess of bearing the cold, and 
this power varies in the different varieties, and can only be known from experience. Those which pro- 
duce their leaves and blossoms rather early in the spring are generally to be preferred, for though they 
are more exposed to injury from frost, they less frequently suffer from the attacks of insects ; the more 
common cause of failure. The disposition to vegetate early or late in the spring, is like almost every 
other quality in the apple-tree, transferred in different degrees to its offspring ; and the planter must 
therefore seek those qualities in the parent tree which lie wishes to find in the future seedling plants. 
The most effective method I have been able to discover of obtaining such fruits as vegetate very early 
in the spring, has been by introducing the farina of the Siberian crab into the blossom of a rich and 
early apple, and by transferring in the same manner the farina of the apple to the blossom of the Si- 
berian crab. The leaf and the habit of many of the plants, that I have thus obtained, possess much 
of the character of the apple, whilst they vegetate as early in the spring as the crab of Siberia, and pos- 
sess, at least, an equal power of bearing cold ; and I possess two plants of this family, which are quite 
as hardy as the most austere crab of our woods." 

4383. Abercrombie observes that, " as the codling is a sort found to change very little from seed, or not 
for the worse, new plants of it are sometimes raised by sowing the kernels, not by way of experiment 
for a new uncertain variety, but with some dependence on having a good sort resembling the parent." 

4384. By cuttings. Every variety of apple may be grown from cuttings ; though 
some with much greater facility than others. All those of the burknott and codling 
tribes grow as well this way as by any other, and some allege, that the trees so raised 
are not liable to canker {Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 120.), which is supposed to be owing 
to their " putting out no tap-root, but spreading their numerous fibres from the knot or 
burr horizontally." Even the golden pippin may be continued in this way, and the trees 
have remained seven years in perfect health, when grafts taken not only from the same 
tree, but from the very branch, part of which was divided into cuttings, cankered in two 
or three years. " All apple-trees raised in this way," Biggs observes, "from healthy 
one-year-old branches, with blossom-buds upon them, will continue to go on bearing the 
finest fruit, in a small compass, for many years. Such trees are peculiarly proper for 
forcing, and not liable to canker." {Hort. Trans, vol. i. p. 65.) The cuttings are to be 
chosen from the young wood of horizontal or oblique branches, rather than from upright 
ones ; from six to eight inches or more in length, with a small portion of old wood at 



698 



PRACTICE^ OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the lower end. Cut off the tip of the shoot, and all the buds, excepting two or three 
liext the tip or upper extremity ; then smooth the sections at tlie lower end, and insert 
them three or four inches in sandy loam, pressing the earth firmly to them, watering, 
and covering with a hand-glass. The proper time for tliis operation is early in February, 
and the glass should not be touched, excepting to give^ water, till the shoots have sprung 
an inch or two. Shade during the mid-day sun, and begin to harden by giving air in 
July ; finally remove the glass in August ; and in October transplant to nursery rows, or 
in pots, according to future intention. With the burknott tribe, all that is necessary is to 
plant the cuttings in a shady border, and treat them like those of the gooseberry or currant. 

4385. By layers. The success of this mode of propagation may be considered as certain ; as it has 
nothing peculiar in its application to the apple, we need only refer to general directions (1993.) for per- 
forming the operation. The after treatment of the plants is the same with that for those originated by 
the foregoing or following modes. 

4386. By suckers. This mode is generally confined to the paradise and creeping apple for stocks. 

4387. By grafting and inoculation. This may be said to be the universal practice in propagating the 

apple. The first consideration is the choice of stocks ; of these, there are five sorts in common use : 

Seedling apples, used for full standards, and riders or wall standards ; seedling crabs, for standards 
and half standards; codling apples, from layers or cuttings, for dwarfs and espaliers ; paradise apples, 
or doucins, from layers or cuttings, for low dwarfs and trained ; and creeper apples, from layers or cut- 
tings, for the best dwarfs or bushes. Dubreuil, gardener at Rouen, recommends the doucin for clayey 
and light soils, and a free stock for such as are chalky and siliceous. (Horf. Trans, ^v. 5G6.) 

4388. Stocks of seedling apples. The seeds should be selected from the fruit of vigorous growing young 
or middle-aged healthy trees ; but when wanted in large quantities, tliey are procured from cider 
makers ; private propagators will adopt the first mode. The sowing and after treatment is the same as 
for seedling crabs. 

4389. Seedling crabs. " A preference," Knight observes, " has generally and justly been given to ap- 
ple-stocks raised from the seeds of the native kind, or crab, as being more hardy and durable than those 
produced from the apple. The offspring of some varieties of the crab, particularly of those introduced 
from Siberia, vegetate much earlier in the spring than the other trees of the same species; and thence 
the inexperienced planter will probably be led to suppose, that such stocks would accelerate the veget- 
ation of other varieties in the spring, and tend to produce an early maturity of the fruit in autumn. 
In this, however, he will be disappointed. The office of the stock is, in every sense of the word, subser- 
vient ; and it acts only in obedience to the impulse it receives from the branches : the only qualities, 
therefore, which are wanting to form a perfect stock, are vigor and hardiness." 

4390. Seeds, sowing, and culture. In recollecting the seeds to sow, it must be remembered, that the 
habits as well as the diseases of plants are often hereditary', and attention should be paid to the state of 
the tree from which the seeds are taken ; it should be large and of free growth, and rather in a growing 
state than one of maturity or decay. The crab-trees, which stand in cultivated grounds, generally grow 
more freely and attain a larger sta'ture than those in the woods, and therefore appear to claim a prefer- 
ence. The seeds should be taken from the fruit before it is ground for vinegar, and sown in beds of good 
mould an inch deep. From these the plants should be removed in the following autumn to the nursery, 
and planted in rows at three feet distance from each other, and eighteen inches between each plant. 
Being here propei-ly protected from cattle and hares, they may remain till they become large enough to 
be planted out ; the ground being regularly worked and kept free from weeds. 

4391. Codling s^ocA^s are raised chiefly from layers, which, at the end of the season, are taken off, and 
planted in nursery rows two feet between the rows, and one foot plant from plant. 

4392. Paradise, or as they are called by the French, doucin stocks, are raised either from layers or suck- 
ers ; and stocks from creeping apples (so named from their aptitude to throw up suckers), or the Dutch 
fjaradise, chiefly from the latter mode. They may be planted in nursery rows somewhat closer than the 
codling stocks. 

4393. All stocks require to stand in the nursery till they are from half an inch to an inch thick, at the 
height at which they are to be grafted ; such as are intended for full standards or riders will, in general, 
require to grow three or four years before being fit for tnis operation ; those for half standards two years, 
and those for dwarfs one year. The ground between them must be kept clear of weeds, and stirred 
every winter ; the side shoots of the plants, at least to the height at which they are intended to be grafted, 
rubbed off as they appear, and all suckers carefully removed. Where budding is adopted, the stocks 
may be worked at nearly half the diameter of stem requisite for grafting ; and stocks for dwarfs planted 
in autumn or spring may be inoculated the succeeding summer. No great advantage, however, is gained 
by this practice, as such plants require to stand at least another year, before they have produced their 
bud-shoots. 

4394. Soil and situation of the nursery. " A difference of opinion appears always to 
have prevailed respecting tlie quality of the soil proper for a nursery ; some have pre- 
ferred a very poor, and others a very rich soil ; and both perhaps are almost equally 
wrong. The advocates for a poor soil appear to me to have been misled by transferring 
the feelings of animals to plants, and inferring that a change from want to abundance 
must be agreeable and beneficial to both. But plants in a veiy poor soil become stunted 
and unhealthy, and do not readily acquire habits of vigorous growth, when removed from 
it. In a soil which has been highly manured, the growth of young apple-trees is ex- 
tremely rapid ; and their appearance, during two or three years, generally indicates the 
utmost exuberance of health and vigor. These are, however, usually the forerunners of 
disease, and the ' canker's desolating tooth' blasts the hopes of the planter. In choosing 
the situation for a nursery, too much shelter, or exposure, should be equally avoided ; 
and a soil, nearly similar to that in which the trees are afterwards to grow, should be se- 
lected, where it can be obtained. Pasture ground, or unmanured meadow, should be 
preferred to old tillage, and a loam of moderate strength and of considerable depth to all 
other soils." {Tr. on App. and Pear.) 

4395. GraJUng. The first business is to select the scions, the principles of which have 
been already noticed (2043). At Avhatever season scions are to be inserted, Knight ob- 
serves, " the branches, which are to form them, should be taken from the parent stock 
during the winter, and not later than the end of the preceding year : for if the buds have 
begun to vegetate in the smallest degree, and they begin with the increasing influence of 



Book 1. APPLE. 699 

the sun, the vigor of the shoots, during the first season, will be diminished, and the 
grafts will not succeed with equal certainty ; though a graft of the apple-tree very rarely 
fails, unless by accidental injury, or great want of skill in the operator. The amputated 
branches must be kept alive till wanted, by having the end of each planted in the ground, 
a few inches deep in a shady situation." 

4396. Stocks destined to form standard trees, may either be grafted at the usual height at which Jhe 
lateral branches are allowed to diverge, which is commonly six feet, or they may be grafted near the 
ground, and a single shoot trained from the graft, so as to form the stQm of the tree. The propriety of 
grafting near the ground, or at the lieight of six or seven feet, will depend on the kind of fruit to be 
propagated, whether it be quite new and just beginning to bear, or a middle-aged variety. In new and 
luxuriant varieties, and these only should be propagated, it will be advantageous to graft when the stocks 
are three years old, as the growth of such will be more rapid, smooth, and upright than that of the crab, 
and there will be no danger of these being injured by beginning to bear too early. Middle-aged varieties 
will be most successfully propagated by planting stocks of six or seven foot high, and letting them remain 
ungrafted till they become firmly rooted in the places in which the trees are to stand. One graft only 
should be inserted in each stock ; for when more are used, they are apt to divide when loaded with fruit, 
and to cleave the stock, having no natural bond or connection with each other. When the stocks ai-e 
too large for a single scion, I would recommend that the grafts be inserted in the branches, and not in 
the principal stem._ This practice is not uncommon in various parts of England; and is general in 
Germany, with free stocks, where, hov/ever, they often neglect to graft the trees ; and thus, as Neill ob- 
serves, produce an endless variety of sorts, some good, but most of them little better than crabs. 

4387. Stocks, intended to form half standards, are grafted at three or four feet from the ground ; and 
those for dwarfs at eight or ten inches, or lower. Miller and Knight agree in recommending to graft 
near the ground where lasting and vigorous trees are wanted ; but the practice of the continental gar- 
deners, and the opinions of some in this country, are in favor of leaving a stem below the graft of not 
less than a foot in length. 

4398. Tfie kind of grafting generally adopted for moderate-sized stocks is the whip or tongue method 
(2038.), or the new mode of saddle-grafting (2033.) adopted by Knight; and the general time for the ap- 
ple is the end of February and greater part of March. Much depends on the season and situation; the 
guiding principle is, to make choice of the time when the sap of the stock is in full motion ; while that of 
the scions, from havingbeen previously cut off and placed in the shade, is less so. 

4399. The common season for budding the apple is Jiily ; .as there is nothing peculiar to this tree in 
performing that operation, we refer to tne general directions. (2050.) 

4400. Transplanting grafted trees in the nursery. " It has been recommended," 
Knight observes, " to remove grafted trees once or twice during the time they remain in 
the nursery, under the idea of increasing the number of their roots ; but I think this 
practice only eligible with trees which do not readily grow when transplanted. I have 
always found the growth of young apple-trees to be much retarded, and a premature 
disposition to blossom to be brought on by it ; and I could not afterwards observe that 
those trees, which had been twice remoVfed, grew better than others. It has also been 
supposed that many small roots, proceeding immediately from the trunk, are, in the future 
growth of the tree, to be preferred to a few which are large ; bat as the large roots of 
necessity branch into small, which consequently extend to a greater distance, the advan- 
tages of more transplantations than from the seed-bed to the nursery, and thence to the 
garden or orchard, may reasonably be questioned." 

4401. The choice of sorts depends on the object in view. The first thing an inex- 
perienced gardener has to do is to consider the various domestic uses of the apple, and 
then determine what is wanted, according to the family or market to be supplied; the 
next thing is to consider how those wants may be supplied in his given soil, situation, 
and circumstances ; and the last thing is to study the catalogue of sorts, and select ac- 
cordingly. In every garden and private orchard, apples for ten different purposes are 
desirable : — 

4402. For summer culinary use, as the 

Codlings, while not fully grown or imperfectly ripe, which are fit for using in June, July, and August. 

4403. For summer eating or table use, as the 

Jennetting, pomroy, &c. which ripen I Margaret summer pearmain, &c. which I Ifentish fill-basket, Hawthomdean, &c. 
in the end of June or in July | ripen in July | which ripen in August. 

4404. For autumn baking, as the 

Codlings and Burknott's, red streaks, I Piles's russet, Carlisle codling, cat's I Wormsley pippin, golden Harvey, queen- 
Eve apple, courtpendu, nonsuch, &c. head, embroidered, &c. which ripen ing, golden russet, which ripen in 
which ripen in September | in October I November. 

4405. For autumn table use, as the 

Kirton and Dalmahoy pippins. Loan's I Orange and ribstone pippins, . grey I Franklin's golden, and Borsdorf pippins, 
pearmain, colville, Kent, godolphin, rennet, fameuse, violet, &c. which 1 Dredge's russet, margil, &c. which 
&c. which ripen in September | ripen in October | ripen in November. 



4406. For winter culinary use, as the 



Minier's dumpling, Burknott, John I Hall-door, royal pearmain,Dutch queen- I Brindgwood pippin, cockagee, tanker, 

apple, Blansfield tart, &c. which are ing, Adam's russet, which are fit to ton, box-apple, &c. which are fit to 

fit to use in December | use in January I use in February . 

4407. For winter table use, as the 

Golden and Kentish pipi)ins, golden and I The Norfolk storing, Hubbard's, Syke- 1 Dredge's Queen Charlotte, Feams,Skerm's 

Canadian rennets, brandy, &c. which I house, white courtpendu, &c. which kernel, and Dalmahoy pippins, royal 

are fit to eat in December are fit to eat in January pearmain, &c. which are fit to eat in 

I 1 February. 

4408. For spring culinary use^ as the 

Quince, white colville, Lord Camden's I Spencer pippin, Trevoider rennet, Mac- I Norfolk paradise, Loan's pearmain^ 

rennet, winter pearmain, which keep donald's Scotch nonpareil, Spaniard, English rennet, &c. which keej) till 

till the end of March | &c. which k«ep till the end of April | the end <rf May. 



700 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4409. For spring table use, as the 

Hollow-eyed, Cornwall rennet, Hughes's I Cockle and Whitmore pippins, golden I Stone and spencer pippins, Rojal George, 
new golden pippin, &c. which keep till and Piles's russet. Wheeler's extreme, 1 Ward, &c. which keep fill the end of 
the end of March | &c. which keep till the end of April | May. 

4410. For Slimmer culinary use, till the aj)ple season returns, as the 

Lord Cheney's green, Baxter's pearmain, stoup, codling, &c. I Norfolk heauiin, Norfolk storing, French crab, which keep till 
which keep till the end of June 1 the end of July. 

4411. For summer table use, till the apple season returns, as the 

Dredge's fame, oaken peg, carnation, &c. which keep till the I Nonpareil, Yorkshire greening, Norfolk colinan, which keep 
end of June | till the end of July. 

4412. Other sources of choice. Another source of choice, under each of the above heads, may respect the 
soil, situation, and climate of the garden, or orchard, in which they are to be planted, or the character, 
whether of dwarfs, espaliers, or wall-trees, which they are to assume there. The winter and spring table 
apples may require a south wall in one district, while in another they may attain equal maturity as standards 
or espaliers. Where there is ample room, a selection of large sorts, as the Alexander and Baltimore apples, 
or of such as are the most beautifully colored, as the violet, carnation, &c. may be made to gratify the eye ; 
where room is wanting, useful sorts and great bearers are to be preferred, as the golden and ribstone pippin, 
summer pearmain, codlings, grey russet, summer and winter colvilles, &c. In general, small-sized fruit, 
as the Harveys and Granges, are to be preferred for standards, as less likely to break down the branches 
of the trees, or be shaken down by winds ; middling sorts for walls and dwarfs, and the largest of all for 
espaliers. In respect to a soil liable to produce canker, sorts raised from cuttings may be desirable, as the 
Burknott and codling tribe ; and where an occupier of a garden has only a short interest therein, such as 
come into immediate bearing, as the Burknotts, and others from cuttings, and the Hawthorndean, Apius's 
apple, and other short-lived dwarf-sorts on Paradise or creeping stocks, may deserve the preference. On 
the contrary, where a plantation is made on freehold property, or with a view to posterity, new varieties 
on crab or free stocks, should always be chosen, as the Grange, Ingestrie, Harvey, &c. Some excellent 
sorts will grow and produce crops every where, as the Hawthorndean, codling, and Ribston pippin ; 
the latter of which, Nicol says, will grow at John o' Groat's house, and may be planted in Cornwall ; others 
are shy bearers in cold situations, as the Newtown pippin of America, and most of the newly imported 
French sorts. 

4413. Choice of jilants and planting. This depends in some degree on the object in 
view, the richness of the soil, and the shelter ; young trees are more likely to succeed in 
exposed sites and poor soils, but the apple will bear transplanting at a greater age than 
any other fruit-tree. It may be planted in any open weather from November till February. 

4414. Soil and site for permanent planting. Any common soil, neither extremely 
sandy, gravelly, nor clayey, on a dry sub-soil, and with a free exposure, will suit this 
tree. On wet, hilly sub-soils, it will do no good, but after being planted a few years 
will become cankered, and get covered with moss. Wliere fruit-trees must be planted 
on such soils, they should first be rendered as ^ry as possible by under-draining ; next, 
provision made for candying off the rain-water by surface gutters ; and, lastly, the ground 
should not be trenched above a foot deep, and the trees planted rather in hillocks of earth, 
above the surface, than in pits dug into it. There is no point of more importance than 
shallow trenching and shallow planting in cold wet soils, in which deep pits and deep 
pulverisation only serve to aggravate their natural evils of moisture and cold. [Sang, in 
Caled. Hort. Mem. iv. 140.) 

4415. Knight observes, that " the apple-tree attains its largest stature in a deep strong loam or marly 
day ; but it will thrive in all rich soils, which are neither very sandy nor wet at bottom. It succeeds best," 
he adds, " in situations which are neither high nor remarkably low. In the former its blossoms are fre- 
quently injured by cold winds, and in the latter by si>ring frosts, particularly when the trees are planted in 
the lowest part of a confined valley. A south, or south-east aspect is generally preferred, on account of 
the turbulence of the west, and the coldness of north winds ; but orchards succeed well in all aspects ; 
and where the violence of the west wind is broken by an intervening rise of ground, a south-west aspect 
will be found equal to any." 

4416. Abercrombie says, " all the sorts of apple-tree may be planted in any good common soU, with a 
free exposure, whether that of a garden, orchard, or field ; so that the ground be neither very low nor ex- 
cessively wet, nor subject to inundation in winter. Avoid, as far as possible, very strong clayey and gra- 
velly soils." 

4417. Mode of bearing. " In all the varieties of the common apple, the mode of bearing is upon small 
terminal and lateral spurs, or short robust shoots, from half an inch to two rnches long, which spring from 
the younger branches of two or more years' growth, appearing first at the extremity, and extending gra- 
dually down the side : the same bearing-branches and fruit-spurs continue many years fruitful " (Aber- 
crombie.) 

4418. Pruning. " As, from the mode of bearing, apple-trees do not admit of short- 
ening in the general bearers, it should only be practised occasionally : first, where any 
extend out of limits, or grow irregular and deformed ; and secondly, a good shoot con- 
tiguous to a vacant space is shortened to a few eyes, to obtain an additional supply of 
young wood from the lower buds of the shoot for filling up the vacancy. But to shorten 
without such a motive, is not merely the cutting away of the first and the principal bear- 
ing part of the branches, but also occasions their putting forth many strong pseless wood- 
shoots where fruit-spurs would otherwise arise ; and both effects greatly tend to retard the 
trees in bearing ; whereas the fertile branches being cultivated to their natural length, 
shoot moderately, and have fruit-spurs quite to the extremity." [Abercro^nbie.) 

4419. Espaliers and wall-trees require a summer and winter pruning. 

4420. The summer pruning. Train in the young shoots of the same year, which are likely to be wanted 
in the figure, and retrench them where ill placed or too numerous ; for as the trees continue bearing many 
years on the same branches, they only require occasional supplies of young wood ; therefore, begin in May 
or June to pinch off or cut out close all fore-right, ill placed, and superfluous shoots ; retaining only some 
of the promising laterals in the more vacant parts, with a leader to each branch ; train in these between 
the mother branches, at their full length, all summer ; or, where any vacancy occurs, some strong conti- 



Book I. APPLE. 701 



guous shoot may be shortened in June to a few eyes, to furnish several laterals the same season. Keep 
the shoots in all parts closely trained, both to preserve the regularity of the espalier, and to admit the air 
and sun to the advancing fruit. 

4431. The winter pruning may be performed from November till the beginning of April. This compre- 
hends the regulation of the wood-branches, the bearers, and of the young shoots. First, examine the 
new shoots trained in the preceding summer ; and if too abundant, retain only a competency of well placed 
and promising laterals, to furnish vacant parts, with a leading shoot to each parent branch. Continue 
these mostly at full length, as far as there is room. Cut out close the superabundant and irregular young 
shoots ; and where any of the elder branches appear unfruitful, cankery, or decayed, cut them either clean 
out, or prune short to some good lateral, as may seem expedient. Also prune into order any branches 
which are very irregular, or too extended. Carefully preserve all the eligible natural fruit-spurs ; but re- 
move all unfruitful stumps and snags, and large projecting rugged spurs ; cutting close to the old wood. 
As each 'espalier is pruned, let the old and new branches be laM in at convenient distances, according to 
the size of the fruit, four, five, or six inches asunder, and neatly tied or nailed to the wall or trellis. 
(Abercrombie.) 

4422. Training espaliers. The following mode, as described by Mearns, is the most general, and by using 
stakes, which do not answer so well for any other species of espalier-tree as for apples, is also the most eco- 
nomical : — In the first stage of training, the stakes require to stand as close together as twelve or fourteen 
inches, and to be arranged in regular order to the full height of five feet, with a rail slightly fastened on 
the top of them for neatness sake, as well as to steady them. If stakes of small ash, Spanish chestnut, or 
the like, from coppices or thinnings of young plantations, be used, they will last for three or four years, 
provided they are from one inch and a half to two inches in diameter, at a foot from the bottom. They need 
not be extended further in the first instance than the distance to be considered probable the trees may 
reach in three years' growth ; at that period, or the following season, they will all require to be renewed, 
and the new ones may be placed on each side, to the extent that the trees maybe thought to require while 
these stakes last, finishing the top as before, with a rail. As the trees extend their horizontal branches, and 
acquire substance, the two stakes on each side of the one that supports the centre leader of the tree, can be 
spared, and removed to any of the extremities where wanted. And as the tree extends further, and ac- 
quires more substance, every other stake will be found suflScient ; and the centre stake can be spared also, 
after the leader has reached its destined height, and is of a sufficient substance to support itself erect. 
When such a form of training is completed, and the branches of sufficient magnitude, about six, eight, or 
twelve stakes will be sufficient for the support of the horizontal branches, even when they have the burden 
of a full crop of fruit. At any other time, about six stakes to each tree will be all that are necessary. 

4423. Jn selecting trees for the usual horizontal training, look out for those which have three fine shoots. 
Or it is better to plant them one year where they are to remain to get their roots well established, and then 
to head them down to within eight or nine inches of the ground, and to encourage three shoots from the 
top of each stool' {fig. 483, a), so that the first and lowermost horizontal shoots may be tied down within 
ten inches of the ground. 




4424. In the pruning season cut down the middle shoot of the three, reserving what is left as an upright 
leader, its length being about twelve inches from the base of the other two, and train these in a horizontal 
position (6), fixing the middle shoot, which was cut down perpendicularly to the stake it is planted against. 
But if it is against a wall or pales, it may be better to zigzag the upright leader, for the more regular dis- 
tribution of the sap, and when that is intended, the leader should be left a little longer, to allow of its 
being bent. In espalier training this zigzagging is not so readily done, nor is it necessary where the trees 
are not intended to rise high. It is always necessary, in the course of training the young wood across the 
stakes, in summer, to have large osier, or similar rods, to tie them to, in order to guide the shoots of the 
year in a proper direction. The proper ties are small osier twigs. 

4425. The following summer encourage three other shoots in the same way as the season before (c), then 
cut off the middle shoot at ten, twelve, or fifteen inches above the base of the other two, and train these 
last as in the former season (d) ; and so continue training, year after year, till the trees have reached their 
destined height. {Mearns, in Hort. Trans, v. '16.) An improvement on this mode consists in cutting down 
the leading shoot during summer, in the manner practised by Harrison, of Wortley Hall, as described in 
the succeeding paragraphs. 

4426. Training against a wall. The horizontal mode is unquestionably to be preferred 
for so vigorous a growing tree as the apple ; and Harrison's mode of conducting the 
process (Tr. on Fruit- Trees, 1823. ch. xx.) appears to us much the best. The pe- 
culiarity of his method is, that instead of training the leading shoot in a serpentine or 
zigzag manner with Hitt or Meams, to make it send out side shoots, he adopts the 
much more simple and effectual mode of cutting down the current year's shoots in June ; 
by which means he gains annually a year, as side shoots are produced on the young wood 
of that year, as well as on last year's wood which it sprang from, 

4427. The tree being a maiden plant is the first year headed down to seven buds. Every bud pushing, 
two of the shoots, the third and fourth, counting upwards, must be rubbed off when they are three inches 
in length ; the uppermost shoot must be trained straight up the wall for a leading stem, and the remaining 
four horizontally along the wall. The leading shoot having attained about fifteen inches in length, cut it 
down to eleven inches. From the shoots that will thus be produced select three, one to be trained as a 
leader, and two as side branches. Proceeding in this way for seven years, the tree will have reached the 
top of a wall twelve feet high. "With weak trees, or trees in very cold late situations, this practice will not 
be advisable, as the wood produced would be too weak, or would not ripen ; but in all ordinary situations, 
it is obviously a superior mode to any that has been hitherto described in books. In pruning the spurs of 
apple and other trees, Harrison differs from many gardeners in keeping them short, never allowing one 
spur to have more than three or four fruit-buds, and in cutting off the spurs entirely, or cutting them down 
for renewal every fourth or fifth year. Every practical gardener, desirous of excelling in the training 
and spurring of fruit-trees, ought to possess Harrison's treatise. 

4428. Heading down apple-trees that are much cankered, is strongly recommended by 
Forsyth, who gives an example of one (Jig. 484.), after it had been headed down four 
years, which bore plenty of fine fruit. The point at which it was headed down (a) was 
within eighteen inches of the soil ; and under it, on the stump, were two large wounds (b) 



-702 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



and (c), made by cutting out the cankery part, and which being covei-ed with the com- 
position were soon nearly filled up with sound wood. Very little pruning is at first given 
to trees so cut, but afterwards a regular succession of bearing wood is kept up by re- 
moving such as have borne for three or four years. Thus, one branch [d), which has 
done bearing, is cut off, and succeeded by another (f), and when that is tired also, it is 
cut off, and replaced by a third (e), and so on. 




4429. Grafting old apple-trees of different sorts with superior varieties, is an ot)vlous and long-tried im- 
provement. In this case, if the tree is a standard, it is only headed down to standard heiglit ; in old sub. 
jects, most commonly the branches only are cut over within a foot or two of the trunk, and then grafted 
151 the crown or cleft manner. 

4430. Injuries, insects, &c.^ The mistletoe {Viscum album) is frequently, through negligence, suffered to 
injure trees in orchards, and different species of mosses and lichens those in gardens. " Moss," Knight 
observes, " appears to constitute a symptomatic, rather than a primary, disease in fruit-trees : it is often 
brought on by,a damp or uncultivated soil, by the age of the variety of fruit, and by the want of air and 
Sight in closely planted unpruned orchards. In these cases it can only be destroyed by removing the cause 
to which it owes its existence." 

4431. Blights. WTiatever deranges and destroys the organisation of the blossom, and prevents the set- 
ting of the fruit, is in general termed a blight ; whether produced by insects, parasitical plants, or an 
excess of heat or cold, drought, or moisture. One of the most injurious insects with which the apple- 
tree has been visited for the last twenty years, is the Aphis lanigera, L.. the E/ioso?na mali ot Leach; 
woolly aphis, apple-bug, or American blight. " The eriosomata," Leach observes, " form what are 
called improperly galls on the stalks of trees, near their joints and knobs, which are in fact excrescences, 
caused by the efforts of nature, to repair the damage done to the old trees by the perforation of those in- 
sects whose bodies are covered with down." {Sam. Ent.) Salisbury has given an engraving of the erio- 
soma {jig. 485.) as he found it appear under a magnifying glass, when attacking the roots (a) and the 
branches (6), as well as a still more highly magnified figure of one of the bugs without wings (c) and 
winged {d). The latter he considers likely to be the male insect. Thoroughly cleaning with a brush and 




Book I. 



PEAR. 



703 



water, together with amputation when it has been some time at work, is the only means of destroying this 
insect ; but even this will not do, unless resorted to at an early stage of its progress. The caterpillars of 
many species of butterfly and moth, and the larvee of various other genera of the hemiptera and lepidop. 
tera, &c. as Scarabcsus, Curculi, &c. attack the apple-tree in common with other fruit-trees ; and on a 
large scale it is difficult, if not impracticable, to avoid their injurious effects. Burning straw or other 
materials under the trees has been long recommended ; ~ but the principal thing to be relied on, in our 
opinion, is regimen ; that is, judicious sub-soil and surface soil, culture, and pruning. 

4432. Other j}oints of culture ha,\e been already given. See Chap. II. and III. and 
Jbr gathering and storing the crops, see Chap. IV. Sect. X. and Chap. V. Sect. III. 

SuBSECT. 2. Pear. — Pyrus Communis, L. {Eng. Pot. 1784.) Icos. Di-Pentag. L. 
and Rosacea;, J. Poirier, Fr. ; Birnbaum, Ger ; and Pero, Ital. 

4433. The pear-tree, in its wild state, is a thorny tree, with upright branches, tending 
to the pyramidal form, in which it differs materially from the apple-tree. The twigs or 
spray hang down ; the leaves are elliptical, obtuse, serrate ; the flowers in terminating vil- 
lose coiymbs, produced from wood of the preceding year, or from buds gradually 
formed on that of several years' growth, on the extremities of very short protruding 
shoots called, technically, spurs. It is found in a wild state in England, and abund- 
antly in France and Germany, as well as other parts of Europe, not excepting Russia, 
as far north as lat. 51. It grows in almost any soil. The cultivated tree differs from 
the apple, not only in having a tendency to the pyramidal form, but also in being more 
apt to send out tap-roots ; in being, as a seedling plant, longer (generally from fifteen to 
eighteen years) of coming into bearing ; and when on its own root, or grafted on a wild 
pear-stock, of being much longer lived. In a dry soil it will exist for centuries, and 
still keep its health, productiveness, and vigor. " The period at which the teinton 
squash first sprang from the seed, Knight observes, probably, cannot now be at all 
ascertained; but I suspect, from its present diseased and worn-out state, that it ex- 
isted at least as early as the beginning of the sixteenth century : for another kind, the 
bai'land, which was much cultivated in the early part of the seventeenth century, still re- 
tains a large share of health and vigor ; and the identical trees which supplied the 
inhabitants of Herefordshire in the seventeenth century with liquor, are likely to do 
the same good oflRce to those of the nineteenth." Our remarks on the history of the 
apple will apply almost without exception to the pear. The Romans, in Pliny's time, 
possessed thirty-six varieties, and the fruit is still more valued, both in Italy and France, 
than the apple. 

4434. Use. As a dessert fruit the pear is much esteemed, and generally preferi-ed to 
the apple. It is also used for baking, compotes, marmalade, &c. Pared and dried in 
the oven, the fruit will keep several years, either with or without sugar. This m.ode of 
preparing the pear is about as common in France as the making of apple-pies is in this 
country ; and what is favorable to the practice is, that bad eating sorts answer best for 
drying. Bosc {Nouveau Cours (TAgric- in loco) describes two methods of drying pears 
for preservation ; and adds, that he has tried them after three years' keeping, and found 
them still very good. Perry, the jwire of the French, is made from the fermented juice, 
in the manner of cider, and the best sorts are said by Withering to be little inferior to 
wine. The wood of the pear-tree is light, smooth, and compact, and is used by turners, 
and to make joiners' tools, picture-frames to be dyed black, &c. The leaves will pro- 
duce a yellow dye, and may be used to give a green to blue cloths. 

4435. Criterion of a good pear. Dessert pears are characterised by a sugary aromatic 
juice, with the pulp soft and sub-liquid, or melting, as in the beurr^s, or butter-pears ; 
or of a firm and crisp consistence, or breaking, as in the winter bergamots. Kitchen 
jiears should be of large size, with the flesh firm, neither breaking nor melting, and ra- 
ther austere than sweet, as the wardens. Perry pears may be either large or small ; 
but the more austere the taste, the better will be the liquor. Excellent perry is made 
from the wild pear. 

4436. Varieties. Tusser, in 1573, in his list of fruits, mentions " peeres of all sorts." 
Parkinson enumerates sixty-four varieties ; Mortimer, in 1708, has many sorts ; and 
Miller has selected eighty sorts, and described them from Tournefort. In France, the 
varieties of the pear are much more numerous than even the varieties of the apple. The 
catalogue of the Luxemburg nursery at Paris contains 189 select sorts. ^ The British 
nursery lists at the present time contain from two to three hundi'ed names, among which, 
it may be observed, the number of good sorts are fewer in proportion than in the apple 
lists. In the present very imperfect state of the nomenclature of fruits, all we can do is 
to make a selection from names which have some descriptive particulars attached. We 
shall arrange them into dessert, kitchen, and peny pears, and each tribe shall be set down 
in the order of their ripening. 



« s 

^ 3 



Illl 

Illl 



&» . 

ill 

III 



8i 



II I 



'11 



II |.i 



III I 1 I 



£i1 £=«M 



» Eg. 
nihil II 

S2SS OH 'kS 



o 



p.E^ ft. Si 



•6-d ' 



.3 ^ 



g-rr 5- 



'8-S-& £•& 
a; X ■■/: c/3 c« 



.1 I II I 



.S3 " s; 

o o o o 1 



£ EC" 



■S I 

g s- 



J.IJ 

' t K 
■1e!^ 



• " E 



^ ^a 3 



. 66 



S S E S 



u u ^ u u u ^ 

oooooo o ooo ooo 



3 O O O ° 



Pi 2 



OO OOO'OOO 

Cbb Phbb bbb 



» so .J 4i 



^3 J3 
3 3 



a B3o3o 33 = 3 



III 



■I I 



I I 



o g C M 

■tj <« tico. 

S ■§ ^ "-..S 

<! u <J 



Is.. 



li. 



"i-' 
ii 



g c ar "(DC 



111; 



ill 

1^ Cl^Cb 



^-53 c^^rt ^^^c b£^>o 
g2; 0)^^-*; Sti^? C-^^^- 

il mmm iiHi 



llllll 



1=^ 



•as 



I ^ IS 



12 



-a 



S w w <cqm 



111 



1^, SI'S S S : 



S 5 



3' S 5 " 5 - 



Ir 
ii 



o c oco SEco I II I 



1 1"^ 

2 i I 

I J.l 

I I hi 



I II I 

>> CO 



^ I. . 



^l^ll 'I 'I 



<>1<N 

■I 0^ 5) <N M S< S 

ooooooooooo 



ooo oooo o o 



'I 



'II 



.1 'lu llr III 

.§.2-3 S2^5.§g2 



ml 



illiliill III I III Mi I II I 



Isiiii III i II _ 



'I 'I 



eg to rj< 40 to -^h^OO o 2 



mill III g 



13 i2 
e o 
Pt.fa 



• "I 
"•U 

.'An 



s 1 I 
S -a I 



,1| 



Sis '-gl -Sg • 
.|o|||| III 



a, ^ s o. 



I?- 



5 M ^ 

Iflli 

f S " C OJ 

■«J P « -5j 



i 

pi 



ll 



3i 



tee; >> 



S''^ i I'.^'sl-gl^ ^"8 "I 



■Or; X 



i I ii 



P s 



'g-g S is S S = 



i i Jl 

o o '5; 



■3| 



tJ* to C> CO 

*o 00 cc »r) ^ 

C C fi c c c 

sa" & ess" 

o o o o 5 o 



ccccdcccafi 



o o o o o < 



PL, Af^ 



<N 00 '^tH 
i-< CN to -(^ O,*; O 00 +J ^ 



■§11 g.§^ 



ESES 
o o o o 



In 

as s 



III! 



i7i 



;i E o 



30 

'Si! 



-«l •ill 

«~ I • > S o I 



lis 
^1 



ilfiiifsi^ I 



2 ? S o '^'^ ^ 9 3 § 



mill 



111 i 



OOOOOO 00 « 00 00 00 66 00 (35 C7) 05 



-'^ CO 00 cn o 



to ■^'O^J; 00O5., C'^OJK)'* OtOf~.0C 



Book I. 



PEAR. 



707 



4438. Propagation' The pear may be propagated by layers or suckers, but not easily 
by cuttings. These modes, however, are productive of very iadifFerent plants, and are 
justly rejected in favor of raising from seed, and grafting or budding. 

4439. From seed. This mode is adopted either for the purpose of obtaining new varieties, or for pro- 
ducing pear-stocks. In the former case, the same principles of selection or crossing are to be followed 
which we have stated in treating of raising seedling apple-trees, between which and the pear-tree, the 
chief difference is, that tiie latter requires a longer period, nearly double, to come into bearing, and 
that the proportion of good sorts to bad, so originated, is but very small. Professor Van Mons, proprietor 
of the Pepiniere de la Fidelite, at Brussels, has upwrds of 800 approved sorts of new pears, raised from 
seed by himself and M. Duquesne, of Mons, in the course of fifteen or sixteen years, and selected from, 
probably, 8000 new seedling fruits. Van Mons observed to Neill, that " he seldom failed in procuring 
valuable apples from the seed ; for those which were not adapted to the garden as dessert fruit, were pro- 
bably suited for the orchard, and fit for baking or cider-making. With pears the case was different, 
many proving so bad as to be unfit for any purpose." {Horticul. Tour,8cc. 309.) Whenever a seedling 
indicates, by the blunt shape, thickness, and woolliness of its leaves, or by the softness of its bark and 
fulness of its buds, the promise of future good qualities, as a fruit-bearing tree. Van Mons takes a 
graft from it, and places it on a well established stock : the value of its fruit is thus much sooner ascer- 
tained. {Horticul. Tour, &c. 310.) At Brussels, seedlings yield fruit in four or five years, in Britain seldom 
before seven or ten years have elapsed. The fruit of the first year of bearing is always inferior to that of 
the second and third years. If a pear or an apple possess a white and heavy pulp, with juice of rather 
pungent acidity, it may be expected in the second, third, and subsequent years, greatly to improve in 
size and flavor. New varieties of pears, and indeed, of all fruits, are more likely to be obtained from the 
seeds of new than of old sorts. {Horticul. Tour, &c. 308, 309.) 

4440. In raising pears for stock, the seeds from perry-makers are generally made use of ; but the most 
proper are those from the wild pear, as likely to produce plants more hardy and durable. There is, how- 
ever, less difference between free pear-stocks, for those raised from the cultivated fruit, and wild pear- 
stocks, than there is between free apple and crab-stocks. The seeds being procured, maybe sown, and 
afterwards treated as directed for seedling crab, or apple-tree stocks. 

■1441. Grafting and budding. The most common stocks for grafting the pear are the common pear and 
wilding ; but as the apple is dwarfed, and brought more early into a bearing state by grafting on the pa- 
radise or creeper, so is the pear by grafting on the quince or whitethorn. The pear will also succeed very 
well on the whitebeam, medlar, service, or apple ; but the wilding and quince are in most general use. 
Pears on fi-ce stocks grow luxuriantly in good soil on a dry bottom ; those on wildings grow less rapidly, 
but are deemed more durable, and they will thrive on the poorest soil, if a hardy variety, and not over- 
pruned. " On the quince," Miller observes, " breaking pears are rendered gritty and stony ; but the melt- 
ing sorts are much improved : trees on these stocks may be planted in a moist soil with more success than 
those on wildings or thorns." On the thorn, pears come very early into bearing, continue prolific, and, 
in respect to soil, will thrive well on a strong clay, which is unsuitable both to those on quinces and wild- 
ings ; but they are supposed to have an unfavorable influence on the fruit, in rendering it smaller and 
hard ; and the grafts or buds require to be inserted very low, that the moisture of the earth may tend to 
favor the swelling or enlargement of the diameter of the stock, which does not increase proportionally to, 
nor ever attains the same size as the stem of the pear. Dubreuil, a French gardener, recommends the 
quince-stock for clayey and light soils, and the free stock for chalky and siliceous soils. {Horticul. Trans. 
iv. 566.) The free and wilding pear-stocks are to be planted in nursery rows, at the same distance as re- 
commended for free and wilding apples ; and the quince and thorn at the same distance as the paradise 
and creeper apples ; in other respects, the management is the same as for the apple. 

4442. Choice of sorts. (See Ch. II. and III. on Planting the Orchard and Kitclien-Gar- 
den.) The following is a list of table-pears for use in succession, from July to July 
again, as furnished for the table of the Duke of Buccleugh from the Dalkeith gar- 
den. The letters mark the aspect of the walls against which they are trained. 



{W.) Jargonelle 
(S.) Longueville 
is.) Summer bergamot 
\S.) Orange bergamot 
(W.) Summer boncretien 



(TT.) Autumn bergamot 
(W.) Gansel's bergamot 
(S. and W.) Green sugar 
\W.) Early primitive 
(S.) Muirfowl egg 



(S.) Grey achan 
{W.) Green chisel 
( W.) St. Germain 
( W.) Cressane 
( W.) Brown beurr^ 



(W.) Grey beurr<; 
( IV.\ Winter boncretien 
( W.) Swan's egg 
{W.) Chaumontelle 
W.) Coir 



{Macdonald, in Sir John Sinclah-'s Gm. Hep. ofScotlaiu!, iv. 433.) 

4443. Choice of plants. Abercrombie takes trees at one year from the graft, and thence to the sixth 
year, or older. Forsyth says, " I would advise those who intend to plant pear-trees, instead of choosing 
young ones, to look out for the oldest that they can find in the nursery, and with strong stems." 

4444. Soil and site. " A dry, deep loam," Abercrombie observes, " is accounted the best soil for the 
pear-tree when the stock is of its own species ; on a quince-stock it wants a moist soil, without which it 
will not prosper. Gravel is a good sub-soil, where the incumbent mould is suitable. Cold clay is a bad 
sub-soil : to prevent fruit-trees from striking into it, slates may be laid just under the roots. For wall- 
trees, the soil should be made good to the depth of three feet ; for orchard-trees, eighteen inches may do. 
Pear-trees, on their own stocks, will thrive on land where apples will not even live ; supposing the plants 
to be hardy varieties, little removed from wildings, and to have room to grow freely as standards. To the 
more choice of the early autumn and prime winter pears, assign south, cast, or west walls. Knight and 
M'Phail recommend a strong, deep, loamy soil, and the latter a high wall for training the better sorts." 

4445. Planting filially \s performed any time, in mild weather, from October to March ; standards are 
placed from twenty-five to forty feet apart every way ; half standards, from twenty to thirty ; and dwarf 
standards, in borders from fifteen to twenty feet from stem to stem. Wall and espalier trees are planted 
from fifteen to thirty feet apart, according as they may have been planted on pear or quince-stocks. 

4446. Mode of bearing, as in the apple-tree. " The pear-tree," M'Phail says, " does not produce blos- 
soms on the former year's wood, as several other sorts of trees do. Its blossom-buds are formed upon 
spurs growing out of wood not younger than one year old, and consequently, projecting spurs all over the 
tree must be left for that purpose." " In some pears," Knight observes, " the fruit grows only on the 
inside of those branches which are exposed to the sun and air ; in others it occupies every part of the 
tree. " 

4447. Pruning and training statidards. " Permit these to extend on all sides freely. 
Several years may elapse before any cross-placed, very irregular, or crowded branches, 
dead and worn-out bearers, require pruning, which give in winter or spring. Keep the 
head moderately open in the middle." " Pruning," Knight observes, " is not often 
wanted in the culture of the pear-tree, which is rarely much encumbered with superfluous 
branches ; but in some kinds, whose form of growth resembles the apple-tree, it will 
sometimes be found beneficial." 

Z z 2 



708 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4448. Pruning and training wall-trees. As a wall-tree or espalier, the pear is always 
trained in the horizontal manner on account of its luxuriant growth. Harrison trains 
most pear-trees in this way, and proceeds exactly as he does in training the apple-tree. 
(4427 ) But, " when it occurs that a tree trained after this method still continues un- 
fruitful for several years after plantings the branches must be trained in a pendulous 
manner, and more or less so, according to the luxuriancy of the tree, but always com- 
mence the training in the horizontal method, and afterwards change the direction of 
the branches as required." (Tr. on Fruit Trees, 144.) The ordinary distance at which 
he trains the side shoots is nine or ten inches, but the jargonelle he lays in at twelve 
inches, so as to liave room for laying in side shoots from the spurs, for one or more years. 
This he finds checks the luxuriancy of the tree, and keeps it in full beai-ing. (7V. on 
Fruit Trees, 159.) 

4449. Forsyth, in training a young pear-tree, shortens the leading shoot in March, 
and when the shoots it produces are very -strong, he says, " I cut the leading shoot 
twice in one season ; by this method 1 get two sets of side shoots in one year, which en- 
ables me the sooner to cover the wall. The second cutting is performed about the mid- 
dle of June," [Tr. on Fruit Trees, 193.) 

4450. Established wall-trees and espaliers will require a summer and winter pruning, 
and the following are Abercrombie's directions : — 

44'51. Summer pruning. While the spray is young and soft, but not until the wood-shoots can be dis- 
tinguished from spurs, rub oJf" the fore-right, the disorderly, spongy, and superfluous shoots of the year, 
father than let them grow woody, so as to require the knife. Retain some of the most promising, well 
placed, lateral, and terminal shoots, always keeping a leader to eadi main branch, where tlve space will 
permit. Leave the greater number on young trees not fully supplied with branches. Train in these at 
their full length, all summer, in order to have a choice of young wood in the winter pruning. Occa- 
sionally on old trees, or others, where any considerable vacancy occurs, some principal contiguous shoot 
may be shortened in June to a few eyes, for a supply of several new shoots the same season. 

The vjinter pruning may be performed any time from the beginning of November until the begin- 
ning of April. If on young trees, or others, a further increase of branches is necessary to fill up either 
the prescribed space, or any casual vacuity, retain some principal shoots of last summer, to be trained for 
that purpose. As, however, many young shoots will have arisen on the wood-branches and bearers, of 
which a great part are redundant and disorderly, but which have received some regulation in the summer 
pruning, we must now cut tliese out close to the mother branches, while we are preserving the best in the 
more open parts. Examine the parent branches, and if any are very irregular, or defective in growth, 
either cut them out close, or prune thorn to some eligible lateral to supply the place ; or if any branches 
be over-extended, they may be pruned in to such a lateral, or to a good fruit-bud. Cut out the least 
regular of the too crowded ; also any casually declined bearers ; with decayed, cankery, and dead wood. 
The retained supply of laterals and terminals should be laid as much at length as the limits allow, in order 
to furnish a more abundant quantity of fruit-buds. During both courses of pruning,^be particularly care- 
ful to preserve all the orderly fruit-spurs emitted at the sides and ends of the bearers : if, however, any 
large, rugged, projecting spurs, and woody barren stumps or snags occur, cut them clean away close to 
the branches, which will render the bearers more productive of fruit-buds, and regular in appearance. As 
each tree is pruned, nail or tie the branches and shoots to the wall or trellis. If afterwards,, in conse- 
quence of either pruning out improper or decayed wood, or of former insufficient training, there are any 
material vacuities or irregularities in the arrangement, un-nail the misplaced and contiguous branches, and 
lay them in order. 

4452. KnighVs mode of training the pear-tree is as follows : " A young pear-stock, which had two 
lateral branches upon each side, and was about six feet high, was planted against a wall early in the 
spring of 1810 ; and it was grafted in each of its lateral branches, two of which sprang out of the stem, 
about four feet from the ground, and the other at its summit in the following year. The shoots these 
grafts produced, when about a foot long, were trained downwards, the luidermost nearly perpendicu- 
larly, and the uppermost just below the horizontal Une, placing them at such distances that the leaves of 
one shoot did not at all shade those of another. In the next year, tlie same mode of training was conti- 
nued, and in the year following I obtained an abundant crop of fruit. An old St. Germain pear-tree, 
of the spurious kind, had been trained in the fan-form, against a north-west wall in my garden, and the 
central branches, as usually happens in old trees thus trained, had L ng reached the top of the wall, 
and had become wholly unproductive. The other branches afforded but very little fruit, and that never 
acquiring maturity, v/as consequently of no value ; so that it was necessary to change the variety, as well as 
to render the tree productive To attain these purposes, every branch which did not want at least twenty 
degrees of being perpendicular, was taken out at its base j and the spurs upon every other branch, which 
I intended to retain, were taken ofF closely with the saw and chisel. Into these branches, at their sub- 
divisions, grafts were inserted at different distances from the root, and some so near the extremities of the 
branches, that the tree extended as widely in the autumn, after it was grafted, as it did in the pre- 
ceding year. The grafts were also so disposed, that every part of the space the tree previously covered, 
was equally well supplied with young wood. As soon, in the succeeding summer, as the young shoots 
had attained sufficient length, they were trained almost perpendicularly downwards, between the larger 
branches and the wall to which they were nailed. The most perpendicular remaining branch, upon each 
side, was grafted about four feet below the top of the wall, which is twelve feet high ; and the young 
shoots, which the grafts upon these afforded, were trained inwards, and bent down to occupy the space 
from which the old central branches had been taken away j and therefore very little vacant space any 
where remained in the end of the first autumn. A few blossoms, but not any fruit, were produced by 
several of the grafts in the succeeding spring j but in the following year, and subsequently, I have had 
abundant crops, equally dispersed over every part of «-he tree." 

4453. Heading down and j^ruiiing old pear-trees. ' ' The method of pruning pear- 
trees," Forsyth observes, <' is very different from that practised for apple-trees in ge- 
neral. The constant practice has been to have great spurs, as big as a man's arm, 
standing out from the walls, from a foot to eighteen inches or upwards." The constant 
cutting of these spurs, he says, brings on the canker, and the fruit produced is small, 
spotted, and kernelly. Forsyth's practice with such trees was to cut them down, and 
renew the soil at their roots, and he refers to beurr^ pear (Jig. 486. ), restored from an 
inch and a half of bark, which, in 179G, bore four hundred and fifty fine large pears, &g. 



Booj; I. PEAR. 70^ 




4454. Harrison, and various other gardeners, adopt the mode of keeping only short 
spurs, by which much larger fruit is produced. According to this plan, each spur 
(Jig. 487. a) bears only once, when it is cut out, and succeeded by an embryo-bud (d) 
at its base. This bud at the end of the first season, is no more than a leaf-bud (c) ; 
but at the end of the se- 
cond summer, it has be- 
come a blo6som-bud (b), 
and bears the third sum- 
mer (a). Some useful ob- 
servations on tlie manage- 
ment of pear-trees, in 
correspondence with Har- 
rison's practice, will be 
found in different parts of 
the Caledonian Hort. Me- 
moirs, vol. i. 

4455. Forsyth says, " The constant practice has been to leave great spurs as big as a man's arm, stand- 
ing out from the walls, from one foot to eighteen inches and upwards. The constant pruning of these 
brings on the canker ; and by the spurs standing out so far from the wall, the blossom and fruit are 
liable to be much injured by the frost and blighting winds, and thus the sap will not have a free circu- 
lation all over the tree. The sap will always find its way first to the extremities of the shoots ; and the 
spurs will only receive it in a small proportion, as it returns from the ends of the branches." {Tr. on Fruit 
Trees, 187.) 

4456. Setting the fruit. In a very curious paper on this subject, by the Rev. G. Swayne, he informs us of a 
pear-tree, which had for twenty years never borne fruit, but which he induced to bear by cutting 
off all the blossoms of each corymbus of flowers, excepting the lower three, on the same principle as 
gardeners top beans This succeeded to a certain extent on one tree, but not on another ; the selected blos - 
soms of the other he rendered fruitful by cross-impregnation. He says, " I fancied likewise that the 
pointal was fit for impregnation before the anthers were ripe, and even before the petals expanded ; and 
from the peculiarly slender and delicate make of the latter, as it struck me, I supposed, that it ceased to 
be in a proper state as soon as it became exposed to the sun and air ; 1 therefore concluded, that there 
might possibly be a chance of obtaining fruit, by depriving the blossoms of their petals before they ex- 
panded, and enclosing with each floret in this state, within a paper envelope (as is my mode of effecting 
artificial impregnation), a riper blossom, viz. one that had just began to diffuse its farina, either one of 
its own, or, preferably, of some other variety of pear." {Hort. Trans, v. 210.) He tied up twenty-seven 
envelopes on the 27th of March, and took off" the papers on the 15th of April ; a number succeeded, and 
produced ripe fruit, specimens of which were sent to the Horticultural Society, and found unusually 
large and handsome. The Rev. Experimenter concludes his paper, by observing, " whether the result of 
the above detailed experiments be such as to authorise an expectation that artificial assistance in vegetable 
fecundation, will hereafter become of so much importance to gardeners, in the instance just alluded to, 
as in those at present recognised, of the cucumber, the melon, the early bean, and the hautbois straw- 
berry, must be left to futurity to ascertain." {Hort. Trans, v. 212.) 

4457. Harrison appears to have adopted a similar practice, he says, " It is very general to see healthy 
pear-tree.s, which produce an abundance of bloom but set a very small proportion of fruit ; this is more 
particularly the case with the tenderest kinds. The reason of such barrenness is in some cases from 
the stamina being destitute of farina, and in others from the farina having been dispersed before the pistil- 
lum had arrived at a proper state for its reception. To remedy such defects, I adopt the following'prac- 
tice. As soon as the florets have expanded and the pistillum is in a proper state of maturity, I impreg- 
nate six upon each corymb of blossom. The florets which I choose for this operation are those situated 
nearest the origin of the spur, for when pears set naturally, it is very generally such florets. The time 
I choose for this operation is calm dry days, and if possible when the sun is not very hot upon the trees. 
Immediately after performance, I give each tree about eighteen gallons of manure water, or soft pond 
water, at the roots. The trees should never be washed over the tops for a considerable time after this 
impregnation has been effected," {Tr. on Fruit Trees.) 




4458. Insects, diseases, &c. The pear-tree is liable to the attacks of the same insects 

Z z 3 



710 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



as the apple-tree ; and the fruit of the summer kinds, when ripe, is liable to be eaten by 
birds, wasps, &c. which must be kept oft' by shooting, hanging bottles of water, and 
other usual preventives. 

For other points of culture, and gathering and storing, see Chap. II., Chap. IV. Sect. 
IX., and Chap. V. Sect. III. 

SuBSECT. 3, Quince. — Pyrus Cydojiia, L. ; Cydonia Vulgaris, W. en. Icos. Di-Pen~ 
tag. L. and Rosaceee, J. Coig7iassier, Fr. ; Quittenbaum, Ger. ; and Cotogno, Ital. 

4459. The quince-tree is of low growth, much branched, and generally crooked and 
distorted. The leaves are roundish or ovate, entire, above dusky-green, underneath 
whitish, on short petioles. The flowers are large, white, or pale-red, and appear in May 
and June ; the fruit, a pome, varying in shape in the different varieties, globular, ob- 
long, or ovate ; it has a peculiar and rather disagi'eeable smell and austere taste. It is 
a native of Austria and other parts of Europe; is mentioned by Tusser, in 1753j but 
has never been very generally cultivated. 

4460. Use. The fruit is not eaten raw ; but stewed, or in pies or tarts, along with 
apples, is much esteemed. In confectionary, it forms an excellent marmalade and syrup. 
When apples are flat, and have lost their flavor, Forsyth observes, a quince or two, in a 
pie or pudding, wll add a quickness to them. In medicine, the expressed juice, repeat- 
edly taken in small quantities, is said to be cooling, astringent, and stomachic, &c. 
A mucilage prepared from the seeds was formerly much in use, but is now supplanted 
by the simple gums. In nursery-gardening, the plants are much used as stocks for th^ 
pear. 

4461. Varieties. Miller enumerates — 



The oblong, or pear-quince ; with oblong 
ovate leaves, and an oblong' firuit 
lengthened at the base. 

The apple-quince ; with ovate leaves and 
a rounder fruit. 

The Portugal quince {Lang. Pom. t. 73.;; 



with obovate leaves, and an ob- 
long fruit, which is more juicy and 
less harsh than the others, and there- 
fore the most valuable. It is rather 
a shy bearer, but is highly esteemed 



for marmalade, as the pulp has th« 
property of assuming a tine purple 
tint in the course of being prepared. 
The mild or eatable quince; less austeif 
and astringent than the others. 



4i62. Pro~agation. Generally by layers, but also by cuttings, and approved sorts may be perpetuated 
by grafting. In propagating for stocks, nothing more is necessary than removing the lower shoots from 
the larger, so as to preserve a clean stem as high as the graft ; biit for fruit-bearing trees, it is necessary 
to train the stem to a rod, till it has attained four or five feet in height, and can support itself upright. 

44o3. Soil and site. The quince prefers a soft moist soil, and rather shady, or, at least, sheltered situ- 
ation. It is seldom planted but as a standard in the orchard, and a very few trees are sufficient for any 
family. 

4164. The time of planting, the mode of bearing, and aU the other particulars of culture, are the same 
as for the apple and pear. 

SuBSECT. 4. Medlar. — Mespilus Germanica, L. (Eng.Bot. 1523.) Icos. Di-Pentag. L. 
and Rosaceee, J. Neflier, Fr. ; Mispelbaum, Ger. ; an&Nespolo, Ital. 

4465. The medlar is a small or middle-sized branching tree ; the branches woolly, and 
covered with an ash-colored bark, and, in a wild state, armed with stiff" spines. Leaves 
oval-lanceolate, serrate, towards the point somewhat woolly, on very short channelled 
petioles. Flowers produced on small natural spurs, at the ends and sides of the branches. 
Bracte as long as the corolla ; calyxes terminating, fleshy ; petals, white ; fruit, a tur- 
binated berry, crowned with five calycine leaflets ; pulp thick, mixed with callose gra- 
nules, and containing five gibbous wrinkled stones. The tree flowers in June and July, 
and the fruit is ripe in November. It is a native of the south of Europe ; but appears to 
be naturalised in some parts of England, where it has been sown in copses by binds. 

4466. Use. The fruit is eaten raw in a state of incipient decay ; its taste and flavor 
are peculiar, and by some much esteemed. 

4467. Varieties. Those in common cultivation are — 



latter approaching to the shape of an 

The^'ottingham medlar; with fruit of a 
quicker and more poignant taste. 



The wild medlar; a smaller tree, with 
smaller leaves, flowers, and fruit thL«.i 
any of tl'.e former sorts, and the flrait 
is ))ear -shaped. 



The Dutch medlar (Pom. Franc. 2. 
p. 45. t. 2, 3.) ; a crooked, deformed, 
low tree with very large leaves, entire, 
and downy on the under side. The 
fiOv/ers and fruit are very large ; the 

4458. Propagation. By seeds, by layers, and cuttings, or by grafting on seedlings of their own species, 
or on any other species of mespilus, or of cydonia, or cratcegus. Miller observes, that if the stones are 
taken out of the fruit as soon as it is ripe, and immediately planted, they will come up next spring, and 
make good plants in two years. He prefers raising from seed to grafting on the cratsEgus. Forsyth saj's, 
" Those who wish to keep the sorts true, should propagate them by grafting on their own stocks." The 
plant is rather difucult to strike by cuttings. 

4469. Soil. The soil in which the medlar thrives best is a loamy rich earth, rather moist than dry ; but 
not on a wet bottom. 

4470. Final planting. The medlar, like the quince, is usually grown as a standard or espalier ; the 
former may be planted from twenty to thirty, and the latter from fifteen to twenty feet apart. 

4471. Mode of bearing. On small spurs at the ends and sides of the branches. 

4472. Pruning. Forsyth recommends the same sort of treatment as for the quince. Cut out all the 
dead and cankery wood, and keep the tree thin of branches when it is desired to have large fruit. Care 
is requisite to train standards with tall stems. Espaliers will require a suinmer and winter pruning, as in 
the apple-tree. 

For other details of cuUure^ see the Apple and Pear. 



Book J. 



STONE-FRUITS. 



711 



SuBSECT. 5. Tme-Service. — - Sorbus Domestica, Li. {Pyrus Domeslica, Eng. BoU 
350.) Icosan. Di-Pentag. L. and Rosacece, J. Ali^der, Fr. ; Elsbeerbaum, Ger. ; and 
Loto, or Bagolaro, Ital. {fig- 488.) 

4473. The true-service-tree is of the middle size, not unlike the mountain-ash, of a very 
low growth, and not flowering till it arrives at a very great age. The leaves are com- 
pound, alternate, with ovate or oval leaflets. The flowers are produced on terminating 
panicles issuing from spurs of two or more years' growth ; the petals are cream-colored ; 
the fruit, according to Gaertner, is a pome, pear-shaped, reddish, and spotted, extremely 
austere, and not eatable till it is quite mellowed by frost or time, when it becomes 
brown and very soft. It flowers in May, and the fruit ripens in November ; the tree, 
according to Krocker, does not come into full bearing before it is sixty years old. It 
is a native of the warmer parts of Europe, and has 
also been found wild in Cornwall, Worcestershire, 
and Hertfordshire, from whence the fruit is brought 
to London in autumn in large quantities. Miller 
says, ' ' There was one tree in the garden of John 
Tradescant, of South Lainbeth, near forty feet high, 
which produced a great quantity of fruit annually, 
shaped like pears. Some trees of middling growth, 
in the garden of Henry Marsh, Esq. at Hammer- 
smith, produced fruit of the apple-shape. From 
these many trees were raised in the nurseries near 
London, but the fruit was small compared with that 
of Tradescant." Great numbers of large service- 
trees grow wild about Aubigny in France ; from 
the seeds of which one of the dukes of Richmond 
raised a great many trees at Goodwood in Sussex. 
It is a very common fruit-tree at St. Germains en 
Laye, where it is cultivated along with Pyrus Americana. 

4474. Use. The fruit has a peculiar acid flavor, and is eaten, when mellowed, like 
that of the medlar, to which it is deemed inferior. It is common in Italy, and ripens at 
Genoa in September, where it is esteemed good in dysentery and fluxes. The wood, 
which is very hard, is held in repute for making mathematical rulers, and excisemen's 
gauging-sticks. 

4475. Varieties. In Italy they have many varieties obtained from seeds; but those generally known 
here are only three : the pear-shaped, apple-shaped, and berry-shaped. 

4476. Propagation. By seeds, cuttings, or layers ; or, which is preferable for plants intended to form 
good-sized and early-bearing trees, by grafting on seedlings of their own species. It may also be grafted 
on the pyrus, mespilus, or crateegus. 

4477. Soil. The best is a strong clayey loam. 

4478. Culture. The tree is recommended by Forsyth and Abercrombie to be grown as a standard at 
twenty or thirty feet distance, and to be pruned and otherwise treated like the apple and pear. Choice 
sorts, Abercrombie observes, are sometimes trained as dwarf standards, or espaliers. 

4479. Gathering the crop. It is late in autumn before this operation can be performed. Wipe the fruit 
dry, and lay it on dry wheat-straw, spread on the open shelves of the fruit-room. In about a month it 
will become mellow and fit for use. See Chap. IV. Sect. X. and Chap. V. Sect. III. 

Sect. 11. Stone-Fruits. 

4480. Of stone-fruits the most esteemed is the peach tribe, and next the apricot ; both 
the trees natives of Persia, but acclimated in Britain, and remarkable for the lively colors 
and early appearance of their blossoms. The peach is one of the most delicious of sum- 
mer fruits. Besides the peach, nectarine, and apricot ; the almond, plum, and cherry, 
are comprehended in this section. 

SuBSECT. 1. Peach. — Amygdalus Persica, L. (Black, t. 101.) Icos. Monog. L. and 
Rosacea;, J. Malus Persica of the Romans. Pccher, Fr. ; Pfrschbaum, Ger. ; and 
Persico, Ital. 

4481. The peach-tree in its natural state is under the middle size, with spreading 
branches, lanceolate, smooth, and serrated leaves. The flowers are sessile, with reddish 
calyces, and bell-shaped, pale or dark-red corollas, often bordered with purple ; the fruit 
a roundish drupe, generally pointed, and with a longitudinal groove ; pulp, large, fleshy 
or succulent, white or yellowish, sometimes reddish, abounding with a grateful, sweet, 
acid juice ; stone, hard, irregularly furrowed ; kernel, bitter. The tree of quick growth, 
and not of long duration ; blossoms in April, and ripens its fruit in August and Septem- 
ber. Sickler considers Persia as the original country of the peach, which, in Media, is 
deemed unwholesome ; but, when planted in Egypt, becomes pulpy, delicious, and 
salubrious. The peach also, according to Columella, when first brought from Persia into 
the Roman empire, possessed deleterious qualities ; which Knight concludes to have 
arisen from those peaches being only swollen almonds ( the tuberes of Pliny), or ira- 




712 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



perfect peaches ; and which are known to contain the Prussic acid which operates unfa- 
vorably in many constitutions. The tree has been cultivated time immemorial in most 
parts of Asia ; when it was introduced into Greece is uncertain : the Romans seem ta 
have brought it direct from Persia, during the reign of the emperor Claudius. It is first 
mentioned by Columella, and afterwards described by Pliny. Tlie best peaches in Eu- 
rope are at present grown in Italy on standards ; and next may be cited those of Mon- 
treuil, near Paris, trained on lime-whited walls. {Mozard, sur 1' Education des arbres d 
Fruits, et principaleinent du Pccher, &c. 1814.) We visited these gardens in May, 1819, 
and examined more particularly those of Jean Pierre Savard, the principal proprietaire 
cultivateur. His trees were that season covered with aphides, and the principal part of 
treatment in which he seemed expert was that of varying the position of the branches of 
the tree every year, by elevating to a greater angle the weak, depressing the strong, and 
cutting out the old, naked, or twigless shoots ; thus presenting at all times a well balanced 
tree. The stems of these trees, when first planted, and for one or two years afterwards, 
are hooked to the wall, to prevent their being stolen ! Mozard's garden was visited by 
the Caledonian Horticultural deputation in 1817, who found wholesome management, 
but nothing new. In England, there are but few sorts of peaches that come to tolerable 
perfection in the open air, in ordinary seasons. The best adapted for this purpose are the 
free stones ; but all the sorts ripen well by the aid of a hot-wall or glass, and may be 
forced so as to ripen in May or June. The tree is generally an abundant bearer ; one 
of the noblesse kind, at Yoxfield, in Suffolk, which covers above six hundred square feet 
of trellis under a glass case, without flues, ripens annually from sixty to seventy dozen of 
peaches. [Hort. Trans, iii. 17.) 

4482. Use. It is a dessert fruit, of the first order, and makes a delicious preserve. In 
Maryland and Virginia a brandy is made from this fruit. " The manufacture of this 
liquor, and the feeding of pigs, being," as Braddick observes (/Tor^. Tr. ii. 205.), " the 
principal uses to which the peach is applied in those countries." The leaves, steeped in 
gin or whiskey, communicate a flavor resembling that of noyeau. 

4483. Cnterion of a good peach, A good peach, Miller observes, possesses these qual- 
ities : the flesh is firm ; the skin is thin, of a deep or bright red color next the sun, and 
of a yellowish-green next the wall ; the pulp is of a yellowish color, full of high-flavored 
juice ; the fleshy part thick, and the stone small. 

4484. Varieties. Linnaeus divides the A. Persica into two varieties ; that with downy 
fruit or the peach, and that with smooth fruit or the nectarine. There are various in- 
stances on record [Hort. Trans. Yo\. \. p. 103.) of both fruits growing on the same tree, 
even on the same branch ; and one case has occurred of a single fruit partaking of the 
nature of both. The French consider them as one fruit, arranging them in four divi- 
sions : ilxeptches, or free stone peaches, the flesh of whose fruit separates readily from the 
skin and the stone ; the ptches lisse, or free stone nectarines, or free stone smooth peaches ; 
the pavies, or cling-stone peaches, whose flesh is firm and adheres both to the skin and 
stone ; and the brugnons, or nectarines, or cling-stone smooth peaches. Knight (Hort. 
Tr. iii. 1.), Robertson [Hort. Tr. iii. 582,), and various botanists, consider the.peach 
and almond as one species. 

4485. The flat peach of China {Hort. Trans. 
vol. iv. pi. 19.) is a curious flattened fruit {fig. 489.), 
sweet and juicy, and vAih. a little noyeau flavor. 
Knight has fruited it, and considers that from the 
early habits of the tree it will prove a valuable acqui- 
sition. He has " found excitability of habit to be 
hereditary in the seedling offspring of plants, and to 
be transferable by the pollen ;" and, therefore, ima- 
gines " there will be no difiiculty in obtaining from 
the flat peach other varieties of similar habits, free 
from the deformity which has recommended it to the 
Chinese." {Hort, Trans, v. 272.) 

4486. There are many fine varieties qf the peach : 
Tusser, in 1573, mentions peaches, white and red ; 
Parkinson, in 1629, enumerates twenty-one; and Mil- 
ler, in 1750, thirty-one varieties. In the garden of the Luxemburg, at Paris, are seventy 
varieties ; and above double that number of names are to be found in the catalogues of our 
nurseries. Tliree distinguished and ingenious attempts have been made to class the va- 
rieties of peaches and nectarines, by the leaf and flower as well as the fruit ; tlie first is 
by Poiteau, in the Bon Jardinier ; the next by Count Lelieur, in his Povione Franf-'aise ; 
and the third by Robertson, nurseryman, of Kilkenny, whose arrangement is founded on 
the glands of the leaves. But as these systems are not yet sufficiently perfected to render 
them available for this work, all we can do is to submit the follov/ing table : — 




2 1 



I 

I t 



ll 



II 



IS §2 

11 1^ 



If 



0.-3 a c ji 



13 -3 



ll 



<C C <i> 



ph PLi is 



5 

3 3 
<!<) 



& B< 9< 



3 3 Jcfi (/} W $1 

'9'9'5'p) 'pi '5i '§1 

CCCOJ QJ tU Qi Qi 01 

(£) n pq n CQi 



■"11 



1 



e-'S 



111 



I" 



13 -a ■S'2'§ 

. s s 2 S'a M 

I I -2§ § 



g M n a s 



e s 

1 1 1 

^ s s 



■ ■l 

III 



Hi! 



2 ||a III 



i50 0^ P,fi,tOC^ O4 



5 5 



5 6 5 5 55555 

1 1 i s mil 



li I 



■II 



ii'ii 



It. 

ill 
11! 



s5 



11 

§1 



I SI 



.S 2 



1 1 IM 



ltl 

iz;wo 



^ ^ I I 1 slfis 

I J gi^iai 



00 O) O '1 



CI <M e< (N <N 01 



1^ 

II 



■§ s Is 
1"^ 1=1 



5 g i* s sa 

ffl a .t5 g So 

pi 



§1 -1 



TT 



i i ^ 

'i til 



8 ts « « i; -gj? 

If!!! i! 

S p. a. (u 3 oT-^ ii 



2 ^ 
<^ 1 

U 05' 



I 



If 

ill 
I'll 



Hill i 



IS 



_'5.'3 

■ ,7= ^ ^ § oTS : 



a: XI 1X1 a: 



J 4i -li -kS O 

g" g- £■ & <= 

> uj CO CO g 

c q c c 3) 

1^ H M m 



g s 



11 



"2 S 



o 

•o "5 -g ■& -g 
M H H W H 
^ % A 



•g & 
- ^ °« 
^ 1 



1 -S 



&-9 



III H 



►3 >3 



IS 3 S « 



5 6 £ £ 

>^ ^ ^? 

a I g I 

b 1^ 



5 B 5 ■£ 5 

I ? 1 I I 



Ml 



i 11 ill 



•3 g.i-"' 



fi 

P4 



! i y li 



i 3S 



B 



II I I 



(o to n 



« 5; o to 



s I I 1 

I S I I i 

cg-5 I g I 

C? d ^ oT K5 

•t« u5 O k.-} 5S 



Book L 



PEACH. 



715 



4488. Selection of sorts. Abercrombie says, "Except the situation be completely fa- 
vorable as to climate, aspect, and shelter, forbear to plant very early or extreme late fruit ; 
the frost will almost inevitably cut off the former when blossoming and setting ; and 
the latter will hardly ripen under the declining heat of autumn." 

4489. The peaches proper for a small garden, according to Forsyth, are — 

The early arant I Royal George I Early Newington I NlTette 

Small mignonne Royal Kensington Gallande Catherine 

Anne I Noblesse | Early purple Chancellor | Late Newington. 

4490. The peaches in the Dalkeith garden, and which ripen in the order in which they 
are placed are as follows ; those marked (H.) being planted against hot- walls : 

(IT-.) Early nutmeg I (n'.) Grimwcod's Royal George I (H.) Bellegard | (W.) Smith's early Newington 

(H-.) Early Araie ( ir.) Noblesse | (if.) Montaubon (H.) Chancellor 

(w.) Red Maijdalen (H.) GaUande 1 (H.) :\Xillet'3 mignonne IW.) 'White Magdalen 

( W.) Royal George | I " I 

The best impieties for forcing, according to Oldacre, are, the violet, native, mignonne, 
and iNIarl borough. 

4491. Propagating to procure new sorts. The peach is raised from the stone ; and this 
mode is pursued in America, even for procuring trees for common purposes. In Mary- 
land and Vii-ginia, Neill observes, " peach-trees are propagated from the stones without 
budding. Every peach-orchard contains of course numerous varieties. Among these, 
a few are always cf superior quality ^ with the rest of the fruit pigs are fed." The 
peaches (Nos. 38, 39.) in the table, mentioned as produced by Knight, were thus 
originated : the parent trees were dwarfs planted in large pots ; these being brought into 
a state of vigorous health, the pistils of the blossom of one sort were impregnated with 
the pollen of another ; only three peaches were suffered to remain on each tree ; and 
from sowing the stones of these, the Acton scott, and spring grove, and other varieties, 
were produced i the male parent of the latter was the large French mignonne ; and the 
female, the little red nutmeg ; which choice is consistent witli the general principle, that 
the most perfect and vigorous offspring will be obtained of plants, as of animals, when 
the male and female parent are not closely related to each other. (N^eill.) 

4492. Knight has some excellent observations on this subject in various papers published in the 
Hort. Trans. ; but especially in Observations on the Method of producing new and early Fruits, and 
on some T'arieties of the Peach, (vol. i.) In the latter paper he thus concludes, " I entertain little 
doubt that the peach-tree might, in successive generations, be so far hardened and naturalised to the 
climate of England and Ireland, as to succeed well as a standard in favorable situations. The peach does 
not, Uke many other species of fruit, much exercise the patience of the gardener, who raises it from the 
seed; for it may always be made to bear when three years old. I will not venture to decide whetherit 
might not possibly produce fruit even at the end of a single year. In prosecuting such experiments, I 
would recommend the seedling peach-trees to be retained in pots, and buds from them only to be inserted 
in older trees ; for their rapid and luxuriant growth is extremely troublesome on tlie wall, and pruning is 
death to them." He afterwards succeeded in producing blossom-buds the first year : the means used were, 
leaving on the laterals near the extremities of the shoots, and exposing the leaves as much as possible to 
the sun, in order to promote the growth, and ripening of the wood. 

4493. Milter says, the best sorts for sowing, are those whose flesh is firm and cleaves to the stone ; and 
from amongst those, you should choose such as ripen pretty early, and have a rich vinous juice. These 
stones should be planted in autumn, on a bed of light dry earth, about three inches deep and four inches 
asunder ; and in the winter the beds should be covered to protect them from the frost, which, if permitted 
to enter deep into the ground, will destroy them. After remaining two years in this bed, they may be 
transplanted into nursery rows, three feet asmider, and one foot distant, plant from plant, in the rows; 
mulching the surface, and watering during summer in very dry weather. After being two years in this 
nursery, transplant them where they are to remain to produce fruit. Plant them as standards till j'ou see 
their fruit ; cut off bruised roots, but give their tops no other pruning than cutting out decayed or very 
irregular branches. 

4494. Propagation to perpetuate varieties. The peach is generally budded on damask plum-stocks, and 
some of the more delicate sorts on apricot-stocks, or old apricot-trees cut down, or on seedling peaches, 
almonds, or nectarines. Knight recommends growing almond-stocks for the finer kinds of nectarines, and 
apricots, as likely to prevent the mildew, and as being allied to the peach. He says, " almond-stocks 
should be raised' and retained in the nursery in pots, as they do not transplant well." Dubreuil, already 
mentioned [iSSl. 4441.', recommends a plum-stock for a clayey soil, and the almond for such as arehght, 
chalky, or sandy. The same opinion is held by the IMontreuil gardeners. " Perfonn the budding in July 
or August, in the side of the stock, one bud in each, inserted near the bottom, for principal wall-trees ; 
and at the height of three, four, or five feet, for riders. The bud will shoot the following spring, and 
attain the length of three or four feet in the summer's growth. After the budded trees have ripened the 
first year's shoot, they may either be planted v,'here they are to remain, or be trained in the nursery for 
two, three, or four years, till in a bearing state. Whether the plants be removed into the garden at a 
year old, or remain longer in the nursery, the first shoots from the budding must be headed down, either 
early in June the same year, to gain a season, or in the March following, to four, five, or six eyes, to produce 
lateral shoots, with one upright leader, to begin the fonnation of the head in a fan-like expansion : 
the second year's shoots should also be shortened to a few eyes at the return of June or March ; and 
those also of the third year in such degrees as may seem expedient." At Montreuil, almond-stocks are 
used because the soil is dr>- but Mozard prefers plum-stocks where the soil is strong and black. (Horf. 
Tour, &c. 429.) Tlie nemish nurserymen graft both the peach and nectarine on the MirabeUe plum, 
a very small cherry-sliaped fruit. 

4495. Soil. A good soil for peach-trees, according to Abercrombie, " is composed of three parts meUow 
unexhausted loam, and one part drift sand, moderately enriched with vegetable mould, or the cooler 
dungs. If the soil be lean and poor, and at the same time light, have the borders improved with decom- 
posed dung and fertile mellow earth (new top-spit loam, if attainable) ; if the ground be strong and heavy, 
add some light earth or dung ; if very gravelly, remove the grossest part, excavating to a proper depth ; 
and in the same proportion apply a compost as above. Let the soil be made good to the depth of thirty 
. inches or three feet. The nectarine wants the warmer, richer, and deeper soil, if any difference be made. 

Bad cold ground, or an exhausted moidd, is often the cause of the trees gumming." Forsyth says, 
" Peaches require a lighter soil than pears and plums, and a light mellow loam is best." 

44ft6. Choice of plants. Abercrombie, Forsyth, Nicol, and most authors, agree in recommending the 
clioice of trees, two, three, or four years trained. Forsyth says, " they should be procured in the latter 
end of October, or beginning of November, as soon as the' leaf begins to fall." 

4407. Final planting. The peach is almost universally planted against walls in Britain ; in some few 
warm situations they have been tried as dwarf standards, and Knight {Ilorf. Trans, volii, p. 219.) "thinks 



T16 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



they may be grown in some cases as low a§ espaliers, covering with mats in spring to protect the blossom. 
In a very warm season there can be no doubt the fruit of the hardier sorts so grown, would be higher- 
colored and of superior flavor, and the trees would be less subject to the red spider. Early autumn plant- 
ing is best on a dry soil. Spring planting may be successfully performed in February and March ; the 
sooner, so as the weather be favorable, the better ; that the trees may take root immediately before the 
dry warm season commences." 

4498. Mode of bearing. " All the varieties of the peach and nectarine bear the fruit 
upon the young wood of a year old ; the blossom-buds rising immediately from the eyes 
of the shoots. The same shoot seldom bears after the first year, except on some casual 
small spurs on the two years' wood, which is not to be counted upon. Hence, the trees 
are to be pruned as bearing entirely on the shoots of the preceding year ; and a full 
supply of every year's shoots must be trained in for successional bearers the following 
season." (Abercrombie.) Du Petit Thouars denies the propriety of the distinction 
usually made of wood-buds and flower-buds in the peach-tree and stalks, and that each 
leaf produces a bud at its base, which soon becomes triple, the two outer proving flower- 
buds, and the middle one a leaf or wood bud. 

4499. The summer pruning, " in May and June, and occasionally in the succeeding months, is to regu- 
late the shoots of the same year, and to prevent improper growths by disbudding. Pinch off fore-right 
buds or shoots ; and pinch off or cut out ill placed, very weakly, spongy, and deformed shoots, and 
very strong luxuriant growths ; retaining a plentiful supply of good lateral shoots in all parts of the tree ; 
and leaving a leader to each branch. Let them mostly be trained in at fuU length aU summer, about 
three inches asunder, for next year's bearers ; and divest them of any lateral twigs, to prevent a thicket- 
like intricacy, and to promote a healthy fruitful growth in the shoots themselves. In the course of the 
summer regulation, if any partial vacancy occurs, or should a young tree under training want an addi- 
tional supply of wood, shorten some convenient-placed strong shoot in June to a few eyes, to furnish a 
supply of laterals the same season." 

4500. The winter pruning " may be performed at the fall of the leaf, and thence, according to some 
professional writers, at any time in mild weather until spring. It should be completed in February, or 
early in March, before the blossom-buds are considerably advanced, which are distinguishable by being 
round, plump, and prominent, while the leaf and shoot buds are oblong and narrow. There is some ad- 
vantage in pruning when the blossom-buds can be certainly known. Retain, in all parts of the tree, a 
competent supply of such regular-grown shoots of last year as are apparently fruitful in blossom-buds. 
Most part of these should be shortened, not indiscriminately, but according to their strength and situation ; 
the very strong shoots should be left longest, being topped about one fourth, or one third ; shoots of 
middling vigor reduce one third or one half; and prune the very weak to two or three buds. Always cut 
at a shoot-bud, to advance for a leader : sometimes a shoot-bud lies between a twin blossom-bud : cut half 
an inch above the bud. As many new shoots as will lay from three to six inches asunder may be deemed 
a competent supply for next year's bearers. Cut out quite close the redundant, irregular, and other 
improper shoots : remove or reduce some part of the former bearers of the two preceding years, cutting 
the most naked quite away, and others down to the most eligible younger branch or well placed shoot 
Also take out all diseased and dead wood : retaining young, where necessary, to fill a vacuitJ^" 

4501. A 7node of pruning adapted to cold and late situations is recommended by Knight as calculated to 
obtain fruit-bearing spurs on the peach, and these spurs he finds best calculated in such situations 
and late seasons, to generate well organised and vigorous blossoms. " Instead of taking off so large a 
portion of the young shoots, and training in a few only to a considerable length, as is usually done, and 
as I should myself do to a great extent, in the vicinity of London, and in every favorable situation, I pre- 
serve a large number of the young shoots, which are emitted in a proper direction in early spring by the 
yearling wood, shortening each where necessary, by pinching off the minute succulent points, generally to 
the length of one or two inches. Spurs which lie close to the wall are thus made, upon which numerous 
blossom-buds form very early in the ensuing summer ; and upon such, afler the last most unfavorable sea- 
son, and in a situation so high and cold that the peach-tree, in the most favorable seasons, had usually 
produced only a few feeble blossoms ; I observed as strong and vigorous blossoms in the present spring, as 
I have usually seen in the best seasons and situations; and I am quite confident that if the peach- 
trees, in the gardens round the metropolis had been pruned in the manner above described, in the last 
season, an abundant and vigorous blossom would have appeared in the present spring. I do not, however, 
mean to recommend to the gardener to trust wholly, in any situation, for his crop of fruit to the spurs 
Pfoduced by the above-mentioned mode of pruning and training the peach-tree. In every warm and fa- 
vorable situation, I would advise him to train the larger part of his young wood, according to the ordinary 
method, and in cold and late situations only, to adopt, to a great extent, the mode of management above 
suggested. A mixture of both modes, in every situation, will be generally found to multiply the chances 
of success ; and, therefore, neither ought to be exclusively adopted, or wholly rejected in any situation. 
The spurs must not be shortened in the winter or spring, till it can be ascertained vjhat parts of them 
are provided with leaf-buds." 

4502. Harrison, in a very elevated and cold situation, prunes and nails his peach and nectarine trees 
in December and January, taking away two thirds of the young shoots ; and in two hand-dressings in 
May and July, he leaves the lowest and weakest shoots for a succession in the year following, pinching 
off the leading and other shoots. J. S. Wortley, Esq. (Harrison's employer) says, " he can hardly do 
his gardener justice in describing his practice; for he never saw trees" so beautifully trained, and upon 
such good principles. The chief rule which he follows, is never to allow the shoots that are left for 
bearing fruit, to run to any length from the strong wood ; for which reason, when the trees are pruned in 
autumn the bearing branches for the next year are shortened, taking care not to leave more fruiting -buds 
than he thinks will come to perfection." {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 14. ; Harrison's Tr. on Fr. Trees, ch. xxv.) 

4503. Training. The peach is almost uni- 
versally trained in the fan manner, though some 
allege that it bears better in rich soils when lead- 
ing branches are trained nearly horizontally, and 
the bearing shoots trained upwards from those, 
thus combining horizontal and upright training. 
Hayward suggests the wavy-fan manner (Jig. 
490. ), as likely to answer better than the common 
mode of fan-training. 

4504. Hazard's mode of training peach-trees is as fol. 
lows : in the course of the winter he cuts over the young 
tree above the graft, leaving four or five buds to produce 
as many branches. In July foLowing, he cuts out, close 




Book I. 



PEACH. 



717 



to the main stem, all other branches than those absolutely needed for furnishing the tree. He trains 
regularly to the right and left j but the weaker branches receive less inclination, or are placed more up- 
right than the stronger ones, that this more favorable position may give them energy, and bring them to 
an equality of vigor with the stronger branches which are laid in horizontally. At the first regular form- 
ing or cutting in, about a year and a half after planting, the branches are reduced to two on each side ; 
and at the next pruning, one branch is removed on each side, leaving the tree to be formed only of two 
principal branches, and those the most equally balanced as to general form and promise. If the first 
year's growth do not yield two sufficiently good leading branches, they are sought from the growth of the 
second year ; the best branch of the former year is now, with this view, trained upright as a stem, and 
two leading branches or arms are derived from it in the succeeding season. In subsequent years the 
pruning is conducted on similar principles. It is a common rule to leave two secondary arms, of 
nearly equal strength, and about two feet apart, on each side. In trees managed in the way now described, 
the sap seems to be equally distributed ; at least, the trees exhibit, upon the whole, a great equality of 
branches, both as to size or strength, and as to furniture of twigs, leaves, and fruit. Continued care is 
exercised to keep both sides of the tree equally balanced as to vigor. If one principal arm become 
stronger than the other, a few robbers are allowed to push for a time on the weak arm, with the view of 
drawing an increase of sap to that side of the tree, till the equilibrium be restored : or, the weak arm is 
altogether raised a little more towards the vertical, while the stronger is depressed more to the horizontal, 
and thus an equality is gradually accomplished. The lambourdes, or robbers, it may be added, with due 
management, frequently afford the healthiest and best wood. They are cut down to a foot and a half, 
leaving one or two buds as near as possible to the trunk of the tree ; the resulting shoots are laid in, and 
form good fruit-bearing wood the next season. The annual shoots are left of different lengths, according 
to the vigor of the tree, from one foot to three feet. There are two kinds of shoots, such as are the 
produce both of the early spring and of the summer flow of sap, and such as result from the latter only. 
The former are preferred, and axe caWeA rameaux s the latter are distinguished as ?ww?7/es. When the 
tree reaches the top of the wall, tlie cutting in is discontinued, and the pruning extends only to shortening 
the leading shoots, or, in some cases, bending them till they be confined about two or three inches below the 
coping of the wall. In this way the equable distribution of the sap in the central parts of the tree is pro- 
moted. In the regular course of pruning, all branchlets that show fruit-buds only, or are thought to contain 
no others, are sacrificed without mercy. This would appear absurd to any one not a horticulturist, but 
if such branchlets do exist, their excision is quite prudent ; for wood-buds or shoots are like pumps, to 
draw sap towards the branchlets ; and if they be wanting, the blossom on the twig commonly fails to set ; 
or if the fruit form, it soon falls off", or at all events, is deficient in size and flavor. From four to eight 
flower-buds are left on each twig, according to its strength, and a wood-bud at the extremity, when it can 
be there had, or between two flower-buds near the extremity. When this wood-bud expands into a shoot, 
the shoot is shortened to an inch or so in length, and this remains as the pump for drawing sap to the four 
or eight fruit-buds of the twig. Other wood-shoots, as they are called, which may appear below the 
fruit-buds, or nearer to the main branches, are cut down to one or two eyes. Mozard likewise resorts to 
disbudding, although little or no notice is taken of that practice in his work. {Hort. Tom; 452.) 

4505. Sieulle, gardener at Vauz Pra;slin, adopts, for the first two years, a different mode of training 
and pruning from that of Mozard. The distinguishing characteristics of Sieulle's method are applicable 
only to very young peach-trees, in their first and second years. In the first year he does not at all cut or 
shorten the two original or principal branches, called the mere branches. The young tree has only to be 
fixed to the wall or treUis, requirmg no other treatment till the fall of the leaf By leaving these mere 
branches at full length, and only disbudding late in the autumn, the vigor of the young tree is greatly 
promoted. He trains these principal branches to a much wider angle than the Montreuil gardeners, per- 
haps 60° or 65° instead of 45°. At the approach of winter he practises Vebourgeonnement cL sec, leaving 
only four buds on each branch, and removing the rest neatly with a sharp knife. At Montreuil the mere 
branches are cut in or shortened in the first year, and disbudding is delayed till the leaves be developed in 
the following year. By disbudding at this season the young tree not only suffers an unnecessary check or 
injury, but the consequence is that the buds left, instead of forming good shoots, develope themselves into 
numerous brindilles. Late in the autumn of the second year, Sieulle cuts in, to the extent of one third, 
the four lateral branches produced on each of his mere branches. In the following year, he disbuds the 
lateral branches to the extent of one half ; and in the future management he practises winter disbudding 
greatly in place of pruning, a practice long ago strongly recommended by Nicol in his horticultural writ- 
ings. By Sieulle's method, Du Petit Thouars remarks, the young tree is more quickly brought to fill 
its place on the espalier ; it is afterwards much more easily kept in regular order : many poorer flower- 
buds are allowed to unfold themselves, but the necessity of thinning the fruit is thus in a great measure 
superseded, and the peaches produced are larger and finer. {Hort. Tour, 479.) 

4506. Thmning the fruit. " In favorable seasons, the blossoms often set more fruit 
than they can support, or than have room to attain full grow^th ; and if all were to remain, 
it would hurt the trees in their future bearing : therefore they should be timely thinned, 
when of the size of large peas or half-grown gooseberries. There should be a preparatory 
thinning before the time of stoning, and a final thinning afterwards, because most plants, 
especially such as have overborne themselves, drop many fruit at that crisis. Finish the 
thinning with great regularity, leaving those retained at proper distances, three, four, or 
five, on strong shoots, two or three on middling, and one or two on the weaker shoots ; 
and never leaving more than one peach at the same eye. The fruit on weakly trees, 
thin more in proportion." (^jibercrombie.) 

4507. Renovating old decaying trees. Head down, and renew the soil from an old up- 
land pasture, and if-the bottom of the border is moist, or if the roots have gone more than 
two feet, or two and a half feet downwards, pave the bottom, or otherwise render it 
dry and impervious to roots at the depth of twenty inches, or two feet from the surface. 
This plan will be found almost universally successful in restoring suflScient vigor, to 
resist insects and diseases, and produce abundance of fruit. 

4508. Protecting blossom. This may require to be done by some of the various modes 
already enumerated. (2206. to 2218.) Forsyth recommends old netting as the best 
covering. 

4509. Harrison protects his trees from the frost, in the month of January, by branches of broom : these 
are previously steeped in soap-suds, mixed with one-third of urine, for forty-eight hours, in order to clear 
them from insects, and when dry, disposed thinly over the whole tree, letting them remain on only until 
the trees begin to break into leaf. At the time of the blooming and setting of the fruit he applies cold 
water in the following manner : viz. If upon visiting the trees, before the sun is up, in the morning, af- 
ter a frosty night, he finds that there is any appearance of frost in the bloom or young fruit, he waters 
the bloom or young fruit thoroughly with cold water, from the garden-engine ; and he affiims, that even 



718 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




if the blossoms or young fruit are discolored, this operation recovers ihein, provided it be done before the 
sun comes upon them. He farther says, tliat he has sometimes had occasion to water particular parts of 
the trees more than once in the same morning, before he could get entirely rid of the effects of the frost. 
Dr. Noehden remarks {Hori. T?-ans. ii.) " that this operation of watering before sunrise, in counteract- 
ing the frost, seems to produce its effect in a manner analogous to the application of cold water to a frozen 
joint or limb, which is injured by the sudden application of warmth." Harrison discovered this method 
by the following accident : " In planting some cabbage-plants, among the rows of some kidneybeans, 
very early in the morning, after a frosty night, in spring, before the sun was high enough to come upon 
the frosted beans, he spilt some of the water upon them which he used in planting the cabbage-plants ; 
and to his surprise, lie found that the beans began immediately to recover." 

4510. Ripening peaches on leafless branches. Whenever the part of the bearing branch, 
which extends beyond the fruit, is v^'ithout foliage, the fruit itself rarely acquires matu- 
rity, and never its proper flavor and excellence. This Knight conjectured to be owing 
to the want of the returning sap which would have been furnished by the leaves ; and he 
proved it experimentally, by inarching a small branch immediately above the fruit. The 
fruit, in consequence, acquired the highest degree of maturity and perfection. (^Hort. 
Trans, ii. 25.) 

4511. Insects, diseases, &c. The leaves of the peach-tree are ^^I 
very liable to the attacks of the acarus, its greatest enemy, and also 
to be devoured by the Cliervies (Jig. 491. a), Aphis {Jig. 491. 
b), and even a much smaller insect, the Thrips {fig. 492.), 

492 which, in its natural size (c) is hardly perceptil>le with the naked eye. 
These are to be kept under by the usual means of watering over the leaves, 
and fumigation with tobacco-smoke. The honey-dew, mildew, gum, and 
canker, are chiefly to be kept under by regimen : dusting with sulphur has 
been found to destroy the mildew {Robertson, in Hort. Trans, v. 184.), but 
the only certain way of removing it is by a renewal of the soil, which will commonly be 
found old mould long in use and too rich ; and by abundance of air. J. Kirk. {Caled. 
Hort. Mem. iv. 159.) has tried renewing the soil for fifty years, and always found it an 
effectual remedy. 

4512. Black spots or blotches are very apt to appearand spread on the young wood of the peach-tree, 
and these Kinment proved to be produced by over-rich soil. He says, " Some time in the beginning of 
winter, 1811, I collected together a rich compost-heap (No. 1.), consisting of one third light loam, one 
sixth strong clay, one twelfth lime, one sixth hot-bed dung, one sixth vegetable mould, and one twelfth 
pigeon-dung. At the same time, I collected another heap (No. 2.), much less rich, consisting of one 
half light loam, one fourth strong clay, one eighth earth from scourings of ditches, one sixteenth lime, 
and one sixteenth hot-bed dung. These heaps I turned over occasionally, in order that they might be 
well meliorated by the frosts. About the middle of March, 1812, I planted the trees, and applied to the 
roots of a few of them the rich compost of No. 1. ; but the greatest number of them were planted with the 
compost No. 2. About the latter end of June, I examined the young trees all over : the shoots that 
they had made were nearly all of the same size ; but I was no way disappointed when I found those I 
had planted with the rich mould, sadly infested with black spots ; while those planted with No. 2. re- 
mained whole and sound. There being only the few which were planted with N^o. 1. infested with the 
black spots. With my knife I cut the blemishes entirely out ; and about the latter end of September I 
found the wounds completely whole. Early in the spring, 1813, I cleared off the rich mould entirely 
from their roots, and supplied the vacancy with No. 2. ; and at the end of last season I had the happiness 
to see them succeed to the utmost of my wishes, free of black spots." {Caled. Hort. Mem. ii. 79, 80.) 

4513. The wasp (Vespa vulgaris), the large fly {Musca vomitoia), the ant {Formica vulgaris), and 
especially the earwig {Forficula auricularia), arc enemies to the ripe peach. The three first may be ex- 
cluded by nets, or enticed by honied bottles, and the last caught by the beetle-trap, reeds, or bean-stalks, 
laid in behind the leaves, and examined every morning. 

4514. The Montreuil peach-growers water to wash off the aphides ; pick off wrinkled, blotched, and 
mildewed leaves, and cut out canker and gum, and cover the wound with onguent de St. Fiacre, i. e. cow- 
dung and loam, " much in the same way," Neill observes, " as is practised in Scotland." 

4515. Gathering. Use the peach-gatherer, and gather one day or two before the fruit is to be used, and 
before it be dead-ripe, laying it on clean paper in a dry airy part of the fruit-room. See Chap. IV. Sec. III. 
and Chap. V. Sect. X. 

4516. Forcing, and the use of hot-walls. The peach-tree forces well under glass, (See Chap. VII. Sect. 
III.) and its ripening may be accelerated in the open air, when planted against a hot- wall, by the application 
of gentle fires in cold moist weather, in August and September. This will ripen the fruit and wood, but 
attempts to accelerate the Llossoms early in spring are very dangerous, as without the protection of glass 
they are almost certain of being cut off. 

SuBSECT. 2. Nectarine. — Amygdalus Persica, var. Nectarina, L. Pec/ie lisse, Fr. 

4517. The nectarine is distinguished from the peach by its smooth and rather firmer 
and more plump fruit. In other respects the general description of the peach equally 
applies to the nectarine, both, as before observed, being by the continental gardeners 
considered as one fruit. Forsyth says, " The fruit is called nectarine from nectar, the 
poetical drink of the gods." Some botanists, considering it as a distinct species, dis- 
tinguish it by the trivial name of nuci-persica, from the similitude of the green fruit in 
smoothness, color, size, and form to the walnut {nux) covered with its outer green shell. 

4518. The varieties axe enumerated in the following table : — 



Free Stones arranged in the order of their ripening. 



Elruge; first cultivated at Hoxton, by 
Gurle, in 1680 ; (Hook. P. L. & For. 3.) 
rnedium size; dark-red and pale-yel- 
low color ; ripens about the middle of 
August ; and is soft and melting 

Temple's (Lanj^. P. t. 30. and For. 8.); 
medium size; pale-red and yellowish 
color; ripens in the middle of Sej)- 
tember ; flavor rich and juicy 



Fairchild's early (For. 1.); small size; 

round figure; beautiful red color; 

ripens in the middle of August; 

flavor good 
Peterborough, Late Green, Vermash 

(For. 10.) 

Scarlet (For.i.); small size; fine soar- 
let and pale-red color; ripens in the 
end of August 



Violet, Violet Hative (Hook. P. t. 15. 

For. 11.); medium size; purple and 

pale color ; vinous flavor 
Murry (For. 7.); medium size; dingy 

red and pale green ; ripens in Uie 

middle of September 
White, Flanders (HooA. P. t. 30. For. 

S. 58.) ; ripens in the beginning of 
eptember. 



Book I. 



APRICOT. 



719 



Clingstones an-anged in the order of their ripening. 



Iiate Newington {Lang.P.t.'29. For. 2 ); 
red and yellow color ; ripens in the 
middle of September; excellent rich 
juice 

Brugnon, Italian (Lane. P. t. 29. 
For. 5.); deep-red and pale-yellow 
color; ripens the beginning of Sep- 
tember; rich flavor 



{rugnc 

n. 26. For. 6.); large size ;" dark-red 
and yellow color ; ripens in Septem- 
ber ; replete with rich juice 
Golden (Lang.jy.t- 29. Fur. 9.) ; medium 
size ; soft red and yellow color ; ripens 
in the beginning of October ; poignant 
rich flavor 



Early Pavie (For. 57.) 

Late Genoa [For. 57.) 

Early Newington {For. 57.) ; above 
medium size ; ripens the end of Au- 
gust ; deep-red color ; pulp super-ex- 
cellent ; and, according to Miller, one 
of the best flavored of nectarines, or of 
any known fruit in the world 

Roger's seedling. {For. 77.) 



4519. Selection of sorts. Forsyth recommends for a small garden — 

Fairchild's early | Elruge 1 Scarlet | Newuigton | Red Roman 1 Temple's. 

4520. Those in the Dalkeith garden are as follows ; such as are marked (//.) being 
planted against a hot-wall : — 

(ff.) Red Roman | (H.) Elnige I (ff.) Temple 1 Faircliild's | (H.) Clermont 

(//.) Dutilly's I {H.} Brugnon ~ | {H.) Murry | {H.) Scarlet | 

4521. Insects. " On account of the smoothness of the skin of the nectarine," For- 
syth says, " it suffers much more from the wood-louse (^Oniscus asellus), ear- wigs, &c. 
than the peach ; it will, therefore, be necessary to hang up a greater number of bundles 
of bean-stalks about these than about any other fruit-trees. Wasps are also very destruc- 
tive to nectarines, and the trees are very liable to be infested with the red spider." 

Culture, &c. This is in all respects the same as the peach. 

SuBSECT. 3. Apricot. — Prunus Armeniaca, L. ; Arvieniaca Vulgaris, P. S. [Lam. III. 
t. 431.) Icos. Di-Pentag. L. and Rosacete, J. Mains Armeniaca of the Ancients. 
Abricot, Fr. ; Abricosenbaum, Ger. ; and Albicocco, Ital. 

4522. The ajiricot is a low tree, of rather crooked growth, with broad roundish- 
pointed leaves, glandular, serrated, and the petiole commonly tinged with red. Linnaeus 
remarks, that the vernant leaves are convoluted, that is, not folded flat together, like 
those of the cherry, but rolling upwards, more or less. The leaves of .many apricot-trees 
have a disposition to this at all times. The flowers are sessile, of a white color, tinged 
with dusky-red ; fruit round, yellow within and without, firmer than plums and most 
peaches, enclosing a smooth compressed stone, like that of the plum. The flowers ap- 
pear in April, on the shoots of the preceding year, and on spurs of two or more years' 
growth, and the fruit ripens in September. From its trivial name, it is generally sup- 
posed to have originated in Armenia, but Regnier and Sickler assign it a parallel be- 
tween the Niger and the Atlas ; and Pallas states it to be a native of the whole of the 
Caucasus, the mountains there, to the top, being covered with it. Thunberg describes 
it as a very large, spreading, branchy ti'ee in Japan, Grossier says that it covers the bar- 
ren mountains to the west of Pekin, that tlie Chinese have a great many varieties of the 
tree, double-blossomed, which they plant on little mounts for ornament, and dwarfs in 
pots for their apartments. It appears from Turner's Herbal, that the apricot was culti- 
vated here in 1562 ; and in Hakluyt's llememh-ancer, 1582, it is affirmed, that the apricot 
was procured out of Italy by Wolfe, a French priest, gardener to Henry VIII. The 
fruit seems to have been known in Italy in the time of Dioscorides, under the name of 
Prcecocia, probably, as Regnier supposes, from the Arabic, Berkoch ; whence the Tuscan, 
Bacoche or Albicocco ; and the English, Apricock : or, as Professor Martyn observes, 
a tree, when first introduced, might have been called a, prcecox, or early fruit ; and gar- 
deners taking the article a for the first syllable of the word, might easily have corrupted 
it to apricocks. The orthography seems to have been finally changed to apricot about the 
end of the last century ; as Justice, in 1764, writes apricock; and Kyle, of Moredun 
in 1782, apricot. 

4523. Use. The fruit is used in a raw state at the dessert, and is esteemed next to the 
peach; it is also made into marmalades, jellies, and preserved. Grossier says, that lo- 
zenges are made by the Chinese, from the clarified juice, which, dissolved in water, yield 
a cool refreshing beverage : oil may be extracted from the nut, and the young shoots 
yield a fine golden cinnamon-color to wool. 

4524. Varieties. Parkinson, in 1629, enumerates six; Rea, 1720, seven; the Lux- 
emburg catalogue, in 1800, fifteen ; and the British catalogues enumerate about the same 
number. 



Masculine, Early Red Masculine; an 
old variety, mentioned by Parkinson 
in 1629 {Dull. n. t. 1. & For. 1.) ; 
small size ; roundish form ; greenish- 
red color ; ripens in the end of July ; 
the pulp tender, with a tart tastej 
the tree a good bearer, and the fruit 
esteemed for its earliness and tart taste 

Orange; mentioned by Rea in 1702 
{For. 2.) ; large size ; deep-yellow 
color ; ripens in the end of August ; 
the pulp djy and insipid ; fitter for 
tarts than for the table ; excellent for 
preserving 

Algiers mentioned by Rea in 1702 

, {Fcr. 3.) ; flatted oval form ; straw- 



color ; ripens in the middle of August ; 
the pulp juicy and high-flavored ; and, 
according to Miller, earlier than the 
orange 

Roman ; mentioned by Rea in 1702 
{Lang. P. t. 15. and For. 4.) large 
size; round form; deep-yellow color ; 
ripens in the middle of August ; the 
pulp not very juicy 

Turkey ; mentioned by Rea in 1702 
{Lang. P. t. 15. and For. 5.); large 
size ; globular form ; very deep yellow 
color ; ripens in the end of August ; 
the pulp firm and dry 

Breda^ ; brought from Africa to Br«la, 
and thence to England in 1702 



{For. 6.) ; large size ; round form ; 
deep-yellow color; ripens in the end 
of August; the pulp soft and juicy; 
the tree a jjreat bearer ; an excellent 
fruit, esi)eciaUy if grown on stand- 
ards, to which this sort is particularly 
adapted 

Brussels ; mentioned by Rea as brought 
from Brussels in 1702 {Pom. Aiisi. 
t. 57. and For. 7.); medium size; 
inclining to an oval form ; red, with 
dark spots, and greenish -yellow color; 
ripens in the end of August ; the pulp 
not liable to be mealy, or doughy ; 
brisk flavor ; the tree a great bearer; 
and held in great esteem on account 



720 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



of its bearing so well in standards, or 
largedwarfc 
Moor Park; Anson's, Temple's, Dun- 
more's Breda, and Peach Apricot ; 
brought from the Netherlands by Sir 
Thos. More, say in 1700 (Hook. 
P. t. 9. and For. 8.) ; ripens in the 
end of August ; fine fruit ; according 
to Nicol, preferable to all other apri- 
cots 

Peach Apricot ; Apricot of Nancy ; 
brought from Paris by the Duke 
of Northumberland, in 1767 (Duh. 



n. 10. and For. 9.); very large size; 
ripens in the end of August ; the fruit 
is the finest and largest of all the 
apricots, and differs from the Moor 
Park chiefly in the leaves 

Black Peach; introduced by Sir Joseph 
Banks in 1800 (Pom. Franc, i. 36. 
and For. 10.); black-skinned; ripens 
in the beginning of August ; and of 
good flavor 

Alberge (Pom. Franc, i. 39. and For. 
p. 5 ) ; the only variety -whose seeds 
produce the same fruit as the parent 



Angoumois (Duh. n. 4. t. 3. and For, 

filotched-leaved (Poin. Frane. i. 34. and 

For. p. 5.) 
Breda, Grover's (For. ■p. 5.) 
Great (For. p. .'5.) 

Holland (Duh. 5. t. 4. and For. p. 5.) 

Orange, Royal 
Persian 

Portugal (Duh. 6. t. 5. and For. p. 5.) 
Provence (DuA.6. t.4 ) 
Transparent 
Violet. 



4525. Choice of sorts. Those grown in the Dalkeith gardens are — 

Moor Park | Breda, early 1 Masculine, early 1 Brussels, early | Orange, early. 

4526. Propagation. New varieties are procured from the seed as in the peach, and approved sorts are 
perpetuated by budding, generally on muscle or plum stocks. The Brussels and Breda, when intended 
for standards, are budded on the St. Julian plum, which produces a strong clean stem ; but for the rest, 
any stock will do, provided it be free and thriving. Knight {Hart. Trans, vol. ii. p. 19.) recommends bud- 
ding the Moor Park on an apricot-stock, which he has found prevents the trees of this sort from becoming 
diseased and debilitated, which they generally do on plum-stocks. Budding apricots is generally per- 
formed early in the season, from the middle of June to the end of July. For dwarfs, the bud is inserted 
six or eight inches from the ground ; and the sorts are sometimes twice budded, or one variety budded on 
another, which is said to keep the trees in a more dwarf state. For riders or standards, they are budded 
on plum-stocks four or five feet high. Miller prefers half standards, budded about three or four feet from 
the ground ; the trees so produced, being less liable to suffer from high winds. 

4527. Choice of tke plants. Abercrombie prefers trees of two or three years' growth from the bud, and 
fit for immediate bearing. Forsyth makes choice of those plants which have the strongest and cleanest 
stems : and if he can such as have been headed down, of two or three years' growth, as they will bear and 
fill the walls much sooner than those which have not been so treated. He says, " make choice of trees 
with one stem ; or, if they have two, one of them should be cut oflf ; for by planting those with two stems, 
the middle of the tree is left naked, and, of course, one third of the wall remains imcovered." 

4528. Season of planting. Abercrombie says, the best season is from the fall of the leaf until February 
or March. Forsyth says, the best time is in August, when the leaf begins to fall. 

4529. Final planting. The Breda and Brussels are occasionally planted as standards or espaliers in warm 
situations ; and in these states, in fine seasons, produce more highly flavored fruit than on walls. The other 
varieties are generally planted on walls, which. Miller and Forsyth say, should have an east or west aspect ; 
for, if they are planted full south, the great heat causes them to be mealy before they are eatable. The 
borders should not be less than six or eight feet wide, and two or two and a half feet deep. The soil a light 
rich loam, perfectly dry below. Forsyth says, " the borders may be three feet deep." " Standard apri- 
cots," Abercrombie observes, *' do not come into bearing under a considerable number of years, some- 
times ten or twelve; but then the fruit, in a congenial situation, is abundant and of the finest flavor. So, 
when the prevailing fault of a particular sort is mealiness, and yet it cannot be expected to ripen on even a 
dwarf standard, the medium course of training the plant to a trellis almost touching a south wall, will im- 
prove the flavor." 

4530. Mode of' training. The fan method is very generally adopted with this tree : 
Forsyth prefers the horizontal manner, and Harrison also trains horizontally, but " so as 
to let the branches have an elevation to their extremities of 20 degree*, varied, however, 
according to the luxuriancy or weakness of the tree." With young trees he proceeds to 
fill the wall by heading down, twice a year, in the same manner as with the apple and 
pear. The result produces a tree {Jig. 493.) not essentially different from Forsyth's 
engraving. (Tr. on Fr. Tr. chap, xxiv.) 




4531. Mode of hearing. The varieties of the apricot, in general, bear chiefly upon 
the young shoots of last year, and casually upon small spurs rising on the two or three 



Book 1. 



ALMOND. 



721 



year-old fruit-branches. The Moor Park bears chiefly on the last year*s shoots, and on 
close spurs formed on tlie two-year-old wood. The bearing shoots emit the blossom-buds 
immediately from the eyes along the sides ; and the buds liave a round and sw^elling ap- 
pearance. 

4532. Pruning wall-trees. The general culture of the wall-apricots comprehends a summer and winter 
course of regulation by pruning and training. 

4533. Smnmer jiruning. Begin the summer pruning in May or early in June, and continue it occasion- 
ally in July, August, &c. This pruning is principally to regulate the young shoots, of the same year. 
In the first place, take off close all the fore-right shoots, and others that are ill placed or irregular, or too 
luxuriant in growth ; taking care to retain a competent supply of choice, well placed, moderately growing 
side shoots, with a good leader to each mother branch. Continue these mostly at their full length all 
summer, regularly trained in close to the wall, to procure a sulRciency to choose from in the general win- 
ter pruning, for new bearers next year. If the summer regulation commence early, while the shoots are 
quite young, and, as it were, herbaceous, one, two, three, or four inches long, those improper to retain may 
be detached with the finger and thumb; but when of firmer growth, they must be removed with the 
knife. If any very strong shoot rise in any casually vacant part, it may be topped in June, which will 
cause it to produce several laterals the same year of more moderate growth, eligible for training in to sup- 
ply the vacancy. 

4534. Thinning the fruit. Sometimes the fruit are much too numerous, often growing in clusters; in 
which case, thin them in May and the beginning of June, in their young green state; leaving the most 
promising fruit singly, at three or four inches' distance, or from about two to six on the respective shoofrs, 
according to their strength. The apricots so thinned off, and the first principal green fruit, are esteemed 
very fine for tarts. 

4535. Winter priming. This may be performed either at the fall of the leaf, or in mild intervals 
from that time until the beginning of March. "When it is deferred until the buds begin to swell, the pro- 
mising shoots can be better distinguished. It comprehends a general regulation both of the last year's 
shoots and the older branches. A general supply of the most regular-placed young shoots must be every 
where retained, for successional bearers the ensuing year. Cut out some of the most naked part of the two 
iast years' bearers, and naked old branches not furnished with competent supplies of young wood, or 
with fruit-spurs, either to their origin, or to some well directed lateral, as most expedient, to make room 
for training a general suppty of the new bearers retained ; and cut away all decayed wood and old stumps. 
Generally observe, in this pruning, to retain one leading shoot at the end of each branch ; either a natur- 
ally placed terminal, cr one formed by cutting, where a vacuity is to be furnished, into a proper leader. Let 
the shoots retained for bearers be moderately shortened : strong shoots reduce in the least proportion, cut- 
ting off one fourth or less of their length ; from weak shoots take away a third, and sometimes half Tliis 
shortening will conduce to the production of a competency of lateral shoots the ensuing summer, from the 
lower and middle-placed eyes ; whereas, without it, the new shoots would proceed mostly from the top, and 
leave the under part of the mother branches naked, and the lower and middle parts of the tree unfurnished 
with proper supplies of bearing wood. Never prune below all the blossom-buds, except to provide wood, 
in which case cut nearer to the origin of the branch. As, in these trees, small fruit-spurs, an inch or two long, 
often appear on some of the two or three years' branches furnished with blossom-buds ; these spurs should 
generally be retained for bearing ; but when any project fore-right far from the wall, cut them in accord- 
ingly ; for spurs projecting above three inches, though they may set their fruit, seldom ripen it, unless the 
season and situation are both favorable. The thick clusters of spurs which are apt to form on aged trees, 
ought also to be thinned. As each tree is pruned, nail it, laying in the branches and shoots from three to 
six inches' distance, straight and close to the wall. 

453G. Pruning espaliers. As directed for wall-trees. 

4537. Pruning standards. Half standards will require only occasional pruning to regulate any branches 
which are too numerous, too extended, or crojs-placed ; and to remove any casually unfruitful parts and 
dead wood. At the same time, the regular branches, forming the head of the tree, should not be generally 
shortened, but permitted to advance in free growth. {Abercrombie.) 

4538. Renovating old decaying trees. Forsyth had the greatest success in this de- 
partment of fruit-tree culture, by cutting down to within a foot or eighteen inches, or 
mox*e, of the ground, and then renewing the soil of the border. He says " it has been 
the general practice to train apricot-trees on walls in the fan form, which occasions the 
sap to rise too freely to the top, leaving the lower part almost naked ; so that scarcely 
one quarter of the wall is covered with bearing wood." His remedy for this evil is to 
" cut down the whole of the tree, as near to the place where it was budded as possible ; 
remembering always to cut it to an eye or joint. If there should be any young shoots 
on the lower part of the tree, it will be proper to leave them, training them horizontally, 
whicii will check the flow of the sap, and thereby render them much more fruitful." 
[Tr. on Fr. Tr. ch. i.) Harrison says, " Apricots are very susceptible of injury from 
pruning away any strong branches." Instead of heading down old peach, apricot, or 
plum, or even cherry trees, he generally prefers rooting them out and planting young 
ones. 

4539. Gathering. The fruit is apt to become mealy, if left on the tree till over ripe ; it should be gathered 
with the peach -gatherer while moderately firm. 

4540. Insects, diseases, &c. As the fruit ripens early, it is very liable to be attacked by wasps and large 
flies, which should be kept ofFby a net, stretched a foot or more apart from the wall or trellis. The other 
insects, and the diseases of this tree, are the same as in the peach-tree; but it is not nearly so obnoxious 
to their attacks, probably owing to the comparatively hard nature of its bark and wood, and coriaceous 
leaves. 

454^1. The apricot does not force well; but a few are sometimes tried in pots, and placed in the peach- 
house. See Chap. VII. Sect. III. 



SuBSECT. 4. Almond. — ■ Amygdalus, L. Icos. Monog. L. and Rosacece, J. (Plenck. 
Ic. i. 385.) Amandier, Fr. ; Mandelbauin, Ger. ; and Mandorlo, Ital. 

4542. The common or sweet almond is the A. communis, L. ; and the hitter almond is 
the A. amara, L. {Blackw. t. 195.) Both will grow to the height of twenty feet, with 
spreading branches. The leaves resemble those of the peach, but the lower serratures are 



732 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



glandular, which has given rise to the conjecture that glandular-leaved peaches have 
sprung more immediately from the almond than such as are withouf glands, as is generally 
the case with nectarines. The flowers vary in their color from the fine blush of the apple- 
blossom to a snowy whiteness. The chief obvious distinction is in the fruit, which is 
flatter, vrith a coriaceous covering, instead of the rich pulp of dhe peach and nectarine, 
opening spontaneously when the kernel is ripe. It is a native of Barbary, China, and 
most eastern countries. 'Hie tuberes of Pliny, Knight considers as swollen almonds, and 
the same with the amandier pecker, or almond-peach, described by Du Hamel : having 
raised a similar variety from dusting the stigma of the almond with the pollen of the 
peach, which produced a tolerably good fruit. [Hort. Trans, iii. 4.) The almond is men- 
tioned by Turner in 1548, and, though scarcely worth cultivating in England as a fruit- 
tree for profit, yet it is a very satisfactory thing to produce almonds of one's own growing 
at the dessert. The tree forms an important article in the general culture of many 
parts of France, Italy, and Spain. In a forward spring the blossoms often appear in Fe- 
bruary, but in this case frost generally destroys them, and they bear little or no fruit ; 
whereas, when the trees do not flower till March, they seldom fail to produce fruit in 
abundance. 

4543. Use. The kernel of the stone is the only part used, vvhich is tender, and of a 
fine flavor. The sweet almond and other varieties are brought to the dessert in a green 
or imperfectly ripe, and also in a ripe or dried state. They are much used in cookery, 
confectionary, perfumery, and medicine. " Sweet almonds used in food," Professor 
Martyri observes, " are difficult of digestion ; and afford veiy little nourishment, unless 
extremely well comminuted. As medicine, they blunt acrimonious humors ; and some- 
times give instant relief in the heartburn." 

4544. Varieties and species in cidtivation. Miller enumerates three species, Du Hamel 
seven ; the number of sorts at present grown in the nurseries are as follows : — 



Tender shelled, Sultane (Dith. n.2. and 
^oi: 1.); small size 

Sweet, Common Sweet {Duh. n. 5. 
and For. 2.); large si/.e; bitter al- 
monds sometimes found on the same 
tree 

Bitter, Common Bitter (Pom. Franc, 
i. 67. and For. 3 ) ; lar^e size ; sweet 



almonds sometimes found on the 
same tree 
Sweet Jordan (Anii/g. diUcisof Miller) 
{Pcm. Franc, i. 67. and For. 4.) ; ten- 
der shell, and large sweet kernel; 
leaves broad, short, and crenate 
Hard-shelled (For. 5-) 
Dwarf (Duh. n. 8. and For. 6.) 



Peach Almond, Amandier Pecher (Dtih. 
n. 2. t. 4. and Jlori. Trans. 5 t. 1.); 
produces some fruits ; pulpy and ot 
tolerable good flavor; and others mere 
almonds; some partake of both na- 
tures 

Pistachio, Aniande Pistache (Miller, i.); 
very small size. 



4545. Selection of sorts. The tender-shelled is in the greatest esteem ; and next, the sweet and Jordan. 

i5i6. Propagation. The almond is propagated, like the peach, by seed, for varieties, or for stocks ; and 
by budding on its own or on plum stocks, for continuing varieties. Plum-stocks are preferred for strong 
moist soils, and peach or almond stocks for dry situations. 

4547. Fi7ial planting, lb is generally planted as standards in shrubberies, and these will sometimes in 
good seasons ripen their fruit ; but when fruit is the object, it should be trained against a west or east wall, 
like the peach. 

4548. Mode of bearing and pruning. The almond-tree bears chiefly on the young wood of the previous 
year, like the apricot and peach ; and in part upon small spurs on the tvo-year-old, three-year-old, and 
cider branches: it is therefore pruned like these trees. 

4549. Gathering and preserving the crop. A part may be gathered when nearly ripe daily for some weeks 
before gathering the whole crop. This operation generally falls to be performed in September, when a part 
may be laid in the fruit-room, and a part thoroughly dried and bedded in sand in the fruit-cellar, for 
keeping through the winter. 

SuBSECT. 5. Plum. — Prunus domestica, L. {Eng. JBot. 178.S.) Icos. Di-Pentag. L. 
and Rosacea;, J. Prune, Fr. ; PJlaumenbaum, Ger. ; and Prugno, Ital. 

4550. The plum-tree rises fifteen feet in height, branching into a moderately spreading 
head ; the leaves are ovate, serrated, and on short petioles. Petals white, drupe an oblong 
spheroid, shell long, ovate, and compressed. The natural color of tlie plum is generally 
considered to be black ; but the varieties in cultivation are of yellow, red, blue, and green 
colors, and of difi^erent forms and flavors. It is a native, or naturalised in Britain, being 
frequently found in hedges ; but its original country is supposed to be Asia, in Europe : 
and, according to Pliny, it was brought from Syria into Greece ; and thence into Italy. 

4551. Use. The best varieties are esteemed a delicious dessert fruit ; and the others 
are used in pies, tarts, conserves, and sweetmeats. A wholesome wine is also occasionally 
made from them, with or without other fruits and ingredients. " Plums," Professor 
Martyn observes, " when sufficiently ripe, and taken in moderate quantity, are not un- 
wholesome ; but in an immature state, they are more liable to produce colicky pains, 
diarrhoea, or cholera, than any other fruit of this class. Considered medicinally, they are 
emollient, cooling, and laxative, especially the French prunes, which are peculiarly useful 
in costive habits. The wood of the plum is used in turnery, cabinet work, and in making 
musical instruments." 

4552. Varieties, Tusser enumerates ten ; Parkinson, sixty ; Miller, only thirty sorts. 
In the Luxemburg catalogue are sixty-eight ; nearly a hundred names are to be found 
in the catalogues of our nurserymen, of which those in the following table are deemed 
the best. 



Book I. 



PLUM. 



723 




tig' ^■'313 tiiibi^d SjO. 



T3 t:) T3 ti bn ti;'^ ^ 

c a c c 01 Sj iTaa 



g-S* g-a. 
cc^c , cncc 
'S'S . 'S'S 



pqpq O 



t 1 
I . 1 

I ills 



O f§ 1^ 



III 
ooo 



■3 



esse 



b|ss iss 




a g s2 >2 2 2 

[I, Ci, [s, fe, &, [i, li, fc, fi< S (i, 



£00000000000000 



. is ^tojS *t *||'0 n *^ 



S " 2 s S S 2 
53 o o^-a o o 



(l< <! pii f!H 



111 



J. I 



b:" a. 



•5 II 



00 K_ 



2 S "-2 



O^C^tO O (O CC Cr> O -H 3M « t 

r-r-lrlr-l i-l rH i-l rH (N 0^ 3M 0^ C 



i.-! CD 00 m O 



3 A 2 



724 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4554. Selection of sorts. The following are recommended by Forsytii for a small 
garden : — 

Jaunehfttive ] Roval I Saint Catherine and impera- 1 Magnum bonum ; for bakin,; 

Early damask Green gage (different sorts) trice Winesoui ; for preserving. 

Orleans | Drap d'or I I 

4555. The table fruit in the Dalkeith garden are as under, placed in the order of their 
ripening, all of them being planted against walls : — 

Voilet de hative I Early Morocco I Blue perdigron [ 'White magnum bonum 

Early hative Green gage Apricot plum Imperial. 

New Orleans | Blue gage 1 Fotheringham | 

4556. Propagation. Most of the varieties are propagated by grafting or budding on the muscle, St. Julian, 
bonum magnum, or any free-growing plums, raised from seed, or from suckers ; but seedlings are prefer- 
able stocks for a permanent plantation.' The common baking plums, as the damson, buUace, wentworth, 
&c. are generally propagated by suckers, without being cither budded or grafted. Plum-grafting is per- 
formed in July or March ; budding in July or August. Miller prefers budding, because plums are very 
apt to gum wherever large wounds are made on them. The mirabelle, a small plum shaped like a cherry, 
and resembling a May-duke when half ripe, is planted to form hedges about Ghent, and used by the Flemish 
nurserymen, as stocks for both nectarines and peaches. {Neill, in Hort. Tour.) 

4^557 !Neu) varieties are procured by propagating from seeds on the general principles already stated. Knight 
{Horf. Trans, iii. 214.), in an attempt to combine the bulk of the yellow magnum bonum with the richness 
and flavor of the green gage, produced a fruit which partook of both parents, but which has not yet been 
given to the public ; but a good variety of the Orleans plum. (Hort. Trans, iii. 392.) 

4558. Soil. Plums, according to Miller, should have a middling soil, neither too wet and heavy, nor 
over light and dry, in either of which extremes they seldom do well. Abercrombie recommends any mel- 
low fertile garden or orchard ground ; and where a soil is to be made, " one half fresh loam, one fourth 
sharp sand, one sixth road-stufF, and one twelfth vegetable remains, or decomposed dung or animal 
matter." 

4559. Site. The plum is cultivated like other indigenous fruit-trees : the hardier sorts, as standards ; 
and the finer varieties against walls. It is sometimes forced ; but the blossom, like that 6f the cherry, is 
difficult to set, and on the whole, it is a fruit not well adapted for forcing. The finer varieties are almost 
always pla^^ted against Vt'alls, which. Miller says, should have an east or south-east aspect, which is more 
kindly to these fruits than a full south aspect, on which they are subject to shrivel and be very dry ; and 
many sorts will be extremely mealy, if exposed too much to the heat of the sun j but most sorts will 
ripen extremely well on espaliers, if rightly managed. Some, he adds, plant plums for standards, in which 
method some of the ordinary sorts will bear very well ; but then the fruit will not be near so fair as those 
produced on espaliers, and will be more in danger of being bruised or blown down by strong winds. 
Abercrombie says, " have some choice sorts against south walls for earlier and superior fruit ; others on 
east and west walls, and espaliers, to ripen in succession, with fidl and half standards in the orchard." 

4560. Choice of plants. Miller recommends trees of not more than one year's growth from the bud ; for 
if they are older, they are very subject to canker ; or if they take well to the ground, commonly produce 
only two or three luxuriant branches. Abercrombie and Nicol take plants from one to five years old. 
Forsyth chooses " clean straight plants with single stems, and of two or three years' growth." 

4561. Final planting. Miller says, it is common to see plum trees planted at the distance of fourteen or 
sixteen feet, so that the walls are in a few years covered with branches j and then all the shoots are cut 
and mangled with the knife so as to appear like a stumped hedge, and produce little fruit; therefore the 
only way to have plum-trees in good order, is to give them room, and extend their branches at full length. 
Abercrombie directs full and half standards to be planted at forty, thirty, twenty-five, and twenty feet 
distance ; dwarfs generally twenty feet apart, and wall-trees or espaliers fifteen, twenty, or twenty-five feet 
from stem to stem. Forsyth says, plums and cherries thrive best by themselves; and he prefers a wall for 
each, placing plums on walls ten feet high, eight yards apart ; and at seven yards' distance on twelve-feet 
walls. 

4562. Mode of bearing. " All the sorts produce their fruit on small natural spurs, 
rising at the ends and along the sides of the bearing shoots of one, two, or three years' 
growth. In most sorts, new fruit-branches are two years old before the spurs bear. The 
same branches and spurs continue fruitful in proportion to the time which they take to 
come into bearing." 

4563. Mode of training. Forsyth and Harrison decidedly prefer the horizontal man- 
ner, and both head down the leading upright shoot twice in a year. Forsyth says, " if 
the leading shoot be very strong, you may top it twice in the summer^ as directed for 
pears, and at the same time tliat you top them (spring or winter pruning, and June) ; re- 
peating the same every year till the wall is filled to the top." ( Tr. on Fr. Tr. ch. ii. ) 

4564. Pruning. After the formation of the head is begun, it takes from two to six years before the dif- 
ferent sorts come into bearing. Miller trains horizontally, and is against shortening the branches of 
plum-trees, since the more these trees are pruned, the more luxuriant they grow, until the strength of 
them is exhausted, and then they gum and spoil ; therefore the safest method to manage these trees is to 
lay in their shoots horizontally, as they are produced at equal distances, in proportion to the length of their 
leaves, pinching off the points of young shoots where lateral branches are desiied, and displacing fore-right 
and irregular shoots, or such as shade the fruit. With this carefully going over these trees in the growing 
season, there will be but little work to do to them in the winter. 

4565. Abercrombie agrees with Miller in not shortening fruitful branches. Standards, he says, must bo 
allowed to " expand in free growth, occasionally pruning long ramblers, and cross-placed or other irregu- 
lar branches. Thin crowded parts, cut away worn out bearers, also decayed and cankery wood." 

4566. Forsyth says, " Never cut the stems of young plum-trees when first planted, but leave them till 
the buds begin to break ; then you may head them down to five or more eyes, always observing to leave 
an odd one for the leading shoot : remember to cut sloping towards the wall, and as near to an eye as 
possible; thus managed, the shoots will soon fill the wall with fine wood. If you find that some of the 
shoots are too luxuriant, you may pinch the tops off with your finger and thumb, about the beginning of 
June, in the first year after planting ; by doing which you will obtain plenty of wood to fill the bottom of 
the wall. A great deal depends on the "first and second year's management of your trees." 

4567. Renovating decaying trees. Proceed as directed for the peach ; but observe that 
the plumx-tree, when cut down, is very apt to run to wood, therefore the new soil must 
neither be very rich, nor laid on in a very deep stratum. 

456S. Protecting blossom. This is sometimes done with the tenderer sorts, in the same 
way as for peaches and apricots. 



Book I. 



CIIERRV. 



725 



4569. Taking the crop. The different sorts of the plum ripen in succession for about 
three months in summer and autumn, Some early sorts begin to ripen in July ; the 
main varieties reach full maturity in August and September ; late sorts continue ripen- 
ing till the end of October or beginning of November. Each kind should be brought to 
table presently after being gathered, as they will not keep long in a natural state. 

4570. Forcing the plum. Plums may be forced in pots, or otherwise, like other fruit trees. Grange and 
Alton, have forced them both ways: the latter thus describes his practice. " The sorts generally 
preferred for forcing are the following, Prc^coce do Tour;^, green gage, blue gage, white perdrigon, Orleans, 
New Orleans, and Morocco. Some others have been tried, as 1/a Koyale, .simienncs, and blue perdrigon, but 
are found objectionable, the two first producing fruit void of flavor, and the latter lias a tendency to 
crack and gum." 

4571. When an early crop is desired, jilums are best forced in large pots or tubs, as this method ad- 
mits of their removal at jileasure into diftererit degrees of temperature, as occasion may require ; but for a 
general crop to ripen by the end of May, or beginning of June, it is preferable to have the trees planted in 
the forcing-house, and if they are intended to be forced in the first year, proper trees for the purporic fur- 
nished with well branching "wood, should be selected and planted early in the autumn, that they may 
establish themselves before the winter sets in. The soil to be preferred is a moderately rich loam, without 
mixture of manure. . 

4572. For a crop to ripen in the second ivceJc in May, the house must be covered in early in January 
commencing with a temperature of 42° of Fahrenheit, for the first fortnight, after whicli the heat may be 
gradually raised to 52°, at whicli it may continue until the flor.'ors make their appearance ; during this time 
frequent changes of air must be admitted, to strengthen the bloom, and the crop will be rendered more 
certain by keeping the trees in blossom as long as jwssible, by light shading, where necessary ; and when the 
petals begin to fall, gentle dews may be raised from the surtbce of the mould. As the fruit forms, the 
thermometer should be raised to 58°; this must be done gradually, as the consequence of a rapid rise may 
be'a casting of the fruit ; during the progress of stoning great care must be taken against sudden variations 
of the temperature, water very sparingly used, and every check by fumigation be given to the various 
insects which will be particularly active at this period. \Vhen the fruit is safely stoned, a moderate dress- 
ing of rotten manure may be spread on the surface of the mould ; the heat increased to 68°, and a more 
liberal supply of water given. After the fruit has attained a full size, and approaches maturity, air may 
be freely admitted, and water should be given in less quantities, and finally discontinued, a few days before 
gathering. 

457.3. Insects, diseases, c^c. See Peach. The gum and canker are the most common 
diseases, and, as in almost every other case, the acarus is the most noxious insect. As 
a remedy for the former, Abercrombie directs to head <,lown. The insects are destroyed 
by the common means. The gages, or reiae Claudes, when nearly ripe, are very apt to 
be eaten by wasps. 

SuBSECT. 6. Cherry. — Prunus Cerasus, L. (Eng. JBot. 706.) Jcos. Di-Pentag. L. 
and Rosacea;, J. Cerisier, Fr. ; Kirschenbaum, Ger. ; and Ciriegio, Ital. 

4574. The cherry is a middle-sized tree, with ash-colored, shining, roundish branches, 
ovate seriated leaves, and white flowers, produced in nodding umbels, and succeeded by a 
red drupe, with an acid pidp. The leaf and flowering buds are distinct, the former termi- 
nating, the latter produced from the sides of the two or more years' branches. The cul- 
tivated cherry was brought to Italy by the Roman general Lucullus, in 73 A. C. from a 
town in Pontus in Asia, called Cerasus, whence its specific name, and was introduced to 
Britain 120 years afterwards. Many suppose that the cherries introduced by the Romans 
into Britain were lost, atid that they were re-introduced in the time of Henry VIII. by 
Richard Haines, the fruiterer to that monarch. But though we have no proof that 
cherries were in England at the time of the Norman conquest, or for some centuries after 
it ; yet Warton has proved, by a quotation from Lidgate, a poet who wrote about or before 
1415, that the hawkers in London were wont to expose cherries for sale, in the same 
manner as is now done early in the season. The tree is how very generally cultivated 
both as a wall and standard fruit, and has been forced for upwards of two centuries. 

4575. Use. It is a refreshing summer fruit, highly grateful at the dessert, and afford- 
ing pies, tarts, and other usefiil and elegant preparations in cookery and confectionary. 
Steeping cherries in brandy qualifies and improves its strength and flavor ; a fine wine is 
made from the juice, and a spirit distilled from the fermented pulp. The gum which 
exudes from the tree is equal to gum arabic ; and Hasselquist relates that more than one 
hundred men, during a siege, were kept alive for nearly two months, without any other 
sustenance than a little of this gum taken sometimes into the mouth, and suffered gradu- 
ally to dissolve. Cherry-wood is hard and tough, and is used by the turner, flute-maker, 
and cabinet-maker. 

4576. Varieties. The Romans had eight kinds; red, black, tender-fleshed, hard- 
fleshed, small bitter-flavored, and a dwarf sort. Tusser, in 1573, mentions cherries red 
and black. Parkinson mentions thirty -four sorts, Ray twenty-four, and Miller has 
eighteen sorts, to which he says others are continually adding, differing little from those 
he has described. The catalogue of the Luxemburg garden contains forty-two sorts, and 
those of our nurseries exceed that number of names. As usual, we have inserted only 
those sorts of which we could obtain some authenticated descriptive particulars. The 
French divide their cherries into griottes or tender-fleshed, bigar^eanji or hard-fleshcd, and 
guigncSf geans or small fruits. 



3 A 3 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



y i 



O » > >K> 



s 

.SS. 



I II 

3 11 fll 

|l! Ill 

> <;<! <! <_ 



HI 

o .S S 3 
^ g| I $ g 



•♦TO. 

Is 

n 



o « w ;5 



t,; t»: t^; !u:Hs=tt 

o o o o o o 

u; U3 u; 3 MM) 

3 H M gp;:^ 



o o o o 



'X>J til 

= 3 S 



I E EE 



I 



4' 

li' 

Pi 
111 



3 3 3 3 3 1 

<;< 

5^3 33 3 I 

«S S<! 



E 



I I 



I 1 



sea g 2 



I I e I 



o o s 



::j 11 12; § t-.^ 

52 22 2£ s-Sf^S 

SJ2 ^ g So £0 C C O = O 

t-<3 « <fc. fehfaS 



, .0 . . 



•!i S 



S IS 

•is i & 

o Pis 

E E5 

2 2fi 



^1 



■w 

11 



S2 > S 
P 'I 



J. 

g 



9=1 



00 



|§1 
Ess 



111 



E S Is 2 o3 gfH c^BiJ 
03 g H iJi<iie5 fe. pq 



ml 



«2 
5o 



^1 l^lil 



o 1-1 o)f 



Book I. 



CHERRY. 



727 



4.578. Selection (tfsorls. Forsytli roromirends, for a small garden — 

•I'lie may.«luke | Tlie arcli-duke I The Harrhon's heart I The Turkey lieart 

The morello | The black lieart | The Krallioii I The Keiisiii;.nou tluke cli«fry. 

4579. Those in the Dal/ccilh garden arc — 

The early may^luke, two sorts | Tlie hlark heart | The amber heart 

Tlie Harrison's heart i The white lieart I The morello; ai; against walls. 

4580. Miller says, the best sorts for an orchard are the common rod or Kentish, the 
duke, and the lukeward ; all of which are plentiful bearers. 

4581. Propnga/ioii. Varieties of tlie cherry are eoiitiniicd by grafting or luukling on stocks of the black 
or wild red cherries, wiiidi arc strong shooters, and of a longer duraiioii than any of the garden kinds. 
Tlic hearts, wliich are all ill bearers, arc sometimes grafted on bird-cherry stocks, which are said to have 
the same effect on the cherry, that the paradise-stock has on the apjilc,' that of dwarfing the tree and 
rendering it more iirolific. Some graft on the inorello for the same ]»Mrpose, but. the most effectual tlwarf- 
ing stock is the mahalcb. DubreLii! of Koueii recomitionds the wild cherry for clayey and light soils, and 
the mahalcb for soils of a light, sandy, or chalky nature. The stones of the cultivated cherry arc commonly, 
but improperly, substituted for those of tlie wild sort, as being more easily jirocured. New varieties are 
procured by jiropagating from seed,- and some valuable fruits will bo found in the table, so raiscil by 
Knight " The cherry," this gentleman observes {Horf. Trans, ii. 138.), " sports more extensively in 
variety, when propagated from seeds, than any other fruit which I have hitherto subjected to experiment : 
and this species of fruit is therefore probably cajiable of acquiring a higher state of perfection than it has 
ever yet attained. Xcw varieties are also much wanted ; for the trees of the best old kinds are every 
where in a state of decay in the cherry orchards; and I am quite confident, that neither healthy nor pro- 
ductive trees will ever be obtained from grafts or buds of the old and expended varieties of this or any 
other species of fruit-tree." Cherry-stones, whether for stocks or new varieties, are sown in light sandy 
earth in autumn ; or are preserved in sand till spring, and then sowed. They will come up the same 
season, and should not be removed till the second autumn after sowing. They may then be planted out 
in rows three feet apart, and the plants one foot asunder in the row. The succeeding summer tliey will 
be fit to bud, if intended for dwarfs ; but if for standards, they will require to stand one or more seasons, 
generally till four years old. They should be budded or grafted near six feet from the ground ; the usual 
%vay is to bud in summer, and graft those which do not succeed the following s])ring. 

4582. Soil. The cherry delights in a dry sandy soil and elevated situation ; but some sorts, as the may- 
duke, will thrive in all soils and aspects, and all the varieties may be planted in any common mellow 
garden or orchard ground. In Kent, the tree prospers in a deep loam incumbent on rock. Miller says, the 
soil which cherries thrive best in, is a fresh hazel loam; if it be a dry gravel, they will not live many 
years, and will be perpetually blighted in the spring. 

4583. Site. To obtain fruit early, some sorts, as the may-duke, are planted against walls ; but all the 
varieties will do well as dwarfs or espaliers in general situations, and most of them as standards. Tiie 
may-duke, Nicol observes, does well as a standard ; but against a south wall the fruit becomes considerably 
larger, and contrary to what happens in other fruits, it seems to acquire a higher flavor. The morello is 
much improved in flavor when planted against a wall of good aspect. Abercrombie says, " Allot to the 
finest of the early kinds south walls for fruit in May and June ; train others against west and east walls, 
for supplies in succession ; and some on north walls for the latest ripeners, particularly the morello, which, 
so situated, will continue in perfection till September and October : but it is also proper to \Aant some 
trees of this sort on south walls, to have the fruit ripen earlier, with improved flavor." 

4584. Final planting. " Plant full standards from twenty to thirty feet apart ; small standards, fifteen, 
eighteen, or twenty feet. The proper season for planting is fromJ;ne middle or end of October, or any 
time in November or December, if open weather, till February or March." Miller says, never plant 
standard or rider cherry-trees over other fruits ; for there is no sort of fruit that will prosper well under 
the drip of cherries, fie allows forty feet square for standards in orchards for the same reason. 

4585. Mode of bearing. " Cherry-trees in general produce the fruit upon small 
spurs or studs, from half an inch to two inches in length, which proceed from the sides 
and ends of the two-year, three-year, and older branches ; and as new spurs continue 
shooting from tlie extreme parts, it is a maxim in pruning both standards and wall-trees, 
not to shorten the bearing branches where there is room for their regular extension. 
The morello is in some degree an exception." 

4586. Mode of training. Forsyth and Plarrison train in the horizontal manner, and prac- 
tise shortening the leading shoots as in the plum, apple, &c. For the morello Harrison, 
adopts the horizontal or half-fan method, " the horizontal method when the tree grows 
very vigorous, and. the half-fan method when weaker." (Tr. on Fr. Tr. c\\. xxiii. ) 

4587. Pruning cherry-trees in general. — Standards. Give only occasional pruning, to reform or 
remove any casual irregularity from cross-placed or very crowded branches ; and take away all cankery 
and decayed wood. 

4588. Wall-trees. " A summer pruning, to commence in May or June, is necessary to regulate the 
shoots of the same year. Disbud the superfluous and fore-right' shoots ; or if they have been suffered to 
spring, pinch or cut them off, with such as are disorderly. Retain a competent supply of some of the best 
well-placed side and terminal shoots, to remain for selection at the winter pruning. Nail or lay in the 
reserve close to tiie wall, at their full length, and so train them all summer. The winter pruning may be 
performed at the fall of the leaf, or at any time in moderate weather till February or March. It comprises 
a regulation both of the old and young wood. Carefully preserve the sound productive branches and 
bearers in tneir full expansion ; and reduce or remove such only as are irregular in growth, too crowded, 
unfruitful, decayed, or cankery. Any branches extending out of bounds, prune in to some good lateral 
shoot or fruit-bud. According to the time the bearers have already lasted, look to some promising shoots, 
for successors to those which may first wear out. To fill immediate vacancies, retain .select shoots of last 
year, and the year before, with uniformly a leader to the advancing branch where there is room, and 
with lateral shoots in any open or unproductive space near the origin of the branch, to be trained as 
bearers between the main branches. Some cut superfluous fruit-shoots clean away ; others leave a 
sprinkling of short stubs, cut very short if fore-right. The new laterals and terminals are to be trained in 
at full length, as far as room will permit. They will come into bearing the first and second year. lu 
pruning cherry-trees in general, be careful to preserve the small clustering fruit-spurs, except where in 
wall-trees any bid spurs project considerably, and assume a rugged disorderly appearance ; cut such clean 
cut smoothly." 

4589. Pruning the morello. " The morello cherry bears principally on the shoots of last year, the fruit 
proceeding immediately from the eyes of the shoots ; and bears but casually, and in a small degree on close 
spurs formed on the two-year-old wood, and scarcely ever on wood of the third year. Therefore, both in 
tlie summer and winter pruning, leave a supply of last year's shoots, on all the brandies, from the origin 

3 A "4 



728 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part Hi. 



to the extremity of the tree, for next year's bearers ; cutting out past bearers to make room. It Is plain 
that the morellb ought to have no stubs left with a view to spurs, and all fore-right shoots ought to be 
disbudded while young. To leave a convenient space for young wood, train the present bearers six inches 
apart ; lay in between each of these one young shoot for bearing next year, which will make the promis- 
cuous distance three inches." 

4590. Underwood {Ceded. Mem. i. 427.) has often observed, when the branches of cherry-trees are laid 
in too near to one another, or are crossed by branches of the same kind, or by plum-tree branches, as is 
sometimes the case, that although there be abundance of blossom, yet there is no crop, even in good 
seasons. On examining the blossom, produced on such crowded shoots, he found, that in fifty flowers, 
there were not above two styles, of course no fruit could be expected. By not laying in the branches so 
close, and by removing all superfluous summer shoots, more light and air was admitted, and he had, in 
consequence, plentiful crops. 

4591. Renovating old or decayed trees. Proceed as in renovating the plum. 

4592. Trotection from birds. " As cherries, in a ripening state, are frequently attacked by birds, it is 
advisable to have choice wall-trees or espaliers defended with large nets in due time. Old fishing-nets 
may also be spread over the branches of dwarf standards. To protect other standard trees, let scarecrows 
and clap-boards be put up in terrorem.'''' 

4593. Gathering the fruit. Use the hand, taking hold of the fruit-stalk, in gathering from thewall, and 
the cherry-gatherer, in gathering, from distant branches of high standards. 

4594. Insects, diseases. Sec. \s'a.\\ cherry-trees are often infested with the red spider, but standards are 
generally not much injured by insects. Naismith says, " our cherry-trees, both in tlie open air, and on 
the natural walls, particularly the tops of the young shoots, are much attacked with a small black insect, 
provincially called the black beetle. The remedy I have found most effectual for their destruction, is, a 
mixture of pitch, with one sixteenth part of powdered orpiment, one sixteenth part cf sulphur, dissolved 
over a slow fire in an earthen pipkin, until they be well incorporated ; when cold, divide it into small 
pieces, about the size of a hen's egg, and burn it under the trees with damp straw, directing the smoke as 
much as possible where the insects are most numerous. In an hour afterwards (if the state of the fruit 
will admit) give the trees a good washing with the garden-engine, which generally clears off the half- 
dead beetles, and prevents the spreading of the red spider." {Caled. Mem. ii. 90.) 



Sect. HI. Berries. 

4.595. Of th^ cultivated berries the gooseberry is the most useful species in Britain, in 
which it is grown in far greater perfection than in any other country ; next to the goose- 
berry is the currant, valuable as affording wine ; besides these are included the mulberry, 
raspberry, strawberry, barberry, and elderberry. 

SuBSECT. 1. Black, or Garden Mulberry. — Moms nigra, L. (JSlackw. t. 126.) 
Moncccia Tetrandria, L. and Urticece, J. Murier, Fr. ; Maulbeerhaum, Ger. ; and 
Mora, Ital. 

4596. The black mulberry is a middle-sized tree, with a whitish bark, and broad, sub- 
quinquelobate, bluntish, and rugged leaves. It has generally male flowers or catkins, on 
the same tree with the fruit, which is a turbinate berry. Young trees from seed. Professor 
Martyn and Knight observe, often show nothing but male flowers for several years, and 
yet afterwards produce also female flowers, and become fruitful. The fruit of seedling- 
trees, it is said, is the largest and best flavored. The black miulberry is a native of Persia, 
and it is supposed was brought to Eui'ope by the Romans, as Pliny mentions two varie- 
ties. It will not live in the open air in several parts of Sweden, and is treated as a wall- 
tree in the north of Germany. It is mentioned by Tusser, in 1573, and was cultivated 
by Gerrard, in 1596. In some of the old kitchen-gardens near London, there are trees 
of a very great age, which are very healthy and fruitful. Bradley says, that most of 
these were planted in the time of James the First, who attempted unsuccessfully to set up 
a silk manufacture in England ; but the species on the leaves of which silk-worms are 
fed, is the white mulberry [Morus alba), whose fruit is not of any value. Forsyth men- 
tions " four large mulberry-trees as still standing on the site of an old kitchen-garden, 
now part of the pleasure-ground at Sion House, which the late Duke of Northumberland 
used to say were about three hundred years old." The mulberry is remarkable for putting 
out its leaves late, so that when they appear, which is generally in IMay, with the leaves of 
the common ash-tree, the gardener may take it for granted that all danger from frost is 
over. There is a curious tree formed by two stems proceeding from a fallen trunk on the 
site of the garden of the Abbey of St. Augustine at Canterbuiy, which must at least be 
300 years old, probably much older. (^Neill, in Hort. Tour, &c. p. 13.) 

4597. Use. The fruit is brought to the dessert, and recommends itself by its highly 
aromatic flavor, and abundant subacid juice. It is very wholesome, cooling, and rather 
laxative. Like the strawberry, it does not undergo the acetous fermentation, and there- 
fore may be safely eaten by gouty and rheumatic persons. An agreeable wine is made 
from the juice ; a syrup is obtained from the unripe berries, which is used as a gargle in 
cases of sore throat ; and the bark of the tree is a vermifuge. 

4598. Varieties. Only one variety of the black is mentioned by Miller, with palmate leaves and smaller 
fruit. 

4599. Propagation. By seed, layers, cuttings, or grafting. The first is the least advisable mode, unless 
for stocks to inarch upon, because, though some affirm the fruit of seedlings to be the largest, yet the plants 
are very long of coming into bearing. 

4600. By Layers. " These will generally take root sufficiently the first year to bear separating from the 
parent tree, and should then be planted in a nursery, and trained up with single stems. In'four years they 
will be fit to plant out where they are to remain. They should be planted at a proper distance to admit the 



Book I. 



BLACK, OR GARDEN MULBERRY. 



729 



sun and air, as tlie fruit, when the trees are too close, is very apt to turn mouldy ; they should also be 
sheltered from the east, north, and west winds." Knight lays parts of the bearing branches of old trees, in 
pots raised to these branches upon poles. Wood of any age will do, and the plants afford fruit the second 
or third year. 

■kSOl. ily cuttings. In raising mulberries from cuttings, choose the former year's shoots, having one joint 
of the two years' old wood. Plant them in autumn, if fine weather, or in the month of March, in rows nine 
inches apart, and at the distance of two inches in tiie rows, leaving only two or three buds above ground : 
mulch tlie ground with leaves or dung well rotted, to keep it moist, and the plants will require little water- 
ing. If they succeed well, they may, next season, be transplanted into a nursery, and treated as directed 
for layers. These young trees, while they remain in the nursery, should be transplanted every three or four 
years. Miller says, mulberry cuttings will also strike well if planted on a hot- bed in spring. 

4602. Ktugfct failed in raising cuttmgs on a hot-bed in spring, but was very successful by the following 
process. He cut vigorous shoots from the trees in NoVember, and formed them into cuttings of about five 
inches long, each consisting of about two parts of two years' old wood, and one part of yearling wood. 
They were intended to be put in pots, and the bottom of each cutting was cut so much a-:lope, that its sur- 
face might be nearly parallel with that of the bottom of the pot in v/hich it was to be placed. " The cuttings 
were then placed in the common ground, under a south wall, and so deeply immersed in it, that one bud 
only remained visible above its surface ; and in this situation they remained till April. At this period the 
buds were much swollen, and the upper ends of the cuttings appeared similar to those of branches which had 
been shortened in the preceding autumn, and'oecome incapable of transmitting any portion of the ascend- 
ing fiuid. The bark at the lower ends had also begun to emit those processes, which usually precede the 
production of roots. The cuttings were now removed to the pots, to which they had been previously 
fitted, and placed in a moderate hot-bed, a single bud only of each cutting remaining visible above the 
mould, and that being partially covered ; and in this situation they vegetated with so much vigor, and 
emitted roots so abundantly, that I do not think one cutting in a hundred would fail with proper atten- 
tion. The mould I employed was the alluvial and somewhat sandy loam of a meadow, which was 
sparingly supplied with water ; and the plants, till they had become sufficiently rooted, were shaded during 
bright weather." 

•1603. In Spain and India, as Townsend and Tenant inform us, the white or silk-worm mulberry is al- 
ways propagated by cuttings, three or four being planted together, so as to grow up into a bush. 

46(4. Bt/ suckers. Mulberry-trees, as well as most others so propagated, are longer of coming into bear- 
ing, than those raised in any other way but by seed. The plants of this tree, raised from bearing branches, 
ha've entire heart-shaped leaves, but those obtained from suckers or seeds present deeply divided or half- 
winged leaves. 

4o<Jo. Bi/ grafting. Knight having planted some young mulberry-trees in pots, raised them to the bear- 
ing branches of old trees, and grafted them by approach. The young grafts bore fruit the third year, and 
continued annually productive. This tree succeeds very ill bv the common mode of independent' grafting. 
iHort. Trans. \.m.'\ 

4606. Soil. The tree, Miller observes, delights in a rich light earth, and where there is depth of soil, as 
in most of the old kitchen-gardens about London. In a very stitF soil, or on shallow ground, whether of 
clay, chalk, or gravel; the trunk and branches are commor.ly covered with moss, and the little fruit pro- 
duced is small, ill tasted, and ripens late. Abercrombie says, the mulberry thrives well in a deep sandy 
loam, and will succeed in any fertile mellow ground, having a free situation in the full sun. 

4607. Site. The mulberry is generally gro-mi as a standard or half standard, sometimes 
as espaliers, dwarfs, or -u-all-trees. A single young plant does not afford much fruit; but 
one full-grown and healthy, will afford more than is sufficient for the supply of a large 
family. Miller recommends planting in a situation defended from the strong south and 
nortli-west winds, in order to preserve the fruit from being blown off ; but at the same 
time to keep them at such a distance from trees or buildings, as not to keep off the sua, 
for where the fruit has not the benefit of Iris rays to dissipate the morning dev,-s early, it 
will turn mouldy and rot upon the trees. The nurseries, and especially those at Paris, 
afford large standard trees of five or six years' growth, which come into beaiing the year 
after removal. Those are in general to be made choice of in preference to raising the 
tree from cuttings, or inarching. In orchards they may be planted thirty or thirty-five 
feet from otlier trees, and twenty feet apart on walls or espaliers ; dwarfs may be planted 
fifteen feet apart, and in each case temporary fruit-trees may be introduced between. 

4608. Forsyth recommends planting mulberries in grass orchards^and pleasure-grounds, because as the 
finest of the fruit, when ripe, frequently drops, it can be picked up w-'ithout receiving any injury. Another 
reason for planting these trees on lawns or in orchards is, that, when full-grown, they are too large for a 
kitchen-garden. Abercrombie adds, " so nice is the criterion of perfect ripeness, that berries falling with- 
out damage are superior to those gathered. Besides, a grass surface harmonises best with trees of magni- 
tude, and increases the beauty of a rural scene." 

4609. JVilliams experienced, that the fruit might be much improved in size and flavor by training the 
trees against a south or west wall. " The standard mulberry," he says, " receives great injury by being 
planted on grass-plots with the view of preserving the fruit when it fafls spontaneously. No tree perhaps 
receives more benefit from the spade and the dunghill than the mulberry ; it ought, therefore, to be fre- 
quently dug about the roots, and occasionally assisted with manure. The ground under the tree should be 
kept free from weeds throughout the summer, particularly when the fruit is ripening, as the reflected light 
and heat from the bare surface of the soil is thus increased; more especially if the end branches are kept 
pruned, so as not to bower over too near to, and shade, the ground. The fruit is also very fine if the tree 
is trained as an espalier, within the reflection of a south wall or other building. If a wooden trellis were 
constructed with the same inclination as the roof of a forcing-house, fronting the south, and raised about 
six feet from the ground, leaving the soil with the same inchnation as the trellis, a tree trained on it would 
receive the solar influence to great advantage, and would probably ripen its fruit much better than a 
standard." [Hort. Trans, ii. 92.) 

4610. Knight concurs with Williams as to the advantages of planting the tree against a south wall in cold 
situations, adding, that "it affords an exception to ail, or almost all, other fruits, to which the wall gives 
increased bulk and beauty, at the expense of richness and flavor." {Hart. Tra?is. iii. 66.) 

4611. Mode of bearing. " The mulberry produces its fruit chiefly on little shoots of 
the same year, which arise on last year's wood, and on spurs from the two-year-old wood ; 
in both stages, mostly at the end of the shoots and branches." 

4612. Pruning. Miller and Forsyth agree in saying there is no occasion to prune standards farther than to 
tliin out irregular crossing branches, and never to shorten the young wood, on which the fruit is produced. 



730 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



4613. Fruning wall-trees and espaliers. " Cut so as to bring in a partial succession of 
new wood every year, and a complete succession once in two years: taking the old barren 
wood out, as may be necessary. In the winter pruning, lay in the reserved branches and 
shoots at six or seven inches' distance." 

4614. WiUiams observes, that the trained mulberry requires some nicety in pruning, otherwise it will 
not bear fruit. " The following method has succeeded in my garden for several years past All the an- 
nual shoots, except the fore-right, are neatly trained to the wall, and these last must be left to grow till 
towards midsummer, and then be shortened about one third of their growth to admit hght to the leaves 
beneath. By the end of August the fore-right shoots will have ad%'anced again, so as to obstruct the light, 
and they must then be shortened nearer to the wall than before. In the month of March, or beginning 
of April, the ends of the terminal shoots should be pruned away down to the first strong bud that does not 
stand fore-right, and the front shoots which were pruned in August, must also be shortened down to two 
or three eyes. If trained after this method, the tree will afford fruit the third year; when the manage- 
ment of the fore-right shoots must be somewhat dilFerent. These should now be shortened at the end of 
the month of June or beginning of July, so as to leave one leaf only beyond the fruit, the terminal shoots 
being nailed to the wall as before, and left without any summer pruning ; the fore-rights will not advance 
any further, as their nutriment will go into the fruit, which, when quite ripe, becomes perfectly black, 
very large, and highly saccharine." 

4615. Knight remarks {Hort. Tr. iii. 63.), that the mode recommended by WiDiams may suit the ex- 
tremely fertile soil and climate of Pitmaston. " But in cold situations (and it is chiefly in such that the 
mulberry-trce will be found to deserve a place on the south wall,) little fruit will be produced, and that 
wiU ripen but ill, unless the bearing wood be brought closely into contact with the wall; and the great 
width of the leaves, and vigorous habit of the tree, present some diificulties to the cultivator, when this 
mode of training and pruning is adopted. It v/illbe found necessary to diminish the luxuriant growth of 
the tree, and at the same time to increase its disposition to bear fruit. Such effects may, however, be 
readily produced by several diffbrent means ; by destroying a small portion of the bark, in a line extending 
round the trunk or large branches, or ringing, by tight and long-continued ligatures, or by training the 
bearing branches almost perpendicularly downwards. I have adopted the last-mentioned method, because 
it greatly increases the disposition in the tree to bear fruit, without injuring its general health, and be- 
cause it occasions a proper degree of vigor to be every where almost equally distributed." 

4616. Season for pruning. " As the blossom-buds of the mulberry-tree cannot be readily distinguished 
from others in the winter, the best period for pruning is when the blossoms first become visible in the 
sprmg. Pinch off every barren shoot which is not wanted to cover the wall, and stop every bearing 
shoot, under similar circumstances, at the third or fourth leaf Williams has correctly stated, that the 
bud immediately below the point, at which a bearing or other branch is pinched off, usually affords fruit in 
the following year." [Knight, in Hort. Trcns. iii. 63.) The mulberry succeeds better than any other tree 
when trained downwards {fig. 494.), either horizontally and drooping (a), or in the stellate manner (6). 

434 





4617. Renovating old rmdhemj-trees. Miller, Forsyth, and Knight, agree tliat this mav be done with 
trees of almost any age, by removing part of the branches ; or by completely heading down,' and renewing 
the soil by fresh mould enriched by dung. 

4618. Taking the crop. " The most forward berries attain maturity about the end of August ; and 
there is a succession of ripening fruit on the same tree for about a month or six weeks ; the ripening ber- 
ries gradually change from a reddish to a black color, and should be gathered accordingly for immediate 
use ; this delicate fruit will not keep good off the tree above a day or two." Coke and Knight have had 
mulberries from wall and espalier trees in gathering from Jvdy "to the end of October. [Hort. Trans. 
vol. iii. 394.) 

4619. Forcing the mulberry. Knight observes, that " the mulberrj' is a much finer fruit when ripened 
under glass, in the north of Herefordshire, than in the open air ; and in the still colder parts of England 
it is probably the only means by which it can be ripened at alL The culture of this fruit, by me, under 
glass, has been confined to plants growing in pots ; but I am not acquainted with any species'of fruit-tree 
which, under such circumstances, produces more abundantly, or which requires less care. Its blossoms 
set equally well in different degrees of heat, and the same "continued temperature which will ripen the 
earlier varieties of the grape in the end of July, wU afford perfectly ripe mulberries early in June ; rnd a 
tree of the latter species, when fully loaded with fruit, presents at least as agreeable an'object to the eye 
as many plants which are cultivated as ornaments only. It is not subject, under common care, to any 
disease or injury, except the attacks of the red spider ; and as the foliage and growing fruit of the mul- 
berry-tree are not at all injured by being wetted every evening with clear water, the red spider can never 
prove a very formidable enemy." [Hort, Trans, ii.) 

SuBSECT. 2. Barberry. — Berhens vulgaris, L. (Eng. Bat. 49.) Hexan. Dig. L. and 
Berberide<B, J. E}nne Vinette, Fr. ; Berberitzen, Ger. ; and Berbero, Ital. 

4620. The barberry is a branchy prickly shrub, rising to the height of eight or ten feet, 
with ash-colored bark, yellow inside. The flowers appear in pendulous racemes towards 
the ends of the branches ; the corolla, yellow ; the berries at first green, but of a fine red 
when ripe. The flowers appear in May with a cowslip odor ; and the fruit, which is of an 
acid flavor, ripens in September. It is a native of the eastern countries, and also of most 
parts of Europe, and is found in woods, coppices, and hedges in England, especially in a 
chalky soil. It is generally supposed that the Puccinia, a fungus which closes up the epi- 
dermis of the leaves of corn crops, and appears on their surface like rust, is generated by 
the jEcidium berberides, an insect which inhabits the barberry. (Sir J. Banks on Blight, &c.) 

4621. Use. The fruit is used for preserving, candying, and pickling, at well as for 
garnishing dishes ; the plant is also an ornamental shrub, both when in flower and in 
fimit. 



Book I. 



ELDER, GOOSEBERRY. 



731 



4622. Varieties. Those most esteemed for their fruit are the following, viz. 



Red barberry without stones ; which has 
an asrresable flavor when full ripe. It 
Is only found without stones when the 
plant has attained considerable age, 
and is on a poor soil. 



White barberry. (Poit. it Turp, Fr. 
t.51.) 

Black sweet ; which is the tenderest of 
them, and should be planted in a warm 
situation. 



Common red with stones. (Diiliam. i p. 
152. et tab ) This is planted more for 
ornament than use, on accoimt of it* 
beautiful red berries. 
Purple-fruited. (Poit. et Turp.Fr. t. 59. 

462-3. Propagation. " All the varieties are propagated commonly by suckers, also by cuttings and layers 
of the young branches, and occasionally by grafting j the common red sort is also raised by seed; each of 
- which methods of propagation may be performed in the spring j that by suckers and layers may be effected 
also in autumfr." 

4G24. Soil and final planting. The barberry prefers a light dry soil. One or two plants may be planted 
in a complete orchard, and trained as standards ; but where the shrubbery is the site, it may be allowed 
to grow as a bush or shrub. " According to the nature of the ground, plant either at any time from a.u- 
tumn to spring, or only in the spring ; the plants may be already furnished with a head pretty well ad- 
vanced, if thought proper ; allow them square distances of frrm fifteen to thirty feet." 

4625. Mode of bearing and pruning. " The barberry produces its fruit at the sides of the branches 
in small loose bunches : it bears both on young and old wood, chiefly toward the extremities. The 
branches should not be shortened, except the design be to force out new wood ; permit the head to extend 
freely ; and give only occasional pruning, to keep it in a pretty round form, open in the middle ; cutting 
out weak, luxuriant, crossing, superfluous, and decayed branches ; reduce also long ramblers, and trim 
up low stragglers, also lateral shoots on the stem, and eradicate all root-suckers." 

4626. Taking the crop. " As a proportion of the berries ripen in the course of September, they will 
afford occasional gatherings for present use; and as they will be wholly ripe in October, all that are 
wanted for domestic supply should be then pulled ; always pick them in bunches." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Elder. — Sambucus nigra, la. (^Eng. Bot. 476.) Pent. Trig. L. and. Caj)ri- 
folece, J. Sureau, Fr. ; Holhinderbaum, Ger. ; and Sambiico, Ital. 

4627. The common elder is a bushy tree of twelve or sixteen feet in height, much 
branched, and covered with a smooth grey bark, becoming rough on old stems. The 
leaves are imequally pinnate. The flowers appear in terminating cymes, and are suc- 
ceeded by globular blackish-purple berries, mawkishly sv/eet. It flowers in May, and 
the berries ripen in July. The whole plant has a narcotic smell, and it is not prudent, 
we are told, to sleep under its shade. It is a native of Britain, and many other parts of 
Europe, and of Africa, Japan, &c. It is common in damp woods and hedges, and is 
sometimes introduced in cottage gardens aud plantations for the fruit, and in forest 
plantations, exposed to the sea air, as a nurse plant. 

4628. Use. The fruit is in demand in many places, but especially in London and 
the principal English towns, for making elder wine of the expressed juice ; a powerful, 
warming, and enlivening article for the cottager. The tree, professor Martyn observes, 
is a whole magazine of physic to rustic practitioners, nor is it quite neglected by more 
regular ones. An excellent healing ointment is made of the green inner bark, which is 
also purgative in moderate, and diuretic in small doses. A decoction of the flowers pro- 
motes expectoration and perspiration, and they give a peculiar flavor to vinegar. The 
flowers are reported to be fatal to turkeys, and the berries to poultry in general. No 
quadruped will eat the leaves of this tree ; notwithstanding it has its own phalcsna and 
aphis. The wood is used by the turner and mathematical instrument m^aker ; and is made 
into skewers for butchers, tops, angling rods, and needles for weaving nets. 

4629. Varieties. Miller mentions several, but those cultivated for their fruit are 
chiefly the white and black. The scarlet and green berried may also be used like the 
black, and are very ornamental trees in the shrubbery. 

4530. Site and soil. " As the tree v/ill grow any where, either in open or shady situations, it may be 
planted in any out-ground or waste spot, in single standards or in rows, to assist in forming boundary 
fences. Trees planted in the hedge order, if suffered to grow up untrimraed, will produce abundance of 
berries for use." 

4531. Propagation and rearing. " The elder is raised by cuttings of the young shoots in the spring, 
and by seed in the autumn. Select for cuttings some strong young shoots of last summer, cut into lengths 
of one foot, and thence to three feet or more : these may be planted either where it is intended the plants 
should remain, or in a nursery for a year's growth. Insert them from six to fifteen inches into the 
ground, according to their length ; they will soon strike root; and will shoot strongly at top the same 
year. Train those designed for standards with a single stem from three to five feet high ; and those 
for hedges, with branches out from the bottom. To raise this tree from seed : sow in autumn, October, 
or November, or later in mild weather, or soon irl the spring, either for a hedge, in drills, where the 
plants are to remain ; or in a bed or border for planting out when of one or two years' growth." 

4632. Final planting. "Standards maybe planted from ten to twenty feet apart. They should be al- 
lowed to shoot out above to form a branchy head, nearly in their natural order : in which they will soon 
become plentiful bearers. For hedge-planting, insert cuttings or year-old plants into the sides or tops of 
banks or ditches, or other suitable boundary lines, a foot asunder. Permit them to branch out from the 
bottom ; and where they are designed for full fruiting, merely cut in the sides a little regular below, 
leaving them to run up above in branchy growth, for producing large crops of berries." 

4633. Taking the crop. " The berries ripen in perfection for the purpose of making wine, about the 
middle and end of September, and in October, and should then be gathered in bunches." {Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Gooseberry. — Ribes Grossularia, and R. Uva-crispa, L. ( Eng. Bot. 
1292. 2057.) Pent. Monog. L. and Cacti, J. Groseille a maquereau, Fr. ; Stachel- 
beerstrauch, Ger. ; and Uva-spino, Ital. 

4634. The gooseberry in YiQdxnont, where it is found wild, and the berries eatable, 
but astringent and neglected, is called griselie. Some derive our name gooseberry from 
gorseberry, or the resemblance of the bush to gorse ; others, as Professor Martyn, from 
its being used as a savice with young or green geese. Gerrard says, it is called feaberry 
(feverberry) in Cheshire , and it has the same name in Lancashire and Yorkshire. In 



732 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Norfolk this term is abbreviated to feabes, or, as they pronounce it, fapes. Carberry is 
another British name for this fruit. The gooseberiy-bush is a low, branching, prickly 
shrub, with trilobate sub-pubescent leaves, one-flowered nodding peduncles, and pen- 
dulous berries, hairy or smooth. It is a native of several parts of Europe, and abounds 
in the Vallais in copsewoods, where it prodtices a small, green, haiiy, high-flavored fruit. 
In England it is naturalised in various places on old walls, ruins, and in the woods and 
hedges about Darlington. It is cultivated in greater perfection in Lancashire than in 
any other part of Britain ; and next to Lancashire, the climate and treatment of the 
Lothians seem to suit this fruit. In Spain and Italy the fruit is scarcely known. In 
France it is neglected and little esteemed. In some parts of Germany and Holland the 
moderate temperature and humidity of climate seems to suit the fruit ; but in no country 
is its' size and beauty to be compared with that produced in Lancashire, or from the 
Lancashire varieties cultivated with care in the more temperate and humid districts of 
Britain. Neill observes, that when foreigners witness our Lancashire gooseberries, they 
are ready to consider them as forming quite a different kind of fruit. Happily this 
wholesom.e and useful fruit is to be found in almost every cottage garden in Britain ; 
and it ought to be considered a part of every gardener's duty to encourage the introduc- 
tion of its most useful varieties in these humble enclosures. In Lancashire, and some 
parts of the adjoining counties, almost every cottager who has a garden, cultivates the 
gooseberry, with a view to prizes given at what are called gooseberry-prize meetings ; of 
these there is annually published an account, with the names and weiglit of the success- 
ful sorts, in what is called the Manchester Gooseberry-Book. The prizes vary from 10s. 
to £5 or £10. The second, third, to the sixth and tenth degrees of merit, receiving 
often proportionate prizes. There are meetings held in spring to " make up," as the 
term is, the sorts, the persons, and the conditions of exhibition ; and in August to weigh 
and taste the fruit, and determine the prizes. In the gooseberry-book for 1819 is an 
account of 136 meetings; the largest berry produced was the top-sawyer seedling, a 
red fruit, w^eighing 26 dwts. 17 grs. Forty-six red, thirty-three yellow, forty-seven 
green, and forty-one white sorts were exhibited, and fourteen new-named seedlings, 
which had been distinguished at former meetings, stated as " going out," or about to 
be sold to propagators. 

4635. Use. The fruit was formerly in little esteem ; but it has received so much 
improvement, that it is now considered very valuable for tarts, pies, sauces, and creams, 
before being ripe, and when at maturity it forms a ricli dessert fruit for three months ; and 
is preserved in sugar for the same purpose, and in water for the kitchen. Unripe goose- 
berries can be preserved in bottles of water against winter ; the bottles are filled with 
berries close corked and well sealed ; they are then placed in a cool cellar till wanted. 
By plunging the bottles, after being corked, into boiling water for a few minutes, 
(heating them gradually to prevent cracking,) the berries are said to keep better. [Neill.) 

4636. Varieties. The gooseberry is mentioned by Turner in 1573. Parkinson enumerates eight va- 
rieties : the small, great, and long common, three red, one blue, and one green. Ray mentions only the 
pearl-gooseberry ; but Rea has the blue, several sorts of yellow, the white Holland, and the green. 
Miller only says, there are several varieties obtained from seed, most of them named from the persons 
who raised them ; but as there are frequently new ones obtained, it is needless to enumerate them. The 
present lists of London nurserymen contain from 80 to 100 names ; but those of some of the Lancashire 
growers above 300. Forsyth, in 1800, mentions ten sorts as common ; and adds a list of forty-three new 
sorts grown in Manchester. The following may be considered established varieties, and such as merit 



Red. 

Old ironmonger 
Early black 
Dannson, or dark red 
Large rough red 
Red walnut 
Warrington 
Smooth red 
Hairy red 
Red champagne 



Nutmeg 
Captain 

WUmot's early red. 

Grem. 
Green Gascoigne 
Green -vralnut 
AVhite Smith 
Green globe 
Green gage. 



Yellow. 
Great amber 
Globe amber 
Great mogul 
Hairy globe 
Golden drop 
Honeycomb 
Sulphur 
Conqueror 
Yellow champagne 



Golden knap 
Royal sovereign 
Tawny. 

White. 
Large crystal 
White-veined 
Roval George 
A^Tiite Dutch 
Wliite walnut. 



4637. Selection of sorts. " It must be admitted," Neill observes, " that although the large gooseberries 
make a fine appearance on the table, they are often deficient in flavor when compared with some of 
smaller size. Many of them have very thick strong skins, and are not eatable unless thoroughly ri- 
pened. Some of the large sort, however, are of very good quality, such as the red cnam.pagne and the 
green walnut. Among these also Wilmot's early red deserves further notice. It was raised by Wilmot, 
at Isleworth, in 1804, and has been cultivated by him very extensively on account of its valuable proper- 
ties ; being early ripe, of excellent flavor, and extremely productive. It usually ripens from the middle 
to the end of June. For culinary use in the month of May it is larger and beiter than most others, the 
skin not being tough, but the whole berry melting to a flne consistence." Forsyth very judiciously re- 
commends cultivating the early and late sorts, in order to prolong the season of this fruit. ' In Lancashire, 
the Warrington or Manchester red, which is an improved variety of the old ironmonger, is esteemed 
the best dessert fruit ; and the shoots growing upright, the shrub occupies less horizontal space than most 
varieties. The walnut red they consider the best sort for preserving. The best mode to obtain a com- 
plete collection is to send to a Lancashire nurseryman, stating whether the object desired be an assort- 
ment of large showy sorts, a numerous variety, or a selection of the most useful sorts : but all the sorts 
worth having as dessert or kitchen fruit, are in the London and Edinburgh nurseries. 

4638. Projmgation. Tlie gooseberry may be propagated by all the modes applicable 
to trees or shubs ; even by pieces of the roots ; but the mode by cuttings, is usually 
adopted for continuing varieties, and that by seeds for procuring them. 



Book I. 



GOOSEBERRY. 



733 



4639. By seeds. As far as we know, the scientific mode of impregnating one variety with anotlier has 
not been applied to this fruit. In general, the seed of some choice variety thoroughly ripe is taken and 
sown in autumn or early in spring, in beds or pots of rich liglit mellow earth : when the plants are 
a year old they are planted out in nursery rows, to be cultivated and trained there a year or two ; in ge- 
neral they will bear the third year. 

4640. By cuttings. Miller says, the best season for planting gooseberry-cuttings is in autumn, just 
before their leaves begin to fall. The cuttings should be taken from bearing shoots, rather than those ^ 
gourmands which issue from the main stem. Cut them to such a length as the strength and ripeness of ' 
the wood will bear, and cut off'all the buds excepting three, or at most four at top, and train the plants 
with a single stem of nine inches, or a foot high, trom the top of which the branches should radiate up- 
wards at an angle of 40^, or better if 45«, Haynes advises taking off cuttings in July, when the fruit is 
on the tree, in order to make sure of the sorts. He says, by immediate planting, watering, and shadmg, 
as good plants are produced as from ripe wood-cuttings. {Tr. on the Gooscben y, &c. p. 92.) 

4641. Soil and site. Any good garden-soil, on a dry bottom and well manured, will 
suit the gooseberry. That which is soft and moist produces the largest fruit. The 
situation should not be under the drip of trees over-much shaded or confined, otherwise 
the fruit will be small, ill flavored, and the plants apt to mildew. Forsyth says, goose- 
berries should be dunged every year, or at least have a good coat of dung once in two 
years. Haynes recommends a mixture of peat and loam well manured, and a shaded 
situation. The last he proposes to effect by planting among his compartments of goose- 
berries, rows of Jerusalem artichokes in the direction of east and west. 

4642. Final planting. " The season for planting gooseberries is any time during open weather from 
October till March. When trees are procured from the public nurseries choose such as are of some ad- 
vanced size, about three years' growth, with pretty full heads, for immediate plentiful bearers. Let the 
general supply be in standard bushes, and planted principally in the kitchen-garden, in single rows, along 
the boundary ed^es of the main compartments, or outward borders, from six to eight feet apart j or some 
may be planted in cross rows, to subdivide extensive compartments. When the object is to raise large 
quantities of fruit, plantations are made in continued parallel rows, eight or ten feet asunder, by six feet 
in the row. It would be ehgibie to plant a few choice sorts against south and other sunny walls or pa- 
ling, for earUer and larger fruit; and on north v/alls, to ripen late in succession." {Abercro7nbie.) 

4643. Forsyth says, " The market-gardeners about London plant them in rows, from eight to ten 
feet apart from row to row, and six feet from plant to plant in the rows. In small gardens 1 would re- 
commend planting them in a compartment by themselves, at the distance of six feet between the rows, 
and four feet froin plant to plant ; or you may plant them round the edges of the compartments, about 
three feet from the path ; you will then have the ground clear for cropping, and a man, by setting one 
foot on the border, can gather the gooseberries without injuring the crop." 

4(544. 'Neill says, " In some places gooseberry-trees, on the sides of the borders, are trained to a single 
tall stem, which is tied to a stake : this, though six or eight feet high, occasions scarcely any shade on 
the border, and it does not occupy much room, nor exclude air ; while, at the same time, the stem be- 
comes close hung with berries, and makes a nleasant appearance in that state." {Ed. Enc. art. Hoi-t. 
\ 161.) 

4645. Maker observes {Hart. Trans, ii. 146), that as " the crop of ripe fruit is often injured, by having 
tlie largest and earliest berries prematurely gathered, whilst green, for tarts, a sufficient number of trees 
of such varieties as are the earliest, should be planted in a separate compartment of the garden, and de- 
voted exclusively to the use of the kitchen, for tarts and sauce." 

4646. Mode of bearing. The gooseberry produces its fruit not only on the shoots of 
last summer, and on shoots two or three years old, but also on spurs or snags arising 
from the elder branches along the sides ; but the former afford the largest fruit. The 
shoots retained for bearers should therefore be left at full length, or nearly so." (Aber.) 

4647. Pruning. " The bushes will require a regulating pruning twice in the year." 

4648. Suminer pruning. "Where any bushes are crowded with cross and water shoots, of the same 
year, shading the fruit from the sun, and preventing the access of air, thin the heart of the plant and 
other tufted parts moderately, pinching off or cutting out close what spray is removed ; but do not touch 
the summer shoots in general." Maher says, " it will greatly contribute to the perfection of the fruit, if 
the very small berries are taken away with a pair of scissors about the middle or end of May ; and these 
small berries will be found quite as good for sauce or gooseberry-cream as the larger." 

4549. Winter pruning. "You may proceed to the winter pruning any time from November until the 
end of February, or until the buds are so swelled that farther delay would endanger their being rubbed 
off in the operation. Cut out the cross shoots and water-shoots of the preceding summer, and the su- 
perfluous among crowded branches. Prune long ramblers and low stragglers to some well placed lateral 
or eye J or if an under-straggler spring very low, cut it away. Of last year's shoots retain a suffi- 
ciency of the best well placed laterals and terminals, in vacant parts, to form successional bearers, and 
to supply the places of unfruitful and decayed old wood, which, as you proceed, should be removed. 
Mostly retain a leading shoot at the end of a principal branch, leaving it either naturally terminal, or 
where the branch would thus be too extended, pruning to some competent lateral within bounds. The 
superfluous young laterals on the good main branches, instead of being taken off clean, may be cut into 
little stubs of one or two eyes ; which will send out fruit-buds and spurs. Of the supply reserved for 
new bearers, a small number will probably require shortening, where too extended, or curvated incom- 
modiously ; leave these from eight to twelve inches in length, according to strength and situation ; those 
of moderate extent and regular growth will require very little shortening, and many none at all. Ob- 
serve, too close cutting, or general shortening, occasions a great superfluity of wood in summer : for the 
multiplied laterals thus forced from the eyes of the shortened branches increase to a thicket, so as to re- 
tard the growth and prevent the full ripening of the fruit : on which account it is an important part of 
pruning to keep the middle of the head open and clear, and to let the occasional shortening of the shoots 
be sparing and moderate. Between the bearing branches keep a regulated distance of at least six inches 
at the extremities, which will render them fertile bearers of good fruit. Some persons, not pruning the 
gooseberry-tree on right principles, are apt to leave the shoots excessively close and tufted, while they 
shorten the whole promiscuously; others sometimes clip them with garden-shears to close round heads; 
in consequence of being pruned in these methods, the bushes shoot crowdedly, full of young wood in 
summer, from which the fruit is always very small, an.d does not ripen freely with full flavor." 

4650. Forsyth says, " Many of the Lancashire sects are apt to grow horizontally, and the branches 
frequently trail on the ground, v/hich renders them liable to be broken by high winds, especially when 
they are loaded with fruit. In that case I would recommend two or three hoops to be put round them, 
to which the branches may be tied, to support them, and prevent their being broken by the wind." 

4651. Jeeves has tried training gooseberries on an arched trellis, in the manner of a bsrceav, or arbor- 
walk. For this purpose, he plants in rows, five feet and a half apart, and the plants three feet distance 
in the row. He choosea the strongest-growing kinds, and trains four branches, at nine inches' distance 



734 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



from each plant, ail they meet at top. The advantages of this plan are, beauty of appearance, fruit not 
splashed by rain, easily gathered, and the ground more readily cultivated. (JBbrf. Trans, vol. iv. p. 194.) 

4652. Taking the crop. " From gooseberries being useful for different purposes, both m a green and m 
a mature state, and from the compass of time afforded by early and late sorts, they are in season and great 
request four or five months in summer, from April till September. The early sorts, on south walls, come 
in for gathering in small green berries, for tarts, &c. in April or early m May, and attam maturity m 
June. From common standard bushes an abundant supply is yielded in I\Iay and June of gooseberries in a 
green state ; and in proportion as part is reserved to ripen, a succession, in full size and maturity, is ob- 
tained in June, July, and August. Some late kinds, either planted in shady situations, or shielded with 
mats from the sun in their ripening state, continue good on the tree till September." 

4653. Prolonging of the crop. In addition to planting' late sorts in shady situations, the bushes, 
•whether standards or trained, may be matted over when the fruit is ripe, and in this way some of the reds, 
as the Warrington, and the thick-skinned yellow sorts, as the Mogul, will keep on the trees till Christmas. 

4654. Suckling. By preparing a very rich soil, and by watering, and the use of liquid manure, shading, 
and thinning, 'the large fruit of the prize cultivator is produced. Not content with watering at root 
and over the top, the Lancashire connoisseur, when he is growing for exhibition, places a small saucer of 
water immediately under each gooseberry, only three or four of which he leaves on a tree. This is 
technically called suckling. He also pinches off a great part of th-e young wood, so as to throw all the 
strength he can into the fruit. 

4655. Accelerating maturity. Hunt tried ringing on half a gooseberry-bush, which half produced ripe 
fruit a week sooner than the other, and twice the usual size. {Hort. Trans, iv. 565.) 

4656. Insects, diseases, &c. The caterpillars of saw-flies {Tenthredmidce, Leach) (Jig. 
495.), of butterflies [Papillce, L.), and of moths {Pha- 
IcencB, L.) are well known and serious enemies to goose- 4 
berries. The larvae of the Tenthredinidce have from 
sixteen to twenty-eight feet ; a round head ; and when 
touched, they roll themselves together. They feed on the 
leaves of the gooseberry, apple, and most fruit-trees, as 
well as roses, and other shrubs and plants. "When full- 
grown, they make sometimes in the earth, and sometimes 
between the leaves of the plant on which they feed, a net- 
work case, which, when complete, is strong and gummy, and in that change to a pupa 
incompleta, which for the most part remains during the winter in the earth. Tlie per- 
fect fly emerges early in the ensuing spring ; its serrated sting is used by the female in 
the manner of a saw, to make incisions in the twigs or stems of plants, where it deposits 
its eggs. The Caledonian Horticultural Society having " requested information respecting 
the best method of preventing or destroying the caterpillar on gooseberries," received 
various communications on the subject, and the following are extracts from such as they 
deemed fit for publication : — 

4657. Gibbs describes the large black, tho green, and the v.hite caterpillars, with his methods of de- 
stroying them. During the winter months, the large black kind may be observed lying in clusters on 
the under parts, and in the crevices of the bushes ; and even at this season (Feb.) I find them in that 
state. In the course of eight or ten days, however, if the weather be favorable, they will creep up in 
the day-time, feed on the buds, and return to their nest during the night. Whenever leaves appear 
upon the bushes they feed upon them till they arrive at maturity, which is generally in the month of 
June ; after which they creep down upon the under sides of the brancljes, where they lodge till the crust 
or shell is formed over them. In July they become moths, and lay their eggs on the under sides of the 
leaves, and of the bark. The produce of these eggs, coming into life during the month of September, 
feed on the leaves so long as they are green, and afterwards gather together in clusters on the under side 
of the branches, and in crevices of the bark, where they remain all the winter, as already said. Winter 
is the most proper time for attacking this sort with success, as their destruction is most eflfectually 
accomplished by the simple operation of pouring a quantity of boiling hot water upon them from a watering 
pan, while no injury is thereby done to the bushes. 

4658. The green sort are at present (Feb.) in the shelly state, lying about an inch under ground. In 
Ajpril they come out small flies, and immediately lay their eggs on the veins and under sides of the leaves. 
These eggs produce young caterpillars in May, v/hich feed on the leaves till June or July, when they cast 
a blackish kind of skin, and afterwards crawl down from the bushes into the earth, where a crust or shell 
grows over them, and in that state they continue till the following April. The only method which I have 
hitherto found effectual in destroying these is, 1st, to dig the ground around the bushes very deep during 
the winter season, by which means the greater part of them are destroyed, or buried too deep ever to 
penetrate to the surface : 2diy, in April, v.'hen the flies make their appearance, to- pick off all the leaves 
on which any eggs are observable ; this is a tedious operation, but may be done by children. If any of the 
enemy should escape both these operations, they will be discernible as soon as they come to life, by their eating 
holes through the leaves, and may then easily be destroyed, without the least injury to the bushes or fruit. 

4659. The white kind, otherwise called borers, are not so numerous as the other kinds, though very de- 
structive; they bore the berry, and cause it to drop off; they preserve themselves dui-ing the winter sea- 
son, in the chrysalis state, about an inch under ground, and become flies nearly at the same time with the 
last mentioned kind ; they lay their eggs on the blossoms, and these eggs produce young catei-pillars in 
May, which feed on the berries till they are full-grown, and then creep down into the earth, where they 
remain for the winter in the shelly state. {Caled. Mem. vol. i.) 

4660. Macmurray, in autumn, pours a little cow-urine around the stem of each bush, as much as suffices 
merely to moisten the ground. The bushes which were treated in this manner remained free of cater- 
pillars for two years ; while those that were neglected, or intentionally passed over, in the same compart>- 
ment, were totally destroyed by the depredations of the insects. A layer of sea-weed laid on in autumn, 
and dug in in spring, had the same effect for one year. {Caled. Mem. vol. i. 95.) 

4661. R. Elliot says, " Take six pounds of black-currant leaves, and as many of elder-leaves, and bjil 
them in twelve gallons of soft water ; then take fourteen pounds of hot lime, and put it in twelve gallons 
of water ; mix them all together ; then wash the infested bushes with the hand-engine ; after that is done, 
take a little hot lime and lay at the root of each bush or tree that has been washed, which completes the 
operation. By these means you will completely destroy the caterpillars, without hurting the foliage of 
the bush or tree in the least. A dull day is to be preferred to any other for washing. When the foliage 
is all off the bushes and trees, wash them over with the hand-engine, to clean them o"f decayed leaves ; for 
this purpose, any sort of water wiU do ; then stir up the surface of the earth all round the roots of the 
bushes and trees, and lay a little hot lime about them to destroy the eggs. This I have never found to fail 
of success since my first trial, six years ago. The above-mentioned proportion of leaves, lime, and water, 




Book I. BLACK CURRANT. 735 

will serve for two acres of ground or more, covered with trees and bushes in the ordinary manner, and 
will cost very little money indeed. The same proportion is to be observed in making a wash for the rest of 
the trees or bushes." 

4662. Machi ay procured some tobacco and soft or black soap, and boiled a quarter of a pound of 
tobacco with one pound of soft soap in about eighteen Scots pints of water, and kept stirring the liquid 
while boiling with a wliisk, in order to dissolve the soap ; this liquor, when milkwarm, or so cool as not 
to hurt the foliage, he applied to the bushes with a hand-squirt in the evening, and in the morning found 
all the ground under the bushes covered over with dead caterpillars. This practice he continued for six 
years, always when he saw any symptoms of the approach of caterpillars. 

4663. Tweedie, in the course of any of the winter months, pares all the earth from under the bushes 
to the depth of about three inches, into a flat ridge betwixt the rows ; and on the first dry day following, 
either treads, beats, or rolls these ridges, and trenches the whole down one and a half or two spades deep, 
observing to tread the foul earth into the bottom of the trench. 

4664. Forst/t/i's method is as follows : " Take some sifted quick-lime and lay it under the bushes ; but 
do not at first let any of it touch the branches or leaves ; then shake each bush suddenly and smartly, and 
the caterpillars will fall into the lime; if the bush be not shaken suddenly, the caterpillars, on being a 
little disturbed, will take so firm a hold as not easily to be shaken oflf! After this is done, sift some of the 
lime over the bushes ; this will drive down those which may have lodged on the branches. The caterpil- 
lars ought to be swept up next day, and the bushes well washed with clear lime-water mixed with urine ; 
this will destroy any caterpillars that may still remain, and also the aphides, if there are any on the bushes." 

4665. Sweet first syringes the plants, and then powders them with quick-lime by hand, so that every leaf 
both above and below is covered with it. This he found destroyed not only gooseberry caterpillars, but 
the black fly on the peach-tree. {Hort. Trans, v. 76.) 

4666. Harrison considers, that in the winter season, "the eggs of the insects are deposited in crevices 
and joints af the tree, also in the ground." In the pruning season, he burns the prunings, and washes the 
trees with a mixture of quick-lime and water, and then casts in powdered lime among the branches ; or, 
instead of this, he washes the trees with twelve gallons of water, half a pound of tobacco, and six ounces of 
black pepper boiled together for half an hour, and used when cold. In the following spring, " just before 
the trees come into bloom," he sprinkles them with lime-water, and throws on them powdered lime, 
spreading some at the roots of the tree. Soon after the berries are set, he smokes the trees with straw 
fires. When summer flies visit the trees, he picks off the leaves on which their eggs are deposited. 
** This," he says, " is readily done, and very effectual." If they increase very rapidly, he uses lime-water 
as in spring. (Tr. on Fr. Tr. 348.) 

4667. Our opinion is, that no reliance is to be placed in powdered hot lime alone, for destroying either 
the insects or their eggs. Hot water, applied in Gibbs's manner ; lime-water, or water and powder of lime, 
in the manner of Elliot and Sweet ; and digging down, as performed by Tweedie, may be of real service : 
but the only effectual plan seems to be that of previously hand-picking; which, however tedious it may 
seem, will often be found a more economical mode than any of the above. Hand-picking, with the spring- 
generated kinds, should commence as soon as the eggs are observed on the under sides of the leaves, of a 
white color, and not thicker than hairs ; the whole leaf may be picked off, or the eg:gs brushed or sponged 
off": with the winter kinds it ought to commence as soon as they leave their nidus in the soil or bark and 
appear on the leaves. 

4668. Preventive treatment. Sprinkling gooseberry and currant bushes with tar-water, prevents the fly 
or moth from settling on the plant to lay its eggs ; this must be done early in the spring, for if done after 
the fruit is set, it will taste of tar. (J. Busch, in Hort. Trans, iv. 568.) 

4669. Forcing. The gooseberry may be forced in pots or boxes placed in pits, or in the peach-house or 
vinery. Hay plants in pots in November, removes to the peach-house in January, and has ripe fruit in 
the end of April, which he sends to table growing on the plants. {Hoj t. Trans, iv. 415.) 

SuBSECT. 5. Mack Currant. — Ribes Nigrum, L. [Eng. Bot. 1291.) Pentand. 
Monog. L. and Cacti, J. GroseUle a fruit noir, or Poivrier, Fr. 

4670. The black currant is an humble shrub, with smooth shoots, strong-smeiJing tri- 
lobate leaves and hairy racemes, with a solitary one-flowered peduncle at the base of the 
raceme. The flowers appear in April, of a greenish- white, and the fruit ripens in June and 
July, and changes from a green to a black color. It is a native of most parts of Eu- 
rope, especially the more northern parts. It abounds in the woods in the north of Rus- 
sia ; and in the subalpine regions of Siberia, where the branches and berries are very large 
and sapid. In Britain, it is found in wet hedges, on the banks of rivers, in alder swamps, 
and sometimes in woods. 

4671. Use. The frilit, which has a peculiar flavor, and disliked by some, is seldom 
brought to the dessert ; but it is eaten in puddings and tarts, and made into jellies, and 
wines. The Russians put the berries into brandy, and the Irish into whiskey, in the same 
way as the English put cherries ; the Russians also ferment the juice with honey, and so 
form a strong and palatable wine. Many cottagers, who cannot afford to mix green tea 
with common bohea, substitute one or two dried leaves of black currant, the flavor pro- 
duced by which few are so acute as to^istinguish from that of a mixture of green and 
black tea. There are no varieties of the black currant. 

4672. Propagation. By cuttings. See Gooseberry. 

4673. Soil and site. A moist soft soil and shady situation, such as is afforded by borders of north ex- 
posure is preferable. Miller says, " The fruit is always best when the plants are placed in an open situ- 
ation, and light loamy soil." 

4674. Final planting. As only a few plants are in general required for private' gardens, these maybe 
placed at the distances recommended for gooseberries, in the margin of a shady border, or against a wall 
of a north exposure. Neill says, it produces most fruit as a standard, but the largest berries when trained 
to a wall. 

4675. Mode of bearing. The black currant bears chiefly on the shoots of the preceding year, and also 
from snags or spurs, which, however, are less abundant, and of smaller size in the black currant than in 
the gooseberry or red currant. 

4676. Pruning. Attend to the general directions giving for pruning gooseberries, observing to depend 
less on spurs than on the preceding year's wood, cutting out the old as it becomes naked and barren, to 
make room for the new. 

4677. Insects and diseases. The black currant is seldom attacked by insects ; though, like the elder- 
tree, it has its own variegated caterpillars, which sometimes reduce it to a state of complete nudity. (4657.) 

4768. Gathering the fruit, jsee Red Currant. 

4679. Forcing. The black currant may be forced in pots like the gooseberry. In Russia this is often 
done for the salce of the fragrance of the leaves. 



736 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Fart III. 



SuBSEOT. 6. Red Currant. — Ribes Ruhrum, L. {Eng. Rot. 1289) Pentaudria Mono- 
gynicij L. and Cacti, J. Groseille d grappes t/' outre mei', Fr. ; Johannisbeere, Ger. ; 
and Uvetta, ItaL 

4680. The red currant is a. low shrub, with smooth branches, doubly serrate, pubes- 
cent leaves, yellowish -green flowers on pendulous racemes, which appear in May, and 
the fruit ripens in June and July. The berries of this shrub, in its wild state, are red ; 
cultivation has produced white and pale-red berried varieties. It is a native of the 
northern parts of Europe, and found in hedges and woods in England. Professor 
Martyn observes, that " the currant does not seem to have been known to the ancient 
Greeks and Romans, as the southern nations of Europe have not even an appro]3riate 
name to it at this day. The old French name groseilles d' outre mer ; and the Dutch, 
beskins overzee, proclaim their having been strangers imported. Our English name of 
currant is evidently from the similitude of the fruit, to that of tlie uva coriuthiaca, the 
small grape of Zante, or the common grocers' corinths, or currants. The red currant 
has been long cultivated in Britain, and very much improved in the size of the bunch and 
berry. 

4681. Use. The fruit is acceptable at the dessert, being of an agreeable acid taste. 
It is much used for jellies, jams, and wines. Forsyth says, it is the most useful of all 
the small fruit, either for tlie table and kitchen, or for preserving, making wine, &c. ; 
and continues longer in succession than any other. According to Withering, the juice 
forms an agreeable acid to punch ; and Professor Martyn says it was a common bever- 
age in Paris in 1763. Its medicinal qualities are similar to those of other subacid 
fruits, allaying thirst, lessening an increased secretion of the bile, and correcting a 
putrid and scorbutic state of the fluids. 

4682. Varieties. These are — 

Common red or wild currant I Champagne large red I Large newwhite Dutch I Large pr.le-red Dutch 

Large red Champagne pale red I (Hook P. L.t.oC.) Gooseberry-leaved. 

Long clustered red | White Dutch | White crystal | 

4683. Propagation and nursery citltnre. The same as in the gooseberry. With a view to obtaining im- 
proved varieties from seed, that indefatigable iiorticulturalist, Knight, procured cuttings, in the year 
1810, of the finest varieties of the red and the white currant, which he planted in pots of very rich 
mould and placed under a south wall, to which the trees were subsequently trained. At tlie end of three 
years, within which period the pots had been as often changed, the trees were first suffered to produce 
blossoms. Tliese were, with the exception of a very small number, removed from the white currant 
trees, as soon as their buds unfolded ; and those which remained were deprived of tlieir stamens, whilst 
immature, and subsequently fertilised by the pollen of the red variety. The seeds thus obtained were 
sowed in pots, as soon as the fruit had become perfectly mature, and were subjected, early in the follow- 
ing spring, to the artificial heat of a forcing-house ; by which means, and by proper subsequent atten- 
tion, the plants grew more than a foot in height in the first season. At two years old, in the year 1816, 
-several of the plants, and, in 1817, the greater part of them, produced fruit of great variety of character^ 
and merits ; but out of about two hundred varieties, only three red and two white appeared to possess 
greater merits than their parents. {Uort. Trans, iii. 88.) 

4684. Soil and site. All the sorts are very hardy, will grov; freely, and bear plentifully almost any 
■ivhere, alike in open and shady situations, by which the fruit may be obtained early, in June and July, 
and prolonged for several months in succession till October. As to soil, the currant generally does well ■ 
in any common garden-ground, well tilled and recruited ; it bears the greater crop in a strong loam, or 
improved clay, somewhat moist ; the earlier in a sandy light mould, which is not poor. Previous to 
planting, the ground should be dug two feet deep. 

4685. Final planting. " The season for planting on a dry soil is any time in open weather, from the 
fall of the leaf till February or March. Plants expected to bear the following summer are best moved in 
October, unless the ground be wet in winter. Allot a competent supply of standard bushes, to be planted 
chiefly in the kitchen-garden, in a single row round the main compartments, or in the outward borders, or 
some in cross rows, to divide extensive compartments. Plant them from five to ten feet distant in the row. 
To raise large supplies, full plantations are formed in parallel rows, with intervals between the rows of eight 
or ten feet, and between the trees in each row of six feet. Where convenient, have also some choice sorts 
trained against walls or palings, of different aspects, to obtain eai-ly and late fruit in perfection : some 
against a south exposure, for early production ; others on east, west, and north walls, for intermediate suc- 
cession and late fruit. Plant them at six, eight, or ten feet distance ; letting them occasionally fill up the 
vacant spaces between other wall-trees. The branches should be allowed to advance from near the bot- 
tom, and be trained in a nearly horizontal direction from three to six inches asunder. Before nailing 
them, cut out superabundant and irregular growths, retaining a competency of regular shoots for orderly 
training, among which, if any are of very considerable length, prune them to moderate extent. Some 
may likewise be trained as espaliers, in a detached row, in the borders or divisions of the compartments. 
The trees so trained may either be left to grow without supjiort, or be tied occasionally to stakes, and 
the branches thus will not overspread the ground. Being kept moderately thin and regular, they will 
bear fine large fruit, and make an agreeable appearance." 

4686. Mode of bearing. Currant-trees, in general, bear the fruit botli on the young 
wood of one, two, and three years' growth ; and on the older branches, from small spurs, 
and snags along the sides, which continue several years fruitful, but the fruit produced 
on the last year's shoot is always finest, especially when the old motJier bearers have 
borne more than four years. 

4687. Pruning. The chief part of the future culture is seasonable priming. After the plants are fur- 
nished with full heads, they produce many superfluous and disorderly shoots every summer, crowding 
the generar bearers, so as to require retrenchment and regulation, both in the young growths of the 
year and older wood The season for the capital pruning is winter ; but a preparatory part is performed 
in summer, to thin the superfluous shoots of the year where too crowded, excluding the sun and air from 
the fruit. First, as to standards : — 

4688. Sujnjner pruning. " In May or June cut out close the most irregular shoots rising in the centre 
ef tiie tree, with all the cross and water-shoots, to admit more freely the essential influence of the air 



Book I. 



RASPBERRY. 



737 




and sun, and promote the growth of the fruit and improve its flavor. Also twist off all root-suckers as 
they appear, 

4689. Winter pruning. " This extends both to the old and young wood; the time for it is when the 
plant is at rest. Of the shoots of the preceding summer, cut out the cross-placed and the otherwise irre- 
gular, with those which are not wanted for vacancies ; but superfluous good lateral shoots are to be cut 
down to short stubs or artificial spurs, about half an inch long, so as to leave an eye or two, in order that 
they may send out fruit-shoots and spurs. With regard to the old bearers, take away those which are 
naked, or getting unfruitful, or of which the fruit is declining in size ; reduce any of excessive length, 
pruning in to some well placed lateral young shoot, to preserve the head within some regular compass: 
cut out also any decayed or cankery parts ; retain a competency of the finest best-placed new shoots above 
and below vacant parts, to come in for successional bearers, or to supply the places of defective old wood ; 
and preserve a leading shoot to the principal branches, where within orderly limits : shortening such termi. 
nal shoots as are of greatest length, to ten, twelve, or fifteen inches, according to their strength and situation 
on the branches ; and leaving those of small extent mostly entire. Take care of the small natural fruit- 
spurs, and occasionally select short lateral roots of one, two, or three inches, for bearing fruit ; or similar 
small shoots may be cut to short snags of an inch or two long, also for fruiting. Thin out spurs on the 
old branches where very thick. As the old fruit-branches decline bearing or decay, cut them away, 
taking care to provide young ones in succession ; and thus keep the trees always furnished with full-bear- 
ing branches, and advancing young bearers, in a regular open expansion, six, eight, or ten inches asunder 
at the extremities ; circumscribing the general head within the height of three or four feet, or five at most," 

4690. Macdonald, at Dalkeith House, Neill observes, " raises currants of the finest quality. A good 
deal depends on the way in which he manages the bushes, especially during the ripening of the fruit. He 
prunes the bushes at the usual season of mid-winter, shortening the last year's shoots down to an inch or 
an inch and a half. Next summer the plants show plenty of fruit, and at the same time throw out strong 
shoots. As soon as the berries begin to color, he cuts off the summer shoots to within five or six inches 
before the fruit. This is commonly done with the garden -s-hears, with which a man may go over half an 
acre of bushes in a day. Sun and air thus get free access, and more of the vigor of the plant is directed 
to the fruit: the berries are found not only to be of 
higher flavor, but larger than usual." It appears {Caled. 
Hort. Mem., ii.) that Macdonald had used the knife for his 
summerpruiiingtill within two years. We confess we regret 
to hear of the introduction of the shears into the kitchen- 
garden, and especially into that of so opulent a proprietor, 
who ought to set an example of order, progresSj and per- 
fection, and not of reviving random work, for the sake of 
economy. It would certainly be better to employ women 
and children. 

4691. To wall-trees, espaliers, and fan-standards with- 
out support, the same course of summer and winter prun- 
ing is applicable, with the obvious variations required by 
their figure. In training wall-trees, two branches are led 
in a horizontal direction along the bottom of the wall or 
trellis, perhaps half a foot from the surface of the earth, 
and the growth from these of all upright shoots, which 
will admit of being arranged at the distance of five or six inches from each other, is encouraged. Fan- 
standards are sometimes trained in a manner nearly similar {fig. 496.), and sometimes with the branches 
radiating from the crown of the stem. 

4692. Insects, &c. The red currant is occasionally attacked by the caterpillar {Phalcena grossularia), 
and very frequently by the Aphis ribes, which changes the color of the leaves to red, pits and puckers them, 
and causes the fruit to be shrivelled and flavorless. These are to be destroyed by watering with lime-water, 
and water alone. 

4693. Forsyth says, " As currants are very liable to be devoured by earwigs, which take shelter under 
their leaves and branches, bundles of bean-stalks should be hung up some time before the bushes are co- 
vered with mats or nets. If proper attention be not paid to this, the fruit will generally suffer very much 
from these insects. After the bushes are covered, take the mats off once in three or four days, and kill 
the earwigs that have got into the bean-stalk, which it will be necessary still to keep hung up. As there 
is a sweetness in the inside of bean-stalks which attracts the earwigs, they very readily take shelter in 
them from rain." 

4694. Tailing the crop and preserving. " The ripening fruit comes in for small gathering in June, ad . 
vances to maturity in July, and continues in perfection till the end of August : or if trees in a full expo 
sure are timely defended from birds and the full sun with garden-mats, or protected with nets where they 
grow against north walls, the fruit may be continued good till September or October." Gather in a dry 
state, as in rainy weather they lose their flavor. {Abercrombie.) 

4695. Forcing. To obtain early currants by forcing, let some good bearing trees, in pots, be placed, as 
early as January or February, in any common forcing department : they will produce ripe fruit in April 
and May. 

SuBSECT. 7. Raspberry. — Ruhis IdtEus, L. {Eng. JBot. 2442.) Icos. Poh/g. L. and 
Rosacea;, J. Framboisier, Fr. ; Himbeerestrauch, Ger. ; aijd Rovo ideoy Ital. 

4696. The raspberr?/ plant has stems which are suffruticose, upright, rise about two 
feet high, and are biennial in duration ; but the root is perennial. The leaves are qui- 
nate-pinnate, the flowers conae in panicles from the extremity of the present year's shoots ; 
they are white, appear in May and June, and the fruit, which in the wild plant is red, 
ripens about a fortnight afterwards. Tt is a native of Britain, and not uncommon in 
woods in low moist situations. 

4697. Use. The fruit is grateful to most palates, as nature presents it, but sugar im- 
proves the flavor ; accordingly, it is much esteemed when made into sweetmeats, and for 
jams, tarts, and sauces. It is fragrant, subacid, and cooling ; allays heat and thirst, 
and promotes the natural excretions in common with other summer fruits. It is nciuch 
used in distilling, to make the cordial spirituous liquor, to which it gives name. Rasp- 
berry-syrup is next to the strawberry in dissolving the tartar of the teeth ; and as, like that 
fruit, it does not undergo the acetous fermentation in the stomach, it is recommended to 
gouty and rheumatic patients. 

4698. 2Vie varieties are — 

Early small white I Most large red Antwerj) I Twice bearing -white | Woodward's rasi)ben-y. 

Large white Large yellow Antwerp I Twice -bearing red j {Hoivc. P. L, t. 

Large red I Cane or smooth-stalked | Smooth cane, twice-Tjearing | 

3 B 



73S 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



433D. EstL-nntc of sorts. " With respect to the varieties of fruit : the first in the above list is a small 
fiMut, but esteemed for its early bearing. The second and third, the common large white and red sorts, 
are cultivated in fuller crops, as' plentiful bearers of larger berries. The two Antwerp sorts are still supe- 
rior in yielding fine large fruit, and deserve a wall or espalier. The cane-raspberry is a good sort for the 
m.iin crop. The twice-bearers are esteemed for their singular property of producing two crops of fruit the 
same year, of which the first commonly i-ipens in July, and the second in September or October ; and in 
fine dry seasons the plants will afford some production from the second crop till November." 

4700. Propagation. " The varieties can be perpetuated by young sucker-shoots rising 
plenteously from the root in spring and summer : when these have completed one season's 
growth, they are proper to detach with roots for planting, either in the autumn of the 
same year or the next spring, in Februai-y or March, but not later than the middle of 
April. These new plants will bear some fruit the first year, and furnish a succession of 
strong bottom shoots for full bearing tiie second season. New varieties are easily raised 
from seed ; and they come into bearing the second year." 

4701. So/7 and site. " All the varieties will succeed in any common mould trenched about two feet deep, 
and sufficiently manured ; but the soil in which the raspberry-bush most prospers and bears the finest 
fruit, is a light rich loam. Allot the main crop a free exposure to the sun, that the berries may ripen in 
perfection. Be careful to favor the twice-bearers with a dry soil, and a sheltered sunny situation, to give 
the second crop every aid in coming to maturity. V/hen raspberries are cultivated on a large scale, it is 
best to keep them in plantations by themselves. Set these in rows, from four to six feet asunder, as the 
bushes are of the smaller or larger kinds, by three or four feet in each row. Scattered bushes may either 
occupy a single row lengthwise along the back part of a border, or stand in detached stools, at ten or 
fifteen feet distance. Select sorts are frequently trained against walls, stakes, or espaliers, from the most 
sunny to the most shady aspect, for early and late fruit of improved growth and flavor." Neill says, " the 
raspberry-bush grows freely in any good garden-soil ; but it is the better for being slightly moist. Al- 
though the place be enclose.l by trees, and even slightly shaded, the idant succeeds. In an enclosed and 
well sheltered compartment, with rather a damp soil, containing a proportion of peat-moss, we have seen 
very great crops of large and well flavored berries produced ; for example, at Melville House, the seat of 
the Earl of Leven, in Fifeshire." Haynes also recommends well manured bog-earth, and a situation 
naturally or artificially shaded. 

4702. New plantation. " Raspberry-bushes are in their prime about the third and fourth year; and if 
well managed, continue in perfection five or six years ; after which, they are apt to decline in growth, 
and the fruit to become small, so that a successive plantation should be provided in time. Select new 
plants from vigorous stools in full perfection as to bearing." 

4703. Su7nmer culture. " Keep them clear from weeds during the summer by hoeing between the 
rows ; at the same time, loosen the earth about the plants. Under this management the plants, if tole- 
rably strong, will both yield a moderate crop the first summer, and supply young stems for bearing in 
greater plenty and perfection the following season ; and so, from year to year, "the summer culture should 
be repeated. As the plants get established, let all straggling suckers between the rows, or from the ex- 
trerae roots of single stools, be cleared out by hoeing, or twisted ofl', to admit the air and sun freely to 
the fruit." 

4704. Pruning and winter dressing. " It is requisite every winter or spring to cut out the dead stems, 
and to thin and regulate the successional young shoots. This annual pruning may be performed any time, 
during open weather, from November till the beginning of April. When 'kitchen-garden crops are cul- 
tivated between the rows, it is most convenient to do this as soon as the old bearers begin to decay. As 
to pruning indiscriminately in the open weather of winter, it sometimes happens that severe frosts im- 
mediately follow, and partially kill the plants ; therefore it is safer to shorten the tender young stems 
early in spring ; but let it not be deferred till the buds are making new shoots, as that would weaken the 
root. Cut out all the old dead stems clean to the bottom ; and having selected from the strongest } ou«g 
shoots on each main stool, three, four, or five, to be preserved for a succession of bearers, cut away the 
superabundant close to the ground. Let each of the shoots retained be pruned at top, below the weak 
bending part ; cutting them in the smaller plants, to about three or four feet in length, and in the large 
sorts, to the length of five or six feet. If any of the stems diverge irregularly, or straggle much asunder, 
they may be tied togetlier at top, and thus the strong ones will support each other ; or the taller varieties 
may have the support of stakes. Prune plants against a wall or trellis as above ; and train the shoots to 
rise a little- diagonally. After pruning, having cleared av.-ay the cuttings, dig the ground between and 
about the plants. To turn in a little rich compost every year will conduce to plentiful and fine returns ; 
lay it at the extremities of the roots, and deeper as the plantation gets older. Eradicate all straggling 
suckers." 

4705. To obtain fruit of a very large size. The fruit of the raspberry may be obtained pf a very large 
size, other circumstances being of the most favorable kind, by destroying all the suckers; but in this 
way, the plant being destroyed, a double plantation is wanted, one to grow only suckers, and the other 
fruit. In this way Kecht, at Berlin, produces plants ten and twelve feet high, with fruit larger than any 
we have seen in this country {Versuch den JVeinbau, &c. p. 46.) 

4706. Taking the crop. " The fruit of the different varieties com.es in from the end of June or July till 
October or later. As it ripens, it should be timely gathered for immediate use ; because, when fully ripe, 
it will not keep above two or three days before it moulds, or becomes maggotty, and unfit to be used." 
{Abercrombie.) 

4:707. Raspberries 7naij be forced equally well with gooseberries and currants, and like them either planted 
in pots or in the soil or floor of the house. In M. Hope's garden at Haarlem, the raspberry is planted 
outside along the north and south sides of a pit ; the shoots of the preceding year are introduced under 
the glass and trained to a trellis, and forced while the suckers are left to grow upright in the open air. 

SuBSECT. 8. Cranberry. — Vaccinium, L. ; Oxi/coccus, P. S. Octan. Monog. L. and 
Ericece, J. Airelle, Fr. and Heidelbeei-e, Ger. 
4708. The American cranberry {Oxycoccus macrocarpus, P. S.) (Hort. Kew. ii. t. 7.) 
is a native of North America, and by the ingenuity of Sir Joseph Banks, it may be said 
to be now added to our cultivated fruits. The plant was known to Miller, who, of the 
cranberry tribe, in general, observes, " they can only be cultivated for curiosity in gar- 
dens, for they will not thrive much, nor produce fruit out of their native swamps and 
bogs." A very interesting account of the mode adopted by the illustrious horticulturist 
above mentioned is given by himself in the Hort. Trans, i. 71. and of tlie produce, which 
was large and uniform. In one year, viz. 1813, from three hundi-ed and twenty-six 
square feet, or a bed about eighteen feet square, three and a half Winchester bushels of 



Book I. 



STRAV/BERRY. 



73a 



berries were produced, which, at five bottles to the gallon, gives one hundred and forty 
bottles, each sufficient for one cranberry-pie, from two and a half square feet. 

4709. Culture in moist soil. " Wherever there is a pond," Neill observes, " the margin may, at a 
trifling expense, be fitted for the culture of this plant, and it will continue productive for many years. 
All that is necessary is to drive in a few stakes, two or three feet within the margin of the pond, and to 
place some old boards within these, so as to prevent the soil of the cranberry-bed from faUing into the 
water ; then to lay a parcel of small stones or rubbish in the bottom, and over it peat or bog-earth, to the 
depth of about three inches above, and ^even inches below the usual surface of the water. In such a 
situation the plants grow readily ; and if a few be put in, they entirely cover the bed in the course of a 
year or two, by means of their long runners, which take root at different points. From a very small space 
a very large quantity of cranberries may be gathered ; and they prove a remarkably regular crop, scarcely 
affected by the state of the weather, and not subject to the attacks of insects." The cranberry will also 
succeed when planted as an edging to any pond, provided some bog-earth be placed for its roots to run in ; 
or if a bed of bog-earth be sunk in any shady situation, so as its surface may be a few inches below the 
general level, for the sake of retaining water, the plant will thrive well, and being regularly watered in 
the driest weather, produce abundant crops. 

4710. Cultm-e on dry beds. " The American cranberry," Salisbury observes {Hort. Trans, ii. 96.), " may 
be cultivated very successfully in situations not positively wet, if only planted in bog-earth, which retains 
moisture longer than any other soil ; for a few plants, even in pots, which had stood some time neglected 
under a hedge, so that their branches were matted together, produced a plentiful crop." Hallet found the 
cranberry, and also the bilberry succeed perfectly in a dry bed of peat-earth, so that it may now be cultivated 
in any garden where that soil can be procured. {Hort. Trans, iv. 483.) Milne also found vigorous shoots 
and abundant crops produced on dry beds of peat-earth, even in the warm summer of 1822. He finds the 
American cranberry easier cultivated than the common; but some prefer the flavor of the latter. 
{Hort. Trans, v. 279.) 

4711. The common cranberry {0 xy coccus jialustris, P. S.) {Eng. JSot. 319.) may be sub- 
jected to the same treatment. " Great quantities of this berry are gathered in upland 
marshes and turf-bogs, both in England and Scotland. The berries are made into tarts, 
and have much the same flavor as the Russian imported cranberries, or those procured by 
cultivation." {Neill.) Twenty or thirty pounds worth are sold each market-day for five 
or six weeks together in the town of Langtown, on the borders of Cumberland. (Lig/it - 
foot.) 

SuBSECT. 9. Strawberry. — Fragaria, L. Icos. Polyg. L. and Rosaceee, J. Fraisier, Fr. ; 
Erdbeerpjlanze, Ger. ; and Pianta difragola, Ital. 

4712. The strawberry is a small creeping plant, with a perennial root, and, in general, 
ternate leaves. There are numerous sorts by some botanists distinguished as species, by 
others considered as only varieties. Knight (Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 207.) considers the 
grandiflora or pine, the Chiloensis or Chili, and the Virginiana or common scarlet, (the 
first supposed to be a native of Surinam, the second of Chili, and the third of Virginia,) 
to be varieties only of one species ; as all may be made to breed together indiscriminately. 
The fruit has received its name from the ancient practice of laying straw between the 
rows, which keeps the ground moist and the fruit clean. They are natives of temperate 
or cold climates, as of Europe and America. The fruit, though termed a berry, is, in 
correct botanical language, a fleshy receptacle, studded with seeds. 

4713. Use. The fruit is fragrant {whence fragaria), delicious, and universally es- 
teemed. It consists almost entirely of matter soluble in the stomach, and neither there 
nor when laid in heaps and left to rot, does it undergo the acetous fermentation. Hence 
it is very nourishing, and may be safely eaten by gouty and rheumatic persons. " In 
addition to its grateful flavor, the subacid juice has a cooling quality, particularly ac- 
ceptable in summer. Eaten either alone, or with sugar and cream, there are few consti- 
tutions with which strawberries, even when taken in large quantities, are found to dis- 
agree. Further, they have properties wliich render them, in most conditions of the 
animal frame, positively salutary ; and physicians concur in placing them in their small 
catalogue of pleasant remedies. They dissolve the tartareous incrustations of the teeth. 
They promote perspiration. Persons afflicted with the gout have found relief from using 
them very largely ; so have patients in cases of the stone ; and Hoffman states, that 
he has known consumptive people cured by them. The bark of the root is astringent." 
{Abercrombie.) 

4714. 2Vie species and varieties are — 



The wood-strawberry (F. vesca) {Eng. 
7?o<.15'24.) ; with oval serrated leaves; 
the fruit round and small, red, white, 
and preen. A native of Britain. 

The scarlet (F . virginiana) {Dull. arb. 1. 
t. 5.) with leaves like the preceding; 
the fniit roundish and scarlet-colored. 
A native of Virginia. Varieties. Early 
scarlet, Wilmot's late, common late, 
Wilmot's coxcomb scarlet. {Hort.Trans. 
V. 262.) 

The roseberry (F. virg.\ax.) {Hort. Trans, 
ii. pi. 27.) ; an Aberdeen seedling, intro- 
duced in 1810. The plants have few 
roundish leaves; larger fruit than the 
scarlet, and are very prolific. Continues 
bearing till August. 



The Downton {F. virg. var.) {Hort. Trans. 
ii. pi. 15.) The fruit is large, irregular, 
and coxscomb-like ; leaves large ; plant 
hardy and prolific. 

The Carolina [F. caroliniensis) ; red, from 
North America. Bostock. 

The musky or hautboy {F. elatior) [Eng. 
Bot. 2177.) ; with oval rough javelin- 
edged leaves ; the fruit large, of a pale 
red color. A native of Britain. 

The Chili (F. Chiloetuis) {Duh. arb. 1. 
t.3.); with large, oval, thick, hairy leaves 
and large flowers; the fruit large and 
very firm. A native of South America. 

Keen's imperial, or new Chili (F. Chil. 
var.) {Hort. Trans, ii. pi. 7.) ; a large 



showy fruit. Keen's seedling. {Hort. 
Trans, v. pi. 12.) 

The pine {F. grandiflora) {Miller, icon. 
2. t. 288.) ; the leaves small anddelicate; 
there are two sorts, the red and the 
white, or greenish-tinted, of this most 
rich-flavored fruit. South America. 
Mathven castle. Princess Charlotte. 

The alpine or prolific (F. collina) ; which 
commonly lasts from June till Novem- 
ber, and in a mild season, till near 
Christmas ; two sorts of the fruit, the 
red and the white. Alps of Europe. 

The one-leaved (F. rrvonevhyila) {Bot. Mag. 
63 ) J the pulp of the fruit pink-colored. 
South America. 



4715. Modes of propagation. " The plants- multiply spontaneously every summer, as well by sucker« 
from the parent stem as by the numerous runners ; all of which, rooting .and forming a plant at every 
joint, require only removal to a bed where there is room for them to flourish. Each of these s«)arateV 

3 B 2 



740 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



planted, bears a fins fruit the following season, and will bear in full perfection the second summer. A 
plantation of the alpine yields fruit the same year that it is made. The woods and the alpine come regu- 
lar from seed, and bring a finer fruit than from offsets. The other species are uniformly propagated by 
offsets, except the intention be to try for new varieties." Knight, in making experin tnts, with a view of 
ascertaining whether most of the sorts would not breed together indiscriminately, raised above four hun- 
dred varieties, " some very bad, but the greater part tolerably good, and a few very excellent." The 
fruit of above a dozen sorts was sent to the Horticultural Society in August, 1818, and found of various 
degrees of excellence. The seeds, if sown immediately after being gathered, will produce plants which 
will come into bearing the following year. 

4716. Soil and site. Neill says, " Strawberries are generally placed in a compartment of the garden by 
themselves, and it should be one which is freely exposed to sun and air. They are sometimes, however, 
planted in single rows, as edgings to borders, and in this way they often produce great crops. In either 
case care must be taken to replant them every fourth or fifth year at the farthest. The alpine and wood 
species maybe placed in situations rather cool and shady; perhaps as an edging in the shrubbery. In 
such places they produce their fruit perfectly well, and late in the season, which is desirable." 

4717. General culture . The following original and excellent instructions for culti- 
vating the strawberry, are given by Keen, of Isleworth ; a most successful grower of 
this fruit. • He says, " I will commence with a general detail of my practice : this may 
be considered as applicable to all the varieties of the strawberry ; and afterwards, in no- 
ticing each kind that I cultivate, I will specify such peculiarities of treatment as are 
exclusively applicable to each. ' 

4718. In preparing the soil for strawberries, "if it be new, and, as is frequently the case, very stiff, it 
should be trenched ; but if the bottom spit of soil, as sometimes happens, be of an inferior quality, I then 
recommended only a simple digging, placing dung at the bottom, underneath the mould so dug ; on the 
contrary, should the land have been kept in a high state of cultivation, or be good to the full depth, it will 
be advisable for the bottom spit to be brought up to the top, placing the dung between the two spits. The 
best way to obtain new plants is, by planting out runners in a nursery, for the express purpose, in the 
previous season : for it is a very bad plan to supply a new plantation from old plants. With respect to the 
time of planting, I have always found the month of March better than any other. Sometimes, when my 
crops have failed, I have had runners planted in the autumn, for the following year, but these have always 
disappointed my expectations. I plant them in beds, containing three or four rows, and the plants, in 
each row, at a certain distance from each other, leaving an alley between each bed, the distance of the 
rows and of the plants in the rows, as well as the width of the alleys, depending on the kind of strawberry 
planted. The width of the alleys, as it will afterwards be stated, may appear considerable ; but, I am satis- 
fied, that allowing this space for the workmen to stand on, when they water the plants, or gather the 
fruit, is beneficial, because I have observed in other persons' grounds, where less space is allotted for this 
purpose, that great damage is done to the plants and fruit by the trampling of the people." 

47 19. General culture. " After the beds are planted, I always keep them as clear of weeds as possible, 
and on no account allow any crop to be planted between the rows. Upon the growing of the runners, I 
have them cut when necessary : this is usually three times in each season. In the autumn, I always have 
the rows dug between ; for I find it refreshes the plants materially ; and I recommend to those persons to 
whom it may be convenient, to scatter in the spring, very lightly, some loose straw or long dung, between 
the rows. It serves to keep the ground moist, enriches the strawberry, and forms a clean bed for the 
trusses of fruit to lie upon ; and thus, by a little extra trouble and cost, a more abundant crop may be ob- 
tained. A short time before the fruit ripens, I always cut off the runners, to strengthen the root; and 
after the fruit is gathered, I have what fresh runners have been made taken off with a reaping-hook, to- 
gether v/ith the outside leaves around the main plant, after which I rake the beds, then hoe them, and 
Take them again. In the autumn, unless the plants appear very strong, I have some dung dug in between 
the I'ows, but if they are very luxuriant the dung is not required ; for in some rich soils it would cause 
the plants to turn nearly all to leaf. I also have to i-emark, that the dimg used for manure should not be 
too far spent ; fresh dung from the stable-door is preferable to spit-dung, which many persons are so fond 
of. The duration of the bed must be determined by the produce of the plants, which varies much ac- 
cording to the different sorts ; it also varies with the same sort in diflerent soils, so that the precise time 
of the renewal of the beds must be regulated by the observation of the gardener, in each particular 
case." 

4720. Sorts groum by Keen, The -pine Keen grows in a light loam, "though no other 
kind of strawberry will bear a strong loam better than this. It is likew^ise to be noticed, 
that this is of all others the most difficult strawberry from which to procure a good crop. 
Particular care must be taken that they are planted in open ground : for in small gardens 
they grow very strong, but seldom bear fruit, in consequence of being so much shaded 
by standard trees ; and I have observed the shade cf the walnut-tree to be much more in- 
jurious to these than to others : for under it they seldom bear at all, but run entirely to 
leaf. In planting the beds of pines, I keep the rows two feet apart, and put the plants 
eighteen inches from each other in the row, leaving alleys of three feet wide between 
each bed : these large distances I find necessary, for the trusses of fruit in my garden- 
ground are frequently a foot long. The duration of this strawberry, with me, is three 
years : the first year it bears the best, the second year the crop is vei-y good, and the 
third year it is less." 

4721. The imperial strawberry, "which was raised by myself from seed, may be treated in a similar 
way, with respect to planting, distance, &c. as the pine; but I have to remark, that it requires rather a 
lighter and richer soil, and is not so liable to run to leaf, when planted under trees." 

4722. The scarlet st7-awbe7-ry must be treated also like the pine. " With respect to distance for planting the 
beds of scarlets, I put each row twenty-one inches apart, and each plant eighteen inches distant in the 
row, and make the alleys two feet six inches wide. The duration of this strawberry, with me, seldom 
exceeds three years." 

4723. The hautboy " I have always found to thrive best in a light soil : and it must be well supphed with 
dung, for excess of manure does not drive it into leaf like the pine-sti-awberry. In planting the beds, each 
row must be two feet apart, and from plant to plant, in the rows, must be eighteen inches, leaving the 
alleys between the beds three feet wide. There are many different sorts of hautboys : one has the male 
and female organs' in the same blossom, and bears very freely ; but that which I most approve, is the one 
which contains the male organs in one blossom, and the female in another : this bears fruit of the finest 
color, and of far superior flavor. In selecting these plants, care must be taken that there are not too 
many of the male plants among them ; for as these bear no fruit, they are apt to make more runners 
than the females. I consider one male to ten females the proper proportion for an abundant crop. I 



Book 1. 



STRAWBERRY. 



741 



learned the necessity of mixing the male plants with the others, by experience, in 1809; I had, before 
that period, selected female plants only for my beds, and was entirely disappointed in my hopes of a crop. 
In that year, suspecting my error, I obtained some male blossoms, which I placed in a bottle on the bed 
of female hautboys. In a few days, I perceived the fruit near the bottle to swell ; on this observation, I 
procured more male blossoms, and in like manner placed them in bottles, in diff'erents parts of the beds, 
removing the bottles to fresh places every morning, and by this means obtained a moderate crop where J. 
had gathered no fruit the preceding year. The duration of the hautboy, with me, seldom exceeds three 
years." 

4724. The wood- strawberry is best raised from seed, " which I obtain from fruit just gathered, sowing 
it immediately in a bed of rich earth. When the plants are of a proper size, I transplant them into other 
beds, where I let them continue till the March following They are then planted in rather a moist soil, 
in beds, as the others, each row being two feet apart, and the plants in each row eighteen inches distant, 
the alley between each bed being three feet wide : in tliis way I produce abundant crops of very fine 
fruit. I have propagated this strawberry from runners, but never with such good success as from seeds, 
particularly if the runners were taken from old roots. The duration of this strawberry, with me, seldom 
exceeds two years." 

4725. Tke alpine strawberry must always be raised from seed, which should be sown in a bed of rich 
earth, in the spring. " When the plants are of a proper size, which will be in July or August, I plant 
them in rows at the back of hedges or walls, in a rich, or in a very moist soil : the rows should be two 
feet apart, and the distance, from plant to plant, in the rows, twelve inches. My alpines, this year, thus 
managed, are bearing most abundantly, so much so, that in gathering them there is not room for the 
women to set their feet, without destroying many. The alpines differ from all other strawberries in 
quickness of bearing ; for no other sort, sown in the spring of the year, will produce fruit, under two 
years, whereas this yields a crop at the end of one year. Its duration, with me, seldom exceeds two years, 
and frequently it lasts only one year." {Hoi-t. Trans, ii.) Williams considers that the fruit of plants raised 
from seed, comes in very well as a late autumn crop, but is certainly inferior in fiavor to that produced 
from transplanted runners. {Horf. Trans, i. 247.) 

4726. The Rev. T. Gamier, a successful cultivator of strawberries, never sufiFers any of the varieties to 
remain in the ground more than one year. " Early in August, or as soon as the gatherings are over, I 
destroy all my beds, and proceed immediately to trench, form, and manure them in tlie manner before 
directed, to receive the plants for the crop of the ensuing year, taking care to select for that purpose the 
strongest and best-rooted runners from the old rejected plants. If at this season the weather should be 
particularly hot, and the surface of the ground much parched, I defer the operation of preparing my beds 
and planting them till the ground is moistened by rain. Such is the simple mode of treatment wnich I 
have adopted for three successive years, and I have invariably obtained upon the same spot, a great pro- 
duce of beautiful fruit, superior to that of every other garden in the neighborhood. Depth of soil I have 
found absolutely necessary for the growth and production of fine strawberries, and when this is not to be 
obtained, it is useless, in my opinion, to plant many of the best varieties. It is not generally known, but 
I have ascertained the fact, that most strawberries generate roots, and strike them into-the ground, nearly 
two feet deep in the course of one season. The pine and roseberry succeed better than any other in stiff" 
and shallow soils, but they should always be planted in an open situation, and not, as is too commonly the 
practice, in shady and neglected parts of the garden " {Hart. Trans, iv. 480.) 

4727. FoMwg justly blames gardeners for cutting over the leaves of strav/berries after they have borne a 
crop, thereby preventing proper buds being formed for next year, and also depriving the roots of the 
plants of their natural protection from the frost. He is also adverse to the practice of digging between 
the rows in winter, which, he saj's, cuts off the fibrous roots, and prevents the plants from setting out in 
spring with that vigor which they otherwise would do. Instead of supplying manure in this way, he re- 
commends the appropriation of liquid manure ; or what is better, never letting a crop remain above three 
years on the same piece of ground. {Caled. Hart. Soc. Mem. iii. 291.) 

4728. Brick-beds for straivherries. These were observed in a small garden near Chatham, 
and are thus described : " The beds {fig- 497. a) were upon flat ground, each about 
three feet wide, and between them were trenches about nine inches wide, and four-inch 
walls of brick on each side of the trenches (6), to keep up the earth on the sides of the 
beds. These trenches were about the depth of two or three courses of bricks laid flat, 
without mortar, and were intended for the purpose of holding water, which was supplied 
from a pump whenever the ground was dry, while the plants were in fruit. By this 




method, a much greater crop of fruit was obtained, and the plants continued bearing 
much longer than in beds where there were no trenches for water. In Devonshire, straw- 
berry-beds are constructed against the side of a hill or bank, by building up beds in steps, 
with rough granite at the front, to keep up the earth, each step being about two feet 
high and three feet wide. These steps were filled with good loam, and the surface of 
each was covered with rough pieces of granite bedded into the loam, leaving openings 
between the stones, just sufficient to put in the plants. The surface being covered with 
granite, kept the ground longer in a moist state, and the fruit alv/ays clean. " I 
should expect," observes the writer, " that chippings of stone, such as may be had from 
the masons in London, might answer the same purpose. I have found a great advantage 
in keeping the fruit clean, by laying a row of common bricks on each side of the rows 
of strawberry-plants • I tried plain tiles, but found bricks answer better, as the tiles are 
apt to be broken in gathering the fruit, and will not do to use a second time." (^Jtkinson, 
in Hort. Trans, v. 191.) 

4729. Takins, the crop. The fruit ripens from June to August and September ; but the main rroj) is 
usually over in July, (rather when the weather is dry, and the same day that the fruit is to be sent to 
table, otherwise it will soon lose its flavor. Pinch off' the calyx and a quarter of an inch of tl)e peduncle,, 
along with the berry. 

3 B ?, 



742 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt IIL 



4730. To have a regular succession of strawberries throughout the autumnal months. This is commonly 
done by means of the wood and alpine species, and their varieties. Garnier thinks it maybe accomplished 
by late planting ; for example, of Wilmot's late scarlet, or the common scarlet about May. He has 
planted runners of the roseberry on the 1st of July, and gathered fruit on the 7th of September. {Hort. 
Trans, iv. 482.) Williams cultivates the alpine for this purpose. " Early in the month of May, when 
they are in flower, he cuts away all the blossoms, preserving the leaves uninjured ; this is again repeated 
at the end of the month. Towards the middle or end of June more blossoms appear, and the plants afford 
flowers and fruit, all the latter part of the summer, and till cut off by the autumnal frosts. If the first 
blossoms were not removed,-the principal crop of alpines would be ripe at the time the larger strawberries 
are in season, and consequently of httle worth ; but by this mode of culture, they come into bearing in the 
latter part of the summer, just at the time the other kinds are over." {Hort. Trans, v. 247.) 

4731. For forcing the strawberry, see Chap. VII. Sect. VIII. 

Sect. IV. Nuts. 

4732. Among nuts the most useful in this country is the walnut, both for the dessert 
and pickling ; the filbert is also a very useful fruit ; chestnuts are wholesome and nutri- 
tive, and form, in Spain and Italy, an important article of human food. 

SuBSECT. 1. Walnut. — Juglans regia, L. (Lam. ill. 181.) Moncec Folyan. L. and 
Terehintacece, J. Noyevy Fr. ; Walnussbaum, Ger. ; and iVbci, Ital. 

4733. The walnut is a large and lofty tree, with spreading boughs, and pinnate leaves, 
having a very strong aromatic odor. The male flowers come in subterminating aments ; 
the females scattered two or three together in close sessile buds on the young wood near 
the extremities of the branches. The fruit is an ovate, coriaceous, smooth drupe, enclosing 
an irregularly grooved nut, which contains a four-lobed oily eatable kernel, with an irre- 
gular knobbed surface, and covered with a yellow skin. The flowers are produced in 
the end of April and beginning of May, and the fruit ripens in September and October. 
It is a native of Persia and the south side of Caucasus ; but it is supposed to have been 
introduced here from France, and called gaul-nut, before 1562. 

4734. Use. The kernel, when ripe, is in esteem at the dessert ; and the fruit whole, ^ 
in a green state, before the stone hardens, is much used for pickling. An oil which 
supplies the place of that of almonds, is expressed from the kernel in France. In Spain 
they strew the gratings of old and hard nuts, first peeled, into their tarts and other meats. 
The leaves strewed on the ground and left there annoy worms ; or macerated in warm 
water, afford a liquor which, from its bitterness, may effect their death. The unripe 
fruit is used in medicine for the same purpose. Pliny says, " the more walnuts one eats, 
with the more ease will he drive worms out of his stomach." The timber is used in this 
country for gun-stocks, being lighter in proportion to its strength and elasticity than any 
other. It is almost exclusively used in cabinet-work in most parts of the continent. 
The young timber is held to make the finest-colored work, but the old to be finer varie- 
gated for ornament. 

4735. Varieties. Those commonly cultivated for their fruits are — 

The round early oval I Highflyer of Thetford, the best variety known. 

Double large French ' {H- Trans, iv. 517.J 

Tender-shelled, and thick-shelled | 

4736. Propagation. It has generally been propagated from the nut ; and this mode is recommended 
by Miller and Forsyth ; probably from their not having known that the tree may be continued by inocu- 
lation as practised successfully by Knight. Inarching this tree was long ago recommended by Boutcher, 
who says, " he found the fruit in this way produced in one third of the time necessary for plants raised 
from the nut." 

4737. Knight, " having planted, in the spring of 1799, some walnut-trees of two years old in garden- 
pots, raised them up to the bearing branches of an old walnut-tree, and grafted them, by approach, with 
parts of the bearing branches of the old tree. An union took place during the summer, and in the 
autumn the grafts were detached from the parent stock. The plants thus obtained were planted in a 
nursery, and, without any peculiar care or management, produced both male and female blossoms in the 
third succeeding spring, and have since afforded blossoms every season." {Hort. Trans, i. 61.) After 
numerous trials, he also succeeded in propagating the walnut-tree from budding. " The buds of trees," 
he observes, " of almost every species, succeed with most certainty when inserted in the shoots of the 
same year's growth ; but the walnut-tree appears to afford an exception ; possibly, in some measure, 
because its buds contain within themselves, in the spring, all the leaves which the tree bears in the fol- 
lowing summer ; whence its annual shoots wholly cease to elongate soon after its buds unfold ; all its 
buds of each season are also, consequently, very nearly of the same age : and long before any have 
acquired the proper degree of maturity for being removed, the annual branches have ceased to grow 
longer, or to produce new foliage. To obviate the disadvantages arising from the preceding circumstances, 
I adopted means of retarding the period of the vegetation of the stocks, comparatively with that of the 
bearing tree ; and by these means I became partially successful. There are at the base of the annual 
shoots of the walnut and other trees, where those join the year-old wood, many minute buds, which are 
almost concealed in the bark, and which rarely or never vegetate, but in the event of the destruction of 
the large prominent buds which occupy the middle and opposite end of the annual wood. By insert- 
ing in each stock one of these minute buds, and one of the large and prominent kind, I had the pleasure 
to find that the minute buds took freely, whilst the large all failed without a single exception. This 
experiment was repeated in the summer "of 1815, upon two yearling stocks which grew in pots, and had 
been placed, during the spring and early part of the summer, in a shady situation under a north wall ; 
whence they were removed late in July to a forcing-house, and instantly budded. These being suffered to 
remain in the house during the following summer, produced from the small buds, shoots nearly three fort 
long, terminating in large and perfect female blossoms, which necessarily proved abortive, as no male 
blossoms were procurable at the early period in which the female blossoms appeared : but the early 
formation of such blossoms sufficiently proves that the habits of a bearing branch of the walnut-tree may 
be transferred to a young tree by budding, as well as by grafting by approach. The most-eligible situation 
for the insertion of buds of this species of tree (and probably of others of similar habits) is near the summit 
of the wood of the preceding year, and of course, very near the base of the annual shoot ; and if buds of 



Book I. 



CHESTNUT. 



743 



the small kind above mentioned be skilfully inserted in such parts of branches of rapid growth, they will 
be found to succeed with nearly as mucli certainty as those of other fruit-trees, provided such buds'be in 
a more mature state than those of the stocks into which they are inserted." 

47o8. Carlisle [Hort. Trans, ii.) mentions the case of a walnut-tree raised from the nut in t!ie usual way, 
on a light soil, on a sandy sub-soil, and in a warm sheltered situation, which produced fruit in six years ; 
but the' usual period is eighteen or twenty. 

4739. Abercrombie says, the walnut-tree is propagated, in general, by sowing well ripened nuts of the 
finest varieties : hut as seedlings are apt to vary, new plants are occasionally raised by layers and inarch- 
ing, to continue particular sorts permanent. The nuts may be sown in autumn or spring, in drills, nine 
to twelve inches apart, and two or three inches deep ; place the nuts two inches asunder, and having 
earthed them in, smooth the surface. They will come up in the spring. When of one year's growth, set 
out the plants in nursery rows, a foot asunder by six inches in the rows, to remain two years, tlion to be 
transplanted (doubling the distance) into other nursery lines. Train each with a single stem of six or 
seven feet high : then to be permitted to branch out above, and form a spreading head. Layers may be 
made, in autumn or spring, of young shoots produced near the ground from proper stools formed for that 
purpose : they will be rooted in one season, to plant otF in nursery rows for training as above. Inarching 
may be performed in February or March upon seedling walnut-stocks, advanced in proper stems. 

4740. Soil and site. The walnut-tree will succeed in any common fertile soil, a light or a clayey loam, 
so as the sub-soil be dry, and the site a little sheltered ; but it thrives best where there is a good depth of 
loam mixed with sand or gravel rather than clay. As this tree is long before it bears fruit, there is a 
particular inducement for procuring plants from the nursery, either inarched, budded, or in as advanced 
a stage as it will be safe to remove them at. This may be when they are from eight to twelve years old, 
according as they may have been prepared by repeated transplantations. Walnut-trees may be planted in 
orchards or small paddocks, in a row towards the boundaries ; or in parallel double rows in a quincunx 
order, in extensive grounds, but detached from fruit-trees of m.ore contracted growth. The line of walnut- 
trees, when fully grown, will serve as a screen to the fruit-trees occupying the interior ground. The 
plants should stand at twenty-five and the trees to fifty feet distance. 

4741. Mode of bearing. On the extremities of the preceding year's shoots. 

'»742. Pruning. Waliuit-trees, when finally planted, may be permitted to branch out in their natural 
order, with the exception of a little occasional pruning, to regulate any casual disorderly growth, to re- 
duce over-extending branches, and to prune up the low stragglers. 

4743. Ringing to induce bearing, is practised by the Baron de Tschoudi, near Metz, in Lorraine. A 
zone of bark two inches broad is taken out, and the part plastered over with cow-dinig and loam ; the 
consequence is that the trees prove more prolific, and the fruit ripens sooner. 

4744. Taking the crop. Walnuts should be taken for pickling while the internal parts remain tender 
and fleshy, which may be ascertained by probing them with a pin or needle. The nuts are ripe in Sep- 
tember and October, and should then be gathered so as not to injure the tree, and housed in the proper 
manner for winter use. 



SuBSECT. 2. Chestnut. — Fogiis Ccstanea, L. ; Castanea Vesca, W. {Eng. Bot. 88fi.) 
Moncec. Poly. L. and Amentacece, J. Clidtaigtie, Fr. ; Castanienhaum, Gcr. ; and 
Castagno, Ital. 

474.'?. The chestnut is a large tree, spreading its branches finely on every side where it 
has room, but, planted closely, will shoot up straight to a great height. The leaves are 
lanceolate, serrated, and very large. The aments, or catkins, of male flowers are pendu- 
lous at the ends of the branches ; very long, resembling tliosc of the walnut. They have 
a strong spennatic smell ; the flowers are collected in remote little balls, and are sessile. 
The proportion of male flowers to the females is prodigious. The calyx of the female 
flowers becomes an cchinate capsule or four valves, of a silky smooduiess in the inside, 
and containing two or three nuts or one only. It flowers in May, and ripens its fruit 
in October. It is supposed to have been originally brought from Sardis to Italy by Tib. 
Csesar. It is so common as to be considered a native in France and Italy ; and some 
consider it as naturalised in England, though it is not likely to propagate itself in this 
country. Some of the oldest trees in the world are of this species ; as that mentioned by 
Brydone on Etna, and the great tree at Tortworth in Gloucestershire. 

4746". ZTse. The fruit is a desirable nut for autumn and winter, and is eaten roasted, 
with salt, and sometimes raw. Abroad, it is not only boiled and roasted, but puddings, 
cakes, and bread are made of it. " Chestnuts stewed with cream," according to Phillips 
{Pomarium Brit. 95.), " make a much admired dish, and many families iirefei- them to 
all other stuffings for turkeys." He says, " I have had them stewed and brought to table 
with salt fish, when they have been much admired." The timber was formerly in very 
general use in liouse-carpentry, though some, with every appearance of reason, consider 
what is generally called old chestnut as old oak. 

4747. Varieties. There are none of any note. Some varieties ripen their fruit a few days earlier than 
others, but none of these have been fixed on and perpetuated by the nurserymen so as to be rendered 
available bv purchasers. 

4748. Propagation. Miller and most gardeners recommend propagation from nuts ; but, for fruit, the 
Devonshire practice of grafting is decidedly preferable. Sir Joseph Banks says, " the nurserymen there 
deal in grafted chestnut-trees ;" and we may add, that they are now to be had in the London nurseries. {Hort. 
Trans, i. 62.) Knight says, " The Spanish chestnut succeeds readily when grafted in almost any of the 
usual ways, and when the grafts are taken from bearing branches, the young trees afford blossoms in the 
succeeding year ; and I am much inclined to think, from experiments I have made on this tree, that by 
selecting those varieties which ripen their fruit early in the autumn, and by propagating with grafts or 
buds from young and vigorous trees of that kind, which have just attained the age necessary to enable 
them to bear fruit, it might be cultivated with much advantage in this country, both for its fruit and 
timber." {Hort. Trans, i G2.) 

4749. Soil and site. Tiie tree prefers a sandy loam with a dry bottom ; but will grow in any soil on a dry 
sub-soil. Distribute the plants towards the northern boundary of orchards ; and in larger groups, over any 
vacant tracts in extensive pleasure-grounds or parks, and to form spacious avenues, or a row along any 
out boundary. A great number should not be placed close to a residence, as the smell of the flowers is 
offensive. Plant them at not less than thirty feet, and thence to fiftv feet distance. 

3 B 4 



744 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



4750. Subsequent culture. " Permit the trees to branch out freely above, mostly in their natural order, 
to advance in large regular heads. Give occasional pruning only to very irregular and cross branches, 
and low stragglers. After they have attained some tolerably branchy growth, they will come into bearing 
in moderate plenty ; and when they have expanded into large full heads, they may be expected to yield 
considerable quantities of nuts." 

4751. Taking the crop. " The nuts ripen from the end of September to the end of October. When the 
outer capsule containing the nuts begins to divide, and the nuts appear of a brown color, and some fall 
promiscuously from the tree, their full maturity is indicated. They may be gathered by hand, or beat 
down by long poles. Selecting the finest and best-ripened, clear them from the husks ; let them be well 
dried, and deposited in the fruitery, upon shelves, &c. ; and some packed in layers of very dry fine sand 
for longer keeping." (Abercrombie.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Filbert. — Corylus Avellana, L. {Eng. Bot. 723. ) Moncec Poly. L. and 
Amentacece J. Noisette, Fr. ; Nussbaum, Ger, ; and Avellano, Ital. 

4752. The common hazel-nut, or the filbert in its wild state, is a large-sized shrub, witli 
an ash-colored bark, and alternate roundish cordate leaves. The male catkins appear on 
the preceding year's shoots in autumn, and wait for the expansion of the female gems in 
the spring. It is a native of Britain, very common in most woods, and extensively cul- 
tivated about Maidstone, in Kent. 

' 4753. Use. As a table nut it is in universal esteem ; and the wood and twigs of the 
wild plants are used for sticking peas, forming pegs, number-sticks, staking green-house 
plants and raspberries, and many other similar purposes in gardening. 
4754. Varieties. These are — 

The common hazel nut I The red-kemelled filbert | The Constantinople, or dwarfBvzantine 

The red-kemelled (Lans; P. t. Ivii. 2.) The great cobnut (HoH. P. L. t. xlix.) The cossford {Hort. Trans, u. 405.) 
The white-kemelled filbert {Lane. P. t. The large long nut The frizzled, or Norfolk variety. {Hori. 

Ivii. 1.) I The Barcelona, or Spanish | Trans, v. 263.) 

4755. Estimate of sorts. The common wood-nut, the least desirable for horticultural plantations, may 
be admitted for variety. The filbert merits culture in a large proportion, and its returns are very profit- 
able for sale. The red-filbert is accounted to have a finer flavor than the white. The cob-nut is large, 
with a thick shell, but the kernel is considerable in size, and sweet. The Barcelona, a good large nut, 
with a thin shell, is well known, great quantities being imported as well as grown here. The long native 
nut seldom kernels well. The cossford is very sweet, kernels well, and the tree is a great bearer. 

4756. Soil and site. Abercrombie says, " A cool, dry, poorish soil is to be chosen for filbert and nut 
trees in general ; for example, a sandy loam, mixed with minute shattery stones or grit, and with a low 
proportion of vegetable or animal remains ; for the plants fruit best when but moderately strong. About 
Maidstone, according to the Rev. W. Williamson, they prefer a hazel loam of some depth, on a dry sub- 
soil, which they dress every year, as the filbert requires a considerable quantity of manure. They are ge- 
nerally planted in the orchard, or in the slips which surround the kitchen-garden." 

4757. Propagation. " All the sorts can be propagated by grafting, by layers, by suckers, and by sowing 
the nuts. The most advisable methods, because they are certain to keep the respective variety permanent, 
are, either by grafting them in February or March upon seedling or sucker stocks of the filbert or hazel; 
or by layers of the young wood in the spring. Sow the nuts in October or November, or in the spring, 
in a bed of light earth, covering them about two inches. The greater part will germinate in spring, and 
when the plants are one or two years old plant them out in nursery lines in autumn or spring. Train a 
principal supply in standards, half-standards, and dwarf standards, each with a single clean stem, from 
six feet high down to twelve inches." {Abercrombie.) About Maidstone, according to Williamson, 
they are almost universally propagated by suckers. 

4758. Mode of beanng. All the species bear principally upon the sides and ends 
of the upper young branches ; and from small shoots, which proceed from the bases of 
side branches cut off the preceding year. 

4759. Final planting. " The season for planting all the sorts is autumn or spring, or any interval in mild 
weather from October till the beginning of March. Allot detached standards, not less than ten, and 
thence to twenty feet distance, to have room to branch out in full heads. In the filbert-grounds about 
Maidstone it is usual to plant hops, standard apples, and cherries among the filberts. When the filberts 
come into a bearing state the hops are destroyed, and the fruit trees only suffered to remain. The ground 
is then planted with gooseberries, currants, &c. and herbaceous vegetables." {Hort. Trans, iv. 152.) 

4760. Pruning. " In the filbert-orchards, about Maidstone in Kent, it is a prevailing practice to train 
the trees with short stems, like a gooseberry-bush, but with the heads in the shape of a punch-bowl, 
and exceeding thin of wood, and to prune them with exact attention to the mode of bearing. The 
filbert is there propagated by suckers, and^Williamson advises to plant them where they are to remain ; 
to suffer them to grow without restraint for three or four years ; and then to cut them down within a 
few inches of the ground. They will push five or six strong shoots which, the second year after cutting 
down, are to be shortened one third. Then place a small hoop within the branches, and fasten the 
shoots to it at equal distances. In the third year, a shoot will spring from each bud ; these must be 
suffered to grow till the following autumn or spring of the fourth year, when they are to be cut off nearly 
close to the original stem, and the leading shoot of the last year shortened two thirds. In the fifth year, 
several small shoots will arise from the bases of the side branches, which were cut off the preceding year ; 
from these the fruit is to be expected, and the future object of the pruner must be directed to produce an 
annual supply of these by cutting out all that have borne fruit. The leading shoot is every year to be 
shortened two thirds or more, and the whole height of the branches must not be suffered to exceed six 
feet. Every shoot that is left to produce fruit should also be tipped, which prevents the tree from being 
exhausted in making wood at the end of the branch. Observe, in pruning early in spring, to have a due 
supply of male blossoms and to eradicate all suckers." Such is the Maidstone practice, which " has been 
long celebrated;" by which SOcwts. of nuts per acre have been grown on particular grounds, in particular 
years ; but 20 cwts. is considered a large crop, and rather more than half that quantity the usual one, 
with a total failure three years out of five, so that the average produce is not more than 5 cwts. per acre. 
Williamson thinks the failure, happening so often, may be owing to the excessive productiveness of the 
successful years owing to the mode of pruning, by which "the whole nourishment of the tree is expended 
in the production of fruit." He recommends leaving the trees rather more in a state of nature, and, 
from experiments in his own garden, thinks a regular crop in succession will thereby be obtained. {Hort. 
Trans, iv. 154.) 

4761. Insects. The leaves are little troubled with vermin of any sort ; but the eggs of the weevil 
{Curculio nucum) {fig. 498. a) and C. pyri {b) are deposited in the germen, and nourished on the 
kernel, which they effectually destroy. The only way of lessening this evil Is by taking care to dc- 



Book 1. 



NATIVE, OR NEGLECTED FRUITS. 



745 




stroy all the nuts so infested, in order that the larvae may never attain to the fly » i ^08 
state. 

4762. The Rev. G. Swayne having had a plantation of filberts, which for 
the 20 years of their existence had produced very little fruit, began to suspect 
a want of male blossoms. He therefore selected" a number of catkins from the 
common hazel, and suspended them over the scarlet blossom of his filberts ; 
and the result was, that the first year he had more fruit than he had during the 
20 preceding years. To prove that it was owing to the farina of the male 
blossoms, he tried some with and some without this assistance, and found the fruit produced as the 
male blossoms applied. He taught this mode to a neighboring farmer's wife who had a row of barren 
trees, and she was " much delighted" with the plan ; put it in execution the next day, and the same 
season sent her instructor 6 lbs. of very fine filberts from four old stunted trees that had not borne one 
for many years, {tlort. Trans, v. 316.) 

4763. Taking the crop. " The maturity of the fruit is indicated by the cup turning 
brown, and by the nuts, which have also become brown, readily quitting the husk. 
House a quantity for keeping ; gather them in bunches as they grow. If a portion, 
after being properly dried, be laid in boxes, and covered with dry sand to exclude the 
air, it will tend to preserve the kernels from shrinking ; and they will thus keep well for 
a month or two." Braddick's mode of keeping nuts two years by closing them up air- 
tight in emptied butter-firkins has been already mentioned. (2308.) 



Sect. V. Native, or neglected Fruits, deserving Cultivation. 
4764. Though some of our native fruits recommend themselves by their already known 
Atility, as the cranberry ; yet others, as the sorb, haw, &c. are only mentioned with a 
view of directing scientific horticulturists of leisure and means, to try what can be done 
in improving them. We shall enumerate them in the order of stone-fruits and berries. 

4765. Tlie sloe is the Prunus spinosa, L. {Eng. Bot. 842.) Icos. Monog. L. and Rosaccce, J. Ripe, it 
makes an excellent preserve ; unripe, the inspissated juice forms the (jcrman acacia, and affords an almost 
indelible ink used to mark linens. It is used in home-made wines, to communicate the color and rough- 
ness of red port ; and the leaves are employed to adulterate the teas of China. Knight and others consider 
the sloe as the parent of the bullace [P. insititia), and all the varieties of the common plum {P. domcstica). 
As a shrubbery plant the sloe is most ornamental, blossoming before all others of the prunus tribe. 

4766. The Irird-cherryis the Prunus pad us. {Eng. Bot. 1383.) The fruit is nauseous to most palates; 
but infused in gin or whiskey it greatly improves these spirits, and is only surpassed by an infusion of peach- 
leaves. A few trees therefore are desirable, especially in Scotland and Ireland. 

4767. The mountain-ash is the Sorbus Aucuparia, L. Pyrus Aucuparia, E. B. {Eng. Bot. 337.) Jcos. Di- 
Pent. L. and Rosacece, J. The berries are eaten in some parts of Scotland and Wales, and afford an 
agreeable fermented liquor, and, by distillation, a strong spirit. Grafted on the service-tree, as is fre- 
quently done in France, the fruit is said to become larger and more abundant. {Neill, in Hort. Tour,SG^) 

47C8. The wild service {Pyrus torminalis, W.) {Eng. Bot. 298.) {fig. 499.), the bastard service {P. pin- 
natifida, E. B.) {Eng. Bot. 2331.) {fig. 50O.), and tlie whitetxam-tree {P. Aria) {Eng. Bot. 1858.), afford 
agreeable mealy berries, with much less acid than those of the mountain-ash. These trees are most 
ornamental in shrubberies or on lawns ; and the two last are not undeserving a place in orchards. 



499 





4769. The tree- currant {Ribes spicatum, L. {Eng. Bot. 1290.) Pentand. Monog. L and Cacti, J.) affords 
a fruit somewhat smaller and more acid than the common red currant ; but by crossing and cultivation 
might, no doubt, be greatly improved ; and from its comparatively tree-like habits, might be a more 
convenient fruit-shrub in respect to crops below or around it. 

4770. The common bramble, Ruhus fruticosus, L. {Eng. Bot. 715.) Icos. Polyg. L. and Rosacece, J. The 
fruit is powerfully acid and astringent, forms agreeable pies and tarts, medicinal gardes, and may also 
be used raw. There are two single varieties, the white-fruited and smooth, and one with double 
blossoms. 

4771. Tlie cloud-berry, Rulms Chamcemorus, L. {Eng. Bot. 716.) {figs. 20. and 501.) " In Scotland," Neill 
observes, " the fruit is also called roebuck-berries or knot-berries, and they are perhaps the most grateful 
and useful kind of fruit gathered by the Scots Highlanders. On the sides and near the bases of the 
mountains it may be collected for several months in succession. It is not cultivated without difficulty, 
and it seldom yields its fruit in a garden." By raising from seed, and again from the seeds of plants so 
raised, and so on for six or eight generations, perhaps at the same time crossing the flowers with those of 
the bramble or raspberry, in all probability this plant might become a valuable accession to the kitchen - 
garden. Its berries are ripe in September. (See a curious paper in Caled. Hort. Mem. i. .383.) In Lapland 
and Sweden the fruit is much prized, and used for a great variety of purposes. Dr. Clarke, as we have 
«een (249.) found it medicinal. {Scandinavia, chap, xv.) 



74G 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




4772. The dwarf crimson 
bramble {Rubus arcticus) 
{Eng. Bot. 1585.) {fig. 5012.) 
produces an excellent berry, 
found only on the highest 
and wildest mountains of 
Scotland. By successional 
sowing of the seeds on differ- 
ent levels, doubtless it might 
be brought down, step by 
step, to live and produce fruit 
on plains, and in appropriate 
parts of gardens. 

4773. The dewberry {Ru. 
bus cce-ius) {Eng. Bot. 826.) 
(^A'- 503.), the stone-bramble 
{Rubus saxatilus) {Eng. Bot. 
£233.) {fig. 504. a), and the up- 
right bramble {Rubus sube- 
rectiis) {Eng. Bot. 2572.) {fig. 
504. b), afford agreeable acid 
and aromatic fruits, which 
come in late in the season, 
and merit attempts with" a _ 
view to accommodating them 

to habits of cultivation. The same remarks will apply to a plant common in the woods of Russia and 
Poland, and which Dr. Clarke has figured, and named Cripsia ; but which appears to be a species of 
rubus, and probablv a variety of R. suberectus. 

4774. The 
snowberry is 
the Gaulthe- 
ria serpyllifo. 
lia,¥.S; Vac. 
cinium hispi- 
duhtm, L. J 
and Chiogenes 
of Salisbury. 
{Mich. Am. i. 
t. 23.) Decan. 
Monog. L. and 
EricecE, J. 
" At Shaw- 
hill, near Ha- 
lifax, it pro- 
duced fruit 
abundantly, 
planted under 
a north wall, 
shaded behind 
by high trees, 
in a border of 
sandy peat ; 
andit succeed- 
ed pretty well in nearly a similar situation at Chapel Allerton, during the eighteen years of my resi- 
dence at that place, often ripening its berries ; hut they being little esteemed, I only preserved a patch of 
it as a rare plant. The flavor of the fruit, however, is exceedingly agreeable to some persons, being 
strongly perfumed, like eau de noyau, or bitter almonds, and mixed with a pleasant acid. I now regret 
that I never tried the berries baked with sugar in a tart : if gathered before they arc too soft, they may, 
no doubt, be preserved in bottles, like cranberries, and possibly prove a valuable addition to our win- 
ter fruits of that sort." {Salisbury, in Hort. Trans, vol. ii.) 

4775. The purple or common bilberry, blackberry, or whortleberry, { Vaccinium 'Myrtillus, L.) {Eng. Bot. 
456.) is another bog-plant common in Britain and the north of Europe. The berries are gathered in au- 
tumn for making tarts ; in Devonshire they are eaten with clotted cream ; in Poland they are ripe in July, 
and, being mixed with wood-strawberries, and eaten with new milk, are considered a great deUcacy. In 
the Highlands of Scotland they arc eaten with milk, and made into jellies. They may be successfully cul- 
tivated in a shady border of bog-earth. 

4776. The r ed bilberry, or crowberry, Vaccinium J'itis Idcea,!^. {Eng. Bot. 598.) The fruit is acid and some- 
what bitter, but makes a very good rob or jelly, which in Sweden is eaten with all kinds of roast meat, 
and forms a sauce for venison, which is thought superior to currant jelly. In Wales we have experienced 
it to be an excellent addition to roast mutton. It may be cultivated m a moist shady border of bog-earih, 
like the common bilberry. 

4777. The broad-leaved whortleberry {Vaccinium amcBnum, L.) {Bot. Rep. 138.) is cultivated at Enghien, in 
the Due d'Aremberg's garden, and the fruit used in the same way as the cranberry. {Neill, in Hort. 
Tour, 322.) 




Chap. X. 

Horticultural Catalogue. — Exotic Fruits. 

4778. Among exotic fruits we comprehend such fruits as require the aid of artificial 
heat to bring them to perfection, and among these we have included the vine and the fig ; 
for though these fruits ripen in the open air in very favorable situations and warm seasons, 
yet it is allowed on all hands, that in by far the greater number of situations and seasons 
grapes and figs, grown in the open air, do not attain any thing like their proper size and 
flavor. Exotic fruits may be arranged as follows : — • 

4779. Those m general cultivation ; as the pine, vine, fig, melon, and cucumber. 



Book I. 



EXOTIC FRUITS. 



747 



4780. Those ivell known, but neglected, as such ; as the orange, pomegranate, olive, 
Indian fig, torch-thistle, and strawberry-pear. 

4781. ThosQ liule knoum, some of which seem to merit cultivation ; as the akee-tree, 
alligator-pear, anchovy-pear, durion, guava, granadilla, jamrosade, malay apple, lee- 
chee, loquat, mango, mangosteen, pishamin, and various others. 

4782. The varieties of some of these species, as the vine, fig, and melon are very great ; 
in making a selection we would recommended the plan submitted as to the selection of 
hardy fruits. (4367.) 

Sect. 1. Exotic Fruits in general Cultivation. 

4783. The exotic fruits in general ciiltivation include the three first fruits in the world; 
the pine pre-eminent for its flavor ; the vine, for its generous and enlivening juice ; and 
the melon, approaching in flavor to the pine. All circumstances considered, it is doubt- 
ful if the durion, mangosteen, said other Indian fruits, equal these ; certainly no fruit 
hitherto discovered in any region surpasses the pine-apple. 

SuBSECT. 1. Pine-apple. — Bromelia Ananas, L. [Bot. Mag. 1554.) Hexan. Monog. L. 
and BromelicB, J. Ananas, Fr., Ger., and Ital. 

4784. The pine-apj)le is described in Miller's Dictionary (art. Bromelia), as herba- 
ceous ; but it is by others considered as a shrub. Its common name of pine-apple is sup- 
posed to be derived from the resemblance of the fruit in shape to the cone of some spe- 
cies of pine-tree. In richness of flavor tliis fruit stands unrivalled ; and, as Neill ob- 
serves, " it is one of the greatest triumphs of the gardener's art, to be able to boast that 
it can be produced in Britain in as high perfection as in a tropical climate." The leaves 
of the pine-plant are long, naiTow, channelled, and in general furnished with spines or 
prickles on the edges. The flowers are in a loose spike, on a scape, which is leafy at 
top ; " as the spike ripens, it takes tlie form of a fleshy scaly strobile, vulgarly called 
the fruit, and composed of many coadunate berries, which have scarcely any cells or 
seeds.'' Professor Martyn doubts whether there may not be some of the fruits with 
male flowers only, and others v> ith hermaphrodite flowers ; " because those fruits which 
have seeds are remarkably different from the others when cut through the cells, in which 
the seeds are lodged ; for in these they lie near to the centre of the fruit, whereas in 
those which have abortive cells, they are chiefly close to the rind." South America is 
generally considered the native place of the pine, though it is indigenous in uncultivated 
places in Africa, in great abundance. Linnaeus ascribes it to New Spain and Surinam ; 
and Acosta says, that it was first sent from the province of Santa Croce, in Brasil, inro 
the West, and afterwards into the East Indies. Professor Martyn thinks it may be com- 
mon to the tropical parts of the three continents. The pine-plant has been long culti- 
vated in Jamaica and other West India islands with great success, and was introduced 
to the gardens of Europe by Le Cour, of Leyden, about the middle of tlie seventeenth 
century. This gentleman. Miller informs us, receii'ed his first plants from America, 
and " after a great many trials with little or no success, did at length hit upon a proper 
degree of heat and management, so as to produce fruit equally good (though not so large; 
as that which is produced in the West Indies." From Le Cour " our gardens in Eng- 
land were first supplied with this king of fruits ;" and it is " commonly said that Sir 
Matthew Decker, of Richmond, was its earliest cultivator ;" but, as a botanical plant, 
it was introduced so far back as 1690, by Bentick. (Hort. Xeio.) Miller informs us, 
that at first the plants were kept in dry stoves, during winter, placed on scaflfblds, ai'ter 
the manner in which orange-trees are placed in a green-house ; and that in summer, they 
were removed to hot-beds of tanners' l)ark, under frames. They soon, however, began 
to erect " low stoves," called succession-houses, and bark-pits under deep frames, for the 
suckers and crowns. Bradley informs us, that by the year 1730, pine-stoves of the dif- 
ferent kinds were established in all the principal English gardens ; and Justice, in his 
British Gardener s Directory, published in 1744, states, that pine-apple stoves had also 
been erected in Scotland, and he gives the plan of one erected by him in his own garden 
at Crichton, near Edinburgh, in the year 1732, in which the pine was fruited for the first 
time in Scotland. He recommends such as intend cultivating this fruit, to get their 
plants and furnaces (the latter cast in one piece) of Scott, of Turnham Green, London, 
and their thermometers from Coles, in Fleet-street. 

4785. Use. It is the first of dessert-fruits ; and is also preserved in sugar, and made 
into marmalades and other confectionaries. In preparing to eat this fruit, first twist out 
the crown and then cut the fruit into horizontal slices : these being served, the rind and 
scales of the pips are pared off by the guest with a knife and fork. (^Speedily.) 

4786. Varieties There are many varieties of this fruit, independently of some dis- 
tinct species, as the B. Penguiii and B. Karatas ; the fruit of these species being some- 
times eaten in the West Indies. If the seeds of the ananas were sown frequently in 
their native country, Professor Martyn considers that varieties might be rendered as nu- 



748 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



merous as those of the apple and pear. Miller, in sowing the seeds, found a variety of 
sorts produced from the same fruit ; and Speedily mentions, that he raised in 1768 above 
seventy plants, from seeds sent to the Duke of Portland from the West Indies, most of 
which varied in some distinctive circumstance, either in their leaves or fruit. Many 
of these fruits turned out of inferior quality, probably from the seeds having been 
gathered indiscriminately. Seeds are not usually produced in this country ; when they 
occur it is generally in those pines which blossom in August, and ripen their fruit in 
December. {Buck, in Hort. Trans, iv. 535.) The most esteemed varieties in present 
cultivation are — 



The old queen. Fruit oval-shaped, and 
of a gold color. Esteemed the hardiest 
kind, and fruited in fifteen or eighteen 
months. The fruit grows to a large 
size, often weighing from three to four 
pounds. It is much more certain of 
showing fruit at a proper age and season 
than most of the other sorts, and has a 
just preference in most hot-houses. 

Ripley's new queen. A subvariety of 
the old c^ueen, with a large elegant 
fruit ; fruited also in an equally short 

Wjeriod. 
elbeck seedling ; fruit small, generally 
broader at the head than at the base ; 
of a pale yellow, or sulphur color, with 
very flat pips ; flesh white and tender, 
rich in flavor, with less acidity than is 
found In most other pines. (Hoii.Trans. 
iv. 213.) 

Pyramidal, or brown sugar loaf. Cone- 
shaped, and dark-colored till it ripens ; 
the leaves brownish, and flesh yellow. 

Prickly striped sugar-loaf. Cone-shaped, 
the fruit of a golden color, the leaves 
striped with black or purple lines. 

Smooth striped sugar-loaf ; similar to the 
above, but the leaves not prickly. 

Havannah. Tankard-shaped; dark-co- 
lored till it ripens. 

Montserrat. The leaves of a dark-brown, 
inclining to purjjle in the inside; fruit 
middle sized and tun-shaped, and the 
pips or protuberances of the fruit being 
larger and flatter than in the other 
kinds. 

King pine, or shining green. The leaves 
of a grass-green, the pulp hard and 
rather stringy, but of good flavor when 
ripe. 



Green, or St. Vincent's pine. A rare va- 
riety ; when ripe the fruit is of an olive 
hue, middle-sized, and pyramidal. 

Black Antigua. The fruit is shaped like 
the frustum of a pj-ramid ; leaves of a 
brownish tinge, and drooping at the 
extremities, with strong prickles, thinly 
scattered. The pips of the frtiit are 
large, often an inch over ; jmd it at- 
tains a large size, weighing from three 
to four pounds It is of a dark color 
till it ripens; very juicy, and high 
flavored. 

Black Jamaica. The fruit is large, and 
the plants similar in character and 
habits to the above. 

Providence pine, or new providence. 
There are two varieties, the white and 
green ; the fruit is larger than that of 
any of the kinds cultivated in this 
country ; tlie form inclining to pyra- 
midal ;' the color at first brownish- 
grey, but when mature of a jiale-yellow 
The flesh yellow and melting, abound- 
ing with quick lively juice. Speechly 
produced in the gardens at AVelbeck, in 
1794, a fruit that weighed five pounds 
and a quarter, or eiglity-four ounces, 
and from a plant that was not a large 
one. Griffin had, in 1S03, two plants 
placed under his care, which ftnited in 
July 1804, the fruit of one plant weigh- 
in^seven pounds t>vo ounces, and the otlier 
nine pounds three ounces, avoirdupois. 
This sort, and the two preceding, re- 
quire generally three years, and some- 
times four or five to produce their fruit. 
A\'hat is called the old providence, Ls a 
small fruit from one of the Bermuda 
islands of that name. 



Blood red; fruit equal in bulk at both 
ends. Pips of moderate size, color 
brick red ; flesh white and opaque ; 
leaves of a changeable hue; the flavor 
of the fruit being inferior to that of most 
others, this is to be considered merely 
as a curious variety. (Hort. Trans, iv. 
214.) 

Silver-striped queen. Leaves beautifully 
striped Avith white, yellow, and red ; but 
the plant, though elegant, is a reluctant 
.fruiter. 

Variegated-leaved pines. Besides the 
striped-leaved queen, there are several 
sorts with beautifully varied leaves and 
fruits, and some with red or brown 
leaves ; tut in geueral they are tardy in 
fruiting, and more to be considered as 
orname)ital than as useful varieties. 

New sorts. I'inc plants are frequently 
iinpcrtfcd from the 'West Indian islands, 
and in this case generally bear their 
names. In general, liow-ever, these 
plants are far inferior, both as to kinds 
and condition, to lho.se grown, and to 
be procured from nurserymen in thfs 
country. They are generally infested 
with the bug, and very uncertain in 
tl-.tir time of fruiting, as well as to their 
flavor. If these were to be enumerated, 
the list of pines known in this coun- 
ti-y would amount to upwards of forty 
sorts. Specimens cf above thirty sorts 
are grown in the gardens of Gunter, 
at Earl's-court. The globe pine-apple, 
a subvariety of the queen, was sent to 
Russia, above thirty years ago, by Lod- 
dige, and is now reimported under the 
name of the Russian globe. [Hort.Trant. 
V. 2G5.) 



505 




4787. The insects which more especially in- 
fest the pine are, the brown turtle bug (Coccus 
hesperidum, L.) (j^o^. 505. a to e\ The female 
has at first the appearance of a flat scale [a) ; 
afterwards, when depositing its eggs, it becomes 
fixed and turgid (b) ; these eggs (c) are hatched 
under the mother, who soon afterwards dies ; 
the young insects, seen under a magnifier, 
appear like turtles in miniature (d). Only 
the males (e), which are few in proportion to 
the females, have wings ; these devour nothing, 
and having performed the office of impregna- 
tion, die. 

4788. The white scaly bug {C. hesp. var.) 
(f to I) bears a considerable resemblance to the 
above ; but the scale (f) is somewhat smaller ; 
the color is white, and the males or flies (/) not i 

4789. The ivhite mealy crimson-tinged bug iC. hesp. var.) (n and m) differs from the 
former in being larger and crimson-colored. Speechly considers it as viviparous. This 
and the former species are much the most pernicious. The various modes of destroy- 
ing them, and also the other insects which attack the pine, have been already detailed. 

SuBSECT. 2. Grape- Vine. — Vitis Vinifera, L. (Jac. Ic. i. t. 50.) Pent an. 
Monog. L. and Viticece, J. Vigne, Fr. ; IVeijitrauben, Ger. ; and Vigna, Ital. 

4790. The grape-vine is a trailing, deciduous, hardy shrub, with a twisted irregular 
stem, and long flexible branches, decumbent, like those of the bramble, or supporting 
themselves when near other trees, by means of tendrils, like the pea. The leaves are 
large, lobed, entire, or serrated and downy, or smooth ; green in summer, but when ma- 
ture, those of varieties, in which the predominating color is red, constantly change to, or 
are tinged with some shade of that color; and those of white, green, or yellow grapes, as 
constantly change to a yellow, and are never in the least tinged either with purple, red, 
or scarlet. The breadth of the leaves varies from five to seven or ten inches, and the 
length of the foot-stalks from four to eight inches. The flowers are produced on the 
shoots of the same year, which shoots generally proceed from those of the year preceding : 



Book I. 



GRAPE-VINE. 



749 



they are in the form of a raceme, of a greenish-white color, and fragrant odor, appear- 
ing in the open air in this country in June ; and the fruit, which is of the berry kind, at- 
tains such maturity as the season and situation admit, by the middle or end of Sep- 
tember. The berry or grape is generally globular, but often ovate, oval, oblong, or 
finger-shaped ; the colors green, white, red, yellow, amber, and black, or a variegation 
of two or more of these colors. The skin is smooth, the pulp and juice of a dulcet, 
poignant, elevated, generous flavor. Every berry ought to enclose five small heart or ! 
pear shaped stones ; though, as some generally fail, they have seldom more than three, 
and some varieties, as they attain a certain age, as the ascalon or sultana raisin, none. 
The weight of a berry depends not only on its size but on the thickness of its skin, and 
texture of the flesh, the lightest being the thin-skinned and juicy sorts, as the sweetwater 
or muscadine ; and what are considered large berries of these varieties, will weigh from 
five to seven pennyweights, and measure from one to two thirds of an inch in girth. A 
good-sized bunch of the same sorts may weigh from two to six pounds ; but bunches 
have been grown of the Syrian grape, in Syria, weighing forty pounds, and in England 
weighing from ten to nineteen pounds. A single vine in a large pot, or grown as a 
dwarf standard in the manner practised in the vineyards in the north of France, 
ordinarily produces from three to nine bunches ; but by superior management in 
gardens in England, the number of bunches is prodigiously increased, and one plant, that 
of the red Hamburgh sort, in the vinery of the royal gardens at Hampton Court, has 
produced 2200 bunches, averaging one pound each, or in all nearly a ton. That at 
Valentine's, in Essex, has produced 2000 bunches of nearly the same average weight. 

4791. The age to which the vine will attain in warm climates is so great as not to be 
known. It is supposed to equal or even to surpass that of the oak. Pliny speaks of a 
vine which had existed six hundred years ; and Bosc says, there are vines in Burgundy 
upwards of four hundred years of age. In Italy there are vineyards which have been in a 
flourishing state for upwards of three centuries ; and Miller tells us, that a vineyard a 
hundred years old is reckoned young. The extent of the branches of the vine, in certain 
situations and circumstances, is commensurate with its produce and age. In the hedges 
of Italy and woods of America, they are found overtopping the highest elm and poplar 
trees ; and in England, one plant trained against a row of houses in Northallerton 
(lately dead), covered a space, in 1585, of one hundred and thirty-seven square yards ; it 
was then above one hundred years old. That at Hampton Court, nearly of the same 
age, occupies above one hundred and sixteen square yards ; and that at Valentine's, in 
Essex, above one hundred and forty-seven square yards. The size to which the trunk 
or stem sometimes attains in foreign countries, is so great as to have afforded planks 
fifteen inches broad, furniture, and statues ; and even in this country, the Northallerton 
vine above mentioned, in 1785, measured four feet in circumference near the ground ; 
and one branch of the Hampton Court vine measures one hundred and fourteen feet 
in length. Vine timber is of great durability. It may be remarked, that vines regu- 
larly pruned and dressed, can rarely attain similar magnitudes, nor is it desirable that 
they should. 

4792. The native country of the vine, like most of our acclimated fruits, is generally 
considered to be Pei'sia ; and Dr. Sickler (Geschichte der Obst. Cult. vol. i.) has given a 
learned and curious account of its migration to Egypt, Greece, and Sicily. From Sicily 
it is supposed to have found its way to Italy, Spain, and France ; and in the latter coun- 
try it is believed to have been cultivated in the time of the Antonines, in the second century. 
It has been found wild in America, and is now considered as a native, or natu- 
ralised in the temperate climates of both hemispheres. In the old world, its culture 
forms a branch of rural economy from the 21st to the 51st degree of north latitude, or 
from Schiraz in Persia to Coblentz on the Rhine. Some vineyards are to be found even 
near Dresden and in Moravia ; and by means of garden-culture, it is made to produce 
fruit for the table still farther north ; being grown to a considerable degree of perfection 
in the hot-houses of St. Petersburgh and Stockholm. 

4793. The introduction of the vine to Britain is supposed by some to have taken place 
under the first Roman governors, though, from Tacitus, it appears to have been wanting 
in Agricola's time. There is evidence, however, to prove that vineyards were planted here 
in the year 280, A. D. (see 312.) ; and Bede, writing in 731, says, there were vineyards 
growing in several places. Harte observes, that the religious fraternities of the dark 
ages spread out from Italy in all directions, carrying with them the knowledge of agri- 
culture and gardening ; there is little doubt. Professor Martyn remarks, that orchards and 
vineyards were common appendages to abbeys and monasteries from their first establish- 
ment, at least in the southern parts of the island, to the time of the reformation. From 
this period they have disappeared, in part, perhaps, from the culture of the vine being little 
understood by those to whom the lands of religious houses were sold or granted ; and in 
part, because a better article would be introduced from our French provinces in the time 
of the Henries, and continued to be imported when we lost these. 



750 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pajit III. 



4794. Vineyards have also been planted in modem times, and wine produced, nearly, 
if not entirely equal, to that of France. In the Museum Rustieum, it is stated, that at 
Arundel Castle in Sussex, the Duke of Norfolk had a vineyard, of which there were in 
his Grace's cellar, in 1763, above sixty pipes of excellent Burgundy. Bradley informs 
us, that Warner, a gentleman of Rotherhithe, made good wine from his own vineyards. 
Switzer mentions several instances, and among others, that of Rocque, of Walham 
Green, who made wine for thirty years from a vineyard he had planted in a common Jield- 
garden. Hanburyand Hales confirm these accounts, and cite others; and Barry, in his 
History of Wines, gives an account of a very productive vineyard, formed by the Hon. 
Charles Hamilton, at Painshill, in Miller's time, which succeeded for many years, and 
produced excellent champagne. It is not yet twenty years since this vineyard was ne- 
glected or destroyed. There can be no hesitation, therefore, in agreeing with these 
authors, and with Miller, Martyn, and Speechly, that vineyards would succeed in various 
parts of England, and produce wine equal to much of that imported from France. 
But, in a national point of view, we may conclude with equal safety, that the culture of 
the vine, as a branch of rural economy, would not be a profitable concern here, on the 
broad general principle, that it cannot be long wortli while to grow any thing at home 
which we can get cheaper from abroad. The high duties on imported wines may seera 
to bear against this opinion ; but this is merely a temporary cause ; for, in the progress 
of international comiiierce, governments gradually discover the advantage of leaving trade 
comparatively free ; and in proportion as this becomes the case, each country will feel its 
advantage in pursuing those branches of industry in which nature or habit has ren- 
dered it pre-eminent. It may, however, afford much rational satisfaction for indi- 
viduals, in favorable situations, to form vineyards, and drink their own wine. 

4795. Grapes for the table appear to have been in demand as early as the beginning of 
the 16th century; for Tusser includes "grapes white and red," in his list of fruits^ pub- 
lished about the year 1560 ; but as far as appears from horticultural literature, the 
vine had only been grown as dwarf standards, or trained against walls or buildings, till 
the beginning of the 18th century. Stoves for preserving curious exotics had been in- 
troduced soon after the middle of the 17th century ; but we find no mention of the ap- 
plication of artificial heat to the vine, till 1718, when Lawrence informs us, in his 
Fruit- Gardener, published that year, " that the Duke of Rutland, at Belvoir Castle, has 
done so much justice to the vine as to have fires constantly burning beljind his slope 
walls, from Lady-day to Michaelmas ; whereby he is rewarded by the largest grapes, 
and even the best Frontignacs, in July." These sloped walls, we are informed, were 
afterwards covered with glass. Switzer {Pract. Fruit. G. 2 edit. 1763.) appears to be 
the first author who gives a regular plan of a vinery, with directions for forcing the 
grape. He advises making fires as early as the middle of December, so as to make the 
vines push by tlie middle of January. Since his time, the art of forcing has made such 
rapid progress that no kitchen-garden worth notice is now without a vinery : the fruit is 
produced in some vineries during every month of the year ; and in the London markets 
is to be had in the highest degree of perfection from March to January. Vines are at 
the same time still grown on walls unaided by fire-heat, and in favorable seasons, the 
more hardy early sorts attain a tolerable degree of maturity. In the nursery -gardens of 
Joseph Kirke at Brompton, a wall upwards of two hundred and twenty yards long, and 
ten feet high, is covered with plants of the white muscadine, which have produced regu- 
lar crops for many years. On the border to this wall are standard vines of the same 
sort, trained to stakes about four feet high, which also bear in proportion, though the 
fruit does not ripen quite so early, nor attain an equal degree of flavor with that on the 
wall. In propitious seasons these grapes attain a tolerable degree of flavor ; but even 
then they are of little value, compared to those grown in vineries and hot-houses. 

4796. Use. The uses of the grape in Britain are well known ; in the dessert it ranks 
next the pine, and is by some preferred to it. The berries, when green or not likely to 
ripen, may be used in tarts or pies ; and the leaves form an elegant garnish to other 
table-fruits. Wine is sometimes made in England, by expressing and fermenting the 
juice, either alone or with that of other fruits ; and it has even been made from decoc- 
tions of the leaves of some sorts. In warmer climates, the grape is not only used in the 
dessert, but eaten with bread, either newly gathered or dried as raisins ; and in these 
countries, from the fermented juice, a wine or liquor is made superior to all others for 
stimulating the stomach, and exhilarating the spirits of man. Some of the most im- 
portant consequences in the mythological history of man, are referred to its last-men- 
tioned qualities. (See the Histories of Lot, Noah, and Bacchus.) The medical products 
of the vine are verjuice, formerly used, as the juice of lemons : tartar, a gentle cathartic : 
vinegar, used as a condiment ; for extracting the virtues of other medicines ; and for 
counteracting the eflPects of vegetable poisons. Even wine itself is given as a medicine, 
in typhus fevers ; in nervous disorders ; in putrid sore throats ; and even in the plague. 

In almost all cases of languor, and great prostration of strength," Martyn observes, 



Book I. 



GRAPE-VINE. 



751 



wine is a more grateful and efficacious cordial than can be furnished from the whole 
class of aromatics . " 

4797. Varieties. These are exceedingly numerous ; partly from the antiquity of the 
vine, it having, as Professor Martyn remarks, been cultivated from the time of Noah ; 
partly from the influence of soils and climates in changing the qualities of grapes, there 
being hardly two vineyards in France or Italy where the sorts, though originally the 
same, remain long precisely alike ; but chiefly, as far as respects this country at least, 
from the facility with vv'hich new sorts are procured from seed. Tusser, in 1560, men- 
tions only " white and red" grapes. Parkinson, who was more of a horticulturist, 
gives, in 1627, a list of twenty-three sorts, including the white muscadine, " very great, 
sweet, and firm ; some of the bunches have weighed six pounds, and some of the berries 
half an ounce." Ray, in 1688, enumerates twelve sorts as then most in request. Rea, 
in 1702, gives most of those in Ray's list, and adds five more sorts, recommending the 
red, white, and the d'Arbois, or royal muscadine, the Frontignacs, and the blood-red, 
as the fittest sorts for England. The best vines, he says, were then on the walls of the 
physic-garden at Oxford. 

4798. Switxer, in 1717, says, " It is to Lord Capel and Sir William Temple that we are owing that col- 
lection of good grapes now so plenty in England; the latter," he says, " brought over the Chasselas, 
jiarsley, and Frontignac ; and also the Amboyna, Burgundy, black muscat, and grizzly Frontignac ; all 
highly approved, and distributed amongst the nurserymen, as well as the nobility and gentry. The best 
grapes," he tells us, "were grown at Twickenham, Isleworth, and Richmond." Speechly, from 1760 to 
1790, excelled in the culture of the vine at Weibeck. 

4799. The most valuable modern additions to the varieties of grapes in this country have been procured 
by sowing the seeds of sorts ripened in this country. That excellent grape, the red Hamburgh, was raised 
from seed, about a century ago, by "Warner, of Rotherbithe, already mentioned. Miller in the same way 
produced the variety of the black cluster, which bears his name. Speechly produced various new sorts, 
which have now a place in the catalogues of nurserymen. Williams of Pitmaston, Braddick of Thames 
Ditton, and, above all, the President of the Horticultural Society, have raised several excellent varieties 
of the Sweetwater, Chasselas, and Hamburgh grapes. The great attention paid to natural history by such 
as go abroad, has also contributed to the number of grapes. New sorts have been sent from Spain, Italy, 
and the East Indies, and many from France ; so that the lists of some British nurserymen exceed two 
hundred and fifty names. In France, during the consulship, in 1801, the celebrated chemist, Chaptal, 
when minister of the interior, ordered a specimen of every known variety of the grape to be collected 
from the different departments where the vine is grov/n, and planted in the nursery of the Luxemburg 
garden, with a view to ascertain their reppective merits. Though this assortment was never completed, 
the number collected amounted to upwards of three hundred distinct varieties. 

4800. A classification of the numerous varieties of the vine has not yet been made, either in France or 
England. Bosc, the inspector of government-nurseries in France, was employed to compare and class 
those collected at the Luxemburg ; but in 1809 he had only succeeded in describing and figuring fifty dis- 
tinct sorts. The groundwork of his classification was, the color, form, and size of the fruit ; the surface, 
margin, texture, color, and position of the leaves ; and the redness, greenness, or variegation of the 
foot-stalks. From these eleven characteristics combined, he fori«s 156 classes, in which, he says, may be 
placed all the possible varieties of grapes. Bosc, aware of the great variety of considerations of another 
order, which augment the number of characteristics, such as grapes which are in other respects alike, 
yet differ in their time of ripening, in the time they will hang without alteration on the plant, in the 
quantity produced on a plant, quality of the pulp, &c. acknowledges, that, after four years' labor, he could 
offer no useful result. In the catalogue of the Luxemburg collection, published by Hervey in 1802, the 
arrangement is, 1. vines with black oval fruits , 37 sorts ; 2. black round fruits, 98 sorts ; 3. white oval 
fruits, 44 sorts ; 4. white round fruits, 73 sorts ; 5. grey or violet oval fruits, 5 sorts ; and 6. grey or violet 
round fruits, 10 sorts : in all, 267 sorts. The most elaborate descriptions of the varieties of the vine 
which have yet appeared are contained in a Spanish work, Ensayo sobre las variedades de la vid co- 
mun, que v&getan en Andalusia, &c. by D. Simon Roxas Clemente, librarian to the botanic garden at 
Madrid. This author founds his varieties on the character of the stem, shoots, leaves, flowers, bunches, 
and berries. Hedescribes 120 varieties, comprising them in two sections, downy <iXi<X smooth-leaved. Each 
section is arranged in tribes or clusters of subvarieties, bearing one common name, and distinguished by 
a common character in some of the parts of the fundamental characteristics above named, and into isolated 
varieties, which he describes singly. He enumerates thirty-six authors who have written on the vine, 
since Columella, by whose names he has distinguished many of his tribes ; the others by their local ap- 
pellations. The table of grape-vines here given is, we acknowledge, very imperfect, but it contains all 
the information which we have been able to embody from the best authors, and especially from Speechly 
and Forsyth. More than triple the names it contains might have been in.serted; but, without being 
accompanied by any descriptive particulars, they could be of no real use. 

4:801. Estimate of sorts. As it is generally a puzzling consideration for inexperienced persons to make 
a selection from the ample semi-descriptive catalogues of authors and long lists of names kept by nursery- 
men, we shall here submit a few selections spuitable to common cases. 



Vines to plant against a common garden- 
mall of south exposure, or af^atnst the 
mails of a house. The July black, 
■white muscadine, white and black 
sv/eetwatev, small and large black and 
white cluster, black e.sperione, &c. 

To plant a i-incrtj for earhj forcing. 
Take the preceding sorts. 

To plant a vinery for a full crop of e,ood 
grapes of various flavors. Take a 
white and red, or black muscadine, 
a white and red muscat, a white and 
a red Frontignac, a black or red mus- 
cadel, a white raisin.grape, a white 
and red Hamburgh, a Sitwell's and 
red Sweetwater, a white and red 
Nice. 

There are here 2G grajjes of 14 distinc t 
flavors; an equal number of both co- 
lors ; large showy bunches and berries, 
as those of the Nice ; and small high- 
flavored ones, as those of the Fron- 
tignacs ; the whole placed in the order 



in which they will ripen. The foliage 
in autumn will be alternately tinged 
with red and yellow ; and, supposing 
the muscadines to be placed next the 
end at which the flue enters, they will 
ripen nearly a month earlier than any 
of the others : the Muscats, Frontig- 
nacs, and Muscadels being hot-house 
grapes, will have a sufficient heat to 
ripen them ; and the three last sorts, 
being somewhat more tardy, will come 
in succession. 

To plant a vinery for a late crop. Take 
the black Damascus, black Frontignac, 
black Hamburgh, red Syracuse, black 
and white raisin, black and white St. 
Peter's, black prince, &c. 

To plant a hot-house in which pines are 
grown : one plant under each rafter. 
Take the white and red muscat, black 
muscadel, red or black Hamburgh, red 
Syracuse, red and white raisin, black 



Damascus : and for early sorts, Sitwell's 
Sweetwater, royal muscadine, white 
Frontignac. 

To plaid vines to run up the rafters of 
green-hovsis, or ylant-stoves. Choose 
such sorts as have small leaves and 
short foot-stalks. 

Hardy small-leaved soiisfor the rafters of 
a green-house. White andblack sweet- 
water, black cluster, black musca- 
dine, parsley-leaved muscadine, black 
morillon. 

Small-leaved sorts, requiring more heat, 
and fit for the rafters of a jilant-stove. 
Black Morocco, blue Frontignac, blue 
tokay, claret, white Teneriffe, white 
morillon, &c. 

Small-fruited sorts for planting in poti 
or boxes. Black and white Corinth, 
black and white cluster, red and griizly 
Frontignac, white and red Burgundy, 
&e. 



bJO O 
CO 



IT 



u O A _ 

M o (u 3 s; o — ; 



2.S = °S-^_ . 

3 - § 1 S 



S o ^ 



5 .S 

Cg « - ^ . 

J^l III 

till f^i 



Si 



II 



ccS S'? Soa 



i:g 8,8> 

SS 

cog 1-lCO 



III 



'11 



.1.1 



S "3 



II I 



Q 

93 J 



(2 fa fatS (S fa cS fa fa 



CO fafa 

W — 

PL. , . 



33 



II 



II- 



c c o . 



lis 

ill 

Ill 

CO fa 



o o 
c c 



HI 

5^2 



2d I II 



^^•3 SI 3 



i fl IP 

S p3 figs 



^ 2 

« S S I rt 

gpaS S H S 



I i 

1 E 
I I 



s i 
II 

I I 



£ 3 ^ -g if" 

1 m I 



Is" 



2s 



IBs ; -s"; 11 



3 '2 1 

III 1 

um III 1^ 1^ 



IPli 



S ■ - S !E "9 * 



5.8 § 

ill 



H 
J! 
If 



«5 U5«5'* 



SB 

•33 



"Sol" 



6 « c 2 



is 



1 I 



H? CC S t» 



I" a • I 1| 

k>- CO W !/3> 



I ■ Mi 



! :i ^3 i 



3 h 

i t 

Q W W 



. 0(0 00 CM ;d >^o— 1 iitN 

t~ i-lrH rH (N rH K5 to K5 >0 



^(2 



3 o-'H.S'C 



2 i •S'i^ ill- 
's ^ ^pslls 



52 



i I 
III 

•III 



111" 
I i| 
111' 

111- 



I 



1^1 

III 
■1^1 



'11 



S 2 

li 



: Il ' 

B |2 -2 
3a!8-S "2 

HP II 



2|2|2|2| 2 



1 If 



II 



I I 



I , i ^5 I « ill 



3 C 



754 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paet III. 



4803. Propagation. The vine is propagated from seed, layers, cuttings, grafting, and 
inoculation. By seed, for the sake of obtaining new varieties ; by layers, to get strong 
showy plants the first year ; by cuttings, for economy in management, and to get plants 
■with tops proportioned to their roots ; and by grafting and inoculation, for various useful 
and curious purposes. 

4804. £t/ seed. The first thing is to select the seeds. If the object be to propagate an esteemed variety 
from which cuttings cannot be obtained, or to procure a subvariety of any esteemed sort, then select the 
largest and best-ripened berries from the largest and best-formed bunches, out of which to take the seeds. 
But if the object be to procure an entirely new variety, then the first preparatory steps must betaken 
when the vines are in flower, either by bringing two or more sorts so near together as that the pollen of 
the anthers may effect a promiscuous impregnation, as was practised by Speechly ; or by cutting out, with 
small scissors, the stamens from the flowers to be impregnated, before their anthers had burst, and in- 
troducing the pollen of the variety with which it is to be crossed or impregnated, by dusting the stigma 
with the ripe anthers, as was practised by Knight. This is the most certain and effectual method ; the 
most certain, because if the blossom destined to bear seeds be fecundated or set, it must evidently have 
been set through the influence of the stranger pollen ; and the most effectual, because the stranger pollen 
operating alone must have more influence on the progeny than when operating in conjunction with that 
of the blossom to be crossed. 

4805. As some guide for the selection of sorts to breed from, (to borrow the phraseology of a sister art,) 
we may state, that the legitimate object which ought to be had in view, should not merely be to obtain a 
nei\) variety, but one, either superior in the size, both of the bunch and berry, superior in flavor and de- 
licacy of skin and flesh, superior in point of hardiness and bearing, or in earliness or lateness. In coilnec - 
tion with each of these particulars, the form of the bunch, and the length of the foot-stalk of the fruit, 
and even the size of the leaves and the length of their foot-stalks, are also objects deserving attention ; 
close-gi'owing grapes, which always have short foot-stalks, being subject to many misfortunes. " All the 
sorts of Frontignac grapes," Speechly observes, " are proper to add an excellency of flavor to other 
kinds : but there is a superior richness in the black, blue, and red Frontignacs ; and they do not partake 
so much of the strong muscat flavor as the white and grizzly do. But it must be considered, that the 
blue Frontignac grows close upon the bunch, and therefore is only proper to be coupled with the loose- 
growing kinds, that have long foot-stalks. The white muscat of Alexandria produces large loose-growing 
bunches, and the berries being very large and well flavored, it must be a jiroper kind to be coupled with 
many sorts. There is a peculiar delicacy in the flesh of the white sweetvvater ; it is also a remarkably 
thin-skinned grape, with large berries ; consequently, it is a proper kind to couple with various sorts that 
are small and less delicate. Were the red Frontignac and white sweetwater wedded together, their 
union would probably produce a very valuable sort, as there would be a good chance of its being both 
large and delicate, and well flavored. The Syrian vine is only admired for producing most astonishingly 
large bunches, and, therefore, I would not advise the joining this coarse sort to any other except the fol- 
lowing, as, in all likelihood, the offspring would only produce bunches much less ponderous. But the 
white muscat of Alexandria, having larger berries and longer foot-stalks, there would be a probability of 
producing a kind between this and the Syrian grape, that would exceed the original parents both in size 
and flavor." The following kinds also admit of a junction with great propriety, viz. " the black Damascus 
and grizzly Frontignac; the flame-colored Tokay and red Frontignac ; the white muscat of Alexandria 
and white sweetwater ; the black Frontignac and white muscadine ; the St. Peter's grape and white mus- 
cat of Alexandria." Other examples might be cited, but these Speechly considers as " sufficient to stimu- 
late persons of taste and curiosity to pursue an amusement that one may venture to pronounce will con- 
tribute both to their advantage and pleasure." He augurs, " that the best sort of grapes hitherto known 
will at some future day be esteemed only as secondary kinds." {Treatise on the Vine, p. 44.) Neill observes, 
tliat as several persons are now engaged in the raising of seedling vines, in all probability some excellent 
and hardy kinds will soon be produced ; so that another generation may once more see vineyards com- 
mon in this country. {Ed. En. art. Hort.) Grapes, for seed, should be permitted to remain on the 
plant till the fruit is perfectly mature, and the seeds of a very dark brown color. They should be sepa- 
rated from the pulp, and preserved till February or the beginning of March. They should then be sown 
in pots filled with light fresh mould, and plunged in a moderately warm hot-bed ; they will come up in 
four or six weeks, and when the plants are about six inches high, they should be transplanted singly, 
into forty-eights, and afterwards into pots of larger size. Water gently, as circumstances require, allow 
abundance of light and air, and carefully avoid injuring any of the leaves. Cut down the plants every 
autumn to two good buds, and suffer only one of these to extend itself in the following spring. Shift into 
larger pots as occasion requires, till they have produced fruit. This, under good management, will take 
place in the fourth or fifth year, when the approved sorts should be selected and the rest destroyed, or 
used as stocks on which to graft or inarch good sorts. 

4806. Forsyth, and some other authors, advise planting seedling vines the second year of their growth, 
against a wall in the open air, and there letting them remain till they produce fruit. Where there is 
abundance of v/alling to spare, and no great haste requisite for proving the fruit, this is a very good 
mode, as the fruit in such a case is certain of growing larger, and therefore affording a better opportunity 
of judging of its merits, as to size of bunch and berry. Keeping the plants in large pots, on the other 
hand, though the bunches and berries may not grow quite so large, yet as both the wood and fruit may 
be ripened under glass, is a more eligible mode ; the plants wiU produce fruit sooner, and that fruit will 
be of better flavor. 

_ 4807. Speechly says, " it would not be prudent to furnish a wall, or any part of a hot-house, with seed- 
ling vines in their untried state, or before they have produced fruit ; for although the prospect of obtain- 
ing good kinds from seed saved in a hot-house, be more promising and certain than that of getting them 
from seed of grapes ill vine countries, (because there, when the vines flower, the very air is impregnated 
with the farina of the grapes of the vineyard, which are, generally, of sorts of harsh, austere qualities, 
esteemed only for making wine, and not at all fit for eating) ; yet many of the new kinds from seed will 
prove to be worse sorts than the originals from which the seed was saved. A specimen, therefore, of the 
fruit should be obtained from each plant, be tried and tasted before it is permitted to be planted against 
the walls in a vinery or hot-house, or in any permanent situation. The fruit of seedlings is not even 
always such as to render it advisable to introduce the plants in a vineyard ; for though it may not have the 
sweetness, flavor, bulk, or precocity desired in an eating grape, it inay be of that insipid large-berried 
kind, which is fit only for making the most inferior wines. In most vine countries, a small black berry 
with an austere taste, and aromatic flavor, and a close bunch like that of our black cluster, is preferred 
to all others." {Treat on the Vine, 8vo. edit. p. 60.) It may be observed, that though vine-plants raised 
from th^ seeds of black or red grapes wiU generally produce red or black berries, yet they wiU occasionally 
produce white ones ; and the produce of white berries wiU sometimes, in like manner, be berries of other 
colors. Thus plants, from stones of the peach, wiU sometimes produce nectarines ; and though a nec- 
tarine-stone will, in general, produce a tree of the same kind, as Collinson experienced {Smith's Correspond, 
of Linn. 71.), yet it will sometimes also, as the French gardeners declare, produce trees bearing peaches. 

4808, loT/ers. The advantages of layers are generally stated to" be that of pro- 
curing large showy plants that come immediately into bearing, and we have given (2957. ) 



Book I. 



GRAPE-VINE. 



755 



a successful instance of this practice from layers made in a vinery ; but when taken from 
stools in the open air, it happens almost always that the roots of the layer are not ripened ; 
the consequence of which is, that their extremities rot off, and the following year the 
plants make hardly any shoots. Layering without, or but with a trifling incision, as is 
too frequently done in the hurry of nursery business, greatly contributes to this effect, 
by obliging the shoot to derive all its nourisliment from the parent plant or stool, to 
which, in autumn, the descending sap is returned. Whereas, when a deep incision is 
made, or a ring of bark taken off in Williams's manner (2168. ), less sap ascends, the shoot 
is not so long, it ripens sooner, and the descending sap reposes in, and ripens the roots. 
It is not easy to conceive in what way plants so raised can be inferior to those raised 
from cuttings of one or of several eyes ; though it appears to be the general opinion that 
they are not so long-lived as plants raised from one eye. " Vine-plants raised by layers," 
Speechly observes, " are much inferior to plants raised by cuttings, both in point of fu- 
ture vigor and durability." Hitt wonders how any one can prefer cuttings to layers, since 
the former are always one year beyond the latter. 

4809. By cuttings. The advantages of propagating by cuttings are economy in labor, 
economy in the v/ood or shoots to be propagated from, and tops or shoots proportioned 
to the roots. There are three kinds of cuttings used in propagating vines : — 

4810. Long cuttings. The first are from a foot to eighteen inches long, consisting of new or young 
wood, with a joint or tv/o of that of the preceding year. This is the sort recommended by Miller ; 
adopted in forming vineyards on the continent; and formerly also in this country in planting walls or 
vineries. They are inserted so as to leave only two eyes above ground ; the earth is firmly pressed round 
the lower part, to which the old wood is attached ; they are mulched, and water is supplied regularly in 
dry weather. Cuttings, of this sort, so treated, strike freely, as Speechly observes, either with or with- 
out bottom heat We have seen them in some French nurseries producing luxuriant shoots and branches 
of grapes the first year. Justice says he prefers stocking a vinery from such cuttings to using rooted 
plants. 

4811. Short cuttings. The second mode is that of forming the cuttings with only one eye on young or 
one-year-old wood, and a few inches of that of the preceding year attached. " Each cutting should have 
two inches of the old wood, with one eye of the new. The bottom part should be cut perfectly smooth ; 
plant in pots, one cutting in each pot, which, as to size, should be a forty-eight. When the plants begin 
to get strong, and the pots full of roots, it wiU be necessary to shift them from the forty-eights to the 
thirty-twos." {Speechly.) 

4812. Single eyes. By the third mode, the cuttings have only a single eye on young or one-year-old 
wood. This mode was first adopted by the Rev. M. Mitchell, and by him communicated to Speechly, 
about the year 1770. The following is Speechly's reasoning in its favor : " It is allowed," he says, " that 
cuttings are generally i)referable to layers, and that plants of any sort raised from small cuttings, com- 
monly make the best plants. The new plant is injured in proportion as it partakes too abundantly of its 
original or mother plant. Hence, the less the bulk of the matter that forms the new plant the better ; for 
plants raised from seed have the smallest beginning of any, and are preferable both to layers and cut- 
tings." {Tr. on Vine, 52.) Perhaps, the chief advantage of propagating by eyes in preference to short 
or long cuttings or layers, is, that the sets are more manageable, and can be more readily potted and 
placed in pits or frames to receive bottom heat ; on which, applied early in spring and continued through 
summer, accompanied by proper shiftings and waterings, much more than on the form of the cuttings, 
depend abundance of roots and fitness for bearing the second year. We have seen single eyes raised 
in pineries, produce sti'ong shoots from ten to twenty feet the first year, and others, in cold frames or pits, 
with only a little bottom heat to start the plants in spring, produce weak shoots, not longer than two or 
three feet. Ripe wood is to be chosen for propagating by eyes ; and though some are of opinion that cut- 
tings taken from the lower part of the vine are preferable to those that grow higher and at a distance 
from the root, yet Speechly says, he never could find any difference, provided the wood was equally well 
ripened. Forward shoots, from vines forced early, he considers as the most eligible ; and these will ge- 
nerally be found at the most distant parts from the root, as vines generally break first at the extremities 
of the shoots ; and at these extremities will be found both the strongest, earliest, and best-ripened wood, 
and largest and most abundant bunches of fruit. Very strong shoots abound too much with pith to make 
good cuttings, the requisites to which are as follow : " 1. The eye or bud should be large, prominent, 
and bold. 2. The shoots should be moderately strong, round, and short-jointed. 3. The texture of the 
wood should be. close, solid, and compact ; and the best criterion of its maturity is, its solidity, and hav- 
ing very little pith." {Tr. on Vine, 57.) " Choose fit shoots at the pruning season, and preserve them till 
wanted in spring, by cutting them into moderate lengths, and placing their lower ends in earth, which must 
be moistened, if it get very dry. Cut the upper part of the shoot sloping, with a sharp knife, about a quarter 
of an inch above the eye ; and, at about three inches below the eye, cut off the wood horizontally, or right 
across, and smooth the section." In some of the London nurseries, Speechly's mode of forming vine- 
cuttings is reversed, and the wood is cut off horizontally close below the eye, and at three inches above it : 
others cut at equal distances from the eye, and bury the whole cutting in the soil, with the eye upper- 
most, which appears superior even to Speechly's mode, where no bottom heat is given, as affording a 
greater supply of nourishment to the young shoot. Plant in pots, and apply bottom heat as in propagating 
by short cuttings. 

4813. By grafting. The advantages of this mode of propagation may not at first 
sight appear, but they are, Speechly observes, " many and important. " First, when a 
wall, or vinery, is planted with inferior kinds of vines, the usual method of stubbing 
them up and supplying their places with better sorts, is attended with much expense and 
loss of time : as several years must elapse before the wall can be completely finished 
with new vines ; but, by grafting, the nature of the vines may be changed without ex- 
pense or loss of time ; for I constantly have good grapes from the same year's graft ; 
and in a hot-house the grafts, if permitted, will frequently shoot thirty or forty feet the 
first summer. Secondly, in small vineries, or vine-frames, where it would be incon- 
venient to have any considerable variety of sorts from roots, they may be procured by 
grafting different kinds upon one and the same plant. A Syrian vine now (1759) grow- 
ing in the hot-house at Welbeck, produces sixteen different sorts of grapes. But the 
most important advantage, Speechly considers to be, " the improving the various kinds 

3 C 2 



756 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



of grapes, and particularly the small kinds, which generally make weak wood. By 
grafting the weak and delicate growing \'ines, as the blue Frontignac, upon robust and 
vigorous stocks, as the Syrian, it will produce well-sized handsome bunches, almost as 
large as those of the Hamburgh." The Syrian vine, raised from seed, is greatly pre- 
ferable to all others for stocks. If the seed degenerate to a kind of wildness, so much 
the greater will be the vigor of the plants, and the higher the flavor of the sorts grafted 
on them. At the pruning season select cuttings for grafts from the best bearing branches, 
in general preferring the bottom part of last year's shoot ; preserve them, by inserting 
them three parts of their length in pots, till wanted. The season for grafting in stoves 
is the beginning of January ; in the open air, the middle of March. On small stocks not 
more than one inch in diameter, cleft-grafting will be found the most proper ; but, upon 
larger stocks, whip-grafting is to be preferred. As vine-grafts do not take so freely as 
those of most other fruits, the operation must be performed with the greatest care. 
But the most eligible mode of grafting vines is that by approach, in which case either the 
stock or scion must be growing in a pot. Strong plants, two years potted, are to be 
preferred for the open air ; but, for a vinery or hot-house, plants from the nursery' may 
be potted, or shifted, if already in pots, and inarched the same season. In whip or cleft 
grafting, the clay may be taken oflP when the scion has made shoots five or six inches 
long ; but here both clay and bandage should remain two or three months after the graft 
has formed a union, lest the grafted part spring from the stock. 

4814. Knight finds grafting most successful when the lower part of the scion consists of two-year-old 
wood, and when the graft is well covered with clay kept moist, or if the branch be on a horizontal trellis 
with a pot or saucer placed under the graft, and the point of junction kept well covered with earth occa- 
sionally watered. {Ho)-t. Tratis. iv. 105.) 

4815. Braddick has made several experiments on grafting vines : he found the scion generally sodden 
by the bleeding of the stalk ; but, at last, he contrived by a very close bandage round the graft to force the 
sap of the stock up through the vessels of the scion, when the latter grew. From these, and various otJier 
experiments, he says, " I feel confident in stating, that healthy vines may be successfully grafted with 
young wood of the preceding year's growth, from the time that the shoots of the stocks which the grafts 
are to be put upon, have made four or five eyes, until midsummer, with every prospect of the graft's 
growing, and without the least danger of the stocks suffering by bleeding. They may likewise be graft,ed 
with shoots of the same summer's growth, worked into the rind of the young wood, from the time that the 
young bunches of grapes become visible on the stocks till July, out of doors ; or till a month later, under 
glass. The operation must not be performed later than the periods here specified, because time is 
necessary for the young shoots of the graft to become hard and ripen before winter." {Hort. Trans. 
V. 204.) 

4816. Culture. For the culture of the vine in the forcing department, see Chap. VII. 
Sect. II. What follows concerns chiefly the management of vines in the open air. 

4817. Soil. The vine will thrive in any soil that has a dry bottom ; in such as are rich and deep, it will 
grow luxuriantly and produce abundance of large fruit ; in shallow, dry, chalky, gravelly, or schistous 
soils, it will produce lesg fruit, but of better flavor. The greater part of the vineyards of France, Bosc ob- 
serves [Cours complet d'Ag7-iculturc, SiC. art. Vigne), are on a soil argil-calcareous: sometimes primitive, 
as those near Dijon ; and sometimes secondary, as those at Bourdeaux. Argillaceous gravel is the next 
in frequency, as near Nismes and Montpelier, and that which produces the Vins des Graves of Bourdeaux. 
Both good and bad wines are produced from the debris of granites ; among the former are the cotes roties 
and hermitage on the Rhone. The excellent wines of Anjou are made from vines growing among schis- 
tous rocks. Wines which are made from vines planted in chalky soils, are weak, colorless, and do not 
keep well, as those of Champagne. Wines grown on the ashes discharged from volcanoes are excellent, 
as those of Vesuvius and Etna. Soils surcharged with oxide of iron, red or yellow, are not less proper for 
making good wine. Retentive clays are the worst soils for the vine; the flowers are in great part abor- 
tive ; the fruit, if it sets, does not ripen ; the shoots not ripening well are more easily affected by tVosts; 
and the wine, if any can be made, is weak and flavorless. Such a soil, even when in a warm climate, is 
particularly obnoxious to the vine, as Bosc observed in the botanic garden established at Charlestown, in 
South Carolina, by Michaux. There vines brought from France produced for six months in the year, 
buds, leaves, and shoots ; flowers, the greater part of which proved abortive, and green and ripe berries 
This circumstance, he considers, will prevent the successful culture of the vine in that part of America. 

4818. Sivitzer observes, that the soil for the vine should be light, having a bottom of chalk or gravel 
under a surface of about two feet deep and free from springs ; it cannot be too hot nor too dry, providea 
it be not in its own nature so very barren that nothing will grow upon it. If given to brambles, it is a 
certain sign of fitness, as no plant whatever is so co-natural to the vine as this shrub. In chalky-bottomed 
lands, and in gravel, which is not springy or spewj', gripes are the largest and sweetest of any ; and where 
these are most abundant, we dare challenge even Paris itself to excel us. (J'r. Fruit Gard. 149.) 

4819. Hitt, having observed a vine at Belvoir Castle growing out of the stony foundation of a wall, with- 
out any other roots than what were fixed therein, producing better fruit, and earlier ripe, than any other 
in the open ground in these gardens, advises the mixture of lime-rubbish, brick-bats, &c. for a foot deep 
in the bottom of wall-borders destined for the vine. {Tr. onFr. Tr. 12.) 

4820. Lawrence says, "he cannot easily be brought to think that any soil or situation can be too dry foi 
the roots of the vine, after having seen at Bamwall, near Oundle, a flourishing vine grow from between 
the joints of an old castle-wall, near twenty feet high from the ground, and which produced admirable 
crops of grapes when well managed." {Fruit Gard.) 

4821. Speedily says, " the soil in which I have known the vine to prosper in the most superlative degree 
without artificial aid, was a kind of rich sandy loam, intermixed with beds of materials like jointed slate 
or stone, so very soft in its nature as almost to be capable of being crumbled between the fingers." Strong 
and deep lands most suitable for tillage are the least so for vines, and hence the introduction of vineyards 
would have no bad effect respecting agriculture." {Tr. on the Vine, 29.) 

4822. Manures. Dung, Speechly observes, should not be permitted to approach the roots of vines till it 
be perfectly reduced to a kind of black mould. Soot, wood-ashes, pigeons' and hens' dung, he considers 
too hot for the root of the vine ; pond-mud and moor-earth too cold. Stableyard-dung is too spirituous, 
hot, and fiery, when introduced before its heat is thoroughly abated. Some sorts of lime are bad ; but 
others mightbe advantageous, if introduced into vine-compost. Vines are greatly injured in their roots 
by tl;e common practice of laying lime-rubbish for the bottom floor in the preparation of the ground. 
Blood, the oflral of animals or shambles' manure, horn-shavings, old rags, hair, shavings of leather, bone- 
dust, dung of deer and sheep, and humaji ordure," are admissible when duly meliorated by time, a win- 



Book I. 



GRAPE-VINE. 



757 



ter's frost, and repeatedly turning over. The dust and dirt of roads, Speechly greatly esteems as a manure 
for vines ; its fertile nature he attributes, " in part, to the dung, urine, and other rich materials of which 
it is composed ; and in part to a kind of magnetic power impressed upon it by friction, and its per^jetual 
pulverisation," {Ti: on the Vine, p. 37.) Cow-dung is generally preferred for the vine in France; but the 
vine-growers take every sort they can get: tlie more careful, however, form composts of earths, leaves, 
weeds, cleanings of ditches, rivers, and ponds, which they turn over a year at least before using. In some 
places, littery dung is buried in trenches between the rows; but in general, the dung, of whatever kind, is 
spread on the surface, and regularly dug in. Green crops are sown and dug in in some places. {Cours. 
Complete &c, art. Vigne.) Forsyth considers the best manure for vines to be a mixture of vegetable mould, 
rotten spit-dung, and fresh loam ; these ingredients should be thrown into a heap, and frequently turned 
a year or two before it is used. The vine is allowed by all gardeners to be a gross feeder ; the fertility of 
both the Hampton Court and Valentine's vines are attributed to their roots having found their way, the 
former into a large common sev, er, and the latter into a pond of stagnated muddy water. {Uort. Trans. 
iii. 337.) Some vines in the hot-houses at Earl's Court produced abundance of blossoms the second year 
from the eye, and the \ oung wood of the same vines the third year is now ^June 1. 1820.) throwing out 
laterals with large bunches of flowers ; so that these vines the third year are producing two crops, one of 
•which is now ripe and the other in blossom. The cause of this extraordinary fertility appears to be the 
soil of the border, which is composed of equal [oarts of garden-earth and blood mixed together, and repeat- 
edly turned over one year before using. 

4823. Vine-ivalls. A south wall is always to be preferred for vines ; though, in some 
years, the hardier sorts may attain a tolerable degree of perfection on a wall considerably 
inclined to the east or west. Vines, Speechly observes, do well on low walls six feet 
high ; and it has been found that the plants grow stronger, and afford larger grapes when 
they do not exceed four or five feet in height ; they enjoy in this way both the reflected 
heat of the wall and of the earth. Flued walls have been tried for vines in some parts of 
the north of England ; but Speechly, and English gardeners in general, do not approve 
of the practice. In Scotland, though flued walls are more common and better under- 
stood, yet vines are seldom planted in the open air. For standards or plantations in the 
way of vineyards, Switzer recommends, "that side or declivity of a hill lying to the south 
or south-east, which, if favored with other hills, somewhat higher, clothed with wood on 
the north, north-east, and north-west, will break the severity of those perishing quarters." 
Speechly concurs in this opinion, adding, that the hills in the counties bordering on the 
English channel, have in general declivities tending to the south, and are, therefore, 
highly favorable for vineyards. Steeps of poor gravelly and rocky soils, in warm situ- 
ations, would produce more under vines than under any other crop. 

4824. Sorts far the open air. Some of these have been already enumerated. (4801.) And an addition 
may be made from the hardy sorts described in the table. 

4§25. Planting. Where a wall is to be entirely covered with vines, three plants of a sort maybe planted 
at the distance of three, or if a large-leaved kind, of four feet from each other ; the two outer plants to be 
considered as temporary, to fill the wall and produce a supply of fruit ; and the centre plant to be con- 
sidered as permanently to fill the space occupied by the other two. The temporary plants will, therefore, 
be trained chiefly on the upper part of the wall, and the permanent ones below ; and in four or five years 
the latter will be in a state to cover the wall, when the former may be rooted out. When vines are only 
planted in the intervals between other fruit-trees, or on piers, to be trained within a narrow upright space, 
then one plant to each is sufficient. Some however, as Forsyth, place two against a pier, one on each 
side ; but this is more to obtain a variety of sorts than to fill the space. 

4826. In jJTuning and training in the open air, any of the modes described as appli- 
cable to forced vines (2965.) may be adopted. As they break more regularly in the 
open air than when forced, the spur-method f Jig. 455. ) and the fruit-tree method (Jig* 
456.) seem to deserve the preference. 

4827- JVilliams, of Pitmaston, [Hort. Trans, iii. 250.) describes a mode of training so as to fiU up the va- 
cancies of other fruit-trees, which seems well deserving attention. " A vine," he says, " might be 
trained horizontally under the coping of a wall to a great distance, and by inverting the bearing shoots, 
the spaces between the other fruit-trees and the top of the wall could readily be filled up, and if diflPerent 
vines were inarched to the horizontal branch, the south wall of a large garden might be furnished with a 
variety of sorts from the stem and root of a single plant, the roots of which would not encumber the 
border in which the other fruit-trees were growing. I have an experiment of this kind noiv in progress 
in my garden. Within a few years past, I have gradually trained bearing branches of a small black clus- 
ter-grape to the distance of nearly fifty feet from the root, and I find the bunches every year grow larger, 
and ripen earlier as the shoots continue to advance. According to Knight's theory of the circulation of 
the sap, the ascendi-sig sap must necessarily become enriched by the nutritious particles it meets with in 
its progress through the vessels of the alburnum ; the wood at the top of tall trees, therefore, becomes 
short-jointed and full of blossom-buds, and the fruit there situated attains its greatest perfection. Hence 
we find pine and fir trees loaded with the finest cones on the top boughs, the largest acorns grow on the 
terminal branches of the oak, and the finest mast on the high boughs of the beech and chestnut ; so like- 
wise apples, pears, cherries, &c. are always best flavored from the top of the tree. But I suppose there 
are certain limits beyond which the sap would be so loaded with nutriment that it could not freely cir- 
culate." 

4828. Training the shoots of vines along the ground like those of melons and cucumbers has been proposed 
by Vispre (Dissert, on the Growth of Wine in Eng. Bath, 1786.), and was practised by him on a small scale 
at Chelsea, xvhere " the grapes were considerably larger than those of the same kind growing on a south 
wall, and well ripened." Bacon had before suggested this mode, from a report that "in some places 
these vines are suffered to grow like herbs, spreading upon the ground, and the grapes of these vines are 
very large, &c." It appears from Vispre, that the Rev. M. Le Brocq had taken out a patent for training 
fruit-trees in this manner. Speechly says, " Fruit-trees of various sorts have been so trained at Welbeck 
for fourteen years ;" and we have seen the practice adopted in the Earl of Selkirk's garden at St Mary's 
Isle in Kircudbrightshire, above fifteen years ago. 

4829. Growing the vine on espaliers. This maybe done, following the same directions in all respects as 
for walls ; but it is evident that, under such treatment, the fruit will not come to the same degree of ma- 
turity as when enjoying the shelter and reflection of a compact screen. Where wine is made from green 
grapes, as is now frequently done, the practice may be preferable to growing the vine as dwarf standards, 

48.30. Growing the vine as standards. This practice may be adopted either in the borders of gardens 
or in extensive plantations as vineyards, and the plants may be trained either like red currants or rasp 
i?crries. In the former case no stakes are used ; but about a foot from the ground, three or more shoots, 

3 C 3 



758 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



eighteen inches or two feet in length, diverge from the stem, and supply yoimg wood annually for bear- 
ing. The summer pruning consists in removing shoots which have no fruit, or are not wanting for the 
succeeding season ; in topping fruit-bearing shoots, and also those for the succeeding years, when incon- 
veniently long and straggling . For as by this mode the shoots destined to bear are all cut into three or 
four ej'es at the winter season, no inconvenience arises from their throwing out laterals near the extre- 
mities, which stopping will generally cause them to do. This mode is adopted in vineyards on dry rocky 
situations where they do not run much to wood. In training standard vines, as raspberries, the single 
stem at bottom is not allowed to exceed six or eight inches in height, and from this two or three shoots 
are trained or tied to a single stake of three or four feet in length. These shoots bear each two or three 
bunches within a foot or eighteen inches of the ground, and they are annually succeeded by others which 
spring from their base ; that is, from the crown or top of the dwarf main stem." This is the mode practised 
in the north of France and in Germany ; in the south of France and in Italy, the base or main stem is often 
higher, and furnished with side shoots, in order to afford a greater supply of bearing wood, which is tied 
to one or more poles of greater height. The summer pruning in this case is nearly the same as in the 
last. In the winter pruning, the wood that has borne is cut out, and the new wood shortened in cold si- 
tuations to three or four eyes, and in warmer places to six or eight eyes. 

4831. Formation of vineyards. A vineyard is a collection of standard vines, planted 
in rovps of a greater or less width, according to the height and mode of training proposed 
to be adopted ; and according as the soil may be rich and deep, or poor and tliin, or its 
surface flat or inclined. A square yard of surface to each plant, when tliey are kept low, 
may be considered as a desirable medium. 

48-32. Where plantations of vines are ?mde on, the sides of very steep hills, it is sometimes customary to 
form the surface into terraces or horizontal beds rising one above another. The width of these beds or 
terraces depends on the regular or irregular declivity of the hill. When the declivity is regular and the 
hill steep, each terrace is narrow and supported by a wall, against which the vines are planted and trained 
as on low garden- walls or espaliers ; but, in general, the irregularity of the declivity and surfaces of hills, 
causes a very great inequality in the breadth and height of the terraces, and in these cases the vines are 
planted as standards, according to the room afforded by the platforms of the terraces. The waUs which 
support these platforms in vine-countries, are generally too rude to admit of training against them, and 
therefore one of the standard modes above described is almost alM-ays adopted. 

4833. Sorts of grapes proper for a vineyard. On the continent the vines-reckoned best for making wine 
are by no means trie most agreeable to eat ; and there is always a clear distinction made between fruits to eat, 
and fruits for the press, by the nurserymen, who, in general, have only plants of the former sort for sale. 
The names of vinej'ard-grapes vary in'every district ; so that were it desirous to procure sorts from France 
or German}', only a general order could be given. In this country, however, it would probably, in the 
event of plantmg a vineyard, be found preferable to select from the sorts already acclimated, and rendered 
hardy by many years' culture and propagating from seed, such as the clusters, sweetwaters, csperione, 
&c. The sorts planted in the vineyard at Painshill, were the Burgundy, or large black cluster, and 
the miller-grape, or small black cluster. The vineyard-grapes in France, Germany, and Italy, and we are 
informed, in Spain, Portugal, and every other wine-country, may be considered as varieties or subvarieties 
of the black cluster ; and the vines which are grown to produce sweet wines, as the Constantia and Malm- 
sey Madeira, variations of the chasselas or muscadine. 

4834. Maldng of winefro?n grapes. The making of wine is a part of domestic economy that can hardly 
be considered as included under gardening. We shall, therefore, merely suggest, that where grapes are 
to be pressed in any quantity, the management of the liquor shoxild not, if posstble, be left to mere empiric 
practitioners. Some knowledge of the general principles of fermentation will help to guard against acci- 
dents, and direct in doubtful cases. The assistance, therefore, of a person possessing some knowledge of 
chemistry, or one who has been concerned in the manufacture of British wines, will be found desirable on 
such occasions. An excellent paper " On the Processes of Wine-making," will be found in the second 
volume of the Memoirs of the Caledonian Horticultural Society, by Dr. Macculloch, of Woolwich. jMat- 
thew-s (in the Hort. Trans, ii.'}, has given a receipt for making a vei-y tolerable sort of red wine from the 
leaves of the claret grape ; these leaves, it is suggested, might be" employed to give color to ^^-ine pro- 
duced from certain sorts of white grapes, green gooseberries, or other fruits producing a colorless fermented 
liquor. 

4835. Insects luhich infest the vine.' The red spider, of which there are many sorts, at- 
tacks the leaves in sprino-, or early in summer ; increases prodigiously in dry weatlier, and 
soon damages and destroys the foliage. Speechly says, red spiders " generally reside 
and breed on the under side of the leaves, and the infested leaves are very distingidshable 
as soon as they are attacked by them, for the insect wounds the fine capillary vessels with 
its proboscis, and this causes the upper surface of the leaf to appear full of very small 
dots, or spots of a light color. "W'lien the acari are very numerous, they work a fine 
web over the whole under side of the leaf, as also round the edges thereof ; and it is cu- 
rious en-r>ugh to observe, that they comm^only carry tliis web in a straight line, from one 
angular point of the leaf to another, on which boundaiy line, in a warm day, they pass 
and re-pass in very great num.bers. "Watering 
is the only eiFectual means of destroying ttiis 
insect." {Tr. on the Vi?ie, 162.) Tiie thrips 
{Thrips, L. Latr. and Leach.) is more in- 
jurious to vines in the forcing department 
than to those in the open air. Hovv^ever, if 
young shoots chance to receive any injury 
from late spring frosts, the tender part of the 
leaf will immediately curl up, and change to 
a dark -brown color; and in this state, the 
thrips generally attacks them -with great greedi- 
ness, especially the white sv.'eetwater and 
white muscadine kinds. The green fly some- 
times attacks vines ; but seldom so as ma- 
terially to injure them. Smoking destroys 




Book I. 



FIG. 



759 



both insects, There are two or three kinds of cocci, or turtle insect, that sometimes 
infest the vine, (Coccus hespendum and adonidum,) but they rarely do much injury in tlie 
open air. 

4836. The blue fly (Musca vomitoria, Latr.) attacks the fruit when nearly ripe, before the wasp or 
birds begin to devour it. Forsyth says, " As soon as it makes its appearance, you must provide 
betimes plenty of bottles, a little more than half filled with some sweet liquor, to entice them to 
enter and be drowned. Hang the bottles on the nails, at proper distances, all over the vines, and also 
place some of them at the bottom of the wall." 

4837. The wasp (Fespa vulgaiis), and in some places the hornet {V. Crabro, fig, 506.), attacks the fruit 
like the blue fly, and is to be destroyed in a similar manner ; or by tying up the bunches in gauze bags. 

'i^S^. Birds of various species, but chiefly the smaller kinds which may abound in the neighborhood, 
also attack grapes. A few of them may be shot and hung up as scares ; or bagging may be adopted ; or 
where there is a full regular crop over the wall, trellis, or standards, the trees may be protected by 
netting or bunting. The latter will protect them also from the fly and wasp. 

SuBSECT. 3. Fig. — Ficiis Carica, L. {Trew. Ehret. t. 73, 4.) Poly gam. D'uec. L, 
and Urticece, J. Figuier, Fr. ; Feigenbaum, Ger. ; and Figo or Fico, Ital. 

4839. The Jig-tree is a low tree, a native of Asia and Barbary ; naturalised in Italy 
and the south of France, and enduring the open air in the mildest parts of Britain. The 
fig-tree in France and Italy grows as large as our apple-trees, but in this country seldom 
exceeds two yards in height ; the trunk is about the thickness of the human arm ; the 
wood, porous and spongy ; the bark, ash-colored ; the branches smooth with oblong 
white dots ; the leaves annual in Europe, but perennial within the tropics, cordate, 
ovate, three or five lobed, thick, and the size of the hand. The fruit is a berry, turbinate 
and hollow within ; produced chiefly on the upper part of the shoots of the former year, 
in the axils of the leaves on small round peduncles. The flower is produced within the 
fruit ; what is considered as the fruit being a common calyx or receptacle : the male 
flowers are few, and inserted near the opening in the extremity of the receptacle, or 
fruit; the female flowers are very numerous, and fill the rest of the hollow space within. 
The greater part prove abortive, both with and without the process of caprification. The 
fig forms an important article of culture in the isles and borders of the Mediterranean 
sea, and especially in Greece, Italy, and Spain. It is also much cultivated for drying 
in the south of France; and for the table, at Argenteuil, near Paris. The earliest 
notice we have of its culture in England is by Turner in 1562. The first trees were 
brought over from Italy by Cardinal Pole, in 1525, during the reign of Henry the 
Eighth, and yet exist in the gardens of the archbishop at Lambeth. They are of the 
white Marseilles kind, and still bear delicious fruit. They cover a space of fifty feet in 
height, and forty in breadth; the circumference of the trunk of two of the trees is 
twenty-eight, and of another twenty-one inches. In the severe winter of 1813-14, these 
trees were greatly injured, and in consequence their principal stems were cut over near to 
the ground ; but they are fast recovering. At Oxford, in the garden of the Regius 
Professor of Hebrew, is a fig-tree, which was brought from Aleppo, and planted by Dr. 
Pocock, in 1 643. It is in a thriving condition, and bears a black fig. Gerrard says, " the 
fig requires a hot-wall ;" and Parkinson, that they are planted in great square tubs, to 
be removed into the sun in the summer time, and into the house in winter. The culture 
of the fig was little known here till the time of Miller, who introduced above a dozen 
new sort^ from Italy. Pie observes, that the generality of Englishmen are not lovers of 
this fruit, and that, therefore, few trouble themselves with the culture of it. Since 
Miller's time, the fig has been introduced to the forcing department, and there cultivated 
to a much higher degree of perfection than before on open walls ; and though it be still 
true, that a taste for the fig in its green or fresh state is less prevalent in England than 
elsewhere, yet, by those who have been some time abroad, it is generally much esteemed. 

4840. Monck " believes the fig-tree to be of all the fruit-trees which we cul- 
tivate in our gardens, the least understood; but, to those who may have acquired a 
knowledge of its habits, the most tractable. No tree is propagated more easily. I sent 
from London in April last to Kelsay in Northumberland, two cuttings of figs. They 
were so small as to travel by the post in a common letter-cover. I have gathered this 
autumn from one of them three ripe figs, and two from the other. The fig-tree may be 
checked in its useless habit of luxuriant growth by ringing, so as to become fruitful at a 
very small size. It may be forced by heat and liquid manure, with copious irrigation, 
so as to support an abundant crop of fruit, and bring them to perfection, to a greater 
extent than any other tree. Spare branches of a large fig-tree growing out of doors may 
be ringed, and surrounded by a small pot of earth, into which they will speedily strike 
root, so as to bear being separated in autumn from the tree ; and they may be used to 
furnish any glass houses with trees to bear fruit through the next summer. I believe, too, 
that the fig-tree may be easily propagated by inoculation, if that should be desired." 
(Hort. Trans, v. 173.) 

4841. Use. It is cultivated here entirely for the dessert; but in fig- countries it is 
eaten green or dried, fried or stewed, and in various ways, with or without bread or 
meat, as food. Abroad the fig is introduced during dinner, as well as at the dessert. 

3 C 4 



760 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



In common with the melon, it is presented after soup ; and the person who cuts a fig, 
holds it by the small end, takes a thin circular slice oflP the large end, and then peels 
down the thick skin of the fruit in flakes, making a single bonne louche of the soft interior 
part. All the species of the genus Ficus have more or less the quality of intenerating 
animal fibre, like the pawpaw-tree {Carica papaw) ; the F. elasticus in the greatest de- 
gree, and next, the common fig. The milky sap may be used as rennet, and for 
destroying warts. Philips says, " a gentleman who lately made the experiment, assured 
me that a haunch of venison, which had lately been killed, was hung up in a fig-tree 
when the leaves were on, at about ten o'clock in the evening, and was removed before 
sunrise in the morning, when it was found in a perfect state for cooking, and he adds, 
that in a few hours more, it would have been in a state of putrefaction." {Pom. Brit. 
169, ) Burying in the soil for ten or twelve hours is a well known and effectual resource 
for intenerating recently killed fowls, or tough butcher-meat. 

4842. Varieties. These, in fig-countries, are almost as numerous as those of the 
grape ; new sorts being readily procured from seed, and continued by cuttings, layers, 
or grafting. Bosc says, that even in France new sorts are continually produced, and 
as quickly falling into neglect. The varieties most esteemed in England are the fol- 
lowing : those marked thus (*) will ripen as standards imder favorable circumstances. 



*Bro-wn chestnut-colored ischia (island 
of Ischia). This.is one of the largest that 
■we have : it is of a brown or chestnut 
color on the outside, and purple 
•within ; the grains are large, and the 
pulp sweet and high-flavored. It 
ripens in August; and if planted 
against a hot-wall, two crops may be 
obtained annually. 

*Black Genoa fig. This is a long fruit 
of a dark purple color, the inside 
being of a brignt red, and the flesh 
very high-flavored. It ripens in the 
latter end of August. 

*Small white early fig. (Langley Pom. 
t. 5'2.) The skin of this fruit is of a 
pale yellow when ripe : the flesh is 
white and sweet. It is ripe about 
the latter end of August or beginning 
of September. 

*Large white Genoa fig. (Poii. et Turp. 
Fr. t. 4.) This is a large fruit, the 
skin is thin and yellow when ripe, 
and red within. It is a good fruit, 
and is ripe about the latter end of 
August. This and the preceding bear 
two crops annually. 

Black ischia fig. This is a middle-sized 
fruit; the skin is almost black when 



ripe, and the inside of a deep red. 
The flesh is high-flavored, and the 
trees good bearers. 
Brown and black smeill Italian figs. 
These are cultivated in pots ; the 
fruit is small, round, and very deli- 
cious. Forsyth ^thered from one 
plant in a twenty-four pot, two dozen 
of figs at one gathering. 
Malta fig. This is a small brown fig ; 
the skin of a pale brown, the inside of 
the same color ; the flesh is sweet cind 
high-flavored. It is ripe in August 
and September. 
Murrey ; brown Naples fig. This is a 
pretty large fruit, of a light brown 
color, and the inside nearly of the 
same color ; the flesh is well-flavored ; 
and it ripens about the middle of 
September. 
Green ischia fig. This is an oblong 
fruit with a green skin ; but being 
thin, is stained through of a brownish 
cast by the pulp when full ripe. The 
inside is purple, and the flesh high- 
flavored. It is ripe about the middle 
of September. 
Jladonna, Brunswick, or Hanover fig. 



skin brown ; the flesh a lighter brown, 
coarse, and has but little flavor. It 
ripens about the middle of Septem- 
ber. 

Common blue or purple fig. (Duham. 
n. 2. tab. 2. f. 1). This is a large oblong 
fruit, ripens in August, and is a good 
bearer. 

Long brown Naples fig. The skin of 
this fruit is of^ a dark brown when 
ripe ; the flesh inclining to red. It has 
large grains and a good flavor, and 
ripens about the beginning of Oc- 
tober. 

Small brown ischia fig. This is a 
small pyramidal fruit ; the skin of a 
light br&Wn ; the flesh of a purple 
cast, and of a high flavor. It ripens 
in October. 

Yellow ischia fig. This is a large 
fruit ; the skin yellow ; and the fle^h 
purple tind well flavored. It ripens in 
October. 

Gentile fig. This is of a middle size; 
roundish fruit ; the skin yellow ; and 
the flesh inclining to the same color. 
It has large gr^lins, and a good flavor . 
ripens very late ; and the trees are but 
indifferent bearers. 



This is a large pjTamidal fruit ; the 

4843. According to Forsyth, the figs proper for a small garden are the 

Large white Genoa | Early white | Blurrey fig ) Small brown ischia | Black ischia. 

4844. Sawyer recommends for a regular succession of figs from August to October, 
inclusive, the 



Jrown ischia. Large white Genoa, 
Green ischia. Brown Naples, White 



Marseilles, Black Province, Yellow 
ischia, and Gentile ; which ripen in 



the order in which they are here 
placed, from the middle o'f Augtist to 
the end of October. 



4845. Propagation. Figs may be propagated from seed, cuttings, layers, suckers, 
roots, and by ingrafting ; the most generally approved-method is by layers or cuttings, 
which come into bearing the second, and even the first year. 

484G. By seed. Here the same process as that directed for raising seedling vines is to be followed, with 
this difference, that the young plants should not be cut down on account of their mode of bearing. They 
will produce fruit in the sixth or seventh year. The process of crossing to obtain new varieties can here 
be performed only in the general way, of placing two or more sorts together; or of introducing with a 
small hair pencil the pollen from the father variety, to take effect in conjunction with that of the male 
blossoms in the plant destined to bear seed. Possibly, however, some curious horticulturist may find a 
mode of cutting out the male blossoms without destroying the females ; in which case the pollen from the 
father variety may be introduced to take effect alone. Lee, of Hammersmith, has raised several new 
sorts from seed. 

4847. By cuttings. These are formed of young w^ood f,om eight inches to twelve inches in length, with 
an inch or two of old wood attached. They should be taken from the most fruitful, well ripened, short- 
jointed boughs in autumn, and either preserved from the frost till spring, or planted in pots or in a bed of 
earth from six to nine inches deep, without cutting off their tops. The soil should be a loam inclining 
to sand, and in a warm situation ; it should be covered with old bark, leaves, or ashes, to keep out the 
frost in spring, and the drought in summer. If the cuttings have been planted in autumn, then their tops 
will require the additional protection of haulm or litter during winter. Give water and keep clear of 
weeds during summer, and by the following autumn, the plants will be fit to be transplanted into nursery 
rows ; where they must be again mulched at root, and protected at top. They require no pruning farther 
than what may be required to rear them with a single stem, and keep their heads of a regular shape ; 
the second or third year they may be removed to where they are finally to remain. Cuttings of roots 
readily make plants, but the process is too slow for general use, and the plants so produced are not likely 
to come so soon into bearing as by the layers or cuttings. 

4848. By layers. This is the quickest mode of getting bearing trees, as shoots of two or three years' 
growth, if laid down, will make abundant roots the first summer, and admit of being taken off and placed 
where they are finally to remain in the autumn. Miller says, " voung shoots or suckers produced from 
old stools should never be taken, as they are too soft and spongy, fiable to be affected by frost, and not 
likely to prove good bearers." 

4849. By suckers. This is an easy, but a bad method, for a common reason, that all trees raised from 
suckers are subject to send out great quantities of suckers again from their roots, which branches are 
never compact and fruitful, because too luxurious to be ripened in our climate. Miller says, " this 
vicious habit, contracted while the trees are young, may be afterwards corrected." 



Book I. 



FIG. 



761 



4850. By grafting. This mode can only be advantageously adopted in cases similar to those recom- 
mended for grafting the vine. (4813.) The process by any of the modes readily succeeds, and we have 
seen in Italy above a dozen sorts of figs on one tree. 

4851. Culture. - Foi the culture of the fig in the Forcing Department, see Chap. VII. 
Sect. V, In the open air, the plants are grown as standards, espaliers, and against walls ; 
but, as already observed, the fruit produced in any of these situations is of very inferior 
flavor to that grown under glass. A crop of figs, Miller observes, is generally more 
uncertain than that of any other fruit : and Neill says, Britain is certainly not the 
country for figs. From the attention now paid to this fruit, however, by some eminent 
horticulturists, we may hope for improvement, and, at any rate, for a more general taste 
for the fruit. 

4852. Soil. The fig-tree thrives in all soils not wet at bottom ; but they produce a greater quantity of 
fruit upon a strong loamy soil than on dry sandy ground, a dry soil being apt to make them cast their 
fruit. Miller says, " I have always observed those fig-trees to bear the greatest quantity of well flavored 
fruit which were growing upon chalky land, where there has been a foot or more of a gentle loamy soil on 
the top. They also love a free open air ; for although they will shoot and thrive very well in close places, 
yet they seldom produce any fruit in such situations." Smith {Caled. Hort. Mem. vol. ii.), after trying 
several soils, found the fig-tree thrive best in a rich friable loam, free from latent water at bottom. 

4853. Groiving the fig as standards. In fig-countries, this tree is always grown as a standard ; and 
here dwarf standards, planted in very warm situations, will, in very favorable seasons, afford tolerable 
crops of fruit. Some of the best in England are at Arundel Castle ; and there is a fig-orchard of 100 trees 
at Tarring, and another of 14 at Tempting, near Worthing. {Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 505.) Tliose at Arun- 
del are planted six or eight feet apart, and from a single stem allowed to continue branching into regular 
conical heads ; pruning chiefly irregular and redundant growths, and cutting out decayed or injured wood. 
Miller says, standard fig-trees, when protected during winter, generally bear better than those against 
walls ; which, however, may be considered as in great part owing to the mode of training and pruning figs 
in the latter situation not having then been generally understood. At Argenteuil, where the fig is culti- 
vated in immense quantities for the supply of the table, the plants are grown as dwarf standards ; and the 
chief part of their culture, Bosc observes, consists in keeping their branches short, low, and spreading, to 
enjoy both the heat of the sun and reflection of the earth. The ground is manured occasionally, and 
stirred at least once a-year ; and for protection from the frost during the winter, the circumferential low 
branches are buried six inches in the soil, and the central ones enveloped in litter. 

4854. On espaliers. Where figs will succeed as standards, they will also thrive against espalier-rails ; 
in which situation they admit of being more readily covered or protected during winter. The plants may 
be placed at ten or twelve feet distance, and trained in the fan or horizontal manner. 

4855. On walls. This is unquestionably the best mode for our climate, as it admits of more reridily pro- 
tecting the plants during winter, and is more likely to bring the fruit to maturity in the summer or 
autumn. The distances at which the plants are placed will depend on the height of the wall. In general, 
a low wall is to be preferred, both because the fig is naturally adapted for being kept low, and because, 
when low, it admits more readily of protection. The plants may be placed from fifteen to twenty feet 
apart, with temporary trees of the fig, peach, or any other fruit between. 

4856. Mode of bearing. " The fig-tree," the Hon. W. Wickham observes, " is distinguished from most, 
if not from all, other trees, by this extraordinary property, that it bears, and, in warmer climates, brings 
to maturity, in every year, two successive and distinct crops of fruit, each crop being produced on a dis- 
tinct set of shoots. The shoots, formed by the first or spring sap, put forth figs at every ej^e, as soon as 
the sap begins to flow again in July and August. These figs (which form the second crop of the year,) 
ripen, in their native climate, during the course of the autumn ; but rarely, if ever, come to perfection in 
England, where, though they cover the branches in great abundance, at the end of that season, they 
perish, and fall off, with the fiist severe frosts of winter. The shoots, formed by the second flow of sap, 
commonly called midsummer shoots, put forth figs in like manner at every eye, but not until the first 
flow of sap in the following spring. These last mentioned figs, which form the first crop of each year, 
ripen, in warmer climates, during the months of June and July, but not in this country before September 
or October. In warmer climates, indeed, very little attention is given to this first crop, because the mid- 
summer shoots, on which it is borne, are commonly in the proportion only of one to six or eight in length, 
when compared with the shoots of the spring, which produce the second crop ; and the crop itself is 
always small, in the same proportion. But in England, it is the reverse. As no care or skill of the gar- 
dener can ever ensure a second crop of ripe figs in the open air." 

4857. Pruning and training. Most gardeners. Miller observes, imagine that fig-trees should never 
have much pruning ; or, at least, that they should always be suffered to grow very rude from the wall to 
some distance. A pruned fig-tree never bears, is a common saying, nor, according to Wickham, can its 
truth be denied, when applied to the most common method of pruning these trees, i. e. by cutting away or 
shortening the last year's shoots, instead of cutting away old wood, and training those shoots to the wall 
in its place. =r - - 

4858. Wickham recommends a system of pruning which may increase the proportion which the midsummer 
shoots (the only ones, as stated aliove, which produce fruit that ripens in this country,) bear to the spring 
shoots, both in number and length. For this purpose, he breaks off" the spring shoots as they nearly 
attain their full growth, and just as the spring sap in each begins to abate something of its full vigor. He 
breaks them at moderate distances (six to fifteen inches, according to the strength of each shoot), from 
the place whence they severally spring, taking care that enough of the shoot be left to admit of its being 
bent back, and nailed close to the wall at the ensuing winter pruning, and that one eye, at least, be left 
uninjured by the fracture, and always preserving a quantity unbroken, sufficient to keep up a future 
supply of branches and wood. The shoot may be either broken short off", or left suspended by a few ragged 
filaments, which may afterwards be separated with a knife, when the spring sap has ceased to flow. The 
former mode is less unsightly, and will therefore be generally preferred by the gardener; but the latter 
has been found more successful in practice. It is of consequence, however, to the full success of this sys- 
tem, that the shoots should be broken and not cut. If left to their natural growth, or shortened by 
a sharp smooth cut with a knife (instead of a fracture), they would produce, at their extremities, only 
one single midsummer shoot, being a simple prolongation of the wood, formed in the spring; but 
when the shoot is broken at the time, and in the manner above described, it generally happens that, on 
the second flow of sap in July, two or three more shoots (forming a kind of stag's horn) are pushed from 
the fractured part instead of one ; and it is hardly necessary to add, that each of these, according to 
its length, will produce several figs in the ensuing spring, (making the first crop of that fruit,) all of them 
capable of being ripened by our ordinary summer and autumn heats. A sufficient supply of midsummer 
shoots being thus procured during the summer, room must be made for them at the succeeding winter prun- 
ing, by cutting away so much of the old wood as will admit of their being all trained in, at full length, 
and nailed close to "the wall, which should always be done before the first severe frosts. Keeping this 
object in view, the knife cannot well be used "too freely in cutting away the old wood, nor is there 
any reason to fear that its free use will either injure the future crops, or deprive the tree of its regular 
sui)()ly of branches. The midsummer shoots being trained in, each of them will produce, in the following 



762 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



year, one spring shoot, at least, at its extremity, whilst another will rise from each eye of the remnants 
of the old spring shoots that had been preserved in the manner above described, when these shoots 
were broken, in the preceding month of June. From this fresh supply, by pursumg the system here ex- 
plained, either wood or fruit, or both, may be obtained for the succeeding year, at the discretion of the 
gardener. Where he wishes for wood, he must suffer these new shoots to grow to their full length : where 
fruit, and not wood, is desired, he must break them in the month of June, in the manner and with the 
precautions that have been minutely explained. {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 74. et seq.) 

4859. Knight disapproves highly of training the branches of fig-trees perpendicularly, as encouraging 
too much the prolongation of the shoots ; he approves of Wickham's mode in warm situations, but in 
high cold situations, he radiates his branches from the top, and parts near it, of a single stem. He says, 
" Let the s^ems, if there be, as usual, many within a narrow space, be gradually reduced to one only ; 
and from the top, and parts near it, of this, let lateral branches be trained horizontally and pendently, in 
close contact vi^ith the wall. Under such treatment, all troublesome luxuriance of growth will soon dis- 
appear ; the pendent shoots will not annually extend more than a few inches, and few or no more leaves 
will be produced than those which the buds contain before they unfold. The young wood consequently 
ceases to elongate very early in the season, and thence acquires perfect maturity ; and by being trained 
close to the wall, is placed secure, or nearlv so, from injury by the severest frost. The quantity of mature 
and productive young wood thus necessarily become very great, relatively to the size of the tree : and the 
fruit being in contact with the wall, and not shaded by excess of foliage, acquires an early and perfect ma- 
turitv." {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 307.) 

4860. The Rev. G. Swayne, from the various papers on the culture of the fig-tree, published in the Horti- 
cultural Transactions, but particularly from that of Wickham, infers, " that the principal defect requiring 
a remedy is a deficiency of fruitlings, or bloom, in the early spring, on the whole of the last year's shoots, 
excepting on the few joints at their extremities," and he describes a remedy which he has for a long time 
been in the habit of using, and which he " considers as a specific." It is simply to rub off, as soon as they 
can be discovered by the naked eye, all the figs which are produced after midsummer on the same year's 
shoots. The object is not only to prevent those figs which would never ripen without artificial heat to 
exhaust the tree, but to give it sufficient time to employ the strength which would have been employed 
in nourishing these " sterilising incumbrances," in the seasonable preparation of new embryo figs for the 
foUov/ing year. " If this operation," he says, " be performed in due time, it will not fail to prepare on 
one, and often on both sides, of almost every fig so displaced, such embryos. For this purpose, the trees 
should be examined once a-week, from the beginning of August, at which time the figs of this second 
crop usually begin to show themselves, and this examination must be repeated as long as any of these 
make their appearance." Most gardeners, he says, omit removing these late figs at all, or delay the 
practice till October or November, when no benefit is derived from it. He trains the trees horizontally, 
and does not prune them till late in the spring, when he can plainly distinguisli between a leaf and a fruit- 
bud, as well as appreciate the whole of the mischief occasioned by the frosts of the preceding winter. {Hort. 
Trans, \o\.i\. 430.) The above practice, in connection with the mode of training recommended by 
Knight, would, we think, effect an important improvement in the culture of this fruit. Wickham's 
mode appears to excite too much the powers of the tree ; and the common mode of fan-training from three 
or four root-stems, which are in fact so many suckers, is only calculated to produce wood and leaves. 
Training the fig-tree on walls, as a rider, and in the stellate manner {Jig. 386. c), and pinching off all the 
embryo fruit after midsummer, would probably effect every thing that can be desired in the culture of 
this tree on the open wall in this country. 

4861. Protecting during winter. Tlais is found necessary in many parts of France, 
and every where in Britain. Miller recommends tying together the branches of stand- 
ards, and applying pease-haulm, strav', or any other light covering ; rolls of reeds to be 
placed on each side of espaliers, removing these coverings in mild weather, to prevent the 
figs from coming out too early. Forsyth covers fig-trees against walls with " laurel, yew, 
fir, or spruce boughs," and then " tucks in short grass or moss among the branches." 
Smith covers with spruce fir branches, from three to six feet long, fastening them to the 
wall by the middle rib of the branches, at two different places. " To prevent any friction 
by the wind, the branches should be made to fit each other, tr-at the covering may be of a 
regular thickness over every part of the trees. As the covering is generally put on the 
trees in the month of December, the branches remain green all the winter ; and in the 
month of March, when the days get long, the leaves begin to drop from the branches, and 
continue falling through April; and by the beginning of May, when the covering is en- 
tirely removed, only the ribs of the branches are found remaining. Thus, the progress of 
the season reduces the coverings in a gradual manner, so as not to expose the trees to any 
sudden check, which might otherwise be the case, if they were all at once laid open to the 
weather." 

4862. Sawyer, in November, detaches the branches of his fig-trees from the walls, picks off all the autumnal 
fruit that are larger than a filbert, or not of a dark shining green : he then ties the branches of the tree 
together in bundles forming a sort of cones, filling the interstices with dry hay, and wrapping mats round 
the whole. After this he lowers the cones to the right and left, and makes them fast to the wall with rope- 
yarn. In this state they remain till March, when the whole is undone, and the branches replaced and 
covered first with treble, then double, and lastly single netting, which last is removed in May. 

4863. Mean {Hoi't. Trans, vol. ii.) adopted the French mode of burying the branches in the soil, in 1789, 
and has practised it with success ever since. 

4864. Wickham observes {Hort. Trans, iii. 80.), in respect to covering fig-trees, that " much must be left 
to the care and skill of the gardener, whose precautions must be determined, as well as varied, by the situ- 
ation, aspect, and local shelter belonging to each particular tree, and by the varying temperature of each 
particular winter ; it may, however, be laid down as a general rule, that the covering, where used, should 
be as thin and light as a due consideration of all the above circumstances will admit, and that it should 
generally be removed in the day-time, and always on the return of moderate weather." 

4865. Ripening the fruit. Williams suggests that the practice of taking off a circular ring of bark from 
the lower part of the branches of the fig, in the manner he has so successfully practised on the vine, 
might accelerate the maturity of the fruit. Monck tried ringing, and found that it may be practised 
on the fig-tree with " as much safety, and more effect upon the age of its fruit than on the pear-tree." 
(Hort. Trans, v. 172.) A very general French practice is to prick the fruit with a .straw or quill dipped in 
olive-oil. In Italy, a wound with a knife is sometimes made on the broad end of the fig, or a very small 
part of the skin of the fruit removed for the same purpose. Brandy is also sometimes applied, either by a 
puncture on the side of the fruit with a bodkin dipped in the spirit, or by dropping a small q'uantity in the 
eye of the fruit. " Plums and pears," Tournefort observes {Travels, letter viii.), " pricked by insects, 
ripen the faster for it, and the flesh round such puncture is better tasted than the rest. It is not to be dis- 



Book I. 



MELON. 



763 



puted but that considerable change happens to the contexture of fruits so pricked, just the same as to parts 
of animals pierced with any sharp instrument." Monck split a fig from the eye to the stalk, and found it 
ripen six weeks before others that were untouched. {Hort. Trans, v. 172.) 

4866. The process of caprification of figs is performed in the Levant to hasten the maturity of the 
autumnal crop, and consists in placing on the fig-trees what are called figues-fleurs, or spring figs, in which 
a certain insect of the gnat species {Culex, L.) has deposited its eggs. From these eggs, in the spring figs, 
proceed a multitude of gnats, which, in their turn, deposit their eggs in the autumn figs, or rather in their 
flowers, effecting in their passage the fecundation of these flowers, and, by consequence, hastening the 
maturity of the fruit. The most enlightened French naturalists are of opinion that this is a very unneces- 
sary part of the culture of the fig. Olivier, member of the Institute, and author of a Journey through the 
Ottoman Empire, considers it as " a tribute which man pays to ignorance and prejudice." " Jn many 
countries of the Levant," he says, " it is not performed, nor is it done in France, Italy, or Spain ; and it 
is now neglected in some of tlie isles of the Archipelago, where was it practised formerly." Bosc says, 
" the larva of the Cynips, in eating the interior of the figs, can be no otherwise useful than the larva of 
the Pyrale pommonelle, Hubner, {Phalcena, Linn.) or apple-worm, can be in hastening the maturity of the 
apple : and who would take it upon him to advise rendering apples worm-eaten in order to enjoy the ad- 
vantage of eating them a fortnight sooner?" This observation, it may be observed, rather confirms 
the idea that caprification hastens maturity, which, from what we have seen in the neighborhood of Rome 
and Naples, we believe to be the case. Though we think with Olivier, that it is by no means absolutely 
necessary to fecundation ; and even if it were, that fecundation is not essentially requisite to the sv/elling 
and ripening of the fig. 

4867. Monck has made some curious experiments 
and observations on this subject, from which he is 
led to conjecture, 1. That fig-trees never bear figs 
which contain both kinds of florets in an efficient 
state ; 2. That figs in which the anther-bearing florets 
only are perfect, never c*jine to be eatable fruit ; 
3. That you may pronounce, from the external shape of 
a fig, which kind of floret prevails — the stigma-bcar- 
ing in the pear-shaped ( /ig. 507. a), the anther-bearing 
in the squat figs (b) ; 4. That fig-trees, which put forth crops of figs, and cast them, 
most probably do so from defect of setting. [Hort. Trans, v. 168, 169.) 

4868. Insects and diseases. The fig is subject to few of either of these' in this country. 
In forcing-houses it is liable, in common with other plants, to the attacks of the red spi- 
der, coccus, and aphides, and occasionally also on garden-walls. The remedies are 
obvious. In France they are attacked by a species of coccus, vulgarly called the fig- 
louse, which proves very injurious, and is only to be destroyed by rubbing them off with 
a coarse cloth. 




SuBSECT. 4. Melon. — Cucumis Mela, L. Moncecia Monadelpliia, L. and Cucurbi- 
tacece, J. .Melon, Fr. ; Melone, Ger. j and Mellone, Ital. 

4869. The melon is a tender annual, producing one of the richest fruits brought to the 
dessert, and cultivated in England since 1570 j but the precise time of its introduction, 
and the native country of the plant, are both unknown. It was originally brought here 
from Jamaica, and was, till within the last fifty years, called the musk-melon. The fruit, 
to be grown to perfection, requires the aid of artificial heat, and glass, throughout every 
stage of its culture. Its minimum temperature may be estimated at 65% in which it will 
germinate and groAv ; but it requires a heat of from 75*^ to 80° to ripen its fruit, which, 
in ordinary cases, it does in four months from the time of sowing the seed. 

4870. Varieties. There are numerous varieties, many of which, especially those raised 
from seeds brought from Italy and Spain, are not worth cultivating. The best sorts are 
included under the name of cantaleupes, an appellation bestowed on them from a seat of 
the Pope near Rome, where this variety is supposed to have been originally produced. 
The general character of the cantaleiq^es is a roundish form, rough, warty, or netted outer 
coat ; neither very large in fruit or leaves. The Romanas, the Italian sort, next in 
esteem, are generally oval-shaped, regularly netted ; the fruit and leaves middle-sized, and 
the plants great bearers. Many varieties of both these sorts, however, that were formerly 
in esteem, are now lost, degenerated, or supplanted by others of Spanish or Persian origin. 
The following are among the best both of the old and new varieties : — 



The early golden cantaleupe. It is deep- 
furrowed, middle-sized, longish, golden 
colored ; flesh not very high-colored 
nor high-flavored. The plant grows 
freely, shows early, sets its fruit well ; 
and is a very great bearer. 

The orange cantaleupe. Smaller than 
the above, round, and pale-yellow. 
The flesh, when just fit for cutting, 
is orange ; but when riper, it is more 
red. As it swells and ripens, it be- 
comes partly netted. In respect to 
flavor, It is excelled by none of the 
melon kind ; being juicy, sugary, and 
rich. The plant is a free grower, an 
early setter, and a great bearer. 

The netted cantaleupe. This is equally 
juicy and high-flavored as the last- 
mentioned ; a good deal larger, round, 
solid, and very ponderous ; having a 
very small vacuum for the seeds ; and 
it may be eaten nearer to the rind than 



most other kinds. The plant sets freely 
and is a good bearer. 

The silver cantaleupe. Round, of a mid- 
dle size, shallow furrowed; and when 
full-grown, before it begins to color, is 
all over mixed silver and green. A 
very good bearer. 

The black rock cantaleupe. This is a 
very large-growing melon ; round, 
black, or very dark green when full 
grown, but yellow \vhen ripe. It is 
juicy, but not so high-flavored as any 
of the above cantaleupes, except the 
first-named ; nor is the plant so good 
a bearer. Four or five fruit in a light 
is a medium crop. 

The carbuncled rock cantaleupe. Two 
varieties, a large and a small ; both 
very similar to the black rocks, as to 
color and flavor; but flat or cheese- 
shaped, and covered with large protu- 
berances or carbuncles. The small 



kind bears pretty freely, and the lai-ge 
sort less so. 

Lee's rock cantaleupe. Rather long than 
round, and more green than black. 
The flesh and flavor much the same as 
those of the last-mentioned variety. 

The Italian green-fleshed cantaleupe. 
Small, nearly globose; usually about 
four inclies and a half in diameter- 
coat pale greenish-white, moderately 
thin ; flesh opaque, soft, and melting ; 
in flavor both rich and sweet. (Hoi-t. 
Trans, iv. 319 ) 

The smooth scarlet-fleshed cantaleupe. 
Roundish, inclining to oval ; outside 
greenish-yellow, with fine white ver- 
micular reticulations ; flesh nearly an 
inch and a half in thickness, of a 
uniform bright scarlet from the edge 
of the coat to the centre, and tolerably 
firm ; it is particularly high flavored 
(Hort. Trans, iv. 320.) 



764 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



The montagu cajitaleupe, is a variety pro- 
duced from the two last-named sorts; 
intermediate in size between them ; 
greenish-white without ; the flesh an 
mch and a half in thickness, not verj- 
high colored, but soft and juicy, com- 
pletly melting in the mouth, and with 
a very sweet and delicate flavor. {Hort. 
Trans, iv. 120.) 

The green-fleshed Ionian cantaleupe. Le- 
mon-colored and lemon-shaped ; large, 
thin-skinned, no great bearer, and does 
not readily mature seeds, but of excel- 
lent flavor. (Caled. Meyn- iv. 210.) 

Thegreen-fleshed Egyptian melon. Mid- 
dle-sized, round, iietted; inhabits and 
flavor reserribling the last-named va- 
riety. (Caled. Mem. iv. 210.) 

Lee's romana. Middle sized, longish ; 
shallow-furrowed, solid, and ponder- 
ous. Rind hard, partly netted, and 
pale-yellow ; flesh a full yellow, pretty 
high-flavored, but not very juicy. 
Plant a good bearer. 

The large netted romana. The largest 
of the romanas, regularly netted all 
over, shallow-furrowed, oval, solid, 
and very ponderous, often attains to 
nine or ten pounds in weight. Rind 
hard, pale-yellow when fit to cut ; the 
flesh a full yellow but not very juicy ; 



very high-flavored, if eaten sharp-ripe. 
The plant is a better bearer than any 
other large sort. 

Fair's romana. Small, oval, smooth, 
solid and ponderous ; the rind hard, 
greenish-yellow when fit to cut; and 
the fle=h a pale yellow, not vei-y juicy ; 
well-flavored and agreeable; may be 
pared very near to the rind. The plant 
is a very great bearer. 

The poUgnac. A rich-flavored middle- 
sized oval fr\ut, in frequent cultivation. 

The small Portugal, or dormer, noted 
as a good bearer, and a very early 
variety. 

The black Portugal, or Galloway. A sub- 
variety of the former. 

The saionica. Nearly spherical, and 
without any depressions on its surface ; 
color that "of gold, pulp, pure white; 
improves in flavor and richness till it 
becomes quite soft ; consistence of its 
pulp is nearly that of a water-melon, 
and it is very sweet A full-grown 
specimen of the fruit generally weighs 
about 71b. [Knight, h\ Hci. trani.'ii.) 

The dampsha melon. A variety from 
Persia ; nearly cylindrical and netted ; 
color varying from pale and yellowish- 
green to dark-olive: flesh bright and 



deep green near the skin ; pale to- 
wards the centre, quite melting, and 
of excellent flavor ; hung up by .the 
stalk, or in nets in a dark room", it 
keeps until the w-inter months. {Old- 
acre, in Hort. Trans, iv. 212.) 

The sweet melon of I spahan. Fruit ovate, 
varies in length from eight to twelve 
inches ; nearly quite smooth, of a deep 
sulphur-color; skin ver>- thin, flesh 
white, extending about half way to the 
centre ; crisp, sugarv, and rich in taste. 
[Hort. Trans, iii. p. "117.) 

The Levant melon. Oval, slightly lobed, 
green-fleshed, milky, sweet and high- 
flavored. [Hoii. Trans iv. 514.) 

The winter melon, [fig. 50S.) Cultivated 
in various countries bordering on the 
Mediterranean sea, and particularlv in 
the orange gardens atHieres, in Toulon, 
whence its friiit is sent to Paris. Skin 
thin, flesh -white, firm, saccharine, and 
juicy ; not rich, but pleasant. The 
shape oval ; size, about a foot long, and 
eight inches broad; color adark green. 
This fruit is regularly imported, and 
may be had in the fruit shojjs from 
September to January. [Hort. Traju. 
iii. p. U 6.) 

The water-mel»iu Cucurbila. (See ■1209.N 



4871. Choice of seed. In the cultivation of the 
melon, Knight observes, it is a matter of much im- 
portance to procure proper seed. Some gardeners are 
so scrupulous on this point that they will not sow the 
seeds unless they have seen and tasted the fruit from 
which they were taken. It is proper at least not to 
trust to seeds which have not been collected by judi- 
cious persons. Some make it a rule to preserve always 
the seeds of those individual specimens which are first 
ripe, and even to take them from the ripest side of the 
fruit. A criterion of the goodness and probable ferti- 
lity is generally sought by throwing them into a vessel 
containing water ; such as sink are considered as good 
and likely to prove fertile, those that float, as effete. 

from the continent, that tliey must have more bottom heat, and the young plants less 
water, than are necessary for seeds ripened in this country, or young plants sprung from 
these. 

4872. For the entire course of culture of the melon, see Chap. VII. Sect. VII. 




It is remarked of seeds brought 



SuBSECT. 5. Cucumber. — Cucum'is sativus, L. Moncec. Monadelph. L. and Cucurbi- 
tacets, J. Conco}nbre, Fr. ; Gurke, Ger. ; and Citriuolo, Ital. 

4873. The cucumber is a tender annual, a native of the East Indies, and introduced 
in 1573. It is a trailing and climbing plant, with large roundish rough leaves, furnish- 
ed with tendrils, and if sown in the open air in INIay, produces flowers from July to 
August. Tlie cucumber is of nearly as great antiquity as the vine, for Moses, the 
earliest Jewish author, mentions it as abounding in Egypt, when the children of Israel 
were there, above three thousand years ago. (Nujnbet^s, chap, ii.) In England it is cul- 
tivated generally and extensively, in forcing-frames and in the open air, and especially 
near large cities and towns. " Not only gentlemen," as M'Phail observes, " but almost 
every tradesman who has a garden and dung, have their cucumber-frame." In Hert- 
fordshire, whole fields are annually seen covered with cucumbers without the aid of 
dung or glass, and the produce of which is sent to the metropolis for pickling. In 
March, cucumbers fetch in the London market a guinea a dozen ; in August and Sep- 
tember one penny a dozen. The village of Sandy, in Bedfordshire, has been known to 
furnish 10,000 bushels of pickling cucumbers in one week. 

4874. Use. The green fruit is used as a salad ; it is also salted when half-grown ; 
and preserved in vinegar when young and small. In Germany and Poland, barrels of 
half and also full grown cucumbers, are preserved from one year to the other, by immer- 
sion in deep wells, where the uniform temperature and exclusion of air seem to be the 
preserving agents. 

4875. Varieties. The principal of these are — 



The early long prickly; from five to seven i 
inches long, of a green color, with 

few prickles. The plant is a good I 

bearer ; and upon the whole, this is I 

accounted the best cucumber for the | 
general summer crop, the pulp being 

very crisp and pleasant. | 

Longest green prickly ; from seven to ten i 

inches in length; it has dark-green ! 

skin, closely set with small prickles. | 

This is a hardy sort, but does not come | 

early. I 



Early short prickly; not more than 
four inches long ; the skin green, ra- 
ther smooth, but with a few small 
black prickles. This is one of the 
hardiest and earliest sorts, and is often 
preferred for the first crop. 

Dutch, or white short prickly, though 
not much cultivated, is recommended 
by some, as preferable even to the early 
long prickly ; it has fewer seeds ; is 
evidently different in taste from most 



other cucumbers, but of agreeable fla- 
vor. 

Cluster cucumber ; a very early sort, the 
flowers appear in clusters of three or 
four together ; the fruit is seldom more 
than five inches long ; it is at first of a 
fine green color, but becomes yellowish 
as it ripens. The stems of this variety 
are much inclined- to climb 'oy means 
of their tendrils upon sticks ; the leaves 
are small, and the plant altogether oc- 
cupies but little room. 



Book I. 



EXOTIC FRUITS. 



765 



liong green Turkey ; sometimes sown for 
the Fate crop. Late cucumbers, how- 
ever, are much less cultivated than the 
early varieties ; most gardeners being of 
opinion, that those kinds which are 
best for the early crops are also best for 
the late. 

Napal ; fruit very large, usually weighs 
upwards of twelve pounds* weight, 
measures in girth twenty-four inches. 



and in length seventeen inches ; flavor 



■ient to the Horticultural Society from 
Calcutta by Dr. Wallick. (Hurt. Trans. 
iv. 136.) 

Flanagan's. Near two feet long and of 
superior crispness and flavor. {Hort. 
Trails, iv. 560.) 

Fluted cucumber. A Chinese variety. 
{Hort. Trans, v. 56.) 



Smooth green Roman ; an early sort ; the 
, fruit becomes large and long, and is 
quite smooth ; the plants grow very 
strong, and require a good deal of 
room. 

White Turkey ; the stalks and leaves are 
larger than in the other varieties; the 
fruit also is very long, sometimes from 
ten to fifteen or even twenty inches ; it 
is quite straight, and has a smooth skin 
destitute of prickles ; it is produced 
sparingly, and late in the season. 

4876. Culture. The culture of the cucumber, as a table esculent, is chiefly carried on by artificial heat 
or protection, and is therefore treated of under ihe Forcing Department, Chap. VII. Sect. VII. For pickling, 
it is chiefly cultivated in the open ground, by what is termed drilling, and which forms the only branch of 
the culture of this vegetable reserved for this article. To have a crop in the natural ground, the seed is 
sown in warm compartments of rich earth, towards the end of May, or beginning of June, when the 
weather is settled, warm, and dry. The plants should mostly remain where sown, to produce late fruit, 
towards the end of July, or more generally in August and September, small for picklers, and in larger 
growth for ordinary consumption. Sow a portion in a warm border, and the main crop in an open com- 
partment. Dig the ground neatly even. Trace lines with intervals of five or six feet ; and in the lines 
mark stations three and a half feet distant ; then, with a trowel at each of these spots, form shallow cir- 
cular saucer-form cavities in the surface, ten or twelve inches wide, and about an inch deep in the middle. 
Sow in the middle of each cavity eight or ten seeds, half an inch deep. When the plants are come up, 
and begin to put forth the first rough leaves in the centre, thin them to three or four of the strongest in 
each hole. Earth these up a little, between and close round the stems, pressing them a little asunder; 
and give them some water, to settle the earth below and above. In their advancing growth, train out the 
leading runners. Supply them with requisite waterings, in dry weather, two or three times a week, or 
sometimes every day in very dry hot weather, in July, August, or September. At this season, water 
early in a morning, or late in the afternoon, towards evening. 

4877. Gathering. " The crop comes in sometimes towards the end of July, but more generally not 
before August in full production ; continuing till about the middle or end of September, when the plants 
decline. Be careful to gather the fruit in a prime state, both for pickling and other purposes. They must 
be quite young for pickling, not exceeding two or three inches in length." {Abercronibie.) 

Sect. II, Exotic Fruits, well known, but neglected as stick. 

4878. Among neglected exotic fruits we include the orange tribe, one of the most beau- 
tiful, and also, a very useful class of fruits. The culture of oranges and lemons for the 
table is not at present common in England ; but, in our opinion, it might be pursued 
with much enjoyment to the amateur, since, independently of the gratification of seeing 
fruit of one's own growth at the dessert, no object of the fruit-tree kind can be more 
splendid than a large healthy orange-tree covered with fruit. The pomegranate seems 
also to merit culture, both for its singular beauty while on the tree, and the addition it 
would make to the dessert. 

SuBSECT. 1. Orange Tribe. — Citrus, L. Poli/ndel. Polyan. L. and Aurantice, J. 

4879. Of the genus citrus there are five species or leading sorts, of which the fruit are 
used ; all natives of Asia, viz, the common orange, the lemon, the citron, the lime, and 
the shaddock. , The common character of the plants bearing these fruits is that of low 
evergreen trees, with ovate or oval-lanceolate, entire or serrated, leaves. On the un- 
grafted trees are often axillary spines. The flowers appear in peduncles, axillary or 
terminating, and one or many flowered.- The fruits are large berries, round or oblong, 
and generally of a yellow color. The species seem best distinguished by the petiole, 
which, in the orange and shaddock, is winged ; in the citron, lemon, and lime, naked. The 
form of the fruit, although not quite constant, may also serve for a distinction. In the orange 
and shaddock, it is spherical, or rather an oblate spheroid, with a red or orange-colored rind ; 
in the lime, spherical, with a pale rind ; in the lemon, oblong, rough, with a nipple-like pro- 
tuberance at the end ; in the citron, oblong, with a very thick rind. The flowers of the citron 
and lemon have ten stamens, and those of the orange more. Professor Martyn observes, 
that it is very difficult to determine what is a variety, and what is a species in this genus. 
The trees in the eastern countries, where they are natives, vary in the size and shape of 
the fruit and leaves ; and many of those considered varieties in Europe, preserve their 
differences in their native woods. He has no doubt that any one who would pursue this 
subject in the native countries of these fruits, would detect varieties connecting all those 
generally considered as species. This opinion appears highly probable when we ex- 
amine the catalogues of the continental writers on this fruit ; who, in general, finding it 
diflficult to make botanical distinctions, are obliged to rest satisfied with popular descrip- 
tions. In Nouveau Cours, &c. art. Granger, those cultivated in France, and in Dr. 
Sickler's work, and that of Gallesio, those of Italy, are so described. 

4880. Dr. Sickler, who spent several years in Italy, and paid great attention to the 

Cedrates orl , ^ 

Citrons j 

TRound-shaped lemons 6 ditto. 

Pear-shaped ditto 11' ditto. 

Lemons.... ^Cylindrical ditto 4 ditto. 

(iourd-shaped ditto 12 ditto. 

LWax lemons 5 ditto. 

Cedrate lemons or cidronates 6 ditto. 

Lumies orfLumies 5 ditto. 

Lomes I, Apple lumies 3 ditto. 



kinds and culture of the orange, published 
in 1815, Der Vollkommen Orangerie- Gart- 
ner (The Complete Orange- Gardener), in 
which he describes above seventy sorts of 
citrus, including all the species above men- 
tioned. He arranges the whole in two 
classes, and these classes into divisions 
and subdivisions, without regard to their 
botanic distinctions or species, thus : — 



LLimes 4 ditto. 

_ r Bitter oranges 6 ditto. 

Oranges... J Sour oranges 6 ditto. 

(.Sweet oranges , 12 ditto. 



766 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



The names and some descriptive traits of these seventy-four sorts of citrus will be 
found in A Short Delineation of Dr. Sicklers Treatise, by Dr. Noehden, in the Hort. 
Trans, vol. iii. App. 

4881. Gallesio {Traite du Genus Citrus, &c. Savonna, 1818.) has given a sj-noptic 
tree (f.g. 509.), in which he has introduced ramifications which display an arrangement 
of the forty principal sorts cultivated in Italy. 

509 • ^ 

" 1 i 




4882. The most splendid ivork on oranges which has yet appeared is the Histoire 
Naturelle des Grangers, by Risso, of Nice, and Poiteau, of Versailles. (Paris, fol. 1818.) 
Here 169 sorts are described, and 105 of them figured, and their French and Italian 
culture given at great length. They are arranged as sweet oranges, of which they 
describe 43 sorts ; bitter and sour oranges, 32 sorts ; bergamots, 5 sorts ; limes, 8 sorts ; 
ihaddocks, 6 sorts; lumes, 12 sorts; lemons, 46 sorts; citrons, 17 sorts. 

4883. All the species of citrus endure the open air at Alee, Genoa, and N'aples ; but at 
Florence and Milan, and often at Rome, they require protection during the winter, and 
are generally placed in conservatories and sheds. The largest conservatory in Italy is 
that of Prince Antonio Borghese, at Rome, which contains seventy select sorts of 
agrumi. The largest trees are at Sorenta, Teracina, Gaeta, and Naples ; but the most 
regular and garden-like culture of the orange, is in the orange-orchards at Nervi, Mo- 
naco, and other places in the neighborhood of Genoa. At Nervi are also the orange- 
nursei-ies which may be said to supply all Europe with trees ; they are, in general, 
wretchedly cultivated, and the stocks inoculated in the most unscientific manner ; but 
the fine climate, strong clayey soil, and abundant manurings, supply in a great degree 
the nicer practices of gardening. There the names of varieties vary as much as those of 
gooseberries do in England ; but from upwards of one hundred names, not above forty 
distinct sorts can be procured. Good plants of the Maltese and other varieties of orange 
may be procured from Malta ; and some sorts also from Lisbon. From the nurseries 



Book 1. 



ORANGE TRIBE. 



767 



at Paris about thirty sorts may be obtained, much smaller plants than those from the 
other places named, but more scientifically grafted or inoculated. At Vallet's nursery 
at Rouen, is a collection of very large plants of the common kinds. The catalogues 
of London nurserymen enumerate above thirty varieties of orange, twelve of lemon, and 
several varieties of the other species ; the plants are generally inoculated, and small, and 
are more calculated for pots than for planting in the soil for producing fruit. As being 
most useful for the British horticulturist, we shall place under each species the names of 
the varieties which may be procured in England. 

4884. The common orange is the Citrus Aurantium, L. ; the 
orange of the French ; pomeranzc of the Germans ; and aran- 
cio of the Italians, ( fig. 510.) It is a middle-sized evergreen 
tree, with a greenish-brown bark ; and in its wild state, with 
prickly branches. The fruit is nearly round, from two to three 
inches in diameter, and of a gold color. It is a native bf India 
and China, but now cultivated in most countries of Europe; in 
the open air in Italy and Spain ; and in conservatories or green- 
houses in Britain and the north of Europe. The orange is sup- 
posed to have been introduced into Italy in the fourteenth cen- 
tury, above a thousand years after the citron. In England, the 
tree has been cultivated since 1629. Parkinson, writing at that 
time, says, " it hath abiden with some extraordinary looking and 
tending, when neither citron nor lemon trees could be preserved 
any length of time." 

4885. The orange-trees of Becldington, in Surrey, introduced 
from Italy by a knight of the noble family of the Carews {Gib- 
son's edit, of Camb. Brit.), were the first that were brought into 
England ; they yvere planted in the open ground, placed under 
a moveable cover during the winter months, and they had been 
growing there before 1595. It has been said, that these trees 
were raised by Sir Francis Carew, from seeds brought to Eng- 
land by Sir Walter Raleigh : but as such trees would not have 
readily borne fruit, Professor Martyn thinks it much more likely 
that they were plants brought from Italy. Bi-adley says, they always bore fruit in great plenty and per- 
fection ; that they grew on the outside of a wall, not nailed against it, but at full liberty to spread ; they 
were fourteen feet high, the girt of the stem twenty-nine inches, and the spreading of the branches one 
way nine feet, and twelve feet another. These trees, Evelyn informs us, were neglected in his time dur- 
ing the minority of their owner, and finally entirely killed by the great frost in 1739-40. 

4886. During the latter end of the seventeenth and beginning of the eighteenth centuries, the orange-tree 
was a very fashionable article of growth in conservatories, when there were but few exotics of other sorts 
kept there. The plants were pi'ocured from Genoa, with stems generally from four to six feet in height ; 
they were planted in large boxes, and were set out during summer to decorate the walks near the house in 
the manner still practised at Versailles and the Tuilleries. About the middle of the eighteenth century, 
when a taste for botany and forcing exotic fruits became general, that for superb orange-trees began to 
decline ; many of these large trees have decayed through neglect; and those which are now to be found 
in the greater number of green-houses, are generally dwarf plants bearing few fruit, and those of small 
size. In some places, however, are still to be found large and flourishing trees. Those at Smorgony in 
Glamorganshire, are the largest in Britain ; they are planted in the floor of an immense conservatory, 
and bear abundantly. It is said that the plants were procured from a wreck on the coast in that quarter, 
in the time of Henry VII. 

4887. At Nuneham, near Oxford, are some very fine trees, planted under a moveable case, sheltered by 
a north wall. In summer, the case is removed, and the ground turfed over, so that the whole resembles 
a native orange-gi-ove. At Wormleybury, Hertfordshire, and Shipley Hall, in Derbyshire, are very 
fine large orange and lemon trees grown in borders and in boxes. {Hort. Trans, vol. ii. 295. and iv. 306.) 

4888. At the Wilderness, Kent, (Marquis Camden's,) are three trees in boxes, not surpassed by any 
trees so grown in Europe. C. Bingham, at Isleworth, possesses a very fine collection ; and various others 
might be enumerated. 

4889. At Woodhall, near Hamilton, trees of all the species of citrus are trained against the back wall of 
forcing-houses, in the manner of peaches, and produce large crops of fruit. 

4890. In the south of Devonshire, and particularly at Saltcombe, one of the warmest spots in 
England, may be seen, in a few gardens, orange-trees that have withstood the winter in the open air 
upwards of a hundred years. The fruit is as large and fine as any from Portugal. Trees raised from 
seed, and inoculated on the spot, are found to bear the cold 
better than trees imported. 

4891. Use. As a dessert-fruit, the orange is well known. 
The varieties imported, which are most esteemed for this 
purpose, are the China, Portugal, and Maltese. It is also 
used in confectionary, both ripe, and when green and not 
larger than a pea : it forms various liquors and conserves, 
either alone or with sugars, wines, or spirits ; and either the 
pulp or skin, or both, are used for these purposes. In cook- 
ing, it is used to aromatise a number of dishes. The juice 
of the Seville orange is used in medicine, in febrile and in- 
flammatory disorders ; and that of the other sorts possesses 
the same qualities in a lesser degree. The acid of oranges. 
Dr. CuUen says, unites with the bile, takes off its bitterness, 
and may prove useful in obviating disorders arising from its 
redundancy and acridity. In perfumery, the orange is used 
to form various perfumes and pomades : and the flower dis- 
tilled, produces orange-water, used in cooking, medicine, 
and as a perfume. 

4892. Varieties. These are very numerous in the eastern 
countries, and even in Italy and France. About forty sorts 
are cultivated in the neighborhood of Paris, and about 
thirty in the London nurseries, of which we shall give a list. 
The two principal varieties are the sweet or China orange, 
the orange douce of the French, and porto-gaJlo or poma de 
sine of the Italians; and the bitter or Seville, the bigarade 
of the French, and arancio volgaro of the Italians. The Maltese orange, distinguised by its red pulp, is 
also a noted and much-esteemed sort. The box-leaved, willow-leaved, aivd some others, are cultivated 
more as curious varieties than for their fruit. 





768 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III, 



Common orange 

Bloody-fruite 

Broad -leaved 

Bergamot large 

Bergaraot small 

Cluster-fruited 

Curled-leaved 

Double-flowered 

Fine-leaved 

Laurel-leaved 

Ij^,bon 

Maltese 

Bloody Jlaltese 



Monstrous 
Myrtle-leaved large 
Myrtle small 
Narrow-leaved 
Oval-fruited 
Pale-leaved 

Seville or bitter orange, 
{.fig. 511.) chiefly 
making marmalade 

Spike-flowered 

Striped common 

Striped curled-leaTed 

Striped gold 



Striped silver 
Striped tricolor 
Striped willow-leaved 
Sweet-skinned 
Sweet China 
Tanjierano 
Thick-leaved 
■\Veeping 
Willow-leaved 

Clove, or mandarin, (C. No- 
bilis, H. K.) (Bot. Rep. 608. 
and 2 1 1 . ) , distinguished from 
the common orange by its 



curious form, and by the 
pulp adhering so loosely to 
the rind as to be separable 
from it by the slightest effort, 
and leaving in many places 
a considerable opening be- 
tween them. It is the most 
delicate of the orange tribe, 
whence its name by the Chi- 
nese of memdarin, or noble 
orange — Probably only a va- 
riety", though named as a spe- 
cies. 



4893. The Citron is the C. Medico, L. {Gcer. fni. 2. 
t. 121. f. 2.) ; the citro7i of the French; the citronier of 
the Germans; and cedrate of the Italians, {fig- 512.) 
In its wild state the tree grows to the height of about 
eight feet, erect and prickly, with long reclining branches. 
The leaves are ovate, oblong, alternate, subserrate, smooth, 
pale green. The fruit or berry is half a foot in length, 
ovate, with a protuberance at the tip. There are two 
rinds, the outer thin, with innumerable miliary glands, 
full of a most fragrant oil ; the inner thick, white, and 
fungous. The citron was introduced into Europe from 
Media, under the name of mains medica, and was first cul- 
tivated in Italy by Palladius in the second century. The 
date of its introduction into England is not exactly 
known ; it would probably be coeval with that of the 
lemon, which was cultivated in the botanic garden at Ox- 
ford in lf:48. The fairest fruit, Miller states, was in the 
Duke of Argyle's garden at Whitton, where the trees 
were trained against a south wall, through which there were flues for warming the air in 
■winter, and glass covers put over them, when the weather began to be cold. Thus 
the fruit was as large and as perfectly ripe, as it is in Italy or Spain. In Italy citrons 
and lemons are generally trained on walls or espaliers, because, being considerably more 
tender than the orange, they require, at least in the north of Italy, some protection in 
winter ; the fruit does not ripen regularly at one time, like that of the orange, but comes 
suci ionally to maturity almost every month in the year. 

4894. Use. The fruit is seldom brought to the dessert in a raw state, but it forms excellent preserves and 
.sweetmeats, to furnish the table when other fruits are scarce. The juice, with sugar and water, forms 
lemonade, a most refreshing, salubrious, and universally esteemed beverage. Its use in punch and negus 
is well known. It is much used in medicine, and also in perfumerj- and dyeing. 

4895. Varieties. Dr. Sickler enumerates only about a dozen citrons and citronates as grown in Italy. 
The French nurseries have nearly twenty names in their lists. In England the six following are cultivated 
for sale ; — 




The common citron 
The flat-fruited 



The rough-fruited 
The forbidden-fruited 



IThe grape-fruited Barbadoes 
(Hon. Trans, vol. iii. p. 558.) 



4896. The lemon is the C. Medica, var. Limon, W. {Blackiv. 362.) ; the limon of the French ; limmier 
of the Germans ; and limone of the Italians, {fg. 513.) The distinction between the lemon and citron is 
very trifling. The fruit is less knobbed at the extremities, is rather longer, and more irregular, and the 
skin is thinner than in the citron ; the wood is more knotty, and the bark rougher. Cultivated in the 
Oxford garden in 1648. 





4897. T7ie uses of the lemnn are the same as those of the citron. ' 

4898. Varieties. Dr. Sickler enumerates twenty-eight as grown in Italy. The French, according to 
Ville Herv6, have eleven sorts j in the London nurseries are cultivated the twelve following : — 



Common 
Broad-leaved 
Chinese 
Imperial 



Pear-shaped, or Lime IJig. 514.) 
Rough-fruited 
Smooth -leaved 
Striped gold 



Striped silver 
Striped three-cclored 
Upright 

Warted fniited. 



IJjOK I. 



ORANGE TRIBE. 




4809. Thelime'M the Citrus Ackia, R.x. (Brmvn's Jam. 
SOS.) by some esteemed a variety of tlic C. Malk^a ; the 
/<;;.'t'of the French, Italians, and Germans. (Jig. 515.) The 
sour lemon, or lime, grows to the height ot about eight feet, 
with a crooked trunk, and many diif'used branches, with 
prickles. Tiie leaves are ovate, lanceolate, almost quite 
entire. Berry an inch and a half in diameter, almost glo- 
bular, with a protuberance at the top ; the surface regular, 
shining, greenish-yellow, with a very odorous rind, en- 
closing a very acid juice. It is a native of Asia, but has 
long been common m the "West Indies, where it is grown 
both for its fruit and for fences. 

5900. T7i€ uses of the lime are the same as those of the 
lemon, to which, in the West Indies, it is preferred ; the 
juice being reckoned more wholesome, and tlie acid more 
agreeable to the palate. 

5901. J'a?'it'tifs. By the catalogue in Nouveau Cours, See. 
the French have two sorts of lime ; and according t» Dr. 
Sickler, the Italians have four varieties. The foUowing 
five kinds are grown in the London nurseries : — 

The common lime I The bioad-lenved ( The Clilnese spreading. 
The weeping ] The AV'est India 1 

5902. The shaddock is the C. dccianana, \V. {Bump. am. 2. 
t. 24. f. 2.) ; the orange pampelmouse of the French ; and 
the arancio massimo of the Italians, (Jig. 516.) The tree is 
above the middle size, with spreading prickly branches. The \""'^^^~~ 
leaves are ovate, subacute, seldom obtuse; the petioles are \ — ^ 
cordate, winged ; the wings as broad as the leaves. The berry — 
spheroidal, frequently retuse at each end, of an even surface, 
and greenish-yellow color ; pulp, red or white ; juice, sweet or 
acid ; rind, white, thick, fungous, and bitter. Thunberg says, 
the fruit in .Tapan grows to the size of a child's head, and 
Dr. Sickler states its weight as fourteen pounds, and its diameter 
as from seven to eight Indies. It is a native of China and Japan, 
and was brought to the West Indies by Captain Shaddock, from 
whom it has derived its name. From the ^Vest Indies it was 
sent to England, and cultivated by Miller in 1739. 

590-3. L'se. The shaddock is certainly the least useful of the 
species enumerated, and is cultivated chiefly for show. It has 
the handsomest leaf of the whole tribe, and the fruit is larger 
than the orange. Where several sorts of oraiiges are pre- 
sented at the dessert, it makes a striking addition to the variety. 
Tlie juice is of a subacid sweetness, and excellent for quench- 
ing thirst; and the fruit, from the thickness of its skin, will 
keep longer in sea vovages than any of the other species of 
citrus. 

5904. Varieties. The Italians, according to Dr. Sickler, have one ; and the French, accordmg to the 
Nouveau Cours, &c. four sorts. The following four are grown in the English nurseries : — 

The common shaddock. | The rough-fruited | The largest-fruited | Tlie West India. 

5905. Propagation of the citrus tribe. All the sorts may be propagated by seeds, cut- 
tings, layers, and grafting, or inoculation. 

5906. By seed. The object of raising plants from seed is either to obtain new varieties or stocks for 
grafting. To attempt raising new varieties in Britain wUl in general be found a tedious process, as the 
trees do not even in Italy show fruit for six or eight years or more; and there is now in the botanic 
garden at Toulon, a large handsome tree, of twenty-five years' growth, which had not in 1819 blossomed. 
However, if new varieties are attempted, select the largest and best-formed ripe fruit of tte kind to be 
raised, extract the seeds, dry them, and sow and nurse as hereafter directed for raising stocks. Wliere 
trees are to be raised for stocks to bud oranges, Miller advises to procure citron-seeds, as stocks from these 
are preferable to any other for quickness of growth ; and also that they will take buds of either orange, 
lemon, or citron. Next to these are the Seville orange seeds ; and the best of either sort are to be had 
from rotten fruits. Prepare in spring a good hot-bed of dung or tan, and when it is in moderate temper sow 
the seeds in pots of light earth ; plunge them, give water frequently, and raise the glasses in the beat of 
the day. In three weeks the seeds will come up, and in a month's time be fit to transplant into single 
pots. Then renew the bed, and fill pots of five inches in diameter half full of good fresh earth, mixed 
with very rotten cow-dung : shake out the seedlings, and plant one in each pot, filling it up with the 
same earth, and replunge as before. Give a good watering at the roots, and repeat this often, as the 
orange tribe in a hot-bed require a good supply of water. Shade in the day-time, when the sun is power- 
ful, and give air so as not to draw the plants. By this method, with due care, the plants will be two feet 
high by July, when they must be hardened by degrees, by raising the glasses very high, and afterwards, 
in fine days, taking them entirely ofF, shading the plants from the sun with mats or other screen-s. To- 
wards the end of September, house them in a dry part of the green-house, near the glass, where they 
will not be liable to damp off During winter refresh them with water, and in April now and then wash 
their stems and leaves, to clear them from any filth they may have contracted. Place them again in a 
moderate hot-bed, and harden them by the beginning of June, that they may be in a right order to bud 
in August. 

59<D7. Budding. Make choice of cuttings from trees, that are healthy and fruitful, observing that the 
shoots are round ; the buds of these being much better and easier to part from the wood than of such 
shoots as are flat or angular. After performing the operation, remove the plants into the green-house, or 
under glass frames, to defend them from wet, turning the buds from the sun ; but let them have as much 
free air as possible, and refresh them often with water. In a month it wiU be observable which has taken, 
then untie them, and let them remain in the green-house all the winter. In spring cut off the stocks 
about three inches above the buds, and place them in a moderate hot-bed, giving air and water, and 
shading as before. By the end of July they will have made shoots of two feet or more ; then harden them 
before the cold sets in, that they may 'the better stand the winter. In the first winter after their shooting, 
you must keep them very warm, for by forcing them in the bark-bed they will be somewhat tenderer; 
but it is very necessary to raise them to' their height in one season, that their stems may be straight, for 
in trees which are two or more years growing to their heading height, the stems are always crooked. In 
the succeeding years their management wUl be the same as for fuU-grown trees. 




5908. The Italian process of raising and budding. 

3 D 



In the orange-nurseries at Nervi, 



770 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Faht III. 




the seeds of the citron or orange, as it may happen, are sown in beds in the open ground 
in February or March, and in September planted out in compartments, in rows generally 
about eighteen inches wide, and the plants six or eight inches in the row. They are 
placed thus close to draw them up with clean straight stems. There they remain 
generally four years, and in April or May of the fifth year they are taken up, their roots 
cut within four or six inches of the tap-root, which is also shortened to six or eight 
inches, according to the size of the tree. The stem, if it has any side shoot§, is pruned 
clean, and sawn off horizontally, at such a height as that the section is from half an 
inch to an inch in diameter. {Jig. 511. a) The 
general heights are one foot, which forms the 
lowest-growing plants ; eighteen inches for 
trees to be sold m Italy; from two to four 
feet for trees to be sent abroad ; and five or 
six feet for extraordinary orders. These last 
are not so common ; as the stocks require six 
or eight years' growth, and some care to attain 
that height with clean stems, and a diameter 
of three quarters of an inch. The plants thus 
pruned are budded, sometimes when out of 
ground, and sometimes after planting. One 
bud is inserted on each side of the stock (a), 
within an inch of the section. In a month 
buds and roots begin to push, and in Decem- 
ber or January following these plants are in 
fit state for taking up for exportation. After 
being taken up, the roots, now well furnished 
with fibres, are enveloped in a ball of stiff 
clay ; this is covered with moss carefully tied 
on, and in this way they are laid in boxes, or 
in casks, and sent not only to most parts of 
Europe, but to North and South America. 
The chief defect in this system is the naked 
horizontal section at the top of the stem (a), which, not being smoothed with the knife 
and covered with clay or any other protection, to cause the bark to grow over it, indurates 
and cracks with the drought ; retains moisture and decays, so that in almost all trees 
that have been budded in this way, a dead stump or a rotten hole, may be observed 
during the whole period of their existence. This evil is often lessened by covering with 
a cap of lead or a patch of wax ; but it might readily be obviated by peeling off a piece 
of bark from one side of the part of the stock to be sawn off (rf), letting it remain attached 
to the lower part or stem ; and after removing the head, bringing it down close over 
the section, inserting its end under the bark in the opposite eide, somewhat in the man- 
ner of saddle-grafting ; or the manner employed by surgeons in amputating a limb 
[e) might be adopted. A similar object might probably be effected by removing a 
wedge-shaped section from the top of the stock {f), and then compressing its sides, so 
as to present a wedge-shaped termination covered with bark (g). But the gardeners at 
Nervi are too indolent and obstinate to hear of any thing new, and will persist in their 
present plan till the credit of Genoa for orange-trees is gone, or till some strong necessity 
urges them to improvement. 

5909. The Maltese, aware of the defects in Italian trees, make a sloping section {b), paring it clean, and 
budding on one side only ; the consequence of which is, that the section becomes covered with bark, and, 
which it never does in the Italian method, as sound and healthy as any part of the stem. The French 
graft and inoculate in a very neat manner (c), and indeed their orange-trees, though small, are much 
handsomer than the Italian ones. 

5910. By grafting. This mode is occasionally resorted to in Italy, and is that most generally adopted 
in the nurseries at Paris. The stocks, yvhen of two years' growth, and not much thicker than the scion, 
are cut over within six inches of the ground, and then grafted in the whip manner. Tlie trees continue 
small, but have clean stems of from one to three feet, and generally make handsome plants, prolific in 
flowers and fruit, of a small size. Grafting, both by the whip manner and by approach, is frequently 
practised in England, in nearly the same circumstances of age, size, and effect, as practised in France. A 
variety of the whip-manner is described by Gushing, in which the top of the stock is left on, but the scion 
is cut off as in grafting. "Form the scion as for the common whip-graft, and then, without taking off 
the head of the stock, cut from the clearest part of its stem an equal splice as smoothly as possible ; do not 
tongue the scion, but tie it on neatly and firmly with matting and clay, in the manner of a graft : plunge 
them in a hot-bed, and cover with a cap-glass till the scion begins to grow, and then cut away the top of 
the stock, and remove the matting by degrees." {Exotic Gard. 103.) 

5911. Whip-grafting in the common way has lately been successfully performed, even with fruit or 
flowers ©a the scion, by Nairn, who gives the following account of the process : " Let the operator select 
as many orange or lemon stocks as he wishes to work, and place them on a moderate hot-bed for a fort- 
night, by which time the sap will have risen sufficiently to move the bark; the stocks must then be cut 
off, about two inches above the surface of the pot, and an incision made with a sharp knife, similar to 
what is done for budding, separating the bark from the wood on each side. Let the scion be cut thin, in 
a sloping direction, and thrust between the bark and wood, and then bound tight with ^yoollen yarn ; but 
very great care must be taken, in binding, to prevent the bark from slipping round the stock, which, 
without attention, it is very apt to do. After it is properly and neatly bound, put a little loam or clay 



Book I. 



ORANGE TRIBE. 



771 



dose round the stock, to the surfece of the pot, then, with a glass of a proper form [,fig. 518.), to prevent 
the damp from dripping on the scion, cover the whole, and press it firmly 
into tlie mould, to prevent the air or steam from getting to the plant ; 
the glass must not be taken off, unless you find any of the leaves damp- 
ing, and then only till this is remedied, when it must be immediately re- 
turned. The stocks must next be placed on a brisk hot-bed of dung, and 
in about six weeks, the glasses may be taken off", and the clay and binding 
removed ; but it will be necessary to bind on a little damp moss, in lieu of 
the clay, and to keep the glasses "on in the heat of ihe day, taking them 
off" at night; when, in about three weeks or a month, they will be fit to 
be put into the green-house, where they will be found to be one of the 
greatest ornaments it can receive. I should recommend the nmndarin 
orange for the first trial, as the fruit is more firmly fixed than that of any 
of the other sorts. I have, by the above method, had seven oranges on a 
plant, in a pot, comnrionly called a small sixty, which I conceive to be 
both curious and handsome." {Hort. Trans, iii.) 

5912. Henderson's mode of grafdng is well adapted for proving successful. " 

" Take two-year-old wood, cut into lengths of about seven inches. If the stock is much thicker than 
the graft (fig. 519. a), cut a piece out of the stock of a triangular figure, about an inch and two eighths in 
length, regulating the depth according to the 
thickness of the graft, and keeping it square at 
the bottom. Displace two leaves at the bottom of 
the graft, for the convenience of getting it put on, 
cut the graft right across under one eye, where a 
leaf has been taken off : dress the graft to fit the 
receptacle made in the stock, observing to keep 
the lower end of the graft equal in thickness as 
above ; alvvays let three or four leaves remain 
untouched on the graft. After the graft is fitted 
in the stock, tie it up with bass matting, and put 
clay around it. If the grafts and stocks are nearly 
of the same thickness (6), cut the stock, at right 
angles, nearly half through. Cut off the piece, 
keeping it equal at top and bottom : cut the 
lower end of the graft right across under an 
eye (a), and with a knife prepare the graft to fit the 
stock. "When the grafted plants are tied up and 
clayed, set them at the back of the vinery or 
peach-house, observing to keep them away from 
the flues, as fire-heat is hurtful to them at first : 
cover them with hand-glasses, or, if a frame can 
be spared, it is still better. Shade them every 
day, but take the mats off at night ; continue the 
shading till they begin to grow, when they may be 
exposed to the light. If any stock happens to be 
so tall and thick that it cannot be placed under a 
hand-glass or frame, put two or three grafts on 
it, set in any convenient place in the house, and 
shade it with mats ; it will succeed perfectly in 
this way, the grafts lose none of the old leaves ; 
and, in five or six months, they will make three 
or four young shoots six or eight inches long ; 
these, with the leaves that were on the grafts 
when put on, form a well-clothed little plant." 

5913. £y cuttings. This method, though little 
practised on the continent, where the object is 
large trees and fine fruit, is frequently adopted 
by the British gardener, whose object is generally 
small handsome plants. Two methods are adopt- 
ed ; the first is to take young succulent wood as 
soon as it has done growing, and the lower end 
has become somewhat mature. These cuttings, 
prepared properly (5914.) are inserted with a small 
dibber in pots of light sandy loam, with two or 
three inches of gravel or broken pots at bottom. 
They are then covered close with a crystal bell, 
and plunged in a gentle heat, and shaded. The 
glasses are taken off only to wipe them when damp, and to remove any decaying leaves. In two months 
such cuttings either strike or rot off. Tlie second method is in spring to take the shoots of last year ; to 
prepare and plant them as above ; but after covering them with glasses to plunge them in a cold-frame, 
where they remain in a state of apparent inaction for three or four months, when they either form a cal- 
lous excrescence at the lower end of the cutting and push at top, or die off. After preserving them in a 
low temperature through the winter, they are placed the succeeding spring in a gentle hot bed, where 
they will push freely, and make tolerable plants. The success of either mode may be facilitated by taking 
care to place the cuttings so as their ends may touch the bottom of the pot, or the potsherd or gravel with 
which that is covered. The advantages of so placing cuttings is generally known to gardeners, and has 
been noticed by Hawkins in the Hort. Trans, vol. ii. p. 12. 

5914. Henderson considers cuttings as the quickest mode of getting plants, and has practised it for 
thirty-seven years past on the orange tribe, and his directions are as follow : " Take the strongest young 
•shoots, and also a quantity of the two-year-old shoots ; these may be cut into lengths from nine inches to 
eighteen inches. Take the leaves off the lower part of each cutting to the extent of about five inches, al- 
lowing the leaves above that to remain untouched : then cut right across, under an eye ; and make a 
small incision in an angular direction on the bottom of the cutting. When the cuttings are thus prepared, 
take a pot, and fill it with sand ; size the cuttings, so that the short ones may be all together, and those 
that are taller in a different pot. Then, with a small dibble, plant them about five inches deep in the 
sand, and give them a good watering overhead, to settle the sand about them. Let them stand a day or 
two in a shady place, and if a frame be ready with bottom heat, plunge the pots to the brim. Shade 
them well with a double mat, which may remain till they have struck root ; when rooted, take the sand 
and cuttings out of the pot, and plant them into single pots, in the proper compost (see 5922.) Plunge 
the pots with the young plants again into a frame, and shade them for four or five weeks, or till they 
are taken with the pots ; when they may be gradually exposed to the light. From various experiments, 
I found that pieces of two-year-old wood struck quite well ; and in place, therefore, of putting in cuttings 
six or eight inches long, I have taken off' cuttings from ten inches to two feet long, and struck them 

3T> 2 





772 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part HI. 



with equal success. Although I at first began to put in cuttings only in the month of August, I now put 
them in at any time of the year, except vnien the plants are making young wood. By giving them a 
gentle bottom heat, and covering them with a hand-glass, they will generally strike roots in seven 
weeks or two months. The citron is most easily struck, and is the freest grower. I therefore frequeivtly 
strike pieces eighteen inches long ; and as soon as they are put into single pots, and taken with the pots, 
they are grafted with other sorts, which grow freely. I am not particular as to the time either of striking 
cuttings or of grafting." {Caled. Ilort. Jlc'/?i. iii. 308.) 

5915. Bi/ lat/ers. This mode is occasionally practised both on the continent and in England. At Monza, 
near Milan, there is a very fine collection of lemon-trees in boxes, trained as espaliers, which were so 
raised. The trees are five feet high, and each box has a portion of trellis attached to it of that height, and 
ten or twelve feet long, which is wliolly covered with branches. Where laying is adopted, the plants may 
either be laid down on their sides, and laid as stools, or pots may be raised and supported under the 
branches to be propagated from. These branches, or their shoots of one or two years' growth, may then 
be cut or ringed, and bent into the pot, or down through the hole in the bottom, and treated in the usual 
manner, taking care to supply water with the greatest regularity. Shoots layered in March will be fit to 
separate from the stools as mother plants in the September following. In general, it may be observed, 
that the citron tribe, like other fruit-bearing plants raised from cuttings or layers, though they may prove 
very prolific trees, yet seldom grow with that vigor, and produce such large fruit, as those propagated by 
budding or grafting on seedling stocks. 

5916. So/7. At Genoa and Florence they are grown in a strong yellow clay, which is richly manured ; 
and this soil is considered by the first Italian gardeners, as best "suited to their natures. At Rome and 
Milan the natural soil is lighter ; but a strong soil is adopted generally for all the agruyni, and particularly 
in the garden of his Holiness the Pope. At Naples, where the trees are always planted in the open 
ground, the soil is lighter ami of volcanic origin. A strong soil, in imitation of that of Nervi, is recom- 
mended and adopted by the Dutch. (See Van Ostcn. Nicd, Hcsperidcs, Sec.) 

5917. T/ie French gardeners, according to Bosc (in X Cours d'Ag. in loco.), in preparing a compost for 
the orange-tree, endeavor to compensate for quantity by quality ; because the pots or boxes in which 
the plants are placed ought always to be as small as possible, relatively to the size of the tree. The fol- 
lowing is the composition recommended : To a fresh loam which contains a third of clay, a third of sand, 
and a third of vegetable matter, and which has lain a long time in a heap, add an equal bulk of half.rotten 
cow-dung. The following year turn it over twice. The succeeding year mix it with nearly one half its 
bulk of decomposed horse-dung. Turn it over twice or three times, and the winter before'using, add a 
twelfth part of sheep-dung, a twentieth of pigeon-dung, and a twentieth of drietl ordure. 

5918. Miller says, the best compost for orange-trees is two thirds of fresh cartii from a good pasture, and 
one third part of neat's dung. These should be mixed together at least twelve months before using, turning 
it over every month to mix it well and to rot the sward. Pass it through a rough screen before using. 

5919. M'PkaiL and Abercronibic recommend " three eighth parts of cow-dung, which has been kept 
three or four years ; a fourth part of vegetable mould from tree-leaves ; one sixth part of fine rich loam ; 
and one twelfth part of road-grit; to this may be added one eighth part of sheep-dung." (£f. Bern. 2^. 
Pr. Gard 574.) 

5920. Mean has tried the following mixture {Horf. Trajis. ii. 295.), and with which he has " every rea- 
son to be satisfied. Well-prepared rotten leaves, two to three years old, one half ; rotten cow-dung, 
two, three, and four years old, one fourth ; mellow loam, one fourth ; with a small quantity of sand or 
road-grit added to the compost, which ought not to be sifted too fine." 

5921. Ayrcs, who grows excellent table fruit of the citrus, at Shipley, uses ten parts of strong turf-loam, 
seven of pigeon-dung, seven of garbage from the dog-kennel or butcher's yard, seven of sheep-dung, 
seven of good rotten horse-dung, and ten of old vegetable mould, mixed and prepared a twelvemonth 
before using. {Hort. Trans, iv. 310.) 

5922. Henderson, of Wood Hall, a most successful cultivator of the genus citrus, gives the following di- 
rections as to soil : " Take one part of light-brown mould fi-om a piece of ground that has not been cropped 
nor manured for many years j one part of peat-earth, such as is used for growing heaths ; two parts of 
river-sand, or pit-sand if it be free from mineral substances ; and one part of rotted hot-bed dung ; with 
one part of rotted leaves of trees. Mix them all well together, so as to form a compost-soil of uniform 
quality." {Caled. Hort. Mem. iii. 302.) 

5923. Temperature. The standard temperature for the citrus tribe is 48° ; but in the growing season 
they require at least ten degrees of additional heat to force them to produce luxuriant shoots The air of 
the house in which the plants are kept, whether in boxes or in the ground, should never be allowed to fall 
under 40°, for though the orange, like the pine-apple, will endure a severe degree of cold for a few hours 
without injury, yet, as Mean has observed, the leaves once injured the trees will require three years to 
recover their appearance. Ayres never sufiers his orangery to be heated above 50° by fire-heat, until the 
end of February ; when the trees show blossom, it is increased to 55°, but never allowed to exceed 60° by 
sun-heat, the excess of which he checks by the admission of air till the early part of June, when he 
" begins to force the trees, by keeping the heat in the house up as near as possible to 75°. For I do not 
consider (he adds) that either citrons, oranges, lemons, or limes, can !?e grown line and good with less 
heat." {Hort. Trans. \v. Sll.) The orange, Humboldt observes (Dt- Z)/vV?r/^. P/ah/. 158.), which requires 
an average temperature of 64 degrees, will bear a very great degree of cold if continued only for a short 
time. This is proved by an observation of Dr. Sickler, who says, " It is remarkable how much cold and 
snow the common lemons and oranges will bear at Rome, provided they are planted in a sheltered situ- 
ation, not much exposed to the sun. Thus I saw in the two winters of ISOo and 1806, inider my windows, 
on Monte Pincio, three standard orange-trees in the open ground, heavily covered with snow for more 
than a week. The green leaves, but still more the golden fruits, nearly ripe, looked singular but beautiful 
amidst the snow ; neither fruits nor trees had suffered, being in a sheltered place, while many branches 
and leaves of other trees of this kind, which were exposed to the sun, turned black and died, rendering 
the whole tree sickly." {Volk. Oran. Gart. 9.) It appears that the snow had been thawed from off these 
trees gradually, and more by the temperature of the atmosphere than by the direct rays of tJie sun, or a 
current of heated air. This resulted from their sheltered and partially shaded situation; and, as Dr. 
Noehden has remarked {Hort. Trans, iii. 43.), it proves the truth of the observation of Knight, that it is 
more the sudden transition from cold to heat, and the contrary, than the degree of either, which destroys 
vegetables. Whenever orange-trees or any tender exotics have been touched during night by frost, they 
should either be immediately shaded by mats from the next day's sun, or thawed by water at not more than 
32 or 33 degrees of temperature. In the northern regions the same treatment is successfully applied to 
animals. (See Hoi-t. Trans, iii. 42. and 144.) 

5924 Water. Orange-trees, like other evergreens which delight in a strong soil, are not naturally fond 
of water ; but in this country those in boxes are often much injured for a want of a due supply of this ma- 
terial ; for the earth becoming indurated, the water wets only the surface, and runs over and escapes by 
the sides of the pot or box ; so that while the mass of earth below is dry, the surface has a sane moist ap- 
pearance. Mean says, " When I think from the appearance of a plant, that the water does not freely 
enter by the middle or sides of the box, a sharp iron rod, about three feet long, is made use of to penetrate 
to the bottom of the earth, and to form a channel for the water, too little or too much of which is equally 
injurious to orange-trees." Knight {Hort. Trans, ii. 229.) watered an orange-tree with very strong liquid 
manure, and found it grow with equal comparative vigor to the vine and mulberry. Ayres, after the fruit 
is set, waters with water, in which, at the rate of three barrows of fresh cow-dung, without litter, two bar- 
rows of fresh sheep's droppings, and two pecks of quick lime have been added to every hogshead ; when 



Book I. 



ORANGE TRIBE. 



773 



used, tJic water is about the consistence of cream. {Hort. Trans, v. 310.) The French water once after 
shitting with a very strong lessive; tliey also mulch with recent cow and horse droppings, renewing these 
once a-month or oftener during summer, that there may be always abundance of soluble matter for the 
water to convey to their roots. {Nouvedu Cours, &c. art. 0}-ange.) M'Phail mentions a casein whicli very 
large orange-trees in the border of a conservatory looked sickly ; when, on digging deep into the borders 
to examine the cause, he found the earth quite dry, and by afterwards continuing to water them regu- 
larly he recovered them. (Gf. Eem. 242.) 

5[)25. Air. During the winter season, Miller observes, orange-trees require a large share of air when the 
weather is favorable; for nothing is more injurious to these trees than. stifling them. The prevention of 
damp. Mean observes, is as essential to the perfection of the plants as the exclusion of cold. Where these 
trees are kept in old-fashioned opaque-roofed green-houses, these cautions as to air and damp deserve parti- 
cular attention. Ayres says, the more air orange-trees have during the blossoming season, the more cer- 
tain will they be of setting the fruit. 

5926. Light. Many gardeners are of opinion that the orange tribe do not require so much light as other 
exotics, which may have arisen from the gloomy conservatories in which they used to be formerly kept 
during winter ; for certainly to look at the orange-houses at Versailles and Kew, one would not con- 
clude light to be a very essential requisite. But though these trees, like other evergreens, when in a state 
of inaction, will live with less light than evergreens or deciduous plants in a growing state, they always 
suffer for the want of it, which is indicated by the paleness of the leaves in spring, and by their falling 
off when set out in the open air and fully exposed to the influence of day. Whoever intends to grow the 
orange in any degree of perfection, should adopt houses, if not with glass on all sides, at least with glass 
fronts and roofs. When the plants are placed in the naked ground as standards, glass on all sides is 
highly desirable ; for otherwise their leaves and shoots will all be turned to the south, and the north side 
of each tree will in a short time become naked and unsightly. 

5927. Manner of growing the trees. All the species may either be grown as dwarfs in 
moderate-sized pots or boxes ; as standards with stems from two to six feet high in large 
boxes ; as standards planted in the naked ground ; and either as dwarfs or standards 
planted and trained against a wall or trellis under glass. The two first modes are more 
adapted for ornament than producing crojis of large fruit ; for all the art of the gardener 
will never make plants grow as vigorously in boxes as in the free ground. Standards 
planted in the free ground or floor of the conservatory, combine both elegance and utility; 
as in a house properly constructed, they will make handsome heads, and produce abundant 
crops of fruit. The last mode, or that of planting against walls or trellises, is much the 
most certain way of having large crops. Every part of the plant above ground can thus 
be brought near the glass and equally exposed to the sun's influence and that of the air 
and heat : they can be more readily pruned, and correctly trained, watered, and washed; 
and they occupy less room in proportion to the produce. The trees at Wood Hall, in 
West Lothian, some of those at Shipley, and at some places in Devonshire, are trained 
in this way. In a very few favorable situations in the South of England, as at Gerston 
and Woodville, in Devonshire, they are trained against walls in the open garden. 

5928. Plans for OTUvge- houses. These must naturally depend on the mode of growing. For plants in 
moderate-sized pots and boxes, a common green-house is the obvious habitation ; for, being plants of orna- 
ment, they require merely the treatment of that department. The conservatories in Italy have generally 
opaque roofs, but some of the more enlightened nobles of Lombardy have lately erected splendid con.struc- 
tions with glass roofs, in which they combine the culture of the citron tribe with other, large-growing 
exotics, {jig. 520.) 




5929. For trees; in large boxes, a proportionably large and lofty house is requisite ; it may be opaque 
on the north side with a glass roof, front, and ends, of any convenient or desired length, width, and height. 
For one of moderate size, the height at the back wall may be fifteen feet, at front ten feet, and the 
width of the house fifteen feet. The floor may be either perfectly level, and the boxes placed on it, the lar- 
gest behind, so as their tops may form a slope to the front glass, as in the conservatory of Prince Borghese, 




at Home ; or if the trees are young, a stage may be erected for a few years, in order to raise the plants to 
the light : but if the trees are of a considerable size, the best way is to have square pits in the floor at re- 
gular distances, somewhat larger than each box, and in these to sink the boxes, covering them with 

3 D 3 



774 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 



mould, sand, or moss nearly to the level of the pavement, so that each tree so pliaced and dressed, will ap- 
pear as if planted in a small compartment of earth. Such is the plan of the large conservatory in the 
royal gardens at Monza. The walk, unless where a stage is adopted, should be in the front of the house, with 
corresponding doors in each end ; but where the trees are young, and placed on a stege like green-house 
plants, the walk should be in front, as in no other situation could the eye of the spectator meet the foliage 
of the plants. Where the walk is in the middle, and a double row of trees on each side as at Monza, the 
effect in winter is truly magnificent and gratifying. 

5930. Wliere the trees are to be planted as standards in the borders or floor of the house, it is essentially 
requisite to the health and beauty of the plants that the building be glazed on all sides, {fig. 521.) 
Showers might be supplied in Loddige's manner ; heat by steam or flues [fig. 522. a) and in winter, the 
beds (6) might be covered with turf, strewed with daisies, violets, and primroses ; these would come early 




into flower, and if the turf were kept very short about the roots of the flowering plants, and the trees in 
excellent condition, only those who have seen the first-rate, regularly planted, standard orange-groves of 
Nervi could form an idea of the effect, which, by contrast with the external winter, would be felt as lux- 
urious and as anticipating real spring. 

5931. Where orange-ti-ces are to be trained against the back wall or a trellis, under the glass, the forms 
adopted for common peach-houses or vineries are perfectly suitable ; but as by training close under the 
glass, as is done with vines, much of the beauty of the foliage would be lost, training on a trellis a few feet 
distant, with a path between it and the glass, is preferable. 

5932. Plans for tubs, pots, and boxes. Unglazed pots of earthenware are preferable to glazed stoneware 
or China pots ; the form need not be different from that in common use, and the size must depend on that 
of the plants. At Florence, where the largest and best garden-pots in Europe are made, the rim and part of 
the outside of pots destined for oranges and ornamental plants, are often decorated with festoons of flowers 
or fmit, and lions' heads, or other ornaments ; which some potters near London have begun to imitate. 

5933. Tubsmay be of any size, and in these and in boxes, trees thrive better than in pots. One advan- 
tage of tubs is, that by unhooping them, the staves are instantly removed, and the roots examined and 
dressed, and by having a cooper at hand they are immediately replaced j thus saving much of the trouble 
necessarily incurred in shifting plants in pots or boxes. 

5934. Boxes. All boxes which are larger than the largest-sized pots, should be contrived to take to 
nieces, in order to examine the roots, or to shift into larger boxes. Square boxes held together by an iron 
hoop, and taking to pieces on the principle of tubs, are most convenient for trees which do not require 
more than five or ten cubic feet of earth ; and such as are used at the Tuilleries and by Mean {figs. 177 
to 179.) answer very well for plants requiring from ten to sixty cubic feet. Those of Mean contain sixty-four 
cubic feet of compost. 

5935. Proportioning the size of boxes to that of the plants. The general opinion of gardeners is in favor 
of small pots or boxes ; and where the object is dwarf plants, or merely to preserve the trees without much 
increasing their size or regarding their fruit, they are the most proper. But where the object is luxuriance 
of growth and fruit, it does appear to us that the pots or boxes cannot be too large ; unless, as Van Osten 
observes, it is meant to be asserted that plants grow larger in pots than in the free ground. It is, however, 
expedient to plant at first in small boxes, and remove into larger ones by degrees. The largest boxes in 
use in Holland and France are four feet square, which serve for trees with stems from six to eight feet 
high, with globular heads of six feet in diameter, and above a century old. Henderson has " always found 
that the citrus tribe, and plants in general, grow best in pots or boxes, regarded as rather small in propor- 
tion to the size of the plants." {Caled. Mem. iii. 303.) 

5936. Choice of sorts. Where the object is more ornament than fruit for the dessert, 
a selection may be made from the varieties of each species at pleasure ; where the object 
is fruit for the dessert, the following sorts are to be preferred : the common, bloody- 
fruited, Bergaraot, Maltese, sweet China, Seville, and Mandarin oranges ; the com- 
mon lemon, citron, and lime, and one or two plants of the shaddock. These include 
all the essential varieties of the orange tribe as far as respects fruit ; variations in the 
leaves and mode of growth. 

5937. Choice of plants. For moderate-sized trees to be treated like green-house plants, such as are 
raised in this country or in the Parisian nurseries are preferable ; but where the object is large handsome 
trees in boxes, standards in the free soil, or trained trees, then plants from Genoa or Malta are decidedly 
preferable ; indeed, no plants fitting for the purpose of standards could be elsewhere procured. Miller is 
of this opinion, observing, that " by much the quicker way of furnishing a green-house with large trees, 
is to make choice of such as are brought over every year in chests from Italy ; for those which are 
raised from seeds in England will not grow so large in their stems under eighteen or twenty years, as 
those are when brought over ; and although their heads are small when we receive them, yet in three 
years, with good management, they will obtain large heads, and produce fruit." When the plants are 
purchased in London, at the Italian warehouses, without names, the greater number will be found to be 
of the shaddock and citron kinds ; as the Italian gardeners find these sorts make stronger shoots and more 
showy plants, and therefore send a less number of the less luxuriant but more useful varieties. But the 
best way is to send an order, through a British merchant who has a correspondent at Genoa, for named 
sorts, ordering so many of each class, either from the table of Dr. Sickler (4880.) or the synopsis of Gal- 
lesio. (^^.4881.) 

5938. Management in pots and boxes. The management of dwarf English or French plants in moderate- 
sized pots or boxes, for the green-house stage, consists in common green-house treatment. Being potted 
in the proper soil, the roots are to be annually examined before the growing season in spring, and when 
matted or diseased, trimmed off and repotted, or shifted into larger pots at discretion. Henderson says, 
" The general management of the orange-trees from the middle of March till the 1st of October, may be 
discussed in a few words. I give the trees a good watering all over the leaves once a-week with the en- 
gine, excepting when they are in flower. Till the end of May this watering is given about 11 o'clock in 
the forenoon. After the end of May, I give them a good dashing over the leaves twice a-week with the en- 
gine, and now I do it in the evening. In very hot weather I repeat the engine-watering thrice a-week. 



Book I. 



ORANGE TRIBE. 



775 



I never set the orange-trees out of doors during summer ; for, from thirty-eight years' experience, I find 
it is much against them, in the climate of Scotland. In hot weather I keep them in the back of the 
vinery, under the shade of the vines, or behind the stage of the green-house. Orange-trees delight to 
be in the shade in sunny weather ; they here grow freely, and keep a fine dark-green color. From the fre- 
quent waterings over the leaves in summer, the pots require less water, but they must be carefully attended 
to, and when the plants are making their young shoots, the pots or tubs require a good supply of water. 
From October to March, I give them a gentle sprinkling over the leaves once in two or three weeks, 
but only in fresh weather, taking the opportunity of a mild day, when there is a little sun, and always in 
the forenoon." {Caled. HorL Menu iii. 303.) 

5939. For the management for Italian plants, destined to grojv large trees and produce 
crops of fruit in boxes or tubs, ttie treatment requires to be more particularly detailed, 

5940. The following are Miller's directions : — Having furnished yourself with a parcel of trees, prepare a 
moderate hot-bed of tanner's bark, in length and breadth according to the number of trees to be forced, 
then put your trees into a tub of water upright, about half way of the stems, leaving: the head and upper 
part of the stem out of water, the better to draw and imbibe the moisture. In this situation they may re- 
main two or three days, according to their plumpness when you received them ; then take them out and 
clean their roots from all filth, cutting off all broken or bruised roots, and all the small fibres which are 
quite dried by being so long out of the earth, and scrub the stems with a hard hair brush, cleaning them 
afterwards with a cloth ; then cut off the branches about six inches from the stem, and having prepared 
a quantity of good fresh earth, mixed with very rotten neat's dung, plant your trees therein, observing 
never to put them into large pots ; for if they are but big enough to contain their roots it is sufficient at 
first planting. Wrap the stems round with hay-bands from bottom to top to prevent the sun from drying 
their bark : plunge the pots in the bark-bed, watering well to settle earth to their roots, frequently re- 
peating the same all over their heads and stems, being very careful not to over- water them before they 
have made good roots, and shade from the sun in the middle of the day. If they have grown kindly 
they will have made strong shoots by the beginning of June ; at which time stop them to obtain lateral 
branches to furnish their heads ; harden them to admit the.ir removal into the open ground in July ; 
house them about the end of September ; and, during winter, water frequently but moderately, guarding 
against frost. In the following spring clean the stems and leaves of the plants, top-dress the earth, and 
mulch, with rotten cow-dung, round the edges of the pots, taking care that none touch the stems. 
Remove to a sheltered situation in the open air by the end of May. As the trees advance, stop strong irre- 
gular-growing shoots in the summer season, to force out lateral branches, to fill the head, and render it 
regular and free from weak trifling branches. The trees will require to be shifted and new-potted, every 
other year, in April. In performing the operation, having drawn the trees out of the pots, cut off all the 
roots round the outside of the ball of earth, and take away all mouldy roots ; then with a sharp iron in- 
strument, get as much of the old earth from between the roots as possible ; then set the root of the tree 
into a large tub of water, for about a quarter of an hour, to soak the under part of the ball of earth, 
then clean the stems. Repot the trees, and water, letting them remain in the house till they have 
taken root. 

5941. The operation of shifting, when the plants become very large, is much facilitated by adopt- 
ing boxes which admit of being taken to pieces, as already described ; the balls of earth can thus be 
slid from one box to the other instead of being lifted out of the box. Where the boxes do not separate, the 
tree and ball must be lifted out by fixing one end of a rope to the stem of the tree, and passing the other 
over a pully suspended from a triangle. This mode is recommended by Van Osten, while some French au- 
thors recommend a carriage -lever and rope. The tree and ball of earth are thus, by either mode, suspended 
in the air, the latter is examined, the roots pruned, &c. ; and this done, the same or a larger box is placed 
directly below the ball, with a proper quantity of compost at the bottom, and into this the tree is lowered, 
and the sides filled with earth, &c. The worst thing attending this mode is the liability of injuring the 
bark of the stem by the noose of the suspending rope. 

5942. Henderson shifts oranges only once in two years, and frequently after a longer interval. " I never 
shift any plant till the pot is very full of roots. In shifting the oranges, I always take as much of the 
exhausted mould away as I can ; and, on account of the light and free nature of the compost used, 
it comes easily from among the roots. The best season for this operation is about the beginning of 
March. Having turned the plants out of the pots or tubs, pick as much of the old exhausted mould 
from the ball as you can, without injuring the roots. They should be shifted into the pots or tubs 
only one size larger, and some of the plants will perhaps do better if replaced into the same pots again. 
Let the pots be all clean washed and dried before any plants be again put into them. Put a piece 
of crockery or broken pot over the hole in the bottom of the pit, with the convex side down ; then 
cover the bottom, above the piece laid over the hole, three quarters of an inch thick, with char 
made from pit-coal, broken small, about the size of peas. This both forms a drain, and prevents the 
entrance of worms. On the top of the charred cinders place a layer of dried moss {hypnum), which 
prevents the compost mould from getting down amongst the char, and lets the water pass off freely 
from the roots of the plants. The bottoms of the pots being prepared in this way, put in a little of 
the compost ; then introduce the roots of the plant into the pot, and fill it up with the compost, ob- 
serving to keep a little of the mould betwixt the side of the pot and the roots. The plants may be 
set partly into the peach-house or the vinery, and some into the green-house, which will give a 
longer succession of their flowers. The orange- trees that are placed in the vinery or peach-house, if 
there be any fire-heat used at the time, must be watered as soon as put in ; but those put into the 
green-house where there is little heat, may stand a day without getting any. After that space they 
may get a moderate watering ; and this may be repeated once a-week till the weather become warm, 
when they will require it oftener. Those placed in the vinery or peach-house will require watering 
very frequently, according to the degree of heat kept in the house." {Caled. Hort. Mem. iii. 304.) 

5943. Renovating old trees in pots or boxes. Where orange-trees have been ill ma- 
naged, and their heads become ragged and decayed. Miller directs to restore them by 
cutting off the greatest part of their heads by March ; drawing them out of the pots or 
tubs, and shaking off the earth from their roots ; then cutting away all small fibres and 
mouldy roots ; and next soaking and cleaning their roots, stems, and branches, planting 
them in good earth, plunging them in a hot-bed, and treating them as directed for trees 
received from abroad. 

5944. Management of the citron tribe as standards. Prepare foreign plants as directed above, and instead 
of planting in pots, plant in the border or floor. This must have been laid dry by proper drains, and if on 
a wet sub-soil, floored, to prevent the roots from penetrating into it. On this, lay the sort of earth, or com- 
post, most approved of, to the thickness of three or four feet; care having been taken in constructing the 
house, that all the walls (excepting the north wall, if the house be opaque on that side), flues, paths, &c. 
be supported on pillars or piers, so as the compost may extend under them, and ten or twelve feet without 
the house, according to circumstances. Plant the trees either in squares, or better in quincunx, allowing 
six or eight feet between the trees, which will give thirty-six or sixty-four square feet to each plant. This 
distance will suffice for several years, and afterwards every other tree can be taken out After planting, 

3 D 4 



776 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



which should be fimshed in April, water at the root, and morning and evening sprinkle a Lttle over the 
tops to assist in causing them to break freely. Apply fires, and keep the house close night and day, with 
a moist heat of from 55'' to 60° till the plants have made shoots of three or four inches ; then begin to 
give a little air, gradually increasing it, but still keeping up the heat till the growth of the shoots is 
completed, when the sashes should be taken off to harden and color the shoots and leaves. It will be 
necessary to attend to the above directions annually, for three or four years, in the growing seasor, in 
order to procure as much wood in a short time as possible. Keeping the heads open and regular, with the 
common routine culture, is all that is necessary at other seasons. 

5915. On walls and espaliers. Prepare the plants and the border as before, and plant about ten or twelve 
feet distance, allowing a larger space for the citron, lemon, and shaddock, than for the common orange, as 
the former grow faster and more luxuriantly. In the growing season, obsen-e the directions already given, 
continiung them annually. The fan manner of training is that generally adopted. 

• 5916. Pruning. The French pay great attention to this part of the culture of the orange tribe; and, in- 
deed, display greater art in pruning every sort of tree, than the British. They have their winter taille, and 
their ebourgeonnonent, or summer pruning, of the orange-tree, as of the peach and vine. Tliose at Ver- 
sailles and the Tuilleries are looked over everv year, and receive a very elaborate pruning every sixth or 
eighth year. The object of this pruning is to keep the head proportioned to the capacity of the box con- 
taining the roots. The heads of these trees, notwithstanding the annual prunings, become too large and show 
indications of suffering for want of nourishment every sixth or eighth year. The shoots are then shortened 
to within an inch or two of the old wood, and the tree, thus almost completely deprived of leaves, does not 
produce blossoms during the two next years : it pushes, however, vigorous shoots, which are trained to 
form a bushy well furnished head of the' same shape and size as before. Such has been the practice of the 
late M. Pethon, who was head gardener at Versailles for forty years. The form of the heads of the trees 
at Versailles is that of a cvlinder, spreading out at top, of which the height is greater than the breadth ; 
those in other places are oVate, globular, or mushroom-shaped, and some are even square and triangular. 
(See Van. Osten. c. xi.) The blossoms of the orange-trees in the royal gardens of France, and in most 
gardens of Holland and the Netherlands are carefully picked off as they appear; as well to prevent the 
tree from being exhausted by bearing fruit, as for the use of the flowers in perfumery. Those of the 
Tuilleries, Neill informs us [Hort. Tour.), are farmed at the rare of 200/. a-year ; and those of Versailles 
are let annually, in lots, and produce 125/. a-year, or upwards. In Holland the flowers are commonly the 
perquisite of the gardener. Thus the beauty of the continental orange -trees is far inferior to those of Italy 
or Britain, which are covered with fine large fruit. 

5&17. The jjruning which orange-trees receive in England, does not differ, in general, from (hat given to 
any green-house tree or shrub ; and the consequencels, handsome bushes or trees, %vith the blossoms and 
fruit on the surface of the foliage. But when the orange-tree is cultivated for fruit, whether as sUndards 
or against walls, the branches ought to be kept thin, like those of other fruit-trees, so as to admit the sun, 
air, and water, freely to every part, and thus have the blossoms and fruit regularly distributed from the 
centre to the extremities. This is readily effected where the trees are flat-trained, which, where fruit is 
the object, is a great argument in favor of that mode of culture. 

594S. In pruning, with a view to fruit, it must be considered, that the most useful blossoms of most sorts 
of citrus are produced in the form of terminating peduncles, on the wood of tlie current year"; and hence, 
the grand object of the pruner ought to be to encourage the production of young wood in everj- part of the 
tree ; by cutting out naked wood, and shortening vigorous shoots where wood is wanting. A powerful co- 
operating measure is the exposition of all the parts of the tree to the light and air, which, as already 
obser\'ed, is only to be done in standards, by keeping the trees open, or by fiat training. There are also 
blossoms produced by various sorts of citrus, in tufts, directly from the axil'lffi of the leaves of the wood of 
the preceding year : these expand earlier than the others', but generally drop off in plants kept mider 
cover. Ayres cuts away the old and .least-promising branches, in February, to make room for yoimger 
and more productive wood, and shortens very strong branches to keep the trees in proper shape. After the 
fruit is set, it ought to be thinned, seldom leaving more than one on a peduncle. In France they thin the 
flowers, which, by that means, they are enabled to use for distillation. The thinned fruit is used in con- 
fectionary. Mean observes, " In re'gard to the necessity of thinning the fruit, lest the trees should exhaust 
themselves, it appears to me to depend on the state of the trees : if they are flourishing, I never observed 
that it was at all required, either here or at Bromley Hill, where the orange-trees belonging to the Right 
Honorable Charles Long are very fine, and loaded with peculiarly large fruit." Ayres thins when the fruit 
are about the size of green-gage plums, and never leaves two fruit together. Will standard trees, pruned 
with a view to fruit, be equally beautiful with the compact geometrical-headed trees of Paris, and the old 
conservatories of this country? Those who prefer a full-bottomed periwig to a natural disposition of the 
hair will not think so. The two beauties, or effects, are of different kinds; the latter has utility to re- 
commend it ; the former, associations of the pomp and formal grandeur of past times. Quintiney, and 
other French authors, direct the wounds or sections made in pruning orange-trees, to be covered with a 
composition to exclude the air ; which deserves to be attended to, as the growth of the bark is otherwise 
very slow over wounds in these trees. 

5949. Manure. About Genoa, the best cultivated orange-groves are manured annually. In France and 
this country, the nest practitioners stir the surface and apply a top-dressing of rich compost when the trees 
begin to grow, generally in April or May. Ayres top-dresses in June. 

5950. Gathering the fruit. In the Italian gardens, and those at Hieres in France, where the fruit of the 
orange is raised for sale, it is gathered every year, generally in May. If not then gathered, it wiU hang 
on the tree for one or two years longer ; but when the young fruit is green and swelling, the old ripe be- 
comes somewhat shrivelled, and if then gathered is found almost void of juice. But as the new fruit 
begins to arrive at maturity, the juice begins to return to the old fruit ; so that both old and new crops are 
in perfection together the following May. In this way, at Genoa, the orange is sometimes allowed to re- 
main on the tree three years, and being' then gathered, has a peculiar subacid sweetness and flavor, and 
is sold at a very high price to connoisseurs at Milan, Turin, and other places. The lemon differs from the 
orange in that it ripens irregularly, and drops off when ripe. It is therefore gathered at almost every 
season. The orange-tree, kept in conservatories, generally requires fifteen months to ripen its fruit, and 
hence, both green and ripe fruit are together on the tree. "Some authors assert, that the leaves remain on 
the same period with the fruit ; but Quintiney says, " on a vigorous plant they will remain three or four 
years." In Britain they often remain three years on moderately strong plants ^vithout fruit. In gather, 
ing for the table in this countrj', the fruit should not be pulled with the hand, but carefully cut off with a 
few leaves attached, and, thus garnished, sent to the dessert. By allowing them to hang two years, the 
trees will at all times have green and yellow fruit, which, in connexion with their shining green leaves and 
fragrant blossoms, forms, early in spring, in such a house as we have hinted at ^5929. and^^. 521.}, one of 
the most splendid of horticultural scenes. 

5951. Insects a?id diseases. The chief insects injurious to the citrus tribe, are the coccus and red spider; 
both to be removed or destroyed by water applied with the engine, brush, or sponge. Mean, early in March, 
when he top-dresses his plants, appUes a copious washing with the engine ; then shuts up the house close for 
three or four hours, which produces a strong heat, as high as 70°, which effects the destruction of the red 
spider ; while the stems and leaves are wiped with a wet sponge to remove other insects and dirt. {Hort. 
Trans, ii. 296.) Henderson destroys the aphis by fumigation ; the red spider by sprinkling and dashing with 
water ; the coccus, by laj'ing on the leaves with a brush some black soap dissolved in water, or By water- 
ing and dusting the leaves with sulphur; and the only remaining insect which infests tlje orange, the 
thrips, he destroys with water, {Calcd. Hort. Mem. 315.) 



Book T. 



POMEGRANATE, OLIVE. 



777 



SuBSECT. 2. Pomegranate. — Punica Granatum, L. (Bot. Mag. 634.) Icos. Monog. L. 
and Rosacece, J. Grenadier, Fr. ; Granatenbaum, Ger. j and Melagrano, Ital. 

5952. The pomegranate is a low deciduous tree, rising fifteen or twenty feet high, 
thickly cloathed with twiggy branches, some of which are armed with sharp thorns. The 
leaves are long and narrow, of a light shining green with red veins. The flowers are pro- 
duced at the ends of the branches, in the shoots of the same year, single or three or four 
together ; frequently one of the largest terminates the branch, and immediately under that 
are two or three smaller buds, which continue a succession of flowers for some months, 
generally from June to September. The calyx is very thick and fleshy, and of a fine red 
color ; the petals are scarlet. The fruit is a berry covered with a hard coriaceous rind, 
and beautifully crowned with the tube of the calyx, which is sharply toothed, and remains 
even after the fruit is ripe, contributing greatly to its singular and beautiful appearance. 
The fruit ripens in October, and, in a green-house, will hang on the trees till the spring 
or summer follovsdng. It is a native of most parts of the south of Europe and of China. 
In Languedoc, and some parts of Italy, it is used as a hedge plant. It was cviltivated in 
England in 1596, by Gerrard ; but though it grows very well in the open air, it seldom 
ripens its fruit so as to render them worth any thing. It used formerly to be kept in 
boxes, and housed like the orange-tree, which is still the practice near Paris and in the 
Netherlands. Some of the orange and pomegranate trees in the orangery at Versailles, 
Kisso informs us, are believed to be between two and three hundred years old. 

5953. Use. The fruit having an acid pulp is very refreshing, and is eaten like the 
orange ; its singular and beautiful appearance contributes to the variety of the dessert. 
It is used medicinally in fevers and inflammatory disorders ; being powerfully acid and 
astringent. 

5954. Vaiieties. The Paris nurseries propagate the following sorts : tliose marked 
thus (*) may be had in the London mirseries. 



The wild, or very acid-fruited 
The subacid-fruited, or cultivated* 
The sweet-fruited 
Large-flowered single red and white 



The semi-double, and double red and 

white* 
The yellow-flowered * 
The variegated-flowered 



The proliferous ; in which a shoot 
))roceeds from the middle of the 
flower. 



5955. Propagation. The single-flowering sorts may be raised from seed, and all the varieties by cuttings, 
suckers, or layers, or by inoculation or grafting on the wild sort. The last is considered much the best 
mode where fruit is the object ; and the next best is by layers, but the common mode is by suckers, which 
these plants send up abundantly. Inoculated plants, both of the single and double sorts, may be procured 
from Genoa ; and this is the most desirable plan where the plant is to be cultivated for its fruit. 

5956. Culture. The directions given for raising and cultivating the orange-tree may be considered as 
equally applicable to the pomegranate, which, with the olive, was formerly the common companion of 
these trees in conservatories. Miller has observed, " that both the single and double pomegranate are 
hardy enough to resist our most severe winters in the open air; and that if planted against walls, the 
former will often produce fruit, which ripen tolerably well in warm seasons, but ripening late, are seldom 
well tasted." Where it is to be grown for fruit, therefore, either the standard or flat trained mode, under 
glass, as recommended for oranges, should be adopted. A few trees may be introduced along with those 
of the citrus tribe. 

Soil. Miller recommends a strong rich soil, in which he says, " they flower much better, and produce 
more fruit than if planted on dry poor ground." In regard both to soil and mode of growth, the pome- 
granate bears a close resemblance to the hawthorn. 

5957. PrtMing and training. As already mentioned, the flowers of this tree always proceed fi'om the 
extremity of the branches produced the same year, hence aU weak branches of the former year should be 
cut out, and the stronger shortened, in order to obtain new shoots in every part of the tree. When the 
trees are trained against a wall, the shoots having small leaves, may be laid in four or five inches asunder. 
The season for the winter pruning, Miller says, is about Michaelmas ; for if left till spring before they are 
pruned, they seldom put out their shoots so early. In summer they require no other dressing than pinch- 
ing off fore-right and over vigorous shoots, as it is the middling only which are fruitful. In a warm situ- 
ation Miller obtained a great quantity of fruit from trained trees ; which, though not very well flavored, 
were of full magnitude, and made a very handsome appearance on the trees. The double and other 
varieties, cultivated for the sake of their flowers, should be pruned, whether in boxes or against walls, on 
the same principle. 

SuBSECT. 3. Olive. — Olea Eiiropcea,!^. (Fl. Grcec.i. t. 3.) Diand. Monog. Li. and 
Oleince, B. P. Olive, Fr. ; Oehlbaum, Ger. ; and Uliva, Ital. 

5958. The olive is a low branchy evergreen tree, rising from twenty to thirty feet, with 
stiff, narrow, bluish-green leaves. The flowers are produced in small axillary bunches 
from wood of the former year, and appear in June, July, and August. The fruit is a 
berried drupe of an oblong spheroidal form, hardish thick flesh, of a yellowish-green 
color, but turning black when ripe. The tree is supposed to be originally from Greece ; 
but it is now naturalised in the south of France, Italy, and Spain, where it has been exten- 
sively cultivated for an unknown length of time, for the oil expressed from its fruit. The 
tree attains an incredible age. Near Terni, in the vale of the cascade of Marmora, is a 
plantation above two miles in extent, of very old trees, and supposed to be the same 
plants mentioned by Pliny, as growing there in the first century. It appears to have 
been cvdtivated in the botanic garden of Oxford, in 1648, and is generally treated as a 
grecn-housc plant. With protection from severe frost. Miller says, it may be main- 



778 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



tained against a wall in the latitude of London." In Devonshire, some trees have 
stood the open air for many years ; but the fruit does not arrive at maturity. Some trees 
planted against a w^arra wall at Camden House, near Kensington, succeeded so as in 
1719 to produce fruit fit for pickling. 

5959. Use. At the dessert, and frequently, also, during dinner, unripe olives appear 
as a pickle ; which, though to those who taste it for the first time, it appears somewhat 
harsh, yet it soon becomes extremely grateful ; and is said to promote digestion and 
create an appetite. Pickled olives are prepared by steeping in an alkaline lessive, to 
extract a part of their bitter ; they are next washed in pure water, and afterwards pre- 
served in salt and water, to which an aromatic, as fennel, &c. is sometimes added. The 
ripe olive, pressed and washed with hot water, furnishes, when skimmed, the well known 
condiment and corrective, salad-oil, employed both in food and medicine. It may be 
considered as the butter of Italy and Spain. 

5960. Varieties. In the olive-countries these are nearly as numerous as the sorts of the grape and fig. 
The French {N. Cours, &c. in loco) describe between thirty and forty sorts. The following are grown in 
English nurseries : — 

The common I Large-leaved | Broad-leaved | Iron-colored | • Twisted-leaved | Box-leaved. 

5961. Propagation. By seeds, cuttings, layers, suckers, and inoculation. Tlie last mode is adopted 
where the culture of the olive is conducted with care ; but the olivettes, or olive-plantations, are generally 
furnished from suckers, which arise abundantly from the roots of old trees. In England, as a green-house 
plant, it is raised from cuttings ; but where it is intended to grow a few trees in the forcing-department, 
for the sake of their fruit, we would recommend procuring strong plants from Genoa ; these will produce 
fruit in three or four years, but the others not for an unknown length of time. 

5962. Culture. Some plants used formerly to be received by the Italian merchants along with their 
imports of orange-trees, and were planted, like them, in pots or boxes ; but in order to grow the tree for 
fruit, the modes to be adopted arc either planting as standards in the area, or training on a wall, as recom- 
mended for the orange and pomegranate. If a house is not devoted to this fruit, one might be appropri- 
ated for it and the pomegranate ; giving each their respective soils, and recollecting that the olive will not 
bear a very high degree of heat. 

5933. Soil. The olive will grow luxuriantly in a strong clayey richly manured soil, but will not prove 
nearly so prolific as in a dry, calcareous, schistous, sandy, or rocky situation ; which ought to be imitated 
in some degree in the composition prepared for the area or border of the olive-house. 

5964. Temperature. That suitable for the orange will agree with the olive ; but it cannot bear so high 
a degree of heat as that plant, never being found in Africa south of Atlas, nor in the East or West Indies. 
It is also easily affected by cold, but not more so than the orange. 

5965. Pruning. The object here is to have a regular distribution of wood of the former year, from the 
axils of the leaves of which, the flowers spring out. When shoots of three or more years are shortened 
for this purpose, they do not produce blossoms ; but wood of the preceding or current year may be short- 
ened, and the shoots proceeding from them will produce blossoms in due course. Ringing, to induce 
fruitfulness, was practised on the olive so early as the seventeenth century, (fiosc, in 'N. Cours, &c. art. 
Olivier.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Indian Fig, or Prickly Pear. — Cactus opuntia, L. {Knor. Thes. 1. 1. F. a.) 
Icos. Monog. L. and Cacti, J. Baguette, Fr. 

5966. The genus cactus consists of succulent plants, permanent in duration, singular 
and various in structure, generally without leaves, and having the stem or branches 
jointed, and for the most part armed with spines and bristles. The joints or branches 
of the C. opuntia are ovate, compressed, and have very small cadaverous leaves coming 
out in knots on their surface, and accompanied by four short bristly spines. The branches 
spread near to, or trail on the ground. The flowers come out on the upper edges of the 
branches in June and July. The fruit is in the form of a fig or pear, with clusters of 
small spines on the skin, which encloses a fleshy pulp of a red or purple color, and 
agreeable subacid flavor. It is a native of Virginia and Barbary, but is now natural- 
ised in the south of Italy, being found on the rocks at Terracina and Gaeta. It was 
cultivated in England by Gerrard, in 1596, in the open air, but without bearing fruit. 
It was cultivated in the stove by Justice at Crichton near Edinburgh, in 1750, and 
ripened its fruit. Miller says, " it will live abroad in England in a warm situation and 
dry soil ; but in severe winters will be destroyed if not protected from frost>" 

5967. Use. The fruit is sent to the dessert in the West Indies ; and might add to 
the variety of exotic fruits in this country. Braddick observes (/Zbr-^. Trans, ii. '239.), 
that in countries where the fruit abounds, it is considered very wholesome, and though 
the taste of it is not agreeable to all persons till after they have eaten of it several times, 
yet they soon become very fond of it. 

5968. So7-ts. There are several species of that division of the genus cactus, called prickly pears or figs, 
which produce edible fruit in their native countries, as the great Indian fig, or upright prickly pear, 
(C. funa) (Plant, grass 138.); oblong Indian fig {C. ficus Indica) {Reich, vol. ii. 470.); Barbadoes goose- 
berry (C. pereskia) {Dill. elt. t. 227. f 294.) : the C. opuntia is deemed the most hardy, and by consequence 
the easiest to fruit in Britain ; but there can be no doubt that the other sorts might also be brought to ma- 
ture their fruit with very little expense or trouble. They are at present kept in dry-stoves for the sake 
of variety. 

5969. Propagation and culture. All the above sorts may be propagated from seed or cuttings ; the latter 
mode is most common. Cut oflf the branches at the joints, in July, or after the plants have done flowering, 
and let them dry for a fortnight, that the wounded part may be healed over ; then plant in small pots, 
and plunge in the bark-bed, or in a moderate hot-bed, watering sparingly, giving air to avoid damps, and 
shading from the midday sun. 

5970. Soil. Miller recommends the following : one third of light fresh earth from a pasture ; a third 



Book I. 



EXOTIC FRUITS LITTLE KNOWN. 



779 



part of sea-sand ; and the other part, one half rotten tan, and half lime rubbish. These are to be mixed 
and laid in a heap, three or four months before using, turning it over once a month ; then pass it through 
a rough screen, but do not sift it fine ; reserving some of the small stones and rubbish to lay at the bottom 
of the pots, in order to keep an open passage for the moisture to drain off. The Barbadoes gooseberry 
requires less lime-rubbish and more of vegetable earth. 

5971. Temperature. All the sorts, excepting the prickly pear, require the temperature of a dry-stove 
in winter, and an increased degree of heat, say 80° or 90° in summer, when it is intended they should 
produce fruit. They may either be planted in large boxes, filled with the soil above described, with a 
portion of vegetable mould added ; or in borders, to be trained on a wall or trellis near the light. In 
either case, by supplying them liberally in summer, whilst in a growing state, with heat at bottom and 
top, air, light, and some moisture, they will thrive abundantly, and produce fruit certainly not of exquisite 
flavor, but agreeable and singular, and worthy of being added to the British dessert. 

5972. Culture of the prickly pear in the open air. Braddick having eaten, with pleasure, of this fruit 
in Virginia, was desirous of cultivating it here. He recollected that the plant in its wild state delighted 
in a dry soil, amongst rocks, near the skirts of the sunny sides of the forests; and having heard thaf it 
would stand the open air in this country, he planted it in the compost described below, placed in a shel- 
tered situation open to the sun. " The first plant that I turned out has lived in the open ground of 
this country for six or seven years, during which period it has endured one exceeding hard winter, and 
several trying springs ; and in all, except the two first years, it has never failed to ripen its fruit and 
seeds, so that it may be now considered decidedly acclimated. The compost used by me for growing 
the Cactus opuntia is the following : one half is carbonate of lime, for which lime-rubbish from old 
buildings will answer ; the remaining half consists of equal portions of London clay and peat-earth, hav- 
ing the acid neutralised by barilla : these arc intimately blended and sifted. One square yard of this 
compost I conceive to be sufficient for one plant, which must be placed in the middle of a small artificial 
hillock, raised eighteen inches above the surface of the ground, which ground should be rendered per- 
fectly dry, if not naturally so, by under-draining. Neither the leaves, flowers, nor fruit should ever be 
suffered to touch the ground, but they should, as constantly as they are produced, be kept from the 
earth by placing stones, pebbles, flints, or bricks under them, in imitation of artificial rock-work." {Hort. 
Trans. 238.) 

5973. The torch-thistle, or ujmght cereus, of which there are four species which bear 
edible fruit, and the slrawberry-jiear [C. triangularis), the poire de chardon of the French, 
may also be cultivated as fruit-bearing stove plants, in the same way as recommended 
for the Indian fig. 

Sect. III. Exotic Fruits little known, some of which merit Cultivation for their Excellence 

or Rarity. 

5974. The introduction and cultivation of new exotic fruits may be considered as a very 
rational and entertaining object, for such as have the means, the time, and a taste 
for gardening. It seems to deserve the particular attention of retired persons of solitary 
habits, aged or inactive, by presenting an end to be attained ; it may serve as a gentle 
stimulus to such as, from indolence or bilious complaints, are apt to sink into a state 
of torpid unenjoyed existence. A few of the plants, which we shall here enumerate, 
have been cultivated so as to produce fruit in this country, as the granadilla, lee-chee, 
loquat, banana, &c. ; most of the others have hitherto served only to increase the variety 
of our stove or green-house plants. 

5975. The alcee-tree is the Blighia Sapida, H. K. {Ann. 
Bot. 2. t. 16, 17.) Oct. Monog. L. and Sapin'di, J. {fig- 523.) 
It is a tree rising from twenty to twenty-five feet in height, 
with numerous branches, and alternate pinnate leaves, 
like those of the common ash. The flowers are small, 
white, on axillary racemes. The fruit is a pome, reddish 
or yellow ; about the size of a goose's egg, with a pulp of 
a grateful subacid flavor ; and in the West Indies esteemed 
very wholesome and nourishing. It is a native of Guinea, 
and was introduced in Jamaica in 1778, and from thence 
brought to this country in 1793. 

5976. Propagation and culture. It may be propagated 
from seeds, cuttings, or layers ; but as the former mode 
would prolong the period of culture for fruit, and the two 
latter produce but weak plants, the better plan would be to 
order a few trees to be inoculated in Jamaica, and then sent 
over in tubs ; these might be treated as directed for orange- 
trees (5939.), and then planted in a border of rich earth, 
submitted to a Jamaica climate, and flat-trained near the 
glass. By such treatment, there can be no doubt the akee- 
tree would in a few years produce fruit as readily as the 
orange. 

5977. The alligator, or avocado pear, is the Laurus Per. 
sea, L. {Pluk. Aim. t. 267. f. 1.) Ennean. Monog. L. and 
I.aurince, B. P. It is a stove tree which, in the West In. 
dies, grows to the height of thirty feet or upwards, with 
a trunk as large as that of our common apple-tree. The leaves are like those of laurel, of a deep-green- 
The flowers are produced towards the extremities of the branches. The fruit is the size of one of our 
biggest pears, and is held in great esteem in the West Indies ; the pulp is of a pretty firm consistence, 
and has a delicate rich flavor ; it gains upon the palate of most persons, and becomes soon agreeable even 
to those who cannot like it at first ; but it is so rich and mild, that most people make use of some 
spice or pungent substance, to give it a poignancy ; and for this purpose some make use of wine, some of 
lime-juice, but most of pepper and salt. Miller, from whom the above account is extracted, cultivated 
il in 1739. 

5978. Propagation and culture. Miller gives directions for raising the tree from seeds, which, he says, 
may be brought over in dry sand from the countries where it is cultivated. There is nothing uncommon 
in the process of raising, which is conducted in a hot-bed or pit; and when the plants have made their 
summer shoots, they are removed to the stove during winter. But where it is intended to cultivate 
this tree for its fruit, a better way would be to send to the Botanic Garden of St. Vincent's, and request 




780 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




a few stocks to be inoculated from bearing trees. These 
being properly cased and packed, would arrive as safe 
as orange-trees usually do ; might be treated like them 
when unpacked ; and planted in a border of strong rich 
soil, to be trained on a trellis or wall near the glass. 
After the plants were established, horizontal training and 
ringing, accompanied by a Jamaica temperature, would 
soon produce fruit. 

5979. The nnchovy-pear isthe Grias caiiliflora, L. {Sloan. 
Hist. 2. t. 217. f. 1. 2.) Polyan. Monog. L. and Guitijerce,3. 
{fig. 524.) It is a stove tree, frequently growing to the 
height of fifty feet in the West Indies, where it is a na- 
tive. The leaves are oblong, and two or three feet long. 
The flowers numerous on short peduncles, large and 
whitish. The drupe is ovate, and crowned with a calyx 
like the pomegranate, about the size and shape of an alli- 
gator's egg : it is pickled, and eaten like the East Indian 
mango, which it greatly resembles in taste. It grows ge- 
nerally in low moist bottoms, or shallow waters, and has 
a most elegant appearance. Introduced here from Ja- 
maica in 1768. 

5980. Propagation and culture. It is very readily pro- 
pagated from the stones, and the plants must be kept in 
a moist heat. To grow it for fruit, plant in a border, and 
train horizontally near the light, as directed for the avo- 
cado-pear. (5978.) 

5981. The durion is the Burio Zibethina, L. {Bu7nph. 
Amb. p. 99) Polyadelph. Polyan. L. and ^^apparides, J. 
{fig. 525). This is a lofty East Indian tree, with leaves re- 
sembling those of the cherry, and large bunches of flowers 
coming out below the leaves, of a pale-yellow color. The 
fruit is the size of a man's head, roundish or oblong ; 
resembling in some degree a roUed-up hedgehog, with a 
hard bark or rind ; the fleshy part of the fruit is of a creamy 
substance, and of a delicate taste ; but of an unj)leasant 
heavy smell, somewhat resembling that of rotten onions; 
and the smell of the breath of those who eat it is infected 
also in a high degree; but when once a person has accus- 
tomed himself to eat this fruit, he generally considers it 
the most excellent of all. Rumphius says, it is by much 
the most excellent fruit of India. The tree has not yet 
been introduced ; but if a few fruit or plants vrere sent for 
from the Calcutta garden, and submitted to the general 
plan of culture for trees difficult to fruit, there can be no 
doubt of success. 

5982. The white guava is the Psidium pyrifernm, L. 
{Rumph. amb. 1. t. 47.) Teas. Monog. L. and Myrti, J. 
{fig. 526.) It is a West Indian tree, growing to the height 
of seven, eight, or twelve feet, with numerous branches and 
blunt, entire, smooth leaves, two or three inches long ; the 
flowers are in solitary peduncles and sweet-smelling ; fruit 
bigger than a hen's egg, roimdish or oblong, smooth, yel- 
low ; the rind thin, brittle, and yellow ; pulp firm, full of bony seeds, flesh-colored, sweet, aromatic, and 
pleasant. It is eaten with avidity both by West Indians and Europeans, raw in the dessert, and preserved 

with sugar. It has been grown here as a stove plant since 
1656 ; it is propagated by seeds from ripe fruits brought 
over ; and to be fruited should be treated as directed for 
other similar fruit-trees already mentioned. 

5983. The red guava {P. pomiferum) has a beautiful 
fruit, crowned like a pomegranate ; but is not so agreeable 
to eat as the other. 

5984. Cattley's guava, P. Cattleianum. A new species 
introduced from China by Messrs. Barr and Brooks, nur- 
serymen, and fruited by W. Cattley, F. H. S., in 1820. The 
plant resembles the other species in general habit and ap- 
pearaiice ; but the fruit is larger, nearly spherical, of a fine 
deep claret color, growing in the axilla of the leaves; the 
skin has much the consistence of that of a ripe fig, but is 

^ thinner; the interior is a soft fleshy pulp, purplish-red next 
^^^^g the skin, but becoming paler towards the middle, and at the 
centre it is quite white; it is juicy, and in consistence is 
much like a strawberry, to which it bears some resemblance 
in flavor. {Ho?-t. Trans, iv. pi. xi. 317.) 

5985. The jamri:sade, or rose-apple, is the Eugenia 
Jambos, L. {Bat. Mag. 1596.) Icos. Monog. L. and Myrti, 
J. {fig. 527.) It is a branchy tree, rising from twenty to 
thirty feet high, with long narrow leaves not unlike those of 
the peach. The flowers come out in terminal bunches in 
July, are of a greenish-yellow color, and succeeded by fruit 
about the size of a hen's egg, white, red, or rose-scented, with 

the flavor of a ripe apricot, and ripening from September to December. It is a native of the East Indies, 
and was cultivated here by Miller, in 1768. There are several varieties of this tree differing in the size and 
color of the fruit. That with white fruit has been cultivated by Professor Thouin in the National Garden 
at Paris. This horticulturist endeavored to harden the tree by exposing it annually to the open air 
during the two hottest months of the year ; but, after persisting in this mode of cultivation for several 
years, and finding the leaves and part of the shoots die off annually, in consequence of the cold while 
exposed, he at last had recourse to a hot and moist atmosphere, and was successful. {Hort. Trans, i. 
App.) Cattley has a plant which regularly yields him abundance of fruit. {Hort. Trans, v. 112.) 

5986. The Malay apple is another species of Eugenia {E. Malaccensis). {Bot. Rep. 458.) The tree resem- 
bles the former, but has broader leaves. The fruit is ovate, an inch and a half in diameter, fleshy, very 
sweet-smelling, like the rose, agreeable to the taste, smell, and sight, and esteemed wholesome. It is com- 
mon in most of the islands in the South Sea, and was cultivated by Miller in 1768. 

5GS7, The bastard guav.i {E. Pseudo-Psidium) and the Cayenne cherry {E. cotonifolia) produce 




526 




Book I. 



EXOTIC FRUITS LITTLE KNOWN. 



781 




edible fruits, held In considerable esteem in the West 
Indies, and with the Malay apple appear to deserve culture 
in this country. (See Miller's Diet.) 

5988. Tke custard-apple {Anona reticulata), alligator-apple 
(A. palustris), siveetsop (A. squamosa), and soursop{A. mu- 
ricata), are esteemed West Indian fruits ; and the Chere- 
moyer [A. tripetala), the Cherimoiia of some botanists, is the 
fruit most prized by the natives of Brazil and Peru. All 
these plants are already in our stoves, and might easily be 
cultivated as fruit-trees. 

5989. Ttie mammee-tree (Mammea americana, L) 
Polyan. Monog. L. and Guttiferce, 3. is a tall handsome 
tree, with oval, shining, leathery leaves, and one-flowered 
peduncles, producing sweet white flowers an inch and a half 
in diameter, succeeded by roundish fruit, about the size af 
an egg, and in pulp and taste not unlike the apricot. It is j 
eaten raw alone, or cut in slices with wine and sugar, or | 
preserved in sugar. It is a native of the Caribbee Islands, 
and was cultivated in 1739 by Miller. 

5990. Propagation and culture. It may be raised from 
the stones or seeds, and treated like other stove fruit-trees. 
It has been cultivated by Knight, who found it rather im- 
patient of a very high temperature. {Hort. Trans, iii. 464;-) 

5991. The lee-chee and long-yen. The lee-chee is the 
Bimocarpus Litchi, .{Lam. ill. t. 306.) Octan. Monog. L. 
and Sapindi, J. It is a stove tree, with compound leaves, 
not unlike those of the common ash-tree ; a native of China, and introduced in 1786. The fruit is a berry 
of a red color when ripe, except in one variety, which remains green : it fs much esteemed by Europeans. 

5992. The long-yen isVne I). Longan,VL.K.'. {Bach. Ic. ^.d9.) The tree resembles the former, but the 
fruit is not so large, and is of a ligiit-brown color. " In both species the pulp of the fruit is s-urrounded 
with a tough, thin, leathery coat ; it is a colorless, semi-transparent substance ; in the centre of which is 
a dark-brown seed of different sizes in the different varieties. The flavor of the pulp is slightly sweet, sub- 
acid, and particularly pleasant to the taste in a warm climate. The fruit of the lee-chee, dried either in 
the sun or by fire-heat, is frequently brought to England from China. In this state the pulp is shrivelle<l 
and reduced within the coat, or shell, to half its usual size, and has a rich and sweet taste, if it has been 
well preserved. The fruit of the long-yen has been ripened by John Knight, Esq. of Lee Castle, in a lofty 
stove, erected for the purpose of growing tropical fruits ; and a bunch was presented by him to the Hort. 
Society, in September, 1816, supposed to be the only one ever produced in Euiope, and which persons 
well acquainted with the long^yen in its native places of growth^ pronounced quite as good as those grown 
within or near the tropics." {Hort. Trans, ii. 408.) 

5993. Propagation and culture. Both species may be raised from seeds or layers, and the plants maybe 
afterwards placed in a bed or area of rich soil, and trained or spread out near the glass. The temperature 
should never be under that of the pine-apple. 

5994. The lo quat is the Mespilus Japonica, L. ( Vent. 
Malm. 19. and Hort. Trans, iii. tab. 11.); Eriobotrya japonica. 
Lam. Icos. Di-Pent. L. and Rosacece, J. {.fig. 528.) In a 
wild state it is a lofty tree with thick knobbed branches, and 
tomentose spray or branchlets ; the leaves are narrow, a span 
long, bright-green and cinereous tomentose below. The flow- 
ers come in spikes at the end of the shoots in October and 
November. The fruit is a five-celled pome, about the size 
of a gooseberry, and in taste approaching to that of the apple. 
It ripens in May and June. It is a native of Japan, and was 
introduced in 1787 to Kew-gardens, where, as well as in 
some other places, it has produced fruit. 

5995. Propagation and culture. It may be raised from 
seeds, or continued by cuttings or layers; but the best me- 
thod, when it is intended to produce fruit, is to graft it on 
any other species of mespilus. It is considered as a frame 
or half-hardy tree ; but, to ripen its fruit with flavor, should 
have the temperature of the stove, in which, planted in a 
border of rich soil, it will add to the variety of the dessert. 
Sir Joseph Banks {Hort. Trans, i.) considers the fruit as 
equally good with that of the mango. Lord Bagot, who has 
fruited the plant in a very superior manner for several years 
at Blithfield, gives the following outline of his practice : 
" The plan I have usually followed has been to give it a 

winter (out of doors) during the months of July, August, 
and September, and about the middle of October to re- 
place it in a very warm situation in the tan. This summer, 
however, 1 was obliged to alter my mode ; for, just at the 
moment when I was going to put it out for its winter, it be- 
came covered with at least twenty bunches of the finest 
flowers possible ; I was therefore obliged to let it remain 
where it was. The present year's treatment, therefore, is an 
exception to the former practice; under that, it usually 
breaks into flower about the end of December, and the fruit 
becomes ripe in March or April. The last time my plant 
was in fruit, Sir William Coke, who had resided many years 
in Ceylon, where he is at present, was with me at Blithfield ; 
he told me that he was in the constant habit of eating very 
large quantities of the fruit daily in that island, but that he 
had never tasted any so good, and with so much flavor, as 
those produced in my garden." 

5996. The mango-tree {Mangifera indica, L. {Bot. Rep. 
425.) Pent. Monog. L. and Terebintacece, J.) {fig. 529.) 
is a large spreading tree, like the walnut, with lanceolate 
shining green leaves, seven or eight inches long, having a 
sweet resinous smell ; the flowers are white, growing in 
bunches at the extremity of the branches. The fruit a 
drupe, large, kidney-shaped, covered with a smooth, soft- 
ish, resinous pale-green, yellow, or half-red skin, and con. 
taining an ovate, woody, fibrous, compressed nut or stone. 





782 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



ithln which is an ovate kernel, soft and pulpy, like a damascene plum. When npe. It Is replete with 
fine agreeable juice ; it eats like an apple, but is more juicy, and some are as oig as a man s hst. it is 
esteemed a very wholesome fruit, and, excepting very fine pine-apples, is preferable to any Iruit in India : 



gentlemen there eat little or other fruit in the hot months. In Europ 
brought over in pickle." {Martyn, in Miller's Diet.) It is a native 




In Europe we have only the unripe fruit 
i.u wvt. x^.v.v- ... , a native of the East Indies, and was in- 
troduced h7l690 ;Tut has noT^et^'been cultivated for its fruit. According to Governor Raffles, forty vari- 
eties of mango are known in Java. , , . u- U -i. 

5997. Propagation and culture. It may be increased by cuttings like the gardenia which it some- 
what resembles in habit, or from nuts ; but as the vegetative quality of these does not seem to admit 
of long preservation, they must be enveloped in wax, or otherwise managed i,2ol2.), to preserve 
it Miller says, the tree will not thrive in the tan-pit ; and he recommends the dry stove, a temperate 
heat, and light kitchen-garden earth. This tree seems particularly deserving culture for its truit, both 
on account of its quality, and the plants not requiring so much heat as most of the other untried In- 
dian fruits. Knight raised some mango-plants from seeds in October, 1818, which in the foUowing 
March, shot very vigorously in a temperature of 60<'; he is " much inclined to believe that the mango 
miglit be raised in great abundance, and considerable perfection, in the stove, m this country ; tor it is 
a fruit which acquires maturity within a short period. It blossoms in Bengal in January, and ripens in 
the end of May." {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 463.) 

5998. The m'angostan, or mangustin. — Gorcinia Mangos- 
tana, L. {Lam. III. t. 405.) Dodec. Monog. L. and Gntti. 
ferce, J. [fig. 530 ) It is a tree rising near twenty feet 
high, with a taper stem, sending out many branches, not 
unlike a fir-tree ; with oval leaves, seven or eight inches 
long. The flower is like that of a single rose ; the fruit round, 
the size of a middling orange ; the shell is like that of the 
pomegranate, the inside of a rose-color, divided by thin par- 
titions as in oranges, in which the seeds are lodged, sur- 
rounded by a soft juicy pulp, of a delicious flavor, par- 
taking of the strawberry and the grape, and is esteemed 
one of the richest fruits in the world. It is a native of the 
Molucca islands, whence it has heen transplanted to Java 
and Malacca. The head of the tree is in the form of a pa- 
rabola, so fine and regular, and the leaves so beautiful, that 
it is looked upon in Batavia as the tree most proper for 
adorning a garden, and affording an agreeable shade. It was 
introduced to England in 1789. According to Dr. Garcin 
{Phil. Trans.), " it is esteemed the most delicious of the East 
Indian fruits, and a great deal of it may be eaten without 
any inconvenience ; it is the only fruit which sick people 
are allowed to eat without scruple. It is given with safety 
in almost every disorder ; and we are told that Dr. Solan, 
der in the last stage of a putrid fever in Batavia, found him- 
self insensibly recovering by sucking this deUcious and re- 
freshing fruit. The pulp has a most happy mixture of the 
tart and sweet, and is no less salutary than pleasant." 

5999 Propagation and culture. It may be raised from seeds or cuttings; and in procuring the seeds 
from the East Indies, the same precautions must be taken as suggested for those of the mango. (5997.) 
Miller says, " the surest way to obtain the plants, is to sow the seeds in tubs of earth in their native 
country, and when the plants have obtained strength, they may be brought to Europe ; but there should 
be great care taken to screen them from salt water in their passage, as also not to give them too much 
water when in a cool or temperate climate. When the plants arrive in Europe, tbey should be carefully 
transplanted each into a pot filled with light kitchen-garden earth, and plunged in the tan-bed, and 
shaded from the sun till they have taken new root. Then treat them as suggested for fruiting other stove 
plants." 

6000. The piskamin, or European date-plum, {Diospyros Lotus, L. {Mill. Ic. 1. 116.) Polyg. Diocc. L. and 
EbenacecE, B. P.) is a small tree, rising six feet high, with spreading branches, and large shining lan- 
ceolate leaves. The flowers are small, of a reddish-white ; the fruit is a berry half an inch in diameter, 
yellow when ripe, sweet, and somewhat astringent : it is used like the medlar, in a state of incipient de- 
cay. It is a native of Italy and some parts of France ; was introduced to this country in Gerrard's time, 
and will grow in the open air, but not ripen its fruit freely. 

6001. Propagation and cultui-e. It may be raised from seeds sown in a hot-bed, and afterwards hard- 
ened, or from layers ; but when it is intended to fruit the plant, it may be procured from Genoa of a 
good size ; and, planted in a temperate forcing-house, it will not, fail to mature its fruit. 

6002. The granadilla, or little pomegranate. This name is appHed to the edible fruit of five species 
of the Pass/flora genus ; Monadel. Pentan. L. and Passiflorcs, J. The common character of which is 
that of climbing herbaceous plants, woody at bottom, generally with lobed leaves, and all natives of 
warm climates. 

6003. The granadilla, or granadilla-vine oi theTrench, is the P. quadrangula}-is,l^. {Bot. Reg.li.) The 
leaves are oval and subcordate, five or six inches long and entire ; the stem luxuriant and four-cornered. 
The flowers are odoriferous, red within and white on the outside, and appear in August and September, 
both fruit and flowers growing at the same time. The fruit, Sabine describes {Hort. Trans, iii. 100.) as 
very large, of an oblong shape, about six inches in diameter, from the stalk to the eye, and fifteen 
inches in circumference. It is externally of a greenish-yellow when ripe, soft and leathery to the touch, 
and quite smooth ; the rind is very thick, and contains a succulent pulp of a purple color (which is the 
edible part), mixed with the seeds, in a sort of sack, from which it is readily separated. Wine and sugar 
are commonly added to it, when used. The flavor is sweet, and slightly acid, and it is very grateful to 
the taste, and cooling in a hot climate. It is a native of Jamaica, and other West India islands, where 
it grows in the woods, and was cultivated by Miller in 1768, as a stove plant. It has since been successfully 
cultivated for its fruit in a few places, as at Lord Harewood's {Hort. Trans, iy. 60.), Farnley Hall, &c. 

6004. The apple-fruited granadilla, or sweet calabash, is the P. malifoi-niis, L. {Bot. Reg. 95.) It has 
a thick triangular stem, with leaves oblong, cordate, six inches long, and four broad, in the middle of a 
lively green. The flowers are sweet-scented, large, of a pale red and blue: " the fruit round, smooth, 
about two inches in diameter, of a dingy yellow color when ripe ; the coat is hard and stringy, nearly a 
quarter of an inch in thickness, full of a very agreeable gelatinous pale yellow pulp, in which many 
oblong black seeds are lodged," {Hort. Trans, iii. 101.) and is eaten like that of the former species. It is 
a native of the West India islands, and was introduced here, and cultivated by Miller in 1731. It has 
borne fruit in the stove of the Bishop of Durham in Oxfordshire, and at Vere's, Kensington Gore. 

6005. The laurel-leaved granadilla, or water-lemon, the Poinme de Liane of the French, is the P. 
laurifoUa, L. {Bot. Reg. 13.) It has a suffrutescent stem, with divaricating filiform branches, oval 
smooth leaves, and very long tendrils. Flowers red and violet, sweet scented ; the fruit about the size 
of a hen's egg, but rather more elongated, and tapering equally at both ends ; when ripe, it is yellow 
and dotted over with white spots ; it contains a whitish watery pulp, which, in the West Indies, is usually 
sucked through a small hole made in the rind ; the rind is tough, soft, and tliin ; the juice has a peculiar 



Book I. 



EXOTIC FRUITS LITTLE KNOWN. 



783 



aromatic flavor, is delicately acid, and allays thirst agreeably. It is a native of Marti nique and Surinam, 
and was introduced here in 1690. It is grown in the stove, but has not yet been cultivated for its fruit 

6006. The purple-fruited granadilla {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 
pi. iii.) {fig. 531.) is by some botanists considered as a variety 
of P. incarnata, but by Sabine, who thus describes it {Hort. 
Trans, iii 99-), as a distinct species. " The stem is thick and 
woody, the leaves three-lobed, and of considerable size ; the 
flowers proceeding from the axilla of the leaves, fragrant, and 
of a white color, tinged with purple. The fruit when unripe, 
is green, but as it ripens changes to a dark livid purple, and 
much resembles the fruit of the purple egg-plant. The shape 
is eliptic, an inch and a half in diameter, and two inches from 
the stalk to the top ; the pulp is orange-colored, and the seeds 
numerous ; the taste acid, and the flavor somewhat like that 
of the orange. It is a native of the Brazils, was introduced 
from^ Portugal by Boehm, in 1810, and has produced fruit 
abundantly in the stoves at Walton-on-Thames, at the royal 
gardens at Windsor, and other places. Such is the rapid growth 
of this species, that a single plant will in one season extend in 
a line over upwards of forty feet of glass, on which space it 
will produce from 400 to 500 fruit." 

6007. The flesh -colored granadilla, or May apple, is the P. 
incarnata, L. {Abb. in Geor. t. 12.) The root is perennial, send- 
ing up annually a number of herbaceous shoots, with three- 
lobed leaves, and sweet-scented flowers, variegated with pur- 
ple, and appears from July to September. The fruit when ripe 
is about the size of an apple, orange-colored, with a sweetish yellow pulp. It is a native of Virginia, was 
cultivated in the open air by Parkinson in 1629, and afterwards by Miller in the stove, with whom it bore 
fruit. 

6008. Propagation and culture. All the sorts may be propagated from seed, layers, and even cuttings'^ 
but layers come soonest into bearing. Having procured plants with good roots, plant guch as are intended 
to fruit in a border in the stove, and train them to a trellis near the glass ; they will in general produce 
fruit the second year. The seedlings of the purple-fruited sort will produce fruit the first year. All the 
species will fruit even in large pots ; but Sabine says, the " best method is, to plant them in an angle of 
the bark-bed, which has been parted off, either by boards or nine-inch brick-work, as low as the pit goei 
At the bottom of the cavity, formed by this division, should belaid some brick-rubbish, over which may 
be thrown a little dead tan, and the whole be then filled with equal parts of very old tan, and a compost 
of leaf-mould and rotten dung. Herein the roots will strike freely, and will even spread through the 
partition into the pit, growing into the fresh tan. Such roots may be trimmed and reduced whenever the 
tan is changed ; but should the plant have been some time in its station, it will be as well to leave part of 
the old tan in tlie bottom of the pit, in which the protruded roots may remain undisturbed. They do not 
require the full heat of the pine-stove, for they flourish best in a temperature of from 65 to 70 degrees ; 
but they do not bring their fruit to perfection if kept in a common green-house or conservatory, though 
they will grow and flower in it. The shoots as they advance must be trained near to, and under the in- 
clined glass of the stove : the first flowers will appear in May, and the blooming will continue until Sep- 
tember, the fruit setting the whole time ; but if it does not set well, it will be advisable to impregnate the 
stigmas, by applying the pollen with a feather. As they grow, the very strong shoots should be cut out 
from their origin, for these do not bear fruit so abundantly as those which are less vigorous ; but the 
fruiting branches must not be sliortened on any account. The temperature must be kept up equally, dur- 
ing the time of flowering and fruiting ; the crop will begin to come in in August, and will continue until 
January; but the earlier produce is the best. When the crop is all off, which will be early in January, 
the heat must be reduced to about 50°, so as to check or stop the growth ; this being efTected, the shoots 
must be well cut in. As little old wood as possible, besides the main stem, which rises from the pit to the 
glass, and a few pieces (about two or three feet of each) of the old branches should be retained : for all 
that is to be trained under the glass to bear in each year, ought to be the growth of the same season. It 
is found that the shoots break better, and in greater quantity, from the older wood than from that of two 
years' standing. In this dormant and reduced state it is to be kept during January and February, after 
which the necessary heat may be applied to cause it to resume its functions for the ensuing season." 

6009. The cocoa-nut-tree is the Cocos nucifera, L. {Roxb. 
Cor. 1. 1. 73.) Monoec. Hexan. L. and Palmce, B. P. {fig. 
532.) It is an East Indian palm; but cultivated in most 
places within the tropics. The trees grow to a great height, 
Avith leaves thirteen or fourteen feet long ; the flowers come 
out round the top of the trunk of the tree in large clusters, 
enclosed in a spatha or sheath ; and the nuts succeed them 
commonly ten or twelve together. Their form and use is 
familiar. 

6010. Propagation and culture. The nuts are to be plant- 
ed where they are designed to remain, as the tree will not 
bear transplanting unless when very young. In a moist 
heat they will push in six weeks or two months. To cul- 
tivate for fruit, plant in the centre of the area of a house, 
twenty-five feet wide, and either lofty, or with a moveable 
roof, which will admit of being raised as the tree advances 
in height. In this way, with a strong heat, there can be 
no doubt this tree would produce fruit in England ; but 
even if it did not, or did not for a great many years, the 
magnificence of its appearance, under such a mode of treat- 
ment, would compensate a curious horticulturist for the 
labor and expense. Though the cocoa-nuts to be obtained 
in the shops are supposed to be gathered before being ripe, 
yet they have been found to grow with no other care than 
planting in a large pot or box of rich earth, and plunging 
in a bark-bed. It may be observed here, that this is almost 

the only palm that could be cultivated in this country for penecLuig us nuit ; lui uie uuieis ueing uice- 
cious plants, unless a great number were grown together, there would be no legitimate means of impreg- 
nating the female blossoms. 

6011. The plantain-tree {Musa paradisiaca, L. Hex. Monog. L. and Musacece, P. S.) rises with a soft, 
herbaceous, conical stalk, fifteen or twenty feet high, with leaves issuing from the top, often more than 
six feet long, and near two feet broad ; the spike of male and female flowers appear from the centre of 
the leaves, and is succeeded by pudding-shaped fruits, eight or nine inches long, above an inch in diame- 
ter, pale-yellow when ripe, of a soft, sweet, luscious flavor; the spikes often so large as to weigh up- 
wards of forty pounds. It is a native of the East Indies, and other parts of Asia, and probably of Africa, 





784 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paut III. 



and was cultivated at Hampton Court in 1690. Gerrard says, the pulp eats sorricthlng like thst of a musk- 
melon ; he calls the plant Adam's apple-tree, from a notion that it was the fovbidcien fruit of Etien ; others 
suppose it to have been the grape brought out of the promisotl land to Moses Dampier says, it is the 
king of all fruit, not excepting the cocoa itself. There are numerous varieties. 



533 




6012. The banana-tree {M. sapientum, L.) {fig. 533.) dif- 
fers from the plantain in having its stalks marked with dark- 
purple stripes and spots, and the fruit is shorter and rounder 
Some botanists, however, consider them as only one species. 
The fruit is mellower than the other, is eaten raw or roast- 
ed, in fritters, preserves, marmalades, and the fermented 
juice affords an excellent wine. It has been fruited for up- 
wards of seven years, at Wynnstay, the seat of Sir W. W. 
Wynne, in Denbighshire. Specimens were sent to the Hor. 
ticultural Society in August 1819, which were between four 
and five inches long, and possessed an agreeable, luscious, 
and acid flavor, and the produce from a single plant is " so 
abundant, as to entitle the banana to be considered as a 
useful fruit for the table." 

6013. Propagation and culture. Suckers rise from the 
root, which should be planted in light rich earth, in pots, 
and afterwards, if the plant is cultivated for its fruit, plant- 
ed in a bed or pit of earth, kept rather moist. The plant 
at Wynnstay was planted in the pit of a stove about 1811. 
" It was then about six feet high, with a single stem. In 
each succeeding year it has produced a bunch of fruit ; but 
in the present year (1819) two bunches ; the first was ripe 
in May, the other in August, having about four dozen fruit 
on each bunch. The plant is now sixteen feet high, and 
measures three feet round at the bottom." (Hort. Trans. 

^•^^ 6014. The bread-fruit. — Artocarmis iiicisa, L. 

(_Rumpk. Amb. 3. t. 33 ) Monocc. Monan. L. and 
Vrticce, J. Bima or Fniit-a-pain, Fr. and Brod- 
bau7n, Ger. {fig. 534.) It is a stove tree, growing 
in the South Sea Islands, to the height of a mode- 
rate-sized oak, with alternate leaves, deeply gashed, 
glaucous, and two feet long. Aments on the out- 
most branches, violet-colored, jjcnluncled, male and 
female on the same twig. The whole tree and the 
fruit, before it is ripe, abounds in a very tenacious 
milky juice. The fruit is about the size and shape 
of a child's head, and the surface is reticulated, not 
much unlike a truffle; it is covered with a thin 
skin, and has a core about as big as the handle of a 
small knife ; the eatable part lies between tiie skin 
and the core; it is as white as snow, and somewhat 
of the consistence of new bread. It must be roasted 
before it is eaten, being first divided into three or 
four parts ; its taste is insipid, with a slight sweet- 
ness, somewhat resembling that of the crumb of 
wheaten bread mixed with Jerusalem artichoke. 
Five plants were brought to England, the remain- 
der of the stock brought from Otaheite by the unfortunate Captain Bligh in 1793. In Professor Martyn's 
edition of Miller^s Dictionary will be found a variety of interesting details relative to this tree, and another 
species, the A. integrifolia, or Jacca-tree, which also well merits culture for its fruit. 

6015. Propagation and culture. This tree will grow either from seeds, layers, or suckers ; the latter the 
plants send up abundantly in their native climates. They succeed best in a rich soil ; and to induce them 
to produce fruit, should be treated as already advised for other stove fruits not easily fruited. As the 
bread-fruit-tree has been introduced in the West ftidia Islands, the shortest way would be to procure good 
sized plants from Jamaica or St. Vincent's though they may be occasionally obtained from the London 
nurserymen. 

6016. The true lotus {Zi^iphus lotns, W.), the jujubec-trce {Z. Jujuba, W.), and the kali {Diospi/ros Kaki, 
W.), are branching shrubs or small trees of the easiest culture in Italy, Barbary, and China, and abunilant 

bearers. They might readily be cultivated in this country, and as the jujube grows in hedge-rows about 
Genoa and Nice, it is probable it would bear fruit abundantly in a green-house. The jujube is served up 

in Italy as a dry sweetmeat. The fruit of the kaki are orange or apple shaped. 

6017. Other exotic fruits. The following have been enumerated by Lindley {Hort. Trans, v. 88.), as 
jneriting introduction, or where already introduced, to be cultivated as dessert-fruits. 

6018. Of African fruits we might have from Sierra Leone, the cream-fruit, country cherries, country 
plums and figs; from Congo, the conte, mabncche, gangi, safu, and anona senegalensis ; from Loango, 
the cazou as large as a melon ; from Madagascar, the voanato, voutaca, voaucrome, azonualala, and 
alamotou. 

6019. From the West Indies, the sappodilla-plum {Achras Sapota), country cherries which are various 
species of Malpighia, the callimato-tree {Chrysobalanus Icaco). the star-apple {Chrysophyllum Cainito), 
the country plums {Spondias) various species, the sea-side grape {Coccoloba vv/fera), the garlic-pear {Cra~ 
tcBva Tepia), and various species of cactus. Most of these fruits are cultivated both in the West India Islands 
and on the American continent, and plants of all of them may be had from the London nurseries 

6020. From South America numerous fruits may be introduced : from Guiana, the tapaculo {Carica 
microcarpa ?), the pinaou {Anona punctata), the pinaioua {A. longifolia), the marmalade-box of Stedman 
{Surinam, vol. ii. p. 330.) ; fiom Brazil, Peru, &c. the achocon {Leonia glycycarpa), the queuleor keule 
{Gomortega nitida), and others of less note. 

6021 . From Asia the first fruits in the world have been obtained, and others are yet to introduce. From 
the Indian Archipelago, the lai^seh {Lansium domesticum), a fruit considered as next to the mangosteen 
and durion, the rose-water jambu {Eugenia aquea), and other species ; the blimbing {Avert-hoa Carambola), 
the cheremi {A. acida), the rambutan {Nephelimn lappaceum), the tomi-tomi {Flacourtia inermis), the 
Xanthochymus dulcis, Sundoricum indicum, and some others. From the continent of India, the 
maredoo, or elephant-apple {Mgle Marmelos), the yellanga {Feronia elephantum), the latti am {Wit- 
lughbeia edidis), the iwara mamady {Xanthochymus pictorius), the caraunda {Carissa Carandas), the 
launzan {Buchanania latifolia), and others. From China and Japan many new sorts of pears and 
peaches, it is supposed, may be obtained, and probably also apples and other European fruits ; the Poma- 
ceze and Prunaceas occupying the place in higher latitudes which the Myrtaceffi, Guttiferffi and Tere- 
bintaceffi do in countries nearer the equator. From the Society Islands, the Otaheite a'pple {Spondias 
cytherea), &c. Though we think it probable that few or none of these, grown in this country, would be 




Book I. 



EXOTIC ESCULENTS. 



785 




found to equal our best peaches, pears and plums, or even gooseberries and strawberries ; yet we cannot 
but wish to see this or the contrary proved by the wealthy and curious horticulturist 

Sect. IV. Exotic Esculents, not hitherto cultivated as such. 
6022. Of exotic esculents, some, as the yam and sweet potatoe, are worthy of being ex- 
perimented on with a view to their naturalisation as articles of food ; and even as fur- 
nishing a variety of esculent root, they deserve to be grown and sent to table, where there 
is a complete or extensive garden establishment. 

6023. The West Indian yam (the inhame of the Portu- 
guese, and ignatne o( the French,) is the name applied to 
several species, with their numerous varieties of the genus 
Dioscorea, L. Dicec. Hexan. L. and DioscorecB, J. They are 
climbing, perennial, herbaceous plants, with tuberous roots, 
and axillary flowers in spikes or racemes. The name yam 
is more particularly applied to the D. sativa. {Rheed. Mai. 
8. t. 51.) {fig. 535.) This plant has tender stalks, climbing 
to the height of eighteen or twenty feet, and furnished with 
smooth-nerved roundish leaves. From the base of the 
leaves arise spikes of small flowers of no beauty. The root is 
flat, brownish, a foot broad, and nearly palmated like those of 
some of the orchidese. It is a native of, and cultivated exten- 
sively in, Africa and the East and West Indies, and was in- 
troduced here from the latter country in 1733. The roots are 
mealy, easy of digestion, palatable, and not inferior to any 
roots now in use, either for delicacy of flavor or nutriment. 
They are eaten instead of bread, either roasted on the cinders 
or boiled ; the flower is also made into bread and puddings. 

6024. The D. alata, {Rheed. Mai. 7. t. 38.) or winged yam, 
is in equal, if not more universal cultivation than the former 
species. Its roots are frequently three feet long, and weigh 
thirty pounds. Of both these species there are numei'ous 
varieties, differing in the size and form of their roots. 
^ 6025. Propagation and culture. They may be propagated like the common potatoe, and cultivated in 

nearly the same manner as the forced potatoes. 
Brown {Hist, of Jam.) affirms, " that the roots must 
be cut so as to leave a little of the skin to each 
piece, for by that alone they germinate ; the roots 
having no apparent buds or eyes, but casting out 
their weakly stems from every part of the surface 
alike. They are planted commonly m August, and 
are ripe in November or December following." 

6026. The Spanish, or sweet potatoe, is the Convol- 
vulus Batatas, L. {Rheed. Mai. 7. t. 50.) Pent. 
Monog. L. and Convolmdacece, B. P. {fig.536.) It is 
a herbaceous perennial, with a round stem, hispid, 
prostrate, creeping, of a whitish-green, putting out 
scattered, oblong, acuminated tubers, purple or pale 
on the outsides. The leaves are angular, on long 
petioles ; the flowers purple, on upright peduncles. 
It is a native of both the Indies, and was introdu- 
ced here, and cultivated by Gerrard in 1597. He 
calls the roots potatus, potades, or potatoes, and says, 
that they are by some named skirrets of Peru. They 
flourished in his garden till winter, when they 
perished and rotted. Batatas were then sold at the 
exchange in London, and are still annually imported 
into England from Spain and Portugal. They were, as already observed (3647.), the common potatoes of 
our old English writers ; the Solanum tuberosum being then little known. The tubers of the batatas are 
sweet, sapid, and nourishing They are very commonly cultivated in all the tropical climates, where they 
eat not only the roots but the young leaves and tender shoots boiled. There are several varieties, if not 
distinct species, differing in the size, figure, and taste of the roots. 

6027. Propagation and culture. In warm climates this plant is cultivated in the same manner as our 
potatoe, but requires much more room, for the trailing stalks extend four or five feet every way, sending 
out large tubers, forty or fifty to a plant. In the national garden at Paris, the plants are raised in a hot- 
bed, and about the middle of May, transplanted in the open ground, where they are earthed up, and other- 
wise treated like the potatoe. In warm seasons they produce a tolerable crop, and we have been informed 
by Professor Thouin, that he hopes, after several years, at least so far to acclimate the plant as to fit it for 
field-culture in the south of France. Lelieur, who grows it in the same manner, also strongly recommends 
its culture. Both consider it as much lighter food than the common potatoe, and equally nourishing. In 
England, Miller observes, the roots must be planted on a hot-bed 
in the spring, and if the plants are kept covered in bad weather 
with glasses, they will produce flowers and many small tubers 
from the joints ; but if they are exposed to the open air, they 
seldom make much progress. This, however, ought not to dis- 
courage the curious or patriotic horticulturist, either in his at- 
tempts to raise the roots for the table, or to acclimate the plant. 

6028. The caper (Capparis spinosa, L. Polyan. 
Monog. L. and Capparidece, J.) (Jig. 537.) is a trail- 
ing shiTjb, a native of the south of Italy and Sicily, 
where it abounds on rocks, ruins, and old walls : it 
has been long cultivated in France, and was intro- 
duced in this country in 1596, as a stove plant; but 
there is reason to believe it maybe naturalised. It is cul- 
tivated, Neill observes, in the neighbor-hood of Paris, 
with no other protection than that of being trained 
against a low wall, and the shoots in winter laid down 
•nd covered with litter or fern, like those of the fig. 

3 E 





786 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paet hi. 



In the garden at Camden House, Kensington, a caper-tree stood alive in the open air for 
near a century : it had a south-east aspect, and was well sheltered from the north ; it 
had no covering, and v/as generally much injured by the frost ; but the roots of this 
plant being particularly strong and vivacious, it made strong shoots, and produced 
flower-buds every year. It is probable, therefore, that a plantation, so situated, if 
covered every autumn with litter, mats, or ferns, would succeed. Such a plantation, not 
trained on walls, but planted in an open compartment, would, like those near Toulon, in 
France, have the general appearance of a plantation of brambles, and might be yearly 
covered with very little trouble. Neill suggests, that a hardy variety might possibly be 
' obtained by repeatedly raising from seed, at first in Guernsey or Jersey, and the plant 
thus gradually inured to this country. The part used is the flower-bud, which forms a 
well known pickle , and an article of considerable commerce from Sicily, and other 
islands in the Mediterranean. 

6029. Propagation and culture. It may either be raised from seed, cuttings, or pieces 
of the root. The authors of the Cours complet cC J griculture prefer the mode by cuttings, 
and direct them to be cut a foot long, and planted in autumn. Tlie autumn following, 
tliey will be fit to remove to a general plantation. They describe two modes of cul- 
ture ; one, that of planting in walls, where no farther care is wanting, but that of gathering 
the buds ; and the other, that of planting in quincunx in open compartments, like other 
fruit-shrubs ; the latter mode is greatlyto be preferred. 

G030. The salsilla, or edible alstrccmeria. — AJstroeineria 
Salsilla, B. M. {Bof. Mag. 1613.) ; and S. edulis. {Hort. 
Trans, vol. ii.) Hex. Monog. L. and A.tpJwdclece, B. P. This 
is a herbaceou.s plant of gi-eat beauty, a native of Peru, and 
introduced in 1806. It is cultivated in the West Indies, 
where its roots are eaten like the potatoe. It was flowered 
here in 1811, in the Comte de'Vande's garden at Bayswater. 
It requires the temperature of the stove, and may be culti- 
vated in a hot-bed like the early potatoe. 

6031. The bread-root. — Psoruka esculenta. Ph. {Pursh. 
Amer. t. 22.) Diadclph. Decaii. L,. and Legmninnsce, J. It 
is a perennial herbaceous plant, a native of Missouri, and in- 
troduced here in 1811. It will grow in the open air, but re- 
quires the protection of a frame to produce abundant crops 
of roots, which are used like those of the potatoe in the 
countries where it is a native. 

6032. The pi-tx/, or water-che.stnut of the Chinese. — 
Scirpus tuberosus, Rox {Rox. iii. 26.) Triaiul. Monog. L. and 
■CyperacecE, B. P. {fig. 538.) It is a stoloniferous rush, without 
leaves, excepting a slender short sheath or two at the base 
of each culm. On the stolones grow tubers which are in 
high estimation among all ranks of the Chinese, not only as 
a pot-root, but as a medicine. It is eaten either boiled or 
raw. 

6033. Cultivation. " The raaa-tai, pu-tsai, orpi-tsi, of Abb^ Grosier, grows in tanks; these are ma- 
nured for its reception about the end of March. Thus a tank being drained of its water, small pits are 
dug in its bottom ; these are filled with human manure, and exposed to the sun for a fortnight ; their con- 
tents are next intimately blended with the slimy bottom of the tank, and the slips or roots of the plant 
deposited therein ; the water is now returned to the tank, and the new crop of tubers comes to perfection 
by the first of September." {Rox. Coro7n.) 

6034. The earth-almond, or rush-nut, {Cyperus esculentus, L. Trian. Monog. L. and Cypcraceee, J. 
Souchet comestible, Fr. and Zizole di Terra, Ital.) is a fibrous-rooted grass, with small round tubers 
hanging from the fibres, about the size of peas, which taste like chestnuts or almonds. It is a native of 
Italy and Montpelier, and is cultivated in some parts of the south of Europe and Germany for food. The 
tubers are planted in spring, and taken up in October, and preserved for winter use in the manner of 
potatoes. It might probably be cultivated in this country in dry warm situations, or in a frame. (Ron 
Jardinier.) 

6035. The eatable hibiscus. — Hibiscus esculentus, L. Monadelph. Polyan. L. and Malvacece, J. Gom- 
baud or Gombo, Fr. This is a stove annual, a native of the West Indies, and introduced in 1692. A soft 
herbaceous stalk rises from three to five feet high, with crenate leaves, and axillary, pale sulphur-colored 
flowers, succeeded by capsules. These, in the West Indies and the south of France, are put green into 
soups, or eaten with butter. In the south of France it is cultivated in the open air for this purpose ; and 
at Paris it is treated as we do the capsicum and love-apple, A similar treatment would, no doubt, suc- 
ceed in this country. 

6036. The arracacha, of the order of TJmbelliferce, J., is a South American plant, said to resemble the 
Aplum in habit ; probably Apimn Amencanum, D., possibly Ligtisticum nova sp. The main roots divide 
into four or five others, which grow to the size of cows' horns. These are used in the manner of potatoes 
by the inhabitants of Santa F^ and the Caraccas. They are light, starchy, and easy of digestion. The 
plant is said to thrive best in the elevated regions of mountains, v/here the medium heat does not exceed 
."jSo or 60O. {Annals of Rot. i. 400.) The name of this plant »:as not yet been determined, but, through 
the exertions of the Horticultural Society, it has recently been introduced to England, and will soon 
be subjected to examination and improvement. 

6037. Other exotic esculents. To the above we might add, the Dahlia, recommended to be grown for 
its tubei-s byThi^baut-de-Berneaud. The Dolichos Soja, a stove annual, the seeds of which form, or ought 
to form, the chief ingredient in the fish-sauce of that name. The earth-nut of South America {Arachis 
hypogcea), a stove annual, raised in a few places near Paris, on hot-beds, and then transplanted in the open 
air. The Convolvulus reptans, a shrubby stove plant, grown in China, in trenches filled with water, and 
used as a spinaceous or oleraceous plant. The Basclla nigra, and other species, stove biennials, used for 
the same purpose: the European and Chinese water-calhops {Trapa nutans and bicornis), both green- 
house annuals, but fruited by Lambert in the stove. {Hort. Trans, iv. 563.) The T. natans is grown in 
the ponds in Holland, according to Professor Martyn, and the nuts are used there as chestnuts both hymen 
and hogs ; and Neill informs us that the canal at Versailles is covered with the plant, and that the fruit 
is sometimes served up at table. These, and a variety of others, the curious cultivator will find noticed 
in botantpal works and books of travels, and will enjoy greater satisfaction in discovering them himself 
thsn in finding thetn here ready named for his experimental enquiries. 




BocK T. 



MONTHLY HORTICULTURAL PRODUCTIONS. 787 



Chap. XL 

Horticultural Productions tvhich may be exjyected from a Jirst-rate Kitchen-garden 

managed in the best Style. 
6038. The sources of edible enjoyment afforded by a first-rate kitchen- garden are nu- 
merous and varied ; and consequently a proprietor, who spares no expense on this de- 
partment, ought to be informed of what he has a right to expect, subject, however, to the 
drawbacks of bad situations, uncertain seasons, and unforeseen accidents. Many garden- 
ers object to tables of this kind, as leading to unreasonable expectations, disappoint- 
ments, and quarrels, and as, in short, enlightening too much their employers. On this 
we shall only observe, that the more a proprietor requires, the more he must conform to 
the conditions on which alone these products are to be expected. As to the subject of 
enlightening masters, much might be said in its favor, and nothing founded in right rea- 
son against it. It is only by a knowledge of gardening that a master can distinguish a 
bad gardener from a good one ; and only from this appreciation that a good gardener 
can be properly valued and rewarded. Community of knowledge must be better than 
no community at all. A man who employs a gardener as he does a tailor, merely to 
supply his wants, may look on him as a very convenient machine, and useful to have 
about his premises ; but where a knowledge and taste for gardening exists in the em- 
ployer, one point of union is formed between him and his servant, which must be pro- 
ductive of a certain degree of humanity, if not of mutual respect and consideration. It is 
only bad gardeners, therefore, that have to fear the dissemination of knowledge among 
their masters. In a work of this nature, hovv^ever, in which the object is more to give the 
opinion of others than our own, we subjoin what M'Phail observes on the subject, which 
may be reckoned the opinion of most men of his order. " The book called Every 
Man his own Gardener, ''''he says, " gives a list of v.'hat fruits, &c. gentlemen may expect 
from their gardens in every month of the year ; such a list not only of fruits, but of flow- 
ers and esculent vegetables, which nature, assisted by artificial means, is incompetent 
to produce in every month of the year in any country, in any degree of latitude under 
the sun ; hence, from lists of this kind being given in books said to be written by practi- 
cal gardeners, ariseth strife between masters and mistresses and their servant-gardeners." 
[Gard. Rem. Pref. xxviii.) 



Sect. I. January. — The Productions arranged in the Order in which they have been treated 
in the preceding Chapters. 

6040, Hardy frtdta from the open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, quinces, medlars, services from the fruit- 
room. Some ]5lums and morello cherries, carefully preserved 
on the trees, borne thick-skinned gooseberries, currants, and 
grapes, preserved on the trees. Some dried fruits of the same 
sorts on branches hung up in the fruit-iOf)m. Almonds, wal- 
nuts, chestnuts, filberts from the fruit-room. Sloes from the 
bushes, wild services, hips, haws, and sometimes a few cloud- 
berries. 

6041. Cidinary vegetables and fruits from the forcing depart- 
ment, Kidneybeans. Potatoes.. Sea-kale. Small salads. 
Parsley. Fennel. Rhubarb. Mushrooms. Pines, winter me- 
lons, grapes, strawberries, cucumbers occasionally. Oranges, 
olives, and pomegranates. Malay apple, loquats, and lee-chees. 
Yams and Spanish potatoes. 



6039. Culinary vegetables from the opengardeti or garden-stores. 
Strasburgh cabbage, savoys, borecoles, Kiussels sprouts. Kid- 
neybeans for harricots, and Prussian and other jjeas. Potatoes, 
Jerusalem artichokes, turnip, carrot, parsnep, red beet,skirret, 
scorzonera, and salsify, from the root-stores and seed-room. 
Spinage in mild seasons ; also sorrel and white beet. Onions, 
leeks, garlic, shallot, and rocambole. Sea-kale from the covered 
beds. Lettuce, endive, celery, American and winter cress. Pars- 
ley, if protected, horse-radish, and dried fennel,dill, chervil, &c. 
Thyme, sage, rosemary, lavender, from the open garden, and 
dried marjoram, savorj-, mint, basil, &c. from the herb-room. 
Rhubarb-stalks from covered roots; anise, coriander and cara- 
way-seeds, chamomile, elecampane, blessed thistle, &c. dried. 
Red cabbage and samphire. Wild rocket, wild spinage, sauce- 
alone, and sorrel, if a mild winter. Mushrooms from covered 
ridges. Sea-belt, or sweet fucus, dried. 



Sect. II. February. 



6042. Culinary vegetables from the open gardenor garden-stores. 
Scotch or Strasburgh cabbage, savoys, borecoles, Brussels 
sprouts, and, if a mild winter, cabbage-coleworts, broccolis. 
Haricots, beans, and soup-peas from the seed-room. Potatoes, 
Jerusalem artichokes, turnip, carrot, parsnep, rol- beet, skirret, 
scorzonera, and salsify. Spinage, if a rnild winter. Onions, 
leeks, garlic, shallot, and rocambole. Sea-kale from covered 
beds. Lettuce, endive, .celery. American and winter cress. 
Parsley, if protected, horse-radish, and dried fennel, dill, 
chervil, &c. Thyme, sage, rosemary, and lavender, from the 
open gairden ; dried marjoram, basil, &c. from the herb-room. 
Rhubarb-stalks firom covered roots, anise, coriander and cara- 
way-seeds, from the seed-room ; chamomile, &c. from the 
herb-room. Red cabbage, samphire. Nettle and thistle tops ; 
towards the end, sorrel -leaves, and if a mild winter, sauce- 



alone. Mushrooms from covered ridges. Sea-belt preserved, 

and occasionally badder -locks. 

6043. Hardy fruits from t/ie open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, quinces, medlars, services from the fruit- 
room. Some puims from branches hung up in the fruit-room. 
Dried grapes and cunants from branches hung uu in the fruit- 
room. Almonds, wainuis, chestnuts, filberts from tbc fr-uit- 
room. Sloes fro m dried branches hung up m the fruit-room. 

6044. Culinary productions and fruits Jrom the forcing dcpart- 
meiit. Kidneybeajis. Potatoes. Sea-kale, asparagus. Small 
salads. Parsley, mint, chervil. Rhubarb. Mushrooms. A 
pine occasionally ; grapes, cucumbers, strawberries. Oranges, 
lemons, olives, pomegranates. Pishamin-nuts, lee-cheei. 
Yams and Spanish potatoes. 



Sect. III. March. 



6045. Culinary vegetables from the open garden, or garden- 
stores. Brussels sprouts, borecoles of sorts, especially the early 
greens, and Breda kale, broccoUs. Haricot-beans and soui^-peas, 
from the seed-roorn. Potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, turnip, 
carrot, red-beet, parsnip, skirret, scorzonera, and salsify. 
Spincige occasionally, if mild. Onions from the root-room ; 
Welch onions, ciboules from the garden ; garlic, shallot, 
rocambole from the root-room. Sea-kale from covered beds. 
Lettuce, endive, celery, American and winter cress ; also 
•water-cress, bumel and others. Parsley, horse-radish, and 
dried fennel, dill, chervil, &c. Thyme, sage, rosemary from 
the open garden ; and dried marjoram, basil, mint, savory, &c. 
from the herb-room. Rhubarb-stalks from covered roots ; 
anise, coriandei", carawav, and other seeds, chamomile, blessed 
thistle, and other dried herbs. Samphire. Nettle-topf, dandelion- 

3 E 



lea /es, bladder-campion-tops, water-cresses, brook-lime, sauce- 
alone. IMushrooms from covered ridges. Common and red 
dulse, sea- belt, and pepper-dulse. 

6046. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, quinces, medlars, services from the fruit- 
room. Some dried grapes. -Almonds, walnuts, chestnuts, fil-bert* 
from the fruit-room. 

6047. Culinary productions and fruits from the forcing depart- 
mejit. Kidneybeans. Potatoes, radishes. Sea-kale, asparagus. 
Small salads, onions. Parsley, mint, chervil, sweet marjoram. 
Rhubarb. Mushrooms. A pine occasionally ; grapes, cucum- 
bers, strawberries. Oranges, shaddocks, lemons, olives, pi«' 
served pomegranates. Loquats, pisharnin^iuts, lee-chesSj (ti*. 
Yams and Spanish potatoes. 



788 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Sect. IV. April. 



60-18. Culinary vegetables from the open garden, or garden-stores. 
Brussels sprout's, borecoles, broccoli, cofeworts. Haricot-beans, 
and soup-peas from the seed-room. Potatoes, Jerusalem arti- 
choke, yellow turnip, carrot, red beet, parsnep, skirret, scorzo- 
nera, and salsify. Spinage, orache, wild spinage, sorrel, fat hen, 
herb-patience. Bulbed and young onions, ciboules, and Welsh 
onions ;'garlic, shallots, rocambole, &c.from thestores. Sea-kale 
and asparagus at the end of the month ; hop-tops, campion -tops, 
and thistle-tops throughout the month. Lettuce, endive, celery, 
American and winter cress ; bumet, water-cress, and other sal- 
ads. Parsley, purslane, tarragon from the garden ; horse-radish 
and dried herbs, from theherb-room. Thyme, sage, mint.rose- 
mary, lavender, tansy, from the open garden. The others of 
this class from the herb-room. Rhubarb-stalks from covered 
plants ; angelica, elecampane, and thistle-stalks from the 
garden. The seeds and dried herbs of this class from the stores. 



Samphire and buds of marsh-marigold. Nettle, campion, 
thistle, bryony, burdock, ox-tongue, sauce-alone, and other 
tops ; chickweed, wild rocket, sea-belt, and other leaves. Mush- 
rooms from covered ridges. Dulse, tangle, and other fuci, in 
a fresh state ; sea-belt preserved ; and floating fucus pickled. 

6049. Hardy fruifs from the open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, services, from the fruit-cellar. Some 
dried grapes from the fruit-room. Almonds, Wcilnuts, chestnuts, 
filberts, from the fruit-room or cellar. 

6050. Culinary productions and f raits from ihtforting depart, 
ment. Kidneybeans, peas. " Potatoes, carrots, radishes. Sea- 
kale, asparagus. Small salads, lettuce, oniops. Parsley, pur- 
slane, mint, &c. Rhubarb. Mushrooms. A ^ine occasionally ; 
grapes, cherries, peaches, cucumbers, melons, strawberries. 
Qranges, lemons, limes, pomegranates. Loquats, pisbamin-nuts 
and &ed lee-chees, and long-yens. Yams and Spanish potatoes. 



Sect. V. May. 



stores. Early cabbsiges, cauliflowers, broccoUs, and coleworts. 
Haricot beans, and soup-peas from the seed-room, and some- 
times, though rarely, young peas, towards the end of the month, 
from a warm border. Potatoes and Jerusalem artichokes from 
pits, or cold cellars ; turnip, carrot, and red beet from cellars 
or the open gromid, if not destroyed by the frost ; young ra- 
dishes. Spinage, orache, wild spinage, sorrel, and herb-pa- 
tience in perfection. Housed omons, and winter leeks; young 
onions, ciboules, and chives, garlic and shallot from cola 
rooms. Asparagus and sea-kale in perfection. Lettuce, endive, 
celery, succory, young radishes, and all the salads in perfection ; 
•winter radish, lamb-lettuce. Parsley, purslane, horse-radish, 
tarragon, and all this class, either fresh or from the herb-room. 
Thyme, sage, mint, tansy, costmary, &c. from the open garden; 
the others from the herb-room. Rhubarb-stalks, blanched, or 
otherwise, from the earthed-up or uncovered plants, angelica- 
stalks, anise, and other seeds, and the dried herbs, tis before. 



from the herb-room. Samphire, and buds of mar-h-marigold. 
Charlick,fathen, chickweed, sea-oraehe, sea-belt,&c.as greens ; 
ladies'-smock and orpine, as salads ; speedwell and vernal grass, 
as tea -plants. Morels from their native habitats ; garden- 
mushrooms from covered ridges in the open garden. Dulse, 
tangle, and the other sorts of fuci, in a fresh state, and floating 
fucus for pickling. 

6052. Hardy fruits from the open g,arden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, from the firuit-cellar. Dried grapes from 
the frnit-roora. Almonds, walnuts, chestnuts, filberts, from the 
fruit-cellar. 

6053 . Culinary productions and fruits from the forcing depart- 
ment- Kidneybeans, peas, beans- Potatoes, carrots, radishes. 
Sea-kale, asparagus. Small salads. Chervil, purslane, &c. 
Mushrooms. A pine occasionally ; grapes, peaches, melons, 
encumbers, cherries, figs, apples, pears, gooseberries, and 
strawberries. Lemons, shadaock 
Yams. 



oranges, pomegrEmates. 



Sect. VI. June. 



6054. Culinary vegetables f rmntlie open garden, or garden-stores. 
Cabbages and cauhflowers in perfection. Kidneybeans, peas, 
and common beans. Old potatoes from watered pits; new 
potatoes, turnips, carrots, and radishes. Spinage, orache, and 
sorrel, in perfection. Young onions and chives ; rocambole 
and garlic from the root-room. Aspara^s and sea-kale in 
perfection till the middle of the month. Small salads, lettuce, 
lamb-lettuce, radishes. Parsley, purslane, tarragon, horse- 
radish, fennel, dill, marygold, &c. Thyme, sage, mint, savory, 
basil, &c. from the garden, and the others from theTierb-room. 
Rhubarb-stalks, angelica. Samphire, three sorts. Charlick, 
chickweed, fat hen, orache, ana willow-herb, as pot-herbs ; 
orpine, ladies'-smock, &c. as seileuls; sweet cicely as a garnish ; 



sea-bindweed as a pickle, and butterwort as rennet ; ficaria- 
roots as saloop. Morels from their native habitats; and the 
garden-mushroom from covered ridges. Dulse, tangle, and 
the other sorts of edible fuci- 

6055. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room Apples, pears, from the fruit-cellar. Some cherries 
towards the middle of the month- Gooseberries, currants, 
strawberries, and raspberries, towards the end of the month. 
Almonds, walnuts, chestnuts, filberts from the fruit-cellar. 
Some snowberries and tree-currants. 

6056. Ctdinary vegetables and fruits from the forcing depart- 
ment. Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, peaches, nectarines, figs, 
cherries, &c. melons, cucumbers. Shaddocks, oranges, lemons. 



Sect. VII. July. 



6057. Culinary productions from the open garden, or gardeiu 
stores. Cabbages and cauliflowers in perfection. Peas, beans, 
sugar-pea, and kidneybeans. New potatoes, turnips, carrots, 
radishes. Spinage, orache, sorrel, and white beet. Onions 
bulbed and ciboules, for salading. Artichokes, alisanders, 
rampion. Small salads, lettuce, radishes. Parsley, purslane, 
Indian cress, marigold, borage, fennel, &c. Thyme, sage, 
mint, balm ; and all the others from the open garden, and also 
ftom the herb-room. AngeUca-stalks, gourds; the aromatic 
seeds from the seed-room, and the herbs either from the herb- 
room, or open garden. Caper, Indian cress, radish-pods, kidney- 
beans, and pickling cucumbers. The pot-herbs and salads as 
in June, the seeds of some sorts of vetches, as legumes ; the 



cow-parsnep for its different uses, and butterwort ; the roots of 
ficaria. Morels from their native habitats ; garden-mushrooms 
from covered ridges. Dulse, tangle, &c. as in June. 

6058. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orcliard, or fruit- 
room. Juneating, margaret, and codlin apples; James and 
other pears from the trees. Some peaches, nectarines, and 
apricots ; also cherries. Gooseberries, currants, strawberries, 
raspberries. Almonds, walnuts, chestnuts, filberts, from tha 
fruit-cellar. Bird-cherries, tree-currants. 

6059. Culinary productions atui fruits from the forcing depart- 
mettt. Mushrooms, pines, grapes, peaches, nectarines, figs, 
cherries, apples, melons, cucumbers, &c. Lemons. 



Sect. VIII. ■ August. 



' 6060. Culinary vegetables front ihe open garden, or garden- 
tiores. Cabbages, cauhflowers, broccoli. Peas, beans, sugar- 
pea, kidneybean. Potatoes, turnips, carrots, radishes, Jerusa- 
lem artichoke, red beet. Spinage, white beet-chard, orache, 
sorrel. Onions, bulb or small, shallots, garlic, and rocambole, 
from the garden. Artichoke, cardoon, rampion. Small salads ; 
iettuce, endive, radishes, &c. Parsley, purslsme, Indian cress, 
marigold, borage, fennel, &c. Thyme, sage, mint, balm, and 
all the others, green or dried. New seeds of caraway, anise, 
&c. ; new hyssop, chamomile, and other herbs ; gourds. Love- 
apple, egg-plant, capsicum, Indian cress, radish-tops, kidney- 
bean, and pickling cucumbers. Most of the pot-herbs and 
salads of June ; the roots of arrow-head, silver- weed, ficaria, 
and earth-nut roots; heath-tops and cow parsnep. Mush- 



rooms and champignons from pastures, and the open garden : 
truffle from commons. All the sorts of fuci in their greatest 
perfection for the table or pickling. 

6061. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, and fruit- 
room Apples, pears. Peaches, nectarines, apricots, plums, 
cherries. Gooseberries, currants, strawberries, raspberries. 
Nuts, if desired, from the fruit-cellar; almonds, and some wal- 
nuts and filberts from the trees towards the end of the month. 
Tree currants, roan-berries. 

6062. Culinary productions and fruits from the forcing depart- 
ment Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, peaches, figs, melons, cu- 
cumbers. Indian figs, strawberry-pears. AUigator, granadillas, 
guavas, pears. New yams and Spanish jiotatoes. 



Sect. IX. September, 



6063. Culinary vegetables from tlie open garden, or garden-stores. 
Cauliflowers, cabbages, broccolis. Peas, beans, and kidney- 
beans. Potatoes, turnips, carrots, parsneps, skirret, and all the 
roots. Spinage, beet-chard, orache, and sorrel. Onions, shal- 
lots, garlic, rocambole, and leeks. Artichokes, cardoons, 
rampions. Small salads, endive, lettuce, celery, tarragon. 
Parslev, horse-radish, Indian cress, marigold, fennel, chervils, 
&c. Thyme, sage, mint, and all the class, dried or green. 
Gourds and pumpkins; the aromatic seeds from the seed- 
room ; and the herbs from the garden or herb-room. Love- 
apple, capsicum, egg-plant, samphire, red cabbage, kidney- 
bean, &c. pickling cucumbers. Sea-peas and various legumes 
of the vetch kind, dropwort, Solomon's seal, saloop, and other 
roots; heath-tops and cow -parsneps. Mushrooms and cham- 



pignons from their native habitats, or from the open garden. 
Dulse, and all the sorts of edible frici, in perfection. 

6064. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, orfi-uii- 
room. Apples, pears, quinces, medlars. Peaches, nectarines, 
apricots, plums, cherries. Grapes, gooseberries, currants, 
strawberries, raspberries. Almonds, walnuts, filberts. Wild 
services, cloudberries, bilberries, cranb^ries, brambles, hips, 
haws, (Sec. 

6065. Cidinary productions and fruits from the forcing depart- 
ment. Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, melons, cucumbers, figs. 
Pomegranates, Indian figs, tofch-thistles, and straw berr. .pears. 
Akees, alligator, and anchovy pears, guavas, and granadillas, 
some mangoes. Yams and Spanish potatoes. 



Sect. X. October. 



Cabbages, caulfllowers, broccolis.. Peas and kidneybeans, if the 
weath^ is dry Potatoes, turnips, carrots, radishes, Jerusalem 
artichokes, red beet, skirret, salsify, scorzonera. Spinage, beeu 



chard, sorrel. Onions, leeks, garlic, shallots, and rocambole. 
Artichokes, cardoons, rampion, celery. Small salads, endive, 
succory, lettuce, winter-cress, bumet. "Parsley, horse-radish, 
Indian cress, marigold, fennel. Thyme, sage, mint, and all of 



Book II. 



FLORICULTURE. 



789 



this class green or dried. Gourds and pumpkins, aromatic seeds, 
and dried herbs, as in September. Love-apple, capsicum, egg- 
I)lant, red cabbage, kidney bean. Meadow-sweet, and the other 
edible roots, and heath for brewing. All the sorts of edible 
fuci. 

G067. Hardy fruit a from tite open garden, orcharil, or friui-room. 
Apples, pears, quinces, medlars, services. Some peaches, nec- 
tarines, apricots, plurns, and protected or covered morello cher- 
ries. Grapes and strawberries, raspberries, and protectsd or 

Sect. XI. 

6069. Culinary vegetables Jr^m the open garden, or gar<Ien-stores, 
Cabbages, cauliflowers, protected by frames ; broccolis, Brussels 
sprouts, savoys, borecoles. Dried kidnejbeans and peas, from 
the seed-room. Potatoes, turnips, carrots, winter radish, Jeru- 
salem artichoke, red beet, skirret, salsify, scorzonera. Spinage 
beet chard, sorrel. Onions, ieeks, garlic, shallot, rocambole, 
(^ardoons, rampions, celery. Endive, lettuce, winter cress, 
bumet. Parsley, horse-radish, fennel, and dried chervil, &c. 
Thyme, sage, and rosemary, the others chiefly from the herb- 
room. Caraway, anise, and other aromatic seeds from the 
seed-room ; the family herbs firom the herb-room. Red cab- 
bage. The edible roots, as in October. Sea-belt, badder-locks, 
and other species of fuci. 

Sect. XII. 

6072. Culinary vegelahlesfrom the open (garden, or garden-stores. 
Strasburgh cabbages, cauliflowers,where preser ted or protected, 
broccoBsj savoys, Brussels sprouts, borecole. Cried kidney, 
beans for haricots ; and soup-jjeas from the seed-room. Pota- 
toes, turnips, carrots, winter radish, Jerusalem artichokes, red 
beet, skirret, salsify, and scor/onera, from the open garden or 
root-room. Beet-cliard, where protected. Onions, leeks, gar- 
lic, shallots, and rocambole. Cardoons, celery. Endive, let- 
tuce, winter and American cress. Parsley, horse-radish, dried 
herbs. Thyme, sage, rosemary, lavender, &c. green, the other 
«lried. The anise and other aromatic seeds from the seed- 
room ; and the herbs of this class from the herb-room. Red 
cabbage. Edible roots from the stores or pits. Preser^'ed sea- 
belt, and when the weather admits of gathering, other edible 
fiici ; the floating fiieus in pickle. 



covered gooseberries and currants. Almonds from the fruit- 
room ; and walnuts, chestnuts, and filberts from the trees. Wild 
services, cloudberries, bramble-berries, and cranberries. 

6068. Culinary productions and fruits from tlie forcing depart- 
ment. Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, melons, cucumbers, figs. 
Pomegranates, olives, Indian figs; torch-lhistles and straw- 
berry-pears. Akees, alligator, and anchovy pears ; guavas. 
granfidillas, durions, mangoes, and mangosteen. Yams ana 
Spanish potatoes. 

November. 

6070. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, or fruit-room. 
Apples, pears, quinces, m.edlars. Some plums, and protected 
cherries firom the trees.' Grapes from the trees, and protected 
gooseberries, currants. Almonds from the fruit-room, and 
walnuts, chestnuts, filberts. Wihi services, cloudberries, bilber- 
ries, cranberries, hips, and haws. 

6071. Culinary productions and frmts from the forcing depart- 
ment- Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, melons, cucumbers, figs. 
Oranges, lemons, pomegranates, olives. Akees, guavas, grana- 
dillas, bananas, durions, mangoes, and mangosteens. Yams, 
&c. 



December. 

6073. Hardy fruits from the open garden, orchard, or fruit- 
room. Apples, pears, quinces, medlars, services. Some pro- 
tected plu ins and cherries from branches hung in the fruit-room. 
Grapes from the trees, or from branches hung in the fruit- 
room. Almonds, walnuts, chestraits, filberts, from the fruit- 
room. Sloes, from the bushes, wild services, hips, haws, cran- 
berries, and cloudberries. 

6074. Culinary prodiiciions and fruits from the forcing depart, 
ment liidneybeans. Potatoes. Sea-kale. Small salads. 
Chervil, fennel, &c. Rhubarb. Mushrooms. Pines, grapes, 
melons, &c. winter melons, cucumbers, figs. Oranges, le- 
mons, pomegranates, olives. Akees, guavas, durions, mangoes, 
mangosteens, rose-apples, pishamins, lee-chees, &c. Yams and 
sweet potatoes. 



BOOK II. 

FLORICULTURE. 

6075. Floriculture we consider as comprehending whatever relates to the culture and 
arrangement of vegetables, grown chiefly on account of their flowers, or as objects of taste 
or curiosity. The culture of flowers was long carried on with that of culinary vegetables, 
in the borders of the kitchen-garden, or in parterres or groups of beds, which commonly 
connected the culinary compartments with the house.' In places of moderate extent, this 
mixed style is still continued ; but in residences which aim at any degree of distinction, 
the space within the walled garden is confined to the production of objects of domestic 
utility, while the culture of plants of ornament is displayed in the flower-garden and 
the shrubbery. These, under the general term of pleasure-ground, encircle the house in 
small seats, and on a larger scale embrace it in one or more sides ; the remaining part 
being under the character of park-scenery. Many of the most interesting plants belong- 
ing to this branch of culture are natives of warm climates, and require the protection of 
glass and artificial heat. On a limited scale, such plants are grown in the culinary-forcing- 
houses, or in green-houses, or botanic stoves, connected with the others in the kitchen-gar- 
den. In complete residences, however, the culture of exotics forms a distinct department 
of ornamental horticulture, and the hot-houses requisite for this purpose are placed in 
the flower-garden, or variously arranged within the precincts of the pleasure-ground. In 
both departments, separation is attended with the usual advantages resulting from a divi- 
sion of skill, labor, and effect. Floriculture is obviously of limited interest and utility, 
compared to horticulture ; much less has accordingly been written on it, and our view 
of modern practice will, therefore, be proportionately brief. The order adopted, is the 
formation, planting, and general culture of the flower -garden ; the formation, planting, 
and general culture of the shrubbery ; the design and general culture of the floricul- 
tural hot-houses ; the catalogue of plants and trees used in ornamental horticulture j and, 
lastly, the monthly table of floricultural productions. 



Chap. I. 

Of the Formation of the Flower-garden. 

6076. The situation of the flower-garden, as of every department of floriculture, shoula 
be near the house, for ready access at all times, and especially during winter and spring, 

3 E 3 



790 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III 



when the beauties of this scene are felt with peculiar force. " The flower-garden," Neill 
observes, " should form an ornamental appendage to the mansion, and be easily accessible 
in all kinds of weather. There is no objection to its being seen from the windows 
of the house : on the contrary, this is sometimes considered as desirable." Nico., as 
we have seen (2382.), approves of having the various gardens of a place combined, and 
placing them at no great distance from the house ; and Repton strongly recommends 
this practice. 

6077. Abercrombie says, " While the kitchen-garden is concealed by buildings or plantations, the flower, 
garden and pleasure-ground should stand conspicuously attached to the family residence. \\ hen the 
horticultural establishment includes a conservatory, it is proper to have it in sight, and connected with 
the ornamented grounds; because the style of such a building, the plants within, and the scene 
without, under a tasteful arrangement, harmonise in character and effect. The botanic-garden, the range 
of stoves, and all the departments, a visit to which renders a walk about the grounds pleasing and inter- 
esting, should be at hand." 

6078. The author of the FlorisV s Manual confineo her observations to the "construction of that humble 
flower-garden," which she calls "the common or mingled flower-garden." " This," she says, " should be 
situated so as to form an ornamental appendage to the house, and where the plan of ground will admit, 
placed before windows exposed to a southern or south-east aspect; and although to this position there 
may appear the objection of the flowers turning their petals to the sun, and consequently from the win- 
dows, this predilection in the ti-ibe of Flora for the rays of that bright luminary, v/ill produce the same 
effect in whatever place our flowers may be situateri, when in tlie vicinity of a building, as they invariably 
expose the front of their corols to the lights from which both the petals of flowers, and the loaves of 
plants are believed to derive material essential to tiieir existence." She adds, "when apart from the 
house, the mingled flower-garden may be introduced with great advantage, if situated so as to form .i 
portion of the pleasure-ground : in this case it should not be distinct from tlie house, but so contrived 
as to terminate one of the walks of the home shrubberie*." {Flor. Man. p. 10. 15.) 

6079. To place the flower-garden south-east or south-west of the house, and between it and the kitchen- 
garden, is in general a desirable circumstance. In a design for a villa farm {fig.-5S9.), supposing the en- 
trance-front of the house ya), to face the north-west, Ihen the farm-offices {b), liorse-pond (c), &c. may be 
placed to the north-east ; the kitchen-yard {d) and livery-stable-yard {e) to the south-west : against these 
maybe placed the exotic hot-houses, looking to the flower-garden (/), and beyond this the American 
garden (g), and lastly, the kitchen-garden (A), and walk through the farm (/). If concealed approaches to 
the farm and stable-offices (c, n,) and from the kitchen-garden to the kitchen {h, e, </,) be contrived, such 
an arrangement will be found to combine both elegance and economy, and to admit of bringing the wire 
fence {m), which separates the mown from the fed lawn, near the house, without being unsightly : a de- 
sirable object in farm villas, as it saves mowing, and increases pasturage. 




6080. In exposure and asjyeci, the flower-garden should be laid out as much as pos- 
sible on the same principles as the kitchen-garden (2390.), not only on account of the 
advantages to be derived from the full influence of the sun during winter on the hot- 
house department, but also for the better enjoyment of the open air scenes, in weather 
favorable for walking out of doors. It should not be naturally low in surface, nor of 
a wet retentive soil, nor rendered damp and gloomy by surrounding high trees, or lofty 
walls or buildings. If it happen that a house be nearly surrounded by a flower-garden, 
the variety of aspect tlience afforded will be favorable to the continuance of the bloom 
of our flowers, far beyond what can be obtained if confined to a southern exposure. 
South, south-east, and east, are the aspects most advantageous to the grovvfth of flowers ; 
and, possessing these varieties of exposure, the bloom of a garden may be protracted 
some weeks beyond the time it could be preserved under a single aspect. 

608 1 . The extent of the flower-garden depends jointly on the general scale of the re- 
sidence, and the particular taste of the owner. If any proportion may be mentioned, 
perhaps, a flfth part of the contents of the kitchen-garden will come near the general 
average ; but there is no impropriety in having a large flower-garden to a small kitchen- 
garden or mansion, where the taste of the owner leads to such a deviation from common 
rules. As moderation, however, is generally found best in the end, we concur with 
the author of the Florist's Manual, wlien she states, that " the compass of ground appro- 
priated to flowers must vary according to the size of the place of which that ground 
forms a part, and should in no case be of great extent. If the form of ground, where 



Book II. FORMATION OF THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



791 



a iJarterre is to be situated, is sloping, the size should be larger than when a flat surface, 
and the borders of various shapes, and on a bolder scale, and intermingled ^vith grass ; 
but sucli a flower-garden partakes more of the nature of pleasure-ground tlian of the 
common parterre, and will admit of a judicious introduction of floweiing shrubs." " To 
cover twenty acres with mere flowering plants," Abercrombie observes, " producing 
nothing esculent in the root, leaves, or fruit, would be puerile and ridiculous, as it would 
exceed the moderation with which nature scatters her ornaments." (Pract. Card. 338.) 

6082. Shelter is equally requisite for the flower as for the kitclien garden, and, where 
naturally wanting, is to be produced by the same means, viz. planting. The plantation 
on the side next the garden, should begin with the lowest shrubs, and rise in gradation 
to the trees, which, unless on the north, or very exposed points, should not be of the 
tallest kinds. A few elegant shrubs, and one or two trees may be scattered through 
the scene, either in the dug compartments or in the turf-glades, for the purposes of shelter 
and shade as well as ornament; but in general, much of either of tlie two former quali- 
ties are highly injurious both to the culture of flowers, and the thick closeness of turf ; 
besides rendering the garden unfit to be resorted to in the winter and spring seasons. 
Sometimes an evergreen-hedge will produce all the shelter requisite, as in small gardens 
composed of earth and gravel only [Jig. 541.) ; but where the scene is large {fig- 540.), 
and composed of dug compartments (a), placed on lawn (ft) the whole may be sur- 
rounded by an irregular border (c) of flowers, shrubbery, and frees. 




6083. Soil. Most of the hardy herbaceous flowers, and the deciduous and evergreen 
ornamental shrubs, will succeed in a soil of common good qualities, moderately light and 
mellow. Negatively, the ground should not be excessively strong and clayey ; and mere 
gravel is very intractable. {Abercro7nbie.) 

6084. Nicol oberves, that flowers in general " will thrive very well in common garden-earth of a mid- 
dling texture, if broke fine, to the depth of a foot. Some, no doubt, do better in light tliau in heavy soils ; 
and the contrary : and others do best in rich humid earth. Bulbous flowers, in general, do best hi light 
sandy earth ; though some require a stronger and a richer soil. In general, the soil for these should be 
formed at least eighteen inches deep, and should be made very tine by the spade, or be put through a 
coarse screen." In parterres where the finer flowers are cultivated, a variety of soils will be required ac- 
cording to the nature of the plants, as rich sandy loam for bulbs, loamy earth for the primula tribe, bog- 
earth for American plants ; and hence it follows, that, provided the sub-soil be dry, the nature of the sur-, 
face-stratum is of the less consquence. 

6085. Surface. Where the extent is small, and the plants grov.'n to be chiefly florists' 
owers, or other select kinds, in beds separated by gravelled paths, a level or gentle 
and uniform slope will be found most suitable ; but where the limits are moi-e exten- 
sive, and turf and shrubs are introduced, a wavy surface, either naturally or rendered 
so by art, will have much the best effect. " In recluse scenes immediately under the 
eye, art. may create a sort of miniature of beautiful ground. Man is but a puny object 
compared to those of inanimate nature. He m^ay oveidook a distant hill, separated by 
low ground ; but a mound of less tlian three yards in height, placed near the eve, confines 
the view, and all other objects being shut out, acquires, if apparently a work of nature, a 
degree of importance in his imagination : winding walks, four feet below the original 
surface, will supply earth for accompanying them by wavy hills or swells eight feet high. 
If these hills and swells are formed and contrived so as to produce a varied and natural- 
like whole, with every change of position, a very suitable basis will be raised for a pic- 
turesque shrubbery or flower-garden. It was to tliis sort of art that Pope's garden, at 
Twickenham, was indebted for so great a variety of beauties in a small space ; and the 
flower-garden at Lord Harcourt's, at Nuneham, was laid out under the eye of Mason the- 
poet, on the same principle." {Ed. Ency. art. Landscape Gardening.) 

3 E 4 



792 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6086. Water. This material, in some form or other, is as essential to the flower as 
to the kitchen -garden. Besides the use of the element in common culture, a pond or 
basin affords an opportunity of growing some of the more showy aquatics, wliile jets, 
dropping-fountains, and other forms of displaying water, serve to decorate and give in- 
terest to the scene. Besides choice aquatics, the ponds or basins of flower-gardens may 
be stocked with the gold-fish (Ct/jyrinus auratus), and will serve as a hybernaculum for 
that elegant and interesting animal the tree-frog (Rana arborea], so amusing in the gar- 
dens of the south of Germany. 

6087. The form of a small garden {Jig. 541.) wdll 
be found most pleasing when some regular figure is 
adopted, as a circle, oval, octagon, crescent, &c, : but 
where the extent is so great as not readily to be 
caught by a single glance of the eye, an irregular shape § 
is generally more convenient, and it may be thrown into 
agreeable figures, or component scenes, by the intro- 
duction of shrubs so as to subdivide the space. 
" Either a square or an oblong ground-plan," Aber- ^ 
crombie observes, "is eligible ; and although tKe shape ^ 
must be often adapted to local circumstances, yet, | 
when a garden is so circumscribed that the eye at i= - 
once embraces the whole, it is desirable that it should 
be of some regular figure." 

6088. Nicol says, " a variety of forms may be indulged in, 
without incurring censure ; provided the figures be graceful, 
and not in any one place too complicated. An oval is a figure 
that generally pleases, on account of the continuity of its out- 
lines ; next, if extensive, a circle. Next, perhaps, a segment 
in form of a halt- moon, or the larger segment of an oval. But 
hearts, diamonds, triangles, or squares, if small, seldom please. 
A simple parallelogram, divided into beds running lengthwise, 
or the larger segment of an oval, with beds running parallel to 
its outer margin, will always please." Neill concurs in this 
opinion. 

6089. The author of Hints on the Formation of Gardens, &c. 
says, " a symmetrical form is best adapted to such parterres as 
are small and may be comprehended in one view ; and an irregular shape to'such as are of a considerable 
size, and contain trees, shrubs, statues, vases, seats, and buildings." 

6090. Boundary fence, or screen. Parterres on a small scale may be enclosed by an 
evergreen hedge of holly, box, laurel, privet, juniper, laurustinus, or Irish whin ( Ulex 
europcsus, var. a.) ; but irregular figures, especially if of some extent, can only be sur- 
rounded by a shrubbery, such as we have already hinted at (6082.) as forming a proper 
shelter for flower-gardens. 

6091. Abercrombie says, " for the enclosure, a wall or close paling is, on two accounts, to be preferred 
on the north side ; both to serve as a screen, and to afford a warm internal face for training rare trees. 
When one of those is not adopted, recourse may be had to a fence of white thorn and holly," &c. {PracL 
Gard. 339.) 

6092. Rustic fences formed of shoots of the oak, hazel, or larch, may often be intro- 
duced with good effect both as interior and surroxmding barriers, {jig. 542. ) 









I 




it 


I 


■11 








k 
















Jyffi 



6093. Laying out the area. This is the most difficult part of the lousiness, and is not 
to be excelled in without a considerable degree of taste and experience. Jn laying out 



Book II. FORMATION OF THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 793^ 



the area of the kitchen-garden, its destination being utility, affords in all cases a safe 
and fixed guide ; but the flower-garden is a matter of fancy and taste, and where these 
are wavering and unsettled, the work will be found to go on at random. As flower- 
gardens are objects of pleasure, that principle which must serve as a guide in laying them 
out, must be taste. Now, in flower-gardens, as in other objects, there are different kinds 
of tastes ; these embodied are called styles or characters ; and the great art of the designer 
is, having fixed on a style, to follow it out unmixed with other styles, or with any de- 
viation which would interfere with the kind of taste or impression which that style is cal- 
culated to produce. Style, therefore, is the leading principle in laying out flower-gardens, 
as utility is in laying out the culinary-garden. As subjects of fancy and taste, the styles 
of flower-gardens are various. The modern style is a collection of irregular groups and 
masses, placed about the house as a medium, uniting it with the open lawn. The ancient 
geometric style, in place of irregular groups, employed symmetrical forms ; in France, 
adding statues and fountains ; in Holland, cut trees and grassy slopes ; and in Italy, 
stone walls, walled terraces, and flights of steps. In some situations, these characteristics 
of parterres may with propriety be added to, or used instead of the modern sort, especially 
in flat situations, such as are enclosed by high walls in towns, or where the principal 
building or object is in a style of architecture which will not render these appendages 
incongruous. There are other characters of gardens, such as Chinese, which are not 
widely different from the modern ; the Indian, which consists chiefly of walks under 
shade, in squares of grass, &c. ; the Turkish, which abounds in shady retreats, boudoirs 
of roses and aromatic herbs ; and the Spanish, which is distinguished by trellis- work and 
fountains : but these gardens are not generally adapted to this climate, though from con- 
templating and selecting what is beautiful or suitable in each, a style of decoration for 
the immediate vicinity of mansions might be composed, greatly preferable to any thing 
now in use. 

6094. Abercrombie, Nicol, and most practical gardeners, seem not to understand the subject of style, 
and their rules amount to little more than that of subdividing the area by paths in different directions. 
The former author says, " If a piece of ground be set apart for the cultivation of flowers, in what style 
should it be laid out? This may vary with the quantity of surface, and the object of the cultivator. In 
the first place, carry a border round the garden, nowhere narrower than three or four feet, unless it may 
be proper to contract its breadth under the windows of the house ; or unless there be a green hedge, 
on any side, rooted in the level of the garden, which might be expected either to draw the earth, or 
to encroach on the small plants, in which case flowering shrubs in little slips of mould would do better 
than dwarf-stemmed flowers. In contact with the surrounding border, may be either a grass-plot or a 
gravel- walk. The latter is most convenient for approach at all seasons. If the ground be at all dilated, 
handsome walks, crossing or leading to the centre, will be also requisite : let the principal walks be five 
or six feet in breadth. The interior of the garden is usually laid out in oblong beds, three or four feet 
wide, with intervening alleys, two feet wide, or from that down to twelve inches, when it is intended to 
abstract as little space as possible from the cultivation of the flowers ; or, the same end may be obtained 
by circular or oval beds, with smaller compartments between, of such a form as will leave the alleys of 
one regular width." (Praet. Gard. 340.) 

6( 95. According to Nicol, the laying out of flower-gardens is a " matter very much of fancy. Too 
many j^ravelled alleys offend the eye, especially if they be much twisted, or run across ; as it comprehends 
the whole at once. Their breadths should be proportioned to that of the beds ; nor should they be much 

544 




794 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



I'art III. 



sunk ; seldom more than an inch ; otherwise they have a bad effect, and look rather like furrows than 
alleys. They may be edged with box, with daises, with violets, gentianella, or thrift, according to fancy. 
But the edging, whatever it be, should be kept low, thin, and neat. It should seldom be allowed to rise 
two inches high, or spread two inches wide. A linear box-edging always pleases, if kept quite close and 
connected." {Kal. 458.) 

6096. The author of the Florisfs Manual, though she confines her directions to one style, has much 
more correct ideas on the subject than our practical authors. " It is more difficult," she saj's, " than may 
at first appear, to plan, even upon a small scale, such a piece of ground, nor, perhaps, would any but an 
experienced scientific eye be aware of the difficulties to be encountered in the disposal of a few shaped bor- 
ders interspersed with turf ; the nicety consists in arranging the difi^erent parts so as to form a connected 
glow of color, to effect which it will be necessary to place the borders in such a manner that when viewed 
from the windows of the house, or from the principal entrance into the garden, one boi-der shall not inter, 
cept the beauties of another, nor in avoiding that error, produce one still greater, that of vacancies be- 
twixt the borders forming small avenues, by which the whole is separated into broken parts, and the ge- 
neral efFect lost. Another point to be attended to, is the just proportion of green turf, which, without 
nice observation, will be too mucli or too little for the color with which it is blended ; and, lastly, the 
breadth of the flower-borders should not be greater than what will jilace the roots within reach of the 
gardener's arm without the necessity of treading upon the soil, the mark of footsteps being a deformity 
wherever it appears amongst flowers." {Flor. Man. 13.) 

6097. The materials which form the surface of flower-gardens {figs. 543, 544.) are gravel (a), turf {b), and 
dug borders (c), patches (rf), or compartments"(£'), and water (/) ; but a variety of other objects and mate- 
rials may be introduced as receptacles for plants, or on the surfaces of walks; as grotesque roots, rocks, 
flints, spar, shells, scoriae in conglomerated lumps, 545 

sand and gravel of different colors ; besides works of ._. 

art introduced as decorations, or tonsile perform- 

ances, when the old French style {fig. 545.) is j^^>J^^_£'J'^^^ 

6098. Rock-works. The author of the Florist's p^^^E^^^^^l 
Manual observes, on this subject, that " frag- ^m=s'='= = =V^^s 
ments of stone may be made use of, planted Fiigs^ ^ "-=-=■" 
with such roots as flourish among rocks, and to =^^=g_i = - — 
which it might not be difficult to give a natural aji- p ^ — ' J=M 
pearance, so far as by bringing forward to the view M #==^^^=^^^^ 
the utility of these stones in the culture of the vege- '^^^ -^^^^^^a 
tables growing thereon. The present fashion of in- M ==== ^ -T^^p^ 
troducing into flower-gardens this kind of rock-work ^ == ^rf^ cj--^^ 
requires the hand of taste to assimilate it to our flower- M=^^^ ^S^^^ 
borders, the massive fabric of the rock being liable ij | =^^= i 
to render the lighter assemblage of the borders di. M ^ "g . -T" 
minutive and meagre: on this point, caution only M=^^^gM 
can be given, the execution must be left to the ele- 
gant eye of taste, which, tlius warned, will quickly 
perceive such deformity. I must venture to disap- 
prove the extended manner in which this vegetable 
rock-work is sometimes introduced, not having been : ^ .f=^ "^ 
able to reconcile my eye, even in gardens planned 
and cultivated with evei-y advantage which elegant ll' ^r=- £ ^^^ 
ingenuity can give them, to the unnatural appear- m f . 
ance of artificial crags of rock and other stones in- 
terspersed with delicate plants, to the culture of fi 
which the fertile and sheltered border is evidently ^ l^s ^ ~ 
necessary, being decided that nothing of the kind m ^^5=. ^ 
should be admitted into the simi)le parterre that is 
not manifestly of use to the growtli of some of the i| £r^L^^.. j=-^=— 
species therein exhibited. In pleasure-grounds or ^^^=5 "^s"^ ^■"^'l 
flower-gardens on an extensive scale, where we meet ^ ^ rfl 
with fountains and statuary, the greater kinds of ve- s^^^r^ I g = 
getable rock-work might probably be well intro- if ^^^^^"^^S 
duced; but to such a magnificent displav of art I feel =^^^=g ? 
my taste and knowledge whofiy incompe'tent." {Flor. jss = =f 
Man. 15.) "Where neither expense nor trouble," ^ = 
the same author adds, " oppose their prohibitory IS r- — tF=4 i ^==.»=^ \ 
barrier, many of the vegetable tribe may be cultivated to greater perfection, if we appropriate different gar- 
dens to the growth of different species, as, although it is essential to the completion of our garden to intro- 
duce, on account of their scent and beauty, some of tlie more hardy species of the flowers termed annuals, 
in that situation room cannot be afionSed them sufiicient to their production in that full luxuriancy which 
they will exhibit when not c.>-owded and oversiiadowed by herbaceous vegetables ; and hence becomes de- 
sirable that which maybe called the annual flower-garden, into which no other kind of flower is admitted 
besides that fugacious order, and under which is contained so great a variety of beauty and elegance, as one 
well calculated to form a garden, vying in brilliancy with the finest collection of hardy perennials. Also, 
tne plants comprised under the bulbous division of vegetables, although equally essential to the perfection 
ot the mingled flower-garden, lose much of their peculiar beauty when not cultivated by themselves, and 
wiU well repay the trouble of an assiduous care to give to each .species the soil and aspect best suited to its 
nature. Iwo kinds of garden may be formed from the extensive and beautiful variety of bulbous-rooted 
flowers ; the first, wherein they should be planted in distinct compartments, each kind having a border ap- 
propriated to Itself, thus forming, in the Eastern taste, not only the 'garden of hyacinths,' but a garden of 
each species of bulb Avhich is capable of being brought to perfection without the fostering shelter of a con- 
servatory. The second bulbo.us garden might be formed from a collection of the almost infinite variety of 
this lovely tribe, the intermixture of which might produce the most beautiful eflfect, and a succession of 
bloom to continue throughout the early months of summer. A similar extension of pleasure might be 
derived from a similar division of all kinds of flowers, and here the taste for borders planted with distinct 
tribes may be properly exercised, and, as most of the kinds of bulbs best suited to this disposition have 
hnished their bloom before the usual time at which annuals disclose their beauties, the annual and the 
bulbous gardens might be so united, that, at the period when the bloom of the latter has disappeared, the 
opening buds of the former might supply its place, and continue the gaiety of the borders." 

6099. The green-house or conservatory is generalli/ placed in the flower-garden, provided 
these structures are not appended to the liouse. In laying out the area, a fit situation 
must be allotted for this department of floriculture, and the principles of guidance laid 
down in treating of the situation of the culinary hot-houses (2475.) require here also to 
be applied. Some recommended the distribution of the botanic hot-houses throughout 




Book II. FORMATION OF THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



795 



the flower-garden or pleasure-ground ; but we are decidedly of opinion, that much the best 
effect is produced when they are connected together in one scene. By the other mode they 
may form objects agreeable enough to look at externally ; but to derive the full effect of 
their internal beauties, 
it appears to us that 
they must be examin- 
ed in succession and 
without interruption. 
No arrangement can 
be better, in our opi- 
nion, than to connect 
the whole of the bo- 
tanic hot-houses with 
the mansion as an in- 
troductory scene to the 
flower-garden. This 
was Repton's favorite 
mode, of which, among 
other examples, he has 
left that of Ashridge 
Park. 546.) Here, 
to the original lawn 
and pleasui-e-ground 
(1), he made an 
addition in the same 



style (2;,- uniting by 
walks the following 

interesting scenes. 'I'he botanic stoves and paved terrace (S) ; broad-sanctuaiy and holy- 
well (4) ; pomarium and winter walk (5) ; the monk's garden (6) ; arboretum of exotic 
trees (7) ; magnolia and American garden (8) ; embroidered parterre (9) ; grotto 
and garden for rock-plants (10) ; cabinet de verdure {II); mount garden (12) ; rosa- 
rium and fountain (13) ; connecting and interior walks (14) ; open terrace and exterior 
walks (15). 

6100. In particular situations, as where the prospect and space are both confined, the plant hot-houses 
may embrace the house or the courtryard on two or more sides. In a case of this kind, which occurred in 
our practice {fig. 547.), a large conservatory (a) and aquarium (fi) were connected with the library (A) : 

547 






70 So 50 'CO Pcet. 



from the conservatory, a green-house (c) led to an aviary {d), and this was connected with a house for 
standard peach-trees, with vines as climbers {g), by two plant-stoves {e and/). The furnaces were placed 
in the court-yard (/), and attended from the stable-yard {h), without interfering with the house («), or the 
flower-garden {in). The elevation of such a range {fig. 548.) does not pretend to architectural or pictu- 
resque beauty ; but it is such as is best suited for the culture of plants ; and from the peculiarity of the 
situation it is seen from no point beyond the limits of a very moderate-sized flower-garden. 

6101. According to Neill, a green-house, conservatory, aiid stove should form prominent objects in the 
different parts of the flower-garden. The author of the Florist's Manual recommends a spring-conser- 
vatory, annexed to the house, consisting of borders sheltered by glass, and heated only to the degree that 
will produce a temperature, under which all the flowers that would naturally bloom betwixt the months 
of February and May might be collected, and thence be enabled to expand their beauties with vigor. 
{Flor. Man. o. gS.'* 



796 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt III. 




6102. According to Xicol, " the most proper situation for the green-house and conservatory, in an exten- 
sive and well laid out place, is certainly in the shrubbery or flower-garden ; and not, as the^- \re very 
generally to be found, in the kitchen-garden, combined with the forcing-houses. In smaller places, no 
doubt, they must be situated so as to suit other conveniences ; and we often find them connected with the 
dwelling-house. In this latter way they may be very convenient, especially in the winter season, and may 
answer for keeping many of the hardy kinds of exotics ; but it is seldom they can be so placed and con- 
structed, on account of their connection with the building, as to suit the cultu:'3 of the finer sorts, and 
bring them to a flowering state. Such may rather be termed green-rooms, as be';ng connected with the 
house." {Kal. 539.) 

6103 Abercrombie says, " A green-house may be made a very ornamental object as a structure ; its 
situation is, therefore, usually in a conspicuous part of the pieasure-grcTund, contiguous to the family resi- 
dence. The front of the building should stand directly to the south, and the ends have an open aspect to 
the east and west." [Pract. Gard, 5o].) 

6104. Flower -nursery, and pits for forcing flowers. To every complete flower-garden 
and shrubber}', a piece of ground should be set apart in a convenient and concealed situ- 
ation, as a reserve-ground, or nursery of flow^ering plants and shrubs. The situation 
should, if practicable, be behind and near to the range of hot-houses, and it may at tlie 
same time include the pits for forcing flowers, and the hot-bed department of the 
flower-garden. Here plants may be originated from seed, cuttings, pipings, and a pro- 
per stock kept up, partly in beds and partly in pots, for more easy removal, to supply 
blanks, and in the more select scenes, to replace such as have done flowering. No 
flower-garden can be kept in complete order without a nursery of this description ; nor could 
the management of some sorts of florists' flowers, as the auricula, during the latter part 
of summer and winter, the carnation, &c. be well carried on without it. Here they may 
be grown, and, w^hen in bloom, exhibited in proper stages in the main garden. 

6105. Walks. In most styles of parterres these are formed of gravel ; but in the mo- 
dem sort {fig. 549.), which consist of turf, varied by wavy dug beds (1 and 2), and 
surrounded by shrubberj'^, they 549 

are sometimes dispensed M'ith. 
Such a flower-garden is recom- 
mended by the author of the Flor- 
ist's Manual, as suitable for the 
*' midst of pleasure-ground," and 
the beds " peculiarly adapted to 
the advantageous exhibition of 
flowers." The general length of 
the beds she recommends to be 
from twentj'-three to t^venty-five 
feet, and the width in the broad- 
est part, about four feet ; the 
grass to be five or six feet wide 
between tlie beds, that it may be 
conveniently mown and rolled ; 
all the beds a good deal raised, 
and a tree (3) placed at the en- 
trance (4) of light and rather 
pendulous foliage, and pruned to 
form a high stem. " If the space of grass between the borders appear too great, it may 
be lessened by baskets of ever-blowing roses, carnations, or any other plants ; and these 
baskets may be formed by circular beds, sun-ounded by cast-iron, made to resemble the 
•open edges of a basket, and painted of a very dark-green color." (p. 6.) 

6106. In extensive and irregular parterres, one gravel-walk, accompanied by broad margins of turf, to 
serve as walks by such as prefer that material, should be so contrived as to form a tour for the display of 
the whole garden. ' There should also be other secondary interesting walks of the same width, of gravel 
and smaller walks for displacing particular details. The main walk, however, ought to be easily dis- 
tinguishable from the others by its broad margins of fine turf In general the gravel is of uniform 
breadth throughout the whole length of the walk ; but in that sort of French parterres which they 
call parterres of embroidery {fig. 550.), the breadth of the gravelled part (a) varies like that of the turf. 
Such figures, when correctly executed, carefully planted, judiciously intermixed with basket-work, 
shells, party-colored gravels, &c. and kept in perfect order, are highly ornamental ; but very few 
gardeners enter into the spirit of this department of their art. Tlie French and Dutch have long 
greatly excelled us in the formation of small gardens, and the display of flowers ; and whoever wishes 




Book II. PLANTING THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



797 



Antwerp, Brussels, 
550 



and Paris i and consult 



to succeed in this department ought to visit Amsterdam 
the old French works of Mallet, Boyceau, 
liC Blond, &c. 

6107. Edgings. In parterres where 
turf is not used as a ground or basis 
out of which to cut the beds and walks, 
the gravel of the latter is disparted from 
the dug ground of the former by edg- 
ings or rows of low-growing plants, as 
in the kitchen-garden. Various plants 
have been used for this purpose ; but, 
as Neill observes, the best for extensive 
use is the dwarfish Dutch box, kept low 
and free from blanks. Abercrombie 
says, " Thrift is the neatest small ever- 
green next to box. In other parts, the 
daisy, pink, London-pride, primrose, 
violet, and periwinkle, may be employ- 
ed as edgings. The strawberry, with the 
runners cut in close during summer, 
will also have a good effect ; the wood- 
strawberry is suitable under the spread- 
ing shade of trees. Lastly, the limits 
between the gravel-walks and the dug- 
work may sometimes be marked by 
running verges of grass kept close and 
neat. Whatever edgings are employed, 
they should be formed previous to lay- 
ing the gravel." 

6108. Basket-edgings. Small groups' 
near the eye, and whether on grass or ; 
gravel, may be very neatly enclosed by ' 

a worked fence of basket-willows from _ 

six inches to a foot high. These wicker-work frames may be used with or without ver- 
dant edgings ; they give a finished and enriched appearance to highly polished scenery ; 
enhance the value of what is within, and help to keep off small dogs, children, &c. 

, ';! -(.^ Abercrombie scarcely approves of them. He 

^'-^ ■'■ ■■ \ says, " Where round or oval parterres stand 

on a ground of lawn, it is a prevailing fashion 
to surround them with what are termed baskets. 
These are commonly made either of wood or 
cast-iron ; those of the latter material of course 
are durable ; and the others, if painted, and 
removed under shelter in winter, will last ten 
or twelve years. Novelty is all attractive ; and 
when men have walked as far as they can in the 
path of nature for princijiles of embellishment, 
for the sake of novelty they will walk back 
again. A bed of , flowers and shrubs within a 
basket looks very much like a large bouquet. 
What is artificial, should have some use. Where 
cattle are to be kept off, a basket is service- 
able." {Pr. Card. 454.) 

61G9. To assist in the invention of figures for flovjer- 
gardens, the simple but ingenious contrivance {fig. 551.) 
invented by Professor Bradley may be made use of. It 
consistr of two plates of looking-glass, of any convenient 
size, furnished with wooden backs, so as to admit of their 
being hinged {a). One part of a circular figure being then drawn on paper {b, c), the frames are to be 
opened the widtli of the figure {b,c, d), and placed on edge so as to include it, when the form will then 
be so multiplied by the looking-glass as to complete the circle. The kaleidoscope may also be resorted 
to, of which this instrument of Bradley's is supposed to be the origin or prototype. 





Chap, II. 

Of Planting the Flower-garden. 

6110. The manner of planting tlie herbaceous plants and shrubs in a flower-garden de- 
pends jointly on tlie style and extent of the scene. With a view to planting, they may be 



798 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



divided into three classes, which classes are independently altogether of the style in which 
they are laid out. The first class is the general or mingled Jlower- garden, in which is dis- 
played a mixture of flowers with or without flowering-shrubs according to its size. Th« 
object in this class is to mix the plants, as that every part of the garden may present a gay 
assemblage of flowers of different colors during the whole season. The second class is the 
select Jlower- garden, in which the object is limited to the cultivation of particular kinds of 
plants ; as, florists' flowers, American plants, annuals, bulbs, &c. Sometimes two or more 
classes are included in one garden, as bulbs and annuals ; but, in general, the best effect 
is produced by limiting the object to one class only The third class is the changeable 
Jloicer garden, in which all the plants are kept in pots, and reared in a flower -nursery or 
reserve-ground. As soon as they begin to flower, they are plunged in the borders of tlie 
flower-garden, and, whenever they show symptoms of decay, removed, to be replaced by 
others from the same source. This is obviously the most complete mode of any for a dis- 
play of flowers, as the beauties of bodi the general and particular gardens may be combined 
without presenting blanks, or losing the fine effect of assemblages of varieties of the same 
species ; as of hyacinth, pink, dahlia, chrysanthemum, &c. The fourth class is the botanic 
Jloicer-garden, in which the plants are arranged with reference to botanical study, or at 
least not in any way that has for its main object a rich display of blossoms. On each of 
these gardens, or manners of arranging plants grown for their beauty or curiosity, we shall 
offer some remarks. 

6111. The mingled Jlower-garden, or border, is by far the most common; it is what 
eveiy gardener attempts at in planting his flower-borders, and the aim of the greater num- 
ber of such as fonn parterres, or separate scenes for the culture of flowers, seldom goes 
further. The object here is to display a gay assemblage of colors during the season of 
flowers, without much regard to variety of form or diversity of character in these flowers, 
or tlie plants that produce them. The great art, therefore, in this kind of flower-border, 
is to employ such plants as produce large heads, or masses of flowers ; to plant an equal 
number of eveiy color, and such a variety in regard to time of flowering as may afi'ord 
some of every color in flower from February to October. This object does not require a 
great variety so much as a judicious selection ; for, supposing the number four to include 
all the colors of flowers, and one sort to continue in bloom a month, then for nine months 
of the year, viz. from February to October inclusive, only thirty-six sorts will be requi- 
site to commence, as it were, the pattern of the border. I^Iuch more may be effected by 
a few sorts than by a great number, for the greater the number of sorts introduced in the 
pattern above thirty-six, supposing it correct that one sort continues in bloom a month, 
the greater the blank spaces that must remain betw een the plants in bloom. A moderate 
number of select sorts, or of what are called border-flowers, and that number selected 
equally from the different colors, and the sorts in bloom in the nine months of blooming 
season, is what demands the exclusive attention of whoever would plant a mingled bor- 
der, or flower-garden. It has been frequently observed that flower-gardens have been on 
the decline for the last half century ; and the cause of this appears to have been the influx 
of new plants during that period, by which gardeners have been induced without due con- 
sideration to be more solicitous about rarity and variety, than well disposed colors and 
quantity. The same error, and from the same cause, has prevailed, during the above pe- 
riod, in the planting of shrubberies and tree-plantations. 

6112. Abcrcrombie, Nicol, and other practical gardeners, seem to have no distinct ideas on the subject of 
arranging flowers in flower-gardens ; but the authors of Hints on laying out Gardens, and of the Florist's 
Manual, have viewed the subject in its proper light. Neill also has some judicious observations on the sub- 
ject. He says, " the plants are arranged in mingled flower-borders, partly according to their size, and 
partly according to color. The tallest are planted in the back part, those of middling size occupy the centre, 
and those of humble growth are placed in front. The beauty of a flower-border, when in bloom, depends 
very much on the tasteful disposition of the plants in regard to color. By intermingling plants which 
flower in succession, the beauty of the border may be prolonged for some weeks. In a botanic-garden the 
same plant cannot with propriety be repeated in the same border ; but in the common flower-garden a 
plant, if deemed ornamental, may be often repeated with the best effect ; nothing can be finer, for example, 
than to see many plants of double scarlet Ij-chnis, double sweet-william, or double purple jacobea." {Ed. 
Encyc. art. Hort.) 

6113. 7'Acrtz<^/?o?-o/"iifi«i'5, &c. remarks " that the beauty of parterres depends more on the materials 
with which they are planted than on their form ; and that the prevailing error consists in crowding them 
with all sorts of trees and plants at random, or filling them entirely with rare species, which will ever 
want one principal source of beauty — health." In the P/om\'"s Kanual it is observed, that " the 
fashionable novice, who has stored her borders from the catalogue of some celebrated name with variety 
of rare species ; who has procured innumerable rose-trees, chiefly consisting of old and common sorts, 
brought into notice by new nomenclature; who has set apart a portion of ground for American plants, 
and duly placed them in bog soil, with their names painted on large-headed pegs, becomes disappointed 
when, instead of the brilliant glow of her more humble neighbor's parterre, she finds her own distin- 
guished only by paucity of color, and fruitless expenditure. Variety of species, bog borders, and largely 
lettered pegs, are all good in their way, but they will not produce a gay flower-garden ; and the simple 
cause of the general failure in this particular is the prevalent solicitude for rarity and variety, in prefer- 
ence to well blended quantity ; as, without the frequent repetition of the same plant, it will be in vain to 
attempt a brilliant flower-garden, and, as in the judicious mixture of every common color, the art of 
procuring it consists. Hence, the foundation thus laid, the solicitude of those who wish to com- 
.plete the superstructure must not be for rare species, but for new color, so that the commonest primula 
which presents a fresh shade of red, blue, yellow, &c. ought to be esteemed more valuable than the most 
rare American plant which does not bring a similar advantage. In the formation of that assemblage of 



Book II. PLANTING THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



799 



flowers, which may be distinguished by the term of * The Mingled Flower Garden,' it is essential that 
the separate parts should, in thi'ir appearance, constitute a whole ; and this appearance is not incom. 
patibla with any form into which the ground may be thrown, if attention be given to the manner of 
planting. In some gardens this appearance of a whole is entirely destroyed by the injudicious taste of 
setting apart distinct bordt-rs for pmks, hepaticas, primulas, or any other" favorite kinds of flowers; also 
for difFerent species of bulbs, as anemones, ranunculuses, hyacinths, &c. ; these distinct borders, although 
beautiful in themselves, break that whole which should always be presented to the eye by the mingled 
flower-garden, as single beds, containing one species only, form a blank before that species produces its 
flowers, and a mass of decaying leaves wiien the glow of their petals is no more. The reverse of this 
mo ie of planting is essential to the perfection of ihe mingled flower-garden, in each border of which 
there siiould l)e, at least, two of every species ; but the pi'ecise number must be regulated by the force of 
color displayed by the plant, and tiie size and the relative position of the borders. It will be only neces- 
sary to observe that, to whatever view the garden presents itself, the eye should not be checked by the 
failure, in any part of it, of the prevalent colors of the season." (p. 5.) 

'6114 Hogg, who maybe considered an unprejudiced observer of the diflTerent tastes in disposing of 
flowers, ha.s'the following remarks : " We are apt to ridicule the Dutchman, as well as the imitators of 
him here at home, who divide their gardens into small beds, or compartments, planting each with sepa- 
rate and distinct flowers : we ridicule the plan, because it exiiibits too great a sameness and formality; 
like unto the nosegay that is composed of one sort of flowers only, however sweet and beautiful they may 
be, they lose the power to please, because they want var.ety. It must undoubtedly be acknowledged, 
that a parterre, no matter in what form, whether circular or square, elliptical or oblong, where all the 
shrubs, plants, and flowers in it, like the flowers of a tastefully arranged bouq.:et, are variously disposed 
in neat and regulated order, according to their height and color, is a delightful spectacle, and worthy of 
general imitation. Yet still in some particular cases I am disposed to copy the Dutchman, and I would 
have my bed of hyacinths distinct, my tulips distinct, my anemonies, my ranunculuses, my pinks, my 
carnations distinct," and even my beds of hollyhocks, double blue violets, and dwarf-l.irkspurs' distinct, to 
say nothing ot hedge-rows of different sorts of roses lnciei)t'ndent of the less trouble you have in cul- 
tivating them when kept separate, you have beauty in masses, and you iiave likewise their fragrance 
and perfume so concentrated, that they are not lost in air, but powerfully inhaled when you approach 
them. Mrs. Siddons, the celebrated tragic actress, is a great admirer of this mode of planting, and fond 
of contemplating this ' beauty in masses.' She adopted this style of gardening at her late residence on the 
Harrow-road. Her favoriie flower was the viola amosna-, the common purple heart's-ease, and this she 
set with unsparing profusion all around her garden. Her garden was remarkable in another respect, and 
migh', with great propriety be styled a garden of evergreens, which, together with a few deciduous 
shrubs, were of the most sombre, sable, and gloomy cast, such as box-trees, fir, privet, phillyrea, arbor 
vitae, holly, cypress, the red cedar, laurel, Irish ivy, bay-tree, arbutus, spurge-laurel, &c. The only part 
of the year in which it could be viewed with any degree of satisfaction was the winter, as giving rise to a 
- pleasing association of ideas in beholding these retain their green verdure and clothing, at a time when 
the rest of the surrounding trees were stript naked and bare." {Tr. on Flowers, 69.) 

6115 To give an example of the manner of planting a bed or border in the mingled style, suppose the 
various colors of flowers-to be all included under the four common colors, red, white, blue, and yellow j 
that for the time of blowing, we allow February and March as one division, March and April as a second. 
May and June as a third, July as a fourth, August as a fifth, and September and October as the sixth and 
last. Then suppose the border, or bed admits of four rows in witlth ; the lowest plants to be placed next the 
■walk, or the eye of the spectator, and the tallest at the back in regular gradation. Mark out the border 
in rows length-ways and across, so as each plant may stand in the angle of a square, whose side is, say 
eighteen inches. Then begin at the first row {fig. 552. a), and fix on the order in which the plants are to 
be placed as respects their time of flowering. To distrioute the plants in flower at one time as equally as 
possible over the border, the order of 1, 6, 3, 5, 2, 4, will, it is believed, be found the best. Next, fix as 
to the order of colors ; and here it is of little consequence what order is fixed on, provided that order be 
maintained throughout the border : say that we adopt the order of red white, blue, and yellow ; then 
the first row to be of the lowest plants will stand thus : h: Gw. 3b 5jj. 2r. iiv. : that is, a red flower to 
come into bloom in February and March ; next to it, a white flower to come into bloom in September and 
October ; next, a blue flower to come into bloom in May and June ; then a yellow flower to come into 
bloom in August ; then a red flower to come into bloom in April and May ; and lastly, a white flower to 
come into bloom in July. The second, third, and fourth rows, (/;, c, d) are to be arranged in the same 
way, observing, however, not begin with the same month and color for the sake of more effectually 
mingling the times of flowering and color of the flowers. Where roses or other shrubs are to be intro- 
duced, a plant must be omitted, which, however, should not be allowed to derange the order of the rest, 

552 

a 1>- 6iv 36 by 2i- itv 16 By 3r bw "ib 4y Ir 6iv 36 5^ 2r 4»» Ir 6n/ 3ft 

b Ir 6w 36 5y 2r 4n> 16 6y 3i- 5tv 26 4y Ir 6tv 36 5^ 2r 4w 16 Gy 3r 5tv 2A 

c Ir 6rv 36 5y 2r 4m 16 6y 3r 5m 26 iy Ir 6w 36 5y Ir \m 16 6i/ 3r 5;i; 26 iy \r 

d Ir 6w 36 5y 2r in' 16 6^ 3r 5iv 26 4y Ir 6m 36 5y 2r 4w 16 6y 3r 5iv 26 iy Ir Gtu 36 

e Ir 6w 36 by 2r 4rv 16 6y 3r 5w 36 4y Ir 6w 36 by 2r 4ru 16 6j/ 3r 5rv 24 4y 

J Ir 6n» 36 by Ir 4m 16 6^ 3r bm 26 4y Ir 6iu 36 by 2r 4rv 16 Gy 3r 5)» 

g Ir Gm 36 by 2r 4rtJ 16 6,v 3i- bru 26 4y Ir Gw 36 by 2r 4w 16 Gy 

h Ir 6ni 36 by 2r 4tv 16 Gy 3r brv 26 4y Ir Gw 36 by 2r 4w 

6116. If a double border, with a walk on each side {fig. 552. atok) a bed-group, or compartment on a 
lawn, to be viewed on aU sides, is to be planted, then it is only necessary to fix on the number of rows, 
and to keep the lowest plants in the margin and the tallest in the centre, adhering in the rows, to the 
order of time, and of colors given above, or to any order that may be fixed on, and inserting shrubs in 
lieu of plants where it may be deemed advisable. 

6117. Flowers in borders should alwat/s be planted in rows, or in some regular form, and that this ap. 
pearance should be assiduously kept up bv trimming off all irregular side-shoots and straggHng stalks, 
and reducing the bulk of plants which grow too fast. Every approach to irregularity and a wild, con- 
fused, crowded, or natural-like appearance, hiust be avoided in gardens avowedly artificial. 

6118. With four colors, four sixes, and six times of coming into flower, a mingled border may be com- 
menced with ninety-six sorts ; and the pattern may be repeated like the border of any work of art ad in- 
finitum; but it is also evident, that it may include any number of species, provided these have the de- 
sired requisites of height, color, and time of flowering ; the second and every successive repetition of the 
pattern being made up of difFerent, and not before-introduced species, but still of the heights, colors, and 
time-.< of flowering required for the first example of the pattern. The safest way, however, as we hav« 



800 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



already observed, is to adopt but a moderate number of species, and those of the showy sorts that have 
numerous varieties, and are of hardy vigorous growth. A suitable list for this purpose is given in the 
floricultural catalogue, under the head of Border Flowers, and the reader may increase it at pleasure 
from the Prodromus of Page. 

6119. The select Jlower-garden being limited to one kind, or class, of plants, is com- 
paratively simple as far as respects planting. It may be devoted to florists' flowers, as 
the hyacinth, tulip, pink, auricula, &c. ; to select flowers, as the dahlia, paeony, chry- 
santhemum, &c. ; to annuals, hardy, half hardy, and tender ; to American or bog-earth 
shrubs and plants ; to any one natural order, as the bulbous-rooted tribe ; or to spring, 
summer, or autumn flowers, &c. 

6120. Florists' flowers axid. select flowers are planted in beds or compartments of carefully prepared soil, 
and the arrangement in the beds is generally conducted on the principle of mixing the colors and shades of 
color as much as possible. As the plants being of the same species generally grow of the same height, 
and come into flower at the same time, no particular attention is requisite in these respects. (See Hya- 
cinth and Auricula, in the catalogue.) 

6121. A parterre of annuals, as the different sorts generally come into flower about the same time, may 
either be arranged according to their colors and heights jointly ; or, as there are numerous varieties of 
some sorts, as of larkspur, jhrysanthemum, lupin, &c., each species with its varieties may be sown in 
groups or beds, by itself ; and the general principle by which to determ.ine the sorts which are to join 
each other, may either be color and height, or natural character. If the latter, then the table exhibiting 
the genera, arranged according to the Jussieuean classification (589.), will be found a convenient guide. 

6122. An American garden combines shrubs and even low trees. These may be arranged in the mixed 
method, according to color, height, and time of flowering, the trees and shrubs alone, and the plants 
alone, or both combined : but the most suitable way is to follow the natural orders, attending, at the 
same time, to keep the higher sorts farthest from the walk or side from which the group or border is to 
be chiefly viewed. This arrangement has an excellent effect in an American shrubbery, where the low 
species of heaths and other bog under-shrubs which are introduced, supply the place of herbaceous 
plants. 

6123. A garden exclusively devoted to bulbous-rooted flowisrs, admits of being very jwrfectly arranged 
after the natural method. No orders run into other so naturally as, and none present a more harmonious 
assemblage both of foliage and flowers than, the Phanerogameae. (589.) The planting of such a garden 
would require very little nicety beyond introducing the proper genera and species in succession, taking 
care to keep the taller bulbs, as lilium, fritillaria, &c. in the interior of the groups or beds. 

6124. Gardens of spring, summer, or autumn flowers may be planted on any of the principles that have 
been mentioned. 

6125. The changeable flower-garden. The essential principle of this garden consists in the power of 
changing its productions at pleasure, so that whenever any plant, or group of plants, begin to decay, they 
can be removed and their places supplied by others coming into bloom. To admit of this a large reserve- 
nursery is requisite, in which the plants must be kept in pots, and removed and plunged in the borders as 
wanted. The Chinese, Sir W. Chambers informs us {Dissert, on Orient. Gard. 96.), excel in this mode of 
gardening ; and we have been informed by a traveller who has resided some time at Canton, that he has 
known a mandarin (or noble) have the whole furniture and style of his parterre changed in a single 
night, so as next morning to present not only a different description of flowers, shrubs, and dwarf trees, 
but a different arrangement of the beds and compartments. Something of the same kind is practised in 
the gardens of the Tuilleries in Paris ; in some of the Imperial gardens at Petersburg, and in the vice- 
royal gardens at Monza. Gardens of this description admit of a very perfect arrangement of the flowers, 
whether in the mingled manner, in select groups, or according to the natural method. It is only with 
such resources that a flower-gardener can " paint his way," as Sir W. Chambers says the Chinese artists 
do, " not scattering their flowers indiscriminately about their borders, but disposing of them with great 
circumspection along the skirts of the plantations, or other places where flowers are to be introduced. 
They reject all that are of a straggling growth, of harsh colors, and poor foliage, choosing only such as 
are of some duration, grow either large or in clusters, are of beautiful forms, well leaved, and" of tints 
that harmonise with the greens that surround them. They avoid all sudden transitions, both with regard 
to dimension and color, rising gradually from the smallest flowers to the hollyhocks, paonies, sun-flowers, 
carnation-poppies, and others of the boldest growth ; and varying their tints, by easy gradations, from 
white, straw-color, purple, and incarnate, to the deepest blues, and most brilliant crimsons and scarlets. 
They frequently blend several roots together, whose leaves and flowers unite, and compose one rich har- 
monious mass ; such as the white and purple candytuft, larkspurs, and mallows of various colors, double 
poppies, lupins, primroses, pinks, and carnations ; with many more of which the forms and colors accord 
with each other; and the same method they use with flowering shrubs, blending white, red, and varie- 
gated roses together, purple and white lilacs, yellow ^nd white jessamine, altheas of various sorts, and 
as many others as they can with any propriety unite. By these mixtures they increase considerably the 
variety and beauty of their compositions. In their large plantations the flowers generally grow in the 
natural ground ; but in flower-gardens, and all other parts that are highly kept, they are in pots, buried 
in the ground, which, as fast as the bloom goes off", are removed, and others are brought to supply their 
places ; so that there is a constant succession for almost every month in the year ; and the flowers are 
never seen but in the height of their beauty." {Dis. on Orient. Gard. 96.) 

6126. The botanic Jlower-garden being intended to display something of the extent and 
variety of the vegetable kingdom, as well as its resemblances and differences, should 
obviously be arranged according to some system or method of study. In modern times, 
the choice is almost limited to the artificial system of Linnaeus, and the natural method 
of Jussieu, though Adanson has given above fifty-six different methods by which plants 
may be arranged. (Fam. des Plants.) The latter has much the best effect in a garden, 
and corresponds better with culture. The former, though most convenient for the young 
student, yet by bringing plants together that have few or no obvious relations, it destroys 
that harmony which is so gratifying in viewing natural families. Whatever method is 
adopted, the plants may either be placed in regular rows, or each order may be grouped 
apart, and surrounded by turf or gravel. For a private botanic garden, the mode of 
grouping on turf is much the most elegant, and it has this advantage, that as the species 
belonging to the group are increased, it can be enlarged by appropriating a part of the 
turf, and any group containing few species may be filled up with repetitions for effect. 
The groups may be of the most irregular outlines, and those which are to contain trees 
may be raised or lowered in surface, according as the species may be natives of hills or 



EOOK II. 



PLANTING THE FL0\^'T:R-GARDEN. 



801 



vaUeys, and tiie trees and plants so dispersed as that the former shall not concofJ tlie latter, 
nor present a compact lumpish appearance at the edges, or in the outline against the sky. 
Rock-vv-ork may be introduced in groups where there are many alpines to be grown ; 
and bogs, ponds, and springs imitated in others destined for aquatics, c^c. as far as 
consistent with botanical purposes. A gravel-walk may be so contrived as to form a tour 
of all the groups (Jig. 555.), displaying them on bodi sides; in the centre, or in any 
fitting part of the scene, the botanic hot-houses may be placed ; and tlie w liole might be 




surrounded with a sloping phalanx of evergreen plants, shrubs, and trees. The plants in 
such a garden should generally be neatly, but inconspicuously named, or, at all events, 
numbered ; but naming is greatly to be preferred, as saving trouble to the spectator, and 
more inWting to the novice desirous of knowledge. It is hardly necessary to observe that 
the above modes, or others that we have mentioned, of planting a flower-garden, are alike 
applicable to every form or style of laying out the garden or parterre, and that they do 
not interfere with any mode of enclosing or surrounding it, or of edging the walks, 

G127. Decorations. It is usual to employ different objects of art as decorations to 
flower-gardens, and the practice is founded in reason, since 
the works of nature and of art lend force to each other by 
their contrast. "We have, in a former part (1805. to 1846.), 
enumerated the principal garden-decorations. Those more 
especially applicable to the flower-garden are tlie fountain 
in various fonns ; the open and 
covered, or rustic seat (Jig. 555.) ; 
the statue (Jig. 554. ) in all its va- 
rieties of therm, bust, single figure 
and group, and in the various 
materials of stone, metal, or ver- 
dure ; the arbor, and a variety of 
others. Even the apiary and 
aviary, or, at least, here and there 
a beehive, or a cage suspended 
3 F 





80S 



PHACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



from a tree, will form very appropriate ornaments. Sometimes inoffensive birds, as the sea- 
gull, may be introduced to run at large ; gold-fish are very appropriate in the aquarium ; and 
an animal which affords great amusement by its cry and song in the flower-gardens of the 
south of Germany, the tree-frog (liana arborea), would be an acquisition in this country. 
In some families there is a taste for minerals or antiquities j and here, besides larger spe- 
cimens distributed in the garden, a building 
i.fiS' 556.) may be introduced, combining a 
mineral cabinet («), an aviary (6), and the 
botanic hot-houses (c). 

6128. Where the old French style {Jigs. 545. 550.) is 
hnitatcd, a profusion of marble and vegetable sculp- 
tures, verdant arcades, colonnades, arbors, &c. are in 
character ; but in the more simple and modern forms 
{figs. 540, 541. 543..) a few stools, sofa-chairs, a pavilion- 
seat {Jig. 338.), a sun-dial, fountain, some urns, and a 
few good statues, will, in most cases, be sufficient. In 
the distribution of even these few decorations much 
judgment is requisite to avoid exciting ridicule by fall- 
ing into the vapid, the flippant, or some other species of 
deformity. (See Schimmelpenninck on Beauty, &c.) 

6129. Time of planting herbaceous plants. 
This is, in general, autumn and spring ; but 
any perennial plant may be safely removed after it has done flowering or produced seed. 
With respect to biennials and annuals, they may be planted at almost any season befwe 
they have begun to throw up flower-stems. Biennials, however, are generally sown eai-ly 
in autumn in the flower-garden nursery, and transplanted either late in the same season 
or early in the following spring, to where tliey are to flower. Annuals are commonly 
sown in spring, where they are finally to remain. The culture of herbaceous flowers of 
the more valued sorts is exceedingly varied, and will be found under each species or class 
in the Flower-garden Catalogne. For the preparation of the soil and the manner of per- 
forming the operation, see these ai-ticles in (Chap. IV.) Planting the Shrubbeiy. 




Chap. III. 

Of Forming the Shrubbery. 

f)130. By a slwubbery, or shrub-garden, we undei^stand a scene for the display of shrubs 
valued for their beauty or fragrance, combining such trees as are considered chiefly orna- 
mental, and some herbaceous flowers. The form or plan of the modern shrubbery is ge- 
nerally a winding border, or strip of irregular width, accompanied by a walk, near to 
which it commences with the herbaceous plants and lowest shrul)s, and as it falls back, 
the shrubs rise in gradation and terminate in the ornamental trees, also similarly gradu- 
ated. Sometimes a border of shrubbery accompanies the walk on both sides ; at other 
times only on one side, while the other side is, in some cases, a border for culinary vege- 
tables sun-ounding the kitchen-garden, but most generally it is an accompanying breadth 
of turf, varied by occasional groups of trees and plants, or decorations, and with the bor- 
der, forms what is called pleasure-ground. 

6131. The sort of shrubbery formed under the geometric style of gardening {fig. 557.) was more compact ; 
it was called a basque, thicket or wood, and contained various compartments of turf or gravel branching 
from the walks, and very generally a labyrinth. The species of shrubs in those times being very limited, 
the object was more walks for recreation, shelter, shade, and verdure, than a display of flowering shrubs. 
What was wanting in natural beauty and variety, however, was made up by the art of the gardener in 
cutting such trees and shrubs as he had, into curious shapes. Shrubberies are often made for the sake of 
obtaining an agreeable walk to some particular place or scene, as the kitchen-garden, farm, wood, &c. ; 
and sometimes in order to lead the spectator to different points, where views or distant prospects may be 
obtained. The most desirable shrubbery is one where both these objects are combined ; and the least so, 
where the walk leads to no particular object, is shut up on both sides, and has no beauties to depend on but 
those of the shrubs. Hence Sir W. Chambers complains of walks en cul de sac, and Knight of " the shrub- 
bery's insipid scenes," &c. (TV. on Country Res. i. 352.) The shrubbery, however, judiciously laid out and 
planted, will always be a scene of considerable beauty and use about a country-seat. It is one of the princi- 
pal resources for a home-walk for exercise ; and as Repton has observed, a tolerable walk, even round one's 
own field, is more interesting than a better one where we have no interest. " We are greatly Indebted to 
shrubs," Nicol observes, " for much of the pleasure and delight we enjoy in our gardens. Though they 
produce no eatable fruits, nor aflFord us any sort of nourishment, yet they are particularly conducive to our 
comfort. In winter, they shelter us in our walks ; in summer, they shade us from the sun. They afford 
a great variety of flowers, a varied foliage, and are standard ornaments that give us no great trouble. They 
are particularly useful in the character of screens, whether against the weather, or to hide disagreeable ob- 
jects, in which case they maybe planted nearer to the house than forest-trees. When planted in masses 
at a distance, they become agreeable objects, and often improve the scenery of a place. The shrubbery is 
often a matter of utility as well as of ornament, in which case it gives the highest satisfaction. When 
formed for the purposes of shutting out the offices or the kitchen -garden from the view of the house ; for 
sheltering the latter or the garden, or for connecting the house with the garden and the orchard, the 
shrubbery becomes useful and interesting." 

G1S2. In respect to situation, it' is essential that the shrubbery should commence either 



Book II. 



FORMING THE SHRUBBERY. 



SOS 



immediately at the house, or be joined to it by the flower-garden ; a secondary requisite 
is, tliat however far, or in whatever direction it be continjied, the walk be so contrived as 
to prevent tlie necessity of going to and returniiig from the principal points to which it 
leads over the same ground : but as this is a matter which must be arranged in the general 
disposition or laying out of the residence, it need not be here entered on. 

61. '53, The extent of the modern shrubbery must depend more on the extent of that place 
of which it is a part tJian on any other principle, and it is, or ought to be, so blended with 
the flower-garden lawn, as scarcely to admit of its quantity being estimated apart. Where 
the proportion of pleasure -ground, which may be judiciously apportioned to a residence^ 
depends so much on the ground's surface, and on the character or style of the whole seat, 
notlaing definite can be laid down in the way of rules. The walks in the pleasure-ground 
should generally exceed a mile or two for the sake of recreation ; but what proportion of 
these should be in open lawn, and what in flower-garden, or along tlie margin of a shrub- 
bery, is too vague a question to receive any useful answer. Local circumstances and the 
character to be created must determine every thing. It may be mentioned as a charac- 
teristic distinction between the ancient and modern shrubbery, that the former was 
of limited extent, compact form, situated near the house, and that the length of walk was 
made up by repetition of parallel and cross walks. The whole of these had little distant 
prospect, and were generally more sheltered and shaded than is suitable for our climate ; 
whereas, in the modern shrubbery, the length is made up by stretching out the walk to a 
distance ; and air and ventilation, as well as views and prospects, are obtained by its being 
planted chiefly on one side. Such shelter and shade as is deemed requisite for the walk 
is obtained by the introduction of scattered trees along its open margin. 

6134. Soil. "Shrubs, in general," Nicol observes, "thrive very well in ordinary 
garden-land, and better in light than in heavy soils. Most shrubs, likewise, do well in 
ground a foot in depth ; but it is always advisable to trench to the full depth of the soil, 
previous to planting, if that were even two feet. Manure is seldom bestowed on shrubs, and 
if the soil be not far below mediocrity, it is seldom necessary, provided the ground be 
otherwise well prepared, and be meliorated by trenching or digging. In the case of plant- 
ing screens, where it is desirable to have them effectual as soon as possible, or in planting 
favorite shrubs in particular situations, every justice should be done to the soil in prepar- 
ing and enriching it, either with manure or by the addition of fresh earth. Those who 
are curious in collections of certain shrubs, prepare or choose certain soils for them. 
Evergreens, for the most part, thrive well in loam of a middling texture ; but some kinds 
do better in mossy humid earth, as the azalea and rhododendron. Deciduous shrubs, in 
general, thrive well in light loams or sandy soils ; but ceitain kinds flower better in rich 
mellow earth, as the moss-rose and the robinia." 

6135. Walks. " The conducting of walks," Nicol says, " through the shrubbery, is 
a matter both of conveniency and of taste : of conveniency, when the shrubbery is merely 
a passage from one place to another, or a narrow screen to the garden. In the former 
case, the walk should be simple and direct : in the latter case it may be circuitous ; and 
if there be any variety in the ground, it ought to lead to particular points of view. The 
walks, however, should seldom cross one another ; they should rather take off at oblique 
angles ; nor should one run parallel to another within view. It is proper to show off the 
shrubs, but too many walks perplex. Their breadths may be various. If short, they 
should be narrow ; if long, and if a considerable reach be caught at once, they should 
be broad. A medium may be taken at five feet, the extremes being three and eight. 
They may be of turf or of gravel ; but the latter is always most wholesome, and most 
agreeable in winter." In the ancient style, where the shrubbery, or umbrageous scene 
{Jig. 551. a), often enclosed the flower-garden {b), both being situated in front of the 
house (c), the walks {d) were laid out in arbitrary geometrical shapes, crowded and nur 
merous, to afford sufficient space for recreation, and varied by niches (e), boudoirs (^f), 
salons 'g) , and other open parts to give variety. 

6136. Fence. Local circumstances must, in almost every case, determine the sort of 
exterior or boundary-fence most proper for the shrubbery or pleasure-ground ; the inte- 
rior, or that on the open side, should, in almost every case, be one of the inconspicuous 
kind ; either light iron-railings, moveable hurdles of wood or iron, or the sunk-fence. 
Where the shrubbery is not a boundary plantation, a light fence may include it on both 
sides ; but so much depends on locality and other arrangements, that the subject cannot 
be profitably discussed separately from that of laying out the entire residence. Under 
the geometric style, the business of fencing the shrubbery or woody scene, was very sim- 
ple, the whole being generally surrounded by a high wall. '* Fences of all kinds," 
Abercrombie observes, " are rather necessary and useful as instruments of shelter and 
security than to be chosen as materials of ornament. Whether the view tenninates on 
the fence, or is directed beyond it, the effect on the scene, at best, is negative : thus, a 
fence is sometimes made higher than its proper use requires, merely to shut out something 
more unsightly ; and, in judiciously employing that capital invention, the sunk-fence or 

3 y 2 



804 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



557 




ha-ha, the advantage, though great, is purely negative ; some prospect worth retaining at 
considerable cost is not obstructed." 

6137. Reserve-ground for the shmbbery. A plot of ground should be set apart for the propagation and 
culture of the more tender shrubs, to supply deaths or accidents in the front of the shnib-border. This 
reserve-nursery will be most conveniently situated when Joined to that of the flower-garden ; but it may 
also be taken from the interior of any wide part of the plantation M here it will not be seen. Here roses, 
mezereons, American shrubs, honeysuckles, and a variety of the more ornamental and tender sorts should 
always be in readiness, partly in pots and partly in nlirsery lines, to remove to the principal scene, either 
to add to its usual beauty, or to compensate for accidental defects. To the same ground may be added a 
space for accumulating leaves, spray, and other refuse of the shrubbery, to ferment and produce manure 
for the ijursery in the same way as is done in the compost-grounds of the kitchen and flower garden. 



Chap. IV. 

Of Planting the Shrubbery. 

6138. On planting the shrubbery the general remarks, submitted as introductory 
to ])Ianti?ig the fiower-garden, are applicable ; and shrubs may be arranged in as many 
different manners as flowers. Trees, however, are permanent and conspicuous objects, 
and consequently produce an effect during winter, when the greater number of herba- 
ceous plants are scarcely visible. This is more especially the case with that class called 
evergreens, which, according as they are employed or omitted, produce the greatest dif- 
ference in the winter aspect of the shrubbery. We shall here describe four leading 
modes for the arrangement of the shrubbery, distinguishing them by the names of the 
mingled or common, the select or grouped manner, and the systematic or methodical style 
of planting. Before proceeding farther it is requisite to observe, that the proportion of 
evergreen trees to deciduous trees in cultivation in this country, is as 1 to 12 ; of ever- 
green shrubs to deciduous shrubs, exclusive of climbers and creepers but including roses, 
as 4 to 8 ; that the time of the flowering of trees and shrubs is from March to August 
inclusive, and that the colors of the flowers are the same as in herbaceous plants. These 
data will serve as guides for the selection of species and varieties for the different modes 
of arrangement, but more especially for the mingled manner. 

6139. To dispose sJi7 uhs and trees in the mingled 7nanner, proceed as under. The width of the space to 
be covered with trees, shrubs, and flowers being given, first mark it out in rows lengthways. The fir§J 



Book TI. 



PLANTING THE SHRUBBERT. 



805 



row may be two feet from the margin of the turf or the edge of the walk ; the second, three feet from 
the first ; the third, four feet from the second ; and so on to the back of the plantation. Suppose the 
width to admit often rows {fig. 558. a to k), then the six rows next the walk will occupy a space of twenty- 
seven feet, which may be devoted to shrubs, and the remaining three rows will occupy a space of thirty- 
seven feet, and may be planted with trees. Then beginning with the first row, which is destined for the 
lowest class of shrubs, arrange them according to the times of their flowering, which will, as in arranging 
herbaceous plants, be most conveniently done at six times: viz. 1, March ; 2, April, &c. to 6, August; 
and they will stand as in the flower-border in the order of 1, 6, 3, 5, 2, 4, and with the colors in the same 
manner («). The second row {!/) is to be arranged in the same manner ; and as trees, though nearly of 
the same size when planted, yet attain finally very different degrees of bulk, provision must be made for 
the plants in each row to expand year after year, till they attain their full growth. This we propose to 
do by planting two plants of a sort in the second row (b), three in the third, and so on (as indicated in the 
figure), till in the last or tenth row (k), there will be ten plants of a sort in a line together. It is to be 
observed, that a deciduous aiid an evergreen sort (marked d, e, in the figure) are to be planted alternately, 
in order to ensure an equal mixture in respect to verdure ; and that the colors (denoted by r, w, b, i/, in 
the figure) are mixed as in the mingled border, to ensure a general display of mixed blossoms. The se- 
cond or third year such of the plants are to be thinned out as crowd the others, reserving, however, as 
final plants, one of each sort, (say E for the evergreens, and D for the deciduous sorts), so placed in re- 
spect to the plants in the other rows, as that the whole, when finally thinned out, may stand in quincunx, 
The largest trees will then occupy about 100 square feet each ; and each of the shrubs in the front row 
about a square yard : there will be the same number of deciduous plants as evergreens j some shrubs of 
all the four colors in blow throughout the whole season, and a verdant aspect in summer as well as winter. 

558 

. tvle wle nile tvle rule [tule nle tvle tvU tvle b6d b6d b6d b6d b6d b6d b6d I6d b6d b6d yZe yZe 
JB P B 



rGd r6d r6d r6d r6d rSd rSd r6d rGd mZe wZe jvZe tv5e w3e tv3e tv5e rvZe fv34 
D E 



.. Tie r4e r4e r4e ri.e rie mid rvld raid rvld wld tvld b6e bGe b6e b6e b6« bSe yZd y3d ySd ySd 
E U E c-jj J .V 



«.... b5d bSd b3d bSd bSd v5e yhe y5e y5e ybe i"2d r^d r^d r2d r2d niie w4e wie ntie rvie 

D •^E ^ D E 

« 

4 role tvle tvle mle b6d b6d b&d bGd ySe yZe yZe yZe r5d r5d r5d rSd n'2e tvie tv2e niie bid Md! 

E D £ , D E . D 



e r5d rSd rSd tv2e iv2e tv%e bid bid bid yle vie vie I'M rGd rGd wZe rvZe mZe b5d b5i 

D E D E D E D 

* 

b Me Me yld yld rGe rGe w3d w?>d b5e bbe yid yid rie rie mid mid bGe bGe ySd yZd rbe r5e 

E Ij e D E B- E D E D E 

f> 

« rid mGe bSd y5e r2d mie bid yGe r7,d m5e bid yie rid rvGe hSd ybe r'id wie bid y6e rSd 

DED EDED E.D ED ED ED E. D ED ED 

e 1 

3 F 3 



806 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



III. 



6140. Tla distance between the rows of trees (ten feet) may in some cases be an objection, for a year or 
two at first ; but this, we consider, will be more than counterbalanced by the opportunity afforded of cul- 
tivating the ground between them, and by the air and light admitted to their side shoots, which will the 
sooner fit them for producing blossoms. All formality of appearance v/ill soon be done away by the irre- 
gular growth of the plants, and by the thinnings which must take place in, at the latest, three years after 
planting. If any, however, object to the appearance of rows, they may be obliterated, by introducing 
some plants in the intervals of the same sort as those in the lines adjoining ; but in doing this, care must 
be taken never to lose sight of the shrub or tree which is finally to remain, as it is of importance to this 
plan, (which is not natural or picturesque planting), that the regular disposition of the whole be preserved, 
as well with a view to the gradation of height as to the mixture of color in the flower, and of permanent 
and deciduous foliage. The herbaceous plants only remain to be added. These are to be inserted one 
row in front of the first row of shrubs (o), and three or more rows {p, q, r, s) in the intervening spaces 
between the next rows. The plants are to form a quincunx with the shrubs ; and the same arrangement 
as to height, color, and time of flowering, adopted as in the mingled border. Such a shrubbery may be 
Commenced with (2 X 6) twelve sorts of evergreen, and the same number of deciduous trees ; with (6 x 6) 
thirty-six sorts of shrubs, half the number deciduous, and half evergreen ; and with (5 x 6) thirty sorts of 
herbaceous plants. It may then be continued either by repeating the pattern with the same sorts, or by 
other sorts ; or principally by the same sorts, with some others occasionally. If a show of flowers is 
valued, the sorts employed must be comparatively few, as the flowers of the greater number of trees and 
shrubs are of dull colors, or little conspicuous. The evergreen trees, in a popular sense, can hardly be said 
to have any flower ; but still a number of them must be introduced in the back rows, to blend with horse- 
chestnuts, limes, acacias, wild cherries, wild pears, &c. &c. 

6141. The select or grouped manner of planting a shrubbery {fig^ 559,) is analogous to 
the select manner of planting a flower-garden. Here one genus, species, or even variety, 
is planted by itself in considerable numbers, so as to produce a powerful effect. Thus 
the pine tribe, as trees, may be alone planted in one part of the shrubbery, and the holly, 
in its numerous varieties, as shrubs. After an extent of several yards, or hundreds of 
yards, have been occupied with these two genera, a third and fourtli, say the evergreen 
fir tribe and the yew, may succeed, being gradually blended with them, and so on. A 
similar grouping is observed in the herbaceous plants inserted in the front of the plant- 
ation ; and the arrangement of the whole as to height, is tlie same as in the mingled 
shrubbery. 

559 




6142. The chief difficulty in this manner of planting is so to select the sorts that are 
to succeed each other, so to blend one group or kind with those adjoining, and at the 
same time maintaining the requisite gradation from the front to the back of the plant- 
ation, as to preserve to the spectator in walking along, the appearance of a ivhole. When 
this is successfully accomplished, and on a large scale, no kind of shrubbery can be more 
beautiful in summer ; but in winter it will present parts wholly without evergreens, and 
it will only be rich in flowers in some parts ; as for example, where the roses, spirese, 
mespileae, &c. are introduced. By proper contrivance, however, the evergreens, the 
showy flowering deciduous kinds, and the less showy deciduous sorts may form three 
divisions, and the two former can be kept nearest the mansion. The best guides as to 
the sorts proper to adjoin each other, are the general form and mode of growth ; and 
next, the color and foliation. In these particulars the transition should always be gra- 
dual. Thus, among the trees, the pines, cedars, firs, and yew, form a regular gradation, 
and the shrubs which may be placed near them are the arbor vitae, juniper, whin, &c. 
To place groups of weeping-willow or elm adjoining the pines, and to select roses and 
lilacs a,s shrubs, would produce a harsh and incongruous effect. There is obviously 
much less natural affinity between herbaceous plants and shrubs than between shrubs 
and trees ; but the groups of the herbaceous plants must harmonise among themselves on 
the same general principles as the trees ; thus pink-looking plants {caryojyhyllece), should 
not be succeeded by coarse broad-leaved sorts (boraginece) , but rather by more delicate 
kinds, as grasses or primulae, &c. There may sometimes also be a certain species of 
relation between the herbaceous plants and shrubs ; thus the bulbous-rooted kinds, and 
small early flowers, as violets, primulae, will be more fitly planted among evergreens and 
early-flowering deciduous shrubs than among late deciduous kinds. 



Book II. 



PLANTING THE SHRUBBERY. 



807 



6143. Various other modes of select-plantine shrubberies may be adopted ; such as collecting together all 
such shrubs, trees, and flowers as flower at tne same time, or have the same color of flower, or foliage, or 
the same odors, or the same general shape, or the same natural habitation, as 6f marshes, mountains, &c., 
or the same country, as America, Switzerland, Sweden, &c. But the intelligent gardener who has 
attended to what has been already advanced, can hardly require farther instructions to form such plant- 
ations. "We would suggest, as worth trial, where there was ample space, the mode of arranging by odors ; 
the ancients are said to have paid particular attention to this in mixing their trees. {Falconer, &c. and 
see 37.) Every one must have experienced a difference in this respect between walking in a pine-forest, 
a plantation of balsam-poplars, a birch-copse, and beside sweet-briar and juniper hedges. An arrangement 
of this kind, depending on the smell of the buds and leaves, rather than of the flower, would have its 
effect the greater part of the year, especially after showers 

6144. Systematic or inethodical j)lanting in shrubberies consists, as in flower -planting, 
in adopting the Linnsean or Jussieuean arrangement as a foundation, and combining at 
the same time a due attention to gradation of heights. This mode, executed on a grand 
scale, would unquestionably be the most interesting of all, even to general observers ; 
biit on a small scale it could not be so universally pleasing as the mingled manner, or 
the mode by select grouping. The uninstructed mind might be surprised and puzzled 
by such an assemblage ; but not perceiving the relations which constitute its excellence, 
they would be less pleased than by a profusion of ordinary beauties ; by a great show of 
gay flowers and foliage. Dr. Darwin is said to have blended picturesque beauty with 
scientific arrangement in a dingle at Litchfield, where he disposed of a large collection of 
trees and plants in the Linnaean manner. The same thing may be attempted on any de- 
scription of surface, and M^ith any form of ground-plan, provided turf be introduced, and 
care be taken to elongate the groups containing trees in such a way as to preserve a suf- 
ficient degree of woodiness throughout, both for shelter, shade, and picturesque effect. 
In this way we have arranged a spot (Jig. 560.) of little more than an acre and a half, 




so as to ordinary observers, to be nothing more than a house surrounded by pleasure- 
ground, but to the botanist and painter, to be a scientific and picturesque- scene. This 
spot combines a villa and offices (a), a kitchen-garden (b), reserve-garden and melon- 
ground (c), botanic ground for herbaceous plants (rf), rock- work (e), rosarium (f), 
aquarium ( g), American ground (h) ; besides a variety of other subordinate scenes, a. 
scattered orchard (^), and the shrubbery (k), arranged in irregular, elongated groups on 
lawn, in the manner mentioned. But much the most interesting mode of arrangement 
would be that of Jussieu, by which a small villa of two or three acres might be raised, 
as far as gardening is concerned, to the ne plvs ultra of interest and beauty. To aid in 
the formation of such scenes the tables (588, 589.) exhibiting the genera contained in 
each Linnaean or Jussieuean order, and also the number of species distributed according 
to their places in the garden, will be found of the greatest use. 

6145. Chinese arrangement. It is only since the great influx of trees and shrubs from 
America, during the latter half of the last century, that the idea of arranging shrubs 
found a place in the writings on gardening. Sir W. Chambers seems to have been the 
•first who suggested it in his account (whether correct or not, is of little consequence to 
our present purpose), of the practice of the Chinese gardeners. The Chinese, he says, 



808 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



in their plantations, do not, as is the practice of some European gardeners, plant indis- 
criminately every thing that comes in their way ; nor do they ignorantly imagine, that 
the whole perfection of plantations consists in the variety of the trees and shrubs of which 
they are composed : on the contrary, their practice is guided by many rules founded on 
reason and long observation, from which they seldom or never deviate. Many trees, 
shrubs, and flowers, they say, thrive best in low moist situations ; many on hills and 
mountains : some require a rich soil ; but others will grow on clay, in sand, or even 
upon rocks ; and in the water : to some a sunny exposition is necessary ; but for others, 
the shade is preferable. There are plants which thrive best in exposed situations ; but, 
in general, shelter is requisite. The skilful gardener, to whom study and experience 
have taught these qualities, carefully attends to them in his operations ; knowing that 
thereon depend the health and growth of his plants ; and, consequently, the beauty of his 
plantations. 

6146. The perfection of trees for ornatnental gardening consists in their size, in the beauty and variety 
of their forms, the color and smoothness of their bars, the quantity, shape, and rich verdure of their 
foUage, with its early appearance in the spring, and long duration in the autumn ; likewise in the quick- 
ness of their growth,' and their hardiness to endure the extremities of heat, cold, drought, or moisture; 
in their making no Utter, during the spring or summer, by the fall of the blossom ; and in the strength of 
their branches, to resist, unhurt, the violence of tempests. 

6147. The perfection of shrubs consists not only in most of the above-mentioned particulars, but also in 
the beauty, durability, or long succession of their blossom ; and in their fair appearance before the 
bloom, and after it is gone. We are sensible, say they, that no plant is possessed of all good qualities j 
but choose such as have the fewest faults; and avoid all the exotics that vegetate with difficulty in our 
climate ; for thougli they may be rare, they cannot be beautiful, being always in a sickly state. 

6148. The axessive variety of which some European gardeners are so fond in their plantations, the 
Chinese artists blame ; observing, that a great diversity of colors, foliage, and direction of branches, must 
create confusion, and destroy all the masses upon which efTcct and grandeur depend : they observe too, 
that it is unnatural ; for, as in nature most plants sow their own seeds, whole forests are generally com- 
posed of the same sort of trees. They admit, however, of a moderate variety ; but are by no means pro- 
miscuous in the choice of their plants ; attending, with great care, to the color, form, and foliage of each ; 
and only mixing together such as harmonise and assemble agreeably. They observe, that some trees are 
only proper for thickets ; others, only fit to be employed singly : and others, equally adapted to both these 
situatioiis. The mountain cedar, the spruce and silver firs and all others whose branches have a hori- 
zontal direction, they hold improper for thickets : because they indent into eacli other ; and likewise cut 
disagreeably upon the plants which back them. They never mix these horizontal-branched trees with the 
cypress, the oriental arbor vitje, the bamboo, or other upright ones ; nor with the larch, the weeping 
Avillow, the birch, the laburnum, or any of a pendent nature ; observing, that the intersection of their 
t)ranches forms a very unpicturesque kind of network : neither do they employ together the catalpa and 
the acacia, the yew and the willow, the plane and the sumach, nor any of such heterogeneous sorts ; but, 
on the contrary, they assemble in their large woods, the oak, the elm, the beech, the tupelo, the sycamore, 
maple, and plane, the chestnut, the walnut, the arbele, the lime, and all those whose luxuriant foliage 
hides the direction of their branches ; and growing in globular masses, assemble well together; forming, 
by the harmonious combination of their tines, one grand group of rich verdure. 

6149. In their smaller plantations, they employ trees of a smaller growth, but of the same concordant 
sorts ; bordering them with Persian lilacs, grtelder-roses, syringas, coronillas of various sorts, flowering 
raspberries, yellow jessamine, hypericum, the spirsea frutex, altheas, roses, and other flowering shrubs 
peculiar to China: and wherever the ground is bare, they cover it with white, blue, purjjlo, and variegatetl 
periwinkle, the convolvulus minor, dwarf stocks, violets, primroses, and different kinds of creeping flowers ; 
and with strawberries, tutsan, and ivy which climbs up and covers the stems of the trees. 

6150. In their shrubberies they follow, as much as possible, the same rules ; observing farther, to plant in 
some of them all such shrubs as flourish at one time ; and in some, such as succeed each other : of which 
different methods the first is much the most brilliant ; but its duration is short ; and the appearance of 
the shrubbery is generally shabby, as soon as the bloom is off": they therefore seldom use it, but for scenes 
that are to be enjoyed at certain periods ; preferring the last, on other occasions, as being of long duration, 
and less unpleasing after the flowers are gone. {Dissert, on Orient. Gard.) 

6151. British 2^ractice. Soon after Sir William Chambers's work appeared that of 
VVheatley, which contains some excellent remarks on the subject (Obs. on Gard. sect.xii. 
xiii. xiv.), and subsequently Uvedale Price's excellent jEssays on the Picturesque, vol. i. 
In 1804 we endeavored to enforce the principle, not only in planting trees, but in 
arranging herbaceous plants, and the plants in botanic hot-houses. ( Obs. on Planting and 
Landscape Gard. 8vo.) All these efforts were at first treated as visionary by Marshal, 
Nicol, and other planters and gardeners. But Nicol, in the last editions of his works, 
allows there may be some merit in grouping ; and Sang, his editor, highly approves of 
following nature in the arrangement of trees. {Planter s Kalend.) 

6152. Nicol says, " the proper disposition of shrubs, where many are to be planted, is a matter of con- 
siderable importance to the future welfare of the whole, and that whether they be mixed, or be grouped ; 
that is to say, whether deciduous or evergreen shrubs be indiscriminately mixed, as is often done, or the 
evergreens be planted distinctly by themselves. The arrangement of shrubs is a matter, no doubt, very 
much of fancy. In some parts they may be mixed ; in others grouped ; but, in general, there ought to be 
plenty of evergreens planted, in order that the whole may be the more cheerful in winter. Generally 
speaking, however, the method of mixing all kinds of shrubs indiscriminately, prevails too much in modern 
shrubberies. Much more character and distinctness may be given, by judiciously grouping them, than by 
following the common methods of planting." 

6153. Abercronibie, or rather his posthumous editor, seems undecided in his observations on this subject. 
In one place he says, " in the distribution of plants over grounds dedicated to elegance, there are two rival 
systems, each of which has its practical followers and theoretical vindicators. One proposes the indiscri- 
minate mixture of many difTerent species ; the other deliberately groups those only which have some 
marks of affinity. It is still a question, which order of planting is countenanced by the practice of nature 
in self-sown vegetables; and which will confer on a garden the stronger claims to character and beauty ?" 
He elsewhere observes, that " the diflf'erent natures of herbaceous flowers, shrubs, and trees stand in the 
way of every attempt to govern their distribution or assemblage by a common principle." In planting 
trees, however, he subjoins, " the principle of unity may be consulted, without losing sight of the advan- 
tage of variety," iic. (Pr. Gard. 477.) 



Book II. 



PLANTING TH^r SHRUBBERY. 



809 




6154. Fruit-trees in shrubberies. *' In shrubberies of considerable extent, fniit-trees 
may be interspersed at fifteen or twenty yards' distance, by which means a good deal of 
fruit may be obtained, and very much beauty added to the shrubbery. In spring the 
blossoms of apples, cherries, and pears are beautiful ; in autumn their fruits and the 
foliage of cherries in particular, give a lustre and variety that highly brightens the ap- 
pearance of other plants, especially of evergreens." [Villa Gard. Direct. 16.) This 
mode, Sir W. Chambers tells us, is practised, by the Chinese token the patro?i is poor ; 
that is, their shrjibbery is composed of fruit-trees, and shrubs, and forms a sort 
of ornamental orchard. This we consider an advisable mode for an economical farm- 
residence ; but the general introduction of fruit-trees, in even mingled shrubberies, un- 
less of the species in their wild state, as crabs, wildings of pears, cherries, quinces, rasp- 
ben-ies, &c. we consider as likely to destroy the character of the scene. It must be 
recollected too, that grafted trees, especially the apple and cherry, seldom grow so freely 
and produce such vigorous and natural-like heads as plants raised from seed ; they are, 
therefore, soon overtopped by the others, or where they are placed among trees that do 
not grow higher than themselves, tliey seldom fail of producing deformed stunted heads, 

6155. Forsyth, Abercroynbie, and others, 
recommend their introduction, as it ap- .^»jflll\W^' 
pears to us, without due regard to any- 
other object than the fruit they will pro- 
duce, and the fugacious beauty of their 
blossoms ; but their unaccommodating 
form, and their influence as to character 
in ornamental plantations, we consider 
as sufficient arguments against the prac- 
tice in general cases. 

6156. Decorations in shrubberies. Those 
of the shrubbery should in general be of 
a more useful and imposing character 
than such as are adopted in the flower-garden. The green-house and aviary , are 
sometimes introduced, but not, as we think, with propriety, owing to the unsuit- 

ableness of the scene for 
^^^^^^^^^^^^ the requisite culture and 

'-^-^ '-^^''^ attention. Open and co- 

vered seats are necessaiy, 
or, at least, useful decor- 
ations, and may occur here 
and there in the course of 
the walk, in various styles 
of decoration, from the 
rough bench to the rustic 
hut {Jig. 561.) and Gre- 
cian temple, {fig. 562.) 
Great care, however, must 
be taken not to crowd these 
nor any other species of 
decorations. Buildings be- 
ing more conspicuous than 
either statues, urns, or in- 
scriptions, require to be introduced more sparingly, and with greater caution. In 
garden or ornamented scenery they should seldom obtrude themselves by their mag- 
nitude or glaring color ; and rarely be erected but for some obvious purpose of 
utility. 

6157. Covered seats and shelters are intro- 
duced of many forms, and under a great 
variety of names, such as root-houses, heath- 
houses, moss-houses, huts, shelters, {fig. 563.) 
bowers, caverns, caves, grottoes, temples, 
mosques, &c. besides plain covered seats either 
of wood or stone. The imitation of temples or 
mosques, as they must be on a small scale, is 
generally quite ridiculous. The propriety of 
introducing the others depends entirely upon 
the character of the scene. Light bowers formed of lattice-work, and covered with 
climbers, are in general most suitable to parterres ; plain covered seats suit the general 
walks of the shrubbery. Most of the others may be introduced in romantic, singular, 
wild, or melancholy places. 





810 



PIIACXICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




564 




6158. Statues, whether of classical or geographical inte7'est (Jigs. 564. and 565.), xerns, in- 
scriptions, busts, momiments, &c. are materials which should be introduced with caution. 

None of the others require so much taste and judg- 
ment to manage them with propriety. The introduc- 
tion of statues, except among works of the most 
artificial kind, such as fine architecture, is seldom or 
never allowable ; for when they obtrude themselves 
^ among natural beauties, they always disturb the train 
of ideas which ought lo be excited in the mind, and 
generally counteract the character of the scenery. In 
the same way, busts, urns, monuments, &c. in flower- 
gardens, are most generally misplaced. The obvious , 
intention of these appendages is to recall to mind the 
virtues, qualities, or actions of those for whom they 

were erected : now this requires time, seclusion, and 

undisturbed attention, which must either render all the flowers and othei 
decorations of the ornamental garden of no effect ; or, if they have eflTect, it can only be 
to interrupt the train of ideas excited by the other. As the garden, and the productions 
of nature, are what are intended to interest the spectator, it is plain that the others should 
not be introduced. This reasoning, wliile on the one hand it shows the absurdity of such 
a practice, on the other, directs that urns, monuments, &c. should only be placed in 
solitary unfrequented places, where the mind is naturally led to contemplate, and where 
the remembrance of the virtues of great men, or the worth of relations nov^ no more, 
afford proper subjects for contemplation. But even in places apparently solitary, or 
secluded, these have been introduced in so affected or improper a manner, as to furnish 
reason for the greatest caution in future. (2V. on Country Res.) 

6159. A cottage, when the walk of a 
shrubbery is of great extent, may some- 
times be advantageously introduced in a 
distant part of it, with an occupant, for 
the purpose of keeping one apartment in 
order as a place of repose. Such a cot- 
tage [Jig. 566.) may be designed in any 
style, according to the taste of the owner, 
and may serve a variety of useful pur- 
poses. In the gardens laid out under 
the direction of the Queen of Geo. III. 
at Frqgmore, and in the walks of what 
are called the slopes at Windsor, are some 
good examples of rustic seats, and orna- 
mented shrubbery cottages. 

6 1 60. On tlie subject of planting both 
flower-gardens and shrubberies we may remark, with the author of the Florist^s Manual^ 
that it is considered in much too unimportant a light, both by gardeners and their em- 
ployers. The business is almost every where performed at random, instead of being 
conducted with a specific object in view. To remedy this evil, gardeners should first 
make a correct plan of the border, parterre, or plot, of whatever kind it may be, that is 
to be planted ; and then having determined the mode of arrangement most proper, and 
selected the names of plants to effect it, from the proper catalogues, tlie situation of 
every plant and its name should be determined on the plan. Tliis done, all these points 
should be correctly ti-ansferred to the ground, and a pin or stake inserted at each, num- 
bered in correspondence with a list of the sorts. The plants being procured, should 
then be distributed and planted according to these stakes and numbers ; and the stakes 
should be allowed to remain for a yeai- or two, to m.ake certain as to the sort to be re- 
placed there, in the ease of death or accident. If ever tliis branch of gardening should 
attain a high degree of perfection in Britain, it will probably be deemed as necessary to 
call in a professor to direct the arrangement of flowers and shrubs in parterres and shrub- 
beries, as it is now to require his aid in arranging the ground-plan. 




I'aoK 11. 



O R N A jM E In T A L H O 1 - H O U S E S. 



&I1 



Chap. V. 

Of the Hot-houses used in Ornamental Horticulture. 

6161. The hot-houses of floriculture axQ the irame, glass case, green-house, orangery, 
conservatory, dry-stove, the bark or moist stove, in the flow^er-garden, or pleasure-ground ; 
and the pit and hot-bed in the reserve-garden. In the construction of all of these the 
great object is, or ought to be, the admission of light and the power of applying artificial 
heat with the least labor and expense. In culinary forcing-houses, it is requisite to at- 
tend to the angle of the glass roof, so as to obtain most of the sun's influence at the time 
the fruit within is to be ripened ; but in the hot-houses of the flower-garden or pleasure- 
ground, the construction ought to be such as to admit as much light as possible in win- 
ter ; for then in the stoves a heat is kept up by art, which is not to be found in any 
natural climate connected with so little light as is then afforded in our latitude. Hence, 
as a general principle it may be affirmed, that the roofs of all plant or botanic hot- 
houses should be steep rather than flat, and, perhaps, the angle of 45* may be fixed on 
as the fittest average. It was adopted by Miller, both in culinary and ornamental hot- 
houses, and is fitter for general purposes than any other. 

6162. The frame used in ornamental horticulture is generally of the same form as 
those of the kitchen-garden. For alpine plants this form succeeds perfectly, but for 
frame-shrubs, the ends arfd front should be deeper than usual, and glazed half their 
depth, to admit the sun to the surface of the adjoining pots. Frames for the taller 
bulbous-rooted flowers, should either be glazed in front and at both ends, or if opaque 
in those parts, should be placed on a steep surface for the same general object. Frames 
of every description should have a gutter or spout in front, to carry oflf the rain-water 
which falls on the sashes. 

6163. The glass case maybe variously constructed from detached sashes; it is used 
to protect standard trees or shrubs, and sometimes to place against walls or espaliers, 
(seej?-. 326.) 

€164. The green-house may be designed in any form, and placed in almost any situa- 
tion as far as respects aspect. Even a house looking due north, if glazed on three sides 
of the roof, will preserve plants in a healthy vigorous state. A detached green-house, 
even in the old style, may be rendered an agreeable object in a pleasure-ground, of 
which, as an example, we may refer to one {fg. 567.) erected by Todd, for 




E, Liebenrood, Esq. near Reading ; but the curvilinear principle applied to this class 
of structures, admits of every combination of form, and without militating against tlie ad- 
mission of light and air. Though we are decidedly of opinion, however, that as iron roofs 
on the curvilinear principle become known, the clumtiy shed-like wooden or mixed 
roofs now in use will be erected only in nursery and market-gardens ; yet we are not 
to be understood as exclusively recommending our own plans, and we, therefore, de- 
scribe that of Todd, whose book contains a numljer of examples, erected in different 
parts of the country, and in the best manner of the old style. " This house {fg. 5G7, ) 
has a span roof, and the centre lights, which are balanced by weights, made in imitation 
of acorns, suspended from the ridge of the roof, are made to slide, to admit air from the 
roof. The front and ends are 
formed with folding case- 
ments, hung so as to be 
taken away at pleasure ; and 
between each is a pilaster 
of treillage-work. A cast- 
iron column at each ex- 
tremity of the upper part of 
the roof, is placed for the 
purpose of keeping it from 
spreading, as such roofs ge- 
nerally do, unless held to- ~~ — ^s?:^^^:^ 
gcthtr by a transverse tic, which has a less pleasant appearance than a column. A 




812 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING/ 



Fa AT III. 



single fire heats this house ; the flue goes under the floor round the front and ends, 
rises and continues above the floor along the back wall, and terminates in a chimney in 
the centre. Over the stock-hole is placed a cistern, which is supplied from the roof, and 
occasionally from a pump adjoining, with water, which is conveyed into the green-house 
by a lead pipe." (Plcms for Green-houses, &c. p. 11.) 

6165. The most suitable description of green-house or conservatory for the flower- 
garden is that with span roof (^fig- 56S.), because such a house has no visible 
** hinder parts," back sheds, stock -holes, or other points of ugliness, witli which it is 
difficult to avoid associating all the shed, or lean-to forms of glazed buildings 
with back walls. Several elegant houses of this description have been erected by Messrs. 
Bailey. An example occurs in the Regent's Park, at the villa of W. H. Cooper, 
Esq. ; another at Walthamstowe, in the grounds of P. Kendal, Esq. ; and several more 
are mentioned in the table already given (1587.), or are in course of erection. 

6166. In the interior of the green-house the principal object demanding attention is the 
stage, or platform for the plants. In a double-roofed house, surrounded by a path, tlie 
stage generally consists of slielves, rising from the path to the middle of the house (fg- 
567. a and b) j but in a house with a single roof (fg. 569.) it generally rises from the 
front path to the back, and in both cases the slope of the 
stage is generally the same or somewhat less than the slope 
of the roof. In the green-houses destined for very large 
or tall-growing plants, as camellias, and many of the New 
Holland plants, no stage is requisite ; and in such as are 
destined for small plants, as heaths and geraniums, the 
first step of tlie stage, when there is a path between it and 
the front glass, should be raised at least two feet and a 
iialf high, and it may then be continued parallel to the 
roof. The object of this arrangement is to bring the 
plants near the glass, so as they may obtain the benefit of the liglit in a state as little de- 
composed as possible. Flues in green-houses are frequently carried above ground, 
which is inelegant and too much in the style of the common forcing-house. They may 
in almost every case be conducted under the paths or stage, and by keeping them de- 
tached so as air may circulate round them, as much heat will be given out as by the 
common mode. In general one fire will be sufficient to warm from 4000 to 5000 cubic 
feet of air, of the temperature requisite for green-house plants, (see 1662.) In some cases 
trellis-rods are placed at regular distances under the roofs of green-houses, for the pur- 
pose of training vines ; but this practice is incompatible with a high degree of culture 
and beauty in the green-house plants, on account of the light it excludes ; besides, it 
interferes with character. If any creepers or climbers are to be trained under the roofs, 
they should be of the ornamental kind ; but it is generally best to train them to 
upright rods at the back part of the house, or rods fomiing intersecting arches over 
the back paths, or against the back wall ; for by either of these modes they exclude less 
light, better display their foliage and flowers, and less recal the idea of the forcing- 
house. 

6167. Ahercromhie and Nicol give descriptions of green-houses, such as they approve ; the former is 
rather indefinite in his renaarks ; but the latter has given the best instructions that have yet appeared, as 
far as respects the old forms and mode of treating and ventilating. 

6168. According to Ahercromhie, " The green-house may be made a very ornamental object as a structure. 
The front of the building should stand directly to the south, and the ends have an open aspect to the east 
and west. The extent of the green-house may vary, according to the largeness of the collection to be cul- 
tivated : when most contracted it should considerably exceed the breadth and height, in order to have 
handsome proportions. As to the breadth, were it more than twenty feet, those plants most remote from 
the windows would be troublesome to manage, as they must stand on very high stages to be reached by the 
sun ; between twelve and twenty feet will be found the most commodious latitude. The front, including 
a low parapet wall and a row of windows, or upright glasses, may be eight or ten feet high, measured from 
the interior floor. It will be proper to lay the floor at least twelve inches above the level &f the ground, 
and in damp situations two feet. The back is the only part at which an entire wall should be carried up 
to the roof ; the precise height of this wall depends upon that of the glass front and the breadth of the 
house ; the proportions of these three must be so accommodated as to give the proper slope to the roof." 
(Prtict. Gard.) 

6169. According to Nicol, " In the construction of green-houses, fancy may be indulged, and a greater 
scope may be allowed to taste, than in the construction of forcing-houses. These are generally confined 
to one object, the production of certain fruits in perfection ; which renders the observance of forms and 
dimensions in their construction more necessary than in that of the green-house, where a variety of plants 
of different habits are to be cultivated. Nevertheless, in order that these plants may generally thrive, 
there are certain rules to be observed, and errors to be guarded against, which I shall briefly point out. 
Green-houses with upright fronts, and with perpendicular lights only, whether the columns that separate 
them be of wood or of masonry, are the most objectionable ; as the plants in such are always drawn up 
weak, and are distorted by continually stretching towards the light. Neither do they enjoy the genial 
effects of the sun, except in the winter months, when his rays, though feeble, strike horizontally on the 
windows, and for a few hours in the middle of the day perhaps, shine on the low plants, and those placed 
most forward. If such houses be very wide, they arc the most objectionable on that account ; as, in that 
case, the plants placed near to the back of the stage arc never visited by the rays of the sun, and enjoy but 
little light to what they may require. But such green-houses may be, and indeed have been, much im- 
proved, by taking off" their leaden or slated roofs, and by substituting roofs consisting of wooden framing 
and glass, for the admission of sunshine and perpendicular light. But still they are so far defective, as 
that, by their great height, the plants are much more drawn than they ought to be, or would be, in a 




Book II. 



ORNAMENTAL HOT^ HOUSES. 



813 



lower and better-constructed house. Houses that are open on the front only, although they have sloping 
lights on the roof, are next to be objected to ; as the plants in such are necessarily more drawn and dis- 
torted than if the ends were also glazed. If such be not placed among other buildings, so as that tliey can- 
not be altered, they might be very much improved by pulling down the close ends, and by substituting 
glazed^jghts j which, if they be of a moderate height, would render them next best to such houses as are 
described below." 

6170. A complete green-house, being quite detached from other buildings, should be glaxed on all sides. " It 
may be a Circular, oval, 'hexagonal, octagonal; or with two straight sides, and circular ends, which I 
think the best form of any ; the next best, an octagon, whose sides are not equal, but with two opposite 
longer sides, and six shorter sides ; three and three opposite, forming, as one might say, an angular oval j 
the ends being angular, instead of round. In either of these last-mentioned forms, the stages and plants 
may, at least in my mind, be more tastefully arranged, than in any other. Granting either of these 
cases, the house should be about thirty-six or forty feet long, eighteen or twenty feet wide, and ten, or 
at most twelve feet high, above a given level line for its floor. The parapet all round to be a foot or fifteen 
inches high, and the upright glasses placed on it, four, or four and a half feet at most. For it is of im- 
portance, for the sake of the liner kinds of plants, and in order to have all kinds grow bushy, and flower 
while young and small (in which state they are certainly most attractive and pleasing), to keep the roof- 
glasses as low as possible ; just allowing sufficient head-room to the tallest person when walking in the 
alleys. The furnace and stock-hole may be placed at either end, or at either side, as may be most con- 
venient ; and they should be sunk under ground, and be concealed. The flue to be constructed, to run 
parallel to, and be separated from the parapet by a three-inch cavity ; its surface being level with the top 
of the parapet, and being crib-trellised for heaths, Botany Bay, and other rare plants. A walk thirty or 
thirty-six inches broad, to be conducted all round next the flue ; within which to be placed the stages 
for the more common, and the taller plants ; being raised in the middle, and falling to either side and end ; 
corresponding with the glasses, though of course not so steep. A row of columns should be placed in the 
centre, in order to support the ridge of the roof; to which climbing plants might be trained in various 
forms, and might be hung in festoons from column to column at top, or otherwise, as may be dictated by 
fancy. The front of the stage all round shouldbe raised about eighteen or twenty inches above the walk, 
in order to raise the whole of the plants placed on it sufficiently near to the glass ; thus forming the walk 
into a deep alley ; the person walking in it having a narrow border of the finer and smaller plants on the 
one hand, and a bank of the more common and larger kinds on the other; than which, when the plants 
are healthy and thriving, few scenes can be more pleasing. The aspect of such a house should be towards 
the south ; that is to say, it should stretch from east to west, or as nearly so as circumstances will permit. 
It may have an entrance on the south side, or one at either end, as shall be most convenient and suitable 
to its connection with the walks of the shrubbery or parterre in which it is placed. If a green-house must 
necessarily be attached to a wall or other building, it might be constructed very much as above ; with 
this difference, having one of the ends, as it were, cut off"; in which case, it should be placed with its cir- 
cular end south, or towards that point, and the sides pointing east and west. This I should consider as 
the second best-constructed green-house, and in which, excepting in the above-described house, the plants 
v/ould enjoy the fullest share of sun and light. In either of these houses, and in plant hot-houses of every 
description, a sufficient number of the upright and slopiirg sashes should be made moveable, for the ad- 
mission and regular circulation of air in the better seasons of the year ; and ventilators should be 
placed at regular distances all round, for the purpose of airing and ventilating them in the winter months, 
or at times when it may not be safe to open the lights. Such a house as either of these, would form a 
very complete receptacle for a handsome and pretty extensive collection." {Kal. and Villa Gard. Direct.) 

6171. The orangery is the green-house of the last century, the object of vi'hich was to 
preserve large plants of exotic evergreens during winter, such as the orange tribe, 
myrtles, sweet bays, pomegranates, and a few others. Geraniums, heaths, fuchsias, and 
other delicate plants requiring much light, were then unknown. The orangery was 
generally placed near to or adjoining the house, and its elevation coiTcsponded in 
architectural design with that of the mansion. From this last circumstance has arisen 
a prejudice highly unfavorable to the culture of ornamental exotcis, namely, that every 
plant-habitation attached to a mansion should be an architectural object, and consist of 
windows between stone piers or columns, with a regular cornice and entablature. By 
this mode of design, these buildings are rendered so gloomy as never to present a 
vigorous vegetation, and vivid glowing colors within ; and as they are thus unfit for 
the purpose for which they are intended, it does not appear to us, as we have already 




observed at length (1590.), that they can possibly be in good taste. Perhaps the only 
way of reconciling the adoption of such apailmcnts with good sense, is to consider thcin 



814 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING, 



Part I IT. 



as lounges or promenade scenes for recreation in unfavorable weather, or for use during 
f6tes, in either of which cases they may be decorated with a few scattered tubs of orange- 
trees, camellias, or other evergreen coriaceous-leaved plants from a proper green- 
house, and which will not be much injured by a temix)rary residence in sucli places, 
which, as Nicol has observed, " often look more like tombs or places of worship, than 
compartments for the reception of plants ; and, we may add, that the more modern sort 
look like a combination of shop-fronts, of which that at Claremont is a notable example." 
Sometimes structures of this sort are erected to conceal some local deformity, of which, 
as an instance, we may refer to that {Jig. 570.) erected by Todd, for J. Elliot, Esq., 
at Pimlico. " This building was constructed for the purpose of preventing the pros- 
pect of some offices from the dwelling-house. The architectural ornaments, and the 
roof, not being of glass, are points in the construction not generally to be recommended ; 
but, as it was built for the purpose above mentioned, the objections were overruled. 
There are three circular stages to this house, which are made to take out at pleasure. 
The ceiling forms part of a circle, and the floor is paved with Yorkshire stone. It 
is fifty feet long, and thirteen feet six inches wide, and heated by one fire, the flue 
from which makes the circuit of the house under tlie floor." (P/a/w of Green-Houses 
&c. p. 10.) 

6172. Of the orangery considered as a house Jbr groici7ig the orange tribe, as a dessei-t- 
fruit, we have already treated. (5930.) 

6173. 4 recent and very considerable improvement in the construction of green-houses and orangeries 
consists in forming the shelves and stages of thin plates of stone, instead of lx)ards ; and very frequently 
the flag-stones are hoilowed out, so as to leave a raised margin of half an inch or more, for the purpose of 
retaining moisture, preventing dripping, and raising, when the air of the house is warm, a general steam or 
dew. This may be considered, on the whole, as a real improvement, a proof of which is the readiness 
with which it has been adopted by nurserymen and practical gardeners. A substitute consists in raising 
marginal sDps of boards to wooden shelves, and covering the board with a thin layer of gravel or scoria. 

6174. Tlie conservatori/ is a term generally applied by gardeners to plant-houses, in 
which the plants are grown in a bed or border without the use of pots. They are some- 
times placed in the pleasure-ground along with the otlier hot-houses ; but more frequently 
attached to the mansion. The principles of their construction is in all respects the same 
as for the green-house, with the single difference of a pit or bed of earth being substituted 
for the stage, and a narrow border instead of surrounding flues. The power of admit- 
ting abundance of air, both by the sides and roof, is highly requisite both for the green- 
house and conservatory ; but for the latter, it is desirable, in almost every case, tliat the 
roof, and even the glazed sides, sjjould be removable in summer. When the construction 
of the conservatory does not admit of this, the plants in a few years become etiolated, and 
naked below, and are no longer objects of beauty ; but when the whole superstructure, 
excepting the north side, is removed during summer, the influence of the rains, winds, 
dews, and the direct rays of the sun, produce a bushiness of form, closeness of foliage, 
and a vividness of color, not attainable by any other means. We are decidedly of opi- 
nion, therefore, that a conservatory of any of the common forms, unless it were one de- 
voted entirely to palms, ferns, scitaminea?, or other similarly growing plants, should 
always be so constructed as to admit of taking off the sashes of the roof and the front ; 
and if it were a detached structure in the flower-garden, we should prefer a plan that 
would admit of the removal of every thing excepting the flues and the plants. There is 
an old conservatory of this sort in the ilower-garden at Nuneham Courtenay, planted 
with orange-trees ; and when the roof is removed, the flues, border, and bed are covered 
with turf, so that the trees appear as if planted in the open garden. Tlie trees have stood 
there for upwards of half a centuiy, are vigorous, and bear annually abundance of fruit. 
On the other hand, there are two conservatories at Knowle, with roofs fixed, or partially 
opening, which have not been erected more than four years, and in which the plants are 
already etiolated, and the lower branches dying off. ^\Tien a conservator^' is glazed on 
all sides, it should, if possible, be placed south and north, in order tliat the plants ou 
both sides of the pit should equally benefit from the sun ; when placed against a wall^ 
the glazed side may front any quarter except the north. But as the removal and re- 
placing of the roof of such immense conservatories as are sometimes attached to man- 



Book II. 



ORNAMENTAL HOT-HOUSES. 



815 



sions [Jig. 571.), is attended with considerable expense, risk of breakage, and what is of 
still more consequence, risk to the plants, if they happen to be uncovered too soon in 
spring, or left too long uncovered in autumn, we would recommend the polyprosopic 
roof (1610. and Jig. 26!.) as by far the most peifect description of a hot-house roof that 
has yet been devised. With such a roof, the plants within may, at any time, in a few 
minutes, be as completely exposed to air, rain, dew, and sun, if these exist without, as 
if the roof were removed ; and again, in a few minutes, they may be completely shut up. 
The improver who shall erect an extensive conservatoiy of this kind {Jig- 571. a), and 
apply to it the regulating apparatus of Kewley [Jig. 217.), will find himself in possession 
of the most unique and complete plant-structure in the world. 

'6175. The conservatory in comparativeli/ humble and economical residences {Jig. 572.), 
may consist of a number of rectangular sashes, connected and supported by means of 
light iron rafters. In the beginning of summer, the sashes may be removed and applied 




to the ripening of peaches, vines, or figs against walls, or laid over excavations in the form 
of pits, containing melons, cucumbers, &c. The light iron frame-work may either be 
removed, or remain, and be disguised by annual creepers, or by vines of the narrow-leaved 
sorts. Sometimes a cistern is placed in the conservatory for growing aquatics, and 
containing a few gold-fish ; but as tliere are very few exotic aquatics which will thrive 
iii the temperature of the green-house, this is seldom requisite, unless as a decoration, 
and for the use of the water in culture, and the appearance of the fishes. Tlie tempera- 
ture of consei-\'atories being the same as of green-houses, the same proportion may exist 
between the flues and volume of air to be heated. ' 

6176. The dry-stove is chiefly devoted to the culture of succulents. In design it 
need not differ from the green-house, unless, perhaps, in the stage {Jig- 573. a) being 




placed somewhat nearer to the roof. The name and character of this structure is 
derived from the higher degree of heat generally kept in it, and from the air being less 
moist than in tlie bark-stove, where more water is used, and consequently more vapor 
generated. The volum.e of air to be heated by one fire in the dry-stove, should not 
exceed two thirds of that to be heated in a green-house or conservatory, similarly con- 
structed and situated. 



816 



PRACTICE OF GARDEliriNG. 



Part III. 



6177. The bark or ?noist stove differs from the last only in having a pit (Jig- 573. J) for 
bark or other fermenting matter instead of a stage. This pit may be from two and a 
half to four feet deep, according as bark or leaves are to be used, the latter material 
requiring the greatest depth. It is commonly surrounded by a thin brick wall, but, in 
elegant structures, planks of stone, or plates of slate or cast-iron, are to be preferred, 
as a higher finish, and occupying less space. The roof, when 
necessary, may be supported from the iron columns from the 
middle of the pit. (Jig- 574. a) Shelves may be placed against 
the back wall (6), and occasionally a narrow-leaved creeper run up 
the roof (c). Such is the common interior arrangement of a 
botanic stove, as may be exemplified in that designed by Alton, 
and erected by Todd, in the royal garden at Frogmore. (Jig. 573.) 
We may add, that houses of tliis description are generally placed 
east and west against walls, on account of the shelter thereby ob- 
tained during winter, when a high degree of heat is kept up 
within, while the cold is excessive witliout. Tliere are exceptions, however, in the 
plant-stoves of the more recent public botanic gardens, especially those of Dublin and 
Liverpool, which are placed with their ends to the south, and in the immense palm-house 
erected by Messrs. Loddiges, which stands east and west, and is gl.ized on all sides. la 
private flower-gardens tlie hot-houses frequently consist of a range (Jig. 575.) containing 





a green-house (a) at one end, a dry-stove (6) at the other, and a stove (c) in the centre. 
By this disposition the stove is easier kept up to the required temperature, tliough it loses 
the full influence of the light at the ends. In general, a stove requires double the num- 
ber of fires required to a green-house of tlie same size. 

6178. There is a peculiarity in the constructio7i of plant-stoves which deserves particularly to be noticed ; 
namel)', that fewer openings for the admission of air are requisite than in any other hot-house, excepting 
the pine-stove. One reason of this is, tliat the degree of heat which must at all times be kept up in the 
enclosed atmosphere, is so much greater than that of the open air, that the difference in the specific gravity 
of the two fluids, when permitted to mingle by opening two or three sashes, produces a more active circul- 
ation, and sooner approaches to an equilibrium of temperature : another is, that however numerous the 
openings in the hot-house roof may be, they could seldom be made use of without reducing the house to 
too low a temperature ; and a thii-d and last is, tliat the plants being mostly kept in pots, and many of 
them, as the palms, being of slow growth, they are not so apt to etiolate as those of the green -house and 
conservatory. Hence it is, that the roof of a botanic stove may generally be erected at less cost than that 
of a green-house or conservatory ; but particularly where iron is employed, and the curvilinear principle 
adopted. 

6179. Houses of magnijicent forms, and almost as light ivithin as in the open day, might 
thus be constructed for the growth of palms, scitaminese, bamboos, and other tropical trees 
to be planted in the ground, as in the conservatory. Tliese might also be detached in the 
flower-garden (asfgs. 10. and 20. in Sketches for CurvUijiear Hot-houses), or they might 
form an appropriate appendage to a palace in the oriental style. (Jig' 516.) Indeed, 




there is hardly any limit to the extent to which this sort of light roof might be carried ; 
several acres, even a whole country residence, where the extent was moderate, might be 
covered in this way, by the use of hollow cast-iron columns as props, which might serve 
also as conduits for the water which fell on the roof. Internal show^ers might be produced 
in Loddiges' manner ; or the roof might be of the polyprosopic kind, and opened at 
pleasure to admit the natural rain. Any required temperature might be kept up by the 
use of concealed tubes of steam, and regulated by the apparatus of Kewley. Ventilation 
also would be effected by the same machine. The plan of such a roof miglit either be 
flat ridges running north and south (fg. 577, a), or octagonal or hexagonal cones (b), with 



Book 11. 



ORNAMENTAL HOT-HOUSES. 



8-17 




a supporting column 
at each angle, raised 
to the height of a 
hundred or a hun- 
dred and fifty feet 
from the ground, to 
adiTiit of the tallest 
oriental trees, and the 
undisturbed flight of 
appropriate birds a- 
raong their branches. 
A variety of oriental 
birds, and monkeys, 
and other animals, 
might be introduc- 
ed ; and in ponds, a 

stream made to run by machinery, and also in salt lakes, fishes, polypi, corals, and other pro- 
ductions of fresh or sea water might be cultivated or kept. The great majority of readers 
■will no doubt consider these ideas as sufficiently extravagant ; but there is no limit to human 
improvement, and few things afford a greater proof of it than the comforts and luxuries man 
receives from the use of glass — a material, as Cuvier observes (Magazi/i Ejicyloj^edique, 
1816 ', manufactured from seemingly tlie most useless debris of our globe, and an insig- 
nificant plant (salicornea) found on sea-shores. In northern countries civilised man could" 
not exist v.-ithout glass : and if coal is not discovered in these covmtries, say in Russia, 
it may at some future period become a question whether, instead of separate fires and 
.stoves, double windows, &c. the most economical mode of procuring a proper temper- 
ature will not be by at once to cover whole towns with immense teguments of glass, and 
heating by steam or otherv.'ise, the enclosed air common to all the inhabitants ; or where 
glass was considered too expensive, whole villages might be covered v/ith a roof of boards, 
and lighted nigiit and day in the winter season by gas previously obtained from the fuel 
used to produce the steam : or the gas might be einployed for heating, either by the 
generation of steam, or passing the air heated by the flame through metallic tubes. 

6180. T7te a(juariiiyn. The greater number of exotic aquatics being stove plants, a cistern of water for 
their culture IS commonly placed in the bark-stove, generally at one end of the pit, and so as to be as 
near th^ light as possible. The £)uke of Marlborough, however, and some others, have erected houses 
on purpose for this beautiful class of plants, substituting a 
large cistern for the bark-pit. The aquarium, at White 
Knights, i Jig. 518.) built by Todd, "is constructed with a 
span roof of glass ; the sides and ends are also of glass, as 
low down as the top of the flue. A cistern occui)ies the 
interior of the house, having a walk round it ; it is lined 
with lead, and filled with a mixture of mud and water, 
proper for the reception and growth of such plants as require 
aqueous nourishment. A flue goes round, directly under 
the bottom of the cistern, for the purpose of keeping the 
water of a certain temperature. Another flue goes round 
the house above ground, and terminates in a chimney at 
the north-west corner. The bottom of the cistern, to re- 
ceive the lead, is formed with slates, supported by transversa? bars of cast-iron ; a bottom of wood would 
have been more convenient for laying the lead upon, but as the flues are so near the bottom of the cistern, 
danger of fire was apprehended. The cistern is supplied with water by means of a pump placed at a con- 
venient distance for that purpose." [Plans for Green-Houses, Sec. p. 17.) This aquarium suits very well 
for such aquatics as grow to some height above the water ; but for those whose leaves float on its surface, 
as is the case with the most numerous and beautiful genus of tliis class {NympJicea), it is too far from the 
Ugtit. A more perfect plan would be, to have the cistern close under the front glass, and to have that 
glass rather flat, say at an angle of 15° ; or two cisterns- might be formed, one in the back pait of the 



i78 




818 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III 



house for tall plants, and the other in front for floating foliage, with a broad path between. But the 

most elegant plan would be, to have a circular house, glass on all sides {Jig. 5~9.\ to have a cistern 
in the centre for river-plants, and a surrounding cistern for those which grow in stagnant water. To 
imitate the effect of the motion of water in the central cisteni, the mould or pots in which the plants 
grow might be placed on a bottom («), apart from that of the cistern (6), and this bottom being on 
the end of an upright shaft, might, by the aid of proper machinery in a vault below (c), be kep't in 
perpetual circular motion. Those plants, which grow naturally in rapid streams, might be planted or 
placed on the circumference of the bottom (rf), and those requiring less agitation towards its centre (e). 
If reversed motion was required to imitate tides (where marine aquatics were cultivated}, nothing 
could, be easier than bv the sort of wheel used in the patent mangle to produce it to any extent ; or 
by another still more simple plan known to even,' engineer, it might be changed seldomer, say only 
once or twice in twenty-four hours. If a rapid and tortuous motion was required, then let the 
bottom on which the plants are placed, be furnished with small circular wheels {/) placed on its margin, 
working on pivots, and furnished on their edges with teeth like a spur wheel. Then let there be a cor- 
responding row of teeth fixed to the inside of the wall or side of the cistern, into which they are to work 
like a wheel and pinion. By this means, pots of plants set on the small wheels, will have a compound 
motion, one round the centre of tlie small wheels, and another round that of the large bottom, something 
of the nature of planetary motion, but more like that of the waltz dance. It is almost needless to add, 
that exotic aquatic fowls and fishes might be kept in such an aquarium, and either of the sea or fresh- 
water rivers, according as salt water or fresh was used. It may be thought by some that the machinery 
would be intricate and troublesome ; but the power requisite is so very small, that it might easily be ob- 
tained by machinery on the principle of the wind-up jack, such as was used by Deacon in his ventilating 
Eolians. {Bern, on Hot-h. 68.) This kind of mechanism very seldom goes out of order, or requires repairs, 
and would require no other attention than being wound up twice in twenty-four hours, and oiled oc- 
casionally. The same vault that contained it might serve for the furnace or boiler for heating the house. 

6181. JVind. If instead of water in a circular cistern with its bottom so constructed, we suppose air, 
then the same arrangement would serve for producing artificial wind to plants, the beneficial effects of 
which in producing bushiness and strength of stem are well known. The motion thus given would pro- 
bably be extremely useful for young plants in close damp weather in winter, by preventing some .sorts 
from getting mouldy and damping off, and by moderating the growth, and preventing the etiolation of 
others. For this purpose the machine might be considered as a kind of hospiUl, and the plants being in 
pots, might be set on either the large or small wheels, and kept there in motion for a longer or shorter 
period, according to circumstances. 

6182. The substitution offire-heat for that produced by the fermentation of vegetable substances, is a re- 
cent innovation in the construction of plant-stoves. This has been done by heating the air of a vault or 
chamber below the pit, with smoke or steam, either by circulating these fluids in flues or tubes in the 
chamber, or by simply filling the vault with them. In some cases, also, flues or steam-pipes have been 
conducted through the tan with a view to prolong its heat. The mode by heating an air-chamber below 
the pit was carried into execution by us so long ago as 1804, at Glenfuir (Tr. cm Hot-h. p. 219.'* ; and more 
recently upon a larger scale, for the purpose of growing pines, at Underley Park. {Tr. an Coun. Bes. p. 295. 
pL 11. fig. 3.) A plan very similar to the last has been adopted by Kent {Hort. Trans, ii. 389. and iii. 287.), 
who at first plunged the pots in a bed of sawdust over the vault, thinking thereby to avoid the worms and 
insects that generate in decaying tan. He found, however, that when the sawdust became rotten, worms 
generated in it as freely as in any thing else, and has therefore given up the practice of plunging altogether, 
setting the pots on a thin layer of coarse sand placed over the pavement, which forms the roof of the hot 
air chamber. Thus situated, the plants are not apt to run through the bottoms, and over the tops of the 
pots, as is the case when they are plunged, which always occasions a serious check to the plants, whenever 
they are removed or required to be sliifted. After above a year's trial, he says, " I think I can with cer- 
tainty pronounce that phuiging is not only unnecessary, but really worse than useless to plants, except 
where they have been injured and require to be drawn." A very obvious extension of this principle was 
the disuse of bottom heat altogether, and the substitution of a platform of brick or pavement, or merely a 
bed of scoria or gravel for the bark-pit. This has been done extensively by Messrs. Loddiges, Kent, 
the Comte de Yande, and various others, with perfect success as far as respects large plants ; but most 
stove-plants require to be originated and brouglit forward till they are one or two feet high in bottom heat. 
By keeping up a considerable atmospheric temperature, and by frequent waterings over the leaves, that 
sort of moist heat is produced which seems most congenial to vegetation, and it may, we think, be assumed 
as experimentaUy proved, that where such heat is produced in plant-stoves the bark- pit is unnecessary for all 
general purposes. " If we reflect for a moment," says Kent, " that in tropical countries, the stem, branches, 
and leaves receive a greater degree of heat from tlie atmosphere than the roots can possibly do ; it appears 
extraordinary that a system of management so directly opposite to nature should have ever been adopted, 
or that it should have been so long practised. If a quantity of earth was to be raised from the root of any 
tropical shrub, growing in its native situation, there is no doubt its heat would be below the temperature 
of the air, therefore the roots of the plants in a stove ought not at any rate, to receive more warmth than 
their other parts." {Hart. Trans, iii. 288.) 

6183. A propagation-home is a requisite appendage wherever a general collection of 
exotic plants is maintained ; and the proper situation for it is in the reserve-garden. 
Such a house, like the houses used by nurserj'men, does not require to be so light as fruit- 
ing or flowering houses ; it may be little more than a large pit with the roof very flat (say 
from 12° to 15°), in order that all the plants may be near the glass ; it should contain a 
bark-pit, raised to within eighteen inches of the glass in front, and 2^ feet behind, a broad 
stone shelf in front, and two or more shelves in the back of the house, close under the 
roof, that is, over the path and flue. All shelves in hot-houses, it may be observed, 
whether of stone or timber, ought to have narrow ledgments along tlieir edges, not less 
than an inch deep, by which the water which escapes through the bottoms of the pots is 
not only prevented from dropping, but retained to generate a salutary coolness and mois- 
ture. The fire-place should be formed at one end of the front (say the south-east comer), 
and the flue conducted along the front from about nine inches or a foot from the parapet, 
and so along the opposite end and back wall, till it terminates at tlie extremitj' of the lat- 
ter, or the north-east corner. The door may be formed in the back part of the end in 
which the furnace is placed, and the path which surrounds the pit, should be made suffi- 
ciently low to admit of head-room. This plan may in some cases be doubled ; that is, 
a similar arrangement of flues, &c. may be erected alongside the other, that is, the north 



m»y be used for striking cuttings, or raising seedlings, and that fronting the south, for 



side, with a moveable boarded 




The house fronting the north 



Book 11. 



ORNAMENTAL HOT-HOUSES. 



• 819 




nursing tlie plants so raised, till they are fit for removal to the principal gretn-houses and 
stoves. The partition is made to remove, in orde*r to admit or exclude the sun's rays to 
the back-house in spring or autumn at pleasure. 

6184, We have already stated that w^e 
consider steam the best vehicle for heating, hot- 
houses of- every kind, especially where there 
are several connected together. Thus where 



all the hot-houses of a residence are con- 
nected with the mansion, both the latter and 
the former, with drying rooms, hot water or 
vapor-baths, steaming apparatus for horse- 
food, poultry-houses (under particular cir- 
cumstances), and various other appendages 
might be heated as well as the hot-houses. 
The spare steam might be employed as the 
firjrt power to machinery, to raise water, to 
drive a mangle, &c. and a gas apparatus 
might be added, to admit of lighting up 
the whole. Repton has given a plan well 
adapted for this purpose. {Jig. 580. ) At 
one end of this design an aviary (1) is 
surrounded hy a conservatory (2), arid 
joined to a glass passage for flowers 
(3), which leads successively through an 
orangery (4), lobby (5), music-room (6), 
library (7), print and picture-room (8), 
breakfast -room (9), anti-room (10), din- 
ing-room (11), hall (12), and peach and 
green-house (13). The whole length 
of this range is three hundred feet. Even 
single stoves or green-houses may be 
more agreeably heated in this w^ay than by smoke-flues, which are very generally 
attended by a bad smell, and vapors of carbonic acid and hydrogen. A very neat ex- 
ample of this kind (fg. 581.) is given by Hayward. (Hort. Tram. iv. 434.) " It is 
erected in a small conserva- 
tory, the boiler (a) contains 
about thirty gallons, and the 
pipes (b, b) are three inches in 
diameter, and so laid as to have 
thick planks resting on props 
(a, b, c) placed over them, to form 
the pathway round the house. 
Chambers are formed round the 
pipes, communicating with the 
external air, by surrounding them 
with larger pipes (c, c) ; and by 
means of small pipes (n, ni as 
much heated fresh air can be ad- 
mitted into the house through dif- 
ferent apertures (e, e) as can be 
wished." By laying the pipes 
with a declination of a few inches 
from their departure from the 
boiler till their return to it, the 
water of condensation is returned 
through a valve(A D),which is a 
very considerable advantage ; but this valve is much better placed in a close box outside 
the boiler, (an improvement made by Messrs. Bailey,) as admitting thereby of examin- 
ing it with ease when out of repair. The air-cock (f), safety-valve (o), steam-gauge (h), 
and water-gage in Hay ward's boiler, do not differ from the usual construction. The 
mode here described of admitting heated air, we would observe, must be used with very 
great caution, for we know experimentally, that no mode is more liable to overheat the 
atmosphere of the house when the fire or steam is brisk in the beginning of the night, and 
overcool it when the fire declines towards the morning. We have the same objection to 
Walker's Improved Co7istru6tion of Hot- Iwuse Flues, as described {Hort. Trans, iv. 237.), 
by A. Seton, Esq. Here a cast-iron flue is enclosed in one of masonry, and the vacuity 
between them communicates with the open air at the stock-hole, and with the air of 

3 G 2 




820 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the house at certain distances, by means of apertures in the top of the flue. The ar- 
gument in favor of this arrangement, is that usually given for vacuities around furnaces 
connected with flues, as adopted by Stewart, Gould, and various others ( Tr. on Hot- 
houses,-^. 132.), viz. that "the current of external air, by commencing, when cold, at 
that part of the flue which is hottest, takes up the heat there where it is least wanted, and 
carries it to those parts at a distance from the furnace where it is most needed ; and as the 
valves are to be cliiefly opened in the latter situations, to permit its escape, it diffuses a 
nearly equal warmth over the whole house." Every thing in this plan evidently depends 
on the management of these valves ; if they are left open during the night, the risk above 
stated is incurred ; if during day, less heat being wanted, little advantage is obtained. In 
stoves, however, this plan, under judicious management, might be useful ; but it must 
never be forgotten, that air can be rendered much hotter by a fire-flue than by a steam- 
pipe, and hence the danger to the plants. No one was ever more sanguine as to the ad- 
vantages to be derived from furnace vacuities and air-flues than ourselves (see Tr. on 
Hot-houses) ; but after twenty years' experience, we must acknowledge that they are so 
liable to produce accidents, either by admitting smoke or burning up the jxlants (as the 
phrase is), that we now seldom recommend their adoption. 

61 85. Various pits and hot-beds will be required in the reserve-department of the flower- 
garden, for forcing shrubs and flowers, raising annuals, &;c. ; the construction of which 
having nothing peculiar, need not be liere detailed. (See 1591. et seq.) 

6186. The idea of cold-houses seemi to have heen first suggesteA by Sir W. Chambers {Dissert, on Orn. 
Gard. p. 90.), and it may be worth while to submit some hints on their construction for such amateurs in 
this country as may be curious in the cultivation of 7nusci jungermannice, and other cryptogamous veget- 
ables which grow in the lowest temperatures; and for botanists in warm climates, who may wish to cul- 
tivate not only mosses, but the more perfect plants of elevated regigns or northern climates ; as for example, 
of the Britisli or Swedish alpines in Spain, or in the south of Italy. The simplest form of a cold-house may 
be a vault of rustic masonry open at one end, along the floor of which a rill of water may pass, and from every 
part of the ceiling water may drop on the floor or bed, and descend to the rill in the centre. This is an ob- 
vious imitation of the dripping caves sometimes found in tracts of country abounding with calcareous rocks, 
of which, as an example, we may cite the dripping rock at Knaresborough, and the dripping cave near 
Rousseau's walk at Lyons ; in which last, on the 19th day of June 1819, we found the thermometer at 48**, 
whilst in the open air, under the shade of an adjoining mulberry-tree, it stood at 72°. Various mosses and 
jungermannise were in luxuriant vegetation in the interior of the cave; and some sorts of ferns near its 
mouth. Another imitation of such caves might consist of an open grove of elms or oaks, among the lower 
branches of which lead pipes pierced with small holes, in Loddige's manner (1689.), might be fixed hori- 
2ontally at regular distances, and these being supplied, during the warmer months, with water from a 
proper reservoir, -would furnish a continual shower, which, with the assistance of the small rills furnished 
by the collected rain thus produced, would lower the temperature of the atmosphere sufficiently for the 
growth of such mosses and ferns as do not require much light; and the margin of the grove might be 
devoted to plants of a more perfect kind, requiring a low temperature and moist atmosphere. But a more 
perfect plan would be to form a house like a large pit, with a double glass roof, fronting the north. Over 
the outer roof should be a system of pierced pipes to keep it cool by a continual shower during sunset, and 
at the top of the back wall an arrangement whereby two or more separate and concentric coverings of can- 
vass could be let down to exclude the sun during the day. Instead of flues of masonry, large tubes of lead 
or cast-iron should surround the house, to be kept cool by a continual stream of water passing through 
them. The pit might contain a large metallic cistern, filled with ice, to be renewed when thawed, &c. 
It would be advancing too far into the regions of speculation to particularise other minor details that 
would be requisite to render such a house complete ; let it suffice to say, that such houses might be erected 
either in Britain or the south of Europe, so as to produce a temperature of 32 degrees throughout the year. 
This would admit the cultivation, in pots and on pieces of rock, of lichens, mosses, and of all the more peiu 
feet plants which grow in the regions of perpetual snow. (See 1696.) 



Chap. VI. 

Of the General Culture and Management of the Flower-garden and Shrubbery. 

6187. The cultivation of the flower-garden is simple compared with that of the kitchen- 
garden, both from its limited extent and the general sameness of its products ; but to 
manage it to perfection requires a degree of nicety and constant attention beyond any 
other open-air department of gardening. As the stalks of flowering plants shoot up, they 
generally require thinning, and props for support ; and the blossom, both of plants and 
shrubs, no sooner expands than it begins to wither, and must be cut off, unless, as in 
some of the ornamental shrubs, they are left for the sake of the beauty of their fruit. 
Weeding, watering, stirring the soil, cutting off stems which have done flowering, at- 
tending to grass and gravel, must go hand in hand with these operations. 

6188. With respect to the general culture and manuring of the soil, it should be subjected, as far as 
practicable, to the same process of trenching to different depths as that of the kitchen-garden. In the 
shrubbery this cannot be done, but it, and also the earth compartments of the flower-garden, should be 
turned over a spit in depth, and some vegetable mould, or very rotten cow-dung, added occasionally. 
Every two or three years the plants in the flower-garden should be taken up and reduced in size, and the 
beds or borders trenched, say one time at two spits deep, another at three, and soon (see 2.549.), adding 
enriching compost or manure completely rotted, according to circumstances. If, instead of trencliing, 
the old earth were entirely removed, and replaced by good loam trom a dry upland parterre, the improve- 
ment would be still greater. Most herbaceous plants flower well in such loam, and. for the more culti- 
vated sorts, as border pinks, auriculas, &c. that require a rich soil, a portion of enriching matter could 
be added to each plant as planted, and a corresponding attention paid to such as required peat-earth, sand. 



Book II. 



CULTURE OF THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



821 



day, or lime. In the shrubbery, a similar renewal of soil, and attention to the soils required by parti- 
cular shrub-plants, is also required, at least in front, where the more delicate shrubs naturally rank, and 
where the herbaceous plants are chiefly arranged. i 

6189. With respect to the times of -planting, or sowing, and manner of cropping the flower-garden and 
shrubbery, the greater part of the surface being covered with shrubs or plants of perennial duration, 
very little cropping is required, and as a substitute for a rotation, recourse must be had to the renewal of 
the soil as recommended above. Annuals are sown at various periods from February to June ; but for 
the principal show, generally in March ; the half-hardy sorts are raised in hot-beds in the reserve-depart- 
ment, and transplanted when they are to flower in April and May, and later rowings and transplantings 
are made to procure a protracted display. Biennials and perennials of the fibrous or ramcse rooted kinds 
are transplanted from the reserve-department ni September or in March ; and such bulbous roots as are 
annually taken up, are generally replanted in November or February. When bulbs and other florists' 
flowers are cultivated in beds, a rotation may be adopted as far as respects them : thus the hyacinth, tulip, 
&c., may be succeeded by annuals, and those by the dianthus tribe, or dahlias, &c. ; but in borders and com- 
partments planted in the mingled manner, as well as in shrubberies, a rotation is out of the question. 
Particular care is requisite to remove weak, ill conditioned, or ill-flowering plants, and to replace them 
by others of the same height and color. This may be done at all seasons of the year by the use of the 
transplanter ; but the better mode is to have always an ample stock in the reserve-garden, of all the colors 
and heights, both of herbaceous plants and low shrubs, (of all the sorts is unnecessary,) in pots, and 
whenever, when any plant is in flower, a defect appears, it can be remedied at once by turning the plant, 
out of the pot into its situation in the border. Independently of disease or accident, fine showy species, 
answering in general color and height, may thus at pleasure be substituted for such as are less showy, or 
less to the taste of the master. 

6190. Ornamental plants, whether shrubby or herbaceous, require to be pruned, trained, thinned, and 
dressed, according to the sort of beauty or effect expected from them. If they are grown chiefly on ac- 
count of their blossoms, then they must be pruned on the same general principles as fruit-trees ; but 
little more than thinning out weak and crowded shoots will be required where they are grown chiefly 
on account of the beauty of their foliage j and still less where the tree or bush is planted for the sake of 
its natural shape. It is customary in some places to apply the hedge-shears to shrubs ; but this is a bar- 
barous practice, destructive of all these beauties, which ought to be exploded, unless in cases where, 
in imitation of the antient style, trees are to be trained in artificial shapes. Herbaceous plants require 
little pruning, but nevertheless something in this way may be occasionally required on the same general 
principles applied to trees. Where very large flowers are wanted, it is obviously advantageous to prevent 
the plant from expending its vigor in too great a number of them, or in mere shoots and leaves. Top- 
heavy plants, as some thistles, solidagos, &c. may require to be lightened, and almost all are benefited 
by thinning out a part of their shoots. In some annuals, thinning is effected both by eradication and 
pruning, and in the more delicate sorts by pinching off" the young shoot, when an inch or two high. 
Creepers, chmbers, and shrubs planted against walls or trellises, either on account of their rarity, deli- 
cacy, or to conceal the object against which they are placed, require difFerent degrees of training ; those 
Which attach themselves naturally, as the ivy, merely require to be occasionally guided so as to induce a 
regular distribution of their shoots ; the others must be treated like fruit-trees, training thinly, if blossoms 
are the object; and rather thicker, if a mass of foliage be what is chiefly wanting. Hedges and edgings 
require to be cut and otherwise kept in order by the obvious means. " Edgings of all sorts," Marshall 
observes, " should be kept in good order, as having a singularly neatefTect in the appearance of a garden. 
The dead edgings will sometimes, and the live edgings often, want putting to rights ; either cutting, 
clipping, or making up coinplete. Where there are no edgings, or but weak ones, let the earth border- 
ing on the walks be kept firm, and now and then worked up by line in moist weather, beating it smooth 
with a spade." {Introd. 57.) 

6191. Grass-plots require to be regularly mown at least once a-fortnight, and where extraneous plants, 
of broad-leaved kinds, make their appearance, as platitagos, crowfoots, &c. they must be carefully re- 
moved. Worms should be gathered by hand before sunrise, or their casts swept off' with the wire 
besom (1321.), and then the ground watered with lime-water. Rolling and watering must be applied ac- 
cording to circumstances, and nothing neglected to ensure that deep-green color and velvet texture which 
is, or ought to be, the characteristic of the British lawn, and which is indeed the pride of our island. 

. 6192. Various tender sorts of plants and shrubs require protection by one or other of the different uten- 
sils, structures, or contrivances (2206. to 2218.) destined for that purpose. Alpine plants require protec- 
tion from cold, by covering with snow, or by hand-glasses, or frames during winter ; and from heat, by 
screens to produce shade during summer. The roots of many sorts require to be protected by ashes, rot- 
ten tan, or litter, from frost, and the tops of others both shrubs and plants, to be guarded by fronds of 
fern, fir-branches, mats, or portable glass cases, from rain, hail, and cutting winds. Great care must 
be taken to protect pots of plants from frost ; by always keeping them plunged in earth or some non- 
conductor; for no state in which a plant can be placed is so obnoxious to the baneful influence of con- 
gelation as that of being grown in a pot. Climbing plants require to be supported by poles or rods, as 
some sorts of honeysuckle, bignonia, aristolochia, &c. ; by props, as pyramidal bell-flower, lobelia ful- 
gens, &c. or by branches or spray, as the nasturtium and pea tribe. Much of the beauty of the flo.wer- 
garden depends on the manner in which these operations are performed. The prevalent error consists in 
overdoing the thing, in employing too stout and too long rods or props, and too many thick tufty 
branches, instead of such as are free-grown and open. Watering must be liberally applied to almost 
every part of the flower-garden during summer, and in the evening ; it increases the progress, and en- 
larges the parts of all vegetables ; gives a fresh appearance to the soil as well as the plants, disperses their 
odors in the surrounding atmosphere, and tends to subdue various kinds of insects. 

6193. Water, whether as an orna- 
mental feature, or as an aquarium, 
should be kept clear both of weeds 
and insects. Of aquatic weeds the 
most troublesome in small aquariums 
are the confervae and byssi, which 
can only be removed by hand, or by 
entangling them with a rake or 
broom. The larvae of numerous land- 
insects are deposited in water or in 
the muddy sides of ponds and ditches, 
as the elephant-hawk-moth {Sphinx 
Elpenor, L.) {fig. 582.), the dragon- 
fly {Libellula, Ij.), and many others. 
Of the aquatic kinds are the well 
known tipulee, of which some species 
{T. oleracea) (fig. 583.) glide over the 
water, and are by many considered 
rather ornamental than otherwise, 
and others live entirely under it, and 
feed on the roots of plants. To de- 




S G 3 



822 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



stroy, or at least greatly to keep under all aquatic insects, an eflfectual mode is to dry the pond for a day 
or two ; but in the case of an aquarium it cannot be done ; fish and frogs, their natural enemies, must 
therefore be encouraged, in order that they may attack them. 

6194. Insects and vermin. These must be kept under in every part of the flower-garden and shrubbery, 
and we perfectly agree with the author of the Florist's Manual, that " the simple and laborious mode of 
picking away the animal, is the only one to which recourse can be had with permanent advantage. To 
give full efficacy to this method of 

rescuing plants from caterpillars, \ ' / 

snails, &c. our attacks must be \ / 

made upon them at particular sea- ^, 
sons, which can only be done from 
such a knowledge of their history, 
as shall enable us to have swarms 
of them destroyed in the destruc- 
tion of an individual of the spe- 
cies Without, however, much re- . 
search into their natural history 
we may, from common observ- 
ation, understand that in the 
v/inged insect we may free our 
plants from an innumerable tribe 
of those which crawl, and which, 
in that reptile state, l^ave the ca- 
l)acity of devouring the whole 
product of a garden. The two pe- 
riods of change of form in the ca- 
terpillar species, seem to afford 
the most advantageous times to 
put an end to tneir existence. 
Thus, the epheme'Tal butterfly; if 
timely attended to, we may de- 
stroy the animal before it has ac- 
quired the power of disseminating 
its young progeny ; and, in the in- 
termediate and voracious state of 
caterpillar, every single one which 
is prevented attaining the winged 
form, preserves our flowcis from a 
host of enemies. The green ca- 
terpillar is the most common foe 
to our flower-borders and in au- 
tumn attacks the branches of mig- 
nonette in such numbers as to af- 
ford an easy opportunity of their 
destruction. A more persevering enemy, and more difficult to exterminate from gardens, is the snail 
{Helix) and slug {Li7nax) ; which, forming their habitations under the soil, attack the roots of the flow- 
ers, and frequently destroy them before the gardener can be aware of the mischief, that too often becomes 
visible only when past reparation. Under a vigilant eye, however, plants will not twice suffer from the 
enemy not being ostensible ; as the symptoms of his vicinity maybe marked by flowers perishing as they 
first emerge from their buds or bulbs, by leaves or petals being pierced in small holes, or having the ap- 
pearance of being gnawed in growth, or from almost any failure in vigor which cannot be accounted for 
by external causes. In cold and dry weather the snail rarely appears, but after warm showers it may 
generally be found ; early in the morning, and about the close of evening, are the usual times of their 
coming abroad, when they may be picked up in large quantities. They will, however, frequently molest 
a plant for a length of time without being visible, in which case, when there is reason to suspect their 
hidden attacks, the only method to entrap them is to place a common garden-pot over the infested root, 
and it will rarely occur that the enemy is not discovered, as snails fasten themselves to the sides or tops of 
boards, or mats, or cabbage-leaves, so placed, and thence are easily taken. In droughty seasons it will 
be of use to water the plant before it is covered, as the moisture of the earth will be an additional mo- 
tive of attraction to draw the animal from his hiding-place. The smaller insects which infest rose-trees, 
and some herbaceous plants, can only be kept within moderate bounds by sweeping them from the branches, 
or by cutting off those whereon they are found in most profusion. In carrying off these diminutive ene- 
mies, birds are peculiarly serviceable. Insects generally attack those plants which are least vigorous ; 
and the reason of the selection of such leaves as are beginning to decay may be, that in their declining 




Book II. 



CULTURE OF THE FLOWER-GARDEN. 



823 



state they have usually a peculiar sweetness, probably perhaps owing to some saccliarine juices whicli are 
preparing for the nutriment of the bulb or bud which is forming in their bosoms, for the nascent veget- 
able derives its sustenance from the recrements of the one from which it takes its birth." {FIoj: Man. 25. 
et seq.) The cultivated bee is an insect which the gardener will of course take care not to destroy on ac- 
count of its use; and it may be a question whether some species of the butterfly, moth, dragon-fly, &c. 
should be destroyed on account of their beauty. Some species of these genera are highly bcautilul, as 
the four-blotched dragon-fly {Lihellula qiiadrimaculafa, L.), and the swallovz-tailed butterfly {Papilio 
Machaon, L.) {fig. 584.), which is reckoned the most superb of the British species. It is very local, but 
occurs near Bristol, Beverly, and in the New Forest. The larva feed on umbelliferous plants ; the 
caterpillar is green, banded with black, marked by a row of red spots. It changes into the chrysalis 
state in July ; and the perfect insect is found in August. There are two broods, the first appears in May, 
having been in the pupa state all the winter, and the other in August from the pupa of July. (Samouelle.) 

6195. The cutting off Jlower-stalks, decaying flowers, leaves, &c. is to be done in most 
cases immediately after the flowers are faded ; but there are exceptions where the leaves 
on the lower part of flower-stems may be requisite to strengthen the root, and where, as 
in the case of stipa, some convallarias, eringoes, &c. the parts of the flower are persisting, 
or the fruit or seed-pods are objects of beauty. The leaves of bulbous-rooted plants, 
and such others as are not prolific in foliage, should be carefully preserved till they have 
begun to decay ; and, indeed, the base or root-leaves of no plant whatever should be cut 
off till this is the case, unless for some particular object. Every single flower, as soon 
as the petals begin to droop, should be pinched off, and especially every flower of the 
double kind. Every rose, when it begins to droop, should be dipt off near to the foot-( 
stalk of the one which is about to succeed it ; and when the last of the corymb has done 
flowering, then the common foot-stalk should be cut off back to the first strong leaf-bud : 
nothing is more unsightly in a flower-garden than rose-bushes where this' has not been 
attended to. By employing, women or apprentices to go over the whole pleasure-ground 
every morning during the four summer months, to attend to this business, it may be com- 
pletely accomplished at very little expense. These and other points of management, we 
know, are considered needless niceties by many gardeners : but what is a flower-garden 
unless it is kept with the utmost nicety ? Others will tell you, they have not time foi" 
such things ; but where there is a real taste for neatness, time will be found. " No 
gentleman," Sir G. Mackenzie observes (Caled. Hort. Mem. iv. 194.), " ought to keep 
a gardener who does not understand that there is time enough for every thing, provided 
that time is not wasted, but properly regulated, and nothing too long delayed." 

6196. Gathenng Jlowers. Gather, if possible, only from the reserve-garden ; for if the 
main borders and compartments are managed as they ought to be, much gathering will 
disfigure the plants. Always use the knife, and prefer such as are com.ing into flower, 
rather than such as are fully expanded. If possible, gather from crowded plants, or 
parts of plants, so that every gathering may operate at the same time, as a judicious 
pruning and thinning. 

6197. The French rose-gatherer presents a refinement in floricultural instruments highly characteristic of 
its origin. The general form of this little engine is that of a pistol : it has a handle and trigger like it, and 
a cutter in the manner of the wire pliers, or flower-gatherer {fig. 152.), disguised as a barrel. A rod, an- 
swering to the ramrod, connects the pincers with the trigger, which last, being pressed, opens the pincers, 
that is, charges the pistol ; the operator then presents the pistol to the rose to be gathered, and so that when 
the cutter operates, it may separate it at the precise point of the stalk deemed proper : things being thus 
adjusted, the trigger is drawn, and the deed is done. — Of course this instrument, hke a number of other 
horticultural toys manufactured by the Parisians, is chiefly pour Ics dames. 

6198. Flowers inay he preserved, when gathered, by inserting their ends in water, moist earth, or moss ; 
and may be freshened, when withered, by sprinkling with water, and putting them in a close vessel, as 
under a bell-glass, hand-glass, flower-pot, or in a botanic box ; if this will not do, sprinkle them with 
warm water, or with spirits of wine, or ether, and if this fails, insert their ends in water heated to^"' or 
90°, and cover them with a glass. 

6199. Grafting, budding, laying, &c. Operations of this sort require to be performed 
in the flower-garden and shrubbery, for enlarging, renovating, and otherwise improving 
shrubs and plants, or introducing new sorts ; they are also, required for the common pur- 
poses of propagation. 

6200. Ordering seeds, bulbs, and plants. This business is much simpler in the flower 
than in the kitchen garden. For flower-seeds of most sorts, an order is simply given for 
aj)aper of a sort ; mignonette, lupins, sweet peas, and a few others, may be ordered by 
the ounce ; bulbous roots are generally ordered by number, either of mixtures or single 
sorts ; and herbaceous plants, shrubs, &c. by name and number, or by the hundred or 
dozen in mixture. See the priced catalogue of any nurseryman. 

6201. Neatness has been already a good deal insisted on in different parts of this work. We repeat, it 
is the dress and visage of gardening, and if necessary any- where, is more especially so in the flower-garden. 
A gardener who pretends to manage a flower-garden without the most vigilant attention to this point, at 
all times, is unworthy the charge. The first thing is to have a quick intelligent eye, so as instantly to 
perceive what is wanting, and the second is to be possessed of that principle of activity which immediately 
sets about supplying the want. Many gardeners have certain times for cleaning up, &c. and will go fifty 
times past a weed, stone, dead leaf, or some such article, which disfigures or injures a scene, without re- - 
moving it, merely because the time for cleaning, &c. has not come. This is most abominably formal con- 
duct, deserving the severest reprobation. A gardener ought to have his eye, his head, his heart, his hand, 
his knife, and apron, ready for action at all times, places, and seasons, when within the precincts of his 
charge. Let him drown this incessant care in his own way when he is without his scene of business, or in 
the hours of rest and refreshment: and let him not undertake it without adequate terms of remuneration. 
(See 2355. 2373.) 

. 3 G 4 



824 



l>RACl"iCE OF GARBENING. 



Part III. 



Chap. VII. 

General Culture and Management of the Ornamental or Botanic Hot-houses. 

6202. The general culture of floricultural hot-houses respects soil, choice of plants, plant- 
ing in pots or beds, and arranging : after offering some remarks on these heads, we shall 
submit a few as to what is general in the management of the principal floricultural habit- 
ations, as the frame, green-house, and stove. 

6203. Soil for beds or borders. The first operation of the gardener, after a conservatory or stove is 
finished, is to fill up the beds and borders with prepared earth. These being narrow, should seldom be 
less than three feet in depth, the bottom should generally be paved, and sloping to a drain or drains ; and 
in cases of very dry soils, provision may be made for the roots extending themselves beyond the area of 
the house. In general, however, this is not desirable in stoves, as the roots might be chilled during se- 
vere frosts ; but provision may be made for their extension under the paths, and every other part of the 
area of the house. When a variety of plants and trees are to be grown in sucli pits, no soil can be fixed 
on that will suit them all ; but if the main body be a sandy loam, then, as eacii particular tree is planted, 
a few cubic feet of this loam may be removed, and replaced by the soil best suited to the plant. The plant 
once established, be it what species it may, will not languish in a sandy loam, other circumstances being 
favorable. 

6204. Choice of species and planting- The species of stove or green-house plants must depend on the 
-sort of house, and a variety of circumstances which need not be entered into. For common purposes 
choose the showy-flowering, easily cultivated, and vigorous-growing genera, as geranium, camellia, fuch- 
sia, jasminum, &c. ; or evergreens, as the myrtae, proteaceas, &c. choosing (from the tables in Chap. X.) 
some plants of the principal colors to flower in every month. In planting brotid central beds in a house, 
glass on all sides, the highest-growing kinds will be placed along the middle of the bed; but where there 
is a wall to the north, the highest kinds will be placed next it. With respect to arrangement, the limited 
space admits of very little ; in general, it will produce the most showy and immediate effect to adopt the 
common mingled and shrubbery arrangement, which we have recommended (6139.) ; but as the spectator 
lingers longer on the pavement of the conservatory or stove, than in the walk of the shrubbery, more 
prolonged interest will be produced by assembling such plants as belong to one genus, or natural order, by 
themselves ; because this will be to unite what used to be considered the desideratum of taste — unity and 
variety ; that is, a general harmony of character in the genus, tribe, or family, and yet, when examined 
in detail, a distinctive character belonging to each of the individual species which compose it. It is a very 
common practice to plant climbers in such beds and along narrow borders, close to the upright or front glass, 
to be trained under the roof We most decidedly disapprove of this plan, in almost every caso, as tending 
to defeat the whole object in erecting such houses. "Very luxuriant climbers are thus produced, but it is 
at the expense of light, not one ray of which, if possible, should be prevented from falling on the plants 
in the body of the house. Climbers or creepers are highly ornamental, and may be planted in a variety 
of situations without injuring the other plants : for example, in the bed, and trained on rods, or up such 
props as may be necessary to support the roof ; or, along the sides of a central walk in a house standing 
north and south, and trained over the walk on an arcade of rods ; or, on a similar arcade over the back 
path of a single-roofed house, or on the back wall. It is a very common thing to see the cobeea in green- 
houses, and the fruit-bearing passion-flowers in stoves, darkening the greater part of the roof, and the 
plants beneath growing or elongating fast enough, but weak and of an unhealthy languid green. It is 
only under the broad wooden rafters of old-fashioned hot-houses that any sort of creepers may be trained 
up the roof without materially injuring the plants below ; and even in these cases the injury is consider- 
able, unless they are kept within very narrow bounds. But if creepers are injurious in plant hot-houses, 
the introduction of vines under the rafters is still worse ; for, besides darkening the plants below more 
than the others with their broader leaves, the incongruity of effect produced by tlie attempt to unite two 
opposite characters, is exceedingly disagreeable, and only to be tolerated in humble economical residences, 
where a green-house, perhaps, is the only glass structure. 

6205. Arrangement of plants hi pots. Where the house and the collection are small, 
or the plants few and large, the same observations will apply which we have advanced on 
the subject of planting the beds of conservatories or stoves ; but when the houses and 
collections are extensive, tlien some plan of arrangement ought to be adopted. Here, 
as in shrubberies and flower-gardens, there are three modes, by mingling, by grouping, 
and by metliod. For general effect the first is the best, but for prolonged enjoyment and 
examination in detail, the two others are greatly preferable. An abstract view of the 
modes by mingling and grouping might be represented by lines (^5. 585, 586.), in 



585 







X 




■I- 










































— 












-i-i 


























































h 














































-i- 




















































































































-f- 






















































4„ 








































































"4- 


































■i- 
























































































































; S 




































■■'r 




















r 


■■4 


















..|... 





vvhich, by the mingled mode, the colors are as regularly arranged as chequer-w^ork, while, 
by the grouping mode {fg. 586.), they succeed each other in large irregular masses. 
By the first mode, there is only one plant of a color by itself ; by the second, from half 
a dozen to three or four dozen, according to the size of the group and the plants. 



Book 11. 



CULTURE OF BOTANIC HOT^HOUSES. 



825 



.786 




Thalamiflo. sect. 1. | Thalam. sect. 2. 1 Thalaraiflo. sect. 3. | CaJyciflorae. 1 CorolUflorae. \ Monochl. & Phanerog. 

6206. By either mode regard must be had to place the j)l<^nts in gradation according to 
their size, from the front to the back, or from the lowest to the highest part of the stage, 
as well to give them every possible advantage as to light, as to present the greatest surface 
to the eye of the spectator. It is not desirable, however, to dress them so regularly, as 
that the general slope of verdure shall appear as if shorn or mown, for that both deprives 
the sides of the plants of a considerable portion of light and air, and. the eye of variety 
of form, and light and shade ; it will have a much better effect if somewhat irregular, 
and if here and there a distinguished individual appear above the rest as a standard. 

6207. In at~ranging by method or botanically, either the Linnaean or Jussieuean classifi- 
cation may be adopted ; the latter is unquestionably preferable, as exhibiting a more per- 
fect relationship ; and it may be considered as represented by the same lines as those de- 
lineating the mode of grouping by colors. {Jig. 586.) Where the Linnaean method is 
adopted, the classes may either be grouped in irregular roundish masses ; or, as the tallest 
trees and lowest herbs are often placed in the same class, it will answer better to dispose 
each class and its orders in irregular strips {jig- 587. m. d„ t. tet. pentandria, &c.), from 
the lowest to the highest part of the stage, by which the dwarf plants of each class may 
be placed in front, and the taller farthest ba-ck. 

587 




di. po.crypt. 



6208. Tke botanic arrangements, it has been already observed, are only adapted for extensive collec- 
tions arid capacious hot-houses ; on a smaller scale the mingled method, or that by grouping, will be most 
advantageously adopted. In the case ofgreen-houses attached to living-rooms, and where there are reserve- 
houses to keep up a supply, only such plants as are in bloom should be introduced, and there the method 
by grouping the colors may be adopted with great effect. But whatever be the size of the house, or even 
the extent of a bed, or shelf, or any part of them, never let the plants be placed there in the present in- 
discriminate mode. In this, no regard is paid to any thing but height ; or if any farther object is taken 
into consideration, it is to mix the kinds as much as possible, with a view, as is alleged, to produce 
variety. But the effect of this mixture, whether on a large or smaU scale, instead of variety, is same- 
ness or monotony, which lessens interest, and finally produces indifference in the spectator. " It is true, 
there is as great'a degree of sameness in the mingled mode ; but then it is the sameness of a formal and 
avowed regularity; whereas, the sameness resulting from the common mode of mixture, is the sameness 
of affectation, — a sameness resulting from an abortive attempt at something not attained. The one mode 
may be compared to the geometrical manner of laying out grounds, and the other to the mode by clumps 
and belts ; both are alike artificial, but the former is avowedly so, and therefore has attained its end, 
while the latter affects to be an imitation of nature, and therefore disappoints. A safe rule for every 
gardener to adopt, whether in setting pots of plants on a shelf or a stage, however small either may be, 
and however limited the collection, is to keep each genus together, placing the tallest plants farthest ft-om 
the eye. Sometimes this will form a thin, straggling group from the front of the shelf or stage to the 
back (fig. 588. pelargonium, geranium, and erodium), and at other times, a sub-orbiculate group in the 
front (oxalis,) middle {olea,) or back parts {cassia). This is a very simple rule, easily recollected and ap, 
plied, and every master and head gardener who approves of it, ought to insist on its being carried into 
execution in every case, whether in the open air or in hot-houses, where pots of plants are to be set 
down together ; unless, indeed, it should, in the case of diseased plants, interfere with culture. The ef- 
fect of this mode may be very well estimated by inspecting the hot-houses, or open air collections of pots 



826 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part IIL 



538 




extensive green-houses and beds of pots of alpines and other herbaceous plants, is adopted on account x)f 
its utility. 

6209. The following directions respecting the particular jdant-hahitations of floricvi- 
ture, are chiefly taken from Sweet's Botanical Cultivator (of 1 820), and Cushing's Exotic 
Gardener (of 1814). 

6210. Frame. Very little management is requisite for this department, as the plants 
kept in cold-frames are so hardy, that for seven or nine months of the year the sashes do 
not require to be put on. All that is requisite is to expose the plants to the air the whole 
of every day during winter when the weather is open, by drawing off the lights ; to 
attend to watering them moderately, during winter in mild weather in the morning 
after sunrise, and in summer in the evening. Once a-year in spring each plant 
should be examined, and such changes made in the soil, size of the pot, head of the 
plant, roots, &c. as the experience of the gardener, the appearance of the plant, or the 
object desired by cultivating it may dictate. Tlie routine culture of weeding, staking, 
picking off decayed flowers, leaves, &c. need not be insisted on ; and the culture of par- 
ticular species or even tribes cannot here be entered into. ( See the Catalogue of Frame 
Plants, in Chap. VIII.) 

6211. Green-house. The plants of this department, Sweet observes, only require 
protection from frost in winter. The more air tliey have given them when not frosty, 
the more healthy they will be. On a fine morning, the sooner air is admitted the 
better ; but it is best to shut up pretty early in the afternoon, particularly if likely to be 
a cold night. No fire is required, except frost is expected m the night, or the houss 
should be damp with continued wet weather; then a little fire is requisite to dry the house, 
as plants are more liable to be injured by damp than by cold. The plants should be 
looked over most days to see if any require water, which must only be given when quite 
dry, in the winter season : from nine to twelve o'clock in the morning is the best time 
for watering them ; for, if watered in the afternoon, they are apt to be chilled at night, 
which makes their leaves look yellow and unhealthy. When the surface of the mould is 
green with moss, &c. the top should be taken off, and the surface moved with a flat stick, 
but not deep enough to disturb the roots ; if a little fresh mould is wanting on any of 
them, it should be added. Always be careful to put the same kind of soil they are al- 
ready grown in ; for a different kind put on injures plants more than some cultivators 
are aware of. 

6212. When the weather begins to get warm in spring, some air should be left all night to harden the 
plants before they are set out ; a little must be left at first, and continue to increase it every night till 
they have full air, if the weather will allow of it. The time of setting them out in the open air depends 
entirely on the weather. Sometimes they may be put out with safety by the middle of May, in other sea- 
sons not till the latter end ; but they had better stay in a little too long than be put out too soon. Calm 
cloudy weather is the best time for setting them out, when as sheltered a situation as possible should be 
chosen for them. The best time for shifting them in fresh pots is early in spring : some shift them before 
they are set out, and let them make fresh roots while in the green-house, which is a very good plan, par- 
ticularly for young or tender plants. If any plants are too tall, and want cutting back, it should be done 
early in spring, as soon as they begin to grow; then they have time to recover themselves, and make good 
bushy plants by autumn. 

6213. Cuttings require to be put in at various seasons, and in different situations. From Christmas to 
May may be considered the best time for cuttings in general ; but some will require to be put in at various 
seasons throughout the year, according to the state of the shoots. The best time for watering green- 
house plants in summer is as late as possible in the afternoon, then they have all the night to refresh 
them. If watered in the morning of a warm day, they will dry again almost immediately. Plants should 
not remain out too long in autumn, as they are liable to get too much wet, and the worms get in the pots. 
The middle of September should be the latest, but give them full air as long as the weather will permit. 
{JBot. Cultivator, 121.) 

6214. Stove. The management of stove plants, according to the same author, 
whose experience and success are exceeded by none in the cultivation of exotics, de- 
pends a great deal on the kind of house in which they are grown ; but there is little 
diflSculty in growing them well, if the house can be kept up to a proper heat, and a suf- 
ficient quantity of air can be. given when required. Close glazing is to "be preferred ; 



Book II. CULTURE OF BOTANIC HOT-HOUSES. 



327 



either the lights should be leaded, or the laps stopped with putty, so that a sufficient 
quantity of air may be always given, and the house kept to a more regular heat. When 
the laps of the glass are left open, a great deal of air is admitted, which is often injurious, 
particularly on a cold windy night. The thermometer should never be allowed to be 
below 60° of Fahrenheit's scale ; if it gets above 70° on a fine day, a little air may be 
given, which should be taken away early, and the house shut up warm ; it then requires 
less fire to keep up the heat through the night. If the house is heated in the common 
way by flues, and the plants are plunged in tan, care must be taken not to give these 
too much bottom heat, as it will injure their roots, or too much water in winter, as it is 
apt to rot them. Particular caution is necessary for watering in winter, not to wet the 
tan, as it makes the worms very troublesome ; they often destroy young plants by 
throwing the mould out of the pots ; but a better way is the one now very generally 
adopted, viz. to do without plunging in tan. Some hot dung or tan may be still kept 
in the pit to throw up a little warmth, on which should be put a good thickness of sand 
or gravel for the pots to stand on, and the plants will thrive much better than when 
plunged in tan : it is also coming nearer to nature, which should be always studied in 
the cultivation of plants, both in soil and situation. In tropical countries it is the sun 
that heats the earth in which the plants grow, not the earth that heats the air ; and 
the heat must be kept up in the stoves accordingly. If the houses are heated by steam, 
no tan is required. The plants may be set on stages, or any way that is most conve- ' 
nient. Some of them may be planted out in the house, where they will grow in greater 
perfection, and flower and ripen fruit better than when confined in pots. 

6215. To have plants look well they should be always kept clean and free from insects : if infested with 
any species of aphis, the house should be smoked with tobacco, which instantly destroys them. The red 
spiders are likewise a great pest to cultivators, but are also easily destroyed. One pound of sulphur vivum, 
mixed up in a pail of quick -lime, and the flues brushed all over with it as a common whitewash, will de- 
sti ')y any quantity of them, and make the house look light and clean. The mealy bug is also troublesome if 
lei i to increase on the plants ; but as soon as they appear they should be brushed off as well as the scaly in- 
sects ; for, if left to increase, they will disfigure the plants, and be very difficult to get rid of. In fine 
weather the plants should be often sprinkled over with water from an engine, and the house shut up warm 
.afterwards, which is a great means of keeping them clean and making them grow luxuriantly. Air 
should be given in the morning as early as possible, in fine weather, as it sweetens the house, and makes 
the plants healthy. It should also be taken away early in the afternoon, and the house shut up warm, that 
they may not be chilled by the night air. 

6216. Jn potting plants, care should be taken to drain the pots v;ell with broken potsherds or rough bits 
of turf ; for nothing injures them more than letting them get sodden with too much wet. The best time 
to shift them in fresh pots is the spring, but some will require to be shifted again in autumn, to have them 
thrive well. The free-growing kinds cannot be well overpotted if there be plenty of room for them in the 
houses : they will thrive and flower better for being in large pots. Others that are more tender should 
be kept in as small pots as possible, that they may not get sodden, and lose their roots. {Bot. Culti- 
vator, 1.) 

6217. The reserve hot-houses oi Xhe ornamental garden maybe divided into those for 
forcing hardy flowering plants and shrubs, and those for propagating exotics by seeds,, 
cuttings, or otherwise. 

6218. Herbaceous plants and /lowering shrubs are generally forced in pits or low houses; and as soon as 
the flower-buds begin to expand, removed to the green-house or drawing-room, there to prolong the flower- 
mg season. The shrubs should be previously established in the pots, by being planted and plunged in 
the open reserve-garden a year beforehand : the autumn before forcing they should be thrown early into 
a state of rest, by covering them with canvass frames to exclude rain and sun, but so as to admit cold and 
air. This operation should be commenced in July ; and the first course of pots may be removed to the pit 
in November or earlier. Herbaceous plants of most sorts, especially of the fibrous-rooted kinds, may be 
taken up with balls, and planted in pots early in the autumn preceding the winter in which they are to be 
forced. Fusiform-rooted sorts earlier, as they do not rise so easily with balls ; and the bulbous sorts, the- 
bulbs being out of ground, may be planted in the end of autumn, plunged in the open ground, and covered 
with rotten tan or ashes, and taken up as wanted. It is of some consequence to remark, that the flowers 
should be pinched off both the shrubs and herbaceous plants, the summer preceding the forcing season, 
in order to communicate additional strength, and aid in throwing them more early into a state of rest. 
The bottom heat may either be from tan or dung, or a vault heated by flues or steam ; but the former we 
consider as most to be depended on. The temperature of the air of the house may at first setting in the 
plants be kept at 50° or 55° ; and in a fortnight, raised 10 degrees higher. After that, it may be kept up 
to 65° or higher, admitting air during sunshine. The temperature of the pit should be kept as high as 
that of the air. Successional supplies shou'd be kept for the first fortnight in a cooler house, or in the 
coolest part of the pit ; or the temperature, on their admission, may be somewhat lowered. The other 
points of routine culture need not be entered into. 

6219. The i^rojmgation-house requires to be kept at a much more moderate tempera- 
ture both as to the atmosphere and the bottom heat than the forcing-pit or the principal 
stove. It need seldom exceed 60° in winter, and 65° in summer. Abundance of air 
must be given at certain seasons when damp and mouldiness begin to appear ; and 
shading and watering, so as to produce a moist atmosphere, must be attended to in the 
summer season. 



828 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Chap. VIII. 

Floricultural Catalogue. — Herbaceous Plants. 

6220. A JloHcultural catalogue, as copious as that which we have given of culinary plants 
and fruits, would greatly exceed our limits. Plants grown for ornament are so numerous, 
that we cannot particularise separately the culture of each individual species ; but, with 
the exception of some of the more choice sorts, as the florists' flowers, &c., must collect 
them in groups, and detail a mode of culture applicable to the whole group. We shall 
first commence with herbaceous flowers, and these we shall arrange as florists', or select 
flowers, border-flowers, and herbaceous plants for particular purposes. 

Sect. I. Florists', or Select Floioers. 

6221. Florists' Jiowers are so called as being " flowers" by way of eminence, and be- 
cause the principal sorts of them for a long time almost exclusively engaged the attention 
of the flower-gardener. The Dutch, in this, as in most other departments of gardening, 
were the first to bring it into notice, and more particularly by the great excellence to which 
they attained in the culture of florists' bulbs. In the culture of that tribe, they still excel ; 
but the fibrous-rooted flowers, as the carnation, auricula, &c. ; and the tuberous-rooted 
kinds, as the dahlia, paeony, &c. are brought to a higher degree of perfection in Britain 
than any where else. Ornamental flowers, like culinary vegetables which have been 
long and highly cultivated, acquire a magnitude, succulence, and confonnation of parts 
which render them widely different from what they are in their natural state. This takes 
place both in double flowers, that is, when the petals of the corolla are increased in num- 
ber, or by the transformation of other parts of the flower into petals ; and also in single 
flowers, or those in which the petals do not exceed the common number. A flower so 
changed by cultivation, can no more be compared to the blossom of the same species in 
its wild state, than a headed cabbage or a broccoli can be compared to the wild cabbage 
of our sea-shores. Hence have been formed, by the common consent of florists, what 
are called canons of criticism, by which to estimate the properties of new varieties of 
established sorts of florists' flowers. To the hyacinth, tulip, auricula, and a few other 
sorts, particular canons are adapted ; but the merits of a number of other select 
flowers, double and single, are only to be judged of by general rules, such as fulness 
of floral leaves, roundness of outline, brilliancy and distinctness of color, &c. Under 
each species we shall give the establislied criterion, or canon, as far as generally agreed 
on. We shall take the plants of this section in the order of bulbous, tuberous, ramose, 
and fibrous rooted flowers. 

SuBSECT. 1. Hyacinth. — Hyacinthus Orientalis, L. {Bot. Mag. 937.) Hexandria 
Monogynia, L. and Asphodeleie, B. P. Jacinte, Fr. ; Hyacinthe, Ger. ; and 
Giacinto, Ital. ( fig. 589.) 

6222. The bulb of the hyacinth is tunicated, 
the leaves broad and green, from the centre of 
which arises a scape, with a spike of flowers, 
pointing in all directions, and by which it is 
known, at first sight, from Hyacinthus nonscrij)- 
tus, L. (Scilla nonscripla, W.), in which the 
scape is drooping, and the flowers all tui-ned to 
one side. It is a native of the Levant, and 
abundant about Aleppo and Bagdat, where it 
flowers in February ; here it flowers in March 
and April. It vvas cultivated by Gerrard in 
1596 ; but had, doubtless, long before been im- 
proved by the Dutch, who have added greatly to 
the strength and beauty of the plant, and produced 
almost innumerable varieties. 

6223. Varieties. Gerrard mentions the single and double 
blue, the purple, and tlie white. Parkinson, in 1629, enu- 
merates eight sorts. Miller says, the Haerlem gai-deners 
distinguish near 2000 sorts, and generally publish cata- 
logues of them from year to year. At present, the ta.ste for this flower being considerably abated, 
the Dutch and English catalogues contain only a few hundred sorts. Mason's catalogue for 1820, 
contains three hundred sorts with names. These names are quite arbitrary, being given by the 
grower after himself or some public character; and therefbre they are here omitted. They are arranged 
as double blues, whites, reds, and yellows, and single sorts of the same colors ; the blues and reds arc the 
most numerous ; the yellow, those of which there is least variety. Only single hyacinths were at first 
cultivated ; but about the beginning of the last century attention was paid to double flowers by Peter 
Voerhelm, whose first double flower was named Mary, and is now lost ; but his third flower, the King of 
Great Britain, which is now looked upon as the oldest double hyacinth, was greatly preferred to all the 
flowers known, and the price of it was then above 1000 florins, or 100/. sterling. Up to the middle of last 




Book II. 



HYACINTH. 



829 



century, the greatest attention was paid at Haerlem to raising new sorts of double flowers ; and as much 
as 200/. has been known to be given for a root : but, since that period, the taste for this and other bulbous 
flowers has considerably declined, and at present there are few sorts for which more than 10/. are asked ; 
the general price being from one to ten shillings a bulb for the varied sorts, and what are called the com- 
mon mixtures are sold at from 11. to 3/. a liundred. A variety degenerates, under bad treatment, in two 
or three years ; but in Holland some have been preserved nearly a century. 

6224. Criterion of a fine double hyacinth. ( fig. 589. a) " The stem should be strong, tall, and erect, sup- 
porting numerous large bells, each suspended by a short and strong peduncle, or foot-stalk, in a horizontal 
position, so that the whole may have a compact, pyramidal form, with the crown, or uppermost flower, 
perfectly erect. The flowers should be large, and perfectly double, i. e. well filled with broad bold petals, 
appearing to the eye rather convex than flat or hollow ; they should occupy about one half the length of 
the stem. The colors should be clear and bright, whether plain, red, white, or blue, or variously inter- 
mixed and diversified in the eye ; the latter, it must be confessed, gives additional lustre and elegance to 
this beautiful flower. Strong bright colors are, in general, preferred to such as are pale." 

6225. - Propagation. By seed for new varieties ; and by ofFset-bulbs for continuing 
approved sorts. 

6226. By seed. " The seed should be saved from such sorts as have strong and straight stems, and a 
regular well formed pyramid of bells, not perfectly single, but rather semi-double. It should not be 
gathered till it has become perfectly black and ripe, at which time the pericarpium will appear yellow 
on the outside, and will begin to open. The stem, with which the seed is connected, is then to be cut oflP^ 
and placed in a dry, airy, cool situation, where it may remain undisturbed till the time of sowing, which 
is the latter end of October, or beginning of March : it should then be sown about half an inch below the 
surface of the soil, in a deep box, filled with good sound garden-mould, mixed with sand, or the hyacinth 
compost, which should be afterwards placed in a warm situation during winter. It will never require 
to be watered, or have any other attention paid to it than to keep it free from weeds and frost, till it has 
remained in this state two years ; it must then, on the approach of winter, have an additional stratum of 
the compost placed upon it, about half an inch thick ; and at the third year, in the month of July, the 
roots may be taken up, dried, and treated in the same manner as large bulbs or offsets : some of the roots 
will flower the fourth year, one half of them will at the fifth, but by the sixth year, every healthy root 
v/ill exhibit its bloom, and then the hopes and expectations of the cultivator will be realised or disap- 
pointed. He may think himself fortunate, if one half of the plants that first appeared, are in existence 
at this period ; and if he can at last find one flower in five hundred deserving a name or place in a curious 
collection, he may rest perfectly content, and be assured that he has fared as well as could reasonably be 
expected, and better than many who have bestowed equal attention on the subject." {Maddock.) 

6227. By offsets. These may be planted in the beginning of October, or soon after they have been 
separated from the parent bulbs. Plant them in an open part of the garden, in rows about two inches 
deep, upon a bed raised six or eight inches above the common level, consisting of a sandy soil, pulverised, 
eighteen inches deep ; the surface of the bed should be made rather convex or rounding, so as to throw 
off heavy rains ; no further attention is necessary, except to stir the surface of the bed occasionally, keep 
it free from weeds, and preserve it from very severe frost. The proper time to take them up is the 
same as for large roots. Offsets, if preserved in health, will bloom weakly the second year; but by the 
third tolerably strong, and may afterwards be placed on the best bed. 

6228. Choice of full-grown roots. " Such roots as have attained the age of four or five years, bloom 
stronger in this country than any other ; they afterwards gradually decline, either by dividing into offsets, 
or diminishing in size and strength : but in Holland, owing to the, peculiar circumstances of the soil, 
climate, situation, &c. the same bulb has been known to produce blossoms twelve or thirteen times, nor is 
it ever known to die merely with age." 

6229. Soil and site. " The bed on which they are to be planted should be situated in rather a dry 
and airy part of the garden ; a southern aspect is to be preferred, sheltered on the north and east. When 
the situation is determined on, the dimensions of the bed should be marked out, and the soil entirely taken 
away to the depth of at least two feet ; the earth in the bottom must then be dug up and pulverised, one 
spit or nine inches deeper, and the space above filled up with a compost consisting of one third coarse 
sea or river sand ; one third fresh sound earth ; one fourth rotten cow-dung, at least two years old ; arid 
earth of decayed leaves for the remainder. These ingredients are to be well mixed and incorporated, 
and about a fortnight previous to planting, the bed should be filled up with the compost to about four 
inches above the level of the path on the south or front side, and ten inches on the north side, so 
as to form a regular slope or inclination towards the sun." 

6230. In the Butch Florist of Nicholas Van Kampen and sons, florists at Haerlem {Haerlem 1760, and 
Newcastle-upon-Tyne, 1763), sandy earth is said to form the basis of the culture of the hyacinth. It 
ought to be of a bluish-grey or blackish-red color, not sharp, but rather handling smooth, a little greasy, 
and taking a pearl color when dry ; the water passing through it being sweet and of a delicate taste. The 
best method of enriching sandy earth, according to their experience, " is to make use of cow-dung, rotted 
leaves of trees, and tanners' bark ; but the bark ought not to be taken fresh out of the pits, but laid up 
for two years at least, that it may be well rotted and consumed to one half : — Our method, then, of mak- 
ing compost for hyacinths is as follows : Two sixth parts of grey sand ; two sixths of well rotted cow- 
dung ; one sixth of tanners' bark, quite rotted and reduced to earth ; one sixth of tree-leaves, also well 
rotted. All these materials must be thrown into a heap, not more than three feet thick, so that the rays 
of the sun may have power to penetrate through it, and warm it to the bottom ; for which purpose the 
heap must be laid in a high and open place exposed to the south. Once a month it ought to be carefully 
turned, and the bottom thrown to the top, that all parts of it may partake of the benign influence of the 
sun and elements : this is essential ; and this turning must be continued for twelve months, taking care 
not to sift the compost, because, in that case, it is apt to run into lumps, which would be of dangerous 
consequence." (Quot. by Neill, in Hort. Tour, 536.) 

6231. In St. Simon's work, entitled Des Jacintes (Amst. 1768, 4to.), in which the Dutch mode of cul- 
tivating the hyacinth is fully detailed, the compost used at Haerlem is said to be rotten cow-dung, rotten 
leaves, and fine sand. The leaves of elm, lime, and birch are preferred to those of oak, chestnut, walnut, 
beech, plane, &c. which do not rot so quickly. The cow-dung is collected in winter from cattle, stall-fed 
upon dry food, without any mixture of straw or other litter. The leaves, when decayed and fit for use, 
are thus mixed with the other materials : " First, they place a layer of sand, then one of dung, and 
then one of rotten leaves, each being eight or ten inches thick. These layers are repeated till the heap is 
six or seven feet high, a layer of dung being uppermost, sprinkled over with a little sand to prevent the 
too powerful action of the sun upon it. After the heap has lain thus for six months or more, it is mixed, 
and thrown up afresh, in which state it remains some weeks to settle before it is carried into the flower- 
beds. This compost retains its qualities about six or seven years ; but the Dutch avoid setting hyacinths 
in it two years successively ; in the alternate years they plant tulips, jonquils, narcissuses, crocuses, irises, &c. 
in the same beds ; nor do they venture to set hyacinths in the compost the first season, when, the fresh 
manure might be injurious to them." {Herbert, in Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 165.) 

6232. Planting. This should take place " from the middle of October to the middle of November ; if it 
is done earlier the plants will appear above ground in the middle of winter; or if it is deferred later, 
the roots will be weakened by their natural tendency to vegetate. On planting the roots, the surface of 
the bed should be covered with a little fresh sandy earth, about one inch thick, raked perfectly smooth 



890 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part 111. 



590 



and even, and have the exact situ- 
ation for every bulb marked upon it 
(yig. 590.), regularly mingling the co- 
lors of red, blue, and white ; the yel- 
lows being classed with the latter. 
The width of the surface of the bed 
may be four feet, and six rows may be 
placed across it at eight inches asun- 
der, the two outside rows being each 
four inches from the sides of tlie bed ; 
consequently the space between the 
centre of each bulb will be about nine 
inches and a quarter. On planting 
hyacinths, a little clean sand should 
be placed underneath, and likewise 
upon the roots, to prevent the earth 
adhering too closely to them ; the 
whole are then to be covered with 
sound fresh sandy earth, from three to 
four inches deep, according to the size ol the bulb ; when this is completed, the bed will be about eight 
inches above the level of the walk on the soutli or front side, and about fourteen inches on the north ; it 
will look neater and have a better effect, if it is supported on each side with a strong frame of thick 
boards or brick-work. 

6233. The Dutch Florist directs, " After a place has been pitched on for planting the flowers, the natural 
earth must be dug out to the depth of three feet, and the bottom covered with a stratum of cow-dung half 
a foot thick ; which must be beaten and trod down till it be very firm and compact like a hard crust, so as 
to prevent any communication with the sub-soil. Then the hole is to be tilled up with comixwt, six inches 
above the level of the garden. The compost should be laid into the designed bed about a month before 
the roots are planted ; for if it be put in later, the earth might settle while the roots are in it, which would 
lay them too deep. The proper season for putting in the bulbs is October and November. They ought to 
be set at the depth of four or five inches ; but early flowering varieties may be one incli deeper, which will 
bring them to flower at the same time with the others." (Quot by Neill, in Hort. Tour, 537.) 

6234. Culture. " In order to preserve it from very heavy rains or severe frosts, it should be hooped over, 
and mats or canvass should be placed at hand ready to cover the bed on such emergencies ; but it will not 
be necessary to defend it from moderate rains or slight frosts: for too frequent and long covering will de- 
prive the roots of the due action and influence of the air, which ought to be avoided as much as possible : 
it were even better to run the hazard of incurring a slight injury by the omission of covering on some oc- 
casions, than overdo it to the certain detriment of the plants. If frost is permitted to penetrate so far into 
tlie soil as to reach the bulbs, especially about the time that the i)lants begin to appear above ground, it 
will produce a singular effect, by causing some of them to shoot forth or discharge their stems and blos- 
soms ; but if the roots become entirely frozen through, they are in danger of being destroyed. The earlier 
sorts will begin to open and show color about the beginning of April ; it will be proper to screen such from 
the too powerful effects of the sun, which, if not prevented, would bleach and tarnisli their colors, parti- 
cularly the reds and deep blues ; but if they are properly defended from it, their colors will be preserved, 
and they will, in some measure, be kept back, so as to be in full bloom with the later sorts, especially if the 
roots of the early sorts have been planted about an inch deeper than the rest : it is a very desirable object 
to ,have a uniform bloom. It will be necessary to support the stems as they advance in height ; for tliis 
purpose, small sticks or wires, painted green, should be forced into the ground, immediately behind the 
bulbs, either in an erect position or leaning a little backwards, to which the stems are to be rather loosely 
tied with small pieces of green worsted, as soon as they begin to bend, or are in danger of breaking with 
the weight of the corolla or bells : this operation must be repeated as they advance in height, for it is im- 
possible to do it at one time so as to answer the purpose. When the greater part of the bed appears in 
color, a covering, or awning, should be erected over it and the path in front : the awning should consist 
of a strong frame of wood, ten feet high in the centre, and seven feet at the sides, covered with Irish or 
Scotch sheetings, or Russia duck, which will effectually keep out rain, and admit a great degree of light; 
it should come down close to the bed on the north side, in order to preserve it from cold winds, which are 
prejudicial to the bloom. The covering {fig. 591.) should be 
60 const urct«d, by means of lines {a) and pulleys {b), as to be 
easily and expeditiously rolled up, or let down, as occasion 
requires, to affbrd the plants the full benefit of light and air, 
at all favorable opportunities, that is to say, when the air is 
mild, and light clouds intervene, so as to blunt the sun's ray. 
This sometimes, and, indeed, often happens to be the case 
from seven to nine o'clock in the morning, and from four to 
six in the evening, at which time the sun has also less power 
than in the middle of the day. A bed of hyacinths never 
requires to be watered at any period ; the rains that happen 
after planting are generally more than sufficient both for 
the roots and the bloom ; and after the bloom is over they 
are rather prejudicial than otherwise, except when very 
moderate. Although covering in the manner described 
presents and exhibits the bloom to the greatest advantage, 
yet it evidently has a tendency to weaken and injure the 
bulbs, and ought not, therefore, to be continued more than 
two or three weeks at most; but as soon as the general 
bloom declines, the beds should be immediately exposed to 
the open air, and the mats and hoops should be replaced, as before, to keep off heavy rains." 

6235. Taking up the bulbs. " It is the practice in Holland, to take up the bulbs about three weeks or a 
month after bloom, in the following manner : As soon as the plants begin to put on a yellowish decayed ap- 
pearance, they take up the roots and cut off" the stem and foliage close to, or within half an inch 'of, the 
bulb, but leave the fibres, &c. attached to it ; they then place the bulbs again on the same bed sideways, 
with their points towards the north, and cover them about half an inch deep, with dry earth or sand, in 
the form of a ridge, or little cone, over each : in this state they remain about three weeks longer, and dry 
or ripen gradually ; during which, as much air is admitted as possible, but the bed is preserved from heavy 
rains, and too hot a sun ; at the expiration of this period the bulbs are taken up, and their fibres, which are 
become nearly dry, gently rubbed off ; they are then placed in a dry room for a few days, and are afterwards 
cleaned from any soil that adheres to them, their loose skins taken off, with such offsets as may be easily 
separated. When this dressing is finished, the bulbs are wrapped up in separate pieces of paper, or buried 
in dry sand, where they remain till the return of the season for planting. Another, and less troublesome, 
mode of treatment after bloom, though perhaps more hazardous, is to keep the bed airy, and rather dry, 

»1 i. J 1.. J .^^ j^^^ 

, &c. and preserved in 




till the stems and foliage appear nearly dried up or consumed ; this will seldom happen to Ije the case in less 
than two months ; the bulbs are then to be taken up, cleaned from the fibres, soil, &( " 



sand or papers as before directed.' 



Book IT. 



TULIP. 



831 



6236. Van Kampen and son say, " We take up the roots as soon as the leaves begin to withef , that is, when 
their plants begin to turn yellow. We then break off the steins an inch above the bulbs, which we afterwards 
cover with earth, in which they are to lie till the gross moisture be dried up by the warmih of the sun. 
We make a little heap of earth, and place the roots in it, bottom downwards as they grew ; and the heap is 
covered with an inch or two of soil. When the bulbs have lain in this heap for three weeks, they are 
to be taken out in fair weather, and laid on a board in the sun for an hour, after which, they are to be 
cleared of the earth and offsets about them, taking great care not to give the least bruise er wound." 
(Quot. by Neill, in Hort. Tour, 558.) 

6237. Herbert says, " The bulbs should be placed in an airy store-room, and not suffered to touch each 
other ; a moveable stage of open lattice-work, furnished with drawers, may be used, and the utmost atten- 
tion should be paid to ventilation." A French florist, Baudry, is said {Caled. Hort. Mem. iv. 76.) to have 
lost annually a number of his hyacinth-bulbs through dampness until he adopted the expedient of placing 
them in the store-room with the base of the bulb upwards. Drawers of lattice-work would effect the same 
object. 

6238. Diseases. " Hyacinths are subject to various diseases, arising from different causes ; that distem- 
per commonly known by the appellation of the ring-sickness, is of all others the most dangerous and most 
difficult to cure ; in short, the only effectual remedy is to cut out the diseased part, till no brownness, yel- 
lowness, or other symptom of distemper remains. The sound part will survive the operation, if it consist 
of no more than the outside tunic of the bulb, without any heart; but it will, in such case, only be able 
to produce offsets, and will never recover itself so as to flower again : as soon as the operation is performed^ 
the wounded part should be exposed to the sun, till it becomes dry, to prevent mouldiness, and it will be 
best to replant it in some dry situation soon after." " The Dutch," Herbert observes, " are much troubled 
with this disease; the cause of which appears to be a futigus, the spawn of which is nurtured in the 
cow-dimg. The only remedy is the removal of the distempered bulb, and the compost that was in contact 
with it." 

6239. Duration of bulbs. " The hyacinth delights in a sandy soil and saline atmosphere ; of conse- 
quence it succeeds best on the sea-coast, or in situations very near to the sea. In more inland parts, it 
will generally be found necessary to procure an annual reinforcement of fresh imported bulbs, in order to 
make good or supply the deficiencies arising from the loss, or impaired health and strength of many of those 
that have bloomed on the best bed the preceding spring. Those who are well acquainted with the hyacinth, 
always allow about one bulb in twelve to fail, notwithstanding no visible blemish or decay is discernible at 
the time of planting ; such generally have a corps de reserve, in narrow deep pots, which, at the com- 
mencement of bloom, they plunge or sink into the bed, wherever a vacancy, or weak sickly plant makes 
its appearance ; by which means the uniformity and regularity of the bed is preserved, without any visible 
defect or alteration." Herbert says, " My own experience enables me to say, that the nurseryman in the 
neighborhood of London may produce hyacinth-bulbs equal, if not superior, to those imported from Hoi. 
land ; though, perhaps, with greater loss from disease, owing to his not being able to procure the dung of 
cattle fed upon hard food, and free from straw." {Hort. Trans, vol. iv. p. 168.) 

6240. Forcing the hyacinth. Plant the roots in narrow deep pots, filled with sandy loam, in October ; 
plunge them in and cover them with old bark-leaves or sand ; they will soon throw down roots, and a part 
may then, say in November, be plunged in bottom heat, which will come into bloom by Christmas, and 
successional supplies can be taken from the store planted in October, and a bloom thus kept up till they 
flower in the open air. The best sorts to force are the single blues and reds. 

6241. Blowing hyacinths in water-glasses. Blue or dark-colored glasses are more favorable to the pro- 
gress of the roots than light ones, light being injurious to all roots. The bulbs to be blown in the glasses 
should be planted in October, in earth in which they push their fibres more regularly, and taken up as 
wanted, washed from the earth, and placed in the blowing-glass ; the glasses may be kept in a warm room 
or in a stove. ,The water should be soft, and the glass so full that it may rise a fourth of an inch on the 
bulb. As often as it becomes fetid, it should be renewed. 

SuBSECT. 2. Tulip. — Tuli2)a Gesneriana, L. {Bat. Mag. 1135.) Hex. Monog. L. and 
LilicB, J. Tulipe, Fr. and Ger. and TuUpano, Ital. {Jig. 592.) 
6242. The bulb of the tulip is solid, and sends up an upright stem from twelve to eigh- 
teen inches high, with glaucous leaves, and a large erect flower, the petals in its wild state 
having a black base. It is a native of the Levant. It is common in Syria, and is sup- 
posed by some to be the " lily of the field," referred to in Christ's address from the mount; 
though Sir J. E. Smith thinks the amaryllis lutea is there meant. In Persia, where the 
tulip is abundant, it is considered as the emblem of 
perfect lovers. " When a young man," says 
Chardin, "presents one to his mistress, he gives 
her to understand, by the general color of the 
flower, that his body is on fire with her beauty, and 
by the black base of it, that his heart is burned to a 
coal." According to Gesner, the tulip was brought 
to Europe in 1559. It was cultivated in Eng- 
land by James Garnet, in 1577, having been intro- 
duced, according to Hakluyt, from Vienna. To- 
wards the middle of the 17th century, the tulip 
became the object of considerable trade in the 
Ne|herlands ; it rose to its gi-eatest height in 1634, 
and the three following years. According to 
Beckmann {History of Inventions, art. Tulip), for 
one root of a variety called the Viceroy, articles to 
tlie value of 2500 florins were agreed to be de- 
livered. The Semper Augustus has been sold for 
2000 florins ; one person agreed to give 4600 florins (about 460/. ), with a new carriage, 
two horses, and complete harness ; and another agreed to give twelve acres of land for a 
single root. The trade was generally followed for a time, and having no foundation in 
real utility, like the Missisippi and South Sea schemes, it was a mere gambling business, 
and rightly named Tulipomania. John Barclay, the celebrated author of the romance of 
Argenis, is said to have had this mania to such an excess, that he placed two mastiffs as 




832 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



sentinels in his garden. This was between 1600 and 1621, when he lived at Rome, in 
an ill aired and unwholesome habitation ; in wliich, however, he chose rather to continue 
than abandon his favorite flowers. {Clialmers's JSiog. Diet.) The taste for tulips in Eng- 
land was at its greatest height about the end of the 17th and beginning of the 18th cen- 
tury ; about the year 1730 or 40, it had declined and given way to the taste for botany, 
■ and new plants from America and other foreign countries. The tulip, however, is still 
much cultivated both in Holland and England, near large towns, though in the latter 
country there are now very few good collections in the private gardens of tlie higher classes. 
Like the auricula^ and some other flowers, it is more the flower of the tradesman and oper- 
ative manufacturer than of the botanist or man of fortune. 

6243. Varieties. Parkinson, in 1629, enumerates 140 sorts : but " to tell of all the kinds," he says, 
" which are the pride of delight, they are so many, and as 1 may say almost infinite, doth both pass my 
ability, and, as I believe, the skill of any otlicr."" In Parkinson's time, tulips were divided into prcecoces, 
or early blowers, and serotince, or late blowers, with an intermediate division of diibice mediae, doubtful 
or middle blowers, which, for the most part, liowever, belonged to the serotince. The early blowers have 
short stems, and the Due Van Tholl is almost the only variety in repute among modern florists. The great 
variety in the catalogues is produced from the late blowers, which iiave tall stems and much richer colors ; 
of these the Ciitalogue of Maddock in 1792 contained the names of 665 sorts. In Mason's catalogue for 
1820, are six sorts of early tulips ; four of perroquets, or middle blowers ; 22 double sorts, and upwards of 
600 single late sorts. The'Dutch florists class their late-blowing tulips as under : a variety will last an un- 
known number of years. 

Prime baguets (baguette, Fr. a rml or | -n ell formed cups, with wlute bottoms, I of the French florists, vith bottoms 
wand) ; very tall ; fine cups with white well broken with fine brown, and all white, or nearly so, from diftierent 
bottoms, well broken with fine brown, from the same breeder. breeders, and broken with variety of 

and all from the same breeder. Incompvirable \''erports ; very perfect I colors. 

Baguets Higaut's (suppose<l from Ri- I cups, cherry and rose, and white hot- i Bi/arres (bharre, Fr. odd,_ irregxilar) ; 
gaud, some eminent florist's name, or j toms, well broken with shining brown. I ground yellow, from different breed- 
roK^'ewfufe, red-faced); not quite so tall, Byblomens, or next flowers, the J/u»WHt/j ers, and broken with variety of colors, 
but with strong stems, and very large | I 

6244. T/ie na7nes of the different varieties, classed under these heads, being perfectly arbitrary, and con- 
stantly changing, their insertion here could be of no use. (See the Annual Catalogues of Bulbous Boots, 
j)ublished by the nurserymen and florists.) What are called breeders are procured from seed, and consist 
of one plain color on a white or yellow bottom. These being cultivated on a dry and rather poor soil be- 
come broken or variegated, and produce new varieties. The time that elajjses before they break varies 
from one to twenty years or more, and sometimes this change never takes place, so that whoever thinks 
of raising new varieties of tulijis from seed must be possessed of an ample fund of patience and persever- 
ance. Tlie early dwarf tulip, known among florists as the Van Tholl, is a distinct species, T. suaveolens. 
Formerly there' were several varieties of early dwarf kinds. 

6245. Criterion of a fine variegated late tulip. "The stem should be strong, elastic, and erect, and 
about thirty inches above the surface of the bed. The flower should be large, and composed of six petals : 
these should jjroceed a little horizontally at first, and then turn upwards, forming almost a perfect cup, 
with a round bottom, rather widest at the top. The three exterior jjctals should be rather larger than the 
three inferior ones, and broader at their base : all the petals should have perfectly entire edges, free from 
notch or serrature ; the top of each should be broad and well rounded ; the ground-color of the flower, at 
the bottom of the cup, should be clear white or yellow, and the various rich-colored stripes, which are the 
principal ornament of a fine tulip should be regular, bold, and distinct, on the margin, and terminate in 
fine broken points, elegantly feathered or pencilled. The centre of each leaf, or petal, should contain one 
or more bold blotches, or stripes, intermixed with small portions of the original or breeder color, abruptly 
broken into many irregular obtuse points. Some florists are of the opinion that the central stripes, or 
blotches, do not contribute to the beauty and elegance of the tulip, unless confined to a narrqw stripe, ex- 
actly down the centre, and that they should be perfectly free from any remains of the original or breeder 
color : it is certain that such appear very beautiful and delicate, especially when they have a regular nar- 
row feathering at the edge ; but the greatest connoisseurs in this flower unanimously agree, that it denotes 
superior merit, when the tulip abounds with rich coloring, distributed in a distinct and regular manner 
throughout the flower, except in the bottom of the cup, which, it cannot be disputed, should be a clear, 
bright white or yellow, free from stain or tinge, in order to constitute a perfect flower." 

6246. Propagation. By seed for new varieties, and by offsets for continuing approved sorts. 

6247. By seed. Select such breeders as have tall strong stems, with large well Ibrmed cups, clear in the 
bottom, and save seed from these in preference to the finest of the variegated or broken sorts, as the seed 
of such sorts produces nothing but poor weak breeders of no value. " It should remain growing on the 
stem till the pericarpium becomes of a brownish color, and begins to open; it is then sufficiently ripe, and 
should be cut off, with six or eight inches of the stem, and treated afterwards, in all resi)ects, agreeable to 
the directions given for tlie management of hyacinth-seed. Some of the seedlings will bloom by the fourth 
or fifth, and most, if not all, by the seventh year." 

6248. By offsets. These should be planted soon after they are separated from the parent bulb, in beds of 
fresh sandy loam, with a little rotten cow-dung placed from seven to twelve inches below the surface, in a 
dry airy situation, from two to four inches deep, according to the size of the roots. The beds should be 
raised six or eight inches above the alleys, formed rather convex on the surface, and may be provided 
with hoops and mats, to be used to guard them, as occasion may require, from heavy rains and severe frosts. 

6249. Choice of full-grown bulbs. Select such as have not lost the brown skin, are not mouldy or soft at 
the root end, and are full, solid, and rather pointed at the other. Just before planting, strip off the brown 
skin so as to leave the root perfectly bare and white, jierforming the operation with great care, to avoid 
bruising or wounding the root, especially at the lower end, where the fibres are formed, which is, at the 
season of planting, extremely tender. 

6250. Soil and situation. *' The situation for the best bed should be in an open airy part of the garden ; 
when that is fixed upon, the ground should be marked out, agreeable to its intended dimensions, and the 
soil taken out twenty inches deep; the bottom is then to be filled up with sound fresh earth, ten inches thick, 
upon which is to be placed a stratum of two-year-old rotten cow-dung, and earth of the above description, 
about one half of each, well mixed together, twelve inches thick ; and again, upon this is to be placed an- 
other stratum of the same kind of earth as that of the bottom ; this is only to be two inches thick at the 
sides, and three inches at the middle, which will give it a small degree of convexity; this is to be ;per- 
formed about the 20th of October, /. e. a week or two before planting, to give the bed time to settle; at 
tiie expiration of two weeks, the earth will have subsided, so as to be about two inches higher than the cir- 
cumjacent j)aths ; but if heavy rains intervene between this preparation of the bed, and the time of plant- 
ing, it will be proper to keep them off, in order to preserve the temperature of the earth, as it would be 
rendered too compact and adhesive, by a redundancy of moisture for the fibres to pass freely through it, 
which ought to be avoided." Hogg recommends a fresh, rich, loamy soil, of rather a sandy nature, which 
should be dug twelve months at least before it is used, and a small portion of well rooted dung must be 
added. He says, an intelligent old tulip-grower assured him, that the best compost he" had ever hit on 
" ivas three fourths rich yellow loam ; one fourth leaf-mould ; one sixth two-year-old horse-dung; and 



Book II. 



TULIP. 



8S5 



one eighth sea-sand, well incorporated, and laid in a bed, or stratum, for the plants, two feet deep." (TV. 
an the Carnation, Auricula, Tulip, &c. 142.) 

6251. Planting. The most proper time is from the end of October to the tenth of No- 
vember. On the day made choice of for planting, rake the surface of the bed smooth 
and even, still preserving its convexity, and mark the exact situation for every root upon 
It. The proper distance between each root is seven inches from centre to centre ; and if 
the rows are seven inches asunder, the roots will form squares of similar diameter on all 
parts of the bed. A bed consisting of seven rows makes the noblest appearance, when 
it is of sufficient length, with a path round it about two and a half or three feet wide ; but 
where the number of roots is small five rows may suffice, and the path, in that case, may 
either extend quite round the bed, or only on one side, at pleasure. If, therefore, the bed 
consists of seven rows, it should consequently be fifty inches wide, which will allow a space 
of four inches between the outside rows and the sides of the bed ; but if the bed contains 
only five rows, it will only require to be three feet wide, to give the roots similar distances. 
Having sprinkled a little clean sand where the roots are to be set, place them with great 
exactness and add some very sandy earth, so as to completely envelope each root in a lit- 
tle cone of it ; then cover the whole very carefully with strong, sound, fresh loam, about 
four inches thick at the middle of the bed, gradually decreasing as it approaches the sides, 
where it should be about three inches thick ; thus will the convexity of the surface be in- 
creased in a proper degree, and the roots will be covered with soil, to a depth propor- 
tionate to their size and strength ; the largest and strongest having beep placed in the cen- 
tre rows, and the smaller and weaker on those of the outside. No tulip-root, whatever 
may be its size or strength, should be planted more than four inches deep from the upper 
side of the root ; nor should any blooming root be planted less than two and a half or 
three inches deep, however small it may be. The soil made use of for covering the bulbs 
shoidd be frequently turned over, and thoroughly exposed to the sun and air, some time 
before it is made use of, that it may be rendered perfectly sweet and free from the acrid qua- 
lity that most soils are subject to, when taken considerably below the surface. But if the 
bed is only to contain five rows, with a path in the front, and none behind, then it will be 
proper to plant the smallest and lowest grov/ing roots in the front, next the path, and so 
gradually to increase in the size of the roots to the fifth or last row, which should con- 
tain the strongest and largest of all ; when the roots are properly covered with soil , as 
before directed, the surface of the bed will slope one way, forming an inclined plane : it 
will be necessary to support its highest side at least with boards or brick-work, otherwise 
the earth would be liable to crumble down and leave the roots bare or too shallow. 

6252. Future culture and management. " When the operation of planting is concluded, the bed may be 
hooped over, and taken care of, in the manner directed for hyacinths, i. e. so as to preserve it from very 
heavy rains, and severe frosts ; but either one or the other, in moderation, will be of more service than 
injury to it. By the end of February every plant in» health will be visible above ground ; some tall early 
sorts ^vill be two or three inches high, others one inch, and the latter sorts just making their annearance ; 
indeed, a very few remarkably late sorts may be a week longer before they appear, but not more : if, on 
examination, any distemper or canker is discernible on the foliage, about this time, either alcove or an 
inch or two below the surface of the soil, it should be carefully cut out with a sharp knife, and the 
wounded part left exposed to the sun and air, which will presently heal it : a fine dry day should be made 
choice of for this operation. If the surface of the bed appears to be of too close and solid a contexture, it 
shoiild be carefully stirred up, about two inches deep, which will admit the air more freely, and prove, in 
all respects, very beneficial. By the end of April, some of the plants will probably be gi-own so tall as to 
require the hoops to be raised a little, to secure the blossom from injury : attention to this part must not 
be omitted, for the blossom is very tender and likely to be bruised and disfigured, by a very slight blow, 
or rub against the hoops. As soon as any of the earlier sorts begin to show color, they sliould be shaded 
from the sun, for, when its heat is considerable, it will cause the colors to run and intermix, in such a 
manner as to destroy the elegance and beauty of the flower ; some sorts are more particularly liable to 
this effect than others, and will be spoiled in five minutes. When the greater part of the blossoms have 
begun to open, a frame, or awning, should be erected over the bed and paths, nearly similar to that for 
hyacinths {Jig. 591.) : that is to say, so as to keep out rain, and admit as much light as possible ; this must 
be thrown off, or rolled up, at every favorable opportunity, as directed for hyacinths, except that it should 
be done rather earlier in the morning, and later in the evening ; because the sun has acquired a greater 
degree of power at this season of the year than earlier. If these frequent exposures to the light and air be 
omitted, the colors of the flowers will be faint and Vr-eak, and the grandeur of eflfect v/ill be lost, or consi- 
derably lessened. The cloth covering should come down on each side, within about three feet of the 
ground, to allow a free circulation of air, except in windy weather ; from the eflPects of which, the flowers 
must be most carefully preserved, by a continuation of the covering quite down to the ground, on the 
windy side ; a line of mats sewed together, and their upper edge nailed to the frame on that side, may 
answer the purpose, if the cloth is not of sufficient length. Tulips never require to be artificially watered, 
in the hottest and driest seasons, at any period from planting to taking up the roots ; nevertheless, mo- 
derate rains may always be admitted before, and in very small quantity after the bloom is over ; but early 
in the spring, they are absolutely necessary, in order to procure a strong bloom. When the awning is 
erected, the hoops should be carefully taken away, the sides and ends of the bed should be neatly boarded 
up, and the paths lowered two or three inches, to bring the flowers nearer to the eye : a slight frame, 
about two feet high, should surround the bed, to prevent the garments of spectators from rubbing against, 
or breaking off the flowers ; linos of small twine, painted green, and corresponding with the rows of 
flowers, should pass from one head of the bed to the other, fastened to the end pieces of the frame, and 
stretched tight ; to these the stems of the flowers are to be loosely tied with short pieces of green worsted, 
which will preserve a pleasing regularity of appearance, without stifliie'ss and fonriality. Tulips will bear 
to be covered a longer time in bloom than most other flowers, witliout sustaining any considerable injury : 
it may be continued three weeks with great safety'. If any roots should perish, or fail to i)roduce bloom, 
the deficiency may be made good by transplanting, with the tube transplanter {Jig. 93.), from a reserve- 
bed, or the lower end of tlie stems of flowers, taken from the reserve-beds, may be immersed in phials, 
filled vrith water, and sunk into the bed, so as not to appear above ground these will continue in bloom 

S H 



834 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



several day?, without requiring to be changed, and v/ill make a tolerable appearance. About a week or 
ten days after full bloom^ when the petals of many begin to drop off", the awning should be taken down, 
together with the frame, bojrJis, lie. that surround the bed ; and the mats and hoops may be replaced as 
before, to throw off excess of rain, as the case may require : and as the leaves or petals of any fall, the 
seed-vessel of such should be immediately broken off close to the stem ; for if suffered to remain on the 
plant, it wiU procrastinate the period of its maturity, and weaken the root considerably. The bed may 
remain in this state about a fortnight longer, by which time the grass, or foliage, will become of a yellow- 
ish-brown, and two or three inches of the top of the stem will wither, dry up, and become purplish : this 
denotes the critical period to take up the roots, because if done earlier, they will be weak and spongy, 
and if deferred later, their juices will become gross ; this will be manifest at the succeeding bloom, by too 
great a redundance of colorific matter in the petals, and the flowers being what is generally termed foul." 

6253. Taking up the roots. Dig them up carefully, and place them under cover, in a dry, airy, shaded 
situation. Here they may remain untouclied till August or September following. " Then it is proper to 
take off their loose skins, fibres, and such oflsets as are easily separated; observing not to leave the roots 
too bare, because the action of the air upon such would have a tendency to weaken and injure them, by 
dryhig up part of their juices ; the last brown skin, which ia so intimately connected with the root, should 
remain on it till the time of planting." 

625i. Diseases. The tulip is hardier, and less liable to disease and injury from weather, than most sorts 
of flowers ; it is sometimes attacked by grubs and wire-worms at the root early in spring, and then the 
best mode is to remove the plant and a portion of the soil, replacing the former from the reserve or 
ofFset-buds. 

6255. Forcing the tulip in pots or imier-glasses. The early dwarf sorts are well adapted for this purpose, 
especially the Due Fan Tiinll. They may be treated as in forcing the hyacinth. 

SoBSECT. 3. Ranunculus. — Banunculus Asiaticus, L, [Mill. Ic. 2. t. 216.) PoIt/. 
Polt/g. L. and Eanmiculacecs, J. JRenoncule, Fr. ; lianunkel, Ger. ; and Ranun- 
colo, Ital. [Jig. 593.) 

6256. The ranunculus from a fasciculus of small tubers sends up several bipartite 
^ leaves, and an erect branched stem Vv ith a terminating flower variously colored. It is a 

native of the Levaijt, and was cultivated by Gerrard in 1596. Though rather a tender 
plant, innumerable and highly beautiful double-flovvcred vaiieties have been raised from 
seed, cliiefly by the English florists, from the middle to the latter end of last century. 

6257. Varieties. Only double ranunculuses are held in esteem : of these, Parkinson, 
in 1629, enumerates eight; and Ray, in 1665, twenty sorts. Justice, in 1764, divides 
ranunculuses into Turkey and Persian ; of the former he enumerates eighteen sorts, and 
of the latter a hundred. What he calls the Turkey ranunculus is only a variety or sub- 
species with a very dark flower, which iVIiller also considered as a species, and named it 
K. sanguineus. Maddock, in 1792, had upwards of eight hundred sorts. Mason's 
catalogue for 1820 contains about four hundred names. " There are more varieties of 
ranunculuses," Maddock observes, " than of any other flower;" but as their names are 
arbitrary, it would be of little use to enumerate them here. A variety will last from 
twenty to twenty-five years. 

6258. Criterion of a Jine double ranunculus. {Jig. 593. a) " The stem should be 
strong, straight, and from eight to twelve inclies 
high, supporting a large well formed blossom, or 
corolla, at least two inches in diameter, consisting 
of numerous petals, the largest at the outside, and 
gradually diminishing in size as they approach the 
centre of the flower, which should be well filled 
up with them. The blossom should be of a hemi- 
spherical forai ; its component petals should be 
imbricated in such a manner as neither to be too 
close and compact, nor too widely separated ; but 
have rather more of a perpendicular than horizon- 
tal direction, to display their colors with better 
effect. The petals should be broad, and have per- 
fectly entire well rounded edges : their colors 
should be dark, clear, .rich, or brilliant, either con- 
sisting of one color throughout, or be otherwise 
variously diversified, on an ash, white, sulphur, or 
fire colored ground, or regularly striped, spotted, 
or mottled in an elegant manner." 

6259. Propagation. By seed, for new varieties, and by offset-tubers, or dividing the 
tubers for continuhig approved sorts. 

62G0. By seed. The seed of the ranunculus, Maddock observes, in no instance ever produces two 
flowers alike, or the same as the original. It sliould be saved from such semi-double flowers as have tall 
Strong steins, a considerable number of large well formed petals, and rich good colors, chiefly preferring 
the darker, but not to the exclusion of the lighter colored, when their properties answer the foregoing 
description. " The seed should lemain on the plant till it has lost its -verdure, and becomes brown and 
dry ; it may then be cut ofl', and spread abroad upon paper in the seed-room, exposed to the sun, that 
every degree of humidity may be exhaled from it ; in which state it should be put into a bag, and pre- 
served in a warm dry place " 

626!. January is the 'proper time to sow the seed. ; and in order to prepare it, it must be separated from 
the stalks to which it is connected, in the following manner, viz. in the first place, it should be taken out 
of the bag, and .spread thin upon a sheet of paper or tea-tray, &c. and placed before a moderate fire, till 
it is just warm, and no more ; the seed will then easily scrape off, by means of a penknife ; but great 
care must be taken to avoid scraping it off in lumps, or suffering any pieces of the stalk, dried petals ol 




Book II. 



RANUNCULUS. 



835 



the flower, or other extraneous matter to be mixed with it, which would create a mouldiness when sown, 
of very destructive consequence : when the seed is scraped in a proper manner, -it will have much of the 
appearance of clean coarse bran, with a little brown or purple speck in the centre of each cuticle, which 
is the kernel. When the seed is thus prepared, it should be sown in a shallow frame, provided with sashes j 
the soil should have been previously taken out, three feet deep, and spread thin upon the ground, till it 
has been perfectly frozen throughout, in order to destroy any vermin it may have contained, more parti- 
cularly the common earthworms. When the pit is filled up again with the frozen lumps of earth, it 
should remain till the whole mass has thawed, and subsided to its pristine bulk, or nearly so ; its surface 
should then be made perfectly smooth and even, and the seed sown upon it with the utmost regularity, in 
.such quantity as nearly to cover it ; the glasses should be placed over it immediately, and the frame kept 
closely covered with them, for tv/o or three days, till the seed begins to swell and soften ; a little light 
earth should then be sifte<l upon it, through a^fine sieve, but not sufficient to cover it ; this should be re- 
peated once or twice a-week, till the greater part of the seed disappears : it is proper to remark in this 
place, that such seeds as happen to be covered deeper than the thickness of a half-crown piece, will never 
vegetate, and must of course, inevitably perish. 

0262. It is ntcessary to keep the seed moderately moist, by gentle waterings with soft water, that has 
been exposed to the sun till it is a little warmed ; the rose of the watering-pot should be hemispherical, 
aild perforated with a great number of very small holes, that will discharge fine streams of water, in a 
very distinct and regular manner. About the time that the plants begin to make their appearance, it is 
proper to stir the surface of the earth with a pin, or silver bodkin, just sufficiently to admit air, and give 
liberty to the young plants to pass easily through ; this operation should be very carefully performed, to 
prevent breaking off the fibres, or raising and leaving any of the plants out of the earth, because one hour's 
sun upon such would inevitably destroy them. When the sun shines very hot, it is necessary to admit 
some fresh air under the glasses, and shade the frame with mats j but it should be close shut up with the 
glasses when the air is cold, and always at night. 

6263. After the plants are all up, and their two interior leaves appear, more air must be given, by hav- 
ing hurdles or lattice-work substituted for the glasses ; waterings must be regularly continued, in the 
manner before described, when the long continuance of dry weather renders it necessary : but fine warm 
showers of rain are always preferable, when they happen in due time. This kind of management is to be 
continued till the roots are matured, and fit to take up, which is known by the foliage becoming perfectly 
brown, dry, and nearly consumed. 

6264. The speediest and safest method of taking up these small roots is to pare off the earth, three inches 
deep, with a trowel or shovel, having previously carefully picked off the dried leaves, and any other ex- 
traneous matter that may be found upon it. The earth and roots, thus collected, are to be throyvn into a 
fine brass-wire sieve, that will not permit the smallest roots to pass through it ; the sieve is then to be 
worked in a large vessel or tub, nearly filled with water ; the earthy part Vvfill, in consequence, be dissolved 
and washed away, and the roots will remain in the sieve, where, by a little management, they may be 
easily separated from the stones, &c. which are mixed with them. The upper rim of the sieve must, at 
all times, be held above the surface of the water, otherwise some of the smallest roots will be lost, as 
they are frequently found floating on the surface, till they have imbibed a sufficient quantity of water to 
make them sink. The roots are to be dried and preserved, and are to be planted at the latter end of Oc- 
tober, or beginning of November ; the greater part, or such as have two or more claws, will blow strong 
the following summer. The Rev. W. Williamson sows half his seed in autumn, and the other half in 
January, in the open air. He prefers the autumnal sowing, if the winter proves mild, 

6265. By offsets. Unlike the offsets of the hyacinth and tulip, those of the ranunculus generally attain 
perfection in the season of their formation on the parent plant, and are therefore fit to be planted as full- 
grown tubers the same season in which they are removed. Smaller ones, which are unfit to bloom the 
following year, may be planted in a bed prepared as to be directed for the full-sized roots. 

6266. By dividing the tubers. " In minutely examining the crown of a ranunculus-root, several small 
protuberances will be found ; from each of which a shoot will arise, and the root may therefore be 
divided by a sharp knife into as many parts as there are protuberances ; and thus the danger of losing 
any rare variety is much diminishe'd. These sections will not bloom till the second year." {Hort: 
Trans. iv. 380.) 

6267. Choice of full-grown, roots. Select such as are sound and full in every part, and have plump 
and prominent buds. 

6268. Soil and situation. According to Maddock, a fresh, strong, rich, loamy soil is preferable to all 
others. Hogg recommends fresh loam, with a considerable portion of rotten horse or cow dung. The 
Rev. W. Williamson {Hort. Trans, iv. 375.) uses a stiff clayey loam with a fourth part of rotten dung. 
The situation should be open, but not exposed to violent winds or currents of air. *' The bed should be 
dug from eighteen inches to two feet deep, and not raised more than four inches above the level of the 
walks, to preserve the moisture more effectually : at about five inches below the surface should be placed 
a stratum of two-year-old rotten cow-dung, mixed with earth, six or eight inches thick ; but the earth 
above this stratum, where the roots are to be_planted, should be perfectly free from dung, which would 
prove injurious, rather than of benefit, if too near them. The fibres will draw sufficient nourishment 
from it at the depth above mentioned ; but if the dung was placed deeper, it would not receive so much 
advantage from the action of the aii-, which is an object of consequence." 

6269. Planting, " This may be done either before or after winter : if the soil and situation is remark- 
ably cold and wet, it will be bet;ter to defer planting till the. middle or end of January or beginning of Fe- 
bruary, as the weather may favor ; but, in other situations, the latter end of October or beginning of 
November is to be preferred, as the roots will have more time to vegetate and form themselves, and will 
in consequence bloom rather stronger, though only a few days earlier than those later planted. A bed, 
consisting of the variety called the scarlet-turbaned ranunculus, will produce a most brilliant effect ; if 
planted at the same time as the tulip-bed, they will bloom together ; they are hardier than any other ra- 
nunculuses, but may, in other respects, be treated in the same manner. The surface of the bed should 
be raked perfectly even and flat, and the roots planted in rows, at the distance of about five inches from 
each other. It is better to plant in shallow trenches, made nearly two inches deep, than to make holes' 
for the reception of the roots : there should be a little clean coarse sand sprinkled into the trench, and the 
roots should be placed with their claws downwards, from three to four inches asunder, according to their 
size : when the trench has received its roots, it should be carefully filled up level with the same earth that 
was taken out, so as to cover the root exactly one inch and a half deep, which is the only true depth to 
procure a good bloom : it is pointed out by nature in a singular manner ; for when these roots have been 
planted too shallow or too deep, in either case, a second root is formed at the proper depth, by which the 
plant is weakened to such a degree that it seldom survives a repetition of it. Williamson plants in spring, 
but never after the tenth of February ; and he frequently plants the roots in the same place for several 
years successively." {Hort. Trans, iv. 376.) 

6270. Future culture and manage fnent. Ranunculus-roots will remain several days 
in the ground after planting, before they begin to vegetate; during this period, they be- 
come very much swelled, by im'bibing the moisture of the soil, and are, in tliis state, 
extremely susceptible of injury from frosty much more so than when vegetation has actu- 
ally taken place. As soon as the bed is planted., a sufficient quantity of barley or oat 
straw should be placed near it, ready for a covering : in case of frost, it may perhaps be 

3 H 2 



836 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



necessary, during a very severe winter, to cover the bed in this manner ten or fifteen 
inches thick ; but the straw should be taken off at all favorable times : for the effects of 
covering too much or too long are as destructive as the reverse, especially before the 
roots have begun to vegetate, because tliey are then more hable to become mouldy than 
at any other period, than which nothing can be more prejudicial. Early in the spring, 
when the plants make their appearance above ground, so as to render the rows easily 
discernible, the surface of the earth between each row should be trodden or beaten, so 
as to make it firm and compact ; and if the soil is compressed with the fingers, quite 
close to the plants, it will keep out cold drying winds, and prove benefieial. It is ad- 
visable to make choice of a fine dry day, soon after rain, whilst the ground is still moist, 
to perform the above operation : when it is finished, a little long straw should be placed 
between each row, to preserve the surface of the soil cool and moist, till the foliage of the 
plants is sufficiently grown and expanded, to afford it shade without further assistance. 

6271. Water. April showers, and frequent rains in May, are essentially necessary to the growth and 
vigor of the plants : if these fail, soft water must be administered in sufficient quantity between the rows, 
by means of a common watering-pot, with a long tube or spout, held low, so as not to wash the earth 
into holes ; for it is better to avoid watering the plants themselves, as it may chill thera too much, and 
stagnate their juices. The consequences of omitting to water when necessary are these, viz. the plants 
will make little progress ; the blossom-buds of the strongest will be small, and the weaker plants will 
not bloom at all ; the grass, or foliage, will put on a sickly yellowish appearance, from which it will 
never recover during the season ; and, lastly, the roots will, when taken up, be small and lean. But such 
kind of waterings, however necessary, are by no means so salutary- to these, or any other flowers, as fine, 
warm, natural showers ; they can neither be so equally dispensed, nor are the plants naturally disposed 
to receive them when the atmosphere is dry, because their pores and fibres are contracted, and' they are, 
as it were, in the expectation of dry weather. Since it is evident that artificial waterings are, in all re- 
spects, so much inferior to natural, it is better therefore to wait a day or two, in hopes of a change of 
weather, than to be too hasty in watering, although the plants may appear to suffer for the moment, by 
the omission ; for if such a change should fortunately take place, they will receive infinitely more benefit 
from it than when both themselves and the soil are already saturated, or replenished, with moisture. 

6272. Shading. The weather in May is sometimes very clear and hot ; the plants ought to be shaded 
at such times by means of lotly hoops and mats, or some bettor contrivance, that will admit light and air 
freely ; a frame and covering, similar to that for hyacinths, would answer best, if expense and trouble 
were not to be considered : it will, however, be absolutely necessary to shade them, in some manner, during 
the period of bloom, otherwise they will continue but a very short time, especially the dark rich-colored 
sorts ; for, in proportion as their colors approach to black, is the injury they will receive from the rays of 
the sun, if permitted to shine upon them in full force; some of the very darkest cannot stand it one hour 
without being entirely spoiled. Tlie light-colored sorts will bear the sun's rays much better, reflecting them 
in proportion as they approach to white ; green is the only color that reflects and absorbs the rays of light in ' 
equal proportion, and is more predominant in the vegetable kingdom than any other. After the bloom is 
over, watering is no longer necessary, but shading, in the middle of hot days, is still very beneficial to the 
plants : it tends to prolong their vegetation, and the size and substance of the roots are thereby increased. 

6273. Taking up the roofs. By the end of June, or soon after, the greater part of the plants will ap- 
pear brown and dry : vegetation has then ceased, and it is the exact time to take up the roots, because if 
they are sufifered to remain in the ground till rainy weather ensues, they will begin to shoot afresh, and 
thereby sustain considerable injury. When the roota are taken up, their stems. Sec. should be cut off 
close, and they should be placed in a shady airy room, or situation, to dry gradually ; but before this is 
perfectly accomplished, it will be proper to clean and separate them, because, when quite dried, they be- 
come very hard and brittle, and there is great danger of breaking off their claws : some may be separated 
into many complete roots, although they are so closely connected, as, on a superficial observation, to have 
the appea'rance of only one large root. "Nothing more remains to be done, till the return of the planting 
season, except to stow the sorts separately in bags or boxes, for the sake of convenience, in a dry room, in 
which state it is possible to keep them out of ground for two or three years without perishing, a"lthough it 
evidently tends to weaken and injure them : there have been instances known of the ranunculus-roots sur- 
viving ti"ll the fifth or sixth year; they were, however, rendered extremely weak, nor could any but very 
strong roots retain their vegetative powers for so long a period. Williamson takes up the roots immediately 
after the color of the foliage begins to change. 

6274. Forcing. The ranunculus may be forced, but loses much of its strength of stem and brilliancy of color. 

SuBSECT. 4. Anemone. — Anemone, L. Polyand. Polygyn. L. axiA. Ranunculace^s, 3. 
Anemone, Fr. ; Windblinne, Ger. ; and Anemone, Ital. 

6275. There ai-e two species of anemone cultivated as florists' flowers, under the com- 
mon name of anemone : the A. corojiaria, L., or 
poppy-anemone (Bat. Mag. 841.) (Jig. 594. a), 
a native of the Levant, and introduced in 1596 ; 
and the A. hortensis, the star or broad-leaved 
anemone (6), a native of Italy, and introduced 
from Holland in 1597. Tlie anemone has been 
cultivated from as early a period as the tulip, and 
many fine double varieties produced both by the 
Dutch and British. The single and semi-double 
flowers are nearly in as high estimation as the 
double ones. 

6276. Varieties. These are numerous, but few 
of them are named. Parkinson, in 1629, enu- 
merates thirty sorts of single narrow leaved ane- 
mones, and nearly as many double and single of 
the broad-leaved sort. Mason's catalogue for 
1820 contains seventy-five sorts. A variety will 
last for twelve or fifteen years. 




Book II. 



ANEMONE. 



837 



6277. Criterion of a fine double anemone, (fg. 595.) " The stem should be strong, 
elastic, and erect, not less than nine in- 
ches high. The blossom, or corolla, should 
be at least two inches and a half in dia- 
meter, consisting of an exterior row of 
large substantial well rounded petals, or 
guard-leaves, at first horizontally ex- 
tended, and then turning a little upwards, 
so as to fonn a broad shallow cup, the 
interior part of which should contain a 
great number of long small petals, imbri- 
cating each other, and inther reverting 
*"rom the centre of the blossom ; there are 
a great number of small slender stamens, 
intermixed witli these petals, but they are 
short, and not easily discernible. The 
color should be clear and distinct when diversified in the same flower, or brilliant and 
striking if it consists only of one color, as blue, crimson, or scaidet, &c., in which case 
the bottom of the broad exterior petals is generally white ; but the beauty and contrast is 
consideiably increased when both the exterior and interior petals are regularly marked 
with alternate blue and white, or pink and white, &c, stripes, which in the broad petals 
should not extend quite to the margin." 

6278. Propagation. By seed for new varieties, and by dividing the root for continu- 
ing approved soits. 

6279. By seed. Select " single or 'semi-double flowers, that have strong, tall, and erect stems, large well 
formed cups, and petals of very brilliant colors. The seed must be gathered from time to time as it 
opens; for, bein^ verj- downy and light, it will otherwise be blown away by the first breeze of wind, or 
fall down and be lost : it maybe sov,-n at the same time, and be treated in all respects like that of ranuncu- 
luses ; the seedlings will, like those, blow strong the second year. It 'u-ill be found very difficult to sow 
anemone-seed in a regular manner : it is united with, and enveloped in a downy substance, that upon 
being put together in quantity, adheres in such a manner as to render it necessary to make use of some 
sand or earth to separate it oil sowing ; nor v.ill this be efTected sufficiently without considerable labor in 
rubbing it for a lojig time amongst the earth, as it ought not to adhere together in lumps, which would 
not allow the young plants space enough to form their roots. There will be found but few double flowers 
amongst the seedlings, nor can it hardly ever be expected there should, if the seed be entirely saved from 
single ones ; of course, the greater number of broad petals the flower of the seed-bearer possesses, so much 
greater is the probability of procuring large double flowers from the seed of it." 

6280. By dividing the root. When the division is properly made, every piece will blow the first year, 
and is therefore to be treated in the same way as such as are full-grown. 

6281. Choice of full-grown roots. Select fresh plump roots of moderate size; large overgrown roots, 
%vhich are hollow in the centre and often decayed, are to be avoided, as they never blow strong. 

6282. Soil and situation, and preparation of the bed. The same as for the ranunculus. 

6283. Planting and future culture. The distance between the roots may be the same as for the ranun- 
culus. Attend "to place that side of the roots next the soil in which the decayed rudiments of small 
thread-like fibres will be observed, and cover about two inches deep. " Anemones are hardier than 
ranmiculuses, and, consequently, may be always planted in the autumn with safety ; the most advisable 
time is about the middle of October, by which means they will blow a week or two earlier than the tulips : 
if they are planted ten days or a fortnight after the tulips, they will all bloom together; but a few 
days earlier or later in the planting will scarcely be perceptible at the time of flowering : it is, how- 
ever, proper to obser\'e, that such roots as are planted in October, will blow stronger, and, when taken 
up, will be found of a larger size than those that are planted towards the end of November, especially 
if the winter proves mild; but if the winter sets in early, and proves severe, late-planted roots will 
not have time to vegetate before frosty weather takes place ; in which case there will be great danger 
of their perishing, unless they are covered with straw, just sufficiently to keep frost from the roots, as 
they are then in a state of inactivity, but replete with moisture, whicli renders them more susceptil'le of 
injury from frost, and, at the same time, in much greater danger of mouldiness than after vegetation has 
commenced. The covering must therefore be taken off and put on, as often, and in such proportion, as 
the exigency or circumstance of the case requires." Water and protect from high winds and heavy 
rains, as directed for ranunculuses. 

6284. Taking up the roots. " Anemones continue longer after bloom in a state of vegetation than ra- 
nunculuses, probably because of their greater degree of succulcncy ; and even at the proper time to take 
them up, it will sometimes happen, that part of their foliage will not be entirely divested of greenness and 
moisture; this will often be the case when frequent showers of rain intervene, and are admitted between 
the times of blowing and tlie maturity of the roots : when it thus happens, much skill is required to ascer- 
tain the critical period to take up the roots ; for if they are suffered to remain in the damp or v/et ground 
a few days too long, they will shoot afresh, and be tliereby materially weakened and injured ; it is, indeed, 
better to take them up rather too earlv, than suffer them to re-vcgotate in this manner; but the roots 
will not be so firm and solid as if do!ie at the exact time. The safest and most effectual method to pre- 
serve them from these disagreeable consequences, is to keep off all rains after the bloom is quite over, by 
means of mats on hoops ; the roots will then regularly and gradually mature, and the foliage will, in like 
manner, become brown and dry, which will point out the true time to take up the roots ; and this will 
usually happen to be about a month after full bloom. The whole subsequent treatment of the roots, till 
the time of planting, is the same as for ranunculuses, with only the following caution, viz. that as the 
roots are exceedingly brittle, it is necessary to handle them very gently upon dressing or cleaning away 
their fibres, and the "soil that adheres to them ; h owever, should only small pieces break off, such should 
not be thrown away, as each will, in the course of a few years, become a blooming root, if it has an eye, 
without which it is of no value ; but that seldom happens to be the case." (Maddoc/.:) Anemones may 
be forced like the ranunculus; but, as it generally destroys ths roots, the finest sorts should not be devoted 
to this purpose. 




3 H 3 



S38 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSEOT. 5. Crocus. — Crocus, L. Trian. Monog. L. and L-idece, B. P. Safran, Fr. • 
Safran, Ger. ; and Zaffarano, Ital. 

6285. The bulb of the crocus is round, solid, and compressed, with a netted skin, from 
the centre of which arise four or five grass-like leaves, and one or two flowers. Out of 
the centre of the tube of the flower arises a slender style, crowned by a broad flat stigma 
of a gold color. After the flower is past, the germ, which hitherto was seated on the 
bulb at the base of the tube, pushes 
out of the ground, and ripens its seeds ; 
a singular economy in nature, and which 
occurs only in the colchicum, and a few 
other plants. All the known species 
of this genus may be considered as 
florists' flowers. Many botanists, indeed, 
reckon only two species, the C. vernus, 
or spring-blowing crocus ; and the 
C. sativus, the saffron, or autumH 
crocus. ' . 

From the Crocus vernua (Eng. Bot. 343. and our .fe. 

596.), they consider that the C. versicolor (Jig. 59/.), 

the C. iiflorus Ifig. 598. a), the C. siisiana (b), the 

e. sulphureus (c), and the C nuesianus (d and c), -with 

their numerous subvarieties, have been produced by 

culture or locality. 
From the Crocus sativus, or safFron-crocus (Eng. Bot. 343. 

and our Jig. 599. a), they think it likely that the 

C. serotinus (Jig. 599. b) and the C. nudijlorus (Jig. 

599. c) have been also originated by cultivation or 

accident. 



598 







6286. All the sorts of crocus have been, time out of mind, and still are, great ornaments 
to the garden ; the spring sorts coming into flower in February and March, and the 
autumn sorts in September and October. The color of the spring crocus in its wild 
state, in Switzerland, is white with a purple base ; it is considered as naturalised in Eng- 
land, but, when found wild, is almost always of a yellow color. The autumn crocus, 
or saffron, is also found wild in some places, and considered as naturalised ; but it ap- 
pears to be an African plant, which its Arabic name, sahafaran, seems to justify, and 
introduced originally in Edward the Third's time. Its color is generally purple or blue, 
as is that of most of the autumn varieties in cultivation at present. 

6287. Varieties. None of these are double. Of the spring crocus, Parkinson has 
enumerated twenty-seven varieties ; the fundamental colors of which are blue, purple, 
yellow, and white. Miller recites twelve as leading sorts. Mason's catalogue for 1820 
mentions " twenty named sorts, '^' besides the light, dark, and striped purple, cloth of 
gold, the Scotch crocus beautifully striped, the white, the large and small yellow, and 
several striped sorts. The Dutch are continually producing new varieties, as are some 
florists in this country, of which Haworth (Hort. Trans, i. 122.) may be cited as an in- 
stance. Of the autumn crocus, Parkinson has enumerated four, and Ray six varieties. 
Miller has only four : the sweet-smelling, of a deep blue ; the mountain, of a paler blue ; 
the many-flowering, bluish; and the small -flowering. Most of these varieties are now 
lost. 

6288. Criterion of a good crocus. Clear or brilliant cx)Iors, and each color distinctly 
marked and finely pencilled in the striped and variegated sorts. 

6289. Propagaiion. By seed, for new varieties ; and by offset-bulbs, for common 



Book II. 



NARCISSUS. 



839 



purposes. The latter generally flower the first spring after planting, and are treated in 
all respects as full-grown roots. 

6290. By seed. The following directions are by Hawortli. " The seeds of crocuses are best sown, 
immediately after being gathered, in light dry eai-th, in large pots, or pans, or small shallow boxes', 
with a sufficiency of holes and potsherds at the bottom, for the purpose of draining off' with certainty all 
superfluous moisture thinly ; for almost every seed will vegetate, and cover not more than half an inch 
witli the moulcL The most eligible aspect, or situation, for the seminal boxes, until the autumnal rains 
set in, is a moderately shady yet unsheltered one : permitting them to receive all the influence of the 
weather, except such lieavy showers as would wash bare (^le seeds. As soon, however, as the autumnal 
rains commence, remove tlie boxes to a warm aspect ; and protect them from all excessive rains, frosts, 
and snows, by the occasional shelter of a garden-frame : allowing them, nevertheless, the benefit of the 
full air at other times, but more esjiecially after the seminal leaf (for they have but one, being monoco- 
tyledonous plants), eager to commence the career of life, urges its fine setaceous point above the surface 
of the earth. This occurs soiuetimes about the end of the year; but oftener in earliest spring. After 
this it is quite essential that they should have complete exposure to the air, even in frosty weather; 
screening them, however, occasionally, like early radishes, with loose straw, from other injurious effects 
of frost; so as to prevent their being raised out of their infantile beds by its baneful effects. In this 
manner may the young crocuses be treated until the sun acquires sufficient power to dry the earth in 
their boxes, so as to require daily waterings. It will be then found advantageous to remove them to a 
cooler, but not sheltered situation, and here they may remain until their leaves die down ; giving them, 
as just hinted, at all times, and in every situation, while their leaves are growing, such discretional rose- 
waterings, when the sun is not shining, as they may reasonably appear to require : but never until the 
earth they grow in becomes dry: not any whatever, after their leaves begin to look yellow. After this 
period, it is necessary to defend them from all humidity, except dews and gentle rains, until the end of 
August, or beginning of September." 

G291. From weeds, wor7)is, slugs, and snails, " it is almost needless to observe, they should constantly be 
kept as clear as possible. And if the surface of the earth in their boxes is occasionally stirred with the 
point of a knife, or fine piece of stick, it will never fail to be attended with beneficial effects, and invigo^ 
rate the bulbs : operating no doubt, as a sort of hoeing, and, like that important practice, (as the writer 
of this paper conceives,) proving saluDrious to vegetables of every denomination, not only by lightening 
the soil, but by admitting iiew accesses of atmospheric air towards their roots ; and thereby facilitating, 
and stimulating their absorbent inspiration of its oxygen : without a due supply of which all vegetables, 
as well as animals, eventually become feeble and sick. If, notwithstanding the precaution 
of thinly sowing the seeds, the plants in any of your seminal boxes should have grown so thickly 
together as to have incommoded each other, it will be desirable to have such taken up, and replanted 
immediately further asunder in fresh earth, and about three quarters of an inch deep. But if they are 
not too crowded, they v/ill require no shifting this their first autumn ; but merely about a quarter of 
an inch of fresh mould sifted over them, previously stirring and cleaning the surface of the old from 
moss and weeds ; and observing not to bury the young bulbs not yet so large as lentils, deeper than 
three quarters of an inch, or an inch at the most. The second season requires exactly the same manage- 
ment as the first. But as soon as their second year's foliage has passe l away, the roots should all be 
taken up, and replanted again the same or following day, into fresh earth, of the same kind as before, 
about an inch deep, and as much apart, and treated as above. Nor does the third season demand any 
alteration in their management ; sifting over them in autumn half an inch of fresh earth. The spring 
following, if they have been duly attended to, most of them will show flowers (a few, perhaps, having 
done so the season before) in the midst of their fourth crop of leaves ; fully rewarding with the cheering 
colors of their now faces all the preceding assiduity and care." {Hort. Trans, i. 125.) 

6292. Choice of bulbs. Observe that the base is not mouldy, nor the bud or summit of the bulb 
decayed. 

6293. So'tl, situation, and culture. They will grow in any common soil, but prefer a loamy sand. Octo- 
ber is the best season for planting; the more select varieties are grown in beds like the hyacinth, and the 
colors mingled in the same manner; the distance from bulb to bulb about three inches. The more ordi- 
nary sorts are grown as border-flowers, and form an important part of the early flowers of the front row. 
ifig. 552. a) They are very hardy, and require no care tiU the leaves begin to fade, when they should 
be taken up, and kept in a state of rest for two or three months. Some do not take them up oftener than 
once in three years, which answers very well for the border sorts. Even these, however, should not be 
left longer, because, as the young bulbs are formed on the tops of the others, they come nearer to the sur- 
face every year, till at last, if neglected, they are thrown out and lost. 

SuBSECT. 6. Narcissus. — Narcissus, L. Hex. Monog. L. and Amaryllidees, B. P. 
Narcisse, Fr. and Ger. ; and Narcisso, Ital. 

6294. The bulb of the narcissus is pear-shaped and tunicated, the leaves succulent and 
linear, and the flower-stems, which are from six to eighteen inches in height, bear either 
solitary or fasciculated flowers ; the color of the flower is either white or yellow, and 
generally odoriferous. Most of the species are natives of the south of Europe, but one, 
the N. Fseudo- Narcissus, is a native of England, and common in woods in clayey soils. 
They come into flower in February, March, and April. 

6295. Species and varieties. The popular division of this genus is into daffodils, 
white narcissus, jonquils, and polyanthus narcissus. 



The daffodils are N. Pseiido Narcissus 
(EiifT. Bot. 17.), of which the varieties 
are the common double, the double 
with white petals and a yellow cup, 
the single with, yellow petals and a 
golden cui), three or four concentric 
cups, Tradescant's daffodil, and above 
a do/en other nameless varieties ; the 
peerless, or two-flowered daffodil {N. 
Ujlurus) (Bii^. Bot. 276), and a variety 
{S. b. a. (eicliivr) with one flower only 
on the scape ; the two-colored daf- 
fodil (iV. lAculur) {Bot. Miif;. 1187.), a 
native of Spain, and a variety of the 
great yellow Spanish, the largest flower 
of the genus; the least daffodil (N 



minm-) {Bol. Ma^. 6.) ; the rush-leaved 
{N. iriaiulrus) [Bet. Mag. 48.) ; and 
some other species and varieties. 
The white narcissi are the poets' nar- 
cissus {N. poeiiais) ; the early-flowered 
{ N. p. a. uni^ustifolius) ; and the late- 
flowered (N. p- majalls); the musk- 
narcissus {N. mosckaius) {Eng. Bot. 
1300.) ; the eastern narcissus {N. ori- 
cntvlU) {Pot Mug. 948.), and the yel- 
lov,i.';h and large-flowered varieties; 
the hoop-petticoat narcissus {N. bul- 
Ijocodium) {Bot. Mag. 88.); and the 
paper narcissus {N. papyraceus), with 
other varieties 



qvilla) {Bat. Mag. 15.), so named from 
its rush or jonc-like leaves ; the double- 
flowered jonquil ; the sweet-scented 
jonquil {N. odorus) {Bot. Mag. 934:.) ; 
the great jonquil {N. calathinus) {Bot. 
Mag. 78.) ; and some minoi- varieties. 
The polyanthus naixissi are the com- 
mon (A'. tazzeHa) {Bot. Mag. 925.) ; the 
sulphur-colored, single ana double ; the 
white and yellow, single and double ; 
and above a hundred other sorts, with 
arbitrary names given by the Butch, 
who have highly improved tliis division 
of the genus. Some of these sorts are 
considered species by botanists. 



6296. Ciilerion of a good narcissus. Strong erect stems ; regularity of form and dis- 
position in the petals and nectars ; distinctness and clearness of color ; and in the many- 
llowered sorts, the peduncles all of tJie same length, and coming into flower at once. 

6297. ProjHigaLion. By seed for new varieties, but generally by offsets, which, as they 

S H 4 



840 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



seldom flower the first year after separation, should not be planted with the full-grown 
roots, but in a bed of light loamy soil by themselves in the reserve-garden. They should 
not be planted later than the beginning of September. 

6298. By seed. Miller directs to sow in flat pans, filled v/ith fresh, light, sandy earth, about the be- 
ginning of August, soon after the seed is ripe ; to place the pans where they will receive only the morn- 
ing sun till October. Then expose them to the full sun, and protect them from heavy rains and frosts 
till April, when they will have come up, and must be removed to their first situation. In June, the 
leaves wiii have decayed, when some fresh earth is to be shifted over the surface of the pans. Treat 
them in other respects during the second winter as during the first. The end of the second summer 
after sowing, the roots are to be taken up and planted at about three inches' distance everyway, in beds 
raised and rounded to throw off the water. These beds are to be protected in winter by old tan-ashes 
or haulm. After remaining two years in this situation, they are to be taken up and planted in others, 
dug deep, and with a little rotten cow-dung buried in the bottom of the fibres to strike into. Here the 
roots are to be planted at six inches' distance, having earth sifted over them when the leaves decay, and 
tan or ashes in winter. The second season of their growth in this bed, that is, the fifth from sowing, 
most of the bulbs will come into flower. Such as are esteemed good flowers may be taken up and treated 
as full-grown bulbs ; but those which have not flowered, or of which the flowers are of doubtful excel- 
lence, may remain another year. Miller says, none should be rejected till they have flowered two or 
three times : as it often happens, that their first blowing is not near so beautiful as their second and 
third. 

6299. Choice of full-grown bulbs. Select such as are rounded towards the base rather than compressed, 
with full sound tops, and bottoms free from mouldiness or decayed fibres. 

6300. Soil, situation, and planting. As eastern aspect is to be preferred ; and, according to Miller, the 
best soil is fresh, light, hazel loam, mixed with a little very rotten cow-dung. The bed in which they 
are to be planted must be excavated three feet deep, and filled with this compost, and then the roots 
planted on it about eight inches' distance every way, and covered from six to eight inches, in the man- 
ner directed for tulips. The best time for planting is August, or the beginning of September, 

6301. Culture. Stirring the soil, weeding, and watering are all that is in general required : bat such 
as wish to produce a very perfect show of flowers, shelter with an awning in the manner recommended 
for hyacinths. In winter, the beds require the protection of tan or litter, which should be put on in 
October or November, and removed, and the soil stirred in February or March. Where the narcissi 
are cultivated for commercial purposes, the strength of the bulb is greatly increased by cutting off the 
flower-stem when the flowers begin to expand. The flower is still valuable, being expanded tiU in a 
marketable state by inserting the stalk in water. " Some years ago I gained admittance into the grounds 
of Daniel Carter, at Fulham, who has long cultivated large quantities of polyanthus narcissuses for sale, 
and was surprised to find all the crop nearly gathered, though very early in the season. His son, how- 
ever, explained the mystery, by taking me into a large barn, which was filled with the gathered flowers, 
blowing in pans of water ; and he told me that by doing this, the bulbs continued to produce as abund- 
ant' crops evory year, as new ones imported from Holland. The practice was suggested to him by re- 
marking, that in a bed left for seed one year, very few roots sent up a complete bunch of flowers the 
following season, and many roots none at all. He therefore now cuts off the stalk close to the ground, 
as soon as two or three of the flowers are expanded, but is very careful not to injure the leaves." {Hort. 
Trans, i. SG2.) 

6302. Taking up the bulbs. The. bulbs should not be taken up oftener than every third year, if they are 
expected to flower strong and make a great increase. If they remain longer than three years, the offsets 
will become so numerous as to weaken the bulbs, which will at first flower weakly, and in time cease al- 
most entirely to show flowers. The Dutch take up these roots every year, because their object is to fur- 
nish a round plump root, and the way to accomplish this is to take off the oflfsets annually, to prevent 
their pressing against and flattening the parent bulb. The bulbs being dried in the shade, may be laid in 
an airy situation in the seed-loft till wanted for planting. 

6303. Forcing. These bulbs force well, and either in deep pots of sandy loam, or in water-glasses ; their 
previous treatment is the same as we have prescribed for the hyacinth ; and they are highly odoriferous 
and ornamental in apartments. 

SuBsncT. 7. Iris. — 7m, L. Trian. Monog. L. and Iridece, B. P. Vlris, Fr. ; 
Schwertlitie, Ger. ; and Iride, Ital. (Jigs. 600, 601.) 





6304. There are several species of iris which are considered florists' flowers. 



The Persian iris (/. Persica) (Bat. Mag., 
and our./ii"-. COO. a) ; a very low bulbous 
rooted plant, with delicate blue and 
violet-colored flowers, greatly esteem- 
ed for their beauty and sweet smell, 
which is so powerful that one plant 
will scent a whole room. It is a native 
of Persia, and was cultivated by Par- 
kinson in 1629. The bulbs are ge- 



nerally imported from Holland, and 
blow in water.glasses, or jiots of sand 
with very little earth intermixed, in 
February and March. 
The snake's-head iris (/. <H6ei-oia) (Bof. 



a native of the Levant, and wa» 



cultivated in 1597- The tubers are 
generally imported from Holland. 
The Chalcedonian iris (l- susiatia) (Bot. 
Mag. 91. and f g. 600. c) has finely 
striated leaves, a scape a span high, 
and the largest and most magnificent 
corolla of all the species. Its petals 
are of a delicate texture, almost as 
broad as a liaiid, piirjilc or blact, 



Book II. 



FRITILLARY. 



striped with white. It flowers In the 
beginning of June; is a native of the 
Levant, and was cultivated by Gerrard 
in 1596. 

The bulbous-rooted, or Spanish iris (/. 



during their whole length, and awl- 
shaped at the tip ; the flowers of the 



Mag. 602. and 601. i), w much 

larger than the other in all its parts. 



the flower-stalk is near twice the 
height, and the flowers are more than 
double the size. It is oquallj prolific 
in varieties as /. anpAiwm, of which it is 
by some botanists considered only a 
-variety. The tubers of both sorts are 
annually imported from Holland. 



wild plant are blue, with emarginate 
petals, and appear in June; but culti- 
vation has produced a great number 
of varieties v/ith yellow, white, violet, 
and variegated flowere. It is a native 
of the south of Europe, and weis cul- 
tivated by (jerrard in 1596. 
The great bulbous-rooted iris, the English 
iris of the Dutch, (I. xiphioides) (Bot. 

6305. Culture of the first three species. These seldom ripen tlieir seeds in this countryj 
nor are they often propagated here from offsets, annual supplies of bulbs being obtained 
from Holland, and generally forced like the hyacinth. Justice says [Brit. Gard. Direct. 
222.) the Dutch florists told him, that they never could obtain any varieties from sowing the 
seeds of the Persian iris ; nor could this author himself, who cultivated the plant, and 
raised seedlings at Crichton, near Edinburgh, with great care and. considerable success. 
The three sorts are best cultivated under the protection of a frame, where their flowers will 
be less liable to injury than in the open air, and where their leaves will be stronger and 
more able to nourish the bulbs and offsets. The Chalcedonian iris, Curtis observes, thrives 
best in a loamy soil and sunny exposure, with a pure air, but guarded from moisture, and 
from frosts during winter. The Persian iris thrives best in a light sandy loam and eastern 
exposure, sheltered from rains and frosts, like the other. The snake's-head iris is the hardi- 
est of the three, requires the same soil and exposure as the Persian, but less care during 
winter. None of these sorts need be taken up oftener than once in three years, when the 
leaves decay ; they should be replanted in a month or six weeks afterwards, at six inches' dis- 
tance every way, and covered from two to four inches according to the size of the bulbous 
tuber. If the soil in which the bulbous and tuberous sorts of iris is planted be loose and deep, 
and the plants not taken up every three, or at most four years, they will run down and be lost. 

6306. Culture of tJie bulbous iHses. Miller andJuslice recommend a light sandy loain, not rich, and a!i 
eastern exposure. The plants are multiplied abundantly by offsets, and as they also produce seeds freely, 
many new varieties are obtained in that manner. Justice says, he raised a great number with very little 
trouble {Brit. Gard. Direct. 430.) ; and Masters says, " I know of no flower that better repays the time 
and attention of the horticulturist." The following are this author's directions for its propagation by seed. 
" In August the seeds become ripe, and are plentifully produced on all seedling plants, although, like 
many other plants, but sparingly, and very frequently not at all, on such as have been long increased by 
offsets, or parting the roots ; they may be sown in slight drills, about six inches asunder, as soon as ripe ; 
and in the March following, they will make an appearance very similar to rows of young onions. With 
no other care than frequent weeding, they m.ay remain in the seed-bed for three years, for they are much 
more hardy than most kinds of seedling bulbs, and, therefore, will not even require protection from tlie 
frosts. In August or September of the third year, it will be necessary to transplant them into beds, 
at one foot's distance, row from row, and the bulbs six inches apart; and in two years from their re- 
moval, most of the strongest will show blossom, and nearly all in the year following, or the sixth 
from the seed. If, during the time the roots are at rest, the 
top surface of the earth is carefully removed, and fresh light 
loam is substituted, a year will be saved, for this treat- 
ment will greatly promote the growth of the bulbs, and with 
these, as well as many other seedling plants, it is not a 
stated time that must pass before they blossom, but only 
such a portion as will allow the bulb to attain a size sufficient 
to contain vigor to produce and perfect a flower-stem, the 
rudiment of which is formed in the preceding summer. 
When they blossom, a selection can be made, and the va- ^■ 
rieties perpetuated by the increase of their offsets. The 
most proper time for removing the bulbs is in August and 
September, those kept out of ground until Christmas rarely 
blossom in the succeeding summer." {Hort. Trans, iv. 41S.) 

6307. Flowering bulbs. Every third year, in August, is the 
most proper time for taking them up ; and they should, if 
possible, be replanted in September following. Masters 
says, those kept out of ground till Christmas rarely blos- 
som in the succeeding summer. They may be planted 
either in beds, at eight inches or a foot distant every way, 
or in mingled borders, care being taken in either case to 
prevent the roots running down by removal every third 
year, or by a substratum of tiles or compact rubbish within 
eighteen inches of the surface. These species are very 
hardy, and flowering so late as June, require no protection 
either in summer or winter. They are seldom or never forced. 

SuBSECT. 8. Fritillary. — FritUlaria, L. Hexaru Monog. L. and Lilice, J. fig. 602.) 

6308. Of the fritillary there are three species which are considered as florists' flowers ; 
of these species there are numerous varieties. 




The crown -imperial {F. Imperialis. {Bot. 
Ma^. 191.) La Couronne Imperiule, Fr. ; 
Kauerkrone, Ger. ; and La Corona Im- 
periale, ItaX.) (,fin- 602. a) has a scaly 
bulb, from which arise strong stems, 
from two to four feet in height, fur- 
nished with numerous broad shining 
green leaves, and crowned with a 
whorl of showy pendulous flowers, yel- 
low, red, or striiied in various ways, 
which appear in March and April. It 
is one of the earliest ornaments of the 
flower-garden, producing a fine ap- 
pearance in the middle of large borders, 
at a season when such flowers are most 
■wanted. The " singular nectary," Pro- 
fessor Martyn observes, " cannot but 
engage the attention of the curious 
observer ; it is a white glandular cavity, 
as the base of each petal, and has a drop 



of limpid nectareous juicestandingin it, 
when the flower is in ^ igor. Another 
of the wonders of nature may be ob- 
served in the peduncles which bend 
down while the plant is in flower, but 
become upright as the seed ripens." 
There are above a dozen varieties in 
cultivation, distinguished by the dif- 
ferent shades of yellow, white, and red 
in the flower, and by being striped 
double or semi-double. 
The Persian fritillary (F. Persica) {Bot. 
Mag. 1537, and ,fig. 60'2. 6) has a 
large round root, the size of an 
orange ; the stem is three feet high, 
and the flowers in a loose spike at 
the top, forming a pyramid. They 
are of a dark purple color, and appear 
in May, but seldom produce seeds in 
England. If is a native of Persia, and 



was cultivated here in 1596. There is 
a smaller variety, with a shorter stem, 
and smaller leaves and flowers. 
The common fritillary, or chequered lilv, 
{F. MtleagrisiEng. Bot. 602.) La FrilH- 
laire Mdeapre, Fr.; Kiehitzey, Ger. ; and 
Giglio vanegato, Ital. {^fig. 602. c),has 
a solid tuber, about the size of a nut, 
a stem from twelve to eighteen inches 
high, with linear leaves, and one or 
more pendulous flowers on the top ot 
the stem. It is a native of Britain, 
and flowers in April and May, or in 
March in mild seasons. There are 
nearly twenty varieties, withred, white, 
puqjle, black, striped, and double 
flowers, besides an umbellate fritillary, 
a mule between this species and the 
crown-imperial. 



842 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



(1509. Propagation. The common method is by offsets; but they may be raised from seed, which 
ripens readily, and is to be treated in all respects like that of the tulip, the seedlings of the crown-impe- 
rial flowering in the fifth or sixth year, and tliose of the two other species in the third or fourth year. 

fiolO. Culture of flowering bulbs. They delight in a light soil, not too wet nor very full of dung. It 
should be dug deep, and the bulbs may be planted six inches deep, and from eighteen inches to two feet 
distant every way ; but they have the best effect in a mingled flower-border. They need not be taken 
up above once in three years, when the stems are withered in May or June, and they should not be kept 
longer out of tlie ground than two months. 

SuBSECT. 9. Lilj/. — Lilium, L. Hexund. Monogt/n. L. and IAUcb, J. Lis, Fr. ; 

Lilie, Ger. ; and Giglio, Ital. 
6311. Of the lily there are sixteen species introduced in Britain, and the whole of 
them may be reckoned very choice flowers. We shall notice particularly, only those 
species, of which numerous varieties have been produced. These arc : — 



The white li!j {L. Caiulidiim) {B«t. Miit;. 
278.) has a large scaly bulb, a leafy 
stem, from three to four feet in height, 
terminating in large fure white tlowers 
on pedimcles. It is a native of the 
Levant, and was in most gardens in 
Gen-ard's time. Of this species there 
are above eight varieties. 

The orange lily (L. ImWifinm,) (B,<t. 
Miifi-36.) has a scaly bulb, a leafy stem, 
two feet and a half 'high, terminating 
in orange-colored flowers. Sometimes 



the stem produces small green bulbs in 
the axillse of the leaves. Of this spe- 
cies, there are eight or ten varieties and 
subvarieties. 
The martagon, or Turk's cap, (L. Mar. 
taf:i;i) \l'vf. Mog. R!i.-.), has a large 
scaly bulb, a stalk furnished with nar- 
row leaves, near three feet high and 
teraiinatinL' peduncles of tine carmine 
flowers in July. Of this species there 
are half a do^en varieties, besides the 



scarlet martagon {L. Chalceduiticiim), 
of wliich there are also different sorts. 
Besides the above species and their va- 
rieties, there are the L. Canadense, 
siijierlmm, or Turk's cap ; the Pompo- 
iiium, and TinHnum, or tiger lily; the 
Japonicum, or .Tapan lily, with stems of 
5 feet, and the flowers 7 inches broad, 
pure Khitewith a streak of blue; all 
equally meriting cultivation as select 
flowers. 



6312. Propagation. Tliis is almost always by off et -bulbs ; but new varieties may be 
raised from seed, which ripens in most sorts in Au<,Jist : being treated as directed for 
raising new varieties of the narcissus, the young bulbs; will flower the fourth and fifth 
years. 

6313. Culture offloivering bulbs. The more common sorts, species, and varieties, will thrive in any 
soil and situation, even under the shade of trees. The Canadian, Pomponian, and Philadelphian mar- 
tagons are somewhat tender, and require the protection of allies or rotten bark in winter. Tliey are ge- 
nerally planted in borders, and need not be taken up oftcner than e^ - ry three or four years in September, 
and replanted six inches deep in the October following. None of tl'.e species can be safely transjilanted, 
after they have pushed leaves, without weakening them so as to jjrcvrnt their flowering for several years. 
This remark, indeed, will apply to most bulbous-rooted plants. Grifllh, of S iuth Lambeth, whose supe- 
rior skill in the cultivation of bulbous plants is well known {Hart. Trans, iv. 544.), has been in the prac- 
tice of keeping the liliiim japonicum in pots, protected by a green-hou.'.c or garden-frame ; but he thinks 
they thri\ e best in the former. He places the bulb in twcnty-four-sizcd pots, not lower than an inch from 
the surface of the mould, which is composed of about two thirds peat and one third loam, the bottom of 
the pot being covered to the depth of two inches, with broken pieces of tile and the rough siftings of peat. 
The plants are kept entirely from frost, and are watered very little when in a dormant state, for they are 
then very impatient of wet in excess. The pots kept in the green-house are placed at a distance from the 
flue to prevent the mould drying quickly. {Horf. Trans, iv. 554:.) Brooks grows in a brick-pit, which 
he can cover with mats or glasses at pleasure ; but he says, it " appears to be sufficiently hardy to en- 
dure our winters, as I have had a bed of them two years in the open ground without protection." 
(Hort. Trans, iv. 552.) 

SuBSECT. 10. Amari/llidece. — Ainart/Uis, L. Hex. Monog. L. and Amaryllidece, B. P. 
X-is-narcisse, Fr. ; Narcissenlilie, Ger. ; and Giglio Narcisso, Ital. 
6314. The amaryllidece is a splendid family, lately subdivided into those of Nerine, 
Coburgia, and Brunsvigia (see Bot. Mag.), of which almost every species may be consi- 
dered a select flower. The A. amabilis, Josephina, and Vittata, are reckoned the most 
splendid bulbous-rooted plants; and the A. for mosissit7ia, or Jacobea lily ; Sarniensis, or 
Gxiernsey lily ; Belladonna, &c. are less magnificent, but of very great beauty. Most of 
the species are green-house or stove plants, and natives of the Cape of Good Hope, 
China, or South America. Various hybrids of this family have been produced by Her- 
bert, Sweet, Gower, and others. {Hort. Trans, iv. 488. &c.) 

G315. Propagation and culture. New sorts, as in similar cases, are procured by seed ; but the most usual 
mode, as few of these plants have ripened their seeds in this country, is l.y offsets from the flowering 
bulbs, removed yearly, or every time the bulbs are taken out of the ground. The great art in cultivating 
these, and all other bulbs, is to procure vigorous leaves, as on those depend the quantity of nutritive 
matter prepared and deposited in the bulb, and consequently its ability to flower the following season. The 
circumstance of several of these plants, as the Guernsey lily, flowering iri the autumn, and producing 
their leaves afterwards under the disadvantages of a winter's sun, is the reason why fhey have been hitherto 
cultivated with so little success in this country, and why we are obliged to import the bulbs annually 
from other countries. The observations of Knight on this subject are particularly valuable ; they more 
immediately refer to the Guernsey lily, but they are equally applicable to all exotic bulbs. Bulbous 
roots increase in size, and proceed in acquiring powers to produce blossoms, only during the periods 
in which they have leaves, and in which such leaves are exposed to light; and these organs always 
oi)erate most efficiently when they are young, and have just attained their full growth. The bulb 
of the Guernsey lilv, as it is usually cultivated in this country, rarely produces leaves till September, 
or the begiiniing of October, at which period, the quantity of light aflTorded by our climate is pro- 
bably quite insufficient for a plant, which is said to be a' native of the v/arm and bright climate 
of Jai)an ; and before the return of spring, its leaves are necessarily grown old, and nearly out of 
office, even when they have been safely protected from frost through the winter. It is, therefore, not 
extraordinary, that a bulb of this species, which has once expended itself in affording flowers, should but 
very slowly recover the power of blossoming again. Considering, therefore, the d'eficiency of light and 
heat, owing to the late period of its vegetation, as the chief cause why this plant so often fails to produce 
flowers, I inferred that nothing more would he required to make it blossom, as freely, at least, as it does 
in Guernsey, than such a slight degree of artificial heat, applied early in the summer, as would prove 
sufficient to make the bulbs vegetate a few weeks earlier than usual in the autumn. Early in the summer 
of 1816, a bulb, which had blossomed in the preceding autumn, was subjected to such a degree of artifici-il 
beat, as occasioned it to vegetate six weeks, or more, earlier tlian it would otherwise have done. It did 
not, of course, produce any flowers ; but in the following season it blossomed early and strongly, and 



DOOK II. 



IXI.E AND GLADIOLI, TUBEROSE. 



84^ 



afforded two offsets. These were put, in the spring of 1818, into pots, containing about one eighth of a 
square foot of light and rich mould, and were fed with manured water, and their period of vegetation 
was again accelerated by artificial heat. Tlieir leaves, consequently, grew yellow from maturit}', early 
in the present spring, when the pots were placed in rather a shady situation, and near a north wall, to 
afford ms an opportunity of observing to what extent, in such a situation, the early production Of the leaves 
in the preceding seasons had changed the habit of the plant. I entertained no doubt but that both tlie 
bulbs would afford blossoms, but I was much gratified by the appearance of the blossoms in the first week 
in July. From the success of the preceding experiment, I conclude that if the offsets, and probably the 
bulbs of this plant which have produced flowers, be placed in a moderate hot-bed, in the end of May, to 
occasion the early production of their leaves, blossoms would be constantly afforded in the following sea- 
son : but it will be expedient to habituate the leaves, thus produced, gradually to the open air, as soon 
as they are nearly fully grown, and to protect them from frost till the approach of spring. " 

6316. T/ie Rev. W. WilUainson has adopted the same rationale as Knight: and, with the aid of a glass 
frame, without artificial heat, brought bulbs which had flowered into a state to flower again after two 
winters. Had he applied artificial heat, he thinks one winter might probably have been sufficient. 
{Hort. I'rans. iii. 450.) 

6317. The Hon. and Rev. TV. Herbert has found a similar treatment attended with corresponding suc- 
cess. He says, " the only attention which the Guernsey lily requires here (Spofforth, Yorkshire), is to 
give it suificient air while the leaves are growing, that they may be strong and dark-colored ; to protect 
the leaves from frost, keeping the pots near the light, if under glass; to give a moderate and regular 
supply of water, and to leave the bulbs nearly dry, from the time the leaves decay, that is, about mid- 
summer, at latest, to the end of August, when the flower-buds should appear. If the bulbs are not left 
dry early in the summer, the autumnal shoot will be delayed till the season becomes too cold for the 
proper growth of the flowers or leaves, and the natural course and vigor of the plant will be interrupted, 
after which it will require at least a year to repair the injury it will have received. Whenever the 
sprouting of the bulb is tardy, it should be assisted by placing it, for a short time, in a warmer situation. 
If the stigma does not expand so as to become, after a few days, trifid, it is a sign that the temperature is 
rather too low to suit the plant, and the leaves will pi-obably not push freely without more heat. I have 
obtained seed from the Guernsey lily by procuring the blossom early in an airy situation." The soil Her- 
bert recommends -is a good yellow loam, without any manure; but he thinks " they will thrive in any 
wholesome compost, which does not canker their bulbs. They should be planted partly above ground, for 
the wet earth round their necks will prevent their flowering or thriving, and will even sometimes destroy 
them." {Hort. Trans, iv. 177.) The same treatment, with very few exceptions, he adds, suits the whole 
of the bulbs included under amaryllis, as well as a number of other allied genera, as ha3tnanthus, pan- 
cratium, agapanthus, &c. Some species of these genera, as Amaryllis [ongifoUa, W, and Crinuin Asiafi- 
cum, Rox., are natives of dry ditches that communicate at certain seasons with the water of the rivers in 
Bengal, where they root deeply in the mud. These species, and some others, Herbert found to succeed 
perfectly when plunged during summ.er in a pond. " Most of the crinums," he says, " are swamp plants, 
or grow in river-mud, and should be cultivated in our stoves, with a pan of water under them, the bulbs 
being raised above the earth, and stripped of all dead integuments. Agapa7ithus umbellatus flowers best 
when so treated ; the Amaryllis longifolia (which, he says, should be named Crinum capense) will," he 
has no doubt, " flower as a hardy aquatic, if planted in any pond or river of two feet water, not liable to 
freeze at the bottom." {Hort. Trans, iii. 188.) 

6318. So}ne account of the culture of the Guernsey lily in the Island of Guernsey is given by Dr. Maccul- 
ioch {Caled. Mem. ii. 62.) : there they grow it in the open air, and protect it with sand during winter. 

SuBSECT. 11. Ixice a,r\di Gladioli, W. Trian. Monog. L. and Iridece, B. P. 

6319. The ixice and gladioli include a number of recently formed genera (see Hot. 
Mag. and Bot. Reg.) of Cape bulbs, which may be flowered in the open air, under 
frames without bottom heat, or on shelves near the glass in green-houses. The Hon. 
W. Herbert, who has paid great attention to the culture of bulbs, is " persuaded that 
the African gladioli will become great favorites with florists, when their beauty in the 
open border, the facility of their culture, and the endless variety which may be produced 
from seed by blending the several species, are fully known, nor will they be found to 
yield in beauty to the tulip and ranunculus." {Hort. Trans, iv. 154.) 

6320. Propagation and culture. They may either be propagated by seed or offset-bulbs ; by the former 
mode, Herbert has produced numerous beautiful varieties. The proper soil for these and similar bulbs is 
peat with sand : and in a bed of this compost the seeds should be sown in spring, and well watered before 
and after they come up. " At the beginning of October, or as soon as the leaves wither, the young bulbs 
should be taken up and dried ; they may be replanted again at any time, placing them about eight inches 
under ground, to prevent the frost reaching them. Next year they will generally flower." The best way 
of treating gladioli which are to be flowered in pots is, whenever the bulbs are potted, to plunge the pots 
about eight inches under ground in a bed of peat, and raise them nearer the surface in spring, as soon 
as the very severe frosts are over ; or not to plunge them so deep, and protect them with moss, leaves, 
rotten tan, &c. 

6321. Various other bulbous irideee, and also oxalis, lachenalia, cyclamen, &c. may be successfully treated 
in a similar manner. {Herbert, in Hort. Trans, j Maddock, in Flor. Dir.) 

SuBSECT. 12. Tuberose. — Polianthes Ttcberosa, Jj. (Bot. Reg. 63.) Hex. Monog. L. 
and Hemerocallidets, B. P. Tuberose, Fr. and Ger ; and Tuberose, Ital. 

6322. The tuberose is a bulbous-rooted plant, with linear leaves of a whitish green, and 
stems four or five feet high, terminating in a sparse spike of white flowers, of very 
powerful fragrance. It is a native of India, whence it was first brought to Europe about 
1524, and to England in 1629. It is generally cultivated in frames or the green-house, 
but in warm situations will flower in the open air. The tubers of this plant are an- 
nually imported from the warm provinces of North America and Italy, but, like those 
of the Guernsey lily, might, by proper treatment, as Salisbury has proved, be produced 
in this country equally fit for flowering. There is a double variety, which is in most es- 
teem, but both are equally fragrant. 

6323. General treatment. The bulbs are planted in pots of sandy loam in March or 
April, and brought forward in a hot-bed or hot-house till the flower-buds begin to ap~ 



844 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



pear. The plants are then removed to the green-house or the open air, or to halls or 
churches, as in Italy, where the cooler temperature procures a prolonged bloom. 

6324. Culture to produce flowering roots. The following is the process followed by Salisbury, by which 
he produced, for many years, in the open air at Chapel Allerton, flowering bulbs equal to those imported. 
The situation he preferred was a dry warm border ; in this he made an excavation two or three feet deep, 
and of any convenient length and width ; about the middle of April, he filled this pit with fresh stable- 
dung, and covered it with light sandy earth ; then, on the bed so formed, the small lateral roots, ot 
those from foreign bulbs, or from those which had flowered in this country the preceding year, and been 
preserved through the wmter in sand, were planted at five inches' distance every way, the upper part of 
the tuber being just covered with earth. The bed was protected from nightly frosts and heavy rains, 
little or no water was given, but when the leaves were an inch long, a little fresh compost was added to 
the surface. In June and July, when the leaves were in full vigor, it was watered copiously after warm 
days ; but in autumn and the beginning of winter, it was carefully protected from heavy rains. In the 
beginning of December, the decayed leaves being removed, the bed was thatched over a foot thick with 
dry straw, sloping it well to throw off the wet ; or covered with a frame and litter. In February the roots 
were taken up, preserving their fibres, and packed in dry sand in a cellar where the cold could not pene- 
trate, till April, when their fibres being shortened in proportion to their decay, and all the ofisets except- 
ing one or two on each bulb being removed, they were replanted as before. A few strong roots flowered 
in this second year. In the succeeding winter the bed was thatched as before, and in February the roots 
were taken up for forcing, or any of the purposes for which tuberose-roots are grown. By this process 
bulbs were produced equal, if not superior, to those imported ; and therefore the author thinks their cul- 
ture might become an object to the commercial gardener, especially in the southern counties near tlie sea, 
and in the vicinity of London. The great object, he says, is to obtain " a sulhcient degree of heat in 
summer to bring their leaves out to their full magnitude, that of the roots following of course. The 
theory," he adds, " which I would recommend any intelligent gardener to adopt in its general manage- 
ment is, to keep the roots growing as vigorously as possible from May to October, but in a state of com- 
plete rest and drought for the remainder of the year." {Hort. Trans, i. 53.) 

SuBSECT. 13. PcBony. — Pceonia, L. Polyajid. Digynia, L. and Ranunculacece, J. 
Pivoine, Fr. ; P'donie, Ger. ; and Peonia, Ital. 

6325. Most of the species of pcBony introduced in this country may be considered 
as select flowers ; but that which has been longest cultivated is the P. officinalis [Bot. 
Mag. 1784.) The roots are composed of roundish tubers, the stalks of the leaves rise 
between two and three feet high, and terminate in large red or purple flowers, which 
appear in May. The lec»es are composed of many unequal lobes, variously cut into 
many segments. It is a native of Switzerland, Dauphine, and other parts of Europe, 
and also of China and Japan ; and was cultiv^ated here in 1562. The roots were for- 
merly much used in medicine, 

6326. Varieties. Originally the common pjeony v.-as said to be of two sorts, male and 
female, the flowers of the former being smaller and lighter colored than those of the 
latter. These distinctions, a\ hich had no sexual allusion in this case, the pasony being 
hermaphrodite, are now laid aside, and the varieties of P. offcinalis have been reduced 
by Sabine {^Ilort. 2^rans. ii. 273.) to the following : — 

Tlie double red; the most common, and I The double flesh-colored / The double sweet-scented Chinese {Hort. 

formerly highly ))rized; beiiis, when The double white 'rra»j. vol. ii. pi. 18.) " 

introduced at -4ntwe^^l, near '250 years The double fringed '\\'hitley's double white Chinese, 

ago, sold for twelve crowns. ' | The double white Cliinese | 

6327. Propagation and culture. By seed from the single and semi-double sorts for new species, and by 
dividing the roots for ordinary purposes. Miller directs to sow the seeds which ripen in September, im- 
mediately afterwards in light fresh earth, covering them half an inch. They will come up the following 
spring, and may remain in the seed-bed two years before they are transplanted, sifting a little rich earth 
over them when the leaves decay at the end of the growing season. Having made two years' growth in 
the seed-bed, they are to be transplanted in September into other well prepared beds of light fresh earth, 
and placed six inches asunder every way, and three inches deep. Here they are to remain till they 
flower, which is generally the fourth or fifth summer after sowing. 

6328. Full-grown roots are readily propagated by parting, taking care to preserve a bud on the crown of 
each offset. The plants are very hardy ; they will grow in almost any soil and situation, and even under 
the shade of trees, where, Miller says, they continue longest in beauty. They are chiefly planted in flower- 
borders, and form a splendid ornament both to the parterre and shrubbery. 

SuBSECT. 14. Dahlia. — Dahlia superjliia and D. frustranea, H. K. [Cav. Ic~ i. t. 80. 
and 266.) Polyg. Siq^er. L. and Corymhifera: . J. 

6329. The roots of the dahlia are tuberous and fasciculated ; the stems rise from five 
to eight feet, covered with large compound leaves, resembling those of the common 
dwarf elder, and with side branches bearing numerous flowers of a great variety of 
colors, which appear in August, and continue till destroyed by frost. The plant grows 
wild in Mexico, in sandy meadows, and was sent to Madrid in 1789, and thence to 
England in the same year ; but the plants being lost, seeds were reintroduced by Lady 
Holland in 1 804, and from these and some plants imported from France during the 
peace of 1814, the present extensive stock of dahlias has originated. Till this last 
period they were much more cultivated in France and Gennany than in England, and 
more especially by the Count Lelieur, at Paris, and Otto, at Berlin. At present the 
dahlia is the most fashionable flower in this country, and the extent of its culture in some 
of the nurseries, especially that of Lee, is truly astonishing. Nor is this to be won- 
dered at, as Sabine observes, for, independently of the great beauty and diversity of the 



Book II. 



DAHLIA. 



845 



flowers, they are in perfection at a season when, till they came into notice, our gardens 
had but little ornament. The roots are edible, but not agreeable. 
6330. The varieties are exceedingly numerous. 



The leading varieties of the fertile-rayed 
s\)ecies,D.superJhia,are the puri)le,rose, 
pale, white, sulnhur, yellow, tawny, 
copper, brick-red, dark-red, pomegra- 
nate-colored, dark-purple, very dark, 
and lilac flowered single, semi-double. 



and double, with innnmerable sub- 
varieties. 

Of the barren-rayed species, D.fnisiranea, 
there are the scarlet, bright-scarlet, 
orange, saffron, and yellow flowered, 
single, semi-double, and double, with 



several subvarieties, though this spe- 
cies has not sported nearly so much as 
the other. 

At the Hammersmith nursery, above 
'200 sorts may be procured. 



6331. Criterion of a good dahlia. The plant short, stiff, and bushy, prolific in flowers 
having short peduncles ; the flower well expanded and standing boldly to the view, and 
the colors clear and distinct, 

6332. Propagation. By dividing the roots, and by cuttings for ordinary purposes ; and by seed for new 
varieties and also for increasing the stock of this plant, as the seedlings flower the first year. In dividing 
the root care must be liad to preserve a bud to each section, otherwise, though the tubers will throw out 
roots, they will not produce leaves. 

6oii3. By cuttings. Take these from the root-shoots in spring, or the tops of the young shoots, as early 
in summer as may be ; cut the lower end smoothly off in the middle of a joint, and leave the leaves on 
the top, excepting such as would be buried in planthig the cutting. Plant in sandy earth on heat, and 
cover with a hand-glass, and they will strike and produce both flowers and tubers before the autumn. 

6334. By grafting. This mode of propagating herbaceous vegetables has been known for some time on 
the continent, and practised, as we have seen (2022.), to a considerable extent by the Baron Tschoudi. 
In this country it seems to have been first adopted by Blake, in 1820, as a more speedy mode of pro- 
pagating double-flowering plants than striking them by cuttings. The following are the details of his 
practice : " The cutting intended for the graft should be strong, and short-jointed, having on it two or 
more joints or buds ; it must be also procured as soon in the season as possible ; when obtained, select a 
good tuber of a single sort, taking especial care that it has no eyes ; with a sharp knife (for a dull edge 
would mangle the fleshy root, make it jagged, and so prevent a complete adhesion), cut off a slice from 
the upper part of the root, making at the bottom of the part so cut, a ledge whereon to rest the graft ; 
this is recommended because you cannot tongue the graft as you do a wood-shoot; apd the ledge is useful 
in keeping the cutting fixed in its place while you tie it; next cut the scion sloping, to fit, and cut 
it so that a joint may be at the bottom of it, to rest on the aforesaid ledge ; a union may be effected 
without the ledge, provided the graft can be well fixed to the tuber, but the work will not then be so 
neat. It is of advantage, though not absolutely necessary, that a joint should be at the end of the scion, 
for the scion will occasionally put forth new roots from that lower joint ; the stem is formed from the 
upper joint. I therefore procure the cuttings with the two lower joints as near together as possible. After 
the graft has been tied, a piece of fine clay, such as is used for common grafting, must be placed round 
it : then pot the root in fine mould, in a pot of such a size as will bury the graft half way in the mould ; 
place the pot on a little heat in the front of a cucumber or melon frame, if you chance to have one in 
work at the time ; I prefer the front for the greater convenience of shading and watering which are re- 
quired. A striking glass may be put over the graft, or not, as you please. In about three weeks the 
root should be shifted into a larger pot, if it be too soon to plant it in the border, which will probably be 
the case; for supposing the work was begun in March, the plant cannot go out till the end of May, 
so that the shifting will be very essential to promote its growth till the proper season of planting out shall 
arrive." {Hart. Trans, vol. iv. 476.) 

6335. By seed. The following directions are extracted from an excellent paper on this subject {Hort. 
Trans, vol. 238.) by Sabine. Collect the seeds in September from the dwarf plants, where no preference 
exists on other accounts, and from semi-double flowers when double varieties are chiefly desired. Per- 
haps seeds obtained froni those particulai" florets of the disc which have altered their form, may have 
a greater tendency than others to produce plants with double flowers. Sow in March, or earlier, on a 
heat of 55° or 6.5° ; the young plants to be pricked out, if necessary, in pots, and kept in a moderate tem- 
perature, say 50° or ,55°, till the end of April. Now plant out where they are to remain, covering each 
plant at night with an empty pot for some weeks, to avoid injury from spring frosts. If in a compartment 
by themselves, plant in rows three feet wide, and at two feet distance in the row : if in the flower- 
border, plant in the back rows. In either case they require to be staked. Seedlings thus treated will 
blow in July, and continue in perfection till the autumn ; but the first frost takes the same effect on the 
dahlia as it does on the potatoe and kidneybean. A blow may be prolonged by planting in large pots and 
removing early in autumn to the green-house. 

Soil and situation. Dahlias thrive best in rich loam, and a clear open space, neither sheltered by 
trees or walls. Like the potatoe, they exhaust the soil considerably, and do not thrive well when re- 
peatedly planted on the same spot. 

6337. Planting full-groimi roots. These may either be planted on the spot where they are to flower, 
early in April, and protected by covering with litter or by empty pots, as in transplanting seedlings ; or, 
when an early blow is wanted, they may be planted in large pots and forwarded in frames or pits, or in 
any spare house, with a temperature equal to that of the green-house, till the middle of May, when they 
may be planted where they are finally to remain, and will flower in June. Sabine says, " Dahlias 
look best in a large mass, unmixed with other plants ; in this plan of growing them, some nicety is re- 
quired in the due distribution of the sorts, so as to have a proper and good mixture of colors ; and par- 
ticular care is necessary to keep the tallest plants either in the centre or at the back of the clump, 
according as it is destined to be viewed, from one side only, or all sides, and to place the whole so that 
there shall be no unevenness in the general shape of the entire mass, arising from the irregular arrange- 
ment of the individual plants, according to their respective heights. The roots should be planted about 
three feet from each other every way ; this distance will keep each sufficiently distinct, and yet so 
united that the whole clump will have the appearance of an unbroken wood or forest of dahlias. 
They look very handsome if planted in the manner of an avenue, in a straight line, on each side of a 
walk." 

6338. General culture. No particular care is requisite after the plants are neatly tied to stakes, till 
they have been attacked by the frost, they should then be cut down and the roots covered with as much 
haulm, old tan, or leaves, as would be necessary to keep the frost from the tubers of a potatoe-plant left 
in the soil. If this is done, they will blow well and early next season. But the most general way, espe- 
cially witif the valuable sorts, is to dig up tlie roots with a portion of the stem attached, and plant or bed 
thcnn in pots or boxes among sand or dry mould, and keep them vmder the stage of a green-house, or in 
some dry airy place, free from the access ol frost, till the spring On a large scale, they may be pitted 
like potatoes, or packed m ridges with sand in cellars, and covered with straw ; the object being to keep 
them sufficiently moist and plump to maintain the living principle, and yet not to rot them, or have thera 
destroyed by frost. 



846 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pakt nr. 



SuBSECT. 15. Auricula. — Primnla Auricula, L. (^Jac. Aus. 5. t. 415.) Pent. Monog. L. 
and Primulaceoi, B. P. Oreille tCours, Fr. ; Aunkel, Ger. ; and Orecchio d'orso, Ital. 
{fig. G03.) 

6339. The auricula is a flower of great beauty : it is a small fibrous-rooted plant, with 
fleshy succulent leaves, generally mealy on the edges ; a native of the mountains of 
Switzerland, Austria, Syria, and the Caucasus, &c. We have gathered it in abundance 
near the post-house on iJie Simplon road. It was cultivated by Gen-ard in 1597, under 
the name of bear's ears, or mountain cowslips. To show what cultivation may perform 
on this plant. Professor Martyn relates, from Morant's Colchester (1768, p. 92.), 
that Henry Stow, a gardener, near that place, a famoiis grower of ^auriculas, had some 
plants with no less than 133 blossoms on one stem. About a hundred years ago the 
passion for this flower in England was much greater than at present ; and, as Justice 
remarks, we supplied the Dutch, who afterwards, till the late war, used to re-supply us 
with the progeny of our own flowers. Justice was the most enthusiastic cultivator of the 
auricula, and indeed of all florists' flowers of his time. After him the Lancashire 
growers are the next to be distinguished, and more especially INIaddock, the well known 
author of the Florist's Directori/, originally from Warrington. Emmerton is, at tliis 
time, one of the most enthusiastic admirers of this flower ; and the best collections are 
to be found among tlie commercial gardeners near London, and the operative manu- 
facturers and artisans near Manchester, Paisley, and other large towns. It is like the 
tulip, pink, &c., a poor man's flower, and a fine blow is rarely to be seen in the gardens 
of the nobility and gentry. 

6340. 2'he vaj-ieties are endless. 



The colors of the flower in its wild state 
.'[re yellow, purjile, and varieicated. 
Gsrvavd H:ri-ire.s the vellow, imiTile, 
red, scarlet, blush-coloVed, and brii^ht- 
red, most of which prevr in the Lon- 
don Hardens in his time. Parkinson, 
in lt>29, enumerates twenty Vturieties, 



and says many more were to be 
found. Rea, in I'O'i, has an Increased 
number, classed as juirples, reds, 
yellows, and whites. In 1792, the 
catalogue of J. Maddock contained 
nearly .'iOO named varieties, divided 
into ligiuiset, sel£s, or plain one-colored 



sorts, double flowers, and painted or 
variegated sorts. The latter only are 
held in esteem, and few collections 
contain more than two or three selft 
of the fundamental colors, and as many 
double flowers. Double varieties are not 
in esteem. 



603 




6341. Criterion of a fine variegated auricula, 
(fig. 603. a, b, c, d, e) " The stem should be 
strong, erect, and elastic, and of a proper height, 
that the bunch or truss may be above the foliage 
of the plant. The peduncles, or foot-stalks, of 
the flowers should also be strong and elastic, and 
of a proportional length to the size and quantity 
of the pips, which should not be less than seven 
in number, that the bunch may be rather round, 
close, and compact. The component parts of 
the pip are the tube (with its stamens and an- 
thers) ; the eye ; and the exterior circle contain- 
ing the ground-color, with its edge or margin : 
these three should be all w^ell proportioned, 
which will be the case if the diameter of the 
tube be one part, the eye three, and the whole 
pip six, or nearly so. All the admirers of this 
flower agree that the pips ought to be round ; 
but this seldoms happens ; and w^e must be content if they are so nearly round as not to 
be what is termed' stai-ry. The anthers, or summits of the stamens, ought to be large, 
bold, and fill the tube well, and the tube should terminate rather above the eye ; the eye 
should be very white, smooth, and round, without any cracks, and distinct from the 
ground or self- color. The ground-color should be bold and rich, and equal on every 
side of the eye, whether it be in one uniform circle, or in bright patches ; it should be 
distinct at the eye, and only broken at the outward part into the edging ; a fine black, 
purple, or bright coflTee-color, contrast best with the eye ; a rich blue or bright pink is 
pleasing, but a glowing scarlet or deep crimson would be most desirable, if well edged 
with a bright green ; but this must seldom be expected. The green edge, or margin, 
is tl)e principal cause of the variegated appearance in this flower ; and it should be in 
propoa-tion to the ground-color, i. e. about one half of each. The darker grounds are 
generally covered with a white powder, which seems necessary, as well as the white eye, 
to guard the flowers from tlie scorching heat of the sun's rays, wliich would soon destroy 
them if they were exposed to it." 

6342. Propagation. By rooted slips, or dividing the root for continuing approved 
sorts, and by seed for obtaining new varieties. The best time for taking oflf slips, or 
dividing the root, is after the plant has done flowering and ripening its seed, if this last 



Book II. 



AURICULA. 



847 



is permitted. Tlie operation is therefore generally performed in July and the'beginning 
of August. Emmerton says, the Lancashire growers will not take off, or sell a slip be- 
fore the 5th of August, on which day they begin to execute orders for young plants. 

6243. By seed. Maddock says, " the surest and best method to obtain fine auriculas from seed is to 
provide young, healthy, and strong plants, of capital high-colored sorts, possessing Mrst-rate properties ; 
these, on the approach of bloom, should be detached from the rest to a remote part of the garden, and 
there exposed to the sun, air, and rain, when the last is in moderation ; but if in excess, they should be 
preserved from it by mats on hoops, or sm.all hand-glasses may be placed over them. In dry weather, 
they must be regularly watered, as often as they appear to require it ; for much depends on a due at- 
tention to this particular point." Emmerton is a warm advocate for raising the auricula from seeds, and 
says, any one who will follow his directions may be certain of raising very fine sorts. He selects the 
flowers he intends to breed from, according to the properties he desires in the offspring. Thus, he 
advises to procure the following sorts, sulFiciently well known to the London and Manchester florists, and 
to plant them in pots ; six plants of two sorts in each pot, viz. 



For breeding light-green or grey-edged 
seedlings.' A pot with 2 of Barlow's 
king and 4 of Grimes's privateer ; one 
with 2 of Barlow's king, and 4 of 
Butterworth's Lord Hood ; one with 
2 of Barlow's king and 4 of Ken- 
yon's ringleader. 

For breeding fine grass-green or clean 
green-edged 'seedlings. Pots with six 
plants in each, viz. 3 of Barlow's 
king, 3 of PoUet's Highland boy ; 3 



of Barlow's kin<?, 3 of Buckley's jolly 
tar; 3 of Barlow's king, 3 of War- 
ris's Prince Bhicher ; 3 of Barlow's 
king, 3 of Stretch's Emperor Alex- 
ander. 

For breeding fine choice-tinted liolei 
ground-colored seedlings rvitk green 
edges. Pots with six plants in each, 
viz. 3 of Bearless's superb, 3 of Fo- 
den's victory ; 3 of Bearless's superb, 
3 of Warris's Prince Blucher; 3 of 



Bearless's superb, 3 of Chilcot's 
king. 

For breeding fine rvhile-edged seedlings. 
Pots with six plants in each, viz, 
3 of Schooley's Mrs. Clarke, 3 of 
Taylor's incomparable ; 3 of Schoo- 
Ity's Mrs. Clarke, 3 of Crompton's 
Admiral Gardner ; 3 of Schooley's 
Mrs. Clarke, .3 of Popplewell's con- 
queror ; 5 oF Schooley's Mrs. Clarke, 
3 of Wild's black and clear. 



6344. Each of these pots is to be set apart, and at a distance from all other auriculas, before the flowers 
have expanded, to prevent accidental impregnation, and to be kept so detached till auriculas in general are 
out of flower. They may then be placed on a platform of scoria or tiles, there to remain till they have 
ripened their seeds. 

6345. A simple mode is to impregnate the stigmas of one sort with the anthers of another, in Knight's 
manner : or even without castrating the female parent. Nicol tried this last mode with the greatest suc- 
cess both in the primula and dianthus genus. {Caled. Hort. Soc. Mem. iii. 276.) 

6346. The seed ivill commonly ripen in June and July, and is to be gathered in single capsules as it ripens, 
and kept in them till the sowing season, which is January or February, according to Maddock ; and from 
the middle of February to the 10th or 12th of March, according to Emmerton. Maddock sows in boxes, 
covers as lightly as possible, and sets the boxes in a hot-bed ; preserving a moderate and equal degree of 
warmth both day and night, admitting fresh air occasionally. The advantage of this mode is,' that it forces 
every live grain into vegetation in about three weeks, if the warmth of the bed be properly kept up; 
whereas, by the more usual mode of exposure to the open air, the greater part does not vegetate till the 
second year ; and the weaker seeds, which are probably the most valuable, seldom vegetate at all. 

6347. The earth and seed must always be kept moderately moist, but never very wet ; the best method of 
watering it is by, means of a hard clothes-brush, dipped into soft water, which has had its chill taken off 
by standing in the sun, the hair side being quickly turned upwards, and the hand rubbed briskly over it, 
will cause the water to fly off in an opposite direction, in particles almost as fine as dew ; a sufficient water- 
ing may, in this manner, be given in a few minutes. If the surface of tlie earth in the box is inclining to 
become mossy or mouldy, it must be stirred all over very carefully with a pin, about as deep as the thick- 
ness of a shilling. At the expiration of three, four, or at most, five weeks, the young plants will all make 
their appearance ; it then becomes necessary to give them very gradually more air, in order to harden and 
render them fit for an entire exposure to it, which they will be able to bear in a fortnight or three weeks 
afterwards ; at which time the box should be taken out of the frame, and placed in rather a warm situ- 
ation, though not too much exposed to the sun, till towards the end of April, when it may be again re- 
moved to a cooler aspect, where it can only receive the sun till nine o'clock in the morning ; and in May, 
if the weather is hot, it should be placed in the most cool and airy part of the garden, not neglecting, at 
any time, to keep the earth moderately moist ; but at the same time preserving it from violent rains when- 
ever they occur. As soon as any of the plants appear with six leaves, such should be taken out from the 
rest, and transplanted into other boxes, filled with the compost, about an inch and a half or two inches 
asunder ; and when they are again grown, so as nearly to touch each other, they may be a second time 
transplanted into larger boxes, or round small pots, at the distance of three or four inches, where they 
should remain till they blow, which will generally happen the follov/ing spring, perhaps before they have 
acquired any considerable size ; and then such as appear to be possessed of merit should be marked, and 
the inferior ones destroyed. As soon as the bloom is over, such as have been marked should be taken up, 
and planted separately in small pots, and be taken the same care of as other auriculas, till they blow 
again ; at which time their respective merits and properties may be ascertained with more accuracy. 
Such weakly plants as are not able to blow the first or second year, ought nevertheless to be carefully pre- 
served ; for amongst these it often happens that the most valuable flowers are found. A great proportion 
of the seedlings, although the seed was saved from the best flowers, will be plain-colored, or self, which, 
unless possessed of excellent properties in other respects, or being singularly beautiful in their colors, are 
of no value, but as common border-flowers. 

6348. Emmerton sows in sm.all pots, about six inches over the top, and six deep, filled half full with coal- 
ashes or cinders, for the sake of drainage. He covers as thinly as possible with the auricula-compost, then 
puts on a bell-glass, and places the pots in a situation quite excluded from the sun, except in the morning. 
The bell-glass, he says, will cause the seed to vegetate much sooner, and by pouring the water over the 
top of it, the earth in which the seeds are will receive sufficient moisture, so that there will be no occasion 
to remove it. " If convenient," he says, " I would recommend the front of a green-house, or a cool-frame, 
for the seed-pots to be placed in, but by no m.eans a hot-bed ; or if not that accommodation, a hand-glass, 
having tiles or slates placed underneath, to keep the worms out of the pots ; great care being taken to keep 
the earth in a regular moist state. In about four or five weeks, perhaps three weeks, if in a green-house, 
the seeds will break ground ; and when the leaf begins to appear, you must take care by degrees to admit 
air." After this, his treatment of the young plants till they flower is essentially the same as that recom- 
mended above by Maddock. All pin-eyed flowers, or such as show only the stigmas and not the anthers, 
he throws away as of no value, either as border-flowers or select sorts. 

6349. Hogsr says, auricula-seed maybe sown either in pots, or in the open air, about the 1st of Marcl), and 
covered with a hand-glass. When the plants will bear transplanting, he removes them into pots of the 
smallest size, one in a pot. 

6350. Soil. The different composts used by florists in growing this flower are almost 
as numerous, Hogg observes, as the florists themselves. " Persons often take extraor- 
dinary pains, and incur unnecessary expense, to injure, if not destroy, their flowers. 
Weak minds are soon misled by quackery and novelty, having no sound judgment of their 



848 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



own ; and quackery, even in the growing of flowers, has as many followers as in any other 
line." {Treatise, &c. p. 103.) 

6351. Maddock recommends "one half rotten cow-dung, two years old. The cow-dung produced near 
London is more crude and gross than that of the country, occasioned by the difference of food on which 
the animal subsists ; it of course requires longer preparation and exposure to the atmosphere that the lat- 
ter, but two years and a half will be found sufficient for it in its grossest and most crude state. . One sixth 
fresh sound earth, of an open texture. One eighth earth of rotten leaves. One twelfth coarse sea or river 
sand. One twenty-fourth soft decayed willow wood. One twenty-fourth peaty or moory earth. One 
twenty-fourth ashes of burnt vegetables." This compost is to be thoroughly incorporated and exposed to 
the air in an open situation for a year before it is made use of 

6352. Emmerton says, " Good compost is the food, the very life of the auricula ;" it must be very rich, 
and properly tempered and sweetened by the sun, frost, and air. His materials are goose or pigeon dung, 
night-soil, sugar-bakers' scum, yellow loam, or loam from such land as will grow good crops of wheat, and 
sea-sand. He does not use salts of any kind, which are, no doubt, supplied by the sugar-bakers' scum, that 
substance being chiefly blood, lime-water, and oily matter. He gives various proportions, all of which he 
found successful ; in some, night-soil anG sand are wanting, thus : three barrowfuls of goose-dung, steeped 
in blood from butchers ; three barrowfuls of sugar-bakers' scum ; two barrowfuls of fine yellow loam : 
or, two barrowfuls of goose-dung, steeped in blood ; two barrowfuls of scum ; two barrowfuls of night- 
soil ; and two barrowfuls of fine yellow loam. These composts require two years' preparation ; in the 
first, they are mixed up in a hole in the earth ; and in the next, turned over every month in an open ex- 
posed situation, so as every part may be thoroughly frozen in winter, and heated by the sun and penetrated 
by the air in summer. Those composts, he says, he used with very gr«at success, though they contained 
no sand. He next introduces that material thus : four barrowfuls of loam, steeped in night-soil and 
urine ; two barrowfuls of goose-dung, mixed with blood ; two barrowfuls of sugar-bakers' scum ; and 
two pecks of sea-sand : or, two barrowfuls of night-soil ; one barrowful of cow-dung ; one barrowful 
of fine yellow loam ; and one peck of sea-sand : or, two barrowfuls of night-soil ; two barrowfuls of 
goose-dung ; two barrowfuls of cow-dung ; two barrowfuls of fine yellow loam ; and two pecks of sea- 
sand. Great stress is laid on the blood, which, " when rotted down with other manure, does wonders be- 
yond all idea ;" but unless the above composts are " stirred and turned over frequently, it will poison and 
rather kill and destroy your plants, than nourish them. Rendered sweet and wholesome, it will be the 
means of throwing brilliant colors into the pips or petals, and of giving life and vigor to the plants, as 
much as fine old port or rich Madeira wine does to the human constitution." {Cult, of the Auricula, 
Sec. p. 77.) 

Qo53. The late P. Kenny, Hogg observes, " gardener by profession, was, perhaps, one of the most successful 
and eminent growers of auriculas in his day, and who won as many prizes as most men, during the course 
often or twelve years that he lived at Totteridge, in Middlesex. He certainly had all the benefit of air, 
situation, and soil, which, coupled with his fondness for the flower, and his skilful treatment of it, (to say 
nothing of his being almost constantly in the garden,) gave him a decided superiority over many of his 
competitors, and ensured, as it were, his chance of success. He always kept by him a quantity of sound 
staple loam, of rather a sandy nature ; this he sweetened, by frequent turning. His next principal ingre- 
dient was sheep-dung and hay-litter, obtained from the sheds used to rear early lambs, well rotted, by 
being turned, mixed, and fermented in the same manner as the gardener does horse-dung and straw-litter. 
His proportions were one third loam ; two thirds sheep-dung and hay-litter ; one tenth coarse sand. 
These formed his compost for growing them in ; but he had another of a richer quality, if I may so term 
it, with which he used to top-dress his plants, and this he would do sometimes twice in the year. When 
they killed any sheep, he always reserved the blood, and mixed it with the dung of poultry. These 
two ingredients he added to his loam and sheep-dung, and these constituted his compost for surface- 
dressing." {Treatise, &c. 104.) This compost was employed and much approved of in the Hammersmith 
nursery. 

6354. The LancasJiire growers, Hogg informs us, " use horse-dung and cow-dung indiscriminately, 
sometimes mixed, sometimes apart ; the dung of poultry most frequently ; and old decayed willow wood, 
when they can get it ; with the mould cast up by moles ; taking care that the same be properly mixed, sweet- 
ened, and pulverised. In winter, they throw it up in narrow ridges, and when the top of it is frozen, they 
take it off, and so continue to do, till the whole of it has been frozen." 

6355. Justice gives the culture of the auricula in a " hitherto-unattempted manner, and which, although 
repugnant to the rules given by our cultivators of auriculas, T shall here insert, as the only true method 
to procure a fine blow of auriculas, such as I had this last spring, 1762 ; which, to the sight of numbers of 
spectators, exceeded all the blows of any auriculas ever seen in Scotland, in England, or in Europe; 
which was composed of the most capital flowers in England and Holland, and some very fine new seed- 
lings of my own raising." The soil he recommends is, one half free fresh loam, from under an old pas- 
ture; one half composed of the following parts, viz. three parts three -year-old cow-dung, and one part 
sea or river sand : no horse-dung to be used, and the ingredients not to be mixed together tiU a few days 
before being made use of: " for otherwise, when they are mixed for some time, they breed vermin and 
worms." He adds, " if you use fullers' earth to them, it must be done in the proportion only of an 
eighth part, and at no time but in the spring dressing; for if used in autumn, it is prejudicial ; and even 
when it is used in spring. It must be well dissolved in warm water before being used, and then use no 
sand." {Brit. Gnrd. Direct, art. Auricula.) 

6356. Curtis, in a note to the last edition of Haddock's work, says, " We have seen the strongest auri- 
culas produced from the following ingredients : two thirds of the rotten dung from old hot-beds reduced 
to fine mould ; one third containing equal parts of coarse sand and peat or bog earth, such as is used in 
the culture of heaths, mixed well together by sifting or screening, and suffered to be well aired by fre- 
quent turnings during the frosts of winter." {Florist's Direct. 161.) 

6357. Henderson, of Delvine, uses two parts of very rotten dung from old hot-beds, one part of vegetable 
mould, one quarter of river sand, mixing the whole, and exposing it for a winter. {Caled. Hort. Soc. Mem. 
ii. 230.) 

6358. The compost in most general use among auricula-growers is of fresh loamy soil and perfectly de- 
composed cow-dung, equal parts of each, adding one tenth of the mixture of sea or river sand. Some use 
leaf-mould instead of cow-dung. The whole incorporated and prepared for one summer and one winter 
in the usual manner. 

6359. Manner of growing. The common sorts are grown in beds or in mingled 
borders ; but all the fine flowers in pots. Maddock recommends pots of six inches and a 
half interior diameter at top, seven inches deep, and the interior bottom diameter four 
inches, for full-grown flowering plants ; and smaller sizes for seedlings and newly sepa- 
rated offsets. Emmerton uses pots for large blooming plants, eight inches Iiigh, five 
inches and a half diameter at the top, and four inches and a half at the bottom outside 
measure. 

6360. Time of potting and transj^Ianting full-grown plants. The most advisable time 
to pot auriculas, according to Haddocks, is immediately, or soon after bloom, and 



Book II. 



AURICULA. 



849 



this should be repeated annually (notwidistanding the opinion of some who say the plants 
blooJTi better the second year after potting) for this obvious reason, that it preserves the 
health and constitution of the plants, by affording them a fresh supply of nutriment ; 
and at the same time the cultivator has an opportunity of curtailing their fibres, if grown 
very long, or of cutting ojfF the lower part of the main root, if too long, or the end of it, 
if decayed ; thereby forcing tiie plants, as it were, into a state of action, and causing a 
continued circulation of their juices, during the summer, in the formation of new fibres 
for their necessary sustenance and support : whereas, if this operation of potting is not 
performed till the second year, the soil must have lost a considerable part of its nutritious 
quality, which will produce a pi'oportionate decline in the strength of the plants : and if 
it be deferred till the autumn, there M'ill not be time for a sufficient reproduction of the 
fibres before winter sets in, the eflfects of which will be a faint-colored and weak bloom 
the ensuing spring. The only objection of any importance, agaiixst spring potting, is 
that some sorts will in consequence be more inclined to blow in the following autumn, 
and thereby deprive tli^ plant of its capacity to bloom well the ensuing spring ; this, 
however, occurs but in few instances. 

6361. In potting or fransplanfing auriculas, the plants should be carefully turned out of the former pot, 
and the earth shaken from its fibres, which should be curtailed if found too long and numerous, together 
v. ith the lower end of the main root, and the fibres attached to that part, if it appears too long, or some- 
v/hat decayed ; the plant is to be at the same time carefully examined, and wherever any unsoundness 
appears, it must be entirely eradicated by means of a sharp penknife, let the extent of it be ever so great, 
till no appearance of decay remains; particularly in that part of the main root where it enters the surface 
of the earth, or, as the sailors phrase it, betwixt wind and water, which, being alternately wet and dry, is 
more subject to decay than any other part, and for the same reason is the most difficult to heal : the 
wounded part should-be immediately exposed to the sun, and when the surface of the wound is perfectly 
dry, a cement should be applied, consisting of bees' wax and pitch, about one half of each, warmed and 
softened in the sun, or by a fire, to make it adhere more firmly on application : this will become close and 
hard when cold, it will resist moisture, and is the best application yet discovered, to prevent further pro- 
gress of the decay. Whenever the lower leaves of the plant, next the surface of the earth, become yel- 
low, or dried up, it is proper to strip them off, in a direction downwards. On replanting, a pot suitable to 
the size of the plant is to be selected; it is to have a hollow oyster-shell placed with its convex side up- 
wards, over the hole at the bottom, and then to be about three parts filled with compost, higher in the 
middle than at the sides : the plant is next to be placed thereon, with its fibres regularly distributed 
all round, so as nearly or quite to reach the sides of the pot, which is afterwards to be filled up with the 
compost, adding a little clean coarse sand close round the stem of the plant, on the surface : the bottom 
of the pot should then be gently struck two or three times against the table, which is supposed to be made 
use of for the sake of convenience in the operation, in order to render the soil more firm and compact ; 
tills will cause it to sink or subside about half an inch below the top of the pot, which will prevent the loss 
of water when it is administered. 

6362. The true depth to plant an auricula is within about half an inch of the bottom of its lowest or 
outside leaves ; as the new and most valuable fibres proceed from that part, so they should immediately 
meet with earth to strike into, or otherwise they will perish: it will likewise encourage the offsets, if 
there be any, to strike root sooner than they would do if not in contact with the soil. {Florist's Direct. 
129.) 

6363. On the foregoing directions, by Maddock, his editor, Curtis, has the following note : " Notwith- 
standing the author has so particularly recommended the annual fresh potting of auriculas, we must beg 
leave to differ in opinion from him, as far as relates to those plants which are intended to bloom strong 
the following spring, the mode of potting advised being to shake the whole of the earth from amongst the 
fibres of the plant, in order to examine the lower end of the main root, this severe operation being per- 
formed in the spring, when the plants ought to bemaking their most luxuriant growth, will have evil conse- 
quences. The case is simply this : the plant being firmly established, nature intends its greatest growth 
in the spring ; during this rapid growth, the operation gives an unnatural shock to vegetation ; the con- 
sequence is, the plant must remain dormant until fresh fibres are formed sufficient to draw nourishment 
for supporting tlie growth necessary to form a strong-blooming plant. Having given our opinion against 

»jt, we substitute the following recommendation : select those plants intended for strong blooms the following 
sjiring from the younger ones, turn them out with their balls of earth entire, and if the fibres are healthy, 
return the balls into a set of pots one size larger than they were in before, adding new compost to fill up : 
we have no objection to remove as much earth as can be done without disturbing the mass of fibfe ; in 
this state treat them as usual, and when those which have bloomed strong on this plan are out of bloom, 
put them on the plan recommended by the author. We beg leave also to notice, that it sometimes hap- 
pens that the oyster-shell placed at the bottom of the pot by fitting too close confines the water in it, which 
is inevitable destruction to the plant ; we should advise particular care to be taken for the efl^ectual 
drainage of a superabundance of wet, by putting two or three pieces of broken pot over the surface of the 
bottom." 

6364. Emmerton disapproves both of spring and autumn transplanting, and says, 
" the best time for the operation is soon after they are out of bloom ; say about the 22(1 
or 23d of May;" but he adds, — 

6365. From the 29th of May to the V2th of June, I have transplanted my flowers with great success, 
even also as late as the 13Ui of July. On no account remove a general collection a week later, at least, 
those you intend to bloom very strong : by this means they will have three or four months to get well 
rooted before winter, which they ought to have; and if you transplant them early in the spring, it will be 
so near their time of blov/ing, that the check they will receive by transplanting will prevent their blooming 
strong. Strong-blowing roots should not be removed more than once in two years ; to do it oftener would 
be to run a risk of not having any fine flowers to exhibit on your stage ; because these plants never thrive 
rightly, till the roots have reached the sides of the pots, and it seldom or never happens that they get suf- 
ficiently well established in a full-sized auricula-pot, in one year. By no means remove your large-bloom- 
ing auricula-plants in dry hot weather, as by shaking the mould clean out of the plant the roots will not 
freely draw fresh fibres, except the weather is inclined to be showery, and what is termed a cool moist air. 
I am satisfied dry hot weather is an improper time, except they are fine young maiden plants, in small 
pots, which should be slipped out of the pot with the whole ball of earth, and then immediately planted 
in a full-sized blooming-pot for the ensuing season ; in this last case I used to pay no attention wbatev-er 
to the dry weather. If your large-blooming plants have not been removed for two or three vears, their 



B50 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



small roots will have filled the pots, and probably their large, or what is called by some the carrot root, 
may be grown so long as to require shortening ; in this case the plant must be taken out of the pot, and 
the earth entirely shaken from it ; you will see what is necessary to be done ; shorten the carrot-root, if 
necessary, for if you suflFer it to remain too long, it will either get rotten at the end, and always keep the 
plant weak, or will be too long for an ordinary pot; besides, it would want shifting every year, and never 
produce fine strong flowers. Reduce their siiiall roots to about ten or a dozen, leaving those that are 
nearest the leaves ; they will be sufficient again to support and vegetate your plant. If you perceive any 
canker or rottenness in the root, cut it boldlv to the quick, till it appear fresh and lively, and no spots or 
symptoms of decay remain ; put on the wounds a little mastich, bees' wax, turpentine, and white rosin, in 
equal parts, to heal and dry them ; leaving as many fibres to it as possible. If a large-blooming plant, or any 
other one you remove, has been in the pot but one year since it was last transplanted, you may slip it out 
of the pot with all its earth about it, and although its fibres may have reached the outside, they will not 
be so large and numerous, or so matted together, as the older plants that have remained in one pot two 
clear years. You need not therefore shake the earth from it, but with a sharp knife cut the fibres and 
earth away till you reduce it to the size of a cricliet-ball, or rather larger, as much depends on the size 
and age of your plant. {Treatise, 132.) 

6365. Hogg recommends the first week in August, because " if you put your plants at this early period 
of the summer into pots, in which they are to remain till they flower again next spring, the space of 
nearly twelve months, the strength of the compost must be greatly reduced before that time, particularly 
as they require so much water during the hot months of June and July ; this must tend, beyond all doubt, 
-to exhaust the nutriment contained in so small a body of earth, as is in tlia pots; by which means they 
will be less able to throw out strong fibres, or to produce you strong blooms in the spring. Early {xitting 
is attended with another evil consequence ; for, the plants being removed into fresh and more vegetative 
earth, accompanied with daily waterings, forces them prematurely into a state of active vegetation, and 
causes them to flower late in the autumn, a circumstance which the florist always views with regret, as 
it in a great measure destroys his hopes of a fine bloom at their natural and expected season, towards the 
latter end of April : this last argument of itself appears to me quite conclusive in favor of late pot- 
ting. The slips or oSsets will also have acquired more strength and better roots, by being suffered to ad- 
here to the parent plant till the beginning of August, and will occasion you less trouble in protecting and 
shading them. From the beginning of August to the beginning of November is a period quite long enough 
for the plants to strike fresh fibres, and to get well established in the pots, before winter ; and, with the 
return of spring, you may expect a vigorous growth of the plant in all its parts. The customary mode is, to 
shake the mould completely from the roots every second year ; but, in doing this, you must be guided by 
the state and condition of your plants. The late Kenny let his remain very frequently until the third 
year, reducing the ball of earth only, trimming the fibres, and examining the carrot or main root. 
Transplanting should be done in a cloudy sky and a moist atmosphere." 

6367. Justice pots suckers, and transplants old plants, in August. Henderson, of Delvine, says, 
" the shifting season is always, with me, about the third week of May, when the plants have done flow, 
ering. At that season, I shake the mould from the old plants, and" cut the end of the stump up to the 
fresh young roots, if it has grown too long. (I am now speaking of those plants which have been In the 
largest-sized pots for two years.) After dressing the wounds with gum-mastich, to prevent gangrene, the 
plants are repotted in the second size of pots. Next May they are shifted, with the ball entire, into the 
largest size, or flowering-pots ; so that from the first potting of the young plants in small pots, to a com- 
plete shifting, four years elapse ; the plants having been one year in small pots, one in the second size, 
and two in the largest, or third size. A little river-sand is put round the stems at all the shiftings ; and if 
any wounds are made by taking off the suckers, they are dressed with mastich. At all times tlie stems 
are cleared of sprouts above ground as thev appear, but suckers from under are allowed to grow, in order 
to form young plants." {Caled. Hort. Soc. iii. 230.) 

6368. Removal and potting of offsets. When ofFsets have formed one or more fibres, an inch or two 
in length, Maddock directs to remove them by means of a piece of hard wood, or by the use of the 
fingers, to be separated from the old plant with safety, and replanted round the sides of a small pot, filled 
with the same compost, till they become sufficiently grown to occupy pots separately : if a small hand- 
glass be placed over each pot containing these newly-planted offsets, it will cause their fibres to grow 
more rapidlv ; but it should not be long continued, as it would have a tendency to draw and weaken the 
plant. {FloHsfs Direc. ISO.) 

6369. Emmerton says, " You may separate offsets from the mother plant any time between February 
and August, according as they are in size, or are wanted for increase, and plant them immediately 
against the side of pots four or five inches in diameter. If a strong and superior bloom of flowers is de- 
sired, no offsets must be allowed to grow on the old plant, and especially none on the stem without 
fibres. Rub them all oflPwhen they are about the size of hemp-seed." {Treatise on the Auricula^ &c. 126.) 

6370. General culture. Maddock keeps his auriculas 
during one part of the year in what he calls a summer re- 
pository {fig. 604.), and the other in a winter repository. 

6371. Summer repository. " The following is recom- 
mended as a proper plan for the summer repositorj-, viz. 
in the first place, there should be a bed of coal-ashes 
formed in the place where it is intended to be erected, 
about five or six inches thick; or a platform of plain 
square tiles, closely fitted to each other, on the surface of 
the ground, to preserve the pots from the common earth- 
worm, which, by gaining admittance into them, would/"! 
perforate, and alter the consistence of the soil, in such a 
manner as to prove very injurious ; upon this foundation, 
rows of bricks {fig. 604.) are to be placed in straight lines, 
about two or three inches asunder, which will allow a free 
circulation of air under and between the pots when placed 
upon them, an object of great importance, especially in 
warm weather, when the air is most inchned to stagnate, 
and become impregnated with noxious effluvia. The 
plants, by the above plan, will be raised from nine to 
twelve inches above the level of the ashes or platform. 
There should be two rows of substantial stakes, three feet 
long, and five inches by three wide, one row of which 
should be placed on each side, at about three or four inches' 
distance from the two outside rows of pots {h) : these stakes (c) should be driven twenty inches into the 
ground with their narrow sides towards the pots, and have notches cut in their tops, to receive the 
edges of the shutters they are intended to support. By way of iUustration, suppose the whole length of 
the platform to be twelve yards, and the width three feet, it will contain seven rows, and each row about 
seventy pots ; a sufficient number to constitute a moderate collection for a private gentleman. Three 
slmtters /), niade with feather-edged inch-deal boards, each four yards long, and two feet six inches 
wide, will reach the whole length on one side : three of the notched stakes will be sufficient to support 
one of these shutters ; of course, fifteen stakes at proper distances will completely answer the purposes 
rn one side : the notches are to be cut in the form of a Y, two inches deep and three inches wide at the 




Book 11. 



AURICULA. 



851 



top, which rdll give room for the shutters to move backwards and fonvards without difliciilty or danger 
of slipping out. Both sides are thus to be provided with stakes and shutters, the upper edge of the latter 
should meet over the centre of the platform (t'\ when the plants require to be covered wiih them, in tlie 
form of the ridge or roof of a house, well fitted and sloping equally on both sides, so as to throw off rain, 
without even admitting it to drip through upon the plants in any part. It is necessary that a rail, or row 
of stakes, of a proper height and strength, should proceed from the ground betnccn tlie t«-o middle 
rows of pots, to support the shutters when closed or closing, especially as it is usually more convenient to 
begin to cover or uncover on one side first, and finish on the other; without a supj)ort of this kind, in 
such case, the shutters must fall down upon the plants : a similar exterior rail, or row of stakes, is ne- 
cessary on each side, to support the shutters when open, with the same degree of slope, in a contrary di- 
rection than when closed ; by which means the plants will have a free communication with the air, 
whether covered or open ; nor are they entirely deprived of light, when the shutters are closed, because 
the lower edge of the shutters is as high or higher than the top of the plants at all times. The peculiar 
advantage arising from this plan is, that when the plants require to be shut up from excess of rain, they 
have at the same time the advantage of a continual supply and free circulation of fresh air, which passes 
amongst their leaves in all directions ; whereas those who are obliged to shut up their plants in a close frame, 
to exclude excess of rain from them, oftentimes shut them up in a wet state, as soon as it is judged they 
have had a sufficiency : this is a very dangerous, though not unusual practice, and often produces a mildew 
which is attended with the most destructive consequences. The importance of a properly constructed re- 
pository, and suitable treatment of the plants, for the summer season, vrill sulficientiy apologise for any 
prolixity in the description : it cannot, indeed, be too strongly impressed on the mind of the cultivator of 
this delicate flower that his success more particularly depends on the health and vigor of his plants towards 
the end of summer, than at any other period of the year. The plants, after being placed in the summer 
repository, are to be kept moderately moist ; if the rains that happen are not sufficient, they must be occa- 
sionally watered with soft water, by a small pot with a round curved spout, taking care not to let any water 
fall into the heart or amongst the interior leaves of the plant, as it could not speedily dry up in that part, 
and, of course, would endanger a decay; any water lodging in the heart of the plants in spring, when the 
blossoms begin to make their appearance, cannot fail to injure them considerably. The plants are to re- 
main in their summer situation till September or October, as the weather maybe more or less favorable, 
or until the heat of the sun has considerably decreased." 

6372. Emmerton places his pots, after the plants have done flowering, in a shady situation, and full north 
aspect. Ke sets them on bricks placed on a bed of ashes, in the same manner as Maddock ; but he pro- 
vides no covering to exclude the rain. {Treatise on the Auricula, &c. 143.) 

6373. Hogg removes his auriculas which have blown in spring from the show-stage to a north-east aspect, 
to avoid the scorching rays of the summer sun. He then sets them upon thin boards or thin slates, lying 
on a bed of coal-ashes. {Treatise, Sec. 115.) 

6374. Justice sets his plants in a full northern exposure, and without covering, to the 20th of October. 
Whichever of these plans be adopted, the plants must be kept clear of weeds, the soil gently stii-red 
when it gets hard or mossy, water supplied in dry weather, and the leaves, as they become yellow, drawn 
off close to the stem. 

6375. Jl'intcr repository. In the end of September or beginning of October, Maddock removes his an- 
riculas to the winter repository, " Avhich is to be Constructed in a manner exactly similar to that for the 
summer season, with only one exception, viz. that the south side of it should consist of frames of glass 
{fig: 604. d], instead of the wooden shutters : these are to act in the same manner, but will admit of light 
when the plants are of necessity shut up from adverse weather, which so frequently occurs during winter ; 
the admission of light at such times is indispensably necessary to the wellbeing of the plants, especially 
when the long continuance of rain, or severe frost,' renders it requisite to keep them covered, sometimes 
perhaps for a day or two, with little or no intermission. In the first favorable weather that occurs in 
February, it is necessary to divest the plants of their decayed exterior leaves ; and by the middle of that 
month, the operation of earthing up, as it is termed, should commence ; that is to say, the superficial 
earth of the pots should be carefully taken away, about an inch deep, and fresh compost with the addi- 
tion of a little loam, to give it more tenacity, should be substituted in its stead : this will contribute 
greatly to the strength of the plants, and the vigor of their bloom : at the same time it will afford a fa- 
vorable opportunity to separate such offsets as shall appear possessed of suflicient fibre, to be taken oflPat 
this early season with safety: these offsets, when properly planted in small pots, should be placed in a 
frame, in some warm sheltered situation, till the roots are established. The auricula is liynomeansa 
tender plant, yet it will be proper to cover the repository with mats, in case of severe frost ; for although 
it probably would not destroy the plants, unless it happened in an extreme degree ; it would, however, in- 
jure them, and perhaps spoil their bloom, particularly early in the spring, when the stem begins to rise; 
it would certainly, at that period, destroy or render the pips or corollas abortive. If any plant is possessed 
of more than one or two principal stems, it is advisable to pinch offthe pips of the smallest and weakest, 
in order to render the blossoms of the remaining one larger and more vigorous than they would be if this 
was omitted to be done in due time. It is a curious fact, that those sorts which are naturally possessed of 
a fine green on the edge, or inargin, of the flower are often known to lose that property, when the stem 
proceeds from the very heart or centre of the plant ; whereas those stems that proceed from the side pro- 
duce larger pips, possessing their true natural colors in much greater perfection : these last are called the 
winter stems, because they are usually forwarder, and produce their flowers rather earlier in the season 
than those which proceed'from the centre of the plant. When the pips become turgid, and begin to ex- 
pand, they must be preserved from rain : nor should they remain any longer in a situation exposed to cold 
winds ; on the contrary', such plants ought to be selected from the rest, and removed to a calm shady cor- 
ner, where they should have small hand-glasses suspended over them in such a manner as to preserve the 
bloom from rain, &c. and yet admit a free circulation of air, both to the plant and to the blossom, ic being 
equally necessary for the one as for the other." 

6376. Em7)ierton, about the middle of October, makes choice of a full southern aspect, and in general 
puts his pots of plants into small frames of about three and a half to four feet long, and each light about 
three feet wide. So soon as they are placed in their winter situation, during the autumn and winter months, 
even down to the 5th of Apri'l, or thereabouts, he exposes them, during the day, to as much air as possi- 
ble, bv leaving the lights entirely off. It. is necessary they should be kept very dry, in November and 
December, as in case of a severe frost the weather has less power on the roots of the plants. During 
Januarv, and most likely the greater part of February, much depends upon the depth of snow and the in- 
tense frost. Some winters are more favorable than others : if the season has now the appearance of open 
weather, you may treat your plants nearly in the same maimer as the two last months; but if you have 
snow, and the weather is now a severe frost, you must be rather more cautious as to the exposure ; a 
trifling frost is of no serious consequence to these hardy plants, but the mould should not be severely fro- 
zen in the pots, as by the end of January the bloom is formed, although very low in the heart of the plant ; 
he therefore covers with mats till the weather becomes mild and open, giving air, however, a few hours 
in fine days ; but no water till natural rains fall. {Treatise on Auricula, Sec. p. 85.) In February he top- 
dresses with rich compost, and transplants offsets intended to bloom, from small pots into larger ones. He 
exposes the plants to all the gentle rains of this month, at the same time carefully defending them from 

. frost and hail-storms, or long continued i-ains. From the 10th or 12th of March he covers up with " warm 
clothing," to defend the coming bloom against frosts. 

6377. Hogg puts his auriculas into frames in October; the frames are placed on a bed of ashes, and are 
raised on bricks to admit a free current of air under them ; but when the frost sets in, about Christmas, 

3 I 2 



S52 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




the bricks are removed, and the frames rest on th« ground. In all dry and temperate weather the plants 
are exposed to the air, very little water is given, and the plants are kept free from decayed leaves, and the 
surface of the pots from mouldincss. From the second week of February, and during March, the plants 
are allowed the benefit of gentle rains for an hour or two; they are top-dressed, such as require it are 
shifted, and suckers are taken off where they are large, and while all possible air is given during day, the 
frames are shut close at night, to prevent'the opening blossoms being nipped by the frost. 

6378. T//e Lancashire grawers have no frames or lights, but make use of weather-boarding, with hinges, 
fixed against some wall or fence, in a south aspect, to defend them against the rain and snow, resting, 
when shut close, upon a board nine inches high ; but this is never done except in very severe weather : 
the pots are plunged up to the rim in sawdust or coal-ashes. {Hogg.) 

637'J. Justice places his auriculas in what he calls a bunker or shed, on the 10th of October. This bunker 
is a stage with boarded ends, front and cover, placed against a wall with a north-eastern exposure. He 
gives water sparingly, but as much air as possible ; by the end of February he top-dresses the plants, and 
if they are weak he adds the proportion of one eighth of fullers' earth to the compost 

6380, Blooming-stage, {fig. 605.) This, according to 
Maddock, should have a northern aspect, that the sun 
may not shine on the flowers ; it should consist of four rows 
of shelves, in the form of steps, but must not exceed five ; 
the front, or lowest shelf, should be two feet five inches 
from the ground, the second about three inches higher than 
the first, and the rest in the same proportion ; these shelves 
should be about six inches wide, strong, and well supported, 
otherwise the weight of the pots will cause them to bend or 
give way. If the stage consists of four rows of shelves, its 
depth, from front to back, ought to be about two feet eight 
inches ; the north or front elevation of the stage should not 
be less than seven feet, gradually sloping to about five feet 
six inches on the south side : the roof should consist of 
frames of glass. The frames of glass made use of on the 
south side of the winter re])OS!tory will answer extremely 
well for this purpose ; but as they will not be wide enough to form the roof completely, witliout addition, 
a single row of feather-edged boards may be placed on the lowest part of the slope, and the lower edge of 
the frames of glass may rest upon them ; these boards will answer another good purpose, by preventing 
the sun, which at this season of the year has obtain?d a considerable degree of altitude, from shining on 
the first and second rows of plants, during the middle of the day, when it has most power ; although the 
plants of the back row will, in consequence, have rather less light, yet it is not so materially injurious as 
the former. The posts supporting the roof of the stage, on the south side, maybe so constructed, and 
placed at such distances from each other, as that the wooden shutters, made use of on the north side of- 
the winter repository, may fit between theni, and form a regular shed, as low or lower than the higher 
shelf : the remaining space to the ground may be left open in mild calm weather, or may be easily closed 
up, by a line of mats sewed together, when it is otherwise. The east and west ends of the stage should 
be entirely boarded up from top to bottom, and the front left open, unless in unfavorable weather, and at 
night ; at these times, it may be defended by frames of wood covered with canvass : these should be about 
six feet wide, suspended from the' front edge of the roof by hinges; they will serve both to defend the 
bloom, when let down, and also by each having two small iron rods, about five feet six inches long, con- 
nected with their lowest edges by staples, that will allow them to move in any direction, and support them 
when up, v^ill defend the path in front from rain, take off the glare of liglit when the sun shines, and at 
the same time defend the spectators from its heat. The inside of the back and ends of the stage, and 
the shelves likewise, should be painted black, or some very dark color, by way of contrast to the white 
eyes, &c. of the flowers : and if a large looking-glass be placed at each end of the stage, the effect pro- 
duced will be very pleasing, by apparently lengthening the stage each way as far as the eye can reach. 

6381. As auriculas and hyacinths generally blow exactly at the same time., the beauty and elegance of the 
scene is considerably increased by having a stage of the former, and a bed of the latter, under the same 
awning, with an intermediate path, about six feet wide ; in which case, if the cloth covering of the hya- 
cinths is fine enough to admit a sufficiency of light, it may be continued over the auricula-stage, instead 
of the glass and boards, and will answer all purposes tolerably well with little trouble : or otherwise, the 
edge of the cloth covering, for the bed and path, may be nailed to the upper or front edge of the glass 
frames, over the auriculas, in such manner as effectually to prevent rain dripping through in that quiirter. 
A row of fine polyanthuses, in pots, may likewise be introduced in front of the hyacinths, as they likewise 
blow at the same time; it will add to' the variety, and form altogether a more elegant assemblage oi 
beautiful fragrant flowers than any other season of the j-ear can afford. The tallest blowing auriculas 
should stand on the last or most distant shelf, and the shortest in ftont ; those stems which are weak and 
bend should be supported with small wires, fixed in the earth behind them, so as not to be easily dis- 
cerned. If any of the stems and blossoms of those in the back row incline forvv-ard too much towards the 
light, they may be easily recovered to an erect position, by turnin.g the pots for a few hours in the morn- 
ing ; but the glass roof will render very little of this trouble necessary : the pots must be regularly 
watered, two or three times every week, during the bloom. No person can depend on a complete stage 
of auriculas, who is not provided in autumn or early in the spring with twice as many blowing plants as 
his stage will contain, because some will eventually prove defective, and fail in one respect or other : and 
a succession of proper plants in bloom will be required to replace such as, being earlier than the rest or of 
shorter duration, are no longer eligible to remain on the stage, and ought, in consequence, to be taken 
away, and more suitable ones brought on in their stead. 

63S2. When the bloom is declined, the plants are to be removed into their summer repository, where 
they will soon recover their former strength and vigor, which, notwithstanding the utmost care and pre- 
caution, will have been, in some degree, impaired by standing two or three weeks upon the stage. 

6383. Emmerton says, " to bloom your auriculas well, too great attention cannot be paid to them for 
about four or five weeks, viz. to use the language of a florist, to prevent them from being set, when all 
trouble and danger will be completely over. This strict care commences about the 20th or 22d of March, 
and ends, as I calculate, by the 25th of April, or thereabouts. Around London, many fine plants of the 
choicest sorts have always been spoilt by nursing them as they do their geraniums, that is, by keeping 
their plants under glass so many weeks, night and day. Many florists keep their lights continually over 
their flowers, day as well as night, from the 1st of January till the 1st of May, and only admit a current 
of air behind their frames : this is the rock, fatal to bloom, which so many split on. This mode of treat- 
ment, I am convinced, is highly improper ; it draws up the flower-stem, and renders it weak and spind- 
ling, in a state unfit to bear or produce a bold truss. To bloom an auricula in perfection, it does not 
require to be continually under glass night and day, longer than twenty-four days, or thereabouts ; as a 
criterion, say from the 4th to the 28th of A])ril : you will find your middle pips expanded, or nearly so, 
and well adapted to bo exhibited on the stage at this time." Previously to this period, however, say from 
the 10th to the 16th of April, he removes them from the frames (which have a south aspect), and places 
them under hand-glasses in a full or noith-eastern exposure. Here they remain till the 26th or 28th of 
April, and arc then removed to the stage in a full north aspect. 

6384. Hogg keei>s the lights over his auriculas, in .April, night and day, to preserve their beauty unimpaired. 
Air he admits by raising the sashes behind j he covers up close at night, " this being the very crisis of 



Book IT, 



PRIMROSE FAMILY. 



853 




60S 




time that requires your most ixirticular care." He thins out the pips or blossoms, leaving not more than 
thirteen, nor fewer than seven on a truss or umbel. In thinning, " they should be taken out two or three 
at a time, r.nd it requires some taste, nicety, and art, to perform this operation well, that the blossoms 
v.-hich are left on mav grow in a regular equidistant form, so that any common spectator might suppose 
that no such thinning of the pips had taken place, but that they had grown exactly in that form, and 
with that number, from the first." Towards the end of the month the flowers are removed to the stage 
fronting the east, 

638o. T/ie Lancashire growers, " in blooming 
time, set their large show-plants under hand- 
glasses, in an east aspect, to receive the morning 
sun only. The plants are, perhaps, not so early 
in bloom as those wintered in fviimes, but when 
their stems are not drawn, and they are able to 
support the trusses f-rmly : the mildew and rot 
do not take them so readily as v/hen in closer 
situations." 

G-386. Justice blows his floxvers in the bunkers, 
or sheds, exposed to the full north ; he gives 
them all the air lie can, but excludes the sun, 
shelters them fromTxinds, and waters them well 
twice a-week. {Brit. Card. Direct, art. Auricula.) 

6387. Henderson, of Delvine, blows his 
floA\ ers in a frame {Jig. 606. ), which he 
says, " answers all the purposes of frame, 
hand-glass, and stage, used by the Eng- 
lish florists ; at least I make it do so. 
I have only to erect a screen of matting 
or poles in front, during the flowering 
season. Tl:e plan of it (a) is a Jong 
hexagon, which has a span roof \b) and. 
a low stage sloi)ing on all sides, (c) 
In the elevation are eight ventilators [d), 
eight hinged sashes [e), and as many 
iron rods on staples for holding them 
up (/)•" The whole seems a simple, 
economical, and sufficiently neat sti-uc- 
ture. 





SuBSECT, 16. Prhnula, or Primrose Family. — Primula, L. Fentand. Monog. L. and 

Primula cecp, B. P. 

6S88. The primrose family, grown as florists' flowers, consists of the polyanthus, 
primrose, cowslip, and oxlip. 

6389. The polyanthus is the Primula vulgaris, var. Polyanthus, L. Primula, French, 
German, and Italian. In its wild state, the common primrose is too well known to 
require any description, it produces its flowers on numerous peduncles ; but, by 
cultivation, throws up a scape, bearing an umbel of numerous flowers, brown, purple, 
red, and yellow. Linna;us asserts, that the peduncles in the common wild primroses 
spring from a scape, which being so short as to be concealed among the leavesj has not 
been observed. Curtis, however, found it in a few plants, and also that wild primroses, 
introduced into Dr. Buxton's garden, at Maize Hill, near Greenwich, produced flowers 
both with and witiiout a scape, and became, color excepted, perfect polyanthuses. Many 
botanists consider, that the polyanthus, primrose, cowslip, and oxlip are one species ; and 
the Rev. W. Herbert seems to have proved it, and the same thing as to Primula auricula^ 
helvetica, nivalis, and viscosa.^ (Hort. Ti-ans. iv. 19.) It is sufficient for our purpose to 
observe, that the polyanthus is a very permanent variety, which does not readily return 
to the primrose, and tliat it is in high repute as a select and border flower, appearing in 
March and April, when there are few others to decorate the flower-garden. 

6390. Varieties. These are as numerous as the varieties of auricula j and, as in that 
plant, single flowers are most esteemed. 

6391. Cnteiion of a fine polyanthu&. " Its properties are, in most respects, similar to those of a fine 
auricula, viz. the stem, peduncles, or foot-stalks, and formation of the bunch or truss ; therefore, a defi- 
nition of its pips, or petals ( fig. ()07. a), only remain necessary to be considered in this place. The tube 
of the corolla above the calyx, should be short, well filled with the anthers or summits of the stamens, 
and terminate fluted, rather above the eye. The eye^should be round, of a bright clear yellow, and dis- 
tnict from the ground-color ; the proportion as in the auricula throughout the flower. The ground-color 
is most admired when shaded with a light and dark rich crimson, resembling velvet, with one mark or 
^tripe in the centre of each division of the limb, bold and distinct, from the edging down to the eye, 
where it should terminate in a fine point. The pips should be large, quite flat, and as round as may be, 
consistent with their peculiar beautiful figure, which is circular, excepting those small indentures between 
each division of the limb, which divide it into five or six heart-like segments. The edging should resem- 
ble a bright gold lace, bold, clear, and distinct, and so nearly of the same color as the eye and stripes are 
scarcely to be distinguished; in short, the polyanthus should possess a graceful elegance of form, a rich- 
ness of coloring, and symmetry of parts, not to be found imited in any other flower." {Maddock.) 

f)392. Propagation. By dividing the root, or by slips, for ordinary purposes : and by seed, for obtaining 
new varieties. 

» 3 I 3 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pari III. 



6393. By seed. The plants from which seed is to be saved are to be separated from the stems, and 
treated in the same manner as seed-bearing auriculas. When ripe, it should be cut off with part of the 
stem, and so preserved till the sowing season, which, as well as the mode of procedure, are, according to 
Maddock, the same as for the auricula. Emmerton says, flowers intended for seed should be selected on 
the same principle as he directs for the auricula ; and" he recommends Pearson's Alexander and Nichol- 
son's Tantarara as excellent flowers to breed from. Knight's mode of castration may be adopted. 

639i. Justice says, he " has had great success in raising polyanthuses and primroses from seed." He 
gathered the seed" generally about the 25th of June, and sowed it ten days afterwards in boxes, placed in 
the open air, under a wall or hedge with a north aspect. In July, he directs to " prepare a nursery-bed of 
the same earth in which they were sown, and plant them carefully out, taking up as much earth about 
their roots as you can, so as not to disturb their young fibres, planting them twelve inches asunder, and 
shading them from all sun until they have struck" new roots ; keep them clear from weeds, and give them 
gentle waterings, and let this nursery-bed be made in such a situation as to have the morning sun only. 
Some of them will show their flowers the same autumn, and many of them in the spring following. Select 
the best, and plant them in a bed by themselves in a shady moist situation. In November, top-dress the 
plants, which will greatly strengtheia them for the succeeding spring. They require to be transplanted 
every two years." {Br/f. Gard. Direct. 218.) 

6395. Soil. Maddock and Emmerton recommend the same compost as. for auriculas, but with more 
loam. Justice used the following : " to one load of well rotted cow-dung, or leaves of trees, take half a 
load of fine white sand, and two loads of fine hazelly loam, taken from a pasture some months before, and 
which has had the sward rotted amongst the earth :'mix all well together before using." 

6396. Hogg says, " the primrose and polyanthus require a much greater portion of sandy loam than the 
auricula, a very small quantity of rotten diing, and a little leaf-mould or heath or peat earth, mixed with 
them : in this they are found to grow extremely well." 

6397. Manner of growing. Maddock says, they may be grown in the same sized pots as the auricula, and 
be treated in the "same manner ; but as they are more impatient of heat and drought, and partial to sliade 
and moisture, they may, with equal propriety, be planted on cool and shady beds or borders. I'his is the 
general practice of almost all the growers of this flower. 

6398. General cidfiire. The polyanthus is very hardy, and seldom perishes in the coldest and wettest 
seasons ; but, during the heats of summer, they are frequently destroyed by snails and slugs, and by a small 
red spider. " This insect," Maddock observes, " seldom attacks such plants as are in a state of vigor, or 
when the weather is cold and wet ; it generally commences its depredations in the early part of summer, 
and continues them as the heat and dryness of the weather favor its existence : the juices also of the plants 
being then more viscous and saccharine, aflTord it more suitable nourishment than at any other season. 
Such plants as appear infected should be immediately selected from the rest, taken out of the earth, and 
soaked for two or three hours in a strong infusion o"f tobacco-water, and be replanted in a fresh soil or 
compost, and removed to another situation remote from the 
former. If the whole bed or border of polyanthuses is over- 
run with this insect, it is best to take up all the plants, serve 
them in the same manner, and plant them elsewhere. The 
bed or border from whence the plants have been taken, 
should be immediately dug up or trenched, and suffered to 
remain fallow till the following season, or be occupied with 
some crop not liable to the same calamity." {Florist's Di- 
rectory, 228.) 

6399. The primrose (P. vulgaris, L. {Eng. Bot. 
4.) Primevcre, Fr. ; Shaftlose Priimde, Ger. ; 
and Primavera, Ital.) {fig- 607.) has a perennial 
root, appearing as if bit off at the end, with a 
singular smell like that of the anise. It is a na- 
tive of most parts of Europe, in woods, coppices, 
and sheltered lanes, particularly in a clayey soil. 
The flowers of the wild plant ai-e almost always of 
a brimstone-color, but sometimes of a purple hue ; 
they appear in March and April. 

6400. Varieties. The double varieties produced by culture, are in most esteem, of which there are — 

The steinless white I Purple | Scotch I Yellow 

Crimson Lilac MTiite Brimstone. 

Hose-in-hose | I 1 

6401. The cowslip (P. veris, L. {Eng. Bot. 5.) Primcl, Fr. and ScMusselblunie, Ger.) 
{Jig. 608.) is distinguished from the primrose, by smelling more strongly of anise, by- 
shorter leaves, and hy an umbel with a leafy involucrum. It 
is a native plant, and found in moist pastures, in open situations, 
flowering in ]May. 

6402. Varieties. Both double and single varieties are in esteem ; but the 
plant has not been so much cultivated as the primrose. Gibbs, nursery- 
man, Brompton, has lately raised a great many very beautiful varieties from 
seed, differing in color, magnitude of the umbel, and in some being double, 
and in the hose-in-hose form. " May IDth, 1818, Gibbs sent a large col- 
lection of flowers of A-arieties of the common cowslip, from his garden at 
Brompton. Ke had raised them from the seed of plants, originally derived 
from the wild cowslip, which had sported into varieties, and by frequent re- 
production had attained their present excellence. The changes that have 
taken place are in the magnitude of the trusses, and the size and color of 
the flowers ; the selection appearing to have been from the darker hues, 
though some paler flowers were in the collection. However great the vari- 
ation was in the points alluded to, yet none of the specimens appeared to 
have lost the general character and appearance of cowslip, not running either 
into the oxlip or the primrose ; but some of them had become what florists 
term hose-in-hose, which appears to be the conversion, more or less, of the 
calyx, into the appearance of the corolla." 

640.'5. The oxlip {P.elaiioi; 'L.{Eng. Bot. 5l8.)BaviUo7h¥r. and 
Garlenprimd, Ger. ) {fig. 609) is distinguished from the primrose by its many-flowered scape; 





Book II. 



CARNATION. 



855 




and from the cowslip, by the flat border of the corolla. It is 
found in woods, thickets, Iiedges, and sometimes in pastures ; 
but is by no means so common as the primrose and cowslip. 
It flowers in April and May. Sir J. E. Smith is inclined to 
think that the oxlip is a hybrid production from a primrose, im- 
pregnated by a cowslipr*; its habit, the contraction towards the 
middle of the leaf, and the umbellate flower-stalk, indicating 
the father, whilst in the corolla, its form, coloi-, and scent, it 
most resembles the mother. {Eng. But. 513 ) 

6404. Varieties. Tliere are a few ; but the plant has not been much cul- 
tivated with a view to that object. 

6405. T/ie propagalion and culture of tliese three species is 
the same as for the polyanthus ; 

SuBSECT. 17. Carnation. — Dianthus CaryophjUus, L. {Bot. 
Mag. S9.) Decand. Trigynia, L. and Caryophyllece, J. 
Uoe'dlet des Fleuristes, Fr. ; Gartennelke, Get. ; and Garofano 
ortense, Ital. {Jig. 610.) 
6406. The carnation is little known in its wild 
state, though it has been found in England on rocks 
and walls. It was unknoM'u to tlie ancients in its 
cultivated state ; but has been a favorite flower in 
Europe for an unknown length of time. It is generally 
supposed to have been introduced from GeiTnany or 
Italy, in which countries it is more cultivated than in 
England; Gerrard, in 1-597, received it from Poland. 

Of all the flowers that adorn the garden," Hogg ob- 
serves, " whti^ther they chami the eye by their beauty, 
or regale the sense of smelling by their fragrance, the 
carnation may be justly said to hold the first rank. 
The statelines3 of its growth, the brilliancy and di- 
versity of its colors, and the sweetness of its per- 
fume, never fail to attract our regard and admir- 
ation. The tulip, though stjded the queen of the 
garden, cannot boast of more admirers : they may 
with propriety be considered tiie two master-pieces of nature ; and, though rival beauties, 
may be said to share the sovereignty of the garden equally between them. Yet it must 
be admitted, that the carnation, independent of its fragrance, has this advantage over its 
rival, that it continues longer in bloom ; and that when planted in pots, it can be removed 
to decorate the green-house, the conservatory, or the drawingroom." 

6407. Varieties. Parkinson (in 1629) has forty-nine sorts, which he divides into carnations, or " the 
great£st sorts in leaf and flower," and gillyflowers, or such as are smaller in both respects. One Tuggre, 
in Westminster, was the most remarkable man at that time for the culture of these flowers, Rea (in 
1702) has 360 good sorts of carnation ; a number scarcely exceeded, by the catalogues of modern British 
florists. The varieties of this flower are now arranged in three classes : flakes, bizarres, and picot^es, 
f/aAre5 have two colors only, and t:heir stripes large, going quite through the leaves; Btxarres [Fr. oAd, 
irreg.) are variegated in irregular spots and stripes, and with not less than three colors: Picotees {Fr. 
piqncttee, pricked or spotted) have a white ground, spotted or pounced with scarlet, red, purple, or other 
colors. Of each class there are numerous varieties, arranged under the farther subdivisions of scarlet 
flake, pink flake, purple flake, yellow flake, &c. scarlet bizarre, crimson bizarre. Sec. and purple picot^e, 
yellow picot^e, &c. Hogg gives a catalogue of nearly 350 sorts, so arranged, named after great personages, 
all of which were in his possession at the time he published his Treatise on tlie Carnation, in 1820. Only 
double varieties are in esteem. As an oddity may be mentioned the double dwarf carnation of Leige, with 
sessile flowers. 

6408. Criterion of a fine douhle carnation, {fig. 610. c andrf) " The stem should be strong, tall, and 
straight ; not less than thirty or more than forty-five inches high ; the foot-stalks, supporting the flowers, 
should be strong, elastic, and of a proportionate length. The flower, or corolla, should be at least three 
inches in diameter, consisting of a great number of large well formed petals ; but neither so many as to 
give it too full and crowded an appearance, nor so few as to make it appear too thin and em{>ty. The pe- 
tals should be long, broad, and substantial, particularly those of the lower or outer circle, commonly 
called the guard-leaves ; these should rise perpendicularly, about half an inch above the calyx, and then 
turn ofl" gracefully, in a horizontal direction, supporting the interior petals, and altogether forming a 
convex, and nearly hemispherical corolla. The iivterior petals should rather decrease in size, as they ap- 
proach the centre of the flower, which should be well filled with them. The petals should be regularly 
disposed alike on every side, imbricating each other in such a manner as that both their respective and 
united beauties may captivate the eye at the same instant: they should be nearly flat, however a small 
degree of concavity, or inflection, at the lamina, or broad end, is allowable ; but their edges should be 
perfectly entire, that is to say, free from notch, fringe, or indenture. The calyx should be at least one 
inch in length, terminating with broad points, sufficiently strong to hold the narrow bases of the petals, 
in a close and circular body. Whatever colors the flower may be possessed of, they should be jjerfectly 
distinct, and disposed in long regular stripes, broadest at the edge of the lamina, and gradually becoming 
narrower as they approach the unguis, or base of the petal, there terminating in a fine point. Each pe- 
tal should have a due proportion of white, ?'. e. one half, or nearly so, which should be perfectly clear, and 
free from spots. Bizarres, or such as contain two colors upon a white ground, are esteemed rather pre- 
ferable to flakes, which have but one, especially when their colors are remarkably rich, and very regularly 
di.stributed. .Scarlet, purple, and pink, are the three colors most predominant in the carnation ; the two 
fjist arc seldom to be met wit!i in the same flower, but the two last arc very frcouently. When Hie scai- 

3 I 4 




856 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pa&t lit 



Pink bizarres are so called when 




let predominates, and is united with a paler color, or, as it sometimes happens, with a rery deep purple 
upon a white ground, it constitutes a scarlet bizarre, of which there are many shades and varietiesr, some 
richer and others paler in their colors, as is the case with all the rest, 
the pink abounds ; purple bizarres, when the pui-ple abounds ; 
crimson bizarres consist of a deep purple and rich pink. When 
the pink flake is very high in color, it is distinguished by the 
appellation of rose flake; but some there are so nearly in the 
medium betwixt a pink and scarlet, that it can scarcely be de- 
fined to which class they belong. In addition to the foregoing 
varieties, there is a sort held in great esteem by cultivators, 
called picot^e {fig. 611. a) ; many of which are very beautiful, 
and being hardier than the other sorts, are in considerable re- 
quest. The colors are principally yellow, and white spotted j 
their properties are the same as the other kinds, except that 
the edges of the petals are serrated or jagged, and the color is 
disposed in spots, where the others are striped. It is propa- 
gated in the same manner as the others." 

6409. Propagation. By layers and pipings for continuing 
approved sorts, and by seed for procuring new varieties. 

6410. By layers. The time for performing this operation is 
when the plants are in full bloom ; some defer it till the flowers 
are on the decline ; but in that case the new plants are not so 
well rooted as those layed earlier, and consequently less able to 
stand the winter. Laying, by the wounds it inflicts, consider- 
ably impairs the bloom, and generally kills the parent plant. 
The practical part of the operation has nothing extraordinary 
in it ; a sufficient quantity of pegs {fig. 612. a) and of com- 
post being provided, the pot containing the plant to be laid is placed on a table, and the layers prepared 
by cutting off their lower leaves {b) ; the earth is then stirred, and the pot filled up with " light rich mould, 
not of too fine a grain." {MaddocJc) The incision is made by entering a quarter of an inch below the 
joint, and passing the knife up through the centre of it ; it is then to be pegged down, and buried not more 
than half an inch deep. " It is advisable," Maddock says, " to pog down the layers in a drj' state, being 
then less brittle, and consequently not so liable to break ofF as when they are wet and succulent ; there- 
fore, as soon as the layers are dressed, the pot should be placed full in the sun for half an hour, in order 
to render them more flaccid and pliant than they otherwise would be. Wlien the layers are properly 
rooted, which will be the case with moist sorts in about three weeks or a month after laying, provided due 
care be taken to keep them regularly moist, and to shade them from the heat of the nieridian sun, they 
are then to be cut off from the old plant, with about half an inch of the stalk which connects them with 
it, and be immediately planted in small pots, three or four plants in each, placed round the sides. The 
pots are to be placed under an arch of hoops, where they can be covered with mats, in case of excessive 
rains, till the severity of the weather renders it necessary to remove them into tlieir winter repository, 
which is to be constructed in the same manner, and have the same aspect, as that desci-ibed for auriculas." 
(,Florist's Directory, 196.) 

6411. Hogg commences laying when the flowers are suflficiently expanded to show which are in color, or 
true to their kinds, and which not : this he finds to be about the 21st of July, and he continues laying from 
that time to the 21st of August. The plants receive a good watering the day previous to laying, because 
they can receive it only for some time after through the fine rose of (he watering-pot, on account of pre- 
serving the earth on the layed shoots. In pertbrming the operation, hecuts off the nib or extreme end of 
the tongue, or talus, immediately below tiie joint, because, " if left on, it is apt to decay," and prevent 
the protrusion of that granulous matter from which the fibres proceed. Under favorable circumstances 
they will be fit to take off in seven or eight weeks, and may then be planted two or three in a small pot 
(No. 48.), three inches in diameter, by four inches deep. The pots are to be set on tiles, slates, or 
boards, there to remain till the middle or end of October, when they are to be removed to their winter 
quarters. {Treatise, &c. 56.) 

6412. By pipings. This mode of propagating the carnation is very precarious. Maddock says, "five 
thousand plants were piped one season, of which not more than one. hundred perished ; whereas more than 
two thousand were lost of the same number the year following, with but very little variation in the ma- 
nagement ; nevertheless, some sorts succeed much better by piping than laying, and make healthier plants : 
it requires attention and experience to distinguish such sorts from the rest." Piping, however, is often a 
necessary resource where the shoots are too short for laying, or where in laying, shoots are broken by 
accident. 

6413. The first thing is to provide a slight hot-bed, and cover it four or five inches thick with fine light 
mould, laid very regular and even. The cuttings intended to be piped are to have two complete joints, 
that is to say, they are to be cut off horizontally close under the second .ioint : the extremities or points of 
the leaves are likewise to be shortened, as for laying, which will leave the whole length of the piping from 
one inch and a half to two inches, according to its strength {fig. 612. c) : as soon as tlius prepared, it may 
be thrown into a basin of soft water for a few minutes, to plump it up. The earth on the bed where the 
pipings are to be placed should be moderately moistened, and rendered rather compact than otherwise . 
then take a small hand-glass, and with it make an impres- 
sion neatly on the surface of the soil, in order to know 
where to stick in the pipings, so as to lose no room, or en- 
danger their being disturbed when the glass is placed ove;: 
them. The pipings are then to be taken out of the basin 
singly, and forced into the earth, in their wet state, with a 
steady hand ; but not more than half an inch deep. When 
a sufficient number for the glass are thus placed regularly, 
at equal distances from each other, and rather more than 
an inch within the mark described by the glass, on every 
side, they are to be very gently watered, in order that the 
earth may adhere more closely to them, and thereby keep 
out the air ; after this watering, they are to remain open, 
but not exposed to a hot sun, till their leaves become per- 
fectly dry, after which the glass is to be placed over them 
carefully, on the same mark that was made by it upon the 
surface of the soil, before the pipings were placed there. 
The bottom edges of the glass are to be forced a little into 
the earth, to prevent the admission of too much air, which 
so far finishes the operation. What further remains to be 
done is to attend diligently to their management, with re- 
spect to sun and air, &c. 

6414. The soil ought to be kept regv\.rly moist, they 
have formed their nbi"es ; but too mu(^h moisture is as pre- 
judicial as too little, and whenever they are watered, the 
glasses are never to be replaced over them till their leaves 




Book IT. 



CARNATION. 



857 



are perfectly dry. The pipings should have a little of the morning sun, but must be shaded from it 
when the heat becomes considerable ; this will be easily effected by placing mats upon a slight frame 
of hoops or laths erected over the bed about two feet above it. 

6415. The glasses should be occasionally taken ciffto admit fresh air ; if this material point is neglected, 
the consequence will be a green mossy appearance on the surface of the earth, and an universal mouldiness 
amongst the plants, which will destroy them. It requires more skill to know when and how long the 
pipings should be exposed to the air, while forming root, than for almost any other part of the manage- 
ment ; on this single point, in great measure, depends the good or ill success of the whole undertaking. 
It is almost, or perhaps entirely, impossible to lay down any rules that will not be liable, as circumstances 
may vary, to mislead the inexperienced in the art of piping ; much must depend on the discernment and 
prudence of the cultivator ; there is no great danger to be apprehended from laking off the glasses for a 
few minutes, or half an hour, when it is cloudy, and the air rather warm and moist ; but if no opportuni- 
ties of this kind occur in due time, it should be done early in the morning : and rather than to omit doing 
it entirely, it will be better to take the glasses off, if it is only for five minutes, turning them upside down 
on the path, in order to air them, and replacing them again over the plants ; even this will be of great 
service, though not equal to a more effectual airing at favorable times, which, indeed, becomes more fre- 
quently necessary in proportion to the length of time the pipings have been upon the bed; but when once 
they begin to strike fibre, they will soon spindle up and become extremely weak, if not carefully attended 
to, viz. agreeably to the following directions : when tlieir fibres are formed, which the additional verdure 
and growth of the plants will demonstrate, the glasses should be placed over them very lightly, in order 
that more air may be admitted ; and when they become tolerably well rooted, the glasses being no longer 
necessary, should be entirely taken away : but it seldom happens that all the plants, under the same glass, 
strike root together ; some are generally a few days or a week forwarder than the rest, as will be apparent 
by'their superior growth and verdure: such ought to be carefully taken up and planted in small pots, for 
winter preservation, or they may be planted round the sides of large carnation-pots, filled with the com- 
post, where they will soon make rapid progress ; the remaining plants which are not sufficiently rooted for 
removal, must be continued under the glasses, as before directed, till they become so. 

6416. Care of pipings as to run or degenerated flowers. It is necessary to be very careful to mark such 
pipings as are taken off before it can be ascertained whether the original plant is in true colors, or run (or 
degenerated) ; because it very seldom happens that the pipings or layers, taken from a run flower, produce 
any other than run or plain-colored blossoms ; in consequence of which they are not worth the trouble of 
propagation ; the pipings ought therefore to be so marked as that it may be accurately known from what 
plant or plants they were taken, in order that if any of the originals should prove foul in color, or run, the 
increase of such may be distinguished from the rest, and destroyed. The layers and pipings of the most 
beautifully variegated flowers will frequently produce run blossoms ; but it is impossible to prevent it, 
especially amongst the rich high-colored sorts, when they grow in a rich compost. 

6417. Some people pipe their carnations at the third joint, but it is better to do it at the second; because, 
in the first instance, the third joint being more hard and woody, the pipings do not strike root so soon, or 
form afterwards such handsome plants, as when thev are piped at the second joint from the extremity of 
the shoot. {Flo. Direct. 202.) 

6418. Hogg considers, that piping the carnation should commence sooner than laying, before the shoot.s 
get hard and woody ; he begins about the first of July. Plants raised from i)ipings, he considers as sounder, 
and more likely to encounter the rigors of a sharp winter than layers ; but still as laying is the surest mode, 
he only makes pipings of such shoots as appear crowded, or too short or too high up the stalk to be laid 
easily. He plants them on abed of dung of blood warmth, in a compost of one third maiden earth, one 
third leaf-mould, one third rotten horse-dung, and one sixth sand, finely sifted, that " the cuttings, when 
stuck in, may enter easily and without injury. The piping should be cut with a sharp pen or budding- 
knife, at the second or third joint, according to the condition of the shoot ; but the shorter tliebetter. The 
cut must take place horizontally, close below the joint, and the sheath, or part that covers the joint, must 
be carefully removed and peeled off. When the pipings are cut, the surface of the bed made flat and level, 
and gently watered through a fine rose, they may be stuck in three quarters of an inch deep, in rows not 
too near together. Then let them be watered again, which will help to fix the earth close round them ; 
the glasses on no account are to be shut down close till they are dry, or they will inevitably fog, rot, and 
perish. The best glasses for piping are those made of the common window-glass, eight inches square and 
six inches deep, and the less air they contain the sooner will the cuttings strike root. The striking-glasses 
in common use, v.'hich are blown for the purpose, too often contain such a thick body of glass as to concen- 
trate the sun's rays, and scorch the pipings. They require shading only when the sun is out, and then 
with a net or old mat, to admit the glimmering of his rays. If the weather continues dry and hot, they 
will require to be watered occasionally with a fine rose, early in a morning, over the glasses, which, for 
one fortnight at least, need not be removed if they are doing well. After, you may take them off from 
time to time as you see occasion, for half an hour or so in a morning, to give fresh air, and dry the glasses ; 
and if any of the pipings appear mildewed or rotten, pull them up. At the end of six weeks they will be 
sufficiently rooted to be transplanted into small pots or a prepared bed, over which it would be advisable to 
place a frame and lights for aweek or ten days, till they take root again. There they may be allowed to 
remain till the middle or so of September. In taking them up, if you find any not rooted, but sound, an;! 
their ends hard and callow, do not let them remain upon the same spot, but remove them to anolher bed, 
with a little temporary heat, and cover them with glasses as before ; this will not fail to start them and 
hasten their fibring." {Treatise, &c. 52.) 

6419. Bijseed. Carnation-seed is rather difficult to raise or ripen in this country, owing to the moisture 
and cold of the autumnal months. It is generally procured from Vienna and different towns of Sv/itzer- 
land ; and if put in vials and well corked will keep for years. To raise it in this country, Maddcck gives 
the following directions : " Those flowers which have but few petals, or, as it is more commonly expressed, 
are thin of leaf, genenilly produce most seed, and therefore are most to be depended on for a supj)ly ; hut 
they should be possessed of the best properties in other respects, viz. their petals should be large, broad, sub- 
stantial, and perfectly entire at the edge, and their colors rich and regularly distributed, and in due propor- 
tion, throughout the whole blossom. The plants should be selected from the rest, and their pots should 
stand upon a stage, defended against earwigs, in an open part of the garden, in which situation they should 
remain during bloom, and until the seed is perfectly matured ; their blossoms should be defended from 
rain, by having glass, paper, or tin covers {fig. 612. d), suspended over them, in such a manner as to adir.ifc 
a free circulation of air ; the pots should neither be kept very wet nor very dry ; nor will it be proper to cut 
and mutilate the plants, either for their layers or pipings, till the seed becomes r!i)e, because it would cer- 
tainly weaken them, and consequently injure, if not destroy, their seed. When thebloom is over, and Ihe 
petals become withered and dry, they should be carefully drawn out of the pod or calyx, being aijt to retain 
a degree of moisture at their base, endangering a m.ouldiness and decay in that part which will destroy the 
seed. There is another mode of treatment adopted successfully in ripening the seed, which is, v. hen the 
bloom is over, and the petals begin to decay, they are to be extracted as above, taking particular care to 
leave the two styles, which appear like horns proceeding from the summit of the germen, or future pericar- 
pium : the calyx {fig. 610. a) is then to be shortened to about one half of its original length, and an aperture 
mnde on one side of the remainder, down to the base of the pericarpium, so that no water can possibly 
lod'^'C there ; but in doing this, great care is necessary not to wound or injure the pericarpium, or seed- 
vessel itself, because it might prove destructive to the seed. After the above is performed, the covers may 
remain or be taken away at pleasure ; but in the latter case it is advisable to loosen the upper jiart of the 
stems from the sticks, that the open end of the calyx may incline a little dovvnwards, the more eficctuallv to 



858 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



preserve it iii a dr>- state ; the stems should not be sufffered to hang so loose as to be in danger of breaking 
off with everj'puffof wind. The seed ripens from the end of August to the beginning of October: the 
pericarpium becomes brown, dry, and hard, and the seed, when ripe, is of a black or very dark brown 
color ; those who are not sufficiently attentive to the ripening of their seed are apt to gather it too soon, 
before it is perfectly matured, in consequence of which the greatest part proves small, pale-colored, and 
unproductive. When gathered it should remain in the pericarpium, in a dry room, till the beginning or 
middle of May ; it is then to be sown in pots filled with the compost, and have a little fine mould sifted 
upon it, barely sufficient to cover the seed : at this season of the year artificial heat is not required, the 
pots should therefore be placed in an airy part of the garden, be shaded from the heat of the sun, and kept 
moderately moist, but never very wet. As soon as the young plants appear with six leaves, and become 
about three inches high, they should be planted out on a bed of good rich garden-mould, at about ten or 
twelve inches asunder, and be defended from excess of rain and severe frosts, by mats on hoops, placed 
over the bed in the usual manner : they will in general blow the following summer. Some persons have 
advanced an opinion, that the seed of run plants produces as great a proportion of variegated flowers 
as any other : but the validity of this assertion has not yet been sufficiently demonstrated by experiment." 
(Maddock.) 

6420. Hogg's directions differ in nothing of importance from those of Maddock. He says it often hap- 
pens, that out of 200 blooming plants you will not be able to get even two pods of perfect seed. More 
was saved in the dry summer of 1818 than in any seven preceding years. Seedlings require two years to 
bloom, and the chance of getting a good new flower he reckons as one to 100. If a florist raises six new- 
carnations in his lifetime, he is to be considered fortunate. Seed out of the same pod, he says, is reported 
to produce flowers of all the different varieties, flakes, bizarres, &c. Emmerton experienced that seed 
from a scarlet flake will produce a scarlet bizarre, and a rose or pink flake. 

6421. Sail. The compost Maddock recommends is as follows : " one half rotten horse-dung, one year 
old, or that has been used as a hot-bed for cucumbers, melons, &c. ; one third "fresh sound loamy earth ; 
one sixth coarse sea or river sand. These ingredients are to be mixed together in autumn, laid in a heap 
about two feet thick, in an open exposure, and turned three or four times during winter ; or, otherwise, 
the dung alone, after being used as a hot-bed, may be thrown together in a heap, in a conical form, in 
order to rot more perfectly ; and, as its surface freezes in winter, it should be pared off, and laid on one 
side, till the whole mass has been thoroughly frozen throughout ; this may be repeated as often as the 
season pemiits, and it will be completely tit for use the following spring : the earth and sand may be 
added to it in March, when wanted to fresh pot the plants for bloom : the whole should then be well 
mixed and incorporated together, and passed through a coarse screen or sieve, to reduce its parts and 
take out stones, or any other extraneous substance which it may contain. In country places, where the 
air is more pure, experience has pointed out the propriety of using less dung and more loam ; the pro- 
portions of which, for such situations, may be reversed, viz. one half loamy earth and one third dung, 
with the sand as before specified : the preparation of the compost, in other respects, is to be exactly the 
same in all situations." (Florist's Direct.) 

6422. Hogg takes "three barrows of loam, one and a half ditto of garden-mould, ten ditto of horse- 
dung, one ditto of coarse sand ; let these be mixed and thrown together in a heap or ridge, and turned 
two or three times in the winter, particularly in frosty weather, that it may be well incorporated. On a 
dry day towards the end of November, I take a barrow of fresh lime, which, as soon as it is slacked, I 
strew over it while hot in turning the heap ; this accelerates the rotting of the fibrous particles in the loam, 
lightens the soil, and destroys the grubs, worms, and slugs. Lime is too well known as a manure to say 
any thing further in its praise here. If there has been much rain during the winter, so that the strength 
of the compost is reduced, and the salts washed from it, I take about seven pounds of damaged salt and 
add them to it, either dissolved in water or strewed over with the hand. This, from an experience of 
three years, I have found to be attended with the most beneficial effect upon the future health and vigor 
of the plants. During very heavy rains, many florists cover their compost with tarpawling or double mats, 
to prevent the nutritious particles from being washed out ; this is also an excellent precaution. If any 
objection be started that the quantity of dung is too great in proportion to that of the loam, I answer, that 
such an objection might be well founded, if the compost were to be used immediately on its being mixed 
together; but as it has to lie six months before it is used, I am decidedly of opinion, that the quantity is 
not more than is necessary in order to ensure a luxuriant growth and a generous bloom." For flowers 
that are apt to sport in color, such as Humphrey's Duke of Clarence, Plummer's Lord Manners, &c. he 
lowers the compost, and uses " three barrows of sound staple loam, two ditto old rotten cow-dung, one 
ditto horse-dung, a half ditto sand, a half ditto lime rubbish, or old plaster; to be prepared, and well in- 
corporated, as before." He also uses the same compost for yellow picotees. (Treatise, &c. 45.) 

6423. Justice says, " One article with respect to the soil for carnations you must certainly observe ; 
never to use for it the ground wherein hyacinths have been planted; they, from certain experience, being 
a sure poison to the carnation, and vice versa." (Brit. Gard. 427.) 

6424. Manner of growing. The commoner sorts are planted in beds or borders, but the select kinds 
always in pots. 

6425. Pots and potting. Maddock uses pots for flowering plants, " at least twelve inches wide at the top, 
six inches at the bottom, and ten inches deep in the inside, with a circular aperture in the centre of the 
bottom, of about an inch in diameter ; also three or four smaller holes round the sides of the pot, close to 
the bottom, to prevent the possibility of water lodging or remaining in that part." Hogg uses pots of 
twelve or sixteen to the cast, being smaller than those recommended by Maddock. 

6426. The oreration of potting, according to Maddock, " should commence about the middle of March, 
if the weather is not extremely unfavorable ; but it should not, on any account, be deferred later than 
the end of that month. The pot is, in the first place, to be half filled with compost, having an oyster- 
shell, with its hollov^ side downwards, placed over the hole in the centre of the bottom : this compost is 
to be higher at the sides than in the centre of the pot, and the plants intended for it, which are supposed 
to have been wintered in small pots, containing four plants each, are to be carefully turned out of their 
pots, with all the earth adhering to them, in a ball ; and after rubbing off about half an inch of the sur- 
face of the old mould, round about the plants, above their fibres, cleaning them and cutting off the decayed 
points of their leaves, the ball is to be carefully placed in the centre of the pot, and the space between it 
and the sides filled up with the prepared compost. It is very necessary to be attentive in placing the plants, 
that they be neither planted deeper nor shallower than they were before ; the compost should therefore be 
high enough to replace the old earth that was rubbed off on potting, exactly to the same height as before, 
i. e. half an inch higher than the ball of old earth and fibres : and the whole surface of the earth in the 
pot, when the operation is finislied, should be nearly level or flat; but by no means higher at the centre 
than at the sides, because the plants would thereby be kept too dry ; nor should the compost come nearer 
than within an inch of the top or rim of the pot, after it has been gently shaken, or struck against the 
ground on finishing, as an inconvenience will attend its being too full, whe"n the operation of laying comes 
to be performed, which requires some additional mould on the surface, for the layers to strike into." 
Hogg considers the first week in April as the safest and best time to pot carnations, and he performs the 
operation in the same manner as Maddock. 

6427. General culture. When the plants are potted off for bloom, the pots should be placed in an 
open airy part of the garden, under an arch of hoops, that in case of cold drying winds, heavy rains, 
or frosty nights, mats may be thrown over, to preserve them from the effects of such unfavorable weather : 
in this situation they are to remain, always open to the air, except in the cases above mentioned, and be 
kept regularly watered with soft water from a finc-roscd watering-pot. 



iJOOK I J. 



CARNATION. 



859 



64£8. When (heir flower. stems are grown eight or ten inches high, it will be necessary to support them 
with sticks, forced into the earth in the centre of the pot, to which the stems are to be loosely tied with 
small pieces of bass mat : these sticks should be as high as the hoops will admit, in order that the pots may 
remain under them as long as possible ; but when the stems are grown too high for this situation, the 
pots are to be removed to the stage, and remain there till the time of bloom ; the small sticks should be 
replaced with others more suitable for the occasion ; these should be about four feet or four feet six inches 
long, regularly tapering a little from the bottom to the top, and be painted green ; they should be sub- 
stantial and straight, and their lower ends are to be forced into the earth in the centre of the pot, suffi- 
ciently deep and firm, not to be shaken loose by the wind. As the stems continue to advance in height, 
the tying, as above, must be also continued at about every five or six inches : it is proper to look over 
and examine the plants for this purpose every three or four days, as the stems are rather brittle, and 
liable to be broken by the wind, if not supported in this manner. 

6429. If any small, green, wi?igcd insects appear on the stems or foliage of the plants, particularly upon 
or underneath the flower-pods, they must be effectually extirpated or destroyed, either by the means of a 
small soft brush or feather, by the application of a strong infusion of tobacco-water, or some similar easy 
and safe expedient : even Scotch snuff dusted upon the infested parts early in the morning, while the 
plants are wet with the dew of the night, has been sometimes tried in this case with success. 

6430. The calyx of many sorts contains a great number of petals, which, as they increase in bulk, will 
distend and burst it, if not timely prevented : this generally happens a few days previous to the proper 
time for the blossoms opening, and will, if neglected, soon manifest the effects of such neglect, by letting 
out the petals on one side, and thereby producing a loose irregular appearance, totally destroying that 
compact, graceful, circular form which a perfect flower ought to possess, and which is one of its greatest 
ornaments ; but this disagreeable effect may be easily avoided, by fastening a small narrow slip of bladder 
round the middle of the pod, where it is most swelled, and appears to have the greatest inclination to 
burst. The slip of bladder should be rather longer than is required to go once round, so that one end of it 
may lay over the other a little, which, by the application of a little gum-water, will adhere firmly together, 
and answer the purpose completely. Small slips of wet bass mat may be substituted for those of bladder, 
and being tied v/ith a single knot round the same part of the pod, will answer nearly as well. {fig. 612. b) 

6431. When any of the flowers begin to open and expand, such should be shaded, both from sun and rain, 
by means of strong caps or paper covers {fig. 612. d), about twelve inches in diameter, painted white or 
green, and formed like an umbrella^ to throw off rain ; each should have a square tin tube on the sum- 
mit, that will permit the stick, to which the stem is tied, to pass through it as far as is necessary. The 
tube should be about two inches long, and have a small hole bored through one of its sides, that it may be 
fixed by a nail to any part of the stick where required. But when the major part are in bloom, a cloth 
awning should be placed over the whole, and be drawn up or let dov/n by means of lines and pulleys, ex- 
actly in the same manner, and on the same occasions, as for the bloom of hyacinths and tulips. The 
same frame that was used for the hyacinth {fig. 591.) will, without being removed or taken down, answer 
in every respect for carnations : nor can any other more suitable be contrived or adopted. 

6432. In order that the flowers may appear to the greatest advantage, it is necessary that the pots should 
stand upon a stage or platform of boards raised about twelve or fifteen inches above the ground; this 
stage should be very strongly supported, in order to sustain the immense weight of the pots, without dan- 
ger of giving way ; the supporters of this platform should stand in shallow leaden or earthen vessels, filled 
Avith water, to prevent the access of earwigs, which are destructive enemies to the blossoms of carna- 
tions : they secrete themselves commonly during night in the calyx {fig. 612. a), and soon commence their 
depredations, by biting off and devouring the lower ends or claws of the petals, which of course will 
cause them to drop out, and thereby disfigure the flower. 

6433. The stands, or reservoirs, should be broad enough to allow an intermediate space of water, three 
or four inches wide, between their sides and the supporters placed in the centre of each. Earwigs will 
nevertheless be frequently found amongst the flowers, having been brought upon the stage with the pots, 
where they remain concealed, or dormant, till the flowers are in bloom ; or perhaps they may have 
gained access by having crept up the external frame, and from thence fallen down upon the pots ; or they 
may possibly have flown upon them, as they are evidently provided with wings, though it does not appear 
that they often make use of them. At all events, it is necessary frequently to examine the plants, and 
the sticks which support the stems, as earwigs will be often found concealed there in the daytime, par- 
ticularly at the part where the stems are tied, v/hich affords them a more secure hiding place. If any of 
the petals hang loose, or drop out, it is a certain sign that an earwig is, or has been there : in the first case, 
blowing forcibly with the mouth, into the blossom, two or three times, will cause it to creep out ; but if it 
has quitted the blossom previous to the discovery, it should be carefully sought after and destroyed, or it 
will continue its depredations the succeeding night ; it will, however, most probably be found sculking 
somewhere about the same pot, but not farther distant than the next, or next but one, unless the search 
has been deferred too long. 

6434. The flowers should be suspended from the stickshy small pieces of fine elastic brass wire {flg. 612. e), 
of unequal lengths, (sold in the pin-shops,) to support them in an easy graceful manner, neither too near 
together nor remote from each other : one end of the wire should be introduced into the stick by means 
of a small awl, and there be fixed sufficiently tight to prevent its dropping out by the weight of the blos- 
som ; the other end of the v/ire should be formed into a small ring, about a quarter of an inch in dia- 
meter, to enclose the stem below the calyx ; this ring should be a little open on one side to admit the 
stem freely, without bruising it, which would materially injure the bloom. 

6435. Those who are particularly curious in blovjing their carnations, carefully extract such petals as are 
plain, or run from their true colors : they perform this by means of an instrument adapted to the purpose 
{fig. 612. f), and with the same arrange the remaining petals, so as to supply the defect; in like manner 
they dispose the whole with such regularity that the flowers appear to have an equal distribution of beau- 
tiful petals, nearly alike on every side, without imbricating each other, so as to hide their respective 
beauties; and if the blossom consists of too great a number of petals, they extract the smallest, and 
thereby afford the others more roorrx to expand, which takes off the confused effect always produced by 
redundancy. The pots must be kept regularly and constantly watered during bloom, in the manner before 
described, and no favorable opixirtunity should be neglected to afford them the full advantage of ex- 
posure to light and air, by drawing up the cloth covering, in the manner before described ; but no rain 
must be admitted to the blossoms at any period of the bloom. Some place their stage, or platform, on 
one side, others in the centre ; but a double row of pots on each side, with a commodious path in the 
middle, is preferable. If the pots contain only two plants each, they consequently are not required to be 
so large as for four or five ; but the latter have" much the best appearance in bloom, producing a greater 
number of blossoms : it is not however advisable to permit every pod to blow, especially of such sorts as 
are naturally possessed of but few petals ; because it would render each blossom smaller and- thinner than 
if only one or two were left on each plant : it is, therefore, proper in this case to cut off, or draw out the 
small lateral pods, close to the main stem, as soon as they can be ascertained, in order that the remainder 
may have time to reap due benefit by it ; but those sorts that have remarkably large short pods, abound- 
ing with petals, must be suffered to bloom them all, or the greater part, although, in general, three or 
four pods are as many as ought to be suffered to blow on one plant. These rules, or remarks, admit of 
some few exceptions, but the instances seldom occur. 

6436. Carnations are to'be treated, during winter, much like auriculas : with respect to the weather, 
they are seldom injured by a moderate dry frost, though it is safer to defend them from too much of it ; 
but it is very necessary to caution against covering them up close when the plants arc wet, as they arc, in 



8C0 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



that state, very liable to contract a destructive mildew, if they have not the benefit of a free circulation 
ot air ; this mildew makes its first appearance in purple spots on the foliage, which can only be cured or 
prevented from spreading amongst the adjacent plants, by cutting out the infected part, or removing the 
pot, as soon as discovered, it being not improbable but that the distemper is, in great measure, owing to 
a very minute insect, brought into existence by the warmth generated at such times. Plants thus infected 
have been frequently known to communicate the contagion to others which stand near them, therefore 
no time shou'd be lost in cutting off the spotted leaves or removing the plants to a distant part of the 
garden. A repository, constructed in the manner already described, is less liable to the above effects than 
any close frame or situation can possibly be, because it has the advantage of a free circulation of air at 
all times, even when shut up, unless indeed when closely covered up with mats, &c. as in cases of severe 
frost ; but at such times no such consequences are to be dreaded. 

6437. The rains of autumn and winter are generally 7nore than siifficient for carnations, as well as for 
auriculas, from an excess of which it is pi-oper to defend them : of the two extremes, it is safer to keep 
them rather too dry than too wet at these seasons, especially during winter; but a moderate degree of 
moisture is always to be preferred, except when the weather is severely frosty. As too long a deprivation 
of hght is at all times prejudicial to plants, therefore, whenever the winter repository is required to be 
closely covered up with mats, for several days and nights, with little intermission, no opportunity should 
be lost during the middle of the day, if the sun shines, to take off the mats in front ot the glasses, in 
order to admit its light and warmth. Whenever the surface of the earth in the pots becomes green with 
moss, or too compact and adhesive, it will be proper to stir it up carefully, about half an inch deep, and 
to sprinkle a little coarse dry sand regularly upon it : this will prevent any great degree of tenacity in fu- 
ture, and be of great service ; it may be repeated as often as required. 

6438. In spring, the pots will probably require to be frequently watered, and by the middle of March 
the operation of potting is to commence, as already described. The blossoms of carnations, particularly 
the high-colored sorts, are very apt to run from their striped or variegated colors to a plain one ; they are 
then esteemed of little or no value : but when they have only partially run, they may sometimes be re- 
covered to their former state, by being planted in a poor dry soil, that will but just aftbrd sufficient nour- 
ishment for their existence. (Florist's Direct. 166.) 

6439. Hogg having potted his blooming plants, supports .them with green sticks, in the manner of 
Maddock, and top-dresses about the middle of June " with about half an inch of rotten horse-dung passed 
through a sieve, which he finds materially to assist the plants, and promote the growth of the layers, on 
which depends the preservation of the collection. Many," he says, " top-dress with some of the hotter 
manures of night-soil, sugar-baker's scum, &c., but, in my opinion, that is not necessary for carnations, 
and is attended with danger : for, if they are not reduced to a perfect mould, they will corrode, and burn 
the plants." He waters freely while the pods are swelling, and during tlie whole time they continue in 
blossom. As soon as the side shoots appear, he places " a paper collar round the bottom of the blossom 
to support it. These collars are made of white card-paper, in the form of a circle of three or four inches 
in diameter (fig. 612. g), with a hole in the centre just large enough to admit the calyx or pod, without much 
compressing, and witii a cut extending from the centre to the outside or circumference, like the radius of 
a circle. On these cards the flower is preserved in shape and form a long time ; on these the petals are 
also finely disposed, and the beauty of the carnation displ.iyed to great advantage." We must confess, we 
think these collars a great deformity, and much prefer a tie of thread or bass mat, or the slip of bladder 
recommended by Maddock. When placed on the stage, they should have the benefit of the morning sun 
till about nine or ten o'clock, according to the intense heat of its rays; the same in the evening, with as 
much open exposure to the air at all times as you can give them, without injury to the bloom." In winter 
Hogg preserves them in frames, in the same manner as he recommends for auriculas. When he has 
more plants than he can blow in pots, he plants them in beds of the same compost used for the others, pro- 
tecting them from severe frosts and heavy rains, and in other respects treating them in the same nKiUuer 
as if in pots. {Treatise, &c.) 

SuBSECT. 18. Fink. — Dianthus hortensis, L. Decan. Trig. L. and Caryophyllece, J. 
Vceillet, Fr. ; Nelke, Ger. ; and Garofano, Ital. (fg. 611. b) 
6440. The pink is considered by many to be a subspecies of the J), caryophijllus ; and 
by others to have proceeded from D. deltoides, a Briti.sh species, and the pheasant-eye 
pinks from D. phonnrius. This flower, Professor Marfcyn observes, does not seem to 
have attracted any notice among our ancestors ; and it is only within the latter half of 
the 18th century that pinks were much improved and varied, so as to be greatly valued 
among florists. It is now much cultivated everywhere, and especially in the manufactur- 
ing districts ; in the neighborhood of Paisley, it is carried to a high degree of perfection. 
(See Part IV. Book I. Ch. III. Sec. 3.) The pink is much hardier than the carnation, 
and less liable to the casualties incident to the latter. 

6411. Varieties. Parkinson, in 1629, mentions six or eight sorts. Rea, in 1704, says, there are many 
sorts, but of little esteem. Plogg, in 1820, gives a list of nearly one hundred, names, as containing the best 
sorts in England ; but Davey, who has raised more fine varieties of this flower than any one else, has above 
double that number ; and the Paisley growers reckon above three hundred sorts. 

6442. Criterion of a fine double pink. " The stem should be strong, elastic, and erect, and not less than 
twelve inches high. The calyx rather smaller and shorter, but nearly similar in form and proportion to 
that of a carnation, as well as the formation of the flower, which should not he less than two inches and a 
half in diameter. The petals should be large, broad, and substantial, and have very fine fringed or serrated 
edges, free from large, coarse, deep notches or indentures ; in short, they approach nearest to perfection 
when the fringe on the edge is so fine as scarcely to be discernible ; but it would be considered a very de- 
sirable object to obtain them perfectly rose-leaved, i. e. without any fringe at all. The broadest part of the 
lamina, or broad end of the petals {fig,- 611. c), should be perfectly white and distinct from the eye, unless it 
be a laced pink, that is, ornamented by a continuation of the color of the eye round it {fig. 611. i), bold, 
clean, and distinct, leaving a considerable proportion of white in the centre, perfectly free from any tinge 
or spot. The eye should consist of a bright or dark rich crimson, or purple, resembling velvet ; but the 
nearer it approaches to black, the more it is esteemed ; its proportion should be about equal to that of the 
white, that it may neither appear too large nor too small." {Maddock.) 

6443. P}-opagation. Generally by pipings for ordinary purposes, sometimes by layers to preserve rare 
sorts, and by seed for new varieties. 

6444. 3y pipings. The time to commence this operation is immediately previous to or during the bloom, 
or indeed as soon as ever the new shoots are grown of a sufficient length for that purpose. Hogg com- 
mences about tfhe twenty-first of June. The operation is the same as in piping carnations ; only some do 
not apply bottom, heat. This, however, is the more certain mode, and the pipings are ready to remove 
sooner, and generally in a fortnight or three weeks. 

6445. Bt/ seed. Proceed as directed for carnations. 

6446. Nicol has found great advantage from impregnating double and semi-double pinks* with single 
kinds, both in respect to fecundating more stamens, and producing in consequence more seed ; but also in 
increasing the varieties, or new sorts raised from such seed. {Caled. Sec. Me?n. iii. 270.) 



Book II. 



DOUBLE ROCKET. 



SCI 



6447. Mode of growing. The common sorts are introduced in borders, and the better varieties in pre- 
pared beds. Sometimes rare sorts are planted in pots, but in general they thrive better in the open 
ground. 

6448. Soil. Maddock says, " A good fresh loamy soil, dug and comminuted about two feet deep, and 
manured with a stratum of cow-dung, two years old, mixed with an equal proportion of earth, (this stra- 
tum to be about six inches thick, and placed five or six inciies below the surface,) is all the preparation or 
compost that appears necessary for this flower." 

6449. General culture. As soon as the pipings are struck and will bear removal, they are to be planted on 
a bed of common garden-mould, where, in a few weeks, it will easily be discernible which are the strongest 
plants to remove to the blooming-bed. " This bed should be raised tliree or four inches above the sur- 
rounding paths, and its sides may be supported with an edging of boards, to come up even with, or one 
inch higher than its surface j this last, more for the sake of neatness than any particular utility it will be 
of to the plants." 

6450. The plants intended for the principal hed for bloom, should be placed upon it in August, or 
early in September, as they do not blow quite so well if removed later jn the season ; they should be planted 
at about the distance of nine inches from each other, and the bed should be laid rather convex, or round- 
ing, to throw off excess of rain ; but will require no other covering than a very slight one in case of severe 
frost. The bed should be kept free from weeds, and its surface stirred up a little if it inchnes to bind, or, in 
other words, whenever it becomes too firm and adhesive. Larger strong plants will put up numerous 
flower-stems, but it is proper to thin them out a month or six weeks before bloom ; in doing which, the 
largest and strongest should be left, especially the leading stem, which proceeds from the heart or centre 
of the plant, together with all its best pods ; but no plant, however strong, should be permitted to bloom 
more than ten or twelve blossoms, nor weakly plants more than four or five. In order to obtain them large 
and well colored, all the small lateral pods should be cut or pulled oif, as they never produce any other than 
diminutive flowers, and at the same time rob the others of a certaui part of their nourishment, which, of 
course, prevents their attaining the size and beauty they would otherv/ise arrive at. 

6451. The largest and fnost bushy plants do not produce the finest flowers ; they naturally {)ut forth 
numerous small stems, which their roots are not able to sup[)ort sufficiently to produce large blossoms. 
Strong healthy plants, not too large, and consisting of a capital leading stem in the csntre, with but little 
surrounding increase, are most proper to select for the best bed ; these will seldom put up more than one 
or two stems, which will, however, be very strong, grow tall, and produce three or four blossoms, as large 
and fine as the sort is capable of 

6452. Those pods that appear in danger of bursting should be tied in the same manner as directed 
for carnations under similar circumstances. Such sorts of pinks as are most inclined to burst their pods, 
oftentimes produce larger and finer flowers than others which have smaller pods, because the latter gene- 
rally consist of too few petals : it is, however, more desirable to have their pods large and long, than too 
short and round, as it is hardly possible to preserve the latter from bursting, whereby the beautiful circular 
form which the flower ought to possess is lost. When the calyx is so extremely short that it must in- 
evitably burst, it is better to assist nature by what is called letting down the pod, that is, with a penknife 
to nick it down at the bottom of each of its indentures, as low as may be deemed necessary, in order to let out 
petals regularly on every side, and preserve the circular form of the blossoms ; for if it is left to nature, the 
calyx will burst only on one side, and its petals will consequently force their way through that aperture, and 
produce a loose deformed flower ; some kinds are possessed of such weak and short pods, that the calyx 
{fig. 571. d) will entirely burst from top to bottom on one side, and open so very wide as to suffer almost all 
the petals to fall out and hang down when they have been in bloom but a short time; such indeed hardly 
deserve to be classed amongst the best sorts, let their properties, in other respects, be ever so desirable, 
"When the flower-stems are grown sufficiently long, they should be supported with small sticks or wires, as 
the fancy of the cultivator may direct ; but these ought to be disposed of in such a manner as to allow the 
blossoms to expand and blow perfectly distinct from each other, that the whole may have an easy graceful 
appearance. Those who can bestow sufficient time and attention to their bloom of pinks, may contribute 
greatly to the eflPect, by placing upon the calyx the thin pieces of card, or stiff' paper, cut circular {fig. 612. 

already mentioned (6439.) ; these are to be placed close underneath the guard-leaves, so as to support 
them horizontally, and will, when they extend just as far as the extreme points of the petals, give the 
blossom a very circular and pleasing appearance ; but they are apt to v/arp when long exposed to the 
weatlier, especially after being wet, and must either be taken off entirely, or exchanged for new ones, as 
they will no longer answer the intended purpose. Some kinds do not require any assistance of this sort, but 
the greater part not having their guard-leaves sufficiently strong at the base to support themselves in a 
horizontal position, are considerably improved by this httle contrivance, which, perhaps, by the foregoing 
description, will not be difficult to comprehend. 

6453. At the time of bloorn, which is towards the end of June, it is proper to defend the bed by a 
covering or awning, somewhat similar to that used for the bloom of tulips and carnations ; they should, in 
like manner, enjoy the advantage of light and air, and the soil should be kept regularly moist by soft 
water, administered between the plants, carefully avoiding to wet the blossom, {Florist's Direct. 220.) 

6454. Hogg observes, that " pinks moved and transplanted in the spring never do well, nor show half the 
beauty whicn those do that were planted in September ; the laced pinks in particular appear almost plain, 
and without their distinguishing character : they should likewise never be suffered to remain longer than 
two years without either change of soil or situation.-" 

6455. Emmerton says, " your pink-bed should be top-dressed in the spring, if you have a desiye to excel 
in blooms, with some old night-soil, or sugar-baker's scum, finely sifted and sown over it. Your 
strong-blowing plants should not be allowed to bloom more than eight or ten blooms, and those that are 
weaker, of a less size, not more than four." {Treatise on Auricula, &c. 191.) 

SuBSECT. 19. Double Rocket. ■ — Hesperis matronalis, L. {I.ani. ill. t. 564. f. 1.) Tetrad. 
Siliq. L. and Cruciferce, J. Julienne, Fr. ; Nachlviolen, Ger. ; Esperide, Ital. 

6456. The double rocket is a biennial or imperfect perennial ; a native of Italy, and 
cultivated by Gerrard in 1597. 

6457. The varieties are the white and purple, both very double, and forming a spike 
of about a foot long, of great beauty and fragrance, and considerable duration. 

6458. Propagation and culture. The plant is extremely difficult to preserve, especially near large 
towns. It does not thrive either near London or Paris ; and both capitals, especially the latter, are 
supplied with it from provincial growers. It is very much grown in the west of Scotland, and in the 
Netherlands ; and between Calais and Abbeville it may be seen in great perfection in most cottagers' 
gardens. Van Mons {Hort. Trans, ii. 153.) says it prospers best in a clayey soil, but flowers best in one of 
a lighter texture, like the lobelia cardinalis. The best directions which we have met with for its culture 
are given by Robertson. {Caled. Mem. ii. 245.) He says, " The double rocket is a beautiful plant, 
rather scarce in this part of the country, owing chiefly, I suppose, to florists not being acquainted with a 
successful way of increasing it. I had a few nlants of rocket under my care, and I did them all justice, as 
I thought, but all would not do; I lost them' all. I tried to part their roots, but being small and weak, 
the slugs eat them all up in a short time ; as slugs are very fond of them, especially of their leaves. I 
tried to increase them by cuttings in the common way, with as little success. This led me to try another 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



method, which I would recommend as a never-failing way of propagating this beautiful flower. If a 
person has but one plant of rocket, and is anxious for its flowers, the first thing is, after the flower is 
beginning to fade, to eat down the stalks and divide them into ordinary lengths of cuttings ; next to cut 
off the leaves, and smooth the ends ; then to make three slits with a knife in the bark or rind, longways, 
so as to separate or raise the bark for half an inch in length. When the cutting is inserted in the ground, 
the loose bark naturally curls up ; and it is from this bark that the young roots proceed. The partial 
separation, and the turning up of Oie bark, seems to promote a tendency to throw out roots. The cuttings 
may be put into flower-pots, as they may thus be sheltered during winter with more ease ; or they may be 
placed in the natural earth, provided the soil is light and fresh. Covering them with a hand-glass will 
forward the rooting of the cuttings ; or with the aid of a hot-bed they will succeed excellently. I 
have used this simple way for six years back, and never without success ; not one in twenty having 
failed. This method, it may be remarked, will hold good in cuttings of stock-gilliflowers, and double 
wallflowers." 

SuBSECT. 20. Cardinal FloiDei: — Lobelia, L. Pent. Monog. L. and Camponula- 
ceee, B. P. Lobelie, Fr. ; Xardinalsblmne, Ger. ; Fior Cardinale, Ital. {Jigs. 613. 
and 614.) 

6459. There are three species of lobelia which rank high as florists' flowers. 

6460. The common cardinal fiower {L. cardinalis) ( Bot. Mag. 320. and fig. 613.) has 
roots composed of many white fleshy fibres, oblong 
leaves, stalks erect, about a foot and a half high, 
terminated by a spike of flowers, " of an exceed- 
ingly beautiful scarlet color," appearing in the end 
of July and August. It is a native of Virginia ; 
and it is found abundantly by the side of rivers and 
ditches: introduced in 1629. Justice is in rap- 
tures with it, describing it as "a flower of most 
handsome appearance, which should not be wanting 
in curious gardens, as it excels all other flowers I 
ever knew in the richness of its color." There is a 
dwarf variety, but it is very liable to perish. 

6461. Propagation and culture. By seeds, offsets, or cut- 
tings ; but the former method produces the strongest plants. 
Sow in pots of rich earth soon after the seed is ripe, and place 
them under the protection of a frame. The seeds will appear 
the following spring ; and after they have two or three leaves, 
should be planted in separate small pots, and shifted into 
larger ones once or twice during the season. Place them in 
an eastern exposure, and supply them freely with water. 
Protect, during winter, by a frame; and the following spring, 
shift them into pots, six or eight inches diameter, in which 
they will flower. If not much exposed to the sun, they will continue long in beauty. The roots do not 
last above two or three years ; and therefore a succession of young plants, from seed or slips, should be 
regularly provided. (Miller.) 

6462. The fulgent cardinal flower (L.fulgens, W. en.) (Bot. Rep. 659. and fig. 614. a) 

is a native of Mexico, and was introduced into 
England in 1809 : flowers in July and August. 
Though a native of a warm climate, it has been 
found to bear the severity of our winters, by 
being immersed in water, as an aquatic, and witli 
this treatment has flowered well by the sides of 
ponds and in cisterns. 

6463. Propagation. By suckers or cuttings, which strike 
with remarkable facility in any shady situation ; and by 
seed. According to Professor Van Mons, " the seed 
should be sown, as soon as it is ripe, in earthen pans ; the 
earth should be moistened, and after it has imbibed the 
water, the seed must be spread over it without being 
covered. Tlie pans should be sheltered from the frost, 
and the young plants may be transplanted in April and 
May. Very few of them remain, more than the second 
year ,^ without flowering." 

6464. Culture. This plant has assumed a character of 
uncommon magnificence under the management of 
Hedges, which is tlms detailed by Sabine: " In October, 
he takes off the suckers, which are thrown up from the 
roots of the old plants, and puts them into small pots, one 
in each pot, and keeps them in a cold-frame till the mid- 
dle of January : he then removes them into a cucumber- 
frame, where the heat is kept up to 65 degrees of Fahrenheit's scale, by linings of hot dung ;'a pine sue- 
cession stove of the same temperature will equally suit them. In the middle of February, they are shifted 
into pots a size larger ; and at the end of March, or in the beginning of April, they are again moved into 
larger pots, and in the middle of May they are a third time shifted ; the pots to be used for this last shift- 
ing are twelves. As soon as the plants are well rooted, after the last removal, they are carried into a 
peach-house or green-house, in which they continue till they flower, and are hardy enough to bear the 
open air. When they are preparing to throw up their flowering stems, and during their growth, it is 
necessary that they be kept very moist, which is effected by putting pans under the pots, and keeping the 
pans constantly filled with water. The plants thus managed, begin to flower early in July, and the spikes 
continue to blow, and are covered with flowers through the autumn. The compost used in the pots is 
farmed of equal parts of brown or yellow loam, and of leaf or bog mould, to which is added sand, equal to 
one fourth of the previous composition, the whole being well mixed together. The plant of Lobelia 





Book II. 



CHRYSANTHEMUM. 



8GS 



fuJgnis, wliich was exhibited to the Society on the 19th of last month, by Hedges, had been managed as 
above directed ; but as no notes of its size and height were made at th.e time, the following dimensions 
have been taken from another plant in the garden at Kenwood. The base of the stem was near six inches 
in circumference ; the lieight of the centre spike was five feet and a half; tlie shoots from the boUnm and 
sides of the main stem were in number seventeen, rising together round the principal stem, to the height 
of about four feet and a half. Hedges states, that the plants were in the two preceding years, much taller 
than that now described. Sonie lew plants were observed to be rather shorter, and to liave a more bus!iy 
appearance : this is produced by stopping the centre stem, after the last shifting, by which the side shoots 
become m.ore vigorous and fuller of flower, and in this state they form handsome companions to the 
flowering plants^of campanula pvramidalis, whose beautiful spikes of blue flowers agreeably contrast with 
the briUiant scarlet of the lobelia." :,Hort. Trans, ii. 400.) 

6465. The splendid cardinal Jlou-er {L. splejidens, W. en.) {Bot. Reg. 60. and 
Jig. '14. b), a native of Mexico, and introduced in 1814, may be treated like L. fulgens ; 
and the blue cardinal Jloiuer (i. siphilidca) (Jac. Ic. iii. t. 597.), a native of Virginia, 
and introduced in 1665, may be treated like L. cardinalis. 



Sl-bsect. 21. Fi/ra?nidal Bellflower. — Campanida pyramidalis, L. {Fark. Farad. S54.) 
Fent. Monog. L. and Camparndacece, B. P. Campanelle Fyramidale, Fr. ; Fyrami- 
denglocken, Ger. ; and Campanule, Ital. 

6466. The pyramidal bell/lower, in its cultivated state, has thick ramose roots, which are 
millcy ; oblong leaves ; and strong stalks, four feet high, from the sides of which the 
flowers are produced for more than half their length, forming a sort of pyramid. The 
most common color is blue, but there is a variety with white flowers. It is a native of 
Istria and Savoy, and was cultivated_J?^^ Gerrm _ Formerly it was in demand 

as an ornament to halls, and for placing before chimneys in summer, being planted in 
large pots, and trained in the fan manner, so as to cover a large surface. In tlie shade 
it continues in flower for two months or more. 

6467. Propagation and culture. By seed, cuttings from the stem, or by dividing the roots ; the last 
method makes the strongest plants in the shortest ti'me. The season for thi's operation is after the bloom 
has faded in September; the sections are to be planted in pots, and protected by a frame during winter. 
In spriiig they may be transplanted into large pots, and in the beginning of summer into still larger 
ones, in which they are to flower the summer following. 

6468. JSi/ seeds. 'The plants so raised. Miller says, are always stronger, and the stalks rise higher, and 
produce a greater number of flowers. Good seeds are to be obtained by placing a strong-flowering plant 
m a warm situation against a wall or under a glass case. They are to be so^m in pots of light earth soon 
after being gathered, protected by a frame during winter, and will come up in spring. When the leaves 
decay in October, they are to be transplanted to beds of light sandy earth, without any mixture of dung, 
which ig a great enemy to this plant. Here they are to remain two years, being protected in winter by 
rotten tan : they are then to be removed to their final destination in "September or October, and the year 
following, being" the third from sowing, they will flower. The plants, Miller observes, of this specie"s, as 
of many others which have been long propagated by roots, offsets, or cuttings, do not so readily bear seed 
as those which have been raised from seed. 

6469. The C. Carpatica, grandiflora, and several other very sho^vy species, may be similarly treated. 



L. ; Anthemis Artemisue- 
Chrysajitenie, Fr. ; Gold- 



SuBSECT. 22. Chrysanthemum. — Chi-ysanthemum Indicum, 

folia, W. Syng. Folyg. Suj'ter. L. and CorynibiJercB, J. 

blume, Ger. ; and Crisantero, Ital. 

6470. The Chinese chrysanthemum is a fibrous-rooted half-hardy perennial, with pin- 
nate, gashed, serrated leaves, leafy stems, from three to four feet high, and flowei-s 
generally on solitary peduncles. It is a native 
of China, where it is highly prized and exten- 
sively cultivated as an ornamental plant, and 
was introduced in 1764. Here it contributes 
greatly to the beauty of the flower-garden in 
fine autumn, and of our conservatories in 
November and December, when scarcely any 
otlier plants are in flower. 

6471. J'arieties. Tlie Chinese are supposed from good 
authority to have fifty varieties or upwards : there are 
twenty-three sorts described by Sabine, as having flow- 
ered in this country-, and there are a number more, 
of recent introduction, which have not yet flowered. 
Through the exertions of the Horticultural Society, 
and some nurserjinen, and private individuals, it is ex- 
pected all the Chinese sorts will soon be imported. Sa- 
bine describes as having flowered in the garden of the 
Horticultural Society, and as to be procured in the nur- 
series, the following :— 



The purple 
Changeable white 

Quilled white Early crimson {Jig. 615. </) 

Superb white 
Tallied white 
Quilled yellow 
Sulphur yellow 
Golden yellow 
Large lilac 
Rose or pink 
BufT or orange 
Spanish brown 

{Sabine, in Hort, Tram. toI. iv. p. 334. & Tol. v. p. 149.) 



Quilled flamed yellow 
(iuilled pink-flowered- 
Early crimson {Jig. 615. 
Large auilled orange (i) 
Expanded light purple 
Quilled light pjrple 
Curled lilac 

Superb clustered yellow 
Semi-double quilled pink 
Semi- double quilled white 
Small yellow single. 




864 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6472. Propagation. By dividing the root, by suckers, and by cuttings ; the latter is 
the best mode, as producing plants less likely to throw up suckers. The cuttings are 
usually taken from the side branches in August, planted in shallow pots, placed in a 
warm shaded spot, and covered with a hand-glass. In a month or six weeks, they 
■will have struck, and are then put into pots of the smallest size, and put in a warm 
situation, where they remain till November ; they are then placed under a frame for the 
winter. 

6473. The soil used generally for the chrysanthemum, is two thirds of turfy or virgin 
loam, and one third of leaf-mould or decayed dung. 

6474. Culture in pots In April, the cuttings of the preceding autumn are shifted 
into No. 32 pots, and set out into a well sheltered south border, on a bed of scorire, for 
the summer. About the beginning of October, when the flower-buds are formed, they 
are taken into the green-house, on the stage of which they are exposed as much as possi- 
ble to the air, both night and day, in good weather, but protected by the lights from 
wind, rain, and frost. The Chinese also propagate the chrysanthemum by cuttings ; but 
they take them off in May, strike them as we do, and then put each plant in a small pot, 
in which it flowers the succeeding autumn. By this means the plants are much dvvarfer 
than ours usually are, and instead of having great part of their stems naked, or covered 
with withered leaves, they are clothed with green foliage from the ground to the flower. 
In order that the blossoms may be strong, they pinch otF all the flower-buds, excepting 
three, or five, or sometimes only one, as soon as they appear, and are liberal in the use of 
liquid manure ; those which remain are as large and fine as are produced by the most 
bulky plants. {Wells, in Hoi-t. Trans, vol. iv. 571.) This is by far the most simple, 
elegant, and economical mode of propagating this beautiful flower ; it has been practised 
several years by the Comte de Vande, at Bayswater, as well as by others in this country, 
and whenever it is generally known will be as generally adopted. All suckers should be 
removed, only one or three stems trained erect, and branching regularly on all sides. 
The side branches and top, or head, should be so arranged and adjusted Ijy a nice appli- 
cation of black threads and wires, attached to the main prop as to render the figure of the 
entire plant perfectly symmetrical. Three stems may be trained, though one is better than 
three, because it will grow stronger : but three are better than two, which do not com- 
pose a whole ; and better than a greater number than three, because unity departed from, 
there is no limit to irregularity. One and three are unity ; because one is complete, and 
three has a beginning, middle, and end. All possible numbers besides, either fall short 
of or exceed unity : they are irregularities, and irregularities are redundant and infinite, 
and therefore unsatisfactory to contemplate. 

6475. Culture in the open border. Many of the sorts may be planted out in warm 
borders, or compartments, or against walls, and will flower well in fine autumns ; but 
their roots require protection through the winter, and they should be renewed about every 
two years ; for as they increase much in size by suckers from the roots, the plants, if left 
for a longer period, become unsightly, and produce small and imperfect flowers. The 
early flowering varieties, as the purple, changeable white, rose, and buiT, seem the hardiest 
and most suitable for borders. {Sabine, in Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 323.) To look well in 
the border the plants should be lai-ge, and with * many stems ; their flowers are 
consequently more numerous, and produce a greater eff"ect at a distance. The ap- 
pearanes of the flowers on many of the kinds is very different when blossoming in the 
borders from those which expand under glass, so much so, that they might be easily 
mistaken by an unexperienced observer for different varieties. {Hort. Trans, vol. v. 
162.) 

SuBSECT. 23. Hydrangea. — Hydrangea hortensis, L. {Bot. Mag. 438. ) Decan. Dig. L. 
and SaxifragecB, J. HydrangelU, Fr. ; Kehlknopf, Ger. j and Hydrangea, Ital. 

6476. The hydrangea is a very low under-shrub, producing broad green leaves, and 
cymes of monstrous flowers, like the guelder rose in form, and red in color, changing to 
white and green. Its native place is unknown ; but it is commonly cultivated in the 
gardens of ' China and Japan, from whence it was introduced to Kew by Sir J. Banks 
in 1790. It is much valued as a chamber plant, and in consequence, extensively cul- 
tivated near London and most large toivns of Europe. 

6477. Varieties. Soon after it was introduced, soiue plants were found with blue 
flowers, which some supposed to be produced by salt or saltpetre, and others by oxide of 
iron. The yellow loam of Hampstead heath and some other places, and some sorts of 
peat-earth are found to produce this effect ; but the cause is not yet ascertained. Dr. 
Daalen, of Antwerp, finds that turf-ashes, and still more effectually those of the Norway 
spruce, the wood generally used as fuel by him, applied to the roots of hydrangea, pro- 
duced the blue color of the petals. {Hort. Tour, 122.) According to Busch, of Peters- 
burgh, " the hydrangea will be turned blue by watering the young plant, the summer 



Book li. 



BALSAM. 



before, with alum-water. Our grey-colored earth, under the black moor-earth, has the 
same effect, being combined with aluminous salt." {Hort. Trans, vol. iv. 568.) 

6478. Propagation and culture. Hedges, who has been " very successful" in treating 
this plant, gives the following directions. " As a succession of young plants is neces- 
sary, I raise some each year by taking, in the beginning or middle of July, young shoots 
with three or four joints, cutting them off close to the joint which is at the bottom of the 
shoot ; these are planted in rich earth, in a warm border, and covered with a hand glass ; 
they are shaded during the middle of the day, and sprinkled with water from a fme rose 
watering-pot, two or three times a-week, in the evening, so as to keep them moist : the 
glass being kept close over them at all times. They will also grow by layers made in 
July, in the same way as is usual with carnations. The cuttings or layers will be well 
rooted by the end of August, at which time, or early in September, they must be put 
singly into small pots, and placed under a frame, which at first must be shut up close ; if 
they can be assisted by a temperate dung-heat, at this time, it will be better for them. In 
the frame tliey must be shaded and watered as before. About the middle or end of 
October, they are to be taken into the green-liouse, or other shelter, where they can be 
protected from wet and frost ; during the winter, they must be watered once a week or 
fortnight, as they may require. In the latter end of May or early in June following, 
they must be turned out into a bed of rich mould, in the open ground, to remain there 
till September, when they must be taken up and potted, and kept protected from damp 
and cold, as in the preceding winter. Instead of turning them out, as stated, in the 
spring, they may be retained in pots ; but they must be shifted twice during the summer. 
By either method line strong plants will be formed, fit for forcing or turning out in the 
succeeding spring. If wanted for the borders, let them be put out when all danger of 
their sustaining injury hy frost is over ; they will stand the winter in the borders, and 
will also bear flowers, though not so well as when protected by a house. Those which 
are to flower in pots, are taken as soon as their buds begin to swell in the spring ; all the 
old mould being removed from their roots, they ai-e planted in fresh earth, in pots of 
about eight inches diameter at top, and placed in front of the green-house or peach- 
house ; if the plants are not over large, pots of smaller dimensions shauld be used ; these 
will come into flower in June. Care must be taken to supply them plentifully with 
water whilst they are coming into bloom, and it is best to place waterpans under the pots 
to secure a continual supply of moisture. If it is desired to have plants in flower early in 
the spring, they must be shifted into their new pots in January, and brought forward 
with forcing heat. The mould I generally give to my hydrangeas is a compost of loam 
and bog-earth or kaf-mould, with a little sand, v/ell incorporated together ; in this they 
will produce red flowers j if they are expected to blow blue, they must be planted in the 
pure yellow loam." 

SuBSECT. 24. Balsam. — Impatiens Balsamina, L. (Blackw. t. 583.) Pent. Monog. L. 
and Geranice, J. Palsamine, Fr. and Ger. and Balsamina, Ital. 

6479. The balsam is a tender annual, rising from one to two feet high, with a succu- 
lent branchy stem, serrated leaves, and various-colored flowers. It is a native of the East 
Indies and Japan, where the natives, according to Thunberg, use the juice prepared with 
alum, for dying their nails red. Cultivated by Gerrard in 1596. 

6480. Varieties. These are infinite, but not so marked or permanent as to have acquired names. The 
seed from one plant will hardly produce two alike. Double flowers are chiefly held in esteem, and espe- 
cially those that are striped like flakes and bizarre carnations. 

648L Propagation and culture. It can only be raised from seed, which ripens readily from semi-double 
plants, and should not be less than three or four, or even nine years old, gardeners having experienced 
that new seed seldom produces double flowers. The best soil is a rich loam, rather lighter than that used 
for growing melons. At any period between the 1st of March and 1st of May, sow very thin in pots, to be 
placed in a hot-bed, and as near the glass as possible. When the plants are five inches high, transplant 
into No. 48. pots, one plant in the centre of each pot. As soon as the roots have filled the pots, move them 
into pots a size larger, and repeat this operation three or four times, till at last they are in pots of eight 
inches' diameter or upwards, keeping the plants all the while in a hot-bed or pit, and near the glass. Bal- 
sams so treated will rise four feet high, and fifteen feet in circumference, with strong thick stems, fur- 
nished with side branches from bottom to top, and these covered with large double flowers. {Fairweather, 
in Hort. Trans, iii. 406.) 

6482. The Amaranthus, Celosia or cockscomb, Gomjyhrena or globe-amaranth, Mesembry- 
anthemum crystallinum or ice-plant, Solanuni melongena or egg-plant, and most other 
tender annuals, v/ill attain to corresponding luxuriance, if similarly treated. 

6483. jRTm^/i^, in October, 1820, sent to the Horticultural Society a cockscomb (Celosia cristata), thQ 
flower of which measured eighteen inches in width and seven inches in height, from the top of the stalk ; 
it was thick and full, and of a most intense purplish-red. To produce this, tiie gi-eat object was to retard 
the protrusion of the flower-stalk, that it might become of great strength. The compost employed was of 
the most nutritive and stimulating kind, " consisting of one part of unfcrmented horse-dung, fresh from 
the stable, and without litter, one part of burnt turf, one part of decayed leaves, and two parts of green 
turf, the latter being in lumps of about an inch in diameter, in order to keep the mass so hollow, that the 
water might have free liberly to escape, and the air to enter. The seeds were sown in spring rather late, 
and the plants put first into pots of four inches' diameter, and then transplanted to others a foot in dia- 

3 K 



866 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



meter ; the object being not to compress the roots, as that has a tendency to accelerate the flowering of all 
vegetables. The plants were placed within a few inches of the glass, in a heat of from 70° to 100° ; they 
were watered with pigeon-dung water, and due attention paid to remove the side branches when very 
young, so as to produce one strong head or flower." {Hort. Trans, iv. 322.) 

SuBSECT. 25. Mignonette. — Reseda odorala, L. (^JSot. Mag. 29.) Dodecan. Dig. "L. 
and Capparides, J. Reseda odorant^ Fr. ; Wohlriechende Reseda, Ger ; and Reseda 
odorosa, Ital. 

6484. The mignonette is a trailing hardy annual, a native of Africa, and introduced in 
1752. It is " the Egyptian bastard-rocket, with most sweet-smelling flowers," of Jus- 
tice, and the Dutch florists of his day. The flowers are highly odoriferous, and the plant 
in pots is in universal request, at all seasons of the year, for placing in rooms. 

6485. Varieties. There is a sub-biennial semi-frutescent variety, rather more odori- 
ferous than the common sort, which forms an elegant winter plant for the drawingrobm, 
but which is not yet in very general cultivation. 

6486. Propagation and culture. Rishon, who cultivated this plant extensively for the 
London market, gives the following instructions, as applicable to the common variety : 
" To obtain fine plants, strong and ready to blow, during the winter, and through the 
months of January and February, the seed should be sown in the open ground the end 
of July ; by the middle of September, the plants from this sowing will be strong enough 
to be removed into pots ; for a week after this removal, they must be shaded, after which 
they may be freely exposed to the sun and air, care being taken to protect them by frames 
from damage by heavy rains, and from injury by early frosts, until the beginning of 
November, at which time many of them will show their flowers ; and they should then 
be removed to a green house or conservatory, or to a warm window in a dwellingliouse, 
where they will branch out, and continue to blo-n^* until the spring. The crop for March, 
April, and May should be sown in small pots, not later than the 25th of August ; the 
plants from this sowing will not suffer by exposure to rain, whilst they are young ; they 
must, however, be protected from early frosts, like the winter crop ; tliey are to be 
thinned in November, leaving not more than eight or ten plants in each pot ; and at the 
same time, the i)Ots being sunk about three or four inches in some old tan or coal-ashes, 
should be covered with a frame, which it is best to place fronting the west : for then the 
lights may be left open in the evening, to catch the sun whenever it sets clear. The 
third or spring crop should be sown in pots, not later than the 25th of February ; these 
must be placed in a frame, on a gentle heat, and as the heat declines, the pots must be 
let down three or four inches into the dung-bed, which will keep the roots moist, and 
prevent their leaves turning brown, from the heat of the sun, in April and May. Tlie 
plants thus obtained will be in perfection by the end of May, and be ready to succeed 
those raised by the autumnal sowing." {Hort. Trans, ii. 375.) 

6487. The tree-mignonette, according to Sabine, " is to be propagated from seeds sown 
in spring ; it may also be increased by cuttings, wliicli will readily strike. The young 
plants should be put singly into small pots, and brought forward by heat, that of a gentle 
hot-bed being preferable, but they will grow Avell without artificial heat. As they ad- 
vance, they must be tied to a stick ; taking care to prevent the growth of the smaller 
side shoots, by pinching them off, but allowing the leaves of tlie main stem to remain on 
for a time to support and strengthen it. When they have attained the height of about 
ten inches, or more, according to the fancy of the cultivator, the shoots must be suffered 
to extend themselves from the top, but must be occasionally stopped at the ends, to force 
them to form a bushy head, which, by the autumn, will be eight or nine inches in dia- 
meter, and covered witli bloom. Whilst the plants are attaining their proper size, they 
should be shifted progressively into larger pots, and may ultimately be left in those of 
about six inches in diameter at top." [Hort. Trans, iii. 181.) 

SfiCT. II. Border-Flowers. 

6488. Border-fiovoers are hardy plants, with showy blossoms, of easy culture, and their 
use in floriculture is to decorate the flower-garden, shrubbery, and other spots or borders 
considered as ornamental. We shall take them in the order of perennials, bulbs, bien- 
nials, hardy annuals, and half-hardy annuals ; and arrange each of these subdivisions 
according to their time of flowering, heights, and colors : indicating by letters those requir- 
ing peat-soil ( ;>) ; such as are rather tender {t) ; such as are m.ost showy (s) ; and such as 
continue in flower for two or more months (3). At the end of each subdivision we shall 
give its general mode of propagation and culture. It may be added, that most of the 
plants mentioned as flowering in any particular month vnll often come into flower the 
month preceding, and continue in bloom during one or more of the following months. 
Hence the importance of selecting such flowers as are at once the most easy of cultivation, 
beautiful in appearance, and that continue longest in flower. 



Book II. 



BORDER. FLOWERS. 



867 



SuBSECT. 1. Species and Varieties of Perennial Jibrons, ramose, tuberous, and creeping rooted 

Herbaceous Border- Floivei'S, arranged as to their Time of JFlotvering, Height, and Color. 
G489. PERENNIAL BORDER- FLOWERS. — FEBRUARY AND MARCH. 



Height fromO to^^ ofaft.\From g of a foot toUfoot. From Itfoot to 2tfeet. From ^fe.et to 3i feet. 



From 3i feet uprvards. 



RED. 

Anemone Hep. rubra, p. 
— flo. pi. rubro, p. 
WHITE. 
Anemone Hep.fl.albo, p. 



YELLOW. 

A doxa moschatellina, p. 
Potentilla opaca 

— -verna 
BLUE. 

Anemone apennina, p. 
— Hepatica.fl. caeruf. p. 

— fl. cser. pleno 
PURPLE. 

Saxifraga oppositifolia 
GREEN. 



WHITE. 

Thlaspi alpestre, p, 
Tussilago alba 
_ farfara 

— fols. variegatis 

— fragrans 
YELLOW. 

Adonis vemalis, s. 
Heleborus hyemalis 

BLUE. 



GREEN. 

Helianthus viridis 



WHITE. 

Orontium japonicum, p. 



BLUE. 

Borago orientalis 

PURPLE. 
GREEN. 

APRIL. 



PURPLE. 
GREEN. 



PURPLE. 
GREEN. 



RED. 

is hortensis fistulosa 
Cortusa Mathioli 
AVHITE. 
is psrennis 
hortensis alba 
Saxifraga hypnoides 
Soldanella al. flo. alb. p. 
Viola odorata flo. albo. 

— — flo. pleno 
Arabis alpina, p. 

YELLOW. 

Chrysosplenium altemi. 

— — oppositifol. 
Viola Icictea 



BLUE. 

Viola canina, p. 

— odorata caer. 

— flo. pleno. caer. 
PURPLE. 

Soldanella aljjina, p. 
Tussilago alpina 
Viola odor. purp. 
VARIEGATED. 



WHITE. 

Tussilago lobata pleno 
Anemone nemorosa, p. 
— — flo. pleno 

— vemalis, p. 

Mandragora ofEcina. p. 
Cardamme amara, p. 
Pulmonaria officina. p. 
Valeriana tripteris 
YELLOW. 
Ranunculus auricomus 
Alyssum saxatile 
Aquilegia grandiflora, p. 
_ canadensis, p. 
BLUE. 
Anemone pulsatilla, p. 
Cynoglossum omphal. p. 
Viola purpurea 

PURPLE. 
Hyoscyamus physal. p. 
Saxifraga cordifolia 
— crassifolia 
VARIEGATED. 
Bellis variegata 
— prolirera 
Pothos fcetida 

GREEN. 
Helleborus lividus 



RED. 



VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 

-MAY.- 



VARIEGATED. 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Anemone hort. flo. pi. p. 
Epimedium alpinuni, p. 
Siiene acaulis 
Lychnis alpina, 3 ' 
Prim, acaul. Sco. dou. 3 
. acaulis crims. 3 
longifolia, p. 
acaul. buff doub. 
Statice armeria 
Ajuga genevensis 



WHITE. 

Asperula odorata 
Cypripediura acaule, p. 
Isopyrum thalictroides 
Leontice thalictroides, p. 
Uvularia amplexiflol. p. 
Anemone alpina p. 

— virginiana 
Arenaria verna 



— majalis 

— m- pleno 
Hydrophyllum canaden. 
Lychms quadridenta. p. 
Pachysandria prostra. p. 
Fodyphyllum peltatum 

— oiphyllum 
Potentilla alba 
Primula acaulis, 3 

- white, double 

— nivalis 
Statice armeria, flo. albo 
Tiarelia cordifolia, p. 

trifoUa 
Tussilago palmata 



RED. 

Astragalus montanus 
Erinus alpinus 
Lamium rugosum 
Dentaria pentaphylla 

— pinnata 
Dodecatheon Meadia 
Fumaria formosa, «. 
Convallaria ma. flo. rub- 
Primula longifolia, p. 
Lychnis viscaria 

_ _ flo. pleno 
Orobus tuberosus, 3. 
Polygala major 

— vulgaris 

— cortusoides, p. 
WHITE. 

Anemone dichotoma, p. 

— alpina 

— narcissiflora 

— sylvestris 
Arum tenuifolium 
Chrysanthemum gram. 

— pinnatifidum 
Draba ciliaris 

— stellata 
Ranunculus aconitifo. s. 

— flo. pleno, s. 

— amplexicaulis 
Saxifraga granulata 

— — flo. plen. 

— petraea 

— umbrosa 
Stellaria CTaminea, p. 

— holostea 

— nemorum 
Uvularia perfoliata, p. 
Fragaria vesca 

— fol. var. 

— monophylla 
Gnaphalium planta. p. 
Iris pumila alba, p. 



RED. 

Paeonia hybrida 



WHITE. 

Cucubalus behen 
Valeriana tripteris var. 

alba 
Iris florentina 
Polemonium casruleum 

flo. albo 
Saxifraga cotyledon 



RED. 

r83onia teniiifolia, 3. 



RED. 

Paeonia corallina, s. 
Lotus rectus 



WHITE. 

Laserpitium latifolium 



S K 2 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



PERENNIAL BORDER-FLOWERS. — MAY — contirmed. 



Height frmnOto^of aft. Fromlof afoot fol^foot. From Ufoot to 2ifeet 



WHITE. 



YELLOW. 

Ranunculus thora 
Alyssum creticum 

— olymj)icum 
Andryala lanata 
Cheirauthus alpinus, p 
Geum montanum 

minor 
Hieracium aureum, 3 
Lysimachia nemorum 

— nummularia 
Primula acau. yell. dble. 

— — — sin. 

— — hose in ho. 

— auricula 

— veris 

— — elatior 
Tormentilla reptans 
Vesicaria utriculata 
Viola biflora, p. 

BLUE. 
Asarum virginicum, p. 
Iris tuberosa, p. 
Gentiana vema, p. 
Phaca australis 
Primula farinosa, p. 

— helvetica, p. 

— inteKrifolia, p. 

— marginata 
Statice coriacea, p. 
Veronica officinalis 
Viola hirta, p. 

comuta 
obliqua 
pedata 
pubescens 
PURPLE. 
Pulmonaria angusti. p. 
Anemone pratensis, p. 
Gentiana acaulis, p. 
Iris pumila 

Primula acaulis li. dbl. 3 
Mitella diphylla, p. 



VARIEGATED. 

Anemone hortensis, p. 



GREEN. 

Paris quadrifolia 



BROWN. 

Primula veris, flo. pie. s. 
— ))olyanthos 



WHITE. 

Lamium moUe 
Lepidium alpinum 
I-ychnis 4 dent. fl. albo 
Peltaria alHacea 

YELLOW. 
Arum arisarum 
Cineraria eampestris 
Draba azoides 
Galium cruciatum 
Geum strictum 
Gnaphali. olym. s. 3. p. 
Lithospermum orientale 
— officinale 
Tormentilia erecta 
Onosma echoides 
Papaver cambricum 
Potentilla sericea 
Uwlaria sessilifolia 
Ranunculus auricomus 



BLUE. 

Linaria alpina 
Iris san^inea 
— siberica 

Phlox divaricata 3. p. 
Polemonium reptans 
Pulmoneiria virginica, p. 



PURPLE. 

Geum rivale 
Helonias buUata, p. 
Iris bitlora 

Ranunculus gramineus 
Saxifraga cuneifolia 
Verbascum pinnatifi. p. 
Cardamine pratensis 

— ilo. pleno 
Penstemon campanulata 
Lamium laevigatum 
Orobus vemus s. 
Primufa villosa, p. 
Vicia dumetorum 
Viola hastata 
Verbascum pinnatifi. p 

VARIEGATED. 
Cerastium alpinum 
Iris prismatica, p. 
Aristolochia clematitis 

GREEN. 
Aquilegia alpina 

— viridiflora, p. 
Saxifraga palmata 

BROWN. 



YELLOW. 

Chelidonium majus 

— lacmiatum 

— flo. pleno 
Chrysanthemum multi. 
Cineraria longifolia 
Doronicum plantajpne. 



1 2tfeet to 5tfeet. 



BLUE. 

Iris lusitanica 
— tenuifolia 
Polemonium coeruleum 
Symphytum orientale 
Veronica gentianoides 



PTJRPLE. 

Hyoscyamus scopolia, 
Lamium orvale 
Peeonia humilis, p. 



VARIEGATED. 



BROWN. 

Mercurialis perennis 



-JUNE. 



WHITE. 



YELLOW. 

Bunias orientalis 
DoronicHm pardalian. 
Smymium perfoliatuin 



PURPLE. 

Orobus tuger, 3. p. 
Paeonia byzantina, 3. 

— daurica, 3. 

— fimbriata, 3. 



VARIEGATED. 



From S^feet upwards. 



VARIEGATED. 



— alpinus, 3. 

— cassius rub. 3 

— glaucus 
Saponaria ocynioi. 3- p. 
Saxifraga sarmentosa 
Semperv. arachnoide. p 
Statice coriUfolia, p. 
Anthyllis vulne. ilo. coc. 
Valeriana dioica 
Betonica incana 
Sempervivum cuspi. p, 

— globiferum 



WHITE. 

Asperula crassifolium 
1 1 1 icebrum capitatum, p. 

\chillea clavennje, s. 

\juga reptans, flo. al. p. 

Vndrosace lactea 
Arabis lucida, p. 

— sibirica 
Belliuni bellidioides, p. 
Campanu.rotun.fl. al. p. 
Cornus suecia, p. 
Iris pumila alba, p. 
Polygonum viviparum 



RED, 

Aphilanthes monspeli. 
Echium rubrum 
Hedysarum onobrychis 
Anthyllis ^^ll. coc. 
Dianthus atro. rubens 
Asperula taurina 
Phlox setacea, p. 

— subulata 
Sempervivum arachn. 
Veronica urticifblia 
Ononis repens 

— rotundifolia 
Phlox jiilosa, p. 
Ononis hircina 
Orobus varius, p. 
Polygonum bistortum, s. 
Rubus arcticus, p. 
Saxifraga rotuncufolia 
Statice cephalotes, t. p. 
Teucrium multiflorum 

WHITE. 
Anchusa angusti. fl. alb. 
Anemone pensylva. 4. p. 
Anthemis pyrethrum 
Anthericum liliago 



Arenaria laricifolia, p. 

— montana 
Arum maculatum 
Chrysanthemum argen. 

— atratum 

— monspeliense 
Cochlearia sasatilis 



RED. 

Achillea mille. flru. s. p. 
Paeonia sinensis, rub. pi. 
Sanguisorba officinalis 
Valeriana rubra 
Fumaria spectabilis 
Aquilegia rosea, multi. 
Orobus sylvaticus, p. 
Pffionia anomola 



WHITE. 

Valeriana rubra, var alb. 
Achillea ligiistica 

— moschata 

— nobilis 
Apocynum hypericifoli. 

— venetum, i. 
Asclepias vincetoxicum 
Betonica glomerata 
Chrysant. ceratophylloi. 
Dorycnium herbaceum 
Hesperis, mat. flo. ul. al. 
Imperatoria ostiutnium 



RED. 

Papaver orientalis 
Thalictnmi atropurpur. 
Valeriana officinalis 
— pyrenaica 
Paeonia peregri. fl. ro. pi. 



WHITE. 

Actea spicata 

— bacc. albidis 

— bacc. rubris 
Anthericum 

Apocynum cannabinum'Cynanchum acutum, 3 
Athamanta sicula " 
.Clematis recta, p. 
il/aseri)itium trilobum 



RED. 
Coronilla, varia flo. car. 
Aconitum napel. fl. ros. 



WHITE. 

Aconitum napel. fl. alb. 

Asphodelus ramosus 
Convolvulus sepium, alb. 
Coronilla varia, fl. albo 



[Mentha cervina 
I Paeonia albiflora 
I — sibirica 
iPlantago alpina 



Galega officina. fl. albo 
'Laserpitium aquilegifo. 
Spiraea aruncas, p. 



Book II, 



BORDER-FLOWERS. 



869 



PERENNIAL BORDER-FLOWERS. —JUISIE-^ continued. 



Height from to ^ of aft. From Iqfa foot to li foot. From l^foot to 2^ feet. 



WHITE. 

Saxifraga adscendens 

— caesia 

— cemua 

— nivalis 

— rivularis 
Scrophularia altaica 
Sisymbrium sagittatum 
Thalictrum foetidum 
Thesium alpinum 

— linophyllum 
Trientalis europea, p 
Valeriana celtica 
Veronica alpina 
Viola blanda 

— lanceolata 



YELLOW. 

Lin\im flavum, p. 
i\!edicago prostata 
Aletris aurea 

— farinosa 
Alyssum alpestre 

— murale 
Anemone palmata, s. p. 
Anthyllis vulneraria 
Arabis bellidifolia, p. 
Cistus tuberaria, t p. 
Glaux maritima 
Gnaphal. Leontopod. p. 
Hippocrepis comosa 
Hypochoeris Helvetica 
Saxifiraga mutata 
Geum potentilloides, p. 
Hypoxia erecta, p. 
Sedum deficiens 

— virens 
Viola lutea 



BLUE. 

Arum triphyllum, p. 
Asarum canadense 
europsEum 
Gentiana adscendens, i. 
Ajuga alpina 

— pyramidalis 

— reptans 
Campanula rotundi. p. 
Globularia vulgaris pu. 
Pulmonaria marit. 3. p. 
Statice tartavica, p. 
Veronica aphylla 

— bellidioides 

— chamaedrys 

— saxatilis 
Viola calcarata 

grandiflora 
maculata 
PURPLE. 
Anthemis montana, p- 
Aristolochia serpenta. p. 
Astragalus hypoglottis 
Betonica hirsuta 
Geum reptans, p. 
Iris pumila 
Sedum villosum 

hybridum 
Teucrium chamsedrys 
Moerhingia muscosa 
Thalictrum alpinum 



WHITE. 

Convallaria latifolia 
Cyprepedium album s. 
Dianthus csesius, flo.albo 

— virginicus 
Doronicum bellidias. 
Galium glaucum 
Erodium chamffidryoi. 
Geum virginianum, ». 
Helonias asphodeloides 
Hydrophyllum virgini.' 
Iris flexuosa, p. 
Lithospermum virgini. 
Lychnis, flo. albo 
Melissa oflicinalis 
Physalis alkekengi 
Pimpinella saxifraga 
Potentilla rupestris 
Ranunculus alpestris 
Rubus chamaemorus, p. 

— saxatilis 
Sanicula europaea 
Saxifraga ajugifolia 

— aizoon 
Sempervivum hirtum, j> 
Seseli aristatum 
Silene amoena, p. 
Stellaria cerastoides, p. 

— scapigera, p. 
Teucrium pyrenai. p. 
Trifolium canescens 
Trifolium pannonicum 

— repens macu, 
YELLOW, 

Achillea faloata 

— micrantha, p, 
pubescens 

— santolina 
Agrimonia agrimonoid 

— nana 
Alyssum tortuosum 
Hieracium aurantiacum 
Trollius americanus 
asiaticus 

— major 
Arnica montana, p. 

— scorpioides 
Bupthalmnm grandiflo. 
Caltha palus, flo. pleno 
CheirantTius helvetic. p. 
Crepis rigida 
Cyprepedium calceol.^./i, 
Dracaena borealis,p. 
Erysimum barb.flo.plen, 
Fumaria nobilis, 3. p. 
Galeobdolon luteum 

urbanum 
Hemerocallis graminea 
Hypochoeris maculata 

radicata 
Inula hirta 
Medicago karstiensis 

marina 
Ophiopogon japonicus,;;. 
Orobus luteus 
Panax quinquefolia, t.p. 
Smymium aureum 
Thalictrum sibiricum' 
Potentilla argentea 

astracanica 
aurea 
obscura 
Ranunculus glacialis 

lingua 
Rhodiola rosea 
Rubia tinctorum 
Trigonella ruthenica, p. 
Viola grandiflora lutea 

BLUE. 
Campanula azurea, 3.p. 

alpina, 3 
barbata, 3 
betonicaef. 3 
saxatilis, 3 
Dracocephalum austriac 
Phyteuma spicata 
Pulmonaria paniculata 
Geranium pyrenaicum 

sibericum 
Houstonia coerulea, p. 
Iris virginica 
Orobuslathyroides, p. 
Statice limonium 
Veronica latifolia 
Viola montana 
— palustris 



WHITE. 

Lepidium latifolium 
Ligusticum austriacum 
Lychnis vespertina 

— — flo. pleno 
Marrubium vulgare 
Pimpinella peregrina 
Rubus rosaefolius, p 
Saururus cernuus, t. p. 
Sophora alba, p. 
Spiraea trifoli'ata 
Thalictrum rugosum 



From 2^ feet to 5^ feet. 



WHITE. 

Salvia indica 
Sambucus ebulus 
Sanguisorba canadensis 
Thalictrum angustifol. 

— aguilegifol. 

— — contortum 

— comuti 
Valeriana Phu 



PURPLE. 

Aquilegia viscosa 
Aristolochia longa 
Astragalus monspesulan 
Dianthus plumarius 
Geranium phaeum 
Lychnis flos. cuculi 

— flo- pleno 
Phlomis alpina 
Phlox ovata, p. 
Scrophularia betonicif. 
Stacnys circinata, p. 



YELLOW, 
Achillea tomentosa 
Astragalus alopecuroi. 
Cineraria cordifolia 
Clematis ochroleuca, p. 
Convallaria multiflora 

— polygonat. 

— — flo. pleno 
Coreopsis angustifolia, p 
Euphorbia cyparissias 
Helonias luteus, p. 
Hemerocallis fulva 

— — flo. pleno 
Hypericum hirsutum, p. 
Iris pallida 
Mirtiulus luteus, p. 
Poeohia sinen . alb. pie. 3- 
Ranunculus acris fl. pie, 
Sophora tinctoria, p, 
Trollius europaeus 



BLUE. 

Aconitum uncinatum 
Amsonia angustifolia, p. 

- latifolia 
Aquilegia vulgaris 

— flo. pleno 
Campanula laciniata,3^ 

— peregrina, 3. 
Clematis integrifolia 
Geranium aconitifolium 

- angulatum 
Iris pensylvanica 
Lithospermum fruticos. 
Salvia phlomoides 
Symphytum caeruleum 
Veronica laciniata 



PURPLE. 

Aristolochia rotundata 
Cnicus monspesulanu-.p. 
Hesp. matron, flo.pl.pur. 
Lychnis diuma 

— flo. pleno 
Salvia viscosa 

ymphytum officinale 
Anchusa angustifolia , 
Medicago sativa 

SK 3 



From 3i feet upvlavda 



WHITE. 



YELLOW. 

Agrimonia eupatoria 
Asphodelus luteus, s. 
Astragalus glycyphyllis 
Centaurea phrygia 
Ferula assafoetida, p. 

— orien talis, p. 
Laserpitium gallicum 
Scabiosa alpina 
Sisymbrium strictissi. 

tanacetifol. 



BLUE. 

Iris germanica 
Lathyrus pisiformis 
Pddalyria australis, p. 
Vicia cassubica 



PURPLE. 

Iris livida 

Paeonia peregrina, 3 
Veratrum nigrum 
Lunaria rediviva 
Thalictrum purpuras. 



YELLOW. 

Cineraria siberica 
Datisca cannabina 
Hedysarum alpinum 
Heracleum angustifol. 
Inula germanica 
Ligusticum levisticum 
Pastinaca opoponax 
Peucedanum alsaticum, 
Thalictrum lucidum 

— . majus 

— specIosuTii 



BLUE. 

Aconitum napellus 

— pyramidale 
Iris sambucina 
Podalyria lupinoides, p 
Symphytum asperrim. 



PURPLE. 

Coronilla varia, 3 
Galega officinalis, 3 
Hesperis matronalis 
Phlomis tuberosa' 



870 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



PERENNIAL BORDER- FLOWERS. — JUNE — confmt/ed. 



Height Jrmn g ofafi. Froml of afoot to Ufoot. 



PUR^PLE. 
^''erbascum myconi, p. 
Linaria cymbalaria 

— fol. Tariegatis 

— pilosum 

— purpureum 
VARIEGATED. 

Asperula cynanchia 
Iris variega'ta 
— pumila Tariegata, p. 
SaxBTaga androsacea 
Veronica montana 



GREEN. 

Androsace villosa, p. 



BROWN. 

Medeola virginica, p. 



i PURPLE. 
ThymvLS vulgaris 
Vic'ia cracca 
.Viola palmata, p. 



I VARIEGATED. 

' Dianthus barbatus 

— hortense 
Geranium pratense 

— striatum 
Iris faetidissima, p. 
i — fol. varieg. 

! — versicolor 

; Lotus maritimus 

i GREEN. 

[Astragalus virescens 
Euphorbia verrucosa 
Gundelia Toumefortii,p. 
Hydrastis canadensis 

I BROWN. 

;Helleborus trifolius, p. 

iHeuchera Americana 



From ijt foot to 2i feet. 



VARIEGATED. 

Apocynura anditisace. p 
Heracleum austriacum 
Iris aphylla 

— squaiens 

— susiwa 



GREEN. 

Heracleum sibericum 
Saxifraga pennsylvanica 



From ^feet to Z^feet. 



VARIEGATED. 



From 3^ feet uprvards. 



VARIEGATED. 

Asclepias variegata,^, p. 



GREEN. 

Humulus lupulus 
Smilax herbacea, p. 



JULY.- 



RED. 

Epilobium alpinum 
Geranium sanguineum 
Anemone vzddensis, p. 
Dianthus hyssopifolius 
Phlox stolonifera, p. 
Saiifraga autumnalis 
Silene saxatilis 

— saxifraga 

— Vcdlesia 
Bartsia coccinea 
Satyriura repens, p. 
Androsace camea, p. 
Circaea alpina 
veronica fruticulosa 
Achillea asplenifoha, p. 
Phlox amaenaji. 



WHITE. 

Asperula tinctoria, 3 
Dianthtis collinus 
Dryas octopetala, p. 
lilicebrura paronych.,p. 
Rubia cordifolia 
Scuttellaria alpina 
Achillea decumbens 

— alpina 

— ptarmica 

_ — flo.ple, 

Alchemilla pentaphylla 
Anemone cemua, p. 
Anthemis nob., flo. plen 
irenaria baliarica, t. p. 

— peploides 

— saxatilis 
Galax cordifolia, p. 
Melanthium laetum 
Pamassia palustris 
Prunella grandiflora, p. 
Sedum album 

— dasyphyllum 
Sempervivura sedifomie 
Silene alpestris 

— rupestris 
Tofieldia palustris 



YELLOW. 

Inula ensifolia 
Senecio incanum, p. 
Achillea odorata 
Alchemilla alpina 
Alyssum montanum 
Linaria vulgaris 

— peloria 
Coronilla minima 
Erigeron tuberosum 
Hyoseris foetida 

lucida 
radiata 
iCKnothera pumila, 3. j-. 
Potentilla tridsntata 
Santolina anthemoides 
Saxifraga aizoides 

^ ' moschata 
Sedum quadrifidum 
nipestre 

— sexangulare 
•^ibbaldia prociimbens 
Soljdaeo cambrica 



RED. 

Arum virginicum 
Astragulus onobrychis 
Centaurea sibirica 
Dianthus hybridus 
Melittis melissophyllum 
Mentha odorata 
Nepeta nepet£lla 
Origanum hybridum 
Polygonnm erectum 
Saxifraga geum 
Statice flesuosa, p. 
Siiigelia marylandica 
Triosteum perfoliat. p. 
Circaea alpina 

— lutetiana 
Ononis spinosa rub. 
Sempervi\'um tectorum 
AchiUea montana 

— rosea 

— tanacetifolia 
WHITE. 

Achillea setacea, p. 

— pentaphylla 

— toraentosa 
Arnica bellidiastrum, p. 
Asperugo laevigata 
Athamanta cretensis 
Camp, rotund. t>. albo, p. 
Cucubalus stellatus 
Cyprepedium canad. p. 
Doronicum altaicujn 
Galium boreale 

— rubioides 
GypsophUla panicula. p. 
Monarda rugosa, p. 
Nepeta itaUca 
Ononis spinosa alba 
Onosma siinpUsissima, t. 
Origanum creticum, t. 
Orobus albus 

Emgustifolius, t. 
Salvia mollis 
Scuttellaria lupuUna, p. 
Sedum populifolium 
Slum sisarum 
Spiraea ulmaria, flo.plen. 
Statice speciosa, p. 
Telephium imperati 
Teucrium montanum 
Tradesc.\-irgin.fl. albo,p. 
Trifolium montanum 

TELLOW. 
Achillea aurea 
Aconitum anthora, p. 
Alyssum montanum 
mone patens, p. 
Anthemis tinctoria 
Arum italicum 
Astragalus inicrophyl. p. 
Betonica alopecurus 
Bupthalmum cordifbl • p. 
Cnicus spinosus, p. 
Conyza bifrons 
Cyprep.calc.fol.glab.3. p. 
Hedysarum saxatile 
Hyoseris foetida 

— lucida 

— radiata 
Inula bubonium, i. 

— mariana _ 

— montana 

— suaveolens 
Lotus cytis?oides 
Lysirnachia bnlbifera 

— thyrsiflora 
Peganum harmala, t. 
Penthorum sedoides 
Phaca rigida 
Physalis pensylvanica,p 
Potentilla bifurca 



RED. 

Betonica grandiflora 
Carduus cyanoides 
Dianthus super, flo. rub. 
Lathyrus tuberosus 
Phloniis herba venti 
Sanguisorba media 
Dianthus carjophyllus, i 
Trifolium rabens 
Veronica flo. incamato 



RED. 

Arundo, donax fol. var 
Asclepias amoena, 3. p. 
Dlctamn. albus, flo rub 3 
Lychnis chalcedonica 
Hionarda didyma 
Phlox glaberrima, p. 



paniculata 



WHITE. 

Achillea atrata 

— herborata 

— impatiens 
Cnicus tartaricus, p. 
Dianthus superbus 
Eryngium bourgati 

— campestre 
Eupatorium perfoliatum 
Laserpitium angustifol. 
Lepidum graminifohum 
Lvchn. chalcedon.fl.albo 
N'epeta cataria 

— melissaefolia, p. 
Polygonum divaricafum 
Sanicula canadensis 
Sedum telephium album 

— — major album 
Selinum austriactim 
Sesseli montanum 
Sison canadense 
Solanum tuberosum 
Spiraea filipendula 

— lobata, p. 

— ulmaria 

— — flo. pleno. 
Stachys cretica 

Stipa pennata 
Veronica maritim.fl.albo 



Achillea magna 
Asclepias nivea, p. 
C ampan . persicif. alb . pi 
Dictamnus albus, 3 
Laserpitivim latifoUum 
Lycopus europaeus 
Lysirnachia ephem«-una 
Marrub. candidissim.i.p' 
Parthenium integrif. i.p. 
Phlox paniculata, flo.alb. 
Podalyria alba 
Polygonum imdulatum 



YELLOW. 

Achillea abrotonifol. p. 
Antirrhinum geusitifol. 
Astragalvis cicer 
Coronilla coronata 
Crepis cilbida 
— sibirica 
Cucubalus otites 
Galium vemum 
Gentiana fulva, p. 
Gunnera perpensa, t. 
Hieracium hTatui-.i 

— porrifolium 
Inula crythmifolia, t. 
Lysimachia ciliata 

— quadrifolia 

— quadriflora 
^ (Enothera undulata 
Phaca alpina 

j Ranunculus cassubicus 
I Rudbeckia hirta, p. 

Scorzonera graminifol. 
i Senecio abrotanifolia 
I Stachys maritima 

Iris fulva 

Thapsia asclepium 

— garganica 

— Till OS a 



YELLOW. 

Aconitum lycoctonum 
I — ochroleucum 
[Astragalus christianus 
jErigeron carolinianu. p. 
I — philadelphicum 
Ferula nodiflora 
Lysimachia vulgaris 
Salvia glutinosa 
Scorzonera hispanica 
Chelone formosa, <. p 



Anindo donax 
Convolvulvus soldanell.*. 
Delphinum puniceum,p. 
Epilobium hirsutum 
— latifolium 
Phaca boetica 
Phlox maculata, p. 
Eupatorium cannabin. 



WHITE. 

Aconitum albtmi 
Clematis alpina, p. 
Eupatorium altissimum 
Galega orientalis, p. 

— virginlana, p. 
KitaibeUa vitifolia, p 
Lathyrus palustris, p 
Lycopus exaltatus 
Verbena carolineana 



YELLOW. 

Acotiitiun pyrenaicum 

— septentrionale 
Agrimonia odorata 
Aralea nudicaulis, p. 

— racemosa 
Astragalus galegiformis 
Centaurea glastifoUa 
Cimicifuga foetida, p. 
Cineraria gigantea 

— glauca 
Cniciis cerhuus 

— oleraceus 
Gentiana luteji, p. 
Helianthus pubescens 

— strumosus, p 
Inula helenium 

Iris ochroleuca, p. 
Lupinus nootkatens. 3.p. 
Polymnia canadensis 
Senecio doria 



Book II. BORDER-FLOWERS. 871 

PERENNIAL BORDER-FLOWERS. — JULY — cow^mwecZ. 



BLUE. 

Scabiosa columbaria, p. 
Linaria repens 
Campanula carpatica, p. 

— pumila, t. 
Frankenea hirsuta 
lentiana punctata, p. 

— purpurea 
Globularia nudicaulis 
Prunella grandiflora, p. 

— nyssoi)ifolia 
sisymbrium anceps, p. 
Veronica multifida, f. 

orientalis 
Viola cenesia, p. 
— cuculata 



HeigktfromOto'iofaft.'FrotH^ofafootiol^foot. From foot to 2^ feet. Fr(m 2^ feet to 3^ feet. From Zi^ feet iipnards. 



PURPLE. 

Aster alpinus, 3. p. 
Geranium mactilatum 
Anthyllis montana 
Linaria triornithophor.ji 
Dracocephal. pereg. t. p 
Hedysarum obscurum 
Sedum teleph.purp.min, 
Serratula alpina, p. 
Thymus serpilium, p. 

— — cit. odore 
Trifolium alpinum 
Veronica allionil 
Astragalus uralensis, p. 
Statioe retioulata 



VARIEGATED. 

Geranium lancastrense 

— argenteum 
Iris graminea 
Gnaphalium alpinum 

— dioicum 
Gypsophilla paniculata 

— saxifragra 
GREEN. 

Thymus montanus 
Tofieldia pubens 
BROWN. 



YELLOW. 

Potentilla pennsylvanica 

tridentata 
Salvia austriaca 
Santolina anthemoides 
Scuttellaria orientalis, p. 
Sedum reflexum 
Senecio doronicum 
Sisyrin. iridioid. fl. lut. p. 
Symphytum tuberosum 
Tagetes lucida, p. 
Thalictrum dioicum 
Valantia glabra 
Valeriana ruthenica 
Veratrum luteum 
Uvularia lanceolata, p. 

BLUE. 

Anchusa sempervirens 
Campanula alliariaefol.p. 

carpatica 
grandiflora 
nitida, p. 
— patula 
Centaurea montana 
Cynoglossum pict. t. p. 
Delphinium grandiflor. 
Dracocephalum 

grandiflorum 
Erigeron alpinum 
Gentiana cruciata, 5. p. 

macrophylla 
septemfida 
Geranium ibericum 

— reflexum 

— sylvaticum 

— — flo.ple. 
Gratiola officinalis 
Hemerocallis ceerulea, p. 
Linum alpinum 
Mimulus alatus, p. 
Monarda ciliata, t. 
Phyteuma campanul. t. 

— hemispha;rica 
Scabiosa graminifolia 
Scutellaria galericulata 
Sisyrinchium berb. t. p. 

— iridioides 
Statice latifolia, jj. 
Tradescantia vlrginica 
Veronica austriaca 

— Candida 

— hybrida 

— pinnata 
PURPLE. 

Anchusa offiginalis 

— tinctoria 
Astragalus tenuifolius,p. 
Betonica stricta 
Carduus pycnocephalus 
Centaurea rhapontica 

— scabiosa 
Dodartia orientalis, p. 
Trifolium lupinaster 
Erigeron purpureum 
Geranium macrorhizum 

— palustre 
Melissa grandiflora 
Melittis grandiflora 
Pisum maritimum 
Sedum anacampseros 

— glaucum 
Teucrium hircanicum, t. 
Tradesc. virg. flo. pur. p. 
Trifolium alpestre 
Mimulus ringens, p. 
Mitella nuda 
Silene longiflora 
Statice reticulata 
Astragalus uralensis, p. 
Bartsia pallida, p. 
Betonica orientalis 

VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 

Melanthium virgiiiic. p. 
Poterium sanguisorba 

BROWN. 
Arum atrorubens 
Geranium lividum 



BLUE. 

Astragalus uliginos. p. 
Delphin.grandi. fl. pl..3. 

— urceolatum, 3. 
Eryngium alpinum 
Hyssopus officinalis 
Lychnis chalced. fl. pi. p. 
Nepeta violacea . 
Salvia grandiflora 

— nemorosa 
Sonchus sibiricus 
Veronica incisa 

— maritima 

— spicata 

— teucrium 
Lolrelia siphilitica, t. p. 



YELLOW. 



YELLOW. 



BLUE. 

Asclepias sibirica, 3. 
Astragalus sulcatus 
Campanula persicifol. p 

— — ceer. pleno 

— rapunculbides 
Catananche caerulea 
Delphin. exaltatum, 3.p. 
Echinops ritro 
Eryngium amethystin. 
Iris halophylla 

Salvia verticillata 
Veronica sibirica 
Linum perenne 



PURPLE. 

Actasa racemosa 
Cacalia alpina 
Centaurea tartarica 
Cnicus caucasicus, p. 

- heterophyllus 

- camiolicus, p. 
Monarda clinopodia 
Salvia pratensis 
Scrophularia betonicifol. 
Scuttellaria altissima, p, 
Sedum telephi. pur.maj. 
Stachys alpina, p. 
Lycopus virginicus 
Pensteraon laevigata, p. 

- pubescens 
Saponaria officinia. 3. 

— — flo. plen. o, 
Scabiosa arvensis 
Verbena officinalis 



VARIEGATED. 
Dianth. caryophyUus,<.3. 
Iris spuria 
Sessili glaucum 
Sisyrinchum striatum,p. 
Stachys lanata, p. 



GREEN. 
Poterium hybridum 

BROWN. 

Scrojihularia auricul. t. 
— orientalis 

—AUGUST.-- 



PURPLE, 

Cnicus centauroides, p. 
Leonorus cardiaca 
Monarda fistulosa 

— purpurea 
Verbasc. phoeniceum, p 



VARIEGATED. 



BROWN. 

Arum dracunculus 
Verbascum ferrugin. p. 



, BLUE. 

Asclepias nigra, p. 
Aconitum volubile 
Delphin. alatum, 3. p. 

— azureum, 3. 

— — flo. pleno, 3. 

— intermed. p. 
Echinops sphasrocephal. 
Glycyrrhiza echinata, p. 

— glabra 
Sonchus plumieri 
Sophora australis 

— alopecuroides,*. 
Verbena hastata 
Vicia sylvatica 



PURPLE. 

Aconitum cammarura 
Cnicus canus, p.. 
Eupatori'um purpurea 
Lythrum salicaria 
Prenanthes purpurea 
Serratula coronata 
Phytolacca decandra, p. 



VARIEGATED. 

Cynanchura monspeliac 



GREEN. 

Euphorbia palustris 



RED. 

Sanseviera oarnea, p. 



RED. 

Artemisia cserulescens 
Nepeta pannonica 
Statice oleifolia, t. 
A thamanta condensata 
Veronica marit. fl.incar. 



RED. 

Dianth. carthusianorum 
Epilobium angustissim. 
Asclepias incamata, 3.p. 
Athamanta siberica 
Gypsophillaperfoliata,p. 



3 K 4 



RED. 

Artemisia vulgaris 
Dioscoria verticillata,/.p. 

— villosa, t. 
Lobelia cardinalis, 3. 
Phlox undulata 3. p. 
Clematis crispa, p. 
Malva alcea 
— moschata 



RED. 

Althaea narbonensis 
Carduus defloratus 
Centaurea centaurium 
Cnicus ciliatus, p. 
Glycine apios, p. 
Phlox decussata, 3. p. 
Tripsacum daotyloia,/.p. 
Lathrus heterophyllus 



872 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



III. 



PERENNIAL BORDER- FLOWERS. — AUGUST — co«fm?<eJ. 



YELLOW. 

Santolina maritima' 
Prunella pensyl vanlca,j). 
Saxifraga ceespitosa 

— hirculis 
Sisymbrium jiyrenaicura 



HeightfromOto^qfafi.Fromiofafooitol^foot. From 1^ foot to 2^ feet. From2^feetto3k fed. From 3^ feci upwards. 



WHITE. 

Nepeta incana, p. 
Silene maritima 
Achillea cristata 
Prenanthes alba 
Sedum forsterianum 
Sisymbrium barbarea 
Thymus marschalli, t. p. 



Mentha pulemum 
Viola mlrabilis 



VARIEGATED. 



WHITE. 

Achillea cretica, p. 

— macrojihylla 

— squaiTosa, p. 
Arenaria granditlora, p 
Artemisia campestris 

— maritima 

— santonica 

— sericea 
Astrantia minor, 
Athamantia ri_^da 
Cacalia hastata 
Conyza liiiifolia, p. 
Erigeron uniflorum 
Eupatorium rotundifol. 
Gratiola virgimca 
Gypsophilla prostrata 
Hemerocal lis japonic, p. 
Melissa calamintha 

— nepeta 
Origanum heracleotic. 
Phlox suaveol. fol. var. p. 
Selinum chabraei 
Thymus zygis 
Gnaphal. margar. 3. p. 

YELLOW. 
Anthericum ossifragum 
Artemisia glacialis 
Bupthalmum maritim. 

— salicifol. 
Coreopsis minima, p. 
Inula oculus christi 

— provincialis 

— squanosa 
Podalyria tinctoria, p. 
Rhexia, virginica 
Sedum aizoon 
Sideritis scordioides 

lene chloroefolia 
Solidago humilis 
Teucrium canadense 

— scorodonia 
BLUE. 

Artemisia austriaca 
Aster linarifolius, p. 
Conyza asteroides, 
Eryngium maritimum 
Gentiana asclepedia, p. 

bavarica 
Phyteuma orbicularis, p. 
Salvia forskoehlii 
lyrata 

Scabiosa caucasica, t. p. 
Veronica incana 
Viola mirabilis, p. 

PURPLE. 
Iris dichotoma, p. 
Phlox Carolina, t. 
Saxifraga viscosa 



VAPvIEGATED. 

Astrantia camiolica, f. p. 
Dracoce])halum dentic. 
Gypsophilla altissima 
— repens 
BROWN. 



WHITE. 

Artemisia dracunculus 
Aster linifolius 

— umbellatus 
Athamanta libanotis 
Leonorus crispus 
Phlox suaveolens, p. 
Scabiosa leucantha 
Scutellaria peregrina, t. 
Selinum curvifoUum 
Sium rigidum, p. 



YELLOW. 

Achillea ageratum. 



Prencmthes altissima, p. 
Solanum quercifolium 
Solidago ambigua 

— bicolor 

— caesia 

— canadensis 

— integrifolia 
Asclepias tuberosa, t. 3. 



BLUE. 

Aster acris 

— a;stivus 

— cordifolius, p. 

— tardiflorus, />. 
Rlyoyrrhiza asperima,p, 
Hedysai-um violaceum 
Hys>opus lopanthus, p. 
Lupiiius perennis 
Xepeta tuberosa 
Scabiosa sylvatica 



PURPLE. 

Aster amellus 
Lythrum triflorum, p. 

verticillatum 
Mentha crispa, t. 

- piperita 

- viridis 



VARIEGATED. 



WHITE. 1 WHITE. 

Acanthus spinosus,p. lAconitum variegat. p. 
Centaurea cineraria Bocconia cordata 
Eupatorium hyssopifol. Cacalia suaveolens 
IMarjubiuni peregrinum Campan. latifol. alb. p. 
Polygonum Nlrtjiniamura — persicif. fl. alb. pi 
Chelone glabra 
Clematis angustifolia 
Epilob. angust. flo. alb. 
Eupator. ageratoid. p. 
Nepaea texis 

— glabra 
Veratrum album, p. 
Veronica virginica 



YELLOW. 

Artemisia pontica 
Balsamita virgata 
— vulgaris 
Chrysocoma biflora 



Cacalia saracenica 
Cassia marilandica, i. p. 
Clematis vioma, p. 
Coreopsis procera 
verticillata — tripteris 

Erigeron carlinianum, p. Helianthns altissimus 
Hieracium sabaudum j Oenothera missour. p. 

bellatum Rudbeckia digitata 



YELLOW. 

Bupthalmum heUanth. 



BROWN. 

Achillea ochroleuca 



Artemisia rupestris 

— spicata 
Swertia perenis 

—SEPTEMBER AND OCTOBER 



jEthonera fruticosa, 



BLUE. 

Anchusa undulata 
Campanula verticill. p. 
Clematis cylindrica 
.Oallinsonia canadensis 
Eryngium planum 
Salvia sylvestri? 
Verbena urticifoUa 



PURPLE. 



fulgida 

— laciniata 
Silphium asteriscus 

— connatum 

— larainiatum 

— perfoliatum 
Solidago argil ta 

BLUE. 
Aconitum japonicuni 
Asclepias syriaca 
Aster novi befgii 
Campan. latifol. cacr. p. 

— pyTamidalis;^). 

— trachelium 

— — 11. c^. pi. 3. 
Lavatera thuringiaca 



Asclepias purpurasc. p. 
Aster rigidus . . 

Eupatorium maculatum | 
Lathyrus sylvestris 



PURPLE. 

•Vster concolor 
Chelone obliqua, p. 

— — major 
j Clematis purpurea 
Liatris squarrosa, p. , Epilobium angustifoU.p 
Lythrum virgatum | Hedysarum canaden. j>. 
Scrophularia scrodon. d. Lathyrus latifolius 

— grandiflorus 
Liatris scariosa, p. 
Rudbeckia purpurea, 3. 
Cacalia atriplicifoUa 
VARIEGATED. 
Campanula versicol. p. 
Erigeron canadense 



VARIEGATED. 

Antirrhrnu. monspessul 
Astrantia major, p. 
Stachys germanica 

BROWN. 

HeUanth. atro-rubens, p. 



RED. 



WHITE 
Eunatorium 



YELLOW. 

Chrysocoma villosa, t. 
Solidago mexicana 



RED. 

Lobelia splendens, t. 3. p 
Boltonia aiteroides 

WHITE. 

Aster ror>-mbosus 

— diffusus 

— divaricatus 

— linifolius 

— macrophyllus 

— pendul-js 
Scabiosa gramuntia 

YELLOW. 
Chrysocoma linosyris ' 
Euphorbia emar^iata 



RED. 

Lobelia fulgens, t. 3. 



WHITE. 

Artemisia japonica 



YELLOW. 

Helianthns divaricat. p. 
Scolymus hispanicus 
Solidago odora 
Tetragonothega heli. p. 



RED. 

Ater salicifoUus: 
Glycine monoica, p. . 
PUoS pyTamidalis 

WHITE. 
Aster ericoides 

— tenuifolius 
Eupatorium aromatic. 



YELLOW. 

Coreopsis altemifolia 

— amplexicaulis 
Helenium autumnale,p. 

— pubescens 
Helianthus decapitalus 

— gigant^us 

— multiflorus 

— — flo. pleno 

— tuberosus 
Polymnia uvedalia 
Solidago laevigata 

— lanceolata 

— . petiolaris 
I — procera 

— sempervirens 
I — serotina 



Book II. BORDER-FLOWERS. 873 



PERENNIAL BORDER-FLOWERS. — SEPT. AND OCT. — cordmued. 



Height from Oio^ofafi.l From ^ofa foot iol^ foot. 


From Ufoot to 2 J /erf. 


From 2i feet loS^fed. From S^fiet upwdrds. 


BLUE. 

Gentiana ciliata, t. 

— pneumonanthe 

PURPLE. 


BLUE. 

Gentiana catesbaei, p- 
Scabiosa succisa 

PURPLE. 

Aster hyssopifolius 

— latifolius 
Liatris pumila, p. 
Phlox suff ruticosa 


BLUE. 

Aster laevis 

— sibericus 

— spectabilis 
Gentiana sajionaria, p. 
Plumbago europa^a, p. 

PURPLE. 
Salvia napifolia 
Serratula quinquefol. p. 


BLUE. 

Aster paludosus 

— tradescanti 

— undulatus, p. 
Dracocephal. Yirgini. p. 

PURPLE. 

Aster ^andiflorus 

— radula 
Hyssopus nepetoides, p. 
Liatris heterophyUa,^. 

— pilosus 

— spicata 


BLUE. 

Aster foliosus 

— fragilis 

— paniciilatus 

— puniceus 

— — elatior 
PURPLE. 

Aster altissimus 

— junceus 

— mutabilis 

— nova; angliae 

— spurius 
Liatris elegans, t. 



6490. Projmgation of peren7iial herbaceous plants. All the modes of propagation, ex- 
cepting such as are applicable only to woody plants, may occasionally be adopted ; but 
the most general practice is by dividing the root, by suckers or offsets, and by seed ; the 
other modes are by cuttings of the stalks, shoots, or roots, and by layers. 

6491. By dividing the root. This mode is applicable to nine tenths of hardy herba- 
ceous plants. The plant may either be taken up, divided with the knife, and a portion 
replanted to continue the species in the spot allotted to it ; or, the earth may be partially- 
removed, and part of the roots and crown cut off to make new plants. The sections 
may, if well rooted, be planted at once where they are to remain and flower, or, what is 
preferable, they may be planted for one season in nursing-beds in the i-eserve-garden, 
and prevented from flowering that season by pinching off the flower-buds as they appear. 
The common season for performing the operation is spring, when the plant is beginning 
to push, or in summer or autumn immediately after it has flowered. The latter is ge- 
nerally the preferable period, unless the plant flowers very late, in which case the sections 
will not have sufficient time to form roots for their support during winter. 

6492. By suckers or offsets. This mode is also applicable to nine tenths of common 
herbaceous plants ; the best time for removing them is in spring, or early in summer, 
after the plant has begun to grow. Plant them in the nursing-department, and pinch off 
their flower-buds, that they may flower strongly next season when removed to their final 
destination. 

6493. By seed. This mode is applicable to all the single-flowering kinds, but is only 
adopted with a few species, which are otherwise difficultly multiplied. Collect the seed 
from the flowers which expanded first, as being generally the strongest. If it is ripe 
before August, it may be sown the same season, but if otherwise, it will be preferable to 
defer sowing till the following spring. Sow on beds of light earth, thinly covering ac- 
cording to the size of the seed, and prick out the plants once or twice according to their 
strength, size, or weakness, so as they may be fit to remove to their final destination in 
August or September. They will flower strongly the following year, and probably may 
show some new varieties. 

6494. By cuttings from the side-shoots or flower-stems. This mode is applicable to a 
number of the more delicate and double-flowering herbaceous plants, as to scarlet and 
pink lychnis, double rockets white and yellow, some hollyhocks, and a variety of others; 
but more to biennials and annuals than to perennials. The cuttings may be taken off" at 
any time when the shoots are tender and properly prepared, and planted in sandy loam 
in a warm situation, but shaded and covered with a hand-glass. Afterwards transplant 
them in the nursery-department, and again the same season where they are finally to re- 
main. They will blow freely the summer following. 

6495. By cuttings from the root-shoots. This is applicable to some sorts which do not 
multiply fast at the root, or whose rooted stolones or suckers do not make handsome 
plants ; as to some species of alyssum, statice, silene, &c. The early part of summer is, 
in general, the most fitting season for performing the operation ; plant in sandy loam 
under a hand-glass, and shade in the sunny part of the day ; then transplant in the nur- 
sery department for a few weeks, when the strongest plants will show themselves, and 
may be removed in September to their final destination. They will blow strongly next 
year. 

6496. By cuttings of jointed root-shoots or pipings. This is chiefly applicable to the di- 
anthus tribe, saponaria, the striped grass, or any other grasses or reedy plants. Proceed 
as in piping pinks or carnations (6412.) ; but no bottom heat will be required for the sorts 
that come under this section. 

6497. By cuttings from the roots. This is strictly applicable only to such plants as 
form buds on their roots, as to most of the rubiacea, to the mints, epilobiums, &C:, 
About midsummer is the earliest period at which the creeping roots are generally fit for 
this purpose ; but with some others, as gallium, osmunda, &c. it may be done in spring 



874 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Plant the cuttings in the shade, and afterwards transplant and treat them like cuttings 
from the flower-stalks or root-shoots. 

6498. By layers. Such plants as cannot easily be propagated by any of the foregoing 
modes may be increased by layers ; such as the carnation, some species of salvia, sibbal- 
dia, sibthorpia, some silenes, &c. Commence the operation when the plant begins to 
flower, and when the layers are rooted, treat them as directed for pipings. 

6499. General culture of Jibrous-rooted herbaceous Jloivers. Autumn, after the plant; 
has done flowering, or spring, when it has begun to grow, as has been already observed 
(6189.)? are the seasons for planting or transplanting. Tlie general culture is, stirring 
the soil ; renewing it according to the kind of plant (6188.) ; taking up overgrown plants, 
reducing them, and replanting (6190.) ; sticking, pruning, trimming, removing all use- 
less, decayed, injured, or diseased parts ; and supplying blanks. (6192.) The general 
management consists in attending to order and neatness. (6201.") 



SuBSECT. 2. Species and Varieties of bulbous-rooted Border- Flowers. 
6500. BULBOUS-ROOTED BORDER-FLOWERS. — MARCH. 



Height from Qlo'i of a ft. 



RED. 

Cyclamen coum,* p. 

WHITE. 
Leucojum rernum 
Erythr. dens can. fl. al.p. 
Fumaria bulbosa 

— cava 
Oalanthus nivalis, Feb. 

— flo. vileno 
YELLOW. 
Helleborus hyemal. Jan. 
Tulipa suaveolens, p. 

— flo. v'eno 
Crocus vemus 

BLUE. 



VARIEGATED. 



From 5 of a foot to l^foot 



RED. 

Hyacinthus orientalis 

WHITE. 
Scilla bifolia flo.albo. p. 



Helleborus hyemalis 
Narcissus pseudo narcis. 
Tulipa sylvestris - 



BLUE. 

Scilla bifolia, p. 
PURPLE. 



VARIEGATED. 

Allium chamae-moly 



From l^fuot to 2^ feet. 



RED. 
WHITE. 



VARIEGATED. 



Fro7n2^feet to 3^ feet. 



WHITE. 
Banguinaria canaden. p. 



BLUE. 
Bulbocodium vera. t. p. 



PURPLE. 

VARIEGATED. 
Fritillaria meleagris 
Iris persica 

GREEN. 
Omithogalum luteum 
Iris tuberosa 



RED. 

Hyacinth orient, fl.cam 



WHITE. 

Hyacinthus orient.fl.alb. 
Narcissus biflorus 
Sanguinaria canadens. p. 

YELLOW. 
Narcissus bicolor 
— — ■ major 



BLUE. 

Scilla nonscripta 

— amoena, p. 

— vema 
PURPLE. 

VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 

Ornithogalum nutans 
— umbellat. 



APRIL. 

RED. 



YELLOW. 

Ornithogalum stachy. 



PURPLE. 

Allium inodorum 
VARIEGATED. 



MAY. 



RED. 

Muscari botryoi. fl . caer. 

WHITE. 
Narcissus tenuifolius 

— triandirus 
Mascari botryoi. fl. alb. 
TrilUum grandiflorum 



YELLOW. 

Naicissos jonquilla 

— — pleno 

— bnlbocMium t 



RED, 
Liliuin bulbifer. ard. p. 

WHITE. 
Allium ursinum 
— romanus 
Narcisstis angustifolius 

— orientalis 

— — fl. pleno 

— poeticus 

— — fl. pleno 
YELLOW. 

Narcissus bulbocodium 

— compressus 
_ ineomparabil. 

— odorus 

— orientalis bio. 



— trilobus 



RED. 

Lilium concolor, t. p. 



yELLOW. 



RED. 
WHITE. 



BLUE. 
PURPLE. 

VARIEGATED. 



FromSifeet upwards. 



RED. 
WHITE. 



BLUE. 
PURPLE. 

VARIEGATED. 



PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Fritillaria latifoUa 

— imperialis 

— — flo. pleno 

— — major 
WHITE. 



YELLOW. 
Fritillaria lat. flo. lut, 

— — pleno 

— fol. vari^atis 



BLUE. 



PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 



RED. 
WHITE. 



RED. 
WHITE. 



YSLIiOW. 



Book II. 



BORDER-FLOWERS. 



87A 



BULBOUS-ROOTED BORDER-FLOWERS. — MAY — cow/mwerf. 



5 flfafl. From i of a foot to lifoot. FromMfooi io 2i/ee<, 



BLUE. 

Muscari botjToid. com. 

— — monstros. 

— — racemos. 
Scilla italica 



VARIEGATED. 
Anemo. coron. flo. pleno 

GREEN. 

tHuscari moschatum 

BROWN, 
rrillium cemuum, j). 
' — erectum 
sessile 



PURPLE. 

Fritillaria persica 

— racemosa 

— pyrenaica 
Allium angulosum 

VARIEGATED. 
Anemone coronaria 
Oxalis acetosella 
GREEN. 
Omithogalum striat. p. 
BROWN. 



Hyacinth, botryoid. caer. 
— flo. pallidojl. 



VARIEGATED. 

Tulipa gesneriana 



GREEN. 
BROWN. 

JUNE.- 



From'i^ feet ioZ>i feet. 



VARIEGATED. 

GREEN. 
BROWN. 



Frmn SJ/erf upwards. 



VARIEGATED. 

Allium carinatiim 



GREEN. 
BROWN. 



WHITE. 

Pcfiftaria cucuUaria, p. 
Amaryllis atamasco, t. 



YELLOW. 
Erith. den. can. fl. fla.p. 



BLUE. 

Scilla sibirica 



PURPLE. 

ici ascalonicum 
schoenoprasum 
Oxalis violacea, f . p. 

VARIEGATED. 
Ranunculus asiaticus 
GREEN. 



BROWN. 

Ophrys apifera 

muscifera 
Omithogalum uniflor. 



RED. 

Allium nutans 
Orchis conopsea 



WHITE. 

Allium sativum 

— senescens 
Leucojum sestivum 
Orchis bifolia 
Pancratium illyricum, p. 
Scilla lilio hyaci. fl. pie. 
. lil.hyacin.fl. alb. 
YELLOW. 



BLUE. 

Hyacinthus serotinus 
Iris xiphium 
Scilla lilio-hyacinthus 
— peruviana 
PURPLE. 
Allium roseum 
Orchis militaris 

- pyramidalis 
Oxalis violacea, p. 

VARIEGATED. 

Orchis maculata 
GREEN. 
Allium victorialis 
Ophrys ovata 

BROWN. 



RED. 

Allium descendens 
_ — sphierocephalon 
Gladiolus communis, p. 
Lilium pomponiiim 

— — flo. coccineo 
Gladiolus byzantinus, p. 

WHITE. 
Allium canadense 
Gladiol. byzant. flo. al.;>. 

— communis 
Omithogalum pyramid. 



YELLOW. 

Allium moly 
Lilium pompon, fl. lut. 
— bulbiferum, t. p. 
BLUE. 
Iris xyphioides 



VARIEGATED. 

Omithogalum pyrenaic. 
GREEN. 



-JULY. 



VARIEGATED. 
GREEN. 



VARIEGATED. 
GREEN. 



RED. 

WHITE. 

Allium tartaricum 
— tricoccum 
Omithogalum comos. p. 

YELLOW. 

Oxalis comiculata, p. 
— stricta 
PURPLE. 



VARIEQATED. 



V/HITE. 
Allium ampeloprasium 



YELLOW. 

Allium flavum 



PURPLE. 

Allium lineare 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Amaryllis belladonn. p. 

WHITE. 
Allium nigmm 
Pancratium maritim. p 



YELLOW. 

Allium obliquum 



PURPLE. 

Allium paniculatum 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Colchic. autumn, m. p. 

— flo. pleno 

— fol. varieg. 
Cyclamen europaeum, p. 

WHITE. 
Colchic. autum. fl. al. p. 
Cyclam. europ. fl. alb. p. 
Leucojum autumnale 



BLUE. 

Crocus autumnalis 

— sativus 

VARIEGATED. 
Colchi. autum. fl. var. p. 
ScUla autumnalis 



AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, 

RED. 



WHITE. 

Lilium candidum 

— — flo. pleno 

— — flo. variesat. 

— martag. flo. alb. 
YELLOW. 



PURPLE. 

Lilium martagon 
— — flo. pleno 

Allium scorodoprasum 
VARIEGATED. 

Lilium candid, fl. stria. 
— martag. fl. mac, 

OCTOBER.— 



YELLOW. 

Lilium tigrinum 

PURPLE. 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Cyclamen eturopaeum 



WHITE. 

Cyclamen europ. fl. al. p. 
Leucojum autumnale 

YELLOW. 

Lilium catesbsei, p. 

— uniflorum 
BLUE* 

Crocus autumnalis 

— sativus 



BLUE. 



YELLOW. 

Lilium canadense, p. 
— penduUflor. 

— — superbum 

— — pensylvanic. 

— ~ philadelphic- 



816 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6501. Propagation of bulbous-rooted Jlowers. By offsets or by seed ; the whole, with 
the exception of the cyclamen, and one or two others, are propagated by offsets, which 
are to be taken off when the plant is in a state of rest, which happens in most sorts after 
it has done flowering ; afterwards they are to be planted in a nursery-bed for one year, 
and where they are finally to remain the year following. Autumnal-flowering bulbs are not 
in a state of rest till the beginning of the following summer : as the colchicum, autumnal- 
flowering crocuses, amaryllis lutea, and a few others. These, therefore, are to be taken 
up when their leaves begin to decay early in summer, their offsets separated and planted 
in the nursery-department, and the parent bulbs replaced in a month or six weeks, in 
order that they may have time to establish themselves and flower before winter. 

6502. General culture and management. Bulbous-rooted flowers differ from others in 
requiring in their cultivated state to be frequently taken up and replanted. Fibrous- 
rooted plants vvhich grow much at the root, require this occasionally ; but almost all 
bulbs frequently. The reasons are, that in deeply comminuted rich ground, most sorts, 
but especially those which form their new bulbs beside the others, multiply so fast that the 
bulbs become crowded, small, and unfit to send up strong flowers ; that many sorts, as 
in narcissus, tulip, &c. which form their new bulbs under the old one, send down their 
bulbs at last so deep that they at first come up weakly, and afterwards cease to appear at 
all, as in the bulbous-rooted irises, colchicum, &c. ; and that some, on the contrary, 
which form their new bulbs over the old ones, send them up at last above the surface, as 
in crocus, gladiolus, &c. ; and are consequently killed by the frost or drought. Hence 
the finer bulbs of florists require to be taken up every year, and all the border-bulbs at 
least every three or four years. The time to do this is when the plant has flowered and 
the leaves have begun to decay. No bulb should be taken up for any purpose, or injured 
in its growth in any way while the leaves are green ; for it should ever be remembered 
by gardeners, that it is the leaves which bring the root to maturity and prepare it for 
flowering the following year. If these are injured or cut off, or if the plant is trans- 
planted, imless with such a ball as not to touch any of its fibres while in a growing state, 
the bulb will not recover so as to be able to flower for at least one year, and probably two 
or three. The time for keeping bulbs out of ground depends on their habits as to flower- 
ing. The object is to heal the wounds made by removing the offsets, and perhaps by 
setting the bulb more completely in a state of rest, to render it more excitable when 
planted. A month will in general be sufficient for this purpose, and more cannot be 
allowed with safety to the autumnal-flowering bulbs : more than three months is more 
likely to be injurious than useful to most sorts, though hyacinths, and other bulbs which 
form articles of general conunerce, are frequently kept out of the soil half the year : 
when planted so late, however, they seldom flower well the first season, and commonly 
not at all for a year or two afterwards. The taking up, drying, and replanting of border- 
bulbs must be attended to by the flower-gardener with equal regularity, though not 
with equal frequency as the finer, select, or florists' bulbs : the offsets may be planted in 
beds in the reserve-garden, if wanted for stock ; and the soil of the spot where the plants 
stood in the border renewed according to its kind, and the flowering-bulbs replaced. 
Some bulbs multiply so fast by throwing out offsets, that they soon cease to send up 
flower -stems. Of these may be mentioned the ornithogalum umbellatum, luteum, and 
some other species ; some species of scilla, muscari, iris, allium, oxalis, and others. 
These should either be annually taken up, their offsets removed, and the parent bulb 
replanted; or the offsets, as soon as they send up leaves, should be destroyed. Indeed, 
whenever strong-blowing bulbs is the principal object, the offsets should never be al- 
lowed to attain any size; but as soon as they indicate their existence by showing leaves 
above ground, they should be removed with a blunt stick, or in any way least injurious 
to the parent. By this practice a great accession of strength is given to the main plant, 
both for the display of blossom during the current season, and for invigorating the leaves 
to prepare and deposit nutriment in the bulb for the next year. In pursuance of the 
same objects, every flower should be pinched off as soon as it begins to decay, but the 
flower-stalk may remain till it begins to change color with the leaves. Some bulbs are 
greedily sought after by vermin : as the crocus and tulip by the mouse and water-rat ; 
the snowdrop and some of the narcissi by the snail and slug ; and the hyacinth by a 
particular sort of grub- worm. We know of no method of mitigating these evils but by 
catching the mice and rats, gathering the snails, and taking up, drying, and replanting 
in fresh soil, the roots attacked by worms or insects. The snail is perhaps the worst of 
these vermin, and, fortunately, it may be most effectually kept under, by scattering 
leaves of the brassica tribe (of any variety) over the ground, and picking from them, 
every morning, the snails which have fixed on them during the night. 

6503. Most bulbs force well ; to expedite this, retard the bulbs by keeping them in an 
ice-house till the autumn of the second summer ; put them in water-glasses or pots in 
September, and they will be in full blow by Christmas. 



Book II. 



BORDER-FLOWERS. 



877 



6504. 



SuBSECT. 3. Species and Varieties of Biennial Border-Flowers. 
BIENNIAL BORDER- FLOWERS. —MAY, JUNE. 



HeigntfromOto2ofaft.Fromiofafootto'l^foot.\ Frrnn 1^ foot to 2^ feet, j From 2^ feet to 3i feH. FrcrniS^feet itpmardi. 



RED. 

Thymus alpinus 
Hesperis tristis 
Thlapsi saxatile 



YELLOW. 

Alyssum sinuatura 



PURPLE. 

Alyssum deltoideum 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Agrost. coro. flo. pi. rub. 

— — flos. jovis 
Silene muscipula, p. 
CEnothera rosea 
Thymus grandiflorus 

WHITE. 
Cochlearea glastifolia 
Hespes. matr. flo. alb. pi. 
Thlapsi hirtum 
Trigonella platycarpos 

YELLOW, 
Alyssum clypeatum 
Linum strictum, p. 
Papaver nudicaule 
Ranunculus pennsylv. p. 
Scorzonera resedifijlia 
Tragopogon crocifolius 



PURPLE. 
Hesper. ma. flo. pur. pie. 

VARIEGATED. 

Cynoglossum cheirifol. t. 
Hyoscyamus niger 

GREEN. 
Delpliinium aconiti, t. 



RED. 
Thymus patavinus, <■ 

WHITE. 

Onopordum acaulon 
Teucrium montanumj 



YELLOW. 

Alyssum sinuatum 



RED. 

Hedysarum coronarium 
Antirrhinum ma. fl. pie. 



WHITE. 
Hedysar. coron. flo. albo 



YELLOW. 

Antirrhin. maj. flo. luteo 
Ligusticum peregrinum 
Ginothera smuata 
Scorzonera lasciniata 
Sorophularia trifoliata 

— vemalis 
Tragopof;on dalechampi 

— pratensis 
BLUE. 

Anchusa paniculata, p. 
Delphinium stajjhisagr.^. 

PURPLE. 
Centaurea puUata 
Scorphularia peregrina 
Silene bupleuroides, p. 
VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 
Euphorbia verrucosa 

JULY. — 

I RED. 

Cheiranthus incan. red 
iLeonorus sibiricus 

WHITE. , 



RED. 

Agrostemma coronaria 
Antirrhin. ma. flo. rubr. 



WHITE. 

Agrost. coron. flo. albo 
Antirrhin . maj . flo. albo 



YELLOW. 

Verbascum lyclmitis 



BLUE. 

Cynoglossum sylvaticum 



Antirrhinum majus 
Cynoglossum officinale 



VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 

Euphorbia lathyris 



YELLOW. 

ffinothera biennis 
Scabiosa tartarica 
Scorzonera hispanica 
Tragopogon villosus 
Verbascum phlomoides 



PURPLE. 

Tragopogon porrifolii 
Hesperis matronalis 
Limciria annua 

VARIEGATED. 



'Alyssum maritim, p. 
p. — — fol. var. 
Iberis linifolia, p. 
Teucrium campanulat.<. 

I YELLOW. YELLOW. 

Crepis foetida Cerinthe minor 

Gnaphalium lut. album Ligusticum scoticum 
Papaver nudicaule ffinothera mollissima 

Reseda undulata — noctuma 

Trigonella ruthenica 



BLUE. 

Antirrhinum bellidifol. 
Campanula siberica 
i Lobelia urens 
I PURPLE. 
Carlina vulgaris 
Digitalis minor 
I — thapsi 
iMarrubium alysson 



VARIEGATED. 
BROWN, 



iTrachelium caeruleum 
Trichostema brachia. p. 
I VARIEGATED. 
jDianthus armeria, p. 
I BROWN. 
Dianthus ferrugineus 



PURPLE. 

Verbena officinalis 
Conyza squarrosa 



VARIEGATED. 

BROWN. 

Monarda punctata, p. 

- AUGUST. - 



RED, 

Cheiranthus incanus 
Digitalis erubescens 

WHITE. 
Cheiranth. incan. white 
Reseda alba 
Verbena urticifolia, p. 



YELLOW. 

Digitalis ambigua 

— lutea 
Fumaria fungosa 
ffinothera grandiflora 
Verbascuni pulverulent. 

— sinuatum 

— thapsoides 
BLUE. 

Campanula cervicar. p. 

— rapunculus 

PURPLE. 

Centaurea salmonitica 

— splendens 
Cheiranth. incan. purple 



Twicken 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Fumaria spicata 

WHITE. 

Campan. med. flo. alb. 
Conium maculatum 
Digitalis purpur. fl. alb 
Dipsacus silvestris 
Verbasc. blattar. fl. all 

YELLOW. 
Isatis tinctoria 
ffinothera sinuata 
Pastinaca lucida 

Verbascum thapsus 



PURPLE. 

Anchusa italica 
Carduus marianus 
Digitalis pur])urea 
Onopordum arabicum 
— illyricum 
Verbascum blattaria 



VARIEGATED. 

Althsa sinensis pleno 

BROWN. 
Scabiosa atropurpurea 



RED. 

Gypsophilla muralis 



PURPLE. 
BROWN. 



YELLOW. 

Gnaphalium sylvaticum 
Scabiosa ucranica 



BLUE. 

Erigeron acre 

PURPLE. 
BROWN. 



RED. 

Leonurus tartaricus 
Sison segetum 



Salvia ceratophylla 



BLUE. 

Echium vulgare 

PURPLE. 
Carduus eriophorus 
BROWN. 



RED. 

Centaurea romana 



WHITE. 

Dipsacus laciniatus 
Sison amomum 



RED. 

Althaea rosea 

— — lake col. doub 

— — flesh col.doub. 
Echium creticum 

WHITE. 
Althaea ros. white doub. 
Echium italicum 
Gaura biennis 
Lavatera arborea 
YELLOW. 
Althaea ro. straw-col. do. 

— — jeUow 

— — orange doub. 

— ficifolia 
Crepis biennis 

BLUE. 
Michauxa C3mpan. t. p. 
Verbena bonar. t. Sept. 

PURPLE. 
I Verbascum virgatum 
I BROWN. 
Althaaa ros. brown, dou. 
i Digitalis ferruginea 



878 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6505. Proimgation and culture of biennial border-Jioivers, They are all raised from 
seed, but some of the finest double varieties are continued by cuttings. The seed 
of such sorts as ripen by August may be sown immediately after it is gathered ; but the 
seed of those sorts which ripen later should be preserved till the following spring, and 
sown in May or the beginning of June. Sow thinly in beds in the reserve-garden, 
transplant into other beds when the plants are a few inches high, and in September or 
October remove the plants to their final destination. If this be, as it most generally 
will in the mingled flower-border, to provide a succession of the same sorts, then it can 
only be done in the case of those sorts which are done flowering by September or the 
first of October, and the others must be removed early in March with balls. Great 
care is requisite in removing some sorts which have large tap-roots, as Oenothera, holly- 
hock, lavatera, &c., for if materially checked they will not flower strongly. The best 
mode is to nurse these sorts in large pots, and transplant them in October or February, 
with their balls entire. The sorts continued by cuttings are chiefly fine double varieties 
of wallflowers, stocks, rose-campions, &c. The cuttings may be taken from the flower- 
stalks, or the root-shoots, early in summer, put under hand-glasses, and otherwise 
treated as cuttings of perennials. If the cuttings of some sorts, as dalilia, chrysanthe- 
mum, lobelia, &c. are taken off early in the season, they will flower in the autumn. 
The plants once placed where they are to remain, their general culture and manage- 
ment is the same as for the perennial border-flowers. (6187.) 



SuBSECT. 4. Species and Varieties of Hardy Annual Border-Flowers. 
6506. HARDY ANNUAL BORDER-FLOWERS. — JUNE. 



RED. 

Cheiranthus maritimus 



WHITE. 

Biscutella coronopifolia 
Cheiranthus mari. fl. alb. 
Lychnis quadriedentata 
YELLOW. 



Height from Otoi of aft. 



From lof afoot io li/oo/. 



RED. 

Silene pendula, Jan. 



WHITE. 

Cucubalus italicus' 
SUene quinquevulnera 

YELLOW. 

Centaurea suaveolens 

BLUE. 
Cfleonia lusitanica 
Convolvulus slculus 

PURPLE. 
Crepis rubra 



From l^fuutto i^feet. 



YELLOW 
BLUE. 



JULY. 



From 2.i fiet^io 3J feet. 



RED. 

ICnautia orientalis 

eentaurea erupina 
onvolvulus sibiricus 
WHITE. 



YELLOW. 
BLUE. 



From 3J Jerf upwards. 



YELLOW. 
BLUE. 



RED. 

Dianthus prolifer, p. 



WHITE. 

Bellium bellidioides 



TELLOW. 

Afilhericumannuum, p 
Arctotis tristis, t. 

— anthemoides, t. 



RED. 

Chelidonium comicula. 
Geranium gruinum 
Silene conoida rub. 
Agrosterama coelirosa 
Antirrhinum viscosum 
Delphinium aja.peach, 
Hedysarum crista-galli 
Trifblium incarnatum 
Silene jEgyptiaca 

WHITE. 

Anthemis maritima 
Anthyllis cornicina 

— tetraphylla 
Antirrhinum chalepe. t. 

— macrocarpon, t. 
Artemisia pectinata 
Briza maxima 
Calendula hybrida, t. 
Campanula specul.fl.alb. 
Crucianella angustifolia 
Cucubalus viscosus 
Cynoglossum linifolium 

_ lusitanicum^ 
Delphinium ajacis, white 
Silene conoidea alb. 

YELLOW. I 

Alyssum campestre, p. 
Anthemis valentina 
Antirrhinum bipunctat. 

— orontium 

— speciosa flavum 

— versicolor, p. 
Arctotis anthemoides^ 
Astragalus trimestris 
Catananche lutea, t. 
Chlora perfoliata 
Coronilla securidaca 
Hippoorepis unisUiquosa 
R«seda odorata . 



RED. 

Adonis miniati 
Blitum capitatum 
Silene avmeria rub. 



WHITE. 

Crucianella latifolia 
Silene arraeria flo. alb. 
— behen 



I RED. RED. 

Echium orientalis Amaranthus caudatus 
Delphinium aja. peach <. iMalva mosehata 
1 Malva mam-itiana, p. I Amaranthus hypocondr. 
, — lividus 

Malva americana 
Lathyrus odorat fl .incar. 



WHITE. WHITE. 

Agrostemma nicaensis [Lathyrus articulatus 
Delphinium ajacis, white i — odoratus, fl . alb. 



YELLOW. 

Calendula arvensis 
Fumaria capnoides 
Impatiens noli tang. p. 
Lupinus luteus 

— — flo. pallido 
Scorpiurus muricata 

— subvillosa 

— vermiculata 
Calendula stellata 
Trifolium polonicum 



Echium violac. flo. alb. 
Lupinus albus 

— angustifoUus 

— varius , 



Crepis barb. flo. pallida. 
Calendula oflicin. fl. pi. 



YELLOW. 

Amaranthus flavus 

— hybridus 
Lathyrus annuus 
Momordica elaterium 



Book II. BORDER-FLOWERS. 879 

HARDY ANNUAL B ORDER- FLO WE RS. —JULY— conhnweJ. 



Height from to | of a ft. From g of a foot to l^faot. From foot to ^ feet. ' From 2i feet to 34 feet. From 3i feet vprvarJs 



PURPLE. 

Campanula erinus 



VARIEGATED. 



PURPLE. 

Antirrhinum hirtum 

— speciosum 

— triphyllum 
Calendula nudicaulis 

— pluvialis 

— perfoliata 

— speculum 
Chelidonium hybridum 
Delphinium ajacis dv/f.p. 

BLUE. 
Delphiniu. ajac. lead col. 
Antirrhinum pelisserla. 

— ^ spartium 
Delphin. ajacis, striped 
Linum hirsutum 

— usitatissimum 
VARIEGATED. 
Delphin. ajacis, striped 



GREEN. 

Chenopodium ambrosio. 

— aristatum 
Garidella nigellastrum,i, 
BROWN. 



PURPLE. 

Cerinthe aspera 
— major 



BLUE. 

Lupinus hirsutus 



VARIEGATED. 

Coronilla cretica. 
Papaver rhoeasflo. varie. 



BROW^N. 

Silene inaperta 



Crepis barbata 
Delphinium ajacis 

— — purple 



BLUE. 

Centaurea cyanus 
Delphin. ajacis, lead co. 
Echium violaceum 
TrifoUum coeruleum 



VARIEGATED. 
Centaurea cyan.fl. striata 
Convolvulus tricolor 
Delphin. ajacis Neapoli. 
GREEN. 



PURPLE. 

Lathyus odorat. fl. purp. 



VARIEGATED. 

Delphinium consolida 

— — flo. pleno 
Lathyrus odorat.fl.striat. 
GREEN. 



WHITE. 

Artemisia annua 



PURPLE. 

Cistus guttatus, t. 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. 

Cheiran. annu.lO wk.red 

— wall-leaved red 

— lOw.peach-col. 

— wall-lea. pe. 
Hedysarum caput galli 

WHITE. 
Aster annus 
Cheira. an. 10 we. white 
— wall-leaved 
Iberis amara 

— major 

— umbellata alba 
Nigella hispanica, t. 
OEnothera tetraptera 

YELLOW. 
Alyssum calycynum, p. 
Anthemis arabica, t. 
Astragulus contortuplic. 

— hamosus 

— uncatus 
Nigella orientalis, t. 
Scorzonera picroides 

— tingitana 
Medicago aculeato 

— circinnata 

— elegans 

— intertexta 

— muricata 

— minima 

— orbicularis 
w scutellata 

— tomata 

— turbinata 
Viola tricolor 

BLUE. 
Viola tricolor, mac. maj. 
— minor 



Nigella sativa 

PURPLE. 
Iberis umbellata, rubra 
CEnothera ptirpurea 
Cheir. an. 10 we. cop. co 

— purple 

— wall-leaved cop. 

— wall-leaved purp. 
Iberis umbellata,purpur. 

VARIEGATED. 



—AUGUST.- 

RED. 

Lotus tetragonolobus 
Salv. horm. coma rub. 



WHITE. 

Antirrhinum medium 
Draco, moldavicum, fl.a. 
Lathrus sativus, flo. albo. 



YELLOW. 

Lotus tetragon, fl. luteo 
Tropaeolum majus nana 



BLUE. 

Dracocephal. canescens 

— moldavicum 
Nigella damascena 
Salvia horm. com. pur. 

PURPLE. 



VARIEGATED. 

Silehe picta 

GREEN, 

Ambrosia artemisifolia 
Chenopodium botrys 
Nigella dameisc flo. pie. 



RED. 

Blitum virgatum ^ 
Echium creticum 
Lupin, pilosus, flo. roseo 



WHITE. 

Datura ferox .' 

— stramonium 
Scabiosa stellata 
Xeranth«mum annuu. 3. 



BLUE. 

Datura tatula 
Lathyrus sativus 
Lupinus pilosus 



VARIEGATED. 



GREEN. 

Ambrosia elatior 
Chenopodium scoparia 



RED. 

Papaver somn. dbl. red. 



YELLOW. 

rropaeolum majus, o. 
— , minus, o. 



PURPLE. 

Lathyrus tingitanus 
Papav. somnif. dbl. bl. 
— — dbl. pur. 



VARIEGATED. 
Papav. som.d fring.car 

dbl. blush carna 

GREEN. 

Ambrosia trifida 
Nicotiana rustica 



6507. Propagation and culture of hardy annual flowers. They are all raised from seed, though occa- 
sionally some fine varietiea of cheiranthus, viola, &c. are preserved by cuttings. The seed is generally 
sown in March or April, in patches or rings in the borders where the plants are to flower. The ground 
is previously stirred and made fine ; the patch is sown of a circular form of six or eight inches' diameter, 
or a row only is sown in the circumference of the circle, the seeds covered according to their size, and 
the plants, when they are an inch high, thinned out to one, three, five, seven, or more, according to 
their kind. This, and occasionally stirring the soil, with staking, &c. as in perennial flowers, is all the 
culture they require. Sometimes the whole, or many of the sorts, are sown in the reserve-garden, and 
transplanted where they are fimally to remain. This answers well for such sorts as the lupin, sunflower, 
and sweetpea ; but is rather precarious with such early flowering and short-lived sorts as annual stocks, 
candytuft, Venus's looking-glass, &c. 



S80 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6508. Seed may be saved eiiher from the top and first -expanded blossoms of plants in the borders, or 
from patches sown in the reserve-garden. For the sake of neatness and beauty, no more flowers on each 
plant ought to be allowed to ripen their seeds than are wanted for the supply ; but unless for varieties dif- 
ficult to procure from the seedsmen, the simplest, and indeed the most economical mode, is to procure 
supplies yearly from them. 
_6509. Some very pleasing conceits for arranging annual Jiomers are given by Swindon {Beauties of Flora, 
1778), a Brentford nurseryman. He gives a copious list of annuals, arranged according to their heights 
and colors ; and by affixing a number to each sort, he can readily indicate on his plans the kinds to be 
employed, and their relative position. Thus he has 89 sorts of common hardy annuals, arranged in six 
different classes, for six different ranges, in borders, as follow : — 



First range, rvhich grow from 8 io 12 or 14 inches high, 

1. Cape marigold ; purple and white. 

2. Large caterjiillar ; yellow, and singular pod. 

3. Venus's looking-glass ; light purple. 

4. Ram's horns ; yellow, the pod its beauty. 

5. Venus's navel-wort ; clear Arhite. 

6. Round snails ; yellow, and singular pod. 

7. Dwarf variegated lychnis ; crimson and white. 

8. Heart's ease ; purple aild yellow. 

9. Half moons, or moon-trefoil ; white, and singular pod. 

10. Blue meadow lychnis ; sky-blue. 

11. Dwarf virgin's stock ; purple. 

12. Small hedgehogs; yellow, and singular pod. 

13. Woodroof; light blue. 

14. Redhawkweed; pale red. 

15. Large hedgehogs ; yellow, and singular pod. 

Second range, rvhich grow from 12 to 18 or 20 inches high. 

16. Oak of Jerusalem ; yellowish, with fragrant smell. 

17. Small white candytuft ; clear white. 

18. Long-horned devil in a bush ; yellow, and singular pod. 

19. Convolvulus minor ; bright blue with yellow eye. 

20. Large purjile candytuft ; light purple. 

21. 'White lobels catchfly"; reddish-white. 

22. Annual snapdragon ; purple and yellow. 

23. Large white candytuft ; clear white. 

24. Scarlet, or wing peas ; dark and light red. 

25. Striped convoh-ulus minor ; blue and white. 

26. Red lobel's catchfly ; bright red. 

27. Dwarf nasturtium ; deep orange. 

2S. Broad Spanish nigella with brown seed; deep blue. 

29. Red flos adonis ; dark red. 

Third range, which grow from 20 to 24 or 28 inches high. 

30. Spanish nigella, with black seed ; light blue. 

31. Spanish hawtiveed ; pale-yellow, and pur])le eye. 

32. Blue Bloldavian balm ; deep blue, and fine scent. 

33. Annual rest-harrow ; pale red. 

34. Double Roman nigella ; white mixed with blue. 

35. Small running nasturtium ; dark oranee. 

36. Nettle-mcirjorcun ; yellowish, no smell but to the over- 

curious. 

57. Rocket-larksptir ; pink and white. 

38. Sweet-scented lupines ; bright yellow. 

39. \Vhite Moldavian balm ; fair white, and fragrant smell. 

40. Dutch lupines ; fine blue. 

41. Annual hare's ear; pale yellow. 

42. Purple jacobea ; purplish-red and yellow eye. 

43. Dutch ranunculus-marigold ; sulphur-color. 

44. Red-topped clary ; pale-red, and pink leaves. 



Fourth range, which grow from 2 to 2^ or 3 feet high. 
Belvidere ; yellowish, a handsome plant. 
Small variegated corn-poppy ; various, red and white, &c. 
Double upright larkspur ; blue, blush, &c. 



Cyanus minor ; blue, 



&c. 



Thorn-apple ; white, and singular pod. 
Prince's feather ; dark crimson. 
Crown-larkspur ; pale pink, spotted, &c. 
Honey scabious ; pale blue, and globular pod. 
Portugal lychnis ; pale red. 
Small blue lupines ; bright blue. 
Loves lies a-bleeding ; light red. 
Ranunculus-marigold ; deep orange. 
Honeywort ; dark purple, and singular shape- 
Strawberry -spinage ; bright-red &ut. 



Fifth 



which grow from 3 to ifeet high. 



Venetian small-flowered mallow ; purplish- white. 
Double crimson jagged -leaf poppy ; dark crimson. 
Tall narrow-leaf wallflower ; bright yellow. 
Arach ; deep crimson. 

Double striped carnation-poppy ; red jmd white. 

Blue sweet trefoil ; lead-color. 

Red lavatera ; light changeable red. 

Branching larkspur ; blue and white, &c. 

Tall white lupines ; clear white. 

Double black camation-poppy ; rose-color. 

& 27. Small Peruvian nasturtium ; djurk orange. 

Lord Anson's peas ; fine blue. . 

\\'hite lavatera; snow white. 

Dwarf double and quilled yellow smiflower ; deep vellow. 
Bladder ketniia ; pale-sulpliur and purple eye, with slngxilar 
pod. 

- Sijrih range, which grow from 5 to 7 or 10 fe t high. 
Tall double yellow sunflower, with black seed ; deep yel- 
Painted lady sweet-scented peas ; pale-red, and white. 
Arach ; sulphur-colored. 

Purple sweet-scented peas ; dark and light purple. 

Tall Indian arsmart ; bright crimson. 

Painted lady crown- peas ; black and white. 

Convolvulus major; fine purple. 

■WTiite crown-peas ; clear white. 

Large Indian nasturtium ; dark and light orange. 

Tall double brimstone sunflower; sulphur-colored. 

White sweet-scented peas; clear white. 

Plain tangier peas; fine crimson. 

Tall oriental mallow ; purple. 

Painted lady tangier peas; pale-red and white. 

Scarlet beans ; tine scarlet. 

Curled- leaf upright mallow; white tinged with purple. 



6510. In borders he sows in six rows, or rather at six different distances from the walk, according to 
the different ranges, thus : — 



74 75 



77 78 79 80 8f 



59 



60 61 



67 68 



70 



73 



45 46 47 46 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 



-Of 



6511. For a circular clump, or cojie of Jlowers, including all the 89 different sorts, 
he arranges the six heights in six concentric circles (Jig. 616.), placing a persicaria 

and oriental mallow in the centre. Tlie gene- 6 ^ 

ral appearance (Jig. 617.), he says, is " the same 
on every side, rising gradually from the edge up- 
wards, the highest plants meeting nearly in a point 
at the centre, and no two flowers of the same color 
or shape being seen together." (Beauties of Flora, 
&c. p. ii.) To those who have but a limited space 
and means, or who have few perennial flowers ; — 
to persons in remote situations in tlie country ; — to 
residents in the colonies ; and to female and infant 
gardeners, the above list and modes of arrangement 
aflfbrd a source of considerable show and amusement 
at a very small expense, — little trouble, and, being 
annuals, little loss of time. Swindon was in the 
habit of supplying masters of ships with packets of 
these seeds for all parts of the world.^ 



f 616 



Book II. 



FLOWERS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSES. 881 




SuBSEGT. 5, S])ecies and Varieties of Half-hardi/ Annual Border- Floivers. 



6512. HALF-HARDY ANNUAL BORDER- FLOWERS, FLOWERING 
IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER. 



H light from to i of aft. 


From 3 of a foot io Ufoot. 


From li foot to^fiel. 


From 9.^ feet to feet. [ FromZh feet upwards. 


RED. 

WHITE. 

Ciblus niloticus 

VELLOW. 

BLUE. 

^'^olana prostrata 

PURPLE. 

iVTonopsis scintillaris 
Ricotia ajgyptiaca 

VARIEGATED. 
GBEEN. 


RED. 

Dianthus sinensis 
Lopezia racemosa, p. 
Stevia pedita 
— serrata 

WHITE. 

Ricinus inermis, p. 
viridis 

YELLOW. 

Spilanthes acmella, p. 
Cacalia coccinea, p. 
Tagetes lucida 

BLUE. 
PURPLE. 

VARIEGATED. 
GREEN. 


RED. 

Aster sinensis, red 

— — bonnet 

— — red quill. 
Mirabilis jalajpa. flo. rub. 
Zinnia multiflora, rub. 

■ — revoluta 

— verticiUata 

WHITE. 

Aster sinensis, white 

— — quilled 
Mirabilis jalapa, flo.albo. 
Mirabilis longiflora 
Ricinus communis, p. 

YELLOW. 
Argemone mexicana, p. 
Bioens heterophylla 
Celsia orienfalis 
Fumaria vesicaria 
Gnaphalium fbetidum 

— undulatum 
Mirabilis jalapa lutea 
Tagetes tenuifolia 
Zinnia multiflora lutea 

— pauciflora 
Tagetes patula simp. 

— — flo. pleno. 

— nana, simp. 

— — - pleno 

BLUE, 

Aster sinensis, light blue 

— — quilled 
PURPLE. 

Aster sinensis chine, pur. 

— — purp. quilled 
Chrysanthemum tricolor 
Datura metel 

Zinnia violacea 

VARIEGATED. 
Aster sinensis, pur. stri. 

_ _ red — 
Mirabilis jala. flo. ru. st. 

— — flo. lut. stria. 
GREEN. 


RED. * 
Senecio elegans, fl. in. \A. 

WHITE. 

Senecio elegans, fl. al. pi. 

YELLOW. 

Galinsogea parviflora 

— triloba 
Tagetes erecta lutea 

— — flor. tereti 

— — auraiitia 

— — teret. aur. 
Carthamus tinctorius 

BLUE. 

PURPLE. 

Datura ceratocaulis 
Senecio elegans, purji. 

VARIEGATED, 

GREEN. 

Nicotiana paniculata 


RED. 

Polygonum orientale 
luomoea coccinea, j>. 
Nicotiana glutinosa 

— tabac. fol. ma. 
(Convolvulus pur. fl. car. 

WHITE. 

Convoh-ulus discolor 

— michauxii, pi. 
Chrysanthem. cor. H. al. 

— pet teret. al. 

TricKosanthes auguina 

YELLOW, 
Chrysanthem. coronari. 

— coron. pet. tereti. 
Cucumis colocynthis 

— dudaim 
— ■ flexuosus 

Helianthus annuus 

— — flo. pleno 

— — nanus 

— — florepallido 
Momordica balsamina 

— luffa 
Rudbeckia amplexifolia 
Tricosanthes cucumeri- 
Xeranthemum lucidum 
Ximensia encelioides 
Ipomoea phoenicea> p. 

BLUE. 
Atropa physaloides 
Convol. jmr. f). caer. pal. 

PURPLE. 
Convolvulus purpurea 

VARIEGATED. 

GREEN. 



(5513. Propagation and culture of half. hardy annual flowers. These are raised from seed, wliich is sown 
in March in a hot-bed ; and the plants, when an inch or two high, are transplanted into another bed of 
very moderate temperature. Here they may remain till the middle of May, or till all danger from frosty 
nights is over, and be then transplanted to where they are to flower in the borders, and treated in all 
respects as hardy annuals. 

6514. To save seed. In dry seasons, most sorts will ripen seeds, if permitted, but in wet seasons, unless 
the plants have been well forwarded in spring, and planted in a dry soil and warm situation, the seed will 
not be matured. In such cases, a hand-glass supported over the flower is of use ; or some may be re- 
moved with balls into large pots, and placed in an airy pit, frame, or green-house. In the northern and 
western counties, where the climate is cold and moist, half-hardy annuals never ripen their seeds in any 
year ; and supplies are therefore annually obtained from the London seedsmen. 



Sect. III. Floivers for 2}articular Purposes. 

G515. The particular purposes to which lowers are sometimes applied, may be either the concealment 
of local defects, or the production of local beauties. Among the former may be classed, covering naked 
walls, posts, parts of ruins, or other upright objects ; concealing horizontal defects, as naked sub-barren 
spots, unsightly banks, &c., producing vegetation under the shade and drip of trees : among the latter, 
ornamenting water with flowering plants ; ornamenting rocks, or assemblages of stones formed in imitation of 
rocks ; preserving a green appearance on beds or borders during winter ; forming edgings to beds or 
borders ; furnishing odors ; and presenting botanical, curious, and scientific assemblages, 

3 L 



882 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBSECT. 1. Floivers which reach from Jive to seven feet in height, for covering naked 
Walls, or other ujmght Deformities, and for shutting out distant Objects lohich it is de- 
sirable to exclude. 

6516. The flowers suited for covering upright deformities are the climbers and twining plants : the former 
to be supported by spray or trellis-work, or nailed in the manner of wall-trees, and the latter by rods. We 
shall select a few species of each from the plants already enumerated in the foregoing section, to which 
the botanist will easily be able to add others from the more extensive catalogues. 



Climbers, perennial. Astragalus galegi- 

formis. Clematis alplna, vioma, t. 

purpurea, Lathyrus latifolius, Vicia 

sylTatica, Bryonia dioica. 
Climbers, bieiimal. Vicia biennis, Fuma- 

ria spicata. 
Climhers, annual. Lathyrus, or sweetpea. 



9 sorts, Momordica elaterium, Tro- 

paeolum maius. 
Climbers, half-hardtf annuals. Cucumis 

colocynthis, dudaim, flexuosus. 
Tnrining ptanis, perennial. Convolvulus 

altha;oides,arvensis, Humulus lupulus, 

Tamus communis (10 feet high). 



Trvining plants, annuals. Convolvulus 
tricolor, Phaseolus multiflorus. 

Twining plants, half-hardy annuals. 
Convolvulus discolor, Micnauxii pur- 
purea^p. flo. cameo, p. flo. coer. pal- 
lideo. Ipomcea coccinea, & phoenicea. 



SuBSECT. 2. Flowers for concealing Defects on horizontal Surfaces : as naked sub-barren 
Spots, unsightly Banks, ^-c. 

6517. Tlieflomers suited for covering horizontal deformities are creepers and trailers, of which we shall 
here bring together the names of the most common sorts : — 



Creepers and trailers which are peren- | 
rtials. Aju^a reptans, r. flo. albo. An- 
themis nobilis, n. flo. pleno. Arenaria 
montana saxatilis, Asperula odora- 
ta, taurina, tinctoria, Cerastium latifo- 
lium, repens, Circaea alpbia, lutetiana, 
Fragaria indica, vesca fol. xai., v. 
monopbylla, Galium boreale, crucia- 
tum, rubioides, vemum, Geum rep- 



I tans, Gypsophila prostrata, repens, 
Hedysarum obscurum, Hieraciuni 
auraiitiacum, Lysimachia nummula- 
ria, Phaca australis, Polygala major, 
vulgaris, Potentilla astracanica, aurea, 
verna, Rubia cordifolia, tinctorum, 
Sagina procumbens, Saxifraga sar- 
mentosa, Tormentilla reptans, Tri- 
iblium repens maculatum 



Creepers and trailers, hardy annuals. 
Medicago "intertexta, orbicularis, scu- 
tellata, ]\Iomordica elaterium. Rese- 
da odorata, Tropaeolum majus, minus. 

Creepers arid trailers, half-hardy an- 
nuals. Cucumis, the three species 
enumerated as climbers, Monopsis 
scintillaris, conspicua, Nolana pros- 
trata. 



SuBSECT. 3. Floivers which xvill grow under the Shade and Drip of Trees.' 

6518. Flowers which ivill thrive under frees are of particular value. In improving neglected flower- 
gardens and pleasure-grounds, it is a common complaint that new things cannot be brought forward on 
account of the shade and drip of trees. This section, and the corresponding one of hardy shrubs, will, it 
is hoped, aid in removing that complaint, which can only have arisen from ignorance of the native ha- 
bitations of plants. It is proper to observe, however, that there is scarcely any, indeed we may say, no 
plant, that will thrive under a dense evergreen fir-tree clothed with branches down to near the surface : 
moss is all that can be there expected ; or, if somewhat open, the pyrola, box, and juniper will exist. 
Where trees are so dense, however, no plant or shrub can be desired under them. 



Perennials. Anemone nemorosa, n. flo. 
pJeno, pennsylvanica, ranunculoides. 
Arum maculatum, Asarum europae- 
um, Asperula laevi^ta, odorata. Atro- 
pa befladonna, Betonica officina- 
lis, Chrysosplenium altemifolium, op- 
positifolium, Circtea alpina, lute- 
ticma. Clematis recta, Convallaria 
multiflora, verticillala, Fragaria vesca, 
v. fol var. V. monophylla. Geranium 
sylvaticum, s. flo. pleno, Geum ur- 
banum. Heleborus virkiis, Hyj^eri- 
cum hirsutum, Imperatoria ostruthi- 
um, I^athyrus tuberosus, Lysimachia 



ciliata, \nlgaris, Mercurialis perennis, 
IVIonarda didyma, fistulosa. Origanum 
vulgare, Orobus angustifolius, lathy- 
roides tuberosus, niger, sylvaticus, 
vemus, primula acaiilis, veris, v. ela- 
tior, V. polyanthos. Ranunculus auri- 
comus. Salvia sylvestris, Sambucus 
ebulus, Saponaria officinalis, Saxifraga 
umbrosa, Scabiosa sylvatica. Spiraea 
aruncus, StcUaria gramiuea, nemo- 
rum, Teucrium Scorodonia, Vicia 
dumetorum, sylvatica, Viola canina. 
Didlis. ^Vllium lineare. Crocus vemus, 
Fritillaria imperialis, meleagris, Fu- 



maria bnlbosa, Galanthus nivalis, 
Helleborus hyemalis, Scilla non- 
scripta, Ophrys apifera, muscifera, 
ovata. Orchis bifolia, maculata, mili- 
taris, Oxalis acetosella, Sanguinaria 
canadensis. 

Biennials. Cynoglossum officinale, .syl- 
vaticum. Digitalis purpurea, p. flo. 
albo, Monarda punctata. 

Hardy annuals. Antirrhinum oronti- 
um, Bri^a maxima, Impatiens noli 
tangere. 



SuBSECT. 4. Floioersfor ornameyiting Pieces of Water, or j)lanting Aquariums. 

6519. Flowers for water or watering-places are of two kinds, aquatics, to plant in the water, and marsk 
plants, to plant round the margin of the poml, stream, or aquarium. The shape and size of the aquarium 
(,^..618.) must depend on the extent and stj-le of the flower-garden, of which it forms a part. In all 




cases the bottom, if not naturally retentive, must be rendered so by a stratum of tempered (or puddled) 
clay (a) ; the sides should be formed in terraces, or steps descending towards the centre (6), to hold pots 
of plants which grow in shallow water, while those that require deep water, as the bulrush, typha, &c. 
may be planted in the ground, or in large tubs placed in deep water. The margin of the aquarium may 
either be finished with;regular masonry or brick-work ; or what, in some situations, has a better effect, with 
rough stones, conglomerated vitrified bricks, or flints (c), in the interstices of which marsh plants will 
thrive exceedingly. The whole may be surrounded by a drain and gravel-walk {d), raised a few inches 
above the level of the water. Many of the aquatic plants, as nymphssa, nuphar, menyanthes, villarsia, 
butomus, and hottonia, &c. are highly beautiful; and, considering that some exotic species, asamaryllis, 
lobelia, crinum, &c. (6317.) will thrive in water in our climate, the aquarium ought not to be want- 
ing in any flower-garden. 

6520. Propagation and cultu7-e. They are propagated by seeds or dividing the root: the seeds being 
sown and placed under the water. In other respects they require the same general treatment as other 
herbaceous plants. Some useful remarks on the treatment of the more rare nymph«as and nuphars by 
Kent, will be found in the Horticultural Transactions, vol. iii. p. 24. 



Book II. FLOWERS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSES. 883 



6521. AQUATIC PLANTS WITH SHOWY FLOWERS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Equiactum fluviatile 


Equisctum paluitre 


JEIipi'ur:!-. vulgaris 


Hydropeltis purpurea 


Hjdrocotyle vulgaris 


liutoinui umbelUtus 


Polygonum ain])hibium 


Polygonum hydropiper 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. ' 


Nasturtium officinale 


Hydrocharis morrjus-rana 


Alisma damasonium 


Cerastium aquaticum 


Rauuaculus aquatilis 


l-'Uellandrium aquatlcum 


— natans 


Poa wjuatica 




— plantago 
Caila palustris 
Njmpha;a alba 

— odorata 
Poa fluitans 
Stratiotes aloides 




YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


ilanunculu3 aquatilLj hederac 




Iris pseudacorus 


Potamogetou natans i 




Villarsia iiyraphasoides 
K^uphar advena 

— lutea 
Utricularia minor 










BLUE. 


V^etonica beccabunga 


Myriophyllum spicatum 




Alisma ranunculoides 


— verticillatum. 
Pontederia cordata 
Verouica anagallls 




Lobelia dortmanna 


PURFLE 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Trapa natans 
Sagittaria sagitrfolia 


PURPLE,. 




GREEN. 

Potamogeton densum 


GREEN. 

Ceratophyllum demersum 
Cicuta virosa 




BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 




Potamogeton lucens 




Potamogeton perfoliatum 
Scirpus fluitans 




— pectinatum 








— lacustris 

— triqueter 



0522. Marsh plants. Some of the.se have been given as border-flowers, and will grow in almost any 
situation ; but others, as the acorus, comarum, littorella, &c. will not grow vigorously and flower unleag 
their roots are in soil constantly saturated with water. 

MARSH PLANTS WITH SHOWY FLOWERS. — MAY AND JUNE. 



Height ffm to 1 of aft. 


From'iofafuot to Ufoot. 


From lis foot io2is feet. 


From 2^ fed to 3ifeel. 


From 3i feet upwards. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


BED. 


RED. 

Scrophularia' aquatica 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Pinguicula lusitanica 


(Euanthe peucedan. p. 


CEnauthe fistulosa, p. 




ffinanthe crocata, p. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


Ranunculus ficaria 


Carex flava 






Senecio paludosus 




Ranunculus flamula 








— repens 








BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


Pinguicula vulgaris 










PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Comarum palustre, p. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Oarex disticha 

— pulicaris 

— precox 

— stricta 

— mtiricata 

— elongata 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Carex pseudo cyperus 

— Tulpina 
Cyperus longua 
Juncus compressus 


GREEN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


Carex dioica 


Carex caespitosa 
— dieitata 


Carex paludosa, p. 
— viparia 






i Sclioenus nigricans 


Juncus conglomerat. p. 








JULY AND AUGUST. 










RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Teucrium scordium 


Menyanthes trifoliata, p. 






Malva sylvestris 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE, 


WHITE. 


Littorella lacustris 


Galium palustre 




Rumex obtusifolius 


Dipsacus pilosus 
Selinum paluiitre 


Samolus valerandi, p. 


— uliginosum 






Sclioenus alba 


Pedicnlaiis palustris 








YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


Hypericum elodes, p. 


Hottonia palustris, p. 


Acorus calamus 


Cineraria palustris 


Sonchus palustris 


Rumex maritimus 


Mysotis palustris 
Rumex palustris 


Senecio aquaticus 




BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


Schoenus mariscus 




Phormium tenas, p. 






PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Pedicularis sylvatica 
Triglochin maritimum 
— palustre 


PURPLE. 

Aster tripolium, p. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEQATED. 


VARIEGATED, 


Scutellaria minor- 








Angelica sylvestris 


GREEN. - 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Juncus effusus 


GREEN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


Schoenus compressus 


Juncus squarrosus p. 


Scirpus maritimus 


Scirpus holosohoenus 


Rumex aquaticus 


Scirpus acicularis 


Schoenus nigricans 


Rumex crispus 




Cyperus longus, p. 


— caespitosus 


Scirpiis palustris 


Juncus sylvaticus 




Juncus acutus, p. 


— sylvaticu* 


3 L 2 




1 — maritimus 









884 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part HI- 



6523. Propagation and culture. The same as for herbaceous plants, taking into consideration the dif- 
ference in the soil and site. 



SuBSECT. 5. Flowers for ornamejiting Rocks, or Aggregations of Stones, Flints, Scorift? 
formed in imitation of Rocky Surfaces, ^c. 

6524. In strict propriety, mountain or rock plants only should be introduced on artificial rock- work ; 
but natural mountains and rocks are always moist and cool, and the plants which have their habitations 
there would not always thrive on dry ridges of earth and stones. On a small scale, therefore, choice is 
generally made of such plants as are not tall and rampant, and as grow naturally in a dry .soil. In the 
following list, as in the others, the most ornamental of them are distinguished by a letter (s), and those 
which flower the greater part of the summer by a figure (3), &c. 



Perennials. Achillea alpina 3, montana, 
Ajugo £ilpina, pyramidalis 3, Alche- 
milla alpina, pentaphylla, Alyssum 
montanum,murale,.saxatiIe,Anemone 
alpina, apennina, baldensis, Pulsatil- 
la 3, p. major 3, Anthemis montana, 
Anthyllis montana. Antirrhinum al- 
pinum, Aquilegia alpina, Arabis al- 
pina 5, bellidifolia 3, lucida 3, sibi- 
rica 3, Arenaria montana 3, saxatilis 3, 
Arnica montana 3, Artemisia rupes- 
tris, Astragalus alpinus, hypoglottis, 
montanus s, uralensis 3, Athamanta 
libanotis, Bartsia alpina 3, Betonica 
alojjecurus. Campanula carpatica 3, 
coUina 3, rapunculoides 3, rotundi- 
folia, saxatilis 3 s, Cardamine pe- 
traea 3, Centaurea montana,Cerastium 
dioicum, Cheiranthus helveticus 3, 
Cherleria sedoides, Chrysanthemum 
montanum, Cochlearia saxatilis, Cu- 
cubalus behen, Diauthus colHnus, 



hyssopifolius, plumarius, virginicus, 
Draba aizoides, ciliaris, stellata, Epi- 
lobium montanum, Epimedium alpi- 
nnm 3, Geranium pyrenaicum, Genm 
montanum, m. minor, Gnaphalium 
margaritaceum 3 Jledysarum saxatile, 
Hypericum montanum 3, IlUcebrura 
parortychia 3, Physalis alkekengi,Pim- 
pinellasaxifraga, Podalyria australis 3, 
Potentilla rupestris, Rubus articus 5, 
chamaemorus 3, rosaefoUus 3, saxati- 
lis 3, Saxifraga aizoides, nivalis, op- 
positifolia, pennsylvanica, petreea, ro- 
tundifolia, sarmentosa, Sedum for- 
sterianum, giaucum, hybridum, ru- 
pestre, sexangulare, villosum, Silene 
alpestris, rupestris, saxatilis, saxifraga, 
Telephium imperati, Teucrium mon- 
tanum, Thlaspi alpestre. Thymus 
Tulgaris, Tormentilla reptans, Trifo- 
lium. alpestre, montanum, repens ma- 
culatum, Valeriana montana, pyre- 



naica, Veronica montana, saxatilis, 
V'iola lutea, montana. 

Bulbs. Allium carinatura, Fritillaria 
pyrenaica, Omitho^him pyrensucum, 
Oxalis acetosella, violacea 3 *. 

Biennials. Alyssum deltoideum 3, Cam- 
panula cervicaria3, thyrsoidea 3, Car- 
duus marianus, Carlina vulgaris, 
(Cheiranthus cheiri, incanus, Cochle- 
aria glastifolia. Digitalis purpurea, p. 
flo. albOjEchium vulgare,Gnaphalium 
luteo album, Hedysarum coronarium, 
Marrubium alysson,Teucrium monta- 
num 3, Thiapsi saxatile, \'i.'rbena offi 
cinalis 

Hardy Annuals. Alyssum caiycinum 3, 
Antirrhinum chalepense i,Campanufa 
i>erfoliata. Geranium mi-schatum, 
rtlomordica elaterium. Reseda odor- 
ata, Scorzonera picroides, tingitana, 
Silene acteon, behen, Trifoilum po- 
lonicum, Viola tricolor. 



6525. The ground-plan and figure of the elevation of the rock-work must, as in the case of the aquarium, 
be made to harmonise with surrounding objects. Simple outlines and surfaces, not too much broken, 
show the plants to most advantage, and are not so liable to ridicule as imitations of hills or mount;*ins, or 
high narrow cones, or peaks of scorize in the Chinese manner, which are to be seen in some pUices, 
A ground-plan, in the form of a crescent, or of any wavy figure widest towards the middle part of its 
length, and with the surface not steeper than forty-five degrees <Jig. 619.) will be found well suiteu to the 




less durable materials, such as bricks, pudding-stone, scoriae, &c. which are found in flat countries. 
Sometimes one side of such rock-works may be nearly perpendicular, in which case, if facing the north, 
it affords an excellent situation for ferns and mosses. 

6526. In countries abounding ivith stone, massy and extensive pieces of rock-work may be formed, and 
shrubs introduced as well as plants, so as to produce a scene of considerable beauty and interest. Its 
base, and such parts as are near the eye, may be formed of masses of granite or bassalt ; selecting such 
for the shady side as are already covered with mosses and lichens, especially the lichen atra-flavus, geo- 
graphicus, ventosus, stellaris, &c. These vegetables will not grow on sandstone, and but seldom on 
limestone, therefore stones of these earths should be kept as much as possible in the more distant parts, 
where they will be partially covered witii shrubs and plants, rooted in proper soil, introduced in the 
crevices. When works of this kind are extensive, a winding walk or stair maybe led over them, and 
wells, or small reservoirs of water, introduced in some places for mountain bog-plants and aquatics, and 
for keeping the whole mass moist and cool. 



Sdbsect. 6. Evergreen-leaved Flowers, or each as are adapted for preserving an Appear- 
ance of Vegetation 07i Reds and Rorders during the Jf inter Months. 

6527. A due proportion of evergreen-leaved flowers is very necessary for enlivening borders in the winter 
time, and more especially in dug compartments on a surface of turf, which, without some evergreen plants, 
ook dreary by contrast with the verdant surface. 



Perennials. Achillea millefolium, m. 
flo. rubro, Alchemilla alpina, penta- 
phylla, vulgaris,v pubescens,Anthemis 
nobilis, n. flo. pleno, Bellis perennis, 
hortensis, h.variegata, h. alba, h. fis- 
tulosa, h. prolifera. Campanula pumi- 
la 3i,Dianthus barhatus, b. atro-ru- 
bens, hortensis,Gentiana acaulis 3,ver- 
na 3, Gnaphalium dioicum 3, Lych- 
nis floscuculi, f. flo. pi. f. flo. albo, 
viscaria, v. flo. pi. v. flo. albo, Melissa 
officinalis, Melittis melissophyllum 



Primula acaulis, auricula, veris, v. 
elatior, v. polyanthos, v. flo. pleno, 
Saxifraga caespitosa, cuneifolia, gera- 
noides, geum, hypnoides, mutata, 
nivalis, oppositifoUa, petrsea, umbrosa, 
Silene acaulis 3, Statice armeria, a. 
flo. albo, Stipa pennata, Teucrium 
chamsedrys, montanum. Thymus 
montanus 3s, serpyllum 3s. citri odor^, 
vulgaris, zygis s. Veronica hybrida, 
Viola grandiflora 3, g. flo. liitco 3, 
g. flo. maculata 3, odorata coer. 5,o.flo. 



pleno coer. 3, o. flo. albo 3, 



. p'.eno 



Bulbs. Amaryllis lutea, Allium cana- 
dense, Lilium candidum, Tulipa 
gesneriana, Helleborus hyemalis. 

Biennials. Agrostemma coronaria, c. 
flo. albo, c. flo. pi. rub. Anchusa 
itaUca, paniculata 3, Dianthus arme- 
ria 3, ferrugineus 3, monspeliacus 3 s. 
Hesperis m'atronalis, Ibens linifolia 3, 
Lavateraarborea, Silene viscosa. 



Book II. 



FLOWERS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSES. 



SuBSECT. 7. Flowers for Edgings to Beds or Borders 

6528. The principal plants for edgings, next to the dwarf-box, are the statice armeria, bellis perennis, 
g«ntiana acaulis, saxifraga umbrosa, oppositifolia, hypnoides, festuca ovina, and other low-growing 
evergreens; but all the following sorts may be used in extensive concerns requiring edgings of flowers. 
The common and other heaths make very beautiful edgings in parterres of peat soil. 



Perennials. Achillea millefolium, m. 
flo. rubro, Alchemilla alpina, penta- 
phylla vulgaris, v. pubescens Anthemis 
nobilis, n. flo. pleno, Bellis perennis, 
hortensis, h. variegata, h. alba, h. fis- 
tulosa, h. prolifera. Campanula pumi- 
laSi, Diantlius barbat.,b atro-rubens, 
hortensis, Festuca glauca, Gentiana 
acaulis 3, vema 3, Gnaphaliuni dioi- 
cum 3, Lychnis flos cuculi, f. flo. pleno, 
f. flo. albo, viscaria, v. flo. pleno, v. flo. 
albo, Melissa oflficinalis, Melittis me- 



lissophyllum, Primula acaulis, auricula, 
veris, v. elatior, v. polyanthos, v. flo. 
pleno, Saxifraga caespitosa, cuneifolia, 
geranoides, geum, hypnoides, mutata, 
nivalis, oppositifolia, petrtea, um- 
brosa, Silene acaulis 3, Statice arraeria, 
a. flo. albo, Stipa pennata, Teucri- 
um, chamaedrys montanum, Thymus 
montanus 5s, ser])yllum 3 s. citri odor6, 
vulgaris, zygis s, Veronica hybrida, 
Viola grandiflora 3, g. flo. luteo 3, g. flo. 
maculato 3, odorata cccr. 3, o. flo. ple- 



no coer. 3, o. flo. albo 3, o. flo. pleno 
albo .3, o. flo. pi. purji. 3. 
iwmals. Briza maxima. Calendula of- 
ficinalis, o. flo. jileno, Cheirantlius an- 
nuus rub maritimus, m.tlo. alb., Del- 
phinium ajacis, Diantlius, prolifer, 5, 
Iberisamara, a. major, umbellata alba, 
u. purpurea, u. rubra. Reseda odorata, 
Silene armeria rub. a. flo. alb. rubella, 
Viola tricolor, t. mac. major, t. mac. 



SuBSECT. 8. Highly odoriferous Flowers. 

6529. Flowers with sweet smells are no less desirable than those with fine forms or colors. So little has 
hitherto been done in the nomenclature and classification of vegetable odors, whether fixed or volatile, 
that we can hardly submit any thing satisfactory on the subject. No small part, however, of the pleasure 
derived from flowers depends on tlieir odors ; and that these are very diflerent, every one must have re- 
marked who has walked in a wood or a garden after a warm shower, or in a dewy summer's evening. 
Perhaps the best mode to arrange the odors of plants in our present imperfect state of knowledge on the 
subject, would be to fix on some generally known smells, as those of the rose, lily, thyme, &c. and 
group the others under these in the way of natural orders ; and thus we should have rosodores, liliodorea?, 
thymodoreae, &c ; but in default of some such, or any system, we shall here bring together a few names 
under commonly received distinctions. 



The entire plant aromatic. Agrimonia 
eupatoria, Hyssopus officinalis. Salvia, 
numerous species. Thymus vulgaris, 
Acorus calamus. 

The Jlorver mellijimus. Symphytum 
officinale, orientale, tuberosum. Iris 
persica, Lilium candidum, Hottonia 
palustris, Cerinthe minor 

The Jlorver aromatic and mellijiuoiis. 
Balsamita vulgaris, Artemisia abro- 
tanum 

Liliaceous smells. Convallaria majalis, 
Viola odorata, Hyacinthus orientalis. 
Narcissus, various species, B^seda 
odorata 



Sweet aromatic smells. Melissa offici- 
nalis, Monarda didyma. Origanum 
basilicum. Thymus citri odor^, Cheir- 
antlius cheiri, Calendula officinalis 

T/ie Jlorver smelling like hay. Asperula 
odorata, taoj-ina, Gallium boreale, 
Stellaria graminea, Tussilago fra- 
grans, Anthoxanthum verrum, Helio- 
tropium indicum 

Anise smelts. Primula veris, elatior, 
acaulis, Scandix odorata, Anethum 
graveolens, Angelica archangelica 

Sternutatory smells. Achillea ptarmi- 
ca, vulgaris, Dictamnus albus 

Soporific smells. Humulus lupulus. 



Atropa belladonna, Nicotiana Ta- 
bacuni 

Night-smelling Jlorvers. Hesperis ma- 
tronalis, ffinothera fruticosa, pumila, 
Cheiranthus cheiri, anntius, I ropneo- 
lum niajns, R;eseda odorata 

Volatile smells which perfume the s'jr- 
rounding atmosphere- Lilium candi. 
dum, Cheiranthus cheiri, Hesperis ma- 
tronalis. Reseda odorata 

Stinks. Astrantia major, Cimicifuga 
foetida. Ferula asafoetida, Heleborus 
fatidus. Allium, various species, Scro- 
phularia aquatica, Anthemis cotula. 



SuBSECT. 9. Other selections of Floivers. 

6530. Other selections will readily occur to the florist who is conversant with the ample store of plants at 
his command ; such as double flowers, flowers that continue in bloom the greater part of the year, flowers 
for peat soils, &c. all which he may select from the indications in the tables already given. He may also 
select, according to the Linnsan or natural orders, by referring to the tables (588. and 589.) in which the 
genera are so arranged ; or according to the native habitation, native country, year of introduction, or 
rarity, which circumstances he wiU find noted in the excellent catalogues of Sweet and Page. 



SuBSECT. 10. Botanical and other Assemblages of Plants. — Dial-Plants, Pao'asites, Ferns 
and Mosses, Alpines, and a selection for a small garden. 

6531. Botanical collections, as well as cabinets of shells and minerals, have been in vogue by the curious 
since Solomon's time. In many private families there is a taste for scientific botany ; in which case all 
the hardy plants of the vegetable kingdom, as far as they are introduced into this country, are arranged 
in their order according to some system ; and either in narrow beds, in which one species follo\ys another ; 
or in groups, on lawn or gravel, in which the species most nearly allied according to the system adopted, 
are placed together, each group containing an order (^^-.553.), and all the orders of a class forming a 
constellation of groups, connected at one point with the preceding order, and at another with that which 
follows. Sometimes a different arrangement is adopted, and all the plants that can be considered as orna- 
mental are assembled in beds or borders, and all those that are merely curious, as the ferns, mosses, fungi, 
&c., or useful in agriculture or the arts, as the grasses, garden-plants, plants used in dyeing, tanning, &c. 
are arranged in beds or groups in compartments by themselves. This is iii general the most suitable mode 
for a private garden. "With respect to the species to be introduced in these groups, the gardener will have 
recourse to the tables already referred to, in which, in the Jussieuean table (589,), under Gramines, - 
peraceae, Juncea, Rostiacese, he will find all the grasses ; under Filices, all the ferns ; under Lycopodinte, 
li.e plant-mosses ; under Equisetaceas, the equisetums, &c. The economical plants he will find undei- 
general heads in our view of the distribution of the British Flora (973.), and the species he will find enu- 
merated, and classed, in our Encyclopcedia- of Agriculture. 

6532. Dial-plants. Among curious collections, it may sometimes be desired to assemble the dial-plants, 
or SI ch as indicate the hours of the day. An ample list of these has been given by Linnteus, in the Phi- 
losofkica Botanica ; but the following, being plants generally known and easily procured, may be deemed 
sutt.cient to complete a botanist's dial in Britain : — 



Opens in the Shuts from 



Tragopogon lu-^eum 
I/eon todon serotinum 
Picris echioides 
Crepis alpina 
Cichorium intvlirs 
Papaver nudiciule 
Hemerocallls f'lilva 
Sonchus lievis 

alpinus 

Convolvulus arvensis 
I.apsana comniiiiiis 
Lcontodon taraxi.cum 





3 




9 


10 




4 


b 


VZ 


1 




4 




12 







4 


5 


12 







4 


5 


8 


9 




5 





7 







5 





7 


8 









11 


12 









12 









6 


4 








6 


10 









6 


8 


9 



Hypochseris maculata 
Nymphaea alba 
Lactuca sativa 
Tagetes erecta 
Anagallis arvensis 
Hieracium pilosella - 
Dianthus prolifer 
Calendula arvensis 
Arenaria purpurea 
Portulaca hortensis - 
]\I:ilva carolinraiia 
i-itellai-ia media 





Opens 


in the 


Shuts from 




morning. 


noon to night. 




Hou. Min. 


Hou. Mil;. 




6 


7 


4 




7 





.0 rt 




7 





10 




7 





3 4 




7 


8 


2 5 




8 





2 




8 





1 




9 





3 




9 


10 


2 




9 


10 


11 12 




9 


U) 


12 1 




9 


10 


9 10 



S L 3 



886 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Tart III. 



6533. In botanical collections, some peculiarities of culture may be required for parasites, ferns, mosses, 
fungi, and marine vegetables. The only hardy herbaceous j5«m«7e is tne cuscuta, or dodder, a twining 
plant found in hedges, and on hops, furze, thistles, and many weeds, with thread-like reddish stems, a 
few small membranaceous scales, and balls of white or purplish flowers, which appear in July and Au- 
gust. They propagate themselves by seed, which germinates in the soil, and at first draws its nourish- 
ment from thence ; but the original root withers away as soon as the young stem has twined round any 
other plant. Tn cultivating the cuscuta, it is easy to imitate nature by sowing the seeds at the root of a 
thistle or whin. 

6534. Jn raising ferns" and mosses from seed, these being very small, should be sown on the surface of 
peat-earth, ground to the finest powder: the seed need not be covered, but the pots should be placed 
in the shade, or in a vault ; and a moist close atmosphere produced by covering with a bell-glass, rendered 
semi-opaque by a wash of mud. When they come up, they may be transplanted into pots of the smallest 
size, and placed in situations formed in imitation of their natural sites. The more hardy ferns and 
mosses, and also some of the fungi, will come up very well, if the entire plants, covered with ripe seed, 
are strewed over a bed or border of peat-soil, completely shaded from the sun. The parent vegetables in 
rotting will afford shelter and congenial nourishment to their infant offspring. 

6535. Seeds of the fungi, hepaticce, algcB, and Uchenes, may be sown in pots of fine earth, like the 
mosses ; but.many require to be sown on pieces of decaying bark or wood, or on stones or pieces of lime, 
or on walls, &c. Portions of these, or of whatever substances are requisite, should be procured and neatly 
fitted to pots of six or eight inches' diameter ; the seed should be sown immediately when gathered, one 
sort in a pot, and the pots set in a vault ; some kept damp and close by means of other pots whelmed over 
them; and others allowed more air, according to their natures. If it is wished to multiply specimens, 
it may be done after they come up, by dividing the masses on which they grow. 

6536. The culture of hardy marine productio7is, or submersed alg^e, may be attempted by forming a 
cistern or basin of salt-water with shelves or terraces within, in the manner of the common aquarium. 
(Jig, 618.) Tlieir pots or receptacles, in the form of rough cones or square blocks, may be formed from 
ba^lt or compact limestone, and a specimen of the sea-weed, in which the seeds are supposed to be ripe, 
attached to each receptacle ; or some of the receptacles may be placed in the sea near the fuci, which it is 
desired to introduce to the marine aquarium ; and when the young fuci appear, the stones may be re- 
moved to the cistern, and placed on a higher or lower terrace, according to the depth of water supposed 
to be requisite. It has not been proved, that the motion and alternate immersion and exposure to air 
produced by the tides is essential to the growth of marine vegetables ; but if it is, these circiimstances can 
be imitated by pumping the marine aquarium dry once a-day into a cistern above its level, and then al- 
lowing the water to return gradually ; ^or the same thing might be effected without the labor of pumping, 
by two moderate-sized cisterns fixed like scales on the ends of a moving beam, for weights, &c. The 
lichenes of fresh-water are of easy cultivation. 

6537. Alpines. A very general assemblage of plants is formed by gardeners under the title of alpines. 
These ought properly to consist only of such plants as grow on high mountains ; but the gardener r.dds to 
them all very dwarf small plants that are diflicult to preserve in a state of cultivation. Sonic of these, in- 
stead of being alpine, are arenarious, sea-side, or bog plants. Alpine plants are universally very low, 
bushy, and evergreen In their native sites, they are covered by snow great part of the year, and conse- 
quently never experience either violent cold, violent heat, or intense light. The atmosphere which sur- 
rounds them is of light or thin air, almost always highly charged with vapor, and the soil in which they 
grow is generally soft, black, and peat-like, forming a thin stratum on rock, or filling up the chinks of 
rocks or stones, and always moist. Art imitates these circumstances, by putting such plants in small 
pots of peat or bog-earth, well drained by gravel, or scarcely drained at all, or mixed with stones, or with 
sand, according to the habitation to be imitated. Tlie pots are kept, during winter, under glass in 
frames, in a situation exposed only to the morning sun ; and in summer they are removed to a full 
northern exposure, or screens placed so as to produce this effect in their winter situation. Care is taken 
to water three or four times a-day during summer, and to keep the ground around the pots constantly 
moist; and in winter to protect by mats, in addition to the glass, when the cold is likely to be greater 
than 25° or 30°. Perhaps an improvement in the management of alpine plants would be to set the pots, 
in the summer season, on a grating or frame of cast-iron, placed a few inches' distance above a cistern or 
pond of water, by which means a constant evaporation would take place, and a moist cool atmosphere 
be produced. In winter they might remain in the same situation, protected by frames ; or they might be 
removed to their usual site ; or the potsmiglitbe arranged- in beds, and a pipe, finely pierced with holes, 
in Loddige's manner, might pass along the centre of each bed, at such a distance above it as that tlie 
shower would just cover the bed. A shower might thus be applied at pleasure, and the plants kept moist 
by prolonged and gentle rains, instead of being deluged by sudden and heavy rains from the watering-pot. 
"Whatever plan be adopted, it is essential that the site be open to tlie morning sun only during winter, and 
to only one or two hours' sun during summer, and that it should not be shaded by trees. Professor 
Thouin arranged a bank for alpine plants in the Paris garden, and has given an account of it, accompanied 
by some very judicious reasoning, in the Annalesde Musee, (see a translation in Hart. Trans, vol. i. App.) ; 
but experience shows, that plants of this description never thrive long on bods or banks of any kind ; 
those planted by Professor Thouin never did much good, and in the course of two years, as we were in- 
formed on the spot, many of them died off, and the rest became too luxuriant for the situation. Potting 
is by far the best mode, as each individual plant may then be examined at the root as well as the top, and 
its soil or situation changed at pleasure. From the rarity of this class of plants, the difiiculty of keeping 
them, their vivid green, neat shapes, small size, and many of them flowering early in spring, they are 
much prized, and collections made in most flower-gardens of note ; we shall, therefore, give a list of the 
leading species of alpines, most of which will be found in a former table (6489.), as plants for the front 
row of the border : — 



Perenmals. Achillea alpina 3, Aoo- 
nitum pjrenaicum, Adoxa moscha- 
tellina 3, Aiuga alpina, genevensis,Al- 
chemilla alpina, Alyssum alpestre. 
Anemone alpina, apennina, baldensis. 
Antirrhinum triomithophonim 3, A- 
quilegia alpina, Arabis alpina 3, bel- 
lidifolia 3, lucida 5, sibirica 3, Aretia 
alpina 3, helvetica 3, -vitaliana 3, Arnica 
bellidiastrum 3, mont&na 3, scor- 
pioides 3, Astragalus alpfnus, Bellium 
bellidioides 3 s, Cacalia alpina, Cam.- 
panula alpina 3, carpatica 5, Cerastium 
alpmum, Cheiranthus alpinus 3, hel. 
veticus 3, Cherleria sedoides, Chryso- 
plenium altemifolium, oppositifolium, 
Cistus tuberaria- 3 s, Cnicus spinosis- 
simus 3, Convolvulus soldanella; s, Cor- 
tusa mathioli s, Cotyledon lutea, umbi- 
13cus, Crepis rigida^ sibirica, Cypve- 
pedium acaule 3i album 3, calceo- 
fus 3,c.fol. glabris 3, canadense 3, Dian- 
tius alpinus, ^laucus,. Draba aizoldes. 



ciKaris, stellata, Dryas octopetala 3, i 
Erigeron alpinum, Krinus alinnus 
Frankenia hirsuta, Isevis, Gentiana 
adscendens 3 s, ciliata 3 s, pneu- 
monanthe 3, punctata 3, purpurea 3, 
saponaria 3, septemfida 3, vema 3, 
Glaux maritima, Gnaphalium al- 
pinum 3, Gundelia toumefortii 3 s, 
Gunneraperpensa s, Hypochoeris hel- 
vetica, Hypoxis erecta i 3, Isopyrum 
thalictroides s, lychnis flos-cuculi, 
quadridentata 3, vespertina, Moerhin- 

f a muscosa, Orontium japonicum 3 s,. 
anax quinquefolium 3 s, Pamassia 
palustiis, Peganum harmala s, Pentho- 
rum sedoides, Phlox pilosa 3, setacea 
3 s, subulata 3 s, Priinula cortusoides 3, 
farinosa 3, helvetica 3, integrifolia 3, 
longifolia 3, marginata, nivalis, Ra- 
niuiculus alpestris, glacialis, parnassi- 
folius, Rubus arcticus 3, cham.iemo- 
rus 3, rosEEfoIius 3, saxatilis, 3, San- 
sevicracamea 3 f, Saxifrags. aizoides. 



I aizoon, androsacea, autumnalis, crcsia, 
ccespitosa, cemua, cordifolia, cotyle- 
don, crassifolia, cuneifolia, geranoides, 
geum, granulata, g. flo. jilcno, mos- 
chata nivalis, palraata, rivularis, stel- 
laris, viscosa, Sedum, aizoon, album, 
dEisj'phyllum, difficiens forsterianum, 
glaucum, hybridum, quadrifidum, sex- 
angulaie, villosum, virens, Semper- 
vivum arachnoideum 3, cuspidatum 3, 
globiferum 3, hirtum 3, sediforme 3, 
teetorum 3, Sibbaldia procumbens .3, 
Sibthorpia europaea 3, Silene acaulis 
3, vallesia, Sisyrinchum bermudiana 
3 s, Thlaspi alj)estre, Tiarella cordi- 
folia 3, trifolia 5, Veileriana tuberosa, 
Veronica alpina, aphylla, Veronica 
pinnata, Viola cenesia 3, pedata 3 s. 
Bidlis. Bulbocodium vernum 3 Cy- 
clamen coum 3, euro)r!Eum 3, e. fio- 
albo, Ixia bulbocodium 5 s, Ophrj-s 
aj)ifera, muscifera, ovata, Orchis bife- 
lia, conopsia, niaculata, militaris^pyra^ 



Book II. 



CATALOGUE OF HARDY TREES. 



887 



intdalis, Scllla amoena 3, autumiia- > 
lis 3, bifolia 5, b. flo. albo 3, campa- I 
nulata5, italica 3, lilio-hyacinthus, 1. 
flo. pleno, lusitanica 3 s, proecox ."5, 
sibirica 1>, vema. [This is a must beau- 
tiful trihe of Utile earhj it ue-Jlowering 
jMnts, tlcscrviiif,' a place in every Jlower- 
ptrden.] Triliium eriHHiiin 5. 
Bieniiiats. Campanula sibirica, virgata, 
JJelphinium aconiti, l)iantI\u.s arineria, 
inonsi)eliacus. Digitalis lutea, Gna- | 



phalium luteo album, sylvaticum, 
Gypsopliila muralis, Limim striatum, 
Monarda rosea, Phyteuma comosa. 
Ranunculus pennsylvanicus, Scabiosa 
columbaria, uranica, Scorzonera re- 
sedifolia, Teucrium campanulatum, 
Thlapsi hirtum, saxatile. Thymus al- 
pinus, grandiflorus, jiatavinus, Tra- 
gopogon crucitblius, Trichostemabra 
chiata, Trigonella platycarpos. 
Hani}/ annuals. Arctotis anthemoides s, 



tristis s, Artemisia annua, pcctinata. 

Bellis annua, Uellium bellidioides, 
minutum, Biscutella coronopifolia. 
Campanula erinus, hybrida, Cneiran- 
thus maritimus, m. flo. albo, Cis- 
tus guttatus s, Claytonia perfoliata, 
33, Dianthus prolifer 3, Geranium 
gruinuin s. Lychnis laeta, quadriden- 
tata, Silene acteon, rubella, Viola trf. 
color, viol. tri. mac. major, v. trl. mac. 
minor. 



6538. A collection of flowers for a small garden. Having given a selection of the most rare plants, and 
such as in a state of cultivation are the most difficult to preserve ; we shall conclude with a list of flowers, 
the most cointnon, hardy, and showy, which flower great part of the year, will thrive in almost any soil 
and situation, and which are recommended as fit for the commonest description of flower-borders, shrub- 
beries, or parterres. 



Flowering Jrom February to May^ 



Red. Hepatica triloba. Anemone horten- 
sis, Alyssumdeltoideura. Bellis peren- 
Jiis. Erinus alpinus. Erythronium 
dens canis. Fritillavla I'mperialis, me- 
ieagris. Fiimavia solida. Hyaciritluis 
orientalis. Orobus vermis. Phlox subu- 
iata, setacea. Primula vultjaris, villosa, 
longitlora, farinosa. 

Blue. Hepatica trilob. Anemo. Pulsatilla, 
apennina. Cynoglossum omphaloides. 



Crocus vernus. Muscarl botryoides 
comosum. Iris pumila. Primula auri- 
cula. Pulmonaria officinalis, virginica. 
Scilla prsecox, bifblia, verna. Viola. 
Yellow. Adonis vernalis. Alyssum sax- 
atile, minimum. Crocus vemis, sul- 
phureus, susianus. Erythronium a- 
mericanum. Fritillavia imperialis.. 
Heileboriis hyemalis. Narcissus angus 
tissimuK, minor, bulbocodium, trian- 



drus, jonquilla, pseudo-narcissus, bi- 
color, tazetta. ri inmla vcris. 
WJiitc. Anemone n n ^ i, hepatica. 
Arabis alpinii. . i,. t'arda- 

mine prateiisi-. . i ; »y- 
thronuiin den:, i mj.. ' ' J.ii.thus u'i- 
valis. llelleliurus ni^er. Jjccucojuni 
\ernum. Primula nivalis, vulgaris. 
Ranunculus amplfxicaulis-. S^mgiii- 
naria canadensis. Tiarella cordilolia. 



Flowering from May to August. 



Red. Antinrhinism majus. Astrantia ma- 
jor, minor. Aquilegia vulgaris, cana- 
densis. Anemone hortensis. Bellis pro- 
lifera. Cistus helianthemum. Cheiran- 
thus cheiri, annuus, incanus. Chelone 
barbata, obliqua. Dianthus barbatus, 
superbus, ooasius. Dictamnus alb.rub. 
Dodecatheon meadia. Epilobium an- 
gustissimum. Fumaria formosa. Ge- 
ranium macrorhizum, sylvaticum, 
sanguineum, Lancastriense. Gladiolus 
communis. Ivis versicolor. Lathyrus 
latifolius. Lilium chalcedonicum. 
Lychnis visearia, flos-cuculi, chalce- 
donica. Lythrum salicaria, virgatum. 
Monarda didyraa. Orobus varius. Or- 
ohls muscula. Papaver orientale. Pre- 
onia officinalis, tenuifolia. Phlox gla- 
Ijerrima, stolonifera, ovata, amoena, 
intermedia, pilosa, macvilata. Rud- 
beckia purpurea. Scilla nutans. 
Tuljpa gesneriana, suaveolens suav. 
flo. pleno. Thalictrum aquilegifoli- 



um. Valeriana rubra. Veronica car- 
nea. 

BliK. Anemone hortensis. Aster alpi- 
nus. Aconitum napellus. Campanula 
persicifolia, pumila, carpatica. Ca- 
tananche coerulea. Cheiranthus inca- 
nus, annuus. Centaurea cyanus. Del- 
phinium grandiflorum, elatum, azu- 
remn. Gentiana saponaria, septemfi- 
da, asclepiadea, acaulis. Geranium pa- 
lustre. Hemerocdllis coerulea. Iriscris- 
tata, sambucina, germanica, xiphium 
xiphioides. Linum perenne, pumila. 
Lupinus perennis, polemnonium coeru- 
leum. Phyteuma orbicularis. Scilla 
campanulata, nutans. Sophora austra- 
lis. Veronica prostrata, chamaedrys, 
incana, spicata, gentianoides. Vinca 
major. 

Yellom. Allium moly. Antirrhinum 
spartium. Caltha palustris. Cheiran- 
thus cheiri. Cistus helianthemum. 
Coreopsis tenuifolia, aurea, verticillata. 



Hemerocallis flava, fulva. lilium 
canadense, bulbifrrum, tigi-inum. 
ffinothera pumilia, fruticosa. Papaver 
cambricum. Tulipa sylvestris, ges- 
neriana. Trollius europaeus, asiaticus. 
Viola tricolor, grandiflora, lutea. 
White. Antii-rhinum, majus. Anthericum 
liliago, liliastn\ni. Act!ca racemosa. 
Anemone dichotoma. Bellis peren- 
nis. Campanulapersicifolia, pumilum. 
Cheiranthus incanus, annuus. Conval- 
laria polygonatum. Dictamnus albus 
Hesperis matronalis. Iris xiphioides. 
Lilium candidum. Nai-cissus poeticus. 
Ornithogalum pyvamidale. Phlox sua- 
veolens. Pancratium maritimum. Po- 
lygonum viviparum. Ranunculus acQ- 
nitifolius. Saxifraga granulata. Scilla 
campanulata, nutans. Stipa pennata. 
Spirea arimcus, filipendula, ulmaria, 
Irifoliata. Thalictrum aquilegifolium. 
Tulipa gesneriana. Veronica spicat^, 
pinnata. Vinc.\ minor. 



Chap. IX. 

Catalogue of Hardy Trees, with showy Flowers. 

6539. All trees may be considered as ornamental by adding to the beauty of land- 
scape; but we mean here to confine ourselves to such as are ornamental, by the con- 
spicuousness of their flow^ers. These are not numei'ous ; they are all of the deciduous 
kind, and their time of inflorescence is limited to two or three months. The principal 
are the horse-chestnut, acacia, the fruit-trees in their wild state, some species of mes- 
pilus, sorbus, cytisus, robinia, &c. ; these, with some others, we have arranged accord- 
ing to their height and time of flowering, in order to admit of a selection for the back 
rows of the shrubbery. None of the few evergreen trees which we possess, have showy 
flowers, but we have added the names of these, with their heights, to facilitate a selec- 
tion for mixing with the deciduous sorts in the mingled or grouped shrubbery. We 
have omitted all those showy flowering and evergreen trees which do not usually attain 
the height of twenty feet, deeming it more suitable for our purpose to include them 
among the shrubs of that size. All the useful and curious species of trees will be found 
in Page's Prodromus, with their heights, time of flowering, soil, mode of propagation, 
and other circumstances. In the Arboricultural Catalogue (Part III. Book III. 
Chap. VIII.}, the most useful timber-trees are described, and the shapes of trees, and 
their colors, and characteristic expressions, are treated of both under Arboricultural and 
Landscape Gardening. (See Part III. Book III. Chap. II. Book IV. Chap. II.) 
Much less attention has of late been paid to the introduction of new sorts of trees 
into this country, than to the intrpduction of fruits and flowers. The French and 
Germans seem to excel us in this respect. A considerable number of new sorts of 

3 L 4 



888 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



ornamental trees have lately been added to the British Arboretum, by Messrs. Loddiges, 
and specimens of them are conspicuously arranged in the Hackney nursery, to show 
their forms and characters. 



6540. 



Sect. I. Deciduous Trees with shou'i/ Floivers. 
DECIDUOUS TREES. — MARCH AND APRIL. 



HeiglUJrom 20ft. to 28/;. 



RED. 

Pyrus angustifolia, j. 
espilus oxycant, pr. 4. 
WHITK. 
Prunus cerasus, 

— domesticaj s. 

— nigra, s. 
Pynis coronaria, *. 

communis, 

-T fl.plen.4, 
— fo.var. i, 
YELLOW. 
Salisburia adiantifolia 



GREEN. 
Taxus baccifera 



BROWN. 

Populus candicans 

— heterophylla 

— pendufla 

— trifida 



From 28 feet to o6feet. 



WHITE. 
Prunus padus, s. 

— — rubra, *. 

— pennsylvanica, 4, 
Salix aniygdalina, «. 

— caprea 

— triandra 

YELLOW. 



Pinus lam microcarpa 

— — pendula 
Populus lasvigata 
— nigra; 



From 36 Jed to 44 feet. 



YELLOW. 
UUnus americana 

— — alba 

— — pendula 

— campestrissativa 
GREEN. 

Quercus robur fruc. sesi. 

— rubra 

— — montana 

— tinctoria 
BROWN. 

Populus graeca 
Ulraus montana 

— nemoralis 

— suberosa 



From 44 feet to 52 feet. 



WHITE. 

Prunus avium, 3. 



BROWN. 

Populus alba 

— balsamifera 

— tremula 



From 52 feet tijrrrii </». 



GREEN. 
)uercus robur 



EROWN. 

Populus dilatata 



RED. 

Acer tartaricum 
Cercis siliquastrura 
Mespilus coccinea, 

— oxyacantha rosea, *. 

— — fol. var. i. 
Pyrus speetabilis, 

— prunifolia, ». 

— salicifolia^ 3. J 

WHITE. 
Acer campestre 
fol. arg. 
Celtis ocidentaUs 
Cercis siliquastr. fl. al. «. 
Mespilus acerifolia, 

— apiifolia, s. 

— azarolus, s. 

— cordifolia, s. 

— crus galli, s. 

— — pyracant,*. 

— — salicifolia, », 

— — eliptica 

— — fissa 

— — grossularf. 

— — nybrida 

— — incisa 

— — nigra 

— oxycantha 

— — aurea 

— — pleno 

— tanacetifoli' 
YELLOW. 

Acer montanum 
dasycarpum 
hybridum 
lobatum 
negunda 
pennsylvanicum 
MespUus flana, 
Carpinus americana 

— betulus 
Fraxinus americana 



rubra 



quercifolia 



oblongata 
— eliptica 



WHITE. 

Betula daurica 
Juglans alba 

— angustifolia 

— cinerea 

— compressa 

— 'Vg^=>„ . 

— ohTxJtomiis 



YELLOW. 

Cupressus disticha 
Fagus sjlvatica for. aiu:. 
_ — arg. 



— cuprea 
Fraxi. excelsior simplici. 
_ stricta 



MAY. 

RED. 



WHITE. 

Celtis australis 
^sculus hippocastan. j. 

— — fol. aur. J. 

— — — arg. a. 



BROWN. 

Populus monolifera 



YELLOW. 

Quercus alba 

aquatica 

— attenuata 

— heterophyl 

— indivisa 

— longifolia 
Candida 



EROWN. 

Populus angulata 



WHITE. 

Pyrus torminalis 
Juglans regia 

— — major 
Platanus orientalis 
cuniata 



YELLOW. 

Acer opulus 
Quercus exoniensis 

— — latifolius 

— — tumeri 

— coccinea 
-.- _ — montana 



BROWN. 
Pinus larix 



WHITE. 

Betula excelsa 
Platanus occidentalis 
— — acerifol. 



YELLOW. 

Fagus sylvatica 
Fraxinus excelsior 

— — altissima 

— — pendula 



GREEN. 

Quercus palustris 



prmus 
latifoUa 
longifoli; 



Book II. ORNAMENTAL SHRUBS. 889 



DECIDUOUS TREES.— JUNE. 



Height from 20 to 28 feet. 


From 2% feet to feet. 


Frmn 36 feet to 44 feet. 


From 44 feet to O'ZJeet. 


From yijiet uim iirdt. 


^^^* 


RED. 


7" 






LEsculus pavia 




Ac<^r saccharinum 






— — rosea 










WHITE. 


WHITE. 


.WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Mespilus odoratissima, i. 


Magnolia tripetala, a. 


Pyru3 hybrida, s. 


Castanea vesca 


Prunus domeatica, a. 


IVIatjnolia cordifolia, s. 


Prunus serotina, s. 








Castanea vesca, fol. aur. 


I'yrus aucuparia, t. 








— — — arg. 


Morus alba 








— — heteroph. 


— nigra 








— — fol. lucidis 








Diospyrus lotus 




















YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW, 


YELLOW. 


/Esciilus flava 


Cytissus laburnum, s. 




Acer platanoides 




Catalpa syringsefolia, p. 






— pseudoplatanus 






— pseudoplat. fol. arg. 










— — — aur. 








BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE, 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


Acer rubrum 










GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


Magnolia acuminata, 






Tilia europsea, *. 








— Carolina 




BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 


BROWN. 










Betula nigra 






TTTT.Y 
















RED. 


RED 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 




Gleditschia triacanthos 










Robinia viscosa 








WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 










Liriodendron tulipifera 










— integrifolia 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


Civmnocladus canadensis 


Tilia alba 








Allathus glandulosa 


— americana 








Betula populifolia 









Sect. II. Evergreen Trees. 
6541. EVERGREEN TREES. 

All of these flower in March, April, and May. 



Heightfrom 20 ft. to 28 ft. 


From 28 feet to 56 feci. 


From 36 /erf to 44 feet. 


Fnnn 44 feet to 52 feet. 


Fro>n 52 Jed iV uprranls. 


Cupressus sempervirens 
Pinus abies alba 

— cenibra 

— lanceolata 

— palustris 

— pumila 
Quercus gramuntia 

— suber 


Pinus taeda 

— picea 

— abies ni^ 

— canadensis 

— cedrus 
Juniperus virginiana, p. 
Pnmus caroliniana 


Pinus pinea 

— variabilis 

— sylvest. marit. 

— pungens 
Quercus esculus 

— phellos 

— — virens 


Pinus abies 

— in'ops 

— resinosa 

— balsaroea 


Pinus pinaster 

— rigida 

_ sy"lvestris 

— strebtts 



Propagation and culture. See Arboriculture. Most of the trees enumerated in both the foregoing 
sections are highly ornamental as single objects on a lawn ; and form curious chamber plants whca 
dwarfed and potted in the Chinese manner. {Hort. Trans, iv. 289.) 



Chap. X. 

Ornamental Shrubs. 

6542. The ornamental shrubs are a much more numerous tribe than the trees : we 
shall first notice the more select sorts, as the rose, rhododendron, althaea, &c. and after- 
Avards, in succession, the deciduous kinds, evergreens, creepers, and sorts for particular 
purposes. 

Sect. I. Select SJiruls. 

6543. The term select shrubs we apply to such shrubs as have been much cultivated, 
and of which numerous varieties are recognised as beautiful. 

SuBSECT. 1 . Rose. — Rosa, L. Icos. Polyg. L. and Rosaceee, J. Rosier, Fr. ; 
Rosenstock, Ger. ; and Rosajo, Ital. 

6544. The rose is known by every body at first sight, and has been a favorite flower 
from time immemorial among the civilised nations of Europe and Asia. The shrub 
varies in size in different species, from one foot to six or eight, and the colors are red, 
white, yellow, purple, black, striped ; simple, or in almost numberless shades and mix- 
tures ; and single, semi-double, and double. It is cultivated in every garden, from that 



890 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III, 



of the most humble cottager upwards; some species, as jR. centifolia damascena, &c. are 
also cultivated by commercial gardeners on a large scale for distilling rose-water, and for 
making attar, or essential oil of roses. Six pounds of rose-leaves will impregnate by dis- 
tillation a gallon of water strongly with their odor ; but a hundred pounds afford 
scarcely half an ounce of attar. The rose is also used in medicine. Botanists are not 
agreed as to the number of original species of this genus, some regard all the European 
species as originated from one source ; others, and especially the moderns, divide them 
into species, subspecies, and varieties. The most scientific work which has appeared 
on the roses in England, is the Rosarum Monographia of Lindley, 1819, in which 
above a hundred species or subspecies are described, and some of them figured ; and 
Miss Laurence lias publislied ninety plates of A Collection of Roses from Nature, 
1810. In France, Guillemeau has published Histoire Naturelle de la Rose, 1800; 
and Redoute and Thory are engaged in a splendid work, in folio, entitled Les Roses, 
containing plates of all the known species and varieties of this flower. Thory has pub- 
lished a separate tract on their cultu re, entitled Prodrome de In ]\£onogrciphie du Genre 
Rosier, See. 1820; Pronville, a Nomenclature Raisonnee, in 1818; and Vibert, Ob- 
servations, &c. in 1820. A copious and intelligent account of the Scotch roses has been 
lately given by Sabine [Hort. Trans, iv. 231.), and some hundreds of new varieties have 
flowered from seedling plants, in the nursery of Lee, and will soon be found in his sale- 
catalogues. 

6545. Species and varieties. The lists of the London and Taris nurserymen contain upwards of 500 
names: that of Calvert and Co., Englishmen, wlio have cstablis^hed a nursery at Bonne Nouvelle near 
Rouen, enumerates near sorts. The greater part of these have been raised from seed on the continent, 
where it rijiens l)etter than in this country, witliin tlic last thirty years. A number of varieties have also 
been raisecl in Eritain, especially of the It. spiiios/ssima, or Scotch rose, of which above 300 varieties 
are procurable in tlic ( i I is-(v,v nursery. New varieties are raised in France and Italy annually ; Villaresi, 
royal gardener at Mmuzi, has raised upwards of il/ty varieties of liosa itul/ai ; not one of which have, as 
far as we know, r. M lied liiis country. Some of them are quite black, otlu rs shaped like a ranunculus, 
and many of them lii^'hly odoriferous. The followin^j; table contains nearly loO species and varieties of sin- 
gle roses, of longest staiiditig:, arranged according to th.eir time of fiowcrin.'<, heights, and colors ; and of 
the greater number of wliich there are double and semi-doublo varieties of the same colors. The names 
are chiefly taken from Page's Proilrovius, and the plants are known by them in the Hammersmith nursery. 
Ample lists, as already observed, may be had from all the principal nurserymen, and the best mode of 
making a selection is to view the plants while in flower. 



6546. ROSES. — MAY. 



Heifrhtfrmn to 1 Jbof. 


From Ifoot to 'ifcet. 


Frmn '2 feet lo 3fcrt. 


From 5 feet to Hfiet. 


From b fid to & feet. 


RED. 

WHITE. 

PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 


RED. 

Rosa spinosissima rub.;). 
— ))r:ecox 

WHITE. 
Rosa spinosissima alb. p. 

PURPLE. 
Rosa sjiinosiss. niarm. ji. 

VARIEGATED. 
Rosa spinosiss. pannic. ji. 


RED. 

WHITE. 

PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 

JUNE. 


RED. 

Rosa pimpinellifulia 

WHITE. 

PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 


RED. 

WHITE. 

PURPLE. 
VARIEGATED. 


RED. 

flosa ])umila 

WHITE. 

'lasa pilosa, ;>. 

— jiyrenaica 

— roxlnir{;hii, p. 

— siliirica 
YELLOW. 

.losa prostrata, p. 


RED. 

Rosa alpina rubra 

— procera 

— provincialis 

WHITE. 
Rosa alpina 

YELLOW. 


RED. 

Rosa centifolia 

— rubiginosa coccinea 
damascena 

— rubiginosa apiifolia 

WHITE. 

YELLOW. 

Rosa lutea 

— — bicolor 

JULY. 


RED. 

ilosa caucasica 

— ferox 

— pendulina 

— cinnanionia 

— rul)iginosa 

WHITE. 
Rosa alba 

— muscosa 

— tenerift'ensis 

YELLOW. 


RED. 

Rosa olympica 
— villosa 

WHITE. 
YELLOW. 


RED. 

WHITE. 
VELLOW. 

PURPLE. 


RED. 

Rosa bland.spinis rubr.p. 

— indica resplendens 

— diversaeflora, p. 

— indica saUcifi)lia,p- 

WHITE. 
R.osa lucida 

YELLOW. 

PURPLE. 

Rosa minuta, d. 


RED. 

Rosa blanda, p. 

WHITE. 
YELLOW. 

PURPLE. 
Ross minuta, d. 
A TTnTTST" 


RED. 

Rosa turbinata 

— lyonii,;). 

— rubifolia, p. 

WHITE. 

Rosa kamschatica ' 

YELLOW. 
Rosa americana lutea, p. 

— — stricta 

— caroHncana 

PURPLE. 


RED. 

Rosa indica, p. 

WHITE. 
YELLOW. 

PURPLE. 


YELLOW. 1 RED. 1 RED. | RED. | WHITE. 

Rota liractM'a, )>. ' Rosa pennsyl^nica, p. 1 1 ' Rosa nioschata 



Book II. 



ROSE. 



891 



6547. Propagation. By seed for new varieties, and chiefly by layers for continuing approved sorts. 
They are also multiplied by budding, cuttings, and suckers. 

6548. Bu seed. Ripe hips containing the seeds are obtained from semi-double and single flowers, and to 
increase the chance of new varieties, these should be taken from plants that have been planted among, or 
near to the sorts of which a cross is desired. We are not aware that Knight's mode of extracting the 
stamina from the one parent, and dusting the stigma with the anthers of the other, has been applied to 
the rose, but there can be no doubt it might be done in many instances. In France and Italy, the usual 
mode is to form a plantation of double and semi-double sorts mixed indiscriminately, and take the result 
of promiscuous impregnation. Guillemeau has given lists of such as are adopted for this purjoose : and 
Villaresi raised most of his beautiful varieties of the Rosa indica, by planting them among as many va- 
rieties of the European roses as he could procure. Austin, nurseryman at Glasgow, and Lee of Ham- 
mersmith, mix all the sorts of Scotch roses together in the same plantation. The other mode may be 
compared to cross-breeding at random ; and this to random-in and in-breeding. 

6549. Process. Few of the hips are ripe before October, but most sorts that come to maturity in this 
country, will be fit to gather by November. The seeds of the rose require to be one year in the soil before 
they vegetate ; they may either be immediately rubbed or washed out, and preserved among sand or cin- 
der-dust : or the hips entire may be so preserved a full year, when the husks will be perfectly rotten, and 
the seed being separated and sown in February, wiU com.e up in the May or June following. The best 
place to lay up the hips is the floor of a cellar, such as that used for storing roots ; but in whatever way 
they are preserved, care must be taken that they are not laid together in such masses as to produce fer- 
mentation ; and that the heap be turned over frequently in course of the twelve months, to promote 
decay. The seeds should be sown in a soft moist soil, such as that composed of equal parts of sand and 
vegetable mould, in a shady situation ; it may be covered from a fourth to half an inch, according to the 
size of the seeds, and the surface should be kept moist by watering in the evenings, till the plants have 
come up and attained a few inches in height. Early in the second spring, they may be transplanted in 
rows a foot apart every way, and a year afterwards again transplanted to a distance more or less, accord- 
ing to the sorts. Here they are to remain till they flov/er, Avhich varies in different sorts, from the third 
to the fifth j'ear, but most commonly they flower the fourth summer. 

6550. By layers. The common mode is to lay down the young shoots of the preceding summer late in 
autumn, or early in the succeeding spring, and then, with the exception of the moss-rose, and one or two 
others, they form rooted plants by the next autumn. But it is new found, that if the same shopts are 
laid down when the plant is beginning to flower in July, they will, with a few exceptions, produce roots 
and be fit to remove the same autumn, by which a whole year is gained. Such sorts as do not root in one 
year must be left on the stools till the second autumn ; but layers made when the shoots are in a growing 
state, and furnished v/ith healthy leaves, root much mors freely than shoots of ripe wood. After the 
plants are removed from the stools, they are planted in nursery rows, and in a year, the blossom-buds 
having been carefully pinched off from the first laying down, they will be fit for removal to their final 
destination. The stools are then to be pruned, and the soil stirred and enriched on the general principles 
already laid down. (2004.) 

6551. By suckers and dividing the roots. Many of the commoner sorts admit of being rapidly multiplied 
in this way ; and the plants obtained may be planted in their final destiniation at once. 

6552. By cuttings. Most of the sorts miglit, no doubt, be propagated from cuttings of the young wood ; 
cut at a joint Where it is beginning to ripen, and planted in sand and vegetable mould under a hand-glass. 
But this mode is only adopted with such sorts as strike easily, as the E. indica, and other eastern species. 

J 6553. By budding. This mode of propagating roses is adopted chiefly with the rare sorts, and such as 
are difficult to proi>agate by layers ; for it is found, that plants so originated, even though on stocks of 
the hardier sorts, are less durable than such as are raised by any of the other modes. But the chief use of 
budding in the culture of the rose is to produce standard roses, or to produce several sorts from the same 
stock. Standard roses are a modern invention, it is generally supposed of the Dutch, first carried to 
Paris, and about twenty years ago to England. They are highly artificial objects, of great beauty, and 
form magnificent ornaments to parterres and borders. The stocks are either of the tree-rose {E. villosa, 
W.), or of any sorts cf woody wild roses, as R. scabriuscula, heterophylla, or surculosa, Sm. They are 
budded at different heights from three to seven feet, but commonly between five and six feet from the 
groimd. A stock in the Paris garden, which carries several sorts, has a naked stem of nearly fifteen feet, 
and there are others at Malmaison and the Grand Trianon, of equal height. These stocks are, both in 
France and England, procured from woods and copses, and after being planted in nursery lines, are often 
budded the same summer, sometimes in spring by the scalopemode of budding (2059.), rceil poussant of the 
French ; and never later than the succeeding spring or summer by the common mode, Voeil dormant, Fr. 
Generally two buds are inserted on opposite sides of the stock, but often three or four, or a dozen, in 
alternate positions on the upper six, or twelve inches of the stem. Every stock is supported by a rod, 
which should reach a foot or eighteen inches higher than the situation of the bud ; to this rod the stock 
is tied, and afterwards the shoots from the buds, which are otherwise liable to be blown out by high winds. 
The Paris nurserymen being supplied with stronger stocks than can readily be procured in England, and 
having a better climate, and more experience in the culture of roses, excel us in this department of rose 
propagation, and their standards afford an article of commerce with other countries. Their common 
plants, raised by layers, are also in extensive demand, but in these we equal, if not surpass them. Fine 
collections of standard roses from Paris, may be seen in the Hammersmith nursery, in the Comte de 
Vande's garden at Bayswater, in the Duchess of Dorset's at Knowle, and at various other places. 

6554. Final situation. No species of rose, wild or cultivated, thrives well in or very near 
large towns, on account of the smoke and confined air. The yellow and Austrian roses 
{R, lutea and L. bicolor) are difficult to flower in any situation, but seldom or never blow 
in the suburbs of London : even the monthly rose does not thrive so well there as at 
some miles' distance in the country. Roses are generally planted in the front of shrub- 
beries, and in borders ; they are also planted by themselves in rose-gardens or rosaries 
{Jig. 620.), in groups on lawn or gravel, either with common box or other edgings, or 
with edgings of wire, in imitation of basket-work. These last are called baskets of 
roses ; the ground enclosed in the basket-margin is made convex, so as to present a 
greater surface to the eye, and increase the illusion ; the shoots of the stronger 
sorts are layered or kept down by pegs till they strike roots into the ground, so 
that the points of the shoots furnished with buds appear only above the soil, which is 
sometimes covered witn moss or small shells. Under this treatment, the whole surface 
of the basket becomes, in two or three years, covered with rose-buds and leaves of 
one or of various sorts. Where one of the larger free-growing sorts is employed, as the 
moss, or any of the Provence (rose de cramoisi, Fr.) varieties, one plant maybe trained 
so as to cover a surface of many square yards. Where different sorts are introduced in 



»92 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Past III. 




the same basket, they should be as much as possible assimilated in size of leaves and 
flowers, and habits of growth, and as different as possible in the colors of their flowers. 
By mixing small-flowered with large showy sorts, the beauty of the former is lost -with- 
out adding to the effect of the latter. 

6555. In rosaries commonly but one plant of a sort is introduced, and the varieties which most resemble 
each other are placed together, by which their distinctions are better seen. Particular compart- 
ments are often devoted to one species, as the Scotch, Chinese, yellow, bumet-leaved, &c. which has an 
excellent effect ; sometimes a piece of rock-work in the centre is covered with the creeping roses, and 
on other occasions these are trained to trellis-work, which forms a fence or Iiedge of roses round the 
whole. In this hedge, standard-roses are sometimes introduced at regular distances; a grove of standards 
is also frequently formed in the centre of the rosary, and sometimes they are introduced here and there 
in the beds. 

6556. Standard roses, however, have certainly the best effect in flower-borders, or when completely de- 
tached on a lawn : their sameness of form, and that form being compact and lumpish, prevents them from 
grouping well, either among themselves or with other objects. Their beauty consists in their singularity 
as rose-plants, and in their flowers ; and, therefore, to display these beauties to the best advantage, they 
require to be seen singly, or in succession. This is the case where they occur as single objects on a lawn, 
or in the centre in, and here and there among, groups of flowers; or in lines or avenues, along flower- 
walks. In the gardens of the Grand Trianon, they are planted profusely in large masses, like plantations of 
trees and shrubs, and there much of their individual beauty is lost, and no good general effect produced. 

6.557. Soil. Most species of the rose in their wild state grow in sandy and rather poor soil, excepting 
such as are natives of woods, where the soil is richer, and comparatively moist. But all the cultivated 
roses, and especially the double-flowering kinds, require a rich loamy soil, inclining to clay rather than 
sand ; and they require also, like most double flowers, plenty of moisture when in a growing state. 

6558. General culture. To produce strong flowers, roses require some attention to 
pruning ; old wood should be yearly cut out, and the young shoots thinned and shortened 
according to their strength, and whether number or magnitude of flowers be wanted. 
Those sorts which throw up numerous suckers should be taken up every three or four 
years, reduced and replanted ; and most sorts, excepting the standards, will be improved 
by the practice, provided attention be paid to remove a part of the old soil, and replace it 
by new. The points of the shoots of the more delicate sorts of roses are veiy apt to die 
when pruning is performed in winter or spring ; to avoid the consequences of this evil, 
many give a second pruning in June, or do not prune the tender soi'ts at all till the be- 
ginning of that month. A very good time for performing the operation is immediately 
after the bloom is over ; cutting out old exhausted wood, shortening shoots which have 
flowered to a good bud accompanied with a healthy leaf, but leaving such shoots as are 
still in a growing state untouched till October. Where very large roses are wanted, all 
the buds but that on the extreme point of each shoot should be pinched off as soon as they 
make their appearance, and the plant liberally supplied with water. To lessen evapor- 
ation, and keep up a constant moisture at the roots of their roses, the Paris gardeners 
generally mulch them with half-rotten stable-dung, or partially rotten leaves. 

6559. Foruiarding and retarding roses. The earliest flowering rose is the monthly, which, in mild 
seasons, and planted against a wall, will sometimes flower in the beginning of April; the roses next in 
succession are the cinnamon, which flowers in May ; the damask, in the end of May or beginning of 
June ; the blush, York and Lancaster, Provence and Dutch hundred-leaved, in June, July, and August. 
The Virginia and musk roses are the latest European sorts ; they flower in September, and in shaded 
situations will sometimes continue in bloom till the middle of October ; but the earliest rose (the monthly) 
is also the latest, and generally continues flowering till interrupted by frost. The earliest sorts may be 
materially forwarded by being planted against a south wall, and if portable sashes are placed before them, 
and the wall is either flued and heated by fires, or a lining of dung placed behind, the plants may be 
brought to flower in February or March. The monthly rose being protected by glass in autumn, or aided 
by artificial heat, may be continued in bloom till Christmas. A very common mode of obtaining late roses, 
and one of the greatest antiquity (48.), is by cutting all the flower-shoots oflf when the buds begin to ap- 
pear, or by rubbing off all the rudiments of shoots, of every kind, early in spring; a second crop is in 
consequence produced, which wiU not be in a state to bloom before the autumn. 

6560. Forcing tlie rose. The best sorts for this purpose are the common and moss Pro- 
vence ; the Indian sorts force well, or rather, in stoves, continue in bloom all the year ; but 
the commoner varieties of these not being fragrant, they are in less repute than the European 
roses. Rose-plants should be a year in pots previously to the autumn when it is intended 
to force them ; they should be planted in pots of six or eight inches' diameter, in rich 
loam, and plunged in an open airy situation ; their flower-buds pinched off as they ap- 
pear ; and the plants put early into a state of rest, by excluding the sun and rain, but 



Book II. SELECT AMERICAN PEAT-EARTH PLANTS. 893 



not a free circulation of air. Abercrombie says, " There is no certainty of attaining a 
fine blow of roses in the depth of winter by the most expensive artifices of forcing ; and 
yet fine flowers may be produced early in the spring by any ordinary stove put in oper- 
ation in December. When the plants are first introduced, keep the air of the house at 
about 50°, never letting it fluctuate to more than two or three degrees below or above. 
In the second week, aim at 60° as the standard ; in the third week at 65°. Wlien a 
month has nearly elapsed, begin to increase the heat gradually to 70^; having brought 
it to this standard, let it afterwards exceed it from three to five degrees, rather than sink 
below. A succession may be kept up by introducing some pots eveiy eight or ten days." 

6561. Insects. All the species of roses are verj' liable to the attacks of insects, especially of the aphides ; 
some, and especfally the briar and Scotch rose, are attacked by the Ci/nips rosce, which, by puncturing 
the bark, occasions the production of rose-gaUs, and of those mossy turts often seen on wild roses, which 
were known formerly under the name of Bcdeguar, and used in medichie. A great number qqi 
of insects seem fond of the flowers of roses, from tlie appalling earwig yForficula auricularia) Q^Coy^ ~ 
to the seemingly harmless lady-bird ^Coccinclla 1-i-guttata) (Jig. 621.), which deposits its larv';? ^"^^^ 

(a) in the leave's of various species, both wild and cultivated. There seems no remedy for ^^^^ 
insects on plants in the open air so simple and effectual as gathering them by hand-, or remov. '^TTV* 
ing the leaf, or that part of the shoot which is infested by them. Under cover, tobacco-smoke '*>*/k> 
wiU prove an effectual remedy for the aphides ; but the larvffi of many others, and especially of tipula and 
the tenthredinida?, which occasion the wrapping up and shrivelling of the leaves, can only be removed by 
washing with lime-water or hand-picking. 

SuBSECT. 2. Select American ajid other Peat-Earth Shrubs, viz. of MagnoUacete, Mag- 
7ioUa J of Rhodoracees, Rhododendron, Azalea, Xalmia; of the genera Cisius, Arbutus, 
Vaccinium, Andromeda, Erica, Daphne, and various others. 

6562. Of select American shrubs there are numerous species and varieties, both deci- 
duous and evergreen, which will be found arranged according to their heights and colors 
in the two succeeding tables, and those requiring a peat-soil distinguished by a letter (p). 
Tliey are all highly valued for their flowers, which are large and magnificent in magnolia 
and rhododendron ; odoriferous in azalea and daphne ; and beautiful in andromeda, vac- 
cinium, and erica : arbutus is valued both for its flowers and fruit. They are mostly 
natives of America, and introduced w itliin the latter half of the last century. 

- 656o. Propagation. They are all propagated by seed or by layers; though grafting or inarching 
is resorted to in some cases as more expeditious. The seed is either procured from America, or saved in 
this country, and, being very small, is sown as early as possible in pans of peat-earth, and placed in the 
shade. In winter it is placed under a cold-frame, or otherwise protected from the frost, and the plants 
come up in May or June. In the following autumn, or succeeding spring, they are pricked out into other 
pots, or into beds of peat-earth in a shady situation. Here they are protected by hoops and mats during 
winter.; and in two years are again transplanted into a similar soil and situation, and at distances corre- 
sponding to the size of the leaves, or habits of the plants ; here they remain till they flower, or till wanted 
to be removed to their final destination. They commonly flower from the fourth to the seventh year. 

6564. Bi/ tai/ers. The young shoots only are used for this pur[5ose, either laid down in June and July, 
when in full growth, or in the following autumn ; by the former plan a year is gained, as the shoots will 
be rooted, and may be removed by the succeeding winter or spring. Some sorts of magnolia, rhododen- 
dron, &c. require two years to form a sufficient number of roots. The plants, when removed, may be 
planted in nursery lines, in proper soil, and kept well watered during summer, and protected the first 
winter by mats ; or, they may be planted in pots, and receive, during winter, the protection of a frame. 

6565. Bi/ sucf^'ers, and by dividing the root. Both these modes may occasionally, though but rarely, 
be resorted to. Some species of azalea and andromeda throw up numerous suckers, and the heaths may 
often be increased by dividing their roots. 

? 6566. By cuttings.' Some of the azaleas, heaths, &c. may be multiplied by cuttings of the young shoots, 
when in a growing state, taken off where the wood is beginning to ripen, and planted in sand and peat, 
and covered with a hand-glass. If this operation is performed in the end of June, they wiU be ready to 
remove into prepared beds, or to plant in small pots by the middle of September. 

6567. By grafting, budding, or inarching. This is practised with some sorts of magnolia, arbutus, 
daphne, \-c. which are placed on stocks of hardier species of the same genus, as on M. purpurea, A. 
unedo, D. laureola, tVc. The stocks are planted in pots a year before wanted, which admits of their 
being placed in any position with respect to the shoot being inarched. The daphnes and arbutus an- 
drachne, are generally grafted with detached scions. 

656S. Culture. The culture requisite for American plants, Abercrombie observes, 
" principally consists in pro-viding some imitation of the original soil, in order that they 
may flourish in full vigor ; and, where there is no factitious soil provided, in making a 
compensation during the dry part of summer, by plentiful waterings. Most of the exotic 
shrubs brought from America, were originally found growing on tracts of ground re- 
sembling our beds of peat, except that the alluvial soil there extends along a greater 
surface, and the body of vegetable mould embedded in the swamp is richer and deeper, 
being on a scale corresponding with the magm'tude of the rivers. The native plants 
found in these situations, vegetate with the highest \-igor and luxuriance. Tlie soil in 
many parts is so pervaded by vegetable substances, that where from any cause a section 
of the solid ground occurs, as in the bank of a river, or the shaft of a well, a layer of de- 
cayed logs, branches, and leaves of trees is uncovered to the spectator. The luxuriance 
of the vegetables may, however, partly be ascribed to the excessive moisture which is 
peculiar to the climate of America. In a few places, indeed, on the western coast, rain 
is not known ; but the soil there is, in general, copiously watered by dew, so as to render 
it highly productive. In the season called tvinter by the natives of South America, last- 
ing from May to November, a continued succession of impetuous rains gives to the plains, 
in most places, the appearance of an ocean. When the rains have ceased, the humidity 



894 



PRACXrCE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



of the climate Is kept up by a constant evaporation from swamps, rivers, and lakes, the 
largest in the world. As we cannot have the mitigated warmth of the climate of South 
America in plantations, in the full ground, and as the temperature of our winter cannot 
be expected to coincide in its effects with the corresponding season even of North America, 
when so many local circumstances are different, it is neither indispensable, nor perhaps 
advisable, to create an artificial swamp for the cultivation of many American plants. It 
is mostly safer to confine the efforts of imitation to the kind of earth, unless the water 
can be carried off at any time ; for the lodgment of wet might cause some kinds of roots 
to perish in cold weather. Thus the andromeda arborea would be injured by being floated 
in winter, and must be protected from frost, though it requires a deal of water in summer. 
The great object is to imitate the American peat. This is a composition of the branches, 
twigs, leaves, and roots of trees, with small plants, grass, and weeds ; by having lain 
immemorially in water, the whole is formed into a soft mass, and, when the materials 
are completely decayed and blended so as to be homogeneous in appearance, the com- 
pound is the finest vegetable mould : where this description of peat cannot be obtained, 
recourse m.ust be had to the best that can be procured from marshes, bogs, or heathy 
commons, which must be well turned and sweetened, and mixed with sand and rotten 
leaves or dung. " The soil being procured, the next thing to be done is to form a stratum 
of it of sufficient thickness in the site intended for the plants. When they are merely 
to remain a year or two, this need not be above a foot in depth ; but where tliey are to 
remain peraianently, it should be at least three feet thick. To encourage the roots to 
penetrate the native soil, the bottom of the excavation should be dug and mixed with 
peat ; imlcss a bottom of rough gmvel were substituted at the depth of four feet, and 
such an arrangement made, as that water could be introduced to, and withdrawn from, 
this layer of gravel at pleasure, so as to saturate the whole superstratum of peat. In level 
situations, and where water was abundant, this plan might be readily adopted, and none 
could more closely imitate nature, as, by keeping the surface of the peat a few inches 
below the level of the natural ground, the water might be allowed to rise a few inches 
above the peat, and inundate the whole surface of the American ground. In peat coun- 
tries, and where the climate is moist, as in Lancashire and Cheshire, admirable contri- 
vances of this kind might be adopted, and the American and bog-earth plants, herbaceous 
as well as shrubby, grown to the greatest perfection. 

6569. Final situation. American and peat-earth shrubs, reqiuring large masses of their 
peculiar soil, and frequent artificial waterings, cannot conveniently be introduced in 
mingled borders or shrubberies. They ai-e therefore generally planted by themselves in 
beds or compartments of peat-earth ; or entire gardens or shrubberies are devoted ex- 
clusively to them. This last mode appears decidedly the best, as the general habits and 
appearance of American peat-earth plants, independently of their culture, do not har- 
monise remarkably w-ell with European species. An American garden may have a 
northern or eastern exposure, and if it slopes considerably will be still less affected by 
tlie warm dry weather of summer. It may be laid out in any of the different styles of 
flowei-garden {^jigs. 541. to 545.) ; herbaceous plants introduced as well as shrubs, and 
the whole surrounded by a sloping phalanx of American trees. The sorts may either be 
arranged in the mingled manner (61vS9.), or grouped or classed according to some system. 
(6141. to 6150.) Many and indeed most of the American shrubs thrive under the partial 
shade of lofty deciduous trees, and the leaves which fall from these protect their roots 
both from the frosts of winter and the drought of summer, while they constantly decay 
into vegetable mould, and thus at the same time affords supply of nourishment. Hence, 
in some cases, the hardier sorts of rhododendron, azalea, andromeda, &c. may be intro- 
duced as undergrowths in the margins of thin woods, placing under each plant a cubic 
yard or more of its pi'oper soil. This mode of planting, it would appear {Mason on 
Design, art. Fitt), was first adopted by the great Earl of Chatham ; but it has been car- 
ried to the greatest extent, not only with American plants, but with roses and other 
tender shrubs, in the extensive woods of Fontliill, where, as also at King's Weston near 
Bristol, Kenwood at Hampstead, &c. many of the plants shed their seeds, and young 
rhododendrons and azaleas spring up in abundance. In the nurseries, it is a general 
practice to keep American and other peat-earth plants in pots, and to protect them during 
winter in frames and pits for conveniency of deportation. At the Hammersmith nursery, 
one green-house is exclusively devoted to evergreen magnolias. All the American and 
peat-earth shrubs may be selected from the three first tables in next section, by observing 
the indication of peat-soil (letter p) ; and the herbaceous peat-earth plants may be selected 
from the tables of Border- Flowers in a similar manner^ 



Book II. 



GENERAL CATALOGUE OF SHRUBS. 



895 



Sect. II. General Catalogue of Shrubs. 
6510. In our general catalogue of shrubs we have included several species, which, froin 
their growing with single naked stems, and foratiing a spreading head at some height from 
the ground, are correctly denominated low trees, Aviygdalus comtnunvi, and various 
species of Cratcegus, L. (now Mespilus, Sm. and W. ), may be referred to as examples. 
As our object is to form such arrangements as will afford most facility to the gardener 
in adjusting his plants as to height, color of the flower, and time of inflorescence, we 
have included all woody plants which do not exceed twenty feet in height under shrubs ; 
and all those that exceed that height (excepting the climbers and twiners) we have al- 
lowed to retain their places in the tables of trees. Here, as before, the most ornamental 
species and those which continue longest in bloom are distinguished by appropriate 
marks (s and 3). 



SUESECT. 1. 



6571. 



Deciduous Shrubs, arranged as to tlieir Time of Flowering, Height, and 
Color of the Flower. 

DECIDUOUS SHRUBS.— MARCH. 



RED. 

Zanthorhiza apiifblia 



WHITE. 

Pjnis pumila 



TELLOW. 

Robinia pygmsEa, p. 



Height from io 2 feet- 



YELLOW. 
GREEN. 



From 2 feet to 4 feet. \ From 4 feet to 7 feet. From 7 feet to 10 feet. From 10 feet to 20 feet. 



RED. 

Daphne mezereum, p. 
Rhododendron daur. p. 

WHITE. 
Daphne mezereu.fl. al. />, 

YELLOW. 

Lonicera nigra 

GREEN. 
Comptonia asplenifol. p. 



YELLOW. 
GREEN. 

APRIL. 



RED. 

Calycanthus prae. Ja.S. p. 



Calycanthus praecox flo. Prunus spinosa, 5. 
albo, J an. 3. p. Hamamelis virginica, r 



WHITE. 

PjTUS scorpius 

YELLOW. 

Lonicera caerulea 
Rol)inia altagana 
GREEN. 
Salix sibirica 



WHITE. 

Pyrus botryapium, 3. 
— praecox, 3. 
YELLOW. 
Robinia spinosa, p. 

GREEN. 

Salix arenaria 
I — argentea 



GREEN. 

Salix nigricans 



-MAY. 



RED. 

Vacciniiim erythoroc. p. 
^ parviflorum 
1, various sorts, 3. s. 
Amygdalus persica nana 
"yringa persica incisa 
'accinium venustum, p. 



WHITE. 

Vaccinium album, p. 

— angustitblium 

— corymbosum 

— fuscatom 

— glabrum 

— glaucum 

— nalleriaefolium 

— latifolium 

— ligustriiium 

— mucronatum 

— pallidum 

— rugosum, p. 

— salicinum 

— tomentosum 

— villosum 

— virgatum 

— viride 
YELLOW. 

Genista decumbens, p. 
Spartium alpinurr} 

— decumbens 



RED. 

Spiraea crenata, p. 
Vaccifii. amaen.fl. rub.p. 

— arboreum 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. s. 
Amygdalus nana 

— pumilo pi. 



WHITE. 

Comus florida 
Fothergilla alnifolia, p. 

— glauca 

— speciosa 
Mespilus cotoneaster 
PjTus depressa, 3. 

— maritima, 3. 

— montana, 3. 

— arbutifolia, 3. 

— fruc. luteo, 3. 

— — nigio, 3. 
Vaccinium amaenum, p. 

— arboreum, t. 



YELLOW. 

Berberis cretica, p. 
Daphne altaica, 3. p. 
Fraxinus pumila 
Spartium angulatum 
Robinia chamlagu 
^lyrica ceiifera, p. 

— — latifolia 

— gale 
Rhamuus alnifolius 

— hybridus 
Rhus aromaticum, p. 

— suaveolens, p. 
Spiraea laevigata, 3. p. 

— sibrica 

— thalictroides, p. 

— trilobata, 3. 
Syringa persic.alba, 3, p. 
Vaccinium salvifaUum 



RED. 

Colutea pocokii 
Spiraea hypericifblia 
Amygdalus orientalis, 3. 
— sibirica, 3. 

Lonicera alpigena 



WHITE. 

Azale pontica glau. Z.p. 

— precox, 3. 
Halesia diptera, p. 

— tetraptera 
Magnolia speciosa, 5. 
Prunus pendula, 3. 

— sibirica, 3. 

— susquehana, 3. 

— chicasa, 3. 
Pyrus amelanchier, 3. 

— americana, 3. 

— graeca, 3. 



YELLOW. 

Azalea pontica, 3. 

— — pallida, 3. 

— — pleno, 3. 
Berberis americana 

— vulgaris, 3. 
Cytissus sessilifolius 
Fraxinus atra 
Genista pilosa 
Lonicera pyrenaica 
Zanthoxylum fraxineum 



Robinia hispida 

arborea , ..^^^j., 

Amygdalus commim. pi. I — 



persica fl. pleno, 3. 



I RED. 

ICercis canadensis 
Mespilus parvifolia, 3. 

punctata, 3. 



WHITE. 

Euonymus eur. ftti. alb. 
_ — pall. 

— latifolius 
Philadelphus corcmarius 

— — flo. pleno 

— — fol. var. 
Prunus cerasifera 

— chama; cerasus 

— nigra, 3. 
Pyrus sorbifolia, p. 
Sambucus nigra, fol.var 

— alba 

— laciniata 
Spartium multiflorum 
Syringa vulgaris alba, 3 

— monstrosa 



YELLOW. 

Staphylea pinnata 



sanguinea, 3. 
Amygdalus commun. 3 

— — amara, 3 

— Persica 

— — fl. pleno, 3 

— — ftu. glab. 3. 
WHITE. 

Celtis orientalis 
Mespilus pyrifolia 

— spathulata 

— spinosissima 

— splendens 
tanacaetifolia 

Euonymus europfeus 

— — fol. aur. 
Prunus armeniaca, 
— spinosa, 3. 
Pyrus baccata, 3. 

— poUveria, 3. 
Broussonetia papyr.mas. 

— — loemina. 



YELLOW. 

Fraxinus omus 
Robinia caragana 



896 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

DECIDUOUS SHRUBS. — MAY— continued. 



GREEN. 

BerberU daurica 



BROWN. 

Vaccinium marjlandi. j 
— pensylvanic. 



RED. 

Vaccinium dumo. I. p. 

— nitidum 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. i. 
Ononis fruticosa, 3. 



WHITE. 

Azalea viscos, alb. 3. p. 

— — dealbata 
Daphne alpina.p. 
Lonicera caucasica 
Prunus prostrata 
V^cinium cinereura, p. 

— diffusum, r. 

— myrsinites 

— resinosura, t. 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. 



Height from <o 2 feet. 



From2 feet to i feet. 



PURPLE. 
Syringa persica pur. p. 



GREEN. 

Berberis sibirica 
Hippophae sibirica 
Aristotelia macqui 



From4Jietto 7 feet. 



PURPLE. 

Betula pumila, t. p. 
Magnolia purpxurea, 3. 
Syringa sinensis, p. 

-GREEN. 
Liquidamber imberbe 



From 7 feet to 10 feet. 



PURPLE. 

Syringa vulgaris pur. 3. 

— — caenilea, 3 

— — rothomag. 
GREEN. 



FromlOfietto^feel. 



GREEN. 

Carpinus betulus incisa 

— orientalis 
Coriaria myrtifolia 
Fagus asplenifolia 
Hippophae rhamnoides 

argentea 

BROWN. 



-JUNE. 



PURPLE. 

Atraphaxis alpina, p. 



VARIEGATED. 
GREEN. 



RED. 
Azalea rosea, 3. p 

— rubra, 5. 

— rub. plen. 



viscosa pulchel.3. 

— blanda,3. 

— camea, 3. 

— iaicamata, 3. 
Hydrangea hortensis,3-p. 
Alorus tartarica 
Vaccinium stam fl.rub.3. 
Colutea cruenta, 3. 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. 

WHITE. 

Andromeda calyculat. 3. 

— globulifera, 3. 

— pan;culata 

— undulata 
Azalea nudiflora, alb. 3. 

— — fastigiata,3.p. 

— — florida, 3. 

— — staminea, 3. 

— — villosa, 3. 

— — tomentosa, 3. 

— — ^•i6cosa sLssa,3. 

— — floribunda, 3. 

— — glabra, 3. 

— — hirta, 3. 

— — lucida, 3. 

— — odorata, 3. 

— — pleno, 3. 

— — pubescens, 3. 
Prunus pumila 
Spaitium patens, p. 

purgans 
Spiraea stipulacea 
ulmifolia 
Styrax laevigata, t. 
Vaccinium frondosuin,p. 

— stamineum 
Viburnum alnifolium 

— dentatum 

— fol. lunatia 

— nitidum 
Rosa, various sorts 

YELLOW. 
Coronillaemerus 
Cytisus biflorus 

— capitatus, *. 

— elongatus 

— triflorus 
Azalea nudfli. auran. s.p. 
Genista triquetra, t. p. 
Hypericum denticulat. 

— olympicum 
Lonicera diervilla 
Potentilla floribunda 
Rhamnus lycioides 

PURPLE. 



VARIEGATED. 
Azalea fl. rub.et alba,3p 

GREEN. 
Moras pumila 
— rubra 

BROWN. 
Calycanthus florida, p. 



WHITE. 
Azalea odorata, 3. p. 
Cornus alba 

altemifolia 



RED. 

Chionanthus virgin, p. 

— latitolia 
Pyrus japonica, p. 

— — fl. plen. 3 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. «. 



— festigiata 

— paniculata 



Euonymus angustifol- p. 
Genista florida 
Laurus aestivalis 
Magnolia pyramidata, p. 
Pranus rubra, s. 
Pyrus japonica, fl. albo. 
Rubus csesius 

— corylifolius 
Sambucus racemosa 
Spiraea opulifolia 

— salicifblia 

— latifolia 

— paniculata 
Viburnum pyrifolium, p. 



YELLOW. 

Fraxinus lentiscifolia [ 
Rhamnus infectoriua 
Robinia halodendron 
Staphylea trifoUata 
Zizyphus paliurus 



PURPLE. 

Euonymus atro pur. p. 

— latifolius 

— verrucosus 
Robinia halodendron 

VARIEGATED. 
Azalea viscosa var. 3. p. 
GREEN. 



longifol 
pensylvan. 



RED. 

Mespilus chamte mespil 
Rosa, vEirious sorts, 3. t. 



WHITE. 

j1;scu1u3 aculeata 
Comus sanguinea 

— stricta 

— — fol. varieg. 
Fraxinus striata 
Lauras benzoin 
Philadelph. coron. mul. 
Viburnum lantana, p. 

— — fol. var. 

— — latifoU'um 



YELLOW. 

Colutea arboresceiM, 3. 



WHITE. 

Praxinus rotundifolia 
Magnolia auriculata, p. 

— glauca 
Pyrus americana, 3. p. 
. lanuginosa, 3. p. 



YELLOW. 
Rhuscotinus 



VARIEGATED. 

GREEN. 

Diospyras lotus 
Hippophae canadensis 

BROWN. 

AInas pumila 



VARIEGATED 



GREEN. 

Diospyras virginiana 



Book II. GENERAL CATALOGUE OF SHRUBS. 897 

DECIDUOUS SHRUBS. — JULY. 



H.ighifrom Ota 2 feet. 


From 2 fed to ifeet. 


From 4 feet to 7 feet. 


From ~feet to 10 feet. 


Froni \0 fed to 10 fed. 


Androm. mariaaa, 3. p. 

— — lanceol. 
Vaccinium teneilum 
Rosa, varioui sorts, 3. i. 


A2alea bicolor, s. p. 

— coccinea crispa, 3 . 

— rubra paliido, 

— coccinea, 3 p. 

— flamea, 3. 

— ruTjra, £1. pleno, J • 
Daphne mez. serot. 5. p. 
Hydrangea quercifolia 
jVIenziesia globular. 3. p. 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. s. 


Rosa, various sorts, 3. s. 


RED. 

Gleditschia sinensis, p. 

— horrida 
Koelreuteria panic. 3. p. 




WHITE. 

Aralia hispida, t. p. 
Genista pilosa 
Philadelphus modems 
\'ibiLmum dauricum 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. s. 


WHITE. 

^sculu^ humilis 
Androm. cassinifol. 3. p. 

— dealbata 

— frondosa 

— pulverulenta 

— racemosa, p. 
Azalea canescens, 3. p. 

— coccinea major,3. 

— papilionacea 
Prinos amoiguus, p. 

— cassinoides 

— laevigatas 

— lanceolatus 

— prunifoUus 
Ptelia trifoliata 
Rubus hispidis 
Spartium sphcerocarp.p. 
V ibumBjn aceri&lium 

— carolineanum,p. 

— lantanoides 

— nudum 


WHITE. 

Comus sibirica 
Pi-unus verticiUatus, p. 
Sambucus canadensis 
Styrax grandifolium, t.p. 

■ — officinale, t. 
Viburnum piminum 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. 


WHITE. 

A mphora firuticosa, t. p. 
Andromeda arborea, <. 
Eleagnus angustifolius 
Ligustrum vulgare 

— — fruc.flav.p 

— — fol.varieg. 
Vibumvun laevigatum,p. 


WHITE. 


YELLOW. 

Cytisus supinus 

— wolgaricus 
Hypericum rosmarinifol. 
Rhamnus pumilus 

— repens 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. 


YELLOW. 

Azalea maxima, 3. p. 

— lutea, J. 

— — major, 3. 
Cytisus argenteus, 3. 

— austriacus 

— nigricans 

— seficeus 
Hypericum hircinum 

— — minor 

— prolificum 
Rhcuxmus latifolius 
Rhus pumilum, p 

— radicans 
Azalea aurantiamaj.3.p. 

— calendulacea, s, 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. j. 


YELLOW. 

Hypericum elatum 
Rhus toxicodendron 
— vemis 


YELLOW. 

Rhus coriaria 

— elegans 

— glabrum 

— typhinum 


YELLOW. 
Virgllia lutea, p. 

: 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Azalea purpurea, i.p. 
RhododeniL azaleoides 
Cytisus purpureus, 3. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Betula nana 


PURPLE, 


GREEN. 
BROWN. 


GREEN. 

BROWN. 

Azalea cuprea, p. 

— pallida 

— bicolor 

— — major 
Menziesia ferruginea 


GREEN. 

Celastrus buUatus 

BROWN. 

AUGUST. 


GREEN. 
BROWN. 


GREEN. " 

Castanea americana, t. p. 
— pumila, i. 
BROWN. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 

Hibisc. syriac. rub. t. 

— — — pleno,i. 

— — — fol.var.J 
^sculus parviflora 


RED. 

.ffisculus macrostachya 


JIED. 


WHITE. 

Ceanothus araeric p. 

— — micro.p. 
Lordcera sjmphoric. p. 


WHITE. 

Azalea glauca, s. p. 

— — scabra, s. 
Cephalantfaus occidental. 
Clethra alnifolia, p. 

— acuminata 

— paniculata 

— pubescens 

— scabra 
Kontanesia phillyrasoides 
Hydrangea glauca, p. 

— heterophylla 
Itea virginica, p. 


WHITE. 

Hibiscus syriacus alba, s. 
Hydrangea arboresc. p. 
Rosa, various sorts, 3. s. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


YELLOW. 

Rosa, various sorts 


YELLOW, 

Annona triloba, p. 
Cytisus divaricatus 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 

mimosa arborea, p. 


YELLOW. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Hibiscus syriac. purp. s.t 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 
Hibisc. sjri.fl. alb.et i.s. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 



898 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 



DECIDUOUS SHRUBS. — SEPTEMBER. 



peightfrom io 2 feet. 


Frmn 2 feet ta 4 feet. 


Frcm 4 feet io 7 feet. 


From 7 feet to 10 feet. 


From 10 fcei io ^feel. 






RED. 

Vit ex agnus castus lat. 
— — angustif. 


RED. 


RED. 


WHITE. 


W^HITE. 

Azalea glauca serot. p. 
Gordonia pubescens, /. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 

Aralia spinosa 


YELLOW. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 

Azalea variegata 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 




SuBSECT. 2. Evergreen Shmbs. 




6572. 


EVERGREEN SHRUBS.- 


— MARCH. 




RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Erica camea, Febr. 3. p. 


Daphne collina, 3. 








WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 

Viburnum tinus, Janu. 
— — fol. arg. 
."T 

liirtum,o. 
lucia. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 

Daphne ponnca 
Ulex europaeus 

— — fl. pleno 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 




Daphne laureola 


Tasus baoccta, fol. Tar. 




Taxusbaccata erecta 




— — fol. var. 


A "D TJ TT 
















RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Empetrum nigrum, p. 




















y^acciniuin vitis idaea 










' — majus 










— maximum 










Azalea procumbens, p. 










Vaccin. vit. idaea, fl. coc. 










— uliginosa 










Andromeda polifoUa, p. 










— latifoUa 










— erecta 










_ media 
— mmor 










WHITE. 


WHITE 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Andromeda calyculata 










— latifolia 










— Tentricosa 










YELLOW. 




YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


Arbutus alpina 










Daphne cneorum, P* 










Erica mediterranea, o. 










— minima, 3. 










_ stricta, 3. 










GREEN. 


GREEN. 




GREEN. 


GREEN 






Cupressus thyoides 


Bnxus sempervirens 

— — angustifolia 

— — aur. var. 

— — ang. 








MAY. 
















RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Vaccinium myrtUlus, p. 
Erica fuscata, 5. i- p- 


Erica australis 3. i.p. 


Ilex aquifol. crassifol. 


Ilex macrophylla 










iCalmia glauca, 3. p« 










— — pallida, 3. 










WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Andromeda axillaris, p. 




ArbBtus andrachne, /. 




Hex aquifolium 


— catesbaei 




— — lucida, 






Ledum buxifoHum 




— — serratif. t. 




— — heterophill. 


— angustifolium 








— — fol. va^. arg. 












— palustre 










— latifolium 








— — _ _ aur 


— longifolium 








— — echinata 


Polygala chamae-bux. 3. 








_ — — arg 


Olea angustifolia nana 








— — — aur 


Rhodod. maxi. fl. al. 3. p. 








Prunus laurocerasus 


Ruscus hypoglossum 








. — — fol. mac 








— — angustif. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


(Jenista anglica 




Spartium scoparium 






GREEN. 


», GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


Laurus nobili* nana 


Acer creticum 


Laurus nana angnstifol. 
Thuja plicata • 


Quercus coecifera 


Juniperus communis 




Thuja filiformis 


Laurus nobilis 




— tartarica 




Thuja occiden talis 

— densa 

— oria» talis 



Book II. GENERAL CATALOGUE OF SHRUBS. , 899 

EVERGREEN SHRUBS. — JUNE. 



Height from Oto2 feet. 



RED. 

Cistus apennin. fl. rub.ii. 

— grandiflor. fl. rub. 

— n.liaatiiemMtn 

— — sulph. 
LinnaBa borealis f, 
Vaccinium buxifoUum 

— cras&ifolium 

— hispidulum 

— lucidum 

— macrocarpon 

— sibiricum 
•Erica cineria, s. p. 

— vulgaris, flo. albo 
— , — fl. pJeno 

WHITE. 
Andromeda coriacea, t.p. 
Astragalus tragacantha 

— trjigodes 
Cistus alpestris 

— apenninus, fl .alb.p. 

— helianthemumjfl.a. 

— — flo. mutabile 

— incanus 

— italicus 

— laxus 

— polifoiius 

— salvifolius, fl. 
Daphne-gnidium 

— tarton-rara 
Erica cinerea, flo. alb. p. 

— vulgaris 

— umbellata 
YELLOW. 

Cistus apenninus, p. 

— grandiflorus 

_ flo. sulph. 

— helianthemum 

— — flo. luteo pleno 
Genista germanica 

— sagittalis 
Hyperic. androsoemum 

— calycinum 
Cistus heliant. fl. aur. p. 

— pleno 
PURPLE. 
Andi-omeda coerulea 
Cistus heliant. flo. pu. p. 
Rhododendron chamae- 
cistus, t. s. p. 

— maximum, t. 

— ponticum myrtif. 

— — pumCum 



GREEV. 

Ephedra distachya 
J uniperus repens 



Fmnifiet to 4 /erf. 



Fn m 4 Jed to 7 feet. 



RED. 
Rhodod. catavfbien. 



WHITE. 

Cistus ladaniferus, p. 

— laurifolius 

— populifolius 

— — major 

— salicifoUus 
Ilex opaca 

— parado 
Olea angustifolia rosma. 
Ruscus racemosa 



GREEN. 

BuxuE balearica 
Juniperus sabina 

— — fol. var. 

— tamariscifoUa 

— sibh-ica 



KEI). 

Rosa indic.x, 4 va 



WHITE. 

Rhamnus alaternus, fol. 



YELLOW. 

Cytisus hirsutus, t. 
Robinea halodendron 
Buddlea globosa, t. 



Rhododendron pont. 5.p 

— angustifolia, 3. 

— eontortum, ^. 
— . macrophyilum,5 

— roseum, 3. 

— salicifolium, 3. 

— fol. arg. var. 3. 

— — aur. 3. 

— algarvense, 3. p 
GREEN. 

Aucuba japonica, p. 



From 7 feet to 10 feet 



WHITE. 

Li^strum ^'ulg. semp. 
Mesp'il'os pyracantha 
Olea angustifolia 

— latifolia 

— obliqua 

— media 

— buxifolia 

— pendula 

— fol. var. 
Rhamnus alatem, lacini. 

— — &1. var. 



GREEN. 

Juniperus thurifera 



From 10 feet to 20 feet. 



WHITE. 

Prunus lusitanica, 3. 

— — fol. mac. 
Rhamnus alaternus latif. 

— — fo), mcic, 



GREEN. 

Juniperus excelsa 

— lycia 

— oxycedrus 

— phoenicea 



-JULY. 



RED. 

Erica tetralix, 3. p. 
Gaultheria procumbens 
Pyrola raaculata, 3. 
Rhododendi'on fer. 3. p. 

— hirsutum, 3. 

— fol. mac. 3. 
Erica ciliaris, 3. p. 

vagans, 3. 
WHITE. 



— cnspus, t. 

— raonspeliacus, t. 
"■omus canadensis 
Epigsea repens, 3. 
Erira tetralix flo. alb. 3. 

vagans flo- alb. 3. 
Pyrola umbella:ta, 3. 
Salix reticulata 

inium arctost. t, p. 
Andromeda speciosa 
YELLOW. 



fVucficans 
PURPLE. 
Erica viride pui-p. 3. p 
Lavendula staechas, t. 
GREEN. 



WHITE. 

Andromeda acumin. t.p 
— ferruginea,^. 
Euonymus americanus 
Andromeda serratifolia 



YELLOW. 

Ruta graveolens 



RED. 

Kalmia iatifolia rub. p. 



A triplex halimus 
Kalmia latifbl. fl. alb. p. 



YELLOW. 

•Sparlium junceum 
— — pleno 



GREEN. 

Bupleurum fmticosum 

AUGUST.- 



GREEN. 

Juniperus daurica 



RED. RED. 

Polygonum frutescens Ilex oassine major, p. 
Rhododend. caucas. 3-p. 
Rosa semperflorens 7 va- 
rieties, 3. t. p. 1 



BED. 



3 M 2 



900 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 



EVERGREEN SHRUBS. — AUGUST. 





From 2 Jccz to 4 Jtiet* 


Froyn Afiet to 7 Jcet, 


Fi'Ofn 7 Jcet to 10 /''Cif • 


FroyH iOJl^ct to 20 Jeei. 




"WI^ JTE . 


WHITE . 


M'HITE. 


WHITE. 


Frinos trlaber 


Ilex cassiiie media, p. 






Magnolia grandiflora, 3. 


Yucca tilair.ento<;a, t. 


— — minor 






— acuminata 


— an^stifolia, t. 


Iva firutescens, i>. 






— exoniensis 


— glorioaa, t. 5. 








— ferruginea 








— obttisiiblia 
rotup-difolia 

— salicifolia 




\ ELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


rELLOW. 


"i ELLOW. 


Ruta montana 


Jasminum fmticans 
— humile 








GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Artemiiia abrotanum 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 




















RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Salvia erecta 






Arbutu5 unedo rubra 




— oflicinali; 










— — angustifol. 
_ triloba 










ivalmia aiiij-iistifulia se- 










retina, 










WHITE . 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 

Ligustnini lucidum 


WHITE. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


Ephedera monostach.va 










Salbola fiutico^a 




OCTOBER. - 
















WHITE. 


WHITE. 

Arbutus unedo ciispa 


WHITE. 1 

Arbutu.5 unedo 


WHITE. 


WHITE, 



SuBSECT. 3. Cliinbin" and Tivinin" Shrubs. 



6573. 



HARDY CLIMBING SHRUBS. — APRIL. 



WHITE. 

PURPLE. 



PURPLE. 
GREEN. 



PURPLE. 

Vinca major, cv. 

— — lol. ars. 
_ _ fol. aur. 

— — ilo. \>\ew 



PURPLE. 
GREEN. 



MAY. 

V/KITE. 



PURPLE. 

\'inca major, ev. 



JUNE.- 

RED. 



PURPLE. 
GREEN. 



-JULY. 

RED, 



BLUE. 
Atragene austriaca 



WHITE. 
PURPLE. 



AVHITE . 
Lonicera belgicum prec. 
I PURPLE. 



VELLOW. 

Clematis reiiculata, p. 



GREEN. 

^'itis labrusca 
Ziziphus volubilis 



I RED. 
Polygonum volubile 
Clematis viorna, tw. 
WHITE, 
Ampelopsis covdata, p. 

— hirsuta 
Celastrus scandens 
Rosa arvenois 

— caiiiiia 

— — jileno 

— — vaiieg.ita 

— s«OTpervirens, c-c. 
TELLOW. 

Aristolochia pubesc. p. 
Lonicera queicitblium 
— variegatum 
PURPLE. 
Clem, \-iorna purp. 3, ev 

GREEN. 
Vitis laciniosa, p. 

— odoratisma 

— rotundifoUa 



Lonicera implexa, 3 
Lycium barbai-um 



RED. 

Lonicera sempervirens,i 

— — minor, t. 

— — longifol. 
WHITE. 

Atragene americana,3.;; 
■" 'rica 



WHITE. 

Clematis florida, 3. -v 
— — fl . pleno, 
Lonicera penclym. fl. al. Clematis vitalba 
— belgicum Jasminum officinale 
— — fol. arg. 

Rosa repanda, ev. 
Rubus miticosus 

— — fruc. albo 

— — lacinatus 

— — flo. pleno 



Book II. SHRUBS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSES. 901 



HARDY CLIMBING SHRUBS. —JULY— con^Wrf. 



• Heigldfrom to ifeet. 


From 2 feet to ifeet. 


From 4 feet to T feet. 


From 7 feet to 10 feet. 


From 10 feet to 20 feet. 


j YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 

Glycine frutescens. p. 
Lonicera flava 


YELLOW. 


] ELUE. 

! 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 


BLUE. 

Clematis viticellacccr. 5. 
Passiflora coerulea, 3. p. 


i PURPLE. 

J 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 

Clematis viticella rubra 
— — fl. pie. 


- GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 






Vitis arborea 
— blanda 


Menispermum canad. p, 

— virgin. 
Passiflora maculata 


Rhus radicans 






AUGUST. 






RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 

Clematis virginiana, p. 

— vitalba canaden. 
Rosa multiflora, 3. t. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 

Periploca graeca 


WHITE. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 

Clematis oiientalis 


YELLOW. 

Aristolochia sipho, p. 
Bignonia radicans, 3. p. 
— — major, 3. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Smilax aspera 
— sarsaparilla 


GREEN. 
Heder hel. etvar. ev. Oct. 
Lonicera grata 



G574. The propagation and culture of shioibs being the same as that for trees, we combine both subjects 
ill the catalogue of arboriculture in the succeeding book. 



Sect. III. Selections of Shruhs for imrticular Purposes. 

6515. The portimlar purjwses to which shrubs, like flowers, may be applied, are the 
concealment of defonnities or imperfections, and the production of particular beatities or, 
desirable effects. We shall here select the names of a few for concealing vertical and 
horizontal deformity ; for producing an immediate effect as to bulk for producing ve- 
getation under the shade and drip of trees ; for ornamenting water and rocks ; for form- 
ing edges and hedges ; for diffusing agreeable odors ; for being ornamental by their 
fruit ; and for economical or botaidcal purposes. 

SuBSECT. 1. Shrubs for concealing vertical and horizontal Deformities. 

6576. Vertical deformities may either be concealed by the rapid and tall growing sorts (Subsect. 2.), or 
by the climbers or twiners, either deciduous or evergreen. The climbers may be nailed to a wall or fence, 
or tied to a trellis, or allowed to climb on branches and spray ; for the twiners, tall sticks or poles are 
necessary. 

6577. Horizontal deformities may be concealed by rapid-growing bushy plants, by allowing climbers 
and trailers to spread over them, or by the proper trailers and creepers of the hardiest kinds, a few of 
which are these : — 

Deciduous. Rosa arvensis, Rubus fruti- I pinus. Genista decumbens, Rhamnus | Evergreens. Rosa sempervirens, Vinca 
cosus, Cissus hederacea, Cytisus su- | repens. I major and minor. 



SUBSEC 



Shrubs of rapid and bulky Growth. 



6578. Shrubs of rapid and bullet/ growth are often desirable to produce immediate effect in laying out 
pleasure-grounds, as well as for producing shelter, and concealing objects. 



Deciduous. Colutea arborescens, et firu- 
tescens, Comus alba, florida, et san- 
guinea, Cytisus laburnum, et sessilifo- 
Tius, Ligustrum vulgare, Philad?lphus 
<;oronarius, Rosa villosa, Sambucus 



nigra, Spir^a opulifolia, Syringa vul- 
garis. Viburnum opulus. 
Hver/^reens. Cupressu.-; seinpervirens,Ilex 
aqiiifolium, .Tuniperus virginiana, Li- 
gustrum vulgaris, var. semperi'irens. 



IMespilus pyracantha, Pinus palustris, 
Quercus gramimtia, Prunus lauro- 
cerasus, 'lusitanica, Rhamnus ala- 
ternus, Spartium junceum, Ta\us 
baccata, Thuja occidentalis, orientalis, 
Ulex europaeus, var. hibemiae. 



SuBSECT. 3. Shrubs ivhich thrive under the Shade and Drip of Trees. 

6579. Shrubs which grow under the shade of trees are found in practice to be a most valuable class for 
filling up blanks in old shrubberies, or screen plantations; and thus producing greenness, variety, and a 
healthy aspect, instead of emptiness, haggard stems of trees, or mere ghosts of plants. 



DecitJuous. Comus alba, altemifolia, 
florida, sanguinea, Corylus avellana, 
Daphne alpina 3 mezereum, m. flo, 
albo 3, m. serotLna 3 s, Euonymus 
angustifolius 3, lattfolius 3, verru- 
cosus 3 s, Hypericum hircinum, h. 
minor, prolificum, Ligustrum vulgare, 
V. fi-uc. flavo, V. fol. variegatis, Loni- 
cera syraphoricarpus 3, tartarica, 
xylosteum, Mespilus tomentosa, Rosa 
tv. sibirica, arvensis, Rubus occiden- 



talis, odoratus, trivialis, vUlosus, Sam- 
bucus nigra fol. var. n. alba, n. laci- 
niata, racemosa. Spiraea canadensis 3, 
thalictroides 3. 
Evergreens. Aucuba japonica 3, Bux- 
us, sempervirens, s. angustifol. s. aur. 
var. s. arg. var. s. nana, Cistus ca- 
nadensis. Daphne cneorum 3, c. fol. 
var. colUna 3 s, laureola, 1. fol. var. 
Ephedra distachya, monostacliya, Hy- 
pericum androsaemum, calycinum. Ilex 

3 M 3 



aqmfolium, Ligustrum vulg. semper- 
vir. Viburnum tinus, t. fol. arg. t. fbl. 
aur. t. hirtum, t. lucidum. 
CUmJbers. Clematis vitalba, v. canaden- 
sis, Hedera helix c, h. fol. arg. mac. 
e, h. fol. aur. mac. e, h. fol. arg. var. 
e, h. fol. aur. var. e, h. fol. m ixiinis, 
Lonicera periclymenum, pi. flo. albo, 
Rosa arvensis ev, repanda, Vinca, 
major e, minor e, m. fol. arg, e, in. 
fol. aur. e, va. flo. pleno. 



SOS 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



SuBstCT. 4. Shrubs for plantiiig by the Sides of Pieces of Water, or in Marshy Gromids, 

and among Rocks. 

6^0. Besides aquatic shrubs, most of the peat-earth species are also suitable for planting in marshy 
situations. 



Deciduous. Alnus pumila, Betula nana, 
pumila, and sibirica, Dirca palustris. 



Hfyrica cerifera, and gale, Salix, most 
of the species. 



Evergreem. Arbutus unedo. Ledum 
palustre, Pinus palustris, Salix retx- 
culata. 



6581. Of moiintain or rock shrubs the following are some of the most hardy : — 



Deciduous. Atraphaxis alpina. Daphne 
alpina. Genista decumbens, Lonicera. 
alpigena. Ononis fruticosa, PotentUla 
finiticosa, Rhamnus saxatilis. Rho- 
dodendron dauricum, Ribes alpinum. 



Rosa alpina, spinosissima, Rubus cae- 
sius, corylitblius . hispidus, Spartium 
anguiatum. 
Evergreens. Arbutus alpina. Azalea 
procurabens. Daphne collina, Empe- 



trum nigrum. Erica, all the hardy species, 
Cistus, all' the species, Gauitheria pro- 
cumbens, Juniperus communis, Ros- 
marinus officinalis, Ulex europaeus, 
nana. 



SuBSECT. 5. Shrubs for forming Edgings and Hedges in Gardens. 

6582. Of shrubs for edgings few are comparable to the box {Buxus sempervirens var. nana); but some 
others may be occasionally used, as the 

Andromeda polifolia, Arbutus alpina 1 rious species of Erica, especially herbacea, ] dula spiea, Sedum buxifolium, and even 
and uva-ursi, Empetnim nigrum, va- 1 tetrahs, vulgaris (Calluna, W.), Laven- I Ulex nanus. 

6583. Hedge plants. The following are a few of the numerous plants which may be used as hedges for 
shelter in gardens ; almost all the free-growing sorts may be planted in rows, and cut in the hedge form ; 
but the following sorts will form compact evergreen shelters : — 

Buxus sempervirens, Juniperus com- I trumvulgare.semperTirens.Olea (Wild.) 1 Taxus baccata. Thuja occidentalis and 
munis, Ulex europaeus var. hibemiae, angustifolia, latifolia, and media, Rham- crientalis. Viburnum tiuus, Prunus lau- 
Ilex aquifolium, Laurusnobilis, Ligus- | nus alatemus, Rosmarinus officinalis, | rocerasus. 

The creeping shrubs may be formed into hedges by training on frame-work. 

6584. Flowering hedges may be formed of the following deciduous sorts : — 

Rosa -carious species, Coronilla emerus, I Philadelphus coronarius, Pyrus japonica, | Spiraea hypericifolia, Syringa persica. 
Daphne mezereum. Hibiscus syriacus, | Robinia liispida, Spartium multitlorum, | vulgaris, hybrida, or varin, &c. 



SuBSECT. 6. Shrubs ivhose Flowers or Leaves have volatile Odors, and diffuse them in the 

surrounding Air. 

6585. Of shrubs whose odors are volatile only a few have this quality in the leaves as well as the 
flower ; these are marked leav. : — 

Deciduous. Azalea most of the species, I cially S. viminalis, alba, SjTinga vul- I Climbers. Clematis flamula, Jasminum 
Betula sibirica, leav. Daphne me- garis. I officinale, Lonicera caprifolium, peri- 

zereum, Rosa rubiginooa, leav. Evergreens. Lavandula spica, Rosraa- clymenum. 
Salix most of the species, but espe- 1 riims officinalis. [ 



SuBSECT. 7. Shrubs ornamental by their Fruit as well as Flowers. 

6586. Ornamental fruit-bearing shrubs are also serviceable as encouraging singing-birds to resort to the 
shrubbery. 



Deciduous. Berberis vulgaris, Ligustrum 
vulgare, Ribes alpinum, cynosbati, 
Rosa spinosissima, et villosa, Sorbus 
americana, et lanuginosa, most of the 
species of Vacciniura, Lonicera, \'i- 
bumum, and all the species of Comus, 
Euonymus, Mespilus, Prunus, Pyrus, 
and Sambucus. Few shrubs are more 
ornamental than the sloe (Prunus 



spinosa. Linn.); it is profusely covered 
with odoriferous white flowers early 
in April, and with dark-purple fi-uit 
with a fine bloom, from September to 
February. It is much cultivated in 
Japan (464.), where its flowers attam 
the size of a double rose. 
Evergreens. Arbutus unedo, alpina, and 
uva-ursi, Comus canadensis, Empe- 



trum nigrum, Euonymus americanus. 
Ilex aquifolium, Juniperus communis, 
and suecia, Mespilus japonica, pyra- 
cantha, Pmnus all the species, Taxus 
baccata, Vaccinium all the species, 
Hedera helix. 
Climbers and Creepers. Lonicera all the 
species. Rosa canina, Vitis vul- 
pina. 



SuBSECT. 8. Selections of Shrubs for botanical or economical Purposes, parasitic Trees, 
and Shrubs for a small Shrubbery. 
6587. Selections of shrubs may be arranged in innumerable modes, as well as herba- 
ceous plants ; as, according to soil, climate, habitation, country, rarity, place in bo- 
tanical systems, uses in agriculture, or the arts. Sec. No gardener can make any selec- 
tion who does not know by inspection the actual plants, and their habits, culture, and 
histoiy ; to him it is needless to repeat the sources to wliich he may have recourse for 
forming any classification whatever. 

6588. A selection for botanical purposes will necessarily include parasitic plants, of which the only hardy 
genus is visciim. This is propagated in February by sticking the berries, which are viscid when bruised, 
in a slit like that made in budding, on the smooth bark of the apple, pear, thorn, or almost any tree. 
If these are not washed away by rain, or other«-ise rubbed off, they will germinate in the following sum- 
mer. To make sure of their not falling off", some bore a hole in the bark and insert the seed ; or cut a 
notch in it, or make a slit : the last seems the best mode, and has been successfully adopted by Professor 
Thouin in the Paris garden, and extensively by Watts, a nurseryman at Acton, on most sorts of trees. 
Some, as Professor Walker {Essays onNat. Hist.), on the supposition that the seeds will not vegetate till 
they have passed through the stomach of a bird, recommend causing fowls to eat the seeds, and then 
sowing them. But this is found not to answer, for though the digestive powers of the stomach do not 
destroy the vegetative power of seeds which pass rapidly through it, yet in most cases it does. The mistle- 
toe in nature is propagated by the mistletoe-thrush {Turdus viscivorus), but not, as is generally supposed, 
by means of its excrement. This bird feeds on the berries of the misletoe in winter. These, from their 
viscosity, often stick to the outer part of the bird's beak, and to disengage them he strikes it against the 
branch of the tree on which he alights, and leaves the seed sticking to the bark ; if this should chance to 
be a smooth part, the seed will adhere to it, and the succeeding spring will grow, the radicle piercing the 
bark, and the plume unfolding itself in the air. The viscum grows best on the pyrus and mespilus tribes, 
but it will also grow on the ash, poplar, lime, oak, fir, &c., on which trees we have observed it in abund- 
ance in Germany. In the pine-forests, near Magdebourg, it is most abundant on pums sjUvestris. 



Book II. 



FRAME EXOTICS. 



903 



6589. A selection of trees and shrubs of great beauty and easy culture, proper for intro- 
duction in shrubberies of limited extent : — - 



Deciduous trees, Acer pennsylvanicum, 
jEsculus hippocastanum, Amygclalus 
communis, Cupressus disticha, Fa^^s 
sylvatica purpurea, Platanus occi- 
'dentalis, Quercus coccinea, Robinia 
p>seud-acacia, Sorbus aucuparia, Ti- 
lia europaea. 

Evergreen trees, Piiuis cedrus, Ijal- 
samea, pinsa abies, Cupressus sem- 
pervircns, Quercus gramuntia and 
snber, Juniperus \'irginiana. 

Deciduous shrubs. Amygdalois nana, An- 
dromeda i)aniculata. Azalea nudiflora, 
and pontica, Chionanthus -virginica, 
Colutea cruenta, Comus florida, Co- 
ronilla emerus, Cytisus purpureus, 
and sessilifolius. Daphne mezer«um, 
fienista florida, Halesia tetraptera, 
Hibiscus syriacus and varieties, Li- 
Kustrum vulgare. Magnolia purpurea, 
Mespilus chamae-mespilus, Philadel- 
yhus coronarius, Pnmus cetasifera. 



Pyrus iaponica, Robinia liispida, 
Rosa alba, centifolia, cinnamomea, 
damascena, indica, lutea, moschata, 
muscosa, rubiginosa, spinosissima, vil- 
iosa. Sorbus lanuginosa, Spartium 
multiflorum, Spiraea hypericifolia, 
epuUfolia, and canadensis, Syringajjer- 
sica, sinensis, vulgaris. Viburnum 
opulus, lantana. 
Evergreens, Andromeda calyculata, 
Arbutus unedo and andrachne, Au- 
cubajaponica, ButkUea globosa, Buxus 
balearica and sempervirens, (Jistus 
a)>enninus and grandiflorus^ Helian- 
themum vulgare, Cytisus hirsutus, 
Dapline laureola et pontica. Erica 
herbacea et deboeeia, Genista anglica. 
Ilex aquifolium, End numerous va- 
rieties, Jasminum fruticans et humile, 
Juniperus sabina, Kalmia angusti- 
folia, Lavandula spica, Laurus no- 
biiis, Ligustrum vulgare, var. sem 



pervirens. Magnolia grandiflora, Mes- 
pilus pyracantiia, Ulea angust ifolia, 
latifolia, et media, Piims cembra et 
lanceolata, Prunus laurocerasus lusi- 
tanica. Rhododendron maximum and 
ponticum, Rosa indica, semperflorens 
and banksire, Rosmarinus officinalis, 
Ruscus racemosus, Spartium junceum 
Taxus baccata. Thuja occidentalis 
et orientalis, Vibumura tinus, Ulex 
europajus. Yucca filamentosa, gloriosa. 
Climhcrs, Atragene austriaca, Bignonia 
radicans. Clematis cirrhosa, flamula, 
florida, Tiorna, vitalba, et viticella, 
Hedera helix and varieties, Jasmi- 
num officinale, Lonicera caprifolium, 
periclymenum., belgicum, et semper- 
virens, Lycium barbarum, Passiliora 
caerulea, Rosa arvensis, repanda, et 
sempervirens, Vinca major et minors 
Cibsus hederacea. 



Chap. XI. 

Frame Exotics, 

6.590. Frame exotics are such plants as are rather hardier than those kept in the green- 
house and of low growth. Some of those enumerated here will also be found among 
the green-house, and a few among the hardy plants. The frames or pits in which they 
are kept are never artificially heated, but are well covered with mats or otlier materials 
during severe frost. The frames are sometimes attached to the front of the green-house 
or stove, and thus derive some heat from tlie front flue, which, when an outside 
frame is in contemplation, is generally built in the front wall. When this is not 
the case, they may be advantageously placed on a border sloping to the east, south, or 
west, under the shelter of a hedge or wall. The pots should be plunged in scoriae, 
ashes, sawdust, or any similar non-conductors, and abundance of air, and little water 
given in the winter time. Few scenes are more interesting in the spring season 
than a small oblong flower-garden, surrounded by a holly-hedge enriched with many 
spikes of coral berries : within the hedge a sloping frame-border all round; on the 
north side, containing frame exotics ; on the west, early-flowering bulbs, as hyacinth, 
crocus, narcissus, &c. ; on the east, choice auriculas; and on the south side (the border 
facing the north), a collection of alpines. The middle of the garden laid out in beds of 
florists* flowers. In summer the sashes are applied to various useful purposes, as to ripen 
fruits against walls, to raise late crops of cucumbers, melons, &c. 

Sect. I. Frame Woody Plants, 



Those marked cl are climbers ; tw are twiners ; and tr are trailers. 



6591. FRAME WOODY PLANTS. 



FPB. MAR. APR. 


MAF. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO NOV. 


Cydonia speciosa 
Corchorus japonic. 3 
Magnolia conspi. p. 

— tomentosa 
Prenanthes spinosa 
Thuja articulata 


Prunus prostrata 
Illicium floridanum 

— parvifloru. p. 
Magnolia obov. t. p. 
Penstemon campan. 
Vella pseudo-cytisus 
Anthyllis erinacea 
Othona chierifolia 
Cupressus lusitanic 
Smil. pseudo-chinen 
Juniperus bermud. 

— chinensis 


Ilex dahoon, p. 

— angustifolia 

— vomitoria 
Lonicera flava 
Cydonia japonica, p. 
Helianthem form. p. 

— atripl. p. 

— halimifo. 

— elongatu. 

— glutmos. 
Thymus tragorigan. 
Scrophularia frutes. 
Biscutella semperv. 
Amorpha pubescens 
Anthyllis herman.p. 
Medicago arborea,p, 
Conjza Candida, t. 


Lonicera semp. min. 
Rhododen. chaem. p. 
Hudsonia ericoid. p, 
Rosa berberif. sinica 
Cistus villosus 

— monspeliensis 

— fiirsutus 
_ salvifolius 

— heterophyllns 

— creticus 

— purpureus 
Helianth. libano. 

— urabella. 

— lavipes 
Teucrium massil. p. 

— flavum 

— aureum 

— flavescens 

— gnaphalo. 
Prasium majus 
Amorpha microphy. 
Hypericum nudiflor. 

— rosmarinif. 

— aspalath. 

— fasciculat. 
Centaurea argentea 


Ilex cassine, p. 
Pinckneya pubens 
Prinos lucidus 
Silene fruticosa 
Euphorb. par. suf.p. 

— sylvatica 
Helianthem.canu. p. 

— scabrosum 

— lavandul. 
Reaumuria hyper.p. 
Stachys orientalis 
Marrubi. pseud.dict. 
Thymus masticliina 
Calamintha cretica 
Alyssum spinosum 
Stauracanth. aphyil. 
Amorpha canesoens 
Lupinus arboreus 
Artemisia valentina 
Gleditschia sinensis 


Lonicera fleicuosa 

— japonioa, 3. p. 
Asparagus albus, p. 

— acutifolius 
Euphorbia imbri.p. 
Mespilus japonica, p. 
Vitex agnus-cast. p. 
AntirrlSn. molle, t. 
Lepidium subulat. 
Gordonia pubesc. p. 



3 M 4 



904 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Sect. II. Frame Succulents. 
6592. FRAME SUCCULENT PLANTS. 



FEB. MAR. APR. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO NOV. 


Euphorbia characias 








Saxifraga sarment. 
Euphorbia nicaensis 1 


Agave virginica 


Sect. III. Frame Herbaceous Plants. 
6593. FRAME HERBACEOUS PLANTS. 


FEB. MAR. APR. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO NOV. 


Heleboruslividus, p. 
Erinus filpinus, 3 

— hispanicus 
Arum crinitum, p. 


Arum arisarum, p- 


Saxifraga granulata 

— — pleno 
Satureia Juliana 
Mimulus luteus 
Pedicularis euphras. 

— myriophyl. 

— resupinata 
Erodium gjandulos. 

— chamaedryoi. 
Beranium argent. 
Lotus odoratus 
Marshallia lanceol. 

— latifoUa 
Arum tematum, p. 


Lobelia fulgens, 3./>. 

— splendens, 3 

— ceurdinalis, 3 
(Enothera rosea 
Saxifiraga sarment. 

— virginiensis 

— congesta 

— stellaris 

— bryoides 

— androsacea 

— oppositifol. 

— nvularis 
Saracenia flava, p. 

— purpurea 
Satureja gra;ca 
Scrophularia samb. 
Pedicularis recutita 

— foliosa 

— Terticillata 
Iberis urabellata 
Hedysarum murica. 
Hypericum setosum 
Eupator. urticse fol. 
Artemisia chamae. 
Rudbeckia laevigata 
Centaurea spinosa 

— sempervir. 

— aegj-ptica 
Calopogon pulche. p. 


Linum narbonen. p. 
Rhexia ciliosa, p. 
Saxi&aga mutata 

— autumnalis 
Dianthus japonic, p. 

— fruticosa 
Silene fabaria 
Sedum spinosum 
Euphorbia paralias 
Hydropeltis purp. p. 
Teucrium nissohan. 
Marrubium acetab. 
Antirrhinum asarin. 
Linaria triornithop. 

— bipartita 

— tristis 

— reticulata 

— alpina, p. 

— villosa 
Pedicularis seep car. 

— flammea 

— tuberosa 

— compacta 
Lupinus villosus, p. 
Glycine reniforme,|). 
Hypericum mutil. 

— crispum 
Iresine celosioides 


Statice auriculaef. p 

— emarginata 

— cordata 

— spatulata 

— speciosa 

— conspicua 
Saxifrciga auspera 

— hirculis 
Scrophularia mellif 
Stevia salicifolia 
Artemisia indica 
Zeiluzania triloba 
Bupthalmum man? 
Coreopsis feruluefol. 
Urticanivea, p. 


Sect. IV. Frame Bulbs. 
659^. FRAME BULBS. 


FEB. MAR. APR. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO NOV. 


AUium.chamae-mol . 


^Omithogal. arab.p. 


Onrithogalum squil. 


Omithogalum ixloi. 


Omithogalum latif. 

— juncifo. 
Uropetalon fulvum 
Hypoxis juncea, p. 
Helianthemum tub. 


Uropetalon serotin. 


Sect. V. Frame Biennials. 
6595. FRAME BIENNIALS. 


FEB. MAR. APR. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 








Acynos alpinus 
Verbena aubletia 
Lepidium subulat. 

— cardamines 
Cichorum nosum, s 
Cnicus casabonae spi- 

— afer 

— diacanthus 
Gnaphalium 

— foetidumj s. 


Gaura mutabilis 
Origanum majorana 
Celsia arcturus 

— cretica, s. 

— lanceolata 




Sect. VI. Frame Annuals. 
6596. FRAME ANNUALS. 


FEB. MAR. APR. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 






Mazus rugosus 
Trichosanthes au- 
guina 
— cucumerina 


Saxifi-aga hederace£ 
Momordica balsa- 
mina 

— charantia 

— operculata 
_ luffa 







The propagaUon and culture of frame exotics is the same as for green-house plants. 



Book II. 



GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



905 



Chap. XII. 

Green-house Plants. 

6597. Of green-house plants we shall first arrange some of the more select tribes, and 
next class the most showy and easily-flowered sorts, under the head of woody, succu- 
lent, climbing, herbaceous, bulbs, annuals, and biennials. Each of these subdivisions 
will be arranged as before as far as respects time of flowering and color ; but consider- 
ing the limited height which all exotic plants attain in pots, it has been considered un- 
necessary to attend to size. Such as are trees in their native country will be indicated 
by the letters ir, and also such as are biennials by the letter b ; the most tender t, most 
showy s, and those continuing in flower two or three months 3, as before. 

Sect. I. Select Green-house Plants. 

6598. As select green-house plants we shall consider the geraniums, heaths, and ca- 
mellias ; which three tribes united will supply a green-house with flowers of almost all 
colors, during every month of the year. 

SuBSECT. 1. Geranium. — Geranium, Ti. Geranium, Erodium, axidi Pelargonium, of 
modern authors. Monadeljyhia, L. and Geranice, J. Geranier, Fr. ; Geranium, Ger. ; 
and Geranio, Ital. 

• 6599. The geranice tribe comprehends numerous species and varieties of herbaceous 
sufFruticose and shrubby plants, generally of a somewhat succulent nature throughout. 
They are almost all natives of the Cape of Good Hope, and with the exception of three 
or four species, have been introduced, or originated here from seed, during the present 
and latter end of the last century. They are chiefly admired for their flowers, which 
they produce in abundance from May to September, generally in corymbs from the 
axillae of the leaves, of every shade of red, scarlet, and purple, mixed with white and 
yellow. The plants are easily cultivated, and by proper pruning, with the aid of gen- 
tle forcing in winter, many of the species, as the P. zonale, cuculatum, cordatum, &c. may 
be kept in flower all the year. The best collection of this family is in the nursery of 
Messrs. Colville, under the care of the botanist Sweet, whose Geranice, now publishing, 
is the most elegant and complete work of its kind. 

6600. Species and varieties. Many species and subspecies have been received from the Cape ; but the 
greater number of the admired sorts have been raised in this country from seed ; some of these have re- 
ceived systematic appellations, but the greater number have been named by those who raised them after 
themselves, or their friends, in the manner of florists' flowers. The following table contains some of the 
old estabhshed sorts, arranged according to their habits of growth and time of flowering; the flowers of 
most of the sorts are so mixed in regard to color, that it is almost impossible to class them in that respect j 
most of them are variegated with red, purple, scarlet, and white. 

6601. GERANIiE. 



FEB. MAR. APR. 



Pelargonium 

— dipetalum 

— spatulatum 

— affine 

— roseum 

— pictum 

triphyllum 

punctatum 

floribundum 

_ bubonifoliura 

— rapaceum 

_ fissifoliumlut. 

— laciniatum 

— carneum 

— grenvillianum 
pulchellum 

ignescens 

— ardens 

— Oenothera 

— eriostemon 

— procumbens 

— oordatum 



Pelargonium 

— longifblium 

— allatum 

— longiflorum 

— elegans 

— altha;ides 

— mjTrrhifolium 

— grevillianum 

— crenatum 

— conduplicat. 

— Barringtonii 

— sidajfohum 

— cucullatum 

— speciosum 

— acerifolium 

— quinatum 

— araplissimum 

— fuscatum 

— patulum 

— sororium 

— gi-andiflorum 

— gratum 

— variegatum 

— delphinifoli. 

— cynosbatifolia 

— spinosum 

— ctispum 

— gibbosum 

— Beaufbrtiana 



Pelargonium 

— undulatum 

— auriculatum 

— purpurascens 
_ Tirgineum 

— atrum 

— nervifolium 

— nummularifol. 

— pilosom 

— melananthon 

— chamEedrifolium 

— ovale 

— anceps 

— senecioides 

— coriandrifolium 

— glaucuni 
_ dentatum 

— stenopetalum 
_ pumilum 

— zonale 

— marginatum 

— cochleatum 

— pubescens 

— rugosum 

— ruljens, s. 

— papilionaceum 

— glutinosum 

— hisipidum 

— ceratophyllum 

— crithmifolium 
Erodium 

— alpinum 
Geranium 

— canesens 

— incanum 
—J .erubescens 



Pelargonium 

— radiatum 

— lineare 

— punctatum 

— dioicum 

— revolutum 

— ozalidifblium ' 

— reflexum 

— astragalifolium 
_ coroniUsefolium 

— luteum 

— barbatum' 

— incrassatum 

— blattarium 

— tabulare 

— grossularioides 

— lacerum 

— multicaule ' 

— caucalifolium 

— diversiflorum 

— cuspidatum 
_ penicillatum 

— betulinum 

— formosum 

— scandens 

— lateritium 

— saniculBefolium 
_ australe 

— vitifoUum; 

— capitatum 

— hermannifolium 

— adulterinum 

— abrotanifolium 

— teriuifolium 
Geranium spinosum 



Pelargonium _ 
lobatum 

— triste, t. s. 

— flavum 

— alchemilloides 

— odoratissima 

— fragans 

— inodorum 

— columbinum 

— coronopifolia 

— tricolor 

— reniforme 

— inquinans 

— heteroganum 

— monstrum 

— crassicaule, t. 

— peltatum 

— lateripes 

— tetragonum, t. 

— variegatum, t. 

— angulosum, t. 

— graveolens 

— radula 

— denticulatum 

— semitrilobum 

— splendens 

— fulgidum, s. 

— altemans 
Erodium crassifoli. 

— incamatum 

— geranifblium 



SEPTEMBER. 



Pelargonuim 

— balsameum 

— quinquevulner. 

— bicolor 

— canariense 

— tricuspidatum,*. 

— scabrum 

— gratum 

— consanguineum 

— pallidum 

— obtusifolium 

— tripartitum 

— exstipulatum 

— unicolorum 

— willdenowu, 

— laevigatum 
_ fragile, t. 

— incisum 
r- carnosum 

dasycaule 

— lanceolatura 

— acetosumi 

— hybridum 

— reniforme 

— cortusaefolium 

— candidum 
Erodium hy menodes 



6602. Propagation. The ordinary mode of continuing each species, is by cuttings, but almost all the 
sorts produce ripe seeds in this country, by which they may be multiplied, and also new varieties produced. 
The seed, if ripe before midsummer, may be sown as soon as gathered, in pots of light rich earth, and 
placed in a gentle hot-bed and shaded ; the iilants will soon come up, and if, when they show two proper 
leaves, they are transplanted singly into pots, and kept under a cold-frame, they will flower the same 
autumn. No plant grows more readily by cuttings than the shrubby or suffruticose species of this family : 
the cuttings may be taken off at a joint where the wood is beginning to ripen; laid in the shade for an 
hour or two till the wound heals ; and then planted in sandy loam, and placed in a gentle heat. The 
hardier sorts, as P. zonale, inquinans, &c. will strike in the open air or in any shady situation, without 



906 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

being covered with a glass. Cuttings of the roots of such sorts, as P. triste, gibbosum, &c., strike readily; 
a small portion of the root being left above ground. The fibrous-rooted herbaceous sorts, as E. Chamae- 
dryoides and glandulosum, may be multiplied by dividing the roots. " From the latter end of March to 
the middle or end of July," Cushing observes, " cuttings of all the common kinds of geranium may be put 
in with success : Let a moderate hot-bed be made up, and surfaced with some old tan ; when it is of a 
proper temperature, let the cuttings be made, and put in some nice rich loam ; plunge the pots to the 
rim on the bed, and shade them for a day or two, but no longer. Pick off any damping leaves that may 
appear, water them occasionally, and observe to pot them off in due time, by which means they wiU be 
stout plants by the end of, autumn : the more curious kinds are in general done by cuttings of the thick 
fleshy roots, which they produce in abundance : as many of these as can be spared with safety being taken 
off carefully from each plant, and a few of the finer fibres attached to them and neatly potted in small pots, 
leaving the crown of each about one fourth of an inch over the surface, watered and set on a moderate 
heat, will, in a few weeks, make excellent plants : one, two, or more stems, which they in general pro- 
duce, being left to form the plant." {Exotic Gard. 90.) 

6603. Culture. The geranise require a light rich soil ; they grow well in equal parts of sandy loam and 
well rotted dung ; or they will grow in leaf-mould and a little sand, without any thing else. As most 
species are rapid growers, the pots require to be examined in spring and autumn, and the roots and top 
reduced, or the plant shifted into a larger pot. In general the shrubby sorts should be kept low and 
bushy by pruning ; for when they are allowed to grow tall and straggling, they are very unsightly and do. 
not flower well. Some of the herbaceous sorts may be considered as frame plants ; but the greater number 
require the green-house, and some of the very succulent sorts are best grown in the dry-stove. When an 
extensive collection of geraniums is kept, it is desirable to devote a house entirely to their culture ; in this 
the roof should be of a construction to admit as much light as possible, the stage should be near the glass, 
and there should be ample means of giving air and heat. Most of the species require rather more heat 
during winter than evergreen woody exotics from the same climates ; otherwise they are apt to lose their 
leaves and rot at the points of the shoots. To prevent this, heat should be given in the dajtime and ai' 
admitted, and whenever any leaf begins to decay, it should be removed. The hardier geranije, like other 
green-house plants, are generally placed in the open air from May to September ; but as the flowers are 
much injured by heavy rains and winds, the more delicate sorts, and all those intended to flower in the 
best manner, should be kept in the house with abundance of air night and day. In warm situations it is 
customary in April or May, to plant many of the P. zonale and other free-growing sorts in the borders of 
the flower-garden or shrubbery : these have a splendid effect till attacked by frost, when their roots may 
either be protected where they stand by abundance of Utter and mats, or they may be removed into single 
pots, and placed in a dry part of the green-house till the following spring. The Rev. W. Williamson has 
found, that if the plants- are taken up, deprived of their stalks and fibrous roots ; the wounds made in doing 
this healed by exposure in a dry place ; and afterwards the roots deposited in layers in a mass of sand, 
placed in a cellar, or otherwise excluded from frost, they will retain their vegetative power through the 
winter, and grow vigorously when replanted in the open air in spring. {Hort. Trans, iv. 414.) 

6604. Forcing the geraniiE. The hardier shrubby sorts force well with a very gentle heat, and in this 
way may be kept in flower during the winter months till April and May, when they will be succeeded by 
those that have been kept in the common green-house temperature. 

SuBSECT. 2. Exotic Heaths. — Erica, L. Octandria Monogynia, L. and EricecBi J. 
Bruyere, Fr. ; Heyde Kraut, Ger. ; and Macchia, Ital. 
6605. The heath family constitute an extensive assemblage of low shrubby evergreen 
plants, much valued for the beauty of their flovv^ers, and the blossoming of many of them 
in the winter season. Scarcely any exotic heaths were known in Miller's time, and none 
of the Cape species. Almost the whole of these have been introduced to Europe during 
the reign of Geo. III., and the greater part by Masson, a collector, who made two 
voyages to Africa at that king's expense. 

6606. Species and varieties. Above 300 species have been introduced, some of which, from the difficulty 
of propagation, or accidental causes, have been lost; but there are still upwards of 250 sorts, which may 
be procured from the nurseries. There are also several varieties which have been raised from seed. The 
Hon. and Rev. W. Herbert has raised several hybrid heaths, which gives reason {Hort. Trans, iv. 27.) for 
thinking that many of the sorts imported from the Cape, and considered as species, are only hybrids pro- 
duced by promiscuous impregnation. We have here arranged most of the sorts procurable in the nur- 
series ; and, in addition to the time of flowering, height in inches, and color, designated the form of the 
flower, as bell (6), pill or tube shaped (p), open (o), roundish (r), or ventricose (y). 

6607. ERICA. — MARCH. 



HeigJUfr.OtoGincli. 


From 6 to 12. 


From 12 to 18. 


From 18 to 24. 


From 24 to 30. 


From 30 upwards. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Ardeiis, Feb. o. r. 












PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


OppositifoUa, o. v. 












YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 




PaUens, Feb. p. 










GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 








Vemix, r. 












— major 






WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 




Barbata major, p. 












— minor 












— discolor 














A T>T?TT 






RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 










Costata, i. 




PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


Mutabilis, v. 


Finitiana, o. 


Baccans, r. 


Linnaeoides, t. 






Gracilis, p. 












Praecox, p. 










YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 








Sessilifolia, t. 


Spicata, t. 




GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 








Sessiliflora, t. 






WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Acutargula 




Aristata, o. v. 1 Gelida 


Piscolor, t. 





Book II. EXOTIC HEATHS. ^ 907 



ERICA. — MAY. 



Height fr. Oto6 inch 


From 6 to 12. 


j From 12 to IS. 


From 18 24. 


From 24 to 30. 


Frirni 30 upwards. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Fimbriataj p. 


Kalmiaeflora, o. 


Acuminata, t. 


Ruffa, t. 




Viscaria, r. 




TrivialiSjp. 


Persoluta rubra, p. 


Versicolor, /. 






Trossula rubra, j;. 


— conferta 


AndromadcEflora, r 








Venusta 




Tubiflora, t. 








Squarrosa carnea, t 




— fissa 
Spuria pallida, t. 






PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PU RPLE. 


PURPLE. 






Exserta, p. 
Fragran; 


Patens, o. 


Spuria, t< 




Concinna, i. 




Plumosa 








Mellifera, p. 


Racemosa 










Mollis 












Puerilis 










YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW.' 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 




Campanulata, n 
Lacticolor 


Muscaria, v. 
Tenuiflora, t. 


Ignescens 
Hybrida 


Enneapliylla, t. 




WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Arborea tacemosa 


Arctata, p. 


Actea, p* 


Pattersonia major, t. 






Squarrosa 


Biflora, r* 


Donnia 


Conferta, p. 






Cordata, o. p. 
Mundula, r, 
Odore rosae, o. r. 
Nigrita, r. 
Densa 
Stellata, p. 
Trossula alba, v. 
Ursina, r. 


— variegated 
Persoluta alba, p. 
Pinifolia discolor 


Flexuosa 










TTTXTT? 






RED. 




RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Longipedunculata, 


Bracteata, o. o. 


Linneea superba, t. 


Splendens, o, 








Pistillaris, p. s 


Empetroides, p. 


Reflexa rubra, r. 






Saturcifolia, o. p. 


Hyacinthoides, v. 


Laevis rubra 










Margaritacea incar- 
nata 








PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


Banksia purpurea, t. 


Blanda, o. t. 


Empetrifolia, p. 








Elevata, o. v. 


Concava, o. 










Droseroid. jniiior. ©■ 


Congesta, p. 










Elegans, o. ^ 


Depressa, t. 












Nivenia, o. v, 
Nobilis, o. p. 










YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


Banksia, t. , 


Halicacaba, v. 


Flammea, o. t- 


Simplicifolia, t. 










Epistomia, v. 










Erecta, t. 








WHITE* 




WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Acuta, o. it 


Nivea, r. 


LsBvis, p. 


Absyntlioides, p. 






Petiolata, p. 


Rostella, p. 


Linna?, t. 


Aristata scrotina, o. 






Primuloides, v. 




Margaritacea, p. 
Melanthera 
Pyrolaeflora, r. 
Bigerminans, p. 
Triflora, r. 


Reflexa alba 










TTTT V 


















RED. 


RED. 


RED, 


RED. 


RED. 


RED. 


Paniculata, o. 


Dickinsonia rubra 


Inflata, v. 


Colata, 0. r. 




Rosea 


Lachuiea rubra, op. 




Mucosa, p. 


— major, 5. o. 






Comosa conferta, v. 
— rubra 


Pedunculata 
Ramentacea 


Penicillata rubra, i. 
Pinifolia coccinea 








Kennedya, o. t. 


Walkeria superba, v. 


Hirta, t. 
Hispida, p. 








Parmentiera, t. 


Canescens, o. 








Ventricosa, r. 


Incana, o. r. 


Aitonia, t. 








— superba 


Incarnata major, p. 


Imbecilla, p. 








Hirta 


•Tuliana, v. 
Mosehata, j>. 
Propendens, o. 








PURPLE. 


•pTl U -pT -p 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


PURPLE. 


Droseroid. maj. o. r. 


Campestris, p. 


Obliqua, o. r. 
Perspicua, t. 
Pubescens major, p. 
Petiveria minor 

— minima 
Recurvata, r. 


Decora, v. 






Comosa alba, v. 
Protrudens 


Glauca, r. 
Sebana, t. 






YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. . 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 


YELLOW. 






Exsurg. coccin. d. t. 


Mollissima 


Oonspicua 


Grandiflora 




Lutea 


— fulgida 


Foliosa, t. 






Magnifica, o. 1. 


Petiveria aurania 


Formosa, t. 








iiebana minor 


jlabra, b. t, 










Tetragona, i;. 
Thunbergia, r. 


Hibbertia 










— minor 










Patersonia coccinea 
Sebana fusca, t. 

— aurantia 

— lutea, i. 






GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Massonia ferugin. t. 
— minor 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 


GREEN. 

Coronata, o. t. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


WHITE. 


Cistifolia, o. d* 


campanulata, o. 


Asurgens, p. 


VTarifolia, p. 




^'estita alba 


LachiiEca, o. 


Dickinsonia alba, p. 


2!apitata, r. 


VIonsonia minor, v. 






Rupestris 


jlomerata 


Decumbens 


Penicillata, /. 






Pehiza, o. r. 


flurnea, v. 


Pinifolia 








Retorta, o. v. 


[Jrceolaris, r. 


Tiiumphans, r. 








Brevifolia, o. 










Rotundifolia 












Sexfaria, r. 












Thymifolia, p. 










VARIEGATKD. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATED. 


VARIEGATFD. 








VIelastoma, f. 1 





908 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



ERICA. -AUGUST. 



Height fr.O to 6 in. 



RED. 
Pumilla, o. r. 



WHITE . 
Intertexta, v. 



VARIEGATED. 



: 6 to 12. 



RED. 

Calycina major, o. 
Obcordata rubra. 
Paradibiaca, ji. 
Peltata, o. 
Flagelliformis, p. 
Tajcifolia 
Deflexa, p. 
Noisettea, r. 

PURPLE 
Scai-iosa, r. 



PURPLE. 
Lucida, p. 
Quadritiora, r. 
fetrigosa, p. 

YELLOW. 

Alben<;, 
Denticulata 

GREEN. 
Bandonia, t'. 
Geinmifera, o. t. 

WHITE. 
Argentiflora, t. 
Asptra, p. 
CattVa 

.t. IDaphneeflora, u. 

Lambsrtiai o. r. [ Fastigiata, 
Froboscidea 1 Flaccida, p. 

Struthiolseflora, o. Pendula 

iPhyllicoides 
'Shannonia, ii. 



WHITE. 

Aggregata, p. 
Densa 

Xnfundibuliformis, 



FrMJi 12 to 



From 18 to 24. 



RED. I RED. 

Ignescens, i. jAnipullacea, o. v. 

Rubella, j>. '.Broadlyaiia, o. «. 

Rubens Carinata, t> 
Sebaiiasanguinea,<. Salisburia 

Templea, 0.0. Jasminitlora, j'. 

Denticulatarub- 0. .Vestita incarnata, f 

Mucoioides, p. A'erticillata, t. 
PJ-ida, t. 



IPellucida 

PURPLE. 
jMammosa, t. 
— major, i 



YELLOW. 

Horrida, t. 
Nudi flora 

GREEN. 
Swainsonia, o. t. 

WHITE. 

Arbutiflora, r. 
Cupvessina, p. 
MirabUis, t. 

' — major 
Pnysodes, v. 
Pilosa, t. 



VARIEGATED. 



VARIEGATED. 

Caffra spicata, p. 
I Tricolor minor, o. t 

SEPTEMBER. 



VARIEGATED. 
Tricolor major 



From 30 tipnards. 



RED, 

JJlongata, t. 



I RED. 

Bucciniformis, t. 



GREEN. 

Imperialis, t. 



VARIEGATED. 



I YELLOW. 

Elata, t. 



GREEN. 

Massonia, v. 



WHITE , 
Moiisoiiia, V. 



VARIEGATED. 



RED. RED. 

Declinata, p. Coccinea, 
Fibula — major 

Floribunda | iNIucronata 

Flunkenetia nana, t. Globosa, ■> 



PURPLE. 

Smithia, p. 
Archeria, v. 

YELLOW. 
Speciosa 



Cernua. p 
Imbricata 



PURPLE. 

Cathroides, o. 

YELLOW. 

Glandulosa 
Lanu^iniosa, v. 



WHITE. 

Cumulata 
Occularla 
Pura, t. 
Solandra 



RoUi 

Archeria, o. t. 
Princeps, o. v. 
Embeicens, t. 
Palustris, p. 
PulcheUa 
Scabriuscula, p. 
Sebana viridili 



PURPLE. 

Tiaraeflora 
Rugata, t. 

YELLOW. 



RED. 

Pregnans coccin. v. 
Cameola 
Multiflora, p. 
Preguans, v. 



PURPLE. 

Vestita purpurea, i 

YELLOW. 

Petiveriana coc. t. 

Glutinosa 

Fetiveriana 

GREEN. 
Superba 
Viridiflora 
Viridescens 

WHITE. 



OCTOBER. 



RED. 

Vestita coccinea, i. 



PURPLE. 

Vestita fulgens, t. 



PURPLE. 

Rosacea, o. 



YELLOW, 
Radiata, t. ; 



RED. 

Turgida, r. 
Horizontalis, t. 
Pyramidalis, o. 
Perlata rubra, p. 
PURPLE, 



YELLOW. 

Corrugata, t. 
Picta 

Serratifolia 
Flava, t. 

GREEN. 
Viridis, t. 



WHITE. 

Denticulata alba, v. 
Perlata, p. 



RED. 

Cerintlioides Ian. <. 
Pulverulenta, r. 
Cerinthoides cap. i. 

PURPLE. 

Filamentosa, v. /. 
Purjjurea 

YELLOW. 
Aurea, /. 



WHITE. 

Pinastri, t. 



GREEN. 

Euerana, t. 

— pilosa 

— speciosa 
WHITE. 



RED. 

Cerinthoides clota 



-NOVEMBER. 



RED. 
PURPLE. 
\ELLOW. 
WHITE. 



RED. 
PURPLE. 
YELLOW. 
WHITE. 



PURPLE. 
Laxa, p. 

YELLOW. 



RED. 

PURPLE. 
Colorans 

YELLOW. 
Sulphurea, t. 

WHITE. 



RED. 
PURPLE. 
YELLOW. 
WHITE. 



RED. 

Vestita rosea, Dec. *. 
PURPLE. 

YELLOW. 

. WHITE. 



Book II. 



CAMELLIA. 



909 



6608. Propagation. A number of the sorts ripen their seeds in this country, and may be so propagated ; 
but the greater number are struck from cuttings, and some few, as E. massoni, retorta, petiolata, &c., by 
layers, which require two years to throw out roots. The seeds are often imported from the Cape, and 
arrive in winter : they should be sown early in the spring following, in frames filled with equal parts of 
peat and sand, very thinly covered, placed in the shade, and bell-glasses placed over them. The soil must 
be kept moderately moist by gentle waterings : they will in general come up in six weeks or three months, 
and may then be kept close to the glass in the heathery, or in a frame or \nt till autumn, when they may 
be potted off. Seeds which are saved in this country may be sown as soon as gathered, if they ripen before 
September, but after that period it will be better to preserve them till next spring; as the plants produced 
from them would not be sufficiently advanced to endure the winter. Gushing {Exotic Gard. 74.) prefers a 
September sowing, because he finds the plants will stand the winter in the seed-pot better than those that 
have been raised early in spring, and transplanted in autumn into single pots. Ample directions for strik- 
ing heaths will be found in Cushing's Exotic Gardener, who observes, that cultivators failed at first by 
planting large cuttings of ripened wood, instead of taking only the points of the fresh shoot. The true 
method, he considers, of propagating heaths was first discovered in the Hammersmith nursery, and the 
following abstract of the practice there is from Page's Prodromus. " About the month of June, or as soon 
as the plant has made fresh shoots, cut off' the extreme points about an inch long or less, according as the 
sort may afford, but always in the fresh shoot ; take off' the leaves from the lower part, as far as it is to be 
put in the sand, without injuring the shoot ; this is rather a nice operation, and should be done with a 
sharp penknife, for the least bruise spoils the cutting. Dibble them into a pot, filled with moistened com- 
mon white house-sand, before they have time to flag; when they are all planted, water the whole to fix 
them still better; let the moisture a little subside, then cover them with a small bell-glass, fitted within 
the rim of the pot, and place them in the shade on a spent hot-bed, keeping them close till rooted, which 
will, with the free sorts, take place in about two months : when rooted, which is known by their shooting, 
take off" the small glass, for about a week, at night, previous to its total removal. They will be fit to pot 
off in March the ensuing year." 

6609. Henderson of Woodhall's mode of striking ericas is as follows : — "The month of July is a good time 
for putting in most of these cuttings ; but the cuttings must not be taken off till the young wood be firm. 
Cuttings of ericas may be put in at any time when the wood is in a proper state. Take the cuttings off the 
plants about three quarters of an inch long, pulling them off" downwards ; strip off" the leaves nearly half 
the length of the cuttings ; place the cutting on the nail of the thumb, and, with a shai-p knife, at right 
angles, cut off" the small end close to the joint, or place where it was pulled off' the plant. Having done 
this, plant them into a pot filled with small pit or river sand, giving them a good watering to settle the 
sand about them. Set them on a shelf where they are a little shaded ; cover them with glasses, and notice 
to keep the sand always moist. Some of these sorts will be well rooted in three months, and others will 
require six months." [Caled. Mem. iu. 323.) Henderson keeps his ericas, at all times, cool and airy; 
" opening the glasses in winter when there is no frost, and letting the wind blow on them, and using 
no fire but in time of frost. Never," he says, " shift any plant till the pot is quite full of roots. When 
the plants get large, several of them will continue in good health for three or four years without shifting, 
and flower well. I have plants of erica retorta here, in pots seven inches in diameter, which are very 
bushy, being eighteen inches across, and fourteen inches high above the pot ; erica infundibuliformis, two 
and a half feet in diameter, and two feet nine inches high ; erica pilosa, betwixt five and six feet high, and 
three feet across, in pots eleven inches in diameter : these have not been shifted for five years, and are in 
high health, and covered with strong fine flowers from the mouth of the pot to the top of the plant.'* 
{Caled. Mem. iii. 327.) 

6610. Culture. " A prejudice," Page observes, " having spread that the culture of these plants is diffi- 
cult, one of the greatest ornaments of the green-house has hence, of late, been neglected; although the 
method of culture is as easy, and nearly as certain, as that of the geranium, but requiring a little more de- 
licacy in the execution." The soil for all the species is peat-earth mixed witli from one sixth to one fourth 
of fine white sand. The pots should be well drained and rather small ; but large, in proportion to the size 
of the plants. Heaths thrive best in a house by themselves, and placed as close to the glass as possible, 
without risk from frosts : they do not require so much heat as most green-house plants, but abundance of 
air, and, above all, great regularity as to water, so as to preserve, as much as possible, an equable and moo 
derate degree of moisture about their roots. The mass of mould being once thoroughly dried, the plant 
is irrecoverably lost ; and it is equally so, though the opei-ation goes on with less rapidity, if the pot is kept 
in a pan of water. No kind of plant is more injured by being kept in a chamber than heath, nor will they 
thrive in a green-house or in the open air, within the influence of the smoke of large towns. In the best 
situations and under the best management, many of the species are short-lived, and therefore require to 
be frequently renewed by cuttings or seed. . " ' ^ 

6611. The ericas are not subject to insects. Henderson says " I have never had any insect on them except 
the green fly. The old grandiflora is the only one with me that has been attacked. I destroyed the flies 
by dipping the plant into an infusion of tobacco. The ericas, I find, do not agree well with being smoked 
with tobacco-paper in the usual way." {lb. iii. 327.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Camellia. — Camellia and Thea, W. Monad. Polyaml. L. and Aurantice, J. 

6612. Of the camellia genus there are four species introduced : the C. bohea, viridis, and 
sasanqua, are the plants whose leaves furnish the tea imported from China ; C. japonica, 
introduced in 1739, is an ornamental evergreen shrub, which grows to the size of a low 
tree in China, with dark-green ovate leaves, on short petioles, and flowers red, white, 
striped, and variegated, and single, semi-double, and double, without fragrance, but of 
great splendor and beauty, and peculiarly valuable, as appearing in December, January, 
and February. 

6613. Varieties. These are — 



There are above half a dozen other sorts, 
procured from seed, which are not yet 
named, and many hybrids have not yet 
come into flower. 



White ; the single, semi-double, double, I pink, buft; lonjt-leaved, striped-leaved, 

double w)iiteAvaratah,VVillbank's white, I myrtle-leaved. Lady Hume's, Greville's 

- fimbriated white, and spotted-leaved. I coronet, six-angled, and waratah. 

Red ; the single, semi-double, double, I Red and tvliite ; the striped, double, semi- 
pale, dark, large, paeony, pompone, | double, variegated, and spotted-leaved. 

6614. Propagation. The single red camellia is propagated by cuttings, layers, and seeds, for stocks ; and 
on these the other sorts are generally inarched, and sometimes budded or grafted. The cuttings are formed 
of ripened shoots of the preceding summer, which are taken off" in August, cut smoothly across at a joint 
or bud, two or three of the lower leaves only taken off, and the cuttings then planted and made firm with a 
small dibber, in pans of sand or loam, or, by some cultivators, sand and peat, or sand alone. The pans are 
kept hi a pit or cold-frame, without being covered with glasses, but shaded during powerful sunshine ; and 
in the following spring such as are struck will begin to push, when they are to be placed in a gentle heat. 
In September or October following, the rooted plants will be fit to pot off"; and in the second or third 
spring they may be used as stocks. Henderson puts in camellia-cuttings at any time of the year, except- 
ing when they are making young wood. He puts fifty cuttings in a pot of sand eight inches in diameter, 
sets them in a cool place in the back of a vinery or peach-house for a month or six weeks, and then plunges 



910 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



tliem to the brim in a hot-bed where there is a little bottom heat. A speedy mode of obtaining stocks is 
by planting stools in a pit devoted to that purpose, and laying these in autumn ; the following autumn 
most of the layers will have produced roots, when they may be taken ofFand potted, and used as stocks in 
the succeeding spring. Inarching or grafting is performed early in spring, when the plants begin to grow ; 
the chief care requisite is so to place and fix the pot containing the stock, as that it may not be disturbed 
during the connection of the scion with the parent plant. The graft being clayed over, is then covered with 
moss, to prevent its cracking. "When independent grafting is resorted to, the mode called side grafting 
(2031.) is generally used, as in the case of orange-trees (5910.) ; but the operation of tongueing is generally 
omitted, as weakening the stock, and unnecessan,-, with a view to prevent the scion from being blown oft" 
by winds. A few seeds are sometimes obtained from the single red and semi-double camellias, and from 
the single waratah ; these require two years to come up, but make the best stocks of any. The tea-camel- 
lias are generally propagated by layers, but will also succeed by cuttings. 

6615. Soil. Some cultivators grow the camellias chiefly in 'peat ; but Messrs. Loddiges, who hare the 
most numerous collection of this genus, formerly used loam, with a little sand and peat for most of the 
sorts ; and they are grown in a similar soil in the" Hammersmith nurser_v. Of late, Messrs. Loddiges find 
light loam alone to answer as well or better. In the Count de Vande's garden, at Bayswater, rotten dung 
is mixed with loam and peat, and the surface of the pots are top-dressed with fresh cow-dung, free from 
litter. The plants appear to us to grow most luxuriantly in a strong rich loam ; but to be most prolific in 
flower-buds in loam and peat. Henderson, of Woodhall, is one of the most successful growers of the camel- 
lia in Scotland ; his compost is as follows : Take one part of light-brown mould, one part of river-sand, one 
part of peat-earth, one half part rotted leaves. Mix them all weU together, and when the camellias re- 
quire shifting, put some broken coal-char in the bottom of the pots, and some dry moss or hA-pmun over it. 
(Caled. Me?n. iii. 316.) 

6616. Camellia-house. Camellias have the best efFect, and are grown to most advantage in a house en- 
tirely devoted to them. Such a house should be rather lofty, as the plants never look so well as when six 
or eight feet high, trained in a conic form, and clothed with branches from the root upwards. The 
plants should be raised near to the glass by means of a stage, which should be so contrived that as they ad- 
vance in height, it may be lowered in proportion. Only the very best crown or patent glass should be used ; 
because it is found, from experience, that the least inequality of surface, or thickness of material so oper- 
ates on the sun's rays, as to concentrate them, and burn or produce blotches on the leaves of the plants. 
Every cultivator must have obsers'ed that leathery shining leaves, like those of the orange, myrtle, &c., are 
more or less obnoxious to this solar injury ; but the leaves of the camellia are particularly so'. Some nur- 
serjTnen recommend a roof which will not admit much light ; others, the use of green glass ; of an oj^que 
roo'f, with glass in front only ; or, of a house facing the north. Our opinion is, that a light house facing 
the south, or, better stLU, glass on all sides, is essential to the perfect growth of the plants j and that all 
solar accidents may be avoided, or at least rendered of no consequence, by using the best glass, and placing 
the plants as near it as possible. 

6617. To grow the camellia to a high degree of perfection, considerable care is requisite. The roots are 
very apt to get matted in the pot, and by the space they occupy, so to compress the ball of mould as after a 
time to render it impervious to water. Hence frequent attention should be had, to see that the water 
poured on the pots, moistens all the earth, and does not escape by the sides of the pot, moistening only the 
web of fibres. The same cause renders examining the roots, and' shifting or reducing and replanting them, 
a necessary measure, at least once a-year. When the plants are in flower, and in a growing state, they re- 
quire to be liberally watered, and also a degree of heat somewhat more than is usually given to green-house 
plants. If this heat is not given in November and December, the plants will not 'expand their blossoms 
freely; and if both water and heat are not regularly applied after the blossoming season, vigorous shoots 
will not be produced. To form handsome plants, they should be trained with single stems to rods, and 
pruned so as to make them throw out side branches from everj' part of the stem : to encourage these, the 
plants should not be set close together on the stage. In summer they may either be set out of doors on a 
stratum of scorite, or on a pavement, in a sheltered but open situation ; or the glass roof may be taken ofiF! 
The hardier sorts, as the double reds, blush paony, flowered, &-c., answer very well when planted in the 
bed or border of a conservatory, provided the roof or entire superstructure can be removed in summer to 
admit the full influence of the weather. Where this cannot be done, the camellia and most other plants 
are better in portable utensils, which admit both of examining their roots, and placing them in the open 
air, or in a greater degree of heat at pleasure. The single and double red camehia will endure the open 
air, when trained against a south wall, and protected by mats in winter ; and there can be no doubt that in 
time these and other species will be more perfectly inured to our climate. 

6618. Henderson, of IVoodhall, gives the following account of his mode of treating the camellia. " The 
best time for a regular shifting of the camellias is the month of February or beginning of March. After 
shifting all those that require it, put them into the peach -house or vinen,-, where there is a little heat ; 
if there be no peach-house, vinerj-, nor pinen-, set them in the warmest part of the green-house. They 
will soon begin to make young wood. From the time they begin to make their young shoots, till they 
have finished their growth, give them plenty of water. They may be kept in the vinery or peach- 
house till they have formed their flower-buds at the extremity and sides of the young growths, wlien a 
few of them may be removed to a colder place, say behind the stage of tlie green-house ; for the camel- 
lias are fond of being shaded during strong sunshine. In three or four weeks after, a few more of the 
cameUias may be brought from the vinery or peach-house, and put into a cooler situation. This may be 
repeated three or four times, which wiU make as many different successions of flowering. Those that 
are wanted to come into flower early, may remain in the warm house till they are beginning to flower, 
when they should be taken to a cold place, say the coldest place of the green-house ; then give them 
plenty of "light only, and they will open their flowers well, and stand long. A camellia cannot stand 
heat when in flowe"r, indeed they seldom open their flowers fine when in heat, and, at all events, the 
flowers soon fall off. Those that are kept all the summer in the vinery, will come into flower by the 
first or middle of October, and a pretty large plant, having perhaps fifty or a hundred flower-buds, will 
continue in flower till the month of Ja'nuary. Those plants that are removed early from the vinery, 
will now be in flower, to succeed those that" were in flower in October, and have now done flowerin"g. 
These last should be immediately taken into the heat. They will make tlieir young wood early, and 
they may remain in heat till they come into flower, which will perhaps be a month earlier next year. 
By attending to shifting the camellia-plants from the wann house to the cold, a regular succession of 
flowers mav thus be had from the first of October to the middle of July. I have even had them all the 
summer, biit the flowers are best in the winter. Those produced in summer are far from being so 
fine, and do not stand half the time of those that come into flower in November, December, Januarv, 

-February, March, and April. Camellias delight to be kept damp all the summer montlis, and a little shaded 
from the strong sun. Give them plenty of water while they are making their young shoots; they may 
also get a gentle sprinkling over the leaves once every week during the summer season, except when they 
are in flower. Camellias will stand a great deal of cold without being much injured, but they will not fonii 
many flower-buds without some artificial heat. I find they flower best when kept in rather .small pots or 
tubs. I never shift them but once in two years, or often once in tliree years. There are several very large 
camellias here that have not been shifted these five years, and they are still in high health, having 
always produced above a hundred fine large flowers every year. Six years ago, I shifted a single camellia 
from a twelve-inch pot into a tub seventeen inches wide by seventee'n deep, and grafted it with two dif- 
ferent sorts of double red, one double striped, and one double white : it is still in the same tub, and all tlie 
four sorts in high health. I have had all the four sorts in flower at once on it, producing a fine contrast 



Book II. 



WOODY GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



911 



of colors. The plant is large and handsome, bein^ eight feet six inches high, and six feet nine inches 
wide. There is another plant here, twelve feet high, having upon it all tlie sorts I possess. They were 
only grafted last summer, and a number of the sorts are showing Howers ; grafts of all of them have taken 
and are growing well. The plant is growing in a box sixteen inches over by sixteen inches deep." {Calcd, 
Mem. iii. 316.) 

SuBSECT. 4. Various Genera which may be considered as select Green-house Plants, 
sliou'if, fragrant, and of easy culture. 
6619. Of other select green-house plajits, the first we shall mention is the citrus tribe, 
already treated of as fruit-trees (4879.) ; the beauty and fragance of which need no en- 
comium. They merit a house by themselves, though they will thrive perfectly in the 
same climate as the camellia. Tlie myrtle comes next in order : nerium is a well known 
genus, whose flowers are of great beauty and long duration ; fuchsia is universally ad- 
mired ; jasminum, gardenia, and daphne, have flowers of great fragrance ; heliotropium 
is remarkable as smelling like new hay ; various species and varieties of rosa indica 
and semperflorens are both beautiful and odoriferous, and flower throughout the winter. 
Among the new genera from the Cape and Botany Bay, acacia, mimosa, eucalyptus, 
melaleuca, metrosideros, and the proteacea, are admired for being prolific in showy 
flowers, vs hich, for the most part, appear early in spring, and being chiefly evergreens 
and large-gro-oing hardy plants. Diosma, gnidia, and strutliiola, are admired for their 
minute foliage and elegant flowers ; those of xeranthemum are prized for their dura- 
bility. Bignonia, coboea, dolichos, jasminum, lonicera, and passiflora, are admired 
climbers ; of passiflora some beautiful hybrids have been originated by Milne of the 
Fulham nurseiy. {Hort. Tj-ans. 'iv. 258. and v, 70.) Mesembryanthemum, cactus, 
and yucca, are curious and beautiful succulents; amaryllis, cyclamen, iris, ixia, and gla- 
diola, lachenalia, babiana, ferraria, and cxalis, are beautiful bulbous-rooted plants ; and 
calla, celsia, cineraria, lobelia, trop^olum, and jacobaja, select herbaceous sorts. 

6620. Tlie pi-incipal species of these genera will be found arranged in the following sections, with their 
colors, and other particulars, added to each. They are of easy culture, and, with the genera of the pre- 
ceding subsections, may be considered as affording the best choice for a small, showy, odoriferous, ever- 
green, and ever-flowering collection. 



6621, 



Sect. II. Woody Green-house Plants. 
WOODY GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS.— JAN. FEB. MARCH. 



Salvia dentata, p. 
Azalea indica 
Daphne odora, fl. purp. 
Camelia -rarious sorts 
Erica, various sorts 



Erica, various sorts 



Pogonia glabra 
Cluytia alatemoide 
Erica, various sorts 



Greticum, p. iBanksia paludosa, p. 

Phviica ericoides 
I — erubescens 
Bank>ia marcessens, p. 
I Daphne odora 

— fol. var. fl. 
I Erica, various sorts 
i Protea mellifera, fol. 
I — pendula 
Camellia various sorts 
Isopoaoa anetbifoUus 



VARIEGATED. 



Protea amplexicaulis 
Camellia, various sorts 
Erica, various sorts 



APRIL. 



Eoacrispungensroseajjj. Boronia pinnata 
^IvTsiue africana, p. | Cineraria ameloides 



Hermannia grossular. p. Banksia littoralis 
H\-pericum balearicum Drvandra tenuifolia 
— monogynum' Epacris attenuata 



VARIEGATED. 



Acacia pubesceusVp 

— suaveolens 
Parietaria arborea, p 



— — rubra 

— pungens alba 
INIyrtus commuri. ] '2 var, 
PhyUca pubescens, p. 
Isopogon formosum 
Protea longiflora 
Struthiola erecta, p. 



MAY. 



— cordifolia 
Bauera humilis, p. 

rubioides 
Chorizeraa rhombea 
Daviesia ulecina, p. 

— — major 
Fuchsia lycioides 
^lagnolia annonifolia, p. 

— fuscata 
:\Iahemia pinnata 
Melaleuca tomentosa 
Pseonia moutan 

— papaveracea 
Poly gal a mixta rubra, p. 
Striithiol. ciliat. fl. ru. p. 
Camellia, various sorts 



Cheiranthus mutabil. p. 
Daphne olefolia, p. 
Diosma purpurea, p. 
Indigofera australis, p. 
Lavatera maritima, p. 
Lotus jacobaeus 
Paeonia moutan, fl.pu. p. 
Polygala cordifolia, p. 

— heisteria 

— stipulacea 
''alvia afiricana 



Edwaidsia grar.diflora 

— — minor 

— mvcrophylla 
Genista linitblia 

— canariense 
Gnidia simplex, p. 

— pinifoUa 

— ciliata 

— radiata 

— sericea 

— capi'ata 

— flava 

— grandis T 
Pultenaea flexilis, i. p. 

— obcordata, t. 

— retusa, t. 



WHITE. 



Arbunis cassiuifol. p. 
Buchnera viscosa, p. 
Cistus vaginatus 
Correa alba, p. 
Diosma capitata, p. 
cilSata 
ericoides 
ovata 

- pulchella 

- uniflora 
■ — umbellata 
Empetrum albiun 
Hakea pugioniformis, p. 
IVfalva capensis, p. 
Melaleuca viridiflora 
Pittosporum undulat. p. 
Pomaderris elliptica 
Protea lanceolata 
Struthiola ciliata 

— imbricata 
— ovata 



Pultenaea flexilis, p. 

— hnophylla 

— obcordata 

— retusa 



912 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



JUNE. 



Brachysema latifot. p. 
Calothamnus quadrifida 

— villosa 
Cheiranthus tristis 
Corraea speciosa 
Crotolaria elegans, d. p. 
Epacrif grandiflora, p. 
lUicium tloridanum 

— parviflorum 
Melaleuca stypheloid. p. 

— thymifoUa 
Metrosideros angustifol. 

— floribunda 

— lanceolata 
ixylobium cordifol. p. 

_ imelia linifoUa,flo. ros. 
Virgilia capensis 



RED. 



PURPLE & BLUE. 



Convolvulus cneorum, p. 
Indigofera ani^ustifol. p. 

— purpureum 
I^siopetalum roseum, p. 
Podalyria calytrata, p. 
Poly gala brae teat a 

— cordifolia 

— oppositifolia 
Swainsoiiia Ralegifolia 

— betonicum 
Teucriura frulicans 



YELLOW, 



Brunia ericoides, p. 
Clitfortia ericaefolia 
Comjea viridiflora, p. 
Gnaphalium arborescens 

— congestum 

— grandillor. 
Gnidia imfcerbis 
Loddigesia oxalidifol. p. 
Acacia ensifolia 

— juhl^erina 

— piniiolia 

— lophantha, p. 
Pittosporum revolut. 

— tobiraj 
Acacia alata 



Andersonia sprengel. p. 
Buchnera pedunculata 
! Citiiis aurantium 

— buxifolius 

— decumana 

— limon 

— limonella 

— medica 
_ nobilis 

Diosma fragrans, p, 

— oppositifolia 
Empleurum serritulum 

— latifolium 
Gnidia oppositifolia 
Acacia loph^tha, p, 
Pimelia linitolia 
Protea candidaiis 
Zieria smitliii 



ORANGE. 



Bossiaea cineria, p. 

— heteropKyUa 

— scolopendiium 
Daviesia latifoUa 

— saligna 

— ericifolia 
Dilhvynia elaberima 

— hirta 

— floribimda 
Goodia lolifolia 

— pubescens 
PultenEa daphnoides, p, 
Sphaerolob. ^•imiueum 



JULY, 



RED. 


PURPLE. 


YELLOW. 


WHITE. 


ORANGE. 


Beaufortia decussata, p. 

— plauca 
Bouvardia triphylla, p. 
:;alothamnus gracilis 
?-olutea frutesoens 
Epachris pulchella, p. 

— — minor 
Fuchsia coccinea 
Hermannia flammea, p. 
Lambertia formosa 
MaiTub. pseudo diet, p- 
IMelaleuca densa 

— fulgens 

— pulchella] 


Grevillea linearis 
Lachnea purpurea, p. 
Lavandula pinnata 
Psoralea aculeata 
Salvia africaiia, p. 
Scabiosa africana, t. 
Swainsonia coron. fol. p. 
— galegifolia 


Cassia coryrabosa, p. 
Cytissus tomentosus, p. 
Gardenia Thunbergia 
Gnidia flava,.p. 

— grandis 

— sericea 

Hypericum coris, p. 

Jasminum odoratisslm. 

Leptospermum arbores- 
cens, p. 

Magnoha pumila 
Acacia aci!c.ularis 
Salvia aurea 


Aster argophyllus, p. 
Banksia prtemorsa 
Cassine maurocenia 
Cistus algan ensis, p. 

— canariensis 
Clethra arborea 
Dais cotonifolia 
Diosma imbricata 

— orbicularis 

— speciosa 
Dryandra floribimda 
Heliotropium grandiflo. 
Leptospermum ambigu. 
Protea latifblia 

— mucronifoUa 


Baeckia virgata, p. f 
Bosea yervzimora 
Bossiaea mycrophylla 
Buddlea salvifoha 
Platylobium formos. p, 
— minor 



AUGUST. 



Hermannia cuneifolia, p. 

— odovata 
Melaleuca decussata 

— globifera 

— hyjiericifolia 

— linarifolia 
Nerium oleander 

— flo. pleno 

— splendens 
Erica, various sorts 



Elseria purpurea, p. 
Diojma tetragona, p. 
Lavandula dentata 
Podalyria sericea, p. 
Polyg^a filiformis 
— speciosa 
Trachelium caeruleum 
Erica, variou-s sorts 



Brunia candica-.s, p. 

— elegans 
Hypericum canariense 

— crispum 

— olympicum 

— reflexum 

— lanceolatum 
Jasminum odoratisslm. 
Acacia discolor 
Plectranthus fruticosus 
Erica, various sorts 



Banksia attenuata, p. 
Beaufortia glauca, p. 
Celastrus cassinoides, p. 
Diosma latifolia 
Donnia glutinosa, p. 
Hakia ciiieria 
Leptosperm. obliquum 
1 _ _ _ flo. alb. p. 
Neriun) oleander 
I — — flo. plen. 
Protea umbellata 
Selaao corymbosa, p. 
SlTUthiola virgata, p. 



Eutaxia myrtifoUa, p 
Platylobium triangulare 
Tristania conferta, p. 

— nerifolia 
Erica, various sorts 



SEPTEMBER. 



RED. 


PURPLE. 


YELLOW. 


WHITE. 


ORANGE. 


Phlomis leonorus 
Ericae et Geraniae 


Ericae et Geraniae 


Gordonia lasianthus, p. 
Ericas et Geraniee 


Phylica ericoides, p. 
Protea tomentosa 
EricEe et Geraniae 


Ericae et Geraniae 



OCTOBER, NOVEMBER, DECEMBER. 



RED. 


PURPLE. 


YELLOW. 


WHITE. 


ORANGE. 


Phlomis nepetifolia, p. 
Lantana africana 
Eiicae et Geraniae 


Statice mucronata 
Ericae et Geraniae 


Linum trigynum, p. 
Ericas et OeranijE 


Arbutus longifolia, p- 

Piotea hypophylla, p. 

Gomphocari>us arbores- 
cens, p. 

■Westringia rosmarini- 
formis 

Ericae et Geraniae 


Ericae et Geraniae 



6622. Propagation. The method universally applicable is that by cuttings ; but a 
few sorts, whicli are very difficult to strike, are sometimes layered, grafted, or inarched, 
and a number are raised from seeds. 

6623. lilany green-house plants bring their seeds to perfection in this coiintrff ; at whatever time these 
ripen, unless before midsummer, it is best to keep them till the following February. Sown at that season 
they soon vegetate, and make strong plants before winter. The pots should be well drained, filled with 
mould suitable to the species to be sown, and the surface covered with mould of the finest quality, as a 
bed for the seeds. Several kinds may be sown in a pot, where the quantity of seed is not great, orlts 
quality doubtful ; cover with the same fine mould, according to the size of the seeds, -and then give a 



Book II. 



WOODY GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



913 



gentle watering with the finest-rose watering-pot. They may now be set in the most dry airy part of the 
propagation-house, where they can be regularly attended, as to watering and weeding. 

6624. Watering, Gushing observes, they will require at least once a-day, in a greater or less degree ; 
for if they are not kept properly raoist, the seeds will not by any means vegetate freely, if at all ; however, 
the other extreme is to be studiously avoided. The weeds should be regularly pulled out before they 
attain any size ; else, besides their tops smothering the young seedlings which may have started, the roots, 
in getting them out afterwards, not only disturb them, but also the remaining seeds that may be perhaps 
on the point of bursting their embryo. As the spring advances, it will be necessary to lay a few sheets of 
strong paper over the pots, for two or three hours in the middle of the day, if the weather happens to be 
clear, and the sun acts forcibly on them; particularly those in which the finer seeds are sown, in order to 
prevent the surface getting over dry and powder-like; or otherwise, if the mould happens to be pretty 
moist, it is liable to form a mossy crust, which might be particularly injurious, by preventing the young 
seedling ushering itself into the light, from penetrating through it with that ease which is requisite. In this 
manner must they be managed until the beginning or middle of June, at which season the larger kinds of seed 
may be removed to some shady border, where the pots can be plunged nearly up to the rim in coal-ashes 
or sand ; which will greatly assist to keep them in a proper moist state : here, all the care they will require 
is to be kept clear from weeds, and regularly watered, morning and evening, if requisite : but never when 
the sun shines strong upon them, lest the tender leaves of the young plants should get scorched ; it will 
be also necessary to have a careful eye daily for slugs, worms, &c. Should there be any fine light-covered 
seeds, such as heaths, &c. they must be set in such a manner, that they may be covered with a common 
hot-bed frame, in a moderately exposed situation, so that in case of sudden or heavy showers, which might 
otherwise wash the seeds out of the pots, they may be occasionally covered to preserve them from such 
violence ; yet they may be exposed to gentle rains at times, but never long together, lest they become over 
wet, which would soon perish them in this tender state. They will likewise require to be shaded with a 
mat in clear weather, or even a double mat, in the very hottest season. 

C625. Potting off. Early in July, many of them will be growing pretty fast, and will require to be 
potted off' into separate pots; as it is much preferable to do this while they are young and small, before 
their roots become matted together, than it is afterwards ; besides, that they have a considerable portion 
of the growing season before them to establish themselves, before the winter stops their career. In per- 
forming this work, care should be taken to match the pot to the size of the plant, and nature of the species 
to be potted ; as overpotting these small seedlings might be of the worst consequence. The largest-sized 
pots for this use, unless the plants are particularly strong, are what are called No. 60s : but^-for heaths, and 
such like very small articles, a still less size, known by the name of thimble pots, are to be preferred. 
Being provided with a quantity of these, and the different sorts of mould properly prepared, that may be 
requisite for the kinds to be done, proceed to part the plants ; in doing which, let the nicest care be taken 
to preserve as much roots and earth to each plant as can possibly be done without injuring the others : let 
them be neatly potted in the proper mould, which must be,<?ently pressed to the roots, that they may the 
sooner incorporate themselves with it. In this manner, pot as many as may be thought sufficient for the 
present purpose, at the same time allowing a few for mischances. They must then be well watered, in the 
manner already directed for seedlings, and set in a cool frame, on coal-ashes well rolled, or any other hard 
substance that will prevent the worms getting so freely into them, as they otherwise would. The light* 
must be kept constantly on, and closed, for a few days, more or less as circumstances may require ; and it 
will be also necessary to shade them very secure from the strong rays of the sun at first; however, in a 
little time, the lights may be taken off at night, if fine, having them on, and shading in the day, until by 
degrees the plants are so hardened as to be able to withstand the full power of the sun ; thus, in the space 
of a fortnight or so, they will be fit to be set along with the other plants. This business should not be 
undertaken later than the middle of August, for if executed at a more advanced season, the plants will 
not have time to establish themselves ; therefore, any that may remain in the pots, not strong enough to 
be parted by that period, should be removed into the propagation-house early in September, and there 
placed in their proper situation in that department until the spring following. Indeed, there are some 
seeds which absolutely require to be kept for that term before they will vegetate ; whereby it becom.es 
necessary to examine with care whatever pots have not by that time shown any signs of vegetation, and 
those which are found alive must be saved, and treated in the same manner as fresh-sown seeds. 

6626. The pots set in the house will require nearly the same treatment as usual, viz. to be kept perfectly 
clear from weeds, and regularly watered. "Water should now be given in the morning only, as any damp's 
it may occasion will have time sufficient to evaporate in the course of the ensuing day ; whereas, if given 
in the evening, it causes a chillness about their tender leaves, and from the necessary closeness of the 
house at night, not having free exhalation, it may do a material injury, not only to the seedlings them- 
selves, but likewise to theadjacent plants, by tending to increase the general damp of the house. When first 
housed, if the weather prove clear, they must be shaded for two or three hours at mid-day ; but this practice 
must not be followed too closely, as the influence of the sun is but seldom too powerful for them at this 
season, and during the winter months the more sun they receive the better : it is also necessary to be par- 
ticular in observing that no slugs, snails, or any other insect, harbor about them. Those seeds received 
from New South Wales, in general, as well as many others of the South Sea Islands, and also several of 
the lai-ger sorts from the interior parts of the Cape of Good Hope, from the warmer countries of temperate 
America, and in short, any of the climes in, or approaching the same latitudes, although the plants when 
grown will flourish and come to perfection in the green-house, yet the seeds will require the aid of a hot- 
bed when first sown, to set them in vegetation, and until they are parted and established in their separate 
pots, then to be hardened by degrees to the open air ; from which time, they may be treated as directed 
for the more hardy and common sorts of seedlings. {Exotic Gard. 84.) 

6627. JBy cuttings. This mode of propagation may be commenced about the middle 
or end of January. As young shoots in a growing state generally strike most freely, 
where these are wanting on particular specimens, the plants may be forced for a few 
weeks in the stove, or in any of the pits in the reserve flower-garden, to produce them, 
All the soft-wooded, tender, pithy kinds, such as indigofera, crotolaria, polygala, housto- 
nia, chironia, &c., as well as some of the more curious gerania3, may require this treat- 
ment. By the end of February, the heat will have produced shoots of from two to four 
inches in length, and from that to any time in March, proceed to cut and dress them 
neatly with a sharp penknife, taking off all the leaves as close to the stem as possible 
without wounding it, except a few at the top, to be left for the free respiration of the 
cutting : this observation should be particularly attended to in making cuttings of ever- 
greens in general, whether hardy or tender : let them be cut off at bottom with a clean 
horizontal cut, at a joint or bud, and immediately inserted in their proper pots. To have 
these properly prepared is a very necessary part of the business ; being well drained, 
they should be rather more than half iilled with the mould or compost best suited to the 
nature of the plant, and afterwards filled with good loam or sand, whichsoever may be 

3 N 



914 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IIL 



thought moi"e advisable to insert the cutting in : if sand is used, it should be previously- 
well watered, otherwise it cannot be sufnciently tiglitened to the base of the cutting ; a 
most essential point to be observed ; however, it should have time to be well drained off 
from the pot before the cuttings are put in ; as they, being so tender, are extremely 
liable to damp at this season ; than which nothing is more injurious. The loam will, in 
general, be found sufficiently moist of itself ; and should it be of a fine, sandy nature, 
so much the better ; but if not, a third or fourth part of fine sand should be added, and 
well mixed previous to its being used. 

6628. Being properly planted, let them be covered immediately with the proper glass, well fitted, and 
pressed moderately on the mould, so as perfectly to exclude the air. They should then be plunged in the 
front of the bark-pit of the propagation-house ; or otherwise in a hot-bed frame made up for that purpose. 
The inside of the glasses should be regularly wiped with a dr\' cloth every morning ; and any of them that 
happen to damp, carefully taken away before they contaminate the rest. If the sun happens to be un- 
clouded, they must be shaded for a fev/ days moderately with strong paper, or some such article; but by 
no means is it to be left on too late in the afternoon, as the cuttings being so soft and tender, are extremely 
susceptible of injury by over-shading. In the space of ten days or a fortnight, some of the free-rooting 
kinds will be making efforts of growth ; as soon as this is noticed, it will be necessary to give them a little 
air, by taking the glasses off every evening, when the sun is quite receded from them, and putting them 
on again early the following morning ; until they are by that means hardened, so as to be able to bear the 
full power of the sun without the glass, when it is to be entirely discontinued. If any of them should 
droop their heads when this operation is first performed, it is proper to refrain from moving the glasses 
until they have gained more strength. The shading is also to be decreased by degrees, but net so much 
as to be entirely done away while there remains any of them under glasses. In this manner is the business 
to be followed at diflferent inter^'als, according as the cuttings are ready during the months of March and 
April. 

6629. May and June is the most proper time for propagating most m- all of the woody sfirub-fike plants; 
such as myrtles, oranges, metrosideros, banksias, &c. and more particularly heaths, as the young wood 
will by that time be in general pretty far advanced. If this business is begmi in June, which is early 
enough, they must, on account of the increased heat of the season, be plunged in some cool shady situa- 
tion, where they can be conveniently shaded when requisite : an exhausted hot-bed, with a frame and 
good lights on it, will answer very well ; or otherwise, the north side of any low wall or hedge, where 
they will be a little sheltered from the noonday sun, and have the benefit of it morning and evening ; in 
either place, the pots must be plunged up to the rim in old tan or sawdust j and in the latter, they 
will also require to be covered with large cap-glasses over the small ones, as well mixed cuttings as 
heaths, except a few of the herbaceous sorts, such as arctotis, calendula, 8cc. and strong, substantial, 
broad-leaved kinds, as camellia, laurus, &c. which will succeed better without the small glasses at this 
season, so that they are covered with sound airtight caps. There are many others, indeed all late- 
growing deciduous, as well as evergreen sorts, as pomegranates, oleas, myrtles, &c. ; which, in general, 
only form their callosities previous to the ensuing spring, that do better without the small gLasses, as 
their leaves drop off much sooner when too closely covered, than they do when differently managed ; 
and it is well certified, that the longer the leaves are retained in an active state, the greater the pro- 
bability of success : this is to be merely understood as relating to late cuttings ; for the same articles, 
if put in early in spring, very young, in a moderate heat, closely covered, properly shaded and dried, 
will strike astonishingly quick. Cuttings of all the kinds that re'main to be proixigated should also be 
made at this season, and managed in the same manner. The whole b^ing thus arranged, they must 
be carefully shaded whenever the sun acts violently on them, especially when first put in ; but they 
ought not to be shaded longer than four or five o'clock in the afternoon, according to circumstances, 
as the mild influence of the sun at that hour will be necessary to dry up any damps that may have arisen 
within the caps. It will be also requisite to dry the small bell-glasses every morning, as directed for tlie 
spring cuttings, and to watc-r occasionally any of the pots which may require it ; for though it is proper 
to keep the top of the cutting Ciry, yet the mould in the pot must be kept as near a medium as possible 
between wet and dry, otherwise they will not freely vegetate. 

6630. Potting off. Some of the first put in spring cuttings will, in May or June, require to be parted 
and iwtted separately in small pots ; in performing which, be careful to avoid breaking the roots, using 
them much in the same m.anner as already directed for seedlings. "VMien potted and watered, they must 
be set in the propagation-house for a few days, and shaded until they have established themselves in the 
fresh mould : as soon as they have taken to grow freely, let them be removed to a frame ; but observe not 
to expose them to the open air entirely at first, as it might do them a material injury, on account of which, 
the lights over them should be kept closer than usual for a few days. About the middle of June, any of 
the tenderer green-house cuttings that have been left in the propagation-house since spring, should be 
plunged under the cap-glasses along with the others : where the whole must be carefully attended to every 
morning, to pick off damps, dry the glasses, and water when wanted ; it is advisable, when fresh watered, 
to let the glasses stand off for about a quarter or half an hour, to dry the surface a httle, except the sun 
happens to be verv clear, and shining direct on them. It has been already remarked, that there are many 
kinds which do better without the small glasses ; such as the strong-growing, spongy, and succulent kinds; 
also those with thick leathery leaves, as the camellia, and some species of ilex, &c. which are ver>- liable 
to have their leaves scorched" by the glasses collecting the rays of the sun. Any time during the inonths 
of June or July, cuttings of these sorts may be made with success ;^ as by that time the young shoots will 
be sufficientlv firm for that purpose, and will strike freely in good loam : but cameHias, and such like sorts, 
should not be cut until the shoots have finished their growth, and the leaves attained their full sire, as 
they are, when taken too young, particularly subject to rottenness and damp. In July and August, there 
will be many of the earlier cuttings growing; they should have their glasses taken off, as before directed, 
and afterwards be set for a few days in a more exposed situation, to harden them by degrees, in which 
they must be shaded from the mid-day sun, but freely exposed to the air at night. 

6631. Parting and potting should also be occasionally performed on such as are ready for that operation ; 
when, if anv of them happen to be more backward than others in the same pot, and not rooted, let them 
be put in again as cuttings, and treated as such ; those potted should be set in a cool frame, as directed 
for seedlings, where they must be kept close and shaded, except in miid weather, until they are by degrees 
inured to the free air. 

6632. jRc?nouing to ihc propagation-house. At the season in which it is judged advisable to house the 
general collection of green-house plants, it will be also requisite to have the cuttings removed to the 
propagation-house, to be cleaned, sorted, and regulated, according to their different kinds and st;iges 
of growth. The commoner sorts will do to be set in any part of the house where tliey will liave free 
air and light, and that they can be got at conveniently to water, and pick t!iem when nccessarj- ; tlie 
more curious kinds should be set in a dry airy part, where they can be carefully attended, to prevent 
their getting over dry or dirtv, and also to take the glasses occasionally off those that may be growing. 
All the backward heaths, prbteas, or any other hard-wooded kinds, such as are most of the Botany 
Bay plants, &c. that take a long time to strike, should be ^ct in one of the coolest and driest situa- 
tions of the hot-house, where they must be watered and cleaned, like the others, throughout the win- 



Book II. 



WOODY GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



915 



ter. Towards the commencement of the new year, many of them will begin to grow, therefore the 

glasses must be taken ofF such as soon as necessary. With the advancing season, these will likewise 
advance, and soon require to be parted, and potted separately. (^Exotic Gard. KTl.) 

6023. Almost all the woody green-house plants may be propagated by cuttiiigs j but a few are occa- 
sionally layered, inarched, or grafted, as the camellia, citrus, daphne, &c. which have been already 
treated of. 

6634. General culture of woody green-house plants. We shall commence with the 
shifting season, which generally takes place about the end of May, and trace, from Gush- 
ing, an outline for their general culture and management throughout the year. Green- 
house plants, this author observes, for the most part require a considerable share of 
pot-room, as many of them are very free growers ; but still great caution is necessary to 
avoid over-potting the tenderer weak-growing kinds. When shifted, let them be neatly 
tied up, if requisite, and well watered. Any dead or ill grown parts can now be, with 
propriety, cut away, so as to give the heads a regular neat appearance. In bright sun- 
shine it may be also necessary to shade them for a few days from the influence of the sun 
and winds, until they are perfectly established in the fresh mould. 

6635. Placing in the open air. By the middle of June, it will be time to think of preparing the 
out.door departments, in which it is intended the plants should stand during the summer months. The 
most eligible situations for this purpose are, the north aspect of vacant walls or hedges, where they will 
be a little shaded from the noonday sun, or between rows of close hedges, particularly planted for, and solely 
appropriated to this purpose. By no means set them close under the shade or branches of large trees ; as 
the plants are thereby inevitably drawn into a weak state in a few weeks, and those who adopt such situa- 
tions are not unfrequently under the disagreeable necessity of throwing av/ay many of, perhaps, their 
most rare plants, every autumn : and even those that remain will have a bad unsightly appearance. In- 
deed, shelter from the winds is the great desideratum to prevent their being upset, for most green-house 
plants are- fond of the warmth of the sun, except when recently potted, provideiJ their roots are kept 
moderately moist The practice of some gardeners is to plunge them amongst the shrubs and flowers of 
the pleasure-ground ; this answers pretty well with the strong-growing-kinds, such as myrtles, geraniums, 
coronillas, &c. old plants or supernumeraries that will not be wanted to house in the autumn ; and even 
has a very pretty effect when judiciously done ; but it will by no means do for the tender species. There- 
fore, upon the whole, the most unexceptionable situations are such as at the same timfe afford a moderate 
portion of shade, and are so situated as to break the force of those strong gales which frequently blow in 
the summer and early autumn months, and yet allow that free circulation of air so necessary to the well- 
being of plants in general, and at all seasons. Having fixed on the place where they are to stand, it must 
be thoroughly cleansed from weeds, and the hedges, if any, neatly clipped. It should then be well rolled, to 
make it perfectly firm and level, over it a layer of good lime, slacked and made into the consistency of 
thick white-wash, should be poured, and left to soak into the surface, as a preventive against worms 
getting into the pots. When this is dry, let about an inch of finely sifted coal-ashes be regularly laid on, 
and firmly rolled a second time. Being thus prepared, the plants may be brought out and set regularly 
and level on the surface, in whatever form or aiTangement may best suit the situation or the taste of the 
cultivator. 

6636. Housing in autumn. As the young tender shoots of the summer's growth are 'extremely liable 
to be injured by the frost, as soon as any symptoms of this appear, they should be removed to their win- 
ter quarters, where, if the green-house is built on a proper principle, they can still have the benefit of the 
free air, and at the same time be in a situation to be protected when necessity requires. They should, at 
all events, be removed in the earlier part of September. Therefore, about a fortnight before that time, 
they should be regularly examined, and any roots that may have extended themselves through the holes 
at the bottom of the pots, cleanly cut away : this tends to stop the too luxuriant growth, and being exe- 
cuted at a proper period, before their final removal, they have time to recover themselves from the partial 
check they may have received by it ; which would come doubly severe, if deferred until the time of re- 
moving them into the house ; the transition from the cool bottom on which they stood, to the dry boards 
of the green- house stage, being so materially different. Whatever may be the mode of arrangement 
adopted (6205.), the plants must not be set too close when first put in, as it would occasion most of their ten- 
der leaves to turn yellow and fall ofi^; neither should they, if the house happens to have been built on 
a close construction, be by any means taken in when their leaves are wet. 

6637. When they are all housed, and dirt of every description taken away, let as much free air be given 
as possible in the daytime ; and even at night, should the weather prove moderately mild, and free from 
any appearance of frost. Frosts, at this early season, are seldom so severe as to injure any green-house 
plants that were not immediately exposed to its perpendicular effect ; therefore the front windows may be 
kept open continually, unless there is a prospect of its being particularly severe, or accompanied with 
cold driving winds, in which case it will be necessary to have them pretty close. If air is too sparingly 
admitted at this season, when many of the plants have not yet finished their summer's growth, it will in- 
evitably cause them to produce weak and tender shoots, which will be extremely liable to damp off at a 
more advanced season, when the house must be unavoidably kept close on account of the severities of the 
external air ; and besides, it will tend to give them a more general tender habit, and render them less 
able to resist the .winter colds than they otherwise would. Hence it is evident, that they cannot receive 
too much air, whehever the state of the external air will admit of it, by being free from all appearance of 
frost, as it will be so iftuch to their advantage to be thus hardened before the winter assumes its greatest 
severity. 

6638. Water should also be plentifully administered when they are first taken into the house, as the dry 
boards on which they now stand, as well as the elevated situation and free circulating air, occasions them 
to require more than when they stood on the moist earth j however, by no means go to the extreme, giving 
it only when evidently necessary. 

6639. As the close foggy weather advances, water must be given more sparingly, else it will conspire with 
the atmosphere to increase the damps of the house, which will inevitably injure the plants, by rotting their 
leaves. These, and dead flowers, should be picked ofFas soon as they are observable, otherwise they will 
make a very disagreeable appearance. 

6640. The months of November a7id December seem to be more noxious to the health of plants than any 
other season, by reason of their being full of young sappy leaves, and the remains of many of the autumn 
flowers still on them, when the weather (which at this time generally becomes close and chilly,) renders 
it necessary to keep the house shut and warm ; this occasions a most pernicious damp to exhale from every 
part of the house, and even from the earth in the pots, which fixes on the leaves, and other parts of the 
plants, to their inevitable injury, particularly the younger parts, such as were the produce of the preced- 
ing summer. If this kind of weather continues for any considerable time, it will be advisable to give a 
little fire-heat, to help in drying up these baneful exhalations, and also as much air as can be safely ad- 
mitted by the doors and front windows, more especially when fire is added, otherwise the heat of the flues 
will, instead of expelling the contaminated air, rather occasion it to exhale more freely, and be of worse 
consequences. At this season also, #he plants should be regularly examined to clear them of all dirt, and 

3 N 2 



916 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part IlL 



also to scrape off any moss, &-c. that may have grown on the surface of the mould, and to renew it with a 
little fresh loam ; this contributes mucli to their good appearance, if neatly executed. 

GS41. Firc-hcat. Very little fire-heat seems to be requisite for the preservation of green-house plants 
in this climate ; in fact, the less it is found necessary to use the better. Except in the case of damp, as 
before mentioned, it need not be used till the frost be so severe as to lower the thermometer several de- 
grees below 4S°, and then merely sufficient to raise it again to that point. If this can be done without the 
assistance of lire, so much the better ; for which purpose, bass mats may be used along the lower parts of 
the house, where they can be conveniently fastened : these will be of infinite sen'ice, even when fire is 
used, as less of that element will suffice ; but they should be always taken ofTin the day to admit the light, 
unless the weather ha[)pens to be particularly severe. It may be also proper to remark, that the more dry 
the mould in the pots is kept at this season the better, as it will be less liable to attract the frost ; there- 
fore, water must be used very sparingly, and only to such as are in actual want of it. Sometimes, in the 
depth of winter, there is a succession of very clear weather for several days together, wherein warm sunny- 
days succeed the coldest frost, and nights in v. hich fires have been absolutely necessary ; in this case, it 
will be requisite to give all the air possible in the day, i unless strong harsh winds, or other occasional pre- 
ventives, hajji^en to prevail,) observing to s]uit the windows up close early in the afternoon, so as to 
include part of the natural heat of the atmosphere within the house. Such' weather renders an increase 
of water necessary, especially over the entrance of the flues, where the fires have the greatest force. It 
should be administered in the morning, and ought to be kept in the house all night, to e.xpel any frosty 
particles it may have imbibed, and render it nearly equal to the temperature of the air of the house. But 
unless water becomes actually necessary by the action of the fire, or the extreme drought of the season, (a 
circumstance not much to be dreaded in our climate at this time of the year,) the less water used the bet- 
ter; for though tiie plants in general like to be Vept pretty moist in the summer, there is hardly any thing 
mere pernicious to them now than an extreme of moisture. 

6642. JFinler and sjyruig treatment, insects, &c. During the months of January and 
February, and, indeett, all through the winter and early spring, on account of the neces- 
sary closeness of these departments, it may be expected to see a few dead or yellow leaves 
on the plants ; these, together v>ith the dead flowers, and whatever damps may occasion- 
ally appear, should be picked off as soon as discovered. 

GG43. The viildeiv and ^rcen fi!/ also be paying frequent visits at this season; particularly on the 
young shoots oi Iseaths, and such like tender-leaved plants. The best remedy for the first of these is, to 
procure about equal pro'jjortioiis of sulphur and roach-lime, slacked and finely sifted, the quantity accord- 
ing to tlie number of plants infected, to be used in the following manner : As soon as the least symptom of 
this disease is perceived, (for the sooner it is stopped the better,) which makes its appearance like a whitish 
down around the tops of the ter.dcr shoots, or a species of fungus on the back, or under part of the leaves, 
provide a vessel full of clear water, large enough to immerge the plant in, exclusive of the pot, which must 
be held in an inverted position, with the hand placed so as to prevent the mould falling cut; in this man- 
ner, plunge the plant into the water, and while it is wet, holding it in the same jiosition, let another apply 
the above preparation with a powder-pufF, or some such machine, in such a manner, that every part of the 
plant may be perfectly covered : one dressing in this way will, in general, be found sufficient. The plants 
should afterwards be taken to the reserve-department, or placed in some dry airy part of the house, not 
conspicuous, until it recovers its verdure. 

6644. As to thefy, fumigation with tobacco will be found adequate to its destruction ; strictly observing 
to perform it at the proper season, that is, when the air is perfectly calm, and if close foggy weather, so 
much the better ; every aperture should also be stopped, so as to exclude the external air as much as 
possible. 

6645. Towards t /I e end of ivhifer, the plants should be regularly examined, and cleaned from any filth 
they may have acquired during that dreary season ; such as moss on the surface of the pots, and leaves that 
have dropped thereon ; also any plants that may have grown into a loose habit should be tied up. The 
platforms or stages should be clean brushed, whilst the plants are removed, and any worms that may- have 
harbored in the pots dislodged, by turning them upside down, and lifting tliem carefully off' without break- 
ing the ball of roots, a.t the bottom or sides of which they are generally to be found. It is easily known 
when they are in the pots, by their casts on the surface. Indeed, this is a thing that should be attended 
to at every season of the year, as they are to be observed more or less at all times, and considerably disor- 
ganise the economy of the pot, when suffered to persevere. 

6646. As the spring advances, it will be found necessary and convenient to admit a more free circulatioa 
of fresh air, and on account of the increasing drought and heat of the season, water must be given more 
plentifully ; but the houses must not yet be left open at night, particularly the top-lights, as the weather is 
in general so very changeable at this season, that it frequently happens, although the evening may appear 
mild and serene, the morning ushers in with a severe frost, which, if admitted to the plants, would mate- 
rially injure them ; and perhaps at once render all the winter's care and attention abortive. Until about 
the middle or end of May, the weather seldom becomes in any degree settled ; but at that season we may 
venture to expose the plants both day and night to all the vicissitudes of the weather, should it continue 
in any degree moderate. Being thus treated, they will require a considerable increase of water, which may 
now be copiously given to them, particularly the more free-growing kinds ; but let the foUowingbe observed 
as a general maxim not to be departed from ; that it is necessary to the health of plants, especially the ten- 
derer species, to be permitted to become moderately dry before they are again watered ; because, when kept 
in a continual wet state, the mould becomes entirely destitute of that active quality so indispensably neces- 
sary to vegetation ; and the plant, in consequence, will assume a very unhealthy appearance, which many 
might perhaps not attribute to the proper cause. {Exotic Gard. ISO.) 

6647. Treatjnent of green-house lylants in a conservatory. This should resemble the 
treatment of plants in pots, as far as the difference of circumstances will permit. The 
plants in the conservatory cannot be set out in the open garden ; but the roof can be re- 
mov'ed to produce the same effect, and should be done about the same time. Instead of 
shifting, the soil can be refreshed by manure and top-dressings, or it may be entirely 
renewed ; and pruning, training, and attention to cleanliness and neatness are alike 
applicable to both modes of culture. When the green-house plants are housed, the lights 
or roof of the conservatory should be replaced. The plants, in the meantime, will 
require as much air as it is possible to admit on all fine days, and in case rain prevents 
the letting down of the roof-lights, the front ones, if auy, should be as open as possible. 
This is to prevent the plants being drawn into long naked stems, and weak branches, 
which, from iheir free habit of growth, they inevitably otherwise would be. As the 
cold of winter increases, which it naturally will do in the months of October, November, 
and December, a proportionate decrease must be observed in giving either air or water ; 



Book II. 



CLIMBING GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



917 



and, if necessary, add a little fire-heat, and mats along those parts of the glass nearest 
the plants, in such manner as to prevent the frost or piercing winds from injuring them. 
The conservatory, in these particulars, requires to be managed in the same manner as 
directed for the green-house. As few objects are more desirable than to preserve the 
gay appearance of the plants, it will be requisite to pay constant attention to the removal 
of decayed leaves and weeds of every description ; also to tie up or cut short any loose 
straggling branches that happen to show themselves, to remove those pots which may 
have been plunged or set on the pit when out of flower, and, if convenient, to have their 
places supplied with others in a fresher state. 

6648. During November, December, January, and February, the moisture of the atmosphere in such 
departments, where there is a great body of damp mould, will occasion several species of the bryum, and 
other mosses, as also of the fungi, to vegetate; particularly as the mould has had time to settle, and the 
surface to become of a close firm textiu-e, which would give the house a very unclean appearance. It 
must be remedied by frequently stirring with a small fork the whole of the pit, to the depth of two or three 
inches, and raking it over smoothly with a neat close-toothed rake ; which, as well as the fork, should be 
particularly adapted to this purpose, by being furnished with short handles ; so as to enable the operator 
to use thorn with freedom under the plants, by which means many branches and flowers will escape being 
broken off, which cannot be well avoided when awkward tools are allowed to be used for this purpose. 
As soon as raked, let some fine-sifted fresh loam be thinly scattered over the surface, and it will tend to 
give it a more agreeable appearance ; besides, being dry, it will serve to imbibe a good quantity of the 
superabundant moisture. 

6649. As the spring advances, they will require considerable attention to keep them in proper order, on 
account of their great increase of growth, more particularly the climbing plants, trained against the walls 
or trellis-work ; these should be daily attended to, and trained in their proper places ; directing their 
course to those parts of the house which, from their nakedness, appear to want them most: also these 
species of plants being remarkably free growers in general, it will frequently be found necessary to thin 
them, by cutting away any unsiglitly parts, and those branches most destitute of flowers ; by which means 
there will be sufficient room for the young vigorous growth, and these should be trained in regularly as 
they advance, otherwise they will attach themselves to the first object they meet, and render it diflicult 
to dress them neatly afterwards. 

6650. Slugs, snails, and other vermin, ai'e very fond of harboring among the leaves of these plants, 
when permitted to grow crowded ; also under any low bushy plants in the pit, whence they make their 
nightly excursions, to the great injury of the foliage in general, if not seasonably detected. The drought 
and warmth increasing with the year, will render it convenient to admit more air, and an increase of 
water ; two very essential points, that should never be neglected. 

6651. In summer, the liglits having been removed, as before directed, the plants should have any neces- 
sary pruning, and be all regularly fresh tied up, to secure them against the free action of the wind ; they 
will, if the weather happens to be dry, which is most frequently the case at this season, require an abund- 
ant supply of water, particularly the strong free-grovv^ing sorts, on account of being thus exposed to the 
open air. The cause for thus taking off the top-lights every summer is, that the plants may have the 
benefit of the warm invigorating showers of that season, and the action of the perpendicular air, which 
will be a great means of their acquiring that strong, healthy, robust growth, so much wished for : indeed, 
where it is not practised, the plants seldom fail of being drawn into the opposite unsightly extreme. In 
two or three years from the first planting, many of them Vv'ill be grown to as large a size as the house will 
admit. The knife must be then freely used among such, to keep them within bounds, and prevent their 
injuring each other, which they inevitably would, if permitted to grow too close together. However, in 
performing this, one must be very careful lest they disfigure the general appearance of the plant, cutting 
away only the rude and overgrown parts, which should be taken clean off, without leaving any of the 
stumps behind. The younger parts which are sufrei-ed to remain should then be tied neatly up, so as to 
form a handsome middling-sized bush. It will also be necessary to observe whether any have outgrown 
their neighbors in the front rows ; these may conveniently be moved into more backward situations, and 
their places supplied with other new varieties, if to be had. This work may be done with .safety any 
time in spring or autumn, when the weather happens to be a little dull ; it Will be advisable, however, to 
cut off a few of the most luxuriant shoots, and to run a spade or large trowel down, around the roots, so 
as to form a ball, some days previous to its final transplanting, which also operates gs a partial check on 
the free growth of the plant. It should be taken up with a good ball of roots and earth, and well watered 
as soon as replanted : it may also be found requisite to shade such as are thus removed lightly for a few 
days, if the weather happens to be very clear. {Cushing.) 

Sect. III. Climbing Green-house Plants. 



Those marked h have herbaceous stems. 



6652. CLIMBING GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 1 AUGUST. 


SEPT. OCT. 


Aristolochia semper, p. 


Asclepias camosa, jp. 
Hibbertia crenata, p. 

— ■volubilis 
Kennedia coccinea 
Psoralea palaestina 


Aristolochia glauca, p: Jasminum gracile, t. 
Bignonia grandiOora i — grandiflorum 
Capparii spinosa 1 — revolutum 
Coboea scandens, h. Kennedia bimaculata,p. 
Dolichos lignosus, p. Passiflora coerulea 
Kennedia monophylla i — • c. race, quin.' 
Convolvulus canarien. h. ' — c. r. trilobata 
j — c. r. racemosa 


Lonicera japonica, p. 
Jasminum azoricum 



6653. The propagation and culture of this tribe is the same as for woody plants. The situation proper for 
planting climbers and creepers has already been considered. (6204.) To cultivate them to perfection, a 
house should be entirely devoted to them, in which they should be planted in prepared soil, and trained 
on poles, like hops, or on arcades, or on single rods running from the front or sides of the house to the 
back or centre ; but sufficiently distant from the glass to show the beauty of the flowers anu foliage to the 
spectator. 



3 N 3 



918 



PRACTICE Of GARDENING. 



Pakx IIL 



Skct. IV. Succulent Greeji-hause Plants. 



€654. SUCCULENT GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. OCT. 


Aloe ferox, 3. 
— glauca 

Anthericum pugionifo. 
Crassula nudicaulis 

— obllqua 
— odoratissrma 
Mesembrj'anthemum 

— marpinatuin 

— mycrophyllum 
Portulacaria afra 


Aloe lingua 

— margaritifera 

— — minor, 3. 

— pentagona 

— perfoiiata 
Anthericum aloidcs 
Crassula orbicularis 
Mesembrjanthemum 

aurantium 

— capitatum 
Sempervivum montan. 

— villosum 
Tetragonia herbacea 


Agave americana 
Aloe maculata 

— mitrifbrmis 

— — minor 

— rigida 

— spiralis 

— triangularis 

— viscosa 

— frutescens 

Coty ledon fascicularis 

— hemispherica 

— lingueformis 
Talinum arachnoides 

— filamentosum 


Aizoon lanceolatum 
Aloe albicans 

— cymbifonnis, 3- 

— depressa 

— dichotoraa 
Cacalia repens, p- 
Cotyledon oblongata 
Crassula canesceiis 

— ciliata 

Mesembr>anthemum 

— bellidiflorum 

— canaliculatatn 


Aloe arborescens 

— picta 

— purpurascens 
Anthericum revolutum 
Cacalia articulata, |». 

— camosa 

— ficoides 

— kleinia 
Mesenibryanthemura 

— compressum 

— inclaudens 

— Ungueform. cnicia. 

— depressum 

— ditforme 
Septas capensis, p. 

— globiflora 



' 6655. Propagation. With succulents this is remarkably easy, as cuttings and suckers, where they can be 
procured, seldom fail to put out roots ; however, some sorts of aloe, crassula, &c. do not readily produce 
shoots of any sort by which they may be multiplied. When the lea%'es are taken ofF cuttings of suckers, 
the latter should be laid in a dry airy place, till the wounds heal ; they may then be planted in the 
proper soil, one in each of the smallest-sized pots, and being kept a few weeks in a dry heat, and shaded 
from bright sunshine, they will seldom fail to grow. In raising succulents from seeds, proceed as directed 
for the seeds of woody plants ; but observe to be more sparing of water after the plants come up. 

6656. Culture. A sandy loam is the soil universally allowed as the most proper for these plants ; not 
over finely sifted, in order to let the water pass the more rapidly through it ; and for the more succulent 
and dwarf sorts as stapelia, cactus, &c. about an eighth part of old lime-rubbish may be added. Succu- 
lents do not associate well witli any other description of plants, neither as to appearance or modes of 
culture ; therefore, wherever they are extensively cultivated, there should be a house or houses on pur- 
pose for them. One house would be required for the more hardy sorts included in this section, and 
another for the dry-stove succulents, given in a succeeding table. They require very Rttle watering, and 
never over the top during the winter months ; in summer, if the pots be well drained, they will bear more 
water, especially when in flower. The pots in which they are placed should be smaller in proportion than 
for other plants, as they grow slowly, evaporate little, and apparently derive great part of their sustenance 
from the air. They need not be shifted oftener than once in two or three years ; but the surface earth 
should be taken off, and fresh compost added every year. They do not require to be set out in the open 
garden during summer ; but as much air as possible should be admitted to them, and the roof of the house 
should be open at that season, night and day, excepting during heavy rains. " The greatest injur}-," Page 
observes, " which these plants have to be guarded against, is damps in winter; therefore they should be 
frequently looked over, and all decayed parts removed, particularly from those which are stemless, and 
when the leaves touch the earth." He adds, " few of these plants, either those of the green-house or hot- 
house, are cultivated in general, but merely to fill up the by-shelves and odd comers of the exotic 
houses ; but if a proper attention was paid to them, and their cultivation better known from a study of 
their characters, we have no doubt but they might be rendered as ornamental and interesting as those 
now considered the most select. Most of the forms and growths of these plants are truly curious ; and 
many of their flowers of the greatest beauty and brilliancy. Since the days of Dilleniiis and the late 
James Lee, these plants have had few admirers ; but the present Emperor of Germany, the Prince of 
Salm, the Vice-King of Lombardy, and our countrymen Haworth and Anderson, the latter the able 
curator of Chelsea Botanic Garden, are endeavoring to bring them again into that notice which they so 
eminently deserve." {Pro(lro?nus, 220.) 

6657. Mesctnbryanthcmu7)is are planted out by Mowbray, in a pit along the front wall of a hot-house. 
The soil he uses is rich garden-mould and fresh loam : " the sorts are M. inclaudens, aurantium, perfoli- 
atum, deltoides, barbatum, and other species of different habits ; the strong-growing kinds are put to- 
wards the back, and the dwarf ones in the front. They grow vigorously, and flower in a superior manner 
to what they do in small pots ; nothing can surpass the brilliancy of their blossoms in a bright summer's 
day, and many of them continue flowering all winter. All the culture they require is thinning and protec- 
tion by mats o'ver the glass in severe weather. In summer the sashes are taken off, and the soil may be 
covered with stones like rock-work." {Hort. Trans, v. 274.) 



Sect. V. Bulbous Green-house Plants. 



665S. BULBOUS GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. ] JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO OCT. 


Antholyza cunonia, p. 
Cyclamen hedevocfol,;). 

— persicum 

— — flo. albo 

— — flo. adorata 
Gladiolus abreviatus, p. 

— carinatus 

— cuspidatus 

— marginatus 

— orchiditlorus 

— jiraecox, (Jlarc ) 

Iris sisNT-inchinra 
Isia aulica 

— bulbifera 

Lachenalia flava, (April) 
Massonia angustifolia 

— latifolia, (April) 

— Massonia scab. (Ma.) 

— violacea, (March) 
Oxalis labumifolia, p. 
Tulipa clusiana 


Amaryllis formosissima 
Antholyza brevifolia, p. 

— marginata 

— meriana 

— merianella 

— spicata 

— pallida 

— tubulosa 
Gladiolus angustus 

— bicolor 

— blandus 

— bvzantinus major 
_ ■ — flo. albo 

— eampanulatus 

— cameus 

— galeatus 

— . namaquensis 

— pjTamidahis 

— roseus 

— striatus 
Iris tricuspis 
Isia flexuosa 


Amaryllis capensis 

— Fothergilli 

— — major 

— glauca 

— numilis 

— tabulare 

— vittata 
Antholyza aethiopica, p. 

— iridifolia 

— — fulgens 

— — fusca 
Gladiolus versicolor 

— undulatus 
Isia columnaris 

— — grandiflora 

— purpurea 

— versicolor 
ScUla hyacinthoides 

1 


Amaryllis crispa 

— Johnsonii 

— linearis 

Antholyza ringens, p. 
Gladiolus cardinalis 

— polystachius 
Hyacinthus revolutus 
Ixia steUata alba, p. 

— purpurea 
Omithogalum niveum 
Polyanthes tuberosa 

— — flo.pleno 
Tigridia pavonia, p. 


Amaryllis samiensis 

— corymbosns 
Lachenalia angustifolia 
Omithogalum altissim. 
Oxalis rubella, p. 

— tenuifolia, p. 

— tricolor 

— variabilis 
Veltheimia viridifolia 

i 

1 



Book II. 



DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 



919 



e&W. Propagation and culture. After the ample directions on the subject of propagating and cultivat- 
ing bulbs, already given (6501,), very little can require to be added here. A :node of jjrojuigatiiig such aa 
rarely produce offsets may be mentioned : it applies only to tunicate bulbs, which, if cut over transversely, 
a little above the middle, will form young bulbs in abundance near the margin of the outer coat. This has 
been successfullypractised with hjemanthus pubescens, and several of the more rare ornithogalia;. The 
grand art in cultivating bulbs is, to attend to the proper time for putting them into a state of rest ; and 
when they are in a growing state, to place them so near the light, and afford such a supi)ly of air and water 
as will enable them to bring their leaves to perfection. The management of exotic bulbs is, in general, 
very imperfect among gardeners, who cannot be too much impressed with the importance of attending to 
these two paints, — the perfecting the leaves, and the putting the bulbs into, and keeping them during a 
proper time, in a state of rest. Bulbous-rooted plants associate almost as ill with all others as succulents 
do ; and, therefore, wherever a good collection is kept, there should be a house entirely devoted to their 
culture. The roof should be low and not very steep, and the pots should be kept on a level stage or plat- 
form, raised table high, or about two feet and a half, that the flowers may be near the eye. A house, 
glass on all sides, with a central platform, six or eight feet wide, and two side ones, or side Ixirders, aboui 
three feet wide, would form an excellent house for plants of this description, as all of them would be near 
the glass, and near the eye of the spectator. "Whenever the bulbs, cultivated in such a house, became in 
a dormant state, they could be removed to a pit or frame of proper temperature in the reserve-garden, and 
kept there dry, till the growing season. Exotic bulbs require nearly the same degree of heat, when 
lying dormant, as they do when growing. 

Sect. VI. Herbaceous and stemless Green-house Plants. 



6660. HERBACEOUS AND STEMLESS GREEN-HOUSE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO OCT. 




Linum flavum 

— suffruticosum, p. 
Lotus creticus 
Sowerbia juncea, p. 
Statice mucronata 


Campanula moliis, p. 
Witsenia corj-mbosa, p. 


Achillea aegj-ptiaca, p. 
Antirrhinum moUe 
Gnaphalium orientale,y. 
Ononis natrix, p. 
— crispa 


Agapanthus umb. maj. 
— — media 



6661. Propagation and culture. A small house, constructed like a bulb-house, should be devoted to 
these plants ; some of which are of considerable beauty : but they do not assort well with woody and ever- 
green species. All the difference between the culture of hardy, and exotic herbaceous plants, consists 
in the latter being kept in a different climate and in pots. 



Sect. VII. Of Selections of Green-house Plants for particular Purjmses. 
6662. The j^articular jmrposes to which green-house plants are a2)plicable are few com- 
pared with those for which plants which grow in the open air may be selected. The 
most hardy species will be found arranged as frame plants ; the most showy and odori- 
ferous under the first four sections. There are scarcely any green-house aquatics ; but a 
few marsh plants ; and no parasites, or air plants, suitable for the green-house, have been 
introduced hitherto. Collections, however, might be made of such as are grown in their 
native countries for useful or economical purposes, and whose produce is imported to 
this country, as of Laurus camj^hora, the camphor-tree ; Pistacia lentiscus, the tree which 
affords mastich ; of such as are highly odoriferous, as Verbena, Heliotropium, &c. In a 
botanical collection, Dioncea and Sarracenia are plants of great rarity, and difficult to pre- 
serve or propagate. They are generally procured from their native countries, and grown 
in peat-earth, kept moist, and the atmosphere also rendered humid by covering them 
with a hand-glass. Cresswell has produced very strong plants of S. purpurea, by treat- 
ing it as a stove plant. Under his management, " it is planted in a mixture of the 
fibrous roots, obtained from peat-earth, with an equal quantity of rotten willow wood, 
broken into small pieces, by which the soil is kept perfectly drained. The pots in which 
the plants grow are kept in a shaded part of the stove, and watered occasionally, but they 
do not require to be placed in pans of water, except they become so dry as not to absorb 
the water given in the usual way." (Hort. Trans, iii. 360.) Some fine specimens of 
these genera, and also of Nepentlies distillatoria, are contained in the collection of Messrs. 
Loddiges, at Plackney. 



Chap.XIIL 

Dry-stove Plants. '■ . .' ' 

6663. What are called dry-stove planls are such as from experience have been found 
to require an intermediate degree of heat between the green-house and bark-stove plants 
and a more dry atmosphere than the latter. Their propagation and culture is the same 
as for green-house plants ; with this difference, that they are not in general removed to 
the open air during summer ; but where the construction of the house admits, the sashes 
may be removed in, dry weather during the three warmest months, but always replaced 
on the commencement of heavy or cold rains and boisterous winds. V/ e shall arrange 
them as woody, climbers, succulent, bulbous, and herbaceous plants. To cultivate them 
to any degree of perfection, it is essentially necessary that a house be appropriated to each 
section ; and each house so arranged as that the plants may be near the glass, and that 
heat and air may be supplied at the pleasure of the cultivator, or a long narrow house- 
may be divided so as to keep each class separate. 

3 N 4 



920 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6664. 



Sect. I. Woody Dry-stove Plants. 
WOODY DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. 



Actus cordifolia, p. 

— villosa 
Mahernia pinnata, p. 
Phylica plumosa 
-'Vntidesma alexiteria, 

— paniculata 
Bocoonia fnitescens 
Crotalciria paniculata, 

— pulchra 
Cylista villosa 
Eugenia uniflora, p. 

— zeylanica 
Ficus bengalensis 
Gardenia randia 

— tubiflora \ 
^Melastoma rubra, p. 
Ruizia variabilis, p. 
Solandra grandillora 



AUGUST. 



Aitonia capensis, p. Cliironia angustifolia 
Andersonia sprengeli. p. ' — decassata 



Corroea speciosa, p. 
Crotolaria elegans, p. 

p. Gardenia radicans, p. 
Barringtonia speciosa 
i Bontia dauhnoides, p. 

p. 'Borassus llabelliformis 
Brossium alicastrum 

— spurium 
Gardenia paretta 
Grislea tomentosa, p. 
Justicia gendarussa, p. 

pectinata 

Lantana involucrata 
Muntingia balabura 
Ophioxylon serpen tinum 
Khamnus colubrinus, p. 
Samyda rosea, p. 



j — frutescens 
Chorizema ilUcifolia, p. 
I — nana 
Gardenia florida, p. 
1 Heliotropium peruvian. 
I Roella ciliata, p. 
Achania malvaviscus, p 

— mollis 
Achras mjimmosj 

— sapota 
Allan thus excelsa, p. 
Alangium decapetal. p. 
Amy'ris sylvatica 
Aniiona hexapantha 
Asclepias parvitlora 
Bignonia leucoxylon, p. 

— tomentosa 



Citrus trifoliata, p. 
Platylobium parviflor. p. 
Abroma angusta, p. 
Annona glabra 
Aralia capitata, p. 
Ardisia elegans 

_ lateriflora 
Bauhinia anatomica 
Clerodendrum fi-agrans 
Duranta ellisia 
Erithalis fruticosa 
Gardenia micranthus 
Grewia asiatica 
Hibiscus abelmoschus 

— manihot,p. 

— phoeniceus 

— populneus 

— rosa sinensis 

— — flo. pleno 

— — — pl.palli 



SEPT. TO OCT. 



- latifolia 
Ardisia acuminata, j.>. 
sinensis 
solonacea 
Bixa orellana, p. 
Cestrum diumum,p. 

laurifolium 
noctumum 
Clerodendrum inenne 

— ligustrinum 

— paniculatum 

— siphonanthus 
Duranta plumieri 
Grewia velutiua 
Lantana radula 

— scabrida 
Panax fruticosum 



6665. 



Sect. II. Climbing Dry-stove Plants. 
CLIMBING DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. 


JUNE. 


assinoT I lutta, p. 


Asclepias scandens, p 




— vimiualis, p. 




Banisteria purpurea, p. 




Cylista villosa, p. 




— scariosa, p. 




Draoontium pertusum 




— triphylluii 



SEPT. TO OCT. 



Dolichos urens 
Dracontium nyraphce- 

foliuni, p. 
Echites bitlora 
— elastica 
Grouovia scandens 
Passiflora fcetida, p. 

— laurifolia 

— murucuja 
Roxburghia gloriosoidf). 
Securidaca volubilis, p. 



Basella alba 

— rubra 
Bauhinia anatomica, p. 
I Bignonia crucigera, p. 

— paniculata 
I — unguis 
I'Cissampelos parieira 
I — smilacina 
I Cissus acida, p. 

— sicyoides 

— trifoliata 
I — vitiginea 



Cynanchum suberos. p. 

— viminale 
Dioscoria pentaphylla 
Ipomoea sanguinea, p. 

— splendens 
NissoUa firuticosa, p. 
Passiflora maliformis 



Sect. III. Succulent Dry -stove Plants. 
6666. SUCCULENT DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. 


JUN.:. 


JULY. 1 AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO OCT. 


Aloe glauca 

— reticulata 
Cactus flagelliformis 
Euphorbia canariense, p. 
Mesembryanthemu. aur. 
— fissum 
^ Xanthorrhoea hastile, p. 
— minor 
Piper magnollEefoUum 

— nigrum 
Pitcaimia bracteata, p. 


Aloe arachnoidea 

— foliolosa 

— pentagona 

— perfoliata 
Bryophyllum calycinum 
Crassula imbricata 
Mesembryanthe. rabic. 
Aloe viscosa aspera, p. 
Euphorbia clava 

Piper clusiEefoUum 
Pitcaimia bromeliaefol -p. 
— graminifoUa 


Aloe maculata 

— recurva 
Cactus heptagonus 

— pentagonus 

— peruvianus 
Crassula cordata 
Jlesembryanthemum 

— anceps 

— expansum 
Sempervivum monanth. 

— villosum 
Agave luridaj p. 

— rigida 
Cactus grandiflorus 
Euphorbia neriifolia 

— piscatoria 

— tu-ucalli 

— tithymaloides 


Aloe albicans 

— aspera 

— cymbiformis 

— depressa 
Cacalia tomentosa, p. 
Cactus cochinilifer 

— cylindricus 

— ficus indica 
Crassula columuaris 
Crithmum latifolium 

— maritimum 
Mesembryanthemum 

elongatum 
Aloe barbadensis, p. 

— lineata 

— albicans 
Cactus hexagonus 

— lanuginosus 

— maimllaris 

— melocactus 


Agave virginica 
Cacalia papillaris, p. 

— kleinia 
Mesembryanthem. digit 

— felinum 
Agave foetida, p. 

— vi\-ipara 
Euphorbia heptagona 

— Xvstrix, p. 

— ma:nillaris 
Piper polystachyon 

— reticulatum 
Pitcaimia angustifolia,p 
Stapelia anguina 

— articulata 

— campanulata 

— concinna 

— clypeata 

— divaricata 

— humilis 


Sect. IV. Bulbous Dry-stove Pla7its. 
6667. BULBOUS DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 


MARCH TO MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO OCT. 


Albuca altissima 
— major 

_ spiralis,(April),p. 
Anthericum canalicul. 
Babianarubro-cyanea,p. 

— sulphurea 

— tenuifolia 
Drimia pusilla, p. 
Ericomis bifolia, (April) 

— nana 
Ferraria anthersosa, p. 

— undulata, p. 


Albuca coarctata 

— caudata 

— minor 

— vittata, p. 
Amaryllis maculata 

— undulata 
Anthericum asphodelo. 
Babiana latifolia, p. 
Cyrtanthus albus 

— obhquuslatifo 

— ventricosus 
Galaxia grandiflora, p. 
Gladiolus alatus 


Albuca fragrans, p. 
A raaryllis tubispatha 
Babiana villosa, p. 
Cyanella capensis, p. 
Ericomis punctata 

— striata 
Galaxia graminea 
GethylUs ciliaris 

— spiralis 
Gladiolus grandiflorus 
Oxalis monophylla 


Amaryllis purpurea 

— albucoides 
Anthericum albucoides 
Gladiolus tristus tardi. p. 

— luteo 


Amaryllis pumila 
Drimia elata, p. 
Oxalis monophylla 
— tricolor 



Book II. HOT-HOUSE, OR BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 921 



Sect. V. Herbaceous Dry- stove Plants. 
666S. HERBACEOUS DRY-STOVE PLANTS. 



MARCH TO MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPT. TO OCT. 


Canarina campanula 
Bletia tankervilliiE, j), 
Neottia elata 

— orchioides 

— picta 
Pothos cordata 
jPteris grcUidifoUa 

1 


Arum divarlcatum, p. 
Commelina tuberosa 

— hengalensis 
Marica martinicensis 

— northiana 
Phytolacca octandra 
Polypodium asplenifol. 
Pothos ccuinaefolia 


Adiantum reniforme, p. Alstroemeria pelegrina 

— trapeziforme Witsenia maura, p. 
Arum bicolor, jj. \ Arum esculentuni, p. 

— colocasia 1 Asplenium praimorsum 
Begojiia nitida | — striatum 
Besleria melittifolia ! Begonia dichotoma 
Galea lobata 1 — evansiana 
Callisia repens | — macrophylla 
Monsonia speciosa i Dianella ensifoUa 
Geranium incamatum Gloriosa superba 
Gloxinia maculata 
1 — speciosa 


Arum auritum, p. 

— orixense 

— sagittifolium 
Begonia acuminata 
Cyrilla pulchella 
Leea crispa 

— macrophylla 



Chap. XIV. 

Hot-house, or Bark-stove Plants. 
(5669. Bark-stove j)lants are such as require the highest degree of heat, which has ge- 
nerally been given by the aid of a bed of bark or other fermenting substance, in which 
the pots containing the plants are plunged. Sometimes, as before observed (6184.), stearn 
or flues are applied under a vault covered with earth or sand as a substitute for bark ; and 
more recently the pots have not been plunged in any material nor bottom heat applied, 
but a greater atmospherical heat communicated, and the atmosphere about the pots kept 
moist by watering, &c. We shall arrange the most ornamental species which flower freely 
under woody, climbing, bulbous, perennial, annual, aquatic, reedy plants ; and add some 
remarks on palms, air plants, and ferns, which, though they seldom flower in this coun- 
try, or for the greater part have flowers of little show, yet are grand or interesting speci- 
mens of vegetable beings. 



670. 



Sect. I. Woody Bark-stove Plants. 
WOODY BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



Brucea ferruginea, p. 
Cassia bicapsularis, p. 
Cordia gerascanthus 

— monoica 
Elate sylvestris 
Erythrina camea 

— crista gain 

— rosea 
Eugenia jambos, p. 

— uniflora 
Euphorbia punicea 
Hillia longitltfra 
Myrtus biflora, p. 



Cassia alata, p. 
Chrysophyllimi cainito 
— fuscum 
Eugenia fragrans, p. 
Myrtus disticha 

— dumosa 

— pimenta 

— — longifolia 



— zuzygium 
Samyda rosea 
Sophora tomentosa, p. 



JULY. 



Adenanthera pavonia.p. 
jEschjnomene sensitiva 
AUamanda cathartica 
Amyris salvatica 
Asclepias curassavica 

— parviflora 
Bauhinia clivaricata, p. 

— porrecta 
Bignonia leucoxylon, p. 
Brunsfelsia americana 
Carolinea minor, p. 
Gardenia aculeata 
Gossypium vitifolium, p. 
Hedysarum pictum, p. 
Helicteresisora 
Heliocarpus americana 
Ixora purpurea 



SEPTEMBER. 



iEschynomene gi-and. p. 
Amerimnum ebenus 
Asclepias gigantea 
Bauhinia acuminata, p. 
Bignonia longissima, p. 
— panieulata 
• — pentaphylla 
Brownea coccinea 
Brunfelsia undulata 
Bucida buceras 

I Cassia occidentalis 

I — viminea 
Gardenia dumetorum 
Gossypium arboreum, p. 

: Guaicum officinale 

j Hedysarum gyrans, p. 
Ixora blanda 

I — rorcinea 



' Cameraria angustifolia 
j Carissa spinarurn 
[Cassia biflora, p. 

Cerbera manghas 

Cinchona caribea, p. 

Clusia flava 

Croton aromaticum, p. 

Desman thus virgatus 
jEphielis guinensis, p. 
I Erythrina speciosa 
i Fagara pterota 
, Hamellia ventricosa, p. 

Hedysarum strobilifer. 

Helicteris baruensis 

Ixora alba 
— pavetta 



667 L Propagation. All the known modes are occasionally adopted, but those by seeds 
and cuttings are the most general. Few stove plants ripen their seeds in this country, 
and such as are obtained are therefore generally procured from abroad. 

6672. Tropical seeds hi general. Gushing observes, are very liable to lose their powers of vegetation 
by reason of the transition from warai to cold climates, combined with the length of time which com-, 
monly intervenes between their gathering and arrival with us, especially if they have been exposed to 
damps ; on that account they should be sown as soon as they arrive, at least a part of each parcel. Much 
depends on the state of the seeds when received. East and West India seeds generally arrive with the 
regular fleets, as indeed do those from the Cape of Good Hope, and all the South Sea islands, for the 
most part by the Eastern and China ships ; so that one may in general be prepared against their arrival. 
As early spring is undoubtedly the best time for sowing, a few weeks' delay may in some instances be adi 
visable. If received late in October or November, wait until January, or perhaps February, unless it 
evidently appears that they will not keep out of the earth so long a time in a vegetative state ; such as can 
be sown before August have a good chance to acquire sufficient strength of growth to carry them through 
the winter months, so adverse to the general efforts of young vegetable life. 

6673. The pots being well drained should be filled with the compost suitable to the species of plant of 
which the seed intended to be sown has been produced (see the table) ; let it be pressed down to about a 
third or half an inch below the edge of the rim, according to the size of the seeds ; if they are small or 
light sorts, it will be necessary to press it pretty tight, and to add a little of the very fine-sifted mould on 
which to deposit the seed, previously smoothing it with a bit of thin flat wood, bent so as to lie on it level 
Being thus prepared, let the seed be sown regularly on the surface, and cover it from about an eighth to a 
quarter of an inch, according to the size of the seed as before, with the same sort of fine mould. But if 
the seed is of the largest sorts, as, for instance, the nut or stone kind, no more is necessary than to press 
them into the earth with the finger, and to cover somewhat thicker than is recommended for the others 
In either case, the covering should be pressed moderately on the seed with the hand; which is indeed a 
most necessary caufion in sowing seeds of any description whatever. In order to ensure the vegetation 



922 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pari III. 



of hard or very tough shelled seeds, some have them soaked in water for a few days, say a week, or even 
ten days, for such as happen to be very dry, previous to sowing : a shallow pan, placed on the coolest part 
of the flue in the propagation-stove, is the readiest and safest article to receive them for this purpose j they 
should be examined daily, and sown the moment any sign of swelling or growth appears : this process, 
however, is fraught with danger to many of the lighter and smaller sorts. 

6674. The sowing being finisJicd, the pots must be set on a level spot, and gently, but thoroughly watered 
witli a pot, the rose of which has been made particularly fine, for this and other such uses; and immedi- 
ately plunged in a strong heat, without which they will not be likely to vegetate : if a close dung hot-bed 
the better. A regular but moderate watering, steady heat, and occasional weeding, should any such ap- 
pear, is all they will now require until they are fit to be removed into separate pots ; which may be done 
as soon as they have attained a few inches' growth above their cotyledons, or seed-leaves. There are some 
fruit, such as nelumbium, whose exterior coat is so very hard that' the embryo plants are not able to burst 
through, at least, with us; to remedy which, the knife is not unfrequently used to pare them thin, even 
to making a hole in them, but not too near the eye or part where they sprout, with good effect. If the busi- 
ness of seed-sowing is performed in spring, or early in summer, the smaller sorts may be expected to ve- 
getate in the course of five or six weeks at farthest ; whereas, the larger bony kinds will sometimes 
remain dormant in the earth for the space perliaps of twelve months : this must be attended to, else one 
might think them beyond a chance of growing, and perhaps tlirow them away without examination. 
Whenever there is any doubt of their vegetating, let some of them be taken up and opened with a knife ; 
when they will at once discover whether they are sound or not ; if sound, they must be still kept in a 
strong heat, and regularly watered as before ; for want of this simple precaution, valuable seeds are often 
carelessly thrown on the rubbish-heap, when just bursting'their shell or embryo ; and not unfrequently, by 
that accidental check, are so materially injured as to prevent more than one half of them vegetating again j 
if they have been at all so fortunate as to be noticed and resowed. {Exotic Gard. p. 8.) 

6675. By cuttings. Besides the usual supply of the different sorts of earth, &c. there 
is another article necessaiy to be provided before we begin the business of making cut- 
tings ; which is, a few dozen of small bell-glasses, (the white glass is best,) of as many 
different sizes as are the pots in which the cuttings arc intended to be planted ; they 
should be fitted to the pot, so as to rest on the inner side of it, about an inch below the 
rim ; by observing which circumstance, when the pot is filled with earth, the glass will 
have room sufiicient to sink a little into it, so as to perfectly exclude the external air ; of 
very essential importance to the cutting while in a donnant state, that is, from the time 
they are put in until they begin to grow. 

6670. The cuttings may be made almost every season of the year ; yet the months of April, May, and 
June are certainly the most proper ; as the plants are at that season plentifully supplied with young wood, 
which, in most species, produce" roots when made into cuttings, much sooner than the old wood will if 
used in the same manner. "When the day is fixed upon for this business, let a quantity of pots of the pro- 
per size be selected, and prepared by covering their bottoms to the depth of one or two inches with pot- 
sherds ; and then, as wanted, about half filled with the compost best suited to the plant intended to be 
propagated, to grow in for a few weeks, when first struck, and the remaining part with the best loam that 
can be procured, to insert the cutting in when ready. On the purity and clearness of the loam depends 
in a great measure the success of many of the tenderer kinds of cuttings, particularly those which are 
obliged to be kept in moist heat, as it is, when contaminated with other composts, very liable in these situ- 
ations to cause damp and rottenness, by the particles of putrefying matter generally contained in mixed 
earths ; and the properties of which are put in motion, by the application of heat. As an exception to this 
rule, may be adduced sand ; which is of very greg.t utility to mix with the loam, should it happen to be 
rather stiff for the nature of the cutting: but then, the sand proper for this use is of so pure a nature in 
itself, that it is evident it cannot have the effect noticed above in regard to mixed soils. 

6677. In the choice of cuttings, preference should be given to the firmest wood of the same year's growth j 
and of these, only such whose leaves have attained their full size and proper color, which are generally to 
be selected from the lateral shoots ; as the upright leading ones are mostly too luxuriant to make good 
cuttings. The cuttings of many plants, if taken from the lateral sh^iots, never become proper erect stems j 
but are inclined at all times to form an irregular, bushy, weak head : this is not of small importance to 
such collectors as cultivate plants merely for the flower; as such heads generally produce them sooner 
than luxuriant leaders. The lovers of handsome erect plants, however, choose their cuttings from the 
upright shoots, early in the season, before they acquire that luxuriance of growth so unfit for the purposes 
of propagation. The tops of the shoots are to be preferred, unless they happen to flag before used. To 
prepare them for insertion, most of the leaves must be trimmed off close to the stem, leaving only a few at 
the top, to allow a free respiration of the air necessary to the life of the plant. This is a most essential 
article in the art of making cuttings, particularly those of evergreens ; for if they are deprived entirely of 
their leaves, or that they otherwise flag, or occasionally fall off soon after they are put in, there will be 
little or no chance of their growing. The reason is obvious, because the inherent sap of the cutting, 
being deprived of these organs of respiration that kept it in motion, and the cutting having no roots by the 
efforts of which to produce new leaves, the sap, consequently, becomes stagnated in the pores of the wood ; 
which, like the stagnation of the blood in animals, will in all likelihood prove mortal, by occasioning an 
immediate mortification. 

6678. In shortening each cutting to the most convenient length, care must be taken to do it with a clean 
cut, in a transverse direction at a joint ; and by no means should they be left exposed, or to lie any consi- 
derable time before planted. In planting, a small dibble or other convenient instrument should be used to 
press the loam sufficiently tight to the base of the cutting, as that is the principal part to be made fast ; as 
soon as the whole are inserted and the surface of the mould made level and a little firm, give them a gentle 
watering to settle them ; they should be left to soak about a quarter of an hour, and then covered with a 
bell-glass, which should be pressed pretty tight, so as perfectly to exclude the outward air. The atmo- 
spheric air being prevented by the glass from exhaling any of the juices of the plant, all its powers are 
forced downward to produce roots, and these will soon prove their existence by producing young leaves 
and branches. If there are several cuttings of the same sort, they may be all put in one pot, unless they 
happen to be very large or curious sorts ; but in general each species should be kept in a separate one, on 
account of the difference in time that some of thera require to strike roots ; and also, thatany scarce or va- 
luable kind should be put only one in a small pot, as they then are not liable to be injured so much by damp ; 
neither do they require to go through the precarious operation of separate potting, so soon after being 
struck. Should it be requisite to have a considerable quantity of cuttings made at the same time, it would 
be proper to have a one-light frame, with close glasses, placed on a moderate hot-bed, ready to receive 
them. It should be covered with sawdust or clean tan, about a foot deep, in which to plunge the pots : 
but if there are only a few done, they may be plunged in any frame among other things, provided there 
is a moderate heat. 

6679. Wateriiig and shading. They will now require the most particular attention as to watering and 
shading. The water must be given twice or thrice very moderately until the earth becomes sufBciently 
moist, which, if once so, will retain the moisture for a length of time, by being covered ivith the glass : 
but the shading is the principal care whenever the sim's rays fall on the glasses, as nothing will create rot. 



Book II. 



WOODY BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



923 



tenness sooner than letting the leaves flag, and lie upon each other, which will be the positive consequence 
of a neglect of shade. The most advisable method to do it is, to have a few large sheets of strong paper 
to lay over the glasses within a frame; which, at the same time that it shades the cuttings, does not 
prevent the sun's rays from entering the frame and clearing off any damps that may be accumulated 
therein; whereas, if mats are laid on the outside of the frame-light, it is evident they will tend to have 
the direct contrary efFect. However, in the course of a week or fortnight, they will be able to withstand 
a little of the rays of the morning and evening sun. 

6680. While in an inactive state, they should be kept rather dry, but not let to an extreme ; else the bark 
will become shrivelled, and occasion a very smart falling off amongst them ; on the other hand, should 
they be kept in an over-moist state, tlie consequence would not be less disagreeable, on account of the 
damp occasioned by the air being so closely confined under the glasses ; in tiiis case it would be of infinite 
service to have the glasses wiped with a dry cloth about once a-week, which is quite sufficient for hot- 
house cuttings, as they are not so liable to suffer from this cause as those of green-house plants. 

6681. As the heat of the bed declines, it will be necessary to have another, properly tempered, ready, in 
which to plunge them when requisite ; or otherwise, let the old one be renovated with linings of fresh 
warm dung ; but in such manner as to avoid creating any violent degree of heat or strong rank steam in 
the bed ; as it is better to do it often and but slightly at a time, it being but a trifling increase of labor 
compared with the probable consequences. By this management one may expect to have some of the 
free-growing kinds well rooted, and making rapid progress, in the course of a very few weeks ; when such 
is the case, it will be necessary to give them a little air by taking off the bell-glasses at night, and to keep 
them a little moister than before. If they endure this pretty well for a few days, the glasses may be left 
off entirely ; which will harden and prepare them by the time in which it may be thought convenient to 
part and pot them separately. 

6682. In taking the bell-glasses off at night, it is necessary to observe that from their closeness they 
sometimes occasion the cuttings, more frequently the harder sorts, to produce young leaves and even 
shoots, before they have sufficient roots : if at any time these should be mistaken for well rooted plants, 
and their glasses taken off accordingly, in a few hours they may be perceived by their leaves beginning to 
flag; in which case the glasses must be immediately replaced ; otherwise, if neglected, these tender shoots 
will be utterly spoiled, and it will be a very great chance whether the cutting will ever produce more or 
not. Should the above circumstance happen, they will be observed to be more impatient of damp after- 
wards; as indeed will all those be which are growing ; the glasses should therefore be more frequently 
dried, and kept off until the leaves, &c. which were under them, become dry by evaporation ; lest we risk 
their success, I may say, perhaps, their existence, by rotting the first weak efforts towards active life. 

6683. The rooted cuttings being thus prepared, they may be occasionally taken out of the frame, and set 
in more exposed airy situations in the hot-house : but as some kinds require a much longer time to pro- 
duce roots than others, it will be necessary to keep such still in the frame, shading and watering them 
when requisite, as already directed. Thus may they be treated until the autumn ; when, if any yet re- 
main in the cutting state, it will be advisable to have them taken to the propagation-stove, and plunged- 
in the bark-pit; previously clearing them from any damps, moss, or weeds that may have grown amongst 
them, and renewing the surface with a little fresh loam. Here they will require the same care as when in 
the frame, except that as the influence of the sun decreases, so must the shading in proportion ; using it 
only for two or three hours in the middle of the day, if at all requisite : and indeed it is necessary here to 
observe, that in the winter, and early spring months, they must not be sliaded on any account, nor watered 
except when absolute necessity requires it; neither should the cuttings that may be occasionally made at 
these seasons, receive any water when first put in, as directed for those made in summer, as the~mouId 
will be found in general sufficiently moist, in itself ; and as there is not that quick principle of vegetation 
at this season, the water might prove materially injurious, by promoting damp and rottenness. It is even 
necessary in some instances, should the cutting be of a succulent plant, or in any degree approaching that 
nature, to provide loam rather dry, than moist; in which they must be planted and left without water, 
until they have completely formed their callosities, and the wounds are healed ; however, in either case, 
those fresh put in must be partially shaded for a few days, should the weather happen to be clear and 
sunny. It will be also necessary to dry the inside of the bell-glasses more frequently in the winter months ; 
as there is generally a stronger heat kept in the tan-jjit, which gives rise to an increased evaporation ; and 
damp at this season should be more particularly avoided than at any other. In the ensuing spring those 
put in early, as well as what have remained since the preceding summer, will in general make an effort to 
grow ; as soon as they are observed in this state, let them be managed in the same manner as those already 
rooted have been. 

6684. In regard to parting and potting the rooted cuttings or seedlings separately, the greatest nicety 
should be observed ; first, in turning them out of the pots without lacerating the roots ; and secondly, in 
shaking and working the earth from amongst them, until they can be readily parted without breaking ; 
if any of the mould can be conveniently preserved to them, so much the better ; but the preservation of 
the roots should be the principal object. They must be immediately potted in their proper soil, in pots 
suited to the size of the cuttings, and neatly tied up, if necessary ; let them be then well watered with a 
rose-pot moderately fine, but by no means should they be flooded, or slushed with it, as too many are apt 
to do, but let it be given gently, and time allowed for it to soak regularly into the mould. They will re- 
quire a brisk heat and close shading for a few days, uritil they have established themselves in the fresh 
mould. {Exotic Gardener, 26.) 

6685. Laying and inarching are rarely practised on hot-house plants. However, 
there are some that do not produce roots freely by cuttings, which may be multiplied 
successfully by these methods. 

6686. In laying, choice should be made of the young tender shoots of the present year ; the soft bark of 
which will sooner form a callosity, and produce roots, than that of any of the preceding year's growth. It 
is particularly necessary to observe whether the plant intended to be laid is of a brittle nature or not ; for 
if it is, it will be necessary that the shoots be pegged gently down to the surface previous to laying, and 
thus left until their tops naturally acquire a perpendicular direction, which they will do in a few days; 
without this precaution, it would be extremely difficult to cut or tongue them without cracking, or break- 
ing them off'; but if treated in this manner, the most brittle may be layed without danger. It is a con- 
elusion drawn from several experiments, that the layer, which is inserted to a proper depth, roots sooner 
and better than that which is laid near the surface ; the reason of which is, at a certain depth the air is 
better excluded, and there is a more regular degree of moisture for the nourishment of the young fibres, 
when they make their appearance. No part of the shoot should on any pretence be covered with the 
mould, except that which is meant to produce roots, as the covering the whole renders it extremely liable 
to rot ; and therefore, if any particularly tender plant should happen to be thus treated, it would evidently 
endanger the whole stool. 

6687. J««rcA««g- is much preferable to the common grafting, for evergreens in particular ; it isprinci. 
pally practised as the best means of multiplying all the double varieties of camellia and plants of similar 
habits ; because their strong leaves, if only for a few days deprived of their regular support, by being cut 
clear from the mother stock, if not covered closely with a glass, will be certain to wither and fall off"; 
after which there will be but very slender chance of the scion's completing a union : it is performed as 
follows : having provided a stock, which should always be some of the coarser free kinds of the same 
genus of plants, and nearly of the same diameter as the shoot which is intended for inarching ; cut a 



924 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



thin slip from two to three inches long, about one third or something better of the whole thickness, 
smoothly off from each of them, in the clearest part of the stem, with a small sharp knife; a most neces- 
sary instrument for this business; the bark of each must then be fitted together in the exactest manner, 
at least on one side, and tied perfectly tight with good matting : they must be clayed in the same m.anner 
as grafts ; and as being within doors in a warm house will occasion the clay to become over dry, and in 
consequence liable to crack, they should, at least in dry weather, receive two or three times a-week some 
water from the rose of a waterpot or by means of a syringe, to presen-e it in a m^ist proper state, ob- 
serving to do it in the evening, leit the leaves should get scorched by the rays of the sun : a little moss 
tied neatly round each ball of clay will prevent the water being so frequently necessary ; eight or ten 
weeks will in general be found sufficient time for them to unite ; at all events, by that time they may- 
be ])artially separated from the parent plant, by cutting the inarched shoots better than half-way through ; 
and if on trial, they are found to be united, and bear that operation well, they may in a few days after- 
wards be entirely cut off and placed in a shady part of the house, where they must be kept moderately 
syringed as before, and some additional shade given, according to the state of the weather, for two or three 
weeks; during which time they may be untied, and the top of the stock cut ofFin a neat manner; and 
also any unnecessary part of the' bottom of the scion that may remain : let a little clay be again applied that 
these fresh wounds may have sufficient time to become properly healed, which they will in a few weeks. 
In this manner. Gushing succeeded with myrtus pimento ; and other plants allied to it may be propa- 
gated on the common myrtle, which are jiarticularly difficult to multiply by any other means; and also 
many other plants of the same description upon their kind. 

6688. General culture. To attain a respectable degree of perfection in tlie culture of 
tropical plants, Cushing observes, the principal objects to which one should direct his 
attention, are assiduity in keeping up the stock by propagation ; a careful nicety in pot- 
ting, and shifting in the proper season ; a regularity in watering when requisite ; a 
thorough knowledge of the temperature necessary to be kept in the house ; and a steady 
attention to the cleanliness and habits of the plants in general. The busmess of shifting, 
or refreshing the roots of plants with earth properly prepared for that purpose, and trans- 
planting them into larger pots than they before occupied, is one of the most necessaiy 
operations required to keep them in a good state of growth. The quantity of earth 
contained in a flowerpot being in comparison so small to that which is requisite to the 
support of the generality of plants, it must be supposed that unless it is changed or aug- 
mented in due season, they will soon exliaust every particle of vegetative matter contained 
therein, though frequently assisted by proper water, which doubtless contains a large 
portion of the food of vegetables ; the consequence of which is^ to the weaker-growing 
and tender kinds, tliat its salts being dissolved, and the sandy particles which kept it in a 
free open state washed away by the frequent and long continued ablutions, it becomes, in 
the case of ill drained pots for seeds, sour and coagulated ; and the plant being no longer 
able to draw its proper nourishment from it, must inevitably decline, and at last be- 
comes a nuisance to the collection, by breeding insects and filthiness : to the stronger 
sorts, though in a different manner, it w ill be no less pernicious, by starving them, and 
thereby occasioning them to dwindle into naked stems, and awkward unsightly forms. 

6689. Tlte season most proper for shifting hot-house plants is about the middle or end of April ; if 
done earlier (though some hot-house plants may be said to be in a state of growth for the greater part of 
the year) the generality of them will be found dormant; and therefore will not have the power to 
establish themselves sufficiently in the fresh earth to prevent a great part of their leaves falling off, and 
the whole plant acquiring a sickly appearance; and on the other hand, if done much later, most of them 
will be in a vigorous state, and it will require infinite care, and increase of labor to keep them properly 
shaded, else the intense influence of the sun on them, at an advanced season, will have, though a dif- 
ferent cause, nearly the same effect ; and reduce them to fully as disagreeable a state as in the former case. 
But if taken soon after they have made the first effort for the season's growth, the fibres being set 
in motion, and not having a top full of young tender leaves to support, they soon find their way into 
the fresh mould; and the plants, by being thus taken in time, and when done, placed in a brisk bottom 
heat to assist them, will in the space of three or four days at farthest be well recovered, and in general, 
able to support themselves against the strongest rays we may reasonably expect at that season, without 
much danger to their leaves. 

6S90. Operation of shifting. Being fully prepared for the removal of the plants, let apart of them be 
taken to the potting-shed together, that they may be no longer than necessary out of the stove; and 
while these are shifting, the remainder may be taken out of the tan, and set on any of the shelves or 
benches that are over the flues, so as to allow^ sufficient room to have it forked up and turned ; and should 
it be sunk considerably below the desired height, some fresh well dried tan should be added, and mixed 
well with the old in turning ; when done, let it be made pretty level with a rake that the plants may be 
conveniently and regularly set on the surface when shifted. In shifting the plant, the greatest nicety 
should be used not to injure the roots; because, if the roots, from a multiplicity of wounds, (which are 
more frequently lacerated than cleanly cut,) once become cankered, or contaminated in any manner, the 
branches must also be expected to suffer and decay. 

6691. An old but erroneous practice followed by many, is that of paring ofiF the best part of the roots 
with a knife ; that is, the tips or ends of the fibres, which are undoubtedly the active agents in collecting 
the food for the stem, &c. ; then, without ever loosening the remaining part of the ball, set in the new 
pot with a little fresh earth thrown loosely about it : as a matter of course, they think it must then 
be completely drenched or flooded from the w^aterpot ; and lastly, to crown the whole, perhaps set it 
immediately in a pan of water ; when, if they only took time to consider the mutilated state, to which 
they have reduced the roots, it is impossible they could ever conceive them to be in a state fit to undergo 
such treatment with any kind of advantage : but it is the misfortune of many, who will not for a moment 
hesitate to undertake the care of tender and curious plants, as a matter easily understood, yet will not 
take the trouble of judging for themselves, to follow the old track of cutting and watering, the same as 
they may have before seen practised on the hardiest geraniums or myrtles. Though the method may not 
seem to hurt some few kinds of strong free-growing plants ; yet it never can be allowed as a proper mode 
of treatment for all plants indiscriminately, because they may happen to have a good portion of roots : 
indeed, more plants have been destroyed by this practice than bj' any other particular part of the system 
of mismanagement which some so blindly follow. There are instances, however, wherein a knife is ne- 
cessary to the roots as well as the branches, viz. when they become rotten or otherwise contaminated; 
and also to such as are propagated by cuttings of the roots,' as-most species of geranium may bo, some 
mimosce also, and indeed any that are observed to produce suckers : in all which cases they should bo 
taken off with precision, and a sufficiency left to support the parent, if considered worth preserving. 



Book IT. 



WOODY BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



925 



6592. In funi/ng the plant ca rrf ulti/ out of tfs pot, objsrve if the roots have perforated it in any part, 
scras to renaer u Tmpossible to part them withiout breaking the one, or lacerating the other; in which 
case iireter the loriner as the shghtest damage : nsiwever, wlien the ball of roots is divested of its pot, 
let the br.'ken tile^, or v.hatever substance lri:l^■ have cccn used as draining, ho carefully picked out 
without leiiMiL" on the roots that mav have grov/n amongst tliem : also any caked or mossy substance on 
thesi;r; .jj, '■, :,.ch will come ca^ilv (,tr with "the fingers. Then proceed to loosen the earth and matted 
roots, i ; atlmg tnem on the tule ot tne ball with the hand ; or otherwise, by pressing it so as to 

open or the'earth v.ituout crackm? the roots; shake off any loose earth, and having a proper 

sized 1 1 1 1 1 ut 11 u n ( t th Mi e-h mould sufficient to raise the crown of the roots to 
abou 1 t L 1 11 ( 1 ht I t u loh -et the plant ; and add more earth, lightly sliaking it 

in a u t L 1l le\\iKleLe;i -^u mcd i ati.l\ light, but not so as to render it hard in the least 

degree, nor bv anv means using a stick tor this purpose, another never-failing attendant on the former 
practice, bv which the roots are extremelv liable to be torn or bruised ; add mould sutiicient to raise the 
surface level with the rim, as it will seitie to a proper depth with watering, and smooth the whole off 
neatly with the hand. 

6693. Two or tnree asusranrs will be found necessarv. where there is much of this V\-ork to be done; 
one of those should be empioved m supulvinG- nots and other necessaries; tlie others in washing and 
cleaning from insects. cVc. anv ular.ts tnat mav hanpen to sta'nd m need before shifted ; and in tying them 
up properly t tl t k 1 ould b 1 a 1 at least once a-year, to hot-house plants 
in particular : as tne oid ones -^-erv otten haruor more or less ot the several pestiferous insects which infest 
these departments. Tnis oone. let the plants be set on a level spot together, and moderately watered 
with a tine-rose pot. held at a distance above their tops so as to give the leaves a good rinsing; but 
observe to give no more water than is suincient to settle the iresh mould to the roots, and by no means 
to slush or'give the surtace that ruadied aDpearance. so verv disagreeable to be observed in departments 
where neatness should be tlie unuorrn and leading unnciple. Having thus iiiiished the first division, 
let them be immediatelv taken to the stove, to be set on the fresh-turned tan tor the present, and 
those that remained tnere. taken to the shed to be treated and shifted in the same manner as the others. 

6694. JV/ien th<: v:Tioic arc s/;n:c('. tncv mav be partially ulunged for a few days ; setting the pot about 
half its depth looselv into the ran. to avciici the danger that attends too violent a heat arising in the pit; 
which is freq tl r c n h tur led or augmented. However, there must be 
a pretty brisk tire-heat kent up m tne house, until the plants recover from their inactive state, the un- 
avoidable consequence oi their roots beiue so recently aisturbed. They will be much benefited at this 
time by a moderate use ot the hand-svrinse. m the raornine before the bun has begun to act upon them 
with force; also bv raisine a stronsr steam in tne house, to be done by throwing water on the tops 
and sides of the warm rlues. Lut wnen tliev are irseiv treated in this manner, tliey require but little 
from the water pot a o e t ] ts in general, and at no time is it more 
particularly so th 1 I a Le 1 H e -er this must unavoidably depend on the 
judgment of him m whose care tnev are Diaced : as some ot them will require considerably more than 
others. In a few aavs. when tne oanser ot a violent heaMs over, the plants may be plunged neatly in the 
tan up to the rim : but ooserve that it is not leit scattered on the surface of the pots, as it would give 
the work an extremelv slovenlv aonearance : a tev,- inches ot clean sawdust laid over the tan, gives 
a clean and neat appearance, which, m most srardens. is a particularly essential part of the curator's 
conduct. All the plants whicn rcnuire the aid ot tan-heat, being properly plunged, and th.e remaining 
ones regulated on the ditterent benches or sheives : let the place be well cleaned out, wlien little more will 
be necessary for a few iveeks than waterins? wnen requisite, squirting, steaming, and attention to the 
degree of heat necessar\' tol3ekept m the house at this season. This should in general be about sixty 
degrees. If it is Kept niucii lower, it wiu consiaeraoiy retara tne plants in recovering their vigor; and 
if many degrees higher, the free-growing kinds will soon over-top, and materially injure the weak and 
more tardy sorts unless prevented ; besides themselves becoming unsightly, the consequence of being 
drawn, or forced into long weak ungainly stems. 

6695. Insects. As the heat increases with the advancing season, the different species 
of insects to which these departments are liable, will multiply incredibly. Those which 
seem to make the greatest havoc amongst plants in the hot-house, are, the green fly, the 
thrips, the mealy white bug, the great scaly bug, the small scale, or the pine-bug, and 
tlie red spider, which, although the smallest, is by far the most destructive of any of the 
species that exist in these departments. 

6696. For the f.y and thrips, there is no process which seems to take so much effect on them, as a 
strong fumigation of tobacco ; repeated twice or thrice, according to tlie strength the insects may have 
attained. 

6697. For the bugs, there is none of the several expensive methods mentioned in different authors so 
effectual, as simply picking them off;_this may be said to be tedious, but then it has surety to plead in 
its behalf; besides, that the plants a're in no manner distigured by the operation ; but unless regularity 
be observed in looking for them, examining plant by plant, and leaf by leaf, from top to bottom, and 
also any incisions or cracks that may be in the bark of the stem, See. there will be a constant and tiresome 
employment ; on the contrary, if regularly done, one operation will be of more service than five, if ex- 
ecuted m a careless inattentive manner. As each individual plant is picked, it should be carefully 
washed with a strong lixivium of soft soap and water, which will have a powerful effect on their eggs, 
which are in general sufficiently small to elude the eye, or perhaps so situated within the young buds 
that they cannot be got at without materially injuring the future growth ; the wash will, however, 
penetrate into these secret holds, and in general be fully adequate to their destruction. 

6d9S. men the plants are out of the house in su/n!?ier, every part of them should be well washed with 
strong soap-suds, in which a little of the sam.e tobacco, as used for fumigating, has been infused ; in par- 
ticular, all the joints of the wood-work, and also whatever nail-holes or other crevices may happen to be 
therein ; as in these places some of the species, more especially the white mealy bug, is much inclined 
to secrete itself for breeding. This operation will, however, if performed in spring and autumn, be a 
great means of their extinction, and will tend in a great degree to check the multiplication of the 
others. 

6699. TJie red spider, the last and most pernicious of the species mentioned, is to be overcome 
neither by fumigation nor picking ; but by the free but well directed use of common water ; either by 
steam or with the hand-syringe. The steam, by creating a fine dew in the house, prevents the insect 
from extending its slender web from leaf to leaf, and thus checks its progress ; while the sjTinge, by su- 
perior force, breaks the Ugaments of those already made, and in most instances washes the insects to the 
ground; where, although it may recover its fall for the first or second application, it is in the end sure 
to perish. They will sometimes, however, elude the greatest dihgence, for a while, bv collecting under 
large horizontal leaves, which serve them as citadels against the attacks of the water; but here they 
wiU soon betray themselves, by extracting the fluid substance of the leaf for their support, in consequence 
of which it loses its verdure and becomes conspicuous; this, when fomid, should be picked off, and taken 
out of the house immediately ; for if left anywhere among the plants they will in a little time establish 
themselves on others. If they happen to be discovered before the leaf has lost its beauty, they mav be 
rubbed off with the hand on a sheet of paper, and expelled the premises. If at any time the quantity 



926 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



of water necessary to be used in these operations, should occasion the earth to become over-wet, in 
those pots particularly which are plunged in the bark-bed, the syringing must be omitted, and use made 
of the steam only, until they again become reasonably dry. Neither should it be performed when the 
sun acts freely upon the plants, lest their leaves become in consequence disfigured. For the water forms 
itself into little spherules, the surfaces of which collect the rays of the sun in a grpater or less degree 
according to their convexity j and thereby the leaves are disfigured by being burned in the focus of each 
spherule. 

6700. Summer treatment. As the season advances, it will become necessary to ad- 
mit a reasonable portion of air on all fine sunny days ; and also to decrease the strength 
of the fires at night : but in these particulars, the only criterion to be guided by, are exr 
perience and observations on the weather, the variations in which render it utterly im- 
possible to lay down any certain rule to act by, further than the admonitions of the ther- 
mometer ; observing to keep it pretty near to sixty degrees. About the beginning or 
middle of May at farthest, fires may be omitted entirely ; as the natural heat of the sea- 
son united to that of the bark-bed, will in general be found sufficient to keep the mer- 
cury up to the above-mentioned point. 

6701. Towards the latter end of June, the plants by this treatment will generally be in a very luxuriant 
free state of growth ; it will be therefore requisite to raise the pots quite out of the tan-bed, to check and 
harden them a little, so as to be able to bear the air of the green-house for a few weeks, which will be 
of considerable advantage to them the ensuing winter. Should any of them remain of a sickly appear- 
ance, (and that a few may be in that state, in large collections, must be reasonably expected,) or any 
particular tender sorts among them, they must be removed to a separate house, as already hinted, v/here 
the tan being previously forked up, and othenvise properly prepared for their reception, they must be 
immediately rcplunged : if no such house is convenient, a large deep hot-bed frame, set on a good bed 
of well-prepared dung, will answer nearly as well for this purpose ; having nine or ten inches of rotten 
tan or sawdust spread regularly over the bed within the frame, in which the pots are to be plunged. 

6702. When the bed has been gut ready, a few days should elapse before the plants are set in it, that 
the steam and violent heat may have sufficient time to evaporate. At the expiration of five or six days, 
however, the plants in their pots maybe set on the surface; where they should remain a little time 
longer without being plunged; but particular care .is necessary that the frame at this time may not be 
kept too close, which would occasion the heat to ascend more rapidly than the plants could well bear; 
to avoid this, give plenty of air in tlie daytime, and also a little at night, with a mat hung before it to 
prevent the sharp air entering into the frame. When the heat of the bed has attained a proper tem- 
perature, so that there may be no danger of the roots being burned or otherwise injured, let the plants 
be plunged, and afterwards treated in the same manner as if they were still in the hot-house : only ob- 
serving to keep those that are in a weak state rather dry; as nothing can be more injurious to a sickly 
plant than too much moisture, by reason of its inabihty to imbibe the usual quantity through want of 
vigor. The plants which remain, intended to be set in the green-house, must now have a considerable 
increase of fresh air on all fine days ; and also (the pots being quite out of the tan) they will require a 
greater portion of water than has been usually given them when plunged. 

6703. As soon as the weather becomes settled, and the night perfectly free from all chilliness and frost, 
which is seldom much before the middle of July, the plants may with safety be removed from the sfove 
to the green-house ; and set regularly on the benches lately occupied by the green-house plants ; which 
they will ornament very much, during the time the latter are set in clumps in the open air. The stove 
may in this interval be furnished with a few of each of the diflferent tender annuals, to give it some- 
thing of a gay lively appearance. They will likewise in some measure serve as a kind of natural trap 
for the spider, &c. ; as they will, should there be any of them left in the house, immediately attack the 
soft tender leaves of these plants, in which case, as soon as they are observed to be collected in force 
upon any individual plant, it should be removed to the open air, without loss of time, and another sub- 
stituted in its room; this practice will contribute towards subduing this formidable enemy, so that, 
combined with other exertions, by the time it becomes necessary to have the hot-house plants reinstated 
in the bark-bed, the house should be pretty free from them. These being now in the green-house, will 
require a little attention to preserve their verdure, such as keeping the glasses close at night and ad- 
mitting air only on fine days ; thus to exclude any chilling or strong winds that may happen to prevail, 
which would occasion the leaves to contract a languid yellowish appearance ; however, in course of a 
week or ten days, they will be able to withstand any weather that may in reason be expected at this 
season ; unless it happens to be unusually violent, in which case it must be guarded against accordingly. 

6704. The removal of insects, weeds, and dead leaves is the principal care they will require now for 
about a month or so, also casually tying up any that may want it, and watering ; in which last article, 
it must be observed, that as they now stand upon dry boards, and the air acting freely on every side of 
the pot, they must consequently be allowed an increase of water, to counterbalance its effect. The even- 
ing is the most proper time for watering at this season, as well as syringing, particularly when dry and 
warm ; for if administered in the morning, the rising heat of the sun exhales it, before it has time to de- 
scend to the lower roots ; and unless replenished frequently in course of the succeeding day, they are 
liable to much injury, by being left in an exhausted state until the following morning, and which, it is 
probable, may not prove more fortunate ; whereas, if administered in the evening, it refreshes them 
after the preceding day's drought, and having sufficient time to penetrate to the roots, they have the 
night to recruit themselves against the following day. Besides, in syringing, there is much more dan- 
ger of having the leaves scorched by the sun's rays, if done in the morning, than if done as here recom- 
mended : but as either extreme is dangerous, care must be taken to use no more water than is evidently 
necessary for the health of the plants : for if used to that degree that the earth becomes sour and de- 
prived of its vegetative powers, the consequences may be rather unpleasant. 

6705. By thus setting the plants in the green-house, it tends to prevent the increase of insects; also 
their too luxuriant growth during the summer m.onths ; and by hardening and ripening the wood, ren- 
ders them strong and firm, and therefore more likely to bloom ; which is, in these ornamental plants, 
the principal object of the cultivator, besides that they are not so liable to be injured by the severities 
of the succeeding winter. 

6706. Autumn treatment. Towards the latter end of August the natural heat of 
the atmosphere will be on the decline ; therefore, except on particular fine days, when a 
small portion of air may be given, the lights must be kept perfectly close ; but more 
especially so at night : as we have frequently at this season heavy chilling dews, and are 
also often sui"prised with unexpected showers of rain or hail ; to admit either of which 
might be very injurious to the plants ; however, by shutting up the house before the sun 
has withdrawn its influence entirely from it, and thereby warming the enclosed air, they 
may safely «tand here some days longer. 



Book 11. 



WOODY BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



927 



6707. As soon as the month of September commences, it is time to think of getting tlie stoves ready for 
their reception ; first, a quantity of fresh tan should be provided, sufficient to raise the bed at least six 
inches above thokirb or wall of the pit, in conjunction with the best of the old already there, which is to be 
extracted by shifting. Let the new tan be spread out to dry in ridges, upon some clean airy spot, or con- 
venient yard, for two or three days, where it should be regularly turned twice or thrice a-day, and covered 
with mats at night ; while this is preparing, let the flues of the house be well cleaned and the walls white- 
washed; an operation necessary to be done every year in these departii;ents, where strong fires are kept 
for such a length of time ; likewise, let the old tan be sifted in the common way, with a pretty coarse sieve 
or riddle : some gardeners throw it entirely away, but the part sifted being mixed with the new, prevents 
its heating so violently as it otherwise would when first put in; it also tends to preserve a more regular 
heat in the other longer than it naturally would if used by itself; as it would be very violent at first, and 
consequently, like most other things that are worked up above theirpitch, liable to be sooner exhausted 
in proportion to the first foundation. 

6708. Having s/fted and got away all the refuse of the old tan, let the fresh, if well dried, be immediately 
carried in, and both well mixed together in the pit ; still adding, until the bed is raised to the proper 
height; this done, let the wood and glass-work, kirbs, jjassages, ^&c. , in short, every part of the house be 
diligently washed ; for the twofold purpose of endeavoring to clear it as much as possible from insects, 
as well as to give it a cleanly appearance : being thus prepared, the plants may be removed from the green- 
house, observing to examine each of them diligently lest any of those plagues so often mentioned, should 
find their way back to the stove. 

G709. The -pots must not be plunged in the tan at first j as well on account of the danger of the violent 
heat injuring the roots, as because this early plunging might start them into a fresh growth; which, at 
this late season, would not be at all to their advantage. They must, therefore, be set on the surface of 
the tan in regular order, where they may stand twelve or fifteen days, or perhaps longer ; being guided in 
tills particular by the state of the atmosphere abroad, as well as the internal temperature of the heat in 
the pit : by the first week in October, the heat of the external air will be considerably abated, and that 
ill the pit. sufficiently moderate The time for plunging being fixed on, observe to have it done in the 
most exact manner, placing the tall plants towards the back or centre, and the lower ones to the front or 
sides of the pit in regular order; according to the form of the house, and the mode of arrangement 
adopted. If sawdust is used, it will contribute much to their cleanliness, and also make a more agreeable 
appearance than the tan. All being set to rights, and the passages, &c. swept clean, give the plants a 
good syringing to wash off whatever dust they may have acquired during their removal, which will com- 
plete the business for this time. The principal care afterwards for a few weeks, is to give them a reason- 
able share of fresh air and water, according to the temperature of the weather ; but it is more proper to 
perform the watering, syringing, and steaming, from this time to the beginning or middle of May, in 
the forenoon; observing to do it while the rays of the sun fall so obliquely as to ensure the plants from 
being injured by it : should it be done in the evening, the air in the house would unavoidably get chilled, 
especially in frosty weather. It is even necessary that the water used for this purpose should be nearly of 
the same temperature as the air in the house. 

6710. About the middle of October, it will be necessary to add a little fire-heat at night, beginning with 
slow fires at first, and regularly increasing them as the severities of the weather increase. Although a 
circulation of fresh air is at all times requisite to the health of plants, yet the heat of the external atmo- 
sphere will at this season be so much diminished that it will not be found convenient to admit it in any 
considerable quantity; ui fact, none should be given, except on pai'ticular fine days, when the front or 
end lights may be opened a few inches. They should be shut early in the day, seldom permitting them 
to remain open longer than one o'clock; thereby giving the sun time to warm the fresh-admitted air be- 
fore the chill of the night commences ; even this little indulgence cannot be allowed from about the end 
of October until the beginning of April : as the strong cold winds which generally blovv' during ihe winter 
months find of themselves but too many entrances. 

6711. As toivateriugin the az</M»72», discontinue it to those plants plunged in the pit, as the moisture of the 
tan, added to that which proceeds from the syringe, will be found quite sufficient for most of them ; on 
the contrary, those over the flues, or on the shelves or kirbs near the fires, will require an additional por- 
tion on account of the strong fires necessary to be kept when the weather happens to be severe. The use 
of the syringe and steam must also be stopped in the severest frosts, lest by that means the house should 
get over chilled ; however, they may both be used freely, when the weather proves moderately mild and 
fine ; but by no means is it to be understood, that the house at this time is to be kept in a continual mist ; 
or, on the other hand, that the plants are not to be carefully examined as usual, and watered liberally 
when in want of it. It is necessary to notice that those plants which are inclined to be deciduous, and 
also some of the more tender ones, will be occasionally dropping part of their leaves ; these should be 
picked off as soon as they appear, otherwise they will have rather a disagreeable appearance among the 
plants. 

6712. Winter treatment. About the JTiiddle or end of December, it will be necessary 
to have the tan in the pit turned, and renovated vv^ith a little fresh well dried bark to en- 
liven the heat, as the severest part of the season is still to be expected ; however, in per- 
forming this work, great care is required that the plants are not chilled or injured by 
being removed out of the tan-bed at this cold season : therefore, the mildest weather 
must be chosen for perforining this operation. The pit being cleared, immediately 
proceed to turn over and mix the old and new tan well together, in which, as soon as it 
is completed and levelled fit to receive the pots, they may be plunged without delay ; as 
there is not that certain danger of a burning heat ascending now as in the summer 
months, in which season the powerful action of the sun occasions it to ascend more 
violently. 

6713. Plunging the pots. Should it not be convenient to have the whole plunged the same day, those 
left will require to be set on the surface of the tan during night ; lest by being left near the glass, or ex- 
treme parts of the house, they might be severely injured ere the morning by the cold air ; as it is therefore 
advisable to keep them as short a time as possible out of the tan at this season, they should without fail 
be [ilunged the next or following day at farthest : it will be also requisite to keep a pretty brisk fire-heat 
in the house, while the plants are out of the tan, and until the bottom heat in the pit becomes sufficiently 
strong ; else they will be liable thereby to droop, and lose many of their leaves in consequence of being 
checked at this season. Should it happen that a series of clear fine weather follows this operation, the 
action of the sun may possibly occasion the heat to rise rather violent in course of a few days after being 
renewed: to this particular attention must be paid, and if any such symptom should appear, it must be 
immediately remedied by lifting the pots out of their places, and throwing into the holes a small quantity 
of the surface tan ; on which the pots may be again set in a loose manner; thus, by permittiing the heat 
to pass freely off by the sides of the pots, it prevents its burning the earth or roots, which would be certairi 
death to the plants : when its violence has subsided, let the pit be levelled, and pots properly replunged ; 
but unless the weather, as already noticed, happens to be particularly clear, in aU livelihood this labor will 
not be e»icountered. 



923 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part HI. 



6714. Watering and cleaning. They will require from this time until about the befcinning of March, 
nothing more than the usual care of watering when necessary, and cleaning them from all dirt or insects 
as soon as they appear ; also to keep the temperature of the enclosed air as near to its regular pitch as 
possible : to assist in compassing this object, when the weather sets in severe, it will be proper to use either 
shutters of canvass or bass mats to cover all the lowest parts of the house ; and in particular those at the 
greatest distance from the entrance of the fires every night ; otherwise the frost will easily enter these 
remote parts, and chill the air through the whole house ; the consequence of which may be very inju- 
rious : on the other hand, if these precautions are not attended to, there will be a necessity of keeping up 
a very strong fire-heat, which will likewise be attended with pernicious effects. 

6715. Insects. It is in these intervals that that destructive insect the red spider makes the most rapid 
progress, on account of the necessity there exists of keeping the houses close, and supporting a dry warm 
air, both of which circumstances are particularly congenial to its nature ; therefore on all fine mild morn- 
ings, observe to raise a imwerful steam in the house as already directed; by the frequent repetition of 
which there will be a possibility of keeping them under control. 

6716. Refreshing the bark-bed. As the internal strength and heat of the tan will now be much on the 
decline, in consequence of the length of time it has been in use, it will be requisite to turn it more fre- 
quently, so that about the beginning of March, it should be again stirred to at least half its depth ; which 
will afford a temperate heat, until the time in which the plants are usually shifted, when it is generally re- 
newed. Some gardeners make it a practice to have merely the upper half of their tan-pits stirred at any 
time throughout the year, when the heat happens to be on the decline ; this is certainly a very proper 
method where there is plenty of time and hands to perform it ; as there is no danger of a burning heat 
arising; but it requires to be done so much the oftener, such heat seldom lasting above a month or six 
weeks ; it consequently will not answer where these conveniences are not to be had. The plants being 
regulated in proper order as before, let theln have the usual treatment until the time of shifting. {Exotic 
Gard. p. 70.) 



Sect. II. Climbing Bark-stove Plants. 



6717. CLIMBING BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 


Pergularia odoratissima 


Aristolochia triloba, p. 


Aristolochia odoratiss. p. 
CraUeva fragrans 
Gronovia scandens, p. 
Pergularia minor 
Roxburghia gloriosoides 
Thunbergia tragrans, p. 


Abrus precatorius, p. 
Convolvulus speciosuSjj). 
Jasminum hirsutum 

— muliitlorum 

— sambac 

— — flo. pleno 

— — monstru. 
Passjflora biflora 

— quadraneularis 


Con volvulus jalapa 
Jasminum auriculatum 



6718. The propagation and culture adopted for green-house climbers, is equally so for those of the bar 
stove, the difference of temperature being taken into consideration. (See 6201'. and 6253.) 



Sect. III. Bidbous-rooted Bark-stove Plants. 

6719. All bulhons-rooted stove })lants may, no doubt, be kept in the dry-stove ; but if it 
is wished that they should flower in any degree of perfection, they must be plunged in 
the bark-bed, when newly planted. The same remark will apply indeed to most of the 
dry-stove bulbs. 



6720. BULBOUS-ROOTED BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 



MAY. j - JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBE'A. 


Allium gracile 
Amaryllis falcata 

— flexilis 

angustifolia 

minor 

— reginoe 

— reticulata 
Haemanthus coarctatus 
Omithosalum arabicum 

— caudatum 
Pancratium amboinense 


Amaryllis advena 

— blanda 

— cruciata 

— radiata 

— radula 

Haemanthus albiflos 

— carinatus 

— pilosus 

— pubescens 
Omithogalum latifolium 


Amaryllis Brunsvigii 

— ciliata 

— curvifolia 

— distich a 
undulata 

— josephinae 

— longifolia 
_ zeylanica 

Crinum americanum 

— asiaticum 

— austraie 

— erubescens 
Heemanthus longifolius 

— multiflorus 
Pancratium carolinean. 

— mesicanum 


Amaryllis aurea 

— crocea 

— equestris 

— latifolia 

— orientalis 

— omata 

— unduliEfolia 
Crinum amabile 

— giganteum 

— latifolium 
Haemanthus coccineus 

— orbicularis 
Pancratium araoenum 

— calathinum 

— fragrans 

— littorale 


Amaryllis brasiliensis 
— marginata 
spectabilis 
Haemanthus quadrivalv. 


Sect. IV. Perennial Herbaceous Bark-stove Plants. 
6721. HERBACEOUS BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 


MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 


brides odoratuin, p. 


Lobelia surinamensis, p. 
Peliosanthes teta 


Buttneria scabra, p. 
Lobelia longiflora, p. 
Tacca integrifolia 
— pirmatifida 


Achyranthes porrigens 
Dionsea muscipula, p. 
Elephantopus scaber 
Gloriosa superba, p. 


Columnea hirsuta, p. 

— scandens 
Leea crispa 

— macrophylla 
Lobelia assurgens 



Book II. 



HOT-HOUSE AQUATICS. 



929 



6722. The propagation and culture of tliese need not be entered on, being esseiitially 
the same as for hardy or green-house herbaceous plants, the difference of temperature 
being taken into consideration. Such as have tuberous roots must be treated on the 
same principle as tubers in the open garden, as, for example, those of fumaria cava, 
erythronium, &c. which have their regular seasons of rest. 

6723. T/ie gloriosa supcrba, that grand, beautiful tuberous-rooted stove plant, for want of attention to 
the nature of its roots and its habits of growth, seldom produces flowers in this country. " Its failure," 
John Sweet observes, " arises chiefly from tlie defective method in which its roots are preserved during their 
inaction, and from the want of proper treatment, when tliey first vegetate in the spring. Injured at these 
})eriods, the plants generally continue through the summer, weak and unpromising, throwing up only a 
few small stems, which do not flower in sufficient strength and beauty." Under the following manage- 
ment, Sweet has had perfect success, and has known a single root grow ten feet in the course of a season, 
with numerous blossoms upon it. When the stalks and foliage have decayed in the autumn, and left the 
root, like a well ripened potatoe, in a dormant state, the pot containing it must be removed from the bark- 
bed to the top of the hot-liouse flue, at some distance from the fire, all the warmth at this time necessary 
being merely what is sufficient to keep the earth in the pot free from damp ; and to prevent the waterings 
of the house, or other moisture, falling on the earth in the pot, it should be covered, by inverting upon it 
another pot of the same size ; or if larger, it will hang over its edges and more effectually exclude the 
wet. If the roots are small, two oi- three may be placed together in the same pot, whilst in their dormant 
state ; but if they are thus shifted, the mould must be well shaken down in the pot, in order to prevent the 
access of air to them ; the old mould in which they grew must also be used ; for fresh earth or sand would 
stimulate them to move too early. About the second week in March, the roots must be planted, putting 
one or two, according to their size, into pots measuring six inches over. The best compost for them is 
fresh loam, mixed with an equal quantity of bog-earth of good quality : the loam should be good, not over 
rich with dung, nor too heavy. The roots are to be covered about tv/o inches deep, and care must be 
taken not to break them, unless nature has shown where it is practicable to divide them easily. The pots, 
when filled, must be plunged into the bark-bed, where the heat should be equal to ninety-five degrees of 
Fahrenheit's scale. Water is to be given very sparingly at first, and though, as they grow, they will re- 
quire a more liberal supply, yet it is necessary, at all times, to be very moderate in giving it. The heat 
must be well kept up, and as the shoots extend they must be supported by sticks, or trained in any direc- 
tion on wire or cords. {Hort. Trans, vol. iii. 23.) 

Sect. V. Annual Herbaceous Bark-stove Plants. 

6724. BARK-STOVE ANNUALS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 


i 

i 

s 




Amethystea caBrulea, p. 
Calceolaria pinnata 
Campanula capensis 
Cassia chamoecrista 

— tora 

Cleome pentaphylla, p. 

— spinosa 

— viscosa 
Convol^fulus pes capras 
Crotolaria juncea 
Hedysarum gangeticum 

— vespertillio 
Heliophila intejiiifolia 
Heliotropiumindicum,/). 
inipatiens balsamina 

— — flesh-co.dble. 

— bizar, tall.dble. 

— — dwarf, dble. 

— — pur. str. dble. 

— — scarl.str.dble. 
Mesembryanthemum 

— glabrum 

— pinivatifidutn 
Physalis prostrata, p. 
Sida dilleniana 

— hastata 
Solanum melongeiia 

— — fruct.purp. 


Amaranthus bicolor 

— cruentus 

— rubicaulis 

— tricolor 
Browallia demissa 

— elata coerulea 

— — flo. albo 
Buchnera caj)ensis, p- 

— fbetida 
Campanula debilis 
Cardiospermum halica- 

cabum 
Convolvulus nil. p. 

— tridentatum 
Ipomoea phoenicea 

— quamoclit 

— — flo. albo 
Lobelia gracilis, p. 
Mimosa pudica 

— sensitiva 
Sida cordifoiia, p. 


Celosia argentea 

— cemua 

— cristata rub. 

— — dwarf, red 

— — tall, buff 

— - - dwarf 

— — imperial,red 

— — — variega. 
Clitoria brasiliana, p. 

— ternata 

— _ flo. albo 
Crotolaria verrucosa 
Datura fastuosa, pl- 

_ flo. albo 
Gomplirena globosa 

— — flo. albo 

— — flo. stri. 
Martynia proboscidea 
Mesembryanthemum 

crystallinum 
Pentapetes phoenicea, p. 



6725. Propagation and culture. They are all propagated from seeds, most of which ripen in this 
country ; but some few sorts are continued by cuttings for the sake of preserving particular variations. 
Sow in February or March in pots, to be plunged in a hot-bed ; prick out the plants into the smallest-sized 
pots, when they have attained one or two proper leaves, and shift them once or twice into pots a size larger 
in the manner recommended for the balsam (1653.) ; keeping the plants in hot-beds or pits till ready to 
blossom, when they may either be removed to such of tlie houses as are empty at the time, as the bulb- 
house, green-house, &c. or assembled in a house devoted to annuals. Some few of them, as the ice-plant 
{Mesembryantliemum crystallinum) and egg-plant {Solanwn iiiclongenum), may be plunged in a warm 
situation in the open garden. 

Sect. VL Aquatic Stove Plants. 
6126. HOT-HOUSE AQUATIC PLANTS. 



MARCH. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 


Arum venosum 
Cyperus altemifolius 


Menyanthes indica 

— ovata 
Nymphaea pubescens 

— py«msea 
Pontederia dilatata 


Aponogeton angustifol. 

— distachyon 
Euryale ferox 
Nelunibium speciosum 
Nymphasa ceerulea 

— rubra 

— stellata 

— versicolor 
Philydrum lanuginosum 
Sagittana lancifolia 


Aponogeton monosta- 

chyon 
Damasonium indicum 
Nymphasa lotus 
Poniederia cordata 
Sagittavia cbtusifolia 


Cyperus papyrus 
Thalia dealbata 



3 O 



gso 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



j(^i!^f wmililllimiMll«^ 

1 








9 rp nii 


m m 


m 



6727. Propagation and culture. Being all herbaceous plants they are to be propagatetl as these generally 
are : some are raised from seeds, which in general should be sown as soon as rii)C, and the pots plunged in 
shallow water ; when the plants come up, they may be transplanted into other pots, and shifted as they ad- 
vance in growth, tiil in a pot of sufficient size to admit their flowering, which will generally take place the 
same season. Instead of being kept in jjots, the plants may be inserted in a bed of earth on the bottom of 
tlie aquarium. The most beautiful of the exotic aquatics, are the nymphjcas and nelumbiums ; these, with 
other genera, have been cultivated to a high degree of ;;erfe; tion by Kent, who, instead of a regular aqua- 
rium emjjloys pans and small cisterns, jilunged in hot-beds. Where a regular aquarium is not formed to be 
heated by flues {Jigs.B'iS, 519.) we should 

suggest the idea of a cistern {Jig. 622.) to be 622 
placed on pillars in the open air. When the 
season for forcing the nymphaeas com- 
mences, it may be surmounted by a hot-bed 
frame of the same diameter, and surrounded 
by linings of dung. By this means any re- 
quired degree of heat might be ])roduced 
puring the flowering season, and if it were 
desired to conti'Jiue any of the plants in a growing state during winter, the linings and frame could be 
continued ; if not, the plants might be removed to a reserve-aquarium, in the stove or propagation-house. 

6728. Menyanthes, nymphcea, and euryale ferox (an annual, with singularly constructed leaves, often of 
thirty inches diameter), Kent nas proved to thrive best in a close heat. Menyanthes requires only to be 
fresh potted in spring, and placed in a pan in a hot-bed, where it will flower the whole summer. The 
nymphseas having tuberous roots, he keeps, through the winter, in small pots (sixties\ in a dormant state, 
in a small trough of water in the stove. Early in April, he prepares them for their summer culture, by 
placing these in small wooden cisterns, two feet long, fourteen inches wide, and six inches deep, and then 
placing them in any cucumber or melon frames which may be then in use. " In about a fortnight or three 
weeks a number of offsets or runners will be tlirown from the bulbs. These are then separated and put 
into small pots ; and in the course of ten or twelve days a strong plant of each species is selected, and 
placed in the cisterns for flowering. The tender aquatics, especially the nympha;as, grow in a brick three- 
light frame, thirteen feet long, and six feet broad ; inside depth at back, tive feet, and above the ground, 
four feet ; which is filled with tan. 1 have four wooden cisterns, lined with lead, four feet long, two feet 
six inches wide, and fifteen inches deep : they are plunged in the tan, and filled with strong rich loam, 
about six inches deep, the bottom part of which is rammed down ; and the plants placed in them, one or 
two in each, according to their habit of growth. The cisterns are then filled with water by degrees. As 
the plants advance in siz?, they must be replenished and cleared from confervje as often as necessary ; and 
if the plants are occasionally watered over their leaves, from a watering-pot, through a rose, their vigor 
will be greatly increased. It is important to keep them in a constant state of growth ; for if checked, they 
will form, bulbs, and grow no more during the season. This will be caused by cold ; but this year (1817), 
the heat in June produced the effect, although they were shaded from the sun's rays by matting, and the 
lights considerably raised. Where dung is used, there is like danger, from its heating. After being 
planted out, they will show flowers in the course of a month, and some of them will continue blooming 
through the season. As soon as the plants have done flowering, and perfected their seeds, they disappear, 
and form bulbs in the mud. These, in the month of October, I put into small pots (sixty to the cast), and 
place them in a trough of v/ater, in the stove, where they remain dormant until the ensuing spring. The 
seeds are most likely to vegetate, if sown at the same time, and treated in the same manner. Nympha?a 
caerulea will flower in the stove ; but not so freely as in the frame. Nympha;a stellata seeds freely, but the 
root does not easily divide ; indeed it is best grown, when treated as an annual. Euryale ferox does well 
under similar treatment to that of the nymphjeas ; its seed should be sown about Christmas, and kept in 
the cistern of the stove." {Hort. Trans, iii. 34.) 

6729. Nelumbium speciosu7n " is easily raised from seed, which will retain its vegetative power for forty 
years, and with every advantage, in a fair season, produce blossom the first summer. It is generally grown 
in large tubs, with a few inches depth of water over the surface of the mould, placed in the tan-bed of the 
stove. By these means, I raised a fine plant last year : the seed was sown in May, and threw up several 
flower-buds, which did not come to perfection, but most probably would have done so, had the seed been 
sown two months earlier. The leaves produced were about two feet in diameter ; but the plant went off 
in the winter, notwithstanding it was treated in the manner hitherto found the most successful ; which has 
been, to allow the tub to remain in the tan, and become nearly dry, giving it no more water than the other 
plants around it. At Canton, it seems, they drain the ponds wherein it grows, and use the roots for food ; 
but whether fibres of it are the parents of the ensuing crop, or the pots are replenished by seedlings, doe« 
not appear. Both are probable, as the roots, which have been kept nearly dry in our hot-houses, if but a 
very small piece has remained alive, have become vigorous blooming plants, as well as those from seed." 
{Hort. Trans, iii. 36.) 



6730. 



Sect. VII. Scitaminous, or Reedy Stove Plants. 
MARSH, OR REEDY HOT-HOUSE PLANTS. 



MAY. 


JUNE. 


JULY. 


AUGUST. 


SEPTEMBER. 


Alpinia aIlughas,HIarch, 
P- 

— occidentalis 

— racemosa 
AmomUm afzelii 
KKmJjferia angustifijlia 
Strelit/ia reginae, p. 

— ovata, March 

— farinosa 
Urania speciosa, March 


Costus spicata, p. 
Curcuma zedoaria 
Strelitzia au^sta, p. 

— angustifolia 

— parvifolia 


Carina glauca, p. 

— indica 
Heliconia bihai 
Olyra paniculata 


Costus arabicus, p. 

— speciosus 
Curcuma longa 
Hedjchium angustifo- 
lium, p. 

Heliconia psittacorura 
Kaempferia galanga 
— Jotunda 
speciosa 
Alpinia nutans 


Globba marantina, j). 

— sessiliflora 
Maranta arundinacea 
Musa coccinea, Dec. 

— paradiiiaca, Nov. 

— rosacea sapientum 
Alpinia calcarata 
Zingiber officinale 

— purpureum 

— zerumbit 



6731. Propagation and culture. No plants are more easily propagated than those enumerated. In respect 
to culture, they may for the most part be considered as marsh or bog plants, for even the sugar-cane 
{Saccharum qfjficinarum) and ginger {Zingiber officinale) are found in a wild state by rivers and in moist 
woods, and thrive best in the stove when their roots are liberally supplied with water. 



Sect. VIII. Selections of Bark-stove Plants Jbr particular Purj)oses. 
6732. Selections of bark-stove jilants for particular purposes can be but few. A collec- 
tion may be made of such as are or have been most used in the arts; of curious or bota- 
nists' species ; of such as are highly odoriferous, as asclepias, bignonia, clerodendron ; or 
night-smelling, as cestrum nocturnum, cactus grandiflorus ; of palms, as of the sago-palm 
(Ci/cas), of the cocoa-nut (Cocas), of the date-palm, [Phoenix) &c. ; or of any of the natural 



Book II. SELECTIONS OF BARK-STOVE PLANTS. 931 



orders of such rare sorts as have not yet flowered. The following are some of the most 
remarkable of the economical tropical plants used either in their native countries or im- 
ported into this country. 



and 



Food. 

Bengal quince (^f^le marmelos) 
Sour-sop (Anmna muricata) 
Alligator-apple (Annona palnstris) 
Cabbage- tree (Areca oleraaa) 
Bread-fruit-tree (Artocarmia incisa) 
.Taca-tree (AHocarpiis infegrifulia) 
Akee-tree {Blighia sapiila) 
Bread-nut-tree {Brosimum alicastrum) 
Cocoa-plum-tree {Chrysohalaiius icaco} 
Star-apple (Chrysophyllum cahiito) - 
Cocoa-nut-tree ( Cocos nucifera) 
Coffee- tree (CoJ]'ea arabica) 
Garlic-pear [Crateva tapia) 
Calabcish-tree [Cresceniia cucurbitina) 
Sago-palm {Ci/cas revvlufa) 
Lee-chee (Dimocarpus litchi) 
Smooth-fruited lee-chee (Dimoc. longan) 
Date-plum {Diospyrus kaki) 
Malay apple (Bngeniajambos) 
Mangosteen (Garcinia mangostana) 
Anchovy -pear (fiWffi caiilijlora) 
Eatable oKro {Hibiscus esciUentiis) 
Otaheite chestnut {Inocarpus edulis) 
Barbadoes cherry (Malpighia angustifol.) 
Mammee-tree (Mammea americaim) 
Mango-tree (Mangifera indica) 
Saffron- fruit {Mimosa dulcis) 
Date-palm (Phomix ducfylijera) 
Guava {Psidium pyriferum, pomif. &c.) 
Lotus-tree (Rhamnus lotus) 
Tamarind- tree {TamaHndus indica) 
Chocolate-nut-tree {T/ieobroma cacao] 
Sweet potatoe {Convul. batiaias) ; climb. 

Some minds relish nothing that is not either immediately useful, or has some relation to utility : to 
such the foregoing list will be of some value as pointing out plants of great importance to mankind in 
other countries. From our connection with these countries, and the number of young persons "that 
annually leave Britain to pass great part of their lives in them, it is desirable those i)lants should be known 
here also ; and hence a rational object for the patriot, who has wealth and leisure, to display them in a 
conservatory attached to his castle, or palace, {fig.CS^.) of suitable elevation and extent. 



Granadilla {Passijloraquadrang.) ; climb. 
Melon-thistle [Cactus ynammilaris) ; sue. 
Barbadoes gooseberry {Cactus percs.) ; sue. 
Black pepper {Piper nigrum) ; sue. 
Salsilla {Aistrameria salsilla) ; herb. 
Eatable anim {Arum esculentum) ; herb. 
Otaheite salop {Tacca integrifolia) ; herb. 
Sacred Indian bean (NeXurnbium sped- 

osum) ; aquatic 
Cardamom(/l»(OTO!mca»-f/amomj(j«);reedy 
Grains of I'aradise (Ammmim granum 

jiaradisi) ; reedy 
Arrow-root {Maranta arundiwtcea) ; reedy 
Plantain-tree {Musa pnrndisiaca) ; reedy 
Banana-tree {Musa sapientum) ;. reedy 
Sugar-cane {Saccharum officin.) ; reedy 
Ginger {Zingiber officinal). 

Medicine 
Cashew-nut (Anacardium occidetdale) 
Areca-nut-tree, (^rccA« catechu) 
Ipecacuanha {Euphorbia ipecacuanha-) 
Papaw-tree ( Carica papaya) • remarkable 

for its property of ihtenerating raw 

meat. 

Jesuits'-bark {Cinchona <>fficinalis) 
Balsam of Capivi {Copaxfera officinalis) 
Gum-guaiacum {Guaiacum officituilc) 
Cassava {JatrophamaniJwt) 
Cinnamon {Launis cinnccmomum) 
Cassia {Laurus cassia) 
Medicinal mimosa {Mimosa catechu) 
Gum- Arabic-tree {Mitrwsa nilotica) 
Pimento-tree (Myrtns pimeido) 
Bitter of porter {Quassia amara) 



Poison-nut {Strychnos muc vomica) 
Wild licorice {Abrus preeatoritis) ; climb. 
Jalap-root {Convulvuhis, Jutapa.); climb. 
Gum-elastic {Echites elasiica) ; climb. 
Vanilla ( Vanilla aromatica) ; climb. 
Contrajerva-root {Dorstema contrajerva) ; 

herbaceous 
Balsam-plant (Justicia comata) ; hert). 

< A RTP. 



Silk-cotton-tree {Bombax ceiba) 
Tallow-tree {Croton sebiferum) 
Oily palm-tree {Elais guineensis) 
Olive-wood {Elwodendron orientale) 
Indian rubber-tree (Fkus elastica 

Echites elastica) ; climb. 
Cotton-tree {Gossypium arboreum) 
Logwood (Hwmaioxylon campechiauum) 
Manchineel tree (Hippomane mancinella) 
Sandbox-tree {Hura crepitans) 
St. Helena red-wood (Melhania ery- 

ihroxylon) 

St. Helena ebony {Melhania inelanoxylon) 
Sponge-tree {Mimosa farnesiana) 
Supple-jack (Paidlinia polyphylla) 



ouppie-jacK (faiunma poiypnyiia) 
Ground ratan (Rhapis Jlahelliformis) 
Japan sumach (Rhus succcdanum) 
Soapberry (Sapimlus saponariu) 
Mahogany-tree {Srvietcnia maiwgani) 
Indian oak {Tectinm graiidis) 
Lance-wood (Uvaria lancenlata) 
Indian madder (Oldenlandia itmbellala) ; 
herb. 




6783. In selections of rare or curious plants, or such as are souglit after chiefly by 
botanists, the palms, the air plants, and the exotic ferns will be included ; and on the 
culture of these, we shall select some remarks from the Horticultural Transactions. 

6734. The palmce is a natural order of plants of great interest by their utility, boll) as fruit-trees, 
and as supplying other products ; and of much grandeur of appearance. The cocoa, sago, and date palms 
are well known : upwards of fifty other species have been introduced into this country, and are to be toimd 
chiefly at Messrs. Loddiges. A number more remain to be procured, of which the dome-palm {fig. 624.) is 
one of the most remarkable, being the only palm known 
to have a branched trunk like other trees. 

6735. The culture of palms is less a matter of nicety, 
than expense. They require a powerful moist heat, a 
latge mass of rich earth in the pot, tub, or bed, and ample 
space for the leaves. As they are of remarkably slow 
growth, a stove devoted to their culture does not require 
to exceed the common height at first, but to admit the 
tree-palms to display their character, it would require to 
have the roof elevated by degrees to 60, 80, or 100 feet. 
It is much to be wished that some spirited man of wealth 
would, in these times of peace and leisure, distinguish 
himself by palm culture, of which Messrs. Loddiges, much 
to their honor, have set the first example. It is a common 
opinion, that their growth is so slow, that little effect 
would be produced during a life-time : but this every gar- 
dener that has supplied his palms with abundance of space 
for the roots, and adequate heat in their atmosphere, can 
witness against. 

6736. Parasitic stove plants. Maria Graham {Letters 
from India) remarks, that she saw many of these flourish- 
ing in great luxuriance on the rough trunks of palms in 
the Calcutta botanic garden. At Kew, Spring Grove, and in 
the garden of the Horticultural Society, they have been 

3 O 2 




932 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



generally grown in rough tan, closely pressed together in small pots or baskets, and suspended from 
the roof of the hot-house. Messrs. Loddiges have established some specimens^ on the trunks of palms 
in the Indian or natural manner, and the Honorable and Rev. W. Herbert appears to have been 
equally successful. " I am informed," he says, " by a friend at Calcutta, that he cultivated with 
great ease, all tlie dendrobia aerides, and other parasitical plants, by tying them, with twine, to the 
stem of a tree, or to the under-side of a branch, and placing above them a pot of water with a hole at 
the bottom, through which a string passed, nearly as large as the aperture, by which the water was 
gradually and continually conducted to the upper part of the parasitical plant, which requires to be 
constantly moist and shaded ; and that a tree with smooth bark answered the purpose best. He men- 
tions that dendrobium pieradii, fastened to a tree and irrigated in this manner, will, in a little more 
than a year's time, produce pendulous racemes of flowers, from two to six feet long, and it appears likely 
to thrive with me u.'feer the same treatment. 1 had previously found no difficulty in establishing epiden- 
ura on the stems of trees in the stove, by cutting a notch in the bark and inserting the plant like a graft, 
and tying moss about it to support it, till the young roots had attached themselves to tlie bark ; but from 
want of sufficient moisture, they have not made much progress, or flowered with me: I have now adopted 
the above-mentioned mode of irrigating them, with full confidence chat it will succeed in our stoves, as well 
as it does at Calcutta; and very soon after its application to a sickly epidendron, growing on the stem of 
sterculia balanghas, vigorous young fibres began to sprout from it on all sides. I am very much inclined 
to think, that most of such plants would attach themselves to the sides of a porous sto.ie or vessel, or of a 
dead root, if constantly irrigated, and thrive upon them as wcUas upon a living tree, especially if the stone or 
root were covered with growing moss, for I have observed the fibres of more than one sort attach themselves 
strongly to the outside of the pot in which they are planted ; and I conceive that they might be beautifully 
cultivated, upon an ornamental cone of porous pottery, filled with water and furnished, on the outside, 
with niches, in which the plants might be fixed, with a little moss or peat to promote their growth in the 
first instance. I have found the parasitical plants in danger of perishing, from want of moisture, on a de- 
ciduous tree, during its season of inactivity, but that deficiency would probably be removed by constant 
irrigation. The neatest and most convenient vessels for that purpose, perhaps, would be little tubs, such as 
are sold at toyshops, which might be easily tied to a branch, and perforated with a small gimlet. A short 
string, of which one end is twisted round, or at least in contact with the plant, and the other inserted into 
a phial of water, will also be found to convey a regular, thoiigh less plentiful supply of moisture, acting in 
manner of a siphon. I have used it advantageously to nourish a graft, and promote its union with the 
stock. For the cultivation of parasitical plants in pots, I recommend placing the pots on a back flue, in a 
tin tray, about two inches deep, and half filled with wet sand, giving an abundant supply of water, but not 
sufficient to produce rottenness by its stagnation. I find the growth of crinums, which also like a moist 
heat, to be prodigiously rapid with that treatment ; I should suggest a mixture of porous stones, or bits 
of broken pots, with old tan, or such peat as contains a portion of half-decayed wood, and a garnish of moss 
to the pot, as preferable, for parasitical plants, to the loam which some of our books have recommended." 
[Hort. Trans, iv. 245.) All these parasites are included under the natural order of Orchidese are of 
herbaceous habits, and readily propagated by suckers or cuttings. 

6737. The Rafflesia Arnoldi is the most extraordinary parasite known to botanists. It was discovered by 
the late Dr. Arnold, in Sumatra, in 1818, in a jungle or thicket, growing close to the ground under the bushes, 
and attached to the roots of a species of cissus or vites. The plant consists of the flower only, having neither 
leaves, branches, or roots ; the flower is a yard across ; the petals, which aresubrotund, being twelve inches 
from the base to the apex, and it being about a foot from the insertion of the one petal to the opposite one ; 
the petals are from a fourth to three fourths of an inch thick, and the nectarium, it is supposed, would 
hold twelve pints. It appears to take its origin in some crack or hollow of the stem, and soon shows itself 
in the form of a round knob, which, when cut through, exhibits the infant flower enveloped in numerous 
bracteal sheaths, which successively open and wither away as the flower enlarges. A singular change takes 
place in the vessels of the root or stem on which it grows ; their ramifications are multiplied, and they take 
a direction so as to unite with and accommodate themselves to the base of the parasite to which tl)ey con- 
vey nourishment. The general appearance of the flower is that of Stapeli^, and its smell is also fetid. It 
is dioecious, and supposed by Brown to belong to the natural order of Asarinese. There is another species 
11. horsfieldii with the flowers not above three inches in diameter. Both, it is probable, may in time be in- 
troduced in our stoves. (See Lin. Trans, xiii. 201.) 

6738. Exotic ferns. The tree-ferns, Humboldt informs us, are of singular beauty in their native sites. 
Only a few species of these, as dicksonia arborescens, davallia pyxidata, pteris aculeata, &c. have been 
introduced ; but the number of herbaceous ferns which are stove plarnts is considerable. They are pro- 
pagated from seeds which generally ripen freely in this country, and such as are received from abroad 
generally grow, however long kept ; they are also muKiplied by dividing the roots. The best collection of 
exotic ferns is considered to be in the Liverpool garden : many of these have been raised from seed by 
Shepherd, the assistant curator ; and the following are his directions for tliis purpose : Having provided a 
common garden-pot, four and a half inches in depth, and three and a half wide, let the bottom part, to the 
height of one inch, be filled with fragments of broken pots by way of drain. Over these should be spread 
a stratum of such soil as is commonly used for potting green-house plants, of the depth of two inches ; 
the remaining half inch should be filled with brown loamy earth sifted through a hair sieve, the surface 
being made perfectly smooth, and on this the seeds are to be scattered as evenly as possible. Care must 
be taken that the wind be not sufifered to blow the seeds away, leaving nothing but empty capsules. The 
seeds being sown, no other covering is requisite than a bell-glass, which should just fit within the rim of 
the pot, so as to exclude all air. The pot is then to be kept in a pan always half full of water, and set in a 
shady part of the stove or hot-house, being always regularly watered as above directed. When the young 
plants have acquired their second leaf, it is proper to give them a little air by placing a small piece of 
wood under the edge of the glass, at one side. In a short time afterwards the glass may be entirely 
removed. {Hort. Trans, iii. 338.) 

6739. The seeds come up in two or three 7nonths, and the plants flower the following year. It is not 
known how long these seeds retain their vegetative quality, but two plants of acrostichum calomelanus 
were raised from seeds brushed from a specimen of that fern in the herbarium of Foster, supposed to be 
near fifty years old. But the same success did not attend similar attempts with any other specimens from 
this herbarium. The soil for ferns should be of a soft fine texture to suit the very small fibres of their 
roots ; it requires als6 to be kept constantly moist in imitation of the native habitations of these plants ; 
which is generaJy under the shade of trees or rocks. Hence also they may be set in dark parts of the 
stoves where nMhing^lse will thrive. 



iJooK II. MONTHLY FLORICULTURAL PRODUCTIONS. 



933 



Sect. IX. Selection 

6740. 

Wooihj -plants. Bambusa arundinacea, 
Barringtonia speciosa, Carica papaya, 
i^atesbaea spinosa, Clerodendrum fra- 
^ans, Coccoloba cerifera, Cocos nuci- 
tera, Corypha urabraculifera, Chaniae- 
rops humilis, Cycas revoluta. Phoenix 

- daitylifera, Coffea arabica, Crotolaria 
pulchra, Datura arborea, Dillenia spe- 
ciosa, Dracaena draco, Ficus indica. 
Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, Ixora coccinea, 
Liagerstrcemia reginae. Mimosa ni- 
lotica, odoratissima, Myrtus pimenta, 
Nerium coronarium, odorum, Nyc- 
tanthes arbor tristis, Portlsmdia gran- 
diflora, Robinia violacea, Solandra 
erandiflora, Sterculia platantifoUa, 



of Dry and Bark-stove Plants, 
one Hot-house to contain them. 

Tectona grandis, Vinca rosea, Volka- 
meria acuieata. 

Climlnnfr. Convolvulus speciosus, Cra- 
taeva fragrans, Dolichos urens, Ipo- 
moea digitata, Jasminum sambac, Pas- 
siflora coccinea, alata, racemosa. 

SuccuterUs, Agave vivipara. Aloe pel- 
lucens. Cactus grandiflorus, melocac- 
tus, speciosus, Eui)horbia clava, Pan- 
danus odoratissimus. Piper nigrum, 
Stapelia grandiflora. 

Bvlbs. Amaryllis regina:, josephinae, 
Crinum amabile, erubescens, latifoli- 
um, Haemanthus coccineus, Pancra- 
tium amcenum. 

Hsrbaceous, .lErides odoratum. Arum 



for such us have only 



bicolor, Epidendrum cochleatum, 
Gloriosa superba. Gloxinia maculata, 
Limodorum tankervillii, Phytolacca 
octandra, Polypodium aureum, Pteris 
grandiflora. 

A(iuatics. Cyprus papyrus, Euryale fe- 
rox, Menianthes indica, Nelumbium 
speciosum, Nymphaea lotus, pubescens, 
rubra, Thalia dealbata. 

Reedy. Alpina racemosa, Canna glau- 
ca, irfdica, Heliconia bihai, Maranta 
arundinacea, Musa paradisiaca, sapi- 
entum, Saccharum officinarum, Stre- 
Utzia reginae. Zingiber officinale. 



Chap. XV. 

Monthly Catalogue of the leading Productions of Ornamental Horticulture. 
6741. Our catalogue of monthly ornamental productions extends only to a few of the 
more generally known flowering plants and trees ; what respects the hot-house depart- 
ment is to be understood as referring to flower-gardens, which contain at least a bark- 
stove, a dry-stove, one or more green-houses, and an adequate number of reserve-pits 
and frames. Those plants are marked (*) which may be produced from a small garden, 
where there is a green-house, flued-pit, and hot-beds ; not in any quantity, but suffi- 
ciently to keep up a hope and a fear for every month. The keeping up of this sort of 
hope and fear is much more conducive to the sort of happiness or interest which those 
who have small gardens expect to derive from them, than a gr-and display of two or three 
species of flowers, occurring only once or twice in the year. 

JANUARY. 



The crocus, tulip, and some alliums, 
beginning to emerge from tl>e ground. 
Jf mild vsreather, perhaps some choice 
plant ill flower, as the Christmas 
rose, daisy*, but generally no flower 
is to be seen at this season. 



The snowdrop*, Christmas rose*, and 
winter aconite*, in flower ; J;he cro- 
cus, orown-imperial, and ether bulbs, 
fast advancing, if the weather be 
favorable. 



FLOWER-GARDEN. 



SHRUBBERY. 



Evergreens display themselves to ad- 
vantage, especially the holly* with its 
coral berries. Calycanthus precox, 
red and white, and laurustinus* in 
flower. 



FEBRUARY. 



HOT-HOUSE DEPARTMENT. 



In the green-kmise , the camellias' 
full bloom, and some heaths and 
australasian plants. 

In the stove, strelitzia"", seven species, 
and some other plan in. 

From the pits and kot-tmh in the re- 
serve-garden, forced rose-, hyacinths, 
and other bulbs, mi^Tionetle, &c. 
placed in the conservatory, plant, 
cabinet, or drawingioom. 



The male flowers of the ha/el*, yew- 
tree* ; those of erica carnea, and some 
shrubs, appear. 

The laik sings about the beginning of 
the month, and the thrush about the 
middle. 



In the green-house, camellias* and 
heaths in great beauty, and also s 
species of oxalis, protea, &c. 

In the stove, strelitzia*, and some bulb! 
and succulents. 

Forced articles from the pits as before 



MARCH. 



imperials*, and also the primrose* 
and polyanthus are in bloom in the 
latter half of the month ; saxifiraga 
oppositifolia* among the alpines ; and 
viola odorata* in a warm border, or 
on rock- work. 



Some pines, popljurs, and willows*, 
show their catkins ; the sloe*, corne- 
lian cheiTy*, mezereon* difterent 
varieties, daphne pontica and coUina, 
the lonicera nigra*, and rosemary in 
flower. 

The ring-dove begins to coo m the first 
week. 



In the green-house, some camellias^ 
still in flower ; numerous heaths* ir 
great beauty ; also aletris*, lachena^ 
ua*, oxalis*, some geraniae*, anf 
above a dozen other genera. 

In the stove, some scitamenae anc 
bulbs ; solandra grandiflora, plinia 
eugenia, andjusticia. 

Forced articles as before. 



APRIL. 



The hyacinth*, narcissus*, auricula*, 
and polyanthus*, four of the most 
valued florists' flowers are in perfec- 
tion in the course of this month . Also, 
the scilla, fritillaria*, wallflower*, 
daisy* ; pulmonaria officinalis, cyno- 
glossum, omphaloides* various saxi- 
Sragas, and other alpines. 



Most of the wild fruit-trees, as crabs*, 
pears*, cherries*, and their allied 
species, are now in flower : most of 
the willows, birches, elms, and oaks, 
show their catkins. Among shrubs, 
the honeysuckle, some robmias*, 
andromedas*, daphnes, ericas*, tind 
zanthorrhiza, are in flower. 



In the green-kouse, above thirty specie;- 
of ericae*, and nearly as many of tht 
ixiee* family, with lachenalia, oxalis, 
acacia, and various other genera ir 
perfection. 

In the- stove, dracaena*, bromelia* 
kaempferia, stapelia, and some bulbs 
in flower. 

Abundance of forced articles, includfn/; 
annuals, as sweet peas, larkspurs, &c. 
in flower. 



MAY. 



The auricula-stage still a fine object 
in the first week ; and the polyan- 
thi narcissi not yet over. The col- 
lections of tulips*, anemones*, and 
pajonies*, in full beauty from the 
middle of the month. Many showy 
herbaceous plants, as statice*, lych- 
nis*, philox*, &c. coming into flower. 
Among the aquatics, hottonia palus- 
tris, and ranunculus aouatilis*. 



The horse-chestnut*, hawthorn*, sor- 
bus*,,mespilus*, and snowdrop-tree*, 
in great beauty. Among the American 
shnxbs, several species of magnoli?*, 
azalea* ; kalraia*, andromeda*, &c. 
and among common shrubs, the 
lilac*, spiraea*, guelder-rose*, honey- 
suckle*, the cinnamon, Scotch, bur- 
net-leaved, and monthly roses. 

Most of the singing birds in full note. 

3 O 3 



In the green-house, a fine display oi 
ericae*, ixiae*, and gladioli*. Also se- 
veral geraniae, salviae, protei ' 



In the stove, phy tolacca decandra, pas- 
siflora racemosa*, and other species, 
justicia, heliconia, and various genera, 
From the forcing-department , gera- 
niums and other green-house piants,| 
hydrangeas*, balsams* and other 
tender annual:,. | 



934 



PRACTICE OF GARElENING. 
JUNE. 



Part III. 



The collections of pasonies and ane- 
mones not jet faaed ; those of ra- 
uunculus*, iris xiphium* and xi- 
phioides ; and of the hardy gladioli* 
and ixiae, in full beauty. Assortments 
of pink* and sweetwilliam*, in flower 
towards the end of the month ; he- 
merocallis*, aquilegia*, campanula*, 
veronica*, and many showy herba- 
ceous perennials ; some biennials, as, 
agrostemma, alyssum*, &c. ; annuals, 
as crepis, cucubalus ; aquatics, as bu- 
tomus*, hydrocharis, potamogeton ; 
viola, sasifiraga*, and various alpines. 



FLOWER-GARDEN. 



SHRUBBERY. 



The Urae, laburnum, and fringe-tree*, 
in flower ; towards the middle of the 
month a number of the roses* ; of 
Americans*, andromeda, magnolia, 
rhododendron maximum and pon- 
ticura, azalea, &c. Of common shrubs, 
cisttis*, helianthemum, erica, dog- 
wood, elder, cytissus, spirea, lorii- 
cera, &c. 

The goat-sucker, or fern-owl (Capri- 
mulgjis europmis), heard in the even- 
ing of the hrst week. Most singing 
birds leave oti" singing about the end 
of the month. 



HOT-HOUSE DEFARTSIENT. 



In the fcreen-lumse, chiefly tender Ein 
nuals from the reserve-garden; the 
proi)er inhabitants being in the open 
garden, and there the heaths, gera- 
nice, citrus tribe*, diosmae, protese 
(Sic. in great beauty. 

In the stiiie, amaryllis*, and othei 
bulbs, aloe, piper, and other succu. 
lents; eugenias, epidendrons, cassia 
castrum, &c. 

The pits filled with tender annual; 
other plants, in the course of propa- 
gation and rearing. 



JULY. 



The florists' flowers of this month 
are, the pink*, and carnation* ; the 
white martagon* and tyger lilies* ; 
the Brompton stock*, larkspurs*, lu- 
pines, and other biennials and an- 
nuals. More herbaceous plants are 
now in flower than in any other 
month, as clielone*, delphinium*, 
dictamnus*, gentiana*, statice *, 
philox*, silene*, salvia, veronica, 
saxifraga, &c. The most showy of 
the aquatics, asnymphaea*, nuphar*, 
villarsia*, alisma, calla, stratiotes, 
myosotis*, &c. eire now in flower, and 
various alpines. 



The tulip-tree*, magnolia* kalmia*, 
andromeda*, azalea*, erica*, several 
sorts, and some rhododendrons*, and 
other American or peat -earth shrubs 
in flower. Among the commoner 
sort, the roses* are now in full 
splendor. The white jasmine*, 
honeysuckles*, clematis*, spartium, 
gleditschia triacanthos, cistus, lyci- 
um, and a great variety of others of 
less note. 

Showy butterflies and moths appear in 
the beginning, and the dragon-fly 
towards the end of the month. 



The f^reeii-lwiise is now filled -with 
tender annuals, as balsams, globe' 
amaranthus, coxcombs, ice-jlljints 
sensitive mimosas, &c. and probably 
with some of the stove plants. 

In the open air, the geranise will be 
in great beauty, and also erica*, me. 
sembryanthemum*, melaleuca*, me- 
trosideros*, protea, and numerous 
other genera. 

There are numerous stove plants now 
in flower, as canna*, nelumbium, 
gloriosa*, amaryllis* pancratiumi 
cactus, euphorbia, myitus, ipomoea* 
justicia, &c. 

The reserve hot-houses as before. 



AUGUST.- 



The florists' flowers of this month are, 
the hollyhocks*, pyramidal bell- 
flowers*, lobelias, annual stocks*, and 
the poppies*, withUlium canadense* 
and four other American species. 
Numerous herbaceous plants are now 
in flower that first appear in July, 
and others, as aster* various species, 
astrantia, helianthus, anthericum* 
ossifragum, and numerous others first 
blooin in this month. Among the 
aquatics may be mentioned lobelia 
dortmanna*, polygonum hydropiper, 
and several species of potamogeton. 



Scarcelv any trees are now in bloom; 
but of American shrubs there are va- 
nous sorts of azalea*, clethra*, and 
magnolia*, in perfection ; and of se- 
lect common shrubs, the hibiscus*, 
with its numerous and beautiful varie- 
ties. The rose*, the honeysuckle*, 
yellow jasmine*, clematis*, spiraea*, 
and dwarf aesculus, form a greater 
show in the shrubbery and rosary 
than in any other month. 

Robin-red-breast {Motacilla rubicula) 
sings about the last week, and butter- 
flies, moths, and dragon-flies aboimd 
during the whole month. 



The green-house as before. In the open 
air the plants growing vigorously 
but excepting geraniae*, ericae*, an 
some succulents not many species in 
flower. 

In the stove, asclepias, convolvulus*, 
pancratium, lagerstroemia*, passiflo- 
ra*, plumbago, and numerous other 
genera in flower. 

Tender annuals from the reserve-hot- 
houses as before. 



SEPTEMBER. 



The florists' flowers of this month are 
the dalilia*, which flowers also when 
excited by artificial heat previously 
to planting in the open ground in July 
and August; but planted m the usual 
way, it is now in jjerfcction. Among 
the bulbs there are only leucoium 
autumnale*, narcissus autumnalis*, 
and sciUa autumnale ; the china aster, 
in all its Narieties, is now in per- 
fection. Among the herbaceous per- 
ennials, aster*, solidago, helianthus, 
gentiana*, phlox*, and asphodelus, 
are the chief sorts. 



iralia spinosa, some azaleas*, and 
kalmia*, Lord Macartney's rose, and 
one or two othei roses are in flower 



ber>' is the fruits of the mountain ash*, 
viburnum*, mespilus*, oxyacantha*, 
Siberian crab*, sorb*, lom'cera*, ap- 
ple, rose*, elder, &c. 
Spiders, flies, and insects of aU kinds, 
very numerous ; few birds in song ; 
but the fieldfare appears about the 
end of the month. 



The green-house plants generally re- 
turned to their winter habitation in 
course of this month ; some heaths* 
and pelargoniums*, and a few other 
species in flower. 

There are not many slave plants in 
flower at this season ; amaryllis*, pas- 
siflora, and some succulents may be 
mentioned. 

Tender annuals supplied from the 
forcing-department of the reserve, 
garden, for decorating the plant-ca 
Dinet, conservatory, or drawingroom. 



OCTOBER. 



The florists' flowers of this month are 
the Chinese chrysanthemums*, some 
of the hardier of which will now 
flower in the open air, and the others 
under a glass case or in the green- 
house ; the colchicum*, autumn 
crocus, c>clamen europeum*, and 
amaryllis' lutea*. The principal 
herbaceous plants are, aster and so- 
lidago*, with asphodelus altissimus*, 
helianthus, gentiana*, and some other 
genera. 



Arbutus unedo* is the only beautiful 
shrub in flower, and also in fruit, 
at this season, gordonia, rhamnus, 
baccharis, clematis, and the 
ivy are also in flower. < 



Any spare room in the ereen-hmiie 
is now occupied with cnrysanthe- 
mums*, and some dahlias* raised in 
pots, and placed out of the reach of 
frost, to prolong their bloom. A few 
ericas*, statice*, and geraniae, still in 
bloom. 

In the stove, vinca*, stapelia*, and a 

few others. 
The reserve-pits . 

forcing bulbs and'ros^, 



NOVEMBER AND DECEMBER. 



The remains of last month in greater 
or less beauty, according to the wea- 
ther, and, perhaps, a few plants un- 
naturally in bloom. 
In the present mild and humid winter, 
there are now (December 31. IS'il) 
in bloom in many gardens about 
London, stocks of several sorts, lark- 
spurs, violets, Indian pinks, pot-mari- 
golds, polyanthuses, primroses, genti- 
ans, monthly roses, yellow amaryllis, 
daisies, and various other plants. By 
a letter we have just received from 
a horticultural friend at Gottingen, 
(H. Herring), we find many of the 
same kinds of flowers were (Dec. 10th) 
in bloom in his garden. 



The remains of last month, according 
to the weather. Clematis calycina* ; 
and, perhaps, a few plants unnaturally 
in bloom. 



Dryandra*, erica*, lantana*, and ca^ 
mellias*, about the middle of Decem- 
ber, in the green-hoiise. 

In the stove, all the species of stre- 
litzia*, also stapelias, amaryllis*, 
aletris*, and one or two other bulbs. 

From the forciiigdeparfmeiit, hya- 
cinths*,Persian iris*, and other bulbs 
monthly roses*, and, about Christ 
mas, the Provence rose*, and other 
shrubs and flowers, such as s^veet 
briar, Persian lilac, varins lilac, 
crabs of diflr'erent sorts, pinks, sweet 
Williams, &c. 



Book III. 



ARBORICULTURE. 



935 



BOOK III. 

ARBORICULTURE, OR PLANTING. 

6742. A TREE is an object which has at all periods been held in a certain degree of 
admiration by mankind, from its grandeur, its beauty, and its use : a few trees have 
accordingly been associated with the dwellings of civilised nations in every country. 
The Persians, Greeks, and Romans were particularly attached to trees : some of their 
greatest men were proud to acknowledge that they had made plantations with their own 
hands ; and fine specimens, whether planted by nature or art, were held sacred, or spe- 
cially protected. (37. ) The Romans, besides the ornamental plantations of their villas, 
planted occasionally for useful purposes ; they had live hedges, osier plantations, and 
rows of poplars and elms as props for their vines, (57.) The planting of extensive tracts 
for timber or fuel, however, does not appear to have been practised by them, or any 
other people, till the beginning of the sixteenth century, when the insufficiency of tt^ 
natural forests, which had hitherto supplied civilised society in England with timber and 
fuel, rendered planting a matter of necessity and profit. In the century succeeding, the 
improved practice of agriculture created a demand for hedges and strips for shelter ; and 
the fashion of removing from castles in towns and villages, to isolated dwellings sur- 
rounded by verdant scenery, led to the extensive employment of trees both as objects of 
distinction and value. For these combined purposes planting is now universally prac- 
tised : what relates to the effect of plantations, as parts of rural scenery, belongs to land- 
scape-gardening ; and what relates to their use and culture is the subject at present under 
consideration. We must however keep both objects in view, as well in contriving what 
shall be most profitable, as in designing what shall be most ornamental or picturesque. 
We shall therefore consider the uses of trees and plantations with a view both to profit 
and ornament ; the kinds of plantations, their formation, their management, the form- 
ation of a tree-nursei-y, the surveying and valuing of trees and plantations, and the cata- 
logue of timber-trees and hedge plants. 



Chap. I. 

Of the Uses of Trees and Plantations, and the Profits attending their Culture. 

6743. The purposes for which plantations are made, may be reduced to those which 
respect the actual consumption or employment of the tree or shrub individually ; and 
those which respect their collective influence relative to surrounding objects. The first 
considers trees as affording timber, fuel, bark, and other products ; and the second views 
plantations of trees as affording shelter, shade, fences, ornament, o-r otherwise conferring 
value on territory. 

Sect. I. Of the Uses of Trees individually/, as Objects of Consumption. 

6744. A tree is emploi/ed after it has attained a certain age, bulk, or dimension, either 
in civil, military, or naval architecture ; in the construction of machines, implements, 
and utensils ; as fuel ; or as affording tannin or dyeing matter ; food or medicine for 
men or animals ; or poison for vermin. 

6745. For civil architecture the matured timber of the pine and fir tribes is in greatest demand, and 
foreign deal is generally preferred to British produce, as being of larger growth, and more resinous and 
durable in quality and texture. That which approaches the nearest to the pine and fir timber of the 
north is the Scotch pine [Pinus syivestris), when grown in the north highlands, and the larch fir [Pinus 
larix), when grown in hilly or poor districts ; resinous timber of the species indigenous in cold countries, 
when grown on rich soils, and in warm climates, being found deficient in durability. Oak and elm are 
also used in buildings, especially the former, as being of great durability and suitable for wooden bridges, 
break-waters, joists in damp situations or on ground-floors, sills, wall-plates, staircases, door and window 
frames, sashes, &c. Elm is not much used in buildings of magnitude, as being apt to twist, and not very 
durable ; but it makes curiously variegated floors and steps of stairs, and very good weather-boarding fc i 
sheds and agricultural buildings. Besides timber and timber-like trees for the general purposes of civjl 
architecture, there are some departments of rural construction, as the formation of fences, drains, em~ 
bankments, trellis-work, arbors, and the supporting of plants in gardens, which consume branches, spray, 
thinnings of young plantations, and slioots even of a year's growth. Almost any species of tree may be 
used for these purposes ; but the branches and spray of the oak, elm, and beech, the weedings of ash or 
larch plantations, the shoots of a few years' growth of the oak, sweet chestnut, ash, and hazel, and of one 
year's growth of certain species of willow are greatly preferred. 

6746. For military architecture, by which we mean chiefly the outworks of fortifications, any tree is 
taken ; but the pine and fir tribes are greatly preferred, as requiring less labor in cutting and preparing. 
Besides those of a timber size for constructing bridges, portals, and others of less dimensions for palisadoes, 
chevaux de frise, &c. ; branches, spray, and shoots are used for fascines, and fixed works en haie, en 
corbeille, &c. 

6747. In naval architecture the oak is chiefly used. According to Marshall, the 
keels are now pretty generally laid with elm or beech j and part of the upper decks of 

3 O 4 



936 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part nr. 



men of war is deal : but these woods bear no proportion, in respect of t'ne quantity used, 
to the oak. The timbers of a ship are principally crooked, but the planking is cut out 
of straight pieces. In a seventy-four gun ship, the crooked and straight pieces used are 
nearly equal, but the planking under water is of foreign oak : therefore, of English oak, 
the proportion of crooked to straight pieces is almost two to one. Masts and yards are 
of deal. The blockmakers use elm, lignum vitJB, box, and other hard woods. Upon 
the whole, it may be said, that, in the construction of a ship, oak is the only English wood 
made use of ; and that of this English oak nearly two thirds are requisite to be more or 
less crooked." {Planting and Rural Ornament, i. 49.) 

6748. In the construction of merchant-vessels, Monteath, in 1820, states, that " the out-keel commonly 
used is of beecli or elm, and made generally of two or three trees or pieces joined together to whatever 
length is required ; these require to be nearly straight. The keel-stone, or inner keel, requires trees of^ 
nearly the same description, but chiefly oak. Floor timbers are sometimes used of elm and beech, and 
are a little crooked. First crooks are a good deal crooked towards the one end, as they begin to ascend 
up the vessel, and are more valuable than the floor timbers, but are also used sometimes of elm and 
beech. Upright timbers are always made of oak, and are considerably crooked, for elm or beech is seldom 
put into a good vessel, except tlie lower part, where the vessel is-always under water when light. Top 
timbers are also of oak, but not so valuable, as they are mostly straight. Beams go under the deck of the 
vessel, and are also all oak, and have but a small crook, but require trees of considerable length. Knees 
are always of oak, and are the most principal crooks in the vessel. The stem-piece is a very particular 
crook. Breast-hooks also have particular crooks. Stern-posts and windlass are straight pieces. Trees 
that will cut up for planking are used of as great a length as they can be got, and are the better for having 
a considerable crook or curve one way ; these are used of elm or beech for planking underwater, but 
four planks of oak are required for one of beech or elm for this purpose." (Forester's Guide, p. 111.) 

6749. St7-night timber is bent to any form by the use of steam, and other improvements in ship-building ; 
and thus the larch or any sound resinous timber may be employed, and is so to a certain extent for com- 
mercial ships. Sir A. Grant, an experienced planter, is of opinion, tliat " the larch will, in a short pe- 
riod, instead of the oak, bear the thunder of Britain on her clement, the ocean." {Gen. Hep. of Scot. ii. 
270.) In a communication to the President of the Board of Agriculture, by Wilson, of London, dated in 
1797, the idea is suggested of combining small timbers for all the purposes of ship-building. He suggests, 
that oak of only thirty-three years' growth, by this mode of combining, may be employed where trees of 
a hundred years old would be requisite by the old method : and he maintains, that ships so built sail faster, 
and are less liable to accident. {Gen. licp. ii. 199.) The use of timber of small growth has been already 
introduced in the construction of masts for the largest vessels, either by splicing pieces properly adapted 
togetiier ; or, by forming hollow masts from small timber, which, uniting strength with lightness, liave 
advantages which solid ones do not possess. {Perring and Money on Ship-building.) 

6750. In the construction nf machines, the millwright's chief material is oak, beech, and 
crab-tree for cogs ; alder, and sometimes willow, for float-boards ; and fir and oak for 
shafts and frame-work. The waggon and cartwright uses oak and ash for bodies, axles, 
and spokes ; elm for naves, fellies, and linings ; sometimes also the softer woods for lin- 
ings, as poplar, willow, lime, and liorse-chestnut. The coachmaker and ploughwright use 
more ash than any other sort of timber. Gates are made of oak and deal, and their posts 
of oak or larch ; the softwoods are sometimes used, but are far from being durable. 
Ladders are formed chiefly of deal, or of poplar and willow, as being light ; pumps and 
water-pipes generally of elm and alder ; beech and sycamore are used in making calen- 
ders and cheese-presses, &c. For all these purposes the timber must be fidl-grown, with 
some exceptions, as young or root-cut oak and ash for spokes and shafts. 

6751. For implements, root-cut ash is in general use for the handles of such as require 
to bear great stress, as of the spade, fork, mattock, forge-hammers, &;c. ; willow or deai, 
of the lighter tools, as the hoe, rake, scythe; beech and sycamore for the common tools 
and instruments of carpenters ; box, holly, elder, &c. for the more select tools of artisans, 
and for mathematical and gaugers' instruments. 

6752. For utensils, under v/hich is included household furniture, the chief British wood used by the 
cabinet-maker is beech for bed-frames, chairs, and sofas ; next, birch and broad-leaved elm for the same 
purposes ; oak for gothic furniture; the cherry, plum, holly, yew, box, walnut, lime, poplar, and a great 
variety of woods for occasional purposes ; and deal enters more or less into the construction of almost 
every thing he makes. The musical instrument-maker uses lime, box, yew, holly, plum-tree, and poplar. 
The carver uses chiefly lime, and next, pine-deal ; the cooper uses oak, and some chestnut for large casks 
and vessels, corn -measures, Szc. ; birch and alder for herring-barrel staves, sycamore for herring-barrel 
ends ; these, since a law passed authorising herrings to be put into barrels made from British timber, have 
been in great demand (Monteath) ; ash for dairy utensils, butter-firkins, flour-barrels, &c. ; oak for well- 
buckets and water-pails, and, in some places, for milk-pails and other dairy utensils ; beech is occasionally 
used for the same purpose, and for soap-firkins, and willow, oak, ash, and hazel for hoops. Tlie brush- 
maker uses beech, sycamoi'e, birch, and some holly and box, and also poplar and lime-tree ; locksmiths, 
the soundest oak, from the root-cut or but-end of the trunk; the block-maker, for printing and bleach- 
ing-works, uses sycamore ; the turner, beech, sycamore, box, and holly ; trunk and packing-case makers, 
deal, poplar, elm, or whatever softwood may be cheapest at the time; coffin-makers use chiefly elm, 
sometimes oak ; basket-makers the root-shoots of tlie v/illow, and sometimes of the hazel ; bee-hive and 
straw utensil makers use the bramble and willow ; besom-makers the spray of the birch, broom, heath j 
last and patten makers, alder and birch ; the toy-maker, lime, and other soft woods, and also box, holly, 
and yew. For most of these purposes, the trees must have attained a timber size, and for some of them, 
they should be full-grown. 

6753. For fuel, any ligneous vegetable may be used at any age, and either the body 
or trunk and root of the plant, or its branches and spray. Resinous trees, excepting the 
larch, afford most flame, and may be used the soonest after being cut ; the ash next in 
order, then the birch, whose oily bark burns clear ; oak and elm burn the slowest ; and 
the roots of trees are generally of more slow combustion than their tops. To produce 
fuel in a short time, the most rapid-g>-owing tree is the common tree-acacia {Bobinia 



Book III. 



USES OF TREES AND PLANTATIONS. 



937 



pseudacacia) . Charcoal, as fuel, is prepared by subjecting roots, or the more ligneous 
parts of branches, to a smothering combustion. 

6754. For affqrdins the tannin principle, the bark of the oak is chiefly used ; but that of the Hunting- 
don willow {Saiix alba), larch, black poplar, birch, chestnut, hazel, thorn, and some other trees, is found 
to affoi-d it in such quantities as renders it worth while to disbark them for that purpose. {Agr. Chem. 89. 
and Com. to Board of Agr.) The bark is most powerful when taken from the tree at an early age, and 
hence the oak is cut down before it attains a timber size, for that purpose, as in copse-woods ; but the bark 
of old trees is also used. 

6755. For dyeing, the bark of several trees was formerly in use, as of the crab-apple, pear, ash, alder, &c. 
The bark of the quercitron {Q,uercus tinctoria) is used for dyeing yellow in North America ; but in this 
country, foreign materials, as indigo, logwood, madder, &c. have superseded the use of indigenous, or home- 
grown vegetables. The berries of some trees, as of the elder, and berry-bearing alder ; and the leaves of 
others, as of the walnut and sloe, have also been used as dye-stuffs. 

6756. In various arts and manufactures some of the products of trees are used, as the charcoal (of the 
dogwood principally) in that of gunpowder ; the pitch of the pine, the resin of the spruce fir, and the tur- 
pentine of the larch, for a great variety of purposes. The ashes of the burnt branches of all trees, but 
especially of the ash, afford alkali for the laundress; the spray of the beech and other trees affords, on 
distillation, the pyroligneous acid, an excellent preservative of timber, and, when purified, a substitute 
for salt in preserving butcher-meat ; the bark of the holly affords birdlime ; and the leaves of all trees, 
excepting the resinous kinds, rot into excellent manure for the field, and highly prized vegetable mould 
for the garden. 

6757. For food to man, in his present state, the timber-trees afford but little resource ; but nuts of the 
sweet chestnut, walnut, and hazel are still esteemed, and our ancestors used the acorn, beech-mast, haw, 
roan, hfp, and bramble. A very agreeable drink is made from the sap of the birch -tree in Sweden, Russia, 
and some parts of Britain ; and, in America, sugar is obtained from the sugar-maple {Acer sacchariniim) 
in sufficient quantities to be used in domestic economy. Mast and acorns are esteemed excellent food for 
swine, haws for deer, and the leaves and spray of many sorts of trees are, or may be, eaten during winter 
both by domestic and wild animals. Game, which, in every cultivated country, is one of the greatest 
luxuries of the table, is localised by plantations, in which both birds and quadrupeds find at once shelter, 
security from their enemies, and food. 

6758. For medicine, the products of scarcely any British tree is in use ; but the bark, blossoms, and 
berries of the elder ; the fruit of the sloe and crab, and the leaves of the walnut were formerly in consi- 
derable repute, and are occasionally used. 

6759. As poisons for vermin, the leaves of the walnut, elder, and ash are used by infusion for destroy- 
ing, or rather annoying, worms by their bitter acrid quality ; a glutinous snare for entrapping birds is 
obtained from the holly and mistletoe. 

6760. General result. From the above outline it may be inferred, that the timber-trees in most general 
demand as such, are the oak, pine, and fir tribes ; and next the ash, elm, beech, poplar, willow, birch, 
sycamore, &c. In the greater number of cases, cceteris paribus, the oak, larch, Scotch pine, ash, abele, 
poplar, and willow, will be found the most profitable trees that can be planted with a view to timber or 
bark produce. 

Sect. II. Of the Uses of Trees collectively as Plantations. 

6761. Trees collectively/ in a growing state may be useful by affording shelter and im- 
proving the local climate, improving bad soils, producing shade, by separation, seclusion, 
distinction, appropriation, concealment of disagreeable objects, heightening the effect of 
agreeable objects, creating beauty, and adding value prospectively. 

6762. Shelter and climate. The umbrageous roof of the forest afforded shelter, and 
a secure retreat to our savage forefathers ; and their civilised descendants still resort to 
the nearest tree as a place of shelter during a casual storm ; to the thick forest as a place 
of security, when they set the laws of their country at defiance, or have committed crime. 
Considered agriculturally, " the advantages to be derived from subdividing extensive 
tracts of barren country by plantations, are evidently great, whether considered in the 
light of aflbrding immediate shelter to the lands, or in that of improving the local ch'mate. 
The fact that the climate may be thus improved, has, in very many instances, been suffi- 
ciently established. It is, indeed, astonishing how much better cattle thrive in fields 
even but moderately sheltered than they do in an open exposed country. In the breed- 
ing of cattle, a sheltered farm, or a sheltered corner in a farm, is a thing much prized ; 
and, in instances where fields are taken by the season for the purpose of fattening them, 
those most sheltered never fail to bring the highest rents, provided the soil be equal with 
that of the neighboring fields which are not sheltered by trees. If we enquire into the 
cause, vv'e shall find that it does not altogether depend on an early rise of grass, on 
account of the shelter afforded to the lands by the plantations ; but, likewise, that cattle 
which have it in their power, in cold seasons, to indulge in the kindly shelter afforded 
them by the trees, feed better ; because their bodies are not pierced by the keen winds of 
spring and autumn ; neijher is the tender grass destroyed by the frosty blasts of March 
and April." (Plant. Kal. p. 121.) In gardening, as we have already seen (2400.), 
shelter is not less important than in general economy. 

6763. Climate. An Italian author (G. Gautieri) has enumerated and illustrated the advantages, in point 
of climate, which entire tracts of country derive from extensive woods and forests. " These," he says, 

are the arresting the progress of impetuous and dangerous winds ; maintaining the temperature of the 
air; regulating the seasons ; lessening intense cold ; opposing the formation and increase of ice ; moder- 
ating intense heats ; producing abundance of rain and snow ; giving origin to springs, and producing 
abundance of water in the rivers ; discharging the electricity of the atmosphere; dispersing hail, snow, 
and watery clouds ; preserving from inundations ; lessening the width and depth of torrents ; opposing a 
barrier to the undermining of banks, and the formation of precipices ; preserving the soil on mountains, 
by which their external figure is maintained ; and, finally, retaining within bounds, or disturbing the 
formation of avalanches, or accumulations of snow." He illustrates each of these propositions by refer- 
ences to what has taken place in Italy and Germany, in consequence of alterations that have been made 
in the woody surfaces of these countries. {Bella Influsso de' Boschi, &c. Milano, 1817.) Williams, an 
English author (1292.), has endeavored to show that the climate of Britain is deteriorating by the increase 



9C>3 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

of plantations. These, whether in masses or even in hedge-rows, increase the evaporating surfece, and 
consequently render the atmosphere more humid ; an open country, he says, would be more dry, airy, and 
wholesome. This is, no doubt, correct ; and, perhaps, 5ome valleys and plains are more thickly studded 
with hedge-rows and strips, than a strict regard to the culture of corn, or the salubrity of the atmospliere, 
would justify: but the same objection will not apply to elevated situations and lileak hilly tracts, which 
every one allows are greatly improved by planting, both in climate, agricultural produce, and general 
effect. 

676*. hnproving bad soils. " It certainly is not one of the least recommendations of planting," obsen.'es 
Pontey, " that it may be made to contribute essentially to the improvement of a bad soil, as is the case 
on sterile heaths and commons, where three means, the consequences of the planting, act together in pro- 
moting such improvement. The first is, the shade of the trees, which, by decomposing the vegetable 
matter on the surface soil, renders it at once more fertile, and easily penetrable by the roots. The second 
is, that by the decomposition of the annual fall of leaves, an addition is made to the vegetable soil, and 
that of the very best description. The third circumstance is, that as the roots collect a great deal of their 
sujjport from a depth much lower than field vegetables are used to reach, they hence convert the timeless 
into useful. In short, instances are not wanting, where land previously producing little besides heath, 
has, after producing a crop of trees, more especially firs, proved without further means very tolerable 
pasture." {Profitable Planter, p. 231.) In the Agricultural Report for Perthshire (p. 243.) a heatliy tract 
is referred to, between Cupar and Perth, containing 2000 acres, which, after being twenty years under a 
crop of Scotch firs, was profitably subjected to aration. 

6765. The shade of trees is highly grateful to man, whether reposing under a single 
tree, or in a state of recreation under the shadow of a row, or in an avenue, grove, or 
woodland path. " Shelter," Sang obsei-ves, " is not more useful in cold seasons, than 
the shade of trees is gratifying to cattle in hot ones. In an exposed open field, under a 
burning sun, the torture which cattle often endure is truly distressing." (^Plant. Kal. 
122.) In garden culture, shade is of great value ; but walls are occasionally preferred to 
trees for this purpose ; and next to walls, hedges or trees cut in the hedge manner. 

6766. The separation produced by ligneous vegetables, in the form of hedges, is of long use in gardening, 
and of great and acknowledged importance in agriculture. In the latter art it may be considered as a 
criterion of improved culture ; for when land lies intermixed, and is cultivated in what is called the 
common-field manner, the want of sufficient individual interest precludes all extraordinary exertion, and 
the country so cultivated has the same appearance now, that it had many centuries ago. Even on entire 
properties lying open, the want of the power of separating and classing cattle, and regulating their mode 
of grazing, and protecting particular fields for particular purposes, &c. is found so great a disadvantage as 
to be quite incompatible with the practice of improved farming. 

6767. The seclusion afforded by trees, either as hedges, rows, strips, or groups to dwellings of limited 
surroimding territory may be desired from taste, or rendered necessary by personal infirmity, political, 
local, or pecuniary circumstances. Trees, by their elevation aJid foliage, shut out external objects, ob- 
struct the gaze of the over-curious, and do not invite the visits of any one ; while they leave the occupant 
in the centre of a little world of his own, in wliich he may enjoy himself in his own way. 

6768. The distinction any sort of trees aflTord to a dwelling in a naked solitary countrj', or exotic species 
in one already wooded, is often desirable, as conveying cheerful and social ideas to the passing stranger, 
and procuring for the owner that applause for improvement which he feels to be his due. In extensive 
demesnes the outlines or prominent parts of them, may be indicated by particular sorts of trees j so as, 
from the house, or from a prospect-tower, in a central part of the estate, to render the contour of the 
whole distinguishable. Where common, or any one kind of trees abound, uncommon or exotic kinds may 
be made use of; or a common tree, pruned in a particular way, will have an adequate efffect. 

6769. To appropriate, harmonise, or render apparently a part of a near estate, distant woody territory 
which does not belong to it, may be considered as a selfish principle under the disguise of a social one ; 
but it is, at all events, harmless in a moral point of view, and is valuable as a device in improving the 
beauty of real landscape. Whatever may be the kinds of trees, or the forms in which they are 
planted in the distant or adjoining property, which we may wish to appropriate {fig. 62.'5. a a) ; the 
principle is, to plant the same sorts of trees in corresponding forms {bb), in the property which we can , 
call our own. 




6770. The concealment of disagreeable objects by trees is too obvious, useful, and universal an improve- 
ment to require being enlarged on. This is one of the most important uses to which they are applied in 
small demesnes in a populous country, or near large towns. The desire of shutting out the houses of 
others, and especially of our poorer neighbors, does not so much arise from dislike either to the objects 
or the inhabitants, as from love of verdant scenery, and from a wish to have a country-seat as much like 
the country as possible. The desire of shutting out manufactories, steam-engines, coal-works, work- 
houses, &c. is still greater, because these objects excite ideas by no means in harmony with rural quiet ; 
but no one ever thinks of shutting out a distant farm-house, solitary cottage, church, water-mill, bridge, 
monument, or ruin ; for these are all interesting and agreeable objects, which are either characteristic of 
the country, or very generally occur there. 

6771. Trees heighten the effect of agreeable objects by associating or grouping mth 
them ; and thereby forming a more perfect whole. Every whole consists of a number 
of parts, and the more varied the parts, provided they are allied among themselves, and 
not confused or redundant, the greater must be the effect of the whole. Trees contri- 
bute to the beauty of objects akeady beautiful ; by lending new forms, new colors, 
varied light and shade ; by their own motion, by inviting birds, and even by their smell. 
AH these qualities are interesting to the moral and picturesque observer, and of great 



Book 111. 



USES OF TREES AND PLANTATIONS. 



9S9 



importance to the improver, whether he displays water, or erects buildings, or harmonises 
rocks and mountains. A country-house without trees is felt by every one to be but a 
part of a whole. 

6772. Trees may direct the eye to objects that would otherwise escape notice, or whose beauties would 
be lost in a general view. By employing them in the foreground of a scene to shut out uninteresting dis- 
tance or mere sky, the eye may be led to repose on some agreeable near, or interesting distant object, 
which it had before wandered over unnoticed. By this sort of indication, accompanied by a seat, the 
dome of St. Paul's at London, of St. Peter's at Rome, and the cupola of the Iwan Wilika of Moscow, 
are seen from the grounds of residences at twenty or thirty miles' distance from these capitals ; and in this 
way the worthy and amiable Shenstone, pointed out the Wrekin, and church-spire of Halesowen, from 
the rustic path of the Leasowes. 

6773. Trees render indifferent objects interesting when judiciously grouped with them, so as to seem to 
conceal, by accident, that which we should desire or imagine to be there. Thus, a fragment of a wall, or 
of a tower, emerging from a thicket, may, by imagination be considered as an index to the main body of 
the ruined mansion or castle concealed by the wood. A broken gothic arch emerging from a thick wood 
may seem the commencement of a cloister or the aisles of a ruined abbey. A large stone lying on a naked 
surface 'is an object of little interest in a picturesque point of view, but surrounded by a fevv trees and 
bushes, it may be taken for part of a stratum of rock. A few yards of brick wall, standing naked and 
bare in a field would be considered as a deformity ; partially cover it with ivy, which may first ascend and 
then mantle over its top, and add a holly or thorn, a briar, and an oak or ash, and a beautiful group is 
l)roduced. In scenery, wliere great deformities or featureless extent is mixed with beauty or grandeur, 
trees will conceal the latter, and display the former to advantage. Ranges of naked mountains oiten pre- 
sent this kind of mixture of feature, dulness and want of grouping (^^. 626.), which no improvement 




but planting could ameliorate and render tolerable. Gilpin, in his Tours to the Lakes and Highlands. 
&c. has some excellent observations on this subject ; and there are various instances in the Pentland and 
Grampian ranges of hills where improvements of this sort have been executed with the happiest effect. 
ifig- 627.) 




6774. Beauty may even be created by trees independently of all other objects. A dull 
flat surface will be rendered more interesting by scattering a few trees over it, of any 
sort, and in almost any manner : but it'may be grouped or massed by one, a few, or 
by many sorts ; or laid out in avenues, stars,, platoons, and other modern or ancient 
forms of planting, so as to become a scene of positive beauty. Every species of trees 
has its particular form, bulk, mode of growth, flowering, &c. which constitute its charac- 
ter ; this character varies with the age of the tree, and its situation, relative to other 
trees, or to soil, climate, &c. Now, as every tree may be grouped, or combined with 
those of its own species, or with any or all of the others, in an endless variety of ways, 
the beauty that may thus be created by trees alone, can only be limited by the extent of 
surface on which they ai-e to be grown. 

6775. The value of landed property containing plantations is enhanced prospectively by the various pro, 
perties of trees. " It is very generally known," Sang observes, " that such estates as have a quantity of well 
arranged, healthy timber upon them, when brought to sale, bring an extra price, according to the quality 
and value of the wood, not only at the time of sale, but, counting forward on its value, to the period of its 
perfection. Thus, supposing the half-grown timber on an estate to be valued at ten thousand pounds at 
the time of the sale, instances are to be found where thirty thousand pounds have been given, over and 
above the valuation of the lands. The purchasers of such estates wisely foresee the increase of value 
which will arise from healthy timber growing where it may not only be cherished till of full maturity, 
but where, probably, it can then be turned to thebest advantage by reason of its local situation. But, besides 
the real value of grown timber, there is most generally an ideal value attached to it, namely, that of its 
ornamental appearance." {Plant. Kal. 124.) A landed proprietor, who is a parent, looks on a thriving plant- 
ation as capital laid out at compound interest, and on the most undoubted security, for the benefit of his 
offspring ; and he values it in this respect the more, because no man can determine the ratio in which, 
from the progress of the trees, and the future prosperity of the country, it may increase in value. It does 
not happen to many to plant trees and cut them down at a mature age ; but this only renders planting a 
more interesting performance to the man who is in secure enjoyment of an estate ; for in his full-grown 
trees he finds a link which connects him with his ancestors, and in his young plantations another which 
carries him down with his posterity to the next age. In this way he may imagine himself a being " hav- 
ing neither beginning of days nor end of life." 



94C 



PRACTICE 01 GARDEl^ING. 



Part III. 



Sect. III. Of the ProJiLs of Planting. 

6176. From the seemingly distant advantages of planting has arisen the practice, by 
authors, of presenting statements of the profits, pleasures, and honors attending it, 
with a view to excite the selfish or patriotic feelings of their readers. " The profits of 
planting," says Marshall, " are great, when properly executed, and this idea adds 
solidity to the enjoyment. Pleasure alone may satiate ; but profit and pleasure united 
seldom fail of producing a lasting gratification." Every one who has the least taste 
for country matters, must be alive to tiie agreeable and satisfactory feelings w^ith which 
plantations are formxcd ; and certainly there is something disinterested and respectable 
in incurring a present expense for what in most cases is to benefit a future generation ; 
but as to the extraordinary profits, either of a near or far distant period, they are by no 
means to be depended on. With respect to the absolute profit to be derived from trees 
or plantations, considered independently, it is easy, by a calculation founded on a seem- 
ingly very moderate data, to make the clear gain attending the raising of any crop ap- 
pear considerable ; and, accordingly almost every speculative cultivator, whether of corn 
or trees, calculates on making a fortune in a very few years, as soon as he can get pos- 
session of a farm or a tract of waste, Tlie truth is, however, that though accidental 
circumstances may render it more profitable to cultivate one kind of crop, either of 
trees or corn, at one time and place rather than another ; yet, on the whole, the profits 
of capital employed in any way in agriculture or planting must, on the general average, 
be nearly the same. The certain lapse of time which must ever intervene between the 
planting of trees and their attaining a disposable size, must alone render any calculation 
made at the time of planting, extremely problematicaL In planting, as in every other 
branch of culture, extraordinary profit is attended by extraordinary production, which 
soon sinks the market value of the article ; add also, that in a commercial, free and 
highly taxed countiy, whenever any article attains a very high price, substitutes are 
found at home, or imported from abroad ; so that no particular crop should be consi- 
dered as exclusively the best to cultivate, and no extraordinary profits ever calculated on 
from any crop. Plantations should be made with a joint view to all or part of the ad- 
vantages which we have shown to be attendant on them ; but no more ultimate profit 
calculated on, from the disposal of the trees, than what is expected from capital laid out 
on any other territorial improvement ; indeed, the safest principle on which to act, is to 
consider capital employed in planting, as on a par with that laid out in the purchase of 
landed property. 

6777. With respect to the value of trees as plantations, or in masses, tliat is entirely relative ; and must be 
sought for in the additional value conferred on the adjoining lands by the improvement of their climate, or 
their beauty. This sort of value cannot easily be subjected to any general rules of estimation ; but unques- 
tionably capital employed in planting and cultivating trees for such purposes, especially for the former, or 
when they are both united, may be considered as likely in the end to yield a greater interest than that em- 

Eloyed in the ordinary routine of tree-or corn culture. In bleak exposed situations, the advantages which 
ave arisen from screen plantations have in some cases been so great as to be estimated at a third of the 
value of the land, and in every case where shelter is wanted they must be considerable. These, however, 
should be looked on by the prudent man rather in the light of extraordinary cases, attended by unforeseen 
risks, and though depending chiefly on skill, yet in some degree also on chance. 

■ TTTTTW 

Chap. II. 

Of the different kinds of Trees and Plantations. 

6778. Having considered the different objects for which trees and plantations are cul- 
tivated, our next step shall be to arrange trees and plantations, according to their qualities, 
for fulfilling these objects. 

Sect. I. Of the Classificatioti of Trees relatively to their use and effect in Landscape. 

6779. Timber is the grand object for which trees are cultivated, and it is either straight 
or crooked in form, large or small in dimension, hard, soft, or resinous in quality, brittle 
or flexible in texture, smooth or rough grained, and plain-colored or variegated in 
appearance. 

6780. Straight timber is chiefly produced by the pine and fir tribes, and such other trees whose lateral 
branches do not generally acquire a timber size, as the Lombardy poplar, hornbeam, deciduous cypress. 

6781. Crooked timber may be produced by any branching tree ; but chiefly by the oak, sweet chestnut, 
broad-leaved elm, walnut, &c. 

6782. Timber of large dimension, in regard to length, is produced by the spruce fir, larch, Lombardy 
poplar, ash, narrow-leaved elm ; in regard to diameter by the oak, sweet chestnut, and elm ; magnitude in 
both dimensions is united in the narrow-leaved elm, beech, oak, and larch fir. 

6783. Timber oi small dimensions is produced by the yew, holly, thorn, ash, maple, laburnum, &c. 
6784'. Timbers, hard in qualittf, or, what are called the hard woods, are the oak, chestnut, sycamore, asii, 

beech, plane, walnut, box, holly, yew, &c. Softer timbers, or the soft woods, are the poplar," willow, lime. 



Book III. 



CLASSIFICATION OF TREES. 



941 



horse-cliestnut. Rewious timbers are the pine and fir tribes. Brittle timber is exemplified in acacia, horn., 
beam, and spindle-tree; flexible, in the ash, broad-leaved elm, and chestnut ; smooth-grained, in the lime, 
poplar, willow, hornbeam ; coarse-grained, in the ash, oak, and chestnut ; plain-colored, in the willow, lime, 
holly ; and variegated, in the yew, thorn, walnut, elm, plum, and many others. 

6785. Bark, which contains the tannin principle, is an important product of trees. 
That which affords it in greatest quantity is the oak ; and next, as far as chemists have 
yet ascertained, the Leicester willow {Salix alba, var.), Spanish chestnut, ash, sloe, Lom- 
bardy poplar, hazel, elm, common willow, sycamore, beech, hoi'se-chestnut, birch, and 
larch. (659. & Agr. Chem. 89.) 

6786. Charcoal, which is made from either branches, trunk, or roots, has been afforded by different trees 
at the following rates per cent. ; laburnum, 24 '5; chestnut, 23-2; oak, 22-6; walnut, 20 6; holly, beech, 
maple, 19-9; elm, 19-5; Norway pine, 192; sallow, 18-4; ash, 17-9; birch, 17-4; Scotch pine, 16-4. 
(Agr. Chem. 105.) Proust found the greatest proportion of charcoal to be afforded by the ash. (698.) 

ff787. Ashes have been afforded by the oak at the rate of 15 ; elm, 39 ; beech, 12 ; and poplar, 7 parts in 
ten thousand. {Agr. Chem. 113.) The result of Saussure's experiments, on procuring ashes from trees, have 
been already related. (703.) 

6788. For fuel and fencing. The tendency of trees to produce lateral branches, and 
renew them when lopped olf, is an important quality, and exists in an eminent degree in 
the ash, elm, oak, willow, poplar, lime, &c. ; but not at all in the pine and fir tribes, and 
but slightly in the plane, walnut, and some others. Those which grow most rapidly are 
also to be desired as fuel-trees, as the acacia, poplar, willow, in most soils ; and the larch 
fir, Scotch pine, and birch, on such as are dry. The ailanthus glandulosus may also be 
mentioned as a bulky and rapid-growing tree. On the chalky hills at Mereville (^before 
the revolution one of the most extensive parks and magnificent seats in France), this tree 
thrives, and attains a considerable size, where few others will grow. 

6789. For hoops, baslcet-willows, besom-spray, implement-handles, poles, &c. the renewal of trees or sh:ubs 
which have been cut down, or technically, their tendency to stole or shoot out from the collar, is an im- 
portant consideration. This quality does not belong to the pine and fir tribes; and only slightly to the 
beech, sycamore, alder, plane, &c. ; but liberally to all those mentioned above, as renewing their branches, 
and indeed to most trees not resinous. For the same objects, the tendency of trees to send up sjtckers or 
root-shoots deserves also the attention of the planter. This never takes place with the resinous trees, and 
^seldom with the oak, beech, chestnut, ash, plane, &c. ; but it is general with the elm, poplar, acacia, 
prunus, pyrus, mespilus, lime, and several willows. 

6790. For shelter, rapid-growing and evergreen trees are desirable, as the Scotch pine ; 
and such as are at the same time clothed with branches from the ground upwards, as the 
spruce fir ; the best of all trees for shelter, unless the situation is very elevated. Among 
the deciduous trees, tin? fast-growing branchy sorts are most desirable, as the larch, birch, 
poplar, willow; in very elevated situations, the birch, mountain ash, and Scotch fir; ex- 
posed to the sea-breeze, the elder and sycamore. To maintain a branchy leafy screen 
from the ground upwards, intermix trees and shrubs which stole ; or such as grow imder 
the shade and drip of others, as the holly, hazel, dogwood, box, yew, &c. To produce 
shelter, and yet admit of the growth of grass below the trees, prune any sort to single 
stems, and use chiefly deciduous sorts. 

6791. For shade, close plantations are seldom desirable, a free circulation of air being necessary to cool- 
ness ; therefore use trees with lofty stems and large heads, and prune them to single stems a certain height, 
as the oak, elm, chestnut, beech, for thick shade ; the plane, acacia, poplar, for lighter shade ; the birch, 
balm of Gilead fir, and lime, for odoriferous shade; and avoid the walnut, elder, and laburnum, the atmo- 
sphere under which is reckoned deleterious. 

6792. For improving bad soils, and for all the purposes of planting, the soil and situation, affected by or 
natural to trees, is an important study for the planter. Some are aquatics, or delight in moist situations 
near water, as most of the willow and poplar tribes, the alder and elder ; others are mountain trees, as the 
Scotch pine, larch fir, mountain ash, sorb; some delight in valleys or plains, as the narrow-leaved elm, 
horse-chestnut, plane, lime, oak ; others, in craggy steeps and dells, as the ash, silver and spruce firs, most 
of the pines, and many more ; some on chalky soils, as the beech ; others on clays, as the oak ; on sand, 
as the Scotch pine ; and a few trees will grow in the most opposite situations and soils, as the elder, which 
is found on mountain tops and on the sea-shoro ; the birch on the highest mountains, on dry rocks, and on 
marshes. For the poorest soils, whether high or low, choose the birch, larch, and Scotch pine; and for 
the richest, the ash, elm, oak, chestnuts, limes, poplars, and willows. 

6793. For the purposes of the separation of, or defence from, the inferior animals, the plantations called 
hedges, or close rows of shrubs, are adopted ; when these are to be low, such shrubs as send out numerous 
branches from the root upwards, and are-of great durability, are most desirable ; as the holly among ever- 
greens ; and the hawthorn, sloe, crab, beech, buckthorn, and hornbeam, among deciduous sorts. For moist 
situations, the alder, elder, birch, and willow, are to be preferred ; and for dry upland sites, the juniper, 
whin, birch, and elder : avoid poisonous trees, as the yew. For tall or tree hedges, such trees as the elm, 
beech, hornbeam, lime, birch, and spruce fir, are desirable; but the holly excels all other plants for a 
hedge, whether low or tall, and is liable to no other objection than its slow growth, which occasions a con- 
siderable expense in protecting it till it is able to serve for defence. 

6794. For seclusion and conceahnent, branchy leafy trees, a number of which have been mentioned 
(6790.), are obviously desirable ; and, for distinction, either sorts different from what are already there, or 
ordinary sorts pruned and made to assume extraordinary forms. 

6795. For the various purposes of ornament, beauty, or effect, in landscape, the hardy 
trees may be arranged as to magnitude, form, mode of growth, duration, and expression. 

6796. Magnitude. Trees of great height are, the English elm, ash, larch, Polish and 
Carolina poplars, &c. ; but the laburnum, mountain ash, and evergreen oak, are very low 
trees. A medium in height may be found in the maple, pine, and birch. Some trees 
exceed in breadth, as the oak, Spanish chestnut, and Scotch elm ; others of different heights 
are very slender, as the Lombardy poplar, cypress, and bird-cherry. 

6797. - Form. The oak and Spanish chestnut afford the most irregular and picturesque 



942 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part 111. 



shapes, with round heads ; the English elm and ash have long narrow forms, and round 
heads ; the beech and horse-chestnut, compact ovate forms, with obtuse heads ; the spruce 
and pine tribes, in general, have conical shapes, and pointed spiry tops ; the Lombardy 
poplar, cypress, and most willows, have long narrow shapes, and oblong tops. 

6798. Color. The Scotch pine, yew, and horse-chestnut, are darJc-green ; the larch 
and elm, a yellow-green ; the abele, Huntingdon willow, a silvery-green, &c. 

6799. Mode and time of gro^vth. The nature of some trees is to lose their lower 
branches as they increase in height, as the fir tribe ; and others have a tendency to retain 
them, as the wych elm. In some the branches descend, and often recline on the ground, 
as the lime-tree and platanus. Some are very compact in their foliage, as the horse- 
chestnut ; others very open, as the ash and acacia. Some have drooping spray, as the 
weeping-willow ; that of others tend upwards, as in the Lombardy poplar ; horizontally, 
as in the oak ; and obliquely, as in the Scotch pine. Some grow with rapidity, as the 
Carolina and Athenian poplars ; others very slowly, as the oak and the stone pine. 

6800. Duration. The most durable of trees is the oak ; the least so, some of the 
poplar and fir tribes. A medium is to be found in the elm and lime. 

6801. Expression. Some trees convey ideas of utility in the arts, and mark the attention 
and industry of man, as having planted them for this purpose, as the oak, ash, elm, &c. 
Others are known, or supposed to be of little use, and convey ideas of neglect or of wild- 
ness, as the hornbeam, sorb, trembling poplar, &:c. Some indicate general improvement 
and artificial plantations, as the larch, and spruce fir ; others, garden-scenery or plantations 
near a house, as the cedar, stone pine, and platanus. Some indicate rich deep soil, as the 
oak ; and rich thin soil, as the elm ; others, chalk or gravel, as the beech ; rocky ground, 
as the ash ; marshy ground, as the alder ; the proximity of water, as the willow. There 
are also natural expressions belonging to trees, partly from general, and partly from acci- 
dental association ; as strength and stability to the oak, ease and elegance to the birch, sweet- 
ness to the lime, gloom to the cypress and yew, melancholy to the weeping- willow, &c. 

6802. The common hardy shrubs may be similarly arranged ; but it will be sufficient to class them ac- 
cording to magnitude, mode of growth, evergreen, deciduous, native, naturalised, and exotic. 

6803. Magnitude. Some shrubs are high, approaching to the character of trees, as the mespilus and 
common holly ; others very low, as the butcher's broom and dwarf-birch. 

6804. Mode of growth. Some are creepers, as the ivy ; climbers, as the virgin's bower ; trailers, as the 
bramble; compact forms, as that of the arbor vitae ; "open airy branches, as in the tamarisk; and sin. 
gular branches, as those of the stagshorn-sumach. Some, as shrubs, soon acquire picturesque shapes, as 
the thorn, holly, and elder. Some are evergreens, as the holly, laurel, yew, laurustinus, arbutus, &c. 

6805. Deciduous, as tlie guelder-rose, lilac, syringa, &c. 

6806. Native, as the holly, privet, hazel, thorn, briar, &c. 

6807. Naturalised, as the rose, syringa, lilac, laburnum, &c. 

6808. Exotic, or foreign, as the rhododendron, azalea, &c. 

6809. These arrangements as to the effect of trees and shrubs in landscape, as far as form, magnitude, 
mode of growth, and expression are concerned, refer to plants growing detached from other trees, and as 
nearly full-grown. It is less intended to comprehend every characteristic distinction than to suggest to 
the artist the principal light in which he ought .> view trees and shrubs. Nor could he with confidence 
attempt planting, with even such a knowledge as could be obtained from the above arrangement, com- 
pleted by inserting all the names under their proper heads ; for unless he has seen the majority of the 
full-grown trees himself, both singly and connected in groups and masses, and is acquainted with the 
comparative rapidity of their growth in different climates and soils, he cannot well foresee the result of 
his labors, or look forward " with the prophetic eye of taste" to certain beauty. Of this there are nu- 
merous proofs, arising from the unjust preference given to exotics of unknowTi shapes and duration, in 
situations where the general form and situation of the tree, or even of one or two trees, is of the utmost 
consequence to the effect of a whole. How frequently on a lawn, or in a plantation near a house, do we 
see acacias, cut-leaved elders, variegated sycamores, &c. where the oak, cedar, beech, lime, or Spanish 
chestnut would have produced a much more impressive general effect ! 

Sect. II. Of the Classification of Plantatiotu, or Assemblages of Trees. 

6810. Assemblages of trees , whether natural or artificial, differ in extent, outline, dis- 
position of the trees, and kind of tree. 

6811. In regard to extent, the least is a group {fig. 628. e and d), which must consist at least of two 
plants J larger, it is called a thicket {b c) ; round and compact, it is called a clump (a) ; still larger, a 
mass ; and all above a mass is denominated a wood or forest, and characterised by comparative degrees 
of largeness. The term wood may be applied to a large assemblage of trees, either natural or artificial; 
forest, exclusively to the most extensive or natural assemblages. 




6812. With respect to the outline, or ground-plan of a plantation, the simplest disposition is that of a row 
or line, which may be either straight or crooked, as in hedges, or lines of trees ; next that of any deter- 
minate shape, as round, exemplified in the clump ; square, in the platoon ; oblong, in either clump 
or platoon, and in stripes, screens, or belts ; irregular or indeterminate, in thickets, masses, and all 
larger plantations. , , , , . 

6813. With respect to the' disposition of the trees within the plantation, they maybe placed regularly m 
rows, squares, parallelograms, or quincunx ; irregularly in the manner of groups ; without imder. 
growthsj as in groves (fig. 629. a, b) ; with undergrowths, as in woods (c) ; all undergrowths, as in cop.^e- 



Book III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



943 




woods {(i). Or they may form avenues {fig. 630. n) ; double avenues (&) ; avenues intersecting in the manner 
of a Greek cross (c) ; of a martyr's cross {d) ; of a star (e) ; or of a cross pat^e, or duck's foot {patie d'oye) (/). 




They may form xegulax glades if g. Gil.a,b); or irregular glades (c) ; glades, as niches or cabinets (rf) : 
as open squares j glades, as squares, en berceau {e) j or as squares, en sallons and en allee {/). 




' 6814. With respect to the character of tree-plantations, they may be as various as there are species ; but 
for general effect and designation, woody plants are classed as large or small, trees or undergrowtlis, 
deciduous or evergreen, round-headed or spiry-topped ; and plantations of every form and disposition 
may be planted with these, either separately or mixed. Thus we have groups of shrubs, groups of high 
and low growths, and of trees ; plantations of round -headed and spiry-topped trees mixed ; of trees and 
undergrowths J or of low growths only, as in copse-woods and osier-plantations. 



Chap. Ill, 

Of the Formation of Plantations, in which Utility is the principal Olrject. 

6815. The formation of xiseful i^lantations embraces the situation, soil, form, species of 
tree, fencing, and other considerations. 

6816. A sheltered situation and deep rich soil would be the most proper if the object of the planter was to 
obtain the greatest bulk of timber in the shortest time ; but this would not be profitable i)lanting, for such 
a soil would, in all probability, have made greater returns under common farming. The profits of plant- 
ing do not depend on the absolute quantity of timber produced, but on that quantity relatively to the 
value of the soil for agricultural purposes. Such situations and soils as can be i)rofitably subjected to 
aration or permanent pasture, will ravely be found to yield an equal profit, if planted with trees. Suppose 
a piece of ground to let at 20s. per acre for pasture or arable, to bo planted at an expense of only 10/. per 
acre ; then, in order to return the rent, and 51. per cent, for the money expended, it ought to yield 30s. a 
y6ar ; but as the returns are not yearly, but say at the end of every fifteen years, v/hen the whole may be 
cut down as copse, then tlie amount of 30s. per annum, at Bl. per cent, compound interest, being 32/. 8s. 
every fall of copse made at the interval of fifteen years, ought to produce that sum per acre clear of all 
expenses. Hence, with a view to profit from the fall of timber or copse-wood, no situation capable of 
much agricultural improvement should be planted, unless a certain jjart with a view to sheltering the 
rest ; or for the purposes of separation and fencing. 



944 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6817. IVhatever may be the nature of the soil, the subsoil ought to be rendered dry if the plants are in- 
tended to thrive. Large oi>en drains may be used, where the ground is not to undergo much preparation ; 
but where it is to be followed or trenche".!, under-drains become requisite. It is true, these will in time be 
choaked up bj' the roots of the trees ; but by that period, as no more culture will be requisite, they may 
be opened, and left open. Many situations, as steep sides of hills and rocky irregular surfaces, do not 
admit of preparing the soil by comminution previously to planting ; but wherever that can be done, either 
by trenching, digging, or a year's subjection to the plough, it will be found amply to repay the trouble. 
This is more esi^ecially requisite for strips for shelter or hetige-rows, as the quick growth of the plants in 
these cases- is a matter of the utmost consequence. The general mode of planting hedges by the side of 
an open drain, renders preparation for them, in many cases, less necessary : but for strips, wlierever it is 
practicable, and there is at the same time no danger of the soil being washed away by rains or thaws, as 
in some chalky hilly districts ; or blown about by the wind, as in some parts of Norfolk, and other sandy 
tracts, preparation by a year's fallow, or by trenching two sjiits deep, cannot be admitted without real loss, 
by retarding the attainment of the object' desired. There are instances stated of promising oak-plant- 
ations from oaks dibbled into soil altogether unimproved ; and of jilantations of Scotch pine, raised by 
merely sowing the seeds on a heatli or common, and excluding cattle [Gen. Rep. of Scot. ii. 269.) ; but 
these are rare cases, and the time required, and the instances of failure, are not mentioned. The practise 
is obviously too rude to be recommended as one of art. The best situations for planting, without any 
other culture but inserting the seeds or plants, are surfaces partially covered with low woody growths, as 
broom, furze, &c. " The ground which is covered, or rather half covered, with juniper and heath," says 
BufFon, " is already a wood half made." 

6818. Osier-plantations are an exception to these remarks, as to the value of tlie situation and soil ; they 
require a deep, strong, moist soil, but one not springy, or continually saturated with water ; and it will 
be in vain to plant them without trenching it two or mpre feet deep. 

6819. The form of plantation for profit or shelter must be determined jointly by the 
situation and the objects in view. In rocky abrupt sites [fg- 632.), the plantation will 
consist of a number of masses (a, b, c), of forms determined by the l ocks and precipices, 
among which some of the most valuable pasture may be left as glades {d, e), for use, 
effect, and for the sake of game. Strips and hedges for sheltering or separating arable 
lands, should be formed as much as possible in straight and parallel lines, in order not 
to increase the expense of tillage by short and irregular turnings. Straight parallel 
strips, on irregular surfaces, have a more varied appearance at a distance, than strips ever 
so much varied on a flat surface ; for, in the former case, the outline against the sky is 
varied as much as that on tlie earth. In extensive hilly pastures, in which it is often 




desirable to produce shelter, and at the same time to plant only the most rocky and un- 
productive spots, the forms may be of the most irregtdar description ; and by planting 
chiefly on the eminences and slopes (Jig. 633.), shelter will be most effectually produced, 
the pasture improved, the least valuable ground rendered productive in copse or timber, 
and the greatest richness and picturesque beauty,' 633 
conferred on the landscape. There are some fine , j, .iilv '- -o=e--? ' ^ ' 

examples of this on the hilly districts of Fifeshire ; ^ ' -^J^VJ.^ . I-' 

there, on many estates where nothing was sought _ ^ , ; " "'S'*" , 
for but profit and shelter, the greatest beauty has 
been produced ; and the picturesque tourist now 
passes through glades and valleys, pastured by well- 
fed cattle and sheep, enlivened by rocks, thickets, 
hanging woods, and occasional rills and lakes. 
Fifty years ago, scarcely a tree was to be seen, and ,■- j 
only the most inferior descriptions of live stock. Vj'- 

6820. The endosiyig of plantations is too essential 
a part of their fonnation to require enlarging on. 
In all those of small extent, as hedges and strips, 
it is the principal part of the expense ; but to plant 
in these forms, or any other, ^^•ithout enclosing, 
would be merely a waste of labor and property. 
The sole object of fencing being to exclude the 
domestic quadrupeds, it is obvious, that whatever, 
in the given situation, is calculated to effect this at 
the least expense, the first cost and future repairs 
or management being taken into consideration, 
must be the best. Where stones abound on the 




Boor III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



945 



spot, a W6ill is the best and cheapest of all fences as such ; but, in the great rmijority of 
cases, recourse is obliged to be had to a verdant fence of some sort, and generally to one 
of hawthorn. This being itself a plantation, requires to be defended by some temporary 
barrier, till it arrives at maturity ; and here the remark just made will again apply, that 
whatever temporary barrier is found cheapest in the given situation will be the 
best. Hedge fences are in general accompanied by an open drain, which, besides, 
acting in its proper capacity, furnishes, at its formation, a quantity of soil to increase 
the pasturage of the hedge plants ; and an excavation {jig. 634. a), and an elevation {J'), 
to aid in the formation of a temporaiy fence. A hedge enclosing a plantation, requires 




only to be guarded on the t'xtcrior side, and of the various ways in wliich this is done, the 
following may he reckoned among the best and most generally applicable. By an open 
drain and paling, or line of posts and rails (a), the plants inserted in a facing of stone, 
or in a facing of sub-soil from the bottom of the drain, backed by the earth of the drain (h) ; 
an excellent mode, as the plants generally thrive, and almost never require cleaning from 
weeds ; an open drain and paling, and the hedge on the top of the elevation (c) ; no open 
drains, but the soil being a loam, the surface-turves foi-med into a narrow ridge, to serve 
as a paling, a temporary hedge of furze sown on its summit, and the permanent hedge of 
thorn or holly within (d) ; and an open drain, but on the inside, the exterior being protected 
by a steep bank sown with furze {e). The first of these modes is the most general, the se- 
cond the best, and the fourth the cheapest, where timber is not abundant. Separation fences 
are commonly formed in the first, second, or third manner, but with a paling on both sides. 

6821. Shelter. Many situations are so exposed that it is extremely difficult to rear trees without some 
mode of procuring shelter for them during their early growth. This is obtained either by walls, the ex- 
tent of whose influence is only limited ; by thick planting, or by planting the more hardy and rapid, 
growing species, to nurse up and protect such as are more tender, but ultimately more valuable. The 
proportion of nurses to principals is increased according to the bleakness of the site. Pontey says, " both 
authors and planters are in the habit of erring egjegiously, in regard to the proportion of principals and 
nurses ; as they generally use as many, or more of the former than the latter; though it is very easy to 
show, that they ought to use three times as many of the latter as the former. For instance, when trees 
are planted at four feet apart, each occupies a surface of sixteen feet ; of course four of them wiU oc- 
cupy sixty-four, or a square of eight feet ; and therefore, if we plant three nurses to one principal 
tree, all the former might be displaced gradually, and the latter would still stand only eight feet apart. 
Nurse-plants should, in every possible case, be such as are most valuable at an early period of growth. 
The larch and spruce fir should be used liberally, in every case where they will grow freely ; still it is 
not intended that they should exclude all others, more particularly the birch, which has most of the 
properties of a good nurse, such as numerous branches and quick growth, on any tolerable soil or situ- 
ation. It is not, however, like the others, a wood of general application." {Profitable Planter, p. 113.) 
Sang also adopts the proportion of three nurses to one principal, and employs chiefly the resinous tribe, 
and looks to them for reimbursement till the hard timber has attained to a foot in diameter, under which 
size hard timber is seldom of much value. His principals are planted at from six to ten feet apart, ac- 
cording to the soil and situation. {Plant. Kal. p. 166.) 

6822. In procuring shelter jnuch depends on the mode of cormnencine and continuing plantations on 
bleak sites. Sang, who has had extensive experience on this subject, pbserves, that " every plain, and 
most fields and situations for planting, in this country, have what may be called a windward side, which 
is more exposed to the destructive blast than any other. It is of very great importance to be apprised 
of this circumstance ; and to be able to fix upon the most exposed side of the proposed forest plantation. 
Fix, then, upon the windward side of the plain which is to be converted into a forest ; mark off a hori- 
zontal stripe, or belt, at least a hundred yards in breadth. Let this portion of ground be planted thick, 
say at the distance of thirty fhches, or at the most three feet, with a mixture of Jarch, sycamore, and elder, 
in equal quantities, or nearly so, if the soil be adapted for rearing these ; but if it be better adapted for 
Scots pines, then let it be planted with them at the distances prescribed for the above mixture. We have 
no other kinds that will thrive better, or rise more quickly in bleak situations, than those just mentioned. 
When the trees in this belt, or zone, have risen to the height of two feet, such hard-wood trees as are 
intended ultimately to fill the ground should be introduced, at the distance of eight or ten feet from 
each other, as circumstances may admit At this period, or perhaps a year or two afterwards, accord- 
ing to the bleak or exposed situation of the grounds, let another parallel belt, or zone, of nearly equal 
breadth, be added to the one already so far grown up, and so on, till the whole grounds be covered. It 
is not easy here to determine on the exact breadth .of the subsequent belts or zones : this matter must 
be regulated by the degree of exposure of the grounds, by the shelter afforded by the zone previously 
planted, and by such like circumstances." {Plant. Kal. p. 29.) 

6823. In sitiiatiom exposed to the sea-breeze a similar plan may be successfully followed, and aided in 
cfffect, by beginning with a wall; the first belt having reached the height of the wall, plant a second, 
a third, and fourth, and so on till you cover the whole tract to he wooded. In this way the plantations 
on the east coast of Mid- Lothian, round Gossford House, were reared; and in Sang's manner, thp 
mountains of Blair and Dunkeld were clothed ; and examples, we are informed, might be drawn even 
from the Orkney and Shetland islands. 

6824. The species of tree to be planted must ever depend chiefly on the situation and soil, but partly 
also on the sort of product desired as the most profitable, and on the importance attached to shelter. As 
a general principle it may be observed, that the tree which v/dl thrive the best, will turn out the most 
profitable: for, though its timber may not be of the highest-priced kind, yet there will be quantity as 
compensation for inferior quality. In rocky irregular surfaces there is generally great variety of situ- 
ation and depth of soil ; and here a corresponding variety of trees may be introduced, and the more 
valuable sorts, as the oak, ash, elm, poplar, &c. will no where thrive better than at the foot of precipices, 
and in narrow dells and other sinuosities, where there is at once shelter and a good depth of dry soil, 
The thriving of trees and plants of every kind, indeed, depends much more on the quantity of availably 



946 



niACTlCE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



soils, and its state in respect to water and climate, than on its constituent principles ; moderately shel- 
tered and on a dry sub-soil, it signifies little whether the surface strata be a clayey, sandy, or calcareous 
loam ; all the principal trees will thrive neaily equally well in either so circumstanced ; but no trej 
whatever in these, or in any other soil saturated with water, and in a bleak exposed site. For hedge-row 
timber, those kinds which grow with lofty stems, which draw their nourishment from the sub-soil, and 
do least injury by their shade, are to be preferred. These, according to Blakie, are oaks, narrow-leaved 
elm, and black Italian poplar ; beecli, ash, and firs, he saj-s, are ruinous to fences, and otherwise inju- 
rious to farmers. (On Hedges and Hedge-row Timber, p. 10.) 

6825. The common practice in planting is to mix different species of trees together, 
which is unavoidable where nurse or shelter plants are introduced ; where these are not 
wanted., the opinions of planters are divided on the subject. Mixing different sorts is 
most generally approved of. Marshall advises mixing the ash with the oak, because the 
latter draws its nourishment chiefly from the sub-soil, and the former from the surface. 
Nicol is an advocate for indiscriminate mixture [Practical Planter, p. 77.) ; and Pontey 
says, " both reason and experience will fidly warrant the conclusion, that the greatest 
possille quantity of timber is to be obtained by planting mixtures." {Prof. Plantery 
p. 119.) 

6826. Sang is " clearly of opinion, that the best method is to plant each sort in distinct masses or groups, 
provided the situation and quality of the soil be properly kept in view. There has hitherto been too 
much random work carried on with respect to the mixture of different kinds. A longer practice, and 
more experience, will discover better methods in any science. That of planting is now widely extended ; 
and improvements in all its branches are introduced. We, therefore, having a better knowledge of soils, 
perhaps, than our forefathers had, can, with greater certainty, assign to each tree its proper station. 
We can, perhaps, at sight, decide, that here the oak will grow to perfection, there the ash, and here 
again the beech ; and the same with respect to the others. If, however, there happen to be a piece of 
land of such a quality, that it may be said to be equally adapted for the oak, the walnut, or the Spanish 
chestnut, it will be proper to place such in it, in a mixed way, as the principals ; because each sort 
will extract its own proper nourishment, and will have an enlarged range of pasturage for its roots, and 
consequently may make better t.'mber- trees. Although by indiscriminately mixing different kinds of 
hard-wood jjlants in a plantation, there is hardly a doubt that the ground will be fully cropped with one 
kind or other, yet it very often happens, in cases where the soil is evidently well adapted to the most 
valuable sorts, as the oak perhaps, that there is hardly one oak in the ground for a hundred that ought to 
have been planted. We have known this imperfection in several instances severely felt. It not unfre- 
qucntly happcr.s, too, that even what oaks, or other hard-wood trees, are to be met with, are overtopped 
by less valuable kinds, or perhaps such, all things considered, as hardly deserve a place. Such evils may 
be? prevented by planting with attention to the soil, and in distinct masses. In these masses are ensured 
a full crop, by being properly nm-sed, for a time, with kinds more hardy, or which afford more shelter 
than each hard-wood pl-mts. There is no rule by which to tix the size or extent of any of these masses. 
Indeed, the more various they be made in size, the better will they, when grown up, please the 
eye of a person of taste. They may be extended from one acre to fifty or a hundred acres, according 
to the circumstances of soil and situation: their shapes will accordingly be as various as their dimen- 
sions. In tlie same manner ought all the resinous kinds to be planted, which are intended for timber- 
lrce5 ; nor should these be intermixed with any other sort, but be in distinct rriasses by themselves. 
The massing of larch, the pine, and the fir of all sorts, is the least laborious and surest means of pro- 
ducing good, straight, and clean timber. It is by planting, or rather by sowing them in masses, by 
placing them thick, by a timeous pruning and gradual thinning, that we can, with certainty, attain to 
this object." [Plant. Kal. 162. 166.) 

6327. Our opinion is in perfect consonance with that of Sang, and for the same reasons ; and we may add 
as an additional one, that in the most vigorous natural forests one species of tree will generally be found 
occupying almost exclusively one soil and situation, while in forests less vigorous on inferior and on 
watery soils, mixtures of sorts are more prevalent. This may be observed in comparing New Forest with 
the na'tural woods round Lochlomond, and it is very strikingly exemplified in the great forests of Poland 
and Russia. 

6828. Whether ertensii^e plantations should be soivn or planted, is a question about which 
planters are at variance. Miller says, transplanted oaks will never arrive at the size of 
those raised where they are to remain from the acorn. (Diet. Quercus.) Marshall pre- 
fers sowing when the ground can be cultivated with the plough. (Plant, and Rur. Ont. i. 
123.) Evelyn, Emmerich, and Speechly are of the same opinion; Pontey and Nicol 
practise planting, but offer no arguments against sowing where circumstances are suit- 
able. Sang says, " It is an opinion veiy generally entertained, that planted timber can 
never, in any case, be equal in diu-ability and value to thatwliich is sown. We certainly 
feel ourselves inclined to support this opinion, although we readily admit, that the matter 
has not been so fully established, from experiment, as to amount to positive proof. But 
although we have not met with decided evidence, to enable us to determine on the com- 
parative excellence of timber raised from seeds, without being replanted, over such as 
have been raised from replanted trees, we are left in no doubt as to the preference, in re- 
spect of growth, of those trees which are sown, over such as are planted." (Plant. Kal. 
4.S.) He particularly prefers this mode for raising extensive tracts of the Scotch pine 
and larch (p. 4S0.), and is decidedly of opinion, " that every kind of forest tree will suc- 
ceed better by being reared from seeds in tlie place where it is to grow to maturity, than by 
being raised in any nursery whatever, and from thence traiisplanted into the forest," 
(p. 344.) Dr. Yule (Caled. Hort. Mem. ii.), in a long paper on trees, strongly recom- 
mends sowing where the trees are finally to remain. " It is," says he, " a well ascer- 
tained fact, that seedlings allowed to remain in their original station will, in a few 
seasons, far overtop the common nursed plants several years older." 

6829. The opinion of Dr. Ytde, and in part also that of Sang, scera? to be founded on the idea that the 
tap-root is of great importance to grown-up trees, and" that v.-hen this is once cut ofTby transplanting, the 
plant has not a power of renewing it. That the tap-root is of the utmost consequence for the first three or 
four years is oBvious from the economy of nature at that age of the plant : perhaps for a longer period •. 



Book III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



947 



but that it can be of no great consequence to full-grown trees, appears highly probable frona the fact, that 
when such trees are cut down, the tap-root is seldom to be distinguished from the others. The opinion 
that young plants have not the power of renewing their tap-root, will, we believe, be found inconsistent 
with fact ; and we may appeal to Sang and other nurserymen, who raise the oak and horse-chestnut from 
seed. It is customary when these are sown in drills, to cut off their tap-roots without removing the plants 
at the end of the second year's growth, and when at the end of the third or fourth year they are taken up, 
they will be found to have acquired others, not indeed so strong as the first would have been had they re- 
mained, but sufficient to establish the fact of the power of renewal. We may also refer to the experiment 
recorded by Forsyth, which at once proves that trees have a power of renewing their tap-roots, and the 
great advantages from cutting down trees after two or three years' planting. Forsyth " transplanted a 
bed of oak-plants, cutting the tap-roots near to some of the side-roots or fibres springing from them. In 
the second year after, he headed one half of the plants down, and left the other half to nature. In the first 
season, those headed down made shoots six feet long and upwards, and completely covered the head of the 
old stem, leaving only a faint cicatrix, and produced new tap-roots upwards of two feet and a half long. 
The other half of the plants that were not headed, were not one fourth the size of the others. One of the 
fbrmer is now eighteen feet high, and fifteen inches in circumference, at six inches from the ground : one 
of the largest of the latter measures only five feet and half in height, and three inches and three quarters 
in circumference, at six inches from the ground." {Tr. on Fruit Trees, 'ito cAit 144.) The pine and fir 
tribes receive most check by transplanting ; and when removed at the age of four or five years, they seldom 
arrive at trees afterwards ; tliose we should, on most occasions, prefer to sow, especially on mountainous 
tracts. But for all trees which stole, and in tolerable soils and situations, planting strong plants, and cut- 
ting them down two or three years afterwards, will, we think, all circumstances considered, be proved 
preferable to sowing. 

6830. On the subject of disposing the plants in plantations, there are different opinions ; some advis- 
ing rows, others quincunx, but the gi-eater number planting irregularly. According to Marshall, " the 
preference to be given to the row, or the random culture, rests in some measure upon the nature and situ- 
ation of the land to be stocked with plants. Against steep hangs, where the plough cannot be conveniently 
used in cleaning and cultivating the interspaces, during the infancy of the wood, either method may be 
adopted ; and if plants are to be put in, the quincunx manner will be found preferable to any. But in 
more level situations, we cannot allow any liberty of choice : the drill or row manner is undoubtedly the 
most eligible." {Plant, and Bur. Orn. p. 123.) Pontey considers it of much less consequence than most 
people imagine, whether trees are planted regularly o"r irregularly, as in either case the whole of the soil 
will be occupied by the roots and the surface by the shoots. Sang and Nicol only plant in rows where 
culture with the horse-hoe is to be adopted. In sowing for woods and copses, the former places the 
patches six feet asunder and in the quincunx order. " It has been demonstrated {Partner's Mag. vii. 409:), 
that the closest order in which it is possible to place a number of points, upon a plain surface, not nearer 
than a given distance from each other, is in the angles of hexagons with a plant in the centre of each 
hexagon. Hence it is argued, that this order of trees is the most economical; as the same quantity of 

? round will contain a greater quantity of trees, by 15 per cent, when planted in this form than in any other." 
Gen. Rep. ii. 287.) It is almost needless to cA)serve, that hedge plants should be placed at regular distances 
in tlie lines, and also the trees, when those are introduced in hedges. Osier-plantations, and all such as 
like them require the soil to be dug every year, or every two years, during their existence, should also be 
planted in regular rows. 

6831. The distances at ivhich the plants are placed must depend on different circum- 
stances, but chiefly on the situation and soil. Planting thick, according to Nicol, is the 
safer side to err on, because a number of plants will fail, and the superfluous ones can be 
easily removed by thinning. " For bleak situations," he observes, " that from thirty to 
forty inches is a good medium, varying the distance according to circumstances. For 
less exposed situations, and vv^here the soil is above six inches in depth, he recommends a 
distance from four to five feet. For belts, clumps, and strips, of a diameter of about one 
hundred feet ; the margin to be planted about the distance of two feet, and the interior at 
three feet. In sheltered situations of a deep good soil, he recommends a distance of six 
feet, and no more." {Tract . Plant.) 

6832. According to Sang, "the distances at which hard .timber trees ought to be planted are from six 
to ten feet, according to the quality of the soil, and the exposed or sheltered situation. When the 
first four oaks are planted, supposing them at right angles, and at nine feet apart, the interstices will 
fall to be filled up with five nurses, the whole standing at four and a half feet asunder. When sixteen oaks 
are planted, there will necessarily be thirty-three nurses planted ; and when thirty-six oaks are planted, 
eighty .five nurses ; but when a hundred principal trees are planted in this manner, in a square of ten on 
the side, there will be two hundred and sixty-one nurse-plants required. The English acre would require 
five hundred and thirty-six oaks, and one thousand six hundred and ten nurses." {Plajit. Kal. 163.) Pontey 
says, " In general cases, a distance of four feet is certainly close enough ; as at that space the trees may 
all remain till they become saleable as rails, spars, &c." 

6833. The number of plants which may be planted on a statute acre = 160 rods, or poles, — 4840 yards = 
43,560 feet, is as follows : — 



2t apart. No. of Plants. 

1 43,560 

li ig.-'ieo 

2 10,890 

2i 6,969 

3. 4,840 

3.^ 3,556 

4' 2,722 

4A 2,232 

5" 1,742 



Feet apart. No. of Plan ts . 
6 , 1,210 



9 637 

10 435 

11 360 

12 302 

13 257 

14 222 



150 
1.34 
120 



6834. The size of the plants depends jointly on the site and the kind of tree ; it is uni- 
versally allowed that none of the resinous tribe succeed well when removed at four or 
more years' growth ; but if the soil is of tolerable quality, prepared by digging or sum- 
mer pitting, and the site not bleak, plants of such hard woods as stole may be used whose 
stems are an inch or more in diameter. 

6835. Nicol is of opinion, " That generally trees three, or at most four, years old from the seed, and which 
are from twelve to twenty-four inches high, will, in any situation or soil, outgrow those of any size under 
eight or ten feet, within the seventh year." {Pract. Plant. 130.) 

6836. Sang observes, " The size of plants for exclusive plantations must, in some measure, depend on 
their kinds ; but it may be said, generally, that the plants being transplanted, they should be from a foot 
to eighteen inches in height, stiff in the stem, and well rooted. Plants for this purpose should seldom be 
more than three years from the seed: indeed never, if they haye been raised in good soil. Many of 

3 P 2 



948 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



them may be sufficiently brgo at two years from the seed ; and if so, are to be preferred to those of a 
greater age, as they will consequently be more vigorous and healthy. The larch, if properly treated, will 
be very fit for planting out at two years of age. A healthy seedling being removed from the seed-bed at the 
end of the first year, into good ground, will, by the end of the second, be a fitter plant for the forest, than 
one nursed a second year. The next best plant for the purpose, ^s that which has stood two years in 
the seed-bed, and has been transplanted for one season. This is supposing it to have risen a weakly 
plant ; for, if the larch rise strong from the seed the first season, it should never stand a second in 
the seed-bed. The ash, the elm, and the sycamore, one year from the seed, nursed in good soil for a 
second season, will often prove su 'ciently strong plants. If they be weakly, they may stand two years 
in the seed-bed ; and then being nursed one season in good soil, will be very fit for planting out in the 
forest. The oak, the beech, and the chestnut, if raised in rich soil, and well furnished with roots at the 
end of the first year, and having been nursed in rows for two years, will be very fit to be planted out. 
But if they be allowed to stand two years in the seed-bed, and be planted one year in good ground, thev 
will be still better, and the roots will be found well feathered with fine small fibres. The silver fir and 
common spruce should stand two years in the seed-bed. If transplanted into very good soil, they may be 
fit for being planted out at the end of the first year; but, more generally, they require two years in 
the lines. The Scots pine should also stand for two years in the seed-bed, and should be nursed in good 
ground for one year ; at the end of which they will be much fitter for being planted, than if they w^ere 
allowed to stand a second year in the lines. They are verj' generally taken at once from the seed-bed; 
and in land bare of heatli or herbage, tliey succeed pretty well ; nevertheless, we would prefer them one 
year nursed. The above are the hardy and most useful forest trees ; and from the observations made, 
whatever respects the age or size of other kinds, may easily be inferred." {Plant. Kal. 158.) 

63-37. According to Pontey, " the best general rule is, to proportion the size of the plants to the goodness 
of the soil ; the best of the latter requiring the largest of the former. Still on bleak exposures this rule 
will not hold good, as there the plants should never be large, for otherwise the greater part would fail 
from the circumstance of wind-waving, and of those that succeeded, few, if any, would make much pro- 
gress for several years ; firs of a foot, and deciduous trees of eighteen inches, are large enougli for such 
places. As in extensive planting, soils which are good and well sheltered but seldom occur, the most 
useful sizes of plants, for general purposes, will be firs of a foot, and deciduous trees of eighteen inches, 
both transplanted. None but good-rooted plants will succeed on a bad soil, while on a good one, shel- 
tered, none but very bad-rooted plants will fail ; a large plant never has so good a root, in proportion to 
its size, as a small one ; and hence we see the propriety of using such on good soils only. Small plants 
lose but few of their roots in removal; therefore, though planted in very moderate-sized holes of pul- 
verised earth, soon find the means of making roots, in proportion to their heads. It should never be 
forgotten, that, in being removed, a plant of two feet loses a greater proportion of its roots than a tree 
of one, and one of three feet a greater ])roportion tlian one of two, and so on, in proportion to its former 
strength and height, and thus the larger the plants, so much greater is the degree of languor or weakness 
into which they are thrown by the operation of transplanting." {Prof. Plant. 161.) 

6838. The seasons for jihnting are autumn and spring ; the former, when the soil and 
situation are moderately good, and the plants large ; and the latter, for bleak situations. 
Necessity, however, is more frequently the guide here than choice, and in extensive 
designs, tlie operation is generally performed in all moderately dry open weather from 
October to April inclusive. " In an extensive plantation," Sang observes, " it will 
hardly happen but there will be variety of soil, some parts moist and heavy, and others 
dry and light. The lightest parts may be planted in December or January ; and tlie 
more moist, or damp parts, in February or ^larch. It must be observed, however, that 
if the ground be not in a proper case for planting, the operation liad. better be delayed, 
'llie plants will be injured, either by being committed to the ground when it is in a sour 
and wet, or in a dry parched state. At a^time when the soil may be termed neither wet 
nor drv, the operation of planting is most successfully performed. The mould does not 
then adhere to the spade, nor does it run in ; it divides well, and is made to intermingle 
with the fibres of the plants with little trouble ; and in treading and setting the plant 
upriglit, tlie soil is not worked into mortar, which it necessarily must be, if in a wet state, 
evidently to the great detriment of the plants. It is therefore improper to plant on a 
retentive soil in the time of rain, or even perhaps for some days afterwards, or after a 
fall of snow, until it has for some days disappeared. Whereas, on a dry absorbent soil, 
it may be proper to plant in the time of gentle showers, immediately after heavy rains, 
or as soon as the snow is dissolved." {Plant. Ival. 157.) 

6839. Pontey is a decided advocate for autumn preparation of the soil, and spring planting. 
Autumn planting," he says, " is advisable only in few cases, while spring planting may properly 

apply to alL" 

68-10. Accarding to Sang, the proper time for planting the pine and fir tribes, and all evergreens, is 
April, or even the first fortnight in May. " Attention should be paid, that no greater number of plants 
be lifted from the nursery than can be conveniently planted on the same day. Damp weather is the 
best. When very dry, and the plants rise destitute of earth at their roots, their roots should be dipped 
in mud (puddle) so as to be coated over by it. In all cases, care should be taken not to shake oflt' any ad- 
hering earth from plants at the time of planting." {Plant. Kal. 341.) 

6841. The operation of inserting the jilants in the soil is performed in various ways ; 
the most general mode, and that recommended by Marshall and Nicol, is pitting ; in 
which two persons are employed, one to operate on the soil with the spade, and the other 
to insert the plant and hold it till tlie earth is put round it, and then press down the soil 
with the foot. 'V^Tiere the plants are three feet high or upwards, this is the best mode ; 
but for smaller plants modes have been adopted in which one person performs the whole 
operation. 

6842. Sang describes three kinds of manual operation employed by him in planting, and in part in 
sowing trees : by pitting ; by slitting simply, or by cross, or T slitting ; by the diamond dibber ; by the 
planting-mattock ; and by the planter. In filling an area with plants, he first plants those intended as the 
final trees, and afterwards the nurses ; or one set of operators plant the former, while another follow with 
the latter, unless the time for removing the nurses, as in the case of evergreen pines and firs, should 
Ise later than that for planting the principals, (6832.) " Theplants, if brought from a distance, should be 



Book III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



919 



fhougfied, i. c. earthed ; or they may ba supplied daiiy from the nursery, as circumstances dirpct. All the 
people employed ought to be provided with thick aprons, in which to lap up the plants ; the spadesmen, as 
well as the boys or girls ; the latter being supplied by the former as occasion may require. All of them should 
regularly fill their aprons at one time, to prevent any of the plants being too long retained in any of the 
planters' aprons. One man cannot possibly set a plant so well with the spade, unless in the case of laying 
as two people can ; nor, supposing him to do it as well, can he plant half as many in the same space 
of time as two can. A boy ten years of age is equal, as a holder, to the best man on tlic field, and can be 
generally had for less than half the money. Hence this method is not only the best, but the least ex- 
pensive." {Plant. Kal. 167 ) 

6843. By pitting. " The pit having been dug for several months, the surface will 
therefore be encrusted by the rains, or probably covered with weeds. The man first 
strikes the spade downwards to the bottom, two or three times, in order to loosen the 
soil ; then poaches it, as if mixing mortar for the builder ; he next lifts cut a spadeful 
of the earth, or, if necessary, two spadefuls, so as to make room for, all the fibres, without 
their being anywi.se crowded together ; lie then chops the rotten turf remaining in the 
bottom, and levels the whole. The boy now places the plant perfectly upright, an 
incli deeper than when it stood in the nurseiy, and holds it firm in that position. The 
man trindles in the mould gently ; the boy gently moves the plant, not from side to side, 
but upwards and downwards, until the fibres be covered. The man then fills in all 
the remaining mould ; and immediately proceeds to chop and poach the next pit, leaving 
the boy to set the plant upright, and to tread the mould about it. This in stiflp wet soil 
he does lightly ; but in sandy or gravelly soil he continues to tread until the soil no 
longer retains tlie impression of his foot. The man has by this time got the pit ready 
for tJie next plant, the boy is also ready with it in his hand, and in this manner the oper- 
ation goes on. On very steep Jiangs which have been pitted, the following rule ought to 
be observed in planting : to place the plant in the angle formed by the acclivity and sur- 
face of the pit ; and in finishing to raise the outer margin of the pit highest, wliereby the 
plant will be made to stand as if on level ground, and the moisture be retained in the 
hollow of the angle, evidently to its advantage." [Plant. Kal. 167.) 

■ 6844. The slit method, either simply (20S8.) or by the T method, is not recommended by Sang; but 
necessity may justify its adoption occasionally. " We would not recommend planting by the slit, unless 
where there is no more soil than is absolutely occupied by the fibres of the herbage which grows on the 
place. Excepting on turf, it cannot be performed; nor should it be practised, if the turf be found three 
or four inches thick. By pitting in summer, turf is capable of being converted into a proper mould in 
the space of a few months ; and the expense of pitting, especially in small plantations, can never counter, 
balance the risk of success in the eyes of an ardent planter. The most proper time to perform the oper- 
ation of slitting in the plants, is when the surface is in a moist state. On all steeps the plant should bo 
placed towards the declivity, that the moisture may fall to its roots; that is to say, in planting, the 
spadesman should stand highest, and the boy lowest on the bank; by which arrangement the phint will 
be inserted at the lower angle of the slit." {Plant. Kal. 170.) 

6845. Planting with the diainond dibber, he says, " is the cheapest and most expeditious planting of any 
we yet know, in cases where the soil is a sand of gravel, and the surface bare of herbage. The plate of the 
dibber {Jig. 635. a) is made of good steel, and is four inches and a half broad where the iron handle is 
welded to it; each of the other two sides of the triangle is five iiiches long; the thickness of the plate is 
one fifth part of an inch, made thinner from the middle to the sides, till the edges become sharp. The 
length of the iron handle is seven inches, and so strong as not to bend in working, which will require six 
eighths of an inch square. The iron handle is furnished with a turned hilt, like the handle of a large gim- 
let, both in its form and manner of being fixed on. I'he planter is furnished with a planting-bag, tied round 
his waist, in which he carries the plants. A stroke is given with the dibber, a little aslant, the point lying 
inwards ; the handle of the dibber is then drawn towards the person, while its plate remains within tiie 
ground : by this means a vacuity is formed between the back of the dibber and the ground ; into which 
the planter, with his other hand, introduces the roots of the seedling plants, being careful to put them 
fully to the bottom of the opening : he then pulls out the dibber, so as- not to displace them, and gives the 
eased turf a smart stroke with the heel ; and thus is the plant completely firmed'. The greatest error the 
planter with this instrument can run into, is the imperfect introduction of the roots. Green, or unprac- 
tised hands, are apt to double the roots, or sometimes to lay them across the opening, instead of putting 
them straight down, as above directed. A careful man, however, will become, if not a speedy, at least a 
good planter in one day ; and it is of more importance that he be a sure hand; than a quick one. A person 
who is of a careless or slovenly disposition, should never be allowed to handle a dibber of tKis kind." 

6846. Planting with the planting-mattock 

{Jig. 635. b) is resorted to in rocky or other 

spots where pitting is impracticable. "The y''^^^ 635 i\\ 

helve or handle is three feet six inches 7 y'^^ \f 

long; the mouth is five inches broad, and d 
is made sharp ; the length from it to the 
eye, or helve, is sixteen inches ; and it is 
used to pare off the sward, heath, or other 
brush that may happen to be in the way, 
previous to easing the soil with' the other 
end. The small end tapers from the eye, 
and terminates in a point, and is seventeen 
inches long." By this instrument the 
surface is skimmed off " for six or eiglit 
inches in diameter, and with the pick-end 
dug down six or eight inches deep, bring- 
ing up any loose stones to the surface; by 
which means a place will be prepared for 
the reception of the plant, little inferior to a pit. This instrument maybe us^ed in many causes, when the 
plants to be planted are of small size, such as one-year larch-seedlings, one year nursed ; or two-year Scots . 
pines, one year nursed ; and the expense is much less than by the spade." {Plant. Kal. 385.) 

6847. Planting with the Jorest-planter. {fig. 635. c) " The helve is sixteen inches long, the mouth is four 
inches and a half broad, and the length of the head is fourteen inches. The instrument is used in pk-.ntii;^ 
hilly ground, previously prepared by the hand-maltock. The person who pei forms the work carries the 
plants in a close apron ; digs out the cartii sufficiently to hold the roots of the plant ; and sets and firm^; it 

3 P 3 




950 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



without help from another : it is oniy useful when small plants are used, and in hilly or rocky situations.*^ 
{Plant. Kal. Pref. xxiv.) 

6848. Pontey prefers planting by pitting, in general cases ; the holes being made during the preceding 
summer or winter, sufficiently large, but not so deep into a retentive sub-soil as to render them a receptacle 
for water. When the plants have been brought from a distance he strongly recommends puddling them 
(6849.) previously to planting; if they seem very much dried, it would be still better to lay them in the 
ground for eight or ten days, giving them a good soaking of water every second or third day, in order to 
restore their vegetable powers ; for it well deserves notice, that a degree of moisture in ^oil sufficient to 
support a plant recently or immediately taken from the norsen,-, would, in the case of dried ones, prove so 
far insufficient, that most of them would die in it. The puddling here recommended may also be of great 
service in all cases of late planting where small plants are used ; my method is (after puddling) to tie them 
in bundles, of two or three hundreds each ; and thus send them, by a cart-load at once, to where wanted j 
where such bundles being set upright, close to each other, and a little straw carefully applied to the 
outsides of them, may remain without damage in a sheltered situation any reasonable time necessary 
to plant them. Where loose soil happens to be convenient, that should be substituted in the place 
of straw. 

6849. A puddle for trees is made by mixing water with any soil rather tenacious, so intimately as to 
form a complete puddle, so thick that when the plants are dipped into it enough may remain upon the roots 
to cover them. The process of puddling is certainly simple, and its expense too trifling to deserve notice : 
its effects, however, in retaining, if not attracting moisture, are such that, by means of it, late planting is 
rendered abundantly more safe that it otherwise would be. It is an old invention, and hence it is truly 
astonishing that it is not more frequently practised. If we could but persuade people to adopt it generally 
in spring planting, I beheve the prejudice in favor of autumn practice would soon be done awav. {Prof, 
Plant. 167.) 

6850. Pontey' s tnefhods of planting are in general the same as those of Sang : he uses a mattock and 
planter of similar shape ; and also a two or three pronged instrument, which we have elsewhere denomin- 
ated the planter's hack. (1305. fig. 90.) " This instrument," he says, " has been introduced of late years as 
an improvement on the mattock and planter {fig 635. b, c), being better adapted to soils full of roots," stones, 
&c. ; they are likewise easier to work, as they penetrate to an equal depth with a stroke less violent than 
the former : they are also less subject to be clogged up by a wet or tenacious soil. The length of the prongs 
©f both should be about eight inches, and the distances between them, when with three prongs, one and a 
half, and with two prongs, about two inches ; the two-pronged hack should be made somewhat stronger 
than the other, it being chiefly intended for very stony lands, or where the soil wants breaking, in order 
to separate it from the herbage, &c. These tools are chiefly applicable to plants of any size up to about 
two feet, or such as are generally used for great designs, where they are used as a substitute for the spade, 
in the following manner : The planter being provided with a basket holding the plants required i^the holes 
being supposed prepared, and the earth left in them), he takes a tree in one hand, and the tool in the other, 
which he strikes into the hole, and tlien pulls the earth towards him, so as to make a hole large enough to 
hold all its roots ; he then puts in the plant with the other, and pushes the earth to its roots with the back 
of the planter ; after which, he fixes the plant, and levels the soil at the same instant with his foot : so 
that the operation is performed by one person, with a degree of neatness and expedition which no one can 
attain to who uses the spade. It is known to all planters, that but few laborers ever learn to plant well 
and expeditiously in the common method, without an assistant : this method, however, requires neither 
help nor dexterity; as any laborer of common sagacity, or boy of fifteen, or even a woman, may learn to- 
perform it well in less than half an hour. The facility with which these tools will break clods,"clear the 
noles of stones, or separate the soil from herbage, the roots of heath, &c. (the former being previously mel- 
lowed by the frost,) may be easily imagined." {Prof. Plant. 173.) The adoption of a small mattock for in- 
serting plants, we recollect to have seen recommended in a tract on planting in the Highlands, by Mac- 
laurin, a nurseryman, pubhshed at Edinburgh upwards of twenty years ago. 

6851. An expeditious mode of slit planting is described in the General Report of Scot- 
land, as having been practised for many years on the Duke of Montrose's estate. It is 
as follows ; " The operator, with his spade, makes three cuts, twelve or fifteen inches 
long, crossing each other in the centre, at an angle of sixty degrees, the whole having 
the form of a star. {fig. 636.) He inserts his spade across one of the rays {a), a few inches 
from the centre, and on the side next himself ; then bending the handle towards him- 
self, and almost to the ground, the earth opening in fissures from the centre in the di- 
rection of the cuts which had been made, he, at the same instant, inserts his plant at 
the point where the spade intersected the ray {a), pushing it forward to the centre, and 
assisting the roots in rambling through the fissures. He then lets down the earth by re- 
moving his spade, having pressed it into a compact state with his heel ; the operation is finished by adding 
a little earth, with the grass side down, completely covering the fissures, for the purpose of retaining the 
moisture at the root, and likewise as a top-dressing, which greatly encourages the plant to push fresh roots 
between the swards." (Vol.ii. p. 283.) 



Chap. IV. 

On forming Plantations, in which Omamejit or Effect is the leading Consideratum. 

6852. In designing omainental ^plantations, the situation, form, the disposition of the 
frees, and the kinds employed, are the principal considerations. 

6853. The sittiations to be planted, with a view to effect, necessarily depends on the 
kind of effect intended ; these may reduced to three ~ to give beauty and variety to ge- 
neral scenery, as in forming plantations here and there throughout a demesne ; to give 
form and character to a country-residence, as in planting a park and pleasure-grounds ; 
and to create a particular and independent beauty or effect, as in planting an extensive 
area or wood, unconnected with any other object, and disposing of the interior in ave- 
nues, glades, and other forms. In the two first cases, the choice of the situation must 
always be relative to other objects ; as, for example, in ornamenting general scenery, to 
fields and enclosures, buildings, roads, &c. ; and to the mansion-garden and other parts 
of a residence, in laying out a country-seat : but in forming independent plantations the 
choice may be absolute, and guided by no other consideration than tlie effect to be pro- 
duced. One of the greatest beauties produced by planting, either on general scenery-, or 
on the grounds of a residence, is that of varying the forai of the surface of the country 




Book III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



951 



or increasing the variations already existing. To do this with most effect, it is an ob- 
vious and long established principle, tliat, other circumstances being the same, the hills 
are to be more generally planted than the hollows, or even the plains. By jilanting a 
hill, or the least rise of ground, that hill or rise is increased in eifect ; but by planting 
the low grounds between hills or protuberances, their effect is destroyed. It is to be ob- 
served, however, that the latter practice is often what we observe in natural scenery. 
In hilly tracts in a state of nature, and under the dominion of no other animals than 
cattle or sheep, the vales or dells (Jig- 637.) are generally filled with wood and the 




tops of the liills bare, w4aich, however agreeable to those who view or study nature 
chiefly in detail, yet to the general observer it tends to confound form, and introduce 
monotony of surface. Art, therefore, when planting for general effect, or for heighten-- 
ing the character of surface, adopts a contrary practice (Jig. 638.) to what is general in 




wild nature ; for few thmgs in a wild state are suitable to the views of man in a state of 
civilisation and refinement ; and when he admires rude scenery, it is from views of its 
novelty or rarity in cultivated countries ; or with reference to some other art or object, 
or state of the same object. At the same time, a hill crowned with wood occurs in na- 
ture occasionally, both with and without naked hollows or plains at its base, and never 
fails to excite a superior degree of satisfaction or pleasiu'e in the spectator. To plant 
hills, therefore, in preference to valleys, may justly be designated an imitation of one of 
the more interesting features of nature. 

6854. TVith respect to form, it may be absolute, or independent of every consideration but the taste of the 
designer; or it may be relative. It is absolute in plantations intended to create particular beauties within 
themselves ; as in labyrinths, woods pierced with avenues, stars, &c., in the geometric style ; or in com- 
positions and groups, thickets and glades in the interior of a wood, laid out in the modern manner. It is 
relative to the shapes of the ground and to existing objects in the forms adapted for improving general 
scenery; and to these considerations, and to the situation and form of the mansion, gardens, waters, &c. 
in laying out the grounds of a country-residence. For either of these objects the general principles of 
operation are to heighten beauties already existing ; to conceal defects ; if possible, to create beauty ; and 
to connect detached objects, either in reality or appearance, so as the scenery, from whatever point it may 
be viewed, may appear a whole ; in short, the end is a harmonious and expressive whole, and the means 
are the grouping and connecting of the parts. Some tracts of country, or those parts of a demesne exte- 
rior to the park, may be deficient in woodiness ; there.trees may be introduced in masses on elevated sites, 
or the sides of hills ; in groups connected with buildings ; in thinly scattered trees, in pastures, and by 
brooks ; and in rows in hedges, and by other fences or roads. "Where disagreeable objects are to be con- 
cealed, the course is evident; and where nothing is interesting, attempts must be made to create interest. 
A road through a dreary country may often have much of its dulness taken away by one or two rows of 
trees on each side, the stems of which will break and vary the distant scenery. The lines may vary in 
form and direction, may swell into strips, or clumps, or thickets ; form recesses, or be interrupted, accord- 
ing to circumstances. The route through some of the most dreary tracts in Germany and Russia, and the 
•we\\-]kX\ov/n Strada di Ca)yipagna,in Italy, are in this way rendered tolerable. In all this, though the 
main object may be beauty, yet, utihty must never be lost sight of. All plantations by arable lamis should, 
as much as possible, be bounded by straight, or at least not very irregular lines, and connected with the 
hedges or other fences already existing; few single trees or groups should be planted in the area of such 
fields. In pastures, the worst soils and most exposed situations should be chosen, and such forms 
adapted as may shelter the stock from all quarters, but especially from the storms and winds which more 
generally prevail. In planting near cottages and villages, care should be taken not to render the atmo- 
sphere unhealthy by stagnating the air, or to lessen the value of their yards and gardens by curtailing their 
extent, or by excess of shelter and shade. Roads or lanes should on no account be injured, nor the v/ater 
of streams and ponds rendered dark, discolored by leaves, and unwholesome to men or cattle. In short, 
the planter, for effect, should never lo&e sight of utility, or plant in opposition to it ; for though he may 
produce particular sorts of beauty, and especially tliat lately so fashionable and justly admired disposition 
of objects, called picturesque, which may be admired by a number for a time ; yet there is a much more 
elevated and uiiivcrsal beauty, that of moral relation, or. in short, refined utilitv, which, while men 

3 1' ^1 ' 



952 



PliACTlCE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



retain their social feelings, must ever be the most interesting to mankind iu gfeneral, and will therefore 
finally prevail. 

6855. The uutline if plantations, made with a view to the composition of a country- 
residence, is guided by the same general principles ; whether the trees are to be dis- 
posed in regular forms, avowedly ailificial ; or in irregular forms, in imitation of 
nature. [Jig. 639.) The first thing is, in both modes, to compose a principal mass, from 
which the rest may appear to proceed ; or be, or seem to be, connected. In common 
cases it answers best to include or connect with this mass the hpuse, kitchen and flower- 
gardens [e) ; from these other masses and groups should proceed, either connected, 
or better, only seemingly so when ^^ewed horizontally. Their forms should be such 



639 




and so disposed, relatively to the ground and other objects, and to each other, as to 
throw the pasture surface into broad masses (a, 6, c, d), which become wholes in their 
turn, and tlieir connection and variation is heightened by the variety in the glades between 
the masses and groups of plantation. Such would be the mode of procedure on a flat to 
be formed into a modern park ; regard being had to exclude or admit the view of certain 
parts of the distant scenery ; never to shut in, or leave without a third distance (as is the 
term in landscape-painting), any of the scenes within the boundary of the park ; and to 
other laws of perspective, optics, and composition, which will be more fully entered on in 
treating of landscape-gardening. 

6856. In the pleasure-ground, which, as far as respects the form or ground outline of 
plantations, is to be considered as a part of the park, the same principles are applicable. 
In neither the artificial or natural style, should tlieir width be great ; but their form may 
be varied at pleasure, subject to general principles. "NMiere the ground is irregular 
(Jig. 640.), only the modern style can be adopted v.ith good effect; and there, by con- 

640 




ductingthe walks, orforming the water chiefly in the hollows (a), and planting the emi- 
nences (b), varying the manner in which the outlines of these masses embrace the decli- 
vities, the happiest effects may be produced. Deviations from these general principles 
can only be justified by extraordinary circumstances. 



Book HI. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



953 



6857. JVith respect to the extent, or area, occupied hy ornamental plantations, as such, 
that need seldom be great. They are generally seen only in profile, and therefore a cir- 
cuitous outline (Jig- 641. a.) may on most occasions be contrived to have the same effect 
as planting a solid rnass, which w^ill occupy much more ground (h), showr less exterior 

variety, and none within. The 

''^"f^M^'^r'-^ case is different, however, 
i J.' where the upper surface of a 
\% ^ It I plantation is to be met by the 




gimlet ^ 



eye, at a large angle, say up- 
wards of 35°. In that case, 
to produce a grand and im- 
posing effect, real extent is 
wanting. Examples occur in 
planting the steep sides of high 
hills, to be seen from below ; 
or valleys or plains to be seen 



W 



642 



from great elevations. It must be confessed that these are among 
the grandest circumstances in which wood can be vie>ved ; pro- 
files of outlines, varied both as respects the sky and the ground, are 
beautiful and interesting ; and avenues and long rows of trees 
form imposing perspectives ; but the side of a range of mountains 
clothed with wood, seen at a certain distance, from a plain below or 
opposite hills, is one of the most magnificent of rural prospects, 

6858. With respect to Hie disjiodtion of trees in a plantation 
where art is avowed or purposely displayed, the more regularly the 
plants are placed the better is the end attained ; but, where na- 
ture is to be imitated, irregularity will best sustain the character. 
This should be studied in the larger as well as the smaller plantations, in the natural 
style ; but more especially in detached groups, which operate so powerful an effect 
643 ^ layhig out the grounds of a residence. The greatest beauty of a 

C*^') P €> group of trees as far as respects their stems, is in the varied direc- 
tion these take as they grow into trees (Jig- 64-2.) ; but as that is 
for all practical purposes beyond the influence of art, all we can do is to vary as much 
as possible the ground-plans of groups, or the relative position which the stems have 
to each other, where they spring from the earth. _ 644 

This is considerable, even where a very few trees 
are used, and of which any person may convince 
himself by placing a few dots on paper. Thus, two trees (Jig. 643.), or a tree and 
shrub, which is tlie smallest group, may be placed in three different positions with re- 

ference to a spectator in a fixed point : if he moves round them they will first vary in 
form separately, and next (at b) unite in one or in two groups, according to the position 
of the spectator. In like manner three trees (Jig. G44.) may be placed in four different 



positions; four trees may be placed in eight different positions (Jig. 645.); five 
trees may be grouped in ten different ways as to ground-plan (Jig. 646.); six may 
be placed in twelve different positions (Jig. 647.) ; and so on. 




6859. In planting groups it is not meant to be asserted, that the ground-plan of each 
should be studiously considered ; it will be sufficient if this is done in conspicuous situ- 
ations, by the sides of walks and roads, and in such places as require for shelter or shade, 
or to exclude some disagreeable object, a series of groups of nearly the same number of 
trees. For the ordinary purposes of grouping, such as varying the apparent outline of 
'masses, connecting scattered objects, adding parts to such objects as are incomplete 
wholes, &c., it will be sufficient to introduce large and small groups; never to put two 
trees at exactly the same distance from each other ; three in the angles of an equilateral 
triangle ; four in those of a square ; five in those of an octagon, and so on. 



954 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



6860. Scattered trees. It has been a very common practice among planters to intro- 
duce, in parks, great numbers of detached single trees (in vulgar technology, dotting), 
with a view of effecting, by them, wliaX can only be done by groups. Excepting the 
clump, there is not a greater deformity in the grounds of Briti^ country-residences. 
Supposing these trees, planted on a level surface, all of the same sort, and all growing 
equally well, their insipid sameness of form and position must be evident to the mind's 
eye of every one. Suppose them on the same character of surface, but all, or chiefly, of 
different sorts {Jig. 648.), it is equally evident they will grow with different degrees of 
vigor, and assume different characters of stem and head ; and consequently produce an 
appearance of the most discordant kind. It is only necessary to analyse a group, to be 




convinced of the variety of general form produced, even by trees of one species, but 
more especially by two kinds, and this, even by specimens that would be unsightly apart ; 
and to observe a portion of the scattered woody scenery, in the openings or glades of a 
natural forest, to be convinced how much more variety is produced by that manner of 
planting, than by distributing over a surface great numbers of single trees. It is ob- 
served by Uvedale Price, that in the numerous landscapes which compose the liber veritatis 
of Claude, there is not more than one single tree ; so highly did this artist value the 
principle of connection. A single tree, however, is not always to be condemned, even 
as such, for its form, age, or blossom, or some other accidental circumstance may com- 
pensate for its isolated situation ; and it may often exist singly as a tree, and yet in 
connection or grouped with other objects, as buildings, rocks, cS^c. ; and in these cases 
it is not to be condemned, because the grand object of grouping, connection, is maintained 
by the co-tangent object. 

6861. Placing the groups. Another practice in the employment of groups, almost equally reprehensible 
with that of indiscriminate distribution, is that of placing the groups and thickets in the recesses, instead 
of chiefly employing them opposite the salient points. The'eftbct of this mode is the very reverse of what 
is intended ; for, instead of varying the outline, it tends to render it more uniform by diminishing the 
depth of recesses, and approximating the whole more nearly to an even line. The way to vary an even 
or straight line or lines, is here and there to place constellations of groups against it {fig. 649. c) ; and a 
line already varied is to be rendered more so, by placing large groups against the prominences (a) to 
render them more prominent ; and small groups {b), here and there in the recesses, to vary their forms 
and conceal their real depths. 



649 





6862. In all plantations in the natural style above the size of a group, the same general principles are 
to be followed in the disposition of the trees ; the plants, whatever be their kinds, and whether the mass is 
finally to assume the character of a wood, grove, or copse, should be placed irregularly ; here thick, and 
there thin, a.sifthey had sprung up from the accidental semination of birds or winds. "The efFect of this 
arrangement will not be that composition of low and high, oblique and upright stems, and young and old 
trees, and low growths, which we find in forest scenery ; but it is all that can be done in imitation of it at 
the first planting ; and subsequent thinning, pruning, and cutting down, moving, renversing, planting, 
and sowing, must be used from time to time to complete imitation or allusion, unless the owner will rest 
satisfied with an inferior degree of beauty." 

6863. The general form of tree employed materially influences the effect of plantations. 
The capacities of different trees for producing effects in landscape, and the general 
division of trees into round-headed, oblong-beaded, and spiry-topt, have been already 
pointed out (6795. et seq.) It has also been observed (6857.), that the greater number of 
plantations are seen chiefly in profile ; and hence, that the outline which the tops of tlie 
trees form against the sky or the back-ground, is the most conspicuous feature in their 
aspect. The difference between this outline, when formed of spiry-topt trees, as the firs, 
pines, &c. {Jig. 650.) ; of oblong-headed trees, as most of the willows, alders, poplars {Jig. 
651. h)\ and the round-headed sorts, as the oak, ash, elm, and most trees {Jig, 651. a) 



Book III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



955 




is so considerable, as to merit the particular attention of the planter. Nothing can be 
more harsh and unvaried than the serrated outline of the fir tribe, whether planted in 
rows, strips, or masses ; whereas the rounded-headed trees, even in single rows, pro- 
duce some variety of sky outline. The difference is equally great between the face or 

651 




front surface of a row or mass of spiry and round-headed trees ; for the great regularity 
and similarity of the branches of the former, precludes the possibility of breaks in 
form, or light and shade, and presents one uniform surface of verdure, not unlike the 
side of a high hedge. The front surface of a row or mass of round-headed trees, 
on the contrary, from opposite qualities in the branches, produces prominences and re- 
cesses of different degrees of magnitude, and of different forms and relative positions. If 
we look on the upper surface of a plantation of each class, we shall find the difference 
equally great. 

6864. The situations where sjnry-topt 
trees have most effect is among rocks, 
and in very irregular surfaces ; and 
especially on the steep sides of high 
mountains {jig- 652.), where their 
forms, and the direction of their 
growth, seem to harmonise with their 
pointed rocky summits. Fir and pine 
forests are dull, gloomy, and monoto- 
nous in the sandy plains of Poland and 
Russia, but among the broken rocks, 
craggy precipices, and otherwise end- 
lessly varied surfaces of Sweden and 
Norway, they are full of variety. In 
tame countries they present most 
variety when planted so thin as barely 
to touch each other, and when a num- 
ber of them are kept low, where the 
whole are of different ages {jig. 653.) But the variety produced, even by this disposition, 
is still far short of what would be effected by a similar arrangement of round or oval- 





headed trees {fig. 654.), of different ages, or mixea with shrubs or low growths. The 
most suitable situation for spiry-topt trees, in ornamental scenery, is as single objects 

■ 654 




or in small groups {fig. 655.), sparingly introduced in the margin of thickets or strips, 
or sprinkled along the bottoms of dells or dingles. In plantations which comprise masses 
of all the difiTerent species of hardy tree, there they may come in also in their proper 
place ; and in mountain and rocky scenery, they are in the places whi<;h nature seems to 
have intended for them. 



956 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




6865. The oblong-headed trees may be introduced much more frequently than th? spiry- 
topt sorts; the more obtuse summits blend well with the round-headed trees, and t!:e 
more acute topt sorts which terminate in flexible flame-like shapes, as the Lombardy 
poplar, and cypress, form excellent contrasts to the round trees, and serve as transition 
forms to the spiry tHbe. The round-headed trees, it need hardly be observed, are the 
most general in nature, at least in temperate climates, and are the most universally ap- 
jjlicable in ornamental planting. These considerations on the forms of trees refer to them 
chiefly as in independent plantations ; in connection with buildings, the choice, as to 
foira, may often be influenced by that of the building, and also by the effect or object in - 
tended by planting them. 

6SG6. With respect to magnitude, the grand division of woody plants is into trees and shrubs. The bulk 
and heights of the common trees and shrubs of the country being generally known, the eye estimates the 
magnitude of other objects by theirs; consequently extraordinary magnitudes, whether large or small, 
should only be used under extraordinary circumstances. Tlie apparent size, proportion, and distance of 
objects, might otherwise be deranged, and a discordant effect produced. Shrubs, which have the form of 
trees ; and low trees, as the mountain ash, the apple and pear, often prodiice this effect, when planted as 
single objects ; and unless their fruit is prized above every thing else, they should, when introduced for the 
sake of their flowers, either be planted in the margins of plantations, or grouped with trees of the or- 
dinary size. The finest small groups are of this description, or composed of common deciduous timber 
tiees and hardy shrubs, as oaks, chestnuts, hollies, thorns, &c. 

6837. The choice of species must be made subservient to general effect, and to the particular purposes, 
for which different species are calculated. These have been already pointed out (chap, ii), as well as their 
uses (chap, i.), and both should be continually present in the mind of the planter. For the more general 
purposes of planting, the standard trees of the country, native or naturalised, are mostly to be preferred, 
as growing freely and preserving harmony ; for the purposes of distinction, foreign trees are more likely 
to answer the end. Foreign trees also contribute greatly to variety and interest, and therefore are indis- 
pensable in pleasure-grounds, or other scenes of much resort " Any number of species may be admitted 
into improved grounds ; commencing with the rare sorts near the house, as the centre of art and refine- 
ment, and ending with the common trees of the country, at sucli distances as the extent and style of the 
whole may suggest. The proportions of such trees as are only ornamental, and such as are valuable as 
timber, must be in some degree determined by the character of the place, but chiefly by the taste and view 
of the owner. Beauty alone, without utility, will not long please ; and a few single groups and plants of 
the rare species, in the grounds more immediately consecrated to man, will generally afford more satisfac- 
tion than a lavish display of exotics ; the former will always present a more luxuriant and thriving display 
of scenery than the latter, and sooner attain the maturity of beauty." {Edin. Encyc. art. Landscape 
Gardening.) 

6868. Whatever number of species are used, one only should prevail in one place ; or if there be high or 
low growths, then one of each kind should prevail. Great attention should be had that the species 
which compose the groups and thickets, or other scattered woodinesses which border on masses, should 
consist almost entirely of the species which prevail in the masses : if this precaution is neglected, instead 
of these appendages producing connection and harmony, they will have a tendency directly the reverse. 
Thickets may next be considered in regard to their form, that is, the form of their ground-plan ; and with 
groups and single trees in regard to the choice of species. Thickets are produced by nature, by the inroads 
of cattle, or other animals, grazing or cropping the herbage, and with it the young trees in forest-scenery. 
On levels and sheltered situations, we find their form comparatively regular, because there appears no 
permanent or general reason to occasion their encroachment on one side more than on the other. But on 
varied surfaces and soils a preference is given by depasturing animals to certain natural plants, and the 
side on which they abound is penetrated more deeply than the other. The plan of the thicket, therefore, 
varies accordingly. In elevated grounds, exposed to a particular wind, the thickets will exceed in length, 
which will be found generally to be in the direction of the storm. The cause is too obvious to be pointed 
out ; but this effect, and every other observed in the groups and thickets of natural scenery, always merit 
study, and most frequently deserve imitation in creations of landscape-scenery. The species of tree 
ought obviously to be those of the part of the mass to which they belong ; for thickets, groups, and single 
trees, ought to resemble disjointed and broken fragments from those masses. But in particular cases, for 
rendering a prominence still more prominent, or increasing the depth of a recess, a few plants of similar, 
or not discordant growths, but of darker or lighter greens, may at a distance add to the effect of each. By 
the same process, with more contrasted species, where no other mode can be put in execution, the form- 
ality of a single row may in some degree be varied in its situation and contour. {Ed. Encyc. art. Land- 
scape Gardening.) 

6869. The arrangement of the species to effect variety must evidently be by grouping or collecting them 
in masses ; for if all the species made use of were intimately mixed together in every part of a plantation, 
it is evident the eye would meet every where the same species ; so that, as far as variation from that 
source was sought for, it would be entirely wanting. Uvedale Price has treated this subject with much 
ingenuity ; and in reprobating the common practice of mixing as many different sorts as can be procured, 
in order to produce variety, observes, that " variety, of which the true end is to relieve the eye, not to 
perplex it, does not consist in the diversity of separate objects, but in the diversity of their effects when com- 
bined together in a difference of composition and character. Many think, however, that they, have ob- 
tained that grand object, when they have exhibited in one body all the hard names of the Linnaean sys- 
tem ; but when as many plants as can be well got together are exhibited in every shrubbery, or in every 
plantation, the result is a sameness of a different kind, but not less truly a sameness that would arise from 
there being no diversity at all ; for there is no having variety of character, without a certain distinctness, 
without certain marked features on which the eye can dwell." (Essays on the Picturesque, vol. i.) , 

6870. Jtepton observes, " there is more variety in passing from a grove of oaks to a grove of firs than in 
passing through a wood composed of a hundred different species, as they are usually mixed together. By 
this indiscriminate mixture of every kind of tree in planting, all variety is destroyed by the excess of va- 
riety, whether it is adopted in belts or clumps, as they have been technically called : for example, if ten 
clumps be composed of ten different sorts of trees in each, they become so many things exactly similar ; 
but if each clump consists of the same sort of trees, they become ten different things, of which one may 
hereafter fumish a group of oaks, another of elms, another of chestnuts or of thorns, &c. In like manner, 



B ox III. 



FORMATION OF PLANTATIONS. 



957 



r5G 




in the modern belt, the recurrence and monotony of the same mixture of trees of all the different kinds, 
through a long drive, make it the more tedious in proportion as it is long. In part of the drive at 
Woburn, in which evergreens alone prevail, which is a circumstance of grandeur, of variety, of 
novelty, and, I may add, of winter comfort, that I never saw adopted in any other place on so magni- 
ficent a scale, the contrast of passing from a wood of deciduous trees to a wood of evergreens must be 
felt by the most heedless observer; and the same sort of pleasure, though in a weaker degree, would be 
felt in the course of a drive, if the trees of different kinds were collected in small groups or masses by 
themselves, instead of being blended indiscriminately." {Inquiry into Changes of Taste, Sec. p. 33.) 

6871. Sir W. Chambers and Price agree in recommending the imitation of natural forests in the ar- 
rangement of the species. In these nature disseminates her plants by scattering their seeds, and the off- 
spring rise round the parent in masses or breadths, depending on a variety of circumstances, but chiefly on 
the facility which these seeds afford for being carried to a distance by the wind, the rain, and by birds or 
other animals; So disseminated they spring up, different sorts together, affected by various circumstances 
of soil and situation ; and arrive at maturity, contending with other plants and trees, and with the brows- 
ing of animals. At last, that species which had enjoyed a maximum of natural advantages is found to 
prevail as far as this maximum extended, stretching along in masses and angular portions of surface, till 
circumstances changing in favor of some other species, thai takes the prevalence in its turn. In this way it 
will generally be found, that the number of species, and the extent and style of the ninsses in which they 
prevail, bears a strict analogy to the changes of soil and surface ; and this holds good, not only with respect 
to trees and shrubs, but to plants, grasses, and even the mossy tribe. 

6872. The most perfect arrangement of species in regard to va- 
riety would be to employ every kind of tree and shrub that will grow 
freely in the open air, and arrange them according to the natural 
system. We have already suggested (6144.) that a residence might be 
wooded in this way, so as in the smallest extent to obtain a maxi- 
mum of variety and beauty. In most cases, where grouping, or any 
systematic plan of arranging the species is to be adopted, the form of 
the groups {fig. 656. «, b, c, d, e) should be marked on the plan of 
the plantation, and the kinds for each form written down in a cor- 
responding list ; the small detached masses intended as thickets (/) 
should be similarly marked, the situation of groups indicated cither 
by letters simply (g), or by figures (6, 2, 3) referring to a list of kinds ; 
and where shrubs are to be introduced in the groups, two figures may 
be used one of which shall indicate the kind of tree, and . 
the other the species of low grov/th or shrub. This mode we have . 
ways adopted in furnishing plans for ornamental planting, and find | 
it enables gardeners to execute them with perfect accuracy. 

6873. The size of the ]:lantd used in ornam.ental planting should be ^ 
as great as the soil and situation will admit, for two i-casons : first, because an early effect is always de- 
sirable ; and secondly, because in planting detached, groups, large and small plants, and a varied inclin- 
ation of their stem {fig. 642.) may be introduced in imitation of nature. Small groups on pastured lands, 
indeed, cannot be formed Vv^ithout trees whose stems are sufficiently high to raise their heads out of the 
reach of cattle, without enclosing so considerable a space round every tree as to render this mode both le. 
dious, unsightly, and expensive. 

6874. Fences. iMasses, in the ancient style of planting, were generally surrounded by walls or other 
durable fences. Here the barrier was considered as an object or permanent part of the scene, and for 
that reason was executed substautially, and even ornamentally. They were generally walls substantially 
coped, and furnished with handsome gates and piers. The rows of avenues and small clumps, or platoons 
intended to be finally thrown open, were enclosed by the most convenient temporary fence. 

6875. In planting in the natural style, a regular fence either of verdant or masonic materials, can never 
be the final part of perfect imitation, since no such thing is to be found in nature. But in planting in 
farm-lands, or for the purpose of improving the general scenery, some permanent fence is requisite ; and 
all that can be said is, that which promises in the end to be the most efficient and economical, will almost 
always be the best. The hedge, sunk fence, common wall, and wide water-course where it will be con- 
stantly nearly full of water, here present themselves as the most general kinds. Any fence, however, of 
which a large excavation, without water, forms a part, as the sunk fence, should be used with great cau- 
tion ; as there are none of this class but what look ill from at least one point of view, that is, when seen 
lengthways, 

6876. Inplanting to form a park or residence, with the exception of the boundary fence, and that which 
separates the lawn or mown surface from the grazed scenery, no permanent barrier of a formal nature 
should ever be admitted. In very bleak situations, walls or mounds of earth, however unsightly, may be 
necessary for a time to shelter and draw up the plants ; but the final removal of these and all fences in 
parks, should be looked to as certain. Light palings, the rails coated over with tar or pyrolignous acid, 
and the posts charred by burning at the lower end, to render them durable, may be used in the greater 
number of cases ; and in many, where the plants are larger, and the soil and other circumstances favor- 
able to their growth, hurdles or other moveable rails or palings may be used. " The present improved 
stateof the manufacture of iron offers a very desirable accommodation in this respect, affording the best 
guards for single plants and groups ; and iron hurdles, or lines of cast-iron standards and half-inch wires, 
as rails for masses, have a light and temporary appearance, highly congenial to the idea of their speedy 
removal. The lines of the fences conforming to the irregular shapes of the masses will not be disagree- 
able to the eye, if those of the latter are arranged v/ith any regard to apparent connection ; for any ob- 
jects, whether lines or forms, however deficient in beauty of themselves, acquire a degree of interest, and 
even character, -when connected and arranged in such a way as to form a whole. When a plantation is 
finally to be composed both of trees and undergrowths, thorns, sloes, hollies, berberries, and briars, may, 
in many cases prevail in the margin ; which, when the fence is removed, will form a picturefque phalanx, 
and protect the whole. Partial inroads, formed by cattle, will only heighten the variety and intricacy of 
such masses." {Edin. Encyc. art. Landscape Gardening.) In this way, as Price observes {Essays, vol. i.), 
the ])lanter may plant as thick as he chooses, and never think of thinning or future management, only 
taking care to introduce no more trees than what he intends to remain finally as timber. The great ma- 
jority of the plants being shrubs will soon be overtopped by the timber-trees, which, having abundance 
f)f head-room, will grow up in free and unconstrained shapes. The future care of plantations is so ge- 
nerally neglected, that this suggestion, under certain circumstances, well merits adoption ; though it cer- 
tainly can have no pretension to be called a scientific or profitable mode of planting. It is what it pre. 
tends to be, a picturesque mode. 



95S 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Chap. V. 

Of the Cnlture and Management of Plantatiojis. 

G877. On the management of 2)lantations, Pontey and Sang observe, that it is too 
common a case to consider a tree, when once planted, as done with ; though, as every- 
one knows, the progress and products of trees, like those of other plants, may be greatly 
increased or modified by cultivating the soil, pruning and. thinning. 

6878. With respect to culture of the scil, it is evident that young plantations should be kept clear of such 
weeds as have a tendency to smother the plants ; and though this is not likely to take place on heaths and 
barren sites, yet even these should be looked over once or twice during summer, and at least those weeds 
removed which are conspicuously injurious. In grounds which have been prepared previously to plant- 
ing, weeding, hoeing by hand, or by the horse-hoe, and digging or ploughing, become necessary according 
to circumstances. The hoeings are performed in summer to destroy weeds, and render the soil pervious 
to the weather ; the ploughing and diggings in winter for the same purpose, and sometimes to prepare 
the soil for spring crops. These, both Pontey and Sang allow, may be occasionally introduced among 
newly planted trees ; though it must not be forgotten that relatively to the trees, the plants composing 
such crops are weeds, and some of them, as the potatoc, weeds of the most exhausting kind. 

6879. In preparing land for sowing woods. Sang ploughs in manure, sows in rows six feet apart, and 
crops the ground between, with low-growing early potatoes, turnip, lettuce, or other green crops. He 
does not approve of cropping the intervals with young trees, as a sort of nursery, as they prove more 
scourging crops than esculent vegetables, nor with grain, as not admitting of culture, and being too ex- 
hausting for the soil. Marshall, and some other authors, however, approve of sowing the tree-seeds with 
a crop of grain, and hoeing up the stubble and weeds when the crop is removed. 

6680. Pontey observes, " that wherever preparing the soil for planting is thought necessary, that of 
cultivating it for some years afterwards will generally be thought the same ; for where quick growth is 
essential, cleanliness of appearance is usually of consequence. Slight crops of potatoes, with short tops, 
or turnips, may be admitted into such plantations with advantage for two or three years, as they create a 
necessity for anm.ially digging or stirring the surface, and tend very materially to accelerate the growth 
of the plants. It may be objected, that such crops must impoverish the soil, and no doubt but such is 
the fact, so far as common vegetables are concerried ; but as to the production of wood, its support de- 
pends, in a great measure, on a different species of nutriment ; and hence, I could never observe that 
such cropping damaged it materially." (Profit. Pla?it. p. 153.) Osier-plantations for basket-willows and 
hoops, require digging and cleaning during the whole course of their existence ; and so do hedge-rows to 
a certain extent, and some ornamental plantations. 

6881. Filling np blanks is one of the first operations that occurs in the culture of plantations next to the 
general culture of the soil, and the care of the external fences. According to Sang, a forest plant- 
ation after pitting, cither in the mass form or ordinary mixture, should remain se.veral years after plant- 
ing, before filling up the vacancies, by the death of the hard-wood plants, takes place. Hard-v/ood plants, 
in the first year, and even sometimes in the second year after planting, die down quite to the surface of 
the ground, and are apparently dead, while their roots, and the wood immediately above them, are quite 
fresh, and capable of producing very vigorous shoots, which they frequently do produce, if allowed to 
stand in their places. If a tree, such as that above alluded to, be taken out the first or second year after 
planting, and the place filled up with a fresh plant cf the same kind, what happened to the former may 
probably happen to the latter; and so the period of raising a plant on the spot may be protracted to a 
great length of time ; or it is possible this object may never be gained. 

6882. The filling up of the hard wood kinds in a plantation which lias been planted after trenching, or sum- 
mer-fallow which has been kept clean by the hoe, may be done with safety at an earlier period than under 
the foregoing circumstances ; because the trees, in the present case, have greater encouragement to grow 
vigorously after planting, and may be more easily ascertained to be entirely dead, than where the natural 
lierbage is allowed to grow among them. 

6883. But thefiUingup of larches and pines may take place the first spring after the plantation has been 
made ; because such of these trees as have died are more easily distinguished. In many cases when a larch 
or a fir loses its top, either by dying down, or the biting of hares and rabbits, the most vigorous lateral branch 
is elected by nature to supply the deficiency, which by degrees assumes the character of an original top. 
Pines and larches, therefore, which have fresh lateral branches, are not to be displaced, although they 
have lost their tops. Indeed, no tree in the forest, or other plantation, ought to be removed, until there 
be no room left to hope for its recovery. If the filling up of plantations be left undone till the trees have 
risen to fifteen or twenty feet in height, their roots are spread far abroad, and their tops occupy a consi- 
derable space. The introduction of two or three plants, from a foot to three feet in height, at a particular 
deficient place, can never, in the above circumstances, be attended with any advantage. Such plants may 
indeed become bushes, and may answer well enough in the character of underwood, but they will for ever 
remain unfit for any other purpose. It is highly improper, then, to commence the filling up of hard-wood 
plantations before the third year after planting ; or to protract it beyond the fifth or the sixth. March is 
the proper season for this operation. [Ptant. Kalend. 295.) 

6884. Pruning is the most important operation of tree culture, since on it, in almost 
every case, depends the ultimate value, and in most cases, the actual bulk of timber pro- 
duced. In the purposes of pruning, as for most otlier practical purposes, the division of 
trees into resinous or frondose-branched trees, and into non-resinous or branchy-headed 
sorts, is of use. The main object in pruning frondose-branched trees is to produce a trvmk 
with clean bark and sound timber;, that in pruning branchy-stemmed trees, is prin- 
cipally to direct the ligneous matter of the tree into the main stem or trunk, and also to 
produce a clean stem and sound timber, as in the other case. The branches of frondose 
trees, unless in extraordinary cases, never acquire a timber size, but rot off from the 
bottom upwards, as the tree advances in height and age ; and, therefore, whether pruned 
or not, the quantity of timber in the form of trunk is the same. The branches of the 
other division of trees, however, when left to spread out on every side, often acquire a 
timber-like size ; and as the ligneous matter they contain is in general far from being 
so valuable as when produced in the form of a straight stem, the loss by not pruning ofF 
their side branches, or preventing them from acquiring a timber-like size, is evident. On 
the other hand, when they are broken off by accident, or rot off by being crowded toge- 
ther, the timber of the trunk, though in these cases increased in quantity, is rendered 
knotty and rotten in quality. 



Book III. 



CULTURE, &c. OF PLANTATIONS. 



959 




658 



fi885. Wifk rcsprct to ihc mani\cr of pruning, wliere straight timber is the object, both classes in their 
infancy, as Sang observes, should be tealherecl from the bottom upwards, keeiiing the tops light and 
spiral, something resembling a young larch. {Jig. 657. a) The proportion of their tops should be gradually 
diminished, year by year, till about their twentieth 
year, when they should occupy a third part of the 
lieight of tiie i)lant ; that is, if the tree be thirty feet 
liigh, the top should be ten feet {b). In all cases in 
pruning off tiie branches, the utmost care must be 
taken not to leave any stumps sticking out, but to 
cut them in to the quick. It is only by this means 
that clean timber can be procured for the joiner ; or 
sightly smooth-stemmed trees to please the eye. It 
is a very general practice to leave snags or stumps 
(c) J before the bole can be enlai-ged sultlciently to 
cover these, many years must elapse ; the stumps in 
the meantime become rotten ; and the consequence 
is timber which when sawn up (d) is only fit for fiiel. 

6886. Pontet/ says, " The sap of a tree may be consi- 
dered as the raw material furnished by nature ; and 
man, the manufactiu-cr who moulds it into the form 
most useful for his purpose. A moderate quantity of 
leaves and small wood is necessary to evej-y tree ; but 
all above that quantity are of no use to the plant, and 
of little value to its owner." {Forest Pruiier, 152, 
155.) 

6887. Pruning for ornament or beauty must be 
guided in its operations by what that beauty is. If 
it is the beauty of art, then the trees may requis-e to 
be cut or clipped into the shape of animals {fig.34^5.) ; 
or inanimate natural objects, as mounds of earth, 
mushrooms ; or geometric forms, triangles, globes, 
cones ; or walls, columns, arcades, vases, arbors, 
temples, theatres, or other architectural or sculptural compositions, {fig. 658.) The dwarfing of trees is 
also another kind of artificial beauty, much practised by the Chinese; and though the habit be kept vip 
chiefly by withholding nourishment ; yet. • - ^^^^ , 
the dwarf is produced by ringing a branch; 
enveloping it in a ball of loam ; amputat- 
ing it when it has mode roots ; and then 
pinching ofF all exuberance of growth so 
as to kee)) it into shape. {Livingstone, 
in Horf. Trans, iv. 224.) 
^"6888. If natural beauty is desired, then 
the pruning must be rather negative than 
positive ; the object being to let the tree 
assume its natural shape, or, as Sang de- 
scribes it, " express its own nature." 
All that man can do, therefore, in the 
way of pruning for this object, is to assist 
a plant of the tree kind to express the 
characteristics of a tree ; that is, a pow- 
erful trunk and ample spreading head, 
which distinguishes it from a shrub; and 
this he does by clearing a part of the tree 
of its side branches ; and by avoiding to 
train up a shrub with a single stem like a diminutive tree, 
importance of the use of leaves must never be lost sight of: 

sap, but to elaborate it when propelled to them-, and thus form the extract or food taken in by the plant, 
mto a fluid analogous to blood, and which is returned so formed by the leaves into the inner bark and soft 
wood. It must be a very nice point, therefore, to determine the quantity of branches or leaves that should 
be left on each tree ; and if no more are left than what are necessary, then in the case of accidents to them 
from insects, the progress of the tree will be doubly retarded. Experience alone can determine these 
things. Both Pontey and Sang agree that strength is gained as effectually by a few branches to form a 
head as by many." 

6889. The general seasons of pruning are winter and spring, and for the gean midsummer, as it is found 
to gum very much at any other season. Pontey says, " as to the proper season for pruning, there is only 
one difficulty ; and that is discovering the wrong one, or the particular time when trees will bleed. Only 
two trees have been found which bleed uniformly at certain seasons, namely, the sycamore and firs, which 
bleed as soon as^the sap begins to move. In spring pruning,, desist when this takes place." As a general 
rule, he thinks " summer preferable to winter pruning ; because, in proportion as wounds are made early 
they heal so much the more in the same season." {Forest Pruner, 236.) 

6890. Sang suspends pruning from the end of February to the middle of July, but carries it on during, 
every other month of the year ; the gean, or any other tree very apt to gum, he prunes only in July and 
August. {Plant. Kal. 2Q^.) 

68 9 L With respect to ike inij^lements to be used, Sang observes, " In every case where 
the knife is capable of lopping off the branch in question, namely, in the pruiiing of infant 
plants, it is the only instrument necessary. All other branches should be taken off' by the 
saw. A hatchet, or a chisel, should never be used. Every wound on the stem, or bole, 
should be quite into the quick, that is, to the level and depth of the bark ; nor should 
the least protuberance be left. The branch to be lopped off" by the saw should, in all 
cases, be notched or slightly cut on the under side, in order to prevent tlie bark from 
being torn in the fall ; and when the branch has been removed, tlio edges of the wound, 
if anywise ragged, should be pared smooth with the knife. If the tree be vigorous, na- 
ture will soon cover the wound over with bark, without the addition of any plaster to ex- 
elude the air. In the shortening of a strong branch, the position of which is pretty 
upright, it should be observed to draw the saw obliquely across it, in such a manner as 
that the face of the wound shall be incapable of retaining moisture ; and afterwards to 
smooth the edges of the bark w?'th the knife." {Plant. KaL 18L) In every case where 




In attending to these instructions the great 
this is not, as Pontey asserts, to attract the 



PoO PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part III. 

the branches are too large for the knife, Pontey prefers the saw, as the best and most ex- 
])editioiis instrument ; and one, the use of which is more easily acquired by a laborer 
than that of either the bill or axe. In " large work" he uses the common carpenter's 
saw ; for smaller branches, one with somewhat finer teeth, with the plate of steel, and 
about twenty inches long. Having stated what is general in pruning, the next thing is 
to submit some particular applications of the art to resinous and non-resinous timber- 
trees, copse- woods, osier-holts, hedges, and hedge-rows, and trees in parks. 

6392. Resinous trees, Pontey and Sang agree, should not be pruned at so early an age as the non-resin- 
ous kinds. Sang commences about the sixth or eighth year, according to their strength or vigor, and 
removes no more than one or two tiers of branches at once. Pontey, when the plants are about eight feet 
high, gives the first pruning by " displacing two or at most three tiers of the lower branches ; after which, 
intervals of three years might elapse between the prunings ; never displacing more than two tiers at once, 
except more shall prove dead." (Forest Pruner, 2U4.) Sang judiciously observes, " Excessive pruning, 
either of firs, larches, or deciduous trees of any sort, is highly injurious, not only to the health of the 
plant, but to the perfection of the wood. If a sufficient number of branches are not left on the young 
plant to produce abundance of leaves, perfectly to conroct its juice, the timber will be loose in its texture, 
and liable to premature decay." {Plant. Kal. 182.) The opinions of Nicol and Monteath are at variance 
with those of Pontey and Sang, as to pruning resinous trees. Nicol advises leaving snags {Pract. Plant. 
213.), and Monteath {For. Guide, 45.) says, " Never cut off a branch till it has begun to rot, as the bleeding 
of a live branch will go far to kill the tree." 

6893. Non-rcsinous trees. Sang observes, " should be pruned betimes, or rather from their infancy, and 
thenceforward at intervals of one or at most two years. If the pruning of young forest-trees is performed 
only at intervals of eight or ten years, the growth is unnecessarily thrown away, and wounds are inflicted 
which will ever after remain blemishes in the timber ; whereas, if the superfluous, or competing branches 
had been removed annually, and before they attained a large size, the places from which they issued 
would be imperceptible, or at least not hurtful to the timber, when it came to the hands of the artist. 
The pruning of all deciduous trees should be begun at the top, or at least those branches which are to be 
removed from thence should never be lost sight of Having fixed upon what may be deemed the best 
shoot for a leader, or that by which the stem is most evidently to be elongated and enlarged, every other 
branch on the plant should be rendered subservient to it, either by removing them instantly, or by short- 
ening them. Where a plant has branched into two or more rival stems, and there are no other very 
strong branches upon it, nothing more is required, than simply to lop oflT the weakest clean by the bole, 
leaving only the strongest and most promising shoots. If tiiree or four shoots or branches be contending 
for the ascendancy, they should, in like manner, be lopped off, leaving only the most promising. If any 
of the branches which have been left further down on the bole of the plant at former prunings have 
become very strong, or have extended their extremities far, they should either be taken clean off by the 
bole, or be shortened at a proper distance from it ; observing always to shorten at a lateral twig of consi- 
derable length. It is of importance that the tree be equally poised ; and therefore if it have stronger 
branches on the one side than the other, they should either be removed or be shortened. Thus, a pro- 
perly trained tree, under twenty feet in height, should appear light and spiral, from within a yard or two 
of the ground to tlie upper extremity ; its stem being furnished with a moderate number of twigs ani 
small branches, in order to detain the sap, and circulate it more equally through the plant. Trees of this 
size, standing in a close plantation, after being properly formed, will require much less attention ; indeed, 
subsequent prunings will mostly consist in keeping their leading shoots single. From the want of air, 
their lateral branches will not be allowed to extend, but will remain as twigs upon the stem. These, 
however, frequently become dead branches ; and if such were allowed to remain at all on the trees, they 
would infallibly produce blemishes calculated greatly to diminish the value of the timber : hence the im- 
propriety of allowing any branch to die on the bole of a tree ; indeed, all branches should be removed 
when they are alive ; such a method, to our knowledge, being the only sure one to make good timber. 
From these circumstances, an annual pruning, or at least an annual examination, of all forests, is neces- 
sary." {Plant. Kal. 180.) 

6894. Heading down such non-resinom trees as stole we have already (6829.) stated to be 
an important operation. After the trees have been three or four years planted. Sang 
directs that such as have not begun to grow ft-eely should be headed down to within 
three or four inches of the ground. The cut must be made with the pruning-knife in a 
sloping direction, with one effort. Great care should be taken not to bend over the tree 
in the act of cutting. By so bending, the root may be split, a thing which too often 
happens. The operation should be performed in March, and not at an earlier period of 
the season, because the wounded part might receive much injury from the severe weather 
in January and February, and the expected shoot be thereby prevented from rising so 
strong and vigorous. [Plant. Kalend. 297.) Bufibn, in a memorial on the culture of 
woods, presented to the French government in 1742, says he has repeated this experi- 
ment so often, that he considers it as the most useful practice he knows in the culture of 
woods. 

6895. For the purpose of pi-odiicing bends for ship-timber, various modes of pruning have been proposed. 
According to Pontey, " little is hazarded bysa5ing, thatif plenty of long, clean, straight, free-grown trees 
could be got, boiling and a screw apparatus would form bends," Monteath, a timber valuator of great 
experience, and in extensive practice, says, the value of the oak, the broad-leaved elm, and Spanish 
chestnut, depends a good deal on their being crooked, as they are all used in ship-building. He says he 
has seen trees successfully trained into crooked shapes of great value, in the following manner : " If you 
have an oak, an elm, or chestnut, that has two stems, as it were, striving for the superiority, lop or prune 
off the straightest stem ; and if a tree that is not likely to be of such value be standing on that side, to 
which the stem left seems to incline to a horizontal position, take away the tree, and thus give the other 
every chance of growing horizontally. At this time it will be necessary to take away a few of the perpendi- 
cular shoots off the horizontal branch ; and, indeed, if these branches, which is sometimes the case in these 
trees, seem to contend, take away most of them ; but if they do not, it is better at this time not to prune 
these trees over-much, except the crooked shoots on the horizontal branch, till they arrive at the height 
of fifteen or even twenty feet. By this time it will be easily seen what kind of tree it is likely to form ; 
and, if it inclines to grow crooked, lighten a little the top of the tree, by taking off a few of the crooked 
branches on the straighter side, allowing all the branches to remain on the side to which the tree inclines 
to crook, to give it more weight, and to draw most of the sap or juice that way, and it will naturally 
incline more to the crook ; at the same time clearing away any other tree on the crooked side, that may 
be apt, with the wind, to whip the side of the tree to which it inclines to crook, also taking away such 
tree of less value as may prevent it from spreading out to the one side more than to the other." He adds, 



Book III, 



CULTURE, &c. OF PLANTATIONS. 



961 



« I havp myself tried the experiment with several oak-trees at about twelve feet high that were a little 
incHned to crook, and that had also a main branch inclined to a horizontal position. In the course of less 
Hian twenty years I had the pleasure of seeing some of these ^ery trees grow so very crooked that the 
branch would work in with the main stem or body of the tree, to a complete knee, or square, which is the 
most ^'.luabii' of all trees. And as ten trees of crooked oak are required for one straight one, it is of the 
most essential consequence to have crooked oak-trees ; and, besides, an oak-tree, properly crooked, that 
will answer for a large knee — say the main branch, to be fit to work in with the body or trunk of the tree 
without much waste of wood, is nearly double in value to the same number of straight trees ; and, 
indeed, knees of oak are extremely scarce, and difficult to be got." 

6S96. Pontey " knows of no way by which bends of tolerable scantlings (knees excepted) can be pro- 
duced with certainty and little trouble, but from a side branch kept in a bent position by the branches of 
another tree or trees overhanging its stem," {Forest Pruner, 174.) 

6897. Copjnce-woods, in so far as gi-own for poles or bark, require pmning on the 
same principle as timber trees, in order to modify the ligneous matter into stem, and 
produce clean bai-k. In as far as they are grown for fence-wood, fuel, or besom-spray, 
no pruning is required, 

5S98. Osier-holts only require the laterals to be pinched off the shoot* intended for hoops ; those for the 
basket-maker seldom produce any. The stools also require to be kept free from dead wood and stinted 
knotty protuberances. 

6899. Hedge-rows require side pruning, or switching, from tlieir first planting, so as 
gradually to mould them into " the wedge shape, tapering from bottom to top on both 
sides equally, till they meet in a point at the top. Two feet at bottom is a sufficient 
breadth for a five-feet hedge : a greater or a less height should have the bottom wider or 
nan-ower accordingly. In dressing young hedges, either of the deciduous or evergreen, 
kinds, tlie sides only should be cut till the hedge arrive at the proposed height, unless it 
be necessaiy, for the sake of shelter, to cut their tops over, in order to make the hedge 
thicker of branches. Such cutting of the upright shoots, however, is not of any very 
great use in tliis respect ; because every hawthorn-hedge sends out a number of side 
shoots, which, if encouraged, by keeping the top narrow as above, will make it abund- 
antly thick." {Sajig, 447.) In pruning hedges, some use shears; but the hedge-bill 
{Jig' 115.) is the most proper instrument, and prunes a smooth unfractured section, not 
so apt to throw out a number of small useless shoots as generally follow the bruised cut 
of the shears. {Jig. 125.) 

6900. Hedge-row trees require to be pruned to a tall, erect, clean stem, as at once 
producing more timber and doing least injury to the ground under their drip and shade, 

6901. Trees in strips for skelter, or screens for concealment, ought to be furnished with branches 
from the bottom upwards ; unless undergrowth supply this deficiency. Wliere this is not the case, care 
should be had that the trees be pruned into conical shapes, so as that the lower branches may be as little as 
possible excluded from the influence of the weather by the upper ones. 

6902. Trees fw shade, where shelter from winds is not wanting, should be pruned to ample spreading 
heads with naked stems ; the stems should be of such a height that the sun's rays, at mid-day, in mid- 
summer, may not fall within some yards of the base of the trunk j thus leaving, under the tree, as well as 
on its shady side, a space for the repose of men or cattle. 

6903. Trees in paries may be considered as chiefly ornamental ; and for this purpose 
should be left with larger heads than such as are grown chiefly for timber. Tlie height 
to which the stems are cleared of branches should vary according to the kind of tree 
{Jig. 659. a to e) ; and hollies, thorns, and such shrubs as are left untouched, or that are 




protected by enclosure from the cropping of cattle {f,g), should be left entirely to 
themselves. In parks, where no pruning whatever is given to the timber-trees by man, 
we find they are all pruned or browsed to a certain height by cattle : this adds to their 
character as trees, but in flat surfaces forms a disagreeable repetition of the horizontal 
line in which they stand. To break this browsing line, pruning is a simple, obvious, and 
fFectual resource. 

6904. Sonte trees in pleasure-grounds and lawns, where no cattle ever come, may be allowed to ex- 
tend their branches so as they may almost recline on the turf ; others may be pruned to different heights, 
according to their natures. Limes, planes, cedars, and firs have a fine effect with their branches depend- 
ing from their trunks ; and give an idea of seclusion and exclusive consecration to man, highly charac- 
teristic of what is called pleasure-ground. 

6905. The properly thinning out of plantations, Sang observes, " is a matter of the 
first importance in their culture. However much attention be paid to the article of 
pruning, if the plantation be left too thick, it will be inevitably rtiined. ^ A circulation of 
air, neither too great nor too small, is essential to the welfare of the whole. This should 
not be wanting at any period of the growth of the plantation ; but, in cases where it has 
been prevented by neglect, it should not be admitted all at once, or suddenly. Open- 
ing a plantation too much at once, is a sure way to destroy its healtli and vigor, la 

3_Q 



962 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



thinning, the consideration which should in all cases predominate, is to cut for the good 
of the timber left, disregarding the value of the thinnings. For, if we have it in our 
choice to leave a good, and take away a bad plant or kind, and if it be necessary that one 
of the two should fall, the only question should be, by leaving which of them shall we do 
most justice to the laudable intention of raising excellent and full-sized timber for the 
benefit of ourselves and of posterity ? The worst tree should never be left, but with the 
view of filling up an accidental vacancy." 

6906. In thinning mixed plantations, the removing of the nurses is the first object which generally 
claims attention. Phis, however, should be cautiously performed ; otherwise the intention of nursing 
might, after all, be thwarted. If the situation be much exposed, it will be prudent to retain more nurses, 
although the plantation itself be rather crowded, than where the situation is sheltered. In no case, how, 
ever, should the nurses be suffered to overtop or whip the plants intended for a timber crop; and for this 
reason, in bleak situations, and when perhaps particular nurse-plants can hardly be spared, it may some- 
times be necessary to prune off the branches from one side entirely. At subsequent thinnings, such pruned or 
disfigured plants are first to be removed ; and then those which, from their situation, may best be dispensed 
with. At what period of the age of the plantation all tiie nurses are to be removed, cannot easily be de- 
termined ; and, indeed, if the nurses chiefly consist of larches, it may wiUi propriety be said, that they 
should never be totally removed, while any of the other kinds remain. For, besides that this plant is ad- 
mirably calculated to compose part of a beautiful mixture, it is excelled by few kinds, perhaps by none, as 
a timber-tree. 

6907. But ivhcn the nurses consist of inferior kinds, such as the mountain ash and the Scots pine, they 
should generally be all removed by the time that the plantation arrives at tlie height of fifteen or twenty 
feet, in order that the timber-trees may not, by their means, be drawn up too weak and slender. Before 
this time, it may probably be necessary to thin out a part of the other kinds. The least valuable, and the 
Ijast thriving plants, should first be condemned, provided their removal occasion no blank or chasm j but 
where tliis would happen, they shoukl be allowed to stand till tlie next, or other subsequent revision. At 
what distance of time this revision should take place, cannot easily be deteiTnined ; as the matter must 
very much depend on the circumstances of soil, shelter, and the state of health in which the jjlants may 
be. In general the third season after will be soon enough ; and if the plantation be from thirty to forty 
years old, and in a thriving state, it will reqiure to be revised again, in most cases, within seven years. But 
one invariable rule ought to prevail in all cases, and in all situations ; to allow no plant to overtop or whip 
another Respect should be had to the distance of the tops, not to the distance of the roots of the trees ; 
for some kinds require much more head-room than others ; and all trees do not rise perjiendicular to their 
roots, even on the most level or sheltered ground. 

6908. With 7-espcct to fht- final distance to which trees standing in a mixed plantation sliould be 
thinned, it is hardly possible to prescribe fixed rules ; circumstances of health, vigor, the spreading nature 
of the tree, and the like, must determine. "Whether the trees are to be suffered to stand till full-grown ; 
which of the kinds the soil seems best fitted for ; whether the ground be flat or elevated ; and whether the 
situation be exposed or shelttred, are all circumstances whicli must influence the determination of the 
ultimate distance at'wliich the tcees are to stand. It may, however, be said in general, that if trees be al- 
lowed a distance of from twenty-five to thirty feet, according to their kinds and manner of growth, they 
will have room enough to become larger timber. 

6909. Plantations of Scots pine, if the plants have been put in at three or three and a half feet apart, wil\ 
require little care until the trees bo ten or twelve feet high. It is necessary to keep such plantations 
thick in the early stages of their growth, in order that the trees may tower the faster, and push fewer 
and weaker side branches. Indeed, a fir or soft wood plantation should be kept thicker at any period 
of its growth than any of those consisting of hard wood and nurses already jpentioned ; and it may 
sometimes be proper to prune up certain plants as nurses, as hinted at above for nurses in a mixed 
plantation. Those pruned up trees are of course to bo reckoned temporary plants, and are aften^'ards 
to be the first thinned out: next to these, all plants which have lost their leaders by accident should be 
condcmnetl ; because such will never regain them so far as afterwards to become stately timber; provided that 
the removal of these mutilated trees cause no material blank in the plantation. Care should betaken 
to prevent whipping; nor should the plantation be thinned much at any one time, lest havoc be made 
by prevailing winds ; an evil which many, through inadvertency, have thus incurred. This precaution 
seems the more necessary, inasmuch as Scots pine, intended for useful large timber, are presumed never 
to be planted except in exposed situations and thin soils. At forty years of age, a good medium dis- 
tance for the trees may be about fifteen feet every way. It may be worthy of remark, however, that 
after a certain period, perhaps by the time that the plantation arrives at the age of fifty or sixty years, 
it will be proper to thin more freely, in order to harden the timber; and tliat, then, this may be done 
with less risk of danger, from the strength the trees will have acquired, than at an earlier period; but 
still it should be done gradually. 

6910. Plantatio?is of spruce and silver firs, intended for large useful timber, should be kept much in 
the manner above stated, both in their infancy and middle ago. As already remarked, planting and 
keeping them as thick as is consistent with their health, is the best moans of producing t.all, straight, 
clean stems, and valuable timber. When planted for screens or for ornament, they require a different 
treatment ; which will be noticed in the proper place. 

6911. To larch-plnntations, the above observations will also aj^ply; and indeed tlicy are applicable 
to plantations of all kinds of resinous trees. It may be proper "here to remark, tliat the exposed 
margins of all young plantations should be kept thicker than the interior. The extent to which this 
rule should be carried, must be regulated according to the degree of exposure of the situation, the age 
of the plants, the tenderness of the kinds, and other circumstances^ 

6912. The jrroper seasons for thinning are autumn, or very early in spring, where the 
trees are to be taken up by the root and replanted elsewhere; and winter for thinning for 
timber and fuel ; but such trees as are valuable for their bark should be left untouched 
till the sap rises in April or May. Copse-woods require thinning when young, like 
other plantations, and when once established the stools require to be gone over the second 
year after cutting, and all superfluous suckers and shoots removed. Tliis operation 
should be repeated annually, or every two or three years, in connection with pruning, till 
within three or four years of tlie general fall of the crop. 

6913. Ornamental plantations require to be thinned on principles agreeable to the intention with which 
they were planted. In the artificial forms, the figure must be carefully preserved, as the main object ; 
and in plantations in imitation of nature, the principle of grouping and connection must be kept steadily 
in view. A thin part is to be rendered thinner, and a thick group, or constellation of plants not opened 
wp, but merely deprived of such trees as are becoming smothered by the rest. 



Book III. 



CULTURE, &c. OF PLANTATIONS. 



963 



6914. Improving neglected 2^l<^>^tations. Though it has been more or less fashionable, 
for upwards of a century, to form plantations ; yet it has been also so generally the 
custom to neglect their future culture, that by far the greater proportion of the surface 
covered with trees in Britain may be considered as neglected or mismanaged. The ar- 
tificial strips and masses have generally never been thinned or pruned ; and the natural 
woods and copse-woods improperly thinned, or cut over. It is often a difficult matter 
to make much of such cases ; and always a work of considerable time. " Trees," Sang 
observes, " however hardy their natures may be, which have been reared in a thick 
plantation, and consequently have been very much sheltered, have their natures so far 
changed, that if they be suddenly exposed to a circulation of air, which under different 
circumstances, would have been salubrious and useful to them, will become sickly and 
die. Hence the necessity of admitting the air to circulate freely among trees in" a 
thick plantation, only gradually and with great caution. To prevent a misfortune of 
this kind, a plantation which has become close and crowded, having been neglected 
from the time of planting till perhaps its twentieth year, should have only some of the 
smallest and most unsightly plants removed : one perhaps, in every six or eight, in the 
first season ; in the following season, a like number may be removed ; and in two or 
three years after, it should be gone over again, and so on, till it be sufficiently thinned. 
It will be proper to commence the thinning, as above, at the interior of the plantation, 
leaving the skirts thicker till the last ; indeed, the thinning of the skirts of such a plant- 
ation should be protracted to a great length of time." With thinning, pruning to a 
certain extent should also be carried on. " If the plantation," Sang observes , con- 
sists of pines and firs; all the rotten stumps, decayed branches, and the like, must be cut 
off close by the bole. It will be needful, however, to be cautious not to inflict too many 
wounds upon the tree in one season ; the removing of these, therefore, should be the 
work of two or three years, rather than endanger the health of the plantation. After 
the removal of these from the boles of the firs and larches, proceed every two or three 
years, but with a sparing hand, to displace one or perhaps two tiers of the lowermost 
live branches, as circumstances may direct ; being careful to cut close by the trunk, as 
above noticed. In a plantation of hard wood, under the above circumstances, the trees 
left for the ultimate crop are not to be pruned so much at first as might otherwise be 
required ; only one or two of their competing branches are to be taken away, and even 
these with caution. If it be judged too much for the first operation to remove them en- 
tirely, they may be shortened, to prevent the progress of the competition ; and the re- 
maining parts may be removed in the following season ; at which time, as often observed, 
they must be cut close by the bole." [Plant. JTal. 467.) 

6915. The operation of thinning and pruning, thickening or filling up, or renewing portions that cannot 
be profitably recovered, should thus go on year after year, as apijearances may direct, on the general 
principles of tree culture. And for this purpose the attentive observation and reflection of a judicious 
manager will be worth more than directions which must be given with so much latitude. Pontey has 
noticed various errors in Kennedy's Treatise on Planting, and even in Sang's Knlendar, on the simple 
subject of distances, which have originated in their giving directions for anticipated cases, which had 
never come within their experience. " Most people," he says, "take it for granted, that if trees stand 
three feet apart, they have only to take out the half, to make the distances six feet, though to do that, 
they must take down three times as many as they leave. By the same rule again, most people would 
suppose, that twelve feet distance was only the double of six ; but 
the square of the latter is only thirty-six, and that of the former one 
hundred and forty-four, or four times the latter ; so that to bring six 
feet distances to twelve, three trees must be removed for every one 
left." {Profitable Planter, 256. ; Forest Primer, 21.) 

6916. Copse-woods are sometimes improved by turning them into 
woods, which requires nothing more than a judicious selection and 
reservation of those shoots from the stools which are strongest, and 
which spring more immediately from the collar. But a greater im- 
provement of copse-woods consists in cutting over the overgrown and 
protuberant stools, by the surface of the soil {fig. 660. a, b, c, d), which 
has been found by Monteath completely to regenerate them. The 
operation is performed with a saw, in a slanting direction, and the 
young shoots being afterwards properly thinned and pruned, soon 
establish themselves securely on the circumference of large, and per- 
haps, rotten-hearted roots. {Fo?-ester's Guide, 60.) 

6917. Hedge-rows are often neglected, and, like larger plantatiozis, require renovation 
by cutting down and filling in vacancies, and by cultivating the soil at their roota. 
Hedges, Sang observes, w^hich have been long neglected, shoot up to a great height 
like trees, become naked at bottom, and occupy too much ground, at least for lands in 
a state of high cultivation. The best method of reducing such to a proper size, and of 
forming them into an immediate fence, is by plashing. 

6918. Plashing. This consists in selecting the strongest and straightest shoots. 
These are to be dressed up and headed down to four feet, and in such a way that the 
tops of the whole may range in a neat line. These are called the stakes; and, when 
they are deficient, either in strength or number, recourse must be had to artificial stakes, 
which must be driven in to stand firm, and supply the deficiency of natural ones. 
Having proceeded thus far in preparing the hedge for plashing, the hedger is to begin 

3 Q 2 




964 



PRACTICTE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



at one end, and bend down as close as possible the remaining pliable branches, crossing 
them in the manner of basket-work. Such as are too strong to be bent, may be cut 
half through with the bill, which will render them pliable enough to be used ; and 
such as are not required for any of the above-mentioned purposes, must be cut off close 
to the ground. After the plashing is finished, the hedge should be dressed smooth on 
both sides by the switching-bill or shears. There is another method of plashing, 
which has been suggested as an improvement upon the foregoing ; and that is, by not 
cutting any of tlie stems over as stakes, but wea\-ing in the 'tops along with the other 
branches. This method will not have so immediate a tendency to bare the lower parts 
of the hedge by the growth of the top, as when any of the plants are cut over for stakes ; 
but still, at the bendings, the growth will rush out with vigor ; besides this plan is at- 
tended with more labor. Indeed, the best security against baring the bottom of a 
plashed hedge, is by cutting over by the surface as many of the plants as can be at all 
spared ; and the shoots arising from these ■v\-ilJ soon thicken the hedge at bottom. 
Plashing can only be effectually and handsomely performed, when there is a good por- 
tion of long, pliable, and well feathered branches, and where the hedge has, if not youth, 
at least vigor, on its side. After the plashing is completed, the ditch is to be scoured 
out, and the bottom of the hedge cleaned and dressed up, in the same neat manner as 
if all were new work. 

6919. Cuifhig over o!d hedges is a. much less expensive method of reclaiming or renewing, than any of 
the above ; aini, perhaps, in most cases, may be a more eligible one • saving when an immediate fence is 
the object. In cutting down an old hedge, there is certainly a very fit opportunity of laying the found- 
ation of a complete and durable fence. The nature of the cutting must be regulated by circumstances, ac- 
cording to the age, the strength, or the closeness of the hedge, and whether it have been planted in single 
or double rows. If the hedge in question be pretty vigorous and branching towards the bottom, and if the 
stems stand regularly and closely together, it may be brought into due subjection, without being cut down 
to the ground. In this case, the sides are first to be switched up with the hook, not altogether close to the 
stems, but within about a foot of them on each side at bottom, tapering up close at top, which should be 
four or five feet high, according to the general height of the hedge : but if the hedge be thin at bottom, it 
■will be advisable to cut more in, in order to make it bushy from the ground upwards. If the hedge is not 
regularly close from end to end, but ragged, and full of gaps, the best method is to cut it over, within 
eight or ten inches of the ground, and to fill up the gaps with stout well rooted plants of the same kind ; 
or the gaps may be mended by the following method : — Let one of the stoutest thorn-plants next to the 
gap be reserved' uncut, and the space be digged over, or it may require to be filled up with rich earth to 
within three inches of the height of the top of the ditch. Then having cleaned the thorn-plant of all side 
branches or twigs, cut it half through at the height of the earth in the gap, on the side farthest from it, and 
lay it down upon the earth, securmg the most distant end from rising up by a hooked pin ; then cover it 
all over with rich earth, so as to make it the general height of the top of the ditch : and the thorn-plant so 
laid down and covered, will take root, and send up a profusion of shoots over its whole length. If one plant 
will not reach the whole extent of the gap, one at each side probably will The surface of the bank should 
be pointed up, and the ditch scoured as above directed in plashing. 

6920. In other cases, when the hedge is getting thin below or too tall, and when the stems are placed 
regularly within eight or ten inches of one another, and where it is necessary to retain a fence and at the 
same time to cut so as to have a supply of young shoots from the bottom, the plan to he followed is to 
cut alternately the one part to within eight or ten inches of the bottom, and the other at four feet high, 
dressing the bank and scouring the ditch, as directed above. In cases where two rows of quicks have 
been planted, the front one is to be cut bv the surface, and the other at four or five feet high, as circum- 
stances may require. i 

6921. Neglected hedge-row timber may be improved by pruning according to its age. 
Blakey recommends what he calls foreshortening, or cutting in, as the best method 
both for young and old hedge-row timber. " Tliis operation is performed by shortening 
the over-luxuriant side branches \\"~^V^' fK^ 

[Jig. 661. a), but not to cut them li A^>^. L 

to a stump, as in snag pruning ; 
on the contrary, the top only of 
the branch should be cut off, and 
the amputation effected imme- 
diately above where an auxiliary 
side shoot springs from the branch ■ 
on which the operation is to be 
performed {b) ; tliis may be at the 
distance of two, four, or any other 
number of feet from the stem of 
the tree ; and suppose the auxi- rrTjjrrrnvjj^ 
liary branch which is left (when 
the top of the branch is cut off ) is also over-luxuriant, or looks' unsightly, it should also 
be shortened at its sub-auxiliary branch, in the same manner as before described. The 
branches of trees pruned in this manner are always kept within due bounds ; they do not 
extend over the adjoining land to the injury of the occupier, at least, not until the stem 
of the tree rises to a height out of the reach of pruning, when the top branches can do 
comparatively little injury to tlie land. By adopting this system of pruning, the bad 
effects of close pruning on old trees, and snag pruning on young ones, will be avmded ; 
the country will be ornamented ; and the community at large, as well as individuals, 
benefited." 




Book 111. 



CULTURE, &c. OF PLANTATIONS. 



965 



6922. Hedge-rows 'frequently require to be altered in direction to improve the form, 
or increase the contents of farm-enclosures, (fig. 662.) Generally, and especially in 

662 

J. \ 




flat arable lands, this is done by eradicating such as are in unsuitable directions (a), and 
substituting others (6) in parallel, or at least in straight lines ; but in rising grounds, and 
where the surface will be improved by shelter, it frequently happens that a crooked 
hedge is superseded by two straight ones, and the interval (c) filled up with plant- 
ation. The advantage of straight-lined fields to a farmer is very considerable ; and when 
this object is procured in the latter way, an improvement is produced both useful and 
ornamental. 

6928. Ornamental plantations are no less frequently neglected than such as are considered chiefly useful. 
Clumps, belts, and screens which have become thin, because they have not been thinned, are almost every 
where to be met with. " In those neglected plantations," says Lord Meadowbank, " where daylight may 
be seen for miles, through naked stems, chilled and contracted by the cold, the mischief might, perhaps, 
be partially remedied, by planting young trees round the extremities, which having room to spread luxu- 
riantlj', would exclude the winds, and the internal spaces might be thickened up with oak, silver firs, 
beeches, and such other trees as thrive with a small portion of light. When once the wind is excluded, the 
weakest of the old trees might be taken out, and the others left to profit by the . 
shelter and space that is afforded." (^Life of Lord Kaimes, hy Tytle7:) One of the ^^^^^x-J'-Ji 
most hopeless cases of improvement in this department is that of an old clump of Jll^' aTv^X' ^^'^'^^^ 
Scotch pines {fig. 663.), from which scarcely any trees can be taken without risking "'^ 0M 

the failure of the remainder. The only way is to add to it, either by some scattered ^^N-A V!;. '* 
groups in one direction, or in various directions. Where a clump consists of hard \^^^c ^ 
wood, either entirely or in part, it may sometimes, if effect permits, be reduced to '.^"^^MfiS^ 
a group, by gradually reducing the number of the trees. The group left should be f%il 
composed of two or three trees of at least two species, different in bulk, and some- €^2= 
what in habit, in order that the combmed mass may not have the formality of the •<Mf)h/.„„ 
clump. 3 

6924. Scattered trees in ornamental scenery otherwise of very good shapes, and very 
well managed as to pruning, destroying the browsing line, &c. individually, are often, 
from want of thinning in some places, and thickening in ethers, deficient in massiness 





{Jig' 664.) ; the obvious remedy is to thin out some fa), and plant others, so as to de- 
stroy the straggling non-cooperating appearance which such trees present, and produce 
something of grouping, massiveness, and character. [Jig. 665. ) 




6925. Wounds, bruises, casualties, and defects of trees. Small wounds, such as are 
required to be made by judicious pruning, easily heal up of themselves ; large wounds, 
by amputations of branches, above six inches' diameter, should, if possible, never be 
made. Even wounds of six inches' diameter, or under, will heal quicker by the appli- 
cation of any material which excludes the air and preserves the wood from corruption; 
and we a^ee with Sang, in recommending coal-tar, or the liquor produced from coals 

3 Q 3 



966 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part.III. 



in manufecturing gas. It is, however, less favorable to the progress of the bark over 
the wound than a coating of clay or cow-dung, covered with moss to keep it moist. 
Pontey recommends putty and two coats of paint over it. In case the wood, at a bruised 
or amputated place, have by neglect become already corrupted, the rotten or dead wood 
is to be pared out quite into the quick ; and the wound is then to be dressed with tar, or 
clay covered with a piece of mat, sacking, or moss. A wound, hollowed out as above, 
may at first appear an unsightly blemish ; but, in subsequent years, nature will lay the 
coats of wood, under the new-formed bark, thicker at that place j and probably may, in 
time, fill it up to be even with the genera] surface of the tree. 

6926. All fractures, by whatever means produced, are to be managed as the circumstances of the case 
require. If a large branch be broken over at the middle of its length, it should be sawn clear oflf close by 
the lateral which is nearest to the bole of the tree : but, if there is no lateral, or branch, capable to carry 
forward the growth, cut the main or fractured branch in quite to the bole. In both cases, treat the 
wounds as above recommended. 

6927. Interior rotting, arising from the dampness of the soil, cannot by the art of man be cured; 
though it might have been prevented by timeous draining. The hearts of trees frequently rot, where there 
is no excess of moisture, and especially such as have been produced from old roots left in the ground by 
a previous felling. Such roots, when in good ground, send up ven,- great shoots with few leaves in pro- 
portion to their sizes ; by the absence of a profusion of these, properly to concoct the juices so abundantly 
supplied by the roots, the fibre of the wood is loose and imperfect ; the next season will supply more leave's 
in proportion to the supply of juices, yet not a sufficient number for making perfect timber; several years 
may pass before this event arrive : thus crude and ill digested timber disposed to premature decay, is the 
fouhaation over which subsequent coatings of wood are laid : yet, however perfect these may he, they do 
not prevent the progress of decomposition going on in the interior. Nature teaches how necessary nume- 
rous leaves are to the proportion of the solid wood ; the cotyledons and subsequent leaves of a one-year- 
old tree are a thousand times greater, compared to its solid contents, tlian are the leaves to the solid con- 
tents of tiie first year's shoots from roots like the above. 

6928. Shakes often arise from the weight and multiplicity of top branches, and might have been pre- 
vented by timeous pruning. Shakes or rents in the boles of trees, however, often happen where there is 
no excess of tops. Sometimes the rain running down from the branches, wets one part of the bole, while 
the rest is comparatively dry. If this circumstance is succeeded by an intense frost, before the wetted 
side becomes dry, the bole may be rent for a great length, and perhaps to the depth of the core. Shakes 
or rents, like the above, are difficult to cure. The best method of helping them, is to trace out their up- 
per extremity, caulk it up with oakum, and pitch it over, to prevent the rain descending that way in 
future. {Sang.) 

6929. In cases of holloimess, Pontey recommends probing to the bottom, letting out the water, if any, 
with an auger, drying the cavity with a cloth, filling it with dry sand, plugging it with wood and oakum, 
and then painting it over. 

6930. Dicorticated stews or branches by lightning, or otherwise, if the soft wood is not much injured, 
will heal over and become covered with bark ; and this the more certainly and rapidly if the air be ex- 
cluded by a coating of adhesive matter, as cow-dung and quick-lime, or tying on moss or bandages of 
mat or cloth. Pontey gives an instance in which such treatment was successful in the case of an apple- 
tree. iPruner, 230.) V.'e have witnessed it on an extensive scale on the trunk of a pear-tree; and we 
are informed, on the best authority, of other cases now under progress, in the government garden of the 
Luxembourg at Paris, as matter of exiieriment, by DuThuars, a most ingenious physiologist. 

6931. Withered or decayed tops may arise from age and incipient decay ; but also, as Pontey states, 
from improper pruning, or the want of it. We often see it from improper pruning of elms, which, after 
having been close pruned to their summits for many years, are left e:itireiy to nature; in that case they 
branch out luxuriantly below, and the top withers. By neglecting to thin out the branches mi the stems 
of non.resinous trees, "the same effect may be produced. 

69S2. Stinted bushy tops show a deficiency of nourishment; on ven,- tall naked stems it is from these 
circumstances; and on short stems from defects in the soil. Obliquely placed misshapen heads, in de- 
tached trees, commonly proceetl from the same causes and want of shelter. Stinted growth, both in tops 
and stems, is also produced by ivy, and by lichens, mosses, the mistletoe, and other parasites. Ivy com- 
presses the bark, precludes its' expansion, as well as excludes air and moisture, by which the outer bark 
becomes rigid and corky. Happily, both men and trees will live along time under the influence both of 
deformity and disease. 

6933. Excessive exudations of gu»i and 7-esins are peculiar to resinous and some other trees when over- 
pruned, or pruned at improper times. Mildew, honeydew, and blight, three popular names applied to 
the effects of certain insects of the aphis kind, attack the oak, beech, poplar, and many trees : all that 
can be said is, if proper regimen has been regularly attended to, trees will overcome these and all other 
enemies. 

6934. Injects a7id ver)nin. Almost every tree has its particular insect of the hemipterous and dipterous 
families, and many of the coleoptera family are common to all. The foliage of the small^leaved elm of 
hedges is often almost entirely destroyed in the early part of the season by tenthredinidee ; and those of 
the larch and Scotch pine have suffered materially in some seasons from aphides. The Aphis laricea, L. 
{Erioso77iata of Leach) increased to an alarming extent from ISOO to 1802, on the larch, on account of 
three dry seasons following each otlier; but, though it retarded their growth, it ultimately destroyed 
very few 'trees. Sang says he has known it since 17So; that it dirties more than injures the tree, and is 
now (1819) thought "little of Indeed, almost every species of tree has been known to have suffered in 
some one or more seasons, and in particular districts from insects , for which, on so large a scale, there 
seems to be no applicable remedy hut patiently waiting till their excess, or the increase of other vermin, 
their natural enemies, or a change of seasons, cause them to disappear. Trees, properly cultivated and 
managed, generally overcome such enemies. The hare is well k.iown to be very injurious to young trees, 
and especially to laburnums, by gnawing off their bark. Coating their stems with dung and'urine, fresh 
from the cow-house, is-said to be an effectual remedy. It may be put on with a brush about two feet 
high ; a barrow-load will suffice for a hundred trees, with stems' of three or four inches in diameter; .and 
its virtue, after laid on, endures at least two years. {Bull, in Caled. Hort. Meyn. iv. 190.) 



Book III. PREPARING TREES FOR USE OR SALE. 



967 



Chap. VI. 

0/" approjmating the Products of Trees, prejyanng tliem for Use or Sale, and cstwiating 

their Value, 

6935. Of the different products afforded by trees, the first is their leaves, which are or 
may be collected in close plantations for the sake of the manure they afford ; and in open 
groves, parks, and lawns, for that purpose, and to prevent their injuring the grassy sur- 
face. Leaves axe also gathered on the continent as food for cattle. Though, at first 
consideration, leaves would appear to benefit pastures by sheltering the roots of 
(he grass during winter, and afterwards rotting into manure ; yet experience proves, 
that in considerable quantities they impede the growth of the grass plants, by 
bringing on decay at their roots, in all probability owing to their exclusion of air. 
For this purpose, in well wooded parks, the leaves are carefully collected in the begin- 
ning of winter, and carried to rot-heaps in secluded situations, where in two years from 
the time of gathering, they become the valuable mould so much in demand by the gar- 
dener. A very ingenious machine for sweeping together, and at the same time lifting 
up leaves into a box or receiver, has been invented by Snowdon, a London machinist, 
and has been partially in use in "Windsor Forest and at Hampton Court ; it is also calcu- 
lated for cutting or wrenching off weeds, (as clean cut weeds are found to grow again, 
the same season, while the roots of the others often rot,) or mowing and lifting the weeds 
or swarth into the cart ; but it is not yet sufficiently matured to enable us to describe it as 
completely answering all its intended purposes. Great credit, however, is due to the in- 
genious inventor, who has been occupied on it for upwards of two years, and who has 
spared neither time nor money. 

6936. Prunings or spray are the next product of trees ; those which they afford at a very early period, 
and all clippings of hedges or artificial forms, are only fit to be used as leaves ; the larger prunings may be 
used for some of the various purposes to which copse-wood and the lop of trees are applied. On "the 
continent, and especially in Sweden and Norway, spray of all kinds is carefully faggotted in summer, dried 
and slacked for the use of cattle in winter. This was also the practice of the Romans, who preferred the 
spray of the elm, as the Swedes do that of the birch. 

6937. The thinnings, when not beyond a suitable age, and taken up properly (6905.) and at a proper sea- 
son, may be replanted in other situations, or as single trees and groups ; or they may be used as hoops, 
hop-poles, poles for garden-training, for fencing, for props in coaleries, and for a great variety of pur- 
poses ; those whose barks are useful for tannin should not be cut down or rooted up till May, but the 
others at any time during winter. It is common to sort them into lots, according to their kind or size ; 
and to faggot up the spray for fuel, besom-stufF, or for distilling for bleachers' liquid. See Copse-woods. 
(6940.) 

6938. The seeds of trees in general cannot be considered of much use beyond that of continuing the 
species, and therefore, in very particular cases, where it is desired a tree sliould attain bulk as rapidly as 

Eossible, the flowers should be pinched off as they appear. Tiie seeds of the oak, beech, and sweet chestnut, 
owever, are valuable for feeding swine, and where they abound may either be swept together after they 
drop, and carried away and preserved dry in lofts for that purpose ; or if other circumstances are favorable, 
Bwine maybe driven under the trees to collect them. These, and other seeds, as the haw and holly, are 
also eaten by deer. The seeds of the trees mentioned, and of all the resinous tribe, are in general demand 
by the nurserymen for the purposes of propagation. The seeds of almost all other trees and shrubs are 
also in limited or occasional demand ; or may be collected for private sowing. They generally ripen late 
in the season, and are to be collected in the end of autumn or beginning of winter, with the exception 
of a few, such as the elm, poplar, willow, and one or two others, which ripen their seeds in May or 
June. 

6939. In osier-grounds, willows, whether intended for the basket-maker or cooper, should not be cut till 
the second season after planting, in order to strengthen the stools ; but by the third autumn the crop will 
be fit for the basket-maker, and the fourth, plantations intended for the cooper (hoops requiring the 
growth of two years) will be ready. The seasons for cutting are November and March ; after the former 
period the wounds are apt to be injured by frost, and after the latter the sap is too far advanced ; some is 
lost by bleeding, and the buds are developed too suddenly to admit of proper strength in the shoots. The 
cut should be made within three buds of tlie point whence the shoot issued, in a sloping direction, and the 
section on the under-side. (1885.) In cutting hoop-willows, the swell at the bottom of the shoot only 
should be left, that being furnished with abundance of buds for future growth. After being cut, the 
hoops are trimmed from any side shoots, and tied up in bundles of a hundred, of six scores each, 
which, in 1820, sold for from four shillings to five shillings a bundle. The willows are sorted into thi-ee 
sizes, and tied in bundles two feet in circumference, within a foot of the lower ends. When to be peeled, 
they are immediately after cutting set on their thick ends in standing water, a few inches deep, and there 
they remain till the growth ascerids freely, which is commonly by the end of the succeeding May. " The 
apparatus for peeling is simply two round rods of iron, nearly half an inch thick, sixteen inches long, and 
tapering a little upwards, welded together at the one end which is sharpened, so as that it maybe easily 
thrust down into the ground. "When thus placed in a piece of firm ground, the peeler sits down opposite 
to it, and takes the willow in the right hand by the small end, and puts a foot or more of the great end 
into the instrument, the prongs of which he presses together with the left hand, and with the right draws 
the willow towards him ; by which operation the bark will at once be separated from the wood : the small 
end is then treated in the same manner, and the peeling is completed. Good willows peeled in the above 
manner, have been sold for some seasons past, at from six shillings and sixpence to seven shillings tJie 
bundle of four feet in circumference. After being peeled, they will keep in good condition for a long time, 
till a proper market be found." 

6940. Copse.woods are generally cut over when the shoots of the stools have attained from three to five 
inches' diameter at their bases ; some grown chiefly tor hop-poles, and ware or stufi' for crates, hampers, 
or wattled hurdles, are cut over earlier, and others, where small timber for fencing and other country 
purposes is wanted, are left later. In some parts of Herefordshire, where the oak grows with great 
rapidity, copse-woods are cut over every twelve years ; in the highlands of Scotland, where it grows much 
slower, the time varies from twenty to twenty-five or thirty years. " The bark is there considered as 
having arrived at its utmost perfection, and at its highest value, at the age of between twenty and thirty 
years : under that age, its virtues are weak ; above it, the bark becomes coarse and loses its sap. Another 
important rcasoji for cutting down oak coppicc-wood about the above period, is suggested in the Stirliner 

3 Q. 4 



96B 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



sffh-e Report^ p. S18, ; namely, • that it is 9 fact established by experience, that it will not renew itself, 
if it remains uncut, beyond the space of about forty years.'" {Gen. Rep. of Scotland, 218.) Where 
there is a considerable tract of copse-wood, it is common to divide it into portions, in number accordhig 
to the period of cutting. These are to be cut in rotation, so that when the last portion is cut over, the 
first is again ready for cutting. 

6941. The season for cutting the kinds of trees whose barks are not made use of, is winter and early in 
spring; but the oak and other trees which are peeled, are left till the middle of April or May. Birch 
and larch woods will peel nearly a month earlier than the oak. Should there be no frost, birch and 
larch may be peeled about the beginning of April ; but the birch is commonly allowed to stand till July, 
and the peeling of it is commenced after that of the oak has been completed ; and the reason is, there is 
an outer skin upon birch-bark which requires to be taken off, as it is of no use to the tanner, and renders 
that part which is of use more difficult to be ground, and the month of July is the only time at which 
the two barks can be separated with ease, as at this time the juice or sap has made its circulation 
through the tree and bark, and this circumstance renders the separation moce easy. From the beginning 
of May to the middle of July is the usual time for barking the oak. The earlier in the spring this oper- 
ation is performed on the oak, both for the growth, if a natural wood, and for the bark, the better. 
When the sap has begun to rise, the bark will easily be detached from the wood, and it ought then to be 
taken off without loss of time ; and if the whole could be taken off before the leaf is completely deve- 
loped, the bark would be better. After the sap has arisen to the leaf and new growth, the bark become* 
more dry, and requires more beating to separate it from the wood. And when what is called the black 
sap is descending the tree, the bark taken off is black, and loses its original color ; and at this time also 
the bark begins to throw off a scurf, more especially young bark without much cork on it ; this outer 
skin having less of the proper sap or juice, and being much drier when taken off, will weigh less, and 
consequently will not be so valuable. If possible, oaks should be barked by the middle of June, as every 
ton of bark taken off after the first of July will be deficient two cwt. per ton, compared with the same 
quantity taken off in May or early in June. 

6942. The termination of cutting is generally fixed for the fifteenth day of July, and after this date there 
should not be a single stool of oak wood cut that is intended for the growth ; and as soon as possible after 
the fifteenth, the whole of the wood and bark should be carried away, that the young growths may 
not be disturbed or injured, as at this time they will liave mads considerable progress ; at any rate, there 
should neither be wood nor bark remaining within the new cut hag after the first of August ; nor should 
either horse or cart be permitted to enter it after that period, for after the beginning of August, oaks 
make what is termed a lammas growth, and the future prosperity and health of the coppice, in a great 
measure, depend on the first year's growth, as far as regards form and vigor of the shoots. {Forester's 
Guide, 69.) . . 

6943. The best mode of cutting is evidently that of using a saw, and cutting the shoots over in a slanting 
direction close by the surface. \v'hen the stool, after having been cut several times, has acquired con- 
siderable diameter, it is customary in the midland counties, Marshall states, to hollow it out in the centre, 
from a notion that by rotting away the central roots, the circumferential stems will grow more vigor- 
ously, and become as it were separate plants. This is in fact the case in very old copses. For several 
cuttings, however, it must evidently be the safer policy to keep the stool highest in the middle to throw 
off the rain, and preserve it sound. 

6944. Monteath says, " It will be found, upon experiment, perfectly evident, that stools dressed down to 
the surface of the ground, (taking care always not to loosen the bark from the root, or allow it to be peeled 
off in the smallest degree below the earth, but rounded down level to it,) that these stools will send forth 
the most vigorous shoots, and stand the weather, and be the stoutest and best throughout the age of the 
coppice." (Forester's Guide, 61.) From the late season at which the trees to be barked are generally 
cut, they often receive considerable injury, both from that circumstance, and the manner in which the 
operation is performed. Monteath appears to us to have furnished the best directions for executing the 
work in a safe manner. He first sends a person furnished with an instrument with a sharp cutting edge 
{Jig. 140.) through ths copse, whose business is " to trample down the long grass or foggage all round the 
root, and then, to make a circular incision into the bark so deep as to reach the wood, at about an 
inch above the surface of the earth ; thus the bark when taken off, will injure no part of that which is 
below the circular incision." 

6945. The root of the tree being thus prepared, the cutters ought to proceed to their part of the 
work, not with an axe, however, as is most generally recommended, but with a saw, because, in cutting 
with the axe unless t!ie root of the tree be so small in diameter as to be severed in one or two strokes at 
most, the axe loosens the root to such a degree, that it not only loses the present year's growth, but often 
fails altogether to grow. Therefore if the diameter of the root be six inches, or upwards, it should always 
be cut with a cross-cut saw ; entering the saw about half an inch above where the circular incision has 
been made into the bark, if a small tree ; but if the tree be ten or twelve, or more inches in diameter, 
the saw ought to be entered two inches above it. 

6946. There are two advantages to be derived from cutting xmth the saw ; it has no tendency to 
loosen the root of the tree, but leaves it in such a condition as to be more easily and properly dressed; it 
also saves a portion of the wood that would otherwise be destroyed by the axe. On no pretence should 
oaks of six inches' diameter be cut with an axe, but always with a saw. Having cut through the tree 
with a saw, take a sharp adze, and round the edges of the stool or root, going close down to the surface 
of the earth, taking with the adze both bark and wood, sloping it up towards the centre of the stool, 
taking particular care always that the bark and wood both slope alike, as if they formed one solid body, 
being sure always that the bark be not detached from the root. An objection has been made to this mode 
of cutting with the saw, as taking up too much time ; but I have found that two men with a cross-cut 
saw, kept in good order, will cut as much as two men will with an axe. {Forester's Guide, 58.) 

6947. The disbarked timber is prepared for sale by being sorted into straight poles of the largest size, 
stakes and other pieces fit for palings, faggots, fuel, &c. The unbarked wofid is similarly sorted, and affords, 
where there is much hazel or ash, cord-wood or bundles of clean shoots for making packing crates, ham- 
pers, &c., poles for hops, larger poles for fences, rails, paling-stakes, stakes and shoots for hurdles, besom- 
stuff, spray for distillation, and a variety of other objects according to the local demand, or the oppor- 
tunity of su2>plying a distant market by land-carriage. The brush or spray of non-resinous trees is called 
in some places ton-wood, and is used for distilling the pyrolignous acid used in bleach-fields and calico 
print-works. " When wood of this description is sent to Glasgow, where there are extensive works for 
the purpose of distilling it, it sells readily at from 1/. 25. to \l. 10s. per ton ; but when there are lar'!;e 
cuttings, particularly of young woods, it is worth while to erect boilers near the wood to distil it, as these 
boilers can be erected at no great expense, and in this case the liquid is easily carried in casks to where 
it is consumed, at less expense than the rough timber could be ; of course it will pay much better. Small 
wood of this description is also used for charcoal : but in distilling it, there is part of it made into char- 
coal, which will supply the demand of that article, so that it is by far the most profitable way, when 
there is any great quantity to dispose of, to erect boilers and distil it; unless where the local situation of 
the wood will admit of its being shipped at a small expense, and carried to where the works mentioned 
are carried on. All kinds of wood will give the extract in question, excepting fir ; but oak, ash, Spanis'i 
chestnut, and birch, are the best," {Forester's Guide, 155.) Where the oak grows slow, as in the high- 
lands, the but-ends of the poles are used for spokes for chaise-wheels. " Long spokes are from thii-ty 
to thirty-two inches by three inches and a half broad, and one inch and a half thick, and the shoii; ones 
for the same purpose, from twenty-two to twenty.four inches long, and the same sizes otherwise. Cart- 



Book III. 



PREPARING TREES FOR USE OR SALE. 



969 



wheel spokes, from twenty-six to twenty-eight inches long, four inches broad by two inches thick. 
These are the sizes they require to stand when rough-blocked from the axe. Small wood when sold 
for this purpose, brought, in 1820, 2s. a cubic foot, measured down to three inches square." {Monteath.) 

6948. In some cases copse-woods are sown with grasS'Seeds, and pastured by sheep, horses, and cattle. 
Some admit the animals the fifth year after the last cutting, others not till the eighth : but Monteath 
thinks this should never be done till the fifteenth year. If the ground is properly covered with trees, it 
can seldom be advantageous to admit any species of stock unless during a month or two in winter. 

6949. In the operation of barking trees, "the barkers are each furnished with light 
short-handled mallets, made of hard wood, about eight or nine inches long, three inches 
square at the face, and the oflier end sharpened like a wedge, in order the more easily 
to make an incision in the bark, which is done all along the side of the tree which hap- 
pens to be uppermost, in a straight line : and as two barkers are generally employed at 
one tree, it is proper, that whilst the one is employed in making an incision with the 
mallet, as above, the other being furnished with the barking-bill {Jig. 140.), cuts the bark 
across the tree, in lengths of from two feet six inches to three feet. Having thus made 
the incision in the bark, both ways, the barkers being also each furnished with peeling- 
irons {figs. 136. to 139.), if the tree or piece of timber to be barked is such as the two 
barkers can easily lift one end of it, this is placed on two pieces of wood, three feet long, 
and called horses ; these are about the thickness of a paling-stake, and have a forked end 
on each about six inches long, the other end sharpened to go into the ground ; two of 
these horses are placed in a triangular form against one another, one end of the piece to 
be peeled being raised on the horses, the two barkers standing opposite to each other, and 
entering the peeling -irons into the incision made by the mallet, and pressing the iron 
downwards between the bark and the timber. In this way it will be found very easy to 
take the bark off in one whole piece round the tree ; and, if possible, let these pieces be as 
long as the incisions made in the bark. In some cases, where there is not much sap, 
the bark may require a little beating with the square end of the mallet, to cause it to 
separate easily from the wood ; but the less beating with the mallet the better, as it has a 
tendency to blacken the bark in the inside, or fleshy part of it, so that when the tanner 
sees it, he supposes it to be damaged, and imdervalues it. Tlie branches of the tree be- 
ing previously all lopped off with the axe, the persons, in number according to the extent 
of the work, with the bill smooth all the branches, cutting them in lengths of from two 
feet six inches to three feet, down as small as one inch in circumference. The barkers, 
principally women, are each provided with a smooth hard stone of about six or eight 
pounds weight, beside which they sit down, and having collected a quantity of saplings, 
branches, or twigs, they hold it on the stone with one hand, and with the mallet in the 
other, they beat the piece till the bark be split from the wood, from the one end to the 
other, and taking it off all the length of the piece, if possible, then lay it regularly aside, 
till a bundle of considerable size is formed." 

6950. Drying the hark. " The point most particularly to be observed in this art is, putting the bark up 
to dry ; which is done by putting the bark upon what is called the lofts or ranges. These are erected by 
taking forked pieces of the loppings, called horses, the one three feet long, the other two feet six inches, 
and driving each about four inches into the ground, opposite one another, about two feet asunder in the 
breadth, and as much betwixt them, lengthways, as will admit long small pieces of wood to be put upon 
them, and as many of these must be put together as will hold the bark of every day's peeling. These 
ought to be erected in as dry and elevated a spot as can be found in the margin of the wood or better out- 
side of it. The bark being carried and laid on this loft, with the thick ends of it all laid to the high side 
of the range, and the small bark laid on to the thickness of about six inches ; and the bark taken off the 
largest of the wood laid regularly on the top, whicli serves for a covering, and the lofts or ranges having 
a declivity of about six inches, the rain will run off' them readily, and if properly put up in this manner, 
they will keep out a great deal of rain. After it has lain in this state for three days, if the weather is 
good and dry, it ought to be all turned over, and the small bark spread out, so as not to allow it to sit to- 
gether, which, if much pressed, it is apt to do ; and if it does so with the natural sap in it, it has a chance 
of moulding, which is extremely hurtful to the bark, and both lessens it in weight and in value. After 
the bark has stood on the ranges about eight or ten days, if the weather be good, it may either be put 
into a house or a shed, or if intended to be put up into a stack, it may now be done." A stack of bark 
ought never to exceed eight feet in width, and twelve or fifteen feet in height, raised in the middle like 
a haystack. If it is to stand any length of time in the stack, it ought to be thatched, and in that state 
may remain all winter. The greatest care ought to be taken to preserve the color of the inner parts of 
the bark, because the color of it is generally looked to as a principal criterion of its value, and the mer- 
chant or tanner judges of its value chiefly by its color. Before being put into the stack, the natural sap 
ought to be dried out of it, in order to prevent its fermenting ; because if a fermentation takes place in 
one part of the stack, it generally goes through and spoils the whole. The same mode of treatment will 
do for all kinds of bark as well as the oak ; but the birch has an outer or shredy skin upon it, that is of no 
use, and rejected by the tanner, and, as already observed, must be peeled off! 

6951. Chopping the baric. " When the bark is ready for the tanner, it has to undergo the work of chop- 
ping, which is done by driving in two or more stakes into the ground, with a fork on the upper end of 
eacn, leaving them about two feet six inches from the ground, and laying a long small piece of wood across 
between the two, where a number of people stand, and the bark is carried and laid down behind them, 
which they take pp in their hands and lay on the cross tree, and then, with a sharp whittle or bill in 
the other hand, they cut it into small pieces, about three inches in length ; when this is done, it is 
trampled into bags, which hold about two hundredweight each, and in these bags it is weighed when 
sold by the ton, in tons, hundred weights, quarters, and pounds, and in the above manner delivered to 
the merchant or tanner." {Forester's Guide, 199.) 

6952. Pollard-trees, which may be considered in most cases as injurious deformitie.«, are lopped at stated 
periods like copse-woods, and the lop, whether to be barked or otherwise, is to be treated in all respects 
like that of copse. 

6953. The period at which trees are felled, for the sake of their timber, is determined 
by various causes. By maturity of growth, or where the annual increase is so trifling as 



970 



PRACTICE OF 13ARDENING. 



Part III. 



to render their standing no longer wortli while in point of profit : when wanted for pri- 
vate use or sale ; or when defects in the tree, or new arrangements, in its situation, point 
out the necessity of its removal. " A timbered estate," Marshall observes, " should 
frequently be gone over by some person of judgment ; who, let the price and demand for 
timber be what they may, ought to mark every tree which wears the appearance of 
decay. If the demand be brisk and the price high, he ought to go two steps farther, 
and mark not only such as are full-grown, but such also as are near perfection." In 
trees, as in the human species, there are three stages, youth, manhood, and old age. In 
the period of youth, the growth is rapid ; in manhood, that growth is matured ; and in 
old age, it begins to decay. 

6954. T/ie most profitable season for felUng timber is at what may thus be termed the beginnhig of man- 
hood. After that time, though the tree may appear sound and healthy, its annual increase is so little, 
that it would be more profitable to cut it down and replant. The number of years that a tree may stand, 
before it arrives at this period, must vary in different soils and situations ; but the period itself may easily 
be ascertained — by the annual shoots — the state of the bark — and by taking the circumference of the tree 
at the same place for two or three successive seasons, and comparing the difference. In the view of pro- 
fiting from timber produce, it is of great consequence to cut down plantations at maturity. Many trees 
will stand half, others a whole century, after they are full-grown, appear quite healthy, and, at the same 
time, make little or no increase of timber. But there are particular cases, arising from the nature and 
state of the markets, where it may even be more profitable to cut timber before it is arrived at a full 
growth. {Treat, on Countr. Res. ii. 577.) 

6955. Preparations for felling It has been strongly recommended to disbark trees a year or more be- 
fore they are taken down in consequence of the result of certain experiments commenced by BufFon in 
1737. In May of that year, he disbarked three oak-trees, forty feet in height, where they stood. In the 
course of three years they died, and, on cutting them down, the outer wood was found hard and dry, and 
tRe internal wood moist and softer. After trying its strength, &c. he concludes, that " timber which has 
been disbarked and dried while standing, will weigh heavier, and prove stronger than timber cut in its 
bark." Bosc, and other French authors, (in Cours Compl. d'Agr. &c. art. Aubier, Bois, Quercus, &c.) 
strongly recommend this practice, which is followed in some places on the continent, and in this coun- 
try with the oak and larch ; but not, as far as we have learned, with any other tree. Monteath finds 
it by far the most efficient way of seasoning larch-timber. He barked some trees in spring, and did not 
cut them down till autumn, and others stood in the peeled state for two years. After various and exten- 
sive trials, he is " decidedly of opinion, that the larch treated in this way at thirty years of age will be 
found equally durable with a tree cut down at the age of fifty years, and treated in the ordinary way." 
(Forester's Guide, 152.) 

6956. As the dry rot {Meritlius destruens. Sow.) is found to arise in a great measure from want of season- 
ing, or at least to proceed with the greatest rapidity in timber not well seasoned, this practice seems to 
deserve adoption in that point of view. {Encyc. Brit. Suppl. art. Dry Rot.) In some parts of the north of 
Europe, the trees are divested of their bark for one or two feet in height from the ground a year or more 
previous to that on which they are to be felled. We saw this done in Poland and Lithuania ; but though 
we made diligent enquiry in Sweden, we could not learn distinctly the extent to which it was practised in 
that country and Norway. It is occasionally practised in both for the ostensible purpose of hardening the 
soft wood : but also accompanied by a deep incision made for the purpose of extracting tar ; a :practice 
obviously injurious to the timber, and therefore generally in these countries kept out of view. When 
trees stand close together, a very obvious preparation to felling is lightening the tops of such branches as 
would do injury in falling to the' trees that are to be left, or to other adjoining objects. 

6957. The season of felling is commonly winter, for timber not to be disbarked; 
but some for the resinous tribe recommend summer as being the season in which it is 
generally felled in the north of Europe and in the Alps. But the summer season is there 
adopted from necessity, as in winter the woods are so filled up with snow that felling 
is hardly practicable. As the timber of these countries is generally squared for the 
market ; tlie soft wood is chiefly removed, so that the season of felling does not seem as 
to them to be of much consequence. Besides, the timber is never so full of sap in sum- 
mer as it is in spring and autumn, and therefore, next to mid-winter, midsummer may 
be the next best time for felling all kinds of timber-trees. Where the trees are disbarked 
at the base a year or more before felling, the soft wood will be partially hardened; but 
this practice is by no means general in the north. 

6958. Knowles, in a recent work on preserving the British navy, the dry rot, &c. after collecting the 
opinions of all the ancient and modern authors who have written on felling timber, concludes, that the 
common notion that trees felled in winter contain less of sap or of the vegetable juices than those cut 
down at any other season of the year, is not true ; and that the method of barking standing trees in spring, 
and not felling them till the succeeding winter, has not in any way realised the expectations formed of the 
plan. After describing all the different modes that have been adopted for seasoning timber, he concludes, 
that the best mode of seasoning is to " keep it in air, neither very dry nor very moist ; and to protect it 
from the sun and rain by a roof raised sufficiently high over it so as to prevent by this and other means, a 
rapid rush of air." (Inquiry into the Means of preserving the British Navy from Dry rot, %c. by Knowles, 
Sec. to the Coin, of Surveyors, chap, iii.) 

6959. The operation of felling is performed either by digging an excavation round the 
stem, and cutting the roots at two or three feet distant from it, or by cutting over the 
stem at the surface. By the former mode the root is obtained for use, and the ground 
more eflfectually cleared and prepared for the roots of other adjoining trees, or whatever 
crop is to follow. Where the tree is intended to stole, which can very seldom be advis- 
able in the case of cutting full-grown timber, or where there is some nicety in taking it 
down so as not to injure other trees or adjoining objects, it is cut or sawn over, and the 
root, if to be removed, dug out afterwards. " In cutting large trees, in order to make 
the tree fall the way required, enter the cross-cut saw on that side of the tree it is intended 
to fall, and cut it about a third part through ; then enter the saw at the other side, and 
when it is cut so far as to admit a wedge, place the wedge exactly opposite the way you 



Book III. 



PREPARING TREES FOR USE OR SALE. 



971 



want the tree to fall, and keep driving it slowly till the tree is nearly cut tlirougli." 

(3fonteath.) 

6960. Disbranching. The tree being felled, is next divested of its branches, which are sorted into 
fence-wood, fuel, ton-wood, &c. according to the kind of tree ; and the trunk is generally preserved as 
entire as possible for the purchaser. Sometimes it is cut in two, and the root-cut, or but-end, being the 
most valuable, sold for one class of purposes at a higher price, and the top-cuts for others somewhat 
lower. Sometimes timber is purchased by private contract by the foot or load m a growmg state, or after 
being cut down ; in other cases regular sales are made annually, and the produce exposed lor sale by 
auction. It is measured by the cubic foot, fifty of which are a load ; and the calculated tables and 
Measw-er's Guide generally resorted to, are those of Hoppus. 

6961. The roots of trees are the last product we shall mention. These should, in 
almost every case, be efFectually eradicated ; to aid in which, in the case of very large 
roots, splitting by wedges, refting by gunpowder (1941.), tearing up by the hydrostatic 
press (Jig. 211.), or by a common lever and triangle (fig. 666.), may be resorted to. Some 
compact ash or oak roots are occasion- 
ally in demand by smiths, leather- 
cutters, and others ; but in general 
roots should be reduced to pieces not 
exceeding three feet long, and six 
inches in diameter, and put up in 
stacks not less than three feet every 
way, but commonly containing two 
cubic yards. These, when dry, are 
sold for fuel, or reduced to charcoal 
on tJie spot. In eradicating and stack- 
ing up coppice- woods, it is common to allow a certain sum per sack, something for 
every acre of ground cleared ; and if there are no trees to bark, the allowances are also 
made for the poles, faggots, &c. so that no part of the operation is performed by day- 
work. 

6962. The usual method of charring wood is as follows : — 

6963. The wood being collected near the place intended for the operation, and cut into billets, 
generally about three feet in length, the pits or stacks are usually formed in this manner : A spot, 
adapted to the purpose, of from about fifteen or twenty feet in diameter, of a conical form, is selected, and 
after being properly levelled, a large billet of wood split across at one end, and pointed at the other, is 
fixed in the centre of the area, with its pointed extremity in the earth, and two pieces of wood, inserted 
through the clefts of the other end, forming four right angles ; against these cross-pieces, four other billets 
of wood are placed, one end on the ground, and the other leaning against the angles. A number of large 
and straight billets are afterwards laid on the ground^ to form a floor, each being, as it were, the radius 
of the circular area ; on this floor, a proper quantity of brush or small wood is strewed, to fill up the in- 
terstices, when the floor will be complete : and in order to keep the billets in the same position in which 
they were first arranged, pegs or stumps are driven into the ground, in the circumference of the circle, 
about a foot distant from one another ; upon this floor a stage is built, with billets set upon one end, 
somewhat inclining towards the central billet, and on the tops of these another floor is laid, in a horizontal 
direction, but of shorter billets, as the whole is intended, when finished, to form a cone. The whole is 
then coated over with turf, and the surface generally plastered with a mixture of earth and charcoal-dust. 

0964. Previous to the operation of setting fire to the pile, the central billet in the upper stage is drawn 
out, and pieces of dry combustible wood substituted in its place, to which the fire is applied. Great atten- 
tion is necessary during the process, in the proper management of the fire, and in immediately covering 
up the apertures through which the flame obtrudes itself, until the operation be concluded, which is 
generally effected in the space of two or three days according to circumstances. When the charcoal is 
thought to be sufficiently burnt, which is easily known from the appearance of the smoke, and the flames 
no longer issuing with impetuosity through the vents ; all the apertures are to be closed up very carefully, 
with a mixture of earth and charcoal-dust, which, by excluding all access of the external air, prevents 
the coal from being any further consumed, and the fire goes out of itself In this condition it is suffered 
to remain, till the whole is suflSciently cooled ; when the cover is removed, and the charcoal is taken away. 
If the whole process is skilfully managed, the coals will exactly retain the figure of the pieces of wood : 
some are said to have been so dexterous, as to char an arrow, without altering even the figure of the 
feather. {Encyc. Brit. vol. v. art. Charcoal.) 

6965. The method of charring wood, for the making of gunpowder, according to an improved system, 
adopted not many years ago, is however a much more costly operation, though the expense attending it is 
amply compensated by the superior excellence of the article when manufactured. It is done in iron 
cylinders, and in so complete a manner, that every particle of the wood is charred. The oily or tarry 
matter is also preserved, and may, so far as the quantity goes, be made use of instead of foreign tar or 
pitch. This mode of charring wood for making gunpowder, is carried to the greatest perfection, near 
Petworth in Sussex, and there is a manufacture of a similar nature near Chester. {Gen. Rep. for f}cotland, 
70\. ii. p. 332.) ' 

6966. The valuation of trees forms a distinct profession, and can only be acqviired after 
much experience; like other valuations of property, it depends on a great variety of con- 
siderations, some of a general, but the greater part of a local nature. All we shall here 
attempt, is to give a few general ideas which may be of use to the private cultivator or 
forester. 

6967. In valuing any plantation, the first thing is to know its contents in acres ; if this 
cannot be done, the number of plants must be counted. If a young plantation, the trees 
of which are unfit for present use as timber, is to be valued, then its value at any distant 
period, not exceeding twenty or twenty-five years, must be estimated ; and whatever sum 
that estimate amounts to, the present value of that sum will give an idea of the value of 
ihe plantation, allowing liberally for accidents to the trees and other unforeseen circum- 
stances. Tims, suppose a plantation of oaks, intended as copse, or actually established as 




972 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING 



Part IIL 



Buch, to have grown four years, its present value would be next to nothing ; but if arrived 
at its twentieth year, it would fetch fifty pounds per acre. Then the question is, required 
the present value of fifty pounds, due sixteen years hence, the market price of money 
being five per cent. ? and this, according to any of the modern annuity tables {say Bailey St 
4to. 1808. tab. iv. ) is 221, 18s. This principle is applicable to all kinds of valuing by 
anticipation ; and there is no other mode of valuing applicable to young plantations. The 
benefits derived from the trees in the way of shelter and ornament, are to be estimated in 
valuing the territory, and are foreign to the present purpose, which has for its object tree- 
produce only. 

6968. In valuing saleable trees of any kind, their number per acre, or their total number by enumeration 
being ascertained, and the kinds and sizes classed, then each class is to be estimated according to its worth 
as timber, fence-wood, fuel, bark, &c. " In a coppice-wood which cannot readily be measured, the 
readiest method of counting the stools is, to cause two men to take a line, say about a hundred feet long, 
or more, and passing the line round as many of the stools as it will enclose, the one man standing still 
while the other moves round a new number of stools, and count always the stools betwixt the two lines, 
causing the one man to move the one time with the line, whilst the other man stands still, and so on alter- 
nately. The valuator at the same time taking care to average every twenty stools as they go on, before 
losing sight of the counted stools. This way, too, is a very speedy and sure method of counting the num- 
ber of trees in any pLmtation. Or, the stools of a coppice-wood may be counted and averaged by two men 
going parallel to each other, and the person valuing going betwixt them j the two men putting up marks 
with moss, or pieces of white paper, on a brancli of the stools ; the one man going always back by the last 
laid marks, and the valuator always counting and averaging the stools betwixt the newly-laid and the late- 
laid marks ; counting and averaging the stools always as the men go on, taking only twenty, or even ten 
stools at a time. To those who have been in the practice of doing this frequently, it will be found very 
easy, and will be done very speedily, and with a very considerable degree of accuracy. The proper method 
of learning to do this correctly is, when a person cuts an oak wood for the first time (or, even were the 
work repeated several times), he should then, in order to make himself perfectly acquainted with ascer- 
taining the average quantity of bark that a stool, or even a stem of a stool will produce, go before the 
peelers, and select a stool or stem : after having examined it narrowly, he supposes it to produce a certain 
quantity of bark, and marks this down in his memorandum-book. He then causes a person to peel it by 
itself, dry it, and carefully tie it up, and weigh it, and compare it with the weight he supposed it to pro- 
duce, and he will at once see how near his calculation comes to the truth. A stem of oak from a natural 
stool, suppose it to measure in girth two inches, by seven feet long, will contain two solid inches and one 
third of an inch, according to the measurement of Hoppus This stem or shoot will produce two pounds 
two ounces of bark. Again, a stem or shoot of natural oak, measuring four inches in girth, by nine feet 
in length, will be found to contain one solid foot of wood, and will produce thirteen pounds and a half of 
bark." [Forester's Guide, 170.) 

6969. Wfien growing trees are valued, an allowance is made from their cubic contents for the bark. The 
rule given by Monteath is, " when the girth or circumference is any thing from twelve inches up to 
twenty-four inches, then deduct two inches ; from twenty-four to thirty-six, three inches; from thirty- 
six to forty-eight, four inches ; from forty-eight to seventy-two, five inches ; and above seventy-two, six' 
inches."- These deductions, lie says, " will be found to answer in almost all trees ; unless in such as are 
very old, and have rough and corky barks or barks covered with moss, when an extra allowance is to be 
made," {Forester's Guide, 180.) " Many persons," the same autJior observes, "in valuing measurable 
oak-trees, proceed on the data that every cubic foot of timber will produce a stone (sixteen pounds) of bark. 
This," he says, " is not always correct ;" and he states the following facts from his own experience, with 
a view to assist beginners in ascertaining tlie quantity of bark from various trees. " An oak-tree, about 
forty years old, measured down to four inches and a half side of the square, and weighing only the bark 
peeled oft' the timber that is measured, without including any of the bark of the spray, &c. every foot ot 
measured timber will produce from nine to eleven pounds of bark. An oak-tree, of eighty years old, 
weighing only the bark peeled oft' the measurable timber, as above, every foot will produce from ten to 
thirteen pounds of bark. Every foot of large birch-timber, peeled as above, will produce fourteen pounds 
of bark. Every foot of mountain ash, as above, will produce eleven pounds and a half of bark. Every foot 
of the willow, unless a.very old tree, will produce from nine to eleven pounds. Every foot of larch fir, not 
exceeding thirty years old, will produce from seven to nine pounds of bark. The timber of trees, particu- 
larly the oak, is peeled out, every branch and shoot, down as small as an inch in circumference." (Forest- 
er's Guide, 189.) The price of timber, like that of every other article in general use, varies with the supply 
and demand ; and is easily ascertained from the timber-merchants at the different sea-ports ; as is that of 
bark, charcoal, and fire-wood from the tanners and coal-merchants. 

6970. To facilitate the measuring of standing timber, Monteath has invented a very in- 
genious machine. (Jig. 667.) It consists of a wheel, or perambulator, about eight inches 
in diameter, with a bell (a) on the end of 
its axle ; at the end of every foot gone 
over by the serrated circumference of the 
peratnbulator, this bell is struck by means 
of a spring (6) ; the sound of this bell will 
be heard from the top of the highest tree. 
A forked handle (c) works on the top of 
the main axle on each side of the wheel ; 
one of a set of connecting rods (e, h) goes 
into it, and is fixed with a screw making a 
swivel joint, and by screwing the nut firm, 
the wheel can be set to any position, and it 
will work equally well any way. A small 
hand (d), in the circle of the triangular 
spring, points to the inches or quarters of 
an inch on the wheel, and tells what exceeds the inch after a lesser spring (e), which strikes 
at every inch, has struck the bell. The circumference of the wheel (j"} measures two 
feet. The rods for working the measuring machine are each three feet long, and one inch 
in diameter, with connecting screws of brass on each end of them ; so that as-many as are 




Book III. 



FORMATION OF A TREE-NURSERY. 



973 



required for any length or height, can be easily screwed into each other. The other small 
rods for taking the length of the tree, as also of its branches, are only five eighths of an 
inch in diameter : each rod is three feet long, and goes together with connecting screws 
of brass. The rods are painted black, and divided into feet and inches, with white let- 
ters ; so that by connecting any number of the rods together that may be required, and by 
applying them to the tree or branches (k), you can take the exact length in a speedy, ac- 
curate, and simple manner. (Forester's Guide, 207.) 

6971. T/ie value of the invention turns on the use of the wheel, in taking the girth of the tree. Thus, 
" after having taken the length of the tree in feet and inches, which length may be taken by the rods as 
already described, the girth is most generally taken at half the length, which girth we are enabled to take 
with the measuring wheel : this is easily done, by putting up the wheel, with as many of the connecting 
rods together as will put it up to the height required ; then, suppose there are no branches in the way, and 
having before made a mark on the bark or the tree with the small rods, the uppermost one having a small 
marking-iron in its end for that purpose ; this mark is made where the girth is to be taken, and from where 
you are to take your departure with the wheel, which being done, press the wheel round the tree, following 
it, and keeping it as level as possible, which the wheel will in a great measure do of itself, by its having 
teeth like a saw in the hem of the wheel, unless carelessly attended to. As the wheel goes round the tree, 
be sure to count the number of times the bell strikes, which it does at every foot ; and when you see you 
have not another twelve inches or one foot more to run, to arrive at the place where you took your depar- 
ture from, count thenumber of inches that it strikes over and above the last foot, and thus you will at once 
have the feet and inches that the tree is in circumference; of which take the fourth, and this gives you 
the side of the square : but when there are branches in the way of getting round the tree, you must have 
a spare handle for the machine (e, h), about two feet, or two feet six inches in length, and by altering the 
swivel-joint at the top of the first rod to any position required, the person working the wheel by the rods 
can stand in the same place, and put the wheel, say half way round the tree, if it is very large, and by 
turning the swivel-joint, and reversing the wheel, at the same time sending it round the other side of the 
tree till it meet where it left off, and by counting the feet and inches as above, and adding the two together, 
you will at once have the extreme girth of the tree. When branches are to measure, or when branches are 
in the way of getting round the tree with the rods, the person with the small rods stands on the opposite 
side of the tree, and directs the person when to stop with the wheel. Thus, by a little practice in working 
the wheel, and paying attention to count the feet and inches as they strike, two men will measure growing 
or standing trees equally as accurately and expeditiously as if the trees were lying on the ground. la 
taking the girth with a line, you have first to put it round the tree, then you double it, and apply it to a 
foot-rule ; you then take the half for the side of the square, whereas this machine gives you the exact feet 
and inches from the top of the highest tree, without the help of any other rule " {Forester's Guide, 208.) 
Neither this machine, nor a mechanical dendrometer, invented about twenty years ago, though both of 
considerable merit, appear to us so well calculated for general use as the Timber Measurer of Broad. [Jig. 154.) 

6972. The books of accounts for trees and plantations have already been mentioned. 
(2340.) Some have proposed measuring the whole of, or at least all the detached and 
hedge-row trees on an estate periodically ; numbering each tree, and keeping a corre- 
sponding register, by which the proprietor, when at a distance, might give directions for 
cutting down pai-ticular trees, &c. ; but this appears rather too much in the mercantile 
style for the dignified enjoyment of landed property, and does not promise any very great 
advantages. 



Chap. VII. 

Of the Forynation of a Nursery- Garden for the Propagation ayid Bearing of Trees and 

Shrubs. 

6973. Nurseries for rearing trees are commonly left to commercial gardeners, as the 
plantations of few private landowners are so extensive, or continued through a suf- 
ficient number of years to render it worth their while to originate and nurse up their 
own tree and hedge plants. Exceptions, however, occur in the case of remote situ- 
ations, and where there are tracts so extensive as to require many years in planting. Be 
sides, as Sang observes, " some are of opinion, that trees, in order to their being rendered 
sufficiently hardy, should be reared on the soil and situation where they are ulti- 
mately to be planted ; and if the design be extensive, and such as may require many 
years for its coinpletion ; a conveniently situated nursery is, in that case, highly de- 
sirable, not only as saving the carriage of plants, and facilitating the business of trans- 
planting, but as increasing the chance of success, on account of the plants remaining a 
much shorter time out of the ground than if brought from a distance. If the situation, 
however, ultimately destined for the trees be cold, high, and bleak, and the soil of course 
various, some good, and much of it bad, or of an indifferent quality, there it would by 
no means be advisable to attempt the establishment of a nursery, and especially a nur- 
sery to raise plants from seeds. The chief properties of nursery plants intended for 
transplanting, consist in their strength and cleanness of stem, and in their roots having 
a multiplicity of healthy fibres ; and in order to obtain plants possessing these qualities, 
it is necessary to sow, and plant out to nurse, if not in rich, at least in mellow earth, 
and in a moderately sheltered situation." {Plant. Kal. 20.) The following directions 
by Sang as to the soil, shelter, aspect, and fencing of a nursery -gardeiv are equally ap- 
plicable to such as are intended for private or commercial purposes : — 

6974. In order to have a complete nursery, it should contain soUs of various qualities, and not less than 
eighteen inches or two feet deep ; the generality of it should be light friable earth j a part of it should be 



974 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



of a clayey nature : and another part should be mossy. Each of these will be found peculiarly useful in 
the raising of the aifferent kinds of young plants. The whole should be well drained, and trenched, and 
cropped with vegetables for one or even two years previously to sowing tree-seeds. For transplanting, it 
may be used the first year. A nursery may certainly be over-sheltered ; " but this is likely to happen 
only in the case of its being very small ; for, if it extend to several acres, unless it be surrounded by very 
tall trees, the area will be considerably exposed. No part should be either too much exposed, or too 
much sheltered. Any aspect from east to west, following the course of the sun, will answer. Ground of an 
unequal surface is most likely to contain the various soils above mentioned. A nursery should, therefore, 
in general, rise from a level to a pretty smart acclivity ; yet no part of it should be too steep, because it is 
in that case very troublesome to labor. The nursery-ground may be sufficiently fenced by a stone wall, 
or even a hedge six feet high ; and if it be of small size, an acre' or thereabouts, it will require no other 
shelter ; but if it extend to four or five acres, it must have dividing hedges properly situated, to afford 
shelter over all the space. The fence, whether of thorns or stone, should be made proof against the ad- 
mission of hare* or rabbits. It should be subdivided into compartments and borders, of proportionate size 
to the contents of the area, by walks. The compartments should never be encumbered with large trees, 
as apples, pears, or the like ; because, being already established in the ground, they never fail to rob the 
young trees of their food, and to cause them to lie poor and stunted, unworthy of being planted in the 
forest. It would be very convenient to have a rill of water passing through the ground, or to have a small 
pond, fed by a spring or a pipe, for the purpose of wntering." {Plant. Kal. 22.) 

6975. In p7-eparingthe soil for the culture of fjxes it will be advisable to trench it to its full depth, and 
" necessary," the same author continues, " to give it a good dressing of lime or marl and dung in com- 
post. Rank manure, such as stable-litter, should I'.ot be ajiplied to nursery-ground, at the time of crop, 
ping, with nursery articles ; but if it be necessary to enrich it, this should be done by a manured crop of 
onions, turnips, lettuces, or the like Potatoes should never go before a crop of seedlings, even of the 
coarser sorts, as ash, oak, or chestnuts ; because potatoes never can be taken clean out of the ground ; 
and it being indispeiisabk' to pull up those vhicii rise among tlie tree-seedlings, many of these unavoidably 
come up along with them. Hence, crops of lettuces, turnips, c.^bbages, or the like, should rather pre- 
cede the crop of seedlings. The best kind of management in this particular case, is to interchange the 
crops of timber-trees and esculents occasionally ; perh;;ps, with respect to most sorts of seedling-plants, 
alternately observing to sow all small seeds, in particular, if not in a rich, at least in a fine tilth." 
{Plant. Kal. 24.) 

6976. For a private inirsery, he continues, " no jilace, certainly, can be more eligible than a field, 
which may also be occupied as a kitchen-garden. If, for instance, three acres were required for the 
purposes of nursery, and one or two acres were also required for e.xtra kitchen-ground, or for green crops 
for cattle-fccding, it would be proper to enclose five or six acres, less or more, according to circumstances ; 
by which means two important objects might be obtained, viz. land of a good quality, and fine tilth, for the 
raising of seedlings ; and an opportunity of eflTectually changing crops at pleasure. Carrots are peculiarly 
scourging tor a nursery, and, indeed, rather severe for most lands : but we have very seldom found a 
good crop of trees following one of carrots ; while we have found peas, beans, and especially lettuces, 
easy and enriching crops, well adapted as preparers for succeeding crops of nursery articles " 

6977. In so far as respects public nurseries, " we have long remarked, that those which are as much 
market-gardens as nurseries, generally |)roduce the best jeedlings, and young articles, for sale; provided 
that their ground be any thing more tlian of a middling quality. This fact, if one were wanting, is a suf- 
ficient proof of the utility of occupying the ground as above advised, in the double character of a kitchen- 
garden and nursery." 

6978. In a cold climate, or Ijlcah- situation, " with a poor barren soil, we would by no means advise the 
raising of seedlings, either in public or private nurseries. It will be found a cheaper, as well as a more 
satisfactory method, to purchase seedlings, transplant them, and nurse them till fit for final planting; 
and, even, in this case, a piece of the best, and most sheltered land in the situation, will be neces.sary 
for the purpose." {Plant. Kal. 2fi.) 

G979. A rotting-ground will be required for the preparation of certain seeds, by mixing them with sand, 
ashes, or soil, and leaving them there for different periods, from six months to two years, to rot off their 
interior coverings. On a small scale, a portion of the com})ost-groimd of the kitchen-garden may be 
used for this purpose. If the scale is large, an area of a few square poles should be set apart for bed- 
ding in plants taken up (or replanting, or what is called laying in by the heels, or shoughing : this is ge- 
nerally called tlie bedding-ground or (in Scotland) the shoughing-ground. 

6980. Buildings. If the situation of the nursery be near to the kitchen-garden, and the latter have the 
proper office-buildings (1701.), no other erection will be required for the nursery than a working-shed for 
ordinary purposes, occasional shelter, and protection to newly taken up plants ; and for packing or tying 
them up properly before sending them to their final situation, &c. Frames and hand-glasses may be re- 
quired for some of the more tender seeds and seedlings ; and, on a large scale, a seed-loft and its ap- 
pendages, as well as an office for writing, &c. may require to be erected apart from those belonging to the 
Kitchen -garden. 

6981. Stocking with plants. The ground being arranged, and prepared by one or more vegetable crops, 
the next thing is to stock it with stools, or stock plants, to propagate from by layers, and to procure stocks 
for grafting or budding, but especially in a private forest-tree nursery with tree-seeds. In the tables of 
ornamental trees and shrubs (6540. to 6571.), given in the preceding book ; and in the general index at the 
end of the work will be found the particular mode of propagation, and the requisite soil for each 
tree and shrub : by inspecting these sources it will be seen what plants must be procured for stools. If 
the object is merely forest culture, few, excepting some of limes, poplars, and planes, will be required ; 
but, if tender trees and shrubs are to be reared, the number will be more considerable. Plant the 
tenderer sorts in the sheltered borders, and the more hardy in the open compartments: the tree kinds 
may be placed from six to eight feet every way, and the more delicate shrubs from three to six feet apart 
in suitable soils. Stocks for grafting, whether for fruit or barren trees, are to be planted in nursery 
rows, according to their kinds ; those for inarching round the parent plant (2007.) or in pots. 



Chap. VIII. 

Of the Culture and Management of a Nursery for Trees and Shrubs. 
6982. The princijial objects of culture in a private tree-nursery are the hardy trees and 
shrubs of the country, which produce seeds ; and the great object of the private nursery- 
gardener must be to collect or procure these seeds, prepare them for sov^^ing, sow them in 
their proper seasons, and transplant and nurse them till fit for final planting. We shall 
arrange the principal trees and shrubs which ripen their seeds in this country ; as cones, 
nuts, berried stones, berries with small seeds, leguminous seeds, and small soft seeds. 



Book 111. 



CULTURE OF A TREE-NURSERY. 



975 



Before treating of the gathering,' storing, separating the seeds, sowing, and nursery cul- 
ture, of each of these general divisions, it is essential to remark, that in collecting every 
kind of tree-seed, preference should be given to that produced by trees the largest and 
most perfect of their kind, and to the fullest and best-ripened seeds on these trees. The 
reasons have been too frequently given in this work to require repetition. 

Sect. I. Coniferous Trees and Shrubs, their Seeds, Sowing, and Rearing. 
6983. The jirincipal hardy coniferous trees and shi-ubs are as follow : — 



Juniperus virginiana, December 
Cupressus thuyoides, January 

— sempervirens, January 
Pinus balsamea, September 

— larix, December 

— canadensis, November 



Pinus sylvestris, November 

— picea, October 

— abies, November 

— nigra, November 

— pinea, December 



Pinus strobus, Octot)er 

— pinaster, December 

— cedrus, March. 

Shrubs. 

Thuya occidentalis, November 

— orientalis, November. 



6984. Cones may be gathered any time between the ripening season and the following 
April ; but the sooner they are gathered the better, as they supply work for the regular 
hands of the establishment in bad weather during the winter months ; or admit of giving 
industrious money-making persons work by the job in the winter evenings. The gene- 
ral mode of separating the seeds is by kiln-drying, in the same way as in drying malt, 
but applying a more gentle heat. 

6985. The cone-kiln is constructed after the manner of a common malt-kiln : the bearers should be 
about nine feet distant from the fire, and two inches apart. A wire cloth is sjiread over them from side to 
side of the kiln, and the cones are laid on it to the thickness of twelve or fourteen inches. A gentle fire is 
then applied, and regularly kept up till the cones become opened. During the time of drying, the cones 
must be frequently turned upon the kiln ; and when the seeds begin to drop out, they must be removed 
to the seed-loft, and sifted till all the seeds which are loose fall out, and be taken from among the cones. 
The cones are afterwards to be thrashed severely with flails, or passed through ahand-thrcshing machine, 
and sifted as before, and so on, till the seeds are taken out as completely as possible. It is, however, a 
safer method to split the larch-cones before putting them into the kiln. This operation is performed by a 
small flat triangular spatula, sharpened at the pohit and cutting-angles, and helved like a shoemaker's 
awl. The cone is held by the fore-finger and thumb of the one hand, upon a flat piece of wood, while, 
with the other, by the splitter, it is split up from the great end ; and afterwards each half is split up the 
middle, which parts the cone into four divisions. This is by far the best and least destructive to the seeds 
of any method we know ; because the cones so split, when exposed to the heat, are suddenly opened, and 
readily discharge the seeds ; which, consequently, are less injured by the fire-heat. Besides the above me- 
thod of splitting, there are others. Some people use a cone-mill, which has large sharp teeth in a con- 
cave cylinder, and others fixed in a corresponding roller. The m.ill is wrought by turning the roller by 
a handle resembling that of common fanners. The cones are let into the mill by a hopper. This instru- 
ment is very difficult to work, and bruises the seeds very much ; many of which are of course destroyed. 
We have several times made use of the com.mon improved bark-mill, for separating the seeds from larch 
fircones; but the cones are thus so much compressed and bruised, that the seeds suffer exceedingly; 
and we would by no means advise it : indeed, among all the methods which we have known adopted, to 
perform the painful and laborious work of extracting the seeds of the larch, the plan of splitting them 
singly is much the best and safest for the seeds, and ought to be adopted by every one who has occasion 
to use only small quantities of seed. None of the other kinds of cones require so much labor as the 
larch, excepting, perhaps, those of the cedar of Lebanon, and black American spruce. Cones, which 
have given out all their seeds, are generally, and very properly, used as fuel for drying other cones. This 
sort of fuel requires the attention of a very steady feeder ; indeed, the most careful and attentive ar^ apt 
to set the full or drying cones on fire, from the resinous nature, and tendency to flame, of the empty 
cones used as fuel. Such kilns should, therefore, be erected in situations far removed from a dangerous 
neighborhood. 

6986. The cones of Scots pine, the larch and the spruce, "are the principal kinds which are opened by 
kiln-heat. The cones of the silver fir, the balm of Gilead fir, and the Weymouth pine, give out their 
seeds with very little trouble : indeed, if they be not gathered soon in autumn, and kept from severe 
drought, they will fall to pieces of their own accord. Seeds of the white American spruce are only pro- 
cured from warm situations, and from America, and are generally sold in a clean state, or separated from 
the cones. Cones of the black and red spruce are brought from America, and sold in the state of cones. 
These should be split, and exposed in a sieve tilted before a gentle fire, with a sheet of paper below the 
sieve to receive the seeds as they fall out. The seeds should be removed every quarter of an hour; be- 
cause they are small, and are very easily injured by the heat." 

6987. The cones of cedar of Lebanon " should be kept for one year at least, after they are taken from 
the tree, before the seed be attempted to be taken out. This is necessary, on account of the soft nature 
of the seeds, and the great quantity of resinous matter which the cones contain when growing, and which 
is discharged by the keeping. The best way to take out the seeds of the cedar, is to split the cones, by 
driving a sharp conical piece of iron through the heart of them. This work, as well as the taking out of 
the seeds is greatly facilitated, by steeping the cones in water for a day or two, previous to splitting them. 
The coats of the leaves should be opened with the hand, and the seeds carefully taken out. The cones of 
the cedar are brought from the Levant, and may be purchased with safety for seed, although it be several 
years since they were taken from the tree." {Plant. Kal. S25.) 

6988. Solving. April is the best season for all the species ; the soil should be in ex- 
cellent condition, well mellowed by the preceding winter's frost and snow, carefully dug 
and raked as fine as possible. All the sorts are sown in beds, excepting the cedar of 
Lebanon and some pines ; and the manner of sowing is by cuffing or bedding in, already 
described. (1875.) 

6989. The soil for the Scotch pine, before being dug over in February, should be thickly coated with rot- 
ted hot-bed dung : the seeds snould be sown so as to rise at the distance of a quarter of an inch from one 
another ; and the covering should be half an inch thick. The best preparation for larch-seeds is a previ- 
ous crop of two-years' seedling Scotch pines, and next, a similar crop of the larch. The soil should be 
dunged and prepared as for the Scotch pine ; after sowing the seeds, both of this tree and the Scotch pine, 
previous to covering them, draw a light roller along the bed, to press the seeds firmly into the earth ; 
then cover a quarter of an inch thick. The larch should i-ise at the same distance as the Scotch pine ; but 
the seeds being generally more or less injured in separating, many do not come up, and they are therefore 
sown thicker than the other. 

6990. The seeds of (he spruce fir are to be treated like those ofnthe Scotch pine ; and the balm of Gilead 



976 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



fir-seeds, like those of the larch, only the covering should not be lees than half, nor more than three 
quarters of an inch. • 

6991. The seeds of the silver fir and pinaster require the same sort of treatment as those of the larch. 
" They must not be sown to rise nearer one another than three in an inch. The covering should be a 
full inch thick, and performed with great accuracy : for if any of the seeds be left too lightly covered, or 
if any of them be too deeply covered, they will alike be destroyed." {Plant. Kal. 332.) 

6992. The seed of the Wei/mouth and stone pines may be treated like those of the Scotch pine, but the 
former covered three quarters of an inch thick, and the latter an inch and a quarter. Sang states, that 
the only way to get stately trees of these, as of most of the pine tribe, is to sow them where they are to 
rise into timber. 

6993. The white Atnerican spruce-seeds " are smaller than those of any of the preceding kinds, and there- 
fore require a lighter covering than any of them. One fifth of an inch is quite sufficient. They should be 
sown on a piece of fine dry sandy loam, and be covered with earth of rotten leaves of trees to the above 
thickness, by sifting it upon them." {Plant. Kal. 333.) 

6994. The seeds of black and red American spruce fir " are very small and tender. They are still smaller 
than the seeds of the white American spruce, and therefore require a covering still lighter than men- 
tioned for it. The black and red American spruce should be sown on rich boggy earth, which has been 
made very fine ; and should be covered as lightly as possible. Rich mossy earth, containing a good por- 
tion of white sand answers best. This should be siftetl over the seeds with a fine sieve. Neitlier of these 
American spruces will allow the roller to pass over them previous to covering. The whole of them should 
be shaded from the mid-day sun in the time of coming up, and for some time after, by means of hoops and 
matting, or spruce fir branches stuck in the opposite alleys, so as to form an arch over the beds." 
Plant. Kalen. 334.) 

6995. Cerfar o/"ie6fl»Jon Sfetis should be sown in boxes of light sandy loam; or on a spot of properly 
prepared well sheltered soil, and covered half an inch : the red and white cedar-seeds may be similarly 
treated, covering a quarter of an inch thick. Arbo^-vita^ seeds wiU come up best under a frame or hand- 
glass : they should be sown on light sandy soil, and covered a quarter of an inch. 

6993. Tlie sf?ictest attention should be paid to the foregoing directions, both in regard to quality of soH, 
and thickness of covering the seed ; for, though resinous trees are extremely hardy when grown up, yet 
they are all very tender in infancy. The raising regular crops of this tribe is, therefore, justly reckoned 
the masterpiece of nursery culture in the open ground ; and is supposed to be best understood in the 
northern counties. 

6997. Transplanting. This tribe benefit less by transplanting than the non-resinous 
trees ; and therefore where circumstances admit, the better plan is, after the seedlings 
have stood two yeai-s in the seed-bed, to remove them where they are finally to remain. 
The exceptions are those sorts which are transplanted into pots, as the cedars and cy- 
presses, and some of the moi e delicate pines, which may be kept in the nursing state, in 
pots, several years, as their roots can be turned out entire. About the middle of April 
is the proper time for transplanting all the resinous tribe, excepting the larch ; for, as this 
tree pushes earlier than tl>e others, it should be transplanted in February and March. 
The first operation common to all seedlings is to loosen the roots of the plants in the 
seed-bed with a fork, so as, when drawn out by the hand, they may come up with all 
their fibres entire. The ground, which must be mellow, need not be so rich as for sow- 
ing the seeds ; being previously prepared, they should be immediately planted in the 
trench manner. (208.5.) The Scotch pine is generally planted in lines twelve inches apart, 
and tlie plants a foot distant in the lines ; if intended to remain two years in tlie lines, 
they should be placed six inches apart in the line ; but they always rise with the best 
roots, after being only one year transplanted. Tlie spruce and Ijalm of Gilead firs 
should generally be transplanted at two years ; but, if weak in tlte segd-bed, may remain 
till the third year. They should be planted at the same distances as the Scotch pine, in 
humid rich earth. The silver fir may be treated in the same manner, but it requires ra- 
ther more space. If to be nursed only one year, they may be planted in lines nine 
inches apart, and at six inches' distance in the lines ; but if to remain two years, then fif- 
teen inches between the lines, and eighteen inches in the line will be necessary. The 
Weymouth pine should be transplanted at two years into a well pulverised, rich, and sub- 
humid soil, where it should remain two years before final planting j distance between the 
lines twelve inches, and from plant to plant eight inches. 

6998. The pinaster and stone pi7ie generaWy rise to well sized plants the first season after sowing, and 
should then be transplanted into a rich well comminuted soil, rather sandy and dry, at nine inches be- 
tween the lines, and four inches apart in the lines. After remaining there one year, they should be re- 
moved to their final situation. Great care is requisite in moving these plants, especially the stone pine, 
which sends down very long roots. 

' 6999. The white American spruce, after remaining two years in the seed-bed, should be nursed two years 
in rich sandy and rather dry soil, in lines distant twelve inches, and the plants six inches apart in the 
lines. The black and red American spruce are much more delicate than the white. After being two 
years in the seed-bed, they should bo planted out in beds of sandy or subpeaty soil, al six inches apart, to 
stand for one year ; at the end of this period, they should be lifted and planted in rows at the same dis- 
tances as the white American spruce. 

7000. ^he cedar of Lebanon, when one year old, should be lifted and planted in pots of the finest soil ; 
or in lines, at the same distance as the silver fir; after being two years nursed, it should be removed to its 
final situation, as it never does much good if planted finally at a greater age, unless in pots, which is much 
the best method. The red and white cedars and cypress may remain two years in the seed-bed, and then 
be treated like the cedar of Lebanon. 

7001. The larch may be moved from the seed-bed into the nursing lines, at one or two years. The soil 
to receive them should be soft, tender, and prepared by a crop of esculent vegetables with dung the pre- 
ceding season ; but they should never be planted in land newly manured with fresh dung. One year's 
seedlings, to be nursed one year, should be planted four inches apart in the lines ; but if to stand for two 
years, five inches, and fifteen inches between the lines. The two years' seedlings should be sized, as in 
the seed-bed they never all rise to the same height ; the larger size may be placed six inches apart in the 
lines, and twelve or fourteen inches between the lines, to stand one year ; the smaller, at five inches, and a 
foot, for standing the same period : they should then be removed to their final situation. 

^ 7002. Care qf the roots. No description of tree-plants receive so much injury from the loss of roots ; 



Book III. 



CULTURE OF A TREE-NURSERY. 



977 



from the roots being exposed to the air by being kept long out of the soil ; or from compression and ex. 
elusion of air and moisture by being kept in close bundles, or thick layers, as those of the resinous tribe; 
they should therefore be finally planted as soon as possible after Yemoval from the nursery ; and, indeed, 
whenever it is practicable, no more should be taken up in one day than can be planted that day or the 
next. Nor are any plants more easily deprived of the vital principle, by packing and carriage either 
by sea or land; though, being all evergreens, excepting the larch, they do not readily show it. This has 
been stated to us, by experienced planters in Wales and other parts of England, as the reason why so few 
trees are finally produced from the immense numbers of Scotch pine and larch fir annually sent there by the 
Scotch nurserymen. 

7003. Pruning is not required by any of the resinous tribe in the nursery, unless to 
pinch off a contending leader, or amputate a bruised part of the root or top. 

Sect. IT. Trees and Shrubs bearing Nuts, Acorns^ Masts, Keys, S^c. their Solving and 

Rearing. 

7004. The 2)rincipal hardy trees bearing nuts, acorns, masts, &c. are the following : — 



Fraxinus excelsior, November 
Fagus sjlvatica, September, October 
. — castanea, November 
.Ssculus hippo-castanura, October 
Carpinus betulus, November 
Quercus robur, November 



Quercus prinus, November 

— alba, November 
Platanus occidentalis, December 
Acer pseudo-platanus, October 
Juglans regia, September. 



Slirubs. 

Amygdalus communis, September 
Staphylsea pinnata, October 

— virginiana, Oi:tober 
Acer communis, & various species, Sept. 
Corylus avellana, October. 



7005. Gathering ajid keeping. These being gathered, if circumstances permit, should 
be immediately sown ; but where this cannot be done, or where they are to be sent to a 
distance, they should be thinly spread in an airy loft till thoroughly dried, when they 
may be preserved till spring in bags or barrels, or sent off to any distance in these or 
other packages. When the seeds of the ash, sycamore, platanus, and hornbeam, are only 
to be kept for the purpose of spi-ing sowing, the best plan is to take them to the rotting- 
ground (.6979.), mix them with their bulk of dry sand or ashes, spread them in a stratum 
of ten inches in thickness, in the form of beds, cover with sand to the same thickness, and 
leave them in that state till wanted for spring sowing. - 

7006. Sowing. The bedding-in manner (2091.), or by drills, may be adopted for all 
the kinds. Acorns, horse and Spanish chestnuts, almonds, and hazel-nuts, should be 
sown in February, in strong loam, in good heart and well comminuted : the seeds should 
be placed half an inch apart, and covered two inches thick. Walnuts require a similar 
soil and covering, but should be placed two inches nut from nut. Ash-seeds will come 
up in soil of middling quality, but it should be well dug, and in an open situation, that 
the plants may not be drawn. Place the seeds half an inch apart, and cover one inch. 
Sycamore-plants when young being liable to be killed by the frost, the seeds should not 
be sown till the end of March or beginning of April ; they should be sown in exposed, 
dry, sandy soil, an inch apart, and covered one inch in thickness. On rich moist land 
they will rise so tall and soft, that the extremities of their shoots will not ripen in autumn, 
and the plants will in consequence be unfit for use. Beech-plants, when newly risen, 
are still more tender than those of the sycamore kind, and therefore should generally be 
sown in April, but not later than the middle of the month ; for if very dry weather set 
in, they will not rise till the following spring, and so have a great chance of them perish- 
ing by the frost. The soil should be tender and rich, previously under a culinary crop 
with dung ; and it should receive a small dressing of well rotted manure previously to 
digging for semination. The seeds should lie an inch apart, and be covered a full inch. 
The best time for sowing the hornbeam is in October; but it may also be sown in Fe- 
bruaiy : the soil should be light, but not very rich : the bed form answers best : the 
seeds should lie half an inch apart, and be covered half an inch in thickness. The 
plant is seldom raised from seeds ; but when this is done, a soft peat-earth soil is the 
best, and the covering should not be more than a quarter of an inch. The seeds of the 
bladder-nut, if sown as soon as gathered, will come up the following spring ; if not, a 
part will not rise till the second year : sow in light rich soil, and cover an inch and a 
half deep. 

7007. Transplanting. The operation of loosening the plants, sorting them into sizes, 
and pruning their roots and tops, require to be first performed. As these plants have 
generally long and strong tap-roots, these require to be cut in the operation of loosening ; 
which, for this purpose, must be performed with a sharp spade, and care taken in 
thrusting it down, that the root is not cut too high ; care should also be taken to pre- 
serve uninjured all the lateral fibres. In sorting the plants into two or three sizes, the 
fractured tap-root of each must be cut smoothly off with a sharp knife, and any side 
shoots on the stem cut close off. If the plants cannot be immediately planted, they 
may be laid in by the heels, or shoughed that is, thickly bedded in the bedding-ground 
(6979.) till wanted. Here they may remain in layers not more than three or four 
inches thick, for a month or two in the winter season ; and for a week or two even in. 
February and March. None of the kinds should remain in the seed-bed longer than 
two years ; but in drills they may remain three years j and more especially if tha 
operation of tapping be performed ; that is, cutting through their tap-roots about eight 
inches below the surface. " This is most effectuallv and readily done by two men with 

3 R ' 



978 



PRACTICE OF GARDIINING. 



Part III. 



sharp spades ; rutting or cutting the ground obliquely with their spades, on each side 
the line at once, and exactly opposite to each other. After this operation has been 
performed, the plants should be made firm, by a person treading the rows with a foot 
on each side. These kinds, so tapped, will, in the course of tlie following season, in 
consequence of being thus root-pruned, push many more fibres on the upper part of 
their roots, than they otherwise would have done ; and thus will the plants be better 
fitted for being transplanted into shallow soils, or indeed into any soil, than they would 
have been by being allowed to remain in the ground untapped till the time of lifting.'* 
{Plant. KaL 135.) 

7008. Trench-planting is decidedly the best for all plants to be placed in lines ; but more especially for 
ligneous sorts. Dibbing in is an easier and more rapid mode ; but by trench-planting the fibres are 
spread out and regularly disposed on each side of the main root; whereas, by dibbing, as Sang observes, 
they are " huddled together into a hole probably not more than an inch and half in diameter." Dibbing, 
however, may be adopted in the case of such seedling trees as have been robbed of most of their fibrous 
roots, by being pulled out in thinning beds intended to stand for two years. 

7009. The age at which most of these sorts should be transplanted is one year ; and the soil most desirable 
for removing them to, is the same as recommended for the seed-bed. The distances between the lines 
and the plants in the line depend partly on their kinds, but principally on the length of time they are to 
stand before retransplanting or final removal. The larger-growing broad-leaved sorts, as the chestnuts 
and walnuts, to stand only one year, should not be nearer than eighteen inches by six inches ; and the 
oak, ash, beech, &c. not nearer than fourteen inches by three inches ; if to stand for three years, the in- 
terspaces may be two or three inches more : something depends on the openness of the situation, and a 
good deal on the soil. The judicious nursery-gardener will consider all the circumstances, and adopt such 
variations of the ordinary distances as shall produce plants with well ripened shoots, and numerous fibrous 
roots. 

7010. Pru7ung, culture, ajid taking xip for Jinal planting. "When the plants are to 
remain two or more years in the nursery lines without removal, dig the ground between 
the rows in winter. At midsummer cut close off the lower side shoots ; some defer this 
work till winter ; but, besides the loss of sap avoided by midsimimer pruning, the 
wounds heal the same season. In taking up for final planting, such plants as have been 
trench-planted must be loosened on the side which was solid at planting ; if they have 
been in training for several years they should be lifted by throwing out a trench on one 
side, fully to the depth of the roots, and then putting in the spade on the opposite side, 
so as to get below all the roots. 

Sect. III. Trees and Shrubs loith berried Stones, their Sowing and Rearing. 

7011. The principal hardy trees tvith berried stones are the following : — 



Sorbus aucuparia, August 

— domestica, November 
Ilex aquifolium, November 
Pjrus torminalis, November 

— aria, September 
Taxus barcata, November 



Shrubs. 

Rhamnus alatemus, October 



Rhamnus frangula, September 

— communis, November 
Laurus nobilis, November 
Rosa, various species, October 
Pnmui padus, Aug;ust 

— Insitanica, September 

— virginiana, August 

— spinosa, October 

— canadensis, August 

— laurocerasus, September 



Hedera helix, April 
Daphne laureola, June 

— mezereon, June 
Viburnum tinus, June 
Phillyrea cingustifolia, February 
Mespilus oxyacantha, October 

— azarolus, October 

— pyracantha, November 

— amelajichier, November 
Juniperus communis, October. 



7012. Rotting. The whole of these when gathered, require to be taken to the rotting- 
ground ; mixed with their bulk of dry sand or ashes, laid in beds of ten inches in thick- 
ness, and then covered with ten inches of sand, light sandy earth, or ashes. Here some 
sorts, as the holly, will require to remain two years ; the haw, mountain ash, and yew, 
one year ; and the other sorts, one winter, or till the following February. During this 
time the beds of each kind should be uncovered, carefully turned over, and the covering 
replaced. ■< ■ The advantage of rotting off their exterior covering in heaps rather than in 
the soil, where they are to germinate, is the saving of ground ; for though some of the 
holly and haw, for example, will come up the next or the second season after sowing, 
yet, by keeping them one or two years in the rot-heap, we are sure all the seeds will ger- 
minate the same spring in which they are committed to the soil. To the above general 
remarks, the gean forms an exception ; for if sown immediately after being gathered in 
July, it will come up the following spring ; but it will keep in the rot-heap a year. \Mien 
any of these seeds are to be sent to a distance, instead of being carried to the rot-heap, 
they are spread thin in lofts, dried and packed in barrels; great care must be taken that 
they are sufficiently dried, otherwise putrescent fermentation vdVi commence, and the ve- 
getative principle will be destroyed by the heat evolved. 

7013. Sowhig. The season is generally February, and the manner by bedding in, as 
before. The haw, the most important of this class, should be sown in the lightest rich- 
est land in the nursery ; and if not very rich, some dung may be added. Sow in beds 
three feet four, or three feet six inches apart ; the seeds should lie within a fourth of an 
inch of each other, and be rolled with a roller of fifty or sixty pounds' weight, and exactly 
the breadth of the bed, previously to covering, which should be one inch deep. If the 
seeds are too moist to admit of drawing a roller over them, beat in the seeds with the 
back of the spade. This operation of rolling in seeds not only fixes them in their places, 
so as to admit of applying the covering with greater freedom, but by consolidation is cal- 
culated to retain moisture, exclude too much air, and thereby promote germination. 
Holly and yew seeds should be sown on rich friable soil, shaded by a wall or by wattled 



Book III. 



CULTURE OF A TREE-NURSERY. 



979 



hurdles, or otlier means, from the mid-day sun. The distance is the same as for haws ; 
they should be rolled, or beat in, and covered not more tlian half an inch. If previously 
rotted for two years, they will all come up the following May ; but if only one year in 
the rotting-bed, a part will not come up till the sec6nd year : in this case they should be 
sown thinj as tlie growing plants will impede the others in breaking through the soil. 
Mountain ash seeds require a fine and rather rich soil ; tlie seeds sliould not lie nearer 
than an inch, and the covering should be only a quarter of an inch. The gean should 
be sown, as soon as gathered, in deep sandy loam, the pulp being previously bruised ; it 
need not be very rich, but must be dug deep before sowing : place tlie seeds an inch 
apart, and cover three quarters of an inch thick. Gean-stones, which have been preserved 
in the rotting-ground for spring sowing, will not come up regularly the summer follow- 
ing, but a part will lie till the second spring. The advantage of sowing as soon as ga- 
thered, is therefore obvious. Great care should be taken not to sow the cherry for the 
gean, as the fornier is not nearly so well calculated for a timber-tree. Tlie seeds of tlie 
common and Portugal laurel, laurel-bay, mezereon, spurge-laurel, phillyrea, and the 
like, should be sown as soon as gathered, in rich soft soil, on a dry bottom : the seeds 
should be an inch apart, and be covered an inch. During the severest weather of win- 
ter, it will be advisable to protect them by hoops and mats. The seeds of the service, 
buckthorn, bird-cherry, and other species of prunus, rhamnus, and mespilus, may be 
treated like those of the laurel, but will not at all require so deep a covering, nor will any 
of them require protection in winter. 

7014. Trmisplanling. What has been advanced on transplanting plants from nuts, 
keys, &c. will apply here. Most of these species being smaller, will not require so great 
distances between the rows and plants. All the deciduous sorts may be transplanted in 
February or early in March ; and all the evergreen species from the middle of April to 
tlie middle of May, and during the month of August. The greatest, care will be requi- 
site in lifting evergreens from the seed-bed, where they have been already once moved, 
so as not to injure their fibres ; and on no account should more be taken up at a time 
than Avhat can be planted the same day. Select for them the soils most suitaiile to their 
natures (6974.), as far as tlie limits of the nursery will permit; and in general, rather 
prefer a shady situation, especially for the holly, yew, and all the laurels. Hollies hav- 
ing few fibrous roots should be frequently transplanted ; but this is not necessary with the 
yew, which has fibres in greater quantity. In transplanting the deciduous sorts, prefer 
narrow spaces between the lines, and wider intervals in the rows, to wide rows, and 
plants crowded in the row. One year's seedling thorns, for instance, to be nursed one 
year, may stand nine or ten inches by two inches ; if for two years, twelve or fourteen 
inches by three or three and a half inches. 

7015. For pruning, culture, and lifting for Jincd j'^^nting, see nut-bearing trees, &c. 
(7004.) 

Sect. IV. Trees and Shrubs bearing Berries and Cajysules ivith small Seeds. 

7016. The principal hardy berry and capsule bearing trees are the following : — 



Tilia europaea, November 
Pjrus communis, October 
— malus, October. 

Shrubs. 

Berberis vulgaris, September 
Buxus serapervirens, September 



Comus maiscula, October 

— virginiana, October 
Sambucus nigra, September 

— racemosa, September 

— canadensis, September 
Lonicera, various species, August 
Jasminuin fruticans, October 



Ligustrum \'ulgai"e, October 
Euonymus latiifolius, November 

— europseus, November 
Viburnum lantana, September 

— opulus, October 
Ribes gtossularioides, September. 



7017. Gathering and keeping. As this class of seeds are only wanted in small quan- 
tities, the most convenient way of preser\'ing them is in the seed-loft or root-cellar in dry 
sand. They should be frequently turned over to separate the seeds from the pulp and 
husks, and cleaned by sifting and fanning early in February. For sending to a distance, 
they are to be treated like berried stones ; or they may be separated and cleaned previ- 
ously to deportation. 

7018. Soiling. All of them require a soft and rather moist soil, with the exception of 
the box, which should have a soil rather sandy and dry. They may be sown in Febru- 
ary, in beds, and covered not more than a quarter of an inch ; and when the seeds first 
4jegin to vegetate, it will be an advantage to shade them from the sun, by wattled hur- 
dles ; place them across beds which lie north and south, and along those lying in a di- 
rection east and west. 

7019. Their tranqilanting aad future cidture are the same as for the foreign division. 

Sect. V. Trees and Shrubs bearing leguminous Seeds, their Solving and Bearing. 

7020. The j)rincipal hardy leguminous trees are as follow : — 



Cytisiis alpinus, October 

■ Kobinia pseud-acacis, November. 



' • Shrubs. 
Robinia caragana, November 



Colutea arborescens, October j Cytisus nigricans, Rejitember 
— cruenta, October I — sessilifolius, October 
_ pocockii, November I — austriacus, September 
media, October I — tomentosus, September 

Coronilla emerus, October | — laburnum, Octolier. 



7021, Gatherijig and keeping. These being collected are to be dried tlioroughly in aH 

3 R 2 



980 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



airy loft, and the pods being afterwards threshed or opened, the seeds may be preser\'ed 
in bags or boxes till spring, or sent to any distance. 

7022. Sowing. The season for sowing all of them is February ; the soil should be 
light, deep, and sandy, and the seeds placed an inch apart, and covered three quarters of 
an inch thick. This should be particularly attended to in the case of the laburnum, the 
seeds of which, being generally sure growers, if they rise thick, they lose their leaves 
about midsummer, become mildewed, and die. Attention should be paid not to inter- 
mix the tree-laburnum (C. alpinus, W. en.) with the shrubby sort. 

Sect. VI. Trees and Shrubs bearing small soft Seeds, their Sowing and Rearing. 

7023. The jirincipal hardy trees with small seeds are as under : — 



Alnus glutinosa, Kovember 
Hetulus alba, October 
Ulmus campestiis, June 

— glabra, June 
Populus nigra, May 

— tremula. May 



Populus alba. May 

— tacamahaca. May 
Salii alba, June. 



Cistus, various species, September 
Philadelphus coronarius, Uc&ber 
Salix pentandra, August 

— oabylonica, June 
Rhus cotinus, Euid other species, July. 



Shruhs. 
Syringa vulgaris, October 

7024. Gathering and keeping. All these require to be gathered as soon as ripe, other- 
wise some are apt to drop out of their capsules, as the alder, birdh, and lilac ; and 
others to be blown avvay and lost, as the elm, poplar, willow, and sumach. They should 
be gathered perfectly dry, and spread thin in a aiiy loft, till fit to put up in bags or boxes, 
for keeping or deportation, 

7025. Solving. Most of the sorts may be sown immediately after being gathered, in 
which case they will be more certain of genninating ; and a number of elms, poplars, and 
willows, will come up the same autumn. But as pi-otection during v,inter will, in that 
case, become requisite, the better way, in general, is to defer sowing till March or April, 
when all the sorts may be sown in light rich earth, rather moist, and covered not more 
than half an inch, Tlie principal tree of this class is the broad-leaved elm, which, where 
intended for two-year seedlings, which, in most cases, is the preferable age for trans- 
planting, should be sown to rise at least two inches apart, as the plants grow with great 
vigor even the first year. 

7026. Their transplanting and future culture are the same as directed for berried stones, 
keys, &c. 

Sect. VII. Culture common to all the Classes of Tree-seeds. 

7027. Insects and vermin. New-sowTi seeds of most kinds are greedily devoured by 
various descriptions of vermin. Mice attack " acorns, sweet chestnuts, hazel-nuts, wal- 
nuts, and holly-seeds. Tlaey not only eat them on the spot, but they carry to their re- 
treats great numbers of the seeds of which they are most fond. The cheapest, and per- 
haps the most effectual trap for their destruction, is the well known but neglected fourth 
figure trap. (fg. 668. ) The new-sown haws and 
mountain ash berries are a prey to the chaffinches, 
green linnets, and other birds. If the quantity sown 
be not great, the beds may be hooped over and co- 
vered with small-meshed nets. But if a great breadth 
of ground be sown, it must be constantly watched 
after sowing. If the Vv atching be vigilantly attended to, 
for a few days immediately after sowing, the seed will 
not need much more attention till they begin to break 
the groimd ; at which period the watching should be 
closely and regularly continued. As they are always the strongest and bestrripened seeds 
which rise first ; it is therefore of much importance to prevent these from being picked 
up." {Plant. Kalend. 250.) 

7028. Weeds. Before the tree-seeds come up a crop of weeds will probably have made 
their appearance ; these are to be removed when young, otherwise drawing out their roots 
will materially disturb the vegetating seeds. " It not unfrequently happens, that the land 
in which fir and larch seeds have been sown, becomes battered by heavy rains. This will 
certainly happen if rain fall immediately after sowing before the surface become dry ; 
but if it once be fully dried after sowing, and before the rain fall, it will seldom or never 
batter. Suppose, however, the seed-beds are battered, so that the tender seeds cannot 
rise with freedom, the best way to relieve them is to draw over them a wooden roller, 
stuck over with lath-nails at half an inch distance, and driven in so as to remain half an 
inch beyond the wood of the roller. The roller should not be more than thirty inches 
long and not more than thirty pounds weight. By drawing this roller along the one 
side of the battered bed, while walking in the alley, and returning with it over the other, 
an oi'dinary-sized bed will be completely relieved. Some people rake their battered beds, 
in order to enable the seeds to rise. This is a most dangerous and destructive method of 
relieving vegetating plants. From their tender state, the smallest twist breaks them 
over, and consequently destroys them. We have experienced much advantage from using 




Book HI. 



CULTURE OF A TREE-NURSERY. 



981 



the light armed roller, here recommended. It is, however, much better when no such 
are required. Tiie surest v/ay to guard against the need of such means, is to work the 
land when it is in a proper condition, and to sow the seeds in such weather as that the 
surface after sowing will be fully dry before rain come on. There is no dispensing with 
this precaution, when it is wished to secure an eqvial and good crop of seedlings." [Plant. 
Kal. 367.) 

7029. Birds. In May the pines and firs will Ijegin to pierce the ground with the 
husks of the seeds still on their tops, and then watching the birds becomes of the utmost 
importance ; not one ouglit to be allowed to light on the beds ; to prevent which will 
require unremitting attention from break of day till sunset, for five or six weeks, till the 
plants are all up, and have thrown off their husks. After the nuts, mast, and haws have 
come up, they are no longer in danger from mice, but they may be attacked by snails, 
and grubs of beetles and cockchaflTers at their roots. These are to be hand-picked. 

7030. Watering and shading. In June severe droughts very often set in, and these are 
very prejudical to small seeds, especially those of the resinous tribe, when rising through 
the soil. At this time watering and shading may be applied v/ith great advantage, pro- 
vided the former is accom.panied by the latter, and daily attended to from the time it is 
commenced till rain falls. The best mode of shading is by the wattled hurdle. By the 
end of July the seedling plants of most sorts will be out of danger, and excepting a few 
of the tender sorts specified as requiring protection in winter, or by a hand-glass or cold- 
frame, will require no other care but weeding till fit to be transplanted. 

Sect. VIII. Of propagatijig Trees hrj Layers, Cuttings, Suckers, Grafting, ^c. 

7031. Xayer/n^' is next to rearing from seeds the most general mode of propagating 
hardy trees and shrubs. The more common species of .forest trees to v/hich this mode 
is applicable, are the Acer Platanoides, pseudo-platanus, tartaricum, dasycarpum, 
opalus, negundo, and other species ; Betula lenta, populifolia, and rubra ; Fagus fer- 
ruginea ; Platanus occidentalis and orientalis ; Fopulus grffica, monolifera, and cane- 
scens ; Tilia alba, americana, europaea, and pubescens ; and Ulmus campestris, ne- 
moralis, and suberosa. Some of these, as the poplars and planes, are also propagated by 
cuttings ; but layers make the strongest plants. Whenever seeds can be procured, how- 
ever, it is best to propagate in that way, as likely to produce the largest trees. The other 
trees propagated by layers, will be found in our Encyclopcedia of Plants, and in the 
arboricultural catalogue ; and also all the shrubs so propagated. The situations and dis- 
tances for planting stools in the nursery have been already mentioned (6981.) ; and, as 
there is nothing peculiar in the operation of layering timber-trees or shrubs, we have 
merely to refer to the general directions as to layers and stools. (1993.) The young or 
preceding year's shoots of all the sorts above enumerated, if layered in autumn or winter, 
will be fit for being detached and planted in nursery lines by that time tv/elve months. 
They should be transplanted into well comminuted soil, as far as practicable, suitable to 
the nature of each ; the distances should be regulated by the size of the layers and the 
time they are to be nursed. For ordinary purposes layers need not be nursed more than 
two years ; but for single trees and ornamental plantations, they should be several times 
removed, and close pruned, till they have attained six or eight feet in height. Evergreen 
trees and shrubs, as being more tender than the others, should be layered in March and 
April, and from August to October. Some sorts root most freely when the wood is in a 
succulent state ; and of such the current year's shoots are laid about midsummer. 
This is practised with Stuartia, Arbutus, Andromeda, Kalmia, Azalea, Magnolia, 
Alaternus, Phillyrea, Laurus nobilis and sassafras, Zanthoxylum, Pyrus japonica, &c. 
The same practice is adopted with other free-growing sorts that it is wished to multiply as 
rapidly as possible; as the Rosa (6546.), Hibiscus, Lonicera, Aristotelia, Mespilus, 
&c. Layers of the last sorts made during summer from the same year's shoots, will be 
fit to detach by the winter or the following spring ; of the other sorts seldom sooner than 
the second August or autumn ; but even then a season is gained, as the layers of those 
plants made in autumn, generally require to remain two years before they have m.ade suf- 
ficient roots. The layers of all evergreens should be removed at the proper seasons for 
pruning, laying, or transplanting that tribe ; that is, in April and May, and in August 
and September. 

7032. By cutting is the next most general mode of propagating trees and shrubs, and the 
common forest trees generally so multiplied are as follow : Platanus occidentalis and 
orientalis ; Populus angulata, balsamifera, dilatata, graeca, monolifera, nigra, pendula, 
and trepida ; Salix all the tree species ; and Sambucus nigra. Tliese are also propagated by 
layers, and a few of them by seeds ; v.'hich last, it should never be forgotten, is by far the 
best mode where timber-trees is the object. Tiie numerous tribe of shrubs propagated by 
cuttings, will be found in the Encyclopcedia of Plants already referred to. 

7033. The manner of formini^ a)id plantinfr: cuttings has been already described. (2063.) The season 
for deciduous and evergreen woody plants aire the same as for layering ; and as in the latter mode of 

3 R 3 



982 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



prc^agation, so in multiplying by cuttings, some sorts succeed best when the current year's wood is taken 
at midsummer j as for example, Laurus sstivalis, benzoin,, and sassafras, Bignonia, Euphorbia, Phlomis, 
Rosa, Santolina, &c. Cuttings of some of these sorts, made of year-old wood in spring or autumn, re- 
quire to stand two seasons before they have made sufficient roots to admit of their removal ; by midsum- 
mer cuttings one year is gained. The same practice may be applied to deciduous sorts ; but the plants 
produced are not so strong as by cuttings of ripened wood. All cuttings require to be planted in a shady 
situation, and sandy soil, dry at bottom ; but kept somewhat moist by occasional watering in dry weather ; 
their lengths are generally made in proportion to the length of the year-old wood, but seldom exceed- 
ing six or eight inches. The shoots of some sorts, as poplar, willow, honeysuckle, &c., are divided into 
several cuttings of this length. An inch of the former year's wood is often preserved in autumn-made 
cuttings ; but this is not essential ; as more important points are, making a smooth horizontal section at 
a bud, and in planting, pressing the earth very firmly to the lower extremity of the cutting. Midsum- 
mer cuttings should in almost all cases be covered with hand or bell glasses. The alder, most willows, 
the Lombardy, and some other poplars, will grow from cuttings or truncheons of several feet long, and 
of several inches in diameter. " This method is occasionally adopted, when it is requisite to form expe- 
ditiously some rough plantation, to serve as a hedge or screen along an outward boundary. Cuttings 
for this purpose may consist of long slender rods of one or two j-ears' growth, or as well of large trun- 
cheons or stakes from three to six feet in length. Further, the willow, in particular, will increase from 
large pole-cuttings of from six to ten feet, planted out at once to form either pollard-stems, or be trained 
into full standards." {Abei-crojnbk.) 

7034. The season for transplanting struck cuttings into nursery lines, are those already mentioned as 
the most fit for moving deciduous and evergreen trees, originated by other modes. (6983. to 7023.) 

7035. By suckers. A few common trees, and a number of shrubs are propagated by 
suckers. The timber-trees are the Ailanthus glandulosa, Robinia pseud-acacia, Populus 
canescens, alba, and tremula, and Ulmus campestris. Of liedge plants, the common sloe 
and other wild plums, crabs, and pears, are, or may be so propagated. Various 
shrubs are propagated by suckers. Suckers make better trees than plants raised from 
cuttings, and also very good hedge plants. To induce a tree to send up suckers, the 
horizontal roots may be laid bare, notched in different places, and the earth mixed with 
sand and replaced ; a powerful co-operative would be to cut the tree over by the surface, 
by which means all the sap would be employed in root-shoots. At the end of one, but 
sometimes not till the end of the second season, the suckers will be fit to slip off, or to 
separate by the knife with a part of the parent root attached ; they may then be pruned 
as required, and planted in nursery lines, 

7036. Grafting, budding, and inarching, are modes applicable to a few hardy trees and 
shrubs. The common forest trees are the Fraxinus americana, Populus candicans, 
heterophylla, and laevigata, Pyrus Aria, Quercus exoniensis, and Ulmus campestris and 
suberosa. These, and the ornamental trees and shrubs so propagated, are worked on 
stocks of the more hardy species of the same or of the next allied genus ; and, probably, 
make as durable plants for timber-trees as layers ; by which mode the above enumerated 
sorts are also propagated. Tlie stocks should be at least one year established, previously 
either to grafting or inarching : the operation for deciduous sorts is performed in spring 
at the rise of the sap. (2910.) Evergreens are almost always inarched either in April, or 
May, or August. Budding is performed in June and July, and is chiefly used in pro- 
pagating the rose. (6553.) Some inarched sorts require two seasons before the scion can 
be detached from the parent plant. 

7037. General citlture and management of a jrtnvate nursery. There is nothing ma- 
terial to be advanced on this head, but what has been already recurred to in this chapter, 
or in treating of the general management of the kitchen-garden. The first grand point 
is so to arrange the rotation of crops, that a crop of culinary vegetables shall intervene 
between every crop of trees, where that crop remains on the same soil two or more years ; 
and between every two or three crops, where the crop of trees is lifted annually or the 
second year. The next thing is changing the surface of the soil, as in horticulture 
(2557.), weeding, stirring the surface, watering, shading, pruning, training, staking, 
and protecting. Tlie important points of management are to procure the proper quanti- 
ties of seeds or stools requisite to produce the quantity of trees to be annually furnished ; 
to proportion the number of plants taken up daily to the number replanted in the nur- 
sery or forest the same day, and to attend to general order and neatness. 



Chap. IX. 
Arboricidtural Catalogue. 

7038. In our arboricultural catalogue we mean to enumerate, and shortly describe, the 
principal timber-trees which may be cultivated with advantage as such, in the climate of 
Britain, and also the most useful plants for hedges. We shall arrange the whole as 
resinous, hard-wooded, and soft-wooded trees ; including in each section the hedge 
plants belonging to it, and in the last, the willows proper for osier-plantations ; the 
general culture of the trees contained in each of these sections, has been given iji chapters 
III. IV. VII. and VIII. 



IJooK III. RESINOUS OR CONIFEROUS TREES. 983 



Sect. I. Resinous or Coniferous Trees. 

7039. The resinous forest trees are comprised in three genera belonging to the natural 
order of Coniferece, J. ; viz. Pinus and Cupressus, Moncec. Monad. L., and Juniperus, 
Dicec. Monad. L. The trees which are valuable as timber are comprehended under 
the genus Pinus, which comprises the three subdivisions of pines, larches, and firs. The 
first is distinguished by fasciculated leaves in different sheaths, but proceeding from the 
same sheathing base ; the second by fasciculated 
leaves from solitary sheaths ; and the third by 
solitary leaves. The branches of the whole genus 
are frondose or spreading, and caducous : those of 
the pine tribe spread the least ; those of the larch 
tribe rather droop ; and those of the firs are thin 
and much spread, and are peculiarly frondlike. 

7040. The wild or Scotch jnne, erroneously de- 
nominated Scots fir, is the Pinus sylvestris, L. 
{Lam. pin, 1. t. 1 .) Pin, Fr. ; JCeifer or Fdhre, 
Ger. ; and Pino, Ital. {jig. 669. a) It is an 
evergreen sub-conical tree; the foliage inclining 
to dark-blue or grey; shorter and broader than 
those of the stone pine (b) ; it is common in most 
parts of Europe, particularly the nortliern coun- 
tries, and is the only species of the genus indigenous 
to Britain, being a native of Scotland, and natu- 
ralised in England and Wales. Under favorable 
circumstances it attains the height of seventy or eighty feet : it flowers in May, and 
the cones are fit to gather in December. The finest pine-woods in Britain are at Inver- 
cauld, in Invernessliire, and Gordon Castle, in Aberdeenshire. 

7041. Use, The timber of this tree is the red or yellow deal of the north of Europe, and is the most 
durable and valuable of any of the genus, unless we except .the common larch. The universality of its 
application is known to every one. The Highland pine, Sang states to be not inferior to any imported, 
either in cleanness or durability, when it has been grown on a proper soil, and to a sufficient age. " But 
the planted Lowland pine," he adds, " is seldom ajiplied to offices higher than that of roofing sheds or 
huts, lining of carts, lathing, or making of packing-boxes ; while the natural or self-sown is fit for the 
finest purposes." Pontey considers the English-grown wild pine, if properly pruned and grown to a 
sufficient age, as likely to equal that of foreign growth. The tree is of great value as a nurse-plant ; 
being next to the common birch and bastard mountain ash, or mountain sorb {Pyrus hybrida), the most 
hardy timber-tree. Among its minor uses we shall only mention the production of tar by incision, 

7042. Varieties. Of these, several have been noticed by botanists, and some consider the P. maritima 
{sp. WUld.) as nothing more. According to Sang, the variety commonly cultivated is least worth the 
trouble. " The P. sylvestris, var. montana," he says, " is the variety which yields the red wood : evea 
young trees of this sort are said to become red in their wood, and full of resin very soon. The late dis- 
tinguished Don, of Forfar, exhibited specimens of cones of each variety to the Highland Society of 
Scotland, and likewise to the Caledonian Horticultural Society. The variety preferred by Don, is 
■distinguished by the disposition of its branches, which are remarkable for their horizontal direction, 
and for a tendency to bend downwards close to the trunk. The leaves are broader and shorter than in 
the common kind, and are distinguishable at a distance by their much lighter and beautiful glaucous 
appearance. The bark of the trunk is smoother than in the common kind. The cones are thicker, and 
not so much pointed. The plant is more liardy than the common sort, grows freely in almost any soil or 
situation, and quickly arrives at a considerable size. " Sang says, he has seen trees of this variety at 
Caristoun and Brechin Castle : and it is much to be wished that he or some other competent nurseryman, 
in that quarter, would collect the seeds, and propagate it extensively. Thouin (Notes sur la Culture de 
Pins, 8vo. 181&,) mentions a variety, which he calls P. syl. var. pin de riga, as affording the best timber. 
Whether the pine which forms the extensive plantations along the sea-coast at Bourdeaux, and is called 
by foreign authors, Pinus maritima, be a variety of P. sylvestris or a distinct species, does not appear to 
be ascertained. The plant is tender, and easily killed by frost when young ; but its timber is said to be 
of excellent quality. [Radcliff's Flanders, 950.) 

7043. Soil and native site. " This tree is naturally the inhabitant of mountainous districts, and of rocky, 
gravelly, or poor sandy soils, where its timber becomes most valuable and durable. On the sides of moun- 
tains, in dells and hollows, among stones and rocks, beside rapid rivulets or mountain torrents, it is found 
in high perfection ; and if it stand single, it is of great beauty. In many parts of the Scots Highlands, 
where the soils are extremely various, and much mixed, the Scots pine has arrived at a good size, and 
often attained remarkable dimensions. In any kind of soil from a sandy to a day, provided the substra- 
tum be rubble or rock, it will grow and flourish; but in wet tilly soils, it ought never to be planted; 
because whenever the root^ have exhausted the turf or upper soil, and begin to perforate the sub-soil, the 
tree languishes and dies." [Plant. Kal. 65.) 

7044. Insects. The larva of Noctua Pinastri, L. {Xylena, Htib.O are deposited in the leading buds, and 
often perforate the young shoots, and leave the tree without a leader. The infests the tender 
shoots ; and various dermestidce live in the bark, and perforate the soft wood. 

7045. The Corsican pine {P. laricio, P. S.) is a native of the mountains of Corsica and is nearly allied 
to the Scotch pine. There is a specimen in the Paris gardens, planted in 1784 and 56 feet high in 1821, 
thus described by David Don. " P. laricio is a much handsome and finer tree than P. sylvestris with 
which however it in some respects agrees. It is of a more pyramidal habit, and its branches are shorter 
and more regularly verticillated. Its leaves are a third longer, and of a livdy green, with their sheaths 
nearly entire." Its cones arc shorter, ovate and quite straight, with depressed scales : and its bark is finer 
and much more entire. The enlightened Professor of Agriculture informed us, that it is equally hardy 
with P. sylvestris, and that its wood is much more weighty and resinous, and consequently more compact, 
stronger, and more flexible. It grows wild on the summits of the highest mountains in Corsica. It 
seems to bear cones very freely, which ripen nearly about the same time as those of P. sylvestris. 

7046. The pitch or red Canadian pine (P. resinosa) {Lam. inn. 20. t. 4.) is an Ameri-; 

3 R 4 




PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



can tree, introduced in 1756, not unlike the Scotch pine, and " receives its name from 
the color of the bark. From the high geographical range of this pine, it is well adapted 
to associate with the P. sylvestris. It has been imported in the form of masts into this 
country. Like the P. sylvestris, it affords an inferior timber on a damp and unsuitable 
soil." {Caled. Hort. Mem. i''. 367,} 

7047. The innaster or chister-jnne (P. pi)iaster, L.) {Lavi. pin. 9. t. 5.) {Jig. 669. b) 
grows to the height of fifty or sixty feet, with broader, thicker, and longer leaves than the 
common pine (a) : the branches are also farther apart, and grow more horizontal than 
in that tree. As the tree advances in age it becomes naked and unsightly below ; but 
the top grows highly picturesque, and may readily be distinguished in the landscapes 
of the Roman and Florentine painters. It grows naturally on the mountains of Italy 
and the south of France ; in Switzerland it is cut into shingles for covering their houses, 
and also for making pitch. It flowers in April and May, and the cones are fit to be 
gathered in December. It was introduced in 1596, but never much cultivated, being 
less hardy and much less valuable as a timber-tree than the common pine. It is very 
picturesque, and well merits culture in that point of view. There are some large speci- 
mens at Culzean Castle, on the sea-coast of Ayrshire. 

7048. The stone pine (P. jnnea) {Lam. pin. 11. t. 6, 7, 8.) { f g. 669. c) grows fo a 
considerable height, with a straight stem and rough bark. The leaves are not quite so 
long as those of the pinaster, and are of a greyish or sea-green color. The cones are five 
inches in length, round, thick, and obtuse ; the kernels are large, and frequently served 
up in desserts during the winter season in Italy and the south of France, and they are 
also much relished by the Chinese, for the same purpose. It is a native of the south 
of Europe ; very common about Ravenna, and forming a distinguishing ornament of 
the villas of Rome and Florence. It was introduced here in 1570 ; but as the wood is 
not so resinous as most of the other sorts, it has been only cultivated for ornament. 

7049. The swamp, Georgia, pitch, or long-leaved pine {P. palustris) {Lam. pin. 27. 
t. £0.) { fig. 669, d) is a valuable and a lofty tree in America, affording planks, which, 
imported in this country, are valued 20 per cent, higher than any other American tim- 
ber excepting the black larch. The leaves are a foot or more in length, produced in 
tufts at the ends of the branches, and having a singular appearance. It grows in a 
Avarmer climate tlian most other pines ; and if it were found to produce equally valuable 
timber in the low warm situations of England, which it does in America, it would be a 
most valuable tree. It was introduced in 1730, but has been yery little cultivated. 

7050. The IVey month or New England larch, ~-~-~^z:^^^~~~^i<i^^''' ■ J/'^ j j']'' ' 
commonly called Weymouth pine, (P. Strobus) V ////L // 
{Lam. pin. 31. t. 22.) {fig. 670.) formes the con- ^^==^— • > / / / -/ / 
necting link betv/een the pine and larch tribe. 
It is one of the tallest of the genus, attaining in 
America the height of 100 feet and upwards. 
The bark is smooth and delicate, and the leaves 
soft and of a bluish green. Vast quantities of 
the timber, under the name of the white pine, 
are imported from America ; but the tree seems 
to be of so delicate a habit, as to prevent our 
expecting it ever to become a large or valuable 
tree with us, especially in exposed situations. 
It was introduced in 1705, and has been a good 
deal cultivated, having formerly been supposed 
the most valuable tree of the genus, next to the 
common pine. The largest specimens are at 
Mersham-hatch, Sir E. Knatchbull's seat in Kent, 
and at Whitton Park in Middlesex. 

7051. TJie cedar-larch, or cedar of Lebanon, is the P. cedrvs, L. {Lam. pin. 59. t. 
37.) Cedre, Fr. ; Cederbaum, Ger. ; and Cedro, Ital. It is distinguished from all other 
trees of the genus by its strong ramose branches, which, in some cases, deviate from the 
common character, and become irregular in shape, and permanent in duration. The 
general character of the shoot, even when the tree is young, is singularly bold and pic- 
turesque, and quite peculiar to the species. The tree is a native of the coldest part of 
the mountains of Libanus, Amanus and Taurus ; but it is not now to be found in 
those places in great numbers. Maundrell, in his journey from Aleppo to Jerusalem 
in 1696, could reckon only sixteen large trees, though many small ones: one of the 
largest was twelve yards six inches in girth, and yet sound ; and thirty seven yards in 
the spread of its boughs. The forest of Libanus never seems to have recovered the 
havoc made by Solomon's forty score thousand hewers : so that we have now, as Pro- 
fessor Martyn observes, probably m.ore cedars in England tlian there are in Palestine. 
The tree is siipposed to have been introduced here in 1683. The oldest specimens are 




Book HI. 



RESINOUS OR CONIFEROUS TREES. 



985 



two in Chelsea-garden ; but there are more magnificent ones at Whitton Park, Zion 
House, Pains-hill, Warwick Castle, and other places. 

7052. Use. The tree has been very generally planted for ornament, and from its branchy lioad, and its 
aversion to pruning, it is not likely ever to become a valuable timber-tree in this country. When planted 
for that purpose, it should, as Sang recommends, be sown in groves, and thus by proximity drawn up with 
few branches. Much has been said of the timber which borders on the miraculous ; as far as cxjierience 
has gone, it is greatly inferior to that of the common larch, or the wild pine. Its great use is as a single 
tree in lawns, where it combines beauty and singularity in a degree not "to be found in any other tree. It. 
has also an excellent effect in the margin of plantations, and one or two plants will give force and character 
to the dullest front of round-headed trees, and effect a great deal even in the fronts and sky outlines of 
plantations with spiry tops. {Jig. 560.) 

7053. The common larch is the P. Im^ix, L. {Lam. pin. 53. 35.) Lanv or Melcze, 
Fr. ; Lerchenbauvi, Ger. ; and Laricio, Ital. It is the only species of the genus, the 
leaves of which are deciduous ; it rises to eighty or a hundred feet high, forming a nar- 
i-ow cone of small white-barked caducous, pendulous branches, with delicate drooping 
spray. It is a native of the Alpine mountains, on the north sides of which, in hollows 
and chasms, it attains to its greatest height and thickness, and most durable timber. In 
returning from Italy, by the Simplon, the silver fir will be found in great perfection in 
the hollows on the south side, the common Scotch pine on the summit, and the larch 
in descending to the Vallais. It appears to have been cultivated by Parkinson in 1629; 
and Evelyn, in 1664, speaks of a tree of good stature, " not long since to be seen at 
Chelmsford, in Essex, (also mentioned by Haile,) which sufficiently reproaches our 
not cultivating so useful a material for many purposes." Harte, in his excellent essays, 
published in 1715, gives a figure of the larch, and strongly recommends its culture. 
It was first introduced into Scotland by Lord Kames in 1734 (Lam. jnn. t. 35.), and 
afterwards in 1741, planted by the Duke of Athol at Dunkeld, and these last trees have 
prospered so astonishingly, and the timber produced from such as have been cut down, 
has so fully answered all the eulogiums that have been bestowed on it, that the larch is 
now considered on the whole, as decidedly the most valuable timber-tree, not even ex- 
cepting the oak. Some of tlie first-planted larches in the low grounds, near Dunkeld, 
have grown to the height of one hundred and twenty feet in fifty years, which gives an 
average of two feet four and a quarter inches a-year. It is stated by the Duke of Athol, 
in a communication to the Horticultural Society, made in June, 1820, that on moun- 
tainous tracts, at an elevation of fifteen or sixteen hundred feet, the larch, at eighty 
years of age, has arrived at a size to produce six. toads (300 cubic feet) of timber, ap- 
pearing in durability and every other quality, to be likely to answer every purpose, both 
by sea and land. (Hort. Trans, iv. 416.) Professor Martyn (Miller s Diet, in loco) 
has brought together a mass of valuable information respecting the history of the larch 
in this country, and its uses in others. That singularly accomplished agricultural 
writer, Dr. Anderson, did much to promote its increase by his essays and other works 
from 1750 to 1790; and subsequently the Bishop of LlandalF, Marshall, Nicx)l, Pontcy, 
and Sang, have each, in practice, and by their popular publications, contributed to 
spread the tree ; and now several millions are annually planted in the mountainous dis- 
tricts of the empire. The larch, Sang observes, passes all other tiinber-trees, for the 
first ten or tvventy years after planting, and will arrive at a timber size in almost any 
situation or soil. It bears, he says, *' the ascendency over the Scots pine in the follow- 
ing important circumstances : that it brings double the price, at least, per measurable 
' foot ; that it will arrive at a useful timber size in one half or a third part of the time, in 
general, which the fir requires ; and, above all,, that the timber of the larch, at thirty or 
forty years old, when placed in soil and climate adapted to the production of perfect 
timber, is in every respect superior in quality to that of the fir at a hundred years old. 
In short, it is probable that the larch will supersede the Scots pine in most situations in 
this island, at no very distant period." The finest specimens of this tree are at Dun- 
keld, Blair, and Monzie, in Perthshire. 

7054. Use. Much has been said of the durability of larch-timbev in Italy : its resistance to fire, accord- 
ing to some (Matthiolus), and its great combustibility, according to others (Du Hamel) ; its durability 
under water (.at Venice), and its not being liable to warp (Harte). We shall confine ourselves to its uses 
as experimentally proved in Britain ; and perhaps we shall do this with most effect by stating tliat it rnay 
be used for all the purposes for which the best foreign deal is applied ; for many of those of the oak ; and 
that it is more durable than an.y other timber when placed in a situation between wet and dry, especially 
if the bark be not removed, it being still more incorruptible than the wood. The bark is also of consider- 
able value in tanning ; a circumstance of great im.portance, since it is found that disbarking a year or more 
previously to felling is the bestmode of seasoning the timber (6955.), and preventing it from warping, or being 
attacked by the dry or wet rot. (5927. and 6926.) One property almost peculiar to the larch is, that the timber 
is exceedingly valuable at every period of its growth ; so that a dead hedge of larch-boughs, or a hurdle 
wattled with larch-spray, will last longer than dead hedges or wattled Inirdles of any otiier si)ecies of tree. 
Planted in rows in exposed gardens it forms a useful hedge plant in point of shelter ; but in this respect is 
deficient as a fence, and gets soon naked below. Rods, stakes, pales, rails, posts, and especially gate-posts, 
of this tree, are tlierefore more valuable than of any other ; the sjiruce fir ai)proaching the neai-est to it in 
these respects. Turpentine is extracted from it in the Tyrol ; but that being always injurious to the 
timber, can never be recommended for adoption in this country : it is also peculiarly valuable as a 
nursing-tree. 

7055. Varieties or species. Of the V. larix, there is a variety with red and another with white floAver.s 
one with cinereous bark, called the lUissian larch, and one with pendulous branches. There are also the 



986' 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Pari III. 



black larch (P. pendula) and red larch {P. microcarpa), natives of America, by some considered distinct 
species ; the timber of both of which is said to be harder than that of the common white larch. As 
these trees are only to be met with in the nurseries, originated by layers, they cannot be recommended to 
be planted as timber-trees. There are, however, a few large specimens at Dunkeld and other places ; 
and from these the trees will probably soon be propagated by seed, and a practical estimate be formed of 
their merits. There are some trees of the red larch on the Athol estates, but they do not contain one 
third as many cubic feet of timber as the white larch at the same age. The wood is so ponderous that it 
will scarcely swim on water. (Hort. Trans, iv. 416.) • ... 

7056. Soil and site. The larch will grow and attain a large size in every soil and situation, excepting in 
standing water ; but a certain elevation of surface, or coldness of climate and inferiority of soil, is abso- 
lutely necessary to produce the timber in i>erfection. The quality of the timber of all trees is more or less , 
effected by climate and soil ; but that of the resinous tribe particularly so. We pointed out several 
instances in 1806. (Treatise on Country Residences, ii.) Sang mentions a number as having occurred since ' 
1812 [Plant. Kal. 59.), and observes generally that he has " known it in many places make the most rapid 
progress for 30 or 35 years, and though there was no external signs of disorder, yet, when it was felled, 
the wood had begun to rot in the hearts of the trees ; so that there was scarcely a sound tree over a large 
extent of ground ; yet here, the oak, the chestnut, the elm, and the ash, amongst which the larch 
had been used as a nurse, ai-e not only in the utmost vigor, but their wood is perfectly sound. Some 
larches in a similar soil and situation had attained seven feet each, and were quite hollow a good way 
upwards." 

7057. Insects. The Coccus laricea, and the others mentioned as inhabiting the common pine. 

7058. The Norway Jir, or common spruce fir, (P. Abies, L. (Lam. pin. 13. t. 25.) 
Sapin, Fr. ; Fichte, or Tanne, Ger. ; Abiete, Ital.) is the first species of that section of 
pinus in which the leaves are solitary. It is one of the tallest of European trees, attains 
from ]00 to 150 feet in height, v/'ith a very straight but not thick trunk, and throwing 
out its spreading frond-like branches so as to form an elegant narrow cone of vivid green. 
It is a native of the north of Europe, and particularly abundant, as the name imports, 
in Norway : its timber being the white deal received from that country and the Baltic. 
It is supposed to have been introduced about 1548, and has been, and still is, more 
cultivated than any species of the genus, excepting the common pine and the larch. 
Some of the finest specimens are in Harefield Park, at Blenheim, and at Temple 
New sham. 

' 7059. Use. The timber is inferior to that of the common pine in durability and bulk ; and being often 
knotty, is not proportionally strong for horizontal bearings with that timber. White Norway deal, how- 
ever, is used for a great variety of purposes in building ; and the entire trees are more prized than any 
other for masts for small crafts, for spars both for marine puiposes and on land. What constitutes the 
value of this fir is, that its timber is equally durable at any age, like that of the larch ; and what renders 
it peculiarly adapted for masts, spars, scaffolding, poles, &c. is its habit of almost in every case, whether 
standing single or detached, growing perfectly erect and straight. The tree may be cut for rods, stakes, 
and scythe or other implement handles, when the trunk at the base is not more than two inches in dia- 
meter, and the bark being kept on it, it will prove almost as durable as the larch. Pontey says, that poles 
of spruce are so far inferior to those of the larch, that they are more apt to crack when exposed whole to 
the influence of the sun and air; but in all other respects it is nearly equal to it, and in straightness sur- 
passes it. The tree is peculiarly valuable as a nurse, from being evergreen, and closely covered with 
branches, by which radiating heat is retained ; from its conical shape and rigid stem, by which it does 
not suffocate or whip the adjoining trees ; from its being valuable at whatever age it is thinned out; and 
from its being an excellent shelter for the most valuable game. It will not, however, grow in situations 
where the common pine and larch will flourish. It is also an excellent hedge plant for shelter, but is 
deficient in point of defence and durability. By incision, it yields a resin, from which, by various pre- 
parations, turpentine and Burgundy pitch are formed. The tops or sprouts {sprvytsen, Ger.) give the flavor 
to what is called spruce-beer. 

7060. Varieties and species. Linnsus has five varieties of P. abies ; but the principal are, the white 
(P. alba) {Lam. pin. 39. t. 26.), the red (P. rubra) {Lam. pin. 45. t. 28.), and the black (P. nigra). {Lam. 
pin. 41. t. 27.) These are all natives of N. America, and their timber, which is white, possesses nearly 
the same properties as that of the European species. The-v;hite spruce rises only to 40 or 45 feet, with 
pale bluish-green leaves. The black spruce is reckoned the most durable of the tritvj. " In America, the 
black spruce is used for knees in ship-building, where neither oak nor black larch can be easily obtained : 
these knees are not prepared from two diverging branches, as in the oak ; but from a portion of the base 
of the trunk connected with one of the largest diverging roots. The timber of the red is universally pre- 
ferred throughout the United States for sail-yards, and indeed imported for this purpose into Liverpool 
from Nova Scotia, where it is also used for constructing casks for salted fish. It is chiefly from the decoc- 
tion in water of young shoots of the black, and not exclusively from those of the white spruce, as sup- 
posed by Lambert, that the celebrated beer is prepared by fermentation, with a due proportion of sugar 
or molasses. The essence of spruce of the dealers is prepared by evaporating this decoction to the con- 
sistence of honey." — • - ---^ 

7061. Soil and site. Pontey says it grows rapidly on every description of soil, from a very stiff loam, 
and such as possess a very considerable degree of humidity, to a very dry sand, provided the situation be 
not very much exposed. Sang says it luxuriates much in deep low situations : in shallow soils and ex- 
posed places it never succeeds. It " should never be planted for the sake of its wood, excepting in masses 
or groves by itself ; otherwise its timber is so coarse and knotty, that it is hardly worth working : but in 
the mass way, if planted thick, and properly pruned and thinned afterwards, it maybe trained to tall clean 
timber." 

i 7062. Insects. Coccws flfo>rc'5, and occasionally the others which infest the common pine. 

7063. The silver Jir (P. Picea) (Lam. jnn. 46.'t. 30.) (Jig. 671. a) is a lofty ever- 
green tree, forming a cone broader at the base, in proportion to its height, than the 
spruce, and displaying a mpre stable and majestic figure than any of the other firs. 
It is more thinly covered with frond-like branches than the spruce, and diflfers from it 
also in regard to the frondlets, which, when they grow old, and begin to decay, do not 
droop down as in that tree, but remain rigid till the last. The upper surface of the 
leaves is of a fine vivid gi-een, and their under surface has two white lines rimning length- 
wise on each side of the midrib, giving the leaves that silvery look, whence has arisen 
the name. It flowers in May, and the cones are ripe in December. It is a native 
of the Alps and Germany, was known here in 1603, and has been a good deal planted 



Book III. IIARD-WOODED NON-RESINOUS TREES. 



987 




but its characteristic or 



as an ornamental tree. It grows faster for the first 
twenty or thirty years of its growth than any other 
tree of the genus, excepting the larch. Some of the 
finest specimens in England are at Woburn, in the 
evergreen-drive, planted by Miller. The tree 
called the grand silver fir there, measured, in 1810, 
nine feet ten inches in diameter, at four feet from 
the ground ; it has a clean-pruned stem of seventy- 
five feet, and the estimated height is upwards of. 
110 feet. 

7064. Use. The timber is reckoned inferior to that of the 
common pine, and is not of much value till of forty or fifty 
years' growth. According to Sang, though till of late years 
planted only as an ornamental tree, " yet there is, perhaps, 
none of the genus more worthy of cultivation for the sake 
of its timber." It is more prolific in resinous matter than 
any of the fir kind. 

7065. Its soil and site are nearly similar to those most 
desirable for the common spruce ; but it requires a climate 
rather milder, and a more loamy earth. On poor sands, 
where the common pine and larch will thrive, it dies off in 
a year or two after planting. None of the genus are more majestic on a lawn ; 
natural situation, is in dells, and on the sides of sheltered rocky steeps. 

7066. The balm of Gilead fir (P. Balsamea) {Lam. pin. 48. t. 31.) (fig. 671. b) is 
an American tree of much smaller stature, and more delicate habits than the silver fir. 
Its timber is of little value ; nor can the tree be reckoned very ornamental, though fre-^ 
quently planted for the sake of variety. The balm or resin procured from it possesses 
no medical properties superior to those of common turpentine ; but the tree during sum- 
mer sends out a pleasing terebinthinate odor. 

7067. The hemlock-spruce, or hemlock fir, (P. Canadensis) {Lam. pin. 30. t. 32.) {fig. 
671. c) is a drooping, low, evergreen tree, which may be considered as entirely ornamental. 

Sect. II. Hard-wooded non-resinous Trees. 

7068. Of hard- wooded trees we shall give a few descriptive traits of the principal species j 
the most important of which are the oak, ash, elm, chestnut, and beech. 

7069. The oak is the Quercus, L. Monoec. Polyan. L. and Amentacece, J. Chme, Fr.; 
Eich, Ger.; and Quercia, Ital. Tlie following species and varieties are planted for their 
timber. 

7070. The common oalc [Q. robur) {Eng. Bot. 1845.) is a native of Britain. It grows to the height of fifty 
or sixty feet when in a heavy loam ; flowers in April, and ripens its acorns in October and November. 
The most valuable variety of the common oak is said {Caled. Hart. Mem. iii. 376.) to be the pedunculata 
{Eng. Bot. 1342.), or the stalk-fruited ; by some considered a distinct species. It is distinguished from 
Q. robur by the marked circumstance of the acorns being placed on long fruit-stalks, whilst those of the 
fobur are nearly sessile. Besides, the superior utility and hardiness of the timber, the pedunculated oak 
is, in fact, the more magnificent of the two British sorts. Miller says, this variety of the Q. robur (and 
which he calls the fcemina,) is more rare than the sessile-fruited ; but Professor Martyn says, this is not 
the case, and that the pedunculated is equally general as the other. It is observed by Du Hamel, that 
oaks in forests being propagated from the acorn, there are so many varieties that it is difficult to find two 
resembling each other in every respect. Professor Martyn observes, that the figures in ancient authors 
have the fruit uniformly on foot-stalks, which shows that that variety had been most common : and Ray 
considers it as the common oak of England. Du Roi affirms, that the timber of the sessile-fruited is red- 
dish, and brittle, whilst that of the stalk-fruited is whitish and hard. From these and various accounts, 
as well as our own observation, we consider ourselves justified in recommending to nurserymen and others, 
who gather acorns for seeds, to take effectual precautions that only the stalked sort be gathered. 

7071. The Turkey oak {Q. cerris) {Du Roi, 2. t. 5. f. 1.), a native of the south of Europe, introduced in 
1735. This species is distinguished by oblong, pointed, and frequently lyrate leaves, jagged, and a little 
hoary on the under side. The acorns are small, and have rough prickly cups. The tree grows from forty 
to sixty feet high. There are several varieties, but the best is that called the Devonshire or Luccombe, from 
the name of the person who raised it from seeds, saved from a tree of the Turkey oak grown in Devonshire. 

7072. Other oaks. There are about forty species of exotic oaks introduced in this country, which may 
be considered as timber-trees, and are such in effect, in their native countries. Of. these the greater part 
are natives of America ; and it has been recommended {Caled. Mem. iii. 378.) to cultivate the Q. tinctoria 
or Quercitron on account of its bark, which affords a valuable yeUow dye ; all these species, however, are 
either too tender, or too scarce, or too dwarfish, and slow-growing, to warrant us in considering any 
other than the common and Luccombe oaks, as fit for the purposes of profitable planting. 

7073. Use. The oak cannot be considered 
so valuable a tree for general purposes as the 
common pine and larch; but its great ^ „ ^ 
strength and durability will probably longx^^:-^ IglT' v-^s^^;^!^^'5*^ss^^^^ 

maintain its superiority in Europe, and thc^^s==-^ — QT^'^M 
other temperate regions of the globe, as' '£=^- ^ Ji4////!i„i <,mSsr-i_ 

a material for naval architecture. The 
timber is useful at every age, and more dur- 
able when of small diameter than that of 
any other of the hard woods ; the value of 
the bark of young trees is greater than that 
of such as are old. 

7074. Soil and site. It grows best in a deep 
clayey loam, not beyond a moderate elev- 
ation above the sea ; but it will grow in any 
soil not marshy, not attaining, however, a 
i.irgo size in poor sands or at a considerable elevation. 




988 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



7075. Insects. Tlie egger moth {Phalcena Quercus, L. ; Lasiocampa, Leach) {fig. 672.) 
species, and its larvag sometimes denude entire branches. The small gnat ( Cynips Quercus 
folii, L. Diplalepis, Leach) {fi,g. 673.) pierces the leaves with its sting, and deposits its 
eggs in the wound; the extravasated juices rise round it, and form a gall, which be- 
comes hard, and in this the larva lives and feeds, and changes to a pupa. The oak- 
galls of commerce are so formed ; the best are imported from Turkey and Greece. 

7076. The ask is the Frctxinus, L. Poli/gam. Dicec L. and Oleince, 
B. P. Frtne, Fr. ; Asche, Ger. ; and Frassino, Ital. There are two species which may- 
be considered as forest trees. 




7077. The co)nmon ash [F. excelsior, L.) {Eng. Bot. 1692.) is a native of Britain, and grows from sixty to 
eighty feet in height, with a straight stem. It has pinnate leaves, which come out late in spring, generally 
from April 22d to May the 15th, and fall early in autumn ; it flowers in April and May, and the female and 
hermaphrodite plants ripen their seeds or keys in November. Of this there is a variety, the simple-leaved 
{simplicifolla), possessing no advantages as a timber-tree, and rather to be avoided by the'profitable planter, 
as generally propagated in the nurseries by layers. Raised from seeds it produces pinnate leaves. 

7078. The white or American ash, F. Americana, W. {Mich. Arb.) This is a lofty tree like the other, 
distinguished by the whiteness of its bark, narrow leaves, and smaller seeds. It is found in Jersey and 
Pennsylvania, where it attains the height of eighty feet, with about three feet in diameter at the base. 
It is patient of cold, thrives in deep fresh soil, by the banks of rivers, and unites all the good properties 
of the common ash. There are two varieties, the red and blue : by some accounted distinct species. They 
are smaller trees, and present no advantages to the profitable planter over the two species mentioned. 

7079. Use. The ash is unquestionably the most valuable indigenous timber next to the oak ; and in 
some places, as copse, is more valuable than that tree. It is more especially used by the cdachmaker and 
agricultural carpenter. The wood is useful when the stem is only three inches in diameter. Toughness 
and elasticity seems to be its characteristics, and for this purpose, the faster the tree grows the better. 
Timber from a tree of slow growth, and considerable age, is uniformly found to be more or less brittle, and 
therefore more or less unfitted for the purposes to which this tree is applied, especially shafts or poles of 
carriages. As underwood, it is fit to cut every seven years for crate- ware for the potteries, hoops, and hop- 
poles, requiring for those products little or no thinning or culture, but merely periodical cutting. It forms 
excellent fuel, burning when green or new better than any other tree. " A fe^v ash-pollards," Professor 
Martyn observes, " will produce many loads of lop, which makes the sweetest of all fires." Thea.shes af. 
ford more potash than those of most trees ; and the bark is used occasionally for tanning, and will dye 
yellow. 

7080. Soil and site. It will not thrive on thin soils, where the bottom is wet, nor in mossy earth or 
gravel ; but in most others it will do well : and above all, in a hollow, where a friable loam hhi accumu- 
lated from the </ei7vs of surrounding rocky heigiits, and is drained by a rivulet. Such rocky dells and 
dingles abound in Perthshire and Fifeshire, and in them the ash is to be found in great perfection. It will 
not thrive at a great height above the sea, nor in bleak situations anywhere. 

7081. The elm is the Ulmus, L. Penland. Dig. L. and AmentacecB, J. Orjne, Fr. ; 
Ulmehaum, Ger. ; and Olmo, Ital. There are two species which may be regarded as tim- 
ber-trees. 

f 

7082. Tlie English or narrow leaved elm, U. Campestris. 
{Eng. Bot. 1886.) {fig. 674. a) It is considered a native, or 
naturalised in England, by Sir J. E. Smith and others ; but Dr. 
Walker considers'it as brought originally from the Holy Land. 
It wouldbedifficult to pointoutany situation whcreithas the 
appearance of having sprang up from seeds ; though it is said 
to be common in the woods of the north-west of England. It is 
certainly theloftiest of the deciduous trees of this country, be- 
ing often found upwards of eighty feet high It flowers in 
April and May, and ripens its seed in a fortnight or three 
weeks after the decay of the flower. This species requires 
a dry soil, rather good than indifi'erent, and also a good cli- 
mate. It does not thrive in the north of England or in Scot- 
land, unless in good soils and moderately sheltered places. 
Professor Martyn says, it is not found north of Newark on 
Trent. It grows to a great size in a short time. Evelyn 
says, in little more than forty years it will arrive to a load 
of timber. RIarshall says, the largest narrow-leaved elms 
he has seen, are in the Vale of Gloucester, and of these, the 
best is Piffe's elm, near the Baddington oak. At five feet 
high it girts sixteen feet ; at ten feet it throws out large 
arms, which rise seventy or eighty feet. Some of the elms 
in the mall of St. James's Park are upwards of 200 years 
old. Bcutcher says,. that he sold a line of English elms, 
above sixty in number, which at twenty-four year's growth 
were about eighteen inches in diameter, a foot above ground, and forty feet high. 

7083. The Dutch elm (introduced with King William), U. major (E. B. 2161.), U. suberosa, W. It is chiefly 
remarkable for its fungous rough bark, large rugose leaves, and rapid growth. The timber is of little use. 

7084. The Scotch or smooth-barked elm {U. glabra) (E. B. 2248) (.%. 674. is readily distinguished 
by its smooth dark lead-colored bark, and by its leaves, which are nearly smooth on the upper surface. It 
is the most useful timber-tree of the genus, and is almost the only tree of the elm kind planted in Scotland, 
where it also forms stocks for grafting the Dutch and English elm. A nev/ variety of this species has at- 
tracted notice at Downton, which Sabine {Hort. Trans, vi. 146.) proposes calling the Downton elm. A 
very rapid-growing variety, called the Scampston elm, is in vogue in Durham and Northumberland. 
{Agr. Surv. of Burham, ch. x.) 

7085. Other species. The genus ulmus, like salix, is one of those whose species are so nearly related as 
to be often confounded. LinuEEus considered all the European elms as forming only one species. At 
present botanists make five British species, besides an equal number from America. The U. campestris 
and glabra, however, are the only sorts worth cultivating for their timber. {Don, in Hort. Tour, 539.) 

7086. Use. Elm-tirnber is used in all works where it may be continually dry or wet ; as, for water-pipes, 
pumps, water-wheels, &c. It is also very generally used for weather-boarding, and for common cabinet- 
work. The knotty parts like those of the ash, are used for naves and hubs. The lop and top make good 
fuel and charcoal. . , .,, , 

7087. Soil and site. The narrow-leaved elm requires a light dry soil and warm situation, and will do 
little good in sand or gravel, in exposed places : but the smooth-barked sort is a very hardy tree, and will 
grow in thin clayey soil on retentive substrata better than most others. It will also thrive io situations 
elevated and exposed on all sides. 




Book III. 



HARD-WOODED NON-RESINOUS TREES. 



989 



7088. The beech is the Fagus sylvatica, L, {Eng. Bot. 1846.) Monoec. Polynn. L. 
, and AmentacecB, J. Hetre, Fr. ; B 'dche, Ger ; and Faggio, Ital. It is a native of Eng- 
land, and grows in its natural soil and situation to sixty or eighty feet high. It is found 
congregated in forests, in chalky flinty soils, thrives well in sheltered bottoms : but not 
where it is exposed to the west. There are fine specimens of this tree at Castle Howard, 
Woburn, Newbottle, and Dalkeith Park. It is not so long-lived as the elm, nor will it 
grow in situations so much elevated as will the Scotch elms. 

7089. Use. The timber is brittle, and decays soon in the air ; but under water it is more durable. It 
is used by the millwright, turner, carver, last and wheel maker, chair and cabinet maker, and more or less 
in other branches. It is much used by bakers and in glass-houses as billet-wood ; and the stack -wood 
forms an excellent charcoal. 

7090. Soil and site. Dryness and some degree of calcareous matter are the characteristics of the soil in 
which the beech delights ; and the declivities of hills facing the east or south are its favorite situations. 

7091. The common hornbeam is the Carpinus Betulus, L. (Eng. Bot. 2032.) Moyiocc. 
Tolyan. L. and Amentacece, J. It is a native tree, nearly allied in habits and ap- 
pearance to the beech, but is less lofty, and thrives in colder stiffer soils, and in rather 
more elevated situations. It flowers in April, and ripens its seeds in November. 
" Although Evelyn is perhaps too partial to the hornbeam, yet, raised from seed, it forms 
a tree of the first rate, equalling the common beech in magnificence ; but unfortunately 
the hornbeam, like several of our best forest trees, may with ease, almost at any period 
of the year, be propagated from layers, and the usual consequences of this practice, fol - 
low, — a stinted, bushy, dwarf-like progeny. This tree, however, retaining its decayed, 
shrivelled, pale-russet leaves during winter, like the common beech, forms mo.st valua- 
ble shelter planted in hedges." {Cal. Mem. ii. S97.) 

7092. Use. Chiefly in turnery, being white and tough as the name imports. It is frequently used as a 
substitute for the beech. 

7093. Soil and situation.^ A dry soil is essential, whether cold or chalky. It is a social tree, and found 
in natural copse-woods, as in Hertfordshire ; but never at any great height above the level of the sea. 

7094. The Spanish chestnut is the Castanea vesca, W. ; Fagus Castanea, L. (Eng. Bot. 
886.) Monoec. Tolyan. L. and Amentacece, J. It is the Chdtaignier of the French; 
Castanienbaum of the Germans ; and Castagno of the Italians. It is one of the most 
magnificent of European trees, exceeding the oak in height, and equalling it in bulk 
and extent. It is doubtful whether it be a native of Britain, though it ripens its fruit in 
sheltered valleys even in Scotland. It seems a very long-lived tree, of which the best 
proof is the specimen on Mount Etna, two hundred and four feet in circumference. 
Boutcher says, the shade of the chestnut, like that of the ash, is injurious to other plants. 
The leaves which continue late in autumn are not liable to be eaten by insects like those 
of the oak. The Spanish chestnut has been already described as a fruit tree. (4745.) 
As a timber-tree it is used for the same purposes as the oak ; though by some con- 
sidered as more brittle when old. The roof of Westminster Abbey, and that of the 
Parliament House in Edinburgh, with many other antient works, are said to be con- 
structed of it ; but considering that it is not a native tree, this is extremely improbable ; 
and it is much more rational to suppose, with Professor Martyn and Daines Barrington, 
that what is by many taken for chestnut, is only oak of a different grain. It is used by 
the cabinet-maker and cooper ; makes an excellent coppice-tree for poles and hoops ; the 
bark is equal in astringency to that of the larch and mountain-ash for tanning ; and the 
leaves and nuts afford food both for men and deer. 

7095. Soil and situation. The soil in which it thrives best is a deep sandy loam, and the situation one 
somewhat sheltered. In Calabria, and on the Apennines between Florence and Bologna, where we have 
seen it in abundance, it does not attain a great size on the higher and more exposed parts of those moun- 
tains, but is, as Sang observes, a surprisingly magnificent tree in the hollows. Pontey says, " on sandy 
soils, where the oak would make but slow progress, I have seen the chestnut grow extremely quick, and 
therefore, in such cases, the latter should be used instead of the former." 

7096. The walnut (Juglans regia) has been already treated of as a fruit-tree. (473.) 
Its timber, when of mature age, is valuable as a cabinet wood, and for gun-stocks, being 
light, hard, and durable. 

7097. The common sycamore is the Acer Pseudo-]>latanus, L. (Eng. Bot, 303.) Polyg. 
Monoec. L. and Acerece, J. It is one of our hardiest native trees, and equal in mag- 
nitude with, though more tame in its outline and form than, the oak. It flowers in 
April and May, and ripens its keys or seeds in November. Its foliation is earlier than 
that of most trees, and its decadence is next to that of the ash. It is a quick grower, 
will endure the sea-breeze better than most trees, and is not liable to grow to one side 
when exposed to winds that blow chiefly in one direction. 

7098. Use. The timber is chiefly used by the turner and millwright, and formerly, when earthenware 
was less common, it was in great request for trenchers and other table and household utensils. It affords 
a saccharine juice, like the sugar and other American maples, from which a wine may be made. 

7099. The Norway maple (A. platanoides) is a tree common in the native woods of Li- 
thuania ; and in Norway it clothes the hills from the sea-shore to their summits. It 
grows to a large size, and its leaves die to a golden color. Its timber does not differ ma- 
terially from that of the sycamore. 



990 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



7100. Soil and situation. Both thrive best in a soil similar to that preferred by the ash, but will grow 
in all inferior soils, and exposed to the sea-breeze as well as at a great height above the level of the sea. 

7101. The mountain ash is the Pyrus aiicuparia, E. B. {Eng. Bot. 337.) Icos. Di- 
Fentag. L. and Rosacece, J. It is a low and very hardy native tree, attaining the height 
of twenty or thirty feet, with a straight, clean, erect stem, and globular compact head. 
It flowers abundantly in April and May, and ripens its berries in August or October, 
according to the situation. 

7102. Use. In profitable planting it is chiefly valuable as a nurse-tree, growing very fast when young, 
and enduring the most severe exposures.' The timber is used by wheelwrights, and for other common 
country purposes : the bark is used by tanners ; and the berries afford a dye. As aa undergrowth it affords 
tolerable poles and hoops. 

7103. Soil and site. It will grow in any soil, ary or wet ; and as to situation, it is found on the sea- 
shore, and near the tops of the highest mountains. It seems to thrive best on the sides of most rocky 
dells and dingles. 

7104. The whitebeam-tree [Pyrus aria) {Eng. Bot. 1858.) is a very hardy native tree, 
growing to the height of thirty or forty feet, with an erect stem. Its uses and culture 
are the same as those of the mountain-ash. Its white leaves, and coral berries mealy to 
the taste like those of Pyrus torminalis (4768.), have a fine effect in autumn. 

7105- The acacia, or locust-tree. — Bobi}iia pseud-acacia, L. {Schmidt, arb. 1. t. 32.) 
JDiadelph. Decan. L., and LeguminoscB, J. Tliis is a thorny fast -growing tree, of mid- 
dling stature, a native of America, of no great beautj' as a tree, but ornamental when 
young, and very well adapted for copse-wood and rough timber. It flowers in June and 
July, and ripens its seeds in September. The leaves come out late in spring, and fall 
off early in autumn like those of the ash. 

7106. Use. The timber is much valued in North America, and said to be superior to that of the labur- 
num ; " being close-grained, hard, and finely veined ; and in America more valued by the cubinet- 
raaker than any other native timber whatever. Pursh, in his late valuable Flora, asserts, that being 
nearly incorruptible, it is equally useful for posts and gates. We are informed by a friend, that gate-posts 
of this timber, on a property near Baltimore, have remained fresh for nearly a century. The finely pin- 
nated leaves, and pendulous white odorous flowers, add greatly to its beauty. Its value is scarcely known 
in this country." {Caled. Mem. ii. 414.) 

7107. Soil arid site. It prefers a deep sandy soil, and rather sheltered situation; being very apt to 
throw up suckers from the running roots, and as it stoles freely, it seems pecuharly calculated for cop- 
pice-woods. Beatson (Com. to Board of Agr.) has cultivated it in this way to great advantage. 

7108. The birch is the Betula, L. Monoec. Poly. L. and AmentacecB, J. Bouleau, 
Fr. ; Birchenbaum, Ger. ; and Betulla, Ital. There are two species which may be con- 
sidered valuable as timber-trees. The common birch {B. alba, var. pendida) {Eng. Bot. 
2198.) is a middle-sized native-forest tree, distinguished by its white bark, fragrant 
leaves, and graceful pensile form. It grows in the coldest regions of the north, and 
farther up the sides of the British mountains than any other timber-tree. In the swampy 
grounds of Sweden and Russia it grows to a much greater size than in the more temper- 
ate climate of this country. It is of importance to cultivate the pendulous variety as a 
taller and more rapid-growing tree independently of its variety. 

7109. Hie American birch, mahogany-birch, mountain ?}M- 
hogany, or cherry-Urch of Canada, is the B. lenta. {Midi, 
arb. 2. p. 145. t. 4.) {fig. 675.) This is a more lofty tree than 
the common birch, with a brown-colored bark spotted with 
white. " It abounds most in the middle states of Pennsyl- 
vania, New York, and the Jerseys, where it attains a height 
of seventy feet ; but disappears altogether in the higher lati- 
tudes of the northern states, and is scarcely to be found in 
Nova Scotia, It is therefore likely to succeed with us in the 
moist and deeper soils of our Highland valleys, especially 
when closely associated with other trees. The probability 
of this is heightened by various facts already ascertained-. 
The value of the timber is well known to our cabinet-makers ; 
and we have seen tables, bed-posts, and other articles of fur- 
niture made of it, equalling in beauty- those of mahogany, 
which it resembles, when some time exposed to the light, the 
newly wrought boards being of a rose-color. Although of 
an exceeding quick growth, the grain being naturally close, 
it takes a fine polish in cabinet-work. We add to this, that 
the leaves, which appear early in spring, are said to possess 
a peculiar fragrance, which they retain when dried by means 
of a stove, affording, on infusion of boiling water, an agree- 
able diluent, superior to some of the common teas of com- 
merce." {Caled. Mem. ii. 380.) 

7110. The poplar-leaved birch {B. populifolia) {fig. 676. a) 
and Hudson's birch {F. Hudsonii) {fig. 676. b) are elegant rapid-growing trees, and when once they are 
so common as to be propagated from seed, will deserve culture as timber-trees. 

7111. Use. The timber of the common birch in England is chiefty used as fence-wood, fuel, and occa- 
sionally for harrows, &c. and other agricultural implements, the tree being most frequently planted as a 
nurse to others for coppice or variety. This tree, Uke the mountain ash, will grow in almost every 
kind of soil and situation. 

7112. The wild cherry is the Primus avium, L. {Blachv. t. 425.) Icos. Di-Pentag. 
L. and Rosacece, J. Guigne, Fr. ; Wild Kirsclien, Ger. ; and Ciriegio SUvatico, Ital. 
It is a native tree above the middle size, the timber of which is of considerable value. 
It thrives best in dry sandy loams ; and in such situations. Sang observes, its timber 
becomes of most value. It is of peculiar beauty in spring when in flower, in August 




Book III. HARD-WOODED NON-RESINOUS TREES. 



.991 



when in fruit, and in autumn when its leaves 
change to a beautiful red and yellow. . Its timber 
is chiefly used by the cabinet-maker and chair- 
maker. 

7113. The tree-laburnum. — Cytisus alpinus, W. 
en. {Bot. Mag. 176.) Diadelph. Deca7i. L. ■ and 
Leguminosce, J. It is a low tree, a native of 
Switzerland, cultivated chiefly for ornament, but 
affording also a valuable timljer. For this pur- 
pose the variety or species (C. alpinus), with broad 
leaves and long racemes, is decidedly to be pre- 
ferred, as being much more of a tree than the 
other. Sang says, it has a full claim to the cha- 
racters of useful and ornamental ; is beautiful 
when in flower, and may, in a grove, be trained 
to a fine stem of very considerable size. 

7114. Use. The timber (the false ebony of the French) 
is much prized by cabinet-makers and turners, for its 
hardness, beauty of grain, and durability. The tree is frequently sown in plantations infested with 
hares and rabbits, who will touch no other tree as long as a twig of laburnum remains. " Though eaten 
to the ground in winter," as Boutcher observes, " it will spring again next season, and thus afford' a con- 
stant supply for these animals, so as to save the other trees till of a size to resist their attacks. The timber 
has been sold for upwards of half a sovereign per foot." It becomes most valuable in light loams and 
sandy soils. 

■7115. The Jiolli/ is the Ilex aquifolium, L. {Eng. Bot. 496.) Pent. Monog. L. and 
Bhamni, J. Houx, Fr. ; Stechbaum, Ger. ; Agrifoglio, Ital. It is an elegant, shining, 
evergreen tree, rising from twenty to thirty feet high, affording a timber of considerable 
value, and much in use as an ornamental hedge plant. It is a native of Britain, of 
great longevity, and found growing in woods and forests, as an undergrowth to the 
oak, beech, ash, and fir. It thrives best in a free deep loam , rather light, as in Need- 
• wood Forest, in Staffordshire, and the fir-forest of Blackliall, near Aberdeen. It is a 
cheerful-looking tree from its shining leaves and coral berries, and peculiarly fit for 
ornament. 

7116. Use. The timber, which is as white as ivory, is chiefly used in inlaying and veneering, and by 
turners and mathematical-instrument-makers. The straight shoots, of five and six feet in length, make 
excellent coachmen's whips. Birdlime is made from the bark by washing and separation of the woody 
fibre. Sheep and deer eat the croppings. It is the best of all hedge plants. It thrives best in cold loamy 
soils, and rather sheltered situations. 

7117. The hazel {Corylus avelana), already treated of as a fruit-shrub (4752.), forms a 
hardy useful undergrowth in most situations, supplying hoops, crate-ware, basket-stuff, 
walking-sticks, rods, poles, withies, fence-wood, fuel, &c. ; besides the fruit, where the 
soil is tolerable, is worth something, and an excellent charcoal is made from the 
stack- wood. 

7118. The box-tree {Buxus sempervvrens, L. (^Eng. Bot. 1341.) Moncec. Tetran. L, 
and EuphorbiacecB, J. Buis, Fr. ; Buchsbaum, Ger. ; and Bosobo, Ital.) has some 
claims to attention as a valuable timber, being in considerable demand for inlaying, 
turnery, mathematical instruments, and wood-engravers' blocks. It thrives in any light 
soil and under the drip of trees. Raised from the seed it will attain the height of twenty 
or twenty-five feet, and be fit to cut down in thirty years. {Miller s Diet, in loco.) As 
an ornamental undergrowth and edging plant, it is of the greatest value. 

7119. The elder-tree {Sambucus nigra), already treated of as a fruit-tree (4627.), forms 
an excellent nurse-plant in exposed situations, and a rapid hedge in most places. The 
wood is very hard, and used by the toy-makers and turners. When grown as a nurse, 
or for timber, it should always be raised from the seed. 

7120. The hawthotm. — Mespilus oxyacantha, E. B. {Eng. Bot. c. ic.) Icos. Di-Pentag.'L. 
and Bosacece, J. Aubepine, Fr. ; Hagedorn, Ger. ; Branco sjnno, Ital. It is a native 
shrub, of great importance as a hedge plant, and is also frequently introduced into nar- 
row plantations as an undergrowth. It will not grow, however^ under the drip of trees, 
and therefore, in a profitable point of view, is only to be considered as affording the 
impermeable, close, durable, and easily raised fences, called quickset-hedges. The 
timber of such plants as grow singly, and attain a tolerable size, is valued by the mill- 
wright and turner, and the roots by the cabinet-maker. It is often spoiled. Sang ob- 
serves, through inattention after cutting ; if it be allowed to lie in entire logs or trunks, 
it soon heats, and becomes quite brittle and worthless ; it therefore ought to be in- 
stantly cut up into planks, and laid to dry. The haws and foliage afford excellent food 
for deer. 

7121. Soil and site. It will not thrive in a wet soil, nor one very dry and poor, much elevated or much 
shaded ; a free deep loam in an airy situation suits it best. For hedges it may be raised from cuttings of 
the roots, planted where they are finally to remain. Such cuttings are only to be procured in quantities 




992 



PRACTICE OP GARDENING. 



Part III. 



where an old hedge is to be removed, and the labor of selecting and preparing them falls little short of 
the price of good two-year seedling plants ; so that unless in a season when thorn-plants are scarce and 
dear, few advantages attend this practice. 

7122. The yew is the Taxus baccata, L. (E?2g, Bot. 746.) Polyg. Monccc. L. and 
Coniferce, J. If, Fr. ; Eihenbaum, Ger. ; and Tasso, Ital. It is a low, bush-like, dark, 
evergreen tree, of great longevity, slow in growth, and affording a hard, white, valuable 
timber. It flowers in April and May, and its berries are ripe in November. It is found 
in a wild state in bleak situations, and on a variety of soils, dry and moist. It is very 
common in ancient churchyards, in many of which it has attained a great size and age. 
Evelyn, and after him, Professor Martyn, have referred to a great number of examples 
of notable trees of this species. 

7123. Use. The timber is used by the cabinet-maker for inlaying, and by the mathematical-instru- 
ment-maker, and whipmaker. It is sometimes used as a substitute for box and other hard woods, and 
every one knows it was formerly used for bows, and the spray as palm-leaves by the ancient Christians. 
It forms one of the best hedge plants for gardens, topiary work, &C; and for this purpose was much em- 
ployed when tlie geometric style of. gardening prevailed. 

7124. tioil and situatioti. Almost any soil, not over-wet, will suit the yew, and it will grow on the 
bleak sides of mountains, and under the drip of trees. 

Sect. III. Soft-wooded Trees. 

7125. The soft-iuooded timber-trees may be considered as characterised by great rapidity ^ 
of growth, comparatively limited duration, and timber of inferior value. 

7126. The horse-chestnut (^scidus hippocastanum, L. [Schmidt, arb. 1. t. 38.) Hqi- 
tand. Mniiog. L. *and Acerece, J. Marronier, Fr. ; Marronienbaum, Ger. ; and Mar- 
rone, Ital.) is a magnificent and beautiful tree, when in May it is covered with its 
digitate foliage, and fine large spikes of white flowers. It is of rapid growth, and 
speedily produces a considerable bulk of timber, which, liowever, is of no great value. 
Being highly ornamental as a single tree, and in the outskirts of plantations, it need 
never be planted in masses for timber. It was brought from the northern parts of 
Asia into Europe, about the year 1 550, and was cultivated by Gerrard and Tradescant. 
As Gilpin observes, it is far from being a picturesque tree, its outline being that of 
a parabola : but all beauty is not picturesque beauty, and the foliage and flowers will 
ever advocate the cause of this tree, (wliich the Hon. D. Barrington compares to a giant's 
nosegay,) though "its leaves begin to di-op early in summer, and make a litter around 
the trees during the remainder of the season." 

7127. Soil and situation. It requires a good, rather dry soil, and suffers materially from storms of every 
kind when planted in exposed situations. It used formerly to be much used as an avenue tree, especially 
by the French, and is particularly adapted for this purpose, and the margins of plantations. 

7128. The li?ne. — Tilia Europtna, 1^. [Eng. Bot. 610.) Polyaiid. Monog. 1^. and 
Tiliacece, J. Tilleul, Fr. ; Lindenbaum, Ger. ; and Tiglio, Ital. Tliis is one of the 
most beautiful, graceful, and fragrant of our native trees, rising to tlie height of seventy 
or eighty feet, and finely clothed with pendulous recurved branches, from the ground 
or the browsing line formed by cattle upwards. It is found wild in woods and grassy 
declivities, sends out its leaves in April, flowers in May, and ripens its seeds, though 
sparingly, unless under favorable circumstances, in October. 

7129. Use. It was much valued by the Romans for its shade, and the multiplicity of purposes to which 
the timber was applied. It is now more a tree of ornament than of profit, but the timber is still used for 
various common purposes in general economy, and by the carver, turner, and musical-instrument- 
TOaker. It forms an excellent charcoal for gunpowder ; and of its inner bark, macerated in water, is 
formed, in the north of Europe, the bass mats of commerce. This bark is called in Sweden and Russia, 
bast, whence, by corruption, bass. It is the fittest of all trees for avenues, and forms good tree-hedges. 
The famous Kowno honey is made exclusively from the blossom of this tree. 

7130. Varieties and Species. There are several sorts noticed in our Encyclopcedia of Plants, but 
the best, both for effect and timber, is the red-twigged {T. Etc. var. corallina), and the broad-leaved 
American {T. Americana), which is a distinct species, distinguished by the larger size of the leaves, and 
elegant pendulous flowers. 

7131. Soil and situation. All the sorts prefer a deep loam, and rather sheltered situation, for though 
patient of cold, they are much injured by storms. In Sweden, the common species abound among the 
debris of granite and trap rocks ; and in Russia it covers extensive tracts of deep, soft, black earth. In 
bleak situations, where it is not covered by snow in winter at the roots, or sheltered by other trees, it will 
not thrive. 

7132. The alder {Alnus glutinosa, W. (Eng. Bot. 1505.) Mo7icec. Tetrand. L. and 
Avientacees, J. ) is a middle-sized native aquatic tree of no great value, either as timber 
or ornament farther than that it will grow where few other trees will thrive, excepting 
the birch, poplar, and willow. It flowers in May, and ripens its seeds in September and 
October. a', 

7133. Use. The timber is used in water-works, and by the turner, millwright, lastmakers, and others, 
as well as for common country purposes, and charcoal. 

7134. T/ie poplar. — Populus, W. Dicec. Dodec. L. and Amentacece, J. Peuplier, Fr. ; 
Poppelbaum, Ger. ; and Poppio, Ital. There are several species which may be reckoned 
timber-trees. 



Book III. 



SOFT-WOODED TREES. 



995 



{Eng. Bot.im.) (fig. 671. a) 
alar is distinguisned from the 




7135. The abele-tree, P. alba. 
The variety called the hoary poplar is distingui 
common wild abele by its larger three, fbur, or five lobetl 
leaves, dark aboFe and downy under, and by the young shoots 
having a purple bark covered with white down. It is a rapid- 
growing tree, speedily attaining great bulk of timber, a height 
of 60 or 70 feet, and great extent of branches. The P. vistu- 
lensis seems a variety of this tree ; and on the banks of the 
Vistula, particularly at Villeneuve, near Warsaw, grows to 
upwards of 100 feet high, with a clean trunk and ample head, "^'i 

7136. The common black poplar {F. jiigj-a) (Eng. Bo f. 1910.) 
(fig. 677. b) isanative tree, of lofty growth, distinguished by 
its light-green leaves, lightly notched on the edges, and 
ash-colored bark. It is, by some, considered a mere 
variety of the alba, and for the purposes of profit may be so 
considered. 

7137. The trembling poplar (P. tremula) {fig. 617. c) and 
the common poplar (P. canescens) {d) are hardy natives ; but 
being of less rapid growth than the species mentioned, are 
little cultivated as timber-trees. The common poplar in the 
northern counties may be frequently seen in a pollard state 
in hedges, where it furnishes lop for fuel, and sometimes for 
handles to hay-rakes, &c. 

7138. The Lombardy poplar (P. dilatata) grows to a lofty 
tree, occupies little space, and is not very injurious by its 
shade. It will not thrive, however, in exposed situations, or in very indilFerent soils. Some of the 
largest trees of this species are at Blenheim. Sang and Nicol say it seldom thrives in Scotland. 

7139. The black Italian poplar (P. dilatata, var^ of the northern nurseries, so strongly recommended 
by Pontey, is thus described by him^ by comparison with a Lombardy poplar. " The leaves of both are 
very much alike in color, shape, and turn, the only difference being in the latter producing them somewhat 
larger than the former, though not near so large as the other poplars, whose leaves are of similar shape. 
The branches of the latter grow much less erect, and likewise much thinner upon the stem. The only 
other distinction necessary is the bark, which, on a stem or branch of from two to four or five years' 
growth, is always found smoother, and of a much darker color than any of the poplars that are at all like 
it in other respects." He says it was first sent to Scotland from America, and disseminated by Dicksons 
and Co. of Hassendean-burn. Sang says, " many have ventured to assert, that it is merely a play on the 
vanity of ^xjssessing new sorts, and that it is not really distinct from those formerly cultivated." Pontey 
says, he measured, in December, 1813, " a tree growing in the garden of Richard Atkinson, of Hudders- 
field, which has been planted twenty-five years, being then about six feet high ; the height is now about 
sixty feet, and contains forty-six feet of good timber. It grows on the side of a garden where the soil is 
light, and about a foot deep, upon a very coarse gravel, having been formerly a water-course." We could 
never find any poplar in general cultivation, or wild, in Italy, but the Lombardy and alba, and occasionally 
in elevated moist places in the Alps and Apennines, the tremula. 

7140. The black Athenian {P. grcEca), black A?nerican or birch-leaved {P. betalifolia), the Canadian (P. 
mojiilifera), and Carolina poplars (P. angulata), are all rapid-growing lofty trees, which, in favorable soils 
and sheltered situations, speedily produce great bulk of head and timber ; but the hoary and the black 
Italian appear the best for the general purposes of the profitable planter. They are all short-lived trees j 
flower in March and April, and ripen their seeds from a fortnight to a month afterwards. 

7141. Use. The wood being soft is used by the sculptor, tanner, and toymaker, and also occasionally 
by the cabinet and musical-instrument maker, as a substitute for that of the lime. But no limited appli- 
cation of poplar-timber, like the above, can be depended on by the profitable planter, and, therefore, the 
safest way is to consider it as useful for the common purposes of domestic and rural economy, and more 
likely to afford profit from bulk than quality. The bark of the black is so astringent. Sang states, as to be 
used for tan. Alluding to the black Italian sort, Pontey says, " In that sort of planting which perhaps 
may be considered a^ most of all profitable, namely, that which adds to the comfort and consequence, and, 
of course, the value of a place, previously scantily furnished with that important appendage, wood, this 
tree is excellent ; as, in judicious hands, it may be made to produce very considerable effects, while many 
others (highly esteemed) would produce them in prospect only. In short, for distant scenery, where wood, 
not species, is the immediate object, this plant, hitherto in many places a stranger, is clearly superior to 
aU the family of the forest." Of the timber of the hoary poplar, he says, Lord Sheffield " has lately made 
some floors, which, in appearance, are superior to any floor I have seen, whether of deal or oak ; and, as 
to durability, I see no reason to doubt of that, if the density and weight of the article be considered, in 
connection with such testimonies as books afford relative to the point. Floors, however, are only one of 
the many inferior purposes for which it is applicable ; as it is certainly proper for almost every article of 
furniture usually made of mahogany. For the lighter descriptions of it, now so fashionable, it may be 
made a very good substitute, without any other addition to the natural color of its heart than the means 
cabinet-makers generally resort to, in order to heighten the color of such wood ; and with respect to the 
sap, and where more of color is required, the aquafortis stain will instantaneously produce it, so far as that 
it would be difficult to distinguish it from real mahogany. Indeed, it is equal to the best in color and 
smoothness of surface, and much superior to the plain or inferior sorts in those respects, as well as in 
transparency and variety; and it has the further advantage 
over mahogany, and most other woods, that it takes but little 
of either oil or rubbing, to produce upon it the sort of mel- 
low shining surface, so much admired in furniture that has 
been some years subjected to proper attention." Of poplars 
and willows in general, he observes, " were we but half as well 
apprised of the various purposes to which their timber might be 
properly applied, as we are of the quickness of their growth, I 
am persuaded they would then be considered as subjects worthy 
of general attention." 

7142. Natural soil and situation. None of the sorts men- 
tioned are ever found wild in very poor soils, but generally in 
such as are deep and moist, but not springy ; by rivers and in 
bottoms, where the soil has accumulated from the surround- 
ing heights, or alluvial deposits have taken place, for ages, 
poplars are found in the greatest perfection. 

7143. T/ie udUow. — Salix, L. Dioec. Monan. L. 
audi AmentacecB, 3 . Saule, Fr. ; Weidenbaum, Ger.; 
Salici, Ital. There are two species which seem 
more immediately to merit cultivation as timber-trees, 
and several as fit for cultivating in osier-grounds. 

3 S 




9^4 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. • Part III. 



7144. The Huntington or common white Lincolnshire svaallow-tailed ivillou) (S. alba) {Eng. Bot. 2430.) 
678.) grows to a lofty tree, with a branchy stem, and tapering flame-shaped head. It seems com- 
mon to Europe, being found pollarded by way-sides in Sweden, the south of Russia, and Italy, As a 
timber-tree it produces a great bulk in a short time ; and as a pollard or coppice wood, on suitable soils, 
it is prolific in fuel, poles, and bark for the tanner. 

7145. The Upland, or red-twigged willow of Pontey {Profit. Plant. 72.), appears to be a variety of the 
S. alba, beijig distinguished from it by its hoary or silver-like leaves, and deep red shoots. The-timber 
and mode of growth appear to be the same as those of the Huntington willow, but being of slower 
growth, the former is to be preferred. Of the red-twigged willow of Sang, there are large trees near 
Dunfermline, upwards of 60 feet high. 

7146. The Bedford wUloiv {S. Riisselliana) {Eng. Bot. 1S08.) (^^. 679.) is also a lofty bulky-headed tree, in 

general appearance and habits very much resembling the 
S. alba. 

7147. Use. The timber may be used generally in rural 
economy, and the poles form a light and convenient hurdle. 
Pontey says, the timber is " considerably durable ; a pro- 
perty which, it appears, may be much augmented by steep- 
ing some months in water, as is frequently done with oak- 
saplings." The bark of all the sorts mentioned is found to 
be sufcciently astringent to be now generally used by tan- 
ners. 

7148. The best wUloios- for osier-grounds are the 
following : — 

7149. The connnon osier, Salix- Viininalis. {Eng. Bot. 1898.) 
fig. 680 ) The leaves are long, waved at the edges, but not 
serrated ; shining green above, and silvery underneath. 
The shoots grow long, straight, and tough, and are well 
adapted for the larger sorts of baskets, hampers, crates, and 
hoops. 

7150. The auriclcd osier, S. sfipularis. {Eng. Bot. 1214.) 
" The two-year- old shoots make excellent rods for baskets, 
cradles, bird-cages, and such articles; and the one-year 
shoots are used as fillings. The shoots are long, nearly equal 
in thickness throughout their extent, and somewhat downy, 
or hoary, particularly at the tops or extremities. The leaves 
are alternate, with footstalks, long and narrow, somewhat 

notched on the edges, green and smooth above, woolly below. The stipulas or leaf-scales are conspicuous 
and remarkable, resembling a pair of ears." 

7151. The green osier {S. rubra) {Eng. Bot. 1145.) is an excellent 
basket willow. " The shoots are very long, tough, smooth, and 
of a grey color, occasionally inclining to purplish. The leaves are 
narrow and very long, from three to four inches, bright green 
on both sides, and serrated." 

7152. The basket-osier, S. Forbyana. {Eng. Bot. 1344.) " The 
best willow for the finer sorts of basket-work. The shoots are 
of a yellowish ash-color, sometimes purplish ; smooth, very 
flexible and tough. The leaves are alternate, on foot-stalks, 
from two to three inches long, somewhat serrated, chiefly to- 
wards the top; dark-green above, and glaucous or pale-bluish - 
beneath." 

7153. The long-leaved triandroits willow {S. triandra) {Eng. Bot. 
1454.) " is common in osier-beds, and its stools afford most ex- 
cellent shoots for basket-work, long, slender, pliable and tough ; 
they are smooth, of a brownish color, and towards the top they 
are fluted or grooved. The leaves are long, and closely and 
strongly serrated." 

7154. The velvet osier, S. 7nollissitt7a. {Eng. Bot. 1509.) " Its 
leaves are very smooth and green above, and very silky and soft 
beneath. Shoots long and very numerous, but not tough ; when 
allowed, however, to remain for two years, they make most 
capital rods." 

7155. The yellow willow, or golden osier {S. vitellina), {Eng. 
Bot. 1329.) produces " handsome shoots, of a yellow color and shining, and well adapted for basket- 
work." 



BOOK IV. 



LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. 

7156. In landscape-gardening, the art of the gardener is directed to different objects, 
and some of them of a higher kind than any belonging to gardening as an art of culture. 
In the three branches hitherto considered, art is cliiefly employed in the cultivation of 
plants, with a view of obtaining their products ; but in the branch now under consider- 
ation, art is exercised in disposing of ground, buildings, and water, as well as the vegetating 
materials which enter into the composition of verdant landscape. This is, in a strict sense, 
what is called landscape-gardening, or the art of creating or improving landscapes ; but as 
landscapes are seldom required to be created for their own sakes, landscape-gardening, as 
actually practised, may be defined, " the art of an-anging the different parts which com- 
pose the external scenery of a country-residence, so as to produce the different beauties 
and conveniences of which that scene of domestic life is susceptible." 

7157. What these beauties and conveniences are, must, in different ages and countries, 
depend on the state of society and climate j and, in the same age and country, on the 





Boox IV. PRINCIPLES OF LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. 



99,5 



wealth and taste of individuals, Tliis art would be a very simple one in rude ages and 
xnild climates, when man had few wants, and scarcely any desires ; but, like other arts, 
would become more intricate as mankind betook to more variable climatesr and became 
more refined in habits and manners. Taking a view, as far as history permits (see Part I. ), 
of the past and present state of landscape-gardening in all countries, the objects desired 
in the country-residence of a wealthy man, wishing to display his riches, are fundament- 
ally the same. These were and are, adaptation to the habits of genteel life for the time 
being, as to matters of use and convenience ; and distinction from the common scenery of 
the country, as to matters of taste or beauty in landscape. The first object would prin- 
cipally affect the mansion and accompanying erections for men or cattle ; and these 
would, at first, be merely of greater dimension than those of the common mass of rustics; 
but, as society improved, they would be distinguished by more perfect execution, and ap- 
pendages indicative of the habits of genteel life. The second object, distinction in the 
surrounding scenery, was and is effected by such dispositions of the common materials of 
landscape, as ground, water, trees, &c. as indicate the employment of art and expense. 
In early times, this would produce regularly level or sloping surfaces of ground, and 
water and trees bounded by straight or geometrical lines, which w'ould distinguish the 
country-residence from the natural or open unenclosed scenery around. In late or modern 
times, when the general face of the country was disposed in artificial forms, a contrary 
practice would be pursued, and natural-like scenery would be created for precisely the 
same object as in the other case ; the display of wealth and taste, and the attainment of 
distinction. 

7158. Hence the origin of what are called the geometric and natural styles m landscape- 
gardening, both evidently founded on the same principle, the love of applause and distinc- 
tion. The first has been generally condemned as unnatural and absurd ; and so it is, if 
we look upon it as an imitation of nature ; but as it never pretended to this, but, on the 
contrary, was avowedly a display of the power of art over nature, it ought to be judged, 
like every other work of man, by the end in view ; and if, as we have already observed 
(526.), it be considered as designed to distinguish the garden-scenery of the man of wealth 
from the common fortuitous scenery of the country in rude or less cultivated times and 
places, it will be found admirably calculated for that purpose, and just as natural to man 
as any other part of his habits or manners. But v/e will even go farther, and maintain 
that the geometrical disposition of landscape-scenery has powerful beauties, both of the 
inherent kind, as that of a long broad avenue, or of general or particular associations, as- 
its suitableness to Gothic architecture, very ancient residences, &c. Disapproving, there- 
fore, of that absolute preference of the modern or natural style, which totally excludes the 
other, we have, in treating of planting (Book III. Chap. IV.), not lost sight of the geo- 
metrical dispositions of trees ; and we shall, in considering the present branch of our sub- 
ject, notice also the dispositions of ground, water, roads, &c. peculiar to the geometric 
style. A knowledge of both will be desired by the liberal-minded practical designer ; 
and the occasional adoption, in part, at least, of the ancient style, will be dictated by ge- 
neral good taste, as well as by the particular tastes of individuals, and the circumstances 
of peculiar situations. We shall consider, in succession, the principles of composing 
landscape ; the treatment of the materials of verdant scenery ; the union of these materials 
in forming landscapes ; and the union of landscapes in connection with scenes of use and 
Convenience in forming country-residences. 



Chap. L 

Of the Principles of Landscape- Gardening. 

7159. The principles of landscape-gardening, like those of every other art, are founded 
on the end in view. " Gardens and buildings," Lord Kames observes, " may be destined 
for use solely, for beauty solely, or for both. Such variety of destination bestows upon 
these arts a great command of beauties, complex not less than various. Hence the diffi- 
culty of forming an accurate taste in gardening, and architecture ; and hence, that diflfer- 
ence or wavering of taste in these arts, greater than in any art that has but a single 
destination." {Elements of Criticism, 4th edit. vol. ii. 431.) Not to consider landscape - 
gardening with a view to these different beauties, but to treat it merely as " the art of creat- 
ing landscapes," would thus embrace only a small part of the art of laying out grounds, 
and leave incomplete a subject which contributes to the immediate comfort and happiness 
of a great body of the enlightened and opulent in this and in every country ; — an art, as 
the poet Mason observes, 

" Which teaches' wealth and pride, 

" How to obtain their wish — the world's applause." 
3 S 2 



996 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Paut 111. 



7160. The ancient authors on architecture and gardening have rarely attempted to lay 
down any general principle of composition, Vitruvius hints obscurely, that the different 
parts of buildings, should bear some propjortion among tliemselves, like that which subsists 
between the different members of the human body ; that the quantities constituting the 
magnitudes of temples, should have certain ratios to one another, and he lays down canons 
for the individual proportions, and collective arrangement of the columns of the different 
orders. These, however, are not principles, but mechanical rules, formed on very limited 
associations. The same remarks will apply to the directions respecting the walks, walls, 
hedges, and borders of the ancient style, laid down by D' Argenville, Clarici, Le Blond, 
and Switzer. It is in the writings of modern authors, therefore, and chiefly from the en- 
lightened investigations of the Rev. A. Alison, that we are to draw our information as to 
the principles by which the artists of the ancient style were instinctively guided in their 
productions. 

7161. With respect to tlie modern style, considered as including what belongs to the 
conveniences of a country-residence, as well as the art of creating landscapes, Pope has 
included the principles under, 1st, The study and display of natural beauties ; 2d, The 
concealment of defects ; and 3d, Never to lose sight of common sense. Wheatley concurs 
in these principles, stating the business of a gardener to be " to select and to apply what- 
ever is great, elegant, or characteristic" in the scenery of nature or art ; " to discover and 
to show all tlie advantages of the place upon which he is employed; to supply its defects, 
to correct its faults, and to improve its beauties." Repton, whose observations on land- 
scape-gardening bear on the title-page, to be " written with a view to establish fixed princi- 
ples in these arts," enumerates congruity, utilitj', order, symmetry, scale, proportion, and 
appropriation, as principles, " if," as he observes, in one place, " there are any principles." 
Mason places the secret of the art in the ' ' nice distinction between contrast and incon- 
gruity ;" Mason, the poet, invokes " simplicity," probably intending that this beauty 
should distinguish the English from the Chinese style ; simplicity is also the ruling prin- 
ciple of Lord Karnes ; Girardin includes every beauty under " truth and nature," and 
every rule "under the unity of the whole, and the connection of the parts ;" and Shen- 
stone states, " landscape or picturesque gardening" to " consist in pleasing the imagin- 
ation," by scenes of grandeur, beautj', and variety. Convenience merely has no share 
there, any farther than as it pleases the imagination. Congruity and the principles of 
painting are those of Price and Knight; and nature, utility, and taste, those of Marshall. 
From these different theories, as well as from the general objects or end of gardening, 
there appear to be two principles which enter into its composition ; those which regard 
it as a mixed art, or an art of design, and which are called the principles of relative 
beauty ; and those which regard it as an imitative art, and are called the principles of na- 
tural or universal beauty. The ancient or geometric gardening is guided wholly by the 
former principles ; landscape-gardening, as an imitative art, wholly by the latter ; but as 
the art of forming a country-residence, its arrangements are influenced by both principles. 
In conformity with these ideas, and with our plan of treating of both styles, we shall first 
consider its principles as an inventive or mixed, and secondly as an imitative art. 

Sect. I. Of the Beauties of Landscape- Gardening, as an inventive and mixed Art, and of 
the Principles of their Production. • 

7162. Works of art, Alison observes, may be considered, either in relation to their 
design or intention — to the nature of tlieir construction for the intended purpose — or to 
the nature of the end they are destined to serve ; and their beauty accordingly will de- 
pend, either upon the excellence or wisdom of the design, the fitness or propriety of the 
construction, or the utility of the end. The considerations of design, of fitness, and of 
utility, therefore, may be considered as the three great sources of the beauties of works 
of inventive art. They have been called relative beauties, in opposition to those of nature 
and imitative art, which are hence denominated natural or independent beauties. There 
is a third source of beauty common both to arts of invention and imitation, which is that 
of accidental beauty, or such as is produced by local, arbitraiy, or temporary associations. 
The beauties of objects, whether natural, relative, or accidental, are conveyed to the senses 
by the different qualities of matter, forms, sounds, colors, smells, and motion ; but form 
is the grand characteristic of matter, and constitutes in a great degree its essence to our 
senses. In our remarks, therefore, on the beauties of inventive art, we shall chiefly con- 
sider design, fitness, and utility, in regard to fomi. 

7163. The expression of design is displayed by such forms and dispositions, as sliall at 
once point out that they are works of art. Thus regularity and uniformity are recog- 
nised in the rudest works of man, and point oixt his employment of art and expense in 
their construction. Hence the lines, surfaces, and forms of geometric gardening should 
be different, and in some degree opposed to those of general nature. Irregular surfaces, 
lines, or forms, may be equally useful, alike works of art, and, considered with reference 
to other beauties, may be more agreeable than such as are regular ; but, if too prevalent, 



Book IV. BEAUTIES OF LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. 997 



they might be mistaken for the production of nature, in which case they would lose the 
beauty of design ; but forms perfectly regular, and divisions completely uniform, im- 
mediately excite the belief of design, and with this belief, all the admiration which follows 
the employment of skill and expense. Ground in level or regular slopes, or in hills or 
hollows of symmetrical shapes ; woods of right-lined boundaries ; trees, and especially 
such as are foreign to the soil, planted equidistantly in masses, in quincunx, or in straight 
rows ; water in architectural basins, regular canals, or fountains ; walks and woods, of 
uniform width and perfectly straight ; straight walls and hedges are easily distinguished 
from nature's management of these materials, and are highly expressive of the hand of 
man. 

7164. Begular forms are satufactory, Stewart observes (^Philosophical Essays, 238.), 
*< from the principle of a sufficient reason, adopted by Leibnitz. What is it, that in any 
thing which is merely ornamental, and which at the same time does not profess to be an 
imitation of nature, renders irregular forms displeasing ? Is it not, at least, in part, that 
irregularities are infinite ; and that no circumstance can be imagined which should have 
decided the choice of tlie artist in favor of that particular figure which he has selected ? 
The variety of regular figures, it must be acknowledged, is infinite also ; but supposing 
the choice to be once fixed about the number of sides, no apparent caprice of the artist in 
adjusting their relative proportions, presents a disagreeable and inexplicable puzzle to the 
spectator." 

7165. Wherever symmetry "is useful to the soul, and may assist her functions, it is 
agreeable to her ; but wherever it is useless, it becomes distasteful, because it takes away 
vai iety : therefore, things that we see in succession ought to have variety, for our soul has 
no difficulty in seeing them : those, on the contrary, that we see at one glance, ought to 
have symmetry ; thus at one glance we see the front of a building, a parterre, a temple ; 
in sucli ti)ings there is always a symmetry which pleases the soul, by the facility it gives 
her of taking the whole object at once." (^Montesquieu.) 

7166. Tlie ex]iression of design, in the progress of the arts, though at first difficult, be- 
comes afterwards easy, and renders regularity and uniformity only expressive of common 
design. Hence, to confer a character of superiority in works of design, variety would 
be introduced ; and as uniformity was the sign of design, so uniformity and variety would 
become the sign of improved or embellished design. " Considering, therefore, forms in this 
light as beautiful, merely from their expression of design, the observation of Dr. Hutcheson 
may perhaps be considered as an axiom with regard to their beauty, viz. that where the uni- 
formity is equal, the beauty of forms is in proportion to their variety ; and when their variety 
is equal, their beauty is in proportion to their uniformity." (^Alison's Essays, p. 106. ) To this 
stage, in the progress of design, may be referred the architectural ornaments introduced 
in garden -scenery, such as seats, buildings, statues, urns ; and in the later stages of the 
art, serpentine walks, labyrinths, verdant sculpture, and many other improvements. The 
variety and embellishment thus conferred on gardens produced in time many absurdities, 
that we would not wish to see resorted to with a revival of the ancient style, unless in 
examples considered solely with a view to imitation. The sculpture of trees, however, 
might, when first introduced, be greatly admired, even by men of sense, for its novelty, 
and the discovery of a certain degree of skill in the artist ; but as, in our times, they would 
neither be new nor meritorious, they could scarcely be consistently introduced with a view 
to embellish design. 

7167. To prevent variety from degenerating into confusion, and as Professor Stewart 
characteristically expresses it, "puzzling the spectator," unity of intention must never be 
lost sight of. This, indeed, is necessarily implied in every work of ai't, since, without 
it, the slightest attempt at design would only end in a chaos of materials. 

7168. Fitness, or the proper adaptation of means to an end, is the second source of the 
relative beauty of forms. Considered in relation to the parts of a building, it is generally 
denominated proportion, and refers to the adequate strength of certain parts to bear certain 
weights, &c. In the detail of the ancient, and in scenes of relative beauty in the modern 
style of gardening, it relates to the magnitude and situations of buildings, and other 
artificial objects, relative to natural ones, — to the extent of the different scenes or consti- 
tuent parts of a residence, compared to the whole, — to the propriety and congruity of 
certain objects as ornaments, — and, in general, to the adequacy of means to an end, 
whatever these means or that end may be. 

7169. Utility is, the third source of the relative beauty of forms. None of the other 
beauties will compensate for the entire want of utility in any scene of architecture or 
gardening. Objects at first thought beautiful, soon lose this expression when they are 
found to be of no use ; and others, with first impressions the most disagreeable, are felt 
to become beautiful as they are known to be useful. " This species of beauty," Alison 
observes, " is in itself productive of a much weaker emotion than that which arises from 
the different sources of ornamental beauty ; but it is of a more constant and permanent 
kind, and much more uniformly fitted to excite the admiration of mankind." {Essays on 



998 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



Taste, vol. fi. p. 201.) " To unite these different kinds of beauty ; to dignify ornamental 
forms by use ; and to raise merely useful forms into beauty, is the great object of ambi- 
tion among every class of artists. Wherever both these objects can be obtained, the 
greatest possible beauty that form can receive will be produced. But as this can very 
seldom be the case, the following rules seem immediately to present themselves for the 
direction of the artist : — 1. That where the utility of forms is equal, that will be the 
most beautiful to which the most pleasing expression of form is given. 2. 'I hat where 
those expressions are at variance; when the beauty of the form cannot be produced with- 
out sacrificing its utility ; that form will be most universally and most permanently 
beautiful, in which the expression of utility is most fully preserved." (Essays, \ol. ii. 
p. 202.) Some of the various modifications of utilitj', as applied to country-residences, 
may be here enumerated. 

7170. Foj- the purpose of habitation, for example, good air and water, a genial climate, fertile soil, cheer- 
ful prospect, and suitable' neighborhood, &c. are known requisites. Convenience must be joined to use, 
comforts to conveniencies, and luxuries to comforts. Exercise, whether in the shape of walking, riding, 
or driving, requires to be provided for ; and recreation, whether in the common field sports, athletic games, 
or in botanical, agricultural, and other useful, elegant, or scientific pursuits, must be kept in view : rural 
fStes and amusements might also be enumerated. 

7171. Accidental associations form the last class of relative beauties, and arc " such associations as, 
instead of being common to all mankind, are peculiar to the individual. They take their rise from edu- 
cation, from peculiar habits of thought, from situation, from profession ; and the beautj' they produce is 
felt only by those whom similar causes have led to the formation of similar associations." iStewart's 
Essa7/s.} Among these may be reckoned, — 

71/2. Classical and historical associations. The influence of the former in architecture is well known ; 
the latter often adds charms to a spot, in no respect remarkable to those who are unacquainted with its 
history. " Classical associations," Stewart observes, " have added immensely to our natural resources, 
but at the same time, warped our taste in various instances ;" acquiring, as Alison adds, " a superiority 
over the more permanent principles of beauty, and determining for a time the taste of nations." 

7173. National associations are also frequently at variance with such as are universal, and have, perhaps, 
greater influence than any other associations whatever. {Steii'a7-t's Essays.) 

7174. Personal associations, or such as arise from the accidental style of natural beauties, to which we 
have been accustomed in our youth. Many particulars come under this head, which it would be tedious 
to enumerate ; but one mode of vanity and selfish feeling deserves particular notice, as intimately con- 
nected with the business of the landscape-gardener. It is that interest which the attachment to property 
creates in men's minds, " rendering them alive to every trifling recommendation belonging to what is 
their own, while it blinds them to the most prominent beauties in the property of their neighbors." 
(Stewart's Essa//s, p. 4SS.) 

7175. Appropriation, or such an arrangement as shall, either in reality or appearance, render all, or the 
greater part of what we see from a country-seat our own, is a consequence of personal associations. The 
simplest way of eflrecting this, is by shutting out all objects which do not correspond with the idea, by 
means ofv/alls or plantations. A more refined mode is, by harmonising the scenery ; by adopting some 
of the forms, colors, and arrangements in our own territory (6769.), which appear in those of our neigh, 
bors, as seen from the house, or some particular points of view. According to Wheatley, " one property 
of a riding is to extend the idea of a seat, and appropriate a whole country to the mansion." For this 
liurpose, he requires the road of the riding to be different from common roads in form and preservation, 
and distinguished by accompaniments borrowed from a park or garden, &c. Knight strongly objects to 
appropriation, and ridicules certain attempts of this sort, made by placing the family arms on the inns 
and public-houses of the neighborhood, and on " stones with distances," as, he savs, was recommended 
by one improver. Girardin also objects to the principle ; but Repton, and we believe, almost every other 
professional man, finds it a very principal object of attention. Kepton defines appropriation to be, " that 
command over the landscape visible from the windows, which denotes it to be private property belonging 
to the place." " A view from a London house into a square or into the parks maybe cheerful and beau- 
tiful, but it wants appropriation ; it wants that charm which only belongs to ownership — the exclusive 
right of enjoj'ment, with the power of refusing that others should share our pleasure. The most romantic 
spot, the most picturesque situations, and the most delightful assem.blage of nature's choicest materials, 
will not long engage our interest without some appropriation; something we can call our own ; and, if 
not our own property, at least that may be endeared to us by calling it our own home." {Fraginents of 
Landscape-Gardening, p. 206.) This envie de s'arrondir seems to have existed, and the proximity and 
intermixture of property to have been felt as an evil among landed proprietors from the earliest ages. 
Ahab desired the field of Naboth, that he might convert it to a garden of herbs (or flower-garden), 
because it was near to his house ; and Manuel, the attorney, says to his patron, •— 

" ^^Tiat course take you 

(With your good patience,) to hedge in the manor 
Of yotir neighbor. Master Frugal f As 'tis said. 
He will not sell, nor borrow, nor exchange ; 
And his land h ing in the midst of yours. 

Is a foul blemish." Massikc-er. Nerv Waifto pay Old Debts, Act 2. Scene 1. 

" I stick still in the inn of a hired house," writes the amiable Cowley to Evelyn, " without that plea> 
santest work of human industry, the improvement of something which we can caU our own." 

Sect. II. Of the Beauties of Landscape-Gardening, considered as an imitative Art, and of 
the Principles of their Pi-oduction. 

7176. The chief object of cdl the imitative arts is the pj-oduction of natural or universal 
beauty. Music, poetiy, and painting, are the principal imitative arts ; to these has been 
latelv added landscape-gardening, an art which has for its object the production of 
landscapes by combinations of the actual materials of nature, as landscape-painting has 
for its object their imitation by combinations of colors. Landscape-gardening has been 
said " to realise whatever the fancy of the painter has imagined" (Girardin) ; and, " to 
create a scenery more pure, more harmonious, and more expressive, than any that is to 
be found in nature herself." [Alison.) Such are Alison's ideas of the powers of this art ; 
and such appear, in some degree, to have been those of Wheatley and Girardin. A more 
correct idea of its capacities, in our opinion, is suggested by the remark of Lord Wal- 



Book IV. 



BEAUTIES OF LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. 



99D 



pole, when he represents it as *' proud of no other art than that of softening nature's 
harshness, and copying her graceful touch." It has also been said, that it is " to poetry 
and painting, what the reality is to the representation." (^Girardin.) But experience 
proves, that the former (the reality) is always exceeded by the latter, both in respect to 
natural and picturesque beauty. Suppose, for example, any given variety of ground, 
rocks, and distance, as the basis to be furnished with wood, water, and buildings ; the 
rocks shown, or concealed, as the gardener may wish, or as the genius of the place may 
require, and every otiier purpose effected, which is in the power of gardening to perform. 
When all this is done, it will be a scene greatly inferior in beauty to the imitative cre- 
ation of a painter from the same groundwork and materials ; or, let there be a natural 
landscape, either of mediocrity or of any given beauty, with every circumstance so 
arranged, as to be alike suitable for both arts ; and let a painter and a gardener, each 
attempt to copy it according to their art, with or without pennission, to improve its 
beauties. Which of the two imitations would be most beautiful, considered in the 
abstract, and without reference to any selfish or arbitrary association ? Decidedly, in our 
opinion, the production of the painter. In short, no comparison between the powers of 
landscape-painting and those of landscape-gardening can be instituted, that will not 
evince the superior powers of the former art. Tlie great source of the beauty of every 
verdant landscape is wood ; and so much of the beauty of all woods depends on acci- 
dental circumstances, in their progress from the time of planting, till they attain a con- 
siderable age, and which circtnnstances cannot be said practically to be under the control 
of the gardener, that however high our aim, however we may study the natural efiects of 
time, and however correctly we may imitate them, at the end of all our labors, any wood 
of art will always be far inferior to a v/ood of nature under the same circumstances. For 
further illustrations, we have only to appeal to such painters as have made landscape 
their particular study, and who certainly must be considered in this case as the best 
judges with regard to scenic truth or picturesque beauty. 

7177. To lohat kind or degree, of beciuly then, can lands-caj^e-gardening aspire ? To this 
we answer, that, abstracted from all relations of utility and design, it can seldom succeed 
in producing any thing higher than picturesque beauty, or such a harmonious mixture of 
forms, colors, lights, and shades, as will be grateful to the sight of men in general ; and 
to such, more particularly, as have made this beauty in some degree their study. This 
harmonious assemblage of objects may be grateful and agreeable, without being accom- 
panied by any, or at all events, by much general expression ; for example, of gaiety, 
inelancholy, grandeur, simplicity, or elegance ; but it may also combine one or more of 
these poetic or general beauties in a high degree, and this, too, with or without being 
picturesque. It may recall many other pleasurable emotions, if we admit the consider- 
ations of fitness, novelty, or its contrast to surrounding scenery, and utility or its adapt- 
ation to man. Such is our opinion of the capacities of landscape-gardening. If it is 
lower than that of some authors and artists, we can only say, that it has been formed 
from the observation and experience of what actually takes place. The artist may and 
ought to aim at the highest degree of beauty, which his own imagination, the genius of 
the place, and the views of the owner, will admit of; but let him not proceed with, or 
hold out to the world, mistaken views of what his art can and cannot perform. 

7178. The principles of iynitative landscape-gaj^dening, in that view of this term Avhich 
limits it to *' the art of creating landscapes of pictui-esque beauty ;" we consider with 
Girardin, Price, Knight, and other authors, to be those of painting ; and in viewing it 
as adding to picturesque beauty some other natural expression, as of grandeur, decay, 
melancholy, &c. we consider it, with Pope, Warton, Gray, and Eustace, as requiring, 
both in the designer and observer, the aid of poetic mind ; that is, of a mind conversant 
in all these different emotions, or pleasures of imagination, which are called up by cer- 
tain signs of affecting or interesting qualities, furnished by sounds, motion, buildings, 
and other objects. 

7179. If taking a third view of imitative landscape-gardening, as " the art of laying out 
the grounds of a country-residence,^^ then, with popular opinion, we comprehend under the 
term all the above beauties, with those of relative beauty, the principles of which have 
been the subject of the preceding section. The principles of landscape-gardening then, 
as an imitative art, we conclude to be derived from nature, as developed by the prin- 
ciples of landscape-painting ; and, as recognised by poetic mind, or a mind alive to those 
general beauties or associations universally felt in civilised society. We consider this, 
perhaps to many a tedious developeraent of the principles of landscape-gardening, called 
for by the vague and indefinite manner in which they are spoken of by authors, no less 
than by artists ; and, as a proof of this, we refer our readers to the volumes of the late 
Repton, who, whatever may be the merits of his practical taste, has certainly, when- 
ever he has touched on the subject of principles, written in a very unsatisfactory manner. 
To those who are conversant with the literature of landscape-gardening, it must appear a 
very gratuitous task to write a book " with a view of establishing fixed principles" in the 

3 S 4 



1000 



I'RACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



art, and to find in such a book, after the publication of the works of Wheatley, the two 
Masons, De Lille, Price, and Knight, such a passage as the following : " If any general 
principles could be established in this art, I think they might be deduced from the joint 
considerations of relative fitness or utility, and comparative proportion or scale ; the 
former may be referred to the mind, the latter to the eye." (Obs. on L. Gardening by H. 
Repton, Esq. Introduction, ~p. 2.) While we disapprove of this disingenuous mode of 
writing, the frequency of which we must regret in this artist's works, we willingly pay 
tribute to his practical good taste, and more especially in architecture. 

7180. As an illustration of the theory of landscajK-gardening, which we have adopted, we 
subjoin a slight analysis of the principles of a composition, expressive of picturesque and 
natural beauty. For this purpose, it is a matter of indifference, as far as respects pic- 
turesque beauty, whether we choose a real or painted landscape ; but, as we mean also to 
investigate its poetic or general beauty, we shall prefer a reality. We choose then a per- 
fect flat, varied by wood, say elms, with a piece of water, and a high wall, forming the 
angle of a ruined building ; it is animated by cows and sheep ; its expression is that of 
melancholy grandeur ; and, independently of this beauty, it is picturesque in expression j 
that is, if painted it would form a tolerable picture. 

7181. Uniti/ is the first obvious principle which pervades this picture. No ideas of gaiety or prettiness 
are excited by such a scene. All the parts unite in forming a whole, which the eye can comprehend at 
once, and examine without distraction. " La vue," says Girardin, " le plus vagabond de tous les sens, a 
besoin d'etre fixiJe pour jouir avcc plaisir et sans lassitude." Were this principle not prevalent, the groups 
of trees, the lake, and the building, would only please when considered separately, and the result would be 
as poor a production as a machine, the wheels of which are accurately finished and nicely polished, but 
which do not act in concert so as to effect the intended movement. 

7182. It is true to nature j that is, the objects or materials are what they appear to be. The trees, which 
are neitlier very old nor very young, though in the distance diminished by their remote situation, we dis- 
cover by their trunks and contour, to be still trees. They are not shrubs placed near the eye, with a view 
to produce a false perspective ; nor is the fragment of building merely a disguised wall, because it has open- 
ings which have once been windows, and is crowned in one part by battlements. The water is natural, its 
surface being below the level of the adjoining ground, not raised above it, as is often the case in artificial 
waters. This completes the truth or reality of the scene. The necessity of adhering to truth is still greater 
in painting, in which all objects must appear to be natural, not only in forms and color, but also relatively 
to the forms and colors around them. Objects, especially those whose forms and dimensions are familiar to 
us, as men or horses, painted of different heights in the same plane; as, for example, in the distance, of 
the same magnitude as that in which they appear in the foreground, would, from the acquired habit of 
measuring unknown by known objects, give a falsehood to the scene, and appear as animals of a different 
.species, or as monsters. It seems to be from the same principles of being true to nature, that a gradation 
of scene, or what is called distance, is required," or at least is so satisfactory in landscape. The mind, after 
being impressed "with the effect of a whole, delights in examining its parts in succession ; the more simple 
and obvious the arrangement of these parts, therefore, the more readily does the mind acquiesce in their 
effect. The eye of the artist, seiziiig on the nearest and most remote parts of a scene, readily marks an in- 
termediate or middle distance ; no given extent seems necessary for this purpose : 

" To make the landscape grateful to the si(?ht. 
Three points of distance always should unite; 
And howsoe'er the view may be confined, 

Three marked divisions we shall always find." The Landscape, by Knight. 

7183. T/ie disposition of the parts is the next object of analysis, and the enquiry is how in this respect 
they concur in forming a whole. 1. As to forms, we find that their disposition is in groups or masses. 
The largest group, for example, is placed towards one side of the picture in the foreground, another to- 
wards the opposite side of the middle distance, including the building and adjoining lake ; and the remote, 
or third distance, consists of a low line of wood, with projecting groups or masses. 2. As to colors, we 
find only different shades of- yellow and green on the trees and ground. 3. As to the light, we find one 
large and principal light near the middle of the view, diverging into shade as it approaches the sides ; the 
clearest part is the water, and the next clearest the building, and the third light spreads over a broad space 
of ground, near the water. The groups in the foreground are all in a deep shadow. One of these, near 
the water, partakes of the principal light, and those in the third distance are distinguished by a sort of 
neutralisation of light, color, and shade. Such is the disposition of the groups or parts, in order, in a com- 
plex view of the whole, to fix the eye, and prevent it from being distracted by scattered lights, confusion 
of forms, and inharmonious color. 

7184. The connection which subsists between these different pa?-ts is a subordinate but important con- 
sideration. 1. They are connected in each distance by a real nearness of situation ; and, 2. In the view 
as a whole, from the one group coming in part before the other, so as to produce connection by apparent 
proximity. Suppose the reverse to be the case, and that the groups were unconnected either by real or 
apparent distance of situation, the consequence would be, that each group being surrounded by light, 
would become a distinct object. The eye would have no resting place, and the assemblage would not com- 
pose a whole. 

7185. The relation which subsists between the parts, composing each individual group, is next to be ex- 
amined. 1. In regard to the form of the parts of each group, as they are all groups of the same sort of 
tree, we find one elementary form prevalent, but differing in magnitude, and in combination, by their con- 
trasted disposition, to such a degree, that each group differs in form from the others, without at the same 
time being of opposite forms. 

7186. In regard to color, the same kind of color prevails in each and in all of the groups, but is varied in 
degree by the same contrasted disposition. In some parts a yellowish-green prevails, in others a greenish- 
yellow, in others a russet or red-green, and occasionally a bright-green, as on that part of the turf where 
the light strikes with the greatest force. 

7187. In regard to liglit and shade, those parts of the groups which rise above the horizon, and are 
backed by the sky, are dark, and generally darker than such as are backed by the ground, or by other 
adjoining groups. The prominent parts of each group are lighter than the retiring parts or recesses 
among the spray and leaves. These prominent and retiring parts, in the near groups, are very numerous ; 
in the distance they are lost in the general aerial shade of the group. It may be observed, as a general 
principle, that trees, from their rough surface, and consequent imperfect reflection of light, are always 
comparatively darker than water, buildings, or ground. In creating real landscape, they serve in some 
measure as shades, as the other materials mentioned serve as lights. 

7188. The sky, the cows, and the sheep, must be noticed in order to complete the sketch. Suppose, 
then, that the sky is merely grey and cloudy, and the cattle and sheop grouped in the middle distance. 



Bo.m IV. BEAUTIES OF LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. lOOI 



whiit will l)e the expression of the view ? We think it would express very little to general observers ; but 
tnere being nothing glaringly offensive in the arrangement, it would be expressive of some beauty to him 
who l)ad bestowed some attention to the subject of landscapes ; for though it exhibits but little harmony 
of forms and colors, light or shade, it still possesses enough of these ingredients to render it worth looking 
at as a picturesque view. 

7189. T/ie general or natural expression of melancholy and grandeur remains to be accounted for. 
For this purpose, let the building be the ruins of an ancient castle, whose lofty quadrangular form may be 
readily imagined from the walls we mentioned, as composing a part of the scenery. The character of 
grandeur, then, is not in this instance communicated to the picture, by the picturesque effect of the walls, 
which have no variety of form, light, or shade, in themselves, but by the mental associations to which they 
give rise in a cultivated mind. 

7190. As another example of pictwesque, and poetic, or sentimental expression, imagine the cattle and 
sheep removed, the surface of the ground covered by smoothly mown turf, and the luxuriant branches 
of sonrie of the foreground trees nearly reclining on the ground. The first expression would be that of 
beautiful, or elegant picturesque ; the next that of stillness, and consecration to man, — stillness, as being 
without animals or moving objects ; and consecration to man, from the mown surface, greatly heightened 
by the circumstance of the branches of trees reclining on the ground, which never can happen where 
sheep or cattle are admitted, and which forms the leading visible distinction between a group of trees in 
a park, and a group on a mown lawn. It is not from the smoothness of the turf, or any particular mix- 
ture of light and shade in the reclining branches, that this expression is produced, but from reflecting on 
the cause of this appearance. 

7191. Asa third example, imagine, instead of the smooth turf, uncouth rough ground, covered in some 
places with furze, briars, brambles, and tangled thickets ; the water fringed with rushes, and partially 
concealed by aquatic shrubs ; and wild horses and deer forming the animated part of the scene. The ex- 
pression would be eminently picturesque ; but there would also be an expression of wildness, not result- 
ing from the picturesque qualities as such, but from mental reflection on the difference between this 
scene and one of cultivation. 

7192. As a fourth example, imagine the view deprived of the lake and the building, and consisting only 
of the wood and ground, with the heads of a straggling row of willow-trees appearing in the middle dis- 
tance, and the sound of a distant waterfall heard through the trees. Here, to picturesque beauty we have 
an idea of water — of an immense body of it in the lake or river which supplies the waterfall — and of the 
rocks, v/hich oppose their powerful obstruction to a body of water. The reader will here remark, how 
much of the sublime beauty of this scene depends on sound, which can never be included under pictur- 
esque beauty. The leading expression is that of sublimity, accompanied by various associations of dignity 
produced by the rocks, and of grandeur suggested by the stream, after the waters have renewed their 
tranquil course, and rolling, as we may imagine, majestically along under the shade of the line of willow- 
trees. 

7193. Other examples, of a more striking nature, might be adduced; but these in- 
stances we consider as better adapted to show the difference between a composition 
merely picturesque, and one expressive of general or natural beauty, and to prove our 
position, that both poetry and painting enter into the principles of imitative landscape- 
gardening. They will also show, how very little the production of natural beauty is 
within the power of the landscape-gardener. He may display it to more advantage. 
In the first example of expression, for instance, the building, or such parts of it as more 
obviously show its real character, might be disjjlayed by the removal of some over-ob- 
truding branches ; and in the second, a garden-seat, and some garden-trees, as the lime, 
cedar, &c. might add to the idea of consecration to man. In tlie third, a corn-field or a 
bam in the distance, would aid the effect by contrast ; and in the last, a bridge would 
determine the situation and reality of the river. But to attempt effecting these expres- 
sions by building a ruin, placing a garden-seat in a paddock, or erecting a bridge where 
there was no water, would, however common in the infancy of the art, be now justly 
considered ridiculous. Much more, it is true, might be done in improving the pictur- 
esque beauty of each of these scenes, provided the trees were already grown to ma- 
turity, and too numerous rather than too few ; but if the trees are yet to plant, it is 
evident that only the ground-plans of the masses and groups of ti-ees, and of the breadth 
of the lawn, could be formed by the artist, 

7194. A very common error, since the introduction of the modem style, has been to sup- 
pose that picturesque beauty is the only beauty to be aimed at in laying out grounds ; 
but so far from this being the case, it will often happen that the alterations required for 



1002 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



the purposes of convenience and character, will lessen that beauty, whilst it increases 
that of dignity, reHneraent, and appropriation to man. As an example, we may refer 
to Rivenhall Place, in its state before being improved by Repton {Jig' 681.), and the 




same residence subsequently to improvement, or as intended to be improved. {Jig. 682.) 
Every one will allow that its unimproved state {Jig- 681.) presents the most picturesque 
landscape ; while its dressed state is the more dignified and desirable as the landscape of 
a considerable country-residence. 



Chap. 1 1. 



Of the Materials of Landscape- Gardening. 

7195. The materials of landscape-gardening with wliich we v. ork in order to obtain the 
desired effect, are the same whatever style we adopt. Those of nature, are ground, 
wood, water, and rocks ; to these, art lias added buildings, roads, walks, fences; and 
animated or moving objects, sounds, &c. may bs considered as accompaniments only 
partially under our control. 

Sect. I. Of operating on Groinid. 

7196. The operations of art on this ponderous material are necessarily of a veiy limited 
description. The most extensive and costly operations, to restore or create natural sur- 
faces, even when attended with the desired effect, afford less permanent gratification 
to personal feeling than most other improvements. If a deformed space has been restored 
to natural beauty, we are delighted with the effect, whilst we recollect the difference 
between the present and the former surface ; but when this is forgotten, though the 
beauty remains, the credit for having produced it is lost. In this respect, the operations 
on ground under the ancient 
style, have a great and striking — ^ 
advantage ; for an absolute per ^ 
fection is to be attained in the 
formation of geometrical forms, 
and the beauty created is so j| i ri! rij 
entirely artificial {fig. 683.) as |: ||- 1 
never to admit a doubt of its ^ 
origin. Long, therefore, after T^Wirff 
the improvement is finished, the ; I !l II !■ 
credit and the beauty remain to ^ 
gratify and charm the owner. 
Improvements on surfaces, what- 
ever be their object, ought to be 
made in scenes which are near 
the eye, or intended to be fre- 
quently seen ; at a distance they 
are lost if tlie effect be on a small 
scale, and often better effected 
by wood, if on one of consider- 
able magnitude. Attempts to remove distant inequalities, by lowering heights ana 




Book IV. 



OPERATING ON GROUND. 



1003 



filling up hollows, very seldom are attended by results sufficient to justify the expense 
incurred ; but when art is employed to heighten distant eminences the success is greater : 
in the last case art may be said to act positively, in the former negatively — to produce 
or increase a beauty, instead of only removing or lessening a deformity. All operations 
on ground may be included under, 1. Those which have for their object the beauty of 
art or design ; and , 2. Those where natural beauty is intended to be produced. 

7197. Operations with a view to relative or artificial beauty. The forms in use for this 
purpose are few and simple. They originate in, and are influenced by, those of the 
house ; and are, for the greater part, bounded by right lines ; and the surfaces are levels 
or slopes of different degrees of abruptness. The magnitude as well as form of each of 
the figures in the ground immediately adjoining a house, or in a detached walled en- 
closure, should be regulated chiefly by the magnitude of the mansion, or extent and 
grandeur of the whole place, though they are often obliged to conform, in some degree, 
to the natural surface. When the ground slopes from the house in all directions, narrow 
parallelograms will be the prevailing forms both of the levels and slopes. The broadest 
level, and greatest perpendicular depth of slope, will generally be placed next the house, 
and the next broadest level, &c. in succession, till, after three or four levels, and as many 
slopes are obtained, the artificial surface shall finally blend with the natural ; unless, as 
is frequently the case in the geometric style, a kitchen-garden wall, or some similar 
work of art, forms the termination. In this case, separation by some architectural or 
other accompaniment, v/ill, by forming a break in the order of forms, admit of adopting, 
in continuation of the artificial surface, such levels and slopes as the character of the scene 
may require, or a due regard to economy dictate. Wlien the mansion, or scene of oper- 
ations, is on a surface naturally flat, the levels will be of greater dimensions, the slopes 
smaller, and both fewer in number. But though parallelograms are the common figures 
employed, sections of polygons, trapeziums, circles, and curvilinear figures, are fre- 
quently admitted. They are used in architectural elevations, and in fortifications, which 
are the prototypes of this part of ancient gardening ; and, therefore, when apparent in the 
mansion, should be reflected, as it were, by the grounds. [Jig. 684.) The forms to be 
used, hoAvever, is a matter easy to deteirmine. The principal diflBculty is to aiTange 
them together, so that they may con- 
cur in producing a w!:ole, or a good 
effect. In disposing, connecting, re- 
lating, and contrasting them for this 
purpose, the artist v/ill preserve regu- 
larity and uniformity in the complex 
view of the whole, varying and har- 
monising the detail according to the ^ 
degree of beauty and variety he intends 
to produce. If he has duly prepared 
his mind by theoretical studies, and 
practised architectural and landscape drawing, his own feeling of their impression will 
suggest when he has attained the desired effect ; for the models of artificial surfaces 
which remain of ancient gardens are poor productions compared to what might be 
created in this way, through the judicious application of the principles of relative beauty. 
A good deal depends on adjusting the extent of geometrical or architectural surface to 
the size of the house and surrounding grounds ; and in this matter much depends on the 
regularity or irregularity of the ground plan of the former, and on the evenness or vari- 
ation of the surface of the latter. - A square house on a level, or on a gentle swell, will 
require least extent of architectural platform around it, and a straggling gothic castle on 
an irregular declivity the greatest extent of terraces, angles, ramps, and slopes. 

7198. Natural beauty of ground. As the right lines and geometrical forms of the 
architect, take the lead in grounds of artificial beauty, so the flowing and broken lines, 
and undefined forms of the landscape-painter, take the lead in those of natural beauty. 
To create them in ground, is generally impracticable and unadvisable ; but where they 
exist concealed by accidental deformities, or incomplete in expression, through dulness 
in their leading features, art may relieve from the impediments to beauty, even though 
the situation is at some distance from the eye. In recluse scenes immediately under 
view, art may aspire to create beaiity even from a tame flat, but especially from its op- 
posite, a flat abounding with defonuities. In effecting all those purposes, the same 
principles apply. The first thing to fix in the mind is the desired surface, or that style 
of natural ground which is best to be imitated. The next thing is to examine on what 
parts, forms, and lines, the natural beauty of this ground chiefly depends ; if undulating, 
whether the concave or the convex prevails ; if broken ground, whether horizontal and 
perpendicular, or curved and inclined lines prevail. These are then to be imitated in 
the improvement, ever keeping in view the important principle of a whole as the end of 
the connection, and harmony of the parts of which it is composed. 




1004 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



7 1 99. The re7noval of accidental deformities forms one of the commonest operations on 
ground. Old quarries and other pits, useless cattle-ponds, open drains, mounds of earth, 
marks of ridges, are to be considered of this description. As they have been raised by 
art, so in dispersing them, the best general rule is to restore the natural surface ; but 
sometimes the remains of fences are so numerous, that advantage may be taken of the 
earth to be removed, and some variety given to a surface otherwise dull and featureless. 
If the fence consists of a great number of turns of different lengths, by removing both 
the mound and part of the surface on each side of the drain, a small winding hollow or 
vale may be formed : the effect of which may be heightened, by placing the earth re- 
moved on adjoining indications of natural eminences ; not so as to form knolls, but so as 
to connect and harmonise with the prevailing idea of expression. The most simple and 
obvious improvement of exhausted quarries and dry pits, is to plant them {fg. 685.) ; 
this, though it will form a series of pleasing scenes, is not always consistent with the 




general expression to be created, and such groups as would arise from these spots, might 
destroy breadth of light and connection, independently of excluding distant objects. In 
this case, they must be filled up by under-growths, or by lowering the adjoining surface 
in such a way as not to interfere with general effect, or a sufficient descent for the surface- 
water. Where broken ground enters into the idea of the composition to be effected, open 
drains, or hollow pits, afford fine sources of picturesque beauty, especially if the ground 
is dry, or can be readily under-drained. This character, however, can seldom be intro- 
duced as an original feature ; but in ground naturally leading to abrupt and broken lines, 
it may be more desirable to improve this expression, than attempt creating a more polished 
surface. In cases of this sort, almost every thing depends on the introduction of wood, 
copse, and verdant roughnesses, to harmonise the broken surface ; for mere broken ground, 
without a character of luxuriance and wildness communicated by wood, is seldom better 
on a smaller scale than a surface deformed by scars. 

7200. Natural bumps or excrescences (fg' 686. a), as well as pits (b), are not un- 
common in many grounds which have not been subjected to agricultural improvement. 




When these are not large, the process of fallowing with the plough will remove them ; 
when they are of some magnitude, they may often become sources both of polished and 
picturesque beauty. If they are numerous and favorably distributed, by the removal 
of some, and the enlargement through that means of others, they may give an impres- 
sion of undulation, especially if situated on a naturally irregular surface. If on a de- 
clivity, and covering rocks or huge stones, a mixture of flowing lines with abruptnesses 
may be happily introduced. 

7201. A varied but yet dull surface may often be improved by a skilful artist. By 
studying the character indicated by nature, it will generally be found, that the defi- 
ciency of expression is owing to the hollows being in part clogged up, either naturally or 
by long continuation under the plough ; and the swells lowered in a corresponding de- 
gree by the same process. In this case, the obvious improvement is to remove earth 
from the hollows, and place it on the eminences, ever keeping in view the natural ex- 
pression, and avoiding to end the improvement, by leaving the hollows gutters, and the 
eminences pointed ridges. This sort of improvement is not a very obvious one, though 
often attended with surprising effects, for every foot of depth taken from a hollow, and 
laid on an adjoining hill, adds two feet to the height of the latter. All these observ- 
ations will be understood as referring to grounds near the house. 

7202. Distant scenes of a park, as hills, or mountains {Jig. 687.), are only to be im- 
proved by wood ; and these remarks, in so far as they extend, will suggest not what is 
to be removed, but what must be concealed. Many excellent hints on this part of 
the subject are to be found in the picturesque tours of Gilpin, referring tq ranges of 



Book IV. 



OPERATING WITH WOOD. 



1005 




hilly scenery in diflPerent parts of the country, of much of which he has given views. With 
respect to ground, as respects garden-scenery, almost the only writer who has treated of 
it at length is Wheatley, whose excellent book, so frequently referred to by all succeed- 
ing writers on gardening, ought to be in the hands of every man of taste. In the 
chapter on ground in that work, the author concludes with a salutary caution, which 
ought ever be taken in connection with the wisest rules ; " a caution which has more 
than once been alluded to, must always be had in remembrance ; never to suffer general 
considerations to interfere in extraordinary great effects, which rise superior to all 
regulations, and perhaps owe part of their force to their deviation from them. Singu - 
larity causes at least surprise, and surprise is allied to astonishment. These effects are 
not, however, attached merely to objects of enormous size; they frequently are produced 
by a greatness of style and character, within such an extent as ordinary labor may 
modify, and the compass of a garden include. The caution, therefore, may not be useless 
within these narrow bounds ; but nature proceeds still farther, beyond the utmost verge 
to which art can follow, and, in scenes licentiously wild, not content with contrast, forces 
even contradictions to unite. The grotesque, discordant shapes which are often there 
confusedly tumbled together, might sufiiciently justify the remark. But the caprice 
does not stop here ; to mix with such shapes a form perfectly regular, is still more extra- 
vagant ; and yet the effect is sometimes so wonderful, that we cannot wish the extrava- 
gance corrected. " [Obs. on Mod. Gard. p. 23.) 

Sect. II. Of operating with Wood. 

7203, Wood produces almost all the grand effects in both styles of improvement ; 
for trees, whether in scattered forests, thickets, or groups, or in compact geome- 
tric squares, avenues, or rows, constitute the greatest charm of every country. Trees 
improve the most varied outlines of buildings [Jig. 688.), and without them the grounds 




of a residence {Jig' 689.) would often be nothing more than an unmeaning profusion of 
winding roads or walks. A tree in itself is, indeed, the noblest object of inani- 
mate nature ; combines every species of beauty, from its sublime effect as a whole, to 
the individual beauty of its leaves ; exhibits that majestic uniformity and infinite 
variety which constitute the essence of relative beauty; and the natural expressions 
of individual species are as various as are their forms and magnitude, their utility 
to man, and the situations, soils, climates, and other general and accidental circum- 
stances of which they are indications. 

7204. The effect or expression of trees, individually and in masses, has been entered on 
at length in the preceding book ; we shall here, therefore, confine ourselves to a few 
general observations on the effect of planting in the geometric and modem manners. 

7205. In planting in the geometric style, the first consideration is the nature of 
the whole or general design ; and here, as in the ground, geometric forms will still 
prevail, and while the masses reflect forms from the house, or represent squares. 



1005 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING 



Part 111. 



triangles, or tmpeziums, the 
more minute parts, charac- 
terised by lines rather than 
forms, such as avenues, rows, 
clumps, and stars, &c. are 
contained in parallelograms, 
squares, or circles. In regard 
to the pai-ts, masses and ave- 
nues should extend from the 
house in all directions, so 
far as to difluse around the 
character of design ; and as 
much farther in particular di- 
rections as the nature of the 
surface admits of, the distant 
beauties suggest, and the cha- 
racter of the mansion requires. 
In disposing these masses, 
whether on a flat or irregu- 
lar surface, regard mil be had 
to leave uncovered such a 
quantity of lawn or turf as 
shall, at all events, admit a 
free circulation of air, give 
breadth of light, and display 
the form of the large masses 
of wood. Uniformity and 
variety as a whole, and use 
as well as beauty in the parts, 
must be kept constantly in 
view. Avenues, alleys, and 
vistas, should serve as much 
as possible as roads, walks, 
lines of fences, or screens of 
shelter or shade ; but where 
this is not the case, they should 
point to some distant beauties, 
or near artificial objects, to be 
seen at or beyond their termi- 
nation. The outer extremities 
of artificial plantations may 
either join natural woods, 
other artificial scenes, culti- 
vated lands, or barren heaths 
or commons. 

7206. TF/i£n artificial plant- 
ations join natural u'oods, the 
avenues, alleys, and circular 
glades of the former may be con- 
tinued a certain length in the 




latter, so that the point where the natural wood begins, and the artificial plantation ends, 
may not be discoverable. In aid of this effect, the sort of tree which prevails in the natural 
scenes, should also prevail in the adjoining parts of the artificial wood. "SMien ai-tificial 
scenes join other artificial scenes, nothing can be easier than by the reciprocal continuation 
of avenues, strips, or masses, so far to unite the two seats, as to conceal the boundaries of 
each, wliile the two mansions will thus each borrow a splendor from the other. There 
are still existing proofs of the attention paid to this subject in former times, an instance 
of which occurs in the apparent connection by avenues between Blenheim, Ditchley, 
and Heythrop, though the last mansion is nearly ten miles distant from the first. 

7207. jyiien artificial sceries join cultivated lands, if those lands are enclosed, broad 
strips, hedge-rows, square or round clumps in the angles of the fields, with such reci- 
procal disposition of lines or forms as the case may suggest, will continue the character 
of artificial plantation ; and where roads are necessary, if utility does not forbid, they 
should be formed in part as avenues, in continuation of those within the artificial scene. 

7208. IVhen artificial plantations are bounded by barren heaths or commons, all that can 
be done is to advance beyond the boundary of the place portions of avenues, and rows 
of trees of diflferent lengdis. Sometimes an inequality, crowned by a clump or thicket. 



Book IV. 



OPERATING WITH WOOD. 



1007 



may promote the idea. On other occasions, where the heath or waste may be so bleak 
as to convey no agreeable expression, and therefore is, of course, struck out entirely 
from the improved scene, a sort of connection may be given, by advancing strips or 
rows from the boundary plantation into the heath. Even single or scattered trees, if 
they can be protected in that situation, will have a tendency to produce that sort of con- 
nection required ; and, while it gratifies the proprietor's love of appropriation, will please 
the eye of the traveller, who views the country as a whole, and delights to observe tlie 
harmony and beauty of its principal features. Having disposed of the whole, and of 
the parts, as far as respects their general effect and connection, what remains to be 
considered is, the sort of tree, manner of disposing the plants, fences, and future 
management. 

7209. When the object in view is the expression of art and design, the propriety of employ- 
ing species of trees different from those which are natural to, or most abound in the 
surrounding country, is obvious. In a country of common pine, the spruce and silver firs 
and cedar afford a choice. In a country of oaks or elms, chestnuts, limes, and plares, 
form suitable contrasts. Where the plantations are extensive, the value of the timber 
must always be a principal object ; and, therefore, the contrasted trees should be chosen 
accordingly. Some species, however, are so happily adapted for this style, and as orna- 
mental trees in both styles, that they ought seldom to be omitted excepting near the 
house : such for example, as the horse-chestnut, lime, Spanish-chestnut, plane, luccombe 
oak, cedar, stone pine, &c. As the four last species mentioned are, in exposed situations, 
liable to injury from extraordinary severe winters, a few hardier sorts, resembling them 
in general appearance, should be intermingled in the plantation, to preserve the larger 
masses in case of accident, but to conform with the general effect in color and style of 
foliage, as well as in form. Different species ought not in general to be mixed together 
in the masses ; one, or at most two, conforming varieties are sufficient ; more would de- 
stroy the breadth of color of the mass, and the character of its surface. Different 
masses, avenues, and more minute parts, may, however, be planted with different spe- 
cies of trees ; rare sorts may be also introduced in lines, along the front of many of. 
the masses, ranged along stars, crosses, &c. The snowdrop-tree, from its beautiful 
blossoms, and the birch and hazel, for the display of their catkins during winter, are 
well calculated for walks adapted to that season of the year, and should be planted in 
front of pines, or other evergreens. Such also is the principal situation for flowering 
shrubs, and no plants can be more showy than the horse-chestnut, common lilac, acacia, 
guelder-rose, Portugal laurel, holly, bird-cherry, pyrus, mespilus, and laburnum, in similar 
situations, and for general purposes. In distributing the species of tree in extensive masses, 
the same general principles of composition must be attended to, which we have pointed 
out, as far as respects form. The colors and character of the heads of the trees must be 
connected, and, at the same time, to a certain degree contrasted, in order to produce an 
artificial and yet harmonious effect. ^jqq 

7210. Whether the new va- 
rieties of American and other J 
trees, obtained since the intro- y 
duction of landscape-garden- 
ing, are to be admitted under 
this style of improvement may 
be questioned by some. We 
answer, certainly, unless where ° ^ 
the object is the imitation of an c o 
ancient residence {fig- 690.) ; 
and there can be no doubt that 
where such is the object, exotic 
trees will destroy part of the 
allusion ; but we do not con- 
tend for the revival of the an- 
cient style solely as producing 
imitations and allusive charac- 
ters, or on account of its an- 
tiquity, but as a distinct mode 
of gardening. We would 
therefore not copy its faults 

or study its defects, but add to its beauties from all the resources furnished by the pre- 
sent improved state of the arts of design, as well as by the continued accession to our 
stock of trees and shrubs. If however a positive imitation of an ancient residence is 
intended, then the species of tree should be limited to those used in ancient times, as well 
as the forms and lines of their disposition. 

721 1 . The manner of disposing the plants is influenced by the same principle of avowed 




1008 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



ai-t ; in rows, equidistant masses, in squares, or in quincunx, and in every case so as 
never to be nustaken for trees or shrubs sprung up accidentally. 

7212. Fences. Here the ancient style has a grand advantage over the modern, in 
which, as far as respects the imitation of nature, all fences are to be considered as tem- 
porarj', and, therefore, to a certain degree, looked on as nuisances to be afterwards re- 
moved. Besides, their irregular and circuitous line is displeasing to many who do not 
understand ground-plans, with a view to picturesque beauty, when the trees are grown 
up. But in geometric gardening, fences are to be considered in many cases as objects, 
and when not regarded in this light, their directions and limits are so minutely pointed 
out by the determined outline of the plantations, that the eye acquiesces in their situ- 
ation and use. Fences of any common and economical description are employed to 
protect the trees of open avenues, open groves^ and single open rows. But the more 
common kind are walls, which in the prominent parts ought to be well built of shaped 
stone, and substantially finished by raised or fiat copings, bearing some relation to the 
copings of the simpler parapets of the house. The gates necessary in these walls, as 
well as in some sorts of permanent verdant fences, supply occasion for such architectural 
forms and lines, as are advantageous in refiecting those of the mansion, and strengthening 
the prevailing idea of dignity, art, and design. Every sort of fence belonging to the 
modern style, may be occasionally employed in the ancient ; and besides walls, half-sunk 
walls, and raised mounds with a walk at top, we may enumerate hedges of holly, yew, 
laurel, and other shrubs, either simple or chequered, by alternate deciduous or evergreen 
species, varied by arcades and standards, shorn into shapes, or in their natural growth. 
Hedges of flowering shrubs may also be introduced ; of creepers on open palisades ; 
and various others of great beauty may be invented, or are to be found in books on this 
style of gardening. 

7213. Management. In this respect also, the advantage is greatly in favor of the 
ancient style ; for as all operations of pruning and thinning in the other should be done 
under the eye of the landscape-gardener, so all these operations here may be performed 
by any laborer ; the object being simply to produce a straight, upright, smooth stem, to 
a certain height according to circumstances, and allow each particular tree to attain its 
full size. Shearing or clipping is always a mere mechanical operation ; plain hedges 
and close alleys require only a line for a guide ; and in the case of arcades or verdant 
sculpture, there is, or always should be, a frame of trellis-work of correct design to guide 
the operator. From the comparative brevity of this view which we have taken of plant- 
ing under the ancient style, the reader will perceive, that we are far from supposing it 
to take the lead of the natural method to which we now proceed, referring for more 
particular information to Lc Blond, and other French authors ; and to Switzer's Ichno- 
graphia Rustica. 

7214. In jdanting loith a view to natural beauty, the effect of the whole is here also 
the first and the grand consideration. All planting, as respects the formation of a 
country-residence, must necessarily be 
materially influenced by the character 
and situation of the house, as the capital 
feature in the composition. To this 
feature, the leading masses of wood and 
lawn, answering the end of light and 
shade in painting, must invite and 
direct the eye in the general view of 
the place, (^g. 691.) Each must em- 
brace it on one or on more sides, and 
diverge from it in masses suitable to 
its magnitude and the extent of tlie 
grounds, and in forms and characters 
of woody surface, suitable to the na- 
tural situation and the expression to be 
created. If the mansion is on a decli- 
vity, the principal light should embrace 
the front which looks down, rather 
than those which look up, or on either 
side. The views from the windows 
suggest this arrangement, and vn'll 
point out in every other situation, whe- 
ther a flat, a hill, or an irregular sur- 
face, on which side or sides the leading 
masses are to have their origin. To 
determine their magnitude, forhi, and 
number, would be impossible, without 




Book IV. 



OPERATING WITH WATER- 



1009 



a particular case to refer to. To point out their style is sufficient, which must always 
be irregular like nature ; generally stretch along such rising ground as the situation 
affords ; and, like her, always combine a certain degree of uniformity or recognisable 
shape, even amidst the greatest seeming deviations from this quality of figures. As the 
house indicates the commencement of the masses, the character of country surrounding 
the scene of improvement must determine the limits and style of their termination. If 
the lands are laid out in regular enclosures, bounded by hedges and hedge-rows, frag- 
paents of these {Jig. 692. ) must prevail in the margin of the park ; at least in as many 




places, and to such a degree, as will produce connection ; and, if possible, as much 
farther as will harmonise the scene within, with the country without. If it is entirely or 
in part surrounded by forest scenery, the termination is easily and completely effected, 
by attending to the style of wood and species of tree prevailing without, for a moderate 
distance within the boundary. If bounded by the 
sea, or a large lake, an abrupt termination will be as 
natural as it would be formal on the margin of a cul- 
tivated surface. Abrupt teritiinations, however, are 
often unavoidable, as in examples of villas, where the 
owner having no demesne, has no control beyond his 
boundary fence. All that can be done, therefore, 
in such cases, is, to create as much beauty and in- 
terest as possible within the given limits. Where one 
villa joins another, this sort of isolated abruptness 
is avoided or lessened ; and, in the case of suburban 
villas {Jig. 693.), it is seldom felt as any deformity, 
though, even here, connection and general harmony 
with what is exterior, will add beauty to what is 
within. 

7215. Thff details of planting in this style have 
already been given at length in the preceding book. 

Sect. III. Of operating with Water. 

7216. Water is a material of so captivating and inteiresting a description in the differ- 
ent characters in which it occurs in nature, that no view can be reckoned complete in 
which it does not compose a feature. It forms a part of every garden in the ancient 
style, in the various artificial characters which it there assumes of oblong canals, ponds, 
basins, cascades, and jeux-cCeau {Jig. 694. ) ; and in modern improvement, such is the 




1010 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part 111. 



value attached to its effect, that no place is deemed perfect without a river or lake ; and 
such the indiscriminate desire of obtaining them, that nature has been too frequently dis- 
regarded in their form and situation. Of the characters which water assumed under 
the geometric style, we can only observe, that tlieir names convey, in a great degree, an 
idea of the forms. Their situations were near the mansion ; and their marginal accom- 
paniments of masonry, turf walks, and hedges, were determined by the architectural 
forms and lines of the capital feature in the scene. Tlie choice, from the most intricate 
and curious fountains to tlie plain oblong canal, depended on the splendor of the general 
design ; very little on natural situation. The supply was generally obtained from some 
concealed reservoir. 

7217. To imitate lakes, rivers, or rills, and their accompaniments, is the object of land- 
scape-gardening ; and of each of these natural characters v> e shall remark the leading 
circumstances in the originals and the imitations. All water is either running or stag- 
nant. Lakes, ponds, and pools, ai-e of the latter class ; rivers, rivulets, and rills, of the 
foiTuer description. In certain situations, lakes may be created where their supply is 
moderate ; rivers and rills only when it is abundant. Both characters, when they exist 
in nature, may be improved by studying the natural characteristics of each species. 

7218. Situation, relatively to the character of the ground's surface, is tlie fii-st consider- 
ation respecting water, in whatever form it may appear. No situation in which this 
material may be supposed to exist and expand itself into a body, can be truly natural, that 
is not a vale, plain, or hollow. Mountain streams are out of the question ; and small 
lakes or pools, in hollows or elevated grounds, are more to be considered as accidental 
tlian as general nature. Even artificial lakes or rivers on a considerable scale, to be 
natural must either be, or seem to be, situated in the lowest part of the landscape then 
under the eye. If otherwise, if placed on the side of a declivity over which the eye can 
range at the same time, it may be attractive to a stranger at first view ; but the want of 
truth or fidelity to the thing to be imitated, will soon bring on an increasing aversion in 
the mind of genuine taste. 

7219. Ponds in different levels, seen in the same view, are very objectionable on this 
principle. The little beauty they display as spots, ill compensates for the want of pro- 
j)riety ; and the leading idea which they suggest, is a question between tlieir present situation 
and their non-existence. The choice, therefore, as to the situation of water, must ever 
depend more on natural circumstances than proximity to the mansion. Is then all water 
to be excluded that is not in the lower grounds ? We have no hesitation in answering 
this question in the affirmative, so far as respects the principal views, and when a lower 
level than that in which the water is proposed to be placed is seen in the same view. But 
in respect to recluse scenes, wliich Addison compares to episodes to the general design, 
we would admit, and 

even copy the ponds on .^.A^vA^^mm\\\\m\\\^^v«,^^^^^^ ^ \' ^'^'^Miiii^JMi^^ 

the sides or even tops of 
hills, which may be de- 
signated accidental beau- 
ties of nature. In con- 
fined spots tliey are often 
a very great ornament 
{Jig. 695 ) ; as a proof of 
which, we have only to 
observe some of the sub- 
mban villas round the 
metropolis, where a small 
piece of Avater often comes 
in between the house and 
the public road with the 
happiest effect. 

7220. A beautiful lalce, 
or part of a circuitous 
body of water, considered as a whole, be found to exhibit a form, characterised by 
breadth rather than length ; by tliat degree of regularity in its outline as a whole, which 
confers that, which, in common language, is called shape ; and by that irregularity in 
the parts of this outline, which produces vaj-iety and intricacy. Supposing the situation 
to be fixed on for the imitation of a lake {J ig. 696.), the artist is to consider the broadest 
and most circuitous hollow as 
his principal mass or breadth of 
water, and which he will extend 
or diminish according to the ex- 
tent of aquatic views the place 
may require. From this he 





Cook IV. 



OFERATIK'G WITH WATER. 



lOU 




may continue a chain of connected masses of water, or lakes of different magnitudes and 
shapes, in part suggested by the cliaracter of the ground, in part by the facilities of 
planting near them, and in part by his own views of propriety and beauty. The outline 
of the plan of the lake is to be varied by the contrasted position of bays, ir.iLts, and 
analler indentations, on the same principles which - — - 

we suggested for varying a mass of wood. To 
the irregularity of outlines so produced, islands 
and aits (Jig. 697.) may be added on the saine 
principle, and for the same objects as thickets 
and groups. This will complete the character 
and beauty of the plan of the water. 

7221. But the g)rtnd effect of luater in land- 
scape, depends on ivood as its acco)npa72i?ne7it. The\ 
variety and intricacy of outline, the reflection of 
forms and colors, the shady recesses and flicker- 
ing lines of light, all depend on trees. These are not to be sparingly or indiscriminately 
scattered around the margin, but liberally in some places, for tlie sake of a contrasted 
mass of grateful color or shade, to relieve the brilliancy of the water ; and with discrimi- 
nation ever\-where to mark the beauties, and heighten the variety of the outline, without 
destroying breadth of eflfect, or a whole, either as respects the water alone, or the entire 
residence. 

7222. The mai-gijiul banks of water in nature, are tame or bold, gravelly or sedgy, 
stony or rocky, according to the character of the surrounding ground. Art, therefore, 
must imitate each in its proper place, not always by a studious picturesque arrangement 
of the marginal accompaniments in each case, but by excavating the ground-work, 
planting the trees and shrubs, and leaving the rest to the motion of the waves of the 
water. After the eflfects of one winter, stones or gravel may be deposited in spots suit- 
able for stony or gravelly shores. But to enter into this, and many other circumstances 
in the imitation of lakes, would exceed the proper limits. We add two cautions : the 
first is, in all cases of the beautiful picturesque, so to arrange by puddling and under- 
draining, that a marshy appearance may not surround the lake ; and that rushes, and such 
aquatic plants, may not extend farther than a few feet or yards from the margin of the 
water. The other respects islands, which are the greatest ornaments to lakes. But that 
island which is placed in the centre, or in any situation where it does not connect with 
other islands, or with the shore, so as to form part of a prominence or recess, is injurious 
to the effect of the whole inversely as its beauty, when properly placed. 

7223. Rivers and rills, we have said, are rather to be improved than created ; for we 
cannot sympathise with that taste which directs the mimiciy of so noble a character as a 
river, or is satisfied with a nearly stagnated rill. We do not consider the river at Blenheim 
as an exception, because that piece of water was formed by widening a considerable 
brook. We allude to those wa%-y serpentine canals, which are never mistaken for natural 
scenes, and, in almost every case, might be advantageously exchanged for a lake. A 
rill, however, may have its course rendered more varied, may be expanded at proper 
places into regular shapes, and all the alterations accounted for and harmonised by plant- 
ing. (fg. 698.) 




7224. Progress and impetuosity are the two leading ideas wliich belong to running 
waters. The first expression may be heightened by counteracting any tendency to ex- 
pansion ; by removing some of the circuitous aiid oblong projections of earth or stone in 
the banks ; and sometimes by deepening its bed, or by substituting a more direct line for 
a circuitous course. The idea of impetuosity is indicated by its effects, in reverberating 
against high banks, or common banks, on which trees are situated, and may be increased 
by augmenting the cause or the effect, and thus either digging and undermining the trees, 
cutting down the high banks on which the water acts, or placing very slight piers as jetties 
on the opposite shore. Picturesque additions to the marginal accompaniments both of 

3 T 2 



1012 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



rivers and rills will readily suggest themselves. Cascades and waterfalls may 
be created ; and the occasional expansion of natural brooks into pools, affords 
for imitation, when this form of water comes wdthin a scene of improvement, 
greatest improvements that can be made in many places laid out in Brown's 
subsequently, consists in widening in some places, and varying the margin in 
those tame serpentining canals, then so much in fashion. By this means, and 
islands and trees, they may often, without deranging the place as to otlier 
rendered highly beautiful at a moderate expense, ( fig. 699.) 



sometimes 
a fine hint 
One of the 
time, and 
others, of 
by adding 
details, be 





7225. A waterfcdl, or cascade, is an obvious improvement where a running stream 
passes through a demesne { Jig. 700.), and is to be formed by first constructing a bank of 
iieasonry, presenting an inclined 
plane [a) to the current, and ren- 
dering it impervious to water by 
puddling( 1 720. ) or the use of proper 
cements, and next varying the 
ridge [b) and under side (c), witli 
fragments of rock, so chosen and 
placed, as not to present a charac- 
ter foreign to what nature may 
be supposed to have produced there. 
The adjoining ground generally requires to be raised at such scenes, but may generally 
be hai-monised by plantation. 

7226. Where running water is conducted informs belonging to the geometric style of gar- 
dening, waterfalls and cascades 
are constructed in the form of 
crescents, flights of steps, or 
wavy slopes ; all which have ex- 
cellent effects of their kind when 
appropriately introduced, as at 
Chatsworth, Hatton, and many 
other places. 

7227. A natural stream may 
sometimes be improved by altering 
its direction, and bringing it 
through a more interesting part 
of the grounds; and we have 
known an admirable effect pro- 
duced by bringing a distant 
river close to the house, even so 

mnch so as to wash the base of its (errWe-wail. (Jig. 701.) 




Book IV. 



OPERATING WITH ROCKS. 



1013 



Sect. IV. Roctes> 

122%. The imitation of rocks forms no part of the geometric style of gardening, and 
are a material of the natural style, equally unsuitable to be created. But though rocks 
cannot readily be imitated, their expression may sometimes be heightened when desirable, 
and concealed when disagreeable. 

7229. The character of rocks may be savage, terrific, sublime, picturesque, or fantastic. 
By attending to the forms of the milder characters, and their connection with ground and 
trees, we shall discover whether, and to what extent, they may be improved. Savage 
rocks are too inhospitable to be permanently admitted, in any extent, near the eye. All 
rocks convey something of this idea that are not accompanied by vegetation ; and, there- 
fore, planting among or near them is, in eveiy case, an improvement where trees do 
not exist. All rocks are expressive of dignity ; those eminently so, are not greatly varied 
by projections from their surface : their beauty is to be augmented, either by increasing 
their surface in height or depth, or by connecting it if too scattered. The removal of a 
few feet of earth, or part of the bushes or trees from the bottom of a precipice or ridge, 
and the emplacement of a line of wood along its summit, will increase its real and appar- 
ent height ; a similar process, with respect to the sides, will add to the idea of stability 
and continuation. If the parts are too much scattered, a few trees placed before, or 
bushes or creepers planted in the intervals between the parts, will connect them, and give 
the idea of a whole, partly concealed. But in this case, a considerable breadth of surface 
is necessary, at least in one place, otherwise dignity must give way to picturesque beauty. 
But the least indications of rocks that are not very fantastic in their form, even including 
such whose chief expression is picturesque beauty, are, to a certain degree, expressive of 
dignity. The slightest indication of a stratum or ledge appearing above the surface, con- 
veys something of this idea, and ought not to be neglected. When they are discovered by 
alterations in the ground with a view to the formation of roads, fences, and water, or to 
the erection of buildings, occasional advantage may be taken of their appearance. A 
road across a declivity may be accompanied by a ledge of rocks instead of a bank of earth. 
Grounds which are broken and picturesque, will display a more sufficient reason for the 
appearance. The walls of a terrace evidently in part founded on a rock, will give an 
idea of dryness, dignity, and security to the house ; and the margin of a stream displaying 
even large stones, increases the idea of impetuosity ; or, in lakes, of the action of water in 
washing away the earth. Among imitations of wild scenery, detached stones heighten 
the illusion, and carry back the mind to the aboriginal state of the country. Loose or de- 
tached fragments of rocks may often aid the effect of real or supposed masses. The ap- 
pearance of a large rude stone near a wooded steep, unless of one evidently rounded by 
water or art, always leads the mind to the larger mass up the acclivity from which it has 
been broken and rolled down ; if partly sunk in the ground, and concealed by vegetation, 
the fertility of the imagination considers them as parts of magnitudes which lie buried, 
under the surface. All this, however, can only be successfully accomplished in a coun- 
try which, by the character of its general surface, does not preclude the idea of rocks. On 
a flat or a champaign country, the want of truth, or seeming truth, would render them 
disagreeable ; and, indeed, did rocks exist in such a landscape, they should be hidden 
rather than displayed, unless of such extraordinary magnitude and effect, as to form an 
exception to general principles. 



702 




7G3 



7230. The judicious distribution of stones, in situations where they are not evidently 
foreign to the character of soil and surface, may greatly heighten wildness and picturesque 
beauty, { fig. 702.) Every thing, however, will depend on the manner in which this is 
done ; they must not be merely laid down at random on ' 
the surface (a), or formally joined together [h), or merely 
connected, which, however, is better (c) ; but grouped with 
taste ((/), and partially concealed by vegetation and sunk in 
the soil. (/, ^0- 

7231. Fantastic stones {fig. 703. a) should be avoided in ^ 
all cases, unless in some peculiar scene; and where there 
are already indications of stratified or regular masses ofi 
rock (6 , it can never appear natural to place near them 
round, water-worn stones (c). Where angular and laminated stones are near j or where 

3T 3 




1014 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



such as can be quar- 
ried in forms suitable 
for building may be 
procured, grand et^ 
fects may be pro- 
duced ; either by 
using them in form- 
ing imitations of na- 
ture, or by combin- 
ing them in a mixed 
style of artificial form 
and natural conglo- 
meration. (^g.704.) 




Sect. V. Buildings. 



7232. Buildings, as materials of scenery, are entirely under the power of man j and, 
from that circumstance, were carried to an unwarrantable excess in the decline of the 
ancient, and the infancy of the modem style. Improvements on ground are forgotten 
by their effect ; that of planting may be accounted too distant or too slow by ordinary 
minds ; but a building is complete the moment it is finished. It afibrds immediate 
satisfaction to the owner ; and being known as a costly object, full credit is given to him 
for the expense incurred. Thus wealth, confiding in its powers, multiplied garden- 
buildings to an excess, which ended in creating a disgust, stiU existing, in some degree, 
at their appearance in improved scenery. Before proceeding further, it may be proper 
to offer some remarks on the style or architecture of buildings, 

7233. It is a common error to consider nothing as architecture but what u Grecian ; to 
fancy that all architecture must have what are called orders ; and to consider the Gothic, 
Chinese, or Hindoo modes of building, as mere barbarous compositions. But nothing 
can be more unphilosophical than this mode of viewing the subject ; and it may just as 
well be said that there is no true language in the world but the Greek ; that every lan- 
guage ought to correspond with it in the tenses and moods of the verbs ; and that every 
other mode of speech is mere jargon. A style of building, and mode of oral communi- 
cation, must have a sufficient claim to be considered as complete, when they answer the 
purposes for which they are intended ; and, applying this principle to the architecture 
and language of different countries, we shall find that each is complete relatively to 
those countries. That any style of building, or any language can be universally suitable, 
is to suppose that the same climate and the same degree of civilisation prevails over the 
whole globe. Thus, as there are different languages, and different manners and customs, 
so there are different styles of architecture ; and though we may prefer the Grecian, as 
having been used by the most refined nations of antiquity, let us not hastily reject every 
other style as devoid of congruity, or unsuitable for being applied fo constructions of use 
or beauty. 

7234. TJie origin of the different styles of architectttre are usually traced to imitations of 
temporary structures formed of timber or of rough trees ; and thus the Grecian column, 
with its capital ornamented with foliage, has been called an imitation of the trunk of a 
palm, with the petioles of its recently dropped leaves still adhering ; the Gothic arches 
and tracery have been likened to wicker-work, or the intersecting branches of an avenue ; 
and the Chinese style to the imitation of a tent supported by bamboo. But the imitation 
"of nature is the last thing that occurs in the progress of improvement ; and though the 
above opinions may not be without their use as a sort of hypothesis for composition ; yet 
it appears much more probable 

that styles of building have taken 705 
their origin, jointly from the ma- 
terials the country afforded, and 




the wants of the people. Ac- 
cording to this hypothesis, the 
Grecian may be considered 
founded on the use of planks of 
stone, in the same way as beams of timber (Jig. 705. a) ; the Gothic, by the use of small 
stones, held together by their position (b) ; and the Hindoo, by the use of small stones, 
held together by superincumbent weight (c). The Doric temple (Jig. 706.) is easily 
traced in this way to its prototype of wood ; but though the idea be supported by the 
aiithority of Vitruvius, it should never be considered as any thing more than mere 
conjecture. 

7235. The progress which architecture has made in Britain, in modern times, is matter 
of greater certainty ; and Repton, vdth his usual taste, has furnished an ingenious 



Book IV. 



FORMING THE SCENERY OF RESIDENCES. 



1013 



the partiality of individuals, in affixing different degrees of importance to each consideration. Hence it is 
obvious, that there can be no danger of sameness in any two designs conducted on principles thus estab- 
lished ; since in every different situation some one or more of these considerations must preponderate j 
and the most rational decision will result from a combined view of all the separate advantages or disad- 
vantages to be foreseen from each. It was the custom of former times, in the choice of domestic situa- 
tions, to let comfort and convenience prevail over every other consideration. Thus the ancient baronial 
castles were built on the summits of hills, in times when defence and security suggested the necessity of 
placing them there ; and difficulty of access was a recommendation : but when this necessity no longer 
existed, (as mankind are always apt to fly from one extreme to the other,) houses were universally 
erected in the lowest situations, with a probable design to avoid those inconveniences to which lofty posi- 
tions had been subject; hence the frequent sites of many large mansions, an J particularly abbeys and mo- 
ncisteries, the residence of persons who were willing to sacrifice the beauty of prospect for the more solid 
and permanent advantages of habitable convenience ; amongst which, shelter from wind, and a supply of 
water for store fishponds, w^ere predominant considerations." {Enquiry, &c. p. 83.) 

7251. In hilly countries, or in any country where the surface is varied, the choice is 
neither made in the bottoms {Jig- 715. a), nor on the svmamits of the eminences (c), but 




ni6 




bad 




717 



generally on the south-east side of the latter (6), on a raised platform, the rising grounds 
behind being planted both for effect and shelter. 

7252. The field of vision, or portion of landscape luhich the eye will comprehend, is a 
circumstance frequently mistaken in fixing a situation for a house ; since a view seen 
from the windows of an apartment will materially differ from the same view seen in 
the open air. Much evidently depends on the thickness of the walls {fig- 716.), the 
width of the windows (a), and the distance of the spectator \ / 

from the aperture. Near the centre of the room (b), the 
spectator will not enjoy above 20 or 30 degrees of vision ; 
but close to the window (c) his eye will take in from 70 to 
100 degrees. Hence, to obtain as much of the view from a 
room as possible, there should not only be windows on two 
sides of a room, but one in the angle, or an oblique or bow- 
window on each side, instead of the common form. [Obs. 
on Landscape Gardening, p. 24.). 

7253. The aspect of the principal rooms deserves particular attention in every case, and 
most so in bleak or exposed situations. The south-east is most commonly the best for 
Britain {fig. 717.); and the south, and due 
east, the next best. The south-west. Rep- 
ton considers the worst, because from that 
quarter it rains oftener than from any other ; 
and the windows are dimmed, and the views 
obstructed, by the slightest shower, which will 
not be perceptible in the windows facing the 
south or east. A north aspect is gloomy, be- 
cause deprived of sunshine ; but it deserves to 
be remarked, that woods and other verdant 
objects look best when viewed from rooms so 
placed, because all plants are most luxuriant 
on the side next the sun. " The aspect due 
east," he considers, " nearly as bad as the 
north, because there the sun only shines while 
we are in bed ; and the aspect due west is in- 
tolerable, from the excess of sun dazzling the eye through the greatest part of the day. 
From hence we may conclude, that a square house, placed with its fronts duly opposite 
to the cardinal points, will have one good and three bad aspects." {Fragments on Land- 
scape Gardening, &c. p. 108.) 

7254. A 7nansion for the country, if a mere square or oblong, will thus be deficient in 
point of aspect, and certainly in picturesque beauty, or variety of external forms, lights, 
and shades. An irregular plan, composed with a combined view to the situation, dis- 
tant views, best aspects to the principal rooms, effect from different distant points, and' as 
forming a whole with the groups of domestic offices and other architectural appendages or 
erections, will therefore be the best ; and as the genius of the Gothic style of architec- 
ture is better adapted for this irregularity than the simplicity of the Grecian, or the 
regularity of the Roman styles, it has been justly considered the best for country-resi- 
dences. Another advantage of an irregular style is, that it readily admits of additions 
in almost any direction. 



1020 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



7255. Convenience, as well as effect, require that every house ought to have an entrance- 
front, and a garden-front ; and, in general cases, neither the latter, nor the views from 
the principal rooms, should be seen fully and completely, but from the windows and 
garden-scenery. Not to attend to this, is to destroy their contrasted effect, and cloy the 
appetite by disclosing all, or the greatest part of the beauties at once. The landscape 
which forms the Jback ground to a mansion, the trees which group with it, and the archi- 
tectural terrace which forms its base, are to be considered as its accompaniments, and in- 
fluenced more or less by its style. The classic pine and cedar should accompany the Greek 
and Roman architecture ; and the hardy fir, the oak, or the lofty ash, the baronial castle. 

7256. Terrace and conservatory. We observed, when treating of ground, and under 
the ancient style, that the design of the terrace must be jointly influenced by the mag- 
nitude and style of the house, the views from its windows, ( that is, from the eye of a 
person seated in the middle of the principal rooms,) and the views of the house from a 
distance. In almost every case, more or less of architectural form will enter into these 
compositions. The level or levels will be supported jiartly by grassy slopes, but chiefly 
by stone walls, harmonising with tlie lines and forms of the house. These, in the 
Gothic style, may be furnished by battlements, gateways, oriels, pinnacles, &c. ; or, on 
a very great scale, watch-towers may form very picturesque, characteristic, and useful 
additions. The Grecian style may, in like manner, be finished by parapets, balustrades, 
and other Roman appendages. 

7257. The breadth of terraces, and their 
height relatively to the level of the floor of the 
living-rooms, niust depend jointly on the height 
of the floor of the living-rooms and the sur- 
face of the grounds or country to be seen over 
them. Too broad or too high a terrace will 
both have the effect of foreshortening a lawn 
with a declining surface, or concealing a near 
valley. The safest mode in doubtful cases is, 
not to form this appendage till alter the prin. 
cipal floor is laid, and then to determine the 
details of the terrace by trial and correction. 

7258. Narrow terraces are entirely occupied 
as promenades, and may be either gravelled 
or paved : and different levels, when they ex- 
ist, connected by inclined planes or flights of 
steps. Where the breadth is more than is 
requisite for ^ralks, the borders may be kept 
in turf with groups or marginal strips of flow- 
ers and low shrubs. In some cases, the ter- 
race-Walls may be so extended as to enclose 
ground sufficient for a level plot to be used as 
a bowling-green or a flower-garden. These 
are generally connected with one of the living-rooms or the conservatory, and to the latter is frequently 
joined an aviary and the entire range of botanic stoves. Or, the aviary may be made an elegant de- 
tached building, so placed as to group with the house and other surrounding objects. An elegant struc- 
ture of this sort (Jig.llS.) was designed by Repton for the grounds of the Pavilion at Brighton. 

7259. The fiower-garden should join both the conservatory and terrace ; and, where 
the botanic stoves do not join the conservatory and the house, they, and also the aviary and 
other appropriate buildings and decorations, should be placed here. (See 6076, and 6161.) 

7260. The kitchen-garden should be placed near to, and connected with the flower- 
garden, with concealed entrances and roads leading to the domestic offices for culinary 
purposes, and to the stables and farm-buildings for manure. (See 2382. ) 

7261. The situation of the orchard should, all other circumstances being suitable, be 
near to the kitchen-garden ; and between them may be very properly placed the garden- 
er's house, connected with the furnace, sheds, fruit-rooms, &c. (See 2527. J 

7262. The laivn, or that breadth of mown turf formed in front of, or extending in dif- 
ferent directions from, the garden-front of the house, is, in the geometric style, varied 
by architectural forms, levels, and slopes ; and in the modern by a picturesque or 
painter-like disposition of groups, placed so as to connect with the leading masses, and 
throw the lawn into an agreeable shape or shapes. In very small villas the lawn may 
embrace the garden or principal ffont of the house, without the intervention of terrace- 
scenery, and may be separated from the park, or park-like field, by a light wire fence ; 
but in more extensive scenes it should embrace a terrace, or some avowedly artificial 
architectural basis to the mansion, and a sunk wall, as a distant separation, will be 
more dignified and permanent than any iron fence. The park may come close up to 
the terrace-garden, especially in a flat situation, or where the breadth of the terrace is 
considerable. 

7263. The shrubbery generally connects the house and flower-gardens, and forms, 
strictly speaking, a part of the pleasure-ground scenery. It is a scene in whicli the ob- 
ject is to arrange a collection of foreign trees and shrubs in a dry border, generally on 
the north side of a walk, or in dug groups and patches. One very principal consider- 
ation is, to connect, partly in appearance only, the dug patches. The distinct uncon- 
nected obtrusion of such scenes is justly reprobated by Price, who gives excellent in- 




Cook IV. 



UNION OF CONSTITUENT SCENES. 



1021 



structions for creating the beautiful picturesque among dug groups, and preserving all 
tljG polish and appearance of high keeping with the most delicate culture of the plants. 
(Si-e 6187.) 

7264. The j)leasy re-ground is a term applied generally to the kept ground and walks 
of a residence. Sometimes the walk merely passes, in a winding direction, tlirough 
glades and groups of common scenery, kept polished by the scythe, and from whence 
cattle, &c. are excluded. At other times it includes a part of, or all the scenes above 
mentioned ; and may include several others, as verdant amphitlieatres, labyrinths, 
(Jig. 719.) a Linnsean, Jussieuean, American, French, 719 

or Dutch flower-garden, a garden of native, rock, 
mountain, or aquatic plants, picturesque flower-gar- 
den, or a Chinese garden, exhibiting only plants in 
flower, inserted in the ground, and removed to make 
room for others when the blossom begins to fade, &c. 

7265. The park is a space devoted to the growth 
of timber, pasturage for deer, cattle, and sheep, and 
for adding grandeur and dignity to the mansion. On 
its extent and beauty, and on the magnitude and 
architectural design of the house, chiefly depend the 
reputation and character of the residence. In the 
geometric style, the more distant or concealed parts 
were subdivided into fields, surroimded by broad 
stripes or double rows, enclosed in v/alls or hedges, 
and the nearer parts were chiefly covered with wood, 
enclosing regular surfaces of pasturage. In the mo- 
dern style, the scenery of a park is intended to resem- 
ble that of a scattered forest, the more polished glades 
and regular shapes of lawn being near the house, 
and the rougher parts towards the extremities. The 
paddocks or small enclosures are generally placed 
between the family stables and the farm, and form a 
sort of intermediate character. 

7-266. The farm, or that portion of agricultural surface, retained in the hands of the 
owner fpr private cultivation, was, in both styles, placed without, but adjoining the park ; 
and when circumstances admitted, near to the paddocks. In some cases, on a moderate 
scale, part of the park constitutes the whole, or a part of the farm, and is kept in aration. 
The trees in this cultivated space are arranged in natural-like masses, so as to give the 
idea of part of a forest-scene subjected to the plough. When the park is extensive and 
truly forest-like, the effect of the whole is much improved by the contrast, and recalls to 
mind those charming scenes in the woody districts of jGermany, where cultivation smiles 
in the glades and recesses of eternal forests^ 

7267. The riding, or drive, is a road indicated rather than formed, which passes through 
the most interesting and distant parts of a residence not seen in detail from the walks, 
and as far into the adjoining lands of wildness or cultivation, as the property of the 
owner extends. It is also frequently conducted as much farther as the disposition of 
adjoining proprietors permits, or the general face of the country renders desirable. 

7268. Original arrangement. Though the above arrangement of the .component parts 
of a residence will be found, in g^eneral, tlie most convenient on a flat surface, or one 
gently varied, we are far from recommending its universal adoption. Situations are 
always fertile in suggesting new ideas, which 

" Start even from difficulties, strike from chance ;" 

and a mjnd already stored with a knowledge of every part of the subject, works from 
principles, and fortuitous suggestions, rather than models. We would rather see an 
original idea attempted than the most beautiful arrangement imitated. 




Chap. IV, 

Of the Union of the constituent Scenes in forming Gardens or Residences of jmrticular 
Characters,- and of lading out Public Gardens. 

7269. To co7nj)lete a country-residence is the end of all landscape-gardening, whether 
imitative or geometric. In the preceding chapter we have given a general idea of the 
parts or scenes, and their connection, which enter into a complete residence of the first 
(Order, We have now to notice their arrangements in different gradations of residences 



1022 PRACTICE OF GARDENING. Part IIL 

and these, we must previously acknowledge, are so intimately blended, that we hardly 
know how to separate them, and give a distinctive character to each ; every country- 
gentleman, from the occupier of the palace to the cottage, adopting such luxuriant scenes 
as suit his particular taste, without reference to any thing but Ids own desires ; and this 
happy circumstance contributes, perhaps, as much as the difference of situations, to the 
variety in the beauty and style of British country-residences. Mansions, villas, tempo- 
rary residences, cottages, and public gardens, may be said to include the leading dis- 
tinctions. Public gardens are much less various than private ones, because there are 
fewer publics than individuals. 

Sect. I. On laying out Private Gardens, or Besidences. 

7270. The specific distinctions of jrrivate residences may be considered as the mansion 
and demesne, the villa, the farrp, the temporary residence, and the cottage; but each of 
these branches out into a number of subspecies and varieties. 

7271. The mansion and detnesne. The characteristic of the mansion and demesne, is the demesne or 
surrounding lands in tenancy. Any residence of which the dwelling-house is of a higher character than 
that of the mansion and demesne, as the castle, abbey, and palace, has the same general arrangement in 
the grounds, and differs chiefly in extent, and in the arrangements of the courts and other exterior ap- 
pendages of the house. 

7272. As a specimen of this style, we shall give the arrangement at Michel Grove in Sussex, the residence 
of R Walker, Esq. from the works of Repton : — 

7273. In determining the situation for a large house in the country, there are other circumstances to 
be considered besides the fences and appendages immediately contiguous. These have so often occurred, 
that I have established in imagination certain positions for each, which I have never found so capable of 
being realised as at Michel Grove. 

7274. I would place the house, with the principal front, towards the south-east. 

7275. I would place the offices behind the house ; but as they occupy much more space, they will of 
course spread wider than tlie front. I would place the stables near the offices. I would place the kitchen- 
garden near the stables. I would put the home-farm buildings at rather a greater distance from the 
house ; but these several objects should be so connected by back roads as to be easily accessible. 

7276. I would bring the park to the very front of the house. 

7277. I would keep the farm or land in tillage, whether for use or for experiment, behind the house ; ' 
I would make the dressed pleasure-grounds to the right and left of the house, in places which would 
screen the unsightly appendages, and form a natural division between the park and the farm, with walks 
communicating to the garden and the farm. 

7278. The villa may be nothing more than a park with a house of smaller size 
than that of the mansion and demesiie, surrounded by a pleasure-ground, and with 
the usual gardens. Moderate extent and proximity to other villas, constitute the cha- 
racteristic of this class of residences ; but though adjoining lands are not necessary 
to the character, they do not, where they exist, change it, unless their extent be con- 
siderable. Two villas joined together often mutually aid each other in effect, especially 
as to water and trees. {Jig. 720.) 




7279. The villa farm. A villa being originally a farm-house, we think that the 
Roman arrangement, in which the farm-offices were joined to, or at least so near, as to 
form with it and the domestic offices one group of buildings, might be adopted as the 
characteristic distinction of this class of residences. The farm-buildings should, in that 
case, be dignified with more architectural design than when placed at a distance ; but 



Book IV. 



PRIVATE GARDENS, OR RESIDENCES. 



102S 



still in line subordination to the man- 
sion. Instead of deer, sheep may 
gfaze tlie park on the garden -front, 
separated from the house by an archi- 
tectural barrier, or in some situations, 
with a platform of gravel, and walks 
and knots of flowers. A glacis of 
turf, witli a light fence below the 
slope, will be sufficient protection 
from sheep or cattle, and not impede 
tlie view of the lawn from the win- 
dows. The entrance-front may be 
approached through grass fields, not 
separated with common hedges, but 
with picturesque fences (Jig. 721.) 
in the modern, and double hedges 
and slips of planting in the geometric 
style. All or any part of the other 
constituent parts of a ?nansion and 
demesne residence, such as hot-houses, 
gardens, orchards, pleasure-grounds, 
&c. may or may not be added, ac- 
cording to its extent, and the parti- 
cular taste of the proprietor. 

7280. Theferme oimee differs from a common farm in having a better dwelling-house, 
neater approach, and one partly or entirely distinct from that which leads to the offices. 
It also differs as to the hedges, which are allowed to grow wild and irregular {Jig. 722. ), 
and are bordered on each side by a braad green drive, and sometimes by a gravel-walk 
and shrubs. It differs from a villa farm in having no park. A dry hilly soil is best 




suited for this description of residence, of which there are some fine examples in Surrey, 
Kent, and the Isle of Wight. 

7281. Temporary residences, as marine \allas, sporting or shooting boxes, seldom eon- 




1024 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




tain much land attached. No hot-houses, and but little pleasure-ground is here re- 
quired. What land there may be, should be applied to use rather than to beauty. 
Speaking of hunting-boxes, Marshall observes " a suit of paddocks should be seen from 
the house ; and if a view of distant covers can be caught, the back ground will be com- 
plete. Tlie stable, the kennel, the leaping-bar, are the appfHindages, in the construc=. 
tion of which simplicity, substantialness, and conveniency should prevail," 

7282. A cottage oriiee, we think, might be 
characterised by the garden-front opening into a 
picturesque orchard ; or a lawn, varied by groups 
of fruit-trees, instead of a lawn or park planted, 
with forest trees. It may contain any part of the 
scenes of the villa, at the will of the owner. If 
the situation of the house is elevated, so as to 
give a view from the principal rooms of a great 
part of the farm, it will be the more desirable. A 
desirable foundation for this improvement is an 
old English farmhouse ; by adding to which one 
or two principal rooms, a very interesting group 
may be formed at little expense. 

7283. Cottage en verger. An agreeable va- 
riety of tins species sometimes adopted in France, 
consists in surrounding an enclosed space of one 
or two acres, with an irregular strip of walnut, 
cherry, chestnut, and other tall-growing tr,ees 
(Jig. 722. a) which produce botli fruit and 
timber ; and then planting the interior spqce (b) 
with tlie finer sorts of fruit-trees, especially pears 
and plums, as standards, on turf. Winding 
walks are led through the whole, and groups of 
flowers and kitchen-vegetables introduced. 

7284. The citizeiis villa (Jig. 723.) is a spot 
of one or more acres laid out in la\\'n and shrub- 
bery, but without a kitchen-garden. As the 
space contained is verj- limited, and often under 
an acre, only the most select trees, shrubs, and flowers should be employed ; and greaf 
part of the trees and shrubs should be evergreens. Seats and other decorations may 
be introduced, 
of the most se^ 
lect designs, and 
best workman- 
ship ; and what 
is'of the last con- 
sequence, none 
but a good gar- 
dener should be 
employed in or- 
der to preserve 
the whole in the | 
highest order 4 
and keeping, at 
every season of 
the year. Gar- 
dens or residen- 
ces of this sort 
are almost pecu- 
liar to the neigh- 
borhood of Lon- 
don ; and the 
occupant pro- 
cures his culinary produc. ions and fruits cheaper and better than he can grow them, 
ifrom that first of all gardens, Covent-garden. 

7285. The suburban villa (Jig. 724.) is of limited extent, but contains a small 
kitchen-garden and stables, with a field planted either in the ancient style (a), or mo^ 
dern style (b) ; mth a neat lawTi, and groups of flowers (c). Such villas are occupied 
more by professional men and artists, than by the lesser merchants and rich tradesmen, 
who (those of the metropolis at least) prefer the citizen's villa. When two or more of 
sych villas can be formed adjoining each other, the happiest elFects may be produced if 




Book IV. 



PRIVATE GARDENS, OR RESIDENCES. 



1025 




their owners act in concert at their first planting ; and a sort of community of scenery 
may be enjoyed, without lessening individual privacy and comfort. On the contrary, a 
gain might result to each proprietor rather than otherwise ; for if two villas, adjoining 
each other, are laid out in the modern style, then by placing the masses of wood of the 
one, against the masses 

of the other, less ground ..*x*\vv.vn>^xvv™ — 7:2J 

would require to be occu- 
pied in plantation by each. 
Office-buildings might be 
placed against, or near 
office-buildings, so as to 
be shut out, or paitially 
concealed witli less than 
the usual quantity of 
trees, azid so an. In the 
ancient style, avenues 
and vistas might be con- 
trived to pass through 
each other's grounds, and 
the ornamental objectfj 
which formed their ter- 
mination, serving both 
parties, only half the 
usual number would require to be erected by each. 

7286. IVie suburban house {fig. 725.) is a large commodious dwelling, in a village- 
like collection of houses, or streets, on the outskirts of the metropolis, or of large towns ; 
and occupied as the constant residence of wealthy professional men or merchants. It has 
a carriage-entrance to the house and stables in 
front, and a small kitchen-garden behind. 

7287. The house with carriage -entrance ( fig. 

726. ) occurs very commonly in the suburban 
streets of large cities ; it contains a small gar- 
den behind, not however sufficient to employ 
gardener ; and it is without stable or coach- 
house ; the fore-court is varied by shrubs and 
a few trees, and the central circle of turf, orna- 
mented with baskets of flowers or roses ; and in 
the m.iddle a statue, sundial, fountain, pond, 
or a cedar, or other evergreen tree. 

7288 The house with covered entrance (fig. 

727. ) is similarly situated to the other, but 
generally further from town, to and from which 
tiie occupant passes by the local public con- 
veyances. It contains a garden-court before, 
other ; but the former is entered 




and a garden behind the house, like the 




by a porch (a), connected with 
the house by means of a glass or 
opaque roofed passage (b) ; and 
along the front of the house is an 
open veranda (c, c) communi- 
cating with a vestibule (d). This 
sort of suburban house is well 
suited for invalids, who may take 
exercise, and enjoy the plants 
under the glass roofs in rainy 
weather. 

7289. The house and conserva- 
tory {fig. 728.) is similarly situ- 
ated to the last, with one or two 
wings {a and b), as conserva- 
tories ; or, the one a conservatory, 
and the other a botanic stove, or 
a vinery. These communicate 
with the two principal living-rooms, and also with the fore-c£)urt (c) ; the latter entrance 
is that made use of by the gardener. Heat is supplied from the under-ground offices of 
the house ; and if the latter is heated by hot air, in Sylvester's excellent manner, or by 
the more simple operation of steam, it will be accomplished so much the more readily 



1026 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 




The 



and effectually. Tliey may be also lighted up by 
gas, if there is a public gasometer in the neigh- 
borhood. 

7290. The house and Jiower-garden entrance 
(_fig. 729.) requires a more airy situation than 
either of the three last varieties ; and is generally 
situated in some road or street, a mile or two 
from town, or in some suburban hamlet. The 
flowers may be variously arranged, and may be 
either florists' flowers or herbaceous perennials, 
with a mixture of dwarf ornamental shrubs. 
A very complete mode is to grow the flowers in 
the garden behind the house, and bring them to 
the front as they come in flower. This sort of 
residence is well suited for retired tradesmen, 
who act as their own gardeners ; and some fine ' 
examples are to be found at Hammersmith, Hampstead, and round Manchester. 
French and Dutch, and also the 



Germans, excel in this kind of 
garden, and produce the most 
pleasing effects by a judicious 
combination of very few species 
of flowers. They take care to se- 
lect such as are showy, of brilliant 
and distinct simple colors, as 
white and scarlet lilies, red and 
white roses, nasturtium, candy- 
tuft, daisy, larkspur, &c. They 
admit few yellows, or small 
scattered flowering plants ; but 
study to have masses of the same 
colors and forms, contrasted by 
different colors also in masses. 
There are many fine gardens of 
this sort in Picardy and the 
Netherlands, and some in Hanover. 

7291. The house and French parterre (Jig- 730.) can hardly be considered a distinct 
variety from the last ; though it differs in this, that the front garden of the latter contains 
tnrf around the flower-compartments, whereas the former is ccmiposed entirely of earth, 
^d gravel, edged wiUi box, or some other plant. 




729 



730 




731 



7292. The common front garden (Jig. 731.) is a variety so well known as to require no 
description ; but, like the six preceding varieties, it is introduced here chiefly to suggest, 
that these humble scenes may be greatly improved in design, and also in cultivation and 
keeping. There is little danger of the gardens of the wealthy being neglected ; but it is 
of great importance to the advancement of gardemng, that the art should be displayed to 
as great perfection as possible in those gardens which are most universal ; which are con- 
tinually under the eye of a large city population ; seen by the whole country-inhabitants, 
when they visit the towns ; and which chiefly come under the eye of foreigners. 



Book IV. PRIVATE GARDENS, OR RESIDENCES. 



1027 



7293. The farmer s garden should not be placed adjoining the rick-yard, on account of 
the straw liable to be blown into it : and should be well enclosed to exclude poultry, pigs, 
and other domestic animals. Supposing the farm-buildings to occupy three sides of a 
square, and the form-house to be placed in the middle of the south side, and the rick-yard 
to be placed beyond the north side ; then the kitchen-garden may be placed adjoining the 
east or west side of the square ; the grass-orchard, which may also be the drying-ground, 
and area for rearing young poultry, on the opposite and corresponding side ; and a small 
flower-garden may serve as an entrance-court to the farm-house. But in the case of 
farmeries on a larger scale, where the house is detached from the court of offices, the three 
gardens should be united with a small portion of lawn, and a pond, so as to form about 
an acre (more or less, according to circumstances), of garden and pleasure-ground round 
the house. {Jig- 662.) The part destined for the growth of culinary vegetables should be 
laid out in right-lined plots and borders ; the orchard-trees planted in rows or quincunx ; 
and the flowers and flowering shrubs arranged in groups or beds on turf. The most use- 
ful and prolific fruit-trees should be chosen ; including some plants of hops, and one or 
two walnut or chestnut trees in the exposed side of the orchard, if the climate is such as 
will ripen their fruits. No class of men have it in their power to form and cultivate a 
garden at less expense than that of the farmer; but unfortunately few farmers have a, 
taste for the subject; perhaps, because gardening is not sufficiently contrasted to agri- 
culture, to afford the farmer that sort of relief sought for in recreative and pleasurable 
pursuits. 

7294. The laborers'' cottage and garden. This may be reckoned too humble a country- 
residence for the consideration of the landscape-gardener ; but we conceive it to be of very 
great importance to the general good, that these should be improved, and their inhabitants 
ameliorated. What we shall advance is founded on the principle, that whatever renders 
the cottager more comfortable and happy at home, will render him a better servant and 
subject, and in every respect a more valuable member of society. Besides, one of the most 
constantly occurring objects in the country is the laborer's cottage, whether detached by 
the road-side, or grouped in hamlets and villages ; and therefore to render such buildings 
and their scenery more ornamental must, independently of every other considei'ation, be a 
very laudable object. 

7295. The accommodation contained in the cottage, and the'size of the garden, should, no doubt, be regu- 
lated by the family of the cottager, and the facilities afforded him by his line of employment to live well, 
or bring up a large family, &c. But we shall take the lowest case that can occur, and state what we con. 
sider to be the minimum of accommodation, which a humane employer in England would wish to be en. 
joyed by his serving laborer, even if he had no other family than his wife. 

7296. The whole space to be enclosed, including the garden and the site of the house, cannot be less than 
one eighth part of a statute acre. The cottage should, if possible, be placed in the centre, fronting the 
south-east, by which means, if it be a square or a parallelogram, the sun will shine on each of the four sides 
a part of every day in the year. Its floor should be raised two steps above the level of the garden ; its 
principal windows to the south-east. A gutter should be placed under the eaves, to prevent the ground, 
at the base of the walls, from receiving extreme moisture, and thus rendering the interior damp and^iVn- 
wholesome. The cottage should consist of the following parts : — 

7297. A porch to throw off the rain from the steps of the door, and prevent it from being blown in by the 
wind. On the smallest scale, two breadboards, or two slates or flag-stones, placed pediment-wise over the 
door will suffice. 

7298. A lobby, broad passage, or other space inside the door, to contain lumber, fuel, garden-tools, and to 
serve as a place for washing, or working at coarse work, &c, 

7299. A cooking and living-room entered by the lobby or outer room ; the fire-place, with an oven and 
small boiler, both included in a cast-iron grate. 

7300. A sleeping-room over the living-room, and entered by a stair from the lobby or outer room. 

7301. A garret, or children or lodger's Gleeping-room, or small room for any purpose, over the lobby or 
outer room. 

7302. A pantry, taken off the lobby, with a small window to the north-west, 

7303. A closet, for utensils and articles used in the living-room, taken off that room, with a window to 
the north-west or south-east. 

7304. A hen-roost, forming part of the garret over the lobby, and entered by a poultry-ladder, placed 
against a small opening near the bottom of the outer wall. 

7305. In the garden should be a well, with a pump, if deep ; unless some other source of good water is 
near. 

7306. A wafer-closet placed in a hidden part'of the garden, behind the house, so contrived that the visitor 
may neither be seen from the windows of the cottage nor the public road, with a going and returning, or an 
incidental approach, instead of the direct cul de sac paths which commonly lead to such places. 

7307. A pigsty attached to the north-east or south-west front. 

7308. A dunghill, or a small spot adjoining the pigsty, surrounded by a dwarf wall. 

7309. A niche in the wall of the south-east front of the house, to hold two or more beehives, with 
two iron bars, joined and hinged at one end, and with a staple at the other to lock them up to prevent 
stealing. 

7310. The surrounding fence may be a wall, close pales, a holly, thorn, sloe-thorn, or damson-plum hedge, 
according to circumstances ; if a hedge of any kind, then standard plum, pear, apple, or cherry trees, may 
be planted in it ; if a wall, the same sorts may be trained against it. Next to the fence, a border should 
be carried round the whole; a similar border may be-formed round the house; and the area for culture 
wiU then be thrown into two compartments, one behind the house, and one in front of it. The compartments 
may be surrounded with a line of gooseberries and currants, and a few standard apples or plums (as being the 
two most useful cottage fruits) scattered over the whole. Against the house may be planted currants, pears, 
or a vine, according to the situation and climate. Honeysuckles and monthly roses may be planted next 
the porch ; ivy against the water-closet ; and the scented clematis against the pigsty. The border round 
the house should be devoted to savory pot-herbs, as parsley, thyme, mint, chives, &c. and to flowers and 
low flowering shrubs. The surrounding border, under the wall or hedge, should be devoted to early and 
late culinary crops, as early potatoes, pease, turnips, kidneybeans, &c. No forest trees, especially the ash 

3 U 2 



J 028 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



and elm, should be planted in, or if possible, even near the cottager's garden ; as these are ruinous to 
crops ; the first both hy its shade and roots, and the latter by its roots, which spread rapidly to a great ex- 
tent, close under the surface. The oak is the tree the least injurious to gardens. 

7311. Varialion may be made in this extent of accommodation, by adopting a different form for the 
ground.plan of the plot ; by different inclinations of surfaces, kinds of fence, sort of materials used for the 
roof and walls of the house, coloring of the walls, and above all, by adopting different styles of architecture. 
But whatever is done in this respect, no attempt at ornament or picturesque effect should be made which 
is at variance with comfort ; — latticed windows are cold and comfortless ; chimney-flues tortured in their 
direction, with a view to fixing the stack of chimney-tops in some particular point, occasion smoky apart- 
ments. A variety of other deviations from common practice made to gratify the eye of the beholder, 
without any reference to the inhabitant, might be mentioned; but we shall only add, that whatever is 
most comfortable and durable will please the best in the long run. 



Sect. II. Public Gardens. 

7312. Public gardens are either designed for recreation, instruction, or commercial pur- 
poses. The first include equestrian and pedestrian promenades ; the second, botanic and 
experimental gardens ; and the third, public nurseries, market-gardens, florists' garden^ 
orchards, seed-gardens, and herb-gardens. 



StJBSECT. 1. Public Gardens for Recreation, 

7313. Public parks, or equestrian protnenades, are valuable appendages to large cities* 
Extent and a free air are the principal requisites, and the roads should be arranged so as 
to produce few intersections ; but at the same time so as carriages may make either the 
tour of the whole scene, or adopt a shorter tour at pleasure. In the course of long roads, 
there ought to be occasional bays; or side expansions to admit of carriages separating frona 
the course, halting or turning. Where such promenades are ver\' extensive, they are fur- 
nished with places of accommodation and refreshment, both for men and horses ; this is a 
valued part of their arrangement for occasional visitors from a distance, or in hired vehi- 
cles. Our continental neighbors have hitherto greatly excelled us in this department of 
gardening ; almost every town of consequence having its promenades for the citizens a 
clieval and also au pied. Till lately, Hyde Park, at London, and a spot called the Mea- 
dows, near Edinburgh, were the only equestrian gardens in Britain ; and neither were 
well arranged. But in 1810, the Regent's Park was commenced from a suggestion of 
W. Fordyce, Esq., the late surveyor of woods and forests, and it promises to be a scene 
worthy of the metropolis. It is only to be regretted, that the space available to the public 
is so much cui-tailed by interspersed villas, and surrounding rows of houses and gardens : 
for though from the number of trees, the wealthy citizen who can view the scenery from 
his horse or coach may recognise the park character ; yet by rendering so great an extent 
of the surface private property, the wanderings of the pedestrian are limited, and his views 
of the scenery confined. 

7314. The public garden oft 
Carlsruhe {fg. 752.), and the 
town, founded by the INIar- 
gi-ave Charles William in 1715, 
are formed to correspond with 
each other. The palace (a) 
is noticed by Sulzer [Theorie 
des beoux Arts, &c). and by 
Hirschfield {Theorie des Jar- 
dins, &c. vol. iv. p. 416.), as 
one of the finest in Germany, 
and remarkable for having the 
wings at an oblique angle to 
the main building. Behind, 
exactly in the centre of the cir- 
cular carriage-promenade {b), 
is a tower (c), which commands j 
a bird's-eye view of the whole | 
park, pleasure and kitchen gar- j 
dens [d), and the town and 
church {e). The whole is on 
level ground, and joined to a 
natural forest. In the town' 
many English and other foreign 
artisans were settled. Among 
the trees near the palace, arel&ESst. 
some of the finest old tulip-trees, planes, bignonias, sumachs, acacias, cedars, and other 
exotic trees in Germany. 

7315. Boulevards {^Boulevard, Fr., or round workj a bulwark, or great bastion, or ram- 




Book IV. PUBLIC GARDENS FOR RECREATION. 



1029 



part, generally round). Many of the continental cities have a species of equestrian pro- 
menade within their boundaries, which is deserving of imitation. These are broad roads, 
accompanied by rows of trees, near the margin of the city, originally formed on the 
ramparts, or surrounding fortifications, and completely encircling it. They are highly 
interesting promenades, especially to a stranger, to whom they give an idea of the topo- 
graphy and most remarkable points of the scene in the most agreeable manner. The 
boulevards at Paris, Vienna, and Moscow, are particularly to be admired in these 
respects. 

7316. A jn'omenade might ie formed in the margin of London, of a very interesting 
kind, by continuing the sti-eet called the New Road through Hyde Park, entering close 
to where Kensington Gardens leave off, proceeding thence across the Serpentine River, 
and coming out exactly opposite Sloane-street ; then along this street and part of the 
King's Road, to the road leading to Vauxhall Bridge ; from this bridge along roads al- 
ready formed, and as may be seen by the map, well suited to lead to Blackheath ; then 
turn towards London through Greenwich Park, so as to display the best views of the me- 
tropolis over Greenwich Hospital ; form a viaduct or road, on a cast-iron colonnade, across 
the river, sufficiently high to admit ships in full sail to pass under : descend this, and 
join the City Road, which joins the New Road, and completes the circle. This course 
which, with the exception of the bridge, might be formed at no great expense or de- 
i*angement of property, would give a grand view of the metropolis, and by now and 
then deviating from the direct road and returning to it, Kensington Gardens, Hammer- 
smith Nursery, the King's Road Gardens, Chelsea Garden, the garden of Loddiges' at 
Hackney, the Regent's Park, Highgate, Hampstead, and all the most interesting gar- 
dens, scenery, and objects close to London, might be rapidly glanced at in one day. 

7317. Mountain promenade. One of the finest equestrian promenades that can be 
imagined might be formed on the hill of Arthur's Seat at Edinburgh. From the base 
at Holyrood Park, let a road ascend winding round the hill, including the appendage 
of Salisbury Craigs, and the knoll to the east, if desirable, to the summit, at a rise not 
greater than two inches in six feet. Having arrived at the summit, let it wind down 
again at a similar slope, intersecting the other road, and arriving also at Holyrood Park. 
Then let or sell the ground to individuals to build on or plant, each according to his 
taste. The slope of the road would be found so gradual that a two-wheeled chaise 
might be driven up or down at a trot, which can be done on the Simplon road, 
where the slope is 2^ inches in six feet. Taking the height of the hill from the park 
at 700 feet, this would give less than five miles of ascending promenade, and the same 
number descending. By the formation of these two roads, hundreds of the finest situa- 
tions in the world, for summer villas and cottages would be formed, and probably in 
time let or sold, so as to cover much more than the expense, both of purchasing the hill 
as it now is, and forming the roads in the very best manner. 

7318. Public gardens, .or jiedestrian ])ro?7ienades. These, with very few exceptions, 
have been in all ages and countries laid out in the geometric style. The Academus at 
Athens is an ancient example. The summer garden at Petersburgh, a modern one. 
Even in China, where irregularity in gardening is so much desired in general, Ellis 
{Journal of the Embassy of IS\6) informs us, that " the Fatee gardens at Canton, the 
resort of the fashionables, consist of sti-aight walks." And however much our garden- 
ing has been praised and copied by private persons on the continent of Europe, yet, with 
the exception of Coimt Rumford's walk at Munich, and the late Earl of Findlater's at 
Carlsbad, almost all the others are very properly in straight lines. The object of public 
gardens is less to display beautiful scenery than to afford a free wholesome air, and an 
ample uninterrupted promenade, cool and shaded in summer, and warm and sheltered 
in spring and winter. In a limited extent, these must be attempted in one principal 
walk, which, for that purpose, should as much as possible be laid out in a north and 
south direction. In more extensive scenes, certain covered walks may be devoted to 
summer, and certain east and west open walks, to spring and winter. The broad open, 
and narrow covered avenues of the ancient style, are valuable resources on a large 
scale ; these conjoined and laid out in a south and north direction, give in the 
centre an open, sheltered, sunshine walk in mid-winter ; and a close or covered avenue - 
being lined out along each side of the open central one, will afford shady walks for 
summer, and occasional places of retreat from casual showers in spring. Oxford and 
Cambridge afford some fine open and covered avenues, though far inferior to many on 
the continent. 

731 9. Public squares, of such magnitude as to admit of being laid out in ample walks, 
open and shady, are almost peculiar to Britain. The grand object is to get as extended 
a line of uninterrupted promenade as is possible within the given limits. A walk 
parallel to the boundary fence, and at a short distance within it, evidently includes the 
maximum of extent ; but if the enclosure is small, the rapid succession of angles 
and turns becomes extremely disagreeable, and continually breaks in upon the pa$ 

3U 3 



1030 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



733 



5 



des projneneiirs, the conversation of a party, or 
individual contemplation. The angles, therefore, 
must be avoided, by rounding them off^\n a large 
square ; in a small one, by forming the walk into 
a circle ; and in a small parallelogram, by adopt- 
ing an oval form. In laying out a large square 
[jig. 733. ), four objects ought to be kept in view. 
1. Sufficient open space [a), both of lawn and 
walk, so as the parents, looking from the windows 
of the houses w hich surround the square, may not 
long at a time lose sight of their children : 2. An 
open walk, exposed to the sun, for winter and 
spring (b) : 3. A walk shaded by trees, but airy 
for summer (c) : 4, Resting-places (d) ; and 
centrical covered seat and retreat (e), which, be- 
ing nearly equidistant from every point may be 
readily gained in case of a sudden shower, &c. 
are obvious and appropriate decorations for squares. 

7320. Russcl Square, laid out from a design of Repton in 1810, is one of the most complete in these re- 
spects in London. It has been objected to as over-jilanted ; but this is only a piece of vulgar injustice, 
applied indiscriminately to every rural artist, all of whom, as a matter of course, conclude, that when mag- 
nitude effects the purjwses of Ti'umber, the superfluous plants will be rooted out. 

7321. Sloane Square is very ingeniously laid out as a botanic garden, by which means the surrounding 
inhabitants have an easy opportunity of blending recreation with instruction. This plot being a parallelo- 
gram or long square, and the ground being low, Repton proposed to form it into a winding valley, con- 
taining a piece of water ; the walks to be winding, the trees grouped, and the whole contrived so as to 
produce an appearance of nature in the midst of art : but his advice was not complied with. The late poet- 
laureate, Pye (Essai/s), purposed to lay out a square, in imitation of a wild overgrown quarry or gravel-pit, 
and plant it with thorns, hollies, furze, brambles, ferns, &c. This mode he would adopt on account of its 
originality. 

7322. Edward's Square, Kensington, was laid out, in 1819, in groups and winding walks, in a manner 
different from most other squares, by Aiglio, an eminent landscape-painter. A small city square might 

laid out in terraces, like the Isola' Bella, or the gardens of Babylon, and the space beneath usefully dis- 
posed of as vaults for goods, or a cattle-market. 




The statues of eminent puhlic men 



SuBSECT. 2. Public Gardens of histt^ction. 

7323. Botanic gardens. Tlie primary object of botanic gardens is to exhibit a collec- 
tion of plants for the improvement of botanical science ; a secondary object to exhibit 
living specimens of such plants as are useful in medicine, agriculture, and otiier arts ; 
and a third is, or ought to be, the acclimating of foreign plants, and their dissemination 
over the country. In choosing a situation for a botanic garden, the leading object must 
be proximity to the town, city, or university to which it is to belong ; and tlie next, if 
attainable, a variety of surface and soil, to aid the necessarj- formation of composts and 
aspects for different plants. In general, however, there is little choice in these respects, it 
being sufficiently difficult to procure an adequate extent of surface of any kind near 
large towns. As the leading object or feature in the view of a botanic garden is the 
range of hot-houses ; and as these must always face the south, it is generally desirable 
that ground on the north side of the principal public street or road by which it is to be 
approached, should be preferred to ground on the south side. In the latter case, the 
hot-houses must be approached from behind, and then the spectator must turn round to 
look at them, by which their grand effect is lost. The Liverpool and Oxford gardens are 
in this respect unfortunate ; that of Edinburgh fortunate. 

7324. The extent requisite for a botanic garden depends upon that of the collection intended to be formed ; 
as well as on the magnitude to which the tree-plants are intended to be grown. A good deal will depend 
also on whether tender exotics are to be principal or secondary objects of collection, and also on the man- 
ner of growijig the hardy herbaceous plants. An immense collection of herbaceous plants may be included 
in a small space, if the soil is loamy, rather inclined to moisture, and if the plants are separated from each 
other in the rows by bricks or thin tiles, which at once completely divides them and stints their growth, so 
as to admit a great number being planted on the same space. The extent of the Chelsea garden is little 
more than three acres; that of the Liverpool garden is five acres; and in both are extensive collections. 
Messrs. Loddiges have above a thousand species of herbaceous plants, which they keep constantly in small 
pots, set on beds of scoria. These occupy very little space, and the plants thrive well. Of course the larger- 
growing kinds are excluded. 

7325. The form of a botanic garden is a matter of very little consequence : where the extent is small, a 
square or parallelogram may undoubtedly be made to contain most plants ; but where it exceeds four or 
five acres, any form will answer ; and, indeed, if there is a suificient quantity of ground., the more irre- 
gular the form, so much the more variety will there be in the circumferential walks of the garden. The 
Chelsea, Cambridge, Oxford, and Edinburgh gardens, are square, or nearly so; those at Liverpool, Glas- 
gow, Hull, and the Dublin Society's garden, are irregular. The two latter both in outline and surface. 
The most irregular botanic gardens, both as to form and surface, with which we are acquainted, are 
those of Koningsberg and Warsaw. A small rill runs through the former, witli tlie most irregular 
wavy banks on each side ; and the latter is on the steep, broken, and almost inaccessible banks of the 
Vistula. 

7326. In laying out the area of a botanic garden, the objects already mentioned, and 
various others, must be kept in view. If it be merely desired to have a general collec- 
tion, then a surrounding border for the trees and shrubs ; internal compartments for the 



Book IV. 



PUBLIC GARDENS OF INSTRUCTION. 



103i 



beds of herbaceous plants ; and a space at one end or side for the hot-houses, frames, 
compost-yard, &c. will be sufficient ; surrounding the whole with a walk, which may 
also cross the garden in one or more places. Such a walk to display in succession every 
remarkable feature, is essential to all gardens, whatever may be their extent or kind. 
7327. In a complete botanic garden, the following seem to be requisites : — 

1. A curator's liouse, with seetl-room, office for business, i 7. Bt^rdcrs, shadetl and kept moist in different degrees for 



library of reference, herbarium, room for lectures or demon- 
strations. This is most generally situated at or near tlie 
entrance of the garden. Some consider it preferable to place 
a lodge at the entrance for the under-cardeners, and to place 
the curator's house with its accompaniments as above, in con- 
nection with the range of hot-houses; and this the more 
especially eis botanic gardeners are rarely family men, at least 
in Britain. 

2. A raii^e of lwt-hi>Kse3, either in one line, or in a semi- 
circle, circle, square, half square, &c. according to taste and 
other circumstances ; \rith back sheds for all the usual purposes 
of such, including rooms for the journeymen, where there is 
HO lodge ; and lo<lgings for one man, even if there is a lodge, in 
order to attend to the fires. 

3. An adjoining arrangement of )yits and frames, but not in 
front of the range of hot-houses, as m a nursery. 

4. A comixyst-irroiind for all the usual pur^ioses. 

5. ^11 aquarium, includi ig a bog, pond, spring, and salt- 
water cistern, for marine algiE. 

6. .-1 rock-tvork and underneath pendent walls, tunnels, 
Taults, and caves, open in different degrees and directions for 
the growth of mosses, ferns, fungi, &c. 



ferns and other appropriate plants. 

S. A fuiuri-groHiid, shaded by trees or vaults, and containing 
stumps and roots of trees of different kinds, and other means 
for the preservation, as fur as art will go, of a collection of native 
or hardy fungi, etlible, and poisonous. 

9. An American, or hof;-far/h ^ound, either a border, or 
connected groups, or a composite figure surroiuided by walks. 

10. An estifutium, or paved area, for setting out the green- 
house plai\ts in summer for air and exercise by wind. In the 
pavement ought to be holes, in which to insert iron rods to be 
connected with wires, to which to tie the taller and more flex- 
ible plants. 

11. A grass-ground or gramineum, for bringing all the grasses 
togetlier. 

12. A compartment for the ii?iih/s used in medicine, according 
to the Pharmacopceias of the different universities, itc. 

l.T. A compartment for the linrdij poisonous pliiiiJs. 

14. Compartments for the plants and trees used in agriculiure, 
hortictdiure, dyeing, and other branches of general economy. 

15. A compai-t'ment forjii'rists' and border Jhnvers. 

16. A compartment, or, what is generally preferable, sur- 
rue 



rounding border or belt, for trees and sfirubs. 

732S. J'^arious other snb-aiTaiigements or compartments of this nature maybe contrived, 
as for creeping plants, climbing natives of particular countries, succulents, bulbs, &c. ; 
and the association of plants in this way by strong natural and artificial (alluding to their 
use) affinities, is well calculated to facilitate both their culture and study. The most 
complete arrangements of this kind are to be found in the Paris, Dublin Society's, and. 
Glasgow gai-dens. The size and shape of these sub-aiTangements will, of course, be 
various, which will add gi-eatly to the interest of the walks. They will, in general, be 
most advantageously placed round the outskirts of the garden, witliin the marginal plant- 
ation, and should be separated by different sorts of rustic walls, or mounds of rock-work, 
hedges, thickets of evergreens, and other means. Tliey should all be connected by a walk 
in such a way as that a general spectator may see each scene without being obliged to 
enter minutely into it ; and that whilst none can escape the botanist, he may have an easy 
opportunity- of entering minutely into each or any of them. 

7329. The central, or principal part of the ground, should be devoted to one general 
arrangement of all the phanerogamous plants, including hardy exotic trees and natives. 
Tlie trees may be kept dwarfed, by being propagated from cuttings, or layers, and by 
planting in pots, and pruning ; and the stove, and other exotics, will of course only be 
plunged in their appropriate places for a few weeks in the warmest part of each summer, 
as in the Paris garden. Eveiy plant ought to have its name painted on strong cast-iron 
tallies, on a bevelled face, in letters so large as to be legible without stooping. If to 
the name, systematic and English, could be added the Linnaan and Jussieuean class, 
native country, and time of flowering, it would obviously greatly facilitate the peripatetic 
study of plants. The t*illies once placed there, should never be removed, excepting when 
the arrangement is to be enlarged, because the name will show tliat the plant exists, or 
ought to exist, somewhere in the garden ; and will or ought to be placed there in the 
proper season. Such a collection should, in short, be a transcript of the catalogue of the 
garden ; some of the filices, and most of the fungi, algaj, and musci excepted. 

7330. Whetlier the arrangement in the compartmeiits or main area of such a general col- 
lection ought to be Jussieuean or Linnaean, must depend on the opinion of those con - 
cerned. In tlie present state of botanical science, that of Linnfeus is the best for the 
study of nomenclature and technology ; it is that generally adopted in Britain and the 
north of Europe ; whilst that of Jussieu is almost universally adopted in France and Italy. 

7331. The botanical arrangement in the hot-houses, and as far as tiiat kind of an-ange- 
ment is applicable, in the different subsidiary or habitat arrangements, should, in our 
opinion, decidedly be Jussieuean, as presenting the strongest natural affinities, and cal- 
culated to promote variety in general appearance, facility in recollecting names, and 
often answering as to kind of culture. The Paris garden is the most complete in Eu- 
rope as to comprehensive arrangement ; thougli the collection of plants is inferior to 
that at Kew or Liverpool. It is remarkable also for its menagerie, containing a collec- 
tion of living animals of many kinds, lodged in appropriate buildings Mith surrounding 
enclosures of different degrees of extent. It also contains specimens of all the different 
soils, composts, and operations of horticulture and agriculture. A plan of tliis garden, 
which contains about seventy acres, and %vas arranged in its present form by the chevalier 
Molinos, has been given by Professor Thouin, in the Annales du Musce ; and another 
published more recently by the professor's brother, G. Tiiouin Jardinier) , in 
Plans Raisonnces des Jardins, &c. This plan i'^^-. 734.) not only contains the ichno- 
graphy of the garden (1 to 21 but in the margin are placed elevations (22 to 42) of 
tJhe houses in wliicli the living animals are kept, of the immense buildings in which the 

3 U 4 



1032 



PRACTICE GARDENING. 



Past III. 



museum of natural history is contained (24), and of the hot-houses (23', and entrance- 
gates (32). 




7332. The enirance to tfie garden is through a handsome iron railing Between lodges (1, and the der- 
ation 32), opposite the bridge of Austerlitz (42). On the left is the menagerie, commencing with the fe- 
rocious animals, in a long building, with wings and a fore court ; and next in order is a huml>er of small 
irregular-shaped enclosures of pjisture, covered by trees, each devoted to one genus of animals, and con- 
taining a building in the centre for their repose or shelter (2 and 3). Passing these we arrive at the 
dwelling-houses of the professors of natural history; and the large amphitheatre (4, and elevation 2(1) 
in which the lectures are given. Here is also the hot-house clepartment (7, and elevation 23), with 
a sunk area in front for pots and frames ; a space called the seed-garden for raising seeds, and for 
nursing them till they tlower. Adjoining is an artificial mount, crowned with a kiosque (.'5), which 
overlooks, not only the whole garden, but great part of Paris; it contains a sundial, which, by means 
of a lens, is contrived to discharge a cannon every day at noon. The museum of natural history 
is a large building at the upper end of the garden, exactly opposite the entrance (6, and elevation 
24-) ; it is separated by a handsome low wall and iron rails from the open garden, \yhich consists of 36 
plots, enclosed by lattice-work from the walks, which are at all times open to the public. These 
plots contain specimens of the mode of propagating all herbaceous vegetables, all trees and shrubs 
(8) — a department which is particularly rich in sjiecimens of grafting and inarching {[)) ;. a large basin 
for aquatics, and aquatic birds and reptiles, situated at the bottom of an excavation, more than ten 



Book IV. 



COMMERCIAL GARDENS. 



1033 



feet below the level of the general surface of the garden (10) ; the sides of this excavation are planted 
with marsh trees and shrubs. The next divisions consist of florists' flowers arranged according to their 
colors and times of flowering (11) ; medicinal plants (12) ; Olustrations of the operations of agriculture 
on plants, as the different kinds of hedges, live fences, rows, &c. (13) ; all the sorts of fruit-trees, vines, 
and fruit-shrubs, which grow in the open air in France, with different modes of pruning and training 
them (14) ; all the sorts of vegetables used in rural economy throughout Europe, the more tender sorts, 
as the convolvulus battatas, being protected early in the season by glass (15). The general arrangement 
of all the plants grown in France, tender and hardy, occupies ten plots (16) ; the classification adopted 
is that of Jussieu. The tender species are brought from the hot-houses in June, and plunged in their 
places in the beds, where they remain till September ; the hardy tree and shrub kinds are kept dwarf 
by priming, and brought into flower by ringing. The different sorts of annual plants, and the mode of 
raising seeds of every kind, is displayed in a large plot (18). There is a general arboretum (17) ; one of 
winter or evergreen trees (19) ; of trees in perfection in autumn (20) ; of summer trees (21) ; and of spring trees. 

7333. The principal buildings are the menagerie for ferocious animals (22) ; the conservatory (23) j 
museum (24) ; lodge for East India deer (25) ; lecture-theatre (26) ; near which is situated the office of 
administration for the garden; retreat for buffaloes (27) ; stable :for the equus tribe, with pigeon-house 
over (28) ; Merino and other sheep-cots (29) ; cot for goats (30), for camels (31), for elephants (36), for 
foreign oxen (37), for red deer (39), for the dromedary (40), for packing plants (41), and for a public coffee 
and milk house, situated at the base of the mount (38). There is a restaurateur in the spring arbore- 
tum (21), also a number of other buildings of less note ; and so complete is this establishment, that in some 
of the areas destined to show certain branches of culture, there are lodges containing specimens of all 
the implements in use in that branch. (^Annates du Musee ; Bayer's Descriptive History of the Paris 
Garden.) 

73,34. In the office of ad?ninistration, which is remarkably complete, is the botanical cabinet (fig. 735.), 
thus described in the Horticultural Tour :. "In the staircase {a) is preserved 735 
a tall palm-stem from South America, which had been naturally clasped in a 
very extraordinary way by some liane or twining shrub, and evidently strangled 
by the deeply indented grasp of its invader. Professor Desfontaines' working- 
room (fi) adjoins, and next, the working-room for the professor's assistants (c). 
Here a respectable-looking female was now employed in fixing dried specimens of 
plants to sheets of white paper, after they had been arranged for that purpose by 
Professor Desfontaines. There is a room {d) appropriated to the keeping of the 
specimens of dried plants. They are contained in close presses, and so accurately 
and conveniently arranged, that the specimens composing any particular genus 
can be produced for examination the moment they are called for. Another [e) contains specimens of 
wood of very many species of trees, we believe of almost all that are figured in the quarto volume pub- 
lished by Sepp of Amsterdam, and edited by Dr. Houttayn, and of many unknown to these laborious 
Dutchmen. The samples are in general smoothed with the plane, the better to display the grain, and 
the extreme beauty of some kinds. A vase, nicely formed out of the stem of a date-palm, is a curious 
object : it is about a foot and a half in diameter, and somewhat more in height. A large apartment (/), 
extending tlie whole breadth of the building, contains the seeds and seed-vessels of plants, with speci- 
mens of vegetable products in general. In the same room several commodious presses and drawers are 
appropriated to the reception of the seeds saved in the garden from the more rare or tender plants, par- 
ticularly those of only annual duration. We may add, that the great attention paid to this part of the 
business of the garden, the saving of seeds, and keeping them in the nicest order, received our unquali- 
fied approbation. A glazed frame containing numerous skeletons of leaves and flowers, had a very 
pretty and unusual effect. Fronds of the great umbrella-palm of Ceylon (Corypha umbraculifera) deco- 
rate the ceilings of two of the rooms." {Hort. Tour, 353.) 

SuBSECT. 3. Commercial Gardens. 

733.5. Public nurseiy-gardens come first in order. In choosing a situation in which to es- 
tablish a nursery, two points are to be considered, fitness as to the disposal of the produce, 
and fitness as to shelter, aspect, and soil. Where it is intended to attempt a general nur- 
sery business, regard must be had to the leading roads of the district, the means of carriage 
by land or water, the kind of objects that will be most in demand, whether seedlings, fruit- 
trees, or tender exotics, or all of these. Where a local business is to be commenced, it is 
evident much will depend on the choice of a conspicuous situation in some line of road 
of general resort, and as near as possible to some town or city. As far as respects shel- 
ter, aspect, and soil, the remarks already submitted in reference to private nurseries 
(6974. J may suffice. The best general soil is evidently a free tender loam ; and the 
best general aspect or exposure, one inclining to the north ; as precocity is no advantage 
in a nursery, but the contrary, and all seedlings and tender plants will be the safer 
till they come up, and come up more vigorously, when brought on not so much by the 
direct rays of the sun as by his indirect influence on the atmosphere. Another great 
advantage of a northern exposure is, that plants and trees may be taken up, as w^ell as 
planted, later in the season, than in one of a contrary nature. Grafting also, and making 
good deficiencies and other nursery-operations, which are generally deferred to the last 
moment, may be done with less injury to the trees and plants. 

7336. The extent of a nursery must depend on the means of the occupier, and the pro- 
bable extent of market. It will also depend, in some degree, on the kind of articles to 
be chiefly cultivated, and the mode of cultivation to be pursued. Where manure is 
scarce, such a system of alternate nursery and market-garden crops must be adopted as 
shall preserve the ground in heart ; but where manure is more abundant the severe crops 
may succeed one another more closely. Where thorns and seedling forest-trees are to be 
the chief articles grown, it is evident less ground will be required than when transplanted 
forest-trees are to be the chief article produced. 

7337. In laying out a nursery, the objects to be cultivated, and the kind of business to 
be expected, must be leading guides in the design, and the duration of the tenure will 
naturally have a material influence on the execution. The following seem objects de- 
sirable for a complete nursery : 




1034 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



73.38. The duielllnghouse of the master; this in a nursery for local demand, and in which public attrac- 
tion is an object, ought to be placed near the road ; and at the same time as centrically as possible in 
other respects. In general, the living-rooms ought to be elevated so that their windows may command, 
as far as practicable, the whole nursery ; but, at all events, the following objects, more or less : — 

7339. A seed-shop and counting-house or office, which should be connected with the house for the 
master's convenience ; but, at the same time, have each distinct entrances. The counting-house should 
have a good clock, and a rope or chain communicating to a bell placed over, or in some conspicuous 
situation for regulating the hours of labor ; also a speaking-pipe to the paclung-court and centre of the 
hot-houses. 

7340. A journeyman'' s living-room, and a number of sleeping-rooms for the whole or a part of the jour- 
neymen employed by the year, or otherwise, communicating with the packing-court, or in some cases, on 
% small scale, occupying paYt of the ground-floor of the house. From this appendage should be a speak, 
ing-pipe and bell to communicate with the counting-house and the master's sleeping-room. 

7341. A tool-house, sufficiently commodious and properly arranged, communicating with the seed-shop. 
The tools should be at least weekly examined by the foreman before paying the men. The larger num- 
ber-sticks or tallies, not in use, should also be kept here. 

7.'342. A museu7n and herharium-room, in which models (in plaster, Roman cement, or papier mache) of all 
the fruits, and dried specimens of all or most of the plants grown in the nursery, should be kept, in order 
to show to purchasers, in seasons when the plants to be purchased are not in fruit or in flower. 

7343. Pncki)ig-shcds, surrounding a part or three sides of a packing-court, one of these being open to, or 
commanded by, the windows of the office and common living-room of the house. Over these should be a 
range of seed and store lofts. 

7344. A stable, cart-shed, cowhouse, and pigsty, if such conveniences are desired, communicating on 
one side with the packing-court, and on the other with the wall : a coal-shed, a horsedung-heap, and 
other simil'ar objects in the back area of the dwellinghouse. 

734.'). A store-ground, or laying-in-ground, three or more times the size of the packing-court, in which to 
inhume the roots of plants taken up, to be ready for sale or packing. 

7346. A plot for the hot-houses, square, octagonal, or polygonal in the circumference or boundary, and 
the central part for the pits, and all the framing, hand-glasses, &c. with space sufficient for setting out the 
green-house plants during summer. If the whole boundary cannot be at once, or perhaps not at all, 
covered with glass, the naked part may be a wall for training fruit-trees, and the north border for auricula 
frames or stages, striking cuttings, &c. But iji a general nursery, the whole of the boundary of a square 
may be very properly covered with glass, facing the centre ; that of northern aspect being well adapted 
for striking plants, and preserving, or retarding such as are in flower. The exterior of this boundary line 
should be arranged for pots, potting, tan-furnace, and general working sheds ; or, if this be not wanted on 
the south side, that part of the wall may be devoted to the training of fruit-trees. 

7347. A compost-ground for different sorts of earths, gravel, manure, and the rubbish-heap. 

7348. A rotting-ground for depositing tree-seeds, in layers of sand or ashes, in order to rot off their ex- 
ternal coats, and promote the decay of nuts or other hard covers of seeds. (6079.) 

7349. A parterre for the culture and display of such of the border and florists' flowers as are grown in 
the nursery, and for a specimen of rock-work, a flower-stage, aquarium, apiary, and covered seat for 
visitors, 

7350. The main area of the mtrseri/ should be laid out, as nearly as the circumstances 
■will admit, in parallelograms, of any convenient dimensions, but not mder than the ordi- 
nary length of a garden-line, say under 150 feet, which allows of a row sufficiently long 
for any purpose. The chief reason for the parallelogram form is, that all rectangular 
figures are most easily cultivated and measured, and the reason for their being.ajl of the 
same size is, in order that the master may readily, after a little experience, form a toler- 
ably accurate idea of the quantity of every kind of nursery labor requisite for a plot of 
this shape and size. Thus, supposing each division to contain half an acre ; then one 
man will dig it in one day, trench it in two days, hoe it, if in wide rows, in a fourtli of a 
day, if in narrow rows, in half a day. A woman, if in beds, will weed it, if very thick 
of weeds, in two days ; if thin of weeds, in one day, and so on. The compartments 
should, as much as possible, be cropped with one general class or kind, and by rotation. 
As, for example, for seven years : 1st, Break up from grass with turnips after trenching ; 
2d, Transplanted forest trees, two years; 3d, Green crop, one year; 4th, Annual 
flowers, for seed, one year; 5th, Seedlings, one year; 6th, Transplanted fruit-trees, 
four years; 7th, Bedded thorns, two years ; and soon. Some compartments must be 
set apart for common stools ; and if the circumferential borders are not sufficient or 
proper for stools of rare or peculiar sorts, others must be contrived by means of hedges, 
pales, or walls, to produce shelter and shade for cuttings, fit situations for bog-earth 
borders, American stools, bog plants in general, and similar purpt)ses. If the borders 
are all of the same width, say ten or twelve feet, it will simplify all future calculations as 
in the compartments. 

7351. A grand central, and a circumferential ivalk, with some cross walks, should be 
contrived to display the whole nursery to the best advantage. A narrow or common 
sized border should accompany these walks, excepting where the broad circumferential 
border comes in ; and in the narrow borders should be displayed single specimens of all 
the more rare trees and shrubs grown either from seed, or by other means, for sale, and 
of all the perennial, biennial, and annual border-flowers sold to the public in the form of 
plants, roots, or seeds. Those may be excepted which are grown in the flower-garden, 
rock-work, and aquarium. 

7352. A nursery-orchard should be formed of some compartments near the house ; and. 
in these, one or better two plants of each of all the hardy standard fruit-trees should be 
planted, in order to come into bearing, and admit of proving the kinds ; and from M hich 
alorie the grafts and buds should be taken, (unless on the introduction of new and valuable 
sorts, in which case such grafts as can be got must be taken till some of the progeny moved 
to the nursery-orcliard come into a bearing state,) which are to be used in the nursery. This 



Book IV. 



COMMERCIAL GARDENS. 



1035 



136 



orchard should be surrounded by a wall, on which to grow specimens of sucli sorts of 
plums, cherries, and pears, as do not ripen well as standards ; the hardier sorts of grapes, 
and peaches, nectarines, and apricots. The tenderer sorts of vines, and some few peaclies, 
which are tender in the northern counties, may be grown, one of a sort, under each rafter 
in the range of hot-houses. 

7353. 2'he co7npartmentsJhr stools of every description, and the borders fur cullhigs, should 
be as near the house as possible, as on these, men are employed a greater number of 
days in the year than on any other of the compartments, and therefore it is desirable such 
compartments should be more immediately under the eye of the master. 

7354. Fruit-tree and seed-bed compartments should come next ; then transplanted 
shrubs ; next young forest trees transplanted j and, in the most distant parts, the larger 
forest trees, as requiring least culture of all. But a proper attention to rotation will not 
admit of this arrangement being completely attended to ; and to keep the ground in 
good heart is as essential to success as keeping the men at work. 

7355. In some of the 2)'>~incipal nurseries which have risen to their present degree of 
eminence by degrees ; and where consequently one building or additional object has been 
added to another as wanted, without having any general plan in view', the greatest confusion 
in appearance, and a considerable loss of labor, is the final result. The best way in such a 
case is to pull down great part of the hot-houses and outbuildings, and re-arrange the 
whole on some plan which will admit of a regular tour of inspection, either by the master 
or stranger-visitants. A fine example of this has recently been given by Messrs. Lod- 
diges; whose arrangement, and mode of displaying the wliole to strangers, is so per- 
fect, that the time saved in conducting visitors through the premises will be no small 
gain. 

73;)6. The Hacloiey nursery {fig. 736.), or commercial botanic garden, affords an example of a small ir- 
regular spot, laid out both with due consideration as to effect, botanical science, and economy as to cul- 
ture. The entrance (a) leads to the range of hot-houses, and commences with the stoves {b), proceeds to 
the grand palm-house (c), thence to the dry-stove bulbs, and other articles {d), to the double camellia-house 
(c), and the green-house plants (/). The area enclosed by these buildings is devoted to the culture of plants 
in pits and frames, to beds of rare American and herbaceous plants, and to collections in pots ready for sale 
The outside space on the north side {g) is used as a depository for soils, pots, and other agents of culture • and 
for propagating-pits {h), and nursery.ptantations of dehcate articles. The visitant having ' 
arrived at the end of the artificial climates, next enters on the course of the arbo- 
retum {i, i, i), which is arranged alphabetically, and occupies one side of a winding 
walk, till it has exhausted all the trees and shrubs, which will grow in the open / 
air, with the exception of some of the more common species, of the roses, 
and American select shrubs. This walk crosses a public lane \k), on an 
elevated bridge, and entering an irregular piece of ground, winds round 
it till it terminates in an American ground in the centre (w), com 
posed of a series of revolutions of grass-walks, with intervening beds 
of bog-earth, displaying a Complete collection. The arboretum 
al|)habet is only carried along the right hand of the arboretum 
walk [i, i, i), and on the left hand is a complete collection of roses 
for a certain length, and then herbaceous plants for the rest 
of the space. The beauty of this arrangement is, that there is 
no interruption to the series when once entered on, while 
at the same time any of the genera along the winding 
paths may be gone to at once by small paths, which 
occur here and there across the borders. A visitant 
wi.shing to see the American collection only, will 
proceed at once to its commencement {1), and 
wind along it till he arrives at its termina- 
tif)n {in), and so on. The arboretum con- 
tains a number of species and varieties 
not before introduced, or hitherto 
neglected in this country. Every 
species commences with a named 
specimen, left to attain its : 
tural size and shape next the 
walk ; behind, in a line, are 
stools for laying or stocks 
for grafting, and the 
next two or three lines 
are devoted to the recep- 
tion of the young plant.<? 
til! .sold or disposed of. 
This mode saves much 
trouble in culture, and 
at once shows the pur- 
chaser the sort of tree he 
is to get, and assures him 
that he is getting its real 
progeny. The names of 
tlie trees and American 
shrubs, and the numbers 
of the herbaceous plants 
and roses, arc painted on 
the ends of bricks, which' 
are let half their length"" 
into the ground, in an' 
oblique manner, so as" 
their ends may meet the 
eye at a favorable angle. 



7357. Of florists' gardens there are 
two sorts; the first for the purpose 
of forcing flowers in pots, for draw- 
ingroom gardens, and raising others 
in the open air for the flower-mar- 
ket ; the second for the propagation 
and culture of florists' flowers, in 
order to vend their bulbs and plants. 
Both should be situated near a large 
town, as a market for the produce of 
the first kind; and to ensure visitors 
to the flower-shows of the second. 
A low situation, if possible near the 
sea, but at all events with a humid 
atmosphere, is to be preferred for the 
culture of bulbs ; and no florists' 



1036 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



flower will thrive in an atmosphere impregnated with coal-smoke. Very little skill is 
requisite for laying out either of these gardens to those who understand the culture they 
Require. The hot-house, pit, and frame departments should be kept together ; close to 
them the compost, dung, and tan grounds or sheds ; next the ground where pots of roses, 
&c. are plunged ; and the least near parts remain to be devoted to the culture of flowers 
or flowering shrubs in the open ground. For the conveniency both of culture, without 
treading on the plants, and of gathering the flowers, the whole is generally laid out in 
beds, sometimes with box-edgings, but more commonly without any, which for bulbs 
and plants to be annually removed, admits of more effectual culture. 

7358. Market-gardens are of two kinds ; those cultivated by manual labor, and those 
wholly or in part by the plough. In choosing a fit situation for a market-garden, regard 
must not only be had to the requisites for a good kitchen-garden, as to shelter, soil, 
water, &c. (2382. to 2430.), but to the probable market-kind of produce to be grown, 
&c. The extent must depend jointly on these circumstances and the capital to be em- 
ployed. The smallest extent of surface and capital is that in which a man performs the 
whole of the labor himself, and this so entirely depends on the articles cultivated, the 
nature of the soil, and mode of culture, that it may vary from one to two acres, and 
where grain and seed crops are introduced, to a greater number. As to the quantity 
of ground which a man of capital may manage by this way, no limits can well be as- 
signed to an active and vigilant master. Some London gardens of this description, en- 
tirely cultivated by manual labor, exceed 100 acres. In laying out a market-garden 
tliere cannot be said to be any thing peculiar : the general points of order, distinctness 
of compartments, and keeping the plots as much as possible in squares and parallelograms, 
are of obvious importance. 

7359. Public orchards are of various kinds ; garden-orchards, where the ground is cul- 
tivated and cropped with culinary vegetables or small fruits ; arable orchards, where the 
trees are in rows, and the spaces between in aration ; and pasture-orchards, where the 
trees are scattered over pasture-lands. In fixing on a situation for either kind, the three 
chief points are soil, sub-soil, and shelter, which have been already considered in treating 
on private orchards, as well as the planting and kinds of fruit-trees. 

7360. Physic or herb-gardens, if for growing aquatic herbs, as mint, should be situated 
in a low moist soil ; if for aromatic herbs, as lavender, rosemary, &c. on a dry poor soil ; 
and if for roses and similar plants, for producing flower-leaves, for the distiller, the soil 
should be loamy and rich. In laying out this kind of garden, the only point in which 
skill is requisite, is the contrivance of a system of irrigation for the mints. 

7361. Seed-gardens, or seed-farms, require a dry soil ; and two should never be 
situated together, if destined for the same sorts of seeds. All the art in them consists 
in cropping, so as to ensure seeds true io their kind. Indeed, the culture is by far the 
most important consideration, not only in this, but in the four preceding descriptions of 
public gardens ; and this is still more the case with respect to gardens for peculiar crops, 
as for the bulbs of white lily, rhubarb-roots, licorice, &c. which, as to laying out, require 
no further notice. 



Chap. V. 

Of the Practitioners of Landscape- Gardening. 

7362. The practice of landscape-gardening has^een thought such a simple business, 
that every proprietor might perform it for himself. The same thing, indeed, may be said 
of the practice of medicine, law, or cookery, for every one can prescribe a cure, decide a 
quarrel, or boil an egg. " Had the art of laying out grounds," Repton observes, 
" still continued under the direction of working-gardeners or nurserymen, the proprietor 
might supersede the necessity of such landscape-gardeners, provided he had previously 
made this art his study; but not (as it is frequently asserted,) because the gentleman 
who constantly resides at his place must be a better judge of the means of improving it, 
than the professor, whose visits are only occasional ; for if this reason for a preference 
were granted, we might with equal truth assert, that the constant companion of a sick 
man has an advantage over his physician. Improvements may be suggested by any one ; 
but the professor only acquires a knowledge of effects before they are produced, and a 
facility in producing them by various methods, expedients, and resources, the result of 
study, observation, and experience. He knows what can and what cannot be accom- 
plished within certain limits. He ought to know what to adopt, and what to reject ; he 
must endeavor to accommodate his plans to the wishes of the person who consults him, al- 
though in some cases they may not strictly accord with his own taste." {Observ. owLandsc. 



Book IV. PRACTITIONERS OF LANDSCAPE-GARDENING. 1037 



Gard. p. 10.) A more wise plan than that of doubting on the subject would be to have 
the separate opinions of different landscape-gardeners and architects ; for no opinion 
need be followed if disapproved of ; while the probability is, that there would be some- 
thing valuable in each, and the proprietor might finally, aided by the artist he preferred, 
decide for himself, never, however, forgetting the idea of a consistent and beautiful 
whole. As to the expense of opinions, Girardin observes on this subject, " N'allez pas 
le regarder — il vous en coLltera bien davantage pour des variations, et des retouches 
continuelles. " 

7363. The intimate connection between landscape-gardening and architecture the pro- 
priety and advantage of the joint consultations of the landscape-gardener and the 
architect, as to the situation, aspect, and style of the house ; together with the almost 
unavoidable encroachments of the former on the latter, by designing and executing 
garden-buildings, has given rise to an opinion, that the landscape-gardener ought to 
combine the functions of the architect. Repton justifies the idea, by referring to the 
many excellent houses built by Brown, with no other knowledge than that acquired by 
observation of all the best houses j and of Kent, who was at once landscape-gardener, 
architect, and historical painter. We are of opinion, that in the case of garden-build- 
ings and small villas, or ornamented cottages, the knowledge both of the theory and 
practice of architecture, which it is necessai-y every landscape-gardener should possess, may 
sometimes enable him to combine the duties of both professions ; but such are the advan- 
tages of a division of labor in the fine, as well as in the useful arts, that in all more exten- 
sive buildings, and indeed even in those we have mentioned, we would recommend the em- 
ployment of a regular architect, jointly with a landscape-gardener, as a surgeon consults 
with a physician in important cases. — The duties of the landscape-gardener resolve them- 
selves into the formation of a plan or design, and the carrying of it into execution. 

Sect. I. Of the Study of the given Situation and Circumstances, and the Formation of a 
Plan of Improvement. 

7364. Whatever may be the situation and circumstances where the opinion of a land- 
scape-gardener is desired, he should be furnished with a written or verbal instruction as 
to the points to which he should chiefly direct his attention ; with a complete map of the 
estate, and an accurate detailed history and description of its localities and peculiarities. 
From these, from topographical and county surveys, and a residence of a few days or 
weeks, according to the extent of the subject and season of the year, (spring, before the 
leaves expand, being the most favorable time,) he will be able to procure every requisite 
information, and to establish in his memory every thing relating to the situation and 
vicinity. He is then, and not before, to embody and mature his ideas of improvement ; 
directing his attention first to the situation and aspect of the house and offices, the extent 
of the park, and the emplacement of the kitchen-garden ; next to the general masses of 
wood ; and then, successively, to the breadth of lawn, the situation and character of water, 
the pleasure-grovmd, farm, and other details. Before making up his mind on any part 
of the subject, he will often find it of importance to have sections taken of the grounds 
in different directions, levels of springs, and rills, &c. ; and most frequently he will have 
occasion for stakes, for marking out lines on the ground ; of flagstafFs or poles, from six 
to fifty feet high, to represent the eflPect of trees {Jig. 737.) and other objects; of strips 




of white sheeting, to show the effect of water, by forming a white outline on a perfect 
level ; of frames partially covered with boards, to show the effect of buildings ; and he 
may even require boring-irons, or pits dug, in order to enquire into the nature of the sub- 
soil. Being furnished with a plan of the present state of the grounds, (such asfg. 351.) 
he vvill, as he makes up his mind on particular improvements, mark them down on this 
map in pencil, and when the whole is finally adjusted, he will, put them in red, or in any 
distinguishing color. And on one or more general or panoramic views ( fig. 355.), as well 
as on the particular views which he may have taken on different spots, he will also mark 



1038 



PRACTICE OF GARDENING. 



Part III. 



in red the outlines tliat will be made by the improvements adapted to the different situ- 
ations. In addition to these, he will show the effect, by geometrical sections taken in 
different directions across the grounds {Jig. 349. )j to show the ground's surface. His 
next operation is to make a vertical profile {Jigs. 353, 354.}, showing the effect of 
the whole, supposing the alterations to be fifteen or twenty years completed, with cor- 
responding, panoramic, or general views {Jg. 355.), and with particular landscapes. 

7365. It remains for him to give reasons in ivriting for all that he proposes; a practice 
which no employer or artist should ever omit to have done, as such opinions remain as 
data, to be referred to concerning the management and future effects ; as well as in 
point of present or future justification of the taste, both of the artist and proprietor. 
This may be done in the following order: 1. Recapitulating the given instructions ; 

2. The characteristic features, and other details, of the given situation and vicinage ; 

3. A description of, with the reasons for, the general outline of improvement ; 4. The 
description of, with the reasons for the detail ; 5. An outline of the future management j 
6. Directions for the execution ; and, 7. An estimate of the expense. 

7366. In all these cliscussioiis proper references will be made to the maps and sketches. 
Simple language will of course be emploj'ed in describing future effects ; but, above 
all, simple sketches, wliich shall owe little of their effect to shading, and none to color- 
ing, or finishing, are essentially necessary. 

7367. Girardhi seems to have been the first who suggested this mode of obtaining an opinion systematically; 
and his remarks on the fallacious effect of beautiful drawings instead of outlines, are well deserving of atten- 
tion. " Vous tachercz memc que cctte esquisse ne soit qu'un simple trait, et ne pr^sente d'abord que les 
formes principales des objets, et la disposition gtnerale des grandes masses de votre ensemble. Un dessein 
bien finie ne manquera pas de vous seduire par I'agrement de la touche d'un habile artiste ; vous vous 
d^termineriez d'apres un dessein dont vous ne n^ussiriez peut-etre pas a obtenir I'eliet dans la nature, et 
il faut bien mieux avoir a gagner qu'a perdre dans I'execution." 

7368. Repton has the merit of first employing this system elegantly and extensively in England, and 
of adopting, instead of one entire landscape to show the previous taste, and another to show the effect of 
the alterations, a slip of paper of the size and shape of those parts of the landscape which require alteration. 
This is fixed at one edge of the entire landscape, and lies flat over part of it, so that when lifted up it 
shows the full effect. It must be confessed, however, that, though an elegant mode, it is not perfectly 
fair, since the view in which the cut paper forms a part can never look so well as the other, even from 
the mere circumstance of the bounding line of the paper. For some cases, however, it may be used, 
though in general it will be found, that two entire landscapes afford the most impartial means of judging 
of the effects of an improvement. The discussion and sketches of the place, and improvements being 
finished, and bound in a book, the ground or working plan is to be put on canvass, or copied on parch- 
ment, for the common use of the gardener, or whoever sets out the work; and the profile put on rollers, 
to be preserved along with the book of notitia. These being delivered to the proprietor, he will determine, 
after mature deliberation, whether or not he will adopt the whole, or any part of the improvements, 
previously consulting those friends whose taste or judgment he considers adequate to forming a judicious 
opinion on the wliole, or any one part of the subject. " Lorsque I'esquisse de votre ensemble sera faite, 
alors vous reflecherez, vous concerterez, vous discuterez avec des gens de goCit, I'ordonnance generale de 
la disposition qu'elle vous pr^sente." In this example of forming a plan, we have had in view a dull and 
nearly flat site, where nothing has been done ; but it is evident that the same general principles are ap- 
plicable to such places as are to be altered, diminished, or enlarged. 

7369. By a general plan, accompanied by others more detailed, of the kitchen-garden, 
pleasure-grounds, terrace, &c. and by the explanatory details of the book of notitia, any 
gardener of ordinary intelligence may execute the most intricate design, and if this design 
has been carefully formed from inspecting the premises, and proper general views have 
been minutely taken from different points, the landscape-gardener may show the effect 
of future improvements with confidence, and leave behind him the Notitia, or Book of 
Improvements, or, in other words, such plans, sections, views, and -RTitten instructions, 
as may enable the gardener gradually to produce them, with nearly as much certainty as 
an architect directs a builder to raise an elevation of masonry. Distantly situated pro- 
prietors, ambitious of displaying soine refinement of ideas on rural matters, might in this 
way first procure, and then work to a general plan ; instead, as is often the case at pre- 
sent, of working according to their own crude notions ; and producing scenes which 
afford no pleasure to any one but their owner, and only to him whilst he remains in statu 
quo as to taste. 

Sect. II. Of carrying a Plan into Execution. 

7370. Wiether a plan be carried into executioji by contractors, or by the proprietor at 
his own risk, must depend on circumstances, both respecting the knowledge, taste, and 
leisure of the proprietor, and the nature and extent of the improvements. Where an en- 
tire new house and grounds are to be created, an eminent substantial contractor for the 
buildings, and another for the ground operations, will be found the most speedy and 
certain as to expense ; the work, in both cases, being liable to be regularly examined at 
stated periods by a neutral surveyor, accompanied by the original designers of the im- 
provements. If this mode is not adopted, the whole or greater part may be done under 
the eye of the owner and his steward ; various, and as many parts as possible, being let 
by the job. We shall take a cursoiy view of the chief objects of alteration or addition ; 
and indicate some things in each, which may in most ca-ies be more profitably done by 
the job, premising, that whenever the cost or intricacy of any piece of work is consider- 



Part IV. 



STATISTICS OF BRITISH GARDENING. 



1039 



able, unless a contractor of some respectability is employed, the work is much better done 
by the laborers of the proprietor. 

7371. Buildings. All alterations or new erections may be readily estimated and exe- 
cuted by, contract, and, almost in every case, at less expense to the proprietor. The 
mere difference between the trade price and the gentleman's price of the materials and 
labor, and between the hours kept, and quantity of work done in a given time by a 
journeyman to a master-tradesman and to a gentleman, will (if the former should, by 
error in estimating, find no other gain), afford a certain profit to the tradesman ; and thus, 
suppose a contractor to estimate a piece of work at 1000/., and which the proprietor, 
changing his mind, instead of letting to the contractor, executes himself, and finds the 
amount 1100/., the contractor, had he got the job, would have actually had a profit, and 
the owner been a gainer of 100/. The mansion, domestic and farming offices, garden- 
walls, and hot-houses, may all be separately contracted for. 

7372. Ground. The removal of ground, fences, or digging, may in every case be let 
by the job, and with decided advantage to both parties. The extent of particular con- 
tracts should, of course, be in proportion to the responsibility of the contracting parties. 

7373. Planting. The enclosures and the preparation of the soil may, in all extensive 
cases, be executed by contract ; but the planting or insertion of the plants, on which so 
much depends, should uniformly be done by day-work ; excepting, however, those cases 
in which a respectable nurseryman will engage to put in a certain number of plants of a 
certain kind, size^ and age, and maintain them there for at least three years. In some 
extensive cases, the land may be prepared by fallowing, which the adjoining farmers will 
generally undertake at a very moderate price per acre. In most cases, the contractor for 
fences, of whatever description, should undertake to uphold them for a given number of 
years ; and in cases of thorn-hedges, or other live fences, until they become sufficient 
barriers. 

7374. Road and walk making may frequently be contracted for ; but in this case, as in 
every other, much will depend on the skill, activity, and experience of the gardener or 
general overseer. This subject will be found illustrated at greater length, and in a man- 
ner incompatible with the nature of this work, in the second edition of our Treatise on 
Country- Residences, 4to. 



PART IV. 

STATISTICS OF BRITISH GARDENING. 

7375. After having considered gardening as to its history, as to the scientific princi- 
ples on which it is founded, and the application of these principles to the different branches 
of practice ; it remains only to take a statistical survey and estimate of its present state and 
future progress in the British isles. 



BOOK I. 

OF THE PRESENT STATE OF GARDENING IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 

7376. The present state of British gardening, as to knowledge, has been the subject of 
the former parts of this work ; but its importance, in the general economy of society, can 
only be learned by a statement of the manner in which it is actually carried on ; the mo- 
difications to which it has given rise in the pursuits of those who have embraced the art as 
a source of livelihood ; of the kinds of gardens employed by men of different orders in 
the state ; of the principal gardens as distributed in the different counties of Britain and 
Ireland ; of the British authors who have written on gardening , and of the private or 
professional police, and public laws relative to gardeners and gardens. 



1040 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING, ' Part IV. 



Chap. I. 

Of the different Conditions of Men engaged in the Practice or Pursuit of GardeJiing. 

7377. Gardeners may be arranged as operators or serving gardeners ; dealers in gar- 
dening or garden-tradesmen ; counsellors, professors, or artists ; and patrons. 

Sect. I. Of Operators, or Serving Gardeners. 

7378. The garden-laborer is the lowest grade in the scale of serving gardeners. He 
is occasionally employed to perfonn the common labors of gardening, as trenching, 
digging, hoeing, weeding, &c. Men for the more heavy, and women for the lighter era- 
ploynrents. Garden-laborers are not supposed to have received any professional instruction, 
farther than what they may have obtained by voluntary or casual observation. In all 
gardens where three or four professional hands are constantly employed, some laborers are 
required at extraordinary seasons. 

7379. Apprentice. Youths intended for serving, or tradesmen-gardeners, are generally 
articled or placed under master or tradesmen gardeners, for a given period, on terms of 
mutual benefit : the master contracting to supply instruction, and generally food and 
lodging, or a weekly sum as an equivalent ; and the parents of the apprentice granting 
the services of the latter during his apprenticeship as their part of the contract. The term 
agreed on is generally three years ; or more if the youth is under sixteen years of age 
but whatever may be the period, by the laws as to apprentices it must not extend beyond 
that at which tlie youth attains the age of manhood. No one can ever expect to attain to 
the rank either of master-gardener or tradesman, who has not served an apprenticeship to 
the one or the other. In general it is preferable to apprentice youths to master-gardeners, 
as there the labor is less than in tradesmen's gardens, and the opportunities of instruction 
generally much greater. •; 

7380. Journeyman. The period of apprenticeship being finished, that of journeyman 
commences, and continues, or ought to continue till the man is at least twenty-five years 
of age. During this period, he ought not to remain above one year in any one situation; 
thus, supposing he has completed his apprenticeship in a private garden at the age of 
twenty-one, and that his ultimate object is to become a head-gardener, he ought first to 
engage himself a year in a public botanic garden ; the next year in a public nursery ; that 
following, he should again enter a private garden, and continue making yearly changes in 
the most eminent of this class of gardens, till he meets with a situation as head-gardener. 
The course to be followed by an apprentice intended for a tradesman-gardener is obvious ; 
having finished his period in a private garden, let him pass through a botanic and nursery- 
garden, and then continue in the most eminent of the class of public or tradesmen's gar- 
dens, to which he is destined. 

7381. Foremaji (before-man, or first man). In extensive gardens where a number of 
hands are employed, they are commonly grouped or arranged in divisions, and one of the 
journeymen of longest standing employed as foreman or sub-master to tlie rest. When- 
ever three or more journeymen are employed, there is commonly a foreman, who has a 
certain extent of authority at all times, but especially in the absence of the master. This 
confers a certain degree of rank for the time being, but none afterwards. 

7382. Master-gardener. A journeyman has attained the situation of master-gar- 
dener, when he is appointed to the management of a garden, even if he has no laborer, 
apprentice, or journeyman under him ; but he has not attained to the rank of master- 
gardener till having been a year in such situation. Afterwards should he be obliged to 
work as journeyman, he still retains the rank and title of master-gardener but not of 
head-gardener. 

7383. A head gardener, or upper gardener, is a master who has apprentices or journey- 
men employed under him. Out of place and working as a journeyman, he retains the 
rank and title of master-gardener, but not of head-gardener. 

7384. Nursery foreman. This is an important situation, the foreman being entrusted 
with the numbered and priced catalogues of the articles dealt in ; authorised to make 
sales; entrusted to keep an account of men's time, &c. (see Time-Book, 3338.) ; and in 
consequence it entitles the holder to the rank of head-gardener while so engaged, and to 
that of master-gardener ever afterwards ; the same may be said of foremen to public botanic 
gardens, and royal or national gardens. 

7385. A travelling gardener is one sent out as gardener, or collector of plants, along 
with scientific expeditions; he is generally chosen from a botanic garden; and his busi- 
ness is to collect gardening productions of every kind, and to mark the soil, aspect, climate, 
&c. to which they have been habituated. . 

7386. Botanic curator. This is the highest situation to which a serving gardener can 
attain next to that of being the royal or government gardener. He superintends the cul- 
tu remand management of a public botanic garden ; maintains an extensive correspondence 



i30OK I. 



TRADESMEN-GARDENERS. 



1041 



witli other botanic curators ; exchanges plants, seeds, and dried specimeus, so as to keep 
up or increase his own collection of living plants, and herbarium siccii?n. Abroad, for 
want of sufficiently intelligent practical gardeners, they have what are called directors and 
inspectors of botanic or other government gardens ; but no such office is requisite in tlzis 
country, 

7387. Royal gardener, court-gardener, or government-gardener ; Jardinier de la Csur, Fr. ; 
Hoffgurtner, Ger. ; and Giardinicre della Corte, Ital. This is the highest step, the sum- 
mum bomim of garden-servitude. In foreign countries, the court-gai dener wears an ap- 
propriate livery, as did formerly the head gardeners of the principal nobility, as well as 
die court-gardeners of this country. At present this remnant of feudal slavery is laid aside 
in every grade of Britisli gai-den-servitude. 

Sect. II, Tradesmen- Gardener^s. 
7588, Of tradesmen-gardeners, the first grade is the jobbing gardener, vvho makes and 
mends gardens, and keeps them in repair by the month or year. Generally he uses his own 
tools, in which he is distinguished from the serving gardener; and sometimes he supplies 
plants from a small sale-garden of his own. 

7389. Contracting gardeners, or new-ground workmen, are jobbers on a larg'er scale. 
Th^y undertake extensive works, as forming plantations, pieces of water, roads, kitchen- 
gardens, and even hot-houses, and other garden structures and buildings. Formerly, and 
especially in Brown's time, this branch of trade was combined with that of the artist-gar- 
dener, but now since the principle of the division of labor has been so much refined on, 
they are generally separated. 

7390. Seed-growers are as frequently ftuTners as gardeners ; their gardens or fields are 
situated in warm districts, and they contract with seed-merchants to supply certain seeds 
at certain rates, or to raise or grow seeds furnished to them by the seedsmen on stipulated 
terms. The great test of excellence here is never to grow at the same time such seeds as 
may hybridise the progeny by impregnation. 

7391. Seed-merchants, or seeds/nen, deal in gai-den-seeds and. other garden-productions; 
in general tliey combine the business of nurserymen or florists, but sometimes confine 
themselves entirely to dealing in seeds wholesale, or to a sort of agency between the seed- 
growers and the nursery-seedsmen. 

7392. Herb-gardeners grow herbs, either the entire herb, as mint, or particular parts, 
as the bulb of liliura, and the flower of the rose for medical purposes, or for distillation 
or perfumery. 

7393. Physic-gardeners, herbalists, or si7nplicists, not only grow herbs for the pur- 
poses of medicine, or perfumeiy, but collect wild ])lants for these purposes. For- 
merly, wh<?n it was the fashion among medical men to use indigenous plants as drugs, 
this was a more common and important branch of trade. They have commonly shops 
appended, to tlieir gardens, or in towns, in which the herbs are preserved, and sold in a 
dried state, 

7394. Collectors for gardens. The first varietj' of this species is the gipsy-gardeners, 
who collect haws, acorns, and otlier berries and nuts, and sell them to the seedsmen ; the 
next are those who collect pine and fir cones, alder-catkins, and other tree-seeds, which 
require some time, and a process to separate the seeds from their covers, and clean them 
before they can be sold ; and the highest variety are those gardeners who establish them- 
selves in foreign countries, and there collect seeds and roots, and prepare dried specimens 
of rare plants for sale. 

7395. Orchardists of the simplest kind are such as occupy grass-orchards, where the 
produce is chiefly apples, pears, and plums, for cider or kitchen-use ; tlie next variety 
occupy cultivated orchard-grounds where fruit-shrubs, as the goosebeiTy, currant, straw- 
berry, &c. are grown between the fruit-trees ; and the highest variety occupy orchards 
with walls and hot-houses, and produce the finer stove-fruits and forced articles. 

7396. Market-gardeners grow culinary vegetables and also fruits ; the simplest kind 
are those who grow only tlie m.ore common hardy articles for the kitchen, as cabbage, 
pease, turnips, &-c. ; a higher variety grow plants for propagation, as cauliflowers, ce- 
lery, and artichoke-plants, and pot-herbs, as mint, thyme, &c. ; and the highest A^ariety 
possess hot-beds and hot-houses, and produce mushrooms, melons, pines, and other 
forced articles and exotic fioiits. They have often shops at their gai-dens, or in towns, 
for the disposal of their produce ; and these, when fruit is chiefly dealt in, are called 
fruit-shops ; v. here culinary- vegetables are joined, green-grocery shops. Most com- 
monly, however, the culinary vegetables are carried to market, and there disposed of to 
such as retail them in shops or on stalls. Occasionally they are deposited for sale in the 
hands of agents or brokers, and sometimes shops are suppHed regularly on certain con- 
ditions. 

7397. Florists are either market-florists who gi'ow and force flowers for the market, and 
of this subspecies are two varieties, those who grow onlv hardv flowers to be cut as nose- 

3 X 



1042 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



gays, and those who deal chiefly in exotics or green-house plants to be sold in pots. The 
other subspecies is the select Jiorist, who confines himself to the culture of bulbous-rooted 
and other select or florists' flowers, who has annual flower-shows, and who disposes of the 
plants, bulbs, tubers, or seeds. 

7398. Botanic gardeners are such as devote themselves exclusively to the culture of an 
extensive collection of species for sale ; these may be either limited to indigenous kinds, 
as was the botanic garden of the late Don of Forfar, embracing all hardy plants, or ex- 
tending to tender exotics. Botanic gardeners also collect and dry specimens of plants, 
and also of mosses, fungi, algae, &c. for sale : to this they often join the collecting of in- 
sects, birds, and other animals. 

7399. NxLrsery-gardeners, or nurserymen. This is the highest species of tradesman- 
gardener. Their business is to originate from seed, or by other modes of propagation, 
every species of vegetable, hardy or exotic, grown in gardens, to rear and train them 
for sale, and to pack or encase them, so as they may be sent with safety to distant places. 
The nurseryman is commonly also to a certain extent a seed-grower, and is generally a 
seed-merchant, supplying his customers annually with what seeds they require for crop- 
ping their gardens as well as with the trees they use in stocking them. The simplest 
variety of nursery-gardener is he who confines himself to the rearing of hedge plants and 
forest trees ; the highest, he who in addition to all the hardy trees and plants maintains at 
the same time a collection of tender exotics. 

Sect. III. Garden Counsellors, Artists, or Professors. 

7400. The first species of this genus of gardeners, is the garden surveyor, or valuator. 
His business is to estimate the value of garden labor and produce, and of garden struc- 
tures, edifices, and gardens themselves. When a proprietor lets his house and garden 
to a tenant for a certain number of years, the stock of the garden is valued, and either 
entirely paid for by the tenant, or it is again valued when the latter quits the premises, 
and the difference in value paid either by the tenant to the landlord, or by the latter to 
the former, as th^ case may be. It is the business of the garden-surveyor to estimate 
the value of the stock, crop, and business o^ nurserymen, and other tradesmen-gardeners, 
quitting or entering on premises, or purchasmg or disposing of their establishments. The 
garden-surveyor is sometimes also a garden-auctioneer ; but generally his business is con- 
fined to valuing, and practised by nurserymen or other tradesmen-gardeners. 

7401. The tree-surveyor, or timber-surveyor, limits his occupation to arboriculture : he 
measures and values standing timber or copsewood; estimates the value of young plant- 
ations, the expense of forming them, of managing them during a certain number of 
years; of enclosing with live hedges of every kind, and their management till fence 
high : he determines what trees shall be felled, thinned, or pruned, and directs the man- 
ner of performing these operations. 

7402. The horticultural architect {Planner, Scotch) gives designs for kitchen-gardens 
and flower-gardens, with their structures and buildings : he sometimes also lays out 
shrubberies and pleasure-grounds, when on a small scale. In this case he takes the title 
of ornamental gardener {Planner of policies, Scotch), or ground-architect. 

7403. The hortictdtnral artist is employed in designing and painting fruits, flowers, 
plants, implements, and horticultural structures and gardens, but chiefly in drawing fruits 
and flowers, the gardens and structures being more commonly drawn by the horticultural 
architect, or landscape-gardener. 

7404. The landscape-gardener, or layer out of grounds ; Artiste jardinier, Ingenieur des 
jardins pittoresques, or Ayiglais, and Jardinier paysagiste, Fr. ; Garten kUnstler, Ger. ; and 
Artiste giardiniere, Ital. This species of counsellor gives designs for disposing of the 
plantations, water, buildings, and other sceneiy, in parks or landscape-gardens, and ge- 
nerally for every thing relating to the arrangement of a country-seat, excepting the archi- 
tecture of the mansion, offices, and other buildings ; but in what respects the site of these, 
and the exposure of the principal fronts and apartments of the house, his counsel is re- 
quired jointly with that of the architect. 

7405. The gardening author may be considered the most univei-sal kind of garden- 
counsellor, since his province extends to every branch of the art. The simplest variety 
of this species is the author of remarks, or an essay, or treatise on one particular plant 
or subject ; the most comprehensive, he who embraces the whole of the science and art 
of gardening ; but the most valuable, he who communicates original infonnation. 

Sect. IV. Patrons of Gardening. 

7406. Every man who does not limit the vegetable parts of his dinner to bread and 
potatoes, is a patron of gardening, by creating a demand for its productions. He is a 
consumer, which is the first species of patron, and the more valuable varieties are such as 
regularly produce a dessert after dinner, and maintain throughout the year beautiful 
nosegays and pots of flowers in their lobbies and drawingrooras. 



Book I. 



BRITISH GARDENS. 



104S 



7407. Amateurs (lovers of gardening). These promote the art by the applause they 
bestow on its productions, of which, to a certain extent, they become purchasers. 

7408. Connoisseurs (critical or skilful lovers of gardening). Tliese promote the art in 
the same way as the amateur ; but much more powerfully, in proportion as approbation, 
founded on knowledge, is valued before that which arises chiefly from spontaneous affec- 
tion. By the purchase of books, engravings, and drawings, from wliich, in great part, 
this species of patrons acquire their knowledge, they may be said to be eminent en- 
couragers of counsellor-gardeners. 

7409. Em2)loyers of gardeners, whether of the serving, tradesman, or counsellor classes, 
are obvious and undoubted patrons of the art. 

7410. Occupiers of gardens of necessity employ both serving and tradesmen gardeners, 
and when they are amateurs or connoisseurs, are often great encouragers of the art ; for 
every one is not so fortunate as to rank among the 

7411. Projmetors of gardens, v^ho are the most eminent of all patrons, promoting 
every department of the art, and employing serving, tradesmen, and artist gardeners. A 
man whose garden is his own for ever, or for a considerable length of time, whether that 
garden be surrounded by a fence of a few hundred feet, or a park- wall of ten or twelve 
miles, will always be effecting some change in arrangement, or in culture, favorable to 
trade and to artists. " I pity that man," says Pope, " who has completed every thing 
in his garden." " Apr^s mes enfans et deux ou trois femmes que j'aime, ou crois aimer 
a la folic, mes jardins sont ce qui me fait le plus de plaisir au monde ; il y en a pea 
d'aussi beaux." (Memoires et Lettres du Prince de Ligne, torn. i. 117.) 

Chap. IL 

Of the diff'erent Kinds of Gardens in Britain, relatively to the different Classes of Society, and 
the different Species of Gardeners. 

7412. In order to form an estimate of the importance of gardening to a people, and 
of the duties of gardeners in filling different situations, it is not only necessary to notice 
the diffei-ent species of gardeners to which it has given rise, but also the different lands cf 
gardens ; the classes of society which enjoy them ; and ilie species of operators and patrons who 
cultivate atid encourage them. In this view, gardeners may be arranged as private, com- 
mercial, or public establishments. 

Sect. I. Private British Gardens. 

7413. Of private British gardens, the most numerous class of gardens, and those the 
most regularly distributed over the British isles, are those of the country laborer, or what 
are usually denominated cottage-gardens. Next to his cottage, the laborer finds his 
garden the most useful and agreeable object, by supplying a part of his food, affording an 
agreeable source of recreation, and presenting an opportunity of displaying his taste in 
its cultivation. To the laborer who has no cottage or garden, human life presents no 
hopes ; his future extends only to a few days; he has no consolation but in the contem- 
plation of fixed wages, which the most fatiguing exertions can in no degree increase, and 
of which, in the case of illness, he has only the amount of a week to interpose between 
the absolute want of lodging and food. But the laborer who rents a cottage and garden 
is secure at all events of a roof to cover him ; he can multiply his pleasures and pains by 
the addition of a M'ife and children ; and he knows that he can live for a certain time on 
the produce of his garden. By these hopes he is consoled. Besides, he has that most 
desirable object, something that he can call his own ; and is thus enabled to participate 
in the feelings which belong to the love of property and progeny — feelings often, indeed, 
mixed with pain, but which nevertheless, have been an object of ambition from the earliest 
ages of the world. 

7414. Cottage-gardens, in a moral and political point of view, are of obvious importance ; 
attaching the cottager to his home and to his country, by inducing sober, industrious, and , 
domestic habits ; and by creating that feeling of independence which is the best security 
against pauperism. 

7415. The extent of the garden of a laborer ought never to be such as to interfere with his employment 
as a laborer ; unless it is sufficiently so to enable him to dispose of part of the produce in the manner of 
a market-gardener; or to keep a cow and dispose of her produce. But as it will rarely happen that in 
cither case he can compete in the market with the regular market-gardener or farmer, the m.ost useful 
extent of garden is that which shall occupy his own leisure hours in the operations of digging and plant. 
insr, and those of his wife and children in hoeing, weeding, and watering. Tliis will generally, as already 
stated (7296.), be something between one eighth, and three sixteenths of an acre, including the space on 
which the cottage stands. 

741G. The vegetables which may be most profitably cultivated by the occupants of this description are, 
cabbages of the early heading sorts, hardy borecoles, as the German greens, early potatoes, parsneps, tur- 

3X2 



1044 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



nips, carrots, onions, leeks, pease, beans, and kidneybeans ; a plant or two of celery (not to be blanched), 
thyme, mint, and chives for seasoning ; and a few plants of rhubarb for tarts. 

7417. The fruit-shrubs, which ought never to be omitted, are the gooseberry, and black and red currant, 
as standards, in the margins of the plots, or against the walls or pales, if the garden is surroimded by 
these : the kinds of gooseberry should be those which grow with straight upright shoots, as the Manches- 
ter and Warrington reds, the amber, yellow globe, rough green, and crystal. The fruit-trees should be 
of the best bearers among the baking apples and jjlums ; as the hawthoriidean, and any of the codling ap- 
ples for early use, the grey russet and winter pearmain for winter and spring ; and the damson, bullace, 
and winesour plums ; the may-duke cherries, or yair, and a winter bergamot pear may be added. If the 
climate and aspect is favorable, the most southerly sides of the house may be covered with a white musca- 
dine, or black July grape, or otherwise with pears in the best aspects, currants in the worst, and a rose and 
honeysuckle on the porch. (See 7310.) 

7418. 7??. the management of cottage-gardens, no opportunity should be neglected by the 
cottager of collecting manure from the highways, from the grass, weeds, and mud of ditches 
and lanes ; leaves of trees, soot-ashes, and all household refuse, should be collected, and the 
whole mixed together in the dunghill (1977.)> and turned frequently over before using. 
In the culture of these gardens, the principle of a change of surface (2549. )> and of a ro- 
tation of crops (2556.), should be attended to ; and also that of continually stirring the soil 
among growing plants as deep as possible ; of watering in dry weather, regularly every 
evening, and of gathering by hand all worms, snails, slugs, grubs, and other insects, as 
soon as they appear. Of potatoes only the early sorts should be cultivated in the cottage- 
garden, because that plant is no%v so generally a subject of field-culture, that for a main 
supply the cottager will find it cheaper to purchase from the farmer ; or to rent a few 
square yards of a field devoted to drilled green crops, and cultivate himself as many as 
may serve his family and his pigs and poultry. Besides, in either of these ways, he is 
more certain of obtaining potatoes of good quality, as even though the sorts be changed, 
still the quality is much deteriorated by repeated culture on the same spot. 

7419. Improvement of cottage-gardens. It would be a most desirable circumstance, if 
proprietors who keep head gardeners would desire them to attend to the gardens of the 
cottagers on their estates ; to supply them with proper seeds and plants ; to propagate for 
them a few fruit-trees, and distribute them in the proper places in their plots ; to teach 
them modes of culture suitable for their circumstances ; and to enforce them by adequate 
motives of hope or fear, of reward or removal, as the case might require. In this way, at 
no additional expense whatever to tlie proprietor, much happiness might be diffused ; and 
constantly recurring objects too often indicating wi-etchedness, or at least slovenliness, 
rendered useful, neat, and even ornamental. 

7420. Domestic i>nprove»ien( of cottagers. It would also be a very desirable circumstance if some of the 
female servants, or even some of the charitably disposed female members of the family, would instruct 
the cottagers' wives on their estates in improved modes of cookery, washing, making, and mending. It is 
astonishing how ignors'.it and how extravagant the humblest classes are in these respects ; it is rare to 
find in operation any principle of action, or much regard to economy in domestic management. It ap- 
pears to be all work" at random, from the making of soup to the baking of pastry. Much might be done 
by taking any one cottager's dish, and cooking it in different ways before her. For example, soup from 
vegetables, water, and a little butter only. How diffeient that made by merely boiling the ingredients 
au naturel, and that by burning a part of the butter ; adding toasted crumbs of bread, a few lea'^es of 
chives, and half a leaflet of green celery ! How few cottagers know how to make the most of their bees, 
■which, besides honey, afford a most refreshing and enlivening drink, little inferior, when properly made, 
to champagne. Man, in the condition of a day-laborer, is generally so much engaged in procuring the 
raw materials of subsistence, that he is without leisure to invent the machinery, or resort to the manipu- 
lations necessary for manufacturing them into the best fabrics. But let him once be properly instructed 
in this matter; let him once feel the enjoyments of which, even his condition of life is susceptible, and he 
will not easily afterwards relinquish them. In a state of labor and servitude, man is generally so dull and 
stupid, that almost e\-ery de,';ree of refinement, or sensation beyond that of mere animal feefing, is lost on 
him. The rich man is happily willing to put his hand in his pocket to help him ; but that merely affords 
a temporary relief from evil. ' To supply instruction in plain practicable economy, and patiently to follow 
it up till it becomes a habit in the instructed, is to effect a radical improvement in this condition of life ; 
which will be felt by the subjects of it during their lives ; and being transferred to their posterity like' 
other habits and customs, must ultimately ameliorate this most numerous and efficient order of society. 

7421. Supplying economical knowledge to cottagers. Something in furtherance of the above ideas might be 
effected by distributing tracts on cottage-gardening and house-economy ; but man, grown up in ignorance 
without the habit of reading, docs not readily receive instruction from books. His want of experience in 
book-knowledge prevents him from discerning what is practicable from what is speculative, and conse- 
quently he cannot, like the man who is conversant both with books and practice, seize on what is valuable 
and appropriate it to his use. The mind requires a certain preparation before it will receive new ideas ; 
and its faculties must have been exercised on ordinary matters, before reason can be properly employed, 
on any subject not common. Tracts, therefore, among the laboring classes are chiefly useful to their 
children ; and if children were taught the common labors and operations of husbandry and domestic 
economy at school, which they might easily be by the Lancasterian method of instruction, it would tit 
them for entering on a life of labor with superior advantages, both in point of performing their labor, 
and in making the most of its reward. 

7422. The cottage-gardens of artificers, that is, of operative mechanics and manufac- 
turers, small tradesmen, and other country artisans, differ from those of the common la- 
borer in being somewhat larger, and in having a larger portion of the space devoted to 
the culture of fruit-trees and flowers. They are cultivated by the occupier and his family, 
and very frequently sufficient ground is connected with these gardens to enable the oc- 
cupier to keep a cow or horse. These indeed are often half-starved animals, producing 
little benefit to their owners beyond the feelings of satisfaction which the idea of possess-^ 
ing them confers. In several parts, and especially the north of England, and generally 
in Scotland, the gardens of artisans differ from those of the cottager, in being held on a 



Book I. 



PRIVATE BRITISH GARDENS. 



1045 



long building-lease, and in being situated in or around large towns. Tlie iTiost re- 
markable gardens of this description for riches, order, and beauty, are at Norwich, where 
they first originated (373. ) ; at Spitalfields, near London, among the residences of the 
silk weavers ; at Manchestei-, and other Lancashire and Cheshire towns ; and at Paisley 
and Glasgow. The occupiers are generally their own masters, having their looms or 
other implements of trade within their dwellings, and being employed by merchant- 
manufacturei-s, or taking their goods to a common market. They are generally an intel- 
ligent, industrious class of men, who take great delight in their gardens, and the point of 
practice in which they excel is in the production of florists' flowers. Norwich is, or used 
to be, noted for carnations. Spitalfields is still noted for all the competition flowers, 
but especially for auriculas and tulips. Manchester for auriculas and polyanthuses, and 
also for the production of new varieties, and large specimens of gooseberries ; and Pais- 
ley and Glasgow for pinks. The florists in Lancashire, indeed, excel in every branch of 
tlieir profession, and are also famous for their success in cultivating the potatoe, which 
was in general use in this county long before it was known in many others. The artisans 
of Paisley are, perhaps, the most intelligent of their order in the world ; even the speeches 
of what were called the radical reformers of this town, astonished by their argument and 
style ; and the success of the florists, and the laws of their association, are not less surpris- 
ing. (See Lancashire and Renfrewshire, in the succeeding chapter.) 

7423. The farmer s garden (7293.) varies in extent from an eighth part to a whole acre 
or upwards, according to the kind of farm. Lord Kames {Gent. Farm. 297.) considers 
a fruitful kitchen-garden as the chief accommodation of a farm ; yet farmers in general 
pay very little attention to their gardens, even where the best systems of agriculture are 
preserved. They are managed in the smallest farms by the farmer himself, with the oc- 
casional assistance of his men, and. of the female part of his family ; in those of a 
higher kind, where the farmer is not personally an operator, they are managed by a 
laborer, who is generally kept on the farm for cleaning hedges, clearing out furrows, and 
doing such extra field-work as cannot be performed by the regular hands of the farm. 

7424. In tradesmen's farms, large, or what are called gentlemen's farms, villa farms, and fermes ornees 
the gardens are commonly managed by a gardener, who is expected to assist in the field during the hay 
and corn harvests; and, therefore, he seldom ranks high in his profession. 

7425. The products of common farmers' gardens are of the most useful and hardy kinds ; but those of 
villa and ornamental farms contain hot-houses, and often produce many of the luxuries of regular villa 
or mansion gardens. Indeed, were farmers disposed to excel in gardening, no class of country residents, 
excepting landed proprietors, have an opportunity of indulging their taste so variously atul extensively, 
and at so little expense. In the first place, supposing a farmer to have a lease for twenty-one years, at a 
fair rent ; whatever state he finds the farm in ; if it be enclosed and subdivided, he may render it a ferme 
ornee, by leaving strips of pasture round all the arable fields, and connecting these by gates in such a way 
as that he may form a drive or riding (7280.) round and through the whole. Secondly, he may form, or 
enlarge and arrange, the kitchen-garden, flower-garden, orchard, and the portion of lawn and pleasure- 
ground round or beside the farm-house, at pleasure. Thirdly, he may heat hot-houses, pits, and hot-beds, 
at the expense of labor only, by fermenting his farmyard-dung in such pits as West's {fig. 230 in such 
vineries as Anderson's {Jig. 461.), or in other vaults for pines {fig. 462 ), or behind walls or pales, to force 
fruit-trees. Perhaps one of the simplest modes for a farmer to take the benefit of his fermenting dung 
would be to have a line of pales to serve as a wall for training on, hinged at the surface of the ground. 
On these, when placed in a position forming an angle with the ground of 45°, the trees should be trained. 
Then, when the dung is to be placed behind, the pales should be elevated to the perpendicular, and the 
dung dropped down in cart-loads, and laid up in a regular ridge, sloping towards the pales, but perpen- 
dicular on the north side. This being formed, the pales should be folded back on the slope, and the ad- 
vantage of this plan over that of fixed upright pales would be, that as the dung sunk the pales would 
sink with it, and by being always in close contact, would receive more heat than by the usual mode, in 
ivhich, when the dung sinks, it separates from the pales, and then the whole surface of the dung being 
exposed, the heat ascends, and is lost. But an exceeding good plan for every description of forcing or 
exotic culture, would be to construct houses on the plan of West's pit, with all that part of the north 
v/all under the level of the earth or floor for the pots substituted by cast-iron or stone pillars, and wooden 
gates between. These would facilitate the putting in and taking out of the dung, and, being shut close, 
no part of the heat would escape. These plans are only for amateur, or proprietor farmers, for thei 
common commercial or market farmer could not devote either sufficient capital or attention to the 
subject. He, in general, leaves the care of his garden to his wife, whose taste and ambition does not 
often carry her ideas farther than a cucumber-frame ; though a small green-house, and even a vinery, as 
it requires so very little attention (see 3041.), might often be added, in order to enhance the enjoyments of 
this class of society. 

7426. Street-gardens, and the smaller suburban gardens (7287. to 7292.), are the next 
classes in point of number. They diflfer from the former in being almost always gardens 
of pleasure, consisting of a grass-plot {complot, Fr. a design or device,) with a border, 
or a few patches of flowers in front of the house, and a gravel-plot or grass-plot behind, 
sometimes substituted by a plot for culinary vegetables and small fruits. Their 
extent may be from an eighth to half an acre, and they are managed by jobbing-garden- 
ers by the day or year. As the plants and turf are soon injured by the smoky and con- 
fined atmosphere incident to their situations, the finer plants and trees do not thrive in 
them, and the sorts which do succeed, and even the turf, require frequent renewal. 
Evergreens and early spring flowers, both of the tree and herbaceous kinds, are most 
to be desired as permanent plants for these gardens ; and in summer a display of an- 
nuals is made from transplanted plants furnished by the jobber, whose great object ought 
to be to keep up a succession of flowers, and to keep the grass and gravel in order, and 
the whole perfectly neat. 

3X3" 



1046 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



7427f Tradesmen's villas (7284.), of the smaller kind, may contain from a fourth part 
to a whole acre, and are commonly managed by a sort of hybrid gardener, who acts 
also in the capacity of groom, or of house-servant. On a larger scale they are managed- 
by master gardeners of the lowest kind, as from such situations they can seldom rise to 
be head gardeners. Besides attending to the duties of the jobber, as to suburban gar- 
dens, the citizen's gardener ought to study to procure early and late crops of the ve- 
getables most in use ; as peas, kidneybeans, potatoes, turnips, &c., because at these 
seasons they are dear to purchase. IMain summer crops are of less consequence, as they 
may be procured cheap at market. For similar reasons, he ought never to be deficient 
of salads, pot and sweet herbs, tart plants, &c., as these are dearer to purchase in pro- 
portion to other vegetables, because less in demand. If there are frames, hot-beds, and 
hot-houses, the same general principles are to be observed, viz. when the whole of what 
is necessary for the consumption of the family cannot be raised, to raise such crops as, 
whether from their kind, or the seasons at which they are grown, are most dear to 
})urchase. 

7428. Where amateurs of gardening have gardens, they are generally cabinets of rural 
beauty, however small. We may offer as examples that of R. A. Salisbury, Esq. which 
consists entirely of plants in pots, which fill a court of a few yards square in Queen-street, 
Edgeware Road, London ; and that of Topham, of Elkins's-row, Baysvvater, -wliich is 
not much larger tlian that of Salisbury, but in which the choicest flowers are sunk in 
pots, and changed whenever they begin to fade. This garden is a speck of perfect beauty 
in its kind. There are a few plots round London similarly treated, and but a few. On 
a larger scale are numerous amateur gardens; that of the Comte de Vande, at Bays- 
water, contains two acres, and is remarkable for its botanical collection, its standard 
roses, and the neatness with which it is kept : but the plan of the garden, its ciil de sac 
walks, ill proportioned borders, and paltry boundary fence of pales, spoils every thing. 

7429. The garde7is of connoisseurs vary in extent; perhaps the largest and best fur- 
nished is that of Knight, the first of all horticultural connoisseurs, at Downton Castle, 
■which, with the experimental ground, contains several acres, and various hot-houses, pits, 
and frames. In general these gardens are to be considered as horticultural workshops, 
and beauty and order is not to be looked for. Regular gardeners are very seldom em- 
ployed. Knight says [Hort. Trans, iv. 17.), " My gardener is an extremely simple 
laborer, he does not know a letter or a figure." One horticulturist with whom we are 
acquainted, employs only women ; another, only boys ; and several do all the work 
themselves. 

7430. Suburban or citizens* villas (7285.) may be considered as occupied by a more 
wealthy class of citizens ; or if not more'wealthy, possessing more of the taste and ton of 
good society. These gardens or residences contain always a portion of lawn or field, as 
well as a kitchen-garden and shrubbery, and m.ay extend from one to ten acres. They 
generally contain hot-houses of some kind, and are managed by a regularly bred master- 
gardener. Besides attending to the duties of a tradesman's gardener, he must bear in 
mind two things ; first, as the families who occupy such places are generally constant 
residents, he must provide enjoyment both of the agreeable kind from the flower-garden 
and plant hot-houses, and of the useful kind from the culinary and fruit-garden, for 
every month in the year ; and secondly, he must attend to the habits of the family as to 
the kinds of productions and enjoyments preferred. The great art of deriving enjoyment 
from a country-residence of this description, is to provide an interest, a hope, and a 
fear, for every season, or even for eveiy month in the year. By observing the chapter 
of monthly productions of horticulture (6038.), and the table of monthly floricultural 
productions (6741.), the resources which these branches afford are readily discovered. 
There are also other resources in the nature of culture ; such, for example, as raising 
flowers or fruits from seed. In this \dew it is good to have some seedlings of early and 
late flowers, as of the polyanthus and dahlia ; of early and late fruits, as of the currant 
or strawberry, and apple, to come into flower and bearing every season. Other devices 
for exciting and keeping alive interest will readily occur to the reflecting gardener. 

7431. With respect to the habits of a family, it is not only the duty of a gardener to 
grow those vegetables, fruits, and flowers, of which the members consume the most, or 
of which they are fondest ; but he must also look for other habits of enjoyment ; as 
whether they are fond of walking in the garden, and at what times and places, so as to 
have every thing in the condition and order best adapted for those purposes. Some de- 
light in smells, and for such, the most odoriferous plants should be distributed along 
the walks ; others in sounds, and for these, the trees and plants which produce the fruits 
preferred by singing birds should be planted ; or birds, in portable avaries, distributed ■ 
through the grounds. Some, in walking, may prefer not being seen by workmen, or 

at least not meeting them in the paths on which they enjoy this mode of recreation ; 
others may take delight in seeing work going forward, and even in asking questions 
of the operators. 



Book I. 



PRIVATE BRITISH GARDENS. 



1047 



7432. In all families there are iymalids at some time or other, and a great object is to 
render the garden an alleviation to their sufferings. Some afflicted in the lower ex- 
tremities can only walk on grass-walks ; others, from asthma, may not be able to stoop 
to smell to or gather a rose or a gooseberry ; others may require to be carried round the 
hot-houses in a chair, or wheeled along the walks reclining on a couch, and covered with 
a glass case. Grass-walks, standard roses, and gooseberries, elevated pots of plants, hot- 
house paths uninterrupted by pots, and gravel-walks smoothly rolled, art? obvious luxuries 
for such persons. A sick horlicidturist, confined to his chamber, may derive some en- 
joyment from having pots of plants brought before him for a few minutes, to show him 
their progress ; and also by relations of what work is going on, and what articles are 
vegetating in the garden. When life is under the pressure of disease, any object or 
measure which can divert the attention for a moment affords relief ; for though night 
cannot be turned into day without the presence of the sun, its darkness may be lessened 
by a speck of the dimmest day-cloud. It does not often happen that residences are laid 
out puqjosely for invalids ; but where this is the case, the designer ought to contrive 
gently inclined planes instead of steps or stairs, and to avoid all corners in walks and 
paths. Easy turnings in v/alks are also a great luxury to studious persons, who think as 
they walk. For this reason, an author, if he can aflbrd any other garden than a pot of 
mint, should surround his plot with an oval path, that he may walk on without end, and 
without any sensible change in the position of his body. 

7433. IFIietlier a family is of retired or piMlc habits ought to be noticed by the gar- 
dener. A retired family will derive most satisfaction from the useful products, and the 
personal recreation they can take in their garden. A public or fashionable family, on 
the contrary, from its beauty, high order, and keeping. Beautiful objects are formed to 
be admired, that is their use, and what renders them so desirable, and their possessors 
so much en\'ied ; therefore those who possess beautiful objects in order to derive the 
enjoyment they are calculated to confer, must court applause by inviting such friends as 
are likely to become admirers. Let no man shut himself up in the midst of beautiful 
rural nature and think he will be perfectly happy, lest he should be forced with the satirist 
to ask — 

" "WTiat is nature ? ring her changes round, 

Her three flat notes are water, plants, and ground." 

7434. To be condemned to pass an eternity in a pleasure-ground, would be perhaps as 
dull as to pass it in a conventicle. Man is a social being, and never can reject the habits 
to which this part of his nature gives rise with impunity. To be happy he must see and 
be seen : it is the operation of this principle that has rendered the most beautiful seats of 
the country show-places, or places which all the world are in\dted to come and admire, as 
Blenheim, Mount Edgecumbe, Hackfall, &c. ; which induces others to publish accounts 
of their seats, as Dr. Letsom of Grove Hill, the late T. Johnes, Esq. of Hafod, &c. ; 
wliich leads the citizen to place his box or lodge, and the artisan or laborer his cottage or 
cabin by the roadside ; and which, in short, impels the humblest individual to court 
applause by making his powers, either of purse or mind, known to those around him. A 
gardener, therefore, must attend to these general principles of our nature, and apply them 
in his department as well as he can ; for much, it is evident, depends on his studying the 
effect of the scenes under his charge, and keeping them in the most perfect order and 
neatness for inspection. 

7435. Villas. (7278.) The grounds and gardens of this class of residences may occupy 
from ten to a hundred acres, or upwards ; they are generally managed by a head gardener, 
with one or more journeymen, and probably an apprentice, and with the occasional assist- 
ance of men and women laborers. The kitclien and flower gardens of places of this sort 
are generally good, and well furnished with hot-houses ; the shrubbery also is carefully 
laid out, and planted with choice shrubs and trees ; and as the proprietor is generally an 
opulent commercial man, he is liberal in his annual expenditure. The gardeners at such 
places are generally well paid, no limits put to the dung, implements, structures, or 
assistance they may want, and left more entirely to their own discretion than those in the 
service of country-gentlemen. Their responsibility is, therefore, so much the greater, 
and they are quite unpardonable if they do not excel in their art, and, above all things, 
in keeping the whole scene under their charge in the utmost order and neatness. It fre- 
quently happens, however, that soon after a gardener has got into such a situation, and 
become familiarised with his garden, and the habits of his family, he begins to consider 
liis place as a sinecure (^sine, adv. and cura ; i. e. without care), and instead of arduously 
endeavoring that the productions of the current year shall surpass those of the year past ; 
instead of adding more and more to the enjoyments of his employers, he begins to try 
with how little they may be put off ; and the object of his ambition, which ought to be to 
delight and astonish his family, is ultimately lowered to that of contenting them. This 
sort of lethargic indifference, brought on by plenty and ease, is not peculiar to gardeners ; 
it is a condition of our nature, which also furnishes checks to its increase after a certain 

3X4 



1048 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV, 



tie iad ; but it is the business of cultivated man to apply these checks at an early stage, 
md thus to lessen the evils to all parties. 

7436. The simplest check to indolent gardeners is the demands of their masters, who 
seeing at other tables, and in other gardens, productions superior to their own, and know- 
ing that they spare no expense, &c. naturally enquire into the cause of the default. This 
sort of observation when abroad, and comparison with home, ought never to be neglected 
by those who wish to keep servants of any description to their duty. The deficiencies and 
bad points of other gardens and gardeners may be let alone ; but their excellencies should 
always be particularised, and dwelt on to our own ; and where a failure hapijens in the 
one case, the reasons required for the other's superiority in that particular, and our in- 
feriority. If the master ultimately becomes dissatisfied with the condition and produce 
of his garden, let him first call in the nurseryman who recommended tlie gardener, as 
couns?l for both sides ; and let him consign him to tliis nurseryman, with such a charac- 
ter as he may be considered to merit, 

7437. On the order and neatness with which a garden is kept, so much of its beauty 
and effect depends, that often as we have mentioned the subject in the course of this 
work, we must again advert to it. Many excellent gardeners are deficient in these par- 
ticulars, from causes which, at first sight, would seem calculated to have a contrary 
effect ; such as staying constantly at home in their own gardens, and daily inspecting 
every part of tliem. The consequence of this is, that the changes which take place in the 
growth, decay, or deterioration of objects is so gradual as not to be observed, and that au 
object seen twice every day for ten days, seems the same thing the twentieth lime which 
it did the first, when, in fact, and to the person who has only seen it two or three times, 
it is something different. To illustrate this, let us suppose a collection of green-house 
plants, newly shifted, surfaced, pruned, trimmed, tied, washed, and replaced on the stage, 
and that one man attends to the watering of them regularly every day for a month. 
Tliey are newly shifted plants the first day, and consequently require nothing done to 
them ; so they are the second, third, fourth, and so on, even after a week or ten days 
they are so considered, and this notion now becomes liabitual to the attendant. Every 
day as he enters the green-house to water, he sees, vnthout even opening his eyes, (that 
is, the idea recurs,) a stage of newly shifted plants, all fresh, and free from weeds and 
decayed leaves, and wanting nothing ; therefore weeds and decayed leaves he never 
thinks of looking for, but waters on ; whilst a stranger, or one who has not seen tJiem for 
a few days, is struck with the slovenliness displayed, and though perhaps the same thing 
may take place in his own garden, or his own department in the same residence ; he goes 
away not willing to benefit the other by corrective advice, but thanking God he is not 
like this man." 

7438. IViis cause of slovenliness we think there are few gardeners who will deny to be 
correctly stated ; and we think, the cause being discovered, the remedy very easily pre- 
sents itself. Let master gardeners not inspect every part of what is under their care everi/ 
day at the same time, and in the same order, but let them omit some parts on some days, 
occasionally omit the whole, and often vary the time and order of their \'isits. Let them 
also, instead of going round to look if such and such scenes are in order, go impressed 
with the idea of finding them in bad order, in search of particular sorts of weeds, of de- 
cayed, damaged, or straggling parts of plants, insects, &c. It may seem ludicrous to add, 
let him go round sometimes in the night instead of during day ; but we are persuaded 
that viewing particular scenes by the light of a lantern or the moon, would present them in 
such a new aspect, as would probably show deformities or deficiencies. It is a common 
observation of servants, that after their master has been a day or two confined with illness, 
or on the morning after an evening of dissipation, he is generally very apt to find fault 
and be cross, and difficult to please. This is actually the case, and is satisfactorily 
accounted for without reference to humor or temper : the master sees faults which before 
escaped him, because the machinery of his faculties has been deranged, and he sees dif- 
ferently. But why does he see faults rather than beauties ? Because it is his business 
to seek for them, and this impression being habitual on his mind, the strongest images re- 
flected by the eye are of that nature. 

7439. Visiting neighboring gardens is another important part of a head gardener's duty. 
This should be done with a view not only to order and neatness, but also to good culture, 
intelligence as to the state of gardening, &c. ; he should not limit his visits to those 
near him, but include all the principal gardens for forty or fifty miles round ; and he 
should, at least, once a-year, visit the capital or the metropolis, to inform himself, by 
means of the nurserymen, and among the numerous first-rate gardens that are always found 
round capital cities, the horticultural societies, and agricultural libraries, of what is going 
on in the gardening world. 

7440. "rhe mansion and demesne (7270.) is less common than the villa near large towns, 
but more so in the country. The proprietors are sometimes commercial men, but more 
generally country-gentlemen. Their extent varies from a hundred to a thousand acres. 



Book T. 



PRIVATE BRITISH GARDENS. 



10-19 



or upwards, and, in addition to the park and gardens, they contain a home or family 
farm managed by a bailiff. The garden-scenery, as in the case of a villa, is managed 
by a head gardener, sometimes more circumscribed in his operations, but always re- 
spectably provided for, both as to his person and garden. The worst point attending 
residences of this description is, that the business of gardener and bailiff is, sometimes 
in England, and often in the other districts of the empire, united ; and the consequence 
almost universally is, that the business of both situations is very imperfectly performed. 
The master's object in attempting this union is obviously the saving of a bailiff's wages, 
which, it is allowed, is an apparent saving, tliough certainly not always so ultimately. 
The gardener and bailiff cannot be present at one time, both in the garden and on the 
farm ; he mus.t pass alternately from the one to the other, and it may be questioned 
whether the time lost in liis absence from both, while going between them or at market, 
and from the one while on the other, does not more than counterbalance the wages of 
a bailiff, independently of any other consideration. But the loss both to the farm and 
garden, in cases of this sort, though not very obvious at first sight, is very considerable 
when details are entered on. Xo man brought up as a gardener can at once become a 
good bailiff ; and admitting that he may become one in time, yet he acquires his ex- 
perience at his master's expense. It is generally imagined that a gardener makes a 
good arable farmer ; but this he does not become without experience ; for though he may 
know what good culture is, and may bring the fields of corn or green crops under his 
charge into a state of good cultivation, yet he may do this at much too great an expense 
to afford any profit. But the management of arable land is but a small part of a bailiff's 
duty ; the grand object is the breeding, rearing, fattening, buying, and selling of live 
stock ; and a knowledge of these parts of farming cannot be acquired imder several 
years' experience. In tlie mean time, the losses to the master by bad marketing must 
be most considerable. Suppose the gardener and bailiff goes to purchase a few scores of 
sheep, and a dozen of oxen for feeding, every grazier knows that on the nature of the 
feel alone, which no man can communicate to another by description, much of the value 
of the animal depends. But a gardener knows notliing of this feel, and the tact of dis- 
covering it is not to be acquired but after such a course of experience as no prudent 
master, who knows any thing of the subject, would wish a bailiff to acquire in his ser- 
vice. As much might be said on the* correctness of judgment required in selecting 
animals to breed together, and in the shrewdness required for marketing ; the latter, a 
duty totally inconsistent with the retired habits of a gardener. 

7441. Tliaf sotne gardeners 7nay hecome good bailiffs we readily allow, because a man of moderately good 
natural faculties and persevering application, will acquire any thing ; but from the nature of the duties 
which a bailiff has to perform, and the time he must occupy on the farm and at ni:^rket, it is impossible he 
can attend sufficiently to the garden. We have never yet known an instance where the duties of both the 
offices were well performed by the same person, but almost universally found both the garden and farm 
deficient in the products expected from them. That the master is content is no proof to the contrary, for 
knowing no better, he naturally considers what he has as the best 

7442. Fro7;i the country-gentlt iuan's gardener, ivlio does not unite the duties of bailiff, a good deal is ex- 
pected ; he must know his' profession well ; he cannot probably from limited extent and means produce 
all he could wish, or that a garden should afford, but what he undertakes to raise he must raise in per- 
fection, according to the kind and season, and the main crops in suilicient quantity, because he cannot, 
like the citizen's gardener, have recourse to Covent-gardcn, nor like the villa-gardener, surrounded by 
neighbors, borrow from them melons, mushrooms, or asparagus, in cases of emergency. He has one 
duty also which does not belong to either of these classes of gardeners, that of packing and sending fruits 
and other garden products to town when the family reside there. 

7443. The mansion-residence may be considered as including all those between the 
villa and tlie royal palace. The dwell inghouses are called houses, halls, courts, or 
palaces, according to the custom of the country, where they are situated ; or castles, 
abbeys, or Grecian buildings, according to their style of architecture ; and mansions or 
palaces, according to their extent and magnificence. Tlie mansion-residence consists of 
the -same parts as in the mansion and demesne (7270.) ; it may contain from five hundred to 
ten thousand acres, or upwards, and the whole is managed in the first-rate establishments 
by the follo\^■ing officers : — A secretary, who receives the commands of the master, and 
conveys them to the honse-steward, who manages the expenditure of the house and offices, 
and gamekeeper ; io the land-steward, who manages the tenanted lands, receiving rents, 
and seeing to the fulfilments of covenants in leases, repairs, See. ; to the bailiff, who 
manages the family farm ; and to the gardener, who m.anages the garden-scenery, in- 
cluding the park, as far as respects the trees. and grass, and the internal plantations or 
forests. 

7444. The gardener icho occupies a Jirst-rate situation has under him a forester, for the 
demesne-woods and park-trees ; a pleasure-ground foreman for tlie lawns and shrubbery ; 
a flower-garden foreman, a forcing-department foreman, and a kitchen- garden foreman. 
A horse and two-wheeled chaise is kept for his use, by a boy, who also acts as his mes- 
senger and house-servant. He lives in a respectable house, near the kitchen -garden, 
with a stable and cowhouse not far distant. His wages are from 150/. to 300/. a-year, 
independently of a free house, fuel, and other advantages. He should be at the head of 



1050 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



his profession when he enters on it ; and keep himself at the head of it, by taking care 
to be informed of every improvement and invention in his line, as they are discovered 
and made public. He must not only know all that is in books, but must be in advance 
in knowledge ; not only ready to apply all the best practices, but fertile in expedients 
on extraordinary occasions, and in cases of novelty, difficulty, or emergency. Necessi- 
ties and difficulties, as they occur, excite the inventive faculty far beyond reflection or 
study ; therefore we can afford little assistance here^ except recommending the gardener 
who is ambitious to excel in his profession, first to store his mind with all the resources 
of gardening, and next to lay up in his memory as many ideas as he can on all other 
subjects, but especially on art and science. Next to books on gardening and agricul- 
ture," and the topographical surveys of every kind, he should have frequent recourse to 
the best encyclopa;dias of general knoAvledge, and observe the operations, and converse 
much on professional subjects with mechanics and artificers of every description. Much 
useful information is to be obtained from carpenters, millwrights, and smiths, and all 
kinds of information may occasionally be applied to use in so varied and extensive an art 
as gardening. 

7445. Some idea of the extent of the duties of a head gardener who fills a first-rate 
situation, may be had from the chapter of monthly horticultural productions, the table of 
floricultural productions, and arboriculture and landscape-gardening, as treated of in 
this work ; and therefore all that we shall attempt here, in addition to what has just been 
offered on the subject of the duties of gardeners holding inferior situations (7426. to 7442.), 
is to enumerate a few of the expedients, some of them common and others uncommon, 
which every description of gardener will have occasion to practise more or less ; but 
wliich more particularly demand the attention of gardeners of the highest class, who, not 

eing limited in expense, are expected not to be deficient in producing all the comforts 
and luxuries that a garden can afford. We shall arrange these hints under the four de- 
partments of practical gardening. 

7446. Expedients and anomalous practices in the horticultural department. 



To have earhj crops of herbaceous regetaUes in the open air. Sow 
in pots early in spring; one seed" in a pot of the smallest size, 
place them in a gentle hot-bed, sluft into larger pots as they 
pow, and when all danger from frost is over, transplant 
with the balls entire in the finely pulverised rich soil of 
a warm border. Peas, beans, turnips, potatoes, carrots, 
saJading of all sorts, and spinage may be had very early in 
this way. 

Stable-dniig is very scarce, and a great miantity is rt'anicdfor hot- 
beds and pits. Collect the spray of trees, copsewood, and 
hedges ; cut it into lengths of three or four inches, with a 
straw-cutter, and mix it with the dung. Add caqienters* 
shavings, flax-dressers' refuse, leaves, reeds, rushes, peat, 
moss, liealh, or any substance capable of undergoing tlie pu- 
trescent fermentation. 

Tanners' bark is scarce. Add spray, fiirze, or hcafh, chopped 
with the straw-cutter to the length of the chips of bark, also 
chopped shavings of wood, parings of leather, &c. 

Autumn-planted caiibages and caulijlvii ers, and also spinage and 
onions have failed- Sow eai'lv in spring single seeds in small 
pots on heat, shift often, and transplant in the warmest situ- 
ation when all danger from frost is over. 

To forward early seedling crops. Sow in the usual way under 
cold frames, and remove them when all danger from frost is 
over. Peas, spinage, and turnips, may be had three weeks 
earlier than usual by this practice. 

All your ground is cropped, and some crops not lik ly io be removed 
in tirne io let those n'hich are immediatety to succeed them, he got 
in in season. Forward the succeeding crop in pots, and as 
soon as the^iireceding crop is removed, transplant with the 
halls entireT^ 

The garden is too small for the culinary productions. Forward 
the brassica tribe in pots, and only head or flower them in the 
compartments. Instead of hot-beds, which occupy mucli hori- 
zontal space, have cucumbers and melons on hot-walls cover- 
ed with glass: train other creepers, as love-apples, New Zea- 
land spinage, gourds, &c. on upright trelUs-work or pales, the 
potatoe-haulm to stakes ; stick all peas ; train gooseberries, 
currants, and all dwarf trees as espaliers. 

Sorts of fruit not appwved of. Engraft or inoculate other sorts. 

You have some exellenl sorts of peaches or other soft tree fruits, 



n'hich you rvish some person to taste at a distance, too great or 
too inconvenient to serul the fruits themselves. Send some blos- 
som-buds either in spring to be scollop-budded, when they 
will produce their fruit the same year, or in the usual bud- 
ding season. 

Trees old and nnt productive. Head down and renew the soil, 
and see that the roots are not too deeply buried. 

To have late crops cf hardy legutnes and leaves. Plant the latest 
crops in large pots or boxes ; keep them plunged in the open 
air, and remove them when there is danger of frost to any of 
the forcing-houses not in operation. In tlamp weather, light 
gentle tires in the daytime, but not at night ; in frosty 
weather, light gentle fires at night. In this way peas, beans,, 
kidneybeans, cauliflower, spinage, &c. may be had in a good 
state till .Tannary or later. 

The furnaces orjlucs of a house in action are sruldenly deranged 
dui-inga severe frost. Distribute pots of burning charcoal or 
peat over the tloor or paths of the house, and cover the glass 
with mats. 

To lessen thedanger of the sun scorching plants in hot-houses orhol- 
beds. Fill them with clouds of steam, by pouring water on 
the giound or otherwise. 

You hare lately renewed your tan-hcd, and the heal is too great for 
the pines n-liic'i are plunged in it. Begin at one end of the pit, 
and take out a row across the pit ; then whelm hot saucers at 
the bottom of each hole left by the pots ; lift the second row, 
and set the pots on th.e saucers : they will thus be surroimdcd 
bv air instead of earth. 'W hen the tan cools replace them as 
before. 

Grafts offtnefniits are received, for n-hichyou have no stocks, and 
you do tiot tvish to put them on old trees. Dig up some roots 
of trees of the proper kind, and make stocks of them ; graft- 
ing, and afterwards plai-.ting in Knight's manner. (2037.) 

Nei'er fn-gct that grafting and budding may be perform dot any 
season cf the year, (though best in certain seasons,) and on herba- 
ceous as n-ell as rvaody plants, on roots and liJjers as rvcll as on 
stems, stalks, and lig'^neous shoots. 

Consider the sap of plants as a stream tlial you may direct and 
modify almost at pleasure: that a great many plants maybe 
propagated from leaves alone, &c. 



7447. Expedients and anomalous practices in Jloriculture. 

You expect a larire party io tisii the plant hot-houses, and they 
have^ l>een fumigated rrith tobacco the nig-ht before. In one 
distribute sprigs of terebinthinate trees^ as the spruce and 
silver firs ; in another, sprigs of briar ; in another, birch, 
verbena triphylla, mignonette, bruised leaves of acorus ca- 
lamus, and so on : then sprinkle with pure water. Or 
do not use plants, but merely water the whole with rose- 
water ; or use a little musk, orange- water, or other artificicil 
odors. 

Scnne of your houses are very unsightly frojn acddenis to plants, 
insects, or other causes ; btd coyyipany is expected to go ihroritr'i 
than at a particular hour. Contrive to have them lilltd with 
sweet smells at that time. Distribute a few choice things in 
pots near the eye; which, by attracting the pj:tention of the 
spectator, will help to divert his eye from defect or disease, 
and to estimate what is concealed by what is seen. 
AJ'ter a dry summer your lawn is covered wi h brown blotches, 
on account of the shallowness of the sail, it is desired io gin 
a temporary green appearance. 'Water these places with 
lime and water, mixed with green color, the bme serving 
as a body 

A quantity of large green-Jwuse plants suddenly arj:ive, and no 
house is ready to put them into. Place poles agaiust a south 



The gravel-walks eaHhyand VI colored; a large party is expected, 
and you wish to give the walks a fresh and good appearance. 
"Water them with water impregnated with lime and yellow 
or red ochre, according as the natural color of the gravel may 
be yellow or brown. 

The pleasure-ground is deficient in singing birds. Distribute 
cages of Canary and other birds in song, hanging them on the 
trees in unseen situations. 

Th'.fio?ver-garden and shrubhei-y deficient in odoriferous plants, to 
produce an immediate remedy. Distribute pots of mignonette 
(or Persian iris early in the season'', and also bottles of water, 
containing the ends of sprigs of sweetbriar, birch, balsam- 
i)oplar, balm of gilead, and other firs , place these so as not to 
be conspicuous,'';;nd renew them as they decay. 

To diffuse odors in the atmosphere on par-ticular occasions and 
duriitg dnj weather. Sprinkle the odoriferous plants with the 
water-engine. 

A large party is expected at a particular time; to give f reshness 
and odor 'to the whole flower-garden. Sprinkle every part 
with water, excepting the walks; if with rose-water, which 
mav be made at little expense w here there is extensive shrub- 
berries, and kept for sprinkling the hot-houses; so much 
the better. 



Book I. 



PRIVATE BRITISH GARDENS. 



1051 



wall, and place the sashes of your spare hot-beds over them 
in the manner of blates. 
To foi-m tetnporary Jets <if rvater. Procure one or any number 
of cast-iron, or other strong vessels, which may hold from 
six to thirty, or fifty gallons or upwards : let each vessel have 
a tube reaching from what is to be its top within an inch of 
its internal bottom ; this mbe must have a nozzle to unscrew, 
and also a stopcock. The vessel being half lilled with water, 
an air-condenser is to be screwed to the pipe, and the air 
powerfully condensed, then turn the stopcock to prevent 
the escape of the water ; unscrew the condenser, and screw 
on the nozzle for the jet. All is now ready for operation, and 
the veisel may be placed in the situation where the jet is 
desired : here it may be either set in an excavation made to 
fit ; or concealed by plants ; or the vessel may be a vase, or 
made in any ornamental form. Being placed where it is to 
operate, it may remain for any length of time before using : 
to set it at work, it is only necessary to ttim the stopcock, 
and according to the diameter of the orifice of the nozzle, it 
win throw the water from ten to fifty feet or more in height, 
gradually dimuushing in height, as the water is expended, 
and lasting in joint proportion to the quantity of water con- 
tained in the vessel, the orifice of the jet, and the compres- 



sion given to the air. This principle admits of great v.-irietj, 
extension, and modificatio'n, and might be made to produce 
very splendid eiTects ; and though these effects would be but 
temporary, they would not be objectionable on that account, 
as in this climate, already cold and moist, the constant play 
of jets of water is by no nieans desirable. 

To produce harmonious sounds in tlie Jluirer-^ardcn, in the hot- 
houses, or near arbors, seats, Sfc. Place JEulian ha;-ps in proper 
situations, as in Germany. 

To disperse an airreeable odor suddenly and fon-erfnlty. Charge 
one of the jet- vessels with air, having previously introduced 
some of the odor in the form of oil or essence, &c., then 
produce the discharge at the proper tune and place, or charge 
with rose-water. 

To direct a stream of deleterious air against insects in hoi-hojises at 
a distance from the path. Direct the stream tlurough a long 
tin tube, or charge a jet-vessel with the smoke or air. 

To syringe plan's ruithout a syringe or engine. Use a brush or 
birch-broom dipped in water. 

To recover plants in Iwt-houses injured by frost. Shade two or 
three days from the sun, and keep the temperature very little 
above the freezing point. 



7448. Ecpedients and anomalous practices in landscape-gardening. 



To render a dull part of the park tnore interesting. Build a 
hay-stack there ; or erect a shelter for cattle ; or on tem- 
porary occasions pitch a tent ; or place a portable hay-rack 
with food to attract deer or cattle ; or send some men to work 
on the spot. 

To vary on an extraordinary occasion a dull, uninteresting part 
of the horizon. Cause a fire to be lighted of green wood, or 
such materials as by the ascending smoke will break the line 
in the proper place.' 

To vary for a few seasons the front of a mass of n-ocd. Disbark 
one or two trees at proper places at the surface of the ground, 
and when dead they will produce a break. For a fen- ;i cjA.s ; 
cut a tree wlrile i'a leaf, so as its leaves may wither and 
remain on, or water with the engine and lime-water. 

To give an idea of the e-^ect which a piece of water in a j.arlicidar 
place, and of a particular shape, trill hai .?. JIark out the 
shape, and water the surface with lime-water ; when dry the 
effect will be obvious. 

To give af'rekivMdedge of the effect of a gravel-rvalk in anyriar- 
ticular place. Mark it out, and water with lime and yellow 
cchre. 

To show the ejfect of trees. Use poles with crosses at top, or 
better, use entire trees, die thinnings of plantations. 



To show the effect of buildings. Erect poles, and stretch canvass, 
or na;l boards on them, so as to form the sky outline of the 
proposed edifice. 

To siiorv the ejfect of raising ground. Stud it over with 
stakes of tlie height intended to elevate the earth, and stretch 
here and there strips of green canvass, bunting, bass mats, 
or even green straw or hay-ropes, over these. Hay-ropes, 
from well-got hay, are cheapest, and, if of sufficient number, 
answer perfectly. 

To give a poiticu't and pastoral air to a scene for the moment. 
Employ a person with a flute to play at particular times ; 
drive cattle to drink at a stream; pass a flock of sheep that 
way, &c. 

To give a forest character to particular parts of tlie park or rvoody 
scenery. Introduce shagged horses, and asses; show the re- 
mains' of a fire ; leave some branches or felled trees, &c. 

To direct tlie eye to a particular point, either In observe its beauties, 
or to prevent it from observing some deformities in the same 
scene. Place a white object there, as a hay-rick, man at 
work with liis coat off, white cow, or horse, Ijcc. if the back- 
ground be groimd or wood; and a dark object, if sky or water. 
If the scene be a lake, then place a boat at the point to which 
you would attract the eye. 



7449. Expedients and anomalous j^ractices in arboriculture. 



A handsome tree has lost some branches on one side, or is disfigured 
by the removal of another tree. Try and arrange the branches 
by cords or strong wires, as is done in green house plants 
vvith threads. 

To cover a free rapidly with creepers. Place leathern hags of 
earth, containing plants of the sort of creeper deaired, here 
and there on the tnmk and principal brancb.es ; tie them flat 
to the tree, so as they may not appear conspicuous. 



A quantity of valuable trees arrive from a distance, very much 

irijured and dried up, and too latejbr planting in the usual way. 

Immerse in water, or bury entirely in earth ; then puddle 

^J^d plant ; or jilant for one season in a shady part of the 

nursery ; or plant in pots, and place these on heat, when rare 

kinds, till they begin to grow. 
A violent tvind has blown down a 7utmber of trees. Lop their tops, 

and prune and arrange their roots, replacing them upright ; 

they wUl produce effect much sooner than young tree*. 

7450. To some of these expedients it may be objected, that they are deceits or temporary 
tricks ; but if they are so, they are in the spirit of the scenery to which they belong, and 
they are calculated only to produce pleasure, not pain to any one ; none of them are false- 
hoods, or calculated to make a thing of one nature appear to be of another. We have not 
directed the display of artificial fruits on wall-trees, of the fruiting of orange-plants from 
the shops, of milliners' flowers in green houses, or living figures placed on pedestals as 
statues, of fountains in mourning by making them run out ink, of altars and temples, 
with persons in proper costume sacrificing on them, of mock buildings or animals, scoops 
or painted perspectives; all which and other deceptions are recommended and practised 
by tlie French and Dutch. 

7451. Gardens (if royal palaces. The government-gardens of this country are those of 
"Windsor, Hampton Court, and Kensington ; that of Kew being a private royal garden. 
None of them are in any respect worthy of their rank ; the garden at Windsor is without 
hot- houses; that at Hampton Court consists chiefly of some pine-pits and a vineiy ; at 
Kensington, great part of the kitchen-garden is cultivated by the plough, and the only 
two tilings w hich render it worth notice are its pine-stoves, and the public gardens or 
pleasure-ground. The garden-structures at Kew are in a state of decay, and the gardens 
are never in first-rate order, often slovenly, and always confined as to arrangements. It 
is said these things arise from want of funds ; and from the low rate at which the oper-^ 
ators are paid in these gardens. This seems to be the case, and it is much to be regretted, 
as it prevents the royal gardeners from displaying their skill and taste. Judging from 
the pine-apples grown in the forcing-departments at Kensington and Hampton Court, 
there is reason to believe this would be highly creditable to themselves, and exemplary to 
the nation. 

7452. The royal gardeners were formerly much consulted by private gentlemen on the 
subject of their profession ; this is still the case, though in a much less degree, and more 
now as to garden structures or culture, than as to matters of design and taste. With re- 
ference to this circumstance, the professional skill of royal gardeners ought to be of the 
first order, as their opinion will always be law to a certain number of the court ; but for 
the culture and produce of the gardens (situated as these now are), less professional skill 
is wanting in a royal gardener than in a private head gardener, as deficiencies in products 
can always be made up from the commercial gardeners, or from Covent-garden. 



I05i2 



STATISTICS OF GAEDENING. 



Part IV. 



Sect. II. Commercial Gardens. 

7453. Of commercial gardens, the lowest species are what are called ploughed or far- 
mers' gardens. One or two are to be found near all large towns, and a number round 
London. They extend from fifty to a hundred and fifty acres or upwards, and are almost 
entirely cultivated by the plough and other agricultural implements. Their possessors 
are small farmers, and the chief difference between this farm-gardening, and common 
farming is, that the green crops that intervene between the corn crops are more highly 
cultivated, and instead of being consumed on the farm, are sent to market as culinary ve- 
getables, or food for stall-fed cows. The crops of every kind, but especially the green 
crops, are cultivated in drills, two close together, with a wide interval, by which means 
abundance of room is left to plovigh and horse-hoe the broad interval, and to sow a suc- 
ceeding crop there before the other is removed. In this way two crops are obtained most 
years, as a specimen of which we shall mention one of the common rotations, viz. 1. Peas, 
with dung, two rows near each other, and a wide interval ; 2. Turnips in the intervals ; 
3. Drilled wheat between the turnips ; 4. Turnips, with dung, in drills after the wheat. 
These four crops are put in, and removed within two years, the ground being in good 
heart. 

7454. The seed-garden is the next species, and forms one of the points of union between 
horticulture and agriculture. These gardens pr small farms are not numerous, and con- 
fined chiefly to two or three counties near the metropolis. They consist of from five to 
twenty acres or upwards, in part cultivated by the plough ; the occupier is not generally 
a bred gardener, but sometimes is so, and unites with the business of seed-grower that cf 
market or nursery gardener. The seeds he cultivates are generally limited to a few 
kinds ; thus chervil, radish, and cress seeds are grown chiefly in the neighborhood of 
Saffron- Walden in Essex ; cabbage-seeds at Battersea ; onions at Deptford ; peas in Kent, 
turnips in Norfolk; rape in Lincolnshire; mustard in the county of Durham, &c. The 
great art is to grow the seeds true to their kind, for which purpose one grower must not 
attempt too many varieties of the same species, but he may grow a number of different 
species, and of varieties of the same species, provided they do not come into flower at the 
same time. Such seeds as are raised in large quantities, as turnip, mustard, cress, maw or 
poppy-seed, peas, &c. are either sold privately by samples, to the London or other seeds- 
men, or exposed publicly in the seed-market in Mark-lane, London, or in local country 
markets. But for the greater number of seeds, the practice is for the nurserymen abou; 
London to grow a sample of it in their own grounds as pure and perfect as possible, and 
then to send it to the seed-farmer to be sown and cultivated by him, "and the seed ripened, 
cleaned, and sent to the nurserymen, at a fixed rate, by the cwt. or bushel. Flower-seeds 
are generally grown by nurserymen themselves ; many of the other sorts by market-gar- 
deners, and many kinds are received from the head gardeners of private gentlemen. 

7455. Grass-orchnrds ( Vergers agrestes, Fr.) form the next point of union between farm- 
ing and gardening. There are a number of them in the cider counties, and in the Vale 
of Clyde, and Carse of Gowrie. A suitable soil and site are chosen, the surface, if not 
in pasture, is sown with grass-seed, and standard fruit-trees, chiefly apples and pears, and 
sometimes, as in Shropshire, plums and walnuts are planted in rows, and properly fenced. 
They receive little pruning, and generally receive no other care but that of gathering the 
fruit, which is either made into cider ; stored in cellars ; or sent immediately to market. 
As the trees get old and covered with moss or mistletoe, or infected with canker, shakes, 
or rottenness, they are scarified, headed down, and sometimes regrafted or rooted out and 
renewed, according to circumstances. (See The Orchardist, by Bucknal, and Hints to 
Proprietors of Orchards, by W. Salisbury, ) 

7456. Ploughed orchards differ in nothing from the grass-orchards but in being con- 
stantly or occasionally under aration. The trees stand in quincunx, and every year the 
direction of the furrows is changed : thus, the first year it may be ploughed east and 
west ; the second, south-east and north-west ; the third, south and north ; and the 
fourth, south-west and north-east. The stem of each tree is thus left in the centre of a 
square or rhomboid of turf of four feet on the side. The ground is cropped as in oom- 
mon farming, or farm-gardening. 

7457. Market-gardens. (7358.) The number of these is considerable ; their situation 
is near laro-e towns or seaports, and their extent from one to fifty acres or upwards ; 
some near London extend to upwards of a hundred acres. The object of all is to pro- 
duce culinary vegetables and fruit for public sale, either as called for at the garden or 
garden-shop ; as wanted by the green-grocer ; or exposed in the public market. Some 
of these gardens are general, producing every descriptic« of culinary fruit and vegetable, 
hardy, exotic, and forced, in demand ; of which, as examples, may be mentioned the 
Earls Court garden, of upwards of sixty acres, and with extensive hot-houses, by Gunter • 
the Hoxton garden, nearly equally extensive, by Grange ; and the Isleworth gardens, by 
Wilmot and Keens, Other gardens near the metropolis are devoted chiefly to particular 



Book I. 



COMMERCIAL GARDENS. 



1053 



crops ; as that of^ Biggs, at Mortlake, to asparagus ; some at Battersea, to cabbage and 
cauliflower ; at the Neats-houses, to celery j at Deptford, to asparagus and onions ; 
Charlton and Plumstead, to peas, &c. In some gardens attention is chiefly paid to 
forcing early, and growing late crops ; in others, as at Lambeth, by Andrews, exotic 
fruits, as pines and grapes, are chiefly grown. At a greater distance from town, articles 
of easy carriage, as gooseberries, strawberries, asparagus, tart-rhubarb, sea-kale, &c. are 
leading articles ; and in small gardens in the immediate vicinity of the metropolis, 
nothing is sent to market ; but salads, as water-cress, radishes, lettuce, parsley, herbs, 
and flowers are the chief articles grown, and they are sold in small quantities on the 
spot. The market-gardeners near seaports direct their attention chiefly to the produce 
of cabbage, onions, turnips, and such vegetables as are in demand as ships' stores. In 
most parts of the country it happens, that from bankruptcies, absence of families, and 
such like causes, the produce of a number of private gardens is sent to market. This is 
a good deal the case near London ; but so much so round Liverpool and Manchester, 
that scarcely a market-gardener is to be found near these towns. Indeed, many of the 
citizens there who possess villas and gardens, cultivate them as much for the sake of the 
disposal of the produce as for their own enjoyment. 

7458. Market-gardeners on a small scale have generally been master or head gardeners, 
who have acquired a capital from a number of years' servitude ; those occupying more 
extensive concerns are generally the sons or successors of other market-gardeners, and 
possess considerable capital. An important point in the culture of these gardens is to 
supply abundance of manure and water in dry weather ; these always produce luxuriant 
and succulent crops of leaves, though obviously injurious in respect to flavor. A proper 
rotation and change of surface are also important j and in smaller crops it is a material 
point to have the rudiments of one crop always ready to succeed another. Thus radishes, 
lettuces, and onions are sown on asparagus-beds ; the radishes are soon drawn, and suc- 
ceeded by the lettuces and onions, which are left only in places where they will not injure 
the asparagus ; the lettuces come into use soon after the asparagus is cut, part of the 
onions are drawn young, and the rest left to bulb. In the alleys between the beds, 
cauliflowers are planted early in the season, and between these, at a later period, cucum- 
bers, which, with their runners, cover the vacant parts both of the alleys and beds. Thus 
six crops are obtained in succession, and the ground is clear by October for landing up 
the beds. Early cauliflowers are generally a profitable crop. The seeds are sown in 
August, pricked out, and planted under hand-glasses, six under each, in October. The 
glasses are placed in rows, ten feet apart, and at four feet distance from centre to centre 
in the row : thus an acre contains 1092 glasses. After the cauliflowers are planted, the 
ground is sown with lettuces and spinage ; if the lettuce stands the winter, it is valuable, 
and grows fast when the soil is stirred round it in March. About this time, four of the 
six plants under each glass are removed, and planted in a warm situation, or in the shel- 
tered alleys of the asparagus-beds. About the beginning of May the cauliflowers are too 
large for the glasses, and are just coming into flower. As they are gathered and their 
roots removed, they are replaced by cucumber-plants, previously raised in hot-beds, and 
now containing two or more proper leaves. In July the middle of the intervals between 
the rows of glasses is planted with endive, and between each glass two cauliflower-plants 
are planted to come in late. Thus five crops are raised, all valuable ones, if the ground 
was previously in good heart, and was kept frequently well stirred, and quite free from 
weeds. The following are common rotation : 1 . Radishes, carrots, savoys or cabbages, xsr 
coleworts ; 2. Early turnips, autumn cabbage ; 3. Spring turnips, French beans, savoys, 
or peas and spinage, and leeks or broccoli. 

7459. In sowing broad-cast crops it is found of advantage to sow several sorts of seeds together, because 
some of them may fail or be destroyed by insects after they come up : if all come up and thrive, then such 
sorts as are least valuable may be treated as weeds. Thus onions, radishes, lettuce, and carrots, are often 
sown together ; sometimes the carrots are wed out, and the best crop is the onions ; at other times the 
onions partially fail, and are drawn for salading or transplanting, and the lettuce is the main crop,j 
Radishes are often sown with turnips, as a sacrifice to the fly, while the turnips escape. 

7460. In general all transplanted crops, and as many sown ones as possible, are drilled ; and for bulky 
crops, as cabbages, peas, beans, &c. it is an approved practice to sow or plant two rows near to each other, 
and then leave a wide interval, in which a dwarf early crop, or crops of short duration, as spinage, let- 
tuce, &c. is sown. By the time the main crop is at its full size, the inter-crop is removed ; the ground is 
then dry, and another crop, as cabbages or turnips, introduced, which is ready in its turn to succeed as 
the main crop. In this way, no part of a market-garden is ever left naked or cropless, at least during 
summer, and though these intervening crops are often injured when young by the shade of the main 
crops, yet, if the ground be in high order, they soon recover when freely exposed to the air, and the 
ground is stirred. If the land, however, is not in good heart, it is a better system to adopt a rotation, and 
stir the whole ground well between each crop, because here, the soil being poorer, a greater volume is 
required to supply the same nourishment : quantity is substituted for quality. 

7461. With respect to the comparative market value of crops, they must, on the general average, be nearly 
on a par; if one crop is at any time dearer than another, it is in consequence of being more precarious or 
expensive to raise ; if one article is very dear at one time, it is immediately overgrown, and becomes pro- 
portionally cheap. To grow something of every thing is safe for those who have extensive concerns ; 
select things for those who devote their whole attention to small spots ; and things long of coming to per- 
fection, as tart-rhubarb, sea-kale, asparagus, &c. to those who have capital. It is never advisable to 
propagate a dear article very extensively, as every body is likely to be doing the same thing; it is better 
even to adopt a contrary practice. 



1054 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



7462. A good deal of the profit of market-gardening depends on studying tlie state of the market ; in 
gathering crops sparinglj^ when things are'low, and in sending liberal supplies at times, where, from 
weather or other causes, they are, or are likely to be high. This requires boih judgment and capital, for 
the needy grower must sell at any price. 

7463. Orchard-gardens. These are distinguished from the parterre or field orchards, 
in being cultivated with the spade, and cropped like a market-garden ; indeed, they are 
so much allied to market-gardens, as hardly to require any separate discussion. In 
general, several kinds of fruit-trees are cultivated together, as tree-fruits, shrub-fruits, 
and herbaceous fruits ; but some spots, from the soil, and probably superior culture, are 
noted for particular kinds of fruit, as Twickenliam and Roslin, for strawberries ; Maid- 
stone, for filberts and cherries ; Pershore for currants, &c. An account of the Isleworth 
mode of growing strawberries has been given in the Horticultural Tra}isactio7iS by Keens, 
an eminent grower of fruits and culinary- vegetables. The filberts are planted in rows 
alternately with rows of chen-y-trees ; and, as temporaiy crops, a row of gooseberries, 
currants, or raspberries, are planted in each interval. Currants are grown extensively 
round Pershore, and the fruit sold to the manufacturers of British wines. They are also 
grown in Kent and Essex in rows eight feet asunder, and four feet from tree to tree. 
Early in spring the ground is dug, and sown v.ith spinage ; to that succeed potatoes, 
and to those cabbages, which last are gathered as coleworts before winter : four crops, 
including the fruit, are obtained in one season. 

7464. Herb and phi/sic gardens. Tliese are of limited number and extent, and gene- 
rally occupied along with market or seed gardens. There are one or two for peppermint 
and a few other herbs, near Edinburgh, and the rest are in the vicinity of the metropolis, 
and chiefly at JNIitcham in Surrey. Peppennint is a principal crop, which requires a 
moist soft soil, and to be taken up and replanted every three or four years. Lavender is 
grown to a considerable extent on lean soil, as is chamomile, wormwood, rosemarj', 
thyme, &c. Licorice and rhubarb require a deep free soil ; roses, ^vhich are grown in 
large quantities for their flowers, require a rich soil ; white lilies and colchicum, grown 
for their bulbs, require a new soil. In one or two gardens near the metropolis, many 
species of herbs are gro%vn to gratify the demand of certain classes of medical men, of 
self-doctors, and of quacks and irregular practitioners. Formerly there were many gar- 
dens of this sort ; apothecaries generally grew a great part of their own herbs, and col- 
lected the rest in the fields ; and hence the reason why so many of them formerly were 
eminent as botanists ; but at present the only remarkable herb-garden is that of Messrs. 
Dicksons and Anderson at Croydon. These herbalists and seedsmen have constantly 
on sale, at their long established and respectable shop in Covent-garden, upwards of 500 
species, including all the varieties mentioned by Culpepper and other herbalists of the 1 7th 
century. There are still one or two herb-shops wliich collect their simples in a wild 
state ; but land is now so generally cultivated, that even if tliere were a demand for 
native herbs, this mode would not be very successful. It may be mentioned as a curious 
fact, that in Weston's time, (say about 1750,) winter savory, chamomile, pennyroyal, 
peppermint, &c. were grown in the common fields near London, where cattle were 
turned out all the winter ; the scent of these herbs being so disagreeable to these animals 
as to cause them to avoid them, (jrestons Tracts, Sec. 71.) All herbs should be 
gathered dry, and in sunshine after dry weather ; they should be diied in the shade, and 
when perfectly di-ied, pressed close by a press or weights, and enclosed in paper. The 
packets should then be deposited in a dry place, and when opened for use always carefully 
shut afterwards. The practice of hanging up herbs in loose bundles, tends to dry them 
too much and dissipate their flavor. 

7465. Market Jloiver-gardens. Tliese are devoted to tlie culture of flowers for sale 
when in blossom ; either cut as nosegays, or in pots. They ai-e chiefly to be found in 
the neighborhood of the metropolis, where a sort of division of objects exists among 
them. Some gai'dens are noted for their roses ; others, as that of D. Carter at Fulham, 
for growing the narcissus tribe ; Colville in the King's Road, for geraniums ; Henderson 
at Paddington, for cheap heaths ; tlie Bedford nursery for mignonette ; and Smith, at 
Dalston, for forced flowers of all sorts. These gardens are not large ; generally from 
one to a dozen of acres, and they ai-e occupied by gardeners who have been brought up to 
this department of their profession. The standard articles of cultivation ai-e roses, espe- 
cially the moss-rose for nosegays ; the montlilyrose is also much grown in pots for spring 
and autumn sale. The sweetbriar is in demand for its odor ; honeysuckles, lilacs, 
mezereons, rhododendrons, azaleas, spiraeas, double and scarlet- blossomed jasmines, 
laburnums, rose-acacias, aie in great repute, especially when forced. All sorts , 
of evergreens, as pines, firs, laurels, c\-presses, arbor-vitees, hollies, yews, and above all, 
laurustinus and box, are much in demand for decorating balconies, flat roofs, areas, 
courts, lobbies, &c. Potted fruit-trees in bearing have generally a ready sale, and espe- 
cially the grape and peach. 



Book I. 



COMMERCIAL GARDENS. 



1055 



The common jlowers for nosegays are snowdrops, anemones, 
narcissi, hyacinths, ranunculuses, tulips, liliums, auriculas, 
polyanthuses, carnations, pinks, sweetwilliams, sweetpeas, 
wallflowers, many other border-flowers, and most of the 
biennial and annual kinds. 

The jlowcrs jjrvlonged hi duration In/ being placed under glass 
before frost approaches, being in pots, are mignonette, 
stocks of all the sorts, nasturtiums, veronicas, violets, gen- 
tians, monthly roses, laurustinus, clematis, dahlia, and chry- 
santhemum. 

The forced flowers are chiefly the pink tribe, violets, wall- 
flowers, ten-week stocks, common stocks, hyacinths, crocuses. 



narcissi, tulips, tuberoses, irises, rose-campions, sweet- 
peas, lupins, roses, lilacs, sweetbriars, mezereons, &c. 
The exotics 'in most common demand are myrtles, geraniums, 
hydrangeas, heaths, camellias, Chinese roses, heliotropes, 
fuchsias, &c. 

The Jlorrering plants generally kept in pots are auriculas, 
polyanthuses, pinks, carnations, violets, foxgloves, vero- 
nicas, dahlias, chrysanthemums, j)hloxes, and saxifragas of 
sorts, most of the bulbs and many of the annuals and biennials. 

The Jlowers hlorvn in tmter -glasses are the hyacinth and nar- 
cissus chiefly, and also the crocus, tulip, amaryllis, colchi- 
cum, iris, &c. 



7466. Of mignonette, perhaps more pots are sold in and near the metropolis than of any- 
other potted plant whatever; fifty years ago it was hardly known. Next to mignonette 
may be named stocks, pinks, sweetpeas and wallflowers, among the hardy plants ; 
hyacinths, among the bulbs ; and geraniums and myrtles, among the exotics. Some 
years ago heaths and camellias were chiefly in repute ; these being found difficult to 
keep in living-rooms, the public taste has changed, and the flower-grower varies his pro- 
ducts accordingly. All these, and other sorts of plants in pots, are also lent out by the 
market-florist, to decorate private or public rooms on extraordinary occasions, but espe- 
cially for those midnight assemblages called routs. This is the most lucrative part of 
the grower's business, who generally receives half the value of the plants lent out, as 
many of them, and generally those of most value, are so injured by the heat as never to 
recover. 

7467. Florists' gardens are devoted to the culture of florists' or select flowers for the 
sale of the plants and roots. There are not many exclusively devoted to this branch, ex- 
cepting near Manchester and the metropolis. Those near Manchester, Paisley, and 
most other provincial towns are generally on a small scale, and cultivated by men who 
have auxiliary resources of livelihood ; but near London are some extensive concerns of 
this sort, particularly those of Milliken and Curtis of Walworth; Davy of the King's 
Road; Mackie of Clapton, &c. ; the first is celebrated for tulips and most bulbs; the 
second for pinks and carnation ; the last for auriculas. This is one of the most delicate 
and difficult branches of gardening, and is only successfully pursued by such as devote 
their exclusive attention to it. The great difficulty is to preserve fine varieties, and keep 
them from degenerating or sporting ; many gardeners, excellent propagators and culti- 
vators of hot-house and green-house plants, find it a very difficult task to grow a fine 
auricula or carnation ; and their flowers would cut but a poor figure at the florists' shows, 
either near London or in the country. Much depends on the soil, which requires to be 
rich and well mellowed by time. It is also the most precarious branch of commercial 
gardening as a means of subsistence, since the purchasers are not so much the wealthy 
mercantile class who possess villas, or the independent country gentlemen, in whose gar- 
dens fine florists' flowers are seldom seen, as the tradesman and middling class. The 
income of these being temporary, that is, depending in a great measure on personal ex- 
ertion, and the current demand for their produce is, of course, easily aflTected by political 
changes, which make little diflPerence to the man whose income arises from a fixed 
capital. 

7468. Nursery-gardens, (733 5.) In these are propagated and reared all sorts of trees 
and shrubs, and all other herbaceous plants in general demand : the culture of florists' 
flowers is often combined to a certain extent, and the dealing in seeds imported, bulbous 
roots, and garden-implements and machines, is generally considered a part of the busi- 
ness. Hence the designation of nurseryman, seedsman, and florist, formerly, and still, 
to a certain degree, common on their sign-boards. Of this class of commercial gardens, 
there is one or more in most counties of Britain, and a few in Ireland ; but the greater 
number, and by far the most important, are in the vicinity of the metropolis. Their ex- 
tent near town is limited ; some contain only an acre or two, but others occupy forty or 
fifty acres ; in the country where land is cheap, some are of double or treble that extent. 
In general they have been commenced by head gardeners, who had acquired a little capi- 
tal, and continued by their sons or successors. In country nurseries, the commoner 
hardy fruit-trees, and tree and hedge plants, are the chief products : near Edinburgh 
and the metropolis some embrace every article of nursery produce, as the Hammersmith 
nursery, unrivalled in the world ; others deal chiefly in fruit-trees, green-house plants, 
or American plants ; and some almost limit themselves to particular species, as the ca- 
mellia, erica, geranium, &c. The Scotch nurseries, and especially those of the northern 
districts, as that of Gibbs at Inverness, are famous for the raising of forest tree seedlings, 
which they send in large quantities to all parts of the three kingdoms. 

7469. The subject of nursery.culture embraces almost every part of gardening ; since no department 
requires a more general knowledge, or so much attention and practical adroitness. The essential part of 
the business is the art of propagation ; which, in some cases, as in multiplying heaths, and other Cape 
and Botany-bay plants, by cuttings, and in raising even the pine and fir tribes from S(?ed, requires very 
delicate and accurate manipulation, and constant subsequent care and attention. Even grafting, bud- 
ding, and layering, require to be carefully, skilfully, and expeditiously performed, and the future pro- 
gress of the scion, bud, or shoot, carefully watched. Next to propagating, rearing requires attention, and 
especially transplanting and pruning ; on the former depends the state of the roots, and of course the 



1056 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



fitness of the plant for removal ; and on the latter, very often, the future figure of the tree. The Dutch 
and French nurserymen are in some respects superior tradesmen to those of Britain : they generally re- 
move all plants for sale, especially the ligneous sorts, every second or third year, and continue doing this 
with fruit-trees for seven or ten years, training their heads at the same time in particular forms. The 
purchaser finds their heads already formed and bearing fruit, and with such tufts of fibrous roots that 
they suffer very little from removal Even thorn, privet, yew, and other hedge plants are trained in this 
way, and ready made hedges may be purchased by the foot or yard. {Hort. Trans. 201.) 

7470. The tnost skilful and vigilant nurseryman can seldom make Ms practice conform to his knowledge. 
Thus, many customers, from ignorance, indolence, or unforeseen circumstances, defer ordering what they 
want from their nurserymen till the last moment, which consequently prevents him from applying the 
requisite details of culture to his stock of plants and trees in the proper season. Thus the heading down 
of fruit-trees is often delayed, in deference to late purchasers, till the buds begin to push ; and to cut 
them at that time, particularly vines, apricots, and cherries, would endanger their existence, and, at all 
events, enfeeble their shoots. In this case it is necessary to wait till they have made shoots of a few 
inches, when they may be headed down not with much regard to shoots which have appeared, but more 
as they would have been cut in the proper season when nothing appeared but buds. The plant in a 
healthy, vigorous state, when so headed down to apparently dead or dormant eyes, wiU soon push, and 
regain"in a great degree, the lost time ; and, indeed, it may always be considered s'afe to rub off all shoots, 
not in desirable situations, from healthy trees, provided it be done early in the season. Trees which are 
not in full health, whether recently transplanted or not, should, in general, be left with their tops on ; 
the leaves on which will prepare nourishment to strengthen their roots, and they can be headed down 
the following season. Some persons, after the drawing season, fill up the blanks in the lines of fruit- 
trees, with stocks to be budded the same season. This may do in new and excellent soils, and where 
there is little demand for fruit-trees ; but, in general, the best way is to fill up all blanks that cannot be 
filled up with the tree kind in the proper season, with culinary vegetables, either for the kitchen or for 
seed, or with flowers to produce seed. 

7471. The follomng are leading objects of nursery-management : — 

7472. Correctness in the names given to plants and seeds of every description, and particularly to fruit- 
trees. To facilitate this, as to seeds and roots, their names should be painted on the various boxes, sacks, 
and chests in which they are kept ; and as to fruit-trees, they should be designated by numbers painted 
on wooden, or better on cast-iron, tallies. Stools and stock-plants of every description, not very generally 
known, and, if possible, the whole of those planted along the borders, whether known or liot, should 
have their systematic and English names painted on similar tallies ; and smaller herbaceous plants in pots, 
and all exotics in pots, excepting such as come under the head of fruit-trees or plants, as vines, pines, &c. 
should be named on small wooden tallies, written with a black-lead pencil on white-lead newly rubbed on. 
Seton's number-stick {fig. 161.) is by far the best fbr temporary numbers to fruit-trees, or for numbering 
sown seeds or small plants. Some employ leaden, iron, or copper tallies, painted, but these are too con- 
spicuous, and require tea much labor in the preparation for a nursery. It appears to us, that, to prevent 
the chance of substituting one sort of fruit-tree for another, either by accident or design, the following 
mode might be adopted : le't a catalogue of fruit-trees be printed by the nurseryman, and let it contain 
against each name the number placed against the plant in the nursery ; then every autumn before the 
drawing season commences, let a person with steel types of the numerals, and a marking-iron with the 
initials of the nurseryman, go through the rows of fruit-trees and beginning at No. 1., say of apples, 
put type 1. in a proper socket prepared in the marking-iron, and mark each tree fit to move, a few inches 
above the graft; let him next do the same with No. 2., having changed the t>-pe ; and so on with the 
apples and all other fruit-trees, not excepting the peach. This would not sui)ersede the use of parch- 
ment labels to plants sold, but it would afford both to the nurseryTuan and the public who purchased 
his catalogue and his trees, a certain means of detecting error ; as, should the label drop off in the hurry 
of carrying the trees to the packing-court, or in unpacking when arrived at their final destination, tlie 
number on the bark and the published catalogue could readily be referred to. If performed with a 
small sharj) instrument, this practice could do no harm to the tree. 

7473. Punctuality, accuracy, and despatch, in executing all orders. 

7474. Rather procuring or omitting an article than sending off a bad one, unless under peculiar cir- 
cumstances, to be explained to the partj'. 

7475. Careful packing, and such as suits the sort of articles, the season, the distance, or the climate 
to which they are to be sent, mode of carriage, &c. 

7476. Keeping aw e.mct account of men's time, and being particular in mustering them every morning 
before the hours of commencing work, and. again at the hours of rest and refreshment. This may be 
greatly facilitated by causing thein all to enter and go out at the same gate, which ought to be that at 
the counting-house ; and a bell or horn should call them to or from work. 

7477. Keeping a vigilant eye to the men while at work, especially with strangers, till you have proved 
to them that vou know what they can do by day or hour, by fair labor. 

7478. Having one principal foreman or partner for the whole, and sub-foreman for the exotic, Ameri- 
can, herbaceous, general nursery, and seed departments. 

7479. Having a proper person employed as a travelkr ; or yourself or partner taking that department. 

7480. Acting on all occasions with the utmost impartiality between gentlemen and their gardeners, 
leaning rather to the latter, in all doubtful cases, as the weaker party, according to the common consent 
and practice of all mankind. 

7481. Paying all workmen, and, at all events your foremen, such wages for their labor as may not 
tempt them either to idleness or pilfering themselves, or to countenance these practices in others. 

7482. Pablisliing a printed catalogue on a scientific principle, of every article you have, or intend to 
have, for sale, with the names, sj-nonnns, some description of the fruits, and reference to a figure of the 
plant or fruit in some generally known work ; and placing, as above obser^^ed (7472.), the same num. 
ber opposite the names of your fruit-trees in the catalogue, as is actually placed against them on cast- 
iron tallies in the nursery, and annually in autumn, before the drawing season, impressed on all of them 
fit for sale, with a marking-iron and types. 

7483. Attending at all times and seasons ; and in every part of the nursery to frugality (avoiding mean- 
ness) and neatness, keeping every where a vigilant eye, and always being beforehand rather than be- 
hind, with the different operations of cultivation. Much of neatness depends on the master's insisting 
that every workman shall clean up and finish as completely as practicable, every operation as he goes 
along. Having taken up a tree or a plant, he ought never to forget to level up the hole ; having pruned 
one, he ought at the same time to pick up the shoots, or if in a course of pruning, he should have a boy 
or woman going after him to do so, or, at all events, they ought to be picked up the same day. A cor- 
responding attention to order and neatness is requisite in every other operation ; and this attention once 
beccme a habit, will be found a saving of labor, and a source of profit as well as of pleasure. 

7484. The vwnagement of the seed (Iqmrtment is comparatively simple. The chief 
difficulty for seedsmen who are beginners, and at a distance from the metropolis, is the 
ordering the proper quantities of each seed from the growers or wholesale dealers. The 
guides to this are the proportions of the different crops usually grown in private gar- 
dens, and the wants of the class who are likely to become purchasers. The same diffi- 



Book 1. 



PUBLIC GARDENS. 



1057 



culty occurs in beginning almost every business, and is only to be ovei-come by experience. 
The different periods to which different seeds retain their vegetative powders require to be 
known by seedsmen, as well that they may not furnish lifeless seeds to their customers, 
as that they may not throw away as useless such as are possessed of the vital principle* 
Though few seeds are kept by respectable seedsmen above a year, yet in cases where a 
partial failure has taken place in the seed crop, most sorts will grow the second year after 
that in which they have ripened. Some, however, will keep from two to five or ten or 
more years ; and others for an unknown length of time. 

7485. The latest periods at which the seeds most generally in demand may he expected to 
grow freely are the following : — 



Cabbage tribe. Four years. 

Leguminous culinary vegetables. One year. 

Esculent roots. Beet, ten years. Turnip, four years. Carrot, 
one year. Parsnep, one year. Radish, two years. Salsify, 
two years. Skirret, four years. Scorzonera, two years. 

Spinnceous plants. Spinage, four years. White beet, ten 
years. Orache, one year. Purslane, two years. Herb- 

' patience, one year. 

Alliaceous plants. Two years. 

Asparaginous plants. Asparagus, four years. Sea-kale, three 
years. Artichoke, three years. Cardoon, ^two years. Ram- 

' pion, two years. Alisanders, and the thistles, two years. 

Acetarious plants, in general two years. Lettuce, three 
years. Endive, four years. Burnet, six years. Mustard, 
four years. Tarragon, four years. Sorrel, seven years. Celery, 
ten years. 

Pot-herbs and garnishing plants, in general two years; but 



Parsley will grow at six years. Dill and Fennel, five years. 
Chervil, six years. Marigold, three years. Borage, four 
years. 

Sweet herbs, generally two years; but Rue and Rosemarj-, 
three years ; and Hys 
•its used in tarts, 

ily one year ; and Gourd, Pompion, itc. ten years. 
Herbaceous fruits. The Cucumber and Melon, ten or more 
years. Love-apple, Capsicum tribe, and Egg-plant, two years. 
Annual and biennial Jtorver-seeds, generally two years ; but 
some grow with difficulty the second year : they are sel- 
dom kept by seedsmen longer than one year. 
Perennial Jlorver-seeds, the same. 

Tree-seeds. Stones, two years ; and some, as the Haw, three ; 
but they are in general of very doubtful success the second 
year. Acoms will scarcely grow the second year; Elm, 
Poplar, and Willow seeds, not at all. 



7486. ^11 seeds ought to be kept dry, and the air as much as possible excluded ; but those 
liable to be attacked by insects, as the pea, bean, turnip, radish, &:c. should be occasionally 
exposed to air and friction, by being passed through a winnowing machine. (Jig. 283. ) The 
more rare seeds should be kept in their pods till the season for using. Seeds received 
from foreign countries should, in general, be sown as soon as possible after their arrival. 
In packing seeds for the home demand, no particular process is requisite ; but in sending 
seeds to America or the East Indies, the sorts which soon lose their vitality should be 
enveloped in clay, tallow, or wax, or put up in bottles rendered air and water tight. (23 11.) 

7487. Bulbous roots, with the exception of the anemone and ranunculus, can only be 
kept out of ground a few months with propriety, though some are often found in the 
seed-shops as late as May. When thoroughly dry they may be kept in bags or boxes, 
and the more delicate sorts wrapt up in papers separately. Ranunculus and anemone 
roots retain their vegetative powers two, and sometimes three years. 

7488. The English seed-growers and seed-collectors furnish the greater part of culinary, 
flower, and indigenous tree-seeds sold in the shops, but a part also are obtained from 
other countries ; as of onion-seed from Genoa ; anise, basil, &c. from the south of 
France ; carrot, onion, and a variety of seeds, when the English crop fails, from Holland. 
The hardier bulbs, as crocus, daffodil, &c, are for the most part grown in England : the 
other hardy sorts are obtained from Guernsey, as the Guernsey lily ; the Cape of Good 
Hope, as ixia, gladiolus, &c. ; from South America, as the tuberose ; or China, as the 
Japan lily, &:c. The seeds of tender exotic trees and shrubs are obtained from the seed- 
collectors at the Cape, New Holland, and other foreign settlements j and of others from 
North America. 

7489. The recommendation of head gardeners forms an important part of a nurseryman's 
duty and care, and one in which he may render essential services to horticulture. He 
ought to select such as are well qualified for what they undertake, and consider himself 
as in some degree responsible for the conduct of the person recommended. In addition 
to this, the nurseryman, in the yearly tour he generally makes among his country cus- 
tomers to receive payments and take orders, should observe whether the person i-ecom- 
mended has acted according to his expectations, and should exhort, reprove, or approve, 
accordingly. The nurseryman, while on this tour, by seeing a number of gardens and 
gardeners, must, by comparison, be well able to judge of their merits ; and by judiciously 
dealing out approbation or blame, might do much good. The good gardener, who had 
become slovenly, from not seeing other gardens, or from the indifference of his employer, 
might thus be recalled to his duty, and the art not suffered to be disgraced by his prac- 
tice. This is also the time for gentlemen to state to nurserymen the faults they have to 
find with their gardeners, so that they, by their advice, may endeavor to correct them. 
The nurseryman who has recommended a gardener, is the only person who can act as a 
mediator between this gardener and his employer ; and we repeat, that by the judicious 
interference of well informed and experienced nurserymen, much good might be done ; 
gardens kept in better order, and gardeners improved and retained, instead of being 
removed from their situations without being properly informed of their errors, and a 
proper opportunity afforded them of amendment. 

Sect. III. Public Gardens. 

7490. There are very few public gardens in Britain ; and we can only refer to the 
enclosed areas of the public squares and parks of the metropolis and principal cities, to 

3 Y 



1058 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



the botanic gardens of the universities and other public bodies, and to the gardens of 
the two horticultural societies. 

7491. The public squares are generally kept in order by jobbing gardeners at a certain 
rate by the year. Tlie principal part of their business consists in keeping the grass 
short, by mowing once a fortnight in summer, and rather seldomer in spring and 
autumn j in keeping the gravel clean, and keeping up a display of flowers in the dug 
groups. 

7492. The j^ublic parks and other equestrian promenades are mostly managed by 
officers appointed by government ; being once formed, and the trees grown up, they 
require little annual expense. The Mary-le-bonne or Regent's Park is in ptu-t let as a 
nursery-ground, and, instead of a rent, the occupier is bound to plant a certain number 
of ti-ees the first year of his lease, to nurse up these, and leave a certain number of them 
on each acre at the end of his lease. A considerable part of this park is also, as already 
mentioned, let to private persons for the pvirpose of erecting villas, M-hich, though it will 
control the rambles of the pedestrian, will give and maintain a woody appearance, 
without any expense to the public. 

7493. The botauic gardens of the universities are under the general direction of the 
professor of botany, and managed by a head gardener or curator : those, founded by 
subscribers, or a society, as the gardens of Liverpool, Hull, Glasgow, and Dublin, are 
under the direction of a committee, and similarly managed. The duties common to 
curators are the keeping up and increasing the collection of plants ; those who manage 
university-gardens, have, in addition, to furnish specimens of certain plants in sufficient 
numbers for the use of the professor and students. In some cases, the curator is required 
to instruct students ; and in others, he is permitted to do this, and to take pupils or ap- 
prentices for his own emolument. Most gardens exchange, and some, as that of Liver- 
pool, sell plants and seeds. 

7494. On the cultivation of botanic gardens we shall offer onlj' a few general hints. Instead of the prin - 
ciple of rotation, is hei^e substituted that of a renewal, partial or wholly, of the soil. On shallow soils it is 
to "be effected by removal of the wliole, or a proportion of the old soil, 'and the introduction, and thorough 
mixture of a proportionate quantity of good virgin loam, or of virgin peat, bog, or sand, according to the 
plot or border to be renewed. In rock-works, and bogs, American grounds, and in most of what may be 
called particular habitats, there is no other way ; but in the plots which contain the general arrange- 
ments, deep trenching may partially or wliolly supply its place. 

7495. Manure cannot altogether be dispensed with in botanic gardens, particularly for some or most of 
the vegetables which will be included under the culinary, agricultural, and flower-garden departments ; 
but, in general, decayed leaves is the best manure for all other plants and trees, not in a state of mon- 
strosity or otherwise changed by cultivation. 

7496. Shelterinix and shading are parts of culture which demand very considerable attention in botanic 
gardens, especially in warm climates. Delicate plants which require a moist atmosplvere, as some alpines 
and Americans, require to be closely covered with a hand-glass, and this again partially with a wicker case 
during the whole summer, even if under the shade of a wall or hedge. 

7497. In sowing, and causing to vegetate, seeds which have been brought from a distance, a good deal 
of skill is often requisite. Sowing in very fine earth in pots, covering them with a bell, and placing them 
in the shade and in moist heat, is the most likely mode to succeed, whatever climate the seeds may have 
been sent from. To this, some add previous steeping of the seed in pure water, and in water impregnated 
with oxygenated muriatic acid. Others water with water impregnated with this acid or with its gas; 
some charge the earth of the pot with the gas, and others invert a bell-glass over it, containing an at- 
mosphere partlv or wholly composed of the gas. (See Hill, in Hort. Trans, vol. i. 233.) All these modes, 
and others suggested by vegetable chemistry, may be tried ; but where the vital principle is not extinct, 
the first mode will generally be found sufticient. Numerous annual and biennial seeds require to be 
sown every year, independently of seeds of new sorts from foreign countries. For collections of these in 
beds or in a general arrangement, the moAe of sowing in rows across the bed, is obviously the best ; and 
sr-eral rows radiating from a polygonal tally in the centre, is the most economical, as admitting of the 
greatest number of sorts in the least space. 

7498. With respect to management, there are various duties belonging to the office 
of curator of a public botanic garden which are peculiar to the situation ; some of which 
we shall briefly enumerate. 

7499. Gathering and drying specimens to maintain the herbarium, and to exchange or give away ; fre- 
quently inspecting the herbarium to guard against damp and moths ; collecting and preserving seeds of 
everv kind for the purposes of exchange. 

7501). Collecting wild plants, and seeking for new species in proper situations ; in unfrequented haunts 
for herbaceous plants ; in haunts much frequented by birds, for trees ; in bays, and sheltered creeks, and 
shores, for aquatics ; in rockv shores for marine plants; among the tops of snow-clad mouirtains in win- 
ter, for mosses ; in old forests in winter for lichens, and in spring for fungi, and so on. 

7501. Acclimating plants, by raising them from seeds, one generation after another, till the final progeny 
will endure the open air throughout the year. Dr. Walker (^Essays) states how the passiflora c?erulca 
was acclimated in Scotland, merely by time, without propagation from seed. Sir Joseph Banks (7/o?-/. 
Trans, vol. i. 21.), by sowing the seeds of succeeding generations of the zizania aquatica from 1791 to 1804, 
" proved that an annual plant scarce able to endure the ungenial summers of England, became, in four- 
teen generations, as strong and as vigorous as our indigenous plants are, and as perfect in all its parts 
as in our native climate." Next to the ordinary duties of a botanic curator, this appears to us much the 
most imoortant of the services he can render the horticulture and agriculture of his countrj-. 

7502. Distributing seeds, cuttings, and plants of all sorts, among all who are liliely to keep them, and 
set a due value on "them, but to none else.' The illiberality of the administrators of some gardens, in this 
respect, has been much and deservedly blamed. The surest mode of preserving a plant in the country is, 
to render it as common as possible ; and the easiest mode of effecting this is, to distribute a few specimens 
among the nurserymen. From an opposite conduct, many of the plants introduced at Kew, and described 
in the Hortiis Keweiisis, are not to be found in the Kew garden : and, thus, never having been dis- 
tributed, are lost to the countrj'. The policy of this garden, for a number of years past, is considered as 
IT; Illy reprehensible : being supported by tlie public, it ought to have been devoted to its service. 



Book I. 



PUBLIC GARDENS. 



10.59 



7503. Giving the name and history of plants to all eager enquirers, in order to encourage a desire of 
botanical knowledge : to induce a taste for botany and the vegetable kingdom, by pointing out striking 
peculiarities of plants to superficial observers, in order to attract their attention ; trying to point out 
things which may assimilate with the taste or foible of the person addressed ; recollecting that sexual 
matters and matters bordering on the marvellous, are the most generally attractive to volatile or vacant 
min^ : in this way " becoming all things to all men, in order, by all means, to gain some." 

7504. Disseimnating and disposing seeds and plants of scarce natives, or of foreign sorts not yet na- 
turalised, by placing them in their proper soils and habitats. Thus, when the aquatic plants are reduced, 
throw the parts taken from rare ones, into an adjoining ditch, lake, canal or river ; scatter the seeds, and 
plant the roots of wood-plants in plantations ; arenarious plants on sandy soils or shores, and so on. 
Curator Anderson of the'Chelsea garden scatters all his spare seeds on Battersea, Clapham, and Wandsworth 
commons, and throws his spare aquatics into the Thames. The consequence is, that though only a few 
years practised, some rather scarce plants seem already naturalised in these places. Dickson, an enthusi- 
astic botanist, naturalised that beautiful plant, the fresh-water soldier, in the ponds about Croydon ; as 
we have done the same plant, and several others, in the Serpentine canal in Hyde Park. Salisbury, one 
of the first botanists of the age, and equally eminent as a horticulturist, thinking he could naturalise 
on our sandy shores the pancratium maritimum, planted a bulb in the Isle of Wight, among chehdonium 
corniculatum, and eryngium maritimum, with which he saw it growing wild below Montpelier {Hort. 
Trans, vol. i. Ml.) ; " and when at school, in the neighborhood of Halifax, in 1769, he was flogged in the 
Whitsuntide holidays, for helping to propagate the narcissus triandrus, and for running out of bounds to 
know the name of it at North Bierly." 

7505. A catalogue of every botanic garden should be printed for exchange, distri- 
bution, or sale. Very complete gardens, such as those of Kew, Cambridge, and 
Liverpool, find it answ^er to publish printed catalogues, with a view to remuneration by 
sale ; but the legitimate object of a botanic-garden catalogue is, to exchange it with that 
of other botanic gardens, foreign and domestic ; in order, that by comparison of riches, 
exchange may be made for mutual advantage. For this purpose, it seems desirable, 
that every thriving establishment should print or prepare a catalogue once a-year, or 
once every two or three years. To facilitate this, it might be printed by the lithographic 
process, from a list written in a small hand on prepared paper. By printing only the 
botanic names, each sheet M'ould contain nearly four thousand names, and consequently 
three sheets, all the plants, native or introduced into Britain. This might be produced 
stitched together, all expenses included, for a trifle ; and as the present law respecting 
letters stands, might be franked in separate sheets. Thus a cheap communication be- 
tween British botanic gardens might be formed, and tlirough our foreign ambassadors, 
these catalogues might be distributed all over the world. 

7506. A catalogue may be formed of figures, where it is not convenient to form one of 
printed names. Thus the possessed or desired plants might be indicated by putting down 
the numbers placed against the names of the plants in some generally circulated botanical 
catalogue. If, in the excellent catalogue of Sweet, the genera had been numbered as 
in the synopsis of Persoon, it would have been the best ; in the mean time, Persoon's 
work, as it is in the hands of most botanists, foreign and domestic, may be referred to ; 
and as an example of the brevity of this kind of catalogue or reference, let us suppose 
one curator wishes to write to another for Varronia crenata, lineata, bullata, and globosa ; 
all he has to do is to write for Per. (^Persoon), 371 . (the number of the genus), and 1 . 4. 
(tiie numbers of the species desired), and similarly as to all the plants described in 
Persoon's Synojisis. Ten thousand plants would in this way be represented by about 
11,500 figures, which might occupy one sheet of letter-paper. But our Encyclopaedia 
cf Plants, and catalogue entitled Hortus Britanniciis, are numbered in such a way as to 
render communication more facile than any mode of using Persoon, or any other spe- 
cies plantarum or catalogue whatever. 

7507. The gardens of the horticultural societies, being at present in a state of embryo, 
do not admit of description. The published plan of that of the London Society {Report 
on the Formation of a Garden, &c. 1823), appears to us most defective in general arrange- 
ment. It is in part executed ; and if completed according to that plan, there vi^ill be, 
as we think, a want of grandeur and unity of effect as a whole, and of connection and 
convenience in the parts. One obvious error that must strike every one tliat has had 
no part in making it, is, the forming the arboretum in a large rectilinear clump ; and 
another is scattering the hot-houses and other buildings here and there over the garden. 
There should, in our opinion, have been three grand parts : a centre for all the buildings 
of every description, with the exception of entrance-lodges and resting-seats, or shelters, 
&c. ; a circumference, displaying the arboretum, fruticetum , and ornamental flowers ; 
and the intermediate space laid out as culinary, dessert, floricultural, experimental, na- 
turalisation, and nursery gardens. Tlie hot-houses requisite for these different depart- 
ments might easily have been arranged so as to be included in each of them, and yet 
forming with the other buildings a whole or connected chain round the central area, and 
these might have been all heated from the same steam apparatus, and the sheds and 
other parts and buildings lighted, if desired, by gas. The grand entrance should have 
presented three carriage-roads : one to the centre, to which visitors could drive and inspect 
the hot-houses of all the departments, and just take a coup d''a:il of the open gardens be- 
longing to them ; the two others proceeding to the right and left, and forming a circum- 
ferential one, along which visitors might drive round the whole arboretum or shrubbery, 
and enter if they chose by six or eight communications, at different distances, the six or 

3 Y 2 



1060 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



eight different open gardens. This is but a first rough sketch of what might have been, 
but such as it is we leave it as our protest against the present plan, from the details of 
which the reader will judge for himself; 

750*8. The London Horticultural Society'' s garden contains 33 acres, of which 17|are 



devoted to horticulture (A), 
roads, yards, &c. (C). 



133 to floriculture and arboriculture (B), and 1| to lodges. 




The fruit anH kilchm department (A) contains — 
Eastern slip for herbs, perennial esculents, and strawberries. 

and border of east wall, A 1 
Orchard, A 2 

Southern slip for strawberries, gooseberries, currant^ and rasp- 
berries, and borders of south wall, A 3 
Kitchen-garden, A 4 

Miscellaneous standard fruit compartment, A 5 
Site for fruit glass, A 6 
Pits and forcing gi ound, A 7 
Garden for small ftuits, A 8 

Western slips for stocks, and fruit-wall border, A 9 
Experimental garden, A 10. 

The ornamental department (B) contains — 
Entrance to flower-garden, B 1 
Flower-garden, B 2 

7509. The garden of the Caledonian Horticultural Society is not yet in a state to be 
discussed. 



Sito fnr oma ->ental g'ass, B 3 
Arboretum, B 4 
Rose-garden, B 5 
Experimental garden, B 6 

The lodges, roads, and yards (C) are — 
Entrance from London, and ornamental gardener's proposed 
lodge, C 1 

Assistant secretarv's proposed lodge, C 2 

Space unoccupied" at S.E. angle, C 3 

Private road outside of the fence on the south, C 4 

Kitchen-garden proposed lodge, C 3 

Space unoccupied at S.A\'- angle, C 6 

Yards for stables, sheds, composts, &c., C 7 

Private road to Tumham-green, C 8 

Entrance bv the National School from Tumham green, C 9. 



Chap. III. 

Topograpldcal Survey of the British Isles, in respect to Gardening. 
7510. The British isles are naturally and politically more favorable to the practice of hor- 
ticulture in all its branches than any other country ; in no country is so great a proportion 
of the surface covered with gardens, including, under this term, the parks or landscape- 
gardens, which surround gentlemen's seats. The beauty and magnificence of these parks, 
and the villas, mansions, castles, and palaces, of which they are the appendages, far sur- 
pass what is to be met with in any other part of the world. The palaces and scenery of 
Italy are more interesting to artists and classical antiquaries, from the particular associ- 
ations necessarily connected with their pursuits ; but the views of an accomplished and 
well regulated mind will extend to other kinds of excellence, as well as those of pictur- 
esque or classic beautj' ; and a man that knows to what extent civilisation and refinement 
are earned in different parts of the world, will look into the interior of these casinos and 
palaces, their gardens and farms, and enquire to what extent they would contribute, in 
their propriety, salubrity, furniture, produce, and management, to the gratification of the 
wants of an Englishman in his present state of refinement. In these particulars he will 
find them so very deficient, as to admit of no sort of comparison with those of Britain, 



Book I. 



GARDENS AND COUNTRY-RESIDENCES. 



1061 



7511. Of state of gardening in each of the different counties of the United Kingdom^ 
the following notices are necessarily imperfect to a certain extent ; from defective inform- 
ation some things are omitted, and erroneous statements may exist as to others. In the 
selection of the names of the principal country-residences, some are undoubtedly admitted 
which may not have that claim, in comparison to others which are excluded ; and others, 
though they once had that claim, may now have it no longer, from neglect, change of owner- 
ship, or even destruction as a countiy-seat. Most of the descriptive hints, added after the 
names of country-residences, refer to the state they were in some years ago, some as far back 
as 1805 ; and the changes in the names of the possessors that may have taken place since 
that time must no doubt be the cause of various errors, though we have spared no pains 
to avoid them. The descriptive epithets, added to the names of places in the southern 
kingdom, are taken generally from the Beauties cf England and Wales (London, 26 vols. 
8vo. published from 1801 to 1815) ; those of Scotland from the beauties of that country 
(5 vols. 8vo. Edin. published from 1802 to 1809); and those of Ireland from The 
Traveller s Guide (1 vol. 8vo. Dublin, 1819), and from the information of a correspondent 
there, well acquainted with every part of that country. We have visited all the counties 
of Britain ourselves in 1804, 5, and 6, and since been professionally engaged in several 
of them ; and we have also made a general tour of Ireland in 1811. When any remarks 
occur which are not found in the ])ooks referred to, they may, for the most part, be con- 
sidered as the result of our own observation at these periods or since. From the limited 
space that we can devote to this part of the work, these remarks are necessarily very few ; 
we have omitted stating any thing as to the indigenous plants ; and said very little as to 
the natural woods or artificial plantations of each county. All the seats which are of 
established celebrity, and are, or were, what are called show-places, are distinguished by 
a cross ( x ) : of most of these places accounts have been published in the local guides, sold 
in country-towns. 

Sect. I. Gardens and Country-Residences of England. 

7512. The surface of England is estimated at 32, 150,000 acres, almost everywhere 
cultivated, and nowhere incapable of cultivation ; in most places varied — gently and 
beautifully in some districts, and abruptly and on a grander scale in others. The most 
hilly and mountainous districts are those of the north, and the most level those of the 
east. The most humid climates are those of the western and northern counties, as Lan- 
cashire and Cheshire ; and the most dry those of the east and south, as Norfolk and 
Sussex. The richest soils, and those in which gardening, as an art of culture, and as a 
trade, has been carried to the greatest perfection, are those round the metropolis ; there, 
within the circuit of ten miles, it is estimated (Lt/sons Environs of London, pub- 
lished 1792 to 1796), 500 acres are employed in raising culinary vegetables ; 800 acres 
covered with fruit-trees and shrubs ; 300 acres in medicinal herbs ; 500 as nursery and 
florists' gardens ; besides not fewer than ] 200 acres employed by farming gardeners in 
growing potatoes for the market; and 1200 occupied with turnips, cabbages, parsneps, 
and white beet for milch-cows. Gardening, as an art of design and taste, may be con- 
sidered as nearly equally advanced in almost all the counties. Some of the most highly 
kept gardens and country-residences are in Middlesex and Surrey ; of the most extensive 
and magnificent in Oxfordshire, Yorkshire, Nottinghamshire, and Devonshire. The best 
examples of cottagers' and farmers' gardens are in Essex, Kent, Norfolk, and Lanca- 
shire;, the seed -gardens are chiefly in Essex and Kent ; orchards in Herefordshire, War- 
wickshire, and Devonshire ; and market-gardens and nurseries are distributed according 
to the extent and population of the different counties. These counties are forty in num- 
ber, and we shall take them in the order of the circuits made by the judges, being that 
in which their names are most generally associated in our memories, and that also in 
which they are not unaptly classed in regard to beauty and character. 

7513. MIDDLESEX, occupies the north side of a vale watered by the Thames, and containing 179,200 
acres, of which one part is clayey and another marshy, but the greater part productive. As containing the 
metropolis, it may be considered the richest county in the United Kingdom as to culinary and flower 
gardening. The depot or market, where chiefly these productions are exposed for saJ.e, is Covent-garden, 
an open square, laid out with fixed temporary wooden shops and stalls. The vegetables and commoner 
fruits and flowers are brouglit in by carts and waggons three days in the week, Tuesday, Thursday, and 
Saturday, so as to arrive in the market between three and five o'clock; they are then sold by regular 
salesmen to the retailers of the market, or to green grocers, fruiterers, and stall-keepers from different 
parts of the town. In general the terms are adjusted, and the market cleared of the vehicles and horses 
by ten o'clock or earlier in the summer, no more remaining in the market than what is found by the 
different tenants to be sufficient for the local consumption. The more valuable fruits and flowers, such as 
forced strawberries, peaches, grapes, and pines, and forced roses, hyacinths, and nosegays, during winter, 
are generally sold by private contract to the fruit-shops in the market, or to others distributed in different 
parts of the town. The principal fruit-shop is that of Grange, in Piccadilly, who is the king's fruiterer ; 
the principal flower-shop that of Smith, in Covent-garden market. Besides the central market of Covent- 
garden, there are others in different parts of tlie town, as the Fleet, Newgate, Borough, &c. which re- 
ceive very considerable supplies of the leading kinds of vegetables direct from the country ; but the forced 
productions, and the more expensive fruits, are generally brought to Covent-garden, when not dispose^ 
of to the shops by private contract. 



Book I, 



GARDENS OF MIDDLESEX. 



loss 



7515. The seed-market is held twice a-week, on Mondays and Fridays, in a large roofed space in 
Mark-lane. Here the growers or holders of garden-seeds, ahd of such agricultural seeds, as are commonly 
sold by nurserymen, as clover, rye-grass, &c. attend and transact business by sample. The purchasers 
are the London retailers, or the wholesale dealers for their country customers ; nothing is there sold by 
sretaiL 

7516. The produce of the nursery-gardens is sold on the spot ; as is also that of the florists'' gardens ; the 
herb-growers sell their productions to the wholesale druggists and manufacturing chemists by samjple. 



7517. The public gardens of Middlesex are as under : 

Public Promenades The principal public promenades of 

the metropolis are the verdant areas of the squares, especially 
Finsbury, Russel, Grosvenor, and Berkeley Si^jiiares ; and the 
.public equestrian, and also walking promenades in this county, 
are the parks of St. James, the Hyde, and Mary-le-bonne. 

Bofamc Gardens The only public botanic garden is that 

of Clielsea, containing between three and four acres. The 
origin of the Chelsea garden is involved in obscurity; the 
first notice of it in the books of the Apothecaries' Society is in 
1674, when it was proposed to wall it round; and two /ears 
afterwards, in 1G76, they agreed to purchase the plants growing 
in Mrs. Gape's garden at Westminster; which garden, it is 
thought, may have been the one mentioned in Evelyn's Diarii 
for 1G.58, as "the medical garden at Westminster, well stored 
■with plants, under Morgan, a skilful botanist." Piggott is the 
name of the first curator, noticed in 1676. Watts, mentioned\ 
both by Ray and Evelyn, was an a.i)othecary by proffession, but 
undertook the care of the garden in 1G80, at 50/. per annum. 
Miller was appointed in 1722, at the time Sir Hans Sloane, 
when applied to for a renewal of the lease of the garden, 
granted it to the Society in perpetuity at a rental of 5Z. per 
•annum, and on condition that specimens of fifty new plants 
should annually be furnished to the Royal Society till the 
number amounted to two thousand. IMiller resigiied his 
situation as curator two years before his death in 1770, and was 
succeeded by Forsyth, who went to be royal gardener in Ken- 
sington in 1784, and was succeeded by Fairbairn, who died in 
the garden in 1814. His situation is now filled by Wm. 
Anderson, who has greatly enriched the garden, and con- 
tributed materially to restore its high character. It may be 
noticed as a warning te gardeners, and indeed to all of us, that 
the two first curators, Watts and Miller, are said to have 
relaxed from their activity and got careless ; and that Fairbairn 
neglected the garden for a number of years together- No 
proper catalogue of this garden has ever been published ; with 
the exception of one, of the medical plants, by Miller and 
Rand, in 1730, and another of the same kind in 1739- 

Farmers' Gardens The principal of these are in the parishes 

of Chelsea, Hammersmith, and P\ilham, to the west ; and at 
Hoxton, KingslEind, Hackney, &c. to the east of the^Metropolis. 
George Matyear of Fulham, Samuel Hut 

Kensington, Cock and Dancer of Chisv , 

Reid or Hoxton and Kingsland, have the most extensive 
ploughed gardens; the smallest exceeding a hundred acres. 
Southfield Farm, near Parson's Green, in Fulham, has been 
occupied jointly as a market-garden and a nursery for upwards 
of two centuries, and the whole of that time till the beginning 
of the present century, in the family of Rench. In this garden 
were produced the first pine-strawben-y, and the first auricula, 
by the father of the late Mr. Rench, who also instituted the 
first annual exhibition of flowers. He died at the age of ninety- 
nine years, having had thirty-three children. The late Mr. 
Rench, mentioned by P. Collinson, as famous for forest trees, 
introduced the moss-rose ; planted the elm-trees now growing 
In the Bird-cage Walk, St. James's Park, from trees reared in 
his own nursery; married two wives, and had thirty-five 
children, and died in 1783, in the same room in which he was 
born, at the age of a hundred and one years. The grounds are 
now occupied as a market-garden by Sir. Fitch, who married 
one of the daughters. 

Vcffetalde Gardens and Garden Orchards — abound in the same 
parishes. The principal are those of Grange of Hoxton, and 
Gunter of IDarl's Court, each of which contmns between sixty 
and seventy acre^, extensive forcing-hcases and pineries, and 
walls for fruit-trees. The open garden is regularly planted with 
standard fruit-trees, and is more devoted to the production of 
fruits than of culinary vegetables. The garden of Wilmot at 
Isieworth is of the same character, and nearly equally extensive ; 
and next is that of Michael Keens of the same place. The 
gardens of Brentford and.Twickenham are famous for straw- 
berries ; in those of the last parish there are about four hundred 
acres covered with this fruit. Almost the whole of the parish 
of Fulham is occupied in fruit-tr^es and vegetables. The 
gardens of the Neats' Houses in Chelsea have long been famous 
for celery and cauliflower ; water-cresses are grown in irrigated 
trenches at Bayswater and in the parish of Isieworth. 

Market Florver-Gardens For forced flowers and shrubs, the 

principal garden is that of Smith of Dalston ; for geraniums 
and green-house plants in general, Colville in the King's 
Road ; and for hardy flowers, D. Carter's of Fulham. Some of 
the nurserymen deal extensively in forced flowers, as Jenkins 
of Mary-le-bonne, Henderson of the Edgeware Road, &c. 

Fhri-its' Gardens. — Of these the principal in Middlesex is 
that of Davy in the King's Road ; then Bailey at Clapton, and 
also of the King's Road ; Moore in the ICing's Road, and 
Gome at Brentford and Hounslow. 

7518. Nurseries. The principal British nurseries 
are in this county; and as almost all the country 
nurseries are supplied with their more rare aiticles 
from them, v/e shall particularise the names of a 
few : — 

The Vinevard, — at Hammersmith, is unquestionably the first 
nursery in Britain, or rather in the world. At the begiiming 
of the last century it was a vineyard, and produced- annually 
a considerable quantity of Burgundy wine. A thatched house 
was built in the grounds; the u))per part occupied as a 
dwelling house, and for selling the wine ; and underneath 
were the wine-cellars. The ground was taken by Messrs. Lee 
and Kennetly, the fathers of the present, or late occupiers of 
that name, and continued by their sons, who dissolved partner- 
ship in 1818, and the concern is now the sole property of Lee. 

'1 his nursery owes its celiibvity, in a great measure, to the 
late .fames Jyce's knuwledge in botany, and to his publishing 
the Introduction to that v-ieiicc at a time when its principles 

3 



were not generally diffused. Lee was patronised by a great 
many of the nobiUty and gentry, for his general knowledge in 
natural history, and for his sound sense and strong under- 
standing. The nursery is now carried on by his son to greater 
extent in every department than any other nursery in Europe. 
J. Lee, jun. has four sons, whom he intends to bring up to the 
business in four separate departments: the seed, business, t/ie 
countiiig-!iouse, exotics in liouses and fruit-trees, forest trees and 
hardy jilanis. 

Besides an extensive correspondence, and a vigilant attention, 
to procure every new plant as soon as introduced by others, a 
great many plants have been introduced to the country directly 
by this establishment. Among the collectors they sent out 
for tliis purpose, may be mentioned a person collecting oaks 
and other plants in America ; another, ibr eight years, at the 
Cape of Good Hope, in partnership with the Empress Josephine, 
collecting ericas, bulbs, and other plants ; and a man in South 

The whole concern, from its first establishment to the 
present moment, has been conducted with singular spirit and 
skill ; no expense spared to procure new plants from abroad, 
and preserve and propagate them when received. The green- 
houses are extensive, and a house two hundred feet long has 
lately been erected for fruiting the different sorts of grapes, 
and another for figs. The proprietor has grounds for the com- 
moner descriptions of stoclc in different parts of the country: 
as at Bedfont for stocks for fruit-trees, and for cherries ; at 
Hounslow and Bagshot for stocks, and also for seedling fruit- 
trees, and other commoner articles, &c. 

The FttUiam Nursery — was established by Christopher Gray, 
about the beginnuig of the last century. Catesby, Collinson, 
Miller, Dr. Garden, and other eminent botanists, and travellers 
contributed many rare jjlants, and great part of Bishop 
Compton's collection was purchased by them from the bishop's 
successor. Some fine old exotics are still existing in this nur- 
sery, as the quercus suber, celtis oocidentalis, ailanthus glan- 
dulosa, diospyrus virginiana, &c. The first magnolia grandi- 
flora was planted here ; the original tree, the parent of most of 
the older trees of this kind in the country, died some years ago{ 
the dead trunk, which is still preserved, measured four feet ten 
inches in circumference; its branches extended twenty feet; 
it was as many feet high, and its fragrance perfumed the whole 
neighborhood. This nursery passed successively from Gray to 
Burchall, and from liim to Messrs. Whitley, Brames, and 
Milne, the present occupiers. 

The Brompttm Park Nursery — was founded by IMessrs. Cooke, 
Lucre, London, and Field, in 1681. In 1694, all the partners 
having died or sold out but London, he took in Henry Wise, 
who "had been an apprentice to Rose, the royal gardener, as 
London had also been. At that time the grounds exceeded 
100 acres in extent. This nursery passed successively from 
London and Wise to Sv^inhoe, Smith, and Co.— in 17.56 to 
Jeffries and Co — in 1788 to Gray, Wear, and Co. — in 1810 to 
Gray and Sons, in whose occupation it is at present. The 
grounds are now reduced to thirty acres, and the establishment 
has luiavoidably fallen off in reputation. In the time of 
London and Wise it was spoken of in terms of the highest 
approbation by Evelyn. In his preface to the translation of 
Quintiney's Compirfe Garrfener (published 1701) he says, "the 
proprietors, Mr. George London, ' chief gardener to their 
majesties, and his associate, Mr: Henry Wise, are recommended 
for their assiduity and industry ; they have not made gain the 
only mark of their pains, but with extraordinary and rare 
industry, endeavored to improve themselves in the mysteries 
of their profession; from the great advantages and now long 
experience they have had, in being employed in most of the 
celebrated gardens and plantations which this nation abounds 
in, besides what they have learned abroad, where horticulture 
is in high reputation." He adds " the grounds and .gardens of 
noblemen and persons of quality, which they have planted cb 
origine, and which are still under their care and attention, 
justify what I have said in their behalf." 

Bowack, who wrote an account of the parish of Kensington 
in 1705, says, that some affirm that if the stock of these nur- 
series were valued at one penny per plant the amount would 
exceed 40,000/. 

The Kensington Nurseri/ — was established by Robert Furber, 
in the beginning of the last century, and was of note for fruit- 
trees in Miller's time ; it has i)assed successively from this 
family to Grimwoods, and to Messrs. Malcolms, the present 
spirited and judicious'possessors. 

The Brentford Nursery, — Messrs. Ronalds and Son, has been 
established upwards of a century. It is chiefly devoted to the 
culture of fruit-trees. 

The Brom.pton Agriatltural Nursery, — Messrs. Gibbs and Co., 
was originally part of the Brompton Park nursery ; but was 
established chiefly for a display of the grasses and plants used in 
aigriculture, during the present century. 

The Hackneij Botanic Nursery — was established by Conrad 
Loddiges, a German gardener, about the middle of the last cen- 
tury. It is particularly devoted to the propagation of rare 
plants, and contains the best general collection of green-house 
and hot-house exotics of any commercial garden. In palms, 
tree-ferns, and scitaminese, it particularly excels, and of the first 
ti-ibe, possesses upwards of eighty species. For the better dis- 
play of these plants, Messrs. Loddiges have lately erected the 
largest hot-house in the world ; it being 80 feet long, 60 feet 
wide, and 40 feet high. It is heated by steam, a,s are all the 
others, extending to upwards of a thousand feet, forming three 
unintei-rupted sides of a parallelogram. In the area are the 
pits and frames. Two houses are devoted to the camellia : one 
is roofed with copper sashes, by Timmins of Birmingham ; 
the other is a curvilinear-roofed house, formed of our bar 
(,fe.739 ), it is 120 feet long, 2,? feet wide, and 18 feet high. 
(For other details, see 7356. and./i^. 736.) 

Tlie Kingsluiul Nursery — was in part in the occupation of 
Fairchild, and also of Cowel, in the beginning of the last cen- 
tury. The present possessors are Messrs. Bassingtons. 
Y 4 



1064 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 





The Bairs-pond Nursery, — Messrs. Brooks and Co., has 
been established upwards of half a century, and is carried on 
■with much spirit, collectors beinc; sent out to distant coun- 
tries, and many new plants imported. Among these are several 
chrrsanthemums, psidiums, &c. 

The Mile-end A'«rie»T/— was established by James Gordon, 
gardener to Dr. Sherrard, at Kltham, and passed successively 
to Gordon, Dermer, Thompson and Co. ; Gordon, Forsytli, 
and Co. ; and Thompson and Co., by whom it is at present 
kept up in a verv respectable style. 

Thje Mary-U'-'lionne A'liriei-j/,'— Thomas Jenkins, has been 
established within the present century ; it is of considerable 
Client ; contains extensive hot -houses for forcing flowers, for 
green-house plants, and pits for pine-apples. It aiso contains 
a subscrijition botanic garden. 

Other Nurnriet. — Of these ther« are, perhaps, a hundred 



in this county that might be deservedly mentioned. That of 
Fraser emd Co., in the King's Road, noted for American her- 
baceous plants ; of Harrison and Co., Old Brorapton, for its 
antiquity ; Schaler and Co., King's Road, as famous for roses ; 
Joseph Knight for a general collection of exotics and hardy 
flowers, and for excellent management ; that of Kirk and Son 
for its antiquity, the grounds being in part surrounded by the 
walls of Cromwell's garden ; Henderson's, in the Kdgeware 
Road, for pine-apples ; Forsyth (one of the principal JLoadon 
seedsmen), at Jlile end ; Ross, at Kingsl.ind, &c. 

7519. Pi-ivat^" gardens come next in order. 

Street-Gardens 740.) — are necessarily numerous in the 

outlets of the metropolis ; many of them in the New lio.id. 
Hammersmith Road, and in the parishes of Chelsea, Fulham, 
and Ivensington, ate ver>' neatly kept. 




The Cottage-gardens of Laborers, —nesx town, are not remark- 
able for management, but in the westeni and eastern extre- 
mities of the county thev are better. 

The Cottagt-sariens o/^rti/iceri — are often very neatly kept; 
particularly those of the Spitalfields weavers, and other opera- 
tives who have a taste for flowers. 

Farmers' Gardens.— As many of the farmers near the metro- 
polis are retired or speculative London tradesn^en, they have 
often very neat gardens. Those to the west of London may be 
referred to as examples. 

Suburban and Citizens' Villat — are in considerable number, 
of various degrees of extent ; but generaUy neatly kei>t. 

7520. J'i/las are numerous in every part of the 
country ; a few may be enumerated : — 

Amo's Fa^e,— near South irate ; J. V.'alker, Esa. A noble 
mansion, chieflv bv Sir R. Taylor: the grounds comprise 
•woods watered by the New River ; the flower-garden is rich, 
and there is an extensive range of hot-houses containing an 
abundant collection of exotics. 

CuUand's Grorf, — near Southgate ; Sir AV. Curiis. A sub- 
stantial villa, and good kitchen-gardens, with hot-houses, on 
which no expense is spared. 

Canons, — near Edgeware ; Sir Thomas Plumer. A dull flat 
of rich pasture, intersected bv rows of elms, and surroujided by 
a brick wall. 

This ulace is remarkable as having been the site of the 
improvements of the celebrated Duke of Chandos, who rose 
from the rank of a private gentleman. James Bridsres, Esq. 
married into the family of Lake, then proprietors of Canons. 
Having made his fortune as a paymaster in the German war, 
and acquired his title, he built the magnificent mansion of 
Canons about 171'2. It stood nearly in the centre of the 
park, at the end of a spacious avenue, being placed diagonally 
so as to show two sides of the building, which, at a distance, 

tave the appearance of a front of a prodigious extent. A'ertue 
escribes it as a " noble square pile, all of stone ; the four sides 
almost alike, with statues on the front ; within was a small 
square of brick, not handsome, the out-ofEces of brick and stone, 
very convenient and well disposed," &c. The architect was 
James, of Greenwich, and the whole expense of the building 
and fiimiture is said to have amounted to 200,000/. Dr. Alex- 
ander Blackwell, author of a treatise on agriculture, who 
afterwards went to Sweden, where he died, and Avhose widow 
published figures of j)lants, was employed to superintend the 
works out of doors. Lysons thinks it is probable he laid out the 

Sleasure-grounds ; but it is not unlikely that the architect, 
ames, wlio translated Le Blond's Gardening, disposed of the 
grounds as well as of the house. The duke's manner of living 
corresponded with the magnificence of his mansion, and fell 
little snort of the state of a "sovereign prince. Canons and the 



duke were satirised by Pope tmder the character of Timon 
and his villa, in 1731. Pope at first denied it, and afterwards 
wrote an exculpatory letter to the duke, who answered it wi;h 
great magnanimity, as by a man who accepted his excuse with- 
out belie\ing his professions. There is a print of Hogarth's, in 
which he represents Pope whitewashing the Earl of Burling- 
ton's house, and bespattering the Duke "of Chando^'s carriage 
as it passes by 

When the duke died, the mansion being thought to require 
an establishment too expensive for the income of his successor, 
after fruitless attempts to dispose of it entire, was pulled down, 
and the materials sold by auction in 1747. The grand stair- 
case,of which each step was a single block of marble above twenty 
five feet in length, is in Lord Chesterfisld's hotise in :\Iay Fair ; 
the equestrian statue of Geo. I. in the centre of Leicester Square ; 
the park was purchased by an upholsterer (Ballet), who built 
the house now existing, and successively occupied by himi^elfi 
by O'Kelly, and the present proprietor. Two poems were 
written on Canons; one by S. Humplireys, in 172b, the other 
by Gildon. 

' Cranford Lodge,— neai Norwood; Countess of Berkeley. 
Remarkable for its pheasants, which, in the late earl's time, 
were everywhere as abundant, and seeking their food on the 
green sward with all the confident serenity of domestic fowls. 

Dfto/orrf ParA, — near Uxbridge ; C.Clowes, Esq. A hand- 
some mansion ; and grounds finely imdulated, well wooded, 
and watered bv the river Colne. 

Durham Park; — near South Mims ; J. Trotter, Esq. A 
good house, well wooded grounds, and a productive kitcheiv. 
garden. 

Ealing Grove, — near Ealing; C. W'yatt, Esq. A substan- 
tial and" commodious, house, and forty acres of ground arranged 
with much judgment. 

Earl's Courf Villa, — dit Earl's Court; John Baynes, Esq. 
M'as the villa for the late celebrated surgeon, John Hunter. 
Here he had a curious menagerie. 

Flamhards, — near Harrow; Lord Northwick. The house 
being in the village, from its elevation commands astonish- 
ingly fine views ; the grounds are disposed in good taste. 

jForcfAooA-, — near Ealing; Charles Duval, Esq. \ good 
house, once the residence of Fielding ; the grounds economically 
and tastefully disposed. 

Forty Ha//, — near Enfi^d; J. Meyers, Esq. The house 
originally by Jones, but altered ; the grounds extensive, undu- 
lating, abounding in lofty elm and ash-trees, and adorned wiih 
some fine pieces of water. 

The Grore, — near Stanmore ; C. Poole, Esq. The grounds 
are remarkable for containing an island and tomb, in imitation 
of the Isle des Pevyliers, at'Ermenonville, and of Rousseau's 
tomb, formerly there, but now in the pantheon of Paris. 

X Gunnersbury, — near Ealing; A. Copeland, Esq. A de- 
sirable villa, with seventy acres oT ground, adorned by twu 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF SURREY. 



1065 



fine sheets of water, and numerous cedars, supposed to have 
been planted by Kent, who laid out the grounds shortly after 
1740. There are extensive furcing-houses and plant-stoves. 

Mention Place, — near Hendon ; J. Carbonel, Esq. A hand- 
some stately mansion, and grounds rendered attractive by 
various picturesque undulations, watered by the river Brent. 
Among the trees are some fine cedars, and one of remarkably 
large growth. 

> KemptoTi Park, — near Sudbury ; Mrs. Fish. Great improve, 
ments were made here a few years ago by the late Mr. Fish, 
both in building, excavating for pieces of water, and in plant- 
ing. At his death, however, the hot-houses and other articles 
■were sold by public auction, and what remains is neglected. 

Marble Hill, — near Twickenham ; C. A. Fulk, Esq- The 
grounds Avere laid out by Pope, at the time the house was the 
property of the Countess of Suffolk. They cont2iin mucli vener- 
able wood, and a dilapidated grotto. 

Marble Hill Cottage, — near Twickenham ; T. Brent, Esq. 
An embellished dwelling; fitted up with great delicacy of 
taste by the late Lady Diana Beauclerk, and standing on a spot 
of peculiar beauty, close to the Thames. 

Uosslijn House, — Hampstead; General Sir M. DLsney. A 
good house, commanding extensive views of London and 
buiTey, over the Regent's Park ; the extent of the grounds con- 
siderable for the situation. 

South Lodge, — near Enfield Chase; N. Gundry, Esq. 
Celebrated as having been the residence of the great Earl 
of Chatham, who expended a considerable sum in laying 
out the grounds ; which, according to G. Blason, he did 
much in the manner recommended by U. Price. The place is 
now much neglected. The Temple of Pan, which stands in 
the pleasure-grounds, is described by Wheatley, in Observations. 
It was afterwards the residence of Mr. Shai-p, (the friend of 
Collinson,1 in 1764, who had a good collection ; and whose gar- 
dener, Watts, (who worked under Miller, and is now an old 
man and nursery-gardener at Acton,) propagated the mistletoe 
on most sorts of trees, resinous as well as non -resinous. 

X Southgate Growe, — near Southgate; W. Gray, Esq. A 
beautiful Ionic building, by Nash, to which an elegant con- 
servatory is attached. The lawn declines from the house, 
and then rises in an opposite bank, finely clothed with oaks : 
the walks were laid out by H. Kepton. On the whole, this is 
one of the most romantic and beautiful villas in Middlesex : it 
bears a striking resemblance to that of Blaize Castle, near 
Bristol. 

Spring Grove, — near Hounslow; Lady Banks. Chiefly re- 
maikable as having been the residence of the late eminent 
President of the Royal Society, and patron of all natural science. 
There is an excellent kitchen-garden; and pines and mush- 
rooms grown to great perfection by J. Oldacre. 

X Strawberry Rill, — near Twickenham; Countess ofWal- 
degrave. The house, a composition of the late Lord Orford's in 
the Gothic style, built from time to time, and great part being 
wood covered with plaster, it is going fast to decay : the grounds 
are of very limited extent, and much less interesting than has 
generally been imagined ; without the Thames they would be 
dull. 

Twickenham Villas. — These are numerous; that of Ba- 
roness Howe is in the gai den of Pope, and not far from the 
site of his house. Pope purchased his villa, and removed there 
in the year 1715, and continued improving it till his death, 
in 1744. It was then sold to Sir William Stanhope, who 
added wings, and enlarged the gardens. It then passed to 
Wellbore Ellis, Esq. afterwards Lord Mendip, who married his 
daughter; next to Viscount Clifden, who sold it to Sir John 
Briscoe, Bart and after his death it was purchased by Baroness 
Howe, in 1807, who levelled the villa to the ground, and built 
a new house about 100 yards from its site. The weeping- 
willow, planted by Pope, perished in 1801. 

The villa of George Pococke, Esq. was the residence of Secre- 
tary Johnstone from 17iiO. Mackey, in 1724, says he had the 
best collection of any gentleman in England; that he had 
slopes for his vines, from which he made some hogsheads of 
wine a year, and that Dr. Bradley reckoned him among the 
first gardeners in the kingdom. 

Twickenham Par/c— was once the property of Lord Chan- 
cellor Bacon, who esteemed it " a fit residence for persons to 
study in." About 1740, this seat was the property of M. 
Vernon, a merchant of Aleppo, who brought the weeping- 
willow fiom the Euphrates, and planted it here. Peter Col- 
linson says he saw it growing there in 1743, and that from 
that tree originated all the weeping-willows in Britain. 
(Lambert, in Linn. Trans ) Lysons observes, that Twickenham 
has so long been the favorite retreat of the scholar, the poet, and 
the statesman, that almost every house has its tale to be told. 

Tyford Himie, _ near Wilsden ; Willan, Esq. A com- 
modious Gothic residence, the effect of which is much admi- 
red, by Atkinson ; the attached lands agreeably ornamented 
with wood; a small portion dedicated exclusively to pleasure- 
grounds, and the rest managed as a hay-farm. 

Whitton P/ace, — near Hounslow ; lately the residence of 
Sir William Charabei-s, was built by Archibald, Duke of 
Argyle, celebrated in the early part of the last century for 
the introduction of exotic trees. Many of the plants and 
trees were moved to Kew in 17()'2; but a number of the cedars 
sown here in 1725 still remain, and constitute the finest 
assemblage of that tree in the countiy. The house, after the 
death of the duke, became, by purchase, the residence of Sir 
William Chambers, the architect. The grounds were divided, 
and an elegant villa built on a part of them by the father of 
the present proprietor, George Gosling, Esq. A lofty tower; 
the old green-house, now formed into a dwellinghouse ; and 
the fine pieces of water and venerable pines, firs, and cedars, 
still remain. 

Wembly Manor i7o)(se, — near Kilbum ; J. Gray, Esq. A 
neat house, most agreeably situated in a grass-farm, orna- 
mented from the designs of H. Repton. 

Wyke Hotise, — near liientford ; E.Ellis, Esq. Remarkable 
for its good and well-managed kitchen-garden. 

7521. Fillas with demesne-lands and mansion- 
residences are not very numerous. 



occupymg an elevated site, and commanding extensive 
prospects. 

Boston House, — near Brentford; Colonel Clitherow. The 
grounds umbrageous and ornamental, and noted for large cedars. 

X CacioHuoc/, — Hamnstead ; Earl of Mansfield. An elegant 
building, by Adams and George Saunders, and some additions 
by Atkinson ; with fifty acres of pleasure-grounds, beautifully 
disposed, containing some fine old wood, and undergrowths 
of rhododendrons, and other American plants; there is a fine 
terrace-walk, flower-garden, and excellent kitchen-garden, 
home-farm, and dairy. 

X Chiswick House, — near Chiswick ; Duke of Devonshire. 
An elegant Corinthian edifice, by the Earl of Burlington and 
Kent, with two wings by Wyatt. The gardens were origi- 
nally laid out by Lord Burlington, in the Italian style, with a 
redundancy of sculptural embellishments, but have since been 
modernised. They now contain a large flower-garden, a range 
of hot-houses 300 feet in length, and a group of aviaries for 
hardy birds : there is also a large kitchen-garden. 

Stammore House, — near Stanmore; G. H. Drummond, Esq. 
The house and gi-ounds originally by Holland; the grounds, 
since improved by Repton, contain some fine views. 

X Sion if jV/, —near Brentford; Duke of Marlborough. The 
grounds disposed with great taste ; but, with the house, of 
limited extent. 

Trent Place, — near Enfield; J. Gumming, Esq. A spaci- 
ous brick structure on a fine swell in the midst of a park of 
500 acres, more varied by irregularities, and of a bolder cha- 
racter than is usual in IWiddlesex. 

Wrotham Place, — near South Mims; G. Byng, Esq. A 
spacious architectural i)ile, by Ware, on a commanding emi- 
nence: the park is rather deficient in wood. 

7522. The first-rate residences of this county are 
chiefly in London, but there are a few in the 
country. 

X Holland House, — near Kensington ; Lord Holland. A 
magnificent Elizabethean mansion, with a demesne of 300 
acres, of which 63 are in pleasure-ground, and remarkable for 
a flower-garden, beautifully laid out and managed. Here the 
ruins of a stable become a fine object ; for the stalls having 
been arched with masonry, remain and resemble a ruined 
aqueduct. In this garden the dahlia was first successfully 
cultivated in England. 

X Sion House, — near Brentford ; Duke of Northumberland. 
Once the property of the Duke of Somersetj whose, physician. 
Dr. Turner, author of Tlie Herbal, mentions a botanic gar. 
den formed here. The house, a magnificent quadrangular 
structure of stone, improved by Adams, and more recently by 
Hardwick. The giounds are flat ; but abound in fine trees, 
and the yileasure^grounds with many venerable cedars, and 
other exotics. They were laid out by Brown ; latnly under 
the care of Hoy, F.L.S., and now of Stroud, author of an In- 
troduction to Botany. 

7523. Royal Gardens. Of these there are four, 
Carlton Gardens, Hampton Court, Kensington, and 
Pimlico. 

Carlton Palace Gardens — were originally laid out by Kent, for 
Lord Carlton; and afterivards by Brown and HoUaisd, for the 
present king when Prince of Wales. They are secluded, but 
not much enriched with flowers and shrubs, or in highkeejiing. 
Attached to the palace is a conservatory ; a copy of the skeleton 
of Henry VII. 's chapel in Westminster Abbey ; but though 
handsome as a piece of architecture, it is of little use as a plant- 
habitation, being in fact intended more as a lounge and re- 
source for an extra room on great occasions. 

X Hampton Comi, - - the most capacious, and perhaps the 
most magnificent, of all the royal palaces : princii)ally built by 
Cardinal Wolsey ; but enlarged by Henry VIII., and in part 
rebuilt by William and Mary. It consisted originally of five, 
but now only of three quadrangles, and several minor courts ; 
the style impure Grecian. Its situation is upon the north bank 
of the Thames : it is embraced by forty-four acres laid out in 
the Dutch taste in the time of William and Mary, by London 
and Wise. The ground belonging to it as park, is of consider- 
able extent, and is distinguished by the different divisions of 
Bushy Old Park, New Park, Middle or Hare Warren, and 
Hampton Court. The gardens contain a labyrinth, one of 
the most perfect, as to preservation, in England : the privy 
garden is ornamented with terrace-walks, and near it is a 
grapery, seventy feet by fourteen, occupied by a Hamburgh vine 
planted in 1769, which has been known to produce in one 
year 2i!00!bs. of grapes. Its roots are said to have found their 
way to a drain leading from the offices to the river, from which 
it is supposed to derive moisture and nourishment. There is 



ine pi 
by P; 



adley, the royal 



hot-houses heated by steam, and mana 
gardener. 

X Kensington. — The palace a large brick building, badly 
placed, in relation to the surrounding gardens, being lower 
than the greater part of their surface. The gardens are three 
miles and a half in circumference, and contain grass and 
gravel, open and shaded walks, with a circular basin and river. 
The finest point of view is on entering from the Uxbridge 
road. The kitchen -garden was formerly famous as exhibiting 
the effects of the late W. Forsyth's mode of managing fruit- 
trees ; at present the forcing-department is remarkable for 
its hot-houses, in which the pine is better cultivated than 
in any of the royal gardens. The original extent of the 
gardens was only thirty-six acres. Queen Anne added thirty 
acres, which were laid out by her gardener, 'Wise. Queen 
Caroline added nearly 300 acres from Hyde Park, which'were 
laid out by Bridgeman- Being royal gardens, several poems 
have been published to celebrate them ; one by Tickell, in 
his works ; another in 1722 ; and a thud in the pastorEd kalen- 
dar in 1763. 

Pimlico, or Buckingham-House Gardens — were enlarged and 
laid out soon after the middle of the last century, by Robinson, 
brother to Ramsay Robinson, the king's farmer. They oc-. 
cupy a triangular spot of a few acres, and have scarcely any 
other beauties to recommend them than those of seclusion 
and verdure. 



Bentley Priory, — near Stanmore; Marquis of Abercom. 
An irregular brickedifice, of no architectural pretensions, but 

ir&A: SURREY. A surface of 519,040 acres, generally beautifully varied in surface ; the soil in a great 
part gravelly or sandy ; poor in many places j but from the salubrity of the air this county is particularly. 



1066 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



"adapted for villas and other residences. That part of the metropolis which is within the county, contains 
a garden-market for the commoner fruits and vegetables, but it is not extensive. There are several re- 
spectable seed-shops, and the greatest seed-factors reside here; in the suburbs and suburban villages, 
are some good market-gardens, the principal herb-giirdeiis in the kingdom, and some seed-gardens : ju- 
niper-berries and cranberries used to be gathered on the commons on Box Hill and l>eith Hill, and sold 
in the metropolis. There are a few nurseries : the county abounds in villas, and contains some mansion- 
residences. There are no public gardens in the county ; but the promenade of Greenwich Park, in Kent, 
adjoins the metropolis. In Stevenson's survey of the county, it is stated, that 3J00 acres are employed as 
farmers' market-gardens. Tlie greatest gardening author this county has produced is Evelyn, of Wootton 
House, and the most celebrated gardens which have existed in this countrj' those of the Carews, at 
Beddington. 



7525. There are various commercial ge^ dens. 

' Fiirmers' gardens. — Of these there are a considerable number 
in the low part of the county, adjoining the Thames. TmT!ii>s 
are grown in abundance and in great perfection, for the cow. 
feeders. 

Market- Gardens — There are some highly cultivated and of 
very considerable extent on the banks of the Thames, especially 
at Barnes, Alortlake, and Camberwell. The two 'former 
places are famous tor asparagus, and Battersea for cabbages. 
There are generally about eighty acres under asparagus in "the 
I)arish of .Alortlake : the greatest grower is Biggs, who has had 
torty acres under this crop at one time. There are some good 
gardens near Chertsey, and here the Chertsey or great Surrey 
carrot is better grown than anywhere else, and the London 
seedsmen are supplied from the growers with its seeds. The 
iKU-dy fruits are less generally grown for the markets in 
{Surrey than in :\Iiddleses and Kent ; but there is one cele- 
brated grower of er.otic and forced fruits, I.-aac Andrews at 
Lambeth, famous for his pine-apples, and being annually 
among the first who send early grapes and cherries to market. 
His hot-houses, like those of Gunter and Grange ui Middlesex, 
are all heated by steam. 

Herh and Pht/sic Gardens These are chiefly in the parish 

of Mitcham, where the soil is poor and gravelly. The oldest 
establishjnent of this description is that of Potter and Moore, 
who fom^rly grew most of the articles in the vegetable 
materia medica then in vogue. They now grow chiefly roses, 
lavender, chamomile, the mints, opiiim-poppy {Papai'er sinn- 
7iiJ'erur/i), balm, blessed-thisUe, borage, clary, hyssop, sage, 
scurvy-grass, angelica, thyme, fennel, pot-marigold, &c. 
jMcssrs. Dickson and Anderson, of Covent-garden, seedsmen 
and herbalists, have a garden at Croydon for a general collec- 
tion of such herbs as are only in demand in small quantities. 

Market Fl(»rer.Gardt ns — There are several of them near the 
metropolis, but none eininenlly deserving description. 

Florists' Gardens — The principal of these is that of Messrs. 
Milliken and Curtis, at Walworth, who have tlie first collec- 
tion of hardy bulbs grown in this country. It was founded by 
the late —1- IMaddock, author of the Florists' Directory, 
about the middle of the last century. There are also one or two 
other very re>p.. t;i! ' t jarJens of this description. 



Nursery-Gardens Before London was so much extended 

on this side, there were some old and extensive nurseries, 
such as those of the Drivers, Malcolms, North, &c.; but the 
grounds which occupied these gardens, are now generally built 
on, and the existing nurseries are of less- note though highly- 
respectable. Of these may be mentioned that of Ronaldson at 
Tooting, noted lor tlie best collection of ericfe in the vicinity 
of the metropolis ; Chandler at \"auxliall, noted for camellias ; 
Griffins of South Lambeth, for bulbs; Phillips at Lambeth, 
for fruit-trees ; and Buchanan at Canr^berwell, for a general 
collection. Near Bagshot are a number of nurseries, devoted 
chiefly to the growth of stocks for fruit-trees, with which they 
supplv the ti-acle in London, and elsewhere. A mong these may 
be mentioned Donald at "W'okiiig, Cobbett at Horsehill, Ham- 
mond, and others, at Ripley arid Trimley ; Lee, of the Vine- 
yard, has also extensive nurseries in this quarter, for raising 
the commoner articles. 

Botanic Gardens — l^hat of Tradescant at Lambeth, and a 
medical garden by Jlorgan, mentioned by Evelyn, the lease of 
which was bougVit by the Apothecaries' Company in 1676, 
may be noticed as befonging to the gardcu-antiquitles of the 
county. Curtis, the botanist, had formerly a subscriptjon 
botanical garden at Lambeth Marsh; which was afterwards 
removed to Queen's Elm, Brompton. Benjamin Robertson 
form.ed a valuable botamc garder*,' at a great expense, at 
Stock well ; he died in ISOO, and bequeathed the whole of his 
estates for the purpose of establishing it as a- public botanic 
garden ; but his will was set aside. 

7526. Private^ gardens, as already observed, are 
very numerous, and generally well managed, com- 
pared with those of most other counties. Cottage- 
gardens are neat, and often ornamental, and the 
farmers' gardens are general y well attended to, 
this class of cultivators being here, as round most 
large towns, in great part retired tradesmen. 

Suburban Villas ( fig. 741.) — are certainly more numerous, and 
better laid out than anywhere else. They border the ditTerent 
great roads for some mi!es from town, and render them de- 
fightful tothe r. r c !er. 




7527. Villas. We have selected a few ; but the 
number that merit attention is more than double 
those here named. 

Addi)iMon Place, —near Croydon ; .Archbishop of Canterbury. 
A good house ii. the centre of a park, much varied and well 
planted : the house lately enlarged and improved. 



^?JAu™ P/ace, — near Blackheath; S. Thornton, Esq. Aix 
elegant fonic mansion, greatlv altered and improved by the 
present proprietor. The^park, a beautiful piece of ground, of 
250 acres, linelv wooded, especially with old Spanish chestriuts. 
There are some small pieces of water in the park, aiwl a basin 
and fountain in the garden. This place was notetl in Evelyn s 
time '."'iT.) for the subterraneous passage of IGO yards in length. 



Book I. 



GARDENS 



OF SURREY. 



1067 



made nearly throiu»h a hill, but a rock at the south end pre- 
vented the design from being completed. 

Bull y, — near Chertsey ; Sir J. Mawbe:y. An elegant stone 
mansion, in a park well stocked with timber, and adorned 
with a fine piece of artificial water, with a b^th at one end 
of it. 

Burmood ParA", — near AValton ; Sir J. Frederick. An ele- 
gant house, in a park of 300 acres, valued here because not in- 
tersected by a single footpath. 

Bijsshe Court, — near Godstone; J. M. Ewart, Esq. Worthy 
of notice on account of the kitchen garden, which is surrounded 
by a moat, the area enclosed being that on wliich the former 
mansion stood. 

X Despdciie, —nea.Y Dorking; T. Hope, Esq. A man of 
great taste in all the fine arts, and eminently so in architec- 
ture and gardening. His essay on gardening, and work on 
household furniture, are highly esteemed. This Italian villa 
■was built by the Duke of Norfolk, but improved and deco- 
rated with sculptures and a Tuscan tower, by the present 
proprietor. The grounds are not extensive, but are highly 
romantic, and intersected with walks in various directions, 
■which, with admirable liberality, are at all times open to the 
public. 

Efrham Park,— near Egham ; Parry, Esq. A neat 

house, in a well wooded park of sixty acres, lying on the south- 
■west side of Cooper's Hill ; a conservatory and colonnade added 
to the house, and the kitchen-gard=n much improved by the 
present proprietor. 

Ember Court, — near Thames Ditton ; Colonel Taylor. A 
stuccoed house, and a park of late years greatly enlarged and 
improved. 

Grove Hill, — near Camberwell ; the late J. C. Lettsom, M.D. 
A plain mansion; the gardens laid out with great taste and 
beauty, and rich in exotics- There are also various orna- 
mental buildings, and the whole is m the highest state of 
preservation. 

Kingstvood Lodge, — near Egham ; Flounder, Esq. A 

substantial stuccoed house ; the grounds modernised by us in 
1805, for Gideon Bickerdyke, Esq. the proprietor at that 
time. They are chiefly remarkable for their commanding 
prospects, and as forming a part of Cooper's Hill, celebrated 
Dy Denham. 

Monk's Grove, — near Chertsey ; Lord Montford. B.emarkable 
only for its kitchen-garden, suiik in the side of St. Anne's Hill, 
at a great expense. 

Morden Park, —near Morden ; (r. Ridge, Esq. A handsome 
quadrangular house, on a rising ground, agreeably diversified 
■with extensive plantations of shrubs and flowers, and embel- 
lished by two sheets of water. 

X Norburij Park, — near Mickleham ; "W. Locke, Esq. A 
simple but grand mansion, in an elevated commanding 
situation, " well fitted to reign over the domain in which it 
is placed." The park is extensive, and the wood in judicious 
masses branching away from the house in opposite dfrections. 
It contains many walnut-trees, the nuts of which in some years 
are said to fetch 600/., and in other seasons scarcely a bushel is 
produced. 

X Pain's Rill, — near Cobham ; Lord Carhampton. One of 
the most beautiful and meritorious places in PZngland. The 
extent is 213 acres, great part taken from a barren heath ; but 
the surface being naturally varied, and the river Mole border- 
ing the estate, laid a foundation for every improvement. By 
a simple contrivance the water was raised so as to supply 
a large and beautifully varied lake, and the buildings and 
■woods were judiciously adapted to the grounds. A vu-.eyard 
■was planted on the south side of a gi-avelly hill, from which 
Avines were made for several years. The woods were planted 
so as of themselves to produce variety, by adopting the man- 
ner of grouping the natural orders ; thus, in one part the 
pine and fir tribes prevailed, in another aquatics, and so on. 
This place was celebrated by ^\■heatley, ■\^'alpole, and other 
■writers, and much admired by the public, to whom it was open, 
till it fell into the possession of the present proprietor. 

Petersham Lodge, — near ICew ; Sir W. Manners. The house 
a design of the Earl of BurUngton ; the grounds spacious and 
beautiful, and adjoining Richmond Park. 

Pnlesdon, — near I^eatherhead ; The 

grounds remarkable for a fine terrace-walk 900 feet in length. 

The Priory, — near Ryegate ; I^ord Somers. A modern house, 
with 76 acres of pleasure-grounds, very' well laid out. 

Puttenham Priory^ — near Godalming; Admiral Corraick. 
A neat Corintliian house in a judiciously arranged area of fifty- 
four acres. 

X Richmond Hill, — Richmond. Among the many fine 
■vUlas here, we may notice that of the Marquis of Queens- 
bury, as atfording an example of grounds on both sides of a 
public road judiciously connected by a subterraneous com- 
munication. 

Roehampton Grove, — Roehampton ; W- Goshng, Esq. An 
elegant modem structure, by Wyatt, with a higldy polished 
lawn and shrubberies, and a fine piece of water, supplied by 
pipes from a conduit on Putney Common. There are above a 
dozen other structures equally deservuig attention at Roe- 
hampton. 

That of Lord Viscount Fitzwilliam was the house of Sir 
Matthew Decker, maternal grandfather of his Lordship, a 
■wealthy Dutch merchant, who first brought pine-apples to 
perfection at this place. Mackay, in his tour throngh England, 
about the year J 724, says, that there was in the garden the 
longest, the largest, and the highest hedge of holly that he 
ever saw. In the house was the picture of a pine-apple gather- 
ed there in 1720, on account of a visit of George I. for whose 
reception Sir Matthew built a room on purpose. He died in 
1749. The hedge no longer exists. Lord Fitzwilliam died 

, and the picture is now m the FitzwiUiam museum at 

Cambridge. 

Rook's Nest, — near Ryegate; H. Turner, Esq. An old 
mansion, recently enlarged and beautified, standing in a de- 
lightful park, with fine old woods ; a large lake, and good 
kitchen-gardens and hot-houses. 

T/ic /ioofcery, — near Dorking;; Fuller,Esq. Purchased 

in 17.59, by Daniel Malthus, E.'-;q. author of the translation of 
(jirardin Svr les Paysages, &c. from Abraham Tucker, E^q. of 
Beechworth Castle, the celebrated author of The Light of 
Na'ure jnirsved. Mr. Malthus took advantage of its beauties 
of hill, dale, wood, and water, converted it into an elegant seat, 
antl sold it in 1768. 



Slier mood Lodge, — near Battersea ; J. "Wolfe, Esq. The 
house has received an elegant addition in the Gothic style; 
the grounds of limited extent, but in high keeping. 

Shrub Hill, — near Dorking; Lord Leslie. A commodious 
and pleasant villa. 

Streaiham Park,— nep.r Streatham ; A. Atkins, Esq. The 
grounds contain 100 acres, surroimded by a shrubbery and 
gravel -walk, forming a circuit of two miles; the kitchen- 
gardens remarkably extensive, and enclosed by a vvall fourteen 
feet high. 

S<. ,4;iH<,'« 7?i7/, — near Chertsey ; Mrs. Fox. The garden* 
and pleasure-grounds of moderate extent, but laid out with 
much taste by the late eminent statesman, whose widow 
now resides here. 

Tilburster Hill, — near Godstone ; Alexander Mac Leay, Esq. 
F.H.S. L.S. &;c. The house on the south side of a green hill 
finely bosomed with trees, and lookuig across a rich vede, to 
finely wooded hills beyond. The gardens and pleasure-grounds 
sraaU, but rich in America?^ plants. 

West Becchwoiih, — near Dorking ; H. Peters, Esq. An old 
mansion, the grounds greatly enlarged and improved by the 
present owner ; the old park remarkable for its noble timber j 
especially chestnuts, elms, and limes. 

H-'oAurn /'arm, —near Chertsey ; Sir J. St. Aubin. A brick 
house ; the grounds fiat, but agreeably varied by a piece of 
■n ater ; hut chiefly remarkable from having been first planned 
and laid out by, the late P. Southcote, Esq., the inventor of the 
ferme orne'e. To such a character they have now scarcely any 
pretensions. 

7528. T/ie mansions with demesnes, in Surrey, 
are few compared -with the number of villas. 

Ashted Park, — near Ryegate; Hon. F. G. Howard. An 
elegant mansion, with magnificent stables, in a park of 140 
acres, enclosed with a brick wall. 

Beddington, - near Croydon; W. Gee, Esq. Celebrated 
in the sixteenth century for its gardens, and for the first 
orange-trees grown in England. The attention paid by Sir 
Francis Carew to other plants as well as orange-trees, is proved 
by his showing to Queen Elizabeth,^ who used frequently to 
visit him, a cherry-tree ■n'ith ripe fruit, kept back a month 
beyond the usual time. Over the whole tree he strained a 
canvass, which was occasionally wetted ; by this means the 
cherries ^ew large, and continued pale; when assured of the 
queen's coming he removed the canvass, and a few sunny days 
brought them to their color. {Plicti's Garden of Eden, 165.) The 
present mansion was erected about 1709; the park contains 
some fine elms, is not varied nor very extensive. 

J . Gibson, in an account of the gardens near London, written 
in 1691, says the orangery at Beddington %vas above 200 feet in 
length ; that n.ost of the trees were thirteen feet high, and that 
the gardener had the year before gathered at least 10,000 
oranges. The heir of the Carew family was then in his minority, 
and the estate was let to the Duke of Norfolk. At present, 
Richard Carew, Esq. is m possession of the estate, and the manor- 
house is in the occupation of \Villiam Gee, Esq. his younger 
brother. 

X Claremont, — near Esher ; Prince Leopold of Saxe Coburg. 
The park was chiefly planted by Kent, for Pelham Earl of 
Clare, and afterivards Duke of Newcastle, who built the pro- 
spect tower and called it Clare (clear) -mount. After the Duke's 
death, it was purchased by Lord Clive, who, when setting out 
on his last voyage, gave directions to Brown to build a house, 
withou'L limiting him to expense. He performed the task to the 
satisfaction of his employer, at a charge somewhat above 
100,000/. It is a beautiful Cormthian building of freestone, an 
oblong square open on all sides, the offices under ground, and 
connected with the stables by a subteiTaneous communication. 
The situation is well chosen, the execution good, and the in- 
ternal arrangement unexceptionable. Brown had often altered 
houses, but this house, and that of Crome, are the only in- 
stances of his having erected new ones. The grounds want 
water, and are rather deficient in distant prospect ; but in 
other respects they are singularly and beautifully varied, and 
planted with the greatest taste. In the late Princess Charlotte's 
time, government built a green-hcuse on an eminence in a very 
bad style; it is composed of large painted windows and fan 
lights like an assemblage of shop fronts. A good collection of 
plants is scattered among the hot-houses of the kitchen-garden, 
which stand in need of renovation and reformation. 

Ctandon Place, — near Guildford; Earl of Onslow. A noble 
mansion, by Leoni, built in 1731, the stables more recently by- 
Brown, who also laid out the grounds, and transformed a chalk- 
pit into a rich scene of picturesque beauty. 

Cobham Park, — Cobham; H. C. Combe, Esq. A substan- 
tial mansion, and ground of considerable beauty ; the kitchen- 
garden well seen to, and the hot-houses in good condition. 

EastiL'ick House, — near Leatherhead; J. Laurel, Esq. A. 
brick house, improved in design, and stuccoed by the present 
proprietor, standing in a park of 400 acres 

X Ervood, — near Merstham ; Duke of Norfolk. A house 
built by the late duke for an occasional residence. It stands in 
a park of 600 acres, on the brow of an eminence, commanding 
extensive views of the home grounds, which contain a piece of 
water of sixty acres, cuid over the beautiful ■ft'ooded heights of 
Dorldng, and the adjacent country. 

Gation Park, — near Ryegate; Sir M. Wood. A handsome 
house in a park of considerable extent, much varied in surface, 
and containing several detached pieces of water. 

Marsden Park, — near Godstone; J. Hetsel, Esq. A good 
house, delightfully situated in a valley, and mentioned by Evelyn 
as being a noted improvement. 

Moor Park, — near Famham; Simpson, Esq. A large 

white house of simple architecture, in a park not very extensive, 
but abounding in scenes beautifully romantic. This was formerly 
the residence of Sir William Temple, who died here, and was 
so attached to this retirement, that by his own directions his 
heart was buried in a" silver box under the sundial in his 
garden, opposite to a window from which he used to contem- 
plate the landscape. 

Nonsuch Park, — near Cheam ; S. Farmer, Esq. A part of 
wliat was the park of the royal palace of Nonsuch, on which a 
handsome Gothic mansion, by Av'^yatt, has been erected by the 
present propiietor. 

The Oaks, —near Mitcham; Earl of Derby. Origmally an 
alehouse, but greatly enlarged and improved by the present pro- 



1068 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



prietor as a hunting-seat ; the park surrounded by a hill of two 
miles, and spotted with numerous clumps. 

X OaiLatids, — near Walton ; Duke ot York. A demesne of 
5000 acres, almost entirely park, with a house bv Holland ; a 
fine terrace wcilk ; a serpentine lake, by Wright, which has 
often been mistaken for a part of the Thames ; and a much ad- 
tnired grotto. 

X OAe/iam Pari, — near Guildford; Lord King. The grounds 
have been lately much improved, the piece of water enlarged, 
and the whole adapted to the modem taste- 
Pepper Harrow, — near Haslemere ; Lord ?.Iiddleton. A good 
mansion, on the banks of the Wey, sheltered on the north^and 
east by rising grounds, covered with plaruations ; with an ele- 
gant conservatory at the west end of the house, and a kitchen- 
garden of three acres, containing a good range of hot-houses. 

X Wi-nble.^iiii House, — A\'jrabledon ; Earl Spencer. A man- 
sion by ^\'. Holland, in a park of 1200 acres, agreeably diversi- 
fied in surface, containing Hne distant views, and tastefully laid 
out by Brown, who formed a sheet of water, which covers a 
surfece of 50 acres. The manor-house of Wimbledon was 
formerly one of the first in the kingdom. A survey of it was 
taken in 1649, and a copy of part of it is inserted in the 10th 
volume of Arc/upologia. The house was painted in fresco ex- 
ternally, like the palace of Nonsuch : in the gardens was an 
orangery, containing forty-two trees, in boxes, valued at 10/. 
each, lemons, citrons, pomegranates, figs : in the mazes, wild- 
erness, knots, alleys, were a great variety of trees and shrubs, a 
bay-tree, and an Iri^h arlmtus. There was a mosk ntUUm groimd 
" at the end of the kitchen-garden, trenched, manured, and 
very well ordered fqr the growth of mosk nvlions." The house 
■was pulled down, rebuilt, burnt do\vn, .vid rebuilt again in 17Srt. 

R-'ootto/i /Touie, — near Dorking ; Hon. and Ksv. J. Kvelyn 
Boscawen. A seat of the Evelyns since tlie time of Elizabeth. I 
It is a low spreading building of no pretensions, surrounded 
by hills, clothed with copse-woods ; but open to tlie south, ^d 
containing some good pasture-ground round the house. 

7529. Royal residences. 

Kcw, — near Brentford , the private property of the king, was 
established by the Princess Dowager of Wales, in 1760, and 
has become universjilly celebrated, cliietly from the number of 

7530. SUSSEX. A surface of 93o,040 acres, gently %-aried, the soil generally rich, great part bordering 
on the sea, consists of low undulating hills, or what may be called hilly plains, known by the name of 
Downs ;from Du/u, S.tx. a hill\ Tiie northern parts, tov,-ards Essex and Kent, abound in natural woods, 
or remains of woods called wealds. This county is not remarkable for its gardening; on the coast, how- 
ever, and especially about Wortliing, the tig thrives better in the open air than it does any where else in 
England. It is grown to great perfection in the gardens of the Duke of Norfolk, at Arundel, and in 
some commercial gardens near Worthing. These trees, and also the tig-orchard, of nearly an acre, at 
Tarring, near Worthing, OL-cupied by Loud, and containing 100 standard trees, have already been referred 
to. (-iSoS.) Market-gardens, in the neighborhood of Lewes and Worthing, are rather on the increase, 
for the purpose of supplying the latter village and Brighton, both rapidly increasing, with culinary vege- 
tables. The garden-market at Brighton is at present supplied with all its more valuable articles from 
London, excepting peaches, grapes, and figs, which in autumn, are imported from France. The severity 
of the sea-breeze renders this part of the coast peculiarly unfavorable to gardening. The principal nur- 
sery in Sussex is that of Chichester, by Silverlock, distinguished as the inventor of a hollow wall 
{fig. 233.) which promises to be of real utility both in gardening and cottage-building. There are also 
nurseries at Horsham, Lewes, and other places, but they are of no great note. At Brighton there is a 
florist, who grows chiefly auriculas and geraniums. Furze-seeds are collected for the seedsmen from the 
•wealds, and some tree-seeds from the woods of the Duke of Richmond and Lord Shettield. The cottage- 
gardens near the coast are neatly managed, and productive ; as are some of the farmers' gardens. There 
are a few villas near the marine'towns ; but the principal country-seats are mansions with demesnes. 



seeds or plants sent there from foreign countries, and the ex- 
cellent description of them published in the Hortus Ken-msU, 
A catalogue of the plants was first pubUshed by Dr. Hill in 
176S, in one volume; that by the late AV. Alton in 17S9, in 
three volumes, Svo. The present catalogue, completed in 
1S12, extends to three Tolumes. Sir W. Chambers published 
a description of the house and gardens in 1765, with upwards 
of forty plates, and they have also been the subject of two 
poems, one by J. Ritso in 1765, and the other by Henry Jones, 
author of the tragedy of the Earl nf Essex, in 1767. 

From the first establishment of the garden, a number of col- 
lectors h?ve been sent abroad, and maintained there for the 
purpose of sending home plants and seeds. This has added a 
great many names to the catalogue, because every plant is in- 
troduced there which has once been in the garden ; but unfbrtu- 
nateiy, from want of that hberality in giving away or exchang- 
ing plants, which ought to, and does characterise almost every 
institution of this desoiption, many of the plants which have 
been introduced are lost, and no where to be found but in the 
catalogue. W e have only to instance the natural order of pro- 
teaceae- 

A palace in the Gothic style was built by Geo. III. on the 
banks of the Thames, the design is by \\'yatt, and rather 
crowded; the situation more beautiful than wholesome. It 
has never been completed. 

fticAjnonJ P<irA-, — near Richm.ond. The palace long since 
taken down ; the park '2255 acres, surrounded by eight miles of 
brick wall. It is well wooded, and contains some large pieces 
of water. -A. part of what is called the Old Park is occupied by 
his present majesty as a dairy ; the remainder constitutes the 
royal gardens, which were' first laid out by Bridgeman in 
avenues, and afterwards ojiened and improved by Brown. 
They have the advantage of being situated on the banks of^the 
Thaines, and exhibit some beautiful views. Queen Carohne, 
who was very partial to this spot, had here a dairy £md mena- 
gerie. Several ornamental and grotesque buildings were dis- 
persed about the gardens ; one ot which, called Merlin's Cave, 



7531, 0/ villas and ??iaiisions, the following are 
but a few of those deserving note : — 

AshbuDiham 4Uiey, — near Beachy Head; Earl Ashbum- 
ham. A spacious modem edifice, in the midst of an exten- 
eive park, containing much fine timber, and a large sheet of 
water. 

X Bat/ham Abbey, — near Tunbridge Wells ; IMarquis of 
Camden. A small habitation in the Gothic style, badlv placed ; 
hut the demesne extensive, and affording a situation for btuld- 
ing, for which a magnitrcent design has been given by H. Rep- 
ton. (Obseri<riioiis on Landscape Gardininf.) N'ear the present 
building the interior of an old church and cloisters have been 
Jaid out as a flower-garden, which is much admired. 

X BuotAur^i Pdrf, — near Lewes; Lord Whitworth. Both 
house and grounds have been greativ improved by this noble- 
juan and his ladv, the Duchess of Dorset. 

Canncui House, — near A\'estdean ; Lord Selsey. A small 
place, too. near a churchyard , and a small brook, which is dry 
in summer the etfect of botli, however, much dimi n ished by 
judicious planting. 

Bridge Castle, — near Tunbridge Wells ; Earl Abergavemiy. 
An irregular castellated edifice, embattled and flanked with 
round to"vers, but without any imitation of ancient architecture 
in the doors, windows, or other details. It stands on a bold 
eminence, in a park of 2000 acres, well wooded and watered. 




t^/yrufe, — near Tunbridge Wells; Lord Hampden. A noble 
pile, of Elizabethean architecnu-e, with a terrace commanduig 
a fine view of the sunounding country. The grounds much 
improved by the late Dr. Trevor, but at present rather neglected. 

Hcjih ficid Park; _ near A\"inchelsea ; F. Newberry, Esq. 
The park, environed with holly, able to keep in any game in 
Evelyn's time ; some of these hollies still exist, and many have 
been cut down for their timber. 

X Michel Grove, — near Clapham, Sir J. Snelly. A spa- 
cious Gothic mansion {^fig. 742 ), of cream-colored brick, and 
in the most florid taste of that style of architecture: the ar- 
rangement, both internal and ex ernal, harmonious and scien- 
tific. Thegrounds, by Reptun, displav some fine marine views. 

ParAum, — near A'nmdel; Sir C" Bishop. A singular old 
Elizabethean hotise, not much altered either exteriorly qjr 
within ; the park abomiding m statelv groups of oaks. 

X Sheffield P/atf,— near "Lewes; "Lord .Sheffield. The 
mansion stands low, in a park of between 5 and 600 acres, 
long famous for its large oak-trees, and more recehtlv so for 
other plantations, and for the care and judgment with which 
these are managed in every part of the demesne. There is 100 
acres oP pleasure-ground, and above 1400 acres managed as a 
home farm, and with experiments in culture, and breeding, 
for which Lord Sheffield has been long celebrated. 

Staiimer, — near Lewes ; Earl of Chichester. A plain stone 
\ edifice, forming three sides of a square, in a park much diversi- 
fied by nature and planted 
with judgment. 

Stans:ead-house, — near 
Chichester ; L. AN'ay, 
Esq. One of the most 
dehghtful situations in 
the kingdom ; the house, 
an elegant Ionic pile, with 
wings, an observatorv, 
and cupolas ; the park 
650 acres, finely varied 
and wooded. 

Tfest GrinsieaJ Park, 
— near West Grinstead ; 
Araiiam Burrel, Esq. A 
handsome stone mansion : 
the grounds lately much 
improved, and soine hot- 
houses added to the kit- 
chen-garden. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF KENT. 



1069 



Up Parfc, — near Eastboum; Sir H. Peatherstone. A mag- 
nificent house, and well wooded park ; the timber-trees, in 1743, 
valued at 19,000/. 

7532. The following &ve first-rate residences : — 

X Arundel Castle, — at Arundel ; Duke of Norfolk. A 
magnificent castellated structure, partly very old, and partly 
re-erected on a more sumptuous style. It is founded on a cir- 
cular knoll, effected partly by nature and partly by art ; the ad- 
joining grounds flat towards the sea, but the rest of the park 
varied and well wooded. The kitchen-gardens are good, and 
noted for their old and prolific standard fig-trees. 

X Goodrvood, — near East Jjavant ; Duke of Richmond. A 
magnificent house in the Grecian style, chiefly by Wyatt ; the 
walls built of small flints collected on the South Downs. The 
stables and oflnces form a handsome quadrangular building 
near the house, and are inferior to few if any in the kingdom, 
and the dog-kennel exceeds in magnificence and convenience, 
even to luxury, every structure of the kind ever raised for such 
tenants. The park includes 2000 acres ; behind the house is a 
fine grove of cedars, mentioned by Coilinson ; of the true 
service, mentioned by Miller ; and everywhere abundance of old 
timber ; and it contains a beautiful summer-house ; on the 
pleasure-grounds is a tennis-court ; and on a hill beyond the 
park, a race-course. 

X Pdworth House, — at Egremont; Earl of Egremont. A 
magnificent mansion, fronted with freestone, and surrounded 

7534. KENT. A surface of 935,600 acres, considerably diversified by ridges of chalky eminences in 
some places ; low marshy grounds on the Thames and Medway ; open downs near Dover ; and an inland, 
flat, and woody part, towards Sussex, called the Weald ; a Saxon word signifying wood, or the woody part 
of a country. It is one of the oldest cultivated counties in England ; and, from some laws peculiar to it, 
landed property is much divided, and there are a great many small proprietors who reside on, and 
cultivate their own estates. Hence the garden-like appearance which prevails in great part of this tract, 
and particularly about Maidstone, and on the road from London to Canterbury. The cottage and trades- 
men's gardens on this tract are remarkably neat, perhaps more so than any where in the world, unless in 
some parts of Holland. It is also very productive in vegetables and fruits for the market, and in seeds of 
different kinds for seedsmen : it contains some beautiful villas, and one or two fine old mansion-residences, 
and one public, formei-ly a royal park. Philip Miller appears to have been born in this county, near the 
metropolis, but where is uncertain. The most celebrated gardens in former times were those of Knowle, 
and of Dr. Sherrard at Eltham. 



not less than 30,000/., the water collected from 
small springs in surrounding hills and conducted thither in 
pipes. The park is 12 miles round It was formerly little 
better than morass and waste, but )ias lately been drained and 
well stocked with every variety of British oxen, and also those 
of the Calmucks and of Astracan ; there is also a breed from 
the East Indies ; the Scottish bison, and the shawl goat of 
Thibet. His lordship farms extensively, and has used every 
exertion to encourage the breeding of "oxen as beasts of labor 
rather than horses. The gardens and hot-houses are on a scale 
of design and management suitable to every other part of this 
truly noble demesne. 

7533. Royal residence. 

X The Pat ilion, or Palace, — at Brighton, is in a mixed style 
of Chinese, Gothic, and Moresque architecture, in which 
the former greatly prevails. Exteriorly it forms a singular 
and beautiful whole; but is badly arranged within, and, 
excepting the dining-room, the others are low or of dis- 
agreeable forms and proportions; or, like the music-room, 
over.labored in attempting to keep u;; the Chinese character. 
The grounds contain only a few acres, in which are a magni- 
ficent pile of stables, formed round a circular court, covered 
by a dome partly glazed. The garden-scenery is tasteless, 
stocked with the meanest flowers, and shows no exertions for 
approbation. 



7535. Public garden. 

Greenmich Park, — near Greenwich, originally belonging 
to Greenwich Palace, but that being formed into an Hos- 
pital in the reign of William III., it is now disjoined. It 
contains 188 acres, walled round by James I., and planted 
-with elms and Spanish chestnuts in intersecting rows and 
avenues by Le Notre, in Charles II's time. The coup d'ceil of 
the Metropolis, from this park, is as interesting a thing of the 
kind as exists. 

7536. Commercial gardens. 

Farmers' and Market Gardens, — abound along the Thames, 
for the supply of the shipping. Immense quantities of green 
peas are grown round Dartford, both in farm market-gardens 
and in common farmed lands for the London market. At 
Sittingboume, and in the Isle of Shepey, peas and beans are 
grown ; and at Greenwich and Deptford great quantities of 
asparagus, sea-kale, onions, cauliflowers, &c. Edmonds at 
Deptford is the greatest grower of asparagus, and sometimes 
has 70 or 80 acres under this crop. 

Orchards. — These are chiefly about Lewisham, Maidstone, 
and along the banks of the Medway ; the principal fruits of the 
county are the cherry and the filbert, but most of the others 
are also grown, from the walnut to the strawberry. The latter 
fruit is brought to great perfection at Fordwick, a village near 
Canterbury, belonging to Earl Cowper. 

Seed-Gardens Great quantities of seeds are grown for the 

seedsmen ; canary, radish, kidneybeans, and formerly turnip 
in the Isle of Thanet; toker or Sandwich beans at Sandwich, 
and also kidneybeans. Various seeds are also grown round 
Maidstone, and much canary -seed in the hundred of Heme. 
The Kentish perennial rye-grass is collected through the 
county, and shipped for the seedsmen at Feversham. About 
twenty acres in the parish of Deptford are generally devoted to 
the growth of onions for seed, the Deptford variety being in 
great repute. 

Of Florists' Market-Gardens — there are two at Greenwich; 
and there are also some Florists' Gardens there. 

Nurseries — sre not unfrequent, though the county is al- 
ready fully planted, and most of the orchardists raise their 
own trees. The principal is that of John Willmott and Co. 
of Lewisham. It was founded by Mr. John Russel, about the 
middle of the 18th century, who raised himself by his skill 
and industry to a state of affluence rare among nurserymen ; 
and, after keeping his carriage, and living many years like a 
gentleman, died in 1794, aged 63, leaving property to the 
amount of 20,000/. The nursery is now carried on by his son- 
in-law with increased sjiirit ; the grounds contain 150 acres ; 
70 hands are employed, and about 3000/. a-year paid for 
labor. 



7537. Cottage and villa gardens. 

Cottage-Gardens. — Besides being neater, as already men- 
tioned, these gardens are stocked with finer kinds of vegetables, 
as kidneybeans, early potatoes, lettuces, &c. than in most 
counties ; and they abound more in flowers. 

Private Gardens of Farmers — are also superior to those in 
most counties; fruit is here a necessary of life, everywhere 
cultivated; and all that is not consumed at home finds a 
ready market at Maidstone or London, or is purchased by 
the fruit-hawkers and the agents who travel through the 
county. 

Suburban Villas — A few of these line the roads near the 
Thames, and especially about Deptford and Greenwich, and 
there are a number round Blackheath, among villas of a 
larger description. A few also exist round every town in the 
county, and all are highly kept. 

Terrace-Garden at Dover Castle The governor, pro temp. 

Four gradations or terraces cut in the shelving chalk and flint 
rock. On the barren walls vines and figs are trained ; the 



latter ripen in October, while in the low part of the town they 
seldom ripen at all. The whole in a state of neglect. 

Belvidere, — near Plumsted ; Lord Eardley. A spacious 
bnck edifice on an elevation, rapidly declining towards the 
north, with fine views over the Thames into Essex; the 
grounds, though small, agreeably diversified, and well 
wooded. 

X Blend on Hall, — near Eexley ; J. Smith, Esq. A good 
house, and the grounds agreeable, with some natural oak- 
woods and a piece of artificial water. The present owner has 
greatly improved them, from the designs of H. Repton. 

Charlton House, — near Charlton ; Lady Wilson. A good 
specimen of the style of James I. ; the grounds occupy 70 acres, 
include some beautiful scenery, and fine old trees, especially 
cypresses. 

Danson Hill, — near Bexley; J.Johnstone, Esq. A hand- 
some mansion, by Sir Robert Taylor : and grounds con- 
taining fine woods, and a spacious sheet of water, laid out by 
Brown. 

Eden Farm, — near Beckenham ; Lord Auckland. An 
elevated healthy situation, surrounded by fine beech-trees. 

East-Clijf Lodge, — near Ramsgate ; Lord Keith. The house 
a good specimen of modem Gothic ; the grounds, which contain 
thirteen acres, remarkable for a curious subterreineous passage 
500 yards in length. 

Godmersham Place, — near Canterbury ; Knight, Esq. 

A handsome mansion, backed by extensive woods. 

Hayes Place, — near Beckingham ; F. Dehaney, Esq. The 
mansion erected by the late Earl of Chatham; who, as 
G. Mason informs us, took much delight in improving the 
grounds. 

Heatltfield, — near Ashford; Earl Thanet. A square edifice 
of Portland stone ; the grounds skirted by the Stour, and much 
improved by the present Earl, who dedicates great part of his 
time to agricultural pursuits. 

Hill Park, — near Westerham ; J. H. Barrow, Esq. The 
grounds beautifully varied by nature, tastefully planted, and 
containing a curious artificial cascade m front of the house. 



Holrvood House,— near Beckenham ; the favorite retreat of the 
late prime minister Pitt. A small house, but the grounds ex- 
tensive and beautifully laid out by H. Repton. 

Lee, _ near Ickham ; T. B. Bridges, Esq. A Gothic 
mansion by James Wyatt, Esq ; praised by Lord Walpole: 
the park displaying some fine thriving trees . . • 



Hill,— I 



undulating 

Tunbridge; J. Burton, Esq. an eminent 



(Juarryl , „ , . . 

London builder. A castellated mansion by the roadside, built 
of the stone and flints of the country, with an extensive park, 
abounding in undulations and wood. 

Wouton Court, — near Dover ; Rev. E. T. Brydges. A white 
house on a bold hill, nobly crOwned with woods ; the grounds 
much varied with hill and valley. 

Woodlands, — near Blackheath ; J. J. Angerstein, Esq. An 
elegant mansion of Portland stone, in a commanding situation ; 
the grounds agieeably varied, and the gardens remarkable for 
the quantity of glass they contain. There is a very large con- 
servatory and numerous vineries, the invention and execution 
of Mr. D.Stewart, when this gentleman's gEirdener; also an 
excellent collection of exotics. 

7538. Demesne and first-rate residences. 

X Chevening, — near Seven Oaks ; Earl Stanhope. A good 
mansion by Inigo Jones, with grounds flat and rich, but not 
much varied by plantation. The present earl is much attached 
both to horticulture and agriculture. 

Cohham Hall, — near Cobham ; Earl Damley. A house in 
the form of a Roman H, the centre partly by Inigo Jones ; the 
park of 1800 acres, nearly seven miles in circumference, beauti- 
fully diversified, abundantly wooded; with remarkably fine 
oaks, and a noble avenue of lime-frees. On an elevated site 
is a large magnificent mausoleum, which cost 9000/. 

Footscray IHace, — near Footscray ; Harris, Esq. The 

mansi<m of freestone, copied from a design by Palladio, 



1070 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING, 



Part IV. 



erected near Venice; the park weU planted, and embellished 
■with a canal, formed from the Cray river, which flows through 
the groimds. 

Knowle Park, — near Seven Oaks ; Duchess of Dorset. A 
magmficent Elizabethean palace, the most modem part of 
which is dated 1605 ; it covers 5ve acres. The park is bet^veen 
five and six miles in circumference, varied in surface, and 
clothed with venerable oaks, beeches, ashes, and elms. The 
pleasure-grounds, for the greater part, remain in their original 
taste, and contain some fine old limes, cedars, and other trees. 
Extensive conservatories, modem rosaries, and flower-gardens, 
■with other improvements, have been added by the present pro- 
prietor, who is much attached to gardening. 

JIMe, — near Blaidstone; Earl Uomnev. Formerly a cas- 
tellated mansion, surrounded with a moat ; now a splendid 
structure on a knoll, commanding fine views, " but having too 



much the air of a citizen's villa." The park is extensive, 
timbered with large trees ; with a broad sheet of water, and a 
handsome bridge. 

Moiird Morris, — \\e-3X Monks Horton; the late Lord Rokebv. 
A large square brick house by Gibbs, and a well wooded park 
of 1000 acres, greatly improved in its pasture by the owner, 
who took great delight in farming. 

X Penshurst, — near Tunbridge ; J. S. Sydney, Esq. An 
extensive castellated pile of the 13th and 14th centuries ; the 
park now reduced to 400 acres, but contauiijig many fine old 
lime, oak, chestnut, and beech trees. 

Summer Hill, — near Tunbridge; W. 'VV'oodgate, Esq. A 
celebrated and beautiful seat, granted by (Jueen Elizabeth to 
the Earl of Leicester. The mansion erected in James I.'s time ; 
the grounds richly wooded and highly picturesque. 



i539. ESSEX. A surface of 1,240,000 acres, of which one part, bordering on the Thames, is marshy, 
and chiefly under pasture ; another part southwards is occupied with the remains of Hainault and Epping 
Forests ; and the remainder in the middle of the county, and towards Cambridge is a mixed tract of 
arable lands, on which, besides corn, the coriander, caraway, and hazel, are grown. The rest abounds 
m pasture and gentlemen's seats. There is a good market at Colchester for vegetables, and in the 
corn -markets there, and other places, samples of the commoner garden-seeds are generally exposed 
for sale. 



7540. Cojnmcrcial, cottage, and far^ners^ gardens. 

Farmers' Slarkd-Garileris. — These are extensive in most 
parts of the county. About Ilford, Barking, and Plaistow, 
immense quantities of early potatoes are grown for the London 
market. 

Market-Gardens The principal of these are near the metro- 
polis, and at Chelmsford and Colchester ; the latter town and 
Eveley, and Purlleet, supply the first early peas from the 
east side of the metropolis, few of the marke't-gardens in this 
county, in Kent, or indeed any where, excepting those of 
Middlesex and Surrey, have much glass. 

Seed-Gardens The Londoi\ seedsmen receive more of 

their stock from this county than from any other. In the 
low district on the Thames, great quantities of rape-seed 
are grown ; brown and white mustard are gro'\\Ti in most 
places; small garden-seeds of almost all sorts round Cogges- 
haU, Colchester, and in the Isle of Mersey; carrot seeds at 
Wethersfield ; coriander, caraway, and mawe seed (Papavcr 
somniferum, var. with blue seeds), round Coc^eshall ; from 
the Marquis of Buckingham's woods at Gosstieki Hall, near 
Braintree, most sorts of fir-seeds which are sown in Eng- 
leind are procured, and hornbeam-seeds from Epping Fo- 
rest. 

Physic-Gardens. — There are none of these worth mention- 
ing, unless one or two near Saft"ron 'W'alden, in which the 
saffron is still cultivated for the apothecaries ; but this article 
being procured so much cheaper from abroad, its culture in 
England is nearly given up. 

Plorists' and Nursery Gardens There are few of any conse- 
quence. 

Cotias;e-Gayi!ens, Farmers' Private Gardens, and Suburban 
Villas, \,fig. 745.) — aboimd and are in general very neatly kept : 
formerly the tradesmen of Chelmsford and Colchester were 
much attached to the culture of florists' flowers, and they still 
continue to.be so in a considerable degree. 



743 




7541. Of Vitlas there are a con'siderable number, 
from which we select only a few. 

Coopersale,— -near Thoydon Gernon ; Archer, Esq. A 

spacious edifice, surrounded bv lawns an'd pleasiure-grounds. 

Debden Hall, — near Tliaxted; Mrs. Chis well. A handsome 
stone mansion, designed by Holland, surrounded by thriv- 
ing pleasure-gi-ounds. 

Eastbury House, — near Barking; Sterry, Esq. A spa- 
cious brick edifice, with octangular towers and chinmeys ; the 
grounds rather confined. 

FUz-Walters, — ne2a: Brentwood; T. Wright, Esq. An 
octangular house, with chimneys in the centre ; the grounds of 
limited extent. 

Greenstead Hall, — near Greenstead ; C. Ord, Esq. A neat 
house and good garden. 

Halingbury Place, — near Stansted ; J. Houbloun, Esq. A 
desirable and pleasant residence, lately much improved. 

Hare-street Cottage, — in Hare street ; the late H. Repton, 
Esq. Remarkable'as having been the residence of this justly 
celebrated artist. 

ianjjte, — near Great Waltham; J. J. TufFnell, Esq. A 
handsome house, on a pleasant eminence, and the park and 
grounds well laid out. 

Lision Hall, — nearBoxley ; Campbell, Esq. A handsome 

modem building, with piazzas, encompassed by a small park 
and garden. 

Marsden Park, — near Miserden ; Sandys, Esq. The 

house is ancient ; the park seven mUes in circumference, and 
rarely equalled for birch woods, pictiuresque, sequestered, and 
romantic scenes. 

Ttvinstead Hall, — near Twinstead ; J. Blarriot, Esq. A spa- 
cious handsome building, surrounded by pleasant gardens, over 
Which is a bridge to the adjoining meadows. 



7542. Mansion and demesne residences. 

Audley End, — near Saffron Walden ; Lord Baybrooke. A 
magnificent Elizabethean structure, of which, according to 
Lord Walpole, John Thorpe and Bernard Janson were the 
architects. The model was procured from Italv, and cost 
500/., and the expense of erection was 190,000/. The park is 
finely wooded, and some improvements, it is believed, were 
made from the designs of H. Repton. 

X Clayhery Hall, — near A\'oodford ; J. Hatch, Esq. A neat 
house, and greatly improved scenery ; the park contains some 
fine timber. 

Co/ne ParA:, — near LittleColne; P. Hills, Esq. A handsome 
mansion of white brick, suiTounded with woods and plantations, 
among which is an Ionic column, erected by J. Soane, Esq. 
architect, in 1791. 

Copford Hall, — near Colchester ; J. H. Harrison, Esq. A 
handsome house and pleasant groimds, containing several pieces 
of water- 

Copped Hall, — near Eyping; J. Conyers, Esq. One of the 
greatest ornaments of the" county. The house, of white 
brick, has been much improved by W'vatt : the park is exten- 
sive, irregular and well wooded, an3 the distant prospects 
grand. 

Eastnn Lodge, — near Dunmow ; Lord Maynard. An Eli- 
zabethean mansion in an elevated situation, surrounded by a 
spacious park, with water and shrubberies. 

Foulklow ne Hall, — near \\'it\iam , J. Bullock, Esq, A 
stately old mansion ; and, in the grounds, one of the largest 
cedar-trees in the kingdom. 

Ff/ij Ka//, — near Kelvedon ; C. C Weston, Esq. A neat 
modem building, and the grounds laid out with much judg- 
ment. 

X Gosfield Hall, — near Gosfield ; IVIarquis of Buckingham. 
A mansion of the domestic arcliitecture prevalent in Henry 
VII's reign. The grounds are of limited extent. 

Hare Hall, — near Romford ; J. A. Wallenger, Esq. An ele- 
gant mansion of Portland stone, with wings joined by colon- 
nades ; the pleasure-grounds are well laid out by Wood, a 
local landscape-gardener. 

Higham Hills, — near Woodford ; J. Harman, Esq. The 
house is on a high ridge, to the west of which is a fine park, 
bordering on f pping Forest, and containing a fine piece of 
water and many exotic trees. 

Hilf Hall, — near Theydon Mount ; Sir W. Smith, A hand- 
some quadrangular building on an eminence, with fine prospects 
over a well wooded park. 

Ingaiesione Hall, — near Ingatesfone ; Lord Petre. An irre- 
gular pile in a low situation, noted for its fishponds. 

ian^ord He//, — near Langford ; N. Westcome, Esq. A 
modem white house, in a finely wooded park. 

il/is/ej/ /To//, — near Manningtree; F. H. Rigby, Esq. The 
house has lately been much improved, and some plantations 
and pleasure-grounds laid out with taste. 

iVarei/ocAr 7?a//, — near Navestock ; Earl AValdegrave. A 
plain brick building, pleasantly situated amongst gardens and 
pleasure-grounds. 

Shortgrovc, — near Audley; Smith, Esq. A handsome 

mansion on an eminence, w'ith the river Granta at the foot of 
a lawn in front, from which the house is supplied by water 
from a machine designed by the celebrated mechanician. Dr. 
Desaguliers. The plantations and pleasure-ground are thriving 
and beautiful. 

Thorndon Hall, — near Brentwood ; Lord Petre. The man- 
sion, from a design by Paine, in the Corinthian style. The park 
and grounds well stocked with wood, and many of the trees of 
great rarity and value, having been planted by a fomier Lord 
Petre, mentioned by Ellis, in a letter to Linnaeus, as one of the 
greatest encouragers of botany of his time, and in short the 
Sia?canas of the age. 

Fa/(?ni/i!<;«, — near Wanstead; C. Cameron, Esq. Avenerable 
mansion and grounds ; tiie hot-house remarkable for a vine of 
the black Hamburgh kind, planted in 175S, and nearly as large 
and prolific as that at Hampton Court. 

Wamtead House, — near Wanstead ; Wellesley Long Pole, 
Esq. (1820.) A large and magnificent stmcture, the principal 
front -260 feet. The park is,very extensive, and abounds in old 
avenues, water, &c., laid out" by London and Wise. The 
present proprietor has made great improvements ; erected ex- 
tensive hot-houses in the kitchen -garden, and formed one of the 
largest American gardens in the kingdom, from designs by- 
Lewis Kennedy, Esq. The whole lately sold in lots. 

Weald Hall, — near Brook Sti-eet ; C Towers, Ejq, A 
handsome building in a large park, with rich gardens and 
plantations, and distinguished by an embattled prospect- 
tower. 

Wi!7/f!/,— near Badbrook; T. WaKord, Esq. An elegant 
residence with fine plantations, extensive pleasure-grounds, 
rich in exotic tiees, and containing some well constmcted 
ornamental buildings and a fine collection of English plants. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF BUCKINGHAMSHIRE. 



1071 



7543. HERTFQRDSHIRE, A surface of 302,080 acres, the north part forming part of a clialky ridge 
which extends across the kingdom in this direction, the rest agreeably varied. The soil is generally loamy 
or clayey, on a chalky sub-soil : there are many private gardens in the county of almost all descriptions ; 
a number of small nurseries and market-garcicn^, and some florists' market-gardens. The gardens at 
Moot Park and Cashiobury were formerly the most celebrated in the county. 



7544. T?ie viUas are less numerous than the de- 
mesne-residences. 
CrtcArt'ood Pai-A-, — near Market Street; Sir J. Sebright. -A. 

fccded ] 



abound- 



handiome mansion in a deliiii'.tiiil well- 
ing in stately beech-trees. The:? ;< a 
tirated in the first style I; -, who is distin- 

guished both as a grower c : ,eder of domestic 

animals. 

BreckeiHalL — Vie2xV,'eb. urne. A hand- 

some dwelling, from the - , - . i . ; the park and 
grounds beautiful, and mu.li eui^l-.nl by the river Lea, 
■which is here formed mto a har.dsome sheet of water. 
The park firm is scientifically cultivated, cluefly by the 
direction of Lady Melbourne. 

Bnckeiulen Buru, — near Hertford; Morgan, Esq. 

The park is latT^ej'and well furnished with woo<l and water. 

Brixxbourn Bury, — near Brosboui-n ; J. Eosanquel, Esq. 
The house is spacious, ssxd with the park has lately been 
much improved. 

Cocken/ialch, — near Royston ; Lady AVUls. A singular, 
but not unhandsome mansion, in a pleasant park. 

CoJneu House, — near London ColLney ; G. Anderson, Esq. 
A handsome and regular mansion, with wings ; the offices 
connected by an uiider^omid passage, and 'com.pletely en- 
veloped in evergreens. The park contains some fine oak and 
elm trees; the pleasure-grounds are extensive; the kitchen- 
garden well stocked with the best sorts of fruit-trees ; and 
there is a large green-house full of choice plants. 

Gabions, — "near North Mims; J. Hunter, Esq. In Henry 
A'll.'s time the seat of Sir John :\Iore, father to the illus- 
triotis Sir Thomas More. The gardens were then, and in 
the succeeding reign, celebrated for their splendor in the 
ancient taste. 

X Gorhaiiibury House, — near St. Albans ; Earl Verulam. 
A Corinthian house of brick stuccoed, by Sir Robert Taylor ; 
and a park of 600 acres, well stocked with line timber, par- 
ticularly beech. 

The Groi-e, — near 'Watford ; Earl of Clarendon. An 
irregular brick structure in a park three miles in ctrcum- 
fisrence, through which the river Gade flows in a divided 
stream. There is a farm of COO acres assiduously cultivated 
by his lordship, who pays the greatest- attention to every 
branch of farming. 

Eamels, — near Sacombe ; G. JleUish, Esq. The groimds 
laid out with much taste. 

Eemsted Bury, — near Kernel Hempsted ; Hilton, Esq. 

A neat house" and pleasant grounds in a mixed style be- 
tween the geometric and the modem manner. 

X PanAan^er, — near Hertford; Earl Co^vper. A fine 
situation, the "house lately improved, and the grounds plea- 
sant. The park contains a remjirkablv large oak^ 

Tiuobald's Park, — neax Cheshmit Sir G. B. Prescot. A 
residence of 300 acres, with a hajidsome majision erected 
on what was formerly a palace and park of Jaines I., who, 
having got possession of the park, by exchange, from the 
Earl of -Salisbury, enlarged and surrounded it with a wall 



ten mUes in circumference. "When Crcmvell's survey was 
taken in IGSO, it contained 250S acres, diversified with 
aveni'.es ai.d other masses of trees. The gardens were large, 
and ornamented with labyrinths, canals, and fountaiiis. 
The great garden contained severtd acres, and there was 
be-ides a pheasant, priv^-, and laundry garden. In the 
former v>-ere nhie knots, artitici?Jiy and e:iquisitely made, 
one of thetu in imitation of the kiiig's-arms. 

Tring pear Tring ; bir D. Smith. The house is 

iai-ge and convenient, ai:d the park consists of between 500 
and 4i,'ti acres, beautifully varied both with vmdulalions of 
surface .lud tine trees. 

irt/rfi-.-i V>\vc'hoi', — near 'W'atton ; S. Smitli, Esq. .4. spa- 
cious and elegant raai-.sicn, occupying one of the finest situ- 
ations in the couTity, built bv bir Tl-.omas Uurabold, and the 
kitcb.en-garden formed by i\falcoIn-.. The park is large, 
diversitied by liill and dale, and watered by several small 
streams, which tlow mto the river Beane,' in its course 
through the grounds ; it contains fine oaks, many of which 
are of gi-eat magnitude. The kitchen-garden is excellent and 
well managed. 

Ti'onnUhbttrii, — near "Worm ley ; Sir A- Hume. .A. good 
house an3 pleasant grovmds, but chiefly remarkable for its 
horticultural productions, Sir Abraham having introduced 
various new plants from Chhia and India. 
. 7545. The following maybe considered as first- 
rate residences. 

X Cashiol'tirii, — near Watford ; Earl of Essex. A spacious 
EUzabethean mansion ; and a park befsveen three and four 
miles in circumference, abounding in rich scenery and noble 
timber, originally planted by Le Notre. The pleasure-groimds 
are extensive, and contain a beautiful flower-garden in the 
Chinese style. The kilclien-garden is well cultivated, and 
also the home farm. The Earl of Essex, in Evelyn's time, 
was a great encourager of gardening, as is the present earl. 

X Hcctjidd House, — near Hatfield ; ::\Iarquis Salisbury. A 
n:agnificent Elizabethean mansion, in a finely diversified 
park watered by the river Lea, and containing some of the 
finest oak, ash, elm, and other trees in the county. There 
were originally two parks, one for red and the ctlier for fal- 
low deer ; and in one of them was a vineyard which was in ex.. 
istence at the time Charles I. was a prisor.er at Hatfield. 
In 179.3, a piece of ground of 17 acres in extent, was set apart 
for agricultural experiments, wliich are conducted with great 
science and assiduity by the marchioness. 

X Mcor-Park Hvu'se, — near Rickmansworth; Wil- 
liams, Eiq. A magniticent Corinthian mansion, by Giacomo 
Leoni, and the grounds laid out under the direction of the 
celebrated Lucy "Countess of Bedford, and afterwards mo- 
demijed by Brown, when the estate was in the possession of 
Lord Anson. The park is finely diversified with oak, ash, elm, 
and hme trees, so old as to be much decayed at their tops. This 
celebrated seat has been pra'.>ed by Bacon and Sir ^\^ Temple : 
and o!ie of its possessors B. H. Styles, Esq. was unfairly satir- 
ised by Pope, tor removing a hiil from the north front at an 
expense of oOOO?. 



7546. BL'CKIXGH.\MSHIRE. A surface of 318,400 acres, hilly, and abounding in some places in 
natural beech-woods, the soil rich, £-iid on chalk. It docs not abound in gardens or residences, but con- 
tains one long celebrated — Stow. The seedsmen procure many of their tree-seeds from the natural 
■woods of tlie county ; as beech-mast, from Amersham and High Wycombe, and also hornbeam, holly, 
haws, and juniper. Some of the nurserj-men procure their stocks for standard roses from the same woods, 
and fiorn copse-woods at their periodical fellings, or when they are to be rooted out. 

small place of no great note, but here introduced, because 



7547. Villas and demesne-residences. 

Butsirode, — near Beaconsfield ; the Duke of Somerset. 
The house is m no respect remarkable ; the park contains 
5000 acres, abounding in old oak and beeches. The gardens 
■were formerlv kept in good order, and also the farm. 

Chaljbnt ffoir^f, — near Chalfout St. Giles; in ISOO, 
Thomas Hibbert, Esq. The groimds were laid out by the 
former possessor with much taste and judgment ; and are 
finely ornamented with w ood, and adorned" with a pleasant 
piece of water. The gardens, in Mr. Hibbert's time, were 
richly stocked with tender exotics, especially heaths, and 
other Cape plants. 

Cliefden, — near 'Wobum (Eedi.) ; a seat founded by George 
Villiers, second duke of Buckingham, in the feian of 
Charles II. Burnt down in 1795." The groimds are' finely 
■varied by w-oods, which descend on the side of a steep liill 
to the Thames, and are celebrated by Pope in his Moral 

Fan-ley Court, — neax Fingest; Strickland Freeman, Esq. 
The mansion is handsome and spacious, with four fronts : 
it was built in 1684, from a design of Sir Christopher Wren. 
The grounds round the house are rather flat ; but the distant 
sceneJy is hilly, well wooded, and the windings of the Thames 
are seen along a beautiful vale. 

X Hall Barn, —near Beaconsfield; Edmund Waller, Esq. 
descendant of the poet, by whom the grounds were laid out 
in the ancient style, verging into a sort of wUduess at the 
extremities of the walks. The ground near the banqueting- 
house has been moved and remodelled by the poet at very 
considerable cost, and the place, on the whole, must have 
deserved the encomiums that were made on it when in its 
perfection, and in liigh keeping ; at present it is rather 
neglected. 

Hedsor Lodge, — neai Wobum; Lord Frederick Boston. 
The house is modem and elegant ; the grounds are distin- 
guished for their high sloping hills, deep valleys, and the 
■wild luxuriance of the woods, wlrich, combining with the bold 
swells or abmpt depressions of the surface, produce some very 
beautiful and ^Jicture^que scenery. The view from the brow o"f 
the hill, with the village churc'h: the winding Thames, and 
the distant hills clothed with beech-wood, is very fine. 
(ISOO) 

iot/wKr*,— near Chesham ; Lord George Cavendish. -A. 



referred to by G. Mason as having been laid out bv Brown. 

Shardeloes, — near .Imersham ; T. D. T. Drake, Esq. The 
house is a respectable modem edifice, from a design bj 
M. Adams, it is situated on the brow of a hill, overlooking 
a broad slieet of water, planned by Bridgenian. The park 
L5 much varied m surface, and richly clothed with beech- 
woods. 

Stoke P<!rA-,— near Stoke Pogies ; John Penn, Esq. The 
house was built in 1789, from the designs of James Wyatt, 
Esq. ; and the grounds laid out by H. iiepton, are beautiful, 
though of limited extent. 

n'oburn Ffirai, — near Wobivm ; Earl "Wharton (1770). 
This place was laid out as afer»tc orne'e, and was celebrated in 
the time of Wheatley, who gives a fiili description of it. It is 
now entirely obliterated, and the groimds let as a common 
farm. 

X ^I'vcombe Alb^y, — near M'ycom.be ; Lord Carrington. 
The house situated in a bottom, has lately been much im- 
proved In the Gothic style by 'Wyatt. The grounds 
contain a curious artificial cascade, executed by J. Lane, a 
stonemason, who executed the cascade at Bowood, in SVilt- 
shire, and is celebrated for his talent in this way. The park 
contains 'iOO acre>s, well wooded and watered, "and bounded 
on the south by high hills. 

Wycombe'Park, — near Al'ycombe ; Sir J. D. King, Bart. 
The house is small, bv W, ^\'are, in the Grecian stvle and ele- 
gant. The grounds form part of a vale, bordered by a stream, 
and are deservedly much admired for tlieir wood and water. 
They were laid out by Brown, -and received some improve- 
mentsfrom H. Repton. 

7548. The following are first-rate residences : — 

X Ashnd£:e Park, — near Hempsted; Earl of Eridgewater. 
The ancient abbey, lately pulled do^wn, and a magnificent 
Gothic mansion, erected from the designs of J. 'Wyatt ui 1815. 
The park is five miles in circumference, pleasingly varied with 
hill and dale, and furnished with some very fine oak and beech 
trees. The gaidens are extensive ; the culinary deiiartment is 
under the care of T. Torbron from Kew, an excellent gar- 
dener ; and the flower-garden contains several acres, full of va- 
riety, and laid out from the desisns of H. Repton, Esq. in 1814. 
The farm is managed by a Northumbrian baihff". 

X Storv, — near Buckingham ; Marquis of Buckingham. 



1072 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



The chief ornament of the county, and celebrated for nearly a 
century for its gardens. When beheld at a distance, this place 
appears Uke a vast grove, interspersed with columns, obelisks, 
and towers, which apparently emerge from a luxuriant mass of 
foliage. The gardens obtained their celebrity from the alter- 
ations effected by Lord Cobham, in the earlv part of the last 
century. The first artist employed was Bridgeman, whose 
drawings are still in possession of the marquis. Stowe was the 
most eminent place in the ancient style, and set the fashion of 
employing numerous statues and architectural ornaments. 
Kent was called in probably about 1755 or 1760; he aboUshed 



sereral formalities; 2md among other Improvements subeti- 

high w " ■ ... 
through the grounds, is astonished at the number, the l)eauty 



tuted the sunk fence for the hirfi 



A stranger, in passing 
2 number, the beauty, 
and the magnificence of the buildings ; and the house, with its 
extended front, elevated site, and extensive prospects, is a truly 
grand object. The gardens of every kind are kept in high 
order, especially the flower-gardens, lawns, and shrubberies, 
near the house. The buildings and other objects are too nume- 
rous to be even enumerated here ; a copious account of them, 
accompanied by plates, will be found in Seely's Description of 
Stow. 



7549. BEDFORDSHIRE. A surface of 260,000 acres, not much varied ; the soil sandy Ih many 
places, and a strong clay in others. It contains a few mansions, and the princely residence of the 
Duke of Bedford ; and the village of Sandy, on the borders of the countj', has long been famous for 
growing pickling cucumbers, which are sent to the London market, and sold by the bushel. 



Ampthill Park, — Ampthill ; Earl of Upper Ossory. The 
mansion, a superb edifice, built in the Grecian ^tyle ; the 
park contains 2000 acres, extensive and flat, but furnishes 
some pleasant prospects ; it has a fine water view, and many 
ancient oaks. 

Luion Hoo, — near Luton ; IMarquis of Bute. The house is 
large, and contains one good front by Adams; the library is 146 
feet in length, and inferior only to that of Blenheim. The park 
is extensive, well wooded, and watered by the river Lea, which 
expands into a lake, varied by islands at the base of the emi- 
nence on which the house is situated. The gardens of the farm 
•were formerly kept in high order, but are now (1S21) much 
neglected. 

Vrest, — near Selsey ; Baroness Lucas (1800). An ancient 
scat, the grounds of which were submitted to Brown, who 



formed here a noble serpentme i 
and has occasioned this ■ ' 

fordshire. They abound with architectural ornaments, and 
contain many fine large trees. 

X Wohurn Abbey, — near 'W'obum ; Duke of Bedford. A 
first-rate residence. The abbey, or palace, is in the Ionic style, 
very extensive, and was much improved in the end of the last 
century, from the designs of Holland. From the duke's 
apartments a covered way leads to a green-house, 140 feet in 
length ; and from the end of the green-house a piazza of 
nearly a quarter of a mile leads along the margin of a flower- 
garden to the dairy, a handsome Chinese building, ornamented 
with stained glass. The park is very extensive, varied in sur- 
face, and abundantly clothed with trees ; but it wants one fea- 
ture of essential importance, water. This might be given, but 
it would be at considerable expense. .At present there 
are several small pieces or lakes ; but they have no ef- 
fect in a general point of view, though some of them are 
pleasingly picturesque as recluse scenes. One of them, 
contrived to fall in the way of the approach, is crossed 
by a viaduct (.fe. 744.) designed by Repton. There 
are many fine old cedars, silver firs, and pines, in 
one part of (he park, which were planted under the di- 
rection of Miller; and there is a very tall beech with 
an erect stem, which has been noticed by Pontey. The 
gardens are extensive, and abundant in every thing ; 
and the farm has long been celebrated for the an- 
nual meeting of a^iculturists, called sheep-shearings, 
to which it gave rise, and at which all the eminent 
agrioulturists of the country, and many foreigners, 
are annually present. The late duke, Francis, it has 
been truly observed, did as an individual what is ge- 
nerally done by society; he rewarded invention, tos- 
tered ingenuity, and gave a fair trial to every new 
agricultural scheme. The present duke has not the 
same taste eis his late brother, but still keeps up the 
^nual meetings, and cultivates the park farm. 

7550. HUNTINGDONSHIRE. A dull, flat, humid, unhealthy surface, of 240,000 acres. 

Hinchinbroke House, — near Huntingdon ; Earl of Sandwich. |~ 
A large irregular building, built of stone and brick by the | 

7551. CAMBRIDGESHIRE. A surface of 500,000 acres ; little varied, but fertile and healthy. It is 
not remarkable as a gardening county ; but it contains a good botanic garden at Cambridge, and one or two 
extensive seats. The parent tree of the weeping-ash still exists in this country, at Gamblingay, in a field, 
close by a farm-house. It is a tall tree, with a naked stem and weeping top. The first graft taken from 
it was presented to the father of Miss Plumtree, who had the living of Wimpolc, and the second to Lord 
Hardwick's steward, about 1760, or later. {P/umtree's Residence in Ireland, p. 93.) The seedsmen re- 
ceive a good deal of clover-seed from Royston, and of white and yellow mustard from the Isle of Ely. 
Clark is the principal nurserjTuan at Cambridge. 




Public Promeiuides. — There are a few shady walks belonging 
to some of the colleges open to the public in general, and some 
private gardens ; but none of them any note. 

The Canibrid^e Botanic Garden vras established in 1763, 
by Dr. AValker, vice-master of Trinity College, who purchased 
nearly five acres about 1761 for that purpose, and gave it in 
trust to the Chancellor, Masters, and Scholars of the L^ni- 
versity, for the purpose of a public botanic garden. Tho- 
mas Martvn, the titular Professor of Botany, was appointed 
reader on plants, and Charles IMiller, son to Philip Mil. 
ler, (who had assisted Dr. A\'alker in choosing the ground,) 
was made first curator. To him succeeded Donn, who died 
in 1817, and was succeeded by Mr. A. Biggs, the present 
curator. This garden has obtained considerable celebrity en- 
tirely through the exertions of Donn, who, in a short time, 
formed a very extensive collection, and published the Hortus 
Cantabrifnensis. 

MaJingley, — near Long Stanton ; Admiral Sir Charles 
Hinde Cotton, Bart. The house is m the Elizabethean Gothic, 



and resembles that much-admired example of this style, Hol- 
land House. The grounds are umbrageous and picturesque. 

C/i/ppen/iam PizrA-, — near Newmarket; John Thorp, Esq. A 
magnificent mansion ; it was erected from a design of Inigo 
Jones, about the end of the seventeenth century, and the 
grounds laid out in the geometric style. The present proprietor 
has increased the property, and made very great improvements 
on the grounds. There is a beautiful sheet of water near three 
quarters of a mile in length, the joint work of the late Mr. 
Eames and Mr. Lapidge. The hoV-houses form a range of 
nearly 500 feet. In the plantations upwards of a milUon of 
trees have been planted. 

X Wimpole, - near Gamlingay ; Earl Hardwicke. The 
most splendid private residence in Cambridgeshire. The man- 
sion is a large brick strucmre ; the park is extensive, but rather 
flat ; the river Cam flows through it, and there are three lakes. 
The whole has been greatly improved, and the farming estab- 
lishment is eminently distinguished, and ranks with those of 
^Vobum and Holkham. 



7552. SUFFOLK A surface of 800,000 acres, generally level, the soil sandy towards the sea, but clayey 
inwards. It is an old county, and contains some venerable seats and woods. Great quantities of peas are 
grown for the London market at Woodbridge, and especially the pearl pea; LeostofF is famous for car- 
rots ; a good deal of clover, with some turnip-seed, is furnished from the different parts of the county; 
and there are good nurseries at Bury, Ipswich, and Barton Mills. 



Buru Botanic Garden — was established in 1S19, by W. Hud- 
son, at Chapel House, formerly of the ^\'ar-office, a great lover 
of plants. Its extent is between two and three acres, and the 
collection of hardy plants is already considerable. The ex- 
penses are defrayed by annual subscribers at two guineas each. 
It is in contemplation also to establish a botanic garden at 
Ipswich. 

Ainpton Ball, — nest Bury; Lord Calthorpe ; and Liver- 
mere, N. L. Acton, Esq. adjoining. The owners have made 
a noble river through both parks at their joint expense, by 
which means they have ornamented their estates to a degiee 
otherwise impossible. In Mr. .Acton's grounds the river ter- 
minates in a scoop, or painted perspective, in the Dutch 
style ; a thing rarely to be met in England. The Rev. M. 
Young, author of the Agricultural Survey of the County, has 
given a description of the river, and says, " the scoop has an 
excellent effect." 

Elredon HaH, — near Elvedon ; Earl Albemarle. A demesne 
cf 4000 acres: a few years ago, of barren sand, but now 
planted and improved ; the agriculture conducted with great 



skill and assiduity by the proprietor, who ranks high as a 
farmer and breeder. 

X £zi«/<»! ff<!//, — near Thetford; Duke of Grafton. Accra, 
modious red-brick mansion, with little decoration, surrounded 
by immense trees, and watered by the Ouse. The park con. 
tains 1450 acres, and an elegant temple designed for a ban- 
queting-house, by Kent, and erected in 1746- The late duke 
was an able and successful agriculturist, and kept upwards of 
3200 acres in his own hands. 

Flixton Hrti/, — near Becrles ; A. Adam, Esq. A noble 
structure, near the river ^^^aveney, in Inigo Jones's Gothic, 
built in 1615, but in excellent preservation. "The grounds con- 
tained originally some fine old woods, and have lately been 
enlarged and embellished with extensive plantations. 

Finhorough Hall — near Stow-market ; R. Pettiward, Esq. 
An elegant building of Woolpit brick, from a design by 
F. Sandys. The park, of 200 acres, gently slopes from the 
mansion, into a circular valley, through which runs a stream ; 
there is a fine winding walk to the church, and beautiful 
groups of straggUng thickets of trees. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF OXFORDSHIRE. 



1073 



H*n/iam, — near Ilenham i Lord Kous. An elegant modern 
mansion, and an extensive park and iileaiiirc-grounds, kept in 
excellent order. 

I-Idiniiijjhum Hall, — near Hflrnin^jham ; Earl Dysart. A 
house built in the time of Henry Vlil., surrounded by a moat, 
■which, as well as the basin in tiio park, is frequented by great 
numbers of wild fov/1. The park conijirehends 400 acres, and 
contains some of the finest old oaks in this iiart of the king- 
dom. The church is close to the )iark, ana near it a pic- 
turesque cottage, inhabited by a person, v/hose business it is 
to take caj-e of the vaults and splendid monuments of the 
Tolernache family, who possessed the estate in the reign of 
Edward I. 

Hevirrin^hmn Hall, — near Hiuitingfielu ; Lord Kuntingfield. 
One of Uie finest seats in the county ; the house a modern 
erection from the designs of .Sir Robert Taylor, and fini.-hed 
by ^V'yatt ; the front 200 feet long, and adorned with 
Corinthian columns. It is situated on an eminence in an ex. 
tensive park, which abounds in fine plantations, and is diver- 
sified by a noble piece of water near the l:ouse. The w;hole of 
this extensive property iias been improved by plantations,'which, 
in a few years, will give a new character to this part of the 
countrv. 

Ickn'orili Park, — v.ear Bury; Earl Bristol. An unfinished 
mansion, on a grand scale, from a design sent from Italy ; the 
park eleven miles in circtunfereuee, and containing 1800acre=. 



Liiennere, — near Fakcnham ; N. I.. Acton. An elKjant 
seat of white brick; the grounds Hat, but adorned with a fine 
piece of water, and well wooded. 

Redgrave £r«W, — near Bottesdale ; Admiral Wilson. A 
spacious mansion of \Voolpit brick, with Ionic columns; the 
park charmingly wooded, and adorned with a fine piece of 
water in front of the house. 

Reiulldsltam House, — near Rendlesham ; Lord Hendlesham. 
A princely residence : the mansion of great extent, modern, 
but in the Elizabethean style. The park and pleasure-grounds 
extensive, and highly kept. The former abounds in old wood, 
though rather deficient in undulations of staface. 

iiii67iiroo/c Hu//, — near Pakenham; K. Rushbrook, Esq. A 
noble spacious mansion with wings, forming three sides of a 
square; the park very extensive and well wooded, both with 
timber-trees, and undergrowths, furze, hollies, &c. for game. 

SiiMiirne Hull, — near Orford ; Marquis of Hertford. A 
sporting residence of the marquis ; the hall a plain quadran- 
gular building, covered with composition ; th.e park abounding 
in copse and ether covers for game, with cultivated patches 
sown with com and buck-wheat for the same purjjose. 

Vr'oolverion Hall, — near 'Woolvertcn ; C. Bemers, Esq. A 
house of the cream-colored brick of Wooli)it, with an Ionic 
portico, ])laced on the banks of the Orwell; the stables de- 
tached and rendered oniamental. The park is neatly laid out, 
and contains a handsome monumental obelisk of freestone. 



7553. NORFOLK. A surface of 1,210,000 acres ; every where flr.t, feniiy towards Lincolnshire; sandy 
in most places; and the rest a strong clay. It contains some good residences. At Norwich florists' 
flowers were first introduced into England by the refugee manufacturers from Flanders, about the 
middle of the sixteenth century. The principal nurseryman in the county is Mackay, of Norwich. The 
London seedsmen receive mustard-seed from Wisbeach, and some turnip and clover-seed from other 
quarters. 

7554. Villas and demesne - 
residences. 

Dlickling Hall,— r.ear Aihham ; 
Kight Hon. VV. A . Harbord. An 
interesting ancient mansion, sur- 
rounded with a moat, comxileted 
in 1628 : the gardens, at that 
time, containing an elegant wil- 
derness and lake. The park con- 
sists of 1000 acres, abounds in 
old trees, and the lake extends, 
in a crescent shape, for a mile, 
and its greatest breadth is 400 
yards. 

Felbriir^, — near Cromer ; 

Windham, Esq. A house partly 
of the time of Henry VII!. but 
subsequently enlarged; the park 
abounding in old woods, and 
greatly improved by the late pos- 
sessor, whose taste in such matters 
is evinced in his letter to E^pton. 

Gillingham Hall, — near Yar- 
mouth ; Lord Beresford. A neat 
venerable Gothic house (J?^.745.), 
■with some fine old trees, a hand- 
some piece of water, and ivied 
ruins of an old church. 

X Gunton Hall,— near Crormr; Lord Suffield. The park 
remarkable for its very extensive plantations. 

Ranworth,— near Cromer; R. L. Doughty, Esq. An ex- 
cellent modem house, situated in a small but very pleasant 
park, -well wooded, and laid out with great taste. 

Hillington Park,—ne3x Sechey; Sir i\I. B. Folkes. A resi- 
dence lately much improved, and the gardens, hot-walls, and 
hot-heuses, rendered very complete. 

Kirnberley Hall, — near Downham ; Lord Woodhonse. A 
convenient house, in an extensive and beautiful park, richly 
ornamented -with wood and water. 

X iJatraAaHi,— near ■\\'ells ; Marquis To wnsherd. A eom- 
fortable house, built in 1650, by Inigo Jones; the grounds 
extensive, naturally suited for improvement, but not much 
improved. 

Waitingham Hoa*c,— near Walsingham; H.L. Wainer,Bsq. 




A commodious house, ar.d grounds which have been under 
a coui-se of improvement for several years, and are now 
highly beautiful. A rivulet is swelled to a lake, and a judicious 
use made of the ruins of a priory which formerly existed 
here. 

Wolterlan Hall, — near Aylsham ; Lady "VValdegrave. An 
elegant modern mansion, built by Ripley tlie architect, under 
the direction of Horace Walpole, in 1730. The park is large 
and well ornamented with wood and water. 

7555. The following are first-raie residences : — 
X Holkham Hall,— ne3x Wells ; T. y,'. Coke, Esq. One of 
the best mansions in England, in point of comfort and ar- 
rangement. The park extensive, flat, and sandy ; but varied 
by trees and farming processes continually going' on, and con- 
taining a piece of water for which Reptoii contrived a boat 
{,fig. 746.) so constructed, that by means of 
a cylinder and rope (B), and machinery 
enclosed in a box (C), and connected with 
the rope (D); the boat may be moved from 
one side of the water to the other, according 
as the handle (E) is turned to the right 
or left. 

X H trghion Hall, — near Wells ; Earl 
(^hohnondeley. A noble freestone struc- 
ture, with two fronts, wings with cujio- 
las, and one of the best dining-rooms for 
proportions and conveniences in England. 
• " ■ The park is extei-Lsive, but dull and' flat : 

it contains some fine old beech-trees. 

7556. OXFORDSHIRE. A surface of 450,000 acres, considerably varied by ridges, approaching, in 
some places, to the character of hills ; the climate cold, and the soil in most parts thin, on a stony sub-soil. 
It contains the magnificent residence of Blenheim ; some others of great extent, and a botanic garden at 
Oxford. There are no commercial gardens in the county worth mentioning. 



746 




7557. Public gardkns. 

Public Promenades aiul College Gardens The promenades of 

Magdalen College are umbrageous and varied, considering that 
they are merely walks round meadows on raised mounds, 
bordered by hedges and hedge-row trees. The public avenues 
are magnificent, and as well adapted for display as the others 
are for retired exercisi> or conversation. There are private 
gardens to most of the colleges ; their form is generally square 
or oblong, surrounded by a broad walk and intersected by 
others ; that of Christchurch is famous for its fig-trees, planted 
in 1648; that of Trinitj' for its verdant sculptures; and that 
of St. John's College, for being laid out by Brown, in the 
modern style, in 1773. 

The Botanic Garden of Oxford— vr as founded by Henry Earl 
of Dan by, in 1632; it contains five acres, a green -house and 
stove, and a gardeners' house. The first curator was Bobart 

3 



from Brunswick, in whose time, and in that of his son, who 
succeeded Itim in 1679, it was m.ore worthy of notice than it 
has been since. Its present curator is William Baxter, A. L. S. 
and F. H. S. 

7558. Villas and de?nes7ie.residences. 

Eadgmoor, — near Henley; .7. Grote, Esq. Forty acres of 

Sleasine-gi'ound and a house; in the former a summer-house, 
:om which fine views are obtained through vistas formed by 
shrubs, the holly and other dark greens being placed m tlie 
fore-groiuid. 

Coonibe Lodge, — near Henley; S. (iardiner, Esq. A flat 
place, rendered interesting by every thing that art could effect 
by planting. 

Grofe Coitege, — near Stokenchurch ; K. Davis, Esq. Truly 
an elegant cottage-dwelling ; neat, commodious, simple, ana 
harmonised with the rural scenery around. 

z 



1074 STATISTICS OF GARDENING. Part IV. 



X MidiUelim Sloney,—neax Bicester; EarlJersey. An ex. 
tensive unvaried residence ; but greatly improved both as to 
tlie house and grounds by the present possessor. 

MoiigemM, — at Mongewell ; Bishop of Durham. The man- 
ion unfivcrably placed, but the attached grounds extensive, 
and arrdnged with much taste. 

X NumkLm-Courtenayi—nesi Oxford; Earl Harcourt. A 
Grecian house, in part by Brown ; the grounds laid out by this 
artist, and the flower-garden, which has been much admired, 
in part by him, and in part by Mason the poet. The park 
i-ontains 1500 acres, and a beautifully varied drive is conducted 
through it. 

Sherbournc Caslle,— near Wattlington ; Earl Macclesfield. 
Surrounded by a broad and deep moat, ar.d approached by 
three drawbridges, the chief entrance guarded by a portcullis. 
The park contains sixty acres, but is flat and uninteresting ; 
the pleasure-grounds have been lately improved ; a flower- 
garden laid out in a chaste taste; an extensive conservatory of 
stone and cast-iron erected: and also a pavilion for the recep- 
tion of floAvers in the more genial summer months. 

Thame Park, near Thame : Miss Wykham. Two hundred 
acres of very rich pasture-land, skirted with wood, but rather 
flat, originally laid out by Brown, and the pleasure-giounds, 
now improving, contain a good conservatory. 

X Woi-mi/ei/, — near Stoken Church; John Fane, Esq. The 
house on a very elevated site, the grounds of little merit or 
beauty, but the proprietor an excellent farmer and breeder. 

Wroxton, — near Banbury ; Earl (juildford. A building in 
the abbey style, of considerable antiquity ; and what renders 
the place particularly interesting, the geometric style of garden- 
ing is kept up in every improvement introduced in the pleasure- 
grounds. 

7560. BERKSHIRR A surface of 476,160 acras, finely varied by low hills and vales, the air healthy, 
and the soil good, and well cultivated. It contains numerous villas and mansions. The neighborhood 
of Reading is noted for the white-skinned, or Reading onion, the bulbs of which .-'.re grown in quantities 
for the London market, and the seeds for the seedsmen. Cabbage-seeds are also grown in quantities 
there, and asparagus grown both for the Bath and London markets : and there is a good nursery occupied 
by Swallow. 



7559. The following are first-rate residences: — 

X BhiiJteim,— at Woodstock ; Duke of Marlborough. The 
most princely private residence in Britain, or in Europe, too 
universally celebrated to require any eulogium. The palace 
and bridge by V'anburgh ; the grounds by London and Wise, 
and subsequently by Browm. The finest view is on entering 
from the ^^^oodstock gate ; but the scenery is everywhere grand 
and magnificent. The pleasure-ground" walks are extensive 
and varied ; and there is a drive of eleven miles round the 
park. Part of the latter is cultivated as a farm. The lake is 
the largest piece of artificial water in England : the diameter 
of the centre arch of the bridge is 101 feet. There is little of 
culture either in the kitchen or flower-garden; the latter 
was an oval, with a beisin of water in a centre ; and radiating 
walks, after the plan of that of INIadame de Pompadotir at 
\'ersaiUes. Unhappily (as we think) it has lately been destroyed, 
and an aviary erected on its site. 

X i>!Vc/i/ey,_neai- M'oodstock ; Lord Dillon. A good house, 
by Gibbs ; the grounds very extensive, and intersected by an 
avenue of five miles, in the centre of which the house is placed, 
and at the opposite extremities are seen in a clear day, the 
palace of Blenheim and Heythorpe House. The natural 
copses on the estate are intersected by narrow alleys in 
all directions, clipped on tlie sides to facilitate the shooting of 
game. 

X Hefjlhorpe, — near Enstone; Earl of Shrewsbury. A 
superb mansion in the Italian style, approached by a magnifi- 
cent avenue, formed by square" platoons of ehn-trees. The 
grounds chiefly in the ancient taste, with curious artificial cas- 
cades. There are also extensive hot -houses. 



7561. FiHas and demesne-residences. 
Beaumont Lod^e, — near Windsor : Henry Griffiths, Esq. 
The house is in the Gothic style by Mr. Elwyn, arcliitect, of 
Windsor; the park contains one hundred acres, sloping to the 
Thames, and finely varied by wood. 

X Benham House, — near Speen ; Earl Craven. The house 
is in the Ionic style, with an elegant iiortico ; the grounds 
agreeably varied and richly wooded, and contaui a handsome 
sheet of water, supplied bv the river Kennet. 

Cafe)i/iani, — near Reading ; C. Marsac, Esq., is in 
shire, though so near the cajutal of Berkshire. It i: 



place, celebrated in Observations on Modern Gardening;, 
. ' ' ppr 

with the scattered trees descending their steep sides, and ap- 



the beauty of the approach, which is between two hilis. 



Broaching and retiring from the road in beautiful variation. 
The house is plain, elegant, large. 



ituated on an eminem 
and forming "a conspicuous object from the surrounding 
country. The park is not extensive, but is much varied, so as 
to appear more considerable than the amount of its contents 
would indicate. The garden-sceuery is agreeable ; but the 
horticulture not remarkable. The whole was laid out by Lord 
Cadogan, with the assistance of Brown. 

Chelsey Fanii, — near Wallingford ; in 1800 the property of 
Lord Kensington, and formerly reputed to be the largest and 
most compact farm in England. Kent 1000/. per annum. 
Before the desolation of monasteries, it belonged to the Abbot 
of Reading, who had a seat here. The great bam in which his 
tithes were deposited is yet standing, and measures 101 yards 
in length, and eighteen in breadth. The side walls are only 
eight feet high, but the roof rises to a great height, and is 
supported by seventeen stene pillars, each four yards in 
circumference. 

CoteWHHoHsc, — near Coleshill; Viscount Folkstone. The 
house isaperfect and unaltered specimen of the taste of Inigo 
Jones, from whose design it was erected in 1650. The park is 
not large, but is very agreeable. 

Donnhigton Grove, — near Speen ; WiUiam Brammel, Esq. 
The house is a handsome modem building. The park weil 
•wooded, and enriched by views to Donnington Castle. It con- 
tains a piece of water judiciously managed! 

X Part P/ace, — near Henley; Earl of Malmsbury, son of 
the cslebrated author of Herynes. Originally formed at great 
expense by Field Marshal Conway, and mentioned by the 
Prince de Ligne, in his Coup d'ceil sur Ics plus beaux Jardins de 
I'Burope, as one of the finest seats in England. The present 
proprietor purchased the estate from the widow of the marshal 
in 1796, and greatlv improved the mansion, with the assistance 
of the architect, Holland. It is situated below the brow of 
a lofty range of hills, which accompanies the winding of the 
Thames for several miles. " The many interesting objects con- 
centrated in this demesne, are calculated to excite even the 
most latent energies of poetic description. The grounds com- 
bine beauty, grandeur, and variety. The composition of the 
home scenery is bold, and the distant prospects varied and ex- 
tensive. The steep sides of the hills, with their chalky pre- 
cipices, are overhung with grand masses of stately beech, in- 
terspersed with evergreens, which extend to the margin of the 
stream, and from various points of the landscape, appear Uke an 
immense verdant amphitheatre. The projecting lawns corre- 
spond with the sublimity of the contiguous scenery, and unite in 
forming a diversity of rich and beautiful prospects." 

Selrvood Park, — near Sunning Hill; James Sibbald, Esq. 
The house is a handsome modem building from the designs of 
Robert Mitchell; the grounds consist of 300 acres, the 
principal part of which is laid out as aferme ornee. A fine ride, 
of about four miles in extent, embraees the principal part of 
the scenery, which is richly diversified with stately trees and a 
large piece of water. 

X White J?nig-Wi, —near Reading; Duke of Marlborough 
(1S20). The house is a plain building, situated in the centre 



of the grounds, rather low, and close to an irregular sheet of 
water. This place is mentioned by Wheatley as one of the 
earliest examples of a ferme orn^e. The present proprietor has 
rendered it celebrated for iU botanic riches, in which, if it does 
not surpass, it may vie with any residence in the empire. 
There is a large walled gaiden studded with hot-houses of 
every kind, and another surrounded by ahedge and sunk fence, 
laid out in the ancient style, and aboimding with s'?ats and 
curious rustic huts. The whole has been lately described and 
illustrated by highly finished plates, from the pen of Mrs. and 
the pencil of Mr. Hoffland. (See Description of White Kmghis, 
fol.i819.) ^ 

X WooJley Lo</^'-f, — near Reading; James "Wheeble, Esq. 
The mansion is a neat modem etCfice, built by the present 
proprietor's father, in the time of George II. The grounds 
were tastefully laid out by Repton, who mentions this seat in 
his work. The park having, in 1817, been greatly enlarged 
by an extensive enclosure ; the author of the present work was 
employed to give designs, which have since been executing 
under the eye of the proprietor, who has great taste and con- 
siderable skill in nural improvements ; ancf is a well informed 
truly amiable man. 

7562. Royal residences. 

Frofcmore (Frog-moor), —near Windsor; the favorite re- 
sidence of the Queen of George III. The house is not large, 
but neat ; the grounds occupy a valley, thirteen acres of which 
is laid out in pleasure-ground, highly enriched by flowers 
and artificial objects. The whole is diversified with a piece of 
water, of irregular shape, and winding in different directions, 
in one place approaching the house, "and in another retiring 
beneath the thick woods. " In this sweet, sequestered spot, 
every thing is serene and pleasant. The devious path, the 
umbrageous thicket, the dilapidated ruin, and secluded tenople, 
all conspire to render it peculiarly interesting. Exclusive ofthe 
variety of indigenous and exotic trees and shrubs, which are scat- 
tered through the grounds, there are fine ornamental buildings 
respectively denominated the Gothic Temple, the Ruin, the 
Hermitage, the Temple of Solitude, Uie Chinese Cottage, and the 
Bam. The Ruin was erected from a design by \V. Wyatt; 
and being seated on the water's edge, partly embowered in 
woods, and diversified with fractures in the walls, and ivy, it 
constitutes a truly picturesque ornament when seen from 
various points of 'view. The Hermitage is a small, circular, 
thatchecl building, situated in the south west comer of the 
garden, and completely embowered with lofty trees. It was 
constructed from a drawing of the Princess of Hesse Homberg, 
when Princess Elizabeth, whose taste and skill in drawing 
are allowed to be considerable- The smrrounding scenery is 
justly contrived to assimilate with the character of the place, 
the view of every distant object being excluded by trees and 
underwood. These improvements were superintended by 
IMaior Price, brother to Uvedale Price, Esq. the celebrated 
author of the Essays on the Picturesque." (Beauties of Eng. 



and Wales (1801.), : 

Since the death of the queen, in 1818, the groimds have been 
respectably kept up by the female part of the royal family who 
reside there. 

Windsor Castle. — The principal residence of the British 
sovereigns. It was originally a hunting seat of William the 
Conqueror ; improved by Henry I., and the park surroimded 
with a wall; greatly improved by Edward III., under the 
celebrated arcmteot, William de Wyckham, who, in 1357i 
superintended the works at a shilling per day, and ultimately 
made a fortune by the king's employment. Oueen Elizabeth 
raised the terrace on the north side; Charles H. repaired and 
embellished the whole structure, and much was done by 
George III., under the direction of W. "W^yatt. The avenues 
in the park were planted by Charles II., who also formed a 
bowUng-green ; but this, with a flower-garden formed by Queen 
Anne, were destroyed during the late and preceding reigns. 

7563. GLOUCESTERSHIRE. A surface of 800,000 acres ; elevated, hiUy in many parts, and the 
climate cold ; low, fertile, and humid, however, on the banks of the rivers, as in the "Vale of Gloucester. On 
the borders of Monmouthshire are some woods of lime-tree, from the bark of which ropes are made for fishery 
and agricultural purposes. There are a number of nurserymen in this county, of which the principal are 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF MONMOUTHSHIRE. 



1075 



Sweet and Miller of Bristol, who are the most extensive garden-tradesmen in the west of England. Miss 
Wheeler has a nursery at Gloucester, which was founded by her father, the author of a Gardener's 
Dictionary. 



-eye view of 



7564. The followmg are villa-7-esidences : — 
Blaize C<rs«e, — near Bristol ; J. Harford, Esq. The house 

is an elegant Grecian desif^n by Nash; the grounds are 
recluse, well-wooded and highly beautiful. Not far distant 
is a picturesque village of thatched cottages, also from the 
designs of Nash, the habitations of pensioners of the pro- 
prietor. 

Buenos Ayres, — near Painwick ; B. Hyett, Esq. The house 
is a handsome modern edifice, judiciously joined to woods, and 
embellished by new plantations. 

C/ie«e7i/i«m, — Tomlyns, Esq. The gardener (Evans) has 
formed a brick drain along the front ot his vine-border. This 
drain is furnished with hopper funnels at each end, through 
which liquid manure is sujiplied to the roots unaccompanied 
by the unpleasant smells which are dispersed around when tliis 
manure is poured on the surface. 

Prinknaiih, — ne3X Tewkesbury ; T. B. Howel, Esq. A low 
Elizabethean house, on an elevated site, commanding extensive 
prospects. Considerable improvements were made by the pre- 
sent proprietor in 1806. 

7565. Mansion and demesne residences. 
Badmington House, — Sudbury ; Duke of Beaufort. The 

house is an extensive building, on a French model, erected 
in 1682 ; the park is nine mUes in circumference, intersected 
by noble avenues. The gardens were celebrated in the first 
duke's time ; but are at present rather neglected. 

Barnsley Park, — near Bibvtry ; James Slusgrave, Esq. The 
mansion is a sumptuous edifice, in the Italian style. The 
park is three miles m circumference, and contains some exten- 
sive plantations. 

X Barrington Hall, — near Great Barrington ; LordDynevor. 
The house is an elegant Doric structure; in the grounds 
is a good specimen of a fenne orn^e : the park is well wooded, 
and three mDes in circumference. 

Clear WM, - near Newlands ; T. Windham, Esq. A hand- 
some mansion and plantations around it well disposed. 

Dyrham, — near Surdbury ; W. Brathwayte, Esq. A hand- 
sonie mansion, with a front of 130 feet, and a park of 500 acres. 

Dunstbourne Abbots, — ne^r North Cemey; Sir M. S. Pley- 
dell. A villa on a singular plan, situated on an eminence 
distin^ished for the beauty of its scenery. 

Guiting Park, — near ^V'ithington ; Snell, Esq. The house 

is elegant and compact, and the grounds beautifully varied 
and well wooded. 

Hi/fhrneadorv, — near Newiiham; Lord Gage. A noble man- 

7566. WORCESTERSHIRR A surface of 500,000 acres ; hilly in many places, as at Malvern and 
Broomsgrove, but in general low and very fertile, as in the Vale of Evesham. There are some good resi- 
dences. The white onion is extensively grown near Evesham; asparagus and cucumbers for the Bir- 
mingham market ; carrot-seed at VVoolverley ; crab-stocks, and currants for their fruit, at Pershore ; 
from which place crab-pips are received by the London seedsmen. 

Blackmore Park, — near Malvern ; T. Homyold, Esq. J 
elegant modem building ; the park well wooded, but rather 
too formal a manner 



sion, in a bold situation, containing a fine bird's 
the village. 

Hifrliuam Court , — neur Gloucester; Sir B. W. Guise. A 
mansion by Inigo Jones ; an extensive park, and pleasure 
grounds, judiciously disposed. 

X King's Wcslon, — near Clifton ; Lady de Clifford. The 
house, one of Vanburgh's best designs, in a situation rarely 
equalled for beauty and grandeur. 'I'he park abounds in fine 
oaks and elms; the pleasure-grounds v/ith American plants; 
and there are good kitchen and flower gardens. The views, 
towards the Severn and the Avon, ravish the senses v. ith their 
grandeur and beauty, and render this place one of the finest in 
the county. 

Lydnt-y Park, — near Lydney ; Rt. Hon. C. B. Bathurst. An 
old mansion, and near it some fine woods. 

X Oakley Grove, — near Cirencester; Earl Bathurst. A 
mansion in the old French style, amidst pines and other ever- 
green trees. 

Renikombe,— near Chedworth, S. Barrington, Bishop of 
Durham. The mansion is elegant and the jiark extensive, 
abounding in wood, and furnishing fine prospects. 

Sherborne House, — near Sherborne; Lord Sherborne. A 
monasterial-like mansion of two quadrangles ; with two parks, 
each betv. een three and four miles in circumference. 

Souiham House, — near Cheltenham; T. B. de la Bere, Esc|. 
a venerable and far-famed mansion of Henry Vlll. It is 
of two stories, and more entire than almost any building of that 
aira in England. The situation commands some fine pros- 
pects in front, and is backed by old and picturesque woods. 

Sluke House, — near Clifton; Dowager Duchess of Beaufort. 
A spacious castellated house in an extensive park, commanding 
line views along the Vale of Bristol. 

Stuui's Hill, — near Uley ; L. Baker, Esq. A har.dsome mo- 
dem edifice with octagonal projections, tnrreted and orna- 
mented in the pointed style, and surrounded by fine beech- 
woods. 

i'/on'c//, — near Northleach; Lord Stowell. The house is on 
an eminence, in a pleasant park of 100 acres, embellished by 
well arranged plantations. 

Todilinglun House, —near Toddington ; C H. Tracy, Esq. 
A spacious Elizabethean building, with gardens and pleasure- 
grounds in the modem style, and a park of 150 acres. 

Wh.itcombc Park, — near MaUem; Sir W. Hicks. Situated 
at the base of some connnanding eminences, finely clothed wiUi 
beech-trees. 

Williamstrip, — near Colne. An elevated site, but the house 
well sheltered by plantations. 



XCroome Courf, — near Upton; Earl of Coventry. Natui'ally 
a dull flat place, but made what it is by Brown, who both 
designed the house, and laid out the grounds. This place has 
always been remarkable for the degree of neatness and order 
in which it is kept. 

Dailsfortl, — at Dailsford; late the residence of 

Warren Hastings, Esq. A handsome house, in a commanding 
situation; the grounds tastefully laid out, and a piece of 
■water formed ; but the design of the whole evidently incom- 
plete. 

Gatcomh Park, — near Minchinhampton ; David Ricardc, 
Esq. A small place with a handsome house, beautifully dis- 
posed grounds, and a good kitchen-garden. 

Hagley,— near Broomsgrove; Lord Lyttelton. A square 
house, with raised pavilions at the angles, in a park long cele- 
brated for the beautiful undulations of its surface, and the 
fine scattered groves and thickets of beech and other trees. 
As a seat, however, it is deficient in having no pleasure-ground 
or flower-garden scenery near the house. This must materially 
lessen the comforts of its possessors in the winter months, who 
must cross the open park before they can get to gravel-paths 
of any kind. The original dell of shrubbery and waterfalls, 
formed by the first Lord Lyttelton and Shenstone, was denu- 
dated some years ago, and only the timber- trees left. 

Ham Court, — near Upton; J. Martin, Esq. An elegant 
mansion, lately built, situated on a rising lawn, studded with 
plantations in an elegant style of improvement. 

Hanhury Hall, — near Droitwich ; J. Phillips, Esq. A fine 
old mansion, dated 1710, full of large windows (the window 
tax being then unknown), with every thing comfortable within, 
and surroimded by a well-wooded park of 130 acres. 

Hervell Grange, — near Broomsgrove; Earl Plymouth. A 
very extensive house, dated 1712, in the midst of a pleasant 
park, with hills gently swelling, and a lake of about 50 acres. 
The plantations are extensive, and abound with oaks, in various 
stages of growth. 

Kyre Wyre, — near Tenbury ; Pytts, Esq. An elegant 

mansion, in a highly picturesque park, through which nms 
a rapid stream ; the distant views, like all those in this part of 
the country, very picturesque, from its broken and undulating 



outlines, tufted with lofty trees, or smiling with cultivation 
and enlivened by the meandering course of the AVye. 

Lee Castle,— near Kidderminster; J. Knight, Esq. Re- 
markable for its kitchen-gardens and lofty hot-houses for 
fruiting rare exotics, and in which the lee-chee ripened its fruit 
in 1819, for the first time m England. 

Madresjield (Mothersfield), — near Blalvem; Lord Beau- 
champ. A baronial castle modernised, surrounded by a fine 
extent of lawn and plantations. 

Northwick, — near Broadway ; Lord Northwick. An ancient 
house, modernised, with an extensive and well planted park. 

0»!4eri% Court, — near Worcester; Marchioness of Down- 
shire. A mansion recently much improved, in the midst of a 
park, flat but extensive, and bordered by the Severn. 

Stamford Couj-t, — nearSlodon; Sir T. Winnington. A com- 
modious and substantial house, situated in an ample park, con- 
taining two large pieces of water ; the wliole rather deficient 
in plantations. 

riiorn Grove, — near Worcester ; Lamotte, Esq. A 

plain mansion on an eminence, with an extensive lawn and 
serpentine lake, bordered with thriving plantations. 

Tickenhill, — at Bewdley ; Ingram, Esq. A delight. 

fully situated house, in a well wooded park., commanding fine 
wild views over a dell to Wyve forest. Through the indul- 
gence of the possessor, it is used by the inhabitants of Bewdley 
as a public promenade. 

Whitby Court, — near Stockton; Lord Foley. A newly 
improved and improving seat, which, when the plantations ai-e 
grown up, will be truly magnificent. 

Westrvood House, — near Droitwicli ; Sir J. Packington. A 
fine old EUzabethesm mansion, sunounded by garden-courts, 
flanked by towers and other architectural appendages. It 
stands on an eminence in a very extensive park, much varied 
in surface, and with extensive oak-groves, commencing at a 
certain distance from the house, and extending outwards like 
the gores of a circle, leaving large avenues between . There is 
a piece of water of sixty acres, and situations where other 
pieces might be formed. 

Winterdyne, — near Bardley ; Moseley, Esq . A most 

elegant villa on a hill, embowered in deep tufted shades, covered 
in some places with ivy, and surrounded with ornamented 
walks interspersed with Gothic seats, towers, and hermitages, 
and displaying fine views of the Severn and its banks. 



75G7. MONMOUTHSHIRE. A surface of 340,000 acres; hilly, romantic, rich in pasture and wood- 
lands ; abounding in ruined castles, and containing some picturesque seats. The Vale of Usk in this 
county, like that of Clwyd in North Wales, and Montgomery, presents the finest scenery in Wales. ' 



Llanerth House, — near Llanerth; T. Jones, Esq. A good 
house, by' Nash, and agreeable grounds, with a piece of 
water, laid out by Lappige. 

Llanwer7i House, — near Newport; late Sir Robert Salisbury, 
Bart. A handsome brick house, on an eminence, surrounded 
by plantations, chiefly by Sir R. Salisbury, the late proprietor. 

Piercejield, — near Chepstow; N. Wells, Esq. An elegant 
house of freestone; the grounds extensive, celebrated by 
tourists for their romantic walks and views along a precipice 



washed by the Wye, and described by Wheatley in Observ- 
ations. The place owes its celebrity to Valentine Morris, 
Esq. who began to improve it about 1740. 

Pmiiy-pool Park, — near Pontypool ; C. H. Leigli, Esq. A 
substantial mansion, with most romantic grounds, well furi 
nished with wood, water, rocks, some orpamental buildings 
and excellent views. 

Tredegar Park, — near Abergavenny ; Sjr C G. Morgan. A 
substantial brick mansion of the time of Charles II. ; the park 



3 Z 2 



107G 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part I\. 



I complete gentlesiian, delighted mucli in fine gardens and 
orchards." The same fjardens v. ere famous in Henry VIII.'s 
time, when in possession of AV^illiam Herbert, wlio, we are in- 
formed bv Evans (Letters on IVoU^, 1S4.), sent two men, by 
the names of Kichards and Williams, to France and Flanders, 
for the esi)re3s purpose of studying horticulture, and importing 
esculent vegetables and choice tVuit-trees. 



extensive, and finely, diversified with variegated features, soft 
and abrupt, champaign, and acclivous, covered with noble 
plantatioris of oak, beech, and Spanish chestnut. 

Troy House, — near Monmouth; Marquis of Worcester. A 
house by Inigo Jones, on the banks of the Trothy. This seat 
was famed for its gardens in Charles I.'s time, and especially 
for its delicious fruits. In the apoiihthegms of the i"\Iarquis o"f 
Worcester, it is stated that " hir Thomas Somerset, a very 

7563. HEREFORDSHIRE. A surfuce of6U0,000 acres; cauch varied by hills, some of which approach 
the character of mountains ; it abounds in natural and planted woods, and in ploughed and grass or- 
chards ; and the soil is everyv.'here deep and rich. There are some fine seats, and the county will 
hereafter be celebrated in gardening- history as being the birth-place or residence of Uvedale Price and 
R. P. and T. A. Knight. 



Relmont , — nesx Lower Eaton; Matthews, Esq. A 

romantic situation on the ^\'ye. 

Rerrin^toii, — near Leominster ; JU 
square modern edifice of white stone, in 
XDiwiituH Castle, — near Ludlow; 
Pres. of the Hort. Soc, built bv his bn 
the celebrated author of The Lands. 
Aiuihilical Iw/idr,/ into the Pnnci^j/t 
elegant and classic v/orks. The house 



T. Ilariey. A 
nt park. 
Knight, Ksq. 
night Esq. 
<f, a poem ; of the 
of Taste, and other 
of stone, wiUi towers. 



a plea^rm 

T. A. 
tl-.er li. r 



/?((rc»v)(,J, _.near Llanfi-other; Sir H. Hoskyns. The man- 
sion lately improved; the park well wooded. 

X Hohn Lace;j — near Hereford; formerly the Duke of Nor- 
folk. The mansion El;'/al)ethean, and kept in perfect preserv- 
ation as a national curiosity ; the grounds pleitsant ; the old gar- 
den on the model of that at Hampton (\iurt, IMiddlesex, with a 
spacious terrace : it abounds in yews, formerly dipt in shapes, 
and not far distant is a pear-tree v. hicli covers nearly a quarter 
^f an acre, and yields annually from twelve to sixteen hogsheads 
ofperry. 

Hoi<e ii);-?,— neai- Ledbury ; .T. i\r. Barelt, Esq. The house and 
gi-ounds reoentlv improved from our desigiis ; the latter higlrly 
romantic by nature, a.ul well wooded. ' 

X Kcotdinrcli, — r.ear Llanfrother ; J. Scudamore, Esq. 
{r:sci:rdamoiirs, Eajt/cr i!'Ainotirs, squire or as:,i,tant in love 
matters.) A pleasant situation, with a park of Uiree or four 
miles in cirru;nference. 

ioiiiT'i'iji-i/i, — near Bromyard; J. AValwyn, Esq. 'A good 
mansion, recently erected, and the gi'ounds well timbered. 

il/fcii,'/ PiiiA, — near Llanfrother; Sir 11. Symmonds. A 
plain brick mansion ; but the grounds richly wooded. 

Mocais Cuiiri, — near Longtov.-n ; ."^ir G. A. Comwall. A 
good house, delightfully situated on the soulhei-:i bank of 
the Wye, with a large pn.rk, finely clothed with ook, and re- 
markable for a variety of that tve^- with wee])ing spray. The 
only other specimen we knov.- of is in th ; botanic garden at 
Am-lerdam. The growth of the oak in this part of the coun- 
try is supposed to be more rapid than anyw here else. 

'/{(Jiherasi — near Hereford ; C. Bodenliam, Esq A spacious 
brick mansion, and gi-ounds containing ome gooa timber. 

Court, — near Blortimcr's Cross; Lady Bateman. 
An elegant seat; the park between three and four miles In 
extent, contains rich and picturesque scenery. 

tHok-e, — near Bromyard ; Lord Foley. A spacious brick house 
-witli a terrace in front : the park and grounds well wooded, 
and considerably improved under the direction of H. Rcpton. 

Siifloit Couii,— near Bromyard; Hereford, Esq. A 

liancisome mansion of Bath stone; the grounds improved by 
H. Uepton. 

7553. SHROPSHIRE. A .surface of 849,940 acres ; mostly flat, with some hills ; the soil generally 
good. It contains a number of good nurseries ; and sends to London baking-plums and walnuts in large 
quantities. 



and embattled walls, but internally finished in the Grecian 
style. The jiark abounds in inequ ilities of surface and natural 
woods, which stretch along the banks of the Tame; a stream 
which flows through the grounds, to the extent of about three 
miles, over a rugged bed. There is also a considerable hill in 
front of the house, clotlied with verdure and natural woods to 
its summit. On the whole it is one of the most picturesque 
reiidences in England, and having within these few years be- 
come the residence of T. A. Knight, Esq. promises to be 
equallv celebrated in respect to horticulliire. 

F.ywooil, — near I^yon's Hall ; Earl of Oxford. The grounds 
display a great diversity of acen ry, and are ornamented wiih 
some line plantations. 

i-'oj'/tT/, — near llereford ; Uvedals Price, Esq. 
brated author of Essui/s u:t the Pictiiresijiie- A p, 
mansion, beautifully varied by creepers, and surro\ 
magnificent amphitheatre of woods, chietly oak, b 
elni, planted by the father of the present i)n)prittor; t«it 
partly of cedars introduced by the present occujiier. Th.ere aie 
fine views judiciously opened in many places, and small piece; 
of water introduced as lights toiix the eye, with otber improve- 
ments which display the elegaf.t and coiTect priictical taste of 
the great reformer of landscane-gardoning. 

Guruojw, —near Bridge Sollers; Slv J. G. Cotterell, Bart. 
Extensive and nourishing planLations, and line prospects. 

X Hampton Court, — near Hoi.t ; i-:arl of Essex. A mag- 
nilicent Elizabethean mansion, on a lawn of nearly 100 acres, 
surrounded by a park between seven ai;d eight miles in circum- 
feraice. 



the cele- 
n brick 
led bv a 
L-h, and 



Asian Park, — near Oswestry ; 'W. Lloyd, Esq. A most 
elegant mansion, and the natural be;iuties of the place much 
improved by the correct taste of the owner. 

X Haii'kstvne i'urA", — near XNTiitchurch ; I>ord Hill. A 
good mansion, on a beautiful slope on the north side of a 
romantic hill ; the grounds extensive, and combining beatity 
and singularity. There are bold cliffs, gi-otesque rocks, most 
romantic walks, a hermitage, and many other buildings and 
seats ; a long artificial river formed along a slope, and 
everywhere tite finest trees. On the whole, it is, and has 



long been, a place to excite wonder, and also agreeable 
emotions. 

TIte Leasowes, — near Hales Owen ; A pasttire- 

favm, chielly celebrated as having been the residence and the 
creation of Shenstone. Some of the root-houses and grottoes in 
the paths which lead along the hedges, and in the strips of 
copse and dingles, still rem'ain. 

Oukleij Park, — near Ludlow ; Lady Clive. The mansion on 
the banks of the Thame ; the grounds naturally romantic, and 
laid out w ith much taste and judgment. 



7570. STAFFORDSHIRE A surface of 780,R00 acres; hilly and m.oory towards the north, but plain 
and fertile in tlie other parts. It contains a number of villas aiid mansion-residences, and nurseries are 
established at most of the principal towns. 



fJoJ.'ei/, — near Newcastle ; .T. ^\'edg^wood, Esq. A superb 
villa-mansion, sutTounded by highly i)olish.ed pleasure-grounds, 
with an excellent kitchen-garden. 

Beau'Jcsnrt (fine desart), — near Stafford ; Marquis of Angle- 
sea. A magnificent residenc •, i;nprovetl ft'om a comparatively 



rude state ( fig. 717.), bv the late Earl of Uxbridge, -who, 
with the aid of H. Repton, formed a large piece of water, 
planted variously, and rendered the. house more conspicuous. 
l.Pti- 748.) 




Be?).i.ii!/, — near Ipstone; J. Sneid, Esq. The house, plea- 
santly situated on a gently rising hill, fronting the smith-east ; 
nearly surrotmded by deep woods, furnished with under^vood 
of ash, hazel, birch, willow, &c., cut every six years for hoops 
an'l crate-v>rare for the potteries. The walks through these 
woods ai-e rude natural paths ; and on the bordering spaces, 
not covered with copse, are planted many hardy plants, and 
there left to grow without farther culture. On the whole, 
this is a place combining the justest taste, gi-eat knowledge 
of culture, agricultural as well as horticultural, and a strict 
regard in all things to econon>y in the first expense and future 
management. ' „ , t , 

X BlUhjield Park, — neat Abbots Bromley; Lord Bagot. 
An Ehzabethean building, placed atonesideof the park, which 



is rich in large oaks and picturesque views. Lord Bagot pays 
considerable attention to horticulture, and cultivates success- 
fullv the loquat-apple, of which he has given some account m 
the'HoiUcullural Societti's Trayisactions. 

Broiif;Iuon-hall, — -i-\eav Stafford; Sir T. Broughton. An 
ancient m.ansion, surrounded by stately plantations of indi- 
genous trees, especially sycamores. The park is divided by the 
road; but no art has "been used to mark the appropriation of 
the opposite part to that in which the house stands. 

X i'iii iV/e, — near EnviUe; Earl Stamford. The house, 
a large brick structure of an impure Gothic character ; the 
grounds formerly celebrated, but now chiefly remarkable 
for a fine lawn, some old trees, and a cascade formed by 
Shenstone. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF DERBYSHIRE. 



1077 



Hafrley Hall, — near Rupstone ; Lord Curzon. A finely si- 
tuated house, and the artificial scenery around it very judi- 
ciously disposed. 

X Inf^estree Hall, — near Stafford ; Earl Talbot. A respect- 
able Elizabetheem edifice, surrounded by grounds in the an- 
cient style, but in a great degree modernised by the present 



■ near Tamworth ; 



A splen- 



did mansion, surrounded by an extensive lawn, finely varied by 
trees, and embellished with a noble lake. Over the latter is 
thrown a very handsome stone bridge, and oiiposite to it stands 
an elegant stone conservatory. 

Prestrvood, — near Dudley ; Sir Thomas Littleton. A fine 
modern house, the surrounding pleasure-grounds exhibiting 
a most delightful variety of hill and dale, wood and water, 
effected chiefly by the hand of nature. 

Sandon, — neax Newcastle; Lord Harrowby. An elegant 
mansion, finely situated on the declivity of a considerable emi- 
nence, commanding noble and luxurious prospects. 
Samlwell Park, — near West Bromwich ; Earl Dartmouth. 
7571. WARWICKSHIRE. A surface of 639,700 acres; elevated, not much varied, well wooded to- 
wards the north ; the other parts fertile in corn and minerals. There are many neat cottage-gardens in 
the county, especially near Coventry. The principal nursery is at Birmingham, and there are several 
market-gardens for the commoner culinary crops near that place. 

AnsleyHally—neaxOMhwcy, I. N. Ludford, Esq. An ir- | Elizabethean mansion of stone, comnTsnding agreeable views, 
regular' mansion, with an extensive park, in which, on an in 
suTated spot, is a Chinese temple, by Sir Wc Chambers ; and ii 
another appropriate spot is a herniitage. 



A quadrangular brick building, siuccoed, situated iu a roman-- 
tic valley, and surrounded with a charming lawn, laid out with 
the highest degree of taste and judgment. 

X Shiif^'boriwgh House, — titar Rudgeley ; Lord Anson. An 
elegant (Jrecian mansion, in a low situation, over-mntered by 
the Trent. The grounds were laid out at great expense by the 
late Thomas Anson, Esq. and contain numerous and well-exe- 
cuted ornamental buildings, in difS'erent sty les of architecture. 
The present proprietor cultivates a farm in a very scientific 
maimer. 

X Tcrai/mrM,— near Newcastle-under-line; Marquis of Staf- 
ford, A low situation, with abimdance of water, and some 
rifting grounds. Great expense has lately been incurred on 
the house, and a fine mausoleum built o|iposite the entrance- 
gates, from the designs of Tatham; but nothing will ever 
render this place truly giand. The kitchen-garden is good, 
and no nobleman encourages every kind of improvement 
more than the present marquis. (See Luck's Acaouitt of Im- 
provements, Ike. 8vo. 1819.) 



Aubrey Hall, — near Astley ; F. P. Newdigate, Esq. An ele- 
gant specimen of the florid Gothic, divested of the exuberant 
and grotesque ; the park fine and extensive, well wooded, and 
adorned with artificial expanses of wood and water. 

Bilsion House, - near Bilston ; Hon. J. Simpson. A spacious 
but irregular mansion, entered by iron folding gates, which 
conduct to a venerable porch. The gardens are extensive, and 
preserved in all the formality of the old taste. One walk is still 
termed Addison's, whose seat this was, and where he generally 
resided after his marriage with the Countess of Warwick. The 
grounds being let, are going fast to decay. 

Guy's Cliff, — near Warwick ; B. Greathead, Esq. A singu- 
larly picturesque combination of rock, wood, meadow, and the 
windings of the Avon, with a mansion respectable both in size 
and character. 

itfercua/c, ^ near -4.therstone ; D. S. Dugdale, Esq. A hand- 
some residence; the grounds particularly rich in fine and vener- 
able oaks. 

Whitby Hall, — near Coventry; Lord Hood. A capacious 

7573. LEICESTERSHIRK A surface of 522,240 acres; low, generally flat, and one of the richest 
grazing coimties in England. It does not abound in gentlemen's seats; and the farmers, though often 
rich, have seldom good gardens. 



The park and gardens agreeable, but rather neglected. 
7572. The following am first-rate residences : — 

Cooinhe Abbey (Cwm, or Cumbe, a low or hollow place), 

near Coventry ; Earl Craven. A noble mansion, in patt by 
Inigo Jones, in a park of 600 acres, well varied by wood and 
water. 

X Ragley Hall, — near Alcester ; Marquis of Hertford. A 
spacious mansion, improved by Wyatt, on the summit of a 
round knoll, in an extensive park abounding in majestic oak- 
trees, and also in young plantations, with a fine lake and every 
feature worthy of this noble seat. The kitchen-gardens are 
noted for the extent of their hot-honses, and for the cultivation 
lake of the pine-apple, especially of the Providence kinds. 

X Warwick Castle, — Warwick; Earl of \\'arwick. An an. 
cient Gothic structure, on a steep rock rising from the Avon, 
with a large garden-court, flanked by towers, and with a gate 
and portcullis, &c. in a truly baronial style, and in excellent 
preservation. The park is very extensive and finely adorned 
byjvood, and watered by the Avon, as well as seme artificial 
lakes. The pleasure-grounds contain a fine course of Inoad 
gravel-walks, and some luxuriant and bulky cedar-trees. 



Beaumajio)-, — near Ashby de la Zouch ; W. Herrick, Esq. 
The park extolled for pictiuresque beauty, combined with se- 
renity and sublimity of character ; it abounds in venerable oaks, 
ash, elm, and willow. 

X Donnington Park, — near Donnington ; Marquis of Hast- 
ings. A magnificent pile of ecclesiastic Gothic, by W. Wilkins, 
sen. surrounded by a park containing very old trees. The 
building is in a bottom, half earthed up, and the approach 
descending to it has a very bad effect. The pleasure-grounds 
contain a small piece of water, and were laid out by H. Hepton. 

Gopsal Hall, — near Bosworth ; Lady Howe. An elegant 
mansion, which, with the improvements on the grounds, is 
5_aid to have cost 100,OOOZ. In the park are some fine temples 
and carved seats. 



Rev. P. Stony. The 
Esq. A 



Lockington Hall, — near Keyworth ; 
grounds much improved by the present possessor. 

PrestrvoiUd Hall, —near Prestwould ; C.J. Packe 
large modem mansion and finely wooded park. 

Queenby Hall, — near Frisby ; Mrs. Latham. A large build- 
ing on a finely wooded avenue, with a terrace-walk command- 
ing very fine prospects of hanging hills with scattered woods 
and neatly cultivated enclosures. 

Stanton Harold, — near Bredon; Earl Ferrars. A large 
pile of brick and stone, in a nark of 150 acres, containing a 
lake of thirty acres, and a handsome stone bridge. 

WavUp Hull, — near Leicester ; Sir G. C. Hudson. The 
pleasure-grounds laid out with much taste. 



7574. DERBYSHIRE. A surface of 720,640 acres; hilly, irregular, and in some parts mountainous; 
the valleys rich and beautiful. There is a good nursery and florists' garden at Derby, by Joseph Mason, 
and some neat cottage-gardens in the county. 



Brelby Park, — near Bretby ; Earl of Chesterfield. A fine 
old structure was taken down some years ago, which is said to 
have been surrounded with gardens disposed after the plan of 
Versailles, with terraces, statues, and fountains. (See a bird's- 
eye view by Kip, in Nouveau Theatre de la Grande BretagTie, and 
The Topographer, vol. ii.) 

CAarfc/e«(/o?!, —near Derby; Sir R. M. Wilmot. A neat villa, 
with a good kitchen-garden. 

Foremark, — near Kepton ; Sir Francis Burdett, Bart. The 
house is an elegant and substantial modem building ; and the 
park and gardens respectable. 

Locke Park, — near Locke ; William Dmry Lowe, Esq. The 
grounds are naturally much varied, and contain a handsome 
artificial lake ; but the plantations having been made when the 
geometric taste was in fashion, do not accord well with the 
variations of surface. 

Oshaston, — near Derby ; Sir Robert Wilmot. The house is 
a large handsome edifice ; the grounds were laid out by Eames ; 
the pleasure-grounds occupy five acres, and are very agreeably 
disposed. 

Overton Hall, — near Derby ; Lady Banks. In the garden a 



gooseberry-tree which covers a wall fifty-one feet long, and six 
feet high. It is of the small rough red sort, and bears well. A 
grove of 100 birch-trees on this estate have been tapped for 
upwards of sixty or seventy years for their sap : thirty or more 
trees are tapped in a season, and the sap sold to the makers of 
British wine in the neighborhood. [Sec Farey's excellent 
Survey of this County, 3 vols. Svo.) 

Shipley, — near Belper; E. M. Munday, Esq. The house 
is modern and elegant, the grounds very well disposed and 
wooded, and the gardens celebrated of late for then- orange- 
trees. 

Willersley Castle,— near Matlock ; R. Arkwright, Esq. The 
castellated mansion is romantically situated in Matlock Dale, 
and surrounded by lawns, rocks, and natural woods, and washed 
on one side by the Dove. The kitohen-garden and hot-houses 
are ^ood and well attended to. 

Wingerrvorth, — near Chesterfield; Sir William Hunlocke. 
A noble seat, improved from a comparative bald state ( fig. 
749.) by Repton, who enlarged the water, and planted some 
trees, and gave breadth to the lawn in front of the house. 
Lfig- 750.) 



1078 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



7575. The following axe first-rate residences : — 

X Ckatsrvorth, — near Bakewell ; Duke of Devonshire. The 
most celebrated seat in Derbyshire. The palace is an immense 
quadrangle in the Grecian style ; the park lies sloping to the 
river Derwent, and is nme miles in circumference ; it is much 
diversified with hill and dale, and plantations. The pleasure 
grounds are in the ancient taste, and contain the best artificial 
water-works in England. 

X Haddon Hall, — near Bakewell ; Duke of Rutland. One 
of the most complete baronial residences now remaining, and 
though not inhabited, kept in good repair. The extent of the 
buikfing, and the number of apartments and offices, are cal- 
culated for the display of a very extended hospitality ; the hall, 
or great public dining-room, is particularly admired. The 
park was ploughed up mjmy years ago; the terrace-gardens 



remain, and consist of terraces ranged one above another, each 
having a stone balustrade. 

X Hardrvick Hall, — near Normanton ; Duke of Devonshire. 
The house is of stone, and built by Elizabeth Countess of 
Shrewsbury, whose passion for building is well known: it is 
also celebrated as having been the place of confinement of 
Maiy Queen of Scots. The park abounds in fine old oaks, 
and contains the ruin of a former castle, in which is a room 
noted for the justness of its proportions, and said by Kennet, 
to have been thought a fit pattern of measure and contrivance 
of a room at Blenheim. 

X Keddlcston, — near Derby ; Lord Scarsdale. The house is 
a Grecian pile by Adams, and one of the handsomest in Eng- 
land. The park is five miles in circumference; it contains a 
fine sheet of water, with cascades and islands, and a venerable 
grove of oaks. 



7576. NOTTINGHAMSHIRE. A surface of 495,360 acres ; gently varied, fertile, dry, and healthy, 
containing the remains of the extensive forest of Sherwood. There are good nurseries, and also some 
market-gardens and orchards at Retford and Nottingham, and tree-seeds are collected about Worksop 
and other places. 



Alston GroDf, — near Nottingham ; Sir G. Clifton, Bart. The 
approach to the house, through an avenue a mile in length, 
covered with tur^ and broad enough for a dozen carriages to 
drive abreast. The gardens on the side of a hUl originally in 
the ancient taste, but lately remodelled. 

Clifton Hall, — near Nottingham ; Sir G. Clifton. Pleasantly 
situated on the Trent, and deeply embosomed in groves of oak 
and elm. 

Colrvick Hall, — near Nottingham ; Musters, Esq. A 

house by Carr, in a bottom, but backed by rising hills, well 
wooded, and surrounded by neat pleasure-grounds. 

X Clumber Park, — near Worksop ; Duke of Newcastle. A 
large house : the park containing 4000 acres, and eleven miles 
in circumference, aboimds in plantations, picturesque inegu- 
larities, a large piece of water, and a highly enriched bridge. 
Near the house, however, it is dull and flat. 

Kirklington Hall, — near Southwell ; Mrs. A\Tietham. A 
large edifice, with an undulating lawn, descending to an ujn- 
brageous piece of water, surrounded by easy swells. 

Nettleniorlh, — near Mansfield ; embosomed in wooded hills, 
among which two brooks have been expanded by art into irre- 
gular lakes. 

X .Ven>s<e(«f /!/)/«?,!/, —near ;\rnnsfield; Toildman. The 

building, and sucli of the grounds as have been purchased by 
this gentleman, are undergoing improvements : but the place 
is chiefly remarkable as having been the scene of improvements 
of Lord Byron, grandfather to the present lord, u'hen in its 
splendor, the house was situated in a vale, in the micUt of an I 
extensive park finely planted, with a winding lake (lowing i 
almost up to the house, with two c.innons on the banks, a i 
Gothic prospect house, a line arch, &c. The gardens con- I 
tained an ancient (jothic green-house, leading to a flower- 
garden, formed on what was once the buryiiig-ground of the | 
church, in which is a large circular vault, with a pedestal of I 
white marble, and inscription in memory of the Newfoundland 
dog buried below. ' 

7577. LINCOLNSHIRE. A surface of 1,783,680 acros j great part on the sea-shore, flat and fenny; 
the wolds, wliich occupy the north-east, as the word (Saxon) imports, are hilly and void of wood. The 
London seedsmen receive hemp, turnip, rape, and mustard seed, from this county; and sell there large 
quantities of parsley-soed, which the farmers sow with their clovers, as a preventive to the rot in sheep. 
Some garden-seeds for the supply of the Yorkshire seedsmen are grown in the Isle. 



Ossington Hall, — near Laseton ; J. Dennison, Esq. The 
house unites elegance and comfort ; the pleasure-grounds 
agreeably laid out, and the park extensive. 

OsieHon House, — near Retford ; Folijambe, Esq. An 

elegant modern seat, surrounded by thriving woods and 
verdant glades, and watered by a rivulet, which expands to 
a lake. 

Staunton, — near Newark ; Stanton, Esq. A noble 

mansion and gardens and pleasure-grounds, beautiful and 
extensive. 

Trumpton Hall, — near Barton; .T. W. Emmerton, Esq. A 
mansion in the style of James I. ; the gardens neat and agree- 
able, and the surrounding scenery picturesque. 

X IViorfi'ii/ PnrA:, — near A\'orksop; L'.irl Mauvers. .4 com- 
fortable house, in a low situation, well backed with rising 
ground, thickly planted, and forming jiart of the park, which 
is thirteen miles round, and contains some fine pieces of water. 
The gardens were in jjart constructed in the French style, by 
the late Duchess of Kingston. 

X Welbeck Abbey, — nea.r Worksiop; Duke of Portland. A 
handsome lake by H. Rcpton : the kitchen-garden celebrated 
in the time of Speechlv, but for many years neglected. The 
park, being part of the forest of Sherwood, abounds in old oaks, 
and contains numerous young plantations of oak, sheltered by 
birch, sown or planted by Speedily. 

X KWa/on. — near Isottingham; Lord Middleton. 
A square structure, with towers at the angles, and an ele- 
vated prospect -room in the centre, executed by John Thorpe, 
in Oueen Elizabeth's time. It is approached by a winding 
avenue of lime-trees, nearly a mile in kiigth. The park is ex- 
tensive ; the kitchen-garden well managed ; the gooseberries 
grown in pots, and sent to table in that state. 

Winthorpe Hall, — near Muskham ; R. Pocklington, Esq. 
An elegant building with plantations, and grounds very ex- 



Bunvell Park, — near Eurwell ; B. Lester, Esq. A hand- 
some mansion, in a commanding situation, surrounded 
by a park, abounding in timber. Dr. iVIatthew Lester, great 
grandfather of the present owner, was physician to Charles 1., 
and is mentioned by Parkmson as one of his patrons in 
botany. 

Co/eiy /faW,— near Lincoln; General Bertie. A fine old 
house,' with modern additions, and surrounded by thriving 
plantations. 

Grimstlwrpe Castle, — near Edinham ; Duke of Ancaster. An 
irregular pile, chiefly by Vanburgh, on a beautifully undulated 
lawn, descending to two lakes, comprising about 100 acres, 
beyond which is a rising ground covered with trees. The park 
is one of the most extensive in the kingdom; there are three 
ridings in it, each four miles, in a straight line and in different 
directions. There are some rough forest scenery and great 
extent of rich pastur.', and if the vale below had been floated 
as was intended, there would have existed here one of the 
most magnificent pieces of artificial water next to Blenheim. 

7579. RUTLANDSHIRE. A surface of 128,000 
valleys. 

X Burley-on-the-hill, — near Oakham ; Earl Winchelsea. 
The house, a magnificent structvire, ranking with Burleigh, 
Belvoir, Castle Howard, and similar edifices. It was built 
after the Reformation, by the Earl of Nottingham, in the 
Doric style. The park contains 1085 acres, abounding in 
large oaks, and all kinds of forest-trees ; the lawn is ex- 
tensive, and contains a curious grotto, and other decorations. 
The entrance-front of the house has a court-yard, separated 
from the road by a superb iron-railing ; and on the garden- 
front is a terrace-walk, 300 yards in length, and 12 broad. 

7580. NORTHAMPTONSHIRE. A surface of 617,000 acres ; fenny towards the north-east; but, in 
general, elevated, varied, and abounding in country-seats. There are some nurseries ; and Cornfield, a 
florist at Northampton, is considered one of the first growers of the carnation : and in the market-gardens 
onions are grown to great perfection. 



i'an^on Ho!(ie, — near Wrayley; E. Turner, Esq. A house 
by Hawksmoor, a pupil of Sir John Vanburgh, afterwards 
enlarged by Carr 'of York: the park much improved by 
plantations. 

7578. Tlie following are first-rate residences : — 

X Belvoii- Castle, — neax Belvoir; Duke of Rutland. A 
magnificent castellated structure, on the summit of a conical 
hill, rebuilt from the design of H. Wyatt ; commanding viev.-s 
over several counties. The park, of great extent, containing a 
very complete dog-kennc4, and the gardens good. 

X BuAcigh, — near Stamford; Marquis of Exeter. One of 
the most splendid old houses and spacious parks in the king- 
dom ; the house in the Elizabethean style ; the park modern- 
ised by Brown, who formed a handsome expanse of water, and 
removed many terraces at the house to form a lawn. A 
copious account of this place, with views, has been published 
by Mr. Drakard, of Stamford. 

acres ; varied, but composed chiefly of fertile 

Exton Hall, — near Stratton ; Noel, Esq. A grand 

Elizabethean edifice, with a park of 1510 acres, planted in 
the ancient style, by London and Wise: the gardens have 
long been famous, and the water and cEiscades much ad- 
mired. 

Normanion House, — near Normanton ; Sir G. Heathcote. 
An irregular modem mansion ; a well planted park of 400 
acres ; and gardens neatly laid out. 



X Althorpe, — near Brington ; Earl Spencer, 
dated 1688, in a park distinguished by lars 
and considerable inequality of surface. 



Castle Ashby,— neax Ashby ; Earl Northampton. A 
large pile, by Inigo Jones, on a gentle eminence, in a park 
containing a large lake, by Brown. 

X Cranfoi-d Bridge, — near Cfenford; Sir G- Robinson. A 
modem house, surrounded by an extensive lawn and pleasure- 
grounds. 

Deene Thorpe Park, — near Deene; Earl of Cardigan. A 
low embattled structure, with a tuiTet terminating eac^i wing; 



the grounds beautifully varied, well wooded, with a fine piece 
of water, an island, and various omamental buildings. 

Farvsley House, — near Fawsley ; ICnight, Esq. A motley 

building of different ages ; the park, a fine improved demesne, 
abounding with forest scenery and water. 

Kelmarsh, — near KelmEirsh ; W. Hanbury, Esq. A large 
mansion, with pleasure-grounds pleasingly diversified with the 
contrasted positions of wood and water. 

Rushton Hall, — near Rothwell ; A very 

tastefully disposed seat, by the late possessor the Hoii. W- 
Cockayne. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF YORKSHIRE. 



1079 



lJp<o» Ha/?, —near Northampton; T. S. W. Samwell, Eeq. I Wak(;iield Lodge, — neat Towce«ter; Duke of 0*aflon. 
A large irregular building, on a gravelly soil, displaying fine | Delightfully situated on a gentle eminence, which slopes to a 
views of the distant scenery. I large lake, formed by Brown. 

7581. YORKSHIRK A central, and, in part, marine county, of 3,698,380 acres ; the surface varied, 
containing several mountains, extensive moors, and some royal forests ; the subsoil most generally rocky 
or stony ; no public garden or park ; a subscription botanic garden at Hull, and nurseries and market- 
gardens at all the large towns. It abounds in residences, especially in the West Riding, where nearly 
400 are mentioned in The Beauties of England and Wales, as worthy of notice. The farmers' gardens 
are kept in a good state in the better parts of the county; and at Leeds there are some neat cottage- 
gardens. At Slierborne, in the West Riding, the wine-sour plum, one of the best baking sorts, abounds 
and thrives on limestone soils, and the fruit is sent to Hull, York, London, and other markets. There is 
a horticultural society held at Leeds, the chief promoter of which is J. Carr, of St. Anne's ; and the same 
gentleman is active in his endeavors to set on foot a botanic garden. Chapel Allerton, near this town, 
noted when in the possession of R. A. Salisbury, is now a public nursery. 



r/ie H«W Botoii'e Gari/cn — was established in 1812, by- sub- 
scription. It occupies five acres, and is arranged on the same 
general plan as that of Liverpool, having been laid out 
chiefly by Shepherd, the curator of that garden. The principal 
walks which surround and intersect the garden are eight or 
nine feet broad, and form a total length of nearly three quar- 
ters of a mile ; particular compartments are set apart for bog, 
alpine, and green-house plants ; a pond thirty yards in length, 
for the growth of aquatics, and at the south-west corner ot the 
garden a mount twelve feet high, admitting, though itself 
surrounded by trees, an extensive view of the Humber, the 
I/in'Oolnshire coast, and the Wolds. The country round Hull 
being almost without trees, the shady walks of this garden form 
an agreeable resource as a promenade for the families of the 
subscribers. The curator is Mr. William Donn, nephew to the 
late curator of the Cambridge Garden. 

Nurseries. — There are a number in this coimty, and some 
are of great extent. The oldest establishments are at York 
andPomfret; the first carried on by J. Backhouse. Pontey 
has a considerable nursery at Huddersfield, and there are others 
of greater extent at Cottingham, near Hull, and at Doncaster. 
The seed of the York cabbage is supplied by Rigg and Son of 
York. 

7582. Mamion and demesne residences. 

Aldrvark Hall — near Rotheram ; Geo. Foljambe, Esq. 
Charmingly situated on an eminence rising from the Don, and 
skirted with w ood down to the river, 

Allerton Manleverer, — near linaresborough ; Lord Stourton. 
An elegant mansion, in a park of 400 acres of very rich land, 
and charmingly picturesque. It contains a fine octagonal 
tower, from which are obtained extensive views. 

BtV</s«/, — near Mai ton; Lord Middleton. A spacious and 
commodious mansion and pleasure-grounds, well planted and 
arranged. 

Bradford, — at Bradford ; Hustler, Esq. An ingenious 

horticultural amateur, who has a good garden and collection 
of hardy herbaceous plants. 

X Bramham Park — meox Tadcaster; Geo. Fo.x, Esq. A 
stately mansion ; the grounds laid out in the last century, in 
the ancient style, attbrd a good specimen of geometrical 
gardening. 

B)oe/cete/n/ /fa47, Lincolnshire, — near Barton; Lord Yarbo- 
rough. The park extensive, and diversified with plantations and 



rising giounds, containing a fine Gothic chapel and mausoleum, 
by Wyatt Considerable improvements taking place in the 
kitchen -garden by substituting espaliers for standard fruit-trees. 



vhich liad rendered the garden like a closely planted orchard. 

BUham House, — neir Doncaster; W. Hewitt, Esq. The 
grounds contain a Belvedere {Be/, Italian, fine, beautiful ; and 
redere, to see,) which commands the most extensive and richest 
prospect in Yorksliire. 
Burton Constable,— mezx Hedon ; Sir Clifford Constable, Bart. 



A park spacious though flat, abounding in trees, with extensive 
■walks, a large piece of water, and elegant bridge. 

Cave CasUe, — near Southcave ; H. G. Barnard, Esq. A 



small but extremely pleasant park, with very large gardens and 
pleasure-grounds. 

Copjrrove, — near Knaresborough ; Thos. Duncombe, Esq. An 
elegant mansion on a rising ground, with a plezLsing prospect 
of the lawn, and a fine sheet of water, bounded with wood, 
winding out of sight beyond a distant hill. 

Cusrvorth Hall, — near Doncaster ; W. Wrightson, Esq. An 
elegant mansion, in one of the finest situations In the kingdom. 
The grounds are every thing that could be desired in a moderate 
space; the prospects extensive in all directions over a delight- 
ful coimtry embellished with gentlemen's seats, churches, and 
other enlivening objects. 

Denton jParA:, — near Otley ; Sir H. C. Ibbetson. A noble 
structure, commanding fine views of the Vale of Wharf. 

Bveringh/im, — neax Market Wrighton; M. Constable, Esq. 
A large and lofty brick mansion in a flat country ; the park 
with a successful imitation of a river. 

Eshton Hall, -near ija.rgta.ve; M. Wilson, Esq. A cottage 
with a conical mountain in front wooded to the top, and 
gardens liberally provided for, and conducted by J. Douglass, a 
skilful gardener. There is a good collection of bog plants for 
which the cold, moist climate of this place is well adapted. 

Finningley Park Co/ta^'e, — near Bawtrey ; Harvey, Esq. 

A curious and elegant shooting cottage, surrounded with ever^ 
sporting convenience- 

X Par7tley Hull, — near Otley ; W. Fawkes, Esq. An elegant 
mansion, high on the side of an immense bank, commanding 
extensive views of the bank opposite, across the Vale of \Vharf 
The kitchen-garden and farm well attended to. 

Grimstone GartA (Grimstone Hill), — near Heydon ; Charles 
Grimston, Esq. A superb baronial mansion, on an elevated 
site in a hilly park. 

X tiackfall (Hag-fall, i.e. Witch's fall or valley),- near 
Kipon; Miss Laurence. A singularly romantic scene, com- 
posed of a steep rocky declivity, descending to a woody glen ; 
the walks along the declivity, showing finely varied views, a 
cascade, and, at an elevated point, Mowbray, a prospect wliich, 
Gilpjn says, nature has worked with her broadest pencil. 

X Hackness, — near Scarborough ; Sir J. V. B- .Johnstone, 
Bart. Remarkable for the gardens and pleasure-grounds, exe- 
cuted in a superior stylo of elega'ice, in a vale, with a terrace- 
walk commanding extensive views, and a gTe«^n-!)ou;;e richly 
Stocked with exotic plants. 



Horvsham Hall, — near Kirkham; Geo. Cholniley, Esq. A 
large and elegant mansion, on a swell rising from a beautiful 
valley; the pleasure-grounds finely embellished with plant- 
ations, but the views rather confined. 

/ro/7«<?, — near Howden ; Hon. W.' Stourton. A seat on a 
moor, susceptible of great improvement, arid of possessing, at 
no great expense, a range of pleasure-grounds, which, m rnag- 
nificence and picturesque beauty, not many places in England 
could excel. 

Ki'rWeaWiam HaH, — near Guisborough ; H. Vansittart, Esq. 
An excellent mansion by Carr ; the gardens extensive, and laid 
out with much taste ; ihey contain an octagonal temple, and 
with the house, the whole has an air of princely grandeur. 

Ledston Lodge, — wear Abberford; Chr. Wilson, Esq. A 
handsome mansion, in a fine open country, witlr agreeable 
pleasure-grounds. 

Mellmrn, — near Pocklington ; Sir H. Vavasour. A hand- 
some brick mansion, in a flat country, finely ornamented with 
plantations. 

Melfon-on-the-hill,— near Doncaster; R. F. Wilson, Esq. A 
good house and fine grounds, with those extensive prospects so 
general in this part of the country. 

^ X Mulgrave Castle, — near Whitby ; Earl Mulgrave. A 
Gothic house in a commanding situation on the sea-coast ; the 
approach roads much admired, and the verdant and marine 
views both very extensive. 

Nervby HaU, — near Ripon; Lord Grantham. A brick man- 
sion, supposed by SirC. Wren, in 1705: the pleasure-groimds 
laid out with most correct taste. 

Orvstwi, — near Doncaster; Phil. Cooke, Esq. An elegant 
structure on a rising ground in the centre of a rich and fertile 
country ; the estate enlarged and a good arrondissemeni formed 
by the exertions and purchases of the present proprietor. 

X Plumpton, — near Knaresborough; Lord Harewood. Re- 
markable for its pleasure-grounds, which are studded with 
detached rocks resembling large coal-cinders; it contains also a 
lake abounding in sinuosities. The whole scene of twenty acres 
is supposed to have been formed out of an old quarry ; like the 
beautiful garden, mentioned by Biydone (Travds'm isidlij), near 
Syracuse. 

Ribstone Hall, — near Knaresborough; Sir H. Goodrick. A 
house on an eminence, the grounds remarkable for containing 
the original tree of the Ribstone pippin. 

Ripley, — near Knaresborough ; Sir W. Ingilby, Bart. The 
house, built in 1550, is a capacious castellated mansion with 
a park of old oaks, and a kitchen-garden, remarkable for its 
complete arrangement of hot -houses, and its collections of 
culinary and floricultural exotics. 

Saiulheck (Beck, i. e. stream), — near Tickhill; Earl of Scar- 
borough. A magnificent Grecian mansion in a valley, sur- 
rounded by high grounds and plantations, containing a fine 
piece of water and many miles of gravel-walks. 

Sledmere, — near Bridlington; Sir Tatton Sykes, Bart. A 
mansion from the proprietor's own designs, executed in a su- 
perior degi-ee of elegance; the pavilions, hot-houses, green- 
houses, and other ornamental appendages, all in the most ele- 
gant and appropriate style. 

Streethorpe, — near Doncaster ; G. C. Yarborough, Esq. A 
handsome modem mansion, and the plantations and pleasure- 
grounds laid out with great judgment and taste. 

Skelton Castle — near Gainsborough; J. Wharton, Esq. An 
extensive fronted mansion, on the banks of a stream which 
has been expanded into a lake, and appropriate planting and 
other alterations made in the grounds. 

X Spofjbrth, — near Wetherby ; Hon. and Rev. W. Herbert, 
an emment botanist and horticultural amateur. The gardens 
are rich in curious bulbs and other rare plants. 

Sprotbrough Hall, — near Doncaster; Sir Joseph Copley. A 
rnansion of Charles the Second's time, commanding delightful 
views of verdant scenery. 

«oc/i-eW ParA-,- near Wetherby; W. Middleton, Esq. In 
the grounds is a lake, and on its margin near the house, a 
rock of a very singular shape, sixty-five feet in circumference 
and thirty feet high. It is supposed to have given rise to the 
name of the seat, as Stockheldt, in Germany, signifies the base 
or pedestal of an image or statue. 

X Sludley Royal,- near Ripon; Miss Law ence. The 
pleasure-grounds used to be reckoned the finest in England. 
They occupy a valley furnished with a brook swelled into ponds, 
and forming vaiious cascades, terminating in the fine ruin of 
Fountains Abbey. They abound in seats and buildings, and 
contain 300 acres, and the park 700 acres. 

Thirkleby Park, -near Thirkleby ; Sir T. Frankland. A 
good house, by Wyatt, and the .grounds and gardens re- 
modelled, partly from the proprietor's own ideas, and nartlv 
from those of the late Mr. ]\Ieikle. They contain some fine old 
common pine-trees (P. sylv.) and a good kitchen-garden. 

Wenirrorth Cadle,- near Bamsley ; H. Vernon, Esq. An 
extensive fabric, on a considerable eminence, surrounded by an 
extensive park, containing a piece of water, half-way down 
the slope, forming, from the house and grounds above, a zone 
of light which to a stranger has a strange and unnatural eflTect. 
A ear tne house the grounds indicate the remains of the 
geometric style, and contain some fine cedars and other exotics, 
and a flower-garden of embroiderv. 

Wheatley Hall,-near Doncaster ; Sir Will. Cooke, Bart. On 
tlie banks of the Don, in a low but beautiful situation, jmd 
decorated with some of the finest oaks in the country. 



3 Z 4 



1080 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Paut IV. 



75S3. Fhst-raie residences. 

Castle Hoirar,!, — near IMalton ; E^t! of Cailide. A mag- 
j-rilicent palace ]<y ^'an burgh , with a fro; t of f,'re3ler cxtc-n t than 
that of Blenheim ; the Kround; not favortd by nature, but 
containing a large jiif ce of water and some old woods, consider- 
ably enl-arf;ed ai;d improved l)y the present eail. There are 
several oniaaiental buildings in the grounds, a;;d especially a 
superb mau.-oleum. 

X Dinu-omht Park, — nc;ix Helmsley ; C. S. Duncom.be, E ,q. 
A superb hou.e, by \'anburgh, with a' terrace adjoining, which 
affords delightful prospects over a fertile valley to' wooded 
hills. The grounds contain an Ionic temple, and other build- 
ing?, and abound in fine trees. 



X Harcircnd House,— msx Leeds; Lord Ilarewood. An 
extetisive Corintliian mansion, by CaiT, much esteemed for its 
exterior efffcl as well as iiiternal arrangement: the grounds 
laid cut by Brown, who formed a large piece of water, and 
subsequently some improvements w ere made from H. Keplon's 
designs. 

x' Wmttrorth House, — nc3.T Rotherham ; Eavl Fitzwillja p. 
A most magi-.ificent Grecian mansion, erected by the pre>ent 
earl, consisting of a centre and two wings extending above 
■2GU yards m Ic-r.gth ; the park contains upwards of 1500 acres, 
beautifully varied, embeUi-,iied with a large expanse of water, 
and containing a marble monumental column and faaulj 



7584. DURHAM. A surfaca of 610,000 acres, mountainous and moory towards the west, but 
rich in pastures and woodLinds towards the east and south. Mustard-seed has long been grown in 
this county. 



Bass:,7f,'h),n-ne Holl, — nciiT Stanstead ; Sir P. ParLer. A 
small pljce, but the aian->ion eltgaat. 

Hnuhvdl l.«,l^e, _ near Hockley"; The house is an 

elegaiU buiUlin.^ desitrned by J. Johnson, Esq. with an observ- 
atory on its su.niiiit. The grounds may be noted as containi.ng 



deco. 
hous 



Housl; — near Birdbrook ; G. Fyke, Esq. The 
-lodernised in ISOl, and stands'in a large park. 



finely disposed into pleasure-giounds. 

lielchurnp Hull, — near Belchampwalter ; liev. .Sam. Kav- 
mond. A spacious mansion, fine terrace, and beautiful lawn". 

X Broxrcd io /;;e, — near l-Cilvedon ; P. Du Cane, i: .q. A 
handsome mansion, pleas,antly situalod on an e.niiience, near 
the centre oi a small park, commanding fine views. 

Ciir/i/ioV/. — near Merring!on ; B. Salvin, Esq. A low, re- 
cluse, and much improved spot. 

Ca-stle EJin \Dun, Sax. ahiil; or .';6'/(?,.Gaelic, the steep face 
of a rock\ — near Watergate ; J! . Buvdon, Esq. A handsome 
castellated house, on tlie top of a woody precipice, which de- 
scends to a romantic defile. 

CVojrfu/e — near Butterby ; ^\^ .Salvin, Esq. The house 
occupies a lofty situation on tlie 1\'are, and the grounds are 
beautifully wooded. 

Effgleston House, — near Eggleston ; Hutchinson, Esq. 

Occupies a lofty situation on the banks of the Tees, surrounded 
by plantations, enclosing a garden noted for its botanical 
collection. 

G/-a«^e/f«H, —near Darlington ; G. Allans, Esq. A modern 
mansion, pleasantly situated, containing an extensive museum 
of natural history. 

Oi-eencro/C, _ near Lanchester ; Sir T. Clavering. A plain 
but large mansion ; and plea:iaut grounds, ornamented with 
buildings and plantations. 

Aen'io)'. i/rJ/, - near Durham ; Sir T. Liddcl. A plain man- 
sion, surrounded bv plantation^, and c-nTini'i" fine' views. 
ivrlh C„-i, 7c, — near (iatesliead ; Sir T. H. 



successor to she eminent landscape-gardener of that name. 
A neat mansion, and extensive plantations on a drearr 
and bleak moor, nov^ rendered beautiful, comibrtable, and 
valuable. 

7585. The following are first-rate residences : — 

Gihside, — near Thyton ; Earl Sfrathmore. The mansion is 
situated on tlie east side oC ihe Derwont ; tlie park is four miles ju 
cii cumference, much varied in surface, and well clothed witli 
fine old oak-woods. The winding api)roach to the house along 
the brink of a wooded glen ; the bai-.quetir.g-house ; the Ionic 
column of 120 feet, crowned with a statue of liberty, the ter- 
race, and cliapel, are much admired. 

//a) J;;.(c/;.c,-near Scdgefield : ]\r. Russel, Esq. Created 
from bog bv the former proprietor, J. Bindon, Esq. and now 
celebrated for the beauty of its pleasure-grounds and the ele- 
gance of its ornamental buildings. TheNmproverncnts were 
commenced in 1750. The terrace, the bathbig-house, the 
lake, the wintling river, the cascade, the temple^ the rivers, 
and the banqueting-house, are much adirured. 

Lamb on Hell, — J. G. Lambton, Esq. A modern building 
by Bononi ; the grounds lately much improved, and the kitchen- 
gardens containing a gi eal e.\tent of hot-houses. 

Luwley Castle, — near Chester-Ie-street ; Earl Scarborough. 
The nlinsion is a quadrangle of the sera of Edward I. jilaced 
on the brow of a well wooded valley- At each exterior angle is 
an octagon turret, machiolated for the puqiose of annoying as- 
sailants, and in different parts are other anangenients of a 
tbrmer age, rarely now to be seen in the oldest edifices. 

Raby Castle, — near Staindrop ; Earl Darlington. A noble 
Gothic pile, on an elevated rocky foundation. It affords a fine 
example of magnificence and comfort in the large entrance- 
hall, into which carriages drive before ti e visitors are set down. 
The park, pleasure-grounds, and plantations accord with the 
dignity of the castle. There is a terrace, commanding extensive 
in length. The farm is extensive, and 



' forest 



I. Liddel, I prospects, 750 yards ii 
of oaks I highly cultivated ; the 



farmyard 



close to the castle, and ex- 
lizO. sci-een. The dog-kennels 
g avchiteclural piles, and on 
■ aro so u.agnilicent, so com- 



Bart. A modern ma 

ShiueHJie Bal!,-y.i_'&r i)u,h3ir. ; K". .>cott, E>n, 
house, sheliereu by a beautiful an)pbitiiearre of hanging 

Stub House, — near ^\'in^ton ; Harri-on, Esq. A re- I 

spectable modern building, with 'pleasant grounds and thriving 
plantations. 

FriH!/«n/, — near Grethai-i ; Sir H. ^'. Ten^pest. .\n elegant | 
rtsirience, combining bosjiitable comfort>, a.nd an attractive i 
mixture of varied ground, woud>, and waters. | 

Woodlands, — t■\e^r Lanch'>;t 'r ; T. M'hitc, E-q. ?on and 

7566. NORTHUMBERLAND. A surface of 1,157,760 acres, much varied by hills and mountains ; 
fertile and well cultivated in the valleys, and abounding in ruined castles. Hexham is noted for the 
jTrowtli of onions, and there .ire extensive nurseries at Gateshead, near Newcastle, but on the Duriiam 
side of the Tyne, carrietl on by Falla and Son, and at Morpeth. Brown, the celeijratec; l;;ndscapo-gardeiicr, 
was born at Cambol, or Camphill, near Hartbuni, in this county. 



the whole, few places in the eiii; i, 
plete, and so well kept up. 

S-Iluliii Hull, — near Sellaby ; Earl of Darlington. A free- 
stone and blue slate villa; the i^ounds disposed with great 
taste and judgment; the stables are arranged so as to "form 
an orn.-nr.entai group subordinate to the mansion ; and the ef- 
feet of the whole highly beautiful. 



Bahti'oiih, — near Retford; the Hon. ,1. B. Simpson. A com- 
fortable residence ; the pleasure-groimds laid out in good style 
by H. Repton. 

Cliipcliase C'asWe, — near Wark ; J. Reed, E-q. A delightful 
residence, with woods, rocks, and waters, and scenery in all re- 
spects enchanting. 

X Goi/orWi i/oiwf,— near Newcastle; C. J. Brandling, Esq. 
A mansion by Pain, and the grounds surrounded by a broad 
belt of wood, and varied internally by clumps, and a piece of 
water by White. 

Heatoii Hall,— near Newcastle; M. V\'. Ridley. An elegant 
house by Newton, the translator of ^'itruvius, erected in 
1713, on the steep and woody banks of Ousebum. 

WhU field Hall, - near Newbrough ; W. Ord, Esq. The 
house sun-otmded by high and bold" rocks, and hanging woods 
thick with hollies, with which the la-.vn, being in higii keeping, 
forms the finest contrast. 

7587. First-rate residences. 

Alniviclc C'(«i7c, — Alnwick ; Duke of Northumberland. A 

7588. LANCASHIRE. A surfi.ce of 1,155,8-K) acres ; mountainous and rugged towards the north and 
cast, the other parts nearly plain, rich, but the climate moist. Near the large towns, and assemblages of 
operative manufacturers, it abounds in neat cottage-gardens, remarkable for their excellence in the cul- 
ture of the gooseberry, and of florists' flowers. This county has long been noted foi its florists' societies, 
and also a botanical society held at Warrington ; and it is now distinguished by the Liverpool botanic 
garden, one of the first in England. Onions are grown extensively near Warrington, and asparagus to 
great perfection in several farm market-gardens near Liverpool The Isle of Man, which lies off this 
county, contains nothing remarkable in the way of gardens ; but it is the birthplace of Kewley, the in- 
ventor of the Ilei^ulatins; Thermometer. 



most extensive castellated pile, with curious ornaments: the 
grounds of great extent, watered by the river AIne, and well 
wooded- The kitchen-garden lately much improved by a 
range of hot-houses erected from the designs of J. Hay, Edin- 
bursh. 

Belsaij Castle,- near Stamfordham ; Sir C. M. L. Monck. 
-A grey house, with a venerable tower, on rising gi-ound, finely 
mtcr-^per^.ed with single trees, and thick groves of wood. 

Chillingham Castl'j ; —ncai Chillingham ; Earl Tankerville. 
A square heavy structure; in a very extensive park, contain- 
ing a large herd of deer, and another dTthe white Scottish bison, 
shy, wilcl, and savage. 

Hawick, — near -Alnwick; Earl Grey. A noble structure by 
Newton, of Newcastle, in a park neax the sea, which has been 
lately much improved. 

Seuion Dclaiul, _- near North Shields: Lord Delaval. A man- 
sion by Vanburgh, and a fine Gothic chapel : the grounds ex- 
tensive, and containing an obelisk and mausoleum. 



Liverpool Botanic Garden -— was established by subscription, 
chiefly through the influence of the celebrated \V. Hoscoe in 
1800," and opened in 1803. It contains upwards of five acres, 
in a triangular form. (Jig. 751.) It is entered between lodges 
(1, 1), which contain the curator's house, committee-room, 
&c. ; and to this a library of natural history is to be ac.ded as 
soon as circumstances will permit. A walk surrounds the gar- 
den, and leads succe^sivelv to the stove (2), rock plants (3), bog 
plants (4), green-house ground (5), conservatory (6), aquarium 
(7), herbaceous plants (.S),,and gramineum {'J). The garden 
w as laid out bv Mr. John Shepherd, the curator, who puii- 
hs'ied a catalogue of the plants in ISOS : and to whose indus- 



try, and extensive correspondence, the. garden owes, in a great 
part, its present flourishing condition. 

Florists' Gardens — The principal of these exclusively de- 
voted to the culture of flowers for sale are Nicholson's and 
Horrock's, both of Bolton. Taylor and Smith are extensive 
florists at Manchester, and combine also the nursery business. 
Thomas, at Middleton, near Manchester, has a good assort- 
ment ; -and there are above half a dozen good commercial florists 
at tHdham. 

Adlinpton Hall, — neax Chorley; Sir R. Clayton. A mo- 
dern house, on a gentle elevation, finely embosomed in wood. 
X UroTVshohne., — near Whalley ; T. L. Eaiker, Esq. A 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF CUMBERLAND. 



1081 




large Elizabethean mansion, in a conspicuous situation ; 
the park, the remains of an ancient forest, but rather de- 
nuded. 

Ijiickeiipeld iot/^'C, — near Ashton ; lately F. D. Astley, 
Esq., author of Hinta to Planters. An irregular pile, on 
a steel) hill, with a broad terrace, and grounds particularly 
Krand and romantic. 

Haddinu Hu/l, — near Little IWilton ; T. Weddel, Esq. A 
most romantic and picturesque situation. 

Hai^'h Hall, — near Wigan ; liarl of Balcarras. A vener- 
able mansion, and grounds, remarkable for a summer-house 
l uilt of ."annel coal. 

Hmton Lodge, — r\e3.r Manchester; Earl Wilton. A 
handsome stone edifice, by the late Samuel Wyatt, Esq. on 
iicommanding situation, in the midst of a fine park, five 
nules in circumference, and enclosed with a stone wall. 
The entrance-lodges in Doric, and mansion in the Ionic style. 

y.rford Hall, — near Warrington; Mrs. Hornby. The 
garden here was formerly rich in botany; and a catalogue 
of the plants was published by the gardener, Neale, in 1779. 

Torvnley Hall, — near Burnley; J. Townley, Esq. A 
large venerable structure, forming three sides of a quadran. 
gle ; the park, enclosed in Henry Vll.'s time, contains some 
very old oaks, which, with the contiguous mountains and 
distant country, present various combinations of grand and 
picturesque scenery. 

Crosion Redoini, — near Ormskirk. About twenty years 
Ago the garden here was remarkable for its melons, which 
were trained on a hot-wall, and by using the seed of succes- 
sive generations, the plants were found to be in some degree 
acclimated. The plants were rooted under bell-glasses on 
a moderate hot-bed at the base of the wall, and trained 
up it like the love-apple. 

Woodfuld. H. Sudell, Esq. near Blackburn. A hand- 
some house and an extensive park, well stocked with deer. 
A kitchen-garden, prolific in forced and exotic productions, 
and a flower-garden under a separate gardener. 

Conniston Priori/, — near Ambleside; Braddyl, Esq. 

Chiefly remarkable for its abundant horticultural products, 
hardy, forced, and exotic. 

7589. First-rate residences. 

Ashton Hall, — near Lancaster; Duke of Hamilton. An 
old baronial castle, in a park abounding with noble woods 
and fine m.arine views. 

Knowleslnj Park, — near Prescot ; Earl of Derby. An an- 
cient mansion and very extensive park, greatly improved by 
the present owner. The kitchen-gardens are extensive and 
well managed ; and near them is one of the largest aviaries in 
Kngland. ' The gardener here excels in growing cucumbers, 
which he produces at table every day in the year, from a small 

7590. CHESHIRE. A surface of 676,000 acres ; generally level, with a moist climate, and deep rich 
soil. There are a number of market-gardens in this county, for the supply of Liverpool and the ship- 
ping ; Altringham is famous for the carrot, which bears its name. There are good nurseries at Nant- 
wich and Knutsford ; and neat cottage and fine flower-gardens in several places. 

Alderlct) Park, — nearAlderley ; Stanley, Esq. Chiefly re- 
markable for its beech-grove, ihe trees of wliich are among the 
largest in the kinirdom 



hot-house or pit, with a vault underneath, the first which 
was heated by steam in England. 



Bram);'C«if«H,— near Stockport; W. Davenport, Esq. The 
mansion is in the Gothic style, and very ancient. The site is 
elevated, and the prospects are pleasing, over a winding brook 
in a wooded bottom. 

Bolesnorlh Caslle,— near Bam Hill; Sir O. Mosely. The 
iiouse is spacious, and in the Gothic style ; and the grounds, 
though possessing little natural beauty, have been judiciously 
laid out. 

Brombo:ough House, — near Bromborough; James Man- 
■wjiring, Esq. The mansion is a handsome building, of the red 
stone of the country, and the grounds are pleasant and judi- 
ciously laid out. 

X Booth's Hall, — near ICnutsford; p. Legh, Esq. The 
mansion is plain, the park extensive, and varied by some fine 
pieces of water. 

Garden, — near Farm ; John Leech, Esq. The mansion is 
a venerable building, and the park and grounds are spacious 
and beautiful. 

X Durham Massey, — near Altringham; Earl Stamford. 
The mansion is a spacious brick quadrangle ; and the park 
which surrounds it is extensive, and full of fine timber. Some 
of the oaks are of extraordinary magnitude; and in their tops 
is a heronry, where many herons associate, and build in so- 
ciety like rooks. The pleasure grounds are extensive, and well 
arranged. 

Hiidc — near Hyde-Chapel ; George Hyde Clark, Esq. 

The house ancient, and the grounds picturesque and elegant. 

7592. WESTMORELAND. A surface of 462,080 acres ; much varied by lofty mountains, naked hills, 
and moors, that call aloud for planting and draining. 



Lyme Hall, — near Stockport; John Legh, Esq. The house 
is a quadrangle, in the style prevalent in James II.'s reign. The 
park is not well wooded, but remarkable for its trees. At pre- 
sent both house and grounds are undergoing great alterations. 

Poi/nton, — near Stockport ; Sir George Warren. The man- 
sion is an elegant Ionic building ; the park extensive, and the 
pleasure-grounds beautifully disposed. 

Peel Hall, — near Halton; the property of the Earl of Ply- 
mouth. It is one of the most magnificent old mansions in the 
county, though now only occupied as a farmhouse. 

7591. The following a.re first -rate residences : — 
Cholmondely Hall, — near Malpas ; Earl Cholmondeley. A 
spacious mansion has lately been erected ; and the grounds laid 
out by Webb. 

Crewe — near Wybumbury ; John Crewe, Esq. The 
mansion is a fine structure, by Inigo Jones ; and the grounds 
are judiciously laid out. 

X Eaton Hall, — near Eaton ; Earl Grosvenor (gros and ue- 
nmr, Fr. or grand huntsman ; an ancestor of this family 
having been in this capacity to the king). The house was 
originally built by Sir John Vanburgh, but hsis lately been 
remodelled, in the Gothic style, by Hardwick. The park is 
extensive, and, with the gardens, has been much improved 
from the designs of Rcpton. 

X Tatton Park, — near Knutsford ; W. Egerton, Esq. The 
house is from an elegant design of Wyatt ; the park con- 
tains 2500 acres, including a mere, or lake, of some extent ; the 
kitchen-garden is large, and contains a spacious well con- 
structed pinery, and shady border for mosses. 



Colgartli, — near Ambleside; . The residence of 

the late Bishop of Llandaff"; chiefly deservmg notice for its ex- 
tensive and judiciously managed plantations. 

Currven's Island, — in Wynandermere lake, near Ambleside ; 
J. C. Cur\ven, Esq. A Roman villa, with a dome, in the centre 
of a small island, well wooded, and the walks and gardens ar- 
ranged from the designs qf the late T. White, Esq. the land- 
scape-gardener of the north. 

X Loruther Castle, _ near Lowther ; Lord Lonsdale. A first- 
rate residence, the mansion castellated by Smirke, of rose- 
tinted white stone, with an outer and inner court, and a ter- 
race as a basement 500 feet long and 100 feet wide : the whole 
building rather low for the style of architecture, but in other re- 
spects excellent. The parks and pleasure-grounds are of great 
extent, and command a variety of prospects and scenery, not 
surpassed perhaps in any other part of the British dominions. 
There is a terrace of closely mown turf: the grasses of the 



finest mountain kind. It is nearly a mile in length, and runs 
along the brink of a limestone cliffy which overlooks a great 
part of the park, irregularly scattered with forest trees of im- 
mense growth, and well stocked with deer. It was this park 
that Lord Macartney compared to the garden of the Emperor 
of China at Gehol. 

Z Rayrigg Hall, — near Kendal ; Rev. T. Fleming. On the 
banks of Wynandermere ; and said to resemble Femey, the ce- 
lebrated seat of Voltaire, near Geneva. 

Rydal Hall (Rye-dale), — near Kendal ; Sir F. Le Fleming. A 
romantic seat on a mountain side, clothed with natural oak* 
woods, and celebrated for its waterfall. 

Warton, — near Carlisle; J. Jackson, Esq. The gardens re- 
semble those of Kensington ; and are said to have been leiid out 
by Mollet, James II.'s gardener, for the ScaifFe family, suc- 
cessors from Edward II.'s time till within the eighteenth cen- 
tury. 



7593. CUMBERLAND. A surface of 970,000 acres, entirely mountainous, and abounding in lakes, 
the most numerous and celebrated of any county in the empire : as in the other north-western counties, 
the climate is severe, and Vinter long and dreary. 



Cvrljy Castle, _ near Carlisle ; Henry Howard, Esq. The 
mansion has lately been improved from the designs of 
Nicholson ; it is boldly situated on the banks of the Eden, 
which are well wooded by nature, and singularly grand and 
picturesque. The grancffather of the present owner beg«n 



to lead walks through these grounds in 1706, and is said to 
have been one of the first persons who broke through the tram- 
mels of the ancient style of laying out grounds. The late Mr, 
Meikle, who was a good deal employed to lay out grotmds in 
the north of England, was originally gardener here. 



J 082 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



Muneaiter Bmue, — near Ravenglass ; Lord Muncaster. 
Great improvements have been made by planting the bleak 
hills on this estate : his lordship has also irrigated extensively, 
and is a very spirited agriculturist. 

JVKn/iery, — near Penrith; Rich. Bambey, Esq. The house 
is in a low confined situation ; but the p-ounds are extremely 
beautiful, and laid out with great taste and judgment. They 
lie along the banks of the Eden, whose rugged bed produces 
several cascades and one waterfall of nearly twelve feet. 



Poruonby Hall, — near Egremont ; G. E. Stanley, Esq. 
The house is modem and surrounded by numerous plant- 
ations and agricultural improvements made by the present 
spirited owner. 

X Workington Hall, — near "Whitehaven ; J. C. Curwen, 
Esq. The house is a spacious quadrangular building ; the 
park and pleasure-grounds are extensive, and the home farm 
celebrated, for it ranks Workington and Curwen with Holk- 
ham and Coke, Woburn and Bedibrd. 



7594. HAMPSHIRE. A surface of 1,112,000 acres, considerably varied in character of surface, yet 
without high hills. The Isle of Wight is a detached portion, remarkable for its beauty and fertility ; the 
Downs, a chalky ridge, are bare of timber. The New Forest and Bere Forest occupy large tracts near 
Southampton, and are the principal tree-bearing royal forests in the management of the government : on 
the borders of Dorsetshire there are large tracts of heath, and on the sea-shore extensive marshes. 
There are several nurseries at Southampton, of whicli the oldest established is that of Rogers, and the 
next in repute that of Page. There is a horticultural society held at Winchester by some gentlemen 
and gardeners of the county. In the Isle of Wight, at St. Laurence cottage, there was a vineyard man- 
aged by a regular vigneron. At Fratton, near Portsmouth, is grown the Portsmouth broccoli, so much 
esteemed. 



ApmilMurcoTtibe, — y\ea.x Godshill, Isle of "Wight ; The Hon. 

. Pelham. A Corinthian mansion of freestone, with four 

fronts, in a spacious park in the midst of an amphitheatre of 
hills, ornamented witli trees of large size, and commanding 
fine prospects. 

Avbi^ton, —neax V/inchester; Duke of Buckingham. A 
brick mansion, in a secluded well wooded valley. 

Belle Vue, — near Southampton; Admiral Sir R. Bligh. A 
superb modem house, commanding a most exquisite prospect 
over the Southamjiton water, with extensive gardens and hot 
houses, and an excellent botanical collection. 

.Bn»ii«AZi)«n/, — n^ar Southampton; Henry Hulton, Esq. A 
mount in a bay of the river, and laid out as a wilderness, by 
Charles Mordaunt, Earl of Peterborough, in Pojje's time. 
His lordshi)) is said to have refused to let strangers see the 
ground, unless during high water. 

Bnnchurch Ciit/age,' — near Bonchurch, Isle of Wi^ht; 

Hatfield, Esq. A comfortable and picturesque house la a most 
romantic situation. 

Dradw II Luilge, — near Hockley ; . The 

house is an elegant building, designed by J. Johnson, Esq., with 
an observatory on its summit. 

Dratnshill, —ne?^r Hartley Wintney; Rev. R. Cope. An 
Elizabethean edifice on an eminence, in a spacious park, and 
one of the most commanding features of the county. 

Broadlaiuls, — near Rumsey ; Lord Palmerston. A neat edi- 
fice of white brick, in a well wooded park. 

. near Southampton ; R. Dmmmond, Esq. The 



by 



Cadlaiul, 

house is plain, but commodious ; the park was laid 
Brown, .-.nd is five miles in circumference. The whole is m 
high keeping. 

Castle Malwood Cotiafxe, — near Lyndhurst ; General Wynyard. 
A high situation, with extensive' views ; the garden kept in 
high order. 

Caijis i?i7/, — near Portsmouth; J. Delm^, Esq. An elegant 
modern building, in a pleasant park, on the east side of the lake 
of Portsmouth Harbour. 

Cratibury House, — near "Winchester ; Sir N. Nolland. An 
extensive mansion ; good kitchen-garden and fine ])rospects. 

Crtuceaatim, — near Lichfield ; Once the seat of Edward 

Lisle, Esq. author of Observations on Affriculhtre ; he died 
in 1722, having had twenty children, seventeen of whom sur- 
vived him. Of these nine, sisters, constructed a grotto which 
has been celebrated by Pope in his Rural Essays, 

" This radiant pile nine rural sisters raise," 
and of which only the skeleton now remains. 

Ciifftiells, — near Lyndhurst ; Rose, Esq. A handsome 

residence, greatly improved by the late owner, the Right Hon. 
G. Rose ; the grounds and part of the forest are every thing 
that can be desired. The late Mr. Eames, when called in to 
give his professional assistance, found nothing to do but to ar- 
range the pleasure-ground scenery and the kitchen-garden. 
The whole is now kept in respectable order. 

X Dogrners field Park, —near Odiham; P. St. John Mildmay, 
"" The mansion is extensive ; the park contains 700 acres. 



best works : the grounds varied and beautiful. In the gardens 
an extensive range of iron hot-houses by Jones and Co. of 
Birmingham. 

X Hackivood Park (Hawking Wood), — near Oldleasing ; 
Lord Bolton. The house lately improved ; the park very ex- 
tensive, bold, and irregular, and finely clothed with noble 
beech-trees, many of which, near the house, are mantled with 
ivy. The pleasure-grounds contain 100 acres, and aflbrd ex- 
amples of an aquatic menagerie, a verdant theatre, French 
garden, and music temple. 

X High Clere, — near Lichfield ; Earl of Carnarvon. The 
mansion an elegant modem structure of brick, stuccoed : the 
park thirteen miles in circumference, and few in the kingdom 
display a surface more varied, or scenery more interesting. 
Almost every thing has been done by the present owner, who 
is also a great encourager of horticulture. 

HiirstKturne Park, — near A\Tiitchurch ; Earl of Portsmouth. 
The mansion by "W. Wyatt : the grounds delightfully wooded, 
and furnishing fine prospects. 

Mattisfoni House, — npar Romsey ; Sir C. Mill. A spacious 
and venerable edifice, with commodious gardens and pleasure- 
grounds, noted for their plane-trees. 

Moyle's Court, — near Kingwood ; Lisle, Esq. A good 

building in-a park, small, but agreeable. 

KenHorvn, — near Boldre ; H. C. Plowden, Esq. A spacious 
and elegant mansion, with a circular room at the top, from 
which extensive views are obtained. The gardens are small, 
but neatly kept. 

N orris, — near East Cowes, Isle of M'ight ; Lord Seymour. 
A Gothic edifice, with an extensive front, by J. \\'yatt, Esq. 
Tlie park small, but affording fine marine views- 

Northcouri House, — neai Shorwell ; K. Bull, Esq. A building 
of the time of .lames I., with the grounds iiearlv in tlie same 
state as originally disposed, in ranges of small terraces, with 
seats, and walls forfiruit. 

Paultotjs, — neai Romsey ; S. Stanley, Esq. The whole de- 
mesne is about five miles in circumference : it was submitted 
to Brown, who thinned the natural woods, and opened ample 
lawns. 

Pil^nicll House, — near Boldre. A beautifully situated house, 
with lawns and pleasure-grounds, extending to tlie sea-side. 

Portsrvood House, — near Southampton ; A. M'Kinnon, Esq. 
A handsome building by Crunden, situated close to South- 
ampton "Water, with extensive pleasure-grounds, beautifully 
diversified. 

Priory, — near St. Helen's Green, Isle of \^'ight : Sir Nash 
Grose. This demesne consists of a narrow strij) of ground, 
about a mile in length, extending along the shore : both house 
and grounds have been much improved by their present 
owner. 

Red Rise, — near Stockbridge ; H. Errington, Esq. Plea- 
santly embosomed in woods, and surrounded by open downs. 

Stoneham Park, — near Winchester ; J. Fleming, Esq. An 
old mansion, recently much improved : the park extensive, and 
laid out by Brown. 

St. Lawrence Cottage, — near UndercUfF; Sir R. Worsley. 
Here a vineyard has been formed, and is now directed by a 
French vigneron (vine-gardener). It was begun in 1792; 
occupies three acres of rocky ground, sheltered from the 
north. Muscadines are chiefly planted in beds, twelve feet 
wide, and the plants a foot and a half apart each way. The 
stools are kept at about eight inches high, and two shoots are 
annually grown from each, to succeed the two of the former 
year then in fruit. These shoots are not allowed to extend 
more than three feet and a half. A pleasant light wine is made 
from the grapes. * 

X Stratlon Park, — near Winchester ; Sir F. Baring. The 
house and grounds recently much improved : the gardens md 
hot-houses extensive, and well managed. 

Vine, — near King's Clare ; W- Chute, Esq. The situation 
rather low ; the grounds well wooded. 



much diversified in surface, and by old woods, new plantations, 
and a lake of forty -four acres. The pleasure-grounds were laid 
out by Eames. In the plantations the ash is much and success- 
fully cultivated for hop-poles. 

Elvetham, — near Hatford Bridge; Lieut. Gen. Gwynne. 
An eligible residence ; the park and grounds two miles in cir- 
cumference, laid out by Eames, who had a lease of tliis estate 
fcr twenty-one years. 

Exbury House, — near Exbury ; Col. Mitford, author of the 
History of Greece, by whom tfie grounds have been ^eatly 
improved. The demesne is about eight miles in circum- 
ference. 

Fairy Hill, — near Ryde ; Rev. H. Oglander. A neat house, 
and the grounds disposed as aferme oryi^e. 

Fern Hill, — nearWooten Bridge, Isle of Wight ; S. Saunders, 
Esq. The house bears some resemblance to a church ; the pros- 
pects are remarkably fine, and the kitchen -garden good. 

Froghill,— near Calboume ; P. Barrington, Esq. A small, but 
elegant house, and grounds disposed with much taste. 

Gatcornbe House, — near Carrisbrooke, Isle of Wight; A. 
Campbell, Esq. Beautifully situated on the declivity of a hill, 
and the park ornamented with natural oaks and coppice-woods. 

Grange Park, — near Almsford; Alexan der Baring, Esq. 
The house by Inigo Jones, and said by Walpole to be one of his 

7596. WILTSHIRE. A surface of 821,120 acres; elevated, varied, but not much wooded: the 
climate dry and cold. Gary and Moody, nurserymen, near Salisbury, grow the best crocuses in England, 
of which they send large quantities annually to London, and other parts : there is a famous grower of 
ranunculuses and anemones at Marlborough, and a good nursery at Devizes, besides various market- 
gardens. Savernake Forest, in Tottenham Park, is the only one in the kingdom belonging to a subject. ■ 

Claredon Lodge, — near Salisbury; F. H. Bathurst, Esq. A 
commodious modern edifice, surrounded by extensive grounds, 
abimdantly wooded, and containing a natural lake, from which 
issues a stream. 



7595. First-rate residence. 

Strathfieldsay, — near King's dare; Duke of Wellington. The 
house, now undergoing great alterations, is rather low ; the 
park is extensive and well wooded. The alterations are by 
Wyatt, che architect of Drury-lane theatre. 



■ ^i/icOTnAe, — nearCranboui-ne; P. Methuen, Esq. The house 
is singularly situated on an isolated knoll, which lias been, not 
unaptly compared to an inverted basin, placed in the middle of 
a large China bowl. 

Brojcjnore, — near Downton ; R. Brestow, Esq. A n Italian 
villa, by Falkham, of which the stables are of a very supe- 
rior kind. The grounds and exterioi scenery highly picturesque 



Coives field House, — near Downton; Sir A.Paget. A true 
fertrie ont^e ; the fields regularly encompzissed with ornamental 
•bedgerowa and trees, with generally a turf drive, or a gravel- 
walk : the views from these hedge-paths are extensive. 



Book 1. 



GARDENS OF SOMERSETSHIRE. 



1083 



Earl't Stoke. — Connected with this spot Ls a rustic village by 
desi/'n. 1 1 consists of several cottages iilaced on the sides of the 
road, eacli detached from the others, and every one accom- 
panied by its garden-creepers, trees, honey-suckles, &c. 

Lake House, — near Ambresbury ; Rev. Edw. Duke. A 
respectable, and truly picturesque edifice, with bay windows, 
gables, yew-hedges, terraces, &c. in the genuine style of the 
last age. 

Lidcliard Park, — near Wooton Basset ; Lord Bolingbroke. 
Extensive grounds abounding in fine old trees, and containing 
a fine pond of water. 

Lotifrford Castle, — near Salisbury ; Earl of Radnor. A 
house remarkable for its ground-plan, which was intended to 
resemble the catholic monogram of the Trinity, erected about 
1591, from the designs of John Thorpe. An entirely new 
structure, in the castellated style, is in contemplation. The 
peurk is rich in woods and picturesque views, and is watered by 
the Avon. 

Litttecot Park, — near Ram&hury; E. L. Popham, Esq. Four 
miles in circumference, well wooded, and containing a hill, 
and the river Kennet passing through the pleasure-grounds. 

Melchett Park, — near Uownton ; J. Osborne, Esq. 'I'he 
grounds remarkable for a beautiful Hindu temple, erected by 
the late owner as a tribute to the merits of Warren Hastings, 
Esq. ^ 

Pyt House, near Wardour ; J. Bennet, Esq. A modern 
Grecian edifice, with an elegant chapel attached, and pleasure 
grounds extensive, and laid out with considerable taste. 

Roche Great Court, — near Salisbury; F. T. Egerton, Esq. 
An Italian house, by C. H. Falkham, Esq., and 2000 acres of 
ground, laid out as park, garden, and farm scenery. 

Rorvd Ashton, — near Trowbridge; R. (j. JLong, Esq. A 
mansion lately improved, and a i)ark of considerable extent, 
abounding in woods. 

X Tottenliam Park, — near Marlborough ; Earl of Aylesbury. 
This seat, including Savemake Forest, is sixteen miles in cir- 
cumference; the whole intersected by numerous walks and 
avenues, eight of which diverge from a common centre. The 
house is a square brick building with wings ; opposite to it is a 
lofty colunm, erected by a late earl as a testimony of gratitude 
to jts former possessor. 

Wilcot House, — near Uphaven; Admiral Montague. A 
modem mansion, adorned with a finely wooded park, bounded 
by a branch of the Avon. 

Wilhury House, — near Amesbury ; Sir C. W. Malet. A 
comfortable stone house, with a park recently planted, and 
likely to be soon eminently deserving notice. 

7597. First-rate residences. 

X jBowoorf, — near Calne; Marquis of Lansdown. An ex- 
tensive mansion, chiefly by Adams, on an eminence, in a park 
and pleasure-grounds, extensive, greatly diversified in natural 
features, and richly adorned with plantations. Within the 
boundary of the park are contained numerous valleys, each of 
which is characterised by its own peculiar form, feature, and 
scenery, and one is covered by a broad and irregular lake, 
the waste waters of which flow over a much-admired artificial 
cascade. 

X Corsfidd House, — near Corsham ; P. C. Methuen, Esq. 
An Elizabethean house, altered and enlarged by Brown, 
and subsequently, in a very superior style, by Nash. The 
grounds, laid out by H. Repton, are extensive, but little va- 
ried. A hot-house and conservatory have been erected by 
Stewart. 

C/mWtoiPar/c, — nearMalmsbury; Earl of Suffolk. A noble 
pile, by Inigo Jones, but unfurnished : the park extensive, but 
at present cultivated as a farm. 

X Fonthill Abbey, — near Hindon ; late W- Beckford, Esq. A 
magnificent and unique mansion, in imitation of a Gothic 
abbey, in style, situation, and surrounding scenery very pe- 
culiar, and considered the most remarkable seat in the west of 
England. The natural cind scenic features of this place are 
bold, grand, and highly diversified. Nearly the whole of an 
eminence, which gradually ascends from the ojien country on 
tlie north, and from a fine enclosed country to the south, 



From the apex of a hill, amidst a grove of ancient pines, rlKes 
the lofty tower, turrets, pediments, and pinnacles of a mansion, 
which assumes externally the character of an ancient monastic 
edifice. It consists of a central tower about 270 feet in height, 
a lofty entrance-hall, a vestibule, a wing, or transept, extend- 
ing from the tower to the east, and two other wings, branching 
off from the centre to the north and south. The exterior ele- 
vations of each of these jjortions is dissimilar to the others, and 
each is appropriated to the different accommodations and pur- 
poses of an elegant and commodious mansion. State-rooms, 
gallery, libraries, eating-rooms, parlours, drawing-rooms, &c. 
are fitted up in a truly splendid style; and adorned with the 
choicest works in literature and the line arts. The architect 
of the whole was James Wyatt, Esq., and many of the most 
eminent artists of the country v/ere employed in finisliing tjie 
interior. 

The abbey is approached by a broad avenue of turf, up- 
wards of a mile in length, on the summit of a ridge, the sides 
of which are thickly wooded. A public road formerly inter- 
sected the park, but that road is now in great part arched 
over, and lighted by openings at intervals- There are numerous 
green drives (the sub-soil being chalk, these are always dry,) 
and gravel-walks, which conduct through the grounds, and 
especially the woods, the under-growths of which, in many 
places, are formed of the most choice sorts of roses and A me- 
rican plants, purchased and placed in their appropriate soils at 
great expense, and afterwards left to run wild. There are 
whole acres of azaleas, rhododendrons, magnolias, &c. which 
have a most delightful effect. Herbaceous plants are equally 

Erofusely scattered ; and there are a few seats and buildings, 
ut these are chiefly confined to the lower grounds, where there 
are several large pieces of water, cascades, grottoes, &c. near 
to the site of the former Grecian mansion. This we were 
fortunate enough to see before its removal in 1806 . The kitchen, 
garden is good, and no expense spared to render it productive 
in exotic as well as hardy esculents and fruits. 

X io»gZea<, — near Warminster; Marquisof Bath. A mag- 
nificent mansion, and the proudest architectural ornament of 
this part of Wiltshire, built in thelatter part of the 16th century 
from the designs of an Italian architect. The grounds were 
laid out in Charles II.'s time by London and Wise, and sub- 
sequently remodelled by Brown, whose plans were foUowed by 
the late marquis to his death in 1796, and have been continued 
by the present proprietor. A broad and luxuriant valley con- 
tains the house and a large sheet of water : the park stretches up 
the sides of the surrounding hills, covered by the finest old 
timber, and fifteen miles in circumference ; the approach from 
the south is a straight avenue nearly a mile ; trie others are 
different, and that from the Warminster road displays nearly 
the whole of the domain. 

Stoke Park, — near T)e\i-Le&- J. Smith, Esq. A house and 
offices, with a front of 356 feet, on the summit of an eminence, 
surrounded by a well wooded and watered park, in which the 
pleasure-ground occupies a narrow winding valley, containing 
a rivulet, the waters of which form several cascades. On the 
whole, few spots in England present such a combination of 
lawn, hill, vale, waters, and diversified plantations. 

X Stourhead, — near Mere; Sir R- C. Hoare. The mansion 
from the designs of Colin Campbell, author of the Vitruvius Bri- 
tannicus : the grounds long noted for their sylvan beauties and 



tonning long extenaea terraces, ana aeep narrow valleys with 
rivulets. The sides and summits of some of these eminences 
are thickly, and others partially, clothed with wood. One of 
the valleys is covered with water by means of a dam, and various 
cascades are formed on the brooks: throughout the whole place, 
temples, obelisks, bridges, covered seats, and other buildings 
are introduced. 

Wardtnir Castle, — near Salisbury; Earl Arundel. A large 
magnificent mansion, by Paine in 1776, the gvcuiids are much 
diversified in surface and by planting, and thoy contain the 
ivied ruins of the old castle. 

X Wilton, — near Wilton ; Earl Pembroke. An extensive 
pile, of rather incongruous architecture, bv Hans Holbein, 
bolomon de Cans, Inigo J ones or his successor \ V'ebb, and James 
Wyatt, Esq. The park contains some ornamental buildings, 
old trees, and pieces of water. 



covered with woods, some of which are of ancient growth, but 
the greater part planted by the father of the late possessor 

7598. DORSETSHIRE. A surface of 775,000 acres, divided into two parts by a range of chalk hills, 
which run east and west : the climate dry and healthy, and the soil rich. Near this county is the Isle of 
Jersey, which, with Guernsey, supply roots of the amaryllis sarniensis to the seedsmen, and some 
grapes to the fruiterers. Parsneps are grown to a great size, and there is a general taste for flowers, and 
neatness in the gardens, to which their mild winteis are particularly favorable. In these islands many of 
our green-house plants thrive in the open air ; as several of the amarallidea-, verbena triphyila, camellia^ 
celtis, nerium, corea, melaleuca, pittosporum, and even canna indica, which is a weed in some gardens. 
It is suggested by Dr. M'CuUoch {Appendix to Quai/le's Agr. View of the Nortnan Islands), that Guernsey 
would form an excellent coast station in acclimating the plants of hot countries. The arum maculatum is 
so abundant in the Isle of Portland, that the common people gather its roots, prepare them as sago, and 
send the produce to London, where it is sold as Portland sago. 



cent piles in the county ; the grounds beautifully varied and 
richly wooded, were in part laid out by H. Repton. A village 
was transplanted from the vicinity of the house, and erected in 
a regular style in a distant situation. 

More Critchell, — Near Winbome; Charles Stewart, Esq. 
This is a romantic seat, with an excellent mansion, command- 
mg extensive views. 

Waterbourne Harrington, — near Dorchester ; Edward Wil- 
liams, Esq. The hous^ is a large quadrangular building, and 
the grounds contain some fine oaks, and chestnuts of the gi-owth 
of two centuries and upwards. 

Sherborne Castle, — near Milton; Earl of Digby. Tla 
mansion is a singular structure, in the form of a Roman M ; 
the centre part was built by Sir W. Raleigh, and is dated 1514. 
In the park is a grove, said to have been planted by Sir 
Walter. The grounds were much improved from the designs 
Earl of Dorchester. of Brown. 
The house, by Sir W. Chambers, is one of the most magnit 

7599. SOMERSETSHIRE. A surface of 991,360 acres, hilly and stony towards the N.E , with ferns, 
marshes, and moors, towards the centre; the remainder high and hilly. There was a carious market- 
gardener at Bath, about 20 years ago, v/ho proposed ripening grapes under hand-glasses ; and in Switzer's 
lime, there was a seat there abounding in curious water- works. Salter is the principal florist and nursery- 
man, and has published a tract on florists' flowers. There are also good nurseries at Taunton, Froome, 
and Bridgewater. 



Bryanslone House, — E. B. Portman, Esq- ; near Poole. A 
splendid modem mansion, and extensive and beautifully varied 
grounds. The gardens in a high state of cultivation and keep- 
ing, and the whole one of the first residences in the county. 

Bncome, — near Kimeridge ; William Morton Pitt, Esq. The 
situation is extremely fine, and the grounds are dis]iosed with 
much taste. On this estate, in 175,7, was found a mushroom 
that weighed eight pounds, was fifteen inches long, ten round, 
eight deep, and the section almost in the form of the figure 8. 

Kingston Hall, — near Poole ; Henry Bankes, Esq. The 
house was erected in 1663, and is large and substantial. 
The kitchen-garden is well attended, and the park-scenery 
good. 

LidlwoHh Castle, — near LuUworth; T. Wild, Esq- The 
house? is a noble pile ; the park occupies a circuit of nearly four 



1084 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



Enmore Catlle, — near Enmore ; Earl E^mont. A quadran- 
gular embattled structure, the stables and offices all under 
}^ound ; the shrubbery neat and elegfant, and the views over a 
finely cultivated and enclosed country. 

7600. DEVONSHIRE. A surface 
of 1,600,000 acres, abounding in moun- 
tains, hills, and valleys j the former 
barren and moory, th e latter mild in cli- 
mate, beautiful and fertile; orchards 
abound in the southern part, and the 
centre contains that barren, bleak 
tract, called the Forest of Dartmoor, 
now happily under a spirited course of 
improvement. Ford at Exeter, and 
Luccumbe of the same place, (who 
raised the variety of the common oak 
which bears his name,) are the prin- 
cipal nurserymen. The father of 
Galpine, author of the Compend of 
British Plants, had a nursery at 
Brenton. The Ducliess of Bedford 
has a picturesque cottage retreat on 
tlie banks of the Tamar 752.), 
one of the last places at wliich the 
late H. Repton was consulted. 

Bieton, — near Bicton ; Lord Rolle. The mansion is spacious ; 
the park pleasantly situated, and well wooded. 

Borin^oii, — near I'lymouth ; Lord Borinffton. The house 
was built at the end of the fom-teenth century, though now 
occupied as a farmhouse ; the i)ark contains 500 acres richly 
wooded, to which continual additions are making on the side of 
Dartmoor. 

X Caslle Hill,— ne^r South Melton ; Lord Foitescue. The 
mansion is situated on the acclivity of a finely wooded emi- 
nence ; the grounds ai-e well tUversilicd, and contain a tine 
sheet of water. 

Ciill^iriest Hmise, — near Tivevtoni Thomas AVinsloe, Esq. 
The mansion has lately been enlarged, and the grounds im- 
proved. 

Es'eiit House, — near Iloniton; Sir John Kennaway. The 
house has been improved by H. Wyatt; the i)lantations are 
ajnong the most luxuriant in Devonshire. 

Faringdim House,— near Ottory St. Mary ; J. P. Chelwick, 
Esq. The grounds are jileasant, and the plantations par- 
ticularly flourishing. 

Great Ftilford, near Exeter; B. Fulford, Esq. The mansion 
is one of the most ancient in the county, and still retains much 
of its original character ; the park is milch diversilied internally 
by undulations, and the judicious disposition of trees and the 
distant river are interesting. 

HaJdon Hifuse, — near Exeter; Sir L. Palk. The house is 
a model of Buckingham House in St. James's Park. The 
ornamental grounds are extensive, and the plantations cover 
many acres. 

Laiulrige, — near Chudleigh; Rev. J. Templar. The man- 
sion is large ; the grounds are picturesque and finely wooded, 
and contain some of tlie largest trees in Devonshire. 

Luscambe House, — near Dawlish; C. Hoare, Esq. The 
house is an elegant design of Nash, who has endeavored to 
unite the picturesque, the ueautiful, and the ornamental. The 
grounds are beautifully varied by nature, and well planted. 

Ma?ic/teflrf, — near Kenton ; Lord Lisbume. The mansion is 
of considerable antiquity : the park abounds in fine plantations 
of firs and other forest trees: and the lawn in the garden-front 



Goatliurst, — near Enmore ; Sir C. Tynte. A noble buildinp, 
with a park, and home pasture-farm, of great extent, exhibit- 
ing as fine scenery of the verdant and cultivated kind as any 
in England. 




X Mount Edgecumlie, — near Plymouth ; E.nrl Mount Edg<^ 
cumbe. The liouse is a very ancient building : the grounds are 
among the most remarkable in England for uoldness, fine trees, 
and marine views. The grounds have been considerably im- 
proved by the present earl, and an account of them lately 
published, entitled A Walk round Mount Edgecumbe, with 
eight views, 1821. 

Nuimell, — near Topsham ; Lord Heathfield. The mansion 
is large, and the park scenery highly interesting. 

0.rton Huuic, — near Kenton Rev. J. Swete. A new house 
has been built, and the groiuids, which had been laid out at 
great expense in the old style, are modernised, and a fine lake 
lormed from a natural brook. 

X Powdersham Castle, — near Kenton ; Lord Courtenay. A 
very ancient seat, with a venerable Elizabethean mansion, and 
extensive grounds finely planted. The circumference of the 
park is nearly ten miles: and the pleasure-grounds and kitchen- 
gardens are replete with appropriate productions. 

The Retreat, — near Kenton; Sir Alexander Hamilton. An 
elegant seat, kept in good style. 

Saltram, — near Plympton St. Mary ; Lady C . Parker. The 
situation is eminently beautiful : the mansion is the largest in 
the countv: the new approach is particularly admired. 

r(/?ii/ucA-,_near Barnstaple; Sir B. AV'ray, Bart. An im- 
posing mansion and woods, remarked by authors as taking in 
at one view the best manor, best mansion, finest church, and 
richest rectory in the coiuity : the house is in the (lothic style, 
and the grounds have recently been much improved. 

X C7#,'/ir()()A-e, — near Chudleigh; Lord Clifford. One of the 
most enchanting spots in Devon : the grounds contain every 
variety of objects which constitute beautiful scenery — wood, 
water, rock, and unevenness of surface; and the exterior 
scenery is highly interesting. 

tVulford Loilge, — near Honiton ; General Simcoe. The 
house is large, and decorated with fine old woods and many 
plantations, which clothe a declivity, and form a semicircle 
around it. 

Yea Vale, _ near Bideford ; Rev. F. H. Morrison. An ancient 
seat, recently much improved. 



of the house is beautifully varied by groups of trees. 

7601. CORNWALL. A surface of 758,000 acres, mountainous and hilly, but temperate in climate, 
and the valleys rich. 

CaccZcm, — near Falmouth; Sir W. Lemon, Bart. The house 
is of granite, in the Ionic style ; the grounds are beautiful, and 
much improved by plantation. 

C/on'OHce, — near Hale; Sir John St. Aubyn, Bart. The 
house is enveloped in wood, the park is large, and the pleasure- 
grounds delightful. 

Colcliete or Cuttayle House, near Calstock ; Earl of Mount 
Edgecumbe. The house is an irregular quadrangle, situated 
on ahold knoll, on the banks of the I'amar. The woods which 
descend from the house abound in some of the most magnifi. 
cent oaks and chestnuts in England. 

X MeH«/<!7/i/, — near Menabilly; Philip Rashleigh Esq. The 
house is of stone, and commands an extensive prospect over the 
British Channel : it contains one of the finest collections of 
native minerals in the kingdom. The kitchen-f;arden is well 
managed ; and the grouncls are distmguished for their verj' 
beautiful grottoes. 

Pemhirvcs, — near Clawance; .John Stackhouse, Esq. The 
house is a larf^ handsome grEmite edifice; and the gjounds 
contain a large lake. 

X Pui-iiirti'o/,— near St. Germains; Lord f^Uiot. The mansion 
is irregular, and the grounds very much so, and greatly im- 
proved and embelhshed, in part from the designs of Repton. 



Pontillu Cfli«e,— near Cotchele ; Mrs. Tilly (18'20). The 
house, wnich is modem but embattled, is finely situated on the 
banks of the Tamar. The declivities towards the river are 
most luxuriously wooded with elms and limes, and the back- 
ground scenery is distinguished by a tower in which the late 
Sir. Tilly was inhumed sitting in his elbow-chair with bottles, 
pipes, i&c. before him. 

Tetredy Park, — near Redruth ; Lordde Dunstanville. The 
house is of granite, from a design by Edwards ; the park 
contains 70tf acres, of which 1.50 are appropriated to a la-xn 
and sheep-walk ; on the rest extensive plantations have been 
made. The situation is bleak, and it is said the pineaster is 
planted as a nurse to other species, and that the larch will only 
grow in sheltered situations. 

Trebartha Hall, — near Launceston; Colonel Uadd. A tor- 
rent dashing over immense rocks, amid mountainous and 
woody scenery, rendei's this a singularly grand and picturesque 
place. 

Trelanmey Hous"., — near AVest Cove ; Trelawny, Esq. 

The mansion is in the Elizabethean style, and the views are 
over the valley of the Love river, which contains some of the 
finest scenes in England. 



Sect. II. 1P''ales. 

7602. ^ hilli/ mountainous surface of 5,206,900 acres, with a climate colder than tliat 
of England, and more moist in the proportion of .S4, the average number of inches of 
rain which falls in Wales, to 22, the number for England. The soil is generally of an 
inferior description, and the great proportion of mountainous surface is fit only for plant- 
ing, which is the principal branch of gardening followed in Wales : horticulture and 
floriculture are chiefly confined to the low grounds near the sea and internal valleys. 
There are no public gardens ; but few commercial ones ; and the number of gentlemen's 
seats is very limited : cottage and farmei-s' gardens indifferent, though generally well 
stocked with commoner varieties of cabbage or borecoles and leeks. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF WALES, 



1085 



7603. ANGLESEA, or MONA. A hilly bleak island of I 
gardening, but containing a few seats worthy of notice. 



1,000 acres ; ill adapted for any branch ot 



Baron Hill, — near Beaumaris; Lord Bulkely. A house 
improved by Sam. Wyatt, but supposed to be too high for its 
elevated situation. The grounds much varied by nature, 
and improved by lawns, groves, bridges, and other ornamental 
buildings ; and from a tower on Baron Hill the finest prospects 
in the island are obtained. 

Bi>Uor)ran, — near Aberfraw ; O. V. Meyrick, Esq. A house 
by Duffbrd, on an eminence, in a small park well clothed with 
wood. 



X Plat Nervydd, — near the banks of the Menai ; Marquis 
of Anglesea. An elegant castellated mansion, with an ex- 
tended front by Potter, of Litchfield ; built of native marble. 
The home grounds extend along the Menai, contain a fine 
lawn, marine terraces, baths, green-houses, and gardens, and 
are abundantly wooded; the park is not very extensive, but 
contams some antiquated oaks, many new plantations, fine 
drives and walks, and very picturesque views. 



7604. CAERNARVONSHIRE. A mountainous surface of 310,000 acres, with few gardens of any 
sort whatever. 

Vaenol House, — near Caernarvon; T. A. Smith, Esq. A 
handsome modem structure, deeply embosomed with trees, 
with an extensive lawn sloping to the Menai. 

X Penrhyn Castle, near Bangor ; Lady Penrhyn. A cas- 
tellated mansion of considerable antiquity, improved by 
Wyatt, surrounded by plantations, for the extent of which and 

7605. DENBIGHSHIRE. A hilly tract of 410,000 acres, the soil various, but not rich or favourable 
for cultivation, excepting in the valleys. The seats are chiefly on the Chester side of the country. 



for the various uses to which the Penrhyn slab is applied, this 
residence is chiefly remarkable. Park-pales, gates, doors, 
window-shutters, troughs, mangers, stall-partitions, hot-bed 
frames, and a variety of other articles are formed from it, and 
found to be very durable. 



Lleweni Hall, — near Denbigh; M. Hughes, Esq. Situated 
on a flat lawn, with a bleachery too near, and not properly 
planted out. 

Poutriffitli Farm, — near Denbigh; Mrs. Lloyd. A ferme 
ortufe, handsomely laid out and kept in good order. 

Pool Park,— near Rathin ; Lord Bagot. Delightfully si- 
tuated, and finely wooded with old chestnut-trees. 

Plas Newydd, — near Llangollen ; Lady Eleanor Butler, and 
Miss Ponsonby. An elegant residence fitted up in the cottage 
style, and the grounds beautifully laid out by the elegant and 
accomplished proprietors. 

Llandysilio Hall, — near Llangollen; T. .Tones, Esq. A 
handsome structure of brick, in a flat situation, with a park 
composed of tliis bottoin, and part of the surrounding hills 
finely wooded. 

ErJdig, — near Wrekham ; S.Yorke, Esq. Chiefly remark- 
able for the beauty of the ap))roach through a dense wood ; 
there are also other umbrageous walks, a rivulet, lawn, ar.d 
banquetting-house, much admired. 

Bern Hall, — near Wrexham ; T. Lloyd, Esq. A handsome 
modex-n mansion, embosomed in fine rich plantations; the 
situation flat, but the surrounding scenery hilly and grand. 

Adon Hall, — near Wrexham; Sir F. Cunlifi'e. A good 
mansion, on an elevated lawn; the grounds extended, and 
greatly improved by the present proprietor. 

760a. FLINTSHIRE. A surface of 160,000 acres, 
counties, and not unfavorable to gardening. 

Doromn^', — near Whitford ; D. Pennant, Esq. A mansion 
H-shaped, with Gothic wings, in a low sequestered situation, 
surrounded by finely wooded grounds, which owe their tasteful 
disposition to the late eminent naturalist, father of the present 
possessor. 

Hanmer Hall, — near St. Asaph; Sir T. Hanmer. A hand- 
some brick structure, situated in grounds naturally fine from 
their consisting of eminences and slopes. These are embel- 
lished with woods and plantations, and a lake of 50 acres. 

Hearlsheaih Hull, — near Mold ; G. L. Wardel, Esq. Beau- 
tifully situated on a gentle slope, showing three fronts, with an 



Upper Gwersilt Hall, — near Gresford; Mrs. Atherston. 
The grounds most tastefully laid out, with highly romantic 
walks, alternately umbrageous, and open on the banks of the 
Alun. 

Llanarch House, — near Denbigh ; D. Leo, Esq. A beautifiil 
park, witli a fine piece of water, commanding extensive views. 
The gardens were formerly laid out by M. Davies, Esq. on his 
return from Italy, with formal walks, dipt trees and hydraulic 
statues. Among the images and water-tricks was a sundial, 
which, on the spectator's approach, spouted in his face, and 
apologised for the rudeness by an indecorous inscription. The 
whole place is now modernised, and the fine old house too 
much so. 

X Wynnslay, — at Ruabon ; Sir W. W. AVynn. The house, 
an extensive pile, erected at different times, approached 
through a straight avenue a mile in length ; the trees, old and 
large, elms, oaks, beeches, and planes. The park is eight miles 
in circumference, surrounded by a high stone wall ; the sur- 
face is not much diversified, but it contains a fine sheet of 
water and numerous plantations, with an admirable artificial 
cascade, similar to that in Bowood Park, near Calne. The 
horticultural and floricultural establishments are very com- 
plete; and here the banana was fruited, and its fruit used at 
the dessert, for the first time in England. There is a large farm 
under the care of an excellent Berwickshire bailiff. 

less mountainous or varied than any of the Welsh 

excellent range of stables and offices peeping through fine 
plantations in the back ground. 

Leesrvood, — near Mold ; Sir G. Wynne. The grounds oc- 
cupy a fine slope, and were laid out by Switzer above a century 
ago, whose magnificent iron gateway, through which the fore- 
court of the house is entered, still remains. 

Penguern, — near Whiteford; Sir E. P. Lloyd. A modem 
structure, surrounded by grounds extensively planted, and 
otherwise greatly improved by draining in some places, and 
irrigation and levelling, and removing of detached stones, in 
others. 



7607. CARDIGANSHIRE. A surface of 500,400 acres, more mountainous than any in South Wales ; 
the mountains generally bleak and bare of wood. 



X Hafod, — near Aberystwith ; 



late the seat of 



T. .Tohnes, Esq. By far the most grand and picturesque i 
dence in either North or South Wales. The house, in a 
peculiar style of Gothic or Moresque architecture, in the side 
of a secluded basin, among high mountains : the approaches to 
it full of beauty and contrast, the numerous walks displaying 
waterfalls, precipices, views, prospects, cultivated scenes, rude 
spots, seats, buildings, &c. singularly romcmtic and sublime. 

7608. GLAMORGANSHIRE. A surface of 422,000 acres, mountainous towards the north, but more 
level and suited to culture in the southern parts. 



The kitchen-gardens and farm were extensive, and successfully 
cultivated. This place has been described by many tourists; 
but in the most elegant manner, by Sir J. E. Smith, P. L. S. in 
a Tour to Hafod, with many views. 

Stradmore Vale, — near Llandy ssil ; R. Taylor, Esq. An 
elegant mansion, desirably situated in a rich bottom, on the 
banks of the Teivi, and backed by a luxuriant forest of oak. 



Gmll Castle, — near Neath; Grant, Esq. The house 

rises with baronial pomp and grandeur, on the point of a hill, 
overlooking the town and adjacent country. The grounds 
most judiciously laid out by the late Sir H. Mackworth. 

LlaiUryddyd, — near Cowbridge; Sir J. Aubrey. An 
Elizabethean mansion, in a park richly wooded, of considerable 
extent, and surrounded by a stone wall. 

Margram, — at Margram ; Talbot, Esq. The house fallen 

to decay ; but the park, which is extensive, and well wooded, 
still preserved in its original state, and considerable attention 
paid to the pleasure-grounds, which are remarkable for the 
orangery. This is a Doric edifice, built in 1787, .327 feet in 
length, and 81 in width, with a square room, parted ofFat each 
end. There are 110 orange-trees, several of which are 18 feet 
in height, cmd remarkably handsome. In summer they are 



removed to the lawn, and arranged as a grove. Various tra- 
ditions exist as to the bringing of the trees to Margram ; but 
that generally credited is, that they were originally designed as 
a present from the King of Spain or Portugal to Elizabeth ; 
but that the vessel stranding on the Margram estates, they 
became the property of the lord of the manor. 

Rheola, — near Swansea; John Edwards, Esq. The gar- 
dener, Walter Hogg, an excellent cultivator of pines : one ot 
the new Providence kind weighing 91bs. 4oz. was presented to 
the king in 1821. (See 2831. and Horl. Trans, iv. 555.) 

Penrice Castle, — near Swansea ; R. M. Talbot, Esq. A com 
modious and elegant mansion : the giounds laid out with grea 
taste, and ornamented with some artificial pieces of water. 

Stout Hall, — near Swansea ; J. Lucas, Esq. Great taste dis 
played in the disposition of the pleasure-grounds and gardens. 



7009. PEJ/IBROKESHIRE. Apenlnsularsurfaceof 33.5,000 acres; generally plain and fertile. Grapes 
attain greater perfection in the hot-houses of this county, than in those of any other of Wales, 

Caalle Maelgwn, — near St. Dogmaels; Hammet, Esq. 

The grounds embrace the Teivi, and are laid out with great 
taste ; the mansion also materially improved by the late 
proprietor. 



Larvrunny Hall, — near Milford; H. Barlow, Esq. A plea- 
iiantly situated house, the grounds bordered by a creek on one 
side, and Milford-haven on the other. 

Piclon Castle, — near Milford ; Lord Milford, A mansion of 
considerable antiquity, castellated, with a fine terrace in front, 
and enlarged and improved to suit the mpdem style of mag- 
nificence in domestic economy. The grounds on an extensive 
scale, richly wooded, and watered by the confluence of two 
jnountain streams. 



Stackpool Court, — neat Pembroke; Lord Cawdor, 
grand and. imposing building, situated on the precipit 
margin of a nan-ow valley, which has been converted into a 



tuatcd on the precipitous 
, , - , , ^ ., .has been converted into a 

lake. Along the front next the water, a broad terrace has 
been formed; and the other, which contains the entrance, 
looks into some elegant pleasure-grounds. The kitchen-garddn 
IS most successfully culUvated by Buchan, who, in 1821, ,ut 
120 to 200 pines, and upwards of 13 cwt, of grapes, 

Pentre, — near St. Dogmaels; Saunders, Esq The 

house in a pleasant rural spot embossomed in trees; tt. gar- 
dens in the old style carefully kept up; the whole sreatlv 
admired. " ' 



7610. RADNORSHIRE. A surface of 326,400 acres ; partly level and partly mountainous. 



BoxJtUjrooke — neax Presteigne; Sir H. Jones, 
» worthy of notice. 



WaU(m, — near Old Radnor; R. Urwic, Esq. A handsome 

rrodern house. 



1086 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING 



P^RT IV. 



Wellfietd Home, — near Builth ; D. Thomas, Esq. A neat I Maeslough, — near Paine's Castle; W. Wllkins, Esq. A re- 
modern house ; the grounds containing some flourishing young [ spectable structure ; the prounds watered by the Wye, and 
plantations. | their position extremely beautiful. 

7611 MONTGOMERYSHIRE. A surface of 500,000 acres ; generally mountainous, but ver- 
dant, fertile, and wooded. Some of the vales are beautiful ; and there are many fit situations for 
residences. 



N rvtoTvn Hall, — near Newtown ; Sir John Pryse. A finely 
wooded park of considerable extent. 

BoJfac'i, — near Llanfyllin ; B. Lloyd, Esq. A good man- 
sion, and the grounds greatly improved by the late owner, 
who was the gi-eatest planter in the countv,' having planted 60 
acres with 9O4,0U'J trees. 

Poivys Casile, — near \\'elch Pool ; Karl Powis. A castel- 
lated mansion of red sandstone, situated on the ridge of a 
rock, the entrance by an ancient gateway, between two massy 
circular towers. The ascent by two immense terraces rising 
one above another, connected by steps, and ornamented by 



vases, statues, and other antique remains. There were hang- 
ing gardens, in imitation of those of St. Gennains, composed 
of a series of terraces, connected by flights of steps cut out of 
the solid rock, with water-works, &c. ; but these are now 
altered, or, like every thing else here, going rapidly to decay. 
The park is much varied by natxire, and combines turf as 
smooth, close, and gieen, as the finest lawn, blended with 
broken ground, rocks, and rough thickets of thorns and oaks. 
It contained much old timber, but gieat part of this has been 
lately felled. 



7612. MERIONETHSHIRE. A much admired and romantic surface of 500,000 acres ; abounding in 
streams, rocks, and ruined castles ; but with few residences of wealthy proprietors, and consequently 
little display of gardening. 



Nannarv near Dolgelly ; Sir R. W. Vaughan. A sub- 
stantial and elegant structure in a well wooded park, with fine 
prospects, and remarkable for a small herd of deer, which 
make venison of a superior flavor. There is a good kitchen- 
garden, but the present proprietor is chiefly att.iched to agri- 
culture, and is considered a good corn-former, and tolerable 
breeder. 

Tan-xj-Bivhh Hall, — near Dolgelly; Oakley, Esq. 

An elegant villa in a lawn, at the bottom of a hill, surrounded 
by pleasure grounds tastefully disposed, and containiiifia good 
kitchen-garden. 



Dol-y-Myllynllun, — near Eolgelly ; , late 

the property of W. A. Maddocks, Esq. A cottage as roman- 
tically situated on the side of a wooded hill as can well be 
imagined, with a fine mountain stream at the door, and hard 
bye, one of the most remarkable waterfells in Wales. 

Tremudoc House, — near Tremadoc ; late the property of 
W. A. jMaddocks, Esq. A cottage villa on a protuberant 
lawn, near the base of a hill side, surrounded oy thriving 
plantations, commanding fine views of Trath-mawer, the scene 
of extensive embanking operations, unfortimately abortive for 
want of means. 



7613. BRECONSHIRR A surface of 512,000 acres, entirely mountainous, with the exception of 
some of the narrow valleys ; in general it is terra da?nnata as to every branch of gardening, excepting 
planting. 

Cyfai-tha, — near IMerthvT Tydvill; William Crawshaw, Esq. 
The hot-house department of the kitchen-garden extensive, 
and the pine-apple extensively and successfully cultivated. 

Dan-ij-Park, — near Crickhowel ; E. Kenclel, Esq. A good 
house, 'with a meadow and some rising grounds formed into an 
agreeable park, bordered by the Usk. The kitchen-garden 
contains some substantial cast-iron hot-houses. 

Llangard Castle, — neax Builth; J. JIacnamara, Esq. A 



7614. CAERMARTHENSHIRK A surface of S 
hilly of any county in South Wales. 

Henlli/s, - near Llandovery ; Col. 'Williams. The grounds 
occupy both sides of the river Tywi, and are connected by a 
foot-bridge, raised upon two projecting rocks, and of a con- 
struction that harmonises with the wild and romantic charac- 
ter of the scene. 

Abemiarlah, — near Llandovery ; Admiral Foley. A mo- 
dem house in a small park, but which contains some good trees 



and picturesque views 

Ednnnsford, — near Llandeilo ; Sir J. H. Williams. The 
mansion and grounds exhibit an appearance of magnificence, 
and contain a lofty avenue, which serves as an approach. 

TaliarU, — near Llandeilo ; Lord R. Seymour. Low, flat 
ground, but well wooded. 

Newton House, — near Llandeilo ; Lord Dynevor. A plain 
square building, with a small turret surmounting each 



new mansion commenced, and other improvements in pro. 
gress. According to Malkin {Scenery of South IValea, &c. 
251.), this place mav, and probablv will, be one of the first in 
^Vales. - 1 . . 

Penponi House, — near Brecknock ; P. Williams, Esq. A 
respectable mansion, with a finely wooded park, watered by 
the Usk. 

B,000 acres ; fruitful in corn and grass, and the least 

angle, in a park comprising a considerable extent of ground, 
and exhibiting, perhaps, a richer display of picturesque 
beauty than any spot of equal size in the kingdom. The 
scene is finely described by Dyer in his poem of Grongar 

" Gaudy as the opening dawn 
Lies a long and level lawn," &c. 

Golden Grove, — near Llaiidilo ; Lord Cawdor. An indif. 
ferent house on low grounds, lately begun to be planted and 
improved. The kitchen-garden and hot-houses are extensive, 
and well attended to. 

Middleton Hall, _ near Llandilo ; Sir W- Paxton. One of 
the most splendid mansioris in South V.'ales, by Coekrell ; the 
grounds finely planted, and containing an elegant prospect- 
tower, and a good kitchen-garden. 



Sect. III. Scotland. 

7615. The surface of Scotland is estimated at 18,944,000 acres, in three natural 
divisions. The first lies north of the cliain of Highland lakes, which stretch from 
Murray to Mull, and consists of little else than dreary mountains and some moors ; the 
second, or middle division, extends from this chain of lakes to the rivers Forth and 
Clyde ; it is mountainous, but cultivated in the valleys and on the eastern shore to a con- 
siderable extent ; the remaining division is covered by hills \^ itii some mountains, but 
everywhere cultivated or improvable, and highly favorable for most branches of gar- 
dening. The country-residences of Scotland are almost entirely confined to the two last 
divisions ; in general they excel those of England in the prominence of their natural 
features, being generally backed by hills or moimtains ; encompassed by a river or 
stream ; or situated on a lake, or the sea-shore. But tliey are inferior to those of the 
south in magnificence, and even in taste, both as to architecture and landscape-garden- 
ing. Tlie gardeners of Scotland have long been in esteem for skill and assiduity in their 
profession ; they excel in the culture and general management of the kitchen-garden, 
those of a certain rank, as Neill has observed, being generally kept in much better order ; 
and at less expense than gardens of the same kind and rank in England. 

7616. The garden-jyroductions in which Scotland excels are, turnips, potatoes, straw- 
berries, raspberries, and gooseberries. In fruits, Scotland does not excel, nor can this 
be the case till the practice of producing a dessert be more common among the ordinary 
gentry of the country than it is, or was ten years ago. A dessert is rare among the 
middling classes ; and fruit pies or cider are quite unknown to the operative inhabit- 
ants. The most extraordinary gardening exertions wliich have been made in Scotland 
are in the planting department, and chiefly in the middle division of the country, which 
already begins to assume a new and sylvan character. The cottage-gardens are generally 
carefully cropped with the more corrnnon vegetables, and form a useful appendage to th« 
laborer's dwelling. The fanners' gardens are rather neglected. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF SCOTLAND. 



1087 



7617. I'he principal commercial gardens lie around tlie capital; taken altogether they 
occupy about 530 acres, of which 130 are employed as nursery grounds by seven or 
eight individuals, who hold from fifty to four acres each. The four hundred acres of 
market garden-ground are cultivated by nearly eighty gardeners, in holdings of from 
half an acre to about twenty acres each. There are market-gardens in almost every 
county, and the total extent of ground occupied as nurseries in the kingdom is esti- 
mated at 700 acres. Some of these nurseries raise and dispose annually of ten or twelve 
millions of seedling and transplanted forest trees. Previous to 1 760, when the taste 
for planting and rural embellishment in Scotland began to increase, there were not 
above six nurseries in Scotland ; and these, taken together, did not occupy above sixty 
or seventy acres. In 1812, one house in Edinbuigh shipped upwards of two million 
of seedlings, chiefly larch and spruce fir, Scotch pine, birch, elm, ash, alder, and 
hawthorns. 

7618. MIDLOTHIAN. A suriace of 230,400 acres, varied by inequalities, and in some places by 
hills. Round Edinburgh are some neat suburban cottage and villa gardens, some good market- 
gardens, three extensive nurseries, and a botanic garden. The Caledonian Horticultural Society, and 
also the Caledonian Gardener's Lodge, is held in the capital. There is a market for culinary produc- 
tions and the common fruits ; and it is in contemplation to establish one for ornamental plants in pots 
and flowers. 



Public Promenade — Holyrood Park is a piece of ^ound of 
moderate extent, adjoining the palace of Holyrood. Tlie hill 
of Arthur's Seat, and adjoining inequalities and valleys, contain 
upwards of 400 species of plants, and a great variety of mineral 
productions, with varied and extensive views and prospects. 
(See 7317.) 

The Edinburgh Botanic Garden, — as it existed till lately, 
contained five statute acres, of a varied surface, and properly 
situated to the north of the road which leads past it. It 
was founded by Sir A. Balfour about 1680 ; removed from 
Its original to its late site under the auspices of Dr Hope in 
17G7, and is now (1821) removing to a more extensive area, 
tmder the superintendence of the present professor, Graham, 
and his able garden-curator, M'Nab- This site contains 16 
acres; and will display extensive hot-houses, and both a Lin- 
naean and Jussieuean arrangement. 

Market Gardens. — Few ot these, of any extent, are known 
to have existed previously to 1746. At that time Henry 
Prentice cultivated peas, potatoes, turnips, and other culinary 
articles, on an extensive scale: before his time, the supply 
was limited to what could be carried in baskets. Next to 
Prentice, Thomas Peacock may be mentioned as an extensive 
grower about 1750; and his successor, who now occupies 
about twenty acres, produces at this time the best asparagus, 
cauliflOjWer, and celery, sent to market. Ross's garden is 
about the same extent ; the rest are considerably smaller. 
Besides culinary herbs, most of these grounds are stocked with 
standard fruit-trees ; and since the custom of making British 
wines became so fashionable as it now is in Scotlcuid, great 
part is occupied with currants, gooseberries, and rasp- 
berries. Strawberries are grown to greater perfection than 
probably anywhere else iia Britain, at Roslin, on the banks 
of the E.sk. 

Orchards. — There are but few of these in this county, and 
those are chiefly near Laswade and Dalkeith. Edinburgh 
market is supplied with fruit from the standard trees in the 
market-gardens, and from such private gardens as are let to 
commercial gardeners by their occupiers, on account of ab- 
sence or otherwise. Tiiis is also the chief source of forced 
and exotic fruits, as very few of the market-gardeners ven- 
ture to build hot-houses. Fletcher, however, built a vinery, 
and produces the best early grapes. 

Seed- Gardens — are unknown in Scotland. Some cabbage, 
borecole, and leek seeds, are raised in the country ; hut 
most garden-seeds are procured from London, and some from 
Holland. 

Herb-Gardens There are one or two on a very small scale, 

in which peppermint is chiefly cultivated. 

The Lcilh Walk Nursery. — Mes.srs. Dickson and Shankley ; 
a respectable establishment of nearly fifty years' standing, in 
■which every description of nursery article is propagated ac- 
cording to the demand, and the whole kept in excellent order 
and neatness. 

The Droughton or Adelphi Nursery (from AoeAiSof, a 
brother), — Messrs. Dickson, brothers ; an extensive establish- 
ment of nearly twenty years' standing, kept in good order. 

The Jock's Lodne Nursery, — Henderson and Co- ; an ex- 
tensive establishment, judiciously managed. 

The Comely Bank Nursery, — Cunningham. This establish- 
ment is conducted more on the plan ot the London nurseries 
than any of the others. Flowers and tender exotics are cul- 
tivated with success ; and mushrooms also in flat beds, in the 
open garden, not covered either with mats or litter. They are 
originated without planting spawn, on beds like what are 
called lazy beds of potatoes ; but the details of the method the 
mventor is said to decline making public. 

There are S07ne other nurseries, — but not of sufficient note to 
require being particularised in our very limited space. 

Colder House, — near Mid-Calder ; Lord Torphichen. A 
stately fabric, surrounded with very extensive plantations. 

Hattoti House, — near Calder ; — — Davidson, Esq. A ve- 
nerable, ancient house, the grounds, containing 800 acres, 
I ill lately exhibited one of the most jierfect specimens of the 
old style in the county, or perhaps in Scotland; with artificial 



cascades, fountains, alcoves, terraces, and an excellent kitchen- 
garden. They are supposed to have been laid out by London 
and Wise, or some of their pupils, about the beginning of the 
last century. 

Dalmahoy, — near Edinburgh ; Lord Morton. A good 
house, in a park of between 400 and 500 acres, enclosed by a 
well-built wall, and subdivided into lesser commodious en- 
closures by strips of plantation. 

CoWn^io/) /foHie, — neai Edinburgh; Sir J. Foulis. A sub- 
stantial house, in a commanding situation, embosomed in 
wood. 

Dreghorn Castle, — near Edinburgh ; Trotter, Esq. A 

magnificent castle, in the Gothic style, commenced, and 
the grounds much improved and planted; the mountainous 
parts from designs by the celebrated landscape-painter, Ka- 
smyth. 

Braid House, — near Edinburgh ; Gordon, Esq. A 

neat square house, placed in the bottom of a ravine, or nar 
row glen, well wooded, and watered by a stream. 

Pcnnycuick House, — near Pennycuick ; Sir G. Clerk. A 
handsome Grecian house, finely situated on a level lawn, on 
the Esk ; the situation rendered interesting by a turn of the 
river ; the ruins of a castle on its banks ; and the Pentland 
hills in the distance. The kitchen-garden contains an exten- 
sive range of hot-houses. 

Melville Castle, — near Laswade ; Lord Blelville. An ex- 
tensive mansion, in the pseudo-iioihic style, in a romantic 
situation on the Esk, and surrounded by high banks covered 
with wood. 

Dalhousie Castle, — near Laswade ; Earl of Dalhousie. An 
old castellated mansion, lately mcdei-nised ; surrounded by 
extensive and romai^tic pleasure-grounds. The river Es^ 
waslies the base of the castle ; and its lofty wooded banks 
afford delightful summer walks. 

Ncwbuttle Abbey, — near Laswade ; Marquis of Lothian. A, 
large modem building, with a lawn of thirty acres, and a 
park beautifully varied, and well clothed with trees ; tha 
kitchen-garden good, and well managed. 

X Dalkeith House, — near Dalkefth ; Duke of Euccleugh. 
A building without pretensions to style, nobly founded on a 
naked rock ; which, however, was earthed up about the be- 
ginning of the last century. The park contains upwaids of 
800 acres, surrounded by a stone wall nine feet high ; it is 
magnificently wooded, and watered by two streams, the 
North and South Esk, wliich pass near the house. The 
kitchen-garden contains twelve acres, and is reckoned one of 
the first in Scotlan'd : the hot-houses and flower-garden are 
proportionately extensive. 

Morton Hall, — near Liberton ; Trotter, Esq. A massy 

stone fabric, on the south bank of a hill, surrounded by a 
beautiful park. 

Buddingston House, — near Edinburgh ; Marquis of Aber- 
corn. A handbome Grecian house, by Sir AV. Chalmers, an^ 
the grounds by Kobinson, nephew to the royal gardener of 
that name at Kensington. 1'hey are thus described in the 
Beauties of Scotland. " This villa, with the pleasure-grounds 
or park which have been annexed to it, exhibits an example of 
all that money or art can do to adorn a nearly flat surface, 
through which a small stream of water naturally runs ; clumps, 
groves, canals, lakes, isles, cascades, temi>les, shrubbery, ser- 
pentine walks, and spreading lawns. In every corner, art and 
expense have been ostentatiously displayed, and nature is 
evidently employed merely as her handmaid. Such a place 
as this, however, has considerable beauty, and excites much 
interest in a country like ficoiland, where bold natural scenery 
so much abounds, by the striking contrast which it exhibits to 
the general aspect of the surroimding territory." (Vol. i. 354.) 

Woodhouselee — near Roslin ; Tytler, Esq. A vener- 
able and romantic house and grounds ; the latter remarkable 
for containing the largest silver fir-tree in the county ; for a 
fine terrace-walk, and superb holly-hedge. Some curious or- 
naments, in the geometric style of gardening, which existed 
here, were obliterated when the grounds were remodelled in 



7619. EAST LOTHIAN. A surface of 190,368 acres, little varied on the east side, but hilly and 
mountainous towards the southern extremity. It is remarkable for the excellence of its agriculture ; 
and it contains some good kitchen-gardens. There is a small nursery at Haddington ; and a number of 
market-gardens in the county, of from half an acre to two and a half acres in extent, for local supply, and 
for the supply of Edinburgh, and the shipping of Leith, and other sea-ports along the coast. There are 
small orchards at Ormiston and Prestonkirk. 

North Berrvick House, — near North Berwick ; Six H. D. Ha- | of trees in the ancient style ; the object being to combine the 
rnilton. A good house, surrounded by an extensive suite of en- general effect of a jpark as to wood and pasture, vith the utility 
closures, subdivided by straight lines and strips, or double rows | and convenience of enclosures. 



1088 STATISTICS OF GARDE^QING. Vauv IV. 



Wemyss House, — near Aberlady ; Earl of Wemyss. A mag- 
nificent mansion, by Adams, in which the smolce of all tl'ie 
chimneys is conducted to three stone domes, and issues by their 
summits. The three principal rooms are of gigantic propor- 
tions, with only one window to each. It is situated close to 
the sea-shore, on level ground, laid out and planted by Ramsay ; 
but the house is not yet finished. 

Aimsfield, — near Haddington; Earl of M'^emyss. A noble 
building with wings, the central front 109 feet long. The park 
is flat, and not ext.nsive ; but thtre is a large Eind excellent 
kitchen-garden. 

Yester House, — near Vester ; Marquis of Tweedale. An ele- 
gant and magnificent structure of stone, with a park containing 
some fine old trees, and a good kitchen-garden. 

Saltan Hall,— neax Salton; Fletcher, Esq. An ancient 

house, lately much improved, as well as the grounds, which 
were among the first in which exotic trees were introduced 



about a century ago. Some fine siwcimens of these still exist, 
particularly of the cork-tree, and other species of quercus. 
The park is extensive, divided by inconspicuous enclosures, and 
managed as a grazing farm. 

DH;i^'/(m HoHie, — near Dunglass ; Sir .7. Hall. Romantic- 
ally situated on the banks of a stream, and surrounded by an- 
cient woods and new plantations. 

Tytmitt^liinn, — near Dunbar ; Earl of Haddington. Re- 
markable for its fine old wood ' ■ ■ ■■ ■ • • ~ 
earl, who wrote a tieaUse on 



fine old woods, planted in the beginning of 
the last century, by a former earl, wt>o wi 
Planting. There is also a remarkably fine holly-hedge of the 
same standing, and a good kitchen-garden. In 1 806, pine- 
apples were grown here in a pit, with a brick vault below, into 
which steam was introduced. Sonieof the plants were in pots, 
and the rest planted in the soil. 

Onniston, — near Haddington ; Cockbuni, Esq. A good 

kitchen-garden, and well planted pleasure-grounds. 



7620. BERWICKSHIRE. A surface of 326,400 acres. The northern part mountainous, with few 
country-seats: but the south and east districts gently varied in surface; rich in soil in some places; 
and everywhere under a system of farming which has been long celebrated. In this part of the county 



are a few gentlemen's seats, but none of any note. 
Berwick, and near Dunse. 

Dryburgh Orchard, — Planted by the Earl of Buchan in 1788, 
and now very productive in pears and apples. 

Retreat, — near Abbey ; Earl of Wemyss. A singular house, 
of a circular form, in a retired situation on the banks of the 
Whitadder, in the heart of the Lammennuir mountains, sur- 



There are only two or three market-gardens near 



rounded by natural 
ficial plantations. 

Dunse Castle, —neax Dunse; 
old place. 



oods, romantic dells, and extensive arti- 
Hay, Esq. A respectable 



7621. ROXBURGHSHIRE. A surface of 472,320 acres, chiefly hilly and mountainous, and in great 
4)art under pasture. There are a few acres of market-garden ground near Kelso and Jedburgh ; and 
some orchards at these places, at Melrose, and at Gatton. At Jedburgh are pear-trees supposed to be 
from five to six centuries old. Some account of these orchards will be found in the Caledonian Horti- 
cultural Society's Memoirs. (Vol. iii. p. 286.) 



Hawick aiul Hass ndean Nurseries jNlessrs. Dickson's exten- 
sive establishments, at the villages bearing these names, begun 
1729 ; they sui>ply the north of England and south of Scotland ; 
and from them originated the Leith Walk nursery, in Midlo- 
thian, and the Perth nursery, in Perthshire. 

Orchards of Melrose and Jedburgh. — Ap\)\e and pear trees, 
planted by the priests of the abbeys of these towns, in the 16th 
century, which are still very prolific, especially the pears : the 
two principal kinds are called the duke's and monk pears. 

Craiitng House, — near Crailing: Paton, Jlsq. A neat 

villa, most romantically situated on the high banks of the 
Jed. 



Minio House, — near iMinto ; Earl Minto. Finely situated on 
the south side of a well wooded hill, with judiciously arranged 
pleasure-grounds, and a good kitchen-garden. 

Egerlon, — near Jedburgh ; (^ol. Rutherford. A romantic 
situation at the van of the Cheviot hills; the gardens with ex- 
tensive hot -houses, but rather neglected. 

Fleurs,— at KeUo ; Duke of Roxburgh. A miserable house, 
in one of the finest situations in Scotland. It stands on a ter- 
race, at the bottom of which a fine lawn stretches to the Tweed ; 
behind rise wooded hills ; and in front and on each side is ex- 
tensive park-scenery, with the bridge and ruined abbey of 
Kelso. 



7622. SELKIRKSHIRE. A surface of 160,600 acres, of hills and mountains, almost entirely under 
pasturage. 

7623. TWEEDALE. A surface of 229,778 acres, hilly and mountainous, generally in pasture; bul with 
some barren moors and fertile vales. 

7624. DUMFRIESHIRE. A surface of 644,385 acres, consisting, in great part, of hills and moun- 
tains ; but with some low fertile lands towards the south. There is a nursery at Dumfries, and about 
twelve market-gardens, averaging three acres each. 



Orc/uirrfs. — There are a number of private orchards in this 
county, some of them a century old, and very productive. The 
greater part •fthe produce is sent to market. 



Langham Cottage, — near Langham ; Duke of "Buccleugh A 
picturesque heath-covered cottage, built as a temporary resi- 
dence by the late duke, in a romantic situation, with beautiful 
pleasure-grounds. 



7625. KIRCUDBRIGHTSHIRE. A surface of 561,641 acres, hilly, rocky, and with some mountains, 
the greater part in pasture. There are some market and fruit gardens along the coast, which send their 
produce to Dumfries and Ireland. An extensive orchard was formed by Lord Selkirk about 1790 ; and 
small collections of fruit-trees have been planted at most of the farmhouses on his lordship's estates. 

Droughton House, — near (iatehouse;- Murray, Esq. 

nds. 



St. Mary's Isle, — near ICircudbright ; Earl of Selkirk. A 
substantial house, lately much improved, in an island, lately 
rendered a peninsula by an embankment. The grounds much 
diversified by woods, intersiieised with thorns, briars, and 
brambles, in imitation of a natural forest, by a former possessor. 
There is a handsome gravel-walk, by which a stranger makes a 
tour of the whole. 



house of granite, with extensive pleasure-grounds, laid 
out by Ramsay. 

Cree House, — near Gatehouse ; Sir S. Hannay. A substan- 
tial granite house, in an elevated situation, surrounded by 
plantations. 



A surface three miles broad, varied and fertile, with few hills and no 



fine old place, greatly improved by the late and present pro- 
prietor. 

Castletvig, — near Wiithom;. Hawthorn, Esq. A good 

house, situated on an elevated surfece, and backed by old woods 
and young plantations. ^ 



7626. WIGTONSHIRE. 
mountains. 

Gallorvay House, — near Garliestown ; Earl of Galloway. A 
large house surrounded by extensive plantations, enclosed by 
substantial stone walls. Here figs ripen against a common 
garden-wall. 

Barnharrow, — near Wigton ; John Vans Agnew, Esq. A 

7627. AYRSHIRE. A surface of 1600 square miles; partly hilly, and very generally under pasture 
There some good gardens of almost every cla'ss : that of Ballochmoyle was formerly reckoned one of the 
first private gardens in Scotland. There are ir plantation 25,000 acres. 

Monkwood Botanic Garden and Nursery — is situated near Ayr, 
and was founded by the present proprietor, Mr. J ames Smith. 
It contains about two acres ; and the collection includes above 
2000 hardy exotics, besides a very full collection of British, and 
above 500 sorts ol green-house plants. 

KUmar)Wck Nurseries. — Mesirs. Sampson have an extensive 
and highly respectable establishment; and there is another 



-Gardens, — there are several, from one to six acres in 
extent, in the neighborhood of Ivilmamock and Ayr. Their 
main crops are onions and carrots, of which they export large 
quantities to Ireland. There are also market-gardens at Irvine, 
Stewartown, and Saltcoats. There are few or no orchards. 

X Culzean Castle, — neai Culzean ; Earl Cassilis. A noble 
mansion, in the hybrid Gotliic style of Adams, placed on a bold 
precipice on the Carrick shore; the offices adjoining forming a 
fine subordinate group. The park contains 700 acres, richly 
wooded, and abounding in marine views; in the pleasure- 
grounds is an extensive collection, both of hardy and tender 



exotics ; and there is a productive kitchen-garden : the whole 
in high keeping. 

Eglinion Castle, — near Kilwinning; Earl of Eglinton. A 
noble castellated mansion, which, with the grounds, were gieatly 
iniiiroved by the late earl. The trees of the park are large, of 
picturesque forms, and much admired. The kitchen-garden 
one of the best in the county. 

London Castle, - near Kilmarnock ; Marquis of Hastings. 
An extensive Gothic building by Elliot, enclosing part of 
the old castle; the grounds lately planted from suggestions by 
Nasmyth. 

Ballochmoyle , — near Mauchlin ; A lesander, Esci . Re- 
markable for its excellent kitchen-garden, about 1790 reck- 
oned one of the first in Scotland. The gardener's name, John 
Livingston, formerly gardener to General Scott, of Bellvue,near 
Edinburgh. 

Barganny Park, — near Avr; Sir H. D. Hamilton. A resi- 
dence greatly improved, ani most extensively planted by the 
present proprietor. 



7628. RENFREWSHIRE. A surface of 153,307 acres ; abounding in hills, and moors, and with a cold 
moist climate in the elevated district. The most remarkable gardening feature in this county is the flo- 
rists' gardens of Paisley. 

Market. Gardens and Orchards. — There are several market- | orchard at Paisley, which, owing to the extension of the town, 
cardens round the sea-ports of Greenock and Port Glasgow ; is now situated near its centre : it contains two Scotch acres 
and some orchards at the latter place. There is also a very old | and some pear-trees of a large size and venerajile jispect. 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF SCOTLAND. 



10B9 



Gardma of the Operative Mawifitdurers of Paisley. -The 
oiieratives ot Paisley, taking tiiem at large, exhibit a condition 
of improvement very rarely indeed, if at all to be paralleled 
among persons in the same rank of life ; and they are particu- 
tai ly- remarkable in their taste for objects which plezise the eye 
by their beauty, for such occupations for amusement as require 
nice attention, and for various intellectual gratifications. In 
their dress, in the furnishing of their houses, and in matters of 
a similar kind, they study a great degree of neatness. Even 
their pigeons, which they keep in considerable numbers, are 
known in the vicinity to be distinguished for their beauty and 
variety. Several operatives greatly excel in the management of 
Ijees ; and communicate to each other their experiments and 
success. It will perhaps be difficult to Hnd elsewhere, in the 
same classes of the community, an equal proijortion of persons 
who occasionally entertain themselves with making verses. And 
it is probable, that for miscellaneous information, they are not 
to be equalled by the operatives in any place. The only oper- 
atives in this nation, or perhaps in any other, who can be com- 
pared with them for information, are the miners at' Lead-hills, 
wiio work but six hours a-day, and have with success devoted 
much of their leisure to the improvement of the mind. But 
the intellectual attainments of the Paisley ojieratives must be 
more various than theirs, and are probably in no department 
inferior. 

By a statement of the private reading societies in Great 
Britain, which was some years ago exhibited in the newspajiers, 
it appeared that a very considerable ))roportion of the whole (it 
is believed not less at that time than one third) existed in 
Paisley. How far any of these attachments and habits may 
have been promoted by the inspirations of Flora, it may not be 
easy to determine, but all of them in some measure ))receded 
the epoch of her homage and influence at Paisley. 

It has been remarked by a gentleman of learning and philo- 
sophical observation in Paisley, the Piev. 'William Ferrier, that 
the attention to flowers which is so consiii.cuous there, is in a 
considerable degree an effect of the peculiar manufacturing 
habits of the people. It is well known, that not only for tlie 
execution of the most delicate ornamental muslins, but for the 
invention of patterns, the operative manufacturers of Paisley 
stand unrivalled. Their ingenuity is continually in exertion for 
new and pleasing elegancies, to diversify their fabrics. Now, 
where such habits obtain, the. rearing of beautiful flowers, 
■which is an object very congenial to them, will easily be adopted, 
and pursued as a favorite amu.sement. On the other hand, it 
seems highly probable, that the rearing of flowers, by a re- 
action, must tend to Improve the genius for invention in elegant 
fancy muslins. 

The florists of Paisley (it is observed by the same gentle- 
man) have long been remarked for the peacefidness of their 
dispositions, and the sobriety- of their manners. The Florist 
Club not only represses all irregularities at its weekly jneet- 
ings, which dismiss at ten in the evening ; but woidd erase 
from its lists any disreputable name. It is jileasing to think, 
that not only the attachment of individuals to the culture of 
beautiful flowers, but the association of persons possessing this 
taste, seems to be favorable to social order. 

Orifrin of the Florists' Society. — The culture of pinks became 
an object of attention in Paisley and its vicinity, between the 
years 1785 and 1790. Till then, none but those of the most or- 
dinary kinds were known there. But at that period, some 
seeds, reputed of good quality, were procured from London : the 
great bulk of these produced plain pinks. In a few instances, 
hpwever, teced sorts appeared ; which, being new, were greatly 
admired. The seeds of these were carefully preserved and 
cultivated; and many pood sorts were procured from them. 
The florists persevered m cultivating these ; and, at the same 
time, did not neglect other kinds brought year after year fi-om 
Ix)ndon, where they were greatly excelletl in varieties. And, 
hy proceeding continually on the simjile principle of saving and 
using the seeds of the finest pirjks, the original qualities were 
not only preserved but improved. For some years past, all im- 
portation has ceased. On the contrary, plants reared in Paisley 
iiave been sent by order to London, and have been pronounced 
equal or superior to any in England. 

The spirit for improving pinks, and many other kinds of 
flowers, is cherished in Paisley by an appropriate institution. 



established in the last year of the past century, and which en- 
courages and metho<lises a constant amicable competition. 
Those which are called Competition Flowers, are eight in 
number: viz. Auricula, Polyanthus, Hyacinth, Tulijij Ane- 
mone, Ranunculus, Pink, and Carnation. There is usually 
an annual competition of the best specimens of one or other of 
those eight kinds. 

Some' idea of the zeal of the Paisley cultivators may he 
formed, when it is stated that several of them can show 70 
or 80 of the most choice varieties of pinks ; others 200 varieties 
of the choicest tulips ; others GO or 70 varieties of the best car- 
nations all named ; besides many excellent inferior varieties of 
each kind. 

llitfes of the Florists' Society — The society have weekly 
meetings every Thursday evening, from the flowering of the 
Polyanthus, till the disajjpearance of the Carnation, and they 
have also annual meetings for determining remunerations. A t 
the weekly meetings, every member may produce specimens 
of as many kinds of the eight competition flowe/s as are in 
season; and the best siiecimen of each kind entitles the pct- 
sessor to one enrolment of his name in the society's minute-book 
for prizes. The successful competitor in the kind which the 
judges declare to be the most frequent among them presented 
for the night is enrolled in a department of the minutes api)ro- 
priate to the competition for the predominant flower. The 
^ secondary flowers of the night, 
, called the Competition of All 
Flowers. Should only one specimen of a kind be presented, 
the enrolment still takes place; because none would cut down 
their finest plants, were the accidental want of a rival sjie- 
cimen to render this sacrifice vain. But when each of th? 
comiietition flowers is in the prime of its season, a comiie'- 
tltion for the best collection ofsjiecimens of six varieties of it 
is announced at one meeting, and decided at the next ; and 
the name of the gainer is twice inserted. The weekly com- 
petition is determined, in ordinary cases, by two judges. If 
these do not agree, a thirdbinan is chosen by the club to 
decide ; and should he demur, another judge is added. AVhen 
the six best flowers of a kind are required, three judges are 
appointed. At the end of the year, those records are inves- 
3. Statement of 
appearances of 

each in the hooks, of the particular flo-.vers in which he 
excels, and even of the merits of those flowers. Honorary- 
rewards are then distributed. The most successful florist 
receives jierhaps a spade ; the next a rake ; and the third a 
trowel or knife. 

In the books there is likewise a dejiartir.ent for Border- 
Flowers : and here the names of such members as from time 
to time produce the best of each sort are entered. And there 
is another department fur the name of every member who 
jjresents the earliest blown flower of its kind. "WTien the 
books are annually reviewed, the comparative merits of the 
competitors in each of these last departments are estimated ; 
but no prizes are assigned. AV'hen the earliest specimen, 
however, is a competition flower, the name of the florist 
stands not only in tlie department for the earliest flowers, 
but also in the prize minute-book. 

At the annual, meetings five judges are appointed; of 
whom, for the most part, two are strangers, v:ho are known 
to be skilful florists. Two guardians receive the articles for 
competition, and affix to each a private number, so that the 
judges cannot know to whom any of them belong till after 
the decision. The first jirize, which is a silver medal, of about 
the value of a guinea, with a suitable inscription, is awarded 
to the person who presents, of his own rearing, the twelve 
specimens of the competing flower, which, taken collectively, 
are the best. The twelve next in general entitle the cultivator 
to an inscribed silver medal, worth about l^s. After the 
decision, the flower for next annual competition is announced. 
Pinks are brought into competition twice as often as any 
other species of flowers. 

On these occasions from forty to a hundred manufacturers and 
tradesmen of the place dine together ; and every one who has 
formerly gained a medal is then expected to wear it. (Gch. Rev. 
ofScotl. App. vol. i. ch. ix. ) 



7(529. LANARKSHIRE. A surface of 556,800 acres, hilly and bleak, but with some fertile valleyx 
There is a botanic garden^ and some good nurseries and market-gardens round the capital ; Clydesdalo 
is noted for its orchards, and the total number of acres in the county occupied in this way is estimated 
at 340. There are some gardeners' lodges, florists' meetings, and a horticultural society, held at 
Glasgow. 



GlaSjrorv Botanic Garden. — ThU garden owes its origin in 
a great measure to the exertions of T. Hopkirk, Esq. jun. of 
Dzlbeth, a gentleman attached to botany, advantageously 
known as the author of Anomalies of Plants, and who has 
long cultivated a collection amounting to 3000 species. It 
contains eight acres, and is the joint property of the Col- 
lege, and a number of subscribers, who are incoi-i)orated 
under the title of the Royal Botanic Institution of Glasgow. 

The i)lan of the garden (,fi/^. 753.) combines variation of 
landscape and scientific arrangement in a very eminent 
degi-ee. It -was devised by a committee of subscribers, and 
chiefly T. Hopkirk and R. Austin, the latter a well known 
nurseryman. It consists of the following details : — 

1. A general collection of herbaceous plants. 

'■i. A collection of grasses. 

.1. A Linna;an arrangement. 

4. Arrangement according to the natural method of Jus- 
sieu, Ikc. 

.5. British plants, with edgings of common heath {Calluna 
vnlfians), which bears clipping like common box. 
fi. Medical plants. 

7. Plants usetl in agriculture or commerce. 

8. Forest trees. 
0. 'Willows. 

10. Borders for annuals. 

1). Collection of biennials. 

VI. Esculent vegetables, fruits, &c. 

13. Grass lawn- 

14. American borders. 

15. Aquarium. 
IG. Rock- work. 

17. Collection of roses. 

18. Borders for floriits' flo'vevs, as iiinlts, carnations, &c. 



19. Border for bulbs. 

20. Collection of variegated plants. 

21. A lpine plants. 

22. Green -house ground. 

23. Shrubs. ' ' 

24. Forcing-beds, frames, &c. 

25. Green house. 

26. Stoves. 

27. Stove; a conservator^', on the west end. 

28. Medical plants in tpiantit}-, for sale. 
20. Enclosure for cultivating rare plants. 
.30. ar.d 31. Duplicate borders.' 

32. North entrance from the Sandvford road, with the 
lodge and lecture-room. 

33. Queen IVIary's yeiv, propagated from the famous tree at 
Cruikbton Castle twenty years ago. 

34. South entrance from Dunbarton ro,-.d. 

35. Under-gardener's rooms and pcUing-sheds. 

On the enclosing wall, which is ten tltt high, and also in 
the esculent dejiartn-ient (12), the most approved sorts ofhardv 
iruit-ti-ees are cultivated; so that this garden, like that of 
Pans, will combine horticultural as well as botanical in- 
formation. 

The plan was executed tmder the direction of Stewart 
Murray, the present verv intelligent ar.d sati.-factorv curator 
ot the garden. It was begun in May 1S17, and coinj.lelcd in 
two years. The total sun-i subscribed by the memb-.-rs uf this 
institution, amounts to nearly 11,000/. T. Hoiikirk has pre- 
sented to it the whole of his collection ; and tlireugh his 
exertions, and those of the ether proprietors, and e.-^peciVdly of 
that distinguished l,oiani;-,t. Dr. A'l'. f. Hooker, the colkge 
profes.sor of botany, the ^-ardcn, in 1821, contained upwards 
of 9000 species. ' 

A 



1090 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 




754 




The Miirket-Garderu of Glasgorv — are estimated to occupy 
260 or 270 acres, which are cro-pped chiefly with the com- 
moner articles ; sea-kale, artichokes, beet, endive, Krer.oh 
beans, and shallots, are not in demand ; and other rarer sorts 
are unknown. Thirty acres, however, are occupied in rai^i!:^ 
strav. berries for the Glasgow -market, and an acre in a ijood 
season is estimated to produce from 800 to 900 Scotch pints, 
€ff .about four times that number of pottles. 

Clydesdale Orchards. — These are CO in number, and occupy 
ft-om 210 to 220 acres between Cil.isgow and I.r.nr.rk. Tlie 



largest contains about 30 acres. The fmits produced are 
apples, pears, plums, gooseberries, and cunants. IMany of 
tiiem occupy steep banks, and are never cultivated. The 
others are chisfly~ploughed, unless where the small fruits are 
grown in the intervals of the trees. The produce finds a ready 
sale in Glasgow and the sea-ports; ana the demand seems 
incveasirg. 

X tluvnillon Palace, — aX Hamilton ; Duke of Hamilton. A 
gloomy old fabric, situated on one side of an extensive park 
ti atered by the Clyde ; m ell wooded with old oaks, and dis- 
tinguished by an extensive frontage, or" false palace, on an 
eminence, called Chatelherault (Herald's Castle), said to be 



Book I. 



GARDENS OF SCOTLAND. 



1091 



in imitation of the duke'i residence of that name in the cir- j mantic and truly noble residence on the banks of the Clyde, 

cle of Vienne, in France. The aconis grown in Hamilton with excellent gardens, an extensive collection of plants, ana 
Park are reckoned the best produced ui Scotland. most rom;mtic walks and nistic structures. The whole kept 

ButltwM House, — ne3x Bothwell ; Lord Douglas. A ro- | in the highest order. 

7630. DUMBARTOXSHIRE. A surface of 159,356 acres, chiefly mountainous, abounding in mossei 
and moors, with some natural woods, in which the holly and yew are more common than anywhere else 
in Scotland. • 

Orchards These are rare, though fruit-trees thrive well in Rosedoe, — near Luss ; Sir J. Cclquhoun. The house de 

the county. Excellent apples are produced in the tradesmen's lightfully situated on a peninsula projecting into Lochloniond: 
gardens of Dumbarton ; and there is an oi chard at Lochlomond, the grounds well wooded by nature, and a good kitchen -garden 
belonging to Macdonald Buchanan of Ross, w hich contains lately formed at considerable expense. 

two of the largest and most healthy golden pippin-trees in i iiosi, — on Lochlomond ; H. M. Buchanan, Esq. Remark- 
Scotland, generally very productive. | able for its beautiful beech-trees. 

7631. STIRLINGSHIRE. A surface of 450,560 acres of hills and fertUe valleys ; the latter generally 
under aration. There is a nursery at Stirling, and some market-gardens of the commonest kind between 
that town and St. Ninians, and at Falkirk. 

Orchards. — Tiiere ai-e upwards of 20 of these in this county, 
generally verv prolific in pears, apples, and plums ; cherries 
are little grown in Scotland. The green-gage plum ripens in 



Callander, — -aezi Falkirk; Forbes, Esq. The gi-ounds 

remarkable for large and venerable oak, ash, and beec3i-trees, 
which were among the earliest artificial plantations reared in 
Scotland. 

Mynadoc Castle, — yxeax Buchanan; James, Duke of Mon- 
trose. A noble place, surrounded by extensive plantations, 
the present duke having been one of the greatest jilanters in 
Scotland. 



these orchards as a standard, and there are some large and 
prolific pear-trees nearly two centuries old. The alluvial soil 
of the Carseland is from" 30 to upwards of 100 feet in depth, of 
rich mud, and in this the tap-roots of the pear-tree tind an 
ample range. 

7632. LIXLITHGOWSHIRR A surface of 71,580 acres, agreeably varied, generally under mixed 
culture, and beautifully watered on one side by the Forth. There are a few market-gardens about 
Borrowstounness and Linlithgow. 

Barnbougle Park, — near Queensferry ; Earl of 
Koseberxy. A castellated mansion on a rock 
witliin liigh-water mark, lately much improved 
by AV ilkins.; the jiark extensive and finely wooded, 
and subdivided in th£ manner peculiar to the 
country, so as to be rendered available as a grazing- 
farra. 

Eopeton House,— iiezx Oueensferry ; Earl of 
Hopeton. One of the most~stately ai'id imposing 
mansions in Scotland, in the Grecian style, by 
Sir \V. Bruce, and finished by Adams. It stands 
on a lawn of a mile in length, washed by the 
Forth, and is surrounded by extensive woods and 
plantations, a pleasure and kitchen garden in high 
cultivation. 

ycn-liston, — near Ratho ; Hogg, Esq. A 

good house with extensive grounds planted by the 
Earl of Stair, in the ancient style; tlie trees in 
platoons, arranged, as it is vulgarly said, in the 
order of two engaging armies. Tfie grounds in some 
places were formerlv cut into curious tlights of steps 
and terraces ifig. '65.) ; but much of tliis taste was 
obliterated about the beginning of the present 
century. The trees are for the greater part horn- 
beams," that species being at once of rapid growth 
and patient or pnining and clipping. 1 he timber, 
however, is of Urtle value, escepthig for fuel. 

7633. CLACKMANNANSHIRE. A surface of 30,720 acres, beautifully varied, with few hills, and 
generally well cultivated. There is a market-garden at Alloa, of about five acres, and some small 




nurseries. 

. Orchards, — There are some near Culross: one called Castle- 
hill is at least two centuries old. The apple-trees are nearly 
exhausted with age, but the pear-trees remain in full bcciring"; 
the Crawford and sugar are the principal early, and the Achans 
the late sorts. 

Shaw ParA-, — near Kincardine: Earl of Mansfield. The 



grounds contain extensive plantations of oak-trees, and arc 
capable of being rendered a beautiful and extensive park. 

TiUibcdic — neai Alloa: Sir Ralph Abercrombie. The 
house and grounds backed by the Oelnl hiUs, one of which is 
finely planted from the designs of Nasmyth, the landicape- 
painter. 

7634. KINROSS-SHIRE. A surface of 39,702 acres, considerably varied by hills, vaUeys, streams, and 
a large lake. 

' Blair Adam,— neax Kinrois : W. Adam, Esq. Remarkable I but now covered with finely sheltered grass fields, and the 
for the extent of the plantations on a barren-like peat soil, | general climate improved by the drainage and warmth. 

7635. FIFESHIRE. A peninsular surface of 322,500 acres, finely varied by hiUs, valleys, a mountain, 
some lakes, and bounded on one side by the Forth, the other by the Tay, and the third by the open sea. 
It is an old county, weU cultivated, and containing some fine country-seats of moderate extent. Though 
the climate is unfavorable for the larger fruits, yet in no county of Scotland are gardens so general from 
tlie cottage to the mansion, or so well managed : as a proof, there is scarcely such a thing as a market, 
garden in the county. 



Kircaldy Xursery, — at Kircaldy ; J~ang, editor of The 
Planter's Kahndar, and an extensive contractor for planting 
and managing plantations. There is also a nursery at Cujiar, 
and at some other towns. 

Market-Gardens — There is one of six acres, surrounded 
by a high fruit-wr.ll at Kircaldy; one of nearly equal extent 
at Pathhead, and one or two more at different parts of the 

Orchards — There are none of recent formation, excepting 
one laid out by Sang in ISll ; but the remains of fruit-trees 
are still to be seen at the ancient abbey of Lindores. 

X Wemyss CiiSiYe, _ near Kircaldy'; Gen. ^\'em.yss. Long 

7636. PERTHSHIRE. A surface of 4,063,640 acres, much varied by hills and mountains, but contain- 
ing some fertile valleys called straths and carses. It contains some excellent country-residences. The 
cream-colored cherry of Ardvorlich, and the black gean of Castle Menzies, are mentioned by Dr. 
Robertson [Agr. Siirv. of Po-thshire) as being much esteemed. There is a respectable nursery at Perth, 
one at Dundee, and some lesser ones at Dunkeld, and other places ; there is also a Horticultural Society 
held at Perth. 



famous for its kitchen-garden, laid out by Nicol, and its 
pleasure-grounds by A\'hite of Durham. The hpuse is sur- 
rounded by extensive plantations, and the whole place is kept 
in the highest degree of order and neatness. 

X Raiih, — near liii-caldy ; Ferguson, Esq. i\Iost excel,^ 

lent kitchen-gai'dens also by Nicol, and finely-planted grounds 
in high keeping. 

Balcony Castle, — near Markinch : Earl of Levin. -A. qua- 
drangular structure, on the banks of the Levin, of great anti- 
quity"; surrounded by linely wooded grounds, containing a 
good kitchen- garden. 



Perth Nurseries — contain between oO and 60 acres; the 
principal is by Dickson and Brown ; in whose extensive and 
nighly respectable establishment some fine varieties of the 
Scotch rose have been originated from seed. 

Market-Gardens. — Dundee is said to be better supplied with 
Tegelahles than any other town in Scotland. The quantity of 
Kround on which thev are grown is estimated at 100 acres ; and 
James Reid, in ITSOj was the first who excelled in this mode of 
culture. Th? siiipiiing ensures a brisk demand for common 
articles. 



Orchards — There are upwards of twenty in the Carse of 
Gowrie, situated on the flat northern shore of the Tay, 
chiefly from Kinfauns to the town of Dundee. The oldest are 
about 100 year*< the soil is a deep mud or clay. They occupy 
in all nearly 130 acres. There are also a few old orchards 
along the south base of the Ochil hills. 

Scone Pa/ace, — near Perth; Earl of Mansfield. A noble 
castellated mansion by Atkinson, in one of the finest situations 
in Scotland, with a lawn in front of great extent, washed by 
the Tav, and backed bv rising arounds covered '.vith wood. 

A 2 ■ 



1092 



STATISTICS OF. GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



The gardens and pleasure-grounds extensive, complete, and 
■well manfiged. 

Duplin Castle — near Perth; Earl of Kinnoul. A good 
house, and well planted fn'ounds. 

Duiikeld House, — at Dunkeld ; Duke of Athol. A large plain 
house in a bottom, surrounded by hills and mountains, cele- 
brated for their extensive plantations, especially of the larch, 
and for their romantic walks, waterfalls, stream--, and rocks. 
Obvious defects of this place are, that there is no proper waUc 
or wood to make a tour of the whole, and that the walks on 
the hill side, do not ascend in regular gradation, but are de- 
sultory and deficient in ^andeun 

BUiir House, — newc Blair; Duke of Athol. A genuine 
Highland residence, chiefly remarkable for the extent of the 
surrounding plaiitaiions which clothe many humhedi of acres 
of lofty mountains and craggy steeps and hills. 

X Blair Druinmotul , — near Stirling ; Dnimmond, Esq. 

Celebrated as being the residence where Lord Karnes dis- 
played his taste in planting and improving in the latter half 
of the last century. The evergreens planted ac that time are 
now singular ornaments to the grounds. 

X Tcnjmouih, — near Kenmore ; Karl of Bredalbane. The 
most magnificent residence in the county. The house a 
spacious Gothic mansion, erected at different times, placed on 
a lawn about a mile in breadth, between two mountains, 
which open to Loch Tay on one side, and the Tay river passes 
within two furiongs of the house. The mountains, lawn, and 



the banks of the waters, are richly clothed with wood, through 
which are led magnificent walks. Of the trees, the limes and 
larches have atlaine<l to a great size, and there is an ave- 
nue of the former 450 yards m length, scarcely equalled snj 
where. 

X Drummoiid Castle,— near Crief; Lord Gwydir. The 
castle enlarged, and the grounds extended and highly im- 
proved by the present owner, assisted by his uigenious steward, 
Lewis Kennedy. 

Odilciii/rey — uear Crief; Sir P. IMurray. A finely wooded 
place, greatly improved by the present owner ; the kitchen- 
garden and hot-houses laid out by Nicol. 

Liindie House, — near Dundee ; Lord Duncan. An excellent 
kitthen-garden, by Hay of Edinburgh. 

Viilleijfiehl, — near Culross; Sir K. Preston. .A romantic 
residence, laid out from designs by Rcpton, whose son visited 
this place about ISOl. The principal feature deserving a 
stranger's notice is the approach through a wooded glen. 

Gartmore, — near Crief; (irahani Esq. A fine old place, 

noted for its fine forests, old cedars" from seeds brought from 
Syria, and a good kitchen-garden by Nicol. 

Gleneaiiles, — near Stirling; Sir K. Abeicrombie. A house 
in the mixed style of Gothic and Grecian, of ^dams, standing 
in finely varied giounds, well planted, and containing a fine 
piece of water, by ^V hite. 

tustle G)e^, — near Perth; Earl Grey. A good house, by 
Atkinson, in a delightful and well wooded situation. 



7637. ANGUS, or FORFARSHIRE. A surface of 59^,920 acres, consisting of mountains with exten- 
sive and fertile valleys ; the former generally bearing good p.\sture, and the latter under aration, Mon- 
trose and Arbroath have a few small market-gardens ; Brechin and Forfar have no market-garden ; but 
many of the tradespeople cultivate spot^ of ground for their recreation; and besides supplying their 
own families, produce a sufficiency of culinary vegetables and small fruits to meet the demands of their 
townsmen. It is estimated that upwards of 33,0UU acres are covered with plantations. In aftertimes 
this comity will be celebrated as having given birth to the Dons, a family of botanists of superior order. 

The Forfar Botanic Garden — vras founded by George Don, I There Is also a small green-house, containing above 1000 

a well known botanist, who added more plants to the British different species. Don died in 1S14 ; but tlie botanic garden is 

Flora than any botanist of his time. The garden contains | still kept up. 

little more than an acre; but embraces almost all kinds of | Castle Glammis,— near Glammis ; Earl of Strathmore. A 

toil and situation, and in it were crowded together nearly all very ancient building, lenovated by Inigo Jones ; the ground* 

the hardy herbaceous plants and shrubs known in Britain. | hi the ancient style, and containing" some fine old trees. 

7638. KINCARDINESHIRE. A surface of 243,444 acres, mountainous towards the north, but more 
level and fertile on the south-east. 

Brodie House, — ai Brodie; Alexander Brodie, Esq. F. L. S. 
A line old place, much improved, and planted, by the present 

7639. ABERDEENSHIRE. A surface of 718,806 acres, generally flat, but varied by knolls, wavy 
ridges, and gentle inequalities, formerly moory and bleak, but now extensively planted. It is said, that 
there is scarcely a gentleman in tlie county who has an estate of 100/, a year who has not planted some 
hundred thousands of trees, and that there is above 50,000 acres in the county covered with artificial plant, 
ations. There are a number of nurseries round Aberdeen noted for raising seedhngs, many of which are 
Kent to the south of Scotland and to England, 



I proprietor ; and containing a good botanic garden, and some 
I noble avenues. 



supply 
of Old 



The Aberdeen Nurseri/, — IMessrs. Reid. An old and respect- 
able establishment cmefly devoted to the culture of fore.;t 
trees, and especially to seedlings of Scotch pine, larch fir, and 
thorns. The father of the present occupier, who is also pro- 
prietor of the soil (twelve acres), was gardener to Sir Arcliibald 
Grant of Monymusk, the greatest planter in Scotland. 

Ross's Nursei-y, — a newly estabhshed concern, carried on 
•with great spirit. There are various other nurseries. 

Market-Gardens These are numerous, both for the sup 

of the town and shipping. Almost the entire parish 
Machar is laid out m i;his wav, and occupied by several 
hundred industrious men. At Peterhead there are also gar- 
dens for growing vegetables for the shipping of that place. 

Orchards. ~ There is an extensive one at Pitfour, containing 
ten acres, including the ruins of (he ancient abbey of Deer 
and its gardens ; one of five acres at Auchterie, and some in a 
neglected state between Kene and IMonyrausk. 

Crathes, — neax Aberdeen. Sir R. Burnet, Bart. An ex- 
cellent kitchert-garden m the old style, with magnificent holly 

7640. BANFSHIRE. A surface of 649,000 acres 
cultivated. There are some good market-gardens at 

X T)i:jr House,— nea.Y Duff; Earl of Fife. A magnificent 
quadrangular building, by Adams, in a park 13 iniles in cir- 
cumference, chiefly laid'outby the late Mr. A\liite, On the 
ether parts of the estate more trees have been planted than on 
any property in the country. 

Gordon Castle, — near Gordon ; Duke of Gordon. A large 

7G4I. MORAYSHIRR A surface 42 miles long, by 20 miles broad ; great part hilly or mourttainous, 
with extensive pine-forests ; but with a considerable tract only gently varied and well cultivated. There 
is a market-garden at Elgin, in which onions are chiefly grown for the parishioners, and two small 
orchards : one at Logie, formed in 1786,, and the other at Pitgaveny, formed in 1798. 
' 7642. NAIRNSHIRE. A surface 17 miles long, by 10 miles broad ; the greater part level and fertile. 

7643, CROMARTYSHIRE. A peninsular surface of 68,480 acres ; chiefly an elevated tract of heath, 
but undergoing rapid improvement by the agriculturist. 

7frl4. CAITHNESS. A surface of 395,680 acres ; generally flat ; described by Pennant as an immense 
morass, with some fertile spots. From the materials which compose this morass, it appears to have been 
formerly full of wood ; but recent attempts to raise plantations have not been very successful. There is 
a market-garden at Thirrso of seven acres ; a remarkable circumstance, as there are none in the counties 
of Cromarty, Ross, or Sutherland. 

Thurso Castle, — near Thurso; Sir J, Sinclair, Chiefly I some plantations, and a kitchen-garden, and many ingenious 
remarkable for agricultural improvements, but displaying also \ but abortive attempts at amelioration, 

7645. The ORKNEY and SHETLAND ISLES contain nothing that we have heard of worthy of 
notice in the way of gardening. Such a thing as an orchard is unknown in these islands. In Orkney, 
Neill observes {Gen. Rep. sect. ii. p. 180.), a few apples are produced on waU-trees ; in Shetland still fewer, 
^nd that only in particularly good seasons. 

7645. SUTHERLANDSHIRE. A mountainous uncultivated surface of 1,478,400 acres ; about half 
t>f wJiich is the property of the Marquis of Stafford, who has enlarged the farms, buUt new farmeries. 



hedges, abundance of prolific finiit-trees, and venerable exotic 

shrubs. 

»jl/(>ni/mi«A-, — at Monymusk ; Sir A. Grant. Remarkable 
for its extensive plantations, the late proprietor having planted 
about fifty millions of trees ; some of which, at the time ot 
liis death,"were near one hundred feet high, and above six feet 
in circumference. The gardens and pleasure-grounds are 
beautiful and extensive. 

Inrcrcnuld House, — near Invercauld; Farquharson, 

Esq. Famous for its pine-forests, the timber of which equals 
that of Xorwav. 

Sluines Castle, — near Slaines ; Earl of Errol. Situated on 
the margin of the sea, with few trees around, but with a good 
k i t chen -garden . 

Den of Rubislaw, — near Aberdeen; Professor Davison. A 
romaiitic villa, the gardens forming t^erraces cut out of granite 
rock, watered by a stream, near which grow naturally many 
rare plants, and among others, Linncea borealis. The whole 
kept in the highest order and neatness. • 

; hilly and mountainous, with fertUe valleys well 
Banf. 

house ; the grounds celebrated for their fine woods, extensive 
gardei.is, and romantic walks. 

Cullen House, — near Cullen ; Earl of Findlater. Remark- 
able for its fine old woods : the late earl being one of the 
earliest and most extensive planters in the coimtry. 



Book 1. 



GAilDENS OF JllELAND 



1093 



and planted extonsivelv. (See An Account of the Improvements on the Marquis of Stafford's Estates, ^c. 
by James Loch, F.sj. Svo. 1S20.) 

well, and every thing might be obtained by the use of 



DumvMn Castle, — at Dunrobiji ; :Marquis of Stafford. 
There is no mansion employed as a residence, but it is said 
a magnifictnit one is in conteniulation, and there is a nark 
devoted to the breeding and feeding of 1000 mountain deer. 
In the garden, apples, pears, and cherries thrive perl'ectly 



a/cibo, — at Skibo ; Dempster, Esq. E.xtensive plant- 

itions have been formed, and in the gaidens apricots and 
ralnuts have sometimes ripened. 



7647. ROSS-SHIRR A surface of 1,776,000 acres ; the eastern part fertile, and containing some 
country-seats ; but the rest rude, mountainous, and tit only for plantations and pasture. In no part of 
Scotland have the proprietors been more assiduous in forming public roads, and in planting extensive 
moory tracts. 

park, that is, an assemblage of grass-fields, surrounded by 
strijis and varied by masses and groups. 

Bi:/ii-igO)i-iin, — near Kilmiiir : Sir J. C. Ross. A most de- 
sirable seat, aurrouiided by an immense extent of thriving 
plantation. 

yew rari'of, — near Kilmuir ; Earl of Cromarty. A superb 
modem house, inferior to few ^oat> in Scotl.^nd, sun-ouiided 
by extensive grounds and plantations, ^^^l■L■h join those of 
ijabia L;owan. 

Bra':ci,n C,:st!c. — near UiTsy ; Loro. Seaf.^rtli. A fii'.e build- 
ing, pleasantly situated on the river t onan, and suiTounded 
by extensive and well pla^it. d gi'ouuds, con.iaiiiing a good 
kitchen -g.arden and an extensive collection of exotic and hardy 
planis. 

Red Casile, — netir T ocb Boauly ; Colonel Grant, --xn ancient 
aiid resiiectable residence considerably improved. 

7il4^. IXYERN'ESS-.SHIFlE. A surface of 2,000,000 of acres, being the largest county in Scotland. 
It consists of two ranges of moinitains, separated by a chain of lakes now united by the Caledonian 
canal. The valleys are Ter .!:■ : i;: -liy of the mountains are covered with natural forests inhabited by the 
rod and roe deer,' the r.l; i ' inon hare, and other exquisite sorts of game. 



Mlarkd-Giinfcns and Orclian's. — There are none of the 
former ; but there is an old orchard at Kedcastle, in which the 
nonpareil ripens as an espaUer. At Castle Uraham, Xovar, 
and Brar!an!j\vell. are also ovchavds of recent formations. 

/»(;,- CuwV , — ne-rlnvcvgordon; M'Leod, Esq. 

.A.hanri.onii ho\:-e, by Gille:-'ie, ut Edinburgh, sunoimded 
by thrii ing iilanta.ions, on gioiinua where eigiity years ago not 

S'>: ai-, — near Cromarty : Sir H. r^Ionro. A great and 
finished plac, and one of "ti-.e most coiuplete in the north ; the 
situation' of the hou^e is elevated, and it commands a fine rtew 
of the bay of Cromarty. 

Rorlmrf^h House, — near Avoch; A modem 

edifice, substantially built and commodious. It is siluateii on 
a beautifiil bank near the sea, and suiroundett by a Scottish 



Inverness Xursery, — at Ir:> i r;bbs. A very 

extensive establishment for iir. i - .-.riiy fi-v.it-trees ; 

■with branch nurseries at other tL . r.s. licie is a very com- 
plete nursery orchard of all the hardy fruit-trees which i ipen 
their &-uits as standards, and&om whuch the scions and cuttings 
for propajation are taken, 

O'-diuri's There are but few public or commercial orchards, 

bv.t some private ones, of v>-hich a great part of the produce is 
SPnt to market. One of the largest is at Auchnasaim, near 
Inverness. It was planted in l/SS, chieHy with the Hereford- 
shire cider apples. The trees are now in a full bearing state. 
They are placed thirty feet apart : till lately the interniediate 
spaces were regulai ly'cropped, according to the rotation of the 
fann, along with which the orchard is let ; now, however, tlie 
branches nearly meet, and grass is found to lie the preferable 
xmder-crop. The old garden at Caatle Stewart, belonging to 
the Earl of .Moray, and situated seven miles noith-east of In- 
verness, may also perhaps be ranked as an orchard. The trees 
are cliieily raorella and Kentish cherries, and the large black 
gear.. They are generally of great size, and many of thera 
shattered with age, having seen several centuries; yet they 
often produce most plentiful crops. At Milltown, of Ketwall, 
there are some remarkably large lammas and achaa pear- 
tree-, about a century old. Tiiey ?.re very productive. An 
ai'ple tree here in tlie orchard of Easter Lovat, on the river 



Beanly, covers a space of forty-seven feet in diameter. A 
Beauly pear-tree is Spoken of, wiiieh used to pi-oduce sixteen 
sacks of fruit in a season. 

C';j«j;Bra;i«»i, — atBral-iani ; LordSeaforth. The garden and 
demesne greatly improved under the direction of Gibbs, now 
anurservman atlnvemess. The t'anadian rice iZizmiia anunticn) 



.iralLsed on the lakes 



poi; 



and 



tiuiving plantations abound over the vhole estate. 

Kilraivck, — near Croy ; - — . Gardens laid out 

vrith taste ; fmitftd orchards and extensive woods, enibracin" 
an elegant mcdem house, sitUKted on a roek hanging over and 
washed by the Xavin. 

Cti;!/cai', —near Croy ; Davi,l-,in. E>q. A commodious 

house, and the grounds planted and cre-'tiv iinp'.oved. 

G/cngairy Hoiisc, — at G lengairy ; ."U'Donald, Esq. The 

house on the shore of Loch Urich, suiTcmided by wood, and 
approached from the lake by a line old aveniie. 

Caslle Grant, — a.t Gi-ant;'Sh- J. Gr.ant. Ti-.e liouse consists 
of three sides of a quadrangle, i:npvoved by H. Adam, beauti- 
fiilly situated on the north side of the S- ey. It con'.niaiul-. an 
extensive and noble landscajie* inchidi' ^ ilie rark in wi-.icli 
it stands of 4000 acres, and the natural forest ut AbcviiCibv of 
40,000 acres, at the base of the lofty mou' tains of Gairn- 
gorum. Eastward lies the wide-bending cultivated vaie of 
Cromdale watered by the -Spey. 

7649. ARGYLESHIRE. An extensive surface of 3S0O square miles, consisting of hiils and mountains, 
v,-ith several islands coniidered as belonging to it. It abounds in lakes and inlets of the sea, and con- 
tains some natural woods ; but the climate is moist, and excepting in the department of arboriculture, 
does not excel m garaennur. Inere are some small manvct-garuens at Camblcton ; and a branch nursery 
Irom that ot Gibbs at Inverness, at Inverarv. 

Ini erar:i ( n^iU. — neav Invcravv ; Duse ot A r^vie. A square castellated 
mansion, with a tower at cam corner, a:ici a hi^h glazed pa^ahon, 
shoo'.mg uu above the towers rrom the centre of the root. It is buiit 
ot a ^ev stone (/..'iiii alaris. or jvit-stone) v. hich becomes black v. ith a 
shower ot ram, and is immedjatelv restored bv a gleam of sun.shme, 
which IS a fertile source ot smsular elTect!, m tins moist weejuns cli- 
mate. It stands on a lawn, which exteiuls to Loch 1- vne, an mlet ot the 
.sea nfteen mues ni cn cumference, suitoui: 
ations on tVie sides, and reachins; tov. ards 
niou:n i-;i? am'. ror:<v steeps, sjinnkkxl 

t)ne <• :ii -. ii'.r.'.ins is Dunicoick, coveretl with wood, excepting 
whe; -- proioct ihrouich the trees, and add great 1- to IIS 

p-aiuic . >' ■ stands a lonelv waich-tower, which, like cvew 
tmn^- u-.ji. , .cten^tic, has a t;ood edcct. Had this Inii been 

crowned ^. ;t;l ar. eniamental building, the ertect wotdd have been 
absurd. A v. as prepared for subsiiiutms ramparts and L^astions, 

whicn wouid have been equally fttal to its present simplicitv and 
^i'.ndeuv. 

1 lie bold, an.d ri some places savage, features of this vart ot the 
roun:rv, rcouire oiilv a uiclicions aiM-osinon oi wood to renuer them 
n-.ove ho-'.-.itable to the eve, and to improve tjie pasture and tlie climate. 
I he larch-nee has a[read> etiected woiuiers m -Vvt:\ leslure : and what 
Its eutcis mav be over tne whole ot tlie Hitrh;ai'.ds bv the time halt a 
ce-.'.tui-> more has e!a->sed, it is dimcuit to imagine. Savage will then 
cnan_-ed to. or at ;east combinetl widi, svlvan grandeur. 

7i>.jO. BL i ii-SHIIlE comnrehcntls t!ie islands of Bute 
and Arran, and some smaller isles ; hillv, but witn a mode- 
rate chmate, and in cjeneral favorable to tne erowtli ot trees 
and hedges, ihcre are two or three smt.il orrhards and 
market-gardens near Rotlisav and Mount ML V,-.u-t. 



.s to Loch 1- vne, an mlet ot the MA 

mded bv naing groves ot plant- |Mv 

IS t;ie stunmits of the lughest ffiVii 

with i-isins trees. ( fi^-. 75G.) -T'^ 




Monut Slen-(ir;. — ^lavnnis ot Bute. An eleirani hin:s'.\ 00:11- 
niaiiding a hue view ot the Iirth ot ( Ivde. surroiir.cled \<\ ex- 
tensive i)lantations, formed bv the late marquis. aDouadinp- 
With various sorts of game, and m wluch the turkey is iiatu- 



ia;ised. Thesrardcn 
but, exceptms the :s 
comparative neglect. 



.amcd a irood co! ertioTi of plants: 
-garden, tiie^ are liow ir. a state of 



Sect. IV. Ireland. 
76,51. Tlie surface of -which is estimated at 1 1,00T,7 12 Irish acres, is much 
less varied than Scotland and Wales, but rather more so than Enirland, though o-reat 
part of it consists of bog and Avastes, yet these are everywhere improvable by draining 
and culture, or planting. The climate is more temperate than that of Britain, but also 
more moist ; it is, on the whole, highly favornblc to the culture of leaves and root-^ • 

4 A 3 



1094 



SIATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IT. 



and favorable for all the other branches of gardening. The political situation of tlie 
country, and the general absence of proprietors, have prevented much from being done ; 
but, from the cheapness of land and labor, and the natural advantages every where pre- 
sented, the most extensive parks, pleasure-grounds, and kitchen-gardens, might be created 
at a comparatively moderate expense. 

7652. The names of residences here given are selected from the Traveller s Guide, 
published in Dublin in 1819 : the characteristic epithets added are from that work, and 
the English reader will of course make due allowance for Irish phraseology. We have 
made the general tour of Ireland, and been engaged professionally in three or four coun- 
ties, and we know that many places, styled delightful and enchanting in the " Guide," 
would cut but a poor figure if placed beside hundreds of seats in England whose 
names we have omitted. There is very little old timber in Ireland, and very few of the 
** demesnes" that have any other park than a grass field, without trees, in which the 
house stands. Deer parks are rare, and also kitchen-gardens with hot-houses. Mackay 
of the Trinity College botanic garden, and M'Leish of Harold's Cross, are well calcu- 
lated for furnishing designs for both these improvements, and happily there is at present 
a spirit for employing these gentlemen. If to this the proprietors would join a more 
constant residence on their estates, much would be elTected. 



PROVINCE OF LEINSTER. 

7653. DUBLIN. A fertile surface of 147,840 Irish acres, little varied, but well adapted for horticulture 
and floriculture. At Dublin is a royal park ; two excellent botanic gardens ; two good nurseries by Simp- 
son, Toole, and Mackay, and GrimwoodvS and Keefe, with some culinary commercial gardens. In Dublin is 
St. Stephen's Green, a very large naked square, a design for ornamenting which by A. M'Leish is about 
to be published. 



The Phoenix Park, — near Dublin ; a public promenade and 
a royal park, seven miles in circumference, beautifully diversi- 
fied -witli woodland, champaign and rising grounds, tastefully 
adorned with extensive sheets of water, and plentifully stocked 
■with deer. The civic regal residence here is respectable and com- 
modious. The kitchen-garden of the (llhief Secretary's lodge 
U reckoned one of the best managed in the county of Dublin. 

The Biitank Garden, — at Glassnevin {Jig. 757.) ; Dublin So- 




ciety. Established with the commencement of the 19th cen- 
tury, chiefly through the exertions of Dr. Wade, author of 
several works on Irish botanv. It is situated at Glassnevin, 
within two miles of Dublin Castle, and contains 50 statute 
acres. " Nothing," the authors of the History of Dublin ob- 
serve, " can exceet^ the command of aspect which the irre- 
gular beauty of the snrface presents, and of which the planners 
(chiefly Dr. Wade) of the garden have been careful to avail 
themselves. Having ample room for every botanical purpose, 
thev have not sacrificed taste to convenience, or disturbed such 
objects as contributed to the beauty of the old demesne, origin- 
ally that of Tickel the poet. The summit, having considerable 
elevation, gradually or abruptly slopes to the river Folka, 
■which forms a sweeping boundary to one side of the garden. 
Here large clumps of venerable elms, or other forest trees, 
shade the sloping steeps, or, running along the ridges, separate 
the ground into .irregular divisions. Through these the ivy- 
crowned ruin of some venerable arch presents a passage, so 
that many of the compartments are approached by some 
picturesque or striking entrance. Nor is the systematic ar- 
rangement less judiciously managed. Nothing can be con- 
ceived more ungraceful than the formal regularity necessary in 
such an arrangement ; every plant following in its order, and 
labelled with its name, presents to the eye an irksome sameness. 



To avoid this appe.wance, each class is subdivided intc smaller 
compartments, insulated in green sward, and commencing by 
pathways, and the intervals hlled up with scattered shrubs; so 
that, while the most exact regularity is observed in the classi- 
fication, and the series of plants follow each other in such 
succession that the most minute can be immediately found, the 
whole presents the aspect of unstudied confusion. ' 

This garden contams the following arrangements, or sub- 
divisions : — 

A Hortus Linitceeitsis {a), subdivided into a herbaceous 
division, and one for shrubby, fruit-bearing, and forest tre». 
Six acres are assigned to this division. To each plant is pre- 
fixed a metal label, inscribed with its number in the Glassnevin 
catalogue. 

A Hortus Jussieuensis {b), rather limited, yet sufficiently ex- 
tensive to comprise all the orders of which there are hardy 
specimens introduced in Britain. 

A Hortus Hibernicus (c), or garden of native Irish plants, 
containing upwards of 134.5 species, including Cryptogameae. 

A Hortus esculentus (d), containing not only the usual cu- 
linary vegetables, but all others in which wholesome and nu- 
tritious qualities reside, in such a degree that they can be con- 
verted into human aliment. 

A Hortus medicus (<■), orgeirden of plants used in medicine, 
arranged on the plan of Woodville's Medical Botany ; and 
containing every hardy plant in which any medical virtue i» 
known to reside. 

A Hortus pecudarius (f ), or cattle garden, m which are 
arranged all plants which the animal to whom the plant is 
appropriated is fond of eating, and which are wholesome food 
for it; also such as he is not fond of eating, though not un- 
wholesome. On the opposite side are arranged such plants 
as the same animal will eat, but which are injurious to it, 
and likewise such as it refuses to eat whether injurious or not. 
Each of these particulars is noted on the label, pointing out the 
plant, and likewise whether the plant be indigenous or foreign. 

A Hortus rusticus {g), or garden of plants used in rural eco- 
nomy, including the grasses, clover, &c. 

A Hortus tinciorius (/i), containing all the plants used m 
dyeing, paiticularly those which are indigenous to Ireland. 

A Hortus plantarum volubilium, rcpentium, et scandeniium, 
(i, k), or garden of twining, creeping, and climbing 
plants, shrubby and herbaceous. „ , , 

A Hortus plantarum saxatilium, or garden of rock plants on 
rock-work. This is formed on an artificial mound, construct- 
ed on the most elevated part of the garden. " The fragrnents 
of rock for this purpose were transported from the Hill of 
Howth, and such was selected as were already clothed \vith 
various species of mosses and lichens. These were piled 
together without any apparent order, so as to give the appear- 
ance of a natural rocky mound. But it so constructed that 
spiral walks winding round the sides, but not visible at a dis- 
tance, conducts the visitor to the summit. Here, as he as- 
cends, he sees every grey stone clothed with its appropriate 
vegetation, and in every fissure of the rocks some alpine plants. 
When arrived at the summit of this mount, the eye is gratified 
with a view of the whole garden, lying beneath displayed as in 
a map." (History of Dublin, p. 1298.) ^ ^ . ^ 

A Hortus lacustris et palustris (m), or garden of aquatic and 
marsh plants. On the banks of the Folka lies an extensive 
flat, lower than the bed of the river, in which an irregular 
lake is formed, two hundred yards in length, for the aquatics; 
and on the shores, and in an island formed on purpose at one 
extremity, the marsh plants are grown. At convenient m- 
tervals green promontories project into the water; which, 
while they give a picturesque variety to the banks, afford an 
opportunity of approaching such plants as the botanist may 
wish to examine. The grounds surrounding the lake are 
varied with American pines and other transatlantic woods that 
love a swampy soil, and beyond these the rising grounds are 
entirely devoted to ornament. 

A Hortus crijptogameus (h), or garden of cryptogamous 
plants. This is a steep bank, shaded by lofty trees. 

A Hortus Flora (<0, or flower-garden, m which the flonst* 
flowers are cultivated in parterres. 



Boos I. 



GARDENS OF IRELAND. 



1095 



Of Villa Gardin-i. — There are a very coiisiileratde number 
that might be enumerated, such as St. Catherines, belonging 

to the bankers Latouche ; StAV'oolstans, Kane, E&cj., Moimt 

Sackvillo, M'Kemmis, Esq.; Edaiondberry, Needham, 

Es.1.; Donnybrook, Dr. Percival ; those of i\Iiss Colville, Mias 
Sm'vth, -Airs. M'Ganns, beiides a number near Bray, Lucan, 
Lcixlip, Clontarf, &:c. 

Clai-e Hull, — near Donnybrook ; Stupendous 

rockv scenerv, with old trees in the park. 

31 ari, 10, —"near Dublin ; Earl of Charlemont. A deliirhtful 
edilioe, in a demesne of '200 acres, judiciously and tastefully 
planted, wiih a fine ornamental temiUe. 'i'he gi-ounds are 
thrown open to the Dublin citi/ms two days a-wcek. 

Mcn i/lc (sea villa), — near Donnybrook ; Lord Downes. A 
beaucifLil mansion and grounds. An extensive collection of 
oniamental plants ; a green-hou,e, stove, flower forcing-house, 
bv A. ^I'Le'i^h, and culinary forcing-houses. 

' LerrMrJ'^ To>ri'., — Lord Castlecoote, situate at the bottom of 
the Dublin mountains, and abounding in picturesque views 
tVom the liouae and walks in the pleasure-ground. 

Ti-re.uirc, - y. D>iurne, Esq. Extensive hot-houses and 
gardens ; and a varied collection of (ilants, judiciously ar- 
ranged by J. Fraser, an excellent botanist and gardener, and 
a nm .i of general information. 

?,Iuuitt !ilen-iuii, — near ! onnybrook ; Lord Fitz William. A 
magnificent mansion, with gardens and trees. 

Scivtvn-,! PurA-, — near Donnybrook ; A mag- 
nificent mansion, and some treco in the park. 

Kijlisler, — Lord Xewcomen. A fine situation ; the kitchen- 
garden remarkable for its grapes and pines. 

Kingsloifi',— The Right'Hon. \V. f?aurin. A small garden, 
but rich in exotic producUons, fruit", and flowers, and espe- 
cially of bulbous exoiics. 

Rathfarnluim Castle, - near Rathfamham ; — A 

magnificent castellated structure, with a^~-eeable pleasure- 
grounds. 

ToUa^'h Palace, — at ToUogh ; Archbishop of Dublin. An 
ancient venerable stricture, with extensive gardens, kept in 
fine order. 

1,404 Irish acres ; with lina dcils and brooks, and 

Lord Rossmore. Extensive plantations, and a waterfalf of 100 
feet, in what is called the Devil's Ulen. 

Powerscurt, — near EnniskeiTy ; Lord Powerscourt. An 
extensive-fronted edifice, in a demesne of GOO acres tastefiilly 
planted, and omamented with water and buildings. 

CharUville, — near Enniskerry ; Lord Monck. Situated on 
the river Dargle, with a luxuriance cf rural beauties. 

likssin^tim Par/i, — near Blessington ; Marquis of Down- 
shire. A" line park ; the house consumed in the rfbellion of 
1798, and not yet rebuilt. This place was formerly famous for 
the first kitchen-gardens in Ireland. 

RmboroHgIt, — "iisar Naas ; Earl Miltown. The front of 
the house and offices form an extensive facade of hewn 
stone, nearly 700 feet long. The grounds finely varied and 
well planted'. 

NetvtotL-ii Mount Kcit7isJij, — near the village of that name; ; 

7655. WEXFORD. A poninsular surfacs of 315,396 Irish acres, of good soil, but little varied in 
aspect. 

Camoletz Park, — near Enniscorthy ; Earl ^lountmorris. A beautiful demesne. 

7656. KILKENNY. A surface, soinev. hat varied by hills, of 318,249 Irish acres. There is a good 
nursery here, by John Robertson, who has distinguished himself by some excellent papers published in 
the Transactions of the London Horticultural Society. 

Balhjraget House, — near Ballyraget ; Lady Ormond. A 1 £><?s(7r/, — near Bennet's-bridge ; Lord Desart. A magniH- 
chai-ming demesne ; the mansion burned down during the cent mansion and extensive demesne. 

rebellion of 1798, but restored by her ladyship. Ashbrooke, — near Durrow ; Lord Ashbrooke. A magniil- 

cent mansion, with an extensive demesne. 



A HiH-liis t ro/icK* (p), or garden for tender exotic?, com- 
prising a conservatory, two green-houses, an«l a hot-house 
parallel, clo^e together, and comniencing by a common pas- 
sajje at i!ie north end. 

".•1 Professor's house airl Led n re- room (y), with a library 
hortus siccus, vNcc. The houseof thoformer proprietor, Tickel, 
is ]ireserved, and arranged fjr this purjjose. 

This garden is manageil by a professor ?.nd lecturer, with 
a salary of ,300/., a sujierintendaiit at 100/., two assi^taitts at 
60/. each, vwelve gardeners at 12s. per week, and six ap- 
prentices atOs. The total annual expense, including 7.".'. as 
rent for the land, i^ about 1300/. a-year. Besides the u .ual 
number ot'aiu'ventice., six who iiaving i>assed the usu.al jieriod 
under private gardeners, are received here to comi)lete their 
ki^owledge and experience, especially in the hortus tsct:lentus, 
After passing two years here they are received as gnrdener.s 
into priv.-:te houses, and are much sought after. A premiinn 
of five guineas is given by ilie society to those who are recom- 
mendeil by the superintendant for assiduity and good con- 
duct; and tlie superintendant receives .5/. as'a gratuity for Iris 
trouble in insti-ucting them. 

The Botanic Gurdai at Trinity College. — 1 his garden was 
begun in 1807. It is situated in low grounds, and contains tluee 
and a half acres, of an irregular shape, surrounded by a wall 
twelve feet Irigh. Theie are separate arrangements tor trees, 
shrubs, and herbaceous plants, according to the Linntean 
system ; and a very full collection of medicinal plants, ar- 
ranged according to the natural method of Jussieu. To each 
plant is prefixed a label containing the systematic and English 
names, and class and order, both of Linna;us and Jussieu. 
Separate arrangements are formed for the perennial, the 
biennial, and annual herbaceous plants, and for the grasses. 
Only one wing of the intended range of glass has yet been 
built, which comjirises a stove tliirty-Hve by sixteen, and a 
green-house forty feet by sixteen. In front is a small aqua- 
rium. This garden is rapidly mcreasing in riches under the 
excellent management of its present curator, G. IMackay, who 
is also botanical demoirstrator, and lectures on botaiiy and 
horticulture. 

7654. WICKLOW. A finely varied surface of 30; 
bordering on the sea. 

Belvif iv, — near Bray ; D. Latouche, Esq. A romantic resi- ' 
dence, with extensive gardens and hot-houses, on which no 
expense is spared to preserve their reputation of being the first 
in Ireland. 

Glenmore Castle, — F. Synge, Esq. Extensive mountain 
plantations going forward ;" varied scenery in the home views, 
and prospects reaching even to ^^'ales ; hot-hou:,es and flower- 
gardens. 

Clonmanning, — Rev. Dr. Trewel. Extensive kitchen-gar- 
dens, and the first cast-iron hot-houses erected in Irelan.d, 
from the designs of A. iM'Leish. Myrtles grow here in the 
open air to the height of sixteen or eighteen ftst. 

Kilriulderij, — near Bray ; Earl of ."\Ieath. A romantic 
country-residence, in a deep valley, overshadowed by lofty 



7657. KILDARE. A flat surface of 242,245 Irish acres of fine arable soil. 

A magnificent 
i beautiful seat 
.V mansion 



Bishop -court, — wear Kill; Lord Ponsonb; 
mansion and highly cidiivated demesne. 

Belan, — near'Ti'nolin ; Lord Aldborough. 
with extensive plantations. 

Caslleton n, — near Celliridge ; 

on the banks or the Litf'ey ; as superb an edifice as any in 



mansion, tlie demesne extensive, a vast lawm waves over gentle 
hills, interspersed with plantations to a great extent, aflbrding 
a variety of beautiful prosjiects. A stream winding through 
the whole has been widened to a river, over which an elegant 
bridge is constructed, and a lofty square prospect tower has 
been erected on one of the most elevated knoll '. 

Neirhcrri;, — near Castle Carberry ; Lord Ilarberton. A 
beautiful seat. 



Ireland, and the plantations correspond in magnificence. 
Kiladoon, — near Celbridge ; Lord Leitrim. 
Carton, — near Maynooth ; Duke of Leinster. A superb 

7658. KING'S COUNTY. A surface of 282,200 acres, little varied, and of whicli nearly oas half 
bog or waste. 

CharhviUc I'orest, — near Tuliamore ; Earl of Charleville. 
A demesne of l.jOO acres, partly the remains of a natural 
forest, on which the present ejurl has built a magnificent and 
commo<liou5 mansion in the castellated style, and laid out the 
grounds with great taste. 

76;39. QUEEN'S COUNTY. A surface, consisting chiefly of bogs, mountains, swamps, and wastes of 
2-33,300 acres. 



Frankford, — near Frankford : A 

itique mansion, witli a fosse and di-awbridge, in an ext'en 
■ e flat demesne. 



Slradbfilly Hall, — near Stradballv , 
beautiful seat. 

Rrockley Park, — near Stradbally ; Earl Roden. 



Cosbie, Esq. A 



Dawsonscourt Hall. 
A magnificent seat. ' 

Balltjroan, — near Bally 
cent residence. 



near Stradbally; Lord Portarlington. 

Lord De Vescey. A magnifi- 



7660. CARLO W. A surface of 137,000 acres of grand and picturesque surface and good soil. 

7661. EASTMEATH. A fertile surface of 227,900 acres, generally flat, but with only a moderate 



portion of bog and waste, 

Gonnanstown House, — near 'Wliite Cross ; Lord Gorman; 
town. 

S/dHs C«.sf/c, — near Slane ; Earl Conyngham. A .splcndi 
mansion, now erecting, and the grounds, through wliich flov. 
the Boyne, planting and being otherwise improved. 



Diiii^ay Casile, — near Dimshaughlin ; Lord Dunsay. 
Ardbraccan Palace, — near Trim ; Bishop of j"Meath. A chaste 
and simple building. 

Headfort, — near Kells ; Blarquis Bective. A magnificent 
mansion, and extensive and beautifully planted demesne. 

7662. WESTME.ITH. A surface of £4t',943 acres of bogs, hills, a number of lakes, and some fertile 
grounds 

GmJstoirn Park, — near Gaulstown : Lord Kilmaine. A | tensive views, connnanding hills, rocks, ruined lowers, pnd 
superb res.c.ence. . ... . , . ^, from a prospect tower on tlie hill of Lloyd, 

Hutdfoii, - Earl of Bective. A j.rincely residence, with ex- | upwards of twelve counties are seen. There is much old 

4 A 4 



1095 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



woods, and nearly 400 acres of artificial plantations jndicionsly 
managed. There is an approach of two miles, and a drive of 
six; miles, both abounding in picturesque views. There is 3 
consert-atory, terrace-garden, English and Dutch parterre^ 
rosary, botanic ground, and kitclien-garden, all connected, said 
in a suitable scale to the castle, by M'Leish. 

Ballynei:aU, — J. (iihbons, Esq. An excellent house in the 
Grecian sKle, by Johnston of Dublin ; abundance of old 
timber, and dressed grounds and gardens laid out by M'Leish. 

St. Lucys, — Sir T. Chapman, Bart. A good castellatetJ 
house, and well managed grounds and gardens, laid out by 
M'I.eish. 

Raiituila, — R. HI. Reynella, Esq. A pretty Englisli-looking 
seat, by M'Leish. 

Lough Creiv, — J. L. Napier, Esq. A house by Cockerel of 
London, in the Grecian style, and much natural and artificial 
■wood, and ever>' promise of magnificence. The proprietor is 
one of the best landlords in Ireland. 



timber, and the finest larches in Ireland. The house, gar- 
dens, and grounds had been much neglected, but are reno- 
vating and improving under the guidance of IM'Leish. 

Cragpun, — near 5loat-a-Grenogue ; . A 

fine mansion and beautiful demesne. 

Tnisiernatigh , — near IMorinstown ; Sir P. Piers. 

Lncken, — near Mullingar ; . A beautiful 

mansion and demesne. 

BalUnhnigh, — near Mullingar ; H. O'Reilly, Esq. A 
charming residence. 

CasileU.n'ii Ddvin, — near Mullingar ; Earl of Westmeath. 
A charming residence. 

Packenham Ilall.—nesx Castle Pollard ; Earl Longford. A 
splendid seat. 

Lisnabin Ciisfle, — Captain Purdon. A house, offices, and 
conservatory, in the Gothic style, by IM'Leish ; extensive pros- 
pects, some old trees, and numerous yoimg ones. 

Kjuick Drin, _ Sir R. Levinge, Bart. A large castle, by 
ShieLs of Dublin ; upwards of 100 acres of oak and holly 

7663. LONGFORD. A surface of 134,700 acres of rich and beautiful spots, interspersed with bogs, 
mountains, morasses, and fens. 

Castle Forbes, — near Newtown Forbes ; Earl Granard. A splendid residence. 

7664. LOWTH. A surface of 126,960 Irish acres, fertile, undulating, and thickly interspersed with 
lofty hills. 

Sa rmeath, — ne^r Clogherhead ; Sir E. Pellew. A charm- I Clermrmf, — near Lurgan Green; Earl Clermont. An ele- 
ing mansion, encircled with an extensive and jrell planted I gant seat. 

demesne. I Cofon, —near Slaine; Hon. John Foster'. A demesne taite- 

I fully ornamented with extensive plantations. 

PROVINCE OF MUNSTER. 
' 7665. WATERFORD. A surface of 262,800 Irish acres, rough, rocky, and mountainous, with a soil 
Varying through all the gradations of loam and peat. 



Bam 



near Tramore; 



A weU 



Lismore, — near Lisniore ; Duke of Devonshire. A mag- 
nificent pile, now repairing, and the (pounds being im- 
proved. 



planted demesne. 

Ciirraghmnre, — near 'Waterford ; Marquis of Waterford. An 
extensive demesne, which for beauty and variety cannot be 
»ur))assed in any part of the united kingdom. 

7666. CORK. The largest county in Ireland, comprising a surface of 1,048,709 Irish acres, of whicii 
231,959 are bogs, mountains, and waste. There is a nursery by Thomas Sheehan. 



Cork Botanic Garden — -was founded in 1S09, by the Roval 
Cork Institution (a society of gentlemen incorporated after 
the maniwr of the Dublin Society, and like that society sup- 
ported by annual grants from Parliament) ; six acres are en- 
closed by a hedge, and one acre near the centre by a wall ; 
includes" a hot-house and green-house. The plants in the. 
garden are arranged in the Linnajan manner ; it is managed' 
by a committee, and the curator is I\Ir. James Drummond, 
A.L.S., a good practical botanist and intelligent gardener. 



Of late years the funds of the Cork Institution have been so 
low that it has been found necessary to turn the greater part 
of the garden into a nurserv, and dispose of the produce. 

Cisite Murti/n, — near Youghal ; Earl of Shannon. A mag- 
nificent mansion and demesne. 

Rasti//ion, — near Middleton ; Earl Incliinquiii. A noble 
seat. The tide gently flows to the garden-walls. 

Moorfitid, — near Kilworth ; Lord Mount-Cashel. A su- 
perb residence. 



7667. TIPPERARY. A surface of 5r>4,P50 Irish acres, rugged, coarse, and mountainous in the west, 
but level and fertile in the cast, where the lands are coi%sidered amongst tlie most productive in Ireland. 



. near Clonmel ; Bagnal, Esq. A beautiful 

— near Clonmel ; Sir T. Osborne. A neat 



Kilmore, 
seat. 

Nervtorri 
mansion. 

Kiwckliifli/, — near Clonmel; Lord Donoughniore. An en- 
chanting residence on the banks of the Suir, finely planted. 

Shanliallij, — near Clogheen ; Lord Lismore. A splendid 
residence- 

Killcoirhj, — near Ballyporeeii ; Sir W. Barker. A delight- 
ful residence. 

Cashel Paliue, — ne^x Cashel ; Bishop of Cashel. The gar- 
dens beautiful and tastefully arranged. 



Cashkrj — near Cashier ; Lord Btitters. A delightful reai- 

denc3. 

Bnllygrifjin, — neM Goldeer ; Earl Clanwilliam. An en- 
chanting residence. 

Suir Castle, — near Golden ; Loi-d Massay. A beautiful situ- 
ation on the banks of the river Suir. 

Dancers Court, — near Tipperary ; Lord Milton. A fine 
residence. 

Castleiotrn, — near Templemore ; Marquis of Lansdown. A 
fine romantic seat. 

Templemore, — near Templemore ; Sir J. C. Carden. An 
elegant seat. 

7668. LIMERICK. A surface of 386,750 Irish acres, generally flat and very rich, especially the tract 
of low lands on the Shannon, which are deemed the richest aiid most prolific in Ireland. There is a 
nursery at the county town, by Thomas Lees. 

BuW^mor^, — near Askeyton ; Massey, Esq. A beautiful seat. 

7669. CLARE. A surface of 476/200 Irish acres, of which more tlian half is bog, mountainous, and 
waste ; the mountains numerous, and the soil and surface of the lower grounds very various. 

Innislynun, — in the village ; the castle of the elder branch of the O'Brien family. 

7670. KERRY. A surface of 647,650 Irish acres, much varied in surface and soil, and to a tourist the 
most interesting county in Ireland, as containing the lakes of Killarney. 



Mount Meredith, — near Castle Island ; O'Donohue, Esq A 
charming residence. 

Kenouire Lodge, - near Kenmare ; Jlarquis of L.in?down. 

Kemnare House, — near Killarney ; Lord Kenmare. A de- 
liijhtful demesne along the banks of the river Deneagh, at 
the mouth of which the aquatic excursion of the lakes is 



menced. Round the lakes of Killarney is Bellview, and 
various other houses of little or no interest, otherwise than 
from their situation. The banks and islands of the lakes are rich 



botany ; and display truly 
specimens of arbutus unedo, a 
views. 



iting copses and single 
well as .grand and picturesque 



PROVINCE OF CONN AUGHT. 
671. ROSCOMMON. A surface of 346,650 Irish acres, with some lofty hills, but no lakes of any mag- 
: it is generally in pasture. 

Latouche, Esq. [ 5M-e«fo)i-i;, — at Stokestown ; R. 3Ialion, Esq. A magnifi- 
cent mansion. 

A 



nitude : it is generally in pasture. 

Clover Hill, — near Mount Talbot ; 

A beautiful residence. 

French Park, — near Belanager ; 

delightful mansion and demesne. 

7672. GALWAY. A surface of 
generally in pasture. 

Portumna Castle, — near Portumna ; 



Marquis of Clanrick- 

ard. A venerable mansion. 

.Flotrer Hill,—neai Portumna ; Lord Biverton. A delight- 
ful residence. T. IS A 

Spring Carden, — near Eyrecourt ; Fearce, Lsq. A 

beautiful residence. ^ ts r. t-. i * 

Dalystown, — near A^'oodford ; Right Hon. D. B. Daly. A 
fine mansion and well planted demesne. 

Quee-isliorott^h, — near Evrecoiurt : Larl Louth. A hne seat. 
Gori Hodi-e, — near Gort; B.Smyth, Esq. A tme seat. 
Gfli-ftu//,!/, — near Ballinacloe , Lord Clancarty, A splendid 
residence. 



,959 Irish acres ; varied and rich, but without hills or mountain 
near Aghrira ; 



Ballydo7t7iellan, - 
tiful demesne. 

Oramore Castle, - 
venerable mansion, 

Dunsandle, — near Kilconnel 
and magnificent mansion. 

Ctonhrook, — near Ahaseragh ; Lord Clonbrook 
ful mansion, and highly improved demesne. 

Bellew. — near Newtown Bellew ; Sir E. Belle 
tiful seat. 



A beau- 

near Oramore ; Blake, Esq. A 

Daly, Esq. A splendid 
A beauti* 
A beau' 



Book I. 



LITERATURE OF GARDENING. 



1C97 



1673. MAYO. A surface of 790,600 Irish acres; a great portion mountainous and waste, and the rest 
chiefly in pasture. 



CastUlxxr House, — near Castlebar ; Lord Lucan. A vener- 
able stnicUire, solidly situated on the brow of a steep emi- 
nence overhanging the river. 

Moat, — near Ball ; Sir R. B. Lynch. A delightful resi- 
dence. 

JN'ra/, — near Ballinrobe ; Lord Ivilmaine. A magnificent 
and extemive demesne. 



Netrpark, — near Swincford, Sir A. Brabazon. 

Hollijmnunt, — near HoUymount ; Lindsay, Esq. 

fine mansion and demesne. 

Aetvbrook House, — near HoUymount ; Lord Clanmorris. 
magnificent i 



7674. LEITRIM. A surface of 255,950 Irish acres; hilly, with fertile valleys, and numerous streams 
and lakes ; the whole well adapted for every branch of gardening. 

Lurgan, — near Lurgan Bay ; Right Hon. S. 'Winne. A beautiful residence. 

7675. SLIGO. A surface of 247,150 acres, nearly the third quite waste, the rest fertile in com and 
pc'tatoes. 

HasletvooJ, — near Sligo, on Lough Gill ; The house and demesne aptly composed in elegant magnificence. 

PROVINCE OF ULSTER. 

7676. CAVAN. A surface of 301,000 Irisli acres, abounding in fenny pastures and coarse grounds. 
Florence Court, — near Swadlinben ; Earl Emiiskillen. A | lakes, hedgerows, and meadows; an extensive demesne-farm^ 

splendid residence. ] under the care of a Northumbrian agriculturist. All the up- 

FurrJiain House, — near Ivihnore ; Lord Farnham. A per servants English, 
splendid residence, in an extensive demesne, abounding in ' 

7677. FERMANAGH. A surface of 283,400 Irish acres, chiefly boggy and mountainous ; interesthig 
to tourists as containing Loch Erne. 

Beliisle, — on an island in Loch Erne; Earl Ross. The i erected, from which a panoramic view is obtained, not only of 
Island contains 200 acres, charmingly diversified by hills, dales, I this, but of all the other wooded islands of the loch. One of 



and gentle decUvities, which are richly cloihed with old tim- | them is exclusively used as a deer park, 
ber, through which gravel-walks are conducted, and a temple 

7678. MONAGHAN> A surface of 179,600 Irish acres, much encumbered with bogs and mountains, 
but in part rich and cultivated. 

CatfU Blan-y, — near the village of that name ; Lord I a lake, thickly interspersed with islands richly planted vritii 
Bianey. A delightful residence, commanding a fine view of I trees. 

7679. TYRONE. A surface of 467,700 Irish acres, a great portion rough and mountainous. 
Baron Court, — near Newton Stewart; Marquis of Aber- i Aghinuas, — near Caledon ; Lord Belraore. An elegant 



com. A magnificent mansion, but no park-srenery or gardens 
deserving notice. Extensive plantations, however, have been 
made in vaiious parts of the demesne. 

Caledon Hill,— neax Caledon; Lord Caledon. A delightful 
residence. 



mansion and extensive demesne. 

Farw Hi7/, — near Dungannon; Lord Northland. A mag- 
nificent residence. 

SYoifirf //uW, — near Stewartstown; Lord Castlestewart. A 
magiuficent residence. 



7680. DONEGAL. A surface of 679,550 Irish acres ; the greatest portion reclaimable and irreclaim- 
able mountains. 

7681. DERRY. A surface of 318,500 acres ; its surface varied but without mountains, and the soil 
generally fertile. 

7682. ARMAGH. A surface of 181,450 acres, with an irregular surface that has not unaptly been 
compared to eggs placed on gnd in a bason of salt. 

Castle Gosford, — near Mavkethill ; Lord (josford. An ex 
tensive demesne fringed with trees. 



Castle DiV/on, — near Richill ; Sir C. Molyneux. A 
extensive demesne, containing a handsome sheet of water, skir 
ing the base of a hill covered with a very thriving plantation 

76S3. DO'\VN. A surface of 348,500 Irish acres, considerably varied, with but few mountains and 
moors. 



Lurgan House, — near Lurgan ; Right Hon. "\V. Brownlow. 
A delightful residence. Near this seat is Lough Neagh, a lake 
of 60,361 acres. 



Lissige, — near Newry ; Earl Clanwilliam. A splendid resi- 
dence. 

Ballifmoney, — near Rathfiryland ; Marquis of Do-\vnshire. A 
fine country-residence. 

Briian^ord, — weax Narrow 'Water; Lord Clanbrassil. A 
delightful and sequestered residence, well planted, with a 
river, and a succession of picturesque cascades. 



Moira Castle, — near ^loua ; IMarquis of Hastings. Contains 
some old trees, and also some young i>lantations ; gardening 
in all its branches baring been here atter.ded to by the present 
owner's father, when neglected in almost every other part of 
Ireland. 

HUUborough Castle, — near Hillsborough; Marquis of Down- 
Bhire. A magnificent residence. 

Belvoir, — near Newtown Breda ; Lord Dungannon. A 
magnificent residence. 

7684. ANTRIM. A surface of 420,999 Irish acres, considerably varied with mountains and hills, fertile 
valleys, bogs, and dry wastes. It is noted by tourists as containing the Giant's Causeway. There are two 
nurseries at Belfast. 

Shane's Castle, — near Antrim, on the borders of Lough 1 Castle Upton, — near Templepatrict ; Lord Terapleton. A 
Neagh ; Lord O'Neil. An enchanting residence. beautiful seat. 

GUnarm Castle,— near Glenarm ; Earl Antrim. A venerable 
and magnificent mansion. 



Chap. IV. 

Of the Literature of Gardening* 
^685. The first books on ogricuhure and gardening were written by the Greeks some 
centuries before the Christian aera, and by the Romans about the commencement of that 
period. Among the ancient Greek writers, Hesiod, Homer, Theophrastus, Xenophon, 
and aElian, may be mentioned as having touched more or less on gardening. Tlie 
■works of the modern Greeks, or those v.ho wrote after the seat of the Roman govern- 
ment was transferred to Constantinople, are collected under the title of Geoponica ; and 
have been translated by T. Owen, who also translated Varro and Palladius. Among 
the Latins, the works of VaiTO are the first in tlie order of time ; next Cato, and Pliny, 
and Columella, and, lastly, R. T. E. Palladius, supposed to have lived in the fom-th 
century. Passages relative to the subject may be found in most of the Roman poets, 
especially in Martial, Virgil, and Horace ; but Pliny's natural history, and Columella's 
11th book on gardens, are those from which the most correct ideas may be obtained of 
Roman gardens. In the ages which succeeded the fall of the Roman empire, few books 
>Terc written, excepting on religion : the fuel which appeared on rural matters was by 



1098 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



Crescenzio, in Italy, early in the fifteenth century ; and soon after one or two in 
France, Germany, and Britain. We shall enumerate the whole of the British works 
on gardening, as far as we have been able to collect their titles ; and next, the leading 
works of France, Germany, Italy, Spain, Sweden, Russia, and America. 

Sect. I. Of the Literature of British Gaixlening. 

7686. The first British ivork on husbandry i?, that of Judge Fitzherbert, published about 
the middle of the 16th century. Before the end of the same century appeared Tusser, 
Mountain, Mascal, and Hyll, who wrote expressly on gardening, paitly from their own 
experience and observation, and partly by translating from the Latin and Greek 
authors. In the seventeenth century appeared as gardening authors. Plat, Lawson, 
Gardiner, Standish, Parkinson, Plattes, Austin, Tradescant, Evelyn, Cowley, Blake, 
Rea, Worlidge, Meager, Temple, and some others. Those of the succeeding century 
are numerous, and consist in great part of practical or professional gardeners, v;\\o 
wrote from their own experience ; of these are London and Wise, Collins, Switzer, Fair- 
child, Miller, Cowell, Hitt, Hill, Wheeler, Boucher, Swinden, Abercrombie, Speechly, 
Forsyth, Maddock, M'Phail, Repton, and Nicol. 

7687. amateur gardeners and botanists, who wrote on gardening during the eigh- 
teenth century, there are Laurence, Bradley, Evelyn, Justice, Hanbury, Weston, 
Wheatley, Chambers, G. Mason, Mason the poet, Anderson, R. P. Knight, T. A. 
Knight, U. Price, M. Marshall, and C. Marshall. The nineteenth century has pro- 
duced one or two practical authors, as Pontey, Hayward, Emmerton, and Hogg ; one 
gentleman writer on the subject, Hope ; besides a number of authors of both classes, 
who have contributed papers to the Horticultural Societies. 

7688. The old gardening books pj-evious to the Restoration, Professor Martyn observes 
(Pref. to Mill. Diet, xxxv.), " are of very inferior value, with scarcely any pretence to 
originality, if we except Scot, Lawson, Parkinson, and Austen. Evelyn made a new 
aera in planting and gardening. His first work was from the French, and published be- 
fore the Restoration ; but his great work, The Silim, was original, delivered before 
the Royal Society in 1662, and first printed in 1664. The same year his Gardener's 
Almanac was also published, and maintained its ground until Miller's Kalendar ap- 
peared. Cook assisted him in the article of planting ; Sharrock and Rea in that of 
gardening, which Cowley and Rapin ornamented with the flowers of poetry. Quintiney, 
with his followers, London and Wise, figured in gardening at the end of the same cen- 
tury : Liger, Laurence, and Bradley, at the beginning of the next ; these were followed 
by Switzer and Fairchild, who lead us to the time of Miller, in 1724. Contemporaries 
with Miller were Batty Langley and Cowell. Miller, during his long career, had no 
considerable competitor, until he approached the end of it, when several writers took 
the advantage of his unwearied labors of near half a century, and fixed themselves upon ' 
him, as various marine insects do upon a decaying shellfish. I except Hitt and Justice, 
who are both originals ; as is also Hill, after his fashion ; but his gardening is not much 
founded in experience." 

'^689. The first considerable treatise on ornamental gardening is Wheatley's, entitled 
^ Observations on Modern Gardening, and published without his name. Shenstonfe pub- 
lished his Unconnected Thoughts in 1764. There is an anonymous pamphlet on the 
Bise and Progress of the jiresent Taste of Planting Parks and Gardens, in 1767 ; and an 
Essay on Design in Gardening in 1768, by George Mason, The English Garden, a 
poem by Mason, appeared in 1772. Knight published The Landscape, a didactic poem, 
in 1794. Uepton, the same year. Sketches and Hints on Landscape Gardening. 
Marshall, a Beviciv of the Landscape ; and in 1796 he treated on ornamental gardening, 
in the second edition of his work on planting. Essays on the Picturesque, by Uvedale 
Price, Esq. in 1798. In 1803, a second magnificent work by Repton, entitle^d Ob- 
servations on the Theory and Practice of Landscape Gardening, appeared ; and another. 
Fragments on Landscape Gardening and Architecture, in 1716. Loudon's Observ- 
ations on Planting and Landscape Gardening appeared in 1804; and his Treatise on 
Country Residences in 1806." 

7690. The most usefid ivorks on gardening at the presejit time are, in horticulture, those 
of Forsyth, Nicol, and Abercrombie ; in floriculture, that of Maddock ; in arboricul- 
ture, those of Pontey and Sang ; and in landscape-gardening, those of Wheatley and 
Repton. . In the transactions of the laorticultural societies are some valuable and original 
communications on the first branches, and especially on horticulture. In enumerating 
the principal British works on gardening, including some few of those on husbandry 
and botany, naturally connected with our subject, we siiall adopt the order of the ap- 
pearance of their authors, as writers on gardening ; and when v/e can, we shall give 
short biographical notices. Those authors who have merely v/ritten articles published 
in the transactions of societies, or in public joiu-nals or magazines, are not here included, 
unless they have also written separate works. 



Book 1. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1099 



SuBSECT. 1. British 

15()2. Arnolde, Richard, an ancient English chro- 
nicler, rind haberdasher, in St. Magnus's parish, 
London ; flourished in the end of the lifteenth and 
beginning of the sixteenth century; died about 
1521. 

The Customs of London, from the time of Richard I., 
&c. commonly entitled Arnold's Chronicle, and tirst printed 
at Antwerp in l.'jO^, fol. ; reprinted alonj^ with a series of 
English chronicles. London, 4to. 1811. It is divided into 
chapters, and contains the following articles: — 

The act for trees above SiO yeres growing to pay no tyths. 
The craCte of grafTynge and plantynge and alterynge of fruyts, 
as well in colours as in taste. A treatyse of the four ele- 
mentys and four seasons, &c. and of the canyculare dayes. 
The fourme and mesur to mete land by. Percely (probably 
cress) to grow in an hour space, &c. 

1527. Anon. 

The Grete Herbal, which gyveth parfyt knowledge and 
understandyng of the boke lately printed by me Peter Tre- 
veris. 

Peter Treveris was the tirst printer in Southwark j the 
book to which he alludes was "the Grete Herbal, 1516," and 
the first or second production which issued from his press. 

1557. Tiisser, Thomas, gent., born near Witham, 
in Essex, 1515, received a liberal education at Eton 
school, and at Trinity-hall, Cambridge ; lived many 
years as a farmer in Suffolk, and afterwards removed 
to London, where he puj)lished his tiTst work in 
1557, and died in 1580. 

1. Five Hundred Points of Good Husbandry, as well for 
the Champagne and Open Country as for the Woodland. 
Lond. 1557. 4to. 

2. Another edition, entitled, Fiue Hundred Points of 
Good Husbandry, vnited to many of Good Huswifere; first 
deuised and now lately augmented, wiih diuers approved 
Lessons concerning Hopps and Gardening, &c. Lond. 1573. 
4to. 

1571. Mountain, Didytnus. 

1. The Gardener's Labyrinth ; containing a Discourse of 
the Gardener's Life, in the yearly trauels to be bestowed on 
his plot of earth, for the vse of a Garden ; with Instructions 
for the choise of Seedes, apt times for Sowing, Setting, and 
Planting, and Watering ; and the Vessels and Instrumentes 
seruing to that vse and purpose; wherein are set forth, diuers 
Herbes, Knottes, and Mazes, cunningly handled for the 
beautifying of Gardens ; also the Physike of eche Herbe, &c. 
Gathered out of the best approued Writers of Gardening, 
Husbandrie, and Physicke, &c. Lond. 1571. 4to. 

"i. The Second Part of the (Jardener's Labyrinth ; vttering 
Euche skillful experiences and worthy Secretes, about the 
particular sowing and remouing of the moste Kitchen Hearbes ; 
■with the wittie ordering of other daintie Hearbes, delectable 
Floures, pleasant Fruites, and fine Rootes, as the like hath 
not heretofore bin vttered of any ; beside the Physicke bene- ^ 
lites of each Hearbe annexed, with the conimodilie of \\'aters | 
'listilled out of them, right necessarie to be knowen. Lond. 
1577. 4to. i 

1574. Hill, Hyll, or Hyle, Thomas, a London au- 
thor of various works on Dreams, Physiognomy, 
Mysteries, an Almanac, Astronomy, Arithmetic, 
&c. ; died in the beginning of the seventeenth cen- 
tury. 

The Profitable Arte of Gardening ; lo which is added 
much necessarie matter, and a number cf secrets, with the 
Physicke helps belonging to eache hearbe, and (hat easily pre- 
pared. To this is annexed two proper Treatises, the one 
entituled the Marvailous (jovernment, Propertie, and Bene- 
fiteof Bees, with the rare Secretes of the Honnie and Waxe. 
And the other, the Yerely Coniectures mete for Husbandmen. 
To these is likewise added a Treatise of the Arte of (iraff- 
ing and Planting of Trees. Gathered by Thomas Hyll, citi- 
zen of London. Lond. 1574. 4to. 

1594. Piatt, Sir Hugh, author of various philo- 
sophical works, and apparently a lawyer. " Sir 
Hugh Piatt (says Weston) spent part of his time 
at Copt-hall in Essex, and at Bishop's-hall in Mid- 
dlesex, at each of which places he had a country- 
seat ; but his town-residence was Lincoln's Inn." 
In the Jewel House of AH and Nature, he is named 
Hugh Platte or Piatt, (for it is spelt both ways,) of 
Lincolnes Inne, gentleman. By the same book it 
appears that he then (1594) lived at Bishop's-hall, 
and that he had an estate near St. Alban's. 

He does not inform us what profession he was of, 
only that it was alien from the studies of husbandry 
and gardening. He must have had a numerous 
family, for six of his children died of the worms. 

It appears from his Garden of Eden (p. 96.), that 
he was living in the year 1606; and that he had a 
garden in St. Martin's-lane. 

1. The Jewel House of Art and Nature, contening divers 
rare and profitable Inventions, together with sundry new Ex- 
periments in the Art of Husbandry, Distillation, and mould- 
ing. Faithfully and familiarly set downe, according to the 
Author's own experience, by Hugh Platte, of Lincolnes Inne, 
gentleman. Lond. 1594. 4to. 

a. The Garden of Eden, or an accurate Description of all 
Flowers and Fruits now growing in England, with particu- 
lar RiUes how to advance their Nature and Growth, as well 
in Seeds and Hearbes, as tlie secret ordering of Trees and 
Plants. Bv that learned and great observer. Sir Hugh Piatt, 
knight. The filth edition. Lond. 16G0. i^mall 8vo 

.•5. The Second Part 'of the Garden of Eden, &c. Nevei; 
before printed. Lond. 1660. 



Works on Gardening. 

1597. Gerarde, John, a surgeon and famous her- 
balist, was born in Cheshire, 1545 ; died about 1607. 
He lived in Holborn, where he had a large botanic 
garden, one of the first attempts of the kind m 
England. , , _ 

The Herbal, or General History of Plants, gathered hy .Tobn 
Gerarde, Waster in Chirurgerie ; with cuts. Lond. 159/. tol. 

1597. Laivson, William, a practical author, who 
wrote, besides his Orchard, Tractatus de AgricuUvra 
1656. 4to. He professes to write wholly from expe- 
rioi.ce, and not to delight in curious conceits as 
planting and grafting with the roots upwards, 
inoculating roses on thorns, and such like. 

A New Orchard and (iarden ; or the best way for Plant- 
ing, Graffing, and to m.ike an\ Ground good for a rich 
Orchard: particularly in the North, and generally for the 
whole Commonwealth; with the Country Hous-wife's Gar- 
den for Herbs of common Use ; their Virtues, Seasons, Pro- 
fits, Ornaments; variety of Knots, Models for Trees, and 
Plots, for the best ordering of Grounds and Walks. As also 
the Husbandry of Bees, with their several Uses and Annoy- 
ances : all beiiig the experience of forty and eight year>' labor, 
and now the third time corrected, and much enlarged 
Whereunto is newly added, the Art of Propagating Plants, 
with the true ordering of all manner of Fiuits, in their 
Gathering, carrying Home, and Preservation. London. 4to. 
Followed by a most profitable new Treatise, from approved 
experience, of the Art of Propagating Plants. By Simon 
Harward. 
1604. Anon. 

The Fruiterer's Secrets, 4to. black letter. It contains 
some curious directions for preserving fruits and other garden- 
productions. 

1612. C B. -. 

An Old Thrift newly revived, by R. C. of Planting and 
Preserving of Timber and Fewel, by R. C. 1612. 4to. in four 
parts. 

1613. Siandish, Arthur. 

New Directions of Experience, authorised by the King's 
most excellent Majesty, as may api>ear, for the Planting of 
Timber, and Fire-wood, iScc, and how as great store of fire- 
wood may be raised from hedges as may plentifully maine- 
taine the kingdome for all purposes, without losse of grounde; 
so as within thirty yeares all spring woods may be converted 
to tillage and pasture. Lond. 1613. 4to. 

1620. Bacon, Francis, Viscount of St. Albans, a 
most distinguished philosopher, and high-chan- 
cellor of England in the reign of James I., was 
born in London 1560, and died 1626. 

Essay on Gardens, fiC. in Instauratia Magna, sive Novum 
Organum, &c., of which there are numerous editions both in 
Latin and English : orre by Shaw, with notes. Lond. 3 vols. 
4to. 1725. 

1622. Bonfeil, John. 

Instructions how to jilant and dress vines, and to make 
wine, and how to dry raisins, figs, and other fruits, and also 
olives, oranges, lemons, pomegranates, almonds, and many 
other fruits. Printed with his Treatise on the Art of making 
Silk, page 36—88. Lond. 4to. 

1623. Markha^n, Gervase, Jarvise, or Gervas, an 
English author who wrote on a great variety of 
subjects during the reigns of James I. and Charles I., 
and died about 1685. He appears, says Harte 
{Essays, ii. 32.), to be the first Englishman who de- 
serves to be called a hackney writer. All subjects 
seem to have been alike easy to him. His thefts 
were innumerable, but he has now and then stolen 
some very good things, and preserved their memory 
from perishing. 

The Country Housewife's Garden, by Gervase Markham. 
1629. Johnston, J7wwfls, M.D., a learned botanist, 
a native of Yorkshire, bred an apothecary, and es- 
tablished in that profession in London ; he made 
various botanical tours, and published the first local 
Flora, which appeared in England; died 1643. 

The Herbal ; or General History of Plants, gathered by 
John Gerarde, enlarged and amended. Lond. 1629. fol. 

1629. Parkinson, John, a celebrated herbalist and 
botanist ; born in 1567, bred an apothecary, and 
acted in that capacity and as herbalist and botanist 
to James I. and Charles I. ; died about 1640. Pro- 
fessor Martyn says his Paradisus is the first garden- 
ing book worth mentioning, and that considering 
what had been done before it, it has the greatest 
merit. 

1 . Paradisi in Sole Paradisus Terrestris ; or, a Garden of all 
sort of pleasant flowers which our English ayre will admitt 
to be noursed up : with a Kitchen Garden ot all manner of 
herbes, rootes, and fruites, for meate or sause used with us ; 
and an Orchard of all sorte of fruitbearing trees and shrubbes 
fit for our Land, together with the right orderinge, plantinjg, 
and preserving of them, and their uses, and vertues. Col- 
lected by John Parkinson, apothecary of London, 1629. fol. 
There is an engraved titlepage by Switzer, representing the 
Garden of Eden; with 109 wooden cuts of flowers arid fruits, 
and a portrait of the Author. Dedicated to the Queen. 

2. Theatrum Botanicum ; or, an Herbal of great extent. 
Lond. 1640. 2 vols. fol. 1746 pages, with many wood cuts. 

1631. Austen, Francis. 

Observations on Sir Francis Bacon s Natural History, so far 
as it concerns fruit-trees. 4to. 



1100 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



16.13. Plattcs, Gabriel, a poor man, but a useful 
tviitcr. Harte 3a3S, lie had a bold adrenturous 
cast of mind, and preferred the faulty sublime to 
faulty mediocrity. As great a genius as he was, he 
Was allovved to drop down dead in London streets 
with hunger ; nor had he a shirt upon his back when 
lie died. He bequeathed his papers to Hartlib, who 
seems to hav? published but few of them. 

1. Treatise of Husbandry, l.ond. 1633. 4to. 

, '2. Discourse ofintinite Treasure, hidden since the World's be- 
C'lnnin^', in the way ot'Husbandrv. Lond. 1639. 1655. 1056. 4to. 
Ifi-L-i). AdOn. 

1 The Countryman's Ptecreation ; or, the art of Planliiis;, 
Gratfing, and C4a"rdenin.tj, in three bookes. Lond. 1640. 4to. 
A\'ith a verfect Hlalforme of a Hop-Garden. 

2. The expert Gardener, collected out of Dutch and French 
Authors. 1610. An etlition with cuts in 16 jl. 

164j. IVcston, Sir Richard, of Sutton, in Surrey. 
He was ambassador from England to Frederick V. 
Elector Palatine and King of Bohemia, in 1619. He 
was present at the famous battle of Prague, and his 
curious relation of it in a letter is still preserved in 
Ms. It is remarked in the Philosophical Tr ansae 
Hons, that England has profited in agriculture to 
the amount of many millions in consequence of the 
Flanders husbandry liaving been made known by 
Sir R. Weston's book. 

A Discours of Hushandrie used In Brabant and Flanders ; 
shewing the wonderful improvement of land there ; and 
serring as a pattern for our practice in this Commonwealth. 
Lond. 1645. 4 to. 2i liases. 

164.'). nail, Joseph'. This author lived at Shedley, 
in Yorksliire ; an extract from his work may be 
seen in the ^^tlseu»/ liusticum. 

An Essay on Timber Trees. 

1649. Biiih or Blijthe, Walter, an officer in Crom- 
well's army, who, with other English gentlemen, 
holding commissions at tliat time, was eminently 
useful in introducing improvements into Ireland 
and Scotland. 

The English Improver Improved ; or, the Survey of Hus- 
bandry Surveyed, discovering the Improveableness of all 
Lands ; by W'a. Blith, a lover of InLronuity. I>ond. 4to. 

This is an original and incomparable v.ork for the time. 

1631. Harllih, Sayniicl, an ingenious writer on 
agriculture, and author of several theological 
tracts, was the son of a Polish merchant, and came 
to England about 1640. He was a great promoter of 
Imsbandry during the times of tlie commonwealth, 
and was much esteemed by all ingenious men in 
those days. ^lilton addre^se^to him his treatise 
on education, and Sir William Petty inscribed two 
letters to him on the same subject. Cromwell al- 
lowed him a pension of a hundred pounds a-year. 

A Designe for Plentie, by an universall Plantin;; of Fruit- 
trees ; tendered by some U'el-wishers to the Public. Lon- 
don, without date, but probably lG5,i. 4to. Published by 
Hartlib, who had the MS. from the Hon. Colonel John 
Bark,stead, lieutenant of the Tower. The author was an 
aged minister of the Gospel, at Loving-land near Yarmouth. 

16;)3. Austen, Ralph, author of several works on 
theology, all printed at Oxford, where he seems to 
have lived, and died probably about 1680. 

1. A Treatise of Fruit-Trees. ' Showing the manner of 
Grafting, Setting, Pruning, and Ordering of them in all res- 
jiects ; according to divers new and easy Rules of experience; 
fathered in the si>ace of twenty yeares. Whereby the value of 
Lands may be much improved, In a short time, by small 
cost, and little labour. Also discovering lome dangerous Er- 
rors, both in the Theorv and Practice of the Art of Plant- 
ing Fruit-trees. 'With the Alimentall and Physicall use of 
fruits. Togeatber with the Spiriluall use of "an Orchard. 
Held forth in divers Similitudes betv.eene Xaturall and Spi- 
ritual Fruit-trees ; according to Scripture and Experience. 
Bv Ra. Austen. Practiser iii the Art of Planting. Oxford, 
1655. 4to. 

1656. Tradescanf, John, a Dutchman, but tlie pe- 
riod of liis coming to England is unknown. He is 
said to have been some time in the service of Lord 
Treasurer Salisbury, and Lord Wooton. He tra- 
velled as far eastward as Russia ; was in the fleet 
that was sent against the Algerines in 1620, on 
which occasion he collected plants in Barbary and 
the isles of tlie IMeditcrranean. About 1629 he ob- 
tained the title of gardener to Charles I. When he 
founded his garden at Lambeth is not exactly 
known ; but there he collected the first considerable 
collection of natural history ever formed in this 
country. His museum was called Tradescant's Ark, 
and was rnucli frequented by the groat. He had a 
son of the same name, who took a voyage to "\"irginia, 
and brought home many new plants. Tradescant's 
sniderwort and aster aVe among the ninnber of 
l)lants introduced by them. In what year the elder 
Tradescant died is uncertain, but he was an old man 
when his book was published. The son inherited the 
museum, and bequeathed it by a deed of gift to Elias 
Ashmole, Esq., who lodged in Trade-scant's house. 
It afterwards became part of the Ashmolean mu- 
scum, and ih? liauic of Tradescant was unjustly sunk 



in that of Ashmole. John, the son, died in 1662 : 
his widow contested the will, and upon losing her 
cause, it is said she drowned herself A curious ac- 
count of the remains of the Lambeth garden, drawn 
up in the year 1749 by Sir W. Watson, is printed in 
the 46th vol. of the Philosophical Transactions ; and 
of the family monument erected by Mrs< Ashmole, in 
the 63d vol. of that work. 
Catalogue of the plants in his garden. 

1657. Beale, John, a Herefordshire gentleman. 

1. -A Treatise on Fruit Trees, shewing their Ulanner of 
Grafting, Pruning, and Ordering : Of Cider and Perry : Of 
Vineyards in England, 6:c. Oxf. 1653, 1657, 4to. 16G5, l^mo, 

'I. 'The Hereford Orchards ; a pattern for the whole of Eng- 
land. Lond. 1657, l2mo. Svo. 

3. Observations on some parts of Bacon's Xatural History, as 
it concerns Fruit Trees, Fruits, and Flowers. Oxf. 165S. 4to. 
Printed along with the work entitled, A Treatise on Fruit 
Trees, 1665. 12mo. 

4. Geneial Advertisement concerning Cider. — Letters about 
Improvement of Nurseries, Orchards, &c. Lond. 1677. 4to. 

1658. Browne, Sir Thomas, M.D., an eminent phy- 
sician and antiquary, was born in London, 1605, 
died 1682. 

1. Hydriotaphia ; or, a Discourse of Sepulchral Urns lately 
found in Norfolk ; together with the Garden of Cyrus, or the 
Quincuncial Lozenage, or Net-work Plantation of the An- 
cients, artihciallv, naturally, and mystically considered. Lond. 
1658. Svo. 

'I. Certain Miscellany Tracts in Scripture, of Gardens. 
Lond. 16S4. Svo. 

1658. Evelyn, John, F. R. S., an eminent natural 
philosopher and patriot, was born at Wotton, in 
Surrey, the seat of his father, Richard Evelyn, Esq. j 
the 31st of October, 1620 : after he had finished his 
education at Oxford, liis philosophic turn of mind 
induced him to tjuit his native country, rather than 
engage in the civil war then breaking out, and in 
1644, he set out to make the tour of Europe. He 
wrote on a variety of subjects, philosophical, politi- 
cal, and literary, and died on the 27th of February 
1705-6, in the 86th j-ear of his age, and was interred 
at Wotton. 

In 1S19, Memoii-5 of .T. Evelyn, Esq., including liis Diarv, 
were published by AVilliam Bray (in 2 vols. 4to.), a very interest- 
ing book, as affording a faithful picture of the limes in which 
he lifed, and a good idea of the gardens on the continent at the 
time he travelled, and those of England at the end of the 17th 

1. The French Gardener, instructing how to cultivate all 
sorts of Fruit-Trees and Kerbs for the (jarden ; togather with 
directions to dry and conserve them in their natural state. 
Loud. 1658, Svo. ; 

2. Fumifugium ; or, the Inconvenience of the -\ir and Smoke 
of London dissipated ; together with some Remedies humbly 

J>ropased. Lond. 1661. IJmo. This work was addressed to 
lis Majesty King Charles II., and published by his express 
command. The author proposes the removal of such trades as 
require great Hres, live or six miles out of London, towards 
Greenwich ; also of slaughter-houses and chandlers ; and to 
plant fragrant nurseries and gardens in the low grounds near 
the city. The lime-trees in St. James's Park were planted in 
consequence of tliis suggestion. 

3. Sylva ; or, a Discourse of Forest-Trees, and the Propaga- 
tion of Timber in His ;\Iajesty's Dominions. To which is an- 
nexed, Pomona ; or, an .-Vppendix conceniing Fruit Trees in 
relation to Cider, the making and several ways of ordering it. 
Lond. 16G4. fol. Dr. Hunter, of New York, published an ele- 
gant edition, with cojiious Notes and Engravings, in 1776, 
2 vols. 4to. 

4. Kalendarium Hortense ; or, the Gardener's Almanac, di- 
recting what he is to do monthly throughout the year, and 
what Fruits and Flowers are in their prime. Lond. 1664. Svo. 

5. Terra ; a Philosophical Discourse of Earth, relating to the 
Culture and Improvement of it for vegetation and the propa- 
gation of Plants, as it was presented to the Koval Society, 
April 23. 1675. Lond. 1675. fol. 

6. Pomona; a Discourse conceriiing Cider. Lond. 1679. fol. 

7. Monsieur de la Quintinye's Treatise of Orange-Trees, with 
the raising of Melons, omitted in the French editions, made 
English bv J. E. Lond. 1698. 

S. Acet'aria; or, a Discourse of SalleU- Lond. 1699. Sto. 

1660. Shan-ock, Robert, LL. D., prebendary of 
"Winchester, born in Buckinghamshire in the i7th 
century, author of various judicial and theological 
works ; died 1634. 

1. The History of the Propagation and Improvement ofA'e- 
getables by the concurrence of Art and Nature. Written ac 
cording to Observations made from Experience and Practice. 
Oxford, 1660. Svo. 

2. Improvements to the Art of Gardening; or, an exact 
Treatise of Plants. Lond. 1694. fol. 

1662. Cowley, Abraham, an eminent English poet, 
was born in London 1618 ; began to write poems at 
the age of fifteen ; lived in terms of intimacy with 
Evelyn and other eminent men of his time ; went to 
court ; but at last, Spence informs us, he grew sick 
of going there, " took a house first at Batterspa and 
then at Chertsey, always farther and farther from 
town, where he'died in" 1667. His death. Pope ob- 
serves, was owing to a mere accident. He went 
with Dean Sprat, who afterwards published his life 
and writings, to dine at a neiglibor's house, who ac- 
cording to the fashion of the timps, made them too 
welcome. They did not set out for their walk home 
till it was late, an.d had drank so dccj) that they lay 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1101 



out in the fields all night. This gave Cowley the 
fever, which carried him off." He disliked women, 
and was fond of retirement in idea, and pants after 
it in his poems ; but, according to Dr. Johnson, was 
xnihappy when he had attained his wishes. 

Flantanim Herborum, Florum, et Svlvaruni, Lond. 16C2. 
Svo. 

1664. Blake, Stephen. 

The com|)lete (Jarclener's Practice, 4to. Lond. 
ICm. Hughes, William. 

1. The Coiiiiilete Vineyard; or, an excellent way for the 
planting of \'ines, and ordering of ^V■ines and Wine-^i'tsses, 
according to the Geinian and French manner. Lond. 1G70. 
Svo. 

. 2. The American Phvsician, or a Treatise of the Roots, 
Plants, Trees, Src, gro^i ing in the English Plantations ; with 
a Discourse on the Cocoa Tree, and the ways of making 
Chocolate. Lond. 1672. 12mo. 

3. The Flower Garden ; how most Flowers are ordered, 
increased, &c. Lond. 1672. 12mo. 

Ififw. Rea, Joh>i, gent. He seems to have been a 
professional gardener, and to have given plans for 
laying out grounds. 

Flora, or a comvlote Florilege, furnished with all requisites 
belonging to a Florist. Lond. 166.3. fol. with cuts. 

1666. Beale, Dr. John, an ingenious English divine 
and philosopher, was born in Herefordshire, 1603, 
.died 1683. 

1. Experiments and Observations on \"egetation and tlie 
Runningof the Sap, &c. {PhU.rrmis.\m<i. Abr. i, )i. oOl.) 

2. The Connection of certain Parts of the Tree with tho^e 
of the Fruit. (lb. 1669. p. 554.) 

5. Remarks on the \'inetum Britannicum. 

4. Agreslick Observations and Advertisements. 

1666. Rose, John, gardener to Charles II. at St. 
James's. 

The English A'ineyard vindicatedj and the wav of making 
wine in France. Lond. 12mo. 16W. Svo. first printed 
with Evelyn's French Gardener, in 1G90. 

1668. Worlidge, John, gent. 

1. Svstema Agriculrura? ; the Jlvsterv of Husbandrv dis- 
.covcred. By J. M'. (John WorliJge) gent. Lond. 1668. "fol. 

2. The Art of Gardening. Lor.d. 1700. Svo. 

1672. Drope, Francis, B. D., a native of Cumner 
in Berkshire, where his father v.-as vicar, and his 
brother a physician. Francis died at Oxford, and 
this work was published after his death by his 
brother, and dedicated to Lord 'Windham, who is 
stated to have a fine orchard at Brackley. 

A short and sure Guide to the Practice of Raising and 
•Ordering of Fruit Trees. Oxford, 12rao. 

1675. Cotton, Charles, Esq., an Knglish poet, born 
in Staffordshire in 1630; author of a number of po- 
litical works, memoirs, poems, &c., and editor of 
Walton's Angler; died 1(>87. 

The Planter's l^fanual of Raising, Planting, and Cultivat- 
ing all Sorts of Fruit Trees. Loiidi Svo. 

1676. Cooke, Moses, gardener to the Earl of Essex 
at Cashiobury. Evelyn in his D/ftrz/ mentions him 
as a skilful artist in the mechanical part of garden- 
ing, not ignorant in mathematics, and with some 
pretensions to astrology. He afterwards became a 
partner witli Eucre, Field, and London, in the 
irompton Park Nursery. 

1. The Manner of Raising, Ordering, and Improving 
Forest Trees. Bv IMoses Cooke, Lond. 4to. 

2. The Art of making Cider, published inEvel\-n's works. 

1677. Lawrence, Anthony. 

Nurseries, Orchards, Profitable Gardens, and \'ineyards en- 
couraged. Lond. 4to. 

1681. Langford, T. 

1. Plain ar.cf full instraotions to raise all Sorts of Fruit 
Trees that prosper in England ; with Directions for making 
Liquors of several Sorts of Fruit. Lond. 1681. Svo. 

2. The Practical Planter of Fruit Tiees. Lond. 16S1. Svo. 

5. Systemae Agriculturae ; being th3 aiystery of Husbandry 
discovered. Lond. 1681. foi. 

1682. Meager, Leonard. 

1. English Gardener; or, a Sure Guide to Young Planters 
and Gardeners. Lond. 1685. Svo. 

2. Xew Art of Gardening; with the Gardener's Almanack. 
J^nd. 1697. Svo. 

3. The mystery of Husbandry. I^nd. 1699. 12mo. 

' 1683. (jilbert, Samuel, author of Fons Sanitati^ ; 
or, the Healing Spring at Willowbridge in Stafford- 
shire. ■: 

1. The Florist's Vadeitccum. Lond. 12mo. 

2. The (iardener's Almanack. By Sam. Gilbert, Philercmus. 
In this small book is a particular description of the Roses 
cultivated in the English gardens at that period, and very 
accurately described. 

1683. Read, John, gardener to Sir George Mac- 
kenzie of Rosehaugh in Aberdeenshire, one of the 
earliest Scotch gardening authors. 

The Scots Gardener ; whereunto is annexed, tlie Gardener's 
Kalendar. Edin. 16S5, 4to. 

1684. Bohart, Jacob, curator of the botanic garden 
at Oxford. 

Effects of the Great Frost on Trees and other Plants. (P/d/. 
Trans. 1684. Abr. iii. page 89.) 

1685. Temple, Sir William, a statesman of de- 
served eminence, and a iniscellaneous writer, was 
Jaorn in London in 1628. He was ambassador for 
many years at the court of Holland, and there ac- 



I quired his knowledge and taste in gardening. He 
introduced some good sortsof grapes and other fruits, 

' and one variety of nectarine still boars his name ; he 
had an excellent walled garden at Sheen in Surrey, 
in which his contemporary Evelyn says his trees were 
most exactly trained. He had another seat at Moor 
Park near Farnham in Surrey, where lie died in 
1698, and his heart, by his desire, was buried in a 
silver urn under a sundial in the garden. He was 
warmly attached to gardening and retired leisure, 
and declares one of the greatest pleasures in life to 
be " such a degree of liberty, as to be able to walk 
at one's own pace, and one's own way." 

Upon the Gardens of Epicurus ; or, of Gardening in the year 
16S.3. (In his works, vol. i. Miscellanea.) 
1685. Anon. 

The Complete Planter and Ciderist Svo. 
1691. Gibson, J. 

A short Account of several Gardens near London, as viewed in 
1691. [Archxolo^ia Brilann!ca, vo].-xu. p. 181.) 

1699. Facio, Nicholas, of Duilhier, F.R.S., a ma- 
thematician, was born in Switzerland in 1664. He 
studied at Geneva, after which he settled at Utrecht 
as a tutor, but was there suspected of Spinosism. In 
1687 he came to England, where he taught mathe- 
matics, was tutor to the Marquis of Tavistock, and 
had a patent for jewel-watches ; but when the 
French prophets made their appearance, he joined 
them in all their extravagancies, for which he stood 
in the pillory in 1707. He died at Worcester in 1753, 
Some of his papers are in the British Sluseum. 

Fruit "Walls imiiroved bv inclining them to the Horizon ; or 
a "Way to build Walls for "Fruit Trees, whereby they may re- 
ceive "more Sunshine and Heat than ordinary. By a Jlember 
of tiie Rcya! Society. Lond. 4to. ^\'ith l^lates by Gribehn. 

This is "a very ingenious and scientitic work, in which the 
advantages of receiving the sun's rays at right angles are ma- 
thematically and optically demonstrated. 

1699. London and Wise, nurserymen and garden- 
architects, and the most eminent in tlieir line at 
the end of the seventeenth and beginning of the 
eighteenth century. George London was appren- 
tice to Rose, the royal gardener, and sent by him to 
France to study the beauties of Versailles. On his 
return he was made head gardener to Dr. Compton, 
Bishop of London, and at the beginning of the 
revolution, superintendant of the royal gardens, 
at a salary of 200/. a-year, and page of the back- 
stairs to Queen Mary. Of Wise little is known, 
excepting that he laid out grounds ; and in parti- 
cular Blenheim. Switzer says, London was a inan 
of singular activity; and when on a tour of the 
places at which he' had concern, used to ride, at an 
average, sixty miles a-day, which at last brought on 
a fever, that occasioned" his decease after a fort- 
night's illness, in 1717. 

'Lhe Complete Gardener: or Directions for Cultivating and 
right Ordering of Fruit Gardens and Kitchen Gardens. \\'ith 
the Gardener^s Kalender^ directing what is to be done every 
Month in the Year. By Monsieur la Quintiney. Now 
compendiously abridged, and made of more 'use ; with very 
considerable Improvements. By George London, and Henry 
AV ise. To whicFi is prefixed, an Address to the Nobilitv and 
Gentry. By J. Evelyn, Esq. Lond. 1717. Svo. 

1704. Anon. 

Dictionarium Rustii'um ; or, a Dictionai-y of Husbandrv, 
Gardening, Trade, and Commerce. 2 vols. Svo. with Cuts. 

1706. Gcntil. 

Solitary or Carthusian Gardener ; being Dialogues between 
a Gentleman and Gardener. Lond. Svo. Most probably a 
translation from the French. 

' 1707. Fleetwood, Williain, successively Bishop of 
St. Asaph and Ely. and much admired as a popular 
preacher, was born in London in 165o", jjublished a 
great number of sermons, and other works, and died 
in 1723, 

Curiosities of Nature and Art in Husbandry and Garden- 
ing. Lond. Svo. 

1707. Mortii7ier, John, author of some tracts on 
religious education. His works on husbandry were 
translated into Swedish, and published in Stockholm 
in 1727. 

The whole Art of Husbandry, in the way of managing and 
improving of Land. 

1712, Addison, Joseph, was born at Milston in 
Wiltshire, 1672, educated at Salisbury, Litchfield, 
and Oxford ; he addi-essed some verses to Dryden 
at the age of twenty-two ; obtained a jiension of 
SCO/, a-year in 1699; travelled on the continent for 
three years ; returned and assisted Steele in the 
Tatler RX\A Spectator; married the Countcss-Dow.- 
agcr of Warwick in 1716; became secretary of 
state ; resigned on a pension of 1500/. a-year, and 
died in 1719 at Holland House, Kensington, leaving 
only one daughter, who died unmarried in 1797. 

1. On the Causes of the Pleasures of the Iniiigination, 
arising from the Works of Nature, and their Supei-io.iiy over 
those of Art. (Pidilished in the Spectator, No. 114.) 

2. Description of a Garden in tlifi Natural Style. Ubid. 
No. 477.) 



no2 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Paut IV. 



r/14. Law}t'nce, or Laurence, John, M. A., an 
eminent naturalist, admitted of Clare-ball, Cam- 
bridge, B. A., 1088; presented to the rectory of Yel- 
vertoft in Northamptonshire, in 1703 ; where in three 
years he improved a garden of thirty-two yards 
squ:ire, the soil a wet white clay, so that it pro- 
duced some of thQ choicest fruits. In 1721 he was 
presented to the rectory of Bishops Wearmouth, 
county of Durham, where he died in 1732. He is 
dtwcribed as of a hospitable and benevolent disposi- 
tion, and taking great pleasure in presenting a rich 
dessert of fruit to his friends. He was fond of gar- 
dening, and considered it as a recreation particu- 
larly suitable for a clergyman. " The most v.-hole- 
some kind of exercise, being ad ruhorem, non ad 
sudorem ; such an exercise as studious men require ; 
less violent than the sports of the field, and more so 
than lisliing; in fine, the happy medium." 

The Clergyman's Recreation : shewing the Pleasure and 
TroKt of the Art of Gardening. Lond. fol. 

1715. Snow, T , author of Apopiroscopy. 

Arts, Iinprovenr<ents : or Experiments in Building, Agri- 
culture, Gardening, &c. Lend. 8vo. 

1715. Switzer, Stephen, a seedsman and artist-gar- 
dener. To bo addressed " At the Flower-pot over 
against the Court of Common Pleas in Westminster 
Hall ; or at his garden in Millbank, Westminster." 
He is said to have been brouglit up under London 
and Wise. He appears to iiave been well educated 
fot the time in whicli he lived, and it is remarkable 
that so little is known of his history. He died in 17-15. 

1. Jchnogrr>phia ; or the Nobleman, Gentleman, and Gar- 
dener's Recreation: Directions lor ihe Cieneral Distribution of 
a Country seat into rural and extensive G.irdens, Parks, Pad- 
docks, &c. with a gener.il System of Agriculture, illustrated 
with a great variety of Copperplates, from the Author's 
Drawings. Lond. 1718. 3 vols. Svo. 

2. The Practical Fruit Gardener. Lond. 1'724. Svo. 

5. Compendious Method of raising Ivitchen Vegetables. 
Lond. 1729. Svo. 

4. An Introduction to a General System of Hydrostatics and 
Hydraulics. Lond. 1729. 2 vols. 4to. 

0. Dissertation on the true Cytisus of the Ancients. Lond. 
1731. Svo. 

6. Universal System of Water and Water-works, Philoso- 
phical and Praclicjil; with Cuts. 1730. 2 vols. 4to. The 
Third Edition, made very perfect and complete, especially 
that part which relates to the burning of clay. 

1716. Bradley, Richard, F.R.S., a popular writer 
of very considerable talent and indefatigable indus- 
try, author of various treatises in natural history, 
husbandry, &c. and Professor of Botany at Cam- 
bridge. According to Professor Martyn, " he was 
chosen into that office November the 10th, 1724, by 
means of a pretended verbal recommendation from 
Dr. Sherard to Dr. Bentley, and pompous assurances 
that he would procure the university a public bo- 
tanic garden by his own private purse and personal 
interest. The vanity of his promises was soon seen, 
and his total ignorance of the learned languages 
known. In 1731 it was in agitation to turn him out 
of his professorship ; and he died in the latter end 
of 1732. It may seem strange to assert, that the 
translator of Xenophon's QLconamicks did not un- 
derstand Greek j it is, however, true. Mr. Brad- 
ley's being then a popular name, he was paid by the 
booksellers for permitting them to insert it in the 
title " He first made himself known to the public 
in 1713, by two papers, printed in the twenty-ninth 
volume of the Philosophical Transactions ; one On 
the Motion of the Sap in Vegetables ; the other. 
Microscopical Observations on Vegetation, and 
on the quick Growth of Mouldiness on Melons. 
From this time to his deatli he published two 
volumes in folio, four in quarto, and nearly twenty 
in octavo, on gardening, botany, and agriculture, 
besides other publications on natural history and 
the arts. Though Bradley's writings do not abound 
in new discoveries, yet they are not destitute of in- 
teresting knowledge, collected from contemporary 
gardeners and from books. He was an advocate 
for the circulation of the sap, and made several new 
observations on the sexes of plants, in consequence 
of the production of hybrid species, by which he 
added strength to that doctrine. He wrote instruct- 
ively on the germs of trees, on bulbs, on grafting, 
and particularly on the methotls of producing varie- 
gated and double flowers ; and, on the whole, his 
writings, coinciding with the growing taste for gar- 
dening, the introduction of exotics, and improve- 
ments in husbandry, contributed to excite a more 
philosophical view of these arts, and diffuse a gene- 
ral and popular knowledge of them throughout the 
kingdom. 

1. The History of Succulent Plants, with their Descrip- 
tions and Manner of Culture, In five Decads. 1716. 

2. New Improvement of Planting and (lardening, both 
Philosophical and Practical, 1717. Svo. 



I 3. A new Improvement of Plantii^g and Gardening, lioth 
I'liiloi-ophiral and I'rac-ioal, expli;ini:)g the iUolion of the 
Sap, and General ion of Plants; with oilier Discoveries never 
botuie n;ade Public; for the Jm)irovenient of Forest-'Prees, 
Floiver-G.uder.s, or Parleires ; v. ith n iS'ew Invention, 
whereby mure Designs of Garden Plats may be made in one 
Hour, ilian can be found in all the books nov/ extant. Lite- 
w ise several rare Secrets for the Imiirovement of Fruit Trees, 
Kitchen Gardens, and Groen-hou-e Plants. To which ia 
now added, the Gentleman's and Gardener's Calendar. The 
whole illu-lrated with Copiier Plates. 1720. 

4. A Philosophical Account of the Works of Nature ; en. 
deavouring to set forth the several Gradations remarkable in 
the IMineral, N'egetable, and Animal Paris of the Creation, 
tending to the Composition of a Scale of Life. To Avhich is 
added, an Account of ihe State of Gardening, as it is now in 
Great Britain and other Parts of Europe, together with 
several Xcw Experiments relating to the Improvement of 
Barren Ground, and the propagating of Timber trees. Fruit- 
trees, &c. With many cmiousCuts. 1721. 4to. 

5. A Treatise on Husb.mdiy and Gardening. 1721. Svo. 

6. The Monthly Register of iSew Experiments and Observ- 
ations in Husbandry and Gardening ; made for the months of 
April and .Aiay 1722; wherein is explained; 1. The Method 
of bringing Herbs, Flowers, and Fruits, to Perfection in the 
Winter; with an Account of a new invented wall, to forward 
the ripening of Fruit, &c. 2. An Account of transplanting 
Forest-Trees and Fruit-Trees, of any bigness, in the Summer 
season ; so that gentlemen may make complete Plantations in 
a few days, as eiiectually as if they had been growing for 
many years. Also a Ne'w Method for the Imjirovement of 
Tulips. The second edition ; to which is added, 3. An An- 
swer to some Objeclions lately made against the Circulation 
of the Sap, mentioned in the Chapter of the Improvement of 
Tulips. 1725. Svo. 

7. A General Treatise of Husbandry and Gardening, con- 
taining such Observations and Experiments as are new and 
useful for the Improvement of Land; with an Account of 
such extraordinary Inventions and Natural Productions as 
may help the Ingenious in their Studies, and promote uni. 
versal learning. With variety of curious Cuts, Svo. 1723. 
Dedicated to Sir Nicholas Carew, of Btddington, Surrey, 
Bart., " whose delightful gardens would alone'be enough to 
draw upon him the admiration of that part of mankind who 
study the pleasures and tranquUity of life ;" and whose " won- 
derful orange-trees, first mat"? familar to an English climate 
by his noble ancestors, and the agreeable structure raised for 
their preservation," are honorably noticed. The third and 
last part (for August, September, and the remaining part of 
the second year,) is inscribed to the Earl of Burlington, 
" whose palaces and gardens give an example of his distin- 
puishing genius;" and has in it, among many other interest- 
mg articles, " Observations concerning Vineyards and their 
Produce, with some Account of the Vineyard near Bath." 
This celebrated vineyard, it is stated, contains six acres of 
ground; and in 1718 produced 6fi hogsheads of wine, which 
was then worth 660/. We are told, also, that in 1722, there 
were still superior vines at Mr. Fairchild's at Hoxton, and at 
Mr. Warner's at Rotherhithe. 

8. A Philosophical Treatise of Agriculture ; or, a New 
Method of cultivating and increasing all sorts of Trees, 
Shrubs, and Flowers ; being a very curious work, enriched 
with useful Secrets in Nature, for helping the Vegetation of 
all Sorts of Trees and Plants ; and for fertilising the most 
stubborn Soils. By G. A. Agricola, M. D. and Doctor of Phi- 
losophy at Rattisbonne. Translated from the German, with 
Remarks. Adorned with Cuts. The whole revised and 
compared with the Original ; together with a Preface con- 
firming this new Method. 1723. 

9. lamily Dictionary, containing the most approved Me- 
thods for improving Estates and Gardens. 1726. 2 vols. fol. 

10. Practical Discourses concerning the Four Elements, at 
they relate to the Growth of Plants. 1727. 4to. 

11. Botanical Dictionary, for the Use of the Curious in 
Husbandry and Gardening. 1728. 2 vols. This was, it is be- 
lieved, the first attempt of the kind in England. 

12. The Vineyard ; being a Treatise showing, 1, The 
Nature and Method of Planting, Manuring, Cultivating, and 
Directing of Vines ; 2. Proper Directions for Drawing, Pressing, 
Making, Keeping, Fining, and Curing all Defects in the ^Vine ; 
3. An Easy and Familiar Method of Planting and Raising 
Vines to the greatest Perfection ; illustrated with several 
useful Examples. ^1728. Svo. 

13. The Gentleman and Gardener's Kalendar, directing 
what is necessary to be done in every Month in the Year, in 
the Kitchen Garden, Fruit Garden, and Nursery ; Manage- 
ment of Forest Trees, Green Houses, and Flower Garden, 
with Directions for the making and ordering Hop Grounds. 

14. A General Treatise of Husbandry and Gardening; 
containing a new System of Vegetation ; illustrated with 
many Observations and Experiments, formerly published 
Monthly, and now methodised and digested under proper 
Heads, with Additions, and Alterations; in Four Parts. 
2 vols. Svo. 

1716. Stevenson, the Rev. Henry, of East Retford, 
Nottinghamshire. 

1. The Young Gardener's Director. Lond. 12mo. 

2. The Gentleman Gardener Instructed. 8th edition. Lond. 
1769. 12mo. 

1717. Collins, Samuel, Esq., of Archerton in North- 
amptonshire. 

Paradise Retrieved ; demonstrating the most beneficial 
Method of managing Fruit-Trees, with a Treatise on Melons 
and Cucumbers. Lond. 1717. Svo. 
1717. Evelyn, Charles, Esq. son of John Evelyn. 

The Lady's Recreation; or the 'Third and Last Part of the 
Art of Gardening improved. Lond. 1717. Svo. 

1722. Fairchild, Thomas, commercial gardener at 
Hoxton, where he had an excellent vineyard, and 
was one of the principal nurserymen and florists of 
his time. He first made himself known by a paper 
in the Royal Society's Transactions (vol. xxxiii. 
p. 127.), on the '* different and sometimes contrary 
motion of the 6ap in plants," and assisted in expe- 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



110? 



riments on vegetable sexuality. He dietl in 1729, 
and left funds for a botanical-sermon, whicli is deli- 
vered annually on Whitsun Tuesday, at St. Leon- 
ard's Shoreditch ; it was preached for many years 
by Dr. Colin Milne, by whom it was published in 
1779, and has since been continued by the Rev. Mr. 
Ellis, of Merchant Taylors' school, who receives 
three guineas out of the funds left by Fairchild for 
each sermon. 

Tt»e City Gardener; containing the Jlethod of Cultivating 
sucli Plants as will be Ornamental, and thrive best in the 
London Gardens. 1722. 8vo. 

1724. Miller, Philip, F.R.S., a celebrated botanist 
and gardener, author of the Gardene> ''s Dictionary, 
and of several other works, was born 1692. His 
father, according to Professor Martyn, " was gar- 
dener to the Company of Apothecaries, and he suc- 
ceeded his father in that office in 1722." We have 
been informed, however, by Watts, a nurseryman 
at Acton, one of the few surviving gardeners who 
worked under him, that Miller's father was a rnar- 
ket-gardener, somewhere about Deptford or Green- 
wich, and that Miller himself was a commercial 
florist, and had a small garden near the situation of 
the present King's Bench Prison in Surrey. He 
was considered an ingenious florist, and was selected 
by the apothecaries as their gardener, on the per- 
petual grant of the garden-ground by Sir Hans 
Sloane in 1722 It appears also from Field's History 
of the Chelsea Garden (pub. 1821) that there is no 
evidence that Miller succeeded his father. Miller 
*' raised himself, by his merit, from a state of obscu- 
rity, to a degree of eminence, rarely, if ever before 
equalled, in the character of a gardener. He added 
to his knowledge of the theory and practice of gar- 
dening, that of the structure and characters of 
plants, and was practically versed in the methods of 
Ray, Touniefort, and Linnaeus. He adopted the 
system of tlie latter in the seventh edition of his 
work with great reluctance ; but was convinced at 
length by the arguments of Sir W. W^atson and W. 
Hudson. He maintained a correspondence with 
the most eminent botanists on the continent ; among 
others, with Linnjeus, who said his Dictionary was 
not merely one of gardening, but of botany. 'Non 
crat Lexicon Hortulanorum, sed Botanicorum. By 
other foreigners he was emphatically styled Hortu- 
lanorum Princeps, the ' Prince of Gardeners.' To 
his superior skill the curious owe the culture and 
preservation of many fine plants, which would 
otherwise have been lost." His infirmity, Professor 
Martyn continues, " induced him to resign his office 
a little time before his decease, which took place in 
1771, in his eightieth year." He was consulted by 
gentlemen on the subject of planting and laying out 
grounds, and particularly by the Dukes of Bedford, 
Northumberland, and Richmond. He had many 
pupils, among whom were the late Mr. Forsyth 
and W. Alton. John Ellis, who seems to have had 
some pique at Miller, says, he was turned out of tlw 
garden for his obstinacy and impertinence to the 
apothecaries, but his salary continued. His vanity, 
he says, was so raised by his voluminous publica- 
tions, that he considered no man to know anything 
but himself ; " though Gordon, Alton, and Lee, 
have been long infinitely superior to him in the 
nicer and more delicate parts of gardening." Ac- 
cording to Field's tract, he gave in his resignation 
in consequence of some altercation or misunder- 
standing with his employers. This happened in 
1769, when he removed to a house close by that 
part of the Chelsea churchyard where he was 
buried, and near which an obelisk was erected to 
his memory by the Horticultural Society in 1810. 
He was succeeded by the late W. Forsyth, F.A.S. 

1. The (lardener's and Florist's Dictionary, or a complete 
System of Horticulture. 2 vols. Svo. Lond. 

This work was recommended by the most famous garden- 
ers and nurserymen of that time ; by Thomas Fairchild at 
Hoxton, Robert Furber at Kensington, Robert Smith at 
Vauxhall, Samuel Driver at Lamlieth, Moses James at Stand- 
gate, Obadiah Low at Battersea, Christoijher Gray at Fulham, 
Benjamin Whitmill at Hoxton, Francis Hunt at Putney, 
and William Gray junior at Fulham. Weston says, these 

Sersons Avere united in a society for the improvement of gar- 
ening; that Miller acted as their secretary; and that this 
work was in some degree the produce of their joint efforts. 

2. Seven years after this Miller published his Gardener's 
Dictionary in folio. This is commonly regarded as the first 
edition, and is entitled " The Gardener's Dictionary ; con- 
tains 'he Methods of cultivating and improving the Kitchen, 
Fruit, and Flower Garden. As also, the Physic Garden, 
Wilderness, Conservatory, and Vineyard, according to the 
Practice of the most experienced Gardeners of the present 
age. Interspersed with the History of the Plants, the Cha- 
racters of each Genu.4, and the Names of all the particular 
.Species, in Latin and English ; and an Explanation of all 
tlie Terms used in Botany and Gardening. Together with 



Accounts of the Nature and Use of Barometers, Thermo- 
meters, and Hygrometers proper for (iardeners ; and of the 
Origin, Causes, and Nature of the Meteors, and the particu. 
lar Influences of Air, Earth, Fire, and Water upon Vegeta- 
tion, according to the best natural Philosophers. Adorned 
with Copper Plates. By Philij) Miller, Gardener to the 
Botanic Garden at Chelsea, and F.R.S. 

The seventh edition is entitled, " The Gardener's Dic- 
tionary : containing the best and newest Methods of culti- 
vating and improving the Kitchen, Fruit, Flower Garden, 
and Nursery. As also for performing the practical Parts of 
Agriculture: including the Management of Vineyards, with 
the Methods of Making and Preserving the Wine, accordmg 
to the present Practice of the most skilful Vignerons in the 
several Wine Countries in Europe. Together with Directions 
for Propagating and Improving, ftom real Practice and Ex- 
perience, all Sorts of Timber Trees. 

The ninth or Professor Martyn's edition, is distinguished 
by the arrangement of the matter, and the completeness ot 
the enumeration of sj ecies ; all being included which are to 
be found in the fourteenth edition of Linnaeus's Sfjstemu Vege 
tabilium, with the exception of the minute tribes of mosses, 
algae, or seaweeds, and fungi or mushrooms; of which tha 
generic characters are commonly given, together with such 
species as are used in food, or in any of the arts. In all the 
former editions of the dictionary, the culture was generally 
mixed with the descriptions of the species, and was frequently 
repeated several times under the same genus, but here tha 
scientific, popular and practical t)arts being kept separate 
they may each be consulted with facility ; and what was be" 
fore confused, now becomes distinct and obvious. 

This laborious work. Professor Martyn observes, is the re- 
sult of the unwearied application of what talents he possesses, 
and time he could spare from the duties of liis profession 
during twenty years ; no attention or industry has been want, 
ing on his part ; and he has strained every nerve to render it 
as complete in its kind as the nature of so extensive an under 
taking will allow. 

3. - On a Method of Pvaising some Exotic Seeds. (Phil. Trant. 
Abr. vii. 250. 1728.) 

4. On the early Flowering of Tulips, and other Bulboiu 
Plants, when placed in Bottles filled with Water. (lb. 467.) 

1726. . miitmill, Benedict. 

The (iardener's Universal Calendar. Lond, Svo. 

1727. / .S . 

The Vineyard ; being a Treatise, showing the Mimner of 
Planting and cultivating Vines, in Foreign Parts ; Directions 
for making Wines : Method of Planting Vines in England. 
New Experiments in Grafting and Inoculating all Sorts of 
Fruits ; the best Method of raising several Sorts of compounded 
Fruits. Svo 

1728. Castel, Robert, a London architect and an- 
tiquary. 

The villas of the ancients, illustrated with outs. Lond. fol. 

1728. Langley, Batty, an architect of houses and 
gardens ; born 1696, at Twickenham, where he 
resided j author of several architectural works. 

1. Practical Geometry, applied to the Arts of Building, 
Surveying, Gardening, and Mensuration. Lond. 1726., 

2. The Sure Method of Improving an Estate by Plantations 
of Oak, Elrh, Ash, Birch, and other Timber Trees. Lond. 

1728. 4to. 

3. Pomona, or the Fruit Garden Illustrated : being the sure 
Method of Preserving the best Kinds of Fruit ; with Direc- 
tions for Pruning, Nailing, Thinning, &c. With Cuts. Lond. 

1729. fol. 

4. New Principles of Gardening ; or, the Laying out Pastures, 
Groves, Wildernesses, Labyrinths, Avenues, Parks, &c. 

1729. Cowel, John, gardener at Hoxton. 

1. Account of the Olive in Blossom, Torch Thistle, and 
Glastonbury Thorn. Lond. Svo. 

2. Curious and Profitable Gardener, containing the newest 
Methods for improving Land by Grain or Seed, also a Descrip- 
tion of his Great Aloe, and other exotics, with his Manner of 
preserving them in Winter. Svo. 

1729. Triewald, Martin, Director of Mechanics, 
Sweden, author of some papers in the transactions 
of the Royal Society. An account of tulips and such 
bulbous plants, blowing much sooner when their 
bulbs are placed upon bottles filled with water, than 
when planted in the ground. {Phil. Trans, vol. 
xxxvii. 80, 81.) 

1730. A Society of Gardeners. This society con- 
sisted of the most eminent florists and nurserymen of 
the time, who state in their preface, that finding 
great inconvenience from the unsettled and vague 
nomenclature of plants which then existed, they re- 
solved to undertake this work for the public benefit. 
They published only one part, dedicated to Thomas 
Earl of Pembroke and Montgomery, and a preface 
enumerating (he most eminent encouragers of gar- 
dening of the time. Weston and Martin conjecture 
that this work gave rise to the folio edition of 
Millers' Dictionary, which appeared in 1731 (the 
8vo. in 1724.), Miller being secretary to the society. 

1730. The Gardener's Catalogue — Catalogus Arborum Fru. 
ticumque tum Exoticarum tum Domesticarum, &c. or. The 
Gardener's Catalogue of Trees and Shrubs, both Exotic and 
Domestick, which are hardy enough to endure the Cold of our 
Climate in the open Air, ranged in an Alphabetical Order, 
according to their most approved Latin Names ; with an Index 
of the English Names referring to the Latin. To which is 
added the Characters of each Genus in English, and a short 
Account of the different Growths of each Tree or Shrub, illus- 
trated with 21 Copper Plates, in which there are above 50 beau- 
tiful Plants which were designed by the famous Mynheer Van 
Pliiysum, cmd are represented in their projier Colours. Done 
by a Society of Garfleners, price 1/. ll.s- 6rf. stitched, in fol. 



1104 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



1732. Anon. 

1. Esiav concerninc the best methods of Pruning Fruit- 
trees, alio the :Metliod of Pruning Timber Tress, and also a Dis- 
course concerning the improvement of the Potatoe. London. 8vo. 

"i. The Flower Garden displayed, in above 40(J represent- 
ations of the most beautiful Flowtrs, with the description and 
history of each plant, and the method of their culture. 

1732. Furber, Robert, of Kensington, nurserjTnan, 
who published a number of separate prints of all the 
cliS'erent kinds of fruits grown in this country. His 
nurserj- is now in the possession of Messrs. Malcolm 
and Co. 

1. Fruitji for every month in the year, in fol. 12 Plates. 

2. An Introduction to Gardening, or Guide to Gentlemen 
and Ladies in furnishing their Gardens, bein^ ."several useful 
Catalo^es of fruits and iflowers. Lond. Svo. 1753. 

1732. More, Sir Thomas. 

A Flower Garden for Gentlemen and Ladies, or the Art of 
raisin? Flowersto blow in tlie depth of winter, also the method 
of rai^ing Sallotir.i,', Cucumbers, &c at a\iy time of the year. 

1732. Murray, Sir Alexander, of Stanhope, author 
of some political works relative to Scotland. 

The nature and method of Planting, Manuring, and Diet- 
ing a V'ineyard. 

1735. A Lndy. 
' Merlin : a Poem ; humbly inscribed to her JIajesty. To 
•■which is added. The Royal 'Hermitasie, a Poem, iioth by a 
Lady, with several curious representations both of the Cave 
and Hermitage. 1755. Svo. 

1735, Anon. 

The Rarilies of Richmond : being exaot Descriptions of the 
Hermitage, and Merlin's Cave, in the Gardens there. 1755. 
Svo. with his Life and Prophecies. \~Ti6. 

1738. EUis, William, a farmer at Little Gaddesdon, 
near Henipstead in Hertfordshire, author of Com- 
plete Husbandry, and other farming works. 

The Timber Tree improved ; or the best practical methods 
of improving different lands with proper timber. Lond. Svo. 

1738. Anon. 

The Complete Seedsman's Monthly Calendar, shewing 
the best and most easy Method for raising and cultivating 
every sort of Seed belonging to a Kitchen and Flower Garden : 
with necessary Instructions for sowing of Berries, Mast, and 
Seeds, of Evergreens, Forest Trees, and such as are proper 
for the improveing of Land. \Vritten at the commana of a 
Person of Honour. Lond. Svo. 

1739. Ano7i. 

An Essay upon Harmony ; as it relates chiefly to Situation 
and Building. Svo. 1739. 

1739. Trowel, Samuel. 

A new Treatise of Husbandry and Gardening. 

1740. Gray, Christopher, a nurseryman at Ful- 
ham; a correspondent with many of the eminent 
botanists of his time, and the first who received the 
magnolia grandiflora from America, and propa- 
gated it extensively. 

A Catalogue of Trees and Shrubs which are prepared for 
sale by Christopher Gray, Is urseryman at Fulham. 
1744. Anon. 

Adam's Luxury and Eve's Cookery, or the Kitchen" Garden 
displaved. Svo. 

2. Ourious Experiments in Gardening; modes of Propaga- 
tion, &c. illustrated by woodcuts. ]2mo. 1750. 

1744. Watson, Will/am, M.D. F.R. S. was bom in 
London, in 1715, educated at Merchants^taylors' 
school, and served his time to an apothecary. He 
made discoveries in electricity, for which he ob- 
tained the Copley medal, and was honored with 
the degree of doctor in physic by two German uni- 
versities. He died May 10.' 1787.' Besides papers in 
the Philosophical Transactions and the London 
Medical Observations, he wrote An Account of 
Experiments on inoculating for the Small-pox. 

1. On the Culture of Mushrooms. 

2. Account of the Remains of John Tradescant's Botaiiic 
Garden at Lambeth. 

5. Account of the Bishop of London's Garden at Fulham., 

1746. Stephenson, David, '^LA. author of A New 
Mechanical Practice of Physic. 

Gentleman's Gardener's Director of Plants, Flowers, and 
Trees; with a Garden Kalendar. Lond. 1746. Svo. 

1747. Anon. 

The Compleat Florist, Sro. It consists of 100 copper^plates 
and flowers, colored and plain. 

1748. Anon. 

A Dialogue upon the Gardens of Lord Viscount Cobham, at 
Stowe in Berks. Svo. 

1749. Dickson, James and Co,, nurserymen and 
seedsmen, Edinburgh. 

Catalogue of Hot-house, Greon-house, Hardy, and Herba. 
ceous Plants, Flowering and Evergreen Shrubs, Fruit and 
Fniit Trees. Edinb. 8>'o. An enlarged edition in 1796, 
enumerating in alphabe'acal order all the plants described in 
the Hortus Kewensis. 

1750. Bickham, Georse. 

The Beauties of Stowe, v ith cuts, Svo. 

1752. Anon. 

An Account of the Emperor of Cliina's Gardens at Pekia. 
8vo. ^ 

1753. Anon. 

The Kitchen and Flower Garden complete, in four sheets. 
1753. Coventry, Francis, was born in Cambridge, 
shire, and educated at the Magdalen-college, Cam- 
bridge, where he took his master's degree in 1752, 
snd entered into orders. He died in 1759, having 



just before been presented to the donative of Edge- 
ware. He wrote Penshurst, a poem in Dodsley's 
collection, ani a poetical epistle to the honorable 
Wilmot Vaughan. 

Strictures on the Absurd Novelties introduced in Garden- 
ing, and a humourous DescripUon of Squire Mushroom'j 
villa- (Published in the JVurii, a periodical work, So. XV 
April 1 a. 1755.) 

1753. Rocque, Bartholofncw, a florist of Walliam 
Green ; author of some agricultural works : a great 
advertiser of grasses ; sowed mixtures in his grounds, 
and sold the turf at so much per square foot to pro- 
pagate from ; extolled the burnet and lucern, parti- 
cularly the former : i^atronised by the Duke of 
Cumberland. Switzer speaks of a similarly named 
person, probably the father, who had a vineyard 
planted in a common field-garden, from which he 
made wine for thirty years ; and although the 
ground was flat, the \vine was as good as that of Or- 
leans and Auxerre. 

A Treatise on the Hyacinth ; containing the manner ot 
cultivating that Flower, on the experience lately made by 
the most eminent Florists in Holland ; translated from the 
Dutch. Lond. 1755. Svo. 

1754. Justice, James, Esq., F. R. S., one of the 
principal clerks of session, or civil court of law, in 
Scotland. His father was a merchant, and dealing 
with the Dutch, imported flower-roots, which it has 
been said first gave the subject of this memoir a 
taste for gardening. He had a villa and large gar- 
den at Cricliton, near Dalkeith, where he finally 
spent his fortune, in gardening pursuits, and was 
obliged to dispose of the property. Here, he prac- 
tised gardening for thirty years : 'went twice to Hol- 
land to study the culture of bulbs, and also visited 
Italy ; and " satisfied the most leametl societies in 
Britain of his practice and knowledge of the culture 
of the nicest flowers, and of plants, both exotic and 
indigenous, which adorn our British gardens. The 
Ananas," he says ;1754\ " though now in many gar- 
dens, were first brought to (ruit in Scotland by me; 
I can with truth affirm, that no person in this coun- 
try bestowed more liberality upon improvements in 
gardening than I did, for the truth of which I can 
appeal to manv of my countrvmen." He died about 
1762 or a 

1. The Scots Gardener's Director. Bv Jdmes JnsUce. 
Edinb. Svo. 

2. A new edition, entitled, The British Gardener's Dirertor, 
chiefly adapted to the CUmate of the Northern Counties : 
directing the necessary works in the Kitchen, Fruit, and 
Pleasure Gardens, and in the Nursery, (ireen-house, and 
Stove. By James Justice, F-R.S., one of the princijial Clerks 
of Session. Edinburgh, 17G4. Svo — The Advertisement, dated 
September 1763, sete forth, that the first impression being sold 
oft, the author set about correcting mistakes, and making 
additions ; but that his death deprived the world of his after, 
labors, which the memorandums and note^ left behind him 
gave ro^im to think he intended to have laid before the pub- 
lie. — This is an original and truly valuable work, founded 
upon reflection and experience. 

3. An edition in 1764, arranged as a Monthly Kalendar, 
and very ditierent from any of the others. 

17541 R S ,'gcntleman. 

The Gardener's Pocket Book, or Country Gentleman's Re- 
creation ; being the Kitchen, Fruit, and Fiower-Garden, dis- 
played in Alphabetical Order. 

1755. Hill, John, M.D., a miscellaneous writer, 
was the son of a clerg.\-man, and bom about 1716. 
He served his time to an apothecary in Westminster, 
and in that situation studied botany, which procured 
him the patronage of the Duke "of Richmond and 
Lord Petre, who employed him in their gardens^ 
In 1746 he translated the tract of Theophrastus On 
Gef?is; which was followed hy A General Xaturtjl 
History, in 3 vols, folio. He next engaged in comr 
piling a supplement to Chamber s Cyclopccdia ; end 
at the same time published a periodical paper called 
27?^ Inspector. Having obtained a doctor's de- 
gree from St. Andrew's, he endeavored to get 
elected into the Royal Society j but being disap^ 
pointed, he attacked that learned body, first in a 
pamphlet, and next in a quarto volume, written 
with asperity and acuteness. His facility in writing 
was very great, and there was hardly a popular subr 
ject on which he did not exercise h"is pen, so that in 
some years he is said to have realised filteen hundred 
pounds. He also gained considerably by quack mcr 
dicines, and was much encouraged by the Earl of 
Bute, under whose auspices he published A System 
of Botany, in 26 vols, folio; for wliich he received 
the order of Vasa from the King of Sweden. He 
died Kov. 22. 1775, Besides the works already men- 
tioned he wrote some novels and farces. Hill had a 
dispute with Garrick, and another with Woodward 
the comedian ; the former answered him in an epi- 
gram, and the latter in a pamphlet, with this motto 
from Shakespeare : " I do remember an apothecary 
culling of simples." This alluded to a story tha^ 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS 



ON GARDENING. 



1105 



Hill was excluded from some nobleman's gardens 
for having carried off several valuable plants. 

A short account of his life, M^ritings, and cha- 
racter was published at Edinburgh in 1779, and his 
widow. Lady Jane Hill, published An Address to 
the Public, setting forth the Consequences of his 
Acquaintance with the Earl of Bute. 1788. 4to. 

1. A Method of raising Trees from the Leaves. By John 
Hill, M.D. 8vo. 1758, under the name of Thomas Barnes. 

2. Eden ; or a complete Body of Gardening. London, fol. 
Colored plates. 60. 

5. Complete Body of Husbandry, with plates, fol. 

4. The Gardener's New Kalendar. By John Hill, M.D. 
Lond. with plates. 

3. An Idea of a botanical Garden in England, 1758. 

6. An Account of a Stone, which on being watered pro- 
duces Mushrooms. London, 1758. 8vo. Plates 2. 

7. A Method of producing Double Flowers from Single, 
by a regular Course of Culture, illustrated with Figures. 
Lond. 1758. Plates 7- 

8. The Origin and Production of Proliferous Flowers, 
with the Culture at large for raising Double from Single, 
and Proliferous from the Double. Lond. 1759. 8vo. Plates 7. 

9. The Practice of Gardening by T. Perfect, a pupil of 
Dr. Hill. London. 1759. 8vo. 

10. Botanical Tracts. Lond. 1762. 8vo. — A title prefixed to 
pamphlets published at different times. 

11. The Construction of Timber explained by the Micro- 
scope. 1770. 8vo. 

1755. Hitt, Thomas, gardener to Lord Robert 
Manners, at Bloxholme in Lincolnshire, afterwards 
a nurseryman in Kent and a designer of gardens. 
He wrote on husbandry, and the improvement of 
barren lands in Aberdeenshire, of which county he 
seems to have been a native. He died about 1770, 
and his papers came into the possession of Hea- 
der, gardener to the Duke of Northumberland, who 
published from them the Universal Gardener. 

A Treatise on Fruit Trees, Lond. 8vo. An original work, 
valuable for its mode of training trees. 

1756. Anon. 

On the Heat and Cold of Hot-houses. 
— — 1757. Chambers, Sir William ; an eminent archi- 
tect, was born in Sweden 1726, but his ancestors 
were of Scottish origin. He was brought to England 
at the age of two years, and placed in a school at 
Rippon. His first entrance into public life was in 
the capacity of supercargo to a Swedish East India 
ship, in which he made one voyage to China. On 
his return he quitted the sea, and applied to archi- 
tecture, under the patronage of Lord Bute, by whose 
interest he was appointed drawing-master to the 
late king, then Prince of Wales. His first employ- 
ment as an architect was in building a villa for Lord 
JBesborough, at Roehampton, after which, he was 
engaged to lay out the royal gardens at Kew, where 
he introduced the Chinese ornaments. In 1771 he 
was honored with the Swedish order of the Polar 
Star, and in 1775 appointed to conduct the building 
of Somerset House. He was at this time a fellow of 
the royal society, and a member of that of anti- 
quaries ; besides" which he held the places of archi- 
tect to the king, surveyor-general to the board of 
works, and treasurer of the royal academy. He died 
in 1796, aged 69. 

1. Designs for Chinese Buildings, Furniture, Dresses, Ma- 
chines, and Utensils, engraved from the originals drawn in 
China ; to which is annexed, A Description of their Temples, 
Houses, Gardens, &c. Lond. 1757. max. fol. 

2. Plans, Elevations, Sections, and Perspective Views of 
the Gardens and Buildings at Kew in Surrey, the seat of her 
Royal Highness the Princess of Wales. Lond, 1763. fol. 1765. 
fol. 42j. a very splendid work. 

3. Dissertations on Oriental Gardening. London, 1774. 
4to. 55. 

1757. Spence, Joseph, D.D., Professor of poetry in 
the university of Oxford, author of an essay on 
Pope's works, Crito, and other well known and 
esteemed works. He was the friend of Lord Wal- 
pole ; is styled by the latter a man of judgment and 
taste in gardening. He was born in 1698, and died 
in 1768. 

Some Account of the Emperor of China's Gardens, &c. By 
Sir Harry Beaumont. Lond. 8vo. 

1757. Anon., erroneously attributed by Nichols 
{Lit. Anecdotes) to John Baynes, who died before 
the poems below were published ; by some to 
Mason, the author of the English Garden. 

1. An Heroic Epistle to Sir Wm. Chambers. 4to. 

2. An Heroic Postscript. 4to. 1758. 

These poems are ranked among the most spirited satires of 
the age. 

1757. Thompson, John, a commercial gardener at 
Newcastle upon Tyne. 

1. The distinguishing Properties of a fine Auricula. New- 
castle. 8vo. 

2. The Dutch Florist. Newcastle. 12mo. 1758. 

1758. Hanhury, the Rev. William, rector of Church 
Langton, Lancashire, died 1778. 

1. An Essay on Planting, and a Scheme to make it con- 
ducive to the glory of God, and the advantage of Society. 8vo. 

2. A complete Body of Planting and Gardening, contain- 
ing the Natural History, Culture, and Management of Deci- 

4 



duous and Evergreen Forest-trees, &c.; the whole forming a 
complete History of Timber-trees, whether raised in Forests, 
Plantations, or Nurseries ; as well as a general System of 
the present Practice of the Flower, Fruit, and Kitchen- 
Gardens. To be completed in about 140 sixpenny weekly 
numbers, from December 1769, in two volumes, folio. 

1758. Marsham, Robert, Esq. F.R.S., of Stratton, 
in Norfolk. 

1. Observations on the Growth of Trees. (Phil. Tram. 
Abr. xi. 320. 1758.) 

2. On the Usefulness of Washing and Rubbing the Stems 
of Trees to promote their Annual Increase, (lb. xiv. 124^ 
1776.J The same. (lb. xv. 138. 1781.) 

3. Indications of Spring. (lb. xvi. 561. 1789.) 

4. On the Measures of Trees, (lb. xvUi. 100. 1797.) 

1759. Barnes, Thomas, a fictitious name adopted 
by Sir John Hill for his first gardening publication. 
(See Hill, John, 1755.) 

1759. North, , a nurseryman at Lambeth, on 

the grounds now occupied as a nursery by John 
Hay. 

1. Treatise on Grasses, and the Norfolk Willow. 

2. Gardener's Catalogue of Hardy Trees, Shrubs, Flowers, 
Seeds, &c. 8vo. 

1759. Perfect, Thomas, inventor of the new Chinese 
•parterres, a name adopted by Sir John Hill, and 
supposed to be that of a famous nurseryman at Pom- 
fret in Yorkshire. See Rill, John, 1755.) 

1759. Stillingfleet, Benjamin, an ingenious natur- 
ahst and miscellaneous writer, born about 1702; 
died 1771. 

His Literary Life and select Works, by William Cox. Lond. 
1811. 3 vols. 8vo. They contain a Calendar of Flora, and 
some curious essays towards a history of husbandry. 

1760. Anon. 

The London Gardener. 8vo. 

1760. Haddington, Earl of, a Scotch nobleman, 
whose residence was at Tynningham, near Dunbar, 
where he made considerable plantations for the time 
and country ; he was a general encourager of im- 
provements ; died about 1787. 
A Treatise on Forest Trees. Edin. 8vo. 

1760. Lee, James, of the firm of Messrs. Kennedy 
and Lee, nurserymen at the Vineyard, Hammer- 
smith, a native of Scotland ; some time under Miller 
at Chelsea, afterwards gardener to the Duke of Ar- 
gyle at Whitton, and next he commenced the nur- 
■ sery with Kennedy, then gardener to Lord Bolton 
at Chiswick. Lee was a correspondent of Linnaeus, 
and most of the American botanists of the time, 
and is mentioned by John Ellis as one of the first 
gardeners. His elements of botany have contri- 
buted, perhaps more than any other work, to spread 
a knowledge of the Linneean system among garden- 
ers. He died in 1795, and was succeeded by his son 
of the same name, an ardent lover and liberal pro- 
moter of gardening improvements. (See 7518.) 

1. Introduction to Botany ; containing an Explanation of 
the Theory of that Science, and an Interpretation of its 
Technical 'Terms, extracted from the Works otLinneeus, &c. ; 
with 12 plates. Lond. 8vo. 

2. Catalogue of Plants and Seeds, sold by Kennedy and 
Lee, Nurserymen at the Vineyard, Hammersmith. 

1760. Pullein, Sa7nuel, M.A., author of different 
publications on the silkworm, mulberry, and cotton- 
plant. 

Observations towarcls a Method of Preserving the Seeds 
Plants in a state of Vegetation, during long Voyages. Lond. 
8vo. 

1760 to 1780. Various authors. The following 
works contain some pleasing and valuable observ- 
ations on modern gardening, and are generally con- 
sidered as having contributed to spread a taste for 
that style : — 

1. Warton's Essay on the Writings and Genius of Pope. 
Vol. ii. from p. 236. to p. 248. and p. 262. 1762. 

2. The first article in the 2d volume of the Antiquarian Re- 
pertory is a pleasing description of "White linights, the seat 
of Sir Henry Englefield, Bart, one of the first examples of the 
ferme orjt^e." 1764. 

3. Letters concerning the present state of England. 8vo. 
1772. Letter 26. 

4. A Tour to London, by Grosley; translated by Nugent. 
8vo. 1772. Vol.ii. p. 115. 

5. Knox's Essays. Vol. ii. 4th edit. No. 91. and No. 117. 

6. Laelius and Hortensia. By Dr. SteJman. 8vo. 1782. 
Letters 5 and 6. 

To these may be added from the poets: The Description 
of the Grotto of Calypso, and of the Garden of Alcinous, in 
Pope's Odyssey ; of the old Corycian's Garden, in Dryden's 
Virgil ; of the Garden of Armida, in Hoole's Tasso ; various 
passages in Milton's Paradise Lost, Thomson's Seasons, and 
other poems. 

Among prose writers may be referred to : The Description 
of the Vale of Tempe, in iElian's Various History ; of Vaucluse 
and Petrarch's Garden, from Mrs. Dobson's Life of Petrarch ; 
Petrarch's Description of Sylva Piana; Smollett's Travels 
through France and Italy, vol. ii. Letter 31. dated 1765 ; 
Gough's British Topography, p. 138. Oxfordshire ; Critical 
Review for October, 177-. p 312. and August, 1783 ; and the 
preface to Girardin's Lan«'.scape. To these might be added, 
various papers in the Gentleman's, Universal, and other ma- 
gazines, published about this time, and also to the tourt and 
topographical works of the same date. 

B 



1106 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



' 1760. Anon. 

Adam armed : or an Essay endeavouring to prove the Ad- 
vantages and Improvements the Kingdom may receive, and 
the Inconveniences and Impediments it may avoid and re- 
medy, by the Means of a well-ordered and duly rectified 
Charter for Incorporating and Regulating the Professors of the 
Art of Gardening ; humbly offered and presented by the Master 
and Company of the same. Fol. no date ; supposed "about 1760. 

1762. Home, Henry, commonly called Lord 
Kaimes, from his official legal situation ; an 
eminent Scotch lawyer, philosopher, and critic, was 
born at Kaimes in Berwickshire, 1696 ; died 1782. 
He was originally bred a writer or attorney, but by 
assiduous application raised himself to be a judge. 
He farmed his own estate at Kaimes for several 
years ; and afterwards resided at Blairdrummond 
in Stirlingshire, his wife's estate, where he displayed 
his taste in laying out grounds. His life has been 
written by Lord Woodhouselee. 

Essay on Gardening ; in the Elements of Criticism. Lond. 
3 vols. 8vo. In this work he recommends a judicious use oi 
both the ancient and modern styles. 

1763. JVTieeler, Jay/ies, a nurserjTnan at Glou- 
. cester. After his death the nursery was carried on 
by his two daughters, who separated some years 
ago, and it is now earned on by one of them. 

The Botanist's and Gardener's New Dictionary ; containing 
the Names, Classes, Orders, Generic Characters, and Specific 
Distinctions of the several Plants cultivated in England, ac- 
cording to the System of Linneus ; to which is prefixed, an In- 
troduction to the Linnean System of Botany. Lond. I'fio. Svo. 

1764. Dodsley, Robert, an ingenious English poet, 
miscellaneous writer, and bookseller ; was born in 
Nottinghamshire, 1703. 

A Description of the Leasowes, the Seat of A\'illiam Shen- 
stone, Esq., accompanied by a Plan. Lond. I'^mo. 

1764. Museum Rusticum, a periodical work, con- 
taining various papers on planting and horticulture. 

Museum Rusticum et Commerciale ; or select Papers on Ag- 
riculture, Commerce, Arts, and Manufactures. Drawn from 
experience, and communicated by Gentlemen engaged in these 
Pursuits. Revised and digested by several Members of the 
Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures, and 
Commerce : in 6 vols. 8vo. 

The Museum Rusticum was succeeded by a similar work in 
1768, entitled De re rmtica, completed in 2 vols. 8vo. in 1770. 

1764. Shetistone, Will/a?//, Esq., a poet and coun- 
try gentleman, celebrated for his taste in landscape- 
gardening ; bom in Shropshire 1714, died 1763. 

Unconnected Thoughts on I>andscape Gardening. In his 
.•works collected after his death, in 3 vols. 8vo. Lond. 

1766. Abercrombie, John, son of John Abercrombie, 
who had a nursery and garden in the neighborhood 
of Edinburgh ; and was in the habit of supplying 
the markets of that city with vegetables. 

John Abercrombie, our author, was born in 1726; 
and was educated at a grammar school, till he at- 
tained an age to be of service in his father's busi- 
ness, for which he had always a predilection. After 
he had arrived at manhood, on some trifling family 
differences occuring, he left his father, and came 
to London ; in the vicinity of which he worked for 
some years as a journeyman gardener. To note the 
particulars of most interest, he was long employed 
in the Royal Gardens at Kew, and at Leicester 
House, now Leicester Fields ; and in these situ- 
ations he occasionally contributed to the boyish 
diversions of his present majesty. He lived as 
principal gardener with several noblemen and per- 
sons of high rank and respectability, and particu- 
larly with that eminent botanist. Doctor Munro 
(father of the present celebrated physician), at 
Sunning Hill, near Windsor : here he continued 
several years, and was married while in the doctor's 
service, to a young woman in the family of Sir 
James Douglas, where he had before lived. He 
afterwards had a garden and nursery at Hackney, 
whence he sent his goods to Spitalfields Market ; 
and the profits of his business enabled him to sup. 
port his increasing family with comfort and decency. 
At this crisis, some time about 1770, Mr. L. Davis, 
an eminent bookseller of London, accompanied by 
Dr. Oliver Goldsmith, having previously ordered a 
handsome entertainment at an inn in Hackney, 
surprised Abercrombie with an invitation to dine 
with them with a view to induce him, by encou- 
raging overtures, to compose an original work 
on Practical Gardening. Abercrombie consented, 
with reluctance, fearful it might call off his at- 
tention too much from his garden and nursery; 
and at last, only on the condition of his materials 
being revised, and the style improved by Dr. Gold- 
smith. This celebrated writer, however, did not 
perform his part of the undertaking: after the 
papers had been handed to him by the humble 
gardener, then an inexperienced writer, and anxious 
to have his luxuriances pruned, the doctor said, as 
an apology to the bookseller for returning the MS. 
unrevised, that " Abercrombie's style was best 



suited to the subjects of which it treated." Abercrom- 
bie, however, frequently lamented, and the public 
possibly may do the same, that this very perspicuous 
and elegant wTiter did not fulfil his engagement. 

Abercrombie's first work was entitled Every 
Man his oim Gardener, which had a rapid sale; 
and, from the temporary profits being considerable, 
he was induced to neglect, and soon after to give 
up, his nursery ; and to enter upon a course of au- 
thorship on horticultural subjects. 

On first publishing Every Man his own Gar- 
dener, the difl^dence of Abercrombie induced him 
to afhx to the title-page the name of Mawe, who 
was gardener to the Duke of Leeds. After the 
publication of a second edition, he accepted of an 
invitation from the nominal author of his book, 
who had been much flattered by the compliment, 
to visit him in Yorkshire. When introduced to 
Mawe, whom he had never before seen, poor Aber- 
crombie (as he used facetiously to narrate) encoun- 
tered a gentleman so bepowdered, and so bedaubed 
with gold lace, that he thought he could be in the 
presence of no less a personage than the duke him- 
self However, they soon came to a right under- 
standing ; for he continued his visit for more than 
a fortnight, and " fared sumptuously every day." 
He likewise received much information from 
Mawe, as the groundwork of improvements which 
he afterwards made in his book, Every Man his own 
Gardener, and in other publications. They subse- 
quently maintained a friendly correspondence for 
years. 

About the year 1774, Abercrombie took a tea- 
garden at Hoxton, near the Shepherd and Shep- 
herdess ; and exhibited in the grounds his practical 
skill in raising exotics and choice fruits: his arbors 
there are, to this day, spoken of as rural curiosi- 
ties. In different parts of the garden he was ac- 
cusfomed to fix pieces of his own humble poetry. 

At length he left it, on the expiration of the 
lease, which he was unable to get renewed. Un- 
fortunately, just before the lease had expired, the 
original proprietor of the grounds under whom 
Abercrombie held, and w^ho was disposed to do him 
the most friendly offices, died. This gentleman was 
an eminent goldsmith, and an alderman of the 
city of London : during his illness, his relations 
prevented Abercrombie from visiting him, or from 
access to the house. On his death, Abercrombie 
experienced another severe disappointment, in not 
being noticed in the alderman's will; although he 
had been led, by professions of friendship and pro- 
mises of assistance, to form the highest expectations 
from this quarter. 

Previous to the year 1790, Abercrombie's family 
had grown up and had settled away from home. 
From this period to the time of his death, he 
chiefly depended for support on the occasional im- 
provements which his several works required. 
From 1796 to the time of his decease, he resided at 
Charlton Street, Somers' Town, except when he 
was visiting a friend at Cambridge, or was engaged 
in any professional pursuit at a considerable tlis- 
tance from town. When out of business, he was 
a constant visitor, being a great walker, of the 
nursery-grounds and botanic gardens around the 
metropolis, with the object of collecting horticul- 
tural and botanical information. He was also oc- 
casionally employed in planning new gardens and 
ornamental grounds, as a horticultural survej'or 
and improver ; for which he was sometimes hand- 
somely remunerated. 

In the spring uf 1806, being in his eightieth year, 
Abercrombie met with a severe fall, by which 
he broke the upper part of his thigh-bone. This 
accident, which happened to him on the 15th of 
April, tenninated in his death. After lying during 
the interval, in a very weak exhausted state, with- 
out much pain, he expired in the night between 
April and May as St. Paul's clock struck twelve. 
He was lamented by all who knew him, as cheer- 
ful, harmless, and upright. 

1. Every Man his own Gardener, being a New Gardener's 
Calendar, with complete Lists of Forest-trees, Flowering Shrubs, 
Fruit-trees, Evergreens, annual, biennial, and perennial Flow- 
ers : Hot-house, Green-house, and Kitchen-garden Plants, with 
the Varieties of each Sort cultivated in the English Gardens. 
Lond. 12mo. 

Of this very useful and popular work the editions have been 
numerous. From " a diffidence in the writer, it was first pub- 
lished as the production of Thomas Mawe, gardener to His 
Grace the Duke of Leeds, and other gardeners ; but it was en- 
tirely written by Abercrombie, whose claim has since been, 
in some measure, asserted, by subjoining in the titlepage the 
name of John Abercrombie, to the more popular one of Mr. 
Mawe." It is to be lamented, Professor Jlsirtyn observes, that 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



H07 



so respectable a performance should be accompanied by this 
deceit and book-craft. 

2. The Universal Gardener and Botanist, or a General Dic- 
tionary of Gardening and Botany, exhibiting, in Botanical 
Arrangement, according to the Linn;can System, every Tree, 
Shrub, and Herbaceous Plant that merits Culture, Stc Lond. 
1778. 4to. 

3. The Garden Mushroom, its Nature and Cultivation, ex- 
hibiting full and plain Directions for producing this desirable 
Plant in Perfection and Plenty. Lond. 1779. Svo. 

4. The British Fruit (jarden, and Art of Pruning ; com- 
prising the most approved Methods of planting and raising every 
useful Fruit Tree and Fruit-bearing Shrub. Lond. 1779. 8vo. 

5. The Complete Forcing Gardener, for the thorough Prac- 
tical Management of the Kitchen Garden, raising all early 
Crops in Hot-beds, and forcing early fruit, &c. Lond. 1781. 
12mo. 

6. The complete Wall-tree Pruner, &c. Lond. 1785. 12mo. 

7. The Propagation and Botanical Arrangement of Plants 
and Trees, useful and ornamental. Lond. 178.'5. 2 vols. I'imo. 

8. The Gardener's Pocket Dictionary, or a Systematical Ar- 
rangement of Trees, Herbs, Flowers, and Fruits, agreeable to 
the Linnaean Method, with their Latin and English Names, 
their L'ses, Propagation, Culture, &c. Lond. 1786. jvols. l'2mo. 

9. Daily Assistant in the Modern Practice of English Garden- 
ing for every Month in the Year, on an entire new plan. Lond. 
1789. 12mo. 

10. The universal Gardener's Kalendar and System of Prac- 
tical Gardening. Lond. 1789. l'2mo. 

11. The Complete Kitchen Gardener and Hot-bed Forcer, 
with the thorough Practical Management of Hot-houses, Fire- 
walls, &c. Lond. 17S9. 12mo. 

12. The Gardener's Vade-mecum, or Companion of General 
Gardening; a Descriptive Display of the Plants, Flowers, 
Shrubs, Trees, Fruits, and general" Culture. Lond. 1789. 8vo. 

13. The Hot-house Gardener, or the General Culture of 
the Pine Apple, and the ^lethods of forcing early Grapes, 
Peaches, Nectarines, and other choice Fruits in Hot-houses, 
Vineries, Fruit-houses, Hot-walls, with Directions for raising 
Melons and early Strawberries, &c. Plates. Lond. 1789. 8vo. 

14. The Gardener's Pocket Journal and Annual Register, 
in a Concise Monthly Display of all Practical Works of 
General Gardening throughout the year. Lond. 1791. 12mo. 

15. A new edition of the Practical Gardener revised, with 
considerable additions, by Mr. James Mean, Head-gardener 
to Sir Abraham Hume, Bart. I'imo. 1816. 

16. The Practical Gardener's Companion, or Horticultural 
Calendar, containing the latest Improvements in Horticul- 
tural Practice. To which is annexed, on a plan never be- 
fore exhibited, the Garden Seed and Plant Estimate ; edited 
from an original Manuscript of J. Abercrombie, the whole re- 
vised by J. Mean. Lond. ISmo. 1816. 

1766. Jones, Henry, a poetical and dramatic witer, 
a native of Drogheda in Ireland ; died 1770. 

Kew Garden, a Poem in two cantos. Lond. 4to. 

1766. Lightoler, J , a London architect. 

The Gentleman and Farmer's Architecture, being Plans 
for Parsonage and Farm-houses, with Pineries, Green-houses, 
&c. on 25 plates, in fol. 

1766. Locke, John, one of the greatest and most 
distinguished philosophers this country has pro- 
duced ; born in Somersetshire 1632 ; author of nu- 
merous works ; had a fine seat at Norbury Park 
in Surrey ; died 1704. 

Obserrations upon the Growth and Culture of Vines and 
Olives, the Production of Silk and the Preservation of Fruits. 
"Written at the request of the Earl of Shaftesbury, to whom it is 
inscribed : now first printed from the original manuscript, in 
the possession of the present Earl of Shaftesbury. Lond. Svo. 

1767. Anon. 

The Rise and Progress of the present Taste in planting 
Parks, Pleasure Grounds, Gardens, &c. from Henry the 
Eighth to King George the Third. In a poetic Epistle to the 
Right Honourable Charles Lord Viscount Irvin, 4to. 

Very scarce, only observed by us in Mr. Forsyth's library. 

1767. Giles, John, gardener to Lady Boyd at Lew- 
isham in Kent, and from 1777 foreman in the nursery 
of Messrs. Russell there. He died in 1797, in his 
seventy-second year. 

Ananas ; or a 'TrBatise on the Pine Apple, in which the 
whole Culture, Management, and perfecting this most excel- 
lent Fruit is laid down in a clear and explicit Manner. To 
which is added, the True Method of raising the finest Melons 
with the greatest success, &c. Lond. 8vo. 1 plate. 

1767. Maiue, Thomas, gardener to the Duke of 
Leeds, the nominal author of the first publication of 
John Abercrombie, entitled Evcri/ vnan his own 
Gardener. Abercrombie wrote this work in prison, 
and being desirous of sending it into the world under 
a great name, applied to Mawe, then unknown 
to him. Mawe went to see Abercrombie, and 
feeling for his situation, permitted him to use his 
name. This Abercrombie told to Watts of Acton, 
who is our authority for inserting it. 

17G7. Rutter, James, gardener at Wandsworth, 
and Daniel Carter, gardener at Battersea ; respect- 
able market-florists, the latter is the father of Thomas 
and Daniel Carter, esteemed flower-cultivators at the 
present day. 

iModern Eden ; or, the Gardener's Universal Guide ; con- 
taining plain instructions for performing every branch of 
Gardening, whether relating to ornament or utility ; in which 
are laid down the best methods for raising all the products of 
the kitchen and flower-garden, and the training, pruning, and 
entire management of Fruit-trees, &c. Lond. 1767. Svo. 

1768. Gibson, John, M. D., a native of Scotland, 
surgeon in the royal navy, and author of some me- 
dical works. 

The Fruit-Gardener, containuig the method of raising 



Stocks for multiplying FruU-trees, with directions R)r laying 
out and managing Fruit-gardens. Svo. 

1768. Gilpin, the Rev. l^Hliarn, M. A., an inge- 
nious divine, born in Carlisle 1724, educated at Ox- 
ford ; kept for many years a school at Cheam itl 
Surrey, and afterwards became vicar of Boldre, in 
Hampshire, and prebendary of Salisbury, where he 
died in 1804. The whole of his tours and other 
%vorks on the picturesque, well merit the study of 
the landscape-gardener. 

1. Observations on the River Wye, and several Parts of 
South Wales, &c. relative chiefly to Picturesque Beauty, made 
in the Summer of 1770. Lord. 1783. Svo. 

2. Observations relative chiefly to Picturesque Beauty, made 
in the year 1772, on several Parts of England; particularly the 
Mountains and Lakes of Cumberland and AVestmorland. Lond. 
1787. 2 vols. Svo. 

3. Observations chiefly relative to Picturesque Beauty, made 
in the year 1776, in several parts of Great .Britain ; particu- 
larly the Highlands of Scotland. Lond. 1788. 2 vols. 8vo. 

4. Remarks on Forest Scenery, and other ^Voodland views, 
relative chiefly to Picturesque Beauty. Illustrated by Scenes of 
New Forest, in Hampshire ; in 5 books. Lond. 1791. 2 vols. Svo. 

5. Three Essays : on Picturesque Beauty ; on Picturesque 
Travel ; on Sketching Landscape. To which is added ; a Poem 
on Landscape Painting. Lond. 1792. Svo. 

6. Observations on the Western Parts of England, relative 
chiefly to Picturesque Beauty. To which are added, a few re- 
marks on the Picturesque Beauties of the Isle of Wight; 18 
Plates. Lond. 1798. Svo. 

7. Observations on the coasts of Hampshire, Sussex, and 
Kent, relative chiefly to Picturesque Beauty, made in the 
Summer of 1774. Lond. 1804. Svo. 

8. Observations on several parts of the Counties of Cambridge, 
Norfolk, Suffolk, and Essex; also several parts of North 
Wales, relative chiefly to Picturesque Beauty ; in two Tours, 
the former made in the year 1769, and the laUer in 177.'?. 
Lond. 1809, 8vo. * 

1768. Mason, George, Esq., a classical scholar and 
critic ; author of an Appendix to Dr. Johnson's 
Dictionary, and of some other translations and phi- 
lological works. He lived chiefly iii London, and 
was connected with the Sun Fire Insurance Oifice. 

1. Essay on Design in Gardening. Svo. 

2. An Essay on Design in Gardening; first published in 
1768, now greatly augmented. Also a Revisal of several Pub- 
lications on the same Subject. Lond. 1795. Svo. Two Ap- 
pendices. 1798. Svo. 

1768. Wildman. 

Treatise on the Culture of Pear-trees, to which is added a 
Treatise on the Management of Bees. 12rao. Dublin. 

1769. Dicks, John, gardener to His Grace the 
Duke of Kingston at Knightsbridge. 

A New Gardener's Dictionary, or the whole Art of Garden- 
ing fully and accurately displayed; containing the most ap- 
proved Alelhods of cultivating all kinds of Trees, Plants, and 
Flowers. In 60 numbers, small folio, completed in 1771. 

1769. Du?ico?nbe, John, author of some works on 
antiquities, but chiefly known as the inventor of the 
dendrometer. 

A Treatise upon the Dendrometer, a new invented Instru- 
ment for the more certain and ready Measurement of Standing 
Timber by Inspection only ; for facilitating the practical oper- 
ation of Engineering, Land-surveying, &c. Lond. 1769. Svo. 
1769. Garton, James. 

The Practical Gardener, and Gentleman's Directory for 
every IMonth in the Year; with proper Directions for raising 
Mushrooms. To which is prefixed, an Essay upon Vegetation, 
Soil, Manure, and the nature and form of Stoves, Hot-beds, 
&:c. With a Copperplate, exhibiting at one view the several 
Aspects for planting a Fruit-Garden.' Lond. 1769. 12mo'. 
1769. Powel, Anthony, Esq., gardener to George II. 

The Royal Gardener ; or, complete Calendar of Gardening 
for every IMonth in the Year, digested in regular order, and 
so contrived as to exhibit, in a clear and comprehensive man- 
ner, the business to be done in the Flower, Fruit, and Kitchen 
Garden at all Seasons. Likewise Directions, founded on ex- 
perience, for Sowing, Planting, Pruning, Transplanting, En- 
grafting, and every other particular necessary to be known by- 
such as desire to aim at a perfect knowledge of this most 
ancient, healthy, and agreeable of all sciences. Lond. 12mo. 

1769. Taylor, Adam, gardener to J. Sutton, Esq., 
at New Park, near Devizes, in Wiltshire. 

Treatise on the Ananas, or Pine-Apple, containing plain 
and easy Directions for raising this most excellent fruit without 
fire, and in much higher perfection than from the stove. To 
which are added, full Directions for raising Melons. Devizes. 
Svo. One Plate. 

1769. Anon, 

Stowe ; a Description of the magnificent House and Gardens, 
&c. Svo. Cuts. 

1770. Ellis, John, Esq.,'a distinguished naturalist ; 
a native of Ireland, celebrated for his discovery of 
the animal origin of corals. He wrote a variety of 
tracts, and numerous papers in the Transactions 
of the Royal Society; and died 1771. 

1. Directions to Voyagers for bringing over Plants, &c. from 
the East Indies, and other distant Countries, in a state of 
Vegetation. Lond. 1770. 4to. 

2. Some additional Observations on the Method of preserving 
Seeds from foreign parts, for the benefit of the American 
Colonies. Lond. 1773. 4to. 

3. Historical Account of Coffee; with an Engraving, and 
Botanical Description of the Tree. To which are added, many 
Papers relative to its cuitu e and use as an article of diet and 
of convenience. Lond. 1774. 4to. 

4. Description of the Mongostan and the Bread Fruit, the 
first esteemed the most delicious, and the other the most useful 
of all the Fruits in the East Indies. To which are added 



4 B 2 



1108 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



Directions to Voya^rs for brining over them and other veget- 
able productions. Plates. Lond. 1775. 4to. 

1770. Hunter, Alexander, M. D. F. K. S. was born 
at Edinburgh 1733 ; settled as a physician at Gains- 
borough, at Beverly, and finally at York ; author of 
various agricultural and medical works, and of a 
cookery-book : died at York 1809. 
New Kdition of Evelyn's Sjlva and Terra. 
1770. Ockenden, , Esq. 

Letters describing the Lake of Killarney and Rueness Gar- 
dens. Dublin. 8vo. 

1770. Weston, Richard, Esq. an amateur gardener, 
who derived his information chiefly from inspecting 
the commercial gardens near London. 

1 Tracts on Practical Agriculture and Gardening, in which 
the advantage of imitating the Garden Culture in the Field is 
fully proved by a seven years' Course of Experiments. To 
which is added, a Complete Chronological Catalogue of 
English Authors on Agriculture, Gardening, &c. Lond. 1769. 
Svo. 

2. The Universal Botanist and Nurseryman, containing De- 
scriptions of the Species and \'arieties of all the Trees, Shrubs, 
Herbs, Flowers, and Fruits, Natives and Exotics, at present 
cultivated in the European Nurseries, Greenhouses, and Stoves, 
as described by modern Botanists ; arranged according to the 
Linnaean System, and their Naines in English. To which are 
added, A copious Botanical Glossary, several useful Catalogues 
and Indexes. Plates. Lond. 1770 1 774. 4 vols. Svo. 

3. The Gardener and Planter's Calendar ; containing the 
Method of raising Timber Trees, Fruit Trees, and Quicks for 
Hedges ; with Directions for forming and managing a Garden 
every ^lonth in the Year ; also, many new Improvements in 
the Art of Gardenuig. Lond. 1773. Svo. 

1770. Whcatley or Whatcley, Thomas, Esq. of Non- 
such Park, Surrey, secretary to the Earl of Suffolk. 
He had a brother who fought a duel with John 
Temple, Esq. in 1773 [^Gilchrist's Trials by Ordeal, 
p. 107.), and another, a clergyman. He died about 
1780 ; and some remarks on Shakspeare were pub- 
lished after his death, in a thin YImo. tract. It is 
remarkable, that so little is known of a writer, the 
beauty of whose style and the justness of whose 
taste are universally acknowledged. After enquiring 
at his publishers and other sources, we have not 
been able to ascertain to a certainty the mode of 
spelling his name. 

Observations on Modem Gardening, illustrated by De- 
scriptions. Lond. 1771. Pp.257. An edition, in quarto, in 
1798, with W'alpole's History, inserted as notes, and an ap- 
pendix, consisting of an Essay on the natural Situation of 
Gardens, originally published by Dodsley. 

1771. Meader, James, gardener to the Duke of 
Northumberland at Sion House, and afterwards to 
the Empress Catherine at PeterhofT, near Peters- 
burgh. He was a very satirical person, and wrote 
verses both on his friends and enemies. 

1. The Modern Gardener, or Universal Kalendar ; contain, 
ing Monthly Directions for all the Operations of Gardening, 
to be done either in the Kitchen, Fruit, Flower, and Pleasure 
Gardens, as likewise in the Green-house and Stove : with the 
Method of performing the different works, according to the 
best practice of the most eminent Gardeners. Also an Appen- 
dix, giving full and ample Instructions for forcing Grapes, 
Vines, Peach, Nectarine Trees, &c. in a new manner : never 
before published ; selected from the Diary Manuscripts of the 
late Mr. Hitt. Revised, corrected, »td improved by J. M. 
Lond. 1771. 12mo. 

2. The Planter's Guide, or Pleasure Gardener's Companion ; 
giving plain Directions, with Observations for the proper Dis- 
position and Management of the various Trees and Shrubs for 
a Pleasure Garden Plantation. To which is added, a list of 
Hardy Trees and Shrubs for ornamenting such Gardens. Em- 
bellished with Copper.plates. Lond. 1779. oblong 4to. 

1772. Boutcher, Ifilliajn, a nurseryman at Comely 
Garden, near Edinburgh. 

Treatise on Forest Trees ; containing not only the best 
Methods of their Culture hitherto practised, but a variety of ■ 
new and useful Discoveries, the result of many repeated Ex- 
pariments. To which are added. Directions for the Disposi- 
tion, Planting, and Culture of Hedges. Lond. 177'.i. 4to. 

1772. Mason, ■jyUliam, a divine and celebrated 
Ivric and descriptive poet ; born in Yorkshire 1725 j 
d'ied 1797, precentor, and canon of York. 

The English Garden ; a Poem in four books. Lond. 1772-82. 
4to. A new edit, corrected. To which are added, a Com- 
mentary and Notes, by W. Burgh, Esq. Lond. 1785. Svo. 

1772. Pierre, Louis de St., a native of South Caro- 
lina, and proprietor of lands there. 

The A.rt of Planting and Cultivating the ^'ine, &c. according 
to the most approved Methods in France. Lond. 12mo. 

1774. Anon. 

An Essay on the different Natural Situations of Gardens. 4to. 
lf"6r/. 1774. 

1775. Fye, Mrs. Hajnpdcn. 

A Peep into the principal Seats and Gardens in and about 
Twickenham (the residence of the Muses) descriptive of their 
Beauties, internal and external, with a suitable Companion for 
those who wish to visit Windsor or Hampton-court. To which 
is added, a History of a little Ivingdom on the Banks of the 
Thames, and its present Sovereign, &c. Svo. 

1776. Ellis, Thomas, gardener to the Lord Bishop 
of Lincoln. 

The Gardener's Pocket Kaleiidar. Lond. 12mo. 

1777. Anderson, James, LL. D., an agricultural 
writer of great versatility of genius, was born at 
Herdmanston, in the county of Edinburgh, 1730, on . 
£k farm which his par .nts had possessed for some 



generations, and which he was destined to inherit 
and to cultivate. He lost his parents at an early 
age, but his education was not neglected ; he studied 
chemistry under Dr. Cullen, and soon leaving his 
farm near Edinburgh, took one in Aberdeenshire of 
1300 acres, which, after improving and cultivating 
for twenty years, he let, and enjoyed an annuity 
from it during his life. He settled after leaving 
Aberdeenshire in the neighborhood of Edinburgh, 
where he published the Bcc, in weekly sixpen- 
ny numbers, till it extended to eighteen volumes. 
In 1797 he removed to Isleworth, near London, 
where he published Recreations in Agriculture, 
in six volumes, and his Description of a Patent 
Hot-house. Here he enjoyed his garden, and died 
of a decline in 1808, aged 69. Besides the works 
which bear his name, he wrote the reviews of books 
on rural matters for the Monthly Review for many 
years. 

1. Miscellaneous Thoughts on planting and training Tim- 
ber-tiees, by Agricola. £din. 177". Svo. 

2. Recreations m Agriculture, Natural History, Arts, and 
miscellaneous Literature. Lond. 1799. 1802. 6 vols. Svo. 

3. A Description of a Patent Hot-house, which operates 
chiefly by the heat of the Sun, and other subjects ; without 
the aid of Flues, or Tan-bark, or Steam, for the purpose of 
heating it, &c. Lond. 1S04. 12mo. 

1777. Bastard, William, Esq. of Kitley in Devon, 
shire. 

On the Culture of Pine-Apples. An extract of a letter from 
■William Bastard, Esq. of Ivitley in Devonshire, to Samuel 
Musgrave, Esq. M.D. F.R.S. dated Kitley, March 15. 1779, 
communicated to the Society- by Dr. Musgrave. 

The -H-riter states that he fruits his pines in pots set in pans 
of water, on a shelf close under the roof against the back wall ; 
prefers a cistern over the flue in that situation ; found a plant 
without roots grow well, and produce a fruit which weigbol 
two pounds. 

1777. Heelcy, Joseph, Esq. 

1. Letters on the Beauties of Hagley, Envil, and the Lea- 
sowes ; with Critical Remarks and Observations on the Mo- 
dem 'Taste in Gardening. Lond. 1777. 2 vols. 12mo. 

2. Description of Hagley Park. 1777. Svo. 

1777. Loddiges, Conrad, and Sons, eminent botani- 
cal nurserj-men at Hackney, where their grounds 
are remarkable for orderly arrangement, and for 
the magnitude and extent of the hot-houses. 

1. A Catalogue of Plants and Seeds, in English and German. 
Svo. 

2. The Botanical Cabinet, containing figures of new or rare 
Plants, with Directions for their Culture. 1817. 4to. In 
monthly parts. 

5. A Catalogue of Plants for Sale. 12mo. 1820. 

1777. Maurice, the Rev. Thomas, M.A., chaplain 
to the 97th regiment, author of various poems and 
tracts on Indian history and antiquities. 

1. Hagley; a Poem. 

2. Grove Hill, the seat of Dr. Lettsom, a descriptive Poem ; 
with an Ode to Mithra, and many plates. Lond. 1799. 4to. 

1777. Jl'ilson, Williayn, a native of Scotland; 
worked some time under Miller, and was sent by 
him to Sir James Cockburn, Bart at Petersham ; 
afterwards gardener to the Earl of Glasgow, near 
Paisley. 

A Treatise on the Forcing of Early Fruits, and the Man- 
agement of Hot-walls. Lond. 12mo. 

' This is a useful little treatise ; he uses the heat of ferment- 
ing dung in his peach and vine houses, as well as the heat of 
fliies ; and directs not to pmne peach-trees to be early forced 
till the tires have been made for a fortnight, because " the sap, 
when it begins to ascend, will spring more regular after the 
knife than after a dry wound." (p. 15.) 

1778. Anon. 

The Practical Gardener, directing, in the most pljdn and 
eeisy manner, what is necessary to be done in the lOtchen, 
Fruit, and Flower Garden, the Green-house, and Wilderness. 
Lond. Svo. 

1778. Swinden, X , an ingenious gardener 

and seedsman at Brentford-End, Middlesex. 

The Beauties of Flora displayed, or Gentleman and Lady's 
Pocket Companion to the Flower and Ivitchen Garden. Lond. 
Svo. 177S. 

1779. yeale, Adam, gardener to John Black- 
bourne, Esq. near Warrington, Lancashire. 

A Catalogue of the Plants in the Garden of John Black- 
bume, Esq." alphabetically arranged according to the Linnsan 
System. Lond. Svo. 

1779. Speechly, William, gardener for many years 
to the Duke of Portland, at Welbeck in Notting- 
hamshire; afterwards a farmer; died at an ad- 
vanced age in 1820. 

1. A Treatise on the Culture of the Pine-Apple, and the 
IManagement of the Hot-house ; together with a Description 
of every species of Insect that infests Hot-houses, with effec- 
tual Methods of destroying them. Vork, 1779. Svo. 

2. A Treatise on the Culture of the Vine, exhibiting new 
and advantageous methods of propagating, cultivating, and 
training that Plant, so as to render it abimdantly fruitful. 
A^'ith new Hints on the Formation of Vineyards in England. 
York. 4to. 

3. Practical Hints on Domestic and Rural Economy, re. 
lating partly to the utility, formation, and management of 
Fruit, Kitchen, and Cottage Gardens, and Orchards, &c. 
Lond. Svo. 1S20. 

1780. Walpole, Horace, afterwards Earl of Orford, 
youngest son of Sir Robert Walpole bom in 1718 ; 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1109 



a man of taste and genius, author of the Castle of 
Otranto, several papers in the World, &c. ; he 
sat in parUament from 1741 to 1768, when he retired, 
and devoted his time to the improvement of his 
villa, Strawberry-hill, near Twickenham. In 1791 
he succeeded his nephew as Earl of Orford, but 
never took his seat in the House of Lords. He died 
in 1797. 

1. On Modem Gardening, published \n the Anecdotes of 
Painting ; in a later edition of 1782 are some additional 
notes. 

Various Remarks on Gardening occur in his correspond- 
ence with Mr. Montague, published in 1818, in 4to. 

1781. Darwin, Erasmus, M.D. F.KS., an eminent 
physician and poet, born at Elton near Newark, in 
Nottinghamshire, in 1731. Completed his medical 
studies at Edinburgh, settled at Litchfield, where 
he resided the greater part of his life : but went to 
Derby in 1781, and died there in 1802. As a poet 
he is esteemed rather gaudy and fanciful ; as a plii- 
losopher, he is apt to indulge in hypothesis ; but he 
possesses the great quality of being totally exempt 
from every kind of prejudice. 

Phytologia, or the Philosophy of Agriculture and Garden- 
hig, with 'the Theory of Draining Morasses, and with an im- 
proved construction of the Drill Plough. Lond. 1800. 4to. 

1781. Fulmer, Samuel. 

The Young Gardener's best Companion for the Kitchen and 
Fruit Garden. Lond. 12mo. 

1781. Lettsom, John Coakley, M.D. r.R.S., an 
eminent physician in London, was born on a small 
isle called little Van Dyke, near Tortola, in 1744 ; 
died 1815. 

1. Hovtus Uptonensis ; or a Catalogue of Stove and Green- 
house Plants in Dr. Fothergill's Garden, at his death. Lond. 
1781. 8ve. 

2. Grovehill ; a Rural and Horticultural Sketch. Lond. 
1804. 4to. 

7>. On the Beta Cicla, or Root of Scarcity. (Caled, Hort. 
Mem. i. 420.) 
1783. Anon. 

Some thoughts on Building and Planting, addressed to Sir 
James Lowtlier, Bart, published in Dodsley's collection of 
poems for this year. 

1783. Bryant, Charles, of Norwich. 

1. Flora Diajtetica, or the History of Esculent Plants, both 
Domestic and Foreign, in which they are accurately described 
and reduced to their Linnsean, generic, and specific names, 
with their English names annexed. Lond. 1783. 8vo. 

2. A Dictionary of the Ornamental Trees, Shrubs, and 
Plants, most commonly cultivated in the Plantations, Gar- 
dens, and Stoves of Great Britain ; arrEmged according to the 
Linnaean generic names, and containing full and accurate 
Descriptions of the Genera and Species, with the names 
properly accented. Norwich, 1790. 8vo. 

1783. Falconer, William, M.D. F.R.S., physician 
to the general hospital, Bath ; author of a num- 
ber of medical works, and of Remarks on the 
influence of climate, situation, nature of country, 
population, nature of food, and way of life ; on 
the disposition and temper, manner and behaviour, 
intellects, laws and customs, forms of government, 
and religion of mankind. A most interesting 
work. 

1. An Historical View of the Taste for Gardening and 
•Laying out Grounds among the Nations of Antiquity. 8vo. 
The principal parts of this tract were originally printed in the 
Literary and Philosophical Memoirs of the Manchester So- 
ciety. 8vo. 

2. An Essay on the Preservation of the Health of Persons 
employed in Agriculture ; and on the Cure of Diseases inci- 
dent to that way of life. Lond. 1789. 8vo. 

3. Miscellaneous Tracts and Collections relating to Natural 
History ; selected from the principal writers of antiquity on 
that subject. Lond. 1793. 4to. 

1784. Curtis, William, a botanical writer, was born 
at Alton in Hampshire in 1746. He served his ap- 
prenticeship as an apothecary to his grandfather, 
and while in that situation cultivated botany with 
eagerness. At the age of twenty he came to Lon- 
don, and entered into the service of Mr. Talwin of 
Gracechurch-street, to whose business he succeed- 
ed. His love of botany, however, induced him to 
give up the shop, and he became a lecturer and de- 
monstrator in his favorite science. His first garden 
was at Bermondsey, and afterwards he occupied a 
more extensive one at Lambeth, which he ex- 
changed for another at Brompton. In 1771, he pub- 
lished Instructions for Collecting and Preserving 
Insects; and in the following year a translation of 
the Fundamenta Entomologice of Linnasus, with the 
title of an Introduction to the Knowledge of In- 
sects. In 1777, appeared the first number of his 
Flora Londonensis, which was completed in six 
fasciculi of seventy-two plates each. This work 
was followed by the Botanical Magazine, in monthly 
numbers. In 1782 he published a History of the 
Brown-tailed Moth ; besides which he wrote Prac- 
tical Observations on the British Grasses, and some 
papers in the transactions of the Linnsan Society, 
ef which he was a member. He died in 1799, and 

4 B 



was buried at Battersea ; after his death his lectures 
were published with colored plates. 

1. A Catalogue of British Medical, Culinary, and Agricul- 
tural Plants, cultivated in the London Botanical Garden. 
Lond. 1784. 12mo. 

Mr. C. commenced the Botanical Magazine in 1787. A 
■work which has met with great encouragement, and has done 
much to diffuse a general taste for botany. It is still con- 
tinued by Dr. Sims. 

2. Observations on Aphides, chiefly intended to show tl-.at 
they are the principal cause of Blights in Plants, and the sole 
cause of the Honey Dew. (Tram. Linn. Hoc. xi. 75. 1802, 
posth.) 

1784. Bodenhurst, T. 

A Description of Hawkstone in Shropshire, the seat of Sir 
Richard Hill, Bart, in 1799. 12mo. 

1785. Anon, 

Miscellanies on Ancient and Modem Gardening, and on 
the Scenery of Nature. Lond. 8vo. 

1785. Kyle, Thomas, gardener to the Hon. Baron 
Stewart of Moredun, near Edinburgh. One of tiie 
first gardeners in Scotland of his time. 

Treatise on the Management of the Peach and Nectarine 
Trees, either in Forcing-houses or on hot and common Walls. 
Edin. 8vo. 

1785. Marshall, William, Esq., a native of York- 
shire, brought up to trade; was some years in the 
West Indies, as a planter ; returned about 177.5, and 
took a farm in Surrey ; went down into Norfolk as 
agent to Sir Harbord Harbord's estates in 1780 ; 
left this situation in 1784, and went and resided at 
Statfold, near the junction of the four counties of 
Leicester, Warwick, Stafibrd, and Derby, where he 
remained till 1786, occupied in collecting materials 
for his economical surveys, and in printing some of 
his works. From this time, till about 1808, he re- 
sided chiefly in Clement's Inn, London, in winter, 
and visited different parts of the country during 
summer. He spent one summer in Perthshire, 
chiefiy on the Earl of Bredalbane's estate's at Tay- 
mouth ; and partly also on the Earl of Mansfield's at 
Scone. He proposed arrangements for the tenant- 
able lands, and also the park and woody scenery on 
various estates ; and finally retired to a considerable 
property he purchased in his native county, in the 
Vale of Cleveland, in 1808, where he died at an ad- 
vanced age, in 1819. He was a man of little educa- 
tion, but of a strong and steady mind ; and pursued, 
in the most consistent manner, from the year 1780 
to his death, the plan he originally laid down ; that 
of collecting and condensing the agricultural prac- 
tices of the different counties of England, with a 
view to a general work on Landed Property, which 
he pubhshed; another on Agriculture, which he 
did not live to complete ; and a Rural Institute, in 
Which he was supplanted by the Board of Agri- 
culture. 

1. Planting and Rural Ornament, 1vol. 8vo. A second 
edition in 2 vols, in 1796. 

2. A Review of the Landscape, a dic'actic poem ; also an 
Essay on the Picturesque ; together with Practical Remarks 
on Rural Ornament. Lond. 1796. 

1786. Brocq, Philip he, M. A., chaplain to the 
Duke of Gloucester. About the time he published 
his work on the Vine, he took out a patent for 
" training all sorts of fruit-trees or vines near the 
ground," as suggested by Lord Bacon, and practised 
at the time the patent was taken out by F. X. Vis- 
pre, at Wimbledon, and subsequently at Chelsea. 
(See Speechley, Treatise on the Fine, 8vo. edition, 
p. 205.) 

1. A Description of certain Methods of Planting, Training, 
and Managing all kinds of Fruit Trees, Vines, ike. Lond. 
1786. 8vo. 

2. Sketch of a Plan for making the Tract of Land called the 
New Forest, a real Forest, and for various other purposes of 
the first national importance. Stockdale, 1793. 8vo. 

1786. Browne, Robert, gardener to Sir Hai'bcrd 
Harbord, Bart, at Gunton, in Norfolk. 

A method to preserve Peach and Nectarine Trees from the 
Effects of the Mildew ; and for the destroying the red spider 
in melon frames, and other insects which infest plants in 
stoves, and trees, shrubs, &c. in the open garden. Lond.l2mo. 

1786. Vispre, Francis Xavier. 

A Dissertation on the Growth of Wine In England. Bath, 
8vo. 

1789. Emmerich, Lieutenant-colonel A., a Ger- 
man gentleman, author of a tract on his own pro- 
fession, and deputy-surveyor of the woods and 
forests under Mr. Robinson. 

The Culture of Forests ; with an Appendix, in which the 
state of the Royal Forests is considered, and a system proposed 
for their improvement. Lond, 1789. 8vo. 

1789. Grcsffer, John, a native of Germany, who 
came to England about the middle of the eighteenth 
century, and after being some time under Miller, 
was gardener to James Vcre, Esq., of Kensington- 
Gore. Afterwards he joined Thompson, a gardener, 
and Gordon, a seedsman, in establishing a imrscry at 
Mile-end. When Gordon died, the nursery became 
the sole property of Thompson, the present pro- 

3 



1110 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



prietor ; and Grjeffer, soon afterwards, received from 
Sir Joseph Banks the appointment of gardener to the 
King of Naples, at Caserta. Here he laid out an 
English garden, and richly stocked it with exotics 
from the Hammersmith nursery. He was employed 
by Admiral Lord Nelson to look after his estate of 
Bronte, and by various native noblemen to lay out 
their grounds ;'he remained in his situation as gar- 
dener at Caserta during Murat's reign, and died 
there, or was in part murdered when he fell from 
his gig, within a mile of his own house in 1816. 

A descriptive Catalosue of upwards of 1100 species and va- 
rieties of Herbaceous or Perennial Plants : divided into si-t 
columns, exhibiting, at one view, the names, magnitude, height 
and situation, time of flowerine, color of the flowers, and native 
country of each species. With a List of Hardy Ferns, for the 
decoration of Northern Borders, and the most ornamental 
Annuals. Lond. 1789- 8vo. 

1789. Sowerby, Ja?>ies, F.L.S. A botanical drafts- 
man and engraver to whom science is much indebted. 
He formed a rich museum of botany and miner- 
alogy, and published different valuable works on the 
latter subject ; he died in 1822. 

1. The Florist's Delight, containinK six Coloured Figures, 
■with the Botanical Descriptions. Lond. 1791. fol. 

2. Figures of English Fungi, or JMushrooms. Lond. 1797— 
1803. 3 vols. fol. 

3. Notice on the Effect of Watering Fruit Trees early In the 
Spring. (Hurt. Tran&. ii. 271 ) 

1790. BruUes, . 

Hints for the Management of Hot-beds, and Directions for 
the Culture of early Cacuinbers and :\Ielons. To which are 
added, brief Instructions for Pruning Wall and Espalier Trees. 
Bath, 1790. 8vo. 

1791. Forsyth, miUam, Rsq. F.A.S., a native of 
Scotland, born at Old Meldrum in Aberdeenshire in 
1737 ; came to England in 1763, and was some time 
employed under Miller at Chelsea. He was after- 
wards gardener at Sion House, till Miller's removal 
in 1769, when he succeeded him as curator of the 
Chelsea garden ; and at the death of the late Thomas 
Robinson, Esq. royal gardener at Kensington, in 
1784, he was appointed to that situation. Here, 
finding the fruit-trees in an old worn-out state, he 
began a system of renovation by heading down, and 
renewing the soil, in which he was highly successful; 
and for discovering the ingredients of a composition 
■with which he covered over the wounds, received 
a parliamentary reward. His works procured him 
the pubhshed animadversions of Knight, M'Phail, 
Pontey, and others. He died in 1804, and left a son 
an eminent London seedsman, and author of a bo- 
tanical catalogue, &c. 

1. Observations on the Diseases, Defects, and Injuries in all 
kinds of Fruit Trees ; with an Account of a particular method 
of Cure, invented and practised by the Author. Lond. 1791. 
8vo. 

2. Treatise on the Culture and Management of Fruit Trees; 
in which a new method of pruning and training is fully de- 
scribed. With plates. Lond. 1S02. 4to. 

1791. Linncean Society. 

Transactions of the Linnacan Society, vol. i. 4to. : vol. xii. 
completed in 1820. These volumes contain some papers con- 
nected with gardening; such for example as : 1. Biographical 
Memoirs of several Norwich Botanists, vol. vii. 2. Notes re- 
lating to Botany, and collected from the manuscrijits of the 

late Peter CoUinson, Esq. F. R. S. and , vol. x. 270. 8. On 

the supposed Effect of 1\7 upon Trees, vol. xi. 27. 

1791. Salisbury, Richard Anthony, Esq. F.RS., a 
learned botanist, enthusiastically attached to that 
study, and to gardening. Salisbury was educated 
at North Bierly and the university of Edinburgh. 
He had a fine garden (now a public nursery) 
at Chapel AUerton, near Leeds, and afterwards 
possessed that of the late Peter CoUinson, Esq., at 
Mill-hill, near London. He now resides in the me- 
tropolis, and is an active member of and contributor 
to the Linnasan and Horticultural Societies. 

1. On the Culti ration of the Polianthes Tuberosa, or Tube- 
rose; with its Botanical Description and Figure. (Tram. 
Sortie. Soc. i. 41. 1812.) 

2. Observations on the different Species of Dahlia, and the 
best Method of cultivating them in Great Britain, (lb. 84.) 

3. A short Account of Nectarines and Peaches naturally pro- 
duced on the same Branch, (lb. 103.) 

4. Some Account of the Red Doyenne Pear, ■vvith a Figure, 
(lb. 230.) 

5. Some --Vccount of two New Varieties of Grape. (lb. 258.) 

6. On the Cultivation of Rare Plants. (lb. 261.) 

7. On the Cultivation of the Jamrosade (Eugenia Jambos. 
L.) in the National Garden at Paris, (lb. Append. 11.) 

8. On the '\'egetation of High Jlountains; translated from a 
Paper of M. Raymond's, (lb. 15.) 

9. Description "of a Bank for Alpine Plants, by Mops. Thouin, 
abridged, (lb. 24.) 

10. On the Cultivation of the MonopsisConspicus. {lb. ii. 37. 
1315.) 

11. Some Account of the Chiogenes Serpyllifolia, or Snow- 
berry, a fruit nearlv allied to the Cranberry. (lb. 94.) 

12. Some account of the Melidora Pellucida, a beautiful 
Evergreen Shrub from China. (lb. 156.) 

12- DescriptionofOrd's Apple. (lb. 285. 1817.) 

1792. Maddock, Ja?nes, originally from Warring- 
ton in Lancashire, a quaker, and commercial florist 
at Walworth, died about 1806. 



Florist's Directory, and complete Treatise on the Culttire 
and Management of Flowers, with a Supplenientary Essay oa 
Soils, Manure, &c. ; with plates. Lond. 1792. Svo. iO<. 

1792. Martyn, Thomas, B.D. F.R.S. son of Dr. 
John Martyn, who read botanical lectures at C^m. 
bridge, before he was elected professor, on Bradley's 
neglecting to perform his office. He succeeded his 
father as Professor of Botany in 1761 ; is author of 
a Sermon, a Tour in Italy, some translations and 
commentaries, and various botanical works. 

1. The Gardener's and Botanist's Dictionary of the late 
Philip Miller, corrected and newly arranged, ■with additions. 
Lond. 1803-1807. 4 vols. fol. 

1792. S)?iith, Sir Ja?>ies Edward, M. D. F. R, S. 
P. L. S., a distinguished naturalist, founder and 
president of the LinnEean Society ; author and edi- 
tor of many botanical works, the principal of which 
are the Flo>-a Britannica and Flora Grceca. 

1. Sketch of a Tour on the Continent, in the years 17S6 and 
1787. (Containing some account of the gardens of France and 
Italy.) Lond. 1793. 3 vols. Svo. 

2. Tour to Hafod, in Cardiganshire, the Seat of Thomas 
Johnes, Esq. Lond. ISIO. super fol. 

3. Directions for raising Ferns from Seed, as practised by 
Mr. Henry Shepherd of Liverpool. (Hort. Trans, iii. p. 33S.) 

1793. Steele, Richard, gardener at Thirsk in York- 
shire. 

An Essay upon Gardening ; containing a Catalogue of Exotic 
Plants for Stoves and Greenhouses of British Gardens ; the best 
Method of planting the Hot-house \'ine, &c. ; with the History 
of Gardening, and a Contrast of the ancient with the modern 
taste. York, 1793. 4to. 

This work is Uttle more than a catalogue of trees and plants, 
but contains an elevation of the stove erected by H.--V. Salisbury, 
Esq. at Chapel AUerton. 

1793. Truster, Rev. John, LL.D. a singular liter- 
ary character and low popular compiler, was born in 
London in 1735. He was brought up to physic in a 
very humble line ; but contrived to get into orders, 
and for some time officiated as a curate. At length, 
in 1771, he began to publish abridgments of popular 
sermons, printed in imitation of manuscript ; and 
next he established a bookselling business upon an 
extensive scale. Having thus acquired a fortune, he 
purchased an estate at Englefield-green, where he 
died in 1820. 

1. The Art of Gardening. Lond. Svo. 

2. The Lady's Gardener's Companion. Iiond. ISmo. 1816. 

1794. Haworth, Adrian Hardy, Esq., F. L. and 
H. S., of Cottenham near Beverley, Yorkshire, a bo- 
tanist and horticultural amateur,' author of a work 
on insects. 

1. Observations on the Genus of Mesembryanthemum, in 
t^wo parts; containing Scientific Descriptions of above 130 
species, about 50 of which are new ; Directions for their 
management, new jirrangements of the Species, Reference 
to Authors, and a great variety of critical, philosophical, and 
explanatory Remarks. Lond.'l794. Svo. 
^ 2. Synopsis Plantarum Succulentarum, cum Descriptionibus 
Synonvmis, Locis, Observationibus --iugUcanis Culiuraque. 
Lond.'l812. Svo. 

3. -4. new Arrangement ofthe Genus Narcissus. (Trans.LinH. 
Soc. 1799. vol. V.) 

4. A new Arrangement of the Genus -Aloe. (lb. ISOl. toI. vil. 
p. 1.) 

5. On the Cultivation of Crocuses, with a short account of the 
different Species known at present. (Traiu. Hort. vol. ii. p. 122. 
1815.) 

1794. Hayes, Samuel, Esq. M. R. I. A., an Irish 
author. 

-1 Practical Treatise on Planting. Dublin. Svo. 
• 1794. Knight, Richard Payne, Esq., a gentleman 
of great classical attainments, and of refined taste ; 
proprietor of a fine demesne and park near Ludlow, 
on which he built an elegant mansion from his own 
designs. After residing there many years, he gave up 
the possession to his brother, the celebrated horticul- 
turist, and now lives chiefly in London. 

The Landscape, a didactic pr)em. 4to. two plates. This 
pro<luced a Sketch from the Landscape, a poem in 4to. gene- 
rally attributed to the poet IMason ; and a Review, by AV. Mar- 
shall ; the latter a very virulent production. 

1794. M'Phail, Jarties, a native of Aberdeenshire ; 
gardener for twenty years to Lord Hawkesbury 
(now the Earl of Liverpool), at Addiscorabe Place, 
near Croydon. An excellent grower of pines and 
melons ; author of some tracts on Agriculture and 
the Poor Laws. 

1. Treatise on the Culture of the Cucumber; shewing a new 
and advantageous method of Cultivating that Plant, ■n-ith full 
Directions for the ^Management thereof, and the degree of Heat 
it requires on every Day of the Year, &c. To which are added. 
Hints and Observations on the Improvement of -Agriculture. 
Lond. 1794. Svo. 

2. The Gardener's Remembrancer throughout the Year, 
exhibiting the surest and most improved Methods of JIanuring, 
Digging, Sowing, &c. ; the Nature of Earth, Water, Heat, 
Air, and Climate, best adapted for the Culture of Plants, and 
Production of Fruits, Flowers, and esculent Vegetables, in the 
forcing way ; the Causes and Symptoms of Disease and Barren- 
ness in Trees of every kind, with means of Prevention and 
Cure. To which is prefixed a Mew of Mr. Forsyth's Treatise 
on Trees. Lond. Svo. 

1794. Price, Uvedale, Esq., of Foxley, near He- 
reford. A geuUeman and scholar of grtat taste; 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING- 



1111 



enthusiastically fond of pictures, statues, and pic- 
turesque beauty in all objects and mental impres- 
sions ; and who has greatly improved and beautified 
his own estate. 

1. An Essaj on the Picturesque, as comiiareJ with the Sub- 
lime and the Beautiful, and on the Use of Studying Pictures 
for the Purpose of improving Real Landscape. Lond. 171)4. 

5i. A Dialo^ie on the Distinct Characters of the Picturesque 
and the Beautiful, in Answer to the Objections of Mr, Knight. 
JLond, IvSOl.Svo. 

3. Letter to H. Repton, Esq. on the Application of the Prac- 
tice, as well as the Principles, of Landscape Paintint;, to Land 
scape GardeninK, intended as a Supplement to the Essay on the 
Picturesque ; to which is prefixed Mr. Repton's letter to Mr. 
Price. Lond. 1795. 8vo. 

1794. Shaw, Ja?nes, author of a Tour in the Ne- 
therlands. 

Plans, Elevations, Sections, Observations, and Explanations 
of Forcing-houses in Gardening. \S'hitby. Fol. 

1795. Knight, Tho7nas Andrew, Esq. F. R. S. L. S. 
&c. president of the Horticultural Society. A dis- 
tinguished vegetable pliysiologist a!id horticulturist; 
brother to R. P. Knight, Esq. (See 1794) 

1. A Treati.se on the Culture of the -\pple and Pear, and on 
the Manufacture of Cyder and Perry. Lond. 1797. I'zmo. 

2. Some Doubts relative to the Efficacy of Mr. Forsyth's 
Plaister, in renovating Trees. Lond. ISO'2. 4to. 

o. Report of a Committee of the Hortictiltural Society of 
lyondon. Lond. 1S05. 4to. 

4. Pomona Herefoniiensis ; or, a Descriptive Account of 
the old Cyder and Perry Fruits of Herefordshire. Lond. ISOD. 
4to 

5. Observations on the Grafting of Trees. (Phil.Tram. Ahr. 
svii. 569. 1795.) 

6. Experiments on the Fecundation of Vegetables. (lb. xviii. 
504. 1799.) 

7. Account of some Experiments on the Ascent of Sap in 
Trees. (lb. 553, ISOl.) 

8. Account of some late Experiments on the Descent of the 
Sap in Trees, (lb. 277. 1803.) 

9. Experiments and Observations on the Motion of the Sap in 
Trees. (lb. 185. 1804.) 

10. Concerning the State in which the true Sap of Trees is 
deposited during Winter. (lb. 88. 1805.) 

11. On the Reproduction of Buds. (Xb. 257.) 

12. On the Direction of the Radicle and Germen during the 
Vegetation of Seeds. (lb. 99. 1806.) 

15. On the inverted Action of the Albumous Vessels of Trees, 
(lb. 292.) 

14. On the Formation of the Bark of Trees. (lb. 103. 107.) 

15. On the Economy of Bees. (lb. 234.) 

16. On the Inconvertibility of Bark into Alburnum. (lb. 103. 
1808.) 

17. On the Origin and Office of the Alburnum of Trees. (lb. 
313.) 

18. On the Origin and Formation of Roots. (lb. 169. 1809.) 

19. On the cornparative Influence of Male and Female 
Parents on their Offspring. (lb. 592.) 

20. On the Parts of Trees primarily Impaired by Age. (lb. 
178. ISia) 

21. On the Causes which influence the Direction of the 
Growth of Roots, (lb. 209. 181 1.) 

22. On the Motions of the Tendrils of Plants. (lb. 314. 
1812.) 

23. On Ice found in the Bottoms of Rivers. (lb. 286. 1816.) 

24. On the Action of detached Leaves of Plants. (lb. 
289.) 

25. Upon the Extent of the Expansion and Contraction of 
Timber in different Directions, relative to the Position of the 
Medulla of the Tree, (lb. 269. 1817.) 

26. Introductorv Remarks relative to the Objects wWch the 
Horticultvu-al Society have in view. (Hnrt. Trans, i. 1. 1S06.) 

27. Observations on a Method of producing new and early 
Fniits, (lb. 57.) 

28. On raising New and Early Varieties of the Potatoe. 
(lb. 57.) 

29. On the Advantages of Grafting Walnut, Mulberry, and 
Chestnut Trees. (lb. 60.) 

.. m. On a New Method of Training Fruit Trees. (Ih. 70.) 

31. A Description of a Forcing-house for Grapes. (lb. 99.) 

32. On the proper Construction of Hot-bed Frames, (lb. 
142.) 

33. A short Accoimt of a new Apple called the Do\vnton 
Pippin. (lb. 145.) 

34. On the Management of the Onion. (lb. 157.) 

35. An improved Method of cultivating the --ilpine Straw- 
berry, (lb. 159.) 

36. On some V arieties of the Peach. (lb. 165.) 

37. On a new Variety of Pear. (lb. 178.) 
58. On Potatoes. (lb. 187.) 

39. A new and expeditious Jlode of Budding. (lb. 194.) 

40. On the best Method of Constructing a Peach-house, 
(lb. 199.) 

41. On the Culture of the Potatoe in Hot-beds. (lb. 211.) 

42. View of the Theory of Vegetation. (lb. 217.) 

43. A short Account of some Apples and Pears, of which 
<Jrafts were presented to the IMembers of the Horticultural 
Society. (lb. 226.) 

44. A new Method of Grafting, with a figure of it. (lb. 239-) 

45. On the .Advantages of emj)loying Vegetable Blatter as 
Manure in a fresh state. (lb. 248.) 

46. On some Early Varieties of the Potatoe, (lb. 244.) 

47. On facilitating the Emission of Roots from Layers. (lb. 
255.) 

48. Some Account of Two new Varieties of Grape. (lb. 258.) 

49. Some Account of the Elton Pear, with a figure. 
(H).ii. 1.) 



50. On the Transnlantation of Biossom-Buds. (lb. 7.) 

" va! " . - V ^ " ;•■ 

(lb. 19.) 

53, On inarching leafles.s Branches of Peach Trees, (lb. 35.) 



On an early V'ariety of Grape from Amiens.' (lb. 10.) 
52. On the proper Stock for the Moor Park Apricot, (lb. 19.) 



54. On the Prevention of the Disease called the Curl in the 
Potatoe. (lb. 64.) 

. 55. On the Culture of the Mulberry. (lb. C8.) 

4 B 



57. On the Culture of the Pear Tree. (lb. 78.) 

58. On the Prevention of Mildew in particular Cases. (II). 82). 

59. On the Culture of the Shallot, and some other bulbous- 
rooted Plants, (lb. 97.) 

^60.^ On the Propagation of the Slulberry Tree by CutUngs. 

61. On the beneficial Results of planting Potatoes, which 
have grown late in the preceding year. (lb. 125.) 

62. On the Application of Manure in a liquid form to Plants 
in Pots. (lb. 127.) 

63. On the ill Effects of excessive Heat in Forcing Houses 
during the Night. (lb. 150.) 

64. An .-Vccount of two Varieties of Cherry, raised at 
Downton. (lb. 157.) 

65. An Account of a new Variety of the Peach. (lb. 140.) 

66. On the 'Want of Permanence of Character in \'arieties 
of Fruit, when Propa^ted by Grafts and Buds. (lb. 160.) 

67. On the Jlode of Propagation of the Lycoperdon cancel- 
latum, a species of Fungus, which destroys the Leaves and 
Branches of the Pear Tree. (lb. 178.) 

68. On the Preservation of Fruits during Winter and 
Sprias. (lb. 193.) 

69. On the Effects of different kinds of Stocks in grafting, 
(lb. 199.) ^ 

70. Some Account of three new Cherries, the Elton, Black 
Eagle, and Waterloo. (lb. ii. 208.) 

71. .A.n .A-Ccount of three new Peaches, in a letter to 
Joseph Sabine, Esq. (lb. 214.) 

72. On the Culture of the Peach and Apricot, as Espalier 
Trees. (lb. 219.) 

73. On the Ventilation of Forcing-houses. (lb. 224.) 

74. Upon the Advantages of Propagating from the Roots ot 
old ungrafled Fruit Trees. (lb. 252.) 

75. On the Means of preserving Broccoli in Winter. (lb. 
304.) 

76. Observations on IMr. Brown's Account of bis Steaming 
Apparatus, with some Suggestions for the Improvement 
thereof, (lb. 524.) 

77. Observations on the Verdelho Grape. (lb. 527.) 

78. Suggestions for the Improvement of Sit George Stuart 
Mackenzie's Plan for Forcing-houses. (lb. 350.) 

79. Upon the proper Mode of Priming the Peach Tree in 
cold and late Situations- (lb. 364.) 

SO. Observations on the proper Management of Fruit Trees, 
■which are intended to be forced very early in the ensuing sea 
son. (lb. 568.) 

81. An Account of a Peach Tree, produced from the Seed 
of the Almond Tree, with some Observations on the Origin of 
the Peach Tree. (lb. iii. 1.) 

82. On the best Mode of Pruning and Training the Mul- 
berry Tree, when trained to a wall in a cold climate. (lb. 65.) 

85. Upon the \'ariations of the Red Currant (Ribes rubrura) 
when uropagated by Seed. (lb. 86.) 

84. Upon the Proj)agation of Varieties of the Walnut Tree, 
by budding. (lb. 155.) 

85. On a Method of Forcing Rhubarb in Pots. (lb. 154.) 

86. Upon the Pruning and Management of Transplanted 
Standard Trees, (lb. 157.) 

87. Upon the Variations of the Scarlet Strawberry (Fragaria 
Virginiana) when propagated by Seeds, (lb. 207.) 

88. Description and Account of a new early Black Cherry, 
(lb. 211.) 

89. Description of a new Seedling Plum. (lb. 214.) 

90. Upon the Preservation ot Fimts from ^V' asps. (lb. 259.) 

91. On Training the Fig Tree. (lb. '307.) 

92. On the superior Healthfiilness of Scions taken from the 
Trunks of Apple Trees, to those cut from the Extremities of 
the Branches. (lb. 587.) 

95. Observations upon the most advantageous Forms ot 
Garden Pots. (lb. 589.) 

94. Upon the Culture of the Guernsey Lily. (lb. .599.) 

95. Upon the different Qualities of the .Alburnum of Spring 
and \A'inter felled Trees. [PhU.Trans. n'iO.) 

96. Upon the Means of giving Strength to the Stems of 
Plants growing under Glass. {Hort. Tmns. iv. 1.) 

97. L pon the Culture of the Pine Apple without Bark, or 
other Hot-bed. (lb. 72.) 

98. On the most economical IMethod of employing Fuel in 
heating the Flues of Forcing-houses. (lb. 156.) 

99. Physiological Observations upon the Effects of partial 
Decortication, or Ringing the Stems or Branches of Fruit 
Trees. (lb. 159.) 

100. Further Particulars of the Downton Strawberrv. 
(lb. 197.) ^ 

101. Upon the Culture of the Fig-Tree in the Stove, 
(lb. 200.) 

102. On the Cultivation of the Cockscomb. (lb. 32L) 
105. Observations on Hybrids, (lb. 367.) 

104. Directions for preserving Buds of Fruit Trees in a ve. 
getative state, when sent to considerable distances. (lb. 405.) 

105. On the Management of Fruit Trees in Pots. (lb. 459.) 

106. An Account of an improved Alethod of raising earlv 
Potatoes. (lb. 447.) ' 

107. On Grafting the Vine. (lb. 495.) 

108. Further Observations on the Culture of the Pine Apple, 
(lb. V. 142.) 

109. Notice of a new ^'arietv of Ulmtis Suberosa, and on 
grafting tender Scions. (lb, 146.) 

1 10. Description of a Melon and Pine-pit. (lb. 225.) 

111. On the advantages and disadvantages of curvilinear 
hot-houses, (lb. 227.) 

112. A new and improved Method of cultivating the Melon, 
(lb. 258.) 

115. On the flat Peach of China. (lb. 271.) 

114. On the injurious influence of the plum-stock on the 
Moor Park Apricot. (lb. 2S7.) 

115. An Account of some Mule Plants, (lb. 292.) 

116. On obtaining early Crops of Peas. (lb. 321.) 

1795. Repton, Humphrey, Esq., a distinguished 
landscape-gardener, was born at Bury St. Edmund's, 
in Suffolk, in 1752. He accompanied Mr. Wyndham 
to Ireland in 1783, and for a short time held a lu- 
crative situation in the castle of Dublin ; but when 
his friend quitted that kingdom, Repton also re- 
4 



1112 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



turned to England. He now directed his attention 
to drawing, architecture, and particularly landscape- 
gardening ; in which last line he obtained consider- 
able employment. He died in 1818, leaving several 
sons, one of whom married the daughter of Lord 
Eldon. Repton published some books on miscel- 
laneous subjects ; but his principal works are on 
landscape-gardening. 

1. Letter to Uvedale Price, Esq. on Landscape-Gardening. 
1794. 4to. 

2. Sketches and Hints on Landscape-Gardening ; collected 
from designs and observations now in the possession of the 
different noblemen and gentlemen for ■whose use they were 
originally made ; the whole tending to establish tised princi- 

fles in the art of laying out grounds : 16 colored plates. Lond. 
795. folio. 

3. Observations on the Theory and Practice of Landscape- 
Gardening, including some Remarks on Grecian and Gothic 
Architecture, collected from various MSS. in the possession 
of different nohlemen and gentlemen ; the whole tending to 
establish fixed principles in the respective ziis : with many 
plates. Lond. lS03. 4to. 

4. Observations on the Changes in Landscape-Gardening. 
1806. 8vo. 

5. On the Introduction of Indian Architecture and Garden- 
ing. 1808. folio. 

6. On the supposed Effect of Iry upon Trees. [Linn. Trans. 
1810, Tol. xi. p. 27.) 

1796. Anon. Generally attributed to Mason the 
poet, author of the Englisfi Garden. (See 1772.) 

A Sketch from " The Landscape," a Poem, by R. P. 
Knight, Esq. Lond. 4to. 

1766. Bonn, James, F.L.S. HS. curator of the 
botanic garden at Cambridge ; died in 1817. 

Hortus Cantabrigiensis ; or, a Catalogue of Plants, indi- 
i;enous and foreign, cultivated In the U'alterian botanic 
;?arden, Cambridge. Camb.Svo. 

The ninth edition, edited and accented bj Frederick Pursh, 
in 1819, and one subsequently by Lindley. 

1796. Lindley, George, nurseryman at Catton, 
near Norwich. 

1. The Plan of an Orchard ; exhibiting at one View a select 
quantity of Trees, sufficient for Planting an acre and a half 
of Land, properly arranged according to their usual size of 
f^owtb, and hardiness of bearing, &c. Lond. 1796, a folio 
sheet. 

2. An Account of some of the best Varieties of Apples pe- 
culiar to, or cultirated in, the county of Norfolk. [Hori. 
Tram. iv. 65.) 

1796. Marshall, the Rev. Cimrlcs, ricar of Brixton, 
Northamptonshire. 

Introduction to the Knowledge and Practice of Gardening ; 
with Hints on Fish Ponds. Lond. 1796. I'imo. 

1797. Astley, Francis Duckenfield, Esq. of Duck- 
enfield Hall, near Aston, in Lancashire, member of 
the Manchester Agricultural Society ; now resident 
on the continent. 

1. A few Minutes' Advice to Gentlemen of Landed Pro- 
pertv, and the Admirers of Forest Scenery ; with Directions 
for Sowing, Raising, Planting, and the Management of Forest 
Trees. To which is added a Catalogue of Forest Trees, Fruit 
Trees, and Flowering Shrubs, witli their usual prices, as sold 
by the nurserymen and seedsmen. Chester. 12mo. 

2. Hints to Planters, collected from various authors of es- 
teemed authority. Manchester, 1807. 8vo. 

1797. Busch, Peter, father to Joseph Busch, gar- 
oener to the Emperor of Russia. 

Method to destroy or drive away Earth Worms, and various 
other Insects hurtfiil to Fields or (iardens. {Phil. Mag. I. 169.) 

1797. Bucknal, Thomas Skip Dyot, Esq. 

The Orchardist, or a System cf close Pruning and Medication 
for establishing the Science of Orcharding, kc Extracted 
from the xi. lii. xiii. and xir. vols, of the Society's Tmnsac- 
tions for the Encouragement of Arts, &c. with additions. 
Lond. 1797. Svo. 

1797. Salisbury, WlUam, nurserj'man and botan- 
ist, botanic garden, Brompton j formerly of Sloane 
Square. 

1. Hortus Paddingtonensis ; or, a Catalogue of Plants culti- 
vated in the garden of J. Svmmons, Esq. Paddington House. 
Lond. 1797. Svo. 

2. Method of packing Plants and Trees intended for Ex- 
portation, so as to preserve the 'Vegetative Powers tor many 
months. {Nicholson's Journal, xxx. 559. ISll.) 

3. The Botanist's Companion, or an Introduction to the 
Knowledge of Practical Botany, and the Uses of PlanL=, either 
growing wild in Great Britain, or cultivated for the Purposes 
of Agriculture, Medicine, Rural Economy, or the Art:s. 
Lond. 2 vols. 12mo. 1816. 

4. Hints to the Proprietors of Orchards. 1S17. 12mo. 

5. The Cottager's Companion, or a Complete System of 
Cottage Gardening; intended to instruct the Industrious 
Poor of the United Kingdom of Great Britain. To which is 
added a desi!riptive List of Plants growing wild, which are 
useful for Culinary Purposes. Lond. 12mo."lS18. 

1798. Andrews, Henry, botanical painter and en- 
graver in London. 

1. Engravings of Ericas, or Heaths, with Botatiical Descrip- 
tions. Lond. 1796. folio. 

2. The Botanist's Repository, with colored figures of such 
Plants as have not appeared in any similar publication. Loud. 
1797-99. 2 vols. 4to. 

3. A Review of Plants hitherto figured in the Botanist's 
Repository. Lond. ISOl. 4to. 

4. The Heathery, or Monograph of the Genus Erica. (Pub- 
lished in monthly 'numbers.) vols. i. tovi. 1804 to 1812. 

1798. Archer, Clement, Esq. M.R.I. A. 
Miscellaneous Obseryations on the Effect of Oxygen on 
the Animal and Vegetable Systems ; and an Attempt to prove 



why some Plants are Evergreen and others Deciduous. Part I. 
Svo. Bath. 

179S. Xicol, Walter, a Scotch horticultural archi- 
tect, and author of merit; son of the gardener who. 
planned and executed the gardens and pleasure- 
grounds of Raith in Fifeshire. After receiving the 
rudiments of his horticultural education at Raith, 
he went to England, and soon afterwards became 
head gardener to the Marquis of Townshend, at 
Rainham Hall, in Suffolk. He afterwards returned 
to Scotland, and became head gardener to General 
Wemyss, at Wemyss Castle, in Fifeshire. About 
1797 he left his situation, settled in Edinburgh, and 
commenced his career as horticultural architect. 
In the year 1810 he undertook an extensive journey 
through England, for the purpose of visiting the 
principal seats and plantations, with a view, on his 
return, to compose the Planter's Calendar. This 
work had scarcely commenced, when he was seized 
with an illness which carried him off suddenly in 
March 1811. 

1. The Scotch Forcing Gardener; together with Instruc- 
tions on the Management of tlie Green-house, Hot-walls, &c. 
Illustrated with Plates. Edin. 179S. Svo. 

2. The Practical Planter ; or, a Treatise on Forest Planting: 
comprehending the Culture and Management of Planted and 
Natural Timber ; also the Management of Hedges, Fences, 
and the Construction of Stone Walls, &c. Edin. 1799. Svo. 

3. The Villa Garden Directory : or Monthly Index of Wort 
to be done in the Town and \'ilia Gardens, Shrubberies, Par- 
terres, &c. Edin. 1809. Svo. 

4. "The Gardener's Kalendar ; or Monthly Directory of 
Operations in every Branch of Horticulture. Edin. ISIO. 

5. The Planter's Kalendar; or, the Nurseryman and 
Forester's Guide in the oiierations of the Nursery, the Forest, 
and the Grove. Completed by Sang. Edin. )S12. Svo. 

1798. Robinson, , a London architect, 

nephew to Thomas Robinson, Esq. gardener to Geo. 
III. at Kensington. 

Forms of Stoves used for Forcing-houses. Lond. oblong 
4 to. 

1800. HiU, Baniel,'S\.T). F.H.S. 

1. Practical Observations on the Use of Oxygen, or Vital Air, 
in the Cure of Diseases; to which are added a few Experi- 
ments on Plants. Part I. Lond. 1800. 4to. 

2. On the Use of Oxygen .-Ur, in promoting %'egetation. 
{Hort. Trans, i. 255. 1815.) 

1800. Pontcy, Ifilliaju, planter and forest pruner 
to the Duke of Bedford, and ornamental gardener ; 
resident at Huddersfield, where his brother is a 
respectable nurseryman. 

1. The Profitable Planter ; a Treatise on the Cultivation of 
the Inarch and Scotch Fir Timber, shewing that their excel- 
lent quality, especially that of the former, will render them so 
essentially usetui, as greatly to promote the interests of the 
country. Huddersfield, 1800. Svo. 

2. The Forest Pruner, or Timber Owner's Assistant ; being 
a Treatise on the Training or Management of British Timber 
Trees, whether intended for use, ornament, or shelter ; includ- 
ing an explanation of the causes of their general diseases and 
defects, with means of prevention, and remedies, where practi- 
cable; also, an examination of the properties of English Fir 
Timber, with remarks on the detects of the old, and the out- 
lines of a new system for the management of Oak M'oods. 
With eight explanatory plates. Ixind. 1S05. Svo. 

3. The rural improver, &c. Huddersfield, 1823. 4to. 

1802. Society of Practical Gardeners ; evidently, 
however, a compilation by a hackney writer who 
knew little of the subject. 

Rural Recreations, or the Gardener's Instructor ; exhibiting 
in a clear and perspicuous manner all the Operations necessary 
in the Kitchen, Flower, and Fruit Gardens. &c. for every 
Month in the Vear ; with a Treatise on the Management of 
Bees, &c. and Catalogues of Plants. Lond. Svo. 

1803. Loudon, John Claudius, landscape-gardener, 
and author of some works on agriculture ; bom in 
Lanarkshire in 1782, began to practise in 1S03; to 
farm extensively in Oxfordshire in 1S09, and in 
Middlesex in ISIO ; travelling on the continent in 
1813-14-15, agam in 1819, now residing at Bays- 
water. 

1. Observations on laving out the public Squares of London. 
(Literary Journal, 1805".) 

2. Observations on the Formation and Management of 
Useful and Ornamental Plantations ; on the Theory and 
Practice of Landscape Gardening, and on gaining and em- 
banking Land from Rivers, or the Sea. Edin. 1804. Svo. 

3. A short Treatise on some Improvements lately made in 
Hot-houses. Edin. 180.T Svo. 

4. .-i. Treatise oa forming, improving, and managing 
Country Residences, and on the choice of Situations appro- 
priate to every class of Purchasers, ^^'ith an .Appendix, con- 
taining an Enquiry into the utility and merits of Mr. Repton's 
Mode of showing'Efrects bv Slides and Sketches, and Stric- 
tures on his Opinions and Fractice in Landscape Gardening. 
Illustrated by Descriptions of Scenery and Buildings, by 
references to Country Seats, and passages of Covmtry in most 
parts of Great Britain, and by 52 engravings. Lond. 1806. 2 
vols. 4to. 

5. Hints on the Formation of Gardens and Pleasure-Gronnds, 
&c. 4to. plates. 1812. 

6. Remarks on the Construction of Hot-houses ; pointing out 
the most ad vantagsous Forms, Materials, and Contrivances to 
be used in their Construction ; with a Review of the various 
INIethods of building them in foreign countries, as well as in 
England ; with 10 plates, from etchings on stone. 1817. 4lo. 

7. Sketches of Curvilinear Hot-houses; with a Description 



Book I. 



BRITISH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



Ills 



of the various purposes in Horticultural and General Architec- 
ture, to which a solid iron Sash-bar, lately invented, is appli- 
cable. 1818. 

8. A comparative View of the common and curvilinear 
Mode of rooHng Hot-houses. Lond. folio. 1818. 

9. iincyclopiedia of Gardening. Lond. 8vo. 182'i. 

10. The different modesof cultivating the Pine Apple from 
its first introduction to Europe to the improvements of T. A. 
ICnight, Esq. in 18'-^5. Lond. Svo. 182'^. 

1803. Moriarty, Mrs. Henrietta Maria, author of 
several novels. 

Viridarium ; or. Greenhouse Plants ; containing fifty plates, 
drawn and colored from Nature. 1803. 8vo. 

1804. Amos, Wil/iatn, formerly a gardener and 
bailiff to a nobleman, and afterwards a farmer at 
Brothertoft, Lincolnshire, author of some works on 
the drill husbandry. 

Minutes of Agriculture and Planting, &c. Lond. 1804. 4to. 

1805. Banks, Sir Joseph, Bart., president of the 
Royal Society, was the son of William Banks, Esq. 
of RevesbyAbbey in Lincolnshire, and born there 
in 1743. He received his education first at Eton, 
and next at Oxford, but left the university on the 
death of his father in 1761 ; and two years afterwards 
made a voyage to Labrador and Newfoundland. 
In 1768, he and Dr. Solander went with Lieutenant 
Cook to Otaheite; in which voyage Mr. Banks 
narrowly escaped perishing by the frost, on the 
island of Terra del Fuego. After his return he re- 
ceived the degree of doctor of laws at Oxford ; and 
in 1772 undertook a voyage to Iceland and the West- 
em Isles of Scotland. In 1778 he received' the 
Order of the Bath, and was elected president of the 
Royal Society. In 1781 he was created a baronet ; 
but about two years afterwards his conduct in the 
Royal Society gave such offence to the scientific 
members as had nearly produced a schism : this 
tempest, however, was dispersed, and the president 
retained his seat without any farther opposition to 
the end of his life. Sir Joseph, though afflicted for 
many years with the gout, continued his exertions 
for the improvement of agriculture and the exten- 
sion of natural historv to the very last of his long 
and useful life. He died May 9. 1820. He has some 
papers in the Philosophical Transactions, and pub- 
lished besides a tract on the Rust on Wheat. 

1. An Attempt to ascertain the Time when the Potatoe 
(Solanum Tuberosum), was first introduced into the United 
Kingdom, with some Account of the Hill ^Vheat of Lidia. 
(Hort. Trans, i. 8.) 

2. Some Hints respecting the inuring Tender Plants to our 
Climate. (lb. 21.) 

3. On the Revival of an obsolete Mode of managing Straw- 
berries, (lb. 54.) 

4. An Account of the Method of Cultivating the American 
Cranberry at Spring Grove, (lb. 75.) 

5. On the Horticultural Management of the Sweet or Spanish 
Chestnut Tree. (lb. 140.) 

6. On the Forcing-Houses of the Romans, with a list of Fruits 
cultivated by them now in our (iardens. (lb. 147.) 

7. On some Exotics which endure the open Air in Devonshire, 
in a Letter to him, by A. Hawkins. (lb. 175.) 

8. A short Account of a Colored Figure of a new Apple, 
called the Spring-Grove Codling. (lb. 197.) 

9. On Ripening the Second Crop of Figs that grow on the new 
Shoots, (lb. 252.) 

10. Some Horticultural Observations, selected from French 
Authors. (lb. 4, Appendix.) 

11. Notice from a work of Monsieur Lelieur, on the Here- 
ditary Diseases of Fruit-Trees. (lb. 27. Appendix.) 

12. Notes relative to the first appearance of the Aphis Lani- 
^era, or the Apple-Tree Insects in this Country. (lb. vol. ii. 

13. On the Advantanges of turning the Branches of Fruit- 
Trees over the Walls against which, they are planted. 

1805. Dickson, Mr. Jarnes, KL.S. V.P.H.S., of the 
respectable and long established firm of Messrs. 
Dickson and Anderson, seedsmen and herbalists in 
Covent-garden, London. James Dickson was born 
at Kirke House in Peebleshire, in 1738, and acquired 
his first knowledge of gardening in the garden of the 
Earl of Traquhair. He afterwards improved him- 
self in the Brompton nursery, then the property of 
Jefferey ; he was head gardener in several places till 
1722, when he established the well known seed and 
herb shop in Covent-garden. Dickson's attention 
was first drawn to botany when a boy, by hearing 
one of his playmates enquire of another the name 
of a plant (Star of the Earth, Plantago Coronopus) 
which grew near them. Finding the boy able to 
answer the question he felt an impulse to obtain that 
kind of knowledge and superiority, and ever after- 
wards pursued his object with unremitting ardor. 
By directing his attention to a then neglected branch 
of botany, the mosses, he established for himself, 
says Sabine, " an imperishable reputation." He was 
one of the earUest members both of the Linnasan 
and Horticultural Societies. (See A Biographical 
Memoir, in Hort. Trans, v. App. 1.) 

1. On a Variety of the Brassica Napus, or Rape, which has 
long been cultivated upon the Continent. (Hm t. Trans, i. 26.) 

2. Observations on, and an Account of, the Tubers of the 



Lathyrus tuberosus, with Instructions for the Cultivation of the 
Plant in a Garden. (Hort. Trans, ii. 359. 1817.) 

3. On the Cultivation of the Rampion. (lb. lii. 19. 1818.) 
1805. Macdonald, Alexander, a fictitious name 
adopted by K. W. Dickson, M. D. formerly of Hen- 
don, Middlesex, author of Practical Agriculture^ 
and other works on farming. 

A complete Dictionary of Practical Gardening. 2 vols. 4to. 
plates. The plates of flowers from paintings by the late Syden- 
ham Edwards. 

1805. Parkyns, G. J., author of Monastic Re- 
mains; and generally reputed the author of the Six 
Designs for laying out Grounds, 1793, published 
with Soane's Designs for Villas. 

Architectural Sketches, folio. No. 1. These contain ])lans 
for laying out grounds, according to the different natural situ- 
ations, with descriptions : among others, a plan of Gen. Wash- 
ington's grounds at Vermont. 

1806. Anon. A lady, author of Conversations on 
Botany and some other works. 

The Florist's Manual. Lond. 12mo. 

1807. Ellis, Daniel, Esq. of Edinburgh. 

1. An Inquiry into the Changes induced on Atmospheric Air 
by the Germination of Seeds, the Vegetation of Plants, and the 
Respiration of Animals. Eclin. 1807. 8vo. 

2. Flurther Lnquiries into the Changes induced on Atmo- 
spheric Air by the Germination of Seeds, the Vegetation of 
Plants, and the Respiration of Animals. Edin. 1811. Svo. 

1807. Shaw, William. 

The Practical Gardener. Lond. Svo. 

1808. Griffin, V/illiam, formerly gardener to John 
Manners Sutton, Esq., at Kelham Hall near Not- 
tingham, and now to Samuel Smith, Esq., at Wood 
Hall, in Hertfordshire. 

1. A Treatise on the Culture of the Pine Apple. Newark. 
Svo. 

^^2^. On the Management of Grapes in Vineries. (Hort. Trans, i. 

1809. Knight, Joseph, F.H.S., nurseryman in the 

King's Road, Chelsea; formerly gardener to 

Hibbert, Esq., at Clapton, whose collection of plants 
he now possesses. 

1. An Essay on the Cultivation of the Plants belonging to the 
Order of the Proteae. Generally attributed to R. 11.' Salisbury. 
Lond. 1809. 4to. 

^^2^ On the Cultivation of Horse-Radish. {Hort. Trans, i. 207. 

1810. Alton, William Townsend, Esq., gardener to 
the king at Kew and Kensington. To the first 
situation he succeeded on the death of his father, 
William Alton, in 1793, and to the other on the 
death of William Forsyth, Esq., in 1804. 

1. Hortus Kewensis, or a Catalogue of Plants cultivated in 
the Royal Gardens at Kew ; by the late Mr. W. Aiton : a new- 
edition enlarged. Lond. 1810-13. 6 vols. Svo. 

2. An Epitome of the 2d edit, of Hortus Kewensis, for the 
Use of Practical Gardeners ; to which is added, a Selection of 
Esculent Vegetables and Fruits cultivated in the Royal Garden 
at Kew. Lond. 1814. Svo. 

3. Brief Practical Observations on the Cultivation of the Cu- 
cumber in the Royal Gardens at Kew, during the Autumn and 
Winter Months. {HoH. Trans, vol. u.) 

1810. Dean, B. and W., printers, Manchester. 

1. An Account of the different Gooseberry Shews used in 
Lancashire, Cheshire, &c. in the year 1810. To which is added, 
a Statement exhibiting at one view the number of Prizes won, 
by each sort of berry at the several Meetings. Manchester. 
12mo. continued annually. 

2. An Account of the Flower Shews in Lancashire, Cheshire 
&c. for 1817, continued annually. Manchester. 12mo. 

1810. The Caledonian Horticultural Society. 
Founded in 1809, chiefly through the exertions ot 
Dr. Androvv Duncan, Senior Professor of the In- 
stitutes of Medicine in the University of Edinburgh, 
It is a prosperous, well conducted, and most useful 
society. 

Memoirs of the Caledonian Horticultural Society. Edin 
3 vols. Svo. to 1824. 

1811. Lindegaard, Peter, gardener to the King of 
Denmark, at the royal gardens of Rosenburgh near 
Copenhagen. 

1. ( in the mode of forcing the vine in Denmark. Lond. Svo. 

2. An account of the methods of forcing peaches in Den- 
mark and Holland. (Hort. Trans, v. 320.) 

1811. Playnes, Thomas, nurseryman, at Oundle, 
Northamptonshire. 

1. Improved System of Nursery Gardenings Lond. 1811. 
roy. Svo. 

2. Interesting Discoveries in Horticulture ; being an easy, 
rational, and efficacious System of propagating all hardy 
American and Bog Soil Plants, with Ornamental Trees and 
Shrubs of general Descrijition, Green-house Plants, inchiding 
Botany Bay and Cape Plants; Herbaceous Plants, aflbrding 
favorable Shoots and Fruit-trees in every variety, bv jilantirg 
Cuttings, chiefly in the warm months, without artificial heal. 
Lond. 1811. roy. Svo. 

3. Treatise on the Improved Culture of the StrawbeiTy, 
Raspberry, and Gooseberry. Lend. 1812. Svo. 

4. On collecting Soils and Composts and preparing them 
for use, &c. Lond. 12mo. 1821. 

1811. Hooker, William, Esq. F.L.S. K.S., horti- 
cultural draughtsman and engraver. 

Pomona Londinensis; containing representations of the best 
Fruits cultivated in British Gardens; with Doscriilioii^,, 
1813. 4to. To be comiiletcd in about IS nuinbeis. 



1114 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



1811. Wa/fe, Walter, M.D., Professor of Botany 
to the I>ublin Institution. 

1. Malices, or an Essay towEirds a General History of Sal- 
lows, Willows, and Osiers. Dublin. 8vo. 

2. Prospectus of the Arrangement in the Dublin Society's 
Botanical and Agricultural Garden at Glzisnerin. Dublin, 
1818. 12mo. 

1812. Gushing, , a native of Ireland, late fore- 
man of the hot-house department to Messrs. Lee 
and Kennedy, at the Hammersmith nursery. 

The Exotic Gardener, &c. London. 8to. 

1812. Hogg, Thomas, master cf an academy at 
Paddington, Middlesex, and a very successful grower 
of the carnation. 

1. A concise and practical Treatise on the Growth and 
Culture of the Carnation, Pink, Auricula, Polyanthus, Ra- 
nunculus, Tulip, &c. Lond. I'irao. 1 plate. 

2. On the Cultivation of Pinks. (Hort. Trans, iv.) 

1812. Todd, George, surveyor and hot-house 
builder, employed by W. T. Alton, Esq., the late Sir 
Joseph Banks, and other eminent horticulturists. 

Plans, Elevations, and Sections of Hot-houses and Green- 
houses, an Aquarium, Conservatories, &c. recently built in 
different parts of England for various Noblemen and Gen- 
tlemen, &c. Lond. fol. 

1813. Lyon, Peter, an apothecary and physic gar- 
dener at Comely-garden, Edinburgh. 

1. Observations on the Barrenness of Fruit Trees; the Means 
of Prevention and Cure. Edin. 1813. Svo. 

2. A Treatise on the Physiology and Pathology of Trees ; 
■with Observations on the Barrenness and Canker of Fruit 
Trees; the means of Prevention and Cure. 1816. 8vo. Edin. 

1813. Sinclair, Sir John, Bart, of Ulbster, in Caith. 
ness, a distinguished patriot and voluminous agri- 
cultural writer ; founder of the Board of Agricul- 
ture. 

Account of some Experiments to promote the Improvement 
of Fruit Trees, by peeUng the Bark. Lond. 1815. Svo. These 
experiments were made by P. Lyon, of Edinburgh- (See Lyon, 
1813.) 

1814. Phillips, Leonard, jun., an extensive grower 
of hardy fruit-trees for sale, at Lambeth. 

1. Catalogue of Fruit Trees for Sale. Lond. fol. 

2. Transactions in the Fruit-tree Nursery at Vauxhall. 
Lond. 1815. Svo. 

1814. Weeks, Mr. Edward, late gardener to Vis- 
count Kirkwall, in Wales, patentee of a forcing- 
frame (1535.) ; andnow hot-house builderat the Hor- 
ticultural Repository, King's Road, London. 

The Forcer's Assistant; a Treatise with useful Hints on 
Forcing, by a new device for the application of Frames to the 
Culture ot Melons, Pines, and other choice Fruit from Dwarf 
Plants ; and of the Early Esculents usually in demand for the 
first tables ; including a few plain Directions for Forcing the 
Grape, Cherry, and Peach in Houses ; with an Appendix de- 
scribing the Patent Forcing Frame, and exhibiting some of its 
advantages ; to which is prefixed an introduction, connecting 
the principal parts of the theory of Vegetation, with the prac- 
tice of Horticulture . Chipping Norton. Svo. 84 pages. 

1815. The London Horticultural Society, com- 
menced by a few individuals in 1804, and established 
by charter in 1809. It is perhaps one of the most 
flourishing and best conducted societies of the kind 
in existence. 

Transactions of the London Horticultural Society. Lond. 
4 vols. 4to. many plates, 1815 to 1824. 

The papers of the first writers are dated 1805. 

1616. Emmerton, Isaac, formerly a nurseryman 
and florist at Barnet, and an enthusiastic cultivator 
of the auricula. 

A Plain and Practical Treatise on the Culture and Manage- 
ment of the Auricula, &c. Lond. 12mo. 

1816. Salter, J , nurseryman, seedsman, and 

florist, Wells Road Nursery, Bath. 

A Treatise upon Bulbous Roots, Green-house Plants, Flower 
Gardens, Fruit Trees, the Culture of the Sea Kale, Destruction 
of Insects, &c. 12mo. Bath, 1816. 

The author, in an advertisement, " humbly requests that 
those who purchase his book will not give the rules therein 
laid down to others, as it will materially injure the sale 
thereof." 

1817. Brookshau), George, a teacher of flower- 
painting. 

1. Pomona Britannica, or a Collection of the most established 
Fruits at present cultivated in Great Britain ; selected from 
the royal gardens at Hampton Court, and from the most cele- 
brated gcirdens rotmd London, accurately drawn, and colored 
from nature. 

2. The Horticultural Repository, containing Delineations of 
the best Varieties of the different Species of English Fruits; to 
which are added the blossoms and leaves, in those instances in 
which they are considered necessary, accompanied with full de- 
scriptions of their various properties, time of ripening, and di- 
rections for planting them, so as to insure a longer succession of 
fruit ; such being pointed out as are particularly calculated for 
forcing. Part I. Svo. 1821. 

1818. Baldwin, Thomas, gardener to the Marquis 
of Hertford, at Ragley, in Warwickshire. 

Short Practical Directions for the Culture of the Ananas, or 
Pine Apple. Svo. Warsvick. 

1818. Blaikie, Francis, steward to T. W. Coke, 
Esq., of Holkham, in Norfolk, author of some tracts 
on agricultural subjects, and of various papers in 
the Farmer's Journal. 

A Treatise on Hedges and Hedgerow Timber. 12mo. 

1818 Haywardy Mr. Joseph, gent., an amateur 



gardener, formerly a Yorkshire clothier, now resid- 
ing at Plumstead in Kent. 

The Science of Horticulture. Loiid. 1818. Svo. 

1818. Macwilliam, Robert, a native of Aberdeen, 
and surveyor in London. 

■. An Essay on the Origin and Operation of the Dry Rot ; to 
which are annexed. Suggestions tor the Cultivation of Forest- 
trees, and an Abstract of the Forest Laws. ISIS. 4to. 

1818. Page, Mr. William Bridgewater, C.M.H.S., 
nurseryman, at Southampton, and son-in-law of 
Kennedy, late of the Hammersmith nursery, who 
is the reputed author of Page's Catalogue. 

Page's Prodromus ; as a general nomenclature of all the 
plants, indigenous and exotic, cultivated in the Southampton 
botanic gardens ; arranged alphabetically, as they are con- 
sidered hardy or tender to the climate of Britain, under their 
different characters of trees and shrubs, herbaceous, &c. The 
generic and specific names after the Linneean system ; with the 
i^nglish names, propagation, soil, height, time of flowering, na- 
tive country, &c ; also occasional hints for their cultivation. 
An Appendix, containing selected lists of annuals ; all the 
choicest kinds of fruits now in circulation, with their characters, 
&c., and a short tract on the sexual system, from the Philoso- 
phicaBotanica of Linnaius. London. 8vo. 

This, w hen the errors with which it abounds in every page, 
are corrected in a new edition, will be the best Gardener's Ca- 
talogue that has hitherto been pubUshed ; that of Sweet is 
much more correct and extensive as a botanical work, but this 
is more instructive in what relates to culture. No gardener 
ought to be without both works. 

1818. Sweet, Robert, F.L.S., an excellent practical 
botanist, and experienced cultivator. 

1. Hortus suburbanus Londinensis ; or, a Catalogue of Plants 
cultivated in the neighbourhood of London, arranged accord- 
ing to the Linntean system ; with the addition of the natural 
orders to which they belong, reference to books where they 
are described, their native places of growth, when introduced, 
time of flowering, and reference to figures. London. Svo. 

2. Geraniae ; or. Natural Order of Geraniums. Svo. London, 
1820. in numbers. 

3. The Botanical Cultivator. Lond. Svo. 1820. 

1819. Monteith, Mr. , timber valuer at 

Stirling, inventor of a composition, which he sells 
for destroying all manner of insects. 

The Forester's Guide, &c. Stirling. 12mo. plates. 

1819. Winch, i^athankl John, F.L.S., an able prac> 
tical botanist. 

Essay on the Geographical Distribution of Plants through the 
Counties of Northumberland, Cumberland, and Durham. 
Newcastle. Svo. 

1820. Field, Henry, member of the Society of 
Apothecaries. 

Memoirs Historical and Illustrative, of the Botanic Garden 
at Chelsea; belonging to the Society of Apothecaries of Lon- 
don. Lond. Svo. 

1820. Hofland, Mrs., formerly Mrs. Hoole, now 
the wife of an eminent landscape-painter, author of 
various novels and some poetry. 

An Historical Description of A\'hite Ivnights, a seat of the 
Duke of Marlborough, near Reading. Lond. Imp. fol. 

The literary part is by Mrs. H., and the engravings by her 
husband. 

1820. Hope, Thomas, Esq., of Deepder, near God- 
stone, in Surrey, a gentleman of highly cultivated 
taste, author of a splendid work on household fur- 
niture, and of Anastasius, a novel displaying much 
genius. 

An Essav on Gardening, published in the Description of 
White Knights, by Mrs. Hofland. 

1820. Phillips, Mr. Henry, formerly master of an 
academy at Bayswater. 

1. Pomarium Britannicum, an Historical and BotanicalAc- 
count of Fruits known in Great Britain. Svo. 

2. The History of cultivated Vegetables. Lond. 1822. 2 vols. 
Svo. 

3. Sylva Florifera ; or, the Shrubberv. London. 2 vols. Svo. 
1823. 

4. Flora Domestica. 1 vol. Svo. 

1820. Pigott, Richard, florist, Dutch ViUa, Sher- 
dington, near Cheltenham. 

A short, plain Treatise on Carnations and Pinks. Svo. 

1821. Cobbett, William, a well known political 
writer, son of a farmer, bom at or near Farnham, 
in Surrey, 1776 ; in 1783 he went to London, and was 
employed in an attorney's office ; in 1784, he en- 
tered into a regiment sent to America, went to 
France in 1792, returned the same year to America, 
and was engaged in literary pursuits till his return 
to England in 1801, went to America again in 1816 
(?), and returned in 1820, and now resides in Ken- 
sington, where he has a large garden. 

The American Gardener ; or, a Treatise on the Situation, 
Soil, Fencing, and Laying out of Gardens, on the Malting and 
Managing of Hot-beds and Green-houses, and on the Propaga- 
tion and "Cultivation of the several Sorts of Vegetables, Herbs, 
Fruits, and Flowers. London. 12mo. 

Though the author shows great ignorance of botanv and phy- 
siology, he has contrived by his style, by many shrewd remarks, 
and by curious and bold assertions, sometimes at variance with 
facts, to make an interesting book, from which it may be 
gathered, that horticulture in America is but in its infancy, 
and from the climate must ever have great obstacles to contend 
with. 

1821. Neill, Patrick, Esq. A.M. F.LS. secretary to 
the Natural History Society of Edinburgh, and to 
the Caledonian Horticultural Society, author of a 



Book I. FOREIGN LITERATURE OF GARDENING. 



1115 



tour through the Orkney and Shetland islands, pub- 
lished in 1806 ; and of various essays and papers on 
natural history in the Scotch cncyclopajdias : a 
most benevolent and intelligent man, and a skOful 
horticultural connoisseur. 

1. Notice of Mr. Ivnieht's Doctrines regarding Fruit Trees. 
(Cal..Vnn.m.'m.) 

2- The articles Horticulture in the Edinburgh Encyclopaedia, 
and in the Appendix to the Encyclopaedia Britannica. 

3. On the Gardens and Orchards of Scotland. (Printed in 
Sir John Sincluir's Gtnercil Repvrt of Scotland, 1814, \ol. ii. 
p. 45.} 



4. Report to the Highland Society concerning early Potatoe«. 
(Gen. Rep. of Scot/and. App. vol. i. p. 419.) 

,5. Journal of a Horticultural Tour throughout some parts of 
Flanders, Holland, and the north of France, in the autumn of 
1*517, by a Deputation of the Caledonian Horticultural Society. 
Drawn up by P. Neill, one of the Deputation. Edinburgh. Svo. 
lS-23. 

182.S. Harrison, Mr. Charles, F.K.S., gardener to 
J. S. Wortley, Esq., Wortley Hall, near Shettield, 
Yorkshire. 

A Treatise on the Culture and Manaeement of Fruit Trees, 
Sheffield. Svo. 



Sect. II. Of the Literature of Gardening in Foreign Coiuitries. 

7691. Italy having been the country in which the revival of arts and literature took 
place, was the first to produce books on agriculture and gardening : that of Crescenzio is 
well known. The adjoining countries of France and Germany produced the next books ; 
and those of Belon, Etienne, and Heresbachius, may be cited as among the best of the 
16th century. Comnielin is among the earliest Dutch authors on gardening ; Rudbeck, 
his contemporary, one of the first who wrote in Sweden : both published after the middle 
of the 17th century. Herrera, one of the few Spanish writers on agricultural subjects, 
wrote about the end of the 16th century. The other countries of Continental Europe 
have produced little worthy of notice ; and but few gardening books have hitherto appeared 
in America. Of such as are most generally known in this country, or apparently most 
interesting as illustrating the state of gardening at the time of tlieir production, we give 
the titles in the following subsections. 

SuBSECT. 1. Works on Gardening published in France, exclusive of Translations. 

7692. Of French works on gardening we have given a more copious list than of 
those of Germany, because the French language is more generally known, and the 
books not difficult to obtain. Many of them are in the libraries of the British IMuseum, 
the Horticultural Society, or in the Banksian collection. One of the best books on the 
state of culture in France is, the Nouveau Cours d' Agriculture, 13 vols. Svo. 1810. 



1533. Champier, %?«yDAor/fn, a physician, a native 
of Lyons, who distinguished himself in the battle of 
Aigiiadel in 1509, and was made chevalier of the 
two gilt spurs ; he wrote several works, and ilied in 
1532"or 1540. 

Campus Elysius Galliae amoenitate refertus, in^ quo quidquid 
apud Indos, Arabes et Poenos reperitur, apud Gallos demon- 
stratur posse reperiri. Lugduni. Svo. 

1535. Etienne, Charles, a physician of Paris, who 
wrote several tracts on gardening and agriculture, 
and first united them in one work in 1529, un- 
der the title of Prcedium Bust/cum. Having 
married his daughter to Jean Leibault, also a phy- 
sician, he produced, with his son-in-law, the Maiso/i 
Riistique in IsiQ. 

1. De ReHortensi. Par. 1535. Svo. 

2. Seminarium et Plantarium, Fructiferarium, &c. Par. 
1536. Svo. 

5. \'inetum, in quo yaria Vitium, Uvarum, &c. Par. 1537. 
Svo. 

4. Arbustum, Fonticulus Spinetum, &c. Par. 153S. Svo. 

5. Sylva Fruticum CoUis. Par. 153S. Svo. 

6. Pratum, Lacus Aruiidinacum. Par. 154.". Svo. 

All these were united in Praedium Rusticum. Par. 1554. 

7. L'Agriculture et Maison Rustique, &c. Par. 1570. 4to. 
This work has gone through upwards of 30 editions, the last 

entitled, La Maison Rustique, ou Cours complet d'Agricul- 
tur, d'economie rurale et domestique, edition entierement re- 
fondue. Paris, chez Lecrivain. '2 vols. Svo. 

8. Columella de Hortis. Svo. 154'2. 

1546. Cognatus, the name adopted by Gilbert Cousin, 
a canon of Nozerai, who died in 1567 in the prison 
of Besangon, where he was slmt up on account of 
his religious opinions. 

De Hortorum laudibus. Basil, 1546. 

1552. Brassard, Davy or David, a Benedictine 
monk at Mons, belonging to a family which still 
exists in the Maine. 

L'Art et Maniere de semer Pepins, faire Pepinieres et Sau- 
vageons ; enter en toutes sortes d'arbres, et faire vergers ; avec 
un autre Traite de la maniere de semer Grains en Jardins, le 
terns, et la saison de planter, replanter, recueiilir graines, et cul- 
tiver toutes sortes d'herbes, &c. iMor.s. Svo. 

1.553. Belon, Peter, a French physician, was born 
in the province of Maine about the year 1518. He 
travelled into Palestine, Greece, and Arabia, and 
published an account of those countries in 1555, 4to. 
He was assassinated at Paris in 1564, 

1. De Arboribus coniferis, resiniferis, aliisque semper viren- 
tibus: deCedrino.Cedrio, Agarico, Resinis,&c. Paris. 4to. fig. 

2. Les Remonstrances sur le Default du Labour et Culture 
de> Plantes, et de la cognoissance d'icelles, contenant la ma- 
niere d'atfranchir et apprivoiser les Arbres sauvages. Paris, 
1558. Svo. 

1560. Cornus, Georges, or Gorgole de Corne, ac- 
cotding to some writers a native of Florence. 

1. Maniere d'Enter, Planter, et Nourir les Arbres et .Tardins, 
avec nuelques autre* traites d'Agriculture. Paris. Svo. 

i- Ve la Maniere de Planter, Arracher, Labourer, Semer et 



Emonder les Arbres Sauvages, Bois Haut et Bois Taillis 
Paris. Svo. 

1560. Davt/, P , that is, Pere David, or David 

Brassard. (See Brassard, 1552.) 

1563. Palissi/, Bernard de, born at Agen in 1524, 
was a potter, according to some, and a China-ware 
manufacturer, according to others. He cultivated 
chemistry and the arts, and went beyond his age ; 
he wrote various pieces, which have been collected 
and published in several volumes. Those which 
relate to agriculture and rural economy, are en- 
tituled, Moyen de devenir riche. He died between 
1602 and 1604. 

Recepte veritable par laquelle tcus les hommes de la France 
pourront apprendre a augmenter leurs Tresors, avec le Dessin 
d'un Jardin delectable et utile. Rochelle. 4to. 1563. 

1564. Mizaidd, , born at Montlu(;on, in 1575 ; 

died at Paris at an advanced age. He studied ma- 
thematics and medicine with reputation ; but his 
love of novelty, singularity, and astrology, made him 
lose in succession the little glory which he had ac- 
quired, his fortune, and his life. He published 
many works, chiefly in Latin, the first of which, on 
gardening, appeared in 1564; and all those which 
relate to the subject have been collected and pub- 
lished by Caille, a physician, under the following 
title : — 

LeJardinage de IMizauId. Paris, 1578. 

iDiO. Leibault, Jean, a physician, born at Dijon, 
died at Paris in 1596 ; author of various works on 
medicine, and jointly with his father-in-law, Eti- 
enne, of the Maison 'Rustique. (See Etienne, 1535.) 

1580. Lundrie, . 

Avertissement et maniere d'enter assure'ment les Arbres en 
toutes saisons, &c. Bourdeaux, in Svo. 

1.586. J. P. D.M., that is, Jacques Pons, Doctor of 
Medicine. 

Sommaire traite des Melons. Lyon de Toumes. Svo. 
16-31. Gamier, Claude. 

Lu maniere d'enter, planter, et semer, avic les remedes contre 
les moucherons, limafons, et autres betes qui gatent les hevbes 
et jardins. Troyes. 16mo. 

\6S8. Bot/ceau, Jacques, ^cuyer; sieur de la Baraii- 
di^re, intendant of the gardens of Louis XII L 

1. Traite du Jardinage selon les Raisons de la Xature et de 
I'Art, ensemble divers desseins de parterres, pelouse<, bosquets, 
et autres omements servant a rembellissenient des Jarilins. 
Paris, folio. 163S. Several times rejirinted. 

2. Traits du Jardinage qui enseigne les Ouvrages qu'll feut 
faire pour En oir \m Jardin dans sa perfection, et la maniere de 
faire des pepinieres, de grelier, enter, &c. I'imo. 1639. 

1651. Mallet, Andre, a relation and contemporary 
of Claude MoUet, who was gardener to Henry IV., 
and Louis XIII. of France, as the other is said to 
have been to James I. of England. 

1. Le Jardin de Plaisir, contenant plusieurs Dessins de Jar- 



1116 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



dinaee, tant Parterres en Broderie, Compartlmens de Gazon, 
que Bosquets et autres, avec un Abrege de 1' Agriculture tou- 
chant ce qui peut etre le plus utile et necessaire a la construc- 
tion et accompasnement du dit Jardin de plaisir, par Andre 
jNIollet, intendant des Jardins du roi d'Angleterre. Stockhclin. 
folio. 

^l. Maniere pour elerer les Melons. Paris. 12mo. 1659. 
1652. Le Gendre, an assumed name; that of the 
real author being, according to Ouintinie, Robert 
Arnauld d'Andily, a clergj-man, born at Paris in 
15S9, author of various theological works and me- 
moirs of his own life, who died in lo,4. But the 
compilers of the Bibliographie Agronomique, con- 
sider that the Abbe of Pont-chateau, a monk of 
Portugal, was the real author. Baillet, a noted 
French bibliographer, ascribes it to M.M. Guillaume 
de la Moignon, et Olivier Lefevre d'Ormesson : 
Rapin ascribes it to La Moignon ; and Gregoire is 
of the same opinion as Quintinie. All agree in the 
excellence of the work. 

De la Maniere de cultiver les Arbres FniitierB, par le Sieur 
Le Crendre, cure de Henonville. Paris. 1652. 

An English translation appeared in 1660, entitled The 
right Manner of ordering Fruit-trees, &c. translated from the 
French of Le Gendre. London. 8vo. 

1652. Mo/let, Claude, head gardener to Henry IV., 
and of Louis XIII. ; he created in France, in 1582, 
the Tpartcrres a compartimens ; in 1595, he planted 
the garden of Saint Germain-en-Laye, of Monceau, 
and of Fontainbleau; in 1607, he had planted at Fon- 
tainbleau TCWO fruit-trees ; he had, in 16u8, made 
fine plantations of cypresses in the gardens of the 
Thuilleries, which were killed by the rigorous winter 
of 1608. On the whole, he effected a great deal for 
the time in which he lived, and his name and me- 
mory has been too much forgotten. His relation, 
Andrew Mollet, was gardener to James I. in Eng- 
land. (See Mollet, Andre, 1651.) 

Theatre des Plans et Jardinages, contenant des Secrets et In- 
ventions inconnus a tous ceux qui jusou' a present sesont meles 
d'ecrire sur cette mati^re ; avec un Traite d'Astrologie, pro- 
pres pour toutes sortes de Personnes, et particulierenie.it pour 
ceux qui s'occupent a la Culture des .lardins. Paris. 4to. 22 
plates. The designs invented by Andr^, J acques, and Noel, 
sons of the author. 

Several editions of this work have been printed at Paris, but 
none lately. 

165o. Bornefond, , author of a letter on the 

agriculture of Italy. 

J ardinier Franoais et Delices de la Campagne. Paris. 2 vols. 
12mo. ^ 

1653. Triquet, R. , prior of St. Mark. 

Instruction posr les Arbres Fruitiers. 

A third edition, with a Treatise on the Management o 
Oranges, Pomegranates, Olives, and Spanish Jessamine, in 
165S. 

1654. Chesnee, Monsfei-etiil, Charles de la. 

Le Fleuriste Fran^ais, traitant de I'Origine des Tulipes; 
avec un Catalogue des noms des Tulipes. daen. 

This appears to be the first treatise written on Tulips; the 
second was by d'Ardenne in 1660. A plagiarism from Ches- 
nee's work appeared in 167S, entitled Traite des Tulipes. 

1658. Morin, Pierre, a florist at Paris, mentioned 
by Evelyn ; he devoted 40 years of his life to the 
culture of flowers, and was, the French authors say, 
the Vilmorin of his time. 

1. Remarques n^cessaires pour la Culture des Fleurs. 

'2. Instruction facile pour connoitre toutes sortes d'Orangers, 
et de Citronniers ; qui enseigne aussi la maniere de les cultiver, 
semer, &c. Paris, 12mo. iCSO. 

1655. Stephamis, Murimis, a protestant divine, 
born at Caen in 1625, where he was settled as a cler- 
gyman, and afterwards as a professor of the Oriental 
languages at Amsterdam; he published various 
theological works, and died in 17C0. 

Obsen ationes circa Culturani Plantarum. 

1660. Saint Etieniw, Claude de, a Bemardin monk. 

1. Instruction pour connairre les bons Fruits et les Arbres 
Fruitiers, selon le mois de I'annee et la fajon de les culUver. 
Paris. 12mo. 

Several editions, with the title somewhat varied, as Xou- 
velle Instruction pour connaitre, iS:c. 1667. 

2. Traite de la Connaissance des bons Fruits, par]\I.:\I. Mer- 
let et Saint Etienne, 4th edit. 1782. 

16tw. Rapin, Rene, or Renatus, a Jesuit, was born . 
at Tours in 1621. He taught polite literature with 
great reputation in the colleges cf his order ; and 
died at Paris in 16S7. 

1 Renati Rapini de Hortorum, libr. 14 1665. item Ultraj. 
167'i. S. pra;ter ejus libsUum de Cultura Hortensi, et iMeursii 
arboretum sacrum. 

2. Nemus; translated into English verse by Evelvn junioi, 
printed with the Sylva. Rapin's 4 book<; translatetl by him 
were published separately, 1673. Svo. LonJ. 

1675. Laurent, Jean. 

Abrege pour les Arbres nains, et autres, &c. Paris. 4to. 

This author believes in the influence of the moon, and 
enjoins many curious superstitious practices to secure successful 
culture. 

107.4. ^[crlct, Jean, of St. Stephen. 
Abvege des Bons Fruits avec la maniere de les connaitre, &c. 
Paris. 12nio. 

lo/7. Aristote, jardinier de Puteaux, considered 
1-vy the French bibliographers as an assumed name, 
and designation 



I 1. Observations sur le Livre du Cure d'Hajonville, CH de 
I'Abbe de Pont-chateau de Carabout de Coislin, Jardinier de 
Port Royal. 12rao. 1677. 

2. L'Art de cultiver toutes sortes de Fleurs; arec Instruc- 
tions pour cultiver et gietfer les Arbres Fruiuers. Paris. 
12nio. 

0. Instructions pour le Jardin Potager, avec I'Art de eultiver 
les Fleurs et les Arbres Fruitiers. Paris. 12mo. 1678. 

16S3. R. D. C. D. W. D. 

Le Jardinier Francais, qui enseigne a cultiver les Arbres et 
les Herbes Po^ageres,'avec la Maniere de conserrer les Fruits, 
dedie aux Dames. Rouen. 12mo. 

This work has come through a great many editions in FYance, 
and was tranJated by Evelyn in 1658, under the title of the 
French Gardener. 

1692. Chataigneraye, le Sieur de. 

La parfeite Connaissance des -irbres Fruitiers, &c. Paris. 
12mo. 

1696. Da/iuron-, Rene, gardener to the Duke of 

Brunswick, at Luneburg. 

Nouveau Traite de la TaUle des Arbres Fruitiers, contenant 
plusieurs figures, qui marquent les meinieres de les bien tailler. 
Paris. 12mo. 

1696. Quintinie, Jean de la, born in 1626, at Cha- 
banois, near Angouleme, died in 1700. He was 
destined for the bar, but a passion for gardening de- 
termined him to that pursuit. He became tutor to 
a young gentleman, M. Tambonneau, and made the 
tour of Italy with him, where his passion for his 
favorite study increased -\t his return, the father 
of his pupil submitted his gardens to his direction. 
Here he acquired experience and reputation. The 
great Condt used to take pleasure in conversing with 
him, and Charles II. of England invited him to su- 
perintend his gardens, with a considerable pension. 
Louis XIV. created for him the otMce of director of 
the royal fruit and kitchen gardens. It is uncertain 
whether any other work by him appeared during his 
life than the flrst of those' enumerated below. 

1. Traite des Jardins Fruitiers et Potagers. Amsterdam. 
4to. fig. 

2. Instructions sur les Jardins Fruitiers et Potagers, avec im 
Traite des Orangers, et des Reflexions sur rAgrinilture. 4to. 

Both works have come through numerous editions in the 
French language, and were translated into English by Evelyn, 
and by London and A\'ise. 

17. . . Chomel, Xoel, a curate in Lyons, who died 
in 1712. His nephew, a physician', published in 
1761, HiM^irc des Plantes usuelles. 

Abrege de I'Histoire des Plantes usueUes, &c. An Edition in 
ISO.", with the Linnasan names by Maillaud. 

17. . . Lemaric, Fr . 

Supplement a I'Arai des Jardins d'Utilite et d'Omeraent; 
contenant des notions sur la culture de diverses plantes ; entre 
autres le rutabaga an chou-navet de Laponie, qui ne gele jamais 
en terre, et qui reniplace le colsa ; sur de nouveaux arbres et 
arbrisseaux, tels qu'un nouveau Rosier, le Mangoustan, et 
autres ; avec deux listes des panaches, dont Tune des plants 
Tivaces en pleine terre, et I'aulre des arbres et arbrisseaux. 
Paris. 12mo. 

17. . . Pelee, M. de St. Maurice, member of the 
Paris Agricultural Society. 

L'Art de Cultiver les Peupliers d'ltalie, &c. Paris, 12mo. 

17. . . Renault, , a civil otiicer in the district of 

Rouen. 

Memoire sur la Culture des Pommiers dans toute I'etendue 
de la France. Rouen, Svo. 

1701. Marchant, , of the Academy of Sciences. 

Dissertation sur la Preference que nous devons dormer aus 
Plantes denotre Pays, par-dessus les Plantes etrangeres. 

1703. Liger, Louis, born in 1658, died in 1717; 
author of various works on rural and domestic 
economy, and of a Theatre d' Agriculture, in se- 
veral volumes, and a uew edition of the Maison Rus- 
tique. 

1. Traits facile pour apprendre Clever des Figuieres. 
12mo. 

2. Le Jardinier, Fleuriste, et Historiographe, 2 vols, in 
12ino. 1705. An edition with the title somewhat varied ia 
1704. 

3. La Culttire parfaite des Jardins, Fruitiers, et Potagers. 
12mo. 1714. 

1705. Besnier, , a physician in Paris, father- 
in-law '0 the celebrated physician Dionis. 

Le Jardinier Botaniste, ou la" Maniere de cultiver toutes 
sortes de Plantes, Fleurs, Arbres, et Arbrisseaux, avec leur 
usage en medicine et pour I'embellissement des jardtos. Paris. 
Svo. 

1705. F)-ancois, , one of the brothers of the 

Chartreuse in Paris. 

Le Jardinier solitare, ou Dialogues, contenant la methode de 
cultiver un janlin fruitier et potager, Svo. An edition in 1770, 
with the title somewhat varied. 

1705. fallei/iont, I'Abb^ de, a naturalist and anti- 
quarian, author of several works. 

Curiosites de la Nature et de IWiX sax la \^egetation, ou 
I'Agriculture et le J ardinage dans lenr perfection," &c. Paris. 
12mo. 

The same work in English. Svo. 17S4. 
1707. Andri/, . 

I^e Th^ de L'Europe, ou les Propri^t^s de la Veronique. 
Paris. 16n-:o. 

1707. Tournefort, Joseph Pitton de, a physician 
and botanist, was bom at Ais, in Provente, June 5. 
1656. He was intended for the church, but on the 
death of his father he relinquished the study of 



Book I. 



FRENCH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1117 



theology, to indulge his inclination for natural his- 
tory. To gratify this passion, he made numerous 
journeys in Europe and Asia; after which he be- 
came professor of physic in the royal college, and of 
botany in tlie king's garden at Paris, where he died 
Dec. 28. 1708. His botanical publications are nu- 
merous ; the most important is his Institutioncs rei 
Herbarice, which method of arrangement was fol- 
lowed in this country as well as in France, till sup- 
planted by the systems of Linnseus and Jussieu. 
Observations sur la Ntiissance et la Culture des Champignons. 
, Mem. de I'Acad. de Paris, 1707. 

1712. Angran de Rueneuve, a lawyer. 
Observations sur I'Apriculture et le Jardinage, pour servir 
d'Instruction a ceux qui d^sirent de s'y rendre habiles. Paris. 
2 vols. 12mo. 

1712. Boullay, , canon of Orleans. 

Mani^re de bien cultiver la Vigne, de faire la vendange et le 
Vin dans le Vignoble d'Orleans, utile a tous les autres Vignobles 
du Royaume. 2d edit, in 12mo. 

1713. D'ArgenvilLe, Dezallier Ant. Joseph, born in 
Paris, where he died in 1765. He held a public si- 
tuation, and his principal study was natural history. 
The articles Hydrographie and Jardinage in the 
JDictionnaire Encyclopedique were furnished by him. 

1. La Theorie et la Pratique du Jardinage, ou Ton traite k 
fond des beaux Jardins de Plaisance et de Proprete, contenant 
plusieurs Plans et Dispositions generales des Jardins, nouveaux 
dessins de Parterres, de Bosquets, de Boulingrins, Salles, Cabi- 
neU, &c. Paris. 4to. 1713. 

Only the first edition of this -work appeared with the name of 
the author, who afterwards adopted that of Le Blond, by whose 
name the work is best known. It was translated into English 
by John -Tames of Greenwich, architect, and entitled 

The Theory and Practice of Gardening, containing all that 
relates to fine gardens, &c. &c. 

2. Dictionnaire du Jardinage- Liege, 1783. 

Besides the above, he remodelled and published the works of 
Roger Schabol, after his death. (See Schabol, 1767 ) 

1716. Ressons, Jean-Baptiste Deschiens de, born at 
Chalons ; died in 1736. He was lieutenant-gene- 
ral of artillery, and member of the Academy of 
Sciences ; united a taste for arms with that for 
study, and excelled in both. 

Maniere de greffer les Arbres des Fruits k Noyaux, sans 
perdre aucun tems, en sorte qu'un arbre qui aura fait de , 
tres-mauvais fruits I'annee pr^cedente en pourra porter de 
tres-bons I'annee suivante, Paris. 8vo. 
1719. Lemaistre, M , curate of Joinville. 

Fruitier la France, ou Description des Fruits, a Noy- 
aux et a P6pins, qui se cultivent dans le royaume ; avec uiie 
dissertation historique sur I'origine et les progres des Jardins. 
4to. 

1722. Saussai, le Sieur de, gardener to the Prin- 
cess of Cond^, at Anet, afterwards inspector of the 
gardens of the Duke of Bourbon. 

Traite des Jardins. Paris. 12mo. 

1730. Hamel du Monceau, Henry Lewis du, a dis- 
tinguished naturalist, was born at Paris in 1700. 
He became a member of the Academy of Sciences, 
to whom he communicated a number of papers on 
vegetable physiology. He died at Paris, where he 
was dean of the academy, in 1782. 

1. De ['importance de I'Analogie, et des Rapports que les 
Arbres doivent avoir entre eux pour la reussite et la durde 
des greffes. (.1/em. Acad. Par. 1730. 31.) 

2. Sur les Plantes qu'on peut elever dans I'Eau. (Mem. 
Aaul. Pur.) 

3. Traitt; des Arbres et Arbustes, qui se cultivent en 
France en pleine terre. Par. 1755. 2 vols. 4to. 

4. Physique des Arbres, ou il est traite de I'Anatomie des 
Plantes, et de I'Economie Vdg(5tale ; avec une Dissertation 
sur rUtilite des Methodes de Botanique, et une Explication 
des Termes propres a cette science. Par. 1758, 2 vols. 4to. 
With numerous co))peq)lates. This is his most important 
•work, and on it his merit as a Physiologist chiefly rests. 

5. Traile complet des Bois et des Forets. Par. 1758-67x 
6 torn. 4 to. 

6. Des Semis et Plantations des Arbres, et de Ipur Cul- 
ture. Par. 1760. 4to. 

7. Art du Charbonnier. Par. 1761. fol. 

8. De I'Exploitation des Bois, ou moyen de tirer parti des 
taillis demi fulayes et hautes futayes. Par. 1764. 2 vols. 4to. 

9. Du Transport, de la Conservation, et de la Force du 
Bois. 1767. 4to. 

10. Traite des Arbres Fruitiers. Paris, 1768, 2 vols. 4to. 
With fine coloured plates of fruit-trees, &:c. This is his 
most splendid work. 

1732. Guerin, M . 

Traite de la culture parfaite de I'Oreille d'ours. 12mo. 

1735. Jussieu, Bernard de, born at Lyons in 1699 ; 
practised physic, and became curator of the plants 
in the royal garden of Paris, and superintendant of 
that at Trianon. In this last garden he first dis- 
played the celebrated system which bears the family 
name, and has been so much perfected by his ne- 
phew, Antoine de Jussieu. All the members of this 
family have devoted themselves to science. 

Catalogue des Arbres et Arbrisseaux, quisepeuvent Clever 
aux environs de Paris, &c. Paris. 12mo. 

1737. Tfiouin, Andre, le Chevalier de. Professor 
of Culture in the University of Paris ; author 
of various memoirs on gardening and agriculture, 
inserted in the French encyclopedias, dictionaries, 
and periodical works, and in the transactions of 



their learned bodies : an excellent man, and es- 
teemed one of the first gardeners in Europe. 

1. Memoire sur I'Usage du Terreau de Bruydre dans la 
Culture des Arbrisseaux et Arbustes etrangers, regaides jus- 
qu'a present comme delicats dans nos jardins. (A/dm. de 
VAcad. des Sc. de Paris, 1787, !>. 481-49.5.) 

2. Sur les Avantages de la Culture des Arbres, Strangers 
pour I'emploi de plusieurs Terrains de diff'erente nature aban- 
donnes comme steriles. {M(fm. de la Hoc. li. d'Aericiilt. de 
Paris, 1786, p. 43-49.) 

3. Description du .Jardin des semis tiu Musde d'Histoire 
Naturelle, de sa culture et de ses usages. (Annales du Mas. 
d'Hist. Nat. torn. 4.)> 

4. Description de I'Ecole d'AgricuIture pratique du Mus6e 
d'Histoire Naturelle. (An. du Mas. torn. 10, 11, & 12.) 

5. Mdmoires sur des nouvelles Modes des greffes. (Ibid, 
torn. 12, 13, 14, &c.) 

6. Notes sur la Culture des Patates et des Pomnies de terre. 
Sur la Culture des Plantes Alpines. (Ibid. torn. 3. p. 183.) 

7. Mdnioire sur la Culture des Bruyeres. (Ibid. torn. 2. 
and 3.) 

8. Memoire sur la Culture des Dahlias, &c (Ibid. torn. 3.) 

9. Monographie de greffes, ou Description technique de 
diverses sortes de Greffes, employees pour la multiplication 
des Vdg^taux. Paris, 1821, in 4to. avec 13 pi. in lithog. 

10. Instruction sur I'Etablissement des Pepinieres. Paris. 
8vo. 

11. Notes sur les Semis du Pin de Riga. Paris, 8vo. 

12. Note sur la Culture et les Usages du Pin Laricio de 
Corse. Paris. 8vo. 

1739. Buffon, George Louis le Clerc, Count de, 
was the son of a counseller of the parliament of 
Dijon, and born at Montbard, in Burgundy, in 
1707. He studied at Dijon, and was intended for 
the law, but his inclination lay to the sciences, par- 
ticularly astronomy and geometry ; and it is said he 
was never without Euclid's Elements in his pocket. 
At the age of twenty he made the tour of Italy, 
after which he visited England. On his return he 
divided his time between Montbard and Paris, and 
in 1735 published a translation of Hale's Vegetable 
Statics, which was followed by one of Newton's. 
Fluxions. In 1739 he was appointed superintend- 
ant of the royal garden and cabinet, which by 
his care were considerably enriched. He was a 
member of the French Academy, treasurer of that 
of Sciences, and in 1771 he was created a count. 
His private character was that of a libertine, and 
he was extremely vain of his person and talents- 
" The works of eminent geniuses," he would say, 
" are few; they are those of Newton, Bacon, Leib- 
nitz, Montesquieu, and my own!''' He died of the 
stone in 1788. His only son was guillotined in 17S3. 

1. Memoire sur la Conservation et le Retablissement des 
Forets. {M^m. Acad. Pnr.) 

2. _Memoire sur la Culture des Forgt-s. (Id. ib. 1742.). 
1739. Riviere, de la, and du Moulin. 

Methode pour bien cultiver les arbres k fruit, et pour 
elever les treilles. Utrecht. 8vo. 

1741. Baxin, Gilles-Augustin, a physician of Stras- 
bourg ; author of some tracts on insects, trees. &c : 
died in 1754. ' 

1. Oliservations sur les Plantes, et leur analogie avec les 
Insectes. 

5i-^Traite de I'Arcroissement des Plantes. 8vo. 

1745. Be Combles, a native of Lyons, began to 
write on agriculture in 1745 ; and after having led 
a life of agitation, he retired to a country. Jiouse near 
Paris, where he gave himself up to gardening. 

1. Traite de la Culture des Pechers. 12mo. 

2. L'Ecole du Jardin Potager. 2 vols. 12mo. 

In 1802, these two works were published together in 2 vols- 
l<!mo. which made the fifth edition of L'Ecole du Jardin 
Potager. 

1746. Ardenne, Jean Paul de, born at Marseilles 
in 1689, where he became a priest and superior of 
the congregation of the oratory. He had a country- 
house at Fortcalquier, where he devoted great part 
of his time to the culture of flowers and to deeds 
of charity. He was reckoned among the most fa. 
mous florists of his time. He died in 1769. 

1. Traite' des Renonculcs. Paris, 1746. 8vo. 

2. Traite des Tulijies. Plates, Aug. 1760. 12mo. 

3. ^.^raite des CKillets Plates. Avignon, 1763. 12mo. 
"l^"^ <ies Jacinthes. Illustrated with plates. Aviynon. 

176o, 8vo. 

5. Traite de I'Oreille d'Ours, Svo. Avignon, 1759. 2 vols. 
l2mo. 

6. Annde Champetre. Lyons, 1769. 5 vols. 12mo. 

■■750. Roux, Augustin, born in 1726; died in 
.17/6; Member of the Royal Society of Agricul- 
ture. 

1. Traite Physique de la Culture et de la Plantation des 
Arbres, avec la maniere de les exploiter, de les debiter. &c. 
Paris. 12mo. ' 

2. Traits de la Culture des Arbres a ouvrier. 12mo. 
1751 Desbois, Francis Alexander Aubcrt de la 

Chesnaye, born at Ernayon the Maine in 1699, died 
in an liospital in Paris in 1784. One of the most 
indefatigable compilers of the 18th century. 

Dictionnaire Universelle d'AgricuIture et de Jardinairc. 
Paris. 2 vols. 4to. ' 

1753. Francheville, Joseph Dvfresne de, of the 
academy of Berlin, born at Dourlens in Piccardy 



1118 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



in 1704 ; better known by the first edition of Vol- 
taire's Steele de Louis XIV., which appeared under 
his name, than by any of his other works. 

Catalogue nouveau de bons Fruits. l2ino. 

1754. Moer, M . 

Traits de la Culture des Renoncules, CEillets, Auricules, 
ct Tulipe*. l2mo. 

1757. Bet trand, Francis, a citizen of Paris, en- 
thusiastically attached to the country, but not being 
able to retire to it, he amused himself by collecting 
passages from the poets on the pleasures of a coun- 
try life. 

Ruris deliciae. CoUectae ex melioris noise Latinis Gallicis- 
que Poetis. Paris. 12mo. 

1757. Morel, N , of Lyons, born 172-. An 

ancient architect, who introduced the modern 
style of gardening in France. He assisted Girardin 
in laying out Ermenonville, and afterwards was 
employed at the extensive concerns of the park of 
Mereville. 

1. L'Art de Distribuer les Jardins suivant I'usage des Chi- 
nois. Londres. 8vo. 1757. 

2. Theorie des Jardins, ou I'Art des Jardins de la Nature. 
8vo. 1776. 

A new edition, enriched with a list of trees, their heights 
and colors, by C. Morel, in 1803. 

3. Tableau Dendrologique, contenant la Liste des Plantes 
Iiigneuses, Indigenes et JSxotiques acclimat^es ; la maniere 
dont elles se projiagent, le terrain et I'exposition qui leur 
conviennent. Lyons. 12mo. ISOO. 

1758. Gouges de Cessieres ; advocate at Laon. 
Les Jardins d'Ornement, poeme. 8vo. 

1759. Bidet, M , of the agricultural academy 

of Tuscany, and officer of the royal household ; a 
native of Champagne. 

Traite de la Culture des \'ignes. 2 vols. 12mo. 1751). 
An improved edition by Duhamel du Monceau, in 1752. 

1760. Buchox, Pierre Joseph, a physician and 
member of several societies ; born at Metz in 1731, 
died in great distress at Paris in 1807. He wrote 
above tliree hundred volumes relative to medicine, 
agriculture, the veterinary art, and natural history. 
A plant {Buchoxiana) was named after him by 
L' Heritier. 

1. Catalogue Latin et Francois des Plantes, Viavces, &c. 
pour la Decoration des Jardins, 1786, ISmo. 

2. Dissertation sur la Cedre du Libon, le Platane et le 
Cytise. Par, 8vo. 1804. 

He printed numerous other dissertations of this descrip- 
tion separately, which are all collected in the following 
work. 

3. NoUTcau Traits Physique et Economique per forme de 
Dissertations de toutes les Plantes qui croissent sur la Sur- 
face du Globe. In fol. 1786. 2 vols. 

4. Lettre sur la Methode de s'enricher promptement, et 
de conserver sa sante par la Culture des Vegetaux. 8vo. 
1760. 

5. M^moire sur I'Hortensia, le Cestrau, &c. augment^e de 
deux memoires sur le Lagerstrom et le Fothergill. 8vo. 
1801. 

6. Monographie de la Rose, et de la Violette. 8vo. 1805. 

7. Oljservalions sur Quatre Genres d'Arbustes ; I'Azalia, le 
Cedre, le Kalmia et le Rhododendron, que meritent d'etre 
cultives dans les Jardins. 8vo. 1782. 

S. Prospectus d'Histoire Naturelle des Vegetaux, de la 
France, &c. ; ou la Botanique, la Medicine, I'Agriculture, 
le Jardinage et les Arts reunis dans le r^gne Tegetal de la 
France. Metz, in 8vo. 1765. 

Buchoz was at this time botanical demonstrator to the 
Royal College of Physicians, at Nanoy. 

9. Reflexions sur le Genre du Roblnier. 8vo. 

10. Traite de la Culture des Arbres et Arbustes qu'on 
j)eut elever dans le royaume. 12mo. 1785, 

1760. Duchesne, Ant. Nicolas, professor of natural 
history, in the central school of Versailles, author 
of some geological works. 

1. Traite des Fraisiers. 12mo. 1760. 

2. Sur la Formation des Jardins. Par I'auteur des Con- 
siderations sur le Jardinage. Paris. 8vo. 1775. 

1760. Thierrat, , a lawyer, and an officer in 

the woods and waters ; author of various tracts on 
agriculture. 

Observations sur la Culture des Arbres a haute Tige, par- 
ticulierement des Pommieis. 

1763. Bonnelle, Charles, born at Artois. 

Le Jardinier d'Artois, ou El^mens de la Culture des Jar- 
dins Potagers et Fruitiers. 8vo. 

1763. Maupin, , valet-de-chambre to the 

queen ; author of a number of works on rural 
subjects. 

1. 1/ Art de la Vigne, &c. 8vo. 1779. 

2. Almanach, ou Manuel de Vignerons de tous les pays. 
Paris, 8vo. 1789. 

5. Avis sur la Vigne, &c. Paris. 8vo. 1786. 

4. I^ettre de 1' Auteur de la nouvelle Methode de cultiver la 
Vigne, &c. Paris. 12mo. 1764.; 

5. Nouvelle Methode de cultiver la Vigne, &c. 12mo. Paris, 
176.'!. 

A new edition, with additions, by Buchoz in 1799. 

1763. Mandirola, . 

Manuel du Jardinier. 8vo. 

1765. Chambray, Louis, Marquis de, born in 1703, 
occupied himself much in cultivating the apple, and 
in making cider. 

Art de cultiver les Pommiers, les Poiriers, et de fjiire les 
Cidres, selon I'usage de Normandie. Paris. 12mo 

1765. Delille, Jacques, an eminent French poet. 



member of the French Academy, bom at Qermont, 
in 1738, died at Paris in 1811. 

1. Les Jardins. 

There is an English translation by Mrs. Montolieu, in 1797. 

2. Le Jardin d'Eden, suivi d une Epitre a deux Enfans Voy- 
ageurs. Paris. 18mo. 1817. 

1765. Dupuy, . 

Observationes sur la Culture de la Vigne. 

1765. Saint-Peravi,Guernieaude, born inBeauce, 
author of some tracts on political economy and agri- 
culture. 

Traits de la Culture de differentes Fleurs, des Narcisses, 
Giroffliers, Tuberouses, Anemones, Jacinthes, Jonquilles, Iris, 
Lis, et Amaranths. 12mo. 

1766. Lataille-des-Essarts, . 

M^moire sur le Safran. Orleans. 8vo. 

1766. Masse, Jean , advocate. 

1. Dictionnaire portatif des Eaux et Forets. 2toIs. 8vo. 

2. Traits des Bois et des differentes, Manieres de les semer, 
cultiver, planter, exploiter, &c. Paris. 2 vols. 8vo. 1769. 

1767. Chartreuse, les reverend Peres de, de Paris. 
The nursery of these reverend fathers was for a long 
time the only one on the continent. 

Catalogue des Arbres a Fruits, les plus excellens, les plus 
rares, et les plus estimees, qui se cuitivent dans les PtJpinieres 
des P6res Chartreuse, avec la Description tant des arbres que des 
fruits, &c. 8vo. 

1767. Schabol, Jean-Roger, a deacon, the son of a 
sculptor, who occupied himself much in gardening, 
and wrote several works, not elegant as to style, but 
original, and entirely from his own experience. He 
died in 1768, aged 77 years. 

1. Theorie et 1' rat ique du Jardinage, avec fig en tdille douce. 
Paris. 3 vols. Vimo. 

This work was i>repared from the author's papers, and pi»l) 
lished after his death, by Dezallier d' Argenville, who collected 
all Schabol's works, and published them undei the title 
" Manuel du Jardinier, ou Journal de son Travail distribu^ 
par Mois. Paris. 12mo. 1772. 

2. Dictionnaire du Jardinage. 1 vol. 12mo. 1767. 

3. Observations sur les villages de Montreuil, Bagnolet, 
Vincennes, Charonne, et villages adjacens, a deux lieues ou 
environ .le Paris, an sujet de la Culture des Vegetans, avec 
une idee de la Methode fju'on-y-emploie pour traiter les Arbres, 
surtout les pechers. 1755. (Inserted in the Journal (Economiaue 
for that year.) 

4. Elemens du Jardinage utile, ou Methode de cultiver avec 
succ^s le Potager, et le Verger, d'apres les Experiences de 
Roger Schabol, &.c. Metz, in 12mo. plates. 1786. 

1767. Wenckeler, Jean George, commonly called 
Egner. 

Instructions sur le Jardinage, que renferment en abr^gd ce 
qui a rapport a la Culture des Fleurs, des Fruits, et des 
Legumes, &c. Paris. 8vo. 

1768. Saint Simon, Marquis de, aide-de-camp to 
Prince de Conti ; died in 1794. He wrote also on 
bees. 

Des Jacinthes, de leur Anatomic, Reproduction et Culture. 
Paris. 12mo. 

1768. Tschoudi, Jean-Baptiste-Louis-Theodore, 
Baron de,author of some articles in the Encycloptsdia, 
and translator of Miller's Dictionary; died at Paris, 
in 1784. 

1. De la Transplantntion, de la Naturalization, et du per- 
fectionnement des V^g^taux. 8vo. 1778. 

2. Traite des Arbres rfesineux conif^res, extrait et traduits 
de I'Anglais de Miller, avec des notes. 8vo. 1768. 

Essais sur legreff'e de I'herbe, &c. Strasbourg. 8vo. 1819. 

1769. Bearde, de V Abbaye, died young at Paris in 
1771, author of a dissertation on a subject in political 
economy, which obtained the prize of the academy 
of St. Petersburg in 1769. 

Essais d' Agriculture, ou Tentatlves Physiques, &c. Par. 
8vo. 

1769. Lariviere de, et M Dumoulin. 

Methode pour cultiver les Arbres k Fruits et pour les cle- 
ver en treilles, par le Sieurs de Lariviere et Dumoulin. P^ris. 
12mo. 

1769. Toustain-de-Limesy, Charles Francois, an 
officer in a regiment of Champagne, under the old 
regime, member of several agricultural societies. 

Memoires sur les Plantations. 

1770. Anon. 

Le Jardinier prevoyant, Almanach suivi des Considerations 
sur le Jardinage. Paris. 16mo. 

This work has been improved, and continued to the present 
time, and now appears annually under the title of 

Le Bon Jardinier, Almanach, avec Supplement, contenant 
des preceptes generaux de culture, &c. par Rl. M. Loiseleur 
des Longchamps, Vilmorin, et Noisette. Paris. 12mo. plates. 

1771. Herissant, Louis Antoine Prosper, born in 
Paris in 1745. His father was a celebrated printer, 
and the son was educated as a physician, but died in 
1770, at the early age of twenty-five. 

Jardin des Curieux, ou Catalogue raisonne des plantes les 
plus belles et les plus rares, soit indigenes, soil 6trangeres, avec 
les noms Franjais et Latins, leur culture et les vertus par- 
ticulieres de chaque esp^ce ; le tout prec^d^ de quelques notions 
sur la culture en general. Paris. 8vo. 

This work is the descri])tion " raisonnee" of a fine garden 
which Mr. Cochin, an ancient magistrate of Paris, had formed 
at Chatillon near Bagneux, within two miles of Paris. Heris- 
sant died before his work was completed, and it was finished 
by M. Coquereau. 

1771. Latapie, , the translator of Wheatley's 

Observations on Modern Gardening; -to which he 
added, a Discourse on the Origin of the Art, notes 



Book 1. 



FRENCH WORKS 



ON GARDENING. 



1119 



to the text, and a description of Stow, where he is 
said to have resided some time with Lord Temple. 

L'Art de former les Jardiiis Modernes, ou I'Art des Jardins 
Anglais, traduit de rAn^lais, he. Paris. 8vo. 

1772. Brousse, M de la. 

Traite de la Culture du Figuier, suivi d'Observations et 
d'EVfieriences sur la meillure maniert de la cultiver. Vimo. 
ills. A Society of Am tteurs. 

Kssai sur la taille des arbres fruitiers. Paris. 12mo. fig. 

177.3. Pelletier, de Frepillon, . 

Essai sur la taille 4e» Arbres Fruitiers. 12mo. 

1773. Trother, . 

I'Art de fertiliser le« Terres, et de preserver de la gelee 
coinmodement et a pen de frais, les Arbres, et Arbrisseau*, 
les Vignes, &e. Perit. 3 vols, in 8vo. 
177-1. Velan, 1' Abbe de. 

Trail< de la Culture de Melon. 8vo. 

1774. Watek't, Claude Henri, receiver-general of 
finances, member of the Academy of Sciences, and 
other learned bodies, was born at Paris in 1715. He 
was celebrated for his love of arts and letters, and 
cnjoved himself at his country-house, called le 
Moulin joli, near Paris, where he created an English 
garden, and wrote on the subject. He died in 1785. 

Kssai sur les .Jardins. Paris. Svo. 

1775. Mallet, Robert Xavier,a\ithoi of several works 
on agriculture. 

1. Culture des Asperges, et des petits Pois. 12mo. 
■^t. Beaute da la Nature, Fleurimanie Raisonnfee, &c. 
12 mo. 

3. Dissertation sur la Mani^re de cultiver des Plantes 
choisis dans lee Chassis Physiques du Sieur Mallet leur In- 
venteur, avec la Description de ces Chassis. Paris. 4to. p. 33. 

vi.i. 

1775. Roubo, , joiner and architect, author of 

several works on joinery, died about the end of the 
18th century. 

L'Art de Treillageur, ou Menuiserie des Jardins. Par. fol. 
Du Hamel is said to have praised this work, in which the au- 
thor has exhausted his subject. 

1775. Vallet, A- 1^ , "a lieutenant-general 

under the old regime, and procurator fiscal of the 
barony of Romainville, near Paris. 

Manuel (Economique pour les Batimens et Jardins, tres- 
utiles aux Propridtaires et Enterpreneurs, &c. Paris. Svo. 

1777. Durival, Clement, brother of N. L. Durival, 
an agricultural writer, was born at St. Aubin, in 
1728 ; he wrote on the finances and rural economy, 
and his memoir on the vine was crowned with the 
prize at Metz, in 1777. 

La Vigne, M6moire Couronn^, a 1' Academic de Metz, par 
M. Durival le Jeune. 8vo. 

1777. Girardin, i.i?.Vicompte d' Ermenonville, a 
military officer of high rank, who travelled in Eng- 
land about the time when the new style of laying 
out grounds was coming into fashion ; and when he 
returned to France, laid out his seat at Ermenonville 
in this style. 

La composition des Paysages sur le terrain, ou des moyens 
d'embellir la Nature autour des habitations, en y joignant 
I'utile a I'agreable. 8vo. 

This work has been translated into English, with an his- 
torical introduction by Daniel Malthus, Esq.; and also into 
German and Italian. 

Another edition, with notes, was published a few years ago, 
by Rene Girardin, the son of the author, and present pro- 
prietor of Ermenonville. 

1778. Prudent, P , a capuchin friar. 

■ Reflexion d'un Vigneron de Besanjon, I'.Abb^ Bovarel, en 
1777, sur les Causes d'une Maladie qui' attaque plusieurs 
Vignobles de Franchecomt^. Vesaul. Svo. 

1779. Calonne, , advocate. 

Essai d' Agriculture en forme d'entrentien, sur les Pepini^res 
des arbres, etrangeres, et fruitiers, &c. ParLs, 12mo. 

1780. Lamoignon-Malsherbes, Chretien-Guillaume, 
born in Paris in 1721, and guillotined there by the 
revolutionary faction in 1793. He was an excellent 
man, attached to the arts, and introduced on his 
estates many exotic trees. 

Observations sur le Pins, les Orchis, le Meldze, &c. 

1780. Marechal, Pierre Sylvnin, born at Paris, in 
1750, died in 1803 ; author of a great many works, 
the principal of which is a Dictionary of Atheists. 

Decades du Cultivateur. Pans. 3 vols. Svo. 

1781. Henriquez, Jean, a lawyer, author of different 
works on forests and the chase. 

1. IMemoire sur les moyens de multiplier les plantations de 
bois sans nuire a la production des subsistences. Rheims. 
12mo. 1789. 

2. Observations sur le management des bois. Verdun. Svo. 
17S1. 

3. Code penal des Eaux et Forets. 2 vols. 12mo. 1782. 
1781. Partnenticr, Antoine-Augustin, born 1737, 

at Montdidier, in the department of La Somme, 
one of the most distinguished chemists, and 
active and careful philosoi)hers which has ai)peared 
in France. Author of a great number of works, and 
co-oi)erator in many others, as the Annates de Chi- 
mic, Nouvcau Cours d' Agriculture, &c. 

1. Recherches sur les V'egetaux nourrissans qui, dans le 
tems de dissette, peuvent reniplacer les allmens ordinaire ; 
avec des nouvelles Observations sur la Culture des Pommes de 
Terre. Paris. Svo. 



2. MSmoire sur la Culture, et les usaf^ de la Patate (Con- 
volvulus Batatas). {Mem. de I' Acad, de Toulouse, torn. 3. 
p. 183 — 196.) 

YlS2.Barruel-Beauvert, captain of dragoons under 
the old regime. 

1. Plainte du Chou et du Navet contre les Jardins de 
I'Abbe de Lille. Svo. 

In verse, and considered a " plaisanterie a^reable, piquante 
et fondee." 

2. Lettres Critiques snr le Poeme des Jardins sni'ries du 
" Cliou et du Navet." Amsterdam and Paris. Svo, 

1782. Porcelin de la Hoche-TMac, doctor of laws, 
canon of Montreuil-Bellai, in Anjou ; born in 1746 
at Dissais. 

Le i)arfait Vigneron, ou I'Art de Travailler les Vignes, de 
faire le Vin et de le conserver. 12mo. 

1783. Bretonniere, M de la. 

1. Correspondence Hurale, sur la Culture des Terres, et dei 
Jardins, &c. Paris. 12mo. 

2. Ecole du Jardinier Fruitier. 2 vols. 12mo. 

3. Ecole du Jardinier Polagere. 2 vols. 12mo. 
1783. Durdos, . 

Memoire touchant les Pepinieres. Svo. 

1783. Filassier, N , director of a nursery near 

Meudon ; member of several academies, born at 
Warwick in Flanders. 

1. Cultuie de la Grosse Asperge, dite de HoUande, &c. 
Paris. 12mo. 

2. Dictionnaire du Jardinier Franjais, Paris. 2 vols, Svo. 
1791. 

1784. Durand, , a physician of Dijon, where 

he died in 1799, author of several works on botany. 

Nouveau moyen de multiplier les Arbres Strangers. Nouv. 
Mem. de I'Acad. de Dijon. 2 sem. p. 7—6. 

1784. Mustel, . 

Traite Theorique et Pratique de la Vegetation, contenant 
plusieurs experiences nouvelks et demonstratives sur I'gcono- 
mie vegetale, et sur la culture des arbres. Paris. 4 vols. Svo. 

1785. Secondat de Montesquieu, son of the cele- 
brated author of f Esprit des Lois, died in 1796, 
aged 79 years. He never would assume the name 
which his father had rendered illustrious ; and had 
so great a respect for his memory, that he pre- 
served in the Chateau of Brede the furniture 
and the library, exactly in the order in which hi* 
father had left them. He occupied himself chiefly 
in the study of natural history, and in agriculture. 

Memoires sur I'Histoire Naturelle du Chene, sur la resistance 
des Bois a etre rompus par les poids dont ils sont charges 
£ur la culture de la vigne, &c. Paris, fol. 15 plates. 

1786. Cabanis de Salagnac, born at Issoudun in 
1722; died in 1786; advocate of parliament, mem- 
ber of the Agricultural Society of Limoges. 

Essai sur les Principes de la Gretl'e. 

A new edition in 1802. Paris, in 12mo. By Chambray. 

1787. Le Rouge, geographical engineer to the 
king. 

Recueil des plans et des vues des plus beaux Jardins de I'Eu- 
rope, &c. Paris, oblong folio, 14 parts, 1787 to 1790. 
An interesting and valuable work, now become scarce. 

1787. Lcxay-dc-Marnesia, , born at Besan- 

fon, and died at Paris in 1800, aged 66 years ; a 
member of the assembly, &c. 

De la nature Champetre : Poeme. Paris. Svo. 
A very pleasing poem, which has passed through severaJ 
editions. 

1788. Bauman, F. G. 

Catalogue des Arbres Fruitiers les plus recherches et les 
plus estimes qui peuvent se cultiver dans notre Climat. 
Paris. Svo. 

1788. Bousmard, , a Frenchman, a captain 

in the Prussian service, supposed to have been slain 
at the siege of Dantzic. 

Memoire sur cette (Question ; quelle seraient les moyens de 
multiplier les Plantations des Bois, sans trop nuire a la Pro- 
duction des Subsistances ? Svo. 

1788. Fontaines, Louis de. Grand Master of the 
University of Paris, and President of the legisla- 
tive body, &c. 

Le Verger, poeme. Svo. 

1788. Saint Martin, M de. 

Traite de la Culture du Chene. Svo. 

This is esteemed a good work on sowing and planting 
woods, and disposing of their produce. 

1789. M. L. B., Mr. Le Berriays. 

Traite des .Jardins, ou le nouveau la (^uintinie, contenant 
la Culture : lo. des arbres fruitiers ; 2o. des plantes potage- 
res : 3o. des arbres, arbrisseaux, fleurs et plantes d'oriie- 
ments ; 4to. des arbres, arbrisseaux, et plantes d'orangerie et 
serre chaude. Paris. 4 vols. Svo. figures. 

1790. C/iassel, , formerly president of the 

parliament of Metz. 

Supplement au Dictionnaire des Jardiniers, qui comprend 
tous les genres et toules les especes non detaillees dans le Dic- 
tionnaire de Miller. Metz. 4to. 

1790. Masson-de-Blamont, Charles-Francois Phil- 
lihert, born at Blamont in Montbelliard in 1762; 
became major in the Russian army ; exiled from 
that country in 1797 ; in 1802 became secretary of 
the prefecture of Coblentz, and associate of the in- 
stitute. He translated Mason's English Garden, 
and Wheatley's Observations, into French. 

Les Jardins de Samboursky, poete Russe, traduit du Russe 
en Fran<i'ais. Svo. 



1120 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV 



1790. Herve, M. Ville, director of the Royal Gar- 
den of the Luxembourg. Mr. Herv^'s father was 
gardener to the Chartreux monastery, where fruit 
trees had been collected and propagated for up- 
wards of half a century before the revolution. In 
the early part of this revolution, the elder Hervd, 
foreseeing that the establishment would be put 
down, applied for and obtained permission from 
the existing government to establish a national 
garden of fruit-trees, and the garden of the Luxem- 
bourg was made the receptacle ot this collection. 

TaiUe raisonnee des Arbres fruitiers. Paris. 8vo. 
A new edition, with a supplement, sur la tirefie, in 1802. 
8vo. 

Catalogue M^lhodique et Classique, de tous les arbres, ar- 
bustes fruitiers et dss vi^nes, formant la collection de I'ecole 
imperiale etablie pres le Luxembourg. Paris, 4to. 1S09. 

1790. Rosier, Francois, born in Lyons, in 1734, 
and killed there on the 29th September, 1793, dur- 
ing the siege of that city, by a bomb-shell, which 
buried his shattered remains in the ruins of the 
apartment which he occupied. He began his ca- 
reer as an author, by writing in the Journal de 
Physique et iVHistoire Naturelle, of which Gau- 
thier Dagoty was editor. He next occupied himself 
with his Agricultural or liurul Dictionary, which 
is the work by which he is chiefly known. He cul- 
tivated a farm near Bezicrs, which Arthur Young 
went to see when on his tour in France in 1787 ; 
but the abbe had left it, on account of the Bishop 
of Bezieres, who kept a mistress somewhere near, 
and, for his more commodiously visiting her, got 
a road made across the farm at the expense of the 
province. This occasioned a quarrel between the 
abb^ and the bishop, which ended in the former 
being obliged to quit his farm. The abbe, like all 
other men who depart from common practices, 
■was looked on as a fanciful and wild cultivator, and 
because he paved his stables and cow-houses, it was 
reported by his neighbors that he paved his vine- 
yard. He wrote a great many works, chiefly on 
agriculture. 

1. Manuel du Jardinier, mis en pratique pour chaque Mois 
de I'Annee. 2 vols. ISmo. 

2. Cours complet d' Agriculture theorique, pratique, ^cono- 
mie, iNcc. 15 vols. 4to. 

3. Cours complet d'Agriculture pratique, d'economie, ru- 
rale, et domestique, &C. 6 vols. Svo. 

4. Nouveau Cours complet d'Agriculture th^rique, et pra- 
tique, contenant la grande et la petite Culture, I'Economie 
rural et domestique, !a Medicine V^terinaire, &c. ; ou Dic- 
tionnaire raisoimg et universal d'Agriculture. Ouvrage re- 
dige sur le Plan de celui de feu I'Abbe Rozier, duquel on a 
conserve tous les Articles dont la Bonte a et^ prouvee par 
I'Experience ; par les Membres de la Section d'Agriculture 
de I'Institut de France, viz. par MM. Thouin, I'armentier 
Tessier, Huzard, Silvestre, Bosc, Chassiron, Chaptal, I«icroix, 
De Perthius, Yvart, DecandoUe, Du Tour. 13 vols. Svo. 
1810. 

This is by far the best general work on the agriculture 
and gardening of France, and supersedes the use of a great 
many others. 

1791. Nectoux, . 

Observations sur la Preparation des envois des Plantes, et 
Arbres des Indes Orientales pour I'Amerique, et leur traite- 
ment pendant la traversee. {Mi'm. de la isoc. R. d'Agricult. 
de Paris, Trimestre d'Hiver, p. 110.) 

1791 Tessier, Henri-Alexandre, Professor of 
Agriculture and Commerce to the Central Schools, 
Member of the Institute, and Doctor of Medicine, 
&c. ; author of a great number of works, and, jointly 
with Professor Thouin, of the article Agriculture, 
in the Encyclopedie Metliodique. 

Blemoires sur les Plantations des Terrains vaques, sur-tout 
sur celles des grandes routes, et sur les causes du d^p^risse- 
ment des Bois, et les moyens d'y remedier. Svo. 

1792. Ceruti, Joseph Ant. Joachim, born at Turin 
in 1738, became a member of the society of Jesuits, 
and rendered himself famous at the suppression of 
that order by his Apologie de Vlnstitut. He was the 
friend of Mirabeau, and the principal editor of the 
Feuille Villageoise. 

liCs Jardins de Betz, Poeme accompagne de Notes instruc- 
tives sur les Travaux Champ^tres ; sur les Arts, les Lois, &e. 
Svo. 

This work was written in 1785, but did not appear till 
1792. 

1723. Paulet, . 

Traite des Champignons, Ouvrage dans le quel on trouve 
la Description d^taillez, les Qualites, les Eftets, les differens 
Usages des Champignons, &c. Paris. 2 vols. 4to. plates. 

1794. Preaudeau.Chemilly, Eugene, cultivator 
at Bourneville. in the department of Oise. 

Des Haies consider^s comme Clotures ; de leurs avantages, 
et des moyens de les obtenir. Paris. Svo. 

1795. Butret, , gardener. 

Taille raisonnee des Arbres Fruitiers, et Operations relatives 
a leur Culture, d^monstrees clairement par des raisons phy- 
siques tirees de leur differente nature. Paris. Svo. A tenth 
edition in 1804. 

1797. Rossignol, I'Abb^ de. 

Le Jardinier Universel, ou I'art de cultiver les jardins po- 
tagers, les arbres fruitiers de toutes especes; tous lesoignons, i 



et plantes k fleurs ; les arbres et arbrisseaus d'omement, le 

chene, les fourrages, &c. Liege. 12rao. 

1798. Bridel, , an officer employed in the 

management of the national woods and waters at 
Orleans. 

Manuel Pratique du Forestier. 12mo. 

1798 Curten, , architect and garden-engineer 

at Grenoble. 

1. Le Guide des Cultivateurs. Grenoble. Svo. / 

2. Coup-d'oeil Politique et Economique sur I'etat actuel des 
Bois et Forets en France, suivi d'un projet d'Institution Fo- 
restiere. Grenoble. Svo. 1804. 

18-. Tatin, A , of Paris. 

Principes raisonnes et Pratiques ,de la Culture des Arbres 
Fruitiers, d'Agrement et Forestiers, Arbrisseaus et Arbustes 
d'agrement, des graines, plantes potag^res et legumeneuses, 
des prairies naturelles et artificielles. Paris. 2 vols. Svo. 4th 
edit. 1811. 

18-. Larochefocaidd-Liancourt, a proprietor of 
considerable extent, who studied agriculture under 
Arthur Young, and travelled in North America. 
He has publisiied his travels, and some other works, 
but is best known in France by the vastes entreprises 
which he made on his estates. 
Notes sur le Chene. Par. Svo. 

1800. Bcrtholon, native of Lyons, where he died 
in 1799. He was professor of physical science at 
Montpellier, and afterwards of history at Lyons ; 
the friend of Franklin, and author of several works 
on rural, political, and domestic economy. 

Traite de la Taille de la Vigiie. Svo. 

1800. Bornet, Charles Henry, agent to the admi- 
nistration of forest/in the circle of Turnehem, in 
the department of the Pas de C(dais. 

1. Code de la Conservation generale des Bois et Forfts na- 
tionales. I'Jmo. 

2. De I'Agriculture des Bois d'apr^s les Prinpices de la Cul- 
ture A'egetale, 1SU4. 1 vol. Svo. 

180-. Ckarpenti^r de Caussigny. 

Note sur les 5loyens a employer pour transporter au loin, 
par mer, dans des"Voyages de lon^ cours, les V^getaux et k« 
Graines exoiiques. Mem. des bocietfe Francois, torn. i. 
p. 481. 

1800. Coiniereaux, Franqois, professor of rural 
architecture, and author of several works, particu- 
larly of the mode of building en pise. 

3. Traite de I'ancien Pis6 des Komains. 

2. Traite qui enseigne le nouveau Pis^, la manifire de le 
faire lors des pluies, des neiges et des friinas. 

5. Nouveaux Murs de Terasses solides et durables, et qui 
dispensent de cette profusion de mat^riaux qu'on y einploie ; 
ouvrage ullie a tous les Pays principalement aux architects, 
ingenieurs, maeons, &c. Svo. 1805. 

4. Instruction agr(5able et utile pour enibellir les jardins 
a peu de frais. 1814. Svo. 

1801. Cadet, Charles Louis. 

1. Memoire sur I'Arbre Cirier de la Louisiane et de la 
Pensylvanie. Paris. Svo. 

1809. Deleuze, J. P. F. The translator of Dar- 
win's Loves of the Plants; secretary to several 
learned institutions at Paris. 

Recherches sur les Plantes d'Omemenf, et sur leur Intro- 
duction dans uos Jardins. [Annales du Museum d'Hist. i\,,t. 
torn. S-,et 9.) 

1800. Dahnar, Basse N — , a native of Germany,, 
purchased the estate of Villegeries, near Paris, and 
greatly improved it both as to use and beauty. 

De la Utilite et de la Cultiure de I'Acacia-Robinier : d^difr 
aux Cultivateurs. Paris. Svo. 

1800. Guillcmeau, Jean Louis JSIarie, in the em- 
ploy of government, born at Niort in 1766. 

Histoire Naturelle de la Rose. Paris. 12mo. 

1800. JolyclercN . 

Phytologie Universelle, ou HistoireNaturelle et M^thodique 
des Plantes, de leurs propriet^s, de leurs vertus, et de leur 
culture : ouvrage consacre aux progr^s des sciences utiles, de 
I'agriculture et de tous les arts. Paris. 5 vols. Svo. 

1800. Querber,J . 

Moyens d'Encouragement pour les Plantations Artificielles, 
&c. Metz. 4to. 

1801. Le?noin€ Leonor, founder of an academy of 
theoretical and practical gardening, held in Paris, 
Rue-d'Enfer. 

1. Manuel du P^pinieriste de Paris. 12mo. 1805. 

2. Cours de Culture des Arbres a Fruits, et de la Vigne de& 
Jardins. Paris. Svo. 1801. 

3. Cours complet sur la taille du Pecher et autres Arbres ^ 
Fruit, &C. Paris, 12mo. 1803. 

1801. Lefebvre,E A, assistant chemist to the 

school of health at Strasbourg. 

Experiences sur la Germination des Plantes Strasbourgh. 
Svo. 

1801. M. M. Chaptal, Rozier, Parmentier, et 
Bussieux, eminent chemists and naturalists, mem- 
bers of the Institute. 

Traite Th^oretique et Pratique sur la Culture de la Vigne 
avec I'Art de faire le Vin, les Eaux de vie. Esprit de Vin 
Vinaigres simples et composes, &c. Paris. 2 vols. Svo. Plates 

1801. Ranch, B. A , engineer of roads and 

bridges. 

Harmonie Hydro- Vegetaleet Met&r^«Iogique, on Recherches 
sur les moyens de Recr^er, avec nos forets, la force des tem- 
peratures, et la regularity des saisons, par deses plantations 
raisonnecs. Paris. 2 vols. Svo. 



Book 1. 



FRENCH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



sur couche, et 
12mo. 



1811. Robin, C .cultivator. 

Observations en faveur de I'Acacia. Paris. 8vo. 

1802. Calve/, Eiienne, member of several literary 
and agricultural societies, and a scientific experi- 
menter in the latter art. 

1 . Traits complete sur les P^pinifercs, tant pour les Arbres 
•fruitiers, et Forestiers que pour les Arbrisseaux. Paris. 3 vols. 

Zio. 

2. Notice Historiqne sur la P^piniere national des chartreux 
au Luxemburg. I'imo. 1804. 

3. Memoire sur I'Ajonc ou Genet epineux, consid^r^ sous 
le Rapport de FourraRe, de I'Amendement des Terres St^riles, 
et de Supplement au Bois. Paris. 8vo. 1809. 

4. Du Melon et de sa Culture sous chassi 
en pleine terre. Paris. 8vo. 1805. 

5. Manuel Pratique des Plantations, &c. Paris. 
1804, 

6. Des Arbres Fruitiers Pyramidaux, vulgairement nom. 
m6s Quenouilles, avec la mani6re de elever, sous cette forme 
tous les Arbres a Fruit. Paris. 18mo. 1802. 

7. Principes Pratiques sur la Plantation et la Culture des 
Chasselas et autres Vignes Pr^cores, principalement sous la 
latitude des environs de Paris, avec la Liste des Nouvelles 
Varietes, Figures, &c. Paris. 8vo. 

1802. Castel, Rene Richard, professor of literature 
in the Prytan^e Francais. - 

Les Plantes ; Poeme. Paris. ISmo. 

1802. Dumont-Courset,horn at Boulogne-sur-nior 
in 1746, member of several societies. He retired to 
Courset, near Boulogne, in 1809. 

Le Botaniste Cullivateur, ou Description, Culture, et Usages 
de la plus Grande Partie des Plantes etrangeres, naturalisees. 
et indigenes, cultivees en France et en Aiigleterre, rangees 
suivant la Methode de Jussieu. Paris. 5 vols, in 8vo. 

This is generally esteemed one of the best French boots on 
gardening. 

1802. Duplessis, F. S. 

Des Vegetaux resineUx, tant indigenes qu' exotiques, avec le 
proc^dds pour extraire les r^sines, &c. Paris. 4 vols. Svo. 

1802. Hammer, F L , and Dietric/et. The 

first, formerly professor of natural history at Calmar 
and Strasbourg ; he is author of several articles in 
the Jom-nal (T Economic Rurale. Of Dietrich t 
nothing is known. 

M^moires sur les Arbres qui peuvent £tre employes aux 
plantations le long des routes. Svo. 

1802. Richard, an officer in the department 

of woods and forests. 

Manuel du Forestier, ou Traitfe ^l^mentaire, contenant le 
bailivage, le martilage, les ventes et exploitations des coui>es 
annuelles, I'estimation d'icelles, leur r^colement, I'am^nage- 
ment, le bornement, et la regeneration des forets, suivi du 
Traite des P^pini^res, leur culture, semer, et plantations, ap. 
puye par la pratique. Paris, liimo. 

1803. Cubieres, Aim, an esteemed writer, 

member of the agricultural society of Versailles. 

1. Memoirs sur le Tulipier. Svo. 

2. Memoire sur I'Brable a feuille de cMne, ou Acer Neeundn. 
Versailles. 8vo. 1804. 

1803. Francois, Nicolas, born in 1752, at NeufchA- 
teau, which name is generally joined with his own. 
He has been successively a deputy, advocate, and 
judge ; and for some years past has occupied himself 
much in agriculture. He was several years presi. 
dent of the Paris Agricultural Society, in which are 
a number of his papers. 

Lettre sur le Robinier, connu sous le nom impropre de 
Faux Acacia, avec plusieurs pieces relatives a la culture et aux 
usages de cet arbre. Paris. l-2mo. 

1803. Lorenx, J B . 

Manuel du Forestier, ou Traite complet de tout ce qui a 
rapport a I'Histoire Naturelle des Arbres. Strasbourg, 2 »ols. 
8vo. 

1803. U7ie Societe des Savans. 

Bibliothdque des Propri^taires Ruraui, ou journal d'eco- 
nomie rural et doniesticjue, &c. Svo. 

A periodical work begun in 1805, and of which 74 numbers 
had ajipeared up to May 1809. 

180-1. Dubois, Louis, born at Lisieux, in 1770, 
librarian of the departmont of I'Orne, member of 
various societies. 

1. Du Pommier, du Poirier, el du Cornier, considfre's dans 
leur histoire, leur physiologie, el les diverses usages de leur 
fruits, &c. Paris. 2 vols. I'imo. 

Des Melons, et des leurs Variet&s, consid^r^s dans leur his- 
toire, leur pliysiologie, leur culture naturelle et artilicielle, &c. 
Paris, in 12mo. 

1804. Fanon, , author of various works on 

rural economy. 

1. Des Arbres k fruits, et nouvelle mc-thode d'affiuctcr le 
pommier et le poirier, fondu sur 28 ans d'experiences consecu- 
tives. Paris, 12mo. 

2. Causes du Deperissement des Forfits, &c. 1806, Svo. 
Supplement in 1811, Svo. 

1804. Poinsot, -. 

L'Ami des Jardiniers. Paris. 2 vols. Svo. 

1804. Sonnini de Manoncourt, Charles Slgisbert 
born at Luneville, in the department of Meurthe, 
in 1150 ; formerly an officer of the marine, a learned 
man, who travelled in Egypt and South America, 
and wrote a number of esteemed works. He was 
one of the princii)al writers in the Dictionnaire 
d'' Histoire Naturetle. 

1. Culture de la Julienne comme plants utile. Paris. 8vo. 
1801, 



2. Trait6 de I'ArachJde, ou pistache de teire ; contenant la 
description, culture, et usageg de cette plante, &c. I'aiis. Svo. 
1808. 

1805. Bastien, Jean Franqois, a bookseller of Paris, 
who put his name as the author of several books on 
agriculture which he procured to be compiled. 

1. Calendrier du JardiniM. Paris. 12mo. 

2. La Nouvelle Maison Rustique, &c. 8vo. 
5. La Flore Jardiniere, &c. Svo. 1809. 

1805. Jaume, Saint Hiliaire, a co-laborer witU 
Jussieu in the Dictionnaire des Sciences Natureiles. 

Exposition des Families Natureiles, et de la Generation de« 
Plantes. Paris. 4 vols. Svo. 

1805. Leschevin, C. member of the agricultural 
society of the Seine. 

De I'usage de la Fum^e dans les Vignes, centres les geMfis 
tardives du Printems. Paris. Svo. ^ 

1805. Michaux, F A , a celebrated natural- 
ist, who has travelled in North America, and pub- 
lished an account of the trees of that country. 

1. Memoire sur la Naturalization des Arbres, Forestiers de 
rAmiJrique, Septentrionale, dans le quel on indique ce que 
I'ancien Gouvernement avail fait pour arriver k cet but, el le* 
moyens qu'il conviendrait d'emjjloyer pour y jiarvenir ; suivi 
d'un tableau raisonne des Arbres de ce Pays, compart avec 
ceux que produit la France. Paris. 8vo. 

Histoire des Arbres Forestiers de i'Am^riaue Septentrionale 
2 vols. 1810. 

liisioae des Chenes de I'Ameriime. ou Descriptior.8 ct 
Figures tie toutes les especes et vari^tcTs des Chenes cultivees 
dans I'Amerique Sept«ntrionale, in fol. fig. 

180. '5. Board, I. L., director of the dyers of the 
imperial manufactory. 

Abrege du Traite sur la Culture de la Vigne, avec I'Art de 
faire le Vin, et les Kaux-de-vie. Paris. Svo. 

ISOa Cai//us, N de, fot merly inspector of the 

royal nurseries. 
Histoire du Rapprochement des Vegfetaux. Paris. 12mo. 

1807. Cadet-de-Vaux, Antoine-Alexis, born in 1743, 
a patriot, incessantly engaged in the interests of 
humanity, has founded, or led to the foundation of 
several useful establishments, and among others, of 
public nurseries in the departments. He translated 
the chemiftry of Spielmann. 

1. De la Restauration et du Gouvernement des Arbres k 
Fruits, mutil^s et degrades par la succession annuelle de 
Wbourgeonnement et de la taille. Paris, Svo. 1807. 

2. Proc^dds de la Culture des Asperges de HoUande, Decade 
Philosophique. 6 Ann(5e. 

1808. Clierrier, J B , gardener at "Wassy, 

in the department of Haute Marne. 

Memoire sur la Culture de la Vigne. Svo. 

1808. Douette-Richardot, cultivator (or yeoman) 
at Langres, who has planted extensively, and if not 
the inventor, was the first to publish in France the 
mode of cutting and felling trees by removing a part 
of the ground's surface, and cutting over close by 
the roots, or what the French term cutting enlie 
deux terres. 

Le la Coupe des Bois entre deux Terres. Paris, Syo. 
1808. Un Amateur. 

Traite complet sur le Jardin Potager, &c. avec une Grande 
Planche offranl les Flaps, coupe el elevation d'une serre a le- 
gumes. Paris. 12mo. 

181 . . Lasieryie, Ch. Ph. Comte de, an active 
patriot and philanthropist, author of various works 
on agriculture and general economy ; but chiefly 
known by his treatises on wool. Merino sheep, and 
education. 

Culture du Souchet tuberculeux. {^rttiadt Philosuphiqtie, 
7 Annee.) 

Collection des Machines employes dans I'Oiconomie Rurale. 
2 vols. 4to. 1821-2. 

181 . . Loisleur de Longchamps, M.D., one of the 
compilers of Le ban Jardinier. (See Anon. 1770, 
and Delaunai/, 1811.) 

Nouveatix Duhamel, ou Traits des Arbres, et Arbustes 
qu'on cultive en France en pleine terre. Paris, tol, 71 livrai- 
sons, in 181.5. 

181 . . Laborde, Alexandre, Comte de. 

Description des Nouveaux Jardins de la France, et de ses 
Anciens Chateaux. Les Desseiiis, par C. Bourgeois. Paris, 
folio. 

181 . . Noisette, Louis Claude, botanist and nur- 
seryman at Paris, one of the compilers of Le bon 
Jardinier. {Anon. 1110, and Delaunay, 1811.) 

1. Le Jardin Forestier, contenant I'Historie, et la Culture des 
des Arbres Forestiers. &c. Paris. 4to. 

2. Le Jardin Fruitier. 12 livraisons. 4to. ISl.?. - 
S. Catalogue des Arbres Fruitiers. Paris. 4to. 1821. 

181-. Lair, P. A. 

1. Description des Jardins du Courset, Paris. Svo. 

2. Notice sur M. Le Berriays, auteur du Nouveau dc la 
Quintinie. Svo. 

1810. Kraft, J Charles, a German architect 

and designer, author of an esteemed work on car- 
pentry. 

1. Plans de plus beaux Jardins Pittoresques de France, d'An- 
gleterre, et d'Allemagne, et des edifices, monumens, fabriques, 
etc. qui concourent k leur embellissement, dans tous les genres 
d'arcnitecture, tels que Chinois, Egyptien, Anglais, Atabe, 
Moresque, &c. Paris, imper. fol. 

2. Becueil des plus Jolies Maisons de Paris, et de ses cnvi, 
tons, comprenant les Elevations intfericures, ct e^t^rieurct dc 
chaque maison, &c.' Paris, folio, 



4 C 



1122 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV; 



ISn. Dclaunay, Mordannf, one of the librarians 
of the Jardin des Plantes, principal editor of the fol- 
lowing works. (See Anon. 1811.) 
.1. Le. l>on Jardinier. Paris. 12mo. 

2 Figures pour I'Almanach du bon Jardinier. 12mo. 

1811. Gallesio, George, sub-prefect of Savonna, 
near Genoa. 

Traite du Citru.^. Paris. 1 vol, 8vo. 

1811. Lelieur de Ville-sur-Arc, le Comte, ad- 
ministrator-general of the parks, nurseries, and gar- 
dens of the king. 

1. La Pomone Francai^e, ou Traite de la Culture Franeaise 
et de la taille des arbres fraitiers. Paris. 8vo. S plates. 

'I. .Meuioire sur les Maladies des Arbres Fruitiers. Paris. 
l'2mo. 1811. 

5. De la Culture du Rosier. Paris. 12mo. 1811. 
1813. Guerin et Schwartz. 

\'ue5 et Description du Jardin des Planles. Paris, folio. 

1813. Pelleport-Saiine, 3/ , member of the 

Toulouse Agricultural Society. 

Traite de la JIaniere de planter, d'^ever et de cuUiver la 
Vij^ie. Toulouse. 1 vol. Svo. 

1814. Percier, Charles, et P. F. L. Fontaine, archi- 
tects. 

Choix des plus celehres Maisons de Piaisance de Rome et de 
ses environs. Paris, fol. 

This splendid work contains, in moft cases, plans of the gar- 
dens attached to the villas. 

1815. Monfpelicr, A , cultivator in the depart- 
ment of I'Aude. 

De la Culture des Arbres a Fruits. Castlenaudarv. Svo. 

1815. Ma/0, Charles. 

Guirlande de Fleurs, ou Origine et Histoire des jolies Fleurs 
qu'on cullive en France, &c. Paris. ISmo. 16 plates. 

•1815. Moxard, Jean, proprietaire cultivateur at 
Montreuil, near Paris, a village famous for its 
peaches. Mozard was successor to Pepen, who was 
distinguished as the first cultivator of peach-trees at 
Montreuil, or, indeed, in France, from 1720 to 1770. 

Principcs Praticjue siir I'Education, la culture, la laille, tt 
I'eboura^eonnement des arbres fruitiers, et principaleinent du 
Pfcher, d'apres la :\Iethode de Ptpiii et autres Cultivateurs de 
IVIontreuil : ouvrnge qui a obtenu deux Medaiiles d'Or de la 
Societe Rovale d'As^riculture du departement de la Seine. 
Paris. Svo.' 4 plates. 

1816. De Caiimels. 

Tables Synoptiques des Characteres diflerentes de la \'i?ne. 
Touloux. Svo. p. 235. 

These tables are for the most part taken from dementi's 
\Torlc, which De Caumcls translated from the Spanish. 

1816. Du Petit Thouars, le Chevalier Aubert 
Aubert ; director of the government garden of the 
minister of the interior. ^ 

1^ Recueil de Ra; norts et de Memoires sur la Culture des 
Arbres Fruitiers Uie dans lesseances particulieres de la Societe 
d' Agriculture de Paris. Paris. Svo. plates. 

2. Histoire d'un Morceau deBois, precedee d'un Essdi sur la 
S^vc, consideree comme rtJsultat de la vegetation, &c. Paris. 
Svo. 1 plate. 

3. Le \'erger Francais, ou Tiaite (jcnerale de la Culture des 
Arbres Fruitiers qui croissent en pleine terre dans les environs 
de Paris. 1 vol. Svo. 

1816. JuUen, A , author of the Manuel du 

Sommelier ; inventor of some instruments in use 
for the filtration of liquids. 

Topogr.iphie de tous les X'iijnobles coiinus, &c. suivie d'une 
classification ^enerale des vins. Paris. Svo. 

1816. Jauitex, J P , of the city of Metz, 

engineer, and member of the Agricultural Society 
of the department of Moselle. 

Manual du \'igneron du Departement de la iMoselle. 

^llG^^Thouln, Jean, C. M. H. S , brother to the 
professor, and to 'Gabriel Thouin ; foreman of the 
Jardin des Plantes, Paris. 

3Iemoir sur I'Kmploi de IMachefer dans le Jardinage, 4to. 

1817. Lamhrat/, M , nurseryman at Mandres, 

in the canton of Boissy-Saint-Leger, in the depart- 
ment of the Seine and Oise. 

Expose d'un -iloyen mis en pratique pouT emjiecher la Vigne 
de couler.et hater "la maturitedu raisin. Paris. Svo. 

This author va-actices ringing when the \nne is in flower, 
■-vhich he linds has the effects to which he ailudes in his title. 



1817. Redoute, J P , painter of flowers to 

the Classe de Physique of the Institute and of the 
Museum. 
Les Roses. Paris, fol. manv colored plates. 

1818. Lalos, J , architect des jardins Anglois 

in Paris. 

De la composition des Pares et Jardins pittoresques, omee 
de i)lanches par Rerille. Paris. 1 vol. Svo. 
1818. Pronville, Augusfe de. 

Nomenclature raisonee des Espeoes, \'arietes, et Sous-vari- 
etes du genre Rosier, obseivei^s au Jardin Royal des Plantes, 
dans ceux de Trianon, de la ^lalmaison, et dans les Pepinieres 
des environs des Paris. Paris. 1 vol. Svo. 

1818. Hisso, A., of Nice, and A. Poiteau, of Ver- 
sallies. 

Histoire Xaturelle des Oran.gers. Paris. 2 vols. fol. many co- 
lored plates. 

1819. Bosc, Louis Auguste Guillaume,T.'L.S. U.S., 
inspector of the government garden at the Luxem- 
burg ; author of various articles in the Kouveau 
Cours d" Agriculture, and in other w orks. 

Exposition du Plan de Travail adoptepour etudier et classer 
les diverses varietes des \'ignes cultivees dans les Peiiinieres 
du Luxembourg. (Journal de Plit;si<]tic, toni. 66.3 

1819. Redoute, J. P. painter of flowers, and C. A. 
Thory, a clerk in the office of the mayor of Paris. 

Les Roses. Paris, folio, manv colored plates. 1 vol. com- 
pletetl. 

1819. Thouin, Gabriel; cultivator and architect of 
gardens, brother to Professor Thouin, of the Jardin 
des plantes. ^ 

Plans raisonnfe de toutes les Esp^ces de Jardins. Paris, 
folio, 50 lithographic plates. 

1819. Thory, Claude Antoine, clerk in the office of 
the mayor of Paris, member of several learned 
societies. 

1. R<Ma Candolleana, seu Descriptio novae Si>eciei Generis 
Rosae, dicata, Pyr. Aug. de CandoUe a CI. Ant. Thory, iScc. 
addito Catalogo inetlito Rosarum quas Andreas Dupont in 
horto suo studiose colebat, anno IS 13, cum Figuroe aenea piota. 
Paris. Svo. 1819. 

2. Rosa Redouteae, seu Descriptio novje Specie! Generis 
Rosa, dicata Petro Joseph Redoute, Svo. Parrs. 1S17. 

3. Prodromieet .Monographie des Especeset Varietes connue* 
du Genre Rosier, divisees selon leur Ordre naturel, avec la 
Synonymic des nonis vulgaires, un Tableau synoptique, et des 
Planches gravees en couleur. Paris. 1 vol. 12ino. 

1819. Viart, , proprietor and creator of Jardins 

Pittoresques at the park of Brunehaut. 

Le Jardiniste IModerne, Guide des Proprietaires qui s'occu- 
pent de la Composition de leur Jaidins et de I'EmbeUissement 
de leurs Campagnes. Paris. 12mo. 

18^0. Bcaunier, , author of a treatise on bees. 

Le Guide des Proprit^taires et des Jardiniers pour le Choix, 
la Plantation, et la Culture des Arbres, &c. Paris. 1 vol. 8vo. 
«g- 

1820. Chesnel, Marquis de. 

Histoire de la Rose che^ les pcuples de I'antiqiuti? et chez le« 
modernes ; description des espeoes cultivt^:, ; culture des Ro. 
siers; et leurs diverses proprieles alimentaires et domesliques. 
Toulouse. 1 vol. Svo. 

1820. Pierard, Charles Frances, C M. H. S. 

Notes sur le Saugier ou Poirier de Sauge. Paris. Svo. 

1820. Vibert,J P . 

Observations sur la Nomenclature et la Classement desRoses, 
suivies du Catalogue de celles cultivees par J. P. Vibcrt. Paris. 
Svo. 

1821. Calvert and Co., nurserj-men, Rouen.* 
Catalogue of Roses. Rouen. Svo. 

1821. Lebref, M — , Isidore, pharmacien et pro- 
pri^taire rural. 

Jlemoires sur la Trappa Natans, ou la Chataigne d'eau. 
Rouen. Svo. 

1823. De Candolle, A. P., professor of botany in 
the academy of Geneva, author of Regni Vegetabilis 
Systema Naturale, now publishing ; of various other 
botanical works, and of several articles connected 
with culture, in Nouveau Cours, Sec. 

1. IVlemoir on the different si)ecies of the genus brassica, and 
of the genera allied toil. (Hort. Trans, x. 7.) 

2. Catalogue des arbres fruitiers du Jardin Bntanique de 
Geneve. Geneva. Svo. 

3. Meraoire sur la famille de cruciferes. Geneva. 4to. 



SuBSECT. 2. Works on Gardening puhlished in Germany, including Denmark and SiL'itzer- 
Jand, exclusive of Translations. 

7693. The Germans have aji inanense 7m}nber of books on every subject, and in the 
gardening department are more especially prolific on the subject of planting and forests. 
We have made a selection, with a view to giving an idea of the progress of gardening in 
•Germany, and also to include the books contained in the Banksian and other public 
libraries of this country. Every English work of merit is translated into German as soon 
as it appears, and the same may be said of the best works of France, and of every otlier 
country. Two of the most desirable books for giving an idea of the state of culture in 
Germany, are Dietrich's Worterbuch, with -the Supplement to 1820, 10 vols. Svo. ;^ and 
Sickler's JDcutsche Handwirtschaft, many vols. Svo, 

849. Anon., ascribeil to the learned Benedictine, 1 Horiulus. 
'^Viiliafrid Strabon, of fne diocese of Constance, who P°^'" °" "'^ '^""'"^'^ P'^"** tWers. 

died in 849. -I 1578. Heresbachius, Conradus, counsellor to tiie 



Book I. 



GERMAN WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1123 



Duke of Cleve ; was born in 1508, died in 1576. He 
wrote various theological works ; besides his Itei 
EnsHcee libri I V., which was published in 1570, and 
his Legum rusticaritm, ct opcrarum per singulos 
Menses digenta, in 1595. The former was translated 
by Barnaby Gooch, of Lincolnshire, with the follow- 
ing title : 

touie Bookcs of Husbandrie, containing the whole art and 
trade of Husbandrie, Gardening, Gralfing, and Planting, with 
the antiquitie and commendation thereof. Newly Englished, 
and increased bv Barnabs Googe, Esquire. At London. 4to. 
1578. Leaves 191, besides the Dedication, Epistle and Table 
at the beginning ; and Olde English rules in verse, for pur- 
chasingiLande, at the end. 

His authorities extend from the Bible and Doctors of the 
Church, through the Greek and Roman writers. Homer, Cato, 
&c. to the moderns as low as Ruellius, Fuchsius, Matthiolus, 
Cardanus, and Tragus. He subjoins a list of his friends and 
others, who assisted him. S.Nich. Malbee, M. Cap. Byng. 
ham, M. John Somer, M. Nicas, Yetzwert, M. Fitzherbert, 
M. Willi. Lambert, M. Tusser, M. Tho. Whetenhall, M. Ri. 
Deering, M. Hen. Brockhull, M. Franklin, H. King, Richard 
Andrewes, Henry Denys, William Pratte, John Hatche, Phil- 
lip Partridge, Kenworth Daforth. 

The work is in dialogue. The persons are, Cono, a gentle- 
man retired into the country ; Rigo, a courtier ; Metella, wife 
of Cono ; and Hermes, a servant. 

1597. Pesckelius. 

Garten Ordnung. Eisleben, 1597. folio, with wood cuts. 
1620. Caus, Salomon, author of some works on 
\>erspective, hydraulics, and dialling. 

1. Hortus Palatinus k Frid. Rege Boemiae, Heidelbergae 
extractus. Fraiicf. fol. 

2. Les Raisons des Forces mouvantes, avec divers Desseins 
de Fontaines. Paris, fol. 1624. 

16.30. Clusius, Carolus (not the celebrated botanist 
of the preceding century). 

Catalog! seminum, curn regulis circa eorum statlonem. 
Printed with Herbario Horstiano, 385—414. Marburg. 8vo. 

1631. Laurenbergy Peter, of Rostock, who died in 
1639. 

1. Horticultura et apparatus plantarum. Frankfort. 4to. 

2. De Horticultura libri duo, regulis oljservationibus, expe- 
riments et figuris novis instructa, &c. Frankfort. 4to. 

164- Royer, Johann. 

Unterricht wie ein feiner lustrobst-und Kiichen-garten 
anzulegen, allerley schone Gewachse darein zu zeugen, zu 
verpflangen, zu warten. Printed with this author's Beschrei- 
bung des Gartens zu Hessem. 45—96. 

1647. Vredmannus, Johannes Frisius, a German 
architect, who published some works on his art. 

De Hortorum, Viridiarumque, formae elegantes. Col. 1647. 
fol. 

1647. Anon. ; attributed to Stengeline. 
Hortorum, florum et arborum historia. Munich. 2 vols. 
12mo. 

1662. Jonston, Johann, born at Sambter, in Po- 
land, in 1603, died on his estate at Ziebendorf, in 
Silesia, in 1675 ; a learned naturalist, author of se- 
veral works which have been collected in six folio 
volumes. 

Dendrograph^a, sive historia naturalis de arboribus etfruc- 
tibus, tam nostri qukm peregrini orbis, Ubri x. Frankfort, fol. 
et figuris oeneis, 1662. 

1663. EUxholx, John Sigis?nond, an eminent Prus- 
sian botanist, was born at Frankfort on the Oder 
1623, practised with great reputation as court phy- 
sician at Berlin, and died in 1688. 

1. Flora Marchiffi, or a Catalogue of Plants, cultivated in 
the principal gardens at Brandenburg. Berlin, 8vo. 

2. De Horticultura. Berlin. 4to. 1682. 

3. Vom Garten-bau, oder Unterricht, von der Gartnerey 
auf das Clima der Chur-Marck Brandenburg, wie auch der 
benachbarten eutachen Lander gerichtet. Berlin. 4to. p. 395. 
plates, 1684. 

1871. Hiebern, John Christian. 
Horticultura, 

1695. Packbusch, Stephanus Ludovicus, author of 
some medical works. 

Dissertatio de varia plantarum propagatione. Leipsic. 4to. 

1696. Anon. ; attributed to TschifFeli. 

Ecolc des Jardiniers, oil I'on apprend h semer des arbres 
fruitiers, kles mettreen Pepini^re,&c. Berne. 12mo. 

1697. Stisser, John Andrew. 

Botanica Curiosa, oder Anmerckgunen, wie einige fremde 
Krauter in seinem garten bishero cultiviret. Helmstadt. 8vo. 
p. 244. 12 plates. 

1700. Volkamer, Johann Christoph, a physician in 
Nuremberg, and the director of the botanic garden 
there. 

1. Numbergische Hesperides. Numb. fol. 

2. Hesperidum Norimbergensium sive de Malorum Citre- 
orum Limonum, Aurantiorumque cultura etusu, libri 4. No- 
rimbergae. fol. 

1702. Siegelstelner, George. 

Wohlfundirle Zwergbaum Schule, oder Unterricht wie die 
Zwergbaume beschnitten werden-Frankfort-on-the-Maine. 8vo 
p. 124. plates. 

1702. ^Mo»,, thought to be F.C, Weber, who trans- 
lated Quintineye's works. 

GrUndliche Anweisang zu eimer wohleingerichtete Baum- 
chule. Hamburgh. 8vo. p. 120. 12 plates. 

170-. Schmersall, Elias Frederick. 

Abhandlung von deni Baumschnitte. Hamb. Mag. 10 band, 
4266. 

1712. Waldtschmidt, Wilheltnus Huldericus. 
Programma de industriacevi hodierni, qua propagatio plan- 



tarum, veterum circa res hortenses occupatlones po»l se re^ 
linquit. Kiel, 1712. 

1713. Hesse, Henry. 

Neue Garten-Lust. Leipsic. 4 to. p. 389, plates. 
1715. Atlon. 

Historischer und rerstandiger Blumengartner, und von An- 
legung, Wartung und Ptlegung eines IJaum und kilchen- 
gartens. Leipsic. 4to. p. 78.3, 21 plates. 

170-, Agiicola, George Andrew, M. U., author of 
several agricultural works, which have been trans- 
lated into French and English. 

1. The Artificial Gardener, translated from the German. 
London, 1717, 12mo. 

2. Philosophical Treatise of Husbandry and Gardening, &c. 
translated from the German, by Bradley. London. 4to. cuts, 
1721. 

There is a volume on planting " by Agricola," of xrhich 
Dr. Anderson (see Sect. 1.) is the author. 

1735. Deuso, Johann Daniel, author of a natu- 
ralist's kalendar, and some other works. 

Von Anlegung und Vermehrung wilder Obstbaume. Printed 
in his Beytrage zur Naturkunde. Berlin, 7 stuk. p. 620 — 627. 
1752 to 1765. 

1738. Krause, L. Ph. , born in Berlin, where he was 
a nurseryman. 

Kluger und sorgf aitiger Gartner. Leipsic. 8vo. 

1741. Ungehauer, John Andrew. 

Dissertatio de cultura plantarum. Leipsic, 4to. 

1750. Lehniann, John Christian, an amateur, who 
lives in Leipsic. 

VoUkomner Blumen-garlen in Winter. Leipsic. 4to. p. 71, 
1 plate. 

1750. Grotjan, John August. 

1. Physikalische Winter-belustigung mit Hyacinthen, Jon-' 
guillen, Tazzetten, Tulipanen, Nelken und Leucojen. Nord- 
hausen. 8vo. p. 120. 

2. Ergotzlige Sommerbehjstigung, &c, mit Garten Kalendar. 
Nordhausen. 2vols. 8vo. 1759. 

1750. Seligmann, J. Mich. 

1. Abbildung des lieblichsten Blumen mit Beschreibung. 
Nuremburg, fol. 

2. Hortus Nitidissimus. (By Seligmann and Cp. Jac. Trew.) 
Also in German. Jjeipsic, folio, many plates. 

1751. Riedel, J. Cp. 

Vermehrtes Garten-Lexicon benebset nUtzlichen Garten 
Kalendar, Nordhausen, 8vo. 

1753. Gesner, John, a canon of Zurich, and pro- 
fessor of mathematics and natural philosophy in that 
university, was born in 1709. He studied at Leyden 
and Basle, where he contracted an intimacy with 
Haller ; and their epistles have been printed. He 
died in 1790. Gesner published two dissertations on 
plants, inl741, in which he announced the new system 
of Linneeus, of whom he says, that he was a man des. 
tined to reform all natural history. Besides these 
he was the author of eleven dissertations, published 
under the title of Phytographia Sacra. He also 
wrote on extraneous fossils ; and compiled an index 
to Weinman's Phytographia. But he was grossly 
imposed on, as well as Haller, by the present of a 
meadow crowfoot, on the branches of which the 
flowers of the daisy had been so neatly fastened as to 
escape detection till after Gesner's death. Of this 
rarity he published a description, in a learned dis- 
course on vegetable monsters, entitled, De Ra~ 
nunculo Bellidifloro. The cheat was discovered by 
Sir Joseph Banks, who procured the specimen, and 
separated the parts by the application of steam. 

1. De Ranunculo Bellidifloro, et de Plantarum generibugi. 
Zurich. 4to. ^ 

2. Theses Physicse Miscellaneae speciatim de Thermoscopio 
Botanico. Zurich, 1755. 4to. 

3. Vom Gebrauche des Thermoscops Thermometer bey 
Wartung der Pflanzen. {Hamburg Mag. 16 band. p. 288.) 

1753. Reichard, Ch., a celebrated writer of Guides, 
and other compilations, who lived at Erfurt, and 
died some years ago. 

Land-und Gartenschatz. Erfurth. 8vo. 

A new edition in 1802, by J. Volkiner Sickler. 

1761. Hoehmer, George Ralph, professgr of botany 
and anatomy at Witteniberg, was born in 1723; 
studied under the celebrated Ludwig; wrote various 
botanical works, and died in 1803. 

1. Programmata, De serendis vegetabilium seminibus mo- 
nita. AViltemberg. 4to. 

2. Bibliotheca scriptorum liistoricae naturalis, oeoonomiae, 
aliarumque artium et scientiarum ad ilium pertinentium realis 
systematica. Leipsic, 1785-89. 9 vols. 8vo, 

'. This is considered a very valuable work. 
' 1761. Schaffer, Jac. Ch, 

Der wunderbare Eulentzwitten nebst der Baumraupe, ans 
welcher derselbe entstanden, &c, Regensburg. 4to. plates. 

1764. Plaz, Anthony William, author of a tract oa" 
vegetable physiology, published in 1745. 

Programma de plantarum sub-di verso cqelo nascentium cul- 
tura. Leipsic, 4to p. 13. 

1765. Gleditsch, John GotUeb, a naturalist, was 
born at Leipsic in 1714. He took his doctor's de- 
gree in physic at Frankfort on the Oder, where he 
was appointed professor of botany, physiology, and 
medicine. He was also a member of the Academy 
of Sciences at Berlin, and died in 1786. 

1. Vcrmischte Physidalisch Botanisch-fficonomische A{(. 
handlugen. Halle, 1765 67 3 theil. 8yo. 
9 > 



1124 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



'2. PflanzenverT-eichniss zum Nuzen und VergnUgen dcr 
Lust-uiid Baumsartner, nebst Anmerkungen, die deten Fflese, 
\ ermehrunK, I'tlanz und Blutezeit betreff'en. Berl. 1773, 
8vo. 

3. VoUsfanditje Thcoretisch-riakti-che Gescbjchte aller 
m del- Azeny, Hauslialtuni: und ihrer vevschiedenen Nabnmg- 
fzweifien niizlich befundenen Ptianzen. Berl. and Leips. 

4. Ueber die Ursachen einer unsichcm Verpflanzunp der 
bereifs evwachsenen Fichten und Wiichholdern, aus ihren 
Jiatiirlichen Htandplazen, in un»em Keyden. In his Divs. 
liotan. CEcen. Abhandl. I theil, p. 39— 57. 

d. Gedanken uber die Fr3f;en : durch was fur We^e pes- 
•bieliel die Hauptvermelirung des Miiden Ilol/es in uniern 
Forsten am beaten? und welches ibt die vorj<uglicbste Art, 
die Eicben zum Xuzen de^ Fcrstwosens zu sPeii ? lb. GS) -'Jo. 

G. Systeniatiiche Kiiileitun^in dieneuere Forstwiisenschaft. 
Berlin, 177S, 8vo. 2 vols. 

1165. llettflet, K. Cp. 

Fraktischer Beu tis da,s die Mathe^is bcv der Forstwessen- 
shuft unentbehrliche Dienste thuc. Eisena'ch. 8vo. 

1765. Cramer, Jolni Andrew, a r.ieti-.liurfTist, was 
born at Ouedliiiburg in 1710, and died in lf77. He 
was tlie lirst who foimed the art of a!,saving into a 
system. 

Anleif.'.ng zum Tors'. wiiscn. Bruuswick. fol. p. '200, CO 
plates. 

17G8. Von Brocue, Henrich Christ kin. 

1. Wahre Griinde der I'hvsicaliichen inid experimental 
Allcemeinen Forstwissenbchatt. Leiiisic, 176S-73, 4 vols. Svo. 

ii. Beobachtungen von eini^'cn Bliimen dercu Bau, und 
ZubereituMK dcr Erde. Leii.,. 1771, Svo. 

1768. La Socifte (Econom/qiie de Berne. 

Traite des Arbres Fruitiers, exlrait des meilleurs auteurs. 
Paris. l'2mo. 'I'ranslated from the German. 

1768. Liider, Fr. Hm. H. 

1. Briefe iiber die BeblelluuK eines Kuchengartens in Nie- 
dersachsen. Hanover. 3 vols. Svo. 

2. Nachrioht von Anbau und Erhaltung des grUnen Kohls 
in W'interzeit. Flensburg, 177'2, Svo. 

3. Briefe Uber die Anlegunt; und- Bestellung oineo Blumen- 
gartens. Hanover, 1777. 

1771. Munchausen, 0. F. von., an amateur. 
IMonatliche Beschafijgung fur Baum-und-l'lantagen Gart- 
ner, iVc. Hanover. Svo. plates. 

1771. Henne, S?//. D. L. 

Anwcissung wie man eine Baumschule von Obstbaunien hi 
Grossen Anlegen soil. Halle. Svo. 
1771. Oxsrnfelder, H. A. 

Vom Weinbau in den ^iichsischcn Landen. Dresden. Svo. 
1773. Hirschfeld, Ch. Cat. I,., counsellor to his 
Danish Majesty, and professor of the fine arts at 
Kiel. He laid out several gardens in Denmark, and 
formed a large fruit-tree luirsery lJ)erc. 

1. Reinarques sur les Maisons de Campagre et I'Art des 
Jardins. (Also in German.) Leipsig. IVmo. 

2. Theorie de I'Art des Jardins. (-\lto in German.) Leip- 
sig. Svo. 1775. 

The rie de I'Art des Jardins. (Also in German.) G vols. 
4to. many plates. Leipsic and Amsterdam, 1777 to 17S'2. 

In the Gazette Litteraire de rEuroi>e, for .Taniiflry 17S1, it 
is said of this work, that reading it " expands the; heart, ex- 
alts and ravishes the soul, so inuch so that one would say, 
pleasure had taken the pencil and painted the most agreeable 
scenes, to re<'al the idea of the charms ot the finest day." 

4. Gartenkalender, Hamburgh, IGmo plates. 17S2 to 1790. 

5. Gartenbibliotheke. Kiel. Svo, 1790. 

6. Handbuch dex Fruchtbaumzucht. Brunswick, 17SS. 
2 vols. Svo. 

7. Uber die Verwandtschaflder Garteukunst und der Malery 
(im gothaish. Magazine.) 

1773. Krause, Ch. L. 

Funfzigjahrige erfahnmgsmassige Unterrichte von der Gart- 
nerey. Berlin. 2 vols. Svo. 

1774. Glaser,J.F. 

Physikalishe okonomische Abhandlung von den schdalichen 
Raupen der Obstbaume und he^Yahrten Hulfsmittein, solche 
abzuhalten. Leipsic. Svo. 

1775. WeiiS, Frederick William, author of Flora; 
Gottingensis, and other botanical works. 

Entwurf einer Forstbotanick. Gottiugen, 1 vol. p. 358. Eight 
plates. 

1775. Saussure, Kicola.i de, father of the famous 
Jiatural philosopher (Horace Benedict de Saussure), 
was born in Geneva, in 1709, and died in 1790. He 
devoted himself to agriculture, and obtained a prize 
from the Economical Society of A.uch, for a memoir 
on the subject. 

1. Manifeve de Provigner la Vigne sans engrais. Svo. 

2. he feu, principe de la fecondite des plantes et de la fer- 
tility des terres, Svo. 1783. 

3. Essai sur la Tailie de la Vigne ; et de la Rosde. Svo. 
1780. 

1776. Mayer, or Meyer, John, gardener to the 
Bishop of Wurzburg, in Franconia. He appears to 
have worked some time in the royal gardens at 
Paris, and to have travelled in England. His work 
is understood to have considerably promoted the 
culture of fruits in that part of the country where he 
lived. 

1. Pomona Franconia, ou Description des Arbres Fruitiers, 
les plus estimes en Europe, de la cour de AVirtemberg. 3 vols. 
4to. Fr. and Ger. 264 plates. 

2. Pomona Franconia, ou Description des Arbres Frui- 
tiers, les plus estime en Europe, qui se cuUivent, maintenant 
au Jardixi de la cour de \Vurzburg. Nxixemberg- 2 vols. 4to. 
fig. 

1776. Schmidt, J. Ch. E., gardener to the Duke 
of Mecklenburg, at Ludwigslust. 



Gepriifte Anwelsung zu der Erziehung, Pflanzung und Be- 
handlung der Ilochstammen und Zwergfruchbaunie. JUaii, 
heim. Svo. 

177G. Fon Dieskcu, Christian John Frederick. 

1. Das regclmiissige \ ersezen der Biiume in Waldern und 
Giirten. IMeiningen. Svo. 

2. \'ortheile der Gartnerev, &c. Coburg. 2 vo*s. Svo. 

177. . F. A. M. 

Gc daiiken uber diejenigen Unterhaltungan^talten, die durch 
Ilolz.'^aat, und das Antl.inzen in up.sern Vv'aidungen, nach dor 
Natur derselben, unserer Kameralverfassung und deni Holz- 
handel gebchehcn kiinnsn. Beilin in Gejch. Aaturf. Fr.2Band. 
p. 307. 

177. . Anon. 

Anleitung fur die Landleute in Ab.^icht auf die Pflanznne 
der \V Ider. Abhandl. der A aturforscher Gesellschafl in 
Zurich 3 B. and p. 205-2CG. 

1777. Anon. 

Die beste Art und Weise Ananas zu pflanzen, aus einer 
franzuiiichen Handscrift iibersetzt ; or. The best maimer to 
plant ananas and to keep them through summer and winter in 
vineries and frames, so as to obtain ripe fruit ; with a coirect 
description of the insects, and particularly of the Coccus Bto- 
melia, or the ananas' shield, which is so' injurious and even 
deadly to this noble plant ; and a sure metliod of destroving 
them. With three plates. Translated from a French manu- 
script. Stutgard. Svo. 1773. A plate of a pine and gvape- 
h> u ,e, one of pits for nines, and one of the Coccus Bromelia. 

It is chiefly an abridgment of La Court's Directions for 
CulHvatjng the Pine Apple. (See Duich authors on gardening, 

' 'iTiL H!ltcr.brand,Ant. 

G-;>tericher V\'einkatechismus, Oder turzer Untsrricht von 
W'tinbau in Gi^treich. \ ienna. Svo. 

1778. Mayer, J. F. 

I 1. \'on Garteiibau. Frankfort on Maine. 8vo. 

2. J cr P.Iaykafcr als A\ unn und \'ogel, in Giirten, auf .^kcm, 
und auf Wiesen, &c. IS'urenburg. Svo. 1768. 

1778. ^ Voch. 

Erste Grunde fur Gartenrisse. Augsb. Svo. 

1779. JValther, I. lac. 

Prattische Anleitung zur Gartenkunst; oder des Schwa- 
bischen Gartners gotreiier Unterricht. mit einem dreyfachcn 
Gartenkalendar. Stutgaid. Svo. plates. 

1779. Wcistttantel, J. N., a florist at Leipsic. 

Bh'.misterev. Leipsic. Svo. plates. 

1780. Fa II del, Frcderlchs Guliehmis. 

Specimen iusug. de \'iticultura KichovilJana Argent. 4to. 
p. oO. 
1780. Gbtx, J. F. 

-\nv. eisung zur vortheiihaf igen Anlegung der Baumschulen, 
Baum und Ivuchengarten aut dem Lande, &c. Altenburg. 
Svo. 

1780. Feitercisen, K. Glo. 

Praktische -Abhandlung ueber einige -wichtige Gegenstande 
in der schiinen Gartnerey ; nebst einem Anhang von einigen 
in Gartenhausem, J\Jistbeeten und in freyen Garten beliiidli- 
chen fiuchtcn. Han. Svo. 

1781. Beckmann, John, professor of economy in 
tlie university of Gottingen, was bom at Haye, in 
the kingdoih of Hanover, in 1739 ; he wrote a num- 
ber of works, hut is best known by his History of 
Inventions. After a life of great industry and use- 
fulness, and loaded with academical honors, he died 
in 1811. 

1. Gartenblumen, in his Geschichte der Erfindungen, 2 Band, 
p. 29G..-,0S. 

2. \'ersuclie und Erfahrungen Uber die xCunst Holz zu saen. 
Leipsic. 2 vols. Svo. 

1781. Salzmann, F. Z., gardener to Frederick II. 
of Prussia, at Potsdam. 

1. GrUndlichs Anweisung wie man allerley KUchengewachse 
und Spicerey Krauter durch das ganze Jahr zu behandeln 
hat. 

2. Pomologie. Berlin, 1774. 

1781. M'drter, Fr. Jos., a commercial gardener near 
Vienna. 

Verzeichniss der oesterrichen Baume, Stauden und Busch- 
gewachse, mit Ivurzgefeatsten Anmerkuvgen iiber die Natur 
und okonomische Geschichte deselben. Vienna. Svo. 

1782. EhrhaH, Frederick. 

Garten Anmerkungen. (Printed in the Hanover Mai;aant, 
p. 529. 524 ) 

17S2. Medikus, Frederick Kasitnir, author of a 
number of works on botany and natural history. 

1. Beitrage zur schonen Gartenkunst. Blanheim, 8vo p. 378. 

2. Anmerkung iibcr die Versuche, ausliindischer Baume und 
Strauclie an unsern HimmelsNtiich anzugewohneii. 

3. Beir.erkung der Kuhrptaltzischeu. Phys. iikon. Gesellsch, 
1778, p. 29- Gl. 

4. Versuche iiber die beste -Art der Anjiflanzung, oder aus- 
landische BSume an unsern HimmeUstrich anzugewohnen. 
lb. 17S0, p. 131-177. 

5. Von dem EintUisse der strengen 'Winter der drei .Tahre 
von 1782 bis 17S5 auf die Kultur fremder an unsern Himmels- 
strich angewiihnter, oder anzugewiihnender Baume und 
Stiaucher, &c. Vo'.le.s. devselb. Ges. 1 Band, p. 39 — 176. 

6. Ueber das Ausdaurungsvermogen des Can.nacorus in freyer 
Luft. Usteris Annalen der Botanick, 13 stuck, p. 59—43. 

7. Briefe uber die Robinia. 12mo. 1804. 

1783. Von Wilke, G. W. Cst. 

1. Sammlung der wichligen Regeln in der Kiichengartnerey, 
nebst hauslicher Benutzungslehren- Halle. Svo. 

2. Sammlung der witchtigen Regeln in der Baumgart- 
nerev. Leipsig, 17S3. ,. . , ,, 

3. Handbuch fur Lustgiirtner und Blumenfnendc. Halle, 
Svo. 1785. 

1783. Von Burgsdorf, Frederick Augustus Louis, 
Professor of Forstwi.-senschalt .Forest manage- 
ment) at Tegel near Bcriin, v/here be formed an 



Book 1. 



GERMAN WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1125 



extensive collection of American trees at the govern- 
ment expence, with a view to their propagation 
and naturalisation in Prussia. Since his death tlie 
establishment has been managed by Mr. Hartig. 

1. Von den eigentlichen Theilen und Grenzen der systema- 
tischen Forstwissenschafs. Berlin, in Ges. Naturf. Fr. 4 band, 
99. 

2. Versuche einer vollstandigen Geschichte vorziiglicher Hol- 
zarten. Berlin. 2 vols, plates. 

3. AnleiUmg zu sicherer Erziehuntj und Zweckmassiger 
Anpflan/ung der einheimischen und fremden Holzarten, 
welche in Deutschlandim freien fortkommen. 2 theile, Berlin, 
179.). Svo. 

1783. Heppe, John Christopher. 

Von der Forbtkentniss. Printed in his Jagdlust. 3 flicil, 
p. — 7o4. 

1783. Kllipfcl, I Alb. . 

1. .Toumal fur die Gartnerey. 

'2. V^ortheite zar Er^^ehung eines Ruten Nelkensaamens. 
Stut^ard. 17S0. 8vo. 

1784. / ort Vothman, J. G. 

1. W'artung und Anlegung des Rparfjels. Fleusburg. Svo. 

2. Ofckonoraischer praktischer Uartenkatechismus. Leipsic. 
2 vols. Svo. 

1784. Plenck, Jos. Jacques, M. D., a physician at 
Vienna, author of a number of medical works, and 
of some on botany. 

Bromatalogia, seu Doctrina de Esculentis et Potulentes. 
Vienna. Svu. 

1786. Seidel, Cp F. 

1. Kurze Anweisung den Spareel zu bauen. Eriangen. Svo. 

2. Blumengartner Kalender. Leipsic, Svo. 1790. 
1786. Schtnakling, L. Cp. 

Aesthetik der Blumen. (The sublime of flowers.) Dessau. 
Svo. 

We have no English word answering exactly to the German 
term Aesthetik ; which means the highest degree of refinement 
or perfection, to v>'luch the thing to which it is applied, can be 
carried . 

178(j. Kab, J. And. 

Die v.'ahrs Ursache der Baumtrockniss der Nadelwalder 
durch die Naturgeschithte den Er phalaene (Phal. noct. 
Pinip. L.) erwiesen und durch einen Versuch erlautert. Nuren- 
berg. 4to. .'5 plates. 

'.17<S7. Gmelin, John Frederick. 
"Abhandlung uber die Wurnitrockniss. Leipsic. Svo. 
1788. Samrow, Cp. 
" Verfahrung einer praktischen Anleitung zum Teltower 
RUbenbau. Berlin. Svo. 
1788. Gerthing, Joseph. 

Gedanken, "WUnsche und Vorschlage zu Emporbringung der 
nutzbaren Gartnerev. Jena. Svo. 
1788. Ranfft, J. F. 

1. BeSchreibung einer sehr vortheilhaftigen Nelken und 
Aurikel-Stellage. Freyburg. Svo. 

2. Bemerkungen unci Regeln uber die Cultur und Charakter 
der Aurikel. Bey J. F. Ranfl t. J. T im.Val. Seelig und J. Sm. 
Schroter. Erfurth. Svo. 1^3. 

1788. Rode, a celebrated landscape-painter in 
Berlin. 

1. Ground plan of the Garden of Wiirlitz. Dessaux. Svo. plates. 

2. Der Garten zu neu ^','■aldeck niit den Grund Plan des 
Gartens zu Wiirhtz, 1788. 

1789. Etler, J. Ch. 

1. Die Farben der Nelkcn unter gemeinschaftlichen Namen 
■vorgestellt, nebst Angabe eines Mahlers Verfahren bejm 
Nachcopiren. Gera, Svo. 1 plate. 

2. Beruhmte Nelkensammlung nach der Na.tur eezejchnet ; 
mit Erklarung unter alter und iieuer. Classification, &c. 
Leipsic. Svo. 1805. 

mo. Von Sierstorpff, Kp. II. 

Einige Bemerkungen Ubev die im Winter 1788 und 1789. 
erfrornen Bauine. Brunswig. Svo- 

1790. Gurnth, Amelia. 

; 1. Gartenokonomie fur Frauenzimmey. Zoll. 4 vols. Svo. 
2. Gartenfi-eundinn. Glogau Svo. IS07. 

1790. Feige, K. Theodore, L. of Berlin. 
Anweisung zum Vertiigen des schadlichen BlUthenwicklers 

nebst einer Besclrreibung von mehrern shadlichen Obstraupen 
Berlin, Svo. 

1791. Romer, John Jacques. 

Garten der Flora, odor Beschreibung und Abbildung vers- 
chiedener Pflanzen fiir liebhaber der schonen Gartenkunst 
Winterthurm. 4 vols. Svo. 

1792. Muller, J. G. 

Delicia? Hortensis, odervoUstandigesGartenbuch nebst einem 
Anhang Batimschulen anzulegen. Stutgard, 1772. 
1792. Kraft, John. 

1. Abhandlung von den Obstbaumen, 2 'theii. Vienna. Svo. 

2. Pomona Austriaca, oder Abbildung von 576, Obstguttun- 
guri in der Verfassers Pflanzenschulen, zu Wahring und Wern- 
haus. Vienna, 18 parts, 4to. many plates. 

1792. Huber, Cand. 

1. Den Ebersberg Holzbibliothek. 

It consists of 100 boxes in the form of books of as matiy dif- 
ferent sorts of wood ; each book contains specimens of the 
bark, leaves, blossoms, tv/igs, seeds, timber, and charcoal of 
the particular wood or tree designated. 

2. Ezlautung zu Hubers Holzcabinet, &c. 

This explanation and the books are sold at Munich. 

1793. Mayer,J.Jac. 

Physische oltonomische Baumschule; nebst einer Anweisung 
!Ur wilden Baum/ucht fiir das klcitie Nutzholz in der J-ard- 
■wirthshaft, auch von Anpflanzen und Abholzen der A\'eidun. 
Stettin. Svo. 
1793. Anon. 

Rettungsmittel bey Obst-und-Waldbaumen und andercn 
Gewachsen, die im VS inter dei- Gefahr des Ertrierens ausgeaetzt 
iind. Lcijxic Svo. 

4 C 



1793. Von Hass, J. Ad. 

Beobachtungen Uber den Rindcii und Borkenkafer, he. 
Eriangen. Svo. 

1793. Bernstein, J. Glp. 

A ntitypographus, oder Widerlegen. der Ilfeyr.urg, da-^is die 
Borkenkafer an der Trockniss der tichlen-\i alduugen schuld 
sey. Leipsic- Svo. 

1794. Anon. 

Anweisung fiir Anlegung der Garten im Englisch.en Gesch 
mack. Leipz. 4to. plates. 
1794. Anon. 

^\'urdigung und Vered'ung der regelmKfisigcn C;ii'tcn oder 
Versuch die nach deni franfii^ischen (ir?chinacli ari;/;( !cg( i n 
Garten nach den Grundsatzen der Englischeii Gartentunsc zu 
bearbeiten. Leipsig. 8vo. 

1794. Sickler, the Rev. T. Volkmar, who m;iin- 
tains a nursery for the propagation and sale or i'ruit- 
trees. 

1. Der Teutsche ObstgaV.ner. 2 biinde. A'^'eimar. Svo. 

2. Garten memorandum ftir Liebhaber, wt.lche ilu'en (jnr- 
tenbau entweder selbst Ijesoresn, oder dcch-richtig Uberstiitn 
und Ic-iten v.oUen. Rudolst. Svo'. plates. 

3. Pomological Cabinet enthalt alio im deutr.chen Olistyiirt- 
ner beschriebenen Fruchte, &c. (.A collection of nu ciels in 
wax of all the fruits in Germany, made under his direction, 
and sold in collections, (Sec.) 

4. Die deutsche Landwirthschaft. Erfurth, many vols. Svo. 
with plates. 

3. Aligemeines dcutsches Gartenmagai-.in, &c. AVeimar. 
Svo. 1804. 

6. Des Kurfilrst Augusts zu Sachsen kiistlich Obstgarttn- 
biichlein. (Printed from the edition of 1G20.) Weimar. Svo. 

1794. Leibitzer,J. 

1. VoUstandiger (Javtenkalendar nach den vatcrUindiscbcii 
Klima und der Natur der Gewachse entworfen. \"ienna. Svo.' 

2. VoUstandiges Handbuch der Kuchengartiierev. \'ieniia'. 
Svo. 1797. 

."5. VoUstandiges Handbuch der Obstbaimizucht. '\'i<=nna. 
Svo. 1798. 

4. Praktisohes Handbuch du ^wergbaunizucht und Gbst- 
Orangerie, fiir alle die sich damit besclsaftigen woUen, &c. 
Leipsic. Svo. 

179.5. Anon. 

Taschenbuch fiir Natur und Gartenfreunde. Tubingen, 
1795-180C. Svo. plates. 

1795. Bechstedt, I. Kp. 

Der KUchengartenbau fur die Giirtnerund gartenliebliaber. 
Schleswig. Svo. 
1795. Schiller, I. Kp. 

Baumzuoht im Grossen, aus 20 yalu'licher Erfahrung iiti 
Kleinen. Giessen. Svo. 
1795. Albonico, J. H. 

Niltzliche Bemerkungen fiir Garten und Blumcnfreuiiuc, 
&c. Leipsic. Svo. 

1795. Becker, W. Glo., an amateur residing in 
Leipsig. 

Taschenbuch f iir Natur und Gartenfreunde. Leipsic, 1795 
to 1799. This work was discontinued during the war, but is 
now resumed. 

1795. Ideler, G. F. 

1. Der Gartenfreund, cdcr Inbegrifl' des AVesentlichen aus 
alien Theilen der Gartenkunst. (i'he preface by AVilldtnow.) 
Berlin. Svo. ' . ^ 

2. Plan zu Verbesserung der Obstkultur in der Kurniark. 
Berlin. Svo. ISOO. 

3. Brieffe iiber die wirthschaftUche Obstbaumzucht. Ber- 
lin. Svo. 1802. 

4. Die wirtschaffiiche Gartnerey in Briefen. Berlin. 2 vyis. 
Svo. 1798. 

1796. Kirchner, I. F. 

Praktifche Anweisung zur Gartenkunst, besonders Treibung, 
Ananasse, &o. Leigsic. Svo. 
1796. Geiger, Fr. X. 

1. Kurtzer Unterricht in der Baumgartnerey ; eine gek'.Onte 
Preischrift. Vienna. Svo- 179t;. 

2. Die Baumzncht. Munich, Svo. 1804. 
1796. Genssler, Ch. Jctc. 

Der Maykafbr und seine Lai-ve, &c. nebst per Mitteln, Hire 
schadliche Wirkungen zu mindem. Gotha. Svo. 

179-5. Neuenhahn, K. Ch. Adj. of Erfurtli, an 
amateur. 

1. Annalen den Gaitiovey. Erfurth, 179G to ISOO, 12 jiarts. 

2. Die BlumenzwJebel (jartnerey , cder Beschreibur.g von 
alien auf der Erde bekannten liliienarten Gewach,->tn; neb.st 
Anzeige ihrer Cultur, (in Alphabetischer Oidnung.j Leipsib. 
2 vols. Svo. 1804. ' 

3. Ueber die Aurikel-Systeme ; nebst Versuchen einer ganz 
neuen Classification der Aurikel. Frankenheim, 1791, Svo. 

1796. Von Dcrcxen, J. 

Ueber Tokays Wcinbau, dessen Fechsung und Gahrung mit 
geogncstichen Beylagen. Vienna. Svo. 

1797. Muller, J. C. F. 

1. Der vollstandige Monatsgartner, oder dentliLl^.e vnd 
vollstandige Anweisung zu alien Geschfiften im Baum-Kuchen 
urd Biumcngarte!-. Fianf. on (he SJaine. Svo. 

2. J/tutschlandi.-lier ^I'l ci.sbau natii Grunden, &c. Leinsic. 
vo. 1803. ' ■ 

3. Anweisung zu Zweckmassiger Bthandlung der Obst und 
fieniusegartens, nebst einein Anhangvon-Blumen. Frankf. on 
Maine. Svo. 

1797, Sier.issen, Adf. Ch. 

Naturgeschichte der grossen Tannenraupe. Schwerin, Sva- 
1797. Jacob, R. ' 

f !i konomische* Handbuch zur BefUnlerung des friihen An 
zi-.'bens den- (iemiise-und Obstgavten in i\iistbeetfc;i und Trcii)- 
liSuMPcn:, mit dem nr.thwendigtn Luftmaass-stahl und stanil- 
liche Wettertabelle versehen. ' Frankfort on the ""uaine. Svo 
4 jilates. 

17:57. Be Lignr, Prince, a native of Austria, a 



1126 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



distinguished military charactei- and courtier, who 
wrote 14 volumes on military, and 14 on mixed 
subjects. He commanded under Frederic tlie Great, 
and tlie Empress Catlierine, and visited England and 
every country in Europe. He was universally es 
teemed and beloved. He died in Vienna at an ad- 
vanced age in 1814. 

Coup d'Giil sur Bel-CEil (a seat of his own near Paris), et sur 
un grand partie des jardins de i'Europe. In tomes 1 and '2 of 
his LKuvres melees, and abridged in 

Memoirs et lettres de Marechal Prince de Ligne, &c. Lon- 
don, 2 vols. 12mo. 1819. 

1798. Spitx, Ans. Cp. 

1. Ueber Erziehung puter und neuer Obst-und Spielarten 
aiis Kemstammen. Eriurth. Svo. 

2. Bemerkung iiber die durch das Abschalen der Caumrinde 
vermehrte Fruchtbarkeit der Baume. Erfurth. Svo. 18Ui?. 

1798. Achard, Franx. Karl, director of the phy- 
sical class in the Royal Academy of Sciences, Berlin. 

Ausfuhrliche BeschreibunR der IMethode, nach v.elcher bei 
der Kultur der Hunkelrilben verfahren werden muss, um ihren 
Zukkerstoft" nach Mogliehkeit zu vermehren, und sie so zu er- 
halten, das sie mit Vortheil zur Zukkerfabrikazion angewertlit 
■vverden kann. Berlin. Svo. CI. 

Translated in Nicholson's Journal, vol. iii. 2.~7. 

1798. Grohmann. 

1. Schone Gartenkunst. Leipsig, ei{;ht plates. 

2. Ideemagazin filr Liebhaber von Garten und E'.ii;Iischen 
Anlagen. 60Hefte. Leipsig, 1779 and 1S(I."), Ito. plates.' This is 
one of the most popular works in Germany in va^pett t.i plans 
for gardens. 

3. Kleines Ideemagazin oder Sammlung von IdcL-n die mit- 
wenig Kosten aus zufiiliren, &c. 

This work may also be had in French under the following 
title : Magasin petit, ou recueil d'idees peu dispendieuses Ji e.\- 
fJcute. Leipsic, fol. 12 cahiers. plates. 

4. Plans nouveaux pour distribuer et omer des petits Jar- 
dins. Leipsic. folio. 

1798- Anon. 

Nelkenflor, oder nach der Natur gemaltes Verzeichnis aller 
«chonen und guten Sorten Nelken. Meissen. Svo. 
1798. Hildt, I. Adf. 

Sammlung inheimische und auslandisclie Holzarten, zur 
technologische Kenntnisse, Charakten und W'aarenkunde aller 
kunst farb und apothekhiilzer. 'W'eimer. 4to. 

Sold with 144 sjiecimeiis of woods, of two inches in length 
each, for 14 dollars, or of five or six inches long each, tbr ."6 
dollars. (See 1792. Huber.) 

1798. Gat/erer, Cp. W. Jac, author of a work on 
zoology. 

Forst Kalendar, oder Verzeichnis den Verrichlungen in je- 
dem Monate. Ulm. Svo. 

1798. Dalliiieer, Prosp. 
r 1. VoUstandigeOeschichte der Borkenkafers, Fichtenkrebses, 
oder sogennanten schwartzen \Vurms. Weisenbach. Svo. 

2. Oesammelte Nachiichten und Bemerkung Uber die Fich- 
tenspinner oder die Baumraupe Phalaena : Bombyx pini,Linn. 
VVeisenbach. Svo. 3 plates. 

1798. Jordens, J. H. 

Geschichte der kleinen Fichtenraupe, oder der Larve von 
der Phala;na Monacha, Linn: mit Beytragen zur Berichtigung 
der Ausrottungsmittel dieser AV^aldverheererin. Hof. 4to. plates. 
1798. Zoph,K. 

Die Nonne ira Walde und ihre Schwestem ; kein Roman. 
Leipsic. Svo. 

1798. Bretschneider, K. Beat. 

Beytrage zur Kentniss der verderblichen Fichtenraupen . 
Weimar. Svo. 

1799. Erbstein, K. F. W. 

Aurikelflor, oder nach der Natur gemalte Versamlung aller 
vorzUglich schonen Sorten Aurikel. Meissen. 8vo. plates. 

1799. Diet, Augustus Frederick Adrian, M.D. of 
Nassau, Dietz ; a scientific writer on gardening. 

1. Versuch einersystematischenBeschreibungderinDeutsch- 
land gewonlichen Kemobstsorten. Frankfort on the Maine ; 
10 vols, of Apples, and 5 of Pears, to 1807. 

2. Uber die Anlegung einer Obstorangerie in Scherben, und 
die Vegetation der Gewachse. Frankfort on Maine. 12mo.l796. 

1800. Keyser, G. Ad. 

Ueber die Veredlung des Obstes und der Verhandlimg der 
Obstkemstamme. Erfurth. Svo. 
1800. Von Weiss,- K. 

DeutlicheAnweisung der Nelken durch Schnitlinge zu vorm- 
chren ; nebst einigen Gedanken Uber die Entstehung und 
Fortpflanzung der Nelkenlauseundderen Vertilgen. Halle. Svo. 

1800. Anon. 

1. Einige Bemerkungen eines Rhernlanders uber den Wein- 
bau des seits des Rheins zwischen Mayne und Bingen. Nau's 
Neue Entdeckung. 1 Band. 63. 

2. Ueber das besetzen, der rottfelder, und die frage ob Vei- 
flinge oder Blindholzzum Anpflanzen junger Weingarten am 
vortheilhaftesten seyn. 

1801. Fukker, F. Jac. 

Beschreibung des Tokayer Gebirgs, nebst Belehrung wie 
bey der Weinlese zer verfahren. Vienna. Svo. 
1801. Hermes, I. Gf. 

Beschreibung der vorziiglichsten Oartenblumen nach der 
Zeitfolge betrieben. Zerbst. Svo. 

1801. Hubner, K. Jos. 

1. Blumisterey Bemerkungen aus dem Jahr 1800, fiir Nel- 
kenliebhaber, &c. Brezlau. Svo. 

2. Sirisas, vollstandiger charakter der Gartennelke oder 
Grassblume. Reichenbach. Svo. 1814. 

1802. Berger, Ch. Glo. 

1. Taschenbuch fiir Blumenfreunde, oder kurze Charak- 
teristik und Anweissung zur Cultur der vorzUglichsten in neu- 
deutschen Garten befindliche Gewachse. Leipsic, 2 vols Svo. 

2. Handbuch zur Pflanzenkemitniss filr ikonomische Gar- 
tenliebhaber und Forstliebhaber zur leichten und vorthcilliaf- 
tigwi Betreibung ihrer Geschafte. Leipsic. Svo. 



1802. Goiing, E. H. 1. Bm. Trommsdorff, and 
F. K. L. Sickler. 

Deitscher Gartenschatz ; herausgegeben von J. Volkmar 
Sickler. Ei-furth. 5 vols. Svo. 

1802. Sickler, Francis Karl Ludwig, son of Dr. 
Volkmar Sickler, a scholar and antiquarian. He in- 
vented, in 1805, a drill-plough, called the spirodi- 
phere, and in 1816 came to England, to submit to 
government a plan for unrolling the Herculanean 
MSS., which, however, was not attended with 
success. 

1. Allgemeine gescliichte der Obstkultur von den Zeiten der 
Urweltan, bis auf die gegenwartigen herab. 1st vol. Frankfort. 
Svo. 

2. Der voUkommene Orangeriegartner, oder voUstandige 
Beschreibung der Limonen, Citronen, und Pomeranzen, oder 
der Agrumi in Italien, und ihrer Cultur. AVVimar, 1815. 4to. 
plates. 

An analysis of this work is given injhe third volume of the 
Horticultural Transactions, by Dr. Noehden. 

1802. Dietrich, Fr. Gli. court-gardener at Eise- 
nach, to the Duke of Saxe Weimar, 

1. A'oUstandiges Worterbuch der GSrtnerey und Botanique 
(the Introduction by Sprengel). Berlin. 10 vols. Svo. 

2. Oekonomischer botanischer Garten-journal. Eisenach. G 
vols. Svo. 1790. 

3. AV'intergiirtner, oder Anweisung der beliebten Modeblu- 
men und oekonomischer Gewaclise ohne Treibhiiuser und 
Mistbeete in Zimmem, Kellem, und Andem Behaltern zu 
i'lberwintem, oder sie fUr den oftiien Garten vorzubereiteii- 
W'eimar. Svo- ISOl. 

4. Unterhaltungen fiir Gartner und Gartenfreunde. Tu- 
bingen. Svo. 

b. Die Linncen Geranien filr Botaniker und Blumenliebha 
ber, &c. AV'eimar. 4to. 6 parts, many plates. 

G. Die AN'eimar Flora, oder V'erzeic-hniss der im Herzogli- 
chen Park, in AV'eimar, betindlichen Baume, Straucher and 
Stauden. Eisenach. Svo. ISOO. 

7. Nachtrag zuni Le.\icon der Gartnerey und Botanick. 
Berlin. Svo. 1820. 

1802. Schrbter, I. Stn. 

1. Erfahrungen in Meinem Blumem-obst-und Gemuss- 
garten. 

2. Abhandlung Uber Gartnerey und Blumisterey. Eisen- 
bach. Svo. 1802. 

1802 Friederich, I. P. 
Den Kuchengarten, Sch%verin. Svo. 
1802. Rudolphi, J. Ch. 

1. Garten- ICalender filr das ganze Jahr. Meissen. Svo. 
p. 184. 

2. Nelkentheorie, oder eine in systematischer Ordnung nach 
der Natur gemalte Nelkentabel. Meissen, fol. 1787. 

1802. Siegel, . 

Description Fittoresque des Jardins du gout le plus modenie, 
ornee de 28 planches. Leipsick. 4to. 1802. 

1803. Leonharde, F. G. and J. H. Seidel. 

1. Der Fruhlings und Sommer GSrtner, oder Anweisung, 
jede Art von Blufnen, wohhiechende niedrige Strauch Stau- 
den, und rankende Gewachse, nebst KUchengarten-Krautern. 
so wie auch Obst-Orangerie nach art der Chinesen in Scherben 
zu erziehen— und fiir den Winter aufzubewahren, und zu er- 
halten. Leipsic, Svo. 2 plates. 

2. Forst und Jagd- Kalendar. Leipsic. 1794, Svo. 

1803. Rocholl, A. 

Die Kunsl Zwergobslbaume und unter diesen besonders S, a- 
lierbaume zu erziehen und zu Behandehi. Leipsig. Svo. 
1«03. Webei; F. Bd. 

Handbuch der Oekononiischen Litteratur ; oder systematisclie 
Anleitung zur kentniss der deutschen okonomischen Schriften, 
&c. Berlin. 2 vols. Svo. 

1804. Wendf, G. T. K. 

Deutschlands Baumzucht, oder Verzeichniss der Holzarten, 
welche das Klima von Deutschland im Freyen aushalten; 
nebst Angabe ihrer Griisse, Erforderliche ihres Bodens, Standes, 
der Bluthezeit, Reife und Ausdauer. Eisenbach. Svo. 
1804. Bitter, Ch. 

Tafel der Culturgewachse in Europe, geographisch nach den 
Klimaten dargestellt. Schnepfenthal. 1 large sheet. 
1804. Frege, Ch. A. 

Versammlung einer Classification der Weinsorten nach ihren 
Beeren. Meissen. Svo. 

1804. Sprengel, Kurt, Professor of Botany at Hull, 
son of the celebrated botanical author of that name, 
and author of an Introduction to Botany, and other 
works. 

Gartenzeitung. Halle, 1804 to 1806. 4 vols. Svo. 

1805. Mayer, Frederick. 

Der Monats-gartner. Giessen. Svo. 
1805. Theuss, Theodore. 

1. Monatlich Garten-Handbuch Uber obst und Gemiisegar- 
tenerey. Halte. 1805. 

2. AUgemeines Blumenl«xicon. 2 Band. Svo. Weimar. 
1811. 

5. Handbuch fur Gartenbesitzer die keine gelemte Gartner 
sind, &c. Gotha. Svo. 1805. 

4. Der Obstbaumzucht nach theoretischen und praktischen 
Grundsatzen bearbeitet. Halle. Svo. 1804. 
1805. Kannegiesser, F. A. 

1. Die Gattungen der Rosen. Freyburg. 4to. 

2. Aurikelfloren. Dresden, 1800, 2 vols. Svo. 

3. Abhandlung der Levkoyen. Dresden. 4to. 1807. 

4. Abhandlung "der Ranunkeln und Anemonen. Dresden, 
4to. 1807. 

1805. VonHagen,F. fF., a forester. 
Ueber die Vervvustung der Borkenkafer imd die Mittel ihneii 
zu begegnen. Gottingen. Svo. 
1805. Breitenbach, Ph. Fr. 

Die Obst-Oekonomie, oder vollstandiger Unterricht in Erzie- 
hung Wartung und Pflege der Obstbaume, &c. Iki lin. 2 
vols. Svo. 



Boo:c I. 



GERMAN WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1127 



1S05. Burchardt, Th. H. 0. 

I'omoloijische Bibliothek, oder alphabatiiches \'erzeichnii 
dcr Ponioloeiichen Schriften; mit Zuschreiben und Berich- 
turg, nebst I'rtheilen alter imd neuerer ShriftsteUer uber Po- 
moogie. Coblentz, 1S05. 

1805. Ji'eissenbnicJi, J. Ji'. Jos. 

Pas Ganze des Kucheiigartenbaues. Frankf. on the Maine, 
y vcls. Svo. 

1806. Gotthardt, J. Ch. and R. Eys. rbock. 

1. Der deutsche Saameiigartner, oder Anv. eijune ziir Kent- 
nivi, Erziehung uiid Auf bewahning der in Deutscliicind ein- 
heimischen KIrchensamereven, &c. Ki-furth. bvo. 

•z. Der Deutsche Gemiis-und KUchengartenbau. Erfuvth. 

5. \'ollstandiger L'nterricht von der Er/iehung luid Behand- 
lung der Obstbaume, nebst Anziehuiig ihier Feinde mid 
Ivrankheit. lb. Svo. 179S. 

4. Deutschlaiids Weisnbau, &c. lb. 2 vols. Svo. 

0. Der Ratligeber hi der Obsibaunizucht, fur Blirger uiiJ 
Landleute, U. S. \X. lb. Svo. ISOl. 

6. Der Theoretische Praktische 'W'ein und Kellermeyster, 
oder volistandige Unterrichtung in der Cultiir luid Behaiid- 
Jung des ^V'elni. lb. Svo. 

1806. IVindt, L. G. 
- Der BerberitzeahauGhein Feind des ^Vmtergetreides. Ha- 
nover. Svo. 

ISO. . Von Stettcrhei)i2, Frederick. 

Pomologie. Svo. 

1806. Giinthcr, J. Jac. 

An\vei^ung fur M'eiiibauer v-ider das Beschadisen durcli 
Frahjahr uiid Herb>rtyaj :e. Ileidelbur;:. Svo. 

1806. Waller, K. .ih:-. 

Der Stubengartner — r.ebst eineni Aiihang wie im AVinter 
schone Blumeu zu evzieheii. ^xordhouse. Svo. 

1807. Rossig, K. Glo. of Leipsic, an amateur. 

1. Versuch iiber den Garteninohr., ^c. Leipsic, Svo. 

2. Tractate uber Cultur aller sorten Obstbaumej ..^c. Sch- 
neeberg. Svo. 

0. Oekonorai^che Besclireibung der vorziiglichen Arten, Ab- 
haiidlung und ^pielarten der Rosen, &c. Leipzig. 17'J'J. 

4. Die Koseii nach der Xatur gezeichnet, <S:c. 'Leipsic, folio, 
8 parts. 
1803. Poscharski/, Ch. F. 

1. Der Monats Gartner. Pima. Svo. 

2. Der Stubeu-gartiier, &c. lb. Svo. 

■ 1808. Rosenberg, 0. F. 

Anleitung Fruchtbaume durch das Copulireii zu veredeln. 
rConigsberg. Svo. 1 plate. 
1809. Uellbach, J. Ch. 

Handbuch uber den Kuchent,artenbau fiir die ,^osse 'S'olk- 
i-lasse ; niit Zweckmassiger Literature versehen. Brfurth. Svo. 

1809. Bouche, Pierre, a Frenchman. A florist 
at Berlin, the first who introduced bulbs in green- 
houses in Prussia. 

Die Zimmer und Feastergarten, oder Anweisung die bcleib- 
testeii Blunien und Gewalchse m Zimmem und Fenstem zu 
Ziehen und zu uber-vvintem ; uebst ehier Amveisunj zur Blu- 
meiitreiberv. Berlm. Svo. 
1^:09. Lrei/ssig. 

Der Levkoyen Gartner, oder Auweisung zur Cultur der Lev- 
koyen, u. s- w. Erfurth. Svo. 

1S09. Christ, /. Z.,a clergyman at Kronberg, near 
Frankfort on the Maine. 

1. Beobachtungen uber die heisse und trockne 'Witterung des 
Sotuiners ISOO, deren L'rsache, und Jlittel die weiteni Zunali- 
me des L'ebels zuvorzukomraen. Frankfort on Maine. Svo. 

2. Praktisches Gartenbuch. Heilbrun. 2 vols. Svo. ISII. 

• 3. Der BaumgarCner auf den Dorfe, oder Anweisung wie der 
gemeine Landmaun Obstbaume erziehen und benutzen korme. 
Frankfort on Maine. Svo. 1792. 

4. Handbuch der Obstbaumzucht und Obstlehre. lb. Svo. 
1794. 

6. Pflanzung and "Wartung der niltzlichsten Obstbaume, 
&c. lb. Svo. 17S9. 

6. Pomologisches, theoretisches, praktisches Handworter- 
buch. Leipsic. 4to. 1S02. 

7. Plan zum Anlegen eines Obstgartens. lb. fol. 1799. 

8. Die Krankheit t'ebel mid Feinde der Obstbaume mid ihre 
Abhulfe. Frankfort on Maine. Svo. ISOS. 

9. Von Weinbau, &c. lb. 1795- Svo. 

10. Geschenk an den AA'einhandler von Wichtigkeit Anwei- 
sun", Roggen in \\'einbergen zu bauen. lb. 1791 Svo. 

11. A'oUstandige Pomologie, und zueleich systematisch rich 
tiges und beschreibmig 'S'erzeichniss der vomehmsten Sorten 
des Kern und Steinobstes, &c. die Christische Baiunschule zu 
Kronberg. lb. Svo. plates. 

1810. J'0)i Sponeck. 

Forsthche Aufsatze und Bemerkungen. Manheim. Svo. 
181-. S^<?rHZ;e?-o-,Baron Von,ofBohemia,an amateur. 
1. Ueber die Kultur der Alpenpflanzen. Bot. Ges. in Re- 
genbarg Abh. i. 
2 Flora subterranea. 

1817. Boetiinger, C. A. , an eminent German scholar 
and antiquary, author of Sabina, or Moiniiig Scenes 
at the Toilette of a Rotnan Lady j of Zusammcn 
Nenesten Literatur, Sec. 

Racemazionen zur Gartenkunst der Alten. (Translated un- 
der the title of Fragniens sur le jardinage des ancieus, in 
the Mag. Encyc. ', th Annee.) 

1810. WiUdenow, C. L. professor of botany at 
Berlin, author of various botanical works, and of a 
new edition of the Species Plantaruvi of Linnsus. 

1. Ueber die Anzuclit au^landischer Eaume und SLriiuche. 
{M.ur. dt, C. p. 212.) 

2. Gekronte Preissclu-iftai iiber die von der KurfOrstKdien 
Akademie nUzlicher ^\"issenschaften zu Erfurt aufgegebaien 
pon.clogischen Preisfirageii. (.Yui-. Ai-t. Acad. Mu/^un!, torn. 
ii. l.'ip.) 

.-. ReriiniOie Baunizucht, iS:c. Berlin. Svo. 7 plates, colored. 

1810. Altcnburg Pomological Socicli/. ' 

4 ( 



Annalen der Altenburgischen pomologiochen GeMlUchaft. 
Altenberg. Svo. 

1810. Kalb. Bhd. H. 

Der 'Weinbau nach theoretL^chen mid praktischen Kent- 
liissen. Stuttgard. Svo. 

1810. Laurop, P. 

Aimalen der Forst-und.Tagdwissenschaft. Darmstadt. Svo. A 
volume appears occasionally. 
1810. Rieffelson, Ft. 

Beschreibung und Abbildung der von ilim erfundenen 
grossen Kraft-und Hebemaschine, mittelst welclier in wenig 
zeit Baume von ansehnlicher Grosse samt ihren Wurzehi aus 
der Erde gehahen, und ungeheure Lasten von der iStelle ges- 
chafFt wercien Konneii. u. s. vv. Hamburgh. 4to. 3 plates. 

1810. Giiimpcl, F., a botanical draughtsman and 
engraver at Berhn. 

AbbUdung der deutschen Holzartai fiir Forstmamicr und 
Liebhaber tier Botanik ; mit Beschreibung desselben von K. 
M'. 'W'illdenow. Bei'lin, in numbers in 4to., colored plates. 
Nos. 33 and 36 -ivere inibiished in 1S21, contaiui!!g .-pccimeiis 
of the woods of the following trees and shrubs : .Tuniperus sa- 
bina, communis and nana ; Xaxas baccata ; Atripie\ portula- 
coides ; Acer pseudo platanu?, platanoides, auscriacum ai'.d 
campestre ; and Fraiinus excelsior. 

1811. Crome, G , of Hanover. 

Der Bodeii und sein A'erluiltniss, &c. (INIetliod of knov. h;g 
soils by their plants, tvirf, ^cc.) Hanover. 8\o. 

1811 F.anslchen holds a goveriiment situation 
at Berlin, and propagates fruit-trees for sale in his 
garden there. 

Einige A ufsStze fiir Garteiifieur.de, &c. Leipsic. Svo. 

1811. Fritsch, A . 

A'ersuch eines Buii systems. Altenburg, foiio, colored plates 
of fruit. 

1812. Fischer, V. F. 

.Anleitung zur TriUieljagd,&:c. (Ti-uille hunting, in Germany, 
is considered as jiart of "forest management.) Carlsroidie. Svo". 

1812. Walroth. 

Geschichte des Obstes der Alten. 1st Heft. Halle. Svo. p.lC9. 
181o. Kellcrynann. 

Bemerkungen iiber de Feljie. IMagdebourg. Svo. 

1813. Kcc/it,J. C. a varnisher of carriages at Berlin, 
"^'ersuch euier durch Evf.dinmg erprobten IMethode dui 

\^"einbau zu vevbessern. BerUn. Svo. 1 plate. 

1814. Gcist, J , M.D. 

L^eber die A'erbesserunsdes A^'embaus. Wlirtzburg. Svo. 

1814. Corfhinn, J. "E., a ladv." 

Handbuch f t\r Gartenfireunde, &c. Zerbst. 2 vols. Svo. 

1815. Bdck7)iann, A., professor of forest manage- 
ment at Geissen. 

Beschreibung eines hiichst einfachen imd wohlfeilen Hchen- 
messens, worait in Gebirge, wie in der Ebene, die Hohcn der 
Baume ohne GehiUfen leicht geschwiiid und geiiau geu-essen 
werden Kcinnen. Giessen. Svo. plates. 

1815. Zeyher, and G. Romcr, the former director 
of the Duke of Baden's gardens. 

Besclireibung der Gartenanlagen zu Schwetzingen. Blan- 
heim. Svo. 9 plates, and a plan o?the garden. 

1816. Heinpcl, G. E. L. a clergyman. 

Der Pomoloeische Zauberring. Ein "leichtes aiittel jeden 
Obitbaum zum Tragen zu zwingen. ISunneberg. Svo. 

1817. Lindcgaard, Peter, C.M.H.S. gardener to 
the King of Denmark. 

A new ^lethod of Forcing Grapes. London. Svo. Trans 
lated from the Danish. 

1817. Rouh'f, Jean Antoine, cultivator at Poseur. 

Recueil de ^lenioires sur la Culture de la Mgiie successive- 
ment presentils et couronnes par la isoci^t^ d'emulation patri- 
otique de Xeufchatel. Ncufchatel. Svo. 

1817. Cotta. 

Anweisung von Waldbau. Dresden. Svo. p. 22fi. 

1818. Bcchstcin, D. I. M., author of a work on 
domestic animals, and professor of forest tccnomv 
at Nurenberg. 

Forstinsectologie, oder Xatur-geschichte der fiir den \\'a!d 
schadlichen und ntitzlichen Insecten, nebst Einleitung in die 
Insectenkunde ubevhaubt. Nurenberg. Svo. colored pl'ates. 
1M9. Hiindcshagcn, C . 

-Ai leiiimg zum Entwerfen von Bauliolzanlagen, nnd z\ir 
zweckraiissigen Aufarbeitung, &c. Tubingen. Svo. plates. 
1820. Ji'etziiauscn von Tnichsess. 

Systematische Classification der Ivirschensorten. Stutjavd. 

Two hmidred and thirty-three sorts of cherries are here 
described. 

1820. Schreibe?; J. C. 

Anweisung zmu Besclineiden der FruLhtbaume. ZuUicliau. 
Svo. 

18-20. Blctx, F. and J- C. Christ. 
Die Gartenkunst. 3d edit. 5 vols. 8vo. 

1S20. Lupin, an amateur. 
Die Garten. Menna. 12mo. 

1821. Ano}i. 

1. Neue Eifindung wie man im 'Winter Ananas, f vargel 
I^lelonen, ^^c. und aiulere A'cgetabiUen ingleichen Kcsen \'t li- 
chen, Hyaclnthen, &c. ohne Jlistbeet una sogar in Zimmeni 
erziehen imd zur Reife bringen kan. Nuremberg. Svo. 

This piece of horticultural quackery is sold in a sealid tii- 
velope. The paiiivihlet contains a few pages, illu>tialtd bv, a 
plate. The mode is to introduce boiling water iii'o a Icailtn 
cistern, enclosed in a case or frame, containing the plants; lo 
renew it as it cools, and give very little an-. ■• 

2. Neue Gai'tenbau Kunst, cdcr Saramlung zur \'erzienmg 
des Parks und Garten. Leipsic. folio, S plates. j ' 

1821. Bcrluch, M., author of an Essc.y on Uicm^ 
gli/phics. . 

■ (■Saitcn-Maga.-m. ^\■e]mar. One or nmie jiumbcVi aiiKiJUyy. 
o vol;, and 6 munbcrs, published up to Jimc 1S21. 
4 



11 28 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



SuBSECT. 3. Works on Gardening published in Italy, exclusive of Trayislations. 
7694. A considerable number of books on rural affairs have been published in Italy ; 
but there, where garden and field culture are so nearly allied, gardening and agricul- 
ture have been so blended by the writers, that it is difficult to know under which depart- 
ment to include the books. The best work for giving a general idea of the state of cul- 
ture in Italy is, the Annali deW Agricultura, 22 vols. 8vo. by F. Re. 1809 to 1814. 

1546. Alamanni, Louis, a Florentine gentleman, 
an eminent poet, born in 1495. Having conspired 
against Julius de Medicis (Pope Clement VII.), he 
took refuge in Fiance, where he was well received 
by Francis I., and sent in embassies to several 
courts. He wrote several poems, beside the follow- 
ing, and died in 1556. 

fiella CoUivazione. 

It is translated into French with the title of Gcorgiques 
Italiennes. 

1596. Bacoii, A . 

De Naturali Vinorum Historia, de Vinis Italiae, et de con- 
Tiviis antiquorum, libri viii. folio, Rome. 

1622. Soderini, Giovanveitorio, e Bernardo Dava- 
xati. 

CoUivazione toscana delle riti e d'alcuTii alberi. Aggiun- 
tovi la CoUivazione degli oli\i ; di Piero Vettori. Firenze, 4to. 
1629. Rcndella, Prospero. 
Tractatus de vinea, vindemia et vino. Ven. fol. 
1633. Ferrari, John Baptist, a Jesuit of Sienna, 
author of a Syriac dictionary, and other works ; died 
in 1665. 

1. Hesperides, sive de Malorum aureorum Cultura et Usn, 
libri iv. Kome. fol. 1646. 

2. Flora, seu de Florum Cultura, lib. iv. Rome, 4to. 1633. 
1670. Falli, Francesco. 

Dialogo intemo alia Cultura della vite. Florence. Svo. 
p. 79. 

167-. Caronelli, Conte Pietro de 

lUemoria suUa CoUivazione delle viti. {AU% della Soc. Pa- 
triot, tie iM:ia,u>, vol. iu. p. 3. 85.) 

167-. Branrieri, Don GiuUo. 

Transunto delle riporte al quesito della Societa Patriotica 
de Milano, intomo alia CoUivazione delle viti. {AUi Patriot, 
de Milam, vol. iii. p. 84. 157.) 

1697. Sacconi, Agostino. 

Ristretto delle piante, oon sui nome antichi e modemi, 
della terra, aria, e sito, ch' ainano. Vienna. 4to. p. I'i7. 

J726. Clarici, Paolo Bartolomeo, a Benedictine 
monk of Padua. 

Istoria e coUura delle piante che sono pel fiore piu rap- 
guardevoli, e piii distinte per ornare un giardino in tutto il 
tempo deir anno; con un trattato deRli Agrumi. Venice. 
4to. \7ilh a plan of the garden of Gerarde Sasredo. 
1763. Arrigoni, Stefano. 

Trattato sulla cognizione e coltura de giacma Viterbo, 
1763, in Svo. tig. 

1767. Cattanco, Giacomo. 

Delia Idropisia de' GeJsi. Milano, 1767, in Svo. 
• 1769. Anon. ■■ 

Maniera di coUivare gli albeii fruttiferi, opera postnma d 
Ulustre autore. Fuenze, 1769, in Svo. 

1773. Anon. 

Trattato de' fiovi, che provengono da cipoUa, m cm si con- 
tiene tutto cio, ch' e necessario per ben colUvarli. Cremona. 
12mo. p. lOS. . . ,r TA 

1777. Toxxetti, Octavianus Targioni, M.D. repius 
professor of botany and agriculture at Florence; 
author of various works on agriculture; and his 
son has translated the Agricultural Chemistry of 
Sir H. Daw. 

Des dilfereiites especes de Meuriers qui se cultivent dans 
le territoire Florentin. {Mem. Acad. Scien. Pans, 572.) 

1777. Broc/iieri, Francesco, gardener to the King 
of Sardinia, at Turin. 

Nuovo Melodo, adattato al CUma del Piemonte, per cul- 
tivare gli Annanas senza Fuoco. Turin. 12mo. 1 plate. 

He recommends pits and dung, or tan : this, he says, is 
the English and Dutch method, both which countries he had 
visited. ^ ^ 

1780. Freylino, di Buttigliera, Conte. 

Sulla maniera di rescaldare economicamente le serre degli 
Ananassi. In the Opusculi, scelU. Florence. Svo. torn. xi. 

'''liis' improvement consists in mixing sawdust with tan or 
dung, to lessen expense, and prolong the heat. 

1780. Borch, Michael Jean, Comte de, a Pied- 
montese gentleman, author of various works on 

^^I^U^e^^sur les TrufFes du Pi^mont. Milan. Svo. 3 plates. 

1783. Picciuoli, Guiseppe, curator of the garden 
of the illustrious Marchese Niccolo Panciatechi, at 
the Villa Loggia, near Florence. 

Memoria sulla coltivazione degli Ananassi. Printed at the 
end of Horlo PanciaUco, p. 24-32. Florence, Svo. 

His method is nearly the same as that of La Court, and 
Brocchieri. See sect. ii. and A.D. 1777 above; he notices 
Bastard's mode of ripening the fruit in water, translated and 
published in Opusculi sceUi, tom. ii. and Count Frej lino 
of mixing sawdust with the dung. Brocchieri, he says, is 
one of the first gardeners in Italy. * c*. T» 

1783. Gardini, M , a physician at St. Da- 
miens, near Asti, in Piedmont. 

Da influxa electricitatis, atmosphericse m vegelantia, disser- 



tatio ab academia Lugdunensi proemio donata anno 1782. 
Turin, octavo, 17S3. 

1787. Affaitafa, Casimirc. 

L'ortolano in Villa, e I'accurato giardiniere in Clttk. Bas- 
sano, in 12ino. 

1794. Bussafo, Marco. 

Giardino di Agricoltura nel quale s'insegna tutto quello 
che appartiene ad un i>trfetto giardiniero. Bassano, in Svo. 

1798. Comparetti, Andrea, a physician at Turin, 
author of some anatomical dissertations. 

1. Sagi;io sulla coltura e govemode' Boschi, Padova, in Svo. 

2. Dinainica degli insetli. lb. ISOO, 2 vols, in Svo. 

180- . Finorchi, Anfon. Mario. 

Memoria sopra le fecondazione dei fiori dc^pie. Mem. 
dell' Acad, de Sienna, torn. 8. 

181- Fernaitii, D Louis, abb^ of Vallom- 

brosa. 

Disserta'.ions sur la culture des sapins. Paris. Svo. plates. 
Translated by M. Desaeres Fleurange. 

1803. Silva, Si^ismondo, a physician at Milai>, 
who has a handsome villa in the suburbs. 

Arte de' giardini Inglesi. Milano, 1803, 2 vols, in Svo. 
fig. An edition afterwards in quarto, in ^eat part trans 
lated from Hirschtield. 

1804. Bntlcy, C , a proprietor of lands at 

St. Domingo. 

Kapport sur les essais de culture des plantes, exotiques, 
dirigts a la venerie, (at Turin) du depaxteinent d\rP6. Turin. 
Svo. 

1807. Carradori. 

Degli organi assorbenti delle radici delle piante. Milano, 
18t)7, in 8vo. 
18t)8. Barelle, Giuseppe. 

Descrizione esatta dei Funghi nocivi o sospetli, con figure 
colorate. Milano, 1807, in 4to. 

1809. Re, Filippo, librarian to the Patriotic So- 
ciety at Milan, afterwards in the employ of govern- 
ment, at Turin, where he died in 1820 or 21. He 
wrote a great number of works on rural and econo- 
mical subjects. 

1. Lettera su alcune particolaritk osservate nella coltivazi 
one dei giardip.i del Milanese. Milano, 1811, in Svo. 

2. Lettera sopra alcune di quelle produzioni che volgar- 
meiite dicono rose di querela, e sulla michrorhizomania. 
Verona, 1814, in 4to. fig- 

3. Elementi di giardinailo. Milano. 1806, in Svo. 

4. Della poesia didascalica Georgica degli Italiani dopo il 
ristorameiito delle scienza smo al presente. Saggio. Bologna, 
1809, in Svo. 

5. Annali dell' agricoUura del regno d'ltalia coinminciati 
in Gennajo 1S06, e terminati in Giugno 1814, 66 parts, 
forming 22 vols, in Svo. with about 30 plates. 

6. II Giardiniere avviato nell' esercizio della sua professione, 
terza edizione. Milano, 1812, 2 vols, in Svo. con figure co- 
lon te. 

7. L'OrtoIano dirozzato. Milano, 1811, 2 vols, in 8to. con 
figure. 

8. Saggio Teorico Pratico sulle Malattie delle piante. Se- 
conda edizione. Milano, 1817, in Svo. 

9. Saggio sopra la Storia e il Coltivamento dell' Erba Me- 
dica. beconda edizione rifusa e notabilmente accresciuta. 
Milano, 1817, in Svo. 

1810. Anon. 

Delia scelta degli alberi ne' giardini e delle loro buone e 
cattive qu?.lita. Venezia, 1810, in Svo. 

1810. Pozzi, George. 

Del vino, delle sue malattie, de suoi remedi, &c. Milan, 
Svo. plates. 

1810. Spadoni, Paolo. 

Dello stabilimento, piantagione e conservazione delle siepi, 
con il disegno per ben formarle. \'enezia, in Svo. 

1811. Savi, Gcetano. 

1. Trattato degli alberi della Toscana. Firenze, 2 vols, in 
I2mo. 

2. Memoria sopra una piante Cucurbetacea. Svo. Milano, 
1818. 

3. Sul Cedro dell Libano. Svo. Firenze, ISIS. 

4. Sulla Magnolia grandiflora e sulla M. acuminata. Svo. 
Firenze, 1818. 

1811. Soderini, S. 

1. Trattato di agricoUura. Firenze, 1811, in 4tp. 
2 Della Cultura degli Orti e Giardini. Firenze, 1814, in 
4to. 

3. Trattato degli arbori. lb. 1817, in 4to. 
1811. Gallesio, Georgia, a magistrate at Savonna. 

1. Traite du genre Ci(rus. Paris. Svo. 

2. Pomona Italiana, ossia Trattato degli Albeii fruUiferi, 
in folio, con fig. Pisa, 1817, in parts, II. lis. 6d. eaih. 

1813. Benigni, Fortunato. 

Sugli insetti distniggitori delle Viti. Milano, in Svo. 
1813. Colla, Luigi. 

L'Antolegista Botanico. Turino, 1813-14, 6 vols, in Svo. 

fis- 

1815. Gautieri, Giuseppe, inspector-general of the 
roval forests of Lombardy. 
1. Noticie elementari sui bo»chl. Naples. 8yo. 



Book I. 



DUTCH WORKS ON GARDENING. 



1129 



5. Dell' Influsso de* Bo5chl sullo st^to fisieo de' Paed, e 
sulla prosi>erita della ra^ione. Milano. Svo. ISl". 

3. Memoria su! pascolo de' Boschi resinosi, da Ironda, d'alto 
fusto e cedui. Milano, ISl.'i. Svo. 

ISlfi. SartoreUi, Giorgio Batfisf^. 

D3?li alberi indigeni ai boschi del Italia superiore. Milano, 
ISlf). Svo. 

1816. An07l. 

Manuale de! Giardiniere pratico, &c. Milan. Svo. 

1817. ,Vrti//, Sig. Ltiigi, of Ver.-^na. 

^ Saggio sopra 1' indole dei giardiiii modenu. \'erona, ISl". 

181-. Annn. 

Deir Arte de Giardini Ingled. 2 vols. Svo. 



1817. Pindemontc, JppoVito di, an Italian poet, 

who lias spent some time in England, and Luigi 

Mabil, a gentleman of Lombardy. 

Su i (Tiardini I;i^!esi, e ful nifrito in cio' dell' Italia, Disser- 

fazione d" I. V M>[)ra I'indnle dei giai'dini modemi saggio 

di L. Con altre upeiette suUo stes^o argomento. Veroiia. 

Svo 1 plate. 

1817. Anon. 

\. Accurato ai^icoltore per Campi, Orti e Giardini, con- 
tutte le resole del!a ColtivazJone siiUa fondata esperienza di 
uoniini periti. ^lilano, 1SI7. liinio. 

y. La Co'.tura dei tiori a seconda del clima Lombardo. lb. 
ISl 7. 12mo. 



SuBSECT. 4. Works on Gardening originated and ])uhli</ied i7i Holland, exclusive of 

Translations. 



7693. The Dutch excel more in the practice than in the literature of gardetiing. The 
works of La Court, and Van Osten, the former little known, are among the best that 
have been produced. There are none of recent date of any consequence. The 
Journal of a Horticultural Tour in Holland, Flanders, Sec. by a deputation of the 
Caledonian Horticultural Society, gives the best idea of the state of gardening in that 
part of the Continent in 1817. 



1550. Curtii/s, Bencdictus. 

Hortorum libri xxx., in quibns contenetur arboniiti historia, 
partim ex probatisiiniis qiiibusque auctoribus, pardm ex auc- 
toris obierTatione coilecta. Leyden. loi. 

I6I0. Metirsius, Jean, died at Leyden, in 1613, in 
the flower of lii.> age. 

De arborum fructicum et herbaceum proprietate U5U et qua- 
litatibiis, lib. iii. Leyden. Svo. 

IdJl. Chij/t, Oiitgc-r Augerius, author of some 
works on minerals and insects. 

Meraoire der ^Teenlden blom-boUen, wortelen, Imiyden, 
planten, stru^cken, zaden ende vruchten, hoe men die ^al wel 
gheconditioneert bewaren ende over seyiiden, that i?, 

IVfemoir on the mode of preserving and sending over in eood 
condition foreign bulbs, roots, herbs, plants, shrubs, seeds, and 
fruits. Amsterdam. Svo. 

1699. Vander, Groen, I , gardener to the 

Prince of Orange. 

Le Jardinier HoUandais, avoc environ deux centes mode'les 
de parterres a tleurs et autres : labyrinthes, pavilions, ouvrages, 
treillis et maillss de lattes, et de quadrans et horloges solaiires. 
Amsterdam. 4to. 

lo,2. ^lu.-il'giiis, AlraJioue, physician, and pro- 
fessor of botany at Groningen j born in 1626, died 
in 1582. 

De cura et cultura plantarum. Arastel. -ito fig. 
1576. Cause, D. H. 

De Koninglycke hovenier (tlie Royal Gardener.) Amster- 
dam^fol. p. i'i4, plates. 

lo,6. Commclin, John, a botanist, was born at 
Amsterdam in 1629. He succeeded his father as 
one of the magistrates of his native city, where he 
formed a new botanical garden, and died in 1692. 
His nephew. Gasper Commelin, a physician, was 
appointed professor in botany, and director of the 
garden at Amsterdam. 

Nederlandtze Hesperides. Anist. fol. -nith manv plates. 
Englished bv G. > . London, ISSo. Svo. 

1682. Van Sterbccck Francis. 

Citricultura, of regeringhe der uythenische boomen. (Of the 
cultuie of the orange tribe, and the management of exou'c 
trees.) Ant\verp. 4to. p. 296, 14 plates. 

170.-3. Osten, or Ooslen, Henry Van, curator of 
the botanic garden at Leyden. 

1. Der Xeideriandische Garten. Leyden. Svo. opiates. 
Translcited into German and French : and into English, as 

2. The Dutch Gardener, &c. Lond. 1710. Svo. 
171-3. Anon. 

De nieuwe naau-svkeurige Xeederlandse hovenier. (The New 
Improved Dutch Court Gardener.) Leyden. 4to. p. '256, plates. 

1721. Du J'ivier, Jean, supposed to be a French 
Protestant refugree. 

Le Jardin de HoUande plante et garni de fleurs, de friuts, et 
d'orangeries, &c. Le tout apres \me longue experience, mis au 
jour pour I'interet public. Amsterdam. 12mo. 



17-37. Anon. ; the author Mr. La Court, a Dutch 
merchant, who had a country-house and fine gar- 
den at Driciiook, (triangle,) near Leyden, where 
he was tlie tirst to introduce and cultivate, with 
success, the pine-apple and the tuberose. He died 
between 1737 and 17-it). 

Aenmerkingenoverhetaenleggen van landhuizen, lusthoven, 
plantagion, enz, enz. (Remarks on tl-.e laving out of country- 
houses, pleasure-g-ardens, jilantations, &ic. kc.) Levden 4to. 
p. 412, with 1.5 plates. 

These plates contain plans of pits for growing the pine and 
the vine ; a genera! plan of Driehoek, and tigures of the pine- ■ 
apple, tuberose, and some varieties of orsmges and lemons. The 
book is very scarce; only a few having been printed. The only 
copy we have seen is in the Banksiaii library. 

1750. Cuno, John Christian, 01 Am^terdava. De- 
scription of his own garden, in Dutch verse. 

1752. J'oorheijn, George, commercial florist at 
Haerlem, of the firm of Vcorhelra and Van Zompel. 

Traite sur la Jaccinthe. 

1760. Van Kamjien, or Caynpen, et fits, florists, 
at Haerlem. 

Traite dcs Fleurs a oignons. Svo. with plates; translated 
with this title. 

The Dutcli Florist ; or, true method of managing all sorts of 
Flowers v,-i*h bulbous roots. 4to. 

1771. Knoop, Jean Herman, a gardener at Leu- 
warden, in Friezland, died about the end of the 
ISth century. 

1. Fomologie, ou description les meilleures sortes de pomme* 
et de poire?, que Ton esiime et cultive leplus, soitaux Pavs-bas, 
soit ea Allsmagne, soit et Angleterre. Amsterdam, fol. 

2. _Fructuo!ogie, ou description des arbres fruitiers, ainsi que 
des fruits que I'on plante et qu'on cultive communement dans 
lesjardins- Amsterdam, folio. 

1772. Pocderle, raine. 

Manuel de Tarboriste du foresUer Belgique, ou\Tage extrait 
des meiUeurs auteurs anciens et modemes, et soutenu d'obser- 
vations faitcs dans ditforcns pavs ou I'auteur a vovage. Brussels 
and Taris. 2 vols. Svo. 

^_An anonymous work, with nearly the same title, appeared in 

17S-i. Burtin, Francis Xavier, a physician in Lor- 
rain, author of some works on mincralogv. 

Jlemoire sur la question ; quels sont les vegetaux indigenes 
que Ton pourrait substituer dans les Pays-bas, aui vegetaux 
eiotiques. Brussels. 4to. 
1805. Serrurier. 

Fruit Kundig A\'oordenbock. 2 vols. Amsterdam. 
1817. Muschc, curator of the botanic garden at 
Ghent. 

HoitusGandensis. 12mo. Ghent. 
1817. Huthem. 

Discours sur I'etat ancien et modern de I'agriculture et de la 
Dotanique dans les Pays-bas. Ghent. Svo. p. 70. ■ 



SUBSZCT. 



Works on Gardening, published in Sweden, 
of Translations. 



JS^orica!/, and IceV/yd erciun=< 



7696. Scandinavian books on gardening are few, and chiefly by Linnasus or his pupils. 
A knowledge of the present state cf culture in Sweden is best obtained by reference to 
the transactions of the Stockholm and Upsal Academies. 



16i-3. Anon. 

-Ken ny traagiirden Book. (A new garden book.) Printed 
i!»ith Arv. Mansons Ortabook. Stockholm. Svo. 

1664. liudhcck, Glaus, a Sv.'edish physician, was 
tlie son of the Bishop of Vesteras, and born in 
16.-n. While a student at Upsal, he discovered the 
lymphatics in the liver, and other parts of the body ; 
though his claim of priority v.-as conte.--ted by Bar- 
tholine. He also cultivateii botany, and founded a 
garden for (he university of rp;-l, v.-here he held 



the chair of medicine till his death in 1702, having 
resigned the professorships of botanv and anatomj-, 
some years before, to his son, of the"same name. 

1. Praeside, Dissertatio : Horticultuxa nova Upsaliensis. 
Resp. (jUSt. Lohnnan. L^psalife. 4to. 

2. Catalogus Plantarum Horti LJ'psaliensis. 

3. Camj.i Elysii, liber primus. Upsal, 1702. Liber secundus. 
Ilisal, 1701. 2 vols. fol. 

Tliis was to be a vast work, in which all the known plants in 
the world were to be represented by wooden cuts, in twelve 7o- 
lunies, folio. The two first vohmies however, were so unfor- 



1130 



STATISTICS OF 



GARDENING. 



Past IV. 



tunate, as to put an end to this stupendous project. A dreadful 
fire having broken out in Upsal in 1702, among its ravages re- 
duced to ctsihes the printing-office, when only a few copies of the 
work had been removed. These are, of course, extremely 
valuable. 

1686. Rudheck, Olaus,Jilius, the son and successor 
of the professor of the same name, was born at Up- 
sal in 1660. He took his doctor's degree at Utrecht, 
and in 1720 joined Berzehus in founding the Swedish 
Academy of Sciences, the memoirs of which learned 
body contain a number of his dissertations on sub- 
jects of natural history. He also published some 
works on the plants and animals mentioned in Scrip- 
ture. He died in 1740. 

Propagatio Plantarum Botanico-physica. Upsal. 8vo. p. 142. 
with wood cuts and co))])er-plates. 

17 — . FragrcEus, Jonas Theodor. 

Konsten at skara frukt trad. (The art of nursing iruit-trees.) 
Wetensk. Acad. hand. 2. 45. 
1728. Dahlman, G. T. 

Den furdige tradgardmastaren. (The successful Gai-denc: .) 
Stockholm. 8vo. p. 230. 

1738. /. P. B. 

En triigardsbok. (A Garden-book.) Stockholm. 8vo. p. 212. 

1739. LinncEus, or Von Linne, Charles, was the 
son of a clergyman at Rashult, in Sweden, and born 
there May 13. 1707. He was educated at Lund, 
from whence he removed to Upsal, where he was 
appointed to read lectures on botany, in 1730; and 
the year following he received a commission from 
the Academy of Sciences, to travel in Lapland and 
Norway. In this journey he paid attention to the 
art of assaying metals, oh which he afterwards de- 
livered a course of lectures. In 1735 he went to 
Harderwyck, in Holland, where he took his doc- 
tor's degree, and while in that country he became, 
through the introduction of Boerhaave, superin- 
tendant of Mr. Clifford's garden, at Hartecamp, of 
which he drew up a catalogue. While in this si- 
tuation he publisiicd also his Flora Lapponica ; 
after which he visited England. On his return to 
Holland, he continued his Genera Plantarum, 
and was chosen a member of the Imperial Academy. 
In 1737 he printed the Horfus Cliffortianus, in 
fol ; and his Critica Botanica. He returned to 
Sweden in 1738, and was chosen a member of the 
academy at Upsal ; and soon afterwards he laid the 
foundation of that at Stockholm. In 1740 he was 
chosen professor of medicine at the former place, 
where he undertook the reform of the botanical 
garden, to which he gave many valuable exotics. 
In 1745 he published his Flora Suecka s which 
was followed by the Fauna Suecica. At this 
time his merits were so well appreciated, that a 
medal was struck to his honoi, and he was ap- 
pointed archiator to the king. In 1749 appeared 
his Mate7-ia Medica j and in 1751 he published 
the' Philosophin Botanica. His most splendid 
publication came out in 1754, with this title, 
Musceum Regis Adolphi Frederici, comprising a 
description of the natural curiosities in the royal 
museum. While conducting this work through 
the press, Linnajus was honored with the order 
of the Polar Star ; and in 1756 he was ennobled. 
In the mean time he prepared for publication his 
Species Plantaru7n, which was followed by the 
Systema Natures. This illustrious naturalist 
died at Upsal, Jan. 10. 1778, and his remains were 
interred with great solemnity, in the cathedral of 
that city, where his pupils erected a monument to 
his memory. His son, Charles Linuceus, born in 
1741, became demonstrator in the botanic garden, 
and published some valuable works. He was ill- 
used by his mother, which is supposed to have has- 
tened his death, in 1783. His sister, Elizabeth 
Christina, discovered a luminous property in the 
flowers of the nasturtium. 

1. Ron om vaxters plantering, grundat pa naturen. (Expe- 
riments on the planting of vegetables, founded in nature.) 
Vetensk, Acad. Handling. 1739, p. 1-24. 

2. De cultura vegetabilium naturie convenienter instituenda. 
Analect Transalpin. tom.i. p. 1-15. 

3. Dissertatio de Horticultura Academica. Upsal, 1754. 
4to. 

4. Dissertatio Hortis Culinaris. Stockholm, 1764. 4to. 

5. Handling om skogars plantering. (Treatise on planting 
woods.) Vetensk, Acad. Handling, 1748, p. 264. 269. 

1740. Cederhelm, Baron Carl Wilhelm. 

Tal on wilda trads planteringi Sverige. (Discourse on plant- 
ing trees indigenous in Sweden.) Upsal. 8vo. 
1740. Triewald, Marten. 

Anmarkningar vid utlandska fruktoch andra trads planter- 



ande i Sverige. (Remarks on exotic Fruits and other Garden 
Plants in Sweden.) Vetensk, Acad. Handling, 204. 207. 

1752. Wallerio, Johunne Gotschalk. 
Praeside, Dissertatio de artificiose fecundatione, immersiva 
seminum vegetabilium. Stockholme. 4to. p. 24. 

1754. Kalm, Peter, a naturalist, was born in Fin- 
land in 1715. He became professor of botany at 
Abo, and in 1747 went to North America, for the 
purpose of exploring that country ; where he re- 
mained two or three years, and then returned to 
Abo. He aftervv-ards made an extensive tour in 
Russia, with the same object, and died in Sweden 
in 1779. His Travels in America were translated 
into English by Forster, in 1771. 

1. Almanna anmarkingar wid en ICryddoch tragiirds anlag- 

fmde. (General Remarks on the laying out of a K'tchen and 
ruit-Garden.) Abo. 4to. p. 8. 

2. Om mojeligheten cch nyttan af Kryddoch tra-gardars 
anlaggande i Finland. (On the Practicability and Advan- 
tage of laying out liitchen and Fruit Gardens in Finland.) 
Abo. 4to. p. 12. 

3. Dissertatio possibilitatemvariaVegetabilia exotica fabricis 
nostris utilia in Finlandia colendi. Abo, 4to. p. 11. 

4. Utkast til en blomsterjprd af inhemska vaster. (Sketch 
of a Flower Garden of Native \'egetables.) Abo, 1766. 4to. 
p. 15. 

5. AnmUrkningar om vara Furuoch (Jran-skogars ommare 
ward, tagne af cieras alder. (Observations on Fuel and Tim- 
ber Wood;;, &f.) Abo, 1757. 4to. 

G. Anmarkningar rijrande niidvandigheten af Ekskogamas 
battre vaord och ans i Finland. (Observations on Oak H'oods 
in Finland.) Abo, 1757. 4 to. 

7. -Vnm.arkningar vid fruct-trano planterande i Finland. 
(Remarks on Planting Fruit Trees in Finland.) Abo, 1757- 
4 to. p. 12. 

17i>9. Gadd, Peter Adrian, professor of chemistry 
at Abo, author of a number of tracts on chemistry, 
natural history, &c 

1. Om Branne-toif. (On Burning Turf.) Abo. 4to. 

2. Upmuntran och underrattellse til nyttiga plantagers 
vidlaggande i Finland. (Encouragement and Instruction to 
take Pleasures for useful Planting in Finland.) Abo. 4to. 
1765. 

3. Academisk Afliandling om medel at underhiiUa cch oka 
skogsvaxten i Finland. (On Oak Woods in Finland.) Abo. 
4to. p.2G. 

1768. Lissander, Andrew. 

Anmarkningar vid Svenska tragardsskotstein. (Remarks on 
Swedish Gardening.) Stockholm. 8vo. p. 351. 4 plates. 

1770. Olafsyn, Olaf, author ot a voyage in Ice- 
land, made by order of the Danish court. 

Isl,endsk Urtagards Eok. (Iceland's Garden Book.) Kaup- 
maunaofn. 8vo. 

1771. Osbeck, Peter ; Alof Toreen, and Captain 
Eckeberg, natives of Sweden, who made a voyage 
to China. 

A voyage to China and the East Indies ; together with a 
voyage to Surrate, by Alof Toreen ; and an account of the 
Chinese Husbandry, by Captain Eckeberg. Translated fiom 
the German. To which is added, a Formula and Flora Sin- 
ensis. Lond. 1771. 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. ii. contains a Speech, 
shewing what is most worthy to be attended to in voyages 
to China. Translated from the Swedish, by John Reinhold 
Forster, LL.D. F.R S., a distinguished Prussian naturalist. 
178-. Soinmerfeldt, Christian. 

Af handlingom nyttige have-vexters dyrkning for Norge. 
(Treatise on the Culture of Vegetables in Norway.) 
17<S-. Schmidt, Chy-istian Francis. 
Kort anvisning til vilde traers opelskring og skoves rette anlag, 
behandling og vidligeholdelse i Dannemark.) On the manage- 
ment of wood in Denmark.) Danske Landhmf h. Selsk. Skrift. 
3 Decl. p. 1. 170. 

1780. Troxelius, Clas Bleehort. 

Landtmarina genvijg til frukt-tian. (An easy n.ode of having 
fruit-trees.) Lund. 4to. p. 16. 

1780. Bergius, Peter Jonas, a physician, and pro- 
fessor of natural history at Stockholm, published 
several botanical works, and a Materia Medica; 
died 1791. 

Den Obstbaumgarten in Schweden. Translated from the 
Swedish. Leipsig, 1794, 8vo. 
1784. Engleoert, Jortin. 

Flora maccelli Hortensis. Svenska Koks-och kryddigaiden 
forsvenskad. Lund. 8vo. p. 44. 

1789. Hellenius, Charles Nicolas, professor of 
botany at Abo, in Finland ; died 179-. 

1. Strodole anmarkningar rorande frukttrans skotsel i Fin- 
land. (On nurseries of fruit-tree plantations in Finland.) Abo. 
4to. p. 13. 

2. Anmarkningar vid fruktbarande buskars skotsel. (Re- 
marks on nursing fruit-bearing shrubs.) Abo. 4to. p. 10. 

1799. Thunberg, Sir Charles Peter, M. D., pro- 
fessor of botany in the university of Upsal, author 
of the Flora Japonica, and various papers in the 
Linncean Transactions. 

1. De Nntvitione Plantarum. Upsal. 4to. 

2. Omplantering Frukt-Trad, Buskar och Blomster \'axter, 
som kunna vala Svenska Klimatu. (On planting fruit-bushes, 
and flowering vegetables, suitable to the Swedish climate.) 
Upsal, ISO . 4to.- 

3. Om Hackars Plantering tile Leivandc Gardesgarder. 
(On plantnig Hedges, &c.) Upsal. 4to. 



Book 1. 



POLICE AND LAWS OF GARDENING. 



1131 



SuESECT. 6. JFo7-ks on Gcirdening, published in Poland and Russia. 

7697. Of original Polish or Russian books on gardening there are very few ; but a 
number of translations were made in Poland during the early part of the 18th 
century. There are agricultural transactions published occasionally by a society at 
Warsaw, -which, with the transactions of the Economical Society of St. Petersburgh, may 
be considered as the best books for obtaining some idea of the state of culture in these 
countries. 



1788. Sambourslcy, a Russian poet, author of a 
number of works chiefly in verse, and of a pcem on 
gardens, which has been translated into French, 
with the title 

Lejardinsde Samboursky. 8vo. 

1793. Georgi, a physician, and member of several 
learned societies. 

Description de la Vilie de St. Petersburg et de ses Environs. 
Petersburg. 8vo. 

18—. Lomonosow, a Russian poet and miscellane- 
ous writer, author of a poem on glass, and the ad- 
vantages resulting from its use in a northern cli- 



mate. The subject of hot-houses forms a consi- 
derable part of the poem. 

1808. Cxartoryska, Princess Isabella, a lady of 
one of the most ancient families in Poland in the 
royal line. She spent a considerable time in Eng- 
land, where she acquired a taste for the modern 
art of laying out grounds, introduced it on her es- 
tate at Lublin, and wrote the following work on 
the subject. 

Mysli Hozne o Sposobie Zakladania Ogrodow, &c. (Thoughts 
on the manner of Planting Gardens.) Warsaw. 4to. plates. 



SuBSECT. 7. Works on Gardening, j^ublished in Portugal and Spain. 

7698. The transactions of the royal agricultural society at Madrid, are alm.ost the 
only recorded source of obtaining any knowledge of the state of culture in Spain. 



1557. Herrera, GabHello Alplionso. 
Libro di Agricultura. One book treats " De las Huertas," or 
of Gardens. 

178-, Cavanilles, Antonio Joseph, an eminent 
botanist, author of various works, and among 
others, of Figures and Descriptions of the Plants of 
Spain. 

De la Juncia avellanada, o'chufeis de Valencia. {Annates de 
Ciencias Naturales, torn. iii. 234 ) 



1807. Clemento y Rubio, Don Simoii de Roxas. 
Ensayo sobre las variedades de la Vid comun que vegetan en 
Andalusia. Madrid. 4to. 
Translated into French by de Caumels of Toulouse. 

1817. Anon. 

Notice sur un Arbre a Sucre, (Arbutus Unedo ?) decouverte 
en Espagne. Traduit de I'Espagnole par D.A. Armesto. 
Paris. 8vo. 



SuBSECT. 8. Works on Gardening, published in North America. 

7699. A number of American essays are connected with gardening will be found in the 
agricultural transactions of the Philadelphia and New York societies, in the transactions 
of the Society of Arts of New York, and in Dr. Dean's New England Farmer s Dic- 
tionary. Cobbett's American Gardener may be considered as affording a tolerable pic- 
ture of the state of gardening in the United States, where it appears the long and severe 
winters are material drawbacks to every branch of the art. 



1755. Belgrove, William. 

A Treatise upon Husbandry and Planting. Boston, New 
England. 4to. pp. 86. 
, 1785. Marshall, Humphrey. 

The American Grove; a catalogue of the trees and shrubs 
which grow naturally in North America, with notices of their 
culture. New York. 8vo. 
t 1790. Peterkin, Joshua. 

A Treatise on Planting, from the origin of semen to ebulli- 
tion, 2d edit. Bassaterre, St. Cristopher's. 4to. 
179-. Johnson, John B. 

On the Culture of the Vine. (New York Soc. Transactions, 
vol. ii.) 

1805. M'Mahon, B., an American seedsman. 
The American Gardener's Kalsndar. 12mo. 



1810. Peters, Richard. 

On Peach-trees. (Massachus. Soc. Trans, vol. ii. 48.) 

1811. Hosack, David, M. D. F. R. S. L. S. &c. 
professor of medicine in the university of the state 
of New York. 

1. Hortus Elginensis. New York. 8vo. 2d edit. 

2. Statement of Facts relative to the Elgin Botanic Garden. 
New York. 8vo. 1811. 

1817. Coxe, William, Esq. of Burlington, in New 
Jersey. 

View of the Cultivation of Fruit-trees, with the Management 
of Orchards and Cider, with accurate descriptions of the most 
estimable varieties of native and foreign Apples and other 
Fruits, cultivated in the United States of America. Philadel- 
phia. 8vo. 



Chap. V. 

Of the Professional Police, and Public Law.t relative to Gardeners and Gardening. 

7700. By professional j)olice, we mean those associations which gardeners have formed, - 
at different times, for mutual benefit or instruction, or the Improvement of their art ; 
by public laws, those of the legislature. 

7701. A fraternity of gardeners, we have already remarked, has long existed in Ger- 
many as regularly organised as that of masonry. A fraternity also exists in France, but 
less extensive and systematic. Their principal lodge is at Versailles; the confreres de St. 
Fiacre, being there, as Neill observes, to France, what " Adam's lodge of Aberdeen is to 
Scotland." There are also a few similar fraternities in this country, who hold meetings, 
and have secret signs and other rites nearly similar to those of masonry ; but these soci- 
eties have no systematic connection like those of Germany. From masonry they have 
undoubtedly taken their origin ; but how, when, and where, and for what object, in the 
first instance, though we have corresponded with competent persons in all parts of \hQ 
kingdom, we have been unable to ascertain. 



1132* 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Pakt IV. 



7702. The oldest gardeners' lodges seem to be those in Aberdeenshire, and Adanis lodge, 
held in the city of Aberdeen, is considered the oldest in Britain : there is anotiier of 
nearly equal antiquity, called Soloynons lodge, held in Banf. These lodges profess to 
be for the mutual instruction of the members in their art ; for the assistance of brethi-en 
in distress; and for the benefit of travelling members. Tlie first object is attained both 
by secret instructions, and also by competitory exhibitions of garden productions, as 
flowers and fruits ; the second, by annual subscriptions, from which a fund is fonned, 
managed by a committee of the society ; and the third, by signs and pass-words, as in 
masonry. Tliey have a general meeting, formal procession with symbols and flowers, 
and afterwards a feast, once a-year. 'Iliere were formerly a number of gardeners' lodges 
in Scotland, and there are still a few besides those of Aberdeen and Banf, but chiefly 
confined to the counties of Aberdeen, Forfar, and part of those adjoining. 

7703. Tlie jnincipcd Scotch gardeners' lodge, though it has no connection or control 
over the others like the metropolitan masons' lodge, is the Caledonian lodge of Edin- 
burgh, founded about the end of the last century : its object is the same as that of the 
Aberdeen lodge ; but it has no shows of flowers, or other garden productions. Their 
meetings are respectable, their processions pompous, and their funds considerable. 

7704. There are very few gardeners' lodges in England ; the only one of which we have 
been able to obtain any distinct account is " Adam's Lodge, of London," founded 
June 4, 1781, of which the rules and orders h£ve been published. This lodge is de- 
scribed in the Rules, &c. as a " Fraternity or community for improving the art of 
Gardening ; to establish a fund for the mutual support and relief of each other in ti;c 
time of sickness, lam.eness, or distress ; and also to ascertain the characters and abilities 
of such gardeners who shall belong to, or may be recommended bv this societv, to 
obviate the difficulty so commonly complained of by the nobility, gentry, and others, cf 
obtaining skilful and experienced persons to undertake the employment.]' At present it 
consists of about one hundred and fifty members, and is on the decline. ITie allowance 
to the sick or disabled has been gradually diminished from insufficiency of funds ; and 
from having been originally fixed by a random guess, instead of estimations of the value 
of lives, &c. as ought to be done in all benefit societies. 

7705. Gardeners' charter. . About the middle of the last centuiy, Lee, Gordon, Rus- 
sel, and Malcolm, all Scotch gardeners, commenced their nurseries at Hammersmith, 
Mile-end, Lewisham, and Kennington. "^Oieir success excited the jealousy of the esta- 
blished commercial gardeners, who, between 1760 and 1770, held several meetings, and 
entered into resolutions not to employ young men from tlie north. These resolutions 
were not long adhered to ; but a tract, entitled Adam armed (see p. 1106. A.D. 1760.), 
published by this association at the time, shows the extent of what they intended. From 
this tract it appears, that James I. had granted a charter to certain persons inhabiting within 
London, and six miles of it, who were capable to educate and instruct young men in the artaf 
gardening. This charter was granted in the third year of this king's reign, and renewed in 
the fourteenth ; but in the t) act alluded to it is stated never to have been put in force, and 
not to be sufficiently extensive ; and therefore it is proposed, that a charter be granted to 
extend over the whole kingdom, to prevent rciere laborers and other unqualified persons 
from assuming the profession of gardeners, and thereby doing " great injury to the nobi- 
lity's and gentry's gardens and plantations," as well as to proprietors mIio let ground to 
such as "undertake to furnish the market with eatables." Only a certain number of 
gardeners were to be licensed to take apprentices, and of these the number was to be 
limited, &c. This attempt at monopoly of skill does not appear to have met with serious 
attention, and all that resulted from the association, as far as we have been able to learn 
(from a gardener, Duncan, upwards of 90 years of age), M as the partial exclusion, for a 
year or two, of young Scotchmen from a few of the nurseries and gentlemen's gardens 
near town, which were managed by Englishmen. 

7706. The origin offiorists' societies we have not been able to discover. It is more than 
probable that meetings for the display of fine flowers and the estimation of their merits, 
were first held at Norwich, where, as Sir J. E. Smith infoi-ms us {Snpp. Enci/c. Brii. art. 
£ot. 336.), a love of flowers, and a great degree of skill in their culture, had been intro- 
duced into that city with its worsted manufactures, about the middle of the sixteenth cen- 
tury. At all events, there were florists' feasts held there so early as 1637 ; a play called 
Rhodon and Iris, being extant, which was acted before the company in that year. 
{Linn. Tra}is. vol, ii. p. 226.) Tlie next florists' meetings, it is probable, sprang up 
about London ; and Nathaniel Rench, of Fulham, is said {Eanlcojie7-'s Historical Account 
of Fulham) to have been the first who established them, probably about the end of the 
seventeenth century. According to Davey, florist. King's Road, whose fatlier was also an 
eminent florist, and lived to be upwards of ninety years of age, the florists' feasts and 
meetings were at their greatest height about London-, between 1 740 and 1 770. They were 
then attended by many noblemen and gentlemen, as the horticultural societies are at pre- 
sent. They declined towards the end of the last century, but have since reWved, and are 



Book Ih 



FUTURE PROGRESS OF GARDENING. 



113a 



at present rather on the increase. The florists' meetings, and those of gooseberry-growers 
in Lancashire and the adjoining counties, are very numerous, and rather on the increase. 
When they were first adopted in that part of England is not exactly known. From the 
best accounts we have been able to collect, tb.ey were in vogue there in 17G0, and. are re- 
collected so far back as 1740. Some florists' societies existed in Edinburgh during the 
latter end of the last century ; and on one of tliese the Caledonian Horticultural Society 
"was founded. The principal florists' societies in Scotland are at Paisley. 

7707. The jirinc.ipal modern societies for the encouragement of gardening are, the London 
and Caledonian Horticultural Societies, whose transactions are so fx-equently referred to 
in this work. 

7708. There ai-e few picUic laws specially formed for the two first branches of garden- 
ing, horticulture and floriculture ; the general laws being quite sufficient for their pro- 
tection. Robbing of orchards or gardens, of fruit growing therein, is punishable crimi- 
nally by whipping, small fines, imprisonment, and satisfaction to the parties wronged, 
according to the nature of the offence. (43 Eliz. c. 7.) ' 

7709. There are a number of acts relative to arboriculture, and especially against the 
cutting down of young trees. (See Tomlins's Law Diet. vol. ii. art. Timber.) 



BOOK IL 

OF THE FUTURE PROGRESS OF GARDENING IN BRITAIN. 

7710. The improvement of gardening, like that of every art or commodity, necessarily 
depends on demand and production. These causes operate reciprocally on each other : a 
nicety of taste in the purchase of vegetables and fruits exposed in public markets, will occa- 
sion articles of better quality being brought there ; and articles of a superior quality, by 
improving and rendering more fastidious the taste of the purchaser, will ensure the conti- 
nuance of their production. In like manner, if those wiio have private gardens were a 
little more difiicultto please in selecting a gardener, and in the quality of the produce sent 
to table, the consequence would be, an improvement in that produce, and more scientific 
gardeners. More scientific gardeners would surprise and delight, by their superior fruits 
and flowers, and the greater order, beauty, and high keeping of their gardens ; and the 
habits of both parties accommodating themselves to this improved state of things, would 
be the ground on which to rely for its continuance. In this view of the subject, the fu- 
ture progress of gardening depends on two causes ; the improvement of the taste of the 
patrons of gardening ; and the improvement of the science and art of practical gardeners. 



Chaf. L 

Of the Improvement of the Taste of the Patrons of Gardening. 

7711. Improvement is the characteristic of civilised man, and implies progressive ad- 
vances. Men rest satisfied with what they have, when they know of notliing better ; and 
therefore, one of the first sources of improvement in the taste of the patrons of gardening, 
whether of the tradesman who has recourse to the public market, or the private gentleman 
who is in possession of a garden, is the increase of knowledge. The wealthy tradesmen 
of Dublin and Edinburgh should look into Covent Garden market in London ; and, not 
to mention fruits, and forced or e::otic productions, let them compare the cauliflowers and 
salading of the three markets. Those who have once acquired a taste for such salads of 
endive as are afforded in the London market throughout the winter, would not very 
readily reconcile themselves to the acetarious productions of Dublin and Glasgow during 
that season. 

7712. The ignorance of the proper mode of cooking vegetables, and especially of dressing 
salads, which exists among the middling classes, is another retarding cause. A French 
laborer, out of a few leaves of dandelion and wild sorrel, which may be gathered by the 
hedge-sides anywhere, and almost at any time, will produce, merely by the aid of the 
common condiments, what the wives of the greater number of respectable British trades- 
men have no idea of. There can be no great demand for a thing, of which the use is not 
thoroughly understood ; and, therefore, an improvement in the knowledge and practice 
of cooking must take place among a certain class before much can be expected in the 
quantity, kind, or quality of the gardening articles Avhich they commonly consume. 



1134 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV, 



7713. The more general use of dessert Jruit ciTfinng the middling classes, is another requi- 
site wanting for the improvement of horticulture in Scotland and Ireland. If fruit, phy- 
siologically considered, is less wholesome after dinner than before it (which is question- 
able), it is at least more so than where drinking is substituted in its place. To prolong 
the period of eating, and the conversation of female society, are not only objects which 
afford immediate satisfaction ; but, by moderating the use of stimulating liquors, tend to 
ensure future health. But, even in England, where a dessert is universal among the in- 
dependent class, there is a great want of nicety of taste : fruit is valued by many only as 
a symptom of the presence of wine : others contentedly use pears and plums that would 
be rejected at the most common Frencli dejeune ; and many rest satisfied with melons 
and grapes, who, at almost no additional expense, might have pine-apples. Wherever 
the litter of four horses is at command, pine-apples may be grown in Baldwin's manner 
(2649. and 2698. &c.) with very little trouble to the gardener, and, indeed, at much less 
trouble than trying to have very early cucumbers or melons. But why speak of pines, when 
not one ftimily in a hundred are properly supplied with mushrooms* which ought to be on 
the table in some form, every day in the year. On a small scale, the grand secret h, to 
employ a gardener who knows his business ; and to direct his attention less to raising or- 
dinary productions at extraordinary seasons, than to raising first-rate crops of everything 
in due season. On a larger scale, all ordinary and extraordinarj- things should be at- 
tempted that art and wealth can accomplish. 

7714. A taste for fine fioivers and rare exotics must be preceded by some knowledge of 
plants, or a taste for scientific botany, and the history, geography, and uses of plants. 
These branches of knowledge may be considered as gaining ground. A good deal also 
depends on the fashion of using flowers as chamber ornaments, and on having green-houses 
attached to dwellings ; both are most agreeable and rational luxuries ; and it is much to 
be desired that a taste for them was more general, especially in provincial towns, and in 
the cities of Scotland and Ireland. 

7715. The taste far playiting has attained a greater height, during the last twenty years, 
than any other department of gardening ; the beneficial consequences of which are already 
powerfully felt in Scotland, and the exposed parts of England. An essential requisite 
in this department is attention to the future management, tliinning, and pruning of 
plantations. 

7716. The taste for landscape-gardening has been nearly dormant in England, during 
the last thirty years ; in Scotland it has been more active, but not of the purest kind ; 
little has been done in Ireland generally, though there are some patriots there, who have 
been active in improvement. A taste for deer-parks is not common in Scotland ; and rare 
in Ireland. A park in Scotland is a grass field ; and what in that country corresponds 
with the park of a mansion in England is a number of green enclosures lying contiguous 
to each other, and surrounded by strips or rows of trees. In Ireland a mansion and park 
is a naked house, in a naked grass field, surrounded by a stone wall. There are excep- 
tions in both countries ; and many lawns or sheep-parks in Scotland of considerable 
beauty. Besides, a union of pasturable wooded enclosures, as a park, may be very well 
defended on the principle of utility ; but there can be no defence of the naked parks of 
Ireland. 

7717. The taste for public gat-dens, as promenades and botanic gardens, seems on the 
. increase ; but unfortunately these are seldom founded on a sufficiently secure basis. The 
funds of the recently established botanic gardens have been generally raised by the sub- 
scriptions of a certain number of individuals, to whom, and to certain annual subscribers, 
the garden is alone accessible. Perhaps it would be better, if, as in the case of public 
promenades, the funds were raised by the whole town or community, and the garden 
thrown open to all, like that of Paris. Public umbrageous promenades, either equestrian 
or pedestrian, are very desirable additions to all congregations of houses. 

7718. Choice of a gardener. Very much of the comforts and pleasures which a private 
gentleman derives from his garden, and garden-scenery, depends on the qualifications of 
the gardener which he employs to manage them. It was formerly the practice, in books 
of gardening, to give directions to gentlemen how to choose a gardener. These might 
have been of use when the qualities desired differed little from those sought for in a com- 
mon laborer; such as sufficient strength and health, and good morals, disposition, temper, 
&c. But every master can judge of these and other similar points ; and for any gentle- 
man who has not a knowledge of gardening to go further, would be more dangerous than 
useful. We are clearly of opinion, that in almost every case the best mode is to apply to 
a respectable nurseryman ; to describe to him the sort of garden and garden-scenery to be 
managed, and the sort of productions desired, and to rely on his recommending a fit per- 
son for accomplishing the intended objects. If this person should not turn out so well 
as was expected, the nurseryman will be in some degree responsible for his conduct, and 
will feel doubly anxious to replace him by a more competent person. 



Book II. 



KDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



1135 



Chap. II. 



Of the Education of Gardeners. 

7719. 5^ H«crt?2o?i is generally understood that portion of knowledge which is obtained 
at schools ; but we shall here use the tenn in a somewhat more extended sense, and con- 
sider it as the means which may be employed to render man competent for performing the 
part which he undertakes to perfoiTn in life with increased satisfaction to himself and 
others. Education may thus be considered as extending to eveiything which operates on 
the body or mind, from the earliest period of our existence to the final extinction of life. 
With this object in view, we shall consider in succession the professional, intellectual, 
moral, religious, physical, and economical education of gardeners, previously submitting 
some general remarks. 



Sect. L On the degree of Knoivledge ivhich may he attained by Practical Men, and on the 
General Powers of the human Mind, as to Attainments. 

7720. The knowledge of languages, history, geography, arts, sciences, and literatui-e, 
which a gardener daily occupied with his profession may acquire, provided he begins at 
the commencement of his apprenticeship, and continues to employ his leisure hours in 
reading till he is twenty or twenty-five years of age, is by no means inconsiderable : not 
that he can, or need become leai-ned ; but, if desirous, he may become generally intelli- 
gent ; render himself fit, as far as conversation is concerned, for good society ; prove in- 
structive and entertaining to others by his conversation ; and provide a reserve fund of 
enjoyment for liimself, by laying up a store of ideas for reflection in misfortune, disease, 
or old age. 

7721. The terms knowledge and ignorance are entirely relative : the knowledge of a modem chemist's 
porter would have subjected him to be hanged and burned in the days of the first popes ; and any brick- 
layer's laborer who reads the London newspapers, has more correct ideas on the principles of political eco- 
nomy than nine tenths of the nobility in Russia and Spain. It is impossible to set limits to the knowledge 
which may be obtained by tliose who are destined even to the most severe and constant labor. The intel- 
ligence of 'the miners in Scotland and Sweden may be referred to as proofs. The miners at Leadhills have 
a regular library and reading society ; and the works they make choice of are not only histories, voyages, 
travels, &c. but' even works of taste, such as the British classics, and best novels and romances. The de- 
gree to which knowledge will prevail among any class of laboring men, will depend jointly on their own am- 
bition ; on the demand for, or reputation in which, knowledge is held ; and on the opportunities of acquiring 
it A dull, stupid person, with little native activity, will never desire to know more than what enables him 
to supply the ordinary wants of life. Where the workmen of any art are required to have technical know- 
ledge of any particular kind, they will be found invariably to possess it. Thus carpenters and masons re- 
quire some knowledge of the mechanical principles of architecture, and working engineers of the strength 
of materials ; and these kinds of knowledge are acquired by them without an hour's interruption of their 
daily labor : on the contrary, the habit of evening study renders them more stead}", sober, and industrious 
than other workmen j than bricklayers and paper-hangers, for example, v/hose employments require much 
less intellectual skill. If every cook-maid, before she could obtain a first-rate place, were required to be 
able to read Apicius Redivivus in the original tongue, there would be no want of learned cooks ; and if no 
gardener could obtain a first-rate situation who had not 'UTitten a thesis in Greek, or who had not made 
the tour of Europe, there would soon be found abundance of gardeners so qualified. A Caledonian, when 
he comes to the low country, soon acquires the English tongue, and if he has been taught Latin, thus 
knows three languages. The servants at the inns on some parts of the Continent, frequented by different 
nations, often acquire a moderate knowledge of three or four languages. A late custom-house officer on the 
island of Cronstadt spoke and wrote ten languages ; and the bar-maid, at the hotel (de Londres) at which 
we lodged in Moskwa, in 1814, could make herself intelligible in Swedish, Russian, Pohsh, German, French, 
Italian, and English. 

7722. The certain way of obtaining anything is to be i?npressed with the necessity of possessing it ; either to 
avoid the evil. of being without it; to satisfy the desires of others as to ourselves; or, our own desires. 
There is scarcely anything that a rational man can desire that he may not obtain, by maintaining on his 
mind a powerful impression of the necessity of obtaining it ; pursuing the means of attainment with un- 
ceasmg perseverance, and keeping alive that enthusiasm and ardor which always accompany powerful de- 
sires. Even the most extravagant desires, when sufficiently powerful, are often gratified. To attain emi. 
nence, as a literary character, natural or experimental philosopher, mathematician, divine, lawj'er, or 
physician, it is only necessary to have a powerful desire for that kind of eminence, and to apply 
unceasingly to the subject, and to that alone. All may not acquire, by the same degree of labor, the 
same degree of eminence ; but any man by labor may attain a knowledge of all that is already known 
on any subject, and that degree of knowledge is respectable ; what many never attain to, and what few 
go beyond. 

7723. The grarid draivback to every kind of improvement is the vulgar and degrading 
idea that certain things are beyond our reach ; whereas, everything is attainable by the 
employment of means ; and nothing, not even the knowledge of a common laborer, with- 
out it. There are many things which it is not desirable to wish for, and which are only 
desired by men of extraordinary minds ; but let no man fancy anything is impossible to 
him, for this is the bane of all improvement. Let no young gardener, therefore, who 
reads this, even if he can but barely read, imagine that he may not become eminent in 
any of the piu-suits of life or departments of knowledge, much less in that of his profes - 
sion : let him never lose sight of this principle, — that to desire and apply is to attain, and 
that the attainment will be in proportion to the application. 



1136 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Tart IV. 



Sect. II. Of the Professional Education of Gardeners. 

7724. In order that a ])rofdssio?ial man should excel as such, every other acquirement 
must be kept subservient to that of his profession. No branch of knowledge should be 
pursued to any extent, that either of itself, or by the habits of thinking to which it gives 
rise, tends to divert the mind from the main object of pursuit. Something, it is true, is 
due to relaxation in every species of acquirement ; but judicious relaxation only serves to 
■whet the appetite for tlie vigorous pursuit of the main object. By the professional edu- 
cation of gardeners, we mean that direction of their faculties by which they will best ac- 
quire the science and manual operations of gardening : and we shall suppose tlie young 
man to be instructed, to have no other scholastic education than some knowledge of 
arithmetic, and the first problems of geometry and land-surveying. Tlie sort of garden 
which ought to be the scene of the days of apprenticeship should, if it can be so foreseen 
and arranged, be that which the learner is ultimately intended to possess or manage. As 
tlie great majority of young men who leai n this art, are intended for serving-gardeners to 
private families ; a private garden, where every department is respectably conducted, is 
the best to begin with. Here, or in any other garden in which he may be placed, he will 
have to learn the names of things, their uses in gardening, how to use them in the 
best manner singly, and hovv to combine their use in performing the different operations 
of gardening, 

7725. The grand foundation for every hind of acquirement, is the cultivation of the facul- 
ties of attention and memory. Unless we pay attention to what is addressed to us, whether 
hy the eye or the ear, it is impossible we can remember, because the sight or sound has 
made no impression on tlie mem.ory, and without memorj', there can be no knowledge. 

7726. jSIany pass tlu ough UJe ivithout seeing or hearing anything but ivhat imynediately concerns their avo. 
cations. It is a common thing for a person to walk out and return without being able to describe, or even 
mention, any one thing he has seen ; or to read a newspaper without being able to tell what he has read, 
larther than to give some vague idea of the subject. All this is the result of neglecting to rouse and exert 
the facult}' of attention ; or of limiting our attention to one single object or class of objects. One of the 
lirst things, therefore, that a young man should do, is to cultivate the faculty of attention, which he may 
do every hour of the day, by first looking at an object, and then shutting his eyes and trying whether he 
recollects its magnitude, form, color, )kc. ; whether he would know it when he saw it again, and by what 
mark or marks he would know it or describe it. When he goes from one part of the garden to another, or 
is on a walk or journey, let him pay that degree of attention to everything he sees and hears, which will 
enable him to give some account of them when returned from his walk or journey ; and let him try next 
day, or some days afterwards, if he can recollect what he had seen then, or at any particular time and 
place. 

77'^7. The attention must be exercised systematically, in order not only to impress the memory, and enable 
the observer or hearer to recollect cl>jects, but to describe them. A thing or a discourse must be attended 
to, not only as a whole, but as a composition of parts; and these parts must be considered not only as to 
their qualities of dimension, color, consistency, &c., but as to their relative situation and position. 

7728. To be able to give an account of a toivh or village, for example, the first thing is to get a general idea 
of the outline of its ground-plan, which may be done by looking from a church-tower or adjoining hill ; 
next, its relative situation to surrounding objects ; as what hills, or woods, or waters join it, and in what 
quarters ; next, the direction of the leading street or streets must be noticed ; then the intersecting or se- 
condary streets ; the principal public buildings ; the principal private ones ; where the lowest houses and 
narrowest streets are situated ; and what is th"e character of the greater number of houses composing the 
whole assemblage. 

7729. To be able to recal to mind or to describe the figure of any person before us for the first time, it is 
necessary to attend to height, either absolute, by estimation in feet and inches ; or comparatively with our - 
own, or that of anv other person or object present at the time ; to figure or shape generally, as whether 
tending to excellence or defect ; then to hands and feet, gait, manner, &c. ; and, above all, to the form cr 
outline of the countenance, the coDiplexion, and other details of the face. ^One untutored person looking 
at another with a view to recollect or describe him, would only stare ; but an attentive and systematic ob- 
server would survev both the party generally and in detail, and in such an order as would readily occur to 
the mind on reflection. He would not, for example, after estimating the height, proceed next to the color 
of the eyebrows, but would take the breadth and shape, as more congenial to the accustomed train of ideas. 
The young gardener will apply these hints to recollection of parks, pleasure-grounds, walled gardens, hot- 
houses, and also to the study and recollection of individual plants. 

7730. To be able to recollect and relate written or oral discourses, the same general principles will apply ; 
the first thing is to attend to the object in view, and next to the order or form in which the whole i.s pro- 
posed to be treated of or delivered ; lastly, to the manner in which the details are filled up. 

7731. The study of natural history a?id draiving are well adapted for improving the faculties of attention 
and memory. The former bv its systematic arrangement, and the precision of its details, tends to habits of 
order, accuracy, and distinctness, and to the ready discrimination and recollection of single or na- 
tural objects : the latter contributes to the same end, and also to the recollection of objects in groups or 
combinations. Hence, the importance of a gardener's attending to botany, zoology, and drawing, even 
with a view to general improvement, independently of their special utility in his profession. 

7732. The recollection of names and numbers is a more mechanical process than the re- 
collection of objects. Names are either descriptive, that is, when they consist of a word, 
or are composed of words which describe something of the object to which they are ap- 
plied, as Longtown or Hillhouse ; or they are arbitrary', meaning nothing, or nothing 
now known or definable, as William, Thomas, &c. The first are of easy recollection, 
because, even though the object may never have been seen, its image may be presented to ' 
the imagination by the name, as a town of great length, and a house on a hill top ; tho 
second are onlv to be recollected by seeing the objects to which they are applied, and 
then associating in the mind the name with tlie thing ; or by seeing the description or 
1 ortraiture of the objects, and associating the name with these ; or by finding a resem- 



Book IT. 



EDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



1137 



hlance between the new name ai^d a known name, as William, wild yam ; Thomas, to 
mass, &c. 

' 7733. The principal names whick a gardener has to recollect are those of plants ; to assist him in this know- 
Sedge, the etymologies of all the generic names, and of the specific names, which are substantives, is of great 
advantage ; the ordinary specific names being adjectives, are easily understood and recollected. The generic 
names of plants and animals are of three kinds ; those composed of words indicating something of the na- 
ture, or appearance, or uses, of the plant, as Gypsophylla, Helianthus, Linum, &c. ; those composed of 
the name of some eminent individual, as Hellenia, Gordonia, or after some town, as Colchicum ; and those 
composed of native or local names, as EUettari, Acacia : the first are of easy recollection, because the na- 
tural soil, the sight of the flower, or the recollection of its image or its uses, will recal to mind the name ; 
the second may be recollected by considering who the name-father was, and by associating his figure and 
some action of his life, real or imaginary, with a specimen of the plant. Thus Gordon was a nurseryman 
at Mile-end, a short, lame, sailor-looking man, who dressed in blue trowsers, chewed tobacco, and was 
without offspring; it is easy to imagine his wife reproaching him with the last circumstance, while he 
points to Gordonia Lasianthus. All those names, whether of science, or those which occur in the common 
intercourse of life, as of persons and places, are to be recollected on the same principle; that is, either by 
the name itself calling up an image, by its resemblance to some other name already known, or by forming 
an association between it and some known or familiar visible object ; and the more ludicrous the associ- 
ation, the better will it be recollected. In forming these associations, it is essential that the object em- 
ployed to aid the memory be one capable of being seen ; to associate any particular object with a sound, 
smell, touch, or taste, would give little aid to the memory ; and to associate it with abstract nouns or 
ideas, none at alL " If I am told that the Dutch merchant Schimmelphenninck was a very wealthy or re- 
ligious man, that will not assist me in recollecting his long name ; but if I say to myself there is some re- 
semblance between Schimmelphenninck and skim-milk.pen-and-iyik, the resemblance may enable me to do 
so ; or if I have recourse to a Dutch dictionary, and discover that schimmel is grey, and phenninck a penny, 
I have greypenny, as a s)monym, which, with the operations the mind has undergone in getting at it, will 
most probably impress the original name on the memory. If a Highlander tells me his name is Macpher- 
son, T immediately interpret it mac-pearson — mac parson, — son of a parson — son of a Catholic priest and 
a Highland maid." 

7734. Figures maybe recollected by gardeners with readiness and certainty. For all num- 
bers not exceeding 24 they have only to associate the figure with the name of the corre- 
sponding Linnaean class, or with one of the plants of it. Thus, if a lad in a nursery is 
sent to the fruit-tree ground for plants of number 19 and 21 of pears, he has only to think 
of Syngenesia and Moncecia. For all numbers exceeding 24, and under 250, he may make 
use of the terms of the first ten orders, in addition to the 24 classes; and thus. No. 241 
will be Cryptogamia monogynia, 249 Cryptog. enneagynia, 208 Gynandria octogynia, 
and so on. To any one but a gardener or botanist, this mode of recollecting numbers 
has no advantages over any ordinary system of artificial memory ; but as there can be no 
gardener to whom these classes and orders are not perfectly familiar during the whole 
period of his life, or at least of his practice as a gardener, to him it is superior to all the 
artificial systems. It is easy to add to the certainty of remembrance by associating the 
figure of any known plant or plants belonging to the class or order ; thus, for 24 he may- 
think of Osmunda regalis, for 245 Osmunda regalis and Daucus carota, or a fern-frond 
and a carrot-leaf, for 16,213 he may think of a nosegay composed of a Canna glauca. 
Narcissus triandrus, Olea fragrans, and Rosa provincialis, or he may fancy himself plant- 
ing these plants in a row or in a pot. If a gardener rides through twenty turnpike-gates 
in a day, he may recollect the pass-number of them all. He has only, in passing through 
them, to place a pot of the indicating plants on each of their gate-posts. 

7735. JSfumbers may also be recollected by gardeners by their going through the oper- 
ation in imagination, of cutting them on a number-stick, either by the common (Jig. 160.), ' 
or by Seton's method. (Jig. 161.) Names may be recollected in like manner, by their 
going through the operation mentally, of writing or printing them, or writing them in 
some particular hand, or imagining how some particular friend, with whose handwriting 
they are acquainted, would write them. They may be supposed to be written on any scrap 
of paper, or against the day of the month in a common pocket-book, or what is prefer- 
able, after the last entry made in the pocket memorandum-book (7741.), to be afterwards 
described. 

7736. The memory, both as to Jigures and words, may also be materially assisted by study- 
ing the postures of the human figure, corresponding to the first ten Italic numerals, and 
the letters of the Roman alphabet. Plates of these are to be had in the juvenile libraries. 
Some useful hints on the subject of memory will be found in Feinagle's work on the sub- 
ject, and especially in a tract by Jackson, in which Feinagle's system is greatly improved ; 
but the machinery of both systems, though they enable a student to recollect an astonish- 
ing deal in a short time, yet, like other complicated machinery, it soon goes out of order 
when not in constant use. It is, therefore, unfit for practical men. 

7737. The uses of things and their history, is the next thing which a gardener has to acquire. The uses 
of the implements, tools, utensils, and machines of gardening, he will acquire by manually exercising them 
in performing the labors and operations of gardening under the direction of his master. He should not only 
know how to use them, but how to use them in the best manner ; and also the history of each implement 
or machine, derivation of its name, why one form is preferable to another ; in short, he should know the 
rationale of the formation and operation of all of them. The essential part of this he may acquire by reading 
Part II. of this work, and the rest from the study of the principles of mechanics, and by conversing with 
intelligent carpenters, millwrights, and engineers. 

7738. The uses of the commoner garden plants he will find in the third part of this work. Books I., II., and 
III., something more he will find in Book IV., and for the rest he must have recourse to books on cook. 
«ry, medicine, chemistry, and farming, which go more into detail. . Much information on all the arts con.. 

4 D 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING, 



Part IV. 



nected with the vegetable world will be found in our Encyclopesdia of Plants, and in the Encyclopcsdia of 
Agriculture. 

7739. The study of systematic and physiological botany must go hand in hand with prac- 
tical acquirements ; for which, and also for forming an herbarium, he will find general 
information in Part II. Book I., and for more minute details, he may consult the authors 
there referred to. Some idea of vegetable chemistry and geology he will obtain from 
Books I., II., and IV. of Part II. ; and also of the different insects and vermin which 
are enemies to gardens and garden-productions. The study of landscape-gardening, as 
being the highest part of the profession, should not be attempted till the apprentice has 
made himself master of the three departments which precede it. 

7740. A knowledge of the weather and the seasoyis, so as, in some degree, to be able to 
predict them from signs, is an important part of a gardener's acquirements. Our observ- 
ations in Part II. Book II. will aid him in this study, and he should also keep a weather- 
book, or naturalist's journal, such as we have already suggested. (2349.) 

7741. A pocket memorandion-book, for taking notes of everj-thing interesting, whether professional or 
general, is a useful help to the young gardener. He should begin this sort of memorandum-book with his 
leaving school ; and he will probably find it useful to continue it all his life after. Its size should be small 
octavo, to suit the pocket ; it requires no ruling, but a line across the page half an inch from the top. In 
writing on one page, the opposite one should always be left blank for corrections and additions, for sketches, 
or for taking down temporary memorandums in pencil. The following may be considered as a specimen, 
in which it is to be particularly observed, that a margin is left on the written page, on which margin each 
article is begun with a word written or printed in large letters. These words, thus conspicuously placed, 
serve as an index to each article, and in future reference will be found of material use, as they can be 
glanced over like the words in a dictionan,-. Any thing to be inserted, should always be done instantly, or 
never later than the same day. If it is done out of doors, it may be written on the blank page in pencil, 
and afterwards copied on the" opposite page in ink. 



Pocket 3]pnorandum-Book of J. Gott, Apprentice, at Aubrey Hall.— January 2~lh and 2S/A, 1S21 


27th. 

PEAS. — Last night's frost and this dav's sun have killed 
the peas in the south border : but those sown in the 
north side of the wattled hurdles escaped, being 
shaded from the sun. 

LIZARD- — Caught a new species, and took it to Twigg. 
It had no tail, wliich convinced him it must be a 
distinct species. 

2Sth. 

ROSES Idea of a conic iron tree, covered with any of 

the climbing roses, all over inoculated with monthly 
roses. 

PARSNEPS. — Gurkin O'Doolittle caught distilling par- 
snep whiskev m the tan-shed : discharged without a 
character. iTis still two watering pots placed top 
to top, and closed with a wet cloth ; the top kept 
cool by pouring water on it. 

NEW IDEAS Torriel Joss, the parson, called ; says 

thete are two ways of getting new ideas ; by shuf- 
fling what ideas we have together, Uke a pack of 
cards, (which is to be done by a free glass of wine, 
opium, or tobacco,) when new combinations may 
occur to the mind acc-dentally : or by a studied 
selection of ideas suitable to the subject on which it 
is desired to invent, which can only be done by 
scientific persons, as Sir H. Davy in liis invention of 
the safety-lamp. 


These were covered with drill hand-glasses, and the crop 
is now, June 2d, fit to gather. 

A". B. — It turned out to be only the common lizard 
(Laceria vulgaris. Linn.) which had lost its tail bjsome 
accident, and the wound liad healed over. 

5/fm. — Cobbler's name ^\'hite, lives two doors from the 
Cat and Fiddle. 



7742. Apprentices are often i-equired to keep a ivritten journal of work done in tlie garden for tlieir own 
use, and this maybe advisable in cases where no regular books are kept by the master; but where such 
books and tables are kept as we have recommended (2338. to 2-350. \ the apprentice performing his part in 
making entries in, and daily seeing them, need keep no other books for his own improvement than a na- 
turalist's kalendar (2349.) and the journal or memorandum-book just described. In the last he can enter 
such facts belonging to gardening as are commonly entered in gardeners' journals. 

7743. Progress ivhen a journeyinan. An apprentice, besides studying his art in the 
garden of his master, should, as often as may be, visit those of his neighbors, and obsen e 
what is going on there. His apprenticeship com.pleted, he should move to a different part 
of the country, pei-fonning the journey leisurely on foot ; botanising and collecting insects 
and minerals, and visiting eveiy distinguished gai-den on his way. "When he settles, i1 
should be in a different kind of gai-den to that in which he was before, and there he should 
continue a year, and then remove and travel to another part of the country, and settle there 
a year, and so on as already suggested (7380.), till he attains his twenty-fifth year, when 
he may undertake the situation of master. During the whole period in which he is jour- 
neyman, he should be steadily and unceasingly employed in improving himself, first in his 
own art, and the branches of knowledge, as botany, natural history, chemistry, weather, 
&c. on which it more immediately depends ; and next, if his ambition permits, Qn general 
subjects of literature, arts, and sciences. 

Sect. III. Of the Intellectual Education which a Gardener may give Minsdf independently 
of acquiring his Profession. 
"7744. Self-education may be carried to a greater extent by a gardener than by almost 
any other artisan No gardener, in our opinion, ought to be employed as a master 
under the age of twenty-five years. Suppose him, therefore, to be put an apprentice at 



Book I) 



EDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



1139 



fifteen, he has ten years in which to acquire his profession, and generally to improve him- 
self. In that period he may not only acquire his profession, but, according to the extent 
of his ambition and application, a considerable degree of knowledge on almost every 
subject. Everything, as we have more than once observed, depends on his ambition ; 
without this he will not even acquire his profession, and at all events will find no leisure 
time for any other kind of improvement. When we consider, however, that the labor of 
a gardener is not severe, and that it is only during the hours jof daylight, the time he has 
for self-improvement is very considerable. It may surprise some when we state, that this 
time equals (taking the whole year), that employed in study by professional students at 
colleges. A gardener, in the shortest day, begins work at eight o'clock and leaves off at 
four o'clock ; which, allowing two hours for breakfast and dinner, gives six hours of la- 
bor ; in the longest day he works only ten hours, and therefore it will not be far from the 
truth to consider eight hours per day as the average duration of his labor throughout the 
year. Dividing the twenty-four hours which compose the day in three equal parts, we 
have eight hours for rest, dressing, and undressing ; eight hours for labor, and acquiring 
the practice of gardening ; and eight hours for refreshment and study. On comparing 
this time for study with that which is usually devoted to it by young men at college ; not 
the generality of young men, but those even who attain to eminence ; we will find the dif- 
ference very inconsiderable. The student requires the same time for rest, and at least two 
hours more for dressing and undressing (say ten hours) ; for breakfast he requires an 
hour ; dinner and tea, at least three hours ; and for exercise (which if he neglects he will 
soon be unable to study at all), at least two hours ; in all, for exercise and refreshment, 
six hours ; which added to ten of rest and dressing, gives eighteen hours, leaving exactly 
the same number of hours for study which every gardener has, taking the average of the 
year. It is true the eight hours of the gardener ai'e subject to the time employed in eat- 
ing ; but that may well be considered as compensated by the knowledge of botany he ac- 
quires in the garden during his hours of labor. Add also, that the gardener may (unless 
liis health forbid) draw still more time than we have mentioned from the hours of sleep ; 
we think it will not be denied, that, taking all circumstances into consideration, he has as 
much time as studious men, taking the average of the year, usually devote to study. 

7745. The branches of education best deserving d gardener's attention are next to be considered. As one 
branch of knowledge is as much as any person ever does or can excel in, and as that branch, in the case of 
every professional man, ought to be his profession, it seems to us that a gardener ought not to attempt to 
excel in any one branch of science besides that of gardening; but rather to make himself acquainted, to 
the degree that circumstances may permit, with the whole cycle of human knowledge. If he attempts any 
thing else, it is impossible, isolated as he must be, in comparison Vv^ith others who study the same subject 
among abundance of books and fellow-laborers, that he can attain to the highest degree of eminence. It 
is impossible, for example, that he can arrive at great perfection, even in the study of botany, from not 
having an opportunity of consulting the herbariums and books which are only to be found in the metro- 
polis. He may, however, and ought to, attain a respectable degree of knowledge, not only in botany, but 
also in the other branches of natural history : such for example as will enable him to refer any natural pro- 
duction to its place in the Linnasan system, and describe scientifically any new production. But that he 
should be expert at chemical analysis, dissection of animals, solving problems in any of the higher branches 
of mathematics, or excel in painting, music, or poetry, is what we by no means propose, or think practi- 
cable ; though v/e are convinced he may know something of all those subjects, and of all others on which 
there are published books. 

774G. The source from which he is to derive his general knowledge, it may easily be conceived, is chiefly 
from books ; with such aid as opportunity offers from professional men, public lectures, men of talents 
and learning wherever he has an opportunity of conversing with (hem ; artists, artisans, and manu- 
facturers of every description ; and also manufactories, engines, mines, dock-yards, and all other works 
displaying human skill. But the grand source is books, and the question is how a journeyman gardener, 
whoso wages are often less than those of a common laborer, is to procure them ? Our answer is, borrow 
them; and make it a fixed rule to purchase no books excepting grammars, dictionaries, and other ele- 
mentary works ; and of these used or cheap copies. The head gardener will always be able and willing to 
lend his apprentices and journeymen a certain number of books ; and the patron under whom they serve, 
will generally be found equally liberal. 

7747. The sorts of books desirable to borrow, independently of those connected with the professional 
acquirements, such as treatises on Chemistry, Zoology, Mineralogy, &c. will depend on the degree of 
advancement of the student. But that which we are of opinion cannot be dispensed with, is a good en- 
cyclopcenia. One systematically instead of alphabetically arranged would be the best ; but as most 
country libraries are now stocked with the Encyclopedia Brit, or Rees's Cyclopcedia, these must be taken 
till a well executed one on tlie plan of the Encyclopaedia MetropoUtana, now publishing (but badly exe- 
cuted), finds its v/ay into general use. 

7748. The studies to be cotmnenced with is next to be determined. It is necessary to premise here, that 
the mind, before it can derive much improvement from reading, must undergo a certain degree of culture. 
To improve by reading it is not sufficient to be able to read ; we must be able to analyse language and dis- 
course ; to recognise the real or apparent object of the writer ; and to trace the order of his ideas from the 
commencement to the conclusion. The foundation of this is the exercise of the faculty of attention, 
ali-eady dwelt on ; and essential aids to it is the study of grammar, and of languages. Another excellent 
help is the study of systematic natural history; a circumstance highly in favor of gardeners who are de- 
sirous of improving themselves in general literature; since, if they know their profession at all, they must 
have a tolerable knowledge of systematic botany, which gives the mind an orderly and systematic mode 
of thinking. It is not uncommon,- for example, to hear gardeners who have no pretensions to general 
literature, applying the terms, genera, species, subspecies, and varieties, to manners of thinking, or acting, 
to religion, weather, forms of governments, &c. For want of this preparation of the mind, there are many 
persons who read a great deal, and derive very little benefit from it. Their minds are not competent or 
not habituated to view the subject which they read as a whole, and to take a view of its general scope and 
tendency. All they see of it is the parts as tliey pass before their eyes, their relation and connection 
they think notliing oj, and the whole passes as it were through the mind, instead of remaining on if. 
Beading to such men, in comparison with those whose minds have been prepai'ed by elementary studies, 

4 D 2 



1149 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



may be said to resemble pouring water on gr(?und with a hardened surface, in comparison to pouring it cm 
soil which has been loosened with the spade. 

7749. English grammar and a foreign language are suitable studies to commence with. Another excel- 
lent aid to forming the mind to precision and accuracy is the knowledge of quantities; for which reason 
we would join to the study of languages, those of arithmetic and geometn'. These, with a portion of 
genera] reading, some species of personal accomplishments, and the requisite professional studies, are all 
that we would have an apprentice commence with, and this only in a certain order to be afterwards 
described. 

7750. Witit respect to personal accotnplishjiients, we would Iiave dancing, fencing, boxing, wrestling, 
the infantry manual exercise, whist, backgammon, chess, the flute, and A-iolin, attended to as far as op- 
portunity offered ; considering dancing, boxing, and the violin as the most essential objects. In most 
country-places these and all the other acquirements may be learned from retired valets, old soldiers, or 
from some of the servants in a great family, at an easy rate. Swimming and horsemanship should not be 
neglecte.l if opportunity offers. The acquirement of some knowledge of some or all of these accomplish- 
ments will occupy very little time ; once attained, they are resources for self-defence, for social entertain- 
ment, or of relief from ennui when alone. Dancing and the manual exercises are particularly useful as 
improving the gait, and habituating to good postures both in standing and sitting. To a man who has no 
other resources for advancement in life than such as are personal, everj- exterior acquirement is of the 
utmost importance. — These remarks will to many appear sufriciently extravagant ; but we would ask, 
whether there is any young man who does not, to a certain extent, possess most of these acquirements as 
it were accidentally \Vhy then may he not improve them by art, if opportunity offers; or, if they are of 
use, \ihy should he not seek occasion both to improve and extend his knowledge in this department. 

7751. In study, as in everything else, tnuch depends on t/ie economy of time j the march of time is re- 
gular and constant, and as there is only a certain portion of the twenh-.four hours which a gardener can 
devote to study, everything depends on his employing every moment of that portion. To be convinced of 
what is lost by delay,' let two persons commence walking along a road in company ; then let one of them 
stand still for half a'minute while the other walks on ; at the end of the half minute the distance at which 
the former will find himself from the latter will be found astonishing. Again, supposing them walking 
together, and that one, instead of walking along the road with the other, deviates and diverges from it — 
the distance at the end of half a minute, at wiiich the deviator is found from the one who walked 
straight on, will be still more astonishing, and is greatly more ruinous, because not only is the time 
required to return to the direct road equal to that taken to diverge from it, but when retunied, the devi- 
ator will be a whole minute's walking behind the other. These two simple experiments it would be well 
for two young gardeners to try, in order that the results may make a strong impression on their minds ; 
and let them ever a'terwards think of them when they feel inclined to be lazy or dilatory, or to depart 
from the line of duty. 

7752. To aid in tl'ic economy of titne, it is desirable to form some plan of study ; where there is no re- 
gular plan much time is lost in hesitating what to begin with ; and both lost and misapplied by fatiguing 
the mind wilh too long intense application to one thing ; by which means a proportional relaxation is re- 
quired, and the memory, being irregularly charged, will be less faithful. By a well ordered pre-disposition 
of studies, the time which would be lost in considering wliat would be done next is gained, and the one 
study becomes a relaxation as it were from tlie other. We shall here suggest a general plan for a young 
gardener's em])loymcnt of time during the few years he lias to pass previously to becoming master, and 
leave him to fill up the details in his own way. We by no means offer this plan as the best; others may 
be equally good ; but the grand point is to fix on some plan, and to adhere to it strictly. 

7753. Plan of study for languages. We shall suppose the ?.pprcntice, and indeed every gardener under 
thirty, to rise at five o'clock throughout the year ; a necessary habit in the gardener, both for the hot- 
house fires and for study. He will thus have nearly an hour in summer, and from one to three hours in 
winter before he goes to work. Ihese we would devote to languages throughout the ten years; on no 
account would we study anything else at that time, and on no account would we study any language 
during the rest of the" day'. Latin and Englisii grammar may be taken on alternate mornings" till the 
latter is acquired ; and afterwards Latin may be taken two mornings, and Greek the third morning. In 
two or three years the fourth day may be devoted to French ; and in the seventh year, or earlier, accord- 
ing to circumstances, Latin, Greek, Frencli, German, Dutch, and Italian may be taken in succession, 
one morning to each. The object being such a knowledge of English as to be able to write it correctly; 
of Latin and French to translate them with ease ; and of the other languages to be able to make out their 
meaning by the occasional help of a dictionary. There is nothing to hinder any person of even inferior 
organisation, to attain this knowledge in ten years, at the average rate of one and half hour's study even,- 
morning. The great thing is not to omit a single morning, unless from illness ; for even in the case of 
absence from home, or during a journey, a grammar or any polyglot book, such as a Testament or a 
Commenius, may be carried in the pocket. 

775-1. Rigid pursuit of the object in view. If at any time, through business or over-sleeping, but a few 
minutes can be got in the morning, still these few ought to be applied in the usual channel; even half a 
minute is worth something, for in that time a noun may be looked over, or a rule read and reflected on 
during the walk to the place of working. If no time is left, even while dressing, a dictionary mav be 
opened and a word looked at, and recollected, and even a word per day gained is worth something. 

7755. Frogi-ess is gradual. It is impossible to gain any end either in self-improvement or any 
thing else at once : all art is gained by labor, and nothing is lasting but that which advances by degrees. 
The independence which even a very moderate knowledge of languages confers on the possessor', whether 
in general reading, or in reading foreign books, is invaluable, and amply compensates the trouble requisite 
to acquire them. To any person going abroad for profit or improvement, they are essential. It is a 
common thing to suppose, that a certain long number of years are requisite to acquire Latin, wliich may 
be the case with children who learn it by compulsion, and is more or less the case as to everything they 
are taught; but with a grown-up and voluntary learner the case is widely different. We have known 
men in this country acquire one or two languages, after having attained their fortieth year; and the 
thing is quite common among migrating tradesmen on the Continent. 

7756. Books on gramjuar. In purchasing the grammars, that of Cobbett or Lindley Murray mav be 
selected for the English ; and for the other languages, any that can be got cheapest ; the last rernark'will 
apply also to the dictionaries. To impress rules and words on the memory, read them ak.ud, sing, or 
chant them, or write them down. Books in most languages may bo had at book-stalls for a trifle; or by 
applying to a subscriber to the Bible Society, he will procure a New Testament in any living language, 
and also in Latin, Greek, and Hebrew, for two shillings or half a crown. Used copies of the Janun 
LinguaruDi of Commenius, containing Greek, Latin, French, (ic. are to be had even ciieaper. 

7757. Plan oj study for general subjects. The spare time after breakfast and dinner we would devote to 
botany for tlie first three years, and the seven years afterwards to botany and other branches of natural 
Jiistory, gardening, and farming books. Thus the early part of the day is disposed of for the whole ten 
years : the next thing is to arrange for the evening. For this the arrangements must "vary according to 
circumstances, as it does not all depend on the will of the student ; thus lectures can only be attended, 
when and where given ; and those who may have undertaken to give instructions in fencing or fiddling, 
fcust be received at such evening hours as suits their convenience, &c. We would, however, never break 
in on the day-studies with these acquirements ; and as far as possible devote two hours at some period of 
every working-day evening, during the first three years, as follows : of the first evening to drawing plans 
ana architectural subjects; the second to arithmetic, mensuration, and land-surveying; the third, to 



Book II, 



EDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



J 141 



drawing landscape and figures ; the fourth, to 'Euchd's Ele?7ients ; the fifth, to drawing plants, flowers, 
insects, and minerals ; and the sixth to mechanics and experimental philosophy. The remainder of each 
evening to be disposed of in writing essays and letters, both with a view tc impi-ovement in the style, and 
in penmanship; to miscellaneous reading, if possible, from an encyclopasdia, assigning a due proportion 
to each kind of study or acquirements. 

7758. A holidai/, when it occurs, we should recommend to be commenced with a language, as usual, and 
to be included in the general rotation for that branch ; but the remaining part of the day we would dispose 
of in portions of one, two, or three hours, in bringing forward those evening studies which we had 
been least successful in during the week, or found ourselves most in want of for actual use. Holidays 
are idso particularly adapted for drawing, which, though it ought not to be neglected witii artificial light, 
yet goes on best with that of the sun. Nothing can be more mechanical than copying drawings, or drav,-. 
ing from nature, and there is nothing (but want of will) that can hinder every gardener from being a 
good draughtsman in all the three departments. To paint in oil, or make highly finished drawings, valued 
as such, is quite a different thing, and not to be attempted but by such iis have much leisure, or adiipt 
that pursuit as a profession. 

7759. The books necessary fo7- general studies are, any authors on arithmetic, mensuration, and land- 
surveying, who are pretty full ; any used copy of Euclid, and of Young's Lectures on Natural Philoso- 
phy ; or study the articles on the last subject in a good encyclopasdia. There is no very good drawing- 
book for self-instructors, but some one may be borrowed, and those parts of any encyclopaidia consulted 
which treat on the subject. For the miscellaneous reading, all the books required ai-e to be borrowed, 
and chiefly, if possible, an encyclopEcdia, which ought to be read through volume by volume, and notes 
taken in the pocket memorandum-book (7741.) of such parts as are considered best worth remembering. 

7760. ConclKsion. A great deal more miglit be said on this subject, did our limits permit ; suffice it to add, 
that if a student only wills and exerts himself, everything will be found possible ; difficulties may occur, and 
may retard for a time, but they will finally be overcome. The great thing is to be convinced of the impor- 
tance of incessant application, by which any man may attain to eminence, and without which eminence 
was never yet attained. The profession of a gardener is, more than any other, favorable for mental ac- 
quirements ; his labor is easy ; his patron has a library : he has frequent o])portunities in improving his 
language and manner, by being asked questions by his patron and his family, and other sujjeriors who 
are educated and polished. He may also render himself useful to clergymen, medical men, and school- 
masters, by collecting and preparing objects of natural history for them, for which in return he will re- 
ceive useful hints, and the loan of books. A great object is, to accomplish all this, and yet have some 
spare money for travel and accidents, which is to be done by great simplicity (avoiding what is meagre) 
in food and dress ; by neglecting the use of such luxuries as tea, sugar, spirits, and such other articles as 
are much taxed ; by purchasing used clothes, and never new ones before having arrived at the degree o€ 
head gardener, for the best dress ; and by having, for daily use, dresses of coarse grey stuff, not enhanced 
in price by much ornamental manipulation, or by taxes. — Though, in making these remarks, we have 
had in view chiefly young raen, yet there is no period of life at which improvement may not be com- 
menced, and attempted with a degr'ee of success that will amply repay. At any period under thirty, every- 
thing we have proposed may be attained : a great deal, even at forty, and enough to meliorate and hu- 
manise life, beginning even at the latest period. Let the gardener never forget that though something 
will depend on his organisation, yet, that much the greater part depends on education — on his desire of 
raising himself, and on incessant application. To desire anything ardently, is, in truth, to be inspired 
with the power of attainment. 

Sect. IV. Moral, Religious, and Physical Education of Gardeners. 

7761. The subject of morals (morales, Lat. manners) regards the conduct of man 
toM'ards others ; that of religion [religio, I^at. devotion, devoted to), his opinions as to 
God or the nature of things ; and that of physical education {physica, Lat. the know- 
ledge of nature) instructs him in the art of preserving health. 

7762. Morality and religion are usually treated as depending on each other; the latter 
is considered as the principal foundation of the former., and man is taught to be sober 
and honest, not only to avoid the punishment awarded by the laws of his country, but 
to avoid still greater punishment in futurity. But morality may and does exist apart 
from religion ; for truth and justice, honesty and humanity, are essential to. the existence 
of regular society. Debauchery of every kind is attended with the loss of reputation, 
and more or less of bodily health ; those who despise, and affect to treat with contempt 
or ridicule, the opinions of the respectable part of society, are themselves despised and 
excluded from society in return. In the intercourse of society, a man always receives 
according as lie gives ; and as he treats others so is he treated himself. If he wishes to 
be dealt with honestly, he must be honest; and if he wishes to be respected by respectable 
men, he must respect them, and their conduct and principles. In short, independently 
of religious motives, it is necessary to be moral, in order not to be disreputable ; and 
Avcrth while to be highly so, in order to ensure confidence and respect. Whatever theory 
therefore the young gardener may adopt, there is only one practice wliich he will find 
to answer his expectations ; and that is, the strictest regard to truth, honesty^, sobriety, 
decency, and purity in himself ; and respect for otliers, in proportion as these virtues 
appear in their conduct and conversation. 

7763. The 7norallaw of all countries is essentiaUy the same ; because, in the rudest forms of society, it 
is found necessary to enforce justice and honesty ; but among rude nations, and even among those in a 
comparatively advanced state, the more refined laws of morality are neglected. Thus in Russia, where 
the people, from the boor to the csar, are the most religious in Europe, it is no discredit to a gentleman 
to lead a debauched life, or to pilfer trifling articles from another, or to steal from shops {Li/all's Mos- 
cow, xxxix.) ; but in a refined and luxurious state of society, sucii as that in Britain, the enjoyment of 
every individual depends not only on a strict, but a refined morality ; and men must not only be civil 
but polite. - ' 

7764. Politeness may be considered the ornament or finish of morals or manners ; and though it is 
commonly thought to belong chiefly to the higher classes, yet it will be found both attainable and useful 
in a high degree, by every class, and by none more than the gardener. Polite and amiable conduct, like 
a good figure and address, recommend themselves at sight, and make at once an impression in favor of 
the man who possesses them. " Civility," Lady M. \V. Montague observes, " is a sort of current coin 
which costs nothing and buys everything." The greatest genius and abilities will never procure a 

4 D 3 



1142 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



man advancement, without a good address. We recommend the perusal of what Lord Chesterfield 
has written on the subject, guarding against those slips of the pen where he seems to recommend im- 
purity and deception. If these suit the character of a modern ambassador, they are practices which a poor 
man cannot afford to deal in. 

7765. The foundation of all true politeness is a desii-e to please others ; though some mistake it for a dis- 
play of their owfi acquirements; and others, a cringing acquiescence to the opinions of others. The two 
last errors are to be avoided, the first as immediately, and the second in a short time, incurring contempt. 
To be polite with permanent advantage it is necessary to be sincere ; and any degree of vanity, pride, or 
arrogance, is certain of proving offensive. To please others, one of the first things requisite, is to be, 
or appear to be, pleased ourselves. A man may show his pleasure or displeasure, by his action, by his 
speech, and by his features. An easy, graceful, and yet manly action, is to be attained by the practice of 
dancing and tlie manual exercise ; a gracious and polite manner of speaking by much reading, and by 
attending to the language of ladies and gentlemen, frequenters of polished society; and the features of 
the face may be set to satisfaction, discontent, anger, or ill temper, according as either of these states of 
mind are adopted. If the muscles of his face are put in training by a gardener at the commencement of 
his apprenticeship, almost anything may be done with them, as- may be proved by the case of comedians. 
A gardener's object should be less the power of %'arying them, than of giving them a set expressive, of 
animation joined to a degree of satisfaction: this medium or central disposition he can occasionally alter 
to that of pleasure on the one hand, or disapprobation on the other, as circumstances may require. 

7766. An essential part of politeness is agreeable conversation, and taking part in the current amuse- 
ments of the time and place. The art of conversation, like all other arts, is only to be acquired by reflec- 
tion and experience. The first thing is to store the mind with ideas on every subject by reading, and es- 
pecially with anecdote, history and biography ; the next thing is to adapt our conversation, to the society 
in which we happen to be ; and the last requisite is to endeavor to discover the precise part and quan- 
tum of conversation which we ought to supply. 

7767. The art of conversation is as little understood by the great bulk of mankind as the art of chemistry : 
and the consequence is, that in ordinary society it consists in tiresome relations, as to the party or their 
affairs ; attempts to obtain victory in argument, to display knowledge or acquiremeiits ; or somethii^g 
which may give superiority over the otliers present ; or of criticisms on the absent; the source of all 
which is unrefined selfishness. Polite conversation is a totally ditrerent thing from disquisition ; or mere 
talking about any one thing, wliether relating to ourselves or others. In disquisition, the object is to ascer- 
tain truth ; in conversation, to pass the time in an interesting and agreeable manner. The object of every 
one who takes part in a polite conversation ought to be to please ; wliatever cannot be said on any subject 
entered on, without giving offence to some one present, or to truth or decency, ought to be avoided. 
By common consent, the party will pay due respect to the master of the house, as to the president of the 
assembly ; and though all will contribute their share, those rich in talent and experience will naturally 
contribute the most. 

7768. Every master of a family ought to instruct the 7nembers of it in the art of conversation, and 
to advise them more especially to avoid all subjects that lead to argument and discussion. These are of 
little service to truth or instruction ; because men are seldom convinced by arguments carried on in 
society. No man is willing to be publicly convinced of anything, and especially if he who.has the better 
side of the argument happens to be younger or of an inferior rank. Men maybe willing to be instructed, 
who would not submit to be convinced ; and some will consent to receive information, who would feel 
hurt at the idea of instruction. Elderly persons, however, and sucli as are of acknow!e:iged experience 
and acquirements, may both instruct and inform : but even these must be cautious as to the manner in 
which they correct, or contradict, or criticise; lest, as is often the case, they appear more eager to dis- 
play their own superiority, than to improve and oblige the party addressed. The love of self is liable 
at every moment to break in upon and spoil everything ; and therefore the grand object is to keep that 
feeling continually under restraint by keeping alive the idea, that the object of all conversation is to 
please. Three or four yoimg gardeners, all eager for improvement, m.ight practise conversation on this 
principle, by assembling occasionally, and either conversing as equak, or for the sake of variety and im- 
provement, assuming characters. Two, for example, may take the part of the parents of a family; one 
or two as strangers on a visit to them, and the rest as children, and so on. The party might first produce 
that sort of family wrangling and snarling, which commonly occurs at fire-sides, as the conversation to 
be avoided ; and next, a conversation as U ought to be, or as each gardener would desire to liave it in 
his own family. 

7769. IVhlst, chess, %c. For the purpose of being able to join in the amusements of society, we havo 
already recommended the study of whist, chess, &c. These are essential pcrscnal accomplishments of 
every man who would find his way in society in England, where conversation is not nearly so well under- 
stood as on the continent, and therefore less relied on for passing the time agreeably. 

7770. Elevation of manners. There are two things in conduct which the gardener ought most particu- 
larly to avoid, faniiliarity and cupidity. Wlien these qualities discover themselves either in manner or 
conversation, they are a certain mark of low birth and breeding. A low, ignorant man, if he receives 
the slightest civilities from a superior, immediately conceives the latter has a particular friendslsip for 
him; and soon endeavors to turn this friendship to advantage, by asking to borrow money to forward 
himself in business, or requesting a place under government, or a pension. If a gentleman, or indeed any 
man, notices a low familiar woman, the latter immediately concludes ho is in love with her; if she has 
daughters, he has come to marry one of them ; and at all events, he is a particular friend to be boasted 
of and relied on in time of need, who will certainly advance the family in some way or other. Such is 
the self-love and ignorance of mankind betrayed by the vulgar ; for familiarity proceeds from that sort of 
gross selfishness that puts no restraint on wishes that it does not consider grossly criminal; and indulges 
in the most absurd hopes, merely because, if realised, they would tend to their profit. 

7771. A well informed and polite 77ian not familiar with anyone, because he knows that if he were 
to lay bare everything respecting himself he would lessen respect ; and he does not show an impertinent 
curiosity after the circumstances of others, because it might hurt their feelings to expose them. Cupidity 
is out of the question with him, because he knows mankind too well, to suppose they will give him a 
valuable thing merely because he asks it ; but even if there was a chance of getting it in this way, still he 
would not ask, because he might be asked for something still more valuable in return. In this way po- 
liteness becomes highly useful as a check upon gross selfishness ; and by serving to keep up a mutual re- 
spect between man and man, it restrains the offensive passions, ameliorates the temper, and promotes 
social enjoyment. A man of sense and experience will not be very familiar with his m.ost intimate friend. 
Respect is always lessened in proportion as familiarity takes place'; and without respect there is nothing 
to hinder individuals, even the most intimately connected by ties of blood, affection, or interest, from 
proving very offensive to each other. Where a weaker and stronger party, as man and wife, parents and 
children, masters and servants, cease to act in such a way as to maintain a mutual respect, the stronger 
party is obliged to have recourse to the principle of fear, — becomes of necessity a domestic tyrant, and is 
obeyed and hated, instead of being obeyed and respected. What is it that makes a man hate his wife's 
faults more than those of any other woman ? first, he knows them better : secondly, he knows he must 
put up with them : thirdly, he knows that she knows his faults, and hates them more than she does the 
faults of any other man. All this arises from familiarity. 

7772. The want of mutual respect is the cause of many evils among the lower classes ; it is the origin 
of almost all family quarrels, and of most of those between individuals; the cause, familiaritv, ought 
therefore to be avoided, by all who would be respected ; and a salutary restraint placed on all thcir'fccling?. 



Book II. 



EDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



1143 



both of love and hatred, curiosity and communicativeness. Judicious restraint is everything as to over- 
coming bad or vulgar qualities ; a man properly under its influence may be compared to a well trained 
tree ; and as this figure is familiar to the young gardener, it may be well for him frequently to ask him- 
self, whether, supposing he were a cherry-tree, he would be reckoned one finely spread against a wall 
or an unpruned standard. 

7773. Religion is a subject which we leave eveiy gardener to arrange with his own 
conscience ; only observing, that as it concerns only the man himself, and unless joined 
to enthusiasm and proselytism, can never injure others ; every one should be left at li- 
berty to tliink in this respect as he chooses. Let no one, however, consider that differing 
from others as to religion implies a difference in morality, or a neglect of moral jorinci- 
ciples ; and let every gardener consider well what we have before said on this subject. 
(7762.) 

7774. Physical education. It may be supposed superfluous to say anything to gar- 
deners in respect to health. But the trutli is, that since the general introduction of hot- 
houses, the profession of a gardener has become in some degree different from what it 
was ; and he is now subject to heats and colds, wliich are liable to bring on inflamma- 
tory and rheumatic complaints. Being heated excessively in a hot-house, and cooled 
to a very low degree in the open air during winter, or in an ice-house (which is now in 
almost daily use in good gardens, for preserving fruits and vegetables) during summer, do 
not of themselves injure the constitution ; but the evil arises from the partial operation of 
either exti-eme by which one part of the frame is cooled or heated sooner than another. 
By this the circulation and perspiration are unnaturally accelerated or diminished in 
these parts, and of course the action of the whole system deranged. When this takes 
place, the consequences are fever, costiveness, and often St. Anthony's fire, ague, 
rheumatism, &c. If taken in time, opening the bowels and the hot-air bath of the hot- 
house, taking care eitlier to go at once from it to bed, or to the dry-stove and green- 
house, so as to cool gi-adually, will restore the system to order ; if neglected, time, open- 
ing and sudatoiy medicines, and probably the doctor, will be required. The principal 
danger is to be dreaded from the excessive heat and perspiration produced by work- 
ing in the bai'k-stove or in pits, such as during shifting, syringing, &c. To guard 
against these, tlie operator should limit Ins dress at the time to a loose flannel shirt and 
wooden shoes, and when finished, sloould wipe liiraself perfectly dry before putting on his 
ordinai-y clothing. 

7775. The foundation of all health is regularity in the time and quantiiy qf food taken, and in the com- 
mon evacuations. If these are strictly attended to, everything will go on w^ell ; if suffered to become 
irregular, every thing will go wrong. The stomach is the primum mobile, as it were, of the consti- 
tution ; the cause, when disordered, of the most afflicting diseases, and the first thing to be restored in 
order to their cure. 

7776. A strict attention to personal propriety and sober habits need hardly be mentioned, with refcr- 
ejice to young gardeners who mean to advance themselves ; to suppose, indeed, that they would indulge 
in inebriety, or in alehouse society, is so entirely out of the question, that we shall not enter on the 
subject. 

Sect. V. Of Economical Education, or the general Conduct and Eco7iomy of a Gar- 
dener s Life. 

1111 . A gardener, v,ho has attained his twenty-fifth year, and has carefully employed 
the leisure time of the preceding ten years in improving himself, will now have formed 
his judgment on most subjects ; and be able to determine a general plan for the future 
economy or management of his life. A man may be learned, or have a genius and taste 
in his profession, without having that taste or judgment as to tlie economy of life which 
leads to fitness and propriety of conduct, and vdW induce him to fix on an object to be 
acquired, and devise and pursue rational means of obtaining it. Bad taste in the common 
business of life may lead to bad plans, to a desire to acquire property too rapidly, to 
gambling, to match-making, to quackery, and, probably, even to crime and disgrace. 
The principal cause of this bad taste is, that what is called education is much too 
limited in its objects ; or that part which is coinmonly left to parents or masters is but 
very imperfectly supplied. A youth ought not only to be instructed in the different laws 
by which tlie conduct both of individuals and society is regulated, but also in the art of 
forming a plan for the management of his talents, so as they may best contribute to his 
happiness. Nodiing is more conducive to happiness, than fixing on an end to be gained, 
and then steadily pursuing its attainment. 

7778. Forming a j^lan of conduct. Though some things in every man's life, and 
often the most important things, are the result of accident ; yet here, as in eveiy other 
case where a multitude of actions are to be performed with a view to an ultimate object, 
a plan must be of importance for their arrangement. No man is born in possession of 
the art of living, any more than of the art of gardening. The one requires to be studied 
as well as the other ; and a man can no more expect pennanent satisfaction from actions 
performed at random, than he can expect a good crop from seeds sown without due re- 
gard to soil and season. The greater pai t of mankind enter on life w ithout any fixed 

4 D 4 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



object in view ; or, if they form some general notion of acquiring wealth or distinction, 
they form no plan by which it is to be accomplished ; the consequence is, that such per- 
sons, after blundering on through their best years, arrive at the end without ha%'ing gained 
anything but experience, now of no use to them. 'NMien we look round and observe the 
quantity of misery in the world ; the greater proportion is, or seems to be, the result of 
a want of plan, or of a bad plan of life. How many parents are unsuccessful in their 
struggles to maintain a large family ; the result of too early marriage, and a thoughtless 
and unmeasured procreation ! How many lind themselves arrived at old age, with no 
other resource for support but charity ; the consequence of want of foresight in expen- 
diture ! How many are suffering under poverty brought on by their own want of fru- 
gality, or positive extravagance ; or under disease from excesses and irregularities 
committed in the hey-day of life ! And how many, among those not bom to inherit pro- 
perty, who, at no period of their life, have any otlier alternative between hard labor 
and deficient food, than disease and want ! 

7779. Want of plan may not, in every case, be the cause of all this misery ; because accident enters into 
life for something, both in the unfavorable as well as the favorable side of the question ; but we have no 
hesitation in asserting, that want of plan, as a cause of misery, is as ninetj'-nine to a hundred. Any plan 
at all, even a bad plan, is better than none ; because those who set out on any plan will, in all probability, 
sooner discover its errors, if a bad one, and correct them, than those, who set out on no plan, will dis- 
cover the want of one, and form a good plan. — Plan, in short, is predestination, as conduct is fate. The 
young gardener, who is just setting out in life, may well tremble at the consequences of proceeding on the 
journey without the guide of a judicious plan. This plan he must form himself : because he alone knows 
the nature of his talents and resources ; — all that we can do is to offer a few hints. 

7780. In order to be able to for?)) a plan, it is previously necessary to determine the object to be obtained 
by it. Happiness is the object of every action of human life, and consists in the gratification of certain 
wants and desires ; some of these desiderata are peculiar to youth, and others to old age ; but many, as 
dothhig, food, rest, relaxation, entertainment, \c. begin with the earliest, and continue to the latest 
period of life. All these gratifications are procured by labor ; in savage life, by hunting, fisliing, and 
gathering fruits, till the man, no longer able for these labors, is obhged to lie down and die of want : in 
civilised society they are also obtained by labor ; but here, what is called property exists ; and man, in the 
vigor of his days, when the supphes of his labor are greater than the demands of his wants and desires, or 
when he chooses not to gratify the latter to the full extent admitted by the former, can, as it were, em- 
body a part of his labor to be made use of when he is no longer able to perform it with ease. A man, in 
this case, is said to arrive at independence ; instead of want, as in the case of the savage ; or of beggary, 
as in the case of the improvident. 

7731. Independence is the grand object which not only a gardener, but every man 
destined to live by the exercise of his labor or talents, ought to have in view. At certain 
periods of life, when the imagination is vivid, and healtli and spirits in their utmost vigor, 
some may prefer glory, high literary or professional reputation, or even present pleasure ; 
and it is a noble attribute of our nature to prefer these to mere accumulation of money : 
but a great warrior, poet, or painter, arrived at old age and want, if the latter be brought 
on by common improvidence, will not find himself surrounded by many marks of dis- 
tinction ; and, though it may possibly be some consolation to him, that the three or four 
letters composing lois name will be sometimes pronounced together after he is dead, yei 
it will not be much. 

7782. The exercise of his profession is the most rational mode in which a gardener, or 
any person properly educated to one, can pursue independence. Only extraordinary cir- 
cumstances can justify a change of profession ; in common cases it indicates a want of 
steadiness of character, or a want of success ; and the latter is commonly attributed to 
want of skill. It is better, therefore, to pursue unremittingly the profession to which we 
have been educated, even though we should not be very successful in it, than to risk an 
infringement on character by adopting another. The practice of gardening, as we have 
already seen (7S77.), is carried on by tlu-ee different classes, serving, tradesmen, and 
artist gardeners. The greater number of young men cannot do better than commence in 
the first branch. To begin in the second, unless an established business is purchased, a 
partnership in a respectable firm procured, or some situation discovered where there is an 
effectual demand for produce, would, to a young man without connection, be attended 
with at least a loss of time, if not witli greater losses. As to the third branch, the de- 
mand is so very limited, that it can never be recommended in a general way. It remains, 
therefore, for the young gardener to look to the serving branch, as that by which he will 
the more certainly attain to independence. 

7783. Of serving gardeners, there are two species, with their varieties ; the public 
gardener and private gardener. The latter is the only species to be recommended in a 
general way ; but whichever a young gardener adopts, it would be well if he could pre- 
viously procure himself to be sent abroad for a year or longer, as gardener or collector 
to some expedition ; or even if he could, at his own expense, visit Amsterdam, Antwerp, 
Leyden, and Paris. All this he may do at present, proceeding by sea to Rotterdam, 
either from London or Edinburgh, for less than twenty-five pounds ; and a judicious 
young man, even though so much devoted to improvement as we suppose our young 
gardener to have been, ought to have saved that sum by his twenty-fifth year. In times 
of war it may be more expensive, or impossible. 

7784. Silualions, Though it be seldom that a gardener can choose a situation for lum- 



Book II. 



EDUCATION OF GARDENERS. 



1145 



self, it may be proper to mention, that by far the best in the world are in England ; there 
are some good situations in Scotland, and a few in Ireland ; and there are occasionally 
good offers to go abroad as gardeners to the governors of British colonies, or to eminent 
merchants there. The principal foreign openings for British gardeners, however, are in 
Russia, where the emperor employs nearly a dozen head gardeners, generally British ; 
and where the same, or a greater number, are in the service of the first-rate nobility. 
The salaries given are not very great ; but the accommodations and necessary advantages 
are sufficient to admit a frugal man's saving the greater part of the salary. Great care 
is requisite, however, to have a written arrangement before leaving this countiy, includ- 
ing a permission to return at pleasure, as no confidence can be placed in the verbal 
agreements of most of even the highest Russian nobility. We know of no other foreign 
situations worth notice. If a gardener thinks of going to America, or any of the colonies, 
on his own account, he will, of course, require a certain capital, and must also reckon on 
spending his days there. Supposing a young gardener to have obtained a tolerably good 
situation at home, and to have proved it for a year or two, he should, in our opinion, set 
about two things ; the first is saving money, and the second is entering into the married 
state. The first is absolutely essential to the scheme of being independent in old age ; 
the second nearly equally so to passing through life comfortably. 

7785. With respect to saving money, we shall not attempt to state the proportion of 
neat wages that may be yearly saved ; nor how the money may be best laid out ; as these 
depend on circumstances. All we need suggest, is the necessity of keeping the ultimate 
object, and its great advantages, continually in view, and to prefer security of principal 
to high interest. As some data to enable the reader to estimate the accumulation of 
money saved, and put in a savings' bank, or in the funds, we shall suppose a gardener to 
begin saving at the age of 27, and to continue saving till he attains his 50th year ; laying 
out every year's savings at only 4 per cent., adding half-yearly the interest to the prin- 
cipal ; and at the end of that period purchasing an annuity for his own life, or the joint 
lives of himself and wife, with the accumulated sum : then — 



40 ! a-year, it will amount, 
50 ^ in '23 years, to 



di 


- S. 


566 


31 


549 


5 


732 


7 


915 


9 


1098 


10 


1465 




1850 


IS 


2197 


1 


i!563 


5 


2929 


8 


3295 


12 


.3661 


16j 



vrhich will purchase an annuity for a 
person aged 50 years, or for t\T'o lives 
of that value, of 



7786. By commencing master-gardener, and beginnijig to save at twenty years of age, 
a gardener, or even a common laborer, may attain the same advantages as to inde- 
pendence ; but with inferior domestic comforts, as he cannot afford to spend so much 
annually ; and with less enjoyment from literary and intellectual sources, because his 
time for previous improvement is reduced one half ; and in the after part of his life, 
as he will only be able to obtain inferior situations, he must calculate on laboring 
personally. If he begins at twenty, however, 'and saves till he is fifty, the additional 
time will bring his smaller sums to very nearly the same totals as those of the more ac- 
complished gardener : thus — 

5 



_ 20 

If he saves \ |g !■ 

35 



a-year, it will amount, 
in 30 years, to 





S. 


r 2S0 


8T 


418 


12 i 


560 


16 




4 


1121 




1402 


If 


1682 




19G2 


16 1 


2243 


4 


2804 




3364 


16 1 


L3645 


4J 



which will purchase an annuity for a 
person aged 50 years, or for two lives 
of that value, of 





s. 


r 22 


2 


35 


6 


44 




56 


9 


88 


11 


110 


15 


132 


17 


155 





177 


2 


221 


10 


255 


15 


L28S 






7787. These calculations being made at the rate of 4 jier cent, interest, and the 
Northampton valuation of life, (by which a man at 50 is estimated to live 18 years longer, 
while in London only 16 years,) must be considered as low rather than otherwise. 

7788. The vulgar reason why a young man ought to save money is, that he may get 
together as much as may enable him to collect some furniture and get married. This, 
however, may be called saving to produce want and misery. A young loving couple, 
anxious to consummate their first wishes, will not be very nice in the quantity or quality 
of their furniture. All they consider necessary is accordingly often acquired before either 
are tM'enty. Housekeeping and propagation are commenced ; and thus the foundation laid 
of a life of hard labor, scanty food, and their attendants, bad temper, and often disease. 
After twenty-five years of bustle and distraction, half a score of children have been pro- 
duced, and are most probably growing up in rags and ignorance ; and all that this couple 
can say is that they have struggled hard to create nine timco as mucli misery as that by 



1146 



STATISTICS OF GARDENING. 



Part IV. 



which they are themselves oppressed. If the man had limited himself for twenty-five years 
to making the heads of pins, he might have accumulated as much as would have made him 
independent and comfoitable, and still had sufficient time before him to marry, and enjoy 
the comfort and solace of a wife and children. But the use of a wife to a gardener, and 
to every man who is not independent, ought to be chiefly as the operative partner in his 
domestic establishment ; to prepare hi& food, and keep in order his lodging and clothes. 
If, in addition to these duties, she has cultivated, or will cultivate her mind so as to be- 
come interesting as a companion, so much the better ; and if the parties further think 
that they can attain their object of independence, and rear one or two children, let them 
do so. Universal sources of happiness should never be rejected, when they can be 
retained. 



1147 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



The cdmmmc time in this kalendar is calculated for the meridian of London ; but as 
a kalendar of nature is given for the metropolitan district, the almanac tmne may, in 
every part of the empire, be varied to suit the local climate and vegetation. 

In general, other circumstances being alike, four days may be allowed for every d-e- 
gree, or every 70 miles north or south of London : in spring, operations may be com- 
menced earlier in that proportion southwards, and later northwards ; but in autumn the 
reverse, and operations deferred as we advance southwards, and accelerated as we pro- 
ceed to the north. In every case allowing a due weight to local circumstances. 

JANUARY. 



Weatlier 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Rain. 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin ■- 


35 9 
51 5 
29 92 


6 


29 56 
2!) 191 
29 721 


1- 957 inch. 

2- 99 1 
2-697 



REMARKS. 

A. cold Januai7 is reckoned seasonable. The gardener, 
during this lAonth, does not labor in the garden more 
than ' five hours a-day ; allowing one hour more for 
early and late attendance on hot-house hres, and seven 
houis tor sleep, there remains eleven hours for personal 
improvement. Let the voung gardener, who is ambitious 
of distinguishing himself ftom the common clay of hi: 
profession, not let one of these hours run to waste, 7751 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week : shelless snails (HcZ«) and earth- 
worms {Lumhricus terrcstris) appear. 

Second iveek : redbreast {Motacilla riiUcola) 
whistles, nuthatch {Sitta curopcea) chatters, misel- 
toe-thrush {Turdus viscivorus) sings, and Avagtails 
(MotacUla alba etfiava) appear. 

Ttiird week : the common lark {Alauda arvensis) 
congregates. . ^ , , 

Fourth week : snails {Heli.v hortensis) and slugs 
{Umax ater ethyaUniis) abound in sheltered parts ot 
gardens; the heA^e-siiarrovi {Mot acilia modulans) 
whistles, the large titmouse {Parus major) sings, and 
flies appear on windows. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week: some plants accidentally in 
flower ; and others, as the laurustinus, continued 
from December. 

■ Second week : winter aconite {Eranthis h?/emalis), 
Christmas-rose {Hc/cborus fa'iidiis) in flower, and 
hazel {Corylus avellana) catkins beginning to ap- 
pear; common honeysuckle {Loniccra iclyyiic- 
mmi) buds begin to appear. _ 

Third week: primrose {Primula vuli^arix) flowers 
in sheltered places; daisy {BcUis rcrcnms) and 
chickweed {Alsine viedia) begin to flower. 

Fourth iveek : mezereon {Dap/me mezereon) begins 
to flower ; and sometimes spurry {Spergida arvcnsts), 
pansy {Viola tricolor), white scented violet {I tola 
odorata), archangel {Lamiimi rubrum), and colts- 
foot {Tussilago purpurea et odorata) show blossoms. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary vegeta- 
bles. 

Sow (2071.) early frame and Charlton peas about 
the beginning, and some dwarf marrowfats about 
the end of the month. (3601.) Early mazagan and 
long-pod beans in the first week (3616.) and the last. 
(3617.) In the last fortnight, on a sheltered border, 
sloping to the south, the hardy green Egyptian, 
early and brown Dutch lettuces. (3970.) On a simi- 
lar border, in the first and second week, early dwarf 
sliort-topt radish ; in the last fortnight, the salmon- 
colored. (3760.) 

Protect (2206.) by teinporary coverings, newly 
sown seeds, as lettuce, endive, celery, &c. 

Transplant {2019.) strong plants of the brassica 
tribe carrots, parsneps, &c., to run for seed. 

Dig (1864.) and trench (1870.) vacant ground in 
dry weather. 

Prepare (1970.) composts and manures. Attend 
to neatness (2.359.), by picking up all dead leaves, 
and removing all plants killed by the frost, &c. 
(235.5. to 2373.) 



Insects, 8{c. (2276.) Destroy slugs, set traps for 
mice, and remove all larvje, webs, eggs, &c. 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant (2077.) fruit-trees in general, hi open wea- 
ther. 

Protect (2206.) newlv-planted trees from frost and 
drought by mulching (2098.) ; fig-trees by fronds or 
mats, if you have neglected this business in October. 
(4861.) 

Prune (2110.) apples, pears, plums, cherries, goose- 
berries, currants, and raspberries, preferrmg mild 
weather, or only moderate frosts. Prune first such 
trees as stand in compartments or borders that you 
wish to dig or dress (,2579.) ; apricots in the last fort- 
night, if very mild. (4535.) Loosen the extremities of 
the shoots of such trees as it is not proper to prune at 
present, and wash them with soap-suds and sulphur, 
or scalding water if insects are suspected. (2276.) 

D/o- (1864.) and stir the earth round trees which 
haveljeen pruned ; trench ground intended for trees. 

Stake newlv planted trees. (2098.) 

Clean trees'from moss, mistletoe, &c. (2624.) Guard 
against hares, by tarring or lime-whitmg their 
stems, or tving thorns round them. (2222.) 

Destroy (2280.) insects by washes, or hot water, 
applied both to walls and trellises, and to the trees. 

Fruit-room and cellar. (2298.) Look over the 
fruit in open boxes or shelves, and pick out decayed 
or tainted ones ; but do not touch the casks of fruit 
in the ccUar. (2299.) 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 
Glass case without heat. (2686.) Sow radishes, 

lettuce, carrots, small-salads (3399.) ; and peas and 
beans for transplanting. (3616.) 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Prepare for making up 
hot-beds for early cucumbers (3178.) and melons 
(3281.), if you have not begun in November. Sow 
early radishes, and small-salading on slight hot-beds. 
(4078.) Sow carrot on a slight hot-bed, to produce a 
crop for drawing in April and Ma}'. (3400.) Kidney- 
beans, peas, potatoes (3367. 3681. 3683.), &(;. may be 
sown and planted on slight hot-beds in small pots, to 
fit them for transplanting. (7446.) Force asparagus 
(3349.), sea-kale (3366.) and tart-rhubarb (3366.), on 
hot-beds, or in pits, or in the open garden, (3398. and 
4263.) 

Pinery. (2697.) Give air and water sparingly to 
pines ; sow kidneybeans ; take in strawberries. 

Forcing-houses. (2940. and 3063.) Give air and 
water, and, according to the progress your trees have 
made, increase vour stimuli of every description. 
Attend to kidneybeans and strawberries, wherever 
you have any stove-room. (3367. and 3358.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Plant (2077.) dried roots of bordcr-flowers, if not 



1148 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



done before ; but defer planting bulbs of the finer 
florists' flowers till February, unless the weather is 
very mild. (6502.) 

Transplant (2079.) daisies, and other edgings, if 
the weather is fine, and it was not done before. (6528.) 

Protect (2206.) choice plants by matting, litter, 
cases of wicker-work, old bark, and all other proper 
means, observing to do it with due attention to 
neatness in this department of gardening. (2359.) 
Attend to the finer sorts of tulips, which will emerge 
from the ground by the end of the month ; hoop 
them over, and apply mats. (6252.) Ranunculuses 
and anemones, which have been planted in Novem- 
ber, will require a similar attention. (6270.) 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without heat. (2686.) Attend to the 
alpines (6537.) : they should have air every dry daj-, 
and must, in very severe weather, be protected by 
mats, and even litter, to imitate their native snow 
covering at this season. ?>Iignonette and other 
prolonged annuals, as stocks, sweetpeas, &:c. will 
require similar attention. (6486.) Look to choice 
auriculas (6375.) and polyanthuses (6.398.) ; keep 
them plunged in frames in old tan, or, what is better, 
saw dust, or ashes. In general, never attempt to 
keep a potted plant through the winter in a cold 
frame, unless it be plunged, or the pots be standing 
very close together. 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Begin to force roses 
p218.) and other shrubs, and hardy flowers, as 
well as bulbs, if you have not begun in November : 
put bulbs in blowing-glasses. (6503.) 

Green-house. (6211.) Minim, temp, for this month, 
40 deg., max. at fire-heat, 44 deg. See that the most 
delicate plants be in the warmest part of the house, 
in so far as is consistent with other arrangements : 
give air freely in fine weather, and water at all 
times sparingly. (6212 ) 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Min. temp, for this month 45 
deg. with fire-heat ; water very sparingly, but give 
air every fine day. (6212.) 

Bark, or ynoist stove. (6214.) The minimum tem- 
perature for this department, with fire-heat, may be 
58 deg. and maximum 70 deg. : water and give" air 
with discretion. 

8. Pleasure-grovmd and shrubbery. 

Plant (2077. "I most sorts of deciduous trees in fine 
weather, and deciduous hedges. (6S38. and 6816.) 

Prune (2110.) native and naturalised deciduous 
shrubs and trees (G8S4.) ; cutdeciduous hedges (6899) ; 
attend to the weather : only the very hardiest 
natives are to be cut during frosts and snows. (6889.) 

Digging. (18G4.) Continue this operation in the 
interior of masses and groups, as well as in the 
shrubberies and other screen plantations. Where 
the exterior abounds with flowering shrubs and 
plants, it should have been dug in autumn, and 
must not be deferred tiU next month. 



Dress turf (6191.) and gravel (1957.) : the former 
may be done in moist, but the latter only in dry 
weather. 

Form and repair lawns and turf verges, in mild 
weather. (2100. and 2101.) 

9. Trees. — Nurserj' department. 

Lay out (6973.) ground for a nurserv, if not done 
in autumn ; gather all manner of tree'-seeds. (6982.) 

Dig (1S64.1 and trench (1870.) vacant ground be- 
tween the rows of plants, which are to stand a yea. 
longer : fill up any vacancies as vou go along. (7470^ 

Lift {,2081.) plants fit for planting out. 

Prune (2110.) nursery plants before planting : do 
this in sheds, and keep the roots covered with mat- 
ting or moss. 

Gather (2292.) cones of the larch and other firs, 
and of the pine tribe. (6984.) 

Protect (2206.) beds of germinating seeds with 
straw or litter ; put other tender seedlings in pots 
under frames, or mats and hoops, from birds, mice, 
snails, and other vermin. (2220.) 

Rotting-ground (6979.) : turn over the different 
layers frequently, and see that none of them are 
soaked with water. 

Sced-loft and cellar (6980.) : look to all the sorts 
of seeds in these departments ; whether buried in 
sand, or in heaps, layers, baskets, drawers, or bags. 

Destroy (2280.) vermin, and, in bad weather, cut 
and paint tallies and prepare parchment labels, 
number-sticks, hooks for laying, &c. (1517.) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Prepare (6817.) ground for grove or screen planta- 
tions ; for useful strips ; for detached, and for hedge- 
row trees ; and planting in general. (6878.) 

Plant (2077.), in dry weather, deciduous trees, 
Scotch pine, and larch fir. (6997.) 

Prune (2110.) deciduous trees, and also larch fir 
and Scotch pine groves (6892.), hedge-row trees, 
and indeed deciduous forest-trees in every form 
(6884.) ; cut and plash, repair and renovate, 
and complete hedges of deciduous plants or trees. 
(6917.) 

Enclose and fence (6820 ) ground intended to be 
planted (6822 ) by posts and rails in all weathers 
(6820.) ; but by mortar waUs, in mild weather only. 

(6823.1 

Fell (6954.) timber-trees, where the bark is no 
object. 

Thin (6905.1 crowded plantations, distinguishing 
between such as consist of sorts fit for barking, or 
transplanting, and sorts for consumption in any of 
the usual forms of young trees, or coppices (6906. 
and 691.o.\ and otherwise prepare for planting the 
more extensive (6817.) sites. (6820. to 6851.) - 

E-vcavate and remove ground for forming pieces 
of water, &c. (1945. and 7217.) 



FEBRUARY. 



■\\'eather 
at 


A rerase of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
^'ariation 

from the 
Average. 


of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Kain. 


REMARICB. 

This month (the sprin;; or sprout kale month of the Saxons) 
is usually subject to much rain, or snow ; ei'her is ac- 
counted seasonable : the old proverb being, " February 
fill dike -n-ith either black or white." Early forced articles, 
and especially cucumbers and peaches, require great 
care during this month ; when the sun does not appear 
for several days, danger is to be apprehended from damps, 
and at other times from chills. 


I^ondon - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


56 6 
43 78 


5 


29 91 

29 55-3 

30 091 


0- S73 mch. 

1- 269 • 
2 24 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In thefirsi weelc : bees {Apis melUfera) come out 
of their hives, gnats {Cule.v) play about, insects [In- 
sectce) swarm under sunny hedges, and the earth- 
worm {Lumhricus terrestris) lies out; hen-chaf- 
finches (Fringilla) flock, and the song-thrush, or 
throstle ( Turdus musicus), and common lark {Alauda 
arvensis) sing. 

Second week : the buntings {Emherixa alba) and 
linnets {Fringilla linota) appear in flocks ; sheep 
(Om aries) drop their lambs ; geese {Anas anser) 
begin to lay. 

Third week: rooks {Corvus frugilegus) begin to 
pair, and resort to tjieir nest-trees ; house-sparrows 
{Fritigilla domestica) chirp, and begin to build ; the 
chaffinch {Fringilla ccslebs) sings. 



Foia-th week : the partridge (TV^rcojocrrfr/j-) begins 
to pair, the blackbird {Turdus tnerula) whistles, and 
thefield andwoodlarks {Alauda ai-veiisiset arborea) 
sing; the hen {Phasanus gallus) sits. 

2. JCalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week : the snowdrop {Galanthus ni- 
valis), whin {Ulex europceus), vfh'ite deadnettle {La- 
mium*alhmn), polyanthus {Primula veris) flowers; 
and the elder {Sambucus nigra'^, and some roses and 
honeysuckles, begin to expand their leaves. 

Second week : common crowfoot {Ranunculus re- 
pens^, dandelion {Leontodon taraxacum), and the 
female flowers of hazel {Corylus avellana) appear. 

Third week : veronica agrestis in flower ; many of 
the poplar and willow tribe show their catkins ; and 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1149 



also the yevf {Taxusbaccata), alder [Alnus communis), 
the tulip [Tulipa), crown-imperial {Fritillaria im- 
perialis), and various other bulbs, boldly emerging 
from the ground. 

Fourth week : the erica carnea, wood strawberry 
(Fragaria vesca), some s^ecdweWi {Veronica), the 
groundsel, and sometimes the stock and wall- 
flower {Cheiranthus), in flower. Some sorts of goose- 
berries, apricots, and peaches, beginning to open 
their buds. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary vegeta- 
bles. 

Sow (2071.) radishes at twice or thrice (3760.) ; 
round-laaved spinage twice (3771.), lettuce for suc- 
cession (3970.), peas and beans in the beginning and 
end of the month (3601. and 3616.) ; some early cab- 
bages to replace any plants of the last August sowing : 
at theendof themonth, red cabbage. (3492. and 3518.) 
In the last week savoys (3.')19.) ; in the last fortnight 
dill, chervil, and fennel (4097. to 4109), earlyHorn car- 
rot near the end of the month (3718.), early Dutch 
turnip in the last fortnight (3698.), small salads every 
fortnight (4078.), onions for a fuil crop in the last 
week, and a few leeks at the same time. (3816. and 
3835.) .... 

Temporary coverings. (2206.) Cover v/ith litter, 
fronds of spruce and silver fir, mats, r.nd other 
means, as circumstances may require 

Plant 'fiOll.) Jerusalem artichokes (3692.), chives, 
gr.rlic, shalots (3838. to 3847.), horse-radish (4113.), 
licorice (4245.), and potatoes. (3876.) 

Propagate, by rooted offsets (1938.), mint, balm, 
sorrel, penny-royal, tansy, tarragon, fennel, and 
burnet. (,4031. to 4131.) 

Transplant (2079.) for seed, if it was not done in 
autumn, the brassica tribe, onions, carrots, turnips, 
beet, celery, endive, parsneps, and leeks. 

Dig (1864) and trench (1870.) vacant ground in 
moderate weather, and perform all other operations 
of this kind only in dry weather. 

Destroy insects by the usual means. (2280.) 

Store-room. Look over onions, and other dried 
roots. (1704. and 1705.) 

Tool-room. See that tools are always cleaned 
before being laid by at this season. (1708.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant (2077.) all sorts of fruit-trees, when the 
weather is fine (4361.") : strawberries towards the end 
of the month. (4717.) 

Protect roots of new-planted trees by mulching 
(2098.) ; tops of apricot, plum, peach, and nectarine 
trees coming into blossom. (22u6.) 

Prune (2110.) apricots, peaches, and nectarines, 
before the blossom-buds are much swelled (4480. 
to 4550.) ; apples and pears before the end of the 
month (4569. and 4433.) : finish vines (2965.), and 
nail them, and also gooseberries, currants, and rasp- 
berries. (4634. 4670. 4680. and 4696.) 

Prepare ground for planting (2077.) ; spring-dress 
strawberry-plants ; dig and dress ground where the 
trees are pruned ; support newly planted trees with 
stakes (2098.) ; clear the bark of trees of moss, &c. ; 
fence orchard trees where sheep, cattle, or hares 
may be expected. (2624.) 

Destroy insects. (2280.) 

Fruit-room. (2298.) Keep continually examining 
the loose iruit, whether in the open shelves, or 
close drawers : remove all tainted specimens. - . 

Fruit-cellar. (2299.) Such fruit as is put i^p in 
close casks, and sealed or plastered up to exclude 
the air, will require no farther attention than keep- 
ing out extreme frosts, so as the temperature may 
stand between 32 and 40 degrees. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case ivithout heat. (2686. ) Sow lettuces, small 
salads, &c. as in last month (3399.), plant potatoes. 
(3381.) 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) In the first week begin 
to force cucumbers and melons : in general, the beds 
now set to work produce finer fruit than those put 
in action sooner. (3164. and 3271.) Continue sowings 
of Salads (3399.), and kidneybeans (3367.) ; begin 
or continue to force asparagus, potatoes, sea- 
kale, tart-rhubarb, &c. (4203.) ; sow a few seeds 
of early cabbage and cauliflower plants for early 
planting. 

Mushroom-beds. Protect e'stablished beds, and 
spawn new ones (3430.) : keep up the heat of all hot- 
beds by linings. (1976.) 



Pinery. (2G97.) Attend to the proper temperature 
(2847. and 2872.) : pines want little air or water at thia 
season. See that suckers on dung-heat are not too 
moist. 

Forcing department. (2940.) If you have not begun 
before, this is a very good time to commence with 
most sorts of fruits, peaches, cherries, vines, &c. 
Set in strawberries and other plants in pots, also 
fruit-trees and shrubs, and plant kidneybeans ; 
apply stimuli by degrees, but, having once begun to 
excite, do not decline, otherwise you produce an in- 
jurious check to vegetation. See to the stems cf 
vines which are outside the forcing-houses and 
stoves which are at work. (3012. and 3031.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow (2071.) a few hardy annuals in the last fort- 
night, if the weather be fine : most of the sorts are 
better deferred till the end of March. (6507.) Mig- 
nonette and ten-weeks' stocks, in a warm border, 
to be protected in severe weather. (2206. and 6486.) 

Propagate hardy plants from the root and herb ; 
but September or March are better seasons. (6490.) 

Plant dried roots, when the weather is open and 
drv. (6501.) 

Transplant (2079.), if the last fortnight be fit 
weather, the hardier biennial and perennial border- 
flowers. (6490. and 6505.) 

Shelter and protect (2206.) by all the usual means ; 
but take care not to exclude air and light a moment 
longer than is absolutely necessary. 

Prepare vacant ground for plants and trees, also 
composts for plants in pots. (1981.) 

Bees. Feed such hives as are weak. (1748.) 

7. Flower garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without heat. (2686.) Dress select auri- 
culas, and cover them at night to promote their 
gi'owth (6376 ) ; sow tel^-weeks' stocks, and migno- 
nette, for successional supply. (6218. and 6486.) 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) In the last week, prepare 
for tender annuals, continue to force bulbs, and the 
usual sorts of border-flowers and Dutch roots in 
dung-beds and pits heated by fermentable substances, 
steara, or by smoke-flues. (6503.) 

Green-housc. (6211.) Minimum heat for this 
month, 40 deg. maximum, v/ith fire-heat, 44 deg. 
Give air freely in fine weather, but water sparingly ; 
tlie alternate drying by fire-heat, and then mace- 
rating by watering, is a sure way of killing tender 
plants in small pots. 

Bark, or moist stove. (6214.) Give air whenever 
the thermometer i-ises to 70 deg. or under it, if the 
sun shines, keeping up your fire and bottom heat 
Begin to propagate by the usual modes ; attend to 
neatness and routine culture. 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Min. 45 deg., max. with fire- 
heat, 50 deg. Give water and air as in January. 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Plant {2077.) deciduous trees and hedges, as in 
January ; deciduous shrubs after the middle of the 
month.- (6138. 6160. and 6189.) 

Prune (2110.) as before, finishing most sorts by the 
middle of the month, if possible. (6IS0.) 

Dig (1864.) as before, and include the flower and 
shrubbery borders towards the end of the month. 
Sweep and roll gravel-walks and lawns (6191.) ; trim 
the edges of verges vLth a weeding-iron ; remove 
mosses and weeds everywhere. (6201.) 

Form and prepare lawns and gravel-walks, as 
directed for last month. (2100. and 2101.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. Sow kernels and fruit-stones (7011. 
and 7016.); lay quince, walnut, and mulberry trees; 
plant cuttings of the gooseberry, currant, and elder. 
Lay or graft the berberry, hazel-nut, and filbert. 
7031.) Preserve cuttings of the vine and fig in 
dry earth (4809.); plant suckers of the raspberry; 
prepare for grafting. (2043.) 

Oinamcnfal shrubs. Sow hardy deciduous sorts ; 
lay and plant cuttings, and take off suckers for pro- 
pagation; plant out in nursery rows, and prune 
deciduous kinds. (7031.) 

Forest trees. (6982. to 7031.) Sow mountain ash, 
hornbeam, wild cherry, hawthorn, ash-keys, hazel- 
nut, acorns, walnuts, Spanish and horse chestnuts, 
&c. 



1150 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



holly and yew in the last fortnight. Plant cuttings 
of poplar, elder, and willow; lay in seedling larches; 
gather pine and larch cones. (6982.) 

Bon- up (1872.), dig (18&1.), or trench (1870.), be- 
tween nursery rows, not intended for removal this 
season (7037.) ; weed and remove decayed leaves, 
attending as much as possible to order and neat- 
ness. (2359.) 

10. Trees, — Permanent plantations, and 
park-scenery. 

Plant (2077.) fences of deciduous trees (6820.) ; 
forest trees of all the deciduous sorts, in mild 



weather ; ornamental deciduous sorts, not very 
tender, in fine weather. 

Prune (2110.) deciduous sorts, excepting such sorts 
as are apt to bleed, as tlie wild cherry, birch, and 
sycamore, or the resinous and evergreen tribes, 
which are best pruned in summer, autumn, or late 
in spring. 

Thin and fell timl^er and young trees, as for last 
month : remember not to touch bark.wood.s this 
month. i^oDuJ. and69j4) 

Operate (1862 ) on ground, with a view to forming 
roads, pieces of water, and other eflects of land- 
scape-gardening. (7195 ) 



MARCH. 



Weather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Rain. 


REMARKS. 

The beginning of March usually concludes the winter ; 
and the end of the month is generally indicative of the 
succeeding spring ; according to the "proverb, " March 
comes in like a lion, and goes out like a lamb. ' The 
Saxons called this month the len^hening moiUh, in allu- 
sion to the increasing of the days. The most laborious 
period of the gardener's year is the last half of this 
month ; and the first fortnight of April. 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


46 4 
41 7 
44 09 


4 


30 20 

28 886 

29 707 


0- 716 Inch. 

1- 455 

2- 364 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first ivcek : the ring-dove {Columha palam- 
bus) coos, the white wagtail {Motaciila alba) sings, 
and the yellow wagtail {Motaciila flava) appears ; 
the earthworm {Lumbricus terrestris), and the snail 
{Helix), and slug {Limax'^, engender. 

Second iveek .- the jackdaw {Corvus ynoncedula) be- 
gins to come to churches ; the tomtit ( Parus cceru- 
leus) makes its spring note ; brown wood-owls 
{Strix ulula) hoot ; and the small tortoise-shell 
butterfly {PapUio urticce, L.) appears. 

Third week : the marsh titmouse {Parus palustris) 
begins his notes ; various flies {Musccs) appear ; 
the fox {Canis vulpis) smells rank; the turkey- 
cock {Meleagris gallo-pavo) struts and gobbles. 

Fourth week : the yellowhammer {Embcnza 
citrinella) and green woodpecker {Picus viridis) 
sing; rooks, ravens {Corvee), and house-pigeons 
iColumbi) build ; the goldfinch {Fringilla carduelis) 
sings; field-crickets (Sc«rai^Pi<5) open their holes; 
and the common flea {Pulex irritans) appears. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week : various species of the pine, 
larch, and fir tribes in full flower ; the rosemary 
iRos?7iarinus officinalis), the willow {Salix), and 
bay {Lau}-us nobilis), in blossom ; various trees and 
shrubs beginning to open their buds. 

Second week : the common honeysuckle {Lonicera 
periclyynenum) and some roses in leaf; crocus ver- 
nus, and other subspecies, and some scillae, in 
flower ; pilewort {Ficaria) and creeping crowfoot 
{Ranunculus repens), hepatica and elder {Sa?nbucus 
nigra), sometimes in leaf. 

Tliird week .- saxifraga oppositifolia, draba verna, 
daphne pontica and collina, and lonicera nigra, in 
flower. 

Fourth iveek : the peach and nectarine, apricot, 
corchyrus japonicus, pyrus japonica, crown-imperial, 
saxifraga crassifolia, buxus sempervirens, and other 
plants in warm situations in flower, or just ad- 
vancing to that state. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow (2071.) the main crops of most esculents. 
Drum-headed and Scotch cabbages for field-culture. 
(^92.) Peas (3601.), beans (3616.), lettuce (3970.), 
spinage (3771.), and small salads every fortnight. 
C4079.) Indian cress (4119.), a few savoys (3519.) 
for an early crop ; and towards the end for a full 
crop. Onions (3816.) for a full crop; and leeks 
(3835.), some red and white cabbage (3492. and 3512,), 
full crops of carrots (3718.) and parsneps. (3727.) 
Asparagus in the third week. (3862.) Cauliflower 
in the last fortnight, for a fuU crop (3518.) ; bore- 
coles (3529.), and Brussels sprouts for autumn and 
w^inter crops. (3524.) In the last fortnight, sea- 
kale (3902.), cardoons (3933.), turnips (3698.) celery 
(4003.), alisanders (3950.), and most culinary aro- 
matics, as parsley, diU, fennel, &c. (4081.) In the 
last week, summer savoys (3519.), and mustard for 
seed. (4027.) t r - ' ' 



Plant (2077.), in the first fortnight, horse-radish 
(4114.), licorice (4245.), chives, shallots, and gar- 
lic (3810.), old store onions, as scallions or small 
bulbs for a full crop of large bulbs. Jerusalem 
artichokes and sea-kale, and in the last fortnight, 
potatoes for a full crop. (3676.) 

Ternporary coverings (2206.) : continue these as 
in last month. 

Propagate edible perennials by slips and oflsets 
(1988. and 1989) 

Transplant the brassica tribe, lettuce, and aspa- 
ragus. Fill up vacancies. (2496.) 

Big, &c. as in last month (1864.) from composts 
and earths in heaps or hills. (1977. and 1981.). 

Destroy insects. (2280.) 

Store-room. Remove decaying articles, and admit 
plenty of air, &c. (17C4. and 1705.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant {mi.) fruit-trees in general. The fig (4851.) 
and mulberry may now be planted. (4607.) Finish 
planting gooseberry-trees before the middle of the 
month, and currants and raspberries by the end. 
(4642 4670. and 4696.) Alpine and wood straw- 
berries may be planted, though autumn is preferable. 
(4717.) 

Protect roots by mulching (2098.), and trees coming 
into blossom by the usual means. 

Prune (2110) till the middle of the month; tut 
finish then if possible. If not, apricots may be 
pruned till the 5th (4532.), peaches and nectarines 
till the 15th (4498.), gooseberries to the 7th, red and 
white currants to the 10th or 12th, and the black 
currant to the 2Gth. (4S46. and 467.5.) 

Big and dress between rows of currant-trees, 
and other fruit-trees where this operation has not 
been done before. Dress any strawberry beds you 
have not been able to do before. (4719.) 

Bestroy insects. (2280.) 

Fruit-room. (2298.) Examine thefruit in the room; 
take care not to leave open the door of the cellar fo 
as to raise its temperature above 40 degrees. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without heat. Sow kidneybeans (o 
receive a few weeks' protection. Remove frames 
from cauliflower-plants. (3545.) 

Hot-beds ajid pits. (2678.) Go on with hot-beds for 
cucumbers and melons. (316-i.) Sow a few turnips 
on a gentle hot-bed to come in early. (3399.) Sow 
all sorts of culinary annuals. Give air and apply 
linings to maintain the proper temperatures. (1976.) 
Attend to pine suckers and crowns ; shift any that 
may require larger pots, and examine the roots of 
such as are sickly. ^2718.) 

Pinery. (2697.) Keep sowing kidneybeans, and 
filling spare comers with strawberry -pots for suc- 
cession. See that your bark-pit be in proper heat, 
and attend to the temperature for this month, and 
the other points of culture. Pines are now generally 
shifted. (2918.) 

Forcing dcpartmeyit. (2940.) Attend to the cul- 
ture of each particular kind; and generally to keep 
down insects by watering ; promote setting of fruit 
by air, and encourage growth by steaming or filling 
the house with vapors by powerful fires and water- 
ings over the leaves and every part of the house. 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1151 



6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow (2071.) hardy annuals (6507.) in the second, 
third, and last week ; and some of the more robust 
half-hardy annuals about the end of the month. 
(6513.) Such biennials as flower the same year, as 
honesty, scabious, bastard rocket, sweet allyson, 
clary, Chinese hollyhock, and Indian pink. (6505.) 
Biennials in general, and also perennials towards 
the end of the month. (6493.) 

Propagate by rooted slips and ofFsets ; but next 
month is preferable for rootless slips and cuttings. 
(2063.) 

Plant dried roots : finish with the anemone and 
ranunculus in the first fortnight. (6256. and 6875.) 

Transplant annuals from the patches in the bor- 
ders, and biennials and perennials from the flower- 
garden nursery, into their final sites. (6110.) 

Shelter choice border and aU florists' flowers in 
severe weather. (2206.) 

Dig, dress, hoe, rake, &c. only in dry weather. 
Clean up all borders, and prepare vacant ground. 
(1864. to 1881.) 

Bees. Feed weak hives as in last month. (1748.) 

7. Flower garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without heat. (2686.) Take care of 
alpines and prolonged annuals, remove all weeds, 
and be discreet in your waterings. (2078.) Cover 
auricula-frames in very severe nights (6375.) ; by 
keeping them rather warm at this season they will 
come up with fine tall stalks to support their mag- 
nificent trusses. Sow half-hardy annuals for trans- 
planting, they will come into flower as soon as those 
sown in the open air last month. (6513.) Take care 
of the hardy succulents. (6592.) 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) In the first fortnight 
sow half-hardy annuals on a slight hot-bed for 
transplanting to come in first. (6513.)- Sow tender 
annuals at any period of the month. (6725.) Plant 
tuberoses in pots for forcing. {6323.) Force roses 
and other flowering or odoi-iferous shrubs and all 
desirable hardy flowers in pots. Sow seeds of green- 
house and hot-house plants to be propagated in this 
way. Plant cuttings for the same end. (2063.) 

Green-house. (6211.) Make no fires unless the 
thermometer, in the open air, falls to 35 deg. ; 
45 deg. with fire-heat will be a good medium heat 
in this month. Begin to propagate by cuttings. 
(6627.) 

Dry-stove. (6176.) A good medium heat for this 
month will be 55 deg. which may be kept up with 
very little fire-heat. Give water moderately, but 
sec that what you do give wets the earth, and does 
not escape between the ball and the edge of the 
pot. Give air freely in fine weather. 

Bartc, or moist stove. (6214.) Give air in general, 
as in last month. If you wish to promote a vigor- 
ous growth, shift your plants into a rich compost, 
water over the top tibout three o'clock, and then shut 
the house close up for the night. Do this only when 
tlie temperature has been up to 80 deg. (2205.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Plant (2077.) deciduous trees and shrubs, also de- 
ciduous hedges j finish as early as possible, unless 



the season be unusually backward. Evergreens of 
the hardier sorts towards the end of the month. 
(6541. and 6572.) 

Prune (2110.) deciduous trees and cut hedges, and 
finish this work as early as possible. In pruning 
plants, where the chief object is their flowers, 
attend to their mode of bearing these. In short, 
never begin to cut a tree before having a clear and 
distinct idea of what you wish to attain — is it 
health, shape, size, leaves, shoots, flowers, or roots 

Dress winter and autumn dug shrubberies. 
Mulch, stake, water, and attend to neatness. (2359.) 
Dress and roll turf and gravel ; attend to the mar- 
gins with the turf-raser. (1317.) 

Forrn and repair gravel- walks. In some situations 
imitation gravel-walks require to be turned every 
two or three years and partially renewed. (1960.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. Sow kernels for stocks ; lay the vine 
and the fig (4808. and 4848.) ; plant cuttings and eyes 
of the vine in the open air, or in pots, to be placed 
in a moist heat. Graft towards the middle of the 
month, or sooner or later, according to the season. 
Plant out seedling stocks in nursery rows. (7031.) 
Head down newly budded and grafted trees not 
intended to be removed. (2039.) 

Ornamental trees and shrubs. Sow seeds of the 
hardier sorts. Evergreens may be sown in the last 
week. Finish laying deciduous kinds, plant cuttings 
and suckers, and graft some rare sorts towards the 
end of the month. Plant out layers, cuttings, and 
suckers in nursery rows. (7031.) 

Forest trees. (6982.) Sow nuts, keys, and berries, 
and also birch and alder seed. In the last fortnight 
begin to sow evergreens. Plant cuttings, suckers, 
&c. as in February. Plant out from the seed-bed or 
cutting-border in nursery lines. Dig between the 
rows of trees and shrubs not intended to be removed 
this season. 

Weed, hoe, rake, and stir the surface in fine 
weather. Dig between nursery lines, where the 
plants are not to be removed. (6982. to 7031.) 

Shelter and protect from cold, birds, and vermin. 
(2206. and 2289.) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Plant all sorts of deciduous trees and shrubs, the 
Scotch pine and larch firs. (6983.) Towards the end 
plant most sorts of evei-greens, (6572.) Hedges of 
evergreens. Fill up blanks in plantations of two or 
more years' standing. 

Head down trees intended to stole for underwood, 
or to produce single leaders for timber-trees or 
poles. (6829 and 6894.) 

Fell and thin trees and copse ; but the barking 
sorts not till the end of the month, when they will 
part with the bark. (6941.) 

Sow forests and woods ; about the middle of the 
month is a good time, as the crows, rooks, and other 
vermin will be less likely to annoy the .seeds, having 
the farmer's progeny to attack. (6828.) 

Operations on ground, and masonry-, may now go 
on with the utmost vigor; the days having attained 
a sufficient length, and the weather being generally 
dry : external brick walls for gardens, however, 
are better deferred till May, when all danger from 
frost will be over. 



APRIL. 



^^'eather 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of B.am. 


REMARKS. 

The weather of this month is distinguished by the rapidity 
of its changes. It is generally stormy^ interspersed with 
gleams of sunshine, hail, snow, some frost, and occasion- 
ally violent storms of wind. Fruit-tree blossoms and 
half-hardy plants require protection and particular at- 
tention durmg this month. The young gardener, while 
at work, may study the gemmation and foliation of trees, 
and the gaiety and delicacy of newly expanded foliage. 


London - 
Kdinburgh 
Dublin - 


49 9 
46 3 
51 125 


3 


29 77 
29 873 
92 909 


1 '460 inch. 

2-414 

2-561 



Third week ; the crested wren (Motacilla regulus) 
sings ; the blackbird iTurdus merida), raven iCorvus 
corax), -pigeon (Columba domestica), hen (Phasianus 
gallus), and duck (A7ias boscha) sit ; various insects 
appear ; and the feldfare ( Turdiis pilaris) is still here. 

Fourth week : the swallow (Hirundo rustica) re- 
turns; the nightingale (Motacilla lucinia) sings; 
the bittern (Ardea rotellaria) makes a noise ; the 
house-martin (Hirundo urbica) appears ; the black- 
cap (Motacilla atracapilla) whistles; and the common 
snake ( Coluber nati'ix) appears. 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week: the viper {Coluber benis) and 
woodlouse (Oniscus asellus) appear; the mistletoe, 
thrush (Turdas viscivorus) pairs; frogs (i?rt«tff) croak 
and spawn ; and moths (PhaleencB) appear. 

Second week : the stone curlew (Charadrius cedic- 
vemus) clamors; young frogs (Rana temporaria) 
appear; the pheasant (PAasianM*) crows ; the trout 
( Salmo 1rmt(i) rises : and sniders (Aranece) abound. 



1152 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first u>eek : the daffodil {Narcissus pseudo. 
narcissus), the garden-hyacinth (Hyacinthus orien- 
talis), the wallflower (Cheirantkus cheiri), the cowslip 
Primula officinalis), the periwinkle (Vinca), sloe 
Prunus spinosa), and various other herbs and trees 
in flower. 

Second week: the ground-ivy [Glecoma hederacea), 
gentianella (Gentiana acaulis), pulmonaria virginica, 
the auricula, iberis sempervirens, cynoglossum om- 
phaloides, and most of tiie common fruit-trees, and 
fruit-shrubs in flower. 

Third week : some robinije, andromedee, kalmiae, 
and other American shrubs; daphne laureola, ulmus 
campestris, chrysosplenium oppositifolium, mercu- 
rialis perennis, and other plants, in flower. 

Fourth week : the beech (Fagus) and elm ( Ulmus) 
in flower ; ivy-berries drop from the racemes ; the 
larch in leaf, and the tulip and some white narcissi 
and fritillaries in flower. 

8. Kitchen-garden — Culinary vegetables. 

Sow seakale for a full breadth ; lettuce, small sa- 
lads, and radishes, twice or thrice in the month. Peas 
and beans (3601. and 3617.), broccoli thrice (3555.), 
borecoles in the first week (3529.), cabbages and 
savoys twice (3492. and 3519.), spinage for succession 
(3771.), turnips twice (3698.), silver-skinned onions 
every three weeks during summer for drawing ; 
onions, leeks, and cardoons, in the first week, for 
a general crop (3929.) ; celery, in the first fortnight, 
for a general crop (4603.), mustard for seed (4027.), 
carrots, in the second or third week, for a main 
crop (3717.), kidneybeans, in the second week, for 
an early, and in the last week for a late crop (3634.); 
asparagus andparsneps, in the first or second week, 
but not later (3727.) ; red beet, in the third week, 
for a full crop, and also nasturtiums, salsify, scor- 
zonera and skirret. (3740.) Sow culinary aromatics 
and herbs, if not done in March. (4131.) 

Propagate by bulbs and dried roots. (1967.) Finish 
planting the main crops of potatoes. (3676.) 

Propagate perennial culinary plants by slips and 
offsets, as all the pot-herbs, aromatics, &c. (1988.) 

Transplant lettuce, cabbages, seakale, celery, 
and cauliflowers. (2079.) 

Bress artichoke and asparagus beds, or compart- 
ments. (3925. and 3884.) Hoe and thin spinage, onions, 
turnips ; earth up cauliflowers and cabbages, seakale 
for blanching, peas, beans, and potatoes. Stick peas, 
tie up lettuces, destroy weeds, and stir the ground 
in fine weather. (2591.) 

Attend to insects, and . to the store-room. (2280. 
and 6980.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant cherries, plums, apples, and pears, till the 
10th ; apricots and gooseberries till the 5th ; peaches 
and nectarines till the 15th ; but defer till autumn 
what you cannot accomplisli by this period, unless 
the season is unusually backward. (2077.) 

Protect as in last month. (2206.) 

Prune, if you have delayed it ; but expect vines 
to bleed, and stone-fruits in general to be much 
injured by the operation, if not performed very 
early in the montti, and even that is too late. In 
the last days of the month, rub off the buds 
of vines which appear where you do not wish 
shoots. (4823.) 

Routine culture. Water, mulch, stake, and fence. 
Weed strawberry-beds, and pinch off runners, 
where you do not wish to have young plants. 

Destroy insects, and especially the thrips, which 
will begin to appear on forward peach-trees ; pick 
off caterpillars. (2280.) 

Fruit-room. Turn, pick, wipe, and air the more 
choice dessert fruits ; and look also to the baking 
apples and pears. (2298.) 

F)-uit'Cellar. Attend to the temperature, and 
never break open a cask till you are in want of its 
contents. (2299.) 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass-case without artificial heat. If the season 
is backward, sow in the first week kidneybeans, to 
be protected till the weather is mild. (2686.) 

Hot-beds. Continue preparing a succession of beds 
for ridging and hilling out cucumbers and melons. 
Sow, transplant, shift, &c. all esculents, or pot-herbs, 
which are tender annuals, as gourd, basil, love- 
apple, capsicum. Maintain the proper degrees of 



heat by linings. See to pine-suckers. Plant crowns 
and suckers taken off in the winter. (2712. to 2717.) 

Pinery. Attend to routine culture : shift the 
plants, reinforce the bottom heat, water and give 
air as judgment founded on experience, reflection, 
and vigilant attention shall direct. The pine is a 
very difficult plant to kill, but it requires constant 
and powerful heat, and rich loamy soil, and also 
water more abundantly than is often given to it, to 
produce large, well flavored fruit ; attend to minor 
articles grown or forced in the pinery, as vines, 
fruit-trees in pots, cucumbers, kidneybeans, and 
strawberries. (3338.) 

Fo?-cing departtnent. All that it is proper, in our 
opinion, to say here, is " guard against supineness : 
there is much less danger from your ignorance than 
from your indifference or want of vigilance." (2360.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow annuals ; all the sorts for a main crop, or for 
a succession, if you have sown them in March (6507.) ; 
half-hardy annuals in warm borders there to re- 
main. (6513.) Biennials and perennials should be 
sown as early in the month as possible. 

Propagate by rooted and unrooted slips and off- 
sets. (1988.) 

Transplant all sorts from the nursery to the bor- 
ders 1,2079.) ; tender and half-liardy annuals from the 
hot-beds to the borders. (6503.) 

Routine culture. Weed, hoe, rake, stir the sur- 
face, remove all decayed leaves and stalks as soon as 
the plants have done flowering, unless you select a 
stalk or two occasionally for seed. Never leave all 
the flower-stems for this purpose, and seldom all 
the pods or seed-vessels which are on a stem, as that 
would weaken the plants. 

Protect your auriculas from the extremes of every 
description of weather : if placed on a stage facing 
the north, or set on a shaded paved platform about 
three feet high, they Will be better than if conti- 
nued in the frames. {io3SS. and 6384.) 

Destroy insects, and especially pick the grubs 
from the leaves of rose-trees : if you do not attend 
to this, you will have no blow worth looking at. 
(2280.) - 

7. Flov/er -garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case ivifhout artificial heat. Alpines may 
now be entirely uncovered, and also prolonged an- 
nuals and most half-hardy sorts ; a few half-hardy 
annuals may still be sown, if not done in proper 
season. (6513.) 

Hot-beds and pits. Shift frequently such tender 
annuals as you mean to come to a handsome size, 
more especially balsams. (6481.) Sow more seed, it" 
you have not enough of plants ; plant out some in 
the borders to grow strong broad plants, especially 
balsams and combs in very warm situations. Plant 
tuberose roots, and shift those which are comiijg 
forward, if they appear to be stinted in their growth. 
(6323.) Attend to pots of cuttings, and seedlings 
from either of the following departments (6683.) : — 

Green-house. Fire-heat may generally be dis- 
pensed with in this month. Go on propagating by 
all the methods in use ; this is the fittest season 
of the year : a good deal depends on taking off, 
making, and putting in the cuttings, but nothing 
wiU answer, if constant attention is not paid to keep 
them in a medium state as to air, heat, and mois- 
ture afterwards. (6634.) 

Dry-stove. No fire will here be necessary, except- 
ing when the thermometer in the open air is under 
40 deg. or 42 deg. Propagate by the usual means, 
which in general for succulents is cuttings ; attend 
to bulbs now coming into flower. (6654. and 6658.) 

Bark or moist stove. Go on, as in last month, 
shifting, propagating, and stimulating as the nature 
of the different hot-house plants requires, and as 
your views or duties inculcate : never forget neat- 
ness, and removal of dust, insects, &c. (6688. to 6716.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Plant (2077.) such sorts of deciduous shrubs as you 
deemed too tender to plant last month ; but finish 
this work in the first week. Plant a few roses as 
late as you can, in order to retard their coming into 
bloom : or, if you can afford the time and room, 
place potted roses in the ice-cold cellar in autumn, 
and do not take them out till the August following, 
by this means you will have a fine show in October 



KALENDARIAL INDEX, 



1153 



and NovembeT (6554.) Evergreens, the hardiest 
sorts at the beghiniiig, and the less so at the end of 
the months (6572.) 

Prune such deciduous shrubs as you have ne- 
glected last month ; evergreens from the middle to 
the end of the montli. (6884.) 

Form and repair lawns, by procuring and laying 
turf, and bv sowing grass-seeds. Where it is de- 
sired to destroy moss on extensive lawns, fold sheep 
till it be trod down and killed by pressure and ma- 
nure ; on small lawns, roll. In shady, damp situ- 
ations, however, moss makes a better lawn than 
grass, and it should be encouraged by forming the 
surface of lawns of bog earth in all situations where 
grasses do not thrive, as in towns, under close 
trees, &c. Mow established lawns twice a-month ; 
attend to gravel and margins. (6191.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. (4361.) Finish sowing kernels for 
stocks, or new varieties. Plant cuttings of the vine, 
fig, gooseberry, ami currant, if it has been unavoid- 
ably delayed till this unfavorable season. Graft 
"the pear, plum, and apple. (2013.) Attend to newly 
grafted trees, and repair cracks in the clay, or renew 
such balls as may have dropped off ; eradicate all 
suckers, and pinch off shoots that protrude below 
the grafts. 

Ornamental trees and shr ubs. Finish sowing de- 
ciduous sorts, as early as possible. Sow cedars, cy- 
presses, and other ornamental evergreens about the 
end of the month. Sow in pots or boxes, or in shady 
borders of soft peat earth. Transplant evergreens. 
(6982. to 7037.) 

Forest trees. Finish sowing common tree-seeds. 



and commence with the resinous tribe, thelarclies, 
firs, and pines ; the cypresses, arbor-vitses, &c. 
Finish planting deciduous trees in nursery rows, as 
early as possible. (7007.) Evergreens may be trans- 
planted during the month. Kiln-dry the cones of 
the cedar and fir tribe, but not of the pine tribe : and 
get the seeds out in time for sowing the end of this 
month or beginning of next. (6984.) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Sow for forests and woods, and all sorts of profit- 
able plantations in masses. Observe it is rather late 
for nuts, berries, and keys, but this is the proi)er 
season for small seeds. (7016.) 

Plant evergreen trees, as pine, fir, cedar of Le- 
banon, holly, and yew during the month ; but finish 
planting deciduous sorts as early as possible. (7007.) 
Wherever the plants are to be, or have been long 
out of ground, take good care to dry up their roots, 
by exposing them as much as you can to the sun 
and air ; do not be nice in planting. 

Routine culture. Begin to hoe and clean the 
ground in plantations, which have been made on 
prepared ground. Crop the ground in newly made 
plantations, where cropping is intended. 

Operations on ground or rocks may now be pro- 
secuted with vigor. This is also one of the best 
months for building. Road-making, draining, fenc- 
ing, &c. are advantageously performed during this 
and the two preceding months. But improvements 
can neither be well designed nor executed after the 
trees are covered with leaves, and the ground's sur- 
face and qualities disguised by luxuriant herbaceous 
vegetation. 



MAY. 



Weather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometei. 


Greatest' 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Rain. 


REMARKS. 

Vegetation now goes on with great vigor, though there are 
often very cold and even frosty nights, which materially 
injure exotics, natives of the warmer climates, such as 
the potatoe, dahlia, kidneybean, &c. TJie human ani- 
mal, in common with most others indigenous to our cli- 
mate, is generally in high spirits and vigor during this 
month. Woe to the young gardenfer who exhausts his 
spirits in any other way than in self-improvement. 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


56 61 
50 4 
52 193 


2 5 


30 02 
29 585 
.30 061 


0- 794 inch. 
1.945 

1- 812 



1 . Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week : the titlark (Alaiida pratensis) 
sings; the cuckoo {Cuculus canorus) is heard; the 
gudgeon {Cyprinus gobio) spawns; the redstart 
{Motacilla phoenicurus), swift {Hirundo apus), white- 
throat {Motacilla sylvia), and stinging-fly (Conops 
calcitrans) appear. 

Second week : the turtle-dove {Columba turtur) 
coos; the red ant {Formica rubra), the laughing 
wren {Motacilla curucca), the common flesh-fly 
{Musca vomitoria), the lady-cow {Coccinella bipunc- 
tata), grasshopper-lark {Alauda locustce voces), and 
willow- wren {Motacilla salicaria) appear. 

Third week : the blue flesh-fly {Musca vomitoria, 
vor.) appears; black snails {Helix rdgra) abound; and 
the large bat appears. 

Fourth week .- the great white cabbage-butterfly 
{Papilio brassica) and dragon-fly {lAbellula 'i-macu- 
lata) appear ; the glow-worm shines ; and the fern- 
owl, or goat-sucker {Caprimulgus europceus), re- 
turns. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week .- geum urbanum, artemisia cam- 
pestris, lily of the valley {Convallaria 7najalis), 
water-violet {Hottonia palustris), tulip-tree {Lilio- 
dendron tulipifera), and numerous other plants, in 
flower. 

Second week : the oak, ash, sweet chestnut {Fagus 
castanea), hawthorn {MeSpilus oxyacantha), the 
common maple {Acer campestre), horse-chestnut 
{JEsculus Mppocastanmn), barberry {Berberis vul- 
garis), and the ajuga reptans in flower. 

Third week : the water scorpion-grass, or forget- 
me-not {Myosotis scorpioides), lime.tree {Tilia), 
milk-wort (Polygala vulgaris), nightshade {Atropa 
belladonna), and various American shrubs, in flower; 
and rye {Secale hybernum) in ear. 

Fourth week : oaks, ashes, and beeches now ge- 
nerally in leaf, and the mulberry {Morus nigra) be- 
ginning to open its buds; the cinnamon-rose and 



some other hardy roses in flower; and also the 
bramble {Rubus fruticosus), moneywort {Lysimachia 
nummularia), columbine {Aquilegia vulgaris), and 
various other trees and shrubs, in blossom. 

Kitchen- Garden. — Culinary vegetables. 
Sow hardy aromatic herbs, if not done last month. 
Small salads four times in the month for a complete 
succession. Radishes and lettuce thrice. (3760. and 
3970.) Peas and beans once a-week. (3601.) Spinage 
once a-fortnight. (3771.) Carrots, for late drawing, 
twice in the month. (3718.) Borecole, in the first 
week, for a second main crop. (3529.) Dwarf kidney, 
beans, in the first week, for a full crop in July ; in 
the last fortnight, for crops in August and Septem- 
ber. (3633.) Borecole and Brussels sprouts for the 
last crop, and German greens to come in for spring. 
Savoys for the last crop. (3519.) Onions for draw- 
ing, young leeks to be late transplanted, cauliflowers 
in the second and third weeks for a Michaelmas 
crop. (3542.) The less hardy aromatic herbs, and 
pumpkins, the last fortnight. (4207.) Cucumbers 
for picklers on a dry warm border, in the last week. 
(4876.) 

Protection. Continue this, nightly, for kidney, 
beans and tender plants transplanted from hot-beds. 

(2206.) 

Propagate by bulbs and dried roots. If abund- 
ance of potatoes have not been planted, effect this 
as early as possible ; in late situations they may be 
planted till the middle of June. (3676.) 

P/«wif slips and offsets. 

Transplant the brassica tribe, lettuce, celery, ra- 
dishes, and other plants for seed. (2079.) 

Routine culture. Stick peas, top early crops of 
beans, and also of peas ; earth up cabbages, beans, 
peas, jiotatoes, &c. Thin, weed, hoe, and stir the 
surface among seedling crops. Water in dry wea- 
ther, support stems, pinch off' all decayed leaves, &c. 

Destroy insects and vermin. (2280.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant strawberries, if it has not been done last 
month. (4717.) 

E 



1154 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



Prune whiit trees you have neglected, and run the 
risk of losing, or leave them un pruned till autumn as 
aproof of vigilance and skill. (2360.) Summer prune 
vines, peaches, and other early shooting trees against 
walls, and such gooseberries as are planted there to 
produce upon early fruit. (2522.) Remove all suckers, 
excepting selected ones of raspberries, and pinch otF 
strawberry runners as directed for last month. i;4717.) 

Routine culture. Mulch, protect, and water where 
necessary. Water strawberries over the herbage, 
and especially after the fruit is set. (4717.) 

Destroy insects, especially snails and caterpillars. 
On the tirst symptoms of the leaves rolling up, un- 
roll them and pick out the grub before it does fur- 
ther mischief. Take special care it does not get at 
the petals of apple and pear blossoms. v2280.) 

Fruit-room. Look over the fruit^of every descrip- 
tion which the increase of temperature will now 
cause to taint rapidly. (2298.) 

Fruit-cellar. Open a few casks of such dessert ap- 
ples and pears as are now wanted for the table. 
Close them as soon as you have taken out the pro- 
per quantitv, and let them still remain in the cellar. 
(.2298, and 2299.) 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case witlwut artificial heat. Remove glasses 
from cauliflowers and kidneybeans, according to 
the weather. Sow capsicum under frames or hand- 
glasses in a warm border. (4271.) 

Hot-beds. Go on with hot-beds for frames for 
melons, and build dung-ridges for growing cucum- 
bers under hand-glasses. (3262.) Sow cucumbers 
and melons for late crops, and attend to the various 
particulars in their culture. Attend to air, water, 
shade, insects, Szq. 

Pinery. Attend particularly to your fruiting 
plants, give abundance of heat and water, and keep 
down all manner of dirt, insects, &c. ,2906.) Attend 
to minor articles cultivated in the pinery, and to 
routine culture of every kind. Think and act for 
yourself ; kalendars too often mislead the ignorant 
who rely on them implicitly, not considering that no 
two cases are ever to be found alike. (2607.) 

Forcing departinent. Produce the required tem- 
peratures, and attend to all the parts of good culture 
and neat management. ^2611. and 2940.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow annuals of all sorts for succession. Biennials 
in the nursery compartment for a stock for next 
year. (6507. and 6513.) 

Propagate, especially by cuttings from the stalks, 
as of wallflower, rocket, &-c. (6505.) 

Take up bulbs"and tuber roots, as crocus, hyacinth, 
lilv, &c. (6501.) 

'Transplant, as directed for the last month, stocks 
and other sorts in pots for winter. (2079.') 
' Protect tulip-beds and all rare florists' flowers from 
the midday sun, the rain, and the winds. (2206.) 

Routine culture. Hoe, rake, stir, weed, and clear 
away dead leaves. Do not neglect whenever rain 
has battered the ground, to stir it up and refresh it 
as soon as it is nearly dry. Stir the surface round 
close patches of annuals, and refresh and top-dress 
all pots of prolonged annuals, now in full flower or 
in seed. Keep all the primula tribe rather dry at 
this season, and in the shade of a north wall. 
Plunge the pots in ashes or sawdust. 

Destroy insects, and pick the grubs off roses. De- 
tach seed-pods from all plants you do not wish to 
ripen seeds. Water, thin, and shade with judg- 
ment, and keep a vigilant eye to order and neatness. 
Shut vourself up in your ro"om for two entire days, 
or go from home a similar time, and when you re- 
turn and look over the garden you will see many 
things that would have escaped you, had you gone 
on ploddins dav after day. Remember that such 
things are seen 'by others, and that though all may 
appear to you in good order, to another there may 
be much slovenliness and confusion. (74S7. to 7439.) 



Store-room. Lay up crocus and other bulbs and 
roots till wanted in the autumn. 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. These will now 
be chiefly employed with annuals in pots, for pro- 
longation and in striking from cuttings, &-c. ^2063. "> 

Hot-beds, (2678.^ Go on as directed last month 
with your tender annuals. Plant a few tuberoses for 
succession. (632-3.) Attend to cuttings and seedlings 
from the hot-house and green-house departments. 
Shitl; and transplant as occasion requires. ^2079.) 

Green-house. Give abundance of air everv day, 
and in mild nights leave some all night : water over 
the top, and shut the house in the afternoon when 
you water. This invigorates growth wonderfully. 

Propagate as before. Shift most of the plants- 
examine their roots. 

Dry-stove. (6176. Give abundance of air. Fires 
will not now be wanted. Look to bulbs, as soon as 
they have done flowering. Shift all such as require 
it, putting them into larger or smaller pots, accord- 
ing to their state, and your object. 

Bark, or ?>ioist stone. ,6214. ;> Give abundance of 
heat, air, and water, if you wish the plants to grow 
and flower vigorously. (66S8. to 6716., 

8. Pleasiu-e-grouad and shrubbery. 

Plant deciduous trees and shrubs, but only to fill 
up a vacancy, or to cause a check fcr the purpose of 
late flowering. Immediately after performing the 
operation, mulch, shade, and water. ,2098.) iEver- 
greens, especially the more tender sorts, but finish 
by the middle of the month. (6997.) 

Prune ,2110.^ evergreens, finishing bv the middle 
of the month. ,6997.1 

Routine culture. Hoe, rake, weed, water, stake, 
shade, shelter, &c. as circumstances require. Roll 
and mow once a-week, if showers are frequent, but 
once a-fortnight will do in dry weather. 

Lay down turf, if not completed before, water well 
and roll immediately afterwards. (2101.) 

Grai'el-n>alks may still be formed and repaired, but 
the work should have been completed last month. 
Roll well with a heavy roller. (in56. to 1968.) 



9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. (4-361.) Look over grafted trees. 
Ornamental trees and shrubs. Sow the seeds of 
evergreens and American sorts, in the first and 
second weeks of the month. Lay and graft the ten- 
derer sorts of evergreens and Americans. Plant 
out tender evergreens and Americans in nursery 
rows, or in pots, for more convenient removaL ,6562.) 

Forest trees. Finish planting out evergreens, 
seedlings, and nurslings as early as possible. Sow 
poplar and willow seeds as soon as gathered. These 
seeds will not come up if kept a very few days out 
of the ground. J024.) 

Protect from all sorts of garden enemies, and at- 
tend to order and neatness. i2206. and 2356.) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Planting evergreens may still go on, if the wea- 
ther is dull and moist, but the sooner it is finished 
the better. (6977.) 

Pruning. Sang recommends this as a good season 
for pruning old oaks, because the wound heals 
quicker while the sap is flowing. 

Fell oak woods and coppices, and other barking' 
trees, but complete the operation about the middle of 
the month, or before. (6941.) 

Routine culture. Attend to planted ground xm. 
der, or to be put under, light culinary crops. ^7037.) 

Prepare ground for autumnal planting or forming 
of plantations by sowing, as the tree-seeds ripen. 
(6817.) 

Operate on ground for water, or other territorial 
improvements. Continue to build and execute'plans 
determined on at an earlier season. 

JUNE. 



Weather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 

fi-om the 
Averase. 


Axerage 
of the 
Ba: ometer. 


Ouantity 
"of Rain. 


REMARKS. ■ ■ 1 

The ■weather is sometimes cold at the beginning, but is ge- 
nerally a^eeable and steady towards the middle of the 1 
month. By observing the column indicating the greatest 1 
variation of the thermometer in each nionui, it ^rill be 
seen that it varies, in London, only two degrees in June, 
•which is less than in any of the preceding months. In ' 
July and August the variation is the same ; but in March 1 
and October it is twice as much. | 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin ; 


63 22 

57 2 

58 76 


2 


29 93 

29 666 

30 06 


0'33'2 inch. 

1-935 

0-S60 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1 155 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week : the sedge-sparrow {Pcisser arun- 
dinacea), the fly-catcher {Mziscicapa atricap/lla), the 
wasp ( Fespa vulgaris), and several species of bee and 
butterfly appear. 

Second week : the burnet-moth {Sphinx filipen- 
dula) and forest fly {Hippobosca equina) appear ; 
bees swarm. 

Third week : several flies, butterflies, moths, 
beetles, and other insects appear. 

Fourth week : insects abound ; and singing- birds 
begin to retire to the woods, and leave off" singing. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week : water-lilies (Nt/mphcea et 
Nuphar) flower ; also iris pseud-acorus, anthemis 
cotula, polygonum persicaria, malva rotundifolia, 
and numerous other plants. 

Second weelc : the vine, raspberry, and elder in 
full flower ; also various Scotch roses {Rosa spinosis- 
sima), broom {Spartium), nettle {Urtica),a.nd wheat 
in the ear. 

Third week : the orchis, epilobium, iris xiphium 
and xiphioides, the hardy ixis and gladioli, and a 
great variety of garden and field plants in flower j 
also the wheat and many of the pasture grasses. 

Fourth week : some black and red currants ripe, 
strav;berries in abundancej young shoots of trees 
and shrubs have nearly attained their length ; oats 
and barley in flower ; blue-bottle, scabious {Centau- 
rca cyanus), and numerous others, in bloom. 

3. Kitchen -garden. — Culinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow peas and beans once a-week or ten days. 
(3601.) Cucumbers for picklers. (4876.) Gourds in 
the first week, (4211.) Small salads and lettuce every 
week or ten days. (4078. and 3964.) Radishes and spin- 
age in the first week. (3771.) Kidneybeans every fort- 
night, for succession. (3633.) Endive about the 10th 
or 24th, for the main autumn and winter crops. 
(3981.) Chervil twice in the month for summer 
use, also purslane. (4088.) Cabbages, of quick-grow- 
ing sorts, for summer and autumn consumption, 
about the beginning and middle of the month. 
(3492.) Turnips in the first week, for succession; 
and in the second and third week for a full autumn 
crop. (3698.) Carrots (3717.) twice, for drawing 
young. Broccoli and borecole, in small portions, 
for succession, late in spring. (3555. and 3527.) Onions 
to be drawn young. 

To save seed. Mark out cauliflowers, lettuces, &c. 
and let them send up their flower-stems. (3553.) 

Protect when and where necessary. (22()6.) 

Propagate by bulbs, roots, offsets, slips in showery 
weather. (1987.) 

Transplant (2079.) the brassica tribe, cardoons, 
endive, lettuce, and other plants and herbs, also 
plants reared in hot-beds. 

Routine culture. Tie up garlic and rocambole 
leaves in knots to check the progress of the flower- 
stalk. Stick and top peas ; top beans ; earth 
up finochio to blanch; also white beet. Thin, 
hoe, weed, and stir the ground as before. Support 
with stakes, and water as far as practicable ; in dry 
weather. 

Taking crops. (2290.) Cut and dry herbs for win- 
ter use. Gather ripe seed. Discontinue cutting 
asparagus at the end of the month. 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Prune and train the summer shoots of all de- 
scriptions of wall and trellis trees. (2110.) 

Thin out the summer shoots of fruit-shrubs, and 
of all fruit-trees, excepting high standards, which 
do not require this nicety. (2576.) 

Routine culture. Mulch, water, fasten by stakes, 
weed, hoe, and rake where wanted. Throw nets 
over cherry-trees and protect the fruit from the 
birds. Water strawberry plots every day in dry 
weather, desisting a little as the fVuit begins to 
ripen. 

Destray insects. Strew sulphur over the mildew, 
water for the acarus ; direct a stream of tobacco 
smoke against the aphis and thrips, but depend on 
your fingers for the thorough eradication of grubs, 
which, at this season, are by far the most mischiev.. 
ous of garden enemies. (2280.) 

Fruit-room and cellar. As in last month. (2298.) 

4 E 



5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. Raise hand- 
glasses over cucumbers on props, and train out the 
runners, in the second or third week. Ridge out 
melons in good earth, in the last fortnight ; cover 
with mats till the end of the third week. (3328. 
and 3329.) 

Hot-beds. Keep up adequate temperatures for 
ripening the fruits by linings. Reinforce melon 
ridges with linings. Train, prune, and impregnate 
as circumstances require. Attend to air, water, 
shade, and even nightly coverings after cold days. 
Keep up proper linings to your beds of pine- 
suckers. 

Pinery. Attend to what was stated last month. 
If you want extraordinary large fruit, and do not 
mind losing the suckers, apply the usual means, 
viz. heat, water, and removal of all stem and root 
suckers. (2829.) 

Forcing department. See last month. Keep up 
successive supplies of kidneybeans, strawberry, and 
fruit-trees in pots. (3338.) 

6. Flower-garden — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow a few hardy and half-hardy annuals for suc- 
cession, as before. (6507. and 6513.) 

Propagate, by cuttings, such plants as are proper 
for this purpose, as they go out of flower. Pipe 
and lay pinks and carnations towards the end of 
the month. (6406 and 6440.) 

Take up bulbs and other tuberous roots, dry them 
in the shade and remove them to boxes or drawers 
in the store-room, wrap the finer sorts in papers. 
(6501.) , 

Transplant (2079.) annuals in the borders and in 
pots for autumn and winter flowering. Biennials 
and perennials may also be transplanted into nur- 
sery rows at this season, or even where they are 
finally to remain. 

Routine culture. Mow, weed, hoe, rake, thin, 
stir, and dress ; and keep up as complete an ap^ 
pearance of polish and high keeping as your 
strength of men and other means will permit. (6191. 
to 6201.) Shade, shelter, water, and attend to 
carnations coming into flower. Destroy earwigs 
and all manner of insects. (2280.) Go round the 
garden frequently and examine everything mi- 
nutely, and reflect on what might be done to pro- 
mote its growth and beauty. To aid you, imagine 
it to be a garden which you were sent to criticise, 
and to be paid according to the number of faults 
you found. Or imagine it your neighbor's garden, or 
the garden of some one you hate. (7438. and 7439.) 

7. Flower-garden — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. Propagate the 
dianthus tribe by pipings under hand-glasses and 
frames. (6406.) 

Hot-beds and pits. Put pots of carnations and 
pink pipings in gentle heat, it will facilitate their 
striking. (6406. and 6440.) Do not forget to give head- 
room to your balsams and other tender annuals, 
which should now be noble-looking plants. Attend 
to pots of cuttings and seedlings ; also to young 
stove plants put into this department for more rapid 
advancement. 

Green-house. As soon as the mulberry comes 
into leaf remove the plants to a fit situation in the 
open air. Some plunge them in ashes ; but the 
major part set them on scoria, gravel, or pavement, 
in a partially shaded situation, a cold bottom and a 
certain degree of shade are essential to their well- 
doing. (6635.) 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Give abundance of air night 
and day, but be moderate as to water. Cease to 
water bulbs soon after they have done flowering ; 
let them go slowly into a state of hybernation, and 
then take them out of the pots and dry them. 

Bark, or moist stove. Increase your heat with 
the lengthening day, and prolonged sun, and by 
consequence increase the concurring agents of vege- 
tation. Propagate by the usual means ; save seeds 
where you can ; destroy insects, and attend to neat, 
ness. (6688, to 6705.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Prune and regulate summer shoots, and take off 
suckers where not wanted to extend the bush or 
propagate the species. (6190.) 
2 



1156 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



Routine culture. "Weed, hoe, rake, stir the sur- 
face, support climbers, regulate the shoots of 
creepers, &c. Water and roll any new-laid gravel 
to combine it properly with the rest. Dress, roll, 
and mow lawns and turf in every form. Keep your 
eyes open to every part of the grounds at this 
season ; for now perfect neatness and the utmost 
polish and high keeping is expected. Do not trust 
to what you are told to do in kalendars, but think 
for yourself: kalendars frequently make mere ma- 
chines of gardeners ; for though man is a thinking 
animal, yet he is also a lazy imitative animal, and 
will not exert himself in any way, and not even 
think, unless urged on by some strong motive. All 
your faults will be discovered, sooner or later, and 
rely on it you will receive a proportionate disgrace 
from your neighbors or visitors ; if you are atten- 
tive to your duty your merits will be discovered in 
like manner, and you will receive appi'opriate 
credit and reputation, which is your capital stock 
in trade, on which you depend for your livelihood. 
(2372.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. Begin budding during the last fort- 
night. Look over all your newly grafted and all 
other trees ; rub off superfluous, irregular, or ill 
placed shoots and suckers, and tie weak grafts and 
dangling shoots from budded stocks to neat stakes. 
(2039.) 

Ornaynental trees and shrubs. Lay the summer 
shoots of roses, hard-wooded evergreens, and other 



sorts which are proper to be propagated in this 
manner. Put in cuttings of young wood pr«q)erly 
ripened at the lower end. Bud rare sorts. (2055.) 

Forest trees. Collect and sow elm-seed in the 
third or fourth week ; or if you do not wish to sow 
it, lay it in the store-loft. (7023.) Seedlings of the 
more choice pines may be thinned where too thick, 
and the thinnings planted and shaded about the 
end of the month. (6997.) Gather Scotch elm-seed 
from the middle to the end of the month. (7203.) At- 
tend to kitchen crops among transplanted trees, 
and in vacant places in general. (7037.) 

1 0. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Fell oak-coppices, if it has not been done before. 
The middle of this month will prove a better time, 
as to the trees, than the middle of May, as thev 
will not bleed so much : but the bark will not peet 
so well. (6941. to 6957.) 

Prune and thin the side shoots of the present 
season, from established trees. (6884.) 

Routine culture. Stake newly planted tall hedge- 
row trees, where not done before. Attend to weeds 
everywhere, and to ground under-crop. Prepare 
ground for autumn sowing or planting. 

Operations on ground and buildings are carried 
on at this season with less advantage than in the 
three preceding months. . The ground is hard and 
difficult to penetrate J and the moisture in new- 
built masonry dries too rapidly. 



JULY. 



Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 



London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 



66 .-5 

60 6 

61 13 



Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 



Average 
of the 
Barometer. 



29 89 
29 445 
29 929 



2-194 inch. 

2M6 

2-614 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the Ji)-st week: the cuckoo {Cuculus canorus) 
leaves off singing; the stone-curlew {Charadrius 
cedicnemus) whistles occasionally late at night ; and 
the golden-crested wren {Motaeilla regulus) now 
and then chirps. 

Second week : the quail {Tetraoferrugineus) calls ; 
the cuckoo-spit, or frog-hopper {Cicada spumaria), 
abounds. 

Third week: young frogs migrate ; hens moult. 
Fourth week : the great horse-fly ( Tabanus hovinus) 
appears ; and partridges fly. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week: enchanter's nightshade {CirccBa 
lutetiana) and lavender {Lavandula spica) in flower, 
and pinks and carnations in full bloom. 

Second week : the fallen star {Tj-e?>2ella nostoc) ap- 
pears, also puff-balls {Lycoperdon bovista), and some- 
times the common mushroom [Agaricus cainpestris). 

Third week: raspberries and gooseberries ripe, 
potatoes in flower, asparagus in berry, the liliums 
in perfection. 

Fourth week: the truffle {Tuber cibarium) now 
hunted or dug up in commons and forests ; night- 
shade {Solanum nigrum), devil's bit {Scabiosa succisa), 
burnct-saxifrage {Pimpinella saxifraga), and a great 
number of plants hi flower. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary vegetables. 

Sow (2071.) salads and lettuce in shady situations, 
for successional crops. Turnip-radish for an autumn 
crop. (3760.) Kidneybeans, in the first week, for a 
late full crop. (3633.) Peas and beans, in the first 
week, and a fortnight afterwards try a small sowing 
for a late crop. (3601.) Endive, in the first week, 
to come in at the close of autumn ; in the third 
week, for a winter crop. (3981.) Broccoli, before 
the 10th, for a late spring crop, (3557.) Finochio, 
for succession, in the first fortnight. (4099.) Round- 
leaved spinage, in the first week, in a shady bor- 
der for a succession. (3771.) Triangular-leaved, or 
prickly spinage, in the last week, in poor ground to 
Stand the winter. (3775 ) York and sugar-loaf cab- 



RE MARKS. 

This was called hay month by the Saxons, and m it are more 
plants in floAier than during any other. The young gar- 
dener should now devote a considerable portion of his 
time to collecting and dry ing specimens, duplicates, and 
triplicates, in order to acquire a stock to exchange with 
brother-gardeners or naturalists ; or with booksellers, ajio- 
thecaries, students, schoolmasters, and clergymen, for the 
loan of books, and for aid and instruction in study. 



bages, in the first week, for autumn use, and in the 
last week, for winter and spring. (3499.) Carrots, 
in the first week, in a shady border. (3718.) Turnips 
twice or thrice, in showery weather. (3698.) Welch 
onions ; for autumn onions, sow the bulbing sorts 
in the last week to stand the winter. (3816.) Cori- 
ander and borage for young crops. (4222. and 4127.) 

To save seed. Mark out the brassica tribe, and 
other esculents in perfection, and let them shoot up 
flower-stems. 

Propagate by slips, offsets, &c. where not done 
before, and where plants have completed their in- 
florescence, and are to be cut down as tarragon 
and other pot-herbs. (4093.) 

Transplant (2079.) as before, and include celery 
and celeriac, endive, &c. 

Routine culture Stick and top peas and kidney- 
beans, top common beans, train cucumbers and 
gourds, earth up the leguminous crops and pota- 
toes ; hoe, thin, and stir the surface wherever ne- 
cessary, among all descriptions of crops ; water, as 
far as your time will permit, and particular crops 
require. 

Taking crops. (2290.) Take up shallots, and dry 
them for winter use; also rocambole and garlic 
when ready. Gather ripe seeds and onions, and cut 
herbs in blossom, drying and storing both. Gather 
the fruit of young gourds for pies, stews, and pick- 
ling. 

Destroy insects, and ward off vermin. (2276.) 
4. Hardy fruit department. 

Pla7it strawberries in the open garden; and in 
pots for next winter's forcing. (4717. 

Prune, train, thin, and regulate all the summer 
shoots of wall and espalier trees, and dwarf and tall 
standards. (2573.) 

Routine culture. Hoe and weed fruit-tree bor- 
ders. Hang up nets, v/ater and mulch where neces- 
sary. Water alpine strawberries, which will now 
be in full bearing, every third or fourth day, unless 
in a shady situation. 

Destroy (2276.) insects : keep earwigs, ants, boys, 
and idle women from fruits, as cherries, ticc. ap- 
proaching to a state of ripeness. 

Fruit-room. (2298.) This will now be empty ; 
clean and wash every part of it, and air it well for 
occasional summer and next winter's use. 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1157 



FrvU-cellar. (2299.) If you have attended pro- 
perly to casking up keeping-apples and pears, you 
will still have a supply, and even of grapes in some 
cases. If the cellar gets too warm, the casks should 
be removed to the ice-house. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. Plant out 
melons and cucumbers shading and watering, &c. 
(3164. and 3271.) 

Hot-beds and pits. Prune melons and cucumbers ; 
give air and water, and attend to shading and weed- 
ing ; collect mushroom-spawn ; attend to young 
pines. (2718.) 

Pinery. You will now begin to cut fruit in 
abundance. See to the stools : earth them up, so 
as to cause the suckers to strike root : put them 
into a brisk bottom-heat, and give proper supplies 
of water. You will thus gain much time, and 
profit from the expiring strength of the parent 
plant as long as possible. This is the true way to 
fruit a pine-plant in eighteen months or even less 
time. Suckers thus treated will, next spring, be 
equal to two-year-old plants. (2936.) 

Forcing-houses. Expose those houses, where 
crops are taken, to the natural climate, by remov- 
ing, as far as possible,, the roof, and even the ends 
and front, if they are moveable. (3110.) 

6*. Flovi^er-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Saw a few annuals, for succession, and prolong- 
ation in pots through winter. (6507.) 

Propagate (6490.) from cuttings of plants going 
out of flower; from rooted slips of such as are 
ripening their seed, as auriculas and the primula 
tribe ; go on piping and laying the dianthus tribe. 
{6412.) 

Take up bulbs as they go out of flower : this work 
should generally be completed by the end of the 
first week, unless for the lily tribe, the colchicum, 
and a few others. 

Transplant late sowings of annuals, and also bi- 
ennials and perennials, into nursery rows. (2079.) 

Romtine culture. Eradicate all weeds the moment 
they appear : keep the surface always fresh, and 
rather rough, never smooth and battered. It is 
better to have little clods and knots of earth, than 
to have a naked or dug surface as smooth as a 
table. The clods and knots make variety of light 
and shade, and are besides more favorable for the 
admission of air, heat, and water to the roots. 
Shade, shelter, and water. Gather seeds as they 
ripen, and dry them in the seed-room or lofts, the 
windows being open. Destroy insects ; cut out 
broken stalks, and diseased parts of plants. Cut 
down stalks which have done flowering, and remove 
all decayed leaves. 

Gather flowers neatly with a knife, and so as not 
to disfigure the plant. (6196.) Gather in general 
from the reserve-garden, so as not to disfigure the 
borders. 

Store-room. (1704.) Look over your bulbs now 
and then, to see that none get mouldy. See also to 
your newly put-up seeds. (1705.) 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Most of 



these, at this season, are given up to the kitchen- 
garden, or used to protect at nights the tender an- 
nuals, some of which, as the humble and sensitive 
plant, cannot so well be put out in the boraers. 
(6724. and 6725.) 

Hot.beds and pits. (2678.) Little use is now made 
of them by the florist, unless for propagation of 
stove plants. Attend to cuttings from whatever 
department If you are endeavoring to flower the 
more delicate aquatics, see to the keeping up a re- 
gular heat. 

Green-hause. {69.11.) This will now be filled with 
pots of tender annuals, which only require shifting 
now and then till of a certain growth ; and then 
only common routine culture. 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Some set out a part of the suc- 
culent tribe at this season. If you do, let it be in a 
very warm situation : heavy and continued rains 
prove very injurious to succulents in the open air. 

Bark, or moist-stove. (6214.) Increase the tem- 
perature with the increase of light, and add air and 
water accordingly. Attend to all the minor points 
of culture. See that the floors or paths of your 
stoves are swept every day, and wash your plants 
well with the engine, otherwise they will soon get 
unsightly. Be sure to dash this water on all plants 
in blossom, in order to curtail their beauty, and lest 
they should set fruit. 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Prune (2110.) as in last month : box-edgings and 
evergreen hedges in the last week of this month, if 
the season is a forward one. (6190.) 

Routine culture as in June. 

Laivns. (6191. and 6097.) Attend to these, accord- 
ing as the weather may be showery or otherwise. 
In dry weather, set your men to mowing at three 
o'clock, and let them rest from eleven till three 
o'clock : in moist weather the time of the day is of 
less consequence. In France and Italy, the work- 
ing gardeners, during summer, may be said to do 
the principal part of their work early in the morn- 
ing, and late in the evening. 

Gravel-walks. Weed and roll these in moist 
weather. When dry, and the gravel becomes loose, 
water and roll. (1957.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. Attend to budding, and look over 
your grafted trees ; pinch off all obtruding shoots 
and suckers. (2039.) 

Ornamental trees and shi-itbs. Continue laying 
summer shoots, and plant cuttings and bud as in last 
month. (2050.) 

Foo cst trees. Sow elm-seed ; attend to weeding 
and cleaning all beds and rows of seedlings, or other 
nurslings, and of transplanted trees. (7025.) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Prune (2110.) evergreens in the last week, if the 
summer has been so favorable as nearly to ripen 
the wood. 

Routiiie culture. Attend to kitchen, or field 
crops, among young plantations ; and to large 
weeds everywhere. Do not forget hedges and 
other fences; keep all sorts of fences at all times 
in repair. (6820. ) Few operations in landscape-gar- 
dening can now be commenced ; but some, as ex- 
cavating for water, &c. may go on. 



AUGUST. 



Weather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Kain. 


REMARKS. 

This is the barn, or harvest month of the Saxons ; many seeds 
of herbaceous vegetables ripen in this month, and most 
sorts of culinary crops, raised in the open garden, are now 
in perfection. In.sects, especially the winged tribes, now 
abound ; and the young gardener should be assiduous in 
collecting them for the same object as he collects speci- 
mens of plants. By carrying a small box in his pocket, he 
may pick them up while at work. 


London • 
Edinburgh 
Dublin • 


65 85 
60 6 
62 82 


2 


30 06 

29 828 

30 172 


0- 824 inch. 

1- 996 • 
5-858 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week : flying ants (.Formica) appear ; 
bees kill their drones ; and the swallow-tailed but- 
terfly [Papilio machaon) appears. 

Second week .- young martins (Hirundo urbica) and 
swallows ( Hirundo rustica) begin to congregate, and 
swifts {Hirundo apus) to depart; the whame, or 
burrel-fly ((Estrus bovis), lays eggs on horses. 

4 



Third week : the black-eyed marble-butterfly 
(Papilio semele) appears; various birds reassume 
their spring notes. 

Fourth week : the nuthatch {Sitta europcea) chat- 
ters ; the stone-curlew ( Charadrius cedicnemus) 
whistles at night; the goatsucker Caprimulgus 
europcBus) and young owls [Stri.r ulula) make a 
noise in the evening ; robin-redbreast CMotac'dla 
rubecola) sings; and rooks roost on their nest, 
trees. 
E 3 



1158 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



2. Kalendar of vegetable nature roui>d 
London. 

In the first week : melilot (Trifolium officinale), 
rue {Ruta graveolens), yellow succory {Picris hiera- 
cioides), and burdock {Arctium lappa), in flower j 
the bread-corns ripe. 

Second weeic : wild clary {Salva verbenacea), mea- 
dow-rue {Thalictnim flavum), ploughman's spike- 
nard {Conyxa squarrosa), and various other natives, 
in flower. 

Third week : the mallow {Malva), lavatera, holly- 
hock {Alcca rosea), and lobelias, among the garden- 
flowers, and the polygonums and potamogetons 
among the wild plants, now in blossom. 

Fourth week : the autumnal crocus {Colchicum 
autumnale), aster, solidago, senecio paludosus, teasel 
{Dipsacus fullonum), and various other plants, in 
flower ; the earlier varieties of all the hardy kernel- 
fruits ripe. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow (2071.) turnip for a main crop, in the first 
week ; but sowings made after the 15th seldom 
fully succeed (3698.) ; make frequent sowings of 
small salading, radishes, and lettuce (3760.) : the 
latter for autumn and winter crops. Parsley may 
now be sown for winter and spring use, this being 
the most natural season for sowingbiennials. (4282.) 
Some of the large .sorts of cabbage, in the first 
week, to come in in the autumn of the following year 
and subsequent winter ; and early sorts in the first 
week, for coleworts next winter and spring. Spin- 
age, in the first or second weeks, for a main winter 
crop. (3775.) Carrots in the first and third weeks 
for drawing young in spring. (3718.) Endive and 
corn-salad for winter and spring ; chervil for a late 
crop ; onions for a full winter crop ; angelica, fen- 
nel, scurvy-grass, and blessed-thistle for next year. 
Cauliflowers twice, in the third and fourth week, 
for crops, to stand over the winter, in sheltered 
borders, or under frames. American cress, in the 
last fortnight, for a spring crop. 

Propagate (1987.) by slips and cuttings, where ne- 
cessary. 

Transplant (2079.) as in last month, and include 
leeks, perennial herbs, &c. 

Routine culture. Displace the suckers from such 
artichoke heads as you would grow to the greatest 
magnitude ; stick peas and runner kidneybeans ; 
earth up the brassica and leguminous tribe, and po- 
tatoes in so far as requisite. Land up celery, endive, 
white beet, finochio, &c. for blanching. Hoe, thin, 
weed, stir the surface, water, shade, and attend to 
neatness and order ; and clear off all crops the mo- 
ment they are done with. (2367.) 

Taking crops. (2290.) Take up the alliaceous 
tribes as before ; gather pickling cucumbers j cut 
herbs ; gather ripe seeds. 

Destroy insects. (2276.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant {20n.) strawberries, as directed for last 
month. 

Prune (2573.1, regulate, train, and otherwise 
arrange the summer shoots of all fruit-trees as 
directed for last month. 

Routine culture. Hoe, rake, weed, and stir the sur- 
face under gooseberry compartments, and in general 
under and around all fruit-trees. Where fruit is 
beginning to ripen, be very moderate in thinning 
the leaves. Mat up small fruits on north walls, in- 
tended to be preserved till late in autumn ; water 
spring-planted trees in dry weather, also strawberry- 
plants in blossom and fruit. Dress strawberry-beds 
that have done bearing. (4726. and 4727.) 

Take (2290.) gooseberries and currants, with the 
fruit-scissors or tongs. Apricots and such wall- 
fruit as is ripe with the fruit-gatherer. (See figs. 141. 
to 152.) 

Destroy (2276.) insects ; the acarus will now be 
your greatest enemy. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. Sow long prickly 
cucumbers for a late crop, to receive the aid of arti- 
ficial heat in October and November. Sow in pots, or 
make layers or cuttings for the same purpose. (3185.) 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Recruit the linings of 
melon-beds, and prune, train, weed, water, and im- 
pregnate all the cucumis tribe. 



Mushrooms. Search for spawn, in cow -pastures 
more especially, and take care of it when hot. 

(3410.) 

Pinery. See last month. 

Forcing-houses. (2696.) Most of the forced peaches 
will now be gathered ; fully expose tlie trees, unless 
you have so great a proportion of grapes under the 
rafters, or running along the top of your trellis, as 
to render it worth while to keep the sashes on to 
ripen them. It is however better never to have 
them together in such contending proportions. 
Cherry-tree.s and others in pots, and of whirch the 
shoots are ripe, should be put in a state of hy- 
bernation, by removal to a cold cellar, or shaded 
border. This will fit them better for a succeeding 
early artificial spring. 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow (6346.) auricula and other primula seeds in 
pots and boxes, so as to admit of winter protection. 
These seeds come up stronger now than if kept till 
the following spring; and, though they will not 
flower sooner than the second spring after sowing, 
yet they will then flower much stronger than plants 
just a year old. (6347. to 6349.) Mignonette, stocks, 
and other annuals in pots, for prolongation through 
the winter. (6486.) 

Propagate (1987.) by all the usual means. This 
is now the best time for taking off" rooted slips of 
the auricula : the Lancashire florists will never 
touch tliese till the third day of this month, when 
their florists' sales commence. (6369.) 

Take up bulbs and tuber roots of the few plants 
which had not ripened their stalks before, as of the 
martagon and red and white lily. 

Pla7it dried o^ffirts of bulbs, as these from tlieir 
small size and tenderness, rather suffer from being 
long out of the ground. Plant autumn-flowering 
bulbs and Guernsey lily. (6315.) 

Transplant (2079.) most sorts of biennials and 
perennials, and your latest sowings of annuals and 
half-hardy annuals intended for the borders. 

Routine culture. Prepare composts. Hoe, dig, 
rake, stir, weed, tliin, shade, shelter, proj), stick 
sweetpeas, and other climbers. Water, and gather 
seeds ; mow verges and glades where they exist in 
the flower-garden, according as you find they re- 
quire it. 

Store-room. (1704.) Look once a-month at your 
roots and seeds; and gather, dry, clean, and store 
up seeds as they ripen, attending to name and date 
each packet or bag accurately. 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. See last 
month. 

Hot-beds. (2678.) Attend to such cuttings as are 
forwarding in these, and to late cro}>s of tender an- 
nuals. Prepare successions of tender annuals for 
the green-house. 

Greeji-house. (6211.) Attend to your tender an- 
nuals ; and do not forget creepers, and vines, and 
such plants as being planted in the ground cannot 
be turned out. (GCA^l. to 6651.) 

Dry-stove. (6176.) About the end of the month, 
it will be safe to rei)lace such plants as you had ven- 
tured in the open air. Any you put in cold-pits, 
may remain a month longer. (6663. to 6668.) 

J}ark, or moist stove. (6214.) See last month. At- 
tend to creepers, climbers, and vines, also aquatics, 
which, if you have a proper aquarium, will now be 
in great perfection, and highly beautiful. (6180.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Pla7d (2077.) evergreens towards the end of the 
month ; water, mulch, and shade, for some days, if 
very delicate sorts. (2098.) 

Prww^ evergreens (2110.) ; roses for forcing. (6559. 
and 6560.) 

Routine culture. Hoe, rake, weed, &c. as before. 
Prepare ground for planting ; dress gravel and grass 
as in June and July. 

For?n and repair lawns, by turfing or sowing. It 
is now an excellent season for sowing lawns. See 
that you make use of the proper grasses, according 
to the soil and situation. Attend to gravel walks. 
(1957.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 
Fruit-trees. (2039.) Finish budding of the late va- 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1159 



rieties of the stove fruits, before the middle of the 
month. (2056.) Look over the grafted trees, and 
slacken the bandages of your earlier and most ad- 
vanced grafts and buds. 

Ornamental trees and shrubs. Plant cuttings of 
hardy evergreens, as laurel-bay, privet, box, &c. in 
the last fortnight. (7032.) Provide heath and bog- 
earth for American and other sorts. (1981.) Go on 
with budding rare species. 

Forest trees. Sow elm-seed, if you have not done 
it before ; or do not choose to defer it till spring. 
(7025.) 

Routine culture. Hoe, weed, &c. and keep 
every part in perfect order ; look to your kitchen- 
crops and ripening-seeds. Prepare ground from 
■which kitchen-crops have been removed for 
planting. 



10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Plant (2077.) evergreens in the last week, if the 
weather is moisL Water to settle the roots, and 
mulch and stake according to circumstances. (2098.) 

PrMwethe birch, wild cherry, and maple tribe, at 
the end of the month, when the leaves are begin- 
ning to fall, as they are apt to bud later or earlier. 
(2110.) Evergreens at the end of the month. (6572.) 

Prepai-e ground for planting next month, either 
by ploughing, digging, trenching, or pitting, as the 
case may be. (6816. and 6817.) 

Destroy ferns, nettles, and other bulky weeds in 
park-scenery, by bruising their stems with the 
weeding-pincers {fig. 146.), close by the surface : as 
cutting them over is found a less permanent check 
to their flowering again, 



SEPTEMBER. 



Weather 
at 


Averajje of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Kain. 


REMARKS. 

The temperature begins now to decline and to vary ; ths 
nights begin to lengthen, and heavy dews and diminished 
transpiration and evaporation render artificial watering in 
the open air less necessary, unless against trees on walls, to 
keep down insects. Many varieties of fruits ripen during 
this and the former month, which the young gardener 
ought to study, and, when he can afford time from other 
studies, he should make drawings of a few. 


r,ondon - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


59 65 
b\ 3 
59 35 


3 5 


.^0 09 
'29 739 
30 239 


0-482 inch. 

3-470 

3-021 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week : young broods of goldfinches 
{Fringilla carduelis) appear ; the linnet {Fringilla 
iinota) congregates ; the bull {Bos taurus) makes 
his shrill autumnar noise; and swallows {Hirundo 
rustica) sing. 

Second week : common owls {Strix flammea) hoot ; 
the saffjron-butterfly {Papilio hyale) and willow 
red under-wing moth {Phalcena picta) appear ; 
herrings {Clupea harengus) are now cheap. 

Third week: the ring-ouzle {Turdus torquatus) 
appears ; the flycatcher {Muscicapa atricapilla) 
withdraws. 

Fourth week : the stare {Sfurnus vulgaris) con- 
gregates ; the wood-lark {Alauda arborea) sings ; 
the woodcock {Scolopax rusticola) and feldfare 
( Turdus pilaris) appear ; and the swallow {Hirundo 
rustica) departs. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week : the fungus balotus albus ap- 
pears ; traveller's joy {Clematis alba) and parnassia 
palustris in flower. 

Second week : catkins of the hazel and birch 
formed; blossoms, and green, red, and black berries 
.found on the bramble at the same time ; leaves 
of the sycamore, birch, lime, mountain-ash, and 
«lm begin to change. 

Third week : the ivy {Hedera helix), laurel {Pru- 
nus laurocerasus), and furze {Ulca: ewropceus) in 
flower. 

Fowrth week : hips, haws, and nuts ripe ; leaves 
of plane-tree iPlatanus) tawny; of the hazel, yel- 
low ; of the oak, yellowish green ; of the sycamore, 
dirty brown ; of the maple, pale yellow ; of the ash, 
fine lemon ; of the elm, orange ; of the hawthorn, 
tawny yellow ; of the cherry, red ; of the hornbeam, 
bright yellow ; of the willow, hoary. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow (2071.) small salads twice or thrice on a south 
border, chervil, corn-salad, cress of sorts may still be 
sown to stand over winter. (4'032. to 4072.) Radish in 
the first week for a late autumn crop. (3760.) Lettuce 
in the first week for standing the winter under a 
south wall, and under cold-frames. (3970.) Spin- 
age in the first fortnight for use late iii spring. 
(3773.) 

Protect cucumbers and melons, at night, by mat- 
ting or otherwise as the case may be. (3164.) 

Propagate (1985.) as in April, culinary herbs and 
under-shrubs. 

Transplant (2079.) all articles intended for use the 
current autumn, during the first week. The bras- 
sica tribe, leeks, celery, endive, &c. for winter and 
spring use. Seedling cauliflowers, where you think 
you can ensure their standing through the winter. 
Try a bed of sandy loam or lime rubbish under a 

4 E 



tree or south wall. (3546.) Make plantations of 
herbs. 

Routine culture. Earth up and stir only in dry 
weather. Stick, stop, support, cut down, blanch, 
and thin Where you see it necessary; no time is to 
be lost at this season. 

Taking crops. (2290.) Take up potatoes, and do 
it effectually. Gather pickling cucumbers, onions, 
nasturtium-seeds, and other pickling articles. Ga- 
ther herbs and take ripe seed. Remove all de- 
cayed leaves, haulm, stems, &c. and the remains of 
all crops, which have been taken, so as to presence 
order and neatness, and make way for other crops 
or winter fallows. (2600.) 

Destroy insects and vermin. (2276.) 

Store-room and cellar. Dress, sort, and put up 
seeds which have been well dried. Finish housing 
edible bulbs of the alliaceous tribe and potatoes 
(2298. and 2299.) 

4. Hardy fmit department. 

Plant (2077.) strawberries for a main plantation, 
this being the best month in the year for that pur- 
pose. <4717.) Pot strawberries for forcing. (3336.) 

Prepare ground for planting, and towards the end 
of the month, if the wood of young peach and apri- 
cot trees be ripe you may remove them. 

Prune (2110.) and regulate summer shoots, but cut 
little after the middle of the month. Thin leaves 
sparingly. 

Routine culture. Provide composts for recruiting 
old borders and forming new ones. Protect choice 
fruit, especially grapes, from birds and flies. After 
the crops of wall-trees or compartment borders 
are gathered, dig and dress the borders. Dress and 
fork up strawberry-beds. 

Take (2290.) pea"ches, grapes, early apples, pears, 
plums, &c. the dessert sorts, with fruit-gatherer, and 
sorts for the kitchen, with the hand gloved. Choose, 
if possible, dry weather for gathering all sorts of 
fruit. 

Destroy insects, especially acarus, and guard 
against wasps and large blue flies (2276.) 

Fruit-room. (2298.) Lay up apples and pears for 
keeping a few months ; in general, the long keeping 
sorts ripen late in the season. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without aHificial heat. Sow small sa- 
lads under hand-glasses or frames in the last week. 
(4078.) Take off the glasses from cauliflower-plants 
in all mild days. 

Hot-beds and pits. Attend to late crops of melons 
and cucumbers ; keep up the temperature, and be 
discreet in the use of water. (3164. and 3271.) Begin 
to build mushroom-beds, either in or out of doors. 
This month and March are the two best seasons. 
Plant suckers and crowns of pines on rotten tan 
placed on dung, or other fermenting beds or pits 

Pinery. (2697.) You will still have abundance of 
fruit ; attend to what was said in July. Renovate 
your bark or leaf beds when necessary, and keep up 
the full heat till your fruit is chiefly ripened otF, or 
4 



1160 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



removed (pot and all) to the fruit-room to ripen 
leisurely. Your young plants will grow faster in this 
month than in any month of the year. 

Forcing-houses. (2396.) Late crops of grapes will 
be coming in, but most of the forcing-houses will 
now be in a state of rest. Keep off all the sashes, 
unless you mean to force very early, in which case 
cover the house with mats from the sun, and admit 
air from the north, in order to promote a cool, dry 
atmosphere as best for hybernation. 

6. Flower-gai:fien. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow the primula tribe, if not done last month. 
(6339. and 6388.) The seeds of most biennials and pe- 
rennials may be sown this month with advantage, 
provided you can afford protection to them in winter. 
On the whole, however, it appears better to defer 
the business till spring, unless with a few sorts 
which sometimes lie a whole year before they come 
up, when sown at tliat season. Among them may 
be enumerated columbine, agrimony, chelone, &c. 
If sown now their seeds will come up the following 
spring, and they will flower the same season. (6493.) 

Propagate {1985.) by all the modes, but more es- 
pecially from slips, rooted or unrooted, the stalky 
part of herbaceous plants being now of a proper 
texture and maturity for this purpose. 

Plant crocus and other bulbs, and such autumn- 
flowering bulbs as you have neglected to plant early 
in spring. (6501.) 

Transplant as in last month. (2079.) 

Shelter. (2206 ) If the end of the month be wet, 
hoop and mat such plants as will be injured by over 
much wet. Among these are the primula tribe 
and tender annuals planted in groups over the bor- 
ders ; also bulbs, as the tuberose and Guernsey lily, 
planted or plunged in the borders. 

Routine culture. Prepare ground for florists' 
flowers. Trench and sift the earth where tulips and 
hyacinths are to be planted, at least three feet 
deep. 

Store-room. See to roots and seeds. (1704.) 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Replace 
the more tender auriculas in the frames, but keep 
off the glasses, excepting when it rains. 

Hot-beds. See last month. (2678.) Most of the 
green-house and hot-house plants will now be ad- 
vanced : remove them to cold-frames, or to the 
green-house or dry-stove, according to their natures, 
to harden them gradually. Some may go directly 
to the stove. 

Green-house. The beginning of this month is a 
fit time to repair, paint, glaze, and clean the flues, 
&c. of every description of house not in crop. Re- 
place some of the more tender plants from the open 
air at the beginning, and the whole in the course 
of the last week of the month. Dress them pro- 
perly and set them in natural groups, not in the 
usual method. (See particularly 6636. ) 



Bry-slove. Replace all the succulents and other 
plants, which you had put in the open air, and ar- 
range every part of your stage for the winter, If 
you cannot form natural groups, at least put every 
genus by itself (6205.) 

Sark, or moist stoife. Begin to lessen the stimuli 
towards the end of the month, in order to harden 
for the approaching winter. Plant bulbs which 
have been taken Up and dried. Attend to routine 
culture. (6688.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Pla7it (2077.) evergreens generally ; deciduous spe- 
cies in the last week. 

Prune (2110.) evergreens all the month : deci- 
duous species when the leaves are dropped. 

Routine culture as in last month. Remove all de- 
caying flowers that do not bear ornamental seeds or 
berries. Dress and mow turf, and roll and clean 
gravel. 

Form and repair lawns, or verges, or grassy glades. 
(2100. and 2101.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. (2039.) Sow cherry and plum stones 
for stocks, also peach and almond stones for the 
same purpose, or for new varieties. Gooseberry and 
currant cuttings may be planted in the last week of 
the month, in sheltered dry situations, where they 
will not be much damaged by alternate frosts and 
thaws in winter. 

Transplant (2079.) stocks from the seed-bed to 
the lines, where they are to remain to be grafted. 
Look to the budded and grafted trees. The matting 
may generally be removed early in the month. 

Ornamental trees and shrubs. (6570.) Sow brier 
and other rose seeds. Plant cuttings of hardy ever- 
greens. Take off layers of the sorts which have 
been laid two years, or which root well within one 
season. Plant cuttings of a few of the deciduoiis 
shrubs which are most hardy, or of tree-currant, 
ivy, honeysuckle, yellow-berried elder, &c. Take 
off suckers, and plant them in nursery rows. 

Forest-trees. Gather and sow all sorts of deci. 
duous tree-seeds. If you do not sow them, take 
them to the seed-loft, or rot-heap for preservation. 
Plant and prune evergreens, as also the wild cherry, 
birch, and sycamore. Gather seeds of all sorts now 
ripe. (6982) 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scener)\ 

Thin woods and coppices ; and where the trees 
are wanted, take them carefully up^ if they are 
large, they should have been previously prepared a 
year ago. (6955.) 

Plant (2077.) deciduous trees, generally, and even 
the larch, spruce fir, and Scotch pine. 

Prepare for planting by fencing and aU the sub- 
sequent processes. (6820.) 

Operate on ground, and recommence building 
walls or other works belonging to the department 
of landscape-gardening. 



OCTOBER. 



Weather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Rain. 


REMARKS. 

Grapes and other late fruits ripen during this month, 
and some main culinary crops are gathered and housed. 
A few specimens of plants may still be collected, and many 
species of the animal kingdom. Not one animated being 
should be neglected from the worm upwards. Collec- 
tions of spiders are best made during this month, and 
the young gardener may continue to dissect and study 
the pulpy fruits. 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


52 81 
49 7 
61 


4 „ 


29 69 
29 339 
29 76 


2- 027 inch. 

3- 234 
2-708 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week: the red-wing (Turdus iliactts) 
arrives ; snakes and vipers bury themselves. 

Second week : hooded crows {Corvus comix) and 
wood-pigeons {Columba palumbus) arrive; hen- 
chatfinches {Fringilla coelebs) congregate, and pre- 
pare for migration, leaving their males in this 
country. 

Third week : the snipe {Scolopax galhnago) ap- 
pears in the meadows ; wildgeese {Anas sylvestris) 
leave the fens, and go to the rye-lands. 

Fourth week: the tortoise (Testudo grcecd) be- 
gins to bury himself in the ground, and rooks visit 
their nest-trees ; some larks {Alaudie) sing, and 



the woodcock {Scolopax rusticola) returns ; spiders' 
webs abound. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first week : strawberry-tree {Arbutus unedo), 
holly {Ilex aquifolium), China hollyhock {Alcea chi- 
nensis), and China aster {Aster chinensis), in bloom. 

Second week : catkins of some species of salix 
formed; leaves of the asp almost all off; of the 
Spanish chestnut, yellow ; of the sugar-maple {Acer 
saccharinum), scarlet ; of the common birch, yellow 
and gold ; and of the weeping-birch, gold and bright- 
red colored. 

Third week : clematis calycina in flower ; some 
horse-chestnuts and acacias quite denuded of leaves. 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



1161 



Fourth week : various plants, especially annuals, 
continue in flower; leaves of marsh-elder {Sam- 
bucus ebulus), ot a fine pink ; of stag's-horn sumach, 
of a purplish red ; of the American oaks, of line 
shades of yellow, orange, red, and purple. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow (2071.) small salads, lettuces, and radishes 
in the first week. If mild weather continues 
they will come in about Christmas. Mazagan 
beans, and hotspur or frame-peas (3601.), in the 
third or last week, to see if they will stand the 
winter. (3R16.) 

To save seed. Transplant cabbage, savoy, 
beet, parsnep, carrot, turnip, bulbing and Welsh 
onion. Mark what is said (3508. and 3537.) as to 
the danger of bastardy among the cruciferje family. 
(3592.) 

Protect all newly risen annuals, and newly depo- 
sited seeds, as also parsley on the approach of 
frost. (2206.) 

Propagate (1985.) the alliaceous tribe and culinary 
perennials. 

Transplant (2079.) endive and lettuce on warm 
borders, and cabbages in close rows or in beds, to 
remain in that state till wanted as plants in spring. 
Cauliflowers in the last week, to receive the pro- 
tection of frames. (3545.) 

Routine culture. Earth up and stir the surface 
only in fine dry weather. Hoc, rake, thin, weed, 
and dress oflTall beds of winter crops. Protect cau- 
liflowers from heavy rains by breaking a large leaf 
and folding it over the flower. As crops are cleared, 
dig and trench the vacant ground. 
I Take up (2290.) potatoes, Jerusalem artichokes, 
beet, parsnep, salsify, scorzonera, skirret, tap-rooted 
parsley, and horse-radish of two summers' growth. 
Preserve them in dry sand. 

Destroy insects. (2280.) 

Root-cellar. See that this is perfectly dry, and that 
abundance of sand is laid over the roots. 

Store-room. Finish cleaning and putting up seeds, 
and see that all you have are in a good state, and 
not attacked by vermin. (1704.) 

4. Hardy fruit department. 

Plant (9.011.) all sorts of hardy fruit-trees as soon 
as the leaves have dropped ofi^, but not before, as 
some practise ; for in this state neither their shoots 
nor roots are ripe. Give ample waterings after 
planting. 

Protect (2206.) fig-trees as soon as their leaves 
have fallen. Shield late grapes from frost by mat- 
ting. Immerse pots containing plants intended to 
be forced, into dry old tan .or ashes to save their 
roots from frost. 

Prune (2110.) all sorts of fruit-trees excepting the 
raspberry, elder, and fig, which being trees of much 
pith, or medulla, are apt to die back from the point 
of section-cut place, when pruned at this season, 
and are therefore better left till spring. 

Routine culture._ Prepare ground for new plant- 
ations. Dig and ridge up where the trees are 
already pruned. Winter-dress strawberry-beds. 

Take (2290.1 grapes, apples, pears, and other 
fruits. 

Fruit-room. (2298.) Lay all fruits first here till 
thoroughly dried, and then barrel up the longest 
keepers, and remove them to the fruit-cellar. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Plant 
lettuces and cauliflowers under frames, to stand the 
winter. Sow small salads in the second week, and 
last fortnight under frames or hand-glasses. 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Keep up the declining 
heat of such beds as have not yet ripened off their 
crops. Dress those which have done bearing, and 
prick in lettuce or cauliflower plants. Prepare 
mint and other herbs for forcing, by putting them 
in pots or boxes. Get up mushroom-beds if not 
done in September. Plants pine-suckers in the open 
bed or pit, as they are taken off. Cover well at 
nights. (2206.) 

Pinery. This is a general time for shifting and 
renewing the bark-bed. Do not put the plants into 
very large pots, as they will not grow much in win- 
ter. Till the last week of the month your plants 
will grow rapidly. (2697.) 

Forcing-houses. (2940.) Prune and in general 
cleanse and repair the houses and flues, mend 



broken glass, and paint the whole when necessarv. 

(2695.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Sow (2071.) ahnuals in pots, for prolongation, in 
cold frames and pits, and some of the hardier sorts 
in warm borders, to come in early next spring, if 
the winter should prove mild. The sorts fit for 
this are larkspur, adonis, belvedere, pansy, persi- 
caria, annual stock, and strawberry blite. 

Propagate (1985.), but chiefly at this season by 
dividing the root, as of daisies and of other edging 
plants, irises, &c. 

Plant most of the border-bulbs about the end of 
this month ; and you may even plant florists' ane- 
mones in properly prepared beds. (2077.) 

Transplant (2079.) biennials and perennials, in the 
flower-nursery, to stand till the spring. Strong 
plants may be moved where they are finally to 
remain. (6490. and 6505.) 

Protect (2206.) auriculas, carnations, and other 
florists' flowers from heavy rains by mats and hoops, 
or glass frames. Begin at the end of the month 
to remove dahlia roots to be dried in an open shed, 
and then carried to the store-room. 

Routine culture as in last month. Prepare com- 
posts. Stir the ground only in dry weather. If the 
season has been very dry, flower-borders may be 
dug over about the end of the month. Attend, 
above all things, to neatness. Do not trust to 
any kalendar for directions in this, or any point, 
but endeavor to bring your own brain into work, 
and try and look at your works with the eye 
of a critic and an enemy, or even of a strangeh 
(7438.) 

7. Flow^er-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Begin 
about the middle of the month to fill frames and 
pits with pots of mignonette, stocks, &c. for pro- 
longation through the winter. 

Hotbeds and pits. (2678.) Roses which have been 
some time in a state of hybernation and in the 
shade, may now be put in bottom heat, as may 
hyacinths and some other bulbs. Water-glasses 
may now be brought into use. Observe, in the first 
place, to plant the bulbs in earth for a week or fort- 
night, which will make them strike roots more 
freely, and then take them up and put them in the 
water-glasses. Force them forward a week or two 
in frames, before you remove them to the drawing- 
room. Continue to plant some every fortnight for 
succession. (6502 ) 

Green-house. (6211.) Replace all your plants, if 
you have not already done so. All your winter's 
credit depends on the style in which you do this : 
give air night and day, unless the thermometer drop 
to 35 degrees. Water sparingly. (6211. to 6213.) 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Apply fires towards the end 
of the night, so as to keep a medium temperature 
with fire-heat of 46 or 48 degrees. Arrange the 
plants for the winter. Pot and set in bulbs of most 
sorts. 

Ra^k, or moist stove. Lessen your temperature 
by degrees ; and also your air and water. A good 
medium heat for this month will be 70 degrees, 
which wiU require fire-heat, even if the bark-bed is 
in full force. (6214. to 6216.) 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery. 

Plant (2077.) all the hardier trees and shrubs 
where the ground is not apt to be rendered very 
wet during winter : very delicate sorts leave till 
spring. This is the best season for planting. 

Prune (2110.) evergreens; but finish, if possible, 
in the beginning of the month. Deciduous sorts as 
soon as the leaves fall. 

Routine culture. Clear away all refuse, weeds, 
and decayed twigs. Roll, mow, sweep, hoe, weed, 
and remove moss and worm-casts. 

Form and repair lawns as bejore. (2100. and 2101.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. Sow for stocks as directed for last 
month. The plum, cherry, almond, medlar, apple, ' 
pear, quince, barberry, service-tree, walnut, filbert, 
and common hazel-nut, may now be sown to greater 
advantage than in spring, provided you can keep 
the vermin from them during winter. Lay the 



1162 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



mulberry, or any other sort generally propagated in 
that way. Plant cuttings of elder ; but it is rather 
too late for the ribes tribe. Remove raspberry 
suckers^ Remove fruit-trees to their final situations, 
as soon as they have lost their leaves. This month, 
in all dry situations, is the best month in the year 
for transplanting fruit-trees. 

Ornamental trees and shrubs. Sow the seeds of 
deciduous sorts. Lay deciduous sorts as their wood 
ripens. Plant out in nursery rows : shelter where 
requisite. (2206.) 

Forest trees. Sow most sorts, as directed for last 
month ; but take care to guard against vermin. 
Gather haws, sea and holly berries, hips, &c. and 
take them to the rot-heap. Lay and propagate by 
cuttings some of the timber-growing willows and 
poplars. Plant and prune in the nursery lines as 
required. (6083. to 70o7 ) 



1 0. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Ftant (2077.) generally as long as the weather is 
mild ; but prefer the spring for verj' wet, late, bleak 

situations. (.6838. to 6840.) 

T/iin, prune, and fell generally, but do not fell 
barking-trees, or remove thinnings of the oak, larch. 
Sec. so large as to be worth barking. 

Prepare for planting, as directed for last month. 
This is a very fit season for draining, which may be 
continued in all weathers, when men can work out 
of doors, till the planting season returns. In this 
way the men may be kept on without loss either to 
themselves or you. (6817.) 

OjKrations on ground should now be carried on 
vigorously; but buildings should be completed, if 
possible, by the middle of the month. 



NOVEMBER. 



AW-ather 


Average of 
the Tlier- 
mometer. 


Greatest 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


A veraire 
of the 
Barometer. 


Quantity 
of Rain. 


REMARKS. 

This is the vimly month of the .'^axons ; it is generally 
also cold and moist, and one of the most disagreeable 
for the laboring gardener, but he may console himself 
with the shortness of the day, and haif the avproach of 
evening, v l-.en he may 1.\y aside his wet dress and fortifv 
his mind by converse with books. Roots, fruits, seeds, 
dried herbs, and insects require looking over and pro- 
tecting fiom danii>s. 


r>ondon - 
K(iinl)uri;h 
Dublin - 


44 44 
41 1 

45 


4 


29 68 
^9 638 
29 74 


2-527 inch. 
4 514 
0-394 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

In the first week: the buck {Cervus cjprilus) 
grunts. 

Second week .- the golden plover {Charadrius plu- 
vh/is) appears. 

Third week: snails {Helix) and slugs {Liinax) 
bury tliemselves. 

Fourth week : greenfinches {Fringilla montifnn- 
gilla) flock ; the winter rnoth (Geo?uetra bru- 
mnria, Sam.) and the common flat-body moth 
{Geoyiietra applana, Sam.) appear in gardens about 
the end of the month. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

In the first iveek : a few plants in flower, by acci- 
dent, chiefly annuals, according to the season. 

Second iveek: the fungus h el vclla mitra appears ; 
laurustinus in flower. 

Third iveek : calicanthus pra?cox in flower. 

Fourth week : some primroses show flowers at tiiis 
season ; and some plants, unnaturally in flower, 
still continue if the weather is temperate. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Culinary vege- 
tables. 

Soiv (2071.) short-topt radishes on a warm border 
for the chance of obtaining an early spring crop. 
(3760.) Peas and beans as directed for last month. 
(3601. and 3616.) 

Protect (2206.) celery, endive, artichoke, soakale, 
potatoes left in the ground to be taken up as wanted, 
and any other outstanding edibles roots by litter or 
leaves. Radishes, and parley with fronds of fern. 
Cauliflowers by hoo[)s and mats. 

Propagate (1985.) perennial herbs, if not done last 
month. 

Transplant (2079.) any thing you have omitted in 
October. 

Routine cuJture. All operations on the earth, 
excepting digging and trenching, must be per- 
formed only in fine dry weather. Dress artichoke 
and asparagus beds. Take up endive, brocoli, and 
cauliflower, and lay them flat in dry ground, or in 
some of the ways described. (2293. &c.) Guard against 
the damping off of cauliflower plants, and weed all 
seedling crops. Dig, trench, and manure. 

Take up all edible roots, which you intend to pi-e- 
serve, and remove them to the root-cellar. 

Destroy (2276.) insects, and particularly snails, zX 
this season. 

Root-cellar. (2299.) Keep out the frost, if it sets in 
severe ; and equally so water, from above or below. 

Store or seed-room. (1704.) Turn over edible roots 
kei)t in the dry, as the alliaceous tribe, and pick out 
decaying bulbs. See to your seeds. 

Ice-house. (1730.) Fill the ice-house if the frost 
is sufficiently strong. 



4. Hardy fruit department. 

Pla7it {20~~ ) all sorts of fruit-trees, as directed for 
last month. Choose dry weather. Water to settle 
the eartii. Stake where required, and mulch (2098.) 
both root and stem, where you wish the trees to do 
well. Mulching the stem is particularly useful for 
very tall standards, and especially for the pithy, 
wooded sorts. 

Pnine (2110.) the vine, and other very hardy fruit- 
trees ; the apricot, peach, and nectarine had better 
be deferred till spring. 

Routine culture. Dig and dress wherever pruning 
admits ; or where you have not been able to over- 
take the work last month. 

Take (2290.) such apples and pears as still remain 
on the trees during the first week; dry them well 
in the fruit-room, and then barrel or jar up the 
long-keeping sorts for the cellar. 

Fruit-room.. (2298.) Examine such bunches of 
grapes, and branches of plums and currants, as you 
have hung up to preserve the fruit ; and pick ofl'all 
decaying berries. Look over all the other fruits, 
and attend to medlars, quinces, and services. 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686 ) Sow small 
salads and peas and beans, either to transplant or to 
remain after moving the frames. Transplant let- 
tuces and cauliflowers from frames to be covered 
with hand-glasses. Attend to air and removing 
decayed leaves. 

Hot-beds and pits. (2578.) Sow small salads, force 
mint, and other herbs. Try sowing of radishes on 
a moderate hot-bed. Transplant lettuces from the 
cold-frames to force them forward. Begin to force 
asparagus six weeks before the expected demand. 
Build mushrooms-beds J if undercover, it will be 
better. 

Pinery. (2697.) Moderate everj- stimulus to vege- 
tation : because, for the projier well-being of plants, 
it is requisite they should all go on in harmony. Heat, 
air, and water, art can supply ; but light, in any 
thing like adequate quantities for vegetation, isl^e- 
yond the power of man : therefore let j our heat, 
air, and water, be in a proportion to your" light. 

Forcing-houses. Some begin this month ; it so, 
begin the usual course. Dig and dress ttie borders ; 
prune, train, paint, and cleanse the house, &c. if 
not done last month, which is much the best time. 
(2695.) Set in strawberries. (3338.) 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Plant (2077.) dried roots of border-flowers. (6502.) 

Transplant (2979.) biennials at the beginning of the 
month, if the weather is verv fine : but this work 
is better deferred till spring. (6."04. and 6505.) 

Protect (2206.) tender roots by litter, leaves, tan, 
ashes, or landing up trees by mats, or straw co- 
vered with mats or nets. Take care of seedlings. 



KALENDARIAL IISDEX. 



1163 



Routine ctdtxre. Collect earths, comfosts, and 
maiiiirL's ; anrt, in general, finish digging among 
herbaceous flowers by the middle oi' tlie month. 
Asters and sucli-like plants are often only checked 
in their growth and flowering by the frosts and 
rains ; attend to them, as they are a])t to be blown 
about, and be disfigured at this season. In cutting 
them over after the ground is dug, choose a dry d;iy, 
and obliterate the prints of your feet with a' fork. 
Mow as occasion requires. 

Sto>-e-)-oo?n. (1704.) Look at such bulbs as you are 
keeping for spring planting. 

Bees. (1745.) See that these are properly protected 
by straw covers, or by being placed in the bee- 
house. 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

G/ass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Take 
care of alpines and the primula tribe. Also of the 
annuals and perennials intended for forcing. Guard 
against damps by admitting air; and to do this 
effectually, alwa3-s remove the sashes in the day- 
time ; or, if the frames being in front of stoves, do 
not admit of this, tilt or elevate them in front, as 
high at least as the plane of the sun's rays at noon. 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Go on forcing all man- 
ner of flowering shrubs, bulbs, and perennial plants, 
and take in now and then a few pots of mign nctte, 
to keep up a constant supply in full flower for the 
drawingroom. Blow Dutch roots in w^ater-glasses 
as before. 

Green house. (6211.) Medium temperature, ■with 
fire-heat, 42 degrees, maximum 44 degrees. Water 
sparingly ; give air as the weather will permit ; and 
see to neatness. Encourage mouldiness on the sur- 
face of the pots, also weeds and decayed leaves ; 
these being great ornaments at this season, and 
highly useful for the plants. 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Minimum temperature, with 
fiye-heat, 45 degrees, maximum 50 degrees. Suc- 
culents require very little water at any time, but 
especially at this season. 

Bark-, or 7noist stove. (6214.) Your medium tem- 
perature may now be (w degrees, or less, but never 
exceeding a minim lun of 55 degrees, and a maximum 
of 75 degrees. Lesson water and air, as light and 
heat are lessened. See that bulbs receive proper 
treatment, as these will produce your finest spring- 
flowers, especially the crinums and amaryllidete. 



I 8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbeiy. 

I P/ant (2077.) deciduous trees, and shrubs of the 
hardier kind so long as the weather continues dry. 

Pnine and cut //c-di^cs. (,2110.) 

Protect delicate American trees, as magnolia, and 
shrubs not yet fully acclimated, as the Chinese rose. 
Roll, mow, and sweep turf. Attend to fallen leaves. 
(61P5. and G201.) 

Tu?-/ may still be laid, but it is now too late to 
form or repair lawns by sowing grass-seeds. (2101.) 

Prepare for planting, by levelling, digging, trench- 
ing, &c. (lS6d. to 1871.) 

g. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. (4361.) Plant only in mild and rather 
dry weather ; mulch, water to settle the earth about 
the roots, and stake as circumstances require. For- 
ward delayed work as to fruit-trees, for after the 
middle of the month it is better not to touch them 
till February. 

Ornamental trees and shrubs. Complete what 
should have been done last month, as to i)lanting, 
laying, taking ofl' layers, &c. (7()ol.) Prune the 
more hardy sorts in the lines, and protect such as 
are tender by the usual means. 

Forest trees. Finish sowing the larger seeds before 
severe weather sets in. Comjjlete all other nursery 
operations for tlie season, if possible. Pruning ti-.e 
plants in lines may be the last operation. Gather 
cones, acorn, masts, nuts, keys, and berries lor im- 
mediate sowings, or the loft or rot-lieaji, according 
to their natures, and vour skill and circumstances. 
(6983. to 7037.) 

10. Trees.. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Plant in all temperate weather, and moderately 
dry situations. (2079.) 

Thin, fell, and j^rune deciduous trees, as in last 
month. Cut, plash, and repair hedges ; and more 
especially the hawthorn kind. (6917.) 

Dead fences of every description, excepting mor- 
tar-walls, may now be attended to ; but avoid 
building in December and January, even the sim- 
plest wall. Frost is certain at this season, and its 
-etiects equally so. 

Opci-ate on ground, water, rocks, woods, and 
timber erections ; but by no means on buildings 
where mortar is used. 



DECEMBER. 



A\'eather 
at 


Average of 
the Ther- 
mometer. 


(iveate-st 
Variation 
from the 
Average. 


Average 
of the 
Barometer. 


Ouantitv 
of Ilain". 


RE.AIARKS. 

Winter monUi, Sax. Cold, but dr\-. The pardener's 0];er- 
ations are chiefly of the laborious kind ; but the da>s are 
sliort and tlie nijjht.s loni;. In tlie last week the yo-aiii; 
gardener should examine hiiii.self as to his ]:rofes.sional 
and intellectual proc ess durint; the bye-past year, if he 
contents himself with merelv excelling his fellows, he is 
lost ; let him a.-.pire at jirofessional perfection, and high 
reputation among good and scientific men. 


London - 
Edinburgh 
Dublin - 


41 4 
.-j.S 9 
56 54 


3 


29 64 
29 66 
29 725 


M24 inch. 

2-.09.S 

2-916 



1. Kalendar of animated nature round 
London. 

The mole {Talpa eui-opcea) throws up hillocks; 
the December moth {Eriogaster populi, Sam.) ap- 
l)ears about the beginning, and the yellow-line 
quaker {Nociua flavilinea, Sam.) about the end, of 
the month. 

2. Kalendar of vegetable nature round 
London. 

Some of the last month's plants continue in flower, 
according to the weather. 

3. Kitchen-garden. — Cidinary veget- 
ables. 

Sow (2071.) peas and beans, and a few radishes 
(3760. and 3601.), as for last month. Choose the very 
mildest weather, and consider the final result as 
extremely uncertain. 

Prutect (2206.) beans sown thick for transplanting, 
and parsley intended for daily use, with fern ; ce- 
lery, with litter ; any plants with litter which you 
have not been able to land up, as artichokes, asi)a- 
ragus. 

To save seed. Transplant c?Jjbages, if you have 
neglected it until so unfit a season. j 



lioutine culture. Attend to this only in the best 
weather, and chiefly in the middle of the day. 
Earth up peas and beans, or cover their stems with 
aslies, sawdust, or old tan. Earth up celery when dry. 
Tie up any endive, cardoons, and white "beet which 
has been neglected. Weed, but do not depend on 
the hoe, and only attemjjt to stir dry grounds ; as 
stirring clayey lands at this season will do much 
more harm than good. 

Take up edible roots and full-grown vegetables 
with esculent leaves, as the borecoles, and plant the 
latter in sand in an open shed for daily use. 

Destroy (2276.) slugs, snails, mice, and other ver- 
min. 

Boot-cellar, seed, and store-room. (1702. to 1705.) 
See that these, and wiiat they contain, be kept in 
perfect order. 

Ice-house. {YloQ.) Fill this, if not done last month. 

4. Hardy fruit-department. 

Plant (fiOll.) the hardier trees, as the apple, pear, 
gooseberry, currant, &c. in mild weather. (1361.) 

Prune as directed for last month ; but remit the 
operation in severe weather. (2110.) Partially unnail 
or untie trained trees, and wash their boughs and 
shoots, as well as the walls and trellises, with any 
glutinous bitter fluid. 

Routine culture. Trench, dig, and ridge up the 



3] 64 



KALENDARIAL INDEX. 



soil, but only in dry weather. Turn over composts, 
dung, and earth heaps. Prepare borders and or- 
chards, &c. for planting in spring. Recruit ex- 
hausted soils by the application or partial substi- 
tution of such as is fresh and rich. 

Destroy the larvje of moths and every description 
of garden enemies, by usual or unusual means. 

Fruit-rootn. Look over the loose fruit every ten 
or twelve days. 

Fruit-cellar. Keep this close to retain an even 
low temperature, never under 32 nor over 40 deg. 
till May, the earliest period when it should be 
opened. (2299.) 

5. Culinary hot-house department. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Sow small 
salads, radishes, and lettuce ; if the weather proves 
mild they may do some good. Weed, take off de- 
cayed leaves, and give abundance of air in dry 
weather. Protect, in severe frosts, by mats or litter. 

HU-beds and pits. {ioiS.) Begin to force asparagus, 
sow small salads, and transplant lettuce to be forced 
forward. Use the transplanter, in order that no 
check may be given, or any occasion for watering 
produced. Prepare cucumber-beds ; or if you have 
begun see to them. Light is the grand thing to be 
attended to, for heat, air, water, and^arth you can 
command at pleasure. Force mint, attend to mush- 
rooms, and compost-making ; procuring earth, ma- 
nures &c. Cover up at nights with all care ; but 
avoid damps, by always giving a little air on fine 
days, and all night, when there is danger of steam 
of dung. 

Pinery. (2697.) Keep a steady heat ; but little 
air or water will be wanting, excepting to the kid- 
neybeans and strawberries which you set in last 
montii. 

Forcini^-houses. (2940.) Go on with the routine 
culture, for houses which you have begun to force ; 
and dig and prepare the borders of the others, but 
it is too late for pruning or repairs. 

6. Flower-garden. — Open ground de- 
partment. 

Protect as directed for last month, and be liberal 
in the use of asheSj rotten tan, litter, &c. to the 
roots of the more tender plants ; as to beds of florists' 
bulbs, tender and half-hardy shrubs, as China roses, 
hydrangeas, &c. where such plants can be ventured 
in the borders. 

Routine culture. Prepare composts, manures, and 
simple soils, and turn them over frequently. Much 
of the value of all composts and soils, at least for the 
florist, depends on their being sweet and mellow, 
which is only to be attained by time and frequent 
turnings. Attend to neatness in the application of 
litter, ashes, and other protecting materials. 

Store-room. See that the frost is completely ex- 
cluded. (1704, 1705.) 

7. Flower-garden. — Hot-house depart- 
ment. 

Glass case without artificial heat. (2686.) Attend 
to alpines, and florists' flowers in frames ; also to 
annuals, as directed for last month. 

Hot-beds and pits. (2678.) Go on forcing shrubs and 
flowers, and blowing bulbs in water ; renovate by 
linings, where necessary. If you have begun in 
October to force roses, you will have them as well 
23 bulbs in blow by the middle of the month. See 



to bulbs in water-glasses, and take care to keep up a 
succession of roses, bulbs, and most popular forcing- 
flowers and shrubs. (6217. to 6219.) 

Green-house. (6211.) Minimum temperature 42 
degrees, maximum 44 degrees, with fire-heat. 
Water sparingly ; give air freely in good weather, 
and remove decayed leaves as they appear. 

Dry-stove. (6176.) Minimum temperature for this 
month 46 degrees, maximum, with fire-heat, 50 
degrees. The more severe the weather out of doors, 
give less water within ; but give air freely in fine 
weather. 

Bark, or moist stove. (6214.) Keep a medium heat 
of 55 degrees, or 58 degrees, and lessen water and 
air. Attend to routine culture; but the grand 
thing at this season is, to keep the fire-heat as re- 
gular as possible ; for the ratio of increase of heat 
from flues, after they are heated to a certain extent, 
is such as often to overheat the house, and scorch or 
desiccate the plants : hence, in our opinion, one of 
the many advantages of adopting steam, by which 
the pipes can never be heated much above 200 
degrees. 

8. Pleasure-ground and shrubbery, 

Plaitt as in last month. (2077.) 
Prune (2110.) in fine %veather. 
Protect as before. (2206.) 

Routine culture. Rake up leaves, and sweep them 
from the lawns and gravel. Repair walks, and roll 
them ; see that water stand on no part of their sur- 
face. 

Lay down turf, if you cannot help it ; but this is 
not a good season ; September and March are the 
best. (2101.) 

Prepare for planting by trenching, digging, &c. 
(1870.) Rods and poles for tying up plants and for 
twiners, spray or sticks for sticking climbers, as the 
sweet-pea, &c. (1516.) 

9. Trees. — Nursery department. 

Fruit-trees. (4361.) Complete neglected work as 
far as weather will permit ; but if the season is 
severe, defer it till February. Prepare tallies, &c. 

Orna?H€ntal trees and shi-ubs. (65S'J. and 6542.) 
Finish delayed work, and attend to protecting tender 
sorts. See to the seeds in store, and i^runeonly in 
very fine weather. Prepare tallies, labels, sticks, 
st.ikes, poles, rods, spray, fronds, and other materials 
of culture and management. Collect composts, 
e:'.rtiis, and minures, and turn over those you have 
got, so as the frost may thoroughly penetrate them. 

Forest trees. ^6983.) Attend to the rot-heap, seed- 
loft, and compost-ground ; and plant, or take up, or 
prune only in line weather : much depends on the 
season, and other circumstances. (6884.) ». 

10. Trees. — Permanent plantations and 
park-scenery. 

Plant (2077.) only in fine weather, unless thom- 
hedges; or large trees of common sorts, with balls 
of earth. 

Fell and prune (6941. and 6884.) where the trees 
are not for transplanting, nor of the barking sorts. 
Thin out coppice-wood for poles, stakes, &c. 

(6912.) 

Prepare for planting by the usual processes, and 
by fencing and draining. (6817. and 6820.) 

Operate on ground and rocks, but not on build- 
ings. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



N. B. The Numbers refer to the Paragraphs, not to the Pages, excepting in the case of the List of Authors, 
where they refer to the page and the year in which the Author published : in such cases the word page, 
and letters A. D. are prefixed. 

Abbreviations : H. Hardy, F. Frame, G. Green-house, D. S. Dry-stove, S. Stove, i. e. Bark-stove, 
Peren. Perennial, Bieu. Biennial, An. Annual. C. B. S. Native of the Cape of Good Hope, Austral. 
Native of Australasia, N. S. W. Neiv South Wales, N. Holl. New Holland, V. Diem. Van Biemen's 
Island, W. Ind. West Indies, E. Inci. East Indies, S Eur. South of Europe, N. Eur. North of Europe, 
S. Amer. South America, N. Amer. North America, Mex, Mexico, 8fc. {See as an example of the 
mode of applying these Abbreviations, article Abvoma.) 



Abele-tree, populus alba, 7135. 

Abercrotnbie, John, a British writer on gardening, 
page 1106. A.D. 1766. 

Aberdeen nursery, 7639. 

Aberdeenshire, gardens of, 7639. 

Abermarlais, a seat in Caermarthenshire, 7614. 

Ablactation {ablactatio, to wean), grafting in such 
a way as to wean the scion by degrees from the 
stock ; that is, inarching, 2007. 

Ablaqucation {ablaqueo, as, to lay bare), the lay- 
ing bare the bottom of the stem, and the princi- 
pal roots of fruit-trees, in order to render them 
more fruitful, 2162. 

Abroma, polyadel. decan. and malvaceae, S. tr. 
E. Ind. and N. S. W., (that is, Bark-stove trees 
natives of the East Indies and New South 
Wales,) which grow freely in common garden- 
soil, and are propagated readily by seeds and cut- 
tings. — For 'the general culture of bark-stove 
plants, see Bark-stove. 

Abrus, wild licorice, diadel. decand. and legu- 
minoseee, a S. tr. Jamaica, which grows in 
loam and peat, and is raised by cuttings, planted 
in sand, and plunged in the tan-bed, under a 
hand-glass. 

Acacia, polyg. monoec. and leguminosese, S. tr. and 
G. tr. Austral. E. Ind. and C. B. S., which grow 
in loam peat and sand, and are propagated by 
cuttings taken off in the young wood, and planted 
in sand under a bell-glass, and in bottom heat. 
Most kinds may also be propagated by large cut- 
tings of the roots similarly treated. The H. tr. 
grow in similar soil, and propagate in the same 
manner, or by seeds. 

Acjena, dian. monog. and rosace£e, G. peren. 
C. B. S. and Austral., which grow well in loam 
and peat, and cuttings taken off at a joint, root 
freely under a hand-glass. The H. peren. will 
grow in common garden-soil, and are continued 
y cuttings. 

Acalypha, monoec. monad, and euphorbiacese, S. 

and H. an. E. Ind. and N. Amer., the S. an. 

should be sov/n in pots in a hot-bed, and the H. 

an. in the open garden. The soil for both, loam 

and rotten dung, or leaf-mould. 
Acanthus, bear's breech, didyn. angios. and acan- 

thaceee, a S. tr. E. Ind. and H. peren. Eur. 

Both grow in common soil, and divide readily 

at the root. 

Acarna, syngen. polyg. asqual. and cynarocephaleEe, 
a H. peren. and H. an. S. Eur. Both thrive 
well in common soil, and propagate by the usual 
means. 

Acarus tellarius, or red spider, described, 2271 : to 
destroy in the different departments of garden- 
ing, — see those departments. 

Accelerating vegetation, operations for, 2181. 

Acer, maple, polygam. monoec. and acere£B, H. tr. 
Eur. and N. Amer., which grow in any soil, and 
propagate by layers or seeds, and some species by 
cuttings. 



Acer pseudo-platanus and platanoides, the com- 
mon and other maples, 7097. and 7099. 

Aceras, gynan. monan. and orchidece, a H. peren. 
Eng. which thrives best in light loam and chalk, 
and is only to be raised by seeds. 

Acetarious plants, 3963. 

Achania, monad, polyan. and malvacese, S. tr. Ja- 
maica, which grow in common soil, or in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Achard, Professor Francis, page 1126. ; his works 
on gardening, A. D. 1798. 

Achillea, milfoil, syngen. polyg. equal, and corym- 
biferecB, H. peren. Eur., which grow in com- 
mon soil, and are readily increased by dividing at 
the root. 

Achras sapota, pentan. monog. and sapoteas, S. 
tr. Amer. requiring a rich, loamy soil, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Achyranthes, pentan. monog. and amaranthacese. 
The S. and G. tr. India, thrive in any rich soil, 
and cuttings root freely. The an. species should 
be sown in a hot-bed. 

Acidoton, monoec. polyan. and euphorbiacese, a S. 
tr. Jamaica, which will grow in loam and peat, 
and may be increased by cuttings in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Acisanthera, decan. monog. and salicarea, a S. 
tr. Jamaica, which may be treated like acidoton. 

Acmella, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbi- 
fereffi, the S. and S. Amer. an. should be sown on 
a hot-bed, and the H. an. in the open garden. 

Acnida, Virginian hemp, dioec. pentan. and cheno- 
podeffi, a H. an. N. Amer., to be treated as such. 

Aconitum, wolf's bane, polyan. trig, and ranuncu- 
lacea2, H. peren. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Acorus, hexan. monog. and aroidese, H. peren. 
Brit, and China, marsh i)lants of easy culture. 

Acosta, a Spanish naturalist, 32. 

Acrostichum, cryptog. filices, and filiceffi, ferns: 
S. and G. peren. E. and W. Ind. which grow in 
loam and peat, and are increased by seed or divid- 
ing the root. 

Acrostichum calomelanos, 6739. 

Actffia, polyand. monog. and ranunculacese, H. pe- 
ren. Brit, and N. Amer. of common culture. 

Actinocarpus, hexan. polvg. and alismaces, G. 
and H. peren. N. S. W. and Eng. aquatics, 
which will only thrive in water, and propagate 
by seeds. 

Acynos, didyn. gymnos. and labiates, H. bien. and 
an. Eur. of easy culture, 

Adam's Lodge, of London, a fraternity of gar- 
deners, some account of, 7704. 

Adam's Lodge, of Aberdeen, 7702. 

Adams's needle, — see Yucca. 

Adanson, Michael, a celebrated French botanist 
author of Families des Plantes, and other works* 
who died in the beginning of the present century, 

Adansonia, sour-gourd, monadel. polyan. and mal- 
vaceae, a S. tr. Senegal, which grows best in rich 



1 166 



GENERAL INDEX. 



loam, and cuttings strike in sand, plunged in heat 

under a hand-glass. 
Addington Place, Surrey, 7527. 
Adelia, dicec. monad, and euphorbiacese, a S. tr. 

Jamaica, which may be treated like adansonia. 
Adenandra, peiitan. monog. and diosmea;, G. tr. 

C. B. S. which grow in sandy peat, and the young 
. tender tops made into cuttings, and planted in 

sand, will root under a bell-glass without bottom 

heat. 

Adenanthera, decan. monog. and leguminosea;, 
S. tr. E. Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and 
large cuttings with the leaves not shortened, will 
root in a pot of sand plunged in heat under a 
hand-glass. 

AcUantum, maidenhair, cryptog. filices, and filicese, 
G. and H. peren. Madeira and Brit, ferns, which 
grow well in loam and peat, and propagate by di- 
viding the root or by seed. 

Adina, tetran. monog. and globularise, a S. tr. China, 
of easy culture in loam and peat. 

Adonis, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceas, a H. 
peren. and H. an. Eur. of easy culture in common 
soil. 

Adoxa, octan. tetrag. and saxifrageEe, a H. peren. 

Brit, a diminutive plant, which does well in pots 

in common soil. 
Adrianople, gardens of, 307. 

^gilops, hard-grass, polygam. monoec. and grami- 
nea?, H. peren. and an. Eur. of common cul- 
ture. 

.a^giphila, tetran. monog. and verbcnacete, S. tr. 
W. Ind. which thrive well in light loam, and cut- 
tings root freely under a hand-glass in heat. 

.^gle, Bengal quince, polyan. monog. and auran- 
, tiea;, a S. tr. E. Ind. which requires a rich loam, 

J and is propagated by ripened cuttings planted in 
sand, without shortening the leaves, and plunged 
under a hand-glass in heat. 

iEgopodium, goutweed. pentan. dig. and umbelli- 
ferea;, H. peren. Brit, of the easiest culture. 

Aerides, air-plant, gynan. monan. and orchideae, S. 
peren. China, parasites, which may be hung up 

, in a basket of moss or pieces of bark, or fixed by 
moss and bandages to the trunk or bark of a tree, 
— see the Hon. Mr. Herbert's treatment detailed, 

■ 6736. 

^ua, pentan. monog. and amaranthacess, a S. tr. 
and S. bien. W. Ind. which grow well in rich, 
light earth, and cuttings strike freely. 

.Eschynomena, diadel. decan. and leguminoseje, 
a S. tr. VV. Ind. which requires rich loam, a 
good deal of heat, and is propagated by cuttings 
under a bell-glass in bottom heat The S. an. 
and H. an. India and Amer. maybe treated as 
tender annuals. 

.aisculus, horse-chestnut, heptan. monog. and 
acere£e, H. tr. Asia and N. Amer. which prefer 
light, deep soil, and sheltered situations, and are 
propagated by seeds or layers. 

iEsculus hippo-castanum, the common horse-chest- 
nut, 7126. 

^thionema, tetrad, silic. and cruciferese, a H. bien. 

and H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
JEthusa, fool's parsley, pentan. dig. and umbelli- 

fereaj, a H. peren. and H. an. Brit. ; poisonous 

weeds. 

Affaiti. Casimiro, his works on gardening, page 
1128.' A. D. 1787. 

African almond, brabejum stellulifolium. 

African flea-bane, tarchonantims camphorates. 

African fruits deserving cultivation, 6018. 

African lily, — see Agapanthus. 

African marigold, tagetes erecta. 

Agapanthus, African lily, hexan. monog. and heme- 
rocallide^, G. peren. C. B. S. which thrive in 
loam, and a little rotten dung, and are propagated 
by dividing the root, or by seed. 

Agaricus campestris, garden-mushroom. See this 
and various other species of agaricus described, 
4339. Culture of the garden-mushroom, 3404; 
•what spawn is, 3406; where indigenous spawn 
may be collected, 3410 ; preserving spawn, 3412 ; 
procuring spawn artificially, 3413 ; propagating, 
3415; methods of raising mushrooms, 3423; 
ridges in the open air, 3424 ; preparing the dung, 
3425; forming the bed, 3426; moulding, planting, 
covering the bed, 3427 ; culture on shelves, m 
the German manner, as introduced by Oldacre, 
3434; compost, 3435; making, spawnmg, earth- 
ing, subsequent treatment, 3436; renovating old 
beds, 3440; growing mushrooms in pots, boxes, 
&c. with dung, 3442 ; without dung, 3443 ; cul- 
ture in rnelon-beds, 3445 ; in old hot-beds, 3447 ; 



in pits, S-H3 ; in dark frames, 3449 ; in a cellar, 
3450 ; general details, 3452. 
Agathosma, pentan. monog. and diosmese, G. tr. 
C. B. S. soil, a sandy peat : propagated by cuttings 
in sand under a bell-glass, but not plunged in 
heat. 

Agave, hexan. monog. and bromeleee, D. S. and G, 
tr. and peren. S. and N. Amer. soil, a rich loam ; 
propagated by suckers. 

Agen, General Lomet's villa at, 176. 

Ageratum, syngen, polyg. jequal. and corymbiferea3, 

G. tr. requiring a light, rich soil ; propagated by 
cuttings under a hand-glass. The H. an. is of 
common culture. 

Aghinuas, a seat in Tyrone, 7679. 
Agr. Chem., Davy's Agricultural Chemistry. 
Agricola, Dr. George Andrew, his works on garden- 
ing, page 1123. A. D. 170-. 
Agrimonia, agrimony, dodecan. dig. and rosacete, 

H. peren. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy culture. 
Agrimony, — see Agrimonia. 

Agrostemma, rose-campion, decan. pentag. and 
caryophyllcEB, H. peren. and an. of common 
culture. 

Agrostis, bent-grass, trian. dig. and gramincae, a S. 

peren. E. Ind. and H. peren. and an. Eur. of 

the easiest culture. 
Agrumi, the Italian term for bitter fruits, especially 

the orange tribe. 
Ailantlius, polyg. moncec. and terebintacese, a S. tr. 

and H. tr. E. Ind. which grow in common soil, 

and are propagated by cuttings of the roots. 
Aimsfield,a seat in East Lothian, 7619. 
Air, its nature and properties, 1216. 
Air-plant, — see Aerides. 

Aira, hair-grass, trian. dig. and gramineas, H. peren, 
and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Airthrie Castle, near Stirling, 364. 

Aitonia, monad, octan. and meliaceje, G. tr. an. 
C. B. S. soil, sandy loam and peat ; propagated by 
cuttings of young wood, in sand, under a bell-glass, 
and plunged in heat. Avoid planting too close, 
and wipe the glass frequently, as they are apt to 
damp off 

Aizoon, icos. di-pentag. and ficoideas, a G. fr. an. 
and bien. C. B. S. and S. Eur. succulents, which 
grow in lime-rubbish, and propagate readily. 

Ajuga, bugle, didyn. gymnos. and labiatese. H. 
peren. Eur. of common culture. 

Akee-tree, blighia sapida. 

Alarnanni, Luigi, his woiks on gardening, page 
1128. A. D. 1546. 

Alangium, polyan. monog. and myrtiacCEB, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. soil, loam, and peat ; propagated by cut- 
tings, in sand, under a hand-glass in heat. 

Alaternus, rhamnus alaternus. 

Albonico, J. H. his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1795. 

Albuca, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, G. peren. 
C. B. S. bulbs; soil, light, sandy loam, and veget- 
able mould ; propagation by offsets ; or by leaves 
taken off with a scale of the bulb, and carefully 
planted. 

Alcazar, a p.alace and gardens in Spain, 291. 
Alchemilla, ladies' mantle, tetran. monog. and 

rosacea, H. peren. and an an. Eur. of common 

culture. 

Alcina, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbifereae, a. 

G. an. Mexico, of easy culture. 
Alcoves, 1810. 

Aldbury Place, Surrey, 7527. 

Aldea, pentan. monog. and boragineae, a H. peren. 

Magellan, of common culture. 
Alder — see Alnus. 
Alderlev Park, Cheshire, 7590. 
Aldworth Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Aletris, hexan. monog. and hemerocallide£e, H. 

peren. N. Amer. requiring a peat soil and shady 

situation, and propagated by offsets from the 

roots. 

Aleurites, moncec. monad, and euphorbiaceae, a S. tr. 
Society Isles ; soil, a rich loam ; ripe cuttings, with 
their leaves on, strike in sand, under a hand- 
glass. 

Alexanders — see Smyrnium. 

Alexandrian laurel, ruscus racemosus. 

Alisma, water-plantain, hexan. polyg. and ali.<!- 

maceae, H. peren. marsh plants, and aquatics of 

easy culture,^ 
Alison, the Rev. A., his Analysis of the Principles 

of Design, 7160 — 7162. 
Allamanda, pentan. monog. and apocyneffi, a S. tr. 

Guiana ; soil, a rich loam ; cuttings strike freely 

in moist peat. 



GENERAL INDEX. 1167 



Allan todia, cryptogam, filices, and filicece, a G. 
peren. Madeira ; a fern ; soil, loam and peat ; 
and propagation by dividing the root or seed. 

Allerton Manleverer, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Alliaceous plants, 3810. 

Alligator-pear, laurus persea, 5977. 

AHIonia, tetran. monog. and nyctaginese, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which grow in common soil; and cut- 
tings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Allium, garlic, hexan. monog. and asphodeleas, H. 
peren. and bien. Eur. bulbs of easy culture. 

Allium ascalonicum, the shallot, 3845. 

Allium cepa, tlie common onion, 3830. 

Allium porrum, the leek, 3811. 

Allium sativum, the garlic, 3841. 

Allium schcenoprasum, the chive, 3838. 

Allium scorodoprasum, the rocambole, 3852. 

Allspice — see Calycanthus. 

Allspice-tree, myrtus pimenta. 

Almond, — see Amygdalus. 

Alnus, alder, moncec. tetran. and amentaceas, H. 
tr. Eur. and N. Amer. of common culture, pro- 
pagated by seeds. 

Alnus glutinosa, the common alder, 7132. 

Aloe, hexan. monog. and hemerocallidcce, D. S. and 

G. tr. and peren. C. B. S, which grow best in 
sandy loam, with lime-rubbish or gravel, and 
are propagated by suckers, or leaves stripped off, 
and planted shallow in, or laid on the surface of 
a pot of mould. 

Alonsoa, didyn. angios. and solaneae, G. tr. S. 
Amer. which grow in rich, light soil, and are in- 
creased by seeds or cuttings. 

Alopecurus, foxtail-grass, trian. dig. and graminese, 

H. peren. and an. Jamaica and Eur. grasses of 
the easiest culture. 

Aloysia, didyn. angios. and verbenaceEe, a G. tr. 
Chili, which grows in light, rich soil, and in. 
creases by cuttings. 

Alpinia, monan. monog. and scitaminese, S. per. W. 
and E. Ind. reedy or marsh hot-house plants of 
common culture. 

Alstroemeria, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, S. and 
G. peren. S. Amer. which thrive in sandy loam, 
and peat or vegetable earth, and increase by seeds 
or dividing the root. A. ligtu is difficult to 
flower, unless the roots are put into a state of 
rest, by withholding water till the shoots are 
quite dried up ; then give a good watering, and 
put it in a moist heat, and it will flower abun- 
dantly. (Sweet.) 

Alstroemeria salsilla, the edible alstroemeria, 6030. 

Alston Grove, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Altenburg, Pomological Society of, their annals, 
page 1127. A. D. 1810. 

Alternanthera. pentan. monog. and amaranthaccce, 
a S. peren. S. bien. and G. peren. E. Ind. and 
S. Amer. soil, light and rich, and cuttings root 
freely in the shade. 

Altha;a, marsh-mallow, monad, polyan. and mal- 
vaceje, S. peren. and bien. and H. peren. tr. and 
an. all of common culture. 

Althffia frutex, hibiscus syriacus. 

Althorpe, a seat in Northamptonshire, 7580. 

Alyssum, mad-wort, tetrad, silic. and cruciferese, a 
F. tr. and H. tr. peren. and an. Eur. of easy cul- 
ture in common soil, and readily increased by 
cuttings. 

Amaranthus, amaranth, moncec. pentan. and ama- 
ranthacese, a S. an. and H. an. As. Amer. Eur. 
of common culture. 

Amai^llis, hexan. monag. and amaryllide£e, S. G. 
and H. peren. Eur. Amer. and Afr. bulbs of 
common culture : some may be treated as aquatics, 
— see 6317. 

Amateurs of gardening, 7407; their gardens and 
" management, 7428. 

Amber-tree, anthospermum sethiopicum. 

Ambrosia, moncec. pentan. and corymbifereie, H. 
an. of common culture. 

Amellus, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereas, 
a G. tr. C. B. S. soil, loam and peat, and cuttings 
root freely under a glass ; and H. peren. Amer. 
which grow in common soil, and cuttings root 
freely under a hand-glass. 

American books on gardening, 7699. 

American cowslip, dodecatheon meadia. 

American garden, how to compose the soil, 6568 ; 
to arrange, 6122. 

American shrubs, 6562; culture, 6568; final situ- 
ation, 6569. 

Amcrimniim, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, S. tr. 
W. Ind. requiring a light loam; and cuttings. 



not deprived of their leaves, root freely under 

a hand-glass in a warm situation. 
Amethystea, dian. monog. and labiatea?, a H. an. 

Siberia, of common culture. 
Ammannia tetran. monog. and salicareai, a S. an. 

and H. an. W. atid E. Ind. of easy culture. 
Ammi, bishop's weed, pentan. dig. and umbellifereae, 

H. peren. and an an. Eur. foetid, vyeeds. 
Amomum, monan. monog. and scitamineas, S. pe-. 

ren. Sierre Leone, reedy marsh plants. 
Amorpha, bastard indigo, diadel. decan. and legu- 

minoseae, F. and H. tr. Amer. which grow in 

common soil, and increase by cuttings planted in 

autumn, in a sheltered situation. 
Ampthill Park, Bedfordshire, 7549. 
Ampton Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 

Amsonia, pentan. monog. and apocynca;, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which grow in common soil, and are in- 
creased by cuttings or dividing at the root. 

Amygdalus, almond, icos. monog. and rosacea3, a 
G. tr. and H. tr. Persia and Eur. requiring rich 
loam, and which may be propagated by seeds, lay- 
ers, grafting, &c. 

Amygdalus communis and amara, the sweet and bit- 
ter almond, 4542. 

Amygdalus persica, the peach-tree, 4481 ; flat peach 
of China, 4485. 

Amygdalus, var. nectarina, the nectarine-tree, 4517; 
to force the peach and nectarine, 3063. 

Amyris, octan, monog. and terebintacca;, S. tr. 
S. Amer. soil, loam and peat, and cuttings root 
freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Anabasis, pentan. digy. and chenopodcEe, a G. tr. 
Spain, which grows well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass without 
bottom heat. 

Anacampseros, dodecan. monog. and portulacca;,. 

G. tr. and peren. C. B. S. succulents which grow 
in sandy-loam and lime-rubbish, ajid cuttings root 
readily in similar soil. 

Anacardium, cashew-nut, ennean. monog. and tere- 
bintacccB, a S. tr. India, soil a light' loam, and 
cuttings from ripened wood, not deprived of their 
leaves, will root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Anacyclus, syngen. poly, super, and corymbiferese, 

H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Anagallis, pimpernell, pentan. monog. and primula- 
ceze, a G. an. and bien. and H. peren. and an Eur. 
all of easy culture, increased either by seeds or 
cuttings. 

Anagyris, bean-trefoil, decan. monog. and logumi- 
nosete, a G. and F. tr. Spain and Teneriffe, soil 
loam and peat, and cuttings will root in sand, under 
a hand-glass. 

Anarrhinum, didyn. angios. and scrophularineas, a 

H. bien. of common culture. 
Anastatica, rose of Jericho, tetrad, silicu. and cru- 

cifereaB, a H. peren. Levant, which will grow in 

common soil, and cuttings under a hand-glass root 

freely. 

Anchovy-pear, grias cauliflora, 5979. 

Anchusa, bugloss, pentan. monog. and boragine^e, 

G. and H. bien. and pcreh. Eur. and C. B. S. 
which grow freely in common soil, and are in. 
creased by cuttings or seeds. 

Anderson, James, LIa D. 130. 140. a British writer 
on gardening, page 1108. A. D. 1777. 

Andersonia, pentag. monog. and epacrideas, a G. tr, 
N. HoU. which grows freely in peat soil with the 
pots well drained, and not overwatered; young 
tops made into cuttings root in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Andrachne, bastard orpme, moncec. gynan. and 
euphorbiacese, a H. an. Italy, of common culture. 

Andrews, Mr. Isaac, an eminent grower of the pine- 
apple at Lambeth, 2712. 

Andrews, Henry, a British writer on gardening, 
page 1112. A. D. 1798. 

Andromeda, decan. monog. and ericeae, S. G. and 

H. tr. N. Amer. E. Ind. and Eur. which prefer 
peat soil, and cuttings strike in sand under bells or 
hand-glasses ; but the hardy sorts make plants 
more rapidly by layers, 6562. 

Andropogon, polygam. moncec. and gramineaj, S. G. 
and H. peren. E. Ind. and Eur. grasses of easy 
culture. 

Androsace, pentag. monog. and primulaceae, H. 
peren. bien. and an. Eur. which thrive best in small 
pots in turfy loam and peat, the pots being well 
drained ; they are increased by seeds, or dividing 
at the root. 

Andry, a French author on gardening, page 1116. 



1168 



Andryala, syngen. polyg. sequal. and cichoraceffi, G. 
peren. and bien. and H. peren. and an. As. Afr. 
and Eur. ; the green-house sorts grow well in 
light loam, and cuttings root freely under a 
hand-glass j the hardy sorts are of common cul- 
ture. 

Anemia, crj^ptog. schismatopterides, and filiceas, S. 
peren. W. Ind. ferns of the usual culture. 

Anemone, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceae, H. 
peren. Eur. and N. Amer. which grow in loam 
rather light and rich than heavy, and increase by 
dividing the root or by seeds. 

Anemone coronaria, and hortensis, the common gar- 
den anemone, 6215. 

Anethum, dill, pentan. dig. and umbelliferezB, a H. 
peren. and an. Eur. of common culture, and pro- 
pagated by seed. 

Anethum foeniculum, the common fennel, 4097. 

Anethum graveolei.s, the common dill, 4103. 

Angelica, pentan. dig. and umbellife^ca^, H. peren. 
and bien. Eur. and Amer. which grow in loamy 
deep soil, and are increased by seeds. 

Angelica archangclica, the garden angelica, 4216. 

Angelica-tree, aralia spinosa. 

Anglesea, gardens and residences of, 7603. 

Angran de Riieneuve, a French writer on garden- 
ing, page 1117. A. D. 1712. 

Anguria, monoec. dian. and cucurbitacese a S. peren. 
Carthagena, soil light and rich ; propagation by 
cuttings or seeds. 

Angus, or Forfarshire, gardens and residences of, 
7637. 

Anigozanthos, hexan. monog. and hemodoraceas, a 
Gr. tr. N. Holl. which grows in loam and peat, re- 
quires a good deal of water, and is increased by di- 
viding at the root 

Anise, pimpinella anisum. 

Aniseed-tree, — see lllycium. 

Anisomeles, didyn. gymnos. and labiateas, a S. an. 

E. Ind. of the usual culture, 
Ann. Bot. Annals of Botany, by C. Koning and 

J. Sims. 

Annona, custard-apple, polyan. polyg. and annona- 
ceas, S. tr. W. Ind. and S. Amer. requiring a rich 
loam ; and ripened cuttings with the leaves un- 
shortened, will root in sand, under a glass in a 
moist heat. 

Annual plants, such as are of one year's duration, 
and are therefore raised annually from seeds 
ripened the preceding year. There are some ex- 
ceptions in the cases of rare plants which do not 
seed freely ; or where particular varieties are to 
be preserved. In these cases propagating by cut- 
tings or layers is adopted. 

Annuals, bark-stove or hot-house, their culture, 
6724, 6725. 

Annuals, dry-stove, 6668. 

Annuals, frame, their culture, 6596. 

Annuals, green-house, their culture, 6660. 

Annuals, half hardy, their enumeration, 6512 ; cul- 
ture, 6513. 

Annuals, hardy, adapted for border-flowers, 6506 ; 

their culture, 6507. 
Anomatheca, trian. monog. and irideae, a G. peren. 

C. B. S. a bulb of the irideas family. 
Ansley Hall, Warwickshire, 7571. 
Ant, — see Formica. 

Anthemis, chamomile, syngen. polyg. super, and co- 
rymbifercEB, a G. peren. and H. peren. and an. 
Eur. and China, of easy culture, and propagated 
by seeds, cuttings, or dividing at the root. 

Anthemis artemisiEefolia, the Chinese chrysanthe- 
mum, 6470. 

Anthemis nobilis, the common chamomile, 4235. 

Anthericum, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, G. tr. 
peren. bien. and an. C. B. S. which grow in light 
sandy loam, with the pots well drained ; the 
bulbous kinds should have no water when not 
in a growing state; the shrubby sorts root 
from cuttings, and most of the species produce 
seeds. 

Anthocercis, didyn. angios. and solaneje, a G. 
tr. N. Holl. which grows in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily under a bell-glass in 
sand. 

Antholyza, triand. monog. and irideje, G. and H. 

peren. C. B. S. bulbs of the irideae family, 
Anthospermum, amber-tree, dioec. tetran. and ru- 

biaceEB, a G. tr. C. B. S. which grows well in loam 

and peat, and strikes readily from cuttings. 
Anthoxanthum, spring grass, dian. dig. and gra- 

mineas, H. peren. Brit, and Morocco, of the easiest 
, culture. 



INDEX. 



Anthoxanthum odoratum, scented vernal grass, 

4318. 

Anthriscus, rough chervil, pentan. dig. and umbel- 
lifereas, a H. peren. and an. common weeds. 

Anthyllis, kidney-vetch, diadel. decan. and legumi. 
nosese, G. and F. tr. and bien. Eur. which grow in 
loam and peat, and are propagated by seeds or 
cuttings under bell-glasses in sand. The glasses 
must be kept wiped, otherwise the cuttings are apt 
to damp oft. 

Antidesma, dicec. pentan. and terebintaceas, S. tr. 
E. Ind. which require a rich loam, and cuttings 
will root in sand under a hand-glass in moist heat. 

Antiquities, uses of, in gardening, 1840. 

Antiquity, gardening authors of, 7685. 

Antirrhinum, snap-dragon, didyn. angios. and scro- 
phularineae, F. and H. peren. and an. Eur. of 
easy culture, and propagated by cuttings or seeds. 

Antrim, gardens of, 7684. 

Antwerp, villas of, 126; botanic garden, 135. 

Anychia, pentan. monog. and amaranthaceae, a H. 
bien. N. Amer. of common culture, 1660. 

Aotus, decan. monog. and leguminosea;, a G. tr. 
N. Holl. which grows well in sandy loam and peat, 
and young cuttings root readily under a bell-glass 
in sand. 

Apargia, syngen polyg. sequal. and cichoraceae, H. 

peren. Eur. of the easiest culture, and propagated 

by seed or division at the root. 
Aphelandra, didynam. angios. and acanthaceae, 

a S. tr. W. Ind. ; requiring rich loam, and 

cuttings strike freely in a moist heat under a 

hand-glass. 

Aphyllanthes, lily-pink, hexan. monog. and aspho- 
deleEB, a H. peren. France, which grows well in 
peat earth, and is increased by seeds, or dividing 
at the root 

Aphis, or plant-louse, described, 2242. 

Aphis, how to destroy, £282. 

Aphis lanigera, or American blight, 4431. 

Apiary, a place for an assemblage of beehives, 
1734. Polish beehives, 1738 ; common, 1739 ; 
of glass, 1740 ; storying, 1741 ; of Palteau, 1742 ; 
of Huish, 1743; Howison, 1744. Management 
of hives, 1745 ; choice of bees, 1746 ; materials 
and size of hives, 1747 ; feeding the bee, 1748 ; 
covering the hive, 1750 ; swarming, 1752 ; taking 
the honey, 1755; taking by deprivation, 1756; 
by suftbcation, 1758. 

Apios, diadelph. decan. and leguminoseas, a H. Ir. 
and peren. N. Amer. both climbers, which grow 
in common soil ; the first is propagated by layers, 
and the other by tubers from the roots. 

Apios tuberosa, 4332. 

Apis mellifera, the honey-bee, 2262. 1733, — see 
Apiary. 

Apium, parsley, pentan. digy. and umbellifereiB, 

H. bien. Eur. 
Apium petroselinum, or garden parsley, 4082. 
Apium graveolens, or celery, 3997. 
Apium Americanum, or arracacha, 6036. 
Apocynum, dog's bane, pentan. dig. and apocynere, 

a H. peren. N. Amer. which prefers a httle peat 

added to common soil, and increases rapidly by 

suckers. 

Aponogeton, hexan. trig, and naiadese, A. S. peren. 
and G. peren. C. B. S. bulbs, which are to be 
treated as aquatics, and are increased by offsets 
or seeds. 

Apple, — see Pyrus. 

Appleberry, — see Billardiera. 

Apprentices in gardening, 7379. 

Approach. road to a mansion, principles of forming. 

Appropriation of scenery by planting, 6769; princi> 
pies and use of appropriation in landscape-ganlen- 
ing, 7175. 

Appuldurcombe, a seat in the Isle of Wight, 7594. 
Apricot, 4522. — see Armeniaca. 
Aquarium for exotics, 6180 ; for hardy plants, 6519. 
Aquatic herbaceous plants, hardy, 6521; exotic, 
6726. 

Aquilegia, columbine, polyan. pentag. and ranun- 
culacese, H. peren. Brit, of the easiest culture. 

Arabis, wall-cress, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferete, 
H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. rock-work plants, of 
easy culture, and increased by seeds or cuttings. 

Arachis, earth-nut, diadel. decan. and legumino- 
se£e, a S. an. S. Amer. of common culture. 

Arachis hypogcea. South American earth-nut, 6037. 

Aralia, pentan. pentag. and aralefe, S. tr. W. Ind. 
and N. Amer. which thrive in rich loam, and cut- 
tings strike readily under a hand-glass, in heat : 



GENERA 



H. tr. which grow in common soil, and ripened 
cuttings strike in a sheltered situation ; and H. 
peren. of common culture, and increased by 
seeds. 

Aranjuez, a palace and gardens in Spain, 294. 

Araucaria, dioec. monad, and conifereaa, G. tr. 
Chili and Norfolk Island, which grow in sandy 
loam and peat, " and cuttings may be rooted, 
though with difficulty, taken off at a joint in 
ripened wood, and planted in a pot of sand under 
a hand-glass, but not in heat." (Sweet.) 

Arboretum of the Hackney nursery, 7353. 

Arbor vitae, — see Thuja. 

Arboricultural catalogue, 703S. 

Arboriculture, 6742. 

Arbors, 1811. 

Arbutus, strawberry-tree, decan. monog. and cri- 
ceae, G. and H. tr. Eur. wliich grow best in two 
thirds of peat and one third of loam j they are 
increased by layers and seeds, and A. unedo com- 
monly by budding or inarching. 

Archangel, —see Angehca. 

Architect, horticultural, 7402. 

Architecture, origin of the difTercnt styles of, 7234 

Architette rustici, 110. 

Arctium, burdock, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cyna- 
rocephaleffi, H. bien. Brit, common road- side 
weeds. 

Arctopus, polyg. dicec. and umbellifereze, a G. peren. 
C. B. S. which grows in loam and peat, and is in- 
creased by seeds. 

Arctotheca, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbi- 
fereas, a G. peren. C. B. S. which grows in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass in the open air. 

Arctotis, syngen. polyg neces. and corymbiferea-, 
G. peren. tr. and an. C. B. S. which grow in loam 
and peat, and are readily increased by cuttings, 
or dividing at the root. 

Ardbraccan Palace, in Eastmeath, 7661. 

Ardome, Jean Paul de, his works on gardening, 
page 1117. A.D. 1745. 

Ardisia, pentan. monog. and myrsineaa, S. tr. and 
G. tr. E. and W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
hand-glass, in moist heat. 

Arduina, pentan. monog. and apocyneEe, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which thrives well in peat and loam, and 
cuttings root freely under a bell-glass in sand. 

Areca, cabbage-tree, moncec. monad, and palmeee, 
S. tr. E. and W. Ind. palms which grow in light 
sandy loam, and like other palms, can only be 
raised from seeds. 

Arenaria, sand-wort, decan. trig, and caryophylleas, 
a G. peren. and H. peren. and an. Eur. all the 
species grow best in sandy loam and peat, and are 
increased by cuttings or by seeds. 

Arethusa, gynan. monan. and orchideas, a G. peren. 
N. Amer. a bulb which grows best in two thirds 
peat and one third loam, and requires to be kept 
moist as a marsh plant. 

Aretia, pentan. monog. and primulacete, H. tr. 
Eur. rockwork plants, which grow in loam, sand, 
and peat, and are increased by dividing at the 
root. 

Argemone, polyan. monog. and papaveracese, H. 
an. Eur. and Amer. of common culture. 

Argenteuil, fig-gardens of, 193. 

Argyleshire, gardens of, 7649 . 

Aristea, trian. monog. and irideee, G. peren. C. B. S. 
bulbs, which grow in loam and peat, and are in- 
creased by dividing at the root. 

Aristolochia, birth-wort, gynan. hexan. and aristolo- 
chiae, S. and G. tr. Ind. and Amer. climbers and 
twiners, which grow well in light loam, and cut- 
tings strike freely under a hand-glass : the H. tr. 
grow in common soil, and are increased by di- 
viding at the root. 

Aristote, a French author on Gardening, page 1116. 
A. D. 1677. 

Aristotelia, dodecan. monog. and rhamneee, a H. tr. 
Chili, which requires a sheltered situation ; but 
will grow in any common soil, and ripened cut- 
tings, planted under a glass, will root freely. 

Armagh, gardens and residences of, 76.82. 

Armeniaca, the apricot, icos. di-pentag. and rosa- 
ceee, H. tr. Eur. of which there are two species, 
the Siberian, an ornamental shrub, propagated by 
budding on plum-stocks, and the common fruit- 
bearing apricot, prunus armeniaca, 4522. 

Armaria, thrift, pentan. pentag. and plumbagineae, 
a H. tr. and H. peren. Eur. which grow well in 
common soil, and are increased bv dividing at the 

4 



L INDEX. 1169 



root. Armeria vulgaris, the common thrift, is a 

good edging plant. 
Arnica, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifere^, 

H. peren. Eur. which grow best in light loam, 

and are increased by dividing at the root. 
Arnopogon, sheep's beard, syngen. polyg. £Equal. 

and cichoraces, a H. peren. and an. Eur. of 

common culture. 
Arno's Vale, a seat in Middlesex, 7520. 
Arnolde, Fuchard, a British writer on gardening, 

pa^e 1099. A. D. 1502. 
Arracacha, — see Apium. 
Arran, gardens of, 7650. 

Arrigoni, Stephano, his works on gaixlening, page 

1128. A. D. 1763. 
Arrow-grass, — see Triglochin, 
Arrow-head, — see Sagittaria. 
Arrow-root, — see Maranta. 

Artedia, pentan. dig. and umbellifereee, a H. an. 
Levant, of the usual culture. 

Artemisia absinthium, wormwood, 4247. 

Artemisia dracunculus, tarragon, 4093. 

Artemisia, wormwood, syn. polyg. super, and co- 
rymbiferese, G. F. and H. tr. peren. bien. and an. 
Eur. and Amer. all of easy culture and propaga- 
tion. 

Arthropodium, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, a 
G. peren. N. S. W. soil a sandy loam ; and pro- 
pagation by dividing at the root. 

Arthur s Seat, a hill at Edinburgh, how to improve 
by a promenade, 7317. 

Artichoke, — see Cynara. 

Artiste jardinier, 196. 

Artisti giardinieri, 110. 

Artocarpus, the bread-fruit tree, monoec. monan. 

and urticeaa, S. tr. S. Sea Isl. and Ind. which 

thrive well in light loam, and propagate readily 

by cuttings, with their leaves entire. 
Artocarpus incisa, the common bread-fruit tree, 

6014. 

Arum, moncec. polyan. and aroidese, S. tr. and 
peren. and F. and H. peren. Eur. Ind. Amer. all 
of which thrive well in common soil, and are pro- 
pagated by dividing the roots ; or the v/oody sorts 
by cuttings. 

Arundel Castle, Sussex, 7532. 

Arundo, reed, trian. digyn. and graminese, H, 

peren. Eur. grasses of the easiest culture. 
Asarabacca, — see Asarura. 

Asarum, asarabacca, dodec. m.onog. and aristolo- 
chiffi, H. i)eren. Eng. and Amer. of common cul- 
ture, 

Asclepias, swallow-worr, pentan. dig. and asclepia- 
dea;, G. peren. which thrive best in peat ar«l 
loam, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass. The H. peren. are of easy culture. 

Ascyrum, polyad. polyan. and hypericineee, G. tr. 
and peren. N. Amer. which thrive well in loam 
and peat, and are readily increased by cuttings 
taken off in the young wood and planted under a 
hand-glass. 

Ash-tree, — see Fraxinus. 

A.shbrooke, a seat in Kilkenny, 7656. 

Ashburnham Abbey, Sussex, 7531. 

Ashcombe, a seat in Wiltshire, 7596. 

Ashes, proportion in which they are afforded by 
the combustion of different species of trees, 703. 

Ashridge Park, Buckinghamshire, 7548 j flower- 
garden, 6099. 

Ashted Park, Surrey, 7528. 

Ashton Hall, Lancashire, 7589. 

Asiatic fruits deserving cultivation, 6021, 

Asimina, polyan. polyg. anonaces, H. tr. N. Amer. 
which thrive in common soil, and are increased 
by layers. 

Aspalathus, diadel. decan. and leguminoseee, a S. tr. 
and G. tr. peren. C. B. S. which grow freely in 
sandy loam and peat, and young cuttings root in 
sand under bell-glasses, care being taken to wipe 
the glasses frequently to prevent their damping 
off. 

Asparaginous plants, 3855. 

Asparagus, hexan. monog. and asphodeleas, S. G. 
and F. tr. Eur. and C. B. S. climbers, which grow 
freely in light loam, or loam and peat, and are 
increased by dividing at the root, or by cuttings 
under a hand-glass without bottom heat. 

Asparagus officinalis, the garden asparagus, 3856 ; 
to force asparagus, 3349 ; plants, planting, time of 
beginning to force, temperature, air, water, 
gathering, successional supplies, 3350. 58 ; to force 
in hot-beds, 3359 ; forcing the roots as they stand 
in the open ground, 3364. 

F 



1170 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Asperugo, German mad-v.ort, pentan. monog. and 
boragines, a H. an. Brit, of common culture. 

Asperula, woodruff, tetran. monog. and rubiaces, 
H. peren. and a H. an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Asphodel, — see Asphodelus. 

Asphodelus, asphodel, he.xan. monog. and aspho- 

delese, H. peren. Eur. of common culture. 
Aspidium, shield-fern, cryptog. filices, and filiceaj, 

G. and H. peren. Eur. and N. A. ferns of the 
usual culture. 

Asplenium, spleen-\vort, cryptog. filices, and filicese, 
S. G. and H. peren. Eur. and S. Amer. ferns 
which maybe cultivated as aspidium. 

Association of ideas, its influence on the mind as to 
the expression of scenery, 7171. to 7174. 

Astankina, a seat near Moscow, 262. 

Aster, star-wort, syngen. poly, supei-. and corymbi- 
ferea;, G. tr. and bien. Eur.'C. B. S. and N. Amer. 
of easy culture in lo.im and peat, and cuttings 
root readily, in the same kind of soil, under a 
hand-glass, without bottom heat. H. peren. and 
an. of any culture in any soil. 

Astley, Francis Duckenfiald, Esq., a British author 
on gardening, pr.ge 1112. A. D. 1797. 

Aston fark, Shropshire, 7569. 

Astragalus, milk-vetch, diadel. decan. and legumi- 

noseje, G. and H. peren. and H. an. Eur. As. Af. 

all of which thrive well in common soil, and are 

increased by seeds. 
Astrantia, master-wort, pentan. dig. and umbelli- 

fereffi, H. peren. Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Astroloma, pentan. monog. and epacrideaD, a G. tr. 

N. S. W. which thrives best in loam and peat, 

and young cuttings root readily under a bell-glass 

inland. 

Athamanta, spignel, pentan. dig. and umbellifereaj, 

H. peren. and an an. Eur. of easy culture and 
propagated by seeds. 

Athanasia, syngen. polyg. fequal. and corymbifereaj, 
G. tr. C. B. S. soil, a light loam, and cuttings root 
readily under a hand-glass : the H. an. species re- 
quires the usual culture. 

Atractylis, syngen. polyg. tequal. and cjTiai-oce- 
phaleas, a H. peren. Spain, of common culture. 

Atragene, polyan. polyg. and ranunculacece, a S. 
tr. G. tr. and H. tr. fiur. Afr. and Amer. climb- 
ers of easy culture, and propagated by cuttings, 
layers, or seeds. 

Atraphaxis, hexan. dig. polygonece, a G. tr. and 
peren. Eur. and C. B. S. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root rapidly under a hand- 
glass. 

Atriplex, orache, polyg. moncec. and chenopodese, 
Eur. of easy culture, and increased by cuttings ; 
and H. an. to be treated as such. 

Atriplex hortensis, the garden orache, 3787. 

Atropa, pentan. monog. and solaneae, a G. tr. Eur. 
which grows in light loam, and is readily increased 
by cuttings ; and a H. peren. of easy culture in- 
creased by seeds. 

Atropa mandragora, the mandrake, 29, — see Man- 
dragora. 

Aubletia, polyan. monog. and tiliaces; S. tr. S. 
Amer. which grow freely in light loam, and well 
ripened cuttings strike under a bell-glass, if not 
allowed to damp off; it flowers best when the 
stem is ringed. 

Aubrey Hall, Warwickshire, 1571. 

Aucuba, moncec. tetran. and rhamnete, a H. tr. 
Japan, which grows in common soil, and is rea- 
dily increased by cuttings. 

Audley-end, a seat in Essex, 7542. 

Augarten, a public promenade at "\lenna, 205. 

Aulax, dicec. tetran. and proteaces, G. tr. C. B. S. 
which thrive best in sandy loam with a great 
many sherds at the bottom of the pot. Cuttings 
taken off at a joint wiU root in sand under a hand- 
glass, care being taken to avoid damps. 

Auricula, see Primula. 

Austen, Francis, a British author on gardening, 
page 1099. A. D. 1631. 

Austen, Ralph, a British author on gardening, page 
1100. A. D. 1653. 

Avena, oat-grass, trian. dig. and gramineae, H. pe- 
ren. and an. Eur. and Amer. of the easiest culture. 

Avens, geum avens. 

Averrhoa, decan. pen tag. terebintacea;, S. tr. E. 
Ind. which thrive well in light sandy loam ; and 
ripe cuttings root freely in sand under a har.d- 

Aviary, 176G ; for singing birds, 1761 ; parrots, 1762. 

Avington, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Avicennia, didyn. angios. and myoperincce, India, 



a S. tr. soil, loam and peat, and cuttings root in 
sand under a glass, in moist heat. 
Awl-Vyfort, — see Subularia. 

Axyris, monoec. tetran. and chenopodese, H. an. 
Siberia, of common culture. 

Ayenia, pentan. monog. and malvaceae, Jamaica, 
a S. ir. and S. bien. which grow in rich loam, and 
cuttings root freely in sand in a moist heat 

-A.yrshire, gardens of, 7027. 

Azalea, pentan. monog. and rhodoraceae, N. Amer. 
and India, the G. tr. thrive best in sand and peat, 
and young cuttings taken off close to the ripened 
wood, and planted in pots of sand, will root rea- 
dily in moist heat under a bell-glass; the H. tr. 
Eur. and Amer. require peat or sandy loam, and 
vegetable earth, and are increased from layers or 
seeds, 6562. 

Azar, Gerib, of Ispahan, an encourager of garden- 

ing, 459. 
Azarole, mespilus azarolus. , 



B. 



B. P., Brown's Prodromus Flora Nova» Holkndije, 
&c. 

Babiana, trian. monog. and iridece, G. peren. C. B. S. 

bulbs which grow in sandy loam and peat, and are 

propagated by offsets or seeds. 
Babworth, a seat in North um.berland, 7586. 
Baccharis, ploughman's spikenard, syngen. polyg. 

superfl. and corymb iter eje, N. Amer. G. tr. which 

grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
I Bacoche, the common name of the apricot in 

Tuscany, corrupted from the original Arabic 
i word, Bercoch, 4;j22. 
Bacoi, A , his w^orks on gardening, page 1128. 

A. D. 1596. 

Bactris, moncec. hexand. and palmeae, S. tr. S. 
Amer. palms, which thrive in sandy loam, and 
like other palms, are only to be propagated by 
seed. 

Badmington House, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Baackia, octan. monog. and myrtiaccos, G. tr. 
N. S. \V. which grow in loam and peat, are very 
hardy, and cuttings of the young wood root rea- 
dily in sand under a bell-glass. 

Bahama red wood, ceanothus colubrinus, — see 
Ccanothus. 

Bailey, W. and D. list of curvilinear hot-houses 
erected by them, 1587. 

Balbisia, syngen. polyg. super, corymbifercse, a H. 
an. Mexico, of common culture. 

Baldwin (of bald, Sax. bold, and ivinnean. Sax. 
to overcome ; a bold man, a conqueror), Tho- 
mas, late gardener to the Marquis of Hertford, at 
Kagley, near Alcester, V\'orcestershire, one of 
the first pine growers in England ; his work on 
gardening, page 1114. A D. 1818. 

Balgonie Castle, a seat in Fifeshire, 7635. 

Ballinamoan, a seat in Waterford, 7665. 

Ballinlough, a seat in Westmeath, 7662. 

Ballochmoyle, a seat in Ayrshire, 7627. 

Ballota, stinking horehound, didyn. gymnos. and 
labiateffi, H. peren. Eur. for the most part hedge- 
weeds. 

Ball's Pond nursery, 7518. 
Ballydonnellan, a seat in Galway, 7672. 
Ballygriffin, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 
Ballymont, a seat in Limerickj 7668. 
Ballymoney, a seat in Down, 7^3. 
Ballyraget House, in Kilkenny, 7656. 
Bally roam, a seat in Queen's County, 7659. 
Balm, — see Melissa. 

Balm of Gilead, — see Dracocephalum and Amyris. 
Balnagowan, a seat in Ross-shire, 7647. 
Balsam, — see Impatiens. 
Balsam-apple, momordica balsamina. 
Balsam-herb, justicia comata. 
Balsam of Capevi, copaifera officinalis. 
Balsam-tree, — see Amyris. 

Balsamita, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereaj, 

H. peren. Ital. of the easiest culture. 
Balsamita vulgaris, the costmary, 4192. 
Baltimora, syngen. polyg. nccess. and corymbife- 

reffl, a H. an. Vera Cruz, of common culture. 
Bamboo-cane, — see Bambusa. 
Bambusa, bamboo-cane, hexan. dig. and graminea?, 

S. tr. India reeds, which thrive well in a loamy 

soil, and are readily increased by suckers. 
Banana, — see Musa. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1171 



Baiie-borry {bana, Sax. a murderer, and berry), 

actaaa spicata. 
Banfshire, gardens of, 7640. 

Banisteria, decan. trig, and malpighiace£e, S. tr. 
Ainer. and W. Ind. which grow well in sandy 
loam, and cuttings of ripe wood root freely under 
a hand-glass in sand. 

Banksia, tetran. monog. and proteaceaj, G. tr. New 
Holl. soil one third peat, one third loam, and one 
third sand, with the pots well drained, and the 
plants never let flag for want of water, as they will 
seldom recover. Cuttings must be well ripened 
before they are taken off, cut at a joint, and 
planted in pots of sand without shortening the 
leaves ; cover with hand-glasses, but do not 
plunge in heat. 

Banyan-tree (priest'o tree, Ind.), ficus religiosus. 

Baptisia, decan. monog. and leguminoseaa, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which grew well in good garden soil, 
and are projiagated by seeds, or (though slowly) 
by dividing the roots. 

Barbadoes bastard-cedar, bubroma guazuma. 

Barbadoes cherry, — see Malpighia. ! 

Barbarea, v;inter-cress, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferca?, 
H. peren. Brit, which will grow in any soil, and 
may be propagated by seeds, or dividing the plant. 

Barbarea vulgaris, the common winter-cress, 4050. 

Barberry (barb, a beard, and berry), — see Ber- 
beris. 

Barelle, Giuseppe, his work on fungi, page 1128. 

A. D. 1808. 
Barganny Park, Ayrshire, 7627. 
Bark for the use of tanners, trees from which it is 

usually or may be obtained, 659. and 4754. 
Bark, tanners', how to manage for horticultural 

purposes, 1972. 
Bark-stove, or moist-stove ; a hot-house in which 

the mass of bark, earth, sand, or other materials 

in which the pots containing the plants are 

E lunged, or the plants themselves planted, is 
eated from below; or by the fermentation of 
the bed of materials, as well as by the atmosphere 
of the house. 
Bark-stove, used in horticulture, its construction 

and management, — see Pine-stove. 
Bark-stove, used in floriculture, its construction for 

growing or flowering plants, 6177. 
Bark-stove, used in floriculture, its general man- 
agement, 6214. 
Bark-stove, used in floriculture for propagation, its 

culture, 1629. 
Barking- irons, for the garden, 1341 ; for the forest, 
1343. 

Barleria, didyn. angios, S. tr. bien. and G. peren. 

India and Amer. all which grow in loam and 

peat, with a little rotten dung, and cuttings root 

freely under a hand-glass. 
Barley, — see Hordeum. 
Barmeath, a seat in Lowtb, 766^-. 
Barnbarrow House, W igtonshire, 7626. 
Barnbougle Park, Linlithgowshire, 7632. 
Barnes, Thomas, a name assumed by Sir John Hill, 

as an author on British gardening, page 1105. 

A. D. 1759. 
Barnsley Park, Gloucestershire, 7565. 
Barnton, a seat in Midlothian, 360. 
Barometer, as a means of foreknowing the weather, 

1279. 

Baron Hill, a seat in Anglesea, 7603. 

Baron's Court, a seat in Tyrone, 7679, 

Barosma, pentan. monog. and diosmeje, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow well in sandy peat, and cut- 
tings of ripened wood root readily in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Barrenwort, — see Epimedium. 

Barringtonia, monad, polyand. and myrtiacea;, a 
S. tr. E. Ind. a very fine plant, scarce, and sup- 
posed difficult to manage; soil two thirds loam, 
and one third peat kept moist, and cuttings of 
ripe wood taken off at a joint, and pot in a pot of 
sand under a hand-glass, without siioTtening the 
leaves, will root readily. (Sweet.) 

Barrington Hall, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Barrow, different sorts of, 1441. 

Barrow watering-engine, 1450. 

Barruel-Bcauvert, his works on gardening, page 
1119. A. D. 1782. 

Barth, a warm place, or pasture. 

Bartholina, gynan. monan. and orchideas, a G. 
peren. C. B. S. which thrives best in sandy loam 
and peat, with a little water when not in a grow- 
ing state; it is propagated by dividing, the 
root. 

4 



Barton (Sa.r.l, a backside or Ijacklying lield. 

Bathorne House, Durham, 7584. 

Bartonia, icos. monog. and rosacea?, G. bien. Mis- 
souri, of easy culture, and proi)agated by seeds. 

Bartsia, tetrad, siliq. and scrophularinese, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which are rather difficult to preserve, 
and require a sh.idy border of peat earth ; or to 
be planted in pots of the same soil, and kept 
moist : and H. an. Brit, which grow freely in a 
sandy soil. 

Base-rocket, reseda lutea. 

Basella, pentan. trig, and chenopodese, S. bien. and 

an. of common culture. 
Basella alba and rubra, as spinage plants, 4328. 
Basil (Basil, a town in Switzerland), — sec Ocy- 

mum. 

Bass mats, (from the Russian bast-bark), cloth of 
liber, or inner bark, used in gardening, 1506. 

Bassia, dodec. monog. and sapotese, S. tr. E. Indies, 
which grow freely in light loam, or loam and 
peat ; and ripened cuttings strike under a hand 
glass in sand. 

Bassmgbourne Hall, Durham, 7584. 

Bastard balm, — see Mclittis. 

Uastard cabbage-tree, ■»=■ see Geoffroya. 

Bastard cedar, — see Cedrela. 

Bastard hare's ear, phyllis nobla. 

Bastard indigo, — see Amorpha. 

Bastard lupine, — see Lupinaster. 

Bastard mangeneel, — see Carasraria. 

Bastard orpine, — see Andrachue/; 

Bastard pimpernell, centunculuj minimus. 

Bastard toad-flax, — see Thesium. 

Bastard vervain, — see Stachytarpheta. 

Bastard vetch, — see Phaca. 

Bastard, William, Esq. a British writer on garden- 
ing, page 1108. A. D. 1777. 

Basticn, Jean Francois, his works on gardening, 
page 1121. A. D. lbU5. 

Batschia, pentan. monog. and boraginCcC, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which grow v.'ell in common soil, and 
are increased by seeds, or dividing the roots. 

Bauera, polyan. dig. and cistineee, G. tr. N. S. W. 
which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
readily in the same soil under a bell-glass. 

Bauhinia, mountain ebony, decan. monog. and le- 
guminoseas, S. ti-. E. and W. Ind. mostly climbers 
which thrive well in light loam, and cuttings 
between old and young, do well under a bell-glass 
in sand, in a moist heat. 

Bauman, F. G., his works on gardening, page 1119. 
A. D. 1788. 

Baven, faggots of branches and spray, with their 

ends untrimmed. 
Bavis Mount, a seat in Hampshire, 7592. 
Bawd-money, meum athamanticum. 
Bay, — see l.aurus. 

Bayham Abbey, a seat in Sussex, 7531. 

Baxin, Giles Augustin, his works on gardening, 

page 1117. A. D. 1741. 
Beale, Dr. John, a British author on gardening, 

page 1101. A. D. 1666. 
Beale, John, a British author on gardening, page 

1100. A. D. 1657. 
Bean, — see Vicia. 
Bean-tree, — see Zygophyllum. 
Bean-trefoil, menyanthes trifoliata, — see Meny- 

anthes. 

Bearbind, — see Convolvulus. 
Bear's breach, — see Acanthus. 
Bear's ear, sanicle, — see Sanicula. 
Bearberry, arbutus uva-ursi. 

Bearde, de I'Abbaye, his Essay on Agriculture, 
page 1118. A. D 1769. 

Beaudesart, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 

Beaufortia, polyadelph. icosan. and myrtiaceje, 
G. tr. N. Hoi. .".oil, two thirds peat and one third 
sandy loam, and cuttings from nearly ripened 
wood, strike root freely in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Beaumanor, a seat in Leicestershire, 7573. 

Beaumont, Sir Harry, a name assumed by Mr. 
Spence, and affixed to letters from China, trans- 
lated from those of the Jesuits, and descriptive 
of the emperor's gardens, 470. 

Beaumont, Simon de, a distinguished citizen of 
Holland in the 17th century, a great encourager 
of botany and gardening, who had a fine garden 
at Beveriiing, 132. 

Beaumont Lodge, Berkshire, 7561. 

Bcaunier, , his work on gardening, page 

1122. A. D. 1820. ^ 

Beauty, that property in objects bv which they are 
5" 2 



1172 



GENERAL INDEX, 



recommended to the power or faculty of taste ; 
the reverse of ugUness j the primary, or most 
general object of love or admiration. [Jeffrey, in 
Supv. Encyc. Brit.) That which gives pleasure 
to the mind in objects of sense. {M. A. Schimmel- 
penninck, chap, i.) 

Though, in the common colloquial acceptation 
of the term beauty, it is applied only to such ob- 
jects as delight the senses of vision and hearing ; 
yet, in the strict and literal sense of the word, a 
fine view, a harmonious concert, tlie perfume of 
a rose, or the taste of an anana, are each possess- 
ed of beauty. 

' The authors quoted, and also Alison, Stewart, 
and Knight, have discussed the subject of beauty 
in a clear and satisfactory manner, by which it 
appears that the great error of preceding writers 
on the subject, consisted in supposing that there 
was only one kind of beauty ; whereas, there are 
many kinds, though some are much more general 
and universal than others. Nothing but mind 
can either please or disgust mind ; and therefore 
the beauty that we see in objects depends, as 
D'Alembert has observed, on what is within our- 
selves. Man is possessed of the origin of every 
taste and refined enjoyment naturally ; but every 
one of these, from the lowest sense to" the highest, 
requires cultivation before it become capable 
of conferring much intellectual gratification. 
Though in the nature of things, therefore, there 
may be an absolute or universal beauty ; yet, 
practically, all beauty may be said to be relative 
to the state of man in different countries and 
ages, and in different degrees of civilisation and 
refinement. Fashion, therefore, or the prevailing 
modes of the day, will by the great number of 
persons, always be esteemed the true criterion of 
beauty. 

Beauty of kitchen-garden scenery, 2355 ; of the 
flower-garden, 6201 ; of landscape scenery, 7157. 

Bechstein. D. J. M. his works on gardening, page 
1127. A. D. 1818. 

Becker, William, Glo. his work on gardening, page 
1125. A.D. 1795. 

Beckett, the seat of the Rev. Lord Barrington, 
near Farringdon, in Gloucestershire, 326. 

Bcckmannia, trian. dig. and gramineffi, a H. an. 
Eur. a grass of the easiest culture. 

Beckinann, John, 75, his writings relative to gar- 
dening, page 1124. A. D. 1781. 

Bcckstedt, J. Kp. his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1795. 

Ueddington, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 

Bedfordshire, gardens and residences of, 7549. 

Bed-straw, — see Galium. 

See, — see Apis. 

Bee-house, — see Apiary. 

Beech, — see Fagus. 

Beechwood Park, Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Beet, 3731. — see Beta. 

Beet to boot or help, a term used by gar- 

deners in Scotland for filling up blanks in plant- 
ations. To beet up, is with them synonymous 
with to plant up, or fill up with plants, 6881. 

Begonia, moncec. polyan. and hydrocharideje, S. tr. 
peren. and bien. S. Amer. succulent plants which 
grow readily in sandy loam, and cuttings root 
freely in the same soil. 

Bejaria, dodec. monog. and rhodoracers, a G. tr. 
Florida, which thrives best in sandy peat, and 
may be increased by layers and cuttings ; the 
latter planted in sand under a bell-glass in a little 
peat. 

Belan, a seat in Kildare, 7657. 
Belchamp Hill, a seat in the county of Durham, 
7584. 

Belgrave, William, his works on gardening, page 
1131. A. D. 1755. 

Belle-vue, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Bell-flower, — see Campanula. 

Bell-glass, a curvihnear utensil, of glass, in one 
piece J called a receiver among chemists. It is 
used for covering cuttings of plants, and differs 
from a hand-glass, in the latter being larger and 
composed of several pieces glazed in a frame, 
1431. 

Bellew, a seat in Galway, 7672. 

Bellis, daisy, syngen. p'olyg super, and corymbi- 

fereffi, H. tr. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Bellisle, a seat in Fermanagh, 7677. 
Bellium, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferese, H. 

peren. and an . Italy, rock-work plants of common 

culture. 



Bellows for fumigation, used in gardening, 1482. 
Belmont, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Belmont, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 
Beloeil, a fine villa near Paris, which before the 

revolution, belonged to the celebrated Prince de 

Ligne, 169. 

Bclon, Peter, a French writer on gardening, page 

1115, A. D. 1553. 
Belvidere, a seat in Kent, 7537. 
Belvoir Castle, Lincolnshire, 7578. 
Belvoir, a seat in Down, 7683. 

Belvue (pretty vie\\, Fr.), a very common name of 
country-seats in most parts of the world. 

Benaid, Mons. de, author of some papers on gar- 
dening, published in Mdmoires de la Soci^td du 
Seine et Oise, during the present century, 185. 

Bengal, its circumstances as to gardening, 500. 

Bengalore, a royal residence with celebrated gar- 
dens in the East Indies, 461. 

Benham House, Berkshire, 7561. 

Benigni, Fortunato, his work on gardening, page 
1128. A. D. 1813. 

Benjamin-tree, laurus benzoin. 

Benningsen, General Von, a native of Germany, 
and general of cavalry in the Russian service ; 
a warm patron of arts and sciences, who had a 
fine seat and botanic garden near Wilna, which 
was burnt to the ground and destroyed in the 
retreat of 1812, 283. 

Bent-grass, — see Agrostis. 

Bentley Priory, Middlese.K, 7521. 

Bents, bulrushes, — see Juncus. 

Berardia, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cynarocepha- 
leae, H. peren. Italy, of common culture. 

Berberis, barberry, hexan. monog. and berberideaf, 
H. tr. Eur. and Amer. of robust growth and 
easy culture, propagated by suckers and seeds. 

Berberis vulgaris, the common barberry, 4620. 

Berceau (cradle, arch, Fr.), an arbor or bower, 
formed in horticulture and arboriculture as a 
place of repose, — see Arbor. 

Berckheya, syng. polyg. frust. G. tr. and bien. 
C. B. S. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and root readily in common earth under a hand- 
glass. 

Ber'^er, Ch. Glo., his works on gardening, page 

1126. A. D. 1802. 
Bcrgiiis, Peter Jonas, his work on gardening, paga 

1130. A. D. 1780. 
Berkshire, gardens and residences of, 7.560. 
Bernstein, J. Glo., his work on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1793. 

Beroot, a seat of the Emir Facardine, near Jeru- 
salem, in the 17th century, 457. 
Berries, grown in horticulture, as edible fruits, 

4595. 

Berrington, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Berry-bearing alder, rhamnus frangula. 
Berry-gatherer, 1356. 

Bertholon, , his works on gardening, page 

1120. A.D. 1800. 
Bertrand, Francis, his works on gardening, page 

1118. A. D. 1757. 
Bertrand, Mons. of Bruges, his villa, 122. 
Bertuch, M. his work on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1821. 
Berwickshire, gardens of, 7620. 
Besca (old Latin), a spade or shovel. 
Besl. eyst., Besleri hortus eystettensis. 
Besleria, didyn. angios, and scrophvilarineze, S. tr. 

W. Ind. handsome plants, of easy culture in rich 

light soil. Cuttings strike freely in rotten tan, 

without any protection. 
Besnier, a French writer on gardening, page 

1116. A. D. 1705. 

Besom, different kinds of, used in gardening, 
1321. 

Beta, beet, pent. dig. and chenopodeas, a G. bien. 
Mad. H. peren. Hung, and H. bien. Eur. and 
Brit, of easy culture in sandy loam, and propa- 
gated by seeds. 

Beta cicla, the white beet, a spinaceous plant, 3779. 
It is from the roots of this last species that the 
French and Germans obtained sugar with so 
much success during the late war. The follow- 
ing was the ordinary process : — Reduce the roots 
to a pulp, by pressing them between two rough 
cylinders ; put the pulp in bags and press out the 
liquor it contains ; boil this liquor, precipitate 
the saccharine matter by quick-lime; pour off 
the liquor ; add to the residuum a solution of 
sulphuric acid, and boil again ; the lime uaiting 
with the acid, is got rid of by straining ; and tke 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1173 



liquor may then be gently evaporated, or left to 
granulate slowly, after which it is ready for un- 
dergoing the common process of refining raw 
sugars. 

Beta maritima, a native plant which may be used 

as an esculent, 42i>i. 
Beta vulgaris, the common red beet, 3731. 
Betonica, betony, didyn. gymnos. and labiatece, H. 

peren. Eur. of common culture. 
Betonica officinalis, a tea-plant, 4319. 
Betony, — see Betonica. 

Betula, birch, moncec. polyan. and amentaccEe, H. 
tr. of easy culture ; the American sorts prefer 
bog-earth and moisture, and are propagated by 
seeds or layers, and some curious sorts by grafting 
or budding. 

Eetula alba, and other species cultivated as timber- 
trees, 7108. to 7111. 

Bevel, or bevel-square, an instrument made use of 
by carpenters and masons, and also in gardening 
for the adjusting of angles. 

Bib. Bank., bibliotheca banksiana. 

Bickham, George, a British writer on gardening, 
page 1104. A. D. 1750. 

Bicton, a seat in Devonshire, 7600 

Bidens, syngen. polyg. squaL and corymbiferes, 
a S. an. H. peren. and H. an. E. Ind. and S. Amer, 
the annual species may be treated as tender and 
half-hardy aanmals; they prefer a moist situation 
and hght soil. The perennials may be kept in 
pots in similar soil, and propagated by dividing 
the plant. 

Bidet, M , his writings on gardening, page 

1118. A. D. 1759. 

Biennial plants, such as are of two years' duration 
in their natural circumstances ; but by culture, 
and especially by pinching off the flowers as they 
appear, many of these may be rendered triennial 
or of still longer duration. jMany exotics, which 
are annuals and biennials in their native coun- 
tries, are perennials in our stoves. 

Biennials, hardy, 6504. 

Biennials, frame, 6595. 

Biennials, green-house, 66'o0. 

Biennials, stove, 6668. 

Bignonia, trumpet-flower, didyn. angios. and big- 
noniacece, S. and G, tr. S. Amer. and China, some 
are climbers, and all grow well in loam and peat, 
and young shoots root readily, either in mould or 
sand", under a hand-glass in heat. The H. tr. are 
chmbers, and grow well in common soil, and are 
increased by cuttings from tlie youiig wood or 
roots. 

Bilham House, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Bill, an edge-tool, at the end of a stale or handle ; 

if short, it is called a hand-bill, and when long, a 

hedging or hedgebill, — see Hedgebill. 
Billardiera, apple-berry, pentan. monog. and pittos- 

poreffi, G. tr. Austral, climbers, which thrive well 

in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily in 

sand under a bell-glass. 
Billet [fiiUot, Fr.), a tree or log of wood, cut up for 

fuel ; billet-wood. 
Biscutella, buckler-mustard, tetrad, siliq. and cru- 

ciferece, a F. tr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. of 

common culture. 
Biserrula, hatchet-vetch, diadel. decan. and legumi- 

nosese, H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Bishop's Court, a seat in Kildare, 7657. 
Bishop's weed, — see Ammi. 

Bilston House, the seat of Addison, in Warwick- 
shire, 7571. 

Bindweed, — see Convolvulus. 

Binnarium {Lat.), a pond or stew for the keeping 
and feeding of fish. 

Birch, — see Betula. 

Bird-pepper, — see Capsicum. 

Birds, or feathered enemies of gardens, 2223 ; how 

to destroy, '..2S0. 
Bird's eye, primula farinosa. 
Bird's foot, — see Ornithopus. 
Birdsfoot-trefoil, — see Lotus. 
Birdsal, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 
Birth-wort, — see Aristolochia. 
Bitter-sweet, solanum dulcamara. 
Bitter vetch, — see Orobus. 

Bixa, anotta, polyan. monog. and tiliacea?, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grows to a large plant before it 
flowers, and therefore cuttings should be taken from 
flowering plants, in order that they may flower 
soon : they root freely under a hand-glass in 
sand, and the plants grow well in loam and 
peat. 

4 



Blackberry ; in England, the berries of the bramble 
are so named ; and in Scotland, those of the 
black currant. 

Black bryony, — see Tamus. 

Black saltwort, glaux maritima. 

Black snake-root, cimicifuga serpentaria. 

Blackmore Park, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Blackwell, Elizabeth, widow of Dr. Blackwell, who 
died in Sweden ; author of a curious herbal, 
containing 500 cuts of the useful plants. 

Blridder-nut, — see Staphylea, 

Bladder-senna, — see Colutea. 

Blade {blad. Sax.), a leaf. 

Blreria, tetran. monog. and ericeie, G, tr, C. B. S. 
which thrive only in sandy peat, and young cut- 
tings will root in sand under a bell-glass, or in a 
close frame in a shady situation. 

Blair Adam, a seat in Kinross-shire, 7634. 

Blair Drummond, the seat of the late Lord Kaimes, 
and now of Mr. Home Drummond, in Perth- 
shire, 7636. 

Blair House, or Blair Athol, a seat of the Duke of 
Athol, in Perthshire, 7636. 

Blaize Castle, Gloucestershire, 7564. 

Bluke, Stephen, a British writer on gardening, page 
1101. A. D. 1664. 

Blakea, dodec. monog. and melastome», a S. tr. 
Jamaica, which thrives woU in peat and loam, 
and requires a good deal of water; cuttings re- 
quire to be quite ripe, otherwise they rot ; plant- 
ed in sand in moist heat under a hand-glass, they 
root freely. 

Blakie, Thomas, Esq. of Beechwood, near Etlin- 

burgh, CM. H.S., 170. 
Blanching (whitening), a process for depriving 

plants of part of their bitter qualities, 2156. 
Blanching-pots, 1427. 

Blandtordia, hexan. monog. and hemerocallidefe, 
G. peren. N. S. W. v. hich grow in sandy loam and 
peat, and are propagated by suckers or seeds. 

Blarney Castle, in Ireland, 368. 

Blast, plants, and especially the cereal grasses, are 
said to be blasted when the seeds or ears are lank 
and thin, — see Vegetable Pathology. 

Blatta, the black beetle, or cock-roach, 2239. 

Blechum, didyn. angios. and acanthacea?, aS. peren. 
W. Ind. which grows well in a rich light soil, 
and cuttings root freely under a hand-glass in 
heat. 

Blechnum, cryptog. filices, and filices, G. and H. 
peren. C. B. S. Eur. and N. Amer. ferns, which 
grow in loam and peat, and are increased by di- 
viding at the root or seeds. 

Biendon Hall, Kent, 7537. 

Blenheim, a seat in Oxfordshire, 7559. 

Blessington gardens, situated in the county of 
Dublin, formerly of some note, 367. 

Bletia, gynan. nionan. and orchidete, S peren. 
China and W. Ind. which grow well in sandy 
loam and peat, and are readily propagated by 
dividing at the root. 

Blickhng Hall, Norfolk, 7554. 

Blighia, akee-tree, octan. monog. and sapindeje, a 
S. tr. 5975. 

Blight, a common term for injuries received by the 
vegetable kingdom when in a state of growth, 
which cannot be referred to any obvious or cer- 
tain cause, and coming suddenly is said to give 
them the appearance of being blighted or blasted, 
— see Vegetable Pathologv. 

Blith or Blijthe, Walter, 142. a British writer on 
gardening, page 1100. A. D. 1649. 

Blithfield Park, Staffordshire, 7570. 

Blit, an ancient synonym for the beet, beta. 

Blitum, strawberry-blite, monan. dig. and chenopo- 
de£E, H. an. S. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Bobart, Jacob, a British author on gardenins, oaee 
1101. A. D. 1684. 

BoboU gardens, at Florence, 83. 

Boc. mus., Museo di Piante rare di Don Paulo 
Boccone. 

Bocconia, tree-celandine, dodec. monog. and papa- 
veraceee, a S. tr. Ind. which grows well in sandy 
loam, and ripens seeds plentifully ; and a H. 
peren. China, which grows in rich soil, and is pro- 
pagated by dividing the roots. 

Bockmann, A , his work on gardening, page 

1127. A. D. 1815. ^ ^ 

Bodfach, a seat in Montgomeryshire, 7611. 

Bodorgan, a seat in Anglesea, 7603. 

Boehmeria, monoec. tetrand. and urticese, a G. tr. 
Canar, which thrives well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely in the same kind of soil 
F 3 



1 1T4 



GENERAL INDEX. 



under a Iiand-glass. The H. peren. Virginia, 
grows in peat soil, and is propagated by dividing 
the root, 

Boerhaavia, hog-weed, dian. nfionog. and nyctagi- 
iiete, S. tr. and peren. Indies, which thrive well 
in rich loam, and cuttings root readily. 

Bccttiger, C. A., his works, page 1127. A. D. 1817. 

Bog-rusli, — see Schoenus. 

Boissier, a beautiful villa near Geneva, 240. 

Bolesworth Castle, Cheshire, 7590. 

Boltonia, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereffi, 
H. peren. N. Amer. of common culture, 7594. 

Bombax, silk-cotton tree, monad, polyan. and mal- 
vaceaj, S. tr. E. Ind. and S. Amer. which grow 
freely in loamy soil, and cuttings, not too ripe, 
taken off at a joint, will root freely under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Bonchurch Cottage, Isle of Wight, 7594. 

Bonfeil, John, a British author on gardening, page 
1099. A. D. 1622. 

Bonnelle, Charles, his work on gardening, page 1118. 
A. D. 1763. 

Bontia, didyn. angios, and myoporineas, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which thrives in peat and loam, and cut- 
tings root readily in heat, under a hand-glass. 

Books on gardening, 7685. 

Books of accounts and others required to be kept 

bv gardeners, 2337. 
Booth's Hall, Cheshire, 7590. 
Borage, — see Borago. 

Boi-ago, borage, pentan. monog. and boraginea;, 
H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of the easiest cul- 
ture. 

Borago officinalis, the common borage, 4127. 

Borassus, dioec. hexan. and palmeae, a S. tr. E. Ind. 
which thrives well in sandy loam, and is propa- 
gated by seed. 

Borbonia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseee, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, and young 
cuttings strike readily under a bell-glass in sand. 

Borch, Michael Jean, Comte de, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1128. A. D. 1780. 

Border [bordure, Fr.), the edge, fringe, or margin 
of any thing, especially when distinguished by a 
line of demarcation, by ornament, or otherwise, 
from the main piece or plot. 

Border-flowers, herbaceous plants of hardy consti- 
tution and easy culture, well adapted for orna- 
menting borders. In floriculture they are classed 
under distinct heads, viz. as perennials, 64S9j 
bulbs, 6500 ; biennials, 6504 ; hardy annuals, 6506 ; 
half- liardy annuals, 6512 ; for particular purposes, 
6515; for concealing upright deformities, 6516; 
horizontal deformities, 6517 ; which will grow 
under the shade and drip of trees, 6518 ; for orna- 
menting pieces of water, 6519 ; rocks, 6524; with 
evergreen leaves for winter display, 6527; for 
edgings to beds or borders, 6528 ; highly odorifer- 
ous, 6529; dial plants, 6532; ferns and mosses, 
6534 ; alpines, 6o37 ; common showy sorts for a 
small garden, 6538. 

Borders for fruit-trees, 24S4. 

Borders for gardening are of general use in horti- 
culture and floriculture, as accompaniments to 
walks, and walls or other fences. The former are 
chiefly as ornamental compartments: and the 
latter partly ornamental, but chiefly for the cul- 
ture of fruit-trees, and tlie more delicate herba- 
ceous esculents. The width of borders that 
accompany walks, is generally guided by that of 
the walk ;' but they are esteemed handsomer when 
broader rather than narrower; wall or fence 
borders should, according to the most approved 
ideas, never be less than the height of the wall or 
fence ; since the roots of a tree require as much 
room to extend themselves as the shoots. For 
the formation of fruit-tree borders in kitchen- 
gardens, see 2484 ; and in flower-gardens, 6111. 
to 6118. 

Borecole (boreal cole, northern cole or cale), — see 

Brassica. 
Borghese, villa of, at Rome, 84. 
Boi-nefond, , a French writer on gardening, 

page 1116. A. D. 1653. 
Bormt, Charles Henry, his works on gardening, 

page 1120. A. D. 1800. 
Borning-piece, 1367. 

Bnronia, octan. monog. and , G. tr. 

N. S. W. which thrive well in loam and peat, and 
young cuttings strike readily under a bell-glass in 
sand. 

Borrington, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 

Borya, dicec. ' dian. and cuphorbiarca?, H. tr. N. 



Amer. which thrive ui any common soil, and are 
increased by layers. Ripened cuttings planted in 
autumn will also take root. 

Bosc, Monsieur Louis Auguste Guillaume, F.L.S. 
H.S., inspector of the government garden of the 
Luxembouig, Paris ; his works on gardening, 
page 1122. A. D. 1819. 

Boscage {boscagium, Lat. or bocagc, Fr.), a grove 
or thicket of trees. 

Boscus {old iMt.), all manner of wood. 

Bose, Gaspard, proprietor of a tine garden near 
Leipsic, at the end of the 17th centurj', 217. 

Bosea, golden rod, pentan. dig. and chenopodeas, a 
G. tr. Canar. v. hich grows freely in loani and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand, under a hand- 
glass, without heat. 

Bossiffia, diadel. decan. and leguminoscEe, G. tr. 
Austral, which grow in lo;.m and peat, with a 
little sand, the pots being well drained ; and cut- 
tings, not too ripe, will root in sand, under a bell- 
gJass, guarding against damp. 

Boston House, Middlesex, 7521. 

Bot. Cult., Sweet's Botanical Cultivator, Svo. 1820. 

Bot. Mag., Curtis' Botanical Magazine. 

Bot. Heg., Kerr's Botanical Register. 

Bot. Rep., the Botanist's Repository for new and 
rare plants, by H. Andrews. 

Botanic garden, a garden for the culture of plants 
with a view to botanical science, 732-3. 

Botanic gardener or curator, 7386: his duties, 
7498. 

Botanic gardens for the sale of plants, at Monk- 
wood, 7627 ; at Forfar, 7637. 

Botanic gardens of Chelsea, 7517 ; Kew, 7529 ; Ox- 
ford, 7557 ; Cambridge, 7551 ; Hull, 7581 ; Liver- 
pool, 7588 ; Bury, 7552 ; Edinburgh, 7618 ; Glas- 
gow, 7629 ; Dublin, 7653 ; Cork, 7666. 

Botanic gardens, public, their formation, 7323; 
management, 7497. 

Bothwell House, Lanarkshire, 7629. 

Botley, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 

Botley, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Botrychium, moonwo'rt, crj-ptog. stachyopterides, 
and tilicece, H. peren. N. Amer. and Brit, ferns, 
which grow in peat earth in shady situations, and 
are propagated by dividing the root or by seeds. 

Bouche, Pierre, his works on gardening, page 1127. 
A. D. 1809. 

Boulevard, a promenade, 7315. 

Boullai/, , a French writer on gardening, page 

1117. A. D. 1712. 

Boultibrooke, a seat in Radnorshire, 7610. 

Boiubon palm, latania rubra. 

Bourrcria, pentan. monog. and boragincK, S. tr. 
E. and W. Ind. of easy culture in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Boiirsoalt, Monsieur, possessor of a fine garden in 
Paris, 173. 

Boumiard, , his writings on gardening, page 

1119. A. D. 17S8. 

Boiitclicr, William, a British author on gardening, 
page 1108. A. D. 1772. 

Bouvardia, letran. monog. and rubiaceas, G. tr. 
N. and S. Amer. which grow in loam and peat, 
and are increased by cuttings of the roots, or 
young cuttings under a hand-glass in heat. 

Bov.den, a seat in WiU.shire, 3.50. 

Bov.-er (5m;-, or burc. Sax. a parlor), an arbor 
l\>rmod with tree.-, — see Arbor. 

Bowood, a seat in Wiltshire, 7597. 

Boxthorn, — see Lyciura. 

Box-tree, — see Buxus. 

Br., Brown, Robert, Esq. F. R. S., possessor of the 
Banksian Library, one of the first botanists of 
Europe, distinguished for his knowledge, and im- 
provement of the Jussieuean system. 

Erabejum, African almond, polyg. monoec. and pro- 
teaceffi, a Gr. tr. C. B. S. which grows in sand and- 
peat, and ripened cuttings root in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Brachysema, decan. monog. and leguminoseaj, a G. 
tr. N. Holl. a climber which thrives well in sandy 
loam and peat, and is increased by layers or cut- 
tings under a bell-glass in sand. 

Bradford, a town in Yorkshire, gardens of, 7582. 

Bradley, Richard, F.R.S., a British author on gar- 
dening, page 1102. A. D. 1716. 

Bradwell Lodge, Durham, 7584. 

Bradwell Lodge, Hampshire, 7594. 

Braham Castle, Ross-shire, 7647. 

Braid House, Midlothian, 7618. 

Brake, the iVrn ptcris. 

Bramble, see Rubus. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1175 



Bramborough House, Cheshire, 7590. 

Bramham Park, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Bramieri, Don Giulio, his works on gardening, 

page 11£8. A. D. 167. 
Bramwell Hall, a seat in Cheshire, 7590. 
Bramshill, a seat in Hampshire, 759-1. 
Brasiletto, -— see Cffisaipinia. 

Brassavola, gynan. monan. and orchideffi, aS. peren. 

W. Ind. a parasite, or air-plant, which may be 

hung up in baskets of moss or tan, or tied in a belt 

of moss to the trunk of a palm or other tree. 
Brassia, gynan. monan. and orchides, a S. peren. 

Jam. an air-plant, requiring the same treatment 

as the brassavola. 
Brassica, tetrad, siliq. and crucifere£e, H. peren. 

bien. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture, 34S3. 
Brassica oleracea var. «. capitata, the white cabbage, 

3487. 

Brassica oleracea var. /3. rubra, the red cabbage, 3509. 
Brassica oleracea var. y. sabauda, the Savoy cabbage, 
3513. 

Brassica oleracea var. y. sabauda subvar. y., the 

Brussels sprouts, 35'22. 
Brassica oleracea var. S. sabellica, the borecole, 3527. 
Brassica oleracea var. i. botrytis, the cauliflower, 

3538. 

Brassica oleracea var. botrytis subvar. the broc- 
coli, 3555. 

Brassica oleracea var. y,. napobrassica, turnip-rooted 
cabbage, 3529. 

Brassica napa, rape, used as a salad plant in gardens, 
and grown in agriculture for food for sheep, and 
for the seed to be pressed for its oil, 4028. 

Brassica rapa, turnip, 3693. 

Brassica eruca, a salad plant, 4063. 

Bread-nut, — see Brosimum. 

Bread-fruit, — see Artocarpus. 

Brechin Castle, a seat in Forfarshire. 

Brecket Hall, Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Brecon shire, gardens of, 7613. 

Breitenhach, Ph. Fr. his works on gardening, page 

1126. A. D. 1805. 
Breitschneider, K.B. his work on gardening, page 

1126. A. D. 1798. 
Brentford nursery, Middlesex, 7518. 
Bretby Park, a seat in Derbyshire, 7574. 
Bretonniere, 31 , de la, his works on gardonii;g, 

page 1119. A. D. 1783. 
Brickenden Bury, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 
Bride!, his works on gardening, page 1120. A. D, 

1798. 

Bridgeman, a landscape-gardener of eminence in 
tlie early part of the ISch century, 342. 

Bridges, di&ei-ent kinds of, used in gardening, 1782. 

British authors on gardening, 76S6. 

Briza, quaking-grass, trian. dig. and gramiuece, a H. 
peren. and an. Brit, grasses of the easiest culture. 

Bro. Jam., the Civil and Natural History of Jamaica, 
by Patr. Browne. 

Broadlands, a seat in Hamjishire, 7594. 

Broch/eri, Francesco, his work on gardening, page 
112S. A. D. 1777. 

Brockelesby Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Brockley Park, in Queen's County, 765.9. 

Brocq, Philip, le, M.A. a British writer t)n garden- 
ing, page 1109. A. D. 1786. 

Brodisea, hexan. monog. and hemerocallidea;, G. 
peren. Georgia, which grow well in sand and 
peat, kept moist, and are propagated by dividing 
the root like agapanthus. 

Brodie House, in Kincardineshire, 7638. 

Bromborough House, 7590 

Brome-grass, — see Bromus. 

Bromelia, hexan. monog. and bromeliacesE, S. tr. 
natives of South America and the V\'est Indies, all 
of which grow well in two thirds good fresh loam, 
one third leaf mould or rotten dung, and as much 
sand as will prevent the mixture from getting 
hard and compact, with watering. A warm, and 
rather moist atmosphere is required to grow the 
fruiting sorts to any size ; but they are otherwise 
very hard}-. Most of the species bear that peculiar 
production called a crown on the summit of their 
fruit, by which, or by suckers, they are usually 
propagated. 

Bromelia ananas, the common pine-apple ; its his- 
tory and varieties, 4784 j its general culture, 
2697 ; preferable varieties, 2698 ; soil, 2700 ; arti- 
ficial heat, 2706 ; propagation, 2712 ; nursing de- 
partment, 2718; succession department, 2753; 
fruiting department, 2792 ; general directions 
common to the three departments, 2842; insects, 
2906; compendium of a course of culture, 29F 



4 F 



recent imorovements by, Knight, Marsland, &c. 
2924. 

Brompton agricultural nursery, Middlesex, 7^18. 

Brompton Park nursery, Middlesex, 7518. 

Bromus, brome-grass, trian. dig. and gramineas, 
H. peren. tr. and an. Eur. of the easiest cul- 
ture. 

Brooklime, veronica beccabunga. 

Brookshaw, George, a British gardening author, 
page 1114. A. D. 1817. 

Brook-weed, — see Samolus. 

Broom, — see Spartium. 

Broom-rape, — see Orobanche. 

Brosimum, bread-nut, polygam. dxcec. and , 

S. tr. Jam. soil, a light loam ; propagation by 
large old cuttings not divested of their leaves, in 
a ])0t of sand under a hand-glass in a moist 
heat. 

Brossai d, Davy, or David, a French writer on gar- 
dening, page 1115. A. D. 1552. 

Brossea, pentag. monog. and ericefe, a S. tr. S. 
Amer. w^hich grows in peat and sand, and young 
cuttings will root in the same mixture under a 
bell-glass on gentle heat. 

Brotera, syngen. poly. segr. and cynarocephalea;, a 
H. peren. S. Amer. which will grow in common 
loam, and is propagated by dividing the root. 

Broughton Hall, Stafibrdshire, 7570. 

Broughton House, Kircudbrightshire, 76-25. 

Broughton, or Adelphi nursery, Edinburgh, 7618. 

Broughtonia, gynan. monan. and orchidece, a S. 
peren. Jam. an air-plant, requiring the same 
treatment as brassavola. 

Brousse, M de la, his works on gardening, 

page 1119. A. D. 1772. 

Broussonetia, paper-mulberry, dioec. tetran. and 
urticea, a H. tr. Japan, which grow-s in common 
garden-soil, and is readily increased by layers. 

Browallia, didyn. argios. and scrophularineee, G. an. 
S. Amer. of the usual treatment. 

Brown, Launcelot, Esq. a celebrated landscape-gar- 
dener, born at Cambol, or Camphill, a few houses 
near the village of Hartburn, in Northumberland. 
He died in 1782, without issue, holding at the 
time the situation of head-gardener at Hampton- 
court, and possessed of considerable wealth, which 
he left to a nephew, 342. 

Browne, Robert, a British writer on gardening, page 

1109. A. D. 1786. 

Browne, Sir Thomas, M. D., a British author on 
gardening, page 1110. A. D. 1658. 

Brownea, monad, decan. and leguminosea?, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grows best in loamy soil, and cut- 
tings of ripened wood will root in sand under a 
hand-glass in moist heat. 

Brownsholme, a seat in Lancashire, 7588. 

Broxburn BU17, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Broxmore, a seat in Wiltshire, 7596. 

Broxted Lodge, Durham, 7584. 

Brucea, dioec. tetran. and terebintace^, a S. tr. 
Abyssinia, which thrives in loamy soil, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 

Bruchus pisi, 3642. 

Brugmansia, pentan. monog. and solaneje, a S. tr. 

Peru, which thrives in rich loam, and strikes 

from cuttings in moist heat. 
Biulcii, C , his works on gardening, page 1128. 

A. D. 1804. 

Bridles, , a British writer on gardening, page 

1110. A. D. 1790. 

Brunia, pentan. monog. and rhamnes, G. tr. C. B. S. 
with heath-like leaves, wliich grow in sandy peat 
with a moderate supply of water ; and young cut- 
tings in sand, under a bell-glass, will strike root 
freely. 

Bryansford, a seat in Down, 7683. 

Bryant, Charles, a British author on gardeniiig, 

page 1109. A. D. 1784. 
Bryony, — see Bryonia. 

Bubon', pentag. dig. and umbellifereEe, G. tr. and G. 
bien. Eur. and C.B.S. grow freely well in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings taken olf at a joint, 
and planted under a hand-glass in sand, will 
root readily ; the H. bien. species is of easy cul- 
ture. 

Bubroma, bastard cedar, polyadel. dodec. and mal- 
vacc'iE, a S. tr. Jamaica, which thrives well in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Buch. ic, Buch's icones plantarum. 

Buchnera, didyn. angios. and scrophularine£e, a H. 
peren. N. Amer. which grows best in pots in loam 
.ind I'cat, and is increased chieflv bv seeds 
4 



1 176" 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Buchox, Pierre Joseph, his works on gardening, 
page 1118. A. D. 1760. 

Bucida, olive-bark tree, decan. monog. and santala- 
ceee, a S. tr. Jamaica, which grows best in loam 
and peat, and well ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass plunged in heat. 

Buckbean, menyanthes trit'oliata. 

Buckhurst Park, Sussex, 7531. 

Buckinghamshire, gardens and residences of, 7546. 

Buckler-mustard, — «ee Biscutella. 

Bucknal, Thomas Skip Dyot, Esq. a British author 
on gardening, page 1112. A. D. 1797. 

Buckthorn, — see Rhamnus. 

Buckwheat, polygonum fago[)yrum. 

Buckwheat-tree, mylocarpum ligustrinum. 

Budding, different modes of, 2050. to 2062. 

Buddlea, tetran. monog. and scrophularinese, G. tr. 
and a H. tr. Chili, and C.B.S. which thrive in any 
loamy soil, and cuttings root freely under a com- 
mon hand-glass. 

Buenos Ayres, a seat in Gloucestershire. 

Buffbn, George Louis le Clerc, Count de, his works 
on gardening, page 1117. A. D. 1739. 

Buffonia, tetran. dig. and caryophylleoe, a H. an. of 
common culture. 

Bugle, — see Ajuga. 

Bugloss, — see Anchusa. 

Bug-wort, — see Cimicifuga. 

Buildings, how to operate with, in gardening sce- 
nery, 7232. to 7236. 

Buildings of the Greeks, 7234 : Indians and Chinese, 
7235. 

Bulbocodmm, hexan. monog. and melanthacese, a 

H. peren. Spain, a bulb of common culture. 
Bulbs, their management as articles of trade in the 

nursery business, 74S7. 
Bulbs, what, 778 ; to propagate by, 835 ; to cultivate 

hardy bulbous flowers, 6501 ; exotic bulbs, — see 

Frame, Green-house, &c. 
Bull, herb., Herbier de la France, par M. Bulliard. 
Bulstrode, a seat in Buckinghamshire, 7547. 
Bumalda, pentan. dig. and rhamnete, a G. tr. 

Japan, which thrives well in an equal i-ortion of 

loam and peat ; and ripened cuttings root readily 

under a hand-glass in sand. 
Bumelia, pentan. monog. and sapotete, S. tr. N. 

Amer. preferring ioamy soil, and propagated by 

well ripened cuttings in sand under a hand-glass; 

and H. tr. which grow in common soil, and root 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Bunias, tetrad, silic. and cruciferea^, a H. peren. 

Eur. of common culture. 
Bunium, earth-nut, pentag. dig. and umbellifereje, 

H. peren. Brit, of common culture. 
Bunium bulbocastanum, common earth-nut, 4303. 
Buonapartea, hexan. monog. and bromelcaj, a S 

tr. which thrives best in loam and decayed 

leaves. 

Buphthalmum, syngen. poly super, and corymbife- 
re£e, G. tr. and F. peren. Eur. and Amer. which 
grow freely in loam and peat, and cuttings root in 
the same soil under a hand-glass : and H. peren. 
and an. of common culture. 

Bupleurum, hare'.s-oar, pentan. dig and umbelli- 
fereae, G. tr. and peren. Eur. and C. B. S. which 
grow freely in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
readily in the same soil, under a hand-gl ass ; and 
H. peren. and an. of common culture. 

Burchardt, Th. H. O., his work on gardening, page 
1127. A. D. 1805. 

Burdock, — see Arctium. 

Burleigh, a seat in Lincolnshire, 7578. 

Burley-on-the-hill, a seat in Rutlandshire, 7579. 

Burnet, — see Poterium. 

Burnet-saxifrage, — see Pimpinella. 

Burnhall, a seat in Duriiam, 7584. 

Bur-parsley, — see Caucalis. 

Bur-reed, — see Sparganium. 

Bursaria, pentan. monog. and pittosporese, a G. tr. 
Ind. and Amor, a showy plant which grows best in 
sandy loam and peat, and cuttings root readily in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Bursera, polyg. dicec. and terebintaceas, a S tr. W. 
Ind. which grows in loamy soil, and large cuttings 
root in sand under a liand-glass in moist heat. 

Btirtin, Francis Xavier, his works on gardening, 
page 1129. A. D. 1784. 

Burton Constable, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Burtonia, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a G. tr. 
N. Holl. I'equiring attentive treatment ; it grows 
in sandy loam and peat, with the pots well drain- 
ed, and young cuttmgs will root in sand under a 
bell-glass. 



Burwell Park, a seat in Lincolnshire, 7578, 

Burwood Park, Surrey, 7527. 

Bury St. Edmunds, botanic garden at, 7552. 

Bushey Park, at Hampton Court, 7523. 

Bushnell's Wells, Oxfordshire, 1662. 

Bussato, Marco, his work on gardening, page 
1128. A. D. 1794. 

Butcher's broom, — see Ruscus. 

Butea, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, S. tr. E. 
Ind. splendid plants which grow in loam and peat, 
and cuttings taken off at a joint, and planted in 
sand, and not deprived of their leaves, will root 
in moist heat, covered with a hand-glass. 

Buteshire, gardens of, 7650. 

Butler, gardener to the Earl of Derby, at Know- 
leslev, and afterwards a nurseryman at Prescot, 
1589.' 

Butomus, flowering-rush, ennean. hexag. and hy- 

drocharideaB, a H peren. Brit an aquatic. 
Butter-bur, tussilago petasites. 
Butter-wort, — see Sanicula. 

Buttneria, penUn. monog. and malvacete, S. tr. 
Amer. which grow in loam and peat or rich loam, 
and ripened cuttings root under a hand-glasd in 
sand. 

Button-flower, — see Gomi>hia 
Button-tree, — see Conocarpus. 
Button-weed, — see Spermacoce. 
Button-wood, cephalanthus occidentalis. 

Butict, , his works on gardening, page 1120. 

A. D. 1795. 

Buxus, monoec. tetran. and euphorbiaces, H. tr. of 
easy culture, and propagated by cuttings or layers. 

Buxus sempervirens, the common box-tree, the 
best of all edging shrubs, 6582 : as a timber-tree, 
7118. 

Bysshe Court, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Bystropogon, didyn. gymnos. and iabiatese, G. tr. 
Canaries, which thrive in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root readily in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Byzantium, gardens of, 306. 



C. 

Cabanis de Salagnac, his works on gardening, page 

1119. A. D. 1/86 
Cabbage, 3483 — see Brassica. 
Cabbage, Chinese, 4330. 
Cabbage-moth, phalaana oleracea, 2253. 
Cabbage-tree, — see Areca. 
Cabinets de verdure, 6813. 

Cacalia, syngen. polyg. ffiqual. and corymbifereee, a 
S. tr. and S. an. C.H.S. and Amer. succulents, 
which grow in sandy loam and brick-rubbish, and 
are propac:atcd by cuttings ; the H. peren. are 
of the easiest culture. 

Cachyris, pentan. dig. and umbcllifereffi, H. peren. 
Eur. of common culture, and propagated by seeds. 

Cactus, icosan. monog. and cacteas, S. D S. Indies 
and Amer. and G. tr. succulents of easy cul- 
ture. 

Cactus opuntia, the Indian fig, 5956. 

Cacucia, decan. monog. and onagrareas, a S. tr. 
Guiana, which grows well in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root freely in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Cadet, Charles Louis, his works on gardening, page 

1120. A. D. 1801. 

Cadet-de-Vaux, Antoine Alexis, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1121. A. D 1807. 

Cadia, decan. monog. and leguminosece, a S. tr. 
Arabia, which prefers a light soil, and cuttings 
root in sand under a hand-glass and plunged in 
heat. 

Cadland, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Caenwond, a seat in INliddlesex, 7521. 

Caernarvonshire, gardens and residences of, 7604. 

Caesalpinia, decan. monog. and leguminoscEe, S..tr. 
E and W. Ind. prickly branched, which thrive 
well in loam and peat, and cuttings sometimes 
succeed, taken off in a growing state, but not too 
young, and plunged in a pot of sand under a hand- 
glass in moist heat. 

Cajsia, hexan. monog. and asphodeleEP, a G. peren. 
N. S. W. which grows in loam and peat, and is in- 
creased by dividing at the root or by seeds. 

Caasuha, syngen. polyg. squal. and corymbifereffi, a 
S. peren. E. Ind. requiring a rich, loamy soil, and 
cuttings root freely. 

Caithness, gardens of, 7644. 

Cakile, tetrad, silic. and crucifereas, a H. i)ercn. and 



GENERA! INDEX. 



1177 



an. Eur ; the first best grown in pots, and the 
other of common culture, and both increased by 
seeds. 

Calabash-tree, — see Crescentia. 

Caladenia, gynan. monan. and orchidea, a G. peren. 
N. S. W. which may be grown in loam and peat, 
and increased by division at the root. 

Calamagrostis, trian. dig. and gramineae, H. peren. 
Eur. grasses of the easiest culture. 

Calamint, — see C'alamintha. 

Calamintha, calamint, didyn. gymnos. and labiatese, 

F. tr. and H. peren. Eur. and Amer. of common 
culture, and increased by seeds or dividing at the 
roots. 

Calamus, hexan. monog. and palmeae, S. tr. E. Tnd. 
palms, which thrive best in sandy loam, and a 
warm, moist atmosphere, and are propagated by 
seed. 

Calanchoe, octan. tetrag. and sempervivese, D. S. 
tr. As. and Afr. succulents which thrive well in 
sandy loam, but require bottom heat to make 
them flower. " The leaves placed on a pot of 
mould, or on the tan, will shoot out young plants 
from the notches of the margin." (Sweet.) 

Calathian violet, gentiana pneumonanthe. 

Calceolaria, slipper-wort, dian. monog. and scro- 
phularineje, G. peren. and an. Peru and Falkland 
islands, of easy culture, and propagated by seeds. 

Calcutta, gardening of, 500. 

Caldasia, pentan. monog. and scrophularineEe, a S. 

an. New Spain, of common culture. 
Calder House, Midlothian, 7618. 
Calea, syngen. polyg. asqual. and corymbifereae, .S. tr. 

and a S. bien. W. Ind. which grow in rich soil, 

and cuttings strike readily either in sand or 

mould. 

Caled. Depic, Cfialmer's Caledonia Depicta, an an- 
tiquarian work. 

Caled. Hort. Soc, Caledonian Horticultural Society, 
some account of, 410. and page 1113. A. D. 1810. 

Caled. Mem., Memoirs of the Caledonian Horticul- 
tural Society, page 1113. A. D. 1810. 

Caledon Hill, a seat in Tyrone, 7679. 

Calendula, marigold, syngen. polyg. necess. corym- 
bifereas, G. tr. and a G, peren. Eur. and C. B. S. 
which thrive in loam and peat, and cuttings root 

! freely in the same soil under a hand-glass ; and 
H. an. of the easiest culture. 

Calendula officinalis, the common pot-marigold, 
4122. 

Calla, heptan. monog. and aroideffi, a G. and H. 
peren. Eur. and C.B.S. the first an aquatic, and 
the other a marsh plant of easy culture. C. jethi- 
opia will also grow well on the green-house 
stage. 

Callander, a seat in Stirlingshire, 7631. 

Callicarpa, tetran. monog. and verbenaceas, S. and 

G. tr. E. Ind. and Amer. which grov/ best in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings strike root in sand 
under a hand-glass in heat. 

Callicoma, dodec. dig. and cunoniaceae, a G. tr. 
N. S. W. which thrives in loam and peat, and 
cuttings of ripe wood root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Calligonum, dodec. tetrag. and polygoneas, a H. tr. 

Caspian Sea, which may be grown in loam and 

peat, and propagated by layers. 
Callisa, trian. monog. and commelinese, a S. peren. 

W. Ind. a creeper of easy culture. 
Callistachys, decan. monog. and leguminosese, G. tr. 

N. Holl., which grow fast and flower freely in 

loam and peat, and cuttings planted in sand under 

a bell-glass. 

Callitriche, water-starwort, monandr. digyn. and 
naideas, a H. an. Brit, which grows on the sur- 
face of shallow water, and sends down delicate 
fibres to the soil below. 

Calluna, octan. monag. and ericese, a H. tr. Brit, 
(formerly erica) the common heath ; it requires 
to be grown in peat soil, and may be increased by 
seeds, layers, or cuttings of the young shoots 
planted in sand under a hand-glass. 

Calodendrum, pentan. monog. and pittosporeje, a 
G. tr. C. B. S., which, as the name imports, is of 
great beauty. It grows in loam and peat, and 
cuttings of ripe wood root readily in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Calodium, monoec. polyan. and aroidese, S. tr. and 
peren. Ind. and Amer. most of which grow freely 
in water, or in rich soil in a moist heat ; they are 
propagated by tubers of the root. 

Calonnc, , his works on gardening, page 

1119. A. D. 1779. 



Calophyllum, polyan. monog. and guttifereas, S. tr. 
Ind. which grow well in light loam, and cuttings 
of ripened wood -trike freely in sand, under a 
hand-glass in moi t heat. 

Calopogon, gynan. monan. and orchidese, a F. peren. 
N. Amer. which grows in peat, and is increased by 
dividing at the ruot. 

Calothamnus polyadelph. icosan, and myrteace®, 
G. tr. N. Holl. which thrive in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Calotropis, pentan. dig. and asclepiadese, S. tr. N. 
Amer. which grow in light loam, young cuttings 
root freely under a hand-glass in a pot of sand, 
care being taken that they do not get mouldy. 

Caltha, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceee, H. peren, 
Brit, marsh plants of the easiest culture. 

Caltrops, — see Tribulus. 

Calvel, Etienne, his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. 1802. 

Calvert and Co., their work on gardening, page 

1122. A. D. 1821. 

Calycanthus, icosan. polyg. and rosaceee, H. tr. 
N. Amer. which thrive in loam and peat, and 
root by layers in the same soil. 

Calypso, gynan. monan. and orchide£e, a H. peren. 
N. Amer. a bulb, which grows best in peat, or in 
sandy loam and peat, and is increased by offsets 
from the bulbs or by seeds. 

Calyptrantcs, icosan. monog. and myrteaceas, S. 
peren. W. and E. Ind. which thrive in sandy 
loam, and peat ; and though cuttiiigs do not strike 
freely, ripened once sometimes root under a hand- 
glass. Layers answer best. 

Calystegia, bearbind, pentan. mOnog. and convol- 
vulaces, H. peren. Eur. and Amer. of common 
culture. 

Camb. Brit, Cambden's Britannia, an antiquarian 
work. 

Cambridge botanic garden, 7551. 
Camden Park, in Wexford, 7655. 
Camelina, tetrad, silic. and cruciferes, H. an. Eur. 

of common culture. 
Camellia, monadel. polyan. and auranteze, G. tr. 

China, of great besuty, — see 6612. 
Cameraria, bastard mangeneel, pentan. monog. and 

apocynece, Ind. which grows well in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root in a pot of sand under a 

hand-glass. 

Campanula, bell-flower, pentan. monog. and cam- 
panulcce, G. tr. peren. bien. and an and H. peren. 
and an. Eur. As. Afr. and Am. of common cul- 
ture, and increased by seeds, dividing at the root, 
or by cuttings. 

Campanula rapunculus, the rampion, 3941 ; cam- 
panula pyraraidalis, 946. 

Camphire-tree, laurus camphora. 

Camphorosma, tetran. monog. and chenopodeae, a 
G. under-shrub, S. Eur. of easy culture in light 
soil, not over-watered. 

Campion, cucubalus baccifer. 

Cams Hill, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Canada rice, zizania aquatica. 

Canarina, hexan. monog and campanulaceffi, a G. 
peren. Canaries, requires a light soil, no water 
where the leaves have died down, and to be put 
in the stove to flower well. It is propagated from 
cuttings of the roots or shoots. 

Canary-grass, — see Phalaris. 

Candleberry-myrtle, myrica gale. 

Candy-carrot, atham.anta cretensis. 

Candytuft, — see Iberis. 

Canella, dodec. monog. and meliacese, a S. tr. 
W. Tnd. soil loamy; and cuttings of large old 
wood, with all the leaves taken off at a joint, in 
sand, in a moist heat, strike, though with diffi- 
culty. 

Canna, Indian shot, monan. monog. and canneae, S. 
peren. Ind. and S. Amer. reedy or marsh plants 
of easy culture, and propagated by seeds or di- 
viding the root. 

Cannabis, hemp, dicec. pentan. and urticese, a H, 
an. India, of easy culture. 

Canon House, Sussex, 7531. 

Canons, a seat in Middlesex, 7520. 

Cantaleupe melon, — see Cucumis, 

Canterbury bell, campanula medium. 

Canton, Fatee gardens at, 7318. 

Can tray, a seat in Inverness-shire, 7648. 

Cape of Good Hope, gardening of, 502. 

Cape jasmine, gardenia florida. 

Caper-bush, — see Capparis. 

Capparis, caper-tree, polyan. monog. and cappa- 
rideae, S. and G. tr. Eur. and W. Ind. Chiefly 



1178 



GENERAL INDEX. 



climbers and trailers, which grow freely in light 

loam, and strike readily by cuttings. 
Capparis spinosa, the caper-bush, 6038. 
Capsicum, pentan. monog. and solanes, S. tr. G. tr. 

and H. an. Indies, of easy culture, and propa- 

gated by cuttings or seeds. 
Capsicum annuum, cerasiforme, and grossum, 4272. 

to 4277. 

Caralluma, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, D. S. tr. 

E. Ind. succulents which grow in brick rubbish 

and loam, and mcrease by cuttings left tiU their 

wounds dry up before planting. 
Caraway, — see Carum. 
Carclere, a seat in Cornwall, 7601. 
Cardamine, lady's smock, tetrad, siliq. and cruci- 

feiCcB, a G. peren. and H. peren, bien. and an. 

Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Cardamine pratensis, common lady's smock, 4311. 
Cardamom, elettari cardaraomum. 
Carden,a seat in Cheshire, 7590. 
Cardiganshire, gardens and residences of, 7607. 
Cardinal-flower, lobelia cardinalis, 6460. 
Cardiospermum, heart-seed, octan. trig, and sa- 

pindete, S. an. India and Brasil, of common 

culture. 

Cardoon, cynara carduiiculus, 3929. 

Carduus, thistle, syngen. poly, aqual. and cynaro- 
cephaleiE, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of com- 
mon culture. 

Carduus marianus, 3956. 

Carex, moncec. trian. and cyperacese, a G. peren. 
and H. peren. Eur. and Amer. grasses of com- 
mon culture. 

Careya, monad, polyan. and ,, a S. 

peren. E. Ind. which grows in hght soil. 

Carica, papaw-tree, dioec. decand. and cucurbitacese, 
S. tr. India which grow vigorously in a loamy soil, 
and large cuttings, not deprived of their leaves, 
root in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 

Carissa, pentan. monog. and apocyncse, S. tr. E. Ind. 
which grow in loam and peat, well drained, and 
without being much watered ; cuttings root in 
sand under a bell-glass in heat. 

Carlina, carline-thistle, syngen. polyg. asqual. and 
cynarocephalece, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. 
of common culture, and raised from seeds. 

Carline-thistle, — see Carlina. 

Carlow, the county of, as to gardening, 7660. 

Carlsruhe (Charles's peace or retreat), public gar- 
dens of, 7314. 

Carlton Palace gardens, London, 7523. 

Carnation, — see Dianthus. 

Carob-tree, ceratonia siliqua, 

Carolinea, monad, polyan. and malvace£e, S. tr. 

VV. Ind. splendid plants which thrive well in 

loamy soil, and cuttings taken ofT at a joint, and 

not deprived of their leaves, root in sand under 

a hand-glass in heat. 
Caronelli, Conte Pietro de, his works on gardening, 

page 1128. A. D. 167. 
Carpesium, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereEe, 

H. peren. Eur. and China, which grow in light 

soil, and are increased by seeds. 
Carpinus, liornbeam, moncec. polyan. and armen- 

taceaj, H. tr. Eur. and Amer. of common culture. 
Carpinus betulus, the common hornbeam, 7091. 
Carpopogon, diadelph. decan. and leguminoseee, S. 

tr. E. Ind. climbers which grow in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root freely under a bell-glass in 

sand. 

Caif'adorl, his works on gardening, page 1128. A. D. 
1807. 

Carrot, 3712. — see Daucus. 

Carthamus, syngen. polyg. zequal. and cyneroce- 
phaleai, G. tr. Eur. and Afr. which grow well 
in a loamy soil, and cuttings root freely in sand 
under a hand-glass. The H. peren. and an. are 
of common culture. 

Carton, a seat in Kildare, 7657. 

Carum, caraway, pentan. dig. and umbellifereae, H 
bien. Eur. of common culture. 

Carum carvi, the common caraway, 4225. 

Caryophyllus, clove-tree, icos. monog. and myr- 
teacete, a H. tr. Moluccas, which grows in loam 
and peat, and cuttings, not deprived of their 
leaves, root in sand under a hand-glass in a 
moist heat. 

Caryota, moncec. polyan. and palme£e, a S. tr. E. 

Ind. a palm which grows in sandy loam, and is 

propagated by seeds. 
Cascades, 1827. 

Caserta, a royal Neapolitan palace and gardens, 87. 
Cashel Palace, in Tipperary, 7667. 



Cashew-nut, anacardium orientale. 
Cashier, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 
Cashiobury, a seat in Hertfordshire, described, 
7545. 

Cassava, jatropha manihot. 

Cassia, decan. monog. and leguminoseas, S. and G. 
tr. bien. and an. E. and W. Ind. which thrive in 
loam and peat, and cuttings will root in sand 
under a hand-glass in moist heat : many kinds 
ripen seeds. 

Cassine, pentan. trig, and rhamnese, a S. tr. and 
G. tr. C. B. S. which grow freely in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Cassinia, syngen. polyg. segr. and corymbifereos, 

G. peren. N. Holl. of common culture, 1769. 
Cassino {Ital.), a little house, a villa, or cottage 

orn^e. 

Castanea, chestnut, moncec. polyan. and amentacea?, 

H. tr. Eng. and Amer. of common culture. 
Castanea vesca, the sweet chestnut ; as a fruit-tree, 

475 ; as a forest tree, 7094. 
Castel, Rene Richard, his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. 1802. 
Castel, Robert, a British writer on gardening, page 

1103. A. D. 1728. 
Castelleja, didy. angios. and scrophularineae, a H. 

peren. Louisiana, of common culture. 
Castle Asliby, Northamptonshire, 7580. 
Castle Blaney, a seat in Monaghan, 7678. 
Castle Dillon, in Armagh, 7682. 
Castle Eden, Durham, 7584. 
Castle Glammis, in Angus-shire, 7637. 
Ca.stle Gosford, in Armagh, 7682. 
Castle Grant, in Inverness-shire, 7648. 
Castle Gray, in Perthshire, 7636. 
Castle Hill, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 
Castle Howard, Yorkshire, 758S. 
Castle Malwood Cottage, Hampshire, 7594. 
Castle Upton, a seat in Antrim, 7684. 
Castle Wig, a seat in Wigtonshire, 7626. 
Castle Martyn, a seat in the county of Cork, 7666. 
Castlebar House, a seat in the county of Mayo, 7673. 
Castletown Delvin, a seat in Westmeath, 7662. 
Castletown, a seat in Kildare, 7657- 
Castletown, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 
Castor-oil plant, ricinus palma christi. 
Casuarina, moncec. monan. and coniferese, G. tr. 

Austral, which grow freely in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Cat-mint, — see Nepeta. 
Cat's ear, — see Hypochsris. 
Cat's tail, — see Typha. 
Catstail.grass, — see Phleum. 
Cat-thyme, teucrium marura. 

Catalpa, dian. monog. and bignoniaccae, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grow well in light loam, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in 
heat; the H. species thrives in common soil, 
and is increased from seeds or cuttings of the 
roots. 

Catananche, syngen. polyg. a;qual. and cichoraces, 
a H. peren. and an. Eur. and Afr. of common 
culture. 

Catchfly, lychnis vcscaria. 

Caterpillar, the second or larva stage in the pro- 
gress of insects generated from eggs, after which 
they become pupa;, or chrysalidas, and lastly, 
images or perfect insects, 2227 ; general prin- 
ciples of palliating their effects and destroying, 
2277 ; mode of destroying caterpillars on the cab- 
bage tribe, 3593 ; gooseberries, 4656 ; roses and 
other flowers, 6194. 

Catesbffia, lily-thorn, tetran. monog. and rubiaceae, 
S. tr. W. Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand plunged in heat, and covered 
with a bell-glass. 

Cathartocarpus, decan. monog. and leguminoseee, 
S. tr. E. Ind. which may be treated as cassia. 

Cattaneo, Giacomo, his works on gardening, page 
1128. A. D. 1767. 

Caucalis, bur-parsley, pentan. dig. and umbellifereas, 
H. bien. and an. Eur. of common culture. 

Cauliflower, 3o38. — See Bra^isica. 

Caulophyllum, hexan. monog. and berbcrideie, H. 
peren. N. Amer. of common culture. 

Caus, Salomon, his works on gardening, page 1123. 
A. D. 1620. 

Cause, D. H., his works on gardening, page 1129. 
A. D. 1676. 

Cav. ic. Ant. Jos. Cavanilles, Icones et Descrip. 
tiones Plantarum quae aut sponte in Hifpnnia 
crescunt, aut in Hortis hospitantur. 



GEi<ERAL INDEX. 



1179 



Cavalleriza {Ital.), a manage, or place for practising 
horsemanship. 

Cavan, county of, as to gardening, 7676. 

Cavanilles, Antonio Joseph, his works on garden- 
ing, page 1131. A. D. 178-. 

Cave Castle, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Caversham, a seat near Reading, 7561. 

Caves and caverns, as garden-decorations, 1814. 

Cayenne, gardening of, 505. 

Caylus, N de, his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. 1806. 

Ceanothus, pentan. monog. and rhamneas, S. tr. 
and G. tr. Amer. and W. Ind. which grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand 
under a hatid-glass. The H. tr. grow in common 
soil, and are readily raised from seeds or 
layers. 

Cecropia, snake-wood, dicec. dian. and urtices, a 
S. tr. Jam. which pi-efers a loamy soil, and 
large cuttings planted in sand under a hand-glass 
will strike root. 

Cedar of Goa, cupressus lusitanica. 

Cedar of Lebanon, — see Pinus. 

Cederhelm, Barou Carl Wilhelm, his works on 
gardening, page 1130. A. D. 1740. 

Cedrela, pentan. monog. and meliace£e, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grows well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root under a hand-glass in sand. 

Celandine, — see Chelidonium. 

Celastrus, staff-tree, pentan. monog. and rhamnese, 
G and H. tr. C. 13. S. and Amer. requiring si- 
milar treatment to ceanothus. 

Celery, 3997. — see Apium. 

Celosia, cock's comb, pentan. monog. and amaran- 
thacea^, a S. bien. and an. E. Ind. and China ; 
of -common culture. 

Celosia cristata, the common cock's comb, 6483. 

Cels, M. Francois, C. M. H. S. an eminent nursery- 
man at Mont-Rouge, Paris, 194. 

Celsia, didyn. angios and solaneaj, S. an. F. bien. 
and H. an. Eur. and E. Ind. of common culture. 

Celtis, nettle-tree, polyg. moncec. and amentacea;, 
S. tr. and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. which require 
only common soil and culture, and are increased 
by seeds or layers, or by cuttings. 

Ccnchrus, trlan, monog. and gramineaa, a S. tr. 
and H. an. India; grasses of the easiest cul- 
ture. 

Cenia, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, H. 

an. C. B. S. of common culture. 
Centaurea, centaury, syngen. polyg. frustran. and 

cynarocephale£e, G. F. and H. peren. bien. and 

an. Eur. of common culture. 
Centaurea benedicta, the blessed thistle, 4250. 
Centaury — see Centaurea. 

Centunculus, bastard pimpernel, tetran. monog. 
and primulaceae, a H. an. Brit, of common 
culture. 

Cephaelis, pentan. monog. and rubiaceai, S. tr. 
Jam. and Afric. which thrive in loam and peat, 
and cuttings roots freely under a liand-glass in 
sand. 

Cephalantlius, button-wood, tetran. monog. and 
rubiacea?, a H. tr. N. Amer. which grows best 
in loam and peat, and is propagated by layers or 
ripened cuttings. 

Cephalophora, syngen. polyg. eequal. and corym- 
biferea;, a F. peren. Chili, which grows in sand 
and peat, and young cuttings root readily imder a 
hand-glass. 

Cerastium, mouse^ear, chick-weed, decan pen tag 
and caryophylieae, H. peren. and an. Eur. of the 
easiest culture. 

Ceratocarpus, moncec. monan. and chenopodeae, a 
H. an. Tart/iry, of common culture. 

Ceratonia, carob-tree, polyg. dioec. and legurai- 
noseee, a G. tr. Levant, which thrives well in 
loam and peat, and ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Ccratophyllum, horn-wort, moncec. poiyan. and 
naiadese, H. peren. Brit, aquatics, of easy cul- 
ture, and increased by seeds. 

Ccrbera, pentan. monog. and apocyneas, S. tr. S. 
Amer. and India, which grow in loam and peat, 
ripened cuttings root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass in moist heat. 

Cercis, Judas-tree, decan. monog. and leguminoseas, 
H. Ir. Eur. and America, which grow in com- 
mon soil, and are raised from seeds or layers. 

Cerinthe, honey-wort. pentan. monog. and bora- 
gineaj, a H. tr. and an. Eur. of common culture. 

C( ruti, Joseph Ant. Joach, his works on gardening, 
page 1 120. A D. 1792. 



Cestrum, pentan. monog. and S. and solanea;, 
G. tr. E. and W. Ind. which grow well in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Ceylon, gardening of, 501. 

Chaddesdon, a seat in Derbyshire, 7574. 

Chcerophyllum, chervil, pentan. dig. and umbel- 
lifereffi, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and N. 
Amer. of the easiest culture. 

Chalfont House, Buckinghamshire, 7546. 

Chamffidorea, dioec. hexan. and palmes, a S. tr. 
Caracas, which grows in sandy loam, and a strong 
moist heat, and is propagated by seeds. 

Chamjerops, polyg. dicec. and palmea3, S. tr. S. Eur. 
and N. Amer. palms requiring the same treat- 
ment as chamasdorea. 

Chambers, Sir William, as an author on gardening, 
page 1105. A. D. 1757. 

Chambray, Louis, Marquis de, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1118. A D. 1765. 

Chamomile, — see Anthemis. 

Chcmipier, Svmphbrien, a French writer on garden- 
ing, page 1115. A. D. 1533. 

Champs Elys^es, a public garden at Paris, 163. 

Chapel AUcrton, formerly the seat of R. A. Salis- 
bury, Esq. situated near Leeds, 7581. 

Chaptal, the Count of, a distinguished French 
chemist and philosopher, as a gardening author, 
page 1120. A. D. 1801. 

Chaptalia, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbiferese, 
a H. peren. N. Amer. best cultivated in loam 
and peat in pots. 

Chara, moncec. monan. and naiadea^, H. an. Brjt. 
aquatics of easy culture. 

Charcoal, proportion in which it is afforded by 
different trees, 698. 

Charleville Forest, a seat in the King's Countv. 
7658. 

Charleville, a seat in Wicklow, 7654. 

Charlottenburg, a royal residence near Berlin, 209. 

Charlton House, Kent, 7534. 

Charlton Park, Wiltshire, 7597. 

Cltarpentier de Caussigny, his works on gardening:, 
page 1120. A. D. 18— . 

Charring wood, method of, 6962. 

Chartreuse, les R(^v. P^res de, their work on gar- 
dening, page 1118. A. D. 1767. 

Chartreuse nursery at Paris, 194. 

Chartularies, deeds of tenure of the ancient reli- 
gious houses. 

Chassel, , his works on gardening, page 

1119. A. D. 1790. 

Chaste-tree, — see Vitex. 

Chataigneroye, le Sieur de, a French writer on 
gardening, page 1116. A. D. 1692. 

Chatelherault, a palace of the Duke of Hamilton, 
in France, and the name of an ornamental build- 
ing in Hamilton Park, near Glasgow, 358. - ' 

Chatswortl), a seat in Derbyshire, 7575. 

Chawstick, gouania domingensis. 

Cheese-rennet, galium verum. 

Cheilanthes, cryptog. Alices, and filice£e, G and H, 
peren. As. and Amer. ferns which grow in loam 
and peat, and require to be kept in a moist shaded 
situation. 

Cheiranthus, wall-flower, tetrad, siliq. and cruci- 
ferete, G. and H. tr. and peren. Eur. and As. 
under-shrubs and evergreen herbs, of easy cul- 
ture in light soil, and propagated by seeds nr 
cuttings. 

Chelidonium, celandine, poiyan. rnonog. and papa- 
veracese, H. peren, Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Chelone, didyn. angios. and bignoniacea?, H. peren. 
N. Amer. elegant plants which grow in loam 
and peat, and are propagated by cuttings or by 
dividing the root. 

Chelsey Farm, Berkshire, 7561. 

Cheltenham, a garden at, 7564. 

Chemincreux (.hollow way), a suburban villa at 
Paris, 165. 

Chenar-tree, platanus orientalis. 

Chenolea, pentan. monog. and chenopodea;, a Gr. tr. 
C. B. S. which grows in rich light soil, and cut- 
tings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Chenopodium, goose-foot, pentan. dig. and cheno- 
podeze, G. peren. and H. peren. and an. Eur. 
and Amer. of the easiest culture. 

Chenopodium bonus-henricus, 3791. 

Chenopodium urbicum and album, 4290. 

Cherleria, decan. trig, and caryophylleaj, a H. 
peren. Scot, a rock-work plant which grows "in 
loam and peat, and is increased by dividing at 
the root. 



1130' 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Chermes, a genus of plant-louse, nearly allied to 
aphis, and generally confounded with the aphi- 
(l£e, 2243. 

Cherrier, J B , his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. 1808. 
Cherry — see Prunus. 
Cherry-house, 2674 ; its culture, 3117. 
Cherry-pepper, — see Capsicum. 
Chervil, — see Chairophyllum. 
Cheshire, gardens and residences of, 7590. 
Cheanee Monstereuil, Charles de la, a French author 

on gardening, page 1116. A. D. 1654. 
Chesnel, Marquis de, his works on gardening, page 

1122. A. D. 1820. 
Chestnut, — see Castanea. 
Chevening, a seat in Kent, 7538. 
Chick-pea, cicer arietinurn. 
Chiokweed, — see Stellaria. 
Chillingham Castle, Northumberland, 7586. 
Chiraaphila, decan. monog. and ericeje, H. tr. N. 

Amer. rather difficult to preserve ; they grow 
best in a bed of peat, and seldom transplanted. 

Chinampas, or floating gardens of Mexico, 491. 

Chiococca, snow-berry, pentan. monog. and ru- 
biacccB, a S. tr. Jam. which thrives well in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Chionanthus, fringe-tree, dian. monog. andoleines, 
H. tr. N. Amer. of great beauty, which grow in 
good loamy soil, and are increased by seeds or 
grafting on the common ash. 

Chipchase Castle, Northumberland, 7586. 

Chippenham Park, Cambridgeshire, 7551. 

Chironia, pentan. monog. and gentianese, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow in peat with a little loam, and 
young cuttings root under hand-glasses in the 
same soil. 

Chiswick House, Middlesex, 7521. 

Chlora, yellow wort, octan. monog. and gentianea;, 
a H. an. of common culture. 

Chloranthus, chulan, tetran. monog. and loran- 
thaceas a G. tr. China, which may be treated 
as chenolea. 

Ciilorophytum, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, aS. 
and G peren. Afr. grow in loam anil peat, and are 
increased by dividing at the root, or by seeds. 

Chocolate-nut, — see Thcobroma. 

Cholmondeley Hall, Cheshire, 7590. 

Chomel, Noel, a French author on gardening, page 
1116. A. D. 17—. 

Chomelia, tetran. monog. and rubiacejE, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root readily in sand under a hand-glass in 
heat. 

Chondrilla, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cichoraccce, 
a H. pereii. France, which grows best in peat 
soil, and is increased by seeds or dividing at the 
root. 

Chorizema, decan. monog. and leguminosese, G. tr. 
N. Hoi. which grows in sandy loam and peat, and 
produces seed in abundance. 

Chorospermum, tetrad, siliq. and crucifereee, a H. 
an. of common culture. 

Christ, T. L., his works on gardening, ixige 1127. 
A.D. 1809. 

Christ's thorn, zizyphus paliurus. 

Christmas rose, — see Helleborus. 

Chron. Scot , Chronicles of Scotland, by Pittscottie. 

Chrysanthellum, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corym- 
bifereaj, a S. an. W. Ind. of common culture. 

Chrysanthemum, syngen. polyg. super, and corym- 
biferese, a G. tr. and H. an. and peren. which 
grow in common garden-soil, and are increased 
by dividing the root, or by cuttings, or seeds. 

Chrysanthemum leucanthemum, 4316. 

Chrysanthemum indicum, — see Anthemis. 

Chrysobalanus, cocoa-plum, icos. monog. and rosa- 
cese, a S. and G. tr. W. Ind and Georgia, which 
grow in sandy loam, and large cuttings taken 
off at a joint, with their leaves uninjured, and 
planted thinly in a pot of sand, under a hand- 
glass, will strike root. 

Chrysocoma, goldy-locks, syngen. polyg. aqual. and 
corymbifercEe, G. tr. C.B.S. and Eur. which thrive 
in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily under 
a hand-glass. 

Chrysophyllum, star-apple, pentan. monog. and 
sapotese, S. tr. W. Ind. which thrive in sandy 
loam, and cuttings of ripened shoots root in 
sand under a hand-glass, with a strong moist 
heat. 

Chrvsoplenium, golden saxifrage, decan. dig. and 
saxifragese, H. peren. Eur. and Amer. which 



grow in shady moist places, and may be treated as 

marsh plants. 
Chrysurus, trian. dig. and gramineae, a H. an. of 

common culture. 
Chulan, — see Chloranthus. 
Cicely, — see Scandix. 

Cicer, chick-pea, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, a 

H. an. of the easiest culture. 
Cichorium, succor^', syngen. polyg. squal. and ci- 

choraceae, a F. bien. H. peren. and H. an. Eur. 

Afr. and India, of the easiest culture. C. endivia, 

the garden endive, 3976. C. intvbus, succory, 

3988. 

Cicuta, cow-bane, pentag. dig. and umbellifereae, 
H. peren. Eur. and Amer. which grow best in 
marshy places, and are increased by seeds. 

Cimicifuga, bugwort, poiyan. pentag. and ranun- 
culacecB, H. peren. Eur. and Amer. of common 
culture. 

Cinchona, pentan. monog. and rubiacese, S. tr. 
which grow in loam and peat, but not very freely, 
and ripe cuttings in sand under a hand-glass, in 
moist heat, will strike root. 

Cineraria, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferea;, 
S.G. and H. tr. and peren. Eur. and C.B.S. plants of 
easy culture, and propagated by cuttings, division, 
or seeds. 

Cion, — see Cyon. 

Circa;a, enchanter's nightshade, dian. monog. and 
onagrariae, H. peren. Brit creepers, which prefer 
moist shady situations, and grow in any soil. 

Cissampelos, dioec. monad, and menispermeae, a G. 
tr. and S. peren. S. Araer. climbers which grow 
freely in loam and peat, and cuttings root under a 
hand-glass. 

Cissus, tetran. monog. and vitiaceae, S. G. and H. 
tr. Amer. and Ind. of easy culture in peat and 
loam, or in garden-earth, and readily propagated 
by cuttings ; the S. and G. sorts in a moist 
heat, and the others in the shade under a hand- 
glass. 

Cistus, rock-rose, poiyan. monog. and cistineae, 
G. F. and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. under-shrubs, 
which grow in common soil, or loam and peat, 
arid may be increased by layers, or young cut- 
tings taken off at a joint, and planted under a 
hand-glass ; seeds are frequently produced. 

Citharexylum, fiddle-wood, didyn. angios. and ver- 
benaceae, S. tr. W. Ind. which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Citizens' villas, 7285 ; management of, 7430. 
Citrus, orange-tree, polyad. poiyan. and auranteae, 

G. tr. India and China, — see 4879. 
Citrus acida, the lime, 4899. 
Citrus aurantium, the orange, 4884. 
Citrus decumana, the shaddock, 5902. 
Citrus medica, the lemon and citron, 4896, 4897. 
Citrus tribe, their propagation and culture, 5905. to 

5954. 

Clackmannanshire, gardens of, 7633. 

Cladium, trian. monog. and cyperaceas, a H. peren. 

Kngl. a grass of the easiest culture. 
Clairs voy<5es {Fr.), open railings or barriers, 335. 
Clarici, Paolo Bartolomeo, his work on gardening, 

page 1128. A.D 1726. 
Clandon Place, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 
Clare, county of, as to gardening, 7669. 
Clare Hall, a seat in the county of Dublin, 7653. 
Claremont, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 
Clarv, — see Salvia. 
Clay'berry Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Claytonia, pentan. monog. and portulaces, H. 
peren. and an. N. Araer. and Silesia, of the easiest 
culture. 

Claytonia perfoliata, as a spinage plant, 4327. 
Clear Well, a seat in Gloucestershire, 7565. 
Clearing-nut, strychnos potatorum. 
Cleavers, galium aparine. 

Clematis, virgin's bower, poiyan. polyg. and ranun- 
culaceas, S. and G tr. climbers, which grow in 
light, rich soil, and young cuttings strike readily 
under a hand-glass in heat. The H. species grow 
in any soil, and are increased by layers, dividing 
at the root or seeds. . 

Clemento y Rubio, Don Simon de Roxas, his work 
on gardening, page 1131. A.D. 1807. 

Clermont, a seat in Lowth, 7664. 

Clerodendrum, didyn. angios. and verbenacefe, S, 
and G. tr. Ind. and China, soil half loam, a quar- 
ter rotten dung, and a quarter peat ; they require 
a large pot to flower freely, and young cuttings 
root readily under a hand-glass. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1181 



Cleome, tetrad, siliq. and capparidea?, S. tr. bien. 
and an. Ind. and Amer. which grow in rich, light 
soil, and are readily increased by cuttings or 
seeds. 

Clethra, decan. monog. and ericeae, a G. tr. and 
H. tr. N. Amer. the first thrives well in peat, 
with a little loam, and is propagated by cut- 
tings or seeds; the hardy sorts grow in peat 
and sandy loam, and are generally increased by 
layers. 

Cliefden, Buckinghamshire, 7547. 

Cliffortia, dioec. polyan. and rosaceaa, G. tr. C. B. S. 
which thrive well in loam and peat, and young 
cuttings root freely in sand under a bell-glass. 

Clifton Hall, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Climate, as it affects gardening, 518. 

Climate of Great Britain, study of, 1290. 

Climbers, vegetables which attach themselves to 
trees or other upright objects by their tendrils, or 
hooks, as the creepers do by their roots, and 
twiners by the convolving of their stems. 

Climbing herbaceous plants, 6516 ; shrubs, 6573 ; 
green-house plants, 665 ; dry-stove plants, 6665 ; 
stove plants, &c. 6717. 

Clinopodium, wild basil, didyn. gymnos. and labia- 
teas, H. peren. Brit, and Egypt, which grow in 
any soil, and are increased by seeds or by dividing 
the roots. 

Clipping, or shearing plants, 1888. 

Clitoria, diadel. decan. and leguminosea?, S. tr. and 
an. Ind. and Amer. which thrive well in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings will root under a 
bell-glass in heat. 

Clonbrook, a seat in Galway, 7672. 

Clothing, the stems of trees, 2540. 

Cloud-berry, rubus chamasmorus. 

Clouds, their terminology, &c. 1235. 

Clove-tree, caryophyllus aromaticus. 

Clover, — see Trifolium. 

Clover Hill, a seat in Roscommon, 7671. 

Clowance, a seat in Cornwall, 7601. 

Clown's all-heal, stachys palustns. 

Club-moss, — see Lycopodium. 

Club-rush, — see Scirpus. 

Clugny, a seat near Paris, 162. 

Clumber Park, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Clusia, balsam-tree, polyg. monoec. and guttifereae, 
S. tr. which require a light sandy loam, and cut- 
tings root freely in sand under a glass; in their 
natural state they grow on decaying or rotten 
barked trees. 

Clusius, Carolus, his works on gardening, page 1123. 
A.D. 1630. 

Cluyt, Outger Augerius, (or Dirck, Dut.) his works 
on gardening, page 1129. A.D. 1631. 

Cluytia, dioec gynan. and euphorbiacese, a S. tr. and 
G. tr. C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, and 
young cuttings root readily in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Clydesdale orchards, Lanarkshire, 7629. 

Clypeola, treacle-mustard, tetrad, silic. and crucife- 

reffi, a H. an. S. Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Cneorum, widow-wail, trian. monog. and tere- 

bintaceee, a G. tr. S. Eur. which grows in 

light soil, and may be increased by cuttings or 

seeds. 

Cnicus, horse-thistle, syngen. polyg. sequal. and 
cynarocephaleffi, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of 
common culture. 

Cobbett, William, as a writer on gardening, page 
1114. A.D. 1821. 

Cobham Park, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 

Cobham Hall, Kent, 7538. 

Coboea, pentan. monog. and bignoniaceze, a G. tr. 
Mex. a climber of easy culture, and propagated by 
seeds, or struck from cuttings under a hand-glass 
in a little moist heat. 

Coccinella, lady-cow, or lady-bird, an insect of the 
coleopterous order, 6561. 

Coccoloba, seaside grape, octan. trig, and polygo- 
neas, S. tr. Ind. which grow freely in light loamy 
soil, and cuttings taken off at a joint will root in 
sand under a hand-glass ; the leaves must not be 
shortened. 

Coccosypsilum, tetran. monog. and rubiaceas, a S. 
peren. W. Ind. a creeper which grows freely in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

{.^cculus, dioec. dodec. and menispermeae, S. tr. 

E. Ind. climbers which require plenty of room to 

flower, and grow in loam and peat ; cuttings root 

easily under a hand-glass. 
vrf)ccus, or cochineal insect, described, 2245 ; how to 

subdue, &c. 2278. 



Cochlearia, scurvy-grass, tetrad, silic. and crucife- 
rese, H. peren. tr. an. and Eur. of common culture. 

Cochlearia officinalis, the common scurvy-grass, 
4067 ; armoracia, the horse-radish, 4111. 

Cochlearium, or snailery, 1767. 

Cockenhatch, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Cock's comb, — see Celosia. 

Cocksfoot-grass, — see Dactylis. 

Cocoa-nut, — see Coccus. 

Cocoa-plum, — see Chrysobalanus. 

Cocos, cocoa-nut tree, monoec. hexan. and palmea?, 
S. tr. E.and W. Ind. palms of the usual culture. 

Cocos nucifera, the cocoa-nut, 6009. 

Codarium, dian. monog. and scrophularineae, a S. tr. 
Guinea, which grows in loam and peat, and ripen- 
ed cuttings will root in sand under a hand-glass 
in heat. 

Codon, decan. monog. and solaneas, a G. bien. 

C. B. S. of easy culture. 
Coffea, coffee-tree, pentan. monog. and rubiacea?, 

a S. tr. Arabia and W. Ind. which thrives well in 

loam and peat, and ripened cuttings root easily in 

sand under a hand-glass in heat. 
Coffee-tree, — sec Coftea. 

Cognatus, a name assumed by Gilbert Cousin, a 

French author on gardening, page 1115. A.D. 

1546. - ' 

Cogwood-tree, laurus chloroxylon. 
Cointereaux, Francois, his works on gardening, 

page 1120. A.D. fSOO. 
Coix, Job's tears, monoec. triand. and graminoze, S. 

peren. E. Ind. grasses which grow readily in 

light rich soil, and seed plentifully. 
Colbertia, polyan. pentag. and dilleniacea;, a S. tr. 

E. Ind. which thrives in loam and peat, and 

ripened cuttings, not deprived of their leaves, 

root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 
Colchicum, meadow saffron, hexan. trig, and me- 

lanthacece, H. peren. Eur. bulbs flowering in 

autumn, — see 6501. 
Cold-houses, for plants, 1696. and 6186. 
Coldenia, tetran. tetrag. and boragineae, a S. and E. 

Ind. of common culture. 
Cole, coleworts, cale, kale, {k^ale. Sax. or caulis, a 

stem, Lat.) cabbage- plants of the brassica tribe, 

whose leaves are used before they form a head, 

— see Brassica oleracea. 
Coleby Hall, Lincolnshire, 7577. 
Coleshill House, Berkshire, 7561. 
Colewort, — see Brassica and Crambe. 
Colgarth, a seat in Westmoreland, 7592. 
Colla, Luigi, his works on gardening, page 1128. 

A.D. 1813. 
Collectors for gardens, 7394. 
Collington House, Midlothian, 7618. 
Collins, Samuel, Esq. a British writer on gardening, 

page 1102. A.D. 1717. 
Collinsonia, dian. monog. and labiatese, a G. peren. 

and H. peren. N. Amer. of common culture ; 

they prefer rather a moist situation. 
Collipriest House, Devon.shire, 7600. 
Colne Park, Essex, 7542. 
Colney House, Hertfordshire, 7544. 
Colon, -a seat in Lowth, 7664. 
Colpoon-tree, cassine colpoon. 
Coltsfoot, — see Tussilago. 
Columbarium, or pigeonry, 1767. 
Columbine, — see Aquilegia. 

Columnea, didyn. angios. and scrophularinete, S. tr. 
W. Ind. of easy culture, and easily lost ; it grows 
well in loam and peat, and strikes readily from 
cuttings, but will soon rot or damp off if it have 
too much water, or stand in a damp part of the 
house. 

Colutea, bladder-senna, diadel. decan. and legumi- 
nosess, H. tr. Eur. of easy culture, increased by 
seeds. 

Colwick Hall, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Com. Got., Commentarii societatis regies scienti- 

arum Gottingensis. 
Comarum, icos. polyg. and rosaceee, H. peren. Brit.- 

marsh plants. 
Comely Bank nursery, Midlothian, 7618. 
Comfrey, — see Symphytum. 

Commeiin, John, his works on gardening, page 1129. 
A.D. 1676. 

Commelina, trian. monog. and commelineae, S. and 
G. peren. and an. and H. peren. and an. Amer. 
all of which grow freely in sandy loam and peat, 
and are increased by dividing the root or by seed. 

Commersonia, pentan. pentag. and meliaceae, a S. 
and G. tr. N. Hoi which grow well in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand-glass 
in sand. 



1182 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Common acacia, — see Eobinia. 

Common dragon, arum dracunculus. 

Comocladia, maiden.plura, trian. monog. and tere- 
bintaceffi, S. tr. W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, and ripened cuttings in sand under a bell- 
glass in moist heat will strike root. 

Comparetti, Andrea, Lis works on gardening, page 
1128. A.D. 1798. s i«o 

Compost, composed soil, or composed dung ; a 
mixture of earths, or of earths and manures, or 
of manures alone, and hence the terms cjmpost- 
soil, and compost-manure ; to collect and form, 
1977. 

Compost-ground, a place for laying and preparing 

composts, 1984. 
Comptonia, moncec. trian. and amentacese, a H. tr. 

N. Amer. which thrives best in peat soil, and is 

increased by layers. 
Coniferous trees, their culture and management, 

6983. 

Conium, hemlock, pentan. dig. and umbellirereffi, 
a G. tr. and H. bien. and an. Eur. C. B. S. and 
Barbary, which grow in any soil, and are in- 
creased by seeds. 

Connoisseurs of gardening, 7408; their garden 
arrangements, 74'29. 

Conocarpus, button-tree, pentan. monog. and com- 
bretacca;, S. tr. W. Ind. which thrive well in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root in sand- under a 
hand-glass in heat. 

Conservatory, a habitation for ornamental plants 
of moderate temperature, in which the greater 
part are planted in beds or borders of soil, and 
allowed to attain a considerable size, 6174. . 

Constantinople, gardens of, 308. 

Consumption in plants, 900. 

Contortion in plants, 898. 

Contracting gardeners, or new-ground workmen, 
7389. 

Contrajerva root, dorstenia contrajerva. 

Convallaria, lily of the valley, hexan. monog. and 
smilacciE, a H. peren. Brit.'of easy culture. 

Convolvulus, bind-weed, pentan. monog. and con- 
voivulaceiE, tr. peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. 
of all the departments of culture, mostly twiners, 
which grow readily in any soil, and are increased 
by the roots or seeds, and some by cuttings in sand. 

Convolvulus batatas, the Spanish or sweet potatoe, 
6026. 

Convolvulus reptans, a spinage plant in China, 
6037. 

Convolvulus soldanella, 4313. 

Conyza, fleebane, syngen. polyg. super, and corj'm- 
bifere£E, tr. peren. and an. Eur. As. Amer. of all 
the departments which grow freely in loam and 
peat, and are increased by cuttings or seeds. 

Cook, Moses, a gardening author, page 1101. A. D. 
1676. 

Cookia, wampeo-tree, decan. monog. anS auran- 
tiffl, a S. tr. China, which thrives well in sandy 
loam, and ripened cuttings not deprived of any of 
their leaves, root in sand under a hand-glass in 
moist heat. 

Coombe Abbey, Warwickshire, 7a/ 2. 

Coombe Lodge, a seat in Oxfordshire, 7553. 

Coopersale, a seat in Essex, 7541. 

Copaifera, balsam of capevi, decan. monog. and le- 
guminoseffi, a S. tr. S. Amer. which prefers a 
sandy loam, and ripened cuttings root ih sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Copford HaU, Esses, 7542. 

Copgrove, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Copped Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Coppice-wood, or copse-wood (from couper, to cut, 
Fr.) ; woods which may be cut periodically, 6897. 
Copse, — see Coppice. 

Coptis, polyan. polyg. and ranunculacese, a H. 
peren. N. Amer. which grows best in pots and in 
peat soil, and is increased by dividing at the root. 

Coral-tree, — see Erythrina. 

Corallorhiza, gynan.' monan. and orchideEe, a H. 

peren. Scot, w'hich grows best in peat soil, and is 

increased by seeds. 
Corby Castle, Cumberland, 7593. 
Corchorus, polyan. monog. and tiliacoEe, S. tr. and 

an. Ind. Amer. which thrive in rich soil, and root 

readily from young cuttings ; and a H. tr. of 

easy culture, and which roots from cuttings as 

readily as the common willow. 
Cordia, pentan. monog. and boragines", S. tr. and a 

peren. E. and W. Ind. which grows in loam and 

Eeat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
and-glass in heat. 



, Coreopsis, syngen. polyg. frustr. anJ oorvmbiforea;, 

j S. peren. bien. and an. W. Ind. and Amer. which 

i grow freely in rich light earth, and cuttings root 

1 under a hand-glass; and F. and H. peren. of 

! easy culture. 

i Coriander, — see Coriandrum. 

, Coriandrum, coriander, pentan. dig. and umbellife- 

I reffi, H. an. Eur. of easy culture. 

: Coriandrum sativum, the common coriander, 4222. 

. Coriaria, dioec. decan. and , a H. tr. 

'■ S. Eur. of easy culture, increased by layers or 
! suckers. 

; Coris, pentan. monog. and primulaceas, a G. bien. 
j S. Eur. of common culture. 

Corispermum, tickseed, monan. dig. and chenono- 
i de£e, H. an. of common culture. 

Cork botanic garden, 7666. 

Cork-tree, qutrcus suber. 

Curn-flag, — see Gladiolus. 

Cornelian-cherry, cornus mascula. 

C ornucopiffi, trian. monog. and gramineee, a H. an. 
Levant, a grass of easy culture. 

Corniis, Georges, a French author on gardening, 
page 1115. A.D. 1560. 

Cornus, dog-v,ood, tetran. monog. and caprifolcK, 
H. tr. and peren. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy cul- 
ture, excepting the two perennial species, which 
grov.- best in pots, or in a bed of peat. 

Ccrnutia, didyn. angios. and verbenaces, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. wiiich thrives in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Cornwall, gardens and residences of, 7601. 

CoroniUa, diadcl. decan. and leguminoseae, G. tr. 
Eur. which thrive well in loam and peat, and 
increase by cuttings or seeds ; and H. tr. and 
peren. of common culture. 

Coronopus, wart-cress, tetrad, silic. and crucifereae-, 
H. an. Brit, of easy culture. 

Corrjsa, octan. monog. and diosmacca;, G. tr. which 
thrive well in sandy loam and peat ; and ripened 
cuttings root freely in sand miner a bell or hand- 
glass. 

Corrigiola, strap-wort, pentan. trig, and portulaceae, 

a H. an. Eng. of common culture. 
Corsfield House, Wiltshire, 7597. 
Corthujti, I. E, her works on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1814. 

Cortusa, bear's ear, sanicle, pentan. monog. and 
primulacccB, a H. peren. Austria, which grows 
best in pots in loam and peat, and is increased by 
seeds or dividing at the root. 

CoHi dahs. diadel. hexan. and papaveraces, H. peren. 
Eur. and Amer. which thrive in hght, rich soil, 
and are increased by dividing the roots, or by 
seeds. 

Corylus, nut-tree, moncec. polyan and amentacese, 
H. tr. Eur. and N. Amer. 

Corylus avellana, the common nut-tree, and gar- 
den-filbert, 4752. 

Coryphg, fan-palm, hexan. monag. and palmes, a 
S. tr. which grows in light soil and strong moist 
heat. 

Cosmea, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbiferes, 
a G peren. and an. r\lexico, of common culture. 
Costmary, — see Balsamita. 

Costula,' syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereiB, 
S. G. and H. an. C' B. S. of easy culture. 

Costus, monan. monog. and scitaminece, S. peren. 
India and S. Amer. reedy or marsh plants, in- 
creased bv dividing at the root. 

Cotchell House, Cornwall, 7601. 

Cotta, , his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1817. 

Cottage, different kinds of, 749. 

Cottage en verger, 7283 ; cottage and garden of 
laborers, 7294 ; of artificers, 7422. 

Cottage gardens, their management, 7418. 

Cottage ornce, ~r2&2. 

Cotton, Charles, Esq , a British writer on gardening, 
page 1101. A.D. 1675. 

Cotton-grass, — see Eriophorum. 

Cotton-rose, filago pigma^a. 

Cotton-thistle, — see Onoporduni. 

Cotton-tree, — see Gossypium. 

Cotyledon, navel-wort,' decan. penfag. and sera- 
pervivccB, G. tr. and a peren. C. B. S. suc- 
culents of easy culture; and H. peren. rock- 
work plants, propagated by seeds or dividing 
the root. 

Couch-grass, triticum repens. 

Counsellors, or garden-artists, 7400. 

Country- Residences of England, 7512 ; of Wales, 
7602 ; of Scotland, 7615 ; of Ireland, 7651. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1183 



Cours Comp. d'Ag., Nouveau Cours Complet d' Ag- 
riculture, &c. 13 vols. 8vo. Paris, 1810. 

Covent, or Convent Garden market, its gardening 
productions with their average prices, 7514. 

Coventry, Francis, his works on English gardening, 
page 1104. A. D. 1753. 

Cow-bane, — see Cicuta. 

Cow-itch, — see Stizolobium. 

Cow-parsnep, — see Heracleum. 

Cow-wheat, — see Melampyrum. 

Cowel, John, a British author on gardening, page 
1103. A. D. 1729. 

Cowesfield House, V/iltshire, 7596. 

Cowley, Abraham, the poet, as a British author on 
gardening, page 1100. A. D. 1662. 

Cowslip, — see Primula. 

Coxe, William, Esq., his work on fruit-trees, page 

1131. A. D. 1817. 
Cracow, garden of Marshal Loudon at, 282. 
Craggan, a seat in Westmeath, 7662. 
Craiggie Hall, a seat near Edinburgh, 360. 
Crailing House, Roxburghshire, 7621. 
Crambe, colewort, tetrad, silic. and crucifereEe, G. tr. 

and peren. and an. Eur and Amer. which thrive 

in rich, light soil, and are increased by seed or 

dividing the root. 
Crambe maritima, the seakale, 3898. 
Cramer, John Andrew, his works on gardening, 

page 1124. A. D. 1766. 
Cranberry, — see Oxycoccus 
Cranbury House, Hampshire, 7594. 
Cranesbill, — see Geranium. 
Cranford iiridge, K'orthamptonshire, 7580. 
Cranford Lodge, Middlesex, 7520. 
Crassuhi, pentan. pentag. and semperviveee, G. tr. 

peren. and an. and H. an. C. B. S. succulents of 

easy culture. 

Cratffiva, garlic-pear, dodec. monog. and capparideze, 
S. tr. 'W. Ind. and Afr. which grow in loam, 
j)eat, and rotten dung, and are increased by cut- 
tings in sand, under a hand-glass. 

Cree House, Kircudbrightshire, 7625. 

Crepis, syngen. polyg. jequal. and cichoracea;, H. 
tr. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Crescentia, calabash-tree, didyn. angios. and sola- 
neas, S. tr. W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat ; and \^ell ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass in moist heat. 

Cress, — see Lepidium. 

Cress-rocket, — see Vella. 

Crewe Hall, Cheshire, 7590. 

Crichton, formerly a distinguished seat near Edin- 
burgh, 385. 

Crinum, hexan. monog. and amaryllidete, S. G. 
peren. Amer. and Ind. which grow in rich 
loam v/ith dung, in large pots, and are increased 
by suckers, or by seeds. 

Cristaria, monad, polyan. and malvaces, a H. 
l)eren. Missouri, which grows only in peat in 
a shaded border, and increases slowly by seeds, 
rr dividing at the root. 

Crithmum, samphire, pentan. dig. and umbellifereaj, 
a G. bien. and H. peren. which grow in light, 
sandy soil, and are increased by seeds, or dividing 
at tiie roots. 

Crithmum maritimum, the common samphire, 4278. 
Crocus, trian. monog. and iridese, H. peien. Asia 

and Kui-. bulbs of the easist culture, 6285. 
Cromartyshire, in respect to gai-dening, 7643. 
Crome, G. his work on gardening, page 1127. A. D. 

Crome Court, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Crossandra, didyn. angios. and acanthaceas, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which thrives well in rich, light soil, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Cross-wort, — see Crucianella. 

Crotalaria, diadel. decan. and leguminoseEe, S. and 
G. tr. bien. and an. E. Ind. and Afr. which 
grow in loam and peat, and are increased by 
young cuttings in sand under a bell-glass ; some 
species ripen seeds. 

Croton, moncec. monad, and euphorbiacece, S. tr. 
and an. Ind. Amer. and Eur. which grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings with their leaves 
on root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Crowberry, — see Empetrum. 

Crowea, decan. monog. a G. tr. N. S. W. which 
grows in .sandy loam and peat, in an airy situ- 
ation, and not over-watered, and cuttings root 
freely in sand under a bell-glass. 

Crowfoot, — see Ranunculus. 

Croxdale Hall, Durham, 7584. 

Crucianella, cross-wort, tetran. monog. and rubia- 



ccaz, G. and H. tr. and an. Eur. of common 
culture. 

Crux Easton, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Crypsis, trian. dig. and gramincee, a H. an. Eur. a 

grass of easy culture. 
Cryptarrhena, gynan. monan. and orchideje, a S. 

parasite, which may be treated as aeridos. 
Cryptospermum, tetran. monog. and nyctaginece, a 

G. peren. N. S. W. which grows in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root freely under a hand-glass 

in sand. 

Cryptostcmma, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corym- 
bifereas, H. an. C. B. S. of common culture.- 

Cubieres, , Ain^, his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. ISOJ. 

Cuckoo-flower, lychnis floscuculi. 

Cucubalus, campion, decan. trig, and carophyllese, 
a H. peren. Eng. of common culture. 

Cucumber, 4873. — see C'ucumis. 

Cucumis, cucumber, moncec. monad, and cueur- 
bitace<E, F. and H. an. India an4 C. B. S. of 
common culture in rich soil. 

Cucumis melo, the melon, under hand-glasses, 3262 j 
culture of, 3271 ; soil, 3272; time of beginning 
to force, 3279; forming the teed-bed, choice of 
seed, sowing, 3281 ; treatment lill removed to the 
fruiting-bed, 3287 ; forming the fruiting-bed, 
moulding, planting, 3288; temperature, 3291 ; 
air, 3295 ; water, 3298 ; earthing, S302 ; training, 
3303 ; setting, 3307 ; cutting the fruit, and saving 
seed, 3312 ; second crop from the same plants, 
3315; late crops on old hot-beds, 3318 ; culture 
of melons in a dung-pit, 3319 ; in a flued-pit, 3320 ; 
in M'Phail's pit, 3321 ; under hand-glasses, 3322 ; 
on a sloping bank, 3329 ; insects and diseases, 
3330. 

Cucumis sativus, the common cucumber, sorts of 
described, 4873 ; culture of in hot-beds, 3164 ; 
treatment till removed to the fruiting-bed, 3192 ; 
forming the fruiting-bed, 3199; air, 3217; water, 
3221; training, 3257 ; culture in a flued-pit, 3236 ; 
in M'Phail's pit, 3238 ; in stoves, 3251 ; in Weeks's 
patent frame, 3261 ; sorts described, 4869. 

Cucurbita, gourd, moncec. monad, and cucurbi- 
taceffi, F. and H. an. Ind. and S. Eur. of com- 
mon culture in rich soil. 

Cucurbita pepo, the pompion; C. citrullus, the 
water-melon; C. melo pepo, the squash-gourd; 
C. verrucosa, the warted gourd ; C. lagenaria, the 
bottle-gourd ; C. aurantia, the orange-fruited 
gourd ; and C. succado, the vegetable-marrow 
gourd. 

CufFnels, Hampshire, 7594. 

Culex, the gnat, a dipterous insect, 2267. 

Culland's Grove, Middlesex, 7520. 

Cullen House, in Banfshire, 7640. 

Cullumia, syngen. polyg. frustr. and corymbifere^, 

G. tr. C. I?. S. v/hich thrive in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Culzean Castle, in Ayrshire, 7627. 
Cumberland, gardens and residences of, 7593. 
Cumin, cuminum cyminum. 

Cuminum, cumin, pentan. dig. and umbellifereas, a 

H. an. of common culture. 

Cunila, dian. monog. and labiateee, H. peren. N. 

Amer. and Eur. of common culture. 
Cunonia, decan. dig. and cunoniace«, a G. tr. 

C. B. S. which grows in loam and peat, ripened 

cuttings will root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Cuphea, dodec. monog. and salicares, a S. tr. and 

bien. and G. bien. and an. Amer. of common 

culture. 

Cupressus, cypress, moncec. monad, and conifereie, 
G. tr. Amer. and C. B. S. which grow well in 
loam, and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a 
bell-glass ; and H. tr. which grow in common 
soil, and are raised from seeds. 

Curatella, polyan. dig. and magnolite, a S. tr. S. 
Amer. which thrives in sandy loam, and cuttings 
root in a pot of sand under a hand-glass. 

Curculigo, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, S. and 
G. peren. E. Ind. bulbs of the usual culture. 

Curculio, the weevil, a coleopterous insect which 
inhabits grain, nuts, and other seeds, 2235. 

Curculio nucum, the filbert-weevil, 4761. 

Curcuma, turmeric, dian. monog. and scitamine«, 
S. peren. E. Ind. reedy marsh plants, increased 
by division at the root. 

Curraghmore, a seat in Waterford, 7665. 

Currant, — see Bibes. 

Curt. Spreng.,Curtii Sprengei HistoriaRei Herbaria?. 
Curtains for shelter, — see Structures. 



1184 



GENERAL INDEX. 



^uio' A D i"98^ writings on gardening, page 
Curtis, William, F. L. S. a British author on gar- 
dening, page 1109. A. D. 1783. 

Curtisia, hassagay-tree, tetran. monog. and , 

a G. tr. C. B. S. which thrives in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root under a hand-glass in 
sand. 

Curtiits, Benedictus, his works on gardening, pace 
1129. A. D. 156U. ^ 

Curvilinear hot-houses, list of, erected by Messrs. 
Bailey, 1587. 

Cuscuta, dodder, pentan. dig. and convolvulace£B, a 

G. an. and H. peren. and an. Eng. and China; 
parasites which may be sown at the root of any 
branchy plant, and they will spring up, and at- 
tach themselves to it, — see 942. 

Gushing, a British writer on gardening, page 1114. 

A. D. 1812. ^ 
Cussonia, pentan. dig. and aralia, G. tr. C. B. S. 

which thrive in sandy loam, and cuttings root in 

sand under a hand-glass. 
Custard-apple, — see Annona. 
Cusworth Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Cutting, as an operation on plants, 1884. 
Cuttings, to propagate by, 2063. 
Cyanella, hexan. monog.' and asphodelese, G. peren. 

C. B. S. bulbs of common culture. 
Cyathea, cryptog. filices, and filices, a S. peren. 

W. Ind. a fern of the usual culture. 
Cycas, dioec. polyan. and palmeEc, S. tr. E. Ind. 

which grow in light soil and moist heat, and 

are increased by seeds. 
Cyclamen, pentan. monog. and primulacese, a G. 

peren. gjid H. peren. Eur. which grow in loam 

and peat, and are increased by seeds ; wlien not 

in a growing state, the tubers should Iiave no 

water. 

Cyclopia, decan. monog. and leguminosoae, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grows in sandy loam and peat, and 
very young cuttings will root readily in sand 
under a bell-glass, care bein;r taken to wipe the 
glass frequently, to prevent their damping off. 

Cydonia, quince, icos. di-pcntag. and rosaceas, F. 
and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. of easy culture, and 
increased by cuttings, layers, or grafting on tliorn 
stocks. 

Cydonia vulgaris, the common quince, pyrus cy- 
donia, L. 4459. 

Cyfartha, a seat in Brecknockshire, 7613. 

Cylista, diadelph. decan. and leguminoscaa, S. tr 
Ind. climbers which succeed well in loam and 
peat, and cuttings will root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Cymbaria, didyn. angios. and scrophularineas, a H. 

peren. Dauria, a rock-work plant, which prefers 

light, sanely soil, and may be increased by seeds. 
Cymbidium, gynan. dian. and orchidece, S. peren. 

£. Ind, which thrives in sandy loam mixed R'ith 

potsherds and bits of woods, and well drained ; 

the species are increased by dividing at the root. 
Cynanchum, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeje, S. and G. 

tr. Eur. and C. B. S. climbers which thrive in 

loam and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand 

under a hand-glass ; the H. peren. thrive in light 

soil, and increase freely by seeds or the root 
Cynara, artichoke, syngen. polyg. aqual. cynaro- 

"cephalecB, G. and H. peren. Eur. and C. B. S. 

of common culture. 
Cynara scolymus, the garden artichoke, 3917. 
Cynara cardunculus, the cardoon, 3929. 
Cynips, the gall-flj', a hymenopterous insect, 2259. 
Cynips quercus folii, the oak gall-fly, 7075. 
Cynodon, trian. dig. and graminea, a S. peren. 

and H. peren. Eng. and E. Ind. grasses of the 

easiest culture. 
Cynoglossi^m, hound's tongue, pentan. monog. and 

boragineae, a G. bien. an. H. peren. and an. 

Eur. and Amer. of easy culture. 
Cynometra, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a S. 

tr. E. hid. which grows in sandy loam, and large 

cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 
Cynosurus, dogstail-grass, trian. dig. and grami- 

neffi, a H. peren. and an. Eur. grasses of easy 

culture. 

Cyon (cion, sion, or scion, a twig of a tree), in 
grafting; that part which is attached to the stock, 
in order to become the future tree ; the shoot en- 
grafted on a stock, — see Grafting, 7075. 

Cyperus, trian. monog. and cyperacese, S. G. and 

H. peren. and an. Eur. Ind. Amer. grasses of 
easy culture. 

Cyperus esculentus, the rush-nut, 6034. 



Cyphia, pentan. monog. and carapanulacese, G. 
peren. C. B. S. which thrive in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily under a bell-glass in sand. 

Cypress, — see Cupressu.-;. 

Cyprinus auratus, the gold carp fish, 608G. 

CjTJripedium, lady's slinf.er, gvnan. dian. and or- 
chidecE, H. peren. Eng. and N. Amer. which 
will thrive only in peat soil and in the shade, and 
are the better of protection during winter ; they 
are difficult to increase, but sometimes they per- 
fect seeds. 

Cyrenaica, gardens of, 6, 

Cyrilla, pentag. monog. and erices, a G. tr. Caro- 
lina, which grows in sandy loam, and young cut- 
tings root in sand under a bell-glass, but not freely. 

Cyrtanthus, hexan. monog. and amaryllideas, G. 
peren. C. B. S. bulbs which grow in sandy loam 
and peat, require plenty of water when in a grow- 
ing state, but scarcely any when dormant. 

Cyrtopodium, gynan. monan. and orchideas, S. 
peren. Amer. requiring the same treatment as 
cymbidium. 

Cysticapnos, diadel. hexan. and papaveraceaj, a H. 
an. C. B. S. of common culture. 

Cytisus, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, G. F. and 
H. tr. Eur. As. and Amer. chiefly shrubs which 
prefer a light soil, and are propagated readily by 
seeds or layers. 

Cytisus alpinus, the tree or Scotch laburnum, 7113. 

Cytisus laburnum, the shrubby laburnum, 7020. 

Czartoryska, Princess Isabella, her work on gar- 
dening, page 1131. A. D. 1808. 



Dactylis, cocksfoot-grass, trian. dig. and gramineae, 
H. peren. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Darmia, i)entan. dig. and asclepiadeae, a S. tr. E. 
Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Daffodil, — see Narcissus. 

Daldman, G. T., his works on gardening, oaee 
1130. A.D. 1728. ^' ^ 

Dahuron, Rene, a French author on gardening, 
page 1116. A. D. 1696. 

Dailsford, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 

Dais, decan. monog. and thymeleae, a G. tr. C. B. S. 
which grows freely in loam and peat, and may 
be increased by cuttings of the roots placed in a 
warm situation. 

Daisy, — see Bellis. 

Dalbergia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, S. tr. 

E. Ind. which do well in sandy loam, and ripened 

cuttings root under a hand-glass in sand. 
Dalea, diadel. decan. and leguminoscce, S. and G. 

an. and H. peren. Ind. and Amer. of common 

culture. 

Dalechampia, monoec. monad, and euphorbiaceae, 

a S. tr. W. Ind. a climber, which grows in sandy 

loam, and roots freely in sand under a hand-glass. 
Dalhousie Castle, Midlothian, 7618. 
Dalibarda, icos, polyg. and rosacete, a H. peren. N. 

Amer. a creeper, which prefers peat soil, and a 

shaded situation. 
Dalkeith Park, Midlothian, 7618. 
Ballinger, Prosper, his works on gardening, page 

1126. A. D. 1798. 
Dalmahoy, a seat in Midlothian, 7618. 
Dabnar, Basse N , his works on gardening, 

page 1120. A. D. 1800. 
Dalmeny Park, kitchen-garden at, 2455 ; hot-houses 

there, 2661. 
Dalystown, a seat in Galway, 7672. 
Damascena, the damson, or Damascus plum, — see 

Prunus. 

Damasonium, hexan. polyg. and hj'drocharideas, a 
S. peren. E Ind. an aquatic. 

Dampiera, pentan. monog. and goodenovije, a G. 
peren N. S. W. which grows well in loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root freely under a 
hand-glass. 

Dan y Park, a seat in Brecknockshire, 7613. 

Dancer's Court, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 

Dandelion, — see Leontodon. 

Danson Hill, a seat in Kent, 7537- 

Daphne, octan. dig. and thymeleas, a S. tr. w'hich 
thrives in loam and peat, and roots by cuttings 
under a hand-glass ; and H. tr. beautiful under, 
shrubs, which prefer peat soil, and are increased 
by seeds or grafting on the D. laureola, 6562. 

lYArsenville, Dezallier Ant Joseph, a French 
author on gardening, page 1117. A. D. 1713. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1 1 8.7 



Darnel, — see Lolium. 
Darton Park, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Darwin, Erasmus, M D, F.RS.j^ a British writer on 

gardening, page 1109. A. D. 1781. 
Date-palm, — see Phcenix. 
Date-plum, — see Diospyros. 

Datisca, dioec. dodec. an'd resediacece, a H. peren. 

Candia, of common culture. 
Datura, thorn-apple, pentan. monog. and solaneae, 

H. an. Asia, Afr. ol the easiest culture. 
Daucus, carrot, pentan. dig. and umbellifere:'.:, H. 

bien. and an Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Daucus carota, the garden-carrot, 371-. 
Davallia, crvptog. Alices and lilices, a G. tr. and 

peren. N.'S. W. and Canr.ries, ferns of common 

culture as such. 
Daviesia, decan. monog. and leguminosese, G. tr. 

N. S. W, which grow in sandy loam and peat, and 

cuttings, not too ripe, will root readily in pots 

of sand under a liand-glass, without bottom 

heat. 

Diu'i/, Peve, a French author on gardening, page 

1115. A. D. 1560. 
Dawsonscourt Hall, a seat in Queen's County, 

7659. 

Day.lilv, — see Hemerocallis. 

Oe' Camnels, his works on gardening, page 1122. 
A. D. 1816. 

De Combles, his works on gardening, page 111 
A. D. 1745. 

De Distrib. plant, Humboldt de distributione plan- 
tarum. 

Deadly carrot, atropa belladonna. 

Deadly nightshade, — see Thapsia. 

Dccai'idoUe, L. -\. one of the most eminent French 
botanists, distinguished like Brown in this coun- 
try, by his knowledge and improvement of the 
Jiissieiiean svstem of classitication, page Hi-. 
A. D. 182-3. 

Deciduous trees with showy flowers, table of, 6540. 

Decorative buildings used in gardening, 1768, 

Decortication, 2165. 

Decorum in garden ojierations, 2358. 

Decumaria, dodec. monog. and myrtiacece, a H. tr. 
Carolina, which grows in common soil, and cut- 
tings root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Deene Thorpe Park, North.^mptonshire, 75S0. 

Deepden, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Deeringia, pentan. monog. and amaranthaces, a S. 
bien. E. Ind. of common culture. 

Delaford Park, Middlesex, 7520. 

Delaunay, Mordaunt, his works on gardening, page 
112i. A.D, ISll. 

BeTeuxe, J. P. F., his works on gardening, page 1120. 
A. D. 1809. 

Delhi, gardens of, 462. 

Del'Ule, Jacques, the poet, his works on gardening, 

page HIS. A. D. 1765. 
Delphinium, larkspur, polyan. trig, and ranun- 

culacese, H. peren. bien. and an, Europe and 

Amer. of common culture. 
Delve [Sax.], to dig, — see Dig. 
Dclville, a seat near Dublin, 363. 
Deniesnes, gardens of, 7271 ; management, ~4Ao. 
Den of Rubislaw, a seat in Aberdeenshire, 7639. 
Denbighshire, garden^ and residences of, 7605. 
Dendrobium, gynan. monan. and orchides, S. 

peren. N. S. ^V, parasite, which may be treated 

as atrides ; and G. peren. which thrive in sandy 

loam and peat, and are increased by dividing at 

the root. 

Dentella, pentag. monog. and rubiaceff, a H. an. 
N. Holl. of common culture, 1662. 

Derbyshire, gardens and residences of, 7574. 

Dermestes, leather-beetle, or chaffer, a coleopterous 
insect, 2232. 

Derry, county of, as to gardening, 7631. 

Desbois, F. A. A. de la Chesnaye, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1117. A. D. 1751. 

Design, principles of, in landscape-gardening, 
7163. 

Desmanthus, polyg. monoec and leguminoseaB, S. tr. 
bien. and an. E. and Ind. which grow in loam 
and peat, and some of them, as D. natans, may be 
treated as aquatics ; they are increased by seeds, 
or young cuttings planted in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Jieuso, Johann Daniel, his works on gardening, page 

1123. A. D. 1735. 
Devil's bit, scabiosa succisa. 
Devonshire, gardens and residences of, 7600. 
Dew, theory of, 1243. 

Dianella, hexan. monog. andasphodelecE, a S. peren. 

4 



and G. peren. which grow in sandy loam and 
peat, and arc increased by division at the root. 

Dianthus, pink, decan. dig. and caryophylleas, a 
G. tr. and (jeren. and H. peren. bien. and an. 
Eur. and .\s. which thrive in light rich soil, and 
thrive by cuttings or pipings and layers, in sandy 
loam under a hand-glass. 

Dianthus caryophyllus, the carnation, 6406. 

Dianthus hor'tensis, the pink, 6440. 

Diapensia, pentan. monog. and ericece, a H. peren. 
Lapland, an alpine, which must be grown in 
small pots in peat soil, and protected during 
winter. 

Diaspyros kaki, the kaki-tree, 6016. 

Dicho'ndra, pentan. dig. and convolvulaceae, a S. 
peren. and G. peren. N. S. W. and Jam. which 
thrive well in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
freely. 

D/cks, John, of Knightsbridge, a British author on 

gardening, page 1107. A. D. 1769. 
Dicksonia, cryptog. tilices and filice:E, a S. tr. and 

peren. G. peren. and H. peren. ferns of common 

culture as such. 
Dictamnus, fraxinella, decan. monog. and rutacese, 

a H. peren. Germ, of easy culture, and may be 

propagated by seeds, cuttings, or divisions at the 

root. 

Didelta, svngen. poly, frustran. and corymbifereae, 

G. tr. C. B. S. which thrive well in' any rich 
light soil, and cuttings root freely under a hand- 
glass. 

Did, Aug. Fred. Adrian, M. D., his works, page 
1126. A.D. 1799. 

Diervilla, pentan. monog. and caprifolice, a H. tr. 
N. Amer. a low shrtib of easy culture, and in- 
creased by suckers. 

Dietrich, Fr. Gli., his works on gardening, page 
1126 A. D. 1S02. 

Dig ^dician, Sax. to make a trench about), to break 
or open up the ground with a spade j in garden- 
ing, to raise, reverse, and pulverise the surface- 
soil for eight or ten inches deep, — see Digging. 

Digging, 1864. 

Digitalis, foxglove, didyn. angios. and scrophula- 
rineee, G. tr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy 
culture. 

Digitaria, finger-grass, trian. dig. and gramineae, 

H. an. of common culture, 1662. 
Digitaria sanguinales, Polish millet, 4335. 
Dilatris, trian. monog. and hemodoraces, G. peren. 

grasses of common culture. 
Dill, elt., Joh. Jac. Dillenii Hortus Elthamensis. 
Dill, — see Anethum. 

Dillenia, polyan. polyg. and dilleniaccEe, S. tr. E. 
Ind. which grow in' light loam, and ripened cut- 
tings, not deprived of their leaves, root freely in 
sand under a hand-glass in heat. 

Dilhvynia, decan. monog. and ieguminoseffi, G. tr. 
X. 8. \V, which grow in sandy loam and peat, 
with pots well drained, and young cuttings root 
freely'in sand under a bell-glass. 

Dimocarpus, octan. monog. and sapindeEe, S. tr. the 
litchi and longan of the Chinese, China, which 
grow in rich loam, and have been cultivated for 
their fruit, 5991. 

Dionffia, Venus's flytrap, decan. monog. and drose- 
racccE, a G. peren. Carolina, which thrives best 
when planted in a pot of sphagnum, or con.Mion 
moss, with a little peat mould at the bottom of 
the pot, and the pot placed in a pan of water. 

Dioscorea, dioec, hexan, and dioscorea, S. peren. 
E. and Sv. Ind. climbers of easy culture. 

Dioscorea sativa and alata, the' vam, 6023. and 
6024, 

Diosma, pentan. monog, and diosmete, G. tr. C. B. S. 
-.hich thrive best in'peat soil, and young cuttings 
root freely in sand under a bell-glass. 

Diospyro.;, 'date-plum, polyg. dioec. and ebenaceae, 
S. an. G. tr. Italy, Amer. and India, which thrive 
well in light loamy soil, and ripened cuttings suc- 
ceed best in sand under a hand-glass in heat. D. 
kaki, the Japan date-plum is increased bv inarch- 
ing or budding on the common kinds. 

Dioapyros lotus ^Ziziphus lotus, W.}, the Eur. date- 
plum, 6016. 

Diotis, moncec. tetran. and chenopodcce, a H. tr. 
Siberia, which grows in any light soil, and is 
readily propagated by layers," and cuttings may 
be rooted under a hand-glass. 

Diphylleia, hexan. monog. and berberidea?, a H. 
peren. N. Amer. which grows freely in a light 
rich soil, and is increa.sed by dividing at the 
root. 



1186 GENERA 

Diplazium, cryptog. filices and filices, a S. peren. 
Jamaica, a fern which grows in loam and peat in 
the shade, and is increased by seed or dividing at 
the root. 

Dipsacus, teasel, tetran. monog. and dipsaceae, H. 
bien. Eur. of common culture. 

Dipterix, tonquin-bean, diadel. decan. and legumi- 
nosea, a S. tr. Guiana, which grows in light loam, 
and ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass in a moist heat, 

Dirca, leather-wood, octan. dig. and thymeleffi, a 
H. tr. Virginia, which grows best in peat earth, 
and is increased by layers : snails are particularly 
fond of this plant. 

Disa, gynan. monan. and orchidese, G. peren. 
C. B. S. which thrive in sand and peat, and re- 
quire very little water when not in a growing 
state. 

Disandra, heptan. monog. and pediculareae, a G. 
peren. Madeira, a trailing plant of common cul- 
ture. 

Disperis, gynan monan. and orchideas, a G. peren. 

C. B. S. which may be treated as disa. 
Diss, orient, gard., Chambers's Dissertation on Ori- 

ental Gardening, 
Ditchley, a seat in Oxfordshire, 7559. 
Dittany, origanum dictamnus. 
Diurus, gynan. monan. and orchideEe, a G. peren. 

N. S. W. requiring the same culture as disa. 
Dock, — see Rumex. 

Dodartia, didyn. angios. and scrophularinea, a H. 
peren. Levant, which thrives in rich light soil, 
and is increased by seeds or dividing at the 
root. 

Dodder, — see Cuscuta. ' 

Dodecatheon, the African cowslip, pentan. monog. 
and primulaceae, a H. peren. Virginia, which 
thrives in light loam, and is increased by dividing 
at the root. 

Dodonasa, octan. monog. and terebintaceae, S. and 
G. tr. Austral. Amer. and Africa, which thrive 
well in loam and peat, and are increased by cut- 
tings under a bell-glass in sand. 

Dodsley. Robert, as a British author on gardening, 
page 1106. A. D. 1764. 

Dogmersfield Park, Hampshire, 7594. 

Dogsbane, — see Apocynum 

Dog's cabbage, thelygonum cynocrambe. 

Dogtail-grass, — see Cynosurus. 

Dogtooth-violet, — see Erythronum. 

Dog- wood, — see Cornus. 

Dolichos, diadel. decan. and leguminoses, S. and 
G. tr. bien. and an. which grow freely in light 
rich soil, and are increased by cuttings under a 
hand-glass or by seeds, which many produce 
freely. 

Dolichos soya, or soy plant, 6037. 

Dol-y-Myllynllyn, a seat in Merionethshire, 7612. 

Dombeya, monad, dodec. and malvacece, a S. tr. 
Mauritius, which grows in sandy loam, and ripen- 
ed cuttings root in a pot of sand in moist heat 
under a hand-glass. 

Bon, David, Esq. F.L.S., librarian to the Linnsan 
Society, 7045. 

Do7», George, of Forfar, a celebrated British bo- 
tanist, 386. 

Donegal, county of, as to gardening, 2278. 

Bonn, James, F.L.S., curator of the Cambridge 
botanic garden, page 1112. A. D. 1796. 

Donnington Grove, Berkshire, 7561. 

Donnington Park, Leicestershire, 7573. 

Doodia, cryptog. fiUces and filicefe, a G. peren. 
N. S. W. a fern of the usual culture. 

Dornbach, a seat, and also a mountain near Vienna, 
204. 

Doronicum, leopard's bane, syngen. poh'g. super, 
and corymbifereee, H. peren. Eur. of common 
culture. 

Dorsetshire, gardens and residences of, 7598. 

Dorstenia, tetran. monog. and urticeas, Eur. and S. 
Amer. which grow freely in light rich soil, and 
increase at the roots or by seed. 

Doryanthes, hexan. monog. and amaryllideje, a G. 
tr. N. S. W. which grows in loam and peat, and is 
increased by suckers. 

Dorycnium, diadel, decan. and leguminoseae, G. 
tr. and peren. S. Eur. which thrive in loam and 
peat, and young cuttings planted under a bell- 
glass in sand, root freely, or they may be raised 
from seeds. 

Doucin-stocks, 4387. 

Dmette-Eichardot, his work.'s on gardening, page 
1121, A. D. 1808. 



INDEX. 



Down, county of, its gardens and residences, 7683, 

Downing, a seat in Flintshire, 7606. 

Draba, whitlow-grass, tetrad, silic. and cruci- 
ferecB, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Dracaena, dragon-tree, hexan. monog. and "aspho- 
deleae, S. tr. E. Ind. which thrive well in light 
loam, and large cuttings stuck in the bark-bed 
when in a brisk heat root freely. 

Dracocephalum, dragon's head, didyn. gymnos. and 
labiateffi, a G. tr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and 
Amer. of common culture. 

Dracontium, dragon, heptan. monog. and aroideae, 
S. peren. India, which grow in light rich soil, 
and are increased by dividing at the roots. 

Dragon, — see Dracontium. 

Dragon's head, — see Dracocephalum. 

Dragon-tree, — see Drac£ena. 

Draining, 1095. 

Dreghorn Castle, near Edinburgh, 7618. 
Drei/ssig, his works on gardening, page 1127. A. D. 
1809. 

Drill {drUlen, Dutc. to bore boles with a drill), a 
lengthened excavation formed in gardening by 
the hoe, for the purpose of inserting seeds. Some- 
times drills are formed across beds by a large 
wide-toothed rake, and the same rake serves, 
when the plants are sprung up, to stir the soil 
between the rows, 1873. 

Drill-rake, 1315. 

Drimia, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, G. peren. 
C. B. S. bulbs which grow in sandy loam and de- 
cayed leaves. 

Dronningaard, a seat in Denmark, 61. 

Drope, Francis, B. D., a British author on garden- 
ing, page 1101. A. D. 1672. 

Dropsy in plants, 883. 

Dropwort, spirea filipendula. ' 

Drosera, sundew, pentan. pentag. and droseracea?, 
H. peren. Brit, which grow in watery bogs in 
peat earth, but which will thrive and flower well 
when kept in small pots in the green-house. 
" The pots should be filled three parts full of 
peat earth, and some moss placed on it, the 
droserae then planted in the moss, ^id the pots 
placed in pans of water." {Sweet.) 

Drottningholm, a royal garden near Stockholm, 
246, 

Drummond Castle, in Perthshire, 7636. 

Dry rot, — see MeruUus destruens. 

Dry-stove, its construction, 6176. 

Dry-stove plants, 6663; woody sorts, 6664; climb» 
ing, 6665 ; succulent, 6666 ; bulbous, 6667 ; her- 
baceous, 6668. 

Dryandei; Jonas, M. D., an eminent botanist and 
bibliographer, who compiled the Bibliotheca 
Banksiana, and the greater part of the Hortus 
Kewensis. 

Dryandra, tetran. monog. and proteacese, G. tr. 
N. Holl. which require the same treatment as 
banksia. 

Dry as, icos. polyg. and rosaceae, a H. peren. Brit. 

which thrives best in a border of peat, and may 

be increased by cuttings dividing at the roots or 

by seeds, which it produces in abundance. 
Dryburgli Orchard, in Berwickshire, 2220. 
Drypis, pentan. tetrag. and caryophylleee, a H. 

bien. Italy, of common culture. 
Du Halde, a missionary who wrote on China and 

its gardening, 479. 
Du Hain., Du Hamel's Treatise on Fruit Trees. 
Du Petit Thouars, Le Chevalier Aubert Au- 

bert, his works on gardening, page 1122. A. D 

1816. 

Dublin, county of, its gardens and residences, 
7653. 

Dublin botanic garden, 7653. 
Dublin society, 7653. 

Dubois, Louis, his works on gardening, page 1121. 
A. D, 1804. 

Duchesne, Ant, Nicholas, his works on gardening, 

page 1118. A. D. 1760. 
Duck's foot, ~ see Podophyllum. 
Duck-weed, — see Lemna. 
Duckingfield Lodge, Lancashire, 7588. 
Duddingston House, in Midlothian, 7618. 
Dufif House, Banfshire, 7640. 

Dujresnoy, a celebrated French landscape-gardener, 
165. 

Duhamel, — see Du Ham. 
Dumb cane, — see Arum. 
Dumbartonshire, gardens of, 7630. 
Dumfriesshire, as to gardening, 7624, 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Dumont-Courset, his works on gardening, page 1121. 
A. D. 1802. 

Duncan, Andrew, M. D., page 1112. A. D. 1181. 
Buncombe, John, a British author on gardening, 

page 1107. A. D. J 759. 
Duncombe Park, Yorkshire, 7583. 
Dung, stable, how to manage for hot-beds, 1974. 
Dung-fork, 1302. 

iJuiiglass House, East Lothian, 7619. 
DuiikeW House, in Perthshire, 7636. 
Dunrobin Castle, Sutherlandshiro, 7645. 
lJunsandle, a seat in Galway, 7672. 
Durisay Castle, a seat in Eastmeath, 7661. 
Dunse Castle, Berwickshire, 7620. 
Dunstbourne Abbots, a seat in Gloucestershire, 
7565. 

Duplessis, F. S., his writings on gardening, page 

1121. A. 1). 1802. 
Duplin Castle, in Perthshire, 7636. 
Dupuy, , his tract on gardening, page 1 118. A.D. 

17b5. 

Duracina, the Roman term for hard-skinned cher- 
ries, 52. 

Durand, , his works on gardening, page 1119. 

A. D. 1784. 

Duranta, didyn. angios. and verbenaceje, S. tr. 
Amer. and W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
liand-glass. 

Jjurdos, — •, his writings on gardening, page 1119. 

A. D. 1783, 
Durham, gardens and residences of, 7584. _ 
13urham Massey, a seat in Cheshire, 7590. 
Durham Park, Middlesex, 7520. 
Durio zibethinus, the durion, 5981. 
Jjurival, Clement, his works on gardening, page 

1119. A. D. 1777. 
Dutch books on gardening, 7695. 
Dwarf fan-palm, chamaerops humilis. 
Dyrhara, a seat in Gloucestershire, 7565. 



R B.—see Eng.Bot. 

jEaling Grove, Middlesex, 7520. 

Eames, Mr., a landscape-gardener, who djxeA. the 

beginning of the present century, 342. 
Earl's Court Villa, Middlesex, 7523. 
Earl's Stoke, Wiltshire, 7596. 
Earth-nut, — see Bunium. 
Earth-pea, lathyrus amphicarpos. 
East Hornden, a seat in Essex^ 3038. 
East Indies, gardens of, 461. 
East Lothian, gardens of, 7619. 
Eastbury House, Essex, 7540. 
Eastcliff Lodge, Kent, 7537. 

Bastmeath, county of, its gardens and residences, 
7661. 

Easton Lodge, Essex, 7542. 

Eastwick House, Surrey, 7528. 

Ebourgeonnement or disbudding, — see Pruning, 

and Operations of Gardening. 
Echinaria, trian. dig. and gramineae, a H. an. S. 

Eur. of common culture. 
Echinophbra, sea parsnep, pentan. dig. and umbelli- 

fereae, H. peren. Eur. which grow in light soil, 

and are increased by seeds. 
Echinops, globe-thistle, syngen. polyg. segreg. and 

corymbifereze, H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy 

culture. 

Echites, pentan. monog. and apocyneag, S. and G. 
' tr. W. Ind. which grow freely in loam and peat, 

and cuttings root readily under a hand-glass in 

sand. 

Echium, viper's bugloss. pentan. monog. and bora- 
gineae, G. tr. C. B. S. which grow in loam and 
peat, and may be raised from cuttings or 
seeds} and H. bien. and an. Eur. of common cul- 
ture. 

Eclipta, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereas, 
a S. and H. an. of common culture. 

Ed. Encyc, the Edinburgh Encyclopaedia, conduct- 
ed by Dr. Brewster. 

Eden Farm, Kent, 7537. 

Edible fuci, 4349. 

Edible fungi, 4336. 

.TSdible wild and other neglected plants, 4283; 
tureens and pot-herbs, 4285; roots, 4300; le- 
gumes, 4309 ; salads, 4311 ; teas, 4317 ; variously 
applicable, 4320. 
Edifices, anomalous; ice-house, 1723; bee-house, 
1734; Polish hives, 1738; common hive, 1739; 

4 G 



glass hive, 1740 ; hive of Palteau, 1742 ; Huish'n 
hive, 1743; Howison's hive, 1744; management 
of bees, 1745; position of the aviary, 1735; choice 
of baes, 1746; materials and si?e of hives, 
1747; feeding of bees, 1748; covering the hives, 
1750; swarming, 1752; taking the honey, 1755; 
by total deprivation, 1757 ; by suttbcation, 
1758. 

Fdifices, decorative, characteristic class ; rocks, 1837 ; 
ruinar, 1839 ; antiquities, 1840 ; rarities and cu- 
riosities, 1841 ; monumental objects, 1842 ; sculp- 
tures, 1843; vegetable sculptures, 1844; inscrip- 
tions, 1845 ; eye-traps ; 1846. — see Structures 
used in Gardening. 

Edifices, decorative, convenient class ; prosjject- 
tower, 1806; kiosque, 1807; temples, 1808 ; 
porches and porticoes, 1809; alcoves, 1810; Ita- 
lian arbor, 1812 ; French arbor, 1813 ; caves and 
caverns, 181* ; grottoes, 1815 ; roofed-seats, boat- 
houses, moss-houses, flint-houses, bark-huts, 
1816; elegant structures, 1819; exposed seats, 
1820; swings, 1821; constructions for displaying 
water, 1822; waterfalls, 1826; cascades, 1827; 
jets and other hydraulic devices, 1829 ; drooping 
fountains, 1832 ; sundials, 1834 ; vanes, 1835. 

Edifices, decorative, useful class, 1769; cottages, 
Gothic, Grecian, Chinese, Bengal, English, 
Scotch, Italian, Polish, Russian, Swedish, Da- 
nish, 1770 ; primitive huts, 1781 ; bridges, 1782 ; 
fallen tree, foot-plank, Swiss bridge, 1785 ; bent 
plank, 1786; of common carpentry, 1788; of ma- 
sonry, 1789; of casUiron, 1790; boat-bridge, 1791 ; 
sepulchral structures, 1792 ; the gate, 1794; main- 
tenance of a gate's position, 1795 ; gates as decor, 
ations, 1800 : gate with falling bars, 1799 ; rails. 
1803. 

Edi^ces of gardening, their farther improvement. 

Edifices used in gardening, 1698; economical 
buildings, 1699; head gardener's dwelling-house, 
1700 ; gardener's office, 1701 ; seed-room, 1702 ; 
fruit-room, 1703; journeyman's lodge, 1707; 
sheds, 1709 ; entrance lodges and gates, 1712 ; 
buildings for raising water, 1713; wells and 
pumps, 1716; conduits, 1717; reservoirs, 1718; 
tanks, 1719. 

Edinburgh botanic garden, 7618.^ 

Education of gardeners, importance of, 7719 ; pro- 
fessional education, 7724; intellectual, 7/44; 
moral, religious, and physical, 7761 ; economical, 
7777. 

Edward's Square, London, mode in which it is laid 
out, 7322. 

Edwardsia, decan. monog. and leguminoseee, F. tr. 

N. Zeal, which grow in common soil, qnd are 

generally raised by seeds, but cuttings will root in 

sand under a bell-glass. 
Edwinsford, a seat in Caermarthenshirc, 7614. 
Egger-moth, — see Phaleena. 
Eggleston House, Durham, 7584. 
Egg-plant, — see Solanum. 
Egham Park, Surrey, 7527. 
Eglinton Castle, a seat in Ayrshire, 7627. 
Ehreta, pentag. monog. and boragineaa, S. tr. E. 

and W. lud. which grow in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root readily under a hand-glass. 
Ehrhart, Frederick, his works on gardening, naKc 

1124. A. D. 1782. ' 
Ehrhartia hexan. monog. and graminece, a G. 

peren. C. B. S. a grass of common culture. 
Eisenstadt (Iron Town), a seat in Hungary, 206. 
Ekebirgia, decan. monog. and meliacece, a G. tr. 

C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, and cut. 

tings without their leaves shortened, root readily 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Eleeagnus, oleaster, tetran. monog. and elasagneas, 

S. and G. tr. Amer. and Ind. which grow in loam 

and peat, and ripened cuttings root freely in a pot 

of sand under a hand-glass. 
Elaiocarpus, polyan. monog. and guttiferese, a S. 

and G. tr. E. Ind. and N. Holl. which may be 

treated hke elezeagnus. 
Elaeocharis, spike-rush, trian. monog. and cypc- 

raceae, H. bien. Eur. Afr. and Austral, marsh 

grasses, is of easy culture. 
Elasodendrum, olive-wood, pentan. monog. and 

rhamneae, Afr. and Austral, which grow in loam 

and peat, and ripened cuttings root in sand under 

a hand-glass, 

Elais, oily-palm, dioec. hexan. and palmer, a S. tr. 

a palm of the usual culture. 
Elate, moncec. hexan. and palmeas, a S. tr. E. Ind. 

a palm of easy culture. : - . 



1188 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Elatine, water-wort, octan. tetrag. and caryophille£e, 

a H. an. of common culture. 
Elder, — see Sambucus. 
Elecampane — see Inula. 
Electricity, 1210. 

Elegia, dicEcia, trian, and restiaceae, G. peren. 
C. B. S. rush-like plants of easy culture. 

Elephant-apple, feronia elephantum. 

Elephantopus, elephant's foot, syngen. polyg. segr. 
and corymbiferese, S. and G. peren. £. and W. 
Ind. which grow freely in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Elephant's foot, tamus elephantopus. 

Elettaria, mouan. monog. and scitamineas, S. peren. 
E. Ind. reedy marsh plants of easy culture. 

Eleusine, trian. dig. and gramineee, a S. peren. and 
H. an. Ind. and America, of easy culture. 

Elichrysum, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifercce, 
G. tr. and peren. which grow in sandy peat well- 
drained, and cuttings root freely in sand in a 
frame on a hot-bed ; but not covered with a bell- 
glass, otherwise they are apt to damp ofi". 

Ellis, Daniel, Esq. a British author on gardening, 
page 1113. A. D. 1807. 

Ellis, John, a British author on gardening, page 1107. 
A. D. 1770. 

Ellis, Thomas, a British author on gardening, page 

1108. A. D. 1776. 
Ellis, William, a British author on gardening, page 

1104. A. D. 1738. 
EHisia, pentan. monog. and boragineee, a H. an. 

Virginia, of the usual culture. 
Elm-tree, — see Ulmus. 

Elsholtx, John Sigismond, his works on gardening, 
• page 1123. A. D. 16&3. 

Elsholtzia, didyn. gymnos. and labiateee, a H. an. 

Siberia, of common culture. 
Elvedon Hall, Suffolk. 7552. 
Elvetham, a seat in Hampshire, 759i. 
Elymus, lime-grass, trian. dig. and gramineas, H. 

peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. grasses of common 

culture. 

Elytraria, dian. monog. and acanthaceae, a H. peren. 

Carolina, of common culture. 
Ember Court, Surrey, 7527. 

Embryopteris, dioec. polyan. and ebenaceae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which grows in sandy loam, and ripened 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in moist 
heat. 

Emmerifh, Lieut.-Col. A., a British writer on gar- 
dening, page 1109. A. D. 1789. 

Emmerton, Isaac, his works on gardening, page 
111-i. A. D. 1816. 

Empctrum, crow-berry, dioec. trian. and ericete, a 
G. and H. tr. Eur. under-shrubs, which may be 
treated like erica. 

Erapleurum, monojc. tetran. and diosmacese, a G. 
tr. C. B. S. which grows freely in sandy peat, 
and cuttings strike root readily under a bell-glass 
in sand. 

Enchanter's nightshade, — see CircEea. 
Encome, a seat in Dorsetshire, 7598. 
Endive, — see Cichoniura. 

Eng. Bot., English Botany, by Sir J. E. Smith, the 
figures bv J. Sowerby. 

Enghien, botanic garden of, by Parraentier, 141. 

Enghien, Due d'Aremberg's seat there, 130. 

Englebert, Jortin, his works on gardening, page 
1130. A. D. 1784. 

Enkianthus, decan. monog. and ericese, a G. tr. 
China, which grows in sandy loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root readily in pots of sand under 
a hand-glass without bottom-heat. 

Enmore C:astle, Somersetsliire, 7599. 

Enontekis, garden of the minister there, 250, 

En quenouille {Fr.), a mode of training trees, 2120. 

Entrance lodges and gates, 1712. 

Enville, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 

Epacris, pentan. monog. and epacrideas, G. tr. 
N. S. W. which thrive in sandy peat, rough and 
turfy, and they require frequent shifting. " Young 
cuttings planted in pots in sand, under bell- 
glasses in autumn or winter, or early in spring, 
will root freely ; but not so in summer," (Sweet.) 

Ephedra, dicec. monad, and coniferese, H. tr, Eur. 
under-shrubs which grow in peat earth, and pre- 
fer a moist situation ; they are readily propagated 
by division at the root. 

Ephielis, octan. monog. and sapindeas, a S. tr, 
Guiana, which grows in light loam, and large 
cuttings root best under a hand-glass in sand. 

Epicurus, gardens of, 23 



Epidendrum, gynan. monan. and orchideae, S. peren. 

VV. Ind. parasites which may be treated as atrides. 
EpigEea, decan. monog. and rhodoraceje, a H. tr. N. 

Amer. which thrives in peat soil, and is increased 

by layers ; it requires to be protected during 

winter. 

Epilobiura, willow-herb, octan. monog. and ona- 
grarea?, G. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. 
of the easiest culture. 

Epilobium angustifolium, 4298. 

Epimedium, barrenwort, tetran. monog. and ber- 
beridejB, a H. peren. Eng. which prefers peat and 
loam, and is readily increased by dividing the roots. 

Epipactis, gynan. monan. and orchideee, H. peren. 
Brit, which do best m pots in loam and peat, and 
increase by dividing the roots; they require little 
water when in a dormant state 

Equestrian promenades, 7313. 

Equisetum, horse-tail, cryptog. gonopterides, and 

equisetacese, a H. tr. and H. peren. Brit, which 

may be treated like ephedra. 
Eranthemum, dian. monog. and acanthaceae, tr. E. 

and \V. Ind. which grow in rich light soil, and 

root readily under a hand-glass. 
Eranthis, winter aconite, polyan. polyg. and ranun- 

culacea, a H. peren. Italy, the winter aconite, 

of the easiest culture. 
Erbstein, K. F. VV., his works on gardening, page 

1126. A. D. 1799. 
Erddig, a seat in Denbighshire, 7605. 
Erica, heath, octan. monog. and ericeas, G. tr. 

C. B. S. mostly under-shrubs of great beauty; 

table of species and varieties, 6607 ; propagation 

and culture, 6608. The H. species grow in peat 

soil, and are increased by layers, cuttings, or seeds. 
Eridge Castle, Sussex, 7531. 

Erigeron, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferes, 
H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and Amer. of com- 
mon culture. 

Erinus, didyn. angios. scrophularinese, a G. tr. and 
T. peren. Eur. and C. B. S. which thrive best in 
peat, and increase by cuttings or dividing at the 
root. 

Eriocaulon, pipe-wort, trian. trig, and restiacese, a 
H. peren. Scot, which grows in bogs, and is in- 
creased by suckers from the roots. 

Eriocephalus, syngen. polyg. necess. and corym- 
biferea?, G. tr. C. B. S. which grow in light rich 
soil, and cuttings root readily in the same soil, 
under a hand-glass. 

Eriogonum, ennean. monog. and polygoneae, H. 
peren. N. Amer. which thrive best in pots, and 
are increased by seeds. 

Eriophorum, cotton-grass, trian. monog. and cype- 
raceee, H. peren. Eur. and Amer. bog grasses of 
easy culture. 

Eriosoma mali, — see Aphis lanigera. 

Eriospermum, hexan. monog. and asphodelejB, G. 
peren. C. B. S. with tuberous roots, of easy culture 
in sandy loam and peat. 

Erithalis, pentan. monog. and rubiaces, a S. tr. 
Jamaica, which grows best in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand glass in moist 
heat. 

Ermenonville, one of the most distinguished coun- 
try-seats in France, about ten leagues from Paris, 
on the road to Flanders by Morfontaine, 167. 

Erodium, heron's bill, monad, pentan. and gera- 
neacea;, G. peren. and H. an. Eur. and Asia, of 
easy culture, — see Geraniee. 

Erucaria, tetrad, siliq. and crucifereas, a H. an. 
of easy culture. 

Ervum, tare, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, H. 
an. Brit, and Ind. of easy culture, — see 4310. 

Eryngium, eryngo, pentan. dig. and umbellifere£e, 
a S. peren. and H. peren. Eur. and Amer. which 
grow in any soil, and are increased by seeds or 
dividing the root. 

Eryngo, — see Eryngium. 

Erysimum, hedge-mustard, tetrad, siliq. and cruci- 

ferese, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of the easiest 

culture, — see Barbarea. 
Erythrsea, pentan. monog. and gentianese, a G. 

peren. and H. an. Eur. of common culture. 
Erythrina, coral-tree, diadel. decan. and legumi- 

nose£e, S. and G. tr. which grow readily in sand 

and peat, and cuttings, not too ripe, root in sand 

under a hand-glass. 
Erythronium, dogstooth -violet, hexan. monog. lilia?, 

H. peren. Eur. and Amer. with tuberous roots, 

of easy culture. 
Escot House, Devonshire, 7600. 
Esculent roots, 3643. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1189 



Escurial, palace of, in Spain, 294. 

Esher Place, formerly a seat in Surrey, 341. 

Espalier trees, such as are suitable for, or are 

planted against, espalier rails, 2508. 
Espaliers, or espaher-rails, railings of timber or 

iron for the culture of fruit-trees, used as a sub- 
stitute for walls, 1576. 
Essex, gardens and residences of, 7539. 
Esterhazy, a seat in Hungary, belonging to Prince 

Esterhdzy, 206. 
Ethulia, syngen. polyg. aequal. and corymbiferea, S. 

an. India, of common culture. 
Etienne, Charles, a French author on gardening, 

page 1115. A. D. 1535. 
Etiolation, a disease of plants, 892. 
Etler, J. Ch., his works on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1789. 

Eucalyptus, icos. monog. and myrteacea, G. tr. 
Austral, which grow in loam or peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a bell-glass, but not very 
freely. 

Euchilus, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a G. tr. 
N. Holl. which thrives in sandy loam and peat, 
and cuttings root freely under a bell-glass in 
sand. 

Euclea, dioec. dodec. and terebintaceffi, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root readily in sand under 
a bell-glass. 

Euclidium, telrad. silic. and cruciferea?, a H. an. 

Levant, of common culture. 
Eucomis, hexan. monog. and asphodeleaa, G. peren. 

C. B. S. bulbs which grow in light rich soil, and 

may be propagated by offsets ; or, if leaves be 
; stripped off close to the bulb, and planted in 

pots of mould, they will produce bulbs at their 

base. 

Eucrosia, hexan. iijonog. and amaryllidea, a S. 
peren. Cape Horn, a bulb which may be treated 
as amaryllis. 

Eugenia, icos. monog. and myrteaceae, S. and G. tr. 
Ind. and America, which thrive in two thirds 
loam and one third peat, and ripened cuttings 
root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Eugenia jambos, the Malay apple, 5983. 

Euonymus, spindle-tree, pentan. monog. and rham- 
neEB, a G. tr. and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. of easy 
culture in common soil, and propagated by 
layers, ripened cuttings planted in autumn, or 
seeds. 

Eupatorium, syngen. polyg. sequal. and corymbi- 
ferese, S. tr. and H. peren. Amer. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Euphorbia, spurge, dodec. trig, and euphorbiacese, 
S. D. S. and G. tr. and peren. P^ur. As. Afr. and 
Amer. mostly succulents, which prefer loam and 
lime rubbish. Sweet says, " the way 1 have suc- 
ceeded best in striking the cuttings, is to stick 
them in the tan amongst the pots in a good 
heat, and not cover them with any glass." [Bot. 
Cult. 55.) 

Euphrasia, eyebright, didyn. angios, and scrophu- 

larinese, H. an. of easy culture. 
Euryale, polyan. monog. and hydrocharinete, a S. 

an. India, an aquatic which often produces seeds, 

6728. 

Eustace, the Rev. John Chetwode, a Roman Catho- 
lic clergyman, author of an eloquent classical 
tour in Italy, 2 vols. ito. 1813. He died of a 
fever at Naples in 1815. 

Eustoma, pentan. monog. and gentianeEe, a H. an. 
W. Ind. of easy culture. 

Euston Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 

Eustrephus, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, a G. 
peren. N. S. W. a climber which grows in sandy 
loam and peat, and is increased by dividing the 
root, or by cuttings under a hand-gla.ss. 

Eutaxia, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a G. tr. 
N. Holl. which thrives best in sandy loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root freely in sand under 
a bell-glass. 

Euthales, pentan. monog. and goodenovia;, a G. 
peren. N. Holl. which grows in sandy loam and 
peat, with little water, and may be increased, 
though slowly, by dividing the root or by 
seed. 

Evelyn, Charles, Esq., a British author on garden- 
ing, page 1102. A. D. 1717. 

Evelyn, John, F.R.S., his writings on gardening, 
page 1100. A. D. 1658. 

Evening flower, — see Hesperantha. 

Evergreen trees, suitable for floricultural ptirposes, 

4 G 



Everingham, a seat in Yorkshire, 758«. 

Everlasting, — see Gnaphalium. 

Everlasting pea, lathyrus latifolius. 

Evolvulus, pentan. dig. and convolvulaceee, S. an 

both Indies, of easy culture. 
Ewood, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 
Ex. Gard., Cushing's Exotic Gardener. 
Exacum, tetran. monog. and gentianeae, a G. bien. 

and H. an. Eur. of common culture. 
Exbury House, Hampshire, 7594. 
Excavation of ground, 1867. 

Excoecaria, dioec. monad, and euphorbiaceas, a G. 
tr. Chili, which will grow readily in light rich 
soil, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Exotic culinary vegetables little cultivated in Bri- 
tain, 6022. 

Exotic culture, leading operations of, 2201. 
Exotic esculents, not hitherto cultivated as such, 
6022. 

Exotic fruits, 4778. 

Exotic fruits, little known, but deserving cultiva- 
tion, 5974. 
Exotic fruits, neglected as such, 4878. - 
Expedients in the management of gardens, 7446. 
Exton Hall, Rutlandshire, 7579. 
Eyebright, — see Euphrasia. 
Eyetraps, in gardening, 1846, 
Eywood, Herefordshire, 7568, 



Fabricia, icos. monog. and myrteaceaj, G. tr. Aus- 
tral, which thrive well in loam and peat, and 
young cuttings root readily under a bell-glass in 
sand. 

Facio, Nicholas, F.R.S., a British author on gar- 
dening, page 1101. A. D. 1699. 

Fagara, tetran. monog. and terebintaceas, S. tr. and 
a G. tr. W. Ind. and Japan, which grow in light 
loam, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Fagonia, decan. monog. and rutacete, a G. bien. 
and an. Candia and America, of common cul- 
ture. 

Fagus, monoec. polyan. and amentaceas, H. Brit, 
and Amer. of easy culture, and increased by 
seeds ; and some curious varieties by grafting or 
budding on the others. 

Fagus sylvatica, the beech-tree, 7088. 

Fairchild, Mr. Thomas, his works on gardening, 
page 1102. A. D. 1722. 

Fairy Hill, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Falconer, William, M.D., his works relative to gar- 
dening, page 1109 A. D. 1783. 

Falkia, hexan. dig. and convolvulaceae, a G. peren. 
C. B. S. a creeper of common culture and propa- 
gation, in loam and peat soil. 

Falkland Palace, in Fifeshire, 357. 

Falli, Francesco, his works on gardening, page 1128. 
A. D. 1670. 

Fanon, , his works on gardening, page 1121. 

A. D. 1804. 

Farm, the situation for the home-farm of a resid' 
ence, 7277. 

Farmer's gardens of Middlesex, 7519. 

Farmer's gardens, their formation, 7293. 

Fam Hill, a seat in Tyrone, 7679. 

Farnham House, a seat in Cavan, 7676, 

Farringdon House, Devonshire, 7600. 

Farsetia, tetrad, silic. and crucifereas, a G. tr. Eur. 
which grows in loam and peat, and young cut- 
tings root in the same soil under a hand-glass; 
and H. peren. and an. rock-work plants, which 
are increased by dividing the roots or by 
seeds. 

Fatee gardens at Canton, 477. 
Fawley Court, Buckinghamshire, 7547, 
Fea-berries, a local name for gooseberries, — see 
' Ribes. 

Feabes, a local name for gooseberries, — see Ribes. 
Feather-grass, stipa pennata. 

Fedia, trian. monog. and dipsacese, a H. tr. and an. 

Eur. of easy culture. 
Feige, K. Theodore, L., his writings on gardening 

page 1125. A. D. 1790. 
Felbrig, a seat in Norfolk, 7.554. 
Felcho Tarkan, a seat in Hungarv, 206. 
Felix Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Fellenberg, M., a celebrated Swis.s agriculturist, K»34« 
Felling trees, 6953. to 6!)G0. 
3 



1190 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Felwort, swertia perennis. 

Fence-wood, best trees for, 6798. 

Fences, barriers for enclosure and defence j they 
are either live fences, formed by connected lines 
of woody plants, or dead fences, formed of earth, 
stone, iron, timber, or other mineral or dead ve- 
getable matter. 

Fences for plantations, 6820. 

Fences in landscape-gardening, 6874. 

Fennel, 4097. — see Anethum. 

Fennel-flower, — see Nigella. 

Fenugreek, — see Trigonella. 

Fermanagh, gardens of, 7677. 

Ferme orn^e, 7280. 

Fernaini, D Louis, his tract on the genus 

Finns, page 1128. A. D. 181-. 

Ferney, the seat of Voltaire, near Geneva, 240. 

Fernhill, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Ferns, exotic, their culture, 6738. 

Feronia, elephant-apple, polyg. monoec. and , 

a S. tr. E. Ind. which grows in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Ferrari, John Baptist, his works on gardening, 

. page 1128. A. D. 1633. 

Ferraria, monadel. trian. and iridece, G. peren. 
C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated as ixia. 

Ferula, giant fennel, pentan. dig. and umbellifereje, 
H. peren. and a bien. Eur. which grow in common 
garden soil, and are increased by seeds. 

Fescue-grass, — see Festuca. 

Festuca, fescue-grass, trian. dig. and gramineae, H. 

tr. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Feuereison, K. G., his works on gardening, page 1124. 

A. D. 1780. 
Feverfew, — see Pyrethrum. 
Fever-wort, — see Triosteum. 
Ficaria, pilewort, polyan. polj'g. and ranunculacete, 

a H. peren. Brit, of common culture. 
Ficus, fig-tree, polyand. dicec. and urticece, S. and 

G. tr. Eur. E. Ind. C. B. S. and Austral, which 

grow well in light loam, and cuttings with their 

leaves uninjured, root in sand under a hand-glass 

in heat. 

Ficus carica, the fig-tree, 4839; culture of in the 
fig-house, 3145 ; in the stove, 3161 ; in the open 
air, 4851. 

Field, Mr. Henry, his history of the Chelsea garden, 

page 1114. A. D. 1820. 
Fifeshire, gardens of, 7635. 
Fig-house, construction of, 2674. 
Fig-marigold, — see Mesembryanthemum. 
Fig-tree, — see Ficus. 
Figwort, — see Scropbularia. 

Filago, cotton-rose, syngen. polyg. super, and co- 
rymbifereJE, a H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Filasier, N. his works on gardening, page 1119. A.D. 
1783. 

Filmy leaf, hymenophyllum tunbridgense. 
Finborough Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Finger-grass, — see Digitaria. 
Finningley Park cottage, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Finorchi, Anton. Maria, his work on gardening, 

page 1128. A. D. 180-. 
jFir-tree, — see Pinus. 

Fischer, V. F., his work on truffle hunting, page 

1127. A. D. 1783. 
Fisherwick, formerly a seat in Warwickshire, laid 

out by Brown, and described by Wheatley. 
Fitness, a beauty in gardening, 7168. 
Fitzwalters, a seat in Essex, 7541. 
Fl. Dan., Icones Plantarum sponte nasxentium in 

regnis Danis et Norvegiffi. Editee a Ge. Chr. 

CEder, Oth. Frid. Muller, et Mart. Vahl. 
FL GrffiC, Flora Grzeca, &c. Joh. Sibthorp et Jac. 

Edw. Smith. t ^ 

Flacourtia, dicec. icos. and tiliaceEe^ S. tr. E. Ind. 

which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root 

in sand under a hand-glass 
Flagellaria, hexan. trig, and junceEe, a S. tr. India, 

which may be treated like flacourtia. 
Flambards, Middlesex, 7520. 
Fiat-pea, — see Platylobium. 

Flaveria, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbifere», 

a S. tr. Peru, of common culture. 
Flax, — see Linum. 
Flax-lily, phormium tenax. 
Flea-bane, — see Conyza. 
Flea-wort, inula pulicaria. 

Fleetivood, William, a British author on gardening, 

page 1101. A. D. 1707. 
Flemingia, diadel. decan. and legummosea;, s. tr. 

peren. and bien. India, which grow freely in loam 

and peat, and cuttings root inider a hand-glass in 

sand plungetl in heat. 



Fleurs, a seat in Roxburghfihire, 7621. 
Flintshire, gardens and residences of, 7606. 
Flixton Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Flixweed, sisymbrium sophia. 
Florence Court, a seat in Cavan, 7676. 
Floriculture, 6075. 
Floricultural catalogue, 6220. 
Florimania, 145. 

Florists, or floristry gardeners, 7397. 

Florists' flowers, enumeration of, 6221, 

Florists' gardens, commercial, their formation^ 

7357 ; management, 7467. 
Florists' societv of Paislev, its origin, rules, &c. 

7628. 

Florists' societies, 7706. 

Flower Hill, a seat in Galway, 7672. 

Flower-fence, — see Poinciana. 

Flower-garden, formation of, 6076 j exposure and 
aspect, 6080 ; extent, shelter, soil, surface, 
water, form, boundary-fence, &c. 6081. to 6090 ; 
laying out the area, 6093; placing the hot- 
houses, 6099 ; flower-nursery, 6104 ; walks, edg- 
ings, basket-edgings, &c. 6105. to 6108. 

Flower-garden, its culture and management, 0187 ; 
times of planting or sowing, 6189; pruning and 
training, &c. 6190 ; grass-plots, 6191 ; protecting 
tender plants, 6192; water, 6193; insects and 
vermin, 6194 ; cutting off decaying flowers 
and herbage, 6195; gathering flowers^ 6196; 
ordering seeds and bulbs, &c. 6200; neatness, 
6201. 

Flower-garden, planting of, 6110 ; mingled garden, 
6111; select garden, 6119 ; botanic flower-garden, 
6126 ; decorations, 6127... 

Flower-pot, 1407. ~ 

Flower-stage, for pots of plants, 1526. 

Flowering ash, — see Ornus. 

Flowering fern, — see Osmunda. 

Flowering rush, butomus umbellatus. 

Flowers for borden;, — see Border-flowers. 

Flux of juices, a disease of plants, 885. 

Fogs, 1200. 

Fontainbleau, blue or clear fountain, a royal resid- 
ence near Paris, the gardens of which are noted 
for the precocity and excellence of their grapes, 
159. 

Fontaines, Louis de, his works on gardening, page 
1119. A. D. 1788. 

Fontanesia, dian. monog. and onagrarese, a H. tr. 
Syria, a shrub rather tender of frost, but which 
grows in common soil, and is increased by layers^ 
or cuttings planted under a hand-glass. 

Fonthill Abbey, Wiltshire, 7597. 

Fool's parsley, — see iEthusa. 

Footscray Place, Kent, 7538. 

For., a Treatise on Fruit-trees, by W. Forsyth, 
Esq. royal gardener, — see page 1110. A. D. 
1791. 

Fordhook, a seat in Middlesex, 7520 

Foreign exotic culinary vegetables little cultivated 

in Britain, 6022. 
Foreign fruits deserving introduction and cultiv. 

ation, 5974. 
Foreign fruits of Africa, 6018. 
Foreign fruits of Asia, 6021. 
Foreign fruits of South America, 6020. 
Foreign fruits of the West Indies, 6019. 
Foreign hardy culinary vegetables little cultivated 

in Britain, 4326. 
Foremark, a seat in Derbyshire, 7574. 
Foremen of gardens, 7381. 
Forfar botanic garden, 7637. 
Forfarshire, gardens of, 7637. 

Forficula auricularia, the earwig, a coleopterous 

insect, 2237. 
Forking, 1872. 

Formica, the ant, a hymenopterous insect, which 
may be collected by whelming empty pots with 
the holes in their bottoms closed, 'near their 
haunts. The pots should be moistened with 
honied water or with milk, 2262. 

Forskolea, octan. tetrag. and urticeee, a G. peren. 
and H. an. Egypt, C. B. S. of common culture. 

Forsyth, W. Esq., his works on gardening, page 1119. 
A. D. 1791. 

Forty Hall, a seat in Middlesex, 7520. 

Fothergilla, polyan. dig. and amentaceae, H. peren. 
N. Amer. which require a peat soil, and are in., 
creased by layers. 

Foulkebourne Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Fountains and other hydraulic devices, 1829* 

Foxglove, — see Digitalis. 

Foxley, a scat in Herefordshire, 7568i 

Foxtail-grass, — see Alopecurus. 



GENERAL INDEX. 1191 



Fragaiia, strawberry, icos. polyg, and rosaceae, H. 
peren. Eur. and Amer. of the easiest culture. 

Fragaria, the strawberry, to force, 3338 ; soil, choice 
of sorts, potting and preparation of the plants, 
time of beginning to force, temperature, air 
nnd water, treatment after gathering the fruit, 
3334. to 3348, 

Fragaria vesca and other species of garden-straw- 
berries, their culture, &c. 4712. 

Fragrceus, Jonas Theodore, his work on gardening, 
page 1130. A. D. 17—. 

Frame exotics, 6590 ; woody, 6591 ; succulent, 6592 ; 
herbaceous, 6593 ; bulbs, 6594 ; biennials, 6595 ; 
annuals, 6596. 

Frames for hot-beds, their construction, 1522. 

Francheville, Joseph Dufresne de, his work on 
gardening, page 1117. A. D. 1753. 

Frangois, , a French author on gardening, 

page 1116. A. D. 1705. 

Francois, Nicholas de, his works on gardening, 
page 1121. A. D. 1803. 

Frankenia, sea-heath, hexan. monog. and caryo- 
phylleas, a G. peren. and H. peren. Eur. and 
C. B. S. which grow best in pots in loam and 
pent, and are increased by seeds or cuttings. 

Frankford, a seat in King's county, 7658. 

Franseria, moncec. pentan. and corymbifereas, G. 
tr. S. Amer. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily in the same soil under 
a hand-glass. 

Frasera, tetran. monog. and gentianeaj, a H. bien. 

Carolina, of common culture in loam and peat. 
Fraternities of gardeners, or gardeners' lodges, 7701. 
Fraxinella, — see Dictamnus. 

Fraxinus, ash-tree, polygam. dicec and oleineaa, H. 

tr. Eur. and Amer. which grow in any soil not 

over wet, and are increased by seeds ; the more 

curious sorts by budding or grafting. 
Fraxinus excelsior, the common ash-tree, 7077 ; 

American ash, 7078. 
Frederick, J. P., his work on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1802. 

Frege, Ch. A., his work on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1804. 
French authors on gardening, 7692. 
French honeysuckle, — see Hedysarura 
French marigold, — see Tagetes. 
French Park, in Roscommon, 7671. 
Freylim, de Buttigliera, Conte, his work on the 

pine-apple, page 1128. A. D. 1780. 
Friar's cowl, arum arisarum. 
Fringe-tree, — see Chionanthus. 
Fritillaria, fritillary, hexan. monog. and liliacese, a 

G. peren. and H. peren. Eur. and Persia, bulbs 
. of easy culture. 

Fritillaria imperialis, meleagris, &c. the crown- 
imperial, common fritillary, and other species, 
6308. 

Fritillary, fritillaria meleagris. 

Friisch, A , his work on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1811. 
Frog Hill, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 
Frog-bit, hydrocharis morsus-ranse. 
Frogmore, the queen's gardens at, in Berkshire, 

7562. 
Frost, 1203. 

Fruit-room and cellar, 1703. 

Fuchsia, octan. monog. and santalaccffi, G. tr. 
Chili, which thrive in light rich soil, and young 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass, admitting 
air occasionally to prevent damping off; 

Fuci, edible, 4349. 

Fuel, the most profitable trees for, 6753. 

Fukker, F. Jac, his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1801. 
Fulham nursery, 7518. 

Fuhner, Samuel, his works on gardening, page 1109. 
. A.D.1781. 

Fumaria, fumitory, diadel. hexan. and papa veraceae, 
a H. peren. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Fumigating-bellows, used in gardening, 1082. 

Fumitory — see Fumaria. 

Fungi, edible and dangerous, 4339. 

Furber, Robert, a British writer on gardening, 
page 1104. A. D. 1732. 

Furcroea, hexan. monog. and bromeliae, D. S. tr. 
and a peren. S. Amer. succulents which thrive in 
loamy soil, and require but little water ; it is in- 
creased by ofFsets from the roots. 

Furze, — see Ulex. 

Fusanus, polygam. moncec. and santalacete, a G. 
C. B. S. which will grow in loam and peat, and 
may be propagated by young cuttings in sand 
under a bell-glass. 

4 G 



G 

Gabions, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 
Gadd, P. A. his work on gardening, page 1130. A. D. 
1759. 

Geert. de Fruct, Jos. Gartner de Fructibus et Se- 

minibus Plantarum. 
Gasrtnera, decan. monog. and malpighiaceae, a S. tr. 

E. Ind. a climber which thrives well in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under a 

hand-glass. 

Gagea, hexan. monog. and asphodelea3, H. peren. 

l<Jur. bulbs of common culture. 
Galactia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseEe, a S. tr. 

Jamaica, a climber which may be treated as 

gasrtnera. 

Galactites, syngen. polyg. frustran. and cynaroce- 

jihalete, a H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Galangale, — see KEempferia. 

Galanthus, snowdrop, hexan. monog. and amaryl- 
lideas, a PI. peren. Brit, a bulb of common cul- 
ture. 

Galardia, syngen. polyg. frustr, and corymbifere£e, 
a H. peren. Carolina, which grows only in peat 
soil, and is increased by dividing the roots or by 
seeds. 

Galax, pentan. monog. and , a H. peren. N. 

Amer. which may be treated as galardia : it 

prefers a moist situation. 
Galaxia, monad, triand. and iridete, a G. peren, 

C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated as ixice. 
Galega, goat's rue. diadel. decan. and legumino- 

seae, S. tr. Eur. and India, which grow in loam 

and peat, and cuttings root readily in sand 

under a bell-glass j and H. peren. of common 

culture. 

Galenia, octan. dig. and chenopodese, a G. tr. 

C. B. S. which grows in rich light soil, and cut- 

tings vvill root readily under a hand-glass. 
GaleolKlolon, dead-nettle, didyn. gymnos. and la- 

biateaj, a H. peren. Brit, a common weed. 
Galeopsis, hemp-nettle, didyn. gymnos. H. an. 

Brit, a common weed. 
Galinsogea, syngen. poly, super, and corymbifereaj 

H. an. Amer. of common culture. 
Galipea, dian. monog.and verbenaceae, a S. tr. Guiana, 

which grows in light loam, and cuttings strike 

freely under a hand-glass. 
Galium, bed-straw, tetran. and monog. rubiaceee, 

H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture, some of 

them are marsh plants. 
Gallesio, George, his works on gardening, page 1128. 

A. D. 18U. 

Galloway House, a seat in Wigtonshire, 7626. 
Gangrene, 890. 

Garcinia mangostana, mangosteen, dodec. monog. 

and guttifereae, a Java fruit-tree, 5998. 
Garden, botanic, — see Botanic-garden. 
Garden, kitchen, — see Kitchen-garden. 
Garden counsellors, artists, or professors, 7400. 
Garden-decorations, — see Edifices. 
Garden-laborers, 7378. 
Garden-line, 1362. 
Garden-pot, different kinds of, 1407. 
Garden-tradesmen, 7388. 

Gardener, the profession of, arduous but agreeable, 
and favorable for intellectual improvement, 2372 
and 2373. 

Gardeners, their education, 7719 ; professional, 7724 ; 
intellectual, 7744 ; moral, religious, and physical, 
7761 J economical, 7777. i :> > 

Gardener's house and office, 1700 ; lodging-house 
for journeymen, 1077. 

Gardeners' lodges, or fraternities, 7701. 

Gardenia, pentan. monog. and rubiacese, S. and 
G. tr. E. Ind. C. B. S. which thrive well 
in loam and peat in moist heat, and cuttmgs 
root "freely in sand under a hand-glass m 
heat. 

Gardening, as affected by different climates, 518. 
Gardenmg, as affected by different forms of govern, 
ment, 508. 

Gardening, as affected by different states of society, 

Gardening, authors on; of the Roman empire, 
7685; Italy, 7694; Holland, 7695 ; France, 7692 I 
Get many, 7693; Russia, 7697 ; Spain, 7698 ; Swe- 
den, 7696; Britain, 7686 ; America, 7699. 

Gardening, history of, 1. 

Gardening, history of, from the 6th century, B. C. 

to the 5tli century of our a^ra, 35. 
Gardening, how arranged in this treatise, page 2. 



1192 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Gardening, its products, pleasures, and cares, 
page 2. 

Gardening, origin and progress of, 3. 

Gardening, whiat, page 1. 

Gardening authors, 7405. 

Gardening in Britain, 312. 

Gardening in China, 468. 

Gardening in European Turkej-^, 306. 

Gardening in France, 157. 

Gardening in Germany, 201. 

Gardening in Holland and Flanders, 114. 

Gardening in Italy, 70. 

Gardening in Mexico, 487. 

Gardening in North America, 481. 

Gardening in Poland, 280. 

Gardening in Russia, 253. 

Gardening in South America, 492. 

Gardening in Spain and Portugal, 289. 

Gardening in Sweden and Norway, 244. 

Gardening in Switzerland, 240. 

Gardening in Syria, Persia, India, and Africa, 457. 

Gardening in the ages of antiquity as to fruits, 

culinary productions, and flowers, 26. 
Gardening in the British colonies, and other foreign 

settlements of European nations, 493. 
Gardening in ultra European countries, 456. 
Gardening of the Jews, 9 ; of the Babylonians and 

Assyrians, 14 j of the Persians, 19 j of the 

Grecians, 23. 
Gardening of the Romans, 36. 
Gardening patrons, 7406. 

Gardens, commercial, 7453 ; seed-gardens, grass- 
orchards, ploughed orcliards, market-gardens, 
orchard-gardens, herb and physic gardens, mar- 
ket flower-gardens, florists' gardens, nursery, 
gardens, public gardens, squares, parks, botanic 
gardens, 7454. to 7509. 

Gardens, different kinds of, in Britain, relatively to 
the different classes of society, and the different 
species of gardeners, 7412; private gardens, 7413 ; 
cottage-gardens, 7414 ; artificers' gardens, 7422 ; 
of farmers, 7423 ; of street-houses, 7426; of trades- 
men, 7427 ; of amateurs, 7428 ; of connoisseurs, 
of citizens, of villas, of villas and demesnes, of 
mansions, of royal palaces, 7429. to 7452. 

Gardens, royal, — see Royal Gardens. 

Gardens, the most celebrated in different countries, 
— see Gardening of these countries. 

Gardens of England, 7512 ; Wales, 7602 ; Scotland, 
7615; Ireland, 7651. 

Gardens of the Horticultural Societies, 7508. 

Gardens of the Neats' Houses, 7457. 

Gardini, M , his works on gardening, page 1128. 

A. D. 1783. 

Garidella, decan. trig, and ranunculaceae, a H. an, 

France, of common culture. 
Garland-flower, — see Hedychium. 
Garlic, — see AUium. 
Garlic-pear, — see Cratseva. 
Gartmore, a seat in Perthshire, 7636. 
Garnier, Claude, a French author on gardening, 

page 1115. A. D. 1631. 
Garnons, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Garten bauraeister, 236. 

Garton, James, a British author on gardening, 
page 1107. A. D. 1769. 

Garuga, decan. monog. and , a S. tr. E. 

Ind. which may be treated like galega, 

Gastrolobium, decan. monog. and leguminoseas, a 
G. tr. N. Holl. which grows in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Gatcombe House, Hampshire, 7594. 

Gatcombe Park, "Worcestershire, 7566. 

Gates, different kinds of, 1794; maintenance in 

position and repair, 1795. 
Gates and lodges, 1712. 

Gatterer, C. H. W. Jac, his works on gardening, 

page 1126. A. D. 1798. 
Gathering vegetables, operation of, 2288. to 2290. 
Gatton Park, Surrey, 7528. 
Gaulston Park, in Westmeath, 7662. 
Gaultheria, decan. monog. and ericese, H. tr. N. 

Amer. creepers which thrive best in peat soil, and 

are increased by layers or seeds. 
Gaultheria serpyllifolia, the common snowberry, 

4774. 

Gaura, octan. monog. and onagrareffi, a S. tr. F. 

bien. and H. an. Amer. of easy culture. 
Gautieri, Giuseppe, his works on gardening, page 

1128. A. D. 1810. 
Gazazia, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbiferes, 

a G. tr. C. B. S. which thrives in light, rich soil. 



and cuttings root freely in the same soil under a 
hand-glass. 

Geiser, Fr. X. his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1796. 

Geissorhiza, tile-root, trian. monog. and irideee, G. 

peren. C. B. S. which may be treated like ixise. 
Geisf, J , M. D., his works on gardening, page 

1127. A. D. 1814. 
Gelonium, dicec. icos. and , a S. tr. E. Ind. 

which may be treated like gardenia. 
Gelsemium, pentan. monog. and apocynese, a H. tr. 

N. Amer. of easy culture. 
Gems, to propagate by, — see Bulbs. 
Gen. Rep. Scot., Sir John Sinclair's General Report 

of Scotland. 
Genip-tree, — see Genipa. 

Genipa, genip-tree, pentan. monog. and rubiacese, 
S. tr. S. Amer. which may be treated like gar- 
denia. 

Genista, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, G. and H, 
tr. of easy culture, and increased chiefly by seeds. 

Genssler, Ch. Jac, his works on gardening, page 
1125. A. D. 1796. 

Gentian, — see Gentiana. 

Gentiana, gentian, p?ntan dig. and gentianea?, H. 
peren. Eur. and Amer. and annuals, which grow 
best in peat and loam, and the smaller sorts in 
pots ; they are increased by cuttings, or dividing 
at the root. 

Gentil, , his work on gardening, page 1101. 

A. D. 1706. 

Geodorum, gynan. monan. and orchidese, S. peren, 

E. Ind. which grow best in sandy loam and peat, 

and the only mode of increasing them is by divi- 
sion at the root. 
Geoffroya, bastard cabbage-tree, diadel. decan. and 

leguminoseffi, a S. tr. Jamaica, which grows in 

sandy loam, and cuttings root in the same soil 

under a hand-glass. 
Gcorgi, Dr., his works on gardening, page 1131. 

A. D. 1793. 
Ger. herb., J. Gerarde's herball. 
Geranise, table of species and varieties, 6601 ; oro- 

pagation, 6602 ; culture, 6603 ; forcing, 6604. ' 
Geranium, crane's bill, monad, decan. and geranije, 

G. and H. peren. and an. Eur. C. B. S. and Amer. 

of easy culture, — see Gerani^. 
Gerarde, John, a British writer on gardening, page 

1099. A. D. 1597. 
Gerardia, didyn. angios. and scrophularineae, a S. 

peren. and H. peren. and an. E. Ind. and N. 

Amer. of easy culture. 
German authors on gardening, 7693. 
Germander, — see Teucrium. 
Geropogon, old man's beard, syngen. polyg. squal. 

and cichoraceffi, a H. peren. and an. Italy, of 

common culture. 
Gertking, Joseph, his writings on gardening, page 

1125. A. D. 1788. 
Gesner, John, his works on gardening, page 1123. 

A. D. 1753. 

Gesneria, didyn. angios. and bignoniaceae, S. tr. 
Amer. which thrive well in light rich soil, and 
cuttings root either in sand or mould, under a 
hand-glass in heat. 

Gethyllis, hexan. monog. and amaryllidese, G. pe- 
ren. C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated like ixiaes, 

Getonia, decan. monog. and combretaceae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which grows best in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in 
heat. 

Geum avens, icos. polyg. and rosaceee, H. peren. 

N. Amer. and Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Ghent, villas of, 123 ; botanic garden, 138. 
Ghinia, dian. monog. and verbenaceae, a S. an. 

W. Ind. of common culture. 
Giant fennel, — see Ferula. 
Gibside, a seat in Durham, 7585. 
Gibson, John, M. D., his writings on gardening, 

page 1107. A. D. 1768. 
Gibson, T., his works on gardening, page 1107. A.D. 

1691. 

Giles, John, a Britisli writer on gardening, page 

1107. A. D. 1767. 
Gillingham Hall, Norfolk, 7554. 
Gilpin, the Rev. William, his works relative to 

gardening, page 1107. A.D. 1763. 
Ginseng, panax quinquefolium. 
Girardin, R. L., Vicompte d'Ermenonville, his 

works on gardening, page 1119. A. D. 1777. 
Girdling trees, 863. 

Gisekia, pentan. pentag. and portulaceee, a S. aa 
W. Ind. of ( ommon culture. 



GENERAL 



Glades in planting, regular or irregular, 6813. 

Gladiolus, corn-flag, trian. monog. and irideae, G. 
and H. peren. C. B. S. bulbs of easy culture, 6313. 

Glamorganshire, gardens and residences of, 7608. 

Glaser, J. F., his works on gardening, page 1124. 
A. D. 1774. 

Glasgow botanic garden, 7629. 

Glasgow nurseries, 7629. 

Glasswort, — see Salicornia. 

Glass case, 1531. — see Structures. 

Glaucium, horn-poppy, polyan. monog. and papave- 
raceaj, a H. Bien. and ah. Eur. of common cul- 
ture. 

Glaux, black saltwort, pentan. monog. and salica- 
rea;, a H. peren. Brit, which grows best in pots in 
sand and peat, and is increased by dividing at the 
roots. 

Glechoma, ground-ivy, didyn. gymnos. arid labia- 
tCcB, H. peren. Eur. of common culture. 

Gleditsch, John Gotlicb (John Love-God), his 
works on gardening, page 1123. A. D. 1765. 

Gleditschia, polyg. dicec. and leguminoseas, a F. and 
H. tr. Amer. and China, of easy culture, and in- 
creased by layers or seeds. 

Glengary House, in Inverness-shire, 7648. 

Glinus, dodec. pentag. and ficoideaj, a G. an. S. Eur. 
of common culture. 

Globba, dian. monog. and scitaminese, S. peren. E. 
Ind. reedy plants of easy culture, and increased 
by dividing at the roots. 

Globe-amaranth, — see Gomphrena. 

Globe-flower, — see Trollius. 

Globc-tliistle, — see Echinops. 

Globularia, tetran. monog. and globulariae, G. tr. 
Eur. which grow well in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root freely in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Gloriosa, hexan. monog. and liliaa, S. peren. E. Ind. 
with tuberous roots, 6723. 

Glossodia, gynan. monan. and orchideffi, a G. peren. 
N. S. W. which grows in sandy loam and peat, 
and requires but little water when not in a grow- 
ing state ; it is increased by offsets and seeds. 

Glossology of plants, 555. 

Gloucestershire, gardens and residences of, 7563. 

Gloxinia, didyn. angios. and bignoniacese, S. peren. 
S. Amer. which thrive in light rich soil, and 
leaves taken ofF close to the stem and planted 
will root and make plants. 

Glyceria, trian. dig. and graminese, a H. peren. 
Brit, a grass of the easiest culture. 

Glycine, diadel. decan. and leguminoseaj, Gr. tr. 
Ind. and Amer. mostly climbers, which thrive in 
loam and peat, and root readily from cuttings; 
and H. peren. of easy culture in similar soil. 

Glycyrrhiza, licorice, diadel. decan. and legumino- 
se£e, H. peren. of easy culture. 

Glycyrrhiza glabra, the common licorice, 2243. 

Glynde, a seat in Sussex, 7531. 

Gmelin, John Frederick, his works on gardening, 
page 1125. A. D. 1787. 

Gmelina, didyn. angios. and verbenaceae, S. tr. E. 
Ind. which grow best in sandy loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 

Gnaphalium, everlasting, syngen. polyg. super, and 
corymbiferese, S. and G. tr. C. B. S. and Eur. 

. which thrive in peat or in sandy loam, and cut- 
tings taken off at a joint and planted in the same 
soil, the pots placed in a steady situation, but not 
under glasses, root freely ; the H. species are of 
common culture. 

Gnidia, octan. dig. and thymeleee, G. tr. C. B. S. 
which thrive well in peat soil, with the pots well 
drained, and care being taken neither to over 
water them, nor let them droop for want of 
water, as they are easily killed ; very young 
cuttings root in sand under bell-glasses. 

Gnoll Castle, Glamorganshire, 7606. 

Goathurst, a seat in Somersetshire, 7599. 

Goat's beard, — see Tragopogon. 

Goat's rue, — see Galega. 

Goat's thorn, astragalus tragacantha. 

Godmersham Place, a seat in Kent, 7537. 

Golden Grove, a seat in Caermarthenshire, 7614. 

Golden rod, — see Solidago. 

Golden rod tree, bosea yervamora. 

Golden saxifrage, — see Chrysoplenium. 

Golden thistle, — see Scolymus. 

Goldylocks, — see Chrysocoma. 

Gomesa, gynan. monan. and orchideae, a S. peren. 
Brasil ; a parasite, which may be treated as 
aerides, epidendrum, &c. 

Gomphia, btitton-flower, decan. monog. and gutti- 



INDEX. 1193 

fereze, S. tr. Jamaica, which thrive in sandy loam, 
and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in a 
moist heat. 

Gomphocarpus, pentan. dig. and asclepiadece, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow freely in loam and peat, and 
cuttings in sand under a hand-glass in a little 
bottom-heat, root freely. 

Gompholobium, decan. monog. and leguminosese, 

= G. tr. Austral, which thrive in sandy loam and 
peat, not over watered, young cuttings root with- 
out difficulty under a bell-glass in sand. 

Gomphrena, globe-amaranth, pentan. monog. and 
amaranthacese, a S. tr. peren. bien. and an. Ind. 
and Amer. of easy culture. 

Goniocarpus, tetran. monog. and onagrarcas, a G. 
an. China, of common culture. 

Gonolobus, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, S. tr. 
Amer. climbers, which grow freely in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass : the other species are of easy culture. 

Goodenia, pentan. monog. and goodenovece, G. tr. 
N. Spain, which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root under a hand-glass. 

Goodia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, G. tr. 
Austral, which thrive well in sandy loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root freely under a 
bell-glass in sand. 

Goodwood, a seat in Sussex, 7532. 

Goodyera, gynan. monan. and orchidese, aS. peren. 
Eur. and Amer. which grows in loam and peat, 
and is increased by suckers from the root, and H. 
peren. which thrive in sandy peat, and may be 
increased like the others. 

Gooseberry, — see Ribes. 

Goosefoot, — see Chenopodium. 

Gopsal Hall, Leicestershire, 7573, 

Gordonia, monad, polyan. and malvaceae, a G. and 
F. tr. which grow in peat soil with a little loam, 
and are increased by layers or ripened cuttings 
under a hand-glass. 

Gorhambury House, Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Goring, E. H. J., Bm. Trommsdorf, and F. K. L. 
Sickler, their joint work on gardeniner, page 1126. 
A. D. 1802. 

Gorinka, a seat near Moscow, 260. 

Gormanstown House, in Eastmeath, 7661. 

Gort House, a seat in Galway, 7672. 

Gorteria, syngen. polyg. frustr. and corymbifere^, 
a G. an. C. B. S. of easy culture. 

Gosfield Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Gossford House, East Lothian, commonly called 

Wemyss House, 7586. 
Gossford House, Northumberland, 7619. 
Gossypium, cotton, monad, polyan. and malvaccJE, 

S. tr. bien. and an. Ind. and Amer. which thrive 

in rich light soil, and generally ripen of seeds ; 

or cuttings will root under a hand-glass in sand. 
Gotthardt, J. Ch. and R. Eyserbock, their work on 

gardening, page 1127. A. D. 1806. 
Gotx,J. F., his work on gardening, page 1124. A. D. 

Gouania, polyg. moncec. and rhamnese," S. tr. W. 
and E. Ind. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Gouges de Cessieres, his work on gardening, page 
1118. A. D. 1758. * ^ 

Gould, Mr., an Englishman, in the service of Prince 
Potemkin, considered in his day as the first gar- 
dener in Russia, 277. 

Gourd, — see Cucurbita. 

Goutweed, — see ^gopodium. 

Gr<effer, Mr. John, his works on gardening, page 
1109. A. D 1789. ^' ' ^ 

Grafting, 2013. 

Grafting, origin of, 33. 

Grammitis, cryptog. Alices and Alices, a H. peren. 

Brit, a fern of the usual culture. 
Grange Hall, Durham, 7584. 
Grange Park, Hampshire, 7594. 
Grangea, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferese, 

S. and H. an. E. Ind. of common cultur 
Grape, — see Vitis. 
Grape-gatherer, 1353. 
Grape-hyacinth, muscari botryoides. 
Grass of Parnassus,— see Parnassia. 
Gratiola, hedge-hyssop, dian. monog, and scropbu- 

larmeae, a S. bien. and H. an. Eur. Ind. and Amer 

of common culture. 
Gravel, 1957. 

^ n04^' §^1740^^'^' ^"^'^ °" gardening, page 
Great burnet, — see Poterium. 



1194 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Great Fulford, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 
Greek valerian, — see Polemonium. 
Green dragon, arum dracontium. 
Green-house, its construction, 6164: general culture, 
6202. 

Green-house plants, 6597; select sorts, 6598. to 6618 ; 
woody sorts, 6621 ; climbers, 6552 ; succulents, 
6654; bulbs, 6658; herbaceous, 1729; selections 
for particular purposes, 660. 

Greencroft, a seat in Durham, 7584. 

Greenstead Hall^ Essex, 7541. 

Greenwich Park, Kent, 7535. 

Grenada, gardens of, 292. 

Grevillea, tetran. monog. and proteacese, G. tr. 
N. S. W. which grow freely in sandy loam and 
peat, and ripened cuttings root under a hand-glass 
in sand. 

Grewia, polyan. monog. and tiliacese, S. and G. tr. 
Ind. and C. B. S. which thrive in loam and peat, 
and cuttings d5 best in sand under a hand-glass 
in heat. 

Grias cauliflora, the anchovy-pear, polyan. monog. 
and guttifereae, a S. tr. Jamaica, 5979." 

Grielum, decan. pentag. and geraniaceje, a G. pe- 
ren. C. B. S. whiclr thrives best in sandy gravel, 
with the pots well drained, and cuttings root in 
the same soil without glasses. 

Griffin, Mr. William, his writings on gardening, 
page 1113. A.D. 1808. 

Grinisthorpe Hall, Lincolnshire, 7577. 

Grimstone Garth, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Grindelia, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereas, 
G. tr. and a peren. Mexico ; which thrive well in 
light, rich soil, and young cuttings root freely 
in the same soil under hand-glasses. 

Grindstone used in gardening, 1467. 

Grisenthwnitc, Mr., an apothecary at Wells, Nor- 
folk, and agricultural writer, 1050. 

Grislea, octan. monog. and salicareee, a S. tr. E. Ind. 
which thrives in loam and peat, and young cut- 
tings root freely in sand under a bell-glass in heat. 

Grohman, , his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A.D. 1798. 

Gromwell, — see Lithospermum. 

Groningen, botanic garden of, 133. 

Gronovia, pentan. monog. and cucurbitacese, a S. 
peren. Jamaica ; a climber, which thrives well in 
rich soil, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Grottoes, as decorations in gardening, 1815. 

Ground, how to operate on, in landscape-gardening, 
7196. 

Ground compasses, 1366. 
Ground-ivy, — see Glechoma. 
Ground measure, 1363. 
Ground-pine, ajuga chamaspitys. 
Grounds, the art of laying out, — see Landscape- 
gardening. 
Groundsel, — see Senecio. 
Groundsel-tree, baccharis halmifolia. 
Grove, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 
Grove, a seat in Middlesex, 7520. 
Grove Cottage, Oxfordshire, 7558. 
Grove Hill, Surrey, 7527. 

Grub (grob'en, Teut. to delve or dig), to root up 
trees which are not to be planted again : to clear 
the ground of ligneous vegetables by digging 
round and cutting their roots. 

Guaiacum, lignum vitas, decan. monog. and ruta- 
cea;, a S. tr. W. Ind. which grows in loam and 
peat, and ripened cuttings taken off" at a joint, 
root readily when thinly jjlanted in a pot of sand, 
and plunged under a hand-glass in heat. 

Guarea, octan. monog. and meliaces, a S. tr. S. 
Amer. which grows freely in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Guatteria, polyan. polyg. and anonaceas, a S. tr. Ja- 
maica, which requires a loamy soil, and ripe cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Guelder-rose, — see Viburnum. 

Gueriri, M , a French author on gardening, 

page 1117. A.D. 1732. 

Guerin and Schwartz, their work on gardening, 
page 1122. A.D. 1813. 

Guettarda, moncec. hexan. and rubiaceee, S. tr. 
which maybe treated like gardenia. 

Guilandina, nicker-tree, decan. monog. and legu- 
minosese, a S. tr. India, which thrives in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Guillemeau, J. L. M., his work on gardening, page 
1120. A.D. 1800. 

Guimpcl, F , his works on gardening, iiage 1 127. 

A.D. 1810. 



Guiting Park, Gloucestershire, 1565. 

Gum-succor)', chondrilla juncea. 

Gundelia, syngen. polyg. segr. and cynarocephaleae, 

a H. peren. Levant, of common culture. 
Gunnera, gynan. dian. and urtices, a G. peren. 

C.B.S. which may be treated as an aquatic. 
Gunnersbury, a seat in Middlesex, 7520. 
Gunther, 3. Jac, his work on gardening, page 112?'. 

A.D. 1806. 
Gun ton Hall, Norfolk, 7554. 

Gurnth, Amelia, her works on gardening, page 1125, 
A.D. 1790. 

Gustavia, monad, polyan. and myrteaceae, a S. tr, 
which thrives v/ell in sandy loam, and cuttings 
root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Guys Cliff, a seat in Warwickshire, 7571. 

Gymnadenia, gynan. monan. and orchidese, a H, 
peren. Brit, which grows best in sandy loam, peat,' 
and chalk, and may be increased by seeds; if 
planted in pots they must be well drained. 

Gymnema, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, a S. tr. 
Ceylon, which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Gymnocladus canadensis, diopc. decan. and legumi- 
nosea;, a H. tr. Canada, which grows in common 
soil, and is increased by cuttings of the roots. 

Gymnostyles, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbife- 
reae, a G. an. S. Amer. "of common cul ure. 

Gypsophila, decan. dig. and caryo])hylleaE, H. peren. 
and an. Eur. well adapted for rock-work, and pro- 
pagated by cuttings or seeds. 

Gj-psum, 1179. 

Gyrotheca, trian. monog. and haBmodoracea?, a G, 
peren. N. Amer. which grows well in light soil, 
and may be increased by dividing at the root. 



H. 



Habenaria, gynan. monan. and orchideas, H. peren, 
Eur. and Amer. requiring the same treatment as 
gymnadenia. 

Hack, a north country term for a pick-axe, — see 
Pick-axe. 

To hack {hacken, Teut. to hew), to cut over or clear 
away, by cuttmg ligneous vegetables. 

Hackfall, scenery of, in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Hackness, scenery of, in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Hackney botanic nursery garden, 7356. 

Hackwood Park, Hampshire, 7594. 

Haddon Hall, Derbyshire, 7575. 

Haddow Hall, Lancashire, 7588. 

H£emanthus, hexan. monog. and amaryllidcae, G, 
peren. C.B.S. which thrive best in sandy loam and 
peat, and like other bulbs require no water when 
in a dormant state. 

Hjematoxylon, logwood, decan. monog. and legu- 
minoseaj, a S. tr. S. Amer. which grows in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Haimodorum, trian. monog. and haemodoraceie, a 
G. peren. N S.W a bulb which maybe treated as 
hffimanthus. 

Hafod, a seat in Cardiganshire, 7607. 

Haga, gardens of, near Stockholm, 246. 

Hagley Hall, Staffordshire, 7570. 

Hagley, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Haigh Hall, Lancashire, 7588. 

Hair- grass, — see Aira. 

Hakea, tetran. monog. and proteaceas, G. tr. Austral, 
which thrive well in a third loam, a third peat, 
and a third sand, the pots well drained, and too 
much watering avoided ; ripened cuttings root 
readily under a hand-glass in sand. 

Haldon House, Devonshire, 7600. 

Halesia, snowdrop-tree, doiiec. monog. and eben- 
aceas, H. tr. N. Amer. which grow freely in com- 
raon soil, and are increased by cuttings of the roots. 

Halingbury Place, Essex, 7541. 

Hall, Joseph, his work on gardening, page 1100 
A.D. 1645. 

Halleria, didyn. angios. and scrophularineEe, a G. tr 
C.B.S. which grows freely in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Hallia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, a G. tr. and 
bien. and peren. C.B.S. which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and young cuttings root under a hand- 
glass in sand. 

Haloragis, octand. tetrag. and onagrareffi, a G. tr. 

N. Zeal, which may be treated as hallia. 
Halsewood, a seat in Sligo, 7675. 
Ham Court, Worcestershire, 7566. 



GENERA 

Ham House, Middlesex, 327. 

Hamamelis, tetran. dig. and berberidese, a H, tr. 

N. Amer. which thrives in common soil, and is 

generally increased by layers. 
Hamel du Monceau, or Duhamel, Henry Lewis du, 

a French author on gardening, page 1117. A.D. 

1730. 

Hamels, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Hamilton, the Hon. Charles, of Painshill, a man of 

great taste in gardening, 341. 
Hamilton Palace, Lanarkshire, 7629. 
Hamiltonia, oil-nut, polyan. dicec. and terebintaceEe, 

a G. tr. N. Amer. which grows in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root under a hand-glass in 

sand. 
Hammer, 1345. 

Hammer, F , L , and Dietricht, their 

work on gardening, page 1121. A.D. 1802. 

Hampshire, gardens and residences of, 7594. 

Hampton Court, Herefordshire, 7568. 

Hampton Court, Middlesex, 7523. 

Hanbury Hall, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Hand-glasses, of different kinds, 1429. 

Hanmer Hall, Flintshire, 7606. 

Hanworth, a seat in Norfolk, 7554. 

Haram, garden of the, 308. 

Hard-grass, — see Kottboellia. 

Hard-wooded timber-trees, the most useful sorts of, 
described, 7068. 

Hardwick Hall, Derbyshire, 7575. 

Hardwicke, a seat in the county of Durham, 
7585. 

Hardy fruits, catalogue of, 4361. 

Hardy trees, with showy flowers, 6539 ; deciduous, 
6540; evergreen, 6541. 

Hare Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Hare-street Cottage, Essex, 7541. 

Hares, to prevent from barking trees, 6934. 

Hare's ear, — see Bupleurum. 

Haresfoot-fern, davallia canariensis. 

Harestail-grass, lagurus ovatus. 

Harewood, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 

Harewood House, Yorkshire, 7583. 

Harringay House, Hornsey, account of the exten- 
sive steam apparatus erected there, 1669. 

Harrison, Mr. Charles, F.H.S., his writings on gar- 
dening, page 1115. A.D. 1823. 

Hartlib, Samuel, his works on gardening, page 1100. 
A.D. 1651. 

Hart's tongue, scolopendrium officinarum. 

Hartwort, — see Tordylium. 

Hassagay-tree, curtisia faginea. 

Hasselquistia, pentan. dig. and umbelliferese, H. an. 

Egypt, of common culture. 
Hassendean nursery, Roxburghshire, 7621. 
Hatchet-vetch, — see Biserrula. 
Hatfield House, Hertfordshire, 7545. 
Hatton House, Midlothian, 7618. 
Hawick nursery, Roxburghshire, 7621. 
Hawkstone Park, Shropshire, 7569. 
Hawkweed, — see Hieracium. 

Hawm, or haulm {healm. Sax.), the lower part of 
the straw after the ears are cut off ; in gardening, 
the term is generally applied to leguminous 
vegetables, after their produce has been ga- 
thered. 

Haworth, Adrian Hardy, Esq., his writings on gar- 
dening, page 1110. A.D. 1794. 

Hawthorn, mespilus oxyacantha,— -see Mespilus. 

Hay, Mr. John, planner of gardens, Edinburgh ; 
an excellent liorticulturist, and a good man, 
2870. 

Hayes Place, Kent Road, 7537. 
Haynes, Thomas, his works on gardening, page 1113. 
A.D. 1811. 

Haywood, Joseph, gent., his writings on gardening, 
page 1114. A.D. 1818. 

Head, or upper gardener, 7383 j who ought to re- 
commend him, 7489. 

Headfort, a seat in Eastmeath, 7661. 

Heading, the growing of the leaves of a plant into 
a roundish head or loaf, as in the common cab- 
bage ; called also cabbaging, or loaving. 

Heart's ease, viola tricolor. 

Heartseed, — see Cardiospermum. 

Heartsheath Hall, Flintshire, 7606. 

Heat, 1196. 

Heath, — see Erica. 

Heath field, a seat in Kent,7537i 

Heathfield Park, Sussex, 7531. 

Heaton Hall, Northumberland, 7586. 

Heaton Lodge, Lancashire, 7588. 

Hebeustretia, didyn. angios. and verbenacese, G. tr. 



INDEX. 1195 

and peren. C. B. S. which thrive in loam and peat, 

and young cuttings root readily in the same soil 

under a hand-glass. 
Hedeoma, dian. monog. and labiateae, H. an. of 

common culture. 
Hedera, ivy, pentan. monog. and caprifolise, a H. 

tr. Brit, a well-known creeper of easy culture. 
Hedge-hyssop, — see Gratiola. 
Hedge-mustard, sisymbrium officinale. 
Hedge-nettle, — see Stachys. 

Hedges, their formation and management, 6820« 
6899. 

Hedsor Lodge, Buckinghamshire, 7.W. 
Hedychium, garland-flower, monan. monog. and 
- scitaminea2, S. peren. E. Ind. reedy marsh plants 

of easy culture. 
Hedyotis, tetran. monog. and rubiaceas, a S. an. E. 

Ind. of easy culture. 
Hedypnois, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cichoraceas, 

H. an. Eur. and Candia, of common culture. 
Hedysarum, diadel. decan. and leguminoscce, S. 

and G. tr. India and Amer. which thrive well in- 

loam and peat, and young cuttings root in sand 

under a bell-glass. 
Heely, Joseph, his works on gardening, page 1108. 

A. D. 1777. 

Heiligense, a royal seat at Potsdam in Prussia, 
210. 

Helenium, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, 
a F. peren. and H. peren. N. Amer. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Helianthemum, sun-rose, polyan. monog. and cisti- 
ncEG, F. and H. tr. and H. an. Eur. and Amer. 
which grow in sandy loam and peat, and root 
readily by cuttings, or are raised by seeds. 

Helianthus, sun-flower, syngen. polyg. frustran. and 
corymbifere£e, G. and H. peren. and an. Amer. of 
easy culture. 

Helianthus tuberosus, the Jerusalem artichoke, 
3688. 

Heliconia, pentan. monog. and musacea;, S. peren. 

Ind. whicli grow in rich loam kept moist, and are 

increased by dividing at the root 
Holicteres, screw-tree, monadelpb dodec. and mal- 

vaccaa, S. tr. C. B. S. which thrive in loam and 

l)eat, and are readily increased by cuttings taken 

ott at a joint, and plunged under a hand-glass in 

a pot of sand. 
Heliocarpus, dodec. dig. and tiliacese, a G. tr. Vera 

Cruz, which tlirives in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Helio]jhila, tetradyn. siliq. and crucifere^, G. tr. 

which grow in sandy loam, and may be increased 

by seeds or cuttings under a hand-glass ; and H. 

an. of common culture. 
Heliopsis, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereas, 

a H. peren. N. Amer. of common culture. 
Heliotropium, turnsole, pentan. monog. and bora- 

gines, S. tr. and bien. and G. tr. Ind. and Amer. 

which thrive in any rich, light soil, and cuttings 

will root freely under a hand-glass. 
Helix, the snail, and limax, the slug, to destroy, 

2275. 

Hellbach, J. Ch., his works on gardening, page 1127. 
A. D. 1809. 

Helleborus, polyan. polyg. and ranunculacea;, H. 

peren. Eur. of common culture. 
Hellenia, monan. monogyn. and scitamineee, a S. 

peren. E. Ind. a marsh plant. 
Hellenius, Charles Nicolas, his works on gardening, 

page 1130. A. D. 1789. 
Helmingham Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Helminthia, syngen. polyg. super, and cichora9effi, 

a H. an. Brit, of easy culture. 
Helonias, hexan. trig, and melanthaceae, H. peren. 

N. Amer. which delight in peat soil and a moist 

situation, and are increased by dividing at the 

root or by seeds. 
Hemerocallis, day-lily, hexan. monog. and heme> 

rocallideas, H. peren. Eur. and China, of easy 

culture in any soil. 
Hemidesmus, pentan. dig. and asclepiadese, a S. tr. 

Ceylon, which delights in light, rich soil, and 

cuttings root readily under a hand-glass in a pot 

of sand plunged in a little heat. 
Hemionitis, cryptog. Alices and fiiiceee, S. peren. 

W. Ind. ferns of common culture. 
Hemlock, — see Conium. 
Hemp, — see Cannabis. 
Hemp-nettle, — see Galeopsia. 
Hempel, G. E. L., his work on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1816. 

Hempsted Bury, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 



1196 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Henbane, — see Hyoscyamus. 
Henbit, lamium amplekicaiile. 
Hendon Place, Middlesex, 7520. 
Henham, a seat in Suffolk 7552. 
Henllys, a seat in Caermarthenshire, 7614. 
Hejine, Sm. D. L., his work on gardening, pagell2-i. 
A. D. 1771. 

Henriquez, Jean, his work on gardening, page 1119. 
A. D. 1781. 

Henfxner, Peter, a travelling tutor to a German 
nobleman, who came to England during the reign 
of Elizabeth, and afterwards published his travels, 
323. 

Hepatica, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceEe, H. pe- 
ren. Eur. which prefer loam and peat, and are in- 
creased by dividing at the root. The roots are 
very liable to be eaten by snails. 

Heppe, John Christopher, his work on gardening, 
page 1125. A. D. 178-. 

Heracleum, cow-parsnep, pentan. dig. and umbel- 
lifereffi, H. peren. Eur. of common culture. 

Herb-gardens, or physic-gardens, and their manage- 
ment, 7360. 

Herb-gardens in Midlothian, 7618. 

Herb-robert, geranium robertianum. 

Herbag:e, first used by man as food, 27. 

Herbalists, — see Physic gardeners. 

Herder, a German divine and philosopher who died 
in the beginning of the present century, page 1. 
(See Siipp. Encyc. Brit.) 

Herefordshire, gardens and residences of, 7568. 

Heresbachius, Conradiis, his work on gardening, 
pape \V22. A. D. 1578. 

Henssant, Louis Antoine Prosper, his work on 
gardening, page 1118. A. D. 1771. 

Heritiera, looking-glass plant, monoec. monad, and 
malpighiacece, a S. tr. E. Ind. which grows in 
loam and peat, and rip>ened cuttings root readily 
in a pot of sand plunged under a hand-glass in a 
moist heat. 

Hermannia, monadel. pentan. and tiliacese, G. tr. 
C. B S. which grow in rich, light soil, and are in- 
creased by cuttings in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Hermas, polygam. monoec. and umbellifereas, G. 
peren. C. B. S. which thrive in any light soil, 
and are increased by cuttings or dividing at the 
root. 

Hermes, J. Gf., his works on gardening, page 1126. 
A. D. 1801. 

Herminium, gynan. monan. and orchidejc, a H. 
peren. Eng. which thrives best in loam, peat, and 
chalk in pots, and is increased by seeds. 

Hernandia, jack in a box, monoec. trian. and lauri- 
nese, a S. tr. W. Ind. wliich grows freely in sandy 
loam and peat, and ripened cuttings not deprived 
of their leaves root readily under a hand-glass in 
sand. 

Hern i aria, rupture-wort, pentan. dig. and amaran- 
th a ceee, a G. and H. tr. Eur. which grow in rich, 
light soil, and are increased by cuttings under a 
hand-glass; and H. peren. which grow best in 
loam and peat, and are increased by cuttings or 
dividing ;it the root. 

Heron's bill, — see Erodium. 

Herpestis, didyn. angios. and scrophularineas, a S. 
peren. and H. peren. India and Amer. which 
thrive well in rich, light soil, and root freely from 
cuttings. 

Herrera, Gabriello Alphonso, his work on garden- 
ing, page 1131. A. D. 1.557. 

Hertfordshire, gardens and residences of, 7543. 

Herve, Mons. V'ill^, his works on gardening, page 
1120. A. D. 1790. 

Hesperantha, evening flower, trian. monog. and 
irideffi, G. peren. C. B. S. bulbs which may be 
treated as ixiee. 

Hesperis, rocket, tetrad, siliq. and crucifereas, H. 
peren. bien. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Hesperis matronalis, 6456. 

Hesse, Henry, his work on gardening, page 1123. 
A. D. 1713. 

Heterospermum, syngen. polyg. super, and corj-m- 
bifereee, a H. an. New Spain, of common cul- 
ture. 

Heuchera, pentan. dig. and saxifrageee, H. peren. 

N. Amer. which thrive in rich, light soil, and are 

increased by dividing at the root. 
Heveringham Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Hewel Grange, a seat in Worcestershire, 7565. 
Heynea, decan. monog. and meliaceee, a S. tr. Na- 

paul, which thrives in loam and peat. 
Heythorpe, a seat in Oxfordshire, 7559. 



Hibbertia, polyan. trig, and magnoliacese, G. tr. 
Austral, which grow in sandy loam and peat, and 
cuttings root readily in the same soil under a 
hand-glass. 

Hibiscus, monadel. polyan. and malvacese, S. tr. 
and G. peren. India, C. B. S. which thrive in rich, 
light soil, and ripen seeds, or root readily by cut- 
tings in sand under a hand-glass. 

Hibiscus esculentus, 6035. 

Hiebern, John Christian, his work on gardening, 
page 1123. A. D. 1671. 

Hieracium, hawkweed, syngen. polyg. aequal. and 
cichoraceffi, H. peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. of 
the easiest culture. 

High Clere, a scat in Hampshire, 7594. 

High Meadow, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Highnam Court, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Hill, Daniel, M. D., his work on vegetable physio- 
logy, page 1112. A. D. 18C0. 

Hildt, J. Adf , his works on gardening, page 1126. 
A. D. 1798. 

Hill, Sir John, M. D., his work on gardening, page 
1104 A. D. 1755. 

Hill, Hyll, or Hyle, Thomas, his work on garden- 
ing, page 1099. A. D. 1574. 

Hill Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Hill Park, Kent, 7537. 

Hilla, hexan. monog. and rubiaceaj, S. tr. W. Ind. 

which grow in sandy loam and peat, and cuttings 

root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Hillington Park, Norfolk, 7554. 
Hillsborough Castle, a seat in Down, 7683. 
Hiltenhrandt, Ant., his work on gardening, page 

1124. A. D. 1777. 
Hinuber, gardens of, in Hanover, 204. 
Hip, the common name of the fruit of the rose 

tribe. 

Hippia, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbiferefe, S. 
an. and G. tr. C. B. S. and E. Ind.' which grow 
freely in any light soil, and cuttings planted under 
a hand-glass will root readily. 

Hippocratea, trian. monog. and aceres, a S. 
tr. S. Amer. whicli grows well in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root under a hand-glass in 
sand. 

Hippocrepis, horseshoe. vetch, diadel. decan. and 
leguminosCcB, a G. tr. Minorca, which thrives in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root readily under a 
hand-glass ; and a H. peren. and an. Europe, of 
common culture. 

Hippomane, manchineel, monoec. monadel. and eu- 
phorbiaceffi, a S. tr. \V. Ind. a powerful poison 
which grows in sandy loam, and cuttings root in 
sand under a hand-glass. 

HippophfE, sea buckthorn, dicec. tetran. and elsag- 
nes, H. tr. Eur. and Amer. which grow in any 
common soil, and are increased by layers or cutr 
tings of the roots. 

Plippuris, mare's tail, dian. monog. and naiades, a 
H. peren. Brit, an aquatic. 

Hirschfeldt, or Hirchfield, Ch. Caius L., his works 
on gardening, page 1124. A. D. 1773. 

Hirtella, pentan. monog. and rosaceae, a S. tr. W. 
Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Hitt, Thomas, his works on gardening, page 1105. 
A. D. 1755. 

Hoe, different sorts of, 1310. 

Hoeing, 1873. 

Hoffmanseggia, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a 
S. tr. Chih ; which grows in loam and peat, and 
cuttings, not too ripe, will root under a hand-glass 
in sand. 

Hofland, Mrs , her writings on gardening, page 1114. 
A. D. 1820. 

Hofwyl, an agricultural .establishment near Berne 

in Switzerland, 1034. 
Hog-plum, — see Spondias. 
Ilog-weed, — see Boerhaavia. 

Holcus, soft grass, polyg. monoec. and gramines, H. 
peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. grasses of easy 
culture. 

Holimhead, Ralph, an English historian, who died 

about 1580, 420. 
Holkham Hall, Norfolk, 7555. 
Holland House, Middlesex, 7522. 
Holly, — see Ilex. 
Hollyhock, — see Althsea. 
Holm Lacey, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Holme, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 
Holosteum, tetran. trig, and caryophyllese, a H. an 

Eng. of common culture. 
Hohvood House, Kent, 7557. 



' GEN 



Iloeg, Mr. Thomas, his works on gardening, page 

1114. A. D. 1812. 
Hollymount, a seat in Mayo, 7673. 
Hoimskioldia, didyn. angios. and verbenaceffi, a S. 

tr. India ; which grows in loam and peat, and 

cuttings will root in sand under a hand-glass in 

heat. 

Holt {holiz, Sax.), a small wood or grove. 
Holyrood Palace and Park, Edinburgh, 7317. and 
7618. 

Ho7ne, Henry, Lord Kaimes, his works on garden- 
ing, page 1106. A. D. 1762. 

Honesty, — see Lunaria. 

Honewbrt, — see Sison. 

Honey-dew, 881. 

Honey-berry, melicocca bijuga. 

Honey-flower, — see Melianthus. 

Honey-suckle, — see Lonicera. 

Honey-wort, — see Cerinthe. 

Hooded milfoil, — see Utricularia. 

Hooker, W. J., LL.D. F.R.S., &c. a distinguished 
botanist, professor of botany ill the college of 
Glasgow, and author of several works, 387. 

Hooker, William, Esq., F.L.S.,an eminent horticul- 
tural artist, his works on gardening, page 1113. 
A. D. 1811. 

Hop, — see Humulus. 

Hop-hornbeam, — see Ostrya. 

Hope, Thomas, Esq., his writings on gardening, 
page 1114. A. D. 1820. 

Hope-end, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 

Hopea, polyad. polyan. and€benace£e, a G. tr. Caro- 
lina, which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root easily under a hand-glass. 

Hopeton House, Linlithgowshire, 7632. 

Hordeum, barley, trian. digyn. and gramineas, H. 
peren. and an. Eur. As. and Amer. grasses of easy 
culture. 

Horn-poppy, — see Chelidonium. 
Hornbeam, — see Carpinus. 

Hornemannia, didyn. angios. and scrophularinete, a 

S. an. E. Ind. of common culture. 
Hornwort, — see Ceratophyllum. 
Horse-chestnut, — see ^sculus. 
Horse-radish, — see Cochlearia Armoracia. 
Horse-radish tree, hyperanthera moringa. 
Horse-shoe vetch, — see Hippocrepis. 
Horse-tail, — see Equisetum. 
Horse-thistle, — see Onicus. 
Hort. Kew., Alton's Hortus Kewensis. 
Hort. Trans., Transactions of the London horticul- 

tural society. 
Horticultural architect, 7402. ' 
Horticultural artist, 7403. 
Horticultural catalogue, 3468. 

Horticultural productions which a first-rate garden 
is calculated to afford monthly, 6038. 

Horticultural Society of London, 7707 ; of Edin- 
burgh, 7707 ; of Winchester, 7594 ; of Leeds, 7581 ; 
of Glasgow, 7629 ; of Perth, 7636 ; of Dublin, 392. 

Horticultural Society of London, its transactions, 
page 1114. A. D. 1815 ; garden, 7508. 

Hortus pinguis, or the fat, the cook's or kitchen- 
garden. 

Hosack, David, M. D. F. R. S. L. S. &c. his works 

on gardening, page 1131. A. D. 1811. 
Hot-bed frames, bottomless boxes with glass covers, 

for placing over hot-beds, 1532. 
Hosta, didyn. angios. and verbenaceffi, a S. tr. S. 

Amer. which may be treated as hoimskioldia. 
Hot-beds, beds of vegetable matter in a state of 

active fermentation sufficient to heat a layer of 

earth placed over them ; their formation, 1975. 
Hot-beds, their culture and management, — see 

Cucumis. 

Hot-house, a garden structure, with the roof 
principally of glass for the habitation of plants, 

' 1583; principles of design in, 1591; how to 
obtain heat 1592; light, air, soil, and water, 
1593. to 1601. 

Hot-house furnace and flues, iron doors, lime-kilns, 
size of hot-house fire-places, flues, can-flue, em- 
brasure-flue, cast-iron flue, size of flues, erection, 
power of flues, dampers or valves, chimney-tops, 
1648. to 1664. 

Hot-house roofs, different methods of glazing, 1626 ; 
common sash-glazing, 1627 ; with a leaden lap, 
improved lead lap, copper lap, fragment-glazing, 
■ rhomboidal-glazing, perforated shield-glazing, 
entire shield-glazing, curvilinear lap, reversed 
curvilinear lap, ridge and furrow, and anomalous 
surfaces, 1628, to 1637 ; putty and paint, 1638. and 
1639. 



L INDEX. 1197 



Hot-houses, contrivances for procuring water, wind, 
and air, 1688. 

Hot-houses, details of the construction of their 
roofs, 1602 ; fixed roofs, moveable roofs, roofs 
partaking of both characters, materials of fixed 
roofs, of moveable roofs, upr.ghts, and objections 
to metallic roofs, 1603. to 1625. 

Hot-houses, their pits, stages, shelves, doors, paths, 
&c. 1681 ; materials of the path, pits for tan or 
earth, beds and borders, shelves, stages, 1682. to 
1687. 

Hot-houses, their steam boilers and tubes, 1665; 
steam-boilers, of cast-iron, of wrought-iron, of cop- 
per, steam-pipes, hot water pipes, 1666. to 1670. 

Hot-houses, their trellises, 1671 ; back wall trellis, 
middle trellis, front or roof trellis, fixed rafter 
trellis, moveable rafter trellis, secondary trellis, 
cross trellis, 1672. to 1679: Hot-house entrance, 
1680. 

Hot-houses, their walls and sheds, 1640 ; front wall, 
holes for vine-stems, back wall, back shed, 1641. 
to 1647. 

Hot-houses of the Chinese, specimen of, 480. 

Hot-houses used in floriculture, 6161. 

Hot^houses used in floriculture, their culture and 

management, 6202. 
Hot-houses used in horticulture, 2644. 
Hot-houses used in horticulture, their culture and 

management, 2696. 
Hottentot cherry, cassine maurocenia. 
Hottonia, water-violet, pentan. monog. and primu> 

laceffi, a H. peren. an aquatic. 
Houghton Hall, Norfolk, 7555 
Hound's tongue, — see Cynoglossum. 
House, or mansion, situations best adapted for, 

7249 ; aspect, 7253. 
House, with carriage entrance, as a residence, 2029 j 

with covered entrance, 2030 ; house and conser- 

vatory, 2031 ; house and flower-garden, 2032 ; 

house and French parterre, 2033 ; house and front 

garden, 2034. 
Houseleek, — see Sempervivum. 
Houstonia, tetran. monog. and rubiaees, H. peren. 

N. Amer. rock-work plants, which do well in peat 

soil in pots. 

Hovea, diadel. decan. and leguminoseffi, G. tr. Aus- 
tral, which thrive in loam and peat, and young 
cuttings may be struck under a bell-glass in sand. 

Hovenia, pentan. monog. and rhajnneas, a G. tr. 
Japan ; which grow in loam and peat, and ripened 
cuttings root readily under a hand-glass in sand. 

Howick, a seat in Northumberland, 7587. 

Howsham, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Hoya, pentan. dig. and asclepiadcce, a S, tr. Asia ; 
a climber of easy culture. 

Huber, Cand. his works on gardening, page 1125, 
A. D. 1792. 

Huber, Francis, a natural philosopher of Geneva, 

who wrote on bees, 1738. 
Hubner, K. Jos., his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1801. 

Huernia, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeee, D. S. tr. 
C.B.S. succulents, which grow in brick and lime- 
rubbish, little watered ; cuttings root easily. 

Huehes, William, his works on gardening, page 
1101. A. D. 1665. 

Huish, Robert, author and translator of some plays 
and novels, and of a work on bees, of which in- 
sect he is an enthusiastic admirer and cultivator, 
1738. 

Hull botanic garden, 7581. 

Humble plant, mimosa pudica. 

Humea, syngen. polyg. sequal. and corymbifereee, a 

G. bien. N. S. W. of easy culture. 
Humulus lupulus, hop, dicec. pentan. and urticeas, 

a H. peren. Brit. — see 3945. 
Hundeshagen, C , his work on gardening, page 

1127. A. D. 1819. 
Hunter, Alexander, M. D. F.R.S. ; his works on 

gardening, page 1108. A. D. 1770. 
Huntingdonshire, gardens and residences of, 7550. 
Hura, sandbox-tree, moncec. monad, and euphor- 

biaceae, S. tr. S. Amer. which grow freely in light 

loam, and large ripened cuttings root in sand 

under a hand-glass in heat. 
Hurstbourne Park, Hampshire, 7594. 
Hutchinsia, tetrad, silic. and cruciferea2, H. peren. 

and a bien. Eur. rock-work plants which grow in 

loam and peat, and root freely. 
Huthem, , his works on gardening, page 1129. 

A. D.'1817. 
Huts, as garden buildings, 1781. 
Hvacinth, — see Hyacinthus. 



1198 GENERAL 

Hyaclnthus, hyacinth, hexan, monog. and aspho- 
dele£e, H. peren. Eur. bulbs of easy culture. 

Hyacinthus orientalis, 6222. 

Hyasna poison, hyjenanche globosa. 

HyEenanche, dicec. dodec. and hydrocharides, a G. 
tr. C.B.S. which grows in loam and peat, and may 
be increased by cuttings in sand under a bell-glass. 

Hyde Hall, Cheshire, 7590. 

Hyde Park, London, 7517. 

Hydrangea, decan. dig. and saxifrageee, F. and H. 

tr. Amer. and China, which grow in common soil, 

and ripened cuttings root readily. 
Hydrangea hortensis, 6'176. 

Hydrastis, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceae, a H. 
peren. Canada, which grows best in light soil in 
rather a moist situation, and is increased by tubers 
of the roots. 

Hvdrocharis, frog-bit, dicec. enneaudr. and hydro- 
charideae, a H. peren. Brit, an aquatic. 

Hydrocotyle, pennywort, pentan. dig. and umbelli- 
fereee, G. and H peren. Eur. Amer. and C. B. S. 
which grow best in peat soil kept moist, and are 
increased by division at the root. 

Hydrolea, pentand. digyn. and convolvulaceee, a 
S. tr. S. Amer. whicli thrives best in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Hydropeltis, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceae, N. 

Amer. a peren, will grow in loamy soil, or may 

be treated as an aquatic. 
Hydrophyllum, water-leaf, pentan. monog. and bo- 

raginG£e, H. peren. Amer. which grow freely in 

any light, rich soil, and are increased by suckers 

from the roots. 
Hydrophyllum virginicum, or Shawanese salad, 

4331. 

Hydrostatic press, its use in gardening, 1470. 

Hygrometer, its use in gardening, 1285. 

Hymenaea, decan. monog. and leguminosea?, S. tr. 
E. Ind. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in 
heat. 

Hymenopappus, syngen. polyg. aequal. and corym- 
biferese, a F. bien. Louisiana, of common culture. 

Hymenophyllum, filmy leaf, cryptog. Alices and 
filicete, a H. peren. Eng. a fern, which grows best 
in small pots in loam and peat. 

Hyoscyamus, henbane, pentan. monog. and sola- 
neffi, G. tr. peren. and bien. Eur. which grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root without being 
covered by a glass ; the H. peren. and an. are of 
common culture. 

Hyoseris, swine's succory, syngen. polyg. £equal. and 
cichoraceae, H. peren. and an. Eur, of common 
culture. 

Hypecoum, tetran. dig. and papaveracese, a H. bien. 

and an. Eur. of easy culture. 
Hyperanthera, horseradish-tree, decan. monog. and 

leguminoseae, a S. tr. E. Ind. which thrives in 

light loam, and cuttings root under a hand-glass 

in sand. 

Hypericum, St. John's wort, polyad. polyan. and 
hypericinese, G tr. Eur. and Amer. which grow 
in loam and peat, and young cuttings root freely 
under a bell-glass in sand ; the H. tr. and peren. 
are of easy culture ; some are increased by cut- 
tings under a hand-glass, and others by division 
at the root. 

Hypochteris, cat's ear, syngen. polyg. aqual. and 
Icichoraceffi, H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Hypochaeris masculata, 4295. 

Hypoxis, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, G. and 
H. peren. Amer. andC. B.S. which grow, in loam 
and peat, and are increased by offsets from the 
roots. 

Hyptis, didyn. gymnos. and labiateas, S. and G. tr. 
bien. and peren. Ind. and America, which grow 
freely in rich, light soil, and the hot-house sorts 
are increased by cuttings under a hand-glass in 
heat. 

Hyssop, — see Hyssopus. 

Hyssopus, didyn. gymnos. and labiates?, H. tr. and 
- peren. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy culture. 
Hyssopus ofBcinalis, the common hyssop, 432J. 



I. 

Iberis, candy-tuft, tetrad, silic. and cruciferese, G, 
and F. tr. Eur. which grow in common soil, and 
are readily propagated by cuttings ; and H. peren, 
^nd an. of easy culture. 



INDEX. 



Ice-house, its construction, 1728; managen>ent, 

1730. 

Ice-plant, mesembryanthemum crystallinum. 

Ichneumon manifestator, 2261. and 3593. 

Ichnocarpus, pentan. monog. and apocynefe, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which thrives well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Ickworth Park, Suffolk, 7552. 

Icolmkill, in the Hebrides, early improvements 
there, 352. 

Ildephonso, near Madrid, gardens of, 294. 

Ilex, holly, tetran. tetrag. and rhamnefe, G. and F. 
tr. Eur. and Amer. which thrive well in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings root freely under a 
hand-glass in sand ; the commoner H. tr. are in- 
creased by seed, and the finer sorts by grafting 
and budding. 

Ilex aquifolium, the common holly, 7115. 

Illecebrum, knot-grass, pentan. monog. andamaran- 
thaceae, a H peren. Eng. a rock plant which 
grows best in pots in light soil, and seeds ripen . 
abundantly. 

IlUcium, aniseeil-tree, polyan. polyg. and magno- 
liaceae, a F. tr. Florida, which grows tjest in light 
loam, and is increased by layers, or ripened cut- 
tings in sand under a hand-glass. 

Impatiens, balsam, pentan. monog. and geraniaces, 
H. bien. S. an, Ind. Amer. Eng. of easy culture in 
rich soil. 

Impatiens balsamina, the garden balsam, 6479. 
Imperatoria, mastenvort, pentan. dig. and umbcUU 

fereae, a H. peren. Scot, of easy culture. 
Implements, origin of, 31. 

Implements of gardening, 1294; tools, 1295; the 
pick, lever, spade, fork, shovel, dibber, forester's 
dibber, planter's hack, planter's trowel, planter's 
pick-axe, garden trowel, transplanter, draw-hoe, 
prong-hoe, thrust-hoe, rake, drill-rake, hoe-rake, 
turfing-iron, turf-raser, turf-beetle, turf-scraper, 
wire-broom, dock-weetler, besom, wire-besom, 
implement cleaner, 1296. to 1323. 

Implements used in gardening, their further im. 
provement, 1847. 

Improvement, forming a plan of, 7364. 

Improvement, rural, — see Landscape-gardening. 

Improver, rural, — see Landscape-gardener, 

Inarching, 2007. 

Indian corn, — see Zea. 

Indian cress, — see Tropeolum. 

Indian cucumber, medeola virginica. 

Indian fig, cactus opuntia. 

Indian millet, sorghum vulgare. 

Indian shot, canna indica. 

Indigo, — see Indigofera. 

Indigofera, indigo, diadel. decan. and leguminosesB, 
S. tr. bien. and an. Ind. and C. B. S. which grow 
in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily in 
young wood under a bell-glass in sand ; the H. 
an. are of easy culture. 

Inga, polyg. nionoec. and leguminoseae, S. tr. E. and 
\V. Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand in bottom heat under a heiir 
glass. 

Ingatestone Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Ingestree Hall, Staffordshire, 7570. 

Inocarpus, Otaheite chestnut, decan. monog. and 
sapotcce, a S. tr. South Sea Islands, which thrives 
well in loam and peat, and ripened cuttings will 
root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Inoculating, 2050. 

Inscriptions, their use and abuse in gardening, 
1845. 

Insects, the common injurious sorts described, 2220 ; 
subduing them, 2276. The insects which infest 
particular plants, and the mode of extirpation, &c. 
are treated of in giving the culture and manage- 
ment of the plant, or the department in the gar- 
den to which it belongs. 

Instruments of action, 1361 ; garden-line, ground- 
measurer, timber-measurer, ground-compasses, 
borning-piece, levels, adjusting horizontal level, 
spirit-level, staff, straight-edge, stake, 1362. to 
1374. — see Machines and Utensils. 

Instruments of designation, 1.375; designators or 
naming instruments, common tally 'ytailler, Fr. 
to cut) or number-stick, botanic tally, written 
name-stick, permanent label, temporary label, 
1376. to 1388. 

Instruments of operation, 1325 ; common garden- 
knife, common pruning-knife, folding pruning- 
knife, grafting-knife, buddingrknife, asparagusr 
knife, grafting-chisel, forest-chisel, pruning-bill, 
jforest-axe, pruning-sa\y. averruticatpr (averruncg^ 



GENERAL INDEX. 



119d 



to cut or prune), French pruning-sliears, hedge- 
shears, verge-shears, turf-shears, scythe, garden- 
scarifiers or bark-scalers, moss-scraper, blunt 
knife, forest barking-irons, garden-hammer, 
garden-pincers, weeding -pincers, grape-gatl;erer, 
peach-gatherer, pear-gatherer, berry-gatherer, 
api)le-gatherer, seed and cherry gatherer, climb- 
ing-spur, 1326. to 1359. 
Inula, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferes, S. 
an. and H. peren. Eur. and Asia, of the easiest 
culture. 

Inula crithmifolia, samphire, 4281. 

Inula helenium, elecampane, 4240. 

Inverary Castle, Argyleshire, 7649. 

Invercauld House, Aberdeenshire, 7659. 

Invergordon Castle, Ross-shire, 7647. 

Inverness nursery, 7648. 

Inverness-shire, gardens of, 7648. 

lonidium, pentan. monog. and violaccce, a G. peren. 
S. Amer. which grows freely in loam and peat, 
and young cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass. 

Ipomoea, pentan. monog. and convolvulacese, S. 
peren. bien. and an. Ind. Amer. Eur. twiners 
which grow in rich light soil, and young cuttings 
root freely in sand under a hand glass ; the H. 
peren. and an. are of the easiest culture. 

Iporaopsis, pentan. mcnog. and polemoniace2e, a 
G. bien, and H. an. N. Amer. of common culture. 

Ireland, gardens and residences of, 7651. 

Iresine, dicec. pentan. and amaranthaces, a F. 
peren. Amer. which grows in loam and peat, and 
is increased by dividing at the root. 

Iris, trian. monog. and irides, G. and H peren. 
Eur. As. and Amer. of easy culture m loam and 
peat, and increased by dividing at the root ; some 
of them may be treated as marsh plants. 

Iris persica, tuberosa, susiana, xiphium, &c. 6304. 

iron-tree, siderodendrum triflorum.^ 

Iroii-wort, — see Sideritis. 

Irrigation, 1098. 

Isatis, woad, tetrad, silic. and crucifereffl, a H. 

peren. bien. and an Eur. of easy culture. 
JschEemumj polyg. monct>c. and gramineee, a S. 

peren. and an. E. Ind. grasses of common culture. 
Isle of Anglesea, gardens and residences of, 7603. 
Isle of Man, as to gardening, 7588. 
Isles of Jersey and CTuern.sey, as to gardening, 7598. 
Isnardia, tetran. monog. and onagrarese, a H. an. 

Eur. of common culture. 
Isochilus, gynan. monan. and orchidese, S. peren. 

W. Ind. parasites which maybe treated as aerides, 

epidendrum, &c. 
Isoetis, quillwort, cryptog. hydrop. and marsiliaceie, 

a H. peren. Brit, a marsh plant. 
Isola bella, gardens of, 82. 

Isolepis, trian. monog. and cyperacese, a H. peren. 

' and an. Brit, grasses of common culture. 

Isopogon, tetran. monog. and proteaceffi, G. tr. N. 
HoJl. which grow in loam, peat, and sand well 
drained, and ripened cuttmgs root under a hand- 
glass, care being had to take off the glass occasion- 
ally to avoid damps. 

Isopyrum, polyan. polyg. and ranunculacese, a H. 
peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Italian books on gardening, 7694. 

Itea, pentan. monog. and saxifrages, a H. tr. N. 
Amer. which thrives well in sandy loam, and is 
increased by layers. 

Iva, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbiferece, a S. 
an. and H. tr. Amer. both of common culture. 

Ivy, — see Hedera. 

Jxia, trian. monog. and irideas, G. peren. C. B. S. 
bulbs which grow best in sandy loam and decayed 
leaves or peat, and require no water after they 
have done flowering : they will do well in beds in 
the open garden treated in the same manner as 
ranunculus, guarding against frost and heavy 
rains, — see 6319. 

Ixodia, syngen. polyg. aqual. and corymbifereffi, a 
G. tr. N. Holl. which thrives best in sandy loam 
and peat, and young cuttings root freely in the 
same kind of soil under a hand-glass. 

Jxora, tetran. m^onog. and rubiaces, S. tr. E. Ind. 
and China, of great beauty, which thrive well in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand 
under a hand-glass. 



.T. 

.J. or Jus., A. L. de Jussieu's Genera Plantarum, 
Jac. aust., N. J. Jacquin Flora Austriaca. 



Jac. ic, Icones plantarum rariorum. Edita k N. J. 
Jacquin. 

Jac. vind., N. J. Jacquin hortus botanicus vindobon- 

ensis. 

Jaca-tree, artocarpus intcgrifolia. 

Jack-in-a-box, hernandia sonora. 

Jacksonia, decan. monog. and leguminoseze, G. tr. 
N. Holl. which grow in sandy loam and peat, and 
young cuttings may be rooted in sand under a 
bell-glass, or ripened ones under a hand-glass. 

Jacob, R., his works on gardening, page 1125. A.D. 
1797. 

Jacobsdahl, a seat in Sweden, 248. 

Jacques, of Rastadt, a German gardener, employed 
by the Grand Seignior at Constantinoi)le, 308. 

Jacquinia, pentan. monog. and sapoteee, S. tr. W, 
Ind. which thrive well in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings (with care) will root in sand under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Jalap, ipomoea jalapa. 

Jamaica, botanic garden of, 499. 

Jambolifera, octan. monog. and onagrare^, a S. tr. 
which grows in light loam, and cuttings root 
freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Japan, gardens of, 464. 

Jardin electoral de Saxe, at "Warsaw, 281. 

Jardin des Plantes, at Paris, described, 7331. 

Jasione, sheep's scabious, pentan. monog. and cam- 
panulacecB, a H. peren. and an. Eur. which do 
well in common soil, or in pots (being rather ten- 
der of frost), and are increased by cuttings or 
seeds. 

Jasmine, r— see Jasminum, 

Jasminum, dian. monog. and jasminete, S. and G. 
tr. E. Ind. and C. B. S. chiefly climbers, which 
grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily 
in sand under a hand-glass in heat ; the H. tr 
Eur. grow in common soil, and are increased by 
layers or cuttings. 

Jatropha, physic-nut, monoec. monad, and euphor- 
biacese, S. tr. peren. and an. W. Ind. which thrive 
well in loamy soil, and cuttings root best stuck in 
the tan in a good heat. 

Jaume, St. Hillaire, his works on gardening, page 
1121. A.D. 1805. 

Jaunex, I P , his works on gardening, 

page 1122. A.D. 1816. 

Jeffersonia, octan. monog. and papaveraceas, a H. 
peren. N. Amer. which grows best in peat, and is 
increased by seeds or dividing at the root. 

Jet d'eau, spout or fountain of water, 1829. 

Jock's lodge nursery, Midlothian, 7618. 

Johnson, John B., his work on the vine, page 1131. 
A.D. 179-. 

Johnston, Thomas, M.D., his work on gardening,- 

page 1099. A.D. 1629. 
Jones, Henry, his poem on gardening, page 1107. 

A.D. 1766. 

Jonesia, heptan. monog. and , a S. tr. 

K Ind. which grows freely in light loam, and 
large cuttings root well in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Jordens, J. H., his works on gardening, page 1126. 
A.D. 1798. 

Jour. R. Inst., Journal of the Royal Institution of 

Great Britain. 
Journeymen gardeners, 7380. 

Juglans, walnut, monoec. polyan. and terebintaceaa, 

H. tr. N. Amer. increased by layers or seeds, and 

some kindly budding and inarching. 
Juglans regia, the common walnut; as a fruit-tree, 

4733 ; as a forest-tree, 7096. 
Julien, A- , his work on gardening, page 1122. 

A.D. 1816. 

Juncus, rush, hexan. monog. and juncese, H. peren. 
Brit, grasses, generally marsh plants. 

Juniperus, dioec. monad, and coniferese, F. and H. 
tr. Eur. and Amer. the more delicate species pre- 
fer peat and soil ; but the cedars and savin grow 
in common garden earth : they are best managed 
by seeds, but cuttings may be rooted under a 
hand-glass. 

Jussieu, Bernard de, his works on gardening, naee 

1117. A.D. 1735. ^ 
Jussieuia, decan. monog. and onagrarese, S. and G. 

peren. and bien. Ind. and Amer. chiefly aquatics 

of common culture. 
Justice, James, Esq. F. R. S , his works on garden. 

ing, Y'age 1104. A.D. 1754. 
Justicia, dian. monog. and acanthacece, S. and G. 

tr. and an. Ind. and Amer. of easy culture in 

loam and peat, and cuttings root freely in heat 

under a hand-glass. 



1200 



GENERAL INDEX. 



K. 

Kjempferia, galangale, dian. monog. and scitami- 
nesB, S. peren. E. Ind. which grow freely in rich 
light soil, requiring little water when not in a 
growing state, and are increased by dividing at 
the root. 

Kalb, Bhd. H., his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A.D. 1810. 
Kaleidoscope of Dr. Bradley, 6109. 
Kalimar, gardens of, in the East Indies, 462. 
Kalm, Peter, his works on gardening, page 1130. 

A.D. 1754. 

Kalmia, decan. monog. and rhodoraceae, H. tr. N. 
Amer. under shrubs which require peat soil, or 
very sandy loam, and are increased by layers or 
seeds. 

Kanguru vine, cissus antarctica. 

Kannegiesser, F.A., his works on gardening, page 

1126. A.D. 1805. 

Kecht, J. C, his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A.D. 1813. 
Keddleston, a seat in Derbyshire, 7575. 
Kelham House, in Nottinghamshire, 2838. 
Kellermann, , his works on gardening, page 

1127. A.D. 1813. 

Kelmarsh, a seat in Northamptonshire, 7580. 

Kemf)ton Park, Middlesex, 7520. 

Kenmore House, in Kerry, 7670. 

Keninore Lodge, in Kerry, 7670. 

Kennedia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, G. tr. 

Austral, climbers which grow in sandy loam and 

peat, and young cuttings root freely in sand under 

a bell-glass in a little bottom heat. 
Kent, gardens and residences of, 7554. 
Kent, William, a painter and architect, and the 

father of landscape-gardening, 342. 
Kensington gardens, Middlesex, 7523. 
Kensington nursery, 7518. 
Kentchurch, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Kerim Khan, gardens of, 460. 
Kernel fruits, 4368. 

Kerry, gardens and residences of, 7670. 

Kew gardens, Surrey, 7529. 

Kewley's alarum thermometer, 1489. 

Kewley's automaton gardener, 1490. 

Keyser, G. Ad., his work on gardening, page 1126. 
A.D. 1800. 

Kidneybean, — see Phaseolus. 

Kiggelaria, dioec. decan. and euphorbiaceae, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grows freely in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root under a hand-glass in sand. 

Kiladoon, a seat in Kildare, 7657. 

Kildare, gardens and residences of, 7657. 

Kilkenny, gardens of, 7656. 

Killarney, lakes of, in Kerry, 7670. 

Killcowly, a seat in Tipperary, 7677. 

Kilmarnock nursery, Ayrshire, 7627. 

Kilmore, a seat in Tipperary, 7677. 

Kilravock, a seat in Inverness-shire, 7648. 

Kimberley Hall, Norfolk, 7554. 

Kincardineshire, as to gardening, 7638. 

King's County, gardens of, 7658. 

King's Weston, a seat in Gloucestershire, 7563. 

Kingsland nursery, 7518. 

Kingston Hall, Dorsetshire, 7598. 

Kingswood Lodge, Surrey, 7527. 

Kinrosshire, gardens of, 7634. 

Kiosque, as an ornamental building, 1807. 

Kircaldy nursery, Fifeshire, 7635. 

Kirchner, J. F., his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1796. 

Kirkleatham Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Kirklington Hall, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Kitaibelia, monad, polyan. and malvacese, a H. pe- 
ren. Hungary, of easy culture, and very prolific 
in seeds. 

Kitchen-garden, formation of, 2381. 

Kitchen-garden, its culture and management, 2545 ; 
culture of the soil, manure, recent dung, crop- 
ping, rotation of crops, thinning, thinning stone- 
fruits, pruning and training, summer pruning, 
winter pruning,, pruning edgings and hedges, 
weeding, stirring the soil, protecting, supporting, 
shading, earthing, watering, vermin, incidents, 
accidents, gathering and preserving vegetables, 
and sending them to a distance, proportioning 
the quantity of vegetables to be grown, miscella- 
neous operations of culture and management, 
2546. to 2612. 

Kitchen-garden, situation, exposure and aspect. 



extent, shelter and shade, soil, water, form, walls, 

aspect of walls, height of walls, construction of 
walls, materials of walls, open railings instead of 
walls, hot or fiued walls, cross-walls, of coloring 
walls, ring-fence, placing the culinary hot-houses, 
and melonry, situation of the melonry, laying out 
the area, laying out the compartments, making the 
borders, laying out the walks, laying out the slips, 
laying out a nursery, or reserve department, 
season for forming a garden, distribution of fruit- 
trees, selection and arrangement of wall trees, 
sorts, selection, and arrangement of espaliers and 
dwarf standards, of dwarf standards, distances, 
of tall standard fruit-trees, fruit-shrubs, choice of 
^plants, record of sorts, 2382. to 2526. 
Kleinhofla, dodec. monog. and malvaceas, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which grows in light loamy soil, and cut- 
tings are not difficult to root under a hand-glass 
in sand. 

Kleinia, syngen. polyg. sequal. and corymbifereae, a 

S. an. N. Amer. of easy culture. 
Klupful, J Alb., his works on gardening, page 

1125. A. D. 1783. 
Kn. Pom., Knoop's Pomologie. 
Knappia, trian. dig. and graminea2, a H. an. Wales, 

a grass of common culture. 
Knapweed, centaurea scabiosa. 
Knautia, tetran. m.onog. and dipsacea?, a H. bien, 

and an. Levant, of common culture. 
Knawel, — see Scleranthus. 
Knife, garden, different sorts of, 1326. 
Knight, Joseph. F. H. S., his works on gardening, 

page 1113. A. D. 1809. 
Knight, T. A. Esq. F. R. S., Pres. Hort. Soc, his 

essays on pine-apple culture, 2924 ; result, 2935 ; 

his works on gardening, page 1111. A. D. 1795. 
Knocklofty, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 
Knoop, Jean Herman, his works on gardening, page 

1129. A. D. 1771. 
Knorr. thes.. Thesaurus Rei herbarias, hortensisque 

universalis. Apud Ge. Wolfg. Knorrii Heeredes. 
Knot-grass, illecebrum verticillatum. 
Knowie, a seat in Kent, 7538. 
Knowlsley, a seat in Lancashire, 7589. 
Knowltonia, polyan. polyg. and rananculaceas, G. 

peren. C. B. S. which grow freely in loam peat, and 

are increased by dividing at the root or by seeds. 
Kob, J. And., his work on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1786. 

Kochia, pentan. dig. and chenopodeae, H. an. 

Amer. and Siberia, of common culture. 
Kceleria, trian. dig. and gramineae, H. peren. and 

bien. Eur. grasses of easy culture. 
Koelreuteria, octan. monog. and sapindeje, a H. tr. 

China, which grows well in common soil, and is 

propagated by layers or cuttings of the roots. 
Koenigia, tetran. trig, and polygoneee, a H. an. 

Ireland, of easy culture. 
Kormond, a seat in Hungary, 206. 
Kraft, John, his works on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1792. 

Kraft, John Charles, his works on gardening, page 

1121. A. D. 1810. 
Krause, Ch. L., his work on gardening, page 1124. 

A D. 1773. 

Krause, L. Ph., his work on gardening, page 1123. 
A. D. 1738. 

Krigia, syng. polyg. sequalis, and cichoraceas, a H. 

an. N. Amer. of common culture. 
Kulzean, or Culzean Castle, Ayrshire, 7627. 
Kyle, Thomas, his work on gardening, page 1109. 

A. D. 1785. 

Kyllinga, trian. monog. and cyperaceae, S. peren. 

India, grasses of common culture. 
Kyre Wyre, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 



L. 

Labels for naming plants, different kinds of, 1385. 

Laborde, Alexander, Count de, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1121. A.D. 181-. 

Laborer's cottage and garden, what they ought to 
be, 7294. 

Laburnum, — see Cytisus. 

Labyrinth, a convoluted, plicated, or otherwise 
rendered intricate, disposition of walks, separated 
by hedges or shrubbery, sometimes called a wil- 
derness, 7264. 

Lachenalia, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, G. 
peren. C. B. S. bulbs, which thrive well in loam 
and peat, or loam and leaf-mould, and are in- 
creased by offsets or seeds. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1201 



Laclinaaa, octaii. nionog. and thymeleffi, G. tr. 
C. B. S. v.'liich thrive only in sandy peat, and 
young cuttings root freely in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Lacken, a seat in Westmeath, 76G2. 

Lactuca, lettuce, syngen. polyg. a;qual. and cieho- 
racese, II. bien. an. Eur. and'Amer. of easy culture. 

Lactuca sativa, the garden lettuce, 3964'. 

Ladder, different sorts of, used in gardening, 1456. 

Lady-fern, nephrodium thelypteris. 

Lady's mantle, — see Alchemilla. 

Lady's slipper, — see Cypripedium. 

Lady's smock, — see Cardamine. 

Lagasca, syngen. polyg. asqual. and corymbifcrea;, a 
S. an. S. Amer. of common culture. 

Lagerstroemia, polyan. monog. and salicaria;, S. tr. 
E. Ind. which thrive in peat loam ; L. reginje is 
a splendid plant, which requires a great deal of 
heat and little water in winter j all the species 
increase by cuttings in sand under a bell-glass. 

Lagetta, octan. dig. and thymeleffi, a S. tr. Jamaica, 
which grows in loam and peat, and ripened cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Lagoecia, cumin, pentan. monog. and umbellifereffl, 
a H. an. Levant, of common culture. 

Lagunea, monad, polyan. and malvaceffi, a S. an. 
Bourbon, of common culture. 

Lagurus, harestail-grass, trian. dig. and graminess, 
a H. an. Guernsey, a grass of the easiest culture. 

Lair, V. A., his works on gardening, page 1121. 
A. D. 181-. 

Lakes, how to form or improve in garden scenery, 
7217. 

Lalos, J , his work on gardening, page 1122. 

A. D. 1818. 

Lam. ill. Tableau Encyclopddique et M^thodique 
des trois K^gnes de la Nature. Botanique ; Illus- 
trations des Genres. Par M. de Lamarck. 

Lambertia, tetran. monog. and proteaceas, a G. tr. 
N. S. \V. which thrives well in loam and peat, 
but is easily injured by over watering ; ripened 
cuttings taken oS'at a joint, just before they begin 
to grow afresh, will root in sand under a hand- 
glass avoiding damp. 

Lambrmj, M , his works on gardening, page 

1122. A. D. 1817. 

Lamb's lettuce, — see Fedia. 

Lambton Hall, Durham, 7585. 

Lamium, archangel, didyn. gymnos. and labiateas, 
H. peren. S. Eur. of easy culture. 

Lamoignon-Malsherbes, C. G., his works on garden- 
ing, page 1119. A. D. 1780. 

Lanaria, hexan. monog. and hcemodoracese, a G. 
peren. C. B. S. which thrives in loam and peat, 
and is increased by dividing at the root. 

Lanarkshire, gardens and residences of, 7629. 

Lancashire, gardens and residences of, 7588. 

Lancashire asphodel, — see Narthecium. 

Landbaumeister, 236. 

Landridge, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 

Landscape-gardener, or layer out of grounds, 7404. 

Landscape-gardening, 7156; principles of, 7159; 
materials of, 7195 ; practitioners of, 7362. 

Lang, or L. Pom., Langley's Pomona, — see Langley. 

Langford, T , his work on gardening, page 1101. 

A. D. 1681. 

Langford Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Langham Cottage, Dumfrieshire, 7624. 

Langley, Batty, his works on gardening, page 1103. 
A. D. 1728. 

Langport, Somersetshire, pine and grape stove, 
at, 2654. 

Lantana, didyn. angios. and verbenacese, S. tr. and 

an. Ind. and Amer. of easy culture in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand-glass 

in sand or mould. 
Lapeyrousia, trian. monog. and iridea, G. peren. 

C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated as ixia. 
Lappago, trian. dig. and graminea;, a H. an. S. 

Eur. a grass of common culture. 
Lappula, pentan. monog. and boragineze, H. bien. 

and an. Amer. of common culture. 
Lapsana, nipplewort, syngen. polj'g. and cichora- 

ceae, H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 
Larch, — see Pinus. 
Larkspur, — see Delphinium. 
Larochea, pentan. pentag. and sempervivese, G. tr. 

C. B. S. succulents which may be treated as cras- 

sula. 

Larochefocauld-Liancourt, his works on gardening, 

page 1120. A. D. 18—. 
Laserpitium, laserwort, pentan. dig. and umbellife- 

reas, H. peren. and bien. Eur. of common culture. 

4 



Laserwort, — see Laserpitium. 
Lasiocampa, or egger-moth, Phalacna quercus, L. 
7075. 

Lasiopetalum, pentan. monog. and storculiaceaa, G. 
tr. N. Koll. which grow freely in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Lasteyrie, Comte de, his works on gardening, pa^e 

1121. A. D. 181-. 
Lataille-des-Essarts, his writings on gardening, 

page 1118. A. D. 1766. 
Latania, Bourbon palm, polyg. monoec. and palmea^, 

a S. tr. Mauritius, which grows in light soil, and 

requires a strong moist heat, 
Latapie, , his work on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1771. 

Lathrsea, toothwort, didyn. angios. and oroban- 
chea3, a H. peren. Brit, of common culture in 
loam and peat. 

Lathyrus, diadel. decan. and leguminoses, H. pe- 
ren. and an Eur. of easy culture, — see 4310. 

Latimers, a seat in Buckinghamshire, 7547. 

Laurel, — see Laurus. 

Laureiiburg, Peter, his works on gardening, nage 

1123. A. D. 1631 
Laurentinum, a villa of Pliny, 39. 
Laurestine, — see Viburnum. 

Laurop, P. , his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1810. 

Laurophyllus, polyg. dioec. and , a G. 

tr. C. B. S. which grow.s in loam and peat, and. 
ripened cuttings root under a hand glass in sand. 

Laurus, laurel, cnnean. monog. and laurincze, S. 
and G. tr. E. Ind. and Ami.')-, which thrive in 
loam and peat, and ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass, taking care to avoid damps. 

Laurus persca, the alligator-pear, 1521. 

Lavandula, lavender, didyn. gymnos. and labiateas, 
G. F. and H. tr. peren. and an. Eur. and Ind. 
which succeed well in light rich soil, and ripened 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Lavandula spica, the common lavender, 4183. 

Lavatera, nionadel. polyan. and inalvacea3, G. tr. 
Eur. and Afr. which thrive well in loam and peat, 
or any light rich soil, and ripened cuttings root in 
sand under a hand-glass ; most of the species 
ripen seeds : the H. bien. and an. are of easy cul- 
ture^ 

Lavender, — see Lavandula. 

Lavender cotton, — see Santolina. 

Lavenia, syngen. polyg. asqual. and corymbiferea;, 

a H. an. E. Ind. of common culture. 
Lariviere, de, et M— — Dumoulin, their work on 

gardening, page 1118. A. D. 1769. 
Lawn in gardening, a surface of turf or grasses, 

kept short by frequent mowing, and generally 

situated near the house. 
Lawranny Hall, in Pembrokeshire, 7609. 
Lawrence, Anthony, his work on gardening, page 

1101. A. D. 1677. - 
Laivrence, John, M. A., his Vvforks on gardening, 

page 1102. A. D. 1714. 
-Lawson, William, his work on gardening, page 1199. 

A. D. 1597. 

Lawsonia, octan, monog. and silicaris, S. tr. Ind. 
which thrive in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
readily in sand under a hand-glass 

Layer out of grounds, — see Landscape-gardener. 

Layers, to propagate by, 1993, 1994. 

Laying in by the heels, or earthing in {sJieucMng, 
Scotch), a temporary earthing or planting, to pre- 
vent plants taken up for removal or replanting, 
from suffering between the operations. 

Laying out grounds, — see Landscape-gardening. 

La Zenki (or the bath, Polish), a roval residence at 
Warsaw, 281. 

Leadwort, — see Plumbago. 

Leasowes, Shropshire, 7569. 

Leatherwood, dirca palustris. 

Leaves, their importance in vegetation, 739. to 752. 
et seq. ; more especially to bulbs, 6501 ; to cut- 
tings, 2065. 

Leaves, to ferment for hot-beds, 2860. 

Lebeckia, diadel. decan and leguminoscEe, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which thrive well in sandy loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root freely in sand under 
a bell-glass. 

Lebret, M Isidore, ,his works on gardening, 

page 1122. A.D. 1821. 

Lechea, trian. trig, and caryophylleee, H. peren. 
Canada, which grow best in small pots of loam 
and peat, and are increased by cuttings under ^ 

' hand-glass. 
H 



1202 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Ledstone Lodge, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Ledum, decan. monog. and rhodoraces, H. tr. 
Eur. and Amer. dwarf shrubs, which grow in 
peat or sandy loam, and are increased by layers or 
seeds. 

Lee, a seat in Kent, 7537. 
Lee Castle, Worcestershire, 7566. 
Lee-Chee, dimocarpus litchi. 
Lee, James, filius, of the Vineyard, 7518. 
Lee, James, his works on gardening, page 1105. 
A.D. 1760. 

Leea, pentan. monog. and meleacea, S. tr. and 
peren. E. Ind, which grow freely in light loam, 
and cuttings soon strike root under a hand-glass 
in heat 

Leek, — see Allium. 

Leersia, trian. dig. and gramines, a H. peren. and 

an. Amer. grasses of common culture. 
Leeswold, a seat in Fhntshire, 7606. 
Lefebre, E A , his writings on gardening, 

page 1120. A.D. 1801. 
Leguminous culinary plants, 3596. 
Leguminous wild plants, which are edible, 4509. 
Lehmann, John Christian, his works on gardening, 

page 1123. A.D. 1750. 
Leibitxer, J , his work on gardening, page 1125, 

A.D. 1794. 

Leibnitz, his principle of a sufficient reason applic- 
able to gardening as an art of design, 7164. 

Leicestershire, gardens and residences of, 7573. 

Leith walk nursery, 7618. 

Leitrim, county of, as to gardening, 7674. 

Leland, John, an English antiquary, who died 
about 1552. 

Lemaistre, M , curate of Joinville, a French 

author on gardening, page 1117. A.D. 1719. 
Lemarie, Fr , a French author on gardening, 

page 1116. A.D. 17—. 
Lemna, duck-weed, monoec. dian. and naiadese, H. 

an. Brit, aquatics which may be treated as calli- 

triche. 

Lemoine, Leonor, his work on gardening, pase 1120. 

A.D. 1801. 
Lemon, — see Citrus. 
Lemon-grass, andropogon schoenanthus. 
Lentil, ervum lens, 

Leonharde, F. G. and J. H. Seidel, their work on 

gardening, page 1126. A.D. 1803. 
Leonotis, lion's tail, didyn. gymnos. and labiateaa, 

G. tr. and a S. an. E. Ind. and C. B. S. which 
thrive in light rich soil, and young cuttings root 
readily under a hand-glass. 

Leontice, hexan. monog. and berberideaj, a G. and 

H. peren. Levant ; which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and may be increased by dividing at the 
root or by seeds. 

Leontodon, dandelion, syngen. polyg. cBqual. and 
cichoracese, H. peren. Eur. of easy culture. 

Leontodon taraxacum, the common dandelion, 
3994. 

Leonurus, motherwort, didyn. gymnos. and labia- 
tete, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of common 
culture. 

Leopard's bane, — see Doronicum. 

Lepechinia, didyn. gymnos. and labiateEe, a H. 
peren. Mexico; of common culture. 

Lepidium, pepperwort, tetrad, silic. and cruciferete, 
G. and F. tr. and H. an. Eur. and Amer. of com- 
mon culture. 

Leptanthus, trian. monog. and , a H. 

peren. N. Amer. which thrives in peat soil, and 
is increased by offsets from the roots. 

Leptospermum, icosan. monog. and myrteacese, G. 
tr. Austral, which grow well in an equal mixture 
of sandy loam and peat, and young cuttings root 
readily in sand under a bell-glass. 

Lcschevin, C , his works on gardening, page 

1121. A.D. 1805. 

Lessertia, diadel. decan. and leguminoses, a G. 
peren. and an. C. B. S. which grow in sandy loam 
and peat, and are readily increased by cuttings or 
seeds. 

Lestibudesia, pentan. monog. and amaranthaces, a 
S. tr. and bien. W. Ind. which grows freely in 
light, rich soil, and is readily increased by cuttings 
or seeds. 

Lettsom, John Coakley, M.D. F.R.S. his work on 
gardening, page 1109. A.D. 1781. 

Lettuce, 3964. — see Lactuca. 

Leucadendron, dioec. tetran. and proteaceje, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow best in light loam mixed 
with more than one third sand, the pots well 
drained, and over watering avoided. Ripened 



cuttings, taken off early in spring at a Joint, root 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Leucas, didyn. gymnos. and labiateas, S. an. Ind. of 

common culture. 
Leucojum, snow-flake, hexan. monog. and amaryl- 

hdese, H. peren. Eur. bulbs of easy culture. 
Leucopogon, pentan. monog. and epacrideag, G. tr. 

N. S. W. which thrive in sandy loam and peat, 

and the tops of the very young' shoots taken off 

for cuttings, wiU root in sand under a bell-glass. 
Leucospermum, tetran. monog. and proteaceee, G, 

tr. which may be treated as leucadendron. 
Level, different kinds of, 1368. 
Levelling, 1931. 

Lever, its form and uses in gardening, 1297. 
Lewisham nursery, 7536. 

Leysera, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferes, 
G. tr. C. B. S. which grow freely in peat soil with 
a little loam, and cuttings planted under a hand- 
glass in the same kind of soil will root freely. 

Lexay de Maniesia, his works on gardening, page 
1119. A.D. 1787. 

Liancourt, Count de, his palace and gardens, 161. 

Liatris, syngen. polyg. iequal. and corymbiferes, a 

G. and H. peren. K\ Amer. which grow freely in 
rich, light soil, and may be increased by seed or 
dividing at the root. 

Licorice, — see Glycyrrhiza. 

Licuala, hexan. monog. and palitieEe, a S. tr. E. Ind. 

a palm which maybe treated like latonia. 
Lidbeckia, syngen. polyg. super, and corjmbiferecB, 

a G. tr. C. B. S. which grows freely in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root readily in the same soil 

under a hand-glass. 
Liehault, Stephen, his works on gardening, page 

1115. A.D. 1570. 

Ligi-r, Louis, a French author on gardening, page 

1116. A.D. 1703. 

Light, the importance of, to vegetables, 1594. 
Lightfootia, bell-flower, pentan. monog. and cam- 

panulacese, a G. tr. and peren. Eur. and C. B. S. 

which grow freely in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root readily in the same soil under a hand-glass. 
Ligktolcr, J , his works on gardening, page 1107. 

A.D. 1766. 

Ligne, Prince de, a German soldier and statesman 
of great personal acquirements, and a favorite at 
most of the courts of Europe. He published 
fourteen volumes on miscellaneous subjects, 
among which are various remarks on gardens, 
and especially on those of England. He flourished 
during the reigns of Frederick the Great of 
Prussia and Catharine II. of Russia, and died at 
an advanced age at Vienna, in 1814. 

Lignum vitaj tree, guaiacum officinale. 

Ligusticum, lovage, pentan. dig. and umbellifereEe, 

H. peren. Eur. and a bien. of common culture. 
Lrtgustrum, privet, dian. monog. and oleines, H. tr. 

Brit, and China, of the easiest culture, and in- 
creased by cuttings or seeds. 
Lilac, — see Syringa. 

LiUum, lily, hexan. monog. and liliacece, H. peren. 

Eur. Amer. and India, bulbs, highly esteemed as 

border-flowers, 6311. 
Lily, — see Lilium. 
Lily of the valley, — see Convallaria. 
Lily-pink, aphyllanthes monospeliensis. 
Lily-thorn, — see Catesbaea. 

Limax, the slug, and helix, the snail, to destroy, 

2275. 

Lime-tree, — see TiUa. 
Limerick, gardens of, 7668. 

Limeum, heptan. dig. and portulaces, a G. peren. 

which grows in sandy loam and peat, and cuttings 

under a hand-glass root readily. 
Limnetis, trian. monog. and gramineae, H. peren. 

Eur. and Amer. grasses of easy culture. 
Limodorum, gynan. raonan. and orchideae, a G. 

peren. Japan, which thrives best in loam and 

peat and some bits of sticks and stones mixed with 

it, and is increased by dividing at the root. 
Limonia, decan. monog. and auranteae, S. tr. India 

and China, which grow in loam and peat with 

some rotten dung ; ripened cuttings root in sand 

under a hand-glass in a moist heat. 
Limosella, mudwort, didyn. angios. and scrophu- 

larineee, a H. an. Brit a marsh plant of easy 

culture. 

Linaria, to.id-flax, didyn. angios. and scrophula- 
rineffi, F. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and Amer. 
which grow freely in common soil, and the 
more delicate Ivinds root readily by cuttings 
under -i hand-glass. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



120S 



Lincolnshire, gardens and residences of, 7577. 

I.indegaard, Peter, CM. H.S., his tract on forcing 
grapes, page 1113. A.D. 1811. 

Lindernia, didyn. angios. and scrophularinese, a H. 
an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Linlithgowshire, gardens of, 7(532. 

Linnasa, didyn, angios. and caprifoleae, a H. peren. 
Scot, a trailing plant, which answers well for pots 
or rockwork ; it grows in loam and peat, and 
strikes freely by cuttings. 

Linnajan Society, their published transactions as to 
gardening, page 1110. A. D. 1791. 

LinncBus, Sir Charles Von, &c. his works on garden- 
ing, page 1130. A. D. 1739. 

Linociera, dian. monog. and oleina?, a S. tr. W. Ind. 
which grows freely in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root under a hand-glass in sand. 

Linum, flax, pentan. pentag. and caryophylle£e, G. 
tr. Eur. and India, which grow in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily in the same kind of soil 
under a hand-glass j the H. peren. and an. are of 
easy culture. 

Lion's tail, — see Leonotis. 

Liparia, diadel. decan. and leguminoses, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which thrive well in loam and peat with 
little water; and very young tops root in sand 
under a bell-glass. 

Liquid manures, 1162. 

Liquidamber, moncec. polyan. and amentaces, H. 
tr. Amer. which grow in any common soil, and 
are increased by layers. 

Liriodendron, tulip-tree, polyan. polyg. and magno- 
liaceffi, a H. tr. N. Amer. which grows in loamy 
soil, and generally increased by seeds brought 
from America, which are two years of coming up. 

Lisianthus, pentan. monog. and gentianeae, S. tr. 
and a peren. W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, cuttings root readily in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Lismore, a seat in the county of Waterford, 7665. 
Li$sander, Andrevv, his works on gardening, page 

1130. A. D. 1768. 
Lissige, a seat in Down, 7683. 

Listera, gynan. monan. and orchideas, H. peren. 
Brit, which grow best in a light soil and shady 
situation, even under trees, and is increased by 
dividing at the roots. 

Lists and other ties used for fastening wall and espa- 
lier trees, 1515 and 1519. 

Literature of gardening, 7685. 

Lithospermum, gromwell, pentan. monog. and bora- 
ginese, H. peren. and an. Eur. of common cul- 
ture. 

Little Aston, StafFordshire, 7570. 

Littorella, shore weed, monoec. tetran. and planta- 
gincEe, a H. peren. Brit. an. aquatic. 

Livermere, a seat in Suffolk, 7552. 

Liverpool botanic garden, 7588. 

Lizard's tail, saururus cernuus. 

Llanarth House, Monmouthshire, 7567. 

Llanerth House, Denbighshire, 7605. 

Llangard Castle, Merionethshire, 7612. 

Llantryddyd, a seat in Glamorganshire, 7608. 

Llanwern House, Monmouthshire, 7567. 

Loader, an anchorsmith and anabaptist, at Green- 
wich, who had a fine garden and conservatory 
in Evelyn's time, 227. 

Leaving, — see Heading. 

Lob. ic, Plantarum sen Stirpium icones. 

Lobelia cardinalis, fulgens, and splendens, 6459. 

Lobelia, pentan. monog. and campanulacea), G. tr. 
and F. peren. Amer. C B.S. and Eur. which thrive 
in any light rich soil, and cuttings root freely ; 
the H. peren. are of easy culture, chiefly as marsh 
plants ; L. dortmanna is an aquatic. 

Locke, John, his writings on gardening, page 1107. 
A. D. 1766. 

Locke Park, Derbyshire, 7574. 

Lockington Hall, Leicestershire, 7573. 

Locust-tree of America, robinia pseudacacia, 7105. 

Locust-tree of the bible, ceratonia siliqua. 

Loddigcs, Conrad, and Sons, their works on garden- 
ing, page 1108. A. D. 1777. 

Loddigesia, diadel. decan. and leguminosea, a G. 
, tr. C:.B. S. which grows best in equal parts of sandy 
loam and peat, and young cuttings root freely in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Lceflingia, trian. monog. and caryophylleee, a H. an. 
Spain, of common culture. 

Logania, pentan. monog. and gentianeae, G. tr. 
Austral, which thrive best in sandy loam and 
peat, and ripened buttings may be struck in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

4 



Logwood, hfematoxylon campechianum. 

Loisleur de Longchamps, M. D. 56; his works on 

gardening, page 1121. A. D. 181-. 
Looking-glass plant, heritiera littoralis. 
Lolium, darnel, trian. dig. and graminese, H. peren. 

and an Eur. grasses of easy culture. 
Lomatia, tetran. monog. and proteacccs, G. tr. 

N. S. W. which grow in sandy loam and peat, and 

ripened cuttings, taken oft' at a joint, root in sand 

under a hand-glass. 
Lombardy, gardening of, 82. 

Lomonosou), his poem on gardening, page 1131. 
A. D. 18. 

Lonchitis, cryptog. filices and filiceas, a S. peren. 

W. Ind. a fern of the usual culture. 
London and Wise, their works on gardening, pa^e 

1101. A. D. 1699. 
London Horticultural Society, their transactions, 

page 1114. A. D. 1815. 
Longford, county of, as to gardening, 7663. 
Longleac, a seat in Wiltshire, 7597. 
Long worth, Herefordshire, 7568. 
Lonicera, honeysuckle, pentan. monog. and caprifo- 

leae, F. and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. climbers and 

twiners, ivhich grow in any common soil, and 

cuttings taken oft" in autumn, and planted in a 

sheltered situation, root readily. 
Loose-strife, — see Lysimachia. 
Lop (from loop, Dut. or laub, Teut. a leaf), the leaf 

or tops of trees. To lop, i. e, to cut off' the tops of 

trees. 

Lopezia, dian. monog. and onagrarcce, S. bien. and 

a H. an. Mex. of common culture. 
Lophiola, hexan. monog. and hsemodoracejE, a H. 

peren. N. Amer. which thrives best in a peat soil 

in moist situations, and is increased by dividing at 

the root. 
Loquat-apple, — see Mespilus 

Lo7-entz, J B , his works on gardening 

page 1121. A. D. 1803. 
Lotus, birdsfoot-trefoil, diadel. decan. and legu- 

minoseee, G. tr. Eur. and Asia, which grow freely 

in any light rich soil, and young cuttings root 

freely under a hand-glass. 
Loudon Castle, Ayrshire, 7627. 
Loudon, John Claudius, his works on gardening, 

page 1112. A. D. 1803. 
Loureira, dioec. monad, and , a S. tr. 

Mex. which grows in loam and peat, and may 

be increased by cuttings in sand under a bell-glass 

in heat. 

Lousewort, — see Pedicularis. 

Lovage, ligusticum levisticum. 

Love-apple, — see Solanum. 

Love-grass, poa megastachya. 

Lowth, county of, as to gardening, 7664. 

Ludei; Fr. Hra. H., his works on gardening, page 

1124. A. D. 1768. ^ 
Ludwigia. tetran. monog. and onagrarea, a H. 

peren. and an. N. .Amer. marsh plants. 
Luffa, monoec. pentan. and cucurbitace£B, a F. an 

Indian, of common culture, 1664. 
Lullworth Castle, Dorsetshire, 7598. 
Lunaria, honesty, tetradynamia siliculosa, and 

crucifereffi, a H. peren. and bien. Germ, of com- 
mon culture. 
Lundie House, a seat in Perthshire, 7636. 
Lundric, , a French author on gardening. 

page 1115. A. D. 1580. 
Lungwort, — see Pulmonaria. 
Lupin, , his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1820. 

Lupinaster, bastard -lupine, diadel decan. and legu- 
ininoseaa, a H. peren. Siber. which thrives in light 
loam, and is increased by seeds. 

Lupine, — see Lupinus. 

Lupinus, lupine, diadel. decan. and leguminoscce, 
H. and F. peren. and an. E»ir. which thrive in 
light rich soil, and are increased by seeds, or the 
peren. sorts by pieces of the roots. 

Lurgan, a seat in the county of Leitrim, 7674, 

Lurgan House, a seat in Armagh, 7682. 

Luscombe House, Devonshire, 7600. 

Luton Hoo, Bedfordshire, 7549. 

Luxembourg, gardens of, at Paris, 161. 

Luzula, hexan. monog. and juncetc, H. peren. Eur. 
grasses of easy culture. 

Lychnidea, — see Phlox. 

Lychnis, decan. pentag. and caryophyllefe, G. and 
H. peren. and an. Eur. and China, of common 
culture in peat and loam. 

Lycium, box-thorn, pentan. monog. and solaneae, S. 
and G. tr. Eur. Afr. and Asia, which thrive in 
H 2 



1204 GENERAL INDEX. 



loam and peat, and ripened cuttings in sand under 
a hand-glass, root freely, 
Lycopodium, club-moss, cryptog. stachyopterides, 
and lycopodinea;, H. peren. Eur. and Amer. bog- 
plants, which grow in peat soil in pots placed 
in pans of watet, and are increased by sucker;i or 
cuttings. 

Lycopsis, wild bugloss, pentan. monog. and bora- 
ginese, H. peren. and an. Eur. of common culture. 

Lycopus, water-hojehound, dian. monog. and labia- 
te£e, H. peren. Brit, of common culture. 

Lydney Park, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Lygeum, trian. monog. and graminete, a H. peren. 
Spain, a grass of easy culture. 

Lygodium, snake's tongue, cryptog. scliismatop- 
terides and filiceffi, H. peren. E. Ind. a climbing 
fern, which grows freely in loam and peat, and 
may be increased by dividing at the root or by 
seed. 

Lyme Hall, Cheshire, 7590. 

Li/o)i,^eteY^ his writings on gardening, page 1114. 

Lysimachia, loose-strife, pentan. monog. and pri- 
mulaceae, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and Amer. 
most of them marsh plants, some trailers or 
creepers, and all of easy culture. 

Lysinema, pentan. monog. and epacridefe, a G. tr. 
N. S. W. which grows best in rough sandy peat, 
and cuttings not too young, planted in sand under 
a bell-glass, root freely. 

Lythrum, dodec. monog. and salicarese, a G. peren. 
and an. Brit, and H. peren. and an. Brit, and 
Amer. which grows freely in any rich, light soil, 
and are increased by cuttings under a hand-glass, 
by division at the root, or by seeds. 



M. 

Maba, dicec. hexan. and dioscorese, a S. tr. E. Ind. 
which thrives well in loam and peat, and ripened 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass 

MnbiL , his tract on gardening, page 1129. A. D. 

1817. 

Macaw-tree, cocos fusiformis. 

Macdonald, Alexander, a fictitious name adoi)ted 
by Dr. Dickson as the compiler of a gardener's 
dictionary, page 1 1 13. A. D. 1805. 

Machines, meteorological, Sikes's registering ther- 
mometer, Kewley' s alarum thermometer, auto- 
maton gardener, 14-88. to 1490. 

Machines of defence, 1473; scare, bird-trap, bird- 
net, mouse-trap, garden rat-trap, mole-trap, oar- 
wig and beetle-trap, wasp and fly-trap, man-trap, 
humane man-trap, spring-gun, concealed alarum, 
common gun or musket (from mangon, a warlike 
machine, used before the invention of fire-arms, 
or musquet, from mousqiiet, Fr.), fumigating bel- 
lows, various means, 1474. to 1486. 

Machines of labor, 1440 ; common wheelbarrow, 
separating barrow, new ground-work barrow, 
water-barrow, hand-barrow, barrow watering- 
engine, curved barrel-engine, self-acting green- 
house engine, roller, carriage water-barrel, water- 
ing-roller, hand-spokes, common garden- ladder, 
rule-jointed ladder, step-ladder, wheel-platform, 
boat-scythe, grindstone, tree-transplanter, German 
devil, hydrostatic press, seed-separater, 1441. to 
1471. 

Machines used in gardening, 1439. 

M'Leisk, Alexander, a landscape-gardener, resid- 
ent in Dublin, 7652. 

APMakon, B., his work on gardening, page 1131. 
A. D. 1806. 

M'Phail, James, his works on gardening, page 

1110. A. D. 1794 
Macrocnemum, pentag. monog. and rubiacese, a S. 

tr. Jamaica, which grows in loam and peat, and 

strikes by cuttings fr£ely. 
Macropodium, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferese, a H. 

peren. Siber. which grows in light, rich loam, and 

cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 
Madder, — see Rubia. 

Maddock, James, his work on gardening, page 1110. 
A. D. 1792. 

Madia, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, a 

H. an Chili, of common culture. 
Madingley, a seat in Cambridgeshire, 7551. 
Madresfield, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 
Madwort, — see Alyssum. 
Maeslough, a seat iii Radnorshire, 7610. 
Magnolia, polyan. and magnoliacese, G. and H. tr. 

Amer. which require a peat soil and a moist situ- . 



1 ation, and are generally increased by layers or 
seeds ; the leaves are large, and must not be cut 
off when the layers are removed from the stools ; 
— see 6562. 

Mahernia, pentan. pentag. and tiliacese, G. tr. 
C.B.S. which grow in loam and peat, and young 
cuttings taken off at a joint, and planted under a 
hand-glass, in the same soil, readily strike root. 

Mahogany, — see Swietenia. 

Maiden-hair, — see Ceterach. 

Maiden-nut, justicia malabarica. 

Maiden-plum, — see Comocladia. 

Malabar night-shade, — see Basella. 

Malachra, monadel. poiyan. and malvacese, a S. an, 
W. Ind. of common culture. 

Malaxis, gynan. monan. and orchidese, H. peren. 
Eng. and N. Amer. which grow in sandy loam 
and peat, and are increased by offsets from the 
root or seeds. 

Malay apple, eugcnia malaccensis, 5986. 

Malcomia, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferese, H. an. Eur. 
and Afr. of common culture. 

Mallet, Robert Xavier, his works on gardening, 
page 1119. A. D. 1775. 

Mallow, — see Malva. 

Malo, Charles, his work on gardening, page 1122. 
A. D. 1815. 

Malope, monad, polyan. and malvaceae, a G. bien, 
and an. Barb, of easy culture. 

Malpighia, Barbadoes cherry, decan. trig, and mal- 
pighiaces, S. tr. VV. Ind. and Amer. which grow 
in light loam, and ripened cuttings are not diffi- 
cult to root under a hand-glass in sand. 

Malta, gardening of, 506. 

Malva, mallow, monad, polyan. and malvaceae, G.- 
tr. Eur. As. Afr. and H. an. and bien. Eur. which 
succeed in any light, rich soil, and cuttings root 
freely under a'bell-glass in sand, or under a hand- 
glass in any light soil ; seeds are also frequently 
produced. 

Mammea, mammee-tree, polyan. monog. and gut- 
tiferefe. a S. tr. S. Amer. the mammee-tree, 5198. 

Mammee-tree, — see Mammea. 

Management of gardens, science of, 2334. 

Manchincel, hippomane manchinella. 

Mandirola, , his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1763 

Mandragora, mandrake, pentand. monog. and sola- 
nese, a H. peren. Levant, which succeeds well in 
light, sandy soil, and is increased by seeds. 

Mandrake, — see Mandragora. 

Manettia, tetran. monog. and rubiacece, a S. tr. 
Guiana, which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Mangifera, mango-tree, pentan. monog. and tere- 
bintacese, a S. tr. E. Ind. 5996. 

Mango-tree, mangifera indica, 5996. 

Mangosteen, — see Garcinia. 

Manisuris, polyg. mono?c. and gramineje, S. an. E, 
Ind. of common culture. 

Mansion and offices, their situation, 7249. 

Mansion-residences, 7271 ; their management, 7443. 

Manulea, didyn. angios. and scrophularineae, G. tr. 
bien. and an. C.B S. which grow in light, rich soil, 
and are readily increased by young cuttings 
planted under a hand-glass. 

Manures, 1111 ; of animal and vegetable origin, 
1112 ; theory of their operations, from land plants, 
sea weeds, dry straw, inert peaty matter, wood- 
ashes, animal substances, bones, blood, urine, 
night-soil, dung of fowls, of cattle, preservation 
of manures of animal and vegetable origin, 1113. 
to 1162. 

Manures of mineral origin, 1163; theory of their . 
operation, different species, lime, chalk, ifiarl, 
magnesia, gypsum, application of mineral ma- 
nures, 1164. to 1194. 

Maple-tree, — see Acer. 

Maranta, arrow-root, monan. monog. and canned, 

S. peren. S. Amer. which thrive in light, rich soil, 

and are increased by dividing at the root. 
Marattia, cryptog. poropterides and filiccce, a S, 

peren Jamaica, a fern of common culture. 
Marble Hill, a seat in Middlesex,7520. 
Marble Hill Cottage, Middlesex, 7520. 
Marcgravia, polyan. monog. and capparidea?, a S. 

tr. W. Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and 

roots by cuttings. 
Marchant^ , a French author on gardening, 

page 1116. A. D. 1701. 
Mareclial, Pierre Sylvain, his works on gardening, 

page 1119. A. D. 1780. 
Mare's tail, — see Hippuris. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1-205 



Marginal banks of water, how to improve, 722. 

Margram, a seat in Glamorganshire, 7608. 

Marica, trian. monog. and irides, S. tr. and 
peren. S. Amer. which grow in loam and peat, 
and are increased by offsets from the roots or 
seeds. 

Marigold, — see Calendula. 

Marino, a seat near Dublin, 7653. 

Mariscus, trian. monog. and cyperacese, S. peren. 

E. Ind. mosses of easy culture. • 
Marjoram, — see Origanum. 
Market for seeds in Mark Lane, 1515. 

Market for vegetables and fruits in Co vent- garden, 

&c. 7514. 
Market-gardeners, 7396. 

Market-gardens, their formation, 7358 ; manage- 
ment, 7457 ; market-gardens of Middlesex, 7517. 

Marl./iam, Gervase, his work on gardening, page 
V''99. A. D. 16-:S. 

rJan ubium, horehound, didyn. gymnos. and labia- 
tes, e^. tr. and H. peren. Eur. and C. B. S. of 
easy culture. 

Marsden Park, Essex, 7541. 

Marsden Park, Surrey, 7528. 

Marsdenia, pentan. dig. and asclepiades, a S. and 
G. tr. Syria and N. S. W. w hich thrive in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Marsh-mallow, — see Althasa. 

Marsh-marigold, — see Caltha, 

Marsh plants, table of, 6522. 

I^Iarshal, Humphrey, his work on gardening, page 

1131. A. D. 1785. 
Marshal, the Rev. Charles, his work on gardening, 

page 1112. A. D. 1796. 
Marshal, William, Esq., his works on gardening, 

page 1109. A. D. 1785. 
Marshallia, syiigen. poh g. iEqual. and corymbiferecE, 

F. jieren. Carol, wiiich grow in loam and peat, 
and are increased by cuttings or dividing at the 
root. 

2ilarsham, Robert, Esq. F.R.S., his writings on gar- 
dening, page 1105. A. D. 1758. 
Marta^on, — see Fritillaria. 
Martagon, — see Liliura. 

Martini, Thomas, B.D. F.R.S. his works on gar- 
dening, page 1110. A. D. 1792. 
Martynia, didyn. angios. and bignoniacete, S. and 

G. an. Amer. of easy culture. 
Marvel of Peru, — see Mirabilis. 
Mary-le-bonne nursery, 7518. 

Mason, George, Esq., his work on gardening, page 

1107. A. D. 1768. 
Mason, the Rev. William, the poet, bis works on 

gardening, page 1108. A. D. 1772. 
Masse, Jean, his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1766. 

Masson de Blamont, C. F. P., his work on garden- 
ing, page 1119. A. D. 1790. 

Massonia, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, G. peren. 
C. B. S. bulbs which grow in loam and peat with 
little water, and are increased by offsets or by 
seeds. 

Masterwort, — see Imperatoria. 
Mastick-tree, pistacia lentiscus. 
Mat-grass, — see Xardus. 

Materials of landscape-gardening, their union in 
forming the constituent scenes of a country-resid- 
ence, 7248. 

Mathiola, stock, tetrand. siliq. and crucifere^, G. 

tr. and bien. and H. an. Eur. of easy culture, and 

increased by cuttings and seeds. 
Matricaria, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifere£B, 

a G. bien. and H. ah. Eur. and C. B. S. of easy 

culture. 

Mattisfont House, Hampshire, 7594. 

Maupin, , his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1763 

Maurandia, didyn. angios. and scrophularineae, G. 

tr. Mex. climbers which thrive in any light, 

rich soil, and are increased by seeds or young 

cuttings under a hand-glass. 
Maurice, the Rev. Thomas, M.A. his works on 

gardening, page 1108. A.D. 1777. 
Mawe, Thomas, as an author on gardening, page 

1107. A. D. 1767. 
May apple, — see Podophyllum. 
Mayer, Frederick, his Gardener's Kalendar, page 

1126. A. D. 1805. 
Mover, J. F., his works on gardening, page 1124. 

A. D. 1778. 

Mayer, J. Jac, his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1793. 

4 



Mayer, or Mever, John, his work on gardening, 

page 1124. A.'D. 1776. 
Mayo, county of, as to gardening, 7G73. 
Maze, — see Labyrinth. 

Mazus, didyn. angios. and scrophularineas, F. an. 

China, of common culture, 1664-. 
Mcadcr, James, iiis works on gardening, page 1108 

A.D. 1771. 
Meadow-grass, — see Poa. 
Meadow Promenade, Edinburgh, 7315. 
Meadow-rue — see Thalictrum. 
Meadow-saxifrage, — see Seseli. 
Meager, Leonard, his works on gardening, page 

1101. A. D. 1682. 
Medeola. hexan. trig, and smilacea?, a H. peren. 

Virginia, which succeeds best in light soil, and is 

increased by dividing the root. 
Medhurst, his weighing-machine, preferable for the 

gardener's seed and fruit room, 1702. 
Medicago, medick, diadel. decan. and leguminoseaj, 

F. and H. tr, and H. peren. Eur. all of easy cul- 

ture, in light soil. 
Medick, — see Medicago. 

Medikus, Frederick Casirair, his work on gardening, 

page 1124. A. D. 1782. 
Medlar, — see Mespilus. 
Meend Park, Herefordshire, 7568. 
Melaleuca, polyad. icos. and myrteacece, S. and G. 

tr. Austral, which grow in sandy loam and peat, 

and ripened cuttings not too old will root in sandy 

loam under a bell-glass. 
Melampodium, syngen. polyg. necess. and corym- 

biferecB, H. an. W. Ind. of common culture. . 
Melampyrum, cow-wheat, didyn. angios. and scro- 

phularineffi, H. an. Eng. of common culture. 
Melananthera, syngen. polyg. requal. and corym- 

biferes, a S. bien. and G. peren. Amer. which 

thrive well in loam and peat, and cuttiLgs root 

freely under a hand-glass. 
Melanthium, hexan. trig, and melanthaceje, G. 

peren. C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated like Lxia.. 
Melasphaerula, triand. monogyn. and irides, a G. 

peren. C.B.S. a bulb which may be treated as ixia. 
Melastoma, decan. monog. and melastomeee, S. tr. 

which thrive in loam and peat, require little 

water in winter, and young cuttings root readily 

under a hand-glass in moist heat. 
Melburn, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 
Melchett Park, V/iltshire, 7596. 
Melhania, monadel. pentand. and malvacea;, S. tr. 

St. Helena, which grow freely in sandy loam and 

cuttings root in sand under a bell-glass. 
Melia, bead-tree, decan. monog. and meliaces, a S. 

tr. and G. tr. E. and W. Ind. and Syria, which 

grow in loam and peat, and cuttings' root under 

a hand-glass in sand. 
Melianthus, honey-flower, didyn. angios. and ruta- 

cese, G. tr. which thrive in rich, light soil, and 

cuttings planted under a hand-glass will root freely. 
Melic-grass, — see Melica. 

Melica, melic grass, trian. dig. and gramine£E, H. 
peren. Eur. anil Amer. grasses of easy culture. 

Melicocca, honey-berry, octan. monog. and sa- 
pindeee, a S. tr. Jam. which thrives best in light 
loam, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Melilot, trifolium melilot. 

Melilotus, melilot, diadel. decan. and leguminoses, 
H. bien. and an. Eur. of easy culture, and in- 
creased by seed. 

Melimala (from mcl, honey, and malum, an apple;, 
sweet apples, 52. 

Melissa, balm, didyn. gymnos. and labiateK, a H. 
peren. S. Eur. 4253. 

Melittis, bastard-balm, didyn. gymnos. and labiatea-, 
a H. peren. Eur. of easy culture, 4149. 

Melochia, monad, pentan. and malvacefe, S. ti". and 
an. W^. and E. Ind. which grow in light loam, 
and cuttings root under a hand-glass in heat. 

Melodinus, pentan. dig. and apocyneaj, a S. tr. N. 
Caledonia, a climber whicii grows freely in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under 
a bell-glass. 

Melon, — see Cucumis. 

Melon-pit, at Edmonstone, 2685. 

Melon-pit, Knight's, 2684. 

Melonry, 2479. 

Melothi-ia, trian. monog. and cucurbitacea-, a H 

an. Amer. of common culture. 
Melton on the Hill, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Melville Castle, Midlothian, 7618. 
Mem. Caled. Hort. Soc, Memoirs of the Caledonian 

Horticultural Society, page 1113. A. D. 1810. 



1206 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Memecylon, octan. monog. and santalaces, a S. tr. 
" E. Ind. which grows in sandy loam and peat, and 

young cuttings in sand under a hand-glass root 

freely. 

Menabilly, a seat in Cornwall, 7601. 

Menageries of the Paris garden, 7333. 

Meniscium, cryptog. Alices and filiceee, a S. peren. 

Martinico, a fern of common culture. 
Menispermum, moon-seed, monoec. dodec. and 

menispermeee, a H. tr. N. Amer. which thrives 

in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily .under 

a hand-glass. 

Mentha, mint, didyn. gymnos. and labiates, a S. 
peren. and H. peren. Eur. and Asia, of the easiest 
culture. 

Mentha piperita, the peppermint, M. viridis, the 
spearmint, and M. pulegium, the penny-royal, 
4149. 

Mentzelia, polyan. monog. and loaseae, a S. an. and 

G, peren. Amer. which grow readily in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Menyanthes, buckbean, pentan. monog. and gen- 
lianese, a H. peren. Brit, a marsh plant. 

Menziesia, octandr. digyn. and rhodoracete, H. tr. 
Eur. and Amer. which thrive in peat soil, and 
are propagated by layers. 

Mcrcunalis, dioec. ennean. and euphorbiaceae, H. 
peren. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Mercury, — see Mercurialis. 

Merevale, a seat in Warwickshire, 7571. 

Merionethshire, gardens and residences of, 7612. 

Merlet, Jean, a French author on gardening, page 
1116. A. D. 1675. 

Merulius destruens, a fungus commonly called the 
dry rot, — to guard against in limber, 6956. 

Mcrville, a seat near Dublin, 7653. 

Meseinbryanthemum, lig-marigold, icos. di-pentag. 
and ficoideae, G. tr. peren. and an. C. B. S. and 
Austral, succulents of easy culture in loam and 
lime-rubbish, and the annual species in rather 
richer soil, 6t557. 

Mespilus, icos. di-pentag. and rosaceie, G. and H. 
tr. Amer. and Eur. which grow in any common 
soil, and are increased by seeds or by budding on 
the common thorn, INI. oxyacantha. 

Mespilus oxyacantha, the hawthorn, 7120. 

Mespihis germanica, the medlar, 4465. 

Mespilus japonica, the loquat-apple, 5991. 

Metrosideros, icos. monog. and myrteaceae, G. tr. 
which grow in loam and peat, and ripened cut- 
tings may be rooted, but not without dilRculty, 
in sand under a bell-glass. 

Meum. bawd-money, pentan. dig. and umbellifereas, 

H. peren. and bien. Eur. of common culture. 
Mcursius, John, his work on gardening, page 1129. 

A. D. 1613. 

Mich. Amer., Andr. I\Iichaux, Flora Boreali- Ame- 
ricana. 

Mich Querc, Histoire des Chcnes de rAm^rique 

Septeiitrionale, par Andr(5 Michaux. 
Michaiu, F. A., his works on gardening, page 1121. 

A. D. 1805. 

Michauxia, octan. monog. and campanulaceffi, a G 

bien. Levant, of common culture. 
Michel Grove, Sussex, 7531. 

Michelia, tetran. monog. and rubiaceffi, a S. tr. N. 
Amer. which succeeds well in light, loamy soil, 
and ripened cuttings do best under a hand-glass in 
sand in iieat. 

Microchloa, trian. dig. and gramineffi, a H. an. E. 
Ind. a grass of common culture. 

Microloma, pentan. dig. and asclepiadea;, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which thrives in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root readily in sand under a bell-glass. 

Micropus, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbiferese, 
H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Middlesex, gardens and country-residences of, 7513. 

Middleton Hall, Caermarthenshire, 7614. 

Middleton Stoney, a seat in Oxfordshire, 755S. 

Midlothian, gardens and residences of, 7618. 

Mignonette, — see Reseda. 

Mikania, syngen. polyg. sequal. and corymbifercEe, 
S. tr. and a G. peren. W. Ind. which grow freely 
in rich, light soil, and cuttings root readily. 

Milburn Tower, a seat near Edinburgh, 7618. 

.Mildew, 880. 

Mile-end nursery, 7518. 

Milfoil, — see Achillea. 

Milium, millet-grass, trian. dig. and graminese, H. 

peren. and an. Eur. grasses of common culture. 
Milk-parsley, — see Selinura. 
Milk-vetch, — see Astragalus. 



Milk-wood, brosimum spurium. 
Milk-wort, — see Polygala. 

Mill. Diet., Professo'r Martj'n's edition of Phil 
Miller's Gardener's Dictionary, 4 vols. fol. 1807. 

Mill, ic, Figures of plants, described in the Gar- 
dener's Dictionary, by Phil. Miller. 

Miller, Philip, F. R. S.,' his works on gardening, 
page 1103. A. D. 1724. 

Milleria, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbiferece, 
S an. S. Amer. of common culture. 

Millet-grass, — see Milium. 

Milton Abbey, Dorsetsliire, 7598. 

Mimetes, tetran. monog. and proteaccje, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which thrive in two thirds loam and one 
third sand, with the pots well drained ; ripened 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass, care 
being taken to prevent damping off. 

Mimosa, polyg. monoec. and leguminosea?, S. tr. 
bien. and an. E. and W. Ind. which thrive well 
in loam and peat, and cuttings of such sorts as do 
not ripen seed will root, if planted young, in sand 
under a bell-glass. 

Mimulus, monkey-flower, didyn. angios. and sci^o- 
phulahneffi, a G. tr. G. and F. and H. peren. 
Amer. which thrive in common soil ; the woody 
species is increased by cuttings, and the others by 
dividing at the root, or by seeds. 

Mimusops, octan. monog. andsapotea?, S. tr. E. Ind. 
which grow in loam and i>eat, and ripened 
cuttings root readily in sand under a hand-glass. 

Mint, — see Mentha. 

Minto House, Roxburghshire, 7621. 

Mhiuartia, trian. trig, and caryophyllea?,' H. an. 
Sp.iin, of common culture. 

Mirabilis, marvel of Peru, pentan. monog. and nyc- 
taginecS, G. jieren. India, which grow in light 
rich soilj and will flower well in the open air in 
summer j but their roots, which are fusiform, 
must be taken up and replanted next year: they 
are readily increased by seeds, and are generally 
treated as half-hardy annuals. 

Mirbcl, C. F. Briseau, a celebrated Frencli author 
on vegetable physiology, 549. 

Mirbelia, decan. monog. and leguminoseze, G. tr. 
Austral, which grow in loam and peat, and young 
cuttings root without difficulty in sand under a 
a bell-glass. 

Miscellaneous articles, flower-stand, basket flower- 
border, parterre-edgings, earthenware border, 
bass-mats, prepared coverings, straw-coverings, 
reed-coverings, protecting bags, feet or shoe- 
scraper, props for plants, spray or branches, wall- 
tree nails, lists, mat-ties, osieV-twigs, boards and 
planks, tressels, — see Instruments, Implements, 
and Utensils, and Structures of gardening. 

Miscellaneous articles used in gardening, 1491. 

Mistletoe, — see Viscum. 

Rlistey Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Mitchelia, polyan. polyg. and magnoliaceae, a H. tr. 
E. Ind. a diminutive creeper which grows in peat 
soil, and is readily increased by layers. 

Mitella, decan. dig. and saxifragese, H. peren. N. 
Amer. rockwork plants, which prefer light rich 
soil, and are mcreased by dividing at the root. 

Mixauld, , a Freiich writer on gardening, page 

1115. A. D. 1564. 

Moat, a seat in the county of Mayo, 7673. 

Moccas Court, Herefordshire, 7568. 

Moehringia, octan. dig. and caryophylleiB, a H. pe- 
ren. S. Eur. a rockwork plant, or one well adapt- 
ed for small pots ; it grows in loam and peat, and 
is increased by dividing at the root. 

Mcenchia, tetran. tetrag. and caryophylles, a H. 
an. Brit, of easy culture. 

Moer, M , his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1754. 

Moist-stove, — see Bark-stove. 

Mollet, Andrt!, a French author on gardening, page 

1115. A. D. 1651. 

Mollet, Claude, a French author on gardening, page 

1116. A. D. 1652. 

MoUia, pentan. monog. and anaaranthaces, a G. tr 
and an. Canaries, which grow in light soil, and 
cuttings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Mollugo, trian. trig, and caryophylleie, a H. an. 
Virginia, of common culture. 

Molucca balm, — see Moluccella. 

Moluccella, a H. peren. and an. Eur. and Asia, 
of easy culture. 

Momordica, monoec. monad, and cucurbitaceje, a 
H. peren. and F. an. E. and W. Indies, of easy 
culture in rich soil, and increa.se;l by seeds. 

Monaghan, county of, as to gardening, 7678. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1 207 



Monarda, dian. monog. and labiateas, H. peren. of 

the easiest culture. 
Mamhead, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 

Monetia, tetran. monog. and , a S. tr. 

^E. Ind. which grows in sand and peat, and roots 

in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 
Money Musk, a seat in Aberdeenshire, 7G39. 
Moneywort, lysimachia nummularia. 
Mongewell, a seat in Oxfordshire, 7558. 
Monkey-flower, — see Mimulus. 
Monk's' Grove, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 
Monkshood, — see Aconitum. 
Monkwood botanic garden and nursery, Ayrshire, 

7627. 

Monmouthshire, gardens and residences of, 7567. 
Monnieria, diadel. pentan. and , a S. 

an. Guiana, of common culture. 
Monotoca, pentan. monog. and epacrideoe, G. tr. 

Austral, v/hjch grow in loam and peat, well 

drained, and young cuttings root in sand under a 

bell-glass. 

Monotropa, yellow bird's nest, decan. monog. and 
ericineffi, a H. peren. Brit, which may be treated 
as cuscuta. 

Monsonia, monad, dodecan. and geraniaceae, a G. 
tr. ^leren. and a bien. C. B. S. which may be treat- 
ed as pelargonium. 

Monteith, , his work on planting, page 1114. 

A. D. 1819. 

Montelth's timber-measurer, 6970. 

Montgomeryshire, gardens and residences of, 7611. 

Monthly Catalogue of Floricultural Productions, 
6741. 

Monthly Catalogue of Horticultural Productions, 
6038. 

Montia, water-chickweed, trian. dig. and portula- 
cese, a H. an. Brit, of common culture. 
• Montinia, dioec. tetran. and onagrareas, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grows well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Montreui], a seat of the Princess Gremen^, near 
Paris, 169. 

Montpelier, A , his works on gardening, page 

1122. A. D. 1815. 

Montreui!, gardens of, 193. 

Monuments, as garden buildings, 1842. 

Monza, a royal seat near Milan, 83. 

Moon, supposed influence of in gardening, 448. 

Moon-trefoil, medicago arborea. 

Moonseed, — see Menispermum. 

Mootiwort, — see Botrychium. 

Moor Park, Hertfordshire, 7545. 

Moor Park, Surrey, 7528. 

Moorfield, a seat in the county of Cork, 7666. 

Moraea, trian. monog. and iridese, G. and H. peren. 
C. B. S. chiefly bulbs which grow in loam and 
decayed leaves, require no water when not in a 
growing state, and should be fresh potted once 
a-year ; they are increased by offsets and seeds. 

Morayshire, as to gardening, 7641. 

Morden Park, Surrey, 7527. 

Mordun (more done), a seat near Edinburgh, 414. 
More, Sir Thomas, his works on gardening, page 

1104. A.D. 1732. 
More Critchet, a seat in Dorsetshire, 7598. 
Morea, gardening and botany of, 311. 
Morel, N , his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1757. 

Moriarty, Mrs. Henrietta Maria, her works qn gar- 
dening, page 1113. A. D. 1803. 

3/or/ej-,. James, author of two journeys in Persia, 
in 1812 and 1818, 466. 

Morin, Pierre, a French author on gardening, page 
1116. A. D. 1658. 

Morina, dian. monog. and dipsacese, a G. peren. 
Persia, which grows in rich light soil, and may be 
increased by dividing at the root or by seed. 

Morinda, pentan. monog. and rubiaceee, S. tr. Ind. 
which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
readily in sand under a hand-glass. 

Moris. His.l Rob. Morison, Historia Plantarum 

Moris. S. 3 Universalis Oxoniensis. 

Morli, gardens of, in Derbyshire, 320. 

Mortcr, Fr. Jos., his works on gardening, page 1124. 
A. D. 1781. 

Mortimer, John, his work on husbandry, page 1101. 

A. D. 1707. 
Morton Hall, Midlothian, 7618. 
Morus, mulberry, moncec. tetran. and urticeae, a S. 

tr. and H. tr. Ind. Italy, and Amer. which prefer 

rich soil, and are increased by seeds, la} ers, or 

cuttings. 

Morus nigra, the garden mulberry. 4"!,' i. 

4 



Moschatel, — see Adoxa. 
Moss-houses, as garden structures, 1816. 
Motherwort, — see Matricaria. 
Mould, finely comminuted soil. 
Mould-scuttle, mould-basket, 1396. and 1401. 
Mount Edgecumbe, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 
Mount Meredith, a seat in the county of Kerry, 
7670. 

Mount Merrion, a seat near Dublin, 7653. 
Mount Stewart, a seat in Buteshire, 7650. 
Mountain, Didymus, his works on gardening, page 

1099. A. D. 1571. 
Mountain ebony, — see Bauhinia. 
Mouse-ear chickweed, — Cerastium. 
Mouse-tail, myosurus minimus. 
Mousetrap of the planter, 7027. 
Moving plant, hedysarum gjTans. 
Mowing, 1891. 

Moyle's Court, Hampshire, 7594. 

Moyra, or Moira Castle, in Downshire, 7683. 

Moxard, , his works on gardening, page 1122, 

A. D. 1815. 
Mudwort, limosella aquatica. 
Mngwort, artemisia vulgaris. 
Mulberry, — see Morus. 
Mulching, 2098. 

Mule's fern, asplenium hemioiiitis. 
Mulgrave Castle, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Mullein, — see Verbascum. 

Miiller, J. C. F., his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1797. 

Miiller, J. G., his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1792. 

Mullera, diadel. decan. and leguminosese, a S. tr. 
Guiana, which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a bell-glass in heat. 

Muncaster House, Cumberland, 7593. 

Munchausen (Monk-house), O. F. Von, his v/ork 
on gardening, page 1124. A. D. 1771. 

Munich, royal gardens of, 213 ; public gardens at, 
7318. 

MimUsuis, Abraham, his work on gardening, page 

1129. A. D. 1672. 
Muntingia, polyan. monog. and tiiiacese, a S. tr. 

which grows well in light loam, and cuttings root 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Murr. com. goett., Com.mentarii Societatis Kog'a; 

Scientiarium Gottingensis. 
Murray, Sir Alexander, his works on gardening, 

page 1104. A. D. 1732. 
Murraya, decan. monog. and aurantess, a G. tr. 

India, which grows best in turfy loam with a 

little peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under 

a hand-glass. 

Musa, plantain-tree, hexan. monog. and musaceas, 
S. tr. Ind. and China,which grow in rich loam, kept 
moist, and require a great deal of room ; tliey are 
increased by suckers. 

Musa paradisiaca, the common plantain-tree. 6011. 

Musa sapientum, the banana-tree, 6012. 

Musca, the fly, a dipterous insect, 2266. 

Muscari, grape-hyacinth, hexan. monog. and aspho- 
delea2, H. peren. S. Eur. bulbs of easy culture. 

Musclie, , his works on gardening, page 1129. 

A. D. 1817. 

Museum Rusticum, a periodical work on gardening, 

nage 1106. A. D. 1764. 
Mushroom, — see Agaricus. 
Mushroom-house, 1693. 

Mussaenda, pentan. monog. and rubiacea2, a G. tr. 
China, a cUmber which grows well in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Mustard, — see Sinapis. 

Mustel, , his work on gardening, page 1119. 

A. D. 1784. 

Myagrum, tetrad silic. and crucifereae, H. an Eur. 
of the easiest culture. 

Myginda, tetran. tetrag. and rhamneae, S. tr. which 
grow in loamy soil, and cuttings will root in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Mylocaryum, buckwheat tree, decan. monog. and 
eriacese, a H. tr. which thrives well in loam and 
peat, requires protection in winter, and ripened 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass in sand 

Mynadoc Castle, Stirlingshire, 7631. 

Myoporum, didyn. angios. and myoporineae, G. tr. 
which grow in loam and peat, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings in sand under a hand-glass. 

Myosotis, scorpion-grass, pentan. monog. and bora- 
gincpp, H. peren. and an. of the easiest culture. 

IMyosurus, mouse tail, pentan. polyg. and ranuncu- 
lacc n H. an. Krit. of common culture, 
H 4 



120S 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Mynca, c?.naleberry-myrtle, dicec. tetran. and 
ameiitacece, G. tr. C. B. S. which grow in loam 
ami peat", and cuttings root freelv under a bell- 
glass ; the H. tr. Brit, and Amer." prefer a moist 
peat soil, and are annually increased by seeds or 
layers. 

Myriophyllum, water-milfoil, moncec. polyandr. 
and naiadcae, H. pcren. Brit, aquatics increased 
by seeds. 

Myristica, the nutmeg, dicec. monad, and myristi- 
ceae, S. tr. Ind. which grow in light loam, and 
nave as yet been little propagated. 

Myrodia, nion^del. polyan. and malvaceae, a S. tr. 
\V. Ind. which grows readily in light, rich soil, 
and cuttings root readily in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Myrrh, — see Myrrhis. 

I^lyrrhis, myrrh, pentan. dig. and umbellifersfe, a 

H. peren. Brit, of easy culture. 
Myrsine, polyg. dicec' and myrsinacese, G. tr. 

C. B. S. evergreens which grow in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under a 

hand-glass. 

Myrsiphyllum, iiexan. trig, and smilaces, G. peren. 
C. B. S. chmbers which thrive in loam and peat, 
and are nicreased by division at the root. 

Myrtus, myrtle, icos. monog. and mvrteaceae, G. tr. 
Eur. and W. Ind. which grow 'freely in rich 
loam, and are increased by cuttings ; M. tomcn- 
tosa requires the heat of a drv stove, and the 
cuttings, which must not be t'oo old, will root 
under bell-glasses. 



N. 



N. Cours, &c., Nouveau Cours complet d' Agricul- 
ture, &c. page 1120. A.D. 1790. 

Nails and other fastenings for wall-trees used in 
gardening, 1514. 

Nairnshire, as to gardening, 7642. 

Nama, pentan. dig. and convolvulaceae, a S. an. Ja- 
maica, of common culture. 

Nandina, hcxan. monog. and berberideae, a G. tr. 
ClVnia, which thrives well in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings, with their leaves not shortened, 
will root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Nannaw, a seat in Merionethshire, 7612. 

Napasa, monad, polyan. and malvacese, H. peren. 
Virginia, which grow freely in common soil, and 
are increased by seeds or dividing the roots. 

Naravelia, polyan. polyg. and ranunculaceae, a S. 
tr. Ceylon, a climber which grows in loam and 
peat, and young cuttings planted thinly in a pot 
of sand, will root under a hand-glass. 

Narcissus, hexan. monog. and amaryllidese, H. 
peren. Eur. bulbs of common culture : — the 
daftbdil narcissus, the white narcissus, the jonquil, 
and polyanthus narcissus, 6294. 

Nardus, mat-grass, trian. monog. and gramine«, 
H. peren. Eur. grasses of easy culture. 

Narthecium, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, H. 
peren. Brit, and Amer. of easy culture in peat 
soil. 

Naseberry-tree, achras sapota, var. /3. zapotilla. 
Nasturtium, tetrad, siliq. and crucifereae, H. peren. 

and an. Eur. two of which are aquatics, and the 

whole of easy culture. 
Nasturtium officinale, the common water-cress, 

4052. 

Native or neglected fruits which might be cultivated 

and improved, 4764. 
Nauclea, pentan. monog. and rubiaceae, a S. tr. 

Ind. which grows well in loam and peat. 
Nauenburgia, syngen. polyg. segr. and corymbi- 

fereae, a"H. an. S. Amer. of common culture. 
Navehvort, — sec Cotyledon. 
Navestock Hall, Essex, 7542. 
Neal, asoat in the county of Mayo, 7673. 
Xcale, Adam, his Orford' catalogue, 7588._ 
Neatness, its importance in gardening, 2531. 
Xectoi/.v, , his work on gardening, page 1120. 

A.D. 1791. 

Ne/ll, Patrick, Esq , secretary to the Caledonian 
Horticultural Society, his writings on gardening, 
page 1114. A.D. 182i. 

Nelumbium, sacred bean,' polyan. polyg. and hydro- 
chai'ideae, S. peren. India and Carolina, aquatics 
increased by seeds, and dividing at the root, 
6729. I 

Nemesia, didyn. angios. and scrophularineas, G. j 
peren. and an. C. B, S. which grow in any Hgtit ' 



rich soil ; and young cuttings planted under a 
hand-glass, will soon strike root. 
Neottia, gynan. monan. and orchideae, S. peren. 
W. Ind. which thrive best in loam and peat with 
little water, and the plants are increased by divid- 
^ing at the root. 

Nepenthes, pitcher-plant, a S. peren. China, an 
aquatic, as yet scarce in British gardens. 

Xepeta, catmint, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, H. 
peren. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Nephelium, monoec. pentan. and corymbifereae, a S. 
tr. E. Ind. which grows in light loam, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

NephrodiQm, kidney-fern, cryptog. Alices and fili- 
ceo!>, S. and H. peren. ferns of common culture. 

Nerium, oleander, pentan. dig. and apocyneae, G. 
and S. tr. Eur. and Ind. which thrive in light, 
rich soil, and cuttings root readily in sand plunged 
under a hand-glass in a moist heat. 

Netting, for shelter, 1512. 

NVttle, — see Urtica. 

Nettle-tree, — see Celtis. 

Nettleworth, a seat in Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Neuenhnhn, K. Ch. Adf., his work on gardening, 
page 1125. A.D. 1796. 

New Cross nursery, Deptford, 7536. 

New-ground workmen, — see Contracting Gar- 
deners. 

New Jersey tea, — see Ceanothus. 
New Tarbat, a seat in Ross-shire, 7647. 
New Zealand tea, leptospermum scoparium. 
Newbattle Abbey, Midlothian, 7618. 
Newbrook House, a seat in the county of Mayo, 
7673. 

Newby Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Xewliscon, a seat in Linlithgowshire, 7632. 
Nevypark House, a seat in the county of M^o, 
7673. 

Newstead Abbey, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 
Newton, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 
Newton, a seat in the county of Tipperary, 7667. 
Newton Hall, Durham, 7584. 
Newton House, a seat in Caermarthenshire, 7614. 
Newtown Mount Kennedy, a seat in Wicklow. 
7654. 

Newtown Park, a seat in the county of Dublin, 
7653. 

Nicandra, pentan. monog. and solaneae, a H. an. 

Peru, of common culture. 
Niches, in arboriculture, 1813. 
Nicker-tree, guilandina bonduc. 
Kicol, \\ alter, his works on gardening, page 1112. 

A.D. 1798. 

Nicotiana, tobacco, pentan. monog. and solanaceae, 
a G. tr. and peren. and H. an. America and 
China, which thrive in any light soil, and are 
readily increased by s?cds. 

Nigella, fennel-flower, polyan. pentag. and ranuncu- 
laceas, H. an. Eur. and Syria, of common culture. 

Nigella sativa and arvensis, as culinary plants, 4335. 

Nightshade, — see Solanum. 

Nipplewort, — see Lapsana. 

Nissolia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S. tr. 
S. Amer. which thrives in sandy loam, and 
cuttings may be rooted in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Nitraria, dodec. monog. and ficoideae, a H. tr. Si- 
beria, which thrives best in sandy loam, with some 
salt occasionally put round it, being a salt marsh 
plant ; it may be increased by layers or cuttings 
under a hand-glass in sand. 

Nivenia, tetran. monog. and proteace^, G. tr. and 
a peren. C. B. S. which grow in soft loam, peat, 
and sand, the pots well drained and placed in any 
situation ; ripened cuttings taken off at a joint 
without shortening their leaves, will root in sand 
under a hand-glass, in a cool shady situation. - 

Noisette, Mons. Louis Claude, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1121. A.D. 181-. 

Nolana, ))entan. monog. and boragineae, a H. an. 
Peru, of common culture. 

Nolina, hexan. trig, and melanthaceje, a H. pcren. 
Georgia, which thrives in peat soil, and is in- 
creased by seeds or dividing at the root. 

Nonsuch Park, Surrey, 7528. 

Norbury Park, Surrey, 7527. 

Norfolk, gardens and residences of, 7553. 

Norraanton House, Rutlandshire, 7579. 

Norris, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

North, , his tracts on gardening, page 1105. 

A. D. 1759. 

North Berwick House, East Lothian, 7619. 
Northamptonshire, gardens and rcsidonces of, 7580. 



GENERAL INDEX, 



120D 



Northcourt House, Hampshire, 7594. 

Northumberland, gardens and residences of, ~5SG. 

Xorthwick, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Norwich, celebrated tor its florists, 7553. 

Notelsea, decan. monog. and oleinea;, G. tr. Aus- 
tral, which grow in loam and peat, and ripened 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass in sand. 

Notoceras, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferese, a G. an. 
Canaries, of common culture. 

Xctre, Mons. Le, a celebrated French landscape- 
gardener and architect, 16.3. 

Nottinghamshire, gardens and residences of, 7576. 

Noui'. El. de Bot., Keichard's Nouvoau Siemens 
de la Botaniquc. 

Novar, a seat in Ross-shire, 7Gi7. 

Nunehara Courtenay, Oxfordshire, 755S. 

Nunnery, a seat in Cumberland, 7593. 

Nuphar, pohan. monog. and hydrocharidese, H, 
peren. Eur. and Amer. aquatics of easy culture, 
and increased by dividing at the root, or by 
seeds. 

Nurseries, public, of Middlesex, 7518 ; of Surrey, 

7.;£5 ; of Kent, 7535. 
Nurserv, public, its formation, 7335 ; management, 

7463. 

Nursery for trees, its formation, 6973 ; culture 

and management, 6982. 
Nursery foreman, 7381. 
Nursery gardeners or nurserymen, 7399. 
Nut-bearing fruit-trees, 4732. 
Nut-tree, — see Corylus. 
Nutmeg — see Myristica. 
Nuttvrell, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 
Nyctanthes, dian. monog. and jasminese, a S. tr. 

E. Ind. which grows freely in loam and peat, and 

cuttings, not too ripe, root readily in sand under 

a hand-glass. 

Nymphsea, water-lily, polyan. monog. and hydro^ 
charidese, S. and "H. peren. Eur. and E. "ind. 
aquatics. 

Nyssa, tupelo, polyg. dioec. and santalacese, H. tr. 
N. Amer. which thrive in common soil, but 
prefer a damp situation ; they are increased by 
layers or seeds. 



O. 

Oak, — see Quercus. 

Oakley Grove, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Oakley Park, Shropshire, 7569. 

Oaks, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 

Oat, — see Avena. 

Oatlands, Surrey, 7528. 

Obs. Mod. Gard"., Wheatley's Observations on Mo- 
dern Gardening. 

Ochna, polyan. monog. and guttiferese, a S. and G. 
tr. E. Ind. and C. B. S. which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Ochroma, monad, pen tan. and malvaceas, S. tr. 

Amer. which grow freely in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Ochrus, diadel. decan. and leguminose£e, a H. an. 

Eur. of common culture. 
Ochtertyre, a seat in Perthshire, 7636. 
Ockenden, , Esq., his work on gardening, page 

1103. A. D. 1770. 
Octomeri2,gynan. monan. and orchideae, a S. peren. 

W. Ind. a parasite, which requires the same 

treatment as aerides. 
Ocymum, didyn. gymnos. and labiatese, S. tr. bien. 

and an. and H. an. Ind. and China, of easy cul- 

ture in light, rich soil, as tender annuals. 
Ocvmum basilicum and minimum, the sweet basil, 

4174, 

CEdera, syngen. polyg. segr. and corymibifereae, a G. 
tr. C. li. S. v.-hich gro-.vs in any light soil, and 
cuttings root readily under a hand-glass. 

CEnanthe, v.-ater-dropwort, pentan. dig and umbel- 
iifereffi, a G. peren. and H. peren. Eur. and 
C. B. S. of easy culture, and increased by seeds. 

CEnothera, octan. monog. and onagrareae, H. peren. 
bien. and an. Amer. of common culture. 

Offsets, to propagate by, 1988. 

Oil-nut, hamiltouia oleifera. 

Oily grain, — see Sesamum. 

Oily palm, elais guineensis 

Okeham Park, Surrey, 7528. 

Olafsyn, Olaf, his works on gardening, page 1130. 

A. D, 1770. 
Old man's beard, — see Geropogon. 
Oldcnlandia, tetran. monog. and rubiacea;, a S. 



peren. and an. E. and W, Ind. of common cul- 
ture. 

Olea, olive and philivrea, dian. monog. and oleinse, 

G. and H. tr. Eur. and C. B. S. which grow in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings root freely in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Olea europea, the common olive, 5958. 

Oleander, — see Nerium. 

Oleaster, — see Elaeagnus. 

Olive, — see Olea. 

OHve bark-tree, bucida buceras. 

Olive-wood, — see Elseodendrum. 

Oliveria, pentan. dig. and umbeUifercae, a H. an. 
Bagdad, of common culture. 

Olyra, monoec. trian. afid graminese, a S. peren. 
W. Ind. a grass of easy culture. 

Ombersley Court, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Omphalea, monrec. monadel and euphorbiaceae, a 
S. tr. Jamaica, which grows in light loam, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass in heat, 
care being taken not to injure the leaves. 

Oncidium, gvnan. monan. and orchideae, S. per- 
en. Ind. which require the same treatment as 
aerides. 

Onion, — see Allium. 

Oniscils asellus, the wood-louse, 2273. 

Onoclea, crj-ptog. Alices and filiceae, H. peren. Eur. 
and Amer. ferns of common culture. 

Ononis, rest-harrov\% diadel. decan. and legumi- 
noseae, G. tr. and peren. Eur. and C. B. S. which 
thrive in loam and peat, and are increased by 
seeds or young cuttings under a bell-glass in 
sand. 

Onopordum, cotton-thistle, syngen. polyg. aequal. 

cynarocephaleae, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of 

common culture. 
Onopordum acanthium, 3960. 

Onosraa, pentan. monog. and boragineae, a G. peren. 
and H, peren. Br. and S. Eur. which succeed 
best in rich, light soil, and are increased by cut- 
tings under hand-glasses in sand. 

Onosmodium, pentan. monogyn. and boragineae, a 

H. peren. N. Amer. which may be treated as 
onosma. 

Operations of gardening, 1853. ; mechanical, lifting, 
carrying, drawing, pushing, &c. 1856. to 1861. 

Operations, laborious, on the soil, 1862; picking, 
digging, shovelling, excavating, levelling, mark- 
ing with the line, trenching, ridging, forking, 
hoeing, raking, scraping, sweeping, wheeline, 
beating, roUing, sifting, &c. 1863. to 1881. 

Operations, laborious, with plants, 1882 ; sawing, 
cutting, clipping, splitting, mowing, weeding, 
watering, &c. 1SS3. to 1893. 

Operations in which skill is more required than 
strength, 1894 ; transferring designs from ground 
to paper or memory, dimensions of simple objects, 
forms of surface, irregular figures, raised and de- 
pressed surfaces, delineating by ground-lines only, 
elevations, protiles, circular profiles, bird's-eye 
views, general views, &c. 1895. to 1912. 

Operations, transferring figure.^ or designs from 
paper or memory to plain surfaces, 1914 ; per- 
pendiculars, angles, ovals, gardener's oval, a spiral 
line, centre of three points, polygons, polygonal 
gardens, fanciful figures, 1915. to 1924. 

Operations of gardening ; transferring figures and 
design.s to irregular surfaces, 19£5 ; straight lines, 
continuous lines, curved lines, level lines, &c. 
1926. to 1933. 

Operations for the arrangement of quantities, by 
trial and correction, by measure superficial, by 
*" solid measure, 1935. to 1939. 

Operations for carrying designs into execution, 1940 ; 
removing surface encumbrances, smoothing sur- 
faces, drawing off water by under-drains, by 
surface-drains ; forming excavations for retaining 
water, removal of earth, forming the bed or bot- 
tom, head, sluice ; surfaces to imitate nature, arti- 
ficial surfaces ; walks, form of their surface, weeds, 
resistance of walks to animals, to weather, 1941. 
to 1968. 

Operations, scientific processes, 1969 ; preparations 
for fermenting substances, stable-dung, tanner's 
bark, leaves, preparation, formation of beds, 
ashes, composts, liquid manures, mould-composts, 
composts for particular plants, compost-ground, 
1970. to 1984. 

Operations of propagation, 1985 ; by seed, by bulbs, 
offsets, slips, division of the "plant, runners, 
suckers, layers, twisting, ringing, piercing, and 
wire-layers, layering trees in the open garden, 
stools, Chinese layering, inarching, grafting, 



1210 



GENERAL INDEX. 



theories of whip-grafting, cleft-grafting, crown- 
grafting, side-grafting, saddle-grafting, shoulder- 
grafting, root-grafting, terebration {terebratio, 
liat. a boring with a wimble), stocks, free-growing 
stocks, dwarSng-stocks, scions, grafting-clay, bud- 
ding, shield-budding, shield-budding reversed, 
scollop-budding, budding with double ligatures, 
stocks for budding, instruments and materials for, 
1986. to 2062. 

Operating for propagating by cuttings, 2063 ; choice, 
preparation, insertion, and management, 20o4'. to 

Operations of rearing and culture, 2070. 

Operations in sowing and planting, sowing, patches, 

r broad-cast, planting, and watering, 2071. to 2078. 

Operations in transplanting, 2079 ; preparation of 
the soil, removal of the plant, inserting, spade- 
planting, hole-planting, trench-;)lanting, trench- 
ing-in planting, slit-planting, holeing-in planting, 
drill-planting, bcdding-in planting, furrow- 
planting, dibble-planting, trowel-plantrng, plant- 
ing with balls, planting by mudding-in, panning, 
mulching, edgings, verges, turfing, transplanting 
in pots, shifting, 2oSO. to 2109. 

Operations in pruning, 2110; for promoting the 
growth and bulk of a tree, for lessening tlie bulk 
of a tree, for modifying the form of a tree, to form 
dwarf standards, concave dwarfs, convex or coni- 
cal dwarfs, horizontal dwarfs, spiral dwarfs, fan 
dwarfs, distafls, natural dwarfs, pruning half and 
entire standards, pruning trees on walls or esp.a- 
liers, pruning for blossom-buds, pruning for the 
enlargement of the fruit, for adjusting the stem 
and branches to the roots, for renewal of the 
head, for curing diseases, pruning roots, pruning 
herbaceous plants, seasons for pruning, summer 
pruning, 2111. to 2139. 

Operations in training, 2140 ; object of training, 
modes of training trees with flexible stems, fan- 
training, horizontal training, horizontal training 
with screw stem, oblique training, perpendicular 
training, stellate training, open fan, wavy or cur- 
vilinear training, performing the operation on 
walls, shreds and nails, h^-rbaceous training, 2141. 
to 2155. 

Operations in blanching, 2156 ; by earthing, by tying 
together the leaves, by overlaying, by covering 
with utensils, 2157. to 2160. 

Operations for inducing a state of fruitfulness, 2161 ; 
laying bare the roots, cutting the roots, notching 
the stem, partial decortication, stripping oft' pieces 
of the bark, ringing, renewal of the soil, bending 
do\vir the brandies, application to herbaceous 
plants, 2162; to 2175. 

Operations for retarding vegetation, 2177 ; by the 
form of surface, by shade, by the ice-cold room, 
2178. to 2180. 

Operations for accelerating vegetation, 2181 ; by 
the form of surface, by shelter, by soil, by pre- 
vious preparation of the plant, by inducing a state 
of rest, by housing, by artificial heat, by fined 
walls, by glass cases, by hot-beds, by walled pits, 
by hot-houses, temporary emplacement in hot- 
houses, permanent, 21S2. to 2200. 

Operations to imitate warm climates, 2201 ; general 
management, green-house, dry-stove, bark-stove, 
watering, insects, 2202. to 2205. 

Operations of protection from atmospherical in- 
juries, protecting by fronds and frond-like 
branches, by straw-ropes, nets, canvass or bunting 
screens, mats, straw, and litter, oiled paper-frames, 
protecting ropes, transparent covers, transparent 
screens, &c. 2206. to 2218. 

Operations relative to vermin diseases, and other 
casualties of plants, 2219 ; kinds of vermin, hu- 
man enemies, brute vermin, quadrupeds, feather- 
ed enemies, insects, coleoptera, hemiptera, le- 
pidoptera, neuroptera, hymenoptera, diptera, 
aptera, worms, slugs, 2220. to 2275. 

Operations relative to subduing vermin, 2276 ; in- 
sect vermin, preventive operations, palliative 
operations, destructive operations, 2277. to 2285. 

Operations relative to diseases and other casualties, 
2286. to 2288. 

Operations of gathering, packing, preserving, and 
keeping, 2289; gathering fruits and seeds, pre- 
serving heads or leaves, roots, fruits, ripe fruit, 
pears, and apples, sweating fruit, preserving seeds, 
roots, cuttings, grafts, roots, &c. 2290. to 2321. 

Operations relating to the final products derived of 
gardens and garden-scenery, vegetable products, 
fruits, seeds, roots, stems and stalks, leaves, 
flowers, barks, woods, entire plants, 2323. to 2333. 



Operations of superintendence and management, 
2334 ; head gardener's duties, keeping accounts, 
time-book, cash-book, forest-book, produce-book, 
weather-book, register of temperature of hot- 
houses, of the open air, record of the growth of 
plants, reading-library, 2335. to 2354. 

Operations for the beauty and order of garden- 
scenery, 2355 ; order, propriety, decorum, neatness, 
importance of the profession of a gardener, &c. 
2356. to 2373. 

Opercularia, tetran. monog. and nyctagineae, a 
G. tr. N. S. \V. which thrives in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root freely in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Ophioglos.sum, adder's tongue, crj^jtog. stachyop- 
terides and filiceae, a S. and H.'peren. Brit. W. 
Ind. ferns of common culture. 

Ophiopogon, snake's beard, hexandria monogyn. 
and smilacese, a F. peren. Japan, which grows 
in sandy loam and peat, and is increased by di- 
viding at the root. 

Ophioxylon, polyg. moncec. and apocyneae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Ophrys, gynan. monan. and orchidese, a G. percn. 
and H. peren. Eur. and Barbarj-, which succeed 
best in a mixture of loam, peat, and chalk broken 
small; the oest time to transplant them, as well 
as most other orchideous plants, is when they are 
growing: tliey are increased by seeds, which 
siiould be sown as soon as they are ripe. 

Oramore Castle, a seat in Galway, 7672. 

Orange, — see Citrus. 

Orangery, ornamental, its construction, 2171 ; for 
producmg fruit, 5928. 

Orchard, formation and planting of one subsidiary 
to the kitchen-garden, 2527; site, manure, 
screens, selections of kinds, age of plants from 
the nursery, temporary and final distances, cul- 
ture of the soil, of standard fruit-trees, only 
situation and soil, sorts, age of the plants, de- 
sign for one to surround a kitchen-garden, 2568. 
to 254-4. 

Orchard, general culture and management of, 
2613; manuring, cropping, watering, staking and 
protecting, mulciiing and clothing the stems, 
pruning aged trees, season of pruning, insects 
and diseases, gathering and storing orchard 
fruits, pears, packing orchard and other fruits for 
carriage, general culture and management, 2614. 
to 264.3. 

Orchar.iists, 7395. 

Orchards, commercial, their formation, 7455. and 

7463 ; management, 7463. 
Orchis, gynan. monan. and orchidese, G. and H. 

peren. Eur. and Amer. which may be treated like 

ophrys, only they do not require chalk mixed with 

the loam and peat. 
Order, its importance in gardening, 2356. 
Orford Hall, a seat in Lancashire, 7588. 
Origanum, marjoram, didyn. gjmmos. and labiatese, 

G. and F. tr. and H. peren. Eur. which grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root readily under a 
hand-glass. 

Origanum onites, marjorana, &c., the garden mar- 
jorams, 4162. 

Orkney and Shetland Islands,' as to gardening, 
7645. 

Ormiston, a seat in East Lothian, 7619. 

Ormosia, decan. monog. and leguminosese, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. which thrives well in loam and peat, and 
is increased by cuttings in sand under a hand- 
glass; or seeds from the "West Indies will vege- 
tate freely. 

Ornithidium, gynan. monan. and orchidese, a S. 
peren. W. Ind. a parasite which may be treated 
as aerides. 

Ornithogalum, star of Bethlehem, hexan. monog. 
and asphodeieae, G. T. and H. peren. Eur. C. B. S. 
bulbs of easy culture. 

Ornithopus, bird's foot, diadel. decan. and legumi- 
nosese, a H. peren. and an. Eur. of common cul- 
ture. 

Ornitrophe, octan. monog. and sapindese, S. tr. E. 
and W. Ind. which prefer a light loam, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Ornus, flowering-ash, dian. monog. and oleinese, 

H. tr. Italy, which grow in common soil, and are 
increased by seeds or budding, or grafting on the 
common ash, fraxinus excelsior. 

Orobanche, did5'n. angios. and orobanchese, H. 
peren. Brit, parasites which root in the soil, and 
afterwards attach themselves to, and root into 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1211 



other plants. The common broom-rape, an. 

major, maybe sown or planted at t!ie root of the 

common broom, spartium, and the others at the 

roots of sucli plants as they are seen to affect in 

their wild state. 
Orobus, bitter vetch, diadel. decan. and legumi- 

noseae, H. peren. Eur. of easy culture. 
Orobus tuberosus, the tuberous-rooted bitter vetch, 

4302. 

Orontium, hexaiv monog. and aroidese, H. peren. 
Amer. and Japan, which grow in light sandy soil, 
and are increased by division at the root. 

Orpine, — see Telephium. 

Ortegia, trian. monog. and caryophyllcEe, H. peren. 

Eur. wJiich thrive in light rich soil, and cuttings 

root freely under a hand-glass. 
Orthopogon', trian. dig. and gramineae, a S. tr. W. 

Ind. of common culture. 
Oryza, rice, hexan. dig. and gramineae, a S. an. 

Ethiopia, of easy culture as a marsh plant. 
Osbaston, a seat in Derbyshire, 7574, 
Osbcck, P. A. Toreen, and Captain Eckeberg, their 

voyage to China, page 1130. A. D. 1771. 
Osbeckia, octan. monog. and raelastomece, a S. bien. 

Ceylon, of common culture. 
Osier, — see Salix. 

Osmites, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbiferen?, 
a G. tr. C. B. S. w'hich grows well in' light rich 
soil, and cuttings root freely under a hand- 
glass. 

Osraunda, cryptog. schismatopterides and filicea;, 

H.peren. Amer. Brit, and C. B. S. ferns of common 

culture, 1678. 
Ossenfdder, H. A., his works on gardening, page 

112-i. A. D. 1771. _ 
Ossiiigton Hall, Xottinghamshire, 7i5/6. 
Osten, Van, his works on gardening, page 1129. A.D. 

1703. 

Osteospermum, syngen. polyg. necess. and corym- 
bifereee, G. tr. C. B. S. which may be treated as 
osmides. 

Osterton House, Xottinghamshire, 757o. 

Ostrya, hop-hornbeam, monosc. polyan. and amen- 
taceffi, H. tr. Italy and N. Amer! which grow in 
any soil, and are increased by seeds or lay- 
ers. 

Oswego tea, — see Monarda. 

Osyris, poet's cassia, dicec. trian. and santalacea?, a 
6-. tr. S. Eur. which thrives in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings will root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Otaheite chestnut, inocarpus edulis. 
Otaheite myrtle, securinega nitida. 
Othonna, ragwort, syngen. polyg. necess. and coiwm- 

biferefe, G. and F. tr. and peren. C. B. S. wliich 

grow in any light, rich soil, and cuttings root 

freely under a hand-g'ass. 
Otto, Frederick, C. Til. H. S., inspector of the botanic 

garden, Berlin, 219. 
Owston, a seat in Yorkshire, 7aS2. 
Ox-eye, — see Buphthalrainn. 
Ox-eye daisy, chrysanthemum leucanLhemum. 
Ox-lip, — see Primula. 
Ox-tongue, — see Picris. 

Oxalis, wood-sorrel, decandr. pentagyn. and gerani- 
aceffi, G. and H. peren. C. B. S. bulbs of easy 
culture. 

Oxalis acetosella, the common wood-sorrel, 4075. 

Oxford botanic garden, 7557. 

Oxfordshire, gardens and residences of, 7553. 

Oxyanthus, pentan. monog. and rubiacea;, a S. tr. 
Sierra Leone, which thrives well in sandy loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Oxybaphus, umbrella-wort, triand. monogyn. and 
nyctagineffi, S. peren. and an. S. Amer. which 
grow in loam and peat, and are increased by young 
cuttings under a bell-glass in sand. 

O.xycoccus, cranberry, octan. monog. and ericcEe, a 
S. tr. and H. tr. Eur. and Amer. which require a 
peat soil, and moist situation. 

Oxycoccus macrocarpus and palustris, 4703. 

Oxylobium, decan. monog. and leguminosea^, G. tr. 
Austral, which grow in sandy loam and peat, 
and young cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Oxystelma, ])entandria digynia and asclejiiadca;, a 
S. peren. E. Ind. which thrives well in loam and j 
peat, and cuttings root freely in s.ind under a j 
hand-glass. i 

Oxytropis, diadel. decan. and Icgurainoscfc, H. I 
peren. and an. Eur. which prefer a light s.mdy : 
soil, and are readily increased by seeds 



P. 

Pachysandra, monoec. tetran. and euphorbiaces, a 
H. peren. N. Amer. which succeeds well in any 
common light soil, and increases freely by suckers 
from the roots. 
Packbiish, S. T., his works on gardening, page 1123, 
A. D. 1695. 

Packenham Hall, a seat in Westmeath, 7662. 
Paddock, puddock, or purrock, a country term, 
originally applied to a small space enclosed by 
pales from a park, for hounds to run matclies in, 
now generally applied to the small grass enclosures 
commonly attached to a park, or kept in tlie hands 
of the resident on the demesne. 
Pffideria, pentan. monog. and rubiacete, a D. S. tr. 
China, a climber which thrives in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily. 
Pffionia, pffiony, polyan. dig. and ranunculacete, the 
Chinese tree-pasony, a F. tr. Cliina, with numer- 
ous varieties, thrives in any rich, light soil; and 
ripened cuttings slipped off, and planted in the 
ground in a shady place, without cover, wili root 
freely. The H. peren. Eur. requires a deep, rich, 
loamy soil, — see 1639. 
Pa?ony, — see Pffionia. 
Pain's Hill, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 
Paisley manufacturers, their gardens and florists' 

meetings, cSrc, 7628. 
Palavia, monad, polyan. and malvacete, a H. an. 

Peru, of common culture. 
Palisade {palissade, Fr.), any fence of pales, a paling ; 
the term is generally used when an ornamoital 
paling is intended. 
Palis^'l', liernard de, a French author on gardening, 

page 1115. A. D. 1563. 
Pallasia, syngen. poly, frustran. and corymbifereje, 
a G. tr. Peru, which thrives in any "rich, light 
soil, and cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 
Palma Christi, — see Ricinus. 

Panax, polyg. dicec. and aralcEe, S. ti*. Amer. and 
China, which tlirive well in light loam, and cut- 
tings root readily in sand under a hand-glass ; the 
K. peren. grow in similar soil, and are increased 
by seeds, or dividing at the root. 
Paiicrati'iin, hexan. monog. and amarjdlideas, S 
and G. peren. and H. peren. Eur. Amer. and India, 
which grovv' in light loam and vegetable mould, 
with little water wlien not in a growing state. 
They are increased by seeds and suckers. 
Pandanus, screw-pine, 'dicec. monan. and pandana- 
cecs, S. tr. Ind. and N. S. W. which thrive in 
loamy soil ; but rarely produce growths which 
admit of removal for propagation. 
Panic-?:rass, — see Panicum. 

Panicura, panic-grass, trian. dig. and graminese, S. 
tr. r.nd bien. and H. peren. and an. Ind. Amer. 
and Kur. grasses of common culture. 
Pannage, a law term signifying the feed which 
swine or cattle may derive from the mast, acorns, 
or herbage of woods. 
Panning, forming a pan or saucer-like hollow round 
newly planted trees, to receive and retain water, 
2098. 

Panshanger, a seat in Hertfordsliire, 7544. 
Panton House, Lincolnshire, 7o/7. 
Papaver, poppy, polyan. monog. and papaveracese, 

H. peren. Eur. of easy culture. 
Papaw-tree, — see Carica. 
Paper mulberry, morus papyrifera. 
Papilio, the butterfly, a lepi'dopterous insect, 2251. " 
Papilio machaon, 6194. 
Parasitic hardy shrubs, 6538. 

Pai-asitic exotics, their culture and management, 
6736. 

Parasitic plants, such as root into other living plants, 
and derive their nourishment from them ; some 
root into the stem or branches, as viscus, the 
mistletoe ; others attach themselves to the root, 
as hypocistus ; some of the cpidendrEe and aeridse 
will grow either on Hving or dead»trees. 
Pardanthus, trian. monog. and irideae, a G. peren. 

China, a bulb which may be treated as ixia. 
Parham, a seat in Sussex, 7531. 
Pariana, monoec. polyan. and gramineae, a S. tr. 
j Cayenne, which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
j tings root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Parietaria, pellitory, poly, monoec. and urticeee, a S. 
I peren. and an. and H. peren. Eur. and Indi.i, of 
: ■ easy culture in light soil. 

I Paris, octan, tetrag, and smilaccte, a H, peren. Brit. 



1212 



GENERAL INDEX. 



which prefers a shady situation in a light sandy 

loam, and is increased by seed. 
Park, in gardening, a portion of forest-like scenery 

attached to a country-house, and devoted to the 

growth of timber, the harbor of game, deer, or 

the pasturage of cattle, &c. 
Park, par, J. Parkinson Paradisi in Sole, Paradisus 

terrestris. 
Park Place, Berkshire, 7561. 

Parkinson, John, his works on gardening, page 1099. 
A. D. 1629. 

Parkinsonia, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a S. 
tr. W. Ind. which thrives in loain and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Parkyns, G. J., his works on gardening, page 1113. 
A. D. 1805. 

Parnassia, grass of Parnassus, pentan. tetrag. and 
capparideae, H. peren. Brit, and Amer. marsh 
plants which thrive best in moist peat soil. 

Paronychia, pentan. monog. and aniaranthacejE, G. 
peren. Eur. which thrive well in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root freely under a hand-glass ; the 
PI. peren. and an. prefer the same soil, and are 
increased by cuttings or seeds, 

Parsley, 4082 — see Apium. 

Parsley piert, alchemilla aphanes. 

Parsnep, — see Pastinaca. 

Parterre \Fr.), an even or level piece of ground ; 

a flower garden, — see Flower-garden. 
Parterre edyings, 15(j0. 

Parthenium, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbife- 

rese, a H. peren. and an. W. Ind. and Amer. of 

common culture. 
Pascalia, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbiferese, 

Chili, which grows best in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root under a hand-glass. 
Paspahun, trian. dig. and gramineae, S. and H. W. 

Ind. and S. Amer. grasses of easy culture. 
Pasque flower, — see Pulsatilla. 
Passerina, sparrow-wort, octan. monog. and thy- 

meleae, G. tr. C. B. S. which thrive best in sandy 

peat, and cuttings root freely under a bell-glass % 

in sand. 

Passiflora, passion-flower, monadelph. pentand. and 
passitioreae, S. and G. tr. climbers, free growers, 
and easily managed; they thrive best in loam 
f.nd peat, and young cuttings root readily in heat 
under a bell-glass. 

Passiflora quadrangularis, and other fruit-bearing 
species, 6003. 

Passion-flower, — see Passiflora. 

Pastinaca, parsnep, pentan. dig. and umbellifereae, 
H. bien. and a peren. of common culture. 

Pastinaca sativa, the garden parsnep, 3723. 

Pat<!e d'oye, or cross pati5e d'oye, IJieraldry,) a cross 
with the crosslets spreading like duck feet, as in 
the Maltese cross, — a form of planting avenues, 
&c., 6813. 

Patersonia, monadel. trian. and irideae, G. peren. 

N. S. W. which grow in loam and peat, and are 

increased bj dividing at the root. 
Paulet, j his works on gardening, page IICO. 

A. D. 1793. 

PauUinia, octan. trig, and sapindese, S. tr. W. Ind. 
which succeed in light loam, and cuttings root 
best in sand in bottom-heat under a hand-glass. 

Paultons, seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Pavetta, tetrandria raonogynia and rubiaceas, a 
S. tr. E. Ind. which thrives best in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Pavilion, a regal residence in Brighton, 7533. 

Pavonia, monadel. polyan. and malvacese, S. and 
G. tr. and S. an. E. and W. Ind. which grow in 
loam and peat, and root readily in sand under a 
hand-glass : most of the species produce abund- 
ance of seeds. 

Pawlosky, an imperial seat near Petersburgh, 258. 

Pea, — see Pisum. 

Peach-house, its construction, 2664 ; general cul- 
ture and management of, 3063. 
Peach-gatherer, 1354. 
Peach-tree, — see Amygdalus. 
Pear-gatherer, 1355. 
Pear-tree, — see Pyrus. 
Pearlwort, — see Sagina. 

Peat-earth shrubs, their culture, final situation, 6569. 
Pectis, syngen. polygam. super, and corymbifereEe, 

S. an. W. Ind. of common culture. 
Pedalium, didynam. angios. and pedalineae, S. an. 

E. Ind. of common culture. 
Pedicularis, lousewort, didyn. angios. and scro- 

phularine;p, F. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and | 



Amer. which succeed best in peat soil and a 
moist situation, and are increased by seeds. 
Peel HaU,, Cheshire, 1590. 

Peganum, dodec. monog. and rutaceae, H. peren. 

Eur. which thrive in rich, light soil, and cuttings 

root freely under hand-glasses. 
Pekra, a seat near Moskwa, 262. 
Pelargonium, stork's bill, monadelph. heptan. and 

geraniaceae, G. tr. peren. and an C. B. S. and 

some S. tr. and peren. all of easy culture in any 

rich, hght soil, the succulent sorts well drained 

and not ovenvatered, 6601. 
Pelee, M. de St. Maurice, a French author on 

gardening, page 1116. A. D.- 17—. 
Peliosanthes, hexan. monog. and , S. peren. 

E. Ind. which grow best in rich loam, and are 

increased by dividing at the root. 
Pelleport-Saune, M , his work on gardening, 

page 1122. A. D. 1813. 
Pellitory, — see Peltaria. 

Peltaria, tetrad. siUc. and crucifereae, a H. peren. 
Austral, of common culture. 

Pembrokeshire, gardens and residences of, 7609. 

Penaea, tetran. monog. and jasmineae, G. tr. C. B. S. 
which thrive in loam and peat, with the pots well 
drained, and young cuttings root without diffi. 
culty under bell-glasses in sand. 

Pendarves, a seat in Cornwall, 7601. 

Penguern, a seat in Flintshire, 7606. 

Penicillaria, poly, moncec. and gramineae, a S. and 
H. an. E. pjid W. Ind. of common culture. 

Pennisetum, trian. dig. and gramineae, H. an. Eur. 
and Ind. grassee of the easiest culture. 

Pennycuick House, Midlothian, 7618. 

Pennyroyal, mentha pulegium. 

Pennywort, — see Hydrocotyle. 

Penpont, a seat in Breconshire, 7613. 

Penrhyn Castle, Caernarvonshire, 7604. 

Penrice Castle, Glamorganshire, 7608. 

Penshurst, a seat in Kent, 7538. 

Pentapetes, monadel. dodec. and malvaceae, a S. 
tr. and a bien. Ind. and N. Spain, which grow 
freely in light, rich soil, and cuttings root in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Penthorum, decan. pentag. and semperviveae, a 
H. peren. Virginia, which grows freely in light, 
sandy soil, and is readily increased by dividing at 
the root, or by young cuttings under a hand- 
glass. 

Pentre, a seat in Pembrokeshire, 7609. 

Pentstemon, didyn. angios. and bignoniaceae, a F. 
tr. and H. peren. K Amer. which grow in light, 
rich soil, and succeed well in pots. Cuttings 
root freely under hand-glasses. 

Pentzia, syngen. polyg. aequal. and corj-mbifereae, 
a G. tr. C. B. S. which thrives well in any rich, 
light soil, and cuttings root freely under a hand- 
glass. 

Peplis, water-purslane, hexan. monog. and sali- 
carea, a H. an. Brit, a marsh plant of easy 
culture. 

Pepper, — see Piper. 

Pepper Harrow, a seat in Surrey, 7528. 

Pepper-vine, cissus stans. 

Pepperwort, — tee Lepidium. 

Perdicium, syngen. poly, super, and corymbifereae, 
a H. peren. Siberia, which grows in rich, light 
soil, and is increased by dividing at the root. 

Perfect, Thomas, his works on gardening, page 
1105. A. D. 1759. 

Perforated piers, piers for fruit-tree walls, the pro- 
jecting parts of which are perforated to admit of 
training the shoots through the pier, instead of 
stopping them there, or bending them over it. It 
is an ingenious mode, but the rounded pier 
(1572. fig. 246. a), where practicable, is to be 
preferred, as more readily admitting the taking 
down and replacing of the branches at the prim- 
ing season. 

Pergularia, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, S. tr. E. 

Ind. fragrant climbers which succeed well in 

loam and peat, and cuttings root readily in sand 

under a hand-glass. 
PeriUa, didyn. gymnos. and labiatete, a H. an. 

India, of common culture. 
Periploea, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, a G. and 

H. tr. Syria and the Canaries, which grow freely 

in common soil, and are increased by layers or 

cuttings. 
Periwinkle, — see Vinca. 

Perotis, trian. dig. and gramineae, a S. an. E. Ind. 

of common culture. 
Per.s.jChristian Henry Persoon's Synopsis Plantarura. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



12]?, 



Persian gardening, i3'.l 

Persicaria, polygonum pcrsicaria. 

Persoonia, tetran. monog. and proteaceaD, G. tr. 
N. S. W. which thrive in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Perth nursery, 7035. 

Perthshire, gardens and residences of, 7635. 

Peschelius, , his works on gardening, page 1123. 

A. D. 1597. 

Petalostemum, diadel. pentan. and leguminosese, 
H. peren. N. Amer. which thrive in light, rich 
soil, and are increased by seeds or dividing at the 
root. 

Peterhoff, an imperial residence near Petersburgh, 
254. 

Peterkin, Joshua, his works on planting, page 1131. 
A. D. 1790. 

Peters, Richard, his work on gardening, page 1131. 
A. D. 1810. 

Petersham Lodge, Surrey, 7527. 

Petiveria, heptan. monog. and chenopode«, S. tr. 
W. Ind. which grow well in light, rich soil, and 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Petraea, didyn. angios. and verbenaceaB, a S. tr. 
Vera Cruz, a climber, which thrives well in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Petre, Robert, Lord, an accomplished nobleman 
and great encourager of gardening in the time of 
Miller, — see Ingatestone. 

Petrocallis, tetrad, silic. and crucifereae, a H. peren. 
Pyrenees, a rockwork plant, which grows well 
in peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass. 

Petrophila, tetran. monog. and proteacese, G. tr. 
N. W. S. which may be treated as protese. 

Petrowka, a seat near Moskwa, 261. 

Petworth House, Sussex, 7532. 

Peucedanum, sulphur- wort, pentan. dig. and um- 
belliferese, a G. bien. and H. peren. Eur. of com- 
mon culture. 

Phaca, bastard vetch, diadelph. decan. and legu- 
minoseae, H. peren. Eur. which succeed in com- 
mon garden soil, and are increased by seeds. 
Some of the dwarfer kinds are well adapted for 
rockwork or growing in pots. 

Phalaena quercus, the egger-moth, 7075. 

Phalangium, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, H. 
peren. S. Eur. which thrive in rich, light soil, 
and are readily increased by dividing the root. 

Phalaris, canary-grass, trian. dig. and graminese, a 
H. peren. and an. Eur. Egypt, and C. B. S. grasses 
of easy culture. 

Phallus esculentus, the morel, 4343. 

Pharnaceum, pentan. trig, and caryophyllese, a S. 
and G. tr. and H. an. Eur. and C. B. S. which 
thrive in sandy loam and peat, and cuttings root 
in the same soil under a hand-glass. 

Pharus, monoec. hexan. and gramineae, a S. peren. 
Jam. a grass of easy culture. 

Phaseolus, kidneybean, diadel. decan. and legumi- 
noseae, S. peren. and an. and H. an. Asia, Amer. 
and Africa, which thrive in light, rich soil, and 
may be propagated from cuttings or seeds. 

Phaseolus vulgaris, the common kidneybean, 3629 ; 
to force kidneybeans, 3367 ; soil, sorts, sowing, 
culture, time of beginning to force, tempera- 
ture, successional supplies, forcing in a hot-house, 
insects, forcing in a peach or cherry house, in a 
common hot-bed, crop raised under glass to fruit 
in the open garden, crop raised on slight heat, 
3368. to 3380. 

Pheasantry, 7247. 

Phellandrium, water. hemlock, pentan. digyn. and 
umbellifereae, a H. bien. Brit, an aquatic which 
may be sown in pots and placed in the aquarium, 
or the seeds scattered in any pond. 

Philadclphus, syringa, icos. monog. and myrteaceas, 
H. tr. Eur. and Carolina, shrubs of easy culture. 

Phillips, Henry, his works on gardening, page 1114. 
A. D. 1820. 

Phillips, Leonard, jun., nurseryman, his works on 

gardening, page 1114. A. D. 1814. 
Philoxerus, pentan. monog. and amaranthaccae, a 

S. tr. and peren. Amer. which thrive well in rich 

soil, and are readily increased by cuttings. 
Philydrum, dian. monog. and junceae, a S. tr. China, 

of common culture. 
Phillyrea, olea alaternus. 

Phleum, catstail -grass, trian. dig. and graminefe, 
H. peren. and an. Eur. of common culture. 

Phlomis, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, H. tr. and 
peren. Eur. which prefer a light, dry soil, and 



J are increased by cuttings under a hand-glass or 
seeds. 

1 Phlox, lychnidea, pent, monog. and polemoniace??, 
H. peren. Amer. mostly border-flowers, whicii 
prefer a rich loam, and are increased by cuttings 
or dividing at the roots. 

Phoenix, date-palm, dioec. trian. and palmeas, a S. 
tr. and G. tr. Levant, C. B. S. and E. Ind. which 
require a light soil, and are increased by seeds. 

Phoenix Park, Dublin, 7653. 

Phormium, flax-lily, hexan. monog. and asphode- 
leae, a G. peren. N. Zeal, which thrives in any 
light, rich soil, and is increased by offsets from the 
roots. 

Phryma, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, a H. peren. 
N. Amer. which thrives well in rich, light soil, 
and cuttings root freely in sand under hand- 
glasses. 

Phrynium, monan. monog. and canneae, S. peren. 

E. Ind. which thrive in rich, light soil, and are 

increased by dividing at the root. 
Phylica, pentandria monogynia and rhamneae, G. 

tr. C. B. S. which grow best in sandy peat, and 

young cuttings root readily under a bell-glass in 

sand. 

Phyllanthus, moncec. monad, and euphorbiaceae, S, 
tr. and an. chiefly W. Ind. which succeed well in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root freely in soil 
under a hand-glass. 

Phyllis, pentan. dig. and rubiaceae, a G. tr. Canar. 
which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings root 
in sand under a hand-glass. 

Phylloma, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, a S. tr. 
Bourb. which thrives well in sandy loam, requires 
very little water, and is increased by suckers. 

Phys. des Arb., Duhamel sur le Physique des Ar- 
bres. 

Physalis, winter cherry, pentan. monog. and sola- 
nese, S. and G. tr. and H. peren. and an. chiefly 
N. Amer. which thrive well in rich, light soil, and 
are increased by young cuttings under a hand- 
glass or by seeds. 

Physic-gardeners, herbalists, or simplicists, 7464. 

Physic-nut, — see Jatropha. 

Physic or herb gardens, their formation, 7360. 

Phyteuma, rampion, pentan. monog. and campa- 
nulaceae, a G. peren. and H. peren. and a bien. 
chiefly Europe, which thrive in rich, light soil, 
do well in pots, and are increased by dividing at 
the root : the garden rampion is a campanula. 

Phytolacca, dodec. decag. and chenopodeae, S. tr. 
As. Afr. and Amer. which thrive well in loam 
and peat, and are increased by cuttings or seeds. 

Piaranthus, pentan. monog. and asclepiadeai, a 
D. S. tr. C. B. S. a succulent which grows in 
loamy soil with old lime rubbish, and sand well 
drained, and readily increased by cuttings. 

Picciuoli, Giuseppe, his work on gardening, page 
1128. A. D. 1783. 

Pick and pick-axe, 1296. 

Picking, 1853. 

Picramnia, dicec. pentan. and , a S. tr. 

Jam. which thrives in loamy soil, and large cut- 
tings root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 

Picridium, syngen. polyg. asqual. and cichoraceae, 
a H. peren and an. France and Barb, of common 
culture. 

Picris, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cicboraceae, H. 
peren. and an. chiefly Europ. of common cul- 
ture. 

Picris hieracioides, hawkweed-like, ox-tongue, 
4291. 

Picton, a seat in Pembrokeshire, 7609. 

Pierard, Charles Francis, his work on gardening, 

page 1122. A. D. 1820. 
Piercefield, a seat in Monmouthshire, 7567. 
Pierre, Louis de, his works on gardening, page 1108. 

A. D. 1772. 
Pigeon-house, — see Columbarium. 
Pigeon-houses of Persia, 466. 

Pigott, Richard, his work on gardening, page 1114. 

A. D. 1820. 
Pilewell House, Hampshire, 7594. 
Pilewort, ficaria verna. 
Pillwort, pilularia globulifera. 
Pilularia, pillwort, cryptog. hydropter. and marsi- 

leaceae, a H. peren. Brit, an aquatic of common 

culture. 

Pimelea, dian. monog. and thymelea;, G. tr. Aus- 
tral. which thrive best in sandy peat, and young 
cuttings root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Pimpernell, — see Anagallis. 

Pimpiriella, burnet-saxifrage, pentan. dig, and um- 



1214 



GENERAL INDEX. 



belliferes, H. peren. and an an. chiefly Europ. 
which grow in rich, light soil, and are increased 

by seeds. 

Pimpinella anisum, the anise, 4219. 

Pincknevi-, pentan. mono^. and rubiacese, a F. tr. 
Georgia, which grows in sandy loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Pindemonte, Ippolito. his works on gardening, 
page 1129. A. D. 1817. 

Pine-appie, 514. — see Bromelia. 

Pine-tree, — see Pinus. 

Pinery, its construction, 2645 ; general culture and 
management, 2G97. 

Pinguicula, butterwort, dian. monogyn. and lenti- 
bulareee, a G. an. Carolin. and H. jperen. Europ. 
which grow naturally in swamps, and succeed in 
pots of any species of sphagnum, witli a little peat 
at the bottom, like droscra ; they are increased 
by offsets from the heart of the plant, and from 
seed. 

Pinguicula vulgaris, the common butterwort, 4320. 

Pink, — see Dianthus. 

Pinkie House, East Lothian, 7619. 

Pinus, the pine-fir and larch, nionoec. monad, and 
coniferess, a S. tr. Amboyna, G. tr. E. Ind. and 
H. tr Eur. and Amer. ; the S. species succeed in 
light, loamy soil, and ripened cuttings »aken oft" at 
a joint will root, though not readily, in sand 
under a hand-glass; the G. species require the 
same soil, and roots more freely ; the H. sjiccies 
grow in light soil, and are commonly increased 
by seeds. 

Pinus abies, the spruce-fir, and other firs in com- 
mon cultivation, 7058. to 7067. 

Pinus cedrus, and P. larix, the cedar-larch, and 
common larch, 7051. and 7053. 

Pinus sylvestris, the Scotch or wild pine, and the 
other pines in common cultivation, t(HO. 

Piper, pepper, dian. trig, and urticccB, S. tr. chiefly 
climbers, percn. and an. W. Ind. mostly succu- 
lents which grow in sandy loam and peat, and are 
readily increased by cuttings and suckers. 

Pipewort, eriocaulon septangulare. 

Piqueria, syngen. polyg. iisqual. and corymbiferese, 
a G. peren. Mex. wliich grows freely in any light, 
rich soil, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass. 

Piscidia, Jamaica dogwood, diadel. decan. and legu- 
minoseae, a S. tr. W. Ind. a strong fast-growing 
plant in sandy loam, and cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Piscinary, 1767. 

Pise, or en pise, {en pire or en pis, in the worst man- 
ner, that is, as a last resource,) a mode of building 
mud walls, 1564. 

Pisonia, heptan. monog. and nyctagineae, S. tr. 
W. Ind. and a G. tr. Austral, which grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Pistachia-trec, — see Pistacia. 

Pistacia, dioec. pentag. and terebintaceae, G. tr. 
Barb, and H. tr. S. Eur. the G. species grow in 
loam and peat, and ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass ; the H. tr. are rather tender, 
but grow in common soil, and are increased by 
layers or cuttings under a hand-glass in sandy 
soil. 

Pisum, pea, diadelph. decan. and leguminosese, a 
H. peren. Eng. and H. an. S. Eur. of common 
culture. 

Pisum maritimum, the sea-pea, 4309. 
Pisum sativum, the garden-pea, 3597 ; to force the 
pea, 3393. 

Pit, a structure with a glass cover or roof, used as a 
habitation for plants. Earth-pit, b'lrk-pit, flued 
pit, M'Phail's pit, Alderstone ]nt, pit with rising 
frame. West's pit, &c. 1540. to 1544. 

Pit, in the conservatory, the bed of earth in which 
the trees are planted, occupying the principal part 
of the area of the house. 

Pit of a stove or hot-house, an excavation in the 
moist or bark-stove for containing fermentable 
materials in order to supply bottom heat. 

Pitcairnia, hexan. monog. and bromeleee, S. tr. W. 
Ind. and S. Amer. which flower freely in light, 
rich soil, and are increased by suckers from the 
root. 

Pitcher-plant, nepenthes distillatoria, 593. 

Pitmaston, a seat near Worcester, 3329. 

Pittosporum, pentan. monog. and pittosporese, a S. 
tr. Guinea, and G. tr. Austral. C. B. S. and E. 
Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings 
i-oot freely in sand under a hand-glass. 



Plane-tree, — sec Platan us. 

Plank-plant, bossiaea scolopendrium. 

Planner {Scotch), a maker of plans, — see Horticul- 
tural Architect. 

Plans for improving country-residences, 73G4 ; how 
to form, 7364; important uses of, 73!)9; how to 
carry into execution, 7370. 

Plans of gardens and garden objects, how to form, 
1895 ; to transfer them to ground, 1913 ; to exe- 
cute them, 1940. 

Plant, grass., Histoire des Plantes Grasses. Par 
A. P. Decandolle. 

Plant packing-case, different sorts of, 1404. 

Plantago, plantain, tetran. monog. and plantagineae, 
a G. tr. and bien. C. B. S. and H. peren. and an. 
chiefly Eur. all of very easy culture in common 
soil. 

Plantago coronopus, star of the earth, 4315. 
Plantain, — see Plantago, 
Plantain-tree, — see Musa. 

Plantations, neglected, to improve, neglected hedge- 
rows, hedge-row timber, neglected ornamental 
plantations, 6914. to 6924. 

Plantations, ornamental, their formation, 6852 ; 
form, extent, disposition, general form, situa- 
tion, arrangement of species, size of plants, 6853. 
to 6876. 

Plantations of trees, their uses, as to shelter and 
climate, improving soils, shade, separation, seclu- 
sion, distinction, appropriation, concealment, to 
heighten agreeable objects, direct the eye to ob- 
jects, render indifferent objects agreeable, en- 
hance the value of landed property, afford profit, 
6762. to 6775. 

Plantations, their different kinds, group, clump, 
woods, copsewoods, 6810. to 6814. 

Plantations, their disposition in the ancient style, 
7205 ; in the modern style, 7214. 

Plantations, useful, their formation, 6815. ; prepar- 
ing the "soil, form, enclosing, fences, species of 
tree, mixture, whether to be sown or planted, 
disposition of the plants, number of plants and 
distance, size of the plants, seasons for planting, 
operations of, 6816. to 6851. 

Plantations, useful and ornamental, their culture 
and management, 6877 ; culture of the soil, fill- 
ing up blanks, pruning, for utility, for ornament, 
seasons for, implements for, resinous trees, non- 
resinous trees, heading-down trees, pruning for 
bends, coppices, osier holts, strips and screens, 
trees for shade, trees in parks, in pleasure-grounds 
and lawns, thimiing, 68/8. to 6913. 

Plantations, valuation of, 6966, 

Planting, — see Arboriculture. 

Planting, different modes of performing the oper- 
ation, 2077. to 2109. 

Planting in arboriculture, operation of, by pitting, 
by the diamond dibber, by the planter's mattock, 
by the planter, by slitting, 6841. to 6851. 

Plants, — see Vegetables. 

Plants, as indicative of soils, list of, 1036. 

Plants used as preserves and pickles, 4258. 

Plants used in tarts, confectionary, and domestic 
medicine, 4195. 

Plas Newydd, a seat in Anglesea, 7603. 

Plat {plat, Fr. flat), a piece of ground of determinate 
form, small compared with a field, but larger than 
a border, bed, or stripe, — see Plot. 

Plat-band {plat bande, Fr.), a border round a 
flat. 

Platanus, plane-tree, moncec. polyan. and amenta- 
cesB, H. tr. Levant, and N. Amer. handsome tim- 
ber trees which grow in common soil, and are 
propagated by layers and cuttings. 

Piatt, Sir Hugh, his works on gardening, page 1099. 
A.D. 1594. 

Plattes, Gabriel, his works on gardening, page HOC. 
A.D. 1633. 

Platylobium, flat pea, diadel. decan. and legumino- 
sese, G. tr. Austral, which grow in sandy loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Plax, Anthony William, his works on gardening, 
page 1123. A.D. 1764. 

Pleacher (from plecto, to plait or weave), an arbor- 
maker, — see Topiarius. 

Pleasure-ground, garden-scenery devoted to show 
and recreation, generally placed near the house, 
and consisting of lawn, shrubbery, flower-gardens, 
walks, water, seats, &c. 

Plectranthus, didyn. gymnos. and labiates, a S. tr. 
and an. and G. tr. and a bien. Africa and E. Ind. 
of easy culture in light soil. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1215 



Plectronia, pentan. monog. and rhamnese, a G. tr. 

C. B. S. whicli thrives in loam and peat, and 

ripened cuttings root under a hand-glass in sand. 
Pieea, ennean. trig, and junceae, a G. peren. Carol. 

of common culture. 
Plenck, J. J., his work on gardening, page 1125. 

A.D. 1784. 

Plenck ic, Icones Plantarum, &c., or figures of 
plants, &c. by Dr. J. J. Plenck. 

Pleurothallis, gynan. monan. and orchideee, a S. 
peren. W. Ind. a parasite which requires to be 
treated as aerides, &c. 

Plocama, pentan. monog. and rubiaceee, a G. tr. 
Canar. which grows in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Plot (from coniplolei-, to contrive or design), a 
plot laid out in figures or contrivances, as a par- 
terre. 

Ploughed gardens and their management, 7453. to 
7456. 

Ploughman's spikenard, — see Baccharis. 
Pluk. aim., Leon. Plukennett Almagestum Bota- 
nicum. 

Pluk. phyt, L. Plukennett Phytographia. 

Plukenetia, monoec. monad, and euphorbiaces, aS. 
tr. W. Ind. a climber which grows best in loamy 
soil, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Plum-tree, — see Prunus. 

Plumbago, leadwort, pentan. monog. and plumba- 
gineae, S. tr. E. and W. Ind. a G. tr. C. B. S. and 
a H. peren. S. Eur. The S. and G. species flower 
freely in loam and peat, and cuttings root in sand 
under a hand-glass : the H. species is of easy 
culture. 

Plumeria, pentan. dig. and apocynea, S. tr. E. and 
W. Ind. which flower freely in light, loamy soil, 
and require but little water, especially when not 
in a growing state. Large cuttings laid to dry for 
a considerable time, and stuck in the tan, will 
root freely. 

Plumpton, scenery of, in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Pluviometer, or rain-gauge, 1286. 

Poa, meadow-grass, trian. dig. and gramineae, S. 
peren. and an. E. Ind. and H. peren. and an. 
Eur. and N. Amer. all of the easiest culture. 

Podalyria, decan. monog. and leguminoseee, G. tr. 
C. B. S. pretty plants which grow in loam and 
peat, and are increased by ripened cuttings in 
sand, under a hand-glass, or by seeds. 

Podocarpus, moncec. monadel. and coniferese, G. tr. 
China and C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass in sand. 

Podolepis, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereee, 
G. peren. Au.stral. which thrive well in loan! and 
peat, and are increased by dividing at the root. 

Podolobiurn, decan. monog. and leguminoseas, a G. 
tr. N. S. W. a handsome plant which grows in 
loam and peat, and young cuttings may be rooted 
in sand under a bell-glass. 

Podophyllum, duck's foot, polyan. monog. and pa- 
paveracese, a H. peren. N. Amer. which thrives 
in rich, light soil, and isdncreased by dividing at 
the root. 

Poederle, I'aine, his works on gardening, 

page 1129. A.D. 1772. 
Poet's cassia, osyris alba. 

Pogonia, gynan. monan. and orchideee, a G. peren. 
and H. peren. N. Amer. which grows best in 
peat, and is increased by offsets from the bulbs. 

Poincinia, Barbadoes flower-fence, decan. monog. 
and leguminoseas, S. tr. E. Ind. which require a 
strong heat to make them flower well ; they grow 
in loam and peat, and are increased by cuttings 
in sand, under a hand-glass, or by seeds. 

Poinsot, , his work on gardening, page 1121. 

A.D. 1804. 

Poison-nut, strychnos nux vomica. 

Poison-oak, rhus toxicodendron. 

Poisonous plants, of common occurrence, in Britain, 
4234. 

Polemonium, Greek valerian, pentan. monog. and 

polemoniaceas, H. peren. N. Amer. and Brit, of 

the easiest culture. 
Polesdon, a seat in Surrey, 7.'327. 
Polianthes, tuberose, hexan. monog. and hemorocal- 

lidose, a G. peren. E. Ind., 6332. 
Policie, the Scotch term for pleasure-ground. 
Polish and Russian works on gardening, 7697. 
Polish millet, digitaria sanguinalis, 1335. 
PoUichia, monan. monog. and chenopodes, a G. 

bien. C. B. S. of easy culture 



Polycarpon, all-seed, tetran. trig, and caryopbyMe«, 
a H. an. Engl, of common treatment. 

Polycnemum, trian. monog. and chenopodea?, a H. 
an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Polygala, milkwort, diadelph. octan. and pedicula- 
reae, G. tr. C. B. S. and H. tr. peren. and an. Eur. 
and N. Amer. ; the G. sp. grow in peat soil, and 
young cuttings root freely in sand, under a bell- 
glass ; the hardy sorts prefer a similar soil, and 
are increased by dividing at the root, or seeds. 

Polygonatum, Solomon's seal, hexan. monog. and 
smilaceas, H. peren. Brit, and Amer. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Polygonatum vulgare, 4308. 

Polygonum persicaria, octan. trig, and polygoneaa, a 

S. peren. and G. bien. E. Ind. and H. tr. peren. 

and an. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy culture. 
Polymnia, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbifereae, 

a S. bien. Afr. and H. peren. Amer. of common 

culture. 

Polypodium, polypody, cryptog. Alices and filiceae, 
S. peren. W. Ind. and H. peren. Brit, of easy cul- 
ture. 

Polypody, — see Polypodium. 

Polypogon, trian. dig. and gramineae, a H. peren. 
Brit, a grass of the usual culture. 

Pom. Brit., Pomona Britannica, by Henry Phillips. 

Pomaderris, pentan. monog. and rhamneae, G. tr. 
N. Holl. which thrive in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Pomegranate, — see Punica. 
Pon-qua-qua, his villa, near Canton, 480. 
Ponds, their formation, 1719, larger excavations, 
1945. 

Pondweed, — see Potamogeton. 

Pongamia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. which thrives in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Poniemenia, a seat at Grodno, 283. 

Ponsonby Hall, Cumberland, 7593. 

Pontederia, hexan. monog. and asphodeleas, a S. 
peren. E. Ind. and H. peren. N. Amer. aquatics of 
common culture. 

Pontey, Mr. William, his works on gardening, 
page 1112. A. D. 1800. 

Ponthieva, gynan. monan. and orchideae, a S. peren. 
W. Ind. which grows in sandy loam and peat well 
drained, and little water given when it is not in a 
growing state. 

Pontilly Castle, Cornwall, 7601. 

Ponty Pool, a seat in Monmouthshire, 7567. 

Poplar, — see Populus. 

Poppy, — see Papaver. 

Populus, poplar, dioec. octan. and amentaceaej H. 
tr. N. Amer. and Eur. of easy culture in moist 
deep soil, and increased readily, some by cut- 
tings, others by layers, and all by cuttings of the 
root. 

Populus alba, and other species grown as timber- 
trees, 7134. to 7142. 

Porcelia, polyan. polyg. and annoneaceae, H. tr. N. 
Amer. which grow in loam and peat, and are in- 
creased by layers. 

Porches, 1809. 

Port Elliot, a seat in Cornwall, 7601. 

Portable threshing machine, in use in gardening, 

1705. 
Porticoes, 1809. 

Portlandia, pentan. monog. and rubiaceae, S. tr. 
W. Ind. beautiful plants which thrive in sandy 
loam and peat, and cuttings, with their leaves 
not shortened, root readily under a hand-glass. 

Portswood House, Hampshire, 7594. 

Portulaca, purslane, dodec. monog. and portulaceae, 
a S. bien. and an. E. and W. Ind. and H. an. S. 
Amer. and Eur. of common culture. 

Portulaca oleracea, the garden purslane, 4088. 

Portulacaria, purslane-tree, pentan. pentag. and 
portulaceffi, a G. tr. Afr. a succulent which thrives 
in sandy loam and brick rubbish, and is easily in- 
creased by cuttings. 

Poscharskey, Ch. F., his works on gardening, page 
1127. A.D. 1808. 

Pot-herbs and garnishings, 4081 : to force pot-herbs, 
3399. 

Potamogeton, pond-weed, tetrandr. tetragyn. and 
alismaceae, H. peren. Brit, aquatics of easy cul- 
ture. 

Potatoe, — see Solanum. 

Potentilla, cinquefoil (five leaves), icos. polyg. and 
rosaceae, H. tr. peren. and a bien. chiefly Eur. of 
j easy culture. 



1216 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Potentilla anserina, the wild tansy or .soose,grass, 

Poterium, burnet, monoec. polyan. and rosaceae, G. 
tr. S. Eur. and H. peren. Eur. of com.non cul- 
ture. 

Poterium sanguisorba, the common burnet, 4072. 
Pothos, tetran. monog. and aroideae, S. peren. W. 

Ind. and a H. peren. N. Amer. all of which thrive 

well in loamy soil, and are increased by dividing 

the roots, or by seed. 
Potsdam, gardens of, 208. 
Powdersham Castle, Devonshire, 7600. 
Powel, Anthony, Esq. his work on gardening, page 

1107. A.D. 1769. 
Powerscourt, a seat in Wicklow, 7654. 
Pow3's Castle, a seat in Montgomeryshire, 7567. 
Poynton, a seat in Cheshire, 7590. 
Pozzi, George, his works on the vine, page 1128. 

A.D. 1810. 

Prasium, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, F. tr. S. Eur. 
which thrives in light rich soil, and young cut- 
tings root under a hand-glass. 

Praslin, formerly Vaux le Vicompte and V. le Vil- 
lars, now Vause Praslin, a seat near Paris, the first 
attempt of Le Notre's to lay out grounds. 

Freaudeau-Chemilly, E., his works on gardening, 
page 1120. A. D. 1794. 

Prenanthes, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cichoracese, 
a F. tr. Barb, and H. peren. and a bien. N. Amer. 
and Eur. of common culture. 

Preserving vegetables, 2289. 

Preserving vegetables, operation for, 2289. 

Preston Hall, in East Lothian, 7619. 

Prestwood, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 

Prestwould Hall, Leicestershire, 7573. 

Price, Uvedale, Esq., his writings on gardening, 
page 1110. A. D. 1794. 

Prick, or pricker, a small dibber, — see Dibber. 

Pricking, or pricking out, transplanting very young 
plants or seedlings, with a prick or small dibber. 

Primrose, primula vulgaris, — see Primula. 

Primula, primrose, pentan. monog. and primulaceae, 
H. peren. Eur. beautiful little plants : the hardier 
sorts grow in loamy soils in shaded situations, 
and the alpines thrive best in peat and loam in 
pots ; all require to be frequently parted and re- 
planted. 

Primula auricula, the auricula, 6339. 
Primula elatior, the oxlip, 6403. 
Primula veris, the cowslip, 6401. 
Primula vulgaris, the primrose, 6399. 
Primula vulgaris, var. polyanthus, the polyanthus, 
6389. 

Prince's feather, araaranthus hypochondriacus. 

Prinos, winter berry, hexan. monog. and rhamneae, 
F. and H. tr. N. Amer. which grow well in light 
soil, but prefer peat, and are increased by layers 
or seeds. 

Priory, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Priory, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Priva, didyn. angios. and verbenaceae, S. peren. 
Mex. and E. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass. 

Privet, — see Ligustrum. 
Professional police of gardening, 7700. 
Promenades, public, equestrian, pedestrian, and 

mountain, 7313. to 7322. 
Pronvitle, Augustus de, his work on gardening, 

page 1122. A. D. 1818. 
Propagation, different operations for, 1985. 
Pi^^riety, as a requisite beauty in gardening. 

Props for plants, different kinds of, used in garden- 
ing, 1517. 

Prosopis, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. a prickly plant of which the pods are 
eaten as a spice in India ; it grows in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Prospect towers, their use in gardening, 1806. 

Prostanthera, didyn. gymnos. and labiatece, a G. tr. 
N. S. W. a beautiful plant which thrives in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in the same soil under 
a hand-glass. 

Protea, tetran. monog. and proteaceae, G. tr. C.B.S. 
magnificent plants which grow best in light turfy 
loam, with one third fine sand; the pots well 
drained, and furnished with a stratum of sherds 
or gravel ; care must be taken not to let the 
plants droop for want of water, as they will sel- 
dom recover. Ripened cuttings taken off at a 
joint, and pared quite smooth, and thinly planted 



in pots of sand, will root under a hand-glass, but 
not plunged ; damp must be avoided by wiping the 
glasses frequently. 
Protecting vegetables, 2206. 

Prunella, self-heal, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, 
H. peren. and an. N. Amer. and Eur. which 
thrive in light rich soil, and are increased by 
dividing at the root. 

Pruning, origin of, 32. 

Pruning, science of, 2110. 

Prunus, the plum and cherry, icos. di-pentag. and 
rosaceae, S. G. and F. tr. W. and E. Ind. and H. 
tr. Eur. and N. Amer. The G. and F. sp. grow in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root in sand under 
a hand-glass : the H. sorts grow in any loamy soil, 
and are increased by all the modes of propagating 
trees. 

Prunus avium, the gean, 4577. 

Prunus cerasus, the cherry, 4574; cherry-house, 
2674 ; and to force the cherry, 3117. 

Prunus domestica, the common plum, 4550; to 
force the plum, 43/0. 

Prunus spinosa, the sloe, 4765 ; P. padus, the bird- 
cherry, 4766. 

Psiadia, syngen. polyg. necess. and corymbifereae, a 
S. tr. Maurit. which grows freely in rich light 
soil, and cuttings wiU root readily under a hand- 
glass. 

Psidium, guava, icos. monog. and myrteaceae, S. tr. 

W. Ind. grown there for their fruit : here they 

thrive in loam and peat, and ripen fruit readily ; 

they are increased by cuttings in sand under a 

hand-glass, or by layers. 
Psidium, pyriferum, pomiferum, &c. 5982. 
Psilotum, cryptog. stachyopt. and lycopodineae, a S. 

peren. W. Ind. a fern which grows in loam and 

peat, and cuttings will root under a hand-glass in 

sand. 

Psoralea diadelph. decan. and leguminoseje, a S. 
bien. and G. tr. and peren. chiefly C. B. S. which 
grow freely in loam and peat, and are increased, 
by cuttings in sand under a bell-glass, or by seeds, 
which they ripen abundantly. 

Psoralea esculenta, the bread-root, 4333. 6031. 

Psychotria, pentan. monog, and rubiaces, S. tr. W. 
Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Pteris, brake, cryptog. filices and filiceee, a S. 
tr. and peren. W. Ind. G. peren Mad. N. S. W. 
and H. peren. Brit, and N. Amer. all of easy cul- 
ture. 

Pterocarpus, diadelph. decan. and leguminoseas, S. 
tr. E. and W. Ind. which thrive in light loamy 
soil, and cuttings not deprived of their leaves, root 
in sand under a hand-glass. 

Pteronia, syngen. polyg. sequal. and cynarocephaleae, 
G. tr. C. B. S. which thrive in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Pterospermum, monad, dodec. and malvaceae, G. tr. 
E. Ind. which thrive well in light loam, and cut- 
tings, not deprived of their leaves, root freely in 
sand under a hand-glass. 

Pterostylis, gynan. monan. and orchideje, a G. 
peren. N. S. W. which thrives in sandy loam and 
peat, without much water after it has done flower- 
ing. 

Pterygodium, gynan. monan. and orchideae, a G. 
peren. C. B. S. which may be treated as ptero- 
stylis. 

Puanke-qua, villa of, near Canton, 076. 
Public gardens, to lay out, 7312. 
Public laws relative to gardening, 7700. 
Public parks, their formation, 7313; management, 
7492. 

Public squares, their formation, 7319; manage- 
ment, 7491. 
Puccoon, sanguinaria canadensis. 
Puddling or mudding the roots of plants, 6849. 
Puddling to hold v;ater, 1719. 
Pulhawa, a seat near Lublin, in Poland, 283. 
Pullein, Samuel, M. A., his work on gardening, page 
- 1105. A. D. 1760. 

Pulmonaria, lungwort, pentan. monog. and bora- 
gineae, H. peren. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy cul- 
ture in light soil. 

Pulsatilla, pasque flower, polyan. polyg. and ranun- 
culaceas, H. peren. Eur. which grow best in light 
sandy soil, and may be increased by division at 
the root. 

Pultensa, decan. monog. and leguminoseae, S. tr. 
Austral, which grow in sandy loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily under a boll-gl.iss in 
sand. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



121 T 



Pultemy, Richard, F. R. S., author of various bota- 
nical works, and of Sketches of the Progress of 
Botany in England, 2 vols. 8vo. 1790. He died in 
1801. 

P*umpkin, cucurbita pepo, 4208. 

Pumps used in gardening, 1716, 

Punica, pomegranate, icos. monog. and myrteaceffi, 
a G. peren. W. Ind. H. tr. S. Europ. of easy cul- 
ture in light soil, and increased by cuttings. 

Punica granatum, the common pomegranate, 5952. 

Punnet, a small flat basket of from four to twelve 
inches in diameter, and one to three inches deep, 
formed of split wood or shavings of timber, — see 
Basket. 

Pujialia, pentan. monog. and amaranthacese, a S. tr. 
and peren. E. Ind. v.hich grows readily in light 
rich soil, and cuttings root freely under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Pursh, Fl. Amer., Flora Americee Septentrionalis ; 
or, a Systematic Description and Arrangement of 
the Plants of Xorth America, by Frederick Pursh. 

Purslane, — see Portulaca. 

Purslane-tree, portulacaria afra. 

Puttonliam Priory, Surrey, 7527. to 1217. 

Pycnanthemum, didyn. gymnos. and labiates, H. 
peren. S. Amer. which thrive in light rich soil, 
and are increased by dividing at the root. 

I'ye, H., Esq., his ideas on laying out public squares, 
7-321. 

Pt/e, Mrs. Hampden, her works on gardening, page 

lies. A. D. 1775. 
Pyrethrum, feverfew, syngen. polyg. super, and 

'corymbiferese, G. tr. TenerifFe and Canaries, and 

H. peren. Europe, of easy culture. 
Pyrola, winter green, decan. monog. and ericeje, H. 

peren. Brit, rather difficult to cultivate; they do 

best in sand or gravel, in a shady situation, and 

are increased by seeds or young cuttings under a 

hand-glass. 

Pyrus, the apple, pear, service, &c. icos. di-pentag. 
and rosacese, H. peren. chiefly Eur. of easy culture, 
and increased by seeds, layers, cuttings, '&c. 

Pyrui aria, the whitebeam-tree, 4768. 

Pyrus aucuparia, the mountain ash, 4767- 

Pyrus communis, the pear, 4433. 

Pyrus domestica, the true service, 4473. 

Pyrus mains, the apple-tree, 4339. 

Pyrus torminalis, the wild service, 4768. 

Pyxidanthera, pentan. monog, and ericese, a H. 
peren. Carolin. which thrives in peat soil, and may 
be increased by cuttings under a hand-glass. 

Pjt House, WUtshire, 7596. 



Q 

Quaking grass, — see Briza. 

Quassia^ decan. monog. and raagnoliacece, S. tr. W. 
Ind. which flower freely in loam and peat, and 
ripened cuttings, taken off at a joint, not defoli- 
ated, root readily in sand undejr a hand-glass. 

Queenby Hall, Leicestershire, 7o/3. 

Queensborough, a seat in Galway, 7d/2. 

Querber, J , his works on gardening, page 1120. 

A. D. 1800. 

Quercitron, the dyer's oak, 7072. 

Quercus, oak, monoec. polyan. and amentaceae, H. 
tr. N. Amer. and Eur. which grow in loamy soil, 
and are increased by seeds, and some sorts by 
layers and grafting. 

Ouercus cerria, the luccomhe oak a variety of the 
Turkey oak, 7071. 

Quercus robur and pedunculata, the common oak, 
7070. 

Queria, trian. monog. and carj-ophylleae, a H, an. 

Spain, of common culture. 
Quiliwort, isoetes lacustris. 
Quince-tree, — see Cydonia. 

Quincunx, a mode of planting or disposing of objects, 
2076. 

Quintinie, Jean de la, his writings on gardening, 

page 1116. A. D. 1696. 
Qulsqualis, decan. monog. and combretacese, S. tr. 

R Ind. climbers, which grow in loam and peat, 
. and root freely in sand under a hand-glass. 



R. 

Raby Castle, Durham, 7585, 

Radiola, all-seed, tetran. tetrag. and senipernveae, 
, a H. an. Brit, of easy culture. 

4 



Radish, — see Raphanus. 

Radnorshire, gardens of, 7610. 

Rafflesia arnoldii, and R. horstieldii, 6737. 

Rafnia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a G. bien. 

C. B. S. of common culture. 
Ragged Robin, lychnis floscuculi. 
Ragwort, — see Othonna. 

Rails, or railings, used in gardening, 1803. and 

6092. 

Rain-gauge, or pluviometer, 1286. 
Piainham, a seat in Norfolk, 7554. 
Raith, a seat in Fifeshire, described, 7635. 
Rajania, dicec. hexan. and dioscoreae, a S. peren. 

W. Ind. which thrives well in rich loam, and is 

increased by dividing at the roots. 
Rake {rateau, Fr.), different kinds of, 1314. 
Raking, 1874. 

Ramonda, pentan. monog. and solanacea;, a H, 
peren. Pyrenees, which thrives in dry rockwork 
or in pots, in loam and peat, and is increased by 
dividing at the root, or by seeds. 

Ramoon-tree, — see Trophis. 

Rampion, — see Campanula and Phyteuma. 

Ramsay, James, a Scotch landscape-gardener, 
363. 

Ramson, allium ursinum. 

Rana arborea, or tree-frog, 6086. 

Randia, pentan. monog. and rubiaceae, S. tr. Afr. 
and W. Ind. which grow best in sandy loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass, in moist heat. 

Ranft, I. F., his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1788. 

Ransleben, his essay on gardening, page 1127. A. D. 
1817. 

Ranunculus, crowfoot, polyan. polyg. and ranuncu- 
lacese, H. peren. bien. and an. of easy culture in 
common garden-soil, some requiring a moist 
situation, and others, as R. aquatilis, to be planted 
in shallow water. 

Ranunculus asiaticus, the garden ranunculus, 6256. 

Rape, brassica napus. 

Raphanus, radish, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferese, a 
H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Raphanus sativus, the garden radish, 3754 ; to 
force the radish, 3403 

Rapin, Rene, a French writer on gardening, page 
1116. A. D. 1665. 

Rapistrum, tetrad, silic. and crucifereae, H. an. 
Egypt and Eur. of common culture. 

Rarities, as garden decorations, 1841. 

Raspberry, rubus idseus, 4696. — see Rubns. 

Rastillioii, a seat in the county of Cork, 7666. 

Rath farn ham Castle, a seat in the county of Dub- 
lin, 7653. 

Ranch, B. A., his works on gardening, page 1120. 
A. D. 1801. 

Rauwolfia, pentan. monog. and apoc}-neae, St. tr. S. 

Amer. and Jamaica, which grow' in loam and 

peat, and cuttings may be rooted in sand under 

a hand-glass. 
Ravensworth Castle, Durham, 7584. 
Re, Filippo, his works on gardening, page 1128. A. D 

1809. 

Rea, John, gent., his works on gardening, nage 1101. 

A. D. 1665. 
Read's garden syringe, 1419. 

Reaumuria, polyan. pentag. and ficoidece, a F. tr. 
Syria, a handsome flowering plant in sandy loam 
and peat, and young cuttings root under a hand . 
glass. 

Red Castle, a seat in Ross-shire, 7647. 
Red cedar, juniperus lirginiana. 
Red Rise, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 
Red spider, — see Acarus. 
Redgrave Hall, SuflTolk, 7552. 

Redoute, J. P. and C. A. Thorv, their works on 

gardening, page 1122. A. D. 1819. 
Reeds, — see Arundo. 

Reed5, coverings of, used in gardening, 1520. 
Regent's Park, London, 7313. 

Regina Claudia {Reine Claude, Fr.^, Queen Claudine, 
a plum, the green gage of this country, — see 
Plums, 4553. 

Reld, John, his works on gardening, page 1101. 
A. D. 1683. 

Relhania, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbiferese, 
a G. tp. C. B. S. which grows in rich, light soil, 
and cuttings root under a hand-glass. 

Religion, its influence on gardening, 512. 

Rem. on Hot, Remarks on Hot-houses, page 1112. 
A. D. 1803. 

Rendcome, a seat in Gloucestershire, 7563, 

I 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Mendella, Prospera, his work on gardening, page 

1128. A. D. 1629. 
Rendlesham Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Renfrewshire, gardening of, 7628. 
Repton, Humphrey, Esq. his writings on gardening, 

page nil, A. D. 1795. 
Reseda, dodec. trig, and capparidese, G. tr. Spain, 

C. B. S. and H. peren. bien. and Eur. all of easy 

culture. 

Reseda odorata, the mignonette, 6484; tree-mig- 
nonette, 6487. 

Residences, the formation and laying out of, 7270 ; 
mansion and demesne, viUa, villa farm, ferme 
ornee, temporary residences, cottage orn^e, 
citizen's villa, suburban house, house with car- 
riage-entrance, house with covered entrance, 
house and conservatory, house and flower- 
garden-entrance, house and French parterre, 
common front or street garden, farmer's garden, 
laborer's cottage and garden, 7271. to 7311. 

Resinous timber-trees, the most useful sorts de- 
scribed, 7039. 

Jiesson, Jean Baptiste Deschines de, a French 
author on gardening, page 1117. A. D. 1716 

Rest-harrow, — see Ononis. 

Restio, rope-grass, dioec. trian. and restiacese, a G. 

peren. C. B. S. which thrives in peat soil, and is 

increased by dividing at the root. 
Retarding vegetation, operations for, 2177. 
Retreat, Devonshire, 7600. 

Retzia, pentan. monog. and convolvulacese, a 

G. tr. C. B. S. which thrives in any rich soil, 
and cuttings root freely in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Rhagadiolus, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cichoracese, 

H. an. Eur. of common culture. 

Rhagodia, polyg. monoec. and chenopodeje, a G. tr. 

N. S. W. which thrives in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 
Rhamnus, buckthorn, pentan. monog. and rhain- 

nese, G. tr. China, C. B. S. and H. tr. Eur. and N. 

Amcr. ; the G. sorts thrive in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root freely in sand under a hand-glass ; 

the H. species grow in the common soil, and are 

increased by layers or seeds ; some of these are 

evergreens, others decumbent. 
Rhapis, polyg. monoec. and palmese, a S. tr. and G. 

bien. China and Carolina, which thrive in sandy 

loam, and are increased by suckers. 
Rheed. mal., Hortus Indicus Malabaricus. Ador- 

natus per Henr. van Rheede van Drakenstein. 
Rheum, rhubarb, ennean. trig, and polygonese, H. 

peren. Eur. and Asia, of easy culture. 
Rheum rhaponticum, common culinary or tart- 
rhubarb, 4196 ; to force rhubarb, 4203. 
Rhexia, octan. monog. and melastomefe, a S. tr. S. 

Amer. and F. and H. peren. N. Amer. beautiful 
' plants which grow best in peat soil, and are 

readily increased. 
Rhinanthus, yellow rattle, didyn. angios. and scro- 

phularineae, a H. an. which prefers a peat soil, 

and a moist situatioon. 
Rhipsalip, icosan. monog. and cacteae, D. S. tr. W. 

Ind. and S. Amer. succulents of easy culture. 
Rhodiola, rose-root, dicec. octan. and sempervivese, 

a H. peren. Brit, of easy culture in dry soil. 
Rhododendron, decan. monog. and rhodoraceas, 

G. F. and H. tr. chiefly N. Amer. which prefer 

peat soil, and are increased by layers or seeds, 

6562. 

Rhodora, decan. monog. and rhodoracese, a H. tr. 
N. Amer. which may be treated like rhodo- 
dendron. 

Rhopala, tetrandr. ihonogyn. and proteacese, S. tr. 
which grow in sandy loam, with a little peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Rhubarb, — see Rheum. 

Rhus, sumach, pentan. trig, and terebintacete, S. 
and G. tr. chiefly C. B. S. and H. tr. N. Amer. 

\ The G. sorts thrive well in loam and peat, and 

; cuttings root freely under a hand-glass in sand ; 

: the H. kinds grow in common soil, and are in- 
creased by cuttings of the roots, or layers. 

Rhynchospora, triah. monog. and cyperacese, H. 
peren. Brit, grasses of easy culture. 

Rib-grass, plantago lanceolata. 

Ribes, the currant and gooseberry, pentan. monog. 
and cactefE, H. tr. Eur. and N. Amer. of easy 
culture. 

Ribes grossularia, the gooseberry, 4634. ' 
Ribes nigrum, the black currant, 4678. 
Ribes rubrum, the red currant, 4680. 
Ribes spicatum, the acid or tree currant, 4769. 



Ribstone Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Rice, — see Oryza. 

Richard, , his works on gardening, page 1121. 

A. D. 1802. 

Richardia, hexan. monog. and rubiaceae, a S. tr. 
Vera Cruz, wliich grows in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Richmond Hill, Surrey, 7527. 

Richmond Park, Surrey, 7529. 

Ricinus, palma Christi, moncec. monad, and euphor- 
biaceJE, S. bien. and an. and G. tr. E. Ind. and 
Africa, of easy culture : the tr. species root from 
cuttings taken off at a joint, and planted under a 
hand-glass. 

Ricotia, tetrad, silic. and crucifereae, a H. an. Egypt, 

of common culture. 
Ridging, 1871. — see Operations. 
Riding, a carriage-road or indicated path fit for 

horses and carriages, made for the display of the 

scenery of a residence, 7265. 
Riedel, J. C, his works on gardening, page 1123. 

A. D. 1751. 

RieffHson, Pt., his works on gai-dening, page 1127: 
A. D. 1810. 

Rills, how to form or improve in garden-scenery, 

7223. 

Ring-fence, — see Kitchen-garden. 

Ringing for maturation of fruits, 2168. 

Ringing to induce a state of fruitfulness, different 

modes of performing the operation, 2167. 
Risso, A. and A. Poiteau, their works on gardening, 

page 1122. A. D. 1818. 
Ritter, Charles, his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1804. 
Rivenhall Place, a seat in Essex, 7194. 
Rivers, to improve in garden-scenery, 7223 ; to 

imitate their effects on plants in an aquarium, 

6180. 

Riviere, de la, and Du Moulin, their work on garden- 
ing, page 1117. A. D. 1739. 

Rivinia, tetran. monog. and chenopodeae, S. tr. W. 
Ind. which grow freely in light, rich soil, and are 
readily increased by cuttings or seeds. 

Roads, to form, 1965. 

Roard, J. L., his tract on gardening, page 1121. 
A. D. 1805. 

Robin, C , his works on gardening, page 1121. 

A. D. 1801. 

Robinia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseas, S. tr. E. 
and W. Ind. and H. tr. Siberia ; the S. species 
grow in sandy loam, and are increased by seeds' 
from India, or young cuttings planted in sand 
under a bell-glass ; the H. sorts grow freely in 
common soil, and are increased by layers, or graft- 
ing on R. pseudacacia, or from seeds. 

Robinia pseudacacia, the common acacia, or Ame- 
rican locust-tree, 7105. 

Robinson, , his works on gardening, page 1112. 

A. D. 1798. 

Rocambole, allium scorodoprasum. 

Roche Great Court, Wiltshire, 7596. 

RochoU, A , his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1803. 

Rock-rose, — see Cistus. 

Rocket. — see Hesperis. 

Rocks, as decorations of gardening, 1837 ; natural 
rocks, how to operate on, in garden-scenery, 

7228. 

Rockwork, how to form and plant, 6525. 

Rocqiie, Bartholomew, his work on gardening, page 

1104. A. D. 1753. 
Rode, , his works on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1788. 

Roden/iurst, T , his work on gardening, page 

1109. A. D. 1784. 
Roehampton Grove, Surrey, 7527. 
Roella, pentan. monog. and campanulaceEe, a G. 

tr. peren. and an. C. B. S. which grow in loam 

and peat, and are increased by seeds or young 

cuttings under a hand-glass. 
Rolandra, syngen. polyg. segr. and cynarocephales, 

a S. tr. W. Ind. which thrives in light, rich soil, 

and is readily increased by cuttings. 
Roller, 1455. 
Rolling, 1880. 

Komer, J. Jacques, his works on gardening, page 
1125. A. D. 1791. 

Rondeletia, pentan. monog. and rubiacese, G. tr. 
W. Ind. which grow in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Rookery, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Rook's Nest, a villa in Surrey, 7527. 

Root-cellar, 1704. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1219 



Roots first used by man as food, 28. 
Roots of wild plants, edible, 4300. 
Rope-grass, — see Restio. 

Rosa, rose, icos. polyg. and rosaceae, G. Fr. and H. 
tr. China and Europe ; the tender species grow 
in light rich soil, and cuttings root readily under 
a hand-glass ; the H. sorts grow best in good rich 
soil, and are increased by layers or by budding or 
grafting. 

Rose, — see Rosa. 

Rose, table of the species whence have been ori- 
ginated most of the ornamental sorts, 6546 ; pro- 
pagation, final situation, general culture, forcing, 
insects, 6547. to 6561. 

Rose-acacia, robinia hispida. 

Rose-cara))ion, — see Agrostemma. 

Rose of Jericho, anastatica hierochuntica. 

Rose-root, — see Rhodiola. 

Rosemary, — see Rosmarinus. 

Rose, John, his works on gardening, page 1101. 
A. D. 1666. 

Jtosenburg, O F , his works on gardening, 

page 1127. A. D. 1808. 
Rosmarinus, rosemary, dian. monog. and labiatese, 

a G. tr. Chili and H. tr. Eur. of easy culture in 

dry light soil, and increased by cuttings. 
Rosmarinus olficinalis, the common rosemary, 4179. 
Rossis, K. Glo., his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A. I). 1807. 

Rossignol, I'Abb^ de, his works on gardening, page 

1120. A. D. 1797. 
Ros-^lyn House, Middlesex, 7520. 
Ross-shire, gardens of, 7647. 

Rotation of crops, rationale of, 1107 ; new opinions 

on, 1110 ; in kitchen-gardens, 2555. and 2557. 
Rotboellia, hard-grass, trian. digyn. and graminese, 

H. an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 
Rotheras, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 
Rothia, syngen. polyg. Eequal. and cichoraceee, a H. 

bien. and an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Rotterdam, gardens of, 128. 
Rotting-ground in nurseries, 6979. 
Rottlera, dicec. icos. and , a G. tr. E. Ind. 

which grow in loam and peat, and cuttings root 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Rough chervil, — see Anthriscus. 
Roulet, Jean Antoine, his work on gardening, page 

1127. A D. 1817. 
Roux, Augustin, his works on gardening, page 1117. 

A.D. 1750. 

Roxb. cor.. Plants of the coast of Coromandel. By 

Will. Roxburgh. 
Roxburgh House, a seat in Ross-shire, 7647. 
Roxburghia, octand. monogyn. and salicareae, a S. 
! peren. E. Ind. a climber which grows in loam and 

peat, and may be increased,- but not readily, by 

dividing at the root. 
Roxburghshire, gardens of, 7621. 
Royal gardener, 7387. 

Royal gardens, and their management, 7451. 

Royal gardens of Britain ; at Carlton House, 
Hampton Court, Kensington, and Pimlico, 7523 ; 
at Kew and Richmond, 7529 ; at Windsor and 
Frogmore, 7562 ; at Brighton, 7533. 

Royena, decan. dig. and ebenaceee, G. tr. C. B. S. 
which thrive in loam and peat, and ripened 
cuttings root readily in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Royer, Johann, his work on gardening, page 1123. 
A.D 164-. 

Rubia, madder, tetran. monog. and rubiaceee, G. tr. 
and H. per. Eur. of easy culture in light rich soil. 

Rubus, bramble, icos. polyg. and rosace£e, a S. tr. 
and G. tr. E. Ind. and H tr. Eur. and N. Amer. ; 
the tender kinds thrive in rich light soil, and cut- 
tings root under a hand-glass ; the H. sp. are 
chiefly prickly trailers, which grow in any soil, 
and are increased by suckers or seeds, and some 
sorts by cutting.s. 

Rubus idffius, the raspberry, 4696 ; R- fruticosus, 
the common bramble ; R. chamagmorus, the cloud- 
berry ; R. arcticus, the crimson bramble ; and R. 
caesius, the dewberry, 4770. to 4773. 

Rudheck, Olaus, his work on gardening, page 1129. 
A D. 1664. 

Rudheck, Olaus, filius, his works on gardening, page 

11.30. A.D. 1686. 
Rudbeckia, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbife- 

re£s, F. and H. peren. and an. N. Amer. of easy 

culture. 

Rudolphi, J. C , his works on gardening, page 

1126. A.D. 1802. 
Rue, — see Ruta, 



4 I 



Ruellia, didyn. angios, and acanthacese, S. tr. and 
G. peren. Ind. and Amer. pretty plants of easy 
culture in light rich soil. 

Ruins as objects in garden-scenery, 1839. and 7237. 

Ruizia, monad, polyan. and malvaces, a S. tr. 
Bourb. which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Rum. Amb., Ge. Everh. Rumphii Herbarium Am- 
boinense. 

Rumex, dock, hexan. trig, and polygenes, S. and 
G. tr. and peren. Afr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. 
of easy culture. 

Rumex patientia, patience-dock, or spinage-dock, 
3807. 

Rumex scutatus and acetosa, the garden-sorrels, 

3799. 

Runners, to propagate by, 1991. 

Ruppia, tetran. tetrag. and naiadese, a H. peren. 
Brit, a submarine aquatic, which should be grown 
in sand, kept moist, and occasionally strewed with 
salt. 

Rupture-wort, — see Herniaria. 

Rusborough, a seat in Wicklow, 7654. 

Ruscus, butcher's broom, dicec. monad, and smi- 
lacese, a G. and H. tr. Eur. under-shrubs, ever- 
greens, which will grow in shady situations, and 
are increased by dividing at the root. 

Rush, — see Juncus. 

Rush-broom, viminaria denudata. 

Rush-nut, cyperus esculentus, — see Cyperus. 

Rushbrook Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 

Rushton Hall, Northamptonshire, 7580. 

Russel Square, London, 7320. 

Russelia, didyn. angios. and scrophularinese, a S. 
tr. S. Amer. a pretty plant v.-hich thrives in light 
rich soil, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Ruta, rue, decan. monog. and rutacese, G. and H. 
tr. and peren. Eur. and Afr, under-shrubs, ever- 
greens which prefer light soil, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings or seeds. 

Rutlandshire, gardens and residences of, 7579. 

Rutter, James, and Daniel Carter, their works on 
gardening, page 1107. A.D. 1767. 

Rye, — see Secale. 

Rye-grass, lolium perenne. 



S. 

Sabal, hexan. trig, and palmese, a S. peren. Florida, 
which grows in light sandy loam, and may be oc- 
casionally increased by suckers. 

Sabb. hort., Sabbati (liberatus) Hortus romanus. 

Sabbatia, pentan. monog. and gentianese, H. bien, 
N. Amer. of easy culture. 

Saccharum, sugar-cane, trian. digy. and gramineaa, 
a S. peren. Ind. which grows in rich loam, and is 
increased by suckers or cuttings of the stem. 

Sacconi, Agostino, his work on gardening, pace 
1128. A.D. 1697. 

Sacred bean, — see Nelumbium. 

Sage, — see Salvia. 

Sagina, pearlwort, tetran. tetrag. and caryophylleas, 

H. an. Brit, of easy culture. 
Sagittaria, arrow-head, monoec. polyan. and alisma- 

ceae, S. and G. peren. China and Amer. and H. 

peren. Brit, and Amer. aquatics of easy culture. 
Sagittaria sagittifolia, common arrow-head, 4300. 
Sago-palm, sagus rumphii. 

Sagus, sago-palm, monoec. hexan. and palme£e, a S. 
tr. which requires a sandy loam and a strong 
moist heat. 

iit. Andrew's cross, ascyrum crux Andreje. 

St. Anne's Hill, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 

Saint Etienne, Claude de, a French author on gar- 
dening, page 1116. A.D. 1660. 

St. John's wort, — see Hypericum. 

St. Laurence's Cottage, Hampshire, 7594. 

St. Mary's Isle, a seat in Kircudbrightshire, 7625. 

St. Peter's wort, symphoria glomerata. 

Saint Peravi, Guermeau de, his works on garden- 
ing, page 1118. A.D. 1765. 

Saint Simon, Marquis de, his works on gardening, 
page 1118. A D 1768. 

Saintfoin, — see Hedysarum. 

Salad, to grow in cellars, 3992. 

Salad-plants, — see Acetarious Plants. 

Salads from wild plants, 4311. 

Salicornia, glasswort, monan. monog. and chenopo- 
dese, a G. tr. Arabia, and a H. tr. peren. and an, 
Brit, succulent salt-marsh plants, which grow in 
rich light soil not overwaterc'd. 



i220 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Salicornia herbacea, samphire, 4282. 

Salisburia, moncec. polyan. and podocarpese, a H. 
tr. Japan, which grows in sheltered situations, in 
common garden soil, and is increased by layers. 

Salisbury Craig, a hill at Edinburgh, how to im- 
prove, 7317. 

Salisbury, Richard Anthony, Esq. F. R. S., &c. his 
writings on gardening, page 1110. A.D. 1791. 

Salisbury, William, his writings on gardening, page 
1112. A.D. 1797. 

Salix, willow, dicec. monan. and amentaceae, a S. 
tr, E. Ind. and H. tr. Eur. and IS, Amer. which 

t grow mostly in moist soil, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings. 

Salix alba, the Huntington and other tree willows 
grown for timber, 7144. 

Salix viminalis, the common osier, and other basket 
and hoop willows, 7149. 

Sallows, — see Salix. 

Salsify, — see Tragopogon. 

Salsola, saltwort, pentan. dig. and chenopodese, a 
G. tr. S. Eur. and a H. peren. and an. Eur. and 
Afr. which may be treated like salicornia. 

Salt, as a manure, 1189. 

Salt-tree, robinia halodendron. 

Salt- wort, — see Salsola. 

Salter, J , his work on gardening, page 1114. 

A.D. 1816. 
Salton Hall, a seat in East Lothian, 7619. 
Sa..iraJi!i, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 
Salvia, sage, dian. monog. and labiateje, S. and G. 

tr. and peren. and H. tr. peren. and an. all of easy 

culture in light sandy soiL 
Salvia officinalis, the common sage, 4140. 
Salvia sclareae, clary, 4145. 

Salzmann, F. Z., gardener to the King of Prussia, 
208: his works on gardening, page 1124. A. D. 
' 1781. 

Sam., Samouelle's Entomologist's Useful Com- 
panion. 

Sa7nboursky, , his poem on gardens, page 1131. 

A.D. 1788. 

Sambucus, elder, pentan. trig, and caprifolese, H. tr. 

and a peren. Eur. and Amer. of easy culture, and 

increased by cuttings or seeds. 
Sambucus nigra, the common elder, as a fruit-tree, 

4627 ; as a forest tree, 7119. 
Samphire, — see Crithmum and Inula. 
Samroif, Cp. L., his works on garaeuing, page 1125. 

A.D. 1788. 

Samyda, decan. monog. and homalineae, S. tr. W. 
Ind. which grow, though shyly, in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Sandal-wood, santalum album. 

Sandbeck (sand-brook), a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Sandbox-tree, — see Hura. 

Sandon, a seat in Stafibrdshire, 7570. 

Sandwell Park, Staftbrdshire, 7570. 

Sandwort, — see Arenaria. 

Sang, Edward, his edition of Nicol's Planter's 

Kalendar, page 1112. A.D. 1798. 
Sanguinaria, puccoon, polyan. monog. and papa- 

veraceas, a H. peren. which grows best in light 

sandy soil, and increases by seeds, or ofSsets from 

the root. 

Sanguisorba, great burnet, tetran. monog. and ro- 
saceaj, H. peren. Brit, and Amer. of common 
culture. 

Sanicle, — see Sanicula. 

Sanicula, sanicle, pentan. dig. and umbelliferese, H. 
peren. Brit, and Amer. of easy culture. 

Sans Souci, a royal palace at Potsdam, 208. 

Sanseviera, hexan. monog. and hemerocallideEe, S. 
peren. and a H. peren. E. Ind. and China, succu- 
lents increased by suckers. 

Santalum, sandal-wood, tetran. monog. and santa- 
lacesB, a S. tr. E. Ind. which grows in light 
loam, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Santolina, lavender-cotton, syngen. polyg. a;qual. 
and corymbifereae, H. tr. and per. Eur. which 

' grow in common garden soil, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings. 

Sanvitalia, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereas, 
a H. an. Mexico, of easy culture. 

Sapindus, soapberry, octan. trig, and sapindiaceae, a 
S. tr. and G. tr. Amer. which thrive well in loam 
and peat, and large cuttings root in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

fiapium, monoec. monad, and euphorbiaceae, a S. tr. 
W. Ind. whidi grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tinjjs root in sand under a hand-glass 



Saponaria, soapwort, decan. dig. and caryophylleic, 
H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Sarcophyllum, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a G. 
tr. C. B. S. a succulent which grows in loam and 
peat, not overwatered, and cuttings root readily 
in sand under a bell-glass. 

Sarcostemma, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. a climber which grows in loam and peat, 
and cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Sarracenia, side-saddle flower, polyan. monog. and 

, F. peren. N. Amer. which grow in pots, 

with turfy peat at the bottom, and the upper part 
filled with sphagnum, in which the plants must be 
set, and then placed in pans of water in a shady 
situation. 

Sartorelli, G. B., his works on gardening, page 1129. 

A.D. 1816. 
Sassafras-tree, laurus sassafras. 
Satureja, savory, didyn. gvmnos. and labiatea2, a S. 

tr. G. tr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and N. Amer. 

of easy culture. 
Satureja montana and hortensis, winter and summer 

garden savory, 4170. 
Satyrium, gynan. monan. and orchideffi, G. peren. 

S. Eur. which grow in sandy loam and peat, with 

little water, when not in a growing state, and ate 

increased by seeds. 
Saururus, lizard's tail, heptan. tetrag. and naiadeae, 

a H. peren. an aquatic increased by parting at the 

root. 

Saussai, le Sicur de, a French writer on gardening, 

page 1117. A.D. 1722. 
Saussure, Nicolas de, his works on gardening, page 

1124. A.D. 1775. 
Savanna-flower, echites suberecta. 
Savi, Gaetano, his work on gardening, page 1128. 

A.D. 1811. 
Savin, juniperus sabina. 
Savory, — see Satureja. 
Saw, 1331. 

Saw-wort, — see Serratula. 

Sawing, 1883. 

Saxifraga, saxifrage, decan. dig. and saxifragese, F. 
and H. peren. and an. Eur. and N. Amer. chiefly 
alpines, and well adapted for rockwork ; but 
some, as S. nivalis, hirculus, &c. are marsh plants 
all are of easy culture. 

Saxifraga crassifolia, as a tea-plant, 4319. 

Saxifrage, — see Saxifraga. 

Scabiosa, scabious, tetran. monog. and dipsacese, G 
tr. C. B. S. and H. peren. and an. Eur. all of easy 
culture in common light soil. 

Scabious, — see Scabiosa. 

Sc32vola, pentan. monog. and goodenove£P, a S. tr. 

and G. tr. and peren. W. Ind. and Austral, which 

grow freely in loam and peat, and cuttings root 

readily under a hand-glass. 
Scammony, — see Convolvulus scammonia. 
Scandix, cicely, pentan. dig. and umbellifereas, H. 

an. Eur. and Persia, of easy culture 
Scandix cerefolium, chervil, 4107. 
Scandix odorata, sweet cicely, 4314. 
Scares, for birds and vermin, used in gardening, 

1483. 

Schabol, Jean- Roger, his works on gardening, page 

1118. A. D. 1767. 
Schsefferia, dioec. tetran. and , a S. tr. 

\V. Tnd. which grows in loam and peat, and may 

be increased by layers or cuttings in sand under a 

bell-glass. 

Scheuchzeria, hexan. trig, and alismace£e, a H. 

peren. Engl, a marsh plant increased by seeds. 
Schiller, I. K., his works on gardening, page 1125. 

A. D. 1795. 

Schinus, dioec. decan. and terebintaceje, G. tr. and 
H. tr, S. Amer. which grow in loam and peat, 
and ripened cuttings, with their leaves not short- . 
ened, will root freely in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Schisandra, moncec. pentan. and menispermeae, a 
G. tr. N. Amer. a climber which grows in sandy 
peat and loam, and ripened cuttings root in sand 
under a bell-glass. 

Schk. Hand., Botanisches Handbuch. Von Christ, 
Schkuhr. 

Schkuhria, sj'ngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, 

a H. an. Mex. of common culture. 
Schmahling, L. C, his works on gardening, page 

1125. A. D. 1786. 
Schmersall, I. F., his works on gardening, page 1123. 

A. D. 170-. " 

Schmidt, Christian Francis, his work on gardeninge 
page 1130. A. D. 178-. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Schmidt, I. C. E., his works on gardening, page 1124. 
A. D. 1776. 

Schemer, J. C, his works on gardening, page 1123. 
A. D. 1761. 

Schoenbrunn (fine brook, or well), gardens of, at 

Vienna, 205. and 218. 
Schcenus, bog-rush, trian. monog. and cyperaceae, 

H. peren. Brit, ot' the easiest culture in marshy 

ground. 

Schotia, decandria monogynia and leguminosese, 
S. tr. C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, 
: and cuttings in pots of sand, plunged in mould 
' (not in tan) under a hand-glass, will soon strike 
root. 

Sohrankia, polyg. monoec. and leguminosese, a S. 

peren. and G. peren. N. and S. Amer. which grow 

in loam and peat, and cuttings will root in sand 

under a bell-glass. 
Sckreiber, I. C, his work on gardening, page 1127. 

A. D. 1820. 

Schrotter, J. Sm., his works on gardening, page 1126. 
A. D. 1802. 

Schweitzingen, Duke of Baden's gardens at, 214. 
Schwenkia, dian. munog. and scrofularineae, a S. 

bien. Guinea, of easy culture. 
Schwobber, gardens of, in Hanover, 204. 
Scilla, squill, hexan. monog. and asphodelese, a G. 

peren. and H. peren. Eur. and C. B. S. bulbs of 

easy culture. 
Scilla' esculenta, the quamash, 4334. 
Scions for grafting {scion, Fr.), 2043, 
Scirpus, club-rush, triand. monogynia and cypera- 

ces, a S. peren. E. Ind. and H. peren. Brit, marsh 

grasses of easy culture. 
Scirpus tuberosus, the water-chestnut, 6032. 
Scleranthus, knav. el, riecan. dig. and portulacese, a 

H. peren. and an. Brit, which grow best in light, 

sandy soil, and are easily propagated. 
Scleroc'arpus, syngen. polygam. trust, and corymbi- 

fereae, a G. an. Guinea, of common culture.' 
Sclerothamnus, decan. monog. and leguminoseie, a 

G. tr. of N. HoU. which grows in sandy loam and 

peat, and young cuttings root in sand under a 

bell-glass. 

Scleroxylon, pentandria monogynia and sapoteae, a 
G. tr. C. B. S. which grows in loam and peal, 
and ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Scolopendrium, hart's tongue, crj-ptog. filices and 

filiceae, H. peren. Brit, of easy culture in peat 

earth in the shade, or in pots. 
Scolymus, golden thistle, sygen. polyg. sequal. and 

cichoraceae, a F. bien. and H. peren. and an. Eur. 

As. and Afr. of easy culture. 
Scone Palace, Perthshire, 7636. 
Scoparia, tetran. monog. and scrophularineae, a S. 

an. Jamaica, of common culture. 
Scopolia, pentan. monog. and thymeleas, a S. tr. E, 

Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Scorpion-grass, — see Myosotis. 
Scorpion. senna, coronilla emerus. 
Scorpiurus, caterpillar, diadelph. decan. and legu- 

minoseae, H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Scorzonera, viper's grass, syngen. polyg. (equal, and 

cichoracese, H. peren. and biea Eur. of common 

culture. 

Scorzonera hispanica, the garden viper's grass, 3746. 
Scotland, gardens and residences of, 7615. 
Scottia, diadel. decand. and leguminoseae, a G, tr. 
, N. Holl. which thrives in loam and peat, and 

young cuttings, taken oflf at a joint, root in sand 

under a bell-glass. 
Screen-plantations, 6794. and 6819. 
Screens for sheltering wail-trees, 1495, 
Screens for sifting earth, 1392. 
Screw-pine — see Pandanus. 
Screw-tree, — see Helicteres. 

Scrophularia, fig-wort, didyn. angios. and scrophu- 
larineae, G. bien. and an. and F. and H. peren. 
Eur. and Amer. of easy culture. 

Sculptures, 1843. 

Sculptures, vegetable, 1844. 

Scunk-weed, pothos fcetida. 

Scurvy-grass, — see Cochlearia. 

Scutellaria, skull-cap, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, 
a S. peren. and G. tr. W. Ind. and Crete, and H. 
peren. Eur. of common culture. 

Scythe, different sorts used in gardening, 1435. and 
1473. 

Sea-buckthorn, — see Hippophae. 
Sea-heath, — see Frankenia. 
Sea-holly, eryngium maritimum. 

4 



Sea- kale, crambe maritima, — see trambc. 

Sea-lavender, — see Statice. 

Sea-parsnep, — see Echinophora. 

Sea-rocket, cakile maritima. 

Sea-side grape, — see Coccoloba. 

Sea-side laurel, phillanthus latifolius. 

Sea-side oat, — see Uniola. 

Seats, as garden decorations, 1816. to 1820. 

Sebcsa, tetran. monog. and gentianeae, a H. an. 

C. B. S. of common culture. 
Secale, rye, trian. dig. and gramineae, a H. bien. and 

an. of easy culture. 
Secamone, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeae, a S. and 

G. tr. Egypt and Ind. which grow in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 

hand-glass. 

Securidaca, diadelphia octandria and leguminoseae, 
a S. tr. W. Ind. a climber which grows in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Securinega, Otaheite myrtle, dioec. pentan. and eu- 
phorbiacece, a S. tr. which flowers freely in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root readily in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Scdi, le Sieur de, a nurseryman at Lyons, 194. 

Sedmere, a seat in Yorkshire, 7582. 

Sedum, stone-crop, decan. pentag. and semper\'ive3e, 

G. and F. tr. Madeira, and H. peren. bien. and 
an. Eur. and N. Amer. mostly succulents, which 
answer well in jxits or in rockwork, and are 
readily increased by cuttings or dividing the plant. 

Sedum telephium, the true orpine, 4312. 
Seed-gardens, their formation, 7361 ; management, 
7454. 

Seed-market, in "Mark Lane, London, 7515. 
Seed-merchants or seedsmen, 7391. 
Seed -room, 1705. 

Seeds, physiology of, 716 ; duration of the vegetative 
principle in common garden-seeds, m,anagement of 
the seed department in the nursery business, 7484. 

Sc^ehteiner, George, his works on gardening, page 
1123. A. D. 1702. 

Seide/, C. F., his works on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D 1786. 

Sslago, didynam. gymnos. and verbenaceae, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root freely in the same soil under a hand- 
glass. 

Self-heal, — see Prunella. 

Seligmann, J. IvI., his works on gardening, page 

1123. A. D. 1750. 
Selinum, milk-parsley, pentan. dig. and umbelli, 

ferese, H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture, 

arid increased by dividing at the root or seeds, 
Selkirkshire, as to gardening, 7622. 
Selwood Park, Berkshire, 7561. 
Sempervivum, houseleek, dodec. dodecag. and sem- 

perviveae, G. tr. H. peren. and an. Asia, C. B. S. 

and Eur. succulents, which answer well treated 

as sedum. 

Senacia, pentandria monogynia and rhamnca^, a S. 
tr. Bomb, which requires the same treatment as 
celastrus. 

Senecio, groundsel, syngen. polyg. super, and corj^m- 
bifereae, a S. peren. G. tr. and bien. C. B. S and 

H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. Avhich grow in light 
soil, and are easily increased by the ordinary 
means. 

Sensitive p' mimosa sensitiva. 

Septas, hepiaimria heptagynia and semperviveae, 
G. peren. C. B. S. succulents which grow in 
loam and peat, require little water when not in a 
growing state, and are increased by dividing at 
the roots. 

Septfoil, — see Tormentilla. 

Sepulchral structures, as garden buildings, 1792. 

Serapias, gynandria monandria and orciiidca, O. 
peren. S. Eur. which thrive in loam and peat, 
and are increased by dividing at the root or by- 
seeds. 

Seriana, octan. trig, and sapindeae, S, tr. S. Amer. 

which thrive in sandy loam, and cuttings root in 

sand under a hand-glass, 
Seriola, syngen. polyg. aequal. and cichoraceae, H. 

peren. S. Eur. of easy culture. 
Serissa, pentan. monogynia and rubiaceae, a G. tr. 

Japan, which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 

tings root freely under a hand-glass in sand. 
Serpicula, monocc. tetrandria and onagrarew, a G, 

peren. C. B. S. a creeper which grows in loam and 

peat, and cuttings root freely under a haiiw-j^i^^Ts 

in sand. 

Scrratula, saw-wort, sj-ngcn. polygam. sequali* ami 
I 3 



12:22 



GENERAL INDEX. 



cynarocephaletE, H. peren. Eiir. of common cul- 
ture. 

Serruria, tetran. monog. and proteaceae, G. tr. and 
a H. tr. C. B. S. free flowerers which require the 
same treatment as protea. 

Sersalisia, pentan. monog. and sapotese, a G. tr. 
N. Holl. which grows in sandy loam and peat, 
and cuttings root readily in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Service-tree, — see Pyrus. 

Sesamum, oily grain, didjTi. angios. and bignonia- 
ceae, S. an. of easy culture. 

Sesbana, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S. tr. 
bien. and an. K Ind. of common culture. The 
S. species is a beautiful plant. 

Seseli, meadow-saxifrage, pentan. dig. and umbelli- 
fereae, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and N. Amer. 
of easy culture. 

Sesleria, trian. monog. and gramineae, H. peren. 
Eur. of easy culture. 

Sesuviura, icos. di-pentag. and ficoideae, S. peren. 
and an. W. Ind. and S. Amer. succulents which 
grow in loam and peat, and are easily propa- 
gated. 

Shade, in arboriculture, 6763. 

Shallot, allium ascalonicum, — see Allium. 

Shanbally, a seat in Tipperary, 7657. 

Shane's Castle, a seat in Antrim, 7684. 

Shardeloes, a seat in Buckinghamshire, 75^7. 

Sharrock, Robert, LL.D., his works on gardening, 

page 1100. A. D. 1660. 
Shaiv, James, his work on gardening, pag-e 1111. 

A. D. 179i. 

Shaw, William, his work on gardening, page 1113. 
A. D. 1807. 

Shaw Park, a seat in Clackmannanshire, 7633. 

Shears, garden, diftferent sorts of, 1333. 

Sheep's beard, — see Arnopogon. 

Sheep's scabions — see Jasione. 

Sheffield Place, Sussex, 7531. 

Shelter, in arboriculture, 6762. 

SJwnstone, William, his writings on gardening, page 

1106. A. D. 17&1. 
Shepherd's chibfA-erbascum thapsus. 
Shepherd's purse, thlaspi bursa pastoris. 
Sherardia, field-madder, tetran. monog. and rubia- 

cese, H. an. Brit, weeds. 
Sherborne Castle, Dorsetshire, 7598. 
Sherborne House, Gloucestershire, 7565. 
Sherbourne Castle, Oxfordsliire, 7558. 
Sherwood Lodge, Surrey, 7527. 
Shewhing, or shoughing, a Scotch term for the 

operation of earthing in, or laying in plants by 

the heels, for temporary purposes. 
Shield-fern, — see Aspidium. 

Shifting, the transplanting of plants in pots, dif- 
ferent methods of performing, 2104. 
Shincliffe Hall, Durham, 7584. 
Shipley, a seat in Derbyshire, 7o/4. 
Shobden Court, Herefordshire, 7568. 
Shore-weed, littordla lacustris. 
Short-grove, Essex, 7542. 
Shovel, 1301. 
Shovelling, 1S<56. 
Shrub Hill, Surrey, 7527. 

Shrubbery, forming the, 6130 ; situation, soil, walks, 
fence, reserve-ground, 6131. to 6137. 

Shrubbery, planting of, 6138 ; in the mingled man- 
ner, select manner, systematic manner, general 
practice, fruit-trees iii shrubberies, decorations, 
6139. to 6160. 

Shrubberv, its culture and management, 618/ ; 
times of planting and sowing, pruning, training, 
thinning, and dressing, grass plots, protecting, 
water, insects, 6188. to 6201. 

Shrubberv, considered in respect to landscape-gar- 
dening,' 6802. 

Shrubby trefoil, ptelea trifoliata. 

Shrubs, ornamental, select, deciduous, evergreen, 
climbing, selection for particular purposes, for 
concealing vertical and horizontal defects, of rapid 
and bulky growth, which thrive under the shade 
and drip" of trees, for margins of water, rocks, 

. edgings' and hedges, highly odoriferous, orna- 
mental by their fruit as well as flowers, for bota- 
nical or economical purposes, for shrubberies of 
limited extent, 6542. to 6587. 

Shugborough House, Staffordshire, 7570. 

Sibbaldia, pentan. pentag. and rosaceae, H. peren. 
Eur. Alpines which grow in loam and peat, and 
may be increased by cuttings, under a hand- 
glass. 

Sibthorpia, didyn. angios. and scrophularinoae, a H. 



peren. Eng. which grows well in peat and loam, 
in rockwork or in pots, and is increased by divid- 
ing at the root. 

Sickler, Francis Karl Ludwig, his works on garden- 
ing, page 1126. A. D. 1802. 

Sickler, T. A'olkman, his works on gardening, page 
1125. A. D. 17&4. 

Sic3'os, single-seeded cucumber, monoec. monad, 
and cucurbitaceae, a H. an. Amer. of common 
culture. 

Sida, monad, polyan. and malvacese, S. and G. tr. 
bien. and an. E.'and W. Ind. C. B. S. and S. Amer. 
which flower freely in rich light soil, and are 
readily increased by seeds, or cuttings will root 
in sand under a hand-glass. 

Side-saddle flower, — see Sarracenia. 

Sideritis, ironwort, didyn. gj ranos. and labiateae, G. 
and F. tr. peren and an. S. Eur. and K Ind. which 
grow freely in rich light soil, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings. 

Siderodendrum, iron-tree, tetran. monog. and rubia- 
ceae^ a S. tr. W. Ind. which grows in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Sideroxylon, iron-wood, pentan. monog. and sa- 
potese, a G. tr. C. B. S. wnich thrives in loam and 
peat, and cuttings, a little ripened, root in sand 
under a hand-glass. 

Siegel, , his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A. D. 1802. 

Siegesbeckia, syngen. pwlyg. superf and corymbi- 
fereae, H. an. India and Peru, of common culture. 

Siewssen, A. C, his work on gardening, page 1125. 
A. D. 1797. 

Sieve, the garden, 1394. 

Silene, catchfly, decan. trig, and caryophylleae, G. 

bien. and H. peren. bien. and an. a numerous 

genus, which thrive in light soil, suit well for 

rockwork or pots, and are readily increased by 

division, seeds, or cuttings. 
Silene inflata, the bladder-catch fly, 3952. 
Silk cotton tree, — see Bombax. 
Silphium, syngen. polygam. necess. and cor}Tnbife- 

reae, H. peren. N. Amer. robust, unsightly plants, 

easily increased. 
Si/va, Sigismondo, his work on gardening, page 

1128. A. D. 1803. 
Silver-tree, leucadendron argcnteum. 
Simplicists, — see Physic Gardeners. 
Sinapis, mustard, tetrad, siliq. and cruciferca-, a 

G. tr. and a H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and E. 
Ind. of easy culture. 

Sinapis alba and nigra, white and black mustard, 
4020. 

Sinapis arvensis, field-mustard, 4287. 
Sinapis Pekinensis, 4335. 

Sinclair, Sir John, his writings on gardening, page 

1114. A. D. 1813. 
Single-seeded cucumber, sicyos angulata. 
Sion, — see Scion. 

Sion Hill, a seat in Middlesex, 7521. 
Sion House, Middlesex, 7522. 

Sison, honewort, pentan. dig. and ambellifereae, H. 
peren. and an. 13rit. and Siber. of easy culture. 

Sisymbrium, tetrad, siliq. and crucifercte, a G. tr. 
Canaries, and H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. which 
grow in any soil, but most of them prefer a moist 
situation ; S. tenuifolium, however, grows on old 
walls. 

Sisymbrium officinale, common water-cress, 4052. 
Site {situs, Lat.\ the situation or ground on which 

a building, garden, or other object stands. 
Slum, water-parsnep, pentan. dig. and umbelliferese, 

H. peren. Eur. and China, chiefly aquatics. 
Sium sisarum, the skirret, 3740. 

Skelton Castle, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Skibo, a seat in Sutherlandshire, 7646. 

Skirret, — see Sisum. 

Skull-cap. — see Scutellaria. 

Slaine Castle, a seat in Eastmeath, 7661. 

Slaines Castle, a seat in Aberdeenshire, 7639. 

Sligo, county of, as to gardening, 7675. 

Slip, a stripe of ground. 

Slipper-wort, — see Calceolaria. 

Slips, to propagate by, 1989. 

Slo. hist"? A voyage to the islands of Madeira, Bar- 
Slo. jam. 3 badoes, Nevis, St. Christopher's, and 

Jamaica ; with the natural history of the last of 

those islands. By Hans Sloane. 
Sloane Square, London, 7321. 

Sloanea, polyan. monog. and tili.^cea?, a & tr. S. 
Amer. which thrives in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings may be rooted in sand under a hand-glass. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1223 



Slopes, a shrubbery at Windsor, 6159. 

Slug, — see LimaK. 

Sluices, their form and situation, 1951. 

Small salads, 4078 ; to force, 3402. 

Smilacina, hexan. monog. and smilacese, H. 
peren North Amerca, which succeed best in 
light sandy soil, and are increased by dividing the 
root 

Smilax, dicec. hexan. and smilaceas, G. and F. tr. 
and peren. which grow freely in loam and peat on 
rich light soil, and are increased by dividing 
at the root, and the woody kinds also by cut- 
tings. 

BmUh, Sir James Edward, M.D. F.R.S., his writings 

on gardening, page 1110. A.D. 1792. 
Smithia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S, an, 

E. Ind. of 6asy culture. 
Smut, — see Ustilago. 

Sinyrnium, alexanders, pentan dig. and umbellife- 
rcffi, H. peren. and a bien. Eur. and N. Amer. of 
easy culture. 

Smyrnium olusatrum, the garden alexanders or 

alisanders, 3948. 
Snail, — see Helix, 
Snake's beard, ophiopogon japonicus. 
Snake's tongue, iygodium scandens. 
Snakewood, cecropia peltata. 
Snap-dragon, antirrhinum majus. 
Snap-tree, justicia hyssopifolia. 
Sneeze-wort, achillea ptarmica. 
Snow, its formation, 1254 ; heat from, &c. 1207. 
Snoiv, T., his works on gardening, page 1102. A. D. 

1715. 

Snow-berry, chiococca raeemosa. 
Snow-drop, galanthus nivalis. 
Snow-flake, — see Leucojum. 
Soap-berry, — see Sapindus. 
Soap-wort, — .see Saponaria. 

Society of Gardeners, their work on gardening, page 
1103. A.D. 1730. 

Society of Practical Gardeners, their work on gar- 
dening, page 1112. A.D. 1802. 

Sod, a turf, or thin layer of earth, covered with 
grasses, taken from a lawn or pasture with a 
spade. 

Soderini, G. and Bernardo Davazati, their work on 

gardening, page 1128. A.D. 1622. 
Sodcrni, S., his works on gardening, page 1128. A.D. 

1811. 

Soft-grass, — see Holcus. 

Soft-wooded timber-trees, 7125. 

Soil, 927; mixed soils, 928; aquatic soils, 929; 
earthy soils, 930 ; vegetable soils, 938. 

Soils, as indicated by spontaneous vegetables grow- 
ing on them, 1036; list of plants indicating the 
more common soils, 1037. 

Soils, improvement ot^ 1068 ; by pulverisation, aer- 
ation, alteration, removal of superabundant in- 

, gredients, incineration, changing the condition of 

■- lands as to water, draining, embanking, subterra- 

, neous irrigation, surface irrigation, changing the 
condition of lands in respect to atmospherical in- 
fluence, solar influence, shelter, rotation of crops, 
Sir H. Davy's opinion on rotations, Grisen- 
thwaite's opinion, 1069. to 1110. 

Soils, table of, their nomenclature and classification, 
1034; discovering their qualities, 1035; uses of 
soil to vegetables, 1051. 

Solandra, pentan. monog. and solaneaceas, S. tr. Ja- 
maica, free-growing plants, which, when it is in- 
tended they should flower, must be put in a state 
of rest by withholding water till their leaves drop. 
Cuttings root easily. 

Solanum, nightshade, pentan. monog. and solanese, 
S. and G. tr. peren. and an. and H. peren. and an. 
all of easy culture in light rich soil. 

Solanum lycopersicura, the love-apple, 4259. 

Solanum melongena, the egg-plant, 4266. 

Solanum tuberosum, the potatoe, 3644 ; to force 
the potatoe, 3381. 

Soldanella, pentan. monog. and primulacese, H. 
peren. Germ, alpines, pretty little i)lants, which 
grow well in rockwork or in pots, in two thirds 
peat and one third sandy loam ; they are increased 
by parting the root. 

Soldier-wood, inga purpurea. 

Solidago, golden rod, syngenesia polygamia super- 
flua and corymbiferea, H. peren. N. Amer. and 
Eur. large cumbersome plants of the easiest cul- 
ture. 

Solomon's seal, — see Polygonatum. 
liomerfeldt. Christian, his work on gardening, page 
nm. A.D. 178-, 

4 I 



Somersetshire, gardens and residences of, 7599. 

Somolus, brook-weed, pentan. monog. and primula- 
cese, a G. peren. N. S. W. and H. peren. Brit 
The first grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root under a hand-glass ; the other prefers a moist 
situation, and is increased by dividing at the 
root. 

Sonchus, sow-thistle, syngen. polyg. eequal. and ci- 
choraccaa, G. tr. and H. peren. Madeira, N. Amen 
and Eur. of easy culture. 

Sonchus oleraceus, the common sow-thistle, 4299. 

Sonmni,-C. S., his works on gardening, page 1121. 
A.D. 18C4. 

Sophiowski, a fine seat in Podolia, now much ne- 
glected, 264. 

Sophora, decan. monog. and leguminosea;, a S. tr. 
India, H. tr. Japan, and H. peren. Eur. ; the 
tender species thrive well in light loam, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass ; the hardy 
herbs require a rich loam, and are increased by 
seeds or dividing at the root. 

Sorghum, polyg. monoec. and gramine^e, a S. bien. 
and H. peren. and an. As. and Eur. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Sorocephalus, tetran. monog. and proteaceas, G. 

tr. C. B. S. which require to be treated a« 

protea. 
Sorrel, — see Rumex. 
Sour gourd, adansonia digitata. 
South American fruits deserving cultivation, 6020, 
South Lodge, Middlesex, 7520. 
South Sea tea, ilex vomitoria. 
Southam House, Gloucestershire, 7565, 
Southern-wood, artemisia abrotanum. 
Southgate Grove, Middlesex, 7520. 
Sow-thistle, — see Sonchus. 

Sowerbsea, hexan. monog. and asphodeleje, a G. 
peren. N. S. W. which thrives in peat soil with 
plenty of water, and is increased by dividing at 
the root 

Sowej'by, James, F.L.S., his works on gardening, 
page 1110. A.D. 1789. 

Sowing, different modes of performing the oper- 
ation, 2071. 

Spade, Roman (l/^o), Italian (xappa), French ifiechc), 

and Chinese, 31. 
Spade, spit or spitter {spada, Lat. and Sax. spade, 

Dan.), an implement for penetrating and breaking 

up the soil, different kinds of, 1300. 
Spananthe, pentan. dig. and umbelliferes, a S. bien, 

Caraccas, of easy culture. 
Spanish elm, cordia gerasehanthus. 
Spanish nut, morjea sisyrinchium. 
Sparaxis, triandr. monogyn. and irides, G. peren. 

C. B. S. bulbs which require tlie same treatment 

as ixia. 

Spardoni, Paulo, his work on gardening, page 1128. 
A.D. 1810. 

Sparganium, bur-reed, monoic. trian. and aroideffi, 
H. peren. Brit, marsh plants, of easy culture. 

Sparrmannia, polyan. monog. and tiliaceie, a G. tr. 
C. B. S. which grows in loam and peat, and cut- 
tings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Sparrow-wort, — see Passerina. 

Spartium, broom, diadel. decan. and leguminoseje, 

G. and H. tr. Europe and Africa, which thrive ia 
loam and peat, and are readily increased by 
seeds, or by young cuttings in sand under a bell- 

Spatalla, tetran. monog. and pi-oteacea;, G. tr. 
C. B. S. which require the same treatment as 
protea. 

Spathelia, pentan. trig, and terebintacese, a S. tr. 
Jamaica, which thrives in light loam, and cut- 
tings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Speechly, William, his works on gardening, page 
1108. A.D. 1779. 

Speedwell, — see Veronica. 

Spergula, spurrey, decan. pentag. and cai-yophyllea;, 

H. peren. and an. of easy culture in soft moist 
soil. 

SpermacocOj button-iveed, tetran. monog. and ru- 
biacese, a S. tr. peren. and bien. As. and Afr. 
which grow freely in loam and peat, and are in- 
creased by cuttings under a hand-glass, or by 
seeds. 

Sphaeranthus, syngen. polyg. segreg. and cynaroce- 
phaleee, a S. peren. E. Ind. and G. an. C. B. S. of 
easy culture. 

Sphsrolobium, decan. monog. and leguminoseEe, G. 
tr. N. Holl. pretty plants, which grow in sandy 
loam and peat, and young cuttings root readily 
in sand under a bell -glass. 

4 



1224 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Sphenogyne, syngen. polyg. frustran. and corymbU 
ferese, G. tr. and a H. an. C. B. S. which thrives 
well in light rich soil, and cuttings, in the shade, 
under a hand-glass, root freely. 

Sphinx elpenor, the elephant hawk-moth, 6193. 

Spidenvort, — see Tradescantia. 

Spielmannia, didyn. angios. and verbenaceae, a G. 
tr. C. B. S. which may be treated as sphenopjTie. 

Spigelia, worm-grass, pentan. monog. and gentianeae, 
a S. an. W. Ind. andH. peren. Amer. which are 
best grown in loam and peat, and are readily in. 
creased by cuttings. 

Spignell, — see Athamanta. 

Spike-rush, — see Eleocharis. 

Spikenard, Valeriana satamansi. V. celtica and 

officinalis may be used as substitutes by those 

who prefer this sort of perfume. 
Spilanthes, syngen. polyg. aequal. and corjTiibifereae, 

a S. peren. bien. and an. E. Ind. and S. Amer. 

which grow in rich light soil, and are readily in. 

creased either by seeds or cuttings. 
Spinaceous plants, 376G. 

Spinacia oleracea, the common spinage, S7n7. 

Spinage, spinacia oleracea, 3766. 

Spindle.tree, — see Euonymus. 

Spirffia, icos. di-pentag. and rosaceae, H. tr. and 

peren. Eur. and N. Amer. all of easy culture. 
Spiraea filipendula, dropwort, 4304. 
Spitz, A. C, his work on gardening, page 1126. 

A.D. 1798. 
Splcenwort, — see Asplenium. 

SpofForth, a residence near Wetherby, Yorkshire, 
7582. 

Spondias, hog-plum, decan. pentag. and terebin- 
taceaj, S. tr. W. Ind. which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and large cuttings root in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Sponge-tree, mimosa farnesiana. 

Sporobolus, trian. dig. and gramineae, a H. an. India, 
of the easiest culture. 

Spratsborough Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Spreu'^el, Kurt, his Gazette of Gardening, page 
1126. A. D. 1804. 

Sprengelia, pentan. monog. and epacride£e, a G. tr. 
N. S. W. which thrives in sandy peat, with the 
pots well drained, and kept rather in a shady 
aspect ; young cuttings root in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Spring Garden, a seat in Galway, 7672. 
Spring-grass, — see Anthoxanthum. 
Spring Grove, Middlesex, 7520. 
Spurge, — see Euphorbia. 
Spurrey, — see Spergula. 

Squares, public, laid out as gardens, 7319 ; Russel 
Square, Sloane Square, Edward's Square. &c. 7320. 
to 7322. 

Squash, cucurbita melopepo. 

Squill, — see Scilla. 

Staavia, pentan. monog. and rhamnese, G. tr. C. B. S. 

which thrive ini sandy peat, and young cuttings 

root in sand under a "bell-glass. 
Stable-dung, 1971. 

Stachys, hedge-nettle, didyn. gymnos. and labiatese, 
a G. tr. and peren. S. Amer. and C. B. S. and H. 
peren. and an. Eur. of the easiest culture. 

Stachytarpheta, bastard vervain, dian. monog. and 
verbenaceje, S. tr. bien. and a G. bien. W. Ind. 
and S. Amer. pretty plants, which thrive in rich 
light soil, and cuttings root readily under a hand- 
glass in heat. 

Stackpool Court, a seat in Pembrokeshire, 7609. 

Stsehelina, syngen. polyg. jequal. and cynaroce. 
phaleie, G. tr. and a H. tr. S. Eur. which grow in 
rich light soil, and cuttings root freely under a 
hand-glass. 

Staff-tree, — see Celastrus. 

Staffordshire, gardens and residences of, 7570. 

Stamford Court, Worcestershire, 7566. 

Standish, Arthur, a writer on gardening, page 1099. 
A. D. 1613. 

Stanmore House, Middlesex, 7521. ' 

Stanstead House, Sussex, 7531. 

Stanton Harold, Leicestershire, 7573. 

Stapelia, pentan. dig. and asclepiadeas, D. S. tr. 
C. B. S. succulents which grow in sandy loam and 
old lime, with brick rubbish, with little water. 
In light rich soil they grow more luxuriantly, but 
are very apt to damp ofFif they happen to get too 
much water J they are readily increased by cut. 
tings, and some by suckers. 

Staphylea, bladder-nut, pentan. trig, and rhamneae, 
H. tr. which grow in any soil, and are readily 
increased by seeds or layers. 



Star.apple, — see Chrysophyllum. 
Star of Bethlehem, — see Ornithogalum, 
Star of the earth, plantago coronopus. 
Star-thistle, centaurea calcitrapa. 
Star- wort, — see Aster. 

Starkea, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, 
a S. peren. Jamaica, which thrives in rich light 
soil, and cuttings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Statice, sea-lavender, pentan. pentag. and plum- 
bagineae, G. tr. and peren. C. B. S. and S. Eur. F. 
and H. peren. Afr. and Eur. The tender kinds 
grow in sandy loam and peat, the others in light 
soil, and all are increased by dividing the root, 
or by seeds. 

Statistics of British gardening, 7375 ; different con- 
ditions of men engaged in the practice and pursuit 
of gardening, 7377 ; operators or serving gardeners, 
7378 ; tradesmen-gardeners, 7388 ; garden-coun- 
sellors or artists, 7400 ; patrons of gardening, 7378. 
to 7411. 

Statistics of British gardening, different kinds of 
gardens, 7412 ; private British gardens, 7413 ; 
commercial gardens, 7453 ; public gardens, 7490 ; 
leading gardens of the diflferent counties parti- 
cularised, 7510. 

Staunton, Nottinghamshire, 7580. 

Stauracanthus, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a 

F. tr. Portugal, which grows in loam and peat, 
and is increased by seeds or young cuttings in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Steele, Richard, his work on gardening, page 1110. 
A. D. 1793. 

Stelis, gynan. monan. and orchideie, S. peren. W. 

Ind. a parasite which may be treated as atrides, 

and increased by dividing at the root. 
Stellaria, stitch wort, decan. trig, and caryophyl- 

lea?, H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture in 

sandy soil. 

Stellera, octan. dig. and thymele^, a H. tr. S. Eur. 
which grows in light soil, and may be increased 
by cuttings under a hand-glass or by layers. 

Stemodia, didyn. angios. and scrophularineae, a 
S. peren. S. Amer. which thrives in light, rich 
soil, and cuttings root freelv under a hand-glass 
in heat. 

Stenanthera, pentan. monog. and epacridea?, a G. 
tr. N. S. W. a beautiful plant which grows in loam 
and peat well drained, and young cuttings root in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Stenochilus, didyn. angios. and myoporinejB, a G. 
tr. N. Holl. which grows in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely in sand under a bell-glass. 

Stephanus, Morinus, a French author on garden- 
ing, page 1116. A. D. 1658. 

Stephenson, David, M. A., his work on gardening, 
page 1104. A. D. 1746. 

Sterculia, monoec. monad, and sterculiaceae, S. tr. 
and a G. tr. E. and W. Ind. which thrive in loam 
and peat, and ripened cuttings, not deprived of 
their leaves, root readily in sand under a hand- 
glass in moist heat. 

Sternbe)g, Baron Von, his works on gardening, pace 
1127. A. D. 181-. 

Stevia, syngen. polygam. jequal. and corjTnbifereae, 
a F. peren. H. peren. and an. Mexico, which 
answer best in loam and peat, in pots, and cut- 
tings root readily under a hand-glass. 

Stewart Hall, a seat in Tyrone, 7679. 

Stilago, dicec. trian. and terebintaceee, S. tr. E. Ind. 
which grow in loamy soil, and cuttings maybe 
rooted in sand under a hand-glass. 

StilUngfleet, Benjamin, his writings on gardening, 
page 1105. A. D. 1759. 

Stillingia, moncec. monad, and euphorbiacea3, a G. 
tr. G. peren. and H. tr. China and N. Amer. which 
grow in loam and peat and cuttings root under a 
hand-glass ; the tender kinds in sand. 

Stinking horehound, — see Ballota. 

Stipa, feather-grass, trian. dig. and graminese, a 
H. an. S. Amer. and H. peren. Eur. of easy cul- 
ture. 

Stirlingshire, gardens of, 7631. 

Stirring the soil, use of, 2591 ; — and see Soils, their 

improvement. 
Stisser, J. A., his works on gardening, page 1123 

A. D. 1697. 
Stitchwort, — see Stellaria. 

Stizolobium, cow-itch, diadelph. decand. and legu- 
minosese, S. tr. W. and E. Ind. which thrive well 
in light, rich soil, and young cuttings root in 
sand under a bell-glass. 

Stobaea, syngen. polyg. iequal. and cynarocephalea^, a 

G. tr. C.B.S. which may be treated as stizolobium. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1225 



Stock, see Mathiola. 

Stocks for grafting, science of, 2020. to 2024. 
Stoebe, syngen. polygam. segreg. and corymbifereas, 

G. tr. C. B. S. which may be treated as stizolo- 

bium. 

Stoke, a seat in Herefordshire, 7568. 

Stoke-hole, the excavation in one side of which 

hot-house furnaces are often built, and the hole 

contains fuel for its supply. 
Stoke House, Gloucestershire, 7565. 
Stoke Park, Buckinfjhamshire, 7547. 
Stoke Park, Wiltshire, 7597. 
Stokeld, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Stokesia, syngen. polyg. aqual. and cynarocephalese, 
a G. peren. Carolin. a pretty plant which grows 
in rich, light soil, and roots freely under a hand- 
glass. 

Stokestown, a seat in the county of Roscommon, 
7671. 

Stole (from stolo, Lat. a shoot or twig), trees which, 
when cut over by the surface, shoot up again. 

Stone-crop, — see Sedum 

Stone-fruits, catalogue of, 4480. 

Stoneham Park, Hampshire, 7594. 

Stones, how to operate with in gardening-scenery, 
7230. 

Storax, — see Styrax. 

Stork's bill, — see Pelargonium. 

Stornberg, his plan of a Chinese garden, 478. 

Stourhead, a seat in Wiltshire, 7597. 

Stout Hall, Glamorganshire, 7608. 

Stout's Hill, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Stove, dry, — see Dry-stove. 

Stove, moist, or bark-stove, — see Bark-stove. 

Stove-plants, — see Bark-stove and Dry-stove. 

Slowe, a seat in Buckinghamshire, 7548. 

Stowels, a seat in Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Stradballey Hall, in Queen's County, 7659. 

Siradmore Yale, a seat in Cardiganshire, 7607, 

Slranionium, datura stramonium. 

Stnipwort, corrigiola littoralis. 

Stratiotes, water-soldier, dicec. dodec. and hydro- 
charideo?, a H. peren. Eng. an aquatic which 
only requires to be thrown into a pond or aqua- 
rium. 

Stratton Park, Hampshire, 7594. 
Straw coverings used in gardening, 1508. 
Strawberry, — see Fragaria. 
Strawberry -blite, — see Blitum. 
Strawberry Hill, Middlesex, 7520. 
Strawberry-tree, — see Arbutus. 
Streams of water, how to improve in garden-scenery, 
7223. 

Streatham, Surrey, 7527. 

Street -gardens, 7292; their management, 7426. 

Strelitzia, pentand. monogyn. and musaceze, S. tr. 
C. B. S. which grow in sandy loam, and are in- 
creased slowly by suckers. By rubbing the pollen 
on the stigmas, when the plants are in bloom, 
perfect seeds are readily obtained. (Sweet.) 

Streptopus, hexan. monog. and smilaceffi, H. peren. 
Hung, and N. Amer. which succeed best in light 
sandy soil, and are increased by dividing at the 
root. 

Structures, in gardening, 1523 ; portable or moveable 
structures, canvass screen, canvass curtain, oiled 
paper frame netting screen, common glass case, 
glass tent, common hot-bed frame, separating 
frame, moveable bottomed frame. Mallet's frame, 
&c. 1524. to 1538. 

Structures, partly moveable, 1539 ; earth-pit, bark- 
pit, flued pit, M'Phail's pit, Alderstone pit; pit 
with rising frame, W^est's pit, &c., 1540. to 1544. 

Structures, fixed, 1555 ; garden walls, brick, stone, or 
mud walls, solid brick u all, flued wall, cellular wall, 
mud or earth wall, boarded wall, wavy wall, an- 
gular wall, zigzag wall, square pier wall, nursery- 
man's wall, piered wall, sheltering piers, arched 
or roofed walls, espalier rails, wooden espaliers, 
framed wooden espalier rail, cast-iron espalier rail, 
horizontal espalier rail, oblique espalier rail, 
1556. to 1582. 

Structures, permanent, 1583 ; hot-house, acumi- 
nated semi-globe, acuminated semi-dome, semi- 
ellipse, parallelogram with curved roof and ends, 
with ridge and iurrow roof, poly|)rosopic hot- 
house, mushroom-houses, flued mushroom-houses, 
German mushroom-house, cold-houses, 1584. to 
1627. 

Structures, their further improvement, 1850. 

Strumaria, hexan. monog. and amaryllides, G. pe- 
ren. C. B. S. bulbs whicii thrive in sandy loam and 
decayed leaves, require little water when not in 



a growing state, and are mcreased by oftsets or 
seeds. 

Struthiola, tetrandria monogynia and thyme- 
lea3, G. tr. C. B. S. which grow in sandy peat, 
and young cuttings root freely in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Strychnos, pentan. monog. and apocynese, S. tr. E. 
Ind. which grow in sand and peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a bell-glass. 

Stuartia, monad, polyan. and tiliaceje, H. tr. N 
Amer. handsome plants which thrive in peat soil 
or very sandy loam ; they flower after attain- 
ing a good size, and are increased by layers ii> 
peat. 

Stub House, Durham, 7584. 
Sludley Royal, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Stutthorpe, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Stylidium, gynan. dian. and stylidese, a G. tr and 
peren. Austral, which grow in sandy loam and 
peat, and are increased by seeds or parting at the 
root: the' shrubby species by cuttings under a 
hand-glass. 

Styphelia, pentand. monogyn. and epacidese, G. tr. 

N. S. W. beautiful plants which grow in sandy 

loam and peat, and young cuttings root in sand 

under a bell-glass. 
Styrax, storax, decan. monogyn. and ebenaceae, H. 

tr. Italy and N. Amer. which thrive and flower 

freely in light sandy loam, and are increased by 

layers or seeds. 
Subularia, awlwort, tetrad, silic. and crucifereae, a 

H. an. Br'it. an aquatic of easy culture. 
Suburban villa, 7285 ; suburban house, 7286 ; their 

management; 7430. 
Succisce repuUulant (from succido, Lat. to cut down, 

and repullulo, Lat. to bud or sprout), trees which 

stole, or which being cut over spring again. 
Succory, — see Cichorium. 

Succowia, tetrad, silic. and crucifercEe, a H. ap. Mi- 
norca, of common culture. 

Suckers to propagate by, 1992. 

Sudborne Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 

Suffocation, a disease of plants, 893. 

Suftblk, gardens and residences of, 7552. 

Sufton Court, Herefordshire, 7568. 

Sugar-cane, — see Saccharum. 

Suir Castle, a seat in Tipperary, 7667. 

Sulphur-wort, — see Peucedanum. 

Sultan's garden at Constantinople, 308." 

Sumach, — see Rhus. 

Summer Hill, a seat in Kent, 7538. 

Sun-dew, — see Drosera. 

Sun-dials, as garden-decorations, 1834. 

Sun-fern, polypodium phegopteris. 

Sun-flower, — see Helianthus. 

Sun-rose, — see Helianthemum. ' 

Supple-jack, pauUinia polyphylla. 

Surrey, gardens and residences of, 7524. 

Surveyor of trees and timber, 7401. 

Sussex, gardens and residences of, 7530. 

Sutherlandia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, C.B.S. 
which thrives in loam and peat, and is readily in- 
creased by seeds. 

Sutherlandshire, gardens of, 7646. 

Swallow-wort, — see Asclepias. 

Sweet, Robert, F. L. S., his writings on gardeninir. 
page 1114. A. D. 1818. f JS. 

Sweet flag, acorus calamus. 

Sweet gale, myrica gale. 

Sweet gum tree, liquidambar styraciflua. 

Sweet herbs, 4131. 

Sweet pea, lathyrus odoratus. 

Sweeping, 1877. 

Swertia, felwort, pentan. dig. and gentianese, a H. 
peren. Eng. a marsh plant which prefers a peat 
soil. 

Swietenia, mahogany-tree, decan. monog. and me- 
leacca;, S. tr. W. and E. Ind. which grow in loam 
and peat, and ripe cuttings, with their leaves not 
shortened, root freely in sand under a hand-glass 
in moist heat. 

Swinden,^^., his work on gardening, page 1108. 

Swine s succory, — see Hyoseris. 

Swings as garden decorations, 1821. 

Switzer, Stephen, his works on gardenine. nase 
1102. A. D. 1715. V 

Symphoria, St. Peter's wort, pentan. monog. and ca- 
prifoleffi, a H. tr. N. Amer. a dwarf shrub which 
grows in the shade of other trees in any soil, and is 
increased by cuttings in the open ground. 

Symphytum, comfrey, pentan. monog. and boragi- 
iieK, H. peren. Eur. of easy culture. 



1226 GENERAL 

Synedrella, syngenesia polvgamia superflua and 
corymbiferese, a S. an. W. Ind. of common cul- 
ture, 1749. 

Syrian rue, peganum harmala. 

Syringa, lilac, dian. monog. and oleineas, H. tr. 
Persia and China, of easy culture. 

Syringa, common, — see Philadelphus. 

Syringe, garden, difFerent sorts of, 1418. 



T. 

Tabern. ic, Tcones plantarum (eadem ac in taber- 
neemontani Krauterbuch). 

Tabernasmontana, pentan. dig. and apocyneae, S. tr. 
W. and E. Ind. which thrive well in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 

T^cca, hexan. monog. and aroides, S. peren. E. 
Ind. which grow in loam and peat with little 
water, and are increased by suckers. 

Tacamahac, populus balsamifera. 

Tagetes, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifercce, a 
G. peren. and H. an. S. Araer. of common cul- 
ture. 

Taille d'ete, summer pruning, 2138. 

Taking vegetables or crops, — see Gathering. 

Taliaris, a seat in Caermarthenshire, 7614. 

Talinum, dodec. monogyn. and portulaceaj, S. tr. 
and bien. VV. Ind. and S. Amer. of a succulent 
nature, which grow in light sandy loam, and cut- 
tings root freely. 

Tallies, or numbering instruments, different kinds 
of, 1377. 

Tallow-tree, stiilingia sebifera. 

Tamarind, — see Tamarindus. 

Tamarindus, tamarind- tree, monadelph. trian. and 
leguminoseffl, a S. tr. \V. Ind. which grows in 
loam and peat, and cuttings root under a bell- 
glass in sand. 

Tamarisk, — see Tamarix. 

Tamarix, tamarisk, pentan. trig, and portulaceae, a 
S. tr. E. Ind. and H. tr. Eur. of easy culture, and 
increased by cuttings. 

Tamus, black briony, dicec. hexan. and smilaccce, 
a G. tr. C. B. S. and H. peren. Eur. The G. 
species T. elephantipes, or elephant's foot, is a 
curious plant which thrives in light, rich soil, 
not overwatered when the plant is in a dormant 

] state. Sweet recommends " young cuttings to be 
taken off at a joint, and planted in pots of sand in 
bottom heat under a hand-glass." {Bot, Cult. 262.) 
The H. sorts are of easy culture. 

Tamus communis, the common black briony, 4285. 

Tan, — see Bark for the use of tanners. 

Tan-y-Bwlch Hall, a seat in Merionethshire, 7612. 

Tanacetum, tansy, syngen. polyg. super, and corym- 
biferese, G. tr. C. B. S. and H. peren. and an. Eur. 
of easy culture in common soil. 

Tanacetum vulgare, the common tansy, 4187. 

Tansy, — see Tanacetum. 

Tarchonanthus, African fleabane, syngen. polygam. 

£equal. and corymbifereee, a G. tr. C. B. S. of easy 

culture. 
Tare, — see Ervum. 

Tatin, A., his works on gardening, page 1120. A. D. 
18—. 

Tatton Park, Cheshire, 7591. 

Taurida, gardens of, 259. 

Tavistock, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 

Taxus, yew-tree, dicec. monad, and conifereae, a G. 
tr. China, and H. tr. Brit, the exotic species grow 
in loam and peat, and roots, not without difficulty, 
by cuttings, in sand, under a bell-glass ; the com- 
mon yew is increased only by seeds, 7122. 

Taylor, Adam, his works on gardening, page 1107. 
A. D. 1769. 

Taymouth, a seat in Perthshire, 7636. 

Tea-tree, camellia bohea and C. viridis. 

Teak- wood, — see Tectona. 

Teasel, — see Dipsacus. 

Tectona, teak-wood, pentan. monogyn. and verbe- 
naceee, a S. tr. E. Ind. which grows in loam and 
peat ; ripened cuttings root freely in sand under 
a hand-glass. 

Teedia, didyn. angios. and scrophularineae, G. bien. 

C. B. S. of easy culture. 
Teesdalia, tetrad, silic. and cruciferes, a H. an. 

Brit, of common culture. 
Telephium, orpine, pentan. trigyn. and portulaceje, 
1 a H. peren. S. Eur. well adapted for rockwork, 

and easily increased. 
Telopea, waratah, tetran. monog. and proteaceje. 



INDEX. 



a G. tr. N. S. W. one of the most beautiful of 
green-house plants, which grows in equal parts 
of loam, peat, and sand, well drained, not over- 
watered, and placed in an airy situation ; riix;ned 
cuttings, taken off at a joint, just before growth 
commences, root in sand under a hand-glass, but 
not plunged in heat. 
Temple, Sir William, his works on gardening, page 

1101. A. D. 1685. 
Temple Grove, formerly Sheen Grove, near East 
Sheen, Surrey, the seat of Sir William Temple's 
horticultural operations referred to by Evelyn 
and himself. The house is now a boarding- 
school, 1666. 
Templemore, a seat in Tipperary, 76G7. 
Temples, 1808. 

Templetonia, diadel. decan. and leguminose», a G. 
tr. N. Holl. which grows in sandy loam and peat, 
and young cuttings root freely under a bell-glass 
in sand. 

Temporary country-residence, 7281. 

Tenthredinidete, a natural order of insects, compre- 
hending chiefly the Linnsean genus tenthredo, or 
saw-fly. 

Tephrosia, diadel. decan. and legurainosece, S. and 
G. tr. peren. and bien. C. B. S. Ind. and Amer. 
which thrive in loam and peat, and are increased 
by cuttings in sand under a bell-glass. 

Terebinthinate trees, such as have a resinous, of 
turpentine odor. 

Terebration, a mode of grafting, 2038. 

Teredo pinorum, the noctua pinastri, L. a moth 
whose caterpillar feeds on the leading shoot of the 
common pine, and often leaves that tree without 
a leader, 7044. and 900. 

Terminalia, polyg. moncec. and combretaccce, S. 
tr. E. Ind. which grow in sandy loam, and ri- 
pened cuttings, not defoliated, root in sand under 
a bell-glass. 

Terraces, 7256. 

Tessier, A. H., his works on gardening, page 1120. 
A. D. 1791. 

Tetragon ia, icos. di-pentag. and ficoideae, G. tr. 
peren. bien. and an. C. B. S. and Austral, some- 
what succulent, which prefer sandy soil, and 
root readily by cuttings. 
Tetragonia expansa. New Zealand spinage, 3794. ■ 
Tetragonotheca, syngen. polyg. super, and corym- 
bifereae, a H. peren. Virgin, which grows in light, 
rich soil, and is increased by dividing at the root, 
or by seed. 

Tetratheca, octan. monogyn. and tremandreae, a G. 
tr. N. S. W. a pretty plant, which thrives in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Tetseady Park, Cornwall, 7601. 

Teucrium germander, didyn. gymnos. and labiateae, 
G. F. and H. tr. and H. peren. and an. Eur. and 
Amer. of easy culture in almost any soil. 

Thalia, monan. monog. and canneae, a G. peren. 
S. Carolin. an aquatic, rather hardy, and in- 
creased by dividing at the root. 

Thalictrum, meadow-rue, polyan. polyg. and ra- 
nunculaceae, H. peren. Eur. and N. Amer. some 
of which are adapted for rockwork, or growing 
in pots, and all are of easy culture. 

Thame Park, Oxfordshire, 7558. 

Thapsia, deadly carrot, pentan. dig. and umbel, 
lifereae, H. peren. Eur. of easy culture. 

Thelygonum, moncec. polyan. and urticeae, a H. 
an. S. Eur. of easy culture. 

Thelymitra, gynand. monandr. and orchidese, a G. 
peren. N. S. W. which grows in sandy loam and 
peat, and requires little water when not in a 
growing state. 

Theobalds, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Theobroma, chocolate-nut, polyad. decan. and mal- 
vaceae, S. tr. S. Amer. which grows in light, rich 
soil, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Thermometer, different sorts of, for gardens, 1488, 
1489, and 1490. 

Thermopsis, decan. monog. and leguminosete, a H. 
peren. Siberia, a pretty plant, rather difHeult of 
culture ; it grows best in light loam, and is in- 
creased by seed. 

Thesium, bastard toad-flax, pentan. monog. and 
santalaceee, a G. tr. and H. peren. Eur. Amer. 
and C. B. S. of which the H. species grow best in 
chalky soil, and are increased by seeds, and the 
G. tr. is of common culture in light loam. 

Theuss, Theodore, his works on gardening, page 
1126. A. D. 1805. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1227 



Thier-garten (wild beast garden), a public park at 
Berlin, 208. 

Thivrrat, , his works on gardening, page 1118. 

A. D. 1760. 
Thistle, — see Carduus. 

Thlaspi, shepherd's purse, tetrad, silic. and cruci- 
fereae, H. peren. bien. and an. of easy culture. 

Thompson, John, his work on gardening, page 
1105. A. D. 1757. 

Thoresby Park, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Thorn-apple, — see Datura. 

Thornbury Castle, in Gloucestershire, 399. 

Thorndon Hall, Essex, 7542. 

Thorngrove, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 

Thory, Claude Antoine, his works on gardening, 
page 1122. A. D. 1819. 

Tliouin, Andr^ le Chevalier de, his works on gar- 
dening, page 1147. A. D. 1737. 

Thouin, Mons. Gabriel, his works on gardening, 
page 1122. A. D. 1819. 

Thouin, Mons. Jean, his works on gardening, page 
1122. A. D. 1816. 

Thrickelby Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 

Thrift, — see Statice. 

Thrinax, hexan. monog. and palmes, a S. tr, E. 
Ind. which thrives in sandy loam, and is in- 
creased by (imported) seeds. 
Thrincia, syngen. polyg. asqual. and cichoraceag, a 
. ; H. peren. and an. Eur. and Africa, of common 
culture. 

Thrips, a genus of hemipterous insects, 2244. 

Throatwort, — see Trachelium. 

Thuja, arbor vitse, moncec. monad, and conifereae, 
a G. and F. tr. H. tr. As. Af and Amer. The 
tender kinds grow in loam and peat, and are in- 

- creased by cuttings under a bell-glass in sand; 
the hardy species grow in any soil, and are in- 
creased by seeds. 

Thumb-pot, a garden-pot of the least size. 

Thunberg, Sir Charles Peter, M, D. his works on 
gardening, page 1130. A. D. 1799. 

Thunbergia, didyn. angios. and acanthacese, a S. tr. 
E. Ind. a pretty climbing plant, in flower the 
greater part of the year, which grows in loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root readily under a 
hand-glass. 

Thurso Castle, a seat in Caithness, 7644. 

Thymbra, didyn. gj'mnos. and labiateae, S. and G. 
tr. S. Eur. which grow in light soil, and cuttings 
root freely under a hand-glass. 

Thyme, — see Thymus. 

Thymus, thyme, didyn. gymnosperm. and labiateas, 

G. F. and H. tr. Eur. very low shrubs, all of easy 
culture in dry soil, and increased by cuttings or 
seeds. 

Thymus vulgaris, the common thyme, 4132. 

Thysanotus, hexan. monog. and asphodeleee, a G. 
peren. N. S. W. which grows in loam and peat, 
and is increased by dividing at the roots. 

Tiarella, decan. dig. and saxifrageag, a F. peren. 
and H. peren. N. Amer. which grow in light soil, 
rockwork or small pots, and are increased by 
dividing at the root. 

Tickseed, — see Corispermum. 

Tiger- flower, — see Tigridia. 

Tigridia, tiger-flower, monad, trian. and iridese, a 

H. peren. Mex. a splendid plant which thrives in 
common soil, but the bulbs must be taken up as 
soon as they have done flowering, kept dry and 
free from frost during winter, and planted again 
in the following spring. 

Tiken Hill, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 
Tilburster Hill, a seat in Surrey, 7527. 
Tile-root, — see Geissorhiza. 

Tilia, lime-tree, polyan. monog. and tiliacese, H. tr. 
Eur. and N. Amer. which grow in any soil, and 
are increased by layers. 

Tilia europasa, and other species of lime-tree, 7128. 

Tillandsia, hexan. monog. and bromeleffi, S. peren. 
S. Amer. and W. Ind. of which some species are 
parasitical, and may be treated as atrides, the 
others may be treated like the pine-apple or pit- 
cairn ia. 

Tiilibodie, a seat in Clackmannanshire, 7633. 
Timber, different kinds and qualities of, 6779. 
Timber-measurer, 1364 ; Monteith's 6970. 
Tipperary, gardens of, 7667. 

Tipula, the crane-fly, a genus of dipterous insects, 

2265 ; T. oleracea, 6193. 
Toad-flax, see Linaria. 
Tobacco, — see Nicotiana. 

Tod, George, his work on gardening, page 1114. 
A. D. 1812. 



Toddington House, Gloucestershire, 7565. 

Tofieldia, hexan. trig, and melanthaceae, H. peren. 
Brit, and N. Amer. which do best in a peat soil 
in a moist situation, and are increased by dividing 
the root. 

Tollagh Palace, in the county of Dublin, 7653. 
Tolpis, syngen. polyg. eequal. and cichoraceae, a H. 

an. France, of easy culture. 
Tonquin bean, dipterix odorata. 
Toolhouse, 1706. 
Tools of gardening, 1295. 
Toothach-tree, — see Zanthoxylum, 
Toothpick, visnaga daucoides. 
Toothwort, lathrasa squamaria. 
Topography of British gardening, 7510. 
Tordylium, hartwort, pentan. dig. and umbellife- 

reae, H. an. Eur. and Persia, of common culture. 
Tcrmentilla, septfoil, icos. polyg. and rosaceaj, H. 

peren. Brit, of common culture, in light or peat soil 
Tottenham Park, Wiltshire, 7596. 
Touch me not, impatiens nolitangere. 
Toulon, botanic garden of, 183. 
Tourettia, didyn. angios. and bignoniaceae, a S. an. 

Peru, of common culture. 
Tourn. it.. Relation d'un Voyage du Levant. Par, 

M. Pitton Tournefort. 
Tournefortia, pentan. monog. and boragineae, S. 

and G. tr. and a H. peren. which grow in rich, 

light soil, and cuttings root freely in sand under 

a hand-glass. 

Toustain de Limesey, Charles Frangois, his work on 

plantations, page 1118. A. D. 1769. 
Tower-mustard, — see Turritis. 
Towers, 1806. 

Townley Hall, Lancashire, 7588. 

Tozzetti, Octavius Targioni, M. D., his work on 

gardening, page 1128. A. D. 1777. 
Tozzettia, trian. dig. and graminese, a H. an. of 

common culture. 
Trachelium, throatwort, pentan. monog. and cam- 

panulacese, a G. tr. and H. bien. France and Brit. 

of common culture. 
Tradescant, John, his writings on gardening, page 

1109. A. D. 1656. 
Tradescantia, spider-wort, hexan. monog. and com- 

melincEe, a S. tr. and H. peren. and an. E. and W. 

Ind. and N. and S. Amer. all of easy culture iu 

light, rich soil. 
Tradesman-gardener, 7388. 

Tradesmen's villas, 7285 ; their management, 7424. 

Tragia, monoec. tetran. and euphorbiaceae, a S. tr. 
peren. and an. and a H. an. W. and E. Ind. which 
grow in light soil, and cuttings root freely. 

Tragopogon, goat's beard, syngen. polyg. jequal. 
and cichoracese, H. bien. Eur. of easy culture. 

Tragopogon porrifolius, the salsify, 3750. 

Training trees and plants, difi'erent methods of, 
• 2140. 

Transplanter, for herbaceous plants, 1309. 
Transplanting, different methods of performing, 
2079. 

Trapa, water-caltrops, tetran. monog. and hydro- 
charideae, a G. peren. and H. an. aquatics of easy 
culture, 6037. 

Trapa natans and bicornis, 6037. 

Traps for vermin, different sorts of, used in garden- 
ing, 1435. and 1473. 

Trasternaugh, a seat in Westraeath, 7662. 

Travelling gardener, 7385. 

Treacle-mustard, clypeola ionthlaspi. 

Tredegar Park, Monmouthshire, 7567. 

Tree-celandine, bocconia frutescens. 

Tree-mallow, lavatera arborea. 

Tree-surveyor, 7401. 

Tree-transplanter, 1468. 

Trees, their uses individually, 6744 ; in civil archi- 
tecture, military architecture, naval architecture, 
construction of machines, implements, utensils, 
fuel, tanning, dyeing, various uses, food, medi- 
cine, poison, 6745. to 6760. 

Trees, classification of, according to their uses, 
6769; for timber, bark, charcoal, ashes, pales 
and fencing, hoops, &c. shelter, shade, improv-. 
ing bad soil, separation and defence, seclusion, 
6780. to 6794. 

Trees, their uses in ornamental scenery, 6795; 
magnitude, form, mode of growth, duration, and 
expression, 6796. to 6801. 

Trees, their wounds, bruises, casualties, and de- 
fects, 6925. 

Trees, insects and vermin by which they are in- 
fested, 6934. 

Trees, their products, ; prunings, thinnings. 



1228 



GENERAL INDEX. 



seeds, osier-grounds, coppice-woods, 6936. to 
6940. 

Trees, season for cutting, 6941 ; mode of cutting, 
barking, pollards, period of felling, operation of 
felling, season of felling, 694-2. to 6957. 

Trees, uses of their roots, 6961 ; method of char- 
ring, 6962. 

Trees, valuation of, 6955; as plantations, as timber, 
measurement of, 6967. to 6972. 

Trees, nursery for, — see Nursery. 

Trees, their nursery culture, 6982 ; coniferous, nut- 
bearing, berried stoves, berries and capsule bear- 
ing trees, with small seeds, with leguminous 
seeds, small soft-seeds, general culture of, 69S3. to 
7026. 

Trefoil, — see Trifolium. 

Trelawney House, Cornwall, 7601. 

Tremadoc House, a seat in Merionethshire, 7612. 

Trenching, 1870. 

Trent Place, Middlesex, 7521. 

Trentham, a seat in Staffordshire, 7570. 

Trevirana, didynam. angios. and scrophularinese, a 
S. peren. Jamaica, which flowers freely in sandy 
loam and peat, the pots being kept dr\- as soon as 
the flowering season is over till the roots begin to 
vegetate. 

Trew ehret, Plantce selectae, quarura Imagines, 

pinxit Ge. Dion. Ehret. Collegit et illustravit 

Christ. Jac. Trew. 
Trewia, dioec. polvan. and , a S. tr. E. 

Ind. which grows in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Trianon grand, a royal garden near Paris, 172. 
Trianon petit, a royal garden near Paris, 169. 
Trianthema, decaii. dig. and portulacete, S. an. E. 

and W. Ind. of common culture. 
Tribuhis, caltrops, decan. monog. and rutaceae, a S. 

peren. and an. and H. an. Eur. and Amer. which 

grow in light soil, and cuttings root freely in 

sand under a hand-glass. 
Trichilia, decan. monog. and meleacese, S. tr. W. 

Ind. which thrive in loam and peat, and cuttings 
■ root in sand under a hand-glass in heat. 
Trichodesma, pentan. monog. and boragineEe, a S. 

an and H. an. E. Ind. and C. B. S. of common 

culture. 

Trichodium, trian. dig. and graminea?, H. peren. 

N. Amer. and Brit, of easy culture. 
Trichomanes, crj-ptog. filices and filices, a H. pe- 

ren. Brit, of easy culture in loam and peat in the 

shade. 

Trichonema, trian. monog. and iridese, G. peren. 
and a H. peren. bulbs which may be treated as 
ixia. 

Trichophorum, trian. monog. and cyperacea;, H. 
peren. Brit, and X. Amer. grasses of easy culture 
in moist soil. 

Trichosanthes, snake-gourd, moncec. monad, and 
cucurbitacefe, a S. peren. and F. an. ; the S. spe- 
cies thrive best in rich sandy loam, and cuttings 
root freelv under a hand-glass in a moist heat ; 
the others may be treated as cucumis. 

Trichostema, didvn. gvmnos. and labiateas, a H. 

bien. and an. N.' Amer. of common culture. 
Trientalis, winter green, heptan. monog. andprimu- 

. lacece, a H. peren. Brit, and N. Amer. which 
grow best in light soil, and are increased by divid- 
ing at the root or by seeds. 

Triewald, Martin, his writings on gardening, page 
1103. A. D. 1729., and page 1130. A. D. 1740. 

Trifolium, trefoil, diadelph. decan. and legumi- 
nosese, H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. Afr. and X. 
Amer. of easy culture, and increased by dividing 
the roots or bv seeds. 

Triglochin, arrbwgrass, hexan. trig, and alismacese, 
a G. peren. and H. peren. C. B. S. and Brit, marsh 
plants of easy treatment. 

Trigonella, fenugreek, diadel. and legummoseas, S. 
an. and H. peren. bien. and an. E. Ind. and Eur. 
of easy culture. 

Trillium, hexandria trigynia and smilacea, a G. 
peren. and H. peren. N. Amer. which do best ni 
a bed of peat in a moist shady simalion, and are 
increased, though slowly, by dividing at the root. 

Tring Park, Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Triodia, trian. dig. and graminese, a H. peren. Bnt. 
of easv culture. 

Triosteu'm, feverwort, pentan. monog. and capri- 
fole£s, H. peren. N. Amer. which grow freely ni 
rich, light soil, and are increased by cuttings under 
a hand-glass, or by dividing the root. 

Tripsacum, moncec. trian. and grammes, a H. 
nercn. N. Amer, of easy culture. 



Trisetum, trian. dig and gramineae, a H. peren. 

and an. Eur. of common culture. 
Tristania, polyad. icos. and myrteaceje, G. tr. 

N. S. W. which grow in sandy loam and peat, and 

cuttings, not too much ripened, root readily in 

sand under hand or bell glasses. 
Triticum, wheat-grass, trian. dig. and gramineas, 

H. peren. and an. Eur. and Asia, of common 

culture. 

Tritoma, hexan. monog. and hemerocallideae, a F. 
peren. C. B. S. which thrive best in peat soil, and 
are increased by dividing at the root. 

Tritonia, trian. monog. and irideae, Br. G. peren. 
C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated as ixia. 

I'riumfetta, dodec. monog. and tiliacese, S. tr. and 
an. E. and W. Ind. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

Trollius, globe-flower, polyan. polyg. and ranuncu- 
laceae, Eur. and N. Amer. of easy treatment. 

Tropeeolum, Indian cress, octan. monog. and gera- 
niace£e, G. tr. bien. and an. Peru, which grow in 
light, rich soil, and are of easy increase by cuttings 
or seeds. 

Tropseolum majus, common Inc.ian cress, 4116. 

Trophis, ramoon-tree, dicec. tetran. and , 

S. tr. E. and W, Ind. which grow freely in loam 
and peat, and cuttings root under a hand-glass in 
sand. 

Trowel, Samuel, his work on gardening, page 1104 

A. D. 1739. 
Trowel, the garden, 1308. 

Troximon syngen. polyg. a?qual. and cichoracea;, 
H. peren. N. Amer. which grow freely in rich, 
light soil, and are increased by seeds. 

Troy House, Monmouthshire, 7567. 

Troxelius, Charles Blechort, his work on gardening, 
page 1130. A. D. 1780. 

Trumpet-flower, — see Bignonia. 

Trumpton Hall, Cornwall, 76U1. 

Truncheon {tronqon, Fr. from truncus, Lat), a 
pole or rod cut to the length of a staffer longer, 
sometimes adopted in making willow planta- 
tions. 

Tschoudi, I. B. L. Baron de, his work on gardening, 

page 1118. A. D. 1768. 
Tuber cibarium, the truffle, 4346. 
Tuberose, polyanthes tuberosa — see Polyanthe.s. 
Tuilleries (tile-grounds, or tile-kilns), gardens of 

the, at Paris, 161. 
Tulbagia, hexan. monog. and hemerocallideae, H. 

peren. C. B. S. which grow in sandy loam, and are 

increased by offsets from the bulbs. 
Tulip, — see Tulipa. 
Tulip-tree, — see Liriodendron. 
Tulipa, tulip, hexan. monog. and liliacese, H. peren. 

bulbs, Eur. which grow best in sandy soil, and are 

increased by offsets. 
Tulipa gesner'iana, the common tulip, 6242. 
Tupelo, — see Nyssa. 

Tupistra, hexan. monog. and aroidea», a peren. 
Amboyna, which may be grown in loam and 
peat. 

Turf, the superiority of British, 5399. 
Turf-raser, &c., 1317. to 1319. 

Turfing, the transplanting or laying down turf, 
2101. 

Turmeric, — see Curcuma. 
Turnip, — see Brassica. 

Turnera, pentan. trig, and portulacese, S. tr. an. and 
H. an. which grow in rich, light soil, and are 
increased by cuttings under a hand-glass or by 
seeds. 

Turnsole, — see Heliotropiura. 

Turritis, tower-mustard, tetrad, siliq. and crucife- 
rece, H. peren and an. Eur. of easy culture. 

Tussilago, colt's foot, syngen. polyg. super, and 
corymbiferese, a S. bien. and H. peren. W. Ind. 
and Eur. of easy culture. T. fragrans is a desi- 
rable plant for a green-house during winter, on 
account of the odor its flowers diffuse at that 
season. 

Twav-blade, listera ovata. 

Tweedale, county of, as to gardening, 762.3. 

Tivickenham, village of, in Middlesex, 7520. _ 

Twickenham Park, Middlesex, 7520. 

Twinstead Hall, Essex, 7541. 

Tvford House, Middlesex, 7520. 

Tynningham, a seat in Haddingtonshire, 7619. 

Tvpha, cat's tail, moncec. trian. and aroidea», H. 
peren. Brit, marsh plants of easy treatment. 

Tzaritzina, or Zaritzina, an imperial residence near 
Moscow, 262, 



GENERA 



u. 

Udum salictum {udiis, a, um, wet or moist, and 

salictum, i, a willow-ground), a proper situation 

for growing willows. 
Ulex, furze, diadel. decan. and leguminosesD, H. tr. 

Brit, which grow best in dry soil, and are increased 

by seeds. 

Ulmus, elm-tree, pen tan. dig. and amentaceffl, H, 
tr. Brit, and N. Amer. and a G. tr. China, all of 
which thrive in loamy soil, and the G. species is 
increased by cuttings under a hand-glass. 

Ulmus campestris, and other species grown as timber- 
trees, 7081. 

Ulva lactuca, 4358. 

Umbrella-wort, — see Oxybaphus. 

Underley Park, near Kirby Lonsdale, 6182. 

Ungeliauer, J. A., his works on gardening, page 1123. 
A. D. 1741. 

Uniola, sea-side oat, trian. dig. and gramineee, H. 
peren. N. Amer. of easy culture. 

Unona, polyan. polyg. and anonacece, a S. tr. Java, 
which grows best in light loam, and ripened cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 

Up Park, Sussex, 7531. 

Upsal, botanic garden of, 248. 

Urania, hexan. monog. and musacese, a S. tr. E. Ind. 
1^ which thrives in loamy soil v/ith plenty of water 
. and a strong heat, and is increased by imported 
seeds. 

Urena, monad, polyan. and malvaceas, S. tr and 
a G. tr. E. Ind. and Surinam, which grow in 

f loam and peat, and are increased by seeds or cut- 
tings. 

Uropetalon, hexan. monog. and asphodeleae, G. and 
F. peren, C. B. S. bulbs which may be treated as 
ixia, &c. 

Urtica, nettle, monoec. tetran. and urticeze, S. tr. 
and peren. W. Ind. and F. and H. peren. and an. 
Eur. all of which grow well in rich, light soil, 
and are readily increased by the usual means. 

Urtica dioica, the common stinging nettle as a pot- 
herb, and to force, 4296. 

Ustilago, a small fungus, which is thought to oc- 
casion the blight and smut, 878. 

Utensils, 1390; mould-screen, mould-sieve, mould- 
scuttle, mould-basket, flower-pot, store-pot, pot 
for bulbous roots, classic pot, stone-ware pot, 
glazed pot, flowerpot-gauge, square pot, saucer, 
carnation-saucer, propagation-pot, blanching-pot, 
plant-box, plant-basket, planter's basket, watering- 

; pot, watering-tube, garden-syringe, hand-forcing- 
pump, portable canvass or gauze case, oiled paper 
shade, straw-net, garden-net, horizontal shelter, 
plant-umbrella, earthenware shelter, leaden hand- 
glass, copper hand-glass, cast-iron hand-glass, 
wrought-iron hand-glass, green bell-glass, crystal 
bell or receiver, utensils for entrapping vermin, 
1391. to 1438. 

Utility, as expressive of design in landscape-garden- 
ing, 7169. 

Utricularia, hooded milfoil, dian. monog. and len- 
tibuiarea, H. peren. Brit, marsh plants, which 
prefer peat soil, or they will grow in pots of 
sphagnum with a little peat earth at bottom, set 
in pans of water. 

Uvaria, polyan. polyg. and annonacese, S. E. and 
W. Ind. which thrive best in sandy loam, and 
ripened cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass 
in heat. 

Uvularia, hexan. monog. and melanthaceas, H. 
peren. N. Amer. which grow in light sandy soil, 
and are increased by dividing at the root. 



V. 

Vaccinium, whortleberry, decan. monog. and eri- 
ceje, G. and H. tr. Brit, and N. Amer. which 
thrive best in peat soil, or sand and peat, and are 
increased by layers, young cuttings under a bell- 
glass, or by seeds. 

Vaccinium hispidilum, and other fruit-bearing 
species, 4774. 

Valantia, polyg. moncec. and rubiaceae, a H. peren. 
and an. Brit, of easy culture. 

Valemont, I'Abb^ de, a French writer on garden- 
ing, page 1116. A. D. 1705. 

Valentines, a seat in Essex, 7542. 

Valerian, — see Valeriana. 



L INDEX. 1229 



Valeriana, valerian, trian. monojj. and dipsacete, 
H. peren. and an. Eur. of easy culture; the 
smaller sorts grow best in light soil, and answer 
well for pots or rockwork. 

Valeriana locusta, or lamb-lettuce, — see Fedia. 

Valleyfield, a seat in Fifeshire, 7635. 

Van Dieman's Land, gardening of, 504. 

Van Kampen, et fils, their works on gardening, 
page 1129. A. U. 1760. 

Vii7i Sterbeck, Francis, his works on gardening, page 
1129. A. D. 1682. 

Vander GYoen, J., his work on gardening, page 1129. 
A. D. 1699. 

Vanes as decorations, 1835. 

Vanguiera, pent, monog. and rubiacea?, a S. tr. Ind. 
which grows in sandy loam and peat, and cuttings 
root freely in sand in heat under a hand-glass. 

Vanilla, gynan. monan. and orchideffi, S. tr. trailers 
and parasites, which root at every joint into the 
bark of the trees, on which they grow. They 
may be treated as aerides, and are readily in- 
creased by cuttings. 

Various British authors, who have touched inci- 
dentally on gardening, page 1105. A. D. 1760. 

Vegetable kingdom, origin and progress of the 
study of, 547 ; among the ancients, in modern 
times, in the present day, 548. to 554. 

Vegetable glossology, or "the names of the parts of 
plants, 555. 

Vegetable phytography, or the nomenclature and. 
description of plants, 557 ; vulgar mode of naming 
plants, scientific rules for names, names of classes 
and orders, names of genera, of species, of va- 
rieties and subvarieties, description of plants, 
herbariums, methods of study, &c. 558. to 582. 

Vegetable taxonomy, or the classification of plants, 
583 ; methods in use, table of the Linneean me- 
thod, of the method of Ju.ssieu, detail of the 
Linnaan system, and arrangement of the genera 
under the different classes and orders, arrange- 
ment of the genera under the classes and orders 
of Jussieu, 584. to 589. 

Vegetable organology, or the external structure 
of plants, 590. Perfect plants : their conservative 
organs — root, trunk, branches, leaf, frond ; con- 
servative appendages — germs, glands, tendrils, 
stipulse, ramenta, armature, pubescence, ano- 
malies ; reproductive organs — flower, flower- 
stalk, receptacle, inflorescence, fruit ; reproduc- 
tive appendages ; appendages proper to the flower 
of the fruit. Imperfect plants : fihces, equisita- 
cese, and lycopodinese — conservative organs, re- 
productive organs ; musci — conservative organs, 
reproductive organs; hepaticse — conservative 
organs, reproductive organs ; algee and lichens—- 
conservative organs, re])roductive organs, utility 
of thealgze; fungi — conservative organs, repro- 
ductive organs, uses of the fungi, 591. to 604. 

Vegetable anatomy, or the internal structure of 
plants, 6C5. Decomposite organs — seed, nucleus, 
pericarp, flower-stalk, leaf-stalk, gems, buds, bulbs, 
propago, gongylus, caudex, appendages; compo- 
site organs — epidermis, pulp, pith, cortical layers, 
ligneous layers, concentric layers, divergent 
layers ; elementary or vascular organs — utricles, 
tubes, large tubes, small tubes, apertures, pores, 
gaps, appendages, 606. to 634. 

Vegetable chemistry, or primaiy principles of plants, 
635. Mechanical processes ; chemical processes ; 
compound products — gum, sugar, starch, gluten, 
albumen, flbrina, extract of catechu, of senna, 
of quinquina, of saffron, coloring matter, tan- 
nin, bitter principle, narcotic principle, oxalic 
acid, citric acid, malic acid, gallic acid, tartaric 
acid, betizoic acid, prussic acid, fixed oils, vola- 
tile oils, wax, butier of cacao, of coco, of nut- 
meg, tallow of croton, wax of myrtle, resins, 
rosin, mastich, bloom, gum-resins, balsams, cam- 
phor, caoutchouc, cork, woody fibre, charcoal, 
sap, proper juice, ashes, alkalies, earths, silica, 
magnesia, metallic oxides ; simple products, 636. 
to 714. 

Vegetable physiology, or the functions of plants, 
715. Germination of the seed, physical pheno- 
mena, chem cal phenomena ; food of the veget- 
ating plant — water, gasses, carbonic acid gas, 
oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen, extracts, salts, 
earths, manures ; process of nutrition — introsus- 
ception, ascent of the sap, causes of the sap's 
ascent elaboration of the sap, of carbonic acid, 
of oxygen, decomposition of water, descent of the 
proper juice, causes of descent : process of veget- 
able developement ; elementary organs — compo- 



1230 



GENERAL INDEX. 



site organSj'annuals and annual shoots, perennials 
and their annual layers, circulation of vegetable 
juices ; decomposite organs, the root, the stem, 
the branches, the bud, the leaf, the flower, and 
fruit : anomalies of vegetable developement — the 
root, the stem, the branch, the bud, the leaves, 
the flower, the fruit, the habit, physical virtues, 
duration : sexuality of vegetables, discoveries of 
the moderns, impregnation of the seed, access 
of the pollen, theory of the animalculist, hybrids ; 
changes consequent upon impregnation, external 
changes, internal changes ; propagation of the 
species ; equivocal generation, seeds, gems, run- 
ners, slips, layers, suckers, grafting ; causes 
limiting the propagation of the species : evi- 
dence and character of vegetable vitality — ex. 
citability, heat, frondescence, efflorescence, ma- 
turation of the fruit ; calendarium florse ; irritabi- 
lity, stimuli, instinct, definition of the plant, 716. 
to 858. 

Vegetable pathology, or the diseases and casualties 
of the lives of plants, 859 ; wounds and bruises, 
incisions, boring, girdling, fracture, pruning, 
grafting, felling, buds destroyed, leaves destroyed, 
decortication ; diseases — blight, srnut, mildew, 
honey-dew, dropsy, flux of juices, gangrene, etio- 
lation, suffocation, contortion, consumption ; na- 
tural decay, of the temporary organs, flower, 
fruit, of the permanent organs, 860. to 907. 

"Vegetable geography, or the territorial distribution 
of plants, 908. Geographical distribution ; phy- 
sical distribution — temperature, elevation, mois- 
ture, soil, mixed soils, aquatic soils, earthy soils, 
vegetable soils, light; civil causes affecting dis- 
tribution ; characteristic, or picturesque distri- 
bution, systematic distribution, arithmetical 
distribution, economical distribution, distribution 
of the British flora, application of the native flora 
of Britain, artificial flora, native countries of the 
exotics of British gardens, periods of their intro- 
duction, obvious character of the plants cultivated 
in British gardens, their botanical and horticul- 
tural distribution, according to the Linnrean 
system, according to that of Jussieu, British flora 
procurable at the nurseries, hardy plants, green- 
house and dry-stove plants, hot-house plants, 
annuals, native and exotic, artificial application 
of the British flora, fruit-trees and plants, herba- 
ceous plants used for culinary purposes, florists' 
flowers, hardy barren trees and shrubs, herba- 
ceous plants used in agriculture for food, and in 
the arts, miscellaneous application of hardy her- 
baceous plants, application of various ornamental 
exotics which require the protection of glass, 
native habitations of plants, 909. to 1032. 

Vegetable culture as derived from the study of 
plants, 1004 : to increase the number and retain the 
native qualities of plants ; to increase the number 
and improve the qualities of plants ; increasing 
the magnitude ; to increase the number, improve 
the quality, and increase the magnitude ; to form 
new varieties ; to preserve plants for future use, 
1004. to 1016. 

Vegetable sculptures, their formation, 1844. 

Vegetables, to form new varieties of, 1013. 

Vegetables, to preserve for future use, 2289. 

Vegetables composing the Hortus Britannicus, ar- 
ranged according to the Linnsan system, 588 ; 
the Jussieuan system, 589 ; to the departments of 
horticulture, 986. 

Vegetables which first attracted man's attention as 
food, 26. 

Vegetation to accelerate or force, operations for, 
2181. 

Vegetation to retard, operations for, 2177. 

Velezia, pentan. dig. and caryophyllese, a H. an. 
Spain, of common culture. 

Veltheimia, hexan. monog. and hemerocallides, G. 
peren. C. B. S. bulbs, which grow in light loam, 
and are readilv increased by offsets ; or the leaves 
pulled off" close to the bulb, and planted, will de- 
posit bulbs at their base, as will many other scaly 
and coated bulbs. 

Venerie, a royal residence at Turin, 77. 

Vent, mal., Jardin de la Malmaison. Par E. P. Ven- 
tenat. 

Venus's comb, scandix pecten. 

Venus's flytrap, dionasa muscipula. 

Veratrum, polvgam. monoec. and melaiithacese, H. 
peren. Eur. 'and N. Amer. which grow best in 
rich sandy soil, and are increased by dividing at 
the root, or by seeds, which should be sown as 

, soon as ripe. 



Verbascum, mullein, pentan. monog. and solanes?, 

G. peren. and bien. and H. peren. bien. and an. 
all of easy culture on light soil. 

Verbena, vervain, didyn. angios. and verbenaceae, 

H. peren. bien. and an. Eur. and N. Amer. which 
thrive in any common soil, and are increased by 
dividing at the root. 

Verbesina, syngen. polyg. super, and corymbifereae, 
S. an. and a tr. E. Ind. and W. Ind. and G. peren. 
and H. peren. Amer. which grow in common soil, 
and are readily increased by cuttings, seeds, or 
dividing at the root. 

Vermin, traps and snares used for, in gardening, 
1435. and 1473. 

Vernonia, syngen. polyg. sequal. and corymbiferea?, 
a S. bien. E. Ind. and H. peren. N. Amer. which 
grow well in rich loam, and make a fine show in 
autumn. 

Veronica, speedwell, dian. monog. and scrophulari- 
nese, G. tr. and peren. N. Hoi. and H. peren. and 
an. Eur. all of easy culture in any soil : the G. 
species are propagated by cuttings under a hand- 
glass, and all the rest by seeds, or dividing the root. 

Veronica beccabunga, brooklime, 600. 

Veronica spicata, British tea, 4317. 

Vervain, — see Verbena. 

Vesicaria, tetrad, silic. and crucifereje, H. peren. 

and a bien. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Vespa vulgaris, the common wasp, 4837. 
Vestia, pentan. monog. and polemoniaceae, a G. tr. 

Chili, which thrives in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root freely under a hand-glass. 
Vetch, — see Vicia. 

Viart, , his works on gardening, page 1122. 

A.D. 1819. 

Vibert, J. P., his work on gardening, page 1122. 
A.D. 1820. 

Viburnum, pentan. trig, and caprifolese, a G. tr. 
Canaries, and H. tr. Eur. and N. Amer. which 
thrives well in common soil, and are increased by 
layers or cuttings under a hand-glass in a shady 
situation ; both the G. and H. kinds are early 
flowerers, which render them very desirable. 

Vicia, vetch, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S. 
an. E. Ind. G. peren. C. B. S. and H. peren. Eur. 
of easy culture in light soil. 

Vicia faba, the common bean, 3612. 

Vigne dela Reine, a seat near Turin, 77. 

Vilain, Madame, her villa near Ghent, 125. 

Villa-farm, 7279; management of, 7430. and 7435." 

Villa-residence, 7278 ; management of, 7435. 

Villaneuve, a seat near Warsaw, 282. 

Villarsia, pentan. monog. and gentianes, a G. peren. 
and H. peren. aquatics which flower freely. 

Viminaria, rush-broom, decan. monog. and legu- 
minoseee, a G. tr. which grows in sandy loam and 
peat, and is readily increased by seeds or cuttings 
under a bell-glass in sand. 

Vinca, periwinkle, pentan, monog. and apocynes, a 
S. tr. and an. E. Ind. and H. peren. and an. shrub, 
Eur. The S. species grows in light, rich earth, 
and flowers the greater part of the year, and cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. The H. 
sorts are trailers, and are increased by cuttings, 
layers, or dividing at the root. 

Vine, — see Vitis. 

Vine, a seat in Hampshire, 7594. 

Vinery, its construction, 2656. 

Vineyard-nursery, at Hammersmith, 7518. 

Viola, violet, pentan. monog. and violaceae, a G. tr. 
and H. peren. and an. N. Amer. and Eur. which 
grow in light soil, are well adapted for rockwork 
or pots, and are readily increased by seeds or 
parting the root. 

Violet, — see Viola. 

Viper's bugloss, — see Echium. 

Viper's grass, — see Scorzonera. 

Virgilia, decan. monog. and leguminoses, G. tr. 
Afr. and a H. tr. N. Amer. which thrive in loam 
and peat, and young cuttings root in sand under a 
bell-glass. 

Virginian poke, Phytolacca decandra. 

Virgin's bower, — see Clematis. 

Viscum, mistletoe, dicEC. tetran. and caprifoleas, a 
H. tr. Eng. parasite, 6588. 

Visnaga, toothpick, pentan. dig. and umbellifereje, 
a H. an. S. Eur. of common qulture. 

Visnea, dodec. trig, and ebenacese, a G. tr. Canaries, 
which grows in 'oam and peat, and ripened cut- 
tings root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Vispre, Franci.'i Xavier, his dissertation on the 
growth of wine in England, page 1109. A. D. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



1231 



Vitex, chaste tree, didyn. angios. and verbenaccfe, 
S. and G. tr. E. Tnd. which grow in loam and 
peat, and cuttings root freely in sand under a 
hand-glass. 

Vitis, vine, pentan. monog. and viteacea?, a S. tr. 
Ind. and H. tr. N. Amer. of easy culture, and 
readily increased by cuttings or layers. 

Vitis vinifera, the common grape-vine, 4790 ; cul- 
ture in the open air in various ways, 4816 ; in the 
vinery and other hot-houses, 2940. 

Vittaria, cryptog. filices and filiceae, a S. peren. 
Amer. of easy culture in loam and peat, and in- 
creased by dividing the root or by seeds. 

Voer/ielm, George, his work on gardening, page 1129. 
A.D. 1752. 

Volkamer, Johann Christoph., his works on gar- 
dening, page 1123. A. D. 1700. 

Yolkameria, didyn. angios. and verbenacese, S. tr. 
\V. Ind. which thrive well in loam and peat, and 
cuttings root freely under a hand-glass. 

Von Brocke, H. C, his works on gardening, page 
1124. A.D. 1768. 

Von Burgsdorf, F. A. L., his works on gardening, 
page 1124. A.D. 1783. 

Von Derczen, J., his work on gardening, page 1125. 
A.D. 1796. 

Voji Dieskau, C. J. F., his works on gardening, page 

1124. A.D. 1776. 

Von Hagen, F. W., his works on gardening, page 

1126. A.D. 1805. 
Von Hass, J. A., his works on gardening, page 1125. 

A.D. 1793. 

Von Sierstorpff, K. H., his work on gardening, page 

1125. A.D. 1790. 

Von Sponeck, his works on gardening, page 1127. 
A.D. 1810. 

Von Vothman, J. G., his works on gardening, page 

1125 A.D. 1784. 
Von Weiss, K., his work on gardening, page 1126. 

A.D. 1800. 

Von Wilke, G. W. C, his works on gardening, page 

1124. A.D. 1783. 
Vredmannus, J. F., his works on gardening, page 

1123. A.D. 1647. 



W. 

W., Willdenow's Species Plantarum. 

W. en., Willdenow Enumeratio Plantarum Hort, 
Bot. Berolinensis. 

Wachendorfia, trian. monog. and hemodoraceae, G. 
peren. C. B. S. bulbs which grow in sandy loam 
and peat, with little or no water wheri not in a 
growing state, and are increased by offsets. 

Wade, Walter, M.D., his tracts on gardening, page 
1114. A.D. 1811. 

Wakefield Lodge, Northamptonshire, 7580. 

Waldschmidt, W. H., his works on gardening, page 
1123. A.D. 1712. 

Waldsteinia, icos. di-pentag. and rosace£e, a H. 
peren. Hungary ; very suitable for rockwork or 
pots ; it grows in loam and peat, and is increased 
by parting at the roots. 

Wales, gardens and residences of, 7602. 

"Walford Lodge, Devonshire, 7600. 

Walks, their formation, 1956 j in horticulture, 
2490 ; in floriculture, 6105 ; in landscape-gar- 
dening, 7243. 

Wall-cress, — see Arabts. 

Wall-flower, — see Cheiranthus. 

Wall-tree nails and other fastenings, 7514. 

Wall-trees, their planting and management, 2499. 

Waller, K. A., his works on gardening, page 1127. 
A.D. 1806. 

Wallerius, J. G., his works on gardening, page 1130. 
A.D. 1752. 

Walls in gardening, structures for defence, enclo- 
sure, shelter, and the culture of the more delicate 
fruit-trees, difl'erent kinds of, 1556. 

Walpole, Horace, Earl of Orford, his writings on 
gardening, page 1108. A.D. 1780. 

Walroth, , his works on gardening, page 1127. 

A.D. 1812. 

Walsingham House, Norfolk, 7554. 

Walther, J. J., his works on gardening, page 1124. 
A. D. 1779. ^ 

Waltheria, monad, pentan. and tiliaceas, S. tr. and 
a bien. E. Ind. and S, Amer. which grow in light, 
rich soil, and cuttings root in sand under a hand- 
glass. 

"Walton, a seat in Radnorshire, 7610. 
Wami)ee-trec, cookca punctata. 
Wanstcad House, Essex, 7542. 



Waratah, camellia, — see Camellia. 
Waratah, tclopea speciosissima. 
Wardour Castle, Wiltshire, 7597. 
Warsaw, gardens of, 282. 
Wart-cress, — see Coronopus. ' 
Wart-wort, euphorbia helioscopia. 
Warton, a seat in Westmoreland, 7592. 
Warwick Castle, Warwickshire, 7572. 
Warwickshire, gardens and residences of, 7571. 
Watelct, C. H., his works on gardening, page 1119. 
A. D. 1774. 

Water, 1213 ; its constituent parts, how obtained in 
hot-houses, 1601. and 1688; different modes of 
procuring and preserving in the open garden, 1713. 
and 1822 ; forming excavations for, 1719 ; operat- 
ing on in landscape, 7216. 

Water-caltrops, — see Trapa. 

Water-chickweed, montia fontana. 

Water-cress, — see Nasturtium. 

Water-dropwort, — see GEnanthe. 

Water-hemlock, phellandrium aquaticum. 

Water-horehound, — see Lycopus. 

Water -leaf, — see Hydrophyllum. 

Water-lily, — .see Nymphsea, and Nuphar. ^ 

Water-milfoil, — see Myriophyllura. 

Water-parsnep, — see Sium. 

Water-plantain, — see Alisma. 

Water-soldier, stratiotes alcides. 

Water-starwort, callitriche aquatica. 

Water-violet, hottonia palustris. 

Water-wort, elatine hydrojuper. 

Waterbourne Harrington, a seat in Dorsetshire, 
7598. 

Waterfalls, their kinds and construction, 1826. and 
7225. 

Waterford, county of, as to gardening, 7665. 

Watering-engines, different kinds of, 1448. 

Watering-pot, different kinds of, 1414. 

Wattled hurdle {Sax.), a hurdle spliced or wrought 
of small shoots, used to shade beds or rows of 
young plants, or new-sown seeds, in gardening. 

Watton Woodhall, Hertfordshire, 7544. 

Watsonia, trian. monog. and iridea;, G pereai. 
C. B. S. which may be treated as ixia in the green- 
house, or like the common ranunculus in ihe 
open air. 

Wax-tree, ligustrum lucidum. 

Wayfaring-tree, viburnum lantana. 

Weald Hall, Essex, 7542, 

Weber, F. B., his works on gardening, page 1126. 
A. D. 1803. 

Webera, pentan. monog. and rubiacete, S. tr. E. 

Ind. which thrive in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Weeding, 1893 ; weeding pincers, 1352 : weeding; 

gloves, 2371. 

Weeks, Edward, his work on gardening, page 1114, 
A.D. 1814. 

Weiss, F. W., his works on gardening, page 1124. 
A. D. 1755. 

Weissenbruch, J. W. J., his works on gardening, page 

1127. A. D. 1805. 
Weissmantel, J. N., his works on gardening, page 

1124. A.D. 1799. 
Welbeck Abbey, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 
Wellfield House, a seat in lliidnorshire, 7610. 
Wells for water, 1713. 
Wembly Manor House, Middlesex, 7520. 
Wemyss Castle, a seat in Fifeshire, 7635. 
Wemvss House, or Gosfcrd House, a seat in East 

Lothian, 7619. 
Wenckeler, Jean George, his works on gardening, 

page 1118. A. D. 1767. 
Wendf, G. T. K., his works on gardening, page 1126. 

A.D. 1804. 

Wendlandria, hexan. polyg. and menisperm.eas, a 

H. tr. N. Amer. which grows in peat soil, and is 

increased by layers. 
Wentworth Castle, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Wentworth House, Yorkshire, 7582. 
West Beechworth, Surrey, 7527. 
West Grinstead Park, Sussex, 7531. 
West Indian fruits deserving cultivation, 6019. 
Westmeath, county of, as to gardening, 7662. 
Westmoreland, gardens and residences of, 7592. 
Weston, Sir Richard, his work on gardening, page 

1100. A. D. 1645. ^' *^ 

Weston, Richard, Esq., his works on gardening. 

page 1108. A. D. 1770. 
Westringia, didyn. gymnos. and labiatcEe, G. tr. 

Austral, which thrive in sandy loam and peat, 

and young cuttings root freely under a bell-glass 

in sand. 



123S 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Westwood House, Worcestershire, 7566. 
Wetxkausen, Von Truchsess, his work on cherries, 

page 1117. A. D. 1820. 
Wexford, county of, as to gardening, 765. 
Wheat, — see Triticum. 

Wlieatletj or Whateley, Thomas, Esq., his writings 

on gardening, page 1108. A. D. 1770. 
Wheatley Hall, Yorkshire, 7582. 
Wheelbarrow, different sorts of, 1441. 
Wheeler, James, his writings on gardenine. paee 

1106. A. D. 1763. 

Whim, a seat near Edinburgh, 362. 
W'hitby Court, Worcestershire, 7566 
Whitby Hall, Warwickshire, 7571. 
Whitcombe Park, Gloucestershire, 7565. 
White cedar, cupressus thyoides. 
White Knights, a seat near Reading, 7561. 
Whitethorn, mespilus oxj'acantha. 
Whitfield Hall, Northumberland, 7586. 
Wliitley, a seat in Essex, 7542. 
Whitlow-grass, — see Draba. 

Whitmill, Benedict, his works on gardening, naee 
1103. A. D. 1726. ^' ^ ^ 

Whitton Place, Middlesex, 7520. 

Whortleberry, — see Vaccinium. 

Wiborgia, diadelphia decandria and leguminoseje, 
a G. tr. C. B. S. which grows well in loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root under a bell-glass 
in sand. 

Wicklow, county of, as to gardening, 7654. 

Widow-wail, cneorum tricoccum. 

Wigtonshire, gardens of, 7626. 

Wild basil, — see Clinopodiura. 

Wild bugloss, — see Lycopsis. 

Wild cumin, lagoecia curainoides. 

Wild licorice, abrus precatorius. 

Wild plants, fit for culinary purposes, 4283, 

Wilderness, a seat in Kent, 4888. 

Wilderness, — see Labyrinth. 

JVildman, , his writings on gardening, page 

1107. A. D. 1768. 

Willdenovia, dioec. trian. and restiacese, a G. peren. 

C. B. S. which grows in sandy loam and peat, and 

is increased by dividing at the root. 
Willdenow, C. L., his works on gardening, page 1127 

A. D. 1810. . 
Willersby Castle, Derbyshire, 7574. 
W^iiliamstrip, a seat in "Gloucestershire, 7565. 
Willow, — see Salix. 
Wilna, botanic garden of, 284. 
Wilson, William, his writings on gardening, page 

1108. A. D. 1777. 

Wilton House, Wiltshire, 7597. 
Wiltshire, gardens and residences of, 7596. 
Wimbledon House, Surrey, 7528. 
Wind, its influence on plants, and artificial pro- 
duction of in hot-houses, 6181. 
Windsor Castle, Btrkshire, 7562. 
Windt, L. G., his work on gardening, page 1127. 

A. U. i8oa 

Wingerworth, a seat in Derbyshire, 7574. 

Winter aconite, eranthis hyemalis. 

Winter berry, — see Prinos. 

Winter cherry, — see Physalis. 

Winter cress, — see Barbarea. 

Winter green, — see Trientalis. 

Winterdyne, a seat in Worcestershire, 7566. 

Winthorpe Hall, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 

Winyard, a seat in Durham, 7584. 

Witch hazel, haraamelis virginica. 

Witlieringta, tetrandria monogynia and solana- 
ce£e, a S. peren. S. Amer. which grows in loam 

, and peat, and cuttings root in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Witsesia, trian. monog. and iridece, a G. peren. 
C. B. S. a bulb which requires the same treatment 
as ixia. 

Woburn Abbej-, in Bedfordshire, 7549. 
Woburn Farm, Surrey, 7527. 
Woburn perennial kale, 3529. 
Wolfsbane, — see Aconitum. 
Woo-ywen, gardens of, in China, 475. 
Wooburn Farm, Buckinghamshire, 7547. 
Wood, — see Isatis. 

Wood, how to operate with in landscape-gardening, 

7203. 

Woodbine, lonicera periclymenura. 
Wooden walls, 1565. 

Woodhouselee, a seat in Midlothian, 7618. 
Woodlands, a seat in Kent, 7.537. 
Woodlands, a seat in Durham, 7584. 
Woodley Lodge, Berkshire, 7561. 
Woodsage, teucrium scorodonia. 



Woodsia, cryptogam, filices and filicea?, H. peren. 

Brit, and Amer. of easy culture in pots of loam 

and peat. 
Woodruff, — see Asperula. 
Woodsorrel, — see Oxalis. 

Woodwardia, crj ptog. filices and filiceiE, H. peren. 

and a G. peren. N. Amer. and Madeira, of easy 

culture. 
Wooton Court, Kent, 7537. 
Wooton House, Surrey, 7528. 
Woollaton Hall, Nottinghamshire, 7576. 
Woolverton Hall, Suffolk, 7552. 
Worcestershire, gardens and residences of, 7565. 
Workington Hall, Cumberland, 7593. 
Worlidge, John, gent, his work on gardening, page 

1101. A. D. 1668. 
Worm, the common, lumbricus terrestris. Worms 

may either be destroyed by picking them up by 

hand very early in the morning, or late in the 

evening during moist weather, or by watering 

with lime or salt water. 
Worm-grass, — see Spigelia. 
Wormleybury, a seat in Hertfordshire, 7544. 
Wormsley, a"seat in Oxfordshire, 7558. 
Wormwood, — see Artemisia. 
Wrightia, pentan. monog. and apocyneas, S. tr. E. 

Ind. which thrive in loam and peat, and cuttings 

root readily in sand under a hand-glass. 
Wrotham Place, Middlesex, 7521. 
W^roxton, a seat in Oxfordshire, 75.58. 
Wulfenia, dian. monog. and scrophularincte, a H. 

an. Carinthia, of common culture. 
Wynnestay, a seat in Denbighshire, 7605. 
Wycombe Abbey, Buckinghamshire, 7547. 
Wycombe Park, Buckinghamshire, 7547. 
Wyke House, Middlesex, 7520. 



Xanthium, moncec. pentan. and corj-mbifereffi, H. 

an. Eur. and China, of common culture. 
Xanthochymus, polyad. polyan. and guttifereje, a S. 

tr. E. Ind. a fine-looking plant, which thrives in 

light loam, and cuttings root in sand under a 

hand-glass in heat. 
Xanthorrhasa, hexan. monog. and asphodelea?, G. 

peren. N. S. W. which thrive well in loam and 

peat, and are increased by offsets. 
Xeranthemum, syngen. polyg. super, and corym- 

biferese, H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 
Ximenesia, syngen. poly, super, and corymbiferese, 

a G. bien. Mexico, of easy culture, and increased 

by cuttings. 

Xiphidium, triand. monogyn. and hemodoraceae, 
S. tr. peren. W. Ind. which thrive in sandy loam 
and peat, and are increased by divii^ing the 
roots. 

Xylomelum, tetran. monog. and proteacese, a G. tr. 

N. S. W. which may be treated as banksia. 
Xylophylla, pentan. trig, and euphorbiaceae, H. tr. 

Eur. which grow in common soil, and are in- 

crea€ed by layers, or ripened cuttings under a 

hand-glass. 

Xylopia, polj'an. polyg. and anoniacese, S. tr. W. 

Ind. which grow in sandy loam, and cuttings root 

in sand under a hand-glass. 
Xyris, triand. monogyn. and restinceae, a G. peren. 

and H. peren. N. S. W. and Carol, pretty plants, 

which thrive in peat soil, and are readily increased 

by dividing at the root. 
Xysmalobium, pentan. dig. and asclepiadcae, a G. 

tr. C. B. S. which grows in loam and peat, and 

cuttings root in sand under a hand-glass. 
Xystus, or terrace, 41. 



Y. 

Yam, dioscorea sativa. 

Yarrow, achillea millefolium. 

Yellow bird's nest, monotropa hypopithys. 

Yellow rattle, rhinanthus cnsta-galli. 

Yellow root, zanthorhiza apiilolia. 

Yellow wort, chlora perfoliata, 

Yeo Vale, a seat in Devonshire, 7600. 

Yester House, a seal in East Lothian, 7619. 

Yew-tree, — see Taxus. 

Yorkshire, gardens and residences of, 75S1. 

Yucca, Adam's needle, hexan. monog. and liliacea?, 
S. G. and H. tr. As. and S. Amer. which grow in 
rich loam, and are increased by suckers from the 
roots. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



12S3 



z. 

Zacintha, syngen. polyg. requal. and cichoracese, a 
H. an. S. Eur. of common culture. 

Zaluzania, syngen. polyg. super, and corj-mbit'ereie, 
a. F. pereii. Mex. which grows in rich, light soil, 
and cuttings root readily under a hand-gla"ss. 

Zamia, dioec. polyan. and cycadeje, S. and G. tr. 
C. B. S. W. Ind.'and Austral, which grow in light 
sandy soil, and some species may be increased by 
suckers. 

Zamoyst, a seat in Poland, £S-3. 

Zannichellia, pond-weed, monoec. monandria and 
naideiE, a H. an. an aquatic. 

Zanthorhiza, yellow root, pentan. polyg. and ranun- 
culaceffi, a 'H. tr. which grows in' common soil, 
and is increased by suckers. 

Zanthoxylum, toothach-tree, dicecia pentand. and 
terebintaceoe, a S. and G. tr. and a H. tr. The 
tender species grow in sandy loam, and cuttings 
will root in sand under a hand-glass ; the hardy 
sorts in any soil, and cuttings of the roots will 
shoot into plants in bottom heat. 

Zapana, didyn. angios. and verbenacese, a S. and G. 
peren. W.'ind. and Amer. which grow in light, 
rich soil, and cuttuigs root freely under a hand- 
glass. 

Zaritzina, or Tzaritzina, a palace and gardens near 

Moscow, id-. 

Zarskoje-selo, or Tzarskoje-selo, an imperial resid- 
ence near Petersburg, x57. 

Zea, Indian corn, monoec. *rian. and graminese, a 
H. an. Amer. of easy culture, -1335. 

Zedoary, curcuma zerumbet. 

Zeyher' SLXidi. G. Romer, their works on gardening, 
page 1127. A. D. 1815. 



Zieria, tetran. monog. and rutaceae, a G.tr. N.S.W. 

a pretty plant, which grows in sandy loam and 
peat, and young cuttings root in sand under a bell- 
glass. 

Zingiber, ginger, monan. monog. and scitamineje, 
S. peren. which grow in light, rich soil, and are 
increased by dividing at the root. 

Zinnia, syngen. polyg. super, and corj'mbifereje, 
H. an. S. and N. Amer. ot common culture. 

Zizania, moncec. hexan. and gramineee, a H. an. 
N. Amer. an aquatic which only requires to be 
sown in shallow water or on "the margin of a 
pond. 

Ziziphora, dian. monog. and labiates, H. tr. peren. 
and an. Eur. which grow freely in rich, light soil, 
and are increased by seeds or cuttings. 

Zizyphus, pentan. monogynia and rhamnese, S. G. 
and H. tr. As. Af. and Eur. of which the tender 
kinds grow well in loam and peat, and cuttings 
root in sand under a hand-glass ; the H. species 
are increased by seeds or ripened cuttings under 
a hand-glass. 

Zizyphus lotus, the true lotus, and Z. jujuba, the 

jiijube-tree, 6016, 
Zcegea, syngen. polyg. frustr. and cynarocephaleae, 

a'H. an'. Levant, of the usual culture. 
Zorn. ic, Icones plantarum medicinalium. Von Job. 

Zorn. 

Zornia, diadel. decan. and leguminoseae, a S. tr. and 
an. E. Ind. which grow freely in rich, light soil, 
and cuttings root easily under a hand-glass. 

Zoph, K., his work on gardening, page 1126. A. D. 
1798. 

Zygophyllum, bean-caper, decan. monog. and ruta- 
'ceas, G. tr. and a H. peren. C. B. S. which thrive 
in loam and peat, and cuttings root readily tinder 
a hand-glass. 



THE END. 



4 K 



LoNDOK : 



Printed by A. & R. Spottiswoode, 
New-Street- Square. 



f 



^ i^ff!^ f- V-V - S^^^ a: V Treatment Date: September 2012 



« ■mem * '-V-.x-^' « ^kVWA O <i Neutralizing agent Magnesia 0>, 
S ^r^^ *■ - ^^^^ * Treatment Date; September 2012 

. o^^^i ^^"^"V, ^^^Z PreservationTechnologies 



\ 1/13/2009 2 Cp^i^ f^S- 




^^^^ .n^. 




O / 



